CLS PLT/
TTL PLANTS

CLS PLT/
TXT

    I.      This is the class for plants which are patentable under 35 U. S.
    Code, Section 161, which provides for the granting of a patent to whoever
    invents or discovers and asexually reproduces any distinct and new variety
    of plant, including cultivated sports, mutants, hybrids, and newly found
    seedlings other than a tuber propagated plant or a plant found in an
    uncultivated state.

    II.     The scheme of classification is that a patent or publication is
    placed in the first appearing of a series of co-ordinate subclasses which
    the subject matter of the patent or publication fits.  Thus, a patent
    describing a plant which is both a conifer and a shrub is classified as a
    conifer in subclass 50.1 rather than a shrub in subclass 54.1.  A patent
    not fitting the description of any of the first line subclasses is
    classified in miscellaneous subclass 100.

    A subclass which is positioned one space to the left of one or more
    following subclasses is considered to be the miscellaneous subclass for
    that group of subclasses.  Thus, subclass 54.1 from Shrubs or Vines takes
    those shrubs or vines which are not azaleas or rhododendrons, barberries,
    buddleias, etc., while subclass 60 for Camellias takes those camellias
    which are neither pink nor red.

    III.    The color definitions given herein are substantially those found in
    Webster's New International Dictionary, Second Ed., Unabridged, published
    by G.C. Merriam Co., Springfield, Mass.  Each color definition refers to
    one or more plant patents so that the blossoms of the plant patents
    themselves comprise a kind of color chart to illustrate the words of the
    definitions.

    The color designations apply to the color of the blossom when it is newly
    open and in an unfaded condition, i.e., not in bud or full-blown.  The
    color actually shown in the drawing is the color used to determine
    placement of patents, except in those cases where the description in the
    specification indicates the color of the drawing is not accurate, in which
    case the patent is placed in accordance with the total disclosure furnished
    in the patent.  In the various examples of plant patents given in the
    definitions the color of the drawing alone is the color referred to.

    The effects of light and shadow should be discounted when determining the
    true color of a blossom for purposes of classification.  Also, the color at
    the base of the petal should be disregarded except where a two-tone or
    bicolor effect is quite obvious.

    All the color designations refer to solid colors unless clearly indicated
    otherwise.  Thus, considering the group of climbing roses, a striped or
    bicolor rose would not fit any of the indented subclasses but would by
    placed in the miscellaneous subclass for climbing roses, subclass 2.  In
    determining whether or not a blosson has a solid color the appearance of
    the flower as a whole is the proper criterion.  Minor flecks and gradations
    of color should be disregarded.  However, both faces of all petals must be
    substantially the same color.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    800,    Multicellular Living Organisms and Unmodified Parts Thereof,
    appropriate subclasses for living multicellular organism, e.g., plants,
    etc., and separated or severed parts thereof that have not undergone any
    modification or treatment subsequent to their separation, e.g., untreated
    seeds, etc.


CLS PLT/1
TXT ROSES:
    Rose plants under the class definition.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is the home for "shrub" roses such as species
    hybirds, hybird perpetuals, etc., characterized by limited flowering,
    coarseness of the blooms and/or plant and superior cold-hardiness.


CLS PLT/2
TXT Climbers:
    Rose plants under subclass 1 and characterized by vigorous, long, erect or
    lax canes suitable for training on trellises or fences or suitable as
    ground covers.

    (1)     Note.  Pillar and Rambler roses are included under this definition.


CLS PLT/3
TXT White or yellow:
    Climbing roses under subclass 2 characterized by blossoms which are white
    (a color comparable to fresh snow; a neutral or achromatic color of highest
    brilliance; the lightest gray), as typified by plant patents, Nos. 267, 400
    and 1273 or yellow (a color which resembles the hue of ripe lemons; the
    color of sulphur), as typified by plant patents, Nos. 704, 1263 and 1557.


CLS PLT/4
TXT Orange or salmon:
    Climbing roses under subclass 2 characterized by blossoms which are orange
    (a color varying from reddish red-yellow to red yellow, in saturation from
    high to very high and in brilliance from medium to high), as typified by
    plant patents, Nos. 106, 458 and 2072 or salmon (a color which is reddish
    red-yellow, of medium saturation and high brilliance), as typified by plant
    patent, No. 1606.


CLS PLT/5
TXT Pink:
    Climbing roses under subclass 2 characterized by blossoms which are pink (a
    color varying from reddish blue-red to yellowish-red, from low to medium
    saturation and from high to very high brilliance), as typified by plant
    patents, Nos. 287, 385 and 893.


CLS PLT/6
TXT Red:
    Climbing roses under subclass 2 characterized by blossoms which are red (a
    color ranging from that of blood to that of the ruby), as typified by plant
    patents, Nos. 856, 1366 and 1864.


CLS PLT/7.1
TXT Miniatures:
    Rose plants under subclass 1 which range in height from a few inches to
    approximately 1 foot and which have blossoms less than 1 inch in diameter.


CLS PLT/8.1
TXT White:
    Miniature roses under subclass 7.1 characterized by blossoms which are
    white (a color comparable to fresh snow; a neutral or achromatic color of
    highest brilliance; the lightest gray), as typified by plant patents, Nos.
    1407, 1412, and 1908.


CLS PLT/8.2
TXT Yellow:
    Miniature roses under subclass 7.1 characterized by blossoms which are
    yellow (a color which resembles the hue of ripe lemons; the color of
    sulphur), as typified by plant patents, Nos. 407, 1631, and 2177.


CLS PLT/9
TXT Pink:
    Miniature roses under subclass 7.1 characterized by blossoms which are pink
    (a color varying from reddish blue-red to yellowish-red, from low to medium
    saturation and from high to very high brilliance), as typified by plant
    patents, Nos. 1293, 1451 and 1984.


CLS PLT/10
TXT Red:
    Miniature roses under subclass 7.1 characterized by blossoms which are red
    (a color ranging from that of blood to that of the ruby), as typified by
    plant patents, Nos. 1032, 1663 and 2080.


CLS PLT/10.1
TXT Orange or salmon:
    Miniature roses under subclass 7.1 characterized by blossoms which are
    orange (a color varying from reddish red-yellow to red-yellow, in
    saturation from high to very high and in brilliance from medium to high),
    as typified by plant patents, Nos. 4091, 5392, and 5957, or salmon (a color
    which is reddish red-yellow, of medium saturation and high brilliance), as
    typified by plant patents Nos. 4291, 4365, and 5741.


CLS PLT/11
TXT Hybrid teas or grandifloras:
    Rose plants under subclass 1 characterized as free-flowering with large,
    well-shaped blooms borne singly or in clusters on long stems.


CLS PLT/12
TXT Red bicolor:
    Hybrid tea or grandiflora roses under subclass 11 characterized by blooms
    in which either the reverse or face sides of the petals are red (a color
    ranging from that of blood to that of the ruby), as typified by plant
    patents, Nos.  378, 959 and 1489 and the other sides of the petals are a
    color other than red.


CLS PLT/13
TXT Striped colors:
    Hybrid tea or grandiflora roses under subclass 11 characterized by blooms
    exhibiting a splashing, striping, speckling or dotting of two or more
    distinct colors, as typified by plant patents, Nos.  167, 197 and 1582.


CLS PLT/14
TXT White:
    Hybrid tea or grandiflora roses under subclass 11 characterized by blooms
    which are white (a color comparable to fresh snow; a neutal or achromatic
    color of highest brilliance; the lightest gray), as typified by plant
    patents, Nos.  1530, 1762 and 1770.


CLS PLT/15
TXT Yellow:
    Hybrid tea or grandiflora roses under subclass 11 characterized by blooms
    which are yellow (a color which resembles the hue of ripe lemons; the color
    of sulphur), as typified by plant patents, Nos.  753, 1643 and 2089.


CLS PLT/16
TXT Orange:
    Hybrid tea or grandiflora roses under subclass 11 characterized by blooms
    which are orange (a color varying from reddish red-yellow to red-yellow, in
    saturation from high to very high and in brilliance from medium to high),
    as typified by plant patents, Nos.  177, 428 and 437.


CLS PLT/17
TXT Salmon:
    Hybrid tea or grandiflora roses under subclass 11 characterized by blooms
    which are salmon (a color which is reddish red-yellow, of medium saturation
    and high brilliance), as typified by plant patents, Nos.  464, 1176 and
    1648.


CLS PLT/18
TXT Light to medium pink:
    Hybrid tea or grandiflora roses under subclass 11 characterized by blooms
    which range from a light to a medium shade of pink (a color varying from
    reddish blue-red to yellowish-red, from low to medium saturation and from
    high to very high brilliance), as typified by plant patents, Nos. 781, 903
    or 1199.


CLS PLT/19
TXT Dark pink:
    Hybrid tea or grandiflora roses under subclass 11 characterized by blooms
    which are a dark shade of pink (a color varying from reddish blue-red to
    yellowish-red, from low to medium saturation and from high to very high
    brilliance), as typified by plant patents, Nos.  158, 305 and 411.


CLS PLT/20
TXT Light to medium red:
    Hybrid tea or grandiflora roses under subclass 11 characterized by blooms
    which range from a light to medium shade of red (a color ranging from that
    of blood to that of the ruby), as typified by plant patents, Nos.  617, 717
    and 857.


CLS PLT/21
TXT Dark red:
    Hybrid tea or grandiflora roses under subclass 11 characterized by blooms
    which are a dark shade of red (a color ranging from that of blood to that
    of the ruby) as typified by plant patents, Nos.  256, 363 and 778.


CLS PLT/22
TXT Floribundas or polyanthas:
    Rose plants under subclass 1 characterized as very free-flowering with
    blooms borne in clusters.

    (1)     Note.  Floribundas are generally of lesser stature than hybrid teas
    or grandifloras, and polyanthas are generally smaller than floribundas, in
    bloom size as well as stature.


CLS PLT/23
TXT White:
    Floribundas or polyanthas under subclass 22 characterized by blooms which
    are white (a color comparable to fresh snow; a neutral or achromatic color
    of highest brilliance ; the lightest gray), as typified by plant patents,
    Nos.  1025, 1222 and 1377.


CLS PLT/24
TXT Yellow:
    Floribundas or polyanthas under subclass 22 characterized by blooms which
    are yellow (a color which resembles the hue of ripe lemons; the color of
    sulphur), as typified by plant patents, Nos.  1683, 1776 and 2226.


CLS PLT/25
TXT Salmon:
    Floribundas or polyanthas under subclass 22 characterized by blooms which
    are salmon (a color which is reddish red-yellow, of medium saturation and
    high brilliance), as typified by plant patents, Nos.  789, 1363 and 1962.


CLS PLT/26
TXT Light to medium pink:
    Floribundas or polyanthas under subclass 22 characterized by blooms which
    range from a light to a medium shade of pink (a color varying from reddish
    blue-red to yellowish-red, from low to medium saturation and from high to
    very high brilliance), as typified by plant patents, Nos.  268, 1065 and
    1797.


CLS PLT/27
TXT Dark pink:
    Floribundas or polyanthas under subclass 22 characterized by blooms which
    are a dark shade of pink (a color varying from reddish blue-red to
    yellowish-red, from low to medium saturation and from high to very high
    brilliance), as typified by plant patents, Nos.  902, 913 and 1061.


CLS PLT/28
TXT Light to medium red:
    Floribundas or polyanthas under subclass 22 characterized by blooms which
    range from a light to a medium shade of red (a color ranging from that of
    blood to that of the ruby), as typified by plant patents, Nos. 739, 1042
    and 1395.


CLS PLT/29
TXT Dark red:
    Floribundas or polyanthas under subclass 22 characterized by blooms which
    are a dark shade of red (a color ranging from that of blood to that of the
    ruby), as typified by plant patents, Nos.  362, 1189 and 2110.


CLS PLT/30.1
TXT NUTS (INCLUDING ORNAMENTAL VARIETIES):
    Plants under the class definition which bear edible hard-shelled dry fruit
    having a more or less distinct hull, including "ornamental" varieties which
    may bear no fruit at all and are characterized by attractive foliage or
    blossoms.


CLS PLT/31
TXT Pecans:
    Nut plants under subclass 30.1 which are members of the genus Carya species
    illinoinensis.


CLS PLT/32
TXT Walnuts:
    Nut plants under subclass 30.1 which are members of the genus Juglans.


CLS PLT/32.2
TXT Almonds:
    Nut plants under subclass 30.1 which are members of the genus Prunus, the
    species amygdalus.


CLS PLT/33.1
TXT FRUITS (EDIBLE AND FLESHY, BUT ALSO INCLUDING ORNAMENTAL VARIETIES):Plants
    under the class definition which bear edible and fleshy fruits, including
    "ornamental" varieties of fruiting species which may bear no fruit at all
    and are characterized by attractive foliage or blossoms.

    (1)     Note.  Flowering quinces are classified under Shrubs or Vines in
    subclass 64.

    (2)     Note.  Interspecific hybrids are classified with the female (seed)
    parent.

    (3)     Note.  Fig plants developed solely for fruit production are
    classified here.  Figs developed as ornamentals belong in subclass 88.11,
    below.


CLS PLT/34.1
TXT Apples:
    Fruit trees under subclass 33.1 which are member of Malus, i.e., pumila
    (Mill) or Malus sylvestris Hort; Pyrus malus L.


CLS PLT/35
TXT Sports of "red delicious":
    Plants under subclass 34.1 which are sports of, derived from, or induced
    from trees which belong to the variety or market group "Red Delicious".


CLS PLT/35.1
TXT Green or yellow fruited varieties:
    Plants under subclass 34.1 which bear fruit of yellow or green predominant
    coloration rather than of predominant red coloration.


CLS PLT/35.2
TXT Crabapples:
    Malus plants under subclass 34.1 which are particularly noted for their
    ornamental shape, ultimate size, ornamental flowering habit, or any
    combination of such characteristics, and which would be marketed as or
    labelled, in the market place, with the generic identifier "crabapple".


CLS PLT/36
TXT Pears:
    Plants under subclass 33.1 which are members of the genus Pyrus.


CLS PLT/37
TXT Cherries:
    Plants under subclass 33.1 which are members of the genus Prunus; any of a
    number of species, and which would be marketed as a "cherry" under further
    characterizations such as "Bird", "Pin", "Wild", "Flowering", "Duke",
    "Mahaleb", "Saint Luci", "Manchu", "Nanking", "Sour", "Pie", "Sweet",
    "Mazzard", "Western Plum", etc.


CLS PLT/38.1
TXT Plums:
    Trees under subclass 33.1 which  are members of the genus Prunus, any of a
    number of species, and which would be marketed as fresh or processed
    "Plums"; i.e., "Beach", "Big tree", "Bullace", "Damson", "Canada",
    "Chicksaw", "Mountain Cherry", "Common", "Hortulan", "Hybrid", "Japanese",
    "Myrobalan" or "Cherry plum", "Oklahoma", "Pacific", "Simon", "Apricot",
    and "Wild Goose".


CLS PLT/38.2
TXT Prunes:
    Plants under subclass 38.1 which are members of the genus Prunus species
    domestica and which are members of a group which can be successfully dried
    without removal of the pit, for marketing under the generic name "Prunes".


CLS PLT/39
TXT Apricots:
    Plants under the subclass 33.1 which are members of the genus Prunus
    species sibirica, or armeniaca, or mume, or dasycarpa, or which are hybrids
    having one of the subject species as seed parent.


CLS PLT/40.1
TXT Nectarines:
    Plants under subclass 33.1 which are members of the genus Prunus, species
    persica which are characterized by having a smooth (absent fuzz or
    pubescence) skin covering the flesh of the fruit.


CLS PLT/41.1
TXT Yellow-fleshed clingstone:
    Plants under subclass 40.1 which bear fruit having flesh of predominantly
    yellow coloration, and wherein the fruit is ripe, the flesh is tenaceously
    adhered to the stone over substantially the entire surface of the stone.
    See plant patents, Nos. 759, 1324, and 1545.

    (1)     Note.  Fruits whose flesh is predominantly yellow but may contain
    flecks of color other than yellow are included under this definition.

    (2)     Note.  Fruit which is described as "semi-clingstone is classified
    as "clingstone".


CLS PLT/41.2
TXT Dwarf:
    Plants under subclasses 41.1 wherein the tree is characterized as forming
    internodes of not more than one-quarter inch in length, and wherein the
    tree does not exceed a height of seven feet in its lifetime.


CLS PLT/41.3
TXT Yellow-fleshed freestone:
    Plants under subclass 40.1 wherein the flesh of fruit is of predominant
    yellow coloration, and wherein, upon ripening, the flesh readily separates
    from the stone leaving the stone substantially free of flesh.

    (1)     Note.  Yellow fruit flesh having flecks other than yellow are
    included in this definition.


CLS PLT/41.4
TXT Dwarf:
    Plants under subclass 41.3 wherein the tree is characterized as forming
    internodes which do no exceed one-quarter inch in length, and wherein the
    height of the tree will not exceed seven feet in its life.


CLS PLT/42.1
TXT Peaches:
    Plants under subclass 33.1 which are members of genus Prunus species
    persica, which are characterized by production of fruit which has skin
    covered by a layer of fuzz or hairs or pubescence.


CLS PLT/43.1
TXT Yellow-fleshed clingstone:
    Plants under subclass 42.1 which bear fruit having flesh of predominantly
    yellow coloration, and wherein upon ripening, the flesh is tenaciously
    adhered to the stone.

    (1)     Note.  Yellow flesh fruit but with flecks other than yellow are
    included here.

    (2)     Note.  Fruit which is described as "semi-clingstone" is classified
    as "clingstone".


CLS PLT/43.2
TXT Yellow-fleshed freestone:
    Plants under subclass 42.1 which bear fruit having flesh of predominantly
    yellow coloration, and wherein upon ripening, the flesh easily separates
    from the stone leaving the stone substantially free of flesh.

    (1)     Note.  Fruit having predominantly yellow flesh but with flecks
    other than yellow are included here.


CLS PLT/43.3
TXT Dwarf:
    Plants under subclass 43.2 wherein the tree is characterized as forming
    internodes of not more than one-quarter inches, and wherein the height of
    the tree will not exceed seven feet.


CLS PLT/44
TXT Avocados:
    Plants under subclass 33.1 which are members of the genus Persea species
    americana.


CLS PLT/45
TXT Citrus:
    Plants under subclass 33.1 which are members of the genus Citrus having
    spritely tasting, segmented fruit covered by a rind of acidic, oily
    character.


CLS PLT/46.1
TXT Brambles:
    Plants under subclass 33.1 which are members of the genus Rubus normally
    characterized as "berry bushes" or "berry vines".


CLS PLT/46.2
TXT Raspberries:
    Plants under subclass 46.1 which bear fruit wherein the primary stem of the
    berry may be readily removed without disassociating the druplets as a bunch.

    (1)     Note.  Members of this subclass may be commonly known as "Black",
    "Blackcap", "European red", "American" and "Purple cane raspberries".

    (2)     Note.  Members of this subclass may belong or be hybrids of species
    including idaeus, strigosus, noglectus, and occidentalis.


CLS PLT/47.1
TXT Grapes:
    Plants under subclass 33.1 which are members of the genus Vitus.


CLS PLT/47.2
TXT Muscadine:
    Plants under subclass 47.1 which belong to the species rotundifolia, and
    are characterized notably by longevity, disease resistance, high vigor,
    small bunches of berries, and berries having a strong, musky aroma, and
    large seeds.


CLS PLT/47.3
TXT Green or Yellow:
    Plants under subclass 47.1 which bear fruit having green or yellow
    coloration of flesh, juice, and skin.


CLS PLT/48
TXT Strawberries:
    Plants under subclass 33.1 which are members of the genus Fragaria.


CLS PLT/49
TXT Everbearing:
    Plants under subclass 48 which have been developed to have an extended,
    lengthy harvest season; plants which are remontant in blooming and fruit
    setting habit, which fail to ripen all fruit produced in one abbreviated
    season.


CLS PLT/49.1
TXT Pomegranates:
    Plants under subclass 33.1 which are subtropical ornamental or fruiting
    shrubs which belong to the genus Punica species or granatum L., and
    characterized by fruit which are large, globose berries, filled with
    sections of angular, hard seeds; the seeds covered by juicy, red, pink or
    yellow, astringent acid pulp.


CLS PLT/50.1
TXT CONIFERS:
    Plants under the class definition which are woody, with needle-like or
    scalelike leaves and aromatic resin ducts, usually evergreen and native to
    the temperature regions.


CLS PLT/50.2
TXT Junipers:
    Plants under subclass 50.1 which are members of the genus Juniperus.


CLS PLT/50.3
TXT Yews:
    Plants under subclass 50.1 which are members of the genus Taxus.


CLS PLT/51.1
TXT BROADLEAF TREES:
    Plants under the class definition which are woody, broad-leaved, generally
    unbranched near the base, having one distinct or rarely several distinct
    trunks which attain a height greater than about 10 feet.

    (1)     Note.  Beech (Fagus) trees are properly classified within this
    subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Holly plants (Ilex) are provided for in subclass 65 of this
    class.


CLS PLT/52
TXT Honey locusts:
    Plants under subclass 51.1 which belong to the genus Gleditsia L.


CLS PLT/53
TXT Poplars:
    Plants under subclass 51.1 which belong to the genus Populus L.


CLS PLT/53.1
TXT Ashes:
    Plants under subclass 51.1 which belong to the genus Fraxinus.


CLS PLT/53.2
TXT Dogwoods:
    Plants under subclass 51.1 which belong to the family Cornaceae.


CLS PLT/53.3
TXT Elms:
    Plants under subclass 51.1 which belong to the family Ulmaceae.

    (1)     Note.  Most plants classified in this subclass will belong to the
    genus Ulmus L.


CLS PLT/53.4
TXT Lindens:
    Plants under subclass 51.1 which belong to the family Tiliaceae; normally
    the genus Tilia L.

    (1)     Note.  Trees of this subclass are commonly called "Basswood" trees.


CLS PLT/53.5
TXT Magnolias:
    Plants under subclass 51.1 which belong to the family Magnoliaceae; usually
    the genus Magnolia L.


CLS PLT/53.6
TXT Maples:
    Plants under subclass 51.1 which belong to the family Aceraceae; genus Acer.

    (1)     Note.  Boxelder would be classified in this subclass.


CLS PLT/53.7
TXT Oaks:
    Plants under subclass 51.1 which belong to the Quercus genus.

    (1)     Note.  The genus Quercus falls within the Beech (Fagaceae) family.
    Beech (Fagus L) trees are classified under subclass 51.1 above.


CLS PLT/54.1
TXT SHRUBS OR VINES:
    Plants under the class definition which are woody, broad-leaved, branched
    at or near the base, of shrubby or vining habit, and which may attain a
    height of about 15 feet.


CLS PLT/55
TXT Azaleas or rhododendrons:
    Plants under subclass 54.1 which belong to the genus Rhododendron L.


CLS PLT/56
TXT Light to medium pink:
    Azaleas or rhododendrons under subclass 55 characterized  by blooms which
    range from a light to a medium shade of pink (a color varying from reddish
    blue-red to yellowish-red, from low to medium saturation and from high to
    very high brilliance), as typified by plant patents, Nos.  681, 1706 and
    2122.


CLS PLT/57
TXT Dark pink to red:
    Azaleas or rhododendrons under subclass 55 characterized by blooms which
    range in color from a dark shade of pink (a color varying from reddish
    blue-red to yellowish-red, from low to medium saturation and from high to
    very high brilliance), as typified by plant patents, Nos.  1394, 1484 and
    1983, to red (a color ranging from that of blood to that of the ruby), as
    typified by plant patents, Nos. 1283, 1717 and 2021.


CLS PLT/58
TXT Barberries:
    Plants under subclass 54.1 which belong to the genus Berberis.


CLS PLT/59
TXT Buddleias:
    Plants under subclass 54.1 which belong to the genus Buddleia.

    (1)     Note.  Plants of this subclass may also be identified by the common
    names "Butterfly bush" and "Summer Lilac".


CLS PLT/60
TXT Camellias:
    Plants under subclass 54.1 which belong to the genus Camellia.


CLS PLT/61
TXT Light to medium pink:
    Camellias under subclass 60 characterzied by blooms which range from a
    light to a medium shade of pink (a color varying from reddish blue-red to
    yellowish-red, from low to medium saturation and from high to very high
    brilliance), as typified by plant patents, Nos. 907, 1800 and 1988.


CLS PLT/62
TXT Dark pink to red:
    Camellias under subclass 60 characterized by blooms which range in color
    from a dark shade of pink (a color varying from reddish blue-red to
    yellowish-red, from low to medium saturation and from high to very high
    brilliance), as typified by plant patents, Nos. 1074, 1107 and 1215, to red
    (a color ranging from that of blood to that of the ruby), as typified by
    plant  patents, Nos. 589, 927 and 1583.


CLS PLT/63
TXT Euonymus:
    Plants under subclass 54.1 which belong to the genus Euonymus.


CLS PLT/64
TXT Flowering quinces:
    Plants under subclass 54.1 which belong to the genus Cydoria.

    (1)     Note.  Species may variously be presented as oblonga Mill and
    vulgaris Pers., or, plants may alternatively be defined as members of Pyrus
    cydonia L.


CLS PLT/65
TXT Hollies:
    Plants under subclass 54.1 which belong to the genus Ibex.


CLS PLT/66
TXT Lilacs:
    Plants under subclass 54.1 which belong to the genus Syringa.

    (1)     Note.  Tree lilacs are properly classified in this subclass.


CLS PLT/67
TXT English ivies (i.e., Hedera helix varieties):
    Plants under subclass 54.1 which belong to the genus Hedera species helix.


CLS PLT/67.1
TXT Hydrangeas:
    Plants under subclass 54.1 which belong to the genus Hydrangea.


CLS PLT/67.2
TXT Veronicas:
    Plants under subclass 54.1 which belong to the genus Veronica.

    (1)     Note.  Plants within this definition are commercially recognized as
    "Hebe", and Hebe buxifolia.


CLS PLT/67.3
TXT Crape myrtles:
    Plants under subclass 54.1 which belong to the genus Lagerstroemia.


CLS PLT/67.4
TXT Pyracanthas:
    Plants under subclass 54.1 which belong to the genus Pyracantha.

    (1)     Note.  Plants of this subclass will commonly be referred to as
    "firethorn".


CLS PLT/67.5
TXT Raphiolepis:
    Plants under subclass 54.1 which belong to the genus Raphiolepis.


CLS PLT/67.6
TXT Gardenias:
    Plants under subclass 54.1 which belong to the genus Gardenia.


CLS PLT/67.7
TXT Bougainvilleas:
    Plants under subclass 54.1 which belong to the genus Bougainvillea.


CLS PLT/67.8
TXT Hibiscus:
    Plants under subclass 54.1 which belong to the genus Hibiscus.


CLS PLT/68.1
TXT HERBACEOUS FLOWERING PLANTS:
    Plants under the class definition which are herbaceous and principally
    characterized by and grown for their attractive blossoms.

    (1)     Note.  Annuals, biennials, perennials and flowering "house plants"
    are included under this definition if not provided for specifically
    elsewhere.


CLS PLT/69.1
TXT African violets:
    Plants under subclass 68.1 which belong to the genus Saintpaulia species
    ionantha.


CLS PLT/69.2
TXT Blue or purple:
    African violets under subclass 69.1 characterized by blooms which are blue
    or purple as typified by plant patents, Nos. 5885 and 4577.


CLS PLT/70.1
TXT Carnations or pinks:
    Plants under subclass 68.1 which are members of the genus Dianthus.


CLS PLT/70.2
TXT Spray type:
    Plants under subclass 70.1 which by their genetic make-up express lateral
    flowerbeds with a terminal (primary) flower bud which render a spray of
    flowers on a single stem.


CLS PLT/70.3
TXT White:
    Carnations or pinks under subclass 70.1 characterized by blooms which are
    white, as typified by plant patents, Nos. 4099, 6571, and 6600.


CLS PLT/70.4
TXT Yellow:
    Carnations or pinks under subclass 70.1 characterized by blooms which are
    yellow, as typified by plant patents, Nos. 3663, 5290, and 6273.


CLS PLT/70.5
TXT Light to medium pink:
    Spray type carnations or pinks under subclass 70.2 characterized by blooms
    which range from a light to a medium shade of pink (a color varying from
    reddish blue-red to yellowish-red, from low to medium saturation and from
    high to very high brilliance), as typified by plant patents, Nos. 747,
    5511, and 6663.


CLS PLT/70.6
TXT Dark pink:
    Spray type carnations or pinks under subclass 70.2 characterized by blooms
    which are a dark shade of pink (a color varying from reddish blue-red to
    yellowish-red, from low to medium saturation and from high to very high
    brilliance), as typified by plant patents, Nos. 3391, 5574, and 5793.


CLS PLT/70.7
TXT Red:
    Spray type carnations or pinks under subclass 70.2 characterized by blooms
    which are red (a color ranging from that of blood to that of the ruby), as
    typified by plant patents, Nos. 5517, 6554, and 6626.


CLS PLT/71.1
TXT Light to medium pink:
    Carnations or pinks under subclass 70.1 characterized by blooms which range
    from a light to a medium shade of pink (a color varying from reddish
    blue-red to yellowish-red, from low to medium saturation and from high to
    very high brilliance), as typified by plant patents, Nos. 499, 750, and 767.


CLS PLT/72.1
TXT Dark pink:
    Carnations or pinks under subclass 70.1 characterized by blooms which are a
    dark shade of pink (a color varying from reddish blue-red to yellowish-red,
    from low to medium saturation and from high to very high brilliance), as
    typified by plant patents, Nos. 133, 319, and 2034.


CLS PLT/73.1
TXT Red:
    Carnations or pinks under subclass 70.1 characterized by blooms which are
    red (a color ranging from that of blood to that of the ruby), as typified
    by plant patents, Nos. 148, 372, and 533.


CLS PLT/73.2
TXT White:
    Carnations or pinks under subclass 70.1 characterized by blooms which are
    white, as typified by plant patents, Nos. 3437, 6417, and 6442.


CLS PLT/73.3
TXT Yellow:
    Carnations or pinks under subclass 70.1 characterized by blooms which are
    yellow, as typified by plant patents, Nos. 3341, 5526, and 6447.


CLS PLT/74.1
TXT Chrysanthemums:
    Chrysanthemum plants under subclass 68.

    (1)     Note.    This subclass is the home for chrysanthemums having five
    or fewer rows of ray florets such as the singles and anemones, and also the
    semidoubles in which the ray florets are arranged in more than five rows
    but the discs are clearly evident as daisy-like eyes.

    (2)     Note.  Chrysanthemums may be identified in this market as mums,
    chrysanths or chrysanthemum and may be botamically identified as
    Chrysanthemum morifolium or Dentranthema grandiflora.


CLS PLT/76
TXT Decorative (i.e., double-flowered):
    Chrysanthemum plants under subclass 74 characterized as having more than
    five rows or ray florets and an indistinct eye of disc florets.

    (1)     Note.  The incurves, decoratives, pompons, spiders, threads and
    quills are included under this definition.


CLS PLT/77
TXT White:
    Chrysanthemums under subclass 76 characterized by blooms which are white (a
    color comparable to fresh snow; a neutral or achromatic color of highest
    brilliance;  the lighest gray), as typified by plant patents, Nos. 1171,
    2005 and 2025.


CLS PLT/78
TXT Yellow:
    Chrysanthemums under subclass 76 characterized by blooms which are yellow
    (a color which resembles the hue of ripe lemons; the color of sulphur), as
    typified by plant patents, Nos.  1348, 1547 and 1676.


CLS PLT/79
TXT Orange:
    Chrysanthemums under subclass 76 characterized by blooms which are orange
    (a color varying from reddish red-yellow to red-yellow, in saturation from
    high to very high and in brilliance from medium to high), as typified by
    plant patents, Nos.  1697, 1956 and 2029.


CLS PLT/80
TXT Light to medium pink:
    Chrysanthemums under subclass 76 characterized by blooms which range from a
    light to a medium shade of pink (a color varying from reddish blue-red to
    yellowish-red, from low to very high brilliance), as typified by plant
    patents, Nos. 1020, 1168 and 1306.


CLS PLT/81
TXT Dark pink:
    Chrysanthemums under subclass 76 characterized by blooms which are a dark
    shade of pink (a color varying from reddish blue-red to yellowish-red, from
    low to medium saturation and from high to very high brilliance), as
    typified by plant patents, Nos. 1132, 1310 and 1824.


CLS PLT/82
TXT Red:
    Chrysanthemums under subclass 76 characterized by blooms which are red (a
    color ranging from that of blood to that of ruby), as typified by plant
    patents, Nos.  1165, 1877 and 1889.


CLS PLT/82.1
TXT White or cream:
    Chrysanthemums under subclass 74.1 characterized by blooms which are white
    or cream as typified by plant patents, Nos. 5475 and 3499.


CLS PLT/82.2
TXT Yellow or gold:
    Chrysanthemums under subclass 74.1 characterized by blooms which are yellow
    or gold as typified by plant patents, Nos. 4529 and 3189.


CLS PLT/82.3
TXT Orange or bronze:
    Chrysanthemums under subclass 74.1 characterized by blooms which are orange
    or bronze as typified by plant patents, Nos. 2019 and 3445.


CLS PLT/82.4
TXT Pink:
    Chrysanthemums under subclass 74.1 characterized by blooms which are pink
    as typified by plant patents, Nos. 5815 and 1957.


CLS PLT/82.5
TXT Red:
    Chrysanthemums under subclass 74.1 characterized by blooms which are red as
    typified by plant patents, Nos. 3446 and 5414.


CLS PLT/83
TXT Freesias:
    Plants under subclass 68.1 which belong to the genus Freesia.


CLS PLT/84
TXT Fuchsias:
    Plants under subclass 68.1 characterized as chiefly tropical shrubs of the
    genus Fuchsia having drooping purplish, white, or reddish flowers.


CLS PLT/85
TXT Gladioli:
    Plants under subclass 68.1 which belong to the genus Gladiolus and which
    have sword-shaped leaves of parallel venation, and a long showy flower
    spike which progressively opens flowers from the basal portion.


CLS PLT/86.1
TXT Poinsettias:
    Plants under subclass 68.1 belonging to the genus Euphorbia species
    pulcherrima having large showy bracts under small flowers.


CLS PLT/86.2
TXT White:
    Poinsettias under subclass 86.1 characterized by blooms which are white as
    typified by plant patents, Nos. 1802 and 2731.


CLS PLT/86.3
TXT Pink:
    Poinsettias under subclass 86.1 characterized by blooms which are pink as
    typified by plant patents, Nos. 2501 and 3735.


CLS PLT/86.4
TXT Red:
    Poinsettias under subclass 86.1 characterized by blooms which are red as
    typified by plant patents, Nos. 4310 and 6104.


CLS PLT/87
TXT Verbenas:
    Plants under the subclass 68.1 which belong to the genus Verbena, which are
    characterized by their low habit, palmately divided or lobed, hairy leaves,
    and delicate, colorful blossom clusters and drought tolerance.


CLS PLT/87.1
TXT Alstroemerias:
    Plants under subclass 68.1 which are members of the genus Alstromeria
    (Liliaceae) and any of about fifty species, and characterized as being
    forced from tuberous roots, forming a conspicious tender crown, with
    flowering stems to two feet tall and more, and producing nine to twelve
    flowers of funnel shape which are composed of six segments formed in two
    circles with the inner circle being distinct.  Flowers may be spotted and
    multi-colored.

    (1)     Note.  The plants within this subclass may also be identified as
    "Inca lily" or "Peruvian lily".


CLS PLT/87.11
TXT Violas:
    Plants under subclass 68.1 which belong to the genus Viola, which bear
    flowers which resemble those of violets, having five petals, the lower
    three normally or occasionally being distinctly rayed, and mature flowers
    normally flat when fully expanded; flowers are rich and wide in color
    variation, but flowers may be monochromatic.

    (1)     Note.  Both pansy and viola plants are encompassed by this subclass.


CLS PLT/87.12
TXT Geraniums:
    Plants under subclass 68.1 which are members of the genus Pelarganium, (or
    the genus Geranium (Lat.)) which have divided to rounded leaves which are
    frequently colorfully rayed, normally characteristically scented, and which
    bear large clusters of flowers on short flower stems carried by a primary
    stem to reside atop the foliage; numerous, showy flowers of normally the
    same color and shade are open at once to give the appearance of a ball;
    flower colors are normally in shades of red, pink, and may be white.


CLS PLT/87.13
TXT Streptocarpuses:
    Plants under subclass 68.1 which are members of the genus Streptocarpus,
    characterized in having low growing, deep green, generally flat but rugose
    leaves of normally accuminate shape, and colorful, deep throated,
    trumpet-formed normally clustered, five (fused) petals, on short pedicles
    carried by long, pubescent stems; flower colors are in white, shades of
    blue, violet, purple, pink, and red.


CLS PLT/87.14
TXT Gazanias:
    Plants under the subclass 68.1 which belong to the genus Gazania, and which
    are characterized by being semi-tender, low growing or spreading, flowering
    plants which tend to cover the soil when undisturbed; are sun-loving and
    express colorful flowers which normally contain distinctive marks on basal
    portions of ray florets; flowers are normally single to semi-double, but
    may be fully double, foliage is usually glabrous but may be pubescent; a
    composite.


CLS PLT/87.15
TXT Kalanchoes:
    Plants under subclass 68.1 which belong to the genus Kalanchoe and which
    are characterized as being daylength responsive, having thick, usually
    rounded, succulent leaves and large clusters of showy, colorful florets
    which open nearly uniformly giving the effect of tight masses of color held
    closely above foliage; flower color is in shades of reds, yellows, golds,
    pinks, violets, and might be hot in aspect.

    (1)     Note.  Some long stemmed varieties in commerce are used to produce
    cut flowers.


CLS PLT/87.16
TXT Aquatic plants:
    Plants under subclass 68.1 are herbaceous plants which grow or live in
    water; a classic example being the water lily, a member of the genus
    Nymphaea.


CLS PLT/87.17
TXT Begonias:
    Plants under subclass 68.1 which are one of a number of primarily tropical
    plants belonging to the genus Begonia, which may have brightly colored
    and/or veined, irregular leaves and waxy appearing single to fully double
    inconspicuous or attractive flowers of a variety of soft to vibrant colors.

    (1)     Note.  Begonias of the commercial houseplant as well as types
    having conspicuous foliage and inconspicuous flowering are included within
    this subclass.


CLS PLT/87.18
TXT Rieger:
    Plants under subclass 87.17 which are known and marketed generally as
    "tuberous" rather than "fibrous" begonias, usually botanically belonging to
    species, elatior, scotrana, tuberhybrida, hiemals (Fotsch) and hybrids
    involving such species; usually having flowers of outstanding size, and/or
    number, and/or doubleness and/or color, or combinations of two or more.


CLS PLT/87.2
TXT Irises:
    Plants under 68.1 are members of the genus Iridaceae characterized as being
    rhizomatous or bulbous, having sword-like, stiff, blue-green to green
    leaves of parallel venation; colorful, multi-flowered spikes, with flowers
    emerging from sheathing scales on the scape the flowers having 3 outer
    (fall) reflexed petals which may be bearded basally, and 3 inner (erect)
    standard segments.


CLS PLT/87.3
TXT Orchids:
    Plants under subclass 68.1 which are members of the family orchidaceae,
    having sympodial or monopodial growth, pseudobulbs, leaves of parallel
    venation and flowers which are terminal, and which are normally composed of
    three sepals, two upper and one lower bearded petal centering a column.

    (1)     Note.  While this family contains over about 50,000 members of a
    myriad of descriptions, psedominant commercial species will be limited to
    cattleya, Vanda, and Cymbidium.  This subclass is intended to comprehend
    all plants which are to be commercially marketed as "Orchid Plants" by art
    recognition.


CLS PLT/87.4
TXT Lilies:
    Plants under subclass 68.1 which belong to the genus Lilium (Liliaceae)
    which are characterized as emerging from scaled bulbs, lance-like leaves
    and funnel to bell-shaped flowers with six spreading or recurving segments,
    with plural, long lasting flowers opening progressively on individual stems
    spaced along or radiating from the top portion of the main stem.

    (1)     Note.  More than 80 species and interspecific hybrids of lilies are
    comprehended by this subclass.


CLS PLT/87.5
TXT Peonies:
    Plants under subclass 68.1 which belong to the genus Paeonia, having large
    pink, white and red, or cream colored flowers, or other floral coloration.


CLS PLT/87.6
TXT Impatiens:
    Plants under subclass 68.1 which belong to the genus Impatiens, and which
    are tender, succulent, having foliage in colors from green to multi-color
    variations, and single or double, spurred flowers of shades in white, pink,
    orange, red, and which form seed pods which forceably dehisce seeds on
    maturity.


CLS PLT/87.7
TXT Phloxes:
    Plants under subclass 68.1 which belong to the genus Phlox and which are
    characterized by having lance-shaped leaves and flower clusters in white,
    and most often, shades of pink or purple.


CLS PLT/87.8
TXT Dahlias:
    Plants under subclass 68.1 which are members of the genus Dahlia and which
    are characterized by having tuberous roots, tender, foliaceous plants, and
    large, colorful flowers.

    (1)     Note.  Flowers of plants of this subclass may be of a myriad of
    colors and shades, single, semi-double, or fully double.  Plant height may
    range from several inches to several feet.  Foliage may be green or purple.


CLS PLT/87.9
TXT Snapdragons:
    Plants under the subclass 68.1 which are members of the genus Antirrhinum
    and which are characterized by having a plurality of individual
    progressively opening flowers on a spike which bear an imagined resemblance
    to the mouth of a dragon; flowers are showy, two-lipped normally variously
    colored (within individual flowers), and bloom for long periods.


CLS PLT/88.1
TXT HERBACEOUS ORNAMENTAL FOLIAGE PLANTS:
    Plants under the class definition which are herbaceous and principally
    characterized by and grown for their ornamental foliage.

    (1)     Note.  Plants commercially marketed as "house plants" not
    specifically provided for elsewhere in this breakdown are to be included
    here.


CLS PLT/88.11
TXT Dracaenas:
    Plants under subclass 88.1 belonging to any species within the genus
    Dracaena, which are characterized by very stout leaves having a myriad of
    blotched color patterns.


CLS PLT/88.2
TXT Dieffenbachias:
    Plants under subclass 88.1 belonging to the genus Dieffenbachia which are
    characterized particularly by having thick, succulent stems with distinct,
    leaf sheaf defined segments at the nodes, and attractive, patterned
    variegations in the foliage.


CLS PLT/88.3
TXT Ferns:
    Plants under subclass 88.1 which are any of a number of flowerless,
    seedless, vascular plants of the class Filicinae, having fond-like foliage,
    and normally or commonly having a multitude of opposite leaflets and
    reproducing by spores.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are "Staghorn" and "bird nest" ferns which
    have large simple fronds of various shapes and without leaflets.


CLS PLT/88.4
TXT Hoyas:
    Plants under subclass 88.1 which belong to the genus Hoya (family
    asclepiadaceae) and which are characterized as forming vines with large,
    green and frequently variegated by marginal cream coloration, thick leaves
    and which curve inwardly toward the undersurface.


CLS PLT/88.5
TXT Cacti:
    Plants under subclass 88.1 which belong to the family Cactacea, and which
    are generally characterized by a high tolerance to drought, thick fleshy
    appendages, thick waxy cuticles covering exposed plant parts, and the
    presents of needles, and normally slow growth.

    (1)     Note.  This is a large family encompassing plants of a myriad of
    habits and sizes, and origins such as desert or forest.

    (2)     Note.  Some species may have foliage, but foliage may be seasonal,
    i.e., on new growth, and temporary.

    (3)     Note.  Some species may exhibit large or showy, colorful flowers
    and/or bear edible fruit.


CLS PLT/88.6
TXT Philodendrons:
    Plants under subclass 88.1 which are members off the genus Philodendron and
    are characterized by having a vining habit; being a climbing tropical,
    tender vine.

    (1)     Note.  Plants in this breakdown vary in leaf shape (s), leaf and
    leaf petiole coloration, leaf size and leaf coloration, and may vary in
    ploidy.


CLS PLT/88.7
TXT Sansevierias:
    Plants under subclass 88.1 which belong to the genus Sansevieria which are
    characterized by having short to long, thick and stiff lance-shaped leaves
    which are frequently patterned in various shades of green and which may be
    marginally variegated with yellow, and which normally spread by rhizomatous
    appendages; normally grown as a houseplant.

    (1)     Note.  This plant may be referred to as "Mother-in-law's tongue".


CLS PLT/88.8
TXT Bromeliads:
    Plants under subclass 88.1 belonging to the family Bromeliaceae, which may
    be epiphytic, have stiff sword-like, pointed and sharp leaves, may have
    strikingly colored, patterned foliage and spectacular, complex vibrantly
    colored flowers; enjoy wide use as houseplants.


CLS PLT/88.9
TXT Ficus:
    Plants under subclass 88.1 belonging to the genus Ficus and comprehending
    the commercial groups of ornamental figs and rubber plants, generally
    characterized as enduring, abuse tolerant, attractive indoor plants with
    glabrous leaf top surfaces of bright green; silvery to greyed-green bottom
    leaf surfaces, commonly having smooth color contrasting bark.

    (1)     Note.  Figs developed for the production of edible fruit, alone,
    are classified under subclass 33, supra.


CLS PLT/90
TXT LAWN GRASSES:
    Plants under the class definition of the gramineae family.

    (1)     Note.  Large, ornamental grass plants and sugar cane plants of this
    family are classified in subclass 100 below.


CLS PLT/90.1
TXT St. Augustine grasses:
    Plants under subclass 90 belonging to the genus Stenotaprum species
    secundatum which are noted to have thick, heavy stems and leaves normally
    two spikes per node, agressive growth, forming heavy, strong ground covers;
    a spreading grass.


CLS PLT/90.2
TXT Bluegrasses:
    Plants under subclass 90 belonging to the genus Poa characterized as a
    bunch grass with some ability to spread due to rhizomes and producing seed
    largely to predominantly through apomixis; having fine, dense, lush foliage
    of pleasing green to blue green hues, and forming abundant seed panicels on
    slender, strong spikes.


CLS PLT/95
TXT ASPARAGUS:
    Plants under the class definition of the genus Asparagus, being dioecious,
    having an extensive system of storage and feeder roots, a spear producing
    crown, and spears maturing into brush, (fern) - like stalks generally
    resembling a tree in branching habit, ranging between four-to-twelve feet
    in height, having cladodes in lieu of true leaves.

    (1)     Note.  Most activity in this subclass will be limited to commercial
    varieties of A. officinalis.


CLS PLT/100
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:
    Plants under the class definition not provided for above such as mints,
    hops, mushrooms, sugar cane, tobacco, ornamental grass plants other than
    those having value in commerce as "lawn grasses", etc.


CLS 2/
TTL APPAREL

CLS 2/
TXT This is the generic class for garments and other devices to be worn by
    mankind to adorn, cover or protect the body or person.  Included within the
    class are (1) such garments or devices, per se, (2) combinations of such
    garments or devices with other things where the combination is not
    elsewhere provided for, (3) processes of, and patterns for making such
    garments or devices, (4) subcombinations of garments and the like, not
    elsewhere provided for and processes of manufacture relating to such
    subcombinations, and (5) garment supporters and retainers (see subclasses
    300-342).

    NOTES

    (1)     Note.  In general processes of making particular types of garments
    have been classified in the subclass pertaining to the particular garment
    made.  Processes applicable to a number of different types of garments will
    be found in subclasses 243.1+.

    (2)     Note.  Subcombinations of particular garments have been classified
    in the garment subclass unless such subcombinations have been specifically
    provided for in the subclasses indented under subclass 243.1.
    Subcombinations applicable to a number of different types of garments have
    been classified in subclasses 243.1+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., for a single or combined fastener
    or retainer device used to support or retain a garment or to hold parts of
    a garment supporter together where no significant structure or feature of
    the garment or part held is claimed. These include (a) two fastening
    devices even though connected by a single strand; (b) a device to hold the
    ends of a belt, strip, or strand; (c) a device to hold the ends of a belt,
    strip, or strand together to form a loop even though claimed in combination
    with such belt, strip, or strand; or (d) a single or combined fastening
    means even though supporting or fastening together two or more garments or
    parts of a garment supporter. Class 2 takes all other garment supporters or
    retainers or parts thereof not provided for.

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, for miscellaneous footwear, such as
    boots, shoes, and leggings.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 329 for a head covering
    carrying an indicia where any modification of the head covering is merely
    for receiving the indicia.

    63,     Jewelry, for ornaments of precious metal and stones adapted to be
    worn on the person.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclasses 171+ for garments closely allied
    with knitting methods or distinguished mainly by the knitted fabric thereof.

    112,    Sewing, appropriate subclasses for processes and apparatus for
    sewing, and for sewn articles not specifically provided for in any other
    class.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 712+ for body worn apparel for
    controlling, restraining, or handling an animal; subclasses 850+ for a body
    worn  protective shield or apparel; subclasses 856+ for a collar or other
    body- or appendage-encircling band, particularly subclass 857 if for a
    human being; and subclass 907 for a harness of general utility.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 204+ for apparel and analogous
    structure combined with means to heat the same by means other than
    electricity.

    132,    Toilet, subclass 215 for mustache holders or guards, subclasses
    219+ for combs to be worn in the hair, subclasses 273+ for hair fasteners,
    particularly subclass 274 for hair nets, subclasses 53+ for hair structure,
    subclasses 57.1+ for hat fasteners, and subclasses 73+ for artificial
    coverings for finger nails.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 211 for apparel and fabrics having
    electric heating means.

    220,    Receptacles, see the Notes to the definition of subclass 200 for
    references to closures in other classes.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, for machines and machine methods for making,
    repairing and maintaining in proper condition articles of apparel and
    analogous articles. See (1) Note under the class definition of Class 223.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 464+, and especially 468+ for safety
    belt or harness attachable to the chair or seat (e.g., of a vehicle); and
    see the search notes therein for other loci for vehicle attachable safety
    harness.

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclasses
    41+ for spectacles and eyeglasses whose transparent elements have an
    optical characteristic, or whose frames in the absence of such optical
    characteristic lack any body protecting structure.  See section V of the
    Class 351 Class Definition for the detailed classification line between
    spectacles and goggles. See Class 2 (this class), subclasses 15+ for eye
    shields having a mere protective function.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for a stock-material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 26+ for a toy adapted to be
    worn or attached to the body.

    450,    Foundation Garments, appropriate subclasses for a garment
    specifically designed to fit the human body to protect, compress, support,
    restrain, or alter the configuration of the body torso or a portion thereof.

    602,    Surgery:  Splint, Brace, or Bandage, subclasses 1+ for an
    orthopedic device and method and subclasses 41+ for a body protecting or
    restraining device.

    604,    Surgery, appropriate subclasses for devices similar to apparel
    having therapeutic functions.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses
    108+ for wearing apparel combined with a therapeutic device for applying
    light rays or analogous rays to the body, or modifying the temperature of
    the body or applying electricity to the body, which is limited by claimed
    structure to therapeutic use.

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, subclasses 7+ for brassieres which include an
    artificial breast.


CLS 2/1
TXT Miscellaneous apparel and analogous devices under the class definition not
    elsewhere provided for.


CLS 2/2.11
TXT Astronaut's body cover:
    Guard or protector under subclass 455 comprising a body suit which covers
    the trunk, arms, and legs of the wearer and which is intended and
    constructed to be worn above the Earth's atmosphere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 200.24+ for a device for supplying a breathable
    gas to a person; especially, subclass 201.19 for a device to transmit or
    facilitate voice transmission from a face mask, hood, or helmet, and
    subclasses 201.29+ for a body supported head covering and a body garment;
    in particular, subclass 202.11 where the body garment is a flight suit.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 211 for an electrically heated garment.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 516.1 for a radiation shielded garment.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 1+ for a hand controlled
    article manipulator and subclass 8 for a hand controlled article
    manipulator combined with a radiation shield.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 19+ for subject matter relating to an anti-G
    suit.


CLS 2/2.12
TXT Having relatively rotatable coaxial coupling component:
    Astronaut's body cover under subclass 2.11 wherein the body suit includes a
    trunk covering part and an appendage covering part (e.g., arm, leg, head)
    which parts are tubular at their point of connection and relatively
    rotatable about their common axis.


CLS 2/2.13
TXT Having convoluted component:
    Astronaut's body cover under subclass 2.11 wherein one part of the body
    suit is made movable relative to another part of the body suit by a series
    of adjacent ridges and valleys formed in it and wherein the ridges are
    movable toward or away from adjacent ridges.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 121+ for a corrugated
    flexible tube or pipe of general utility.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 226+ for a bellow type
    flexible joint between rigid members.


CLS 2/2.14
TXT Aviator's body cover:
    Guard or protector under subclass 455 comprising a body suit which covers
    the trunk, arms, and legs of the wearer and which is intended and
    constructed to be worn by an aircraft crew member within the bounds of the
    Earth's atmosphere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6.1+,   for an aviator's helmet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 200.24+ for a device for supplying a breathable
    gas to a person; especially, subclass 201.19 for a device for transmitting
    voice communication from a face mask, helmet, or hood, and subclasses
    201.29+ for a body covering and a body supported head covering; in
    particular, subclass 202.11 for a flight suit.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 211 for an electrically heated garment.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 143 for a garment attached to a parachute.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 19+ for subject matter relating to an anti-G
    suit.


CLS 2/2.15
TXT Underwater diver's body cover:
    Guard or protector under subclass 455 comprising a body enclosing suit
    which covers the trunk, arms, and legs of the wearer and which is intended
    and constructed to be worn by a diver underwater.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 200.24+ for a device for supplying a breathable
    gas to a person; especially, subclass 200.29 for a device for dispersing
    exhaust gases from a diver's mask, helmet, or other underwater apparatus
    into ambient water, subclass 201.11 for a draw type snorkel, and subclass
    201.27 for a diver's body covering having a body supported head covering.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 211 for electrically heated wearing
    apparel.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 850 for an underwater
    communication device.

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclass 43
    for glasses designed for underwater use.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 131+ for an acoustic underwater communication device.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclass 175 for telephonic
    communication equipment for underwater use (i.e., in a diving suit, etc.)
    and subclass 430 for a body supported communication device (i.e., in
    headwear, etc.).

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 185+ for a diving suit
    combined with a grapple, underwater power propulsion device, elevator, or
    other means pertaining to hydraulic engineering.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 1+ for a hand controlled
    article manipulator and subclass 8 for a hand controlled article
    manipulator combined with a radiation shield.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclasses 88+ for a personal
    flotation device and subclasses 102+ for a body garment having buoyancy
    means to sustain the user floating in the water.


CLS 2/2.16
TXT Having an insulation layer:
    Diver's suit under subclass 2.15 including a body suit layer and a second
    layer of material approximately equal in size to the body suit to limit
    heat transfer.


CLS 2/2.17
TXT Having a garment closure (e.g., zipper, Velcro#, etc.):
    Diver's suit under subclass 2.15 wherein the diving suit includes a
    fastener which releasably holds together two sections of the body suit.


CLS 2/2.5
TXT Devices under subclass 455 specially designed to resist penetration, as by
    projectiles, swords, knives, etc., where (1) features of shape for fitting
    the body or (2) means for wearing or otherwise securing the device to the
    body, are claimed.

    (1)     Note.  This class, subclasses 410+, particularly subclasses 6.1+
    for such subject matter designed to protect the head only.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclasses 78+ for
    such devices where only the rigid penetration resistive wall structure is
    claimed.

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclasses 167 through 207 for armored
    resilient tires.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock-material product in the form of a web, sheet or block embodying
    a penetration resistant component, and especially subclass 911 (a
    cross-reference art collection) for a penetration resistant product.


CLS 2/4
TXT Devices under subclass 410  comprising coverings to repel mosquitoes, bees,
    flies, or the like.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses for an insect repelling composition and especially subclasses
    402+ for a coating or impregnant comprising a composition of that class on
    a base which may be a head guard, by name only.


CLS 2/5
TXT Devices under subclass 410 comprising helmets specially adapted for the use
    of firemen.


CLS 2/6.1
TXT Aviator's helmet:
    Head covering under subclass 410 specifically configured and intended to be
    used by an aircraft crew member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.11+,  for a body enclosing suit for an astronaut having a helmet.

    2.14,   for a body enclosing suit for an aviator having a helmet.

    6.6+,   for a soldier's helmet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 200.24+ for a head covering with an oxygen
    supply.


CLS 2/6.2
TXT Having article attaching means:
    Aviator's helmet under subclass 6.1 including a mount for securing an
    article, which article has a function other than to guard or protect the
    wearer's head.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    422,    for a helmet having article attaching means and not specifically
    intended for use by an aviator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 201.15+ for a helmet with an oxygen supply;
    especially, subclass 201.16 for a head covering having means to keep a head
    shield clear (e.g., wiper, etc.) and subclass 201.19 for a head covering
    having an oxygen feed and means to facilitate voice communication.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 945+ for an aircraft
    indicating system or alarm.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclass 8 for an indicating system or
    alarm in the pilot's line-of-sight (e.g., heads-up display, etc.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    815 for a body or garment attached lens with a support and subclasses 879+
    for a body or apparel attached mirror with a support.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclass 430 for a body supported
    communication device (e.g., headgear, etc.).


CLS 2/6.3
TXT Having eye shield (e.g., goggles, visor, etc.):
    Aviator's helmet under subclass 6.1 including an eye guard or protector
    which is transparent to at least a portion of the visible spectrum and is
    located or positionable in the aviator's line of sight.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6.7+,   for a helmet having an eye shield specifically intended for use by
    a soldier.

    15+,    for an eye shield not specifically intended for use by an aviator
    or soldier.

    424,    for a guard or protector for the head having a face shield not
    specifically intended for use by an aviator or soldier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclass 201.24 for a head covering with an oxygen supply.


CLS 2/6.4
TXT Plural shields:
    Aviator's helmet under subclass 6.3 including at least two eye guards or
    protectors for an aviator's eye.


CLS 2/6.5
TXT Pivotal shield:
    Aviator's helmet under subclass 6.3 including an eye guard or protector
    which is attached to the helmet and rotatable about a fixed point.


CLS 2/6.6
TXT Soldier's (i.e., ground based trooper) helmet:
    Head covering under subclass 410 specifically configured and intended to be
    used by a ground based military person.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    89,     Ordnance, subclass 36.05 for a gun attached shield to protect an
    ordnance operating person.


CLS 2/6.7
TXT Having eye shield:
    Soldier's helmet under subclass 6.6 including an eye guard or protector
    which is transparent to at least a portion of the visible spectrum and is
    located or positionable in the line of sight of the soldier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6.3+,   for a helmet having an eye shield for an aviator.

    15+,    for an eye shield not specifically intended for use by a soldier or
    aviator.


CLS 2/6.8
TXT Having movable mechanical energy absorbing means (e.g., spring,
    etc.):Soldier's helmet under subclass 6.6 including a mechanical component
    such as a spring, pivot, etc., which is configured so as to move relative
    to the soldier's head so as to absorb some of the impact force imparted to
    the helmet.


CLS 2/7
TXT Devices under subclass 410 constructed to prevent sun-stroke or to
    counteract or protect from the effects of heat.


CLS 2/8
TXT Devices under subclass 7 designed to protect from the heat and glare of
    welding and similar operations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for similar devices not supported by the head.


CLS 2/9
TXT Devices under subclass 410 designed to protect the face, as baseball masks,
    boxing masks, nose guards, and the like.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for face guards supported by the head and designed to protect from
    the heat and glare of welding and similar operations.

    206,    for face coverings functioning other than as guards or protectors.

    424,    for a head guard that includes a face protector.


CLS 2/10
TXT Eye shields, under subclass 15 attached to or made a part of a hat or cap.


CLS 2/11
TXT Eye shields and the like under subclass 15 carried in the hand or supported
    on some part of the body other than the head.


CLS 2/12
TXT Eye shields under subclass 15 designed to protect the eyes by shading.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209.3+, for additional combined eye shades and interrupted or strap-type
    crowns.


CLS 2/13
TXT Devices under subclass 12 comprising eye shades adapted to be attached to
    eyeglasses or spectacles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclasses
    44+ for spectacles and eyeglasses with anti-glare or shading, such as where
    the lenses have a light modifying charactertistic as in light filtering,
    polarizing, or absorbing.


CLS 2/15
TXT Device under subclass 410 in which significance is attributed to means
    intended to protect the eyes of the wearer.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes an eyeshield that entirely obstructs
    the vision of a wearer, such as a blindfold.


CLS 2/16
TXT Devices under subclass 455 designed to guard or protect the hand or arm.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158,    159+ and 170, for other hand coverings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 25 for hand and
    finger attachments designed to facilitate the handling of material and
    articles.


CLS 2/17
TXT Devices under subclass 16 attached to reins, tool handles, bicycle handle
    bars, automobile driving wheels, and the like, to protect the hands.


CLS 2/18
TXT Devices under subclass 16 comprising gloves for use in boxing.


CLS 2/19
TXT Devices under subclass 16 comprising gloves for use in playing baseball.


CLS 2/20
TXT Devices under subclass 16 comprising padlike devices worn to protect the
    palms or other parts of the hand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158     and 159+, for mittens and gloves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 116 for other insulated hand-pad
    protectors.

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclass 95 for hand protectors
    for use with flat irons.

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 65.1+ for strand brakes having hand-protective
    features.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 25 for hand and
    finger attachments for the handling of articles and subclass 149 for handle
    and strap-type carriers having hand-protective features.


CLS 2/21
TXT Devices under subclass 16 comprising shields for the fingers or thumbs only.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 186 and 257+ for finger supported cigar and
    cigarette holding means.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 25 for finger
    attachments designed to facilitate the handling of material or articles.


CLS 2/22
TXT Devices under subclass 455 comprising shields for leg, usually for the use
    of athletes.


CLS 2/23
TXT Devices under subclass 22 comprising pads and other protecting devices
    permanently attached to trousers.


CLS 2/24
TXT Devices under subclass 22 comprising shields for the knee only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for similar devices worn to protect the knees of garments from wear.


CLS 2/44
TXT Devices under the class definition to brace and support the back and
    shoulders.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300     through 342, for garment supporters which may incidentally brace
    the body but which have no special body bracing features, such as pads or
    wide fabrics.

    459+,   for a guard or protector for the shoulder (e.g., football shoulder
    pads, shoulder strap protectors, etc.).

    467,    for a guard or protector for the back.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    450,    Foundation Garments, subclasses 2 and 96 for brassieres and
    corsets, respectively, combined with shoulder or back braces.


CLS 2/45
TXT Devices under the class definition to brace and support the shoulders only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300     through 342, for garment supports which may incidentally brace the
    body but which have no special body bracing features, such as pads or wide
    fabrics.

    459+,   for a guard or protector for the shoulder (e.g., football shoulder
    pads, shoulder strap protectors, etc.).


CLS 2/46
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising garments worn primarily to
    protect other garments from wear or injury.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175.6+, for a hat having a removable weather guard.

    209.11, for a head covering having a convertible crown.

    231+,   for trouser protectors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 54 for machines and machine methods for
    making dress shields.

    450,    Foundation Garments, subclass 153 for protective liners, covers or
    shields for corsets.


CLS 2/47
TXT Devices under subclass 46 usually of skirt form, including means for
    covering the bottom portions of a woman's skirts both on the outside and
    the inside to protect the garments from mud, water, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222,    for edge bindings or protectors for skirts.


CLS 2/48
TXT Devices under subclass 46 of the apron type.


CLS 2/49.1
TXT Infant's bib:
    Garment protector under subclass 48 dimensioned to be worn over the chest
    of a small child and intended to protect an underlying garment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48      and 50-52, for a protective apron.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 873+ for a garment type infant restraint used
    to protect an injury.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 464+ for a garment type restraint to
    secure a person in a chair or seat.

    D2,     Apparel and Haberdashery, subclasses 861+ for a design patent for
    an apron.


CLS 2/49.2
TXT Having pocket for receiving debris or article:
    Infant's garment protector under subclass 49.1 including a pouch intended
    to catch crumbs or hold an item.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclass 148.1 for an article carrier
    supporting or including a liquid holding receiver.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 102+ for a support for an infant's bottle.

    D2,     Apparel and Haberdashery, subclasses 863 and 864 for a design
    patent for a bib having a debris or article receiver.


CLS 2/49.3
TXT Having fastener for attachment to tray or table:
    Infant's garment protector under subclass 49.1 including a lower extension
    having means to secure the extension to a high chair tray, table, or other
    food supporting surface.


CLS 2/49.4
TXT Multilayer:
    Infant's garment protector under subclass 49.1 wherein the bib includes at
    least two layers of material dimensioned to be worn over the chest of a
    small child.

    (1)     Note.  The layer may be laminated or separable.


CLS 2/49.5
TXT Removable layer:
    Infant's garment protector under subclass 49.4 wherein the bib includes
    means to enable the top layer of material to be readily removed.


CLS 2/50
TXT Devices under subclass 48 adapted for wear during hair cutting or other
    barbering operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174,    for a device worn upon the head to   shield an eye or the face
    during toilet operations such as shampooing, hair cutting, or the like.


CLS 2/51
TXT Devices under subclass 48 adapted primarily for men's wear.


CLS 2/52
TXT Devices under subclass 48 comprising ties and supports for aprons, usually
    of the waistband type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220,    for waistbands.

    221,    for adjustable or elastic waistbands.


CLS 2/53
TXT Devices under subclass 46 comprising armpit shields, usually impervious to
    moisture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 54 for machines and machine processes
    for making dress shields.


CLS 2/54
TXT Devices under subclass 53 combined with garments.


CLS 2/55
TXT Devices under subclass 53 provided with means for supporting them
    independently of a garment, as by means of straps.


CLS 2/56
TXT Devices under subclass 53 provided with garment attaching means.


CLS 2/57
TXT Devices under subclass 53 comprising frames of wire or equivalent material
    to hold the shields in proper extended position.


CLS 2/58
TXT Methods of making armpit shields.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 54 for machine processes for making
    dress shields.


CLS 2/59
TXT Devices under subclass 46 adapted to protect the sleeves and cuffs of
    garments.


CLS 2/60
TXT Devices under subclass 46 comprising attachments for collars or cuffs to
    prevent soiling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142,    for collar bindings.


CLS 2/61
TXT Devices under subclass 46 comprising protectors for stockings, except those
    restricted to the knee.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclass 2 for similar devices worn
    outside the shoe.


CLS 2/62
TXT Devices under subclass 46 comprising protectors for the knees of all
    garments, including stockings.


CLS 2/63
TXT Devices under subclass 46 comprising caplike devices to protect hats from
    soiling while being tried on.


CLS 2/64
TXT Devices under the class definition intended for use for burial purposes
    only.


CLS 2/65
TXT Devices under the class definition made essentially of fur.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, subclass 400 for a sewn leather product not elsewhere
    provided for.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock-material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet which may embody natural fur or leather, especially subclasses 85+
    for animal skin with the fur thereon, subclass 151 for a web or sheet
    having an artificial leather grain surface, subclass 473 for a laminate
    including leather, and subclass 904 (a cross-reference art collection) for
    an artifical leather sheet.


CLS 2/66
TXT Devices under subclass 65 of the handmuff type.


CLS 2/67
TXT Devices under the class definition specially adapted to be worn while
    bathing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.15+,  for a body suit worn by an underwater diver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 200.24+ for an underwater diving suit having an
    oxygen supply.

    450,    Foundation Garments, subclasses 7+ for bathing suits incorporating
    brassiere structure and wherein the disclosure is clear that the lower
    torso portion of the garment provides a definite supporting or compressing
    function contrasted with a mere "skin-tight" fit.


CLS 2/68
TXT Devices under subclass 67 comprising bathing caps.


CLS 2/69
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising miscellaneous coverings for
    the body and subcombinations thereof not elsewhere provided for.

    (1)     Note.  Lap robes are in this subclass unless there is claimed upon
    the lap robe some structure for securing it to the vehicle or cooperating
    with some part of the vehicle.  Such inventions are found in Class 296,
    Land Vehicles: Bodies and Tops, subclass 81.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 204 for analogous structures, having
    heating means other than electrical.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 211 for like structures wherein the
    heating means is electrical.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclass 81 (see (1) Note above).

    450,    Foundation Garments, subclasses 11, 30+ and 95 for foundation
    garments, brassieres and corsets, respectively, combined with Class 2-type
    apparel garments.


CLS 2/69.5
TXT Garments under subclass 69 of bag form or having means to close the lower
    part to form a bag.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclass 413 for sleeping bags having bed adjuncts, as a
    mattress, pillow or canopy, or tent features as windows or framework.


CLS 2/70
TXT Union garments under subclass 69 in which the upper and lower portions are
    separably connected.


CLS 2/71
TXT Union garments under subclass 69 the lower portions of which embody both
    skirt and bifurcated features.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212,    for similar nether garments.


CLS 2/72
TXT Union garments under subclass 69 with skirted lower portion adapted to be
    changed to a bifurcated form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213,    for nether garments having similar features.


CLS 2/73
TXT Union garments under subclass 69 with skirted lower portions of the type
    usually worn as undergarments.


CLS 2/74
TXT Union garments under subclass 69 with skirted lower portions of the type
    usually worn by women as outer-garments.


CLS 2/75
TXT Union garments under subclass 69 with skirted lower portions of the type
    usually worn by children.


CLS 2/76
TXT Union garments under subclass 69 of the dress type having adjustable or
    elastic waistbands.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221,    for skirts having elastic or adjustable waist bands.

    237,    for trousers having similar features.


CLS 2/77
TXT Devices under subclass 69 comprising skirts of the type usually worn by men
    beneath the vest or coat and provided with bifurcated lower portions.


CLS 2/78.1
TXT Underwear:

    Bifurcated union type garment under subclass 69 constructed and intended to
    be worn under an exterior garment and in contact with the skin of the
    wearer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for a union type garment which combines the features characteristic
    of both a skirted union garment and a bifurcated union garment.

    72,     for a union garment which is convertible between a skirted union
    garment and a bifurcated union garment.

    73,     for a skirted union type undergarment.

    77,     for an exterior bifurcated union type garment.

    109+    and 113, for a shirt or waist type undergarment.

    212,    for a nether garment which combines the features characteristic of
    both a skirted nether garment and a bifurcated garment.

    213,    for a nether garment which is convertible between a skirted nether
    garment and a bifurcated garment.

    400+,   for a bifurcated nether undergarment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclass 175 for a union type garment
    distinguished mainly by the knitted fabric or which is particularly adapted
    to be produced by a knitting process.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclasses 102+ for a buoyant
    union type garment.

    450,    Foundation Garments, subclasses 11, 30+, and 95 for a foundation
    garment combined with an apparel of the type found in this class.


CLS 2/78.2
TXT Having seat or crotch opening:

    Bifurcated union type undergarment under subclass 78.1 wherein the
    undergarment has an opening or slit in either the rear portion of the
    garment between the waist and leg portion or at the region of the garment
    where the two leg portions of the garment intersect.

    (1)     Note.  Generally the slit or opening is so arranged as to be
    closable, for example, by providing overlapping parts or a fabric panel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    408,    for an openable or open crotch nether undergarment designed to be
    worn by a female.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    450,    Foundation Garments, subclasses 102, 103, and 105 for a foundation
    type nether undergarment with an openable crotch and subclass 148 for a
    nether foundation type undergarment with an openable rear portion.


CLS 2/78.3
TXT Having elastic portion (e.g., band, panel, etc.):
    Bifurcated union type undergarment under subclass 78.1 wherein part of the
    undergarment is constructed out of a material having elastic threads.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    450,    Foundation Garments, appropriate subclasses for a foundation
    garment having an elastic band, panel, or portion.


CLS 2/78.4
TXT Having garment fastener:
    Bifurcated union type undergarment under subclass 78.1 including a fastener
    intended to releasably secure another garment to it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for a blouse having a fastener for a nether garment.

    112,    for a waist type undergarment having a fastener for a nether
    garment.

    117,    for a shirt having a fastener for a nether garment.

    229,    for an exterior nether garment adapted to be supported by a waist
    (e.g., blouse) or shirt.

    300     through 342, for a garment supporter, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    450,    Foundation Garments, subclasses 14, 26, 28, 29, 110, and 111 for
    foundation garment having means to support or engage an apparel type
    garment.


CLS 2/79
TXT Union garments under subclass 69 with bifurcated lower portions of the type
    usually worn by men as outer-garments.


CLS 2/80
TXT Union garments under subclass 69 with bifurcated lower portions of the type
    usually worn by children.


CLS 2/81
TXT Bifurcated union garments under subclass 69 made of fire-proof or
    fire-resistant material.


CLS 2/82
TXT Bifurcated union garments under subclass 69 made of waterproof or
    water-resistant material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87,     for waterproof overcoats.


CLS 2/83
TXT Bifurcated union garments under subclass 69 of the pajama type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for shirt-type bed garments.


CLS 2/84
TXT Devices under subclass 69 provided with attached hoods.


CLS 2/85
TXT Devices under subclass 69 of the coat type adapted for outdoor wear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     for overcoats with hoods.

    93,     for coats generally.

    98,     for collars.


CLS 2/86
TXT Devices under subclass 85 constructed to permit conversion of the lower
    parts to a bifurcated form.


CLS 2/87
TXT Devices under subclass 85 specially adapted for protection from rain.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     for water-resistant bifurcated body garments.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a single or plural layer sheet of stock- material product not elsewhere
    provided for, especially subclasses 411.1+ for a laminate characterized by
    the composition of the layers.


CLS 2/88
TXT Devices under subclass 69 of the cape type.

    (1)     Note.  These garments are usually sleeveless, but may have "inside"
    sleeves or combined with coats.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     for capes with hoods.


CLS 2/89
TXT Devices under subclass 88 constructed to permit the formation of a tent
    from the garment.


CLS 2/90
TXT Devices under subclass 69 comprising knitted garments of the sweater type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclass 171 for knitted garments
    distinguished mainly by the fabric thereof.


CLS 2/91
TXT Devices under subclass 69 of the muffler type which cover the chest or back
    and neck.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203,    for hoods with mufflers.


CLS 2/92
TXT Devices under subclass 69 comprising special coverings for the back and
    chest, either or both.


CLS 2/93
TXT Devices under subclass 69 of the coat type.


CLS 2/94
TXT Devices under subclass 93 adapted for carrying game, ammunition, or other
    articles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, appropriate subclasses for a device
    supported by an animate bearer for carrying game, ammunition, or another
    article not associated with a coat. See especially subclass 103 for a fish
    and game stringer, subclass 196 for a receiver especially adapted to eject
    an article, such as ammunition, subclasses 600+ for a flaccid neck or
    shoulder crossing article receiver which supports ammunition, and
    cross-reference art collection 931 for article carriers for ammunition.


CLS 2/95
TXT Devices under subclass 93 combined with vests or shirts or simulations
    thereof.


CLS 2/96
TXT Devices under subclass 93 comprising securing and fastening means for the
    front openings of coats.


CLS 2/97
TXT Devices under subclass 93 provided with lining means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272,    for general lining structure.


CLS 2/98
TXT Devices under subclass 93 comprising collars.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129+,   for shirt collars.


CLS 2/99
TXT Devices under subclass 98 comprising springs to be worn under coat collars
    to retain them in proper position.


CLS 2/100
TXT Devices under subclass 93 having fasteners in the back to hold the collar
    in proper position.


CLS 2/101
TXT Devices under subclass 93 to facilitate putting on coats.


CLS 2/102
TXT Devices under subclass 69 of the vest type worn by men.


CLS 2/103
TXT Devices under subclass 102 combined with shirts or dickeys.


CLS 2/104
TXT Waists and underwear under subclass 69 made to facilitate access to the
    breast.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    450,    Foundation Garments, subclasses 56 for brassieres of the nursing
    type having closable apertures permitting access to breast.


CLS 2/105
TXT Waists under subclass 69 of the type worn by women as outergarments.


CLS 2/106
TXT Waist-type garments under subclass 69 having waistbands usually for boys'
    wear.


CLS 2/107
TXT Devices under subclass 106 having means for supporting nether garments,
    usually trousers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    for garments, supporting underwear.

    300     through 342, inclusive, for garment supports, per se.


CLS 2/108
TXT Waists under subclass 69 extending below the waist line similar to coats or
    jackets.


CLS 2/109
TXT Waists under subclass 69 worn by women and children as undergarments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for underwear provided with means to facilitate access to the
    breast.


CLS 2/110
TXT Devices under subclass 109 of the corset cover type.


CLS 2/111
TXT Devices under subclass 109 for infants' wear.


CLS 2/112
TXT Devices under subclass 109 having means for supporting nether garments,
    usually skirts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300     through 342, for garment supporters, per se.


CLS 2/113
TXT Shirts under subclass 69 usually of knit fabric, intended for wear beneath
    the outer garments.


CLS 2/114
TXT Shirts under subclass 69 of the night-shirt type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83,     for bifurcated bed garments.


CLS 2/115
TXT Shirts under subclass 69 of the type usually worn by men directly beneath
    the coat or vest.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for vests combined with shirts.


CLS 2/116
TXT Devices under subclass 115 provided with permanently-attached collars.


CLS 2/117
TXT Devices under subclass 115 provided with supporters for nether garments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300     through 342, for garment supporters, per se.


CLS 2/118
TXT Devices under subclass 115 with special bosom structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 2+ for machines and machine processes
    for making bosom structures.


CLS 2/119
TXT Devices under subclass 118 having detachable bosoms or dickeys.


CLS 2/120
TXT Devices under subclass 118 provided with means to prevent wrinkling or
    soiling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300     through 342, for garment supporters, per se.


CLS 2/121
TXT Devices under subclass 115 comprising overlap for sleeve or body openings.


CLS 2/122
TXT Devices under subclass 115 having special reinforcing yokes, patches and
    facings.


CLS 2/123
TXT Devices under subclass 115 provided with special cuff structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 2+ for machines and machine processes
    for making cuffs.


CLS 2/124
TXT Devices under subclass 123 in which the cuffs are of the detachable type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129+,   for inventions common to collars and cuffs.


CLS 2/125
TXT Devices under subclass 115 provided with special sleeve structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121,    for overlap structure.

    269     and 270, for sleeve structure, per se.


CLS 2/126
TXT Devices under subclass 125 in which the sleeves have detachable parts.


CLS 2/127
TXT Devices under subclass 115 comprising neckband structure.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes stud pockets, attached fasteners,
    tabs, and the like, as well as general structure.


CLS 2/128
TXT Devices under subclass 115 comprising means for closing and fastening
    openings in the body portions of shirts.


CLS 2/129
TXT Devices under subclass 69 comprising detachable shirt collars.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98      and 116, for garments with attached collars.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 2+ for machines and machine processes
    for making collars.


CLS 2/130
TXT Devices under subclass 129 comprising collars and neckties permanently
    secured together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137,    for separable connections between ties and collars.


CLS 2/131
TXT Devices under subclass 129 of the fold type adapted to be worn without
    starching.


CLS 2/132
TXT Devices under subclass 131 with elements to support or stiffen the collar.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256,    for stiffeners of general application.


CLS 2/133
TXT Devices under subclass 129 adapted primarily for women's wear.


CLS 2/134
TXT Devices under subclass 133 provided with special stiffening or staying
    features.


CLS 2/135
TXT Devices under subclass 129 made of cellulose or rubber composition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 492+ and 532+ for a single or plural layer web or
    sheet of stock material including rubber or cellulose composition.

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 15, 250, 257, 260, 280, 293, 295+, 385, 412, and 413 for a
    fabric including rubber or cellulose composition.


CLS 2/136
TXT Devices under subclass 129 made wholly or partly of paper.


CLS 2/137
TXT Devices under subclass 129 provided with special means adapted to be
    engaged by a necktie in adjusted position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145,    for a necktie having an attaching feature.


CLS 2/138
TXT Devices under subclass 137 provided with means to facilitate easy sliding
    of the bands of neckties.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156,    for necktie bands with attachments to facilitate adjustment.


CLS 2/139
TXT Devices under subclass 129 provided with means to secure the collar to the
    neckband of a shirt.


CLS 2/140
TXT Devices under subclass 139 including means for securing the open ends of
    collars to shirts.


CLS 2/141.1
TXT With closure:
    Detachable shirt collar under subclass 129 combined with means for closing
    or securing together the open end portions of a detachable collar.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99,     for a coat collar having a retaining spring.

    100,    for a coat collar having a fastener in the back to hold the collar
    in proper position.

    128,    for a shirt having means for closing and fastening an opening in
    the body of the shirt.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., appropriate subclasses for a
    closure, per se, or a closure  combined with a collar or other garment
    where no significant structural feature of the apparel article is claimed;
    especially, subclass 900.1 for a cross-reference art collection of a shirt
    collar closure, subclass 91 for an adjustable collar button, and subclasses
    300+ for an elastic connector.

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclasses 50.1 for a closure
    associated with the upper of a shoe.


CLS 2/141.2
TXT Expandable or extendable:
    Detachable shirt collar under subclass 141.1 wherein the means for closing
    or securing open the end portions of the collar are stretchable or can be
    varied in length.


CLS 2/142
TXT Devices under subclass 129 provided with bindings for the edges of collars.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for collar protectors.


CLS 2/143
TXT Processes of making shirt collars and blanks for the same.


CLS 2/144
TXT Devices under subclass 69 of the necktie type.


CLS 2/145
TXT Devices under subclass 144 having structure to provide for attachment to
    collar buttons, collars, neckbands, shirts or other garments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137,    for collars having necktie-engaging features.

    152.1+, for a necktie form.


CLS 2/146
TXT Devices under subclass 144 made from cut fabric and not tied or made up.


CLS 2/147
TXT Devices under subclass 144 made from knitted fabric.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclass 171 for knitted garments
    distinguished by the fabric.


CLS 2/148
TXT Devices under subclass 144 provided with features relating to knot
    structure.


CLS 2/149
TXT Devices under subclass 148 comprising made-up knot structures not of the
    bow or four-in-hand type.


CLS 2/150
TXT Devices under subclass 149 comprising made-up knot structures of the
    four-in-hand type.


CLS 2/151
TXT Devices under subclass 149 comprising made-up knot structures of the bow
    type.


CLS 2/152.1
TXT Form:
    Necktie under subclass 148 including specially configured means intended to
    be used to impart a predetermined shape to a necktie while being worn.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145,    for a necktie having means to secure the necktie to a collar,
    button, neckband, shirt, or other garment.

    153,    for a form for a four-in-hand type necktie.

    154,    for a form for a bow type necktie.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 49.1 for a necktie
    fastener where no significant structure of the necktie is claimed.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 65 for a tie stretcher; subclass 82 for
    a form used for simulating the appearance of a tie when worn, for storage,
    or for display; and digest 1 for a tie hanger.


CLS 2/153
TXT Devices under subclass 152.1 for four-in-hand ties.


CLS 2/154
TXT Devices under subclass 152.1 for bow ties.


CLS 2/155
TXT Devices under subclass 144 provided with features relating to the structure
    of the band which extends around the neck or collar.


CLS 2/156
TXT Devices under subclass 155 having attachments applied to the band to
    facilitate adjustment.


CLS 2/157
TXT Devices under subclass 144 in which the necktie ends are provided with
    special reinforcement or special means for pulling the ends through knot
    structure.  Also included are straps mounted on one end to hold the other
    end in position.  If such straps are also provided with means to attach the
    necktie end to another garment, they are found in this class, subclass 145.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145,    (see above).


CLS 2/158
TXT Hand coverings under the class definition of the mitten type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66,     for fur muffs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclass 174 for knitted hand coverings
    distinguished by the fabric.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 204 and 206-210, for mittens
    provided with nonelectric-heating means.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 211 for electrically-heated mittens.


CLS 2/159
TXT Hand coverings under the class definition of the glove type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclass 174 for knitted hand covering
    distinguished by the fabric.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 204 and 206-210 for gloves provided
    with nonelectric-heating means.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 211 for electrically-heated gloves.


CLS 2/160
TXT Devices under subclass 159 provided with attachments, usually pockets or
    article-carrying means.


CLS 2/161.1
TXT Sports glove:
    Glove type hand covering under subclass 159 specially configured for use in
    a competitive recreational activity and intended primarily to improve the
    performance of the wearer in the particular activity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16+,    for a sport glove which serves to guard or protect the user against
    unusual conditions such as the application of a strong force (e.g., boxing
    glove, baseball glove, hockey glove, lacrosse glove, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclasses 56+ for a glove
    designed to increase the effective surface used to propel the swimmer
    through water.

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, subclass 43 for a hand-attached
    cue rest for billiards or pool, subclass 56 for a player-worn practice or
    assist device for bowling, subclasses 59+ for a player-worn device for
    bowling (e.g., a restraint for a bowler's wrist, etc.), subclass 450 for a
    player-worn practice device for basketball, subclass 458 for a player-worn
    practice device for baseball, subclass 503 for a device other than an
    article of apparel which is held by or carried on the body of a player for
    catching a game projectile moving through the air during play of a playing
    field or court game, subclasses 505+ for a player-worn device for both
    catching and projecting an aerial projectile (e.g., a jai alai cesta,
    etc.), subclass 518 for a body attachable implement for striking and
    thereby projecting a projectile into the air, and subclass 615 for a
    player-worn means for enhancing movement of projected projectile (e.g., a
    handworn, ball-curving assist means used by a player to pitch a baseball,
    etc.).

    D21,    Games, Toys, and Sports Goods, subclasses 191+ for a design patent
    for a sports glove.

    D29,    Devices and Equipment Against Fire Hazards, for Accident
    Prevention, and for Rescue, subclasses 113+ for a design patent for a
    protective sports hand covering (e.g., baseball glove, etc.).


CLS 2/161.2
TXT For golf:
    Sports glove type hand covering under subclass 161.1 specially configured
    for use in playing the game of golf.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    473,    Amusement Devices: Games, subclass 205 for a golf grip positioning
    aid or indicator worn on the hand; and subclass 212 for a golf practice
    device worn on the hand.


CLS 2/161.3
TXT Having high friction outer surface (e.g., friction pad, tenacious coating,
    tackified, etc.):Golf glove type hand covering under subclass 161.2 having
    an outer surface which has been modified in some manner to increase
    friction between it and an object to be gripped.


CLS 2/161.4
TXT Having a hook and loop type wrist closure (i.e., Velcro#):
    Golf glove type hand covering under subclass 161.2 wherein the glove
    includes a wrist closure composed of tiny interlocking hooks and loops.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    908     through 920, for a garment having a hook and loop type fastener.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 442+ for a hook and loop
    type fastener, per se.


CLS 2/161.5
TXT For fishing, archery, or riflery:
    Sports glove type hand covering under subclass 161.1  configured for use in
    the sport of fishing, archery, or riflery.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16+,    for a guard or protector used in a hunting activity to protect the
    wearer against the application of a strong force.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, subclass 104 for a finger recoil pad attached to a
    firearm.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 25 for a hand
    pad attached to a fishing rod.


CLS 2/161.6
TXT Work glove:
    Glove type hand covering under subclass 159 specially configured to protect
    the hand of a worker in an occupational environment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16+,    for a guard or protector for the hand against the application of
    unusual conditions such as the application of a large force, high
    temperature, and the like.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 104.93 for a
    glove impregnated with cleaning fluid and subclass 227 for a glove or mitt
    provided with a cleaning tool.

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 298 for a cutting implement having means, such as
    a glove, to secure the tool to the hand or finger.

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 28 for a glove provided with means to pick
    cotton and subclass 331 for a glove provided with a berry picking tool.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclass 174 for a hand covering adapted to be
    produced by significant knitting steps.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 625+ for a glove combined with a
    currycomb.

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 370 for a glove having an attached earth
    working tool.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 211 for a glove having an attached
    electric heater.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 25 for a hand
    or finger attached handling implement.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    517 for a glove having an attached signal reflector.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 7+ for a glove
    or other hand covering provided with a cleaning tool and material feed
    supply.

    451,    Abrading, subclass 559 for a glove having an attached abrading tool.

    D2,     Apparel and Haberdashery, subclasses 610+ for a design patent for a
    hand covering.

    D29,    Devices and Equipment Against Fire Hazards, for Accident
    Prevention, and for Rescue, subclasses 113+ for a design patent for a guard
    or protector for the hand or arm.


CLS 2/161.7
TXT Medical glove:
    Work glove type hand covering under subclass 161.6  specially configured
    for use by a health care worker or patient.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    901,    for a medical garment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 849+ for a surgical drape, especially 856 for a
    tubular surgical drape for the hand or arm; and subclasses 878+ for an arm,
    hand, or finger immobilizer.

    601,    Surgery:  Kinesitherapy, subclass 40 for a hand or finger exercise
    device.

    602,    Surgery:  Splint, Brace, or Bandage, subclasses 20+ for orthopedic
    devices for the arm, hand, or finger.

    604,    Surgery, subclass 292 for a glove used to apply or remove material
    from the user's own hand.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclass 111
    for a hand garment having means to apply thermal energy to the hand for
    Therapeutic use.


CLS 2/161.8
TXT Having high friction outer surface (e.g., friction pad, tenacious coating,
    tackified, etc.):Work glove type hand covering under subclass 161.6 having
    an outer surface which has been modified in some manner to increase the
    friction between it and an object to be gripped.


CLS 2/162
TXT Devices under subclass 159 provided with special glove-wrist structures.


CLS 2/163
TXT Devices under subclass 159 provided with special glove-finger structures.


CLS 2/164
TXT Devices under subclass 159 provided with linings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272,    for linings of general application.


CLS 2/165
TXT Devices under subclass 159 having seams with welts.


CLS 2/166
TXT Devices under subclass 159 provided with means for staying the seams of
    gloves.


CLS 2/167
TXT Devices under subclass 159 involving the use of a special material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a single or plural layer stock-material product, and especially
    subclasses 175, 192, and 196 for such product embodying a layer of
    mechanically interengaged strands (e.g., woven, knitted).

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 181+ and 304+ for a woven or knit fabric.


CLS 2/168
TXT Devices under subclass 167 made wholly or essentially of rubber.


CLS 2/169
TXT Processes of making gloves, blanks therefor, and patterns as embodied in
    the finished product.


CLS 2/170
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising coverings for the wrist.


CLS 2/171
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising coverings for the head and
    subcombinations thereof not elsewhere provided for.

    (1)     Note.  A crown as used in this and the indented subclasses refers
    to that outer portion of a head covering which extends generally along and
    contiguous to the head surface, and (1) over the top of the head, usually
    in arch or domelike fashion, and/or (2) peripherally around at least a
    portion of the front, sides and/or back of the head in general conformance
    with the head contour.  A mere head band is included under item (2) and is
    considered an interrupted crown in accordance with the definition and Note
    in subclass 209.3. below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    410+,   for head coverings designed to protect the head against unusual
    conditions, such as the application of force, high temperature, strong
    light to the eyes, and the like.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 329 for a head covering
    carrying an indicia where any modification of the head covering is merely
    for receiving the indicia.

    54,     Harness, subclasses 80.1+ for bonnets for animals.


CLS 2/171.01
TXT Mortarboard or graduation type:
    Head covering under subclass 171 having a flat, rigid, and relatively thin
    head shielding exterior surface and a head engaging member, the head
    engaging member being attached to the lowermost vertical surface of the
    head shielding surface and extending downward therefrom to a position
    vertically below the head shielding surface.


CLS 2/171.02
TXT Conical (e.g., dunce cap, witches' hat, etc.):
    Head covering under subclass 171  wherein the exterior surface of the head
    covering tapers upwardly along a generally straight line path from the
    peripheral edge to the vertex of the head covering.


CLS 2/171.03
TXT Collapsible (e.g., umbrella type, etc.):
    Head covering under subclass 171.02 having means to enable the head
    covering to be reduced in size when not in use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclasses 16+ for umbrellas, per
    se.


CLS 2/171.04
TXT Tam-o'-shanter type:
    Head covering under subclass 171 having a flaccid head shielding exterior
    surface and a head engaging member, the head engaging member being attached
    to the lowermost vertical portion of the head shielding surface and
    extending downward therefrom to a position which is vertically below the
    head shielding surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    D2,     Apparel and Haberdashery, subclass 885 for a design patent for a
    tam-o'-shanter type head covering.


CLS 2/171.1
TXT Head coverings under subclass 171 in which the crown consists of a dome
    portion and a head-surrounding portion providing a passage for the head,
    together forming the crown body, said portions being bodily movable
    relative to each other to provide an open area therebetween upon separation
    of the portions and to close said area when the portions are brought
    together.


CLS 2/171.2
TXT Head coverings under subclass 171 combined with means to positively treat
    (1) the head, (2) air coming in contact with the head, or (3) body fluids
    (e.g., perspiration) extruded from the head.

    (1)     Note.  Means for merely limiting or reducing pressure on the head
    are not considered positive head-treating means but may be found in this
    class, subclasses 173.5, 181.2+, 182.1+, and 195.2.

    (2)     Note.  Mere unimpregnated head- contacting members (e.g., sweat
    bands or absorbent members) are not considered positive treating means but
    may be found in this class, subclasses 181+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173.5,  181.2+, 182.1+, and 195.2, and see (1) Note above.

    181+,   and see (2) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclass 402,
    and especially subclass 411 or 443 for a base, which may be a head covering
    by name only, coated or impregnated with a therapeutic composition.

    512,    Perfume Compositions, subclasses 1-27.

    602,    Surgery:  Splint, Brace, or Bandage, subclass 17 for appliances for
    correcting deformities and abnormal positions of the head or portions
    thereof, and subclass 74 for devices for exerting pressure on portions of
    the head for supporting and protecting said portions and for pressure
    treatment.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses
    139+ for light, heat, or electrical means applied to the head.


CLS 2/171.3
TXT Head covering under subclass 171 combined with means to produce movement of
    air into, through or out of the head covering.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), appropriate subclasses
    for the subcombination of an air-moving member (i.e., fan).

    454,    Ventilation, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for and processes
    of supplying or removing air from enclosures and for circulating air
    therein.


CLS 2/171.4
TXT Head coverings under subclass 171 provided with an air passage, smaller in
    cross-section than the head dimensions, combined with an adjustable or
    removable means to either (1) open, or (2) substantially close off or cover
    the passage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171.1,  for head coverings in which the crown consists of a dome portion
    and a head-surrounding portion, said portions being bodily movable relative
    to each other to provide an open area therebetween upon separation of the
    portions and to close said area when the portions are brought together.


CLS 2/171.5
TXT Head coverings under subclass 171.4 in which the closure means includes
    pliable material which may constitute part of a crown body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     for closures for the front openings of coats.

    128,    for closures for shirt openings.

    141.1,  for a collar having means for closing the open end.

    218,    for closures for plackets of skirts.

    219,    for closures for waistbands of skirts.

    235,    for closures for waistbands of trousers.

    251,    for means for fastening pocket openings.

    252,    for means tending to close pocket openings.

    270,    for closures for garment sleeves or legs.


CLS 2/171.6
TXT Head coverings under subclass 171.5 in which the closure means is a fold
    constituting a part of a flexible crown body, the fold being deformable
    from one position to another position to vary the size of the passage.


CLS 2/171.7
TXT Head coverings under subclass 171.4 in which the closure includes means
    mounted for motion as a unit and solely in a path having all points
    substantially in or contiguous to a crown wall.


CLS 2/171.8
TXT Head coverings under subclass 171.7 in which the closure means is a
    peripheral strip completely encircling the head and shiftable
    circumferentially or axially.


CLS 2/172
TXT Devices under subclass 171 provided with flaps usually adapted to be
    adjusted upon the neck or ears.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208     and 209, for head muffs having flap- like members.


CLS 2/173
TXT Devices under subclass 171 having masks or face coverings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for eye shields attached to hats or caps.


CLS 2/173.5
TXT Head coverings under subclass 171 in which a crown wall, or an element
    forming a continuation of a crown wall, protrudes outwardly from the
    general crown contour in the head contact area to provide a space between
    the crown wall or element and the head, said space forming at least part of
    a through passage from the exterior of the head covering to the head.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181.2+, for head coverings having a head- contacting means having only
    partial engagement with the head periphery to provide an open space between
    the head and a portion of the head covering.

    182.1+, for head coverings having a gap between an inner face of the side
    of a crown and an opposed portion of a head contacting means to provide at
    least a portion of a through passage from the exterior of the head covering
    to the head.


CLS 2/174
TXT Devices under subclass 171 adapted to be worn upon the head during toilet
    operations, such as hair cutting, shampooing, or the like, to shield the
    eyes and face.

    (1)     Note.  For devices which also support the head or hair while
    bathing, see Class 4, Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclass 515.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, see Note (1).

    132,    Toilet, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous devices used by
    persons in making their toilet.


CLS 2/175.1
TXT Having crown and horizontally extending brim (e.g., hat, etc.):Head
    covering under subclass 171 including a head covering portion which extends
    generally around and over the head in a contiguous fashion and further
    including a thin, head encircling planar edge or rim which extends
    outwardly from the lowermost edge of the head covering portion in a
    generally horizontal plane.

    (1)     Note.  The presence of an upwardly extending flair at the edge of
    the rim does not preclude placement in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    Dig. 10,        for a digest of inflatable hats.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    D2,     Apparel and Haberdashery, subclasses 865+ for a design patent of a
    hat.


CLS 2/175.2
TXT Brim edge binding:
    Head covering under subclass 175.1 wherein the thin outwardly extending
    planar rim includes means specially designed and configured to reinforce,
    protect, or strengthen the outermost peripheral edge of the brim.


CLS 2/175.3
TXT Having exterior crown engaging band or trim:
    Head covering under subclass 175.1 including a thin strip which extends
    around or part way around the outer surface of the crown.


CLS 2/175.4
TXT Having a shape retaining internal form (e.g., plate, wire frame, crease
    retainer, etc.):Head covering under subclass 175.1 including a rigid or
    semirigid form configured to impart a predetermined shape to the head
    covering and having at least one layer of material over its exterior
    surface.


CLS 2/175.5
TXT For brim:
    Head covering under subclass 175.4 wherein the form is configured to impart
    a predetermined shape to the horizontally extending head encircling brim of
    the head covering.


CLS 2/175.6
TXT Having detachable weather guard:
    Head covering under subclass 175.1 including an outer shield which is
    releasable attached thereto.


CLS 2/175.7
TXT Having hanger or guard cord:
    Head covering under subclass 175.1 including means intended and configured
    to secure the head covering to a hanger or article of clothing.

    (1)     Note.  The aforementioned hanger means and guard cord are
    frequently used to secure the head covering to an object such as a nail,
    hook, rack, or to the user.


CLS 2/175.8
TXT Straw:
    Head covering under subclass 175.1 having a component constructed of grain
    stalk.


CLS 2/175.9
TXT Felt:
    Head covering under subclass 175.1 having a component constructed of a
    material containing interlocking loose fibers of wool or fur.


CLS 2/181
TXT Head coverings under subclass 171 provided with a crown and in addition
    thereto, significant head contacting means within the crown for engaging
    the front, sides and/or rear of the head; for example, a head contacting
    (sweat) band, mounted interiorly of the crown.

    (1)     Note.  The head contacting means may comprise an inner layer of
    material on a crown.

    (2)     Note.  The subcombination of a head contacting-means is included.

    (3)     Note.  Where, in a combination, there is a mere recitation of a
    head-contacting (sweat) means without any significant relation to other
    claimed parts, classification will be in other appropriate subclasses
    indented under subclass 171.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    132,    Toilet, subclass 59 for head-clamping hat fasteners.


CLS 2/181.2
TXT Head coverings under subclass 181 in which the head-contacting means has
    only partial engagement with the head periphery to provide an open space
    between the head and a portion of the head covering.

    (1)     Note.  A head-contacting band merely transversely perforated within
    its margins is not included, but will be found in subclass 182.8.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173.5,  for head coverings in which a crown wall or a continuation thereof
    protrudes outwardly from the general crown contour in the head-contact area
    to provide a space between the crown wall and the head, said space forming
    at least part of a through passage from the exterior of the head covering
    to the head.

    182.8,  for head coverings with sweat bands having perforations through the
    thickness of the band, and see (1) Note, above.


CLS 2/181.4
TXT Head coverings under subclass 181.2 in which the head-engaging means is
    either detachable from the head covering, or has a portion which is movable
    out of head engagement or out of the general plane of the head opening.

    (1)     Note.  Complete detachment of the head-engaging means to leave an
    inoperative head covering is not considered removable (detachable) for this
    subclass, but may be found generally in subclasses 181.2+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181.2+, for head-engaging means of the discontinuous type, which may be
    completely removed to leave an inoperative head covering, and see (1) Note
    above.

    182.2,  for head covering having removable or retractable crown-spacing
    means for providing a through passage between a crown and a head-engaging
    means.

    183,    for head coverings having a crown, head-contacting means, and means
    to adjust the size of the head-contacting means to fit the head.

    195.2+, for a head covering having a crown, an outwardly extending visor,
    and means to adjust the circumferential size of the crown.


CLS 2/181.6
TXT Head coverings under subclass 181.2 in which the head-contacting means is a
    plate or band having at least one open hole or slot through the thickness
    of the plate or band in that portion of the plate or band which faces and
    generally contacts the head surface, and through which air or perspiration
    may pass.

    (1)     Note. A band which does not completely encircle the head is not
    considered slotted for this subclass, but will be found in subclass 181.2,
    or other indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181.2+, for head coverings having head-contacting means comprising a
    through-split band, and see (1) Note, above.

    182.3,  for head coverings having head-contacting means perforated through
    the thickness of the material combined with means for spacing the head-
    contacting means from the crown.

    182.7,  for head coverings having head-contacting means having a portion
    thereof bent to lie substantially in the plane of the opening for the head
    and having perforations through said portion, the axes of the perforations
    extending substantially perpendicularly to the plane of the opening for the
    head.

    182.8,  for head coverings having head-contacting means in general
    perforated through the thickness of the material.


CLS 2/181.8
TXT Head coverings under subclass 181.2 in which a unitary head-engaging member
    is provided with at least one channel in that face adjacent the head, said
    channel extending substantially perpendicularly to the plane of the opening
    for the head.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182.5,  for head coverings having a spacer positioned between a
    head-contacting member and a crown, said spacer having channels in a face
    thereof extending substantially perpendicularly to the plane of the opening
    for the head.


CLS 2/182.1
TXT Head coverings under subclass 181 provided with means to form a gap between
    at least a portion of the inner face of the side of the crown and an
    opposed portion of the head-contacting means to provide at least a portion
    of a through passage from the exterior of the head covering to the head.

    (1)     Note.  The crown-spacing means may constitute a head-contacting
    strip, per se, having means positioning its outer surface in at least one
    portion thereof spaced inwardly of the inner surface of the opposed portion
    of the crown to provide at least a portion of a through passage from the
    exterior of the head covering to the head.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173.5,  for head coverings in which a crown wall or a continuation thereof
    protrudes outwardly from the general crown contour in the head-contact area
    to provide a space between the crown wall and the head, said space forming
    at least part of a through passage from the exterior of the head covering
    to the head.

    183,    for head coverings having head-contacting means yieldable or
    adjustable for head size or shape and which may provide a space between a
    crown and the head-contacting means.


CLS 2/182.2
TXT Head coverings under subclass 182.1 in which at least a portion of the
    spacing means is either detachable from the head covering, or has a portion
    which is movable out of the general plane of the head opening.

    (1)     Note.  Complete detachment of the spacing means as to leave an
    inoperative head covering is not considered removable (detachable) for this
    subclass, but may be found generally in subclasses 182.1+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181.4,  for head coverings having removable or retractable head-engaging
    means having discontinuous contact with the head periphery.

    182.1+, for crown-spacing means which may be completely removed to leave an
    inoperative head covering, and see (1) Note, above.

    183,    for head coverings having a crown, head-contacting means, and means
    to adjust the size of the head-contacting means to fit the head.

    195.2+, for a head covering having a crown, an outwardly extending visor,
    and means to adjust the circumferential size of the crown.

    311+,   for torso- or limb-encircling strips for supporting or retaining
    garments.


CLS 2/182.3
TXT Head coverings under subclass 182.1 in which the head-contacting means is a
    plate or band having holes or slots through the thickness of the plate or
    band in that portion of the plate or band which faces and generally
    contacts the head surface, and through which air or perspiration may pass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181.6,  for head coverings having head-contacting means perforated through
    the thickness of the material, said head- contacting means additionally
    having discontinuous contact with the head periphery.

    182.7,  for head coverings having head-contacting means having a portion
    thereof bent to lie substantially in the plane of the opening for the head
    and having perforations through said portion, the axes of the perforations
    extending substantially perpendicularly to the plane of the opening for the
    head.

    182.8,  for head coverings having head-contacting means in general
    perforated through the thickness of the material.


CLS 2/182.4
TXT Head coverings under subclass 182.1 in which the spacing means, positioned
    between the head-contacting means and the crown, is in the form of a helix.


CLS 2/182.5
TXT Head coverings under subclass 182.1 in which the spacing means, positioned
    between the head-contacting means and the crown, is either (1) a member
    sinuously curved in a plane which is substantially parallel to the plane of
    the opening for the head, or (2) is a member having channels in and
    coextensive with a face thereof, said channels extending substantially
    perpendicularly to the plane of the opening for the head.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181.8,  for head coverings having a unitary head-engaging member provided
    with at least one channel in that face adjacent the head, said channel
    extending substantially perpendicularly to the plane of the opening for the
    head.


CLS 2/182.6
TXT Head coverings under subclass 182.1 in which the spacing means, positioned
    between the head-contacting means and the crown, provides either (1) a
    strap-like or rod-like element, one end of the element being engaged with
    or fixed to the head-contacting means and the other end of the element
    being engaged with or fixed to another portion of the head covering, or (2)
    an imperforate block having one face engaged with or fixed to the
    head-contacting means and another face engaged with or fixed to another
    portion of the head covering.


CLS 2/182.7
TXT Head coverings under subclass 182.1 in which the spacing means, positioned
    between the head-contacting means and the crown, provides a through opening
    or perforation internally thereof, the axis of the opening or perforation
    extending substantially perpendicularly to the plane of the opening for the
    head.

    (1)     Note. The spacing means may be integral with the head-contacting
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181.6   and 182.3, for head coverings having head-contacting means
    perforated through the thickness of the material in that portion of the
    head-contacting means which faces and generally contacts the head surface.

    182.3,  for head coverings having head-contacting means in general
    perforated through the thickness of the material.


CLS 2/182.8
TXT Head coverings under subclass 181 in which the head-contacting means is a
    plate or band having a passage or slot through the thickness of the plate
    or band and through which air or perspiration may pass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181.6,  for head coverings having head-contacting means perforated through
    the thickness of the material, said head contacting means additionally
    having discontinuous contact with the head periphery.

    182.3,  for head coverings having the head- contacting means perforated
    through the thickness of the material combined with means for spacing the
    head- contacting means from the crown.

    182.7,  for head coverings having head-contacting means having a portion
    thereof bent to lie substantially in the plane of the opening for the head
    and having perforations through said portion, the axes of the perforations
    extending substantially perpendicularly to the plane of the opening for the
    head.


CLS 2/183
TXT Head coverings under subclass 181 having head-contacting means which is
    either yieldable, or capable of being varied in perimeter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181.2+, for head coverings having head-engaging means having discontinuous
    contact with the head periphery and which may be yieldable and thus conform
    to head shape or size when applied to the head, and especially subclass
    181.4, for removable or retractable head-engaging means of the
    discontinuous-contact type which may also adjust the head covering to head
    shape or size.

    182.1+, for head coverings having yieldable means for providing a through
    passage between a crown and a head-engaging member, and in which the
    yieldability may provide for conformance to head shape or size, and
    especially subclass 182.2 for removable or retractable crown-spacing means
    which may also adjust the head covering to head size or shape.

    195.2+, for a head covering having a crown, an outwardly extending visor,
    and means to adjust the circumference of the crown.


CLS 2/184
TXT Devices under subclass 181 comprising means attaching sweatbands to hats by
    sewing.


CLS 2/184.5
TXT Head coverings under subclass 171 provided with an aperture through the
    crown and an element exteriorly of the crown, either (1) in addition to the
    crown or (2) integral with the crown but distinguishable therefrom, and
    which overhangs or obstructs said aperture to serve either (a) to shield
    against rain, the sun or dust, or (b) to guide air flow exteriorly of said
    aperture in a direction other than normal to the plane of said aperture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171.1,  for head coverings in which the crown consists of an upper dome
    portion and a lower head-surrounding portion, said portions being bodily
    movable relative to each other to provide an open area therebetween upon
    separation of the portions and to close said area when the portions are
    brought together.

    171.4+, for head coverings provided with closure means for a crown opening
    and which may serve as an air deflector or weather guard.

    182.6,  for head coverings having a head engaging band and a separate crown
    with blocks, straps or rods interconnecting the band and crown in spaced
    relation.


CLS 2/195.1
TXT Having crown and horizontally extending visor (e.g., baseball cap, etc.):
    Head covering under subclass 171 having a head covering portion which
    extends around and over the top of the head in a contiguous fashion and
    which has attached thereto an outwardly extending horizontal extension
    which extends part way around the crown.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    for an eye shield which protects the wearer against strong light;
    especially, subclass 10 for an eye shield attached to a hat or cap.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    D2,     Apparel and Haberdashery, subclasses 872, 876, 879, 882+, and 893
    for a design of a visored head covering.


CLS 2/195.2
TXT Adjustable:
    Head covering under subclass 195.1 provided with means to enable the
    perimeter of the crown to be varied.


CLS 2/195.3
TXT Elastic portion:
    Head covering under subclass 195.2 wherein the means to enable the
    perimeter of the crown to be varied is constructed of a portion having
    stretchable material.


CLS 2/195.4
TXT With cooperating mechanical coupling:
    Head covering under subclass 195.3 combined with a mechanical fastening
    element attached to the elastic portion.


CLS 2/195.5
TXT Having shape retaining internal form (e.g., plate, wire frame, etc.):Head
    covering under subclass 195.1 including a rigid or semirigid shaping means
    configured to impart a predetermined shape to the head covering and having
    at least one layer of material over its exterior surface.


CLS 2/195.6
TXT For visor:
    Head covering under subclass 195.5 wherein the form is configured to impart
    a predetermined shape to the horizontally extending visor of the head
    covering.


CLS 2/195.7
TXT Having upturned and close fitting rim, brim, or visor:
    Head covering under subclass 171 having a crown and a thin exterior
    extension attached to the lower peripheral edge of the crown, the extension
    being positioned so as to extend along a path which is adjacent to and
    generally parallel to the exterior surface of the crown and completely
    encircles the crown, encircles most of the crown, or encircles only a
    portion of the crown.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    D2,     Apparel and Haberdashery, subclasses 888 for a design patent of a
    head covering with an upturned rim, brim, or visor.


CLS 2/195.8
TXT Knitted or crocheted:
    Head covering under subclass 195.7 wherein the head covering is constructed
    out of a material formed by the interlacing of yarns or threads in a series
    of connecting loops.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclasses 171+ for a knitted head covering
    and process for making the same where the garment is distinguished mainly
    by the knitted fabric or is particularly adapted to be produced by a
    knitting process.

    132,    Toilet, subclass 274 for a hair net.

    D2,     Apparel and Haberdashery, subclass 889 for a design patent of a
    knit or crocheted head covering.


CLS 2/200.1
TXT Of particular, peculiar material:
    Head covering under subclass 171 wherein significance is attributed to the
    material out of which  it is made, and the material is uncommon for a head
    covering.


CLS 2/200.2
TXT Rubber:
    Head covering under subclass 200.1 wherein the head covering has a
    component constructed out of synthetic or natural latex.


CLS 2/200.3
TXT Paper or cardboard:
    Head covering under subclass 200.1 wherein the head covering has a
    component constructed out of a flexible or rigid matt of paper fibers.


CLS 2/202
TXT Devices under subclass 171 of the hood type which closely envelop the head
    except the face.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84      and 85, for garments provided with hoods.


CLS 2/203
TXT Devices under subclass 202 provided with mufflers or throat coverings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     for mufflers, per se.


CLS 2/204
TXT Devices under subclass 202 of the bonnet type and usually provided with
    tying strings or the like.


CLS 2/205
TXT Devices under subclass 202 of the helmet type.


CLS 2/206
TXT Devices under subclass 171 comprising face coverings, such as masks or the
    like.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for face guards and protectors.


CLS 2/207
TXT Devices under subclass 171 of the veil or scarf type.


CLS 2/208
TXT Devices under subclass 171 of the muff type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66,     for fur muffs.

    172,    for head coverings provided with flaps.


CLS 2/209
TXT Devices under subclass 208 of the muff type for the ears.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174,    for ear shields worn during toilet operations, such as hair
    cutting, shampooing, etc.


CLS 2/209.11
TXT Convertible:
    Head covering under subclass 171 in which a part of the head covering is
    relatively movable or interchangeable in order to change the head covering
    to another device either within or outside of the definition of subclass
    171.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171,    for a head covering having ear flaps which may be movable from an
    in-use position to a stored position.


CLS 2/209.12
TXT Head covering includes a crown and outwardly extending visor (e.g.,
    baseball cap, etc.):Convertible head covering under subclass 209.11 having
    a flexible crown portion which extends around and over the top of the head
    and has attached thereto a generally horizontally extending visor.

    (1)     Note.  A visor is defined as a thin planar extension which extends
    only part way around the circumference of the crown.


CLS 2/209.13
TXT Combined with diverse article:
    Head covering under subclass 171 wherein the head covering is combined with
    another device having an added purpose or utility independent of the
    garment and in which the utility of the other device is not destroyed by
    the removal or separation from the head covering.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 3.1+ for a device
    usually in the nature of a clasp for fastening an article which is carried
    about on the clothes; e.g., pencil, flowers, etc.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 329 for hat carrying an
    indicia where any modification of the hat structure is merely for receiving
    the indicia, or for an indicia particularly adapted to be mounted on a hat.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 57.1+ for the
    combination of a hat combined with means for holding a hook, hook of a
    lure, fly, or snell.

    63,     Jewelry, subclass 20 for an ornament secured to clothing by a pin.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclass 181 for a hat or other head
    covering having means other than a pocket attached thereto for transporting
    an article.  Excluded from this subclass are holders for bouquets, tickets,
    and small articles of personal use because they are articles of personal
    use only and not within the idea of transportation.

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, digest 17 for a head mounted device.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    517+ for a signal reflector attached to a garment and subclasses 879+ for a
    movable mirror attached to apparel.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 105+ for a head covering combined with a
    source of radiation energy and having means to modify the distribution or
    composition of the radiation energy emanating from the source and
    subclasses 164+ for a miner's safety lamp.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclass 399 for a device worn on the
    head which shows the workings of or exhibiting:

            (a)     any manufactured apparatus;

            (b)     a natural or manufactured
            apparatus;
    (c)     the shape of a surface;
    (d)     instructional subject matter or                         the work
    done by a student.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclass 27 for a body worn (e.g., head
    covering) toy.


CLS 2/209.14
TXT With article of toiletry (e.g., mirror, cosmetics, etc.):
    Combined head covering under subclass 209.13 wherein the other device
    combined with the head covering is a cosmetic or an article usually found
    in a bathroom, vanity, dressing room, or dresser.


CLS 2/209.3
TXT Head coverings under subclass 171 in which the crown is discontinuous so as
    to provide at least one crown opening therethrough.

    (1)     Note.  A head covering constituting a mere head band extending
    along and contiguous to the head surface is included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10      and 12+, for additional head coverings having a discontinuous
    crown, for example, a strap-type crown supporting an eye shield or shade.

    171.1,  for head coverings having a sectional crown in which the sections
    are bodily movable to provide an open area between the sections.

    172     and 174, for head coverings provided with ear flaps having openings
    therethrough.

    173     and 174, for face coverings with openings to facilitate viewing
    and/or breathing.

    174,    for head coverings with crown openings to expose or support the
    hair for treatment thereof, or to protect the hair when dressing.

    175.1+, 195.1+ and 200.1+; especially, subclass 175.8 for a straw hat,
    subclass 175.9 for a felt hat, and subclass 195.8 for a knitted head
    covering with an upturned and close fitting brim, which by the nature of
    their materials may incidentally permit air flow through the material.

    182.6,  for head coverings having a head band separated from an
    umbrella-type shade by spacing rods.

    202+,   206, 207, and 208+, for hoods and face coverings having openings to
    facilitate viewing, breathing and or hearing.

    208+,   for head coverings of the mufftype which only cover a portion of
    the head.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    54,     Harness, subclasses 80.1+ for bonnets for animals and which may
    have crown openings.


CLS 2/209.4
TXT Head coverings under subclass 209.3 combined with a separate substantially
    annular strip of material completely encircling the head, other than a mere
    head-contacting (sweat) band and in contact with or forming part of the
    crown, and covering or positioned in the opening.

    (1)     Note.  The strip of material may be reticulated or perforated.

    (2)     Note.  The opening may be annular and formed between upper and
    lower crown sections or between a crown section and a brim.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171.8,  for head coverings having an endless band closure for a crown
    opening and movable along the crown surface.

    181+,   for head coverings with head-contacting (sweat) bands, or
    head-contacting (sweat) bands, per se.


CLS 2/209.5
TXT Head coverings under subclass 209.3 provided with a separate foraminated or
    reticulated section lying generally in the crown contour and covering the
    opening.

    (1)     Note.  Head coverings with mere eyelets for openings are excluded,
    and are found in subclass 209.7.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209.4,  for head coverings provided with an opening through the crown and
    having a perforated or mesh annular band superposed over or inserted in the
    opening.

    209.7,  for head coverings provided with a perforation through the crown
    material and which incidentally may include an eyelet, and see (1) Note,
    above.


CLS 2/209.7
TXT Head coverings under subclass 209.3 in which the crown opening is
    substantially smaller than head size and is formed through the crown
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172,    for head coverings provided with perforated ear flaps.

    173     and 174, for face coverings with openings to facilitate viewing
    and/or breathing.

    184.5,  for head coverings having an aperture through the crown and
    combined with anelement overhanging or obstructing said aperture to serve
    as a weather shield or air deflector.

    209.5,  for head coverings having an opening which is covered by a
    perforated or mesh section.


CLS 2/210
TXT Nether garments under the class definition of the bustle type.


CLS 2/211
TXT Nether garments under the class definition of the skirt type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71      through 76, for skirted body garments.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 6 for machines and machine processes
    for making hoop skirts.


CLS 2/212
TXT Devices under subclass 211 embodying both skirt and bifurcated features.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for body garments having similar features.


CLS 2/213
TXT Devices under subclass 211 convertible to a bifurcated form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72      and 86, for body garments having similar features.


CLS 2/214
TXT Devices under subclass 211 adapted primarily for horseback riding.


CLS 2/215
TXT Devices under subclass 211 provided with attached bustles, pads,
    stiffeners, or the like.


CLS 2/216
TXT Devices under subclass 211 of the hoop type.


CLS 2/217
TXT Devices under subclass 211 provided with means for lifting and holding the
    same.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300     through 342, particularly subclasses 315 and 330+, for dress
    lifters, per se.


CLS 2/218
TXT Devices under subclass 211 having features relating to the closing and
    securing the plackets of skirts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    234,    for trouser flies.

    302     for garment supporters of the rigid vertical type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 267.


CLS 2/219
TXT Devices under subclass 211 having features relating to the closing and
    securing the waistbands of skirts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235,    for waist closures for trousers.


CLS 2/220
TXT Devices under subclass 211 comprising waistbands for skirts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     for waistbands for aprons.

    236,    for waistbands for trousers.


CLS 2/221
TXT Devices under subclass 220 comprising adjustable or elastic waistbands.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76,     for body garments having adjustable or elastic waistbands.

    237,    for trousers having adjustable or elastic waistbands.


CLS 2/222
TXT Devices under subclass 211 comprising edge bindings, facings and protectors
    for the hems of skirts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for skirt protectors.

    232,    for bottom protectors for trousers.


CLS 2/223
TXT Devices under subclass 211 provided with straps or the like for suspending
    the skirt on the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230,    for trouser having suspender attaching means.

    300     through 342, for garment supporters, per se.


CLS 2/227
TXT Bifurcated nether garments under the class definition of the type usually
    worn by men and boys as outer garments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for leg guards attached to trousers.

    71,     72, 212, and 213, for skirts having combined or convertible
    bifurcated features.

    77      through 83, for bifurcated body garments.


CLS 2/228
TXT Devices under subclass 227 comprising knee-length trousers such as
    knickerbockers, breeches, or the like.


CLS 2/229
TXT Devices under subclass 227 adapted to be attached to and supported by
    waists or shirts, usually for boys wear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266,    for buttonhole strips.

    300     through 342, for garment supporters, per se.


CLS 2/230
TXT Devices under subclass 227 provided with means for suspending, as straps,
    belt loops, or the like.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223,    for skirts having supporters.

    300     through 342, for garment supporters, per se.


CLS 2/231
TXT Devices under subclass 227 provided with strengthening stays, shape
    retainers, or patches to prevent wear and the like.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300     through 342, for garment supporters, per se.

    401,    for bifurcated underwear having reinforcing means.


CLS 2/232
TXT Devices under subclass 231 provided with protectors for the bottoms of the
    legs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222,    for skirts provided with bottom-protecting means.


CLS 2/233
TXT Devices under subclass 227 provided with means to be worn with trousers to
    conceal abnormal curvature of the legs.


CLS 2/234
TXT Devices under subclass 227 having means for closing and securing the flies
    of trousers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218,    for closing means for skirts.


CLS 2/235
TXT Devices under subclass 227 having means for closing and securing the
    waistbands of trousers or overalls.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219,    for waist closures for skirts.


CLS 2/236
TXT Devices under subclass 227 comprising waistbands for trousers and overalls.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220,    for waistbands for skirts.


CLS 2/237
TXT Devices under subclass 236 having adjustable or elastic waistbands.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76      and 221, for skirts having adjustable or elastic waistbands.


CLS 2/238
TXT Bifurcated nether garments under the class definition of the trunk type
    which consist essentially of a waist portion and a crotch portion without
    legs.


CLS 2/239
TXT Nether garments under the class definition of the stocking type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for stocking protectors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclass 2 for leggings and gaiters.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclasses 178+ for knitted stockings
    distinguished mainly by the knitted fabric structure thereof.


CLS 2/240
TXT Devices under subclass 239 provided with supporters or means to which
    supporters may be attached.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300     through 342, particularly subclasses

    303,    306, 311+, and 335, for hose supporters, per se.


CLS 2/241
TXT Devices under subclass 239 reinforced to resist strains and wear.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclass 182 for reinforced knitted hosiery
    fabric.


CLS 2/242
TXT Devices under subclass 239 without foot portions and worn inside the shoe.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclass 2 for similar devices worn
    outside the shoe.


CLS 2/243.1
TXT GENERAL STRUCTURE:
    Subject matter under the class definition applicable to a garment in
    general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, for:

            (a)     a process for dyeing material of                        any
    kind;(b)    a process of treating a hide,                       skin,
    feather, and animal     tissue;(c)      a process of bleaching material
                            of any kind;

            (d)     a process of improving a felting
                           property of a fiber, hair, fur,
                     etc.;(e)        a process of chemically modifying      a
    textile or organic material;(f) a process of treating a textile or
                         fiber with a fluid;(g)     a process of treating a
    fiber of a                      fabric, a hide, a skin, or a
                       leather with a chemical or                   fluid.

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, for a process of treating a textile
    fabric subsequent to the fabrication thereof for putting the article in
    better condition for marketing.

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, for:

            (a)     a process for the production of                         a
    fabric article or structure by the              mechanical interengagement
    of                      fibers, threads, or the like;

            (b)     a process for the production and
                           treatment of a fabric article and
       structure;

            (c)     a process for treating a fabric
                            article or structure not provided
                          for elsewhere.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, for a process of manufacturing a fabric
    structure by the forming of loops and drawing the bights thereof through
    previously formed loops, and subclasses 169+ for a product produced by
    significant knitting steps.

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 400+ for a sewn stock material and subclasses
    475.01+ for a process for sewing in general.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 383+ for a woven fabric and
    appropriate subclasses for a process of making a woven fabric.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, for a machine for making, repairing, or
    maintaining in proper condition an article of apparel; especially,
    subclasses 7+ for a machine for making a hat and a process for operating
    the machine.


CLS 2/244
TXT Devices under subclass 243.1 comprising trimmings for garments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175.3,  for a head covering having a crown, brim, and an exterior crown
    encircling band or trim.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a trim material in the form of a single or plural layer web or sheet,
    and especially subclasses 4-6 and 15+ for ornament-type articles.


CLS 2/245
TXT Devices under subclass 244 comprising ornaments such as bows or buckles for
    shoes.


CLS 2/246
TXT Devices under subclass 244 comprising ornaments for military or naval
    insignia or the like.


CLS 2/247
TXT Devices under subclass 243.1 comprising pockets for garments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160,    for gloves having pockets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    450,    Foundation Garments, subclasses 89 and 150 for brassieres and
    corsets, respectively, having article-carrying pockets.


CLS 2/248
TXT Devices under subclass 247 provided with reinforcing means.


CLS 2/249
TXT Devices under subclass 247 provided with means for attaching articles such
    as watches, purses, or other articles.


CLS 2/250
TXT Devices under subclass 247 provided with means for engaging and holding
    watches, pencils or other articles.


CLS 2/251
TXT Devices under subclass 247 provided with means for fastening the openings.


CLS 2/252
TXT Devices under subclass 247 provided with means tending to close the
    openings.


CLS 2/253
TXT Devices under subclass 247 provided with two or more compartments.


CLS 2/254
TXT Devices under subclass 247 provided with means tending to prevent articles
    falling out when the pocket is inverted.


CLS 2/255
TXT Devices under subclass 243.1 comprising stiffening and staying means for
    garments, as coat linings, corset stiffeners and the like.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132     and 134, for collars having stiffening means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 27 for machines and machine processes
    for making garment stiffeners.

    450,    Foundation Garments, subclasses 41+ and 53 for brassieres having
    stays or stiffening means and including patents directed to the stay, per
    se, when disclosed solely for use with a brassiere.


CLS 2/256
TXT Devices under subclass 255 wherein the stiffening or staying means is in
    the form of a strip, strand or wire-like element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132,    for collar stiffeners.


CLS 2/257
TXT Devices under subclass 256 having features relating to the structure of
    stay ends and means for attaching the same.


CLS 2/258
TXT Devices under subclass 256 made of special materials.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a plural or single layer web or sheet and especially subclasses 364+
    for a coated or structurally-defined rod, strand, fiber or filament, and
    subclasses 457+ for a laminate including metal.


CLS 2/259
TXT Devices under subclass 258 made of metal.


CLS 2/260
TXT Devices under subclass 259 comprising coated or covered metal stays.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for process for making covered or encased stays by
    surface bonding.


CLS 2/260.1
TXT Stays under subclass 260 wherein a coating is adhesively or autogenously
    bonded or secured to the stay.

    (1)     Note.  The bond must be between the stay and the coating; coverings
    for stays wherein the constituent parts of the covering are secured
    together by bonding but there is no bond with the stay, are found in
    subclass 260 above.


CLS 2/261
TXT Devices under subclass 259 provided with portions reinforced or specially
    stiffened.


CLS 2/262
TXT Devices under subclass 259 which include hinges.


CLS 2/263
TXT Devices under subclass 259 which include garment-closure-fastening elements.


CLS 2/264
TXT Devices under subclass 259 made of formed wire.


CLS 2/265
TXT Devices under subclass 243.1 comprising either (1) means for attaching
    buttons or other fasteners (hooks, eyes, snap fasteners, etc.) to garments
    by means of strips upon which the fasteners are mounted or directly upon
    the garments themselves, (2) structure forming a buttonhole combined with
    additional garment structure more than necessary to form or reinforce the
    buttonhole, or (3) buttonholes formed in strips or tapes which are adapted
    to be attached to garments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229,    for waistbands having button strips.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 659+ for flaccid
    buttonholes, per se, and subclasses 682.1+ for means for mounting
    separable-fastener components.

    112,    Sewing, subclass 406 for a web or sheet including a separable
    fastener sewn thereto; subclasses 431 and 437 for a buttonhole or eyelet
    including overedge stitching; subclass 475.25 for a method of forming a
    stitched buttonhole or eyelet; and subclasses 475.14+ for a method of
    attaching a fastener, such as a button, to a base.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    66 for processes for adhesively securing fasteners to garments.


CLS 2/266
TXT Devices under subclass 265 comprising buttonholes formed in strips or tapes
    which are adapted to be attached to garments.


CLS 2/267
TXT Devices under subclass 243.1 comprising pads to be applied to garments to
    change the apparent shape of the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for protective pads for trousers.

    24,     for protective knee pads.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    450,    Foundation Garments, subclasses 54 and 55+ for brassieres having
    pads and subclass 57 for breast pads, per se.


CLS 2/268
TXT Devices under subclass 267 comprising pads for the shoulders of garments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    459+,   for a guard or protector for the shoulder (e.g., football shoulder
    pads, shoulder strap protectors, etc.).


CLS 2/269
TXT Sleeves or legs of garments under subclass 243.1 with means to adjust the
    length thereof.


CLS 2/270
TXT Devices under subclass 243.1 comprising means for closing the openings at
    wrist portions of sleeves or the lower portions of legs of garments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228,    for trousers having closing means at the knee.


CLS 2/271
TXT Devices under subclass 243.1 comprising loops and the like to be applied to
    coat collars or other parts of garments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175.7,  for hanger attachments for hats.


CLS 2/272
TXT Devices under subclass 243.1 comprising general lining structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97,     for a lining for a coat.

    164,    for a lining for a glove.

    181,    for a lining for a head covering.

    255,    for lining embodying stiffening means for the garment.


CLS 2/273
TXT Devices under subclass 243.1 comprising weights usually applied to the
    bottoms of skirts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 403 for a paper weight and
    subclass 404 for other weighting devices.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclass 349.1
    for weights for hanging or drape-type fabrics.


CLS 2/274
TXT Devices under subclass 243.1 comprising bindings for garments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142,    175.2 and 222, for bindings applied to particular garments.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 418+ for
    sewn stock material including an edge binding.


CLS 2/275
TXT Devices under subclass 243.1 comprising seam structure specially adapted
    for garments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165     and 166, for a glove having a reinforced seam.

    184,    for seams between sweats and hats.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 402+ for a sewn seam in a web or sheet, and
    subclasses 475.01+ for a sewing method in general.


CLS 2/279
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising handkerchiefs or simulated
    handkerchiefs having provisions for mounting them on garment for purposes
    of adornment.

    (1)     Note.  Handkerchiefs or folded handkerchiefs claimed in combination
    with a clasp for attaching to a pocket are to be found herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for handkerchiefs not otherwise classifiable.

    243.1+, for garment trimming elements or processes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 209.1+ for
    fabric devices particularly adapted for wiping, daubing and polishing.

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 3.1 for clasps or
    separable fasteners for securing handkerchiefs or simulated handkerchiefs
    to a garment when no significant handkerchief structure is claimed.

    D2,     Apparel and Haberdashery, subclasses 500+ for design patents on
    handkerchiefs.


CLS 2/300
TXT Garment supporters under the class definition having combined therewith
    additional devices or features which are for other than garment supporting
    or adjusting purposes. Included among other things are garment supporters
    having decorative features claimed as such (such as sashes, bows, or
    beads), guards, putting-on aids, pockets, article holders, indicators, etc.

    (1)     Note.  See Notes (3) and (4) under the class definition for the
    line between this class and Class 24.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44      and 45, for suspenders combined with added features such as pads to
    brace the body.

    310,    for combinations of belts and suspenders.

    338+,   for belt-strap or -strip constructions which may be ornamental but
    have no added ornamental features.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, appropriate subclasses, for devices
    peculiarly designed for transportation of packages and articles and wherein
    a garment supporting feature may be incidental.


CLS 2/301
TXT Garment supporters under the class definition which are wholly or partly
    (1) convertible from one type of supporter to another, (2) convertible to
    other uses, or (3) structurally designed for reversal, i.e., changed from
    right to left or turned over.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300,    for supporters combined with other structure.

    310,    for belts and suspenders combined. This subclass (301) includes
    suspenders convertible to belt and vice versa.

    313     and 316, most of the devices in subclass 313 can be used with the
    loop uppermost and in subclass 316 many can be used either as a loop or a
    single line garter.


CLS 2/302
TXT Garment supporters under the class definition in which garments or
    garment-holding means or parts thereof are vertically spaced from each
    other by a member, usually rigid, extending from lower supporting-or
    holding-means to an upper-supporting or -holding means.

    (1)     Note.  Two or more torso-encircling members may be held in spaced
    relation. Compare this subclass with subclasses 44, 45 and 308 of this
    class.

    (2)     Note.  A garment supporter with a rigid vertical connection between
    holders so as to hold a garment or part of a garment supporter vertically
    spaced is located in subclass 302 or 303 since the supporter is regarded as
    having special connecting features.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218,    for placket closures including rigid elements.

    255+,   for stiffening and staying in general.

    313     and 314+, for pendant supporters of nonrigid type.


CLS 2/303
TXT Devices under subclass 302 in which the vertical member is disclosed for
    supporting hose.


CLS 2/304
TXT Garment supporters under the class definition in which two or more garments
    are supported by separate holders which are connected together but
    substantially spaced from each other as by strips or strands.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include single unitary devices such
    as a belt which may hold together or support two or more garments by means
    of holding devices directly attached to the belt, for instance, to retain a
    shirt down and support trousers.  For such belts, see this class,
    subclasses 312+.  For combined fasteners, see Class 24, Buckles, Buttons,
    Clasps, etc., particularly subclasses 305+.

    (2)     Note.  Garment supporters combined with sanitary pad holders are
    here or in subclass 305 of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305,    see Note (2).

    312+,   see Note (1).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., see Note (1).


CLS 2/305
TXT Devices under subclass 304 having means passing over the shoulder or to the
    shoulder from which the entire supporter is pendant.

    (1)     Note.  Suspenders combined with "shirt hold-downs" are here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    307,    for devices usually attached to a shoulder suspender which support
    two or more garments.


CLS 2/306
TXT Devices under subclass 304 which support only the hose on both legs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305,    for hose supports suspended from shoulder straps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    450,    Foundation Garments, subclasses 6, 26, 28+, and 116 for garment
    supporters where some body supporting or compressing features is claimed;
    plural hose supporters combined with means for attachment to a brassiere or
    corset or other garment or with a mere torso-encircling belt are here (306).


CLS 2/307
TXT Devices under subclass 304 for supporting two or more waistline garments.
    These usually comprise diverging straps at the end of suspender straps for
    connection to trousers plus additional straps to hold undergarments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305,    for such devices in combination with shoulder straps.


CLS 2/308
TXT Garment supporters under the class definition including (1) more than one
    limb- or torso- encircling closed loop, (2) a single strip or strand
    encircling the limb or torso more than once, (3) a limb- or
    torso-encircling strip or strand plus another strip or strand at least
    partially encircling the limb or torso, or (4) any combination of the above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302,    for belts held vertically spaced apart.

    320,    for belts having chordal elements.


CLS 2/309
TXT Garment supporters under the class defintion which only partially encircle
    a limb or torso to retain or support a garment. So-called "halfbelts" are
    here.

    (1)     Note.  Devices which include partially encircling members plus
    other means acting to support a garment holder, such as shoulder straps and
    horizontal straps, are excluded. These devices are provided for in other
    subclasses above or below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220,    221, 236, and 237, for such devices incorporated with garment
    waistbands.

    320,    for belts having chordal elements.

    337,    for friction devices or twisters.


CLS 2/310
TXT Garment supporters under the class definition in which means passing over
    the shoulder and means encircling the torso are combined to support a
    single garment or a single garment holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44      and 45, for body braces and supports.

    305,    for similar organizations for supporting a plurality of garments.

    327+,   for shoulder-type garment supporting organizations not including
    means completly encircling the torso.


CLS 2/311
TXT Garment supporters under the class definition which include means
    encircling the limb or torso formed wholly or partly by a strip or strand
    which conforms to the limb or torso.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300,    which includes among other things combined belts and sashes.

    301,    for garment supporters which are convertible or reversible, such as
    suspenders convertible to belt or reversible belts.

    308,    for supporters which encircle the limb or torso more than once.

    309,    for garment supporters of the partial- encircling type.

    310,    for supporters having both shoulder suspension and torso-encircling
    features.

    338+,   for belt, strap or strip constructions, per se, even though broadly
    claimed as a garter, belt or closed loop.


CLS 2/312
TXT Devices under subclass 311 including means or features in addition to the
    limb- or torso- encircling strip or strand and their fastenings to hold or
    retain a garment such as clasps, pins or pads.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302,    for belts with rigid spacing devices.

    304+,   for supporters having holders for a plurality of garments.


CLS 2/313
TXT Devices under subclass 312 in which a limb- encircling means is pendant
    from supporting means.

    (1)     Note.  Most of these supporters are capable of use with loop
    uppermost. Compare with this class, subclass 301.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305,    308 and 310, for other garment supporters including
    pendant-encircling means.


CLS 2/314
TXT Devices under subclass 312 which include a garment-holding element which is
    spaced from and connected to the limb- or torso-encircling means so that in
    use the element is pendant therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302     and 303, for devices having rigid vertically-spaced holders.

    304+,   for supporters having spaced holders for a plurality of garments.

    313,    for devices wherein the encircling means is pendant.


CLS 2/315
TXT Devices under subclass 314 having (1) at least one pendant garment-holding
    element attached to the encircling means plus other means for holding or
    retaining the garment or the encircling means, or (2) two or more pendant
    garment-holding means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304+,   for garment supporters having spaced holders for supporting a
    plurality of garments.


CLS 2/316
TXT Devices under subclass 314 in which the encircling means is passed around a
    limb and then across itself or one end of the encircling means is attached
    behind the other end, thus leaving a free end to which a holding means is
    attached.

    (1)     Note.  Many of these devices may be used as single-line supporters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    308,    for wrap-around garment supporters wherein the limb or torso is
    encircled more than once.

    315,    which includes similar devices having two or more garment holders,
    for instance one at each end.


CLS 2/317
TXT Devices under subclass 314 in which the strip or strand which conforms to
    the limb or torso has means at each end, including a loop, for detachable
    or loose engagement with at least one intermediate element such as a loop
    or ring which connects the ends of the strip or strand. Usually the pendant
    element is connected to the intermediate element.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include devices wherein the
    intermediate element is fixedly attached to the strip as by stitches at
    either or both ends of the strip.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    318,    for similar constructions lacking the pendant features.


CLS 2/318
TXT Devices under subclass 312 in which in addition to the strip or strand
    which conforms to the limb or torso there is a member to which holding
    means are attached, which member is inserted or insertible between sections
    or ends of the strip or strap.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    317,    to complete the search.


CLS 2/319
TXT Devices under subclass 312 in which the garment-holding means or a part
    thereof is slidable onto the torso- or limb-encircling strip or strand or
    adapted to be readily attached thereto or detached therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    314+    and 318, for other combinations wherein holders  are attached
    slidably or detachably to strips or strands.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., particularly subclasses 305+ for
    devices which connect the garment to a belt or belt buckle.


CLS 2/320
TXT Devices under subclass 312 in which the means for holding or retaining a
    garment include no movable fastener parts. These include (1) a member or
    members attached to the belt which act to increase friction, such as pads
    or buttons, which press on the garment to be held, (2) elements on the
    inside of the belt which are chordal, i.e., would intersect the arc of belt
    when it is curved, or (3) belts having impaling members but no other
    structure to hold the impaling means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    309,    for chordal devices, per se.

    337,    for twisters or friction devices, per se.

    338+,   for belt, strip or strap constructions which have facings adapted
    to increase friction, such as ribbed or roughened fabrics.


CLS 2/321
TXT Devices under subclass 311 with significant fastening devices, such as a
    buckle, for connecting the ends to form a closed loop. The device must be
    capable of connection with the opposed strip or strand end itself, as in a
    tongue and hole buckle, or must engage another fastener part on the opposed
    end.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301,    for reversible belts including reversible buckles.

    311,    for belts, the ends of which are tied or connected by loops.

    312+,   particularly subclasses 314, 317 and 318 for similar garment
    supporters having in addition other garment-holding means.

    338+,   for belt constructions with no significantly claimed fastener.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 163+ and 308+ for belt
    buckles where no significant belt structure is claimed.


CLS 2/322
TXT Devices under subclass 321 in which an end of the torso- or limb-encircling
    strand or strip overlaps the other portions of the belt and is retained by
    a fastening device, i.e., a buckle, through which a free end of the belt,
    strip or strand passes.


CLS 2/323
TXT Garment supporters under the class definition which include means
    attachable to a garment to hold or retain it and a strip or strand
    connected to or cooperating with said means, which strip or strand extends
    to other holding means or to a place from which it is supported.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301,    for garment supporters which are convertible or reversible, such as
    suspenders convertible to belt.

    302,    for rigid vertical-type supporters and see the notes thereto.

    304+,   for similar devices or organizations having means for supporting or
    holding a plurality of garments.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 305+ and see (4) Note
    under the class definition.


CLS 2/324
TXT Devices under subclass 323 which include spring devices or in which the
    connecting strips or strands are springs. Mere elastic strands or fabrics
    made thereof are not considered to be springs for purposes of this
    classification.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    339,    for belt, strap or strip constructions, per se, having springs
    incorporated therein.


CLS 2/325
TXT Devices under subclass 323 in which means are provided for adjustment in
    definite intervals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 70 and 580+.


CLS 2/326
TXT Devices under subclass 323 in which there are, (1) plural suspension strips
    connected together, (2) suspension strips which cross each other, (3)
    strips which diverge from one point or place, or (4) any combination of the
    above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44      and 45, for garment supporters combined with features acting to
    brace the body or parts therof.

    304+,   particularly 305 and 307, and subclasses 308 and 310, for similar
    supporters having spaced holders for supporting a plurality of garments.


CLS 2/327
TXT Devices under subclass 326 in which (1) shoulder strips or strands cross
    each other, or (2) form a closed loop in themselves or in conjunction with
    other elements including the strips or strands which are attached to the
    garment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305,    for similar supporters having means to support a plurality of
    garments.

    310,    for similar supporters which in addition include a member
    completely encircling the torso.


CLS 2/328
TXT Devices under subclass 327 where the suspension strips or strands, usually
    those which pass over the shoulders, cross each other and some special
    construction or feature is provided at the place of crossing, such as a
    clip, slits or divided straps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., particularly subclasses 163+ and
    308+.


CLS 2/329
TXT Devices under subclass 327 having garment holders comprising a strip or
    strand which runs, i.e., slides through cord-retainer means.The running
    strip or strand may be used with the closed-loop type of suspender or
    itself form a part of the closed loop.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300+,   for running strip or strand devices on garment supporters not of
    the closed loop or crossed-strip type.

    340     and 341+, for suspender ends and saddle-type cord retainer elements.


CLS 2/330
TXT Devices under subclass 326 including means retaining a strip in such a
    manner that the strip or strand can move in the retaining means.

    (1)     Note.  The strip or strand may move freely when the device is in
    use or the retaining means is such that the strip or strand can be manually
    moved to adjusted position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329,    to complete the search.

    340     and 341+, for suspender ends and saddle-type cord retainer elements.


CLS 2/331
TXT Devices under subclass 330 in which the running strip or strand forms more
    than one loop, i.e., zigzags or doubles back upon itself.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include devices wherein the strip or
    strand is doubled through a holding device, i.e., buckle, more than once.


CLS 2/332
TXT Devices under subclass 330 in which at least one of the running strips or
    strands extends downwardly and then upwardly to form a V or U and a strip
    or strand retaining means is at the bottom of the V or U.


CLS 2/333
TXT Devices under subclass 326 not provided for above and having signifcant
    detachable or movable connecting means between two or more strips or
    strands.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301,    which includes suspender constructions with pivotal connections to
    form a belt.

    324,    which includes constructions having springs between the strips or
    strands.

    325,    which includes suspender constructions having step adjustments.

    327     through 332, for other supporters having detachable or movable
    connections.


CLS 2/334
TXT Devices under subclass 333 in which the connecting means includes a pivot
    member normal to the strip.


CLS 2/335
TXT Devices under subclass 323 in which the article supported is a hose.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    303,    306, 314+, 325, and 326+, wherein are found hose supporters of the
    type falling within said subclasses.


CLS 2/336
TXT Devices under the class definition which are elements used with or as
    garment supporters and not provided for elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., appropriate subclasses, for
    fastening structures in general. For the line between Classes 2 and 24, see
    (4) Note under the class definition. See in particular subclasses 464+ for
    clasps, per se, used as garment supporters or retainers.


CLS 2/337
TXT Elemental devices under subclass 336 which are (1) pads to increase
    friction, or (2) devices to twist a part of the garment such as the top of
    a hose.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220,    221 and 237, for similar devices combined with a garment.

    320,    to complete the search.

    338+,   for strap or strip constructions having  roughened facings.


CLS 2/338
TXT Elements under subclass 336 wherein the claims are directed to the
    constructions of the elongated elements usually flexible, used in garment
    supports. Included are elements connecting parts of garment supporters and
    the construction of the body-encircling part of body belts.

    (1)     Note.  See the references under "SEARCH CLASS" for classes
    providing for fabric-stock material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    308,    for belts made of plural spaced limb or torso-encircling strips.

    320,    for belts having nonfastening holding means.

    337,    for friction devices and twisters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 200+.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclasses 169+.

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, appropriate
    subclasses.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 383+.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for a single or plural layer web or sheet stock material product and
    especially subclass 364 for a coated- or structurally-defined rod, strand,
    fiber or filament and subclass 473 for a laminate including leather.


CLS 2/339
TXT Devices under subclass 338 in which the members are (1) composed of two or
    more longitudinal sections connected together, or (2) include, or are
    composed of spring elements acting longitudinally.

    (1)     Note.  Belt, strip or strand constructions involving merely elastic
    strands or fabrics composed thereof are not here included but are
    classified in subclass 338 of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    317,    318, 324, 325, and 333 to complete the search.


CLS 2/340
TXT Devices under subclass 338 forming that part of a suspender which is
    attachable to the supported garment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 659+ for suspender ends
    wherein no more than a button-hole, button loop and/or protector is claimed.


CLS 2/341
TXT Devices under subclass 336 comprising structure forming a saddle-like
    passage through which a cord or similar strand-like element is passed to
    retain the cord.

    (1)     Note.  A saddle type strand retainer is classified in subclass 341
    or 342, rather than Class 24, Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., since the
    retainer is regarded as specialized in its use as a garment supporter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329     and 330+, for such devices combined with suspender structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 115+ for cord and rope
    holders in general, and subclass 265 for strap-end attaching devices.


CLS 2/342
TXT Devices under subclass 341 in which the saddle is provided with an openable
    or movable part so that the cord or other strand-like element may be
    inserted into the passage from the side or the saddle can be removed from
    the strip which supports it. These devices are often called "castoffs".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    325,    for saddles which are movably connected to a strip for step
    adjustment.


CLS 2/400
TXT Bifurcated nether garments under the class definition worn next to the body
    either with or without an additional covering of street clothes.

    (1)     Note.  Patents specific to baby pants or panties are classified
    here if the patent claims bifurcated baby pants, per se. Claims to baby
    pants in combination with a diaper or other absorbent pad are classified in
    Class 604, Surgery.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78.1+,  for underwear of the union-suit type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 358+ for absorbent pads or diapers; and
    subclasses 393+ for absorbent pads or diapers combined with a diaper
    holding means such as a garment, holder or support.


CLS 2/401
TXT Underwear under subclass 400 wherein significance is attributed to (1)
    particular reinforcing structure and/or (2) elastic gores or inserts.


CLS 2/402
TXT Underwear under subclass 400 made from a single piece of material.


CLS 2/403
TXT Underwear under subclass 400 designed to be worn by a male.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400,    for underwear designed to be worn by either sex and improvements
    and attachments not designed with the sex of the wearer in mind.


CLS 2/404
TXT Underwear under subclass 403 provided with leg portions, e.g., "boxer
    shorts" as opposed to "briefs".


CLS 2/405
TXT Underwear under subclass 403 wherein significance is attributed to the fly
    structure of the garment.


CLS 2/406
TXT Underwear under subclass 400 designed to be worn by a female.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400,    for underwear designed to be worn by either sex and improvements
    and attachments not designed with the sex of the wearer in mind.


CLS 2/407
TXT Underwear under subclass 406 provided with a leg portion, e.g., "shorts" as
    opposed to "briefs".


CLS 2/408
TXT Underwear under subclass 407 having crotch structure which is openable or
    which cannot be secured in a closed position.


CLS 2/409
TXT Underwear under subclass 406 having leg coverings, commonly called hose,
    integral therewith or secured thereto.


CLS 2/410
TXT Device under subclass 455 wherein significance is attributed to means in or
    on a head covering or helmet that is intended to protect the head of a
    wearer, or at least a portion of the head.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171+,   for a head covering used for ornamental or decorative purposes.


CLS 2/411
TXT Device under subclass 410 provided with means on or in a helmet to cushion
    the impact of a force directed against the head of the wearer of said
    helmet.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses are directed to "hard-hat"
    helmets worn in an environment where injury is apt to occur to an
    unprotected head.  Some helmet structure of these subclasses is similar to
    the helmet-adjusting structure of subclasses 417+, but the primary
    intention in a helmet of these subclasses 411+ is energy-absorption.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    417+,   and see (1) Note above.


CLS 2/412
TXT Device under subclass 411 in which the cushion includes a plurality of
    layers of different material located between the wearer's head and the
    outside of the helmet.


CLS 2/413
TXT Device under subclass 411 in which the cushion includes one or more
    chambers and said chamber(s) have air or liquid therewithin.


CLS 2/414
TXT Device under subclass 411 in which the cushion includes a plurality of
    portions secured to the inside of the helmet, which portions are made of a
    relatively soft, yieldable material.


CLS 2/415
TXT Device under subclass 414 in which at least one of the portions extends
    from the helmet to cover or protect that portion of the body that is
    between the head and the trunk.


CLS 2/416
TXT Device under subclass 411 in which the helmet is spaced from the head of
    the wearer by a supporting structure that directly contacts the wearer's
    head and is connected to the helmet to maintain the desired space between
    the head and the helmet worn thereon.


CLS 2/417
TXT Device under subclass 410 in which one or more parts of a helmet directly
    engage the head of a wearer to support the helmet on the head of the
    wearer, and in which said part(s) may be positioned or repositioned
    relative to each other or may be positioned or repositioned relative to the
    helmet to accommodate said head-engaging parts to the head dimensions of
    different wearers having different head dimensions.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for a vertical adjustment of the
    helmet, that is, for an adjustment for height of crown of the wearer's head.


CLS 2/418
TXT Device under subclass 417 in which the part(s) that are positioned or
    repositioned are those that engage the periphery of the head that
    circumscribes the head substantially horizontally above the ears when the
    head is erect.


CLS 2/419
TXT Device under subclass 418 in which the part(s) that are positioned or
    repositioned also include those that engage a portion of the head that
    extends substantially vertically above the ears when the head is erect.


CLS 2/420
TXT Device under subclass 418 in which two or more parts directly engage the
    head of a wearer, and are positionable or repositionable relative to each
    other to accommodate for different head dimensions.


CLS 2/421
TXT Device under subclass 410 provided with means for holding the helmet or
    head covering on the head of the wearer.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the helmet-retention means includes a strap fastened
    to the helmet and extending under the jaw or chin of the wearer.


CLS 2/422
TXT Device under subclass 410 provided with means for holding an object on the
    exterior of the helmet.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the article that is held on the helmet is not
    related to the head-covering function of the helmet, but is something that
    the wearer desires to keep within reach. Examples of articles so held
    include a light, reflector, cover, container, etc.


CLS 2/423
TXT Device under subclass 410 provided with means to protect the organ(s) of
    hearing as well as the head of a wearer.


CLS 2/424
TXT Device under subclass 410 provided with means to protect the front part of
    the head, extending from the forehead to the chin, as well as the remainder
    of the head of a wearer.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for a combination of head protector
    and face protector. See subclass 9, below this subclass in the schedule,
    for a face protector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for a face protector, and see (1) Note above.

    427,    for a face protector that includes goggles.


CLS 2/425
TXT Device under subclass 410 wherein significance is attributed to a head
    covering used to protect the head while performing sports activities.

    (1)     Note.  The sports activities referred to are exemplified by such
    activities as boxing, wrestling, football, and similar body-contact sports
    during which injury to the head is apt to occur.


CLS 2/426
TXT Device under subclass 15 in which the eye-protector is included in means
    through which a line of vision of the wearer extends.

    (1)     Note.  The line of vision may extend through a transparent (e.g.,
    glass, etc.) material or through hole(s) or slit(s) in nontransparent
    material, but in either material the protective function of the material is
    the significant feature of the structure rather than the optical or vision
    function. For a device wherein vision is the function of the device, see
    the search class notes herebelow.

    (2)     Note.  In this subclass is found a pair of goggles comprising
    primarily a frame that protects that part of the head that surrounds or
    encloses the eye of a wearer, but not necessarily covering the eye itself.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 299.01+ for liquid crystal optical-filter
    compositions, and subclasses 582+ for other filter compositions.

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclasses
    41+ for spectacles and eyeglasses whose transparent elements have an
    optical characteristic, or whose frames in the absence of such optical
    characteristic lack any body-protecting structure. See section V of the
    Class 351, Class Definition, for the detailed classfication line between
    spectacles and goggles.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    350+ for an optical filter for light in the infrared or ultraviolet range,
    and subclasses 885+ for an optical filter in the visible-light range.

    501,    Compositions: Ceramic, subclasses 11+ for a glass composition
    having optical filter properties.


CLS 2/427
TXT Device under subclass 426 in which said means covers and protects not only
    the eyes of the wearer, but also covers and protects the front part of the
    head extending from the forehead to the chin.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for a face protector, per se.

    424,    for a device that includes a head     protector and face protector.


CLS 2/428
TXT Device under subclass 427 in which said means includes an edge that
    contacts a boundary of said front part of the head and conforms to the
    configuration of said boundary.

    (1)     Note.  The edge is usually resilient in order to form a close seal
    to the face, and thereby prevents entry of water or gas to the interior of
    the face shield.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    440+,   for goggles having a sealed cup for each eye.


CLS 2/429
TXT Device under subclass 428 in which said means includes a cover for the
    front part of the head, which cover is removably secured to said means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    441,    for a removable lens in a goggle cup.

    443,    for a removable lens in a frame.


CLS 2/430
TXT Device under subclass 428 in which said means includes a transparent face
    cover that is generally curved in a plane that includes the eyes of the
    wearer, whereby the wearer is permitted a large peripheral field of vision.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    447,    for an eye shield having a wide-angle lens.


CLS 2/431
TXT Device under subclass 426 in which said means covers and protects primarily
    the organ(s) of sight of the wearer.

    (1)     Note.  See the (2) Note under subclass 426 the difference between
    goggles for subclass 426 and eyeshields for this subclass 431.


CLS 2/432
TXT Device under subclass 431 in which the cover means protects the eye(s)
    against the effects of high-intensity energy from the visible light
    portions of the electromagnetic spectrum.


CLS 2/433
TXT Device under subclass 432 in which the cover means is an opaque barrier to
    light, which barrier has one or more relatively small holes or narrow slits
    therein, the holes or slits permitting a narrow field of vision while
    protecting the eye(s) of the wearer.


CLS 2/434
TXT Device under subclass 431 in which the cover means protects one or a pair
    of spectacles that correct defective vision, or in which a second cover
    means overlies the first mentioned cover means.

    (1)     Note.  In either structure defined above, the overlying cover
    protects the underlying element from damage, whether the underlying element
    is a spectacle lens or a particular form of cover that is more valuable
    than the overlying cover plate.


CLS 2/435
TXT Device under subclass 431 in which the cover means prevents the
    condensation of moisture on any surface that is within the wearer's field
    of vision.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass condensation is prevented by a double lens,
    chemical coating of a lens surface, heating means, etc., these being only
    exemplary of the means herein.


CLS 2/436
TXT Device under subclass 435 in which condensation is prevented by passing air
    over the surface via passageways that admit ambient air to pass over or
    near the surface.


CLS 2/437
TXT Device under subclass 436 in which the air passageways are twisted, winding
    or circuitous, thus preventing light from entering the interior of the eye
    shield.


CLS 2/438
TXT Device under subclass 431 in which the cover means is provided with a
    member located on the outside of the cover that moves, or that causes
    movement of air, relative to the outside of the cover.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass is an eyeshield having a member analogous
    to a windshield wiper on an automobile, an eyeshield having an auxiliary
    lens mounted on the outside, and an eyeshield having means to blow air in
    front of the lens for cleaning the lens, these being only examples of the
    devices herein.


CLS 2/439
TXT Device under subclass 431 in which the cover means is supported by a single
    element that encircles and sustains the cover in position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    442,    for a goggle having a frame for each eye.


CLS 2/440
TXT Device under subclass 431 in which at least two of said cover means are
    provided, one of which means is intended to cover each of the organs of
    sight of the wearer, and each of which means includes an edge that contacts
    a boundary of said organ and conforms to the configuration of said boundary.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    428+,   for a face shield having a seal to prevent entry of water or gas to
    the inside of the shield.


CLS 2/441
TXT Device under subclass 440 in which either of said means includes a cover
    that is removably secured to said means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    429,    for a removable-face plate in a face shield.

    443,    for a removable lens in a frame.


CLS 2/442
TXT Device under subclass 431 in which the cover means is supported by an
    element for each organ of sight, each of which elements encircles and
    sustains its cover in position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    439,    for a goggle having a unitary frame.


CLS 2/443
TXT Device under subclass 442 in which either of said covers is removably
    secured to its supporting element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    429,    for a removable-face plate in a face shield.

    441,    for a removable lens in a goggle cup.


CLS 2/444
TXT Device under subclass 442 in which said supporting elements are mounted
    inside the framework of an eye-protector, the connection between the
    element(s) and the framework being above the level of the wearer's eyes.


CLS 2/445
TXT Device under subclass 431 in which significance is attributed to means for
    joining together two eyepieces of a pair of goggles by a joint that is
    located between the eyepieces and permits a relatively small degree of
    motion therebetween.


CLS 2/446
TXT Device under subclass 445 in which said joint includes elements that
    contact the nose of a wearer and serve to partially support the goggles on
    the wearer's head.


CLS 2/447
TXT Device under subclass 431 in which said means includes a transparent-eye
    cover that is generally curved in a plane that includes the eyes of the
    wearer, whereby the wearer is permitted a large peripheral field of vision.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    430,    for a face shield having a wide-angle lens.


CLS 2/448
TXT Device under subclass 426 in which significance is attributed to a bar
    member that extends between the eye-protector and the ear of a wearer,
    which member helps to hold the eye-protector on the wearer's head.


CLS 2/449
TXT Device under subclass 448 in which significance is also attributed to
    elements that partly extend between the eye-protector and the wearer's face
    along the sides of the wearer's head to cover the exposed area adjacent the
    wearer's eyes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    451,    for a pivoted-side shield.


CLS 2/450
TXT Device under subclass 448 in which significance is attributed to means for
    joining together said bar member and said eye-protector.


CLS 2/451
TXT Device under subclass 426 in which significance is attributed to elements
    that partly extend between the eye-protector and the wearer's face along
    the sides of the wearer's head to cover the exposed area adjacent the
    wearer's eyes, which elements are articulated on the eye-protector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    449,    for a goggle having temples and side shields.


CLS 2/452
TXT Device under subclass 426 in which significance is attributed to a flexible
    strap that partly or completely encircles the head of a wearer and which
    retains or supports the eye-protector on the head of a wearer.


CLS 2/453
TXT Device under subclass 426 in which significance is attributed to an
    articulated joint between the eye-protector and a support for the
    eye-protector, which joint extends horizontally when the head of a wearer
    is erect.


CLS 2/454
TXT Device under subclass 426 in which significance is attributed to a
    construction that permits the eye-protector to be brought into a compact
    form that occupies less space than the eye-protector occupies during use.


CLS 2/455
TXT GUARD OR PROTECTOR:

    Device under the class definition worn primarily for protection against
    unusual conditions, such as the application of force, high temperature, and
    the like against a part of the body of a wearer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 516.1 for apparel specially constructed to
    resist penetration of radiant energy rays.

    602,    Surgery: Splint, Brace, or Bandage, subclasses 41+ for protective
    bandages and shields.


CLS 2/456
TXT Body cover:

    Guard or protector under subclass 455 comprising a body suit which protects
    the trunk, arms, and legs of the wearer.


CLS 2/457
TXT Hazardous material body cover:

    Body cover under subclass 456 configured to protect the wearer against
    exposure to toxic material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 516.1 for apparel specially constructed to
    resist penetration of radiant energy rays.


CLS 2/458
TXT Thermal body cover:

    Body cover under subclass 456 configured to protect the wearer against
    exposure to extreme temperatures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.16,   for an insulated diving suit.

    93,     for a coat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 211 for an electrically heated garment.


    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclasses 88+ for a personal
    flotation device and subclasses 102+ for a body garment having buoyancy
    means to sustain the user while floating in the water.


CLS 2/459
TXT Shoulder protector:

    Guard or protector under subclass 455 wherein the device is configured to
    protect the portion of the body extending between the lower end of the neck
    and the collar bone against the application of a strong force.


CLS 2/460
TXT Strap protector:

    Shoulder protector under subclass 459 wherein the device is configured to
    protect the shoulder against the application of a strong force by a thin
    strip of material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclass 264 for an article carrier
    having a shoulder strap pad.


CLS 2/461
TXT Both shoulders:

    Shoulder protector under subclass 459 wherein the device is configured to
    protect both shoulders.


CLS 2/462
TXT Vest type:

    Shoulder protector under subclass 461 wherein the device is also configured
    to protect a portion of the chest and back.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    463,    for a chest protector.

    467,    for a back protector.


CLS 2/463
TXT Chest protector:

    Guard or protector under subclass 455 wherein the device is configured to
    protect the front portion of the body between the collar bone and the 13th
    rib pair against the application of a strong force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.5,    for a device specially designed to resist penetration, as by
    projectiles, swords, knives, etc., where (a) features of shape for fitting
    the body or (b) means for wearing or otherwise securing the device to the
    body are claimed.


    462,    for a guard or protector which covers the chest, back, and both
    shoulders.


CLS 2/464
TXT Abdomen protector:

    Guard or protector under subclass 455 wherein the device is configured to
    protect the front region of the body between the 13th rib pair and the
    waist against the application of a strong force thereon.


CLS 2/465
TXT Side impact torso protector:

    Guard or protector under subclass 455 wherein the device is configured to
    protect a side region of the trunk against the application of a strong
    force thereon.


CLS 2/466
TXT Groin protector:

    Guard or protector under subclass 455 wherein the device is configured to
    protect the portion of the body adjacent the thigh and the trunk.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    602,    Surgery: Splint, Brace, or Bandage, subclass 72 for a suspensory
    device having a rigid concave member or element adapted to fit over and
    protect the external genitalia of a wearer.


CLS 2/467
TXT Back protector:

    Guard or protector under subclass 455 wherein the device is configured to
    protect the rear portion of the trunk between the neck and pelvis against
    the application of a strong force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    462,    for a guard or protector which covers the chest, back, and both
    shoulders.


CLS 2/468
TXT Neck protector:

    Guard or protector under subclass 455 wherein the device is configured to
    protect the portion of the body between the head and shoulders against the
    application of a strong force.

              CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS

            The following subclasses are a collection of cross-references of
    published disclosures pertaining to various specified aspects of apparel
    articles.

    (1)     Note.  Disclosures are placed in these subclasses for their value
    as references and as leads to appropriate main or secondary fields of
    search without regard to their original classification.


CLS 2/900
TXT CAMOUFLAGED:
    An apparel article or device under the class definition  intended and
    constructed to be difficult to distinguish from its surroundings (e.g.,
    because of its color or configuration).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclass 15 for a warship so rendered invisible or
    indistinguishable.

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclass 115 for canopies which
    may be camouflaged to hide articles thereunder.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 919 for a
    cross-reference art collection of camouflaged stock material product.


CLS 2/901
TXT ANTIBACTERIAL, ANTITOXIN, OR CLEAN ROOM:
    An apparel article or device under the class definition intended and
    constructed to prevent the passage of harmful microorganisms, particulate
    matter, or gaseous material therethrough.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, appropriate subclasses for an apparel article used in the
    inspection and treatment of diseases, wounds, and other abnormal conditions.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 516.1 for a garment having means to
    protect the wearer against harmful electromagnetic or nuclear radiation.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclass 402
    for a biocidal or pharmaceutical composition adapted for use with wearing
    apparel.


CLS 2/902
TXT ANTISTATIC:
    An apparel article or device under the class definition which prevents the
    buildup of an electrical charge.


CLS 2/903
TXT FIBERGLASS:
    An apparel article or device under the class definition which has a layer
    of material constructed out of glass fibers encased in resin.


CLS 2/904
TXT POLYTETRAFLUOROETHYLENE (E.G.,         GORTEX#, TEFLON#, ETC.):An apparel
    article or device under the class definition which has a portion thereof
    constructed out of the chemical compound polytetrafluoroethylene.


CLS 2/905
TXT ELECTRIC:
    An apparel article or device under the class definition which has a
    component which requires a source of electrical power.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 211 for an electrically heated garment.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses
    115+ for a garment combined with means to apply electrical energy for
    Therapeutic use.


CLS 2/906
TXT Head covering or protector:
    An apparel article or device under subclass 905 wherein the electric power
    is used to run a component attached to an apparel article or device which
    covers a portion of the body above the neck.


CLS 2/907
TXT GLOVE HAVING THREE, FOUR, OR SIX FINGER POCKETS:
    An apparel article or device under the class definition which is adapted to
    cover the hand and has three, four, or six separate finger receiving
    cavities.


CLS 2/908
TXT GUARD OR PROTECTOR HAVING A HOOK-LOOP TYPE FASTENER (E.G., VELCRO#,
    ETC.):An apparel article or device under the class definition wherein the
    apparel article or device is intended and constructed to protect the body
    against unusual conditions such as the application of a strong force (e.g.,
    high temperature, strong light to the eyes, etc.)  and wherein the article
    or device has a hook-loop type fastener.


CLS 2/909
TXT Head protector (e.g., helmet, goggles, etc.):
    An apparel article or device under subclass 908 wherein the apparel article
    or device is intended and constructed to guard or protect a portion of the
    body above the neck.


CLS 2/910
TXT Hand or wrist protector:
    An apparel article or device under subclass 908 wherein the apparel article
    or device is intended and constructed to protect a portion of the body
    between the outermost portion of the forearm and the outermost portion of
    the fingers.


CLS 2/911
TXT Leg protector:
    An apparel article or device under subclass 908 wherein the apparel article
    or device is intended and constructed to protect a portion of the body
    between the lower torso and the foot.


CLS 2/912
TXT GARMENT HAVING A HOOK-LOOP TYPE FASTENER (E.G., VELCRO#, ETC.):An apparel
    article or device under the class definition wherein the apparel article or
    device is intended and constructed to cover a portion of the body of the
    wearer and wherein the article or device has a hook-loop type fastener.

    (1)     Note.  The cooperating loops of the hook and loop type fastener may
    be the material of the apparel article.


CLS 2/913
TXT Chest encircling (e.g., shirt, vest, etc.):
    An apparel article or device under subclass 912 wherein the apparel article
    or device has a portion which extends around the upper torso of the wearer.


CLS 2/914
TXT Combined nether (e.g., union suit, bag type, overalls, etc.): An apparel
    article or device under subclass 913 wherein the apparel article or device
    also extends around the waist and legs of the wearer.


CLS 2/915
TXT Having plural body encircling layers (e.g., coat, etc.):
    An apparel article or device under subclass 913 wherein the apparel article
    or device has at least two collateral body covering layers.


CLS 2/916
TXT Neck covering (e.g., necktie, etc.):
    An apparel article or device under subclass 912 wherein the apparel article
    or device is intended and constructed to cover a portion of the wearer
    between the head and chest.


CLS 2/917
TXT Hand or wrist covering:
    An apparel article or device under subclass 912 wherein the apparel article
    or device is specifically intended and constructed to cover a portion of
    the body between the radial outermost portion of the forearm and the radial
    outermost portion of the fingers of the wearer.


CLS 2/918
TXT Head covering:
    An apparel article or device under subclass 912 wherein the apparel article
    or device is specifically intended and constructed to cover a portion of
    the body above the neck.


CLS 2/919
TXT Lower torso and leg encircling (e.g., skirts, trousers, etc.):An apparel
    article or device under subclass 912 wherein the apparel article or device
    is specifically intended and constructed to extend around the lower torso
    and a portion of the legs of the wearer.


CLS 2/920
TXT GARMENT SUPPORTER OR RETAINER HAVING A HOOK-LOOP TYPE FASTENER (E.G.,
    VELCRO#, ETC.):An apparel article or device under the class definition
    wherein the apparel article or device is intended and constructed to
    support a garment and wherein the article or device has a hook-loop type
    fastener.


CLS 4/
TTL BATHS, CLOSETS, SINKS, AND SPITTOONS

CLS 4/
TXT This class includes bathing apparatus, water-closets, dry closets, urinals,
    bed-pans, spittoons, closet tanks or cisterns, and ventilating and
    disinfecting apparatus for the above-noted apparatus and for sewers, except
    such devices as have been especially provided for in other classes.

    (1)     Note. Seat-operated devices include the following subclasses:  238,
    250, 335+, 338, 408, 436, 468, 473, and 486.  Lid-operated devices include
    the following subclasses:  238, 469, 473, and 486.  Dash-pots include the
    following subclasses:  248, 360, and 388.

    (2)     Note.  The following classes should be searched for art relating to
    this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 60+ for an invalid bed, subclasses 81.1+ for means
    to lift and transfer an invalid independent of a bed and subclass 90 for an
    invalid bed with a toilet.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 104.03+ for
    mechanical or gaseous pressure devices for hammering, cutting, scraping,
    loosening or flushing deposits from conduits, pipes or tubes; and
    subclasses 406+ for an air blast soot blower for tubing.

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 221+.

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 381+ for an obstructive
    structure that bars traffic through a passage and is mounted to (1) move in
    a regular, repetitive, predetermined path, or (2) be taken away.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 34+ for a
    prefabricated bathroom.

    68,     Textiles: Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 216+ for a hand held
    pounder with plunger.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 161+ for a waste toilet or related
    device.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 344+ for a water heater.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 22.11+ for
    internal surface treatment of pipe etc., subclass 24 for internal surface
    treatment of hollow work with movable fluid applying nozzle and/or with
    plugging or sealing of work passage or opening, subclass 166 for a conduit
    cleaner, subclass 167 for a conduit cleaner with movably or flexibly
    mounted spray or jet applying  conduits or nozzle, subclass 168 for a
    conduit cleaner with a pump and movable nozzle, and subclass 169 for a
    conduit cleaner using a pump.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 240 for a system in which a material
    (e.g., a chemical or physical agent) different from the fluent material of
    the system is introduced to clean parts of the system, subclasses 247.41+
    for U-shaped liquid trap seal, subclasses 312+ for leakage or drip
    collecting, subclass 362 for a floor drain, subclasses 386+ for a liquid
    level condition responsive device in means to receive an accumulation
    thereof (float actuated inlet valve for a toilet tank), subclasses 577+ for
    a tank with a movable or adjustable outlet or overflow pipe, subclasses
    615+ for an articulated faucet or spout, subclass 800 for a nozzle or spout
    with a removable closure member, subclass 801 for a faucet or spout, and
    subclasses 861+ for flow control means for branched passages.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 89+ for a closure or plug
    for a pipe and subclass 90 for a closure or plug having means to introduce
    pressurized fluid into the pipe.

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 233+ for a fluid conducting motion silencer
    and especially subclass 234 for a flush closet type.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 632, 638, 660+, 696+,
    702+, and 749+ for processes of chemical treatment for purification or
    separation, and subclasses 198.1+ for apparatus for purification or
    separation with additional treating material.

    220,    Receptacles, and see the notes to the main class definition for
    receptacles and see the notes to subclass 200 for closures in other classes.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for a general article
    dispensing mechanism.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for dispensing means in general,
    and subclasses 67+ for a float that follows the material level and actuates
    a dispenser.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 120+ for a
    mechanism that intermittently moves material and subclasses 127+ for a
    manual material mover (e.g., a dispenser) mechanism.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 12.1+ for
    apparatus that mixes two or more supplies at dissimilar temperatures where
    one supply is controlled according to the temperature of the mixed fluid or
    the temperature of one of the fluid supplies.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing; subclasses 225.1+ for a
    jet that continuously moves relative to the support during spraying,
    subclasses 398+ for the combining of separately supplied fluids, subclass
    428.5 for liquid flow entraining atmospheric air into the stream and Digest
    13 for a tube cleaner.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses for comminutors, per se, especially subclass 46.013 for an
    under-sink disposal including mounting structure to support the disposal
    under a sink. Combinations of such devices with sinks and the like are
    classified in Class 4.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 578+ for a delivery
    roll holder (e.g., a dispenser) mechanism or subclasses 538+ for a winding
    machine mechanism with a supply roll.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 129, 146, 241, 274.1, and 311.2+.

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 58 for molding apparatus for forming closet
    fixtures.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 12 for flush valves of the
    fluid actuated or retarded type, subclasses 153+ for valves combined with
    inlet or outlet structure comprising a single flow path, especially
    subclass 155 for a valve associated with a nozzle or spout, subclasses 213+
    for a mechanical movement actuator and especially subclasses 231+ for a
    lever type mechanical movement actuator, subclass 340 for a valve actuator
    surrounding a nozzle, and subclasses 349+ for an inlet or outlet element
    which serves as a valve actuator.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 75+ for device
    specifically designed to produce an intimate contact between a gas and a
    liquid, and Digest 75 for a device using flowing liquid to aspirate gas.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclass 8 for a slip-on coupling for a
    faucet, subclass 46 for an escutcheon for a pipe joint or coupling,
    subclass 64 for a static building construction support for a pipe joint or
    coupling, subclasses 125.1+ for means to provide a coupling for several
    lines, subclasses 134.1+ for a U-shaped fitting, subclasses179+ for an
    elbow joint and subclass 193 for an end that pierces or penetrates a side
    or a plate.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 219.1+ for a connected pad or cover
    (e.g., a slipcover) and Digest 10 for a chair or seat with occupant arising
    assistance.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 228 and 229 for cabinets
    with washbasins and drains.  Also see 2(a) of the Class Definition.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclasses 196+, 261+ and 268+ for a coating implement with
    material supply, used for cleaning.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for joints and
    connections in general.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 921 for handicapped person
    handling.

    417,    Pumps, appropriate subclasses for a pump of general utility, per
    se, which may be used to clear an obstruction but is not adapted for use on
    a bath, flush closet, sink, or drain pipe.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclasses for a
    rotary expansible chamber pump, per se.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 1+ for a process to disinfect,
    preserve, deodorize, or sterilize, and subclasses 243+ for apparatus to
    treat a solid article or material with a fluid chemical.

    424,    Drug Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 40+
    for a composition that is usually incompletely burned or at least has a
    chemical reaction to project the composition into the air as a smoke, mist,
    or aerosol, and subclasses 76.1+ for a deodorant, disinfectant, or
    olfactory desensitizer composition.

    454,    Ventilation, for ventilating devices not peculiar to the subject
    matter of this class, subclass 43 for a flue heater, subclass 48 the
    ventilation of an exterior vault or manhole cover, subclasses 83+ for
    ventilation of rail vehicles in general, and subclasses 1+, 115+, 162+, and
    341+ for exhaust type ventilating devices associated with roof structure.

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, for cleaning
    compositions having a particular shape or structure to adapt them for use,
    search subclasses 109+ for compositions tailored for a specific utility
    (e.g., toilet soap bars, including packages); for cleaning compositions of
    general utility, search subclasses 406 and 439 for packaged compositions,
    subclasses 382+ for antiseptic or biocidal compositions, and subclasses 440
    and 447+ for shaped, barlike compositions.

    601,    Surgery:  Kinesitherapy, particularly subclasses 154+ for a device
    or method therefor which may be structurally similar to a Class 4 bathing
    device which provides medical treatment to the body for a named ailment or
    injury thereof. Generic terms such as "treatment'', "therapy'', "massage'',
    "hydrotherapy'', "hydromassage'', etc. are to be interpreted broadly for
    placement in Class 4 lacking a disclosed body treatment for a named medical
    condition or physical injury.  Exceptions to this rule comprise generically
    disclosed and claimed hydrotherapy of dental tissue or genitalia, or a
    device for applying a force which imparts a specific motion to the body or
    portion thereof which shall be classified in Class 601.


CLS 4/111.1
TXT With heating means:

    Device under subclass 449 having means for elevating the temperature of
    material discharged to the closet to dry or burn the same.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221,    for sewer gas conducted to a furnace or to a fluid fuel burner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 235+ for incinerators of refuse material.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 40+
    for a composition  that is usually incompletely burned or at least has a
    chemical reaction to project the composition into the air as a smoke, mist,
    or aerosol, and subclasses 76.1+ for a deodorant, disinfectant, or
    olfactory desensitizer composition.


CLS 4/111.2
TXT And cyclic control means:

    Device under subclass 111.1 wherein means is provided to regulate the
    sequence within which operations occur or the length of time required for
    the performance of any particular operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 191 for refuse burners having cyclic control
    means.


CLS 4/111.3
TXT Having seat actuator or interlock:

    Device under subclass 111.2 wherein the position of the seat either
    initiates actuation of an operation or allows the operation to be initiated.


CLS 4/111.4
TXT Fluid fuel burner:

    Device under subclass 111.1 wherein means is provided for supplying a
    combustible gas or liquid to the combustion chamber to effect incineration
    of the waste material.


CLS 4/111.5
TXT Electric:

    Device under subclass 111.1 wherein an electric heating means is used to
    effect combustion of the material discharged to the closet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 250 for refuse incinerators having electric
    heating means.


CLS 4/111.6
TXT And separate drying zone:

    Device under subclass 111.1 wherein moisture is driven off the material
    prior to its introduction into an incinerating region.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 224+ for refuse incinerators having drying
    means.


CLS 4/114.1
TXT Urinal:

    Subject matter under subclass 458 wherein the closet is for receiving urine
    as distinguished from fecal matter.


CLS 4/144.1
TXT Urinal:

    Subject matter under subclass 449  means for receiving urine only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301+,   for a urinal with a liquid flush.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, particularly subclasses 573+ for a urinal disclosed for
    use in collecting a specimen for a diagnostic purpose.

    604,    Surgery, particularly subclasses 327+ for a device for collecting a
    bodily discharge, e.g., urine, and which is (a) attached to or worn on the
    body for any reason, including for the convenience of the user, or (b) used
    to receive the urinary discharge from a patient suffering from a urinary
    control ailment, e.g., incontinence.  An unclaimed article of clothing,
    e.g., underpants, may be used to attach the device to the body of the user.



CLS 4/144.2
TXT Disposable, entirely or a portion:

    Subject matter subclass 144.1 wherein receiver is designed to be taken away
    as a unit or a part may be removed.


CLS 4/144.3
TXT Contacting and conforming to anatomy:

    Subject matter under subclass 144.1 wherein the receiver is designed to
    touch and have the same form as the structure of the body.


CLS 4/144.4
TXT Spout only:

    Subject matter under subclass 144.1 wherein the receiver is in the shape of
    a pipe or tube.


CLS 4/209
TXT The general miscellaneous subclass for devices for ventilation of apparatus
    included in this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111.1+, for ventilation of a dry closet having heating means to dry or burn
    human waste material.

    219+,   for ventilation of a sewer.

    306,    for ventilation (i.e., noxious fume removal) of a urinal type flush
    closet.

    347+,   for ventilation (i.e., noxious fume removal) of a flush closet.

    472,    for ventilation of a dry closet having a valved bowl.

    475,    for ventilation of a dry closet having a two receptacles, one being
    a subchamber.

    477,    for ventilation of a dry closet having a receptacle inside an
    enclosure that includes a closet seat.

    479,    for ventilation of a dry closet having a receptacle such as a bowl,
    pot, bag, or etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    454,    Ventilation, for ventilating devices not peculiar to subject matter
    of this class, particularly subclasses 341+ for ventilating devices which
    exhaust stale air from a room.


CLS 4/210
TXT Devices for ventilating railway-car closets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    454,    Ventilation, particularly subclasses 83+ for the ventilation of
    rail vehicles, in general.


CLS 4/211
TXT Systems of piping for apparatus relating to this class used in a house
    having ventilating structure combined therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219+,   for means to ventilate a sewer.

    252.1+, for a flush closet bowl support, coupling, seal, or fastener.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, for fluid handling apparatus in general, see
    particular subclasses 357+ for fluid handling devices combined with
    building structure.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 125.1+ for multiple outlet
    fittings, subclasses 134.1+ for a U-type fitting, and subclass 179 for
    elbow fittings of general utility.


CLS 4/213
TXT The air and gases are carried away by an air pump operated by an electric
    motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, appropriate subclasses for
    electric motor structure.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses, for
    electric motor control systems.


CLS 4/214
TXT The pump is operated by a water motor.


CLS 4/215
TXT The gases are removed by a water-jet pump.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 151+ for jet pump structure, per se.


CLS 4/216
TXT The general miscellaneous structure of a bowl provided with a ventilator,
    not provided for in preceding subclasses. Also includes the valve structure
    controlling the vent pipe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    348+,   for a flush closet with a ventilated bowl.


CLS 4/217
TXT Closet seats provided with ventilating means.


CLS 4/218
TXT The structure of the roof connection with the vent pipe.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 42+ for roof flashing.

    454,    Ventilation, for ventilating devices not peculiar to subject matter
    of this class, particularly subclasses 1+, 115+, 162+, and 341+ for
    exhaust-type ventilating devices, in general, which are associated with
    roof structure.


CLS 4/219
TXT Means for ventilating sewers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211,    for house systems.


CLS 4/220
TXT Sewer ventilators provided with disinfecting apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221,    for sewer gas conducted to a furnace or to a fluid fuel burner.

    222+,   for general disinfecting or chemical dispensing apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 1+ for a process to disinfect,
    preserve, deodorize, or sterilize, and subclasses 243+ for apparatus to
    treat a solid article or material with a fluid chemical.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 40+
    for a composition that is usually incompletely burned or at least has a
    chemical reaction to project the composition into the air as a smoke, mist,
    or aerosol, and subclasses 76.1+ for a deodorant, disinfectant, or
    olfactory desensitizer composition.


CLS 4/221
TXT The sewer gases are conducted to a furnace or to a fluid-fuel burner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222+,   for general disinfecting or chemical dispensing apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 40+
    for a composition  that is usually incompletely burned or at least has a
    chemical reaction to project the composition into the air as a smoke, mist,
    or aerosol, and subclasses 76.1+ for a deodorant, disinfectant, or
    olfactory desensitizer composition.

    454,    Ventilation, subclass 43 for a flue heater and subclass 48 for
    exterior vault or manhole covers.


CLS 4/222
TXT The general subclass for disinfecting apparatus pertaining to this class
    not provided for in any of the following subclasses:  111.1, 220, 221, 261,
    294, 309, or  459.

    (1)     Note. This subclass also includes a dispensed  material that can
    deodorize, clean, or color.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111.1+, for a dry closet having a drying or burning means.

    220+,   for a sewer, a ventilator provided with disinfecting apparatus.

    261,    for a spittoon provided with disinfecting apparatus.

    294,    for a closure adapted to be placed over the waste outlet of a sink
    or bath having a disinfectant means.

    309,    for a urinal only, including a disinfecting or deodorizing means.

    459,    for a dry closet using a chemical for disinfection.

    464+,   for a dry closet having a magazine containing granular material and
    means for discharging a portion to the bowl.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 632, 638, 660+, 696+,
    702+, and 749+ for processes of chemical treatment for purification or
    separation, and subclasses 198.1+ for apparatus for purification or
    separation with additional treating material.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 1+ for a process to disinfect,
    preserve, deodorize, or sterilize, and subclasses 243+ for apparatus to
    treat a solid article or material with a fluid chemical.

    424,    Drug Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 40+
    for a composition that is usually incompletely burned or at least has a
    chemical reaction to project the composition into the air as a smoke, mist,
    or aerosol, and subclasses 76.1+ for a deodorant, disinfectant, or
    olfactory desensitizer composition.

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, for cleaning
    compositions having a particular shape or structure to adapt them for use,
    search subclasses 109+ for compositions tailored for a specific utility
    (e.g., toilet soap bars, including packages); for cleaning compositions of
    general utility, search subclasses 406 and 439 for packaged compositions,
    subclasses 382+ for antiseptic or biocidal compositions, and subclasses 440
    and 447+ for shaped, barlike compositions.


CLS 4/222.1
TXT With screen:

    Subject matter under subclass 222 including means to strain material from a
    drain outlet.


CLS 4/223
TXT The disinfectant is dispensed directly to the bowl.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225.1,  for dispensing to bowl through overflow.

    226.1,  for dispensing to bowl through flush pipe.

    227.1+, for dispensing to bowl through the water in flush tank.

    464+,   for a dry closet having a magazine containing granular material and
    means for  discharging a portion to the bowl.


CLS 4/224
TXT The dispenser acts in combination with and generally after the device which
    flushes out the bowl.


CLS 4/225.1
TXT Dispensing to overflow of flush tank:
    Subject matter under subclass 222 wherein the apparatus discharges a
    chemical into a structure which prevents spill over in the reservoir,
    containing flush water used to wash out a closet bowl, by discarding the
    excess to the bowl for the purpose of disinfecting, deodorizing, cleaning,
    or coloring the water.


CLS 4/226.1
TXT Dispensing to or dispenser in flush pipe:
    Subject matter under subclass 222 wherein the apparatus discharges a
    chemical into a conduit which conducts flush water from a source of water
    under pressure to a closet bowl of a flush closet for the purpose of
    disinfecting, deodorizing, cleaning, or coloring the water.


CLS 4/227.1
TXT Dispensing to water in flush tank:
    Subject matter under subclass 222 wherein the apparatus discharges a
    chemical into the reservoir of water, used to wash out a closet bowl, of a
    flush closet for the purpose of disinfecting, deodorizing, cleaning, or
    coloring the water.


CLS 4/227.2
TXT Float actuated:
    Subject matter under the subclass 227.1 wherein the dispenser is activated
    by a member that is buoyed by and which uses the rise or fall of the water
    level in the flush tank to discharge a chemical into the water of the flush
    tank for the purpose of disinfecting, deodorizing, cleaning, or coloring
    the water.


CLS 4/227.3
TXT Valve:
    Subject matter under subclass 227.2 wherein the float actuates a device to
    control the flow of the chemical from the dispenser into the water of the
    flush tank for the purpose of disinfecting, deodorizing, cleaning, or
    coloring the water.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 67+ for a float that follows the material
    level and actuates a dispenser.


CLS 4/227.4
TXT Water level actuated:
    Subject matter under subclass 227.1 wherein the dispenser is activated by
    the rise or fall of the water level in the flush tank to discharge the
    chemical into the water of the flush tank for the purpose of disinfecting,
    deodorizing, cleaning, or coloring the water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227.2+, for a float actuated dispenser.


CLS 4/227.5
TXT Static dispenser (i.e., no moving part):
    Subject matter under subclass 227.4 wherein the dispenser is a passive
    structure (having no moving parts) that is actuated by the rise or fall of
    the water level in the flush tank to discharge a chemical into the water of
    the flush tank for the purpose of disinfecting, deodorizing, cleaning, or
    coloring the water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227.1,  for a static dispenser that constantly saturates the flush water
    with a chemical.


CLS 4/227.6
TXT Having a flush water dosing chamber:
    Subject matter under subclass 227.5 wherein the dispenser has an enclosed
    space for the chemical to mix with the flush water received from the flush
    tank to form a concentrated solution that is to some degree isolated from
    the water in the flush tank during the quiescent period between flushes and
    is then discharged during flushing or filling for the purpose of
    disinfecting, deodorizing, cleaning, or coloring the water.


CLS 4/227.7
TXT With a siphon:
    Subject matter under subclass 227.6 wherein the dispenser uses the suction
    created by the weight of falling water to discharge the concentrated
    solution in the dosing chamber into the flush water of the flush tank for
    the purpose of disinfecting, deodorizing, cleaning, or coloring the water.


CLS 4/228.1
TXT Dispensing to air from closet:
    Subject matter under subclass 222 wherein the apparatus is disclosed for
    use with a closet to discharge a chemical into the atmosphere surrounding
    the closet for the purpose of disinfecting or deodorizing the air.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220+,   for a sewer ventilator provided with disinfecting apparatus.


CLS 4/229
TXT The closet seat is provided with a chemical holder.


CLS 4/230
TXT The closet-seat lid is provided with a chemical holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    470.


CLS 4/231
TXT The holder is suspended in the closet bowl.


CLS 4/232
TXT The closet bowl is constructed with a chamber for chemicals.


CLS 4/233
TXT Means are provided for washing, cleaning or disinfecting the seat or cover,
    or both.


CLS 4/234
TXT The combination of a closet seat with its  lid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237,    for seats, 242, for covers and 251, for operators.


CLS 4/235
TXT More than one seat is provided for the closet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239.


CLS 4/236
TXT The invention resides in means for hinging both the seat and lid.

    (1)     Note.  For seat hinges, see this class, subclass 240.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 365 for other hinges for pivotally
    connecting three or more members.


CLS 4/237
TXT The structure of the closet seat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    234,    for seats and covers combined, and 98 and 217.


CLS 4/238
TXT Closures for the hole in the seat operated by movement of the seat when
    occupied.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    485.


CLS 4/239
TXT The seat is one adapted to be placed over the closet seat, either for
    sanitary reasons or for the use of children, or is adapted to be employed
    on a vessel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235,    for a closet bowl having more than one seat.

    245.1+, for a sanitary seat cover.

    246.1+, for an opener or closer for a closet seat or lid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 188.09+ for a seat having a receptacle
    of general utility thereunder, and subclasses 250.1+, for a seat detachably
    connected to a subjacent seat.  An apertured seat having means to connect
    it to a subjacent apertured seat is classified in this class (4).


CLS 4/240
TXT The invention resides in the hinging of the closet seat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236     and 241.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, sub-classes 221+ for hinges of general
    application.


CLS 4/241
TXT Means for counterbalancing or causing a seat to be swung upward, generally
    by a weight or spring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248.


CLS 4/242.1
TXT LID:
    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a cap that closes the
    opening of a seat or a closet bowl of the closet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    234,    for a lid combined with a seat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 219.1+ for a connected pad or cover
    (e.g., a slipcover).


CLS 4/243.1
TXT MECHANISM POSITIONS COVER ON SEAT:
    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a machine that places
    a shield on a seat having an opening to a closet bowl and blankets the seat
    rim leaving the opening clear for the purpose of providing user access to
    the closet and a sanitary surface upon which to sit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244.1+, for a device that dispenses a sanitary cover.

    245.1+, for a sanitary cover.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 120+ for a
    mechanism that intermittently moves material.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 550+ for a machine for
    unwinding elongated material and subclasses 590+ for a coil holder.


CLS 4/243.2
TXT Tubular type cover:
    Subject matter under subclass 243.1 wherein the mechanism is of the type
    that uses a hose shaped shield that encloses the rim of the seat and may
    have a longitudinal slot to enable it to be slipped over the seat's rim to
    provide a sanitary surface upon which to sit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    245.2,  for a tubular shaped cover for seat.


CLS 4/243.3
TXT Single continuous roll of flat covers:
    Subject matter under subclass 243.1 wherein the mechanism is of the type
    that uses only one sheet of flexible material having a row of consecutive
    shields formed thereon and wound into a tubular form so that successive
    shields are positioned on the seat providing a sanitary surface upon which
    to sit.


CLS 4/244.1
TXT COVER DISPENSER:
    Subject matter under the class definition comprising an apparatus for the
    disbursement of a shield to blanket the rim of a closet seat while leaving
    the opening in the seat clear for user access to the closet while sitting
    upon a sanitary surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243.1+, for a dispenser also having means to place a sanitary cover upon
    the seat of a closet.

    245.1+, for a sanitary cover.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for a general article
    dispensing mechanism.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 120+ for a
    mechanism that intermittently moves material and especially 127+ for a
    manual material-mover (e.g., a dispenser) mechanism.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 550+ for a machine for
    unwinding elongated material and subclasses 590+ for a coil holder.


CLS 4/244.2
TXT Continuous roll:
    Subject matter under subclass 244.1 wherein the device uses only one sheet
    of flexible material having a row of consecutive shields formed thereon and
    wound into a tubular form so that a single shield may be extracted to
    blanket the rim of a closet seat while leaving the opening in the seat
    clear for user access to the closet while sitting upon a sanitary surface.


CLS 4/244.3
TXT Pad mounted on seat:
    Subject matter under subclass 244.1 wherein the device uses shields stacked
    up on top of each other, aligned and mounted to the closet seat so that an
    old shield may be removed and a new shield exposed, and blankets the closet
    seat rim leaving the opening clear to provide user access to the closet
    while sitting upon a sanitary surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    245.3+, for means to mount a cover on a seat.


CLS 4/245.1
TXT COVER FOR SEAT:
    Subject matter under the class definition comprising an article manually
    placed over or upon a seat of a closet to protect the seat or to aid the
    user (e.g., comfort, boost, or sanitation) and leave the opening in the
    seat clear to provide a user access to the closet.

    (1)     Note. A cover provides for the opening in a seat while a lid closes
    off the seat and its opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239,    for a seat adapted to be placed over a closet seat.

    243.1+, for a mechanism that positions a sanitary cover on a seat of a
    closet.

    244.1+, for a sanitary cover dispenser.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 219.1+ for a connected pad or cover
    (e.g., a slipcover).


CLS 4/245.2
TXT Tubular type:
    Subject matter under subclass 245.1 wherein the cover is  hose shaped to
    enclose the rim of the closet seat and may have a longitudinal slot to
    enable it to be slipped over the seat's rim which leaves the opening in the
    seat clear to provide the user access to the closet.

    (1)     Note. This does not include a cover that envelopes the entire seat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243.2,  for a mechanism that positions a tubular sanitary cover on the seat
    of a closet.


CLS 4/245.3
TXT Securing means:
    Subject matter under subclass 245.1 wherein the cover has means that may be
    separate from or a part of the cover to hold it to the closet seat and
    leave the opening in the seat clear to provide the user access to the
    closet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243.1+, for a mechanism that positions and holds a cover to a seat.

    244.3,  for covers stacked up on top of each other, aligned and mounted to
    the seat.

    245.2,  for a cover structure that is inherently secure by enclosing the
    seat rim.


CLS 4/245.4
TXT Adhesive:

    Subject matter under subclass 245.3 wherein the securing means is a gummed
    or sticky surface that holds the cover to or in alignment with the closet
    seat and leaves the opening in the seat clear to provide the user access to
    the closet.


CLS 4/245.5
TXT Peripheral:

    Subject matter under subclass 245.3 wherein the securing means extends
    substantially around the inner or outer rim of the closet seat to secure
    the cover to the seat and leaves the opening in the seat clear to provide
    the user access to the closet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242.1,  for a peripheral securing means for a lid covering.


CLS 4/245.6
TXT Specific material:

    Subject matter under subclass 245.1 wherein the cover is disclosed as being
    made out of a definite substance (e.g., paper, plastic, rubber or cloth)
    and leaves the opening in the seat to provide the user access to the closet.

    (1)     Note. This does not include an article which as disclosed as being
    made out of a generic substance (e.g., a "flexible", "disposable", or
    "destructible" material).


CLS 4/245.7
TXT Plastic or rubber:

    Subject matter under subclass 245.6 wherein the cover is disclosed as made
    out of plastic or rubber and leaves the opening in the seat clear to
    provide the user access to the closet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    DIGEST 8,       for a rubber seat.


CLS 4/245.8
TXT Paper:

    Subject matter under subclass 245.6 wherein the cover is disclosed as made
    out of paper and leaves the opening in the seat clear to provide the user
    access to the closet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243.1+, for a mechanism that positions a paper cover on a seat.

    244.1+, for a paper cover dispenser.


CLS 4/245.9
TXT Having dependent member in closet bowl:
    Subject matter under subclass 245.8 wherein the cover has a portion of
    itself hanging down into the bowl and leaves the opening in the seat clear
    to provide the user access to the closet.

    (1)     Note. This dependent member may serve a purpose such as preventing
    the user from contacting the inside of the closet bowl, protecting the
    inside of the closet bowl from urination or defecation, or as drag anchor
    to pull the rest of the cover into the closet bowl when it is flushed.


CLS 4/246.1
TXT OPENER OR CLOSER FOR A CLOSET SEAT OR LID:
    Subject matter under the class definition comprising means to assist a user
    in moving that part of closet providing support and access for a user to
    the closet, and the cap; which are both articulated to the closet; from one
    position to another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241,    for a seat having a counterbalancing weight or spring biasing means
    urging it to an upward position.

    243.1,  for a mechanism that moves a seat from one position to another when
    putting a sanitary cover on the seat.


CLS 4/246.2
TXT Fluid mechanism:
    Subject matter under subclass 246.1 wherein the means uses fluid as a
    source of power or to transmit force to assist the user in moving the seat
    or lid from one position to another.


CLS 4/246.3
TXT Lever operated opener:
    Subject matter under subclass 246.1 wherein the user actuates one end of a
    body having a fixed axis or fulcrum which is mechanically linked to the
    seat or lid and is manipulated by the user in moving the seat or lid from
    one position to another.


CLS 4/246.4
TXT Four bar link:
    Subject matter under subclass 246.3 wherein the mechanical link includes
    two members that are each connected to a stationary rotatable joint and
    have a rod connected to the members by rotatable joints, where one of the
    members is a lever manipulated by the user while the other member or rod is
    or is in contact with the seat or lid, so that the motion of the lever is
    transmitted by the mechanical link to move the seat or lid from one
    position to another.


CLS 4/246.5
TXT Using a seat or lid for a link:
    Subject matter under subclass 246.4 wherein the seat or lid is the other
    member or rod of the four bar link so that the motion of the lever is
    transmitted by the by the mechanical link to move the seat or lid from one
    position to another.


CLS 4/248
TXT Means for preventing injury to parts of a closet by means of a buffer or
    dashpot applied to the relatively moving parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    360     and 388+, for a dashpot controlled outlet valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 297+ for a dashpot or shock absorber or general
    utility.


CLS 4/249
TXT The miscellaneous subclass for devices for operating flush valves or supply
    valves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    405+,   for flush valve actuator and linkage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 624.11+ for programmer or time
    controlled valves of general utility.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 59+ for cut-offs operated by rate of flow
    responsive mechanism.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, for valve actuators in general,
    particularly subclasses 12+ for fluid operated or retarded valves.


CLS 4/250
TXT The valve is operated by movement of the seat.

    (1)     Note.  See special structures in this class, subclasses 238, 408,
    468, 473, and 486.


CLS 4/251.1
TXT DRIP CATCHER:
    Subject matter under the class definition comprising means for collecting
    water trickling down from a flush closet such as a urinal, closet bowl or
    tank.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 312+ for drip collecting means.


CLS 4/251.2
TXT For flush closet tank only:
    Subject matter under subclass 251.1 wherein the drip catcher is solely for
    use in collecting water trickling down from the flush closet tank.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    901,    for a covering for a flush closet tank.


CLS 4/252.1
TXT FLUSH CLOSET BOWL SUPPORT, COUPLING, SEAL OR FASTENER:
    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a means to bear or
    hold up, to join a waste pipe in fluid communication with, to prevent the
    escape of fluid from or to secure a flush closet bowl.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    643+,   for a support for a sink.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, for a pipe joint or coupling in general,
    and especially subclasses 56+ for a floor supported flush closet type and
    subclass 64 for a static building construction support.


CLS 4/252.2
TXT Support for a wall hung closet bowl:
    Subject matter under subclass 252.1 wherein the means to bear or hold up
    suspends, from a building partition, the flush closet bowl.


CLS 4/252.3
TXT Adjustable:
    Subject matter under subclass 252.2 wherein the wall hung closet bowl
    support is adaptable in the plane parallel to the wall to align a waste
    pipe with the discharge opening of the closet bowl or an intermediary
    coupling for the discharge opening of the closet bowl.


CLS 4/252.4
TXT Flange with aperture for fastener:
    Subject matter under subclass 252.1 wherein the coupling for the flush
    closet bowl, which provides for the fluid flow communication between the
    closet bowl discharge and the waste pipe, has a projecting rim with an
    opening or slot for a securing member to hold the coupling to the closet
    bowl.


CLS 4/252.5
TXT Having a seal:
    Subject matter under subclass 252.4 wherein the coupling having a flange
    has a gasket between the closet bowl discharge or waste pipe to prevent
    fluid from escaping from the waste pipe or the closet bowl.


CLS 4/252.6
TXT Seal structure detail:
    Subject matter under subclass 252.1 wherein significance is attributed to
    the claimed particulars of the means to prevent the escape of fluid between
    the coupling, the fastener or the flush closet bowl.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252.1+, for the coupling, the fastener or the closet bowl disclosing a
    nominal seal structure.


CLS 4/253
TXT Closures secured to the bowl to prevent its use.


CLS 4/254
TXT Devices for resting the body or parts thereof when the closet is being used.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, for a body rest for an occupant of a seat of that
    class, i.e., subclasses 391+ for headrest, subclasses 411.2+ for armrest,
    and subclasses 423.1+ for a knee-, leg-, or footrest.


CLS 4/255.01
TXT OBSTRUCTION REMOVER:
    Subject matter under the class definition comprising apparatus specialized
    to clean or clear an obstacle within or clear an obstacle from a drain pipe
    of a sink, bath, or flush closet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    694,    for means to block the overflow preventing water from flowing into
    or gas escaping from the overflow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 104.03+ for
    mechanical or gaseous pressure devices for hammering, cutting, scraping,
    loosening or flushing deposits from conduits, pipes or tubes; and
    subclasses 406+ for an air blast soot blower for tubing.

    68,     Textiles: Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 216+ for a hand held
    pounder with plunger.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 22.11+ for
    internal surface treatment of pipe etc., subclass 24 for internal surface
    treatment of hollow work with movable fluid applying nozzle and/or with
    plugging or sealing of work passage or opening, subclass 166 for a conduit
    cleaner, subclass 167 for a conduit cleaner with movably or flexibly
    mounted spray or jet applying conduits or nozzle, subclass 168 for a
    conduit cleaner with a pump and movable nozzle, and subclass 169 for a
    conduit cleaner using a pump.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 240 for a system in which a material
    (e.g., a chemical or physical agent) different from the fluent material of
    the system is introduced to clean parts of the system.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 89+ for a closure or plug
    for a pipe and subclass 90 for a closure or plug having means to introduce
    pressure.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass Digest 13 for a
    tube cleaner.


CLS 4/255.02
TXT Piston:
    Subject matter under subclass 255.01 wherein the apparatus uses a piston in
    fluid communication with the obstruction to agitate the fluid to clean or
    clear the obstruction within or clear the obstruction from the drain pipe
    of the sink, bath or flush closet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    694,    for means to block the overflow preventing water from flowing into
    or gas escaping from the overflow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, appropriate subclasses for a pump of general utility, per
    se, which may be used to clear an obstruction but is not adapted for use on
    a bath, flush closet, sink or drain pipe.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclasses for a
    rotary expansible chamber pump, per se.


CLS 4/255.03
TXT With one way valve:
    Subject matter under subclass 255.02 wherein the apparatus has a device in
    the fluid communication with the piston and the obstruction to make the
    fluid flow in one direction to clean or clear the obstruction within or
    clear the obstruction from the drain pipe of the sink, bath, or flush
    closet.


CLS 4/255.04
TXT Connected to a source of external fluid under pressure:
    Subject matter under subclass 255.01 wherein the apparatus includes a
    conduit with one end connected to an external source of fluid under
    pressure while the other end is brought into fluid communication with an
    opening on the sink, bath or flush closet pipe to clean or clear the
    obstruction within or clear the obstruction from the drain pipe of the
    sink, bath, or flush closet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclass 8 for a slip-on coupling for a
    faucet.


CLS 4/255.05
TXT With force cup (e.g., a plunger):
    Subject matter under subclass 255.04 wherein the other end of the conduit
    has a flexible cup or head used to close the opening and flexed to provide
    additional fluid pressure to clear the obstruction from the drain pipe of
    the sink, bath or flush closet.


CLS 4/255.06
TXT With flow control valve:
    Subject matter under subclass 255.04 wherein the apparatus includes a
    device to control the flow of fluid between the external source of fluid
    under pressure to the obstruction, to clear the obstruction from the drain
    pipe of the sink, bath, or flush closet.


CLS 4/255.07
TXT With means to block or clear the overflow:
    Subject matter under subclass 255.04 wherein the apparatus includes means
    to close an overflow during obstruction removal (i.e. to prevent loss of
    fluid pressure) or is used to remove an obstruction from the overflow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255.01+, for another type of obstruction remover having means to block or
    clear the overflow.

    694,    for means to block the overflow preventing water from flowing into
    or gas escaping from the overflow.


CLS 4/255.08
TXT With head structure that grips drain opening or pipe:
    Subject matter under subclass 255.04 wherein the other end of the conduit
    has a gripping structure at its other end that fastens it to the drain
    opening or pipe to clear the obstruction from the drain pipe of the sink,
    bath, or flush closet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255.01+, for another type of obstruction remover having a head structure
    that grips the drain opening.


CLS 4/255.09
TXT With head structure that increases velocity or turbulence:
    Subject matter under subclass 255.04 wherein the other end of the conduit
    has a head designed to boost the rate of change or violence of the flow
    into the opening to clear the obstruction from the drain pipe of the sink,
    bath, or flush closet.


CLS 4/255.11
TXT Force cup (e.g., a plunger):
    Subject matter under subclass 255.01 wherein the apparatus includes a
    flexible cup that is placed over the opening and manually flexed to agitate
    fluid to clean or clear the obstruction within or clear the obstruction
    from the drain pipe of the sink, bath, or flush closet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255.01+, for other cup like structure having a force or sealing function.


CLS 4/255.12
TXT With one way valve:
    Subject matter under subclass 255.11 wherein the force cup has  a device
    that will make the fluid flow in one direction to clean or clear the
    obstruction within or clear the obstruction from the drain pipe of the
    sink, bath, or flush closet.


CLS 4/256.1
TXT DEBRIS CATCHER FOR A FLUSH CLOSET, OR A CLEAN OUT PLUG:
    Subject matter under the class definition comprising either a collector for
    a flush closet that intercepts miscellaneous foreign objects before they
    can clog a trap or sewer line; or an access with a fitted sealing cover for
    a sink, bath, or flush closet that provides an entrance to a trap or a
    sewer line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255.01, for an agitating obstruction remover that attaches to the clean out
    opening.

    255.04, for an obstruction remover that attaches to the clean out opening.

    286+,   for a debris catcher or a plug for a sink.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular conduits, subclasses 89+ for a plug or closure
    relating to a pipe or pipe fitting.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 200+ for a plug or closure having a more
    general use.


CLS 4/258
TXT Devices to receive and dispose of sputa or expectorations.

    (1)     Note.  For ash receivers, see Class 131, Tobacco, subclasses 231+
    Class 220 Receptacles, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 501+
    for a receptacle having intercommunicable compartments, and subclasses 910+
    for cross reference art collections of table-top trash or ash containers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 32 for spittoon attachments to
    cooking stoves.


CLS 4/259
TXT Receptacles carried in a person's pocket or attached to the person.


CLS 4/260
TXT Spittoons for saloon bars.


CLS 4/261
TXT Spittoons provided with disinfecting apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222+,   for general disinfecting or chemical dispensing apparatus.


CLS 4/262
TXT Spittoons having means for washing away the sputa.


CLS 4/263
TXT Spittoons specialized for the use of dentists.


CLS 4/264
TXT Either the bowl or the plate in the bowl for receiving the sputa or the
    flush nozzle rotates.


CLS 4/265
TXT The water is supplied by a hand pump.


CLS 4/266
TXT The spittoon is provided with a water-supply valve and discharge valve
    cooperating in operation.


CLS 4/267
TXT The spittoon is provided with a cover.


CLS 4/268
TXT The spittoon is located in a hole in the floor of a building, car, or
    vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    275.


CLS 4/269
TXT The outlet is provided with a valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266     and 276.


CLS 4/270
TXT The spittoon has a closed bottom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    269     and 277.


CLS 4/271
TXT The cover is operated by mechanism actuated by hand.


CLS 4/272
TXT The cover is operated by a pedal.


CLS 4/273
TXT The cover consists of two similar parts conjoined.


CLS 4/274
TXT The spittoon is made of flexible material generally paper, and the holder
    has a cover.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259     and 285.


CLS 4/275
TXT The spittoon is placed in a hole in the floor of the building or car.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    268.


CLS 4/276
TXT A valve controls the outlet of the spittoon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266     and 269.


CLS 4/277
TXT The spittoon has a closed bottom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270.


CLS 4/278
TXT Means are provided for moving the part receiving the sputa into the liquid
    or for moving the liquid in the spittoon to wash the sputa down.


CLS 4/279
TXT The spittoon is provided with a plurality of inlet openings for the sputa
    and either one may be uppermost.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280,    281, 283, and 284, for different types of anti-spilling spittoons.


CLS 4/280
TXT The inlet is provided with a valve generally closed by a spring.  The valve
    is opened by a member connected to it when the member comes into contact
    with the floor on which the spittoon rests.


CLS 4/281
TXT The valve governing the inlet to the spittoon is normally open; but if the
    spittoon is tipped over the valve will close.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284.


CLS 4/282
TXT The inlet valve is positively actuated.


CLS 4/283
TXT The construction is such that if the spittoon is upset the liquid will be
    trapped and prevented from spilling.


CLS 4/284
TXT The receiver is mounted in a frame or holder, so that gravity will operate
    on the counter-weighted receptacle to keep it upright when the holder is
    overturned.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    279.


CLS 4/285
TXT The receptacle is made of flexible or paper material and is generally
    placed in a cup or holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259     and 274.


CLS 4/286
TXT The miscellaneous subclass for strainers, closures and stoppers, for
    basins, sinks, tubs or other specialized strainer or stopper structure
    classified in this class.

    (1)     Note.  A stopper is distinguished from a valve by being bodily
    removable from the sink or bath structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256.1,  for a debris catcher or clean out plug for a flush closet.

    292,    for strainers, per se, or  if of general application, appropriate
    subclasses in Class 210, Liquid Purification or Separation, especially
    subclasses 348+.

    295,    for a closure or stopper that enters the waste outlet of a sink or
    bath.

    652,    for a sink or bath having a drain and  strainer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 32.5 for a
    comminuting apparatus including a sink drain stopper interlock and subclass
    46.016 for a comminuting apparatus in combination with stopper or strainer
    in combination with a garbage disposal inlet.


CLS 4/287
TXT The strainer is combined with a plug, valve or other closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    693,    for a drain valve or plug having the operating means inside sink or
    bath.


CLS 4/288
TXT The strainer is combined with the coupling uniting the outlet pipe to the
    receptacle.


CLS 4/289
TXT The water passes through a plurality of strainers arranged in series.


CLS 4/290
TXT The strainer is in the form of a dish or receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    289.


CLS 4/291
TXT The receptacle strainer is suspended in the outlet conduit of the
    receptacle tub, sink or basin.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    289.


CLS 4/292
TXT Consists of a single strainer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    289,    290, 291, and 650+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 348+ for strainers or
    filters of general utility.


CLS 4/293
TXT Closures adapted to be placed over the outlet of the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    668+,   for a condition responsive drain valve plug or closure.

    671+,   for a supply outlet combined with a drain valve plug or closure for
    a sink or bath.

    679+,   for a drain valve having a plug or closure.


CLS 4/294
TXT The closure is provided with disinfecting means for holding a disinfectant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222+,   for a general disinfecting or chemical dispensing apparatus.


CLS 4/295
TXT The closure or stopper enters the outlet of the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    287,    for a strainer combined with a plug, valve or other closure.

    668+,   for a condition responsive drain valve plug or closure.

    671+,   for a supply outlet combined with a drain valve plug or closure for
    a sink or bath.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 355+ for stopper type closures.


CLS 4/300
TXT Flush closet:

    Subject matter under the class definition receptacle for receiving bowel
    material and/or a liquid handling means to assist the removal of the bowel
    material from the receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  The liquid handling can be a rapid flow of liquid or liquid
    to assist the removal of the bowel material.

    (2)     Note.  The liquid can have a gas, e.g., air, added to it, the gas
    is usually to save the amount of water used.

    (3)     Note.  A subcombination of basic subject matter of this subclass
    and the indented subclasses that is specialized for use in a flush closet
    is proper for this subclass and the indented subclasses unless otherwise
    provided for in another class, e.g., tank outlet valve, however, a tank
    inlet valve is in either Class 137, Fluid Handling, or Class 251, Valves
    and Valve Actuation.

    (4)     Note.  Patents issued prior to 1950 have not in all instances been
    classified by their claimed disclosure so the placement of these patents
    does not necessarily indicate lines of classification.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 233+ for a fluid conducting motion silencer
    and especially subclass 234 for a flash closet type.


CLS 4/300.1
TXT With toilet tissue holder:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 which includes a toilet tissue receptacle
    combined with a flush closet or a portion thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The portion of a flush closet includes a flush tank, a flush
    tank bowl, or a flush toilet seat.

    (2)     Note.  Included are roll-type and sheet-type toilet tissue
    receptacles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    443+,   for receptacles and devices for washing the perineum region of the
    human body.

    661,    for devices not elsewhere classified to clean the perineum region
    with toilet tissue.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 389+ for roll or reel
    material.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 564+ for a motor driven
    dispenser of wound material, and subclasses 590+ for a mounted dispenser
    for wound material.

    312,    Supports: Cabinet Structure, subclasses 34.2, 34.3, 34.4, 34.7,
    34.8, and 34.18+ for continuous strip material.


CLS 4/300.2
TXT With bedpan rinser:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 including a water closet bowl and a water
    nozzle (a) built into the closet bowl, or (b) connected to part of the
    closet bowl's water supply system, or (c) being separate from the closet
    bowl or the closet bowl's water supply wherein the water from the nozzle
    washes a bedpan and the wash water from the bedpan empties into the water
    closet which can dispose of the waste water by flushing the waste water
    down the toilet drain.

    (1)     Note.  The water closet may be structurally formed to support a
    bedpan in or on the closet for the purpose of cleaning the bedpan.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    450+,   for bedpans and accessories for bedpans.


CLS 4/300.3
TXT With splash guard or water baffle:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 which includes a device to prevent or
    minimize splashing of fluids as a result of use of the water closet to
    direct the flow of water within the water closet.

    (1)     Note.  Included are the baffle or the splash guard, per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    415,    for water-saving devices used with flush closet tanks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 285 for an embedded
    baffle in a particulate material type separator, and subclass 521 for
    superposed baffles in a gravita-tional separator.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 461+ for
    flow-deflecting means, particularly subclasses 518+ for a deflector and
    terminal flow element.


CLS 4/301
TXT Urinals only:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 having means to receive urine solely.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses will take plural receptacles
    where one receptacle is for urine only.

    (2)     Note.  For a supply tank and/or control means only for flushing a
    urinal, see subclasses 353+.

    (3)     Note.  This and indented subclasses provide for a urinal receptacle
    and flushing means or a receptacle adapted to be flushed with a liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    353+,   for tanks and control means for flushing.

    449+,   for urinals which do not use a fluid flush.


CLS 4/302
TXT Flush actuation automatically responsive to condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 301 having means to cause a flushing device
    to operate when an automatic condition occurs.

    (1)     Note.  Flushing means actuated by an indirect means, e.g., opening
    a door, lighting a light, is proper for this area, but if the flushing
    means is actuated by a person pushing an electric switch, lever, or button
    the patent is placed lower in the schedule.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    308,    for a pedal actuated flush.

    313,    for automatic flush means of general use.

    367,    for fluid or electric actuated flush.

    405+,   for direct actuated flush means.


CLS 4/303
TXT Periodic flush:

    Subject matter under subclass 302 wherein the flushing device is actuated
    at recurrent intervals, e.g., as often as a certain condition is reached.

    (1)     Note.  The periodic flush can take place after a direct flush.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 396+ for a self-emptying tank
    periodi-cally emptied in response to filling, and subclass 624.14 for
    self-cycling programmed valves.


CLS 4/304
TXT By radiant energy responsive means:

    Subject matter under subclass 302 wherein the flushing device is actuated
    by the breaking of radiant energy waves.


CLS 4/305
TXT By electric condition responsive means:

    Subject matter under subclass 302 wherein the flushing device is actuated
    by an electric current.


CLS 4/306
TXT Ventilated, i.e., noxious fume removal:

    Subject matter under subclass 301 including means for removing gases having
    a disagreeable odor.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass is not intended to
    include only handling of air or gas which affects the flow of the flushing
    liquid or waste material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209+,   for general ventilation of this class type.

    347+,   for ventilation of odor from a bowl.


CLS 4/307
TXT Folding type:

    Subject matter under subclass 301 having structure to allow the urinal to
    be moved from an operative position to an inoperative position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312,    for a folding bowl type.


CLS 4/308
TXT Pedal actuated flush:

    Subject matter under subclass 301 including a flushing device which is
    actuated by foot.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249,    for a flush actuator of the class type.

    405+,   for a flush actuator and a tank structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 295 for a pedal actuator.


CLS 4/309
TXT With disinfectant means:

    Subject matter under subclass 301 including means for disinfecting or
    deodorizing.

    (1)     Note.  The disinfectant or deodorant may also be housed in a screen
    device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222+,   for a general disinfecting or chemical dispensing apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 632, 638, 660+, 696+,
    702+, and 749+ for processes of chemical treatment for purification or
    separation, and subclasses 198.1+ for apparatus for purification or
    separation with additional treating material.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 1+ for a process to disinfect,
    preserve, deodorize or sterilize, and subclasses 243+ for apparatus to
    treat a solid article or material with a fluid chemical.

    424,    Drug Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 40+
    for a composition  that is usually incompletely burned or at least has a
    chemical reaction to project the composition into the air as a smoke, mist,
    or aerosol, and subclasses 76.1+ for a deodorant, disinfectant, or
    olfactory desensitizer composition.

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, for cleaning
    compositions having a particular shape or structure to adapt them for use,
    search subclasses 109+ for compositions tailored for a specific utility
    (e.g., toilet soap bars, including packages); for cleaning compositions of
    general utility, search subclasses 406 and 439 for packaged compositions,
    subclasses 382+ for antiseptic or biocidal compositions, and subclasses 440
    and 447+ for shaped, barlike compositions.


CLS 4/310
TXT Vertical type:

    Subject matter under subclass 301 wherein the means to receive urine has a
    slab or wall that is substantially vertical with respect to the rest of the
    structure.


CLS 4/311
TXT Bowl type:

    Subject matter under subclass 301 wherein the means to receive urine is a
    hollow shaped receptacle open at the top.


CLS 4/312
TXT Folding type:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 having an arrangement for moving the
    closet from an operative position to an inoperative position, usually
    smaller.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    307,    for a urinal type folding device.


CLS 4/313
TXT With automatic flush responsive means:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 including means to cause a flushing
    device to operate when an automatic condition occurs.

    (1)     Note.  A person actuating an electric switch or other type lever or
    button device to cause a flush is not automatic and patents are placed
    lower in the schedule.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302,    for a urinal type automatic flush device.

    405+,   for manual type flush devices.


CLS 4/314
TXT With indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 including means for informing the
    operation of some condition of the closet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclasses for mechanical
    signals or indicators.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical,  appropriate subclasses for electric
    signals.


CLS 4/315
TXT With disposable container:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 having a receiver for waste material
    which is designed to be taken away from the closet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    321,    for a holding tank wherein the removal of waste material is by a
    positive means.


CLS 4/316
TXT Reduced gravity environment type:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 having an arrangement which will permit
    the closet to be operated at a lower pressure or near zero gravity.


CLS 4/317
TXT With recirculating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 including means to pump a liquid in a
    closed system and means for filtering the waste material so that the liquid
    can be used for another flush.

    (1)     Note.  This system is self-contained and operation does not depend
    upon connection to an outside source of liquid after being charged or to a
    sewer system for discharge.


CLS 4/318
TXT Including specified filtering means:

    Subject matter under subclass 317 wherein the filter is a particularly
    described means to remove or separate solid particles, impurities, etc.,
    from a liquid by passing it through a porous substance.


CLS 4/319
TXT With macerator:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 including means for breaking up a solid
    waste material into smaller particles.

    (1)     Note.  The means for breaking up the solid waste material may be a
    pump, if the purpose of the pump is for dividing the waste material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    sub-classes for comminutors, per se.


CLS 4/320
TXT Including additional treatment:

    Subject matter under subclass 319 having additional means to modify the
    waste material.


CLS 4/321
TXT With holding tank:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 including a storage receptacle for waste
    material after discharge from the flush closet, and for subsequent positive
    waste material removal by external means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315,    for a storage receptacle which is bodily removed from the flush
    closet for the disposing of the waste material.


CLS 4/322
TXT And heater:

    Subject matter under subclass 321 including means for introducing heat to
    the tank for the purpose of warning, preventing freezing and/or sterilizing
    the contents of the tank.


CLS 4/323
TXT And valve for emptying:

    Subject matter under subclass 321 including means by which the flow of
    waste material from the tank may be started or regulated.


CLS 4/324
TXT Manual selection of the amount of flush:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 having means external of a tank by which
    an operator may flush the closet in a chosen operational mode and elements
    connected to a flush valve.

    (1)     Note.  The elements inside the tank which may be adjusted for
    different flushes are in subclasses 378+.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass is a mode where an operator
    actuates the flush and the flush is stopped by elements inside the tank.
    Another mode is where an operator must hold the flush actuator for the time
    the flush is required.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249+,   for flush valve actuators.

    378+,   for adjustable means inside a tank to change the flush cycle.


CLS 4/325
TXT Alternate unicyclic flush:

    Subject matter under subclass 324 wherein the manual means for selectively
    controlling the flush is an arrangement for releasing either substantially
    all or a preselected portion of a quantity of liquid held in a flush tank.
    Each release completes a cycle and the operator must start another cycle.


CLS 4/326
TXT Plural flush valves:

    Subject matter under subclass 325 having more than one flush valve wherein
    they are arranged for selectively releasing either all or a preselected
    portion of the water in the tank.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 365 for other hinges for pivotally
    connecting three or more members.


CLS 4/327
TXT In axial alignment:

    Subject matter under subclass 326 wherein the flush valves are positioned
    such that their axes are in alignment.


CLS 4/328
TXT Tank and bowl with plural connections, one being pneumatic:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein there is more than one pipe
    between the tank and bowl, one being for gas or air.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    368+,   for a tank with an outlet siphon which includes an air release pipe.


CLS 4/329
TXT Low profile tank and bowl:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein the tank extends only a small
    distance above the top of the bowl or is even with the top of the bowl.

    (1)     Note. The water levels in the tank and bowl are substantially equal.


CLS 4/330
TXT Seat actuated flush:

    Subject matter under subclass 329 wherein the outlet valve is operated by
    elements connected to a seat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    408+,   for a seat actuated outlet valve of general use.


CLS 4/331
TXT Float controlled valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 329 having means in the tank to control a
    valve by a buoyant device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 386+ for liquid level responsive valves.


CLS 4/332
TXT Pressure flush:

    Subject matter under subclass 329 wherein the tank is hermetically sealed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    354+,   for a pressure tank of general use.


CLS 4/333
TXT Normally empty tank:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein the tank does not have liquid in
    it until a valve is actuated.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the supply valve is open and the outlet valve is
    closed by common actuating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    366,    for a common actuating means for the supply and outlet valves.


CLS 4/334
TXT Pressure tank:

    Subject matter under subclass 333 wherein the tank is hermetically sealed
    and the air is compressed as the liquid fills the tank.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    354+,   for a pressure tank where the liquid in the tank is at the same
    pressure as the liquid supply pressure.


CLS 4/335
TXT With seat actuated valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 334 including a seat which, when moved,
    operates a valve to supply liquid to the tank and/or operates the outlet
    valve from the tank.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    338+,   for seat actuated valves where the tank is not under pressure.

    408,    for a seat actuated outlet valve.


CLS 4/336
TXT And siphon bowl:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 having a siphon discharged bowl to
    receive the liquid from an outlet valve of the tank.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    421+,   for a siphon discharge bowl.


CLS 4/337
TXT And drain means:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 having means to drain the liquid from the
    tank supply and/or valves after a flush.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    339,    for drain means where the tank is not under pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 302 for freeze protection means.


CLS 4/338
TXT With seat actuated valve:

    Subject matter under Class 333 including a seat which, when moved, operates
    a valve to supply liquid to the tank and/or operates the outlet valve from
    the tank.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    335+,   for a seat operated valve where the tank is under pressure.

    408,    for a seat actuated outlet valve.


CLS 4/339
TXT And drain means:

    Subject matter under subclass 338 having means to draw the liquid from the
    tank supply line and/or valves after a flush.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    337,    for drain means and a pressure tank.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 302 for freeze protection means.


CLS 4/340
TXT Plural receptacles:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 having more than one means for receiving
    liquid or a single means with more than one opening to receive the waste
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    461,    for plural dry closets.


CLS 4/341
TXT Diverse:

    Subject matter under subclass 340 wherein the receptacles are different in
    shape or function, e.g., one for waste material and the other for welting
    paper, or the receptacles are different in size.


CLS 4/342
TXT Separate and distinct:

    Subject matter under subclass 340 wherein the receptacles are each set
    apart from each other and not joined together.


CLS 4/343
TXT Overhead tank with bowl:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein the tank is mounted at a much
    higher level than the top of the bowl, and not supported by the bowl
    structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    409,    for an overhead tank.


CLS 4/344
TXT Siphon bowl:

    Subject matter under subclass 343 having a siphon discharge bowl to receive
    the liquid from an outlet valve of the tank.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    421+,   for a siphon discharge bowl.


CLS 4/345
TXT Plural flush, preliminary or subsequent:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein in addition to a main flush means
    there is provided an additional flush before or after the main, the
    additional flush is actuated by the operation of the main flush.


CLS 4/346
TXT Including plural compartments in tank:

    Subject matter under subclass 345 wherein the tank has more than one
    compartment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    363,    for plural compartment tanks of general use.


CLS 4/347
TXT Ventilated, i.e., noxious fume removal:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 including means for removing gases having
    disagreeable odor.

    (1)     Note. The subject matter of this subclass is not intended to
    include only handling of air or gas which affects the flow of the flushing
    liquid or waste material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209+,   for general ventilation of the classtype.

    306,    for urinal type ventilation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    454,    Ventilation, for ventilating devices not peculiar to subject matter
    of this class, particularly subclasses 341+ for ventilating devices which
    exhaust stale air from a room.


CLS 4/348
TXT Bowl:

    Subject matter under subclass 347 wherein the gas removing means is
    connected to the bowl or an adjunct thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    420+,   for bowl structure.


CLS 4/349
TXT Unitary with flush supply to bowl:

    Subject matter under subclass 348 wherein some portion of the means
    providing liquid to flush the bowl also forms part of the gas removal means.

    (1)     Note.  For purpose of this subclass, the liquid providing means is
    not deemed to include the tank.


CLS 4/350
TXT Unitary with discharge from bowl:

    Subject matter under subclass 348 wherein the gas removing means is
    connected to the discharge from the bowl.


CLS 4/351
TXT Trap or  siphon:

    Subject matter under subclass 350 wherein the gas removing means is
    directly connected to a trap or siphon.


CLS 4/352
TXT Annular ventilator:

    Subject matter under subclass 348 wherein the gas removing means has an
    intake which includes a channel subtending a portion of the cross section
    of the bowl in a horizontal plane and is usually located below the rim.


CLS 4/353
TXT Tank only:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein the fluid handling means includes
    structure for holding a flushing fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 386+ for float controlled supply valves
    for closet tanks, and subclasses 624.11+ for timer controlled flush valves.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 12+ for flush closet valves.


CLS 4/354
TXT Pressure tank:

    Subject matter under subclass 353 wherein the tank is hermetically sealed
    and is to be filled with a fluid at the same pressure as the supply line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334+,   for a pressure tank that is normally empty.


CLS 4/355
TXT Float released outlet valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 354 wherein an outlet valve is held open by a
    detent of other device and is released, to close, by a float.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    379,    for delay means to close an outlet valve.


CLS 4/356
TXT Float outlet valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 354 wherein an outlet valve is buoyant or is
    held open by a buoyant device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    392,    for an outlet valve connected to a float.

    395+,   for a float type outlet valve.


CLS 4/357
TXT Free floating:

    Subject matter under subclass 356 where in the float is not directly
    connected to the tank.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    396,    for a free floating outlet valve.


CLS 4/358
TXT With guide (e.g., a cage):

    Subject matter under subclass 357 wherein the float is restrained for
    movement within a defined zone in the tank.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    397+,   for an outlet valve and guide means.


CLS 4/359
TXT Valve held open by flow:

    Subject matter under subclass 354 wherein an outlet valve is held open by
    the liquid flow or pressure acting against a valve, piston, or diaphragm.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    397,    for a flow responsive element to hold an outlet valve open.


CLS 4/360
TXT Dashpot controlled outlet valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 354 having retarding mechanism to control the
    closing of an outlet valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    388,    for retarding mechanism for an outlet valve.


CLS 4/361
TXT Pneumatic or hydraulic adjustability:

    Subject matter under subclass 354 wherein the amount of liquid in the tank
    is controlled by means to change the fluid and/or air pressure in the tank.


CLS 4/362
TXT By air under pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 354 wherein a gaseous medium is used to aid
    in expelling the liquid from the tank.


CLS 4/363
TXT With plural compartments:

    Subject matter under subclass 353 including more than one section for
    holding flushing fluid.

    (1)     Note.  A series of tanks with a common connection is regarded as a
    tank with plural compartments.

    (2)     Note.  Valves and floats which have sections for holding fluid for
    the purpose of controlling or actuating the flushing action are not
    regarded as subject matter of this subclass. The compartments must hold an
    appreciable amount for flushing fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    378+,   for valves or floats which have means for holding a fluid.

    415,    for a tank designed to save fluid.


CLS 4/364
TXT Single tank with divider:

    Subject matter under subclass 363 wherein the compartments of the tank are
    formed by one tank and a partition in the tank.


CLS 4/365
TXT Pivotal compartment:

    Subject matter under subclass 363 wherein one of the compartments is
    mounted for turning about an axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 160 for a movably mounted supply container.


CLS 4/366
TXT With simultaneous common actuating means for supply and outlet valves:

    Subject matter under subclass 353 including a single means for moving an
    inlet and outlet valve at the same time to cause liquid to flow into and
    out of the tank at the same time.

    (1)     Note.  If common means move an inlet and outlet valve but fluid
    does not flow from both at the same time, at actuation, the patents are in
    subclass 378.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    378+,   for inlet and outlet valves opened and closed at the same time.

    435+,   for inlet and outlet valves actuated by common means in a bowl.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 391 for liquid level sensing means (e.g.,
    a float) which controls both the inflow and the outflow of a tank.


CLS 4/367
TXT By fluid or electrical means:

    Subject matter under subclass 366 wherein the means for moving the valves
    include pneumatic or hydraulic means or an electric device.


CLS 4/368
TXT With outlet siphon:

    Subject matter under subclass 353 including a flow passage comprising two
    branches or legs of unequal length by which a liquid can be transferred to
    a lower level over an intermediate elevation by the pressure of the
    atmosphere in forcing the liquid up the shorter branch or leg immersed in
    it while the excess of weight of the liquid in the longer branch or leg
    causes a continuous flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    328,    for a tank with outlet siphon and a bowl.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 123+ for discharge type siphons.


CLS 4/369
TXT Including means to relieve trapped air:

    Subject matter under subclass 368 having means to reduce trapped air
    pressure, in the siphon, to intitiate liquid flow through the siphon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 136+ for periodic discharge siphons
    which include means for releasing trapped air for initiating the flow of
    liquid through the siphon.


CLS 4/370
TXT By releasing trapped air:

    Subject matter under subclass 369 wherein the air escapes into the
    atmosphere directly and lowers the pressure to cause liquid flow through
    the siphon.

    (1)     Note.  If the air is forced out with the liquid or allowed to
    expand, the patents are not proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    369,    for means to force air out with the liquid.

    371,    for means to allow the air to expand.


CLS 4/371
TXT By raising trapped air housing:

    Subject matter under subclass 369 wherein the air pressure is lowered by
    moving the device holding the trapped air in an upward direction so as to
    allow the air to expand and initiate liquid flow through the siphon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    368,    for means to raise a housing covering a siphon where the raising
    causes a vacuum to cause liquid flow.


CLS 4/372
TXT Including means to immerse siphon:

    Subject matter under subclass 368 wherein at least a part of the siphon is
    movable so that a surge of liquid will fill the siphon when the siphon is
    moved below the normal liquid level in the tank to intitiate flow through
    the siphon.


CLS 4/373
TXT Pump starter:

    Subject matter under subclass 368 where in the liquid is forced into the
    siphon by a piston or plunger which is in a cylinder and initiates fluid
    flow through the siphon.

    (1)     Note.  The cylinder may be part of the siphon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    375,    for means to raise the overall fluid level in the tank.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 147+ for a pump to start liquid flow in
    a siphon.


CLS 4/374
TXT Jet starter:

    Subject matter under subclass 368 wherein a stream of liquid is discharged
    directly into the siphon to cause initiation of liquid flow.

    (1)     Note.  The stream of liquid is other than the liquid in the tank.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    373,    for liquid, from the tank, forced into the siphon by a pump.


CLS 4/375
TXT Including means to raise liquid level:

    Subject matter under subclass 368 having means to cause the upper surfaces
    of the liquid in the tank to be elevated above its normal level to cause
    initiation of liquid flow through the siphon.

    (1)     Note.  If only a part of the upper surface of the liquid is raised,
    e.g., in bell housing, the patents are in subclasses 368+.

    (2)     Note.  The liquid level is raised by not adding more liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    368+,   for raising only part of the liquid level.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 145 for means to start a siphon by
    applying pressure to a liquid.


CLS 4/376
TXT Valve starter:

    Subject matter under subclass 368 having a flow control stopping means
    which, when open, initiates liquid flow through the siphon by induction.


CLS 4/377
TXT By moving siphon:

    Subject matter under subclass 376 wherein one leg or branch of the siphon
    is movable to cause the liquid flow by induction.


CLS 4/378
TXT With outlet valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 353 including a liquid flow control means to
    permit a quantity of flushing liquid to pass from the tank to the bowl.
    The flow control means includes a solid element movable from a position
    blocking the cross section opening of a liquid outlet pipe by covering or
    entering the outlet pipe, which position is referred to as the seated
    position of the valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324,    for a similar device having manual selection of the amount of flush
    liquid.


CLS 4/379
TXT With delay of valve closing:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 including means to maintain the valve in
    an open condition until some predetermined condition occurs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    355,    for a float released outlet valve in a pressure tank.


CLS 4/380
TXT By pressure of suction control of valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 379 wherein the movable element is held open
    by the direct application of pressure or suction to the movable element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    407,    for tank outlet valves actuated by pressure variation.


CLS 4/381
TXT By float releasable latch:

    Subject matter under subclass 379 wherein the valve is held open by a
    locking element upon flushing.  The locking element is controlled by a
    float so as to be disabled by tank liquid level reaching a predetermined
    position.


CLS 4/382
TXT Tiltable or pivoted valve body:

    Subject matter under subclass 381 wherein the valve blocking element is
    moved from its seated position with a motion having a component other than
    parallel to the length of the outlet pipe at its opening. The element may
    turn about a fixed axis through a portion thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    392+,   for a swinging valve.


CLS 4/383
TXT With overflow through valve closure:

    Subject matter under subclass 381 including a tubular conduit mounted in
    and passing through the valve blocking element to conduct liquid above a
    predetermined level through the valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    390,    for an overflow through a tank valve  closure.


CLS 4/384
TXT Latched actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 381 wherein the valve is held open by locking
    of an element of the actuating means in an appropriate position.

    (1)     Note.  The valve stem of a discharge valve is not considered to be
    an element of the actuating means.


CLS 4/385
TXT By varying weight releasable latch:

    Subject matter under subclass 379 wherein the valve is held open by a
    locking element upon flushing.  The locking element is controlled by an
    element, the weight of which varies in accordance with tank liquid level
    and which disables the locking element at a predetermined liquid level.

    (1)     Note.  The weight may vary by displacement of the flushing fluid by
    the element, retention of fluid by the element, or drainage of the fluid
    from a receptacle type element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 134 for dumping tanks employed as starters
    for siphons, and subclass 396 for self-emptying tanks controlled by
    auxiliary dumping tanks.


CLS 4/386
TXT By shifting weight:

    Subject matter under subclass 379 having a weight movable in response to
    the level of liquid in the tank, which weight sequentially holds the valve
    open and then closes the valve in response to the falling liquid level
    during flush.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    363+,   for a similar device in which the weight includes a liquid filled
    container.


CLS 4/387
TXT By flow responsive element in valve outlet:

    Subject matter under subclass 379 wherein a flow actuated element in the
    valve outlet prevents the valve from closing until the flow has stopped or
    decreased below a predetermined valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359,    for an outlet valve held open by flow in a pressure tank.


CLS 4/388
TXT By retarding mechanism, e.g., dashpot:

    Subject matter under subclass 379 having means to damp the motion of the
    valve blocking element into the seated position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    360,    for a dashpot controlled outlet valve in a pressure tank.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 297+ for a dashpot of general use.


CLS 4/389
TXT With overflow through valve closure:

    Subject matter under subclass 388 including a tubular conduit mounted in
    and passing through the valve blocking element to conduct liquid above a
    predetermined level through the valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    390+,   for an overflow through a tank valve closure.


CLS 4/390
TXT With overflow through valve closure:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 including a tubular conduit mounted in
    and passing through the valve blocking element to conduct liquid above a
    predetermined level through the valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    383,    for a similar device in which the valve is held open by a float
    releasable latch.

    389,    for a similar device in which valve seating is delayed by a motion
    retarding mechanism.


CLS 4/391
TXT Float connected or float type valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 390 wherein either the valve is buoyant in
    the flushing liquid or is rigidly connected to a body buoyant in the
    flushing liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    394     and 395+, respectively, for such  devices including float connected
    and float type valves, respectively, without an overflow through the valve
    bodies.


CLS 4/392
TXT Swinging:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 wherein the valve is caused to follow a
    curved path by an element having one end attached thereto and its other end
    fixedly attached to the tank or structure element therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    382,    for a swinging valve which is released by a float.


CLS 4/393
TXT Pivoted:

    Subject matter under subclass 392 wherein the element attached to the valve
    is rigid and is relatively rotatable about a fixed axis with respect to a
    stationary element.


CLS 4/394
TXT Connected to float:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 wherein a float is rigidly connected to
    the valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    356,    for a float connected to a outlet valve in a pressure tank.

    391,    for an outlet valve having an overflow through the valve body.


CLS 4/395
TXT Float type:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 wherein the valve blocking element is
    buoyant in the flushing liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    356,    for float type outlet valve in a pressure tank.

    391,    for an outlet valve having an overflow through the valve body.

    394,    for an outlet having a float rigidly connected to the valve.


CLS 4/396
TXT Free floating during flush:

    Subject matter under subclass 395 wherein the valve blocking element has no
    element fixedly attached thereto and is returned to its seated position by
    suction of the liquid draining out through the valve seat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    357,    for a free floating outlet valve in a pressure tank.

    398,    for a free floating valve which has an element fixedly attached to
    it, or in a cage.


CLS 4/397
TXT Having seating guide:

    Subject matter under subclass 395 includes means to limit lateral valve
    motion as the valve approaches the seated position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    358,    for an outlet valve with a guide in a pressure tank.

    393,    for a pivoted outlet valve.

    396,    for a static guide means for a free floating outlet valve.


CLS 4/398
TXT Cage type:

    Subject matter under subclass 397 having an openwork structure or frame to
    confine the outlet valve to limit its lateral motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    358,    for an outlet valve with a guide, e.g., cage in a pressure tank.

    396,    for a free floating outlet valve.


CLS 4/399
TXT Valve moves relative to guide through bottom of valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 397 having a guide extending upwardly from a
    valve seat, and the valve has an opening in the bottom which cooperates
    with the guide as it approaches the seated position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    390,    for a fixed guide through the bottom of a valve which may be an
    overflow pipe.


CLS 4/400
TXT Valve attached seating element enters discharge pipe:

    Subject matter under subclass 397 having a projecting element rigidly
    connected to and depending from the valve and positioned within the
    discharge pipe when the valve is in its seated position.

    (1)     Note.  The term "projecting element" may refer to an element
    distinct from the valve body or may be a section of the valve body other
    than the seating surface.

    (2)     Note.  A projecting element maintained in a stationary position
    from the discharge pipe and entering the valve is not classified in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    399,    for a valve with a stationary guide positioned in the discharge
    pipe.


CLS 4/401
TXT Plural static guides:

    Subject matter under subclass 397 having more than one stationary guide
    element.


CLS 4/402
TXT Having liquid receptacle open upwardly:

    Subject matter under subclass 395 wherein the valve has a recess on the top
    surface to hold liquid to cause the valve to seat.


CLS 4/403
TXT Hollow:

    Subject matter under subclass 395 wherein the valve body is formed with a
    cavity therein.

    (1)     Note.  A cavity intended solely to receive solid material,
    including other mechanical elements is not, of itself, sufficient for
    placement in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    397,    for a similar device in which the valve also has a seating guide.


CLS 4/404
TXT Open at bottom:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 wherein the valve body has an area on the
    bottom where air or liquid can enter the cavity.


CLS 4/405
TXT Actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 having particularly described means to
    effect operation of the flush valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249+,   for a general device for actuating a flush device without linkage.


CLS 4/406
TXT Electrical:

    Subject matter under subclass 405 wherein the actuator is energized by an
    electric current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302,    for an automatic flush actuator which includes electric devices in
    a urinal system.

    313,    for an automatic flush actuator which includes electric devices in
    a stool system.


CLS 4/407
TXT Pneumatic or hydraulic:

    Subject matter under subclass 405 wherein the actuation is effected by a
    variation in fluid pressure or flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302,    for an automatic actuated flush device which includes pneumatic or
    hydraulic means.

    367,    for a device which simultaneously actuates a tank supply and flush
    valve.


CLS 4/408
TXT Seat actuated:

    Subject matter under subclass 405 wherein the valve is actuated by motion
    of a closet seat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    335+,   for a pressure tank where the valve is actuated by a seat.

    338,    for a normally empty tank where the valve is actuated by a seat.

    411,    for linkage external to the tank operated other than by a seat.

    436,    for a seat actuated valve in a bowl.


CLS 4/409
TXT With overhead tank:

    Subject matter under subclass 408 including a flush tank mounted above a
    bowl and not supported by bowl structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    343,    for an overhead tank and a bowl.


CLS 4/410
TXT Button type:

    Subject matter under subclass 405 having an element mounted on and
    extending through the tank wall which is movable toward or away from the
    tank to cause a mechanism therein to actuate the valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    406,    for a push button device which actuates an electrical device to
    cause a flush.

    407,    for a push button device which actuates a pneumatic or hydraulic
    device to cause a flush.

    408+,   for a push button device which actuates a flush valve by a seat.


CLS 4/411
TXT Portion of linkage external to tank:

    Subject matter under subclass 405 wherein the motion of a handle is
    transmitted to the flush valve by a mechanical linkage, a portion of which
    linkage is positioned externally of the tank.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this classification, a handle, an extension
    thereof, or a flexible connection thereto are not considered portions of a
    linkage.  However, a pivot or a connection between relatively movable
    elements are considered portions of a linkage, which located exteriorly of
    the tank, will cause placement in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    408+,   for linkage external to tank actuated by a seat.


CLS 4/412
TXT Including flexible linkage element in tank (e.g., chain or cord):

    Subject matter under subclass 405 wherein the valve is actuated by a
    mechanism including a mechanical linkage in the tank, which linkage
    includes a flexible force transmitting element such as a chain or cord.


CLS 4/413
TXT Including articulated rigid linkage:

    Subject matter under subclass 405 wherein the valve is actuated by a
    mechanism having a mechanical linkage in the tank, which linkage includes
    plural, relatively movable, rigid force transmitting elements.


CLS 4/414
TXT Having stationary pivot within tank:

    Subject matter under subclass 413 wherein an element of the linkage, other
    than a handle or shaft thereof, rotates about an axis which is fixed with
    respect to the tank.


CLS 4/415
TXT Water saver:

    Subject matter under subclass 353 having an arrangement for reducing the
    amount of liquid used in flushing.


CLS 4/416
TXT With lining:

    Subject matter under subclass 353 including a covering for the inner
    surface of the tank or a receptacle placed close to the tank inner surface
    to minimize tank sweating.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes tank liners, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 400+, 470 for liner of general use, per se.


CLS 4/417
TXT With connector or seal:

    Subject matter under subclass 353 including means to connect a tank and
    bowl together and/or means to prevent leakage of fluid between the tank and
    bowl.


CLS 4/418
TXT Cover or housing for connector or seal:

    Subject matter under subclass 417 having means to enclose the connector
    and/or seal.


CLS 4/419
TXT With support:

    Subject matter under subclass 453 including structure for holding the tank
    against the force of gravity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 262+ for spaced
    vertical supports with transverse member, e.g., floor on legs.

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses for supports of more general
    application.


CLS 4/420
TXT Bowl:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein the receptacle is open at the top.

    (1)     Note.  Most receptacles also have an outlet open.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256.1,  for a debris catcher or a cleanout plug for a flush closet bowl.

    901,    for a bowl skirt.

    905,    for a squat bowl.


CLS 4/420.1
TXT With body-contacting nozzle:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 including a bidet nozzle for contacting
    the human body internally or externally.


CLS 4/420.2
TXT With heated bidet fluid:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 including a bidet nozzle or an air blower
    and means to heat a fluid delivered to the bidet nozzle or to the air
    blower.

    (1)     Note.  The term "fluid" includes water which is used in a bidet
    bath and air which is used to dry the washed areas of a bidet bath.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    420.3,  for a flush closet combined with a bidet basin.

    420.4+, for a flush closet combined with a bidet nozzle.

    447,    for a bidet nozzle with a seat.

    448,    for a bidet nozzle attachment.


CLS 4/420.3
TXT With bidet basin:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 including a bidet receptacle supported by
    the flush-closet bowl or the seat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    443,    for the bidet receptacle, per se.


CLS 4/420.4
TXT With bidet nozzle:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 including means to supply water to the
    perineum region of a person while seated on the flush closet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    447,    for bidet nozzle combined with a flush closet seat.

    448,    for bidet nozzle attachments for use with a flush closet.


CLS 4/420.5
TXT Integral with flush closet:

    Subject matter under subclass 420.4 wherein the means to supply water is
    part of the flush closet.


CLS 4/421
TXT Siphon discharge:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 wherein the bowl is provided with a
    siphon discharge either as an integral part of the bowl or specially
    adapted to connect with a waste pipe to complete the siphon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    328,    for a low profile type tank and bowl which includes a siphon
    discharge.

    336,    for a siphon bowl and a pressure tank.

    344,    for a siphon bowl and an overhead     tank.


CLS 4/422
TXT With flush valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 421 wherein a valve is combined with the bowl
    structure to provide the fluid supply for the bowl.


CLS 4/423
TXT With vacuum breaker:

    Subject matter under subclass 422 wherein the valve includes means to break
    a vacuum to prevent back siphonage or reverse flow.


CLS 4/424
TXT Extra trap or false trap:

    Subject matter under subclass 421 wherein the bowl discharges to a
    liquid-seal trap or to a similar unsealed trap.


CLS 4/425
TXT Siphonic jet at trap:

    Device under subclass 421 wherein a fluid jet means assists an evacuation
    of the siphon.


CLS 4/426
TXT With check valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 421 including a check valve in the siphon
    passage between a trap and a waste pipe.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 217 for an anti-siphon valve.


CLS 4/427
TXT Overflow inhibitor:

    Subject matter under subclass 421 having means to prevent the bowl from
    overflowing.


CLS 4/428
TXT Configurated outlet:

    Subject matter under subclass 421 wherein the discharge of the bowl has a
    somewhat tortuous path before the connection to a waste pipe.


CLS 4/429
TXT Pan bowl:

    Subject matter under subclass 421 wherein the bowl has a material receiving
    platform therein.


CLS 4/430
TXT Distinct from bowl:

    Subject matter under subclass 421 wherein the siphon is located exteriorly
    of the bowl and its supporting structure.


CLS 4/431
TXT Pump or suction type discharge:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 including means located in the discharge
    from the bowl through which means the discharged material flows and which
    directly applies a force to the discharged material to move the material
    away from the bowl.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes those devices using an external
    source of pressure or suction to effect the material movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, for pumps, per se.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, for rotary expansible chamber
    pumps, per se.


CLS 4/432
TXT With flush supply pump:

    Subject matter under subclass 431 including means directly applying force
    on the flushing liquid so as to move the flushing liquid toward the bowl.


CLS 4/433
TXT Unitary with discharge pump:

    Subject matter under subclass 432 wherein the flush supply pump and the
    discharge pump are in a single chamber or adjacent chambers and have at
    least one common movable element.

    (1)     Note.  A device with separate movable elements even though powered
    by a single driving element will be classified in subclass 432.


CLS 4/434
TXT Valved discharge:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 wherein the bowl outlet is controlled by
    a valve directly connected to the bowl.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS,

    420,    for a valve or plunger discharge located downstream of the bowl
    outlet.

    466     and 471+, for a dry closet with a     valve discharge bowl.


CLS 4/435
TXT With flush supply actuated by valved discharge:

    Subject matter under subclass 434 including a single means for moving an
    inlet and outlet valve at the same time to cause fluid to flow into and out
    of the bowl.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    366,    for simultaneous actuating means for supply and outlet valve in a
    tank.


CLS 4/436
TXT By movement of seat or cover:

    Subject matter under subclass 435 wherein the valves are actuated by motion
    of a closet seat or lid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    408,    for a seat actuated valve in a tank.


CLS 4/437
TXT Float control of fluid in bowl:

    Subject matter under subclass 435 wherein an element which senses the fluid
    level floats in the fluid and is buoyed up thereby to stop the supply of
    fluid.


CLS 4/438
TXT Pivoted valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 435 wherein the discharge valve turns about a
    fixed axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    411,    for a pivoted discharge valve.


CLS 4/439
TXT With additional valve (e.g., draft control):

    Subject matter under subclass 438 including another valve.


CLS 4/440
TXT Pan type:

    Subject matter under subclass 438 wherein the valve has a bowl or hollow
    shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    442,    for discharge pan type valve.


CLS 4/441
TXT Pivoted valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 434 wherein the discharge valve turns about a
    fixed axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    438+,   for a pivoted discharge valve and a   supply valve.


CLS 4/442
TXT Pan type:

    Subject matter under subclass 441 wherein the valve has a bowl or hollow
    shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    440,    for a pan type discharge valve and a supply valve.


CLS 4/443
TXT BIDETS:

    Subject matter under the class definition for devices for washing the
    perineum region of the human body.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass are washbasins configured to conform to the
    shape of portions of the human body but do not support the weight of the
    body.

    (2)     Note.  The term "devices" includes wash receptacles as well as
    other means to wash the cited region of the body.


CLS 4/444
TXT With seat:

    Subject matter under subclass 443 including a support for a person to
    permit a person to assume a sitting or a reclining position and a
    receptacle for washing the perineum area of the person positioned upon the
    support.

    (1)     Note.  The "support" includes a chair, stool, couch, or other type
    of seat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    420+,   for the combination of a flush closet  and a bidet.

    443,    for body-supported bidet basins.

    447,    for a seat and a bidet nozzle.


CLS 4/445
TXT Bidet basin for flush closet:

    Subject matter under subclass 443 including a bidet receptacle which is
    designed to be supported by the seat or the bowl of a flush closet.

    (1)     Note.  The bidet receptacle may include an overflow, drain hole
    with or without a plug for the drain hole, or a water supply to the basin
    with water valve or a hot and cold mixer valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    420.3,  for the combination of a bidet receptacle and flush closet.


CLS 4/446
TXT Bidet bowl with drain:

    Subject matter under subclass 443 including a receptacle having means to
    let water out.


CLS 4/447
TXT Nozzle with seat:

    Subject matter under subclass 443 including a seat and a spray device for
    washing the perineum region of the body.

    (1)     Note.  Included are a nozzle integral with a flush-closet seat, a
    nozzle supported by the flush-closet seat as well as the broad combination
    of a nozzle and a flush-closet seat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237+,   for a seat, per se.

    615+,   for means for spraying user generally.


CLS 4/448
TXT Nozzle attachment:

    Subject matter under subclass 443 including an attachment to deliver and
    spray water for a bidet bath.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    420.4+, for combination of a flush closet   and bidet nozzle.

    447,    for a bidet nozzle with a seat.


CLS 4/449
TXT DRY CLOSETS:

    Subject matter under the class definition having means for receiving human
    waste material wherein a flush liquid is not used to assist the removal of
    the material from the means.

    (1)     Note.  When it cannot be determined if means to assist removal of
    bowel material is a liquid or dry material, the document is placed as an
    original in Miscellaneous subclass 661 and cross-referenced in appropriate
    subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  A bedpan may be cleaned by using water from a supply.  If
    liquid handling means is used to flush the bedpan, the patents will be
    placed in subclasses 300+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300+,   for a liquid flush closet.


CLS 4/450
TXT Bedpans:

    Subject matter under subclass 449 wherein the receptacle is adapted to be
    placed under a person.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144.1,  for a urinal of general use.

    300.2,  for a bedpan rinser used with a flush closet.


CLS 4/451
TXT Disposable type:

    Subject matter under subclass 450 wherein the receptacle is designed to be
    used only once.


CLS 4/452
TXT With liner:

    Subject matter under subclass 450 including a covering for the inner
    surface of the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    451,    for a receptacle to be used only once.


CLS 4/453
TXT With deodorizing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 450 including means for destroying or
    counteracting undesired odors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    309,    for urinal with disinfecting or deodorizing means.


CLS 4/454
TXT With urinal:

    Subject matter under subclass 450 including a divider or separate place in
    the receptacle for urine.


CLS 4/455
TXT With drain means:

    Subject matter under subclass 450 including means for emptying the bedpan.


CLS 4/456
TXT Cushioned:

    Subject matter under subclass 450 wherein the top of the bedpan has a soft
    padded area.


CLS 4/457
TXT Accessories:

    Subject matter under subclass 450 wherein there is provided additional
    means specialized for use with a bedpan.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for devices not classifiable in other
    classes.


CLS 4/458
TXT Automobile:

    Subject matter under subclass 449 wherein the receptacle is part of or
    combined with an automobile.


CLS 4/459
TXT Chemical:

    Subject matter under subclass 449 wherein a chemical is used for
    disinfection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222+,   for general disinfecting or chemical dispensing apparatus.

    464+,   for a dry closet having a magazine containing granular material and
    means for discharging a portion to the bowl.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 632, 638, 660+, 696+,
    702+, and 749+ for processes of chemical treatment for purification or
    separation, and subclasses 198.1+ for apparatus for purification or
    separation with additional treating material.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 1+ for a process to disinfect,
    preserve, deodorize or sterilize, and subclasses 243+ for apparatus to
    treat a solid article or material with a fluid chemical.

    424,    Drug Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 40+
    for a composition that is usually incompletely burned or at least has a
    chemical reaction to project the composition into the air as a smoke, mist
    or aerosol, and subclasses 76.1+ for a deodorant, disinfectant, or
    olfactory desensitizer composition.

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, for cleaning
    compositions having a particular shape or structure to adapt them for use,
    search subclasses 109+ for compositions tailored for a specific utility
    (e.g., toilet soap bars, including packages); for cleaning compositions of
    general utility, search subclasses 406 and 439 for packaged compositions,
    subclasses 382+ for antiseptic or biocidal compositions, and subclasses 440
    and 447+ for shaped, barlike compositions.


CLS 4/460
TXT Field:

    Subject matter under subclass 449 wherein the dry closet is for use outside
    in an open area and the ground is used to receive the waste.


CLS 4/461
TXT Plural:

    Subject matter under subclass 449 having more than one means for receiving
    bowel material or a single means with more than one opening to receive
    bowel material.


CLS 4/462
TXT With urinal:

    Subject matter under subclass 449 including a divider or separate place in
    the receptacle for urine.


CLS 4/463
TXT Separate receiver:

    Subject matter under subclass 462 wherein the urinal receptacle is a
    distinct area.


CLS 4/464
TXT With magazine:

    Subject matter under subclass 449 including a container for granular
    material with means for discharging a portion upon the bowel material in
    the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222+,   for general disinfecting or chemical dispensing apparatus.

    459,    for a dry  closet using a chemical for disinfection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 632, 638, 660+, 696+,
    702+, and 749+ for processes of chemical treatment for purification or
    separation, and subclasses 198.1+ for apparatus for purification or
    separation with additional treating material.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 1+ for a process to disinfect,
    preserve, deodorize or sterilize, and subclasses 243+ for apparatus to
    treat a solid article or material with a fluid chemical.

    424,    Drug Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 40+
    for a composition  that is usually incompletely burned or at least has a
    chemical reaction to project the composition into the air as a smoke, mist
    or aerosol, and subclasses 76.1+ for a deodorant, disinfectant, or
    olfactory desensitizer composition.

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, for cleaning
    compositions having a particular shape or structure to adapt them for use,
    search subclasses 109+ for compositions tailored for a specific utility
    (e.g., toilet soap bars, including packages); for cleaning compositions of
    general utility, search subclasses 406 and 439 for packaged compositions,
    subclasses 382+ for antiseptic or biocidal compositions, and subclasses 440
    and 447+ for shaped, barlike compositions.


CLS 4/465
TXT Furniture type:

    Subject matter under subclass 464 wherein the closet is formed as a part of
    furniture used in a room.


CLS 4/466
TXT Valved bowl:

    Subject matter under subclass 464 wherein the receptacle has a movable
    element stopping means which, when open, allows the bowel material to pass
    through.


CLS 4/467
TXT Movable receiver:

    Subject matter under subclass 464 wherein the receptacle is moved from an
    inoperable position to an operative position.


CLS 4/468
TXT Seat operated:

    Subject matter under subclass 464 wherein the discharging means is actuated
    by motion of a closet seat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    473,    for a seat-operated valved bowl.


CLS 4/469
TXT Cover operated:

    Subject matter under subclass 464 wherein the discharge means is actuated
    by motion of a closet lid or covering for the seat.


CLS 4/470
TXT In cover:

    Subject matter under subclass 464 wherein the magazine is formed as a part
    of a lid for a seat.


CLS 4/471
TXT Valved bowl:

    Subject matter under subclass 449 wherein there is a movable element
    stopping means which, when open, allows the bowel material to pass through.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    466,    for a valved bowl with a magazine.


CLS 4/472
TXT Ventilated:

    Subject matter under subclass 471 including means for removing gases having
    a disagreeable odor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209+,   for general ventilation of the class  type.

    475,    for a ventilated vault.

    477,    for a ventilated closed receptacle.

    482,    for a ventilated receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    454,    Ventilation, for ventilating devices not peculiar to subject matter
    of this class, particularly subclasses 341+ for ventilating devices which
    exhaust stale air from a room.


CLS 4/473
TXT Seat or cover operated:

    Subject matter under subclass 471 wherein the valve is actuated by motion
    of a closet seat, lid, or covering for the seat.


CLS 4/474
TXT Vault type:

    Subject matter under subclass 449 wherein there are two receptacles, one
    being a subchamber.


CLS 4/475
TXT Ventilated:

    Subject matter under subclass 474 including means for removing gases having
    a disagreeable odor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    472,    for a ventilated valve bowl, and see search notes for ventilation.


CLS 4/476
TXT Enclosed receptacle type:

    Subject matter under subclass 449 wherein the receptacle is inside an
    enclosure which is provided with a closet seat.

    (1)     Note.  The receptacle cannot be seen unless a door or covering over
    an opening is removed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    479,    for a receptacle placed under a chair-type device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, appropriate subclasses for a seat, per se, and
    particularly subclasses 188.09+ for a chair having a receptacle of general
    utility thereunder.  The presence of an aperture in a seat together with a
    closet receptacle under the seat is classified in Class 4.


CLS 4/477
TXT Ventilated:

    Subject matter under subclass 476 including means for removing gases having
    a disagreeable odor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    472,    for ventilated valve bowl, and see search notes for ventilation.


CLS 4/478
TXT With arm or back support:

    Subject matter under subclass 476 including means for resting or holding
    the arm or back of a person.


CLS 4/479
TXT Receptacle type:

    Subject matter under subclass 449 wherein the receptacle is a bowl, pot,
    bag, or etc.

    (1)     Note.  The receptacle usually has means to support it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    476,    for an enclosed receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, appropriate subclasses for a seat, per se, and
    particularly subclasses 188.09+ for a chair having a receptacle of general
    utility thereunder.  The presence of an aperture in a seat together with a
    receptacle under the seat, is classifiable in this class (4).


CLS 4/480
TXT Invalid:

    Subject matter under subclass 479 including means to assist or help a
    disabled person.


CLS 4/481
TXT Muffler for liquid:

    Subject matter under subclass 479 including means for preventing the noise
    of liquid entering the receptacle.


CLS 4/482
TXT Ventilated:

    Subject matter under subclass 479 including means for removing gases having
    a disagreeable odor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    472,    for a ventilated valve bowl, and see search notes for ventilation.


CLS 4/483
TXT With seat:

    Subject matter under subclass 479 including means to support a person above
    or on the receptacle.


CLS 4/484
TXT Flexible material:

    Subject matter under subclass 479 wherein the receptacle is made of a
    clothlike material.

    (1)     Note.  The receptacle can be of flexible material itself or a
    flexible liner in a shaped receptacle.

    (2)     Note.  The receptacles are usually of the disposable type.


CLS 4/485
TXT Seat subclosure:

    Subject matter under subclass 449 wherein a valve or closure is beneath a
    seat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    466,    for a valved bowl with magazine means.

    471+,   for a valved bowl.


CLS 4/486
TXT Seat or cover operated:

    Subject matter under subclass 485 wherein the valve is actuated by the
    movement of a seat or lid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238,    for seat-operated valve.


CLS 4/487
TXT OPEN-WATER BARRIER:

    Subject matter under the class definition having means for containing a
    person within a certain area in a large body of water.

    (1)     Note.  The open water is the ocean, lake, pond, etc.  The barrier
    can be used in a pool if it blocks an irregular area, but if it divides a
    pool into portions, see subclass 505.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    505,    for a pool divider.


CLS 4/488
TXT POOL TYPE:

    Subject matter under the class definition having means for holding water,
    open at the top for user to enter, for the purpose of swimming, relaxation,
    or recreation.

    (1)     Note.  Class 52 has enclosure structure open at the top, also wall
    sections, or panels, above or below the ground, edging and other structure
    provided for in use Class 52, which can be used for pool structure, whereas
    Class 4 has a complete pool with water inlet and outlet, also structure
    related to a pool not in Class 52, e.g., cover, gutter, pump, diving area,
    or etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191+,   for receptacle fittings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses for an
    enclosure structure, particularly subclass 169.7 for an enclosure structure
    having an earth-to-structure relationship, and  subclass 741.11+ for pool
    methods.  Also  see (1) Note above.

    220,    Receptacles, appropriate subclasses for a receptacle of general use
    of the class type.


CLS 4/489
TXT Plural separate receptacles:

    Subject matter under subclass 488 wherein there is more than one complete
    receptacle each having its own area.

    (1)     Note.  A divider to separate a receptacle is not a complete
    receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    505,    for pool dividers.


CLS 4/490
TXT With cleaning means:

    Subject matter under subclass 488 having means to loosen or agitate slit or
    other sediment so the slit or sediment can be removed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    492,    for water jets in a spa or the like.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 1.7 for
    submerged devices having cleaning means for that class.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 167+ for jet
    applying conduits or nozzles for that class.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 169 for filter for that
    class.


CLS 4/491
TXT With wave-making means:

    Subject matter under subclass 488 having means to move the water in such a
    manner as to create waves, e.g., to simulate ocean waves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    541.1+, for means to agitate or circulate water in a tub.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 52+ for wave generating
    of general use, e.g., for surfing.


CLS 4/492
TXT With water-jet means:

    Subject matter under subclass 488 having means which causes the water to
    flow in a well-defined stream from an orifice, nozzle, or etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    541.1+, for means to agitate or circulate water in a tub.

    904,    for a swim-in-place pool.


CLS 4/493
TXT With heating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 488 having means to raise the temperature of
    the water.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 561+ for solar heating means which
    may include a pool.


CLS 4/494
TXT Combined or convertible:

    Subject matter under subclass 488 to which has been added a subcombination
    or assembly which is recognized as the subject matter of some other class,
    or which selectively performs two dissimilar functions by appropriate
    rearrangement of parts or use.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of the specific subclasses herein
    following (subclass 496 to end) are considered basic to the area rather
    than as combinations.  Thus accessory or construction details are
    considered common in the art.


CLS 4/495
TXT Adjustable bottom:

    Subject Matter under subclass 488 wherein the lower part of the pool is
    movable to different positions and supports a person when moved to the
    different positions.

    (1)     Note.  The bottom can be either an actual part of the pool or a
    false or movable section which move relative to a fixed bottom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    498,    for a cover for a pool.

    504,    for a safety device which can lift a person from the bottom of a
    pool.


CLS 4/496
TXT Accessory:

    Subject matter under subclass 488 wherein there is provided additional
    means specialized for use with a pool.

    (1)     Note.  These subclasses provide for devices not classified in other
    classes.


CLS 4/497
TXT Wave quelling:

    Subject matter under subclass 496 having means to quiet, baffle or suppress
    the movement of water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    505,    for a line divider without wave      quelling means.

    SEARCH  CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 27 for means for
    controlling the action of water in a channel.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclass 6 for buoys fixed to a
    line to indicate a certain area of the class type.


CLS 4/498
TXT Cover:

    Subject matter under subclass 496 having a protective shield or screen
    which acts to prevent unwanted objects from entering the pool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    494,    for a pool cover convertible to a secondary function, e.g., cover
    to sun screen.

    495,    for an adjustable bottom which can also be a cover.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 171.1 for a solar cover to heat a
    pool.

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclasses 87+ for a flexible
    cover used as a tent.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 216+ for a receptacle with a cover which
    floats on its contents.


CLS 4/499
TXT Air inflatable or supported:

    Subject matter under subclass 498 wherein a gaseous fluid is utilized to
    shape, strengthen, or keep the cover above the surface of the water.

    (1)     Note.  The gaseous fluid is applied when the cover is used: a
    buoyant cover wherein air is sealed permanently within the cover is placed
    in other subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    501+,   for liquid means to raise a cover.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 2.11+ for a
    structure, or a component thereof, of that class which is shaped, supported
    or strengthened by an enclosed fluid.  See (1) Note of subclass 2.11 for
    other locations of inflatable devices, elements, members, structures, etc..


CLS 4/500
TXT Including storage area:

    Subject matter under subclass 498 having a place where the cover is kept
    when not in use.

    (1)     Note.  The cover is usually moved by a mechanical device to the
    storage area.


CLS 4/501
TXT On pool bottom:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein the cover rests on the lowest
    part of the pool when not in a covering position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    495,    for an adjustable floor which may also be a cover.


CLS 4/502
TXT On a roll:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein the cover is wound on a
    cylindrical device for storage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 370+ for a reeling
    device of general use and 919 for a reeling device for a ground cover;
    e.g., a tarp.


CLS 4/503
TXT Including securing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 498 wherein the cover is held in place by
    fastening or retaining means.


CLS 4/504
TXT Safety means:

    Subject matter under subclass 496 having means to prevent injury or damage
    to those using the pool or to the pool itself.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    495,    for a movable floor or a support which is also a safety device.

    498,    for a cover for a pool which can also be a safety device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    256,    Fences, appropriate subclasses for a fence, per se.


CLS 4/505
TXT Divider:

    Subject matter under subclass 496 having means to separate a pool into
    separate parts so that a person can be in each part.

    (1)     Note.  The divider may be from the top of liquid to the bottom of
    the pool, just on the top of the liquid as a lane marker, or any other
    proportion to separate the pool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    489,    for plural receptacles.


CLS 4/506
TXT Construction details:

    Subject matter under subclass 488 wherein the pool structure relates to
    shape, material, strength, or etc.


CLS 4/507
TXT Including water inlet or outlet means:

    Subject matter under subclass 506 wherein the pool has means for allowing
    water to enter or leave the pool.


CLS 4/508
TXT And water level control:

    Subject matter under subclass 507 including means to keep the water at a
    certain height.


CLS 4/509
TXT And pump:

    Subject matter under subclass 507 including means to force water into or
    out of the pool.


CLS 4/510
TXT Gutter:

    Subject matter under subclass 507 wherein the means for allowing the water
    to leave via trough or channel along the upper area of the pool.


CLS 4/511
TXT With handhold (e.g., life rail):

    Subject matter under subclass 510 including means where a person can grip a
    portion of the gutter or other structure to support himself.


CLS 4/512
TXT Including weir:

    Subject matter under subclass 510 having a movable element for surface
    skimming the water.


CLS 4/513
TXT Shape:

    Subject matter under subclass 506 wherein the external surface has a
    special form.

    (1)     Note.  The surface is usually formed by continuous line and not
    made up of surfaces joined together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    494,    for a pool-shaped surface with another useful surface connected to
    it, e.g., pool and slide.


CLS 4/514
TXT CONVERTIBLE CLASS-TYPE APPARATUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition, which, by the addition or the
    omission of a part, changes (a) a wash receptacle into a plurality of wash
    receptacles or vice versa or (b) a wash receptacle into another type of
    wash receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  Here are included the partitions and the means to secure the
    partition to the bathtub, sink, or other wash receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 232+ for laundry
    tubs or other tubs for the fluid treating of textiles.


CLS 4/515
TXT HAIR WASHING MACHINE OR DEVICE OR ACCESSORY:

    Subject matter under the class definition having means especially designed
    for washing a person's hair or means to assist in the washing of the hair.

    (1)     Note.  The washing or treating of a person's hair includes:
    washing by a liquid, usually water, the head, scalp, or hair of a person
    and includes washing, shampooing, or treating the hair or scalp where no
    special treatment is claimed such as dyeing the hair, putting oil on the
    hair or scalp, or permanent waving the hair.

    (2)     Note.  In this subclass or group are washbasins with or without a
    drain, and face shields to prevent the wash liquid or water from getting
    into ones eyes or on to ones clothes while having the hair washed.  The
    washbasins are generally specifically designed to support the head while
    the hair is being washed with the liquid.

    (3)     Note.  See Class 2, Apparel, subclass 174 for head coverings
    including shields to prevent water or a liquid from getting in ones eyes or
    on ones clothes while washing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    567+,   for means to spray a user associated with a tub.

    596+,   for means to spray a user associated with a stall having walls and
    a drain.

    615+,   for means to spray a user.

    619,    for washbasins, sinks, or lavatories with or without a drain, with
    or without a support, supports for the washbasins, lavatories or sinks and
    elements, and attachments designed for use with the washbasin, lavatory, or
    bathroom sink.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 174 for a shield to protect the eyes and face
    during shampooing.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, for machine and devices
    used in general cleaning particularly subclasses 320+ with liquid or other
    cleaning material application.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 34+ for a static
    structure and a lavatory fixture.

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 202+ for hair-treating methods; subclasses 212+
    for devices, including subclasses 219+ for combs: and subclasses 223+ for
    crimpers and curlers.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 1+ for processes and particularly
    subclasses 602+ for systems having a multiple fluid inlet with a single
    outlet; subclass 605 for systems with flow control; and subclass 801 for
    spouts and faucets.

    220,    Receptacles, appropriate subclasses for containers generally.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 1+ for
    processes; subclass 152 for body- or animal-carried sprinklers, sprayers,
    or diffuser.

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 228 for cabinets combined
    with a tub or basin; and subclass 229 for a cabinet with a liquid drain.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclass 62 for
    live hair and skin bleach; subclass 63 for live-skin colorant containing;
    and subclasses 70+ for live hair or scalp-treating compositions.

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 119+ for
    shampoo compositions, with or without a conditioner component.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses
    81+ for bathing apparatus using light, thermal, and electrical application.


CLS 4/516
TXT Portable:

    Subject matter under subclass 515 which includes portable machines which
    include a liquid supply tank and a means to apply the liquid of the supply
    tank to the hair of a person, and a receptacle to receive the liquid
    draining from the hair, and a receiver of the liquid received in the
    receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  Portable includes wheeled machines or devices or a composite
    container for the above with a handle.


CLS 4/517
TXT Combined:

    Subject matter under subclass 515 which includes structure to perform a
    function which perfects the hair-washing machine or device, or performs a
    function which is distinct from the function of the hair-washing machine or
    device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    519,    for sinks and lavatories with head and neck rests.

    520+,   for shampoo drain boards, trays, pans, and shields.

    523,    for head, chin, forehead, face, and neck rests, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, particularly subclasses 600+ for invalid beds and subclass 92
    for invalid bed accessories.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 3+ for
    machines, and subclass 104.001 for implements for brushing or scrubbing.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 283 for
    processes and subclasses 96+ for apparatus for treating hair on human head.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), particularly subclass 34 with
    a lavatory fixture.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 68+ for barber's chairs and having leg
    and footrests interconnected to move relative to and concurrent with the
    instrument of the bottom or back of chair; subclasses 15+ for collapsible
    chairs; and subclasses 391+ for headrests.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 228 for cabinets with a
    basin or washtub.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclass 70.1
    for live hair or scalp treatment composition, and subclass 62 for bleach
    composition for live hair or skin.


CLS 4/518
TXT With water supply means:

    Subject matter under subclass 515 wherein the machines, devices, or
    equipment include means to apply washing water to the head or hair of the
    person.

    (1)     Note.  Included are water-tight head coverings which have a water
    supply connected thereto to wash the head or hair.  These devices can
    include dispensers of soap or other liquids in addition to water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    520,    for liquid shields or drains for head or hair washing, or treatment.


CLS 4/519
TXT Head or neck receiving or supporting sink:

    Subject matter under subclass 515 which includes sinks or lavatories
    configured to receive or support the neck or head of a person for the
    purpose of washing the person's hair.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    619+,   for washbasins for washing a person generally where the person is
    not supported within the washing receptacle.


CLS 4/520
TXT Shield or drain:

    Subject matter under subclass 515 wherein a device has a wash
    liquid-diverting surface to divert the hair-washing liquid away from the
    body or clothes onto the diverting surface so that the wash liquid can be
    collected and/or drained into a sink or conveyed into a sewage system.


CLS 4/521
TXT Supported by body:

    Subject matter under subclass 520 wherein the shield or drain is held in
    position for use solely by a part of a person.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    515,    for face shields without a surface to drain away the liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 174 for a head-supported shield to protect the
    eyes and face during shampooing of the hair.


CLS 4/522
TXT With post-type support:

    Subject matter under subclass 520 including a post or pedestal or pole-type
    support for the shield and/or drain.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    646,    for washbasin supports of the staff, pedestal, or post-type support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 511+ for staff-type supports where the support
    is not claimed with the washbasin or an appliance for hair washing.


CLS 4/523
TXT Body-portion rest:

    Subject matter under subclass 515 having a support for the head or the neck
    to hold the head or neck in relation to a wash receptacle for the purpose
    of washing the hair.

    (1)     Note.  The term "head" includes the chin, forehead, face.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    517,    for a human-body support combined with a hair-washing device.

    520,    for shields or drains to divert the hair-washing water away from a
    person or the person's clothes.

    656,    for drainboards for wash receptacle generally.

    658,    for splash and drip guards for wash receptacles generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 127+ for supports of the stand type and
    subclasses 200+ for bracket supports generally.


CLS 4/524
TXT VAPOR OR HEAT IN BATH (E.G., SAUNA, STEAM BATH OR SUDATORIUM):

    Subject matter under the class definition having an enclosure designed to
    surround or enclose a person wholly and having steam or conditioned gases
    supplied to the enclosure for the purpose of bathing a person by the
    application of dry or moist heat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    535+,   for applying vapor or hot air to a portion of a person, which
    includes means to cover part of a person.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses 1+
    for vapor or hot-air bath with an additional treating means, particularly
    subclasses 81+ and 83 for enclosures.


CLS 4/525
TXT With additional means for washing:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 including separate means for cleaning the
    user in the form of bathtub, shower, or washbasin.


CLS 4/526
TXT Collapsible:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 in which the enclosure is capable of
    being folded compactly, with at least some of its constituent parts still
    connected together.

    (1)     Note.  Merely because the enclosure could be dismantled into its
    constituent parts does not make the device the subject matter of this
    subclass.


CLS 4/527
TXT Flexible fabric supported by a folding frame:

    Subject matter under subclass 526 wherein the enclosure is constructed of a
    clothlike material which covers a support which folds so as to reduce the
    size of the enclosure.


CLS 4/528
TXT With body support means:

    Subject matter under subclass 526 wherein the enclosure has means upon
    which the user comes into contact for the purpose of adding to the comfort
    of the user.


CLS 4/529
TXT Bed type:

    Subject matter under subclass 528 wherein the support means allows the user
    to assume a recumbent position.


CLS 4/530
TXT With head or back rest:

    Subject matter under subclass 529 wherein the bed has a portion which is
    adapted to specially support the head or back of the user.


CLS 4/531
TXT Seat:

    Subject matter under subclass 528 wherein the support is a means which
    allows the users to sit in an upright position.


CLS 4/532
TXT Fixed:

    Subject matter under subclass 531 wherein the seat is secured to a position
    of the enclosure or formed as part of the enclosure.


CLS 4/533
TXT Conversion means:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 including additional means to change a
    bath receptacle into an enclosure.


CLS 4/534
TXT Flexible cover:

    Subject matter under subclass 533 wherein the additional means is
    constructed of a clothlike material.


CLS 4/535
TXT MEANS FOR APPLY VAPOR OR HOT AIR DIRECTLY TO BODY OF USER:

    Subject matter under the class definition which has an element for
    directing steam or conditioned gases to a portion of a person for the
    purpose of bathing a person.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    524+,   for a vapor or a hot-air bath for a person within an enclosure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses
    81+ for vapor or hot bath with additional treating means.


CLS 4/536
TXT With means covering a majority of the user's body:

    Subject matter under subclass 535 including means placed over or on a user
    except for a small part of the user.


CLS 4/537
TXT To the head or face:

    Subject matter under subclass 535 wherein the steam or gases are applied to
    the area above the shoulder.


CLS 4/538
TXT TUBS:

    Subject matter under the class definition having an open receptacle large
    enough for most or a majority of a user's body to be received therein for
    the purpose of washing or bathing the user.

    (1)     Note.  The receptacle is capable of holding the washing or bathing
    liquid.

    (2)     Note.  A tub differs from a swimming pool or tank primarily by
    intended uses.

    (3)     Note.  A receptacle used for washing or bathing an infant placed
    herein is proper for this area and not in the basin or sink area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    488+,   for swimming pool type receptacles.

    619+,   for a sink capable of holding a portion of the body of a user.

    668+,   for a supply outlet, drain, overflow or trap having condition
    responsive means for use with a sink or bath.

    670,    for a prefabricated or modular plumbing system for use with a sink
    or bath.

    671+,   for a supply outlet combined with a drain, overflow or trap for use
    with a sink or bath.

    675+,   for a supply outlet for use with a sink or bath.

    679+,   for a drain, overflow or trap for use with a sink or bath.

    695,    for a support or mount for a supply, drain, overflow or trap means.

    696,    for a fitting or manifold for a sink or bath.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 34+ for structures
    providing for the mounting of a lavatory fixture in a building wherein (1)
    no feature having a Class 4 function is defined or (2) more structure of a
    barrier or enclosure is defined than is necessary to support the fixture.


CLS 4/539
TXT Plural tub (i.e., all for bathing):

    Subject matter under subclass 538 wherein more than one receptacle is
    provided, and wherein each receptacle is capable of holding bathing water
    independent of the other.

    (1)     Note.  Intercommunication of the fluids between receptacles under
    normal use is placed in appropriate subclasses below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    639+,   for plural sinks or baths.

    675+,   for a hot and cold supply outlet for use with a compartmented sink
    or bath.


CLS 4/540
TXT With means for turning tub for aiding access:

    Subject matter under subclass 538 including means for handling the tub in
    such a manner that a user will find it easier to get into the tub other
    than in the conventional manner.


CLS 4/541.1
TXT Means for agitating or circulating water in a tub:
    Subject matter under subclass 538 comprising an apparatus for use with the
    tub (e.g., a spa, hot tub, or whirlpool) that causes the water within the
    tub to churn or flow.

    (1)     Note. The tub need not be claimed in order for a reference to be
    properly included in this and the indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    491,    for a pool with wave making means.

    493,    for a pool with heating means.

    545,    for heating of tub structure.

    668+,   for condition responsive supply means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 344+ for a water heater, per se.

    601,    Surgery:  Kinesitherapy, subclasses 160+ for hydromessage apparatus
    having a method of treatment for the body.


CLS 4/541.2
TXT With condition response:
    Subject matter under subclass 541.1 wherein the apparatus has means to
    sense a change in the environment to effect a change in the operation of
    the apparatus that causes the water within the tub to churn or flow.


CLS 4/541.3
TXT By liquid flow:
    Subject matter under subclass 541.1 wherein the apparatus uses liquid
    discharged from a pressure source to cause the water within the tub to
    churn or flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    492,    for a pool with water jet means.

    904,    for a swim-in-place pool.


CLS 4/541.4
TXT And aerating:
    Subject matter under subclass 541.3 wherein the apparatus uses liquid and
    gas discharged from a pressure source to cause the water within the tub to
    churn or flow.

    (1)     Note. The gas may come from a source of pressure or be entrained by
    the discharged liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    541.5,  for liquid aerating apparatus for use in a tub.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 75+ for a device
    specifically designed to produce an intimate contact between a gas and a
    liquid that is beyond aeration, and Digest 75 for a device using flowing
    liquid to aspirate gas.


CLS 4/541.5
TXT By aerating:
    Subject matter under subclass definition 541.1 wherein the apparatus uses
    gas discharged from a pressure source to cause the water within the tub to
    churn or flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    541.4,  for similar apparatus combined with liquid flow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 75+ for a device
    specifically designed to produce an intimate contact between a gas and a
    liquid that is beyond aeration, and Digest 75 for a device using flowing
    liquid to aspirate gas.


CLS 4/541.6
TXT Jet detail:
    Subject matter under subclass definition 541.1 wherein significance is
    attributed to the discharge nozzle which directs liquid or gas from a
    pressure source as the means to cause to water in the to churn or flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    492,    for a pool with a water jet means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing; subclasses 225.1+ for a
    jet that continuously moves relative to the support during spraying, 398+
    for the combining of separately supplied fluids and especially 428.5 for
    liquid flow entraining atmospheric air into the stream.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 75+ for device
    specifically designed to produce an intimate contact between a gas and a
    liquid, and Digest 75 for a device using flowing liquid to aspirate gas.


CLS 4/545
TXT With heating of tub structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 538 which includes means for heating the tub
    directly or through a heat exchange which may contain a liquid or air as
    the heat exchange medium.

    (1)     Note.  Immersion-type heaters, and the heating of the water in a
    separate tank are not regarded as heating tub structure.


CLS 4/546
TXT Combined with diverse means:

    Subject matter under subclass 538 wherein the tub is combined with other
    devices or structure having an added purpose or independent utility other
    than to perfect the tub.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    557+,   for movable closure and tub.

    559+,   for perfecting means or accessories for a tub.


CLS 4/547
TXT Couch or bed:

    Subject matter under subclass 546 including an article of furniture on
    which a user may sit or lie down.


CLS 4/548
TXT Storage or support means:

    Subject matter under subclass 546 including a place or space for storing
    the tub or for storing an article, or means for holding an article or
    person.


CLS 4/549
TXT Cabinet:

    Subject matter under subclass 548 having an enclosure or space for storing
    the tub or an article.


CLS 4/550
TXT Pivoted tub:

    Subject matter under subclass 549 wherein a tub turns about an axis for
    placement into the enclosure or space.


CLS 4/551
TXT Dressing table:

    Subject matter under subclass 548 including a surface for placing an infant
    for dressing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    586,    for infant tubs.


CLS 4/552
TXT A complete and separate shower:

    Subject matter under subclass 546 including an enclosure with spray means
    which is divided from the tub so that each can be used at the same time by
    different users.


CLS 4/553
TXT Basin or sink:

    Subject matter under subclass 546 wherein the diverse means if another wash
    receptacle in which only part of a users body is placed.

    (1)     Note.  Included under the term wash receptacle are washbasins,
    sinks and lavatories.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    539,    for plural bathtubs including a bath tub with a sitz bath or a sitz
    bath with a foot bath.

    549,    for a cabinet combined with a bathtub.

    619+,   for a washbasin.

    638,    for a washbasin combined with a shower.

    643,    for a support for a washbasin which is an attachment for a bathtub.


CLS 4/554
TXT Relatively movable tub or basin:

    Subject matter under subclass 553 wherein the basin or sink is movable
    relative to the tub.


CLS 4/555
TXT With user access means in side of the tub:

    Subject matter under subclass 538 wherein a wall portion of the receptacle
    is movable to permit entry into the tub.


CLS 4/556
TXT Pivoted door:

    Subject matter under subclass 555 wherein the access means is a closure
    that moves about a vertical axis.


CLS 4/557
TXT With movable closure:

    Subject matter under subclass 538 including means to support an element and
    allow it to move so that the area above the tub is enclosed.

    (1)     Note.  The area above is usually enclosed so that a person can take
    a shower.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    607+,   for a movable closure, per se, for use with a tub or shower.

    610,    for mounting or support means for movable closure means.


CLS 4/558
TXT Flexible type:

    Subject matter under subclass 557 wherein the closure is made of a
    clothlike material.


CLS 4/559
TXT Convenience accessories:

    Subject matter under subclass 538 wherein there is provided additional
    means for aiding or adding to the comfort of the user.

    (1)     Note.  The tub need not be positively recited in order to be
    properly included as subject matter for these subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    609,    for a shield or guard to prevent splash, per se.


CLS 4/560.1
TXT Means for handling user:
    Subject matter under subclass 559 including means for moving the user into
    and out of the tub.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    667,    for a vertical lift seat for use with a closet.


CLS 4/561.1
TXT Vertically and horizontally:
    Subject matter under subclass 560.1 wherein the handling means moves
    perpendicular and parallel to the plane of the horizon.


CLS 4/562.1
TXT Horizontal movement is pivotal:
    Subject matter under subclass 561.1 wherein the handling means moves in a
    plane around a vertical axis.


CLS 4/563.1
TXT Hydraulically operated:
    Subject matter under subclass 562.1 having a fluid means to move the
    handling means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    566.1,  for hydraulic-operated vertical moving means.


CLS 4/564.1
TXT Vertically only (e.g., lifts):
    Subject matter under subclass 560.1 wherein the handling means moves
    perpendicular to the plane of the horizon.


CLS 4/565.1
TXT Supported by tub:
    Subject matter under subclass 564.1 wherein the handling means is held or
    secured to tub structure.


CLS 4/566.1
TXT Hydraulically operated:
    Subject matter under subclass 565.1 having a fluid means to move the
    handling means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    563.1,  for hydraulically operated horizontal and vertical moving means.


CLS 4/567
TXT Means for spraying user:

    Subject matter under subclass 559 wherein there is provided an element
    which can direct water in a mist or fine liquid particles in a stream upon
    the body of a person located within the confines of the tub.

    (1)     Note.  This includes a hot and cold mixing faucet combined with a
    means to spray the body of a user and disclosing a tub.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    596+,   for means to spray the body of a user including a room, stall or
    other structure framing an enclosure and having a drain.

    615+,   for means to spray the body of a user.

    676+,   for a hot-cold mixing valve having a diverter valve for a shower.

    903,    for a shower head with material dispensing means.


CLS 4/568
TXT Located inside of the tub:

    Subject matter under subclass 567 wherein the spray means is positioned
    within the confines of the tub.


CLS 4/569
TXT Conduit having rectilinearly spaced spray holes:

    Subject matter under subclass 568 wherein the spray means is in the form of
    a tube having the spray holes arranged in lines which define a plane.


CLS 4/570
TXT Mounted on support external to tub:

    Subject matter under subclass 567 wherein the spraying means is mounted on
    structure (e.g., wall, floor, etc.) which is distinct from the tub.


CLS 4/571.1
TXT Support for user, static:
    Subject matter under subclass 559 wherein the accessory means stationary
    and the user comes into contact with it for holding or steadying, during,
    before, or after bathing.


CLS 4/572.1
TXT For infant:
    Subject matter under subclass 571.1 wherein the support means is used for a
    very young child or baby.


CLS 4/573.1
TXT Body Type:
    Subject matter under subclass 571.1 wherein only a portion of the user's
    body is involved.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    589+,   for a body support structure integral with a tub.


CLS 4/574.1
TXT Foot:
    Subject matter under subclass 573.1 wherein the user's foot rests or is
    held on the support means.


CLS 4/575.1
TXT Head or back:
    Subject matter under subclass 573.1 wherein the user's head or back is held
    or rests on the support means.


CLS 4/576.1
TXT Hand grip:
    Subject matter under subclass 573.1 having means for a user to hold onto
    for support or help in getting into or out of the tub or for aid while in
    the tub.


CLS 4/577.1
TXT Mounted on tub, only:
    Subject matter under subclass 576.1 wherein the handgrip is held or secured
    to tub structure only.


CLS 4/578.1
TXT Seat:
    Subject matter under subclass 573.1 wherein the support is a means which
    allows the user to sit in an upright position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    590,    for a seat integral with a tub.


CLS 4/579
TXT Supported by tub, only:

    Subject matter under subclass 578.1 wherein the seat is held for use by
    structure of the tub only.


CLS 4/580
TXT Liner or cover:

    Subject matter under subclass 559 wherein the accessory is a means for
    shielding the tub surface from damage or guarding a user against injury.


CLS 4/581
TXT Mat type:

    Subject matter under subclass 580 wherein the accessory means is generally
    a flat piece of material for use on the bottom of the tub.

    (1)     Note.  The mat may be used at the side of a tub if an element is in
    contact with the tub.


CLS 4/582
TXT With antislip means:

    Subject matter under subclass 581 including means to prevent the mat from
    moving when placed in contact with another surface.


CLS 4/583
TXT In contact with tub bottom:

    Subject matter under subclass 582 wherein the mat is used on the lower
    surface of the tub.


CLS 4/584
TXT Particular construction or configuration details:

    Subject matter under subclass 538 relating to the shape, material,
    strength, support or such, of the tub structure.


CLS 4/585
TXT Flexible material (e.g., collapsible, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 584 wherein the main part of the receptacle
    is made of clothlike material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 9.1 for a receptacle of flaccid material
    permanently united with a skeletal framework.


CLS 4/586
TXT For infant:

    Subject matter under subclass 585 wherein the tub is used for a very young
    child or baby.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    546,    for an infant tub with diverse means.


CLS 4/587
TXT Supported by folding frame:

    Subject matter under subclass 586 wherein the tub is constructed so that
    when not in use it can be reduced in size.


CLS 4/588
TXT Inflatable:

    Subject matter under subclass 586 wherein the tub is shaped or strengthened
    by a gaseous fluid.


CLS 4/589
TXT With integral body support:

    Subject matter under subclass 584 including means to hold a person or means
    for a person to hold onto, which form a part of the tub.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    573+,   for a body support accessory for a tub.


CLS 4/590
TXT Seat:

    Subject matter under subclass 589 wherein the support is a means which
    allows user to sit in an upright position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    578+,   for a seat accessory for a tub.


CLS 4/591
TXT Rim supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 584 wherein water is discharged into the tub
    from its edge, border, margin, or such.


CLS 4/592
TXT Support structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 584 wherein the tub has means to strengthen
    or hold, or secure the tub in position.


CLS 4/593
TXT For strengthening bottom or side:

    Subject matter under subclass 592 wherein the tub has ribs, ridges or such,
    on the bottom or side surface to resist strain, stress, or such.


CLS 4/594
TXT Legs:

    Subject matter under subclass 592 wherein the tub is supported at more than
    one place by means to hold the bottom surface of the tub above a floor or
    such.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stove and Furnaces, subclass 304 for a stove leg, and means for
    attaching it to a stove body; and subclass 306 for a stove leg made of
    sheet metal.

    248,    Supports, subclass 188 for a leg attaching connection; and subclass
    188.8 for a leg or foot of general application.


CLS 4/595
TXT Means for securing tub in place:

    Subject matter under subclass 584 including means to make fast a tub to
    another structure.


CLS 4/596
TXT SHOWER (E.G., STALL, WITH WALLS, RECEPTOR, AND SPRAY):

    Subject matter under the class definition having means for spraying water
    on the body of a user which means is located in a room, stall, or other
    structure framing an enclosure, or a receptor for allowing spray water to
    drain away or a means to deflect or repel spray water.

    (1)     Note. The SHOWER (E.G., STALL, WITH WALLS, RECEPTOR AND SPRAY) need
    not be positively recited or disclosed for cross-referencing purposes this
    subclass and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    567+,   for a tub and means for spraying means for spraying user.

    615+,   for means for spraying user, per se.

    670,    for a prefabricated or modular plumbing system disclosing a means
    to spray the body of a user.


CLS 4/597
TXT Combined with diverse means:

    Subject matter under subclass 596 wherein the shower is combined with other
    devices or structures having an added purpose or independent ability other
    than to perform the shower.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    605,    for convenience accessories for a shower.


CLS 4/598
TXT With heating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 596 including means to raise the temperature
    of the water or the temperature inside of the shower.


CLS 4/599
TXT Collapsible or expandable:

    Subject matter under subclass 596 wherein the shower can be folded up
    compactly or decreased in size when not in use, or unfolded, extended,
    spread out, or such for use.


CLS 4/600
TXT Wall type:

    Subject matter under subclass 599 wherein the shower is attached to a wall
    or is stored in a wall.


CLS 4/601
TXT Plural spray heads:

    Subject matter under subclass 596 having more than one element for
    directing water in a mist or of fine particles or in a stream upon the body
    of a user or users.


CLS 4/602
TXT With self-contained water supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 596 including a receptacle for holding the
    water for spraying.

    (1)     Note.  The receptacle does not have a positive supply-feed means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    616+,   for self-contained water supply for spraying a user.


CLS 4/603
TXT And pump:

    Subject matter under subclass 602 wherein the water is forced through the
    spraying means by a force-moving device.


CLS 4/604
TXT With special feature for physically handicapped:

    Subject matter under subclass 596 including means to assist or help a
    disabled person.


CLS 4/605
TXT Convenience accessories:

    Subject matter under subclass 596 wherein there is provided additional
    means for aiding or adding to the comfort of the user, or to perfect the
    shower.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    581+,   for a mat which is for use in a tub, shower, etc.

    903,    for a shower head with material dispensing means.


CLS 4/606
TXT Scrubber:

    Subject matter under subclass 605 having means to clean by rubbing or
    brushing.


CLS 4/607
TXT Movable closure:

    Subject matter under subclass 605 having means to support an element and
    allow it to move so that an entrance to a shower may be closed or opened
    and providing for the draining, deflecting, or repelling of spray water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    557,    for a tub closure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 381+ for a swinging
    closure.


CLS 4/608
TXT Flexible type:

    Subject matter under subclass 607 wherein the closure is made of clothlike
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    558,    for a tub flexible closure.


CLS 4/609
TXT Shield or guard means:

    Subject matter under subclass 605 having means to prevent water from
    splashing out of the shower enclosure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    607+,   for a movable closure.


CLS 4/610
TXT Mounting or supporting means for movable closure:

    Subject matter under subclass 605 having means to hold a movable closure to
    allow it to move.


CLS 4/611
TXT Support for user:

    Subject matter under subclass 605 having means with which a user comes into
    contact for holding or steadying himself or herself during, before, or
    after showering.


CLS 4/612
TXT Particular construction:

    Subject matter under subclass 596 relating to the shape, material,
    strength, support or such of the shower structure.


CLS 4/613
TXT Of receptor:

    Subject matter under subclass 612 having details of the bottom part of the
    shower where the user stands.


CLS 4/614
TXT Wall or panel:

    Subject matter under subclass 612 having details of the sides or vertical
    part of the shower.


CLS 4/615
TXT MEANS FOR SPRAYING USER:

    Subject matter under the class definition which has an element for
    directing water in a mist of fine particles or in a stream upon the body of
    a user.

    (1)     Note. This includes a hot and cold mixing valve combined with a
    means for spraying the body of a user.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    567,    for means for spraying user in a tub.

    596,    for a shower enclosure with means for spraying user.

    620,    for eyewash fountains.

    670,    for a prefabricated or modular plumbing system disclosing a means
    to spray the body of a user.

    903,    for a shower head with material dispensing means.


CLS 4/616
TXT With self-contained water supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 615 including a receptacle for holding the
    water for spraying.

    (1)     Note.  The receptacle does not have a positive supply feed means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    602+,   for a self-contained water supply for spraying a user in a shower.


CLS 4/617
TXT Overhead-gravity feed:

    Subject matter under subclass 616 wherein the receptacle is above the head
    of the user and there is no means to force the water out.


CLS 4/618
TXT Supported by neck or shoulder of user:

    Subject matter under subclass 615 wherein the means for spraying is held in
    place by the upper part of the body.


CLS 4/619
TXT WASH RECEPTACLES:

    Subject matter under the class definition having a vessel for receiving
    water used for washing, attachments for such vessels, combinations of such
    vessels with diverse devices, or subcombinations of such vessels not
    provided for in other classes.

    (1)     Note.  The vessel is for holding water in a container for washing
    articles, parts of the human body, edible material, or the passing of water
    over an article, parts of the human body, or edible material and into the
    vessel.

    (2)     Note.  Washing is cleaning by the action of water to remove foreign
    or unwanted matter by drenching with water or by the rubbing with water
    parts or portions of the human body edible material, or articles.

    (3)     Note.  Mixture of water with soap and detergent is proper for these
    subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, particularly subclass
    300.1 for machines and manual devices for cleaning by air blast or suction;
    and subclasses 159.1+ for brushes and brooms; and subclasses 167.1+ for
    tooth and nail brushes.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 3 for clothes washing
    machines alone or in combination with other devices for treating textile
    materials, and subclasses 232+ for washtubs.

    132,    Toilet, appropriate subclasses for devices to groom the human body.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclass 1 for for
    processes; and subclass 43 for apparatus for cleaning and liquid contact
    with solids; particularly subclass 56 for automatic control of dishwashing
    machines; and subclass 58 for electrically controlled dishwashing machines.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclass 4 for tanks, and subclasses 5+ for
    boxes.

    220,    Receptacles, various subclasses, and particularly subclasses 694+
    for attachments and subclass 904 for a pail or bucket of flexible or
    flaccid material.


CLS 4/620
TXT Emergency fountains:

    Subject matter under subclass 619 which includes a water spray nozzle to
    irrigate the eyes, head, or face of a person to remove harmful substances
    contacting the cited parts of a person.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    615+,   for means for spraying water.

    621+,   for a wash receptacle with a human body support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 16+ for
    fountains.

    604,    Surgery, for means to introduce or remove material from a body
    orifice; particularly subclass 55 for a method of use on a female
    reproductory tract, subclass 94 for dual nozzles inserted into paired body
    orifices (e.g., nasal passages, etc.), subclasses 212+ for hand held and
    inserted means having a collapsible material reservoir, subclass 279 for an
    insertable nozzle for use on the female reproductory tract, and subclasses
    294+ for means for such as an eye or the surface of the ocular cavity.


CLS 4/621
TXT With human body support:

    Subject matter under subclass 619 which includes a vessel in which a person
    may stand, a vessel designed to support a portion or portions of the human
    body, or structure to support a portion of the human body in relation to
    the vessel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    420+,   for the combination of a flush bowl and a bidet.

    443,    for body-supporting bidet basins.

    444,    for a human body support combined with a bidet.

    446,    for bidet bowls.

    447,    for a bidet nozzle and a seat.

    517,    for hair-washing machines and devices which include a human body
    support.

    523,    for hair or neck support, per se, used in the washing of a person's
    hair.

    528+,   for vapor or hot-air baths with body-support means.

    538+,   particularly subclass 547 for a bathtub combined with a couch or
    bed.

    571+,   for static supports for users of a bathtub.

    611,    for supports for users of a shower.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclass 503.1 for bathing-device attachments for beds and
    subclasses 630+ for surgical apparatus.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, particularly subclasses 180.1+ for chairs and
    seats with fluid or vapor treatment, and subclasses 217.1+ for a chair and
    seat combined with the subject matter of another class.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses 1+
    for bathing tubs for a body member.


CLS 4/622
TXT Foot:

    Subject matter under subclass 621 wherein a foot of a person is supported.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    574,    for a foot support for use in a tub.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclasses 83+ for boots and shoes.


CLS 4/623
TXT With proximity-operated valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 619 which includes a device that senses the
    presence or absence of a human being in relation to the wash vessel and
    controls the flow of water into the wash vessel as a result of the sensing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302+,   for automatic flush urinals which includes proximity-operated water
    valves.

    313+,   for flush closets with automatic flush-responsive means.

    668+,   for a supply outlet, drain, overflow or trap having condition
    responsive means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 562 for faucet-connected sink-drained
    system.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 16+ for
    fountains, and subclasses 569+ for valve means in flow line of sprinkling,
    spraying, or diffusing devices.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 131 for remote-control system
    for electrical actuator of a valve.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 6 for oscillators responsive to an external
    physical device.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 591+ for intrusion-type
    signalling systems and subclass 573 for signalling systems responsive to
    humans or animals.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 173 for
    light control of electromagnetic devices; and subclasses 179+ for proximity
    control of electromagnetic devices.


CLS 4/624
TXT Wash fountain:

    Subject matter under subclass 619 wherein the wash vessel is designed to
    permit more than one person to use the vessel concurrently.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    488+,   for pool-type receptacles.

    538+,   for bathtubs.

    596+,   for showers.


CLS 4/625
TXT With water supply or waste-water tank:

    Subject matter under subclass 619 including a container for water to be
    received by the vessel or a container for receiving from the vessel.


CLS 4/626
TXT And water control:

    Subject matter under subclass 625 wherein there is a device to selectively
    permit the exchange of water from the container to the vessel or from the
    vessel to the waste-water container.


CLS 4/627
TXT Having pivoted receptacle:

    Subject matter under subclass 625 wherein the vessel is movable about an
    axis.


CLS 4/628
TXT With cleaning brush, soap dispenser or holder:

    Subject matter under subclass 619 which includes a rubbing-type cleaning
    implement or a holder for soap.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 3.14 for
    machines contacting fruit, vegetables, meat, or eggs with a liquid;
    subclass 21 for brushing machines; and subclasses 159.1+ for brushes and
    brooms.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 17 for machines with
    a soap supply, and subclasses 63+ for machines which include scrubbing.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclass 29 for processes
    using sequentially applied treating agents, one of which is soap; subclass
    56 for automatically controlled dishwashing machines; and subclass 58 for
    electrically controlled dishwashing machines.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 77.1 for special
    receptacles with soap-handling means.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for dispensing of fluent
    material.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 602 for soap
    dispensers.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 200+ for brackets for soapholders.


CLS 4/629
TXT With garbage receptor or tableware extractor:

    Subject matter under subclass 619 including a separator to remove tableware
    from food waste, or a food-waste receptor associated with the sink, or an
    outlet drain of a sink.

    (1)     Note.  The term "receptor" includes a garbage disposal, a garbage
    pail, a garbage chute, or a housing for a garbage vessel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclass 115 for a garbage
    grinder combined with cleaning and liquid contact with solids apparatus.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 348+ for filters to
    separate a solid from a liquid material.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 46.013+
    for an under-sink garbage disposal intended to be attached to the drain of
    a sink and subclasses 68+ for a solid-material comminution or
    disintegration apparatus with separation or classification of material.


CLS 4/630
TXT With cabinet, shelf, or drawer:

    Subject matter under subclass 619 including an enclosure for the wash
    receptacle, and/or for articles other than the wash receptacle, or a planar
    support for articles other than the wash receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  An enclosure solely for housing a wash receptacle is in this
    class.  See Class 312, mainline note, section 2, for the line with this
    class.

    (2)     Note.  A planar surface for supporting a wash receptacle is in
    subclass 631.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    517,    combined with a cabinet or shelf.

    546,    for a bathtub and diverse art means.

    597,    for a shower combined with diverse art means.

    625+,   for a wash receptacle and a water supply or a waste water tank.

    631+,   for a work surface including a table combined with a wash
    receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 134+ for shelf-type supports.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 228 for basins or washtubs
    combined with cabinet structures; subclass 281 for cabinets with
    continuously external article supports; subclass 313 for cabinets with
    movable shelf or table components; and subclass 351 for components spaced
    from the bottom cabinet wall.


CLS 4/631
TXT With work surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 619 including an article-support area in
    combination with a wash vessel.

    (1)     Note.  A wash vessel with a rim which is held to an area under the
    article-support area is proper for these subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    643,    for a receptacle with a support.


CLS 4/632
TXT Sink rim rests on work-surface recess below top surfaces:

    Subject matter under subclass 631 wherein the wash vessel has a flange at
    the extreme limit of the vessel, and the article-support area has a top and
    a bottom surface with a cutout completely therethrough, the border of the
    cutout having a ledge below the top surface on which the flange of the
    vessel rests.


CLS 4/633
TXT Sink rim clamped to work-surface top by clamp means partly on sink:

    Subject matter under subclass 631 wherein the article-support area has a
    top and a bottom surface with a cutout completely therethrough, and the
    wash vessel has a flange at the extreme limit of the vessel to rest on the
    top surface when the vessel is within the cutout, and means partly on the
    sink which cooperates with the flange to clamp the vessel to the top
    surface.


CLS 4/634
TXT Sink rim clamped to work surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 631 wherein the wash vessel has a flange at
    the extreme limit of the vessel and the article-support area has a top and
    a bottom surface with a cutout therethrough, the flange rests on the top
    surface when the vessel is within the cutout, and means cooperating with
    the flange to clamp the vessel to the top surface.


CLS 4/635
TXT Sink rim joined to work surface by molding frame:

    Subject matter under subclass 631 wherein the wash vessel has a flange at
    the extreme limit of the vessel and the article-support area has a top and
    a bottom surface with a cutout therethrough in which the vessel is placed
    and a molding member contacts the top surface and the flange.


CLS 4/636
TXT Molding frame T-shaped:

    Subject matter under subclass 635 wherein the molding member is T-shaped.


CLS 4/637
TXT Drainboard:

    Subject matter under subclass 631 wherein the article-support area is a
    draining area to permit wet things placed thereon to dry by the action of
    gravity.


CLS 4/638
TXT Combined:

    Subject matter under subclass 619 which includes diverse art devices
    combined with a wash receptacle not provided elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    517,    for hair-washing machines and devices combined with diverse
    art-type devices.

    546,    for a bathtub combined with a diverse art means.

    597,    for a shower combined with diverse art means.

    628,    for wash receptacle and a cleaning brush, soap dispenser or holder.

    629,    for the combination of a wash receptacle and a garbage receptor or
    tableware extractor.

    630,    for the combination of a cabinet, shelf, or a drawer with a wash
    receptacle.

    631+,   for the combination of a work surface and wash receptacle.

    653,    for the combination of a wash receptacle with a drain and a
    water-supply pipe or fitting or waste-water pipe or fitting.


CLS 4/639
TXT Plural receptacles:

    Subject matter under subclass 619 having more than one vessel for washing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    619,    for a wash receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating  Apparatus, subclass 232 for washtubs
    restricted for used with textiles.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 23.83+ for plural receptacles.


CLS 4/640
TXT With drain:

    Subject matter under subclass 639 wherein the vessel has an opening in the
    vessel bottom wherein the water in the vessel can flow out under the action
    of gravity.

    (1)     Note.  Here are plural sinks. lavatories, tubs, and basins with
    drains.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    539+,   for plural bathtubs.

    549,    for converting a sink or tub into plural receptacles.

    643+,   for a wash receptacle with a support.

    650+,   for a washbasin with a drain, sink, lavatory, or washtub with a
    drain.

    663,    for a wash receptacle, bathtub, and flush closet.


CLS 4/641
TXT Nested:

    Subject matter under subclass 640 wherein one of the wash vessels with a
    drain is of such size as to permit placement within the other vessel when
    desired.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    514,    for converting one type of wash receptacle into another, converting
    a single wash receptacle into plural wash receptacles, or vice versa.

    553,    for a nested sink or basin and a bathtub.


CLS 4/642
TXT Dissimilar:

    Subject matter under subclass 640 wherein each wash vessel with a drain is
    different.


CLS 4/643
TXT With support:

    Subject matter under subclass 619 which includes structure to hold the wash
    vessel.

    (1)     Note.  The combination of a washbasin, sink, lavatory, or tub and
    its support, or the wash receptacle support, per se, specifically recited
    as being a support for a wash receptacle are here.

    (2)     Note. An adhesively joined wash receptacle and support is here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252.1+, for a closet bowl support.

    516,    for portable hair washing receptacle.

    592+,   for bathtub support structure.

    630,    for a cabinet, shelf, or drawer with a wash receptacle.

    631+,   for a wash receptacle with a work-surface support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, particularly subclasses 127+ for self-supporting devices
    in a spaced relation with a table, floor, or ground.


CLS 4/644
TXT Pivoted:

    Subject matter under subclass 643 wherein the structure to support the
    receptacle is movable about an axis.

    (1)     Note.  Claims to a housing with an opening and a movable closure
    which can fill the opening to complete the housing and connected to a wash
    receptacle hidden within the housing when the closure fills the opening and
    visible when brought out to a use position when the closure does not fill
    the opening is considered a cabinet for subclass 630.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    627,    for a water supply or waste tank with a pivoted wash receptacle.

    638,    for a wall or other diverse structure with a pivoted wash
    receptacle.

    640+,   for plural wash receptacle with a pivoted support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 282.1 for adjustable brackets with vertical
    pivots, and subclass 284.1 for an adjustable bracket with horizontal pivots.


CLS 4/645
TXT Vertically adjustable:

    Subject matter under subclass 643 wherein the structure to support the
    vessel can be changed vertically to place the vessel at various heights to
    accommodate persons of varying structures.

    (1)     Note.  The adjustment of the support to place a wash vessel at a
    certain height permanently is not in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 132 for a movable stand with receptacle or a
    stand with a movable receptacle; subclasses 161+ for a vertically
    adjustable standard; subclasses 157+ for a vertically adjustable stand;
    subclasses 274.1+ for adjustable bracket; subclasses 327+ for vertically
    adjustable suspended supports.


CLS 4/646
TXT Post:

    Subject matter under subclass 643 wherein the structure to support includes
    a member between a floor or ground and the wash vessel which will take a
    proportionate share of the weight of the vessel.

    (1)     Note.  Included are post supports, per se, restricted to use with a
    wash receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 163.1+ for plural leg stands; subclass 188 for
    leg attaching connections; and subclasses 188.8+ for a leg of a stand.


CLS 4/647
TXT Hanger:

    Subject matter under subclass 643 wherein the structure to support the wash
    vessel includes a member attached to a vertical support upon which the wash
    vessel is hung.

    (1)     Note.  Included are hanger supports, per se, restricted to use with
    wash receptacles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 311.2 for receptacle-type brackets of general
    utility.


CLS 4/648
TXT Bracket:

    Subject matter under subclass 643 which includes a member projecting from a
    vertical support which statically supports the weight of the wash vessel.

    (1)     Note.  Included are brackets, per se, restricted to use with a wash
    receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 200+ for brackets supports of general utility.


CLS 4/649
TXT Clamp:

    Subject matter under subclass 643 having means to hold the wash vessel to a
    support by a pressing or a holding action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    631+,   for wash-receptacle rim clamped to the underside of a work surface.

    633,    for a sink rim clamped to the top side of a work surface by means
    partly on the sink.

    634,    for a sink rim clamped to the top side of a work surface.

    648,    for a bracket and a clamp to support a wash receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 316 for clamps for holding articles to a bracket.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 405.1+ for a separate connector,
    fastener, or retainer.


CLS 4/650
TXT With drain:

    Subject matter under subclass 619 wherein the wash vessel has an opening in
    the bottom for the water in the vessel to flow out by the action of gravity.

    (1)     Note.  Here are basins, sinks, lavatories, and tubs with a drain.

    (2)     Note. A comprehensive claim having a supply outlet, overflow, drain
    valve or trap combined with a sink or bath with a drain where the sink or
    bath is considered incidental to the invention is considered proper for a
    supply outlet, overflow, drain valve or trap subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    443,    for bidets, particularly subclass 445 for bidet basins used with a
    flush closet; and subclass 446 for bidet bowls.

    507+,   for pools with outlet means.

    515+,   for hair-washing machines and devices, particularly subclass 519
    for head or neck receiving or supporting sinks.

    538+,   for bathtubs.

    631+,   for a work surface combined with a wash receptacle with a drain.

    639+,   for plural receptacles with a drain.

    643+,   for a wash receptacle with a support therefore.

    663,    for the combination of a wash receptacle, bathtub, and flush closet.

    665,    for a wash receptacle that empties into a flush closet or urinal.

    671+,   for a specifically detailed supply outlet and drain structure
    combined with a nominal sink or bath structure.

    675+,   for a specifically detailed supply outlet combined with a nominal
    sink or bath structure.

    679+,   for a specifically detailed drain structure combined with a nominal
    sink or bath structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 3 for clothes washing
    machines; and subclasses 232+ for washtubs.

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclass 24 for a surface
    with a drain.

    114,    Ships, subclasses 188+ for sinks and furniture used in ships.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 1+ for
    processes; and subclasses 43+ for apparatus for dishwashers, including
    sinks.

    454,    Ventilation, subclass 339 for laboratory-type sinks with an exhaust
    for noxious fumes.


CLS 4/651
TXT And overflow:

    Subject matter under subclass 650 including means to prevent the water
    within the vessel from rising beyond a certain level in the vessel.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is an overflow combined with more than nominal
    sink or bath structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    508+,   for pools having a water inlet or outlet and water-level control.

    671+,   for a specifically detailed supply outlet and overflow structure
    combined with nominal sink or bath structure.

    679+,   for a specifically detailed overflow structure combined with a
    nominal sink or bath structure.

    688+,   for a specifically detailed drain valve having an aperture that
    cooperates with the integral overflow of a nominal sink or bath structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 386+ for liquid level responsive or
    maintaining systems.


CLS 4/652
TXT And strainer:

    Subject matter under subclass 650 which includes a screen so water flowing
    out of the opening must pass through the screen to prevent particles in the
    water larger than the screen openings from passing therethrough.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 348+ for filters
    which include screens, particularly subclass 455 for receptacle and
    modified spacing surface or support for filter medium, and subclasses 464+
    for portable receptacle-draining type.


CLS 4/653
TXT And water handling:

    Subject matter under subclass 650 including water/pipe connections to
    deliver or to remove water from the wash vessel.

    (1)     Note.  The term "deliver" and "remove" include the control of the
    water entering or leaving the wash vessel by faucets, valves, or such.

    (2)     Note.  Included is a comprehensive claim where the supply outlet,
    drain valve or trap is combined with more than nominal sink or bath.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    671+,   for a specifically detailed supply outlet including a  drain,
    overflow or trap structure combined with a nominal sink or bath structure.

    675+,   for a specifically detailed supply outlet combined with a nominal
    sink or bath structure.

    679+,   for a specifically detailed drain, overflow or trap structure
    combined with a nominal sink or bath structure.


CLS 4/654
TXT Attachments:

    Subject matter under subclass 619 including devices used in a wash
    receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  Included are covers for wash receptacles, sink backs,
    receptacles supported in the wash receptacle, supports for holding
    something in the wash receptacle, and nonremovable wash receptacle liners.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    680,    for a portable device that fits into the drain of a sink or bath
    and is intended to prevent the sink or bath from overflowing.


CLS 4/655
TXT Disposable receptacle liner:

    Subject matter under subclass 654 having a removable inner-surface covering.


CLS 4/656
TXT Drainboard, rack or tray:

    Subject matter under subclass 654 having a support device for an article so
    that water thereon drains by the action of gravity by dropping or flowing
    from the articles into or through the devices.

    (1)     Note.  Included are drainboards, trays or racks for dishes,
    cutlery, pots and pans, although other articles can be therein or thereon
    placed for draining purposes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    520,    for a hair-washing water shield or drain including a drainboard.

    637,    for the combination of a drainboard and a wash receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 238 for
    plural or single drying trays.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 233 for washboards.

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclass 24 for drains
    combined with planer surfaces.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses for
    processes and apparatus using drains with washing means.

    211,    Supports: Racks, subclass 41 for plate-type supports; subclasses
    86+ for specially mounted trays and racks; and subclasses 126+ for tray or
    receptacle-type supports.


CLS 4/657
TXT Receptacle or receptacle content protective device:

    Subject matter under subclass 654 having means within or on a portion of
    the receptacle to prevent damage to the receptacle or to prevent damage to
    the materials in or on the receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  Included are mats, pads, and guards.


CLS 4/658
TXT Receptacle splash or drip guards:

    Subject matter under subclass 654 having a device used with a receptacle to
    prevent (a) the splashing of a person or a person's clothes while using the
    sink, (b) the splashing of the surfaces about the receptacle, (c) the
    dripping of the wash water from the sides of the receptacle.


CLS 4/659
TXT Infant bathing support:

    Subject matter under subclass 654 wherein the device is a support for a
    baby while being bathed.

    (1)     Note.  The support may be placed within a wash receptacle, held by
    a wash receptacle, or supported by a surface including a drainboard.

    (2)     Note.  Included, but not restricted thereto, are supports which
    include the draining of water from the support, baby-restraining means, or
    head-supporting structure in addition to the support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    517,    for baby supports combined with hair-washing devices.

    520,    for liquid shields or drains having head or neck supports.

    572,    for infant supports, per se, or combined with a bathtub.

    586+,   for wash receptacle with a human-body support.

    656,    for a drainboard attachment for a wash receptacle.


CLS 4/660
TXT Rim frames:

    Subject matter under subclass 619 wherein the device is a molding designed
    to extend about the periphery of a sink rim.

    (1)     Note.  Generally claimed with the frame is the fastening device to
    hold the sink flange to the frame, the frame to the work surface, or the
    frame to the work surface and the sink flange.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    631,    for the combination of a work surface and a wash receptacle with a
    rim frame.

    650,    for wash receptacles with a drain with a rim frame.


CLS 4/661
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition which is not provided for in any
    of the preceding subclasses.


CLS 4/662
TXT RESTROOM OR BATHROOM SELF-
    CLEANING SYSTEMS:

    Subject matter under the class definition which includes a room and a
    toilet facility or a toilet facility and means which washes the room with
    the toilet facility or which washes the toilet facility.

    (1)     Note.  Included under the term "toilet facility" are a water
    closet, urinal, bathtub, shower, or lavatory.

    (2)     Note.  Also means to dry the washed room and the toilet facility,
    or the toilet facility alone, or means to remove the washing liquid may be
    included in the claim.


CLS 4/663
TXT FLUSH CLOSET, WASH RECEPTACLE, AND BATHTUB OR SHOWER:

    Subject matter under the class definition which includes a flush closet,
    wash receptacle, and a bathtub and/or a shower.


CLS 4/664
TXT FLUSH CLOSET OR URINAL AND WASH RECEPTACLE:

    Subject matter under the class definition which includes a flush closet or
    a urinal and a wash receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  Superimposed wash receptacles and wash receptacles wherein
    the flush closet or the wash receptacle is movable between a nonuse and
    in-use position, are here.


CLS 4/665
TXT Wash receptacle water empties into toilet facility:

    Subject matter under subclass 664 wherein the receptacle has a drain and
    the drain empties into a water tank, bowl of a flush closet, or a urinal.

    (1)     Note.  The term receptacle includes a lavatory, sink, or washbasin
    with a drain.

    (2)     Note.  The term toilet facility includes flush closet, flush closet
    tank or bowl, or flush urinal.


CLS 4/666
TXT DIAPER WASHING DEVICES:

    Subject matter under the class definition which includes at least a portion
    of a water closet and, (a) a device to hold a diaper in or on a portion of
    the water closet, to be washed by water of the water closet, or (b) a
    device to wash a diaper in a portion of the water closet.

    (1)     Note.  The portion of the water closet includes a toilet bowl, a
    flush tank, a toilet seat, or the rim of the toilet bowl.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 235 for diaper
    washers; and subclass 241 for clothes wringers.


CLS 4/667
TXT FLUSH CLOSET SEAT ASSIST TO RAISE USER:
    Subject matter under the class definition comprising an apparatus having a
    seat for a flush closet and means to lift the seat and a user to help the
    user into a standing position.

    (1)     Note. These devices are primarily used by handicapped persons.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    420,    for a closet bowl that may be vertically adjustable.

    560+,   for a means to handle a user associated with a tub.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 81.1+ for means to lift and transfer an invalid
    independent of a bed.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclass Digest 10 for a chair or seat with
    occupant-arising assistance.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 921 for handicapped person
    handling.


CLS 4/668
TXT HAVING CONDITION RESPONSIVE SUPPLY OUTLET, DRAIN, OVERFLOW OR TRAP FOR A
    SINK OR BATH:Subject matter under the class definition comprising, for a
    sink or bath, apparatus to sense a randomly occurring situation or change
    in the  environment to effect a change in the operation of the sink or bath.

    (1)     Note.  The change in operation may include: the control of the flow
    or temperature of water, emptying water from, preventing spill-over in, or
    preventing sewer gas from flowing into, a sink or bath.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    378+,   for an outlet valve in the flush tank.

    541.2   for a spa, hot tub, whirlpool etc. having condition responsive
    means.

    623,    for a sink or bath with a proximity operated valve.

    671+,   for a sink or bath having a supply outlet combined with a drain,
    overflow or trap.

    675+,   for a supply outlet for a sink or bath.

    679+,   for a drain, overflow or trap for a sink or bath.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 386+ for a liquid level condition
    responsive device in means to receive an accumulation thereof (float
    actuated inlet valve for a toilet tank).

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 12.1+ for
    apparatus that mixes two or more supplies at dissimilar temperatures where
    one supply is controlled according to the temperature of the mixed fluid or
    the temperature of one of the fluid supplies.


CLS 4/669
TXT Float actuated:
    Subject matter under subclass 668 wherein the condition responsive means of
    the apparatus uses a buoyant body that rests or remains near the surface of
    a body of liquid to sense a randomly occurring situation or change in the
    environment to effect a change in the operation of the sink or bath.


CLS 4/670
TXT PREFABRICATED (E.G., MODULAR) PLUMBING SYSTEM:
    Subject matter under the class definition comprising manufactured conduit
    or fitting (e.g., a coupling, elbow, tee, union, or reducer) arranged into
    a standardized unit for quick construction or flexible arrangement to
    provide fluid communication between the plumbing of a building and a water
    supply outlet (e.g., a faucet or showerhead), a sanitary or lavatory
    fixture (e.g., a flush closet, a sink, or bath), or a trap.

    (1)     Note.  A straight conduit or valve is not considered to be a
    fitting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    695,    for a support for a supply, drain, overflow or trap.

    696,    for a fitting or manifold for a sink or bath.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 34+ for a
    prefabricated bathroom.


CLS 4/671
TXT SUPPLY OUTLET COMBINED WITH A DRAIN, OVERFLOW OR TRAP FOR A SINK OR
    BATH:Subject matter under the class definition comprising an apparatus in
    fluid communication with a source of water under pressure that directs or
    controls the flow of water from an opening, into a sink or bath, combined
    with other apparatus which empties water from, prevents water from spilling
    over the edge of or prevents sewer gas from flowing into the sink or bath.

    (1)     Note.  Nominal sink or bath structure claimed in combination with
    subject matter for this subclass is included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    378+,   for an outlet valve in a flush tank.

    567+,   for means to spray the body of a user where a tub is disclosed.

    584,    for a tub having a particular construction or configuration details
    for a supply, drain, overflow or trap.

    596+,   for means to spray the body of a user including a room, stall or
    other structure framing an enclosure and having a  drain.

    615+,   for means to spray the body of a user.

    650+,   for a specifically detailed sink or bath having a drain opening and
    combined with an overflow or water handling.

    668+,   for a supply outlet, waste, trap or overflow which has a condition
    response means.

    675+,   for a supply outlet for a sink or bath.

    679+,   for a drain, overflow or trap for a sink or bath.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 247.41+ for a U-shaped liquid trap seal,
    subclass 362 for a floor drain, subclasses 577+ for a tank with a movable
    or adjustable outlet or overflow pipe, and subclass 801 for a faucet or
    spout.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation,  subclasses 153+ for valves combined
    with inlet or outlet structure comprising a single flow path and
    specifically subclass 155 for a valve associated with a nozzle or spout;
    subclasses 213+ for a mechanical movement actuator and specifically
    subclasses 231+ for a lever type mechanical movement actuator for a valve;
    subclass 340 for a valve actuator surrounding a nozzle; subclasses 349+ for
    an inlet or outlet element which serves as a valve actuator.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 125.1+ for means to provide a
    coupling for several lines, subclass 157 for a U-shaped fitting, subclasses
    179+ for an elbow joint and subclass 193 for an end that pierces or
    penetrates a side or plate.


CLS 4/672
TXT Supply outlet valve linked to a drain, overflow or trap valve:Subject
    matter under subclass 671 wherein the supply outlet has a flow control
    mechanism to control the flow of water from an opening into the sink or
    bath and is operatively coupled to the other apparatus that that empties
    water from, prevents water from spilling over the edge of or prevents sewer
    gas from flowing into the sink or bath.


CLS 4/673
TXT Supply outlet and drain:
    Subject matter under subclass 671 wherein the apparatus directs or controls
    the flow of water from the supply outlet and is combined with other
    apparatus that empties water from the sink or bath.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    672,    for a supply outlet linked to a drain, overflow or trap.


CLS 4/674
TXT And overflow:
    Subject matter under subclass 673 wherein the other apparatus includes
    means to prevent water from spilling over the edge of a sink or bath.


CLS 4/675
TXT SUPPLY OUTLET FOR A SINK OR BATH:
    Subject matter under the class definition comprising an apparatus in fluid
    communication with a source of water under pressure that directs or
    controls the flow of water from an opening.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a supply outlet combined with nominally
    claimed sink or bath structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    567+,   for a hot-cold mixing faucet combined with means to spray the body
    of a user having intended use for a tub.

    584,    for a tub having a particular construction or configuration details
    for a supply outlet.

    596+,   for means to spray the body of a user including a room, stall or
    other structure framing an enclosure and having a drain.

    615+,   for means to spray the body of a user.

    624,    for a spray means adapted for a wash fountain.

    653,    for a specifically detailed sink or bath having a drain opening and
    combined with water handling means.

    668+,   for a supply outlet having a condition responsive means.

    671+,   for a supply outlet combined with a drain, overflow or trap.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 615+ for an articulated nozzle or spout,
    800 for a nozzle or spout provided with a removable closure member, 801 for
    a faucet or spout, and 861+ for a deflector type spout forming a branch
    outlet.

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 233+ for a fluid conducting motion silencer.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 153+ for valves combined
    with inlet or outlet structure comprising a single flow path, especially
    155 for a valve associated with a nozzle or spout, 340 for a valve actuator
    surrounding a nozzle, and 349 for an inlet or outlet element which serves
    as a valve actuator.


CLS 4/676
TXT Mixing faucet:
    Subject matter under subclass 675 wherein the apparatus is in fluid
    communication with separate supplies of hot and cold water under pressure
    having a valve that controls the rate or the temperature, in a range
    between the hot and cold water supply, of the flow from a common outlet.


CLS 4/677
TXT Having only one actuating means:
    Subject matter under subclass 676 wherein the mixing faucet uses a single
    handle, lever, grip, grasp, knob or button to regulate the rate of or
    temperature of the flow from the common outlet.


CLS 4/678
TXT Faucet or spout:
    Subject matter under subclass 675 wherein the apparatus controls the flow
    of liquid from a single source of liquid under pressure to the outlet or
    directs the flow in a jet or continuous stream from the outlet.

    (1)     Note.  This includes a spout having a valve such as those used in a
    tub and shower combination to close the spout and force the water into the
    shower head.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    567+,   for a tub and shower combination having a spout with a valve.


CLS 4/679
TXT DRAIN, OVERFLOW OR TRAP FOR A SINK OR BATH:
    Subject matter under the class definition comprising an apparatus that
    empties water from, prevents water from spilling over the edge of or
    prevents sewer gas from flowing into a sink or bath to control the flow of
    fluid.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a drain, overflow or trap combined with
    nominally claimed sink or bath structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    378+,   for an outlet valve in the flush tank.

    584,    for a tub having a particular construction or configuration details
    for a drain, overflow or trap.

    613,    for a drain in a shower stall, room or other structure framing an
    enclosure.

    650+,   for a specifically detailed sink or bath having a drain opening and
    combined with an overflow or trap.

    668+,   for a drain, overflow or trap having a condition responsive means.

    671+,   for a drain, overflow or trap combined with a supply outlet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 247.41+ for U-shaped liquid trap seal,
    362 for a floor drain and 577+ for a tank with a movable or adjustable
    outlet or overflow pipe.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 134.1+ for a U-shaped fitting
    having two or more joints of a diverse type.


CLS 4/680
TXT Drain and overflow:
    Subject matter under subclass 679 wherein the apparatus empties water from
    and prevents water from spilling over the edge of the sink or bath to
    control the flow of fluid.

    (1)     Note.  This includes a removable stopper and overflow apparatus
    which is used in the drain opening of a sink or bath.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    654,    for a sink or bath attachment that fits into the drain of the sink
    or bath and is intended to allow liquid or solid disposal while the sink or
    bath is full.


CLS 4/681
TXT And trap:
    Subject matter under subclass 680 wherein the apparatus includes means to
    prevent sewer gas from flowing into the sink or bath.


CLS 4/682
TXT With valve:
    Subject matter under subclass 680 wherein the apparatus has within a means
    to open, close or modify a passage in fluid communication with the drain or
    overflow of the sink or bath to control the flow of fluid.

    (1)     Note.  A stopper is distinguished from a valve by being  bodily
    removable from the sink or bath structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286+,   for a stopper or strainer.

    668+,   for a valve having a condition responsive means.

    671+,   for a drain valve combined with a supply outlet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, for a valve in general, subclasses 213+
    for a mechanical movement actuator and especially subclasses 231+ a lever
    type mechanical movement actuator.


CLS 4/683
TXT Ell having fluid communication with the drain and overflow openings of a
    sink or bath:Subject matter under subclass 682 wherein the apparatus is
    substantially L shaped with a horizontal branch in fluid communication with
    the drain and a vertical branch in fluid communication with the overflow of
    the sink or bath to control the flow of fluid.


CLS 4/684
TXT Pop-up drain valve:
    Subject matter under subclass 683 wherein the apparatus has a seat in the
    drain opening of the horizontal branch and, a plug with movement
    perpendicular to the seat, axial to the seat, shiftable off the seat
    towards the the interior of the sink or bath to open and onto the seat to
    close to control the flow of fluid.

    (1)     Note.  A plug fills the gap in a drain opening.


CLS 4/685
TXT Contacted by a rotating member:
    Subject matter under subclass 684 wherein the plug is actuated by a body
    which turns about an axis to control the flow of fluid.


CLS 4/686
TXT Standpipe overflow:
    Subject matter under subclass 682 wherein the apparatus is substantially L
    shaped with a horizontal branch in fluid communication with the drain of
    the sink or bath so that water can rise in a vertical branch, matching the
    level in the sink or bath, until it reaches the overflow opening in the
    vertical branch which bypasses the drain valve to prevent overflow in the
    sink or bath to control the flow of fluid.


CLS 4/687
TXT Bi-transit for drain of sink or bath:
    Subject matter under subclass 682 wherein the apparatus is a hollow member
    with one open end that fits into and is operated to open and close the
    drain of the sink or bath while the other end has an opening that is
    substantially upward from the drain and yet below the rim of the sink or
    bath to prevent overflow by providing a path through the member to the
    drain of the sink or bath to control the flow of fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    654,    for a sink or bath attachment that fits into the drain of the sink
    or bath and is intended to allow liquid or solid disposal while the sink or
    bath is full.

    680,    for a portable device that fits into the drain of a sink or bath
    and is intended to prevent the sink or bath from overflowing.


CLS 4/688
TXT Drain valve:
    Subject matter under subclass 679 wherein the apparatus has within a means
    to open, close or modify a passage in fluid communication with the drain of
    the sink or bath to control the flow of fluid.

    (1)     Note.  A stopper is distinguished from a valve by being  bodily
    removable from the sink or bath structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    671+,   for a drain valve combined with a supply outlet.

    682+,   for a drain valve combined with an overflow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, for a valve in general, subclasses 213+
    for a mechanical movement actuator and especially subclasses 231+ a lever
    type mechanical movement actuator.


CLS 4/689
TXT Pop-up:
    Subject matter under subclass 688 wherein the apparatus has a seat in the
    drain opening and a plug with movement perpendicular to the seat, axial to
    the seat, shiftable off the seat towards the interior of the sink or bath
    to open and onto the seat to close to control the flow of fluid.

    (1)     Note.  A plug fills the gap in a drain opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    684+,   for a pop-up drain valve combined with an overflow.


CLS 4/690
TXT Contacted by rotatable member:
    Subject matter under subclass 689 wherein the plug is actuated by a body
    which turns about an axis to control the flow of fluid.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a cam which is an irregularly shaped disk
    or cylinder that imparts a rocking motion to the plug.

    (2)     Note.  Included here is a crankshaft having a crank arm which is
    offset and parallel to the axis of rotation of the crankshaft and actuates
    the plug when rotated by the crankshaft.


CLS 4/691
TXT Lever:
    Subject matter under subclass 690 wherein the plug is actuated by a
    rotatable member having a fulcrum offset and rotating axis perpendicular to
    the plug's axis of movement; one end touching the plug and moving along or
    parallel to its axis; and the other end regulated by an actuating mechanism
    to control the flow of fluid.

    (1)     Note.  Also included is a bell crank which is a lever having its
    fulcrum at the apex of the angle formed by its two arms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    686,    for a plug actuated by a lever combined with an overflow.


CLS 4/692
TXT Having at least a semi-spherical fulcrum:
    Subject matter under subclass 691 wherein the lever has at least a
    partially ball shaped structure at its pivot point to control the flow of
    fluid.


CLS 4/693
TXT Operating means in sink or bath:
    Subject matter under subclass 688 wherein the apparatus has a valve that
    cooperates in a sealing relationship with the seat in the waste outlet in
    the basin and has an actuator within the basin to shift the valve between a
    closed and open position in the drain opening of the sink or bath to
    control the flow of fluid.


CLS 4/694
TXT Overflow opening attachment:
    Subject matter under subclass 679 wherein the apparatus is connectable to
    the overflow opening of the sink or bath to control the flow of fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255.01+,for means to block an overflow for use with an agitating
    obstruction remover.

    255.07, for means to block an overflow for use with an obstruction remover
    that uses external water pressure.


CLS 4/695
TXT SUPPORT OR MOUNT FOR A SUPPLY, DRAIN, OVERFLOW OR TRAP MEANS:Subject matter
    under the class definition comprising a means to hold up or secure to a
    sink, bath or a static structure (e.g., the wall, floor or ceiling of a
    building) an apparatus in fluid communication with a source of water under
    pressure that directs or controls the flow of water from an opening into,
    empties water from, prevents water from spilling over the edge of or
    prevents sewer gas from flowing into the sink or bath.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses for a general support, per se.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 46 for an escutcheon and 64
    for a static building construction support for a pipe joint or coupling.


CLS 4/696
TXT FITTING OR MANIFOLD FOR A SINK OR BATH:
    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a part of a pipeline
    such as a coupling, elbow, tee union or reducer; or a part that may have
    many inlets, outlets or connections close together for use with a sink or
    bath.

    (1)     Note.  A fitting is not a straight conduit or valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    679+,   for a drain, overflow or trap.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 125.1+ for means to provide a
    coupling for several lines, subclasses 134.1+ for a U-shaped fitting and
    subclasses 179+ for an elbow joint of general utility.

    *******************************************

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


    The patents in the following collections have been placed  without regard
    to their original classification or to their claimed subject matter. These
    collections, therefore, are only examples of the art encompassed by the
    definition and a thorough search for a desired concept should include a
    search in the preceding subclasses.  Do not place originals in
    cross-reference art collections!

    *******************************************


CLS 4/900
TXT DECONTAMINATION SHOWER:
    Subject matter under the class definition comprising apparatus disclosed as
    having a chamber for a user to remove contaminated clothing which leads to
    another chamber having a spray for the user to remove, neutralize or
    destroy any harmful substance (e.g., a poisonous chemical or radioactive
    material).


CLS 4/901
TXT BOWL SKIRT OR TANK COVER:
    Subject matter under the class definition comprising an article disclosed
    as bordering the opening of and covering the outside of a closet bowl; or a
    covering for a flush tank or tank lid.


CLS 4/902
TXT TOILET TRAINING:
    Subject matter under the class definition comprising apparatus disclosed
    for use in teaching a user (e.g., a toddler) how to use a closet.


CLS 4/903
TXT SHOWER HEAD WITH MATERIAL DISPENSING:
    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a spray outlet having
    means to inject a substance into the spray's flow.


CLS 4/904
TXT SWIM-IN-PLACE POOL:
    Subject matter under the class definition comprising an open receptacle
    large enough and having circulating means capable of enabling a user to
    swim in the receptacle when the water flowing against the user is at such a
    rate as to prevent the user from making any progress relative to the
    receptacle.


CLS 4/905
TXT SQUAT BOWL:
    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a closet receptacle
    open at the top and adapted for use by a user sitting in a low or crouching
    position with the legs drawn up closely beneath or in front of the body of
    the user.


CLS 5/
TTL BEDS

CLS 5/
TXT This class relates to devices intended to receive the human body in a
    prone, supine, or sitting position for the purpose of repose, examination,
    or treatment.  This class includes, devices ordinarily known as beds,
    examining tables, operating tables, hammocks, cradles, cribs, cots, camp
    beds, groundmats, sleeping bags, and bed accessories, such as mattresses,
    pillows, surgical supports, and bed clothing.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this class are mosquito nets and canopies
    attached to or attachable to a bed or bedstead structure via a clamp,
    screws, bolts, or other separate, discreet fastening devices designed to be
    used on an existing bed (i.e., no modification of the bed or bedstead).

    (2)     Note.  Surgical supports for all parts of the human body, and
    surgical supports that are adapted to support animals or parts of animals,
    are included in this class.

    (3)     Note.  Art in this class has historically required that the device
    receive the body for the purpose of repose.  Exceptions to this requirement
    are subclasses 625+, which includes field stretchers, and subclasses 600+
    which includes invalid beds and surgical supports.

    (4)     Note.  Art in this class requires some structural modification to
    materials to adapt them for body support.  The mere recitation of a
    support, wherein the novelty resides in a chemical composition for the
    support, would not suffice for inclusion in this class; it would place the
    application in the appropriate composition art area.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, appropriate subclasses for
    body supports associated with washing or bathing a user, or associated with
    a user while using a toilet.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 91+ for methods of making upholstered
    articles.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, appropriate subclasses for modification of
    car structure to form berths and bunks.

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 1+ for a
    horizontal planar supporting surface which provides a tiltable supporting
    surface.

    114,    Ships, subclasses 192+ for self-leveling berths and bed structure
    specific to use on ships.

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 869+ for restraining and immobilizing devices.

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclasses 121+ and
    Cross-Reference Art Collection 913 for canopy frames and mosquito net
    covers.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclass 34 for a ladder
    convertible bed structure.

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclass 2 for trunks and baggage
    convertible to beds.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 118+ for arm rests and headrests not
    associated with devices under the class definition.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 80+ for spring panels and subclasses
    142+ for cushion for human comfort.

    296,    Land Vehicles: Bodies, and Tops, subclasses 19+ for ambulances,
    subclasses 156+ for camping vehicles, and appropriate subclasses, for
    vehicle structure (except seats) involving parts thereof convertible into
    beds.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, appropriate subclasses, for devices for
    supporting a seated occupant.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclass 209 for tables for
    supporting a person in combination with X-ray apparatus which often have
    manipulation of supports for parts of the body similar to adjustments of
    invalid beds.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 12 for a
    collapsible article; subclass 16 for treated fauna; subclasses 17+ for
    treated flora; subclass 71 for sheet including cover encasing foam;
    subclass 74 for sheet including cover encasing, noninterengaged, fibered
    material (e.g., batt); subclass 101 for superposed movable attached layers;
    subclasses 102+ for web or sheet including stitching and discrete fastener,
    coating, or bond; subclass 116 for a honeycomb-like web or sheet; subclass
    178 for nonplanar uniform thickness material with cells; subclasses 304.4+
    for composite material having voids in a component; subclasses 357+ for
    coated or structurally defined flake, particle, cell, strand, strand
    portion, rod, filament, macroscopic fiber, or mass thereof; subclasses 402+
    for particulate matter; subclasses 443+ for composite laminate including
    asbestos; subclass 903 for microfiber; and subclasses 920+ for fire or heat
    protection feature.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclasses 125+ for a waterproof
    mattress or cushion having special features to convert it into a life raft
    or having a special shape or fastening means to enable it to conform to or
    secure a person's body.

    482,    Exercise Devices, particularly subclasses 142+ for a support for
    the entire body of the user, e.g., a bench, slant board, etc., used for an
    exercise purpose.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 9+ for magnetic devices used for therapy.

    601,    Surgery:  Kinesitherapy, subclasses 49+, 86, 90, 98, 115+, and 146
    for body support vibrator; subclasses 154+ for lavative devices; and
    subclass 158 for lavative device with applicator having specific movement
    on a couch.

    607,    Surgery: Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses
    104+, especially 107, for thermal applicators.

    D6,     Furnishings, subclasses 331, 382+, 505+, 596+, and other
    appropriate subclasses for designs for devices under the class definition.


CLS 5/1
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising constructions of beds
    and devices pertaining to beds not provided for in the following subclasses.


CLS 5/2.1
TXT COMBINATION FURNITURE:
    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a unitary structure
    having features of a bed as well as those of some additional article of
    furniture.

    (1)     Note.  The mere insertion of some articles, such as a receptacle,
    shelf, sliding table leaf, etc., in some unused space in a bed or its
    support or the mere attachment to a bed part of some article of furniture
    or the conversion of a sofa or bed into some other piece of furniture is
    not sufficient to bring the device into this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.1+,  for sofa beds.

    58,     93.1+, 108, 134, and 308, for a rocking-chair combined with a
    cradle.

    106     and 107, for cradles convertible to cribs, and vice versa.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 31 for children's carriages convertible to
    cradles.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses
    217.1+ for seats combined with other articles of furniture.


CLS 5/3
TXT Devices under subclass 2.1 relating to tables which by inversion or
    manipulation of parts may be converted to beds, or tables which have beds
    stored within and withdrawable from them.


CLS 5/4
TXT Devices under subclass 3 having vertical sides which turn out to horizontal
    position to form part of the bed bottom or to support such a bottom.


CLS 5/5
TXT Devices under subclass 3 in which the top or sections of it turn out
    through 180# to form part of the bed frame.


CLS 5/6
TXT Devices under subclass 3 in which the sides and top of the table serve to
    inclose a folded bed frame but do not form a part of it.


CLS 5/7
TXT Devices under subclass 3 of sofa form in which the back of the sofa by
    manipulation becomes a table top supported on the sofa frame.


CLS 5/8
TXT Subject matter under the class definition which without dismantling may be
    rested one above another for compactness.  Twin beds consist of two bed
    bottoms mounted on the same frame to be on the same level with a slight or
    adjustable interval between them. Stacked beds are beds having socket
    modifications at the top and bottom, so that one may be stacked upon the
    other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9.1+,   for bunks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclass 62 for chairs or seats having one or
    more components reorientable to provide stacked bunks.


CLS 5/9.1
TXT BERTH OR BUNK:
    Subject matter under the class definition closely associated in a vertical
    or horizontal series having some part of their supports in common.

    (1)     Note.  The supports in common are most frequently a wall or pillar
    extending from floor to ceiling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for stacked beds.

    171,    for door beds.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 316 for railway berths which modify
    other car structure.

    114,    Ships, subclasses 192+ for self leveling berths.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 118.6 for a berth in an aircraft.


CLS 5/10.1
TXT WINDOW, FLOOR, CEILING, OR ROOM TO ROOM:
    Subject matter under the class definition modified to project partly
    through a window or having some modification adapting it for use in
    connection with or relation to a window; having means for concealment in a
    floor or raising it therefrom; having means for raising it to or concealing
    it within a ceiling; or having special means other than casters for
    enabling it to be used in either of two adjoining rooms as desired.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170+,   for upending bed shifters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 27+ and
    particularly subclass 36.4 wherein additional structure other than that
    necessary to house an article is defined.

    454,    Ventilation, subclass 197 for ventilating and screening means for
    window beds not involving a modification of the bed.


CLS 5/10.2
TXT Bed stored in ceiling:
    Device under subclass 10.1 comprising means for raising a bed to or
    concealing it in a ceiling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159.1,  for beds having cases which conceal them when upended.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 27+ and
    particularly subclass 36.4 wherein additional structure other than that
    necessary to house an article is defined.


CLS 5/11
TXT Subject matter under the class definition having means by which the height
    of the bed bottom from the floor may be adjusted or changed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10.1+,  for window beds.

    21,     for an adjustable height bed which is disclosed as a change of
    level section of an extension type sofa bed.

    611,    for devices arranged to give a progressive continuous movement of
    elevation.


CLS 5/12.1
TXT SOFA BED:
    That subject matter under the class definition which by relative movement
    of its parts may be converted from a seat to a bed.

    (1)     Note.  The term sofa is considered to define a long upholstered
    seat usually having arms and a back.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93.1,   for sofa beds having devices attached or connected thereto for
    converting them to cribs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 63+ for sofas or chairs convertible to
    beds by reorienting a component of adjacent seats; subclasses 68+ for a
    sofa or chair convertible to a bed by relative movement of a rest which
    supports the bottom, the back, or a leg; subclasses 105+ for a sofa or
    chair convertible by withdrawing a supplemental body support from a
    displaceable bottom; subclasses 112+ for a sofa or chair convertible by
    withdrawing a supplemental body support from a back; subclasses 115+ for
    sofas or chairs convertible to beds by movement of the arms; and subclasses
    118+ for other sofas or chairs convertible to beds.


CLS 5/12.2
TXT Knockdown sofa bed:
    Subject matter under subclass 12.1 in which the sofa may be quickly and
    easily disassembled so as to be of smaller bulk for storage.


CLS 5/13
TXT Devices under subclass 12.1 including unfolding link-supported bed bottom
    not falling precisely under any of the following subclasses.


CLS 5/14
TXT Devices under subclass 12.1 in which the bed is stowed under a seat and
    withdrawn or unfolded for use.  The seat may be fixed and the bed withdrawn
    and unfolded or the seat may be hinged or pivoted, and in the latter case
    may, when lifted or moved, aid in unfolding or extending the bed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17+,    for seats which form part of a bed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 105+ for a seating device convertible
    to a bed by withdrawing a supplemental body support from a displaceable
    seat.


CLS 5/15
TXT Devices under subclass 12.1 in which the fabric is connected at the ends of
    the jointed bottom, so as to hang without lateral support when extended for
    use and baglike when folded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169,    for similar structure on upending bedsteads.


CLS 5/16
TXT Devices under subclass 12.1 in which the bed sections stand compactly
    folded substantially vertically at or in the sofa back and are drawn
    forward or backward on a pivot and unfolded.

    (1)     Note.  The stuffed sofa back may be rigidly fastened to one of
    these sections or shiftably attached.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59.1+,  for shiftable sofa seats and backs which do not form bed sections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 112+, for a seating device convertible
    to a bed by withdrawing a supplemental body support from a stored position
    in the back.


CLS 5/17
TXT Devices under subclass 12.1 characterized by one or more bed sections which
    move out forwardly or backwardly without overturning. Extension sofa beds
    are mainly of a couch type without back or stuffed ends and resemble a
    bedstead with very low head and foot boards.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for extension seats on reverting backs.

    181+,   especially 185 for similar structure    on bedsteads.


CLS 5/18.1
TXT Slidable section:
    Device under subclass 17 wherein one of the sections is substantially
    parallel to a seat means and is translatably extendable therefrom to form a
    bed of which the seat means is a part.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also accepts the converse wherein the seat
    moves and the section remains fixed.

    (2)     Note.  The sections may be dove-tailed and have operating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for devices wherein the seat means forms no part of the bed.


CLS 5/19
TXT Devices under subclass 18.1 in which the seat is provided with extensions
    sliding out both at front and rear.


CLS 5/20
TXT Devices under subclass 18.1 in which a section is arranged to slide out and
    is afterwards turned upside down, usually to change the level.


CLS 5/21
TXT Devices under subclass 18.1 in which a section parallel to the seat slides
    out, and then the level of one or the other is substantially changed
    without overturn to make the two sections practically coplanar.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18.1+,  for devices in which there may be a slight elevating of one side of
    the movable section toward the end of its motion to bring the adjacent
    edges of the sections on the same level.


CLS 5/22
TXT Devices under subclass 17 in which a section, usually a seat section, is
    connected to the frame by radius links to be moved out of the frame by a
    walk-over motion and take a position coplanar with a section in the frame.


CLS 5/23
TXT Devices under subclass 17 in which a seat section is arranged to traverse
    forward out of the frame and has connected with it a pivoted section which
    overturns during the motion and becomes coplanar with the traversing
    section.  The extreme form of this is a three-section zigzag folding.


CLS 5/24
TXT Devices under subclass 12.1 wherein the sofa seat to which the back may be
    attached is arranged on pivotal connections to rotate substantially within
    the sofa frame and carries a bed bottom on its lower surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3+,     if one side forms a table.

    28+,    for seats hinged or pivoted substantially in front to unfold out of
    the frame.


CLS 5/25
TXT Devices under subclass 24, in which the lower surface of the seat carrying
    sections are unfolded or extended to form a bed when the seat is overturned.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28+,    for unfolding features not especially bound up with rotation.

    55.1+,  for locking devices to prevent fall of the sections due to rotation.


CLS 5/26.1
TXT Seat rotator:
    Device under subclass 24 comprising means for controlling rotational
    movement of the seat in the frame.

    (1)     Note.  The rotation controlling means commonly includes such
    devices as trunnions, links and guides, pins and slots, and combinations
    thereof.


CLS 5/27
TXT Devices under subclass 12.1 in which the sofa seat is pivotally connected
    at the rear and is lifted to permit the unfolding of a forwardly-pivoted
    section concealed below it.  The seat is then lowered to former position,
    the seat and section forming the bed.


CLS 5/28
TXT Devices under subclass 12.1 possessing a section substantially in the
    position of a seat and pivotally connected forwardly, so it may be
    overturned outwardly and forwardly through about 180# to form part of the
    bed bottom.  The actual stuffed seat may be padding on one side of this
    section or be attached shiftably to it (see subclass 59.1) or free from it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for unfolding seats with reverting backs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 105+ for a seat which exposes a
    supplemental body support by displacing the seat, as by turning it
    forwardly and outwardly through about 180#.


CLS 5/29
TXT Devices under subclass 28 in which the unfolded section is supported by a
    leg.


CLS 5/30
TXT Devices under subclass 28 in which a slidable or swinging frame extension
    serves to support the section.


CLS 5/31
TXT Devices under subclass 28 in which there is a section below the seat
    section forming the inner part of the bed, which is raised to bed position
    by unfolding the seat section.


CLS 5/32.1
TXT Pivoted hinge plate:
    Devices under subclass 31 in which the seat section and the inner section
    are each directly or indirectly rotatably mounted to a fixed element on the
    frame; an intermediate section, itself rotatably attached to said fixed
    element, is used in the indirect versions.


CLS 5/33
TXT Devices under subclass 32.1 in which the shiftable seat bares a rigid post
    which is pivoted to the inner section or immediately at the hinge
    connecting the inner section to the next section.


CLS 5/34
TXT Devices under subclass 32.1 in which the hinge plate or short connecting
    section is pivoted to the seat on the upper end (in open position) of a
    post rigid with the shiftable seat.


CLS 5/35
TXT Devices under subclass 28 in which the seat section carries additional
    forward unfolding bed sections.

    (1)     Note. These additional sections may usually be added or subtracted
    to arrange a bed transversely or longitudinally of the sofa. Consequently
    for the characteristic inner structure the appropriate subclasses 31-34
    should be searched and the manner of adding foot sections be sought in this
    and the next subclass.


CLS 5/36
TXT Devices under subclass 28 in which the seat section carries additional
    forward unfolding bed sections, the combination having a rising inner
    section.


CLS 5/37.1
TXT Reverting back:
    Device under subclass 12.1 having a back connected to the frame in such a
    manner that it may be turned backward and downward through approximately
    90#, thus forming a part of the bed bottom or a support for a part of the
    bed bottom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 354.1+ for a seat having a back which
    may be tilted downward with respect to the bottom to form an extension of
    the bottom surface.


CLS 5/38
TXT Devices under subclass 37.1 in which the back is supported by a leg,
    usually link connected.


CLS 5/39
TXT Devices under subclass 37.1, there being a slidable support for the back.


CLS 5/40
TXT Devices under subclass 37.1 the supports for the back being wings normally
    parallel to the ends or some other part of the sofa frame and swinging out
    gatewise.


CLS 5/41
TXT Devices under subclass 37.1 combined with an extension seat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17+,    for methods of extending the seat.


CLS 5/42
TXT Devices under subclass 37.1 combined with some form of forward unfolding
    seat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for freely suspended bottoms.

    28+,    for unfolding seats.

    37.1    through 41, for specially supported backs.


CLS 5/42.1
TXT Unfolding back section:
    Device under subclass 37.1 wherein the back is itself unfoldable or has
    further attached sections which are unfoldable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 354.1+ for a seat having a back which
    may be tilted downward with respect to the bottom to form an extension of
    the bottom surface.


CLS 5/43
TXT Devices under subclass 12.1 in which the back is pivotally connected below
    at the rear of the sofa frame and is turned forward to form a part or all
    of the bed bottom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for vertically unfolding sections.

    136     through 144, for devices for pivoting a vertical bed to turn down.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 112+ for a seating device in which the
    back carries a body support on the rear thereof, which is brought into use
    position by the forward turning of the back, and subclasses 125+ for a seat
    convertible to a table by moving the back forwardly over the seat to expose
    a table surface on the rear of the back.


CLS 5/44.1
TXT Advancing and unfolding seat:
    Device under subclass 43 in which the forward-turning back is combined into
    a bed bottom with an unfolding seat.

    (1)     Note.  The seat section may be formed of panels which are
    horizontally slidable or unfoldable, but the seat section must form a part
    of the bed bottom surface.


CLS 5/45
TXT Devices under subclass 43 in which the back is so pivoted as to traverse
    clear over the seat and form a forward continuation of it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46.1+,  for sectional seats which may be aligned to form bed bottoms


CLS 5/46.1
TXT Carried by seat to alignment:
    Device under subclass 43 in which the back is pivoted to the rear of a
    forwardly-pivoted seat section in such fashion that grasping the back and
    pulling it forward causes the back, the seat, and  a section under the seat
    to become so ordered and arranged as to form a bed bottom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31+,    for an unfolding seat with rising inner section.

    59.1+,  for devices in which the back section is masked by a pad which must
    be removed in some way, e.g., grasping and pulling.


CLS 5/47
TXT Devices under subclass 12.1 so mounted for conversion to beds that the
    lower part moves forward as the upper part moves downward.  The seat
    frequently advances horizontally to form, together with the back, a bed
    bottom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147,    for similarly moving upending beds.


CLS 5/48
TXT Devices under subclass 47 with a seat that increases by unfolding or
    extending to form a bed bottom in continuation of the back.


CLS 5/49
TXT Devices under subclass 12.1 which possess at one or both sides of the seat
    normally pendent leaves which may be lifted and supported horizontally to
    form part of the bed bottom and in which one may be further lifted and
    sustained vertically to form a back, or both elevated to form a crib, also
    sofas in which a back is reverted and a front leaf elevated to form a bed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 68+ for a seating device convertible
    to a bed by relative movement of bottom, back and leg or footrest, which
    latter may be pendant in some positions of use.


CLS 5/50
TXT Devices under subclass 12.1 with leaves supplied with devices to support
    them no higher than the horizontal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185,    for laterally extended bedstead sections.


CLS 5/51.1
TXT Bed element:
    Device under subclass 12.1 relating to a specific item of structure which
    forms a portion of a sofa bed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179+    and 312+, for folding legs.

    186.1   through 279.1, for bed bottoms.

    279.1+, 421+, 424+, and 503.1+, for elements not peculiar to sofa beds.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 218.1+ for an upholstery cover
    detachably connected to a chair or seat frame and subclasses 219.1+ for a
    slip cover for a chair or seat.


CLS 5/52
TXT Devices under subclass 51.1 relating to modifications in the sofa heads and
    arm rests consequent upon the unfolding of the sofa.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 115+ for a seating device convertible
    to a bed by relative movement of the armrest with respect to the other
    components, and subclasses 411.2+ for an armrest of that class (297).


CLS 5/53.1
TXT Headboard or footboard:

    Device under subclass 51.1 comprising a substantially vertical retaining
    device for the head or foot of a bed which serves as a stop or as a
    protector for bedclothes, pillows, or a person's head or feet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132,    for three part bedsteads.

    159.1+, for parts pivoted to a case to form a headboard when the bed is
    turned down for use.

    178+,   for folding head or foot bedsteads.


CLS 5/53.2
TXT Pivoted headboard:
    Device under subclass 53.1 comprising an element that is rotatable with
    respect to the sofa's case and forms a substantially vertical retaining
    device for the head of a bed and which serves as a stop or as a protector
    for bedclothes, pillows, or a person's head.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132,    for three part bedsteads.

    159.1+,  for parts pivoted to a case to form a headboard when the bed is
    turned down for use.

    178+,   for folding head or foot bedsteads.


CLS 5/53.3
TXT Pivoted footboard:
    Device under subclass 53.1 comprising an element that is rotatable with
    respect to the sofa's case and forms a substantially vertical retaining
    device for the foot of a bed and which serves as a stop or as a protector
    for bedclothes, pillows, or a person's feet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132,    for three part bedsteads.

    159.1+, for parts pivoted to a case to form a headboard when the bed is
    turned down for use.

    178+,   for folding head or foot bedsteads.


CLS 5/54
TXT Devices under subclass 51.1 comprising vertical closure members at the
    front of a sofa bed to fill the space or a part of the space between the
    seat upholstery and the floor.


CLS 5/55.1
TXT Latch:
    Device under subclass 51.1 comprising a fastener means especially adapted
    for holding parts of sofa bed in open or closed position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    for locks applied to upending bedsteads.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, for locks of general utility.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, for similar fasteners of general utility.


CLS 5/56
TXT Devices under subclass 51.1 comprising springs employed in sofa beds to
    counterbalance the weight of moving parts and assist in opening and closing
    movements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164.1+, for counterbalance springs for upending bedsteads.


CLS 5/57.1
TXT Hinge:
    Device under subclass 51.1 comprising a pivot connection specially employed
    in a sofa or other folding type of bed.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes angle stops and angle-iron pivot
    joints.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, sub-classes 221+, for hinges of general
    utility.  See the search notes thereunder for other classifications
    providing for specific applications.


CLS 5/57.2
TXT Having anti-pivoting means:
    Device under subclass 57.1 comprising means to prevent accidental opening
    or accidental closing of the hinge.


CLS 5/58
TXT Devices under subclass 51.1 comprising drawers, compartments, or swinging
    receptacles connected with, forming a part of, or inserted in sofa beds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.1+,   for sets of inclosure in combination furniture.

    308,    for drawers, etc., attached to or inserted in some part of
    bedsteads.


CLS 5/59.1
TXT Shiftable back or seat:
    Device under subclass 51.1 comprising a movable sofa seat or back which
    does not form a bed section.

    (1)     Note.  The movable seat or back may allow unfolding of the bed.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes devices connecting stuffed seats or
    backs for simultaneous shifting; also included are padded seats or backs
    which are movably connected to a sofa bed section so as to move with it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for unfolding bed sections.


CLS 5/81.1
TXT Invalid lift and transfer:
    Subject matter under the class definition for lifting or transferring a
    patient from one part of the bed to another or from the bed to some other
    apparatus (into a wheelchair, bath, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    607+,   for bed or support tiltable along a longitudinal axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclass 480 for means to
    assist or help a disabled person use a receptacle-type dry closet.

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclass 67 for a walker.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 264+ for apparatus for hauling or hoisting a load including a
    driven device which pulls on or travels along a cable and wherein either
    the device or the cable is attached to the load.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 87.021 for occupant pushed coaster.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 67.1+ for
    hoist line attached to load supporting frame and subclasses 74+ for
    hoist-line slings.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 5+ for occupant propelled walker or
    skater frame;  subclasses 68+ for a chair having a relatively movable
    bottom, back-, leg-, or foot-rest interconnected with each other;
    subclasses 340+ for a seat bottom interconnected to move relative to a seat
    back; and subclasses 354.1+ for a seat back tiltable with respect to a seat
    bottom.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 921 for handicapped person
    handling.

    482,    Exercise Devices, subclasses 66+ for occupant propelled support
    frame having movement facilitating feature for foot travel.


CLS 5/83.1
TXT With hoisting device:
    Relocating means under subclass 81.1 comprising a patient moving device
    associated with a bed and adapted to raise or reposition a body off of the
    bed or support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    612,    for auxiliary means to raise a portion of user above supporting
    surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 667+ for flush
    closet seat assist to raise user.


CLS 5/84.1
TXT Attachable:
    Hoisting device under subclass 83.1 fixed to a bed by a temporary
    connection, such as a gripping-type apparatus.


CLS 5/85.1
TXT Detached surrounding frame:
    Hoisting device under subclass 83.1 comprising a supporting framework above
    the bed and an attached stretcher-type patient holder or patient supporting
    device (e.g., sling, strap).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclass 71 for overhead crane and subclasses
    312+ for traveling bridge cranes.


CLS 5/86.1
TXT Free traveling:
    Hoisting device under subclass 83.1 consisting of a transportable support
    movable along a floor or the ground.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 250.1 for wheelchair type with propulsion
    means and subclass 304.1 for wheelchair-type attachments and accessories.


CLS 5/87.1
TXT Crane:
    Hoisting device under subclass 83.1 comprising a horizontal structural
    projection rotating about a vertical axis  by which the patient may be
    moved.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 560.1+ for means
    for handling user into and out of a tub.

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclasses 255+ for vertically swinging boom.


CLS 5/88.1
TXT Winding hoists:
    Hoisting device under subclass 83.1 characterized by a plurality of narrow
    belts or a single broad piece of cloth passing under the patient and
    wrapped on rotatable rails.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 917+ for accommodating
    special material or article.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 278+ for plural drums or drum with plural distinct sections.


CLS 5/89.1
TXT Stretcher bottom and sling:
    Relocating means under subclass 81.1 comprising  structural members,
    creating a support, connected to a wide strap or matlike pad (including a
    seat).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    625+,   for a field stretcher.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 67.1+ for
    hoist-line attached load supporting frame and subclasses 74+ for hoist-line
    slings.


CLS 5/93.1
TXT CRIB:
    Subject matter under the class definition characterized by structure having
    high ends and side guard means for preventing an occupant, generally an
    infant, from falling out.

    (1)     Note.  Except in subclass 97, a crib denotes a small bed especially
    adapted for young children.

    (2)     Note.  Devices attached to or connected with either sofa beds or
    upending beds to convert them to a crib are proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.1+,   for cribs combined into a unitary article with some other article
    of furniture.

    101+,   for cradles (cribs supported for to-and-fro motion).

    174+,   for cribs, the sides guards of which are not modified for folding.

    425+,   for beds having side guards.

    512,    for beds having a peripheral screen.

    513,    for partitioned beds.

    945,    for inflatable baby supports that have inflatable peripheral guards.

    946,    for crib bumpers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    256,    Fences, subclass 25, for pens, without a crib bottom, for confining
    children.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 31, for cribs provided with specialized
    running gear; subclass 93 for cribs with nonspecialized running gear, e.g.,
    casters or simple wheels.


CLS 5/93.2
TXT Convertible:
    Device under subclass 93.1 in which the crib is readily changed into a
    different article of furniture.

    (1)     Note.  Except in subclass 97, a crib denotes a small bed especially
    adapted for young children.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.1+,   for cribs combined into a unitary article with some other article
    of furniture.

    101+,   for cradles (cribs supported for to-and-fro motion).

    174+,   for cribs, the sides guards of which are not modified for folding.

    425+,   for beds having side guards.

    512,    for beds having a peripheral screen.

    513,    for partitioned beds.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    256,    Fences, subclass 25, for pens, without a crib bottom, for confining
    children.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 31, for cribs provided with specialized
    running gear; subclass 93 for cribs with nonspecialized running gear, e.g.,
    casters or simple wheels.


CLS 5/94
TXT Devices under subclass 93.1 including hammocks, modified for attachment to
    the interior of automobiles or adapted to be fastened on the back of any
    seat.


CLS 5/95
TXT Devices under subclass 93.1 having means for attaching them to bedsteads,
    or means carried by the latter structures for the purpose of attaching a
    crib thereto.


CLS 5/96
TXT Devices under subclass 95 provided with bed-attached means by which they
    may be shoved under a bed when desired, particularly when not in use, or
    such means specifically.


CLS 5/97
TXT Devices under subclass 93.1 having a superstructure of substantially rigid
    frames continuing the framework of the bed into a complete inclosure, or
    networks other than canopies stretched over the top of such furniture
    specifically for keeping the occupant inclosed.


CLS 5/98.1
TXT Fabric:
    Subject matter under subclass 93.1 comprising cribs having side and end
    walls mainly constructed of knitted, woven or nonwoven cloth material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass excludes devices made of fabric panels having
    a rigid frame.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes cribs employing fabric to permit
    folding and unfolding of the device.


CLS 5/98.2
TXT Crossed legs:
    Devices under subclass 98.1 in which the crib is supported by plural
    elongated members that are pivotally connected intermediate their ends and
    may be alternatively rotated between collapsed and operable position.


CLS 5/98.3
TXT Hammock type:
    Fabric crib under subclass 98.1 which is supported by elongated flexible
    strands that extend from the crib ends to anchor points which are more
    horizontally displaced than vertically displaced from the crib attachment
    points.


CLS 5/99.1
TXT Folding:
    Device under subclass 93.1 which is comprised of sections or panels that
    may be interleaved or interdigitated to reduce the overall dimensions of
    the crib structure and make it more compact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95+,    for cribs attached to bedsteads.

    98.2,   for fabric cribs having folding characteristics.

    102,    for folding cradles in which the rockers have foldable features.

    174+,   for devices wherein there is no modification of the structure for
    folding the crib sides, but the means for folding is analogous to that of a
    folding bed.


CLS 5/100
TXT Devices under subclass 93.1 relating to crib or cradle sides or guards
    connected movably to the frame to open and give access to the interior.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    425+,   for guards attachable to ordinary bedsteads.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 7+ for a seat having removable or
    foldable crib sides.


CLS 5/101
TXT Devices under the class definition relating to cribs modified by supporting
    means, as rockers, pivots, or other supporting devices, to enable them to
    be given a moderate to-and-from motion.

    (1)     Note.  Cribs having supporting means as set out in the definition
    of this subclass (101) are included in this and indented subclasses whether
    or not such means is a convertible  or alternatively useful feature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.1+,   for cradles combined in a unitary article with some other article
    of furniture.

    93.1+,  for stationary cribs.

    108+,   for cradles combined with a rocking chair for rocking purposes.

    127+,   for supports of a broad character capable of use as swing or
    hammock supports.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 166 for a wheeled infant carriage or crib
    provided with driven means for reciprocating it longitudinally.

    601,    Surgery:  Kinesitherapy, subclasses 49+ for devices supporting the
    person for rapid oscillation, specifically for therapeutic purposes.

    D6,     Furnishings, subclass 15 for designs of cradles.


CLS 5/102
TXT Devices under subclass 101 capable of reduction to compactness by folding
    or knocking down.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98.1+,  for cribs with bodies of fabric.

    99.1+,  for cribs not modified by folding devices for the rockers.

    127+,   for supports not folding with the cradle.


CLS 5/103
TXT Cradles under subclass 101 mounted for swaying on pairs of substantially
    parallel links.


CLS 5/104
TXT Cradles under subclass 101 mounted for swaying on springs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210,    for other bed structures mounted for limited spring movement.


CLS 5/105
TXT Cradles under subclass 101 mounted on rockers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for rockers simply attachable to a baby carriage for converting it
    to a cradle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 31 for baby carriages having rockers and
    characterized by modification of the running gear for rocker attachment.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 258.1+, for a rocker mounted chair or
    seat.


CLS 5/106
TXT Devices under subclass 105 wherein the rockers are so attached to a crib
    that they may be thrown out of action without removal and locking devices
    to prevent swaying of the cradle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 270.1+ for a rocker mounted chair
    having means to limit or immobilize the rocking motion.


CLS 5/107
TXT Devices under subclass 105 wherein the rockers are attachable to crib
    bodies, carriages, and the like to convert them to cradles.


CLS 5/108
TXT Devices under subclass 101 such as treadles, attached rocking-chairs,
    cords, and pulleys, for actuating cradles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 260.1+ for means to impart rocking
    motion to a rocking chair.

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclasses 118+ for an amusement
    swing appropriate therefor.


CLS 5/109
TXT Devices under subclass 108 comprising motor devices for the automatic
    actuation of cradles.

    (1)     Note.  The motors themselves are under the appropriate classes
    according to the kind, as spring, electrical, weight, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    601,    Surgery:  Kinesitherapy, subclasses 49+, 86, 90, 98, 115+, and 146
    for body supported vibrator.


CLS 5/110
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising leg-supported beds of
    light and easily-portable structure having a substantially flat sleeping
    surface and devoid of upholstery, back, ends, or significant head or foot
    boards.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112+,   for cots which are collapsible into a small compact bundle for easy
    transportation.

    118+,   for cots modified especially for use in connection with a vehicle,
    either inside or outside.

    151+,   for cots folding by lifting the ends while the center remains
    stationary on a stand.

    154,    for cots which fold to stand upright by lifting the center and
    bringing the ends together.

    425+,   for cots provided with handles and devices for carrying invalids.

    600+,   for cots modified for the special use of invalids.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    482,    Exercise Devices, particularly subclasses 27+ for a gymnastic
    trampoline having similar structure.


CLS 5/111
TXT Cots under subclass 110 characterized by sections, so that they may be
    folded or collapsed into a flat bundle of a size determined by the sections.


CLS 5/112
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to easily-portable bed
    structures, characterized by collapsibility, by which the bed is made into
    a small compact bundle for easy transportation.  If sectional, the sections
    are themselves collapsible.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110+,   for other easily portable bed structures.


CLS 5/113
TXT Camp beds or cots under subclass 112 provided with canopies or netting
    supports involved with the bed structure and requiring some significant
    change therein or folding with the bed structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    for devices in which the canopy is adapted to be secured to the
    outside of a vehicle to which the bed is attached.

    413,    for beds with mosquito nets and canopies and see the notes
    therewith.


CLS 5/114
TXT Devices under subclass 112 characterized by extensive separation into parts
    for close packing.


CLS 5/115
TXT Devices under subclass 112 characterized by supports consisting of groups
    of lazy tongs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182,    for lazy tong supports on extension bedsteads.


CLS 5/116
TXT Devices under subclass 112 possessing integral side rails which in folding
    are brought side by side.  The end rails may be detachable or folding and
    the legs folding or rigid.


CLS 5/117
TXT Devices under subclass 116 having in addition sectional pivoted side rails
    and folding or detachable legs, the whole folding to a compact bundle of
    approximately the length of a section.


CLS 5/118
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to light full-length
    structures of any type, mostly foldable, especially modified for use in
    connection with automobiles and similar vehicles, but requiring no
    significant structure change in the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.1+,  for sofa beds convertible from sofa seats.

    94,     for children's beds for such purposes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclass 192 for beds involving self-leveling features.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclass 176 for such devices
    involving a modification of the vehicle body.


CLS 5/119
TXT Devices subclass 118 adapted for use attached to the outside of the
    vehicle. They may possess an indivisible mosquito net or canopy.


CLS 5/120
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to freely-suspended
    swinging devices adapted to support the body in prone position and
    frequently to conform to a considerable degree to the shape of the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98.1,   for high fabric inclosure to confine a person.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 273+ for a seat suspended to swing by
    means of a hanger connected to or through a back- arm-, leg-, or footrest,
    the body supporting portion of which may conform to a shape of the body to
    a considerable degree.

    D6,     Furnishings, subclass 53 for designs of hammocks.


CLS 5/121
TXT Hammocks under subclass 120 provided with a canopy attached to the hammock
    itself and having some particular modification adapting it to use with a
    hammock body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128,    for structure carried by the support for the hammock.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclass 184.1 for chairs with a canopy.


CLS 5/122
TXT Hammock bodies as in subclass 120 made of textile material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98.1+,  for devices of tube shape with high guard walls, especially for the
    use of children.


CLS 5/123
TXT Devices under subclass 122 detachable for insertion in fabric hammocks near
    the ends to keep them spread.


CLS 5/124
TXT Devices under subclass 120, of couch form, suspended to swing as a hammock.
    Distinguished from cradles by the absence of guards, permitting them to be
    used for seating purposes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101+,   for cradles.

    127+,   for supporting frameworks for    hammocks.


CLS 5/125
TXT Devices under subclass 124 characterized by a back or windshield adjustable
    to several use positions.


CLS 5/126
TXT Devices under subclass 124 provided with folding legs or support connecting
    devices by means of which the hammock may be supported rigidly and used as
    an ordinary bed.


CLS 5/127
TXT Devices under subclass 120 comprising frameworks adapted to support a
    hammock of any type, a cradle, or a swing.


CLS 5/128
TXT Supports under subclass 127 for the suspension of a hammock and the support
    of a canopy over it.  The canopy or netting is carried by the support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121,    for supports carried by the hammock itself.

    130,    for a netting thrown over a ridgepole and staked out.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclasses 120.3 and 161 for
    detached supports.


CLS 5/129
TXT Supports under subclass 127, the connection between the end supports being
    underneath the hammock body.


CLS 5/130
TXT Supports under subclass 127, comprising end supports rigidly connected
    solely by an overhead connection, as a ridgepole.


CLS 5/131
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising well-defined head and
    foot boards, one or both of which extends markedly above the bed surface,
    and which are joined by a bed surface or by rails or other connections
    proper to support a bed surface, such as a mattress.

    (1)     Note.  A bed bottom, either alone or with a bed surface, or other
    support for a bed surface such as a mattress or cushion can be found in
    subclasses 400+, indented hereunder, as an unprovided for subcombination of
    a bedstead.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    690+,   for a mattress or cushion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    D6,     Furnishings, subclasses 79+ for designs of bedsteads.


CLS 5/132
TXT Devices under subclass 131 consisting of (1) rigid horizontal frame
    carrying or adapted to carry a bed bottom of any type and detachably
    connected to (2) head and (3) foot boards between which the frame forms the
    sole necessary connection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211+,   for the three-part bed including tightening devices.

    288+,   for the connecting device itself.


CLS 5/133
TXT Devices under subclass 131 which are changed from use to storage position
    by upending about a pivot on an axis transverse of the bed.  In storage
    position the bed bottom is substantially vertical.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43+,    for devices having a seat in front over which the bed turns down.

    53.1+,  for headboards for such beds.

    93.1+,  for devices attached to or connected with upending beds to convert
    them to cribs.

    159.1+, for cases.

    162+,   for stands.

    170+,   for devices for moving the bed after upending.

    178+,   for integral footboards folding over or under the bed.

    310+,   for folding or disappearing legs.

    414,    for canopies operated by movement of the bed.


CLS 5/134
TXT Devices under subclass 133 which in storage position stand vertically
    without a separate pivotal supporting frame and for use are tumbled over to
    a horizontal position.  Includes those of sofa type having a seat at the
    front.


CLS 5/135
TXT Devices under subclass 133 which when turned down are readily detached from
    the upending device and run anywhere desired for use.


CLS 5/136
TXT Devices under subclass 133 pivoted by fixed position pivots on a stand or
    case.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26.1+,  for sofa bed seat rotators.

    101+,   for cradles.

    161,    for wing front cases for beds of this type.

    600+,   for invalid beds.


CLS 5/137
TXT Devices under subclass 133 which substantially changes its position with
    respect to either the support or bed bottom during the movement.  The bed
    when upended stands with the inner or head end down.


CLS 5/138
TXT Devices under subclass 137 which move to vertical position by pivoting
    about several fixed points in succession. Includes rocker bases mounted on
    a frame or case and single struts having a rocking or cogged base.


CLS 5/139
TXT Devices under subclass 137  pivoted on the upper end of a pivoted strut and
    having a degree of freedom requiring manual guidance to vertical position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    for single struts having a rocker or cogged base.


CLS 5/140
TXT Devices under subclass 137 pivoted on the upper end of a pivoted strut and
    constrained in upending by a guide near the head end.


CLS 5/141
TXT Devices under subclass 137 pivoted on the lower end of a
    pivotally-supported link and constrained in upending by sliding contact
    with a guide near the head end.


CLS 5/142
TXT Devices under subclass 137 pivoted on the outer ends of paired pivoted
    links or struts, two on each side.


CLS 5/143
TXT Devices under subclass 137 moving to vertical position on a single guide
    with which they have rolling or sliding contact and requiring additional
    manual guidance.


CLS 5/144
TXT Devices under subclass 137 constrained in turning to vertical position by
    sliding or rolling contact of lugs with two guides on each side.


CLS 5/145
TXT Devices under subclass 133 moving on a fixed pivot or equivalent at the
    head end and linked at the foot end to a following footboard or other
    support which travels along the floor toward the head end as the bed is
    turned to vertical position.


CLS 5/146
TXT Devices under subclass 133 mounted on a pivot upending carrier on which the
    bed frame slides either before or during the turning movement.


CLS 5/147
TXT Devices under subclass 133 which move by vertical rising movement of the
    head accompanied by inward horizontal movement of the foot, the surface of
    the bed being outward when vertical and the head or inner end of the bed at
    the top.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47+,    for similar movements in sofa beds, usually sidewise of the frame.


CLS 5/148
TXT Devices under subclass 133 in which the bed bottom is pivoted at one side
    of high head and foot boards which collapse in width to stand compactly in
    alignment with the head and foot of the frame when upended.


CLS 5/149
TXT Devices under subclass 133 in which the bottom is composed of sections
    which in collapsed position stand vertically or in which the major portion
    of the bed bottom stands vertically.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for vertical unfolding sections of sofa beds.

    169,    for devices in which the bottom itself is a fabric detached from
    the rails and hangs suspended as the rail sections upend.


CLS 5/150.1
TXT Upending major section:
    Device under subclass 149 having a long bottom section which turns up at
    right angles to a short, fixed bottom section in a stand or case;
    alternately, a long upending bottom section is attached to a short movable
    bottom section at the head or foot.


CLS 5/151
TXT Devices under subclass 149, having two sections, at the head and foot,
    respectively, pivoted to unfold outwardly and downwardly from the center.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for devices in case the end boards at head and foot form a distinct
    table top in folded condition.


CLS 5/152
TXT Devices under subclass 151 the head and foot each having a fixed pivot on a
    central stand.  There may be a fixed case connected to one section, so that
    as the bed folds the central stand moves toward it to house the folded bed.


CLS 5/153
TXT Devices under subclass 151, the head and foot each connected to a central
    stand by means of moving pivots.


CLS 5/154
TXT Devices under subclass 149 in which the bed bottom consists of two main
    sections pivoted together at the center and pivoted to high integral head
    and foot boards or to moving stands or supports, so that as the center
    falls in unfolding the head and foot ends separate from each other.

    (1)     Note.  Cots or any folding beds of this type are in this subclass.


CLS 5/155
TXT Devices under subclass 149 in which the inner or head section is pivoted to
    turn down and out from a support and carries folded upon it the foot
    section, which is afterward unfolded.


CLS 5/156
TXT Devices under subclass 149 in which the upending section is laterally
    increased after turning down by sections unfolding or extending laterally
    from it.


CLS 5/157
TXT Devices under subclass 149 in which the upending section is longitudinally
    increased by telescoping during or after the unfolding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184,    for extension side rails.


CLS 5/158
TXT Devices under subclass 149 in which the bed bottom is continuous and
    flexible or composed of hinged-sections, so that, in folding, the head,
    followed by the remainder of the bed, slides upward into the support or
    case.


CLS 5/159.1
TXT Case:
    Device under subclass 133 comprising the stand to which the bottom sections
    of the bed are pivoted so that when upended the bed may be covered.

    (1)     Note.  The bottom section may carry a panel that forms part of a
    closure when the bed is upended.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.1+,   for cases which are combined with other articles of furniture.

    16      and 43+, for a case having in front of it a seat, fixed or movable,
    over which the bed turns down.

    151     through 154, for head and foot boards which together form the case.


CLS 5/160
TXT Devices under subclass 159.1 comprising panels on the bottom of a bed to
    conceal it when upended.  Includes sectional panels, the method of
    connecting the panel to the bed or case, and devices for mounting the bed
    upon the panel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for front boards of sofa beds.


CLS 5/161
TXT Devices under subclass 159.1 in which the bed bottom is pivoted
    longitudinally at one side of high head and foot boards, which after the
    bottom is turned up are folded in like a gate to form a closure for the
    bottom of the bed.  The head and foot boards may be entire or sectional
    vertically and may be of open or closed pattern.


CLS 5/162
TXT Devices under subclass 133 comprising open work or low supports functioning
    as a support for the bed in use or storage position, but not forming a
    closure for concealment or protection.


CLS 5/163
TXT Devices under subclass 133 comprising modifications of the bed bottom,
    stand, or case to furnish a movable screen or curtain for some part of a
    bed of this type other than a case.


CLS 5/164.1
TXT Counterbalance spring:
    Device under subclass 133 comprising spring biasing means associated with
    an upendable section which counteracts a portion of the section's weight
    and assists or cushions the upending operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for assisting springs for sofa beds.


CLS 5/165
TXT Devices under subclass 164.1 comprising spring fabric bottoms so connected
    that opening the bed increases the tension on the bottom cushioning the
    fall, and, conversely, assisting in closing the bed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169,    for structures in which the suspended bottom is usually placed
    under tension toward the end of the opening movement.


CLS 5/166.1
TXT Counterbalance weight:
    Device under subclass 133 comprising a mass of material arranged to
    counteract some portion of an upendable section's weight and assist in the
    upending operation.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also includes devices which have some portion
    of the case or stand moved against gravity as the upended section is
    lowered.


CLS 5/166.2
TXT Having cord and pulley:
    Device under subclass 133 comprising a rope, cable, or the like, which
    passes over one or more sheaves and through which the weight of material
    acts to counteract some portion of an upendable section's weight and assist
    in the upending operation.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also includes devices which have some portion
    of the case or stand moved against gravity as the upended section is
    lowered.


CLS 5/167
TXT Devices under subclass 133 comprising locks not of general use, for the
    purpose of holding the bed closed or for preventing premature or undesired
    closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55.1,   for locks for sofa beds.


CLS 5/168
TXT Devices under subclass 133 comprising specialized props to prevent the
    support from toppling over as the bed descends, especially when actuated by
    the motion of the bed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164.1+, for devices spring connected so that the spring acts as a
    counterbalance.


CLS 5/169
TXT Devices under subclass 133 provided with a fabric bottom supported at the
    ends and having, if any, a very loose connection with the side rails, so
    that the bottom hangs as a bag when the bed is folded.

    (1)     Note.  Search should be made here particularly when there are
    specially-actuated tension devices to stretch the fabric as the bed is
    opened.  If no modifications are introduced by thus suspending the bottom
    and it might equally well be connected laterally to the sections, search
    should be made in the type defined by the mode of arranging and folding the
    sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for sofa beds having suspended bottoms.

    149     through 158, for the folding structure of the rails.

    165,    for devices which tension a fabric bed bottom as the bed is opened.


CLS 5/170
TXT Devices under subclass 133 connected with the support of the bed to carry,
    guide, or limit the motion of the upended bed in its movement from one
    location to another, as in and out of a storage closet.  May include a
    truck forming a part of the bed support or stand.


CLS 5/171
TXT Devices under subclass 170 carried upon one side of a door or its
    equivalent to be shifted from use to storage positions by the movements of
    the door.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160,    for structure in which the door is simply the transversely-pivoted
    front panel of a case.


CLS 5/172
TXT Devices under subclass 170 exclusive of trucks connecting the support for
    the upending bed with respect to a doorway in such a manner that the folded
    bed may be guided from a use position in front and at one side of a door
    jamb or the like to a storage position around behind, and to one side of
    the jamb.


CLS 5/173
TXT Devices under subclass 170 comprising fixed base supports intended to
    rotate, when folded, on a vertical axis near a wall for the purpose of
    thrusting the folded bed out from the wall during the rotation and bringing
    it back toward the end of the 180# movement to close proximity to the wall,
    so that the bed when either up or down may be close to the wall.


CLS 5/174
TXT Bedsteads under subclass 131 possessing distinct and significant head and
    foot boards and collapsing by folding (excluding extension) to smaller
    size, in which they are not usable as beds. Includes cribs when the side
    guards are not modified for folding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181+,   for extension characteristic, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 162+ for a
    horizontal planar surface of general utility which folds, and subclass 115+
    for a surface supported by folding legs.


CLS 5/175
TXT Devices under subclass 174 increasing  from compact storage form both by
    unfolding and extension.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    for lazy-tong supports on camp beds.

    182,    for lazy-tong bedsteads which usually collapse entirely or are
    extendible to form beds of different sizes.


CLS 5/176.1
TXT Transverse collapse:
    Device under subclass 174 in which the head and foot boards are mounted
    such that they may be collapsed in such fashion as to bring the side rails
    together.

    (1)     Note.  The bed bottom may be of any type and disposed in any manner.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes bedsteads in which the rails, head
    board, and foot board are pivoted together to collapse diagonally.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148,    181 and 183, for other collapsing head or foot boards.


CLS 5/177
TXT Devices under subclass 174 in which the side rails are made in pivoted
    sections which fold inwardly, bringing the head and foot boards into
    proximity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112+,   for camp beds.


CLS 5/178
TXT Devices under subclass 174 in which the head and foot boards are continuous
    to the floor and linked or pivoted to the head and foot of the bed,
    respectively, so that they may be folded over or under the bed bottom to
    lie parallel thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53.1+,  for headboard and footboard structure sofa beds.


CLS 5/179
TXT Devices under subclass 178 possessing head and foot boards pivoted above
    the bed bottom to fold down parallel to it and legs pivoted below the
    bottom to fold up under and parallel to it independently of the head and
    foot boards.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53.1+,  for the headboards.

    310+,   for the legs.


CLS 5/180
TXT Devices under subclass 179 wherein the legs are operatively connected with
    their respective head or foot boards, so as to fold simultaneously.


CLS 5/181
TXT Bedsteads under subclass 131 which when contracted always present a bed
    surface, and possess an expansion in the nature of a size adjustment or
    increase from half to full length or from half to three-quarters or full
    width by spreading out sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17+,    for devices wherein the bed when contracted is a couch, settee, or
    sofa.


CLS 5/182
TXT Devices under subclass 181 in which the connections between the head and
    foot boards are collapsible and extensible lazy tongs or the head and foot
    boards themselves are extensible by lazy long constructions.


CLS 5/183
TXT Devices under subclass 181 characterized by headboards and footboards which
    collapse to bring the side rails nearer together or expand to form supports
    for accessory sections.


CLS 5/184
TXT Devices under subclass 181 extending in length by telescoping side rails,
    including any sort of slidable-interlocked rails.


CLS 5/185
TXT Devices under subclass 181 possessing one or more accessory sections which
    may be unfolded or drawn out laterally to extend the bed bottom from narrow
    to full width and supported on legs or the like without affecting the head
    and foot boards.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49      and 50, for accessory sections pendant at the side.


CLS 5/186.1
TXT Surface:
    Device under subclass 400 wherein the support surface comprises a thin flat
    bottom structure composed either of assembled units connected together or
    of one continuous material; the structure being a substantially planar
    member which is so flexible as to require marginal tension for its support.

    (1)     Note.  Wire fabrics, broadly, are classifiable in Class 245, Wire
    Fabric and Structure, and are proper for this class (5) only when there is
    special marginal modification to adapt the wire fabric for connection to a
    frame or when the fabric is otherwise specially adapted for use as a bed
    bottom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199,    for arrangements of horizontal springs to afford end tension and
    connect the fabric to a frame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    140,    Wireworking, subclass 92.5, for devices making marginal portions by
    the repeated intercoiling of helices to form "cords".


CLS 5/187
TXT Devices under subclass 186.1 of canvas, including binding, fastening,
    connecting, and reinforcing means, especially adapted for soft textile
    bottoms rather than metallic ones.


CLS 5/188
TXT Devices under subclass 186.1 composed of units self-linked to form a
    continuous web of a parallel chains transversely connected or of uniformly
    dispersed rings or plates connected by links.


CLS 5/189
TXT Devices under subclass 186.1 constituted by continuous elements distorted
    to give them resilience running from end to end or side to side and free or
    interconnected.


CLS 5/190
TXT Devices under subclass 186.1 constituted by straight free or interconnected
    cables running from end to end or by continuous cord laced back and forth.


CLS 5/191
TXT Devices under subclass 186.1 formed by thin flat strips of resilient
    material, free or interconnected and having flexibility sufficient to
    require end tension for their support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236.1+, for rigid slats.


CLS 5/192
TXT Devices under subclass 186.1 comprising edgings and midribs which are
    thickening of the fabric itself or modifications along the edges or the
    center for the purpose usually of strengthening the fabric at those points
    or making a smooth guard edge; or center strips which are changes in the
    nature of the fabric along a central line for the purpose of introducing
    some degree of independence between the two halves of the surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193,    for high edge guards.

    226+,   for separate elements inserted in or near the edge of the fabric to
    strengthen it.


CLS 5/193
TXT Devices under subclass 186.1 comprising vertically-arranged devices at the
    edge of any type of bed bottom for the purpose of retaining a stuffed
    mattress in place when the bed is in use position.


CLS 5/194
TXT Devices under subclass 131 for binding the raw ends of elastic, fabricated
    bottoms and for connecting them to the rails of the frame.


CLS 5/195
TXT Devices under subclass 194 comprising strips folded or compressed upon and
    inclosing the raw edges at the ends of the fabric.


CLS 5/196
TXT Devices under subclass 194 in which the raw end of the fabric is fastened
    to an end rail by a strip clamped upon it.


CLS 5/197
TXT Devices under subclass 194 in which the edge of the fabric is held in a
    groove in an end rail by an inserted wedging strip.


CLS 5/198
TXT Devices under subclass 194 having end rails which are tubular and slotted
    for receiving the end of the fabric, which is retained therein by
    compression, casting, etc.


CLS 5/199
TXT Devices under subclass 194 having horizontally arranged springs on the edge
    of a fabric bottom for giving marginal supporting tension and special
    limiting springs for such use provided with stop or limiting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232     and 233, for other marginal spring constructions.


CLS 5/200.1
TXT Frame:
    Device under subclass 400 wherein the rigid frame provides peripheral
    support for an elastic fabric surface used as a bed bottom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132,    for a frame combined with head and foot boards.


CLS 5/201
TXT Devices under subclass 200.1 constructed so as to be quickly separable into
    elementary parts.


CLS 5/202
TXT Devices under 200.1 made in two or more separate sections.  The sections
    may fold or be extensible.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57.1+,  for details of sofa bed hinges.

    250,    for folding type spring bottoms.


CLS 5/203
TXT Devices under subclass 200.1 comprising braces to prevent deformation of
    the frames under the tension of the fabricated surface.


CLS 5/204
TXT Devices under subclass 200.1 in which the side rail of the frame is in the
    form of a dropped truss, the upturned ends of the truss taking the place of
    a riser or corner iron.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51.1+,  for similar structure in sofa beds.


CLS 5/205
TXT Devices under subclass 200.1 comprising substantially vertical joining
    elements connecting the ends of side rails to the ends of end rails of
    fabric bed-bottom frames designed to elevate the end rails above the side
    rails.  Includes risers modified to accommodate or include a spring to give
    a resilient support to the fabric frame on the bedstead.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204,    209, 210, and 225.1, for other riser and side rail constructions.


CLS 5/206
TXT Devices under subclass 205 made by stamping or pressing metal blanks to
    desired shape.


CLS 5/207
TXT Devices under subclass 131, and not otherwise classified on any part of
    frame or bedstead for the purpose of supporting or holding in place on the
    bedstead any movable bed-bottom frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236.1,  for slats which may also serve as a bed bottom.


CLS 5/208
TXT Devices under subclass 207 comprising lugs, hooks, or the like rigidly
    connected to a bed-bottom frame for supporting it on a bedstead.


CLS 5/209
TXT Devices under subclass 207 comprising hangers shiftably mounted on the
    bed-bottom frame or on the corner riser for adjustment or support or
    compact folding of the frame.


CLS 5/210
TXT Devices under subclass 207 comprising springs arranged between some part of
    a bedstead and a bed-bottom frame and sometimes requiring some modification
    of the former for giving a resilient support to the frame itself as
    distinguished from the surface of the bed bottom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for structure where the purpose of which is to support a bed for
    free swaying.

    205+,   for corner risers.

    232,    for yielding rails.

    244,    for rigid slat frame tops.


CLS 5/211
TXT Devices under subclass 131 permanently connected to a bed-bottom frame or
    bedstead for progressive tightening adjustment of an elastic fabric bottom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    187,    for tightening devices for bed bottoms specific to canvas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    140,    Wireworking, subclass 110 for machines for giving initial stretch
    during assembly of fabric and frames and for frame-attaching devices for
    securing wire-mattress fabric to bed frames.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 199+ for detachable implements or apparatus for tensioning
    flexible material.


CLS 5/212
TXT Devices under subclass 211 to take up slack in a cord and tension the bed
    bottom particularly for bed bottoms composed of a continuous cord.


CLS 5/213
TXT Devices under subclass 211 comprising screw-actuated levers operating to
    take up fabric slack, or other combinations of screw and lever for this
    purpose.


CLS 5/214
TXT Devices under subclass 211 comprising levers operating to tighten the
    fabric.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213,    for screw actuated levers.


CLS 5/215
TXT Devices under subclass 211 comprising frame structures in which some or all
    of the rails attached to the fabric are intended to be depressed and spread
    farther apart under the weight of the occupant, thus stretching the fabric.


CLS 5/216
TXT Devices under subclass 211 in which the fabric or extensions therefrom are
    rolled up on a roller coextensive with the frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212,    for short rollers for cord take-up.


CLS 5/217
TXT Devices under subclass 216 in which the side or end rails, or both, of the
    bedstead act as tightening fabric rollers (no other fabric frame being
    employed.)


CLS 5/218
TXT Devices under subclass 216 in which the rollers are mounted on risers,
    bringing the fabric some distance above the side rails.


CLS 5/219
TXT Devices under subclass 216 in which the rollers are attachable to convert
    an ordinary bedstead or bed-bottom frame to a roller tightener frame.


CLS 5/220
TXT Devices under subclass 211 comprising screw devices on the fabric frames to
    increase the tension on the fabric.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213,    for screw actuated levers.


CLS 5/221
TXT Devices under subclass 220 attachable to an ordinary bed-bottom frame or
    bedstead without significant modification to the latter.


CLS 5/222
TXT Devices under subclass 220 comprising threaded connecting rods or trusses
    interposed between fabric carrying rails and adapted by rotating the rod or
    by screw extending it (as by a turnbuckle) to separate the carrying rails.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217,    for fabric wound upon the rails.


CLS 5/223
TXT Devices under subclass 220 arranged in connection with the fabric to
    tighten some section, portion, or element of it independently of others.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216+,   for sectional rollers.


CLS 5/224
TXT Devices under subclass 220 in which the fabric rails are carried on
    supporting rails by corner risers which by means of screws are forced to
    slide along the supporting rails.


CLS 5/225.1
TXT Sliding end rail:
    Device under subclass 220 comprising a fabric-carrying rail translatable on
    a riser which carries screw means to adjust the position of the rail for
    tensioning or wherein the rail rests directly upon a side rail and is screw
    adjustable therealong.


CLS 5/226
TXT Devices under subclass 131 accessory devices, not themselves constituting a
    part of elastic fabric bed bottoms, for reinforcing or preventing sag in
    limited portions thereof and operating directly upon such portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230+,   for bed bottoms of fabric and springs, where supporting springs are
    uniformly dispersed under the fabric.


CLS 5/227
TXT Devices under subclass 226 comprising a plurality of cables or a
    back-and-forth cable forming an interconnected coarse web arranged beneath
    or inserted in the fabric.


CLS 5/228
TXT Devices under subclass 226 connected with the fabric to spread the edges of
    it and keep it distended to a maximum width.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261     and 262, for devices used in spring bottoms to prevent distortion
    of the springs.


CLS 5/229
TXT Devices under subclass 226 comprising localized groups of vertically-coiled
    springs arranged under the fabric.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230+,   for fabrics and springs.


CLS 5/230
TXT Devices under subclass 131 comprising bed bottoms in which the body or
    mattress supporting surface is a fabric complete in itself supported by
    springs either arranged to give support by exerting marginal tension or
    arranged beneath the fabric, or both.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186.1+, for the fabric structure itself. Mere arrangements of horizontal
    helical margin connectors are not sufficient to remove the bottom from
    those subclasses.

    199,    for special arrangements of such helical margin connectors.

    229,    for subcoils and reinforced localized parts of a fabric bed bottom.

    249+,   for sectional and collapsible frames for springs.

    267+,   for an incomplete or coarse fabric dispersed over coil springs
    consisting, for example, of guys primarily to connect together the top
    coils.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 452.16+ for a spring bottom or back in
    which the springs are covered with upholstery.


CLS 5/231
TXT Devices under subclass 230 having groups of springs slung resiliently or
    suspended hammock-wise under the fabric bottom to give resilient support to
    the median portion or whole extent of the fabric.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229,    for coil-spring reinforces not resiliently mounted and merely local
    in their action or freely shiftable.


CLS 5/232
TXT Devices under subclass 230 having fabric-carrying rails which are spring
    mounted to yield downwardly or inwardly under weight on the fabric,
    allowing it to sag.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210,    for a fabric frame which is unitary and supplied with extraneous
    springs to support it on a bed-stead.


CLS 5/233
TXT Devices under subclass 230 arranged to exert outward marginal pull upon the
    fabric and allow sag under weight.  Frequently the fabric passes over
    rollers to attaching springs beneath.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199,    for marginal spring connections in fabricated elastic flats.

    234,    for leaf spring supports.


CLS 5/234
TXT Devices under subclass 230 with leaf springs or their equivalent forms
    attached directly to the fabric elements at the margin, allowing local sag.


CLS 5/235
TXT Devices under subclass 230 by which complete fabrics are connected to the
    top coils of supporting springs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258,    for details of saddles to which a fabric may be attached.


CLS 5/236.1
TXT Of slats:
    Device under subclass 400 wherein the support surface is bed bottoms formed
    of systems of straight elongated resilient members which have no auxiliary
    spring supports and which are sufficiently rigid as to require no end
    tension.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass accepts systems of slats in which the slats
    are themselves extensible.

    (2)     Note.  The bed bottom may support bedding directly or it may be
    used to support other types of bed bottoms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191,    for flexible flat strips.

    237,    for bowed spring slats and other types at springs generally
    resembling slats.

    247,    for nonspiral spring fabrics.

    255,    for nonspiral spring elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 452.1+, for a slotted bottom or back.


CLS 5/237
TXT Devices under subclass 236.1 possessing considerable initial camber, giving
    a spring effect.  Slats of this type having auxiliary spring supports
    remain in this subclass.


CLS 5/238
TXT Devices under subclass 236.1 to support or retain individual slats in
    position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207+,   for retaining frames as a whole.

    305,    for the device which has also the function of preventing spread of
    bedstead side rails, and particularly when applied to very few slats of a
    group.


CLS 5/239
TXT Devices under subclass 131 comprising bed bottoms in which the supporting
    surface is composed of slats resiliently supported.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191,    for flexible thin strips requiring end tension.

    237,    for bowed spring slats.

    246+,   for flexible means for uniting spring top coils, particularly
    subclasses 267+ and 275.

    263+,   for slats or bars used as bottom supports for springs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 592 for metallic
    stock which is helical or has a helical component.


CLS 5/240
TXT Devices under subclass 239 which may be compactly collapsed for
    transportation, as by rolling, or extended to accommodate varying beds.


CLS 5/241
TXT Devices under subclass 239 in which the slats are resiliently mounted for
    some degree of independent movement on springs.


CLS 5/242
TXT Devices under subclass 241 in which the individual slats are mounted on
    leaf springs.


CLS 5/243
TXT Devices under subclass 241 in which the individual slats are mounted on
    coil springs.


CLS 5/244
TXT Devices under subclass 239 in which the top frame consists of a rigid
    system of slats supported by springs scattered beneath it.


CLS 5/245
TXT Devices under subclass 239 for attaching the slats to the upper coils of
    supporting springs, which are applicable also to large bottom coils.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263+,   for bottom turns of downward diminishing springs attached to slats.


CLS 5/246
TXT Devices under subclass 131 comprising bed bottoms in which the supporting
    surface consists of the upper parts of springs or these parts and
    connections between them.

    (1)     Note.  The three common types of vertical spiral springs used as
    supporting means in such bottoms are hour-glass, conical, and cylindrical,
    and subclasses 248-254 and 256-277 are confined to such springs.  Other
    types of springs occasionally used with their framing and connections are
    in subclasses 247 and 255.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230+,   for connecting means which is a complete fabric.

    239+,   for connecting means which consists of rigid slats.

    654.1,  for springs pillows.

    716+,   for springs employed in spring mattresses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 80+ for a spring panel of general
    utility.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 285+ for a resiliently supported seat
    back, and subclasses 452.16+ for upholstered seat components.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 592 for metallic
    stock which is helical or has a helical component.


CLS 5/247
TXT Devices under subclass 246 of unusual and nonspiral forms only coordinated
    into complete bed bottoms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258,    for similar structure in top saddles.


CLS 5/248
TXT Devices under subclass 246 comprising arrangements of spiral springs forms
    only and the bounding and confining assemblages of such spring units into a
    spring bed bottom as a whole.  Includes also special arrangements of the
    spring units, as of higher, deeper, or stronger springs in certain
    localities.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189,    230+, 231, 239+, and 716+, for other spiral spring features.

    260,    for special margin rims and means of connecting springs to them.

    263+,   for means of supporting the bottoms of springs.


CLS 5/249
TXT Devices under subclass 248 comprising framed made in sections or
    collapsible for compact transportation, as by rolling up. The sections may
    be made so as to be separated and rearranged.  Includes also such forms of
    fabric and springs.


CLS 5/250
TXT Devices under subclass 249 hinged together for folding flat upon each other.


CLS 5/251
TXT Devices under subclass 249 variable in width or length to adapt them to
    variations in the size of the bed.


CLS 5/252
TXT Devices under subclass 248 comprising horizontal frames or connections
    interposed between the upper and lower surfaces of spring assemblages
    forming "double-deck" springs or connecting together the waists or central
    parts of the spring units.


CLS 5/253
TXT Devices under subclass 248 comprising additional resilient members in a
    spring assemblage called into play in event of unusual depression, or
    special arrangements by which the ordinarily latent resilience of certain
    regions is called upon to withstand heavy shock.


CLS 5/254
TXT Devices under subclass 246 relating to elements of spring bed bottoms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 592 for metallic
    stock which is helical or has a helical component.


CLS 5/255
TXT Devices under subclass 254 comprising nonspiral spring forms of unusual
    type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199,    for helical springs having limiting stops to prevent over-extension
    and specially adapted for bed use.

    258,    for similar structure in top saddles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, for various springs of general use.


CLS 5/256
TXT Devices under subclass 254 comprising spiral units having some
    peculiarities of structure of conformation, as twisting, doubling,
    angularity, varying thickness of wire, other than round, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    268,    for twin or continuous springs.


CLS 5/257
TXT Devices under subclass 254, for means of connecting the end of the top coil
    of a spiral spring to the adjacent part of a lower turn of the same spring
    to form a closed top loop.


CLS 5/258
TXT Devices under subclass 254 for caps of closed or open work of about the
    area of one spring unit resiliently supported on springs below.  Usually is
    in the form of a disk or button riding on top, but may have a vertical
    guide stem supported by any kind of spring.


CLS 5/259.1
TXT Connecting clip (e.g., plate or wire):
    Device under subclass 254 comprising a short strip of plate material or
    wire so formed as to hold or link together the various parts of a spring
    bed bottom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    260,    for margin rims and connections.

    270,    for top connecting links.


CLS 5/260
TXT Devices under subclass 254 comprising rods or strips bounding the spring
    assemblage at the top and special means of connecting the adjacent spring
    units to it.


CLS 5/261
TXT Devices under subclass 254 to prevent distortion of the springs, to prevent
    undue expansion after sudden load release, or to keep the springs under a
    degree of compression.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    253,    for spiral springs with accessory spring shock absorbers.

    262,    for upper frame braces.


CLS 5/262
TXT Devices under subclass 254 connecting the upper frame or rim strip of
    spring assemblages with some lower part of the bed bottom to prevent
    lateral displacement of the rim under load.


CLS 5/263
TXT Devices under subclass 254 comprising supports extending across the frame
    in a spring assemblage for the diminished bottoms of the spring units.

    (1)     Note.  When the springs do not diminish at the bottom, as in
    hour-glass or cylindrical forms, the bottom coils may be supported in the
    same manner as the top coils are connected, and search for such supports
    should be made in subclasses involving topcoil connections.

    (2)     Note.  These subclasses include the form of the support, its
    connection to the frame, and the method of connecting the spring unit to
    it.  For arrangements of the supports with respect to each other see this
    class, subclass 248.  Search should also be made in subclasses 235 and 267+.


CLS 5/264.1
TXT Bars:
    Device under subclass 263 in which the supports are elongated members
    composed of wood or metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    245,    for attaching broad coils to slats.


CLS 5/265
TXT Devices under subclass 263 in which the supports are bars of any kind
    combined with cross or parallel wires.


CLS 5/266
TXT Devices under subclass 263 in which the supports are wires.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235,    for top coils as fabric connections.


CLS 5/267
TXT Devices under subclass 254 relating to connections between the top coil of
    adjacent units and the rim strip, so that the top of the assemblage is made
    into a connected whole.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230+,   for connecting means which is a complete fabric.

    260,    for connections between rim strips and springs adjacent thereto.

    263+,   for bottom spring supports.


CLS 5/268
TXT Devices under subclass 267 in which twin springs are vertical coil springs
    made in pairs, of one continuous wire, the wire usually passing from the
    top of one spring to the top of the other. Continuous springs are similar,
    but the method is extended to larger groups or to the whole number of
    springs comprising the bottom.  All bed springs of these types are included
    in this subclass with their connection, etc.


CLS 5/269
TXT Devices under subclass 267 helical springs used as the top connections and
    also as rim strips.


CLS 5/270
TXT Devices under subclass 267 comprising systems of link or clip connections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259.1,  for links or clips specifically, as distinguished from systematic
    arrangements.


CLS 5/271
TXT Devices under subclass 267 formed by interlacing the top coils of adjacent
    springs or by giving the top coil an extension which engages a coil of an
    adjacent spring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272,    for this structure with guys.


CLS 5/272
TXT Devices under subclass 267 comprising combinations of guys extending from
    one side or end of the top frame to the other engaged with extensions from
    the top coils of the springs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    271,    for this structure without guys.


CLS 5/273
TXT Devices under subclass 267 comprising direct guy wires crossing the top
    provided with integral loops and engaging adjacent springs or engaging the
    loops of similar guys engaging adjacent rows of springs.


CLS 5/274
TXT Devices under subclass 267 comprising guys crossing the frame between the
    rows of springs, but alternately approaching and receding from the row.


CLS 5/275
TXT Devices under subclass 267 comprising systems of strips or wires crossing
    the centers of springs in rows.


CLS 5/276
TXT Devices under subclass 267 comprising groups of parallel guys crossing the
    frame and engaging the tops of the springs.


CLS 5/277
TXT Devices under subclass 267 comprising systems of two sets or relatively
    straight spring-attaching wires, crossing the tops of springs arranged in
    rows, one set in pairs providing two guys for each row of springs and
    another crossing set providing one guy for each cross row of springs.


CLS 5/278
TXT Devices under subclass 131 comprising accessory devices applied to any type
    of bed bottom, so that when any local part is depressed by weight applied
    thereto other parts of the bottom not immediately adjacent will be
    similarly depressed.  The devices usually include springs and assist in
    distributing the weight over the whole bed bottom.


CLS 5/279.1
TXT Element or detail:
    Device under subclass 131 comprising specific structural detail which is
    attributed special significance in a structural member utilized in
    fashioning a bedstead.


CLS 5/280
TXT Devices under subclass 279.1 consisting of panels, ornamental inserts, and
    mirrors inserted in or forming a part of a bedstead.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 3 through 30,
    32, 33, 34, 38, 39, 67, and 432+ for additional ornamental objects or
    mirrors of general application.


CLS 5/281
TXT Devices under subclass 279.1 relating to top knobs and the like for
    bedstead posts, particularly their manner of attachment, and structural
    bedpost ornaments.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 344 for residual
    vertical structure with upper terminal bearing plate or cap and subclasses
    720.1+ for residual elongated rigid structures.


CLS 5/282.1
TXT Joint or connection:
    Device under subclass 279.1 comprising structure regarding interactive
    surfaces used to hold or position the various elements which form a
    bedstead.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200.1+, for frames.

    283,    for filler bars.

    288+,   for corner fastenings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, for joints and connectors of general
    utility.


CLS 5/283
TXT Devices under subclass 279.1 comprising transverse and intermediate bars
    used to fill in the space between the posts at the head or foot,
    particularly the joints connecting them.


CLS 5/284
TXT Devices under subclass 279.1 incorporated in the structure for the purpose
    of heating or cooling it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    421+,   for heating or cooling means not incorporated in the bedstead
    structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 212 for blankets or other bed covering
    with electric heater, and subclass 217 for a bed structure combined with
    electric heating means.

    237,    Heating Systems, for the hollow tubing of the bedstead treated as a
    radiator.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, appropriate subclasses, for electrical
    resistors, per se.


CLS 5/285
TXT Subject matter under subclass 279.1 relating to methods and details of
    construction directed to adapting them to be readily assembled or
    disassembled and reduced to compact form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53.1+,  for detachable head or foot boards.

    114,    for knockdown camp beds.

    132,    for separate three-part beds.

    201,    for knockdown bed bottom frames.

    282.1+, for joints and connections.

    288+,   for ordinary detachable corner fastenings.


CLS 5/286
TXT Devices under subclass 279.1 comprising special construction of the side
    rails, including trussing and bracing.


CLS 5/287
TXT Devices under subclass 286 comprising short rails for coupling the head and
    foot boards together for exhibition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 13.1, 27 and 28 for stands for
    exhibiting bedsteads.


CLS 5/288
TXT Devices under subclass 279.1 to connect the side rails detachably to the
    corner posts or the head and foot boards.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132,    for three part structures.

    178+,   for foldably-connected rails.


CLS 5/289
TXT Devices under subclass 288 attached to the post to serve as means for
    connecting with the engaging element of the side rail.


CLS 5/290
TXT Devices under subclass 288 comprising box-like structures attached to a
    bedpost to serve as a means of rail attachment.


CLS 5/291
TXT Devices under subclass 288 in which the rail carries a box-like device
    intended to fit closely against the post and inclose and conceal the
    fastening means, or a hood to slip down over a projection on the post.


CLS 5/292
TXT Devices under subclass 288 in which the end rail and the side rail at any
    corner both enter the corner post and mutually engage.


CLS 5/293
TXT Devices under subclass 288 in which the post is provided with a
    horizontally-projecting stub which enters a hollow in the rail.


CLS 5/294
TXT Devices under subclass 288 in which the post carrier a fixed hooklike
    element with which the rail engages.


CLS 5/295
TXT Devices under subclass 288 in which the post is provided with a plurality
    of upwardly and the rail with a plurality of downwardly projecting fingers
    for interengagement.


CLS 5/296
TXT Devices under subclass 288 in which the rail carries a fixed hook which
    enters the post and engages an element within or engages an extension on
    the post.


CLS 5/297
TXT Devices under subclass 288 in which the rail and post are connected by a
    pivoted swinging hook.


CLS 5/298
TXT Devices under subclass 288 in which the rail and post are connected by a
    horizontal bar or its equivalent and are drawn together by suitable means,
    usually a cam, screw or wedge.


CLS 5/299
TXT Devices under subclass 288 in which the projections forward of the post or
    rail enter keyhole slots or bayonet slots on the other member.


CLS 5/300
TXT Devices under subclass 288 in which a part on the rail and a part on the
    post form together a dovetail joint.  In some cases the rail may be
    reversed, and in others a third element forms part of the dovetail
    connection.


CLS 5/301
TXT Devices under subclass 288 comprising rails provided with means to clamp
    about the corner posts.


CLS 5/302
TXT Devices under subclass 288 in which post and rails carry means
    interengageable by giving the rails a rotary movement.


CLS 5/303
TXT Devices under subclass 288 comprising rails and posts engaged by means of
    pins inclined and engaging in orifices or by pintles, as in a hinge.  The
    connection may be either rigid or pivoted.


CLS 5/304
TXT Devices under subclass 288 comprising a projection from the post passing
    under and parallel to the upper flange of the side rail to form a support
    for it.  Further retaining means of any type may be employed.  In
    reversible forms the flange in one position may be below the bracket.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291,    for rail boxes and hoods.

    293,    for rails entering post stubs.


CLS 5/305
TXT Devices under subclass 279.1 attached to or forming part of the bedstead
    for the special purpose of further bracing and strengthening it,
    particularly to keep the rails from spreading and allowing the bottom to
    fall out.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207+    and 238, for a bed bottom so supported as to brace the frame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 440, for legs connected by braces, and subclass
    440 for a plural leg stand or stool wherein the support surface and legs
    are connected by braces.


CLS 5/306
TXT Devices under subclass 305 comprising cable systems connected with various
    parts of the bedstead and having a take-up means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212,    for cord take-up means.


CLS 5/307
TXT Devices under subclass 305 employing systems of oblique links.


CLS 5/308
TXT Devices under subclass 279.1 comprising drawers and the like attached to or
    inserted in some part of the bed structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.1+,   for drawers in combination furniture; mere insertion of a drawer in
    some unused space about the bedstead is insufficient to carry the device to
    that subclass (2).

    58,     for drawers in sofa beds.


CLS 5/309
TXT Devices under subclass 279.1 comprising special buffing and antinoise
    devices for all parts of beds and special employments of rubber as an
    elastic and buffing agent in the same.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     164.1+ and 165, for springs to cushion shock and assist in moving
    parts.


CLS 5/310
TXT Devices under subclass 279.1 comprising legs applied to any type bed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110+,   for cots having detachable legs.

    114,    for knockdown camp beds.

    285,    for knockdown bedsteads.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 188.1+ for legs for a stool, stand or the like.


CLS 5/311
TXT Devices under subclass 310 disappearing by sliding into a hole or
    receptacle, together with locks for the same.


CLS 5/312
TXT Devices under subclass 310 which are pivoted with their operating and
    controlling means.


CLS 5/313.1
TXT Link control:
    Device under subclass 312 comprising an elongated coupling means for
    limiting or regulating the extent that a leg may pivot.


CLS 5/314.1
TXT Slot with shoulder:
    Device under subclass 312 comprising pivot limiting means which is
    pivotally slidable within a slit having an abutment associated therewith
    for locating and limiting movement of a leg.


CLS 5/315.1
TXT Latch:
    Device under subclass 312 comprising pivot limiting means which utilizes a
    catch to hold the leg in position.


CLS 5/315.2
TXT Spring actuated:
    Device under subclass 315.1 comprising a catch having a resilient energy
    storage means for operating the catch mechanism.


CLS 5/316
TXT Devices under subclass 312 comprising jointed or folding braces for
    positioning the legs, usually with means for holding the brace extended.


CLS 5/400
TXT Having bottom:

    Bedstead under subclass 131 including a support surface mounted on a rigid
    frame which is attached to the bedstead, the surface being adapted to
    support a mattress, cushion, or the like.


CLS 5/401
TXT And integral pad:

    Bottom under subclass 400 including a compressible mat (e.g., mattress
    cushion, etc.) for supporting the body of a person, the mat and the bottom
    combined as a unitary structure.


CLS 5/402
TXT Having upholstery cover on pad and means to secure cover to pad or bottom:

    Bottom under subclass 401 which additionally has a flexible wrapper
    covering the mat, and a fastening arrangement for holding the wrapper on
    the mat or bottom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    737,    for a mattress or cushion, per se, which has a primary cover and
    means to secure the cover thereon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 712+ for a drawstring or
    laced-fastener.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 382+
    for devices for fastening one edge of a fabric to a frame.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 81+ for metallic springs and superposed
    nonmetallic padding.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 452.16+ for an upholstered chair seat
    and back.


CLS 5/403
TXT By wedge or clamp:

    Bottom under subclass 402 wherein the cover is attached to the pad or
    bottom by means of a tapered wedge-shaped member and corresponding slot or
    a clamping means.

    (1)     Note.  A mere nail, screw, staple, etc., is not considered to be a
    clamp for this subclass and will be found in subclasses 409 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402+,   for the cover connected to the frame by tensioned hooks which are
    connected to the frame when the cushion springs are depressed an abnormal
    amount.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 382+,
    particularly subclasses 391+ for clamps or clasps fastening an edge of a
    fabric to a frame element.


CLS 5/404
TXT Spring clamp:

    Bottom under subclass 403 wherein the clamping means includes a yieldable
    portion which resiliently urges the cover into contact with the mat or
    bottom.


CLS 5/405
TXT With means to urge opposed clamping surfaces together:

    Bottom under subclass 403 wherein a separate element or mechanism is
    provided to force cover-contacting surfaces of the clamping member toward
    each other.


CLS 5/406
TXT Deformable clamp and bead:

    Bottom under subclass 403 wherein the cover is held in place by the
    coaction of a deformable member and a bead or thickened portion of the
    cover.

    (1)     Note.  Such bead or thickened portion may be an integral part of
    the cover, such as a rolled and seamed edge, or may be an addition thereto,
    such as the cover edge being wrapped around a strand of rope or metal rod.


CLS 5/407
TXT Beads is in or part of cover:

    Bottom under subclass 406 wherein the bead or thickened portion of the
    cover is formed integrally with the cover or otherwise attached thereto
    prior to the assembly of the cover on the pad or bottom.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is the core contained in a hem of
    the cover.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclass 387 for
    similar construction where a flexible panel is held to a frame.


CLS 5/408
TXT By tufting:

    Bottom under subclass 402 wherein the cover is held on one surface of the
    mat by a plurality of individual filaments, each secured at one of their
    ends to the cover at spaced points, extending through the mat, and secured
    at their opposite ends to either the bottom or the cover extending under
    the bottom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    696,    for an upholstered mattress or cushion alone to which the
    upholstery is fastened by tufting.


CLS 5/409
TXT By cover-penetrating fastener:

    Bottom under subclass 402 in which the cover is attached thereto by a
    piercing member which passes through the cover.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    405,    for cover-penetrating fasteners with tacking strips, and see (1)
    Note to this subclass (405) for the line.


CLS 5/410
TXT Bottom-carried impaling prong:

    Bottom under subclass 409 wherein the supporting frame includes or has
    mounted thereon pins which pierce the cover to thereby secure the cover to
    the frame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel subclasses 398
    and 400 for means which include pointed piercing elements to fasten an edge
    of a fabric to a frame.


CLS 5/411
TXT And removable mattress or cushion, and means to fix its position on the
    bottom:

    Bottom under subclass 400 having an independent compressible pad which is
    adapted to lie on and conform to the bottom, and is intended to yieldingly
    support a person's body, and structure adapted to releasably secure the pad
    in place upon the bottom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18.1+,  for flappers in connection with a mechanism for extending a section
    and for guards to prevent lateral slipping of the mattress.


CLS 5/412
TXT Movable relative to bedstead:

    Structure under subclass 400 wherein the bottom can be tilted or otherwise
    shifted while the bedstead remains stationary.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for a bed with a bottom whose height can be adjusted while it
    remains horizontal.


CLS 5/413
TXT SLEEPING BAG WITH OR RECEIVING BED OR TENT STRUCTURE:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a sacklike structure
    which encloses a person's body, generally to contain heat, during a period
    of inactivity, such as slumber and napping.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are sleeping bags combined with
    structure found elsewhere in this class (e.g., mattress, pillow, etc.),
    combined with tent structure (e.g., canopy, framework, window, etc.), or
    having a pocket which will accept such structure.

    (2)     Note.  Sleeping bags in this subclass are of the type intended for
    use outdoors and usually have an inner layer of material, an outer layer of
    material specially adapted to resist the effects of weather and terrain,
    and an intermediate filling which thermally insulates the interior of the
    bag from its exterior.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 69.5 for a baglike garment or a garment useable
    as a sleeping bag.

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 873+ for restrainers of the garment type for a
    sleeping patient.


CLS 5/414
TXT MODIFIED FOR MOSQUITO NET OR CANOPY:

    Bed under the class definition requiring structural alteration of the
    bedstead (e.g., longer headboard posts) for (a) a protective sheetlike
    structure mounted above the bed, generally for aesthetic purposes, or (b)
    an open weave-type enclosure, generally to allow breathing, over and around
    the bed to deter insects.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    413,    for a sleeping bag.

    419,    for a ground mat with a sun shade.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclass 96 for canopies combined
    with a bed.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclasses 185 and 186+ for
    body-attached umbrellas and canopies.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 534+ for a bracket-type supporting device
    having means for receiving a staff, which staff may be a support for a
    mosquito net or canopy.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 184.1+ for a chair provided with a net
    or canopy.


CLS 5/415
TXT Actuated by folding of bed:

    Sheet or enclosure under subclass 414 connected with the bed in such a
    manner that it is moved into or out of position as some part of the bed is
    drawn together or separated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or  Canes, subclass 88 for bicycle canopies.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 31 for a vehicle convertible to a cradle or
    crib.


CLS 5/416
TXT On baby carriage or carrier:

    Device under subclass 414 in which the bed is part of an open-topped
    vehicle adapted to transport an infant, and the device is adapted to cover
    or enclose the open top of the vehicle.


CLS 5/417
TXT GROUND MAT:

    Subject matter under the class definition consisting of a sheet or pad
    adapted to be placed in direct contact with the ground or a floor, upon
    which a person may recline and remain isolated from the underlying surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 3+ for article or
    material supported covers.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 32.6 for a wheeled repairman's creeper.


CLS 5/418
TXT With sun shade:

    Ground mat under subclass 417 combined with a means to shield at least a
    part of an occupant from the sun's rays.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    414,    for canopies.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclasses 87+ for a canopy.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclass 184.1 for a canopy or screen.


CLS 5/419
TXT Having head rest:

    Ground mat under subclass 417 which includes an additional means to support
    an occupant's head.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    636+,   for pillow-type, per se.


CLS 5/420
TXT Padded:

    Ground mat under subclass 417 which includes a layer of soft, shock
    absorbent material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    948+,   for unconventional filler materials used as supporting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclass 129 for a kneeling pad
    combined with a receptacle as for soap or tools; and subclass 230 for
    kneeling pad, per se.


CLS 5/421
TXT WITH HEATING OR COOLING:

    Subject matter under the class definition combined with a source of, or a
    sink for, thermal energy so associated with a bed as to affect the
    temperature felt by a person in the bed.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass receives patents claiming bed related
    structure combined with nonelectric heating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284,    for a heating or cooling device incorporated in the bedstead.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, for cooling, generally.

    165,    Heat Exchange, for heating and cooling.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 217 for a bed or bed related structure
    combined with electric heating means.

    432,    Heating, for heating, generally.


CLS 5/422
TXT With heating or cooling means:

    Waterbed or associated device under subclass 665 having means to heat the
    user or the waterbed.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass receives patents claiming bed related
    structure combined with nominal recitation of a heater or heating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284,    for a heating or cooling device incorporated in a bedstead.

    421+,   for heating and cooling devices for subject matter under the class
    definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 259.1+ for cooling devices of structural
    installation.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 46 for flexible cover type.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 217, combined with bed, and subclasses
    527 and 528 for body supporting frame and flexible support.


CLS 5/423
TXT And means to force air:

    The combination of subclass 421 including means to artificially cause
    movement of heated or cooled air between the interior and exterior of the
    body support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    652.2,  for cushion supports with forced ventilation.

    713+,   for air mattresses that may incidentally ventilate a user.

    726,    for a mattress with forced ventilation.

    941,    for blankets that provide a forced air flow to a user.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclass 180.13 for seats and chairs ventilated
    with forced air.


CLS 5/424
TXT HAVING SAFETY DEVICE:

    Subject matter under the class definition including an element or assembly
    intended to protect a person from injury while using the bed or to prevent
    him from rolling out of bed.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are devices which restrain
    movement of the person but do not cover him as a blanket or sheet would.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    494,    for bed clothing which has means to maintain the clothing over the
    person.

    621+,   for a body member restraining means on a surgical table.

    945,    for inflatable baby supports that have inflatable peripheral guards.

    946,    for crib bumpers.


CLS 5/425
TXT Side guard:

    Safety device under subclass 424 which includes at least one rail or planar
    surface situated at a side of the bed, adapted to prevent a person using
    the bed from rolling out.

    (1)     Note.  Mere padded bumpers designed to prevent injury, but not
    intended to keep one from rolling out of bed, will be found in subclass 424
    above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    for a guard which is a part of the enclosing structure of the crib
    made movable.

    732,    for mattresses with a nonplanar top surface that defines at least
    one sideguard.

    945,    for inflatable baby supports that have inflatable peripheral guards.

    946,    for crib bumpers.


CLS 5/426
TXT Secured between mattress and bed bottom: Device under subclass 425 wherein
    the side guard is mounted on a support structure which includes at least
    one element sandwiched between a mattress and bed bottom.


CLS 5/427
TXT Flexible:

    Device under subclass 425 wherein that portion of the side guard which is
    contacted by the person using the bed is bendable.


CLS 5/428
TXT Adjustable in place:

    Device under subclass 425 wherein the side guard can be moved to a
    plurality of positions relative to the bed without detaching it from the
    bed.


CLS 5/429
TXT Telescoping:

    Device under subclass 428 wherein the side guard is constructed of a
    plurality of tubular elements, one with another, so it can be adjusted by
    sliding one element within another element.


CLS 5/430
TXT Pivoting:

    Device under subclass 428 wherein the side guard is connected to the bed
    along an axis about which it rotates to a plurality of positions.


CLS 5/482
TXT BEDCLOTHING:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to an article adapted to
    be selectively applied to a mattress or other bed structure to accommodate
    an occupant, for covering the occupant, or for decoration or protection of
    the bed structure, such as mattress pads or covers, sheets, blankets,
    pillowcases, shams, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Art in this class requires some structural modification to
    materials to adapt them for body support.  The mere recitation of a
    support, wherein the novelty resides in a chemical composition for the
    support, would not suffice for inclusion in this class; it would place the
    application in the appropriate composition art area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    636+,   for pillow-type structures.

    652+,   for pillow structure.

    669,    for bedclothes useful with waterbeds.

    690+,   for a mattress or cushion structure.

    737+,   for mattress covers.

    948+,   for unconventional filler materials used as supporting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 212 for blankets or other bed covering
    with electric heater.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 218.1+ for an upholstery cover
    detachably connected to a chair or seat frame; and subclasses 219.1+ for a
    slip cover for a chair or seat.


CLS 5/483
TXT Fireproof:

    Bed clothing under subclass 482 of which at least a part is resistant to
    burning.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    698,    for fireproof mattresses.

    954,    for fireproof or fire resistant materials.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, digest 5 for chairs and seats with fireproof
    components.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 443+ for
    composite laminate including asbestos and subclasses 920+ for fire or heat
    protection feature.


CLS 5/484
TXT Waterproof:

    Bed clothing under subclass 482 of which at least a part is resistant to
    passage of liquid therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    699,    for waterproof mattresses.

    737+,   for mattress covers.

    939,    for microporous materials.


CLS 5/485
TXT Having pocket:

    Bed clothing under subclass 482 which includes a portion which, after
    installation, is adapted to receive a disparate article, e.g., pillow,
    heater, etc.


CLS 5/486
TXT One section being adjustable or having characteristics which differ
    relative to another section:

    Bed clothing under subclass 482 made up of a plurality of distinguishable
    sections, one section being adjustable relative to another section to
    accommodate the comfort of each of several occupants, one section having
    physical characteristics which are different from another section to
    accommodate the comfort of various body regions of an individual occupant.


CLS 5/487
TXT Disposable:

    Bed clothing under subclass 482 at least part of which is intended to be
    thrown away after use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    951,    for plant derived filler compositions.


CLS 5/488
TXT And means to facilitate changing thereof:

    Bedclothes under subclass 482 additionally having a device which assists in
    the removal of soiled clothing or the installation of fresh clothing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    692,    for a mattress, per se, which is so constructed as to facilitate
    changing the bed clothing.


CLS 5/489
TXT For dressing pillow:

    Bed clothing under subclass 488 wherein the device is adapted to assist the
    changing of a pillow cover.


CLS 5/490
TXT Pillow cover:

    Bed clothing under subclass 482 comprising a case or slip for a
    head-supporting structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    636,    for pillow type structures.


CLS 5/491
TXT Pillow sham:

    Bed clothing under subclass 482 comprising a roll or other arrangement of
    material adapted to simulate a head support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partitions, or Panel, appropriate
    subclasses for pillow shams of the flexible or portable-panel type (a)
    having no features of structure of the bed and (b) having no relationship
    between the pillow sham and bed in addition to the mere fact that it is
    mounted on a bed.


CLS 5/492
TXT And holder:

    Pillow sham under subclass 491 including means for securing it in position
    on the bed.


CLS 5/493
TXT Valance:

    Bed clothing under subclass 482 including a skirt or frill adapted to
    depend from bed structure for the purpose of ornamentation or concealment.


CLS 5/494
TXT Having means to engage body of user or bed structure to ensure proper
    covering of body:Bed clothing under subclass 482 having a belt, harness, or
    other securing device attached to the article of clothing and adapted to
    engage either a person's body or the bed structure, but not both, so as to
    maintain the article over the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    411,    for means holding a mattress or cushion on a bottom.

    413+,   for a sleeping bag combined with bed structure.

    424+,   for a device attached to a bed which constrains a person to the bed
    surface itself.

    498,    for means holding the bed clothes to the bed structure, but not
    engaging the person's body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 69.5 for sleeping bags and bag-type garments
    including those combined with sheetlike devices; and subclass 114 for other
    garments combined with sheetlike devices.

    128,    Surgery, subclass 872 for cribs blankets, sheets and covers
    engaging a body and the bed to secure a sleeper, and subclass 873 for
    sleeping bags secured to a bed.


CLS 5/495
TXT Sheet:

    Bed clothing under subclass 482 comprising a thin layer of material adapted
    to directly overlay or to directly underlay an occupant of the bed.


CLS 5/496
TXT Having manipulable fastening means:

    Sheet under subclass 495 which has manually operated means to fix the sheet
    in place on a mattress or cushion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    504.1,  for supports useable to attach bedclothing to a bed.

    669,    for bedclothes for waterbeds.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 72.5 for bedclothes
    holders.


CLS 5/497
TXT Contoured or fitted:

    A sheet under subclass 495 having a corner which is preformed to surround
    the corner of a mattress or cushion.


CLS 5/498
TXT And means to hold clothes in position on bed:

    Bed clothing under subclass 482 including a device by which the bed
    clothing is secured to a mattress or other bed structure, so that it is
    maintained in place on the bed structure when the bed is upended, folded,
    etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 72.5 for bedclothes
    holders.


CLS 5/499
TXT Adapted to contact mattress:

    Bed clothing under subclass 482 which when installed, directly engage the
    mattress.


CLS 5/500
TXT Multilayer:

    Bedclothing under subclass 499 including more than one thickness of
    material, e.g., mattress pad, etc.


CLS 5/501
TXT And protector therefor:

    Bedclothing under subclass 482 and a cover for the bedclothing itself to
    prevent it from becoming soiled.


CLS 5/502
TXT Multilayer:

    Bedclothing under subclass 482 including more than one thickness of
    materials, e.g., a comforter, quilt, etc.


CLS 5/503.1
TXT RECEPTACLE OR SUPPORT FOR USE WITH BED:
    Subject matter under the class definition for use with a bed comprising
    either (a) an enclosure or prop for holding a particular article in
    position relative to the bed, (b) an enclosure for holding the bed itself,
    (c) a rack for bed clothes, or (d) a handhold or similar device for aiding
    movement of a person not in the bed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.1+,   for a unitary structure containing a bed and some other article of
    furniture.

    159.1,  for the combination of a case and an upending bed.

    630+,   for a support for the body of a person in the bed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, appropriate subclasses for racks of general
    utility, although attached to beds.


CLS 5/504.1
TXT To support or attach bedclothes:
    Support under subclass 503.1 adapted to hold an article of bedclothing
    either when it is not installed on the bed or to impart a desired
    configuration to it when it is installed.

    (1)     Note.  The props in this subclass include supports that are useful
    in removably attaching bedclothes or the like to a mattress or the like.


CLS 5/505.1
TXT Above body of person using bed:
    Support under subclass 504.1 which holds the bedclothing over a person in
    bed in such a manner as to keep the weight of the bedclothing off of the
    person.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    669,    for bedclothes for waterbeds.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 72.5 for bedclothes
    holders.


CLS 5/506.1
TXT For airing thereof:
    Support under subclass 504.1 including a rack which elevates the bedclothes
    above the bed surface when the bed is not being used and holds them
    separated so that the clothes can be freshened by the passage of air
    thereover.


CLS 5/507.1
TXT Planar support (e.g., table, step, etc.):
    Support under subclass 503.1 having a flat surface adapted to support
    either an article (e.g., book, writing paper, etc.) in a position making it
    accessible to a person in the bed or support a person entering or leaving,
    but not in, the bed.

    (1)     Note.  A table in this subclass is attached to the bed in such a
    way as to modify the bed structure.  This modification could be relatively
    substantial, or it could be as little as forming bolt or screw holes in the
    bed frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3+,     for tables convertible to beds.

    95+,    for bedstead attached cribs.


CLS 5/509.1
TXT For tilting of bed:

    Devices under subclass 658 separate from and attachable to a bed to lift or
    support one end of the bed from the floor and give the whole bed an
    inclination.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11      and 311+, for a similar device which is integral with the bed.

    170+,   for upending bed carriers some of the above jacks are available for
    this purpose.


CLS 5/510
TXT To facilitate moving of bed:

    Device under subclass 658 used in conjunction with a bed to aid in
    transporting the entire bed upon its supporting surface.

    (1)     Note.  A device in this subclass generally comprises a roller, but
    this subclass excludes ordinary casters, per se, as such devices will be
    found in appropriate subclasses in Class 16.


CLS 5/511
TXT And guide therefor (e.g., track, etc.):

    Device under subclass 510 and a mechanism associated with the transporting
    device determining the course over which the bed moves, and constraining it
    to that course.


CLS 5/512
TXT Screen which is attached to periphery of bed:

    Device under subclass 658 which includes a flat, vertically extending
    surface attached to the side of the bed to isolate a person in the bed from
    the other side of the device.

    (1)     Note.  The screen may simply protect the person's privacy, or it
    may isolate the person from a condition existing in the bed's environment,
    e.g., air movement, light, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97,     for a closed crib.

    113,    for a canopied camp bed.

    121,    125 and 128, for a canopied hammocks.

    414+,   for a bed with a mosquito net or canopy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclasses 121+, especially
    subclass 161 for canopies attached to disparate articles.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, appropriate
    subclasses for a device of that class capable of being used with but not
    attached to a bed.


CLS 5/513
TXT Partition for bed surface:

    Device under subclass 658 including a planar element adapted to be
    installed on the bed so as to divide the bed into a plurality of sections
    so the bed will accommodate more than one person with the planar element at
    least partially separating the persons.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, appropriate
    subclass for a device of that class not attached to a bed.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclass 153
    for a breath deflector carried by a person's body.


CLS 5/600
TXT INVALID BED OR SURGICAL SUPPORT:
    Subject matter under the class definition providing a support surface for
    substantially the whole body of a user, either in repose or while being
    examined or treated.

    (1)     Note.  While the body supported on the support surface of the
    devices of this and indented subclasses is the body of an invalid or
    patient, supports for a cadaver or the body of an animal being examined or
    treated are also included in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  While the devices of this subclass and indented subclasses
    are generally used for invalid support, they can be used for supporting
    healthy users.  For example, the sectional devices of subclasses 617+ can
    be used by a healthy user as a comfortable support for television viewing.

    (3)     Note.  The devices of this subclass and indented subclasses
    generally include a substructure such as a frame, upon which a body
    supporting pad is placed to cushion the substructure.  A mere pad or
    cushion that is removably positionable on an understructure, would be
    considered a mattress or cushion, to be placed in Class 5, subclasses 652+
    or 690+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    625,    for field stretchers adapted for the transport of a nonambulatory
    user.

    634+,   for support means for discrete portion(s) of a user, useable with a
    bed or surgical support.

    943,    for devices that have a supporting top surface that is
    longitudinally or laterally movable relative to a supporting base and
    returnable to its initial position which is centered relative to its
    supporting base.

    944,    for supports with upstanding, firm massaging projections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 1+ for a
    horizontal planar supporting surface which provides a tiltable supporting
    surface.


CLS 5/601
TXT Adapted for imaging (e.g., X-ray, MRI):
    Subject matter under subclass 600 in which the body support is specially
    adapted to support a user while being examined or treated with
    electgromagnetic radiation, ultrasonic, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Body supports with which gamma rays, radiation or other rays
    analogous to X-rays are used, are included in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass excludes body supports in which the source of
    the radiation or the detection means for the radiation is claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    943,    for devices that have a supporting top surface that is
    longitudinally or laterally movable relative to a supporting base and
    returnable to its initial position which is centered relative to its
    supporting base.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray  Systems or Devices, appropriate subclasses, and
    especially subclass 209, for body supports useful with radiation systems.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 410+ for magnetic resonance imaging and
    subclasses 437+ for ultrasonic imaging.


CLS 5/602
TXT Adapted for birthing:
    Subject matter under subclass 600 in which the body support is specially
    adapted to support a female during parturition.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes devices which in addition to
    facilitating birthing, will support a female user to facilitate obstetric
    examination or treatment.


CLS 5/603
TXT Adapted for infant support:
    Subject matter under subclass 600 in which the body support is specially
    adapted to support a child of early years.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93.1+,  for cribs that are supports with sideguards for healthy infants.

    101+,   cradles that are supports with rocking means for healthy infants.

    655,    for supports other than cribs or surgical supports, such as diaper
    changing tables, for healthy infants.


CLS 5/604
TXT Having toilet means:
    Subject matter under subclass 600 in which a mattress or pad supporting
    structure, are specially adapted to collect solid or liquid human waste, or
    are provided with a bedpan or toilet means.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass require a mattress or pad
    supporting structure, not merely a mattress or pad, per se, resting on a
    support structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    606,    for invalid beds or surgical supports that are specially adapted to
    lead away liquids from a body supporting surface.

    695,    for mattresses adapted to be supported on conventional bedsteads
    that have a pocket adapted to receive a toilet receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, appropriate subclasses for
    toilet structures and bedpans, per se.


CLS 5/605
TXT Having flushing means:
    Subject matter under subclass 604 in which the toilet is provided with
    evacuation means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, appropriate subclasses for
    flush toilets, per se.


CLS 5/606
TXT Having drain means:
    Subject matter under subclass 600 provided with means to facilitate the
    disposing or discharging of liquids from the user supporting surface.

    (1)     Note.  The disposed liquid may be body fluids such as blood, or
    water used to wash the supporting surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclass 24 for a
    horizontal planar surface combined with a drain.

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 13+ for devices having a product discharge
    facilitator which includes a receptacle for receiving the product, and
    subclass 15 for a device having a catch pan to collect material falling
    from the work.


CLS 5/607
TXT Tiltable along a longitudinal axis:
    Subject matter under subclass 600 in which the body supporting portion, as
    a whole, is adapted to tilt along its longitudinal axis thereby rotating or
    turning the supported body.

    (1)     Note.  The supported body may be tilted only slightly along the
    longitudinal axis or it may be rotated a full 360 along the longitudinal
    axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    942,    for supports that have longitudinally divided top surfaces with
    pivotable section.


CLS 5/608
TXT And a transverse axis:
    Subject matter under subclass 607 in which the body supporting surface as a
    whole is further adapted to turn along an axis perpendicular to the long
    axis.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes patents that disclose the positioning
    of a body supporting surface on a universal joint or ball and socket joint
    that permits the tilting of the body supporting portion along an infinite
    number of axes in addition to a horizontal and a transverse axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    610,    for body supporting surfaces tiltable only along a transverse axis.


CLS 5/609
TXT With cyclical back and forth turning:
    Subject matter under subclass 607 in which the body supporting surface, as
    a whole is also adapted to rock to and fro along its longitudinal axis.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes bedsore preventing or alleviating
    cyclically tiltable supports, in which the degree or duration of the back
    and forth tilting can be varied.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108     and 109, for cradles that are adapted to rock and infant back and
    forth.


CLS 5/610
TXT Tiltable along a transverse axis:
    Subject matter under subclass 600 in which the body supporting portion, as
    a whole, is adapted to tilt along an axis perpendicular to the longitudinal
    axis of the support thereby rotating or turning a user from a horizontal
    position to an inclined or vertical position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    608,    for devices in which the body supporting surface can turn along a
    longitudinal and transverse axis.


CLS 5/611
TXT Vertically movable support for whole body of user:
    Subject matter under subclass 600 in which the body supporting surface, as
    a whole, is adapted for up and down movement in a vertical plane to raise
    or lower the supported body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for devices, under the class definition, other than invalid beds or
    surgical supports that permit the vertical adjustment of a body supporting
    surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses, for vertically adjustable
    supports of general utility.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 344.12+ for vertically adjustable
    seats.


CLS 5/612
TXT With auxiliary means to raise a portion of user above supporting
    surface:Subject matter under subclass 600 including additional means,
    associated with a main support for the whole body, which is adapted to
    raise a portion of the body of the user relative to the main body support.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes invalid beds or surgical supports
    which have flexible supports, such as straps, a net or a cloth sheet placed
    between the main body support and the user, to raise at least a substantial
    portion of the user's body relative to the main support, to permit
    treatment of the user, or to permit the changing of the bedclothes on the
    main body support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83.1+,  for hoisting devices for invalid lifting.

    621,    for invalid beds or surgical supports with body member supports or
    restrainers.


CLS 5/613
TXT Sectional user supporting surface:
    Subject matter under subclass 600 in which the support surface for
    substantially the whole body of the user is divided into separate, distinct
    sections or segments.

    (1)     Note.  It is often the understructure beneath a pad or cushion that
    supports the user that has an upper surface divided into separate distinct
    sections or segments.

    (2)     Note.  The sections or segments that comprise the support surface
    for substantially the whole body of the user, are often pivotally connected
    to each other and permit the orientation of the user's body to change from
    a generally supine or prone position to a nonlinear position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    690+,   for mattresses or cushions that may be placed on a sectioned
    understructure, and especially subclass 722 for mattresses comprised of a
    plurality of sections which are adapted to be repositioned relative to each
    other.

    942,    for devices that have longitudinally divided top surfaces with
    pivotable sections.

    948+,   for unconventional filler materials used as supporting means.


CLS 5/614
TXT Hydraulically operated:
    Subject matter under subclass 613 in which at least one section of the
    supporting surface is driven by fluid means in motion or under pressure.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes devices in which a hydraulic system,
    such as a fluid operated cylinder, is operatively connected to at least one
    of the sections to move the section, and thereby reposition a user's body.


CLS 5/615
TXT Fluid inflatable bag adjusts position of support section:
    Subject matter under subclass 614 in which the hydraulic means comprises a
    fluid inflatable container with flexible walls operatively connected to a
    section of the support which upon inflation or deflation moves the section.


CLS 5/616
TXT Electrically operated:
    Subject matter under subclass 613 in which a section of the supporting
    surface is moved by a means utilizing electric power.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes devices in which an electrical
    system, such as a screw rotated by an electric motor, is operatively
    connected to at least one of the sections to move the section, to thereby
    reposition the user's body.


CLS 5/617
TXT Upper body portions of user supported by adjustable section:Subject matter
    under subclass 613 in which upper body portions of the user including the
    back, neck and head are supported by a movable section, while lower body
    portions of the user are supported by a stationary section of the sectioned
    body support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    614,    for sectioned invalid beds or surgical supports in which at least
    one section is hydraulically operated.

    616,    for sectioned invalid beds or surgical supports in which at least
    one section is electrically operated.


CLS 5/618
TXT And lower body portions of user supported by adjustable section:Subject
    matter under subclass 617 in which both the upper and lower body sections
    of the user are supported by movable sections.


CLS 5/619
TXT Lower body supporting section segmented longitudinally:
    Subject matter under the subclass 618 in which a lower body supporting
    section is segmented along its longitudinal axis.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes patents in which the lower leg
    supporting section is divided longitudinally in two portions permitting the
    independent adjustment and support of one leg of the user relative to the
    other leg.


CLS 5/620
TXT Knockdown, foldable or specially adapted for portability:
    Subject matter under subclass 600 in which the invalid bed or surgical
    support is constructed to be disassembled, collapsed or relatively adjusted
    in order to be carried or conveyed.

    (1)     Note.  The mere provision of conventional castor wheels or the like
    for an invalid bed or surgical support would not be sufficient to
    classification in this subclass.


CLS 5/621
TXT With body member support or restrainer:
    Subject matter under subclass 600 which the invalid bed or surgical
    support, in addition to supporting the whole body of the user, has an
    attached or integral accessory which is specially adapted to bear, hold or
    immobilize a user's body part, generally for a surgical procedure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    630,    for supports for discrete body portions of a user's that are
    useable with, but not attached to or integral with a bed or surgical
    support.


CLS 5/622
TXT Head or neck:
    Subject matter under subclass 621 in which the body member support or
    restraining accessory is specially adapted to support or restrain the
    user's neck or head.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    636,    for head or neck supports that are useable with, but not attached
    to or integral with a bed or surgical support.


CLS 5/623
TXT Arm or hand:
    Subject matter under subclass 621 in which the body member support or
    restraining accessory is specially adapted to support or restrain the
    user's arm or hand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    646,    for arm or hand supports that are useable with, but not attached to
    or integral with a bed or surgical support.


CLS 5/624
TXT Lower body portion:
    Subject matter under subclass 621 in which body member support or
    restraining accessory is specially adapted to support or restrain the
    user's lower body portions such as the thighs, legs and feet.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes patents in which the soles of the
    feet are supported on a vertical plate attached at the foot end of the body
    support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    610,    for invalid beds or surgical supports that are tiltable along a
    transverse axis, some of which include a vertical plate at the foot end of
    the support, to prevent the sliding of the user's body from the support
    surface, when the support is tilted to a vertical position.


CLS 5/625
TXT FIELD STRETCHER:
    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a support surface
    suspended between rigid handles, or handgrips adapted for the manual
    transport of a nonambulatory occupant (e.g., an invalid, a corpse, or a
    wounded person).

    (1)     Note.  Devices in this subclass must be adapted, usually by the
    provision of handles or handgrips to be lifted or carried by a person.  A
    wheeled body supporting structure, that is rolled on its wheels, and is not
    carried or lifted at least some of the time by a person will not be
    classified in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110+,   for cot structure.

    494,    for sheet arrangements to hold the invalid to the stretcher.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, appropriate subclasses, and
    especially subclasses 157+ for carriers for persons.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 140 for
    carriers for persons.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclass 20 for a stretcher
    combined with a supporting wheeled frame.


CLS 5/626
TXT Combined or convertible:
    Subject matter under subclass 625 either in combination with matter
    properly classifiable in another class, or with devices under the class
    definition such as a body part support or surgical support, or in which
    parts of the stretcher can be relatively adjusted to adapt it for another
    use.


CLS 5/627
TXT Foldable or knockdown:
    Subject matter under subclass 625 in which the stretcher is formed by a
    plurality of elements which can be either disassembled, collapsed, or
    relatively adjusted.

    (1)     Note.  For this subclass, the stretcher parts are manipulated for
    purpose of storage or enhanced usefulness as a stretcher.


CLS 5/628
TXT With restraining means:
    Subject matter under subclass 625 in which the stretcher carries means
    adapted to immobilize a part of the occupant's body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 869+ for strap or harness like arrangements to
    hold an occupant to a supporting surface.


CLS 5/629
TXT With spaced shield:
    Subject matter under subclass 625 in which the stretcher is at least
    partially enclosed by a protective cover which is out of contact with the
    occupant.

    (1)     Note.  Stretchers in which a cover or the like contacts an occupant
    are considered stretchers with restraining means, and are found in subclass
    628.


CLS 5/630
TXT SUPPORT MEANS FOR DISCRETE PORTION OF USER, USEABLE WITH BED OR SURGICAL
    SUPPORT:Subject matter under the class definition providing a surface
    adapted to support only a portion of the total body of a user, said surface
    adapted to be removably attached to or positioned on a device of the class.

    (1)     Note.  Art in this class requires some structural modification to
    materials to adapt them for body support.  The mere recitation of a
    support, wherein the novelty resides in a chemical composition for the
    support, would not suffice for inclusion in this class; it would place the
    application in the appropriate composition art area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    690+,   and especially subclasses 731 through 735, for mattresses, which
    are supports adapted to support the whole body.

    944,    for supports with upstanding, firm massaging projections.

    948+,   for unconventional filler materials used as supporting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 560.1, for
    supports for handling user.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 118+ for head or arm supports of general
    utility.


CLS 5/631
TXT Support for pregnant abdomen:
    Subject matter under subclass 630 especially adapted to support that part
    of a human body lying between the thorax and the pelvis of a pregnant user
    while the female user is being supported on a bed or surgical support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    690,    for pregnant user.

    735,    for mattresses which support the whole body of the user and have on
    their top surface a cavity or indentation (especially adapted to support a
    pregnant woman's abdomen or breasts).


CLS 5/632
TXT Simultaneous support for multiple body portions:
    Subject matter under subclass 630 in which the support means, due to its
    size or configuration is adapted to simultaneously support multiple body
    parts.

    (1)     Note.  The simultaneously supported body parts in this subclass are
    substantially different and spaced from each other, e.g., back and arms, or
    back and legs.  For example, adjacent parts such as head and neck or calf,
    ankle and heel would not be sufficiently different and spaced from each
    other to be classified in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    621+,   for invalid beds or surgical supports that are integral with body
    part supports.

    731+,   for mattresses having nonplanar top surfaces that are especially
    adapted for body part support.


CLS 5/633
TXT For back portions of a user sitting or reclining on bed:
    Subject matter under subclass 632 adapted to support those portions of the
    human body extending from the head to the pelvis when the user is sitting
    up or reclining in a supine position on a bed.

    (1)     Note.  The support can be connected to the headboard of a bed and
    may include a pillow to support a head or a support for the arms.  The
    support may support the entire back portion of the user from the head to
    the pelvis.


CLS 5/634
TXT Having adjustable incline:
    Subject matter under subclass 633 wherein the orientation of the back
    support relative to a horizontal plane can be varied and maintained in
    various portions.


CLS 5/635
TXT Combined with table:
    Subject matter under subclass 633 including a flat horizontal support for
    supporting items for the user of the device or for body portions of the
    user.

    (1)     Note.  Tables may include means to support articles for use by the
    user, or for supporting the arms of the user.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    507.1,  for planar supports attachable to a bed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 148+ for chairs and seats with tables
    attached thereto.


CLS 5/636
TXT For head or neck (e.g., pillow):
    Subject matter under subclass 630 in which the supporting surface sustains
    the users head or neck.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes pillows, surgical supports for the
    head or neck and all other devices adapted to support the head or neck of a
    user in a supine or prone position.

    (2)     Note.  The mere recitation of a "pillow", without further
    structural limitations, followed by composition(s) or filler material(s)
    comprising the pillow would not be enough for inclusion in this subclass.
    Such a device would go to where the filling composition does.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    622,    for invalid beds or surgical supports with integral head supports.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 391+ for chairs and seats which
    include headrests for a seated person.

    D6,     Furnishings, subclass 601 for pillows of special shapes.


CLS 5/637
TXT Adapted to immobilize head or neck:
    Subject matter under subclass 636 having additional means, which restrain
    the head or neck.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass disclose straps, cavities with head
    or neck contacting wall portions, or similar elements which restrain the
    head or neck for a surgical procedure.


CLS 5/638
TXT With means to permit the passage of air for breathing:
    Subject matter under subclass 636 in which the head or neck supporting
    means contains a passage or hole through which a user can breathe, or being
    formed from such material (e.g., low density) that air can readily pass
    therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    725,    for mattresses permitting breathing therethrough.


CLS 5/639
TXT Adapted to accommodate disparate article:
    Subject matter under subclass 636 having means, such as a pocket, cavity or
    supporting portion, adapted to accommodate distinct articles for personal
    use, e.g., hair rollers, sound emitting devices, books, photos, toiletries
    etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    694,    for mattresses with disparate article retaining means.


CLS 5/640
TXT With distinct adjustable parts:
    Subject matter under subclass 636 including different adjustable portions
    which are repositionable relative to each other to change the
    configuration, dimensions or mode of use.

    (1)     Note.  The distinct portions of the support generally change the
    support characteristics of the support or the orientation of the support
    relative to the user.  An appendage such as a strap would not be sufficient
    to bring the device in this subclass.


CLS 5/641
TXT Scent neutralizing or disseminating:
    Subject matter under subclass 636 wherein the head or neck support has
    means to control an unpleasant odor or to emenate a pleasing odor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclass 202.18 for pillows with means affecting
    respiration.


CLS 5/642
TXT Including springs:
    Subject matter under subclass 636 wherein the head or neck supporting means
    has resilient means usually located beneath the supporting surface.

    (1)     Note.  The spring means includes coil springs, torsion bars, leaf
    springs or any deformable materials such as wires or bars that tend to
    return to an undeformed condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    491,    for pillow shams that often include springs.

    716+,   for mattress or cushion which has a spring core.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, for appropriate subclasses for spring devices of
    general utility.


CLS 5/643
TXT With rigid frame or base, or rigidifying or reinforcing means:Subject
    matter under subclass 636 wherein the head or neck support includes an
    inflexible frame or base means for the supporting surface or an element or
    means adapted to rigidify or reinforce the device.


CLS 5/644
TXT Fluent material containing:
    Subject matter under subclass 636 wherein the head or neck support means
    includes a closed or closeable body filled with a flowable material.

    (1)     Note.  The fluent material containing body must not be porous; once
    filled it must stay filled until it is emptied.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    654,    for a support filled with fluent materials.

    655.3,  for a support filled with inflatable materials.

    655.4,  for a support filled with beads.

    655.5,  for a support filled with liquids or gels.

    665+,   for waterbed.

    706+,   for a fluent material filled mattress.

    909,    for supports containing a flowable, viscous (e.g., gel) material.

    911,    for bead containing.


CLS 5/645
TXT Compartmented:
    Subject matter under subclass 636 wherein the head or neck supporting means
    is divided by internal partition(s) into a plurality of compartments.

    (1)     Note.  The compartments often have different filler materials.


CLS 5/646
TXT For arm or hand:
    Subject matter under subclass 630 having means to support a user's upper
    extremities relative to the bed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    623,    for invalid beds or surgical supports with integral supports for
    arms or hands.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 411.1+ for chairs and seats with
    special provisions for supporting a user's arms.


CLS 5/647
TXT Including restraining means:
    Subject matter under subclass 646 having a supporting surface configuration
    or auxiliary means, such as straps, which immobilize or restrain a user's
    arm(s) or hand(s), usually for a surgical procedure.


CLS 5/648
TXT For lower body portions:
    Subject matter under subclass 630 especially adapted to support a user's
    lower extremities.

    (1)     Note.  The patents in the subclass are specifically adapted to
    support the thighs, legs, knees, ankles and feet of a person.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    624,    for invalid beds or surgical supports within integral supports for
    lower body portions and subclass 602 for invalid beds or surgical supports
    especially adapted for birthing or obstetric procedures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 423.1+ for chairs or seats with
    special provisions for supporting a user's lower body portions.


CLS 5/649
TXT Heel stirrups:
    Subject matter under subclass 648 comprising means adapted to support the
    user's heel, usually to facilitate a gynecological examination or a
    surgical procedure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    602,    for supports especially adapted for birthing, which often include
    stirrups.

    624,    for invalid beds or surgical supports with integral supports for
    lower body portions.


CLS 5/650
TXT Including restraining means:
    Subject matter under subclass 648 having a supporting surface configuration
    or auxiliary means, such as straps, which will immobilize or restrain a
    user's lower body portions, usually for a surgical procedure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclass 882 for restrainers or immobilizers adapted to
    support a user's leg or foot.


CLS 5/651
TXT With support for sole of feet:
    Subject matter under subclass 648 including a generally flat surface
    adapted to contact the user's foot sole or bottom portion of feet.


CLS 5/652
TXT SUPPORT FOR USER'S BODY OR PART THEREOF:
    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a supporting device
    which provides a surface to support at least a portion of a user's body.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and its indented subclasses exclude supports
    such as sofa beds, invalid beds, surgical supports, support means for
    discrete portion of a user that are useable with beds or surgical supports,
    field stretchers, cribs, cradles, bedsteads, waterbeds, fluidized beds,
    mattresses, cots, camp beds, hammocks, sleeping bags, ground mats, and
    other devices already provided for in the class.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes "cushions" used to support a user's
    body or part thereof, not already provided for in the class.

    (3)     Note.  Art in this class requires some structural modification to
    materials to adapt them for body support.  The mere recitation of a
    support, wherein the novelty resides in a chemical composition for the
    support, would not suffice for inclusion in this class; it would place the
    application in the appropriate composition art area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    600+,   for invalid beds or surgical supports.

    630+,   for pillow-type support means for discrete body portions of a user,
    useable with a bed or  surgical support.

    690+,   for mattresses.

    944,    for supports with upstanding, firm, massaging projections.

    948+,   for unconventional filler materials used as supporting means.


CLS 5/652.1
TXT Ventilated or permitting substantial air or liquid passage:

    Support for body or part under subclass 652 having an aperture or channel
    permitting the circulation of fluids (such as ambient air or liquids)
    between the interior and the exterior of the support, to enhance the
    comfort of a user.

    (1)     Note.  The aperture or channel means in the support must permit
    substantial movement in and out of the support.  The use of a porous cover
    on a support, or the use of a conventional porous foam as the filler, that
    inherently permit movement of air through their pores, is not sufficient
    for classification in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are supports with slits,
    grooves, or cutouts on a support surface provided for localized altering of
    the firmness of the support.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass includes cushions that permit the draining of
    liquids therethrough, of the type used outdoors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    704,    for mattresses in which the handle means are provided with means
    providing ventilation.

    717,    for spring mattresses that have edge or border features that may
    include ventilating means.

    724+,   for ventilated mattresses.

    730     and 736, for channels, grooves, peaks, or valleys on a mattress top
    surface that may inherently provide a ventilated user supporting top
    surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 180.1+ and 452.42 for ventilated
    chairs and seats.


CLS 5/652.2
TXT With means to force ventilation:

    Ventilated support under subclass 652.1 with a device such as a fan or air
    pump to propel air into and out of the support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    423,    for devices to force heated or cooled air.

    941,    for blankets that provide a forced air flow to a user.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclass 180.13 for seats and chairs ventilated
    with forced air.


CLS 5/653
TXT Removable support specially adapted for seating:
    Subject matter under subclass 652 comprising a portable pad or cushion with
    a supporting surface, which due to its support characteristics,
    construction, shape or size is specially adapted to support a user's
    buttocks in a seated position, with the pad or cushion being removably
    positionable on a chair, wheelchair or similar support.

    (1)     Note.  Art in this class requires some structural modification to
    materials to adapt them for body support.  The mere recitation of a
    support, wherein the novelty resides in a chemical composition for the
    support, would not suffice for inclusion in this class; it would place the
    application in the appropriate composition art area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    690+,   for mattresses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 180.1+ for chairs and seats having
    heating or ventilating means, subclasses 250.1+ for cushions that have
    detachable connection means for attachment to a chair or seat, and
    subclasses 452.21+ for contoured bottoms of chairs or seats.


CLS 5/654
TXT Fluent material containing (e.g., air, water, gel):
    Subject matter under subclass 653 in which the pad or cushion contains a
    flowable material such as a liquid, gas, gel or a plurality of beads.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    644,    for support means useable with beds or surgical supports,
    containing a flowable material.

    655.3,  for supports containing a gas such as air.

    655.4,  for supports containing fluent solid particles.

    655.5,  for supports containing a liquid.

    665+,   for waterbeds, which comprise liquid filled body supports for the
    whole body.

    689,    for fluidized beds.

    702,    for mattresses filled with solid fluent materials.

    706+,   for mattresses filled with a gas such as air.

    909,    for supports containing a fluent material.

    911,    for supports containing beads.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 284.6 and 452.41 for fluent material
    containing and Digest 3, for pneumatic supports.


CLS 5/654.1
TXT With spring means (e.g., coil type):

    Support for body or part under subclass 653 in which the pad or cushion
    containing a potential energy storing device that temporarily compresses
    when a user sits.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    642,    for pillow-type supports that comprise springs.

    652.1,  for ventilated supports that may comprise springs.

    655.7,  for supports that comprise springs.

    716+,   for mattresses that comprise springs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 142+ a for cushion for human comfort.


CLS 5/655
TXT Specially adapted for infant support:
    Subject matter under subclass 652 in which the body supporting surface is
    particularly constructed, shaped or sized to support an infant.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes changing tables and pads that have
    some modification or structure to facilitate the changing of an infant's
    diapers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93.1+,  for cribs.

    101+,   for cradles.

    424+,   for safety devices.

    603,    for invalid beds or surgical supports specially adapted for infant
    support.

    940,    for devices having alarm means that can include alarms detecting
    the removal of an infant from a support, the crying of an infant, or
    temperature changes on an infant support.

    945,    for inflatable baby supports that have inflatable peripheral guards.

    947,    for wall mounted baby changers.


CLS 5/655.3
TXT Inflatable (e.g., air containing):

    Support for body or part under subclass 652 containing or fillable with a
    gas which is usually air.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    644,    for pillow-type supports filled with fluent materials.

    654,    for supports adapted to be seated upon, containing a fluent
    material.

    706+,   for mattresses filled with a gas which is usually air.


CLS 5/655.4
TXT Bead containing:

    Support for body or part under subclass 652 having at least a portion
    thereof filled with a large number of small particles of particulate solid
    material that are adapted to flow relative to one another as a fluent
    material.

    (1)     Note.  The particulate solid material may be sand; spheres of
    plastic, metal, wood, or ceramic; beans; or other similar materials,
    usually enclosed in a container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    644,    for pillow-type supports with fluent materials.

    654,    for supports, especially adapted to be seated on, filled with
    fluent materials.

    702,    for mattresses with solid, fluent materials.

    911,    for devices filled with beads.


CLS 5/655.5
TXT Liquid or gel containing (e.g., water):

    Support for body or part under subclass 652 comprising a wettable fluid
    filler which is usually water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    644,    for pillow-type supports containing a fluent material.

    654,    for supports adapted to be seated on which include a fluent filler.

    665+,   for waterbeds, which comprise liquid filled body support for the
    whole body.


CLS 5/655.6
TXT Tufted:

    Support for body or part under subclass 652 including a plurality of
    connectors, usually in the form of stringlike filaments, generally
    connecting the upper and lower portions of the supports.

    (1)     Note.  Usually a cover encapsulates a support and is secured to the
    support at points spaced apart on the cover's surface by filaments which
    pass from the surface of one side of the cover completely through the
    support to the surface of the cover on the opposite side of the support, to
    keep the support in a compressed state, to thereby prevent loss of shape or
    expansion of the support.

    (2)     Note.  The filaments are often attached to tufting buttons placed
    on the top cover and under the bottom cover of a support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    408,    for a bedstead with a bottom, with a pad connected by tufting.

    712,    for gas containing mattresses having ties or seals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 114.3 for tufting buttons
    and subclass 102 for linked tufting.

    112,    Sewing, subclass 2.2 for a machine to sew tufting, subclass 80.01
    for embroidery tufting, and subclass 470.24 for a tuft making machine.


CLS 5/655.7
TXT Spring containing (e.g., coil type):

    Support for body or part under subclass 652 including at least one
    potential energy storing device that provides substantial support for a
    user and will temporarily compress when a user's weight is placed on the
    support, the support usually comprising an upholstery material such as a
    ticking, and usually including a padding material (e.g., batting or foam)
    above the member and below the ticking.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230+,   239+, and 246+, for a bed bottom disclosing structure framing or
    metallic connections of springs.

    642,    for pillow-type head supports that include springs.

    654.1,  for seat-type supports comprising spring means.

    716+,   for mattresses comprising springs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 142+ for a cushion for human comfort.


CLS 5/655.8
TXT Compartmentalized springs:

    Spring containing support under subclass 655.7 in which the plurality of
    the potential energy storing devices are separated by partitions.

    (1)     Note.  Usually individual or small group of springs are enclosed in
    a clothlike cover to isolate the individual springs or group of springs
    from other springs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    720,    for mattresses having compartmentalized springs.


CLS 5/655.9
TXT With substantial foam component:

    Support for body or part under subclass 652 comprising an ample amount of
    usually resilient expanded cellular material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    630+,   for pillow-type supports that often contain foam.

    690+,   especially subclass 727, for mattresses that often contain foam.

    740,    for mattresses having unusual foam materials or foam configurations.

    953,    for body supports comprising expanded cellular substance(s) having
    unconventional physical or chemical properties.


CLS 5/656
TXT Specially adapted for outdoor use:
    Subject matter under subclass 652 wherein significance is attributed to the
    nature, construction, or materials of the supporting device which specially
    adapted it for use out of doors.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes devices that facilitate the
    suntanning of a user.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes devices adapted to support the head
    of a user in an outdoor setting, while shading at least a part of a user's
    head with a shade or canopy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110+,   for cots.

    112+,   for camp beds.

    119,    for supports attached to the outside of a vehicle.

    120+,   for hammocks.

    413,    for sleeping bags.

    414+,   for devices under the class definition with mosquito nets or
    canopies.

    417+,   for ground mats.

    938,    for devices that include a reflective material which facilitates
    suntanning.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclasses 87+ for a canopy.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclass 184.1 for weather shields.


CLS 5/657
TXT With distinct adjustable supporting parts:
    Subject matter under subclass 652 in which the body supporting device
    presents at least two distinct body supporting surfaces or portions, one of
    which is adjustable relative to the user's body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    613+,   for invalid beds or surgical supports for various adjustable
    support portions.

    722,    for mattresses that have distinct movable sections.


CLS 5/657.5
TXT With edge roll, cord, or welt:

    Support for body or part under subclass 652 including a peripheral ropelike
    reinforcing or decorative means (such as piping) usually associated with a
    covering of the support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    406+,   for pads with covers that have a bead.

    717,    for innerspring core-type mattresses having substantial edge or
    side features.

    739,    for mattresses having substantial means to form or strengthen their
    edges or borders.


CLS 5/658
TXT ATTACHMENT OR ACCESSORY:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein significance is
    attributed to a nonessential article which is especially adapted for use
    with a bed or other device under the class definition.

    (1)     Note.  The devices of this subclass are structurally modified to be
    used with bed or other device under the class definition, or are devices
    that due to their nature are inherently and exclusively used with a bed or
    other device under the class definition.  A mere recitation of utility with
    a bed or other device under the class definition would not be sufficient to
    classify a patent in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    503.1+, for receptacles or supports for use with beds or other devices
    under the class definition.

    904,    905, 907, 908, 915, 916, 931, and other appropriate cross-reference
    art collections for devices in combination with devices under the class
    definition.


CLS 5/659
TXT For placement below a mattress and above its supporting structure (e.g.,
    bed boards):Subject matter under subclass 658 comprising an attachment or
    accessory adapted to be removably positioned between a mattress and its
    supporting structure, for the purpose of altering the support
    characteristics of the mattress.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes bed boards that are generally planar
    and firm elements that are removably positioned below a mattress and above
    its supporting surface (e.g., box spring) for the purpose of improving the
    supporting characteristics of the mattress, as by making the mattress
    firmer.


CLS 5/660
TXT Adapted to incline mattress or portion thereof:
    Subject matter under subclass 659 wherein the attachment removably
    placeable between the mattress and above the supporting structure for the
    mattress is adapted to slant at least a portion of the mattress relative to
    the supporting structure whereby the back portion or the foot portions of
    the user of the mattress are in an inclined position.

    (1)     Note.  The attachments in this subclass include mechanical or
    inflatible devices that can adjustably change the inclination of the
    mattress relative to its supporting structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    634,    for body supports placeable on a mattress or surgical support that
    can support a user's back portions at adjustable inclinations.


CLS 5/661
TXT Extenders for head portion or foot portion of bed:
    Subject matter under subclass 658 comprising attachments which are adapted
    to be removably connected to the head or foot portion of a bed, or other
    device under the class definition, at the same level as the supporting
    surface of the bed, for the purpose of increasing the length of the
    supporting surface to accommodate a user of above normal height.

    (1)     Note.  The attachments in this subclass may be removably connected
    to a mattress or frame portions of a bed, and once connected, increase the
    surface area available to support a user's body.


CLS 5/662
TXT Self-help support, grip or handhold:
    Subject matter under subclass 658 comprising accessories attachable to a
    bed or other device under the class definition for the purpose of aiding a
    user in repositioning himself or herself on the bed surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81.1,   for invalid lifting and transfering devices with which the invalid
    is rerpositioned on a bed or like surface by an attendant such as a nurse.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 576.1, 577.1 for
    hand grips used on bath tubs.


CLS 5/663
TXT Adapted to cover or protect a rail or frame portion of a bed:Subject matter
    under subclass 658 comprising an attachment or accessory that is attached
    or attachable to a frame or rail portion of a bed, or like device, for the
    purpose of guarding the frame or rail from contact with a wall or the like,
    or to guard a user of the bed from being bumped or bruised by the rail or
    frame portion of the bed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    424,    for safety devices in general.

    678+,   for waterbeds that have frames with rail caps.

    909,    for waterbed frames that may have railcaps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 345.1 for bumper or scuff plate used with
    supports of general utility.


CLS 5/665
TXT WATERBED OR ASSOCIATED DEVICE:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a structure, providing
    a flexible supporting surface for substantially the whole body of a user,
    at least a portion of the structure adapted to enclose an amount of liquid,
    and devices associated with such a liquid enclosing structure.

    (1)     Note.  Waterbeds generally comprise a flexible bladder confining a
    liquid, with the bladder supported or surrounded by a frame structure, with
    the bladder adapted to provide a yieldable supporting surface for
    substantially the whole body of a user reclining in a generally horizontal
    position.

    (2)     Note.  Associated devices include structures that are combined with
    waterbeds, or have been significantly modified to be used or useful with
    waterbeds.

    (3)     Note.  A waterproof liner is often placed between a bladder and its
    surrounding frame to collect and contain any liquid that may spill upon the
    rupture of the bladder and would be found in this and indented subclasses.

    (4)     Note.  Waterbeds in which another mattress, such as an air filled
    mattress, is placed permanently or removably on top of the liquid bladder
    to support the user are classified in this and indented subclasses.

    (5)     Note.  Liquid containing supports that do not support substantially
    the whole body of a user are not considered waterbeds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    308,    for bedsteads having receptacles, drawers, or compartments.

    400+,   for bedsteads having a bottom.

    644,    for pillow-type supports containing fluent materials.

    654,    for seat cushions comprising fluent materials.

    655.3,  for inflatable supports (e.g., cushions).

    655.5,  for a liquid or gel containing support for a user's body or part
    thereof.

    706+,   for inflatable mattresses (e.g., air mattresses).

    932,    for seals and sealing methods for plastics.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    60+ for methods of sealing plastic materials.


CLS 5/666
TXT With sound or light means:

    Waterbed or associated device under subclass 665 including a loudspeaker or
    an illumination device.

    (1)     Note.  The loudspeakers associated with the waterbed may, in
    addition to audible sound, produce electromagnetic waves that may be felt
    as vibration by the user of the waterbed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    904,    for a sound emitting device.

    905,    for a light emitting device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclass 130 for illuminating devices useable with a
    bed.


CLS 5/668
TXT With insulating means:

    Waterbed or associated device under subclass 665 with discrete means to
    inhibit or selectively control transfer of thermal energy between a
    waterbed and the user of a waterbed, or between the waterbed and the
    surrounding environment.

    (1)     Note.  The insulating means generally comprise materials such as
    foam, fabric, air filled containers, or other generally poor conductors of
    thermal energy.

    (2)     Note.  Devices whose sole function is to insulate must be present
    for patents in this subclass, not merely conventional frames, bedclothes,
    covers, or liners that inherently have insulating properties.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    700,    for mattresses having insulating means.

    938,    for devices that include reflective materials.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 402+ for
    particulate matter.


CLS 5/669
TXT With bedclothes:

    Waterbeds or associated device under subclass 665 comprising (a) a covering
    sheet, blanket, pillowcase, sham, etc. for the waterbed or the user or (b)
    means to retain a covering sheet relative to the waterbed or user.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    482+,   for bedclothes.

    504.1+, for a support for bedclothes.

    692,    for a mattress having means to facilitate application or retention
    of bedclothes.

    923,    for bedclothes that include hook and loop (e.g., Velcro[) type
    fasteners.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 72.5 to hold bedclothes.


CLS 5/670
TXT With massaging by fluid jet:

    Waterbeds or associated device under subclass 665 having a nozzle-type
    apparatus that forcefully directs liquid or gas, from within the
    water-containing bladder, against the supporting surface of the bladder to
    massage a user.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 541.1+ for means
    to agitate the water in a tub.

    601,    Surgery:  Kinesitherapy, subclasses 154+ for lavative devices.


CLS 5/671
TXT With filling or draining means:

    Waterbeds or associated devices under subclass 665 having means (e.g.,
    valves) to facilitate the insertion or removal of a liquid, into or out of
    the bladder.

    (1)     Note.  A mere conventional valve on the bladder is not sufficient
    to classify a patent in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass receives patents which claim specialized
    valves or ports for the filling or emptying of the bladder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 223+ for inflatable article and subclass
    883 for single inlet and multiple valved outlets.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 65+ for evacuation apparatus, subclass 114 for manipulation of
    flexible or collapsible receiver or supply, subclasses 313+ for filling
    means with flexible or collapsible receiver or receiver coacting means, and
    subclass 382 for flexible hose terminal filling means with receiver
    engaging means.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 61.1 for flexible, expansible
    wall with reciprocating valve actuator and subclasses 129.01+ for
    electrically actuated valves.


CLS 5/672
TXT Including pump means:

    Waterbed filling or draining means under subclass 671 with a fluid moving
    apparatus that facilitates conveying a fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 151+ for jet pump moving one fluid pumped by
    contact or entrainment with another.


CLS 5/673
TXT Including air removal (e.g., burping) means:

    Waterbed filling or draining means under subclass 671 having means to
    release gas that accumulates in a liquid filled bladder.


CLS 5/674
TXT With vibration or wave producing means:

    Waterbeds or associated devices under subclass 665 including an apparatus
    imparting a mechanical movement to the bladder to create an oscillation or
    undulation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    666,    for a wave or vibration imparted to a waterbed bladder through a
    speaker or other electromagnetic radiation emitting means.

    915,    for a vibrating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    601,    Surgery:  Kinesitherapy, subclasses 49+, 86, 90, 98, 115+,  and 146
    for body support vibrator.


CLS 5/675
TXT With decorative means:

    Waterbeds or associated devices under subclass 665 having a primarily
    ornamental feature.

    (1)     Note.  The decorative feature may include (a) a mirror, colored or
    textured panels for the frame portion of the waterbed, or (b) coloring or
    texturing means for the bladder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280,    for decorative structures in a bedstead.

    907+,   for a decorative feature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    D6,     Furnishings, subclasses 382+ for a bed ornamental feature.


CLS 5/676
TXT With highly viscous filler:

    Waterbeds or associated devices under subclass 665 in which the liquid
    within the bladder has more tendency to hold together as it flows (i.e.,
    thicker) or more gel-like than water, for example.

    (1)     Note.  The viscous liquid within the bladder may be water to which
    a viscosity increasing chemical additive has been added or it may be a
    non-aqueous, flowable, high viscosity composition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    655.5,  for liquid or gel containing body support.

    909,    for flowable, viscous (e.g., gel) material containing.


CLS 5/677
TXT With stretchable bladder wall:

    Waterbeds or associated devices under subclass 665 in which the surface
    area of a wall or walls of the structure can increase in size upon a user
    being positioned on the wall and, upon the user withdrawal, the wall or
    walls retract to their original size.

    (1)     Note.  The expandable and retractable walls of the bladder may be
    made from a smooth, homogeneous elastic material, or may be made from a
    material that has expandable folds molded therein.

    (2)     Note.  The elasticity of the top, user supporting surface of the
    bladder may be nonuniform across the top, thereby providing different
    support characteristics for different users utilizing the waterbed.


CLS 5/678
TXT With frame means supporting or surrounding a removable bladder:

    Waterbeds or associated devices under subclass 665 including a boxlike
    construction that holds the liquid enclosing structure above a floor or
    encompasses the liquid enclosing structure perimeter, with the construction
    located outside the liquid enclosing structure.

    (1)     Note.  Frame structures in this subclass are often made of wooden
    boards.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass may include waterproof liners placed between a
    bladder and a frame to contain any liquid that may spill when the bladder
    ruptures.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass may include permanent or removable covers or
    caps for frame elements to cushion hard portions or edges of frames,
    thereby providing a softer, more yielding support for a user.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400+,   for bedsteads having bottoms.

    663,    for structures adapted to cover or protect a rail or frame portion
    of a bed.


CLS 5/679
TXT With pedestal means:

    Waterbed frame under subclass 678 including substantial structural elements
    under the construction supporting or surrounding the bladder, to
    substantially raise the bladder above a supporting floor surface, to
    thereby facilitate access of a user to the bladder.

    (1)     Note.  The pedestal may include wooden boards defining a boxlike
    structure or a wheeled metal subframe that permits the rolling movement of
    the waterbed.


CLS 5/680
TXT Comprising foam:

    Waterbed frame under subclass 678 in which the supporting or surrounding
    construction comprises a substantial amount of a material in a lightweight
    cellular form resulting from introduction of gas bubbles during manufacture.

    (1)     Note.  The foams used with the frames are generally  soft,
    semirigid polymeric foams that provide structural integrity to the frame or
    a soft, yielding surface for the peripheral areas of the bladder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    687,    for waterbeds that may have integral foam peripheral elements that
    do not permit the removal of the bladder.


CLS 5/681
TXT Inflatable (e.g., air frame):

    Waterbed frame under subclass 678 in which at least a portion of the
    construction is expandable with air or gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    687,    for waterbeds that may have integral foam peripheral elements that
    do not permit the removal of the bladder.


CLS 5/682
TXT Having baffle means:

    Waterbeds or associated devices under subclass 665 disclosing the use of
    devices within the bladder which have the function of controlling the
    movement of liquid, or waves within the bladder that are formed when a user
    gets on or off, or moves on the top surface of the bladder.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass must have structural elements that are located
    inside the water filled bladder and may or may not be connected to the
    bladder's inner walls.

    (2)     Note.  The baffles in this subclass generally comprise strips or
    sheets of plastic materials, chunks, or layers of polymeric foams, all
    located within the bladder.


CLS 5/683
TXT Hydraulic chambers:

    Waterbed with baffle under subclass 682 in which the baffle structure
    comprises a plurality of apertured sheets that divide the interior of the
    bladder into a plurality of compartments or enclosures, into and out of
    which liquid enters and exits as a user gets on or off, or  moves on  the
    top, supporting surface of the bladder.


CLS 5/684
TXT Fiber containing:

    Waterbed with baffle under subclass 682 in which the baffle structure
    comprises a slender and greatly elongated natural or synthetic filament.

    (1)     Note.  The fibrous material is usually manmade and permits movement
    of water in the space between the strands of fibrous material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 357+ for
    coated or structurally defined flake, particle, cell, strand, strand
    portion, rod, filament, macroscopic fiber, or mass thereof.


CLS 5/685
TXT Having plural, distinct removable bladders:

    Waterbeds or associated devices under subclass 665 comprising at least two
    individual liquid enclosing structures that together define a supporting
    surface for a user, with at least one of the structures replaceable.

    (1)     Note.  The plurality of individual bladders are generally adjacent
    to each other and are individually fillable to a desired degree to provide
    a nonuniform supporting surface across the top portion of the waterbed.


CLS 5/686
TXT Integral, unitary bladder structure:

    Waterbeds or associated devices under subclass 665 in which the liquid
    enclosing structure is one baglike container.


CLS 5/687
TXT With side or internal chamber or bladder:

    Waterbed with unitary bladder under subclass 686 in which the user
    supporting liquid enclosing structure has a surrounding or internal air or
    other fluid containing compartment that is integral with the structure, or
    in which the liquid enclosing structure is divided by an air or other fluid
    containing compartment into separate and distinct compartments that cannot
    be removed or replaced relative to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    680+,   for waterbeds that may have foam or inflatable peripheral elements,
    in which the bladder is removable from the peripheral elements.


CLS 5/688
TXT With corner reinforcing means:

    Waterbed with unitary bladder under subclass 686 in which a 90# portion of
    the bladder perimeter is strengthened to prevent rupture of the bladder.

    (1)     Note.  The corner areas may be reinforced by sealingly attaching
    additional layers of plastic materials to the corners of the bladder.

    (2)     Note.  The corner reinforcing means may be rough or textured
    materials that have the additional function of gripping and retaining
    bedclothes between a bladder and a frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    739,    for mattresses that have means to form or strengthen the edge,
    border, or corner of the mattress.


CLS 5/689
TXT FLUIDIZED BED:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a supporting surface
    for the whole body of a user in which at least a part of the supporting
    surface is provided by a pressurized stream of gas, usually air, or by a
    very large number of small, solid particulate material (e.g., beads) that
    are at least temporarily lifted and kept in a suspended fluidized state by
    a pressurized stream of gas and device associated with such supporting
    surface.

    (1)     Note.  The particulate, solid fluidizable beads may be spheres of
    plastic, metal, ceramic, wood, sand, or other materials, in sizes and
    shapes that are fluidizable by a stream of pressurized gas.

    (2)     Note.  The fluidizable beds of this subclass are often used to
    support burn victims or are used to prevent or treat bed sores.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    652.2,  for supports for a user's body or part thereof (e.g., cushions)
    containing beads.

    702,    for mattresses containing fluent particulate solid fillers (e.g.,
    beads).

    940,    for microporous covers that permit the passage of air, but not of
    solids such as beads.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 883 for system with flow control means for
    branched passages having a single inlet with multiple distinctly valved
    outlets.

    601,    Surgery:  Kinesitherapy, subclass 158 for lavative device with
    applicator having specific movement on a couch.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 890.1+ for controlled release therapeutic
    device or system.


CLS 5/690
TXT MATTRESS (FOR WHOLE BODY):

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a pad which is
    generally adapted to be removably placed upon an underlying support, such
    as a bedstead, frame, or a boxspring, and is of a size sufficient to
    underlie and support substantially the whole of a person's body, the
    purpose of which is to make the person more comfortable while resting.

    (1)     Note.  A device in this subclass is intended to be used with an
    underlying support, but does not include the underlying support and could
    be used without it.

    (2)     Note.  Art in this class requires some structural modification to
    materials to adapt them for body support.  The mere recitation of a
    support, wherein the novelty resides in a chemical composition for the
    support, would not suffice for inclusion in this class; it would place the
    application in the appropriate composition art area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400+,   for a bottom either with or without a mattress or cushion.

    420,    for a pad intended to lie directly on the ground or floor.

    630+,   for supports for discreet portion(s) of a user's body, useable with
    a bed or surgical support.

    652+,   for supports for user's body or parts thereof, such as subclasses
    653+ for cushions specially adapted to be seated on or subclass 655 for
    supports especially adapted for infants.

    665,    for waterbeds and associated devices.

    689,    for fluidized beds and associated devices.

    902,    for mattresses with a nonrectangular supporting surface.

    948+,   for filler materials used in body supports.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 91+ for upholstered article making.

    53,     Package Making, subclass 524 for compacting mattress filling.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 560+ for resilient supports.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclass 75 for reciprocating bed cushioning
    devices, subclasses 80+ for a spring panel, subclass 130 for press cushion,
    and subclasses 142+ for cushion.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclass 452.48 for a seating device employing a
    cushion as a component thereof and limited by construction to a chair
    component, such as back or buttock support, as by particular shape to fit
    the contour of the body or by means to detachably connect the cushion to an
    underlying back or seat.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 71 for sheet
    including cover encasing foam, subclass 74 for sheet including cover
    encasing noninterengaged fibered material (e.g., batt), subclass 101 for
    superposed movable attached layers, subclasses 102+ for web or sheet
    including stitching and discrete fastener, coating or bond, subclass 116
    for a honeycomblike web or sheet, and subclass 178 for nonplanar uniform
    thickness material with cells.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclass 127 for a cushion
    convertible to a water rescue of life protecting apparatus and subclasses
    129+ for body supporting buoyant device.


CLS 5/691
TXT Supported on or removably attachable to another mattress:

    Mattress under subclass 690 especially adapted to be removably placed on
    top of another mattress, beneath a user.

    (1)     Note.  The mattresses under this subclass are of substantially the
    same length and width as the mattress on top of which they are supported,
    are usually thinner than the mattress they are supported on, but are
    substantially thicker than a quilted sheet, and often include separable
    fasteners, such as straps or belts that help their removable retention on
    the supporting mattress.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500,    for a multilayered sheet adapted to contact a mattress.

    736,    for mattresses with egg crate peaks and valleys on their top
    surfaces, that are often used removably on top of a supporting mattress.


CLS 5/692
TXT Having means to facilitate application or retention of bedclothes:

    Mattress under subclass 690 including structure which simplifies
    application of, or which holds, a sheet, cover, spread, etc., thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    482+,   for bedclothing.

    488+,   for bedclothing and a means not part of the mattress to facilitate
    changing thereof.

    669,    for bedclothes especially adapted for waterbeds.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 72.5 for bedclothes
    holders.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclass 219.1 for detachable supplemental covers
    for chairs or seats.


CLS 5/693
TXT With magnetic means:

    Mattress under subclass 690 including a dipolar conductive material such as
    a permanent magnet or an electromagnet.

    (1)     Note.  The presence of a magnet that is part of a motor associated
    with the mattress is not sufficient to classify in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The magnets passively associated with the mattress in this
    subclass allegedly provide "health benefits" to a user resting on the
    mattress, but are not "actively" used in treating a diseased patient.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    906,    for devices that include a magnet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 9+ for magnetic devices used for therapy.


CLS 5/694
TXT With disparate article or article retention means:

    Mattress under subclass 690 including various outside the class devices
    such as (a) a gun, sound emitting means, or safe, or (b) pocket or cavity
    adapted to accommodate such a device.

    (1)     Note.  Disparate articles that provide or alter the body supporting
    structure of the mattress, such as springs, stiffening boards, or
    insulating materials, and disparate articles, such as head supports,
    ventilating fans, or bedclothes retaining means, that are provided for
    elsewhere under this mainline title are excluded from this subclass.


CLS 5/695
TXT Toilet or bedpan means:

    Mattress with disparate article under subclass 694 wherein provision is
    made for a device to collect human waste or retain the device.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes patents disclosing a mattress which is
    modified to accept the toilet means, whereas the bed bottom is not.

    (2)     Note.  Netting means permitting the passage of excrements is
    considered a toilet or bedpan means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    604+,   for invalid beds or surgical supports that have toilet means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 300+ for flush
    closets and subclasses 450+ for bedpans.


CLS 5/696
TXT Tufted:

    Mattress under subclass 690 including a plurality of vertical stringlike
    filaments, generally between the upper and lower portions of the mattress.

    (1)     Note.  Usually a cover encapsulates a pad and is secured to the pad
    at points spaced apart on the cover's surface by filaments which pass from
    the surface of one side of the cover completely through the pad to the
    surface of the cover on the opposite side of the pad  to keep the pad in a
    compressed state and  to thereby prevent loss of shape or expansion of the
    pad.

    (2)     Note.  The filaments are often attached to tufting buttons placed
    on the top cover and under the bottom cover of a pad.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    408,    for an upholstered mattress or cushion in combination with a
    bottom, wherein the mattress or cushion has tufting.

    655.6,  for supports for a user's body, or part thereof, including the use
    of tufting filaments.

    712,    for gas containing mattresses having ties or internal seals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 114.3 for tufting buttons
    and subclass 102 for linked tufting.

    112,    Sewing, subclass 2.2 for a machine to sew tufting, subclass 80.01
    for embroidery tufting, and subclass 470.24 for a tuft making machine.


CLS 5/697
TXT Having uniform firmness, changeable by user:

    Mattress under subclass 690 including means to change the supporting
    characteristics of the mattress as a whole from stiffer to less stiffer
    modes and vice versa.

    (1)     Note.  The means to change the firmness of the mattress generally
    include means such as tightenable lacings or strings that crisscross the
    mattress, or means that are used to loosen or tighten the support
    characteristics of  springs within the mattress.

    (2)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are gas filled mattresses that
    could have their firmness changed by increasing or decreasing the gas
    pressure, reinforced mattresses that have a rigid layer or plate within
    them, and mattresses that have a plurality of sections of different
    firmnesses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    701,    for reinforced mattresses that have a rigid layer of plate.

    706+,   for gas containing mattresses.

    727+,   for mattresses that have a plurality of sections of different
    firmnesses.

    936,    for devices that have springs of variable or adjustable support
    characteristics.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, subclass 177 for a coil spring including an
    adjustable end thrust member to vary the thrust reaction.


CLS 5/698
TXT With fireproof material:

    Mattress under subclass 690 having at least a part of which is formed from
    a material which is resistant to burning.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    483,    for fireproof bed clothing.

    700,    for insulating mattresses that may be fireproof.

    954,    for materials having fire resistance used in making devices of the
    class definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 443+ for
    composite laminate including asbestos and subclasses 920+ for fire or heat
    protection feature.


CLS 5/699
TXT Having waterproof or allergenproof outer surface:

    Mattress under subclass 690 comprised of material(s), on at least  a
    substantial top portion thereof, that prevents the passage of liquid or
    spores, dust, insects, etc. therethrough.

    (1)     Note.  A part of the top portion of the mattress may be made from
    an inherently waterproof material, may have been chemically or physically
    treated to be waterproof, or may have been provided with an integral
    waterproof covering portion, primarily to prevent the passage of liquids
    into or through the body of the mattress.

    (2)     Note.  Removable covers or tickings that may incidentally be made
    from water resistant materials are excluded from this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  The mattress top, or cover thereof, may permit the passage
    of gasses, vapors, and microscopic particles, such as bacteria, but will
    prevent the passage of liquids.

    (4)     Note.  This subclass includes allergen-proof mattresses that in
    addition to preventing the passage of liquids into and out of the mattress,
    will prevent the passage of allergens, such as mite and mite feces.

    (5)     Note.  Gas containing mattresses, which inherently prevent the
    passage of liquids, are excluded from this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    420,    for a padded ground mat.

    484,    for waterproof bed clothing.

    655,    for infant supports that often are provided with waterproof
    surfaces.

    656,    for supports used outdoors that may have waterproof covers.

    706+,   for gas containing mattresses.

    737+,   for removable covers or tickings that may be made from water
    resistant materials.

    939,    for devices that comprise microporous materials.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclass 128 for a waterproof
    mattress or cushion having (a) special features convertible to a life raft
    or (b) a special shape or fastening means to enable conforming to or
    securing a person's body.


CLS 5/700
TXT Insulating:

    Mattress under subclass 690 disclosing the use of materials that are
    especially used to provide a thermal barrier between the user and the
    support of the mattress or the surrounding environment, for the purpose of
    minimizing heat loss from the user, thereby keeping the user warm.

    (1)     Note.  While most material used in making mattresses have
    insulating properties, with insulating properties being a matter of degree,
    the materials used in the patents in this subclass have been chosen
    especially for their insulating properties.

    (2)     Note.  Patents that include thermally reflecting layers, such as
    metals or laminates, are included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    413,    for sleeping bags that often include insulating materials.

    420,    for ground mats.

    656,    for supports used outdoors.

    668,    for waterbeds with insulating means.

    698,    for fireproof mattresses, that can include insulating materials.

    948+,   and especially subclass 949 for wool containing devices, subclass
    950 for feather or down containing devices, subclass 952 for artificial
    fiber containing devices, and subclass 953 for foam containing devices.


CLS 5/701
TXT Rigid plate or layer reinforced, with uniform, fixed supporting
    characteristics across top surface:

    Mattresses under subclass 690 disclosing the use of a single firm layer or
    plate, or a plurality of smaller, firm elements provided within or
    integrally on top of the mattress, to stiffen the support characteristics
    of the mattress, the mattress having homogeneous or constant support
    characteristics across its top supporting surface.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are mattresses that have
    reinforcing means such as slats located only in selected portions, in order
    to provide different support characteristics for different portions of the
    mattress.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    727+,   for mattresses that have sections of different support
    characteristics.


CLS 5/702
TXT Having fluent, particulate solid filler (e.g., beads):

    Mattresses under subclass 690 in which at least a portion thereof is filled
    with a large number of small particles (e.g., beads) of particulate
    material, that flow or realign with respect to one another upon a user
    exerting pressure upon the mattress.

    (1)     Note.  The particulate solid may be sand, spheres of plastic,
    metal, ceramic, wood, beans, or other similar materials, usually enclosed
    in a container.

    (2)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are fluidized beds, in which
    beads are lifted or suspended by a stream of high pressure gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    644,    for support means useable with an invalid bed or surgical support
    filled with a fluent material.

    654,    for a support especially adapted to be seated on, filled with a
    fluent material.

    655.4,  for supports for a user's body or part thereof containing flowable
    particulate solid fillers.

    689,    for fluidized beds.

    911,    for devices containing flowable beads.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclass 452.17 for a one-piece "bean bag" type
    cushion.


CLS 5/703
TXT Having handle:

    Mattresses under subclass 690 with a means attached thereto which can be
    manually grasped to facilitate manipulation of the mattress.


CLS 5/704
TXT Combined with means providing ventilation:

    Mattress under subclass 703 combined with an aperture permitting
    circulation of air between the interior and the exterior of the mattress.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    724+,   for mattress having ventilation means.


CLS 5/705
TXT Convertible:

    Mattress under subclass 690 adapted to be converted to a device other than
    a mattress (e.g., usually another body supporting device such as a seat,
    chair, foot support, exercising device, bathing device, or the like).

    (1)     Note.  The mattresses in this subclass may be converted to other
    devices by repositioning or rearranging portions of the mattress relative
    to each other, possibly with adding additional structural elements to
    accomplish the conversion to the new device.

    (2)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are mattresses that have
    sections that are connected or connectable to each other in a manner to
    permit the folding or stacking of the sections in order to save on the
    storage space needed or to facilitate transportation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    722+,   for mattresses having sections that are rearrangeable or
    repositionable relative to each other.


CLS 5/706
TXT Having confined gas (e.g., air mattress):

    Mattress under subclass 690 including a flexible container that yieldably
    contains a fluid having neither independent shape nor volume but tends to
    expand indefinitely, usually air, to provide a yieldable supporting area
    for at least a portion of a user's body.

    (1)     Note.  While the mattress as a whole is sized to support the whole
    of a user's body, the gas containing flexible container may comprise only a
    part of the whole mattress, thereby providing support only for a selected
    portion of the user's body, or provide only part of the supporting
    structure for the whole of the user's body, with other materials (e.g.,
    springs, foam) providing additional support for a user's body.

    (2)     Note.  The gas within the flexible container provides substantial
    support for the user, with the container being generally impervious to
    gases, the gas generally confined within the flexible container, and not
    expelled upon the weight of a user pressing on the flexible container, with
    the exception of subclasses 708, 712, and 713 defined below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    644,    for support means for discrete portions of a user, containing
    fluent material.

    654,    for supports especially adapted for seating that contain fluent
    materials.

    655.3,  for supports for a user's body or part thereof that are inflatable.

    932,    for seals and sealing methods used with plastic devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 65 for an evacuation apparatus and subclass 114 for manipulation
    of flexible or collapsible receiver.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 12 for a
    collapsible article.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclasses 129+ for buoyant
    devices that can be mattresslike devices, especially adapted (e.g., with
    straps) to aid a user in floating on water.


CLS 5/707
TXT Fixed amount of gas (e.g., permanently sealed container):

    Mattress having confined gas under subclass 706 in which a fixed amount of
    gas is permanently sealed in an impervious container that lacks a valve or
    other means to add or release gas.


CLS 5/708
TXT With integral manual pump (e.g. foot type):

    Mattress having confined gas under subclass 706 including an integral pump
    means, operable by the hands or feet of a user, adapted to inflate and/or
    deflate the mattress.

    (1)     Note.  The integral pump is often, but not necessarily, built into
    the mattress and is inseparable therefrom.

    (2)     Note.  The pump is a simple mechanical device, with the force that
    actuates the pump being supplied by the hands or feet of the user.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass excludes complex motor (e.g., electrical)
    pumps.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    714,    for mattresses having variably pressured chambers, that often
    include complex, motor-operated pumps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 234+ for ambulant pump and subclasses 437+ for
    expansible chamber-type pump.


CLS 5/709
TXT With solid filler (e.g., foam, spring, fiber):

    Mattress having a confined gas under subclass 706 in which the flexible
    container, in addition to a gas, contains a solid filler that provides
    support for a user of the mattress.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes camping mattresses that can be rolled
    up or compacted by expelling air from the solid filler (e.g., porous foam)
    within the mattress, which the mattress, upon unrolling to its full size,
    will absorb air and fill up to its original uncompacted size and shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    420,    for padded ground mats that may be air containing and compactible.


CLS 5/710
TXT Including plural, separately inflatable, distinct gas containing
    compartments:


    Mattress having a confined gas under subclass 706 which comprises at least
    two separate and distinct containers, that can be inflated independently of
    each other to different pressures, and lack air supply means (e.g., pumps)
    that can automatically alternate or change the pressures within the
    containers.

    (1)     Note.  The separate and distinct compartments may be of any shape,
    are usually adjacent to each other, and have their own separate valves
    permitting independent inflation and deflation.

    (2)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are mattresses that have a
    plurality of adjacent chambers including air supply means (e.g., pumps)
    that can automatically change or alternate the pressures within the
    chambers.

    (3)     Note.  Two adjacent gas containing mattresses that have means
    (e.g., valves) to separately inflate them to different pressures to form a
    bed that can have a firm and a less firm portion are included in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    711,    for mattresses having multiple compartments, defined by upper and
    lower surfaces, and spaced elongated dividing strips, with the compartments
    being in fluid communication with each other.

    713,    for mattresses having variably pressurizable chambers, in which
    fluid supply means (e.g., pumps) can automatically change or alter the
    pressures within the chambers.


CLS 5/711
TXT Having dividing strip (e.g., parallel or slanted):

    Mattress having a confined gas under subclass 706 wherein the container has
    an upper and lower surface when filled, and the surfaces are internally
    attached to each other by at least one elongated strip, or a plurality of
    elongated strips extending in a spaced, side-by-side fashion and dividing
    the mattress into a plurality of compartments that are in fluid
    communication with each other.

    (1)     Note.  The strip or strips may be vertical or slanted, must have
    some substantial length and height, measured across the length or with of
    the container to thereby divide the containers into multiple chambers that
    are in fluid communication with each other.

    (2)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are containers that have
    dividing strips that divide the containers into separate and distinct
    compartments that are not in fluid communication with each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    682,    for liquid containing, flexible containers (waterbeds) that have
    dividing strips or baffles that prevent the sloshing of liquid within the
    container.

    710,    for containers having dividing strips creating separate and
    distinct compartments that are not in fluid communication with each other.


CLS 5/712
TXT Having tie or internal seal:

    Mattress having a confined gas under subclass 706 wherein an interior
    surface of the container is connected to another interior surface of the
    container at selected points or a seal line by a device that connects,
    fastens, or secures the surfaces.

    (1)     Note.  Mattresses in which the upper wall of the container is
    sealed, at selected points, to a lower wall of the container are included
    in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    682,    for liquid containing, flexible containers (waterbeds) that have
    dividing strips or baffles that prevent the sloshing of liquid within the
    container.


CLS 5/713
TXT Variably pressurizable chambers (e.g., with pump):

    Mattress having a confined gas under subclass 706 comprised of a plurality
    of inflatable chambers or cells, or groupings of chambers or cells, in
    which at least some of the chambers or groupings can have their support
    characteristics automatically changed, with the aid of air supply means,
    such as pumps, or some of the chambers or groupings can be alternately
    inflated and deflated, to thereby provide an alternately inflating and
    deflating supporting surface.

    (1)     Note.  Mattresses in this subclass either explicitly include pump
    means, or are designed to be used with pump means that are especially
    adapted to be used with mattresses of this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The chambers may have slightly porous walls that permit a
    slow leakage of gas (e.g., air) to increase the comfort of the user; such
    mattresses, known as low air loss beds, are included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    714,    for inflatable mattresses with substantial ventilation or gas loss,
    that have a highly porous or apertured upper surface, permitting
    substantial gas leakage.


CLS 5/714
TXT With substantial ventilation or gas loss:

    Mattress having a confined gas under subclass 706 in which at least a
    portion of an upper, user supporting surface of the container is made from
    a highly porous material, or contains apertures, that permit a substantial
    leakage of gas, for the purpose of cooling or warming the user, or
    preventing bedsores.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are mattresses having a
    plurality of chambers which incidentally permit the loss of gas through
    their porous covers (e.g., low air loss beds) and which are primarily
    concerned with either easily changing, alternating, or maintaining the
    support characteristics of a part or the whole mattress.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    423,    for devices under the class definition including heating or cooling
    with forced air.

    713,    for air mattresses having variably pressurized chambers that may
    incidentally leak gas through a porous cover.

    726,    for mattresses, other than air mattresses, that have means, such as
    a fan, to force ventilation.


CLS 5/715
TXT Adapted to turn or move user:

    Mattress having a confined gas under subclass 706 which has a plurality of
    inflatable chambers that are adapted to incline, turn, or substantially
    move a patient from a first position to a second, different position, and
    possibly back to the first initial position.

    (1)     Note.  The substantial movement, inclining, or turning of the user
    is generally accomplished by inflating and/or deflating various chambers to
    change their size and/or shape, thereby causing the user to be
    substantially moved.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81.1+,  for invalid lift and transferring devices.

    615,    for sectional invalid beds or surgical supports that comprise fluid
    inflatable bags adapted to adjust the position of the support section of
    the bed or surgical support.

    660,    for attachments or accessories that when positioned between a
    mattress and its supporting surface will incline the mattress or a portion
    thereof.


CLS 5/716
TXT Having innerspring-type core:

    Mattress under subclass 690 containing a plurality of coiled wire members
    that provide substantial support for a user and will temporarily compress
    when a user's weight is placed on the mattress, the members being enclosed
    by an upholstery material, such as a ticking, and usually including a
    padding material (e.g., batting or foam) above the members and below the
    ticking.

    (1)     Note.  The patents in this subclass comprise coiled springs of the
    type defined by a helical strand of material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230+,   239+ and 246+, for a bed bottom disclosing structure framing or
    metallic connections of springs.

    642,    for pillow-type head supports that include springs.

    654.1,  for seat cushion-type supports comprising spring means.

    655.7,  for spring containing supports for a user's body or part thereof.

    936,    for devices having springs with adjustable firmness.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 80+ for a spring panel.


CLS 5/717
TXT With substantial edge, border, or side features:

    Innerspring-type core mattress under subclass 716 including ample
    structural elements positioned at peripheral portions of the pad to provide
    reinforcement, additional support, or ventilating means.

    (1)     Note.  Mattresses that have their edge portions reinforced to
    provide a sturdy area adapted to support a user sitting on the edge of the
    mattress are included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    704     and 724+, for nonspring mattresses that have ventilating features.

    739,    for nonspring mattresses having means to form or strengthen their
    edges or borders.


CLS 5/718
TXT Substantially filled with foam:

    Innerspring-type core mattress under subclass 716 wherein an ample portion
    of the spaces between individual coiled wire members or group of coiled
    wire members are filled with an expanded cellular material, with the
    expanded cellular material and the members together providing support for a
    user upon their compression.

    (1)     Note.  The use of foam layers on top of the springs, or at
    peripheral portions of the mattress, is not sufficient for classification
    in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Subject matter in this subclass are, in effect, hybrid
    spring and foam mattresses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    655.7,  for foam body supports not containing any springs.

    740,    for foam mattresses not containing any springs, that have an
    unusual foam, or having conventional foams configured in an unconventional
    way.


CLS 5/719
TXT Noncoil spring element:

    Innerspring-type core mattress under subclass 716 in which at least one of
    the spring elements, providing support for a user of the pad, is a form
    different than the wire member of the helical strand-type material.

    (1)     Note.  The incidental use of a noncoil spring (for example,
    interconnecting a plurality of coil springs), wherein the noncoil spring
    does not compress and provides support for a user, is not sufficient for
    classification in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247     and 255, for nonspiral springs used in bedsteads.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 113+ for fluid springs.


CLS 5/720
TXT Compartmentalized:

    Innerspring-type core mattress under subclass 716 in which the coiled wire
    core is made up of individual coiled wire members or small groups of coiled
    wire members separated by partitions.

    (1)     Note.  Usually individual or small groups of springs are enclosed
    in a clothlike cover to isolate the individual springs, or group of springs
    from other springs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    655.8,  for body supports comprising compartmentalized spring devices.


CLS 5/721
TXT With substantial, firm, top insulator or reinforcing grid on spring core:

    Innerspring-type core mattress under subclass 716 including (a) a
    relatively hard separator between the coiled wire member core and the pad
    ticking to prevent the coiled wire members within the core from penetrating
    the surface or (b) including a hard element such as a wire grid or rigid
    board to provide reinforcement for at least a portion of the top supporting
    surface spaced from the periphery of the pad.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 83+ for superposed layers, metal and
    non-metal.


CLS 5/722
TXT With distinct movable sections:

    Mattress under subclass 690 having discrete portions that can be
    repositioned relative to each other as by bending, folding, sliding,
    replacing, or temporarily removing the portion, to thereby change the
    shape, size, or thickness configuration or support characteristics of the
    pad.

    (1)     Note.  Mattresses that have removable inserts such as slats,
    plates, or plugs, used to change the firmness of the mattress are
    classified elsewhere.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes large, multiple user accommodating
    mattresses that  are formed from two smaller mattresses connected with a
    connector element or housed within a large, enveloping or framing structure.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass includes mattresses that have removable or
    repositionable portions or sections that provide a cavity over which a
    portion of a user's body may be supported without being contacted by
    supporting materials to thereby prevent or alleviate bed sores.

    (4)     Note.  This subclass includes mattresses with means to facilitate
    folding or rolling up.

    (5)     Note.  This subclass includes mattresses with a malleable bar, or
    the like embedded within the mattress and adapted to be bent to thereby
    change the shape of the mattress.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    661,    for a removably connectable bed attachment that is adapted to
    extend the head or foot portion of a bed.

    691,    for a separate and distinct mattress that may be supported on or
    removably attached to another mattress.

    694+,   for mattresses that contain or accommodate disparate articles (such
    as a bedpan) often by providing a removable mattress section.

    697,    for mattresses having uniform firmness across their supporting
    surface, that have means to adjust their firmness.

    706+,   for inflatable gas containing mattresses that may have distinct
    movable sections.

    729+,   for mattresses that have removable slats, plates, plugs, slits,
    grooves cutouts or cavities provided to alter the firmness of a portion of
    the mattress.

    738,    for mattresses having easily openable covers or tickings that
    permit the addition or removal of filling materials.

    922,    for devices that use hook-and-loop-type (e.g., VelcroR) fasteners.


CLS 5/723
TXT With separable fastener for connection to each other or to base:

    Distinct movable mattress section under subclass 722 in which the  separate
    portions of the pad have a detachable coupler to permit release from each
    other to a foundation or foundation portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    691,    for mattresses supported on or removably attachable to another
    mattress.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 572+ for separable
    fastener or required component thereof.


CLS 5/724
TXT Ventilated or permitting substantial air passage:

    Mattresses under subclass 690 having an aperture or channel permitting
    circulation of a gas (e.g., air) between the interior and exterior to
    enhance the comfort of a user.

    (1)     Note.  The aperture or channel means in the mattress must permit
    substantial movement in and out of the mattress.  The use of a porous cover
    or ticking on a mattress, or the use of a conventional porous foam as the
    filler, that inherently permit movement of air through their pores, is not
    sufficient for classification in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are slits, grooves, or cutouts
    on a mattress surface provided for localized altering of the firmness of
    the mattress.

    (3)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are mattresses with channels,
    grooves, peaks, or valleys on a mattress top surface that may inherently
    provide a ventilation user supporting top surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    652.1+, for supports with ventilation or forced ventilation.

    704,    for mattresses in which the handle means are provided with means
    providing ventilation.

    716,    for spring mattresses that have edge or border features that may
    include ventilating means.

    727,    for slits, grooves, or cutouts on a mattress surface provided for
    localized altering of the firmness of the mattress.

    730     and 736, for channels, grooves, peaks, or valleys on a mattress top
    surface that may inherently provide a ventilation user supporting top
    surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 180.1+ for ventilated chairs and seats.


CLS 5/725
TXT In head supporting area for breathing:

    Ventilated mattress under subclass 724 wherein apertures or channels are
    provided in the human skull bearing portion of the pad to facilitate
    respiration of a generally prone user.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are mattresses provided with
    ventilating apertures in their head supporting area to prevent suffocation
    of infants.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    638,    for pillow-type devices that have means permitting the passage of
    air for breathing.

    655,    for supports especially adapted for supporting infants.


CLS 5/726
TXT With means to force ventilation (e.g., fan):

    Ventilated mattress under subclass 724 including means such as a fan or air
    pump to propel air into or out of the pad.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are air mattresses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    423,    for devices to force heated or cooled air.

    652.2,  for cushion supports with forced ventilation.

    713+,   for air mattresses that may incidentally ventilate a user.

    941,    for blankets that provide a forced air flow to a user.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclass 180.13 for seats and chairs ventilated
    with forced air.


CLS 5/727
TXT Sectional with regard to firmness:

    Mattress under subclass 690 having a body supporting section with a
    different compressibility or body support characteristics from another
    section either lengthwise, widthwise, or heightwise of the pad.

    (1)     Note.  The mattresses in this subclass generally have a planar top
    supporting surface and generally provide a firmer portion for the heavier
    midsection of the human body, or in the case of a mattress adapted to
    support two users, one longitudinal section of the mattress may be less
    firm than the adjacent longitudinal section to provide a softer portion for
    one of the users.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass are reversible mattresses that
    have plural homogeneous layers of different support characteristics, one on
    top of the other.

    (3)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are inflatable mattresses that
    have sections inflatable to different firmnesses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    710,    especially subclass 714, for inflatable mattresses that have
    sections inflatable to different firmnesses.

    716+,   for spring containing mattresses that have sections with different
    firmnesses.


CLS 5/728
TXT Comprising horizontal firm slatlike or platelike inserts:

    Sectional firmness mattress under subclass 727 containing permanent or
    removable, generally rigid slats or plates positioned only in selected
    portions of the mattress to selectively alter the firmness of the mattress.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    701,    for mattresses with homogeneous or constant support characteristics
    across its top surface that contain rigid plates.


CLS 5/729
TXT Comprising vertically oriented insert:

    Sectional firmness mattress under subclass 727 including permanent or
    removable, generally upright arranged stiffening inserts or plugs that are
    usually cylindrical.


CLS 5/730
TXT Comprising a firmness altering slit, groove, cutout, or cavity:

    Sectional firmness mattress under subclass 727 in which a narrow
    aperturelike portion is provided on the pad top supporting surface, or
    through the mattress in order to provide supporting portions of different
    characteristics in the pad.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    724,    for mattresses with channels provided inside the mattress to
    facilitate ventilation by providing a path for air to move in and out of
    the mattress.

    736,    for mattresses having hills or peaks, separated by valleys.


CLS 5/731
TXT Nonplanar top surface:

    Mattress under subclass 690 in which a portion of the user contact area has
    discreet protuberances and indents.

    (1)     Note.  The mattresses in this subclass provide at all times a
    nonplanar supporting surface and do not have adjustable and repositionable
    sections that can transform the nonplanar or contoured top surface to a
    planar top surface.

    (2)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are invalid beds and surgical
    supports that may present nonplanar invalid supporting surfaces.

    (3)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are support means, such as
    pillowlike devices that are removably useable on top of a mattress (or
    other body supports).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    600+,   for invalid beds and surgical supports that may present nonplanar
    invalid supporting surfaces.

    630+,   for support means, such as pillowlike devices that are removably
    useable on top of a mattress (or other body supports).

    694+,   for mattresses with disparate article (such as a bedpan) that may
    have cavities or the like to accommodate disparate articles.

    706+,   for air mattresses that may present a nonplanar user supporting
    surface.

    722+,   for mattresses with distinct adjustable or repositionable sections,
    in which sections may be manipulated to alter the mattress top from a
    planar to a nonplanar mode.

    730,    for mattresses that are sectional with regard to firmness that have
    slits, grooves, cutouts, or cavities to alter their firmness.

    944,    for devices that have upstanding firm projections.


CLS 5/732
TXT With sideguard:

    Nonplanar mattress surface under subclass 731 which has a substantial
    raised peripheral portion, usually at least at one side thereof, usually to
    prevent a user from rolling off the pad.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    424,    for safety devices.

    425+,   for sideguards useable with beds.

    655+,   for supports especially adapted for infants.


CLS 5/733
TXT With head, back, or arm support:

    Nonplanar mattress top surface under subclass 731 in which the pad
    accommodates a user's upper torso portion or extremities, often in a raised
    or lowered configuration relative to other body portions of the user.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    621+,   for invalid beds or surgical supports with upper body supporting or
    restraining areas.

    632+,   for simultaneous supporting devices for multiple body portions that
    are removably positionable on the top surface of a mattress or other body
    support.

    638,    for head or neck support with means to permit the passage of air
    for breathing.

    646+,   for arm or hand supports.

    +725,   for ventilated mattresses providing means in the head supporting
    area of the mattress for breathing by a prone user.


CLS 5/734
TXT With foot or leg support:

    Nonplanar mattress top surface under subclass 731 in which the pad
    accommodates a user's lower torso or extremities, often in a raised or
    lowered configuration relative to other body portions of the user.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    624,    for invalid beds or surgical supports with lower body portion
    supporting or restraining means.

    648+,   for lower body supporting devices that are removably positionable
    on the top surface of a mattress or other body support.


CLS 5/735
TXT With abdomen or breast support:

    Nonplanar mattress top surface under subclass 731 in which the user
    contacting face accommodates a protruding midsection or mammary section.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes mattresses especially adapted to
    support a pregnant user.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    631,    for pregnant abdomen supporting devices that are removably
    positionable on a mattress or other body support.

    930,    for devices for pregnant users.


CLS 5/736
TXT With hills or peaks separated by valleys (e.g., egg crate type):

    Nonplanar mattress top surface under subclass 731 in which at least a
    portion of the user contacting face has a pattern of protuberances totally
    surrounded on all sides by lowered surfaces, defining a surface that
    resembles an egg crate.

    (1)     Note.  Hills or peaks may have rounded or flat tops and are often
    made by a foam convoluter.

    (2)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are mattresses that have
    surfaces in which raised portions are separated by closely spaced,
    parallel, lateral, or longitudinal (but not both lateral and longitudinal)
    grooves or slits, to thereby provide an undulating surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    691,    for mattresses or pads, removably attachable to the top of another
    mattress, that may provide an egg-crate-type supporting surface.

    724,    for mattresses providing ventilation, that may provide an
    egg-crate-type surface.

    731,    for surfaces in which raised portions are separated by lateral or
    longitudinal (but not both) grooves or slits, to thereby provide an
    undulating surface.

    944,    for devices that have upstanding, firm massaging projections on
    their top user supporting surface.


CLS 5/737
TXT Having atypical outer covering or ticking:

    Mattress under subclass 690 containing a specific property or material of
    the exposed surface of the pad that surrounds the inner core.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is for unconventional and unusual material for
    single or multiple coverings or tickings, or the manner in which the
    covering or ticking is attached to the mattress, or the configuration
    (e.g., extreme looseness) of the covering relative to the mattress core.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass excludes merely conventional waterproof
    coverings, conventional fireproof coverings, or conventional tufted
    coverings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402+,   for the combination of a bottom and an upholstered pad (i.e.,
    mattress or cushion) which has means to hold the upholstery to the bottom
    or pad.

    484,    for waterproof covering.

    490,    for pillow covers.

    501,    for coverings for bedclothes.

    655.6,  for cushion-type supports, in which the covering is attached to the
    core by tufting.

    696,    for tufted mattresses, in which a covering is attached to a
    mattress core by tufting.

    698,    for mattresses with fireproof materials, in which the covering may
    have fireproof properties.

    699,    for waterproof mattresses, in which the covering of the mattress is
    usually waterproof.

    738,    for mattresses having tickings that are easily openable for the
    addition, removal, or replacement of filler materials.

    739,    for edge, corner, or border features, such as edge rolls, that may
    be provided on a mattress cover or ticking.

    939,    for devices that have a microporous cover.


CLS 5/738
TXT With easily openable cover or ticking:

    Mattress under subclass 690 in which the cover or ticking is especially
    adapted for quick access to permit removal, replacement, or addition to at
    least part of the inner core of the pad.

    (1)     Note.  The cover or ticking usually includes separable fasteners
    that permit easy opening and closing of the cover or ticking.

    (2)     Note.  Unlike the mattresses with distinct movable sections, where
    whole separate and distinct sections or units are removable from the
    mattress, a mattress placed in this subclass is not formed from separate
    and distinct sections or units, but is filled with a homogeneous "stuffing"
    material or the whole inner core is removable through the openable cover or
    ticking.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    490,    for pillowcases that usually have an opening permitting the
    insertion and removal of the pillow.

    501,    for coverings that usually have an opening permitting the insertion
    and removal of a bedclothing item such as a quilt.

    722,    for mattresses having separate and distinct sections, movable
    within the mattress, or removable from the mattress.


CLS 5/739
TXT Having substantial means to form or strengthen the edge, border, or corner
    of the mattress:

    Mattress under subclass 690 having a substantial structural feature,
    internally or externally, that forms the peripheral portion of the pad to
    reinforce this portion or to provide aesthetic features to the portions.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are edge rolls and piping provided
    at the peripheral edges of a mattress cover.

    (2)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are mattresses having bedclothes
    retaining means, mattresses having handles, innerspring core-type
    mattresses having substantial edge or side features, and mattresses having
    sideguards.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    657.5,  for body supports with edge roll, cord, or welt.

    692,    for mattresses having bedclothes retaining means.

    703,    for mattresses having handles.

    717,    for innerspring core-type mattresses having substantial edge or
    side features.

    732,    for mattresses having sideguards.


CLS 5/740
TXT With unusual foam material or configuration:

    Mattress under subclass 690 in which at least part of the mattress is
    composed of an expanded cellular substance having unconventional physical
    or chemical properties.

    (1)     Note.  Since expanded cellular foams are conventional materials of
    construction for mattresses, classification in this subclass requires some
    inherently unconventional chemical or physical property of the foam, or the
    foam must have been modified by the addition of other materials to exhibit
    an unconventional physical or chemical property.

    (2)     Note.  Unusual foam configurations can include the use of chunks,
    chips, layers, blocks, or unusual shapes and sizes of conventional foams,
    or an unusual aggregation, such as layering of conventional foams.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    655.9,  for cushion-type supports comprising foam materials.

    953,    for body supports having unusual foam material or configuration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 350 for a colloid containing a gas
    generating agent.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, digest 1 for chair- and seat-type devices that
    have foam components.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 304.4+ for
    composite material having voids in a component.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 5/900
TXT BATHTUB OR BED:
    Collection of documents disclosing beds which are convertible to a bathtub.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 571.1+ for tubs
    having various supports combined therewith.


CLS 5/900.5
TXT MATTRESS WITH NONHORIZONTAL OR NONPLANAR SUPPORTING SURFACE:A collection of
    documents disclosing the supporting of substantially the whole body of a
    user on a support having a nonhorizontal or nonplanar supporting surface.

    (1)     Note.  The positioning of a removable support such as a pillow on
    the supporting surface, or the positioning of sideguards on peripheral
    portions of the supporting surface is not sufficient to bring a document in
    this collection.

    (2)     Note.  Inflatible mattresses comprised of a plurality of tubular
    elements, such as the ones found in Class 5, subclass 714, inherently
    present a nonplanar surface, and are excluded from this collection.

    (3)     Note.  Tufted mattresses, such as the ones found in Class 5,
    subclass 696, inherently present a nonplanar surface, and are excluded from
    this collection.


CLS 5/901
TXT With convoluted (e.g., egg crate) surface:
    A collection of documents under 900.5, wherein at least a portion of the
    supporting surface comprises a pattern of protrusions, or bumps and
    valleys, or cavities that simulates the shape of the lower portion of an
    egg container.

    (1)     Note.  Most of the patents in this collection are supports made by
    cutting a foam slab with a convoluter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    740,    for mattresses comprising foam material.


CLS 5/902
TXT MATTRESS WITH NONRECTANGULAR SUPPORTING SURFACE:
    A collection of documents disclosing supports for substantially the whole
    body of a user in which the shape, seen in a top view, of the supporting
    surface is not of the conventional rectangular shape.

    (1)     Note.  The supporting surface, in a top view may be circular, oval,
    square, heart shaped, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    D6,     Furnishings, subclasses 595+ for design features relating to
    mattresses.


CLS 5/903
TXT MATTRESS FOR REMOVABLE PLACEMENT OVER ANOTHER MATTRESS:
    A collection of documents disclosing the positioning of a second mattress,
    in a removable manner above another, first mattress and beneath a user,
    whereby the user is directly supported by the second mattress.

    (1)     Note.  The second mattress may be a pad that is thinner than the
    first mattress but it must be substantially thicker than a quilted sheet.

    (2)     Note.  Various separable fasteners, straps or belts may be used to
    removably retain the second mattress over the first mattress.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500,    for a multi-layered sheet adapted to contact a mattress.


CLS 5/904
TXT WITH SOUND EMITTING MEANS:
    A collection of documents disclosing sound emitting means associated with a
    device under the class definition.

    (1)     Note.  The sound emitting device may be a speaker, a music box, or
    a toy, that makes an audible sound.

    (2)     Note.  A t.v. set, which has a speaker built into it would be
    included in this collection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    639,    for pillows with dispartate articles, including sound emitting
    devices.

    666,    for waterbeds with sound or light means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    24 and 25 for speaker arrangements.


CLS 5/905
TXT WITH LIGHT EMITTING MEANS:
    A collection of documents disclosing light emitting means associated with a
    device under the class definition.

    (1)     Note.  The light emitted may be sufficient to permit an activity
    such as reading or it may be merely enough for amusement, such as rapidly
    flashing tiny lights, strobe lights or phosphorescent strips.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    666,    for waterbeds with sound or light means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclass 130, for illuminating devices useable with
    beds.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses 1+
    for lights used for therapeutic purposes for patients supported on a bed.


CLS 5/906
TXT WITH MAGNETIC MEANS:
    A collection of documents disclosing a permanent magnet or an
    electro-magnet associated with a device under the class definition.

    (1)     Note.  The presence of a magnet that is part of a motor associated
    with the device is not sufficient to bring the document in this collection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    693,    for mattresses with magnetic means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 9+ for magnetic devices used for therapy.


CLS 5/907
TXT WITH DECORATIVE STRUCTURE:
    A collection of documents disclosing a structural element, associated with
    a device under the class definition, with a primarily decorative function.

    (1)     Note.  A color scheme or design on a device is not sufficient of a
    "structural element" to bring a document in this collection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280,    for bedstead with ornamental inserts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    D6,     Furnishings, appropriate subclasses for ornamental structures
    associated with devices under the class definition.


CLS 5/908
TXT Mirror:
    A collection of documents under subclass 907 disclosing the use of a mirror
    associated with a device of the class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280,    for bedstead with a mirror.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclass 185, with mirror.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 224+ for cabinets with
    mirrors.


CLS 5/909
TXT FLOWABLE VISCOUS (E.G., GEL) MATERIAL CONTAINING:
    A collection of documents disclosing a viscous or gel-like fluid associated
    with a device of the class.

    (1)     Note.  The fluid must be more viscous than water and it is usually
    a liquid with or without additives to make it more viscous than water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    644,    for support means useable with an invalid bed or surgical support,
    filled with a fluent material.

    654,    for a support especially adapted to seated on, filled with a fluent
    material.

    655.5,  for supports containing liquid or gel.

    706+,   for mattresses filled with fluent materials.


CLS 5/910
TXT WITH SUCTION MEANS:
    A collection of documents disclosing gas suction means associated with a
    device of the class.

    (1)     Note.  This collection includes supports in which the firmness or
    size of the support is adjustable by withdrawing a gas from the support.

    (2)     Note.  The collection excludes supports in which the support is
    filled with beads or with a liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    913,    for suction means associated with a bead containing support.

    918,    for waterbeds having pumps adapted to circulate the liquid in the
    bed.


CLS 5/911
TXT BEAD CONTAINING:
    A collection of documents disclosing a body support having at least a
    portion thereof filled with a large number of small particles of
    particulate solid material, that adapted to "flow" relative to one another
    as a fluent material.

    (1)     Note.  The particulate solid may be sand, spheres of plastic,
    metal, ceramic, wood etc., beans or other similar materials, usually
    enclosed in a container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    644,    for support means useable with an invalid bed or surgical support,
    filled with a fluent material.

    654,    for a support especially adapted to be seated on, filled with a
    fluent material.

    689,    for fluidized beds.

    702,    for mattresses filled with solid fluent materials.


CLS 5/912
TXT Fluidized bed:
    A collection of documents under subclass 911 in which the particulate
    material is in a fluidized state caused by a high pressure gas flow lifting
    and suspending them.

    (1)     Note.  This collection includes the beds used to prevent or cure
    bed sores, in which a patient is supported on a porous to air container
    filled with "beads" kept in a lifted or suspended state by a stream of high
    pressure gas, usually air.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    702,    for mattresses filled with fluent materials.

    714,    for fluent material filled mattresses in combination with a fluent
    material source such as a pump.


CLS 5/913
TXT With suction means:
    A collection of documents under subclass 911 having a suction means, such
    as a pump, to remove the air from an impermeable container filled with
    "beads" thereby preventing the movement of the "beads", thus rigidifying
    the container.

    (1)     Note.  This collection includes body supports filled with beads
    that can be custom fitted to a particular user by placing the user on a
    "bead" filled impermeable container, permitting the beads to rearrange
    themselves under the weight of the user, and applying a suction to the
    container, thereby "setting" the beads in an arrangement adapted to the
    contour of the body of the particular user.


CLS 5/914
TXT LOW AIR LOSS BEDS:
    A collection of documents disclosing a body support comprising a plurality
    of individually inflatable and deflatable zones of cells that are adapted
    to support a patient in a manner to prevent or cure bed sores, by
    controlling the pressure within the patient supporting cells.

    (1)     Note.  The inflatable patient supporting cells may have a porous
    upper surface, with air "lost" through the porous upper surface of the
    support replaceable by a pump or blower.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    672,    for fluent material filled mattresses in combination with a fluent
    material source such as a pump.

    702,    for mattresses filled with fluent materials.

    710,    for fluent material filled mattresses including plural distinct
    compartments.

    724,    for ventilated mattresses having means, such as fans, to force
    ventilation.


CLS 5/915
TXT WITH VIBRATING MEANS:
    A collection of documents disclosing a vibrator associated with a device
    under the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108     and 109, for cradles with rocking means.

    674,    for waterbeds with vibrating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    601,    Surgery:  Kinesitherapy, subclasses 49+ for vibrating devices used
    for therapeutic purposes.


CLS 5/916
TXT Water bed:
    A collection of documents under 915 disclosing a vibrating means associated
    with a water bed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    665+,   for liquid filled mattresses (e.g., waterbeds).


CLS 5/917
TXT WATER BED FRAMES:
    A collection of documents disclosing a supporting or enclosing frame
    especially adapted to be used with a liquid filled bladder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400+,   for bedsteads having bottoms.

    665+,   for liquid filled mattresses (e.g., waterbeds).


CLS 5/918
TXT WATER BED WITH PUMP MEANS:
    A collection of documents disclosing a water filled bladder in association
    with a pump means adapted to fill, empty, or circulate water in said
    bladder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    665+,   for liquid filled mattresses (e.g., waterbeds).

    672,    for fluent material filled mattresses in combination with a fluent
    material source, such as a pump.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, appropriate subclasses for pumps useable with a water filled
    bladder.


CLS 5/919
TXT WATER BED BAFFLES:
    A collection of documents disclosing the use of devices within a water
    filled bladder which have the function of controlling the movement of
    water, or waves within the bladder, that are formed when a user gets or or
    off, or moves on top surface of the bladder.

    (1)     Note.  The documents in this collection must have structural
    elements that are located inside the water filled bladder, and may or may
    not be connected to the bladder's inner walls.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    665+,   for liquid filled mattresses (e.g., waterbeds).


CLS 5/920
TXT Hydraulic chambers:
    A collection of documents under subclass 919 in which the baffle structure
    comprises a plurality of apertured sheets that divide the interior of the
    bladder into a plurality of chambers or enclosures into which and out of
    which water enters and exits as a user gets on or off, or moves on the top,
    supporting surface of the bladder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    665+,   for liquid filled mattresses (e.g., waterbeds).

    711,    for fluid filled mattresses divided into a plurality of
    compartments by elongated strips.


CLS 5/921
TXT Fiber containing:
    A collection of documents under subclass 919 in which the baffle structure
    comprises a fibrous material.

    (1)     Note.  The fibrous material is usually man made, and permits the
    movement of water in the space between the strands of fibrous material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Materials, appropriate subclasses, for specific fibers
    useable within waterbeds.


CLS 5/922
TXT WITH HOOK AND LOOP (E.G., VELCROR) TYPE FASTENER:
    A collection of documents disclosing the use of hook and loop type
    fasteners, such as the ones sold under the trademark of VelcroR in
    association with a device under the class definition.


CLS 5/923
TXT Bedclothing:
    A collection of documents under subclass 922 disclosing the use of hook and
    loop type fasteners with a bedclothing item such a sheet, blanket or
    pillowcase.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    482+,   for specific bedclothing items.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 72.5 for bedclothes
    fasteners, and other appropriate subclasses.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, Digest 6, for hook and loop type fasteners used
    with chairs and seats.


CLS 5/924
TXT CARDBOARD CONTAINING:
    A collection of document disclosing the use of cardboard as the material of
    construction of at least a portion of a device under the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    951,    for paper containing devices.


CLS 5/925
TXT HIGHLY FRICTIONAL MATERIAL:
    A collection of documents disclosing the use of a rough material that
    provides a lot of friction, in association with a device under the class
    definition, or in constructing at least a portion of a device under the
    class definition.

    (1)     Note.  The use of a conventional frictional material in a brake
    portion of a caster wheel used with a device under the class definition
    would not be sufficient to bring the document in this collection.


CLS 5/926
TXT LOW FRICTION (E.G., SLIPPERY) MATERIAL:
    A collection of documents disclosing the use of a slippery material that
    provides a very low friction, in association with a device under the class
    definition, or in making at least a portion of a device under the class
    definition.

    (1)     Note.  The use of a conventional low friction material, such as a
    nylon bushing, between the moving parts of a motor used with a device under
    the class definition would not be sufficient to bring the document into
    this collection.


CLS 5/927
TXT SOFA BEDS WITH MOTOR MEANS:
    A collection of documents disclosing the use of motor means in operating
    portions of sofa beds in subclasses 12.1 to 50 of Class 5.


CLS 5/928
TXT WITH SPRINKLING OR WASHING MEANS:
    A collection of documents disclosing the use of water in sprinkling or
    washing the user of a device supported on a support under the class
    definition.

    (1)     Note.  The sprinkling of a user is usually to cool or amuse the
    user.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    633,    for invalid beds or surgical supports with drain means.

    656,    for body supports especially adapted for outdoor use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, appropriate subclasses for
    bathing and showering devices.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing appropriate subclasses,
    for sprinkling devices.


CLS 5/929
TXT FACILITATING SEXUAL RELATIONS:
    A collection of documents disclosing the use of devices under the class
    definition which are particularly adapted to support at least a portion of
    at least one user to facilitate sexual relations.

    (1)     Note.  Conventional devices under the class definition, such as
    conventional beds or pillows, which are inherently adapted to facilitate
    sexual relations, are to be excluded from this collection.


CLS 5/930
TXT FOR PREGNANT USER:
    A collection of documents disclosing the use of a device under the class
    definition especially adapted to support or comfort a pregnant user.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    631,    for support means, adapted to be used with a bed or surgical
    support, which are adapted to support the abdomen of a pregnant user.

    735,    for mattresses having abdomen (or breast) supports.


CLS 5/931
TXT WITH SAFE OR HIDING PLACE:
    A collection of documents disclosing the use of a safe or concealed hiding
    place, for valuables, in a device under the class definition.

    (1)     Note.  A mere storage space such as a drawer or an unconcealed
    pocket would not be sufficient to bring the document in this collection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for sofa beds with receptacles drawers or compartments.

    308,    for bedsteads with receptacles drawers or compartments.

    485,    for bedclothing items with pocket means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, appropriate
    subclasses, for safes.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, for devices with secret compartments.


CLS 5/932
TXT SEALS AND SEALING METHODS, FOR PLASTICS:
    A collection of documents disclosing seals and sealing methods used in
    joining portions of plastic devices under the class definition.

    (1)     Note.  The seals are usually portions of inflatible of water
    fillable devices under the class definition, and the methods of sealing are
    usually ultrasonic or dielectric sealing methods or solvent bonding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for sealing methods.


CLS 5/933
TXT MASSAGING BED:
    A collection of documents disclosing a device under the class definition
    that have discrete, generally rigid portions, that move cyclically relative
    to the user, to thereby massage at least a portion of the user's body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108     and 109, for cradles with rocking devices.

    915,    for supports with vibrating means.

    944,    for upstanding firm massaging projections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    601,    Surgery:  Kinesitherapy, subclasses 49+ for vibrating device used
    for therapeutic purposes.


CLS 5/934
TXT With movable transverse slats:
    A collection of documents under subclass 933 in which the discrete,
    generally rigid, movable portions are elongated elements that extend from
    one edge portion of the bed towards its other edge and are generally
    perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the bed.


CLS 5/935
TXT WITH ADJUSTABLE FIRMNESS:
    A collection of documents disclosing the use of body supports under the
    class definition, with at least a portion of the user supporting surface of
    the body support having a variable or adjustable support characteristic,
    firmness or hardness, with the support characteristic, firmness or hardness
    changeable from one fixed value to another fixed value.

    (1)     Note.  Fluent material fillable supports, such as air inflatible
    mattresses, which are inherently adapted to have their firmness varied, by
    inflation or deflation, are excluded from this collection.

    (2)     Note.  Supports with removable or replaceable stiffening means such
    as stiffening boards or rods are excluded from this subclass.


CLS 5/936
TXT HAVING SPRINGS WITH ADJUSTABLE FIRMNESS:

    A collection of documents under the class definition comprising spring
    devices that have variable or adjustable support characteristics, with the
    support characteristics of the spring changeable from one fixed value to
    another fixed value.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    697,    for mattresses with uniform firmness that is changeable by the user.

    716+,   for mattresses having innerspring-type cores.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices,  subclass 177 for coil springs including an
    adjustable end thrust member to vary the thrust reaction.


CLS 5/937
TXT BODY SUPPORT WITH LOWERABLE SUPPORT PORTION TO PROVIDE ACCESS TO A PORTION
    OF THE SUPPORTED BODY:A collection of documents disclosing the use of body
    supports under the class definition which include a body supporting portion
    that is lowerable relative to a portion of the user's body to provide
    access to the user's body for inspection or treatment.


CLS 5/938
TXT WITH REFLECTIVE MATERIAL:

    A collection of documents disclosing a light or heat reflective material
    associated with a device of the class.

    (1)     Note.  This collection includes devices in which the reflective
    material is adapted to reflect sunrays to promote the tanning of a user.

    (2)     Note.  This collection includes the use of thermally reflective
    materials which reflect the body heat of a user to thereby keep the user
    warm.

    (3)     Note.  This collection excludes mirrors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    417+,   for ground mats.

    483,    for fireproof bedclothing that may include thermally reflective
    materials.

    656,    for supports especially adapted for outdoor use.

    668,    for waterbeds with insulating means that may include thermally
    reflective materials.

    700,    for mattresses with insulating means.


CLS 5/939
TXT WITH MICROPOROUS MATERIAL:

    A collection of documents disclosing the use of a material, usually
    covering or enclosing a device of the class, that have microscopic pores
    severely limiting the passage of solids or liquids through said materials.

    (1)     Note.  This collection includes covers that permit the passage of
    air, but not the passage of an allergen such as dust, mites, and mite feces.

    (2)     Note.  This collection includes covers that severely limit the rate
    of passage of vapors through the cover.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    482+,   for bedclothing such as a pillow case, sheet, etc.

    689,    for a fluidized bed in which covers that are porous to gases, such
    as air, cover small fluidized beads.

    699,    for mattresses that have a waterproof or allergenproof outer
    surface.

    737,    for a mattress cover.


CLS 5/940
TXT WITH ALARM MEANS:

    A collection of documents disclosing the use of a device, under the class
    definition, emitting an audio or visual signal to wake up an occupant of a
    bed or when certain conditions are reached.

    (1)     Note.  The conditions that activate the alarm include the removal
    or departure of the user of a bed, the reaching of a preset temperature,
    pressure of humidity condition, or the slipping or removal of a bedclothing
    item.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    658,    for attachments or accessories used with a bed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 568+ for article placement
    or removal indicating system; and subclasses 573+ for human indicating
    system, especially subclass 575 for sleep indicating system.


CLS 5/941
TXT BLANKET WITH FORCED AIR FLOW:

    A collection of documents disclosing the use of generally flexible human
    body covers, such as blankets, that provide a flow of pressurized air, for
    the purpose of ventilating, heating, or cooling a user.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    423,    for devices that provide a flow of forced air for heating or
    cooling.

    726,    for ventilating mattresses with means to force ventilating air.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclass 847 for body protecting devices with fluid supply.

    607,    Surgery: Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses
    104+, especially subclass 107, for thermal applicators.


CLS 5/942
TXT LONGITUDINALLY DIVIDED TOP SURFACE WITH PIVOTABLE SECTION:

    A collection of documents disclosing body supporting top surfaces that are
    composed of at least two adjacent longitudinal sections that are pivotally
    adjustable relative to each other whereby a generally planar supporting
    surface can be changed to a nonplanar surface with at least one of the
    plurality of adjacent longitudinal sections being at an angle to other
    longitudinal sections which support a reclining user.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37.1+,  for sofa beds in which a back supporting section can be pivoted 90#
    relative to a fixed bed portion to thereby widen the bed surface.

    600+,   for invalid beds or surgical supports.


CLS 5/943
TXT WITH HORIZONTALLY MOVABLE TOP SURFACE:

    A collection of documents disclosing user supporting, generally horizontal
    top surface portions that are adapted to move longitudinally or laterally
    relative to a base portion, to move the user relative to the base portion,
    the top portion adapted to be returned to its initial position, which is
    centered relative to its supporting base portion.

    (1)     Note.  The movable top portions often move a patient into a cavity
    in an examining or treating device (e.g., for X-raying) and return the
    patient to the initial position after examination or treatment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81.1+,  for invalid lift and transfer devices.

    600+,   for invalid beds or surgical supports.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 102+ for
    horizontally adjustable surfaces.


CLS 5/944
TXT WITH UPSTANDING FIRM MASSAGING PROJECTIONS:

    A collection of documents disclosing the use of a plurality of generally
    rigid projections on a body supporting surface to provide a massaging of a
    body resting on said projections.

    (1)     Note.  This collection excludes nonplanar body supports in which
    soft body accommodating projections of foam or the like are adapted to be
    substantially deformed by a user resting thereon.


CLS 5/945
TXT INFLATABLE BABY SUPPORT WITH INFLATABLE PERIPHERAL GUARD:

    A collection of documents disclosing the use of inflatable enclosures, such
    as a crib, having an integral inflatable side or end guard that is
    generally used to safely support an infant.

    (1)     Note.  This collection excludes inflatable mattresses that are
    combined with noninflatable peripheral guards.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93.1+,  for a crib.

    644,    for an inflatable pillow.

    655,    for a support especially adapted for infant support.

    706+,   for an inflatable mattress.


CLS 5/946
TXT CRIB BUMPER:

    A collection of documents disclosing the use of a soft, flexible, generally
    vertical protective device covering a substantial portion of the inner side
    and end walls of a crib, for the purpose of protecting the user of the crib
    from bumping against the generally rigid side or end walls (e.g., rails) of
    the crib.

    (1)     Note.  The crib bumpers are generally removably positioned relative
    to the rails of the crib with the aid of fasteners such as strings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93.1,   for cribs.

    424,    for safety devices.

    663,    for rail or frame protecting devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 345.1 for bumper or scuff plate used with
    supports of general utility.


CLS 5/947
TXT WALL MOUNTED BABY CHANGER:

    A collection of documents disclosing the use of wall mounted supports
    adapted to temporarily support a baby during diaper changes with a baby
    supporting portion adapted to pivot from a stored vertical position to a
    horizontal use position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    655,    for supports especially adapted for infant support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports: Racks, subclasses 189+ for knockdown type.

    312,    Supports, Cabinet Structure, subclass 348.1 for knockdown or setup
    type.


CLS 5/948
TXT BODY SUPPORT WITH UNIQUE, SPECIFIC FILLER MATERIAL:

    A collection of documents disclosing the use of body supports comprising
    specific filler materials other than springs, conventional foams, air,
    water, gas, or flowable beads.

    (1)     Note.  This collection includes unconventional filler materials
    within supports for the body or body portions, used to provide support,
    with any other function being incidental to the body supporting function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    413,    for a sleeping bag.

    636+,   for a pillow.

    652+,   for a cushion.

    690+,   for a mattress.


CLS 5/949
TXT Comprising animal derived product:

    A collection of documents under art collection 948 disclosing the use of
    animal derived products such as the hair of various animals (e.g., wool) or
    products  made by worms such as silk.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500     and 502, for multilayered bedclothes, such as blankets or quilts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 16 for treated
    fauna.


CLS 5/950
TXT Comprising feathers or down:

    A collection of documents under art collection 949 disclosing the use of
    bird plumage.

    (1)     Note.  The feathers or down, used by themselves or mixed with other
    materials, are chosen primarily for their good thermal insulating
    characteristics.


CLS 5/951
TXT Comprising plant derived material:

    A collection of documents under art collection 948 in which the filler
    material includes natural flora products such as cotton, coconut fiber,
    straw, grass, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Paper, which is cellulose based, is included in this
    collection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    487,    for disposable bedclothing made from paper.

    924,    for devices under the class that include cardboard.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 17+ for
    treated flora.


CLS 5/952
TXT Comprising artificial fiber:

    A collection of documents under art collection 948 disclosing the use of
    various manmade fibers as a filler for a body support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 74 for sheet
    encasing fibered material, subclasses 357+ for coated or structurally
    defined fiber, and subclass 903 for microfiber.


CLS 5/953
TXT Comprising structurally defined foam material or configuration:

    A collection of documents under art collection 948 disclosing the use of an
    expanded cellular substance having unconventional physical or chemical
    properties.

    (1)     Note.  Since expanded cellular foams are conventional materials of
    construction for body supports, placing a document in this subclass
    requires some inherently unconventional chemical or physical property of
    the foam, or the foam must have been modified by the addition of other
    materials to exhibit an unconventional physical or chemical property.

    (2)     Note.  Unusual foam configurations can include the use of chunks,
    chips, layers, blocks, or unusual shapes and sizes of conventional foams,
    or an unusual aggregation, such as layering of conventional foams.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    655.9,  for cushion-type supports comprising foam materials.

    740,    for mattresses with unusual foam material or configuration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, digest 1 for chairs or seats comprised of foam
    materials.


CLS 5/954
TXT FIREPROOF:

    A collection of documents disclosing the use of materials especially useful
    in constructing supports under the class definition that have fireproof or
    fire resistant properties.

    (1)     Note.  This collection excludes fireproof mattresses that are
    adapted to support substantially the whole body of a user and bedclothing
    that is fireproof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    483,    for fireproof bedclothing.

    698,    for fireproof mattresses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, digest 5 for chairs and seats with fireproof
    components.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 443+ for
    composite laminate including asbestos and subclasses 920+ for fire or heat
    protection feature.


CLS 7/
TTL COMPOUND TOOLS

CLS 7/
TXT

    This class includes a hand-held tool which has thereon miscellaneous
    combinations of diverse tools, not properly classifiable in any other tool
    class.

    (1)     Note. Novel features of specific tools forming part of a structure
    proper for this class are cross-referenced to the appropriate tool classes.

    (2)     Note. Class 401, Coating Implements With Material Supply, is the
    locus of patents to implements which include plural tools as defined in the
    following subclasses:

    9+,     plural, generally simultaneously operable coating tools for plural
    or curved surfaces.

    16+,    diverse coating tools.

    29+,    plural coating tools, including one which is projectable and
    retractable.

    34+,    plural, simultaneously exposed, coating tools, each with individual
    supply.

    37+,    plural coating tools with supply to less than all.

    52,     a tool which is a piece of solid coating material for rubbing
    contact with a surface, and a noncoating tool.

    195,    a tool which applies or spreads fluent coating material, and a
    noncoating tool.



    (3)     Note.  Search the following classes for tools to perform a given
    function combined with additional tool structure to perform an additional
    function, all within the definition of the noted classes:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclasses 103+.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 105+.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 270+ for compound assembly hand tools,
    subclasses 592+ for a process of applying a nail, staple or clip, and
    subclass 560.1 for a convertible machine of the vise type, not elsewhere
    provided for.

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 123+ for cutlery combined with other devices
    provided for in that class definition and subclass 452 for a static
    implement having plural tools for performing successive dissimilar
    operations; e.g., rough-cut and finishing or wood cutting and graphite
    cutting operations.

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, appropriate subclasses, especially
    subclasses 626+.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 89.1+ for a
    blotting tool combined with another tool for a purpose other than drying.

    42,     Firearms, subclass 53 for pistol swords, subclass 86 for bayonets,
    and subclass 90 for wirecutters combined with guns or bayonets.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, appropriate subclasses.

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 400.04+ for hand rakes combined with other
    tools.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclass 20 for tools under that class
    definition.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 460 for disclosure of a work-gripping
    clamp having an adjacent deforming tool face, and subclasses 71, 186, 204,
    325+, and 464 for disclosure of a deforming tool and a cutting tool in one
    structure.

    81,     Tools, appropriate subclasses for specific tool detail.

    86,     Ammunition and Explosive-Charge Making, subclass 22 for combined
    tools adapted for preparing a fuse for application to a cap.

    114,    Ships, subclasses 221+ for implements and tools used with ships.

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 233 for combinations of ash receivers and a cigar
    tip cutters, subclass 243 for combined or compound smoking device cleaning
    tools, and subclasses 248 and 253+ for combined cigar tip cutters,
    perforators and slitters.

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 75.3+ for compound manicuring implements.

    140,    Wireworking, subclasses 123+ for wireworking implements and tools
    under that class definition.

    168,    Farriery, subclasses 45+ for compound tools employed by blacksmiths
    in fitting and securing in place the shoes of cattle and horses.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 371+, especially subclass 375 for
    compound earth working tools, such as a tool with two hoe portions.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 327 for compound earth
    boring tool, such as a tool composed of rolling and nonrolling cutters or
    for a combined bit and reamer.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 234 for a pocket-carried
    receptacle having diverse tools therein.

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, subclass 96.5 for glass scoring
    means combined with breaking means.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclasses 12+ for combined
    apparatus for stretching and attaching flaccid material to a rigid
    supporting surface by applying a member, e.g., nail, staple, etc.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 2+ and 51+
    for combined handling implements.

    299,    Mining and In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, appropriate
    subclasses.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses as set forth in
    (2) Note, above.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 223+ for
    a tool including cutting edges for drilling and additional cutting edges
    for reaming or counter sinking.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 183 for a compound hand tool having alternatively used plural
    shaping surfaces mounted on a common handle, and subclass 184 for a
    compound implement including distinct shaping and severing means.

    452,    Butchering, appropriate subclasses for compound tools used in
    butchering, particularly subclasses 2+ for a shrimp processing tool,
    subclasses 6+ for a hand tool used to process other crustaceans, subclass
    17 for a bivalve opening tool, subclass 103 for a compound hand tool used
    for fish scaling, hair or feather removal, subclasses 132+ for a hand-held
    skinning tool, subclass 137 for a hand-held deboning tool, subclasses
    145-147 for hand held meat tenderizers, and subclasses 161 and 166+ for
    fish processing hand tools.

    463,    Amusement Devices: Games, subclass 47.4 for a striking type of
    weapon for use on a human being (e.g., a police club, etc.) which is
    combined with a cutter.


CLS 7/100
TXT AUTOMOBILE REPAIR OR MAINTENANCE:

    Tools under the class definition which are organized, assembled, or
    specialized for the task or repair or maintenance of automotive vehicles or
    specific parts thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 104.011+ for
    cylinder piston and plug cleaners.

    81,     Tools, subclass 9.24 for engine tappet adjusters.


CLS 7/101
TXT WATCHMAKING OR REPAIR:

    Tools under the class definition which are organized, assembled, or
    specialized for the task of repair, making or maintenance of clocks,
    watches, or the like.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 700+ for assembling tools for watches,
    especially subclass 807 for a tool for assembling a crystal to a watch or
    clock.

    81,     Tools, subclass 6 for watchmakers' tools provided for under that
    class definition.


CLS 7/102
TXT SHOEMAKING OR LEATHER WORKING:

    Tools under the class definition which are organized or specialized to the
    task of shoe repair or leather working.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclasses 103+ for boot and shoe making
    tools.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclass 20 for leather working tools under
    that class definition.


CLS 7/103
TXT CARPET INSTALLATION, FINISHING, OR TRIMMING:

    Tools under the class definition which are organized, assembled, or
    specialized to the problems of carpet installation, edge finishing, or edge
    trimming.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 200+ for implements or apparatus utilizing mechanical advantage
    to stretch a carpet when installing it.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 8.6 for devices
    to aid in stretching a carpet when installing it.


CLS 7/104
TXT SPECIALIZED TO MINING OR MINER'S USE, E.G., MINER'S CANDLESTICK:

    Tools under the class definition which are organized, assembled, or
    specialized to the various tasks encountered by a miner and which may
    include a candlestick or means to support a candle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    431,    Combustion, subclass 296 for a miner's candlestick holder and a
    hook, clamp, or spike for securing the holder to a wall or other external
    structure.


CLS 7/105
TXT HOUSE PAINTING, PAPER HANGING, OR GLAZING:

    Tools under the class definition which are specialized to the task of (1)
    interior or exterior house painting, (2) hanging of wallpaper, (3)
    installation of window glass, or (4) any combination of the above.


CLS 7/106
TXT FISHING:

    Tools under the class definition which are organized, assembled, or
    specialized to the catching, landing or cleaning of fish.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 4+ for the
    various devices, therein classified, used in the art of fishing.


CLS 7/107
TXT ELECTRICAL CONNECTION FORMING OR WIRE PREPARATION:

    Tools under the class definition specialized to (1) the forming of a
    connection between a conductor wire and another conductor element, or (2)
    the preparation of a conductor wire prior to forming a connection.


CLS 7/108
TXT With screwdriver:

    Tools under subclass 107 wherein one member of the compound tool is a
    screwdriver.


CLS 7/109
TXT FOR STOVE, RANGE, OR FURNACE USE:

    Tools under the class definition wherein at least one member of the
    compound tool is specialized to the use or maintenance of a stove, cooking
    range, or furnace.


CLS 7/110
TXT COOKING, BAKING, OR KITCHEN FOOD PREPARATION:

    Tools under the class definition which are organized, assembled, or
    specialized to the task of cooking or baking food or the preparation of
    food.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126     and 151+, for receptacle openers and closure removers, e.g., can
    openers, bottle crown removers, etc.


CLS 7/111
TXT Rolling pin, combined or convertible:

    Tools under subclass 110 comprising a food or dough roller having handles
    at either end (1) combined with an implement or tool having a diverse
    function, or (2) having interchangeable or rearrangeable parts for
    conversion to an implement or tool having a diverse function.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, subclass 13 for a rolling pin or a pastry roller
    which includes only that part of the roller structure and its support which
    is rotatably mounted except that a cover or a pad, per se, that is
    disclosed or claimed solely for or in combination with such a roller is
    included herein.


CLS 7/112
TXT With culinary fork:

    Tools under subclass 110 wherein one of the tools is kitchen or eating
    related and is formed of two or more tines or prongs and is used for
    piercing or otherwise picking up foodstuff.


CLS 7/113
TXT With knife or cutter means:

    Tools under subclass 110 wherein one of the tools is in the form of a knife
    or cutter.


CLS 7/114
TXT WEEDING, GARDENING, OR LIGHT AGRICULTURAL OR EARTHWORKING USE:

    Tools under the class definition specialized for light agricultural use
    such as planting, weeding, gardening in general, or light digging,
    trenching, or the like.

    (1)     Note.  Hand carried military intrenching tools, when combined with
    another tool, the combination being proper for this class, are provided for
    in this or an indented subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Pruning tools, such as axes, saws, or other cutting tools
    are not considered to be "agricultural" for this subclass.


CLS 7/115
TXT Pitch fork:

    Tools under subclass 114 wherein at least one of the tools is formed of two
    or more tines or prongs at the end of an elongate handle and is used for
    piercing or otherwise picking up material to be moved.


CLS 7/116
TXT Spade or shovel:

    Tools under subclass 114 wherein at least one of the tools has a handle
    portion attached to a somewhat flattened scoop-like portion which has for
    its primary purpose that of digging into the earth to move or remove same,
    and is commonly known as a spade or shovel.

    (1)     Note.  Compound tools having thereon structure which is commonly
    known as a garden hoe, will be found in subclass 114 above.


CLS 7/117
TXT SPECIALIZED TO WIRE FENCE INSTALLATION OR REPAIR:

    Tools under the class definition which are organized, assembled, or
    otherwise specialized to the installation or repair of fences which have
    wire as a structural component.


CLS 7/118
TXT POCKETKNIFE TYPE:

    Tools under the class definition which are foldable or otherwise
    retractable into a common handle or sheath and generally resemble a common
    "pocketknife".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 151+ for pocket tools showing and claiming
    handles for cutlery implements or showing cutlery and other tools but
    claiming only features limited to cutlery.  This class (7) includes patents
    showing and claiming cutlery implements combined with other tools and
    handles for tools showing cutlery implements and other tools.

    86,     Ammunition and Explosive-Charge Making, subclasses 31+ for pocket
    tools specially designed for loading fireworks and bursting charges.


CLS 7/119
TXT With gauge or other measuring means, e.g., ruler, level, etc.:

    Tools under subclass 118 wherein one of the tools functions to measure
    size, distance, angle, or any other measurable attribute.


CLS 7/120
TXT With abrasive sharpening means:

    Tools under subclass 118 provided with abrasive means, usually on the
    handle of the case or sheath, intended to function as a knife or blade
    sharpener.


CLS 7/121
TXT THIMBLE AND THREAD CUTTER:

    Tools under the class definition wherein a thimble, i.e., a cap or cover
    used in sewing to protect the finger when pushing the needle, is combined
    with a means to cut sewing thread.


CLS 7/122
TXT SHINGLE GAUGE OR HATCHET, HAND AXE, OR HAMMER:

    Tools under the class definition wherein a hatchet, hand axe, or hammer is
    combined with a linear distance gauge which provides the necessary or
    pertinent distances required when installing roofing shingles.


CLS 7/123
TXT WITH BUTTON HOOK OR SHOE HORN:

    Tools under the class definition wherein at least one of the tools is (1) a
    hook-like member designed to facilitate the insertion of a button into a
    buttonhole, or (2) a member designed to facilitate the insertion of the
    foot into a shoe or boot.


CLS 7/124
TXT MUTILATING ERASER COMBINED WITH BURNISHER:

    Tools under the class definition for removing markings in the nature of
    indicia from a sheet, which tool defaces the surface of the sheet in the
    operation (e.g., rasp, scraper, abradant); and another tool which restores
    the defaced surface to an acceptably smooth condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 105.51 for a
    burnisher combined with a nonmutilating (i.e., rubber) eraser.

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 123+ for a bladed tool which erases by scraping
    a surface, combined with a nonerasing device other than a tool.


CLS 7/125
TXT PLIER TYPE:

    Tools under the class definition having the dominant or general structure
    of pliers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, particularly subclasses 300+ for tool-jaw(s) positioned by
    relatively movable plural handles (e.g., pliers).


CLS 7/126
TXT With receptacle opener or closure remover: Tools under subclass 125 wherein
    at least one of the tools is designed to open or remove receptacle closures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151+,   for receptacle openers or closure removers not combined with or in
    the form of pliers.


CLS 7/127
TXT With tool or plier handle:

    Tools under subclass 125 wherein one or more tools are integral with and/or
    mounted on the manually held operating levers at a point up to, but not
    including, the lever pivot and/or pivot hubs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132+,   for plier-type tools having cutters formed on the pivot hubs of the
    pliers handles.


CLS 7/128
TXT With tool pivoted to plier:

    Tools under subclass 127 wherein one or more tools are mounted on a pivot
    on some part of the plier.

    (1)     Note.  The tool referred to in this definition need not be the tool
    which is mounted on the manually held operating lever.


CLS 7/129
TXT With cutter:

    Tools under subclass 127 wherein at least one of the tools is a cutter.

    (1)     Note.  The tool referred to in this definition need not be the tool
    which is mounted on the manually held operating lever.


CLS 7/130
TXT Nipper:

    Tools under subclass 129 wherein a cutter is in the form of a nipper, i.e.,
    the cutting jaws meet to sever the material between them.


CLS 7/131
TXT Shear:

    Tools under subclass 129 wherein the cutter is in the form of a shear,
    i.e., the cutting edges of the blades move past and in substantial contact
    with each other in the cutting operation.


CLS 7/132
TXT With cutter:

    Tools under subclass 125 wherein at least one of the tools is a cutter.


CLS 7/133
TXT Nipper:

    Tools under subclass 132 wherein the cutter is in the form of a nipper,
    i.e., the cutting jaws meet to sever the material between them.


CLS 7/134
TXT Shear:

    Tools under subclass 132 wherein the cutter is in the form of a shear,
    i.e., the cutting edges of the blades move past and in substantial contact
    during the cutting operation.


CLS 7/135
TXT Scissors:

    Tools under subclass 134 wherein the shear-type cutter is in the form of
    ordinary hand scissors.


CLS 7/136
TXT And comb:

    Tools under subclass 135 wherein one of the tools is a scissors and one a
    comb.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 233.5 and the Notes thereto for combined shears
    and combs where the comb comprises a guide, guard, or gauge for the
    material being cut.

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 219+ for combs, per se, and combined with other
    devices and not elsewhere provided for. See particularly subclass 148 for
    combs having a guide or rest for scissors.


CLS 7/137
TXT With hammer:
    Tools under subclass 125 wherein one of the tools is a hammer or hammerhead.


CLS 7/138
TXT WRENCH:

    Tools under the class definition wherein one of the tools is structurally
    designed to grip a workpiece between opposed jaws in order to exert a
    twisting strain for turning the workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  Tap wrenches and die stocks are considered wrenches for this
    and indented subclasses when such devices are combined with diverse tools
    not elsewhere classified.

    (2)     Note.  Devices of the wrench type which exert a twisting strain on
    screw-type receptacle closures, for the purpose of opening such closures,
    will be found in this and the indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 52+ for a wrench, per se, particularly subclass
    181 for a wrench provided with a cutter attachment or adjunct which is
    operated by the jaw actuating means (Class 7 takes a wrench combined with a
    general purpose cutter and not meeting the above criteria), subclass 185.1
    for a convertible wrench, subclass 185.2 for a wrench having an additional
    clamp jaw, and subclass 437 for wrenches or screwdrivers which have a
    work-turning portion inserted into a cavity and are usable as, or combined
    with, a diverse wrench.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and Apparatus
    subclasses 8+ for methods of making screw threads, per se, and subclasses
    57+ for apparatuses making screw threads, per se.


CLS 7/139
TXT Adjustable, e.g., monkey wrench, pipe wrench, etc.:

    Tools under subclass 138 wherein the jaws which grip or contact the
    workpiece to be twisted are manually adjustable in size.


CLS 7/140
TXT And brace:

    Tools under subclass 139 wherein one of the tools comprises a bowed or
    generally U-shaped handle designed to cooperate with the hand to impart
    rotation to a bit or other tool.


CLS 7/142
TXT With cutter:

    Tools under subclass 139 wherein one of the tools is a knife or other
    cutter means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 181+ for wrenches having a cutter attachment.


CLS 7/143
TXT HAMMER:

    Tools under the class definition comprising an impacting instrument having
    the dominant or general structure of a hammer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110+,   for a hammer used for the purpose of tenderizing meat.

    122,    for a hammer or hatchet combined with a guide or gauge to aid in
    placing shingles.

    137,    for a plier-type tool combined with hammerhead structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 26 for claw hammers.


CLS 7/144
TXT With cutter:

    Tools under subclass 143 wherein one of the tools is a knife or other
    cutter means.


CLS 7/145
TXT Axe, hatchet, or adz head:

    Tools under subclass 144 wherein an impacting head is mounted on the end of
    a handle member, one end of the head having a cutting edge thereon and such
    head being of the general structure of a hatchet, axe, or adz.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 308.1+ for axes, hatchets and adzes where the
    hammer surface is not claimed.


CLS 7/146
TXT Fixed form:

    Tools under subclass 143 wherein the relative positions of the various
    parts are not altered during the various operations of which the device is
    capable.


CLS 7/147
TXT Integral:

    Tools under subclass 146 consisting of a single, unitary piece of material.


CLS 7/148
TXT HANDSAW:

    Tools under the class definition wherein one of the tools is designed for
    cutting material and comprising a thin flat blade having a continuous
    series of teeth on an edge of the blade.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 166.3+ for handsaw, per se.


CLS 7/149
TXT Hacksaw frame type:

    Tools under subclass 148 wherein the saw blade is stretched between the
    ends of a generally U-shaped frame.


CLS 7/150
TXT With gauge or other measuring means, e.g., ruler, level, etc.:

    Tools under subclass 148 combined with tools which function to measure
    size, distance, angle, or any other measurable attribute.


CLS 7/151
TXT RECEPTACLE OPENER OR CLOSURE REMOVER:

    Tools under the class definition wherein one of the tools is designed to
    open or remove receptacle closures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118+,   for a pocketknife combined with a closure remover.

    126,    for a plier-type tool having a closure remover thereon.

    166,    for crowbars or prybars used to open wooden crates.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 3.07+ for receptacle closure removers, per se, or
    in combination with devices other than tools.


CLS 7/152
TXT Can opener cutter:

    Tools under subclass 151 wherein the closure remover is a can opener in the
    form of a cutter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 400+ for can openers, per se, subclass 407 for
    can openers with spout formers, and subclass 408 for can openers combined
    with other cutlery.


CLS 7/153
TXT With tear strip puller:

    Tools under subclass 152 combined with a device to pull a tear strip,
    usually by winding.


CLS 7/154
TXT With corkscrew:

    Tools under subclass 152 combined with a helical device for drawing corks
    from bottles, commonly called a corkscrew.


CLS 7/155
TXT Corkscrew:

    Tools under subclass 151 wherein the closure remover is or is combined with
    a helical device used for drawing corks from bottles.


CLS 7/156
TXT With cutter:

    Tools under subclass 151 combined with a knife blade or other cutter means.


CLS 7/157
TXT PIPE OR TUBE END FORMER AND/OR CUTTER:

    Tools under the class definition wherein (1) one of the tools is
    specifically designed to cut a pipe or tube-like structure in a direction
    transverse to its longitudinal axis, or (2) one of the tools is designed to
    reshape the end of a pipe or tube after it has been cut or otherwise
    deformed.


CLS 7/158
TXT CUTTER COMBINED WITH OTHER TOOL OR TOOLS:

    Tools under the class definition wherein one of the tools is a knife or
    other cutter means.

    (1)     Note.  For cutters combined with other structure and specialized to
    a particular use, search this class (7), subclasses 100-124. For cutters
    combined with specific tool structure, search this class (7), appropriate
    tool subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 123+ for cutters combined with other articles
    of cutlery under that class definition.

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 400.05+ for rakes combined with cutters.

    289,    Knots and Knot Tying, subclass 17 for combined hand knotters and
    cutters.


CLS 7/159
TXT Brush hook and axe:

    Tools under subclass 158 wherein the cutter is an axe or the like and is
    combined with hook-like structure designed to grip or pull tree limbs or
    brush when clearing land.


CLS 7/160
TXT Desk use tool, e.g., letter opener, pencil sharpener:

    Tools under subclass 158 wherein one of the tools, not necessarily the
    cutter, is of the stationery type, that is commonly associated with an
    office or desk.


CLS 7/161
TXT With hook:

    Tools under subclass 158 wherein the cutter is combined with a hook shape
    structure designed to handle material or articles.


CLS 7/162
TXT With means specialized to manicure use:

    Tools under subclass 158 wherein one of the tools, not necessarily the
    cutter, is specialized to finger or toe nail care.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 73+ for manicure tools, per se.


CLS 7/163
TXT With gauge or other measuring means, e.g., ruler, level, etc.:

    Tools under subclass 158 combined with tools which function to measure
    size, distance, angle, or any other measurable attribute.


CLS 7/164
TXT WITH GAUGE OR OTHER MEASURING MEANS, E.G., RULER, LEVEL, ETC.:

    Tools under the class definition wherein one of the tools functions to
    measure size, distance, angle, or any other measurable attribute.


CLS 7/165
TXT WITH SCREWDRIVER:

    Tools under the class definition wherein one of the tools is a flattened
    blade designed to impart rotation to a common screw-type fastener.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for a tool specialized to electrical connection forming having a
    screw driver thereon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 436+ for tools which have a force-exerting
    portion inserted into a cavity (e.g., screwdrivers).


CLS 7/166
TXT CROWBAR OR PRYBAR:

    Tools under the class definition wherein one of the tools is usually
    wedge-shaped at the working end and is used as a pry or lever.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for crowbars combined with other wire fence installation or repair
    tools.


CLS 7/167
TXT HOLDERS OR HANDLES:

    Devices under the class definition adapted to serve as a handle or holder
    for tools of this class type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 151+ for pocket tools showing and claiming
    handles for cutlery implement or showing cutlery and other tools but
    claiming only features limited to cutlery.  This class (7) includes patents
    showing and claiming cutlery implements combined with other tools and
    handles for tools showing cutlery implements and other tools.

    81,     Tools, subclasses 177.1+ for a wrench or screwdriver handle, and
    subclasses 489+, the generic locus for a tool handle which is not disclosed
    for use with a particular tool, particularly subclass 490 for such a tool
    handle having a storage compartment for another unattached tool which is
    not claimed.

    86,     Ammunition and Explosive-Charge Making, subclasses 21+ for pocket
    tools especially designed for loading fireworks and bursting charges.


CLS 7/168
TXT For pivoted tools:

    Holders or handles under subclass 167 for tools which pivot into and out of
    a working or use position.


CLS 7/169
TXT INTEGRAL:

    Tools under the class definition consisting of a single piece of material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166,    for crowbars or prybars which may have the integral feature.


CLS 7/170
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Tools under the class definition not provided for in any of the preceding
    subclasses.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 7/900
TXT RESILIENT PIVOT:

    Tools which have two or more parts which move relative to each other about
    a given point upon the application of pressure, and which return to their
    original position upon release of that pressure.


CLS 7/901
TXT MAGNETIC FEATURE:

    Tools which utilize one or more magnets in their operation or use.


CLS 8/
TTL BLEACHING AND DYEING;  FLUID  TREATMENT AND CHEMICAL  MODIFICATION OF
    TEXTILES  AND FIBERS

CLS 8/
TXT

    I.      This class takes the characters of processes set forth in the
    following sections, the products of such processes where not more
    specifically provided for, and in the specified instances, compositions
    used in the processes:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for a single or plural layer web, sheet strand or fiber product, as defined
    therein, which may be coated or impregnated, but in which the coating or
    impregnant is other than a bleach, dye, chemical modifier or treatment
    material as provided for in this class (8).



    II.     This is the generic class for processes of and compositions for
    dyeing materials of any kind (subclasses 400-696), including specific
    treatments peculiarly related to dyeing, such as mordanting, weighting,
    color protecting, etc.

    1.      For coloring of plastic materials by incorporation of coloring
    matter in solution or plastic composition before shaping, see the
    appropriate classes, e.g., Class 106; Class 252; Class 260; etc.

    2.      In subclasses 400-696 the main line subclass title indicates
    whether the particular subclass and its indents are limited to processes,
    compositions, etc., or combinations of such.

    3.      In instances where subject matter proper for subclasses 400-696 is
    combined with subject matter proper for other main classes, unless
    contraindicated elsewhere, if the dye steps are followed by subject matter
    proper for another main class the combination is classified in the other
    class and cross-referenced here.  Dyeing steps following or simultaneous
    with steps proper for other classes are generally classified here.

    4.      The printing compositions employed in this class are basically
    distinguished from the printing inks of Class 106, Compositions: Coating or
    Plastic, in that the latter are intended essentially for coating the
    surface of a material in patterns or designs, while in this class the
    coloration is produced by imbibition and absorption by or combination with
    the fibers of the material.  Class 106 usually involves an insoluble
    pigment suspended in an oleaginous vehicle, while here a soluble dye in an
    aqueous paste is usually involved.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and and Related Compositions, subclass 59 for coloring of fuel
    oil.

    106,    Composition:  Coating or Plastic, for the coloring of coating or
    plastic compositions in general, e.g., for the coloring of lacquers and
    varnishes or cellulose solutions prior to extrusion.

    148,    Metal Treatment, for producing a reactive coating on solid metal
    utilizing an organic dyestuff.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, appropriate subclasses for dyestuffs
    which are new carbon compounds even though they have claimed utility as a
    dye.  Patents containing claims to a material dyed therewith are in Class
    260, except where the dyeing process is also claimed, in which case, the
    patent belongs in this class (8).

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    subclasses 20, 73-78, and 245 for coloring or shading or employment of
    colored materials when combined with a significant shaping or molding
    operation within the class definition.  Note particularly subclass 78
    pertaining to dyeing or incorporating of dye susceptible materials.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:   Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    for dyed composition, process of dyeing and dyed material all limited to an
    edible.

    427,    Coating Processes, for the application of a colored solidifiable
    coating to a surface.  Class 427 takes the subcombination of coating of a
    dyed article, except where the coating is a mordant or fixing agent, a
    weighting agent for a textile or is reacted with a textile base to
    chemically modify the same.  Class 8 takes the combined processes of dyeing
    and coating in any sequence other than mere recital of dyeing with no
    disclosure of how the dyeing is carried out, in the specification, nor dye
    materials used.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, appropriate subclasses for dyeing steps combined with radiation
    imaging steps in any sequence.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 4+ for
    measuring or testing processes involving micro-organisms, cells, or tissues
    which may include the staining of the micro-organisms, cells, or tissues
    for observation purposes.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses for
    dyestuffs which are new carbon containing synthetic resins even though they
    have claimed utility as a dye.  Patents containing claims to a novel dye
    and claims to a material dyed therewith are in Class 520, except where the
    dyeing process is also claimed, in which case, the patent belongs in this
    class (8).  See Class 523, subclasses 1+ for the coloring of a synthetic
    resin or natural rubber composition.



    III.    This is the generic class for processes of and compositions for
    treating hides, skins, feathers and animal tissues with chemicals and
    fluids (subclasses 94.1+).

    IV.     This is the generic class for processes of bleaching materials of
    any kind (subclasses 101.1+).

    V.      This is the generic class for processes of and compositions for
    improving felting properties of textile fibers, hair, fur, feathers,
    etc.,e.g., carroting (subclass 112).

    VI.     This is the generic class for the chemical modification of textiles
    and organic fibers (subclasses 114 to 130) and takes compositions for this
    purpose when not more specifically provided for elsewhere e.g.,
    parchmentizing and mercerizing compositions.

    VII.    This is also the class for special types of processes for treating
    textiles and fibers with fluids even though the fluids do not chemically
    modify the textiles and fibers, namely,

    a.      Plasticizing or swelling of artificial fibers whether or not
    combined with stretching (subclasses 130.1+).

    b.      Fiber protecting during treatments provided for in this class
    (subclass 133).

    c.      Color protecting during treatments provided for in this class
    (subclass 134).

    d.      Cleaning and laundering (subclasses 137+).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 2+ and 35+ for processes not elsewhere provided
    for, for subjecting material to compressive force by causing solid surfaces
    to approach one another, by forcing the material through a constriction, or
    by tightening a flexible member about the material.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, which is the generic class
    for such subject matter, and see note (I) to the main class definition
    thereof for the line with this class (8).

    427,    Coating Processes, for generic processes of coating or impregnating
    materials including textiles, leather, paper, etc.  For a more detailed
    line between 427 and this class, see the reference to Class 8 in the class
    definition of Class 427.



    VIII.Manipulative processes for the treatment of textile fibers of fabrics,
    hides, skins and leather with chemicals and fluids for a purpose provided
    for in this class which are of general applicability are placed in
    subclasses 147+, even though limited by claim terminology to a particular
    treatment, e.g., dyeing, bleaching, tanning, etc.

    IX.     This class has no apparatus, per se, but where a process or
    product, classifiable in this class, is claimed along with claims to
    apparatus, the patent is placed in this class (8) and cross referenced to
    the appropriate apparatus class.

    (1)     Note.  A  list of superiority of some composition classes appears
    in the main class definition of Class 252, Compositions (5) Note.  This
    note in Class 252 explains classification of a generic composition with
    several disclosed uses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, for apparatus in
    general for drying or contacting solids with vapors or gases; and see Class
    26, Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclass(es) 81, 92 or 106 for the
    combination therewith of means for expanding (e.g., stretching, spreading)
    running length webs of cloth.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, for apparatus for treating
    textiles with fluids and dyes.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, for fur and leather working apparatus.

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses for apparatus not elsewhere
    provided for, for subjecting material to compressive force by causing solid
    surfaces to approach one another, by forcing the material through a
    constriction, or by tightening a flexible member about the material

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses, for apparatus for
    coating textiles.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, for apparatus for treating
    solids with liquids.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, particularly subclasses 6, 7, 64
    to 67, 70+, 126, 134, and 162 for process of dyeing, bleaching or
    chemically purifying fibers, fibrous pulps (as distinguished from strands
    or continuous filaments) and undried waterlaid fibrous webs.  Processes of
    dyeing or bleaching, which as disclosed or claimed, may be applied either
    to a fabric, strand, etc., (classifiable in Class 8), or a pulp or web
    (classifiable in Class 162) are classified in Class 8.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, for apparel making apparatus.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, for apparatus for performing Chemical reactions.



    DEFINITIONS OF TERMS USED



    DYEING

    Is employed in this classification in its understood and accepted meaning
    in the art, that is to say, it denotes imparting a substantially permanent
    color to organic fibrous or filamentous material or other porous material
    by the use of substances, or preparations possessing tincorial properties
    and which are not dependent for their ability to become fixed to the base
    solely upon the presence of an adhesive of bindive vehicle or ingredient,
    as distinguished from the application of an insoluble pigment suspended in
    a bindive vehicle, e.g., paint or any colored coating composition where the
    coloring agent does not actually color the base.

    TEXTILE MATERIAL

    As employed in this classification is limited to organic fibrous and
    filamentous materials, and mixed materials including same as a definite
    component part thereof and not in the popular sense to include all
    materials, e.g., it does not include asbestos and glass fibers adapted to
    be felted, woven or knitted not glass fiber fabric.  In the dyeing
    subclasses (400-696) paper has been grouped with the textile materials.

    FUGITIVE TINTING

    Denotes the application of a temporary or easily removable coloration to a
    material for identification or like purpose.

    MORDANTS

    Are substances of organic or inorganic origin which combine with the
    coloring matter and are used to fix the same in the production of the
    color.  For the purpose of this class, such materials as oils and
    sulfonated oils, soaps, fats and higher acids, are not generally considered
    as mordants, but as coming within the scope of "assistants" in dyeing.

    ACID DYE

    A dye containing organic acid groups, e.g., sulfonic, sulfamic, phosphoric,
    carboxylic, etc., or their salts.  Acid dyes are commonly sodium salts of
    organic acids applied in an acid bath and used to dye wool, polyamide and
    silk.  Acid dyes have the ability to be substantive to substrates with
    basic groups.

    BASIC DYE

    A basic or cationic dye will dye substrates having acidic properties, e.g.,
    polyacrylonitrile, acid modified polyester, etc.  They include
    diphenylmethane, triphenylmethane, xanthene, naphtroperinone,
    quinophthalone, quaternary ammonium group, etc., containing dyes.

    CREPE

    Crepe is a general classification of fabrics characterized by a broad range
    of crinkled or grained surface effects.

    CROSS-LINKER DYE ADDITIVE

    A cross-linker dye additive is a compound added to assist in dyeing which
    reacts chemically with both the dye and substrate, other than due to
    chelate formation.

    DIRECT DYE

    Direct dyes, also known as substantive dyes, are generally sulfonated azo
    compounds very similar to acid dyes in constitution, good for dyeing
    cellulose fibers or protein fibers.

    DISAZO

    Disazo for the purpose of this class is define d as a compound containing
    two or more azo (-N=N-) groups.

    DISPERSE DYE

    Disperse dyes are water-insoluble, neutral dyes applied to the substrate
    from a fine aqueous suspension, which were originally developed for use in
    dyeing of cellulose acetate and polyester materials.

    DYE ADDITIVE

    A dye additive or assistant is defined to be any material added to a dye to
    help in dyeing and is not basically a part of the dye itself.

    HETERO ATOM

    The hetero atoms are nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, selenium, and tellurium.

    HETERO RING

    A hetero ring is a ring which contains only carbon and hetero atoms.

    METHINE GROUP

    Methine group refers to -CH=.

    MORDANT DYE

    Mordant dyes are dyes which require a mordant in their application and
    which upon combination with the mordant deposit insoluble color on the
    substrate, e.g., dyes with metal chelating groups.

    OXIDATION DYE

    Oxidation dyes are dyes which produce a color by oxidation on the substrate
    of compounds such as arylamino, hydrxyaryl, or similar compounds to
    produce, e.g., aniline black or diphenyl black.  Nitroaniline dyes are
    included.

    REACTIVE DYE

    A reactive dye reacts chemically with a substrate having reactive -H atoms
    thereon, e.g., ester or ether formation with cellulose.

    SOLVENT DYE

    A solvent dye is a dye which si soluble in an organic solvent and is
    commonly introduced in the form of a solution in an organic solvent.

    SULFUR DYE

    Sulfur dyes contain sulfur linkages within their molecules which are
    produced by sulfurization, i.e., heating of organic compounds with sulfur
    or alkali polysulfides.

    SUBSTRATE

    The term substrate is used here to refer to the base material being dyed.

    VAT DYE

    Vat dyes are dyes which are applied to the substrate in reduced, soluble
    form and then oxidize to the original insoluble pigment.  Common vat dyes
    are quinonic dyes and particularly common are anthraquinones and indigoids.


CLS 8/94.1
TXT Processes of treating hides, skins, feathers, and other animal tissues with
    chemicals or fluid and the resulting products not otherwise provided for.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses also include the compositions
    used in the processes provided for and the resulting product unless
    otherwise provided for.

    (2)     Note.  For compositions of matter including hides, skins, feathers,
    or animal tissues, see the appropriate composition class, particularly
    Class 71, Chemistry:  Fertilizers, subclass 18; Class 106, Compositions:
    Coating, or Plastic, subclasses 124.4+, 124.6+, 124.7, and 124.8+; Class
    524, Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 9+.

    (3)     Note.  Class 34, Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids,
    subclasses 280+, is the generic class for the treatment of feathers and
    will take all treatments of feathers not otherwise provided for.  The line
    between Class 34, subclasses 280+ and this subclass is as follows:  Class
    34, subclasses 280+ takes (1) the drying of feathers, (2) nonreactive gas
    or vapor contact of feathers and (3) any other treatment of feathers not
    elsewhere provided for; this subclass takes the treatment of feathers with
    chemicals or fluids except (1) and (2) above.  See the notes to Class 34,
    subclasses 280+ for feather treatments provided for elsewhere.

    (4)     Note.  Apparatus used in carrying out the processes of this and
    indented subclasses are in Class 69, Leather Manufactures, subclasses 28
    and 29+, unless more specifically provided for elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101+,   for the bleaching of hides, skins, feathers and animal tissues.

    137+    and 147+, for washing, cleaning and manipulative processes of
    treating furs, skins and leather with a chemical or fluid.

    404+,   for the dyeing of hides, hair, furs, and feathers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    27,     Undertaking, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 22.1+
    for the treatment of dead bodies of persons for preparation for burial.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 280+ (see
    Note 3).

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclasses 21 and 22 for processes of
    treating hides, skins, fur or leather which do not involve the use of
    chemicals or a fluid, and are not more specifically provided for elsewhere
    and for processes of fluid treatment combined with some other mechanical
    working or nonfluid treatment of leather.

    71,     Chemistry:  Fertilizers, subclass 18 (see Note 2).

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclass and the
    notes thereto for compositions for coating of hides, skins, feathers, or
    animal tissues which form adherent fibers upon the base coated.  Coating
    compositions which react with the hides, skins, feathers or animal tissues
    coated are classified in this or indented subclasses (see Note 2).

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compostions, subclass 692 for electrolytic treatment of hides
    or skins.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 8.57 for compositions for treating tanned
    hides and skins and for treating furs.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, appropriate subclasses, for new
    carbon compounds and processes of preparing them, even though claimed as
    hide, skin, leather, feather, or animal tissue treating agents (see Note 2).

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclass 75 for
    a composition used to preserve and/or improve the appearance of a corpse
    for preparation for burial other than depilatories.

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses
    323, 389, and 412, for processes of forming and adherent skin coating on a
    proteinaceous base.  This and indented subclasses provide for treating
    hides, skins, feather, and animal tissue with coating type materials where
    the material is not used in such amounts as to produce a skin coating but
    only impregnates the base and the purpose of the impregnation is not to
    waterproof.  Waterproofing by impregnation is in Class 427.  Combinations
    of reactive fluid treatments of tanning and coating are in Class 8.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclass 6 for a treated, embellished or simulated feather or
    group of feathers, and subclass 473, for a plural layer product including a
    layer of leather, not elsewhere provided for.

    434,    Education, and Demonstration, subclasses 295+ for processes of
    preparation of biological specimens, and taxidermy and compositions used in
    such processes.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and    Microbiology, subclasses 265+
    for processes of treating hides, skins, feathers and animal tissues that
    include fermentative action and products of such processes not otherwise
    provided for.

    452,    Butchering, for the preparation of a carcass for food, particularly
    subclasses 71+ for removal of hair, feathers, or fish scales and subclasses
    125+ for the removal of skin.


CLS 8/94.11
TXT Processes under subclass 94.1 for the treatment of subcutaneous or internal
    tissues of animals, fowls, fish or reptiles.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the patents in this subclass are directed to methods
    for the production of sutures, tennis racquet strings and the like, from
    gut.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclass 140 for edible containers, animal de- rived and subclasses 276+
    for processes of making same.

    606,    Surgery, subclasses 228+ for surgical sutures and ligatures.


CLS 8/94.12
TXT Processes under subclass 94.1 for the treatment of fish or reptile skins.


CLS 8/94.13
TXT Processes under subclass 94.1 directed to the production of suede leather.

    (1)     Note.  By "suede" is meant leather in which the grain of outermost
    surface has been removed leaving a surface having small free fibers
    projecting therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclasses 9+ for apparatus for, and subclass
    21 for process of, skiving and splitting leather.


CLS 8/94.14
TXT Processes under subclass 94.1 directed to the treatment of fur.

    (1)     Note.  "Fur", as used herein, means the soft fine fibrous coat
    covering the skins of many animals and commonly known as fur as
    distinguished from hair.

    (2)     Note.  Fluid treatments of hides and skins having the fur thereon
    are not classified in this subclass, unless the treatment is for the
    purpose of treating the fur fibers.  For the fluid treatment of furred
    skins, such as tanning, etc., which are not for the purpose of treating the
    fur fiber itself, see the appropriate subclasses below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94.16,  for a process of removing fur from a hide provided for in this
    class.

    112,    for the improving of the felting properties (i.e., carroting).

    128,    for the chemical modification of (a) animal fibers which are in the
    free state, i.e., detached from the skin upon which they occur, or (b)
    fabrics made from such fibers.

    137+,   for cleaning or laundering of furs.

    147+,   for fluid treatment (i.e., manipulative) of hides, skins, and
    leather with fluids.

    404+,   for the dyeing of furs.


CLS 8/94.15
TXT Processes under subclass 94.1 directed to the treatment of untanned skins
    or hides.

    (1)     Note.  Processes of tanning hides and skins, and treatment with
    materials which chemically react with the hide are in subclasses 94.19+,
    unless combined with some other fluid treatment of the untanned hide, or
    skin, provided for in subclasses 94.15+.

    (2)     Note.  Processes included herein may be preparatory to or combined
    with the subsequent step of tanning the hide or skin.  Such combined
    processes are cross referenced below in the appropriate subclass for the
    tanning step if desired.  Combination of a significant tanning step and a
    step preparatory there to, such as dehairing, bating, etc., wherein the
    preparatory step is broadly included or no significant aspects or
    characteristics of the preparatory step are set forth in the claims are
    classified below on the basis of the tanning step.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, for
    insecticidal, fungicidal, germicidal and disinfectant compositions for use
    as a hide or skin saturant.


CLS 8/94.16
TXT Processes under subclass 94.15 for treating a hide or skin for the purpose
    of removing the hair therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses are the generic location for
    depilating processes and compostitons and take all such processes except
    those specifically placed elsewhere as set forth under "SEARCH CLASS" below.

    (2)     Note.  The combination of a significant tanning step and a
    depilating step preparatory thereto, wherein the depilating step is broadly
    recited and no significant aspects of the depilating step are claimed, is
    classified below on the basis of the tanning step.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses 2+ for the mechanical
    liberation of animal fibers from their source for the purpose of preparing
    the fibers for textile use.

    27,     Undertaking, for a method of depilating a corpse combined with
    other undertaking steps.

    30,     Cutlery, for a cutting implement useful in removing hair from the
    skin or body, particularly subclasses 32+ for razors.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, for apparatus and process for depilating a
    hide to be made into leather which does not involve the use of chemicals or
    fluids (e.g., cutting, plucking) and for a process of depilation using
    chemicals or fluid combined with other mechanical steps of leather working
    or treatment.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 13+ for a process of removing hair from the
    skin of a human or animal by cutting (e.g., shaving, etc.).

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 265 for
    depilating compositions and processes involving fermentation.

    451,    Abrading, particularly subclasses 523 through 525 and subclasses
    526+ for the removal of hair by abrasion.

    452,    Butchering, subclasses 71+ for a process of depilating combined
    with other nondepilatory steps of preparing fowl and animal carcasses for
    use as food and depilating apparatus for preparing fowl and animal
    carcasses for food.

    606,    Surgery, subclass 44 for electrical needles useful for depilating
    the living human body, subclasses 133+ for miscellaneous depilating
    apparatus used on living humans not specifically provided for elsewhere.

    935,    Genetic Engineering: Recombinant DNA Technology, Hybrid or Fused
    Cell Technology, and Related Manipulations of Nucleic Acids, which provides
    a search collection for processes of altering the genetic structure of
    microorganisms; genes and methods of modifying genes and their expression;
    vectors and methods of modifying vectors; methods of introducing DNA into a
    cell; microorganisms, per se, which have had their genetic sequence altered
    by recombinant DNA techniques or by cell fusion or by uptake of DNA;
    testing; separation techniques; apparatus; and methods of use of vectors or
    of the genetically engineered microorganisms; methods of gene therapy or
    genetic modification of living organisms.


CLS 8/94.17
TXT Processes under subclass 94.15 for the treatment of hides and skins, for
    the purpose of removing or neutralizing the alkaline material therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  Most of the patents in this subclass are directed to the
    removal or neutralization of lime or other alkaline material used in the
    depilating process.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 193 for alkali or base bindant containing
    compositions.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 265 for
    "bating" or other treatments of hides for removal of lime or other alkaline
    material by processes involving fermentation and the composition used in
    such processes.


CLS 8/94.18
TXT Processes under subclass 94.15 for the treatment of hides and skins in
    which an organic material is employed.

    (1)     Note.  The term "organic material" as used herein means a material
    within the main Class definition of Class 260, Chemistry of Carbon
    Compounds.


CLS 8/94.19
TXT Processes under subclass 94.1, directed to the tanning of hides and skins
    to produce leather.

    (1)     Note.  The term "tanning" as used means the chemical reaction of
    the protein of the hide or skin with another material to produce an
    insoluble compound, includes all such reaction such as with alum, commonly
    known as "tawing".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404+,   for tanning combined with dyeing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    560,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 68 and 69 for tanning materials which
    are new chemical compounds, reaction products or extracts.


CLS 8/94.2
TXT Processes under subclass 94.19, including a significant treatment of the
    tanned hide or skin subsequent to the tanning.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes process of tanning combined with a
    subsequent fluid treatment of the leather as well as a fluid treatment of
    leather, per se, where not otherwise provided for.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101+,   for the bleaching of leather.

    436+,   for the dyeing of leather.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclass 21 for processes of treating and
    working leather not involving a treatment with a fluid, and nonreactive
    fluid treatment combined with the mechanical working or nonfluid treatment
    of leather.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 8.57 and the notes thereto, for compositions
    used in treating leather.

    427,    Coating Processes, particularly subclasses 323, 389 and 412 for
    processes of coating a proteinaceous base.  The line between Class 427 and
    this class with respect to the treatment of leather with fluids and
    chemicals is as follows:  Class 427 takes the treatment of leather which
    results in skin coating on the leather; this and the indented subclasses
    take (1) treatment with a material which chemically reacts with the leather
    treated and (2) treatment with nonreactive fluids which do not result in
    the production of a solid, adherent skin coating.  This and indented
    subclasses include the treatment of leather with material which is capable
    of forming skin coatings when the materials are not used in such amounts as
    to produce a skin coating but only to impregnate or become absorbed in the
    leather.  Class 427 also takes combinations of fluid treatments of hides,
    skins, or leather combined with the subsequent coating of the leather
    except where the said fluid treatment results in the chemical modification
    of the hide, skin, or leather (e.g., tanning).


CLS 8/94.21
TXT Processes under subclass 94.2 in which the subsequent treatment of the
    leather includes the use of an organic material.

    (1)     Note.  See Note (1) to the definition of subclass 94.18.


CLS 8/94.22
TXT Processes under subclass 94.21 in which the subsequent treatment of the
    leather includes the use of a fat, fatty oil, fatty oil acid or salt
    thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Processes of fat liquoring leather are found herein.


CLS 8/94.23
TXT Processes under subclass 94.22 in which the subsequent treatment of the
    leather includes the use of an emulsion containing fat, fatty oil, fatty
    oil acid or salt thereof.


CLS 8/94.24
TXT Processes of tanning under subclass 94.19 in which the tanning agent used
    contains condensation product of an aldehyde and an aromatic compound.

    (1)     Note.  The use of the materials known as "syntans" are classified
    herein.


CLS 8/94.25
TXT Processes or tanning under subclass 94.19 in which the tanning agent
    contains a compound of a heavy metal.

    (1)     Note.  The term "heavy metal" as used here means a metal having a
    specific gravity greater than four.


CLS 8/94.26
TXT Processes of tanning under subclass 94.25 in which the tanning agent
    contains an organic material in addition to a heavy metal.

    (1)     Note.  See Note (1) to the definition of subclass 94.18.

    (2)     Note.  The organic material may be an organic compound of the heavy
    metal or a mixture of an organic compound and a heavy metal compound or the
    organic material and heavy metal compound may be used in any sequence.


CLS 8/94.27
TXT Processes of tanning under subclass 94.25 in which the heavy metal compound
    contains chromium.


CLS 8/94.28
TXT Processes of tanning under subclass 94.25 in which the heavy metal compound
    contains iron.


CLS 8/94.29
TXT Processes of tanning under subclass 94.19 in which the tanning agent
    contains a compound of aluminum.

    (1)     Note.  In this and the indented subclass are placed processes of
    tanning with alum, commonly known as "tawing".


CLS 8/94.3
TXT Processes of tanning under subclass 94.29 in which the tanning agent
    contains a vegetable extract.


CLS 8/94.31
TXT Processes of tanning under subclass 94.19 in which the tanning agents
    contain a waste liquor from a process of liberating cellulose from its
    natural source.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes tanning processes employing a liquor,
    or solution of the residue from the sulfate, sulfite, or soda process of
    liberating cellulose.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 123.11+ and the notes
    thereto, for other compositions containing cellulose liberation liquors.

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives; Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclasses 500+ for such residues and
    reaction products, per se.


CLS 8/94.32
TXT Processes of tanning under subclass 94.19 in which the tanning agent
    contains a vegetable extract.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94.3,   for tanning processes in which vegetable extracts are used with
    aluminum compounds.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    560,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 68 and 69 for vegetable tanning
    extracts, per se, and processes of making the same.


CLS 8/94.33
TXT Processes of tanning under subclass 94.19 in which the tanning agent
    contains an organic material.

    (1)     Note.  See Note (1) to the definition of subclass 94.18.


CLS 8/101
TXT Processes for bleaching or decolorizing textile filaments, strands, yarns,
    or fabrics not elsewhere provided for.

    (1)     Note.  Manipulative processes not restricted in their applicability
    to bleaching, although bleaching may appear in the claims are classified in
    subclasses 147+.

    (2)     Note.  Bleaching in combination with performing some other
    treatment on the material is in subclasses 101+, unless elsewhere provided
    for.  Bowking of vegetable fibers or the scouring of other fibers is found
    in subclasses 101+ and is not cross referenced to subclass 139, except for
    specific novelty in the bowking or scouring step.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107+,   for bleaching by definite named chemicals.

    137+,   for bleaching as a step incidental to a cleaning or laundering
    operation.

    648,    and the notes thereto, for the bluing of textiles and compositions
    therefor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, for apparatus for bleaching
    textile fibers and fabrics.

    132,    Toilet, subclass 208 for a method of bleaching live human hair on
    the scalp which is more than the mere application of a composition.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, for nonelectrolytic
    processes of bleaching metal, siliceous and calcareous bases.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, particularly subclasses 6, 7, 64
    to 67, and 70+ for bleaching and chemically purifying of fibers or fibrous
    pulps (as distinguished from continuous filaments or strands, etc.) or
    undried waterlaid fibrous webs.

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compostions, subclass 690 for bleaching of fibrous organic
    material involving electrolysis.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 186.1+ and 188.1+ for bleaching
    compositions in general and subclasses 189 to 193 for compositions for
    neutralizing the acidity or alkalinity of a previous bleaching or
    laundering operation.  Claims in the form of a process consisting in the
    mere application of a novel composition are not regarded as process for the
    purpose of subclasses 101+, but are placed in Class 252.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclass 62 for
    a bleaching composition intended for use on the living body (e.g., living
    hair).

    426,    Food, or Edible Material: Processes, Compositions, and Products.


CLS 8/102
TXT Inventions under subclass 101 directed to the removal or lightening of the
    shade or tone of a previously applied dye without complete removal of
    dyestuffs and artificial coloring matters from materials.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for color stripping by discharging.

    438+,   440, and 646, for extraction and recovery of dyes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 4+ for processes of
    defibering waste paper or textile waste including the removal of color
    bodies, e.g., de-inking and repulping of newsprint.


CLS 8/103
TXT Processes under subclass 101 wherein the bleaching is accomplished by other
    than chemical agents, such as, light, high frequency vibrations or other
    wave energy.

    (1)     Note.  The combined use of wave energy and chemical agents is
    placed in this subclass and cross referenced below where there is novelty
    in the chemical agent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107+,   for the use of electrical energy in a chemical bath for the purpose
    of liberating a chemical bleaching agent in gaseous or other state.

    111,    for processes employing ozone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 428 for fluent material containment
    support or transfer means with or without a radiation source, subclass
    493.1 for radiant energy generation and radioactive sources, and subclasses
    492.1+ for the irradiation of objects and materials.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 64+ for X-ray
    irradiation.


CLS 8/107
TXT Processes under subclass 101 wherein the bleaching is accomplished by means
    of definitely specified chemical agents or combinations of chemical agents.


CLS 8/108.1
TXT Chlorine:

    Subject matter  under subclass 107 wherein chlorine in any state or
    compound containing active chlorine are employed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111,    for processes employing chlorates or perchlorates.


CLS 8/109
TXT Processes under subclass 108.1 in which sulfur compounds or oxygen or
    oxygen releasing compounds are employed in addition to chlorine.


CLS 8/110
TXT Processes under subclass 107 for bleaching by means of sulfur compounds,
    such as SO2+, sulfites, hydrosulfites, sulfoxylates, etc.


CLS 8/111
TXT Processes under subclass 107 for bleaching with oxygen or ozone or
    compounds releasing oxygen such as peroxides, perborates, per sulfates, and
    perchlorates.  The use of air as an inert gas rather than as active
    bleaching agent is excluded.


CLS 8/112
TXT The treatment of hair, fur and other fibrous materials as a step
    preparatory to felting the same so as to improve their felting properties,
    often known as carroting in the case of hair and fur.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116.1+  and 127.5+, for chemical modification generally of cellulosic and
    proteinaceous fibers, respectively.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclass 66 for fluid treatment
    combined with the textile processes provided for therein.

    26,     Textiles:  Clothing Finishing, subclass 19 for fulling of fabrics
    utilizing a fluid treatment.

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclass 123 for felting of fibers,
    utilizing a fluid.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, for fluid treating apparatus,
    in general, applied to textiles.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclass 28 for fur treating apparatus.


CLS 8/114
TXT Processes for treating textiles with chemicals or special fluids, e.g.,
    swelling agents, to produce ornamental effects, such as, for example,
    patterns, designs or contrasting areas.

    (1)     Note.  The particular effective agent is cross referenced to an
    appropriate subclass below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclasses 16, 30 and 69, for the
    production of ornamental effects on cloth by mechanical operations.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 256+ for processes of producing a
    nonuniform coating which may result in an ornamental effect.


CLS 8/114.5
TXT Processes under subclass 114 for fluid or chemical treatment of yarns and
    fabrics having yarns or areas of different physical or chemical
    characteristics, to produce crepe effects thereon.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes the treatment of fabrics or yarns
    yarns composed of mixed natural and/or artificial fibers or which have been
    differentially treated with chemical agents or resists, whereby the textile
    material is selectively affected by the shrinking or treating agent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for the production of wool-like or crinkle effects on unmixed
    vegetable fibers.

    130.1+, for swelling or shrinking of artificial fibers to produce similar
    effects.


CLS 8/114.6
TXT Processes under subclass 114 which include the destruction or removal of a
    portion of the textile.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140,    for processes of removing impurities from textiles by destruction
    thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclass 164 for processes of
    ornamentation by sewing combined with the destruction or removal of
    material, and subclass 168 for the combination of a significantly recited
    textile operation and the step of destroying or removing a portion of the
    textile product.

    112,    Sewing, subclass 403 for a sewn web or sheet including a
    decomposable thread or component.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    668 for a process of etching or dissolving in general.


CLS 8/115
TXT Processes under subclass 114 wherein the ornamental effects are produced by
    applying the chemical reagent in local areas by means of stencils or other
    means to confine the treatment to localized areas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114.5,  for creping process.

    114.6,  for processes which include fiber destruction.

    478,    for similar processes including a coloring step.


CLS 8/115.51
TXT CHEMICAL MODIFICATION OF TEXTILES OR FIBERS OR PRODUCTS THEREOF:

    Processes for treating textiles, fibers, fabrics fibrous of filamentary
    materials, cloth, gauze, etc., (herein referred to as "materials") to
    affect a chemical modification thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Subclasses 115.51+ includes processes or products thereof
    modifying the chemical or physicochemical properties of "materials", i.e.,
    the "materials" are acted upon by a chemical or other agent as
    distinguished from the mere coating, impregnating, precipitation of a
    substance within the "materials" structure which are classified in Class
    427.  Excluded from here also are those processes or products thereof which
    are concerned with the coating, impregnation of precipitation by an in situ
    chemical reaction which does not chemically involve the substrate
    "material".  Also found here are those chemical effects on a component
    normally associated with a "material", for example, sericin of silk.

    (2)     Note.  The chemical modification of paper is classified here
    because of its similarity to other cellulosic "materials".

    (3)     Note.  In the case of coating or impregnating processes or products
    thereof, where doubt exists as to whether or not a chemical modification
    has occurred, the process or product thereof is classified in Class 427 and
    generally cross-referenced to this class, subclass 115.51.

    (4)     Note.  The chemical modification of a substance other than a
    textile or fiber with subsequent processing to produce a textile, fiber,
    web, etc., is not classified here.  For example, the chemical modification
    of polyvinyl chloride with subsequent fiber formation with no claimed
    structure of characteristics is in Class 525.

    (5)     Note.  The heat treating of "materials", e.g., to produce carbon
    fiber precursors, is properly classified here despite the lack of a
    chemical agent since the chemical nature of composition of the "material"
    was altered.

    (6)     Note.  Patents claiming a product derived from chemically modified
    "material" are classified on the basis of the process for chemically
    modifying the "material".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114+,   for processes including chemical modification of the "material"
    which produces and ornamental effect.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 157.1+ which utilizes
    fibers (including those chemically modified) in paper making processes.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 8.61+ for durable finishes for textile
    materials, including antistatic and textile softening compositions, and
    subclasses 8.81+ for textile processing aid compositions, such as
    lubricants.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, and its daughter classes appropriate
    subclasses for the preparation of carbon compounds employing fibers or
    other "materials" as a reactant whether or not its composition is known, in
    which the fiber or other material reactant and/or product has no claimed
    structure of characteristics.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclass 447.1 in which the
    chemical modification results in a "material" of substantially pure carbon.

    427,    Coating Processes, for coating processes which do not modify the
    chemical or physicochemical properties of textiles and fibers.

    428,    Stock Material of Miscellaneous Articles, for a "material" obtained
    by a Class 8 process and whose structure or characteristics meet the
    required definition for that class.

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 515+ for
    nondurable antistatic compositions used in the course of a laundering
    operation or in a finishing step, such as rinsing or drying, accompanying
    laundering.


CLS 8/115.52
TXT Using wave energy, electrostatic field or electrical discharge:

    Subject matter under subclass 115.51 wherein the chemical modification is
    affected wholly or in part due to a wave-type energy, electrostatic field
    or a field in which electrical discharging occurs.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes processes wherein the chemical
    modification occurs solely through the use of the wave energy,
    electrostatic field or an electrical discharge.  Also found here are those
    processes which utilize in additional chemical reactant.  For example, a
    textile fiber is treated with an activated monomer which has been
    previously activated by ultraviolet radiation, etc.


CLS 8/115.53
TXT Ultraviolet radiation:

    Subject matter under subclass 115,52 wherein the radiation used to affect a
    chemical change is in the ultraviolet range, that is, generally 180-3,900
    angstrom units; far ultraviolet is in the range of 180-2,900 angstrom units
    while near ultraviolet is in the range of 2,900-3,900 angstrom units.


CLS 8/115.54
TXT Treating textiles or fibers from synthetic resin or natural rubber with
    chemical reactant and products thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 115.51 wherein the "material" is treated with
    a chemical agent.

    (1)     Note.  The final product need not contain an atom of the chemical
    treating agent employed, for example, processes such as the oxidation of
    halogenation of "materials" may have involved the conversion or removal of
    may not contain an atom used in these conversions.

    (2)     Note.  The chemical agent employed in the treating process may be a
    mixture, of more than one reactant or materials which produce an in situ
    reactant.  Classification of a mixture of reactants is based on that first
    appearing in the schedule. Inert ingredients such as solvents, fillers,
    substrate support, etc., are not the basis for classification here.


CLS 8/115.55
TXT Single fiber or filament containing more than one synthetic organic polymer:

    Subject matter under subclass 115.54 wherein the fiber or filament that is
    being chemically treated is one which has been derived from a blend of two
    or more synthetic organic polymers, e.g., a  single fiber formed from a
    blend of 85 percent polystyrene and 15 percent polybutadiene, etc.


CLS 8/115.56
TXT Organic chemical reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 115.54 wherein the chemical treating agent is
    an organic compound.

    (1)     Note.  An organic compound is defined as one which has carbon
    therein and which is further characterized by the presence in a molecule of
    (a) carbon-to-carbon bond, or (b) carbon-to-hydrogen or carbon-to-halogen
    bond, or (c) carbon-to-nitrogen bond, with proviso that hydrocyanic acid,
    cyanogen, isocyanic acid, cyanamide, cyanogen halides, isothiocyanic acid,
    and metal carbides are excluded as being organic compounds.


CLS 8/115.57
TXT Reactant contains heterocycle:

    Subject matter under subclass 115.56 wherein the chemical reactant contains
    a heterocyclic group, elg., ethylene sulfide, etc.

    (1)     Note.  The term heterocyclic denotes the presence off a covalently
    bound ring whose members are composed of at least one carbon atom and one
    or more atoms of the elements selected from the group consisting of
    nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, selenium, and tellurium.


CLS 8/115.58
TXT Reactant contains nitrogen heterocycle:

    Subject matter under subclass 115.57 wherein the heterocyclic reactant
    contains at least one nitrogen atom in the ring, e.g., axiridine, pyrrole,
    etc.


CLS 8/115.59
TXT Contains six-membered nitrogen heterocycle:

    Subject matter under subclass 115.58 wherein the chemical reactant contains
    a six-membered nitrogen heterocyclic ring, e.g., pyridine, piperidine, etc.


CLS 8/115.60
TXT Processes under subclass 115.5 which in addition to the chemical
    modification of the textile material includes a coating, sizing or
    lubricating step or treatment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, for coating processes, per se.


CLS 8/115.61
TXT Reactant contains oxygen heterocycle:

    Subject matter under subclass 115.57 wherein the chemical reactant contains
    an oxygen heterocyclic ring, e.g., epichlorohydrin, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Reactant such as polyethylene oxide, polypropylene oxide,
    etc., are devoid of the oxygen ring and therefore not classified here.
    However, the polymer from the diglycidyl ether of bisphenol A contains
    residual epoxy groups and would be classified here.


CLS 8/115.62
TXT Reactant contains nonaromatic carbon-carbon double bond:

    Reactant contains nonaromatic carbon-carbon double bond, e.g., acrylic
    acid, styrene, butadiene, etc.

    (1)     Note.  The term aromatic denotes a compound which contains the
    benzene nucleus whether or not it is condensed with other rings, e.g.,
    naphthalene, anthracene, etc.


CLS 8/115.63
TXT Reactant containing nonaromatic carbon-carbon double bond also contains
    sulfur atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 115.62 wherein the reactant containing the
    nonaromatic carbon-carbon double bond also contains a sulfur atom, e.g.,
    divinyl sulfone, p-styrene sulfonic acid, etc.


CLS 8/115.64
TXT Organic reactant contains element other than C, H, O, N, or S:

    Subject matter under subclass 115.56 wherein the organic reactant contains
    an element other than C, H, O, N or S, e.g., 2-chloroethyl phophite, etc.


CLS 8/115.65
TXT Organic reactant contains nitrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 115.56 wherein the organic reactant contains
    a nitrogen atom, e.g., ethylene diamine, triethanolamine, etc.


CLS 8/115.66
TXT Organic reactant contains plural nitrogen atoms nonbonded to each other:

    Subject matter under subclass 115.65 wherein the organic reactant's plural
    nitrogen atoms are nonbonded to each other, e.g., ethylene diamine
    tetraacetic acid, urea, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Where a reaction concerns the in situ generation of a
    primary reactant, e.g., the conversion of an acyl azide (R-C(=O)N=N=N) to
    an isocyanate (R-N=C=O), classification is based on the primary reactant
    azide.  Where the structure of either the primary or secondary reactant is
    doubtful or indeterminate, classify accordingly.


CLS 8/115.67
TXT Reactant contains isocyanate group:

    Subject matter under subclass 115.65 wherein the reactant contains an
    isocyanate, p-phenylene dilsocyanate, etc.


CLS 8/115.68
TXT Inorganic nongaseous chemical reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 115.54 wherein the reactant is an inorganic
    nongaseous material, e.g., phophoric acid, sulfuric acid, etc.

    (1)     Note.  A nongaseous material is defined as one which is normally
    nongaseous under ambient conditions but not necessarily be so under
    conditions in which it is being reacted with the "material".  See (2) Note
    below.  Where doubt exists as to its state under ambient conditions the
    material is classified as being nongaseous.

    (2)     Note.  To be classified as a gaseous material it would have to come
    in direct contact with the "material", i.e., the gas may not be in solution
    microencapsulated, prepackaged, etc.


CLS 8/115.69
TXT Oxidizing or alkaline agent:

    Subject matter under subclass 115.68 wherein the inorganic nongaseous
    reactant is an oxidizing or alkaline agent, e.g., sodium hypochlorite,
    calcium hypochlorite, hydrogen peroxide, potassium hydroxide, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Patents which recite the use of organic precursors, e.g., an
    N-chlorisocyanurate, etc., for producing an in situ-generated inorganic
    oxidizing agents e.g., hypochlorous acid, etc., will be classified with in
    situ generated inorganic material and cross-referenced to the organic
    material.


CLS 8/115.7
TXT Processes under subclass 115.5 wherein the textile or fibrous material is
    made up of fibers of different chemical constitution.

    (1)     Note.  Natural vegetable fibers and regenerated or mercerized
    cellulose are not considered chemically different for the purpose of this
    subclass.


CLS 8/116.1
TXT Cellulose fibers:

    Subject matter under subclass 115.5 wherein cellulose fibers are subjected
    to a chemical modification.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are for instance chemical modification to
    increase tensile strength, impart luster, remove nap, shrinking, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    for improving felting properties.

    129+,   for chemically treating a cellulose ester or ether fiber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclasses 18.5+ for mechanical
    processes of shrinking.


CLS 8/116.4
TXT Processes under subclass 116.1 wherein the cellulose base is chemically
    modified by an aldehyde or ketone or substance liberating the same.

    (1)     Note.  Where methylol compounds are employed for coating purposes
    and no chemical modification is stated to take place or apparently does so,
    the patents are placed in Class 427, Coating Processes.


CLS 8/117
TXT Processes under subclass 116.1 for treating cellulose fibrous material or
    fabric with agents to impart the chemical properties of wool thereto or
    with acid or alkaline gelatinizing or shrinking agents without tension, so
    as to cause the same to curl up and take on the physical appearance of
    wool; it usually also affects the chemical properties of the fabrics so
    that the same may more or less have the chemical properties of wool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    for improving felting properties.


CLS 8/118
TXT Processes and compositions under subclass 116.1 wherein cellulose fibrous
    material or paper is subjected to a treatment with gelatinizing or swelling
    agent, such as ZnC12, H2 SO4, etc., to impart a parchment-like, linen,
    transparent or translucent finish thereto.  This may result in an increased
    resistance to water or grease and the like.  The fabric generally becomes
    stiff or transparent. However, softening agents may be included as part of
    the process.  The material may be previously or subsequently mercerized by
    means of alkali metal hydroxides or the like.  So-called "organdie" effects
    and the delustering or relustering of these materials by a gelatinization
    process is included herein.  The selvaging of the edges of a fabric to
    prevent raveling, by the process herein defined, is also included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125+,   for mercerizing or alkaline treatment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    76 for fabric parchmentizing and laminating.

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate sub- classes for processes of
    coating fabrics in general.


CLS 8/119
TXT Inventions under subclass 118 wherein paper is the base treated.


CLS 8/120
TXT Processes under subclass 116.1 for the treat- ment of cellulose fibers and
    fabrics so as to form chemical derivatives thereof, such as ethers, esters,
    etc., without entirely destroying the structure of the fibers.  The
    materials so treated generally lose the dyeing characteristics and affinity
    for the usual cotton dyes and may take on an affinity for dyes usually
    employed for animal fibers and cellulose ethers or esters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for the production of wool-like or crinkle effects.

    181+,   for immunizing with nitrogenous organic compounds.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    536,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 32+, 43+, 58+, and 84+ for the
    complete dissolution of cellulosic material and its regeneration.


CLS 8/121
TXT Processes under subclass 120 wherein the treatment is by means of an
    acetylating agent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    536,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 69+ for the acetylation of cellulose.


CLS 8/122
TXT Processes under subclass 120 wherein the treatment is by means of agents
    capable of forming xanthates such as carbon disulfide and alkali.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121,    for the acetylation of xanthogenated fibers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    536,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 60+ for cellulose xanthates.


CLS 8/123
TXT Processes under subclass 116.1 for the treatment of cellulose fibers or
    fabrics by means of a cuprammonium solution which incompletely dissolves
    the surface of the cellulosic fibers and may be reprecipitated or
    regenerated thereon; which solution may also contain added cellulose
    therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclass 167.01 for cuprammonium
    cellulose.


CLS 8/125
TXT Processes and compositions under subclass 116.1 for the mercerization or
    alkaline treatment of threads or fabrics with or without stretching usually
    by means of caustic lye.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    for the production of local effects by a mercerizing  treatment.

    147+,   for manipulative processes.

    537,    for combined mercerizing and dyeing.


CLS 8/127
TXT Inventions under subclass 125 wherein the textile material is pretreated
    with an agent to increase the wetting or penetrating capacity of the
    mercerizing or alkaline liquor, or such an agent is added to the
    mercerizing or alkaline bath.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 351+ for wetting agents in general.


CLS 8/127.1
TXT Treatment with phosphorus containing material:

    Subject matter under subclass 116.1 wherein a phosphorus containing
    material is utilized.


CLS 8/127.5
TXT Subject matter under subclass 115.5 wherein the textiles or fibers are
    proteinaceous, that is the basic chemical structure consists of protein
    molecules, such as, for example, wool, silk, hair and artificial fibers
    spun from soya bean, casein, zein or gelatine solutions.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes chemical shrinking and delustering by
    chemical modification.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94.1+,  for the treatment of animal fibers still attached to the skin,
    e.g., fur, and for the treatment of internal tissues except when such
    tissues have been converted into textile form, in which case the chemically
    modifying treatments thereof are placed in this or the indented subclass.


CLS 8/127.51
TXT Subject matter under subclass 127.5 wherein the proteinaceous fiber is hair
    which has been removed from the animal skin.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes a method of waving hair detached from
    the body, by a treatment involving a chemical reaction with the hair, e.g.,
    waving wigs, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128.1,  for a similar process or composition applied to natural wool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 203+ for a method of waving living human hair,
    which is more than the mere application of a class 424 composition.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses
    70.2+ for a composition to be applied to living human hair and process of
    use which is no more than mere application of the composition.  See the
    definitions of Class 424, II, C, Class 8, note (2) for a discussion of what
    constitutes a disclosure of living hair.


CLS 8/127.6
TXT Subject matter under subclass 127.5 wherein the proteinaceous fibers are
    chemically modified with an aldehyde derivative, ketone or nitrogenous
    organic compound.

    (1)     Note.  Included within the term aldehyde derivative are compounds
    which liberate and aldehyde under reaction conditions, e.g.,
    paraformaldehyde, trioxane, hexamethylene tetramine, etc.


CLS 8/128.1
TXT Natural wool or silk:

    Subject matter under search class 127.5 wherein wool or silk fibers, felts,
    or fabrics thereof, are subjected to a chemical modification.

    (1)     Note.  Included within the term wool are alpaca and mohair.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94.14,  for the chemical treatment of fur which remains attached to the
    hide or skin.

    112,    for improving felting properties.

    443,    for the weighting of animal fibers and their after treatment, i.e,
    to protect or preserve such weighted material from the effects of the
    weighting metal.


CLS 8/128.3
TXT Chemical modification in the presence of a sulfur or silicone containing
    material:

    Subject matter under search class 128.1 wherein the chemical modification
    is performed in the presence of a sulfur or silicone containing material.

    (1)     Note.  The sulfur or silicone containing material need not react
    with the substrate material.  It is sufficient for this subclass that the
    material be merely present during the chemical modification, e.g.,
    catalyst, diluent, etc.


CLS 8/129
TXT Inventions under subclass 115.5 for the chemical modification of cellulose
    esters and ethers, such as, for example, to deluster, luster or reluster or
    protect against delustering, to obtain crinkled or wooly effects, to reduce
    the tendency to fault, and improve the scroop.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    443,    for weighting of these materials.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 170 for process of delustering fabric
    or yarn by a coating process.


CLS 8/130
TXT Inventions under subclass 129 for the treatment of materials above defined
    by means of agents adapted to saponify the material wholly or partially so
    as to alter its properties, for instance, with respect to dyeing or melting
    under hot ironing.

    (1)     Note.  Saponification incidental to some other operation is
    classified with that treatment and cross referenced here as to any novelty
    in the saponification  step.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114+,   for saponification as a step in the production of ornamental
    effects.

    536,    for saponification in connection with dyeing.


CLS 8/130.1
TXT Processes wherein artificial fibers or filaments are treated with solvent
    swelling or plasticizing agent which is stated or known to exert a swelling
    or plasticizing effect on such materials.

    (1)     Note.  By "plasticizing" or "swelling" is meant a physical
    modification of the gel structure or body of the filament as distinguished
    from superficial softening or mere surface lubrication, for facilitating
    textile operation or improving the handle or feel.  Such surface treatments
    are classified in appropriate subclasses of Class 427.  The burden of proof
    to show that swelling or plasticizing does take place rests with Class 427.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    433,    for swelling of an artificial fiber in connection with dyeing of
    the fiber.


CLS 8/131
TXT Processes under subclass 130.1 wherein the fibers or filaments are esters
    or ethers of cellulose.  The treatment may be for the purpose of effecting
    or protecting the luster to produce a soft wooly feel, reduce the tendency
    to laddering, prevent faults, or for softening generally.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130,    for swelling in connection with saponifying.

    443,    for swelling in connection with weighting.


CLS 8/132
TXT Processes under subclass 131 which include a stretching step.


CLS 8/133
TXT Inventions directed to the use of inhibitors in a treatment bath of the
    type employed in the processes classifiable in class 8, to prevent
    destruction or deterioration of the textile fibers or fabrics due to the
    acidity or alkalinity of the bath.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101+,   for the use of souring agents after bleaching.

    115.7   and 125, to complete this search.

    137,    for the use of souring agents in connection with laundering.

    443,    for the treatment of textile after weighting to prevent
    deterioration caused by the agent applied.

    480,    for addition of agents to a dye bath to prevent coloration of one
    component of a mixed textile.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 193 for souring agents.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, for a cross-reference art
    collection of products resistant to plant or animal attack.


CLS 8/137
TXT Processes for cleaning and laundering textile fabrics and fibers, including
    a fluid or chemical treatment.  Includes also combinations and after
    treatments incidental to such operations not elsewhere classifiable.

    (1)     Note.  Because of the similarity to treatment of textile fibers and
    fabrics, methods for washing and cleaning of furs, skins and leather are
    included in subclasses 137+ and in subclasses 147+ when the treatment is
    merely manipulative in nature.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein are processes wherein fabric conditioners,
    e.g., softeners, etc., have been added to the laundering fluids.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 102 for presses combined with other features.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, for processes of cleaning
    textiles and fibers not involving chemical or fluid treatment and including
    the mechanical cleaning of textiles and fibers and cleaning by a gas blast
    or suction (which is not considered a fluid treatment for Class 8).

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 276+ for
    compositions, including laundry detergents, for cleaning textile materials,
    and subclasses 513 and 515 through 529 for auxiliary compositions, such as
    rinse-added fabric softeners, used in conjunction with a laundering process.


CLS 8/137.5
TXT Processes under subclass 137 directed to the cleaning or purification of
    artificial fibers to remove impurities resulting from or incidental to the
    extrusion or shaping operation, such as, for example, carbon bisulphide or
    sulfur from viscose yarn.

    (1)     Note.  The subclass includes, for example, combined processes of
    forming and purifying extruded fibers where the spinning operation is not
    significantly claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151+    and 155+, for manipulative processes wherein the purification step
    is only broadly stated.


CLS 8/138
TXT Inventions under subclass 137 for the removal of natural sericin or other
    naturally occurring gum or wax, or an artificially applied size or gum from
    textile fibers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    930,    for degumming in connection with dyeing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, for the mechanical removal of silk
    from cocoons.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, particularly subclass 2 for the
    freeing of silk from their cocoons.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 263 for
    degumming or desizing by means of enzymes.


CLS 8/139
TXT Inventions under subclass 137 directed to the removal of impurities such
    as, grease, wax, dirt, etc., from wool, hide, skin, leather or cotton,
    preparatory to bleaching, dyeing or other textile operations by scouring as
    with solvents, soaps, detergents or boiling in alkaline liquors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141,    for waste reclaiming and conditioning.


CLS 8/139.1
TXT Processes under subclass 139 wherein an organic liquid is employed to
    dissolve the fatty impurities.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    554,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 175+ for processes directed to the
    recovery and further treatment of naturally occurring fatty material.


CLS 8/140
TXT Inventions under subclass 137 for the separation of a mixed impurity or
    textile fiber by the destruction of one of the constituents thereof, such
    as, by heat, acids, or solvents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114.6,  and the notes thereto, for the production of ornamental effects
    such as lace or the like by dissolution or destruction of parts of a
    composite fabric.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 2 for carbonizing
    apparatus.


CLS 8/141
TXT Processes under subclass 137 for cleaning and conditioning used journal box
    lubricating waste and which may include reimpregnation with pure
    lubricating oil as well as cleaning the used waste.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 1 for waste
    reclaiming apparatus.


CLS 8/142
TXT Processes under subclass 137 for cleaning by the application of organic
    solvents without the use of substantial quantities of water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139+,   for the use of organic solvents in conjunction with scouring and
    degreasing, of wool, cotton, hides, skins and leather.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, appropriate subclasses, for recovery of
    volatile solvents from air containing same in the gaseous state.


CLS 8/147
TXT Manipulative processes for the treatment of textile fibers or fabrics,
    hides, skins, and leather with fluids.

    (1)     Note.  Patents are placed in subclasses 147+ when a manipulative
    fluid treatment of general applicability to processes provided for in Class
    8 is involved, even though limited by claim terminology to dyeing,
    bleaching, tanning, or the like.   Patents which, because of limited
    applicability, are classified above are cross referenced to subclasses
    147+, for manipulative processes disclosed or claimed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, for apparatus, generally, for
    carrying out the processes provided for in subclasses 147+.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    subclasses 67+ for apparatus comprising a spinning nozzle discharging
    directly into a liquid bath or shower means, subclass 71 for apparatus
    comprising means advancing continuous length work through a downstream
    liquid bath or shower means, and subclass 72.1 for the combination of a
    spinning nozzle and downstream gaseous treating means.


CLS 8/148
TXT Processes under subclass 147 wherein a portion of the fiber, thread or
    fabric is protected from contact with the treating liquid by being confined
    between clamping or compressing members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149,    for the production of spot or intermittent effects by limiting the
    extent of the immersion or application of the treating liquid.

    446+,   for reserve areas produced by coating or impregnating a mass to be
    dyed with substances preventing coloration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 211, for clamps for
    restricting part of the material from dyeing or other treatment.


CLS 8/149
TXT Methods under subclass 147 for liquid treatment of textiles, particularly
    in the form of skeins, cops, bobbins or other wound packages, or threads or
    yarns in transit, in a manner so that only a part of the material is
    treated.   This may be accomplished by injection of the treating liquid
    into selected areas of the package, by dipping selective parts thereof in
    the bath, or by intermittently applying the liquid to selected length of
    the yarn for treatment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148,    for the treatment of selected areas  utilizing confining or
    clamping means.

    446+,   for reserve or resist dyeing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 201 and 203, for
    apparatus for introducing or injecting liquid.


CLS 8/149.1
TXT Processes under subclass 147 wherein both a gas (or vapor) and a liquid are
    employed as treating agents.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include those processes wherein the
    gas or vapor employed is merely a source of agitation or processes which
    employ heated gases solely for drying purposes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 5 through 8, 183
    and 207 for apparatus for carrying out these processes.


CLS 8/149.2
TXT Processes under subclass 147 wherein a gaseous or vaporous treating agent
    is employed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclass 18.5 for shrinking of textile
    fabrics by working to compact the same.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, for drying with gases.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 51 for treatment of apparel.


CLS 8/149.3
TXT Processes under subclass 149.2 in which one of the gases or vapors is steam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, particularly subclass
    517, for the treatment of textiles with steam for drying or humidifying.


CLS 8/150
TXT Processes under subclass 147 for treating textile fibers or fabrics in
    which the particular form in which the textile material is presented or
    prepared for presentation to the treating fluid is significant in the
    process.  Subcombinations for forming textile materials into special forms
    for presentation, and not elsewhere provided for, are also included.


CLS 8/150.5
TXT Processes under subclass 150 for treating hides, skins, or leather which
    are distinguished solely by the manner in which the hide or skin is handled
    or brought into contact with the treating fluid.

    (1)     Note.  Processes of treating the hide or skin with a specific
    material or reagent are classified upon the basis of the particular
    treatment and cross referenced to this subclass, if desired, for any
    manipulative steps disclosed or claimed.  See particularly this class,
    subclasses 94.1+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94.1+,  see Note (1).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclasses 29+ for apparatus for treating
    hides or skins with a fluid.


CLS 8/151
TXT Processes under subclass 150 in which the textile material is in the form
    of a more or less continuous longitudinally moving mass such as warps, open
    width fabrics, or ropes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, particularly subclasses 176 to
    180 and 202+ for apparatus used in carrying out these processes.


CLS 8/151.1
TXT Processes under subclass 151 in which the textile material is passed
    through a substantially helical (or spiral) path during fluid treatment.


CLS 8/151.2
TXT Processes under subclass 151 in which the material treated is in the form
    of yarns.


CLS 8/152
TXT Processes under subclass 151 in which the material therein specified is
    fed, for instance, by pleating, plaiting or folding, into a treating
    receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, particularly subclasses 177
    and 178 for apparatus for carrying out these processes.


CLS 8/154
TXT Processes under subclass 150 applied to yarns and fabrics which have been
    wound on a cylinder or other holder or which are in the form of skeins,
    spinning cakes or cheeses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 7, 8, 150, 189,
    198, and 201 for apparatus for carrying out these processes.


CLS 8/155
TXT Processes under subclass 154 wherein the material treated is in the form of
    yarns or filaments as distinguished from formed fabrics.


CLS 8/155.1
TXT Processes under subclass 155 in which the treating fluid is forcibly
    injected into or drawn through the material as by means of internally
    located apertures in the support on which the yarn package is mounted or
    placed.


CLS 8/155.2
TXT Processes under subclass 155 in which the yarn is in the form of a skein or
    in the form of a cake or cheese.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155.1,  for processes wherein the material is subjected to radial flow.


CLS 8/156
TXT Processes under subclass 150 for the treatment of pulp or fibers in bulk
    form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141,    for waste reclaiming and conditioning.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, appropriate subclasses for
    processes of chemically liberating fiber involving manipulation of pulp or
    fibers in bulk form.


CLS 8/157
TXT Processes under subclass 147 for the treatment of textile materials in the
    form of skeins, ropes, warps or webs packed into a gas-tight vessel, but
    permitting percolation of liquid throughout the stationary packed material,
    under pressure, generally at high temperature, or by steam injection.


CLS 8/158
TXT Processes under subclass 147 in which the manipulation of the fluid is
    involved, i.e., its preparation, particular mode of circulation,
    purification or special mode of application.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142,    for circulation and preparation for re-use of a dry cleaning
    solvent.


CLS 8/159
TXT Processes under subclass 158 for the treatment of textile fibers or fabrics
    wherein both the material treated as a bulk mass and the treating fluid are
    stirred by a single or plural means.

    (1)     Note.  Processes involving the use of the usual washing machines
    are found herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, for apparatus for this purpose.


CLS 8/160
TXT Processes under subclass 94.16 for removal of hair, fur or feathers from a
    hide or skin by applying an adhesive which adheres to the hair, etc., and
    then removing the adhesive along with the hair, fur or feathers, and
    adhesive compositions for use in such processes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, for an adhesive composition
    generally having no depilatory function.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 1 and indented
    classes thereunder for an adhesive composition containing a synthetic resin
    provided for therein.


CLS 8/161
TXT Processes and compositions under subclass 94.16 not provided for above for
    removing hair, etc., from a living animal body.

    (1)     Note.  To be placed in this subclass, a patent must either disclose
    or claim that the hair is being removed from the living body (e.g., living
    hair), or have other disclosure which indicates an intent to use the
    composition or process to remove hair from a living body (e.g., does not
    injure or irritate the skin from which the hair is removed).


CLS 8/181
TXT Processes under subclass 116 wherein the cellulose textiles or fibers are
    chemically modified by a nitrogen-containing organic compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127     and 133, for treatments involving the use of nitrogenous organic
    compounds as assistants.


CLS 8/182
TXT Processes under subclass 181 wherein the cellulose textiles or fibers are
    chemically modified with a condensation product of an organic nitrogenous
    compound and an aldehyde or ketone or wherein, in addition to the chemical
    modification of the cellulose textiles or fibers by the nitrogen-containing
    organic compound, there is a previous, simultaneous or sucessive treatment
    with an aldehyde or ketone which can form a nitrogenous- aldehydo- or
    keto-condensate in situ with the nitrogen-containing organic compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116.4,  for processes of chemically modifying cellulose textiles or fibers
    with an aldehyde or ketone, per se.


CLS 8/183
TXT Processes under subclass 182 wherein the aminoplast condensate is a
    reaction product of a heterocyclic compound consisting of three carbon
    atoms and three nitrogen atoms with an aldehyde.


CLS 8/184
TXT Processes under subclass 182 wherein the aminoplast condensate is a
    reaction product of an amide and an aldehyde.


CLS 8/185
TXT Processes under subclass 184 wherein the amide is urea, H2 N. CO. NH2, or
    thiourea, H2 N. CS. NH2.


CLS 8/186
TXT Processes under subclass 185 wherein the urea or thiourea is substituted by
    an alkyl or alkylene radical.


CLS 8/187
TXT Processes under subclass 184 wherein the amide contains the divalent -
    NH.COO - radical.


CLS 8/188
TXT Processes under subclass 181 wherein the nitrogen-containing organic
    compound contains a pentavalent nitrogen atom bonded by 4 covalent bonds to
    carbon atoms.


CLS 8/189
TXT Processes under subclass 181 wherein the nitrogen-containing organic
    compound is heterocyclic, i.e., said compound consists of one or more
    carbon atoms covalently bonded in a closed ring with at least one atom of
    nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  The heterocyclic ring may  include oxygen, sulfur, selenium
    or tellurium as other hetero atoms.

    (2)     Note.  Nonnitrogenous heterocyclic compounds are not included
    herein but are classified elsewhere according to the organic
    nitrogen-containing moiety.


CLS 8/190
TXT Processes under subclass 189 wherein the heterocyclic ring consists of
    three carbon atoms and three nitrogen atoms.


CLS 8/191
TXT Processes under subclass 189 wherein the heterocyclic ring consists of 2
    carbon atoms and one nitrogen atom.


CLS 8/192
TXT Progecces under subclass 181 wherein the nitrogen-containing organic
    compound contains+ -a - C=N, -NC (also written as -N=C), -NCS or -CNS
    grouping.


CLS 8/193
TXT Processes under subclass 192 wherein the cyano-, isocyano-, etc compound
    also contains a - CH:  CH2  grouping.


CLS 8/194
TXT Processes under subclass 181 wherein the nitrogen-containing organic
    compound is a compound which is identical in constitution with one formed
    by replacing the hydroxyl group of an inorganic oxyacid by an amino radical
    or the hydroxyl of a carboxyl or organic sulfoxy acid group by NH2 or the
    H- substituted forms thereof.


CLS 8/195
TXT Processes under subclass 194 wherein the amide contains the grouping where
    X=O or S.


CLS 8/196
TXT Processes under subclass 181 where in the nitrogen-containing organic
    compound is identical in constitution with the derivatives of ammonia (NH3)
    wherein the N thereof is bonded to at least one carbon of an organic
    radical.


CLS 8/400
TXT MEASURING, TESTING, OR INSPECTING DYE PROCESS:

    Dyeing processes under the class definition including the step of sampling,
    visually, audibly or chemically testing or inspecting, or otherwise
    physically or mechanically determining some variable condition of the
    process, dye composition, substrate, or product.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are processes for determining imperfections
    or for determining completeness of a reaction or manipulation as well as
    determinations of undesired variations which will activate correction
    mechanisms.  Recitations of optimum or desired temperatures or pressures or
    proportions of ingredients are considered nominal only and are classified
    with the disclosed process on some other basics.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for testing, per se.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 1 -
    183 for processes of chemical testing.


CLS 8/401
TXT USING ENZYMES, DYE PROCESS, COMPOSITION, OR PRODUCT OF DYEING:

    Subject matter under the class definition using enzymes in dyeing.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is use of oxidases to facilitate oxidation
    dyeing with an aniline-type dye.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, for an enzyme
    composition.


CLS 8/402
TXT WOOD DYEING PROCESS:

    Process under the class definition for dyeing wood.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 57.5 for coloring growing timber by
    injecting of coloring agent into living plants.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclass 34 for staining
    compositions which include as a coloring agent a material not of the dye
    type.


CLS 8/403
TXT FUGITIVE DYE COMPOSITION, PROCESS OR PRODUCT:

    Method or composition for dyeing with an easily removable dye or product
    thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The coloring is usually for the purpose of identifying a
    fiber during manufacture, weaving, etc., and is removed before final finish
    operation.

    (2)     Note.  The composition employed may also include an ingredient for
    simultaneously lubricating or sizing the fiber.


CLS 8/404
TXT DYEING INVOLVING ANIMAL-DERIVED NATURAL FIBER MATERIAL (OTHER THAN SOLELY
    WOOL OR SILK), E.G., LEATHER, FUR, HAIR, FEATHERS, ETC., COMPOSITION,
    PROCESS, OR PRODUCT:

    Processes or compositions under the class definition for dyeing of natural
    fibers derived from animals, except wool or silk or the product of such a
    dyeing process.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes dyeing of hair, fur, or leather, and
    includes dyeing on a living animal.

    (2)     Note.  Dyeing protein fibers obtained by dissolving animal tissue
    and then spinning or molding into a fiber are not classified herein and are
    classified into this class according to the manipulative method, dye
    assistant, or dye used thereon.

    (3)     Note.  Wool is the short curly hair from an animal skin commonly
    woven into a fabric and is not classified here but is classified by the
    manipulative method, dye, or assistant used.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclass 28 for apparatus for dyeing fur.

    132,    Toilet, subclass 208 for processes containing hair-setting steps
    classifiable, per se, in Class 132 combined with dyeing.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 186.1+ for oxidative bleachants of general
    utility.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclass 62 for
    bleach composition intended to be used on living hair and processes of
    bleaching which are no more than the mere application of the composition;
    and subclass 70.1 for processes of dyeing hair and protecting live skin
    from the effects of the dyeing process or dye composition.


CLS 8/405
TXT Hair dyeing:

    Subject matter under subclass 404 for dyeing hair.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses for dyeing of living hair nontopically.


CLS 8/406
TXT Oxidation dye:

    Subject matter under subclass 405 utilizing dyes formed by oxidizing
    organic compounds.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of oxidation dye.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    649,    for similar processes and compositions applied to textile material,
    etc.


CLS 8/407
TXT With dye other than oxidation dye:

    Subject matter under subclass 406 for dyeing with an oxidation dye and
    another dye which is not an oxidation dye.


CLS 8/408
TXT Plural dyes or dye and coupling agent:

    Subject matter under subclass 406 wherein more than one oxidation dye is
    used; or wherein an oxidation dye is used together with a coupling agent.

    (1)     Note.  The coupling agents are generally phenols.

    (2)     Note.  The reaction product of an aniline oxidation dye and a
    coupler may be an indoaniline, an indamine, or an idophenol.  See
    subclasses 416 and 421 respectively, for these products.


CLS 8/409
TXT Heterocyclic amine dye:

    Subject matter under subclass 408 wherein an aminated heterocyclic dye is
    used.


CLS 8/410
TXT Paradiaminobenzene dye:

    Subject matter under subclass 408 wherein at least one
    paradiaminobenzene-type dye is used.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are paradiaminobenzene substituted compounds.


CLS 8/411
TXT With metadiaminobenzene dye:

    Subject matter under subclass 410 wherein a metadiaminobenzene dye is used
    together with a paradiaminobenzene dye.


CLS 8/412
TXT With aminophenol dye:

    Subject matter under subclass 410 wherein the mixture includes an
    aminophenol and a paradiaminobenzene.


CLS 8/414
TXT Nitroaniline dye:

    Subject matter under subclass 406 wherein a nitroaniline dye is used.


CLS 8/415
TXT Nitrophenylenediamine dye:

    Subject matter under subclass 414 wherein a nitrophenylenediamine dye is
    used.


CLS 8/416
TXT Aryldiamine dye:

    Subject matter under subclass 406 wherein an aryldiamine dye is used.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are, e.g., N-phenyl diaminobenzene
    (indoaniline), indamine, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    410,    for in situ synthesis of indoanilines and for in situ synthesis of
    indamine by the oxidation of a mixture of p-phenylene diamine and aniline.


CLS 8/421
TXT Aminophenol dye:

    Subject matter under subclass 406 wherein an aminophenol dye is used, e.g.,
    indophenol, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    410,    for the in situ synthesis of indophenol.


CLS 8/423
TXT Aminoheterocyclic dye:

    Subject matter under subclass 406 wherein an aminoheterocyclic dye is used.


CLS 8/424
TXT Phenols (natural oxidation dye):

    Subject matter under subclass 406 wherein a phenolic dye is used.

    (1)     Note.  Natural oxidation dyes such as hematin (phenodin),
    pyrogallol (1, 2, 3 - trihydroxybenzene), etc., are included.


CLS 8/425
TXT Mordant, solvent dye formation or metallized azo dye:

    Subject matter under subclass 405 using a metallic or polymeric mordant;
    solvent dye formation or a metallized dye on hair.

    (1)     Note.  See the glossary for the definition of mordant and solvent
    dye.


CLS 8/426
TXT Basic dye, including diphenylmethane, tri- phenylmethane, xanthene,
    flourene, methine, acridine, oxazine, phenazine, flavylium,
    naphthoperinone, quinophthalone, quaternary ammonium group, etc.,
    containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 405 wherein a basic or cationic dye is used.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of basic dye.


CLS 8/428
TXT Dye reactive with hair:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 wherein a dye reactive with hair is used.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition of reactive dye.


CLS 8/429
TXT Developed on the hair:

    Subject matter under subclass 405 wherein a dye is developed on the hair.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes an azo coupling reaction on the fiber
    and vat dye development, e.g., phthalocyanine dye development, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    406,    for developing a dye on the hair using an oxidation or
    nitroaniline-type dye.


CLS 8/431
TXT With fluid treatment, e.g., bleaching with dyeing, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 405 wherein dyeing is combined with a fluid
    treatment of hair, e.g., bleaching and dyeing, etc.

    (1)     Note.  To be proper herein the fluid must be more than a mere
    solvent assist.  See in particular subclass 435 for dyeing utilizing a
    solvent which merely aids the dye in dyeing.

    (2)     Note.  Mere knowledge or inherency of swelling or -S-S- bond
    disruption without an express recitation, except for ureas and
    thioglycolates, is not sufficient to put in subclass 432 or 433 and is in
    this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclass for a fluid treatment that affects live skin of an animal or
    human; and subclasses 62+ for the combination of bleaching and dyeing of
    hair on living animals.


CLS 8/432
TXT -S-S- bond disruption, e.g., use of thioglycolates, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 431 involving disulfide bond disruption of
    hair.

    (1)     Note.  Express recitation of a -S-S- bond disruption in a hair dye
    bath will place the case in this subclass.  Use of thioglycolates as dye
    assistants on fur or hair will be sufficient to place a document into this
    subclass.


CLS 8/433
TXT Swelling of hair:

    Subject matter under subclass 431 involving swelling of the hair.

    (1)     Note.  -S-S- bond disruptors swell hair but go in subclass 432
    above.

    (2)     Note.  Normally alkali or LiBr will swell hair.  The latter is
    known as a lyotropic agent.

    (3)     Note.  A urea or thiourea-type material is often used.


CLS 8/435
TXT Solvent assisted dyeing:

    Subject matter under subclass 405 wherein an organic solvent is used to
    assist the dyeing of hair.


CLS 8/436
TXT Leather dyeing:

    Subject matter under subclass 404 for dyeing leather.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are hides of animals as well as skins of
    reptiles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, particularly subclasses 3+ for a
    leather coating and polishing composition.


CLS 8/437
TXT Azo dye:

    Subject matter under subclass 436 using azo dyes (including metal azo)
    either directly or by developing on the material.


CLS 8/438
TXT DYEING PROCESS OF EXTRACTING OR PURIFYING OF NATURAL DYE:

    Processes under the class definition directed to the extraction of coloring
    matter from natural materials or subsequent treatment to purify the same so
    as to put it in a form suitable for use as a dye.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    645,    for inorganic dye composition.

    646,    for natural dyes and processes of dyeing therewith.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, subclasses 293+ for physical
    processes included therein for the treatment of inorganic compounds and
    nonmetallic elements.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for the extraction and purification
    of carbon compounds classifiable therein.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses for
    processes and purification of inorganic compounds and nonmetallic elements
    by chemical reaction and for processes of extracting, leaching, or
    dissolving inorganic compounds and nonmetallic elements.


CLS 8/439
TXT Logwood:

    Subject matter under subclass 438 containing logwood type dyes.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is the aqueous extraction of heartwood,
    i.e., of hematoxyon campechium and oxidation in air to yield hematein.


CLS 8/440
TXT DYE RECOVERY PROCESS, OTHER THAN NOMINAL RECOVERY:

    Processes under the class definition involving a significant dye recovery
    process.

    (1)     Note. Included herein are processes wherein a dye is recovered from
    a dyed material, e.g., by extraction, absorption, etc., to be reused.  Also
    included herein is the recovery of the dye from a dye bath.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    502,    for mere recycling or replenishment of the dye in a dye bath.


CLS 8/441
TXT PROCESS OF COLOR RENOVATING A DYED PRODUCT:

    Processes under the class definition involving treating of worn or faded
    dyed materials so as to revive the original color or to redye the same in
    another color.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is the dyeing of rugs, tapestries, and
    furniture covering while in place.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    525,    for dye soaps.


CLS 8/442
TXT COLOR PROTECTING PROCESS FOR DYED PRODUCT:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to the employment of
    agents for the protection of dyed materials against stripping or removal of
    the color e.g., bleaching, scouring, or bowking of the dyed textile, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    490,    for the combination of dyeing and preserving the substrate of fiber.


CLS 8/443
TXT WEIGHTING PROCESS (LOADING SILK WITH METAL SALTS):

    Processes under the class definition for weighting a textile.

    (1)     Note.  Weighting agents are normally antimony or heavy metal salts
    to add weight to silk.

    (2)     Note.  The amount of metallic compound for weighting silk differs
    from the amount used for mordanting.  Combined weighting and mordanting is
    herein.

    (3)     Note.  Herein the weighting materials may be treated to overcome or
    inhibit the destructive effect of acids or other substances that might
    develop on decomposition of the incorporated weighting materials.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    618+,   for compositions for weighting.


CLS 8/444
TXT PROCESS UTILIZING ELECTRIC, MAGNETIC, OR WAVE ENERGY:

    Processes under the class definition involving the use of electric,
    magnetic, or wave energy.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein but not limited to the examples enumerated
    is the use of electric, magnetic, or wave energy in preparing a dye or
    mordant composition, or in using dye or treating a dyed product.

    (2)     Note.  The wave energy applied to the material may be light,
    emanations of radioactive material, infrared rays, ion bombardment, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 428+ for fluent material containment,
    support of transfer means with or without a radiation source; subclass
    493.1 for radiant energy generation and sources; and subclasses 492.1+ for
    the irradiation of objects and material.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 64+ for X-ray
    irradiation.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 457+ for coating processes employing
    radiant or wave energy.


CLS 8/445
TXT PROCESS OF PRINTING PERMANENTLY ON SUBSTRATE, OTHER THAN NOMINAL PRINTING,
    USING PRINT PASTE CONTAINING DISCHARGE MATERIAL, RESIST MATERIAL, OR DYE
    MATERIAL; OR STENCIL DYEING:

    Processes under the class definition involving the application of dyes on
    localized areas of a substrate by impression with a thickened dye paste or
    through openings or previous portions of a pattern sheet (stencil).

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses also include methods for the
    production of patterns by the application of substances to prevent
    coloration in local areas of the material or for discharging the color in a
    previously dyed ground, as well as chemical modification of local areas of
    the substrate so as to enhance or prevent dyeing in such areas.

    (2)     Note.  The recitation of screen printing, resist, reserve, or
    discharge or detailed manipulative steps directly related to the printing
    are considered to be more than mere printing and as such are proper for
    this area.

    (3)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass as being considered nominal are
    methods reciting conventional printing steps, e.g., steaming, washing or
    soaping, drying, fixing, etc.

    (4)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass resist and reserve have been
    used interchangeably.

    (5)     Note.  The distinction between Class 106, subclass 31.27 and this
    area is that the coloration in this class is produced by imbibition and
    absorption by or combination with material.  Class 106 usually involves an
    insoluble pigment suspended in an oleaginous vehicle, while this class
    usually involves a soluble dye in an aqueous paste.  Generally, the prints
    of this class must be developed by steaming or chemical treatment, while in
    Class 106, simple drying is the more usual manner.  Processes employing the
    compositions, of Class 106 are found in Class 427, Coating Processes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 31.27+ for a printing
    ink.


CLS 8/446
TXT Resist or reserve:

    Processes under subclass 445 for the production of patterns in a substrate
    by preventing coloration in local areas.

    (1)     Note.  The resist composition may also include coloring matter for
    illuminating the parts of the pattern by coloring the same differently from
    the ground color.

    (2)     Note.  The prevention of coloration may be accomplished by
    mechanical masks such as resinous or waxy materials; by chemical means
    preventing the formation or development of the color in local areas; or by
    modifying the characteristics of selected areas of the material, so that it
    does not have the same tinctorial properties as the untreated parts of the
    material, as by mercerizing, immunizing, etc.  The treated areas may have
    their affinity for certain types of dyes decreased but their receptivity
    for other types enhanced, as in the case of immunized or saponified areas,
    or by the application of so-called mordant-resists.

    (3)     Note.  Silk screen printing is considered resist printing.

    (4)     Note.  In the subclasses hereunder classification is only on the
    dye resisted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    481,    for effects obtained by treating only certain threads prior to
    weaving, spinning, or twisting, etc.


CLS 8/447
TXT Wax:

    Processes under subclass 446 containing a wax.


CLS 8/448
TXT Chemically modified local areas:

    Processes under subclass 446 wherein local or selected areas of the
    substrate are chemically modified so that they are dyed differently from
    the untreated parts.

    (1)     Note.  Local areas are areas of a substrate which are less than the
    whole surface of the substrate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    for similar pattern effects obtained without coloring.

    120     and 181+, for immunizing, per se.


CLS 8/449
TXT Reactive dye:

    Processes under subclass 446 using a resist with a reactive dye.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition of a reactive dye.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    543,    for a reactive dye composition.


CLS 8/450
TXT Oxidation dye, e.g., aniline, nitroaniline, etc.:

    Processes under subclass 446 wherein the dye resisted is an oxidation dye,
    e.g., aniline, nitroaniline, diphenyl black, etc.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition of oxidation dye.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    406     and 649, for oxidation dye composition.


CLS 8/451
TXT Azo dye component ground:

    Processes under subclass 446 wherein an azo ground component of an azo dye
    is prevented from diazotization, coupling or other development in local
    areas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    457+,   for the discharge of azo dyes already formed on a substrate.

    666+,   for azo coupling on the fiber.


CLS 8/452
TXT Mordant dye, e.g., dye with a metal chelating group, etc.:

    Processes under subclass 446 wherein a mordant dye is resisted.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term mordant dye.


CLS 8/453
TXT Vat dye or sulfur dye, e.g., quionic or indigoid reducible dye,
    sulfur-organic reaction product dye, etc.:

    Processes under subclass 446 wherein a vat or sulfur dye is resisted.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the terms vat dye and
    sulfur dye.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    650,    for other vat and sulfur dye compositions.


CLS 8/454
TXT Basic dye, including diphenylmethane, triphenylmethane, xanthene, fluorene,
    methine, acridine, oxazine, phenazine, flavylium, naphthoperinone,
    quinophthalone, quaternary ammonium group, etc., containing:

    Processes under subclass 446 wherein a basic or cationic dye is resisted.

    (1)     Note.  See the glossary for a definition of basic dye.


CLS 8/455
TXT Acid (including direct) dye, e.g., sulfonated, sulfamated, etc.:

    Processes under subclass 446 wherein an acid or direct dye is resisted.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition of an acid dye.


CLS 8/456
TXT Disperse dye:

    Processes under subclass 446 wherein a disperse dye is resisted.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition of a disperse dye.


CLS 8/457
TXT Discharge utilized:

    Processes under subclass 445 for the removal of a color from selected local
    areas of a substrate which has been previously colored in order to obtain
    pattern effects.

    (1)     Note.  In the subclasses hereunder classification is only on the
    dye discharged.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for stripping color entirely from fabrics.

    446,    for agents applied to prevent the development of color from a
    previously applied intermediate or dye component as such agents are not
    regarded as being discharges for the purposes of this subclass.


CLS 8/458
TXT Chemically modified local areas:

    Processes under subclass 457 wherein local or selected areas of the
    substrate are chemically modified so that they are dyed differently from
    the untreated parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    for similar pattern effects obtained without coloring.

    120     and 181+, for immunizing, per se.


CLS 8/459
TXT Oxidation dye, e.g., aniline, nitroaniline, etc.:

    Processes under subclass 457 wherein an oxidation dye is discharged.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition of an oxidation dye.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    406+,   for oxidation dyes on hair or fur.

    649,    for oxidation dyes on textiles.


CLS 8/460
TXT Mordant dye:

    Processes under subclass 457 wherein a mordant dye is discharged.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition of a mordant dye.


CLS 8/461
TXT Vat dye or sulfur dye, e.g., quinonic or indigold reducible, or
    sulfur-organic compound reaction product dye, etc.:

    Process under subclass 457 wherein a vat or sulfur dye is discharged.

    (1)     Note.  See this Glossary for a definition of the term vat dye.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    650,    for other vat and sulfur dye compositions.


CLS 8/462
TXT Basic dye, including diphenylmethane, triphenylmethane, xanthene, fluorene,
    methine, acridine, oxazine, phenazine, flavylium, napthoperinone,
    quinophthalone, quarternary ammonium group, etc., containing:

    Processes under subclass 457 wherein a basic or cationic dye is discharged.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of basic dye.


CLS 8/463
TXT Acid (including direct) dye, e.g., sulfonated, sulfamated, etc.:

    Processes under subclass 457 wherein an acid or direct dye is discharded.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of acid dye.


CLS 8/464
TXT Disperse dye:

    Processes under subclass 457 wherein a disperse dye is discharged.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary of a definition of disperse dye.


CLS 8/465
TXT Vat dye or sulfur dye, e.g., quinonic or indigold reducible dye,
    sulfur-organic compound reaction product dye, etc.:

    Processes under subclass 445 for direct printing with a vat dye or sulfur
    dye.


CLS 8/466
TXT Azo dye:

    Processes under subclass 445 in which the components of an azo dye are
    present during printing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    662+,   for similar processes not limited to printing.


CLS 8/467
TXT DIFFUSION TRANSFER DYEING PROCESS, TRANSFER SHEET AND PRODUCT:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a support carrying a dye
    or discharge is brought into contact with the surface to be colored and the
    dye or discharge released to the surface, usually by moistening with a
    solvent or by heating or both.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also includes the combination of a support
    with a dye or discharge material thereon, i.e., transfer sheet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    445,    for textile printing by Impression or by stenciling.

    478,    for marbleizing textiles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclass 464 for planographic printing involving transfer
    of marking material by film to film inhibition.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    230 for processes of transferring lamina from an adhered carrier.

    427,    Coating Processes, particularly subclasses 146+ for processes for
    making transfer or copy sheets by a coating process; and subclass 429 for
    applying a coating with an absorbent applicator.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 103 and 195+ for a single or plural layer web or
    sheet stock material product with a differential or discontinuous coating
    or impregnation; and subclasses 914+ (a cross-reference art collection) for
    a product in which a coating or impregnation is released to another
    surface, i.e., transfer sheets.


CLS 8/468
TXT Release layer utilized:

    Subject matter under subclass 467 wherein a layer on the support is used to
    facilitate the separation of the material to be transferred.


CLS 8/469
TXT Steam:

    Subject matter under subclass 467 wherein steam is involved in the transfer
    process.


CLS 8/470
TXT Dry heat treatment for penetration:

    Subject matter under subclass 467 wherein dry heat is used to facilitate
    dye penetration.


CLS 8/471
TXT Sublimation:

    Subject matter under subclass 470 wherein sublimating is involved in the
    transfer to the receiving surface.


CLS 8/472
TXT Air pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 471 wherein air pressure is involved in the
    transfer process.


CLS 8/473
TXT SUBAMBIENT TEMPERATURE DYEING PROCESS, I.E., LESS THAN 20 DEGREES C.:

    Processes under the class definition where subambient temperature is used
    in dyeing.

    (1)     Note.  20 degrees C. (68 degrees F.) is defined as ambient
    temperature for purposes of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    619,    for ammonia assisted dyeing.


CLS 8/474
TXT REACTIVE GAS OR REACTIVE VAPOR UTILIZED IN DYE PROCESS:

    Processes under the class definition wherein a reactive gas or vapor is
    used.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass ozone or nitrogen oxides are
    reactive gasses used to develop a reduced vat dye on the fiber.


CLS 8/475
TXT CONFINED GAS PHASE SUPERATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE DYEING PROCESS (OTHER THAN
    STEAM BELOW 138 DEGRESS C.):

    Processes under the class definition wherein a confined superatmospheric
    pressure is used in dyeing (gas phase).

    (1)     Note.  Processes for the treatment of dyed or printed textile
    materials to complete the effect of the dye such as to improve fastness,
    prevent fading or increase brilliance are in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Steam under pressure at temperature below 138 degrees C. is
    considered routine and not included herein.


CLS 8/476
TXT Steam (at 138 degrees C. or above):

    Processes under subclass 475 using steam at a temperature of 138 degrees C.
    (280 degrees F.) or above.


CLS 8/477
TXT FOAM DYE COMPOSITION OR PROCESS:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein foam is generated as by a
    gas entering a dye solution and causing bubbling and these bubble gases in
    dye liquor are applied to the material to be dyed.

    (1)     Note.  Foam dyeing is usually used so as to limit the quantity of
    dye liquor applied to the material to be dyed.


CLS 8/478
TXT PATTERN EFFECT DYEING, PROCESS, COMPOSITIONS, OR PRODUCTS:

    Processes and compositions under the class definition for the production of
    pattern effects on a substrate by methods involving a manipulation of the
    materials, and product thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded herein are pattern effects due to blends of fibers
    or materials wherein different materials or fibers have a different
    affinity with the dye; and see in particular subclasses 529+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114+,   for ornamental and pattern effects produced by the chemical
    modification of the textile material, where coloring is not involved or is
    only incidental.

    148     and 149, for manipulative processes for producing intermittent
    variation in depth of color, and intermittent color and noncolor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 256+ for processes of producing a
    nonuniform coating.


CLS 8/479
TXT Discontinuous or multidirectional movement of substrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 478 wherein a substrate is moved
    discontinuously or multidirectionally during the dyeing process for an
    effect.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the movement can be produced by vibrating a
    substrate in or out of contact with the applicator.


CLS 8/480
TXT Cross dyeing:

    Subject matter under subclass 478 wherein a component part of a substrate
    is differently treated to modify the dye affinity or color produced such as
    by mordant, resist, or dye intermediate, and then dyed or developed with
    one or more dyes or dye components to produce pattern effects.

    (1)     Note.  Such effects due to a natural difference in the dyeing
    affinity of fibers in a blend are excluded from this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    529+,   for pattern effects in a fiber blend due to natural difference in
    dye affinity of different fibers.


CLS 8/481
TXT Mixture of treated and untreated individual fibers:

    Processes under subclass 480 wherein a mixture of treated and untreated
    fibers is used.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    529+,   where effects are due to a natural difference in dyeing affinity of
    the component threads.


CLS 8/482
TXT Suppress dyeing, e.g., fold, twist, wrinkle, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 478 wherein an effect is obtained by
    suppressing access of the dye to portions of the substrate to be dyed by a
    temporary shaping of the substrate.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is manipulating the material by folding,
    twisting, wrinkling, etc., In order to prevent areas of the material from
    being exposed to the applied dye or to limit the relative amount of dye
    applied to some areas.


CLS 8/483
TXT Random pattern effect, e.g., space dyeing, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 478 wherein the dye is applied in a manner so
    as to produce a random nonrepeating pattern.

    (1)     Note.  Space dyeing is a yarn dyeing process in which one strand
    receives more than one color at irregular intervals.  It produces an effect
    of unorganized design.


CLS 8/484
TXT Differential diffusion:

    Subject matter under subclass 483 using diffusion of the dye through the
    substrate to produce irregular patterns of dyed areas.


CLS 8/485
TXT Two or more sequential dye application steps:

    Subject matter under subclass 478 involving two or more sequential dye
    applications to produce a pattern dyeing effect.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    502,    for replenishing a dye solution in a dye bath.

    504,    for plural applications of the same dye wherein no pattern dyeing
    effect is produced.

    529+,   for one or two bath union dyeing of fiber mixtures (or blends).


CLS 8/486
TXT Direct contact with applicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 478 wherein direct contact between applicator
    and substrate occurs.

    (1)     Note.  Printing with stencil or roller is in subclass 445.  In this
    subclass 486 the purpose of the contact is to bring the solution to the
    substrate and to permit it to migrate into the substrate for an effect.


CLS 8/487
TXT Roller or Disc:

    Subject matter under subclass 486 wherein the dye is applied by a roller or
    disc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, for roller printing.


CLS 8/488
TXT BONDING OF PREFORM, E.G., FLOCKING, ETC., WITH DYEING, PROCESS OR PRODUCT:

    Subject matter under the class definition involving the combined operations
    of bonding two or more performs together and dyeing same.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes the process of bonding and dyeing or
    the product produced after the dyeing operation.

    (2)     Note.  In this process adhesive or plasticizers may be used to bind
    preforms together.


CLS 8/489
TXT DRAWING OR STRETCHING OF PREFORM WITH DYEING, PROCESS OR PRODUCT:

    Subject matter under the class definition involving drawing or stretching
    of a preform and dyeing same.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes the process of stretching or drawing,
    or the product produced after the dyeing operation.


CLS 8/490
TXT PROCESS OF PRESERVING SUBSTRATE COMBINED WITH DYEING OR PRODUCT THEREOF,
    E.G., BIOCIDAL OR FIRE RETARDANT TREATMENT, ETC.:

    Subject matter under the class definition involving the combination of
    dyeing with treating a substrate with a biocidal, fire retardant, or other
    preservative treatment.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes the dyed product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    442,    for protecting the color.


CLS 8/491
TXT OVERALL DIMENSIONAL MODIFICATION OR STABILIZATION, E.G., CREPING, ETC.,
    INCLUDING USE OF CHEMICAL ADDITIVE TO FORM AT LEAST A TEMPORARY
    COMPOSITION, WITH DYEING PROCESS:

    Processes under the class definition involving an overall dimensional
    modification or stabilization of the substrate (including use of a chemical
    additive to form a treating composition) and dyeing.

    (1)     Note.  The treating can be physical, e.g., shrinking, heat setting,
    creping, etc., or it can be by a chemical additive.

    (2)     Note.  Creping refers to several methods of producing a crepe
    effect on a fabric.  See the Glossary for a definition of crepe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118,    for parchmentizing.

    125,    for mercerizing or alkaline treatment.

    537,    for parchmentizing (paper), or mercerizing (cotton), in combination
    with dyeing.

    541,    for cross-linking to facilitate dyeing.


CLS 8/492
TXT Solvent treatment of synthetic fibers:

    Processes under subclass 491 involving the combination of treatment of
    synthetic fiber with a solvent and dyeing, and product thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130.1+, for the subcombination of plasticizing artificial fibers.


CLS 8/493
TXT Modification of molecular structure of substrate by chemical means, e.g.,
    cross-linking of substrate, hydrolysis of substrate, etc.:

    Processes under subclass 491 involving modification of chemical structure
    by chemical means, e.g., cross-linking, hydrolysis, etc., of substrate and
    product thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    541,    for cross-linking agents such as diepoxides, to anchor a dye.


CLS 8/494
TXT NOMINAL TEXTILE MANUFACTURE PROCESS COMBINED WITH DYEING:

    Processes under the class definition involving the combination of a nominal
    textile manufacturing step together with a dyeing step.

    (1)     Note.  Nominal textile manufacture here refers to a broadly recited
    textile operation, e.g., mere recitation of weaving, knitting, tufting,
    sewing, texturizing, etc.


CLS 8/495
TXT COATING OR SIZING WITH DYEING OR PRODUCT:

    Processes under the class definition involving the combination of coating
    or sizing together with a dyeing step and product thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Coating with polymer which acts as an assistant or mordant
    is considered part of the dyeing method and goes below the organic polymer
    additives.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    490,    for fire or biocidal resistant coating.


CLS 8/496
TXT Aminoplast or aminoplast precursor coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 495 wherein an aminoplast or aminoplast
    precursor is applied as a coating or sizing.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein but not limited thereto are
    unreaformaldehyde and melamineformaldehyde aminoplasts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    554,    for guanidine-formaldehyde as an assistant.

    556,    for use of dicyandiamideformaldehyde or cyanamideformaldehyde as
    assistant for an acid dye.


CLS 8/497
TXT FORMING, SHAPING, OR RESHAPING WITH DYEING PROCESS OR PRODUCT:

    Processes under the class definition involving forming, shaping, or
    reshaping a preform together with a dyeing step and product thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    489,    for stretching or drawing to reshape in combination with dyeing.

    538,    for gelled fibers dyeing since the gel form of a fiber is a form of
    the fiber before it is hardened and involves stretching.


CLS 8/498
TXT PROCESS OF DYEING INVOLVING DRY POWDER APPLICATION:

    Processes under the class definition involving applying a dye in dry
    powdered form to a substrate to dye.

    (1)     Note.  Dried on the fabric print pastes are not considered powdered
    and are classified with dye or dye assistant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    524,    for dye powders as dye concentrates or process of preparing same
    (to be dissolved in liquid dye baths and diluted thereby).


CLS 8/499
TXT SPRAY-DYEING PROCESS:

    Processes under the class definition involving using a gas to propel fine
    particles of a liquid dye composition against the substrate to dye the
    same, or utilizing a nozzle to spray a dye composition onto a substrate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    478+,   where a pattern effect is obtained.


CLS 8/500
TXT DYEING PROCESS UTILIZING MECHANICAL PRESSURE, E.G., PRESSES, ETC.:

    Processes under the class definition wherein mechanical pressure is
    utilized to assist in dyeing.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is use of molten metal bath, mechanical
    presses, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    497,    for mechanical shaping with pressure to reshape the substrate.


CLS 8/501
TXT TWO-PHASE SYSTEM DYEING COMPOSITION OR PROCESS:

    Processes and compositions under the class definition involving dye
    compositions in a two-phase system or wherein a change of phase occurs.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are, e.g., systems where the dye
    precipitates as it loses solubility or dissolves as it gains solubility.
    i.e., change of phase, dye distributing between two different phases as in
    an emulsion, preparation of dye compositions wherein dye is being forced
    into a phase of an emulsion, etc.


CLS 8/502
TXT REPLENISHMENT OR REPLACEMENT OF SAME BATH LIQUOR IN DYEING PROCESS:

    Processes under the class definition where replenishment or replacement of
    a dye bath liquor is involved, using the same dye.


CLS 8/503
TXT DYEING PROCESS INVOLVING BURNING OF REAGENTS:

    Processes under the class definition involving removing used reagents by
    burning.


CLS 8/504
TXT PROCESS INVOLVING PLURAL APPLICATION STEPS WITH SAME DYE:

    Processes under the class definition involving plural applications of the
    same dye to a substrate.


CLS 8/505
TXT DIFFERENTIAL FLUID PRESSURE ASSISTED DYEING PROCESS, E.G., AIR PRESSURE,
    VACUUM, ETC.:

    Processes under the class definition wherein differential fluid pressure,
    e.g., air pressure or vacuum, etc., is utilized in the dyeing process.

    (1)     Note.  Use of air for drying only is not sufficient to place in
    this subclass.


CLS 8/506
TXT NONTEXTILE, DYEING PROCESS OR PRODUCT, INCLUDING INORGANIC FIBER:

    Processes under the class definition involving dyeing of nontextile
    articles and products thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Paper is classified as a textile in this class and thus is
    not in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of textile materials.


CLS 8/507
TXT Contact lens:

    Subject matter under subclass 506 for dyeing of contact lens.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 162+ for coating a lens.


CLS 8/508
TXT Vinyl chloride polymer substrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 506 for dyeing vinyl chloride polymer or
    copolymer substrate.


CLS 8/509
TXT Acrylate polymer substrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 506 wherein an acrylate polymer or copolymer
    substrate is dyed.


CLS 8/510
TXT Acrylonitrile polymer substrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 506 involving dyeing an acrylonitrile polymer
    or copolymer substrate.


CLS 8/511
TXT Contains basic addition comonomer, e.g., vinyl pyridine, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 510 wherein the copolymer substrate includes
    a basic addition comonomer, e.g., vinyl pryidine, etc.


CLS 8/512
TXT Polymer from polyol and a polycarboxylic acid or derivative substrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 506 for dyeing material which is the reaction
    product of a polyol and a polycarboxylic acid or a polycarboxylic acid
    derivative.


CLS 8/513
TXT Olefin polymer substrate or rubber:

    Subject matter under subclass 506 for dyeing a polymer derived from an
    unsaturated hydrocarbon or natural rubber substrate.


CLS 8/514
TXT Styrene polymer:

    Subject matter under subclass 513 for dyeing a styrene polymer substrate.


CLS 8/515
TXT Polymer from isocyanate and a polyol, e.g., polyurethane, etc., substrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 506 for dyeing substrate derived from a
    polyol and an isocyanate, e.g., polyurethane, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Blocked isocyanates are included herein as being isocyanate
    reactants.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    521,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 53 for treating a
    foamed solid polymer.


CLS 8/516
TXT Amide polymer substrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 506 for dyeing a polyamide substrate.


CLS 8/517
TXT Natural polyamide, e.g., casein, gelatin, keratin, collagen, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 516 for dyeing natural polyamides.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are naturally occurring proteins, e.g.,
    keratin, casein, zein, gelatin, collagen, etc.


CLS 8/518
TXT Cellulose substrate other than paper:

    Subject matter under subclass 506 wherein cellulose material, other than
    paper, is dyed.

    (1)     Note.  Paper is considered as a textile material in this art.


CLS 8/519
TXT Cellulose ester or cellulose ether:

    Subject matter under subclass 518 for dyeing a cellulose ether or ester
    substrate.


CLS 8/520
TXT Phenol-aldehyde resin substrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 506 for dyeing a phenol-aldehyde resin
    substrate.


CLS 8/521
TXT Oil, fat, wax, or gasoline dyeing:

    Subject matter under subclass 506 for coloring oils, fats, wax, or gasoline.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclass 642 for a composition which
    in the presence of burning solid fuel changes the color of the flame
    produced.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, particularly subclasses 253+,
    266, and 272 for plastic and coating compositions comprising a colored oil
    or wax.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclass 12 for (a)
    processes of treating mineral oils in order to impart a color thereto
    (including imparting fluorescence thereto) which does not involve the
    addition of a pigment or dye thereto, and (b) products of such processes.


CLS 8/522
TXT Inorganic substrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 506 for dyeing an inorganic substrate.


CLS 8/523
TXT Silica or calcareous substrate, e.g., glass, etc:

    Subject matter under subclass 522 for coloring a calcareous or siliceous
    substrate.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are, e.g., bone, pearl, chips, stone, sand,
    plaster of Paris, gypsum, plasterboard, glass, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 430+ and 443+ for a process of
    coating of glass filaments or fibers with a colored material combined with
    the step of forming the filaments or fibers.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, particularly subclass 712 for
    the incorporation of coloring matter in the formation of artificial stone.


CLS 8/524
TXT DRY DYE COMPOSITION OTHER THAN MERE MIXTURE OF TWO OR MORE DYES ALONE OR
    PROCESS OF MAKING:

    Subject matter under the class definition involving a dry dye composition
    or its method of production.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a micro capsule which may have a fluid
    center.

    (2)     Note.  Production of dyes from dye cakes is normally by grinding
    and produces a powder which is included herein.  Dye powder, per se, is in
    this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    498,    for process of dyeing with a powder dye.

    638+,   for a mere mixture of dyes.


CLS 8/525
TXT Dye soap or detergent:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 containing dye admixed with soap or
    detergent for coloring textile materials with or without a simultaneous
    detergent action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    441,    for combined processes involving coloring or recoloring and
    cleaning or renovating.

    648,    for bluing soaps.


CLS 8/526
TXT Dye in specified form other than mere powder:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 wherein a dye composition is in a
    specific physical form other than mere powder, per se.

    (1)     Note.  For example, this subclass includes such forms as tablets,
    microspheres, packages, balls, laminaes, flakes, waters, sheets, particles
    of a specific size, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Dye powder, per se, is not significant form for this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    525,    for dye soaps.

    648,    for bluing agents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass .5 for infusion packages.


CLS 8/527
TXT DYE CONCENTRATE COMPOSITION WHEREIN AN ADDITIONAL AMOUNT OF A CONSTITUENT
    OF THE COMPOSITION MUST BE ADDED BEFORE USE:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to dye concentrate
    compositions or methods of making these compositions wherein an additional
    amount of a constituent of the composition must be added before using.

    (1)     Note.  The composition as claimed requires the addition of further
    constituents in order to be usable in dyeing process or wherein the
    composition is referred to as a concentrate.


CLS 8/528
TXT Highly viscous dye concentrate e.g., paste, etc:

    Subject matter under subclass 527 where dye concentrate is in a highly
    viscous or thickened state, e.g., a paste, etc.

    (1)     Note.  The paste form can arise from the dye preparation, as in wet
    grinding of dye cakes.

    (2)     Note.  Normal print pastes are not concentrates.  Print pastes with
    conventional thickeners are classified by the dye, method of application or
    other dye assistant.


CLS 8/529
TXT MULTIPLE CHEMICALLY DIVERSE FIBERS OR FIBERS WITH DIFFERENT CROSS SECTION,
    PROCESS OF DYEING OR PRODUCT:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to processes for
    coloring textile materials composed of more than one kind of fiber in solid
    or contrast shades and the preparation of the colored effect threads for a
    mixed fabric or product thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Dyeing of mixed fiber fabric followed by complete discharge
    of the dye from one of the components of the mixed material is in this
    subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Fiber blends herein means a mixture of diverse fibers and
    does not mean a blend of polymers in a single fiber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    480,    for dyeing of mixed fibers, one part of which has been treated in
    local areas to modify its dye affinity and produce pattern effects.


CLS 8/530
TXT Resisting a fiber:

    Subject matter under subclass 529 wherein an agent for restricting the
    coloration to one kind of fiber or at least decreasing the affinity of the
    color for one of the mixed fibers is used.

    (1)     Note.  This agent for purposes of this subclass may be applied
    before dyeing to some or all of the component fibers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    446,    for similar processes (not limited to mixed fiber fabrics)
    involving printing.


CLS 8/531
TXT Synthetic polyamide:

    Subject matter under subclass 529 involving dyeing a blend containing a
    polyamide other than wool or silk.


CLS 8/532
TXT Polyester fiber and cellulose fiber:

    Subject matter under subclass 529 involving dyeing a blend of polyester
    fiber and cellulose fiber.

    (1)     Note.  Polyester fiber is made by the reaction of a polyol and a
    poly-carboxylic acid or derivative.


CLS 8/533
TXT Polyester fiber with wool or silk fiber:

    Subject matter under subclass 529 involving dyeing a blend of polyester
    with wool or silk.


CLS 8/534
TXT Polyacrylonitrile fiber:

    Subject matter under subclass 529 for dyeing a blend containing a fiber
    derived from acrylonitrile.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes acid and basic modified
    polyacrylonitrile blends.  The acid modified polyacrylonitrile usually is a
    polyacrylonitrile with additional pendant -SO3- or -COO- radicals as by
    copolymerizing acrylonitrile with a sulfonated monomer.


CLS 8/535
TXT PHENOL-ALDEHYDE FIBER DYEING COMPOSITION, PROCESS, OR DYED PRODUCT:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to processes or
    compositions, for dyeing or phenolaldehyde resin fiber or product.


CLS 8/536
TXT FIBER DERIVED FROM SAPONIFIED CELLULOSE ESTERS OR FROM NITROCELLULOSE
    CONVERTED TO CELLULOSE, DYE COMPOSITION, PROCESS, OR PRODUCT:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to processes or
    compositions for dyeing of fibers derived from saponified cellulose ester
    or from nitrocellulose converted to cellulose, or product thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    for processes of ornamenting a textile or fiber including a
    saponifying step.

    130,    for process of saponifying per se of a cellulose ester or ether
    fiber or textile.

    446,    for dyeing processes which include the application of a saponifying
    agent by printing to local areas of a fabric or to intermittent parts of a
    yarn.


CLS 8/537
TXT MERCERIZED CELLULOSE FIBER OR PARCHMENTIZED CELLULOSE FIBER DYEING
    COMPOSITION, PROCESS, OR PRODUCT:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to compositions or
    processes for dyeing mercerized, acidified, or parchmentized cellulose.

    (1)     Note.  Mercerizing is the treatment of cellulose fiber with cold
    concentrated alkali.

    (2)     Note.  Parchmentizing is the treatment of paper with cold
    concentrated acid to make it parchment-like.


CLS 8/538
TXT GELLED FIBER-DYEING PROCESS OR PRODUCT:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to processes for dyeing
    gelled fibers and product thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Usually gelling of fibers occurs during the spinning of
    polyacrylonitrile or viscose from an aqueous bath.  Drying and heating
    hardens the fibers and they lose their ready internal accessibility to dyes.


CLS 8/539
TXT SYNTHETIC FIBER PRODUCED FROM  MATERIAL WHICH CONTAINS PENDANT-COO-,  -
    (O=)S(=O)-O-,-O-(O=)P(=O)-O-,     PYRIDINO,  DIALKYLAMINOALKYL-, OR
    QUATERNARY AMMONIUM RADICAL, DYEING PROCESS OR PRODUCT:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to compositions or
    processes for or products of dyeing synthetic fiber produced from material
    which contains at least one of the following pendant radicals.

    1.      -COO-

    2.      -SO3-

    3.      Dialkylaminoalkyl group

    4.      Pyridine group

    5.      PO4

    6.      Quaternary ammonium group


CLS 8/540
TXT Quaternary ammonium, pyridino, or dialkylaminoalkyl:

    Subject matter under subclass 539 wherein the fiber contains pendant
    quaternary ammonium, pyridino, or dialkylaminoalkyl groups.

    (1)     Note.  The groups noted above provide basic fibers which are
    substantive to or dyed by sulfonated direct or acid dyes.


CLS 8/541
TXT ACYLATING AGENT OR CROSS-LINKER DYE ADDITIVE, COMPOSITION, PROCESS, OR
    PRODUCT:

    Subject matter under the class definition involving dye compositions or
    processes using acylating agents or cross-linking agent to assist dyeing or
    product thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term cross-linker
    dye additive.

    (2)     Note.  Diepoxides and diacylhalides are examples of cross-linkers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    543,    for an agent which is a part of a reactive dye.

    551,    for ethylene imines.


CLS 8/542
TXT Pretreatment of substrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 541 where the substrate is pretreated with
    the acylating agent or cross-linker.


CLS 8/543
TXT REACTIVE DYE COMPOSITION, PROCESS, OR PRODUCT:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to dyeing with a
    reactive dye.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition of a reactive dye.


CLS 8/544
TXT 1, 2-epoxy terminal group dye or halohydroxy dye, e.g.,
    -CH(OH)-CHC1 containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 543 using a 1,2-epoxy terminated dye or
    halohydroxy alkylene dye, i.e., dye containing a -C(OH)-CC1-group.


CLS 8/546
TXT Thiosulfato group containing dye:

    Subject matter under subclass 543 using thiosulfato group containing dyes,
    e.g., -S-SO3Na, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    652,    sulfur dyes which change by reduction to thiosulfato dyes


CLS 8/547
TXT Quaternary ammonium group containing dye:

    Subject matter under subclass 543 using a reactive dye containing an
    alkylene quaternary ammonium group.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is an amine assisted reactive dye which
    forms the quaternary ammonium form of a reactive dye.


CLS 8/548
TXT Alkylene phosphate or phosphite dye:

    Subject matter under subclass 543 using alkylene phosphate or phosphite
    dyes.


CLS 8/549
TXT Alkylene sulfato, halotriazine, halodiazine, haloquinoxaline, or
    halopyrimidine dye:

    Subject matter under subclass 543 using alkylene sulfate, halotriazine,
    halodiazine, halopyrimidine or haloquinoxaline dye.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    543,    for a vinyl sulfone.


CLS 8/550
TXT ORGANIC ADDITIVE FOR DYE COMPOSITION, DYE COMPOSITION CONTAINING ORGANIC
    ADDITIVE, PROCESS OR PRODUCT; OTHER THAN EMULSIFIER, PH ADJUSTER OR STARCH
    OR GUM PRINT PASTE THICKENER:

    Subject matter under the class definition involving organic dye additives
    (assistants) added to the dye to assist in or improve this dyeing.

    (1)     Note.  Classification based on the following organic dye additives
    (assistants) is excluded from this subclass:

    a.      Materials used merely as emulsifiers, e.g., conventional
    detergents, wetting agents, dispersing agents, fatty acid salts (soaps),
    etc.

    b.      ph adjusters, e.g., buffers, alkali, or acid, etc.

    c.      Starch or gum when used merely as a print paste thickener.

    d.      Sugars as diluents or bulking agents in preparing dye powders.

    (2)     Note.  Where an additive such as an emulsifier, etc. excluded
    above, is disclosed to have another function, classification on the
    additive in this subclass is proper.

    (3)     Note.  Included herein are organic solvents, mordants,
    plasticizers, carriers, inhibitors, etc., which are used to assist in
    dyeing.

    (4)     Note.  Sugars which are nonpolymeric are classified in subclass 611
    regardless of functional moieties therein, e.g., a nitrogen containing
    sugar would not be in subclass 602 but in subclass 611.

    (5)     Note.  An additive added to the substrate at a different time from
    the dye is also here, except if an additive is incorporated into the
    substrate material before forming the substrate, e.g., as in the production
    of a resin to be spun into a fiber, then the classification is not based on
    that additive which is considered part of the substrate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    618,    for an inorganic additive.


CLS 8/551
TXT Ethylenimine or polymer thereof or polyalkylene polyamine:

    Subject matter under subclass 550 wherein the organic additive is an
    ehtylenmine or polymer derived therefrom or is a polyalky-lene polyamine.


CLS 8/552
TXT Polymeric additive:

    Subject matter under subclass 550 wherein the organic additive is a polymer
    including liquid or solid polymers.

    (1)     Note.  Conventional thickeners for print paste, i.e., starch or
    gums, are not placed here.  The other dye additives control classification.

    (2)     Note.  Nonprinting compositions with thickeners such as starch are
    herein. Functions of starch or gums other than print paste thickening are
    herein.

    (3)     Note.  Cellulose esters and ethers are herein.


CLS 8/553
TXT Derived form vinyl pyrrolidone or vinyl pyridine:

    Subject matter under subclass 552 wherein the polymeric additive is a
    polymer derived from vinyl pyridine or vinyl pyrrolidone.


CLS 8/554
TXT Cationic polymer, e.g., aminated polymer without -COO-, -(O=)S(=O)-O,
    -O-(O=)P(=O)-O- groups, e.g., polyacrylamide, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 552 wherein a cationic polymer is employed as
    a dye assistant.

    (1)     Note.  The criterion for a cationic polymer is the ability of acid
    dyes to be substantive thereto, i.e., to permanently dye the basic polymer.

    (2)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of acid dye.

    (3)     Note.  Polymers with amine groups with no acid groups, or
    polyamides are examples of cationic dyes.


CLS 8/555
TXT Acrylamide or dialkylaminoalkylacrylate polymer:

    Subject matter under subclass 554 involving a polymer derived from
    acrylamide or a dialkylaminoalkylacrylate.


CLS 8/556
TXT Cyanamide- or dicyandiamide- formaldehyde polymer:

    Subject matter under subclass 554 involving a polymer derived from the
    reaction of cyanamide and formaldehyde or dicyandiamide and formaldehyde.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    554,    for a guanadine formaldehyde polymer.


CLS 8/557
TXT Acid polymer, e.g., carboxylated or sulfonated polymer:

    Subject matter under subclass 552 wherein the polymeric additive is an acid
    polymer.

    (1)     Note.  Generally, acidic polymers are, e.g., polymers with pendant
    or terminal COOH, SO3H, or SO4H P04H radicals, etc., or polymers noted as
    being acid polymers.


CLS 8/558
TXT Acrylic acid polymer:

    Subject matter under subclass 557 wherein the organic polymer is derived
    from acrylic acid.


CLS 8/559
TXT Carboxyalkylene cellulose:

    Subject matter under subclass 557 wherein the organic polymer is
    carboxyalkylene cellulose, e.g., carboxymethyl cellulose, etc.


CLS 8/560
TXT Phenol-aldehyde polymer:

    Subject matter under subclass 557 wherein the organic polymer is a polymer
    derived from a phenol and an aldehyde.


CLS 8/561
TXT Carbohydrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 552 wherein the organic polymer is a
    carbohydrate.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass generally includes starch, gums, cellulose
    esters and ethers, etc., excluding starch or gum as a print paste thickener.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    611,    for nonpolymeric saccharides, e.g., glucose, sucrose, etc.


CLS 8/562
TXT Cellulose ester or cellulose ether:

    Subject matter under subclass 561 wherein the organic polymer is a
    cellulose ester or ether.


CLS 8/563
TXT Polypeptide or protein:

    Subject matter under subclass 552 wherein the organic polymer is a
    polypeptide or protein.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are gelatin, glue, etc.


CLS 8/564
TXT Lactam:

    Subject matter under subclass 550 wherein the organic additive is a lactam,
    e.g., pyrrolidone, etc.


CLS 8/565
TXT Six-membered hetero ring having two or more ring hetero atoms of which at
    least one is nitrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 550 wherein the organic additive is a
    compound having a six-membered hetero ring, having two or more ring hetero
    atoms therein, at least one of which is nitrogen.


CLS 8/566
TXT Triazines (including hydrogenated):

    Subject matter under subclass 565 wherein the organic additive is a
    compound containing a six-membered hetero ring containing three or more N-
    hetero atoms therein and including hydrogenated compounds.


CLS 8/567
TXT Diazines (including hydrogenated):

    Subject matter under subclass 565 wherein the organic additive is a
    six-membered hetero ring compound containing two N-hetero atoms including
    hydrogenated compounds.


CLS 8/568
TXT Six-membered hetero ring consisting of one nitrogen and five carbon atoms:

    Subject matter under subclass 550 wherein the organic additive is a hetero
    compound having a six-member ring with only one N group therein.


CLS 8/569
TXT Quinolines:

    Subject matter under subclass 568 wherein the organic additive is a
    quinoline.


CLS 8/570
TXT Five-membered hetero ring having two or more ring hetero atoms of which at
    least one is nitrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 550 wherein the organic agent contains a
    five-membered hetero ring which has at least two ring hetero atoms at least
    one of which is nitrogen.


CLS 8/571
TXT Hetero N ring contains a sulfur atom (including hydrogenated):

    Subject matter under subclass 570 wherein the organic additive is a hetero
    compound having a five-membered ring with at least one nitrogen atom and at
    least one sulfur atom in the ring, e.g., a thiazole, etc., including
    hydrogenated compounds.


CLS 8/572
TXT Hetero N ring contains an oxygen atom (including hydrogenated):

    Subject matter under subclass 570 wherein the organic additive is a hetero
    compound having a five-membered ring with at least one nitrogen atom and at
    least one oxygen atom in the ring, e.g., an oxazole, etc., including
    hydrogenated compounds.


CLS 8/573
TXT Hetero N ring contains at least two nitrogen hetero atoms (including
    hydrogenated):

    Subject matter under subclass 570 wherein the organic additive is a hetero
    compound having a five-membered ring with at least two nitrogen atoms in
    the ring, e.g., a diazole, etc., including hydrogenated compounds.


CLS 8/574
TXT Five-membered hetero ring consisting of one nitrogen and four carbon atoms:

    Subject matter under subclass 550 wherein the organic additive is a
    compound with a five-membered ring containing one nitrogen and four carbons
    in the ring, including hydrogenated compounds.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes poly- carboxylic acid imides, e.g.,
    phthalimide.


CLS 8/575
TXT Sulfur-containing hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 550 wherein the organic additive is a
    compound with a sulfur-containing hetero ring.


CLS 8/576
TXT Oxygen-containing hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 550 wherein the organic additive is a
    compound with an oxygen-containing hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are, e.g., epoxides, cyclic carbonates, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    611,    for a glucoside.


CLS 8/577
TXT Furyl (including hydrogenated):

    Subject matter under subclass 576 containing furyl or hydrofuryl compounds.


CLS 8/578
TXT Lactones:

    Subject matter under subclass 576 containing a lactone.


CLS 8/579
TXT Hetero ring is six-membered consisting of one oxygen and five carbons:

    Subject matter under subclass 576 wherein the organic additive is a
    six-membered ring compound with one oxygen and five carbons in the ring.


CLS 8/580
TXT Fats, higher fatty acids or esters, oils or waxes, other than
    nitrogen-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 550 wherein the organic additive is a fat,
    higher fatty acid ester, oil or wax and which does not contain a nitrogen
    atom.

    (1)     Note.  The oils or fats herein are generally triglycerides, e.g.,
    vegetable oil, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Higher fatty acids for the purposes of this subclass are
    considered to be monocarboxylic acids of eight or more carbons.


CLS 8/581
TXT Silicon-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 550 wherein the organic additive contains at
    least one silicon atom.


CLS 8/582
TXT Carboxylic acid esters, cyanates, isocyanates, or sulfur analogues thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 550 wherein the organic additive contains a
    carboxylic acid ester group, cyanate group, or isocyanate group or sulfur
    analogue thereof.


CLS 8/583
TXT Aromatic:

    Subject matter under subclass 582 wherein the organic additive is aromatic.


CLS 8/584
TXT Phosphorous-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 550 wherein the organic additive contains at
    least one atom of phosphorus.

    (1)     Note.  Phosphonium, phosphene, phosphate, phosphoryl compounds,
    etc., are classified here.


CLS 8/585
TXT Ureas, thioureas, pseudoureas, or pseudothioureas:

    Subject matter under subclass 550 using ureas, thioureas, pseudoureas, or
    pseudothioureas.


CLS 8/586
TXT Carboxamides or thiocarboxamides:

    Subject matter under subclass 550 wherein the organic additive is a
    compound which contains a carboxamide or thiocarboxamide group.


CLS 8/587
TXT Sulfur-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 550 wherein the organic additive contains at
    least one sulfur atom, e.g., sulfonium, suifones, etc.


CLS 8/588
TXT Sulfonic acids or sulfonic acid esters:

    Subject matter under subclass 587 wherein the organic additive contains a
    sulfonic acid or sulfonic acid ester group.


CLS 8/589
TXT Aromatic:

    Subject matter under subclass 588 wherein the sulfur additive contains an
    aromatic group.


CLS 8/590
TXT Amino:

    Subject matter under subclass 589 wherein the organic additive compound
    contains an amine group, e.g., sulfanilic acid, etc.


CLS 8/591
TXT Acyclic:

    Subject matter under subclass 588 wherein the organic additive compound is
    acyclic, e.g., taurine, etc.


CLS 8/592
TXT Sulfamic or sulfinic acids, salts, or esters:

    Subject matter under subclass 587 wherein the organic additive contains a
    sulfamic acid or sulfonic acid group or a salt or ester thereof.


CLS 8/593
TXT Sulfonamides:

    Subject matter under subclass 587 wherein the organic contains a
    sulfonamide group.


CLS 8/594
TXT Carboxylic acid or salt thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 550 wherein the organic additive is a
    carboxylic acid or salt thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    580,    for higher fatty acids, i.e., monocarboxylic acids having eight or
    more carbons in the chain.


CLS 8/595
TXT Tannins or tannic acid:

    Subject matter under subclass 594 wherein the organic additive includes
    tannins or tannic acid.

    (1)     Note.  Nutgall contains tannic acid and is classified herein.


CLS 8/596
TXT Contains heavy metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 595 including a heavy metal in the organic
    additive.


CLS 8/597
TXT Amine:

    Subject matter under subclass 594 wherein the organic additive carboxylic
    acid or salt compound contains an amine group.


CLS 8/598
TXT Acyclic:

    Subject matter under subclass 594 wherein the carboxylic acid or salt
    compound is acyclic.

    (1)     Note.  Acyclic is compound which contains no ring system.


CLS 8/599
TXT Hydroxy-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 598 wherein the organic additive contains a
    hydroxy carboxylic acid or salt.


CLS 8/600
TXT Heavy metal-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 598 where the carboxylic acid or salt
    contains a heavy metal atom.


CLS 8/601
TXT Halogen-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 598 wherein the organic additive contains a
    halogen atom.


CLS 8/602
TXT Nitrogen-containing, other than nitro or nitroso:

    Subject matter under subclass 550 wherein the organic additive contains a
    nitrogen atom which is other than nitro or nitroso.


CLS 8/603
TXT Nitrile:

    Subject matter under subclass 602 wherein the organic additive contains a
    nitrile group.


CLS 8/604
TXT Amino alkanol:

    Subject matter under subclass 602 wherein the nitrogen is in the form of an
    amino alkanol.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are the reaction products of alkylene oxides
    and amines.


CLS 8/605
TXT Anilines:

    Subject matter under subclass 602 wherein the organic additive contains an
    aniline-type group.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    406     and 649, for anilines as oxidation dyes.

    602,    for benzyl amines.


CLS 8/606
TXT Quaternary ammonium compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 602 wherein the organic additive contains a
    quaternary ammonium compound.


CLS 8/607
TXT Ketone:

    Subject matter under subclass 550 wherein the organic additive is a ketone.


CLS 8/608
TXT Aldehyde:

    Subject matter under subclass 550 wherein the organic additive is an
    aldehyde.


CLS 8/609
TXT Ether:

    Subject matter under subclass 550 wherein the organic additive is an ether.


CLS 8/610
TXT Aryl ether:

    Subject matter under subclass 609 wherein the ether is an aryl ether.


CLS 8/611
TXT Alcohol:

    Subject matter under subclass 550 wherein the organic additive is an
    alcohol.

    (1)     Note.  Sugars are grouped here even though they may contain groups
    in subclasses above; see note in subclass 550.


CLS 8/612
TXT Chlorohydrin:

    Subject matter under subclass 611 wherein the organic additive is a
    chlorhydrin (chlorohydrin).

    (1)     Note.  A chlorhydrin is a compound containing both -CL and -OH
    radicals.


CLS 8/613
TXT Phenols:

    Subject matter under subclass 611 wherein the organic additive is a
    phenol-type compound.


CLS 8/614
TXT Halogen-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 550 wherein the organic additive contains at
    least one halogen atom.


CLS 8/615
TXT Fluorine:

    Subject matter under subclass 614 containing at least one atom of fluorine.


CLS 8/616
TXT Aromatic:

    Subject matter under subclass 614 wherein the organic additive contains an
    aryl group.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are halogenated benzene and napthalene
    assistants.


CLS 8/617
TXT Hydrocarbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 550 wherein the organic additive is a
    hydrocarbon.


CLS 8/618
TXT INORGANIC ADDITIVE FOR DYE COMPOSITION, DYE COMPOSITION CONTAINING
    INORGANIC ADDITIVE, PROCESS OR PRODUCT; OTHER THAN EMULSIFIER, PH ADJUSTER,
    WATER, NITROUS ACID FOR AZO COUPLING OR SULFUR DYE:

    Subject matter under the class definition involving inorganic dye additives
    (assistants) which are added to the dye to assist in or improve the dyeing.

    (1)     Note.  Classification based on the following Inorganic dye
    additives (assistants) is excluded from this subclass:

    a.      Materials used merely as emulsifiers, e.g., conventional
    detergents, wetting agents, dispersing agents, Glauber's salt, etc.

    b.      pH adjusters, e.g., buffers, alkall, or acid, etc.

    c.      Water

    d.      Nitrous acid for azo coupling.

    e.      Sulfur reducing agent for vat or sulfur dye.

    (2)     Note.  An additive added to the substrate at a different time from
    the dye is also here, except if an additive is incorporated into the
    substrate material before forming the substrate, then the classification is
    not based on that additive which is considered part of the substrate.

    (3)     Note.  A statement that a fiber is metal modified or incorporates a
    metal is assumed to mean a metal after treatment and thereby the metal is
    considered an assistant for this subclass.

    (4)     Note.  Metallic compounds used for weighting and those used for
    mordanting may be the same, the difference being only in the amount or
    agent incorporated.

    (5)     Note.  Inorganic mordanting or weighting compositions are included
    herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    443,    for weighting processes.


CLS 8/619
TXT Ammonia:

    Subject matter under subclass 618 wherein the inorganic assistant is
    ammonia.


CLS 8/620
TXT Ammonium salt:

    Subject matter under subclass 618 wherein the inorganic additive is an
    ammonium salt.


CLS 8/621
TXT Molybdenum, uranium or tungsten (wolfram):

    Subject matter under subclass 618 wherein the inorganic additive contains
    at least one atom from the group tunsten, molybdenum or uranium.


CLS 8/622
TXT Group VA metal (As, Sb, Bi):

    Subject matter under subclass 618 wherein the inorganic additive contains
    at least one atom of a Group VA metal, i.e., As, Sb, or Bi.


CLS 8/623
TXT Group VIII metal (Fe, Co, Ni, Os, Ir, Pt, Ru, Rh, Pd):

    Subject matter under subclass 618 wherein the inorganic additive contains
    at least one Group VIII metal atom, i.e., iron, cobalt, nickel, ruthenium,
    rhodium, palladium, osmium, iridium, or platinum.


CLS 8/624
TXT Group IB metal (Cu, Ag, Au):

    Subject matter under subclass 618 wherein the inorganic additive additive
    contains at least on Group IB (Cu, Ag, Au) metal atom.


CLS 8/625
TXT Group IIIA metal (Al, Ga, In, Ti):

    Subject matter under subclass 618 wherein the inorganic additive contains
    at least one Group IIIA (Al, Ga, In, Ti) Metal atom.


CLS 8/626
TXT Group IV metal (Sn, Pb, Ge, Ti, Zr, Hf):

    Subject matter under subclass 618 wherein the inorganic additive contains
    at least one Group IV (Sn, Pb, Ge, Ti, Zr. Hf) metal atom.


CLS 8/627
TXT Group VB metal (V, Nb, Ta):

    Subject matter under subclass 618 wherein the inorganic additive contains
    at least one Group VB metal ( V, nb, Ta) atom.


CLS 8/628
TXT Group VII metal (Mn, Tc, Re):

    Subject matter under subclass 618 wherein the inorganic additive contains
    at least one Group VII (Mn, Tc, Re) metal atom.


CLS 8/629
TXT Group IIB metal (Zn, Cd, Hg):

    Subject matter under subclass 618 wherein the inorganic additive contains
    at least one Group IIB (Zn, Cd, Hg) metal atom.


CLS 8/630
TXT Boron:

    Subject matter under subclass 618 wherein the inorganic additive contains
    at least one boron atom.


CLS 8/631
TXT Nitrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 618 wherein the additive is an inorganic
    nitrogen compound.


CLS 8/632
TXT Silicon:

    Subject matter under subclass 618 wherein the inorganic additive contains
    at least one silicon atom.


CLS 8/633
TXT Phosphorus:

    Subject matter under subclass 618 wherein the inorganic additive contains
    at least one phosphorus atom.

    (1)     Note.  Monophosphates and phosphoric acid are generally excluded
    herefrom as being mere pH adjusting agents, however, when other uses are
    disclosed for these material classification herein is proper.


CLS 8/634
TXT Halogen acids:

    Subject matter under subclass 618 wherein the inorganic additive is a
    halogen containing acid.

    (1)     Note.  Use merely as a pH adjuster is excluded herefrom.


CLS 8/635
TXT Chromium:

    Subject matter under subclass 618 wherein the inorganic additive contains
    at least one chromium atom.


CLS 8/636
TXT DYE OR POTENTIAL DYE COMPOSITION, ADDITIVE TREATMENT, PROCESS, PRODUCT, OR
    ANCILLARY DYE OPERATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition involving compositions containing
    dyes or other additives not provided for above including potential dye
    components, dyeing processes or treatments related thereto, products or
    other ancillary dye operations.

    (1)     Note.  This is the subclass for miscellaneous compositions or
    operations related to dyeing which are not specifically provided for
    elsewhere.


CLS 8/637.1
TXT Pigments used as dyes (imbibition of a pigment):

    Subject matter under subclass 636 wherein a pigment is used as a dye.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes coloring with a pigment wherein the
    coloring is by imbibition, i.e., absorption of the pigment by the substrate.


CLS 8/638
TXT Mixed dyes, noncomplexed:

    Subject matter under subclass 636 wherein more than one dye is used and
    wherein the dyes may be applied simultaneously or sequentially.

    (1)     Note.  The mixed dyes for this area are not complexed, e.g., when
    two azo dyes complex with a heavy metal they are not included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    408,    for combination of aniline colors oxidized on hair.

    478,    for effect coloring processes which may involve the use of several
    dyes.

    529,    for dyeing mixed materials with several dyes.


CLS 8/639
TXT Azo:

    Subject matter under subclass 638 in which at least one of the dyes is an
    azo dye.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    662,    wherein a vat dye compound chemically combines (couples) with an
    azo dye component to form a true chemical compound as a single dye, and no
    other azo coupling component or vat or sulfur dye is present.


CLS 8/640
TXT With sulfur dye or vat dye:

    Subject matter under subclass 639 in which both an azo and a vat or sulfur
    dye are present.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition of a vat dye and of a
    sulfur dye.


CLS 8/641
TXT Sulfonated azo:

    Subject matter under subclass 639 containing a sulfonated azo dye.


CLS 8/642
TXT Sulfur dye or vat dye:

    Subject matter under subclass 638 in which at least one vat or sulfur dye
    is present.

    (1)     Note.  See the glossary for the definition of a vat dye or a sulfur
    dye.


CLS 8/643
TXT Anthraquinone dye:

    Subject matter under subclass 638 wherein at least one of the dyes is an
    antraquinone dye.


CLS 8/644
TXT Basic dye:

    Subject matter under subclass 638 wherein at least one basic dye is
    included.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition of a basic dye.


CLS 8/645
TXT Inorganic dye (mineral dye):

    Subject matter under subclass 636 wherein inorganic dye materials only are
    employed, which may coact to form an insoluble compound in the substrate.


CLS 8/646
TXT Dye extracted from natural product:

    Subject matter under subclass 636 containing a natural dye.

    (1)     Note.  Natural dyes are extracts of plants or animal obtained with
    no or very little chemical processing.


CLS 8/647
TXT Polymeric dye, e.g., a chromophore pendant from an addition polymer, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 636 wherein a polymeric dye (polymer
    containing a chromophore) is used.

    (1)     Note.  Oxidation dyes may polymerize but are excluded herefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    406     and 649, for oxidation dyes.


CLS 8/648
TXT Fluorescent dye, e.g., stilbene, benzimidazole, benzoxazole, benzothiazole,
    pyrazoline dye, etc., optical brightener or bluing agent:

    Subject matter under subclass 636 containing a fluorescent dye, e.g.,
    stilbene, benzimidazole, benzoxazole, benzothiazole, pyrazoline dye, etc.,
    bluing agents, or optical brighteners applied as dyes.

    (1)     Note.  Methods of applying optical brighteners in the same manner
    as a dye are here.  Where the optical brightener functions as a pigment the
    method goes in subclass 427.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137,    for methods of laundering involving a bluing step.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, particularly subclasses 206.1+
    and 238 for bluing sizes.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 301.21+ for optical brightener composition.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 157+ for application of fluorescent
    materials or optical brighteners as a pigment coating.


CLS 8/649
TXT Oxidation dye, e.g., aniline, nitroaniline, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 636 involving an oxidation dye.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition of oxidation dye.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    406,    for dyeing hair and skin by oxidation dyes.

    672,    for azo dyes oxidized on fibers.


CLS 8/650
TXT Sulfur dye or vat dye:

    Subject matter under subclass 636 containing a vat or sulfur dye.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of a vat dye.


CLS 8/651
TXT Soluble leuco ester salts:

    Subject matter under subclass 650 employing derivatives of vat dyes, in the
    form of soluble ester salts or their leuco compounds.

    (1)     Note.  For example, a quinionic vat dye reduced to the hydroquinone
    form (OH) and esterified with a sulfoated aromatic compound to solubilize
    the insoluble vat dye.


CLS 8/652
TXT Sulfur dye (sulfur-organic reaction product dye):

    Subject matter under subclass 650 involving a sulfur dye.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of sulfur dye.


CLS 8/653
TXT Indigoid dye:

    Subject matter under subclass 650 employing natural or synthetic indigo and
    its derivatives or analogs (e.g., thioindigo) and which contain essentially
    the group -C(=0)-C=C-C(=0)- or its isomers or products converted to the
    same in dyeing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    548,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 450, 457 459, 464, and 488 for
    indigoid dye compounds.

    549,    Organic compounds, subclasses 45 and 52 for thioloindigoid dye
    compounds.


CLS 8/654
TXT Basic (cationic) dye containing strongly basic onium or alkylene imine
    group:

    Subject matter under subclass 636 containing a basic dye characterized by a
    strongly basic onium group or an alkylene imine group.


CLS 8/655
TXT Heterocyclic onium group, e.g., pyridinium, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 654 containing heterocyclic onium group,
    e.g., pyridinium dyes, etc.


CLS 8/657
TXT Basic dye, including diphenylmethane, triphenylmethane, xanthene, fluorene,
    methine, acridine, oxazine, phenazine, flavylium, napthoperinone,
    quinophthalone, etc., group-containing:

    Processes under subclass 636 wherein a basic or cationic dye is used.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of basic dye.


CLS 8/658
TXT Acid dye form, e.g., with sulfonic acid group, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 657 wherein the basic dye contains an acid or
    salt group, e.g., sulfonate, etc.


CLS 8/659
TXT Methine group:

    Subject matter under subclass 657 wherein the dye contains a methine group.


CLS 8/661
TXT Phthalocyanine dye:

    Subject matter under subclass 636 wherein a phthalocyanine dye is used.


CLS 8/662
TXT Axo, acridone, or quinone dye:

    Subject matter under subclass 636 wherein a dye containing an azo,
    acridone, or quinone group is used.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    650,    for quinonic vat dyes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    534,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 550+ for the compounds, per se.


CLS 8/663
TXT Naphtoquinone dye:

    Subject matter under subclass 662 wherein a napthoquinone dye is used.


CLS 8/664
TXT Stabilized or potential diazo compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 662 in which a diazo compound stabilized by
    admixture, or a stable derivative of a diazo compound or a compound easily
    converted to a diazo solution in the dyeing process is employed.

    (1)     Note.  Includes such compositions as anti-diazo sulphonates.

    (2)     Note.  Preparation and process for dyeing involving stable and
    stabilized amino compounds requiring diazotization with nitrite to convert
    the same to diazo compounds, are not included here but in an appropriate
    subclass under subclass 666.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    666,    for preparation and processes for dyeing involving stable and
    stabilized amino compounds requiring diazotization with nitrite to convert
    the same to diazo compounds.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    534,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 558 through 565 for the compounds,
    per se.


CLS 8/665
TXT Nitrosamine or N-diazo:

    Subject matter under subclass 664 in which the diazo derivative is a
    nitrosamine or a diazo-N-amino (includes imino) compound.

    (1)     Note.  For example, nitrosamine is -N-N=O and N-diazo is-N-N=N-.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    534,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 550 through 555 for the compounds,
    per se.


CLS 8/666
TXT Azo developed on the fiber:

    Subject matter under subclass 662 wherein an azo dye is prepared on a fiber
    by a developer process involving either the application of the amine
    followed by the diazotization and coupling on the fibers or impregnation
    with either the diazo component or the coupling component followed by the
    other in either sequence.

    (1)     Note.  Where the amine is also an azo dye that is further developed
    by diazotization on the material, it is also placed here and not in the
    direct dyeing subclasses.


CLS 8/667
TXT Nitroaromatic component:

    Subject matter under subclass 666 wherein one azo dye component contains a
    nitro group directly bonded to a carbon of an aromatic ring.


CLS 8/668
TXT Pyrazolone component:

    Subject matter under subclass 666 wherein one azo dye component is a
    pyrazolone.


CLS 8/669
TXT Polyazo component:

    Subject matter under subclass 666 containing a polyazo dye component or a
    polyazo dye is formed.

    (1)     Note.  Polyazo (diazo) is a compound containing more than one -N=N-
    group.


CLS 8/670
TXT Heterocyclic component:

    Subject matter under subclass 666 wherein one dye component contains a
    heterocyclic group.


CLS 8/671
TXT Me-C(=O)-CH-C(=O)- group containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 666 wherein an azo dye component contains a
    Me-C(=O)-CH-C(=O)- group.


CLS 8/672
TXT Dye containing removable solubilizing group, e.g., lactam radical, etc., or
    the dye is oxidized to insolubilize:

    Subject matter under subclass 662 in which an azo dye or derivative thereof
    is applied followed by a treatment to render the same insoluble, generally,
    by conversion to a more in soluble compound.

    (1)     Note.  For example, conversion to a more insoluble compound may be
    by such processes as lactamizing  or the splitting off of a solubilizing
    group or by oxidation.


CLS 8/673
TXT Dye containing -COOH:

    Subject matter under subclass 662 wherein a dye contains -COOH groups.


CLS 8/674
TXT Metallized, heavy metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 673 containing a heavy metal atom.


CLS 8/675
TXT Anthraquinone dye:

    Subject matter under subclass 662 involving an anthraquinone dye.

    (1)     Note.  For example, included herein are the alizarine type,
    amino-anthraquinone, or lactam forming anthraquinone compounds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    445,    for patents restricted to significant printing with these dyes.

    638,    for dyeing alternatively with another dye and an anthraquinone.

    650,    for anthraquinone dyes of the vat-type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    544,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 187+ for anthraquinone dye compounds.

    548,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 300.4 and 356.5+ for anthraquinone
    dye compounds.


CLS 8/676
TXT Sulfonic acid or salt thereof or sulfonamide:

    Subject matter under subclass 675 containing a sulfonated anthraquinone dye
    or salt thereof or sulfonamide group containing anthraquinone dye.


CLS 8/677
TXT Heterocyclic group:

    Subject matter under subclass 675 wherein an anthraquinone dye contains a
    heterocyclic group (on the anthraquinone nucleus).


CLS 8/678
TXT Phenoxy, phenol, mercapto, alkoxy, or thioalkyl group:

    Subject matter under subclass 675 wherein the anthraquinone dye contains a
    phenoxy-, hydroxphenyl, mercapto (-SH), alkoxy, or thioalkyl group.


CLS 8/679
TXT Anilino group on the anthraquinone nucleus:

    Subject matter under subclass 675 containing an anilino group on the
    anthraquinone nucleus.


CLS 8/680
TXT Dye containing -(O=)S(=O)-O-, -O(O=)
    S(=O)-O- or phosphorous oxide group:

    Subject matter under subclass 662 wherein a dye contains a -SO3-, -SO4- or
    other phosphorus oxide group.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are sulfonated dyes and salts and esters
    thereof.


CLS 8/681
TXT Sulfonated azo:

    Subject matter under subclass 680 wherein an azo dye contains an -SO3-
    group.


CLS 8/682
TXT Monoazo:

    Subject matter under subclass 681 wherein the sulfonated dye contains a
    single azo group.


CLS 8/683
TXT Monosulfonated:

    Subject matter under subclass 682 containing monosulfonated monoazo dyes.


CLS 8/684
TXT Heterocyclic:

    Subject matter under subclass 683 wherein the dye contains a heterocyclic
    group.


CLS 8/685
TXT Metallized dye, including metallization during dyeing (i.e., including in
    situ forming of metallized dye):

    Subject matter under subclass 662 containing metallized dyes, i.e., dyes
    combined with a metal.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is combination of dye and metal on the
    substrate, i.e., in situ.


CLS 8/686
TXT Heterocyclic:

    Subject matter under subclass 685 containing a heterocyclic metallized dye.


CLS 8/687
TXT Polyazo dye:

    Subject matter under subclass 662 containing a polyazo dye.

    (1)     Note.  A polyazo (disazo) dye is a dye containing more than one
    -N=N- group.  Diazo does not mean polyazo.


CLS 8/688
TXT Six-membered hetero ring having two or more ring hetero atoms of which at
    least one is nitrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 662 wherein a dye contains a hetero ring
    having two or more ring hetero atoms at least one of which is nitrogen.


CLS 8/689
TXT Diazines (including hydrogenated):

    Subject matter under subclass 688 wherein the hetero ring contains two
    nitrogen atoms, including hydrogenated compounds.


CLS 8/690
TXT Five-membered hetero ring having two or more ring hetero atoms of which at
    least one is nitrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 662 wherein the dye contains a five-membered
    hetero ring having two or more ring hetero atoms at least one of which is
    nitrogen.


CLS 8/691
TXT Thiazoles (included hydrogenated):

    Subject matter under subclass 690 wherein at least one of the atoms in the
    ring besides nitrogen and carbon is sulfur, including hydrogenated
    compounds.


CLS 8/692
TXT Diazoles or triazoles (including hydrogenated):

    Subject matter under subclass 690 containing a dye having a five-membered
    ring with at least two nitrogen hetero atoms therein, including
    hydrogenated compounds.


CLS 8/693
TXT -COO-alkyl or -COO-aryl hydrocarbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 662 wherein the dye contains a -COO-alkyl or
    -COO-aryl hydrocarbon group.


CLS 8/694
TXT Aryl-(O=)S(=O)-N-:

    Subject matter under subclass 662 wherein the dye contains an aryl-SO2-N-
    group.


CLS 8/695
TXT HO-C-C-N:

    Subject matter under subclass 662 wherein the dye contains an -N-CCOH group.


CLS 8/696
TXT Carbonyl bonded directly to nitrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 662 wherein the dye contains a -C(=O)-N-
    group.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS

    The following subclasses are collections of published disclosures
    pertaining to various specified aspects of the dye art which aspects do not
    form appropriate bases for subclasses in the foregoing classification
    (i.e., subclasses 400 - 696), wherein original copies of patents are placed
    on another basis.  These subclasses may be of further assistance to the
    searcher, either as a starting point in searching this class or as an
    indication of further related fields of search inside or outside the class.
     Thus, there is here provided a further path of access for retrieval of a
    limited number of types of disclosures.

    (1)     Note.  Disclosures are placed in these subclasses for their value
    as references and as leads to appropriate main or secondary fields of
    search, without regard to their original classification or their claimed
    subject matter.

    (2)     Note.  The disclosures found in the following subclasses are
    examples, only, of the indicated subject matter, and in no instance do they
    represent the entire extent of the prior art.


CLS 8/900
TXT BASIC EMULSIFIERS FOR DYEING:

    Basic emulsifiers are surface active agents which will neutralize acids and
    precipitate acid dyes to form solvent dyes or turn indicator paper to the
    appropriate color for an alkaline reagent.


CLS 8/901
TXT Quaternary ammonium salts:

    Emulsifiers under subclass 900 wherein the emulsifier is a quaternary
    ammonium salt.


CLS 8/902
TXT COACERVATION OR TWO-PHASE DYEING SYSTEM:

    Compositions or dyeing involving coacervation or multiple phases in dyeing.


CLS 8/903
TXT TRIPLE MIXTURE OF ANIONIC, CATIONIC, AND NONIONIC EMULSIFIERS FOR DYEING:

    Compositions containing anionic, cationic, and nonionic emulsifiers.


CLS 8/904
TXT MIXED ANIONIC AND NONIONIC EMULSIFIERS FOR DYEING:

    Compositions containing both anionic and nonionic emulsifiers.


CLS 8/905
TXT MIXED ANIONIC AND CATIONIC EMULSIFIERS FOR DYEING:

    Compositions containing both anionic and cationic emulsifiers.


CLS 8/906
TXT MIXED CATIONIC AND NONIONIC EMULSIFIERS FOR DYEING:

    Compositions containing both cationic and nonionic emulsifiers.


CLS 8/907
TXT NONIONIC EMULSIFIERS FOR DYEING:

    Nonionic emulsifiers for dyeing such as polyalkylene oxides and ethers are
    collected here.


CLS 8/908
TXT ANIONIC EMULSIFIERS FOR DYEING:

    Anionic emulsifiers or compositions containing such dyeing, including
    phosphates or polyalkylene oxides, dicarboxylic acids, etc.


CLS 8/909
TXT Sulfonated or sulfated alphatic hydrocarbons:

    Emulsifiers under subclass 908 including sulfonated or sulfated alphatic
    hydrocarbons, e.g., lauryl sulfate, etc.


CLS 8/910
TXT Soap:

    Emulsifiers under subclass 908 for dyeing containing soaps, e.g., fatty
    acid salts.


CLS 8/911
TXT Sulfonated:

    Soap under subclass 910 which are sulfonated.


CLS 8/912
TXT Arylene sulfonated-formaldehyde condensate or alkyl aryl sulfonate:

    Emulsifiers under subclass 908 involving arylene sulfonate-formaldehyde
    condensate or alkyl aryl sulfonate.


CLS 8/913
TXT AMPHOTERIC EMULSIFIERS FOR DYEING:

    Amphoteric emulsifiers for dyeing, i.e., emulsifiers having both acid and
    basic properties.


CLS 8/914
TXT Amino carboxylic acids:

    Compositions under subclass 913 containing amino carboxylic acids.


CLS 8/915
TXT Amino sulfonic acids:

    Compositions under subclass 913 containing amino sulfonic acids.


CLS 8/916
TXT NATURAL FIBER DYEING:

    Subject matter related to dyeing of natural fiber material.


CLS 8/917
TXT Wool or silk:

    Subject matter under subclass 916 involving wool or silk.


CLS 8/918
TXT Cellulose textile:

    Subject matter under subclass 916 involving cellulose textile.


CLS 8/919
TXT Paper:

    Subject matter under subclass 916 involving dyeing or paper.


CLS 8/920
TXT SYNTHETIC FIBER DYEING:

    Subject matter related to dyeing of synthetic fiber.


CLS 8/921
TXT Cellulose ester or ether:

    Subject matter under subclass 920 involving cellulose ester or ether fiber.


CLS 8/922
TXT Polyester fiber:

    Subject matter under subclass 920 involving dyeing of polyester fiber
    material.


CLS 8/923
TXT Halopolyester:

    Subject matter under subclass 922 wherein the polyester contains a halogen
    atom.


CLS 8/924
TXT Polyamide fiber:

    Subject matter under subclass 920 involving dyeing of polyamide fiber.


CLS 8/925
TXT Aromatic polyamide:

    Subject matter under subclass 924 wherein the polyamide is derived from an
    aromatic compound.


CLS 8/926
TXT Polyurethane fiber:

    Subject matter under subclass 920 involving dyeing of a polyurethane.


CLS 8/927
TXT Polyacrylonitrile fiber:

    Subject matter under subclass 920 involving dyeing of polyacrylonitrile
    fiber.


CLS 8/928
TXT Polyolefin fiber:

    Subject matter under subclass 920 involving olefin polymers.


CLS 8/929
TXT CARPET DYEING:

    Subject matter involving dyeing of carpet.


CLS 8/930
TXT PRETREATMENT BEFORE DYEING:

    Subject matter involving pretreatment of material before dyeing.


CLS 8/931
TXT Washing or bleaching:

    Subject matter under subclass 930 involving washing or bleaching.


CLS 8/932
TXT SPECIFIC MANIPULATIVE CONTINUOUS DYEING:

    Subject matter involving unusual or detailed manipulative steps in dyeing.


CLS 8/933
TXT THERMOSOL DYEING, THERMOFIXATION OR DRY HEAT FIXATION OR DEVELOPMENT:

    Dyeing involving thermofixation (dry heat fixation or development) or
    thermosol dyeing.


CLS 8/934
TXT HIGH TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE DYEING:

    Unusual dyeing processes involving high pressure and temperature.


CLS 8/935
TXT IMMUNIZATION AS A RESIST IN DYEING:

    Subject matter wherein immunization is employed as resist.


CLS 8/936
TXT SOLUBILITY STUDIES ON DYES:

    Subject matter concerning solubility of dyes.


CLS 8/937
TXT LI ION IN DYE BATH:

    Employment of a Li ion in the dye bath.


CLS 8/938
TXT SOLVENT DYES:

    Collection of materials related to the subject of solvent dyes.


CLS 8/939
TXT NAPHTHOLACTAM DYE:

    Subject matter related to naphtholactam dyes.


CLS 12/
TTL BOOT AND SHOE MAKING

CLS 12/
TXT INDEX TO CLASS DEFINITION AND NOTES



    I.      CLASS DEFINITION

    II.     DEFINITION OF TERMS USED

    III.    BOOT AND SHOE MAKING AND REPAIRING APPARATUS AND PROCESSES
    ELSEWHERE CLASSIFIED

    IV.     FOOT COVERINGS ELSEWHERE CLASSIFIED

    V.      MISCELLANEOUS NOTES, AND INDEX TO CLASSES REFERRED TO HEREIN

    (1)     Note.  This class definition has been divided into five sections
    numbered in Roman Numerals from I to V.  References under each section have
    been assigned coordinating nomenclature.  Every reference is given a two
    digit number. The tens digits are the Arabic equivalents of the Roman
    Numerals applied to the sections of the class definitions under which they
    are listed.  The units digits are assigned as follows:

    0-7     (using decimals if necessary, for NOTES)

    8       for SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS

    9       for SEARCH CLASS

    E.g., under section IV, NOTES will begin with the number (40) and run
    through (47).  SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS will be numbered (48), and
    SEARCH CLASS will be numbered (49).

    I.      CLASS DEFINITION

    1.      This class is the generic locus for the manufacture and repair of
    foot coverings, and parts thereof.

    2.      This class is the generic locus of apparatus, processes of and
    tools used in the making, assembling and repairing of shoe parts, such as
    heels, soles, etc.

    3.      This class includes machines, hand manipulable tools and processes
    directed to the inserting of fillers, either of bulk material or shaped
    members on soles. See subclasses 18.1+.

    4.      This class includes apparatus for and methods of buttoning or
    unbuttoning, and lacing or unlacing shoe uppers.  See subclasses 58.3, 58.5
    and 142.

    II.     DEFINITION OF TERMS USED

    ASSEMBLED SHOE

    includes within its scope the upper and sole when they are secured
    together.  In shoe making, the upper including various parts thereof, such
    as the vamp, toe tip, quarters, linings, etc., are assembled and secured.
    The thus assembled upper is generally conformed to shoe shape by a lasting
    operation and attached to a sole.  When the upper and sole are attached the
    product is known as a shoe in the trade. It will be noted that this term
    includes within its scope, (1) partially completed shoes, (2) shoes having
    outsoles and heels which are ready for wear, and (3) shoes being worn by
    their wearers.

    III.    BOOT AND SHOE MAKING AND REPAIRING APPARATUS AND PROCESSES
    ELSEWHERE CLASSIFIED

    (39)    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, appropriate subclasses
    for machines and hand manipulable tools for polishing boots and shoes.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 432+ for a residual method of assembling
    parts including a step of piercing one by the other.

    30,     Cutlery, appropriate subclasses for hand manipulated tools having a
    pure cutting function, adapted for use in the manufacture of shoes but
    capable of more general use, particularly subclasses 281, 287 and 288 where
    a large number of hand manipulated channeling tools may be found.

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 3+ for apparatus for and
    processes of laying out footwear.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, for apparatus for and
    processes of drying shoes and parts thereof.  However, mere heated shoe
    forms, which may be used for drying, are found in this class (12), subclass
    129.4.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclasses 9+ for machines for beveling
    unattached shoe parts such as soles, except where the operation of the
    machine is predeterminately controlled for the entire beveling operation
    which are classified in appropriate subclasses in this class (12).

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 324+ for a method of or means for
    cutting and shaping a metal shank stiffener.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for
    testing, for example, the abrasion resistance of shoe parts.

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses; and see especially subclasses 531+
    for clicker die press structures.

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 28+ for leather sewing machines including those
    for use in the manufacture of shoes.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for
    applying and generally including devices for inking the edges of soles and
    applying cement to shoes and shoe parts.  However, machines for applying
    water to leather parts of shoes to temporarily make them flexible are in
    this class (12), appropriate subclasses.

    142,    Wood Turning, appropriate subclasses for machines for contouring
    lasts.

    144,    Woodworking, for a machine for forming a wooden heel from a wood
    block.  However, in this class 12 will be found a machine for breasting a
    heel including a wood heel, a machine for concaving a heel seat including a
    wood heel, and a machine for grooving, for example, the breast of the heel
    to receive a heel covering member even though it be a wood heel. Class 144
    does not include a process of making a wooden last, last blank or wooden
    heel or heel blank, such process being classified in this Class 12.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, for
    processes and apparatus for forming laminated articles including shoe parts
    or elements.  That class (156) does not provide, however, for laminating
    when combined with any operation given final shape or form to the shoe.

    164,    Metal Founding, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for and
    processes of casting metal shoe parts such as heels.

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, for conveyors generally
    including those for use in shoemaking operations.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses for conveyor with
    work holder, particularly subclasses 803.01+.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, appropriate subclasses for devices for merely
    holding shoes or shoe forms during manufacture and repair of shoes.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for shoe horns and boot
    removing devices, known as "boot jacks".

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus of general utility for applying a member (e.g., staple, nail,
    etc.) to shoe parts.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses for processes of molding plastic articles including
    shoe parts, see particularly subclass 244, uniting shoe part to upper.
    However, the mere nominal recitation in a process claim that the parts are
    connected by a plastic uniting step (e.g., vulcanization) will not exclude
    the patent from this class (12).

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, appropriate
    subclasses for apparatus designed to form holes in shoe parts by drills.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 119 for apparatus to make a composite article including a shoe
    last-type support, subclass 124 for composite article making including
    means to support washer-type preforms in a show heel mold and subclasses
    383+ for apparatus comprising a preform reshaping or resizing means or a
    preform support. Class 425 provides for means to mold a shoe heel or sole,
    per se, or as a composite into a disclosed diverse shoe part. Class 12,
    subclasses 128+, provides for a shoe form either of the last type or a
    reshaping or resizing mandrel.

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclasses for processes of coating
    generally, including coating leather.

    451,    Abrading, for a process or apparatus for  treating boots, shoes, or
    parts thereof with a natural abrasive such as sand paper or emery cloth.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Class 523, subclass 167 for a composition containing a
    synthetic resin or natural rubber having utility in the manufacturing or
    repairing of shoes or to processes of preparing said composition.



    IV.     FOOT COVERINGS ELSEWHERE CLASSIFIED

    (40)    The generic locus for foot coverings is Class 36, Boots, Shoes, and
    Leggings, and in that class (36) will be found the articles produced by the
    machines and processes of Class 12.

    (49)    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, appropriate subclasses for devices such as socks and
    stockings.

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, for boots and shoes, and see (40) Note,
    above.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 223+ for
    footwear combined with means to conduct electricity from or bypass it
    around the body.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclass 144
    for footwear combined with means for applying to the body any one or
    combination of light or analogous rays, electricity, or thermo treatments
    which are limited by structure to therapeutic use.



    V.      MISCELLANEOUS NOTES AND INDEX TO CLASSES REFERRED TO HEREIN

    (59)    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel                                         (49)

    15      Brushing, Scrubbing, and General                        Cleaning
                                               (39)

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 90.01+        (39)
    is the generic locus for burnishing
    machines and processes, not other-
    wise classifiable, and see SEARCH
    THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS            (29)
    Notes for other burnishing machines
    not designed to act on shoe parts.

    30,     Cutlery, in general and subclasses 281,
    287, 288                                                (39)

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses
    3+                                                      (39)

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact
    With Solids                                     (39)

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings              (40)(49)

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclasses 9+     (39)

    72,     Metal Deforming                         (39)

    73,     Measuring and Testing                   (39)

    83,     Cutting                                         (39)

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 28+                  (39)

    118,    Coating Apparatus                               (39)

    142,    Wood Turning                                    (39)

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and
    Miscellaneous Chemical
    Manufacture                                     (39)

    164,    Metal Founding                          (39)

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides,
     and Ways                                       (39)

    211,    Supports:  Racks                                (39)

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, and see
    appropriate subclasses for clothes
    shapers in general.                             (39)

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving
    Apparatus                                       (39)

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses.
    Class 269 is the residual locus for
    patents to a device for clamping,
    supporting and/or holding an
    article (or articles) in position to be
    operated on or treated.  See notes
    thereunder for other related loci.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and
    Devices, subclasses 223+.               (49)

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially
    Moving Tool                                     (39)

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware
    Shaping or Treating: Apparatus  (39)

    427,    Coating  Processes                              (39)

    434,    Education and Demonstration,
    subclass 397 for devices for use
    in designing and demonstrating
    boots and shoes.

    451,    Abrading                                                (39)

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal,
    and Electrical Application,
    subclass 144                                    (49)


CLS 12/1
TXT Boot and shoe apparatus which do not fall in the more specific subclasses
    of this class.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes devices for assembling rubber shoes
    including those which merely wrap a tacky rubber member around a last.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, particularly subclass
    202.


CLS 12/4.1
TXT Machines under the class definition provided with means for performing an
    upper treating operation on the upper of a shoe and with means to perform a
    sole treating operation, other than the attachment of a sole to another
    shoe part, on the sole of a shoe.

    (1)     Note.  The mere attachment of the sole, mentioned in the above
    definition, may be accomplished by any convenient means, as by sewing,
    nailing or cementing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7+,     for lasting machines including means for conforming an upper to a
    foot shaped form and for attaching the upper to a sole mounted on the form.

    33+,    for machines for cementing a sole to an upper.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 28+ for means for sewing soles to uppers.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, appropriate subclasses, for
    apparatus for applying a member, e.g., nail to a shoe part.


CLS 12/4.2
TXT Machines under subclass 4.1 provided with means for stretching an upper
    over a last and securing the upper to an insole on the last combined with
    means for (1) placing an outsole on the insole to which the upper is
    lasted, or (2) placing, with or without securing, such outsole on such
    insole and applying forces to conform (level) it to shape, or (3) applying
    forces on such outsole after its securement to the insole to conform
    (level) it to shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7+,     for machines for lasting uppers.

    33+,    for laying and/or leveling machines, particularly subclass 33.1 for
    laying and/or leveling machines provided with fastener inserting means for
    connecting the laid or positioned sole to the shoe.


CLS 12/4.3
TXT Machines under subclass 4.1 provided with means for severing the upper and
    a portion of a sole of a shoe near the seam which connects the upper to the
    sole.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.1+,   for lasting machines provided with means for trimming and/or
    incising the upper.


CLS 12/4.4
TXT Machines under subclass 4.3 which are additionally provided with means to
    hammer the welt into a planar condition so that it may be more easily
    attached to an outer sole.


CLS 12/4.5
TXT Machines under subclass 4.3 in which the severing means is a knife mounted
    in a work supporting member which is inserted in the shoe.


CLS 12/4.6
TXT Machines under subclass 4.1 for evaginating an assembled shoe.

    (1)     Note.  In turning the shoe both the sole and upper are flexed
    during the operation of turning the shoe inside out.


CLS 12/7
TXT Machines under the class definition provided with means for operating on a
    shoe upper mounted on a foot-shaped form to shape the upper to said form
    and having means, (1) acting on the sole attaching edge of the upper to
    conform that edge to the sole supporting surface of the form so that a sole
    may be attached to such conformed edge while the upper is mounted on the
    form, or (2) acting on the sole attaching edge to conform it to a sole
    supported on the form, or (3) acting on the sole attaching edge to conform
    it to a sole supported on the form and securing the sole and upper together.

    (1)     Note. The term "end lasting" as employed in the titles of
    subclasses indented hereunder is limited to such lasting of the upper as
    does not extend rearward of the tip and forwardly of the breast lines
    respectively.  A machine provided with means to last more than those
    portions, e.g., the heel portion and the shank, will not be included under
    the subclasses entitled "end lasting only".  End lasting machines not
    specifically provided for in the end lasting subclasses will be found in
    this subclass.  For subclasses specifically directed to end lasting only,
    see the following subclasses:

    7.4,    for machines for end lasting a prewelted upper.

    7.8,    for machines for end lasting an upper so that an out-turned flange
    is formed for engagement with the sole.

    8.7,    for machines for end lasting an upper provided with fastener
    inserting means for attaching the last upper to the sole and having a
    nipper which also acts as a wiper.

    8.8,    for machines for end lasting an upper provided with a nipper which
    also acts as a wiper.

    10.5,   for machines for end lasting an upper provided with plural nippers
    and having a wiper or wipers acting in conjunction with said nippers in the
    lasting operation.

    10.8,   for machines for end lasting an upper provided with a single nipper
    and having a wiper or wipers acting in conjunction with said nipper in the
    lasting operation.

    11.3,   for machines for end lasting an upper provided with a nipper which
    has no wiping function.

    12.2,   for machines for end lasting the toe portion of an upper and having
    wiping means for forcing the upper into lasted position and fastener
    inserting means for securing the upper thus lasted.

    12.3,   for machines for end lasting the heel portion of an upper and
    having wiping means for forcing the upper into lasted position and fastener
    inserting means for securing the upper thus lasted.

    12.4,   for machines for end lasting the toe portion of an upper and
    provided with wiping means for forcing the upper into lasted position.

    12.5,   for machines for end lasting the heel portion of an upper and
    provided with wiping means for forcing the upper into lasted position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for machines for assembling rubber uppers with soles which are
    provided with means for merely wrapping a tacky rubber upper around the
    form without applying pulling stress thereto to conform it to the form.

    4.1+,   for machines for lasting shoes provided with means to perform a
    separate sole operation.

    53.1+,  for machines shaping shoe uppers after their attachment to soles.

    54.1+,  for machines for operating on loose uppers to prepare them for
    lasting, particularly subclass 54.1 through 54.3 for machines for
    preshaping the upper to the shape of the last.

    107+,   for hand manipulable lasting tools.

    128+,   for forms on which the shoes areassembled.

    145,    for methods of lasting.


CLS 12/7.1
TXT Machines under subclass 7 which are provided with means to incise or sever
    the upper being lasted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55.1,   for upper edge folding machines provided with  slitting or notching
    means.

    57.5+,  for machines for trimming uppers, particularly subclass 57.6 for
    those which trim the sole attaching edge and remove the excess upper
    material before or after the lasting operation.


CLS 12/7.2
TXT Machines under subclass 7.1 in which the cutting means is constructed to
    form incisions in the edge of the upper in the form of slits or notches.


CLS 12/7.3
TXT Machines under subclass 7 for lasting an upper having a welt previously
    attached thereto.


CLS 12/7.4
TXT Machines under subclass 7.3 which last only an end of the upper as defined
    in (1) Note to subclass 7.


CLS 12/7.5
TXT Machines under subclass 7 for lasting an upper so that the edge thereof is
    flanged outwardly for attachment to the marginal portion of a sole.


CLS 12/7.6
TXT Machines under subclass 7.5 having devices for attaching the out-turned
    upper flange to the sole by driven fasteners.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13.1,   and see the Notes thereto, for other lasting machines having
    fastener inserting means for attaching the upper in lasted position.


CLS 12/7.7
TXT Machines under subclass 7.5 having devices which attach the sole to the
    out-turned upper flange by means of a thread inserted by a needle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13.2,   and see the Notes thereto, for other lasting machines having sewing
    devices.


CLS 12/7.8
TXT Machines under subclass 7.5 which last only an end of the upper as defined
    in (1) Note to subclass 7.


CLS 12/7.9
TXT Machines under subclass 7 which have means for tightening a metal strand or
    strap, applied to the edge of the upper along at least the sides thereof
    and around one end portion, to draw the upper in conformity with the last.

    (1)     Note.  For other lasting machines employing flexible means for
    conforming the upper to the last see this class, subclasses 8.1+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8.1+    and see (1) Note above.

    14.4,   for end bands employed as upper clamps.


CLS 12/8.1
TXT Machines under subclass 7 which conform the upper to the last by flaccid
    means engaging the upper.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclass include all machines having
    girth stretchers and other flexible means for conforming the upper to the
    last other than those of the draw wire type which are to be found in
    subclass 7.9.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.9,    and see (1) Note above.


CLS 12/8.2
TXT Machines under subclass 8.1 which in addition to having flexible conforming
    means are provided with wiper folders (as defined in subclass 12) which rub
    or carry the upper into lasted position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12+,    and see Notes to subclass 12 for other lasting employing wipers.


CLS 12/8.3
TXT Machines under subclass 7 provided with driven rotating means for (1)
    grasping and pulling the upper into lasted position or (2) rubbing or
    carrying the upper by frictional contact in conformity with the last.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9+,     and see Notes to subclass 9 for other lasting machines employing
    nippers.

    12+,    and see Notes to subclass 12 for other lasting machines employing
    wipers.


CLS 12/8.4
TXT Machines under subclass 7 provided with a wiper having at least one pointed
    member which catches the upper and forces the upper into conformity with
    the last.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12+,    and see Notes to subclass 12 for other lasting machines employing
    wipers.


CLS 12/8.5
TXT Machines under subclass 7 provided with means for grasping the upper and
    forcing it over the last and in which one of the grasping means also acts
    as a wiper folder (as defined in subclass 12) and rubs the upper into shape
    by frictional contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9+,     and see the Notes to subclass 9 for lasting machines employing
    nippers.

    12+,    and see the Notes to subclass 12 for lasting machines employing
    wipers.


CLS 12/8.6
TXT Machines under subclass 8.5 having devices which attach the lasted upper to
    the sole by driven fasteners.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13.1,   and see the Notes thereto, for other lasting machines having
    fastener inserting means for attaching the upper in lasted position.


CLS 12/8.7
TXT Machine under subclass 8.6 which last only an end of the upper as defined
    in (1) Note to subclass 7.


CLS 12/8.71
TXT Machines under subclass 8.7 provided with means for applying retaining
    means in the form of a metal strand or band about the wiped-over toe
    portion to hold it in shape.


CLS 12/8.8
TXT Machines under subclass 8.5 which last only an end of the upper as defined
    in (1) Note to subclass 7.


CLS 12/8.81
TXT Machines under subclass 8.8 provided with means for applying retaining
    means in the form of a metal strand or band about the wiped-over toe
    portion to hold it in shape.


CLS 12/9
TXT Machines under subclass 7 in which grasping means engage the upper and pull
    it into conformity with the last.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8.3,    for lasting machines employing driven rotating means for grasping
    the upper and pulling it into conformity with the last.

    8.5+,   for lasting machines employing a nipper and in which the nipper
    also acts as a wiper.

    14.5,   for nipper for lasting machines.


CLS 12/9.1
TXT Machines under subclass 9 provided with devices for securing the upper to
    the sole by means of a thread inserted by a needle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13.2,   and see the Notes thereto, for other lasting machines joining the
    upper to the sole by sewing.


CLS 12/10
TXT Machines under subclass 9 provided with wiper folders (as defined in
    subclass 12) which rub or carry the upper into lasted position by
    frictional contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12+,    and see the Notes to subclass 12 for other lasting machines
    employing wipers.


CLS 12/10.1
TXT Machines under subclass 10 which are provided with a plurality of nippers
    which grasp the upper and pull it into conformity with the last.


CLS 12/10.2
TXT Machines under subclass 10.1 having devices which attach the upper to the
    sole by driven fasteners.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13.1,   and see the Notes thereto, for other lasting machines having
    fastener inserting means for attaching the upper in lasted position.


CLS 12/10.21
TXT Machines under subclass 10.2 provided with means for applying retaining
    means in the form of a wire or band about the wiped-over toe portion to
    hold it in shape.


CLS 12/10.3
TXT Machines under subclass 10.2 provided with means to move the last relative
    to the fastener driving devices during the operation of attaching the upper
    to the sole.


CLS 12/10.4
TXT Machines under subclass 10.2 having downwardly moving nippers which are
    actuated to pull the upper on the last.


CLS 12/10.5
TXT Machines under subclass 10.1 which last only an end of the upper as defined
    in (1) Note to subclass 7.


CLS 12/10.6
TXT Machines under subclass 10 in which the grasping means comprises a single
    nipper and in which means are provided for driving fasteners for securing
    the upper to the sole.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13.1,   and see the Notes thereto for other lasting machines having
    fastener inserting means for attaching the upper in lasted position.


CLS 12/10.7
TXT Machines under subclass 10.6 which have a horizontal cam shaft and a rod
    which is caused, by a cam on such shaft, to reciprocate parallel to the cam
    shaft and which moves the nipper outwardly to effect the overdraw.


CLS 12/10.71
TXT Machines under subclass 10.7 provided with means for applying retaining
    means in the form of a metal strand or band about the wiped-over toe
    portion to hold it in shape.


CLS 12/10.8
TXT Means under subclass 10 having a single nipper and which last only an end
    of the upper as defined in (1) Note to subclass 7.


CLS 12/11.2
TXT Machines under subclass 9 having devices for attaching the lasted upper to
    the sole by driven fasteners.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13.1,   and see the Notes thereto for other lasting machines having
    fastener inserting means for attaching the upper in lasted postion.


CLS 12/11.3
TXT Machines under subclass 9 having a nipper and which last only an end of the
    upper as defined in (1) Note to subclass 7.


CLS 12/12
TXT Machines under subclass 7 in which the upper is forced into conformity with
    the last by sliding members frictionally engaging the upper to cause the
    sole attaching edge thereof to be forced into conformity with the upper
    surface of a last or a sole thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8.2,    for lasting machines employing a wiper folder in conjunction with
    flexible means for conforming the upper to the last.

    8.3,    for lasting machines employing a driven rotating means for rubbing
    the upper by frictional contact into conformity with the last.

    8.4,    for lasting machines employing a pronged wiper for forcing the
    upper into conformity with the last.

    8.5+,   for lasting machines employing a grasping means which also acts as
    a wiper to conform the upper to the last.

    10+,    for lasting machines employing nippers and wipers in conjunction
    for conforming the upper to the last.


CLS 12/12.1
TXT Machines under subclass 12 having devices for attaching the lasted upper to
    the sole by driven fasteners.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13.1,   and see the Notes thereto for other lasting machines having
    fastener inserting means for attaching the upper in lasted postion.


CLS 12/12.2
TXT Machines under subclass 12.1 which last the toe end only of the upper as
    defined in (1) Note to subclass 7.


CLS 12/12.21
TXT Machines under subclass 12.2 provided with means for applying retaining
    means in the form of a metal strand or band about the wiped-over toe
    portion to hold it in shape.


CLS 12/12.3
TXT Machines under subclass 12.1 which last the heel end only of the upper as
    defined in (1) Note to subclass 7.


CLS 12/12.4
TXT Machines under subclass 12 which last the toe end only of the upper as
    defined in (1) Note to subclass 7.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.2+,  for lasting machines which wipe the toe end of the upper into
    lasted postion and fasten it by driven fasteners.


CLS 12/12.41
TXT Machines under subclass 12.4 provided with means for applying retaining
    means in the form of a metal strand or band about the wiped-over toe
    portion to hold it in shape.


CLS 12/12.5
TXT Machines under subclass 12 which last the heel end only of the upper as
    defined in (1) Note to subclass 7.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.3,   for lasting machines which wipe the heel end of the upper into
    lasted position and fasten it by driven fasteners.


CLS 12/13.1
TXT Machines under subclass 7 having devices which attach the upper to the sole
    by driven fasteners.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.6,    for lasting machines for flanging the upper outwardly and attaching
    the outturned flange by driven fasteners.

    8.6+,   for lasting machines having a nipper wiper and fastener inserting
    means.

    10.2+,  for lasting machines employing multiple nipper stretchers in
    conjunction with a wiper folder and fastener inserting means.

    10.6+,  for lasting machines employing a single nipper stretcher in
    conjunction with a wiper folder and fastener inserting means.

    11.2,   for lasting machines employing a single nipper stretcher and
    fastener inserting means.

    12.1+,  for lasting machines employing a wiper folder and fastener
    inserting means

    SEARCH CLASS:

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus of general utility for driving a member, e.g., nail, into a shoe
    part.


CLS 12/13.2
TXT Machines under subclass 7 provided with devices for securing the upper to
    the sole by means of a thread inserted by a needle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.7,    for machines for lasting an upper so that the edge thereof is
    flanged outwardly and attaching this flange to a sole by means of a thread
    inserted by a needle.

    9.1,    for nipper stretcher lasting machines with devices for sewing the
    upper to the sole.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 28+ for leather sewing machines including
    ancillary operations.


CLS 12/14.2
TXT Devices under subclass 7 forming part of lasting apparatus for engaging the
    sole to hold it in position on the last during the lasting operation.


CLS 12/14.3
TXT Devices under subclass 7 forming part of lasting apparatus for clamping the
    upper against the last to hold it in position while being lasted.


CLS 12/14.4
TXT Upper clamps under subclass 14.3 in which the clamp is in the form of a
    band engaging only an end portion of the upper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.9,    for lasting apparatus in which a wire or strap applied to the edges
    of the upper along at least the sides thereof and extending partially
    around the sole portion of the last is tightened to draw the upper into
    conformity with the last.


CLS 12/14.5
TXT Nippers under subclass 7 for use in lasting apparatus for grasping the
    upper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8.5+,   for nippers having a surface employed as a wiper.

    9+,     and see the notes thereto for lasting machines employing the
    devices of this subclass.


CLS 12/15
TXT Machines under the class definition for forcing lasts into completed or
    partially completed boots or shoes.


CLS 12/15.1
TXT Machines under the class definition for separating lasts from completed or
    partially completed boots or shoes.


CLS 12/16
TXT Machines under the class definition for removing the lasting fasteners used
    for temporarily securing the upper to the sole or the sole to the last.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, subclass 30 for shoe sewing machines including means to
    pull out lasting tacks from a lasted shoe.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclass 63 for combined
    apparatus for applying and withdrawing a member, e.g., nail.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 18+ for implements of the nail extractor type.


CLS 12/16.1
TXT Machines under the class definition employed in providing the breast of a
    heel with a covering forming a portion of the tread sole of the shoe.

    (1)     Note.  The machines included have means for preparing the flap,
    attaching it to the heel breast and trimming the flap to the outline of the
    heel either in combination with other shoe making operations or as single
    or plural operations.

    (2)     Note.  Methods of like scope are classified in this class,
    subclasses 142+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49.1,   for heel covering generally.

    142+,   see (2) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, for finishing or shaping, generally, by abrading.


CLS 12/16.2
TXT Machines under subclass 16.1, (1) provided with means for performing other
    shoe making operations, or (2) performing a plurality of operations in
    providing the heel breast with a covering flap.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, splitting the sole and
    applying cement to the flap, molding the flap and cutting the sole to
    provide a heel seat.

    (2)     Note.  Cross-reference is made to the single operation subclasses
    coordinate herewith where appropriate.


CLS 12/16.3
TXT Machines under subclass 16.2 provided with means for laying the flap on the
    heel breast and for applying pressure to the bottom (tread) surface of the
    heel to press the heel on the heel seat of the shoe.

    (1)     Note.  The heel clamping pressure may be employed in the adhesive
    attaching of the heel to the heel seat or in the holding of the heel for
    the application of a fastener to secure the heel to the shoe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    for heel clamping work supports, per se.


CLS 12/16.4
TXT Machines under subclass 16.1 for pressing cemented flaps against the heel
    breast.

    (1)     Note.  Cross-reference is made to the shoe sole laying and leveling
    machine structural subclasses of this class, subclasses 33+ where
    appropriate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16.3,   for the operation of this class combined with pressing the heel on
    the heel seat.

    33+,    see (1) Note above.

    42+,    for heel attaching in general.

    49.1,   for the cementing of covers to heels in general.

    103+,   for tools for pressing cemented sole flaps against the heel breast.


CLS 12/16.5
TXT Machines under subclass 16.1 for cutting a sole edgewise from the heel for
    a part of the length of the sole to form a flap portion of nonuniform
    thickness.

    (1)     Note.  Machines for splitting in like manner but to uniform
    thickness are to be found in Class 69, Leather Manufactures, subclasses 9+.
     The machines here (Class 12, subclass 16.5) classified include structure
    for producing a varying thickness of flap.

    (2)     Note.  The operation of this subclass is usually performed on the
    sole prior to the attachment of the sole to the shoe.

    (3)     Note.  Cross-reference is made to the skiving and splitting machine
    structural subclasses of Class 69, Leather Manufactures, subclasses 9+
    where appropriate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17+,    for general sole splitting to form layers of nonuniform thickness.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    69,     Leather Manufactures, see (1) Note and (2) Note above.


CLS 12/16.6
TXT Machines under subclass 16.1 for cutting off the marginal portion of the
    sole attached flap to bring the flap to the profile of the edge of the
    breast surface.

    (1)     Note.  The cutting included is performed subsequent to the
    formation of the flap by splitting the sole.

    (2)     Note.  Machines for die cutting the flap portion of the sole to
    heel breast outline after the sole is attached to the shoe but before the
    flap is attached to the breast of the heel are here included where such
    machines have means for supporting and positioning the shoe relative to the
    cutting dies. Cutting dies and die cutting machines, per se, though
    employed to trim the heel breast flap portion of a sole are classified in
    Class 83, Cutting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85+,    for sole edge trimmers generally and see the notes thereto for
    other trimming by cutting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, and see (2) Note above.


CLS 12/16.7
TXT Machines under subclass 16.6 which are provided with means to contact the
    heel and limit the motion of the cutter relative thereto.

    (1)     Note.  The flap trimming of this subclass is usually performed
    after the flap is attached to the heel.

    (2)     Note.  Cross-references are made from this subclass to the sole and
    heel edge trimmer structural subclasses of this class, subclasses 85+ where
    appropriate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85+,    see (2) Note above.


CLS 12/17
TXT Machines under the class definition for operating on those members which
    form the plantar support for the foot of the wearer, either loose, or
    attached to other shoe parts.

    (1)     Note.  The line between this subclass and Class 112, Sewing, is as
    follows: This subclass includes sewing operations broadly or nominally
    recited combined with a bodily moved work support as defined in Class 12
    (this class), subclass 17.2, whereas Class 112, subclasses 29 to 40, take
    sewing machines generally for fastening sole parts together or soles to
    other shoe parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16.1+,  for machines employed in providing a heel breast with a covering
    forming a portion of the sole of the shoe.

    70+,    for sole burnishing machines.

    79.5,   for sole wax polishing machines.

    85+,    for sole edge trimming machines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 29-40 for shoe sole sewing machines generally
    and see this class (12), subclasses 17+, (2) Note, for the line.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    machines for merely nailing sole parts together and/or for nailing soles to
    other shoe parts.


CLS 12/17.2
TXT Machines under subclass 17 in which peripheral operations are performed on
    the soles of shoes, and the supports for the shoes being operated upon are
    bodily translatable and are automatically controlled to present the shoes
    for the particular operations being performed.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass are found machines in which the shoe is
    supported on "an iron man".  The support for the shoe is thus termed
    because its movements are so controlled automatically that the operation
    performed by the machine is designed to be independent of the skill of the
    operator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 29-40 for shoe sole sewing machines generally
    and see this class (12), subclasses 17+, (2) Note, for the line.


CLS 12/18.1
TXT Machines under subclass 17 for assembling sole members to form a composite
    sole structure or such members with other shoe parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7+,     for machines for conforming an upper to a foot shaped form and
    attaching the upper to a sole placed on the form.

    33+,    for machines for associating an outsole with an assembled shoe and
    attaching the outsole thereto.


CLS 12/18.2
TXT Machines under subclass 18.1 wherein the sole member associated is a filler
    which is deposited as a mass.

    (1)     Note.  These machines may be provided with means functioning to
    keep the filler material in a proper plastic condition, as by heating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    for molding methods in general.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 124 for means to mold a shoe heel or sole as a composite
    subcombination with a diverse shoe part.


CLS 12/18.3
TXT Machines under subclass 18.1 in which the sole member associated is a
    reinforcing member for supporting the longitudinal arch of the foot of the
    wearer of a shoe in which the sole member is incorporated.


CLS 12/18.5
TXT Machines under subclass 17, (1) for performing an operation on a sole and,
    in addition, an operation on another shoe part, or (2) for performing a
    plurality of different operations on a sole.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.1+,   for combined sole and upper machines provided with means to perform
    a sole operation and an upper operation on a shoe.

    33+,    for sole laying and/or leveling machines.

    70.5+,  for machines performing diverse operations including sole
    burnishing.

    85.1+,  for machines performing diverse operations including sole edge
    trimming.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, subclass 29 for machines for fastening a sole to a shoe by
    stitches and provided with means to form indentations between the stitches,
    and subclass 45 for machines for cutting a channel in a sole being operated
    upon in advance of the needle of the sewing mechanism.


CLS 12/18.7
TXT Machines under subclass 18.5 including means for forming a slit or groove
    in a sole, extending along the edge contour thereof, and located either in
    or adjacent the sole edge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18.9,   for combined sole machines including means for producing an
    incision in a sole without substantial removal of material.

    27+,    for sole peripheral channeling machines, per se.

    85.2+,  for machines for trimming a sole edge combined with means for also
    peripherally channeling the sole operated upon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, subclass 45 for combined sewing and channeling machines.


CLS 12/18.9
TXT Machines under subclass 18.5 including means for producing an incision in a
    sole solely by a knife or other sharp instrument and without substantial
    removal of material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18.7,   for combined sole machines including means for forming a slit in a
    sole, extending along the edge contour thereof, and located either in or
    adjacent the sole edge.

    40,     for sole slitting machines, per se.


CLS 12/20
TXT Machines under subclass 17 for either (1) integrating a separate flange,
    known as a rib, to a sole and along the periphery thereof, or (2)
    strengthening such flange already integrated to a sole by adding a flat
    strip thereto.

    (1)     Note.  A shoe upper subsequently may be attached to the rib.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27+,    for machines for forming a rib from sole material by slitting or
    grooving the sole.


CLS 12/20.2
TXT Machines under subclass 20 for applying a flat strip of material, usually
    of woven fabric, of at least sufficient width to extend between portions of
    the rib at opposite sides of the sole at the ball line, over the sole and
    against the rib to form a reinforcement for the rib.


CLS 12/21
TXT Machines under subclass 17 for shaping a sole by pressure prior to its
    attachment to an upper.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses for presses not elsewhere provided
    for.


CLS 12/22
TXT Machines under subclass 21 provided with means for upsetting, flanging or
    otherwise shaping the peripheral rim of a sole.

    (1)     Note.  The shaping means usually comprise interacting rollers
    between which the rim of a sole is passed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for machines for raising channel flaps formed by slitting
    (channeling) a sole and setting them in raised position.


CLS 12/24.5
TXT Machines under subclass 17 for applying to at least a portion of the
    perimeter of the sole a piece of material, generally for the purpose of
    providing an ornamental effect on insoles or midsoles to be used in
    platform shoes.


CLS 12/27
TXT Machines under subclass 17 for forming a slit or groove in a sole,
    extending along the edge contour thereof, and located either in or adjacent
    the sole edge.

    (1)     Note.  The slit or groove may be for the purpose of (1) receiving
    stitches or driven fasteners used to attach a sole to a shoe, (2) forming a
    rib to which an upper may be subsequently attached, or (3) providing a
    portion which may be raised subsequently to form a rib to which an upper
    may be attached.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20+,    for machines for applying a separate peripheral rib to a sole.

    40,     for machines for producing an incision in a sole without
    substantial removal of material.

    41.05,  for machines for forming a recess in a sole by gouging or
    impressing the sole material.

    85.2+,  for machines for channeling a sole combined with means to trim the
    sole edge including feathering or beveling the edge to reduce the thickness
    of the edge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, appropriate subclasses, especially subclass 287 and 288,
    for hand tools for channeling soles.


CLS 12/28
TXT Machines under subclass 27 provided with relatively movable means to hold a
    sole while the channeling tool moves therearound, or which continuously
    grip a sole and feed it to the channeling tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85.3,   for combined channeling and trimming machines in which the work is
    clamped to present it to the cutters.

    86+,    for machines for trimming the edges of soles and heels in which the
    work is clamped to a work support to present it to a cutter.


CLS 12/29
TXT Machines under subclass 17 for pressing or smoothing an outstanding wall
    (flap) of a groove (channel) in a sole against an opposite wall to close
    the groove and thereby hide a fastening means.

    (1)     Note.  The work operated on by this machine generally includes a
    sole and upper secured together by means of stitches or driven fasteners
    located in an open channel extending peripherally of the sole and with one
    wall of the channel forming a flange (flap).


CLS 12/30
TXT Machines under subclass 17 for operating on a sole having a slit (channel)
    extending peripherally of the sole wherein means are provided for bending
    and setting a wall portion (flap) of the slit in a raised position to
    prepare the sole for attachment to an upper.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 29-40 for devices for raising channel flaps,
    which form part of, or which are designed to be associated with, sewing
    machines.


CLS 12/31.5
TXT Machines under subclass 17 provided with means to shape that portion of a
    sole against which a heel is to be abutted.


CLS 12/31.6
TXT Machines under subclass 31.5 in which means are provided to prepare a sole
    to receive a spring heel.

    (1)     Note.  A spring heel is a heel inserted between two soles, one of
    which, usually the tread or outermost sole, is bent (sprung) to provide a
    recess for the heel between the two soles.


CLS 12/32
TXT Machines under subclass 17 for pressing a series of grooves at an angle to
    the sole edge and around the edge contour of the sole.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.05,  for machines for forming a recess in a sole by gouging or
    impressing the sole material.

    74.5+,  for combined machines for forming an imitation stitch on the upper
    surface of a sole or a welt thereon and burnishing an edge of the sole.


CLS 12/32.1
TXT Machines under subclass 32 provided with means to position the indentations
    at the stitch points.

    (1)     Note.  The machines may be provided with means to vary the feed to
    cause the indentations to occur at the stitches or the indenting tool may
    be so mounted that it can vary its position to the stitches.


CLS 12/33
TXT Machines under subclass 17 provided with means for (1) placing an outsole
    on an insole which has an upper lasted thereto, (2) placing, with or
    without securing, such outsole on such insole and applying forces to
    conform (level) it to shape, or (3) applying forces on such outsole after
    its securement to the insole to conform (level) it to shape.

    (1)     Note.  The machines generally apply force by reciprocating the
    pressing mechanism.  However, the force may be applied progressively over
    the outsole or by percussive means.  Where the force is applied
    progressively over the shoe bottom (a) see this class, subclass 34 where
    the force applying means is a rotating roll, (b) subclasses 33.7 and 33.8
    where the force applying means is an oscillatable former which has a
    rolling contact with the outsole and (c) subclass 35.5 where the force
    applying means is a tool which conforms the outsole by a wiping action.
    Where the force is applied by a percussive action see this class, subclass
    35.5.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.2,    for machines adapted to conform an upper to a foot shaped form or
    last and to attach an insole thereto and, additionally, to lay or level an
    outsole on the lasted upper.

    7+,     for machines adapted to conform an upper to a foot shaped form or
    last and to attach thereto a sole which may be an outsole.

    16.4,   for machines for laying a portion of an outsole on a heel breast.

    33.7,   for oscillating formers and see (1) Note above.

    33.8,   for oscillating shoe supports and formers and see (1) Note above.

    34,     for rotating rollers for applying laying and leveling pressure, and
    see (1) Note above.

    35.5,   for percussive tools and wipers used in laying and leveling and see
    (1) Note above.

    36+,    for multiple laying or leveling devices of the type which would be
    classifiable, per se, in Class 12, subclass 33.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses for presses not elsewhere provided
    for.


CLS 12/33.1
TXT Machines under subclass 33 provided with means to insert individual
    elements for securing an outsole laid or positioned in proper relation on
    the shoe to which it is being attached.


CLS 12/33.2
TXT Machines under subclass 33 which are provided with means to raise the
    temperature of all or a portion of the outsole being attached and/or the
    contacting portions of the shoe to which the outsole is to be attached.

    (1)     Note.  The heating is generally for the purpose of drying or
    setting the cement used in attaching the outsole to the shoe.


CLS 12/33.4
TXT Machines under subclass 33 which are provided with means to support the
    welt of a welted shoe being treated against movement by forces applied to
    the opposite face of the outsole during laying and leveling.

    (1)     Note.  The term "welt" as used in the above definition is limited
    to a strip of material lying above the outsole and extending substantially
    to the edge of the outsole and located outside the upper of the shoe.


CLS 12/33.6
TXT Machines under subclass 33 with means to orient, guide and/or place the
    outsole of a shoe relative to the upper to which it is to be attached.

    (1)     Note.  The means to position the outsole is usually, but not
    necessarily, a guide or gauge to facilitate manual alignment of the sole
    with a shoe supported on a form.


CLS 12/33.7
TXT Machines under subclass 33 in which the former is oscillated over the
    bottom of a shoe held upon a work support in rolling contact therewith, the
    former having a surface design or configuration to apply pressure to or to
    conform the outsole, the former being so related to or indexed with respect
    to the work support that the design or configuration, retraces the same
    path of contact for each cycle of operation.


CLS 12/33.8
TXT Machines under subclass 33.7 in which a support holding the shoe being
    treated is pivotally supported and cooperates with a former pivotally
    mounted on an axis parallel thereto, both the support and former being
    oscillated and coacting in rolling contact as do gear wheels.

    (1)     Note.  The term "former" as employed in subclasses 33.7, 33.8 and
    38 is used to denote a member which is shaped, or adapted to be shaped to
    conform to the desired shape of the shoe bottom exterior.  See (1) Note to
    subclass 38 of this class.


CLS 12/34
TXT Machines under subclass 33 in which the shoe is usually held on a support
    and the sole is subjected to pressure by a rotating roller, the roller or
    shoe or both being relatively moved along the length of the sole to present
    the whole shoe bottom to the roller.

    (1)     Note.  The shoe support is usually termed a "jack" in the art.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33.7    and 33.8, for laying and leveling machines in which a configured
    former which may be shaped somewhat like a roll is oscillated over the shoe
    being treated in indexed rolling contact therewith.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 156 for concurrent pressing and conveying presses
    of the roll type in which a roll coacts with a nonrotary press element, and
    subclass 210 for roll and platen presses, and not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 12/34.5
TXT Machines under subclass 34 having power means to tilt or rock the roll
    transversely in a plane generally perpendicular both to the surface of the
    sole and to the path of movement of a translated roll.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34+,    for roller which may roll along the length of the sole in rolling
    contact therewith and are free to tilt transversely in response to
    undulations in the shoe bottom surface or to forces manually applied by an
    operator.


CLS 12/35.5
TXT Machines under subclass 33 in which the laying and leveling operation is
    produced by a tool adapted (1) to give a series of percussive blows upon
    the outsole being treated and/or (2) to conform the outsole to shape by a
    wiping movement of the tool over the outsole being operated upon.

    (1)     Note.  The machines in this subclass may, by movement of their
    tools, perform a burnishing or polishing action on the sole but this result
    is considered incidental to their functions of conforming the sole to the
    desired shape.

    (2)     Note.  Machines employing rotating rollers whose periphery slides
    with respect to the sole have not been considered "slicking" or wiping and
    such patents have been classified in subclasses 34+ of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70+,    for sole burnishing machines which condense and polish the edge and
    tread surfaces of shoe soles which are not designed to force the soles to a
    desired shape.


CLS 12/36
TXT Machines under subclass 33 which are provided with a plurality of supports
    for the shoes being operated upon so that the operator may have one or more
    shoes in pressing relation while he is changing the shoe on another support.

    (1)     Note.  Each support may be provided with its own sole former or pad
    or a single former or pad may contact a number of work supports alternately
    or successively.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 193+ for plural presses not otherwise provided
    for, and subclasses 221+ for reciprocating platen presses with plural or
    indexing material supports or receptacles not otherwise provided for.


CLS 12/36.5
TXT Machines under subclass 36 in which the work support travels past a loading
    position or zone and a pressure applying position or zone in a closed path
    and in which a fluid actuated pressure applying device is carried along the
    path with the work support.

    (1)     Note.  The work supports in this subclass are, for the most part,
    supported on endless belts.

    (2)     Note.  Patents claiming multiple traveling work supports but no
    traveling fluid actuated pressure means will be classified in Class 12,
    subclass 36 except for work supports mounted on rotatable carriers which
    are classified in subclass 37 of this class.


CLS 12/36.8
TXT Machines under subclass 36.5 in which the work supports are held on a
    turret or wheel rotating about a single fixed axis and which is
    progressively rotated to move the work supports past loading and pressure
    applying stations or zones.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the patents in subclasses 36.5 and 36.8 claim the
    means for conducting or controlling the fluid which actuates the traveling
    pressure applying means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for work supports held on a rotary carrier in which pressure is
    applied at a pressure station by means other than a traveling fluid
    pressure actuated means such as, for example, a pressure means in a fixed
    location which engages traveling work supports in succession.


CLS 12/37
TXT Machines under subclass 36 in which the work supports are held on a turret
    or wheel rotating about a single fixed axis and which is progressively
    rotated to move the work support past loading and pressure applying
    stations or zones.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36.8,   for similar rotary work supports in which a fluid actuated pressure
    applying means is carried in a circular path with the work supports.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 223 for reciprocating platen presses having
    plural or indexing material supports or receptacles which are mounted to
    rotate successively to a reciprocating platen station and are not otherwise
    provided for.


CLS 12/38
TXT Sole engaging members of laying and leveling machines under subclass 33
    which are adapted to contact the sole and conform it to shape.

    (1)     Note.  Such sole engaging members, generally called "pads" or
    formers in the art, may consist of platens or blocks shaped to impart the
    desired form to the work and may be rigid, resilient, inflatable or
    deformable (such as a flexible bag filled with a liquid).

    (2)     Note.  A patent is placed in this subclass even though a work
    support and/or a means to relatively move the pad or former and work
    support is nominally claimed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 211+ for presses with a flexible sheet or
    spring pressure surface not otherwise provided for, and subclasses 295+ for
    platens or pressure surfaces for presses, not otherwise provided for.


CLS 12/39
TXT Machines under subclass 17 for inserting a covering (sock-liner), also
    known as a slipsole, into an assembled shoe and against the inside upper
    sole surface or a portion thereof.


CLS 12/39.3
TXT Machines under subclass 17 for severing the stitches which secure the outer
    or wear sole to the shoe and/or provided with means to engage such stitches
    and exert a force thereon to remove them.


CLS 12/39.5
TXT Machines under subclass 17 provided with means for preparing a wear or
    outer sole of a shoe to have a forepart sole end connected thereto, or
    means to support or hold the end of the wear sole and the forepart sole in
    abutted relation while they are secured together.


CLS 12/40
TXT Machines under subclass 17 for producing an incision in a sole solely by a
    knife or other sharp instrument and without substantial removal of material.

    (1)     Note.  The incision may be made for the purpose of rendering the
    sole pliable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27+,    for machines for forming a slit in a sole, extending along the edge
    contour thereof, and located either in or adjacent the sole edge.

    41.05,  for machines for forming a recess in a sole removing sole material
    or impressing the sole.


CLS 12/40.5
TXT Machines under subclass 17 provided with means for operating on reinforcing
    members adapted to extend between the heel and ball portions of a shoe for
    supporting the longitudinal arch of the foot.


CLS 12/41.05
TXT Machines under subclass 17 for forming a recess in a sole by gouging or
    impressing the sole material.

    (1)     Note.  The recess may be made for the purpose of rendering the sole
    pliable or to receive a shoe part, such as a shank stiffener.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32+,    for machines for indenting a sole to simulate a sewed seam.

    40,     for machines for producing an incision in a sole by a sharp
    instrument and without substantial removal of material.


CLS 12/41.1
TXT Machines under subclass 17 for flexing the sole of an assembled shoe to
    make the sole more supple.


CLS 12/41.2
TXT Machines under subclass 17 for flexing a loose (unattached) sole to make it
    more supple.


CLS 12/41.3
TXT Machines under subclass 41.2, provided with means for applying a liquid to
    the sole to promote pliability.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 44 for coating apparatus combined with
    means to deform the work, and subclass 427 for immersion coating apparatus
    having opposed relatively movable members acting on the work.


CLS 12/41.5
TXT Machines under subclass 17 for applying to sole members a conditioning
    agent, generally water, to cause them to become flexible.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for machines for applying
    permanent coatings to soles as ink, cement, etc.


CLS 12/41.7
TXT Machines under subclass 17 for severing the ends of fasteners extending
    through the inner sole to the inside of a shoe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for hand manipulable tools for the same purpose.


CLS 12/42
TXT Machines under the class definition for operating on a shoe heel, heel
    part, or heel lift, loose or attached to other shoe parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16.1+,  for machines providing the front (breast) of a heel with a covering
    forming a portion of the tread sole of the shoe, and especially 16.3 for
    machines including means for laying the sole flap on the heel breast and
    for pressing the heel on the heel seat of the shoe.

    70+,    for heel burnishing machines.

    79.5,   for heel wax polishing machines.

    85+,    for heel edge trimming machines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus of general utility for applying a member, e.g., nail, to shoe
    parts, and particularly subclasses 28+ for combined apparatus for
    sequentially assembling a plurality of layers (e.g., heel parts) and
    driving a member, e.g., nail into the layers.


CLS 12/42.5
TXT Machines under subclass 42, (1) for performing an operation on a heel and,
    in addition, an operation on another shoe part, or (2) for performing a
    plurality of different operations on a heel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18.5+,  for sole machines having means for performing operations on a heel.

    70.5+,  for machines performing diverse operations including heel
    burnishing.

    85.1+,  for machines performing diverse operations including heel edge
    trimming.


CLS 12/43
TXT Machines under subclass 42.5, including both (1) means to insert individual
    elements for securing a heel to a shoe, and (2) means for trimming the
    front (breast) surface of the heel being secured.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47+,    for heel breasting machines, per se.

    50.2    for machines for die cutting heel lifts from stock material
    combined with fastener inserting means.

    85.4+,  for means for removing material from the periphery of a heel, other
    than the breast surface of a heel, combined with means for inserting
    individual elements for securing the heel to a shoe.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, appropriate subclasses under 428+ for a method of
    inserting a fastener, and for a combined process for making and applying
    the same.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus of general utility for applying a member, e.g., nail, to shoe
    parts.


CLS 12/43.5
TXT Machines under subclass 42.5 including both means to conform a heel by a
    molding pressure to a predetermined peripheral contour and means to insert
    individual fastening elements into the heel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus of general utility for applying a member, e.g., nail, to shoe
    parts.


CLS 12/46
TXT Machines under subclass 42 provided with cutting means to form a recess in
    the top surface of a heel or a lift to receive the mating heel portion of
    the sole when the heel or lift is attached thereto.


CLS 12/46.5
TXT Machines under subclass 42 provided with means for cutting a sloping
    surface on the front edge of a spring heel.

    (1)     Note.  A spring heel is a heel inserted between two soles, one of
    which, usually the tread or outermost sole, is bent (sprung) to provide a
    recess for the heel between the two soles.


CLS 12/47
TXT Machines under subclass 42 for trimming the front (breast) surface of a
    heel or heel lift, which surface becomes the front portion of the heel when
    attached to a shoe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for combined machines which attach the heel to the shoe by driven
    fasteners and also trim the front (breast) of the heel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclasses 9+ for machines for skiving or
    beveling leather.


CLS 12/47.1
TXT Machines under subclass 47 in which the trimming means is a tool which has
    a sharpened portion continuously moving in a closed path.


CLS 12/48
TXT Machines under subclass 42 for shaping heel blanks by pressure, usually by
    direct press action.

    (1)     Note.  For machines for molding the shell about a core and shell
    heel, see this class, subclass 49.1.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43.5,   for machines for inserting fastenings and molding the heel to a
    definite peripheral contour.

    50+,    for machines for assembling heel lifts successively and holding or
    clamping them for formation into a heel or heel log.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses for presses not elsewhere provided
    for.


CLS 12/49
TXT Machines under subclass 42 for indenting a heel surface, or the surface of
    a member carried between the heel and the upper, to form ornamental
    markings thereon which operation is known as either milling or beading.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75.5,   for combined machines for beading and burnishing an edge of a heel.


CLS 12/49.1
TXT Machines under subclass 42 for preparing heels to receive covers and/or
    attaching covers to heels.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes trimmers for heel covers. Search this
    class, subclass 16.6 for heel breast flap trimmers and subclass 85 for
    machines for trimming the edges of sole and heel generally.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16.1+,  for machines for covering heel breasts with a portion of the tread
    sole and see (1) Note above.

    85+,    see (1) Note above.


CLS 12/50
TXT Machines under subclass 42 provided with means for receiving or collecting
    heel lifts or miscellaneous pieces of material successively and to hold or
    clamp them as a unit for formation into either a heel or heel log.

    (1)     Note.  A heel log is an elongated member having the peripheral
    contour of a heel and from an end of which heels may be severed
    successively.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for devices for merely clamping or pressing heel lifts, already
    built up or assembled as a heel.


CLS 12/50.1
TXT Machines under subclass 50 provided with a member having an endless
    sharpened edge of heel contour for severing heel lifts from stock material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses for machines for die cutting heel
    lifts, per se.


CLS 12/50.2
TXT Machines under subclass 50.1 provided with means to insert individual
    elements for securing the heel lifts or pieces in assembled relation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, appropriate subclasses.


CLS 12/50.3
TXT Machines under subclass 50 provided with means to provide the lifts or
    pieces being assembled with an adhering medium, such as paste or cement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for devices for merely clamping or pressing heel lifts, already
    cemented and assembled as a unit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for processes and apparatus for adhesive laminating
    in general.


CLS 12/50.4
TXT Machines under subclass 50 for assembling heel lifts or other pieces of
    material to form an elongated member having the peripheral contour of a
    heel, termed a log, and from an end of which heels may be severed
    successively.


CLS 12/50.5
TXT Machines under subclass 42 for severing a heel or part of a heel from a
    shoe, generally by a rotary cutter, so that a new heel or heel part may be
    attached.


CLS 12/51
TXT Machines under the class definition for operating on, (1) those portions of
    the shoe above the sole after their attachment to a sole, or (2) operating
    on such portions prior to their attachment to a sole.


CLS 12/52
TXT Machines under subclass 51 provided with means for positioning the various
    elements of a shoe upper for attachment.

    (1)     Note. The elements may be tips, quarters, counter portions, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, appropriate subclasses for similar gauging structures
    forming part of sewing machines designed for use in attaching the various
    elements of an upper together.


CLS 12/52.5
TXT Machines under subclass 51 for performing a plurality of different
    operations on a shoe upper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.1,    for machines for performing both an operation on a sole and an
    operation on an upper of a shoe.


CLS 12/53.1
TXT Machines under subclass 51 for conforming uppers after their attachment to
    soles.

    (1)     Note.  See section II of the class definition for a definition of
    the term "Assembled Shoe".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114.2+, for hand manipulable shoe stretchers adapted to be inserted in
    shoes.


CLS 12/53.2
TXT Machines under subclass 53.1 provided with an enlargeable form for
    supporting and imparting a stretching action to the upper combined with
    means for burnishing condensing, or polishing the upper to shape it to its
    support.


CLS 12/53.3
TXT Machines under subclass 53.1 provided with a rotatable cylindrical member
    which shapes the upper.


CLS 12/53.4
TXT Machines under subclass 53.1 provided with reciprocating members which
    shape the uppers by a beating or hammering action.


CLS 12/53.5
TXT Machines under subclass 53.1 provided with means inserted in a shoe and
    contacting means engaging the outside of the upper to force the upper to
    shape therebetween.


CLS 12/53.6
TXT Machines under subclass 53.1 which are provided with enlargeable means
    adapted to be inserted in a shoe and to conform the upper solely by
    enlargement of the inserted means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114.2+, for hand manipulable shoe stretchers adapted to be inserted in
    shoes.

    124,    for work supports, per se, inserted in shoes and expanded for
    supporting the sole of a shoe while an operation is performed on the sole.


CLS 12/53.7
TXT Machines under subclass 53.6 provided with mounting means for attachment to
    a vertical surface.


CLS 12/53.8
TXT Machines under subclass 53.6 in which the expanding means is operated by a
    reciprocating member extending therein.


CLS 12/54.1
TXT Machines under subclass 51 provided with means for applying pressure to
    unattached shoe uppers to shape them preparatory to their incorporation in
    shoes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7+,     for machines for conforming uppers to lasts so that they may be
    associated with sole members while on the lasts.


CLS 12/54.2
TXT Machines under subclass 54.1 in which the conforming operation is confined
    to the forward or tip portion of the upper.


CLS 12/54.3
TXT Machines under subclass 54.1 in which the conforming operation is confined
    to the rear or counter portion of the upper.


CLS 12/54.4
TXT Machines under subclass 54.1 provided with a plurality of mold members, at
    least one of which is movable, which cooperate to form a fold or crease in
    the upper.


CLS 12/54.5
TXT Machines under subclass 54.4 in which one of the mold members is supported
    on an endless carrier.


CLS 12/54.6
TXT Machines under subclass 54.4 in which one of the mold members is mounted
    for arcuate movement about an axis into operative position.


CLS 12/55
TXT Machines under subclass 54.1 for turning over the edge of the upper, or a
    binding attached to such edge, in order to provide a finished edge on the
    upper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52      and 55.1


CLS 12/55.1
TXT Machines under subclass 55 provided with slitting or notching means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57.5+,  for machines for removing excess material from uppers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses for machines for performing the
    slitting or notching, per se, especially subclasses 861+ for cutting other
    than completely through work thicknesswise.


CLS 12/57
TXT Machines under subclass 51 having means for turning an upper or upper part
    to bring the right side out.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass for example, are machines for turning
    tubular boot uppers, and for turning the seam of lined upper parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 39+ for apparatus for turning inside
    out garments, bags, and tubular fabrics.


CLS 12/57.1
TXT Machines under subclass 57 having also means to smooth or press a turned
    seam as by hammering or flattening by any means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for machines of this type combined with means for relasting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, for pressing in general.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclass 7 for seam pressing, per se.


CLS 12/57.5
TXT Machines under subclass 51 for removing surplus material from uppers either
    prior to or after assembly with sole members.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses for machines for cutting uppers
    from blank material.


CLS 12/57.6
TXT Machine under subclass 57.5 for removing surplus material from the sole
    attaching edge of the upper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.3+,   for inseam trimming machines which remove a portion of the sole as
    well as excess upper material from the lower edge of a lasted shoe.

    7.1+,   for lasting machines provided with upper trimming and/or slitting
    means.


CLS 12/58
TXT Machines under subclass 57.5 for beveling the edges of uppers wherein the
    operation of the machine is predeterminedly controlled for the entire
    beveling operation.

    (1)     Note. Usually the machine is pattern-controlled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclasses 9+ for skiving machines of general
    utility.


CLS 12/58.3
TXT Machines under subclass 51 for inserting relatively small rounded fastening
    means on shoe uppers through apertures intended to receive the rounded head
    of such fastening means, for closing the uppers for lasting, or for
    releasing such fastening means from said apertures to open the uppers after
    lasting.


CLS 12/58.5
TXT Machines under subclass 51 for threading filaments through the eyelets of
    shoe uppers to close them for lasting, or removing such filaments after a
    lasting operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for devices to be attached to the flies of shoe uppers to hold them
    in closed position for lasting.

    142+,   for methods of applying laces to shoe uppers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, appropriate subclasses for sewing machines of structure
    similar to lacing machines.

    289,    Knots and Knot Tying, appropriate subclasses for knot tying
    machines.


CLS 12/59
TXT Machines under subclass 51 for covering bootstraps with paper or other
    material to prevent soiling of the strap in the manufacture of the boot or
    shoe.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 45 for coating apparatus combined with
    means to protect a freshly coated surface.


CLS 12/59.5
TXT Machines under subclass 51 for applying tape to members disclosed as shoe
    uppers.

    (1)     Note. This is the generic subclass for machines for securing tape
    to shoe uppers by any means but see Class 112, Sewing, appropriate
    subclasses for such machines which secure the tape to the shoe upper by
    sewing operations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, (see (1) Note above).

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for apparatus of general utility for applying tape
    to articles other than shoe uppers.


CLS 12/59.7
TXT Machines under subclass 51 for applying to uppers a conditioning agent,
    generally water, to cause them to become flexible.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for machines for applying
    permanent coatings to uppers as ink, cement, etc.


CLS 12/61
TXT Machines, generally cutting or molding machines, peculiarly adapted to the
    manufacture of heel or counter stiffeners, box-toes, or toe-tips.


CLS 12/62
TXT Machines for skiving or beveling the edges of toe or heel stiffener blanks.


CLS 12/63
TXT The toe and heel stiffener blanks are presented to the skiving-knife by
    recessed carries, into which the blanks are pressed, or by recessed
    feed-rolls, the depth of the depression in the carrier or roll determining
    the thickness of the skived blank.


CLS 12/64
TXT Machines for shaping toe and heel stiffener blanks by pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses for presses not elsewhere provided
    for.


CLS 12/65
TXT The toe or heel stiffener blank is molded by being forced between rolls or
    between a roll and fixed form the roll being rotated to feed the blank
    through.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 155+ for concurrent pressing and conveying
    presses of the roll type, particularly subclass 156 for roll type presses
    in which a roll co-acts with a nonrotary press element.


CLS 12/66
TXT The matrix of form into which the counter is forced is made in sections,
    which separate to allow the insertion or withdrawal of the
    stiffener-carrying plunger or former.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 246+ for reciprocating platen presses of the
    box and piston type not elsewhere provided for, having a movable or
    removable box section.


CLS 12/67
TXT Miscellaneous machines for preparing and operating on welts and rands.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclass 9.3 for devices for skiving and
    trimming leather strips to be used as welts.


CLS 12/67.1
TXT Machines for crimping or molding welts and rands.


CLS 12/67.2
TXT Machines for beating out the welt after attachment to the upper and insole.


CLS 12/70
TXT Machines under the class definition provided with tools provided with rigid
    surfaces, which may be heated, designed to produce a rubbing action on the
    edge and/or tread surfaces of soles and/or heels to condense and polish the
    surfaces.

    (1)     Note.  Class 29, Metal Working, subclass 90.01, is the generic
    place for machines or processes for burnishing the surface of metallic or
    nonmetallic articles. See notes thereto for burnishing elsewhere classified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85,     for sole and heel trimmers of analogous structure.

    104,    for hand tools for burnishing soles and heels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 36+ for
    machines for boot cleaning and polishing by brushing.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 90.01+, see (1) Note above.

    451,    Abrading, for a process or apparatus for abrading boots or shoes.


CLS 12/70.5
TXT Machines under subclass 70, (1) for performing a burnishing operation on a
    sole and/or heel and, in addition, another operation on a sole and/or heel,
    or (2) having at least two burnishing tools of different types.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for machines having merely plural rotary burnishing tools.

    78+,    for machines having merely plural reciprocating burnishing tools.


CLS 12/73.5
TXT Machines under subclass 70.5 in which the burnishing machine is combined
    with means for applying a coating to the sole and/or heel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79.5,   for machines for waxing and polishing boots and shoes in which the
    applying means is not a burnishing tool.


CLS 12/74.5
TXT Machines under subclass 70.5 in which the burnishing machine is combined
    with (1) means for embossing or indenting a sole to simulate a sewed seam
    or (2) means for indenting a heel surface or the surface of a member
    carried between a heel and an upper, to form ornamental markings thereon,
    which operation is known as either milling or beading.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32+,    for machines for merely embossing or indenting a sole to simulate a
    sewed seam.


CLS 12/75.5
TXT Machines under subclass 74.5 in which the burnishing machine is combined
    with means for indenting only a heel surface or the surface of a member
    carried between a heel and an upper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for machines for merely milling or beading a heel.


CLS 12/76.5
TXT Machines under subclass 70.5 in which the burnishing machine is combined
    with means for (1) removing material from the periphery of a sole and/or
    heel, other than the breast surface of a heel, either loose or attached to
    other shoe parts, to reduce the area encompassed by the sole and/or heel
    periphery, or (2) beveling the periphery of a sole and/or heel, other than
    the breast surface of a heel, attached to other shoe parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85+,    for sole and/or heel edge trimming machines, per se.


CLS 12/77
TXT Machines under subclass 70 in which the burnishing tool rotates.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for rotary sole and heel edge trimmers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 34+ for
    rotary brush machines for boot cleaning, blacking and polishing.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 119+ for an abrading machine with a rotary
    reciprocating tool and subclasses 177+ for an abrading machine in which the
    tool has rotary motion only.


CLS 12/77.5
TXT Subcombinations under subclass 79.2 comprising revolving burnishing tools,
    per se, and/or revolving shaft-mounted burnishing units for use with
    burnishing machines as defined in subclass 77.


CLS 12/78
TXT Machines under subclass 70 in which the burnishing tool moves back and
    forth along a fixed path.

    (1)     Note.  The path followed is usually a straight line or an arc of a
    circle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 33 for boot
    cleaning, blacking and polishing, and subclass 37 for boot cleaners and
    polishers employing a reciprocating brush.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 162+ for an abrading machine employing a
    reciprocating abrading tool.


CLS 12/78.5
TXT Machines under subclass 78 in which the reciprocating movement of the tool
    is around the curved surface of the heel from one breast corner to the
    other.


CLS 12/79
TXT Machines under subclass 78 in which the reciprocating burnishing tool is
    flexibly connected to a power source and is guided by the hand of the
    operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for burnishing machines having rotary tools flexibly connected to a
    power source and guided by the hand of an operator.


CLS 12/79.2
TXT Subcombinations under subclass 70 comprising burnishing tools, per se,
    and/or burnishing units for use with burnishing machines as defined in
    subclass 77 or 78.


CLS 12/79.3
TXT Machines under subclass 70 in which the work piece is moved relative to a
    fixed burnishing tool during the burnishing.


CLS 12/79.5
TXT Machines under the class definition for applying friction to a coating on
    the edges and/or tread surface of soles and/or heels to form a high finish
    on the coating.

    (1)     Note. These machines may include means for applying the coating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73.5,   for burnishing machines having means to apply wax to the work or to
    the burnishing tool or to retain wax on the burnishing tool.


CLS 12/85
TXT Machines under the class definition for (1) removing material from the
    periphery of a sole and/or heel, other than the breast surface of a heel,
    either loose or attached to other shoe parts, to reduce the area
    encompassed by the sole and/or heel periphery, (2) beveling the periphery
    of a sole and/or heel, other than the breast surface of a heel, or (3)
    cutting a sole or heel from a larger piece of material, other than wooden
    stock material, progressively in a peripheral pattern-controlled path to
    form a sole or heel of predetermined contour.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass (85) includes machines for cutting out or
    rough cutting sole blanks except die cutting machines which are found in
    Class 83, Cutting.

    (2)     Note.  See this class, subclass 49.1 for trimmers for heel covers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16.6+,  for trimmers for a portion of the sole forming a heel breast
    covering.

    27+,    for machines which cut channels and bevel soles.

    46.5,   for machines provided with means for cutting a sloping surface on
    the front (breast) edge of a spring heel.

    47,     for machines for trimming the front (breast) surface of a heel.

    49.1,   see (2) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, appropriate subclasses, especially 281, 287 and 288 for
    hand tools for trimming the edge of soles or heels.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclasses 9+ for machines designed to bevel
    the whole periphery of unattached soles or heels.

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses and see (1) Note above.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 137 to 145.4 inclusive for a machine for
    producing wooden work of predetermined shape.


CLS 12/85.1
TXT Machines under subclass 85, (1) in which the trimming machine is combined
    with means, other than the trimming head, for performing another operation
    on a sole and/or heel, or (2) having at least two trimming tools or
    different types.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76.5,   for sole and/or heel edge trimming machines combined with
    burnishing means.

    89,     for sole and/or heel edge trimming machines having merely plural
    rotary trimming heads.

    93,     for rotary cutter heads, per se, having a sole and/or heel edge
    trimming cutter and in addition, a cutter for trimming the upper face of
    the sole and/or heel.


CLS 12/85.2
TXT Machines under subclass 85.1 in which the trimming machine is combined with
    means for forming a slit or groove in a sole, extending along the edge
    contour thereof, and located in or adjacent the sole edge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27+,    for sole peripheral channeling machines, per se.


CLS 12/85.3
TXT Machines under subclass 85.2 provided with relatively movable means to hold
    a sole while the channeling tool moves therearound, or which continuously
    grip a sole and feed it to a channeling tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for sole peripheral channeling machines, per se, provided with work
    clamping means of the type here classified.


CLS 12/85.4
TXT Machines under subclass 85.1 in which the trimming machine is combined with
    means for inserting individual elements for securing a sole and/or heel to
    a shoe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33.1,   for means for inserting individual elements for securing a sole to
    a shoe combined with laying and/or leveling the sole.

    43,     for means for inserting individual elements for securing a heel to
    a shoe combined with means for trimming the breast of the heel.

    50.2,   for means for inserting individual elements for securing heel lifts
    in assembled relation combined with die cutting and assembling heel lifts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus of general utility used for applying a member, e.g., nail to shoe
    parts.


CLS 12/85.5
TXT Machines under subclass 85.4 for operating on a heel only.


CLS 12/85.9
TXT Machines under subclass 85 which operate on that portion only of a sole
    which lies between the breast line and the ball line of a shoe to (1) bevel
    the side edges of the sole, or (2) remove excess marginal material from the
    sole so that the contour of the sole forms a continuation of the contour of
    an attached heel, which operation is termed joining.

    (1)     Note.  The beveling may be for the purpose of (1) forming a space
    for receiving upper materials or (2) making the sole appear thinner at the
    shank by beveling the lower corners to produce a shank shape known as a
    cottage shank.


CLS 12/86
TXT Machines under subclass 85 provided with relatively movable means to (1)
    hold a sole and/or heel stationary while the edge trimming means move
    therearound, or (2) continuously grip a sole and/or heel and feed it to the
    edge trimming means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for sole channeling machines in which the work is clamped to a work
    support to present it to channeling cutters.

    85.3,   for combined sole channeling and trimming machines in which the
    work is clamped to present the work to the cutters.

    85.5    for combined machines which nail heels to shoes and then trim them.


CLS 12/86.5
TXT Machines under subclass 86 designed to trim only the edge of a shoe sole.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses, and especially subclass 270 for
    machines operating on or adjacent the edge of a sole.


CLS 12/86.6
TXT Machines under subclass 86.5 which have means for moving a cutting means
    around an edge portion of a shoe sole.


CLS 12/86.65
TXT Machines under subclass 86.6 in which the cutter is mounted on a platform
    which revolves about a stationarily-positioned sole-supporting member.


CLS 12/86.7
TXT Machines under subclass 86.5 which are provided with rotary cutters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for machines employing a rotary cutter head for trimming the edges
    of soles and heels and see the notes thereto for other rotary cutter sole
    trimming machines.


CLS 12/87
TXT Machines under subclass 86 in which the edge trimming means is a tool which
    has a sharpened portion continuously moving in a closed path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88+,    for machines employing a rotary cutter head for trimming the edges
    of soles and heels and see the notes thereto for other rotary cutter sole
    trimming machines.


CLS 12/88
TXT Machines under subclass 85 in which the edge trimming means is a tool which
    has a sharpened portion continuously moving in a closed path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86.7,   for machines for trimming only the edge of a shoe sole while it is
    clamped to a work holder to present it to a rotary cutter.

    87,     for machines for trimming the edges of soles and heels in which the
    work is clamped to a support to present it to the action of a rotary cutter.

    91+,    for rotary cutter heads, per se, for use with rotary cutter
    machines as defined in this subclass (88).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 347 for cutting blades for use with hand
    manipulated implements which blades are so constructed as to be rotated
    during the cutting operation and see the notes thereto for rotary blade
    implements and machines in Class 30, Cutlery, and elsewhere.


CLS 12/89
TXT Machines under subclass 88 wherein a plurality of edge trimming tools are
    independently revolvably mounted on separate axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93,     for rotary cutter heads, per se, having two tools mounted adjacent
    one another for rotation on the same axis.


CLS 12/90
TXT Machines under subclass 88 which are provided with a member which may be
    moved from one fixed operative position to another fixed operative
    position, which is inserted between the upper heel surface (or rand) and
    the upper of a shoe, to (1) provide an edge for directing the work along a
    predetermined path and/or (2) protect the cutter or work.

    (1)     Note.  A rand is a peripheral strip on the heel surface adjacent
    the upper and forms the marginal portion of the heel seat.


CLS 12/91
TXT Subcombinations under subclass 85 comprising revolving edge-trimming
    shaft-mounted units for use with rotary cutter machines as defined in
    subclass 88.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    144,    Woodworking, for a similar cutter head for use with a woodworking
    machine.


CLS 12/92
TXT Rotary cutter heads under subclass 91 provided with means movable along the
    axis of rotation of the head to vary the area of exposure of the sharpened
    portions so as to trim and/or heel edges of varying thickness.


CLS 12/93
TXT Rotary cutter heads under subclass 91 provided with additional means having
    a sharpened edge for trimming the upper face of the sole and/or heel at the
    same time that the main cutter trims the edge.


CLS 12/94
TXT Rotary cutter heads under subclass 91 in which the sharpened members are
    blades not integral with the head but insertable therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    407,    Cutters, for Shaping, subclasses 33+ for a miscellaneous rotary
    cutter built up from a body in which are secured separate teeth, and see
    the Notes therein for like cutters elsewhere classified.


CLS 12/95
TXT Rotary cutter heads under subclass 94 in which the blades are pivotally
    mounted so as to be turned from one fixed operative position to another in
    the plane of revolution of the cutter head.


CLS 12/103
TXT Hand manipulable devices under the class definition for operating on boots
    or shoes, or on parts thereof; or for securing such parts either
    temporarily or permanently to boots or shoes, or to other shoe parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, especially subclasses 281, 287 and 288 for hand tools
    adapted for use in the manufacture of shoes, having a pure cutting function.


CLS 12/104
TXT Devices under subclass 103 provided with rigid surfaces, which may be
    heated and be manipulated to produce a rubbing action on the edge or tread
    surfaces of soles and/or heels to condense and polish these surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77.5,   for rotary burnishing tools for use with rotary burnishing machines.

    79,     for reciprocating burnishing tools flexibly connected to a power
    source and manually guided.

    79.2,   for reciprocating burnishing tools for use with reciprocating
    burnishing machines.


CLS 12/104.5
TXT Devices under subclass 103 for severing the ends of fasteners projecting
    through the inner soles of shoes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.7,   for machines for the same purpose.


CLS 12/107
TXT Devices under subclass 103 for operating on shoe uppers mounted on
    foot-shaped forms for conforming them thereto and having means (1) acting
    on the sole attaching edge of the upper to conform this edge to the sole
    supporting surface of the form so that a sole may be attached to such edge
    while the upper is mounted on the form, or (2) acting on the sole attaching
    edge to conform it to a sole supported on the form; with or without means
    for securing the conformed sole attaching edge and sole together.


CLS 12/108
TXT Devices under subclass 107 provided with gripping means for engaging the
    upper to draw it into lasted position, combined with means to both position
    and drive fasteners for securing the upper in lasted position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13.1    and see the notes thereto for lasting machines employing nailing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus for driving a member, e.g., a nail, and particularly subclasses
    12+ and 64 for combined apparatus for stretching flaccid work and applying
    a member, e.g, nail, thereto.


CLS 12/109
TXT Devices under subclass 107 provided with (1) gripping means to engage the
    upper to draw it into lasted position, and (2) an impact head, designed to
    drive a fastener for securing the upper in lasted position.


CLS 12/110
TXT Devices under subclass 107 provided with gripping means to engage the upper
    to draw it into lasted position.


CLS 12/111
TXT Devices under subclass 110 provided with multiple gripping means designed
    to engage the upper at the opposite sides of the last.


CLS 12/112
TXT Devices under subclass 110 provided with means to engage the upper around
    the toe portion and draw it into lasted position.


CLS 12/113
TXT Devices under subclass 103 provided with means for engaging the opposite
    sides of the vamp opening in a shoe upper to maintain the sides together
    during lasting.

    (1)     Note.  The portions of an upper adjacent the lacing slit are known
    as flies.


CLS 12/114.2
TXT Devices under subclass 103 for insertion within a shoe which exerts a force
    upon the upper thereof for shaping the upper, or a portion thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The devices in this and the indented subclasses are
    generally known as "shoe formers".

    (2)     Note.  The devices in this subclass are generally extended along a
    straight line while those in the indented subclasses may be provided with
    means to exert a variable expansion on the shoe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53.6+,  for machines for shaping shoes including an expansible form which
    is inserted in a shoe and expanded.

    124,    for work supports, per se, inserted in shoes and expanded for
    supporting the sole of a shoe while an operation is performed on the sole.


CLS 12/114.4
TXT Shoe stretchers under subclass 114.2 in which the expanding action is
    exerted by a fluid medium.


CLS 12/114.6
TXT Shoe stretchers under subclass 114.2 provided with means for engaging the
    upper portion of the uppers, usually those of boots or high shoes.


CLS 12/114.8
TXT Shoe stretchers under subclass 114.6 which are additionally provided with
    means for engaging the top portions of the uppers.


CLS 12/115.2
TXT Shoe stretchers under subclass 114.2 provided with means for engaging only
    a restricted portion of the upper being shaped.

    (1)     Note.  The devices in this and the indented subclass are usually
    designed to stretch a portion of the upper to provide for a bunion or to
    ease the vamp over the instep.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115.6+, for shoe stretchers which engage the toe cap and exert pressure on
    this portion of the shoe.


CLS 12/115.4
TXT Shoe stretchers under subclass 115.2 provided with shaping members engaging
    both the inside and outside portion of the shoe at the point being treated.


CLS 12/115.6
TXT Shoe stretcher under subclass 114.2 provided with means for changing the
    amount of the stretching action or the size of the base from which the
    stretching action takes place.

    (1)     Note.  The variable stretching action may be permitted by a spring
    which acts to give the stretching part its movement or by an adjustable
    connection which would permit the stretcher to be used in shoes of varying
    sizes.


CLS 12/115.8
TXT Shoe stretchers under subclass 115.6 in which the stretcher is adjustable
    both lengthwise and widthwise.


CLS 12/116.2
TXT Shoe stretchers under subclass 115.8 in which means are provided to secure
    the stretcher in both its lengthwise and widthwise adjustments.


CLS 12/116.4
TXT Shoe stretchers under subclass 115.8 in which means are provided to secure
    the stretcher in its widthwise adjustment.


CLS 12/116.6
TXT Shoe stretchers under subclass 115.8 in which means are provided to secure
    the stretcher in its lengthwise adjustment.


CLS 12/116.8
TXT Shoe stretchers under subclass 115.6 in which the stretcher is provided
    with only width wise adjustment.


CLS 12/117.2
TXT Shoe stretchers under subclass 116.8 provided with means to secure the
    stretcher in its widthwise adjustment.


CLS 12/117.4
TXT Shoe stretchers under subclass 115.6 provided with means to give only a
    lengthwise adjustment and with means to secure the stretcher in its
    lengthwise adjusted position.


CLS 12/119.5
TXT Devices under subclass 103 adapted to conform shoe uppers before their
    attachment to soles.


CLS 12/120.5
TXT Devices under subclass 103 for engaging the soles of shoes to hold or to
    conform the soles to a flat condition.

    (1)     Note.  In the devices in this subclass any shaping of the upper is
    incidental to the change in conformation of the sole because of the
    straightening action thereon.


CLS 12/122
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising work tables for shoemakers'
    use having means for supporting a shoe to be worked upon.


CLS 12/123
TXT Devices under the class definition for sustaining boots and shoes, or parts
    thereof, during manufacture and repair.

    (1)     Note.  Shoemakers' repair lasts are found in this subclass (123)
    and in- dented subclasses 124 and 125.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103+,   for hand clamps for holding shoe parts, or parts of shoes to shoes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses. Class 269 is the residual
    locus for patents to a device for clamping, supporting and/or holding an
    article (or articles) in position to be operated on or treated.  See notes
    thereunder for other related loci.


CLS 12/123.3
TXT Devices under subclass 123 for supporting unattached heels for operation
    thereon.


CLS 12/123.5
TXT Devices under subclass 123 for removably supporting an expander while a
    conforming operation on the upper of the shoe is performed.

    (1)     Note.  In these devices the expander is usually first placed in the
    shoe and the assembly is mounted on the support.


CLS 12/124
TXT Devices under subclass 123 in which the sustaining devices may be expanded
    to fit various sizes of shoes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53.6+,  for machines for shaping shoes having expansible forms.

    114.2+, for shoe stretching implements inserted in shoes.


CLS 12/125
TXT Devices under subclass 123 having means for simultaneously engaging the
    inner surface of a shoe at the heel region and the outer surface of a heel
    to hold a shoe or a heel thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16.3,   for machines for laying sole flaps against heel breasts provided
    with heel clamping means.

    86+,    for machines for trimming the edges of soles and heels in which the
    work is clamped to a work support to present it to a cutter and see the
    notes thereto for other shoe making machines in which the work is clamped
    to present it to a cutter.


CLS 12/126
TXT Devices under subclass 123 for supporting a shoe with a last therein and
    including pin means for insertion in a hole or holes in the last, said
    supporting device being termed a jack.


CLS 12/127
TXT Devices under subclass 126 which are additionally provided with a
    cradle-like support on which the toe or instep portion of the shoe rests.


CLS 12/128
TXT Hand manipulable devices under the class definition provided with contoured
    surfaces about which a shoe or shoe part may be conformed, and which
    surfaces are not expansible to produce a stretching action on an assembled
    shoe.

    (1)     Note.  The devices under this subclass may be provided with means
    so as to permit them to "break" or decrease their length.

    (2)     Note.  The devices under this subclass may include merely foot
    shaped articles which are inserted in shoes to hold their shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114.2+, for shoe stretching implements which are inserted in shoes and are
    expansible to produce a shaping action on the shoes.


CLS 12/129.4
TXT Forms under subclass 128 provided with means for modifying the temperature
    of the form.


CLS 12/133
TXT Forms under subclass 128 having foot shaped contours, and particularly
    designed to have boots and shoes formed thereover.


CLS 12/134
TXT Lasts under subclass 133 which are provided with adjusting means to vary
    the size of form before insertion of the form into a shoe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114.2+, for shoe stretching implements which are inserted in shoes and are
    expansible to produce a shaping action on the shoes.


CLS 12/135
TXT Lasts under subclass 133 in which the heel block is separate from the
    forepart so that the heel block may be removed first when the last is taken
    out of the shoe.


CLS 12/136
TXT Lasts under subclass 135 in which the heel block is hingedly connected to
    the forepart.


CLS 12/137
TXT Lasts under subclass 133 provided with removable instep blocks.


CLS 12/138
TXT Lasts under subclass 137 in which the removable connection between the
    instep block and the other last parts is a bolt which must be moved to
    disengage the instep block.


CLS 12/139
TXT Lasts under subclass 133 provided with reinforcements in the heel portion
    so that they may be mounted on spindle-jacks and withstand heavy
    operations, such as sole-leveling.


CLS 12/140
TXT Lasts under subclass 133 provided with inserts for receiving the points of
    the fasteners used for securing the upper and sole together.

    (1)     Note.  The inserts are generally of rubber-like material which does
    not splinter as would a wooden surface of the last when the fastener is
    inserted therein.


CLS 12/141
TXT Lasts under subclass 133 provided with means for securing the uppers and
    soles on the lasts.


CLS 12/142
TXT Processes of making boots and shoes except such as by their steps merely
    define the structure of the article made, such being found in Class 36,
    Boots, Shoes, and Leggings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 475.01+ for a method of sewing in general.


CLS 12/145
TXT Processes of lasting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7+,     for apparatus for lasting.


CLS 12/146
TXT Processes for making various separate parts of shoes, as soles,
    counterstiffeners, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are processes for making wooden lasts and last
    blanks.


CLS 12/147
TXT Processes of making and attaching heels.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are processes for making wooden heels and heel
    blanks.


CLS 12/148
TXT Processes of filling shoes by the incorporation therein of shoe-filling
    materials.


CLS 14/
TTL BRIDGES

CLS 14/
TXT This class includes all structures by which a roadway or railroad is
    carried across a space intervening between supports and all structures,
    such as gates, etc., whose operation is dependent upon the operation of the
    bridge (as in drawbridges).  Included in this class are both construction
    techniques and methods for building a bridge, regardless of type.

    There has been no attempt in this classification to separate lateral
    bracing.  Sometimes, as in suspension-bridges, the lateral bracing is more
    or less peculiar to the class of bridge structure.  In some cases there
    appears to be no distinction in either structure or function between
    bracing intended to strengthen a bridge against wind-pressure and that
    intended to support weight, and they have all been classified together.
    Except as provided for under ARCH and SUSPENSION bridges, support at the
    approaches (land to bridge transition) are generally considered to be a
    retaining wall type structure (see Search Note to Class 405 below).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, for closures of the type provided
    for.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses for in
    situ erected building structures of more general application, particularly
    subclasses 86+ for a vertically curved arch, subclasses 169.1+ for a
    building with defined terrane an feature, subclasses 174+ for buildings
    with traffic guiding feature, subclasses 177+ for building or building
    components with wear or friction-type traffic surface, subclasses 262+ for
    horizontal barrier resting on vertical supports, and subclasses 639+ for
    curvilinear or peaked truss.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for instruments used
    to measure, for example, deflection.

    104,    Railways, subclasses 35+ for turntables; subclasses 124+ for
    elevated structure for supporting an overhead railroad; and subclasses 275+
    for devices for crossing of railroad tracks by fire hose to avoid
    interference with car movement.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 458+ for bridging devices between
    adjacent coupled cars to permit safe passage therebetween.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses for
    coating compositions

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclass 87 for
    movable or removable floor sections for bridging floor recesses
    necessitated in accommodating the opening of a vault door.

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    appropriate subclasses for apparatus having a vertically shiftable load
    underlying supporting surface driven along a guided path and which moves an
    entire detachable load between vertically spaced locations.

    212,    Traversing Hoists, appropriate subclasses for apparatus used to
    lift and horizontally move a detachable load.

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 1 for molds for forming bridge structure in
    situ.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    appropriate subclasses for apparatus used to apply a pushing or pulling
    force to a detachable load.

    256,    Fences, for structure analogous to hand rails on bridges.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for a
    trafficable surface on a deck and expansion joint.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, for piers which do not include
    specific bridge or bridge coacting structure, e.g., drain pipes to conduct
    water runoff away from a bridge roadway, and especially subclasses 195.1+
    for such piers located in a marine environment, and subclasses 229+ for the
    residue of the piers of this (405) class. subclasses 284+ for a retaining
    wall type abutment (at the bridge approach) supporting a superstructure end.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, appropriate subclasses for apparatus
    used to place or displace a component in a particular manner or with
    reference to a particular support and for ramps loading to or from a marine
    vessel.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 476+ for a toy bridge.


CLS 14/2
TXT Bridges under the class definition combining principle of the truss (i.e.,
    framework with distinct reinforcement for tension and compression, e.g.,
    Fink, W, Hip, Bowstring type) with that of the arch, the truss and arch
    being connected, but usually being clearly distinguishable as separate
    structures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for arches including the principle of the truss in the structure of
    the arch.


CLS 14/2.4
TXT Bridge under the class definition intended to span between a first and
    second land mass (or associated base), which bridge is movable to a site to
    be spanned.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 137.1+ for a bridge or
    gangway with means to effect movement of cargo to or from a marine vessel
    and for the combination of a bridge or gangway with a ship and with
    additional material handling structure excluded from Class 14 (or from
    Class 114).


CLS 14/2.5
TXT Having launching means:
    Bridge under subclass 2.4 having structure which first spans the area to be
    bridged and on which the bridge itself slides or rolls into position.


CLS 14/2.6
TXT Bridge under subclass 2.4 including means adapted to engage flowable
    terrain inter-mediate the first and second land mass, which means is made
    buoyant to rest on the flowable material and support a portion of the
    bridge thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for floating bridges.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclasses 264+ and 270 for floating platforms.


CLS 14/3
TXT Bridges under the class definition of the type  comprising a framework
    having distinct supporting members for tension or compression (e.g., Howe,
    Fink, W, Bowstring type).

     (1)    Note.  Included in this subclass are trusses with a prestressing
    feature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for combination arch and truss.

    25,     for compound arches.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 223.1+ for a
    structure having prestressing feature.

    104,    Railways, subclass 124 for similar features on elevated railways.


CLS 14/4
TXT Truss structure under subclass 3 involving the arrangement of the several
    parts, the relative location of the elements, or the structure of the truss
    as a whole.


CLS 14/5
TXT Truss-bridge under subclass 4 which include some adjustable feature
    (usually, but not always, the camber).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for adjustable bowstring truss-bridges.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 4+ for dry docks.


CLS 14/6
TXT Truss-bridges under subclass 4 in which the road is supported on the upper
    chord of the truss.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73,     for bridge floors and appurtenances thereto.


CLS 14/7
TXT Bridges under subclass 4 of the cantilever type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31+,    for draw-bridges.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclasses 35+ for railroad turntables.


CLS 14/8
TXT Truss-bridges under subclass 7 include means of suspension as either a
    principle or a subordinate feature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18+,    for other suspension bridges.


CLS 14/9
TXT Truss-bridges under subclass 4 having the upper member an arc of a circle
    and the lower member the chord of said arc.


CLS 14/10
TXT Bowstring truss-bridges under subclass 9 which include some adjustable
    feature.


CLS 14/11
TXT Truss-bridges under subclass 4 having an approximate catenary in addition
    to the ordinary truss.


CLS 14/12
TXT Truss-bridges under subclass 4 having both chords curved, usually
    oppositely.


CLS 14/13
TXT Subject matter under subclass 3 comprising structure of the members
    individually (usually, but not always, the upper chord) of trusses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74.5,   for girders.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 633+ for openwork
    of more general application (particularly subclasses 639+ for curvilinear
    or peaked trusses, 690+ for straight trusses) and 720.1+ for elongated
    rigid members.


CLS 14/14
TXT Subject matter under subclass 3 comprising details of connections between
    the parts or to details of extensions of such parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for adjustable arrangements.

    10,     for adjustable bowstrings.

    15,     for end shoes.

    75,     for piers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 229 for trussed truck bolsters, 399
    for passenger car truss frames, 407 for freight car truss frames.


CLS 14/15
TXT Devices under subclass 3 connecting the end of the arch member of bowstring
    trusses to the tension member and immediate connections between compression
    and tension chord members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for shoes somewhat similar in structure to end shoes.

    73.5,   for expansion devices.


CLS 14/18
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to suspension-bridges.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8       and 11, for similar truss structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 223.1+ for a
    structure having a prestressing feature.


CLS 14/19
TXT Bridges under subclass 18 supported by more than two cables arranged in
    sets which are differently connected to the bridge.


CLS 14/20
TXT Bridges under subclass 18 supported by a single cable or by a simple system
    of cables, every cable being similarly placed.


CLS 14/21
TXT Devices under subclass 18 comprising supports and securing devices for
    suspension-cables.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7       and 8, for cantilever suspension.

    26,     for arch bridge anchors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses for
    other building structure of more general application, particularly
    subclasses 146+ for vertical structures with diagonal brace or guy,
    subclasses 155+ for piercing or expanding land anchors, subclasses 292+ for
    footings for vertical structures, and  subclasses 223.1+ for a structure
    having a prestressing feature.

    104,    Railways, subclass 124 for supports for elevated railways structure.


CLS 14/22
TXT Structures under subclass 18 (such as cables) specially designed to suspend
    bridges and devices for attachment of other parts to the cables.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 16+ for means of
    connecting ends of cables together, and 115+ for cord and rope holders.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 200+ for
    twisted or spirally wrapped cables.

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, for chains.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 49+ for pipe and cable supports.


CLS 14/23
TXT Apparatus under subclass 18 for use in getting cables into position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, particularly subclass
    10 for apparatus for spirally wrapping suspension bridge cables.


CLS 14/24
TXT Bridges under the class definition of the simple arch type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for combination truss and arch.

    36+,    for bascule-type bridges.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), for other static structures of
    more general application, particularly subclasses 86+ for vertically curved
    arches with a terminal support, subclasses 245+ for curvilinear barriers,
    subclasses 639+ for curvilinear or peaked trusses, subclasses 223.1+ for a
    structure haveing a prestressing feature, and subclasses 690+ for other
    trusses.


CLS 14/25
TXT Bridges under subclass 24 in which the arch is not a simple structure, but
    is composed of a lattice girder, a bowstring-truss, or some other compound
    structure.


CLS 14/26
TXT Devices under subclass 24 relating to the end supports.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for suspension bridge anchors.

    75,     for bridge piers.


CLS 14/27
TXT Bridges, under the class definition, of the floating type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.6,    for transportable floating bridges.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclasses 264-266 for a floating platform.


CLS 14/28
TXT Floating bridges under subclass 27 containing some structure to produce or
    to permit variations in the height of the road bed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for draw lifts.

    47,     for draw aprons.

    71.1+,  for one-end-attached gangways.


CLS 14/29
TXT Floating bridges under subclass 27 of the draw type.


CLS 14/30
TXT Floating draw bridges under subclass 29, which show some form of device to
    lock the draw.


CLS 14/31
TXT Bridges under the class definition, of the draw type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29+,    for floating draw bridges.


CLS 14/32
TXT Drawbridges under subclass 31 of the swing type, limited to structures
    embodying some feature specifically intended for use in connection with a
    bridge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 35 for railroad turntables and subclass 48 for
    railroad transfer tables.


CLS 14/33
TXT Bridges under subclass 32 having operating means.


CLS 14/34
TXT Bridges under subclass 32 intended to be swung by an approaching boat and
    usually equipped with an automatic return.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for boat-operated horizontally sliding draw bridges.


CLS 14/35
TXT Devices under subclass 32 for connecting the ends of the stationary
    supports for the purpose of support or locking, or both.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 4 for similar devices on
    dry docks.


CLS 14/36
TXT Draw bridges under subclass 31 of the bascule type revolving on a fixed
    pivot.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for aprons.

    71.1+,  for one-end-attached gangways.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 261.1+ for car attached
    rerailers, 262 and 263 for car replacers, 276 for overhead hose bridges.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 843+ for animal gangways.


CLS 14/37
TXT Bascule bridges under subclass 36 in which each vertically-swinging part is
    composed of sections hinged together.


CLS 14/38
TXT Bascule bridges under subclass 36 operated by a rack and pinion, the rack
    being on the movable span and the other on a stationary part of the bridge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for similar structure on nonpivoted bascule bridges.


CLS 14/39
TXT Bascule bridges under subclass 31 with no fixed pivot operated by means
    acting directly on the movable span.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for aprons.

    71.1+,  for one-end-attached gangways.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 261.1+, 262, 263, and 276.  (See
    this class (14) subclass 36).

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 843+ for animal gangways.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 364+ and 742 for similar
    structure in material handling devices.


CLS 14/40
TXT Bridges under subclass 39 operated by a rack and pinion, the rack or the
    pinion being on the movable span and the other on a stationary part of the
    bridge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for similar structure on fixed pivot Bascule bridges.


CLS 14/41
TXT Devices under subclass 31 for positively locking the movable parts of
    bascule-bridges against vertical or lateral movement.


CLS 14/42
TXT Drawbridges under subclass 31 moving vertically (either up or down from
    normal position) with usually no horizontal motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     58+ and 66+, for vertically sliding gates.

    71.1+,  for one-end-attached gangways.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 3 for lift-type drydocks.


CLS 14/43
TXT Drawbridges under subclass 31 which open by a horizontal longitudinal
    movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69.5+,  appropriate subclasses for unattached gangways.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 124 for similar structure on elevated railways.


CLS 14/44
TXT Drawbridges under subclass 43 which are operated by an approaching boat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for boat-operated swinging drawbridges.


CLS 14/45
TXT Drawbridges under subclass 31 operated by one or more lazy-tongs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 521 for lazy tongs.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 136+
    for lazy tongs operated and other forms of plural strip, slat or panel
    devices in which the elements intersect to form parallelograms pivoted at
    their points of intersection.


CLS 14/46
TXT Devices under subclass 31 for positively locking drawbridges against
    movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    All other subclasses under the main subtitles of Draw and Floating entitled
    "locking devices".


CLS 14/47
TXT Devices under subclass 31 usually constituting part of the floor or roadway
    and connecting the draw to the fixed span, (being hinged to one or the
    other) which are moved out of the way either prior to or during the
    movement of the draw.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for similar structure on floating bridges.

    71.1+,  for one-end-attached gangways.  The subclasses under Draw, Bascule,
    for the use of similar structure.


CLS 14/48
TXT Structures under subclass 31, actuated by draw-bridges, which when the draw
    is open project above the roadway to receive the impact of a moving car or
    other object and designed to resist considerable force.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 254 for bumpers for railway cars.

    186,    Merchandising, subclasses 24+ for buffers used in store service.


CLS 14/49
TXT Devices under subclass 31 relating to signal apparatus used in connection
    with draw-bridges and usually operated simultaneously with the gates.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclass 118 for
    drawbridge-protection railway signals.


CLS 14/50
TXT Drawbridge under subclass 31 having gates whose operation involve some
    feature specific to bridges.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for hinged-section Bascule bridges.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, appropriate subclasses, for closures
    of the type provided for, and see the search notes in section IV of Class
    49, for the loci of closures in other classes.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, for gates (1) in
    the form of panel units in which a flexible fabric or other flexible sheet
    material forms the panel portion, (2) panel units formed of plural strips,
    slats or panels interconnected for relative motion (excluding those
    connected only by a common operator or mounted only on a common support or
    in a common frame), where the relation to a bridge or the features of
    bridge structure are not claimed.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 87+ for water control
    gates.

    Hand or Motor operated.  Drawbridge gates under subclass 50 operated wholly
    or in part by hand or motor power.


CLS 14/51
TXT Hand or motor-operated drawbridge gates under subclass 50 which are
    horizontally swinging.


CLS 14/52
TXT Hand or motor-operated drawbridge gates under subclass 50 which are
    vertically sliding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 86 for lifting canal
    locks, and subclass 3 for lifting dry docks.


CLS 14/53
TXT Hand or motor-operated drawbridge gates under subclass 50 which are
    vertically swinging.

    Bridge operated.  Drawbridge gates under subclass 50 operated either by
    being contacted by the bridge, or by gate-operating mechanism under the
    control of the bridge.

    Displacement.  Bridge-operated gates under subclass 50 wherein the bridge
    displaces the member of the operative member which contacts with the
    movable span.


CLS 14/54
TXT Displacement-type bridge-operated gates under subclass 50 which are
    horizontally sliding.


CLS 14/55
TXT Devices under subclass 54 said gate having an attachment for locking it in
    one position.


CLS 14/56
TXT Displacement-type bridge-operated gates under subclass 50 which are
    horizontally swinging.


CLS 14/57
TXT Devices under subclass 56, said gate having an attachment for locking it in
    one position.


CLS 14/58
TXT Displacement-type bridge-operated gates under subclass 50 which are
    vertically sliding.


CLS 14/59
TXT Devices under subclass 58, said gate having an attachment for locking it in
    one position.


CLS 14/60
TXT Displacement-type bridge-operated gates under subclass 50 which are
    vertically sliding.


CLS 14/61
TXT Devices under subclass 60, said gate having an attachment for locking it in
    one position.  Shaft rotation.  Bridge-operated gates under subclass 50
    wherein the bridge first rotates a shaft in the operating mechanism


CLS 14/62
TXT Shaft rotation bridge-operated gates under subclass 50 which are
    horizontally sliding.


CLS 14/63
TXT Devices under subclass 62, said gate having an attachment for locking it in
    one position.


CLS 14/64
TXT Shaft rotation bridge operated gates, under subclass 50 which are
    horizontally swinging.


CLS 14/65
TXT Devices under subclass 64, said gate having an attachment for locking it in
    one position.


CLS 14/66
TXT Shaft rotation bridge operated gates, under subclass 50 which are
    vertically sliding.


CLS 14/67
TXT Devices under subclass 66, said gate having an attachment for locking it in
    one position.


CLS 14/68
TXT Shaft rotation bridge operated gates, under subclass 50 which are
    vertically-swinging.


CLS 14/69
TXT Devices under subclass 68 said gate having an attachment for locking it in
    one position.


CLS 14/69.5
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising a floored, narrow
    structure especially adapted to serve as a bridge for supporting persons or
    material or conveying them between ordinarily disassociated bases.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass and the subclasses thereunder are
    loading docks and related structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 2.11+ and 173.2 for
    dock seals.

    114,    Ships, subclass 362 for a structure generally limited to use for
    assisting in the boarding or disembarking of a vessel by personnel.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 222 and 223 for a
    platform.

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, subclass 38 for a
    skidway.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 88 and 89+ for a vehicle ramp and means for lifting at least a
    portion of the ramp while it supports the vehicle.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 34 and 35 for a
    portable ramp structure or arrangement.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 137.1+ and 537 for a
    bridge or gangway with means to effect movement of cargo to or from a
    marine vessel and for the combination of a bridge or gangway with a ship
    and with additional material handling structure excluded from Class 14 (or
    from Class 114, Ships).


CLS 14/70
TXT Bridging structure under subclass 69.5, which include an endless conveyor
    as the whole or a part of the floor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 76+ for cornstack handlers; 181+ for
    harvester conveyors; 345+ for rakers and loaders.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 843+ for animal gangways.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 42+ for similar
    structure in a fire escape.

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, for a nonpower-driven
    endless belt conveyor.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 321+ for a people carrying
    conveyor of the endless belt type, subclasses 793+ for a load supporting
    platform moved about an endless path, and subclasses 804+ for an endless
    belt conveyor.

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, subclass 86 for straw carriers.


CLS 14/71.1
TXT Bridging structure under subclass 69.5 in which one end thereof is secured
    to one of the ordinarily disassociated bases.

    (1)     Note.  Securement of the gangway to the base in this subclass is
    intended to include a loose securement; e.g., the provision to allow the
    gangway to pivot vertically or horizontally with respect to the base to
    which it is attached is included herein as is the provision to allow the
    gangway to slide horizontally with respect to the base.

    (2)     Note.  Dock levelers generally are classified in this subclass and
    the indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42      and 47, subclasses indented under Draw and Bascule for similar
    structure associated with the special types.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 31 for a station platform having shiftable
    portions to facilitate passenger movements or handling of freight.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 436 and 458, for similar
    structure adapted to be used with a railway vehicle.

    114,    Ships, subclass 362 for boarding aids, including a ladder or
    gangway, generally, limited to use for assisting in the boarding of vessel
    by personnel.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 843+ for a gangway of particular
    utility to the transporting of livestock.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclass 61 for ramps attached at
    one end, usually to a vehicle.

    410,    Freight Accommodation on Freight Carrier, subclass 6 for ramps
    attached at one end, usually to a rail car.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 137.1+ for a bridge or
    gangway with means to effect movement or cargo to or form a marine vessel
    and for the combination of a bridge or gangway with a ship and with
    additional material handling structure excluded from Class 14 (or from
    Class 114, Ships).


CLS 14/71.3
TXT Bridging structure under subclass 71.1 including means to force at least a
    portion of the person or material supporting structure in a vertical
    direction for repositioning of the gangway to properly relate to the
    disassociated based.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses for a
    mechanism used in moving a ramp.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 157+ for a ramp support.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 228, 229, 230, 258, 385,
    401, and 584 for handling apparatus including a movable ramp.


CLS 14/71.5
TXT Bridging structure under subclass 71.3 one end of which is attached to a
    building or other fixed base wherein the gangway includes a protective
    shroud adapted to cover and isolate any person or material supported
    thereon from the atmosphere and including provision to cause the end of the
    gangway remote from the fixed base to cooperatively interfit with a mobile
    base.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclasses 247+ and 267+ for control means for an elevator.

    454,    Ventilation, subclass 370 for ventilating an airport ramp.


CLS 14/71.7
TXT Bridging structure under subclass 71.3 wherein the repositioning means
    includes a fluid actuated motor as a prime mover.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, appropriate subclasses for a hydraulic system.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclasses for
    structure of a hydraulic or pneumatic component.

    137,    Fluid Handling, appropriate subclasses for various components of a
    hydraulic system (e.g., check valves).

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, appropriate subclasses for specific
    valve structure.


CLS 14/72.5
TXT Bridging structure under subclass 69.5 having attached thereto wheels that
    are adapted to be utilized to transport the gangway to the location of its
    use.


CLS 14/73
TXT Floors and appurtenances thereto which are specific to bridge structures
    under the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for a deck on the upper chord of a truss.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses for
    ceiling, flooring or roof constructions, particularly subclasses 174+ for
    buildings with traffic feature, subclasses 223.1+ for a structure having a
    prestressing feature, subclasses 319+ for cast-in situ ribbed concrete
    constructions with attached flooring or ceiling and subclasses 578+ for
    modules, panels or slabs with edgewise connecting features and subclasses
    660+ for gratings.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 34, 43-45, 70,
    71, and 134-136 for deck structure, per se.


CLS 14/73.1
TXT Joint:
    Subject matter under subclass 73 including means between adjacent bridge
    deck portions which allows slight relative movement between the portions.

    (1)     Note.  The "slight movement" referred to in this subclass includes
    shifting incidental to temperature change of the bridge parts.

    (2)     Note.  The "deck" of this subclass includes that portion of the
    bridge adapted to be engaged by traffic crossing thereon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 396.01+ for an
    expansion joint.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 47+ for an
    expansion joint in a road.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 135 and 153 for an
    expansion joint in a tunnel.


CLS 14/73.5
TXT EXPANSION DEVICE (E.G., BEARING PAD):
    Subject matter under the class definition including means between a bridge
    component and a support base (e.g., the earth, a column, pier, wall, or
    abutment) which allows slight movement of the bridge with respect to the
    base.

    (1)     Note.  The "slight movement" referred to in this subclass includes
    shifting incidental to temperature change of the bridge parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for a suspension bridge tower or anchor.

    26,     for an arch bridge abutment or anchorage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 167.1+ for an
    expansion device (e.g., bearing pad) allowing compensation, and absorbing
    motion in, e.g., a building.


CLS 14/74
TXT Devices under the class definition for covering and protecting separately
    the members of a bridge.  Does not include structures for covering a bridge
    as a whole.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76,     for pier fenders.


CLS 14/74.5
TXT GIRDER:
    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a distinct generally
    horizontal structural member in the superstructure for supporting a traffic
    bearing surface.

    (1)     Note.  Structure in this subclass is generally either one usually
    solid piece (e.g., I, W, S, polygonal, ellipsoidal beam or AASHTO type I-VI
    beam) or fabricated from solid pieces (e.g., box beam); both without
    distinguishable support elements for tension or compression.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass are prestressed beams.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73,     for a bridge deck having the reinforcement integral with the
    traffic bearing surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 897.35 for assembly and details of girders.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 250+ and 720.1+ for
    beams in general and subclasses 223.1+ for prestressing features.


CLS 14/75
TXT Structure under the class definition relating to the intermediate supports
    for bridge spans.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 274 and 292+ for
    building foundation constructions and subclasses 720.1+ for vertical
    elongated rigid building constructions, there provided for.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 222+ and 224+ for
    masonry and concrete piers and methods for constructing the same in a
    marine environment; and subclasses 231+ for piers and construction methods
    therefor not specifically for use in marine environments.


CLS 14/76
TXT Structures under subclass 75 designed to protect piers from damage by
    boats, ice, driftwood, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for other protectors of bridge parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclasses 219+ for ship fenders.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 212+ for fenders for
    piers in general, as well as fenders for other marine structures of the
    class type.


CLS 14/77.1
TXT BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION METHOD:
    Technique under the class definition for constructing a bridge
    superstructure.

    (1)     Note.  See Search Notes under the Class Definition for bridge
    construction equipment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for a suspension bridge tower and anchor.

    26,     for an arch bridge abutment and anchorage.

    77.3,   for constructing piers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 745.19+ for
    pre-cast bridge construction.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 31+ for in situ construction of a bridge (e.g., few or no
    pre-cast members).

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 284+ for a method of
    building a retaining wall type abutment.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 64 for in situ construction devices.


CLS 14/77.3
TXT Pier:
    Method of constructing a generally vertical structural support for a bridge.

    (1)     Note.  See Search Notes under the Class Definition for pier
    construction equipment.


                                        SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 232+ for equipment used
    in constructing a pier.


CLS 14/78
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:
    Bridge structure under the class definition involving features not
    otherwise classifiable above.


CLS 15/
TTL BRUSHING, SCRUBBING, AND  GENERAL CLEANING

CLS 15/
TXT

    I.      This class is intended for the assembly of patents for apparatus
    (but not the process of use thereof, see (1) note) designed or adapted for
    cleaning - that is to say, for the removal of foreign matter - by any of
    the following means - viz., a draft or current of air, steam, or equivalent
    gaseous fluid, dry brushing along; brushing, and an applied liquid - i.e.,
    scrubbing, beating, scraping, erasing, shaking, wiping, shotting, the use
    of squeegee, the application of an electrostatic field or any combination
    including one or more of these agencies - unless the inventions are so
    related or confined to or identified with some particular industrial art as
    to warrant classification therein, see the notes appended hereto.

    II.     Washing means, per se, i.e., not combined with one of the above
    noted means, are excluded, being provided for in other classes as set forth
    in the notes hereto.  So also all jets, nozzles, or other means of liquid
    or coating material supply, per se, where these agencies are present, are
    generally treated as merely ancillary or subordinate to the mechanical
    cleaning instrument or agency whose presence as a part of the invention is
    necessary to the assignment of a patent to this class and whose character
    determines the subtitle under which it is placed.

    III.    Coating:  many inventions in whose use cleaning or removal of
    foreign or extraneous material is or may be absent or merely incidental to
    a coating or polishing operation by brushing, rubbing, or wiping, combined
    or not with means for supplying a coating, cleaning, or polishing
    substance, are however, included in this class, because their structure and
    possible use are the same, whether intended for cleaning, polishing, or
    coating.  This class provides for coating apparatus having a solid member
    for transferring coating material from a source of supply to the work where
    the coating device is (1) an implement as defined in section IV below, or
    (2) a work traversing device the motion of which is determined by the
    intelligence of the operator rather than by the law of the machine itself.
    See section IX of the class definition of Class 118 for the line between
    Class 15 and Class 118.

    IV.     Inventions of the types above noted as properly belonging in this
    class are placed therein under four main heads - viz., Machines,
    Implements, Attachments and Accessories.

    A "machine" is defined in this class as an organization including a
    mechanism, which contains within itself its own guide for operation, to
    move either (1) a cleaning agency, or a coating agency of a type recognized
    in this class, relative to the work surface or (2) a means to constrain the
    work and said agency to some type of definite relative motion in response
    to manual or other actuation. (Note:  A guide on a stripping brush aids in
    directing the brush but does not constrain it to any definite path other
    than that determined by the work itself).

    An "implement" is defined in this class as a work contacting cleaning or
    coating agency subcombination which as disclosed, could be either (1)
    manipulated manually as a tool, (2) moved by a machine, as defined above
    and constituting a part thereof, or (3) held in place by support means for
    direct manual application of the work thereto.  (Note:  A hand held nozzle
    is not an implement as defined above and is classified under subclass 300
    as a machine subcombination).

    Attachments:  As an exception to the above definitions, patents which
    recite that (1) a cleaning or coating means is attached to an object which
    is cleaned or coated thereby or (2) that any device is attached to a
    cleaning or coating agency, have been classified as attachments regardless
    of whether they are machines or not, disregarding the relative superiority
    of these subclasses in the classification schedule.

    Accessories:  Devices not classifiable elsewhere and which perform no
    cleaning function but which are merely ancillary to machines, implements
    and attachments classified in this class.

    V.      Inventions relating to the commonly so-called vacuum cleaning art
    will be found in subclasses 246, 257, and 300 to 422; those using brushes
    for cleaning receptacles in subclasses 56-76, 164 and 165.  Brush and broom
    structures, per se, are mostly in subclasses 159-207.

    NOTES



    (1)     Note.  Processes:  Where both process and apparatus for its
    practice are claimed, the patent is classified as an original in the class
    appropriate to the process claimed and cross-referenced to this class (15)
    for the apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, for drying processes,
    per se,  even though performed by brushing, et cetera, per se.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, which is the generic class
    for processes of this type, and see the notes thereto for related processes.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 7 for
    processes and apparatus for hulling and comminuting or disintegrating seeds
    with or without the application of fluids.

    427,    Coating Processes, for processes of coating in general, especially
    subclass 429 for processes of coating wherein a brush or absorbent
    applicator is utilized.

    (2)     Note.  Processes and apparatus which remove an integral portion of
    the object or material dealt with rather than of extraneous or foreign
    matter only are found in the appropriate manufacturing class.

    (3)     Note.  For other related art.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles: Fiber Preparation, appropriate subclasses for cleaning a
    mass of fibers or a drafting roll.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 81.01+ for processes and apparatus for
    removing scale from metal sheets and bars except by brushing or scouring
    with an abradant and removing the scale by chemical action, and subclasses
    90.01+ for smoothing, compacting, or polishing the surface of metallic or
    nonmetallic articles by mere burnishing operations.

    30,     Cutlery, for hand manipulable cutting implements including scrapers
    with sharpened edges.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, (see also (1) Note)
    subclass 85 for such apparatus combined with means for cleaning the same.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), a residual class for a static
    structure, subclasses 171+ for a window treating means, 177+ for a specific
    wear or friction-type traffic carrying surface, 660+ for a fabric or
    lattice (e.g., indeterminate grating), 720+ for a shaft (i.e., an elongated
    rigid structure), or 749 for machine or implement having specialized use in
    assembly or manufacture of a building.

    55,     Gas Separation, appropriate subclasses, for the gas separator
    subcombination of gas blast or suction cleaners, particularly subclasses
    361+ for collapsible bag type filters, and subclasses 282+ for separating
    media cleaning means particularly subclass 294 for pneumatic scanning
    nozzles.

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 375 and 400.01+ for rakes, which have
    structure and operating means analogous to brushes and brooms.

    68,     Textiles: Fluid Treating Apparatus.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, appropriate subclasses, for scrapers,
    brushes, et cetera, for removing flesh, hairs, et cetera, from a hide
    during the leather manufacturing operation.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 323, for liquid level or depth
    sight glasses combined with a cleaner.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses  579+ for pitman and
    connecting rod where an intermediate connector having a bearing at each end
    for transmitting motion by a push and pull movement.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, particularly subclasses 517+ and
    599+ for apparatus for hulling grain.

    101,    Printing, subclasses 423-425 for cleaning attachments.

    104,    Railways, subclasses 279+ for track clearers.

    114,    Ships, subclass 222 for implements especially adapted to cleaning
    or scraping a ship's hull.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclass for coating apparatus, and
    see section IX of the class definition of Class 118 for the line between
    Class 15 and Class 118.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 379+ for cleaning
    combinations.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 16 for cooking or heating stove,
    having a flue cleaner.

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 315 and 324 for tobacco leaf cleaning,
    brushing, etc., subclasses 232 and 243 through 246 for implements for
    cleaning smoking devices.

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 73+ for manicuring devices, and subclasses 79+
    for toilet kits having brushes or applicators and also some other part or
    device particularly useful for a toilet function (e.g., mirror, comb).

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, see (1) Note, this class
    (134) also being the generic class for apparatus for cleaning and for
    contact of solids with liquids for other purposes, where not involving the
    means specially provided for in Class 15.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 238+ for fluid handling apparatus
    combined with cleaning, particularly subclasses 242+ for mechanical
    cleaning.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 344+ and 404 for apparatus for removing
    a sand mold or core from a flask or casting which may be by disintegration,
    except where abrading means (Class 451, Abrading) or an agitating screen
    (Class 209, Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids) is employed, and
    subclasses 131+ for corresponding methods.  See Class 15, subclass 94 for
    apparatus for freeing foundry flasks or castings of residual sand by
    shaking or other vibrating procedure.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 5 for cleaning a heat exchanger of the
    regenerative type, and subclasses 90+ for other types of heat exchangers
    having cleaning means.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 82.1+ for a cleaner on a well head for an inner
    member extending into the well, which is releasable by a tool carried on
    the inner member, and subclasses 170+ for a cleaner used inside a well.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 606+ and the subclasses there noted, for
    a cleaner attached to an earth working apparatus.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, appropriate subclass for subject matter
    directed to driving or impacting a tool, when such subject matter includes
    combined features peculiar to tool driving, but which does not include
    features limiting the subject matter to a specific tool art, such as
    specific shape of the work contacting portion of a tool, related tools, or
    an opposed work support.  Class 15 has not been cleared as to subject
    matter in conflict with this line.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 122 for apparatus for removing
    carbon from stills.

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 494+ for a conveyor having
    installed as part of its structure a means for cleaning a component of the
    conveyor.

    199,    Type Casting, subclass 62 for cleaning attachments for integral
    line casting mechanism.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclass 2 for a process for
    cleaning or decarbonizing thermolytic distillation apparatus.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 241 for apparatus for cleaning
    or decarbonizing distilling apparatus.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclass 48 for processes of
    removing carbon accumulations formed during mineral oil conversions.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, the various liquid
    treatment and aqueous suspension machines, and other appropriate
    subclasses, particularly 379+ and 487 for devices for clearing or cleaning
    sifters and stratifiers as by brushing, wiping, jarring or scraping.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 106+, 158, 159, 269+,
    298, 332+, 353, 354+, 391+, 407+, and 523+ for apparatus of that class
    (210) having cleaning means.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 43 for devices for turning articles of
    apparel, bags, or tubular articles by means of fluid pressure having no
    additional means for cleaning the articles.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclass 18 for fusion-bonding apparatus
    combined with a device for mechanically cleaning either the work or the
    fusion-bonding instrumentality, and subclasses 19+ for fusion-bonding
    apparatus combined with a device for removing excess solder or flux.  Also
    subclass 125 for the method of bonding and removing excess filler material
    from the bonded joint, subclasses 201+ for the method of bonding and
    cleaning the product, and subclasses 205+ for the method of bonding after
    cleaning the work part(s).

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses
    for fluid discharging apparatus which may be combined with specific
    cleaning structures, but not so claimed.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution, or Disintegration, subclasses 166+ for
    comminutors provided with cleaning means.  See the line stated in section
    12 of the main class definition of Class 241.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 88.1, 88.2, 175, and 364 for dust or
    particle adherent compositions, compositions with water-softening or
    purifying or scale-inhibiting agents, and solvents, respectively.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 855+ for wheel scrapers or cleaners.

    296,    Land Vehicles: Bodies and Tops, subclasses 96.15+ for a windshield
    cleaner claimed in combination with a windshield or its supporting
    structure.

    299,    Mining or in Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, in general for a
    machine that disintegrates, in situ, purposely applied hard material (e.g.,
    concrete, linoleum, roofing, etc.).

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 72+ for
    storage element cleaning combined with storage or retrieval.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 34+ for cleaning diagnostics,
    subclass 71 for control of cleaning during the electrophotography process,
    subclass 123 for particular structure of cleaning unit, subclass 149 for
    combined development and cleaning by a single component, subclass 245 for
    self-cleaning with electrodes a liquid development application member,
    subclass 327 for cleaning of fixing member, and subclass 343 for cleaning
    of imaging surface (i.e., photoconductive member).

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 701+ for cleaners.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, appropriate subclass for a
    manually manipulated implement comprising a coating tool combined with
    coating material supply means (e.g., pencil, lipstick, fountain pen,
    fountain brush, etc.).

    403,    Joints and Connections, a generic class of connections between two
    or more rigid or semirigid members; subclasses 52+ for articulated members
    having relative movement about a bearing surface, especially subclasses
    119+ for a pivot where two members are connected for angular motion in a
    plane transverse to the axis of at least one member.

    427,    Coating Processes, for processes of coating in general, especially
    subclass 429 for processes of coating wherein a brush or absorbent
    applicator is utilized.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet, and subclasses 364+ for a coated or structurally defined rod,
    strand, fiber or filament.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or Product,
    subclasses 31+ for process of cleaning the radiation system medium used in
    electric and magnetic imagery combined with a step of radiation imagery.

    451,    Abrading, for a process of or apparatus for abrading, both in the
    strict sense and as a species of cleaning.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, subclass 22 for a shaft or flexible shaft coupling having
    cleaning means associated therewith.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclass 92
    for a belt and pulley drive system having cleaning means associated
    therewith.

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses for a chemical composition used for cleaning or removing foreign
    matter from solid surfaces, and including descaling agents (subclasses
    247+), detergents, and sweeping compounds (subclasses 215, 216).

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclass 79
    for brushes and combs having means to apply light or electricity to the
    body.


CLS 15/1
TXT Inventions relating to brushing, scrubbing, or general cleaning, not
    strictly classifiable as machines, implements, accessories, attachments
    within the meaning of those terms as below defined.


CLS 15/1.51
TXT ELECTROSTATIC CLEANING:
    A machine or an implement under the class definition in which an
    electrostatic field is applied to foreign material disposed on the surface
    of an object to (1) attract or repel said foreign material to remove it
    from said surface, or (2) to change the existing electrostatic charge on
    the foreign matter, the latter being removed from said surface by other
    cleaning means recognized by this class.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is an implement which includes an element
    made of dielectric material and adapted to generate an electrostatic charge
    when rubbed on the surface of an object to attract foreign matter from the
    surface of said object.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclass 1 for a process
    of cleaning which includes application of electric energy to the work.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 127.1 for a
    method and an apparatus for separating mixtures of various substances into
    individual components in response to the application of an electrostatic
    field, and see the notes thereto, and subclass 215 for a device which
    magnetically separates and removes foreign magnetic material from the
    surface of an object being cleaned thereby.


CLS 15/1.52
TXT Hand implement:
    Subject matter under subclass 1.51 having means to facilitate the support
    or guidance of the cleaning means by a human operator.


CLS 15/1.7
TXT Devices under the class definition having cleaning means within the class
    definition contacting a surface under a body of liquid and also having
    means to cause a current of ambient liquid over the surface to dislodge or
    remove solids or sediment on the surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 565 for tank and pump combinations there
    provided for, and subclass 577.5 for tanks having traversing fluid supply
    conduits.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 241+ for separators
    having moving support means, and subclasses 523+ for gravitational
    separators having mechanical constituent movers.


CLS 15/3
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means for contacting a work
    surface or object with an air blast and/or suction or with a beater, brush,
    broom, scraper, eraser, squeegee, wiper, shot or other nonabrasive type
    particulate or comminuted solid, or having means for shaking or vibrating
    the work, or any combination of the above, for the purpose of dislodging
    and/or removing unwanted foreign material therefrom, and the surface
    contact is accomplished by power and motion means other than or in addition
    to that which the apparatus would have if merely held or supported by the
    operator and manipulated or moved by him relative to the work.

    (1)     Note.  Subcombination or elemental devices apparently restricted in
    utility to use with machines under the above definition may be placed in
    this group of subclasses, such, for example, as the "nozzle" of air blast
    and/or suction cleaners which are found in subclasses 322 and 415+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, appropriate subclass for a means to
    drive or impact a tool or the like.


CLS 15/3.1
TXT Devices under subclass 3 disclosed for treating (usually cleaning) fruit,
    vegetables, meat, eggs, nuts, or other discrete edible articles by
    instrumentalities provided for in this class, usually by brushes or wipers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    17,     Butchering, for processes and apparatus for killing and dressing
    animals, fish and fowl for food.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 25 for cleaning
    apparatus for unearthed plants or objects employing brushes or wipers.

    356,    Optics: Measuring and Testing, subclasses 52+ for egg candlers of
    the visual and the photoelectric type alone or candlers combined with
    counting, marking, weighing or conveying means.


CLS 15/3.11
TXT Devices under subclass 3.1 including means to assort the articles or to
    screen out dirt or other undesired matter from the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, for such processes
    and apparatus, per se.


CLS 15/3.12
TXT Devices under subclass 3.1 in which either (1) a fluid is applied to the
    work, or (2) the work is heated, usually to dry them.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclass
    for drying fruits, etc., per se.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 13+ for apparatus for applying
    coatings to edible materials.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclass for
    apparatus for cleaning by application of a liquid only.


CLS 15/3.13
TXT Devices under subclass 3.12 in which the work moves through the apparatus,
    i.e., from an entrance to an exit for the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.16+,  for corresponding apparatus not using fluids.


CLS 15/3.14
TXT Devices under subclass 3.13 using only liquids (i.e., not using gases or
    vapors).


CLS 15/3.15
TXT Devices under subclass 3.14 in which (1) a work treating element or
    elements and/or (2) the articles being cleaned, are immersed in whole or
    part in a liquid.


CLS 15/3.16
TXT Devices under subclass 3.1 in which the work moves through the apparatus,
    i.e., from an entrance to an exit for the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.13+,  for corresponding apparatus utilizing fluids.


CLS 15/3.17
TXT Devices under subclass 3.16 in which the work treating element or elements
    rotate about axes which extend transversely of the path of the articles
    through the apparatus, i.e., the work treating elements are generally
    normal to a line between the entrance and exit for the work.


CLS 15/3.18
TXT Devices under subclass 3.17 in which the rotating work treating elements
    also have a motion generally along, or parallel to, a line between the
    entrance and exit for the work.


CLS 15/3.19
TXT Devices under subclass 3.16 not provided for above in which a conveyor
    constituting a work treating element rotates about a fixed axis.


CLS 15/3.2
TXT Devices under subclass 3.19 in which the work moves along, or parallel to,
    an axis or a rotating work treating element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.17+,  for apparatus in which the work may move axially of rotating work
    treating elements which are transverse of the general path of the work
    through the apparatus, i.e., the articles move along a zigzag path between
    the entrance and exit of the work.


CLS 15/3.21
TXT Devices under subclass 3.16 in which a conveyor for the work also is, or
    carries, a work treating element.


CLS 15/3.5
TXT Machines under subclass 3 for cleaning the inside of tubular conduits, such
    machines comprising means for introducing a carrier fluid into a conduit
    either in addition to or in the absence of normal fluid flow in the
    conduit, combined with means to introduce a solid cleaning member, agent or
    material into the stream of fluid or the conduit whereby the cleaning
    member, agent or material is conveyed or pushed through the conduit by
    fluid pressure for mechanically cleaning the inside of the conduit.

    (1)     Note.  Devices in which the cleaning instrumentality is propelled
    through the conduit by mechanical traction developed by a motor means which
    is actuated by a fluid not confined solely by the conduit are excluded and
    may be found in the appropriate implement subclass of this class.  See for
    example, subclass 104.12.

    (2)     Note.  In the patents in this group of subclasses the cleaning
    means, in the carrier fluid, is introduced at one end of the conduit and at
    least the fluid has an egress point at another place. Thus, the cleaning of
    receptacles, in which the cleaning means is introduced and removed from the
    mouth of the receptacle, is excluded, an example of such devices, being the
    bottle shotting inventions classified in subclass 95 of this class.

    (3)     Note.  The mechanical cleaning member, agent or material may be a
    structure of hard material for scraping the interior of the conduit or of
    soft materials as sponge or rubber, for wiping the surface to be cleaned,
    or it may be a soluble or insoluble comminuted or granular material, as
    sand, glass beads, or softer material.  Patents in this subclass which
    utilize sand as the cleaning material to perform a disclosed cleaning (and
    not abrading) function are included as a specific exception to the general
    line with Class 451, Abrading, because the structures and modes of
    operation of such systems are similar to those of systems which circulate
    the other stated types of materials.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95      and 96, for similar means to clean receptacles (bottles) by
    shotting.

    104.05+, for implements, per se, for cleaning the insides of tubular work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclass 93 for similar
    apparatus in which soluble solid cleaning materials are dissolved in a
    liquid stream and applied to work to be cleaned.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 238+ for similar systems disclosed and
    claimed as installed in fluid handling systems, and subclass 268 for fluid
    handling systems having means for holding solid, flaky or pulverized
    material to be dissolved or entrained.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 148+ for similar systems disclosed and
    claimed as installed in dispensers.

    451,    Abrading, for a process of or apparatus for scouring.  Search
    particularly subclasses 75+ for a process of sandblasting and subclasses
    103+ for apparatus for sandblasting. Generally, a claim to engaging work by
    abradant material, either for scouring or for abrading, is found in Class
    451.  See (3) Note above.  Also see section IX of the class definition of
    Class 451 for another statement of this line.

            Special note to cleaning of open ended tubular work:

            A claim directed to a method or apparatus which by disclosure
    includes removal of base material is to be found in Class 451; whereas a
    claim directed to similar method or apparatus, which by disclosure includes
    removing extraneous material only, is to be found in Class 15 if the sand
    or other scouring means is carried through the tubular work by a fluid
    stream.  Note that bottle shotting is to be found in Class 15, subclasses
    95+.


CLS 15/3.51
TXT Machines under subclass 3.5 which include an arrangement whereby the
    cleaning instrumentality is retained or is recovered at the end of the
    cleaning operation, either for subsequent disposal or for reuse.


CLS 15/3.52
TXT Machines under subclass 3.51 in which the means to recover the cleaning
    instrumentality is a line attached to such instrumentality whereby it may
    be retrieved.


CLS 15/3.53
TXT Machine under subclass 3 for disintegrating and removing indicia from a
    surface by rubbing contact therewith, the rubbing-contact instrumentality
    of the machine comprising a body composed of particles which are so in
    cohesive as to permit disintegration of the surface-contacting portion of
    the body, along with the indicia, whereby substantially to avoid mutilation
    of the surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, for an eraser comprising an abradant body (i.e., a body
    claimed as including crystalline particles with sharp edges which mutilate
    a work surface).  Note that a similar eraser without claimed crystalline
    particles is included in Class 15, the generic locus for an eraser, even if
    broadly claimed as an implement for ``abrading," and if the sole disclosure
    is to an erasing body having crystalline particles.


CLS 15/4
TXT Devices having cleaning agencies of more than one kind or type, at least
    one of which is recognized by title in the present classification, together
    with means for putting the cleaning agencies into action and for applying
    the same to the work or the work thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.5,    for machines employing an electrostatic field for cleaning a
    surface of an object which machines may include a cleaning means of a
    different type.

    50+,    for surface brushing machines with liquid or fluent material
    application, and for such combinations including a wiper.


CLS 15/5
TXT Cleaning-machines in which the action of a beater is supplemented by that
    of a brush.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     41, 89, 91, 92, 268, 308+, 311, and 363+.


CLS 15/21.1
TXT Brushing:
    Subject matter under subclass 3 having a cleaning instrument of the brush
    or broom type only, and not so differentiated in structure as to fall under
    any one of the titles of subclasses 22.1-29 of this class, or so especially
    adapted to a particular situation or class of work as to fall under any of
    the titles of subclasses 30-88 of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88.1    through 88.4, for other instruments of the brush or broom type
    only, and not so differentiated in structure as to fall under any one of
    the titles of subclasses 22.1 - 88 of this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclass 222 for a device adapted to clean the hull of a
    ship.

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 315+ and 324 for a machine for brushing tobacco
    leaves.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclass 18 for a
    combination of means to cut in the manner of that class combined with means
    to clean the tool.  The combination of means to clean a workpiece with
    means to cut that workpiece will be found in this class (Class 15).


CLS 15/21.2
TXT Ball cleaner:
    Subject matter under subclass 21.1 comprising means particularly adapted to
    clean generally spherical objects.


CLS 15/22.1
TXT Handle mount:
    Subject matter under subclass 21.1 having a cleaning instrument of the
    brush or broom type only, and in which the bearings of the brush or broom
    or its actuating-shaft are carried by a handle, which handle acts as a
    support and means for applying the instrument to the work.


CLS 15/22.2
TXT Reciprocating tool:
    Subject matter under subclass 22.1 having means to move the brush
    cyclically in alternate directions in a straight line relative to the
    handle.


CLS 15/22.3
TXT Belt brush:
    Subject matter under subclass 22.1 wherein the brush includes bristles or
    other work-contacting elements mounted on the exterior surface of an
    endless flexible band which is driven during brushing to move the
    work-engaging ends of the bristles laterally across the surface of the work.


CLS 15/22.4
TXT Swinging tool:
    Subject matter under subclass 22.1 wherein the support for the
    work-contacting part of the brush has an axis about which it is rotated
    back and forth in an arc of less than 360 degrees during brushing.


CLS 15/23
TXT Cleaning-machines having no other type of cleaning instrument than a rotary
    cylindrical brush or broom, the bearings of whose actuating-shaft are
    carried in a handle serving as a means for supporting the instrument and
    applying it to the work.


CLS 15/24
TXT Cleaning-machines under subclass 23 the bearings of whose actuating-shaft
    are carried in a handle service as a means for supporting the instrument
    and applying it to the work, together with means for supplying a cleaning
    fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     for rotary wipers having fluid supply.

    250.01+, for window cleaning attachments having means for applying a fluid
    to the surface to be cleaned.


CLS 15/25
TXT Cleaning-machines having a rotary cylindrical manually-driven brush or
    broom turning always in one direction and having the bearings of its
    actuating-shaft carried in a handle serving as a means for supporting the
    instrument and applying it to the work.


CLS 15/26
TXT Devices under subclass 25 in which the manually driven, hand supported,
    rotary cylindrical brush is arranged to turn in opposite directions
    alternatively.


CLS 15/27
TXT In which the cylinder is rotated by contact of the implement or a driving
    means with the work.


CLS 15/28
TXT Cleaning-machines having no other type of cleaning instrument than a rotary
    disk brush or broom whose shaft is mounted in a handle serving as a means
    for supporting the instrument and applying it to the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29.


CLS 15/29
TXT Cleaning-machines having no other type of cleaning instrument than a rotary
    disk brush or broom having its shaft mounted in a handle serving to support
    the instrument and apply it to the work, together with means for supplying
    a cleaning fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50+,    for scrubbers having fluid supply.

    250.01+, for window cleaning attachments having means for applying a fluid
    to the surface to be cleaned.


CLS 15/30
TXT Machines especially adapted for cleaning, blacking, and polishing boots and
    shoes, having cleaning or polishing instruments of the brush or broom type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      31-35, 97, and 265.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 72 for coating apparatus having means
    to prepare the base to receive the coating, and subclasses 100+ for
    apparatus having a member for modifying the coating after application to
    the work.


CLS 15/31
TXT Boot-blacking machines as defined under subclass 30, having means for
    supplying polishing material.


CLS 15/32
TXT Machines especially adapted for cleaning, blacking, and polishing boots and
    shoes in which the cleaning or polishing instruments are of the brush or
    broom type and have both a rotary and a reciprocating motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     34, 36, and 37.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 119+ for a machine in which an abrading tool
    has a rotary motion and a reciprocating motion.


CLS 15/33
TXT Machines in which the cleaning or polishing instruments are of the brush or
    broom type and have a reciprocating motion only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclasses 78+ for reciprocating tool boot
    and shoe burnishing machines.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 162+ for an abrading machine which uses a
    reciprocating tool.


CLS 15/34
TXT Machines in which the cleaning or polishing instruments are of the brush or
    broom type and have a rotary motion only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35      and 36.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclass 77 for rotary tool boot and shoe
    burnishing machines.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 177+ for an abrading machine which uses a
    rotating tool.


CLS 15/35
TXT Machines in which the cleaning or polishing instruments are of the brush or
    broom type and have a rotary motion only, of planetary character.


CLS 15/36
TXT Cleaning-machines especially adapted for cleaning and polishing boots and
    shoes and having no other instrument than a brush.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     32, 34, 35, and  37.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclasses 70+ for machines which polish and
    condense the surface of boots and shoes through the rubbing action of a
    rigid metallic tool.


CLS 15/37
TXT Cleaning-machines especially adapted for cleaning and polishing boots and
    shoes and having no other instrument than a reciprocating brush.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32      and 33.


CLS 15/38
TXT Cleaning-machines having no other type of cleaning instrument than a brush
    and especially adapted for the cleaning of brushes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48.


CLS 15/39
TXT Cleaning-machines having no other type of cleaning instrument than a brush
    and especially adapted for the cleaning of the teeth of combs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104.5+, for comb cleaning implements.


CLS 15/39.5
TXT Tabletop or tablecloth cleaner:
    Subject matter under subclass 21.1 having means especially adapted for
    removing dirt, crumbs or any unwanted matter from a table surface or a
    tablecloth.


CLS 15/40
TXT Machines having no other instruments than brushes or brooms and especially
    adapted for cleaning flexible fabrics, except carpet-sweepers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.5,   for brushes for removing dirt, crumbs or any other unwanted matter
    from a table-cloth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth-Finishing, subclasses 27+, and 31+.


CLS 15/41.1
TXT Carpet sweeper:
    Subject matter under subclass 40 wherein the machine is especially adapted
    for cleaning carpets on the floor or similar covers in place.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49.1+,  for similar machines for sweeping bare floors.

    78+,    for similar machines for sweeping streets.


CLS 15/42
TXT Machines characterized by the use of a main brush and an auxiliary brush of
    different character, mounting, or relation to the direction of travel of
    the machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      9, 10, 11, and 78-87.


CLS 15/43
TXT Machines having no other cleaning instruments than brushes combined in one
    structure with a fan and especially adapted for cleaning carpets on the
    floor.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 7, 8, 9, and 11.


CLS 15/44
TXT Machines having no other cleaning instruments than brushes, and having also
    means for preventing the raising of dust in the sweeping operation.


CLS 15/45
TXT Machines having no other cleaning instruments than brushes, and having
    cushioning devices mounted thereon to prevent injury to furniture or walls
    in the operation of the machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    325.


CLS 15/46
TXT Machines having no other cleaning instruments than brushes and in which the
    brush is driven by the hand of the operator.


CLS 15/47
TXT Machines having no other cleaning instruments than brushes, and in which
    the brush does not rotate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104.8,  for a cleaning instrument concurrently coacting with a receiver for
    the material handled in the cleaning operation.


CLS 15/48
TXT Machines having no other cleaning instruments than brushes and having a
    cleaning means for keeping the brush clean while in action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38.


CLS 15/48.1
TXT Unidirectional drive:
    Subject matter under subclass 41.1 wherein the brush is rotated by a
    carpet-engaging wheel, and having means permitting the brush to be rotated
    in only one direction (clockwise or counterclockwise) despite reverses in
    the direction of rotation of the carpet-engaging wheel.


CLS 15/48.2
TXT Bellows type:
    Subject matter under subclass 41.1 wherein the air draft is created by an
    expansible chamber device driven by a carpet-engaging wheel.


CLS 15/49.1
TXT Floor and wall cleaner:
    Subject matter under subclass 21.1 wherein the machine has a brush as its
    sole type of cleaning instrument, and is especially adapted for cleaning
    floors, walls, and ceilings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.1+,  for similar machines for sweeping carpets.

    78+,    for similar machines for sweeping streets.


CLS 15/50.1
TXT Scrubber:
    Subject matter under subclass 49.1 comprising an ambulatory machine having
    no other cleaning instruments than (1) a brush or (2) a brush supplemented
    by a wiper, together with means for supplying either liquid for scrubbing
    purposes or a coating material, and especially adapted for scrubbing or
    coating floors, walls and ceilings.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses contain a surface brushing
    machine, with or without wipers, including means for applying paint or
    other liquid or fluent coating materials to walls, floors, ceilings,
    roadways and the like.


CLS 15/50.2
TXT Reciprocating brush:
    Subject matter under subclass 50.1 having means to move the brush
    cyclically in alternate directions in a straight line across the work
    surface.

    (1)     Note.  The combined motion of the brush across, and towards and
    away from the work surface may include other than straight line components
    (e.g., oscillatory motion).


CLS 15/50.3
TXT Cylindrical brush:
    Subject matter under subclass 50.1 wherein the working surface of the brush
    coincides with a surface of revolution generated by the rotation of a
    straight line about an axis parallel thereto.

    (1)     Note.  The "working surface" of the brush is an imaginary
    brush-enveloping smooth surface defined by and encompassing all of the
    work-engaging end-points of the bristles of the brush.


CLS 15/51
TXT Machines in which the cleaning instruments are brushes supplemented by an
    endless wiper and having means for supplying a cleaning fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      44, 46, 78, 79, 80, and 99.


CLS 15/52
TXT Machines in which the cleaning instruments are brushes supplemented by a
    rotary wiper and having means for supplying a cleaning fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      44, 46, 78, 79, 80, 97, and 98.


CLS 15/52.1
TXT Cylindrical brush:
    Subject matter under 49.1 wherein the working surface of the brush
    coincides with a surface of revolution generated by the rotation of a
    straight line about an axis parallel thereto.

    (1)     Note.  The "working surface" of the brush is an imaginary
    brush-enveloping smooth surface defined by and encompassing all of the
    work-engaging end-points of the bristles of the brush.


CLS 15/52.2
TXT Reciprocating brush:
    Subject matter under subclass 49.1 having means to move the brush
    cyclically in alternate directions in a straight line across the work
    surface.

    (1)     Note.  The combined motion of the brush across, and towards and
    away from the work surface may include other than straight line components,
    (e.g., oscillatory motion).


CLS 15/53.1
TXT Vehicle cleaner:
    Subject matter under subclass 21.1 wherein the machine has a brush as the
    sole type of cleaning instrument and is especially adapted for cleaning the
    outside of a wheeled conveyance.


CLS 15/53.2
TXT Cylindrical brush:
    Subject matter under 53.1 wherein the working surface of the brush
    coincides with a surface of revolution generated by the rotation of a
    straight line about an axis parallel thereto.

    (1)     Note.  The "working surface" of the brush is an imaginary
    brush-enveloping smooth surface defined by and encompassing all of the
    work-engaging end-points of the bristles of the brush.


CLS 15/53.3
TXT Moving  vehicle:
    Subject matter under subclass 53.2 wherein the conveyance moves past the
    brush during brushing.


CLS 15/53.4
TXT Wheel washer:
    Subject matter under subclass 53.1 including means particularly adapted to
    brush the supporting wheels of wheeled conveyances.


CLS 15/54
TXT Cleaning machines in which the cleaning instruments are of brush or broom
    type and which are especially adapted for cleaning railway-car trackage.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 55, 78-82 and 87.


CLS 15/55
TXT Cleaning-machines in which the cleaning instruments are rotary and of the
    brush or broom type and which are especially adapted for
    cleaning-railway-car trackage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78      through 82 and 87.


CLS 15/56
TXT Machines in which the cleaning instruments are of the brush or broom type
    only and which are especially adapted and intended for cleaning
    miscellaneous receptacles other than barrels, bottles, cans, cuspidors,
    dishes, or tumblers.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 57 to 76.


CLS 15/57
TXT Machines in which the cleaning instruments are of the brush or broom type
    only, and which are especially adapted for cleaning barrels by successive
    washing and brushing, except those in which the barrel remains in one
    position during the entire cleaning.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 58.


CLS 15/58
TXT Machines in which the cleaning instruments are of the brush or broom type
    only, especially adapted for cleaning barrels, and in which the barrel does
    not move during the cleaning operation, or rotates merely.


CLS 15/59
TXT Machines in which the cleaning instruments are of the brush or broom type
    only, especially adapted for cleaning receptacles of the bottle type.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 60-69.


CLS 15/60
TXT Machines in which plural bottles are presented to the cleaning means by an
    endless carrier.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 61.


CLS 15/61
TXT Machines having an endless carrier for presenting the bottles to the
    cleaning instrument and a tank in which the bottles are immersed or through
    which they are passed before, during, or after the brushing operation.


CLS 15/62
TXT Machines in which plural bottles carried in a crate or rack are
    reciprocated over the cleaning instruments.


CLS 15/63
TXT Machines in which the bottles are presented to the cleaning brushes by
    means of a rotary carrier.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 64.


CLS 15/64
TXT Machines in which the bottles are presented to the cleaning brushes by a
    rotary carrier and are submerged in a cleaning fluid while being brushed.


CLS 15/65
TXT Machines which are constructed to handle bottles one at a time.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 66, 67, 68, and 69.


CLS 15/66
TXT Machines constructed to handle bottles one at a time and having a guide to
    insure registry of the bottle-mouth with the brush.


CLS 15/67
TXT Machines constructed to handle bottles one at a time and especially adapted
    for cleaning the outside of the bottle-neck.


CLS 15/68
TXT Machines constructed to handle bottles one at a time and in which the brush
    reciprocates within the bottle.


CLS 15/69
TXT Machines constructed to handle bottles one at a time in which the brush is
    driven by a water-motor.


CLS 15/70
TXT Machines especially adapted for cleaning receptacles of the can type by
    cleaning instruments of the brush or broom type only.


CLS 15/71
TXT Machines including means especially adapted for cleaning the inside of
    receptacles of the can type by cleaning instruments of the brush or broom
    type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164,    180, 211, 501, and 511.


CLS 15/72
TXT Machines especially adapted for cleaning the inside of receptacles of the
    can type by cleaning instruments of the brush or broom type, which are
    collapsible to permit entrance to the can and withdrawal therefrom and with
    or without an outside brush.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165     and 212.


CLS 15/73
TXT Machines especially adapted for cleaning receptacles of the cuspidor type
    by cleaning instruments of the brush or broom type only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101.


CLS 15/74
TXT Machines especially adapted for cleaning receptacles for cooking or serving
    food by means of cleaning instruments of the brush or broom type only.


CLS 15/75
TXT Machines especially adapted for cleaning drinking glasses by instruments of
    the brush or broom type only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76      and 101.


CLS 15/76
TXT Machines especially adapted for cleaning drinking-glasses by instruments of
    the brush or broom type only and in which the glass is immersed in a
    cleaning liquid while being brushed.


CLS 15/77
TXT Machines especially adapted for cleaning articles or material in sheet,
    bar, or plate form by instruments of the brush or broom type only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 315+ and 324 for machines for brushing tobacco
    leaves.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 103+ for a scouring device, generally.


CLS 15/78
TXT Machines especially adapted for cleaning streets by instruments of brush or
    broom type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40+,    49+ and 54+, for other surface brushing machines, and particularly
    subclasses 50+ for road marking machinery.


CLS 15/79.1
TXT Hand directed:

    Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein the machine is a manually
    manipulated ambulatory machine of brush or broom type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 400.02 and 400.03 for a rake which is
    manipulated by hand and which is employed in the manner of a rotary sweeper.


CLS 15/79.2
TXT Motor powered sweeper:
    Subject matter under subclass 79.1 having energy converting means (e.g., an
    internal combustion engine) to drive the brush.


CLS 15/80
TXT Machines especially adapted for cleaning streets by means of a brush or
    broom in the form of an endless belt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     51 and 54.


CLS 15/81
TXT Machines especially adapted for cleaning streets by means of a
    reciprocating brush or broom.


CLS 15/82
TXT Machines especially adapted for cleaning streets by means of a rotary brush
    or broom in the form of a cylinder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     41, 42, 46, 49, 50, 55, and 83-86.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 400.02 and 400.03 for rotary hand rakes.


CLS 15/83
TXT Machines especially adapted for cleaning streets by means of a rotary brush
    or broom in the form of a cylinder and having a collector for the sweepings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     85 and 86.


CLS 15/84
TXT Machines especially adapted for cleaning streets by means of a rotary
    cylindrical brush or broom having a collector for the sweepings and an
    elevator-belt for delivering them thereto.


CLS 15/85
TXT Machines especially adapted for cleaning streets by means of a rotary
    cylindrical brush or broom having a collector for the sweepings and an
    elevator pan, shovel, or scoop for delivering them thereto.


CLS 15/86
TXT Machines especially adapted for cleaning streets by means of a rotary
    cylindrical brush or broom having a collector for the sweepings and an
    elevating-wheel for delivering them thereto.


CLS 15/87
TXT Machines especially adapted for cleaning streets by means of a rotary brush
    of disk form.


CLS 15/88
TXT Machines having cleaning instruments of the brush or broom type only and
    especially adapted for cleaning wire, rods, or tubes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104.03  through 104.2.


CLS 15/88.1
TXT Work moves past nonrotatable brush:

    Subject matter under subclass 21.1 wherein the brush is of the type which
    does not revolve about an axis passing through it, and wherein the work is
    moved into work engagement with the brush.


CLS 15/88.2
TXT Work moves past rotatable brush:

    Subject matter under subclass 21.1 wherein work moves relative to a
    rotatable but spatially immovable brush during brushing.


CLS 15/88.3
TXT Cylindrical brush:

    Subject matter under subclass 88.2 wherein the working surface of the brush
    coincides with a surface of revolution generated by the rotation of a
    straight line about an axis parallel thereto.

    (1)     Note.  The "working surface" of the brush is an imaginary
    brush-enveloping smooth surface defined by and encompassing all of the
    work-engaging end-points of the bristles of the brush.


CLS 15/88.4
TXT Cylindrical brush moves past work:
    Subject matter under subclass 21.1 wherein the working surface of the brush
    coincides with a surface of revolution generated by the rotation of a
    straight line about an axis parallel thereto, and wherein means are
    provided to move or to permit movement of the brush relative to its
    supporting structure and into engagement with the work during brushing.

    (1)     Note.  The "working surface" of the brush is an imaginary
    brush-enveloping smooth surface defined by and encompassing all of the
    work-engaging end-points of the bristles of the brush.


CLS 15/89
TXT Cleaning-machines in which the cleaning is done by beating only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      6, 12, 13, 90, 91, and 92.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 81.01+ for processes and apparatus for
    removing scale from metal sheets and bars by scraping, flexing, treating
    with water or steam, or by impacting with percussive tools, e.g., scaling
    hammers.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 326+ for an abrading machine including means
    for tumbling to abrade a workpiece.


CLS 15/90
TXT Cleaning-machines in which the cleaning is done by beating only by means of
    a rotary drum in which the work is placed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 326+ for an abrading machine including means
    for tumbling to abrade a workpiece.


CLS 15/91
TXT Cleaning-machines in which the cleaning is done by beating only and in
    which the work is stationary during the beating, except those in subclass
    92.


CLS 15/92
TXT Cleaning-machines which clean by beating only and which may be manually
    moved about and applied to stationary work at any point desired.


CLS 15/93.1
TXT Scraping:
    Subject matter under subclass 3 wherein the sole type of cleaning
    instrument of the machine is a scraper.

    (1)     Note.  See search note under subclass 236.01 of this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 81.01+ for a process or apparatus for
    removing scale from metal sheets and bars, scraping, flexing, treating with
    water or steam, or by impacting with percussive tools (e.g., scaling
    hammers).

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 103+ for apparatus for scouring by abrading.


CLS 15/93.2
TXT Coke oven cleaner:
    Subject matter under subclass 93.1 including means for scraping the
    interior or part of a heating chamber used for the preparation of coke from
    coal.


CLS 15/93.3
TXT Ditcher:
    Subject matter under subclass 93.1 comprising a wheeled vehicle with means
    for scraping the interior of an elongated channel beside the path of the
    vehicle.


CLS 15/93.4
TXT Pallet, board, panel, etc.:
    Subject matter under subclass 93.1 comprising means for scrapping a surface
    of an object having a length and width much greater than its thicknesses.


CLS 15/94
TXT Cleaning-machines in which the cleaning function is obtained by shaking or
    violent agitation.


CLS 15/95
TXT Machines in which the cleaning of hollow ware, as bottles, is accomplished
    by the violent agitation within the bottle of shot, sand, or equivalent
    granular material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 90.7 for shot blasting metal and nonmetal
    for the purpose of compacting the surface thereof.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 54 for an earth boring
    device comprising recirculating unsupported elements (e.g., shot) to
    disintegrate the material of the earth.


CLS 15/96
TXT Machines in which the cleaning of hollow ware, as bottles, is accomplished
    by the violent agitation within the bottle of shot, sand, or equivalent
    granular material, produced by shaking the bottle.


CLS 15/97.1
TXT Wiping:
    Subject matter under subclass 3 wherein the cleaning instrument is a wiper
    as distinguished from a brush, broom, or scraper.


CLS 15/97.2
TXT Shoe polisher:
    Subject matter under subclass 97.1 comprising means to wipe a covering for
    the human foot.


CLS 15/97.3
TXT Vehicle cleaner:
    Subject matter under subclass 97.1 comprising means to wipe a wheeled
    conveyance.


CLS 15/98
TXT Cleaning-machines in which the cleaning instrument is a wiper, as
    distinguished from a brush, broom, or scraper, and which are especially
    adapted for cleaning floors, walls, or ceilings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99.


CLS 15/99
TXT Cleaning-machines in which the cleaning instrument is an endless-belt wiper
    as distinguished from a brush, broom, or scraper, and which are especially
    adapted for the cleaning of floors, walls, or ceilings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     50, 51, and 80.


CLS 15/100
TXT Cleaning-machines in which the cleaning instrument is a wiper as
    distinguished from a brush, broom, or scraper, and which are especially
    adapted for cleaning photographic films.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 130 for motion picture cameras
    and projectors combined with film treating or working structure including
    cleaning apparatus.


CLS 15/101
TXT Cleaning-machines in which the cleaning instrument is a wiper as
    distinguished from a brush, broom, or scraper and which are especially
    adapted for cleaning receptacles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56+.


CLS 15/102
TXT Cleaning-machines in which the cleaning instrument is a wiper as
    distinguished from a brush, broom, or scraper and which are especially
    adapted for cleaning articles or materials in sheet, bar or plate form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77.


CLS 15/103
TXT Cleaning-machines in which the cleaning instrument is a wiper as
    distinguished from a brush, broom, or scraper and which are especially
    adapted for cleaning the glass of windows.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220.1+, for a wiper used as a window cleaning implement.

    232,    for a window cleaning wiper or polisher consisting of a flat sheet
    of fabric with means for holding the sheet flat.

    250.001+,for an attachable implement or machine used to clean a window or
    other optical implement.


CLS 15/103.5
TXT Machines under subclass 97 in which the wiping element is a roller or belt
    for contacting a surface and means are provided for supplying a material
    which is to be applied to the surface.

    (1)     Note.  Similar structural combinations may be found in any of the
    subclasses preceding this subclass and indented under subclass 97, since
    such subclasses are based upon the nature of the surface worked upon.
    Accordingly, search should be completed by reference to appropriate other
    subclasses in this group.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for handle mount type brushing combinations in which the contacting
    element is a rotary cylindrical brush.

    230,    for rotary applicators, per se.


CLS 15/104.001
TXT IMPLEMENTS:
    Miscellaneous simple and uncombined apparatus under the class definition
    intended to contact a work surface and apply a coating or cleaning material
    thereto or intended for general cleaning by removal of extraneous foreign
    material and not strictly classifiable in any industrial art.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.51,   for an implement employing an electrostatic cleaning means.

    300+,   for a hand held nozzle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 220 for an implement
    with a scrubbing surface intended to treat textiles with a fluid.

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 232 and 243+ for an implement intended for
    cleaning a smoking device.


CLS 15/104.002
TXT Adhesive lint remover:
    Apparatus under subclass 104.001 including a sticky work contacting surface
    intended to come in contact with and take away extraneous foreign material.


CLS 15/104.011
TXT Cylinder, piston or plug cleaner:
    Subject matter under subclass 104 which includes a device for removing
    carbonized deposits from a spark plug, piston or cylinder of a gas engine.

    (1)     Note.  An implement for cleaning a valve port, valve guide or a
    spark plug port is here.

    (2)     Note.  The term "device" includes a brush, scraper, cutter or an
    impacting implement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104.02, for reamers applied to this purpose.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    82,     Turning, subclass 4 for portable lathes which may also scrape
    deposits from the work.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 125+ for spark
    plugs having means to move an electrode as, for example, for the purpose of
    rubbing one electrode against another to clean the rubbing parts, and
    subclass 127 for spark plugs provided with structure for cleaning a part of
    the spark plug.


CLS 15/104.012
TXT Piston groove:
    Subject matter under subclass 104.011 which includes a piston ring slot
    cleaning device.

    (1)     Note.  A piston may be manipulated with respect to the slot
    cleaning device or the slot cleaning device may be moved with respect to
    the piston.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    82,     Turning, subclass 4 for a portable piston grooving lathe.


CLS 15/104.02
TXT Tools for cleaning the plates provided with openings in boiler headers or
    other apparatus; sometimes called "gaskets" cleaners.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 246 for implements for reaming the bowls of
    smoking devices.


CLS 15/104.03
TXT Mechanical or gaseous pressure device for hammering, cutting, scraping,
    loosening, and/or flushing deposits from a conduit, pipe or tube.

    (1)     Note.  Where such devices utilize a minutely divided solid or
    pulverulent material in the fluid stream they will be found in the
    appropriate subclasses of Class 451, Abrading, excepting inventions
    involving such scouring of open-ended tubular work for the disclosed
    purpose of cleaning, which are classified in Class 15, subclasses 3.5+.
    Relative to such subject matter, the line between Classes 15 and 451 is set
    out in section IX of the class definition of Class 451 and in the reference
    to Class 451 in the Search Class Note to subclass 3.5 of Class 15.

    (2)     Note.  Where the structure of an apparatus provided with tubes is
    modified to cooperate with a specific cleaner, the combination will be
    classified with the apparatus. See Class 122, Liquid Heaters and
    Vaporizers, subclasses 379+, and Class 165, Heat Exchange, subclass 95.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 255.01+, for an
    obstruction remover specialized for use on the drain pipe of a sink, bath,
    or closet.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 81.02+ for machines for cleaning single
    detached metal pipes or the outside of a pipe line.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 324 for combination of pipe and
    tube cleaners with water gage glasses.

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 232 and 243-246.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 166+ for hollow
    work cleaners there provided for.

    294,    Handling: Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 86.4+ for
    grapples of general application.


CLS 15/104.04
TXT Devices for cleaning the outside of pipes or tubes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for machines for brushing pipe exteriors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 81.02+.


CLS 15/104.05
TXT Devices for cleaning the inside of the conduit, pipe, or tube.

    (1)     Note.  See classes 29, Metal Working, subclass 81 and 122, Liquid
    Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 379.

    (2)     Note.  This group of subclasses will take devices for removing
    material in hardened form from tubes, pipes and tubular chambers, where the
    device is not a built-in arrangement, and where the implement is a brush or
    wiper, and as to scrapers and cutters, this class will take all those in
    which the tool has a rotary and/or reciprocating motion together with
    motion along or parallel to the axis of the chamber being cleaned.Class
    214, Material or Article Handling, has related devices using implements of
    types not provided for in this class (15) and has scraper or cutter
    implements not having the motions provided for above, including endless
    belt type cutting or scraping implements. Class 214 further takes the
    scraper or cutter devices provided for in this group of subclasses when
    such devices are combined with a conveyor in addition to the scraper or
    cutter, but scrapers or cutters which have an incidental conveying function
    (e.g., reamers) will be found in this class (15). Class 214 further
    provides for devices designed for charging in addition to discharging
    material from chambers.Where the device for removing hardened material from
    the chamber is claimed as associated permanently with it so as not to be
    adapted for use on other chambers, the device has been classified on the
    basis of the character of the chamber.For devices and processes of this
    type, see, for example, 122, Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 379;
    196, Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 122; 202, Distillation:  Apparatus,
    subclass 241; 208, Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclass 48; and
    165, Heat Exchange, subclass 95.

    (3)     Note.  For apparatus for cleaning smoking devices by use of a
    current of air or other gaseous fluid, see Class 131, Tobacco, subclass 244.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclasses 170+ for cleaners used inside wells.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 92+ for a tool drive
    motor for driving an earth boring tool which motor advances with the tool
    into the hole being formed.


CLS 15/104.061
TXT Fluid current operated:
    Subject matter under subclass 104.05 which includes a cleaning device
    propelled through the pipe or tube by a moving fluid in contact with the
    tube or pipe and the cleaning device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 15 for a process of cleaning a fluid
    handling system and subclasses 238+ for a fluid handling system or
    subsystem with a cleaner, particularly subclasses 242+ for a mechanical
    cleaner.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 107 for a fluid operated
    rotary motor for driving an earth boring tool which motor advances with the
    tool into the hole being formed.


CLS 15/104.062
TXT Cleaner plug insertion or removal device:
    Subject matter under subclass 104.061 which includes apparatus to remove or
    insert a cleaning device from or into a pipeline.


CLS 15/104.063
TXT Scraper with signalling device:
    Subject matter under subclass 1046.061 wherein the cleaning device is a
    scraper and includes an apparatus to indicate some condition relating to
    the scraper or the fluid in the pipeline.

    (1)     Note.  The position of the scraper or the pressure of the fluid in
    the pipe are conditions sensed by the signalling device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 303 for a radiation tracer method for
    locating an obstruction in a fluid carrying pipeline by use of a
    radioactive tracer.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 686 for an electrical
    condition responsive position indicating system combined with a fluid
    propelled pipe scraper.


CLS 15/104.066
TXT Brush or broom flue cleaner:

    Subject matter under subclass 104.05 wherein the cleaning implement
    comprises a brush or broom-type member which is configured to clean the
    inside surface of a passage or duct that carries smoke (e.g., chimney,
    stovepipe, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  A brush or broom has separate, natural or artificial
    elements (e.g., bristles, splints, fibers, broom straws, grass, other
    stems, etc.) which are arranged in, generally, parallel relation so that
    their assembled ends constitute collectively a working surface intended for
    cleaning by brushing or scrubbing. This does not include sheets, blocks, or
    strands of fabric; layers of felted, spun, woven, pulped, or molded fabric;
    or pelts, scrapers, or a sponge; per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249.1,  for a brush or broom implement that cleans and is intended to be
    left attached (i.e., at work and at rest) to a flue.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 16 for a cooking or heating stove
    having a flue cleaner.


CLS 15/104.067
TXT Suspended by a taut member (e.g., wire, rope, chain, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 104.066 wherein the broom or brush implement
    is intended to be hung within the flue by a member that is capable of
    exerting only tensile force on the implement and is intended to be
    manipulated to move the flue cleaner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104.066,        for a brush or broom suspended by a member capable of
    exerting tensile and compressive forces.


CLS 15/104.068
TXT Scraper flue cleaner:

    Subject matter under subclass 104.05 wherein the implement is configured to
    remove foreign matter by the action of a hard blade-like or scraping edge,
    and is intended for use on a passage or duct that carries smoke (e.g.,
    chimney, stovepipe, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249.2+, for a scraper implement that cleans and is intended to be left
    attached (i.e., at work and at rest) to a flue.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 16 for a cooking or heating stove
    having a flue cleaner.


CLS 15/104.069
TXT Suspended by a taut member (e.g., wire, rope, chain, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 104.068 wherein the scraper implement is
    intended to be hung within the flue by a member that is capable of exerting
    only tensile force on the implement and is intended to be manipulated to
    move the flue cleaner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104.068,        for a scraper implement suspended by a member capable of
    exerting tensile and compressive forces.

    249.3,  for a scraper implement suspended by a taut member (e.g., wire,
    rope, etc.) that cleans and is intended to be left attached (i.e., at work
    and at rest) to a flue.


CLS 15/104.07
TXT The cleaner acts by impact or a series of blows on the material to be
    dislodged.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 81.01+ for machines for removing scale
    from metal bars and plates by impacting.

    81,     Tools, subclasses 463+ and see the notes thereto for other impact
    tools.


CLS 15/104.08
TXT The implement changes the configuration of a resilient tube at the point
    applied for the time being.


CLS 15/104.09
TXT The tool itself is adapted to be rotated in the tube while cleaning it and
    must be rotated to function properly.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 29, Metal Working, subclasses 81.01+.


CLS 15/104.095
TXT Power source outside tube end:
    Apparatus under subclass 104.09 wherein the means for rotating the cleaner
    in the tube is located externally of the end of the tube.


CLS 15/104.096
TXT Container cleaner:
    Apparatus under subclass 104.095 wherein the rotary tool is configured for
    and intended to be used in cleaning a receptacle.


CLS 15/104.11
TXT Means for cleaning the inside of boiler tubes connected to a drum in which
    the operating mechanism when in operation is located inside the drum.


CLS 15/104.12
TXT The tool is rotated by a fluid-operated motor in close juxtaposition to the
    tool, and both are caused to move along inside the tube.

    (1)     Note.  For structure of the motor see Class 415, Rotary Kinetic
    Fluid Motors or Pumps, appropriate subclasses and especially subclass 503
    which comprises an art collection of tool drive turbines, and appropriate
    subclasses in Class 91, Motors: Expansible Chamber Type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104.06  and 104.07, for similar arrangement of tool and motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 107 for a fluid operated
    rotary motor for driving an earth boring tool which motor advances with the
    tool into the hole being formed.

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, subclass 904 for a
    cross-reference collection of turbines disclosed for driving a tool.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclasses for
    rotary expansible chamber motors, per se.


CLS 15/104.13
TXT The rotary tool is provided with a plurality of cutters journaled to rotate
    in bearings in the tool itself.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 104.15.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104.11.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 331+ for an earth
    boring tool comprising a plurality of rolling cutter elements.


CLS 15/104.14
TXT One or more cleaning members are pivoted to the body of the tool so that
    upon rotation of the tool the members fly outward.


CLS 15/104.15
TXT The body of the tool which moves longitudinally of the tube is provided
    with a plurality of cutters adapted to rotate in contact with the walls of
    the tube to cut deposits therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 104.13.


CLS 15/104.16
TXT The tool moves longitudinally of the tube and cuts, scrapes, disintegrates,
    wipes, or brushes deposits from the pipe walls.


CLS 15/104.165
TXT Devices under subclass 104.16 which are adapted to hold a fabric wiper
    without piercing the same.

    (1)     Note.  The fabric may be wrapped about the end of the holder or may
    pass through a slot near or at the end of the holder.

    (2)     Note.  Complete the search in this class, subclass 211.


CLS 15/104.17
TXT A reciprocatory scraper having a body provided with scraping members at
    each end of the tool body capable of being extended in outward directions
    to accommodate different-sized tubes.


CLS 15/104.18
TXT Same as preceding subclass 104.17 but having scrapers at one end only of
    the tool body.


CLS 15/104.19
TXT The variation of size takes place intermediate the ends of the tool body.


CLS 15/104.2
TXT The body of the tool is provided with bristles of metal or other hard
    material extending radially outward.


CLS 15/104.31
TXT Sewer:
    Subject matter under subclass 104.05 which includes a cleaning tool or an
    implement for cleaning a sewer.

    (1)     Note.  The term "implement" is defined in the main class
    definitions.

    (2)     Note.  The term "sewer" includes an underground conduit, a culvert,
    a sanitary drain pipe or a sink or toilet drain.

    (3)     Note.  The term "cleaning tool" refers to an instrument for freeing
    foreign material within or from the pipe interior.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104.2,  for reciprocating pipe or tube interior cleaner having rotating
    radial bristles.

    104.09+, for a pipe or tube interior cleaner having a rotary and
    reciprocating tool.

    105.15, for a reciprocating pipe or tube interior cleaner having plural
    rotary cutters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 242+ for a fluid system with a Class 15
    mechanical cleaning means.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes Thermolytic, subclass 2 for a method of
    cleaning or decarbonizing a distilling system.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 241 for means for cleaning and
    decarbonizing pipes of a distilling system.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 407+ for filters with
    residue removing means; and subclasses 523+ for gravitational separators
    with mechanical constituent movers.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 1+ for
    methods and appropriate subclasses, particularly subclass 188, for feeding
    material without utilizing the leading or trailing ends to effect movement
    of the material.

    294,    Handling: Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 86+ for
    grapples of general application.


CLS 15/104.32
TXT Grapple:
    Subject matter under subclass 104.31 wherein the implement includes a cable
    having a cleaning device to seize foreign material within a sewer.


CLS 15/104.33
TXT Snake:
    Subject matter under subclass 104.31 which includes a cable with a cleaning
    tool designed for insertion within a sewer to rid the sewer of foreign
    material.


CLS 15/104.5
TXT Devices under subclass 104 for cleaning combs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for brushing type machines for cleaning combs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 628+ for a self-cleaning currycomb.

    132,    Toilet, subclass 119 for comb attached comb cleaners.


CLS 15/104.51
TXT Devices under subclass 104.5 including frames, stretchers, supports, etc.,
    which carry a number of threads or strands fastened at each end of the
    strand, along which the comb is drawn in the act of cleaning.


CLS 15/104.52
TXT Devices under subclass 104.51 in which the supports at each end are
    integrally connected to form a rigid frame.


CLS 15/104.53
TXT Devices under subclass 104.52 having a brush.


CLS 15/104.54
TXT Devices under subclass 104.52 having at least two separate groups of
    strands lying in different planes.


CLS 15/104.8
TXT Device under subclass 104 and a receiver for material handled by the
    implement, which coact concurrently for the cleaning operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41+,    for carpet sweepers.


CLS 15/104.9
TXT Implement under subclass 104 disclosed as being attachable to a driven
    mechanism of a machine, which machine, or which implement, includes means
    for supplying cleaning liquid to the work so that the implement is adapted
    to clean the inner surfaces of bottles, tumblers, or the like.

    (1)     Note.  The means for supplying cleaning liquid may be a
    self-contained reservoir-and-feed system or a conduit which is couplable to
    an external source of supply (e.g., faucet).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59+     and 71+, for a machine including a brush for cleaning the inside of
    a bottle or a can-like receptacle, respectively.

    164+    and 211+, for an implement for cleaning hollow-ware; particularly,
    subclass 213 for such an implement which is rotary and is expansible after
    entry into the neck of a bottle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, appropriate subclasses for
    a hand-manipulable coating implement which has a material supply.


CLS 15/104.92
TXT Device under subclass 104 including a tool and supporting structure
    therefor, which device is stationary so as to require transportation of the
    workpiece into contact therewith for a cleaning operation, and wherein: (1)
    the supporting structure is a receptacle for cleaning material, or (2) the
    tool is supplied (e.g., impregnated) with cleaning material.

    (1)     Note.  A patent disclosing nothing more than a mere pad which is
    impregnated with cleaning material and which is, therefore, inherently
    capable of manual manipulation will be placed in subclass 104.93. However,
    a patent which discloses the combination of stationary supporting structure
    and an impregnated pad will be placed in this subclass even when the
    claim(s) are limited to the pad itself.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104.93, for a manually manipulated implement having a work-contacting
    surface which is coated or impregnated with cleaning material; and see (1)
    Note, above.

    423,    for a pen wiper which has no cleaning material supply (except that
    it may be adapted to be coated or impregnated therewith).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 264+ for a stationary coating device
    used for a purpose other than cleaning, which device includes an applicator
    which either is impregnated with coating material or receives the material
    from a supply container for application to a work surface.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, appropriate subclasses;
    particularly subclasses 196+ for a handmanipulable implement having a
    porous tool through which the material flows; 261+ for an implement wherein
    the tool is bladelike or padlike; and 268+ wherein the tool is composed of
    filamentary elements (e.g., brush).


CLS 15/104.93
TXT Implement under subclass 104 which is hand-manipulable for contact with a
    work surface for a coating or cleaning operation and which has a work
    contacting surface portion charged with material.

    (1)     Note.  A patent disclosing nothing more than a mere pad which is
    impregnated with cleaning material and disclosed as being a stationary
    device while in use, but which is inherently capable of manual
    manipulation, will be placed in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  For placement in this subclass, the combination of the tool
    and the charge of material must be claimed. An implement including a tool
    which is merely adapted to be coated or impregnated with cleaning material
    will be placed in the appropriate subclass below; e.g., subclass 423 for a
    pen wiper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104.92, for a static cleaning device having a support for a tool and having
    material supply, to which device the work is brought for the cleaning
    operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 264+ for stationary coating apparatus
    which includes a porous applicator.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 196+ for a
    manually manipulated coating device including a porous tool through which
    material flows for application to a work surface, indented subclass 201
    being the locus of a mere porous pad-like applicator which has a pocket to
    receive a piece of solid coating material  which becomes fluidized and
    permeates the interstices of the applicator when dipped into a liquid prior
    to the coating operation.


CLS 15/104.94
TXT Implement under subclass 104.93 including means engageable by, or adapted
    to receive, the hand of the user for the purpose of handling the implement.

    (1)     Note.  The implement may be in the form of a mitt or finger cot for
    handling purposes or it may include a handle or impervious, manually
    manipulable support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227,    for a finger cot or mitt used for cleaning.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 37+ for an
    implement which includes a tool impregnated with coating material and
    another tool which is used to spread the material applied to a work surface
    by the impregnated tool.


CLS 15/105
TXT Implements having in one structure plural complete and generally
    independently-usable tools or instruments, at least one of which is of a
    type recognized by title in this classification.

    (1)     Note.  The usual distinction between devices in this subclass and
    those in Class 132, Toilet, subclass 79, is that in the latter one or more
    implements can only be brought into use by complete or partial removal from
    the main structure, while in the former no change of relation is necessary.

    (2)     Note.  See this class, subclass 216.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.5,    for implements employing plural and independently usable tools or
    elements at least one of which employs an electrostatic field to remove
    foreign matter from the surface of the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 79+ for a toilet kit having a brush or an
    applicator and an additional part or device particularly useful for a
    toilet function (e.g., comb, mirror).

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 49+ for a
    cosmetic applicator including a lipstick or the like; and subclasses 118+,
    for a cosmetic kit including cosmetic material and an applicator therefor,
    but not including such an additional device (e.g., mirror, comb) as would
    make the kit special for Class 132, Toilet.


CLS 15/105.5
TXT Implements under subclass 105 in which one of the independently usable
    tools or instruments is particularly adapted to finish a mortar joint
    between adjacent building blocks or slabs.


CLS 15/105.51
TXT Implement under subclass 105 in which one of the independently-usable tools
    or instruments is an eraser as defined in subclass 424, below.

    (1)     Note.  The combination of an eraser with a pencil or means for
    attachment to a pencil will be placed in subclasses 427+, rather than in
    this subclass.  The patent must, however, claim the pencil or the
    attachment means in no greater detail than is necessary to define the
    relationship with the eraser; see (1) Note in subclass 427 for the
    statement of the line between this class and Class 401, Coating Implements
    With Material Supply, with respect to eraser-and-pencil combinations.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is the locus for patents to the combination of
    a nonmutilating eraser and a burnisher used to restore a surface, upon
    which an erasure has been made, to an acceptably smooth condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, subclass 124 for a burnisher combined with a
    mutilating eraser (e.g., scraper blade, rasp, abradant).

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 358 for an eraser
    combined with means to display a card, picture, or sign.


CLS 15/105.52
TXT Implement under subclass 105.51 in which another of the
    independently-usable tools or instruments is of the type which includes a
    plurality of work-contacting filamentary elements.


CLS 15/105.53
TXT Implement under subclass 105.51 in which another of the
    independently-usable tools or instruments is a solid member which is
    intended to be applied to a workpiece to penetrate it (e.g., a knife) or to
    remove portions thereof (e.g., file or abradant).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is the locus for patents to the combination of
    an eraser and pencil sharpener.


CLS 15/106
TXT Devices having in one structure plural complete and independently-usable
    instruments of the brush or broom type.

    (1)     Note.  Brushes having combined therewith means for applying to the
    body any one or combination of light or analogous rays, electricity, or
    thermal treatments, which are limited by structure to therapeutic use, are
    in Class 607, Surgery: Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclass
    79.

    (2)     Note.  See this class, subclass 166 for striping brushes.


CLS 15/107
TXT Implements having in one structure plural complete and independently-usable
    instruments of the brush type, one being a dauber for the application of
    coating material and another a polisher.


CLS 15/110
TXT Plural instruments in one structure, usable independently or together, one
    being a brush and another a massage-tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    601,    Surgery:  Kinesitherapy, subclasses 136+.


CLS 15/111
TXT Devices having in one structure plural independently-usable instruments, of
    which one is a brush and another a scraper.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 112 and 113.


CLS 15/112
TXT Devices having in one structure a brush and also a scraper and especially
    adapted for cleaning boots and shoes.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 113 and 216.


CLS 15/113
TXT Devices having in one structure a brush and also a scraper especially
    adapted for cleaning boots or shoes and to be held and operated directly by
    the hand of the user.


CLS 15/114
TXT Plural complete and independently-usable instruments in one structure, at
    least one being a brush and another a wiper.  In this, as in other titles
    and definitions in this class, the term "wiper" is restricted in meaning to
    porous or absorbent devices and excludes scrapers and squeegees.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 115, 116 and 216.


CLS 15/115
TXT Plural complete and independently-usable instruments in one structure, at
    least one of them being a brush and another a wiper of the mop type.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 116.


CLS 15/116.1
TXT Mop and wringer:

    Subject matter under subclass 114 wherein the wiper is a mop and the
    structure includes a wringer for the mop.

    (1)     Note.  Many older patents were placed here on the basis of the
    disclosure rather than the claims.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119.1+, for a combined mop and wringer.

    229.2+, for a strand type mop with a fixed handle.

    229.6+, for a strand type mop with a pivoted handle.

    260+,   for a mop wringer, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 241+ for wringer,
    per se.


CLS 15/116.2
TXT Sponge mop:

    Subject matter under subclass 116.1 wherein the mop is made from nonfabric
    material capable of absorbing water many times its own weight.


CLS 15/117
TXT Plural complete and independently-usable instruments in one structure, at
    least one being a brush and another a squeegee.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    245,    for general utility squeegees.

    250.361+, for a cleaning element having a squeegee which is also part of an
    optical-member-attachabl cleaner (e.g., windshield wiper, etc.).


CLS 15/118
TXT Plural complete and independently-usable instruments in one structure, one
    being a wiper in the sense of the present classification--i.e., of porous
    or absorbent material--and another either such a wiper or an instrument of
    different type or a wringer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114+,   for a wiper combined with a brush.


CLS 15/119.1
TXT Mop and wringer:
    Apparatus under subclass 118 wherein the wiper is a mop in combination with
    a wringer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116.1+, for a brush combined with a mop and wringer.

    228+,   for a fabric mop.

    260+,   for a wringer, per se.


CLS 15/119.2
TXT Sponge mop:
    Apparatus under subclass 119.1 wherein the mop head includes an absorbent
    cellular mass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244.1,  for a sponge with a holder or a sponge, per se.


CLS 15/120.1
TXT Twister:
    Apparatus under subclass 119.1 wherein the wringer has means to twist the
    mop to squeeze out the moisture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263,    for a twister type wringer.


CLS 15/120.2
TXT Assisted by modified handle:
    Apparatus under subclass 120.1 wherein the handle includes means intended
    to aid in the twisting of the mop.


CLS 15/121
TXT Plural complete and independently-usable cleaning instruments in one
    structure, one being a wiper in the sense of the present
    classification--i.e., of porous or absorbent material, such as felt, cloth,
    yarn or sponge and another a squeegee.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    245,    for general utility squeegees.

    250.361+, for a cleaning element having a  squeegee which is also part of
    an optical-member-attachable cleaner (e.g., windshield wiper, etc.).

    531+,   for implements having diverse work contacting means, one of which
    is a squeegee, and a material supply.


CLS 15/141.1
TXT Beater:

    Subject matter under 104 which includes a device for striking generally
    flexible material for dislodging dust or other foreign material from the
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89+,    for a machine to beat flexible material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclass 79
    for Kinestherapy percussing vibrators.


CLS 15/141.2
TXT Rotary:

    Subject matter under subclass 141.1 wherein the device moves about an axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    383+,   for an airblast or suction machine with a rotary agitator.


CLS 15/142
TXT Devices having gratings, or teeth like those of combs, especially adapted
    for removal of foreign matter from material having strands or fibers, such
    as fringes or brushes, and generally by application of the work to the
    implement, by entering between and passing along the sides of the strands
    or fibers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 219+ for combs designed to be used by inserting
    the teeth into the hair of a person.


CLS 15/143.1
TXT Particular handle:
    Apparatus under subclass 104.001 including means to be gripped by the users
    hand and wherein significance is attributed to the handle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120.2,  for a mop in combination with a twister, wherein the mop handle is
    modified to assist in twisting the mop to remove moisture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 110+ for miscellaneous handles.

    30,     Cutlery, various subclasses for a handle for a scraper or other
    cutlery.

    81,     Tools, subclasses 489+ for a general tool handle not disclosed for
    any particular tool.


CLS 15/144.1
TXT Adjustable:
    Apparatus under subclass 143.1 wherein the handle includes means which
    permit it to be changed either in length or in orientation to the implement
    head.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172,    for a broom or brush head that is adjustable with respect to the
    handle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for a connection
    between a handle and an implement.


CLS 15/144.2
TXT Universally:
    Apparatus under subclass 144.1 wherein the connection between the apparatus
    and the handle permits angular adjustment in more than one plane.


CLS 15/144.3
TXT Variable length:
    Apparatus under subclass 144.1 wherein the handle is adjustable to more
    than one length.


CLS 15/144.4
TXT Telescopic:
    Apparatus under subclass 144.3 wherein the handle length is adjusted
    through the sliding of one section into another.


CLS 15/145
TXT Detachable handles especially adapted for use with implements of types
    recognized in the subtitles of the present classification.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146     through 154, 176.1+ and 189.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for a connection
    between an implement and a handle wherein only so much structure of the
    implement and handle is included as is necessary to cooperate to effect the
    joint.


CLS 15/146
TXT Devices for removably holding brush or broom backs or heads in such manner
    as to facilitate application of the implement to the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143     through 145.


CLS 15/147.1
TXT Holder, mop:
    Apparatus under subclass 104.001 including structure to removably hold a
    mop intended to facilitate its use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146,    for a holder, for a brush or broom back or head.

    228+,   for a mop or mop head.

    244+,   for a sponge with holder.


CLS 15/147.2
TXT Nonclamped:
    Apparatus under subclass 147.1 wherein the means used to secure the mop to
    the holder is not a clamp.


CLS 15/148
TXT Mop-holders so convertible as to enable them to hold another cleaning
    implement, generally a brush, in addition to or in substitution for the mop.


CLS 15/149
TXT Mop-holders having expansible arms to bring the mop into contact with the
    inner walls of hollow ware, such as bottles, jars, lamp-chimneys, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    165, 168, 212, and 213.


CLS 15/150
TXT Mop-holders in which the holding means is a pivoted clamping jaw.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    178,    228 and 229.


CLS 15/151
TXT Mop-holders with sliding mop-holding jaw, except those having a lever or
    screw for operating said jaw.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 152 and 153.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173.


CLS 15/152
TXT Mop-holders having a sliding, lever- operated mop-holding jaw.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    116, 118, 119.1+, 148, 173, 177, 228, and 229.


CLS 15/153
TXT Mop-holders having a sliding, screw- operated mop-holding jaw.

    (1)     Note.  See the search Note to subclass 152 of this class.


CLS 15/154
TXT Mop-holders having spring gripping-arms whose free ends are brought
    together into clamping position and released therefrom by a ring
    surrounding and running on the arms.


CLS 15/154.2
TXT With shaker:
    Apparatus under subclass 147.1 wherein the holder includes structure
    intended to aid in shaking the mop head.


CLS 15/159.1
TXT Brush or broom:
    Apparatus under subclass 104.001 including separate, natural, or artificial
    elements, such as bristles, splints, fibers, broomstraws, grass, or other
    stems (in distinction from sheets, blocks, strands or layers of felted,
    spun, woven, pulped, or molded fabric, pelts scrapers or sponge, per se)
    which are arranged in, generally, parallel relation so that their assembled
    ends constitute collectively a working surface intended for cleaning or
    polishing by brushing or scrubbing or for applying paint, powder or other
    coating, coloring, or cleaning material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4+,     for a cleaning machine having a brush in combination with another
    cleaning instrument.

    21+,    for a cleaning machine with a brush as the only cleaning instrument.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 400.17+ for a broom type rake intended for
    use in a harvesting operation.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 385+ for
    a brush used in clearing a passage in a sifter.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclass 24 for a brush or broom with material supply combined
    with a diverse coating tool; subclass 39 for plural brushes or brooms with
    material supply to at least one, but not all, of the implements; and
    subclasses 268+ for a brush or broom with material supply.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Applications, subclass 79
    for a brush combined with means to apply an application of light, thermal
    or electrical energy to the human body.


CLS 15/160
TXT Implements of the brush or broom type especially fitted by shape, bristle
    arrangement, or otherwise for use on particular classes of articles or
    work, other than those indicated by subtitles 161-167, and 211, of this
    class.

    (1)     Note.  Heated brushes are in this subclass (160).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104.066+, for a brush or broom implement configured to clean a flue.

    249.1,  for a brush or broom implement that cleans and is intended to be
    left attached (i.e., at work and at rest) to a flue.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    132,    Toilet, subclass 118 for combs combined with a heater, and
    subclasses 308 and 313 for a toilet kit including a brush.


CLS 15/161
TXT Cleaning implements of the brush or broom type especially adapted for
    cleaning used boots or shoes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    216, and 217.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclass 39 for a device
    including a brush for cleaning shoes combined with an applying brush and
    material supply (polish) therefor.


CLS 15/164
TXT Implements of the brush or broom type especially adapted for the cleaning
    of hollow ware.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     180, 211, and 502, for other hollow ware cleaners.


CLS 15/165
TXT Implements of the brush or broom type especially adapted for cleaning
    hollow ware and which are collapsible for entrance through the narrow mouth
    of such ware and expansible after entrance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72      and 212.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, particularly subclasses 4+ for an expansible roll,
    per se, not elsewhere classifiable and see the Notes thereto for other
    rolls and combinations involving rolls.


CLS 15/166
TXT Implements of the brush or broom type especially adapted for applying
    coloring or other matter in stripe form or for lettering goods with
    distinguishing marks or addresses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246+,   and especially subclass 248 for striping attachments.

    503,    for fluid pavement and floor markers.

    560,    for implements with material supply having a work surface or member
    engaging guide.


CLS 15/167.1
TXT Tooth or nail brush:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 which includes a brush for cleaning the
    teeth or nails.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132,    for a brush and a massage tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    132,    Toilet, subclass 84 for a toilet kit including a toothbrush and an
    additional part or device particularly useful for a toilet function (e.g.,
    comb, mirror).

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 118+ for a
    toilet kit consisting of a supply of toothpaste and a toothbrush separate
    from the supply; and subclasses 268+ for a toothbrush having a supply of
    toothpaste contained therein, (e.g., having a toothpaste reservoir in the
    handle and means to feed the toothpaste to the bristles).


CLS 15/167.2
TXT Concurrently brushes plural tooth surfaces:

    Subject matter under subclass 167.1 wherein the brush simultaneously
    brushes two or more surfaces of a tooth.

    (1)     Note.  The term "surface" includes the inner or outer portion or
    the biting part of a tooth.


CLS 15/167.3
TXT Nail brush:

    Subject matter under subclass 167.1 wherein the brush is for cleaning the
    nails.


CLS 15/168
TXT Devices embracing the bristles or fibers of implements of the brush or
    broom type in such manner as to prevent undue spreading, breaking, or wear
    thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248.1+, for an attachment to a brush or broom intended to catch a drip or
    otherwise act as a shield.


CLS 15/169
TXT Devices embracing the bristles or fibers of implements of the brush or
    broom type in such manner as to prevent undue spreading, breaking, or wear
    thereof and which are adjustable lengthwise of the implement as wear occurs
    to expose a fresh portion of the implement for use.


CLS 15/170
TXT Devices embracing the material constituting the working face of implements
    of the brush or broom type to prevent undue spreading, breaking, or wear
    thereof and which are supported or carried by said material.


CLS 15/171
TXT Miscellaneous brush or broom heads and casings therefor. These relate in
    general to means not otherwise provided for to connect the elements of the
    material forming the working face of the implement into a unitary structure
    and providing a handle therefor or adapting it to receive a handle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143.1+, for a particularly configured handle.


CLS 15/172
TXT Miscellaneous brush or broom heads and casings which are adjustable with
    reference to the handle or carrier, including double-ended brushes or
    brooms which are reversible or capable of being turned end for end to bring
    either end into use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144.1+, for an adjustable handle for a cleaning implement.


CLS 15/173
TXT Implements of the brush or broom type in which the material forming the
    head thereof is fastened together and to the handle by a clamp moving
    axially of the handle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151     through 153.


CLS 15/174
TXT Implements of the brush or broom type in which the material forming the
    head thereof is fastened together and to the handle by clamping-bands
    encircling the same.


CLS 15/175
TXT Implements of the brush or broom type having strengthening braces or caps
    at the shoulder or point of connection of the head with the handle, or
    shields to prevent injury to the head or surrounding objects in the use of
    the implement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171     and 174.


CLS 15/176.1
TXT Detachable head:

    Subject matter under subclass 171 in which the head is detachable from a
    handle or holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145,    for detachable handles, per se.


CLS 15/176.2
TXT With handle-head cooperating threads:

    Subject matter under subclass 176.1 wherein either the head or the handle
    has a threaded projection which cooperates with a threaded recess in the
    other to secure the one to the other by relative rotation.


CLS 15/176.3
TXT With screw-type fastener:

    Subject matter under subclass 176.1 wherein a separate threaded element is
    used to secure the head to the handle.

    (1)     Note.  The separate threaded element is rotatable relative to both
    the head and the handle.


CLS 15/176.4
TXT Perpendicularly insertable:

    Subject matter under subclass 176.1 wherein the head is removably inserted
    into the handle in a direction generally perpendicular to the longitudinal
    axis of the handle.


CLS 15/176.5
TXT With securing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 176.4 including a securing means to hold the
    head on the handle.


CLS 15/176.6
TXT With securing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 176.1 having a securing means to hold the
    head on the handle.


CLS 15/177
TXT Implements of the brush or broom type in which the material constituting
    the head of the implement is fastened together and to the handle by
    laterally-acting clamp-jaws.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 178.


CLS 15/178
TXT Implements of the brush or broom type in which the material constituting
    the head of the implement is fastened together and to the handle by
    laterally-acting clamping-jaws, at least one of which is pivoted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150.


CLS 15/179
TXT Implements of the brush or broom type having heads constructed for rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21+,    especially subclasses 23, 71-73, 198, and 501+ for other showings
    of rotary brushes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, subclasses 13+ for a working roller with a handle,
    and subclass 29 for a roller, not elsewhere provided for, being a pile or
    nap surface.


CLS 15/180
TXT Implements of the brush or broom type having heads constructed for rotation
    and whose working face is of flat or disk shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28      and 29.


CLS 15/181
TXT Implements of the brush or broom type having heads constructed for rotation
    and the material forming the head arranged in layers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, subclasses 40+ for a roll, per se, not elsewhere
    provided for, having axially stacked annular members, and subclasses 49+
    for a roll, per se, having a concentric layered annular structure.


CLS 15/182
TXT Implements of the brush or broom type having heads constructed for rotation
    and in which the material constituting the brushing or sweeping element is
    mounted in spiral arrangement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, subclass 43 for a roll, not elsewhere provided for,
    with a spiral member and subclass 44 for a roll with a helical member.


CLS 15/183
TXT Implements of the brush or broom type having heads constructed for rotation
    and in which axially-arranged plural series of tufts of material
    constituting the brushing or sweeping element are held in place by bars,
    one for each series.


CLS 15/184
TXT Implements of the brush or broom type having means for covering and
    protecting them when not in use.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 185.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 79+ for a toilet kit including a brush and an
    additional part or device particularly useful for a toilet function (e.g.,
    comb, mirror).

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 118+ for a
    toilet kit consisting of a brush and a separate supply of cosmetic or
    cleaning material contained therein; and subclass 269 for a brush having a
    coating supply and a removable cap for the bristles.


CLS 15/185
TXT Implements of the brush or broom type having pivoted thereto a cover or
    housing for protecting the implement when not in use.


CLS 15/186
TXT Implements of the brush or broom type in which each individual bristle or
    equivalent is separately and independently secured to a common backing.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 187 and 188.


CLS 15/187
TXT Implements of the brush or broom type in which each individual bristle or
    equivalent is separately and independently secured to and integral with a
    common backing.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 188.


CLS 15/188
TXT Implements of the brush or broom type in which separate and individual
    rubber bristles are integral with a rubber backing.


CLS 15/189
TXT Implements of the brush or broom type in which the material constituting
    the head of the implement is secured together by stitching and to the
    handle by winding the wire.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 207.


CLS 15/190
TXT Metal or other fasteners in the nature of nails, staples, clips, ferrules,
    wedges, or the like, especially adapted to form sockets for tufts or knots
    of brush or broom material or for securing the tufts or knots in sockets or
    holes prepared therefor in a backing.


CLS 15/191.1
TXT Tuft socket:
    Apparatus under subclass 159.1 wherein the brush, or broom has a backing
    and a tuft, knot or bunch of brush or broom material which is secured in a
    socket, recess or hole in the backing.


CLS 15/192
TXT Implements of the brush or broom type in which a tuft, knot, or bunch of
    brush or broom material is secured by cement in a socket, recess, or hole
    in a backing.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 193.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    72 for processes for setting or embedding tufts onto a backing.


CLS 15/193
TXT Implements of the brush or broom type in which a knot or bunch of brush or
    broom material is secured to a backing by a plastic mass of cement in which
    the tuft is socketed.


CLS 15/194
TXT Implements of the brush or broom type in which a tuft of brush or broom
    material is detachably secured in a socket in a backing.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 176 and 202.


CLS 15/195
TXT Implements of the brush or broom type in which a folded or doubled tuft of
    brush or broom material is secured in a socket in a backing.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 196-199.


CLS 15/196
TXT Implements of the brush or broom type in which a folded or doubled tuft is
    drawn into a hole or socket in a backing by a loop of cord or wire engaging
    the fold of the tuft and securing the same.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 300, Brush, Broom, and Mop Making, subclass 6.


CLS 15/197
TXT Implements in which a folded tuft, knot, or bunch of metal brush or broom
    material is secured in a socket in a backing, except those in which the
    implement is a rotary one, for which see this class, subclass 198.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 200.


CLS 15/198
TXT Implements in which a folded tuft, knot, or bunch of metal bristles is
    secured in a socket in a backing adapted for rotation in use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179     through 183.


CLS 15/199
TXT Implements in which a folded or doubled tuft of brush or broom material is
    secured in a socket of a backing by a retaining wire or rod passing through
    the fold or band of the tuft.


CLS 15/200
TXT Implements of the brush or broom type in which a nonfolded tuft, knot, or
    bunch of metal bristles is secured in a socket of a backing.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 197.


CLS 15/201
TXT Implements having tufts, knots, or bunches of brush or broom material
    secured in sockets in a backing or head, the head being made up of plural
    movable sections to permit easy cleaning of the implement or allow it to
    take the shape of the work.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 165, 202 and 203.


CLS 15/202
TXT Implements having a head composed of a backing and plural tuft-sections
    each carrying a series of tufts, knots, or bunches of brush or broom
    material secured in sockets, the sections being detachable from the backing
    and from one another to permit cleaning, renewal, or repair.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 176 and 194.


CLS 15/203
TXT Implements of the brush or broom type having a head composed of a backing
    and plural tuft-sections each carrying a series of tufts, knots, or bunches
    of brush or broom material secured in sockets, the sections being pivoted
    to the backing to permit folding when not in use.


CLS 15/204
TXT Implements having a nonfolded tuft, knot, or bunch of brush or broom
    material secured in a socket in a backing by means of an internal wedge or
    core.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 195.


CLS 15/205
TXT Implements having a folded or doubled tuft, knot, or bunch of brush or
    broom material secured in a socket in a backing by means of an internal
    core or wedge.


CLS 15/205.2
TXT Fountain:
    Apparatus under subclass 191.1 including structure to facilitate the flow
    of liquid to the tuft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 268+ for
    similar apparatus used to apply a coating to a work surface.


CLS 15/206
TXT Implements having a tuft, knot or bunch of brush or broom material secured
    between the loops, bends, or folds of twisted wires.


CLS 15/207
TXT Implements of the brush or broom type in which the material constituting
    the head of the implement is fastened to the handle by a winding of wire or
    cord only.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 189.


CLS 15/207.2
TXT Bristle configuration or composition:
    Apparatus under subclass 207 wherein significance is attributed to bristle
    arrangement, shape or material.


CLS 15/208
TXT Miscellaneous instruments for general cleaning or for applying a coating of
    fluid or powdered material, having a working face composed of some sort of
    simple or compound fabric.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 209 to 233.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a web, sheet, strand or fiber,
    not elsewhere provided for and especially subclass 85 for a web or sheet
    with a pile or nap-type surface and subclasses 175+, 190, 193, and 196+ for
    a web or sheet embodying mechanically interengaged strands or
    strand-portions (e.g., woven, knitted).

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 181+ and 304+ for a woven or knit fabric.


CLS 15/209.1
TXT Wiper, dauber, or polisher:
    Apparatus under subclass 208 intended to be used as a wiper, dauber, or
    polisher.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30+,    for a boot polishing machine including a brush.

    50+,    for a floor or wall scrubbing or coating machine including a brush
    and a wiper.

    97+,    for a cleaning machine including a wiper.

    118+,   for a wiper in combination with another independently usable tool
    or instrument.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, subclass
    294 for a bag or filled cloth stock material to be used in abrading.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 118+ for an
    applicator in combination with a supply container.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses
    411+, 414+, and 443+, especially subclasses 416, 443, and 449, for a
    nominal applicator impregnated with a composition.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 526+ for a flexible-member tool for cleaning
    by abrading.


CLS 15/210.1
TXT Special work:
    Apparatus under subclass 209.1 specifically configured by shape or
    otherwise to clean a particular work surface.


CLS 15/210.5
TXT Implements having a fabric working face which is especially adapted for
    imitating the grain of wood or the like in a pigment by a drawing or
    rolling action of the implement over the pigment.

    (1)     Note.  The term "fabric" includes all textile materials, rubber,
    plastic or the like material not provided for elsewhere (i.e., brush
    bristles).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236,    for scrapers which may be used for the same purpose.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 358+ for indenting implements.

    101,    Printing, appropriate subclasses for devices which apply a coating
    in a repetitive manner.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 102 for implements that remove a
    portion of the coating in a particular pattern.


CLS 15/211
TXT Implements having fabric working faces and especially adapted for use as
    wipers or polishers in cleaning hollow ware, such as lamp-chimneys,
    bottles, jars, and the like.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 164, 212 and 213.


CLS 15/212
TXT Implements having fabric working faces and especially adapted for use as
    wipers or polishers in cleaning hollow ware, such as lamp-chimneys,
    bottles, jars, and the like, and which are expansible to permit passing the
    neck of the ware and subsequent contact with the walls thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    165, 213, and 230.


CLS 15/213
TXT Implements having fabric working faces and especially adapted for use as
    wipers or polishers in cleaning hollow ware and which are expansible to
    permit passing the neck of the ware and subsequent contact with the walls
    thereof and are also rotary in character.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, subclasses 4+ for a roll, per se, with an
    inflatable chamber, not elsewhere provided for, and see the notes
    thereunder.


CLS 15/214
TXT Implements having fabric working faces and especially adapted for use as
    wipers or polishers in cleaning optical lenses.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 218.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, subclass
    294 for a lens cleaner embodying an abrasive.


CLS 15/215
TXT Implements in the nature of floor or door mats having fabric working faces
    especially adapted to act as wipers in cleaning boots or shoes drawn over
    them by the wearer.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 216 and 217, and the search Note
    under subclass 238.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings); a  residual class for a static
    structure; subclasses 177+ for a specific wear or friction-type traffic
    carrying surface; or subclasses 660+ for a fabric or lattice (e.g.,
    indeterminate grating).


CLS 15/216
TXT Implements in the nature of floor or door mats having fabric working faces
    and especially adapted to act as wipers in cleaning boots or shoes drawn
    over them by the wearer, and a cleaning implement of another type
    incorporated therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    112 and 114.


CLS 15/217
TXT Implements in the nature of floor or door mats having fabric working faces,
    especially adapted to act as wipers in cleaning boots or shoes drawn over
    them by the wearer, and having working faces composed of tufts, knots, or
    strands of fabric or equivalent with exposed ends.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161.


CLS 15/218
TXT Implements having fabric working faces and especially adapted to act as
    wipers or polishers in cleaning razor-blades.


CLS 15/218.1
TXT Implement under subclass 210.1 especially adapted to act as a wiper or
    polisher for forks, spoons, or knives or other sharp edged blades.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 486 and 523+ for a wiper, dauber, or polisher
    including abrasive material.


CLS 15/219
TXT Implements having fabric working faces and especially adapted to act as
    wipers in cleaning wallpaper.


CLS 15/220.1
TXT Window cleaner:
    Apparatus under subclass 210.1 specifically configured to clean a
    windowpane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for a wiper machine for cleaning windows.

    232,    for a wiper for cleaning windows consisting of a sheet of fabric
    with    means to hold it in a flat position.

    250.001+, for an attachable implement or machine for cleaning a window or
    other optical element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 171.3+ for a window
    with treating means, not provided for elsewhere.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 284.1+ for a
    liquid sprayer for a transparent panel.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 85, 93, 121+, and 197 for means to prevent
    condensation on a window by ventilation.


CLS 15/220.2
TXT Magnetic:
    Apparatus under subclass 220.1 wherein magnetic attraction is utilized to
    move the wiper or hold it in position.


CLS 15/220.3
TXT Venetian blind cleaner:
    Apparatus under subclass 210.1 specifically configured to clean venetian
    blinds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for a machine used to clean venetian blinds using a brush or broom
    type instrument.

    102,    for a machine used to clean venetian blinds using a wiper.


CLS 15/220.4
TXT Rod or wire cleaner (e.g., dipstick cleaner):
    Apparatus under subclass 210.1 specifically configured to clean a rod or
    wire.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 722+ for a fabric wiper
    combined with a ullage rod.


CLS 15/221
TXT Implements having fabric working faces adapted to act as wipers or
    polishers, and a chamber for collection of material dislodged by the
    implement, principally-blackboard-erasers with chambers for collection of
    chalk-dust.


CLS 15/222
TXT Implements consisting of a strip of flexible material having hand grip
    portions at the ends and an intermediate fabric working face acting as a
    wiper or polisher, mostly shoe-polishers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201.


CLS 15/223
TXT Implements adapted to act as wipers, daubers or polishers made up of layers
    of fabric, the laminae being exposed at the work face.

    (1)     Note.  For laminated fabrics having the outermost layer as the work
    face, see this class, other appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses
    209.1+, for those in which the outermost layer may be removed to expose a
    new work face.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, especially subclass 41 for a roll, per se, not
    elsewhere provided for, with axially stacked annular members of cloth or
    fabric.


CLS 15/224
TXT Implements adapted to act as wipers, daubers, or polishers having a working
    face made up of fabric in layers spaced apart, so as to form channels or
    depressions between pairs of layers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, subclasses 30+ for a roll, per se, not elsewhere
    provided for, having surface projections, indentations or slits.


CLS 15/225
TXT Implements adapted to act as wipers, daubers, or polishers having as a
    working face the edge of a strip of fabric coiled upon itself.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, subclass 44 for a roll, per se, not elsewhere
    provided for, having a helical member.


CLS 15/226
TXT Implements adapted to act as dry wipers or polishers having a working face
    constituted by the ends of an irregular mass of overlapping strands or
    strips of fabric, excluding those classified as mops, because intended or
    able to work with a liquid, for which see this class, subclasses 228 and
    229.


CLS 15/227
TXT Implements having a working face of fabric adapted to act as a wiper,
    dauber, or polisher and made up in the form of a mitt for the hand, a cot
    for the finger, or a shoe for the foot.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104.94, for a finger cot or mitt coated or impregnated with cleaning
    material.


CLS 15/228
TXT Implements adapted to serve as wipers or polishers having a working portion
    constituted by a fabric capable of acting as a mop with a cleaning fluid,
    together with heads therefor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115+,   for a mop in combination with another generally independent tool or
    instrument.


CLS 15/229.1
TXT Having strands:

    Subject matter under subclass 228 wherein the wiper or polisher of the mop
    comprises cords, yarns or equivalent strips of cloth.

    (1)     Note.  The term "cloth" includes woven, knitted or felted material.


CLS 15/229.11
TXT Scourer (hand manipulated):
    Apparatus under subclass 209.1 comprising an implement intended to be
    manipulated by a user's hand and having a work contacting surface of
    relatively coarse texture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, for
    cleaning implements which are intended to remove base material from the
    object being cleaned.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 525+ for a cleaning implement intended to
    remove base material from the object being cleaned.


CLS 15/229.12
TXT Fibrous mass (e.g., steel wool):
    Apparatus under subclass 229.11 wherein the scourer comprises a mass of
    intertangled strands of material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 605 for an all
    metal fibrous mass, per se.


CLS 15/229.13
TXT With handle or holder:
    Apparatus under subclass 229.12 wherein the fibrous mass includes structure
    intended to aid in grasping or manipulating the scourer.


CLS 15/229.14
TXT Powder puff:
    Apparatus under subclass 209.1 wherein the implement comprises a soft pad
    for applying cosmetic powder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 293+ for an applicator in combination with a
    powder box in a kit and subclass 320 for a cosmetic applier having a
    peculiar shape to aid in applying the cosmetic in a definite shape or
    pattern.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 126+ for an
    applicator in combination with a powder box not in a kit form and subclass
    200 for a powder applicator comprised of porous material.


CLS 15/229.2
TXT With fixed handle:

    Subject matter under subclass 229.1 which includes a mop handle joined to
    the stranded wiper or polisher by a connection allowing no relative motion
    between the handle and the wiper or polisher.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143.1+, for a particularly configured handle.

    147.1+, for a mop holder.


CLS 15/229.3
TXT And cloth sheath type head:

    Subject matter under subclass 229.2 wherein the connection comprises a
    fabric tube on one of the joined members into which is inserted a part of
    the other joined member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147.1+, for a mop holder.


CLS 15/229.4
TXT And pocket type head:

    Subject matter under subclass 229.2 wherein the connection comprises a
    pocket on one of the joined members into which is inserted a part of the
    other joined member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147.1+, for a mop holder.


CLS 15/229.5
TXT And twisted wire frame:

    Subject matter under subclass 229.2 wherein the connection comprises a
    plurality of intertwined wires with the strands held between the
    intertwined wires.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147.1+, for a mop holder.


CLS 15/229.6
TXT With pivoted handle:

    Subject matter under subclass 229.1 wherein a mop handle is joined to the
    stranded wiper or polisher by a connection allowing the handle to turn
    about an axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144.1+, for an adjustable mop handle.

    147.1+, for a mop holder.


CLS 15/229.7
TXT And cloth sheath type head:

    Subject matter under subclass 229.6 wherein the connection comprises a
    fabric tube on one of the joined members into which is inserted a part of
    the other joined member.


CLS 15/229.8
TXT And pocket type head:

    Subject matter under subclass 229.6 wherein the connection comprises a
    pocket on one of the joined members into which is inserted a part of the
    other joined member.


CLS 15/229.9
TXT And twisted wire frame:

    Subject matter under subclass 229.6 wherein the connection comprises a
    plurality of intertwined wires with the strands held between the
    intertwined wires.


CLS 15/230
TXT Rotary implements having fabric working portions and adapted to act as
    wipers, daubers, or polishers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     98, 101, 179, and 213.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 488 through 522 for a rotary abrading cylinder
    having flexible abradant flaps extending from the periphery thereof which
    are adapted to contact a workpiece.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roller, per se, not elsewhere provided for,
    and see the notes thereunder.


CLS 15/230.1
TXT Implement under subclass 230 which is provided with means to dissipate heat
    from at least a portion of the implement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, subclass 488 for an abrasive tool or tool support
    ventilating or cooling means.


CLS 15/230.11
TXT Implement under subclass 230 which comprises a cylindroid or conoid working
    portion supported on a frame having an extension which is grasped by an
    operative whereby the frame and the working portion supported thereby may
    be manipulated to cause rolling contact of the working portion relative to
    a workpiece.


CLS 15/230.12
TXT Implement under subclass 230 wherein the working portion is made up of a
    plurality of parts which are held one to another by an adhesive bond.

    (1)     Note.  An adhesive bond under this definition is a joining of parts
    by a separate glue-like material or a joining of parts by causing
    contacting surfaces to become sticky and adhere together.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 526+ for abrasive working faces adhesively
    bonded to a backing or a support.


CLS 15/230.13
TXT Implement under subclass 230 wherein the working portion comprises a strip
    of material wrapped about a core to form a spiral or helix, the outer
    convolution of which strip is used to perform a wiping, daubing or
    polishing operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 490+ and 535 for a spirally wound abrasive
    tool.


CLS 15/230.14
TXT Implement under subclass 230 wherein the working portion comprises a
    plurality of pieces each having an arcuate part wherein said parts are
    arranged with respect to each other such that the composite object formed
    thereby is a cylindroid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 395+ for an abrasive tool comprised of sectors
    which are assembled together.


CLS 15/230.15
TXT Implement under subclass 230 wherein the working portion comprises a
    plurality of components sewn together in a face to face relationship.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 533+ for a plurality of components sewn
    together to form an abrasive tool.


CLS 15/230.16
TXT Implement under subclass 230 wherein the working portion includes a
    work-contacting surface which is sectioned into a plurality of distinct
    work-contacting areas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 527+ for an abrasive tool having an
    interrupted work engaging surface.


CLS 15/230.17
TXT Implement under subclass 230 which includes a working portion secured to a
    support by a securing element, which portion is forced onto the support (or
    the support is forced onto the portion) whereby the securing element makes
    its own hole, or enlarges an existing hole, in the working portion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 490+ and 520 for an abrasive tool piercing and
    securing element.


CLS 15/230.18
TXT Implement under subclass 230 which includes a working portion having a
    work-contacting face the shape of which is bulged or hollowed relative to
    the implement whereby any cross-section taken through the shape is bounded
    by a curved line at the work-engaging face of the shape.

    (1)     Note.  An implement having a cylindrical or planar or irregular
    work engaging face is excluded and will be found in other subclasses (e.g.,
    subclass 230) of this schedule.


CLS 15/230.19
TXT Implement under subclass 230 which comprises a separable element for
    securing the working portion to a supporting portion.

    (1)     Note.  A securing element under this definition must be a type
    which may be separated from the implement without destroying the element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 490+ for discrete mechanical means for
    securing an abrasive tool to its support.


CLS 15/231
TXT Wipers, daubers and polishers whose working face consists of a flat sheet
    of fabric with special means for holding the sheet in place.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 488 through 539 for an abrasive wiper, dauber,
    or polisher.


CLS 15/232
TXT Wipers or polishers especially adapted for cleaning the glass of windows
    and consisting of a sheet of fabric and means for holding it in flat or
    extended position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for a window cleaning machine in which the cleaning element is a
    wiper.

    220.1+, for a wiper used as a window cleaning implement.

    250.001+,for an attachable implement or machine used to clean a window or
    other optical implement.


CLS 15/233
TXT Wipers, daubers and polishers consisting of a strip or sheet of fabric and
    a frame for putting and holding it in stretched or tensioned condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, subclass 105 for a scouring device that immerses a
    workpiece conveyed by a roller-type feeder and subclasses 488 through 539
    for an abrasive wiper, dauber, or polisher.


CLS 15/234
TXT Cleaning implements whose working face is constituted by the barbs of
    feathers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 6 for a plume
    made of feathers.


CLS 15/235
TXT Cleaning devices consisting of the skins of animals with their natural
    hairy appendages and a suitable mounting.


CLS 15/235.3
TXT Implements under subclass 104 in the form of a mason's mortar-joint
    finisher (e.g., raker, jointer) or simulator (e.g., groover).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105.5,  for a mortar-joint finisher combined with an independently usable
    tool or instrument.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, appropriate subclasses for similar devices having a sharp
    cutting edge or a sharp point.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclass 89 for apparatus to
    form a joint in a plastic or uncured roadway; and subclass 93 for marking
    or grooving plastic or uncured roadway material.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 458 for a hand movable, substrate traversing plural dimension
    shaping means; see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 15/235.4
TXT Implements under subclass 104 in the form of a mason's trowel or float for
    spreading, shaping, and smoothing loose or plastic material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    245.1,  for a similar implement not disclosed as a masons trowel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, appropriate subclasses
    (particularly subclasses 96, 101, and 113) for machines for spreading,
    shaping and smoothing plastic or uncured road material. Hand implements for
    substantially the same purpose are classifiable in Class 15, subclass 235.4.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 458 for a hand movable, substrate traversing plural dimension
    shaping means; see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 15/235.5
TXT Implements under subclass 235.4 having a plurality of handles.


CLS 15/235.6
TXT Implements under subclass 235.4 having an undulated troweling surface.


CLS 15/235.7
TXT Implements under subclass 235.4 having two like troweling surfaces
    angularly arranged as to each other, or having a general form (e.g., inside
    curve) particularly limited to corner use.


CLS 15/235.8
TXT Implements under subclass 235.4 having an adjustable feature with means to
    retain the parts in their adjusted relationship.


CLS 15/236.01
TXT Scrapers:

    Cleaning implements under subclass 104 which are adapted to remove foreign
    matter by the action of hard blade-like or scraping edge, in distinction
    from that of a brush, broom, fabric, wiper, feather pelt or sponge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104.068+, for a scraper implement configured to clean a flue.

    235.4+, for scrapers in the form of mason's trowel or floats.

    237+,   for a scraper especially configured to clean boots.

    249.2+, for a scraper implement attachment that cleans and is intended to
    be left attached (i.e., at work and at rest) to a flue.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 81.01+ for processes and apparatus for
    removing scale from metal sheets and bars by scraping flexing, treating
    with water or steam, or by impacting with percussive tools, e.g., scaling
    hammers.

    30,     Cutlery, especially subclasses 169+ for general utility scrapers
    having sharpened cutting edges.

    37,     Excavating, subclass 176 for snow excavating machines and
    implements.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 749.1+ for
    miscellaneous machines and implements used in building construction and see
    the notes thereto.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclass 20 for scrapers used in
    leather-working.

    81,     Tools, subclasses 15.2+ for scrapers combined with means for
    repairing a resilient vehicle tire.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 401+ for a work engaging tool
    combined with a fluid burner.

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 246 for smoking bowl cleaners.

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 75.6 and 76.4 for nail files.

    168,    Farriery, subclasses 48.1+ for scrapers used to clean or trim
    horses hooves.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 166+ for a
    comminuting member scraper or cleaner.

    407,    Cutters, for Shaping, subclasses 29.1+ for files and rasps.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating Apparatus,
    subclass 458 for a hand movable, substrate traversing plural dimensions
    shaping means.  See the search notes thereunder.


CLS 15/236.02
TXT Windshield:

    Subject matter under subclass 236.01 especially adapted for cleaning
    windshield.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250.001, for a windshield cleaner particularly configured to be attached to
    or near the windshield.


CLS 15/236.03
TXT Paint roller:

    Subject matter under subclass 236.01 especially adapted for removing liquid
    material from a paint roller.


CLS 15/236.04
TXT Gutter:

    Subject matter under subclass 236.01 especially adapted for cleaning gutter
    surfaces.


CLS 15/236.05
TXT Plural bladed:

    Subject matter under subclass 236.01 having noncollinear scraping edges.


CLS 15/236.06
TXT Simultaneously useable:

    Subject matter under subclass 236.05 wherein all scraper edges contact the
    work at the same time.


CLS 15/236.07
TXT Arcuate scraping edge:

    Subject matter under subclass 236.01 in which the scraping edge is
    arc-shaped.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236.02, for arcuate windshield wipers.


CLS 15/236.08
TXT Toothed or serrated:

    Subject matter under subclass 236.01 in which the scraping edge has notches
    formed therein.


CLS 15/236.09
TXT For plural surfaces:

    Subject matter under subclass 236.01 wherein the scraper is adapted to
    simultaneously contact more than one surface.


CLS 15/236.1
TXT Rotary:

    Subject matter under subclass 236.01 wherein one or more scraper elements
    are mounted on a head which is adapted to be rotated by a power source.


CLS 15/237
TXT Subject matter under subclass 236.01 especially adapted for cleaning used
    boots.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238     through 241.


CLS 15/238
TXT Implements in the nature of floor or door mats especially adapted for
    cleaning boots or shoes of adherent foreign matter by means of a hard
    blade-like scraping edge over which they are drawn by the wearer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings); a residual class for a static
    structure; subclasses 660+ for a fabric or lattice (e.g., indeterminate
    grating).

    239     through 241.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 156+ for a
    stock material product in the form of a web or sheet and including a
    component of varying thickness.


CLS 15/239
TXT Implements in the nature of floor or door mats composed of pivoted links.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings); a residual class for a static
    structure; subclasses 660+ for a fabric or lattice (e.g., indeterminate
    grating).

    240.


CLS 15/240
TXT Implements in the nature of floor or door mats composed of pivoted links
    each having a block filling the opening thereof.


CLS 15/241
TXT Implements in the nature of floor or door mats composed of woven wire.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    245,    Wire Fabrics and Structure, appropriate subclasses.


CLS 15/244.1
TXT Sponge or sponge with holder:

    Subject matter under subclass 104 wherein the cleaning device comprises a
    cellular mass capable of absorbing liquid and releasing the absorbed liquid
    and a support for the cellular mass or the cellular mass, per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147.1+, for a mop holder.


CLS 15/244.2
TXT Having pivoted handle:

    Subject matter under subclass 244.1 wherein the support includes a hand
    held rod movable about a point or an axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144.1+, for an adjustable cleaning implement handle.


CLS 15/244.3
TXT Having fabric cover or back:

    Subject matter under subclass 244.1 wherein the support for the cellular
    mass includes (a) cloth material to enclose partially or totally the
    cellular mass or (b) a sheetlike material layer integral with an exterior
    unused surface of the cellular mass.


CLS 15/244.4
TXT Sponge:

    Subject matter under subclass 244.1 which includes the structure of the
    cellular mass, per se.


CLS 15/245
TXT Cleaning implements having as a working face the edge of a strip of soft
    yielding or flexible nonabsorbent fabric in distinction from a scraper or a
    mop and adapted to clean by wiping or pushing off adherent foreign matter
    together with whatever free cleaning fluid may be present.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210.1,  for squeegee-like nonabsorbent wiper devices especially adapted by
    configuration for cleaning the outer surface of rod-like members, i.e.,
    "sucker rods".

    250.001+, for a cleaning element which is part of an
    optical-member-attachable cleaner apparatus (e.g., windshield wiper, etc.).


CLS 15/245.1
TXT Bladed spreader:
    Apparatus under subclass 104.001 comprising an implement which is generally
    flat and which has an edge intended to be used to spread a fluent substance
    over a work surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235.4+, for a similar device disclosed as a mason's trowel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 101+ for a tool
    for spreading uncured road material.


CLS 15/246
TXT Implements, devices, or machines, for brushing, scrubbing, or general
    cleaning, of types recognized in this classification, and which are
    constructed for attachment to the article or object upon which they are to
    operate; also attachments to such implements, devices, or machines acting
    as collectors, fenders, scoops, or guards or to perform some other
    auxiliary function.

    (0.5)   Note.  Many classes include devices or articles specialized to a
    particular art which are provided with cleaners of the type provided for
    here. Classification as an attachment is proper in this class only when
    there is no claim to any feature of the surface or article being cleaned
    which is specialized to the particular art involved.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 38, 44, 45, 104.8, 247-256, and
    257.1.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 324 for combinations of pipe and
    tube cleaners with water gage glasses.

    101,    Printing, subclass 425.

    114,    Ships, subclass 222.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 379.

    199,    Type Casting, subclass 62.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 855+.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 701+.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclass 92.


CLS 15/246.2
TXT For a vacuum cleaner:
    Attachment under subclass 246 intended to be connected to a suction type
    cleaning device and which performs a function ancillary to the cleaning.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323,    for a suction type vacuum cleaner combined with a storage facility
    for tools, nozzles, conduits, etc.

    325,    for a suction type vacuum cleaner combined with a furniture guard.

    414+,   for a vacuum cleaner nozzle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclass 384 for a display device with
    an attached vacuum cleaner.


CLS 15/246.3
TXT With treating means (e.g., deodorizing, sterilizing, etc.):
    Attachment under subclass 246.2 combined with means to subject the work
    piece, work surface or surrounding environment to an additional or an
    alternative treatment to the suction cleaning provided for by the vacuum
    cleaner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 125+ for a
    fumigator attached to a vacuum cleaner for the purpose of destroying vermin.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 31 for a fumigating cabinet
    attached to a vacuum cleaner.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 291+ for an apparatus, for
    disinfecting, deodorizing, preserving, or sterilizing, attached to a vacuum
    cleaner.


CLS 15/246.4
TXT Movable carriage:
    Attachment under subclass 246.2 including a movable support structure to
    which the vacuum cleaner is attached to add mobility thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 28.18 for a runner type carriage for a
    vacuum cleaner.


CLS 15/246.5
TXT Cleaning devices under subclass 246 which are installed in or adapted to be
    attached to a tank or similar receptacle for cleaning a surface thereof.
    The tank need not be defined if the structure is peculiar to features
    cooperating with a tank.

    (1)     Note.  Since art devices, in general, take their own built-in
    cleaning means, only enough structure to support or operate the cleaner may
    be included, except for the tank inlet and/or outlet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.7,    for submerged cleaners with ambient flow guides.

    104.05, for devices for cleaning the interior of pipes or tubes, and see
    the Notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 238+ for fluid handling devices and
    cleaners there provided for, and subclass 577.5 for apparatus for
    traversing a conduit over a submerged surface of a receptacle or tank.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 523+ for
    gravitational separators having constituent movers.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 314 for the combination of a
    static receptacle and a nongravity discharging means therefor, which means
    includes at least compound motion type of discharge assistant operating on
    the top of the material being discharged from the receptacle, and wherein
    the combination further includes a means for cleaning the wall of the
    receptacle.


CLS 15/247
TXT Fabric covers and holders therefor adapted to be secured over the working
    face of implements of the brush, broom or mop type, whether to protect or
    strengthen the fibers thereof or to convert the implement into one of the
    wiper type.


CLS 15/248.1
TXT Drip cup or splash guard for a brush or broom:
    Apparatus under subclass 246 intended to be attached to a broom or brush
    when working with liquid and configured to catch any drip therefrom or
    otherwise shield surrounding objects or the user.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 504+ for a work surface shield or
    protector used to prevent transfer of a coating and subclasses 213, 301,
    and 406 for a shield in combination with coating means.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclass 15 for a drip
    catcher or splash guard in combination with coating implement with material
    supply.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 451+ for a work guard to protect part of a
    work surface in an abrading operation.


CLS 15/248.2
TXT For roller:
    Apparatus under subclass 248.1 wherein the drip cup or shield is intended
    to be attached to a roller.


CLS 15/249.1
TXT Brush or broom-type flue cleaner:

    Subject matter under subclass 246 wherein the cleaning implement comprises
    a brush or broom-type member which is configured to clean the inside
    surface of a passage or duct that carries smoke (e.g., chimney, stovepipe,
    etc.) and is intended to be left attached (i.e., at work and at rest) to
    the passage or duct.

    (1)     Note.  A brush or broom has separate, natural or artificial
    elements (e.g., bristles, splints, fibers, broom straws, grass, other
    stems, etc.) which are arranged in, generally, parallel relation so that
    their assembled ends constitute collectively a working surface intended for
    cleaning by brushing or scrubbing. This does not include sheets, blocks, or
    strands of fabric; layers of felted, spun, woven, pulped, or molded fabric;
    or pelts, scrapers, or a sponge; per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104.066+,for a brush or broom implement configured to clean a flue and
    which is intended to be removed from the flue when not in use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 16 for a cooking or heating stove
    having a flue cleaner.


CLS 15/249.2
TXT Scraper-type flue cleaner:

    Subject matter under subclass 246 wherein the implement is configured to
    remove foreign matter by the action of hard blade-like or scraping edge, is
    for use in cleaning an inside portion of a passage or duct that provides
    passage for smoke (e.g., chimney, stovepipe, etc.) and is intended to be
    left attached (i.e., at work and at rest) to the passage or duct.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104.068+,for a scraping implement configured to clean a flue and which is
    intended to be removed from the flue when not in use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 16 for a cooking or heating stove
    having a flue cleaner.


CLS 15/249.3
TXT Suspended by a taut member (e.g., wire, rope, chain, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 249.2 wherein the flue cleaner is intended to
    be hung within the flue by a member that is capable of exerting only
    tensile force on the implement and which is intended to be manipulated to
    move the flue cleaner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104.069,        for a scraping implement suspended by a taut member (e.g.,
    wire, rope, chain, etc.) and configured to clean a flue.


CLS 15/250.001
TXT Optical-member-attachable cleaner (e.g., windshield wiper):
    Apparatus under subclass 246 intended to be used to clean a section of
    glass or other optical element and disclosed as being particularly
    configured for attachment to the optical element or an adjacent structure.

    (1)     Note.  The optical member cleaner may be of any type found in this
    class, however, usually they are of the squeegee type.

    (2)     Note.  Patents are classified in this subclass, and indented
    subclasses, if any structure is disclosed which particularly adapts the
    optical member cleaner to attach to a window.  The mere disclosure of a
    bracket or other structure of the cleaner which is intended to form a
    connection between the cleaning element and optical member or adjacent
    structure is sufficient.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for a window cleaning machine wherein the cleaning element is a
    wiper.


    214,    for an implement used as a wiper or polisher to clean an optical
    lens.

    220.1+, for a wiper used as a window cleaning implement.

    232,    for a window cleaning wiper or polisher consisting of a flat sheet
    of fabric with means for holding the sheet flat.

    245,    for squeegee-type cleaner not configured to be attached to a
    windshield.

    256.36+,for a squeegee disclosed as having a bracket or other means of
    attachment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 171.3+ for a window
    with treating means, not provided for elsewhere.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses for a
    mechanism modified to provide motion to a cleaning element, but not
    claiming any cleaning structure.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclasses for a
    vacuum motor modified to be used to operate a window cleaner.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclass 6 for a process
    of cleaning windows by means of a solid work contacting means.

    296,    Land Vehicles, Bodies and Tops, subclasses 96.15+ for a windshield
    cleaner claimed in combination with a windshield or its supporting
    structure.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, appropriate subclasses for
    an electric motor modified to operate a window cleaner.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclasses 280+, for means to reverse an electric motor.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclasses for a
    rotary expansible chamber vacuum motor, per se.


CLS 15/250.002
TXT Headlight cleaner:
    Attachment under subclass 250.001 intended to clean the lens of a headlight.


CLS 15/250.003
TXT Mirror cleaner:
    Attachment under subclass 250.001 intended to clean the surface of a mirror.


CLS 15/250.01
TXT Window cleaners under subclass 250.001 having means designed to apply some
    substance which may be in solid, liquid, vapor or gas form to the
    associated window surface, in addition to the surface contacting member or
    members.

    (1)     Note.  Where the only material applied is atmospheric air caused to
    flow due to the sole effect of a heater the apparatus is not   classified
    under this definition. For such apparatus under this definition see
    subclasses 250.05+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24      and 29, for rotary handle mounted brushes having means to apply a
    cleaning fluid.

    320+,   for machines having an air blast together with means to apply a
    liquid to the work.

    500+,   for implements with material supply.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 284 for devices
    disclosed as being especially adapted to spray a gas or liquid on the
    transparent panel of an automobile but not claiming a window or a special
    relationship with a window.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 85, 93, 121+, and 197 for windows having
    means to create a draft of gas to prevent condensation.


CLS 15/250.02
TXT Apparatus under subclass 250.01 wherein the substance is applied to the
    surface to be cleaned in a predetermined sequence with respect to the
    operation of the cleaner.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes automobile windshield cleaners which,
    upon the actuation of a control means, sets into operation, or stops the
    operation of the material applying means and the wiper in timed
    relationship.


CLS 15/250.03
TXT Apparatus under subclass 250.01 wherein a supply of the substance is
    contained within a suitable body carried by the surface contacting member.


CLS 15/250.04
TXT Apparatus under subclass 250.01 wherein the cleaning substance is applied
    to the associated window by a means constrained to move with the surface
    contacting member.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes those patents having the supply
    source removed from the cleaning element but having a nozzle or other
    applying means which moves with the cleaning element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250.03, for cleaners having a supply source carried by the cleaning element
    and movable therewith.


CLS 15/250.05
TXT Cleaning devices under subclass 250.001 wherein the cleaning effect is
    supplemented by the application of heat to the surface to be cleaned.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250.01+, for window cleaners wherein heated material (e.g., air) is
    applied; or for patents having both heating means and material applying
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 171.3+ for windows
    with treating means not elsewhere provided for.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 203 for electric heaters applied to
    windows but not combined with cleaning implements.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 85, 93, 121+, and 197 for windows having
    means to create a draft of gas to prevent condensation and which may
    include means to heat the gas.


CLS 15/250.06
TXT Cleaning devices under subclass 250.05 wherein the surface contacting
    cleaning member comprises a wiping element and the surface to be cleaned is
    heated by the wiping element which element is heated by a thermal agent
    enclosed within the surface contacting cleaning material.

    (1)     Note.  The "surface contacting cleaning material" must comprise a
    unit though it may include several materials. It is not intended to include
    a backing member. For a heating element between plural blades see subclass
    250.09.


CLS 15/250.07
TXT Cleaning devices under subclass 250.05 wherein a heating element is
    attached to the surface contacting member and is constrained to move
    simultaneously with the cleaning stroke so as to heat the surface to be
    wiped.


CLS 15/250.08
TXT Cleaning devices under subclass 250.07 wherein the surface to be cleaned is
    engaged by the heating element which element is attached adjacent to the
    surface contacting member and moves coincidentally therewith.


CLS 15/250.09
TXT Cleaners under subclass 250.07 comprising at least two surface contacting
    cleaning edges and having heating means positioned between the two edges.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250.41, for cleaning elements having plural spaced surface engaging edges
    but having no heating means.


CLS 15/250.1
TXT Cleaners under subclass 250.001 in which the window pane is movable
    relative to the surface contacting member during the cleaning operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256.5,  for stationary attachments, other than for windows, which clean a
    moving surface.


CLS 15/250.11
TXT Cleaners under subclass 250.001 of the type used to clean the windows of
    buildings and which are readily removable from the frame or sash of one
    window and readily movable and attachable to the frame or sash of another
    window.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass are of the type adapted to aid a
    workman in cleaning the outside of a window while working from inside a
    building.


CLS 15/250.12
TXT Cleaners under subclass 250.001 comprising a movable surface contacting
    member, a motor drive therefor and (1) means for maintaining the speed of
    the member constant during fluctuations of the driving motor power source,
    or during fluctuations in the speed of the driving motor, or (2) automatic
    means for controlling the motor speed.

    (1)     Note.  To Be "automatic" the cleaner must comprise a cleaning
    element and a means for sensing a condition or change of condition, which
    condition or change of condition may or may not occur, a separate control
    means and a separate power means for changing a condition of operation of
    the cleaner, said three means being so related that the sensing means
    controls operation of the controlling means and the control means controls
    operation of the power means, all without the intervention of a human
    operator.


CLS 15/250.13
TXT Cleaners under subclass 250.001 comprising means for varying the limits
    between which the surface contacting member continuously moves.

    (1)     Note.  Means for reversing the direction of travel of the cleaning
    element before it has reached the end of the stroke due to an obstruction
    on the window are classified in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250.12, for automatic means for controlling the speed of a motor drive
    means for a window cleaner.


CLS 15/250.14
TXT Cleaning attachments under subclass 250.001 comprising a common drive for
    two or more surface contacting members movable over different areas of the
    surface to be cleaned and wherein the cleaning stroke of one member is not
    in phase with the cleaning stroke of the other.

    (1)     Note.  The cleaning stroke of plural cleaning members are not in
    phase if (1) the angular velocity of one is different than the angular
    velocity of another or (2) if one member is at an end of its stroke at a
    time when another member is not at the end of its stroke.

    (2)     Note.  Cleaning members which have identical but allochiral motion
    are considered to be in phase.


CLS 15/250.15
TXT Cleaners under subclass 250.001 comprising a surface contacting member
    mounted for movement back and forth over a surface to be cleaned and
    resilient means urging the member throughout one of its directions of
    movement.


CLS 15/250.16
TXT Cleaners under subclass 250.001 having a motor driven surface contacting
    member and wherein (1) means is provided whereby the surface contacting
    member is stopped only in a predetermined position; or (2) interlocking
    means, other than an actuating mechanism, is provided to hold the surface
    contacting member in a predetermined position on the window.

    (1)     Note.  Mere manual means for actuating the surface contacting
    member to move it to the side of the window are classified elsewhere in
    appropriate subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250.15, for spring means for operating the surface contacting member on the
    return stroke and which will also hold the element in a predetermined
    parked position.

    250.19, for means for moving the cleaning element from the surface at the
    end of the stroke.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 7 and 218+, note
    especially subclasses 282+ and 284+ for cyclically operable expansible
    chamber motors having means to cause the motor to be stopped in a
    predetermined position.


CLS 15/250.17
TXT Cleaners under subclass 250.16 wherein the surface contacting member is
    operated by an electric motor and a switch is opened to stop the motor only
    when the member is in a predetermined position.


CLS 15/250.18
TXT Cleaners under subclass 250.001 comprising a motor for operating the
    surface contacting members, a normally disconnected manual operating means
    for the member, and means to disconnect the motor and connect the manual
    operating means.


CLS 15/250.19
TXT Cleaners under subclass 250.001 comprising (1) means for moving the surface
    contacting member from the window or (2) means whereby the surface
    contacting member is positioned and held from the window while not in use.


CLS 15/250.201
TXT Wind deflecting means:

    Apparatus under subclass 250.001 including means intended to divert air
    flow.


CLS 15/250.202
TXT Pressure adjusting means for cleaning element:

    Apparatus under subclass 250.001 including means to change the contact
    force between the cleaner and the associated optical member.


CLS 15/250.203
TXT Operated by remote control:

    Apparatus under subclass 250.202 wherein the pressure adjusting means is
    intended to be managed by means (e.g., mechanical, electrical, hydraulic,
    etc.) at some point distant.


CLS 15/250.21
TXT Cleaners under subclass 250.001 comprising an elongated member having a
    surface contacting member mounted on one end thereof, the other end being
    pivotally mounted to permit the first end to have a simple swinging
    movement in a single plane and wherein mechanism is provided for imparting
    another movement to the elongated member simultaneously with the simple
    swinging movement.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes operating mechanism for moving the
    oscillating wiper arm around the curved surface of a windshield.

    (2)     Note.  The mechanism for imparting the other movement to the
    elongated member must be more than a spring means for urging the cleaning
    element toward a curved window.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250.23, for cleaning elements pivotally connected to an arm and having
    means to impart movement of the element relative to the arm.


CLS 15/250.22
TXT Cleaners under subclass 250.001 wherein the surface contacting member is
    mounted to turn through at least 360 degrees about an axis of rotation.


CLS 15/250.23
TXT Cleaners under subclass 250.001 comprising a movable actuating arm on which
    a surface contacting member is mounted to move with respect thereto, and
    means is provided which constrains the member to move relatively to the arm
    during any and all movement of the arm.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250.21, for cleaning elements connected to an arm and having means to
    impart oscillating and another movement to the arm.


CLS 15/250.24
TXT Devices under subclass 250.001 in which the movement of the surface
    contacting member is effected by the longitudinal movement of an elongated
    flexible means on which the member is mounted and with which the member is
    constrained to move.


CLS 15/250.25
TXT Apparatus under subclass 250.001 in which means is provided for operating a
    shaft to which the surface contacting member is secured and wherein the
    operation of the shaft is effected by the longitudinal movement of an
    elongated flexible member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250.24, for elongated flexible drive means wherein the surface contacting
    member is mounted on the flexible means.


CLS 15/250.26
TXT Devices under subclass 250.001 wherein the surface contacting member is
    mounted for translatory movement back and forth and in which the means
    effecting the movement comprises a rotating cylindrical helix.

    (1)     Note.  This apparatus usually comprises a rotating screw member
    moving a nut member on which the surface contacting member is mounted.


CLS 15/250.27
TXT Cleaning attachments under subclass 250.001 comprising two or more surface
    contacting members mounted on the free ends of separate arms, the other
    ends of the arms being pivotally mounted on individual spaced axes to
    permit the free ends to swing back and forth across the areas to be
    cleaned, and means common to all the arms for simultaneously swinging the
    arms.

    (1)     Note.  The means for swinging the arms back and forth must be more
    than a mere mounting which permits the movement and must include linkage,
    gearing, motor or other common drive means.


CLS 15/250.28
TXT Cleaning attachments under subclass 250.001 comprising at least two surface
    contacting members constrained to move together and mounted on opposite
    confronting sides of the surface to be cleaned.


CLS 15/250.29
TXT Cleaners under subclass 250.001 wherein the surface contacting member is
    mounted for translatory movement back and forth across the surface to be
    cleaned and wherein means is provided for effecting the back and forth
    movement.

    (1)     Note.  The means for moving the surface contacting member back and
    forth must be more than a mere mounting which permits the movement and must
    include some linkage, gearing, motor, handle or other drive means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250.26, for reciprocating cleaning elements having screw type drive means.


CLS 15/250.3
TXT Apparatus under subclass 250.001 comprising a surface contacting member
    mounted on the free end of an elongated member, the elongated member being
    mounted at its opposite end to permit the free end to swing back and forth
    across the surface to be cleaned, and wherein means is provided for
    effecting a swinging motion of the elongated member.

    (1)     Note.  The means for swinging the elongated member must be more
    than a mere mounting permitting the free end to swing, and must include
    some means for imparting the motion to the member (e.g., linkage, gearing,
    motor, handle).


CLS 15/250.31
TXT Subject matter under subclass 250.001 wherein the apparatus has a
    particular joint or attachment means between: (a) an actuating means and
    the optical-member or the adjacent structure; (b) the actuating means and a
    connecting means between the actuating means and a cleaning element; or (c)
    connecting means and the cleaning element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections; a generic class of connections between two
    or more rigid or semirigid members; subclasses 52+ for articulated members
    having relative movement about a bearing surface, especially subclasses
    119+ for a pivot where two members are connected for angular motion in a
    plane transverse to the axis of at least one member.


CLS 15/250.32
TXT Apparatus under subclass 250.31 comprising the joint between a window
    surface contacting member and an operating arm therefor.

    (1)     Note.  A claim to a subcombination of a joint comprising details of
    that portion of a surface contacting member to be connected to an operating
    arm or details of that portion of an operating arm to be connected to a
    surface contacting member is classified under this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250.352,        for an optical-member-attachable cleaner specific arm
    structure having a pivot between a hub and extended arm member, or a
    biasing assembly feature.

    250.46+, for an optical-member-attachable cleaner element articulated
    structure having a specific joint, hinge, or pivot within the articulated
    structure.


CLS 15/250.33
TXT Connections under subclass 250.32 wherein the connection comprises a
    pivotal axis extending longitudinally of the surface contacting members so
    as to provide pivoted movement between the arm and surface contacting
    member and allows the latter to tilt from side to side.


CLS 15/250.34
TXT Apparatus under subclass 250.31 comprising the joint between an elongated
    member to which the surface contacting element is connected and a shaft
    which transmits motion directly to the elongated member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS

    250.352,        for an optical-member-attachable cleaner specific arm
    structure having a pivot between a hub and extended arm member, or a
    biasing assembly feature.


CLS 15/250.351
TXT Specific arm structure:

    Apparatus under subclass 250.001 wherein the apparatus has a particular
    configuration or arrangement for an elongated member that forms a
    connection between an actuating shaft and a cleaning element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 720+ for a rigid
    member having a limited closed periphery which is greatly elongated
    relative to any lateral dimension.


CLS 15/250.352
TXT Between hub and extended arm:

    Apparatus under subclass 250.351 wherein the specific arm structure is
    between a part of the arm structure connected to a drive shaft and a part
    of the arm structure connected to the cleaning element, permitting rotation
    or providing bias between the two.

    (1)     Note.In this subclass specific arm structure is more than a
    recitation of a "pivot", "hinge," or "biasing means."

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250.32+,for an optical-member-attachable cleaner having a specific coupling
    or mounting connection between an arm and a cleaning element.

    250.34, for an optical-member-attachable cleaner having a specific coupling
    or mounting between an arm and an actuating shaft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 579+ for pitman or
    connecting rods.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 119+ for a pivot between two
    members where one has an angular motion in a plane transverse to the other,
    or subclasses 52+ for articulated members having a joint or coupling.


CLS 15/250.361
TXT Cleaning element structure:

    Apparatus under subclass 250.001 including a surface contacting foreign
    matter removing member (e.g., squeegee, windshield wiper blade, etc.) or
    its immediate supporting structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    245,    for a squeegee implement when not part of an
    optical-member-attachable cleaner.

    250.32+,for an optical-member-attachable cleaner having a specific coupling
    or mounting connection between an arm and a cleaning element.


CLS 15/250.37
TXT Cleaners under subclass 250.361 comprising at least one rotating member
    mounted on the cleaning element for the purpose of supporting the element
    on the surface to be cleaned during the cleaning operation.


CLS 15/250.38
TXT Cleaners under subclass 250.361 wherein a surface contacting strip of
    yieldable or flexible material is placed under tension longitudinally of a
    backing means for the strip.


CLS 15/250.39
TXT Cleaners under subclass 250.361 with selective positioning means for
    extending or contracting the effective length of the surface contacting
    member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117     and 531, for implements comprising plural cleaning elements one of
    which is a squeegee.


CLS 15/250.4
TXT Cleaners under subclass 250.361 comprising at least one cleaning edge which
    is maintained in contact with the surface to be cleaned during the
    "at-rest" position of the cleaning element and at least one additional
    cleaning means which is out of contact during the "at-rest" position, the
    additional means being adapted to be brought into surface contact during
    abnormal conditions or during movement of the cleaning element over the
    surface to be cleaned.


CLS 15/250.41
TXT Cleaners under subclass 250.361 comprising two or more spaced, elongated
    edges for engaging the window to be cleaned.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250.09, for plural surface engaging edges having a heating element
    therebetween.


CLS 15/250.43
TXT Accommodates optical-member having curved surface:

    Apparatus under subclass 250.361 wherein the cleaning element structure
    conforms to an arcuate contour of a section of glass or other optical
    element being cleaned.


CLS 15/250.44
TXT Articulated support structure:

    Apparatus under subclass 250.43 wherein the cleaning element support
    structure includes parts (e.g., yokes, levers, brackets, etc.) that are
    hinged, jointed, or pivoted together.

    (1)     Note.The articulated structure generally functions to distribute
    pressure along the cleaning element.


CLS 15/250.451
TXT Specific backing member:

    Apparatus under subclass 250.44 wherein the cleaning element support
    structure includes a stiffening element extending along the back of the
    surface-contacting-foreign-matter-removing member (e.g., squeegee,
    windshield wiper blade, etc.).

    (1)     Note For this and indented subclasses, specific backing member
    requires more than the recitation of a "backing member," "backing member
    having a slot to retain a squeegee," or "means for retention by articulated
    structure."

    (2)     Note. The backing member is usually flat so as to permit flexing
    about an axis, perpendicular to its longitudinal axis and parallel to the
    optical element, so as to accommodate a curved optical element.


CLS 15/250.452
TXT Securing a squeegee:

    Apparatus under subclass 250.451 wherein the backing member has a
    particular fastening element to hold the
    surface-contacting-foreign-matter-removing member (e.g., squeegee,
    windshield wiper blade, etc.).


CLS 15/250.453
TXT Secured by articulated structure:

    Apparatus under subclass 250.451 wherein the backing member has a
    particular fastening element that permits it to be attached to ends (e.g.,
    claw, etc.) of those component parts (e.g., yokes, levers, brackets, etc.)
    that are hinged, jointed, or pivoted together.


CLS 15/250.454
TXT Biased latching member:

    Apparatus under subclass 250.453 wherein the particular fastening element
    includes a resilient member that is initially forced aside during
    installation until it reaches a certain point where the resilient member
    springs back locking the associated end (e.g., claw) to the backing member.


CLS 15/250.46
TXT Specific joint, hinge, or pivot:

    Apparatus under subclass 250.44 wherein significance is attributed to the
    particular joint, hinge, or pivot which unites component parts of the
    articulated support structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 119+ for a pivot between two
    members where one has an angular motion in a plane transverse to the other,
    or subclasses 52+ for articulated members having a joint or coupling.


CLS 15/250.47
TXT Spring type:

    Apparatus under subclass 250.46 wherein the specific hinge, joint, or pivot
    includes a resilient biasing member.


CLS 15/250.48
TXT Specific squeegee structure:

    Apparatus under subclass 250.361 wherein the surface contacting foreign
    matter removing member (e.g., squeegee, windshield wiper blade, etc.) has a
    particular configuration, makeup, or composition feature (e.g., shape,
    cross sectional shape, layer, coating, surface treatment, etc.) to improve
    its function.


CLS 15/256.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 246 in which one or more scrapers, wipers or
    brushes are attached to a device which includes a moving surface as a part
    thereof and are so mounted as to act upon the surface to remove material
    therefrom during the normal operation of the device.

    (1)     Note.  Devices in various classes include moving surfaces which are
    contacted and cleaned by scrapers, wipers or brushes. A partial list of
    such classes will be found below under "Search Class".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250.1,  for window cleaning attachments in which the surface contacting
    member is stationary and the window pane is movable relative thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 110+.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 270.

    83,     Cutting, subclass 168 for cleaning of tool or work, and subclass
    169 for lubrication of tool or work.

    100,    Presses, subclass 112 for presses having drain means for expressed
    liquid in which there is drainage through or along a pressure surface and
    there is a cleaner or clearer for the drainage means.

    101,    Printing, subclasses 154, 155+ and 167+.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 100+ for coating apparatus having a
    solid member acting on the coating on the work, and see section IX of the
    class definition of Class 118 for the line between Class 15 and Class 118.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclass 9.1, 11.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclass 74.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 91 for a rotary heat transfer drum with a
    drum surface scraper.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 12 for cleaning
    devices for moving portions of mechanism for unearthing plants or buried
    objects.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 606+ and see the subclasses there noted
    for cleaners attached to earth working apparatus.

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclass 496 for a brush, and subclasses
    497+ for a scraper, contacting a component of a conveyor.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 369+ and 391+ for
    movable filters having residue discharging or cleaning means.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses, especially subclasses 166+ and see section 12 of the class
    definition of that class (241) for the line.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 158+.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 72+.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 196 for a removably mounted blade type harvesting means in a
    molding apparatus, subclasses 218+ for a female mold and scraping means
    cooperating with the mold orifice, subclass 223 for an endless surface
    casting means and cooperating harvesting means and subclasses 225+ for
    molding apparatus with a separate apparatus cleaning means.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclass 92.


CLS 15/256.51
TXT Apparatus under subclass 256.5 in which the working surface to be cleaned
    is a rotating cylindrical member and the cleaning means is in actual
    physical contact with the moving surface to be cleaned.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles: Fiber Preparation, subclasses 262+ for roll clearing
    means in which no actual physical contact is claimed. Many patents for the
    catching of "fly" or fugitive fibers are placed here.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 91 for a rotary heat exchanger drum with a
    surface scraper.


CLS 15/256.52
TXT Apparatus under subclass 256.51 in which the cleaning means for the working
    surface turns about its own axis.


CLS 15/256.53
TXT Apparatus under subclass 256.51 in which the cleaning means for the working
    surface moves to and fro in relation to the working surface.


CLS 15/256.6
TXT Apparatus under subclass 256.5 in which the moving surface contacted by the
    cleaning member is a strand.

    (1)     Note.  Most of the devices classified herein are clothesline
    cleaners.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 370+ for a reeling
    device of general use.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclass 92
    for a cleaner for a power transmission belt.


CLS 15/257.01
TXT ACCESSORIES:
    Apparatus under the class definition having of themselves no brushing,
    scrubbing, or general cleaning function, but which are merely accessory or
    ancillary to a machine or implement involving such function, without
    falling under any previous specific subclass in this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclasses 70+ for a shield used to
    protect a shoe.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 504+ for a work shield used in
    cooperation with a coating device.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclass 129 for a kneeling pad
    used in a scrubbing operation combined with other structure such as a
    receptacle for a scrub pail or soap and subclass 230 for a kneeling pad,
    per se.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 209+ for a receptacle
    which houses a brush or sponge in an ancillary medium, subclasses 361+ for
    a container for a bristle-like implement, and subclass 576 for a receptacle
    for a vacuum cleaner and associated attachments, wherein the receptacle is
    used to store the vacuum cleaner when not in use.

    211,    Supports: Racks, subclasses 65+ for a brush rack.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 110+ for a brush or broom support.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 3.5 for a hand
    tray for holding mortar.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 206+ for a cabinet for a
    brush, broom, or mop.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclass 15 for a splash
    guard for a coating implement.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclass 417 for a debris receptacle
    for chalk dust attached to a chalk board.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 442+ for a work shield used with an abrading
    tool.


CLS 15/257.05
TXT Apparatus under subclass 257 wherein a material supply containing means, or
    attachment or accessory therefor, is so constructed as to facilitate
    "loading" of a coating implement with a desired amount of coating material,
    e.g., immersion gauge, wiping surface, etc., said coating implement being
    of the type which has no supply means operatively connected thereto or
    supported thereon.

    (1)     Note.  Scraper attachments will be found in the proper receptacle
    subclass, Class 220, Receptacles, subclass 90 or Class 215, Bottles and
    Jars, subclasses 390+, unless the implement is shaped during use of the
    scraper by means other than mere single-edge wiping engagement therewith,
    in which case the device will be found in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  When the implement is claimed the patent will be classified
    in this class subclasses 517+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    610,    for an applicator adjustably secured to the container closure
    whereby immersion of the work contacting means can be regulated.


CLS 15/257.06
TXT Apparatus under subclass 257.05 in which the "loading" means is disclosed
    as being intended for use with a cylindrically shaped coating roller.


CLS 15/257.07
TXT Apparatus under subclass 257.05 wherein the supply containing means is
    adapted to contain ink.

    (1)     Note.  The apparatus will be recognized as a dispenser for Class
    222, Dispensing, when means for receiving and loading a pen is a trap
    chamber as defined in section 11 (see, particularly, clause (1) of the
    first paragraph), of the definition of Class 222; i.e., said means not only
    separates a quantity of ink from the contained supply but maintains it
    (indefinitely) for access thereto by a penpoint.

    (2)     Note.  This, the principal subclass, includes patents to devices
    (1) containing a supply of pigment and (2) means for retaining a liquid
    vehicle in a position to permit contact with the pigment for solution
    therewith or dispersal therein to make ink.  A patent disclosing such a
    device, but classified in an indented subclass herein below because of
    (further) novelty relevant to the indented subclass, must be
    cross-referenced in this subclass (257.07).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclass 26.2 for an
    inkwell which is attached to a horizontally disposed surface of a desk.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 20.5 for the combination of a pen and a source of ink, which
    source has means for producing force to move material from the source to
    the pen for application, by the pen, to a surface remote from the source;
    and see Class 401, Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses
    118+, for a correspondingly comprehensive combination, but which includes
    no material-moving force-producing means in the source (although it may be
    present in the pen).

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 69.2+ for the combination of an ink
    receptacle and a pen support.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, and 220, Receptacles, appropriate subclasses for
    an inkwell without pen-loading facilities structure to distinguish it,
    respectively, from any other general utility bottle or jar, or from a
    general utility receptacle.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 576+ for dispensing inkwells; i.e.,
    including a supply of ink and a trap chamber which is a dip well for
    receiving ink in the following manner: subclasses 578+, by nongravity means
    subclass 583, by dipping into the supply; subclass 584, by tilting the
    entire organization; and subclasses 585+, by barometric feed.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 232 for cabinet structure
    which includes an inkwell.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 118+. (See the
    search note to Class 141, above).


CLS 15/257.072
TXT Apparatus under subclass 257.07 wherein the containing means comprises a
    chamber for the supply, depressible means including ink-receiving structure
    for receiving and loading a pen, and a resilient membrane which supports
    said depressible receiving and loading means, whereby depression of the
    receiving and loading means which ensues by force of contact with a coating
    implement results in a corresponding depression of the membrane, thus
    producing a force upon the material supply to move a portion of said supply
    into the receiving and loading means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 20.5 for the combination of a manually manipulated applicator
    (e.g., fountain pen) and a source of coating material from which the
    applicator is removable for independent use, which source has means for
    producing force to move material to the applicator to fill the applicator.


CLS 15/257.073
TXT Apparatus under subclass 257.07 which includes gauge means adapted to
    contact a pen so as to indicate or control the depth of penetration of the
    penpoint into the supply of coating material.

    (1)     Note.  A portion of a bottom of  the material-supply-containing
    means at a level higher than the remainder of said bottom wall may
    constitute gauge means for this subclass.

    (2)     Note. A float, atop a receding column if coating material, which
    float, though intended to contact the tool portion of the implement,
    permits the tool to be moved therepast for immersion within the supply, is
    considered to be (self) adjustable gauge means for this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclass 127 for an
    applicator adjustably connected to a closure of a supply container so as to
    control the extent of immersibility of the tool of the applicator into the
    supply.


CLS 15/257.074
TXT Apparatus under subclass 257.07 wherein the containing means comprises a
    chamber which has a continuously open access guide compartment for a pen
    depending into the chamber, and baffle structure surrounding the guide
    compartment, extending a substantial distance into the chamber and spaced
    from the sides thereof, thereby preventing accidental flows out of the
    containing means when tilted.


CLS 15/257.075
TXT Apparatus under subclass 257.07 including a closure which is movable to an
    open position by pressure of the pen thereagainst, thus permitting access
    of said pen to the supply, which closure is biased so as to move to a
    closed position upon removal of the pen from contact therewith.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 69.3 for the combination of an ink
    receptacle having a closure normally biased to open position, and a pen
    rack which is so related to the receptacle closure as to keep it in closed
    position when a pen rests on the rack.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 127 for implement-opened access means to the
    dip well of a dispensing inkwell.


CLS 15/257.076
TXT Apparatus under subclass 257.07 wherein the containing means has a bottom
    wall which is recessed or compartmentalized to divide said means into a
    locus for the major quantity of the supply of ink and another locus
    accessible to the pen and adapted to continuously received ink along said
    bottom wall from said first locus.

    (1)     Note.  A patent to supply means which has a bottom wall which
    slopes or is recessed in such a way as to present the deepest portion
    thereof as the access locus will be placed in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 576+, for dispensing inkwells, i.e., wherein
    the applicator loading zone is a trap chamber as defined in section 11
    (clause 1) of the definition of that class.


CLS 15/257.1
TXT Device under subclass 257 comprising a receptacle having a tapering front
    or mouth edge adapted to rest against a surface, into which debris is
    collected from the surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 49+ for
    shovels which engage and lift material.


CLS 15/257.2
TXT Device under subclass 257.1 having means for attaching a brush or broom
    thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104.8,  for a receiver with a cleaning implement which coact concurrently.


CLS 15/257.3
TXT Device under subclass 257.1 having an inlet for receiving, and a separate
    outlet from which is discharged, the debris.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    232,    Deposit and Collection Receptacles, subclasses 43.1+ for other
    deposit and collection receptacles having separate openings.


CLS 15/257.4
TXT Device under subclass 257.1 wherein the receptacle upon being raised from
    the surface, rotates by force of gravity to place its mouth generally
    upwardly.


CLS 15/257.5
TXT Device under subclass 257.1 having a portion engageable by the foot of the
    user serving as a rest or actuator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 60 for shovels
    provided with foot pieces.


CLS 15/257.6
TXT Device under subclass 257.1 provided with a movable closure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 220+ for other metallic receptacles
    provided with closures.


CLS 15/257.7
TXT Device under subclass 257.1 provided with a handle constructed so that it
    may be (1) adjustable in one of several positions with respect to the
    receptacle, (2) movable relatively to the receptacle, or (3) readily
    detachable from the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257.4,  for a receptacle pivotally mounted on a handle to gravitate to a
    material retaining position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 57 for handles
    applied to shovels.


CLS 15/257.8
TXT Device under subclass 257.1 wherein the receptacle has a foot, prop or spur
    projecting downwardly from its rear portion a distance greater than any
    structure at its front portion.


CLS 15/257.9
TXT Device under subclass 257.1 in which the front or mouth edge is flexible or
    resilient, or is reenforced, or has a separate auxiliary front edge member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 56 for an
    attachment applied to the edge of a shovel.


CLS 15/258
TXT Kits, cases or containers having a blacking-box and one or more implements,
    at least one of which is a brush or wiper.

    (1)     Note.  These devices are distinguished from those under subclasses
    500+, in this class, by the fact that normally no claimed implement is
    exposed for use.


CLS 15/259
TXT Devices for seizing, holding, and manipulating blacking-boxes with or
    without means for opening and closing them.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 258.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 81, Tools, particularly subclasses 3.31, 3.32 and
    3.39 for apparatus for holding receptacles during removal of the closure.

    (3)     Note.  See Class 220, Receptacles, appropriate subclasses for the
    blacking-box, per se, subclasses 752+ for blacking-box handles, and
    subclasses 260+ for opening devices.

    (4)     Note.  See Class 294, Handling: Hand and Hoist-Line Implements,
    subclasses 27.1+.


CLS 15/260
TXT Wringers for mops other than those using presser-boards, rollers, or
    twisting devices.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 261, 262 and 263.

    (2)     Note. See Class 68, Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses
    241+.

    (3)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 116, 119 and 120.

    (4)     Note. See Class 100, Presses, appropriate subclasses for presses
    not elsewhere provided for, and especially subclasses 104+ for presses
    having drain means for expressed liquid, not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 15/261
TXT Mop-wringers in which the mop is squeezed between flat boards or plates.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 241.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 214+ for reciprocating platen presses not
    otherwise provided for.


CLS 15/262
TXT Mop-wringers employing one or more pressure-rollers for squeezing moisture
    from the mop.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 244+.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 155+ for concurrent pressing and conveying
    presses of the roller type, and not elsewhere provided for.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roller, per se, not elsewhere provided for,
    and see the notes thereunder.


CLS 15/263
TXT Mop-wringers having means for twisting the mop to squeeze out the moisture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116.1+, for a mop and wringer in combination with a brush.

    120.1+, for a mop in combination with a twister.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 243.


CLS 15/264
TXT Bucket-type receptacles especially adapted for cleaning by scrubbing--i.e.,
    the use of a cleaning-brush or equivalent with a cleaning liquid.


CLS 15/265
TXT Stands or supports adapted to receive and support boots or shoes while
    being cleaned, blacked, or polished on the feet of the wearer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 188.01+ for a chair or seat having a
    footrest provided with a receptacle of general utility, and subclasses
    423.1+ for a footrest associated with a chair.


CLS 15/266
TXT Shoe-blacking stands having special guides for a strip of polishing fabric
    as it is reciprocated by the operator.


CLS 15/267
TXT Shoe-blacking stands having special clamps for holding boots or shoes in
    position while being polished.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 30+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, appropriate subclasses for devices for
    supporting shoes in general and which may be used to support them while
    they are being cleaned and polished.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 34.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 11.31+.


CLS 15/268
TXT Special supports for holding articles to be cleaned during the cleaning
    operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses. Class 269 is the residual
    locus for patents to a device for clamping, supporting and/or holding an
    article (or articles) in position to be operated on or treated. See notes
    thereunder for other related loci.


CLS 15/300.1
TXT With air blast or suction:
    Subject matter under subclass 3 having claimed structure functioning to
    contact a work piece or work surface with a draft of air, steam, or
    equivalent gaseous fluid for the purpose of dislodging or removing unwanted
    foreign material therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  In this and the indented subclasses, the term "air" is used
    generically to designate air, steam, or equivalent gaseous fluid.

    (2)     Note.  The draft of air need not be the primary cleaning or
    dislodging means; this and the indented subclasses include devices wherein
    means are provided for brushing, beating, shaking, or otherwise
    manipulating the work to dislodge the foreign material and wherein the
    draft of air acts to convey away the material so dislodged, or any portion
    thereof, provided only that the draft of air must contact the work.

    (3)     Note.  Where an air draft is used as a means to feed material to or
    discharge material from an art device, the patent is in general classified
    with the device, even though a vacuum pickup is used on an ambulatory
    device; except that a gas separator of the Class 96 type is classified in
    this class (15) if claimed in combination with means for applying an
    air-draft to a workpiece or work surface.

    (4)     Note.  Where an air draft functions to perfect the operation of an
    art device, the patent is classified with the art device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21.1    through 103.5, for a device wherein a mechanical work contactor of
    the character provided for there  delivers the foreign material to a place
    of collection not on the work surface and from which place an air draft is
    utilized to convey the material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, especially subclasses 124+ for a cutlery device combined
    with air blast or suction means for collecting or disposing of the severed
    material, and see (4) Note above.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, for gas or vapor
    contact for drying, and see (3) Note in the main class definition of Class
    34 for a further statement of the line.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 139+ and 141
    for air-blast or suction devices disclosed solely for trapping or
    destroying insects.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 21 and 63 for an  apparatus having
    gas blast means to remove or spread coating material.

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 244 for an apparatus for cleaning a smoking
    device by the use of an air draft.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 363+ for a suction
    device for use in a paper making machine.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 57+ for a means to drive or
    impact a tool or the like having a work cleansing modification, such as a
    means to supply air or other fluid to the tool or work surface, or a
    suction source.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 209+ for a means
    engaging a bore entrance for receiving or directing cuttings moved by an
    air blast or suction combined with an earth boring means.  The mere
    recitation in a claim of means on said bore entrance engaging means for
    supporting or accommodating an earth boring or penetrating tool or tool
    shaft is sufficient for classification in Class 175.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 495 for a conveyor having
    installed as part of its structure a means for applying a cleaning fluid to
    a component of the conveyor.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, The line is as follows:
    This and the indented subclasses in Class 15 take discharge or suction
    nozzles for air, steam or equivalent gaseous fluid which are disclosed
    solely for cleaning and which are combined with claimed means for (1)
    handling or supporting the work, or (2) supporting or spacing the nozzle
    from the work, or combined with claimed cleaning devices such as brushes,
    scrapers, wipers, beaters, shotters or the like.  Class 239 takes nozzle
    (discharge or suction) structures, per se, of the character indicated in
    subclasses 525+, 548+, 569+, 586, and 589+ in that class even though
    disclosed solely for cleaning by the use of gaseous fluids, except that, as
    stated above, Class 15 takes a nozzle device which functions to contact or
    to engage the work, such contact or engagement usually serving to promote
    or perfect the cleaning operation.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, for an apparatus for conveying material
    by a gaseous fluid including material pickup, not specialized for cleaning.

    417,    Pumps, appropriate subclasses, for the pump subcombination of an
    air blast or suction cleaner.  This and the indented subclasses in Class 15
    take an air or gas pump claimed in combination with a suction or a blast
    applying nozzle means, disclosed for cleaning, and also take a pump
    disclosed which functions to contact or engage the work to promote or
    perfect the cleaning operation.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, for a rotary expansible chamber
    device, per se, and see the above note to Class 417.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 313+ for means for removing an impurity from
    the skin by vacuum or suction.


CLS 15/301
TXT Cleaning apparatus under subclass 300 in which the apparatus as a whole,
    when completely assembled and operating as a cleaner, is nonmobile or fixed
    in position, or is installed in or attached to a structure for the cleaning
    thereof.

    (1)     Note. The air-draft applying means may itself be mobile during the
    cleaning operation, so long as the air-pump or supply remains fixed, and
    either or both the air-draft applying means and air pump or supply may be
    detachable when not cleaning.

    (2)     Note.  In this and the indented subclasses are placed, for example,
    patents for vacuum cleaning systems installed in or on buildings, vehicles,
    or art devices or structures for the cleaning thereof and including only so
    much of the building, vehicle, or device as is necessary to the operation,
    support, or location of the cleaning apparatus, with respect to that
    portion of the building, vehicle, or device being cleaned.

    (3)     Note.  The line with Class 122, Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, is:
    Class 122 takes air or steam cleaners for boiler structure where any part
    of the boiler or furnace structure is modified to cooperate with the
    cleaner for the support or functioning thereof and such modification is
    claimed.  The same line is followed with Classes; 122, Liquid Heaters and
    Vaporizers; 165, Heat Exchange; 196, Mineral Oils: Apparatus; and 202,
    Distillation: Apparatus; 422, Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting,
    Deodorizing, Preserving, or Sterilizing.  This and the indented subclasses
    in Class 15 take soot blowers when disclosed as being the type usually
    permanently connected with a boiler or other heat exchanger but claiming no
    modification of the boiler or heat exchanger.

    (4)     Note.  Mere ventilating hoods or off-takes are not here included
    but in general are classified with the art device with which associated;
    see Search Classes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    336,    for convertible cleaners, mostly of the "Air-Way" type, having
    racks, brackets, or the like for supporting the cleaner while in use for
    off-floor cleaning.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles: Manufacturing, subclass 292, especially subclass 294 for
    bobbin strippers employing air blast or suction means to assist in thread
    removal.

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 124+ for cutters combined with vacuum pickup
    for the cuttings and see (2) Note above and (4) Note subclass 1.

    57,     Textiles: Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 300 and 306,
    and see (2) Note.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 379+ and see (3) Note.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 550 and see (4) Note.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 252.1+ and see (4) Note.

    165,    Heat Exchange, see (3) Note.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, (see (3) Note).

    202,    Distillation: Apparatus, see (3) Note.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, appropriate subclasses, see (3) Note.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 451+ for a guard or housing for an abrading
    machine, and see (4) Note above.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 49+ for hoods and off-takes generally and
    see (4) Note.


CLS 15/302
TXT Apparatus under subclass 301 having means to apply a liquid and/or
    particulate or comminuted solid cleaning material to the work.

    (1)     Note.  See definition Note (5) of Class 134 with reference to Class
    15 for a statement of the line with Class 134.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, for apparatus for cleaning
    textile materials when using a liquid. For a complete statement of the line
    relative to Class 68, see the reference to this class (15) in the Note to
    the main class definition of Class 68.


CLS 15/303
TXT Cleaning apparatus under subclass 301 substantially permanently located and
    in which the work is handled, as by presenting it to a nonmobile cleaning
    station or device either by hand or by guiding or supporting or conveying
    means, or in which the work is confined in or attached to a carrier and is
    operated on by a draft of air while so confined or attached.


CLS 15/304
TXT Cleaning apparatus under subclass 303 specially constructed to clean the
    interior surfaces of hollow work or of passages or cavities in the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    406+,   for manipulable air-blast devices for cleaning hollow work such as
    boiler flues.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 43 for air blast or suction devices for
    turning inside out articles of wearing apparel, bags, or tubular fabrics
    where there are no additional means for cleaning.


CLS 15/305
TXT Cleaning apparatus under subclass 303 in which the work is tumbled about
    within a drum or cage which is mounted for rotation on a horizontal or
    inclined axis.

    (1)     Note.  The drum or cage may have vanes or the like to cause
    circulation or movement of air in contact with the contained work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 108+ for
    rotary drum driers.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 20 for tumbler type
    textile washing machines including air drying.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclass 30 for rotary drum fur fluid
    treating apparatus.

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 305 for rotary drum tobacco fluid treating
    apparatus.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 295 for
    rotating drum sifters with pneumatic agitation means.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 326+ for a rotary drum tumbling device for
    abrading.


CLS 15/306.1
TXT With means to guide or move the work to or through a cleaning station or
    treating means:Subject matter under subclass 303 having means to guide or
    move the work to or through operative relation with the cleaning station or
    device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310,    for an apparatus wherein the work is entirely manually guided or
    moved.


CLS 15/307
TXT Apparatus under subclass 306 in which there are means for adjusting or
    allowing for various widths of work presented to the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  The adjustment may be made on the air draft feature or on
    any component of the apparatus such as brushes or beaters.

    (2)     Note.  The work is usually running lengths of material.


CLS 15/308
TXT Apparatus under subclass 306 in which the action of the air draft is
    supplemented by work-contacting or work-manipulating means for dislodging
    foreign material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    363+,   for noninstalled cleaners having air blast and/or suction and work
    agitator means.


CLS 15/309
TXT Apparatus under subclass 308 having means for performing two or more
    diverse agitating operations on the work.


CLS 15/309.1
TXT Indefinite length article:
    Subject matter under subclass 306.1 having means to move a continuous
    workpiece to or through the cleaning station.


CLS 15/309.2
TXT Plurality of discrete articles:
    Subject matter under subclass 306.1 having means to move more than one
    identical workpiece to or through the cleaning station one after the other.


CLS 15/310
TXT Cleaning apparatus under subclass 303 in which the work is manually moved
    to and held in operative relation with the cleaning station or device.


CLS 15/311
TXT Apparatus under subclass 310 including a moving agitator such as a brush, a
    beater, a shaker or the like.


CLS 15/312.1
TXT With fixed guide for ambulant air draft applying means:
    Subject matter under subclass 301 wherein the air draft applying means is
    arranged for bodily ambulatory or translatory movement and is guided by
    structure attached to or made part of the building, vehicle, machine or
    device being contacted by the air draft.

    (1)     Note.  Devices such as reaction whirlers wherein a nonambulatory
    air draft applying means is mounted for rotation about a fixed axis, are
    excluded from this subclass even though the air nozzles may be mounted at
    the outer ends of radially extending arms or the like.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 750 for a fluid
    discharging device having ambulatory distributing means with relatively
    fixed guides.


CLS 15/312.2
TXT Flexible tube:
    Subject matter under subclass 312.1 wherein the air draft applying means
    includes a bendable cylindrical air guiding member.


CLS 15/313
TXT Apparatus under subclass 301 installed in a vehicle such as an automobile
    or aircraft and designed to be used for the cleaning thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The motion of the vehicle through the ambient air may be the
    source of power for pumping the air, or an air pump may be driven by some
    part of the vehicle or the pump may be self-reliant such as spring-motor
    operated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    340,    for power propelled vehicles or carriers designed for transporting
    cleaning apparatus used for the cleaning of work other than the vehicle or
    carrier, for example, street cleaners.


CLS 15/314
TXT Apparatus under subclass 301 in which a hand held or manipulatable air
    draft applying means is mounted on or carried by a flexible conduit
    connected to a relatively stationary air pump or source of air supply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327,    for mobile or portable "tank type" cleaning apparatus; that is,
    cleaners of the character defined above but wherein the air pump or supply
    is carried about by the operator, or is movable by the operator by force
    applied thereto through the flexible conduit.


CLS 15/315
TXT Apparatus under subclass 314 having provisions for storing the conduit so
    that it can be extended from such storage position for application of the
    applying means to the work to be cleaned.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the conduit is stored on a reel or drum and is
    released for use by check-controlled apparatus; frequently the device is in
    a cabinet or the like suitable for placing in a washroom or entrance
    hallway for grooming clothing on a person.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323,    for ambulatory cleaning devices having provisions for stowage of
    items such as air hose.


CLS 15/316.1
TXT Air blast only (e.g., boiler soot-blower):
    Apparatus under subclass 301 wherein the sole cleaning agency is a stream
    of air forced from a source of higher-than-atmospheric pressure.

    (1)     Note.  A soot-blower is located in this and indented subclasses
    when disclosed as being of the type installed in a boiler but claiming no
    modification of the boiler.  See (3) Note under subclass 301 for a further
    statement of the line and reference to other classes involving cleaning of
    tube type heat exchanging apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    314,    for a soot-blower having a flexible conduit between the air source
    and the applying means.

    405,    for a cleaning apparatus utilizing an air blast as the sole
    cleaning agency, and not fixed or installed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, particularly subclasses 390+ for a
    fluid agency cleaning device combined with boiler structure.  See (1) Note
    above.


CLS 15/317
TXT Apparatus under subclass 316 having provisions for cooling the blower
    element, as by a draft of air or steam, or in which the blower is retracted
    or folded against or embedded in the furnace wall in nonblowing position
    and is projected or moved therefrom during the cleaning operation, or is
    otherwise protected from the furnace heat.


CLS 15/318
TXT Apparatus under subclass 316 in which the blower element is movable and the
    fluid supply control is interlocked therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    317,    for blowers movable to blowing position from an embedded,
    retracted, or protected nonblowing position in which the means for
    operating the fluid supply valve in interlocked with the means for
    projecting and retracting the blowing nozzle.


CLS 15/318.1
TXT Sequence control:
    Subject matter under subclass 316.1 comprising means performing two or more
    operations (e.g., two or more air blowers, a blower and a work mover, etc.)
    and means to control the time or order of the operations.


CLS 15/319
TXT Cleaning apparatus under subclass 300 having means continuously operative
    to sense a condition or change of conditions and functioning to operate or
    control the apparatus to establish and/or maintain a condition or operation
    thereof as a result of the sensing.

    (1)     Note.  The condition sensed may be the presence or absence of a
    work piece or portion thereof or may be a physical condition of the work
    such as thickness. However, work-operated or work-sensing devices are not
    considered to be automatic unless the operating or sensing functions are
    continuous. Thus, nozzle adjustments for ambulant floor-type vacuum
    cleaners which function in a cyclic manner to sense the surface of the rug
    or floor and to adjust the nozzle for the condition sensed, but which are
    effective only when the cycle is set in operation by the attendant, are
    considered to be nonautomatic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    307,    for installed or fixed position cleaners having work-operated or
    work-sensing controls.

    354+,   for nozzle adjusting means nonautomatic in character, and see (1)
    note above.


CLS 15/320
TXT Cleaning apparatus under subclass 300 having means to apply liquid and/or
    particulate or comminuted solid cleaning material to the work.

    (1)     Note.  Many of these devices pick up the liquid or other cleaning
    material by air draft means, such pickup being the only air draft contact
    with the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 75+ for sandblast apparatus.


CLS 15/321
TXT Cleaning apparatus under subclass 320 in which a hand manipulated
    work-contacting device is attached by flexible conduit means to a portable
    air pump and/or material supply unit.

    (1)     Note.  The air pump and material supply unit is considered to be
    portable only if it is movable by a force applied thereto by the operator
    through the flexible conduit, or if it can be carried about by the
    operator, while the pump is operating so that the cleaning operation can be
    carried on continuously.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327,    for similar devices without liquid or other cleaning material
    application.


CLS 15/322
TXT Nozzle devices under subclass 320 having means to supply water or other
    cleaning material to the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    415+,   for other elemental cleaning devices in the form of air-draft
    applying nozzles.


CLS 15/323
TXT Cleaning apparatus under subclass 300 (1) having stowage facilities, or (2)
    combined with a rack or cabinet to provide stowage facilities, for stowing
    items used in connection with the operation or maintenance of the cleaner.

    (1)     Note.  The items to be stowed may be separable, such as nozzles, or
    may be items such as electric cords normally attached to the cleaner.

    (2)     Note.  A rack or cabinet for stowing an entire cleaner and its
    accessory items is included here provided that the arrangement is such that
    the cleaner may be operated and used for cleaning purposes while associated
    with the rack or cabinet.

    (3)     Note.  The line with Class 211, Supports:  Racks, is that in order
    to be classified herein there must be claimed features of the association
    of the cleaner with the rack or cabinet which cause or permit the cleaning
    apparatus to function as a cleaner while associated therewith. The same
    line is followed with Classes 280, Land Vehicles, and 312, Supports:
    Cabinet Structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257.01, for racks or cabinets, per se, for air draft cleaning apparatus
    wherein the disclosure indicates a contemplated use of the said air draft
    cleaning apparatus while associated with the rack or cabinet.

    301+,   particularly 315, for cleaning apparatus built into a rack,
    cabinet, or other supporting structure for stationary or nonambulatory
    service.

    327,    for tank-type cleaner organizations not associated with a rack or
    cabinet.

    336,    for supports for air-conducting tubular handle cleaners convertible
    from on-floor to off-floor operations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    191,    Electricity: Transmission to Vehicles, for apparatus there provided
    for not restricted to air draft cleaning apparatus.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, see (3) Note.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, for a wound-type storage facility.

    280,    Land Vehicles, see (3) Note.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, see (3) Note.


CLS 15/324
TXT Cleaning apparatus under subclass 300 having means to illuminate the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 139 and 141
    for air blast and/or suction devices disclosed solely for trapping and/or
    destroying insects where an illuminator functions to attract the insects.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 91 for vacuum cleaners with illuminating
    means, and see the definition and notes thereto for a statement of the line.


CLS 15/325
TXT Cleaning apparatus under subclass 300 having means functioning to protect
    the nozzle or other parts thereof and/or to prevent marring of furniture or
    walls during normal use of the apparatus when it is moved into contact with
    the furniture or walls or the like.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for carpet sweepers (nonair-draft) having cushioning devices
    mounted thereon to prevent injury to furniture or walls in the operation of
    the sweeper.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    293,    Vehicle Fenders, subclasses 102+ for bumpers for mounting on land
    vehicles.


CLS 15/326
TXT Cleaning apparatus under subclass 300 having means specially designed to
    muffle the noise of the air being discharged by the air pump.

    (1)     Note.  So-called dust traps in the form of short tubes extending
    into a filter bag from the pump exhaust opening act in a degree as mufflers
    but have not been classified in this subclass unless the muffling function
    has been claimed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclass 231 for fluid conducting or guiding mufflers,
    per se.

    417,    Pumps, subclass 312 for pumps combined with a muffler for acting on
    the fluid handled by the pump.


CLS 15/327.1
TXT Tank type cleaner organization:
    Subject matter under subclass 300.1 wherein a hand manipulatable air draft
    applying means, with or without means for agitating the surface being
    cleaned, is attached by means of a flexible conduit to a portable air
    pumping unit or source of air pressure.

    (1)     Note.  The pump unit is considered to be portable only if it is
    movable by a force applied thereto by the operator through the flexible
    conduit, or if it can be carried about by the operator, while the pump is
    operating so that the cleaning operation can be carried on continuously.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    314,    for a cleaning apparatus of this character wherein the pump unit or
    pressure source is relatively stationary and not movable by the operator
    while cleaning.

    321,    for a tank type system including the use of a supply of water or
    other cleaning material.


CLS 15/327.2
TXT Casing feature:
    Subject matter under subclass 327.1 wherein significance is attributed to
    the machine housing (e.g., covers, latches, handles, mounting means for
    internal mechanisms, etc.).


CLS 15/327.3
TXT Air float or support:
    Subject matter under subclass 327.2 having means to support the casing on
    air.


CLS 15/327.4
TXT Cleaner encircling roller:
    Subject matter under subclass 327.2 wherein the casing is supported by
    wheels whose diameters are greater than the extension of the casing about
    the axis of the wheels.

    (1)     Note.  The wheels of this subclass type may be hemispherical, and
    two together may virtually enclose the casing.


CLS 15/327.5
TXT Off-the-floor support (e.g., operator supported):
    Subject matter under subclass 327.2 having a handle or means to attach the
    housing to a person or to some other object.


CLS 15/327.6
TXT Vertically aligned motor and filter:
    Subject matter under subclass 327.1 having means to drive a pump to create
    the draft of air, and passive means, mounted above or below the drive
    means, to separate the material removed from the workpiece and the air
    draft in which the material is borne.


CLS 15/327.7
TXT Horizontally aligned motor and filter:
    Subject matter under subclass 327.1 having means to drive a pump to create
    the draft of air, and passive means, mounted horizontally with respect to
    the drive means, to separate the material removed from the workpiece and
    the air draft in which the material is borne.


CLS 15/328
TXT Cleaning apparatus under subclass 300, which, by addition or removal or
    change in position of parts, may be converted in whole or in part (1) to
    noncleaning apparatus, or (2) to cleaning apparatus without air-draft
    means; also, cleaners capable of applying an air-draft in two or more
    distinct types of operations, each being exercised alternatively and
    selected by addition or removal or change in position of parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    368+,   particularly 373, for air-draft cleaners employing a
    work-contacting agitator which is adjustable to a position of noncontact.


CLS 15/329
TXT Cleaning apparatus under subclass 328 which is self-contained and may be
    held in the hand and manipulated for cleaning upholstery and the like, and
    may be converted, as by the addition of a long handle, for example, for
    manipulation on a floor or rug by a walking attendant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    344,    for nonconvertible "upholstery" type cleaners.


CLS 15/330
TXT Apparatus under subclass 328 having provisions for applying selectively and
    alternatively suction of air blast.


CLS 15/331
TXT Cleaning apparatus under subclass 328 having a plurality of alternatively
    usable provisions for applying an air draft and including means to select
    one or more of such means.

    (1)     Note.  For the purpose of this and the indented subclasses, the
    provisions for applying may be a mere port or orifice or may include a
    flexible conduit with or without a cleaning tool on the working end; the
    selecting means may be a movable closure for a port.


CLS 15/332
TXT Apparatus under subclass 331 in which means are provided for interlocking
    or connecting an agitator and/or air pump with the means for converting so
    that conversion or selection acts to initiate, stop or alter the operation
    of the agitator or air pump.

    (1)     Note.  In many patents in this and the indented subclass, the
    agitator is interlocked so as to preclude operation thereof in contact with
    the work except when a cleaning function including use of the agitator has
    been selected.

    (2)     Note.  Where an air draft diverter only is interlocked so as to be
    controlled by conversion or selection, the patent is classified below on
    other than the interlock feature, such as on the diversion feature in
    subclasses 334+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334+,   for cleaners wherein a diverter valve functions to divert the air
    flow from one to another air-draft applying means. See (2) Note.


CLS 15/333
TXT Apparatus under subclass 332 wherein the nozzle is raised out of contact
    with the work.


CLS 15/334
TXT Apparatus under subclass 331 having a floor nozzle as one of the air-draft
    provisions and in which the conversion or selection results in diverting or
    cutting off the air flow through the floor nozzle.


CLS 15/335
TXT Apparatus under subclass 334 having a tubular handle through which air may
    be caused to flow as a result of diverting or cutting off the flow through
    the floor nozzle.


CLS 15/336
TXT Apparatus under subclass 335 having means in the nature of supports for
    rendering the apparatus more stable for use as an off-floor cleaner.

    (1)     Note.  The supports may be attached to and carried by the apparatus
    or may be in the nature of separate stands, brackets, or wall-mounted clips.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323,    for complete cleaners combined with a rack or cabinet having
    stowage for nozzles, wands, hoses, or similar air-draft applying
    accessories.


CLS 15/337
TXT Apparatus under subclass 334 in which the insertion or attachment of a
    separable, additive converter element results in diverting or cutting off
    the floor nozzle air flow.

    (1)     Note.  In some cases the converter element actuates mechanism which
    in turn operates a diverter or cut-off, while in other cases the element
    itself acts as a diverter or cut-off.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333,    for additive converter elements which divert or cut off floor
    nozzle air flow and also cause the floor nozzle to be raised off the floor.


CLS 15/338
TXT Cleaning apparatus under subclass 328 having a floor nozzle and an
    air-draft applying means conduit attachment for the open mouth of the
    nozzle.


CLS 15/339
TXT Apparatus under subclass 300, in which the means for cleaning is combined
    with apparatus for other purposes and not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  The combined features are other than power propulsion for
    ambulant cleaners (e.g., subclass 340), means to handle, store, or separate
    the dislodged dirt (e.g., subclass 347), or mechanical work agitating means
    (e.g., subclass 363).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 124+, especially subclass 133 for shears
    combined with material disposal by suction.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 500+ for electrical
    automatic condition responsive indicating systems.


CLS 15/340.1
TXT Power propelled vehicle or carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 in which power means are provided for
    propelling a mobile cleaner during cleaning operations.

    (1)     Note.  The power for propelling may be used also for operating the
    air pump and other operating elements.

    (2)     Note.  The tractive effort of a rotary or other moving
    work-contacting agitating element is not considered to be power propulsion.


CLS 15/340.2
TXT Maneuvered by walking attendant:

    Subject matter under subclass 340.1 having handle means such that an
    attendant walking on the ground may guide the vehicle or carrier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 19.3 for vehicles having a handle for
    guiding the vehicle.


CLS 15/340.3
TXT Including brush:

    Subject matter under subclass 340.1 having means for sweeping or loosening
    foreign material from the work surface.


CLS 15/340.4
TXT Plural brushes:

    Subject matter under subclass 340.3 having two or more brushes movable
    relative to each other.


CLS 15/341
TXT Cleaning apparatus under subclass 300 in which the air pump or fan is
    operated by traction or by manual means.

    (1)     Note.  Manual means here includes use of any part of the human body
    such as legs or shoulders as well as hands and arms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    388,    for traction operated work-contacting agitators where the claims do
    not include traction operation of the air pump.


CLS 15/342
TXT Apparatus under subclass 341 in which the air pump is a rotary air impeller.

    (1)     Note.  Many of these devices include one-way drive means to permit
    continuous rotation of the impeller while the cleaner is moved forward and
    backward over the work surface.


CLS 15/343
TXT Devices under subclass 342 in which the air impeller is rotated by
    hand-operated cranks or the like.


CLS 15/344
TXT Cleaning apparatus under subclass 300 having air-draft producing and
    applying means and a hand grip, and usually including dirt separating
    and/or storing means, wherein all the components are assembled into a rigid
    unit, the arrangement being such that when the apparatus is in use, it is
    (1) entirely supported by the operator, or (2) incapable of self-support in
    operative relation to the work if provided with a work-engaging carriage or
    mount so that it must be supported at least in part by means of the handle.

    (1)     Note.  These devices are the so-called "upholstery", "miniature",
    or "wand" types.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329,    for hand portable cleaners convertible to floor-type cleaners.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 112+ for toilet combs having an orifice for
    applying fluent material to the hair.


CLS 15/345
TXT Cleaning apparatus under subclass 300 functioning to apply at one time both
    an air blast and a suction of substantially the same area of work.


CLS 15/346
TXT Apparatus under subclass 345 in which the cleaning air is recirculated in a
    substantially closed circuit, usually the intake side of the pump being the
    source of suction and the outlet side being the source of pressure.


CLS 15/347
TXT Cleaning apparatus under subclass 300 having means for collecting or
    storing or handling the dislodged dust and dirt or for separating the dust
    and dirt from the air-draft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation: Apparatus, for air-dirt separating means even
    though claimed as vacuum cleaners where no air-draft applying means or
    other work-contacting cleaning means is included in the claims; and see (3)
    Note to the definition of subclass 300.1 in this class (15).

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, appropriate subclasses for fluid current
    conveying apparatus not specifically adapted for cleaning. See particularly
    subclasses 168+ for a material separating receptacle at a conveyor outlet.


CLS 15/348
TXT Apparatus under subclass 347 having means other than the air stream acting
    to assist in conveying the dirt set in motion by the air draft or by other
    dirt dislodging means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclasses 51+ for fluid current
    conveyors combined with other types of conveyors.


CLS 15/349
TXT Apparatus under subclass 347 having a rotary or other moving agitator and
    having pans, trays, or the like for catching the heavier dirt particles
    which have been set in motion initially by the movement of the agitator but
    which cannot be entrained or removed by the air stream.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    348,    for conveying means acting in addition to the air stream, the
    conveyor generally handling heavier and/or larger particles while the
    lighter particles remain entrained in the air stream.


CLS 15/350
TXT Hand manipulated apparatus under subclass 347 having a manipulating handle
    and an air-dirt separator, the separator being mounted on or attached at
    least in part to the handle.

    (1)     Note.  The separator and handle may be integrally constructed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    344,    for hand-held or wand type cleaners wherein the dirt separator is
    usually mounted on or attached to the hand grip portion of the cleaner.


CLS 15/351
TXT Apparatus under subclass 350 in which the handle is pivotally or otherwise
    movably mounted with respect to the air-stream outlet of the air-draft
    applying means, the arrangement requiring flexibility of the separator or
    of its connection to the exhaust outlet or to the handle.


CLS 15/352
TXT Apparatus under subclass 347 having provisions for cleaning the filter or
    other separator elements while assembled in the apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 282+ for separating media cleaning means
    and subclasses 428+ for storage or removal of residue.


CLS 15/353
TXT Apparatus under subclass 347 having liquid and/or deflection type
    separators.


CLS 15/354
TXT Cleaning apparatus under subclass 300 having an air-draft applying nozzle
    supported on a work-contacting carriage or mount, the nozzle being movable
    with respect to the carriage or mount.

    (1)     Note.  The carriage or mount must be other than or in addition to
    the nozzle lips, i.e., in addition to that portion of the nozzle defining
    the work-contacting area of the air draft.

    (2)     Note.  The movement of the nozzle may result in adjusting the
    vertical height or the lateral disposition thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333+,   for cleaners convertible from on- floor to off-floor cleaning in
    which the nozzle is raised when converted to off-floor cleaning.

    405+    and 415+, for devices such as tube cleaners having means
    functioning to engage the work for nonadjustably positioning the nozzle
    relative thereto.

    418,    for nozzles, per se, having provisions for adjusting the area of
    the mouth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 43+ for adjustable running gear for
    air-draft cleaning apparatus where no air-draft applying means is claimed.


CLS 15/355
TXT Apparatus under subclass 354 including a mechanical agitator which is
    adjustable relative to the nozzle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    356,    for nozzle supported agitators which are biased into contact with
    the work. The adjustment of the nozzle results in a simultaneous adjustment
    of the agitator.

    368+,   for agitators adjustable with respect to the nozzle but including
    no claimed feature of adjustability of the nozzle.


CLS 15/356
TXT Apparatus under subclass 355 having a work-contacting agitator and in which
    adjustment of the nozzle also causes adjustment of the agitator.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are patents for devices wherein a
    nozzle-supported agitator is biased into contact with the work surface, the
    result being that adjustment of the nozzle necessarily effects an
    adjustment of the agitator relative thereto.


CLS 15/357
TXT Apparatus under subclass 354 in which the nozzle adjustment is determined
    by the air pressure differential between the ambient atmosphere and the
    interior of the nozzle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    319,    for nozzle adjustment continuously controlled by a sensing device
    continuously responsive to the air pressure in the nozzle.


CLS 15/358
TXT Apparatus under subclass 354 having means functioning to sense the
    elevation of the plane of the covering or work surface with respect to the
    support-contacting plane of the nozzle mount and to adjust the nozzle to a
    predetermined or optimum elevation based on the sensed elevation.

    (1)     Note.  Where the sensing is continuous and the adjustment is
    continuously controlled thereby, the   operation is regarded as being
    automatic and the patent is classified in subclass 319.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    319,    see (1) Note.

    362,    for cleaners wherein the nozzle height  is controlled as a function
    of the surface penetration of the nozzle mount but the nozzle is not
    adjusted relative to the mount.


CLS 15/359
TXT Apparatus under subclass 354 in which the nozzle is biased or urged toward
    an extreme position with respect to the work surface, or is so mounted as
    to float, that is, follow the contour of irregular surfaces.

    (1)     Note.  The bias or floating feature must be continuously operative;
    where there is provided means to hold or retain the nozzle in a fixed
    position, the patent is classified in other subclasses of this group.


CLS 15/360
TXT Apparatus under subclass 359 in which the nozzle is biased or urged away
    from contact with the work.

    (1)     Note.  Usually downward pressure on the nozzle exerted through the
    manipulating handle, results in adjusting or varying the nozzle height.


CLS 15/361
TXT Apparatus under subclass 354 having a manipulating handle and in which the
    nozzle adjustment is controlled or operated by movement relative to the
    cleaner of the handle or means carried by or attached to the handle.


CLS 15/362
TXT Cleaning apparatus under subclass 300 having a nozzle supported on, and
    nonadjustable or fixed with respect to, a work-contacting carriage or
    mount, the work-contacting portion of the mount being constructed and
    arranged to compensate for or prevent penetration into carpet pile or other
    yielding surfaces to thereby maintain the nozzle at optimum or
    substantially uniform spacing from the top of the pile.


CLS 15/363
TXT Cleaning apparatus under subclass 300 of the kind adapted to be moved about
    over the surface being cleaned having, in addition to air draft applying
    means, means for brushing, beating, shaking, or otherwise contacting and
    agitating the work to dislodge and/or remove unwanted foreign material.

    (1)     Note.  Since nozzle lips usually have a floor covering pile
    agitating or deflecting action, the mere recitation of such is not
    considered to be significant agitator structure; but where the nozzle lips
    are modified to enhance their action as an agitator, classification will be
    in this or the indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250.01, for the combination of a wiper with air supplied to the work where
    the apparatus is adapted to be attached to a window.

    303+,   for fixed position cleaners having work agitating means.

    332+,   for cleaners convertible from on- floor to off-floor cleaning
    having an agitator and in which the agitator is disabled when converted to
    off-floor cleaning.

    404,    for devices wherein the air flow is pulsated to cause agitation of
    the work, there being no other work contacting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 124+ for cutlery devices combined with air
    blast or suction means for collecting or disposing of the severed material,
    as in plaster cast cutting devices.


CLS 15/364
TXT Apparatus under subclass 363 having means for performing two or more
    diverse agitating operations on the work.

    (1)     Note.  The agitating operations need not be performed
    simultaneously.

    (2)     Note.  Association of an agitator of the stationary type as defined
    in subclass 393 below, with a movable agitator is considered a diverse
    operations type for the purposes of this and the indented subclasses.


CLS 15/365
TXT Apparatus under subclass 364 having provisions for selecting the operation
    of any one or more of the diverse agitating means to the exclusion of the
    nonselected operations.

    (1)     Note.  An air draft must be utilized with each mode of operation,
    if a selected agitating operation is performed without an air draft, the
    device is considered to be convertible within the definition of subclass
    328; see section (2) therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    328,    see (1) Note.

    373,    for cleaners wherein the entire    agitating means may be retracted
    to a position of nonuse.


CLS 15/366
TXT Apparatus under subclass 364 in which the agitating is performed by rotary
    means only.


CLS 15/367
TXT Apparatus under subclass 364 in which the only agitating means claimed are
    relatively fixed, that is, having no movement during cleaning except that
    due to translation of the cleaner relative to the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    393,    for nondiverse type stationary agitators.


CLS 15/368
TXT Apparatus under subclass 363 in which the agitating means is movable
    relative to the air draft applying means for the purpose of adjusting its
    effectivity.

    (1)     Note.  Complete retraction of the agitating means to a position of
    nonuse is included in this and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    355+,   for devices where the nozzle also is adjustable with respect to its
    mount.


CLS 15/369
TXT Apparatus under subclass 368 wherein the position of the agitating means
    with respect to the nozzle is changed in response to translational movement
    of the nozzle as in forward and backward strokes used in cleaning floors.


CLS 15/370
TXT Apparatus under subclass 368 having a rotary agitator and including
    provisions for adjusting the work-contacting elements radially.

    (1)     Note.  The radial adjustment usually is to compensate for wear on
    the work-contacting elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179+,   particularly subclasses 182 and 183, for rotary agitators, per se,
    having radially adjustable work-contacting elements.


CLS 15/371
TXT Apparatus under subclass 368 in which the agitating means is yieldingly
    mounted with respect to the nozzle and biased outwardly thereof into
    contact with the work in normal positions of use during cleaning.


CLS 15/372
TXT Apparatus under subclass 371 in which the agitating is performed by rotary
    work-contacting elements.


CLS 15/373
TXT Apparatus under subclass 368 in which the agitating means may be adjusted
    to a position of nonuse, that is, out of contact with the work during
    normal cleaning use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332,    for convertible cleaners embodying an agitator interlock whereby
    conversion to off-floor cleaning also acts to retract the agitator.

    365,    for means for adjusting one of a plurality of diverse type
    agitation to a nonuse position.


CLS 15/374
TXT Apparatus under subclass 363 in which the agitator contacts the work along
    a line generally oblique to the normal path of movement of the cleaner.


CLS 15/375
TXT Apparatus under subclass 363 having air inlet means functioning to admit
    ambient air to the nozzle when the nozzle is in normal operating position
    with respect to the work, the additional air being other than that drawn
    through the work at the nozzle or drawn through the space between the work
    and the nozzle lips.

    (1)     Note.  The auxiliary air inlet generally functions to supply a
    quantity of air for moving the dirt dislodged by the agitator particularly
    when the main air draft through the nozzle mouth is severely reduced by
    sealing contact of the nozzle mouth with relatively nonporous work.

    (2)     Note.  The auxiliary air may function to operate air-driven
    turbines or the like.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    421,    for auxiliary air inlets to nozzles having no agitating means.


CLS 15/376
TXT Apparatus under subclass 375 in which the auxiliary air is admitted at such
    locations that it serves to sweep off or protect from dust and dirt
    agitator bearings and drive mechanism.


CLS 15/377
TXT Apparatus under subclass 363 in which the driving motor for the agitator is
    separate from the motor driving the air pumping means.

    (1)     Note.  Air motors for driving a movable agitator are not included
    herein but are classified according to the particular motion of the
    agitator in subclasses 380, 381, 382, and 387.


CLS 15/378
TXT Apparatus under subclass 363 having a guard to inhibit or prevent flexible
    work such as a rug being drawn into the nozzle and into too close contact
    with an agitator in the nozzle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    422,    for nozzles, per se, having work guards.


CLS 15/379
TXT Apparatus under subclass 363 wherein the lips of the air-draft applying
    nozzle have vibratory motion.

    (1)     Note.  The entire nozzle may be vibrated, or there may be flexible
    lips with means to vibrate them.


CLS 15/380
TXT Apparatus under subclass 363 in which the agitator moves in a plane
    generally parallel to flat work surfaces when the cleaner is in normal use
    position.

    (1)     Note.  There must be motion of the agitator relative to the work
    other than that due to translational motion of the cleaner relative to the
    work.


CLS 15/381
TXT Apparatus under subclass 363 in which the agitator is mounted for
    oscillating or to and fro arcuate movement to affect tangential contacting
    of the work surface.

    (1)     Note.  Where the agitator rotates through more than 360o, the
    patent is classified on the basis of a rotary agitator in subclasses 383+
    even though such rotation be    periodically reversed or stopped.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    382,    for pivotally mounted agitators functioning to strike a blow
    against the work with little, if any, tangential or sweeping motion on the
    work.

    383+,   see (1) Note.


CLS 15/382
TXT Apparatus under subclass 363 in which the agitator moves generally
    perpendicular to the work surface to deliver a blow for dislodging the dirt
    from the work.

    (1)     Note.  The agitator may move rectilinearly or pivotally, but in the
    latter case, there must be no appreciable component of movement parallel to
    the work surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    379,    for vibrating nozzle type agitator.


CLS 15/383
TXT Apparatus under subclass 363 in which the agitating means has a rotary
    motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179,    for rotary brushes, per se, not limited to vacuum cleaner
    organizations.

    366,    for rotary agitating devices performing diverse agitating functions.

    381,    for agitators mounted for rotary motion but which are restrained to
    oscillating or rotary to and fro motion of not more than 360o.


CLS 15/384
TXT Apparatus under subclass 383 having a plurality of distinct agitating units
    arranged in tandem with respect to the usual path of motion of the cleaner
    while in use.


CLS 15/385
TXT Apparatus under subclass 383 in which the axis of rotation is nonparallel
    to the work surface.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the agitator is a radial face or disc type but this
    subclass also includes those agitators whose axis of rotation is at an
    acute angle with respect to the work surface.


CLS 15/386
TXT Apparatus under subclass 383 in which the work-contacting element is
    mounted on the agitator body to turn about an axis spaced from the axis of
    rotation of the body.

    (1)     Note.  The elements need not be the sole work contacting means; the
    body on which they are mounted may in itself also contact the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    366,    for similar arrangements where diverse agitating operations are
    performed.


CLS 15/387
TXT Apparatus under subclass 383 in which the agitator is rotated by a draft of
    air.

    (1)     Note.  The air used for driving the agitator may be distinct from
    that used for contacting the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    375,    for rotary agitators driven by a draft of ambient air admitted
    other than at the work-contacting portion of the nozzle.

    382,    for air-current operated striking beater type agitators.


CLS 15/388
TXT Apparatus under subclass 383 in which the agitator is rotated by traction
    derived from translation of the cleaner over the work.

    (1)     Note.  There may be a traction wheel or the like with power
    transmitting means to the agitator, or the agitator may be rotated solely
    by its contact with the work surface.

    (2)     Note.  The linear velocity of the agitator may be equal to or
    greater or less than the translational speed of the cleaner with respect to
    the work.


CLS 15/389
TXT Apparatus under subclass 383 in which the inventive feature resides in the
    drive means for imparting rotation to the agitator.


CLS 15/390
TXT Apparatus under subclass 389 having a clutch or other drive disconnect
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332+,   for cleaners convertible from on- floor to off-floor cleaning
    having agitators and in which the agitator drive is disabled when the
    cleaner is converted to off-floor cleaning.


CLS 15/391
TXT Apparatus under subclass 389 having means for protecting the driving means
    such as belts from damage due to contact with the work or to dust, lint,
    etc.

    (1)     Note.  It is not necessary that the entire run of the belt be
    protected.


CLS 15/392
TXT Apparatus under subclass 389 in which the inventive feature resides in the
    agitator support or bearings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    376,    for agitator bearings in which a draft of air functions to clean
    the bearing.


CLS 15/393
TXT Apparatus under subclass 363 in which the means for agitating is stationary
    relative to the cleaner and has no motion relative to the work except that
    which results from moving the cleaner bodily.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    369,    for stationary agitators which shift position bodily in the cleaner
    in response to forward and backward strokes of the cleaner while in use.


CLS 15/394
TXT Apparatus under subclass 393 having opposed facing work contacting means
    arranged to be circumposed about the work.


CLS 15/395
TXT Apparatus under subclass 393 having bristles or other work contacting means
    arranged to present diverging or oppositely extending work contacting
    surfaces.

    (1)     Note.  The cleaner is usually used between two work surfaces such
    as the slats of a "venetian" blind.

    (2)     Note.  If a plurality of work contactors of the type covered by the
    above definition are assembled in a unitary device, the resulting device
    will be one which has opposed working surfaces in addition to those
    oppositely extending; this organization is not classified in this subclass
    but is placed above, in subclass 394.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    394,    see (2) Note above.


CLS 15/396
TXT Apparatus under subclass 393 in which the air draft applying means includes
    a hollow head or manifold having a plurality of openings in the face or
    surface usually presented to the work, the agitating means being associated
    with the same face.


CLS 15/397
TXT Apparatus under subclass 396 having tubular air ducts communicating with
    the manifold openings and interspersed throughout the working face of the
    apparatus.


CLS 15/398
TXT Apparatus under subclass 393 in which the agitator is in the form of a
    bristle brush or broom.

    (1)     Note.  For a definition of bristle brush or broom see subclass 159.

    (2)     Note.  The subclasses immediately preceding have many patents
    showing bristle brushes in the special arrangements there provided for;
    those patents have not been cross-referenced down into this and the
    indented subclasses; therefore the search to be complete must include the
    preceding subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    394,    see (2) Note.

    395,    see (2) Note.

    396+,   see (2) Note.


CLS 15/399
TXT Apparatus under subclass 398 in which there is included means to prevent
    undue spreading of the bristles and/or to form an air seal or shroud to
    minimize or prevent air flow through the bristles except at or adjacent to
    the point of contact with the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168+,   for bristle bridles in cleaning implements having no provisions for
    applying an air draft to the work.


CLS 15/400
TXT Apparatus under subclass 398 in which the agitator is designed as an
    attachment to be readily attached to or detached from a nozzle or similar
    air-draft applying means.

    (1)     Note.  The nozzle may be specially constructed to cooperate with
    the attaching means.


CLS 15/401
TXT Apparatus under subclass 393 in which the agitator is in the form of a
    relatively thin blade-like member which contacts the work edgewise and acts
    to scrape or squeegee the contacted surface.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses include patents wherein the
    nozzle lips are specially constructed or arranged to act as scrapers or
    squeegees.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 136+ for knives and scrapers having material
    holder or disposal means.


CLS 15/402
TXT Apparatus under subclass 401 in which the agitator is serrated or toothed
    and functions much like a comb or rake.

    (1)     Note.  Patents for tooth-type brushes, that is with relatively
    widely spaced teeth in lieu of bristle tufts, are classified here even
    though having a planar working face.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 112+ for toilet combs having an orifice for
    applying fluent material to the hair.


CLS 15/403
TXT Apparatus under subclass 393 in which the agitator is of the dry mop type,
    that is, of strands of flexible and usually absorbent material.

    (1)     Note.  Sheep pelt is included herein.

    (2)     Note.  Wipers not of the strand type, such as felt members, are not
    considered to be dry mops for this subclass and are found in the subclasses
    above.


CLS 15/404
TXT Cleaning apparatus under subclass 300 having provisions for pulsating the
    air flow, the effect generally being to agitate the work such as the nap of
    a pile rug or the like.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes patents for nozzles having a
    plurality of air passages with means to apply the air draft successively to
    the passages, the effect as to any one passage being a pulsating or
    intermittent air flow even though there is a more or less constant air flow
    through the nozzle as a whole.


CLS 15/405
TXT Cleaning apparatus under subclass 300 in which the sole cleaning agency is
    a draft of air from a source of higher-than-atmospheric pressure.

    (1)     Note.  An air blast device claimed as part of a noncleaning device
    or process is classified with such device or process, for example, sand
    blast abrading is classified in Class 451, Abrading.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    316+,   for installed or fixed position cleaners using air blast only.

    330,    for cleaners convertible to or from suction and air-blast.

    345,    for cleaners utilizing both air blast and suction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, particularly subclasses 390+ for
    fluid agency cleaning devices combined with boiler structure, and see the
    reference to Class 122 under the definition of subclass 301 above for a
    statement of the line and reference to other classes involving cleaning of
    the tube type exchanging apparatus.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses
    for fluid discharging or distributing devices of general utility and which
    may be disclosed as being combined or capable of combination with cleaning
    structures. For a statement of the line, see the reference to Class 239 in
    the definition of subclass 300 of this class (15).

    417,    Pumps, for details of the pump subcombination of an air blast
    cleaner. For a statement of the line, see the reference to Class 417 in the
    definition of subclass 300 of this class (15).

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, for rotary expansible chamber
    devices, per se. For a statement of the line, see the reference to Class
    418 in the definition of subclass 300 of this class (15).

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 75+ for sand blast apparatus.  (See (1) Note.)


CLS 15/406
TXT Apparatus under subclass 405 especially adapted for cleaning the inside of
    hollow work.

    (1)     Note.  Many of these devices could be used for other than internal
    cleaning, but peculiarities such as, for example, radially outwardly
    directed air streams, or tapered nozzles or other devices for cooperating
    with the open ends of pipes, if disclosed as intended for internal
    cleaning, will be sufficient to cause classification in this or the
    indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    409,    for nozzle devices embodying a jet pump for inducing a flow of air
    through a tube.


CLS 15/407
TXT Apparatus under subclass 406 wherein the air blast is controlled by a valve
    unseated by the pressure of the device against the work.


CLS 15/408
TXT Apparatus under subclass 406 having provisions whereby the fluid blast
    induces a flow of ambient air into the tube or other hollow work at the
    same end of such tube or work as the power fluid is applied.

    (1)     Note.  The fluids may or may not commingle; in many cases the
    disclosure is that the induced fluid cleans the outermost end of the tube
    while the power fluid cleans the remainder.

    (2)     Note.  Patents for two-tube cleaners wherein a blast of air is
    directed into one tube and the blast is also used to induce a flow in an
    adjacent tube are classified in subclass 406 above.


CLS 15/409
TXT Cleaning apparatus under subclass 300 in which the air-draft is induced by
    a fluid jet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    408,    for air blast cleaning devices where the blast induces a flow
    thereinto of the ambient air.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclass 153 for fluid current conveyors
    having a downstream jet pump for producing suction at the conveyor inlet.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 151+ for details of jet pumps producing suction
    at an inlet member, and for a statement of the line see the reference to
    Class 417 in the definition of subclass 300 of this class (15).


CLS 15/410
TXT Cleaning apparatus under subclass 300 having a handle and in which the
    invention resides in the relation of the handle to the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes locks and latches for handles whereby
    the handle may be secured in a position convenient for storage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143.1+, for a particularly configured handle for a cleaning implement.

    329,    for hand portable cleaners convertible to on-floor cleaners by the
    addition of a long handle or the like.

    344,    for miniature or upholstery type or wand type air draft cleaners
    having carrying and manipulating handles.

    350,    for hand-manipulated cleaners having a handle wherein a dust bag or
    the like is associated with the handle.

    361,    for cleaners having adjustable nozzles, wherein movement of the
    handle relative to the cleaner acts to adjust the nozzle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclass 357 for gas separation apparatus having a
    handle feature and not including a work contacting feature.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for a connection
    between a vacuum cleaner and a handle therefor wherein no work contacting
    feature or air handlings or pumping means is included.


CLS 15/411
TXT Devices under subclass 410 in which the handle is so joined to the air
    draft applying device that by rotating or twisting the handle about its
    main longitudinal axis either or both (1) the angular position of the
    device is changed with respect to the axis of the handle, or (2) the device
    is bodily displaced laterally from the axis of the handle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 47.11 for hand propelled vehicles provided
    with positive steering means.


CLS 15/412
TXT Cleaning apparatus under subclass 300 claiming a motor and in which the
    invention resides in the relation of the motor to the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes patents for cleaner casings or
    housings specially fabricated as from stampings or castings to facilitate
    assembly with the motor.


CLS 15/413
TXT Apparatus under subclass 412 including provisions for causing a draft of
    air other than the entire main cleaning air stream to contact the motor for
    cooling or ventilating.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in which the motor merely is located in the main air
    stream are excluded from this subclass. Such arrangements generally are
    found in "tank type" cleaners, see subclass 327 for example.


CLS 15/414
TXT Cleaning apparatus under subclass 300 in which the air-draft applying
    nozzle means is detachable and/or is extensible.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    328+,   where the nozzle is removed or rendered inoperative for the purpose
    of converting the operation of the cleaner, the conversion feature being
    claimed.


CLS 15/415.1
TXT Nozzle:
    Subject matter under subclass 300.1 including means constructed and
    arranged particularly for applying suction to a workpiece or work surface
    for the cleaning thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322,    for a nozzle device having means to supply water or other cleaning
    materials to the work.

    405+,   for an air blast nozzle, and see the Notes under subclass 405 for
    related art and a statement of the line with other classes.

    410,    for a nozzle having a handle attached thereto for manipulating or
    steering the nozzle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclass 152 for a fluid current
    conveyor intake nozzle.


CLS 15/416
TXT Nozzles under subclass 415 having a plurality of distinct mouths
    alternatively and selectively usable for applying the air draft to the work.


CLS 15/417
TXT Nozzles under subclass 416 having oppositely facing or diverging nozzle
    mouths and in which the nozzle unit is arranged so that one of the mouths
    can be brought selectively into a working position wherein the air-draft
    flows therethrough, the other mouths being isolated or cut off from the air
    flow.


CLS 15/418
TXT Nozzles under subclass 415 in which the area of the nozzle may be varied or
    restricted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    416+,   for nozzles wherein the area of one mouth is restricted by bringing
    into use a smaller mouth mounted therein.


CLS 15/419
TXT Nozzles under subclass 415 having means to regulate the quantity or to cut
    off the flow of air therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    328,    for nozzles having agitators or the like wherein the air flow may
    be cut off to convert the nozzle into a nonair-draft device.

    417,    for air blast cleaning devices having a work-operated valve.


CLS 15/420
TXT Nozzles under subclass 415 in which the work-contacting lips have
    re-entrant portions functioning to provide a locally intensified inrush of
    air between the work surface and the nozzle lip.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402,    for nozzles having lips specially constructed or arranged to act as
    combs, or rakes, the construction being such that the air distribution is
    generally uniform throughout the nozzle with no locally intensified inrush
    of air.


CLS 15/421
TXT Nozzles under subclass 415 having air inlet means functioning to admit
    ambient air to the nozzle when the nozzle is in normal working position
    with respect to the work, the additional air being admitted to the nozzle
    other than through the work or between the work and the nozzle lips.

    (1)     Note.  The air inlet may serve only as a vacuum relief device but
    usually the additional air assists in dislodging dirt from the work surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    375+,   for auxiliary ambient air inlets in organizations including an
    agitator.


CLS 15/422
TXT Nozzles under subclass 415 having means other than or in addition to the
    nozzle lips acting to hinder or to prevent the work being drawn into the
    nozzle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    378,    for mouth guards applied to nozzles having an agitator therein.

    391,    for devices acting to protect the belt of a belt-driven agitator,
    which incidentally may act also to prevent the work being drawn into the
    nozzle at that point.

    401+,   for nozzles incorporating therein a blade-like member functioning
    as a scraper or squeegee, the positioning of such blade within the nozzle
    having the effect of acting also to prevent the work being drawn into the
    nozzle.


CLS 15/422.1
TXT Width changes along transverse dimension:
    Subject matter under subclass 415.1 wherein one of the dimensions of the
    nozzle opening is greater than its other dimensions and wherein the
    dimension of the opening perpendicular to the greater dimension varies over
    the extent of the greater dimension.

    (1)     Note.  The width of the nozzle opening varies along its length.


CLS 15/422.2
TXT Plural fans:
    Subject matter under subclass 300.1 having more than one means to create a
    draft of air.


CLS 15/423
TXT Device under subclass 104 including solid means adapted for rubbing contact
    with a pigment-applying tool (e.g., penpoint), other than of the brush,
    broom, or mop type, for the removal therefrom of encrustment or of pigment
    (e.g., ink) subject to encrustation.

    (1)     Note.  A patent to a device in which the solid means is a tool or
    porous mass adapted to be impregnated with cleaning liquid (e.g., water)
    will be placed in this subclass. However, a patent to the combination of a
    receptacle with the solid means therein, which receptacle is disclosed as
    containing cleaning liquid accessible to the solid means presumably in
    excess of that   required to impregnate the solid means will be placed in
    subclass 104.92.

    (2)     Note.  A patent to the combination of a tool and a coating or
    impregnant of cleaning material will be placed in subclasses 104.93+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104.92, for a pen cleaner including means to apply a liquid to the tool
    that is to be cleaned; e.g., a receptacle containing the pen-cleaning
    instrumentality and capable of containing a supply of liquid in excess of
    that required to coat or impregnate said instrumentality.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 695+, for a scraper attachment to a
    receptacle, which attachment is so located that it may engage a coating
    tool during the act of withdrawing the tool from the supply in the
    receptacle; and see the notes thereunder.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 121+ for the
    combination of an applicator and a supply receptacle which includes means
    to engage, and remove excess-material from, the tool of the applicator
    during withdrawal from the supply.


CLS 15/424
TXT Implement under subclass 104 for disintegrating and removing indicia from a
    surface by rubbing contact therewith, which implement comprises an erasive
    body composed of particles which are so in cohesive as to result in the
    disintegration of the surface-contacting portion of the body, along with
    the indicia, by the force of the rubbing contact, before such force can
    cause substantial mutilation of the surface.

    (1)     Note.  A patent to an eraser comprising an abradant body (i.e., a
    body including crystalline particles with sharp edges which mutilate a work
    surface) will be placed in an appropriate subclass, Class 451, Abrading.
    Absent disclosure of the presence of crystalline particles in the erasive
    body, the patent to the eraser will be placed in this, the generic locus
    for erasers, even though the description may characterize the implement or
    the process as `abrading'.  A patent claim will be deemed generic, for
    placement in this class, when the claims are to erasing and not,
    specifically, abrading, even though the disclosure comprehends, or is
    limited to, an erasive body including crystalline particles. See the
    "Search Class" notes, below, for placement of still other types of
    mutilating erasing instrumentalities.

    (2)     Note.  The term "eraser" is employed herein to refer to the
    implement; that is, to the piece of erasive material and all the structure
    associated therewith for performance of an erasure; or to such a piece, per
    se, when that is all that is used for such performance. The term "erasive
    body" is employed to designate the subcombinational aspect of such a piece
    in relation to other structure associable therewith for the performance of
    the erasing function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.53,   for a motor-driven eraser.

    105.51+, for an implement including generally independently useable tools,
    one of which is an eraser of this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 164.9 for a scratching tool (e.g., one having
    parallel glass fibers with exposed scratching ends) and subclasses 169+ for
    scraping tools used for erasing.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 490+ and 526+ for a flexible abrading tool
    comprising a body whose structure includes claimed crystalline particles
    having sharp edges, which tool is disclosed as being used for erasing.

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses for a chemical composition used for cleaning or removing foreign
    matter from a solid surface, particularly subclass 174 for removing ink
    spots or indicia.


CLS 15/425
TXT Implement under subclass 424 including manually engageable means for
    manipulating the implement for rubbing contact with a surface in order to
    perform an erasure; or including means for attachment to such manually
    engageable means.


CLS 15/426
TXT Implement under subclass 425 including means (e.g., strand, finger cot,
    magnet) for retaining the implement on another object (usually adjacent the
    writing surface) during the time in which the performance of an erasure is
    not required.

    (1)     Note.  The nonuse retaining means may associate the eraser with the
    other object during use as well, and a disclosure of both use and nonuse
    retention will not bar placement of a patent in this subclass.


CLS 15/427
TXT Implement under subclass 425 in which the handling means is adapted to
    partially enclose a piece of solid coating material with an end thereof
    exposed, whereby the handling means constitutes manual manipulating means
    for the coating operation as well.

    (1)     Note.  A patent to the combination of an eraser of this class with
    a mechanical pencil or with the sheath of an ordinary pencil will be placed
    in this subclass, or in a subclass indented hereunder, only when no more of
    the pencil structure is claimed than is necessary to define the
    relationship of the eraser therewith. Class 401, Coating Implements With
    Material Supply, subclass 52 will take the combination claiming pencil
    structure in greater detail than is necessary to define such a relationship.


CLS 15/428
TXT Implement under subclass 427 in which the eraser, or a mounting therefor,
    is hollow to fit about, and close to, the end of the enclosure at or
    adjacent the exposed end of the piece; or is mountable in an offset
    relationship to the enclosure axis adjacent said end.

    (1)     Note.  The claiming of the piece of solid coating material will not
    bar placement of a patent in this subclass, provided that no more of the
    piece, nor of any other part of the implement, is claimed than is necessary
    to define the relationship of the eraser therewith (i.e., its particular
    foreend mounting for this subclass), a claim of this nature being
    considered to be in accordance with the statement of the line with Class
    401, Coating Implements With Material Supply, set out in (1) Note to
    subclass 427.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 89.1 for
    blotting means including means for mounting same adjacent to, and offset
    from, the writing end of a pen.

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 460 for a pencil sharpener including a guide
    having an open end through which the sharpened pencil point may protrude
    for a writing operation with the sharpener retained at the writing end of
    the pencil.


CLS 15/429
TXT Implement under subclass 427 which includes an enclosure within which the
    erasive body is relatively movable for causing, or increasing the extent
    of, protrusion of the work-contacting portion of the body therefrom, which
    implement includes manually engageable elements, not including the erasive
    body itself, which are shiftable relative to one another for the
    protrusion-effecting movement of the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    431+    and 434, for an erasing implement in which the erasive body is
    directly digitally engageable for the adjustment thereof relative to its
    enclosure.

    433,    for an erasing implement having a holder provided with means to
    advance erasive material, which holder is not a pencil sheath or casing nor
    is disclosed as being attachable thereto; see the search notes to subclass
    433.


CLS 15/430
TXT Implement under subclass 429 in which the manually engageable elements are
    a holder for the erasive body and a cylinder about said holder and body
    which is retractable relative to both the holder and the body by manual
    force applied during direct digital engagement with each of said elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    433,    for an erasive body which is axially adjustable in a holder which
    is not a pencil sheath.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclass 79 for an
    implement including holder and sleeve elements in screw-threaded relation
    so as to be relatively adjustable by direct manual engagement therewith to
    effect the exposure of the tool end of a piece of solid coating material;
    subclass 82 wherein exposure of the tool end of a piece of solid coating
    material is effected by the telescopic movement of an encompassing sleeve
    relative to a support for the base of the piece; and subclasses 116 and 117
    respectively, for screw threaded or telescopic means for the projection and
    retraction of an applicator tool.


CLS 15/431
TXT Implement under subclass 427 in which the erasive body includes a
    work-contacting end or edge portion and an end or edge portion axially
    aligned therewith, and in which the handling means includes either a socket
    or opposing walls to constitute means for retaining the latter end or edge
    portion therewithin or therebetween.

    (1)     Note.  The erasive body may be adjustable relative to the socket or
    the opposing walls by force applied during direct digital engagement
    therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    427,    for an implement in which the end of the erasive body remote from
    the work-contacting end is socketed to fit about the handle.

    430,    for an erasing implement in which a socket or sleeve encompassing
    an erasive body is adjustable relative to the body and its holder by manual
    force applied during direct engagement with the sleeve and the holder, to
    adjust the extent of protrusion of the body.

    434,    for an implement in which the erasive body and a sleeve socketing
    the base of an erasive body are directly manually movable relative to one
    another to cause, or increase the extent of, exposure of the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 88+ for an
    implement including a piece of coating material which is adjusted relative
    to a socket holder by force applied during direct manual engagement with
    the piece; particularly subclasses 92+ for this   combination further
    including a chuck for retaining the piece in adjusted position.


CLS 15/432
TXT Implement under subclass 431 in which said handling means constitutes a
    plurality of joined members.

    (1)     Note.  Neither a mere rivet or adhesive bond, nor an attritable
    pencil sheath, will be considered to add to the number of members. The
    casing of a mechanical pencil will be considered as one of the elements of
    a multipartite handling means.


CLS 15/433
TXT Implement under subclass 425 which includes an enclosure within which the
    erasive body is relatively movable for causing, or increasing the extent
    of, protrusion of the work-contacting portion of the erasive body
    therefrom, which implement includes manually engageable elements, not
    including the erasive body itself, which are shiftable relative to one
    another for the protrusion-effecting movement of the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    429+,   for a similar combination in which the handle is a pencil sheath.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 55+ for an
    implement including means to advance the work-contacting portion of a piece
    of solid coating material through an opening in an enclosure.


CLS 15/434
TXT Implement under subclass 425 which includes an enclosure within which the
    erasive body is relatively movable for causing, or increasing the extent
    of, protrusion of the work-contacting portion of the erasive body therefrom
    by direct digital engagement with such body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    431,    for an erasive body which is directly adjustable relative to a
    handle which is also a pencil sheath.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 88+ for an
    implement including an enclosure within which a piece of solid coating
    material is advanceable by direct manual engagement with the piece to
    cause, or increase the extent of, protrusion of the working end of the
    piece from the enclosure.


CLS 15/435
TXT Manually manipulable implement under subclass 104 comprising a tool of
    incompressible solid material and having either a single element or a
    furcated plurality of elements for contacting a work surface and applying
    liquid coating material (e.g., ink) thereto in a writing operation; or
    comprising a device connectable to such a tool for supporting or retaining
    the tool for manual manipulation during a writing operation.

    (1)     Note.  The line between this subclass and Class 33, Geometrical
    Instruments, with respect to plural penpoints, is as follows:  Class 15,
    subclasses 760+ will take a patent for an implement having plural
    penpoints, wherein (1) the construction is such that the penpoints are
    intended to be used independently of each other, or (2) if designed for
    simultaneous operation, the mark produced by one penpoint complements and
    is contiguous to the mark (s) simultaneously produced to the other (s) to
    produce unitary indicia (e.g., shading pen); or the marks are wide enough
    to be characterized as stripes, rather than lines.  When the plural
    penpoints are adapted, and used, sorely for the simultaneous drawing of a
    plurality of independent and spaced lines, placement of the patent will be
    in Class 33.

    (2)     Note.  For the line between this subclass and the indented
    subclasses, and Class 401, Coating Implements With Material Supply, see (4)
    Note under Class 401, subclass 221.

    (3)     Note.  This, rather than an indented, subclass is the locus for
    patents to inventions in penholders, per se, which include no claimed
    detail of the structure for retaining a penpoint. Included in this subclass
    are patents to penholders having:

    (a)     relatively movable e.g., yieldable, angularly adjustable) handle
    portions;

    (b)     ink guards; see, however, subclass 443 for an ink guard contacted
    by the finger during writing to constitute a finger rest, as well;

    (c)     dip gauge attachments.  Patents to penholders provided with plural
    penpoints, but which claim no penpoint-holding detail, are also collected
    in this subclass.  A cross-reference has been placed in this subclass of
    each patent including novelty in any of the above features but classifiable
    in a subclass indented hereinbelow because of further novelty in structure
    conforming to the definition of the indented subclass.  It is expected that
    this procedure will be followed for such patents which issue in the future.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159.1+, for a brush, which may be used for writing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 41+ for an implement including
    plural penpoints for  simultaneously making a plurality of independent,
    spaced lines; and see (1) Note, above, for the line between Classes 15 and
    33.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, appropriate subclasses;
    particularly subclass 20 for a combined pencil and bifurcate-nib pen, and
    subclasses 221+ and 258+ for a bifurcate-nib fountain pen and stylographic
    fountain pen, respectively.


CLS 15/436
TXT Implement under subclass 435 including an enclosing member for the penpoint
    and means to cause or guide relative movement, without complete separation,
    between said penpoint and its enclosing member to the extent that the
    penpoint may alternately occupy an exposed operative position, and an
    inoperative position wherein the penpoint is retained in concealed position
    within the enclosing member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 151+ for an implement including a projectable
    and retractable cutting tool.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 29+, 55, 62,
    82+, and 99+ for an implement having coating material supply means and
    including a projectable and retractable coating tool.


CLS 15/437
TXT Implement under subclass 435 including an element, in addition to the
    penpoint, adapted to engage the work surface or a surface thereadjacent,
    which element serves, or helps, to support the implement upon the work
    surface, or to maintain a desired angular relationship of the implement to
    the work surface, during the writing operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 118.5 for traveling means to support and
    stabilize the implement-grasping hand of the writer, while writing, but
    which does not directly engage the implement itself.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclass 48 for an
    implement including coating material supply means and means to support or
    stabilize the implement while in use.


CLS 15/438
TXT Implement under subclass 435 in which the penholder includes an element
    which is engageable with the penpoint and is movable relative to another
    element of the penholder, by a movement other than mere flexure caused by
    contact of the penpoint therewith during the act of inserting the penpoint
    into the penholder, for securing the penpoint in the penholder or for
    freeing it therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    444,    for a penholder which includes a gripping member which retains a
    penpoint as a result of mere flexure caused by contact of a penpoint
    therewith during the act of inserting the penpoint into the penholder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 92+ for a
    pencil including hand-operated, relatively movable elements for gripping or
    releasing a piece of lead, chalk, crayon, or lipstick.


CLS 15/439
TXT Implement under subclass 438 wherein the movable element, or a member for
    moving the element, is arranged to swing or rock bodily about an axis
    extending (a) therethrough, (b) along an edge thereof, or (c) equidistantly
    from all points along the path of movement, for gripping or releasing the
    penpoint.


CLS 15/440
TXT Implement under subclass 439 wherein the axis substantially coincides with
    the longitudinal axis of the penholder.


CLS 15/441
TXT Implement under subclass 438 in which the elements are engageable with
    opposite surfaces of the penpoint and are movable relative to one another
    in a direction parallel to the longitudinal axis of the penholder for
    gripping or releasing the penpoint.


CLS 15/442
TXT Implement under subclass 438 in which the penholder includes means movably
    engaging the penpoint to move and discharge it from the penholder, which
    means is movable relative to at least some part of the gripping means.

    (1)     Note.  The ejector may be part of the gripping means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 808 for a penpoint extractor or inserter
    which is not part of the pen.


CLS 15/443
TXT Implement under subclass 435 wherein a surface portion of the penholder, or
    means connectible to the penholder, is specifically configured or
    constructed for contact by a hand or finger of the user during the writing
    operation.

    (1)     Note.  The mere recitation of a "handle", or of a penholder shaped
    in the form of an ordinary rod-like member or composed of a particular
    material, will not justify placement of a patent in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    437,    for an implement including an attachment having a part for engaging
    or receiving a hand or finger and another part to engage a surface at or
    adjacent the work to support or stabilize the implement during use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 6+
    particularly, the subclasses 7 and 8, for an implement with material supply
    having a handle, or an attachment thereto, which is shaped to conform to a
    hand or finger.


CLS 15/444
TXT Implement under subclass 435 including a penholder having particular
    structure for engaging a penpoint to retain it in the penholder.

    (1)     Note. The particular penpoint-retaining structure must be claimed
    for placement of an original patent in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    438+,   for a penholder comprising gripping means which includes an element
    which partakes of a movement, other than mere flexure, caused by contact of
    a penpoint therewith during the act of insertion into the penholder.


CLS 15/445
TXT Implement under subclass 435 wherein the penpoint is of particular
    construction or material.

    (1)     Note.  For placement of an original patent into this subclass or a
    subclass indented hereunder, a detail of the construction or material of
    the tool must be claimed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclass 20 for a dip pen
    combined with a pencil.


CLS 15/446
TXT Implement under subclass 445 wherein the penpoint is of a particular
    composition or kind of material.

    (1)     Note.  For placement of an original patent into this subclass a
    detail of the material or composition must be claimed.  Merely reciting the
    tool as being "metal" or "metallic" is not adequate for placement in this
    subclass, but the naming of a particular metal or alloy will suffice.


CLS 15/447
TXT Implement under subclass 445 wherein the penpoint terminates in only two
    elements which are separated by a relatively narrow slit or interspace to
    provide a capillary passage for material, and which have closely adjacent
    work-engaging surfaces.

    (1)     Note.  Ink retained in the space between confronting surfaces of a
    broad face tool (e.g., ruling pen) is considered to be material supply, and
    an implement having such a tool is considered to be an implement with
    material supply for Class 401.  A patent for such an implement will be
    found in subclass 221 of that class (401) and a patent for such an
    implement further including means to adjust the gap between the tool
    elements will be found in subclasses 233 and 256 of that class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    446,    for a bifurcate penpoint wherein novelty is in the composition or
    kind of material thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 221+ for an
    implement of that class including a bifurcate penpoint; see, particularly,
    principal subclass 221 wherein the penpoint is formed with an ink-retaining
    element (e.g., infolded wings) and indented subclasses 252+ wherein the ink
    retainer is an attachment feeding directly to the penpoint.


CLS 16/
TTL MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE

CLS 16/
TXT This class includes specific articles of hardware not otherwise classified.
     It comprises such articles as carpet-fasteners, door-hangers, sash-cord
    fasteners, sash-weights, hinges, door checks and closures, sash-balances,
    furniture-casters, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Hardware articles such as nails, screws, staples, bolts, and
    rivets are classified as follows:



    7,      Compound Tools, appropriate subclasses for compound tools.

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclasses 78+ for chains.

    70,     Locks, appropriate subclasses for locks.

    81,     Tools, appropriate subclasses for tools.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, appropriate subclasses for bolt elements and
    latching devices not combined with lock structure and door checks of the
    door-bracing type.

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclasses 5.3+ for skate wheels.

    384,    Bearings, appropriate subclasses for plain and anti-friction
    bearings, per se.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener appropriate subclasses for fastening elements of
    the kinds provided for therein.

    GLOSSARY

    HINGE AXIS

    Any axis about which a hinged member* rotates during operation of the hinge.

    HINGED MEMBER

    Any device or portion thereof (e.g., closure, seat back, etc.) which is
    adapted to be swingably connected by a hinge to another device or portion
    thereof (e.g., frame, box, sill, etc.).

    HINGE PIN

    An elongated rodlike element about which a hinged member* swings (e.g.,
    "pintle").

    LEAF

    A rod or platelike portion by which the hinge is adapted to be secured to a
    hinged member*.


CLS 16/2.1
TXT Device under the class definition comprising an annular sleeve to line an
    opening which extends through the interior of a structure to (a) prevent
    the abrasion of any elements passing through the opening or the structure
    itself or (b) fortify the opening.

    (1)     Note. The device of this subclass may have any of a variety of
    means for fastening it to the wall of the opening such as a weld or a
    compression ring.  The opening may be the end of a pipe or other conduit.

    (2)     Note.  In a claim proper for this subclass as much of the device
    having the opening (e.g., pipe) may be included as is necessary to define
    the bushing.


    (3)     Note. A grommet is considered appropriate for this subclass since
    it includes structure that extends through an opening having a
    substantially planar exterior surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.2,    for a bushing with a sealing means

    2.3,    for a bung or tap bushing

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, for a bushing used during the manufacture of
    shoes.

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., for subject matter claiming
    interfitting fasteners, where one is embedded in the structure and
    intending to receive the other.

    174,    Electricity: Conductors and Insulators, especially subclass 83, for
    a bushing limited by structure for use with an electric conduits or cables,
    subclass 136 for anti-abrasion devices, subclasses 152+ for wall mounted
    insulators of the bushing type, and subclasses 153+, 154+, and 167 for
    other bushing insulators

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses 98+ for a bung and particularly
    subclass 113 for a bushing combined with a bung.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, may include a nominal
    recitation of a supply or take-up coil (e.g., less than a support for such
    a coil or a cooperative relationship between a tension or exhaust detector
    and reel driving or reel stopping means, etc.), subclass 196.1 for a
    passive guide combined with a material feeder.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 615+ for a residual
    guide or guard that directs elongated flexible material or one combined
    with more than nominal winding structure.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 466.1+ for self luminous sources or
    attachments therefor and subclasses 483.1+ for fluorescent and
    phosphorescent plates and escutcheons.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 130 and 213 for a bushing or
    lining for an opening intended to receive a pipe.

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 276+ for a sleeve or liner intended to serve
    as a bearing.

    408,    Cutting by use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclass 241 for a
    bushing used to guide a drill bit.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, especially subclasses 207+ for an electrical
    connector combined with a conduit which may include a bushing.


CLS 16/2.2
TXT Providing a restricted or insulated environment (i.e., sealable) for
    internal elements:

    Bushing  under subclass 2.1 particularly adapted to prevent the flow of
    heat or material from one side of the structure to the other.

    (1)     Note. Included herein are firebreak devices, which prevents smoke
    and flames from traveling through a wall along the axis of a conduit, and
    means to insulate electrical conduits


CLS 16/2.3
TXT Bung or tap:

    Bushing under subclass 2.1 for use in an opening in the wall of a liquid
    storage container (e.g., a barrel or keg) adapted to receive a plug or
    valve means to facilitate flow of the liquid into or out of the container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 320+, for a valved closure i.e., a tap
    for a pipe or keg.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses 98+ for a bung and particularly
    subclass 113 for the combination of a bung with a bushing.

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 465, for a receptacle combined with a tap
    means.


CLS 16/2.4
TXT Threaded:

    Bushing subclass 2.3 including a helical cooperating portion in the
    interior adapted to threadingly engage a cooperating helical portion on the
    exterior of the bung or tap to secure the bushing in place.


CLS 16/2.5
TXT Providing strain relief:

    Subject matter under subclass 2.1 claiming means to relieve externally
    exerted loads on elements passing through the annular member.


CLS 16/4
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising fastening devices for
    securing carpets rugs, and floor-coverings in extended position upon floors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17.1,   for a rug antislip or stiffener attachment, per se, in combination
    with a rug, where no more of the rug structure is recited than is necessary
    to support the attachment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 311 for combined fasteners
    of the buckle, button or clasp type; subclasses 706+ for pin fasteners;
    subclass 572 for separable fasteners and subclass 455 for clasps.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener appropriate subclasses for fasteners in which the
    floor penetrating member is an integral part of the fastener.


CLS 16/5
TXT Devices under subclass 4 for stretching and holding carpets and rugs in
    stretched position upon floors.


CLS 16/6
TXT Devices under subclass 4 comprising hook devices.


CLS 16/7
TXT Devices under subclass 4 including floor-moldings.


CLS 16/8
TXT Devices under subclass 4 for securing rugs in extended position upon
    carpets or floor-coverings.


CLS 16/9
TXT Devices under subclass 4 of the sliding type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener subclasses 439+ for impact driven fasteners.


CLS 16/10
TXT Devices under subclass 4 for securing stair-carpets in extended position
    upon stairs.


CLS 16/11
TXT Devices under subclass 10 for securing stair-carpets in extended position
    upon or adjacent to stair-risers.


CLS 16/12
TXT Devices under subclass 10 of the rod type.


CLS 16/13
TXT Devices under subclass 12 having catch devices for holding the rods in
    adjusted position.


CLS 16/14
TXT Devices under subclass 13 of the sliding type.


CLS 16/15
TXT Devices under subclass 13 of the swinging type.


CLS 16/16
TXT Devices under subclass 4 comprising binding-strips.


CLS 16/17
TXT Devices under subclass 4 of the swinging type.


CLS 16/17.1
TXT CARPET STIFFENER OR ANTI-SLIP DEVICE, PER SE:

    Subject matter under the class definition adapted for attachment to a
    fabric type floor covering, i.e., a rug, especially to maintain the rug in
    a flattened condition or to prevent the rug from sliding on the floor.

    (1)     Note. A carpet stiffener or anti-slip device combined with a carpet
    is not included herein; however, the device of this subclass may include
    the carpet structure necessary to support the device.

    (2)     Note. Included herein is a carpet stiffener attached to the
    corners of a carpet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4+,     for a carpet fastener used to secure a rug or carpet to the floor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., especially subclass 311 for a
    combined diverse multi part fastener of the buckle, button or clasp type,
    subclasses 455+ for a clasp, subclasses 572+ for a separable fastener and
    subclasses 706+ for a pin fasteners.

    139,    Textiles: Weaving, subclasses 391+ for a carpet, including a carpet
    combined with a carpet stiffener or with an anti-slip device.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool Deformed, or Lock Threaded
    Fastener, for a fastener in which a floor penetrating member is an integral
    part of the fastener.


CLS 16/18
TXT Casters under the class definition comprising wheels, balls or sliding
    shoes mounted for movably supporting furniture and other like objects.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97      and see the Notes appended thereto, for wheel mounts for panel
    hangers or travelers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 74 for condiment cruets and stands
    entitled casters.


CLS 16/19
TXT Casters under subclass 18 having vertically adjustable means for the wheel
    or pintle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 43+ for vehicles having vertically
    adjustable wheels.


CLS 16/20
TXT Casters under subclass 18 which are antifrictionally swiveled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for multiple wheel casters antifrictionally swiveled.


CLS 16/21
TXT Casters under subclass 20 in which the casters antifrictional swiveling
    means comprises balls.


CLS 16/22
TXT Casters under subclass 20 in which the antifrictional swiveling means
    comprises cylinders.


CLS 16/23
TXT Casters under subclass 22 in which the cylinders are pivoted.


CLS 16/24
TXT Casters under subclass 18 comprising balls.


CLS 16/25
TXT Casters under subclass 24 having antifrictional mounting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for caster wheels having antifrictionally mounting means.


CLS 16/26
TXT Casters under subclass 25 in which the antifrictional mounting means
    comprises balls.


CLS 16/27
TXT Casters under subclass 25 in which the antifrictional mounting means
    comprises cylinders.


CLS 16/28
TXT Casters under subclass 24 in which the balls are pivoted in the
    caster-frames with or without antifriction means.


CLS 16/29
TXT Devices under subclass 18 comprising corner braces or brackets for mounting
    casters.


CLS 16/30
TXT Casters under subclass 18 bodily separable from the article supported.


CLS 16/31
TXT Casters under subclass 18 having a wheel mount or horn of specific
    construction.


CLS 16/32
TXT Devices under subclass 18 having means for supporting the caster or leg in
    raised or lowered position above or upon the floor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 43.14+ for vehicles having nonwheel means
    for engaging the vehicle supporting surface.


CLS 16/33
TXT Devices under subclass 32 slidably mounted for supporting the caster or leg
    in raised or lowered position above or upon the floor.


CLS 16/34
TXT Devices under subclass 32 pivotally mounted for supporting the caster or
    leg in raised or lowered position above or upon the floor.


CLS 16/35
TXT Casters under subclass 18 having means for fastening the caster-wheels or
    caster-mounts against movement.


CLS 16/36
TXT Casters under subclass 18 having means for lubricating the pintles or
    wheels.


CLS 16/37
TXT Casters under subclass 18 having pintles of specific construction.


CLS 16/38
TXT Casters under subclass 18 having specific means for retaining the pintles
    in their sockets or bearings.


CLS 16/39
TXT Casters under subclass 38 in which the caster-pintles are provided with
    pintle-retaining frames.


CLS 16/40
TXT Casters under subclass 18 which are nonswiveling and have rigid
    wheel-mounts.


CLS 16/41
TXT Casters under subclass 18 having scrapers for engaging the caster-wheels.


CLS 16/42
TXT Casters under subclass 18 comprising rounded sliding shoes for furniture
    and the like.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 188.9 for an attachment for a furniture leg or
    foot to prevent sliding, e.g., pad, antiskid device.


CLS 16/43
TXT Casters under subclass 18 comprising sockets of specific construction.


CLS 16/44
TXT Casters under subclass 18 having means for resiliently supporting furniture
    and the like.


CLS 16/45
TXT Casters under subclass 18 having wheels of specific construction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for wheels on panel hangers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclasses 5.3+ for skate wheels.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the notes thereunder.


CLS 16/46
TXT Caster-wheels under subclass 45 having antifriction-bearings comprising
    balls or cylinders.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98,     for panel hanger and traveler wheels which are antifrictionally
    mounted.


CLS 16/47
TXT Casters under subclass 45 having a plurality of floor-engaging wheels.


CLS 16/48
TXT Devices under subclass 47 having antifrictional swiveling bearings
    comprising balls and cylinders.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20+,    for other antifrictionally swiveled casters.


CLS 16/48.5
TXT Device under the class definition including means for holding a closure
    open or for maintaining a closing device inoperative, said means including
    an element disabled at a predetermined temperature, or rate of change
    thereof, to release the closure or closer for movement.

    (1)     Note. The means for holding the closure open are usually associated
    with a closing device, so that release of the holder permits the device to
    act.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 7+ for a thermally
    released check or closer combined with a closure of that class, and see the
    search notes thereto for the loci of other thermally released devices.
    This class (16) takes patents which claim only enough of the closure or its
    supporting frame as is necessary to mount the check or closer.


CLS 16/49
TXT Devices under the class definition for closing doors and the like, and
    checking them against slamming.

    (1)     Note.  The closing force is usually derived from spring means
    associated with the device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclass 137 for an interrelated
    fluid operator and closure check.


CLS 16/50
TXT Devices under subclass 49 combined with hinge structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for liquid type checks combined with hinge structure.

    68,     for pneumatic type checks combined with hinge structure.

    221+,   for hinge structure, per se.


CLS 16/51
TXT Devices under subclass 49 the checking devices including liquid acting as
    the checking means.


CLS 16/52
TXT Devices under subclass 51 in which the spring-chamber is within or
    concentric with the liquid-chamber.


CLS 16/53
TXT Devices under subclass 52 having cam-operating means for the pistons.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for cam-operating structure in side spring chamber checks.


CLS 16/54
TXT Devices under subclass 51 combined with hinge structure.


CLS 16/55
TXT Devices under subclass 54 the hinges having floor-pivots.


CLS 16/56
TXT Devices under subclass 51 including a plurality of cylinders and pistons.


CLS 16/57
TXT Devices under subclass 51 including oscillating cylinders.


CLS 16/58
TXT Devices under subclass 51 including cylinders having oscillating pistons.


CLS 16/59
TXT Devices under subclass 51 in which the spring-chambers are at one side and
    at right angles to the checking-cylinders.


CLS 16/60
TXT Devices under subclass 59 having cam or eccentric operating means for the
    pistons.


CLS 16/61
TXT Devices under subclass 51 in which the closing devices include springs and
    flexible links.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     for springs and flexible link checks, per se.

    78,     for spring and flexible link type door closers.


CLS 16/62
TXT Devices under subclass 51 in which the closing devices include springs and
    gear elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for spring and gear checks, per se.

    69,     for pneumatic checks including spring and gear elements.

    79,     for spring and gear type door closers.


CLS 16/63
TXT Devices under subclass 49 in which the closing devices include springs and
    flexible links.


CLS 16/64
TXT Devices under subclass 49 in which the closing devices include springs and
    gear elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for pneumatic checks including spring and gear elements.

    79,     for spring and gear type door closers.


CLS 16/65
TXT Devices under subclass 49 in which the closing devices include springs and
    lever elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for pneumatic checks including spring and lever elements.

    80,     for spring and lever type door closers.


CLS 16/66
TXT Devices under subclass 49 the checking devices including pneumatic checking
    means.


CLS 16/67
TXT Devices under subclass 66 in which the closing devices include flexible
    elements.


CLS 16/68
TXT Devices under subclass 66 combined with hinge structure.


CLS 16/69
TXT Devices under subclass 66 in which the closing devices include springs and
    gear elements.


CLS 16/70
TXT Devices under subclass 66 in which the closing devices include springs and
    lever elements.


CLS 16/71
TXT Closing devices under the class definition for doors and the like.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closure, subclasses 386+ for a closure mounted
    for swinging movement combined with a means to bias it in one direction.


CLS 16/72
TXT Devices under subclass 71 including miscellaneous spring elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     79 and 80, for springs combined with other elements for closing
    doors.

    85+,    for spring devices for checking a closure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, subclasses 7+ for spring devices
    actuating projectile-throwing arms and subclasses 16+ for spring devices
    actuating a plunger or other device to impel a projectile.


CLS 16/73
TXT Devices under subclass 72 in which the spring elements are substantially
    bowed or U-shaped.


CLS 16/74
TXT Devices under subclass 72 in which the spring elements are composed of
    rubber.


CLS 16/75
TXT Devices under subclass 72 in which the spring elements are subjected to
    torsional stresses.


CLS 16/76
TXT Devices under subclass 75 in which the torsional spring elements are wholly
    or in part in the form of coils.


CLS 16/77
TXT Devices under subclass 72 in which the spring elements are in form of
    volute coils.


CLS 16/78
TXT Devices under subclass 71 including springs, and inks for connecting the
    springs to the doors or closures.


CLS 16/79
TXT Devices under subclass 71 including springs, and gears or rack-and-pinion
    elements for connecting the springs to the doors or closures.


CLS 16/80
TXT Devices under subclass 71 including springs, and lever elements for
    connecting the springs to the doors or closures.


CLS 16/81
TXT Devices under subclass 71 including gravitating weights and connecting
    elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclass 387 for a swinging closure
    biased in one direction by a separate weight.


CLS 16/82
TXT Buffers, antislamming devices and stops under the class definition for
    doors, drawers and the like.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclass 63.5 for the
    combination of a receptacle, a closure, closure fastening means, and means
    to prevent closing of the closure under abnormal conditions.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclasses 341.12+ for keepers including or
    combined with buffers or cushioning means.


CLS 16/83
TXT Devices under subclass 82 including inertia elements or movable cushioning
    means.


CLS 16/84
TXT Devices under subclass 82 including pneumatic checking means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 297+ for a dashpot or shock absorber of general
    utility.


CLS 16/85
TXT Devices under subclass 82 including spring cushioning means, unless
    otherwise classified.


CLS 16/86
TXT Devices under subclass 85 in which the spring means is composed largely of
    rubber or the like.


CLS 16/86.1
TXT Supporting devices or hangers under the class definition for sliding gates
    and the like.


CLS 16/86.2
TXT Devices under subclass 86.1 in which the gate may have both a horizontal
    translational and a lateral swinging movement.


CLS 16/87
TXT Movable supporting devices and/or tracks under the class definition for
    sliding panels of either rigid or flexible nature, not otherwise
    classified.  The combination of the device or track with its support and/or
    with the article supported will also be found here, where the
    characteristics of the supported article (other than those which directly
    cooperate with the supporting device or track) are not claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86.1+,  for hangers for sliding gates.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 93 for suspended railways of the single rail
    type.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 150+ for suspended railway
    rolling stock of the single rail type.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 19+,
    123+ and 330+ for closures, partitions and panels, having hangers travelers
    and track devices.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 210+ for land vehicles
    having specific top structure having an opening therein with closure means
    for said opening slidable on track means.


CLS 16/87.2
TXT Devices under subclass 87 wherein some means for attaching a flexible
    fabric panel to the device and capable of travel along the track or hanger
    is claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87+,    for devices in which the fastening means is for a rigid panel
    (usually in the form of bolts, screws or their equivalents).

    93      and 97+, for the traveler element, per se, without any antifriction
    means.

    94+,    for the track element with or without its mounting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 716 for a  hanger  (e.g.,
    hook) on a portable article support.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 19 and 340+ for this same combination
    including in addition means for operating the panel structure.


CLS 16/87.4
TXT Devices under subclass 87.2 wherein the track (1) has a shield or
    protecting hood covering the same, or (2) is an elongated element,
    longitudinally slotted or hollow, in which the traveler portion moves, and
    from which the panel or panel carrying portion extends to the exterior of
    the hollow or slotted elongated element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94,     for track elements with their supporting brackets.

    96,     for the track element, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 19
    and 345 for other hollow or slotted track combined with closures etc.


CLS 16/87.6
TXT Devices under subclass 87.4 in which antifriction means is used between the
    traveler and the track.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     89 and 97+, for traveler elements, per se, equipped with either
    balls, rollers or wheels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 93 for suspended railways of the single rail
    type.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 150 for suspended railway rolling
    stock of the single rail type.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 19
    and 346 for hollow or slotted track with antifriction means, combined with
    closures, etc.


CLS 16/87.8
TXT Devices under subclass 87.2 in which antifriction means is used between the
    traveler and the track.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87.6,   for antifriction means with hollow, slotted or covered tracks.

    88,     89 and 97+, for traveler elements, per se, equipped with either
    balls, rollers or wheels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 93 for suspended railways of the single rail
    type.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 150 for suspended railway rolling
    stock of the single rail type.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 19
    and 347 for antifriction means.


CLS 16/88
TXT Devices under subclass 87 having rolling elements in the form of balls.


CLS 16/89
TXT Devices under subclass 87 having rolling elements in the form of cylinders.


CLS 16/90
TXT Guiding devices under subclass 87 for the lower edges of sliding panels and
    the like.


CLS 16/91
TXT Brackets under subclass 87 carrying guide or stay rollers for the edges of
    sliding panels and the like.


CLS 16/92
TXT Movable supporting-hangers under subclass 87 for sliding panels and the
    like, the supporting means composed largely of link and lever elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 194+,
    333+, and 368.1+ for movable position types of flexible and portable panels.


CLS 16/93
TXT Sliding supporting means under subclass 87 for panels and the like, the
    supporting means including tracks and sliding shoes.

    (1)     Note.  The ring type combinations have been placed in this subclass
    (Class 16, subclass 93).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 311 for combined fasteners
    of general application, even if disclosed as flexible panel travelers.
    These include particularly the hook-type devices, e.g., the hook-hook,
    hook-clasp and hook-pin hangers.


CLS 16/94
TXT Tracks under subclass 87 as defined in subclass 96 combined with supporting
    brackets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclasses 89-111 for suspended railway structures and
    subclasses 106+ for the suspended rail structures with or without their
    supports.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 105.1 (and see the notes thereunder),
    for single horizontal rod type devices and their supports.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 200+ for bracket supports, per se, and
    particularly subclasses 261+ for horizontal curtain rod brackets.


CLS 16/95
TXT Devices under subclass 87 wherein the track as defined in subclass 96 below
    (1) has a shield or protecting hood covering the same, (2) is an elongated
    element longitudinally slotted or hollow in which the traveler portion
    moves and from which the panel or panel carrying portion of the traveler
    extends to the exterior of the hollow or slotted elongated element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87.4+,  for covered hollow or slotted track combined with flexible panel
    attaching means.

    94,     for tracks of this type combined with supporting brackets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclasses 89-111 for suspended railway structures and
    particularly subclass 106 for the suspended rail structures with or without
    their supports.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 345+
    for hollow or slotted track combined with closures, etc.

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, subclasses 22+ (especially
    subclasses 23+ and 30+) for similar structure for transmitting electrical
    energy to moving vehicles.


CLS 16/96
TXT Tracks or track devices under subclass 87 for sliding panels of either
    rigid or flexible nature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94,     for tracks of this type combined with supporting brackets and see
    the notes appended thereto.

    95,     for covered tracks of this type, and see the notes appended thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclasses 89-111 for suspended railway structures and
    particularly subclass 106 for the suspended rail structures with or without
    their supports.

    238,    Railways:  Surface Track, subclass 238, appropriate subclasses for
    railway surface track.


CLS 16/97
TXT Wheel-supporting frames or brackets for sliding panels as defined in
    subclass 87 not otherwise classified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18+,    (especially subclasses 45+ for other wheel mounts).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 11.19+ for skates provided with wheels.

    295,    Railway Wheels and Axles, pertinent subclasses.

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclasses 124.1+ for axles, per
    se.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, various
    subclasses for a pulley or guide roll associated with an endless belt power
    transmission.


CLS 16/98
TXT Devices under subclass 97 the wheels having antifriciton-rollers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46+,    for caster wheels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, appropriate subclasses for plain and anti-friction
    bearing, per se.


CLS 16/99
TXT Devices under subclass 97 combined with lever means or the like for
    releasing and elevating the panels or wheel-supporting frames.


CLS 16/100
TXT Devices under subclass 97 in which the frames or brackets are carried by
    the lower parts of the panels or floor.


CLS 16/101
TXT Devices under subclass 97 having reciprocating tracks secured to the tops
    of sliding panels and the like.


CLS 16/102
TXT Devices under subclass 97 in which the wheel-journals roll upon the frames
    or brackets.


CLS 16/103
TXT Devices under subclass 97 which are pivotally connected whereby the panels
    may be swung transversely.


CLS 16/104
TXT Devices under subclass 97 which are vertically pivoted to provide for
    swiveling of the wheel-mount or panel.


CLS 16/105
TXT Devices under subclass 97 having means for vertical adjustment of the
    panels.


CLS 16/106
TXT Devices under subclass 97 having one or more guide-rollers for guiding the
    panels and wheel-mounts.


CLS 16/107
TXT Devices under subclass 87 having wheels of specific construction.


CLS 16/108
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising annular protective bands,
    caps, or collars to be applied to the exterior of rods, pipes, conduits,
    strands or other devices to reinforce the same and/or to prevent abrasion
    of elements passing therethrough into an opening in the rod, pipe, conduit,
    etc.

    (1)     Note.  These devices have various means for fastening them to the
    device to which they are applied.

    (2)     Note.  So much of the device to which they are applied may be
    claimed as is necessary to the definition of the ferrule, ring or thimble
    or its fastening means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 277 for impact-receiving thread-protectors
    used to facilitate assembly or disassembly of a threaded part, such as a
    vehicle axle.

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclasses 77+ for ferrules on
    tips of umbrellas, canes or crutches.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 96 for pipe end protectors.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 82 for similar
    devices limited by claimed structure to use with electric conduits or
    cables.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, may include a nominal
    recitation of a supply or take-up coil (e.g., less than a support for such
    a coil or a cooperative relationship between a tension or exhaust detector
    and reel driving or reel stopping means, etc.), subclass 196.1 for a
    passive guide combined with a material feeder.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 615+ for a residual
    guide or guard that directs elongated flexible material or one combined
    with more than nominal winding structure.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 299+ for a plurality of rods
    connected by a coupling ferrule.


CLS 16/109
TXT Devices under subclass 108 substantially in the form of rings.


CLS 16/110
TXT Handles under the class definition for closures, receptacles and the like
    and attaching devices therefor not otherwise classified.

    (0.5)   Note.  The inclusion of the structure of a handle shaft will not
    exclude a patent from classification in this subclass.

    (1)     Note.  Handles in other Classes.

    I.      For Receptacles, Class:



    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, subclasses 107+ for handles
    for pocketbooks.

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclass 39 for handles on trunks,
    and subclasses 115+ for handles on hand luggage.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclass 125 handles on baskets.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 94+ for handles for metallic receptacles.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 323+, 441+ and 465.1+, handles or handgrips
    connected to a supply or dispenser container for handling the dispenser.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 117.09+ for a
    handle combined with a paperboard box.

    248,    Supports, subclass 145.6 for movable receptacle supports with
    handles.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 6+ for a handle combined with a flexible
    bag.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product and
    Processes, subclass 187 for battery having a handle.

    II.     For Tools, Implements, and Analogous Devices, Class:



    7,      Compound Tools, subclasses 167+ compound tool handles and holders.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 22.1+, 79.1+,
    143.1+, 222, 327.1+, 329, 335, 344, 350+, 361, and 410+ for handles
    associated with brushing, scrubbing or cleaning devices.

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 85+, 329+, 340+ for handles for razors, and
    connections between handles and detachable blades, and subclasses 491
    handle for a plane, and 517+ for a saw handle.

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclasses 90+ handles for flat
    irons.

    42,     Firearms, subclasses 7 and 71.02+ for handles and  grips for
    firearms.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying subclass 23 handles or
    butts for fishing rods.

    81,     Tools, subclasses 119+ for rigid jaw wrenches, subclasses 177.1+
    for wrench handle and shanks, subclass 427.5 for plier handles, subclass
    487 for a hand held holder, and subclasses 489+ for a general tool handle
    which is not disclosed for use with a particular type of hand tool.

    101,    Printing, subclasses 405+ for printing stamp handles.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 94 handles for currycombs.

    132,    Toilet, subclass 76.5 for separable holders for abrader, file, or
    buffer.

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclasses 65+ handles for canes
    and umbrellas.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 329+ for earth  working tools with
    handles.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, appropriate subclass for a manipulating
    handle combined with a tool drive or impacting device, and particularly
    subclasses 168+ for a handle having a passage for drive motor motive fluid,
    and subclass 170 for a manipulating handle having a drive control operable
    by the engaging hand.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 154, 175,
    375+ and 525+ for fluid discharging devices having handles for manipulation
    thereof, with or without vehicular or other type of supply container.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 57+ hand fork
    and shovel handles.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    882 for mirrors and reflectors including a handle.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, for hand-manipulable
    coating implements with material supply, in which the following subclasses
    may include patents to implements with significant handle structure:  3,
    heat insulating handle;  6+, with means to attach or conform to a body
    member of the user; 48, with means to support or stabilize implement while
    in use;  88+, pencil, or the like; 99+, including means to project and
    retract tool; and 138, and 140, including reservoir mounted on elongated
    handle.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 722+ shovel and handle
    structure.

    473,    Amusement Devices: Games, subclasses 300+ for a golf grip.

    III.    For Handles, Handwheels and Analogous Devices for Operating
    Mechanisms, Class:



    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 543+ handles, handle bars,
    hand wheels for machine elements.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 172 sell pulls, cranks and push
    buttons.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 172 handles or
    buttons for switches.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclasses 347 and 348+ for latch spindle
    operating knobs and connections.

    IV.     For Boat, Buoy, and Vehicle Handholds and Handles, Class:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 461 grab irons.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 129.1 handles on aircraft.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 47+ handles on hand propelled wheeled
    vehicles.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 71+ handles on vehicle
    dashboards.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 183.1+ for a chair or seat having
    handles for carrying, or for steadying a standing person adjacent to the
    seat, as in a bus or train.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclasses 125+ handles for life
    rafts.

    V.      For Handle Fastening Devices, Class:



    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 146, 147.1+
    and 148 for holders for brushes, brooms and mops.

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 340+ connections between handles and cutting
    tools.

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, appropriate subclasses for connections of the
    chuck or socket type.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclasses 348+ connections between knobs and
    latch spindles.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for a connection
    between a handle and a device to which it is attached wherein only so much
    structure of the handle and device is included as cooperates to effect the
    joint.

    VI.     The following classes include other handles, and attachments or
    attaching means, as indicated.

    5,      Beds, subclass 662, handles and hand holds for assisting rising
    from a bed, subclasses 466+ for mattress handles; and subclasses 658+ for
    bed accessories.

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 161 for processes of manufacture of knobs
    and knob shanks.

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclass 56 boot straps.

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 460+ for a push or pull
    bar mounted on a closure and in combination therewith.

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 134.1+ for a packaging machine which
    also applies a handle to a package as an adjunct to the cover therefor.

    70,     Locks, subclasses 192+, 207+ and 225+ for locks and latch
    mechanisms for handles, hand wheels and levers.

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclass 106 blanks and
    processes for making hollow cutlery handles.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 465.1 self-luminous handles or attachments
    therefore and subclass 483.1 for fluorescent and phosphorescent handles.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 27.1+ for a
    removable handle or handling device for a plate or receptacle wherein there
    is no particular modification on the plate or receptacle for reception of
    the handle or handling device and subclass 137 for article carriers gripped
    and carried by the hand, especially subclasses 170 and 171 for handles
    having article-engaging hooks or grooves for accommodating twine around a
    package.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 399 handles and bails for lighting supports.

    D8,     Tools and Hardware, subclasses 300+ for designs for handles.


CLS 16/110.5
TXT Devices under subclass 110 where there is included in the handle structure
    a storage cavity or other receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 535+ for razor handles having a receptacle,
    subclass 125 for cutlery implements having a material holder in the form of
    a handle receptacle, and subclass 151 for cutlery implements retractable
    into the handle or having some other form of sheath and see the notes
    thereto for sheathed tools elsewhere classified.

    42,     Firearms, subclass 7 for breech loading pistols in which a magazine
    is placed in the handle or grip of the pistol.

    132,    Toilet, subclass 147 for combs with a storage cavity in the back,
    subclass 75 for manicuring devices combined with a storage cavity in the
    body or handle and subclass 290 for shaving kits combining an article
    peculiar to toilet use (e.g., comb, mirror) with a brush and a soap holder
    which may be the brush handle.

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclasses 65+ for stick and
    handle structures for canes and other sticks or staffs used as aids to
    locomotion and providing for the storage of articles.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 46 for handles
    encasing or housing conductors.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 191 for devices in which a dispenser container
    may serve as or be contained in a tool or implement handle.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclass 123 for a coating
    implement including a coating tool, within the handle of which is stored a
    supply of coating material which is removable for application to the tool.


CLS 16/111
TXT Handles under subclass 110, including specific hand grips and hand grips or
    bars rigidly mounted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 6+ for a
    coating implement with material supply and having a specific hand grip,
    loop, strap or pocket associated therewith.


CLS 16/112
TXT Handles under subclass 111 which are swingably mounted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-line Implements, subclass 169 for an
    article carrier having a pivotally mounted handle.


CLS 16/113
TXT Supports or braces under subclass 110 for swinging or folding handles.


CLS 16/114
TXT Handles under subclass 110 adapted to be removably attached to and
    separated from the closures, receptacles and the like.

    (1)     Note. For handling devices in the nature of separable handles, see
    also Class 15, Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 146,
    147.1+ and 148; Class 30, Cutlery, subclasses 329+ and 340+; 132, Toilet,
    subclass 76.5; 209, Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass
    215, 614; Class 215, Bottles and Jars, subclasses 412+; and Class 294,
    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 27.1+ and 137.


CLS 16/115
TXT Handles under subclass 110 having inclosed portions mounted in or on the
    walls of the closures or receptacles and extensible to operative position.


CLS 16/116
TXT Handles under subclass 110 having insulated hand-gripping portions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 16+ for a guard or protector for the head or
    arm against unusual conditions such as the application of force or high
    temperature; especially, subclass 20 for a guard or protector for the palm
    of the hand.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclass 3 for a coating
    implement with material supply having a heat-insulated handle or hand grip
    portion.


CLS 16/117
TXT Handles under subclass 116 consisting of handwheels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 543+ for handwheels of
    general application and their means of connection to the shaft to be
    operated.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for a connection
    between a collar, pulley, wheel, etc., and a shaft wherein only such
    structure of the collar, pulley, wheel, etc., is included as cooperates to
    effect the connection.


CLS 16/118
TXT Handles under subclass 116 consisting of rigid knobs.


CLS 16/119
TXT Handles under subclass 116 consisting of loops.


CLS 16/120
TXT Handles under subclass 116 consisting of wire.


CLS 16/121
TXT Handles under subclass 110 having rounded hand-gripping portions consisting
    of rigid knobs.


CLS 16/122
TXT Handles under subclass 121 having flexible suspending means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 172 for bell pulls.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 464.1 for self-luminous pendants and
    subclasses 483.1+ for fluorescent and phosphorescent pendants.


CLS 16/123
TXT Handles under subclass 121 having swinging hand-gripping portions.


CLS 16/124
TXT Handles under subclass 110 comprising rigid lifts, pulls or sockets having
    finger-engaging portions.


CLS 16/125
TXT Handles under subclass 110 having rigid hand-gripping portions consisting
    of loops.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 703+ for loop handles permanently attached to
    mattresses.


CLS 16/126
TXT Handles under subclass 125 having swinging' hand-gripping portions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclass 39 for handles for trunks
    and subclasses 115+ for hand luggage with a handle.


CLS 16/127
TXT Handles under subclass 110 having hand-griping portions in the form of
    swinging rings.


CLS 16/193
TXT Devices under the class definition, including means connected with sashes,
    frames or panels for holding them in balanced or adjusted position.  In the
    following indented subclass "sashes" is used generically.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 445+ for a counterbalance
    combined with means, e.g., bearing, to guide the movement of the closure or
    a counterbalance interrelated with two or more closures, and see the search
    notes thereto for the loci of other closure counterbalances.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 325, 329-331 and 334.1+ for adjustable or
    balanced supports and subclass 364 for counterbalance weights.


CLS 16/194
TXT Devices under subclass 193 having connected cords and counterweights for
    holding the sashes in balanced or adjusted position.


CLS 16/195
TXT Devices under subclass 193 having connected racks and pinions for holding
    the sashes in balanced or adjusted position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201,    for springs combined with racks and pinions.


CLS 16/196
TXT Devices under subclass 193 having connected cords or chains combined with
    pulleys for holding the sashes in balanced or adjusted position.


CLS 16/197
TXT Devices under subclass 193 having springs or the like for holding the
    sashes in balanced or adjusted position and not otherwise classified.


CLS 16/198
TXT Devices under subclass 197 combined with drum-and-cord devices for holding
    the sashes in balanced or adjusted position.


CLS 16/199
TXT Devices under subclass 197 combined with friction-rollers or the like for
    holding the sashes in balanced or adjusted position.


CLS 16/200
TXT Devices under subclass 197 combined with lever devices or the like for
    holding the sashes in balanced or adjusted position.


CLS 16/201
TXT Devices under subclass 197 combined with rack-and-pinion devices or the
    like for holding the sashes in balanced or adjusted position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193,    for rack and pinion balances without spring means.


CLS 16/202
TXT Fastening devices under the class definition of sash-cords.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 115+ for cord and rope
    holders of general application.


CLS 16/203
TXT Devices under subclass 202 composed of bendable or compressible material.


CLS 16/204
TXT Devices under subclass 202 for sash-chains.


CLS 16/205
TXT Devices under subclass 202 comprising separate movable clamping elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203,    for bendable clamps.


CLS 16/206
TXT Devices under subclass 202 including hooks.


CLS 16/207
TXT Devices under subclass 202 for knotted sash-cords.


CLS 16/208
TXT Devices under subclass 202 for temporarily holding sash cords or chains
    while unfastened from the sashes.


CLS 16/209
TXT Devices under subclass 202 for fastening weights to sash-cords, chains and
    the like.


CLS 16/210
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising guide means for sash cords.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 389+ for a device or a member intended to guide a moving cable,
    the cable is attached to or supports an object being pulled by the cable
    from one position or location to another.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, various
    subclasses for devices such as pulleys or guide rolls for guiding or
    tensioning a power transmission belt.


CLS 16/211
TXT Devices under subclass 210 comprising specific casings for sash-cord
    guide-pulleys.


CLS 16/212
TXT Devices under subclass 211 constructed from single pieces of sheet metal.


CLS 16/213
TXT Devices under subclass 210 having two or more guide wheels or pulleys.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 168+ for a
    roller which advances web or strand material.


CLS 16/214
TXT Devices under subclass 210 having one or more grooves for guiding the cords.


CLS 16/215
TXT Devices under subclass 210 comprising specific constructions of combined
    sash-cord wheels and casings.


CLS 16/216
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising weights for balancing sashes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403     and 404, for other weights and see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 16/217
TXT Weights under subclass 216 composed of two or more different materials.


CLS 16/218
TXT Weights under subclass 216 made in removable sections secured together.


CLS 16/219
TXT Weights under subclass 216 having one or more attached wheels or pulleys.


CLS 16/220
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising fastening devices for
    removably securing window-beads to window frames or casings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 456+ for securing means
    for a closure guide which permits removal of the guide and closure.


CLS 16/221
TXT HINGE:

    Device under the class definition for swingably connecting two members and
    comprising a first portion adapted to engage or be fastened to a first
    member (e.g., frame, box, sill), and a second portion adapted to engage or
    be fastened to a second member (e.g., closure).

    (1)     Note.  Claims which include a nominal recitation of a specific
    member (e.g., "trunk lid", "refrigerator door", etc.) are properly
    classified in this and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49+,    for a hinge combined with a check to prevent a closure from
    slamming, and a means to return the closure to a closed position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 236 and 240 for
    toilet seat hinges.

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 33 for hinged belt
    fasteners; and subclass 598 for headed socket fasteners having a hinged cap
    plate.

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 11 for hinge making and assembling.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 119 for calendars
    having hinged leaves; and subclasses 475, 497+ and 530 for changing
    exhibitors employing hinges.

    42,     Firearms, subclass 63 for a revolver having a hinged barrel.

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 208+ for closures mounted
    for multidirectional or oblique movement; and subclasses 381+ for a closure
    mounted for swinging movement.

    63,     Jewelry, subclasses 7+ and 9 for a bracelet having a hinge; and
    subclass 19 for a locket having a hinged cover.

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 59+ for tables
    having hinged leaves; and subclasses 115+ for folding (card) tables.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclasses 69+ for
    safe closures mounted for plural motions (e.g., sliding and swinging).

    114,    Ships, subclasses 176 and 178 for hinged port covers.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 194 for a stove door or window hinge.

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Cover, subclasses 120+ for a purse
    having a hinged lid.

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclass 414 for a wheel rim comprised
    of hinged sections.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 165+ for a folding
    stepladder having hinged sections.

    184,    Lubrication, subclasses 90+ for hinged oil cup closures.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 6 for an eyeglass case
    having hinged sections.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclass 83 for hinged barrel covers.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 334+ for receptacles of that class having
    hinged closures.

    222,    Dispensing, under subclass 221 comprising an element which is
    designed to either fracture at a predetermined force or to melt at a
    predetermined temperature.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 125.08+ for
    boxes having hinged closures.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 49 for aircraft having hinged (foldable)
    wings.

    256,    Fences, subclass 26 for a fence comprised of hinged panels.

    293,    Vehicle Fenders, subclasses 44+ for hinged vehicle fenders.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 86+ for hinged
    windshields; and subclass 92 for windshield hinges

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclass 32 for demountable rims
    comprised of hinged sections.

    305,    Wheel Substitutes for Land Vehicles, subclasses 185+ for hinge
    details of vehicle treads.

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclass 121
    for spectacle temples with a hinge connector; and subclass 153 for
    spectacle strap type connectors including a particular hinge.  See also (1)
    Note under subclass 121 for the classification of hinges in spectacles.

    402,    Binder Device Releasably Engaging Aperture or Notch of Sheet,
    subclasses 26+ for hinged binder rings.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 52+ for articulated members.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 25+ for a hinged
    cover (e.g., "grating") spanning an opening in a road or walkway.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 20 for a revetment
    comprised of hinged concrete sections.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclass 31 for interrelated electrical
    connectors that are part of a hinge; and subclass 165 for an electrical
    connector with relatively guided members and an intermediate pliable
    conductor.

    602,    Surgery:  Splint, Brace, or Bandage, subclass 16 for hinged
    surgical brace.

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members),  Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories  Therefor, appropriate subclasses for joint  structure in
    an artificial body member.


CLS 16/222
TXT Including frangible or fusible portion:

    Hinge under subclass 221 comprising an element which is designed to either
    fracture at a predetermined force or to melt at a predetermined temperature.


CLS 16/223
TXT With diverse art portion or attachment:

    Hinge under subclass 221 wherein either a section formed on the hinge or a
    device attachable thereto is provided for a purpose not associated with or
    affecting the operation of the hinge or its attachment to a hinged member*.

    (1)     Note.  The "device" required in the above definition must be other
    than a hinged member*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 479+ for a mirror bracket pivotally mounted on
    an automobile door hinge.


CLS 16/224
TXT Ball and socket:

    Hinge under subclass 221 wherein the structure for swingably connecting the
    hinged members* comprises a bulbous, substantially spherical   portion
    adapted to be fixed to a first hinged member and to be seated in a
    corresponding concavity attachable to a second hinged member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 51 and 261 for a ball and
    socket connection between pipe sections.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 56, 90, and 122+ for a ball and
    socket connection between two members, wherein an intrinsic property of one
    of the members is utilized in making the connection (e.g., the "ball" or
    "socket" is formed directly on the hinged member*).


CLS 16/225
TXT Pliant or elastic hinge:

    Hinge under subclass 221 comprising a section of bendable or resiliently
    deformable material connecting the two members, and which deforms to allow
    the members to swing.

    (1)     Note.  The pliant material must serve as the only connection
    between the members; therefore, a flat spring connecting two members in
    conjunction with a knuckle and pintle arrangement is not proper for this
    subclass (see subclasses 277+ below).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277+,   for a resiliently biased hinge which employs a discrete spring
    element to bias two hinge portions about a pivotal connection between the
    portions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 220+ for flexibly connected
    rigid members, wherein the connecting means is not readily attached and
    removed from the rigid members.


CLS 16/226
TXT Metallic:

    Hinge under subclass 225 wherein the bendable or resiliently deformable
    material connecting the two hinged members* is metal.


CLS 16/227
TXT Snap or X hinge:

    Hinge under subclass 225 wherein either (a) the hinge is biased to both
    open and closed position by a resiliently biased over-center mechanism, or
    (b) the hinge comprises two strips of bendable material, with respective
    first ends secured to opposite sides of one hinged member* and second ends
    secured to opposite sides of another hinged member, wherein the two strips
    cross one another at a point intermediate their ends.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    293+,   for a hinge having an over-center mechanism which employs a spring
    element that is distinct from pivotal connecting structure of the hinge.


CLS 16/228
TXT Eyeglass hinge:

    Hinge under subclass 221 peculiarly adapted for swingably connecting two
    portions of an eyeglass frame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 426+ for safety goggles.

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclass 153
    for eyeglasses having particular hinge structure.


CLS 16/229
TXT Retractable pintle:

    Hinge under subclass 221 including a hinge pin* carried by one hinged
    member* and protruding into an opening or recess in a second hinged member,
    and wherein the means are provided to permit limited axial movement of the
    hinge pin* with respect to both hinged members to withdraw the pin from the
    opening or recess and thereby disconnect the hinged members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262+,   for hinge pins which are completely removed to separate one hinge
    section from another, and thereby disjoin the attached hinged members*.


CLS 16/230
TXT Latch hinge:

    Hinge under subclass 229 provided with two noncollinear axially movable
    hinge pins* protruding from a hinged member* at different locations,
    whereby the hinged member* may be swung about either hinge pin when the
    other is retracted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclass 395 for swingably mounted
    closures having plural latches or locks which are distinct from the hinges.


CLS 16/231
TXT Latch hinge:

    Hinge under subclass 221 including means which facilitates the ready
    disjoining and joining of the connection between two hinged members*,
    wherein the hinge is used alternatively as a hinge or fastener, and in
    conjunction with a similar hinge on an opposite edge of a hinged member
    whereby the hinged member may be swung about either hinge.


CLS 16/232
TXT Resilient securing means:

    Hinge under subclass 231 wherein the means facilitating the ready
    disjoining and joining of the connection between hinged members* comprises
    an element which is elastically deformed when the hinged members are joined
    or separated.


CLS 16/233
TXT Including lever for shifting one member relative to another:

    Hinge under subclass 221 having structure which permits relative
    translational movement of the hinged members*, and which includes an
    elongated rigid element that provides a mechanical advantage through its
    length when manipulated to cause the movement between the hinged members.


CLS 16/234
TXT Having staggered leaves:

    Hinge under subclass 221 including three or more tandemly arranged leaves*
    with adjacent ones for attachment to respective hinged members* located on
    opposite sides of a single hinge axis.


CLS 16/235
TXT Including adjustment for changing relative orientation of hinged members:

    Hinge under subclass 221 including means which permits one hinged member*
    to be moved and fixed relative to another hinged member.

    (1)     Note.  The movement referred to above encompasses all translational
    movement, and pivotal movement other than normal swinging movement of the
    hinge.  Any relative movement which always precedes or follows the normal
    pivotal movement about the hinge axis is excluded (e.g., relative vertical
    shifting of the members to engage or release a catch is excluded).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252+,   for a hinge having a clamp for attachment to a hinged member.

    350+,   for a hinge in which the hinged members* are shifted relative to
    one another to engage or release a catch.

    362+,   for a hinge in which the hinged members* are shifted relative to
    one another, wherein the shifting always precedes, follows, or occurs
    during swinging movement of a hinged member about the hinge axis*.


CLS 16/236
TXT Having plural independent adjustments:

    Hinge under subclass 235 including first means which permits the hinged
    members* to be relatively moved and fixed along or about a first axis, and
    second discrete means allowing the hinged members to be relatively moved
    and fixed along or about a second axis.


CLS 16/237
TXT All rectilinear:

    Hinge under subclass 236 wherein each of the first and second adjustment
    means permits relative movement of the hinged members* back and forth along
    a straight line.


CLS 16/238
TXT Including screw-operated means to move hinged members:

    Hinge under subclass 237 wherein one of the adjustment means comprises a
    force multiplier in the form of a helically threaded member which is
    rotated to move one hinged member* relative to another along a straight
    line.


CLS 16/239
TXT Pivotal adjustment:

    Hinge under subclass 235 wherein the adjustment means permits one hinge
    portion to be moved and fixed about an axis relative to another hinge
    portion.


CLS 16/240
TXT Including screw-operated means to move hinged members:

    Hinge under subclass 239 including a force multiplier in the form of
    cooperating helically ribbed or grooved members which are relatively
    rotated to move one hinge portion about an axis relative to another hinge
    portion.


CLS 16/241
TXT About hinge axis:

    Hinge under subclass 240 wherein the axis about which one hinge portion is
    moved relative to another is an axis about which a hinged member* rotates
    during operation of the hinge.


CLS 16/242
TXT Including means to move hinged members:

    Hinge under subclass 235 including a force multiplier or power means which
    is manipulated or driven to move the hinged members*.


CLS 16/243
TXT Along or parallel to hinge axis:

    Hinge under subclass 242 wherein the force multiplier or power means is
    arranged to effect relative movement of the hinged members* in the
    direction of the hinge axis*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238,    for a hinge adjustable in at least two directions, wherein
    adjustment in at least one direction is effected by screw-threaded means.


CLS 16/244
TXT Including threaded hinge pin:

    Hinge under subclass 243 including an elongated rodlike element about which
    a hinged member* swings, wherein threads are provided on said element for
    engagement with a cooperating threaded element to provide the force
    multiplier for moving one hinged member relative to the other.


CLS 16/245
TXT Screw-operated:

    Hinge under subclass 242 including a force multiplier in the form of a
    spirally threaded member which is rotated to move the hinged members*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238,    for a hinge adjustable in at least two directions, wherein
    adjustment in at least one direction is affected by screw-threaded means.


CLS 16/246
TXT To shift plate toward or away from hinged member:

    Hinge under subclass 245 including a planar portion adapted to overlie a
    hinged member*, wherein rotation of the spirally threaded member moves the
    planar portion toward or away from the hinged member to which it is secured.


CLS 16/247
TXT Having adjustable spacer between leaf and hinged member (e.g., shim):

    Hinge under subclass 235 comprising an element interposed between a hinge
    leaf* and its associated member*, wherein said element is movable or
    interchangeable to vary the distance between the leaf and member.

    (1)     Note.  It is not a requirement that the spacer directly contact the
    member or leaf.


CLS 16/248
TXT Adjustable along or parallel to hinge axis:

    Hinge under subclass 235 wherein the adjustment means permits relative
    translation of the hinged members* in the direction of the hinge axis*.


CLS 16/249
TXT Having interdigitated surfaces or slot for hinge-to-member fastener:

    Hinge under subclass 235 wherein the means which permits one hinged member*
    to be moved and fixed relative to another hinged member comprises either
    (a) two cooperating portions having protrusions and recesses which are
    adapted to mesh in any of a plurality of relative positions corresponding
    to various relative positions of the hinged members, or (b) a laterally
    elongated aperture in the hinge and along which a fastener secured to one
    hinged member is confined to travel as the hinged members are adjusted.


CLS 16/250
TXT Having cover:

    Hinge under subclass 221 including a shroud for covering all or a portion
    of the hinge structure to protect the hinge or its surroundings, or to
    increase its aesthetic value.


CLS 16/251
TXT Leaf cover:

    Hinge under subclass 250 including a rod or platelike portion by which the
    hinge is adapted to be secured to a hinged member*, wherein the shroud
    overlies and is substantially coextensive with the rod or platelike portion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    D8,     Tools and Hardware, subclasses 323+ for designs for hinges.


CLS 16/252
TXT Having clamp for attaching hinge to member:

    Hinge under subclass 221 including means to permit the ready removal or
    replacement of the hinge from a hinged member* and comprising either (a)
    two opposing surfaces movable toward and away from one another for engaging
    and disengaging the hinged member, or (b) an element forming a
    constrictable opening adapted to encircle the hinged member or a portion
    thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235+,   for a hinge having a clamp for fixing or releasing one hinge
    portion relative to another for the purpose of adjusting the hinged members.

    390,    for a hinge leaf having opposed parallel surfaces with no means
    being claimed to force the surfaces toward one another.


CLS 16/253
TXT Circumferential clamp:

    Hinge under subclass 252 comprising either a constrictable element or two
    opposing clamping surfaces adapted to substantially surround the perimeter
    of a hinged member*.


CLS 16/254
TXT Having means to facilitate assembly and disassembly of hinge sections to
    join or disjoin members:

    Hinge under subclass 221 wherein means are provided to permit the ready
    removal and replacement of one portion of a hinge from another portion
    whereby the two hinged members* are disconnected or connected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229+,   for a hinge having a pintle which is retractable to release the
    hinge from a hinged member.

    231+,   for a combination latch and hinge, i.e., wherein the hinge is
    adapted to be used alternatively as a hinge or fastener and in conjunction
    with a similar hinge on an opposite edge of a hinged member* such that the
    hinged member may be swung about either hinge.

    252+,   for a hinge including opposing clamping surfaces to secure the
    hinge directly to a hinged member.

    382+,   for a hinge provided with specific means (other than a clamp) to
    secure a leaf to a hinged member.


CLS 16/255
TXT Resiliently biased hinge:

    Hinge under subclass 254 further comprising an element which when deformed
    elastically exerts a force upon one of the hinged members* tending to swing
    the member about the hinge axis.


CLS 16/256
TXT Having helical spring along hinge axis:

    Hinge under subclass 255 wherein the elastically deformable element
    comprises a helix whose convolutions are formed about the hinge axis*.


CLS 16/257
TXT Resiliently biased retaining means:

    Hinge under subclass 254 wherein the means which permits the ready removal
    and replacement of one hinge portion from another includes an element which
    is deformed elastically whenever the hinge portions are assembled or
    disassembled.


CLS 16/258
TXT Having discrete latch and spring to slide or pivot latch:

    Hinge under subclass 257 wherein the elastically deformable element biases
    a second individually distinct element to move along a surface or about an
    axis into or out of engagement with cooperating structure, thereby
    retaining or releasing the hinge portions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229+,   for a hinge provided with a retractable pintle.


CLS 16/259
TXT Discrete retaining means for pivotal contacting surfaces:

    Hinge under subclass 257 wherein the two hinge portions which may be
    assembled or disassembled include respective surface areas which have
    mutual sliding or pivotal contact during swinging movement of a hinged
    member* about the hinge axis*, Therein the surfaces are kept in assembled
    relationship by an individually distinct elastically deformable means.


CLS 16/260
TXT Separation of pivotal contacting surfaces:

    Hinge under subclass 254 wherein the two hinge portions which may be
    assembled or disassembled include respective surface areas which are
    engaged during assembly or disengaged during disassembly, wherein sliding
    or pivotal contact between the surface areas is manifested during swinging
    of a hinged member* about the hinge axis.


CLS 16/261
TXT Having movable or removable connector:

    Hinge under subclass 260 including a discrete element for retaining the
    hinge portions in their assembled relationship wherein said element is
    either moved with respect to both portions or is completely disassociated
    from both portions to disassemble said portions from one another.


CLS 16/262
TXT Pintle removable from remainder of hinge:

    Hinge under subclass 261 wherein the discrete element is the hinge pin* and
    the hinge portions are disassembled by completely disassociating the hinge
    pin* from both hinge portions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229+,   for a hinge having a pintle that is retracted to separate two
    hinged members.

    380+,   for a hinge having specific means to retain the pintle therein,
    wherein the pintle is not readily removable from the remainder of the hinge.


CLS 16/263
TXT And additional connector or separate pintle sections:

    Hinge under subclass 262 wherein either (a) a discrete fastener is provided
    for retaining the hinge pin* and the hinge portions in assembled
    relationship, or (b) the hinge pin comprises plural separable segments
    which are disassociated to allow the hinge portions to be separated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    380+,   for a pintle connector which is not readily removable to
    disassemble the hinge.


CLS 16/264
TXT Screw-threaded connector:

    Hinge under subclass 261 wherein the discrete element for retaining the
    hinge portions in their assembled relationship includes a helically
    threaded section which cooperates with a similarly threaded section or
    element to retain the hinge portions in their assembled relationship.


CLS 16/265
TXT Axially shifting hinge sections:

    Hinge under subclass 260 wherein the two hinge portions are separated by
    moving them relatively in the direction of the hinge axis*.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are hinges in which a hinge portion is
    initially moved axially, and then moved transversely to the axis to
    separate the portions.


CLS 16/266
TXT At specific angular orientation of hinge sections:

    Hinge under subclass 265 wherein the two hinge portions may be moved
    relatively in the direction of the hinge axis* only when placed in
    predetermined relative position about the hinge axis.


CLS 16/267
TXT Hook and pin:

    Hinge under subclass 260 wherein the surface areas which are engaged or
    disengaged during assembly or disassembly of the hinge portions comprise an
    open curve having a reentrant end section on one hinge portion and adapted
    to partially surround a hinge pin* on the other hinge portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    356,    for a hinge comprised of two nested open curved portions which move
    along one another and about a hinge pin, but not readily assembled and
    disassembled.


CLS 16/268
TXT Hook in aperture:

    Hinge under subclass 260 wherein the surface areas which are engaged or
    disengaged during assembly or disassembly of the hinge portions comprise an
    open curve having a reentrant end section on one hinge portion, and is
    adapted to pass through an opening in the other hinge portion.


CLS 16/269
TXT Hook to hook:

    Hinge under subclass 260 wherein the surface areas which are engaged or
    disengaged during assembly or disassembly of the hinge portions each
    comprise an open curve having a reentrant end section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    355+,   for a hinge comprised of two nested open curved portions which move
    along one another, but not readily assembled or disassembled.


CLS 16/270
TXT And discrete movable or removable connector to fasten one hinge section to
    another:

    Hinge under subclass 254 including an element individually distinct from
    either hinge portion and which serves to retain the hinge portions in
    assembled relationship, wherein said element is either moved with respect
    to both portions, or is completely disassociated from both portions to
    disassemble said portions from one another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261+,   for a hinge having a discrete movable or removable connector for
    retaining the pivotal contacting surfaces of the hinge.


CLS 16/271
TXT By relatively sliding connection (e.g., dovetail):

    Hinge under subclass 254 wherein the means to permit the ready removal or
    replacement of one hinge portion from another comprises cooperating
    interfitting structure on the respective portions which is initially
    engaged and then locked into assembled relationship by translating one
    portion relative to the other portion.


CLS 16/272
TXT Including receiving connector attachable to hinged member:

    Hinge under subclass 271 wherein the cooperating interfitting structure
    comprises a first element or portion adapted to be fixed to a hinged
    member*, and having means for accommodating a substantial part of a second
    element or portion which slides into the first element or portion.


CLS 16/273
TXT Having means to reduce friction between hinge parts:

    Hinge under subclass 221 including means specifically provided for
    lessening the surface friction between two opposing surfaces which are
    caused to move over one another as the hinged members* are swung about the
    hinge axis*.


CLS 16/274
TXT By fluid lubricant:

    Hinge under subclass 273 wherein the means for lessening the surface
    friction comprises a supply or a passageway for applying a friction
    reducing fluid to the surfaces.


CLS 16/275
TXT Ball or roller bearing:

    Hinge under subclass 273 wherein the surface friction between the two
    opposing surfaces is reduced by interposing a plurality of rolling elements
    between the surfaces, whereby rolling rather than sliding contact occurs.

    (1)     Note.  A rolling cam follower is not considered to be a bearing as
    defined above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224,    for a ball and socket hinge.

    313+,   for a gravitating hinge having roller which rides along a camming
    surface as the hinged members* swing relative to one another.


CLS 16/276
TXT Circularly distributed balls or rollers:

    Hinge under subclass 275 including a plurality of rolling elements arranged
    through a complete circle about the hinge axis*.


CLS 16/277
TXT Resiliently biased hinge:

    Hinge under subclass 221 including, in addition to the structure for
    swingably connecting the hinged members*, an element which is elastically
    deformed to exert a force upon a hinged member tending to swing the member
    about the hinge axis*.

    (1)     Note.  The elastically deformable element must provide bias through
    a substantial arc during swinging movement of the hinged member* about the
    hinge axis*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225+,   for a resiliently biased hinge wherein the elastically deformable
    element is the only structure which connects the hinged members*.

    255+,   for a resiliently biased hinge which is readily assembled or
    disassembled.

    321+,   for a hinge having a resiliently biased catch by which a hinged
    member* "snaps" into open or closed position, but is not biased during the
    remainder of the swing.


CLS 16/278
TXT Including means to render spring ineffective through all or a portion of
    swing:

    Hinge under subclass 277 wherein either (a) selectively actuated means are
    provided to release the hinged member* to swing without bias from the
    elastically deformable element, or (b) the hinge member swings under bias
    from the elastically deformable element through a first arc about the hinge
    axis*, and then swings without bias from the elastically deformable element
    through a second adjacent arc, or vice versa.

    (1)     Note.  The elastically deformable element must provide bias through
    a substantial arc during swinging movement of the hinged member* about the
    hinge axis*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255+,   for a hinge having a resiliently biased catch by which a hinged
    member* "snaps" into open or closed position, but is not biased during the
    remainder of the swing.


CLS 16/279
TXT Comprising manipulatable element or portion:

    Hinge under subclass 278 wherein a selectively actuated means is provided
    to release the hinged member* to swing without bias from the elastically
    deformable element.


CLS 16/280
TXT Biased from either direction toward neutral position (e.g., double acting):

    Hinge under subclass 277 wherein one or more elastically deformable
    elements are arranged to urge one of the hinged members* to swing about the
    hinge axis* toward an equilibrium position from either side of said
    equilibrium position, at which the net force tending to swing the member is
    zero.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291,    for a hinge in which a helical spring transverse to the hinge axis*
    biases a hinged member* in either direction away from a dead center
    position.

    293+,   for a hinge in which a spring other than a coil transverse to the
    hinge axis* biases a hinged member* in either direction away from a dead
    center position.


CLS 16/281
TXT Helical spring transverse to hinge axis:

    Hinge under subclass 280 wherein the hinged member* is swung about the
    hinge axis* by an elastically deformable element comprising a coil spring
    in the form of a helix and arranged on the hinge such that the axis of the
    helix is orthogonal with the hinge axis.


CLS 16/282
TXT Plural hinge axes (e.g., multiple pintle):

    Hinge under subclass 280 wherein one of the hinged members* rotates about a
    first hinge axis* on one side of the equilibrium position and about a
    second hinge axis on the other side of the equilibrium position.


CLS 16/283
TXT And barrels for helical springs on separate axes:

    Hinge under subclass 282 comprising two elastically deformable elements in
    the form of helixes, each being arranged about a separate hinge axis* and
    surrounded by a coaxial cylindrical cover.


CLS 16/284
TXT Resiliently biased rolling or sliding cam surface:

    Hinge under subclass 280 wherein an elastically deformable element is
    arranged to cause a first surface associated with a hinged member* to slide
    or roll over a second cooperating surface, whereby the hinged member is
    caused to swing about the hinge axis* from either side of the equilibrium
    position due to the relative curvature of the surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    303,    for a hinge in which a hinged member* is caused to swing in only
    one direction by an axially biased cam surface.


CLS 16/285
TXT By helical spring along hinge axis:

    Hinge under subclass 280 wherein the elastically deformable element is in
    the form of a helix arranged about and coaxial with the hinge axis*.


CLS 16/286
TXT Having transverse helical spring or elastic strip:

    Hinge under subclass 277 wherein a hinged member* is swung about the hinge
    axis* by an elastically deformable element comprising either (a) a coil
    spring in the form of a helix, or (b) a length of resilient material
    adapted to be stretched in the direction of its length, wherein either the
    axis of the helix or the length of the resilient material is orthogonal
    with the hinge axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281,    for a hinge which employs a coil spring transverse to the hinge
    axis* to bias a hinged member* from either side of a neutral position
    toward the neutral position.


CLS 16/287
TXT Plural hinge axes (e.g., multiple pintle):

    Hinge under subclass 286 wherein the structure which swingably connects the
    two hinged members* defines two or more distinct axes about which the
    hinged members* pivot relative to one another.

    (1)     Note.  The pivotal movement may occur alternately about each axis
    or simultaneously about both axes.


CLS 16/288
TXT Four or more axes:

    Hinge under subclass 287 wherein the structure which swingably connects the
    two hinged members* defines four or more distinct axes about which the
    hinged members pivot relative to one another.


CLS 16/289
TXT To counterbalance weight of hinged member (e.g., closure biased to open
    position):

    Hinge under subclass 286 wherein the elastically deformable element is
    arranged to offset the weight of a hinged member* as the member is swung
    about the hinge axis*.


CLS 16/290
TXT Including pivoted coaxial spring retaining bar:

    Hinge under subclass 289 including an elongated cylindrical rod extending
    through the length of the elastically deformable element to retain the
    element in an axially compressed state, wherein the rod is mounted for
    swinging movement with respect to both hinged members* as one hinged member
    swings relative to the other about the hinge axis*.


CLS 16/291
TXT Over-center spring or linkage travel (e.g., "holdback hinge"):

    Hinge under subclass 286 including means which first causes the elastically
    deformable element to reach a point of maximum deflection as a hinged
    member* reaches a particular position in its swing about the hinge axis*,
    and then allows the element to retreat from the point of maximum deflection
    as the hinged member continues to swing past the position.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are hinges having a toggle linkage which
    serves to bias a hinged member* about a single hinge axis* toward the open
    and closed positions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323,    for hinges having a spring-biased toggle catch, but wherein the
    hinged members* are not biased resiliently about the hinged axis*.


CLS 16/292
TXT Having means to hold hinged members against pivotal movement about hinge
    axis (i.e., catch):

    Hinge under subclass 286 including means to secure the hinged members* to
    prevent them from swinging about the hinge axis*.

    (1)     Note.  The members must be secured against swinging movement in
    both directions, i.e., an abutment stop, per se, is excluded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    374+,   for a hinge having a stop or abutment.


CLS 16/293
TXT Over-center spring or linkage travel (e.g., "holdback hinge"):

    Hinge under subclass 277 including means which first causes the elastically
    deformable element to reach a point of maximum deflection as a hinged
    member* reaches a particular position in its swing about the hinge axis*,
    and then allows the element to retreat from the point of maximum deflection
    as the hinged member continues to swing past the position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291,    for a hinge having a helical spring or elastic strip which is
    oriented transversely to the hinge axis* and which comprises an over-center
    mechanism.

    323,    for a hinge which included a toggle-actuated catch to fix the
    hinged members* in a particular relative position, but having no means to
    bias the hinged members about the hinge axis*.


CLS 16/294
TXT Plural hinge axes:

    Hinge under subclass 293 wherein the structure which swingably connects the
    two hinged members* defines two or more distinct axes about which the
    hinged members pivot relative to one another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282+,   for a double-acting spring biased hinge having plural hinge axes*.

    287+,   for a hinge biased by a helical spring or an elastic strip acting
    transversely to one of a plurality of hinge axes.


CLS 16/295
TXT Coil spring having axis along or parallel to hinge axis:

    Hinge under subclass 293 wherein the elastically deformable element
    comprises a helix or a flat spiral whose convolutions are formed about an
    axis extending in the direction of the hinge axis*.


CLS 16/296
TXT Including camming or sliding surface to deflect spring perpendicularly to
    the hinge axis:

    Hinge under subclass 293 wherein a portion of the elastically deformable
    element is displaced at a right angle to the hinge axis* by a contacting
    surface which moves along a surface of the element.


CLS 16/297
TXT Having means to hold hinged members against pivotal movement about hinge
    axis (e.g., catch):

    Hinge under subclass 277 including means to secure the hinged members* to
    prevent any swinging of the members about the hinge axis*.

    (1)     Note. The members must be secured against swinging movement in both
    directions, i.e., an abutment stop, per se, is excluded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    292,    for a hinge having a catch and biased by a coil spring oriented
    transversely to the hinge axis*.

    374+,   for a hinge having a stop or abutment.


CLS 16/298
TXT Having force adjustment:

    Hinge under subclass 277 including means by which the force exerted by the
    resiliently deformable element to swing the hinged members* may be varied
    while the hinged members remain at a constant relative position about the
    hinge axis*.


CLS 16/299
TXT Rotatable spring-engaging collar:

    Hinge under subclass 298 including a cylinder or annulus which is connected
    to the resiliently deformable member and is rotated about the hinge axis*
    to vary the force exerted on the hinged members*.


CLS 16/300
TXT Having detention aperture or protuberance:

    Hinge under subclass 299 wherein the cylinder or annulus is held in
    adjusted position by a depression, hole, or projection which engages
    cooperating structure on the remainder of the hinge.


CLS 16/301
TXT Having tool receiving aperture:

    Hinge under subclass 299 wherein the cylinder or annulus has formed therein
    an opening into which is engaged a tool to turn the cylinder or collar.


CLS 16/302
TXT Plural hinge axes (e.g., multiple pintle):

    Hinge under subclass 277 wherein the structure which swingably connects the
    two hinged members* defines two or more distinct axes about which the
    hinged members pivot relative to one another.

    (1)     Note. The pivotal movement may occur alternately about either axis
    or simultaneously about two or more axes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282+,   for a double-acting hinge having plural hinge axes*.

    287+,   for a hinge having plural hinge axes* and biased by a coil oriented
    transversely to a hinge axis*.

    294,    for a hinge having plural hinge axes* and provided with an
    over-center travelling spring or linkage.


CLS 16/303
TXT Having axially biased camming surface:

    Hinge under subclass 277 wherein an elastically deformable element is
    arranged to force a first surface associated with a hinged member* in a
    direction along or parallel to the hinge axis* toward a second surface,
    wherein the curvature of one of the surfaces results in pivotal movement of
    the hinged member about the hinge axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284,    for similarly operated hinges in which a hinged member* is biased
    from either side of an equilibrium position toward the position.


CLS 16/304
TXT Coil:

    Hinge under subclass 277 wherein the resiliently deformable element
    comprises a helix or a flat spiral.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280+,   for a double-acting spring hinge which employs a torsion coil
    spring.

    286+,   for a hinge having a helical spring arranged transversely to the
    hinge axis.


CLS 16/305
TXT Plural coils:

    Hinge under subclass 304 including two distinct helices or flat spirals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282+,   for a double-acting spring hinge employing two spaced hinge axes
    with a coil spring associated with each axis.


CLS 16/306
TXT To counterbalance weight of hinged member (e.g., horizontal closure biased
    to open position):

    Hinge under subclass 304 wherein the torsion of the elastically deformable
    helix or flat spiral is arranged to offset the weight of a hinged member*
    as the member is swung about the hinge axis*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    289+,   for a hinge in which the weight of a hinged member* is offset by
    compression or extension of a helical spring oriented transversely to the
    hinge axis*.


CLS 16/307
TXT On pintle:

    Hinge under subclass 304 including a hinge pin* and wherein the helical
    spring or flat spiral is placed about the hinge pin.


CLS 16/308
TXT Torsion spring:

    Hinge under subclass 277 wherein the resiliently deformable element
    comprises a length of material the end portions of which are relatively
    twisted in opposite directions about its axis or its length, wherein the
    force tending to restore the length of material to its original state is
    employed to pivot a hinge member* about the hinge axis*.


CLS 16/309
TXT Gravitating hinge having vertical axis:

    Hinge under subclass 221 wherein all or a portion of a hinged member* moves
    upwardly along a substantially vertical hinge axis* as it is swung about
    said axis in one direction, wherein the resulting potential energy is
    utilized to swing said hinged member in the opposite direction about the
    hinge axis to thereby return the hinged member to its original position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 236+ for gravity actuated
    closures.


CLS 16/310
TXT Having lift rod:

    Hinge under subclass 309 including an elongated rigid element connected at
    one end to a first hinged member* and at the other end to a second hinged
    member for raising the first hinged member as it is swung in one direction
    about the hinge axis*.


CLS 16/311
TXT Having plural spaced hinge axes:

    Hinge under subclass 309 wherein the structure swingably connecting the
    hinged members* defines two or more distinct axes about which the hinged
    members pivot.


CLS 16/312
TXT Including cam surface and follower:

    Hinge under subclass 309 including a sloped or curved surface fixed with
    respect to one hinged member* and a follower associated with a second hinge
    member and engaging the sloped or curved surface, whereby relative swinging
    movement of the hinged members results in the lifting of one hinged member
    relative to the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284,    for a hinge which is biased in either direction by a resiliently
    biased cam surface.

    303,    for a hinge which is biased in one direction only by a resiliently
    biased cam surface.


CLS 16/313
TXT And rolling element:

    Hinge under subclass 312 wherein the follower associated with the second
    hinged member* comprises an element rotatable about an axis and which has
    rolling contact with the sloped or curved surface.


CLS 16/314
TXT Between opposing surfaces:

    Hinge under subclass 313 wherein the rotatable element is confined to
    travel between two facing sloped or curved surfaces defining a path
    therebetween.


CLS 16/315
TXT And detent in cam surface:

    Hinge under subclass 313 wherein the vertically sloped or curved surface
    includes a discrete depression, hole, or protuberance adapted to be engaged
    by the follower to fix the relative position of the hinged members* about
    the hinge axis*.

    (1)     Note. The detent must be in addition to the valley or trough
    between oppositely sloped surfaces of a double-acting gravitating hinge.


CLS 16/316
TXT On axially twisted or helically fluted element:

    Hinge under subclass 312 wherein the vertically sloped or curved surface is
    formed on an elongated element oriented along the hinge axis*, and having
    helical convolutions about its longitudinal axis.


CLS 16/317
TXT Including means to hold hinged members against pivotal movement:

    Hinge under subclass 312 including means to secure the hinge members* to
    prevent any swinging of the hinged members relative to one another.


CLS 16/318
TXT Having aperture for slidably receiving pintle (e.g., camming knuckle):

    Hinge under subclass 312 wherein the vertically sloped or curved surface
    surrounds an opening through which a hinge pin* is guided for sliding
    movement as one hinge member* moves up or down relative to the other.


CLS 16/319
TXT Including means to hold or retard hinged members against pivotal
    movement(e.g., catch):

    Hinge under subclass 221 including either means to secure the hinged
    members* to prevent any swinging or means for producing a drag and thereby
    preventing the members from swinging freely about the hinge axis*.

    (1)     Note. The members must be secured against swinging movement in both
    directions, i.e., an abutment stop, per se, is excluded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    292,    for a hinge biased by a transverse helical spring and having a
    catch.

    297,    for a spring hinge having a catch.

    317,    for a gravitating hinge having a catch.

    374+,   for a hinge having a stop or abutment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    292,    Closure Fasteners, appropriate subclasses for a device for securing
    a closure element in closed or adjusted position, and not associated with
    hinge structure.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclass 84 for articulated members which
    are lockable at selected angles.


CLS 16/320
TXT Magnetic:

    Hinge under subclass 319 wherein a magnetic field is employed either to
    secure or to produce a drag upon the hinged members*.


CLS 16/321
TXT Resiliently biased catch:

    Hinge under subclass 319 having means to secure the hinged members* in a
    specific relative position about the hinge axis*, the means including two
    cooperating elements or portions, and elastically deformable means which
    acts to move or force one of the elements or portions relative to the other
    to hold the hinged members in the specific position.

    (1)     Note.  A portion of the elastically deformable means (spring) may
    serve as a cooperating portion.

    (2)     Note.  A resiliently biased friction pad by which the hinged
    members may be fixed at any position during their swing about the hinge
    axis is excluded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    337+,   for a hinge having a friction drag or a resiliently biased friction
    pad as specified in (2) Note above.


CLS 16/322
TXT Having spring force adjustment:

    Hinge under subclass 321 including means by which the force exerted by the
    elastically deformable means to move the two elements or portions may be
    varied.


CLS 16/323
TXT Including toggle linkage:

    Hinge under subclass 321 including two elements pivotally connected to one
    another, and respectively pivoted at spaced points to other hinge
    structure, the elements being resiliently biased whereby pivotal movement
    of the elements fixes the hinged members* in position about the hinge axis*.


CLS 16/324
TXT Having discrete manipulatable release means (e.g., lever):

    Hinge under subclass 321 having means, individually distinct from the two
    elements or portions, adapted to be engaged by an operator and which
    effects relative movement between the two elements or portions to free the
    hinged members* for swinging movement about the hinge axis*.


CLS 16/325
TXT Including cam or eccentric:

    Hinge under subclass 324 wherein the release means includes a rotatable
    member having a surface which is so arranged about the rotational axis as
    to slidably engage and cause a second member to be reciprocated.

    (1)     Note. The "second member" may or may not be one of the cooperating
    elements or portions.


CLS 16/326
TXT Sliding release means or lever-actuated sliding catch:

    Hinge under subclass 324 wherein either (a) the discrete release means is
    constrained to translate along a surface to effect relative movement
    between the two cooperating elements or portions, or (b) one of the
    cooperating elements or portions is constrained to translate along a
    surface into or out of engagement with the other cooperating element or
    portion, and an elongated pivoted member is included to engage the sliding
    element or portion and provide a mechanical advantage to cause the same to
    translate along the surface.


CLS 16/327
TXT Sliding:

    Hinge under subclass 321 wherein one of the cooperating elements or
    portions comprises a part which is individually distinct from the
    elastically deformable means and is constrained to translate along a
    surface into or out of engagement with the other cooperating element or
    portion.


CLS 16/328
TXT Movement along or parallel to hinge axis:

    Hinge under subclass 327 wherein the two cooperating elements or portions
    are biased to move relative to one another in the direction of the hinge
    axis*.


CLS 16/329
TXT Interdigitated or plural sockets:

    Hinge under subclass 328 wherein one of the cooperating elements or
    portions includes a series of protuberances or recesses which are adapted
    to intermesh with or be engaged by cooperating structure on the other
    element or hinge portion.

    (1)     Note. The hinged members* are correspondingly held in one of a
    plurality of positions about the hinge axis*.


CLS 16/330
TXT Opposed interdigitated sliding collars on hinge axis:

    Hinge under subclass 329 wherein the cooperating elements comprise two
    substantially annular or cylindrical portions whose axes coincide with the
    hinge axis*, along which the cooperating  elements are constrained to
    translate toward and away from each other, wherein cooperating
    protuberances and recesses are provided on an axial face of each annular or
    cylindrical portion.


CLS 16/331
TXT And catch receiving socket:

    Hinge under subclass 328 wherein one of the cooperating elements or
    portions includes a hole or depression which is adapted to receive the
    other element or portion to hold the hinge members* against pivotal
    movement about the hinge axis*.


CLS 16/332
TXT And catch receiving socket:

    Hinge under subclass 327 wherein one of the cooperating elements or
    portions includes a hole or depression which  is adapted to receive the
    other element or portion to fix the hinge members* against pivotal movement
    about the hinge axis*.


CLS 16/333
TXT Pivoted:

    Hinge under subclass 321 wherein one of the cooperating elements or
    portions is mounted on the hinge for swinging movement about a pivot axis,
    wherein the elastically deformable means acts to swing said element or
    portion about its pivot axis into engagement with the other cooperating
    element or portion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclasses 219+ for a spring projected, pivoted
    bolt.


CLS 16/334
TXT Plural alternately useable detents:

    Hinge under subclass 321 wherein one of the cooperating elements or
    portions comprises a plurality of discrete depressions, holes or
    protuberances, any one of which may be selectively engaged by the other
    cooperating element or portion whereby the hinged members* are
    correspondingly fixed in one of a plurality of positions about the hinge
    axis*.


CLS 16/335
TXT Spring arm:

    Hinge under subclass 321 wherein the elastically deformable means comprises
    a length of self-sustaining resilient material fixed to the hinge in
    cantilever fashion, and which is deflected in a   direction perpendicular
    to its length when the cooperating elements or portions are moved relative
    to one another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    296,    for a spring biased hinge employing a spring arm in an over-center
    mechanism.

    297,    for a hinge having a spring arm catch and wherein the hinged
    members* are continuously biased about the hinge axis by either the spring
    arm or a separate spring.


CLS 16/336
TXT Plural opposed arms:

    Hinge under subclass 335 comprising two generally parallel lengths of
    self-sustaining resilient material which are deflected toward or away from
    one another by one or more cooperating elements or portions.


CLS 16/337
TXT By friction:

    Hinge under subclass 319 including two opposing surfaces, each of which is
    formed on or connected to a respective hinged member* and wherein movement
    of the hinged members is prevented or retarded due to the frictional
    resistance to movement of one surface over the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    321+,   for a resiliently biased catch which fixes the hinged members in a
    specific relative position by engaging cooperating structure at a specific
    point during the swinging movement of the hinged members.


CLS 16/338
TXT Screw-threaded adjustment:

    Hinge under subclass 337 wherein a helically threaded element is provide
    for varying the pressure between the two opposing surfaces to control the
    frictional resistance to movement of one surface over the other.


CLS 16/339
TXT Along or parallel to hinge axis:

    Hinge under subclass 338 wherein the frictional resistance is varied by
    moving the opposing surfaces toward or away from one another in the
    direction of the hinge axis*.


CLS 16/340
TXT Threaded pintle:

    Hinge under subclass 339 wherein the helically threaded member comprises a
    hinge pin*.


CLS 16/341
TXT Cam or wedge actuator:

    Hinge under subclass 337 including an element having either an inclined or
    curved surface wherein translation or pivotal movement of the element along
    or about an axis supplies a force perpendicular to the movement of the
    surface which results in increased pressure between the opposing frictional
    surfaces.

    (1)     Note.  The inclined or curved surface may or may not serve as one
    of the opposing frictional surfaces.


CLS 16/342
TXT On hinge pin or between surfaces surrounding hinge axis:

    Hinge under subclass 337 wherein either (a) one of the opposing surfaces
    consists of a rodlike element about which a hinge member* swings, or (b)
    the two opposing surfaces encircle the hinge axis*.


CLS 16/343
TXT Pivoted:

    Hinge under subclass 319 wherein the means to fix or retard the hinged
    members* against swinging movement about the hinge axis* comprises a first
    element or portion swingably mounted with respect to both hinged members
    and into engagement with a second cooperating element or portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333,    for a spring biased pivoted catch.


CLS 16/344
TXT Plural alternately useable detents:

    Hinge under subclass 343 including a plurality of holes or depressions, any
    one of which may be selectively engaged by the pivoted element to secure
    the hinged members* in one of a plurality or corresponding relative
    positions about the hinge axis*.


CLS 16/345
TXT And sliding:

    Hinge under subclass 343 wherein the swingably mounted element is mounted
    for movement along a surface, whereby the pivotal axis of the element to
    translate with respect to a hinged member*.


CLS 16/346
TXT Serially connected pivoted arms between leaves (e.g., brace):

    Hinge under subclass 343 wherein the two cooperating elements or portions
    comprise two swinging elongated elements, each pivoted at one end to a
    respective hinge leaf* and at the opposite end to the other element.


CLS 16/347
TXT About axis along or parallel to hinge axis:

    Hinge under subclass 343 wherein the first element or portion swings about
    an axis which either coincides with or is parallel to an axis about which a
    hinged member* swings.


CLS 16/348
TXT By transversely moving pin in slot:

    Hinge under subclass 319 wherein the means to fix or retard the movement of
    the hinged members* comprises an element which protrudes into and is guided
    by a laterally elongated aperture in the hinge, whereby the element is
    confined to laterally traverse said aperture as a hinged member swings
    about the hinge axis*.

    (1)     Note.  The aperture typically has a recess formed along its length
    into which the pin is moved to fix the hinged members* in relative position.


CLS 16/349
TXT Having discrete manipulatable release means (e.g., lever operated):

    Hinge under subclass 319 including means adapted to be directly engaged and
    manipulated by an operator to deactivate the member-fixing or
    drag-producing means, thereby enabling a hinged member* to swing freely
    about the hinge axis*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324,    for a similar release mechanism for a spring-biased catch.


CLS 16/350
TXT By shifting hinged members:

    Hinge under subclass 319 wherein the means to fix or retard the movement of
    the hinged members* comprises cooperating portions which are engaged or
    disengaged by relative movement of the hinged members other than pivotal
    movement about the hinge axis*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233,    for a hinge having a lever for shifting one hinged member* relative
    to another.

    235+,   for a hinge having means permitting the relative adjustment of the
    hinged members, wherein the hinged members are fixed in each position of
    adjustment.

    362+,   for a hinge having means which permits sliding movement between
    hinged members other than for engaging or disengaging a catch or drag.


CLS 16/351
TXT Along hinge axis:

    Hinge under subclass 350 wherein the cooperating portions are engaged or
    disengaged by moving the hinged members* relative to one another in the
    direction of the hinge axis*.


CLS 16/352
TXT Sliding:

    Hinge under subclass 319 wherein the means to secure the hinged members* or
    to produce a drag against their movement about the hinge axis comprises two
    cooperating elements or portions, one of which is constrained to translate
    along a surface into or out of engagement with the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327+,   for a spring-biased sliding catch.


CLS 16/353
TXT Along or parallel to hinge axis:

    Hinge under subclass 352 wherein one of the cooperating elements or
    portions moves relative to the other along a line which either coincides
    with or is parallel to an axis about which a hinged member* swings.


CLS 16/354
TXT Including toothed gear:

    Hinge under subclass 221 including a rotatably mounted annular or
    cylindrical element having a plurality of teeth arranged about the axis of
    rotation of the element and adapted to drive or be driven by an additional
    element engaging said teeth as a hinged member* swings about the hinge
    axis*.


CLS 16/355
TXT Comprising nested open curved portions attached to hinged members:

    Hinge under subclass 221 wherein the device for swingably connecting two
    hinged members* comprises two interengaged portions secured to or formed on
    the respective hinged members and curved in a section about the hinge
    axis*, each portion having a concave surface and a convex surface, wherein
    the convex surface of one portion is adapted to move along the concave
    surface of the other portion as the hinged members* swing about the hinge
    axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    260+,   for a hinge comprising nested open curved portions which are
    engaged or disengaged to join or disjoin the hinged members*.


CLS 16/356
TXT Including hinge pin:

    Hinge under subclass 355 including an elongated rodlike element about which
    a hinged member* swings.

    (1)     Note.  The rodlike element may be either a discrete element or a
    distinct section formed on one of the open curved portions.


CLS 16/357
TXT Including transversely moving pin in slot:

    Hinge under subclass 221 comprising an element which extends into an
    aperture or groove which is elongated in a direction transverse to the
    hinge axis*, wherein the element moves laterally along the aperture or
    groove as one hinged member* is swung relative to the other about the hinge
    axis*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    348,    for hinges provided with a recess along the slot into which pin is
    moved to fix the hinged members* in relative position.


CLS 16/358
TXT Plural noncollinear pins and slots:

    Hinge under subclass 357 including two discrete elements, each of which
    extends through and moves laterally along a separate elongated aperture or
    groove as a hinged member* is swung about the hinge axis*, wherein the
    longitudinal axes of the elements define separate lines.


CLS 16/359
TXT Parallel slots:

    Hinge under subclass 358 wherein the distance between the centers of the
    two separate elongated apertures or grooves is constant along their length.


CLS 16/360
TXT Having pin fixed to pivoted arm or plate:

    Hinge under subclass 357 wherein the element which moves along the
    elongated aperture or groove is attached to a component which is swingably
    mounted with respect to both hinged members*.


CLS 16/361
TXT Hinge pin movable along slot:

    Hinge under subclass 357 wherein the element which moves along the
    elongated aperture or groove comprises a rodlike element which defines the
    sole axis about which a hinged member* swings.


CLS 16/362
TXT Including sliding surfaces to permit relative translation of hinged members:

    Hinge under subclass 221 including first and second surfaces secured to
    respective hinged members*, and which engage one another in sliding contact
    to guide the hinged members in displacement relative to one another along a
    straight or curved line.

    (1)     Note.  The hinges found in this and indented subclasses differ from
    adjustable hinges in that the former function in such a manner that the
    shifting of the hinged members occurs as either a prerequisite or a
    consequence of the pivotal movement of the hinged members* about the hinge
    axis*, whereas in the latter, the hinged members are moved and fixed
    independently of their pivotal movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233,    for a hinge having a lever for shifting one hinged member* relative
    to one another.

    235+,   for adjustable hinges (see (1) Note supra).

    350+,   for a hinge having a rigid catch, and means which permits relative
    translation of the hinged members to engage or disengage the catch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 250+ for a closure
    swingable about plural axes and combined with a slide for guiding movement
    of the closure.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclass 70 for safe
    closures mounted for sliding and swinging movement.


CLS 16/363
TXT And stop or abutment for pivotal movement:

    Hinge under subclass 362 including structure for limiting the swinging
    movement of a hinged member* in one direction about the hinge axis*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    350+,   for a hinge having a catch, i.e., means to fix a hinged member
    against movement in either direction about the hinge axis*, wherein the
    catch is engaged or disengaged by shifting one hinged member relative to
    the other.


CLS 16/364
TXT Movement transverse to hinge axis:

    Hinge under subclass 362 wherein the sliding surfaces permit relative
    displacement of the hinged members* in a direction perpendicular to the
    hinge axis*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235+,   for an adjustable hinge having means which permits one hinged
    member to be moved and fixed relative to the other hinged member.

    357+,   for a hinge which includes a pin movable transversely along a slot
    to permit the hinged members* to be displaced relative to one another.


CLS 16/365
TXT Three-hinged members:

    Hinge under subclass 221 including a third portion adapted to engage or be
    fastened to a third-hinged member*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclass 236 for a hinge for
    connecting a toilet bowl, seat, and cover.


CLS 16/366
TXT Having plural hinge axes (e.g., multiple pintle):

    Hinge under subclass 221 wherein the structure which swingably connects the
    two hinged members* defines two or more distinct axes about which the
    hinged members pivot relative to one another.

    (1)     Note.  The pivotal movement may occur alternately about each axis
    or simultaneously about both axes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239+,   for a hinge having means which permits pivotal adjustment of the
    hinged members* about an axis other than the hinge axis*.

    282+,   for a double-acting resiliently biased hinge having plural hinge
    axes.

    287+,   for resiliently biased hinge which employs a helical spring
    oriented transversely to plural hinge axes.

    311,    for a gravitating hinge having plural hinge axes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 52+ for articulated members
    having plural distinct articulation axes.


CLS 16/367
TXT Having transverse or skewed axes:

    Hinge under subclass 366 including structure which permits the hinged
    members* to swing about two discrete intersecting or obliquely oriented
    axes.


CLS 16/368
TXT Connected by serially arranged pivoted links between hinged members:

    Hinge under subclass 366 comprising two arms or plates swingably connected
    together at or adjacent one end and swingably connected to respective
    hinged members* at the opposite end.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    346,    for a hinge having a brace in the form of serially connected
    pivoted links spaced from the hinge axis.


CLS 16/369
TXT Plural sets of serially arranged pivoted links:

    Hinge under subclass 368 comprising a second discrete pair of arms or
    plates swingably connected together at or adjacent one end and having their
    opposite ends swingably connected to respective hinged members*.


CLS 16/370
TXT Four or more axes:

    Hinge under subclass 366 wherein the structure which swingably connects the
    two hinged members* defines four or more distinct axes about which the
    hinged members pivot relative to one another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    288,    for hinge having four or more hinge axes* and a coil spring
    oriented transversely to at least one axis.


CLS 16/371
TXT Including stop or latch:

    Hinge under subclass 366 including either (a) specific structure for
    limiting the angular displacement of a hinged member about a hinge axis*,
    or (b) means for securing a hinged member* to prevent it from swinging
    about one of the hinge axes.


CLS 16/372
TXT Including laminated leaf:

    Hinge under subclass 221 including a portion by which the hinge is adapted
    to be secured to a hinged member* and consisting of superposed flat layers.


CLS 16/373
TXT Wire hinge:

    Hinge under subclass 221 a substantial portion of which is formed from a
    material in the shape of a very elongated slender strand or rod.


CLS 16/374
TXT Having stop or abutment:

    Hinge under subclass 221 including structure for limiting the angular
    displacement about the hinge axis* of one hinged member* relative to
    another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    319+,   for a hinge which includes structure for fixing the hinged members*
    against movement in either direction about the hinge axis*.

    357+,   for a stop in the form of a pin movable transversely along a slot.

    363,    for a hinge having structure which serves as a stop or abutment
    after one hinged member* is shifted relative to another.


CLS 16/375
TXT Adjustable or resilient:

    Hinge under subclass 374 wherein either (a) means are provided which permit
    the position of the limiting structure to be changed, or (b) the limiting
    structure is formed from an elastically deformable material.


CLS 16/376
TXT Comprising relieved axially opposed relatively rotating surfaces:

    Hinge under subclass 374 including first and second surfaces which face one
    another and are perpendicular to the hinge axis and rotatable with the
    respective hinged members*, wherein the structure for limiting the angular
    displacement of one hinge member relative to the other comprises engageable
    protrusions or walls of recesses on the respective surfaces.


CLS 16/377
TXT Comprising platelike bearing portion curved about hinge axis:

    Hinge under subclass 374 wherein the structure for limiting the angular
    displacement of a hinged member* about the hinge axis* comprises an edge or
    face of a sheet of material fixed with respect to a hinged member, and
    deformed in the direction of its thickness to circle a hinge pin*, and
    serve as a bearing surface during pivotal movement of the hinged member
    about the hinge axis.


CLS 16/378
TXT Hinge axis passes through hinged member (e.g., floor hinge):

    Hinge under subclass 221 wherein the axis about which a hinged member*
    rotates during operation of the hinge defines a line which passes through
    the interior of the hinged member*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277+,   for resiliently biased floor hinges.


CLS 16/379
TXT Pintle or pivot concealed in hinged member:

    Hinge under subclass 378 wherein mutually contacting pivotal surfaces of
    the hinge lie entirely within a cavity in one of the hinged members* in at
    least one relative position of the hinged members about the hinge axis*.


CLS 16/380
TXT Including means to retain pintle in hinge (e.g., tamper proof, nonrising
    pintle, etc.):

    Hinge under subclass 221 comprising an elongated cylindrical or rodlike
    element about which a hinged member* rotates, wherein means are provided to
    prevent the element from moving axially with respect to the remainder of
    the hinge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262+,   for a hinge having a pintle which may be readily assembled and
    disassembled from the hinge.


CLS 16/381
TXT Threaded or slotted pintle or knuckle:

    Hinge under subclass 380 wherein the means to prevent axial movement of the
    elongated cylindrical or rodlike element comprises a groove in either the
    element or in a bearing surface surrounding the element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262+,   for a hinge having a readily removable and replaceable threaded
    pintle.


CLS 16/382
TXT Including means to fasten leaf to member:

    Hinge under subclass 221 including a rod or platelike portion protruding
    from the hinge axis* and adapted to be secured to a hinged member*, wherein
    means are provided to secure the rod or platelike portion to the hinged
    member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252+,   for a hinge having a clamp for attachment to a hinged member* and
    comprising either two opposing surfaces or a constrictable opening.

    254+,   for a hinge having means to facilitate assembly and disassembly of
    hinge sections to permit hinged members to be joined or separated.


CLS 16/383
TXT By expandable connector:

    Hinge under subclass 382 wherein the means for securing the platelike
    portion to the hinged member* comprises an element adapted to be inserted
    into the hinged member and having portions which move outwardly to retain
    the element in the hinged member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener subclasses 15+ for expandable fasteners, per se.


CLS 16/384
TXT Self-penetrating fastener:

    Hinge under subclass 382 wherein the means for securing the platelike
    portion to the hinged member*  comprises an element which is driven into
    the hinged member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener appropriate subclasses for screws, nails, and
    other driven fasteners, per se.


CLS 16/385
TXT Specified material:

    Hinge under subclass 221 wherein significance is attributed to the
    particular substance from which the hinge is formed.

    (1)     Note.  A nominally recited hinge formed from a particular substance
    is properly classified with the substance and cross-referenced to this
    subclass.


CLS 16/386
TXT Specific pintle structure:

    Hinge under subclass 221 including a rodlike element of specified
    construction about which a hinged member* swings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223,    for a pintle portion or attachment which is unrelated to the hinge
    function (e.g., coat hanger, net support, etc.).

    244,    for a pintle having means for adjusting the  hinged member*
    relative to one another.

    262+,   for a pintle removable from the remainder of the hinge.

    265+,   for hinges which separate at the pintle, the pintle remaining
    attached to one hinge section.

    273+,   for a pintle having a lubricating feature.

    340,    for a hinge having a threaded pintle drag adjustment.

    374+,   for a pintle having structure which serves as a limit stop for the
    hinged members.

    380+,   for a pintle provided with means to retain it in the hinge.

    385,    for a pintle formed from a specific material.


CLS 16/387
TXT Specific leaf structure:

    Hinge under subclass 221 including a rodlike or platelike portion of
    specified construction by which the hinge is adapted to be secured to a
    hinged member*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246,    for a hinge leaf provided with means for adjustment toward and away
    from a hinged member*.

    251,    for a hinge leaf cover.

    252+,   for a hinge leaf having a clamp for  attachment to a hinged member.

    254+,   for a leaf provided with means to     facilitate ready assembly and
    disassembly with a hinged member.

    372,    for a laminated leaf.

    373,    for a leaf formed substantially from wire.

    374+,   for a leaf having a limit stop for  movement about the hinge axis*.

    385,    for a leaf formed from a specified  material.


CLS 16/388
TXT Having prongs or cooperating structure on leaf:

    Hinge under subclass 387 wherein the platelike portion includes either (a)
    a self-piercing protrusion, or (b) structure adapted to engage cooperating
    structure on another hinge leaf.


CLS 16/389
TXT Angular leaf sections:

    Hinge under subclass 387 including a plurality of distinct contiguous
    rodlike or platelike sections adapted to be secured to a hinged member*,
    wherein the sides of adjacent sections intersect to form corners.


CLS 16/390
TXT Parallel sections:

    Hinge under subclass 389 wherein two of the rodlike or platelike sections
    have opposing faces or longitudinal axes which are everywhere equidistant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252+,   for a clamping leaf having parallel sections and means to force the
    sections toward one another.


CLS 16/391
TXT Coplanar sections:

    Hinge under subclass 389 wherein all rodlike or platelike sections lie in
    the same plane.


CLS 16/392
TXT Including planar section perpendicular to hinge axis:

    Hinge under subclass 389 including a platelike section lying in a plane
    which is orthogonal with the axis about which a hinged member* rotates.


CLS 16/400
TXT COUNTERBALANCE DEVICE, PER SE:

    Subject matter under the subclass definition comprising a counterpoise to
    negate or minimize a force.

    (1)     Note. Included in this subclass is a counterbalance device, where
    the counterpoise is connected to the force by a pulley or system of pulleys.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401,    for a spring counterbalance device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, for a counterbalance device claimed
    in conjunction with a door, especially subclasses 20, 119+, 150+, 429+, and
    445+.


CLS 16/401
TXT Spring:

    Counterbalance device under subclass 400, wherein the counterpoise
    comprises a resilient member stressed within its elastic limit.

    (1)     Note.  A helical or torsion springs are included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400     for a counterbalance device, per se.


CLS 16/402
TXT DOOR ESCUTCHEON OR SIMILAR ELEMENT:

    Subject matter under  the class definition providing an article of hardware
    for a door not provided for elsewhere, having a protective plate (e.g.,
    kickplate), an ornamental covering (i.e., the type which surrounds a
    keyhole), a doorknob cover, or other such component.

    (1)     Note. Included herein is an attaching element specifically claimed
    for use with a door associated device, e.g., check or hinge, where no more
    of the device is recited than is necessary to support the attaching
    element.


    (2)     Note. A device surrounding a latch or handle claiming such uses as
    protecting the door from scratching or fingerprints is appropriate matter
    for this subclass.

    (4)     Note. This subclass is not intended for a device constituting an
    arrangement of  working parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49+,    for a check, closure, or other multi component door mechanism and
    especially subclasses 119+, 150+, 200+, 429+ and 445+ for a counterbalance
    device in combination with a door.

    71+,    for a closure.

    82+,    for a closure check.

    116,    for a handle with an associated insulating pad.

    221+,   for hinge structure.

    400+,   for a counterbalance device, per se, not claimed in conjunction
    with a door.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, especially subclasses 460+ for a
    handle protector.

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, subclass 155 for a doorknob
    cover constructed of flexible materials.

    296,    Land Vehicles: Bodies and Tops, especially subclasses 199+ for a
    scuff plate for the sill or other body structure of a land vehicle.


CLS 16/403
TXT Paper weight:

    Element under the class definition intended to be placed on a sheet of
    paper to secure the paper in place.

    (1)     Note. The paper weight of this subclass may be small, heavy, or
    decorative.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4+,     for a weight intended to hold a carpet or rug in position

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 504 for paperweights with a support structure or
    framework associated with the paper retaining means.

    D19,    Office Supplies;  Artists' and Teachers' Materials


CLS 16/404
TXT MISCELLANEOUS ELEMENT OR ATTACHMENT:

    Miscellaneous Articles, not classifiable in any of the other subclasses of
    this class or any other class, which is a stationary attachment or
    accessory.

    (1)     Note. This subclass is not intended for device constituting an
    arrangement of working parts.

    (2)     Note. A miscellaneous weight with or without its supporting means
    is found herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403,    for a paper weight.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 273 for a dress weight.

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, especially subclasses 1 for a  miscellaneous
    article and 128 for a shoe form.

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 216+ for sash weights.

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 115+ for a cord and/or
    rope holder; subclasses 455+ for a clasp, and subclasses 572+ for a
    separable fastener.


    30,     Cutlery, subclass 235 for a drilling machine-frame combined with a
    counter-weight.

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 392+ for a plumb bob and
    subclass 720 for a sounding device of the line and lead sinker    type or
    for such a sinker, per se.

    38,     Textiles: Ironing or Smoothing, subclass 98 for a weight increasing
    attachment for a textile smoothing implement.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 700+ for picture
    frames, subclass 358 for a paperweight combined with means to display a
    card, picture or sign (e.g.; calendar), and subclasses 584+ for a sign.

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 460+ for a kickplate in
    combination with the closure on which it is mounted.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 573 for a weight, a rotor,
    or flywheel.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 769 and 816 for a weight type animal
    restraining means.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclass 349.1
    for a bottom weight for a hanging or draping fabric.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 412 for a mold to form weights.

    168,    Farriery, subclass 25 for a horse shoe weight.

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclass 264 for a weighing scale weight.

    211,    Supports: Racks, subclasses 51+ for a support including a weight or
    a spring-pressed mass to overlie and thereby retain a stack of sheets.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 114+, for a support for a watch or clock
    combined with a mirror, subclass 364 for a counter-balance for a support;
    subclasses 441.1+ for easel type picture or mirror supports and subclass
    549 for a mirror or picture support comprising a frangible or deformable
    component.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 389+ for a device or a member intended to guide a moving cable,
    the cable being attached to or supports an object being pulled by the cable
    from one position or location to another.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 187 for a weight for vehicle restraining
    means.


    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclass 344 for a weight adapted as closure
    fasteners.


    301,    Land Vehicles: Wheels and Axles, subclasses 5.21+ for a wheel
    balancing weight.

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    515+ for a signal reflectors and subclasses 838+ for a mirror or reflective
    element, particularly subclasses 871+ for a mirror with a support.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, for a headed fastener, generally including a
    nail, stud, or rivet.

    482,    Exercise Devices, particularly subclasses 93+ for a weight
    manipulated by a user for exercise.

    FOREIGN ART COLLECTIONS

    The definitions for FOR 100-103 below correspond to the definitions of the
    abolished subclasses under Class 16 from which these collections sere
    formed.  See the Foreign Art Collections schedule for specific
    correspondences.  [Note:  The titles and definitions for indented art
    collections include all the details of the one(s) that are hierarchically
    superior.]


CLS 16/FOR100
TXT Foreign art collection not classifiable in any of the other
    subclasses of this class.


CLS 16/FOR102
TXT Foreign are collection comprising bushings and socket devices to
    line openings or sockets to reinforce the same and/or to provide a smooth
    surface to prevent abrasion of elements passing therethrough or thereinto.


CLS 16/FOR103
TXT Foreign art collection for lining openings into wooden receptacles.


CLS 19/
TTL TEXTILES:  FIBER PREPARATION

CLS 19/
TXT Means for mechanically isolating and for manipulating fibers so as to place
    them in condition for the purpose for which they are to be utilized.
    Includes the bringing together of the fibers into laps, slivers, and the
    like, but not twisting or interlacing into permanent form.

    (1)     Note. Patents directed to the feeding of material to a named fiber
    treating machine, combined with fiber treatment, are classified in the
    appropriate subclasses in this class.

    For a power-driven conveyor, see Class 198, Conveyors:  Power-Driven.

    For a chute for guiding material, see Class 193, Conveyors, Chutes, Skids,
    Guides, and Ways, appropriate subclasses.

    For means to feed material to a machine, see Class 222, Dispensing,
    appropriate subclass.

    For a beater which enhances a cleaning or separating operation, i.e.,
    removal of dirt from fibers, see Class 209, Classifying Separating, and
    Assorting Solids, appropriate subclasses.

    For a beater which enhances a pneumatic conveying operation, see Class 406,
    Conveyors: Fluid Current, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses
    134+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, appropriate subclasses for
    methods and apparatus for fiber liberation involving some chemical
    treatment whether or not combined with mechanical treatment.  See the
    definition of Class 162 for the scope of processes and apparatus provided
    therein.


CLS 19/.2
TXT Method or apparatus under the class definition including the step of or
    means for causing cessation of operation of a machine of this class or a
    part thereof in response to some condition occurring in the material being
    fed, or through a defect in the machine or its operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.13+ for an
    electrical switch which is controlled by a thread or strand: subclass
    61.14, wherein the switch is controlled by a knot or change in the diameter
    of the thread or strand; and subclass 61.18, wherein the switch is
    controlled by the slack or run out or failure of the strand to travel along
    its intended path, in order to stop the machine.


CLS 19/.21
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass .2 wherein the cessation of operation is
    caused by light responsive means which energizes an electric circuit upon
    occurrence of an undesired condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 127 or 129+ for photo
    safety stop mechanisms.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.2+ for
    photo-responsive detection operating a switch means.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 385+ for the
    photoelectric mensuration of a moving object by means of changes in visible
    light caused by the object; subclasses 429+ for the photoelectric
    monitoring of webs or threads for light reflection or flaws, and subclass
    242 for visual thread counters.


CLS 19/.22
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass .2, including a step of or means for
    giving an audible or visible response to the cessation of operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 67+ for an alarm or indicator;
    subclasses 137+ for a horn; subclasses 147+ for a siren and subclasses 148+
    for a bell.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+ for an electric alarm.


CLS 19/.23
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass .2 wherein means are employed to detect
    variations in the weight or size of a sliver and to stop the mechanism upon
    substantial variation of the weight per unit volume of the moving sliver.


CLS 19/.24
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass .23 wherein a roll means detects the
    variation in density of the sliver passing thereunder and stops the machine
    in response to said variation.


CLS 19/.25
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass .2 wherein the condition detecting means
    comprises a feeler element resting upon the sliver which detects any
    parting of the sliver mass or failure of the sliver supply.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 61.18 for a
    strand slack, run out or failure actuated control switch.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 10+ for
    means to stop a machine in response to a defect in material being fed.


CLS 19/.26
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass .25 wherein the sliver soils or
    convolutes about a roll causing the package of roll and strand to thicken
    about its circumference thus causing the cessation of operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.17 and
    61.18 for running length web or strand breakage, misalignment or decrease
    in spool, reel or idler rotation which cause a circuit breaking.


CLS 19/.27
TXT Method or apparatus under the class definition including, in addition to a
    treating step or means, a step of, or means for applying heat, in order to
    remove excess moisture from the fibers, to render them adaptable for
    subsequent treatment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles: Manufacturing, subclasses  247+, especially subclasses
    249, 261 and 265+ for thread texturing combined with heating.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 148+ for
    drying of a sheet, web, or strand.


CLS 19/.3
TXT Processes and apparatus for severing filaments of indefinite length, before
    such filaments are incorporated into a fabric, to produce fibers
    approximating in length the staple fibers of natural origin.

    (1)     Note.  Although this and the indented subclasses do not include
    inventions relating to the severing of continuous filaments after they have
    been incorporated into a fabric, it does include those directed to the
    breaking of filaments united in a yarn or other twisted bundle.

    (2)     Note.  Mere cutting, i.e., mechanical shearing or abrading of a
    filament or bundle of filaments unaccompanied by any textile handling or
    treating operation is not within the scope of this or the indented
    subclasses, but comprises subject matter of Class 83, Cutting or Class 451,
    Abrading.  For further statement of the line between Classes 19 and 83 see
    the reference to Class 19 in "Relationship to other classes including, per
    se, cutting, severing, or incising" in section III of the class definition
    of Class 83.

    (3)     Note.  For classification in this or the indented subclasses, the
    severing operation must be claimed significantly.  That is, some detail of
    the severing apparatus or process must be set forth in a patent claim, so
    that the claim expresses a more specific embodiment of this subject matter
    than that imparted by the mere recitation of such terms as "stapilizing",
    "breaking" or "severing".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, appropriate subclasses for cutter elements, per se, and
    for hand cutting implements(e.g., razors).

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 252+ for
    staplized yarns and for yarns fabricated at least partly from stapled
    fibers.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 454+ and 470+ for processes of
    forming glass or slag fibers or filaments and especially subclasses 476+
    for glass or slag fiber attenuation; subclasses 484+ for fiber forming
    apparatus, especially subclasses 535+ for attenuation and severing.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 635+ for cutting or
    removing the end section from a fruit or vegetable.

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 46, 63, 64.1+, 65, 83.1, and 91 for processes
    and apparatus directed to cigar and cigarette end trimming or cutting in
    combination with other cigar or cigarette making operations, and subclasses
    117 and 118 for methods of and means for trimming or cutting associated
    with the formation of a compressed tobacco charge.

    164,    Metal Founding, appropriate subclasses for apparatus and processes
    for cutting continuous filamentary material by a mechanical shearing
    operation.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses for methods and means for material comminution including animal
    and vegetable.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    subclasses 6+ for means for making particulate material (e.g., fibers,
    etc.) directly from liquid or molten material, subclass 66 for filament
    forming and stretching means, subclasses 67+ for filament forming means
    including an immersed shaping orifice discharging directly into a liquid
    bath or shower means, subclasses 72+ a filament spinner combined into a
    downstream gaseous treating means, and subclasses 461+ for a filament
    spinning nozzle, per se.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 357+ for a
    structurally defined or coated fiber or filament and especially subclasses
    359+ for staple length fiber, or a mass thereof.

    451,    Abrading, for apparatus for abrading continuous filamentary
    material, noting particularly subclasses 182+, 183, and 319+; and
    subclasses 28+ for a method of abrading continuous filamentary material.


CLS 19/.35
TXT Processes and apparatus under subclass .3 according to which the severing
    is produced by the application of oppositely directed forces to the
    continuous filaments substantially longitudinally thereof.

    (1)     Note.  This type of staplizing is often referred to by those
    working in the art as "stretch breaking", although no substantial
    stretching of the filamentary material need be accomplished by the
    employment of the inventions herein classified. (see patent number 2,096,
    795 to Dreyfus in subclass .37 indented hereunder).

    (2)     Note.  The typical tension breaking apparatus comprises plural sets
    of drafting rolls, the peripheral speed of the delivery rolls being
    considerably greater than that of the feed rolls, causing the drafted
    filaments to be stressed beyond the breaking point, the length of the
    stapled fibers produced being determined (at least in part) by the spacing
    or ratch of the roll pairs. Classification in this and the indented
    subclasses, however, does not require that the breaking forces be so
    supplied.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236+,   for textile drafting apparatus and processes of general application.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, subclasses 1+ for processes and
    subclasses 93+ for apparatus for breaking or tearing sheet, web, or rodlike
    material.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling force,
    appropriate subclasses for pulling implements of general application.


CLS 19/.37
TXT Processes and apparatus under subclass .35 characterized by a weakening of
    the continuous filaments before, or while, being subjected to the breaking
    forces.

    (1)     Note.  An example of weakening which takes place while the weakened
    filament is being subjected to the breaking forces is that produced by
    means located within the ratch of breaking roll pairs.  (See patent number
    2,077,320 to Hale, here classified).

    (2)     Note.  Such weakening is resorted to mainly for the purpose of
    minimizing the requisite magnitude of the breaking forces and the
    consequent loss of fiber extensibility, and for the purpose of
    predetermining the points along their length at which certain filaments
    will be broken.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, subclass 2 for processes and
    subclass 96 for apparatus for weakening a workpiece on an intended line of
    severance, and then breaking or tearing along such weakened line.


CLS 19/.39
TXT Processes and apparatus under subclass .35 in which the filamentary
    material is subjected to tension breaking operation and the product thereof
    is subjected to a second such operation.


CLS 19/.41
TXT Processes and apparatus and under subclass .35 in which the continuous
    filaments are deflected from a straight line or planar path in the zone of
    application of the opposed breaking forces.

    (1)     Note.  The deflection is usually provided to ensure an effective
    grasp of the filaments by the breaking means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    .37,    for filament deflecting means which function to weaken the
    filaments.


CLS 19/.43
TXT Processes and apparatus under subclass .35 in which either (1) a variegated
    starting material is submitted to the stapilizing operation or (2) the
    operation is so carried out that the stapilizing effect varies either
    laterally (i.e., from filament to filament of the substantially parallel
    filaments making up the stapilized bundle) or longitudinally (i.e., along
    the length of the stapilized fibrous product in the direction of the
    opposed breaking forces).

    (1)     Note.  The mere random staggering of fiber ends inherently produced
    by the severing operation, and which is necessary to the production or
    preservation of a continuous top or yarn, is not sufficient variation or
    differential effect to meet the above definition of this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Variations in starting material may be based on any of the
    characteristics of textile strands, such as color, texture, chemical
    composition, denier or count, breaking strength, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144+    and 145+, for fiber blending methods and means, per se.


CLS 19/.46
TXT Processes and apparatus under subclass .3 which include some treatment,
    ancillary to the staplizing, of the continuous filaments before they enter
    the staplizing zone.

    (1)     Note.  The term "treatment" as used herein does not embrace the
    formation of the filaments of their treatment or working in the
    uncoagulated state, for which see Class 18, subclasses 8 and 54.

    (2)     Note.  For a more detailed statement of the line with the textile
    treating classes see (3) Note to subclass .3 and see the reference to each
    of Classes 8 and 68 under "SEARCH CLASS" in the definition of subclass .56.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    .37,    for prior treatment apparatus and processes effective to weaken
    filaments about to be subjected to stretch breaking.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, appropriate subclasses, for particular processes for
    chemically treating textiles.

    68,     Textiles: Fluid Treating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    textile fluid treating apparatus.


CLS 19/.48
TXT Processes and apparatus under subclass .46 in which the prior treatment
    comprises aligning the continuous filaments, separating or spacing them
    from one another, or both.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles: Manufacturing, subclasses 198+ for means for separating
    adjacent strands of a warp sheet, one up and one down.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclass 98 for devices for separating adjacent
    warp strands while they are being fed in a loom.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding  material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.


CLS 19/.51
TXT Processes and apparatus under subclass .3 in which the severing operation
    is combined with a subsequent overlapping of the stapled fibers to form a
    sliver, top or other longitudinally cohesive, substantially continuous
    product.

    (1)     Note.  Mere rearranging, as by drafting, of the fibers of an
    already cohesive, substantially continuous stapled fiber product is not
    such overlapping as will of itself result in placement of an invention in
    this subclass.  There must be a placing of severed fiber ends into
    overlapping relationship to form a cohesive product from individual fibers,
    bundles or web sections. (The mere fact, however, that a patent claims or
    discloses a drafting operation in addition to such overlapping will not
    keep the patent from this subclass).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236+,   for fibrous product drafting apparatus and processes of general
    application.


CLS 19/.56
TXT Processes and apparatus under subclass .3 constituting combinations of
    staplizing means and methods with those directed to other operations.

    (1)     Note.  All preceding subclasses must be investigated for particular
    combinations as shown by the preceding subclass titles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66,     72 and 80+, for processes and means for fiber bundle opening, per
    se.

    144,    145 and 146, for fiber mixing apparatus and methods, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing: Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles Fibers, appropriate subclasses for the combination, with a
    staplizing method not claimed significantly, of a significantly claimed
    method of bleaching, dyeing, or chemically treating either the starting
    material or the product of such staplizing method. See (3) Note to the
    definition of subclass .3 above.

    28,     Textiles: Manufacturing, subclasses 217+ for thread finishing
    apparatus and processes.  Where a thread-like member is finished, e.g.,
    texturized, preparatory to its being stapilized and the staplizing is the
    last operation performed on the thread-like member, then the patent is
    placed in this class (19).  Where the staplizing is just one of many
    operations used in a thread finishing or fabric production operation, then
    the patent is placed in Class 28 unless it is provided for elsewhere.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for the
    combination of significantly claimed textile fluid treating apparatus with
    staplizing apparatus which is not claimed significantly.  See (3) Note to
    the definition of subclass .3 above.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    62.4 for combined staplizing and adhering of stapled fibers to form webs by
    the application of binding material.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution of Disintegration, subclass 4 for
    processes, and subclasses 31+ for apparatus for opening spicules or bundles
    of parallelly arranged fibers (such as asbestos) by a comminuting
    operation, e.g., by flexing the bundle under pressure.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes, for
    processes for the molding and shaping of plastic materials, particularly
    subclasses 6 and 109+ pertaining to the formation, deposition and uniting
    of particulate material.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus
    appropriate subclasses. For the combination of staplizing means and
    apparatus for working plastic filaments; also see (3) Note.  and the search
    note to Class 425 in subclass .3 above.


CLS 19/.58
TXT Processes and apparatus under subclass .3 in which the filamentary starting
    material moves in an axial direction and is both laterally and
    longitudinally cohesive and, as a whole, remains so during the staplizing
    operation.

    (1)     Note.  Where a group of strands constitutes a discrete sheet or web
    in and of itself, the mere feeding thereof is proper subject matter for
    Class 226, Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, the feeding of a
    multiplicity of such groups being considered a plural web feeding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    .46+,   for inventions relating to the staplizing of continuously flowing
    filamentary material, characterized by the treatment of the material prior
    to or preparatory to severing.

    .56,    for processes and apparatus for staplizing continuously running
    material, the performance or use of which results in some additional
    treatment of the material subsequent to or during the staplizing.

    35+,    for staplizing apparatus and methods effective to break
    continuously running filamentary material by application of opposed
    longitudinal forces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclasses 172+ for methods and apparatus
    for manipulating sheets of parallel strands, the sheet generally having a
    thickness of one strand.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate  Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.


CLS 19/.6
TXT Processes and apparatus under subclass .58 in which the severing is
    accomplished by mechanical shearing or fraying means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses for apparatus and processes for
    cutting substantially continuous filaments, either individually or in
    sheets or bundles, into staple fiber lengths involving no additional
    operation other than feeding the filamentary material or handling the
    stapled fibers for mere collection and/or transportation.


CLS 19/.62
TXT Processes and apparatus under subclass .6 in which a bundle or web of
    filaments travelling in a plane parallel to the axis of a rotating cutter
    comes into contact with the cutter at a translational speed differing from
    the peripheral speed of such cutter.

    (1)     Note.  The cutter may be provided with a helical cutting blade or
    blades or some other form of blade which is inclined to the cutter axis.


CLS 19/.64
TXT Inventions under subclass .6 in which the staplizing is accomplished by
    drawing the continuous filamentary material past a sharp edged cutting
    member so that the material maintains rubbing contact with such member.

    (1)     Note.  The cutting member may comprise an abrasive or other
    roughened surface.

    (2)     Note.  The filamentary material is often given a component of
    motion effective to vary more or less continuously, the transverse portion
    of the surface which is presented to the cutter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles: Manufacturing, subclasses 219+ and 259+, means for
    finishing strand material by rubbing the surface thereof.

    451,    Abrading, particularly subclasses 182+, 183, and 319+ for apparatus
    operative merely to abrade running filamentary material without effecting
    any typically textile result than the filament or fiber abrading itself and
    without utilizing means peculiar to the textile arts; and subclasses 28+
    for a corresponding process of abrading.


CLS 19/1
TXT The freeing of the fibers by mechanical means from the parts with which
    they have been produced in nature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses for 311 and 312 for tobacco leaf disintegrating.


CLS 19/2
TXT The fibers being of animal origin.


CLS 19/3
TXT Removing silk from cocoons or similar operations.

    (1)     Note.  For degumming and desizing silk fibers, see Class 8,
    Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of Textiles
    and Fibers, subclass 138.  If using enzymatic action, see Class 435,
    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology.


CLS 19/4
TXT The separating of the feathers into fiber-like elements.  Usually
    preliminary to making "featherbone".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, particularly subclass 4
    for devices for covering or wrapping quillstock.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 47 for devices for preparing feathers
    for plumes, dusters, etc., for curling feathers, and otherwise preparing
    feather ornaments not otherwise provided for.


CLS 19/5
TXT The liberation of stalk and leaf fibers of plants.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115+,   for apparatus usually known as "hackles" when not designed to
    operate on pulpy plants and when not combined with other means especially
    adapted for decortication.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclass 20 for processes of
    decortication of mechanical preparation of textile fibers combined with a
    chemical fiber liberation, subclasses 21+ to 28 for other combinations of
    mechanical defibration and chemical fiber liberation processes, and
    subclasses 234+ for digesters combined with mechanical defibering means.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, for fiber liberation
    involving comminution and see section 5 of the main class definition of
    that class (241) for the line.


CLS 19/6
TXT Including means for stripping the seeds or leaves from the plant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, subclass 24 for the removal of the
    seeds, per se.


CLS 19/7
TXT There being some liquid employed in the operation.


CLS 19/8
TXT Removing material of a soft moist nature. Usually for treatment of
    endogens, such as Manila hemp, agaves, New Zealand flax, etc.


CLS 19/9
TXT Air being projected into the material to facilitate the operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58+,    where a blast or suction is used to clear a saw cylinder.

    72+,    for the conveying of the material by pneumatic means.


CLS 19/10
TXT There being means peculiarly adapted to act on each stalk to split it open.
     Usually for removing the bast of exogens.


CLS 19/11
TXT The material is grasped by a means which moves with it through the
    decorticator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for similar feeds.


CLS 19/12
TXT The material being carried substantially at right angles to the
    longitudinal axis of the fibers.


CLS 19/13
TXT The material being suspended in a vertical plane passing through the zone
    of action of the decorticating element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    for similar feeds.


CLS 19/14
TXT For removing material of a soft moist nature.


CLS 19/15
TXT For removing material of a soft moist nature.


CLS 19/16
TXT There being only one rotating decorticator employed.  Sometimes the
    material is returned for more than one treatment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26      and 27, for other single rotor decorticators.


CLS 19/17
TXT For removing material of a soft moist nature.


CLS 19/18
TXT At least one of the decorticators being rotary.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24+,    for other rotary decorticators.


CLS 19/19
TXT Decorticators of the endless-belt type.


CLS 19/20
TXT For removing material of a soft moist nature.


CLS 19/21
TXT There being a plurality of different decorticators, one of which breaks the
    material to be removed by a vibratory motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22      and 23, for reciprocating brakes, per se.


CLS 19/22
TXT Limited to means for breaking the material to be removed by a vibratory
    motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for other reciprocating brakes.


CLS 19/23
TXT There being means for moving the material through the region of operation
    in one direction.


CLS 19/24
TXT The decorticator being a rotating body.


CLS 19/25
TXT The decorticator being given a to-and-fro movement in an axial direction.


CLS 19/26
TXT The decorticating elements being mounted in only one rotary member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for other single rotary decorticators.


CLS 19/27
TXT For removing material of a soft moist nature.


CLS 19/28
TXT For removing material of a soft moist nature.


CLS 19/29
TXT Having at least one rotor for crimping and breaking the material to be
    removed and another one with comb teeth to enter between the fibers and
    pull off the pieces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     31, and 32, for other brakes, and 128, for other combs.


CLS 19/30
TXT Having at least one rotor for crimping and breaking the material to be
    removed and another rapidly-moving one for knocking off the broken material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     31, and 32, for other brakes, and 33, for other beaters.


CLS 19/31
TXT The rotors are adapted to crimp the material to be removed, and thereby
    break it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29      and 30, for other brakes.


CLS 19/32
TXT The direction of the rotation being first one way and then the other.


CLS 19/33
TXT There being a plurality of rapidly-moving rotors for knocking the material
    off the fibers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for other beaters.


CLS 19/34
TXT For removing material of a soft moist nature.  Mostly endogens.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      14-18, 20, 27, and 28, for other depulping machines.


CLS 19/35
TXT The elimination of the pod in which seed fiber, like cotton, is grown.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for similar devices forming a part of a saw gin, and 85+ for
    machines which are not especially modified for this purpose, but which are
    capable of beating the bolly cotton until the pod is eliminated.


CLS 19/36
TXT Having means for breaking open the pod and a rotating member to continually
    throw back the material until the fibers are separated from the open boll.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for other knocker-rolls, and 38 for other breakers.


CLS 19/37
TXT Having a rotating member to continually throw back the material until the
    fibers are separated from the pod.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for other knocker-rolls, and 53, for knocker-rolls which are
    adapted to remove the seed from the fiber.


CLS 19/38
TXT Having a means peculiarly adapted for breaking open the pods.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for other breakers.


CLS 19/39
TXT Detaching seed from cotton and like fibers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304+,   for gin condensers.


CLS 19/40
TXT The fibers being very short.  Usually the longer fibers have been ginned
    off.


CLS 19/41
TXT The structure of the delinting mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 600+, for apparatus for
    delinting cottonseed.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 288 and 481+ for processes including delinting cottonseed.


CLS 19/42
TXT The seed with the attached lint is placed in a chamber into which the
    lint-engaging member enters and from which it withdraws, pulling the lint
    out of the chamber and detaching it from the seed, which cannot follow, the
    lint being then doffed in the outside chamber.


CLS 19/43
TXT There being a cylindrical surface of such a nature that the lint will cling
    to it, the surface rotating so close to a bar that the seed cannot follow
    the lint and will be detached.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50+,    for analogous structure.


CLS 19/44
TXT A chamber inclosing a rotating delinting member is adapted to receive the
    seed and attached lint, the delinting occurring while both seed and lint
    are within the chamber.


CLS 19/45
TXT The axis of the rotor being vertical.


CLS 19/46
TXT The rotor being of an open nature, which permits much of the lint-seed mass
    to be worked otherwise than against the chamber wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for other skeleton rotors.


CLS 19/47
TXT The rotor being of an open nature, which permits much of the lint-seed mass
    to be worked otherwise than against the chamber wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for other skeleton rotors.


CLS 19/48
TXT The structure of the gin proper.


CLS 19/49
TXT The fiber is caught and drawn along between two surfaces in rolling
    contact, the angle of contact being such that the seed will not enter, but
    will be held back and detached.


CLS 19/50
TXT There being a cylindrical surface of such a nature that the fiber will
    cling to it, the surface rotating so close to a bar that the seed cannot
    follow the fiber and will be detached.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for analogous structure.


CLS 19/51
TXT With means moving to and fro along the bar to engage the seed and aid in
    detaching it.


CLS 19/52
TXT With means moving to and fro transversely of the bar to engage the seed and
    aid in detaching it.


CLS 19/53
TXT With means rotating near the bar to engage the seed and aid in detaching it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36      and 37, for knocker rolls adapted to remove hulls from seed cotton.


CLS 19/54
TXT The structure of the cylindrical surfaces to which the fibers cling and are
    drawn along.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the notes thereunder.


CLS 19/55
TXT A bank of circular saws slightly spaced apart is caused to rotate with each
    saw projecting through a slit in a plate or rib bank and engaging the seed
    fiber.  The fibers cling to the saw teeth as the teeth pass back through
    the slits between the ribs and are detached, the slits being so narrow that
    the seeds cannot follow.


CLS 19/56
TXT Provided with means for eliminating the pod in which the seed fiber is
    grown prior to the ginning action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35+,    for boll hullers, per se.


CLS 19/57
TXT There being a plurality of saw banks.


CLS 19/58
TXT Limited to the means for detaching the gin fiber from the saws and
    discharging it from the gin.  Frequently includes means for eliminating
    pieces of pod and the like that are still clinging to the fibers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    303,    for combined fiber detaching from gin saws, cleaning and condensing
    thereof in web form.

    305+,   for combined fiber detaching from gin saws and condensing thereof
    in web form.


CLS 19/59
TXT The fiber being detached from the saws by means of an air current.


CLS 19/60
TXT Limited to brush structure adapted for detaching the fibers from the saws
    and producing a blast for conveying the fibers through and out of the gin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, appropriate subclasses,
    for brush structure not peculiarly adapted for this purpose.


CLS 19/61
TXT Limited to that portion of the ginning chamber which holds the fiber mass
    against the saws and controls the escape of the seeds.


CLS 19/62
TXT The structure of the means which prevents the seeds or bolls following the
    fiber caught by the saws.


CLS 19/63
TXT The structure of the cylindrical saw bank or the saw elements.


CLS 19/64
TXT Means for removing undesirable matter from the saws.


CLS 19/64.5
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 39 wherein means are employed to present
    the cotton to a ginning apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  Patents including distribution of cottonseed to several gins
    will be placed in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97.5,   for feeding to a picking device.

    105,    for feeding to a carding device.

    204+,   for feeding to a cleaning device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    Refer to (1) Note under the class definition for further search fields.


CLS 19/65
TXT Method and apparatus for disentangling, cleaning, straightening, or
    performing other operations on fibers to place them in condition for use.

    (1)     Note.  Means for producing laps and slivers, though intended to be
    used with machines found in this group, are placed in the subclasses
    indented under subclass 144 of this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses, for fiber working, including comminution, and see section 5 of
    the class definition of that class (241) for the line.


CLS 19/66
TXT The fibers are treated with fluids or are curled, crimped, or operated upon
    for some other purpose than to make them straight or parallel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    .56,    for the combination of staplizing and the opening of bundles of
    substantially parallel, staple length fibers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, for bleaching, dyeing and chemical treating of textile
    fibers. See particularly subclass 112 for improving felting properties of
    fibers and furs (carroting).

    28,     Textiles: Manufacturing, subclasses 247+ for methods and apparatus
    for imparting a nonlinear configuration to yarn or strand material composed
    of fibers or filaments.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, for spinning, twisting
    or twining operations combined with coating or impregnating.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, for Liquid treatment in
    general of textiles and fibers.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses, for apparatus for
    coating fibers, and see section III of the class definition of Class 118,
    for the Line between Class 19 and Class 118,

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 1+ for chemical
    Liberation of fibers, particularly subclass 9 for combinations therewith
    physical modification of the fiber, e.g., curling, puffing, etc.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses,
    for structures used to discharge a fluid on wool and the like fiber, when
    such structures are limited to the fluid discharger per se.

    427,    Coating Processes, for a process of coating in general, and note
    especially subclasses 212+ for processes of coating particles, flakes, or
    granules.


CLS 19/66.1
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 66 wherein the fluid or special
    treatment involves the production of coils, crinkles, kinks or like
    distentions on fibers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:.

    .46,    for staplizing combined with some treatment, inclusive of crimping
    or curling, ancillary to the staplizing, of the continuous filaments before
    they enter the staplizing zone.

    .56,    for combinations of staplizing and other operations, inclusive of
    crimping or curling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles: Manufacturing, subclasses  247+ for surface modification
    by crimping or curling of running thread lengths, and see the search notes
    thereunder.


CLS 19/66.2
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 66.1 wherein the crimping or curling is
    effected by passing fibers between interdigitated or interlocked moving
    members which forward and mechanically shape the fibers passing
    therebetween.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles: Manufacturing, subclasses  279+ for crimping or curling a
    running length of thread by opposed intermeshing traveling members, and see
    the search notes referred to therein.


CLS 19/80
TXT Separating and cleaning fibers by means of blades or teeth which strike or
    pull the material and not falling under the groups of Carding or Combing.


CLS 19/81
TXT The picking instrument is other than a rotating member.


CLS 19/82
TXT The fibers to be separated having been twisted or interlaced into a strand
    or fabric.


CLS 19/83
TXT The feeding means holds onto the material while the picking means separates
    the fibers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     86+, and 96, for other gripping-feed pickers.


CLS 19/84
TXT Means adapted to remove plant burs from wool, having a gripping feed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83,     86+, and 96, for other gripping-feed pickers.


CLS 19/85
TXT The material is struck by a rapidly-rotating member, therebeing an opposing
    member against which the material is thrown and in combination with which
    the rotating member is adapted to obtain a separation of foreign matter
    from the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for the automatic feed control.


CLS 19/86
TXT Feeding means holds onto the material while the beater knocks off the
    fibers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83,     84, and 96, for gripping-feed pickers.


CLS 19/87
TXT There being a plurality of rotating beaters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93,     for other multiple-rotor beaters.


CLS 19/88
TXT With means to collect the picked fibers together into a web or lap.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89,     for related structure.


CLS 19/89
TXT With means to collect the picked fibers together into a web or lap.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS SUBCLASS:

    88,     for related structure.

    308,    for condensing screens, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for processes for making laminated boards.


CLS 19/90
TXT The material being carried along axially of the beating rotor as it is
    acted upon.


CLS 19/91
TXT There being a plurality of rotating beaters.


CLS 19/92
TXT Means for feeding batches to the beater, the feed being stopped between
    batches.


CLS 19/93
TXT There being a plurality of rotating beaters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87+,    88, and 91, for other multiple-rotor beaters.


CLS 19/94
TXT Limited to the structure of the rotary beating member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97,     for nonbeater rotors.


CLS 19/95
TXT Gratings against which the beaters work the fiber and through which the
    dirt passes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for related structure.


CLS 19/96
TXT Feeding means holds onto the material while the picking means separates the
    fiber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83,     84, and 86+, for other gripping-feed pickers.


CLS 19/97
TXT Limited to the structure of the rotary picking member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94,     for beater rotors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the notes thereunder.


CLS 19/97.5
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 80 wherein means are employed to present
    the fibers to a picking device.

    (1)     Note.  The patents in this subclass are restricted to delivery of
    the fibers to the picking means.  The feeding of the fibers, combined with
    the holding of said fibers by the feeding means while the fibers are
    picked, would be classified in subclass 96 of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64.5,   for feeding to a ginning device.

    105,    for feeding to a carding device.

    204+,   for feeding to a cleaning device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    Refer to (1) Note under the class definition for further fields of search.


CLS 19/98
TXT Passing cotton or wool type fibers between relatively moving surfaces which
    are almost in contact, the surfaces being composed of closely lying points
    or teeth, usually, wire ends.  The engagement of the fibers is
    substantially between the surfaces rather than between the sides of the
    teeth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    Indented under subclass 144 for inventions relating to the combining of
    different materials or the forming of webs, slivers, and the like, even
    when carried out on a card.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclass 327 for
    combined carding and spinning operations.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 632 for a "card" used to groom an animal.

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 109.1+, 321 for tobacco working machines
    employing carding.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 416+ for an attachment for a carding machine
    for grinding a card thereof, in situ.


CLS 19/99
TXT This group includes inventions peculiarly adapted to (1) other than the
    conventional card which has a large main cylinder, a feeding means at one
    side, a doffing means at the opposite side, and working means over the top
    of the cylinder between the feeding and the doffing means, and (2) cards
    having a specific type of working means.


CLS 19/100
TXT Fibers carried on the main cylinders are caught and detached in part by a
    small worker cylinder.  These fibers are then stripped from the worker
    cylinder by another cylinder and returned to the main cylinder.


CLS 19/101
TXT The fibers passing over a plurality of worker cylinders before returning to
    the main cylinder.


CLS 19/102
TXT The working surface which cooperates with the cylinder is composed of bars
    arranged to travel in an endless circuit for presenting their working
    surfaces to cleaners or strippers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for inventions relating to flat structure, per se.


CLS 19/103
TXT Limited to the curved track on which the flats ride as they pass over the
    cylinder.


CLS 19/104
TXT The working surface is composed of bars which remain stationary when in
    operative position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for inventions relating to flat structure, per se.


CLS 19/105
TXT Means for picking off the fibers from the lap or supply and presenting them
    to the carding surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157+,   160, 161, and 163, for means for assembling slivers and webs which
    may be fed to a card, but not peculiar thereto.


CLS 19/106
TXT Means for removing the carded fleece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151+,   for devices for converting the fleece into a sliver.


CLS 19/107
TXT Means for handling fibers that had escaped during the carding or were
    separated as not in proper shape for further advanced treatment.


CLS 19/108
TXT Means for removing the card clothing the waste fibers and dirt that have
    become embedded therein.


CLS 19/109
TXT An air current being employed for the purpose.


CLS 19/110
TXT Means for cleaning the flats.


CLS 19/111
TXT The flats being caused to travel in an endless circuit.


CLS 19/112
TXT The structure of the cylindrical members of the card.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the notes thereunder.


CLS 19/113
TXT The structure of the flat.  Does not including peculiar to the movement or
    mounting of the flat.


CLS 19/114
TXT The structure of the covering employed on the working surfaces of the card.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, for an apparatus for sharpening or a process of
    sharpening card clothing by grinding, particularly subclasses 416 and 417
    for an attachment to a textile machine to abrade a card.


CLS 19/115
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 65 wherein means are employed to cause
    the fibers to assume a parallel direction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 219+ for combs designed to be used by inserting
    the teeth into the hair on a person.


CLS 19/122
TXT The combing members are of annular disk shape with the teeth in a plane on
    the side.


CLS 19/123
TXT One circle comb working within another. Generally known as the Noble wool
    comb.


CLS 19/124
TXT Means for causing the fiber to engage with the comb.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, appropriate subclasses
    for structure of brush, per se, when not peculiarly adapted for this
    purpose.


CLS 19/125
TXT The fibers are grasped by and suspended in a vertical plane from a means
    which moves bodily along carrying the fibers through the comb.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13      and 14, for similar feeds.


CLS 19/126
TXT The combing means includes both a traveling endless belt and a rotating
    cylinder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for apron combs.

    128,    for cylinder combs.


CLS 19/127
TXT The comb teeth being mounted on a traveling endless belt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126,    for other apron combs.


CLS 19/128
TXT The comb teeth being mounted on a rotating cylinder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     for combs of this type combined with decorticators.

    126,    for other cylinder combs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the notes thereunder.


CLS 19/129
TXT The comb teeth are mounted on bars which are caused to travel in a circuit
    by means of screw feeds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    .6+,    for gills operative to cut filaments of indefinite length and draft
    the resulting fibers.


CLS 19/144
TXT The bringing together of the fibers either with relation to each other or
    with some other material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    .51,    for the combination of staplizing and overlapping of the stapled
    fibers.

    .56,    for the combination of staplizing and mixing or blending the
    resulting fibers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    62+ for laminating processes including the step of forming a lamina by bulk
    deposition of discrete particles.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    subclasses 109+ for processes for forming articles by uniting randomly
    associated particles.  Where the claims recite only air laying of fibers
    the line with Class 264 is as follows:

    (1)     Sole disclosure is that the fibers are tacky or adhesive coated
    before air laying (Class 264).

    (2)     Disclosure that air layed batt is subsequently rendered adhesive or
    tacky after air laying (Class 19).

    (3)     Disclosure that the fibers may or may not be coated with adhesive
    before air laying (Class 19).


    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, subclasses 1+ for processes for
    forming articles by powder metallurgy with heating or sintering wherein the
    powder particles may be fibrous or filamental in form; and subclasses 61+
    for processes for forming articles by uniting randomly associated metal
    particles which may be fibrous or filamental in form.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    subclasses 80.1+ for apparatus including air- felting means for forming
    self-sustaining bodies of particulate material.


CLS 19/145
TXT Either the fibers assembled are of different nature or they are assembled
    with some other material.

    (1)     Note.  The claimed addition of a binder to a fibrous mass is
    sufficient to cause placement of a patent elsewhere. This class takes
    mechanical entanglement of fibers unless otherwise provided for (for
    example, see felting in Class 28).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 175.9 for a felt hat and a method of making a
    felt hat.

    366,    Agitating, appropriate subclasses for mixing cement with fibers.


CLS 19/145.3
TXT Method of apparatus under subclass 145 wherein the fibers are assembled to
    the end portion(s) of a relatively thin, elongated, rigid member.

    (1)     Note.  The article being assembled is usually denoted as a cotton
    swab.


CLS 19/145.5
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 145 wherein the fibers are assembled by
    a mixing together of the fibers of different nature, as distinguished from
    the assembly of preformed fiber assemblages (e.g., bats or webs).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing;  Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, appropriate subclasses, for methods of dyeing mixed
    fibers.


CLS 19/145.7
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 145.5 wherein the mixing of the fibers
    is accomplished by passing the fibers of different nature between
    relatively moving surfaces which are almost in contact, the surfaces being
    composed of closely lying points or teeth.

    (1)     Note.  For carding devices search this class, subclasses 98+.


CLS 19/148
TXT The fibers are deposited by means of an air current on a screen of the
    shape of the object desired.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    308,    for other screen condensers.


CLS 19/149
TXT A strip of fiber is wound on a form of the shape of the article desired.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 76+ for presses which additionally treat the
    material by winding or folding a sheet, web or strand, not elsewhere
    provided for.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, for other winding apparatus; e.g.,
    subclasses 430+ for method and apparatus for winding flexible material upon
    a core to make an article which is a composite thereof.


CLS 19/150
TXT The forming of a round strand of fibers by merely pressing or rubbing them
    together without continuous twisting.


CLS 19/151
TXT Means for dividing a very thin web of fibers into strips usually as it is
    being delivered from a card preparatory to condensing the strips into
    slivers.


CLS 19/152
TXT The sliver is carried between rolls which are given axial reciprocation so
    as to rub the fibers together.


CLS 19/153
TXT The sliver is passed between aprons which are given a motion transversely
    to the travel of the sliver for rubbing the fibers together.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for stock material in form of a single plural layer web or sheet.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 237+ for a friction drive belt in an endless belt power
    transmission.


CLS 19/157
TXT Producing packages or structures from round untwisted fiber strand.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclass 53 for winding a sliver
    onto a spindle or the like.


CLS 19/159
TXT Laying the sliver in a coil in a receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 82+ for presses which treat the material by
    winding or folding and which employ an eccentric opening through which the
    material is circularly deposited, and not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 19/160
TXT Moving the sliver to and from substantially transversely to the movement of
    a base upon which the sliver is being deposited.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 80+ for pressing apparatus which, additionally,
    treats the material by folding it in zigzag formation, and not elsewhere
    provided for.


CLS 19/161.1
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 144 for producing packages or structures
    from a flat fiber strip.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles: Manufacturing, subclasses  103+ for method or apparatus
    for entangling and interlocking the component members of a nonwoven textile
    structure, e.g., a formed web.


CLS 19/163
TXT Moving the webs to and fro substantially transversely to the movement of a
    base upon which the web is being deposited.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 80+ for presses which, additionally, treat the
    material by folding it in zigzag formation, not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 19/200
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 66 wherein fibers are treated for the
    purpose of removing undesirable material therefrom, without otherwise
    working the fibers or assembling them into a blend or structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 137+ for cleaning or laundering.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 256.6 for
    strand cleaning, and see (1) Note to subclass 262 of this class.

    131,    Tobacco, for tobacco disintegrating and cleaning.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses for crushing foreign material from fibers.


CLS 19/201
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 200 wherein the cleaning is accomplished
    by the addition of a highly active, liquid or powder, agent brought into
    contact with the fibers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclass 130 for saponification of cellulose ester or
    ether fibers.


CLS 19/202
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 200 wherein the cleaning action occurs
    through deposit of the fibers upon a foraminous member or by the passage of
    the fibers to a rotating saw element wherein the fibers attach to the saw
    teeth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304+,   for the making of a foraminous deposit to form a permanent bat or
    web on the screen; and subclass 57 for gin saws in a cotton gin environment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses for separation of undesired material from fibers, in which no
    textile operation is claimed.


CLS 19/203
TXT Method and apparatus under subclass 202 wherein means are employed to
    remove the fibers from the foraminous or saw element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58+,    for doffing of a gin saw.

    106+,   for doffing in a carding machine.

    262+,   for clearing of a drafting device.


CLS 19/204
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 200 wherein means are employed to convey
    the fibers to the cleaning mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  The feeding of a textile fiber with a textile treatment will
    cause placement of the patents in Class 19.  See (1) Note under class
    definition for further information.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64.5,   for feeding to a gin.

    97.5,   for feeding to a picking device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, for feeding of material
    of indeterminate length.


CLS 19/205
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 204 wherein the conveying means is a
    fluid propelling current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 132+ for
    feeding by fluid suspension, and subclass 250 for fluid current feeding.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, appropriate subclasses for a pneumatic
    conveyor.


CLS 19/215
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 115 comprising a step of, or means for,
    drawing the fibers through the teeth in approximately fiber length bunches.
    Figures 1 through 4, below, are illustrative of a tuft combing operation.











    (1)     Note.  The following description of a tuft combing device, is
    typical, though not restrictive or essential (of subclass 215):  In general
    the apparatus is one in which a fiber lap (C) is delivered to nipper (B, D)
    comprising a pair of gripping jaws, which jaws are operated in sequence to
    allow the forward end of the lap (C) to pass therethrough and then to close
    upon it and grasp it firmly, permitting a portion of the lap (C) (which
    ultimately makes up the tuft) to lie in the path of the comb teeth (1) on a
    comb cylinder (H) whereby the forward end of such projecting portion is
    combed. In carrying out the attenuation of this forward end, the comb
    cylinder (H) presents the forward end to a pair of detaching cylinders (F,
    G) (which may also be mounted for oscillation - one or both - toward and
    away from the comb cylinder).  These cylinders (F, G) seize the front end
    portion and by their forward rotation form a tuft, by separating the
    projecting portion of the lap (C), and pull it through the teeth of a top
    comb (E) which may be lowered for this purpose.  By such top combing
    action, the tail end of the tuft is combed. The combed front end of the
    tuft and the tail end of a preceding tuft are overlapped and pieced
    together to form a continuous fleece (J).


CLS 19/216
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 215 wherein each fiber length bunch is
    carried through a combing area in such a manner that the length of such
    bunch (i.e., tuft) is substantially perpendicular to its direction of
    travel (in the combing zone) and the tuft is presented broadside to the
    comb teeth.

    (1)     Note.  The tuft translating element usually has means for clamping
    the tuft.  A typical patent disclosure in this subclass (216) relates to
    fibers clamped in a moving frame which has a nonrotary direction of
    movement.


CLS 19/217
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 216 wherein the fiber bunches are
    carried by a gripping cylinder from which they project toward the comb
    teeth, said cylinder traveling in a fixed orbital path throughout the
    entire combing operation.


CLS 19/218
TXT Method of apparatus under subclass 215 including a step of, or means for,
    removing short fibers and foreign matter from any portion of the tuft
    combing apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262,    for clearing means in combination with drafting means.

    263,    for pneumatic clearers.

    264,    bottom roll(s) clearers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 256.5+ for
    cleaning means which through contact scrapes, wipes, or brushes a machine
    element, subclasses 256.6+ for cleaning means acting upon a strand and
    subclasses 300.1+ for air blast or suction cleaning.


CLS 19/219
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 215 in which means, other than a nipper,
    are provided to press the tuft into intimate contact with a comb cylinder.
    See (1) Note of subclass 215 for the definition of a nipper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235,    wherein a nipper means serves to press the tuft into contact with
    the comb cylinder.


CLS 19/220
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 215 wherein the combing means employed,
    to comb the trailing portion of a fiber length bunch, are mounted and
    secured on a plate or bar which may be movable into the space between a
    nipper and a comb cylinder upon release of said tuft portion from the
    nipper jaw.

    (1)     Note.  The nonrotary comb is usually designated by the art term
    "top comb". (See (1) Note, subclass 215 for the definition of a nipper).


CLS 19/221
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 220 wherein the combing means employed
    remains in a fixed position during the passage of the trailing tuft portion
    through its teeth.


CLS 19/223
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 221 wherein movement of the combing
    means into its working position is synchronized with the movement of a
    grasping and/or detaching means.

    (1)     Note.  Refer to (1) Note of subclass 215 for a description of the
    grasping and/or detaching means and the operation.


CLS 19/224
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 221 wherein means are employed to vary
    the distance between the combing means and the trailing end of the tuft.


CLS 19/225
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 215 wherein the gripping jaws' opening
    and closing motion is supplemented by an additional to-and-fro motion
    towards and/or away from either a comb or detaching means. See (1) Note
    subclass 215 for the function of the gripping jaw, and for the definition
    of the detaching means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235,    for a nipper, per se.


CLS 19/226
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 225 wherein a second nipper pair is
    provided and means are employed for opening jaws of one nipper pair while
    closing the other nipper pair, in sequence.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235,    for structure of the nipper, per se.


CLS 19/227
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 225 wherein the nipper jaws are biased
    into or out of contacting engagement.


CLS 19/228
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 225 wherein the limit of the nipper's to
    and fro motion is varied by changing the amplitude of such motion.


CLS 19/229
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 215 including a step of, or means for
    separating a combed fiber-length bunch from a supply (lap) of the fiber to
    which it is attached.


CLS 19/230
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 229 wherein the tuft engaging surface,
    of at least one of the tuft engaging means, is an endless band.


CLS 19/231
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 229 wherein the separating is
    accomplished by a pair of rolls.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230,    for detaching accomplished by an endless belt.


CLS 19/232
TXT Method and apparatus under subclass 231 wherein at least one roll of the
    detaching roll pair is bodily moved toward and away from the fiber-length
    bunch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223,    for a detaching roll pair moved in time relation to the combing
    means.


CLS 19/233
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 215 in which the combing of a protruding
    or leading edge of a lap, which constitutes the bunch or tuft, is
    accomplished by a cylinder or drum, in which the comb teeth are mounted,
    rotating about a fixed orbital axis.


CLS 19/234
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 233 wherein the comb teeth, mounted upon
    the rotating cylinder or drum, are limited to a segment of the drum, or to
    less than 360+ of the outside circumference of the rotating member.


CLS 19/235
TXT Apparatus under subclass 215 provided with a pair of opposed jaw means for
    gripping a fiber lap and holding the projecting end thereof in the path of
    a comb cylinder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225+,   for an oscillating or reciprocating nipper and subclass 223 for
    nipper motion timed with respect to combing means.


CLS 19/236
TXT Methods or apparatus under subclass 65 wherein the working comprises
    feeding a fiber strip by applying force at some area or point along the
    strip length and simultaneously retarding said strip at an area or point
    along the strip length removed from that at which the feeding force is
    applied, thereby causing said strip to become attenuated.

    (1)     Note.  The distance between these two areas or points is usually
    referred to as the "ratch".

    (2)     Note.  In addition to patents restricted by claim to drafting,
    there will be found in this and indented subclasses patents to
    subcombinations not considered to be of general utility, e.g., saddles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    subclass 66 for filament forming and stretching means.


CLS 19/237
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 236 wherein are provided a step of or
    apparatus for producing cyclical or random variations in the thickness of
    the strip by changing the relative displacement of the fibers produced by
    the drafting action.

    (1)     Note.  Such devices produce a thickness or slub in the fibers,
    thereby adapting the material to the production of slubbed or fancy yarns.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting,  and Twining, subclasses 317+ for
    variable drafting means combined with significant twisting (including false
    twisting) means.


CLS 19/238
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 237 wherein is provided a step of or
    apparatus for increasing or decreasing the rate of feed of the fibers into
    the drafting zone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    260+,   for roll speed adjusting.


CLS 19/239
TXT Process or apparatus under subclass 236 including a step of or means for
    detecting the presence or absence of a condition of the work material, so
    as to bring about a change in the drafting operation (other than the mere
    cessation thereof) in response to such detection.

    (1)     Note.  Such change in the drafting operation may be, typically,
    machine speed variation in response to a condition in the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    .2+     for means to stop the machine in response to some defect in the
    work or the machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, for pneumatic testing of strand thickness,
    pressure on a top roll, and drafting force.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 10+ for
    means to stop a machine in response to a defect in material being fed.


CLS 19/240
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 239 wherein the change in the drafting
    operation is brought about by a change in the rate of rotation of at least
    one pair of drafting rolls.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism,  subclasses 325+ for speed changing.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems  or Components, for planetary
    gear transmissions.

    476,    Friction Gear Transmission Systems or Components, for friction gear
    transmissions.


CLS 19/241
TXT Apparatus under subclass 240 in whose accomplishment or operation the
    rotary speed change is brought about by moving a web (or chain) like power
    transmitting element with respect to its mating power transmitting element.

    (1)     Note.  Typically, a roll-shaft-driving belt is moved axially along
    a truncated cone cylinder, whereby the change in the diameter of the
    cylinder causes the speed variation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, various
    subclasses for control of speed change, including belt shifting mechanism,
    for endless belt power transmission.


CLS 19/242
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 236 wherein individual fibers are
    elongated during the drafting, in order to parallelize or straighten, but
    without breaking thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Many patents placed in this subclass disclose that this
    stretching is for the purpose of imparting increased luster or brilliance
    to the fibers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66+,    for special treatment of fibers (i.e.) for purposes other than
    parallelization or straightening.


CLS 19/243
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 236 wherein a plurality of strips are
    directed into the drafting zone and integrated into a single strip (e.g.,
    sliver).


CLS 19/244
TXT Method and apparatus under subclass 236 wherein the drafting action is
    accomplished by at least one endless belt, guided or trained about a roll
    cooperating with a roll or another belt.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, appropriate
    subclasses for aprons.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 604 and 626+ for opposed,
    load- gripping belt type conveyors.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for stock material in the form of a single or plural layer web or sheet.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 237+ for a friction drive belt in an endless belt power
    transmission.


CLS 19/245
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 244 including a step of or means for
    removing undesirable material from the endless belt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262+,   for clearing means acting on a roll element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 256.5+ for
    cleaning means acting upon a moving surface, in general; and particularly
    subclass 256.6 for cleaning means acting upon a running strand and
    subclasses 300.1+ for pneumatic cleaning means.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 494+ for a conveyor having
    installed as part or its structure a means for cleaning a component of the
    conveyor.


CLS 19/246
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 244 wherein additional means are
    employed in close proximity to the drafting zone to assure that the
    marginal fibers of the strip are moved back into the main body of fibers in
    order that these marginal fibers may be given a proper drafting or
    attenuation.


CLS 19/247
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 244 wherein additional means are
    employed to parallelize, or make straight, the path of the fibers through
    the drafting zone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    288,    wherein means are employed to guide the strip through the drafting
    operation.


CLS 19/248
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 244 wherein means are employed to
    restrain the fibers approximately stationary in relation to the moving
    apron until they are gripped at the exit drafting rollers.


CLS 19/249
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 244 including a step of or means for
    holding the belt against gravity, intermediate its end limits, to insure
    the proper drafting of the short as well as the long fibers.

    SEARCH CLASS

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 837+ for means for supporting
    an endless belt conveyor.


CLS 19/250
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 244 where-in pressure is applied through
    a yieldable means to the endless belt to stretch or tension the belt along
    its length in order to secure a better grip upon the fibers as they pass
    therebetween.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 709 and 813+ for means for
    tensioning an endless belt conveyor.


CLS 19/251
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 250 wherein the tensioning or stretching
    of the endless belt is accomplished by cylindrical weighted means about
    whose axis the endless belt is trained.


CLS 19/252
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 244 wherein means are employed to direct
    the endless belt along a path of travel and prevent a lateral shift of the
    belt during the travel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 806+ and 840 for means for
    maintaining an endless belt conveyor on its conveying path.


CLS 19/253
TXT Apparatus under subclass 252 wherein the means employed to direct the
    endless belt along its closed loop path is a bar structure whose length is
    greater than the width of the belt and said bar is modified in some way to
    prevent excessive lateral movement of the belt upon its return over the bar.


CLS 19/254
TXT Apparatus under subclass 252 wherein the endless belt and its roll guide or
    drive are supported by an element consisting of two generally parallel side
    plates, arranged separated from one another and (usually connected together
    at a point on each of their extremities by a cross bar), at a distance
    slightly greater than the width of the endless belt and its roll guide, in
    order to support and guide the endless belt both in its movement about the
    closed loop and in its lateral movement.


CLS 19/255
TXT Device under subclass 254 wherein the guide and support element
    accommodates several endless belts and their roll guides.


CLS 19/256
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 244 wherein a variation in position of
    pressure of an element of the apron can be made with respect to (each
    other) or with respect to the element support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282,    for adjustment of spring applying pressure.

    283,    for adjustment of pressure applying member.


CLS 19/257
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 236 wherein one of the strip retarding
    means is a body or block like structure which has a contour, usually
    concave, which cooperates with the strip retarding means to attenuate the
    strip in its travel.


CLS 19/258
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 236 wherein the simultaneous feeding and
    retarding of a fiber strip is accomplished by a series of cooperating roll
    pairs, spaced apart, which causes said strip to become attenuated
    lengthwise upon its travel through the series.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 604+ and 624+ for opposed,
    load-gripping conveyor rolls.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housing, and Flexible Couplings for Rotary
    Shafts, appropriate subclasses for a flexible coupling between a torque
    transmitting shaft and a member driven by the shaft.

    492,    Roll or Roller, subclass 48 for a roll cover, per se, not elsewhere
    provided for, and subclasses 57+ for a single annular roll member of
    specific composition.


CLS 19/259
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 258 wherein a roll pair, usually free
    floating and frictionally driven, permits the passage of a strip
    there-between, without any appreciable pressure upon or drafting of said
    strip.


CLS 19/260
TXT Method and apparatus under subclass 258 wherein means are employed for
    changing the rate of rotation of a roll of one of the pairs, or changing
    the spacing of such a roll with respect to either its mate in the pair or a
    roll of another pair.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239+,   for speed changing features responsive to material sensing.


CLS 19/261
TXT Method and apparatus under subclass 260 wherein the change of the roll
    spacing is the relocation of one cooperating roll pair of a drafting frame
    with respect to another roll pair of the frame.

    (1)     Note.  The patents placed herein usually disclose the relocation of
    the roll pairs in order to permit drafting of fibers of variable length.


CLS 19/262
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 258 comprising a step of, or means for,
    removing undesirable material from a drafting roll.

    (1)     Note.  Class 15 takes no more structure of the roller(s) or
    arrangement thereof, claimed than that which constitutes the cleaned area
    or that necessary to accommodate the cleaning means.  Class 15 takes
    claimed roller or pair(s) of rollers as the object cleaned.  Plural rollers
    or pairs of rollers with only enough of the roller arrangement claimed to
    accommodate or necessitate the cleaning means.  Claims to plural cleaning
    means will be placed in Class 15, subclass 105.

    (2)     Note.  Subclasses 265 and 264 are restricted to clearing a top roll
    and clearing a bottom roll, respectively. Patents placed in this subclass
    262 are directed to clearing method or means which, as claimed, are
    effective upon both a top and bottom roll.

    (3)     Note.  Many of the patents placed in subclass 263 are directed to
    pneumatic clearing of both top and bottom rolls; hence a  search for
    clearing both rolls should include that subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 256.5+ for
    cleaning means in physical contact with a moving surface.  See notes above.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 494+ for a conveyor having
    installed as part of its structure a means for cleaning a component of the
    conveyor.


CLS 19/263
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 262 wherein the undesirable material is
    removed from the rolls by a system of imbalanced air pressures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 300.1+ for
    pneumatic means to clean a work surface.


CLS 19/264
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 262 wherein the undesirable material is
    removed from the bottom roll only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262,    for method or means for removing dirt, trash, etc., from both upper
    and lower rolls.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 256.5+ for
    cleaning means in physical contact with a moving surface to be cleaned.


CLS 19/265
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 262 wherein the undesirable material is
    removed from the upper roll only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262,    for method or means for clearing upper and lower rolls.

    264,    for cleaning a bottom roll only.


CLS 19/266
TXT Method or means under subclass 258 including a step of, or means for,
    continually urging a roll of a roll pair into engagement with the other
    roll of the pair to effect a working cooperation.



    (1)     Note.  Pressure applying device - Figure 5 denotes a specimen of a
    typical pressure applying device as used in the textile art.  In Figure 5,
    above, "A" denotes a saddle; "B" denotes a stirrup; "C" denotes pressure
    rolls; "D" denotes a pivoted fulcrumed lever; "E" denotes a pressure
    applying attachment means; "F" denotes a roll stand, the pressure is
    transmitted to the pressure roll "C" through the pivoted fulcrumed lever
    "D", which is pivoted to a fixed center, and in turn through the stirrup
    "B" through the saddle "A".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290,    for method or apparatus involving the pressing or running material
    against a roll (as distinguished from pressing one roll of a pair against
    the other).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, appropriate subclasses 113-182 for a spring
    pressure device, in general.


CLS 19/267
TXT Method or means under subclass 266 in which a step of or means for
    rendering ineffective the pressure applying device so that such device
    applies no force to the roll(s).


CLS 19/268
TXT Method or means under subclass 267 in which the pressure releasing step or
    means is initiated or activated by movement of one roll of a roll pair from
    its position of cooperation with the other roll of the pair.


CLS 19/269
TXT Method or means under subclass 267, in which the pressure applying device
    is a mass whose weight constitutes the source of roll-urging force, and
    including a step of or means for elevating such mass to render the weight
    ineffective upon the roll.


CLS 19/270
TXT Method or means under subclass 266 including a step of or means for giving
    a visible or audible response to the pressure or force imposed by the
    pressure applying device.


CLS 19/271
TXT Method or means under subclass 266 including a step of or means for
    distributing the pressure equally to each of a plurality of roll pairs.

    (1)     Note.  The force so applied to one roll pair is equal to that so
    applied to any other roll pair, irrespective of the distance between the
    roll pairs.


CLS 19/272
TXT Method or means under subclass 266 in which that property of mass (greater
    than molecular size) being repelled or attracted by an electrical field of
    force is employed to urge a roll into working cooperation with another roll
    of a pair, or the roll is urged by a fluid pressure means.

    (1)     Note.  The term fluid pressure is inclusive of air or a liquid
    pressure.


CLS 19/273
TXT Method or means under subclass 266 in which the force or pressure exerted
    by the urging means is transmitted to the roll through a stirrup and saddle.

    (1)     Note.  The word "and", means that the roll pressure applied through
    both a  stirrup and saddle.



    (2)     Note.  Letter "A" in Figure 6, above, denotes a saddle used in the
    textile art for straddling and bearing upon two or more drawing roll axles
    in such a manner that a pressure load is applied through the saddle to the
    drawing roll axles.  In Figure 5, under subclass 266, the saddle is also
    designated as letter "A".


CLS 19/274
TXT Method or means under subclass 273 in which the force exerted by the
    pressure applying means is applied through a pivoted arm linking means
    which is pivoted to a fixed center and to which means the stirrup and
    pressure applying means are both pivotally connected.


CLS 19/275
TXT Method or means under subclass 274 in which the rolls are continually urged
    by a mass whose weight is the source of pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    269,    for release of pressure applied by gravity means.

    283+,   for application of pressure by gravity in the absence of either a
    stirrup or saddle.


CLS 19/276
TXT Method or means under subclass 275 in which the roll pressure is adjustable.

    (1)     Note.  The selected degree of roll pressure may be accomplished by
    adjustment of: (a) the fulcrum point; (b) lever arm length; (c) the
    location of the stirrup* upon the pivoted arm or saddle* and (d) the
    relocation of the suspended mass upon the pivoted arm.


CLS 19/277
TXT Method or means under subclass 273 in which solid resilient means supplies
    the roll pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    279,    for application of pressure by spring means through a saddle.

    281+,   for application of pressure by spring means in the absence of
    either a stirrup or saddle.


CLS 19/278
TXT Method or means under subclass 266 in which pressure is transmitted to the
    roll through means acting upon or carried by a saddle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273+,   for application of pressure through a saddle and stirrup.


CLS 19/279
TXT Method or means under subclass 278 in which solid resilient means supplies
    the roll pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272,    for application of pressure by hydraulic or pneumatic means.

    277,    for application of pressure by resilient means through a stirrup
    and saddle.

    281+,   for application of pressure by resilient means in the absence of
    either a stirrup or saddle.


CLS 19/280
TXT Method or means under subclass 279 in which the pressure applied to the
    roll by the resilient means, directly or indirectly, may be varied.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282,    for application of adjustable pressure by spring means in the
    absence of either a stirrup or saddle.


CLS 19/281
TXT Method or means under subclass 266 in which solid resilient means supplies
    the roll pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272,    for application of pressure by hydraulic or pneumatic means.

    277,    for application of pressure by resilient means through a stirrup
    and saddle.

    279+,   for application of pressure by resilient means through a saddle.


CLS 19/282
TXT Method or means under subclass 281 in which the pressure applied to the
    roll by the solid resilient means directly or indirectly, may be varied.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280,    for application of adjustable pressure by resilient means through a
    saddle.


CLS 19/283
TXT Method or means under subclass 266 wherein source of pressure is a weight.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    269,    for release of pressure applied by gravity.

    273+,   for application of pressure, from a gravity source, through a
    stirrup and saddle.

    275+,   for application of pressure from a gravity source, through a
    fulcrumed lever, stirrup and saddle.


CLS 19/284
TXT Means under subclass 266 which comprises a saddle* as such.


CLS 19/285
TXT Device under subclass 284 in which means is employed to diminish frictional
    contact between the bearing surface of a saddle and the shaft of a roll.


CLS 19/286
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 258 including a step of compacting or
    compressing the flowing work material by means of a generally cylindrical,
    rotating body, or means comprising such a body and fulfilling such function.

    (1)     Note.  Such a roll may also have an attenuating function and
    therefore serve as a member of a drafting couple.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    288+,   for condenser of the trumpet variety.


CLS 19/287
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 258 wherein the strip, in its travel
    through the drafting machine, has an additional lateral back and forth
    motion imparted to it by the guide or condenser roll.

    (1)     Note.  These patents disclose means to cause the sliver to have a
    to-and-fro motion during the feeding thereof.


CLS 19/288
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 258 wherein the drafting step or means
    is accompanied by a step of or means for, passively directing or channeling
    the flow of work material, compacting or compressing the moving material,
    or retarding its flow.

    (1)     Note.  The concept of passive direction includes the action of a
    movable channeling device or an obstruction (such as an idler roll), but
    excludes the imparting of motion.


CLS 19/289
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 288 wherein the step of guiding is
    accompanied by a step of, or wherein the guiding means also performs the
    function of, turning back upon itself a longitudinal edge portion or area
    of the material being worked on.


CLS 19/290
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 288 in which the guide also serves to
    urge the work into contact with a drafting roll by establishing a bight
    between the roll and itself, so that any section of the work material will,
    during its travel past the guide, engage both the roll and the presser
    guide.


CLS 19/291
TXT Method and apparatus under subclass 288 in which the guiding step is
    carried out by, or the guiding means comprises, an element other than a
    closed periphery tube.


CLS 19/292
TXT Method and apparatus under subclass 288 in which the guiding step is
    carried out by, or the guiding means comprises, a device whose mounting, or
    the relationship of whose parts, may be altered at will.


CLS 19/293
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 258 wherein the drive of the drafting or
    feed rolls is accomplished through a system of gearing or through contact
    of a nondriven roll with a driven roll.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 325+ for speed changing
    means.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, appropriate
    subclasses for belt and pulley power transmission.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, for planetary
    gear transmission.

    476,    Friction Gear Transmission Systems or Components, for friction gear
    transmissions.


CLS 19/294
TXT Apparatus under subclass 258 wherein means are provided to support the roll
    or rolls of a drafting frame against the force of gravity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 276+ for sleeves, or liners.


CLS 19/295
TXT Apparatus under subclass 294 wherein the claimed support means operates to
    support only the upper roll of a roll pair.


CLS 19/296
TXT Web forming:
    Method or apparatus under subclass 144 for forming a flat nonwoven batt,
    mat, or strip of fibers or filaments, the configuration of which is
    retained solely by interfiber or interfilament friction.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses constitute the repository
    for subcombinations concerned with the formation of a nonwoven web from
    fibers or filaments.  Excluded from this and the indented subclasses are
    the following:

    (a)     web formation from bulk deposition of particulate material other
    than fibers or filaments;

    (b)     web formation from bulk deposition of fibers from a liquid
    suspension or slurry:

    (c)     web formation from bulk deposition of fibers or filaments combined
    with either:

    1.      formation of the fibers or filaments from liquid or molten
    material; or

    2.      bonding or uniting of the constituents of the web; or

    3.      mechanical manipulation of the web to rearrange the constituents
    thereof.

    (2)     Note.  For proper inclusion in this and the indented subclasses,
    the disclosure must be limited to web formation or bulk deposition of
    fibers or filament. A disclosure of general utility or applicability to
    fiber or filaments and other particulate material as powders, flakes,
    granules, and the like excludes placement herein.

    (3)     Note.  Comminuted wood, i.e., lignocellulose, as prepared by an
    attrition mill or defiberizer in the form of chips, flakes, shavings,
    wafers, or "wood fibers" for the manufacture of composition panels,
    fiberboard, wallboard, and the like are not construed as textile "fibers"
    proper for this and the indented subclasses even though such material may
    be referred to as "fibrous".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    .51     and .56, for combined fibrous web forming and significantly claimed
    filament staplizing operations.

    80+,    for combined fibrous web forming and picking, i.e., fiber
    liberation or separation and cleaning.

    98+,    for formation of a fibrous nonwoven web by a carding operation.

    160,    for formation of a fibrous nonwoven web by deposition of a sliver
    to-and-fro transversely of a moving or travelling, collecting or receiving
    surface.

    163,    for formation of a fibrous nonwoven web by deposition of a nonwoven
    web to-and-fro transversely of a moving or traveling, collecting or
    receiving surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles: Manufacturing, subclasses 103+ for mechanical
    manipulation as by felting, fulling, needling, or the like of a nonwoven
    article or structure of fibers or filaments to rearrange and retain the
    constituents thereof into altered positions by interfiber or interfilament
    friction, inclusive of initial formation of the nonwoven web.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 443+ for batt-forming means
    combined with means to form a glass filament or fiber.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    62.2+ for processes including the formation of a lamina by assembling
    individually distinct fibers from a fluent mass, adhesively bonding the
    fibers to each other, and then uniting the lamina thus formed to itself or
    another lamina; and subclasses 166+ and 433+ for processes and apparatus,
    respectively, for bonding or uniting of flexible filamentary material while
    in indefinite or running length form.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 100+ for processes of
    forming a fibrous web by deposition from liquid suspension; and subclasses
    232+ for apparatus for producing water or liquid laid fibrous webs.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses for processes and apparatus for separating solid materials,
    inclusive of fibers, and assorting or segregating them in grades or classes
    according to physical characteristics.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 520+ for processes and
    apparatus for the winding of self-sustaining masses of entangled fibers,
    which masses have substantial width with respect to their thicknesses and
    are of indefinite length.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping of Treating: Processes,
    subclasses 5+ for forming fibers from a liquid or molten mass, other than
    glass, and bulk assembly thereof; subclass 437 for application of
    electrical or wave energy to fibers for effecting deposition or orientation
    thereof combined with an operation of this class (264); subclasses 517+
    vacuum deposition, collection, or assembly of fibers combined with an
    operation of this class (264) or for the vacuum deposition of particulate
    material not provided for elsewhere; subclasses 109+ for the formation of a
    nonwoven web by uniting discrete bulk assembled fibers without the direct
    application of fluid pressure; subclass 143 for the formation of
    continuous, running, or indefinite length filaments, cutting or severing
    the filaments into staple fibers and deposition collection or a assembly
    thereof into web form; and subclasses 165+ for the formation of continuous
    or indefinite filaments and deposition, collection, or assembly thereof
    into web form when not combined with a cutting step.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, subclasses 1+ for processes for
    forming articles by powder metallurgy with heating or sintering wherein the
    powder particles may be fibrous or filamental in form; and subclasses 61+
    for similar processes.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    subclasses 6+ for apparatus to divide or comminute liquid material, other
    than glass, to form discrete fibers and bulk assembly thereof; subclass 66
    for continuous filament forming with stretching means, including deposition
    thereof in web form; subclasses 80.1+ for the deposition of fibers or other
    particulate material on a shaping surface from a gaseous suspension when
    not provided for elsewhere or when such deposition is combined with
    apparatus for performing an operation of this class (425); and subclass 224
    for means to cast or deposit filaments of indefinite length on a forming
    surface to form an indefinite length web.


CLS 19/297
TXT With fiber sampling:
    Method or apparatus under subclass 296 including the collection or
    formation of a representative fiber array or specimen during a web forming
    operation.


CLS 19/298
TXT With split lap preventing:
    Method or apparatus under subclass 296 wherein means are provided for
    preventing undesired division or parting of the nonwoven web during either
    fabrication or processing.


CLS 19/299
TXT Including continuous filaments:
    Method or apparatus under subclass 296 wherein the nonwoven web is formed
    of, or includes, elongate, slender thread, or threadlike constituents of
    indeterminate or running length.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles: Manufacturing, subclasses 100+ for forming a nonwoven web
    by deposition of filamentary material transversely of a longitudinally
    extending substrate, usually of filamentary components; subclasses 103+ for
    contraction, relaxation, or shrinkage of a nonwoven web of filamentary
    material to alter or enchance interfilamentary entanglement; and subclasses
    282+ for the formation of a nonwoven web of filamentary material by lateral
    distention, expansion, or separation of a tow.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 443+ and 529+ for processes and
    apparatus, respectively, for combined glass filament formation and nonwoven
    web formation with coating or treatment thereto.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    166+ and 433+ for the formation of a nonwoven web of filamentary material
    and bonding or uniting of the constituents thereof.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 165+ for the formation of continuous or indefinite length
    filaments and assembly, collection, or deposition thereof into web form;
    and subclass 342 for shrinkage of a nonwoven web of bicomponent or
    biconstituent filamentary material.


CLS 19/300
TXT Control means responsive to sensed condition or program:
    Method or apparatus under subclass 296 wherein variations from a set norm
    in the nonwoven web or constituent supply or in machine operation alters
    operation of the machine, or wherein readily changeable data or information
    in a preset arrangement or design controls the sequence of machine
    operations or an element thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for stopping a web-forming operation in response to some condition
    occurring in the material or through a defect in the web-forming machine or
    its operation.

    239+,   for alteration of a fiber drafting operation responsive to material
    sensing other than mere cessation of the operation.


CLS 19/301
TXT Irregular, nonuniform, or patterned receiving surface:
    Method or apparatus under subclass 296 wherein the formation of the
    nonwoven web is effected by assembly or deposition of fibers on a
    collecting member which is so arranged, configured, or designed as to
    produce a web of varying fiber accumulation, density, or shape, or as to
    produce discrete or subdivided web portions.


CLS 19/302
TXT Stratified or multilayer:
    Method or apparatus under subclass 296 wherein the nonwoven web is formed
    (a) by sequential deposition of layers of similar fibers in such a manner
    that a line of demarcation is presented between the deposited layers; (b)
    by deposition of diverse fibers in such a manner as to form distinguishable
    layers; or (c) by superimposition of a plurality of preformed web.

    (1)     Note.  Nonwoven web formation by a plurality of adjacent,
    oppositely disposed condensers supplied from a single supply source wherein
    the fibers collected thereon are combined or merged into a single, coherent
    web at the nip there-between, as double condenser cylinder machines, for
    example, is excluded from this subclass.  However, combining of nonwoven
    unitary webs emerging from the nips of a plurality of such multiple
    condensers is provided for herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 123+ for processes
    for producing multilayer water laid fibrous webs or sheets; and subclasses
    298+ for apparatus for application of plural separate fiber streams to a
    foraminous forming surface.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetalic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 112+ for forming stratified or layered nonwoven webs by uniting
    randomly associated fibers as provided by this class (264).

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    subclass 81.1 for air felting type shaping means for forming stratified
    products combined with an operation of this class (425).


CLS 19/303
TXT With divided fiber stream or separate handling of trash or fugitive fiber:
    Method or apparatus under subclass 296 wherein (a) fibers are deposited on
    a fluid permeable condenser by a gaseous stream which has several paths of
    travel to the condenser; (b) stray fibers caught on the outside of the
    condenser are returned to one of the air streams for recirculation to the
    condenser; or (c) unwanted material is removed from the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  The mere recitation that unwanted materials as dirt, dust,
    and the like passes through the fluid permeable condenser with the gaseous
    stream is insufficient to warrant placement herein.  The subject matter
    recited must specify special provision for the separation of handling of
    the unwanted material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for waste removal from the saws of a gin.

    107,    for waste, i.e., fugitive fiber recovery during a carding operation.

    200+,   for the removal of undesirable material from fibers without
    otherwise working the fibers or assembling them into a blend or structure.

    218,    for waste clearing during tuft combing of fibers.

    245     and 262+, for removal of undesirable material during a fiber
    drafting operation.


CLS 19/304
TXT Fluid propelled to condenser:
    Method or apparatus under subclass 296 wherein fibers are carried or
    conveyed in a gaseous stream for accumulation, assembly, or collection in
    web form upon a foraminous or perforate receiving surface or across a fiber
    entrapment area formed by a plurality of spaced receiving surfaces.

    (1)     Note.  This group of subclasses is distinguished from subclasses
    202+ wherein a batt or sheet is formed and subsequently disintegrated; the
    product of subclasses 304+ is a permanent sheet, web, or batt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88      and 89, for combined picking, i.e., fiber liberation or separation,
    cleaning, and fiber condensing.

    148,    for assembly of a fibrous article by screen condensing.

    202+,   for combined fiber cleaning and condensing.

    205,    for conveying fibers in a fluid propelling current or stream to a
    cleaning operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 12.1+,
    133+, and 250 for delivery of solid material suspended in a fluid to
    sifters for purpose of this class (209).

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    subclasses 517+ for vacuum deposition, collection, or assembly of fibers to
    form a nonwoven web combined with an operation of this class (264): and
    subclass 121 for projecting fibers in a moving gas stream in the formation
    of a nonwoven web by uniting randomly associated fibers as provided for by
    this class (264).

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, Appropriate subclasses for mere
    entrainment and conveyance of fibers in a gaseous medium.


CLS 19/305
TXT With fiber liberation:
    Method or apparatus under subclass 304 including the removal or separation
    of discrete fibers, aggregates, or clumps thereof from a fibrous
    accumulation in the form of a batt, mass, or web for projection into the
    gaseous stream.

    (1)     Note.  The liberation of fibers (a) from their natural state, i.e,
    from seed; (b) from the surface of a serrated or toothed cylinder on which
    the fibers repose in web form, e.g., a carding or combing cylinder; or (c)
    from a batt or mat thereof as by a eater, lickerin, picker, or the like is
    included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    .3+,    for liberating fibers from a continuous filament or yarn by
    staplizing; and subclasses .51 and .56 wherein the liberating or staplizing
    is combined with another operation, inclusive of web formation.

    1+,     for liberating fibers by mechanical means from the parts with which
    they have been produced in nature.

    80+,    for liberation or separation of fibers by blades or teeth and
    cleaning.

    98+,    for liberation or separation of fibers and carding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    62.4 for the formation of a nonwoven web with formation or liberation of
    fibers combined with uniting of the fibers of the web to each other and
    uniting of the lamina thus formed to itself or another lamina.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, appropriate subclasses for fiber
    liberation or separation involving some chemical treatment whether or not
    combined with mechanical treatment.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 4 and 28
    for processes of comminuting fibrous mineral material and wood and similar
    natural fibrous vegetable material, respectively; and subclasses 31+ for
    apparatus for comminuting fibrous material including other treatments
    combined therewith where such combinations are not otherwise provided for.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 115+ for methods of forming articles by uniting randomly
    associated particles where the particles either are formed or are liberated
    from a mass of previously formed particles; and subclass 143 for the
    extrusion and staplizing of a filament during the formation of a nonwoven
    web.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 82.1 for air felting type shaping means with fiber liberating
    means combined with an operation of this class (425).


CLS 19/306
TXT Gripping feed to fiber separator:
    Method or apparatus under subclass 305 wherein the trailing portion of a
    forwardly moving fibrous accumulation, batt, or mass is nipped or snubbed
    while the leading portion is divided or separated by a toothed or serrated
    moving member into discrete fibers, aggregates, or clumps thereof for
    projection into the gaseous stream.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64.5,   for feeding fibrous material to a ginning operation.

    83,     84, 86+, and 96, for gripping feed during fiber picking, i.e.,
    fiber liberation or separation and cleaning.

    97.5,   for feeding fibrous material to a picking operation.

    105,    for feeding fibrous material to a carding operation.

    204+,   for feeding fibrous material to a cleaning operation.


CLS 19/307
TXT Rotary condenser:
    Method or apparatus under subclass 306 wherein the condenser comprises or
    includes a foraminous or perforate revolving cylindrical member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 285+ for
    hollow cylinder or drum sifters having means for delivering material,
    inclusive of fibers, to the outside of the drums or cylinders for
    undersized particles to be passed inside the sifting walls and the oversize
    particles to be retained on the outside.


CLS 19/308
TXT Rotary condenser:
    Method or apparatus under subclass 304 wherein the condenser comprises or
    includes a foraminous or perforate revolving cylindrical member.


CLS 23/
TTL CHEMISTRY:  PHYSICAL PROCESSES

CLS 23/
TXT Processes for preparation or treatment of inorganic compounds and
    nonmetallic elements which involve only physical treatments not
    specifically provided for in some other class.  See subclass 293.


CLS 23/293
TXT Physical processes within the class definition not more specifically
    provided for in other classes.

    (1)     Note.  Patents containing both a claim to an inorganic compound or
    non-metallic element, and a claim to a physical process for this class, are
    classified in Class 423, Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, and
    cross-referenced here.

    (2)     Note.  The removal or addition of water of hydration or
    cystallization is considered a chemical reaction and not a physical process
    for this class.  For such processes see the appropriate chemical class,
    e.g., 423, Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, 260, Chemistry of Carbon
    Compounds, 585, Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, etc.

    (3)     Note.  Processes for preserving chemicals and compositions are
    classified with the chemical or composition preserved and processes of
    packaging chemicals are classified in Class 53, Package Making, except when
    chemicals classifiable in Classes 260, Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, and
    423, Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, 585, Chemistry of Hydrocarbon
    Compounds, are stored by means of a chemical combination from which the
    chemicals may be subsequently released, when they are classified on the
    basis of the chemical combination so formed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, for drying processes.

    53,     Package Making, appropriate subclasses for methods of and apparatus
    for encompassing or encasing goods or materials with a separate cover or
    band which serves as means for identifying, protecting or unit handling the
    goods or materials.  See (3) Note.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 600+ for processes and apparatus
    specialized to the manufacture of a solidified or liquefied product from a
    gas by physical treatment only.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, for processes provided for in that class which may include a
    physical process.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, for physical processes of gas
    separation and purification.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 35+ for processes for compacting material, not
    elsewhere provided for.

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, for processes of extracting and
    crystallizing sugar.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, for processes of concentrating solutions
    or suspensions of solids in liquids.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, appropriate subclasses for a
    destructive distillation process.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, appropriate subclasses for a
    separatory distillation process.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, for processes of
    separating solids from solids.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 634+, especially 643+
    for processes of liquid purification including dialysis, and subclasses
    800+ for processes for liquid separation by gravitational force.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate subclass,
    for processes and apparatus involving comminution and see section 2 of the
    class definition of that class (241) for the line.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, for processes for contacting
    gases and liquids when for a purpose other than that of gas separation or
    purification.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses for processes involving shaping or molding of
    plastic materials, noting, for example, subclass 4, pertaining to
    encapsulating of normally liquid material.

    366,    Agitating, for mixing or agitating processes.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 243+ for physical type apparatus
    including apparatus used in carrying out come processes of this class (23).

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    appropriate subclasses for physical processes involving foods.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 1+ for a material heating process of general
    utility.

    494,    Imperforate Bowl:  Centrifugal Separators, appropriate subclasses
    for apparatus and process for breaking up a mixture of fluids or fluent
    substances into two or more components by centrifuging within a generally
    solid-walled, receptacle-like member.


CLS 23/294
TXT Processes under subclass 293 directed to or including sublimation as a
    significant step.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 144+ for metallurgical furnaces
    with fume arresters.


CLS 23/295
TXT Processes under subclass 293 directed to or including crystallization as a
    significant step.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 25.35 for processes of manufacturing
    piezo-electric crystal devices which include crystallizing and additional
    manufacturing operations.

    62,     Refrigeration, for processes of crystallization including a step of
    refrigeration, especially see subclasses 66+ and subclasses 532+.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 33.1+ for a process of devitrifying
    of vitrifying glass combined with a glassworking operation.

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes and non-coating apparatus for
    growing therein-defined single-crystal of all types of materials, including
    inorganic or organic.

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, subclasses 58+ for the
    crystallization of sugar.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, for processes for mere evaporation of a
    solution or suspension of a solid in a liquid whether or not the claims are
    directed to treatment of a definite chemical compound or element, unless
    such processes are provided for elsewhere.  The combination of evaporation
    and significant crystallization is in this class (23).

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclass 48 for a
    distillation process including the step of crystallizing a material from a
    distillate or residue.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses, for
    chemical processes of manufacturing inorganic compounds and nonmetallic
    elements which may involve crystallizing.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, subclasses 2+ for devitrified glass
    compositions, and subclass 86 for synthetic precious stone compositions.


CLS 23/296
TXT Processes under subclass 295 wherein preferential crystallization is
    carried out in a system containing two or more normally solid
    crystallizable constituents.


CLS 23/297
TXT Processes under subclass 296 carried out in solution, in combination with a
    step of physical extraction or dissolving.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses, for
    extracting leaching or dissolving, per se.


CLS 23/298
TXT Processes under subclass 296 wherein the system being crystallized is found
    in nature, i.e., naturally occurring brines containing a number of salts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    303,    for processes of crystallizing Na Cl from brines containing this
    compound as the principal recoverable constituent.


CLS 23/299
TXT Processes under subclass 295 combined with a step of physical extraction or
    dissolving, before or after crystallization.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses for
    extracting, leaching or dissolving, per se.


CLS 23/300
TXT Processes under subclass 295 wherein a substance is added to affect or
    cause crystallization.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes salting out or addition of substances
    to control the size or shape of the crystals formed.


CLS 23/301
TXT Processes under subclass 300 wherein the added material is seed crystals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 25.35 for processes of manufacturing
    piezo-electric crystal devices which include crystallizing and additional
    manufacturing operations.


CLS 23/302
TXT Processes under subclass 295 in which the substance being crystallized is a
    compound of an alkali metal or ammonium.


CLS 23/303
TXT Processes under subclass 302 in which the substance being crystallized is
    sodium chloride.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 179 and 499.1 for
    processes of producing sodium chloride involving a chemical reaction.


CLS 23/304
TXT Processes under subclass 295 in which the substance being crystallized is a
    compound of an alkaline earth metal or magnesium.


CLS 23/305
TXT Processes under subclass 295 in which the substance being crystallized is a
    compound of a heavy metal or aluminum.


CLS 23/306
TXT Processes under subclass 293 involving concentration of solutions of
    liquids in liquids not otherwise provided for.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    274+,   for apparatus for concentrating liquids in liquids.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, for processes for concentrating
    solutions or suspensions of solids in liquids not more specifically
    provided for in other classes.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclasses 152+ and 232+ for separatory
    distillation apparatus.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclasses 12+ for processes
    of distilling a liquid to separate only water.


CLS 23/307
TXT Processes under subclass 304 in which the liquid being concentrated is
    directly contacted with the concentrating medium (e.g., hot gases).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclass 49 for convective
    distillation.


CLS 23/308
TXT Processes under subclass 293 drawn to or including as a significant step
    the melting out of fusible substances by heat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280,    for melting separators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    554,    Organic Compounds, subclass 23 for processes of rendering fats,
    fatty oils or fatty oil acids.  See also the notes thereto.


CLS 23/313
TXT Processes under subclass 293 directed to the preparation of agglomerates
    from finely divided solid nonmetallic elements or inorganic compounds by
    treatments which cause coalescence of the particles.

    (1)     Note.  The types of treatments usually employed are mechanical
    agitation and liquid treatment where the liquid is not a binder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    62.2+ for processes of particle uniting combined with laminating.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 5 for particle formation by liquid comminuting, particularly
    subclass 6, with uniting of said particles, and subclasses 109+ for
    processes of forming articles by uniting of particulate material.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, appropriate subclasses for processes
    of forming articles by uniting particulate material containing metal
    particle.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 222 for tumbling type agglomerating apparatus for particulate
    material.


CLS 23/314
TXT Processes under subclass 313 wherein the material undergoing agglomeration
    is carbon.


CLS 24/
TTL BUCKLES, BUTTONS, CLASPS,  ETC.

CLS 24/
TXT This class provides for buckles, buttons, clasps, cord and rope holders,
    pins, separable fasteners, etc., which have become so varied in use and so
    allied in structure as to belong to no specific art, but are novel only as
    to their structures.  There are, however, several types of fastenings
    included where the devices are but slightly identified with the art and are
    closely analogous to the main titles above cited.  Such patents are
    retained under more or less art titles.  Devices which embrace fastenings
    as above, but also include elements which connect them with various
    specific arts, have been excluded as far as practicable.

    The fastenings have been classified structurally as far as possible, and
    where two or more simple fastenings are contained in one structure, it is
    found in subclasses indicating the kinds of fastenings so combined.  This
    scheme is followed also through out those art subclasses which have been
    retained, where possible.

    (1)     Note.  The line with Class 2, Apparel, and this Class with respect
    to garment supporters is as follows:

    Class 24 takes single or combined securing means used to support a garment
    or to hold parts of a garment supporter together when either (a) no
    significant structural feature of the garment or held parts is claimed or
    (b) the specific configuration of the held parts of the supporter is not
    claimed.  Examples of the garment supporters proper for Class 24 are (1)
    two distinct securing means connected by a single nominally recited strip
    or strand, (2) cooperating components of a securing means located on the
    ends of a nominally recited belt, strip, or strand for holding the ends
    together to form a loop, and (3) securing means for holding together two or
    more named garments or named parts of a garment supporter.

    Class 2 takes all other garment supporters or parts thereof not provided
    for elsewhere.

    (2)     Note.  Definition of Terms. Terms or phrases used in titles or
    definitions, either repeatedly or in a special and limited sense, are set
    forth below with the meaning each is to have for subclasses 287+.  For
    economy of space, an asterisk (*) following a word indicates that reference
    should be made to this Glossary for the specific meaning thereof while an
    (*) following a hyphenated phrase, e.g., structure-to-be-secured(*),
    indicates that that entire hyphenated term as such has been defined in this
    Glossary.

    BUCKLE(*)

    A securing means wherein either member is adapted to allow
    structure-to-be-se-cured (*) to pass therethrough, or wherein the members
    are adapted to allow structure-to-be-secured(*) to pass completely
    therebetween in a path generally parallel to the longitudinal axis of the
    members.  Buckles are designed to adjustably secure belts, bands, or
    similar longitudinal articles and generally operate by having one end of
    the belt band, etc., fixed securely to one end of the buckle with another
    frictionally or resiliently securing the belt, band, etc., or by passing
    through a provided for aperture in the belt, band, etc., and generally also
    has two connected, relatively movable members.

    CLASP(*)

    A securing mechanism or element including two coacting members or member
    segments having gripping surfaces which engage portions of
    structure-to-be-secured* on opposite sides in a jawlike manner to thereby
    (a) prevent or hinder the movement of struc-ture-to-be secured* relative to
    the surfaces in at least one direction, (b) prevent or hinder the
    separation of distinct portions of the structure-to-be-secured* from each
    other, or (c) perform a securement of structure-to-be-secured* by overedge
    engagement thereof.  The gripping surfaces of the coacting members or
    member segments are intended to be always easily moved into and out of
    engagement with the structure-to-be-secured* by either direct manual or
    tool force thereon or actuation of an attached operator*.  In addition,
    both of the coacting members or member segment, when engaging with or
    disengaging from the structure-to-be-secured*, do not exceed the elastic
    limit of or destroy any portion of the securing mechanism or element.  If
    the mechanism or element is formed from either a single piece or plural
    fixedly attached pieces of rigid* material, then the structural shape of
    the gripping surfaces and the outward force of the compressed
    structure-to-be-secured* provide the gripping force required above.

    CLIP(*)

    A securing mechanism or element including a member which (1) is intended to
    be connected or attached to a rigid or semirigid supporting member (e.g.,
    wall, floor, roof) or article (e.g., pen, vehicle) having an additional and
    usually principle function other than normally associated with this class,
    and (2) has a gripping surface intended to coact with the surface of the
    supporting member or article to engage the opposite sides of a distinct
    structure-to-be-secured* positioned therebetween to prevent or hinder
    either (a) the movement of the structure-to-be-secured* relative to the
    surfaces in one direction, or (b) the separation of a
    structure-to-be-secured* from the supporting member or article.

    The gripping surface of the member is intended to be always easily moved
    into and out of engagement with the structure-to-be-secured* by either
    direct manual or tool force thereon or actuation of an attached operator*.
    In addition, the gripping surface, when engaging with or disengaging from
    the structure-to-be-secured does not exceed the elastic limit of or destroy
    any portion of the securing mechanism or element.  If the mechanism or
    element is formed from either a single piece or plural fixedly attached
    pieces of rigid* material, then the structural shape of the gripping
    surfaces and the outward force of the compressed structure-to-be-secured
    provide the gripping force required above.

    DRAWSTRING*

    A securing mechanism including both a string (i.e., a thin elongated
    flaccid member) and guiding means therefor (e.g., eyelet, hollow hem)
    located on a portion of the structure-to-be-secured* which surrounds an
    opening; wherein the string (a) encircles the opening, (b) draws the
    perimeter of the structure-to-be-secured* toward the center of the opening
    to close or tighten it when a portion of the string is pulled through its
    guiding means to shorten the effective length of the remaining portion of
    the string encircling the opening, and (c) secures the perimeter of the
    structure-to-be-secured* in its new position when the extracted portion of
    the string which was pulled through the guide means is prevented from
    moving (e.g., tied).

    FLACCID*

    Structure which, when subjected to a distortion force less than or equal to
    earth's gravitational force, is incapable (in at least one of its
    orientations) of maintaining its previous formational shape or being
    self-supporting over any appreciable dimension.

    HAND-ACTUATED(*); HAND-OPERATED(*)

    The term hand-actuated or hand-operated is used in the sense of like
    contact with a living being and solely applies to the use of the hand in
    operating a fastener (i.e., moving portions of the fastener relative to
    each other) of the Class 24 type.

    LACED-FASTENER*

    A securing mechanism including both a string (i.e., a thin elongated
    flaccid* member) and guiding means (e.g., path defining eyelets) therefor
    located on two spaced edges of the structure-to-be-secured*; wherein the
    string (a) links together the guiding means on opposite sides of and
    traverses the gap between the edges, (b) draws the edges toward each other
    when a portion of the string is pulled past its guiding means to shorten
    the effective length of the remaining portion of the string traversing the
    gap, and (c) secures the edges in fixed  relationship to each other when
    the extracted portion of the string is prevented from moving (e.g., tied).

    LOCKING MEANS*

    A component having the sole function of restricting the movement between
    and holding in a particular position or orientation (e.g., not moving or
    reorienting) either (1) one portion of the fastener relative to another
    portion of the fastener, or (2) one fastener relative to another fastener.

    OPERATOR*

    A manipulable mechanical means which contacts and moves with respect to a
    shiftable portion of a fastener mechanism to reposition or transmit an
    input force to the shiftable portion.  A mere spring which effects the
    movement of the parts of the fastener mechanism, for example, by utilizing
    stored energy to return its parts to a starting position, is not included
    in the meaning of this term.

    PIN*

    A securing mechanism having both (a) a portion specifically shaped (e.g.,
    pointed) to facilitate impaling of and penetration into either the
    structure-to-be-secured* or a supporting member therefor during its
    operation and (b) a remaining portion (e.g., head) not intended to
    penetrate either the structure-to-be-secured* or a supporting member
    therefor in the final securing position of the mechanism.  In addition, the
    penetrating portion of the securing mechanism is intended to be always
    easily impaled into and extracted from the penetrated area of the
    structure-to-be-secured* or its supporting member by unaided directed
    manual force.  Finally, the normal securing or releasing operation of the
    mechanism requires no portion of the mechanism to be destroyed or undergo
    forces in excess of those causing plastic deformation of the material from
    which it is constructed.

    RESILIENT*

    Structure which is both capable (a) of distortion when subjected to a force
    of the magnitude normally encountered within the disclosed environment and
    (b) of complete resumption of its original shape due to the energy stored
    within it by the distortion force after its removal.

    RIGID*

    Structure which when subjected to a distortion force normally encountered
    within the environment (as defined by the disclosure and associated with
    the securing operation of a Class 24 fastener) is capable of resisting this
    force if applied to the structure in any orientation and maintaining its
    previous formational shape thereafter.

    SEMIRIGID*

    Structure which is both (a) capable of resisting distortion (i.e.,
    maintaining its previous formational shape or being self supporting over
    all appreciable dimensions) caused by a force applied to it in any of its
    orientations which is of a magnitude equal to or less than the earth's
    gravitational force and (b) incapable of resisting distortion caused by a
    force applied to it which is normally encountered in its working
    environment (e.g., ductile or resilient* structure).

    SEPARABLE-FASTENER*

    A securing mechanism including two, separate, dissociable, mating members
    having faces which directly or through a separate linking member (1)
    contact and interlock (i.e., the movement between the faces is restricted
    in the direction force is transmitted thereto by the
    structure-to-be-secured*) with each other when fastening either (a) spaced
    portions of the structure-to-be-secured* together, or (b) the
    structure-to-be-secured* to a supporting member having a principle function
    not associated with this class (e.g., door, wall) and (2) are intended to
    be always easily associated or dissociated from each other either by direct
    manual force or by actuation of an operator* attached to one of the
    members.  Both of the mating    members  of    this   mechanism are
    intended to be attached to or formed from a section of either the
    structure-to-be-secured* or a supporting member therefor and neither of
    these members is ever structurally linked to the other by any structure
    other than the structure-to-be-secured* when their faces are not in their
    interlock position.  In addition, both of the members when associated or
    dissociated do not exceed the elastic limit, or destroy any portion, or the
    material forming the faces.

    STRUCTURE-TO-BE-SECURED*

    Structure having a principle function other than that normally associated
    with this class (i.e., not a component of a Class 24 fastener) which is
    attached, fastened, gripped, or secured by a Class 24 fastener, either to
    itself or to another structure.

    SUPPORT-CLAMP(*)

    A securing mechanism or element which (1) is attached to the
    structure-to-be-secured* for subsequently mounting it on a rigid* or
    semirigid* member (e.g., wall, floor, roof) or article (e.g., pen, vehicle)
    having an additional and usually principal function other than normally
    associated with this class, and (2) having either (a) a gripping surface
    which is mounted to and intended to coact with an opposed gripping surface
    formed by the structure-to-be-secured* to engage the opposite sides of the
    rigid or semirigid member or article positioned therebetween, or (b) two
    coacting members or member segments having gripping surfaces which engage
    opposite sides of the rigid* or semirigid* member or article in a jawlike
    manner, and (3) having structure which hinders the movement of the gripping
    surfaces relative to the member or article and prevents the separation of
    the structure-to-be-secured* from the member or article.  The gripping
    surfaces of the securing mechanism or element are intended to be always
    easily moved into and out of engagement with the rigid* or semirigid*
    member or article by either direct manual or tool force thereon or
    actuation of an operator* attached to the securing mechanism or element.
    In addition, the gripping surfaces of the securing mechanism or element,
    when engaging with or disengaging from the rigid* or semirigid* member or
    article, do not exceed the elastic limit of or destroy any portion of the
    securing mechanism or element.  If the mechanism or element is formed from
    either a single piece or plural fixedly attached pieces of rigid* material,
    then the structural shape of the gripping surfaces and the outward force of
    the compressed structure-to-be-secured* provides the gripping force
    required above.

    TOOLS(*)

    An instrument for affecting the operation of a Class 24 fastener usually
    operated by hand and totally separable from the fastener after affecting
    operation.

    ZIPPER(*)

    A mechanism for either closing an opening in structure-to-be-secured*, or
    connecting together separate members of structure to be secured* including
    (a) two, opposed, elongated, cooperating, configured surfaces which are
    attached to the structure-to-be-secured* by mounting means and intended to
    directly contact and interlock with each other (i.e., the movement between
    the configured surfaces is restricted in the direction force is transmitted
    thereto by the structure-to-be-secured*) when closing or connecting, and
    (b) a sliding device which is much shorter in length than the surfaces and
    which travels along the length of the surfaces sequentially contacting and
    simultaneously camming against each segments of both surfaces to forcibly
    shift them into or out of interlocking engagement, the direction of travel
    of the device generally being perpendicular to the shifting motion of the
    interlocking configured surfaces.

    (3)     Note.  Many of the securing means placed within subclasses 287+
    claim with the means an amount of structure-to-be-secured* necessary for
    either (a) completing the securing operation, (b) connecting components of
    the securing means together, (c) linking distinct securing means together,
    or (d) mounting the securing means.  The mere naming of or recitation of
    the above (i.e., a-d) limited amount of structure-to-be-secured* will not
    exclude classification from Class 24, unless this subject matter is
    provided for elsewhere.  Specific details or specificity of the
    structure-to-be-secured* going beyond this amount are excluded for this
    class and are placed in the particular class providing for that type of
    structure-to-be-secured*, combination, or mounting.

    (4)     Note.  Patents claiming either (1) two or more discrete, rigid* or
    semirigid* (i.e., nonflaccid), joined members and details peculiar to their
    common joint or (2) a fastener constructed with features peculiarly
    adapting it for use with such members (e.g., angle clamp, converging clasp
    for members having divergent cross sections, jointed connector allowing
    relative movement between members) and disclosing that the members are (a)
    mere stock material having only general utility until joined together into
    a particular assemblage (e.g., framework members transmitting force to one
    another), (b) components of an assemblage, each of which have the same
    utility before and after joining, but when joined together interact with
    each other to accomplish a common task and no longer have any independent
    operation (e.g., torque transmitting rods, pipeline), (c) subcomponents of
    an assemblage one of which having utility only when interacting with the
    other to accomplish a specific task (e.g., windshield wiper and
    windshield), or (d) articles each having independent utility and when
    joined together cooperate with each other to change, enhance, or make
    interdependent their operation (e.g., articulated trailers) have been
    classified in the appropriate class (e.g., Class 64, Class 74, Class 248,
    Class 280, Class 285, Class 439, or Class 403) based on details of the
    members or joint.

    (5)     Note.  The line between this class (24) and Class 248 is largely
    based on disclosure.  Thus, inventions which involve distinct means for
    engaging a support and a  supported article wherein the sole disclosure is
    of a support against gravity are classifiable in Class 248 even though it
    may be possible to find other utility therefore.  Subcombinations of such
    devices are classifiable in Class 248 in the absence of a clear indication
    of general utility for the subcombination.  For example, a clip* in general
    is classified in this class (24) even when disclosed as having a supporting
    function; however, when a clip* is particularly adapted for service as a
    support against gravity (e.g., the gripping jaw is gravity actuated) or as
    a hold down and there is no other utility disclosed, then it is classified
    in Class 248.

    (6)     Note.  All U. S. patents within subclasses 287+ are placed
    according to the following procedure: Original patents having claims
    defining subject matter within the scope normally associated with these
    subclasses should be placed within the first occurring subclass array and
    furthest, sequentially indented subclass thereunder which the claimed
    subject matter fits and if there are additional subclasses indented
    thereunder, on disclosure into the first occurring and furthest,
    sequentially indented subclass which the disclosed and claimed subject
    matter fits. It is additionally considered mandatory to cross-reference any
    independent claims(s), other than the one governing original placement or
    other claims defining the same subject matter, below into different
    subclass arrays using the same principles of placement by which the
    original is placed.  Further, if the subject matter of the patent used in
    placing the original is a species of a generic claim and there are plural
    species disclosed in the patent, then it is mandatory to cross-reference
    the patent to the first subclass immediately above and under which the
    original's subclass is indented which can fully accept the subject matter
    of all claimed and disclosed species.  However, if the patents are more
    than 17 years old, the cross-referencing of any claimed subject matter to a
    different subclass array, either above or below that into which the
    original is placed, is solely discretionary and is not mandatory if it is
    felt that the claimed subject matter is already well represented in these
    other subclass arrays.

    (7)     Note.  Devices intended for transmitting an active pushing,
    pulling, lifting, or driving force through their structure from a force
    input element to a separate (a) transportable load, (b) piece of work or
    (b) tool are classified elsewhere based upon the type of function of the
    input element (e.g., Class 294 if it is a cable, Class 16 if it is a
    handle, Class 414 if it is for a load grab of a vertically swinging load
    support, Class 254 if it is a pushing or pulling implement, Class 279 if it
    is for a tool holding chuck, Class 100 it it is a press).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, appropriate subclasses for a fastener claimed in
    combination with either specific apparel structure or specific additional
    apparel supporting structure, and see (1) Note of this class definition for
    the line between Class 2 and Class 24.

    29,     Metal Working, appropriate subclasses, for a process or means to
    make a Class 24 fastener.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, appropriate subclasses for a
    fastener either claimed in combination with information exhibiting
    structure (e.g., badge, tag) or claiming a special accommodating feature
    (e.g., holder) for information exhibiting structure.

    63,     Jewelry, appropriate subclasses for a fastener either (a) in
    combination with jewelry structure, (b) having an ornamental shape, (c)
    having a special accommodating feature (e.g., setting) for jewelry
    structure, or (d) constructed from valuable decorative material (e.g.,
    gold).

    70,     Locks, appropriate subclasses for a fastener which either (a) is
    combined with distinct locking means or (b) requires the aid of a key or
    specialized tool to release it.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 863+ for an animal collar or harness
    having a particular buckle, length-fixing, or end-joining means.

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 9+ for a device which fastens hair.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for a method or an apparatus to fasten two members
    together with an adhesive.

    163,    Needle and Pin Making, appropriate subclasses for an apparatus for
    or a method to make a pin.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, appropriate subclasses for a fastener
    which holds an article, while it is being transported between two
    locations, upon a person or vehicle.

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses for a fastener which supports an
    article against gravity, and see (5) Note of this class definition for the
    line between Class 24 and Class 248.

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses for means for holding an
    article at a location while it is being operated on or treated.

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, appropriate subclasses for means which grips a
    pipe, rod, or tool and transmits a rotating or reciprocating force thereto
    from an unclaimed power source.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, appropriate subclasses for a coupling
    means,  per se,  which has a structural feature particular to connecting
    pipes.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, appropriate subclasses for a fastener which is
    intended to hold a distinct closure in a position blocking an opening.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, appropriate subclasses
    for a fastener which transmits a force from a handle or hoist-line to an
    object or material moved thereby.

    402,    Binder Device Releasably Engaging Aperture or Notch of Sheet,
    appropriate subclasses for retaining means which passes through or forms an
    opening in a sheet of paper to releasably secure it.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for a joint between
    (a) two rigid* or semi-rigid* members, (b) two portions of a rigid* or
    semi-rigid* member, or (c) a flaccid* and a rigid* or semi-rigid* member
    which involves either an intrinsic property of one of the members or
    portions thereof or a particular relationship between the members or
    portions; and fastening means, per se, limited to such joints by their
    structure.

    410,    Freight Accommodations On Freight Carrier, appropriate subclasses
    for means to secure an article to a freight carrier.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, appropriate subclasses for a general utility
    fastener which is (a) tool driven, (b) tool manipulated, or (c) deformed
    during the fastening operation and devices used in conjunction with such
    fasteners.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for a detachable
    connector (e.g., fastener), per se, which either (a) is specially designed
    for, (b) includes structure having particular utility for, or (c) has the
    sole disclosed utility of conducting electricity; and see the class
    definition of Class 439, section IV for the line between Class 24 and Class
    439.

    (8)     Note.  A securing means claimed in combination with a tool for
    operating it is classified in the appropriate class for the tool when a
    specific detail of the tool is claimed.


CLS 24/1
TXT Devices under the class definition not otherwise classifiable.


CLS 24/2
TXT Devices under the class definition specially adapted for the purpose of
    keeping albums and other books closed when not in use.

    (1)     Note. Similar fastening devices and their specific details will be
    found in the pertinent subclasses of Classes 70, Locks, and 292, Closure
    Fasteners.


CLS 24/2.5
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising bands which hold the barrel
    of a firearm to the stock and in addition perform some other function,
    e.g., support a hook and/or one or more loops.

    (1)     Note.  The loops may be utilized for anchoring a gun sling and/or
    for gun stacking purpose.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    265,    for strap-end-attaching devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, subclass 85 for gun slings.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 683+ for article carried supports which
    support the article when in storage and remain with the article when in use.


CLS 24/3.1
TXT ARTICLE HOLDER ATTACHABLE TO APPAREL OR BODY:

    Device under the class definition for fastening or holding an article
    (e.g., pencil, flower, napkin, spectacle, spectacle case, scissor) which is
    to be carried about on clothing, belt, or part of body.

    (1)     Note.  Holder in this subclass is specially adapted for carrying a
    specific article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, Or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 299+, particularly
    subclasses 642.02+ and 658+ for ticket-holders.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclasses 101+ for carrying devices
    that are:  (1) intended for personal wear or (2) supported on a person.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 96+ for body supported
    reel devices wherein many of the reeled strands are adapted to be connected
    with, or attached to, an article (usually some article for personal use or
    wear) and subclass 136 for spool-holders attached to the person.


CLS 24/3.11
TXT Article held by clip with spring (e.g., leaf, coil) member:

    Device under subclass 3.1 in which the article carrying structure includes
    a gripping member and a distinct elastic spring, separate from the gripping
    member, to firmly force the gripping members to engage a garment (e.g.,
    belt, shirt, pants) or hat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclass 252 for clip attaching
    receiver to support means on bearer.


CLS 24/3.12
TXT Article held by clip:

    Device under subclass 3.1 in which the article carrying structure is an
    elastic clamp to grip a garment (e.g., belt, shirt, pants) or hat.


CLS 24/3.13
TXT Article held by flexible connector (e.g., chain):

    Device under subclass 3.1 in which the article carrying structure is in the
    form of a pliable link between the article  at one end (e.g, a watch,
    pacifier, key ring, ID) and the  garment fastening point at the other end
    (e.g., a buttonhole, pocket).


CLS 24/3.2
TXT Arm or leg carried holder:

    Device under subclass 3.1 in which the article carrying structure is
    located on the part of the body either between the shoulder and the fingers
    or  between the hip and the toes.


CLS 24/3.3
TXT Eyeglass holder including retaining means:

    Device under subclass 3.1 in which the article is a frame for holding
    vision correction lenses wherein the article carrying structure fastens to
    the frame and also has a means to fix said article carrying structure in
    the fastening position to the supporting structure.


CLS 24/3.4
TXT Neck supported holder:

    Device under subclass 3.1 in which the article carrying structure is
    located on the part of the body between the head and shoulders.


CLS 24/3.5
TXT Holder contains pocket engager (e.g., antitheft device, wallet protector):

    Device under subclass 3.1 in which the article carrying structure has means
    to contact a piece of material sewed onto the outside of a garment with the
    top edge open.


CLS 24/3.6
TXT Key ring holder:

    Device under subclass 3.1 in which the article carrying structure is
    designed to hold an implement to open a lock.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclass 459 for key holders combined with other articles.


CLS 24/3.7
TXT Receptacle type holder:

    Device under subclass 3.1 in which the article carrying structure is a
    small container designed to hold personal items (e.g., hair pins,
    cigarettes, rulers, money).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.3,    for eyeglass holder including retaining means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclass 163 for carriers mounted on
    or formed as a part of a belt buckle and subclass 269 for a clip or hook
    attaching an article carrier to support means on a bearer.


CLS 24/3.8
TXT Eyeglass or spectacle case:

    Device under subclass 3.7 in which the article carrying structure is
    designed to hold vision correction lenses and frame.


CLS 24/3.9
TXT Open-ended holster type holder:

    Device under subclass 3.1 in which the article carrying structure is
    tubular shaped and designed to restrain small personal implements within
    the perimeter of the shape.


CLS 24/4
TXT Devices under subclass 3.1 which are adapted for holding chatelaine-bags.
    The hook is provided with a safety device to prevent loss of the bag.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclasses 194, 269, and 660+ for
    similar devices where the purpose of transportation prevails.


CLS 24/5
TXT Devices under subclass 3.1 designed especially to hold flowers in those
    cases where the flowers are to be attached to the clothing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10+,    for pencil holders.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 41.01 for other cut flower or plant
    holders having moisture retaining means.  See also the notes to that
    subclass for search fields for other types of cut flower or plant holders.

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 46+ for such devices to be attached to the hair.


CLS 24/6
TXT Devices under subclass 5 attached by means of a pin fastening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for pin attached pencil holders.


CLS 24/7
TXT Devices under subclass 3.1 containing features which make them specially
    adapted for use as napkin-holders. Includes holders which are convertible
    into napkin-rings when desired.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, appropriate subclasses, for napkin
    holders comprising mere tubular structure.

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses, for napkin holders which include
    support structure such as stands, brackets, or supporting bases.


CLS 24/8
TXT Devices under subclass 7 attached by a hook.


CLS 24/9
TXT Devices under subclass 7 encircling the neck of the wearer.


CLS 24/10
TXT Devices under subclass 3.1 especially adapted for the purpose of holding
    pencils and like articles in pockets, including pencil-holders attached to
    the clothing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5+,     for flower holders.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 249 and 250 for pockets with article attaching
    or retaining features; and subclass 252 for closing attachments.

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, subclasses 106, 112+ and
    132+ for purses and wallets which have means to hold articles.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 52, 104+ and
    195, for a patent to the combination of a writing implement and means to
    retain it in a garment pocket, wherein more of the implement structure is
    claimed than is necessary to establish the relationship of the retaining
    means therewith.


CLS 24/11
TXT Pencil-holders under subclass 10 which are attached by means of a clasp.

    (1)     Note.  Class 401, Coating Implements With Material Supply, includes
    the following subclasses which are loci for patents to an implement with
    material supply in which a clasp is associated with another device: 52,
    with a pencil, or the like; 104+, with project-retract mechanism; and 195,
    with a tool which applies or spreads fluent coating material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 123, for a pencil attachment including a clasp
    and a cutter.


CLS 24/12
TXT Devices under subclass 10 attached by means of a pin-fastening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for pin attached flower holders.


CLS 24/13
TXT Article-Holders under subclass 3.1 which have a pin attachment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 371+ for a spring
    powered reel of general use and subclasses 136+ for a strand spool holder.


CLS 24/15
TXT Devices under subclass 3.1 for holding the inner coat-sleeve while an outer
    coat is being put on.  This subclass also includes other sleeve-holders
    which do not come under the above definition, but are placed there because
    they are sleeve-holders nominally.


CLS 24/16
TXT Devices under the class definition especially adapted for bundling papers,
    bales, packets, etc., and for clamping hoses, by means of straps, bands or
    the like.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115+,   for devices for holding the ends of cords or ropes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages: Apparatus, subclass 350 for bands or binders
    for cooking food.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 99 for similar devices to be
    used as a patch for a leaky pipe or hose.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses 66+ for similar devices adapted for
    use on wooden boxes by reason of fastenings, and subclasses 91+ for barrel
    hoops.  Barrel hoops consisting of a strip, with means for securing the
    ends together, except for tightening the hoop are in this class (24).

    410,    Freight Accommodation on Freight Carrier, subclasses 34+ for a
    wraparound load binder securing a group of articles to a freight carrier
    surface; and subclasses 97+ for a wraparound similarly securing general
    freight load units.


CLS 24/17
TXT Devices under subclass 16 specially adapted for bundling or packing such
    articles as sheet-paper, currency, gloves, and the like, but excludes such
    as are receptacles.  They consist of various arrangements of bands, straps,
    cords, and wires in connection with some form of tying or fastening means.
    On account of the close similarity in structure umbrella-ties, trunk strap
    fastenings, bag-holders, etc., have been included where the invention is
    not classifiable as a fastening device simply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30.5,   for bag-fasteners which are peculiarly adapted for closing bags.

    66+,    for devices adapted for holding the edges or ends of a number of
    sheets of paper so as to permit writing on same or reference to individual
    sheets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 311+, particularly subclasses 321+ for similar
    devices in garment supporters and retainers.

    100,    Presses, subclass 212 for pressing devices not elsewhere provided
    for which are supported from the ground or from a material penetrating
    element and in which the material is pressed within a bendable filament,
    strand or band by contracting it around the material. See the reference to
    Class 24 in the class definition of Class 100 for a statement of the line
    between the classes.

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclass 27 for combinations of
    straps suitable for securing trunks in their closed position or straps
    attached to the trunks.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 78.1+ for
    metallic closure fasteners for paper envelopes.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclass 325 for seal type strap-end fasteners.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 137 for similar
    devices in which a handle or carrying portion is included.


CLS 24/18
TXT Packet-holders under subclass 17 which make use of cord or rope and have a
    metallic fastener for holding the ends and which provide for the cord
    passing about the package in two directions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    when the cord-holder is intended for cords which only pass around
    the package in one direction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclasses 307+ for seals, per se, and subclass
    327 for seal bolts.

    294,    Handling: Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 149 for
    hand-held article carriers having similar structure.


CLS 24/19
TXT Devices under subclass 16 relating to means for tightening the bundling or
    clamping straps or bands.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for tightener fasteners for driving-belts.

    68+,    for strap-tightener fasteners, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    54,     Harness, subclass 27 for hame fasteners with a lever.

    100,    Presses, subclass 212 for pressing devices not elsewhere provided
    for, which are supported from the ground or from a material penetrating
    element and in which the material is pressed within a bendable filament,
    strand or band by contracting it around the material. See the reference to
    Class 24 in the class definition of Class 100 for a statement of the line
    between the classes.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 273+ for closure fasteners for bottles
    and jars.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses 94+ for barrel hoops with tighteners
    permanently a part thereof.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 320+ for similar fasteners for metallic
    receptacle closures.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 199+ for portable implements or apparatus used to tension
    flexible material (e.g., package ties) from which the implement or
    apparatus is then detached after the desired amount of tension is applied.

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses. Class 269 is the residual
    locus for patents to a device for clamping, supporting and/or holding an
    article (or articles) in position to be operated on or treated.  See notes
    thereunder for other related loci.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 365+ and 407+ for flanged pipe
    couplings comprising band clamps with means to draw pipe ends together.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, appropriate subclasses for other closure
    fasteners.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 150 for
    hand-held article carriers having an article-retaining strap and a strap
    tightener.

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclasses 87+ for nonresilient
    tires which include a tightener fastener.

    410,    Freight Accommodation on Freight Carrier, for a tightener used with
    means (e.g., wraparound means) lashing a load unit to a freight carrier,
    the following subclasses being particularly relevant:

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38+,    in which the load unit is a group of articles;

    100,    in which the load unit is indiscriminate freight and the lashing
    means is a wraparound;

    103,    for a lashing subcombination to an anchor which, in this subclass,
    includes a tightener.

    See, too, subclass 12 for lashing means, including a tightener for securing
    a four-wheel vehicle to the freight carrier on which it is shipped.


CLS 24/20
TXT Devices under subclass 16 in which the tie is a metallic band, and the
    connection is made by means of some integral part of the band, either by
    bending, cutting, or forming up a portion of the same.  Devices are also
    included where the invention is the band itself.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 212 for pressing devices not elsewhere provided
    for, which are supported from the ground or from a material penetrating
    element and in which the material is pressed within a bendable filament,
    strand or band by contracting it around the material. See the reference to
    Class 24 in the class definition of Class 100 for a statement of the line
    between the classes.


CLS 24/21
TXT Devices under subclass 20 where the metal band is connected by means of a
    separate part or parts.


CLS 24/22
TXT Devices under subclass 21 where the separate connection is made of one
    piece.


CLS 24/23
TXT Devices under subclass 22 where the connection is made of sheet metal.


CLS 24/24
TXT Devices under subclass 21 where the connecting parts are pivoted together.


CLS 24/25
TXT Devices under subclass 21 where wedges or rolls are used to clamp the band
    in the connection.


CLS 24/26
TXT Devices under subclass 21 where the connection is made of wire.


CLS 24/27
TXT Devices under subclass 16 composed of wire, having the ends so made or
    formed as to be capable of fastening without other parts.


CLS 24/28
TXT Devices under subclass 27 where the wire tie is fastened by means of a
    separate connection.


CLS 24/29
TXT Devices under subclass 28 where the separate connection is also of wire.


CLS 24/30
TXT Devices under subclass 16 where the tie is made of wood and is usually used
    as a barrel-hoop.  Some are made with a separate metallic connecting part.


CLS 24/30.5
TXT Devices under the class definition fastening around the neck of a bag for
    holding the same closed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 42+ for a fastener combined with a bag.


CLS 24/31
TXT Devices under the class definition specially adapted for connecting
    together the ends of driving-belts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123+,   for couplings or fasteners for round belts or ropes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 218 and 253+ for belt connectors in combination with power
    transmission belts to form an endless loop by connecting opposite ends of a
    band.


CLS 24/32
TXT Devices under subclass 31 where the additional function permits adjustment
    at any time when the belt is too loose or too tight.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclass 1.5 for devices wherein initial
    stretch is taken out of the belt.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 199 for portable implements or apparatus used to tension flexible
    material from which the implement or apparatus is then detached after the
    desired amount of tension is applied.


CLS 24/33
TXT Devices under subclass 31 hinged so as to facilitate its passage over a
    pulley.


CLS 24/34
TXT Devices under subclass 31 for lacing belts by means of flexible laces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for wire lacing.

    712+,   for a laced-fastener*.


CLS 24/35
TXT Belt-fasteners under subclass 31 which are made of a single integral piece
    for the entire connection or joint.


CLS 24/36
TXT Devices under subclass 35 including one- piece connections in which prongs
    are passed through the belt and are then bent or turned over to complete
    the fastening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for rivet-fastenings.

    94+,    for deflecting-prong button fastenings.


CLS 24/37
TXT Devices under subclass 31 fastened to the belt ends by screws.


CLS 24/38
TXT Devices under subclass 31 where the belt ends are cut in various ways and
    spliced together to make the connection.


CLS 24/39
TXT Devices under subclass 31 made of wire. This subclass includes wire-lacing
    devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123,    for round belts or driving-ropes.

    712+,   for a laced fastener*.


CLS 24/40
TXT Devices under the class definition for drawing a button into engagement
    with a buttonhole, used principally on gloves shoes, corsets, collars, and
    cuffs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 79+ for toilet kits which may include a shoe
    buttoner combined with other toilet devices.


CLS 24/41.1
TXT CUFF HOLDER:

    Device under the class definition specially adapted for the purpose of
    holding a separate wrist encircling cuff to a sleeve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97+     and 102+, for cuff links which close a wrist encircling cuff.

    455+,   for clasps.

    572+,   for separable fasteners.


CLS 24/42
TXT Cuff-holders under subclass 41.1 in which adjustment of the cuff is
    obtained by means of a special provision in the device.


CLS 24/43
TXT Devices under subclass 41.1 having a clasp to grip a sleeve and a button to
    engage the cuff.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    342.1,  for other clasp-button fasteners.


CLS 24/44
TXT Cuff holders under subclass 41.1 having a clasp for the cuff and a clasp
    for a sleeve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS

    335,    for other clasp-clasp fasteners.


CLS 24/45
TXT Cuff holders under subclass 41.1 having a clasp for a sleeve and a hook to
    engage the buttonhole of the cuff.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    343+,   for other clasp-hook fasteners.


CLS 24/46
TXT Cuff holders under subclass 41.1 having a clasp at one end of the same and
    a pin-fastening at the other end.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    351+,   for other clasp-pin fasteners.


CLS 24/47
TXT Devices under subclass 41.1 comprising a pin-fastening for a sleeve and a
    button for the cuff.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305,    for other combined fasteners.


CLS 24/48
TXT Cuff holders under subclass 41.1 having a pin-fastening at one end and any
    form of attachment at the other end.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for clasp-pin cuff holders.

    47,     for pin-button cuff holders.

    356+    and 706+, for other pin fasteners.


CLS 24/49.1
TXT NECKTIE FASTENER:

    Device under the class definition specially adapted for properly holding a
    necktie on a garment for the upper part of the body.

    (1)     Note.  Devices for engaging the fabric of the necktie band itself
    are included.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 145 and 156 for any device, even in combination
    with a fastener, which is necessary or requisite in the formation of the
    tie, and subclass 157 for devices which consist of a tip on the band and
    designed to lock in some part of the necktie after having been adjusted.


CLS 24/50
TXT Devices under subclass 49.1 specially adapted for fastening the band of a
    necktie, either to prevent the same from riding up on the collar or for the
    purpose of connecting the ends of the bands together.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 157, for special forms of band-tips used in
    connection with a device on the necktie itself for fastening the same.


CLS 24/51
TXT Devices under subclass 50 to hold the band after being drawn up to its
    proper position about the collar.


CLS 24/52
TXT Devices under subclass 50 comprising a clasp for gripping the band.


CLS 24/53
TXT Devices under subclass 50 which are specially designed to prevent the
    necktie band from riding up over the collar.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for collar buttons with a necktie clasp.


CLS 24/54
TXT Devices under subclass 53 including a means of a connection with the
    collar-button.


CLS 24/55
TXT Devices under subclass 53 including pin or spur attached devices.


CLS 24/56
TXT Devices under subclass 49.1 attached to the necktie proper and adapted for
    engaging the collar-button.


CLS 24/57
TXT Devices under subclass 56 including means for adjusting the position of the
    necktie.


CLS 24/58
TXT Devices under subclass 56 comprising a cord loop engaging the collar-button.


CLS 24/59
TXT Devices under subclass 56 wherein the button engagement is obtained with
    the aid of pivoted or sliding jaws.


CLS 24/60
TXT Devices under subclass 56 which have some form of pin-fastening to engage
    the necktie.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for those devices which include mere wire attachment or those in
    which the prongs are bent over to permanently fasten the device.


CLS 24/61
TXT Necktie-fastener under subclass 49.1 combined with a collar-button.


CLS 24/62
TXT Devices under subclass 61 including a clasp attached to the collar-button
    to hold the necktie.


CLS 24/63
TXT Devices under subclass 61 including a pin-fastener attached to the
    collar-button for holding the necktie in place.


CLS 24/64
TXT Devices under subclass 61 in which some form of separable fastener is used
    to connect the collar button to the necktie attachment.


CLS 24/65
TXT Necktie-fasteners under subclass 49.1 which consist of a hook which engages
    over the collar or neckband.


CLS 24/66.1
TXT Magnetic, adhesive, or snap type fastener connects tie to shirt:

    Device under subclass 49.1 in which the necktie holder comprises component
    elements including (a) magnetic attraction, (b) adhesive or glue type
    material, or (c) at least two interlocking type elements which includes an
    element for attachment to a garment.


CLS 24/66.11
TXT Ornamental:

    Device under subclass 49.1 in which the necktie holder comprises a
    component designed for a pleasing and attractive appearance.


CLS 24/66.12
TXT Key shaped:

    Device under subclass 66.11 in which the ornamental component has a shape
    of an implement to open a lock.


CLS 24/66.13
TXT Resilient clasp:

    Device under subclass 49.1 in which the necktie holder comprises elastic
    gripping members biased together by their own resilience.


CLS 24/66.2
TXT Tie engaging loop with shirt engaging fastener:

    Device under subclass 49.1 in which the necktie holder comprises a portion
    that loosely surrounds the necktie and another portion which attaches to a
    garment.


CLS 24/66.3
TXT Tie knot engaging and collar attaching:

    Device under subclass 49.1 in which the necktie holder comprises a portion
    secured to the knot of a necktie interlaced part and another portion
    attached to the neckline part of a garment.


CLS 24/66.4
TXT Tie clip and shirt clasp attaching:

    Device under subclass 49.1 in which the necktie holder comprises a necktie
    gripping portion and a catch portion for securement to a garment.


CLS 24/66.5
TXT Tie clip and fastening pin:

    Device under subclass 49.1 in which the necktie holder comprises a necktie
    gripping portion and a garment penetrating member.


CLS 24/66.6
TXT Tie pin with shirt fastener:

    Device under subclass 49.1 in which the necktie holder comprises a necktie
    penetrating member portion and another portion to grip a garment.


CLS 24/66.7
TXT Tie stiffener with shirt fastener:

    Device under subclass 49.1 in which the necktie holder comprises a stiff
    portion for straightening a necktie and a portion to grip a garment.


CLS 24/66.8
TXT With pivotal jaws having spring means:

    Device under subclass 49.1 in which the necktie holder comprises at least
    one pair of gripping members hingedly secured to each other upon an axis
    and a distinct means for resiliently biasing the two members into a
    clamping position.


CLS 24/66.9
TXT Slider:

    Device under subclass 49.1 in which the necktie holder comprises a
    generally tubular shaped portion which is configured to surround the
    necktie.


CLS 24/67
TXT Device under the class definition including means to clamp or adhere a
    sheet-like body to a base or to a second sheet-like body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    455+,   for clasps*, clips* or support-clamps*.

    706+,   for paper pin-fasteners.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 530+ for a hinge
    mounted display item (e.g., sheet, etc.), subclasses 388+, for a
    hinge-mounted file item.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, appropriate subclasses for built-up open
    structures (e.g., racks, frames, etc.), including sheet holding means.

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, subclasses 27+ for a severing
    device of this class in combination with clamp holding means for securing a
    pad, a book or a stack of individual sheets, which sheets are severed
    (e.g., ripped, torn, broken, etc.), by manually forcing a portion of the
    sheet against a fixed edge of the severing device.

    281,    Books, Strips, and Leaves, subclasses 45+ for a book or leaf holder
    of that class.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, appropriate subclasses for a cabin of
    that class including sheet holding means (e.g., clamp, follower, etc.),
    disposed therein.  (See especially subclasses 183+).

    402,    Binder Device Releasably Engaging Aperture or Notch of Sheet,
    appropriate subclasses, for a device including a sheet retainer which
    passes through a sheet opening and releasably secures such sheet.


CLS 24/67.1
TXT Device under subclass 67 wherein the clamping action of the clamp means is
    accomplished by means in the form of (1) a series of discreat recesses or
    (2) a continuous helical groove.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    402,    Binder Device Releasably Engaging Aperture or Notch of Sheet,
    subclasses 46+ for sheet retainers which may include notched or threaded
    securing means.


CLS 24/67.11
TXT Device under subclass 67.9 wherein the clamp means is mounted on a base
    which base underlies a portion of the sheet.


CLS 24/67.3
TXT Device under subclass 67 wherein the clamping action of the clamp means is
    accomplished by spring-like elastic means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     for a fastener of a readily deformable material which is bent to
    engage and secure the paper.

    67.1,   for a resiliently biased fastener including a screw-threaded or
    notched securing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    402,    Binder Device Releasably Engaging Aperture or Notch of Sheet,
    subclasses 70+ for a similar device wherein that portion of the fastener
    engaging the sheet includes means (e.g., teeth, etc.), which penetrate the
    sheet.


CLS 24/67.5
TXT Device under subclass 67.3 provided with manipulating means (e.g., handle)
    operable to disengage or engage the clamp means.


CLS 24/67.7
TXT Device under subclass 67.5 wherein the means to manipulate the clamp means
    open is rotatably mounted on one or more discrete hinge pins.


CLS 24/67.9
TXT Device under subclass 67.3 wherein the paper clamp means is a unitary body.


CLS 24/68
TXT Devices under the class definition usually used in place of buckles on
    shoes, gloves, corsets, belts, etc.  The distinction from other forms of
    fastenings lies in the drawing-up or strap-tightening feature of the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for strap tighteners.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclasses 64+ for this device with
    detachable antislipping means for shoes, boots, etc.

    54,     Harness, subclass 27 for this device in combination with a harness
    hame.

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclasses 241+ for tighteners in
    combination with resilient tire antiskid devices.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 199+ for portable implements or apparatus used to tension
    flexible material (e.g., straps) from which the implement or apparatus is
    then detached after the desired amount of tension is applied.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclass 246 for bolts in the form of swinging
    loops, bails or open links.


CLS 24/69
TXT Devices under subclass 68 comprising levers, usually pivoted, which pass
    through a loop and are turned down, the parts being drawn together by this
    movement.


CLS 24/70
TXT Devices under subclass 69 adjustable by means of a step-by-step movement.


CLS 24/71
TXT Devices under subclass 68 wherein a lever and a strap are permanently
    connected together.


CLS 24/71.1
TXT Devices under subclass 68 adapted to be attached to a wire or other line at
    a point in its length and to take up slack, remaining a permanent part of
    the line. Combinations of said device with tools for use particularly
    therewith are here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115+,   for mere cord and rope adjusters not having a drawing up or
    tightening feature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 119.15, for midline tighteners combined
    with clothesline props.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 388.1+ for a reeling
    device adapted to grip a midportion of an elongated material which may
    include a midline tightener.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 69+ for midline tighteners in the form
    of mere spring devices.


CLS 24/72.1
TXT TROUSER GUARDS, CLIPS, STRAPS (E.G., ABOVE SHOETOPS):

    Device under the class definition specially adapted for binding or holding
    to the lower leg of the user the lowest portion of a garment that extends
    from the waist to the shoetops.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    530+,   for circular resilient clasps*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 47, 222, and 232 for the combination of a
    fastener and a garment.

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclasses 56 and 70 for the
    combination of  a device and boots, shoes, etc.


CLS 24/72.5
TXT Devices under the class definition specially adapted for holding bedclothes
    in position.

    (1)     Note.   See the search notes to this subclass located under
    subclass 455 for the classification line maintained between this subclass
    and subclasses 455+ during the reclassification of the clasp*, clip*, or
    support-clamp* art. No attempt was made to transfer patents not conforming
    to this line from the bedclothes holder subclass to the clasp*, clip*, or
    support-clamp* subclasses during the reclassification of the clasp*, clip*,
    or support-clamp* art.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 494 and 498 for devices accessory to a bed for
    holding bedclothes in close position over the sleeper or for holding such
    clothes closely to the bed when up-ended.


CLS 24/72.7
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising nongripping type fasteners
    for use with frames or other apparatus in the stretching of a fabric, hide,
    or other sheet material, having (1) a leading end (e.g., a rigid arm or
    flexible strand) adapted to pass through an opening in the material sheet,
    and (2) a trailing end (the cross-bar of the T) which trailing end is too
    large to pass through the opening so that when the leading end is
    tensioned, the cross-bar exerts a pull on the sheet material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.1,   for cuff holders.

    67,     for paper fasteners.

    90.1+,  especially subclass 102 for buttons.

    115+,   for cord and rope holders.

    230.5,  for hooks.

    265,    for strap-end-attaching devices.

    435,    for an independent, headed, aperture-pass-through fastener.

    573+,   for a three part separable-fas-   tener*

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 4+ for stretching type carpet
    fasteners.

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclasses 102+ for textile sheet
    stretching and spreading apparatus; e.g., subclasses 102.1+, for a
    stretching frame.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclass 1.5 for leather, canvas or other
    belt stretching apparatus and subclasses 19.1+ for a skin or hide stretcher.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 33 for coating apparatus combined with
    stretching means.

    140,    Wireworking, subclasses 108+ for wire fabric stretching apparatus
    and subclasses 123.5+ for wire stretching implements.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 328+
    for means to engage opposite edges of a fabric panel to mount and stretch
    the same, and subclasses 372+ and 378 for fabric panels mounted in frames
    having fabric stretching features.


CLS 24/89
TXT Devices under the class definition provided with button-engaging parts and
    also with a pin-fastening, the pin-fastening being designed to be used when
    the other fastening gives out for any reason.


CLS 24/90.1
TXT BUTTON WITH FASTENER:

    Device under the class definition comprising a disk-shaped body  and the
    various means for attaching the body onto a supporting substrate (e.g., a
    garment).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111,    for buttons with separate thread bars.

    SEARCH CLASS:

     40,    Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 315 for a button
    carrying indicia.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous articles, subclasses 3+ for
    ornamental features on buttons.


CLS 24/90.5
TXT Buttons under subclass 90.1 having devices additional to the conventional
    parts of a button for guarding against unbuttoning and devices peculiar to
    that use.


CLS 24/91
TXT Buttons under subclass 90.1 usually used as collar-buttons in which there
    is some means for adjusting the button.


CLS 24/92
TXT A button under subclass 90.1 having a shank made of cloth for use in
    attaching the button.  Also includes buttons covered with cloth.


CLS 24/93
TXT Devices under subclass 90.1 in which several buttons are fastened on by
    means of a common fastener.


CLS 24/94
TXT Devices under subclass 90.1 having fasteners in which metal prongs or
    rivets are bent over or upset in attaching the button.


CLS 24/95
TXT Devices under subclass 94 provided with a part which deflects the prongs by
    contact and pressure thus doing away with riveting tools.


CLS 24/96
TXT Devices under subclass 94 where the prongs or rivets are a part of the
    button or are firmly attached and are pushed through the material, being
    clenched on the opposite side.  Those using washers are also included if
    they have no part in deflecting the prongs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146,    for hook-stud lacing devices.


CLS 24/97
TXT Devices under subclass 90.1 where the button is of the type in which
    movable leaves permit the easy insertion of the button in the buttonhole,
    after which the leaves prevent the withdrawal of the button.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    609+,   for separable-fastener* projection having pivotally connected
    components.


CLS 24/98
TXT Devices under subclass 97 where the leaves swing about the axis of the
    button.


CLS 24/99
TXT Devices under subclass 97 having two hinged leaves.  It does not include
    those in which there is one hinged leaf and one rigid leaf, these being
    found in subclass 97.


CLS 24/100
TXT Devices under subclass 97 where there is a sliding movement of the leaf.
    It includes those in which there is a combined pivoted and sliding movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100.5,  for sliding bar type buttons and fasteners.


CLS 24/100.5
TXT Buttons under subclass 90.1 having a transversely sliding member which is
    retracted for the purpose of removing the button.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    for sliding hinged leaf type.


CLS 24/101
TXT Buttons under subclass 90.1 of the collar or cuff button type which are
    either made of one piece or are so built up as to be a rigid button when
    complete, and thus equivalent to an integral button.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90.1,   for other one-piece buttons, such as those which are to be sewed
    on. for button pads.

    713.9+, for a hook shaped lace directing means.


CLS 24/102
TXT Buttons under subclass 90.1 with two heads, adapted for use on cuffs,
    mattress tufting, and similar uses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 408 and 696, for tufted mattresses and cushions.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 91+ for upholstery making.


CLS 24/103
TXT Buttons, badges, etc., under subclass 90.1 which are attached to the
    garment by means of a pin, provide the invention lies in the pin fastening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     for collar button type.


CLS 24/104
TXT Buttons under subclass 90.1 of the type in which two parts are adapted to
    be joined together or separated at will.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for separable fasteners in necktie-collar button combinations.

    572+,   for other separable fasteners.


CLS 24/105
TXT Devices under subclass 104 where one part is screwed into another part.


CLS 24/106
TXT Devices under subclass 104 where the two parts are sprung together.


CLS 24/107
TXT Devices under subclass 106 which have resilient or spring heads and rigid
    sockets.


CLS 24/108
TXT Devices under subclass 106 where the socket member contains the resilient
    part.


CLS 24/109
TXT Devices under subclass 106 where the head is rotated to connect or
    disconnect the two members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    590+,   for head and socket type fasteners with rotating head.


CLS 24/110
TXT Devices under subclass 106 where the two parts are sprung together, and
    there is some independent device which must be operated to release the
    parts.


CLS 24/111
TXT Devices under subclass 90.1 where the thread-bar is a separate piece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90.1+,  for integral and other thread-bars.


CLS 24/112
TXT Devices under subclass 90.1 where the engaging part is a spiral which is
    screwed into the buttonhole.


CLS 24/113
TXT Devices under subclass 90.1 relating to the cover of the button or in the
    mode of applying the same.  Usually the idea is to permit the use of
    various covers as occasion arises.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 315 for devices to be
    applied to buttons carrying indicia such as conductor, motorman, etc.

    63,     Jewelry, subclasses 26+ for devices for attaching stones or like
    ornaments, even though to a button, and the devices are not peculiar to
    buttons.


CLS 24/114
TXT Devices under subclass 90.1 with protecting-pads so attached to the buttons
    that metallic contact with the skin is prevented.


CLS 24/114.05
TXT Button with shank for friction grip fastener:

    Device under subclass 90.1 in which the disk-shaped body comprises a shaft
    portion, extending from a rear face of the body, adapted to be securely
    inserted into a receiving hole of a dissociable mating member.


CLS 24/114.1
TXT Flexible button:

    Device under subclass 90.1 in which the disk-shaped body is made of an
    elastic material to permit the body to flex so as to pass through a
    buttonhole.


CLS 24/114.11
TXT For cuff or collar:

    Device under subclass 90.1 in which the disk-shaped body is designed to
    secure either a wrist encircling portion or a neck encircling band of a
    shirt.


CLS 24/114.12
TXT Fabric embracing:

    Device under subclass 90.1 in which the disk-shaped body is covered with a
    piece of cloth.


CLS 24/114.2
TXT Swivel button:

    Device under subclass 90.1 in which the disk-shaped body comprises a
    peripheral portion which can be freely revolved on a central supporting
    structure when attached to the garment.


CLS 24/114.3
TXT Tufting type:

    Device under subclass 90.1 in which the disk-shaped body is for upholstery.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclass 696 for an uphostered mattress or cushion which has
    tufting.


CLS 24/114.4
TXT Button with cavity for friction grip fastener:

    Device under subclass 90.1 wherein the disk-shaped body contains a bore,
    indentation, or slot into which a complementary portion of the attaching
    means is placed for securement.


CLS 24/114.5
TXT Devices under the class definition forming a part of or in the nature of an
    attachment to strap, chain, cable, pipe or the like, constituting an
    enlargement thereof and designed for use as a trip or obstacle to the free
    passage of said strap, chain, cable or pipe through other members.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclass 93 for chain
    attachments.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, particularly subclass 422 for a
    clasp (e.g., a well slip assembly) which separately travels with an earth
    boring shaft or which cooperates with specifically shaped well structure
    which stops or actuates the clasp.


CLS 24/114.6
TXT Heat or adhesive secured type:

    Device under subclass 90.1 in which the disk-shaped body is attached by
    means of either (a) a thermally fusible material, or (b) an adhesive or
    glue type material.


CLS 24/114.7
TXT Thread or wire through apertured button:

    Device under subclass 90.1 in which the disk-shaped body is attached by
    means of a filament type material through holes in the body.


CLS 24/114.8
TXT Eye shank type button:

    Device under subclass 90.1 in which the disk-shaped body comprises a shaft
    portion extending from a rear face of the body and turning into a loop to
    receive the attachment means.


CLS 24/114.9
TXT Ornamental type:

    Device under subclass 90.1 in which the disk-shaped body is designed for a
    pleasing and attractive appearance.


CLS 24/115
TXT Devices under the class definition for gripping and holding cord, rope,
    wire, and, in some cases, chain, when the device is analogous.  Devices for
    holding or gripping the end of a strap or band, but which are not properly
    buckles, have been placed in Rope-holders.  These devices are usually as
    well adapted for rope as for bands and are more commonly used as
    hitching-strap holders.

    (1)     Note.  See the search notes to this subclass located under
    subclasses 455 and 572, respectively, for the classification lines
    maintained between this subclass (and its indented subclasses) and
    subclasses 455+ and 572+ during the reclassification of the clasp* and
    separable-fastener* art.  No attempt was made to transfer patents not
    conforming to these lines from the cord and rope holder subclasses to the
    clasp* or separable-fastener* subclasses during the reclassification of the
    clasp* and separable-fastener* art.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for packet holders.

    455+,   for a cord or rope engaging fastener which is a component of a
    clasp* and holds one portion of a cord or rope relative to another portion
    of a cord or rope where the cord or rope is utilized as an encircling
    griping surface and does not have another principal function (i.e., it is
    not the structure-to-be-secured* since it lacks principle utility outside
    this class).

    572+,   for a separable-fastener component* located on the end of a cord or
    rope which does not utilize any of the characteristics of the cord or rope
    in the fastening operation (i.e., its ability to bend) and for cord or rope
    engaging structure which is a component of a separable-fastener* wherein
    the cord or rope has no other disclosed utility other than use in a
    separable-fastener* (i.e., it is not a structure-to-be-secured* since it
    lacks principle utility outside this class).

    712.1+, for a device for holding a drawn portion of lacing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 202+ for devices for anchoring
    the ends of sash cords.

    104,    Railways, subclasses 202+ for cable-grippers analogous in some
    respects to cord and rope holders.

    114,    Ships, subclasses 199, 218 for devices analogous to cord and rope
    holders, but specially adapted for ship use.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 5+ for a strand
    engaging device with torso harness.

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 65.1+ for strand brakes for those devices in
    which a pulley by its peculiar construction acts as the rope grip and also
    those in which a clamping part cooperates with a pulley to grip the rope,
    but where a mere guide bar or pulley is included as an independent element
    or where any form of pivoted cam is found it is not considered to be a
    pulley, and the patents are classified in this subclass.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 119.01+ for rope holders combined with
    flexible clotheslines trained between isolated supports.

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclasses 106+ for rope-holders which coact
    with a button or the like on the rope, and 110+ for devices which grip the
    rope to hold it.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 47.5, 388.1+,  and
    398+ for a reeling device of general use and subclass 125 for a device for
    holding a thread.

    248,    Supports, subclass 32 for cord retainers for suspended pictures,
    subclasses 49+ for pipe or cable clamps combined with their supports or
    limited by structure to use for supporting a pipe or cable and subclass 353
    for rope holders combined with clothesline props.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 4+ for similar structures in
    tube compressors for controlling fluid flow.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 408 for cable guides designed to grip the cable between the pulley
    and its support.

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses. Class 269 is the residual
    locus for patents to a device for clamping, supporting and/or holding an
    article (or articles) in position to be operated on or treated.  See notes
    thereunder for other related loci.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 71+ for a bag closure or cord.

    410,    Freight Accommodation on Freight Carrier, subclasses 101+ for an
    anchor to secure an end of a load lashing member to a freight carrying
    vehicle so that the remainder of the member may be used to lash a freight
    load unit to the vehicle.


CLS 24/116
TXT Devices under subclass 115 similar to cord-holders but in which a chain is
    held instead of a cord.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclass 93 for various
    devices attached at or intermediate the ends of the chain and becoming a
    part of and being used in connection with the chain, and see the notes
    thereto.


CLS 24/122.3
TXT Devices under subclass 115 specially designed for gripping or holding a
    sheathed strand, i.e., a cord, rope or other flexible strand which is
    enclosed in a tubular covering therefor.

    (1)     Note.  The term "covering" as herein used, includes, for example,
    coatings of fibrous, plastic, or other material, and also armors or sheaths
    formed of wires concentrically arranged about a central core-strand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122.6,  for cord or rope holders specialized for gripping or holding
    plural-strand cords or ropes other than those of the armored or central
    core type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 74 to 94 for
    connector and terminal devices for armored sheathed, or insulated
    electrical conductors.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for electrical
    connectors, per se,  having  in many instances structure similar to that
    provided for in Class 24 and often specially designed to grip or hold a
    sheathed conductive strand, cable, or wire; and see the class definition of
    that class (439), section IV for the line between Classes 24 and 439.


CLS 24/122.6
TXT Devices under subclass 115 specialized for gripping or holding cords or
    ropes which are formed from a plurality of strands twisted together or
    otherwise assembled into a unitary structure.  These devices are
    characterized by having a structure or mode of operation (a) which requires
    or causes the separation (as by untwisting, bending back, etc.) of the
    individual strands of the cord, rope, or cable, or (b) in which individual
    strands of a cord, rope, or cable are separately gripped or held.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122.3,  for similar devices when some of the strands of the cord, rope, or
    cable are arranged to form an armor or covering for a central core.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 74 to 90 for
    connectors and terminal devices for plural-strand electrical conductors.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for electrical
    connectors, per se,  having  in many instances structure similar to that
    provided for in Class 24 and often specially designed to grip or hold a
    plural-strand conductive cable, or wire, and see the class definition of
    that class (439), section IV for the line between Classes 24 and 439.


CLS 24/127
TXT Devices under subclass 115 wherein the cord or rope is wound around a
    central portion and is held by a disk, which frictionally engages the cord.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    712.9,  for a device which holds a drawn portion of lacing by either
    winding it about or wedging it in the device.


CLS 24/128
TXT Devices under subclass 115 wherein the cord is knotted at suitable points
    and the holding device is designed to make use of the knots to hold the
    cord after tightening.


CLS 24/129
TXT Devices under subclass 115 in which only one integral piece is used.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 174 and 175 for
    similar electrical cord holders.

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 65.1+ for strand-type brakes having similar
    holders.


CLS 24/130
TXT Devices under subclass 129 wherein a V-shaped slot catches the cord or rope
    when properly positioned.


CLS 24/131
TXT Devices under subclass 129 made of wire.


CLS 24/132
TXT Devices under subclass 115 wherein a pivoted part enters into the
    construction of the rope-gripping device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    712.6,  for a device having a pivoted part for engaging and holding a drawn
    portion of lacing.


CLS 24/133
TXT Devices under subclass 132 wherein an extra lever or arm projects from this
    device, and the rope passing over the same by its tension forces the
    pivoted part into closer engagement with the rope.


CLS 24/134
TXT Devices under subclass 132 wherein the pivoted part is so constructed that
    tension on the rope pulls the pivoted part more tightly into the rope, the
    pivoted part being either cam-shaped or equivalent thereto in its action.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclass 65.1 for similar structure in brake combinations.


CLS 24/135
TXT Devices under subclass 115 wherein the gripping is caused by turning a
    screw or bolt either in a nut or a part of the device itself.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    for screw clamp couplings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 169+ for
    insulators with similar structure.

    188,    Brakes, subclass 65.1 for similar structure in brake combinations.

    439,    Electrical Connectors subclasses 778+, 781+, 784, 785, 791+, 797+,
    and 801+ for an uninsulated electrical connector having a screw-threaded
    operated securing part.


CLS 24/136
TXT Devices under subclass 115 wherein a sliding movement is used in clamping
    the cord.  It includes wedges which slide and like devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126,    171 and 194, for other fasteners having a sliding wedge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 65.1+ for similar structure in brake
    combinations.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclass 29 for similar
    structure in fire escape combinations.


CLS 24/163
TXT Devices under the class definition which are designed for the purpose of
    adjusting as well as holding straps, bands, and similar articles.  Some
    forms of buckles are closely related to clasps in structure, but are always
    distinguished in having provision for the band passing through the
    structure, so that it may be pulled tight for the purpose of adjustment, a
    clasp being only suitable for gripping the end or edge of the material or
    band.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16+,    for bale ties.

    115+,   for devices which resemble buckles, but are more closely related to
    cord and rope holders in structure as well as use.  The more common use of
    these devices is as hitching-strap holders.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 321+ and 333, for buckle type fastening devices
    in combination with a garment supporter.

    D2,     Apparel and Haberdashery, subclasses 405+ for designs for apparel
    buckles.


CLS 24/164
TXT Buckles under subclass 163 peculiarly adapted for use in harness
    constructions or with leather straps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    54,     Harness, subclasses 28, 50, 54+ for combined buckles and hooks, and
    subclass 74 for rein holds.


CLS 24/165
TXT Devices under subclass 164 in which a buckle and snap-hook are combined in
    the same structure, sometimes with a working connection between the
    buckle-tongue and the snap-hook closure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    54,     Harness, subclasses 51 and 55 for similar structure in harness
    combinations.


CLS 24/166
TXT Devices under subclass 164 with independent means to prevent the tongue of
    the buckle from disengaging.


CLS 24/167
TXT Devices under subclass 166 wherein the means which locks the tongue is
    operated by means of a key.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, appropriate subclasses for specific lock structure, per se.


CLS 24/168
TXT Devices under subclass 164 in which the strap is held by clamping solely,
    without any penetrating tongue or stud.


CLS 24/169
TXT Devices under subclass 168 made of a single integral part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198,    for one piece buckles.


CLS 24/170
TXT Devices under subclass 168 in which the clamping is done by a jaw attached
    to a pivoted lever usually hand-operated, but includes strap-tightened jaws.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191+,   for other pivoted lever buckles.


CLS 24/171
TXT Devices under subclass 168 in which the gripping of the strap is
    accomplished by means of a sliding part, commonly a wedge, wedge-like in
    action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25      and 194, for other fasteners having a sliding part.


CLS 24/172
TXT Devices under subclass 164 including two frames or bails, both of which
    form loops entirely inclosing the straps and so interlaced that a tension
    on the strap throws the bails into such a position as to more tightly grip
    the same.  Studs or tongues are sometimes used in connection with the
    clamping action.  This subclass contains those which depend entirely on the
    clamping action.


CLS 24/173
TXT Devices under subclass 172 including a pivoted plate with a penetrating
    stud attached to one of the frames to further assist in holding the straps.


CLS 24/174
TXT Devices under subclass 172 including a stud attached rigidly to one of the
    frames.


CLS 24/175
TXT Devices under subclass 164 having a penetrating tongue which is protected
    by some device, so as to prevent the point from engaging or catching.


CLS 24/176
TXT Devices under subclass 164 having a penetrating tongue and which the frame
    and stud are in one integral piece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186+,   for one piece buckles with a penetrating prong.


CLS 24/177
TXT Devices under subclass 164 having two or more penetrating tongues or studs.


CLS 24/178
TXT Devices under subclass 164 having a penetrating tongue pivoted to the frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188+,   for buckles with a pivoted penetrating prong.


CLS 24/179
TXT Devices under subclass 178 wherein a lever is attached to the pivoted
    tongue for withdrawing the tongue from engagement with the strap without
    first loosening the buckle.


CLS 24/180
TXT Devices under subclass 178 wherein a pivoted stud is used instead of a
    tongue, the distinction being that a stud passes vertically through the
    strap and has no support on the frame, as is the case with a tongue-buckle.


CLS 24/181
TXT Devices under subclass 164 in which the gripping of the strap is
    accomplished by means of a sliding part, usually wedge-like, and there is a
    penetrating tongue or stud to further assist in holding the strap.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194+,   for other buckles having a sliding part.


CLS 24/182
TXT Devices under subclass 164 for holding the strap end after buckling and
    means for attaching the same to a fabric, otherwise called "billet-loops".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    54,     Harness, subclasses 28 and 32 for similar structure in harness
    combinations.


CLS 24/183
TXT Devices under subclass 164 attached to buckles for preventing wear on the
    strap, being so designed that the attaching device engages with the metal
    of the buckle and not on the strap.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    54,     Harness, subclass 28 for similar structure in harness combinations.


CLS 24/184
TXT Buckles under subclass 163 which are so constructed that no metal part of
    the buckle will come in contact with the garment underneath.


CLS 24/185
TXT Buckles under subclass 163 in which a pressure-bar clamps the band and has
    at the same time a projection which guards the hook, usually used as a
    suspender-buckle.


CLS 24/186
TXT Devices under subclass 163 in which prongs are the means of holding the
    strap or band, and which are in one integral piece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176,    for one piece buckles with penetrating tongues.


CLS 24/187
TXT Devices under subclass 186 which have a hook attached.


CLS 24/188
TXT Devices under subclass 163 in which the buckle-frame and a penetrating
    prong are pivoted together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    178+,   for buckles with pivoted penetrating prongs.


CLS 24/189
TXT Devices under subclass 188 which have a suspending hook attached.


CLS 24/190
TXT Devices under subclass 163 wherein the frame and a penetrating prong part
    are adapted to slide on each other to cause engagement.


CLS 24/191
TXT Devices under subclass 163 wherein a lever pivoted to the buckle-frame
    serves as the clamping means.  It may be either hand- operated or it may
    have the band attached to it.  The gripping-jaws may be toothed or smooth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78      and 170, for other pivoted lever buckles.


CLS 24/192
TXT Devices under subclass 191 which have suspending hooks.


CLS 24/193
TXT A pivoted-lever buckle under subclass 191 in which a looped-strap-clamping
    device is used.


CLS 24/194
TXT Buckles under subclass 163 which have a sliding part which serves to clamp
    the fabric either wedge-like or by pressing a toothed jaw into the same.
    Includes devices in which a separate part engages the two jaws and is moved
    back and forth to operate the same.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171     and 181, for similar structure in harness buckles.


CLS 24/195
TXT Devices under subclass 194 with a suspending-hook attached.


CLS 24/196
TXT Devices under subclass 194 wherein the sliding part passes through a looped
    strap and is drawn down to clamp the fabric.


CLS 24/197
TXT Devices under subclass 163 wherein the clamping of the strap or band is
    accomplished by means of looping or doubling the band on itself, the two
    portions of the band being pressed into contact in such a manner as to grip
    and hold.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193,    196 and 200, for other "looped strap" buckles.


CLS 24/198
TXT Buckles under subclass 163 composed of one piece of metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169,    176 and 186, for other one piece buckles.


CLS 24/199
TXT Devices under subclass 198 wherein a supporting-hook is an integral part of
    the buckle.


CLS 24/200
TXT Devices under subclass 198 wherein the band is held by means of looping or
    doubling the band.


CLS 24/265
TXT Devices under the class definition for attaching the strap or band to
    buckles, clasps, snap-hooks, and like articles, including permanent
    attaching means, and also those temporary attachments which are not
    properly buckles or any other recognized form of fastening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.5,    for gun band type devices combined with strap-end-attaching devices.

    715.4+, for means to cover the tip of lacing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 108+ for ferrules, rings and
    thimbles.


CLS 24/267
TXT Devices under the class definition which consist of two parts or jaws
    pivoted at one end and having some means for locking the jaws when in a
    closed position.  They are commonly used on gloves, shoes, and
    dress-plackets and take the place of other fastenings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 218 for similar structure in placket closures.


CLS 24/268
TXT Devices under subclass 19 wherein the tightener comprises a wedge.


CLS 24/269
TXT Devices under subclass 19 wherein the tightening is accomplished by winding
    a portion of the strap on winder means, which remains with the tie.


CLS 24/270
TXT Devices under subclass 19 which include a tightening means, usually a
    lever, that is self-locking either by dead center or snap action.


CLS 24/271
TXT Devices under subclass 270 with means providing for variations in the
    circumference of the objects to be clamped.


CLS 24/272
TXT Devices under subclass 271 in which the fastener connection includes a rack
    bar and means coacting therewith.


CLS 24/273
TXT Devices under subclass 19 in which the tightening is accomplished by lever
    means and may include separate lever locking means to retain the lever in
    tightening position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270,    for similar devices with self-locking lever means having auxiliary
    locking devices.


CLS 24/274
TXT Devices under subclass 19 wherein worm gear means on the tightener co-acts
    with a strap portion provided with teeth.


CLS 24/275
TXT Devices under subclass 19 in which a means on the fastener portion engages
    a thread on the integral free end portion of the strap or band.


CLS 24/276
TXT Devices under subclass 275 wherein the thread is on the external surface of
    the strap or band.


CLS 24/277
TXT Devices under subclass 276 in which the free ends of the strap are threaded.


CLS 24/278
TXT Devices under subclass 19 in which a radial screw, with respect to the axis
    of the strap or band, engages means to effect tightening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    275+,   for screws on the integral free end portions of the straps.


CLS 24/279
TXT Devices under subclass 19 in which a tangential screw, with respect to the
    axis of the strap, engages means to effect tightening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    275+,   for screws which are integral end portions of the straps.


CLS 24/280
TXT Devices under subclass 279 having girth adjustment afforded by the
    connection between the tie and the fastener.  The fastener may be wholly or
    partially separable from the tie.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284,    in which the tie itself has features which provide for girth
    adjustment.


CLS 24/281
TXT Devices under subclass 280 providing for step adjustment.


CLS 24/282
TXT Devices under subclass 281 in which the strap is of plural separable parts.


CLS 24/283
TXT Devices under subclass 279 which are constructed of wire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27+,    for ties constructed of wire where the tightening is by a separate
    tool.

    270+,   for wire ties having a dead center or snap action.


CLS 24/284
TXT Devices under subclass 279 with straps comprising separable parts and which
    may also provide adjustment of the strap solely by strap features.


CLS 24/285
TXT Devices under subclass 279 wherein the strap is comprised of pivoted parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284,    for straps of separable pivoted parts.


CLS 24/286
TXT Devices under subclass 279 which have straps modified to permit winding
    plural wraps with the ends of the strap aligned to accept the fastener
    means.


CLS 24/287
TXT FREIGHT CONTAINER TO FREIGHT CONTAINER FASTENER:

    Subject matter under the class definition drawn to fasteners specifically
    adapted for securing freight-container structures together.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 159 for portable
    segregating containers for plural cylindrical-type receptacles provided
    with a clip-type retainer between juxtaposed receptacles.

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 1.5 for freight containers provided with
    freight-container fasteners.


CLS 24/288
TXT DRUM OR CAN SPACER FASTENER:

    Subject matter under the class definition drawn to fasteners specifically
    adapted for securing containers, drums, or cans in a spaced relationship.


CLS 24/289
TXT TRIM MOLDING FASTENER:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a fastener specially
    adapted for securing a rigid or semirigid decorative strip to a rigid
    vehicle or similar body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclass 492 for snap-type fasteners
    securing a closure seal.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 466 for separate
    anchor element securing a nonsustaining bridged strip over junctures of
    panels; subclass 511 for mounting means attaching a facer to an upholstery
    structure; subclasses 718.01+ for fasteners combined with static structures
    for attaching a striplike channel or trim member to the static structures
    or for striplike channel or trim member fasteners in which the fastener is
    specifically modified in structure to mate with a specific construction or
    configuration of the Class 52 structure; and subclass 769 for a spring
    including retaining means holding a separate structure against a facer.

    293,    Vehicle Fenders, appropriate subclasses for various types of
    fasteners combined with vehicle fender structure.

    301,    Land Vehicle:  Wheels and Axles, subclasses 37.1+ for fasteners
    combined with protectors or trim members attached to land vehicles.


CLS 24/290
TXT Having externally threaded attaching means:

    Subject matter under subclass 289 provided with an elongated shank means
    provided with a continuous helical rib.


CLS 24/291
TXT And laterally extending biasing appendage:

    Subject matter under subclass 290 further provided with a resilient member
    extending laterally from and yieldingly urging a main body member of the
    fastener to move in a predetermined direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    292,    for a trim molding fastener provided with a laterally extending
    biasing appendage without bolt or screw means.


CLS 24/292
TXT Having laterally extending biasing appendage:

    Subject matter under subclass 289 provided with a resilient member
    expanding laterally from and yieldingly urging a main body member of the
    fastener to move in a predetermined direction.


CLS 24/293
TXT Resilient metal type:

    Subject matter under subclass 289 wherein the fastener is composed of
    spring metal, e.g., steel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    301,    Land Vehicle:  Wheels and Axles, subclasses 108.1+ for hubcap trim
    objects being formed from resilient metal material or hubcaps secured to
    wheeled vehicles by the use of resilient metal fasteners.


CLS 24/294
TXT Strip formed:

    Subject matter under subclass 293 wherein the fastener is formed from a
    metal strip.


CLS 24/295
TXT Sheet metal formed:

    Subject matter under subclass 293 wherein the fastener is formed from sheet
    metal.


CLS 24/296
TXT Wire formed:

    Subject matter under subclass 293 wherein the fastener is formed from a
    metallic strand element.


CLS 24/297
TXT Plastic type:

    Subject matter under subclass 289 wherein the fastener is composed of a
    substance produced by polymerization.


CLS 24/298
TXT PLURAL FASTENERS HAVING INTERMEDIATE FLACCID CONNECTOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein plural fasteners are
    attached by a connector comprising an elongated intermediate configuration
    having little resistance to longitudinally compressive or shear forces.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note of the class definition for the line between
    this and indented subclasses and Class 2, Apparel.

    (2)     Note.  To be proper in this and indented subclasses, the fasteners
    must be fastening or attaching to different structures-to-be-secured(*) or
    portions thereof and not fastening to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for bail and package ties utilizing plural fasteners and
    flaccid-type configurations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 321 for garment supporters and retainers
    utilizing plural fasteners having intermediate flaccid-type connectors; and
    subclass 323 for garment supporters and retainers consisting of
    strip-connected spaced holders or fasteners.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 98 for plural fasteners with intermediate
    flaccidly adjustable connectors for adjustably securing radiator face
    coverings to radiator configurations.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 814+ for plural fasteners having
    intermediate flaccid connectors utilized in securing and/or carrying skis.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 144+ for hand
    carriers or grippers having a flaccid receiver, support, or fastener for
    articles.


CLS 24/299
TXT Chain connector:

    Subject matter under subclass 298 wherein the connector comprises a series
    of connected links.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 271 for sleeve or leg closures utilizing chains
    as an intermediate connector.


CLS 24/300
TXT Elastic connector:

    Subject matter under subclass 298 wherein the connector is composed of a
    resilient substance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 326 for garment supporters and retainers
    consisting of plural crossed or diverging suspension strips or strands
    utilizing plural fasteners having an intermediate strap connector; subclass
    332 for plural crossed or diverging suspension strips or strands with
    running strips or strands comprising a straplike flaccid connector; and
    subclass 334 for plural crossed or diverging suspension strips or straps
    utilizing a strap as an intermediate flaccid connector having a pivot
    member normal to the strip or strap.


CLS 24/301
TXT Strap connector:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein the connector is formed of a band
    of elastic substance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for strap tighteners provided with strap intermediate connectors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 309 for garment supporters and retainers in a
    form of a strap partially encircling limb or torso; and subclass 315 for
    torso or limb encircling garment supporters and retainers provided with
    plural holding means secured together by strap connectors.


CLS 24/302
TXT Strap connector:

    Subject matter under subclass 298 wherein the connector is formed of a band
    of flaccid substance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for ball and package ties in the form of wooden straps or bands.

    68,     for straps provided with tighteners.


CLS 24/303
TXT HAVING MAGNETIC FASTENER:

    Subject matter under the class definition provided with a fastener
    including, having, or comprising material utilizing magnetism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 206.5 and 309.4 for combined diverse fasteners
    utilizing or having a magnet to be used for a bracket.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 97.1+ for fasteners
    utilized to hold or support glare screens to land vehicle bodies utilizing
    or having a magnet.

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 302+ for permanent magnet structure or material
    and subclass 219 for a magnet combined with a diverse-type art device.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 398 for illumination supports utilizing or
    having a magnet.


CLS 24/304
TXT HAVING ADHESIVE FASTENER:

    Subject matter under the class definition provided with a fastener
    comprising material utilizing molecular adhesive forces.

    (1)     Note.  The adhesive fasteners of this subclass are intended to
    provide or accomplish the desired fastening between either different
    structures-to-be-secured(*) or different portions of a
    structure-to-be-secured(*) and are not intended to mount or secure a
    separate, distinct fastener used for or accomplishing a desired fastening
    between different structures-to-be-secured(*) or portions thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 337 for combined fasteners utilizing adhesive
    means, particularly friction-type devices for supporting and retaining
    garments.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 205.3+ for brackets specially mounted or
    attached by use of adhesives.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 97.1+ for glare screens
    attached or fastened to body configurations by use of adhesives.


CLS 24/305
TXT COMBINED DIVERSE MULTIPART FASTENERS:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a combination of two
    or more diverse fasteners of this class in which the combination is
    composed of two or more elements and in which each fastener is different,
    and distinct from each other.

    (1)     Note.  For documents to be proper in this and indented subclasses,
    none of the fasteners can utilize the structure-to-be-secured(*) as a
    component in completing or performing a or its fastening function, e.g., a
    clip* using the structure-to-be-secured(*) as a mounting to secure other
    structure-to-be-secured(*) therebetween.  Similarly, plural, even if
    diverse, fasteners which simultaneously or serially fasten, or release to
    perform a fastening operation, e.g., zippers(*) or combined safety belt and
    harness buckles(*), are excluded from this and indented subclasses.  Any
    fastener either actuated by a tool, permanently altered in shape or
    deformed to perform its fastening function not in combination with a
    fastener of this class is provided for in other classes, e.g., Class 411.
    In addition, to be proper in this and indented subclasses, the fasteners
    must each be fastening to structure-to-be-secured(*); plural diverse
    fasteners merely fastening to each other are excluded herein.

    (2)     Note.  One or single piece combined fasteners are excluded from
    this and indented subclasses and are properly classified in lower portions
    of the Class 24 schedule and discretionarily cross-referenced to these
    combined fastener subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  See (1) Note under the class definition for the line between
    this and indented subclasses and Class 2, Apparel.

    (4)     Note.  For the purposes of this and associated definitions, the
    term "distinct" is taken to mean that the diverse fasteners are either
    independently operable, i.e., the operation of a first fastener does not
    directly produce the fastening function of a second fastener and similarly
    the operation of the second fastener does not produce the fastening
    operation of the first, or the fasteners are differently shaped or
    configured from each other, however small the different shape or
    configuration may be.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49.1+,  for necktie fasteners utilizing various types of combined fasteners.

    67+,    for various combined fasteners used to fasten papers.

    115+,   for various combined fasteners used to hold cords and ropes.

    390,    for a zipper(*) combined with a distinct separable-fastener(*).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclasses 50.1+ and 58 for combined
    fasteners used in closing boot and shoe uppers.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 151 for combined fasteners utilized in
    connecting parachute harness configurations.

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses for combined fasteners utilized as
    supports, particularly subclasses 317+ for various combined fasteners
    utilized as suspended supports.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, appropriate subclasses
    for combined fasteners used in releasing hoist-line or grab-type hooks.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 97.1+ for various
    combined fasteners utilized for securing or holding glare screens to land
    vehicle bodies.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 122+ for combined fasteners utilized in
    securing or holding plantlike ornaments or wreaths, particularly trees.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for combined
    fasteners used in joints and connections.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 11 for combined
    fasteners utilized in supporting or holding together various type of
    special occasion ornaments such as Christmas tree, balls, bells, or
    star-shaped objects.


CLS 24/306
TXT Combined with diverse fastener:

    Securing means under subclass 442 in combination with a diverse fastener
    proper for this class (e.g., mounting pin, clasp, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305+,   for other combined diverse multipart fasteners.


CLS 24/307
TXT Buckle:

    Subject matter under subclass 305 wherein one of the fasteners comprises a
    buckle* in the form of a securing means having two connected relatively
    movable members, wherein either one member is adapted to allow
    structure-to-be-secured(*) to pass therethrough or the members are adapted
    to allow structure-to-be-secured(*) to pass completely therebetween in a
    path generally parallel to the longitudinal axis of the members.

    (1)     Note.  Buckles* are usually designed to secure or tighten belts,
    bands, or similar articles and are generally operated by having one end of
    the belt, band, etc., fixedly secured to one end of the buckle* with
    another portion of the buckle* frictionally or resiliently securing the
    belt, band, etc., or by passing through a provided for aperture in the
    belt, band, etc.  This feature of allowing the belt, band, etc., to pass
    through the buckle* distinguishes a buckle* and a clasp*.

    (2)     Note.  One-piece buckles*, e.g., wire formed, or sheet metal
    stamped, are excluded from this subclass and are provided for in latter
    parts of the schedule.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163+,   for single buckles, per se.


CLS 24/308
TXT And buckles:

    Subject matter under subclass 307 provided with another buckle(*).

    (1)     Note.  To be proper in this subclass, the combined buckles(*) must
    be the type such that each buckle(*), if separated from the other, can
    function as a buckle(*), and each buckle(*) must be different as to
    configuration or composition; otherwise, the document is properly
    classified in subclasses 163+ and discretionarily cross-referenced to this
    and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 314 for torso or limb-encircling garment
    supporters and retainers having pendant holding means provided with plural
    buckle structures; and subclass 334 for plural crossed or diverging
    suspension strips provided with a pivot member normal to the strip
    utilizing plural buckles.


CLS 24/309
TXT Having separate material adjustment means:

    Subject matter under subclass 308 having disparate means specially adapted
    to modify the amount of structure-to-be-secured(*) being passed through or
    between the buckle(*).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 237 for plural buckles provided with adjustment
    means for waist bands in trousers or overalls; and subclass 307 for garment
    supporters or retainers utilizing plural buckles having adjustment means
    for waistline-type garments.


CLS 24/310
TXT Having separate disconnect means:

    Subject matter under subclass 308 provided with initially separate or
    movably attached means allowing the two buckles* to be relatively easily
    engaged or disengaged from each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312+,   for plural diverse buckles(*) having an integral disconnectable
    configuration.

    319,    for buckle(*) and hook fasteners having disconnectable means.

    341+,   for plural diverse clasps(*) having disconnectable means.

    358+,   for plural diverse hooks having disconnectable means.

    572+,   for separable fasteners, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 321 for torso or limb encircling garment
    supporters or retainers utilizing a belt buckle provided with a separable
    fastener.


CLS 24/311
TXT Pivotal lever type:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein the separate disconnectable means
    includes a releasing member hinged to one of the buckles* for disconnecting
    the buckles* one from the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for plural buckles provided with hinge adjustment means.

    178,    for single buckles provided with separate adjusting means in the
    form of a penetrating tongue utilized in harness configurations.

    188,    for single buckles provided with pivoted separate adjustment means
    in the form of a penetrating prong.

    191,    for single buckles provided with a separate adjusting means in the
    form of a pivoted lever.


CLS 24/312
TXT Having disconnect structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 308 provided with rigid configuration
    integral with each buckle* allowing two buckles* to be relatively easily
    engaged or disengaged from each other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 301 for garment supporters or retainers in the
    form of plural buckles having disconnect configuration; subclass 316 for
    torso or limb encircling garment supporters in the form of plural buckles
    having disconnect configuration; and subclass 317 for torso or limb
    encircling garment supporter or retainer with a member between the ends of
    a circulating strip.


CLS 24/313
TXT Resilient cooperating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 312 wherein the rigid integral configuration
    is in the form of members composed of resilient substance and which are
    adapted to mate with each other wherein their resiliency at least in part
    retains the members together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324,    for plural diverse buckles(*) provided with snap fastener for an
    attached fastener.


CLS 24/314
TXT And pin:

    Subject matter under subclass 308 provided with a wire section having a
    piercing end.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186,    for a one-piece single buckle provided with a penetrating prong.

    317,    for combined diverse plural buckle(*) fasteners having a pin.

    351+,   for combined diverse clasp(*) and pin fasteners.

    356+,   for combined diverse plural pin fasteners.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 319 for torso or limb encircling garment
    supporters and retainers in the form of a buckle structure having a pin or
    prong-type structure detachable from or slidable on a belt.


CLS 24/315
TXT Crossed belt accommodating:

    Subject matter under subclass 308 wherein the structure-to-be-secured(*)
    fastened by a first buckle* is angled with and overlaps a second
    structure-to-be-secured(*) fastened by a second buckle*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 306 for garment supporters and retainers
    supporting plural garments in spaced relationship; subclass 332 for buckles
    accommodating plural crossed or diverging strip type members; and subclass
    333 for torso or limb encircling garment supporters and retainers
    accommodating plural crossed or diverging strips having a detachable or
    movable feature between the strips.


CLS 24/316
TXT And clasp:

    Subject matter under subclass 307 provided with a fastener in the form of a
    clasp(*) which either (a) has connected gripping jaws adapted to engage
    structure-to-be-secured(*), or (b) performs a securement by over edge
    engagement of structure-to-be-secured(*).

    (1)     Note.  Clasps* are usually designed to be secured to belts, bands,
    or similar articles generally operated by having one end of the belt, band,
    etc., fixedly secured to one end of the clasp with the other hinged and
    engaging the structure-to-be-secured(*) and relies on inherent resilience
    or friction for securement.  See (1) Note under subclass 307 for the
    difference between a clasp and a buckle.

    (2)     Note.  One piece clasps*, e.g., wire-formed clips*, sheet metal V
    or J clips* are excluded from this subclass and are provided for in latter
    parts of the schedule.


CLS 24/317
TXT And pin:

    Subject matter under subclass 307 provided with a fastener comprising a
    piece of wire having a head or headlike configuration at one end and a
    penetrating point at the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    351+,   for clasp(*) and pin diverse fasteners.

    356+,   for plural diverse pin fasteners.


CLS 24/318
TXT And hook:

    Subject matter under subclass 307 provided with a fastener in the form of a
    book comprising either an elongated wire or rod section, one end of which
    is curved or sharply bent, or an element having a J-shaped configuration
    utilized as a hook.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165,    for single buckles specially adapted for use with harness
    configurations structures having combined snap hooks with the buckle.


CLS 24/319
TXT Having disconnect means:

    Subject matter under subclass 318 provided with separate means to allow the
    buckle* and hook to be relatively easily engaged or disengaged from each
    other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323+,   for plural diverse buckle(*) fasteners provided with separable
    fastening means for an attached fastener.

    341,    for plural diverse resilient clasp(*) fasteners provided with
    disconnectable means.

    358+,   for plural diverse pin fasteners provided with disconnect means.


CLS 24/320
TXT Having penetrating prong:

    Subject matter under subclass 318 provided with means formed from a sheet
    metal or metal strip section having a sharp projection stamped, cut, or
    formed thereon capable of entering into and tending to hold the
    structure-to-be-secured(*) to the buckle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    347,    for clasp(*) and hook fasteners in which a clasp(*) jaw has
    penetrating gripping structure.

    350,    for clasp(*) and penetrating prong fasteners.

    368,    for pin and penetrating prong fasteners.

    377,    for hook and penetrating prong fasteners.

    380,    for combined diverse multipart fasteners, one of which is a
    penetrating prong.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 319 for a torso or limb encircling garment
    supporter or retainer provided with a buckle hook fastener and penetrating
    prong.


CLS 24/321
TXT Buckle having plural receiving slots:
    Subject matter under subclass 318 wherein a buckle* is provided with two or
    more openings.

    (1)     Note.  Generally, the buckle(*) is adapted to receive two or more
    different structures-to-be-secured(*) or two or more portions thereof.


CLS 24/322.1
TXT Including a button fastening element:

    Subject matter under subclass 307 comprising a generally disk-shaped body
    designed to pass through and cooperate with a buttonhole or loop to produce
    securement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90.1+,  for buttons utilized as articles combined with a fastener for
    securing the article to another configuration.

    342.1,  for clasp* and button fasteners.

    367.1,  for pin and button fasteners.

    378.1,  for hook and button fasteners.

    379.1,  for combined diverse multipart fasteners, one of which is a button.


CLS 24/323
TXT And separable fastening means for attached fastener:

    Subject matter under subclass 307 wherein a buckle* is provided with
    separate disconnect means to easily disengage another fastener permanently
    attached to structure-to-be-secured(*).

    (1)     Note.  The other fastener is usually attached at or near an end of
    the structure-to-be-secured(*).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    341,    for plural resilient clasps(*) provided with disconnect means.

    358,    for plural pins provided with disconnect means.

    572+,   for separable-fasteners(*).


CLS 24/324
TXT Snap fastener:

    Subject matter under subclass 323 wherein the disconnect means is in the
    form of a circular male member having an upstanding projection formed
    thereon and a female member having a resilient complimentary socket formed
    therein receiving and retaining the male member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    614+    and 662+, for head and socket snap fasteners, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 322 for torso or limb encircling garment
    supporters provided with a buckle and separate fastening means in the form
    of a snap fastener.


CLS 24/325
TXT Having roller means:

    Subject matter under subclass 307 provided with a rotatable elongated
    cylindrical structure.


CLS 24/326
TXT Clasp:

    Subject matter under subclass 305 wherein one of the fasteners is in the
    form of a clasp* which either (a) has connected gripping jaws adapted to
    engage structure-to-be-secured(*), or (b) performs a securement by overedge
    engagement of structure-to-be-secured(*).

    (1)     Note.  Clasps* are usually designed to be secured to belts, bands,
    or similar articles generally operated by having one end of the belt, band,
    etc., fixedly secured to one end of the clasp* with the other hinged and
    engaging the structure-to-be-secured(*) and relies on inherent resilience
    or friction for securement.  See (1) Note under subclass 307 for the
    difference between a clasp* and a buckle.

    (2)     Note.  One-piece clasps*, e.g., wire formed clips*, sheet metal V
    or J clips*, are excluded from the this subclass and are provided for in
    latter parts of the schedule.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for article holders utilized to secure articles to the human body
    using a combined clasp-type fastener.

    16,     for combined clasp fasteners utilized as bail and package ties.

    455+,   for clasps, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or  Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 651+ for a check
    label or tag type of holder utilizing clasps.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 316.1+ for article holding bracket-type
    configurations in the form of clasps or clamps.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 814+ for ski holders utilizing clasps or
    clasp-like configuration.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 468+ for body restrainers such as seat
    belts and harnesses utilizing clasp as a retractable holder.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 396 for illumination supports in the form of
    a clasp, clamp, or hook-type configuration.


CLS 24/327
TXT Having pivoted members:

    Subject matter under subclass 326 wherein the clasp* is provided with two
    hinged members, the unhinged ends thereof being capable of engaging
    structure-to-be-secured(*).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135,    for cord or rope holders utilizing a screw, clamp, or clasp having
    pivoted members.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 642.02+ for a check
    label or tag holders in the form of a pivotable member clasp.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 813 for a device for restraining a cow's
    tail that utilizes a clasp having pivotable members or resilient-type
    configuration.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 229.13 and 229.23 for brackets in the nature
    of a clamp having pivotable member.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 278+ for
    watchcase holders in the form of pivotable member clasp.


CLS 24/328
TXT Cam type member:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein one of the pivoted member has a
    dimension where the members are hinged such that in one pivoted position
    the member acts with another member to engage and secure the
    structure-to-be-secured(*) and in another pivoted position the members acts
    to disengage and release the structure-to-be-secured(*).


CLS 24/329
TXT Plural clasps:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein two or more clasps(*) are
    provided.

    (1)     Note.  To be proper in this and indented subclasses, the combined
    clasp(*) must be the type that each clasp(*), if separated or separable
    from each other, could function as a clasp(*) and each clasp(*) must be
    different as to configuration or composition; otherwise the document is
    properly classified in subclasses 243+ and discretionarily cross-referenced
    to this and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for cuff holders utilizing plural clasps.

    335+,   for plural resilient clasps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, subclass 98 for plural clasp or clamp-type fastening
    means having pivotable members used in holding work.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclass 385 for plural clasp or clamp-type
    configurations utilized to secure rods or plates together; and subclass 387
    for plural clasps or clamps utilized to secure flanged or grooved rods
    together.


CLS 24/330
TXT And toggle operator:

    Subject matter under subclass 329 further provided with a second pair of
    hinged elements attached or cooperating with one or more of the clasp*
    members such that a force applied to the hinged joint of the second pair of
    elements causes the elements to straighten out and apply forces at the
    unhinged ends of the second pair of elements, the end forces being
    transmitted to the one or more of the clasp* members.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclass 303 for a distinct end coupler in
    the form of a single toggle-type operator for plural connectors.


CLS 24/331
TXT Spring biased:

    Subject matter under subclass 329 provided with a resilient means which
    regains its original shape after distortation and is assembled with the
    clasp* so as to force a hinged member thereof to move in a certain
    direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    338,    for plural resilient clasps(*) having a spring biased jaw.

    371,    for plural hooks having a biasing spring.

    499+,   531, and 532+, for pivoted or similar types of swinging,
    resiliently biased plural clasps(*).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 819+ for an uninsulated
    electrical connector having a rigid nonresilient clamping part operated by
    a separate spring means.


CLS 24/332
TXT Coil:

    Subject matter under subclass 331 wherein the resilient means is a helical
    wire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334,    for pivoted member clasps(*) having a coil spring.

    509+,   531, and 533+, for pivoted or similar types of swing, coil biased,
    plural clasps(*).


CLS 24/333
TXT And cam:

    Subject matter under subclass 329 provided with means having an eccentric
    dimension cooperating with and moving one of the pivoted members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    337,    for plural resilient clasps(*) provided with a cam.


CLS 24/334
TXT Coil spring biased:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein a spring in the form of a helical
    wire is assembled with the clasp(*) to force one of the hinged members in a
    certain direction.


CLS 24/335
TXT Plural clasps:

    Subject matter under subclass 326 wherein two or more clasps(*) are
    provided.

    (1)     Note.  to be proper in this and indented subclasses, the combined
    clasps(*) must be the type that each clasp(*), if separated from each
    other, can function as a clasp(*), and each clasp(*) must be different as
    to configuration or composition; otherwise, the document is properly
    classified as an original in subclasses 243+ and discretionarily
    cross-referenced to this and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for plural clasp cup holders.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclass 70 for plural clasps utilized
    in attaching garment protectors to boots, shoes, and leggings.

    132,    Toilet, subclass 47 for bow or ribbon-type hair fasteners in the
    form of plural clasps.

    248,    Supports, subclass 73 for plural clasps interlocking brackets and
    supports for pipes or cables.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclass 385 for plural clasps or clamps
    connecting rods or plates together.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 775+ for an uninsulated
    electrical connector for clamping and electrically interconnecting plural
    conductors.


CLS 24/336
TXT Resilient type clasp:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein one of the clasps(*) is composed
    of elastic substance which regains its original shape after distortion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 658+ for check
    labeled or tag holders in the form of a resilient clip or clips.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 46 for resilient clasp for linearly
    supporting plants.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 285.1 for resilient
    plural clasp means securing together various modular section portions at
    right angles; subclasses 357+ for plural resilient clasps securing the back
    of a support and front of a settable material receiving backer; subclass
    489.1 for separable clip-type resilient fasteners utilized to secure facer
    or facer panels to frame or shaft; subclass 582.1 for resilient clasp or
    clasp-joining panels or modules with edgewise connecting features; and
    subclass 714 for resilient integral sheet or wire tie members for securing
    open work, e.g., tress, trellis, grills, etc.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 812 for resilient one-piece clamping
    jaws for restraining a cow's tail.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses
    178.1+ and 902 for plural resilient clasp utilized in securing Venetian
    blinds.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 27.1+ for plural resilient clasps utilized in
    securing instruments in panels; subclass 72 for resilient plural clasps
    connecting beams and brackets; and subclass 229.1 for resilient plural
    clasps interlocking a bracket in a support of an aperture board.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 11.37+ for plural resilient clasps
    utilized in securing skis; and subclass 184 for plural resilient clamp or
    clasp-type configurations utilized in securing reigns or whip to wheeled
    vehicles.

    281,    Books, Strips, and Leaves, subclass 42 for resilient plural clasps
    utilized in holding or marking book leaves.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclass 288 for portable closure fasteners
    utilizing resilient plural clasps engaging right angle planar work.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 140 for showcase-type
    cabinet structure joints and connectors utilizing plural resilient clasp
    type configuration.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclass 387 for plural resilient clasps
    securing flanged or grooved rods to plates; and subclass 397 for resilient
    clips utilized in securing rods to plate or similar configurations.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 577+ for wall plate or panel
    mounting configurations in the form of plural resilient radially expanding
    spring members extendable through or into panel openings.


CLS 24/337
TXT And cam:

    Subject matter under subclass 336 provided with means having an eccentric
    dimension cooperating with and moving a portion of a clasp.


CLS 24/338
TXT Spring biased jaw:

    Subject matter under subclass 336 provided with separate elastic means
    assembled with a clasp(*) to force a jaw portion of the clasp(*) to move in
    a certain direction.


CLS 24/339
TXT Circular work engageable:

    Subject matter under subclass 336 wherein the clasp(*) is specially
    configured to engage structure-to-be-secured(*) having a circular or
    substantially circular cross section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10+,    for resilient plural clasps utilized in engaging in or holding
    pencils to the human body.

    129+,   for resilient plural clasps for holding or fastening cords or ropes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 310+ for check label
    or tag holders in the form of resilient plural clasps engageable with
    bottles.

    81,     Tools, subclass 15.8 for tools for applying resilient plural clasps
    to antiskid chains being applied to tires.

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 257+ for plural resilient clasps for holding or
    securing various tobacco products.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 40 for plural
    resilient clasps engaging overhead round-type conductors; subclass 94 for
    plural resilient clasps engaging or joining bare conductors; subclass 138
    for plural resilient clasp capable of engaging and securing various
    circular cross-sectional insulators; and subclasses 172+ for resilient
    plural clasps for securing insulated conductors.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 37.3+ for resilient plural clasp supports for
    supporting or holding cutlery; subclass 61 for resilient plural
    configuration used in suspending overhead or messenger cables; subclass
    68.1 for plural resilient clasps utilized in bracketing or supporting
    plural pipes or cables; and subclasses 74.1+ for resilient plural clasps or
    clamps structure for supporting or bracketing pipes or cables.

    256,    Fences, subclass 57 for resilient clasps connecting cross pieces of
    fencing wire.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclass 114 for pipe joint or coupling
    configuration provided with resilient clasps for strain relief.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclass 387 for plural resilient claps
    securing or fastening flanged or grooved rods to plates.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 786+ for an uninsulated
    electrical connector having resilient or spring-operated securing means for
    electrically joining plural conductors.


CLS 24/340
TXT And pin attachment:

    Subject matter under subclass 336 provided with a fastener comprising a
    piece of wire having a head or headlike configuration at one end and a
    penetrating point at the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    351+,   for clasp(*) and pin fasteners.

    356+,   for plural diverse pin fasteners.


CLS 24/341
TXT And disconnect means:

    Subject matter under subclass 336 provided with separate means allowing the
    two clasps(*) to be relatively easily engaged or disengaged from each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    358,    for plural pin fasteners provided with disconnect means.

    572+,   for separable-fasteners(*).


CLS 24/342.1
TXT Including a button fastening element:

    Subject matter under subclass 326 comprising a generally disk-shaped body
    designed to pass through and cooperate with a buttonhole or loop to produce
    securement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for cuff holders in the form of a combined clasp and button
    fastener.

    90.1+,  for clasp-type fasteners utilized in fastening buttons as articles.

    367.1,  for pin and button fasteners.

    378.1,  for hook and button fasteners.

    379.1,  for combined diverse multipart fasteners, one of which is a button.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 302 for garment supporters and retainers for
    supporting hose material utilizing clasp and button fasteners.


CLS 24/343
TXT And hook:

    Subject matter under subclass 326 provided with a fastener in the form of a
    hook comprising either a wire or rod section, one end of which is curved or
    sharply bent, or an element having a J-shaped configuration utilized as a
    hook.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for cuff holders in the form of combined clasp and hook fasteners.

    360,    for plural pin fasteners provided with a hook.

    363,    for pin and hook fasteners.

    369+,   for plural hook fasteners.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclass 348 for
    clasp and hook-type structure utilized in hanging and pleating draperies.

    248,    Supports, subclass 493 for mirror or picture supports in the form
    of clasp and hook fasteners suspending cords to retainers.


CLS 24/344
TXT Having intermediate connector allowing movement:

    Subject matter under subclass 343 provided with means attaching the hook to
    a clasp(*) wherein the hook is capable of moving relative to the clasp(*).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    362,    for plural pins having an intermediate connector.

    364,    for a pin and hook fastener having an intermediate connector.


CLS 24/345
TXT And adjustment means:

    Subject matter under subclass 344 further provided with means to rigidly
    position the hook in any one of a plurality of selectable positions
    relative to the clasp.


CLS 24/346
TXT Having gripping configuration on clasp jaw:

    Subject matter under subclass 343 wherein the clasp has a pair of gripping
    jaws, wherein a jaw is constructed to grasp and hole the
    structure-to-be-secured(*).


CLS 24/347
TXT Penetrating type:

    Subject matter under subclass 346 wherein the jaw is constructed to have a
    piercing point capable of penetrating at least partly into the
    structure-to-be-secured(*).


CLS 24/348
TXT Having cam:

    Subject matter under subclass 343 provided with pivotal means having an
    eccentric dimension such that the pivotal means can move from an engaging
    to a disengaging position relative to the structure-to-be-secured(*).


CLS 24/349
TXT Having separable jaws:

    Subject matter under subclass 343 wherein the clasp(*) has gripping jaws
    capable of moving towards, away, and removeable from each other.

    (1)     Note.  A screw is capable of being a clasp(*) jaw for purposes of
    this subclass.


CLS 24/350
TXT And penetrating prong:

    Subject matter under subclass 326 provided with a sheet metal or metal
    strip section having a sharp projection stamped, cut, or formed thereon
    capable of penetrating structure-to-be-secured(*).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    368,    for pin and penetrating prong fasteners.

    377,    for hook and penetrating prong fasteners.

    380,    for combined diverse fasteners, one of which is a penetrating prong.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 4+ for clasp and penetrating
    prong configurations utilized in fastening carpets.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 662+ for check label
    or tag fasteners in the form of a clasp provided with a resilient prong.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclass 402 for
    fabric fastening means to elongated elements by the use of a clasp and
    prong type fastener; and subclass 404 for fabric fastening means to an
    elongated element by the means of a pointed, pierced, or hook element.

    248,    Supports, subclass 71 for a pipe or cable bracket provided with
    penetrating means.


CLS 24/351
TXT And pin:

    Subject matter under subclass 326 provided with a pin fastener in the form
    of a piece of wire having a head or headlike configuration at one end and a
    penetrating point at the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for cuff holders in the form of a clasp and pin fastener.

    356+,   for plural pin fasteners.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 4+ for combined clasp and pin
    fasteners utilized for fastening or securing carpets.


CLS 24/352
TXT Having separate pin loss prevention means:

    Subject matter under subclass 351 wherein the pin fastener is provided with
    means or a configuration specially adapted to guard against loss of the pin
    fastener.

    (1)     Note.  The prevention means may either be independent of the pin or
    incorporated with the body if the clasp(*) and pin structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    706.2+, for a pin having guiding, holding, or protecting means for its
    penetrating portion.


CLS 24/353
TXT Pin coextensive, coplanar and contiguous with clasp jaw:

    Subject matter under subclass 352 wherein a jaw of the clasp(*) has the
    same special limits as, lies on the same longitudinal planar axis as, and
    is adjacent to the pin fastener.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    354,    for clasp(*) and pin fasteners in which the pin is coextensive,
    coplanar, and contiguous with a clasp(*) jaw.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    63,     Jewelry, subclass 2 for miscellaneous type loss-prevention devices
    for jewelry; and subclass 20 for ornamental pins provided with pin loss
    prevention means.


CLS 24/354
TXT Pin coextensive, coplanar and contiguous with clasp jaw:

    Subject matter under subclass 351 wherein the pin fastener has the same
    special limits as, lies on the same plane as, and is adjacent to the pin
    fastener.


CLS 24/355
TXT Pin forms part of clasp jaw:

    Subject matter under subclass 351 wherein the pin fastener acts as jaw of
    the clasp(*) to secure the structure-to-be-secured(*).


CLS 24/356
TXT Pin:

    Subject matter under subclass 303 provided with a pin fastener comprising a
    piece of wire having a head or headlike configuration at one end and a
    penetrating point at the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for article holder holding flowers to the human body in the form of
    a pin.

    13,     for holding various articles to the human body utilizing a pin
    fastener.

    48,     for cuff holders in the form of a pin fastener.

    150+,   for a single pin fastener of the Class 24 type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 239 for projecting pin-type fasteners for
    securing or bracketing shelves or scaffolds.


CLS 24/357
TXT And pin:

    Subject matter under subclass 356 provided with a second pin fastener in
    the form of a piece of wire having a head or headlike configuration at one
    end and a penetrating point at the other.

    (1)     Note.  To be proper in this and indented subclasses, the combined
    pins must be the type that, in addition to being composed of plural
    elements, the pins are different in configuration or composition, e.g., in
    length, cross-sectional dimension, shape of the point, etc; otherwise the
    document is properly classified in subclasses 150+ and discretionarily
    cross-referenced to this and indented subclasses.


CLS 24/358
TXT And disconnect means:

    Subject matter under subclass 357 provided with disconnectable means which
    allow the two pins to be relatively easily engaged or disengaged from each
    other.


CLS 24/359
TXT Hook and eye type:

    Subject matter under subclass 358 wherein the disconnect means comprises a
    first component in the form of a hook composed of wire sharply bent or
    curved at one end specially adapted to engage and disengage with a second
    component in the form of a eye fastener composed of a wire curved back and
    attached onto itself.


CLS 24/360
TXT And hook:

    Subject matter under subclass 357 further provided with a hook comprising
    either a wire or rod section, one end of which is curved or sharply bent,
    or an element having a J-shaped configuration utilized as a hook.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    363+,   for pin and hook fasteners.

    369+,   for plural hook fasteners.


CLS 24/361
TXT Having connector allowing movement:

    Subject matter under subclass 360 provided with means for attaching either
    the hook to the pins or the pins to each other, wherein the hook or pins
    are movable with respect to each other subsequent to attachment.


CLS 24/362
TXT Having intermediate connector allowing movement:

    Subject matter under subclass 357 provided with means attaching the pins to
    each other, wherein the pins are movable with respect to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    364,    for pin and hook fasteners having an intermediate connector
    allowing movement.


CLS 24/363
TXT And hook:

    Subject matter under subclass 356 provided with a hook either in the form
    of a wire rod section, the end of which is curved or sharply bent, or an
    element having a J-shaped configuration utilized as a hook.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    369,    for combined hook fasteners.


CLS 24/364
TXT Having intermediate connector allowing movement:

    Subject matter under subclass 363 provided with means attaching the pin to
    the hook wherein the pin and hook are moveable relative to each other.


CLS 24/365
TXT And adjustment means:

    Subject matter under subclass 364 provided with means to rigidly position
    the hook in any one of a plurality of selectable positions relative to the
    pin.


CLS 24/366
TXT Hook having locking means:

    Subject matter under subclass 363 wherein the hook is provided with means
    capable of moving from a securing to an unsecuring position relative to the
    curved or bent end.


CLS 24/367.1
TXT Including a button fastening element:

    Subject matter under subclass 356 comprising a generally disk-shaped body
    designed to pass through and cooperate with a buttonhole or loop to produce
    securement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for combined pin and button fasteners for cuff holders.

    60,     for combined button and pin fasteners for fastening or securing
    neckties.

    103,    for pin fasteners utilized to secure or fasten buttons as articles.

    378.1,  for hook and button fasteners.

    379.1,  for combined diverse multipart fasteners, one of which is a button.


CLS 24/368
TXT And penetrating prong:

    Subject matter under subclass 356 provided with means having a sheet metal
    or metal strip section having a sharp projection stamped, cut, or formed
    thereon capable of penetrating structure-to-be-secured(*).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    377,    for hook and penetrating prong fasteners.

    380,    for combined diverse multipart fasteners, one of which is a
    penetrating prong.

    690,    for separable-fasteners(*) provided with deformable and penetrable
    mounting means.


CLS 24/369
TXT Hook:

    Subject matter under subclass 303 provided with a hook either in the form
    of a wire or rod section, the end of which is curved or sharply bent or, an
    element having a J-shaped configuration utilized as a hook.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230.5,  for single hooks, per se.

    231,    for snap hooks, per se.

    713.9+, for a hook shaped lace directing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 43.16 for
    various hooks used for or as artificial bait in fishing.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition,  or Panel subclasses 348+
    for various drapery hooks used in hanging or suspending drapes with
    pleating means or other drapery facilitating functions.

    248,    Supports, subclass 215 for hook type brackets on horizontal bars or
    rods; subclass 340 for bar supported hook type suspended supports.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 396 for hook type supports for illumination
    devices.

    452,    Butchering, subclasses 187+ for the supporting and shackling animal
    carcasses by means of a  hook.


CLS 24/370
TXT And hook:

    Subject matter under subclass 369 provided with a second hook either in the
    form of a wire or rod section, one end of which is curved or sharply bent,
    or an element having a J-shaped configuration utilized as a hook.

    (1)     Note.  To be proper in this and indented subclasses, the combined
    hooks must be the type that, in addition to being composed of plural
    elements, the hooks are different in configuration or composition, e.g., in
    length, cross-sectional dimension, etc; otherwise the document is properly
    classified in subclasses 230.5+ and discretionarily cross-referenced to
    this and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 98 for adjustable radiator covering means
    utilizing plural hook structures.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclass 206 for ladders provided
    with hook structure.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclass 73 for tension springs provided with
    plural hook structures.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclass 288 for portable closure fasteners
    provided with plural hook structure.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 87.1+ for
    multiple object grapples in the form of plural hook structures.


CLS 24/371
TXT Having biasing spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 370 provided with separate elastic means
    assembled with the hooks to force the hooks toward or away from each other.


CLS 24/372
TXT Separately connected:

    Subject matter under subclass 370 wherein the hooks are engageable or
    disengageable from each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    572+,   for separable connectors, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclass 85 for chain link
    structures, per se, provided with disconnect means.


CLS 24/373
TXT Having securing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 370 wherein a hook is provided with securing
    means capable of moving from a securing to an unsecuring position relative
    to an open end of the hook.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclasses 236+ for cross chain
    antiskid devices utilizing plural hooks with locking means.


CLS 24/374
TXT Sliding:

    Subject matter under subclass 373 wherein the securing means comprises an
    element capable of moving in smooth continuous contact with a portion of
    the hook adjacent the open end.


CLS 24/375
TXT Snap type:

    Subject matter under subclass 373 wherein the securing means comprises a
    spring or a member biased by a spring such that the spring or member is
    normally in a secured position with respect to the open end of the hook.

    (1)     Note.  The structure-to-be-secured(*) with the hook usually engages
    and moves the spring or member to the unsecured position and then allows
    the spring or member to return to the secured position thereby securing the
    struc-ture-to-be-secured(*).


CLS 24/376
TXT Pivoted:

    Subject matter under subclass 373 wherein the securing means comprises a
    member adapted to swing about an axis.


CLS 24/377
TXT Having penetrating prong:

    Subject matter under subclass 369 provided with a sheet metal or metal
    strip section having a sharp projection stamped, cut, or formed thereon
    capable of penetrating structure-to-be-secured(*).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    380,    for combined diverse multipart fasteners, one of which is a
    penetrating prong.


CLS 24/378.1
TXT Including a button fastening element:

    Subject matter under subclass 369 wherein one of the fasteners comprises a
    generally disk-shaped body, designed to pass through and cooperate with a
    buttonhole or loop, to produce securement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    379.1,  for combined diverse fasteners, one of which is a button.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 302 for hook and button fasteners used in
    supporting or retaining hose garments.


CLS 24/379.1
TXT Button fastening element including another fastener element:

    Subject matter under subclass 305 wherein one of the fasteners comprises a
    generally disk-shaped body designed to pass through and cooperate with a
    buttonhole or loop to produce securement and other fastener is of a
    different size, shape, or type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for fasteners securing buttons as articles wherein the fastener is
    a link-type fastener.


CLS 24/380
TXT Penetrating prong:

    Subject matter under subclass 303 wherein one of the fasteners comprises a
    sheet metal or metal strip section having a sharp projection stamped, cut,
    or formed thereon capable of penetrating structure-to-be-secured(*).

    (1)     Note.  For this definition, the term "penetrating" is defined as an
    elastic deformation of the structure-to-be-secured(*) without piercing of
    same.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    690,    for separable-fasteners(*) provided with deformable and piercing
    mounting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    602,    Surgery:  Splint, Brace, or Bandage, subclass 79 for bandage
    retainers in the form of a penetrating prong combined with another
    fastener; and Class 606, Surgery, subclass 221 for wound closing clips or
    serrefines.


CLS 24/381
TXT ZIPPER OR REQUIRED COMPONENT THEREOF:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a zipper* or a
    required component of a zipper* (i.e., interlocking configured surface or
    sliding device).

    (1)     Note.  An interlocking configured surface which is disclosed as
    having both utility as a subcomponent of a zipper* and as a
    separable-fastener* is classified here and crossed to separable-fastener*.

    (2)     Note.  See (6) Note of the class definition for patent placement
    procedure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 33.2 for plural diverse manufacturing
    apparatus for shaping or assembling a metal zipper or zipper component;
    subclasses 408+ for a method of making a zipper; and subclasses 766+ for
    apparatus which assembles a zipper or components thereof.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclass 80 for machines for knitting stringer
    tapes which incorporate unknit or fleece-type material (e.g., coiled wire)
    into a knitted fabric; and subclasses 192+ for a warp knit fabric
    incorporating an unknitted material (e.g., nominally recited zipper tooth).

    112,    Sewing, subclass 475.16 for zipper tapes attached by sewing.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, appropriate subclasses for machines for weaving
    stringer tapes which incorporate additional material (e.g., coiled wire);
    and subclass 384 for woven fabrics having a special shape (e.g., zipper
    stringer tapes and nominally recited zipper tooth).

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 252 for separately molding different shaped article portion
    (teeth) along a sheet edge (e.g., zipper stringer tape) to produce a
    composite article; and subclasses 280+ for reshaping indefinite length work.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 3.6 for zipper*
    pulling tools.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    appropriate subclasses, and cross-reference art collection 814 for means to
    inject mold component parts of a zipper.


CLS 24/382
TXT Plural zippers:

    Subject matter under subclass 381 including two or more zippers* which are
    distinct from each other.

    (1)     Note.  The zippers* are considered distinct if at least (a) there
    are two distinct sets (i.e., two opposed pairs), of interlocking surfaces
    which are either noncolinear or if collinear have a structural member
    preventing movement of a common sliding device along both sets of surfaces,
    and (b) the sets of interlocking surfaces are either operated by
    independently movable sliding devices or a sliding device which connects
    two distinct surface camming portions together which each operate on a
    different one of the sets.


CLS 24/383
TXT Zipper chain:

    Subject matter under subclass 382 in which plural sets of interlocking
    surfaces are fabricated together during manufacture on a common assembly
    strip (i.e., stringer) intended to be cut into separate zippers* in a
    latter manufacturing step.


CLS 24/384
TXT Having surface sealing structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 282 including structure which prevents the
    passage of a particular substance (e.g., fluid, dust, water, air) through
    the joint formed in the structure-to-be-secured* by the interlocking
    surfaces of the zippers*.


CLS 24/385
TXT Having slider or interconnected sliders with access opening for
    diverse-art-member:

    Zipper* under subclass 381 provided with either a single sliding device or
    two interconnected sliding devices having an open region located therein or
    therebetween, respectively, through which a member not forming a part of
    the zipper and utilized in subject matter proper for another class is
    intended to extend.


CLS 24/386
TXT Plural independently movable sliders:

    Zipper* under subclass 381 provided with two or more independently movable
    sliding devices each traveling along at least one common segment of a
    single set of interlocking surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    382,    for plural zippers* having sets of interlocking surfaces with a
    common longitudinal axis and plural sliding devices which never traverse
    any common segment of the sets of surfaces.


CLS 24/387
TXT With distinct, stationary means for anchoring slider:

    Zipper* under subclass 381 provided with stationary, nonrepetitive means
    distinguishable from the interlocking surface and its supporting structure
    which is either positioned at one of the terminal ends thereof or a
    particular point therealong and intended to cooperate with a portion of the
    sliding device to hold it at a particular location.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    418+,   for position locking-means* supported by the slider and intended to
    cooperate with repetitive structure located along the length of the
    interlocking surface to anchor the slider at any position on the surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, for zippers in combination with locks.


CLS 24/388
TXT And for aligning surfaces or obstructing slider movement:

    Stationary holding means under subclass 387 having additional structure for
    either (a) aligning the interlocking surfaces of the zipper*, or (b)
    preventing or slowing the movement of the sliding device along the
    interlocking surfaces beyond the point at which they contact.


CLS 24/389
TXT With distinct member for sealing surfaces:

    Zipper* under subclass 381 provided with a member which does not form a
    portion of the interlocking surfaces and which prevents the passage of a
    particular substance (e.g., water, air, fluid, dust) through the joint
    formed in the structure-to-be-secured* by the interlocking surfaces of the
    zipper*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    384,    for plural zippers having surface sealing structure.


CLS 24/390
TXT With distinct separable-fastener:

    Subject matter under subclass 381 provided with a separable-fastener* which
    is distinct from the interlocking configured surface and not directly
    contacting the sliding device or effecting the zipper's* operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305+,   for combined diverse multipart fasteners which do not include
    zippers*.


CLS 24/391
TXT Having coiled or bent continuous wire interlocking surface:

    Zipper* under subclass 381 including at least one interlocking surface
    consisting of a slender coiled or bent, rigid* or semirigid* filament which
    extends the full length of the surface.

    (1)     Note.  Patents having peculiar interlocking structure (i.e., head)
    have been crossed into this subclass from its indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    575,    for a separable-fastener* having two similarly shaped, sized, and
    operated interlocking faces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    subclasses 280+ for shaping indefinite length work.


CLS 24/392
TXT With stringer tape interwoven or knitted therewith:

    Zipper* under subclass 391 provided with an intermediate mounting strip
    which is attached to the coiled or bent filament by the intertwining of
    plural slender elements which form the material of the strip and the
    filament during a weaving or knitting operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclasses 192+ for a warp knit fabric
    incorporating an unknitted material (e.g., nominally recited interlocking
    wire for zipper).

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclass 384 for woven fabrics having a special
    shape (e.g., zipper stringer tapes and nominally recited zipper tooth).


CLS 24/393
TXT With stringer tape having specific weave or knit pattern:

    Zipper* under subclass 391 provided with an intermediate mounting strip
    which both (a) connects the filament to the structure-to-be-secured*, and
    (b) is formed by intertwining plural slender elements into a piece of
    material having a particular woven or knitted pattern.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclasses 192+ for a warp knit fabric
    incorporating an unknitted material.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclass 384 for woven fabrics having a special
    shape.


CLS 24/394
TXT With core encircled by coils or bends:

    Zipper* under subclass 391 provided with a member which extends the length
    of the interlocking surface and is encircled by the coils or bends of the
    filament.


CLS 24/395
TXT With mounting portion having structural formations complementary to
    stitching:

    Coiled or bent filament under subclass 391 provided with structural
    formations positioned along its length which are intended to cooperate with
    stitching utilized in attaching the filament to either the
    structure-to-be-secured* or an intermediate mounting strip (e.g., stringer
    tape) intended to be connected to the structure-to-be-secured*.


CLS 24/396
TXT Attached by stitching:

    Coiled or bent filament under subclass 391 attached by stitching to either
    the structure-to-be-secured* or an intermediate mounting strip intended to
    be connected thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    393,    394, and 395, for structure which is usually used in conjunction
    with stitching to mount the interlocking surface.


CLS 24/397
TXT String or stringer tape having distinctive property (e.g., heat sensitive):

    Coiled or bent filament under subclass 396 wherein a distinctive physical
    property of either (a) the stitching string which is utilized in the
    stitching operation, or (b) the struc-ture-to-be-secured* or the mounting
    strip to which the filament is attached by the string, is utilized to
    enhance the attachment.


CLS 24/398
TXT With stringer tape having distinctive property (e.g., heat sensitive):

    Zipper* under subclass 391 provided with an intermediate mounting strip
    having a distinctive physical property used to enhance the attachment
    between the strip and the filament.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    397,    for a continuous wire interlocking surface attached to a stringer
    tape by stitching and either the string or stringer tape having a
    distinctive property which effects the attachment.


CLS 24/399
TXT Having interlocking surface with continuous cross section:

    Zipper* under subclass 381 including at least one interlocking surface
    consisting of either a single member or plural aligned members having a
    specific and continuous cross-sectional formation perpendicular to and
    along the full length of the interlocking surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    576,    for a separable-fastener* having two elongated, similarly shaped,
    interlocking faces which each have parallel cross sections of identical
    shape along their full length.


CLS 24/400
TXT Opposed interlocking surface having dissimilar cross section:

    Zipper* under subclass 399 in which the two opposed interlocking surfaces
    have different cross-sectional formations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    587,    for a separable-fastener* having an elongated, resilient,
    interlocking face with identically shaped, parallel cross sections along
    its full length.


CLS 24/401
TXT Having interlocking surface formed from single member with varying cross
    section:

    Zippers* under subclass 381 including at least one interlocking surface
    formed from a single member and having a cross-sectional shape which varies
    at different points perpendicular to and located along its length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    577,    for a separable-fastener* having two, similarly shaped,
    interlocking faces which each have parallel cross sections of varying shape
    along their length.


CLS 24/402
TXT Opposed surface having dissimilar cross section:

    Zipper* under subclass 401 in which the two opposed interlocking surfaces
    have different cross-sectional formations.


CLS 24/403
TXT Interlocking surface constructed from plural elements in series:

    Zipper* under subclass 381 including specific details of an interlocking
    surface which is constructed from plural, discrete elements (i.e., teeth)
    attached in a series either directly to the structure-to-be-secured* or to
    an intermediate mounting strip (i.e., stringer) which is intended to be
    connected to the structure-to-be-secured* in another distinct operation.


CLS 24/404
TXT Having either noninterlocking element in, interrupted, or unequal length
    series:

    Zipper* under subclass 403 wherein the series of elements of one of the
    interlocking surfaces either (a) includes one or more elements in the
    series having no exterior face intended to interlock with an element of the
    mating surface, (b) includes a gap between two of the elements in the
    series which is significantly larger than the spacing between the majority
    of elements in the series, or (c) extends a significantly longer distance
    than the opposed series of elements.


CLS 24/405
TXT With element structural feature unrelated to interlocking or securing
    portion:

    Element under subclass 403 constructed with a functional or design feature
    (e.g., guide slots for sliding devices) not essential to, nor perfecting,
    either the portion of the element which (a) contacts and interlocking with
    an opposed element, or (b) attaches the element to the
    structure-to-be-secured* or mounting strip.


CLS 24/406
TXT Dissimilar opposed elements:

    Zipper* under subclass 403 wherein at least one discrete element of an
    interlocking surface is dissimilar in construction or configuration to the
    discrete element in the opposed surface with which it is intended to engage
    when the zipper* is closed.


CLS 24/407
TXT Wire element:

    Element under subclass 403 wherein the portion of the element intended to
    contact and interlock with an element of the mating interlocking surface is
    formed from a slender, rigid* or semirigid* filament.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    391+,   for an interlocking surface formed from a single coiled or bent
    continuous wire.


CLS 24/408
TXT Preattached to mounting cord:

    Discrete elements under subclass 403 premounted during the manufacture of
    the zipper* to a distinct strand before being attached as a unit in a
    latter manufacturing step.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401+,   for an interlocking surface formed (e.g., molded) from a single
    continuous member having a varying cross section at different points along
    its length.


CLS 24/409
TXT Having interlocking portion with specific shape:

    Element under subclass 403 wherein the portion of the discrete element
    intended to contact and interlock with a portion of an identical discrete
    element or elements of the mating interlocking surface includes a face
    having specific shape or contour (e.g., hooked).


CLS 24/410
TXT Including symmetrical formations on opposite walls for engaging mating
    elements:

    Discrete element face under subclass 409 including two identically shaped
    symmetrical formations located on opposite sides of the discrete element
    for interlocking engagement with identical formations on two different
    discrete elements of the mating interlocking surface.


CLS 24/411
TXT Including complementary formations on opposite walls for engaging mating
    elements:

    Discrete element face under subclass 409 including two,
    complementary-shaped formations (e.g., cavity and projection) located on
    opposite sides of the discrete element for interlocking with complementary
    formations on two different discrete elements of the mating interlocking
    surface.


CLS 24/412
TXT Mating elements having reversed orientation of formations:

    Discrete element face under subclass 411 wherein the discrete elements of
    the mating surface which interlock therewith have identically shaped
    formations turned in the opposite direction of slider travel.


CLS 24/413
TXT Having mounting portion with specific shape or structure:

    Discrete element under subclass 403 wherein the portion of the element
    intended to contact and facilitate attaching it to either the
    structure-to-be-secured* or the mounting strip includes a particular
    structural formation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    682.1+, for a separable-fastener* having means for mounting one of its
    members to the structure-to-be-secured* or a support therefor.


CLS 24/414
TXT Including embracing jaws:

    Element attaching portion under subclass 413 including a pair of opposed
    cooperating jaws which embrace either the structure-to- be-secured* or the
    mounting strip.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    688+,   for a separable-fastener* with one of its members provided with
    deformable means formed from or fixedly attached to it for mounting it to
    the structure-to-be-secured* or a support therefor.


CLS 24/415
TXT Slider having specific configuration, construction, adaptation, or material:

    Zipper* under subclass 381 in which a portion or component of the sliding
    device (1) has either a particular (a)  shape or contour, (b) assembled
    relationship, or (c) perfecting feature unrelated to its primary function
    of shifting interlocking surfaces, or (2) is made from a particular
    composition of matter.


CLS 24/416
TXT Including relatively movable spaced wings (i.e., restraining walls):

    Sliding device under subclass 415 including two spaced walls located on
    opposite sides of the structure-to-be-secured* which are connected together
    in a manner allowing relative movement therebetween and utilized both (a)
    to support the interlocking surface camming and shifting components of the
    device, and (b) to restrain the separation of the interlocking surfaces.

    (1)     Note.  The spaced walls of this subclass merely restrain the
    separation of the contacted segment of the interlocking surfaces within a
    fixed bounded region for alignment purposed and do not shift the surfaces
    into an interlocked position.


CLS 24/417
TXT Including converging channel and relatively movable separator island:

    Sliding device under subclass 415 in which the surface camming and shifting
    components include (a) two converging walls forming a channel which forces
    the two interlocking surfaces towards each other and into engagement when
    the sliding device is traveling in one direction, and (b) a member located
    between and movable relative to both of the channel walls which forces the
    two interlocking surfaces away from each other and out of engagement when
    the sliding device is traveling in the opposite direction.


CLS 24/418
TXT Including position locking-means attached thereto:

    Sliding device under subclass 415 including locking-means* attached thereto
    and operated either (a) by a sudden separation force on the
    structure-to-be-secured*, or (b) by hand for anchoring the sliding device
    at any position located along the length of the interlocking surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    387+,   for nonrepetitive stationary means distinguishable from the
    interlocking surface for anchoring the slider.


CLS 24/419
TXT Protrusion on pull tab directly engaging interlocking surfaces:

    Sliding device under subclass 418 provided with a movably attached member
    (e.g., bar, chain) by which the pulling force necessary to shift the device
    along the length of the surfaces is transmitted, and wherein the
    locking-means* for the sliding device consists of either an integrally
    formed or rigidly affixed protrusion which is located on the pull member
    and engages with the interlocking surfaces when the pull member is moved
    relative to the slider.


CLS 24/420
TXT Having surface engaging element shifted by reorientation of pull tab:

    Sliding device under subclass 418 provided with a movably attached member
    (e.g., bar, chain) by which the pulling force necessary to shift the device
    along the length of the interlocking surfaces is transmitted, and wherein
    the locking-means* for anchoring the sliding device includes an element
    either separate from or movably attached to the pull member which is
    engaged with the interlocking surfaces when the pull member is reoriented
    or relocated relative to the sliding device.


CLS 24/421
TXT Resilient or spring biased element:

    Locking-means* under subclass 420 wherein the interlocking surface engaging
    element is either (a) constructed to be resilient* (b) made from a
    resilient* material, or (c) is attached to a spring which pulls it toward
    an initial position.


CLS 24/422
TXT Selectively shifted by either of two pull tabs:

    Locking-means* under subclass 421 in which the resilient* or spring biased
    element may be shifted into engagement with the interlocking surfaces by
    either of two distinct pull members.


CLS 24/423
TXT With relatively movable link:

    Locking-means* under subclass 421 provided with a separate, motion
    transmitting, linking member located between the pull member and the
    resilient* or spring biased element and movable relative to each.


CLS 24/424
TXT Biased by distinct spring:

    Locking-means* under subclass 421 in which the interlocking surface
    engaging element is biased by a spring which is not integral therewith.


CLS 24/425
TXT Having aperture cooperation with guide post:

    Locking-means* under subclass 421 in which an aperture is formed in the
    interlocking surface engaging element for encircling a relatively fixed
    column or finger which limits this encompassing portion of the element to
    travel along the column's length.


CLS 24/426
TXT Including means preventing bunching of structure-to-be-secured or stringer:

    Sliding device under subclass 415 including means either formed from or
    attached to the sliding device for preventing the gathering, puckering, or
    wrinkling of either (a) the structure-to-be-secured*, or (b) an
    intermediate mounting strip utilized in mounting the interlocking surfaces
    to the structure-to-be-secured* at one location during the travel of the
    sliding device.


CLS 24/427
TXT Having specific contour or arrangement of converging channel, separator
    island, or wing:

    Sliding device under subclass 415 including specific details of either the
    shape of or the assembled relationship between (a) a channel portion of the
    sliding device having converging walls which partially encompass and force
    together the interlocking surfaces when the sliding device travels in one
    direction, (b) a wedging portion of the sliding device which pushes between
    and forces apart the interlocking surfaces when the device travels in the
    opposite direction, or (c) a wall portion of the sliding device which
    supports the channel and wedging portions and restrains the outward
    movement of the interlocking surfaces within a fixed bounded region for
    alignment purposes.


CLS 24/428
TXT Spaced segments of each wall of channel supported by different wings:

    Sliding device under subclass 427 in which each of the converging walls of
    the channel portion includes two distinct sections which have (a) an open
    gap therebetween and (b) are each supported by a different restraining wall
    of the sliding device.


CLS 24/429
TXT Including pull tab attaching means:

    Sliding device under subclass 415 including both (a) member through which
    the pulling force necessary to shift the device along the length of the
    interlocking surface is transmitted to the sliding device and (b) means for
    attaching this member to the sliding device.


CLS 24/430
TXT Including means for attaching components of slider together:

    Sliding devices under subclass 415 including means for attaching separate
    components of the sliding device together into a unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    429,    for pull tab-attaching means which may attach additional components
    of the slider together.


CLS 24/431
TXT With ornamental slider:

    Sliding device under subclass 415 provided with at least one component
    intended to enhance the appearance of the sliding device (e.g., decorative
    indicia thereof, a symbolic configuration, ornamental material attached
    thereto).


CLS 24/432
TXT With means for concealing surfaces:

    Zipper* under subclass 381 provided with a member which covers the
    interlocking surfaces concealing them from view and is either formed for a
    portion of an intermediate strip (i.e., stringer) utilized in mounting the
    interlocking surfaces to the structure-to-be-secured*, an independent piece
    of material attached to either the mounting strip or the
    structure-to-be-secured.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    389,    for a member which conceals the interlocking surfaces from view and
    prevents the passage of a particular substance through the joint (e.g.,
    water).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 265+ for general apparel structure (e.g., cover
    flap) which is used with attachment fasteners.


CLS 24/433
TXT Including complementary, aligning means attached to ends of interlocking
    surfaces:

    Zipper* under subclass 381 including means having a component located at
    the terminal portion of each of the interlocking surfaces which are
    structurally complementary to each other and align the ends of the
    interlocking surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    388,    for complementary aligning means combined with structure for
    anchoring the slider.


CLS 24/434
TXT Having specific mounting connection or reinforcing structure at connection:

    Aligning means under subclass 433 having either (a) specific structure for
    attaching the aligning means to the structure-to-be-secured* or to an
    intermediate mounting strip utilized in interconnecting the aligning means
    to the structure-to-be-secured*, or (b) specific structure near the
    attachment joint for reinforcing and preventing damage to the
    structure-to-be-secured* or the mounting strip.


CLS 24/435
TXT Including means attaching interlocking surfaces together:

    Zipper* under subclass 381 including means distinct from the interlocking
    surfaces for attaching at least one portion of an interlocking surface to
    the opposed interlocking surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    390,    for a separable-fastener* which secures the upper ends of two
    stringer tapes together without effecting the operation of the zipper*
    (i.e., the securing is not necessary for the normal operation of the
    zipper*).


CLS 24/436
TXT Including means for obstructing movement of slider:

    Zipper* under subclass 381 including means separate from the sliding device
    which prevents or slows the movement of the device along the interlocking
    surfaces beyond the point at which it is located (e.g., end of surface).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    388,    for means which obstruct slider movement combined with structure
    for anchoring the slider.

    435,    for means which obstruct slider movement and attaches the
    interlocking surfaces together.


CLS 24/437
TXT SLIT CLOSING MEANS INCLUDING GUIDES ON OPPOSITE EDGES OF SLIT AND SLIDABLE
    BRIDGING COMPONENT:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising means which either
    pulls together or covers an elongated opening in the
    structure-to-be-secured*, and includes (a) guides located on the opposite
    longitudinal edges of the opening, and (b) a component which contacts both
    opposed guides and slides thereon when moving to or from a position where
    it extends across the gap between the longitudinal edges of the opening to
    shut or cover it.

    (1)     Note.  See (6) Note of the class definition for patent placement
    procedure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclasses 50.1+ for closure for uppers.


CLS 24/438
TXT With hand-actuated lever for shifting bridging component:

    Subject matter under subclass 437 provided with a hand-actuated*, rigid*
    element which is pivotally connected to the sliding component and shifts
    the component between different positions when manual force is applied
    thereto and the element is swung about the pivot connection.


CLS 24/439
TXT Including structure linking and allowing variations in separation between
    opposite-guide-contacting portions or component:

    Sliding component under subclass 437 including structure which (a) is
    located between and connects together the distinct portions of the
    component which contact the guides positioned on opposite sides of the
    opening, and (b) allows the distance between these guide contacting
    portions to change or be adjusted.


CLS 24/440
TXT Having bridging components attached in series along carrying element:

    Subject matter under subclass 437 including plural sliding components
    connected in sequential order along the length of a common, distinct
    element (e.g., cord) which transmits to the components the force necessary
    to shift them along the guides.


CLS 24/441
TXT Having separate, independently movable, bridging components:

    Subject matter under subclass 437 including plural, separate, sliding
    components which are movable independently along the same set of opposed
    guides.


CLS 24/442
TXT INCLUDING READILY DISSOCIABLE FASTENER HAVING NUMEROUS, PROTRUDING, UNITARY
    FILAMENTS RANDOMLY INTERLOCKING WITH, AND SIMULTANEOUSLY MOVING TOWARDS,
    MATING STRUCTURE (E.G., "VELCROR"):

    Subject matter under the class definition including means (1) for securing
    a segment of the structure-to-be-secured* to either supporting structure
    therefor or a distinct segment thereof in a manner allowing the securement
    to be quickly detached, and (2) having a multiplicity of individual
    threadlike (i.e., the size of a cross-sectional area thereof taken
    perpendicular to its longitudinal axis being extremely small when compared
    to the area of the common mounting surface for the members) members which
    (a) each have all of their components integral with or fixedly attached to
    one another (b) are mounted to a common mounting surface anchored to the
    structure-to-be-secured* or a support structure therefor from which they
    extend upwardly, and (c) are intended to move both without preorientation
    and in unison towards engagement with separate, opposed structure attached
    to, formed from, or consisting of the distinct segment of the
    structure-to-be-secured* or the support structure therefor with which each
    threadlike member individually and mechanically interlocks (i.e., its
    movement is restricted in the direction in which force is transmitted
    thereto by the structure-to-be-secured*) to complete the securement.

    (1)     Note.  To be proper for this and the indented subclasses several of
    the threadlike members should, by disclosure, be mounted along each side of
    the common mounting surface to allow random alignment of the means with the
    opposed structure at any given orientation of the mounting surface.

    (2)     Note.  Patents which claim only structure details of a single,
    interlocking, threadlike member which is solely disclosed as being utilized
    in a securing means proper for this and the indented subclasses have been
    placed in these subclasses on a disclosure basis.

    (3)     Note.  See (6) Note of the class definition for patent placement
    procedure.

    (4)     Note.  Pointed or barbed threadlike members which pierce the
    unmodified surface of the structure-to-be-secured* or a support therefor to
    complete the securement operation are considered proper for this and the
    indented subclasses.

    (5)     Note.  The trademark "VEL- CROR" has simply been used in the title
    of this subclass as an example of one well known fastener brand which
    generally fits within the broader concept of this subclass and has been
    both capitalized and placed between quotation marks in the title to protect
    its status as an active trademark.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for a fastener of the type proper for this subclass which is
    utilized in connecting together the ends of a driving belt.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclass 161 for pile fabric specifically
    fabricated or treated for utilization in forming a separable-fastener*.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 100 for a
    structurally defined web or sheet including a hook or barb fastener for
    attachment to an external surface.


CLS 24/443
TXT With distinct structure for sealing securement joint:

    Securing means under subclass 442 provided with structure which does not
    form a portion of any of the interlocking, threadlike members and which
    prevents the passage of a particular substance (e.g., water) through the
    joint formed between the interlocking members and the opposed structure
    with which they interlock during the securing operation.


CLS 24/444
TXT With feature facilitating, enhancing, or causing attachment of filament
    mounting surface to support therefor:

    Threadlike member mounting surface under subclass 442 provided with a
    special structural feature which is intended to assist in, expedite,
    improve the quality of, or cause its anchoring to either the distinct
    segment of the structure-to-be-secured* or the support structure therefor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    682.1+, for a separable-fastener* having means for mounting one of its
    members to a distinct segment of the structure-to-be-secured* or the
    support structure therefor.


CLS 24/445
TXT Having filaments formed from continuous element interwoven or knitted into
    distinct, mounting surface fabric:

    Securing means under subclass 442 having at least two of the individual
    threadlike members both formed from a common continuous element which is
    mounted to the mounting surface by the intertwining of the element with a
    plurality of distinct (i.e., having different structural shape or assembled
    orientation from element), slender strands forming the material of the
    mounting surface during a weaving or knitting operation.


CLS 24/446
TXT Having filaments of varied shape or size on same mounting surface:

    Securing means under subclass 442 in which the individual threadlike
    members located on the common mounting surface have a diversity of
    configurations or dimensions.


CLS 24/447
TXT With feature facilitating or causing attachment of filaments to mounting
    surface:

    Securing means under subclass 442 provided with a feature which is
    specifically intended to assist in, expedite, improve the quality of, or
    cause the mounting of the threadlike members to the mounting surface.


CLS 24/448
TXT Thermal or adhesive:

    Mounting feature under subclass 447 utilizing either the thermal properties
    or molecular adhesive forces of the threadlike members, mounting surface,
    or a separate mounting substance in the mounting operation.


CLS 24/449
TXT Having several, repeating, interlocking formations along length of
    filaments:

    Threadlike members under subclass 442 having several, similar structural
    formations formed along the length of the members, which formations are
    each intended to be capable of interlocking with the opposed structure
    during at least some of the securing operations.


CLS 24/450
TXT Having opposed structure formed from distinct filaments of diverse shape to
    those mating therewith:

    Securing means under subclass 442 wherein the opposed structure with which
    the threadlike members of the securing means interlock is also formed from
    a multiplicity of individual threadlike members having a configuration
    which is different from that of the members they engage and interlock with.


CLS 24/451
TXT Having filaments constructed from coated, laminated, or composite material:

    Threadlike members under subclass 442 having their individual structure
    formed either (a) one substance enclosed within a layer of another distinct
    substance, (b) two distinct layers of different substances united together
    or, (c) two distinct substances each forming different portions of the same
    member.


CLS 24/452
TXT Having mounting surface and filaments constructed from common piece of
    material:

    Securing means under subclass 442 having the mounting surface and their
    threadlike members formed (e.g., molded, cut) from a single piece of
    material.


CLS 24/453
TXT INDEPENDENT, HEADED, APER-TURE-PASS-THROUGH FASTENER:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a securing means which
    (1) is separated from (i.e., not mounted or attached to) both the
    structure-to-be-secured* and any supporting structure therefor, (2)
    includes a relatively narrow shank portion intended to (a) first pass
    freely through (i.e., not interlock with) an initial preformed aperture in
    the structure-to-be-secured* or supporting structure therefor and (b) then
    interlock with (i.e., movement of the securing means is restricted in a
    direction force is exerted thereon by the struc-ture-to-be-secured*) an
    aligned structural modification (e.g., aperture) or peculiarity (e.g.,
    bend) in either the supporting structure or a separate area of the
    structure-to-be-secured*, and (3) includes an enlarged,
    insertion-force-transmitting head portion which in final position contacts
    the surface area around the initial aperture preventing the terminal end of
    the securing means from passing therethrough.

    (1)     Note.  The area around the aperture in the structure-to-be-secured*
    is held or gripped between the headed portion of the  securing means and
    the face of the structural modification or peculiarity after interlock has
    taken place.

    (2)     Note.  The shank portion of the fastening means is always narrower
    in at least one dimension than the headed portion thereof during the
    insertion operation, however, it may include a section which before or
    after it is passed through the aperture expands from a contracted
    configuration to a configuration as wide or wider than the headed portion.

    (3)     Note.  A securing means which in addition includes a component
    which does not pass through the aperture and engages the tip of the shank
    to complete its interlock with the modifications or peculiarities is only
    considered proper for this subclass if the component is totally separate
    from the remainder of the securing means and is found in subclasses 455+ if
    linked by connecting structure (see subclass 455, (1) Note.

    (4)     Note.  See (6) Note of the class definition for patent placement
    procedures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.1+,  for cuff holders having similar structure and operation to the
    fasteners of this subclass.

    573+,   for similar fasteners which include three separate components and
    have at least two of these components formed from either (1) material
    distinct from that of the structure-to-be-secured* or a support therefor
    and not encompassed thereby, or (2) the material of the
    structure-to-be-secured* or the support therefor, however, in this
    instance, both of these components if one includes an apertures must
    either, (a) have their interlocking structure remain unaligned with each
    other along the central axis of the aperture when in their final
    interlocked position, or (b) have the third element engage each in a
    separate distinct interlocking operation.

    706,    for a headed pin fastener.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 405+ for a separate connector,
    fastener, or retainer for connecting together rigid or semirigid panels in
    which either (a) a peculiar cooperating configuration between the panels is
    claimed, or (b) plural connectors, fasteners, or retainers are claimed in a
    particular arrangement.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, for headed fastener which are either (a) impact
    driven, (b) rotated by a torque applying tool, (c) have a permanently
    deformed tip, or (d) have a pointed material impaling tip.


CLS 24/454
TXT FASTENER WITH REVOLVING COMPONENT WRAPPING STRUCTURE-TO-BE-SECURED ABOUT
    FASTENER:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a fastener having a
    component revolving about (i.e., rotating at least 360o) a relatively
    stationary component of the fastener along with a continuously engaged
    segment of a flaccid* structure-to-be-secured* to thereby wind the
    structure-to-be-secured* about at least one component of the fastener.


CLS 24/455
TXT CLASP, CLIP, SUPPORT-CLAMP, OR REQUIRED COMPONENT THEREOF:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a clasp*, clip*,
    support clamp*, or required component (i.e., a surface of the mechanism
    having the sole purpose of gripping a structure-to-be-secured*) thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Securing means having a component cooperating with a
    structural modification formed in or from a portion of the
    structure-to-be-secured* (e.g., extending through an aperture formed in the
    structure-to-be-secured*) when operating are not considered  proper for
    this and the indented subclasses if the sole function of this modification
    is for the securing operation and are generally found in
    separable-fasteners*.  The only exceptions to this statement are when (a)
    the component of the securing means cooperating with the modification is
    used to connect the article gripping face of a support-clamp* to the
    structure-to-be-secured* which forms the opposed gripping face, of the
    support-clamp*, it is then proper for subclass 458 if the article gripping
    face is claimed and the supporting article has no special structural
    modification (e.g., another aperture being gripped by the faces), or (b)
    the component is located on one gripping face of an independent clasp*
    (i.e., a clasp* unconnected in any manner to either another portion of the
    structure-to-be-secured* or a supporting structure therefor) which is
    intended to merely grip two segments of the structure-to-be-secured*
    together and has its component supporting gripping face linked to its
    opposed gripping face solely by structure which does not pass through the
    structural modification in the structure-to-be-secured*.

    (2)     Note.  See (5) Note of the class definition of this class for the
    line between Classes 24 and 248.  Also, see the search note to Class 24 in
    the class definition of Class 248.

    (3)     Note.  Securing means having a component which penetrates or forms
    a passageway through the structure-to-be-secured* when operating are not
    considered proper for this and the indented subclasses and are found
    generally below in subclass 706 and its indented subclasses.  The only
    exception is when the penetrating component is (a) intended to enhance the
    gripping action and is located on and protrudes at an angle skewed to the
    structure-to-be-secured* contacting surface of one of the relatively
    movable, interconnected, opposed gripping faces of a clasp*, clip*, or
    support-clamp*, and (2) not restricted by structure which contacts the
    portion of the penetrating component extending through the
    structure-to-be-secured* to prevent its removal in a direction opposed to
    that of its entry into the structure-to-be-secured*.

    (4)     Note.  See (6) Note of the class definition for patent placement
    procedures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.1+,  for devices for holding cuffs.

    67+,    for paper fasteners, clipboards, and other paper clamping devices
    which cooperate with specific paper structure for holding the paper in a
    given position.  Paper fasteners of a more general utility are classified
    under subclass 455 or its indented subclasses.

    72.5,   for clasps*, clips* or support- clamps* which cooperate with
    specific bedclothes structure for holding bedclothes in a given position.
    Bedclothes holders of a more general utility are classified under subclass
    455 or its indented subclasses.

    115,    for a cord or rope engaging fastener which is a component of a
    clasp* and holds one portion of a cord or rope relative to another portion
    of a cord or rope where the cord or rope has another principal function
    (i.e., it is the structure-to-be-secured* since it has principle utility
    outside this class).

    163+,   for devices which grasp belt like bands in the manner of a buckle.

    265,    for a strap-end-attaching device combined with an unclaimed clasp*,
    clip*, or support-clamp*.

    706.2+, for devices which grasp pins to prevent their loss.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 300-342 for clasps*, clips*, support-clamps*
    used to support or retain garments or to hold parts of a garment supporter
    together where significant structure or features of the garments or parts
    held (i.e., details not required for gripping) are claimed.  See (1) Note
    of the class definition of this class.

    5,      Beds, particularly subclasses 402+ for devices for securing a cover
    to a pad or bottom of a bedstead; subclass 411 for devices for securing a
    portion of a mattress on to a section of a bed which has been unfolded or
    extended; and subclass 498 for devices for holding bedclothes on the bed or
    details of the bedclothes.  Details of the specific bedclothes, bed, or
    portion thereof must be claimed.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, particularly subclass
    257.2 for a clasp* for attaching dustpans to brushes or brooms.

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, particularly subclasses 4+ for a device
    (e.g., clip*, clasp*, or support-clamp*) peculiar to, or having a sole
    disclosure for use in, securing a carpet to the floor of a building; and
    subclass 114 for a device peculiar to, or having a sole disclosure for use
    in, securing a cord pull handle to window blind.

    29,     Metal Working, particularly subclasses 13 and 400.1+, for a process
    of manufacturing a metal clasp*, clip* or support-clamp*.  Search in
    particular subclasses 33+, 650, and 700+ for the means for performing the
    process.

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, particularly subclass 102.91 for
    fabric fasteners attached to a stretcher frame.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, particularly subclasses 16.4+
    for a check, label, or tag holder using a clamp for attachment to a body.

    63,     Jewelry, particularly subclasses 12+ for earrings which claim the
    details of the ornamental setting or of the ear engaging portions.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, particularly subclasses 19+ for apparatus
    (e.g., a clasp*, clip*, or support-clamp*) peculiar to or having a sole
    disclosure for use in the stretching or holding of leather.

    72,     Metal Deforming, particularly subclasses 293+ and 422+ for a clasp*
    used in deforming metal.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, particularly subclasses 831+ and 856+ for
    apparatus (e.g., a clasp*, clip*, or support-clamp*) peculiar to or having
    a sole disclosure for use in specimen measuring and testing.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, particularly subclasses 144+ for a
    device (e.g., a clasp*) which intermittently grips, for the purpose of
    moving, a member (e.g., a polish rod); and subclasses 579+ for a pitmen or
    connecting rod and its gripping device.

    132,    Toilet, particularly subclass 41 for hair retained curlers with a
    clasp* type hair fastener; and subclasses 46 and 48 for curl, clasp*, or
    barrette-type hair fasteners.

    140,    Wireworking, particularly subclasses 82+ for devices for making or
    forming a wire clasp*, clip*, or support-clamp*.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    particularly subclasses 1+ and 66 for a method of manufacture of an
    adhesively bonded clasp*, clip*, or support-clamp*.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, particularly
    subclass 349.1+ for hung drapes combined with drape holding means; and
    subclasses 382+ for fabric fastening means.

    164,    Metal Founding, particularly subclasses 1+ for process of molding a
    metallic clasp*, clip*, or support-clamp*.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, particularly subclasses 163+ for a
    machine wrench which grips and rotates a pipe or rod (e.g., a well pipe to
    move it into and out of a material).

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, particularly subclass 422 for a
    clasp* (e.g., a well slip assembly) which separately travels with an earth
    boring shaft or which cooperates with specifically shaped well structure
    which stops or actuates the clasp*.  A broader claiming of a well drilling
    apparatus is not sufficient for placement in Class 175.

    188,    Brakes, particularly subclass 67 for a brake (e.g., a clasp*)
    mechanically connected to a relatively stationary structure and which holds
    a pipe or rod at various locations along the pipe's or rod's length for
    short, quick linear assembly or disassembly during a work or manufacturing
    operation, or preparatory to a working operation, done by the pipe, rod, or
    a pipe supported tool.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, appropriate subclasses for structure which
    supports and article against the pull of gravity or holds it in a storage
    position; particularly subclasses 119.11 - 119.13 for article gripper means
    supported by, and in combination with, a clothesline.

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses for structure which supports an
    article against the pull of gravity or holds it in a storage position.

    249,    Static Molds, particularly subclasses 205+ for mold adjuncts which
    function to hold the mold parts in operative relation.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    appropriate subclasses for a clasp* attached to a work pushing or pulling
    implement or apparatus.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    particularly subclasses 239+ for a process of mechanical shaping or molding
    to form or reform a shaped, plastic or nonmetallic clasp*, clip*, or
    support-clamp*.

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses for clamps which hold an
    article (e.g., a well pipe or rod) while modifying work is done on it, or
    while a plurality of articles are being located in an assembled arrangement.

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, appropriate subclasses for a chuck or socket
    which grips a pipe, rod, or tool which is intended to be rotated or
    repeatedly reciprocated by an unclaimed power boring source.

    280,    Land Vehicles, particularly subclasses 170+ and 183+ for whip and
    rein holders on a vehicle.

    281,    Books, Strips, and Leaves, particularly subclass 42 for book leaf
    holders and marks.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, particularly subclasses 305+ for rod clamps for
    securing closures in an adjusted position.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, particularly subclasses
    86+ and 102 for a grapple which is disclosed for gripping articles (e.g.,
    well pipes or rods) being moved between two locations by either a hand or
    cable lifting force.

    373,    Industrial Electrical Heating Furnaces, particularly subclasses 94+
    for clamps for holding electrodes in an arc furnace.

    396,    Photography, appropriate subclasses and particularly subclasses
    511+ for devices peculiar to the holding of photographic film.

    402,    Binder Device Releasably Engaging Aperture or Notch of Sheet,
    appropriate subclasses for clamping devices which cooperate with an
    aperture or notch in sheet material.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate  subclasses for means securing
    plural members together whereby the means is involved in a particular
    cooperation or relation with the members.  See in particular subclasses
    344, 345+ and Digest 5 for carbon rod holders.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    appropriate subclasses for means to injection mold plastic or earthenware
    component parts of a clasp*, clip*, or support-clamp*.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for a clamping device
    associated with connecting conductors of electricity.

    602,    Surgery:  Splint, Brace, or Bandage, subclass 79 for bandage
    restrainers.


    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, subclass 57 for hooks of the artificial hand type.

    D2,     Apparel and Haberdashery, particularly subclasses 405+ for clothing
    fastener designs.


CLS 24/456
TXT Gripping member adapted for tool actuation or release:

    Clasp*, clip*, or support-clamp* under subclass 455 having a gripping
    member specifically shaped or arranged for direct cooperation with a
    separate hand or power operated, force transmitting implement (i.e., a
    tool) which causes an engaging surface of the gripping member to be
    nondestructively moved into or out of securing contact with a
    structure-to-be-secured* or supporting member by direct force from the
    implement.

    (1)     Note.  Clasps*, clips*, or support-  clamps* having intermediate
    operators* such as cams, screws, or bolts which are actuated or released by
    a tool are not proper for this subclass and may be found elsewhere under
    subclass 455.

    (2)     Note.  The combination of a clasp*, clip*, or support-clamp* and a
    positively claimed tool is found in the class providing for the particular
    tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    703,    for a nonflaccid fastener destructively secured and reshaped or
    deformed by a tool distortion force.

    704,    for a two part, interlocking fastener requiring either destructive
    or tool disengagement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, for headed fasteners which are either (a) impact
    driven, (b) rotated by a torque applying tool, (c) have a permanently
    deformed tip, or (d) have a pointed material impaling tip.


CLS 24/457
TXT With specific mounting means for attaching to rigid or semirigid supporting
    structure or structure-to-be-secured:

    Clasp*, clip*, or support-clamp* under subclass 455 provided with specific
    means for attaching it to a rigid* or semirigid* (a) supporting structure,
    or (b) structure-to-be-secured*.

    (1)     Note.  The actual mounting means, per se, must be positively
    claimed for the combination to be considered proper for this subclass.  The
    mere claiming of a clasp*, clip*, or support-clamp* which is "adapted" for
    mounting is considered insufficient for placement herein.  The clasp*,
    clip*, or support-clamp*, after being mounted to the supporting structure
    or the structure-to-be-secured* is then capable of gripping a
    structure-to-be-secured* or supporting structure, respectively.

    (2)     Note.  See (1) Note of subclass 455 for the line between this
    subclass and subclass 572, Separable-Fastener or Required Component Thereof.

    (3)     Note.  A rigid* or semirigid* linking structure (e.g., a suspension
    ring or a wire coat hanger) which merely (i.e., its sole disclosed
    function) connects the clasp*, clip*, or support-clamp* to another
    structure which supports both the clasp*, clip*, or support-clamp* and the
    linking structure is not considered alone to be a rigid* or semirigid*
    support structure.

    (4)     Note.  This subclass does not include peculiar mounting formations
    which either (1) (a) require the supporting structure to first pass through
    the passageway formed by opposed structure-to-be-secured* engaging surfaces
    and (b) are extensions of this passageway simply located further therealong
    or (2) are intended to be capable of alternately being utilized to grip the
    structure-to-be-secured* (e.g., not plural clasping sections).

    (5)     Note.  See (5) Note of the class definition of this class for the
    line between Classes 24 and 248.  Also, see the search note to Class 24 in
    the class definition of Class 248.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67+,    for paper fasteners, clipboards and other paper clamping devices
    which cooperate with specific paper structure for holding the paper in a
    given position.  Paper fasteners of a more general utility are classified
    under subclass 455 or its indented subclasses.

    289+,   for similar fasteners attaching a decorative trim molding strip to
    the exterior of a vehicle or similar body.

    485,    for independently operable clasp*, clips*, or support-clamps*
    connected by a rigid*, nongripping, specifically shaped portion, e.g., a
    yoke.

    478+,   489, 497, 529, and 532, for a clasp*, clip*, or support-clamp*
    provided with mounting means for attaching to a flaccid* supporting
    structure or structure-to-be-secured*.

    531,    for integrally combined, independently operable, diverse,
    resilient* clasp*, clips*, or support-clamps*.

    545+,   for plural, one-piece, resilient* fastener faces connected by an
    integral connecting structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 13+ for special article supports; and
    subclasses 86+ for specially mounted or attached supports or racks.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 85+ for clamps combined with a
    specific apparel hanger.

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses for mounted supports in general.

    403,    Joint and Connections, for a separate connector, fastener, or
    retainer for connecting together rigid* or semirigid* panels in which
    either (a) a peculiar cooperating configuration between the panels is
    claimed, or (b) plural connectors, fasteners, or arrangement.


CLS 24/458
TXT For cooperating with aperture in supporting structure or
    structure-to-be-secured:

    Attaching means under subclass 457 which cooperates with a preformed
    opening in either the supporting structure or the structure-to-be-secured.

    (1)     Note. A support-clamp* mounted to a structure-to-be-secured* via an
    aperture therethrough must not pass through an additional aperture on the
    supporting structure which is for the sole purpose of cooperating with the
    support-clamp*.  See subclass 455, (1) Note.

    (2)     Note.  See subclass 453, (3) Note and subclass 573, (2) Note for
    further distinctions between those subclasses and this.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    289+,   for similar fasteners used to attach a decorative trim molding
    strip to the exterior of a vehicle or similar body.

    573+,   for a separable-fastener* which includes three separate components
    and either (a) has at least two of these components formed from material
    other than that of the structure-to-be-secured* or a support structure
    therefor or (b) has two of these components formed from the material of the
    structure-to-be-secured* or a support structure therefor, but not aligned
    with each other when in their final fastening position.


CLS 24/459
TXT Dissociable gripping members:

    Clasp* under subclass 455 having two completely detached gripping members
    (i.e., the gripping members not being connected to each other in any
    manner) which are intended to mate or interlock with each other at a
    specific location while grasping the structure-to-be-secured* therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    530+,   for a resilient mechanism which mates or interlocks with structure
    which has an additional and usually principle function other than normally
    associated with this class (e.g., a lawn chair frame or a curtain rod) for
    grasping the structure-to-be-secured* (e.g., the lawn chair webbing or the
    curtain) therebetween.

    572+,   for detached gripping members not gripping the
    structure-to-be-secured* therebetween when interlocking.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 4+ for similar mechanisms for
    grasping carpets.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 391
    and 392+ for similar mechanisms for fastening fabric to an elongated
    element.


CLS 24/460
TXT Channel and inserted bar:

    Detached gripping members under subclass 459 including one gripping member
    having a generally C-shaped cross section and the other gripping member
    being a rodlike element which fits into the opening of the C-shaped
    gripping member when grasping the structure-to-be-secured* therebetween.

    (1)     Note.  A channel or bar of any suitable length is considered
    appropriate for this subclass.


CLS 24/461
TXT Having operator or locking means:

    Detached gripping members under subclass 460 having either (a) an operator*
    for moving one of the gripping members into contact with the
    structure-to-be-secured*, or (b) locking means* not directly engaging the
    structure-to-be-secured* itself but retaining the opposed gripping members
    in contact therewith.

    (1)     Note.  The operator* must not directly contact the
    structure-to-be-secured* to be proper for this subclass.


CLS 24/462
TXT Resilient channel or bar:

    Detached gripping members under subclass 460 wherein at least one of the
    gripping members is either (a) constructed to be      resilient*, or (b)
    made from a resilient* material to aid in the mating or interlocking of the
    gripping members.

    (1)     Note.  A gripping member merely formed from a resilient* material
    but wherein the resiliency does not aid in the mating or interlocking
    operation is not considered proper for this subclass.


CLS 24/463
TXT Having gripping member actuated by fluid force:

    Clasp*, clip*, or support-clamp* under subclass 455 having a gripping
    member moved into or out of engagement with the structure-to-be-secured* by
    a fluid force or fluid driven operator*.


CLS 24/464
TXT Having inserted and receiving interlocking members connected by bendable,
    nonbiasing strap:

    Clasp* under subclass 455 having (a) a projecting portion of one gripping
    member (e.g., button, hook) inserted within a cavity portion of the opposed
    gripping member (e.g., open loop, aperture, or slot member) which receives
    both it and the structure-to-be-secured* in such a manner as to
    subsequently restrict their relative movement in the direction in which
    force is transmitted thereto by the structure-to-be-secured* and (b) a
    flexible nongripping, elongated material through which the gripping members
    are solely attached and which is capable of bending at several points along
    its length without any essential resilient biasing of either gripping
    member (i.e., the elongated material, when formed from a resilient*
    substance, could theoretically be replaced by a flaccid* material and the
    clasp* would still function properly).

    (1)     Note.  The mere intermeshing or mating of opposed gripping members
    is not considered to be interlocking unless the intermeshing or mating
    portions tightly interfit or are otherwise held together to restrict the
    separation of the gripping members.

    (2)     Note.  Patents in which both interlocking members include a cavity
    (e.g., open loop, aperture, or slot) which at least partially encompasses a
    portion of the opposed member's structure are placed in this and the
    indented subclasses according to the following rule:  The cavity or
    receiving member is always the member whose opening encompasses the larger
    portion of the mating structure's surface at the interlocking connection
    (i.e., area of mutual contact).  The only exception to this rule is when a
    hook (i.e., a projection having its end bent back towards its connection to
    the structure-to-be-secured*) is maneuvered through a closed encircling
    member, in this situation, the fully encircling member is always considered
    the cavity or receiving member.

    (3)     Note.  The flexible, nonbiased material need not be fixedly
    attached to either of the gripping members but may allow for the sliding of
    either gripping member relative to the material.

    (4)     Note.  See subclass 487 definition and notes for the distinction
    between an elongated strap and a hinge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    298,    for plural fasteners having an intermediate flaccid connector.

    487,    for gripping members connected by integral, thin, nonbiasing or
    discrete flaccid, connecting hinge.

    530+,   for interlocking, gripping members connected by a resiliently
    biased flexible (e.g., plastic) strap which is essential to the proper
    functioning of the clasp*.


CLS 24/465
TXT Discrete flaccid strap:

    Flexible, nonbiased, elongated material under subclass 464 made from a
    separate, flaccid* material.

    (1)     Note.  A multilink chain which acts in a flaccid* manner is
    considered to be flaccid* even if its individual links are rigid*.

    (2)     Note.  While the flaccid* material must be separate from both the
    inserted and the receiving members it may wrap around either and form part
    or all of the member's engaging surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    487,    for gripping members connected by a discrete, flaccid* connecting
    hinge.

    530,    for interlocking, gripping members connected by a flexible, biased,
    elongated material (e.g., elastic) whose biasing force is essential to the
    proper function of the clasp*.


CLS 24/466
TXT With distinct means for preventing separation of members:

    Clasps* under subclass 465 in which the gripping members are provided with
    means remote from their projecting and cavity portions which both prevents
    the gripping members from uncoupling and does not contact the
    structure-to-be-secured*.

    (1)     Note.  The remote means may additionally cause the gripping members
    to move into or out of contact with the structure-to-be-secured*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    469+,   for means which prevent separation of the gripping members and
    contact the structure-to-be-secured*.


CLS 24/467
TXT Slidably mounted:

    Uncoupling prevention means under subclass 466 which is slidably guided and
    moves relative to the structure-to-be-secured* engaging surface of its
    gripping member while sliding along a linear or curvilinear path.


CLS 24/468
TXT With separate flaccid flap or pocket for protecting structure-to-be-secured:

    Clasp under subclass 465 provided with an attached separate (i.e.,
    nonintegral) piece or envelope of flaccid* material which is located
    between one of the gripping members and the structure-to-be-secured* to
    prevent injury to the structure-to-be-secured* by this gripping member when
    the members are coupled together.

    (1)     Note.  The envelope may be an attached separate pocket of
    protective material in which a gripping member is inserted in a readily
    removable manner without requiring disassembly of the device before the
    gripping members are coupled together.

    (2)     Note.  The separate flap or envelope does not conform to the
    specific shape of either gripping member's interlocking portions when in
    the uncoupled position (i.e., it is not a form fitted cavity or projection
    member covering).


CLS 24/469
TXT With separate, cavity-blocking gate on receiving member:

    Cavity gripping member under subclass 465 provided with a nonunitary,
    relatively movable, structure-to-be-secured* engaging portion which blocks
    the withdrawal path of the projection gripping member (a) preventing its
    uncoupling from the cavity gripping member, and (b) aiding in the gripping
    of the structure-to-be-secured*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    466+,   for means which prevent the separation of the gripping members but
    does not contact the structure-to-be-secured*.


CLS 24/470
TXT Resilient inserted or receiving member:

    Projection or cavity gripping member under subclass 465 which is either (a)
    made from a resilient* material, or (b) shaped in such a manner that it is
    resiliently biased, to facilitate the coupling of gripping members and the
    structure-to-be-secured*.


CLS 24/471
TXT Inserted or receiving member substantially covered or coated for protection
    or to promote gripping:

    Resilient* projection or cavity gripping member under subclass 470
    completely covered or coated on all significant engaging surfaces with a
    separate, uniformly thick material which will (a) prevent either gripping
    member from damaging the structure-to-be-secured* during use, or (b)
    enhance the gripping of the structure-to-be-secured*.

    (1)     Note.  While the covering or coating may conform to the shape of
    either the cavity or the projection gripping member engaging surface it is
    not intended to form any of the interlocking protrusions, etc., per se, and
    its primary purpose must be the protection or gripping of the
    structure-to-be-secured*.

    (2)     Note.  The portion of the inserted or receiving member used for
    attaching it to the flaccid* connecting strap or other clasp* portion is
    the only portion considered to be insignificant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    468,    for a mechanism with a protecting flap or pocket separate from the
    flaccid* connecting strap and between the gripping members and the
    structure-to-be-secured*.

    473+,   for resilient* projections having a nonmetallical engaging faces
    which help form its interlocking protrusions, etc., per se.


CLS 24/472
TXT Resilient inserted member:

    Projection gripping member under subclass 470 made from a resilient*
    material or shaped such that it is resilient*.

    (1)     Note.  The receiving member may also be resilient* but need not be
    so.


CLS 24/473
TXT Having engaging face formed from nonmetallic material:

    Projection gripping member under subclass 472 having an engaging surface
    made, at least in part, from a nonmetallic material (e.g., rubber, wood)
    which is either resilient* itself or biased by a resilient* portion of the
    projection gripping member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    471,    for a projection gripping member covered or coated by a separate,
    uniformly thick material which conforms to the shape of the projection
    gripping member engaging surface.


CLS 24/474
TXT Having head and neck type engaging face:

    Nonmetallic engaging surface under subclass 73 consisting of a body with an
    enlarged engaging head formed on or attached to a relatively narrower
    engaging stem (e.g., mushroom shaped).

    (1)     Note.  The engaging head may be enlarged in only one transverse
    direction with respect to the stem.


CLS 24/475
TXT Having internal supporting or reinforcing element:

    Projection gripping member under subclass 474 having a supporting or
    strengthening element located inside the nonmetallic head or stem.


CLS 24/476
TXT Circular head or neck:

    Projection gripping member under subclass 475 wherein either the enlarged
    engaging head or stem has a circular cross section in the direction
    transverse to the longitudinal axis of the head or stem.


CLS 24/477
TXT Having wedge shaped, inserted and receiving members:

    Clasp* under subclass 465 having tapered projection and complimentary
    shaped cavity gripping members which, because of their tapered shape, grasp
    the structure-to-be-secured* therebetween with increasing force as they are
    moved towards each other.


CLS 24/478
TXT With specific means for attaching to flaccid strap or supporting strap:

    Clasp* under subclass 465 wherein either (a) one of the gripping members is
    provided with specific means for attaching it to the flaccid* material
    connecting the gripping members together, or (b) a part of the clasp* is
    provided with specific means for attaching the clasp* to a support strap
    (e.g., garter strap).

    (1)     Note.  Details of the means for attaching must be positively
    claimed for proper document placement herein as an original classification.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    265,    for strap-end-attaching devices not claiming the clasp*, per se.


CLS 24/479
TXT On the inserted member:

    Specific attaching means under subclass 478 on the projection gripping
    member for attaching it to the flaccid* or the supporting strap.

    (1)     Note.  Details of the strap-end- attaching portion of the inserted
    member must be claimed for placement herein as an original.

    (2)     Note.  There may also be attaching means claimed connecting (a) the
    cavity member to the flaccid* strap, or (b) the clasp* to a support strap.


CLS 24/480
TXT Having necked button sliding along length of closed, variable width loop:

    Clasp* under subclass 465 having (a) a projection gripping member
    consisting of an enlarged engaging head formed on or attached to a
    relatively narrower, rigid*, engaging stem (e.g., mushroom shaped) and (b)
    a cavity gripping member consisting of an encircling band or strip forming
    a variable width opening (e.g., keyhole shaped), whereby the engaging stem
    of the projection gripping member is moved from a wider portion of the
    cavity gripping member opening to a narrower portion to securely grasp the
    structure-to-be-secured* therebetween and prevent separation of the opposed
    projection and cavity gripping members.

    (1)     Note.  The cavity gripping may be attached to the flaccid* strap or
    a supporting strap in such a manner as to form the closed loop when viewed
    as a whole.


CLS 24/481
TXT Having flaccid gripping member:

    Clasp*, clip*, or support-clamp* under subclass 455 having at least a
    portion of one gripping member formed from flaccid* material.

    (1)     Note.  A multilink chain which acts in a flaccid* manner in all
    directions is considered to be flaccid* even if its individual links are
    rigid.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is not intended to include rigid* or
    semirigid* engaging members covered by a flaccid* piece of material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115+,   for a cord or rope engaging fastener which is a component of a
    clasp* and holds one portion of a cord or rope relative to another portion
    of a cord or rope where the cord or rope has another principal function
    (i.e., it is the structure-to-be-secured* since it has principle utility
    outside this class).

    703,    for a permanently deformed clasp* for holding ends of a flaccid*
    bandlike material together (e.g., a garter clasp*).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, particularly subclass 131 for a work holder using a
    flaccid, constrictable loop to grip an object which is being worked upon.


CLS 24/482
TXT Formed from elastic material:

    Flaccid* gripping member under subclass 481 formed from a material having a
    natural springiness which both allows it to significantly elongate in at
    least one direction when a tensional force is applied to it in that
    direction and fully return to its original length (i.e., it suffers no
    permanent deformation) after this force is removed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, subclass 153 for a rubber band, per se.


CLS 24/483
TXT Encircling gripping member including semirigid band and operator for
    tightening:

    Clasp* or support-clamp* under subclass 455 wherein the gripping member is
    completely wrapped around the structure-to-be-secured* or a portion thereof
    and includes both a semirigid* strap which at least partially encircles the
    structure-to-be-secured* and an operator* for moving this strap into
    engagement with the structure-to-be-secured*.

    (1)     Note.  The semirigid* strap may be a chain which is not flaccid* in
    all direction.

    (2)     Note.  The operator* must not directly contact the
    structure-to-be-secured* to be proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19+,    and the line notes thereunder, for similar art devices for bundling
    bales, packages, or clamping hoses or the like.

    68+,    for strap tightener fasteners, per se.

    115+,   for a cord or rope engaging fastener which is a component of a
    clasp* and holds one portion of a cord or rope relative to another portion
    of a cord or rope where the cord or rope has another principal function
    (i.e., it is the structure-to-be-secured* since it has principal utility
    outside this class).

    463,    for an encircling, semirigid* band tightened by a fluid force.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, particularly subclasses 130+ for a work holder using
    a constrictable loop to grip an object which is being worked upon.


CLS 24/484
TXT Encircling gripping member including semirigid band and means for adjusting
    girth:

    Clasp* or support-clamp* under subclass 455 wherein the gripping member is
    completely wrapped around the structure-to-be-secured* or a portion thereof
    and includes a semirigid* strap which at least partially encircles the
    structure-to-be-secured* and is provided with means permitting its length
    to be increased or decreased to engage different sizes or amount of
    structure-to-be-secured*.

    (1)     Note.  The semirigid* strap may be a chain which is not flaccid in
    all directions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16+,    and the line notes thereunder, for similar art devices for bundling
    bales, packages, or clamping hoses or the like.

    68+     and 483, for strap tighteners, per se, which also have an
    adjustable girth.

    115+,   for a cord or rope engaging fastener which is a component of a
    clasp* and holds one portion of a cord or rope relative to another portion
    of a cord or rope where the cord or rope has another principal function
    (i.e., it is the structure-to-be-secured* since it has principle utility
    outside this class).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, particular subclasses 130+ for a work holder using a
    constrictable loop to grip an object which is being worked upon.


CLS 24/485
TXT With specifically shaped, nongripping, rigid structure for connecting
    independently operable clasps, clips, or support-clamps:

    Clasp*, clip*, or support-clamp* under subclass 455 provided with a rigid*
    specifically shaped, nongripping body (e.g., a yoke) or region for
    connecting together two or more clasp*, clips*, or support-clamps* which
    are each capable of functioning separately from one another and which are
    not formed as a one piece body.

    (1)     Note.  The rigid* connecting structure may be either integral with
    or separate from the clasps*, clips*, or support-clamps* but must be for
    connecting one independently operable clasp*, clip*, and support-clamp* to
    another and not merely connecting opposing gripping members of either or
    both clasp*, clip*, and support-clamps* together.  If the rigid* connecting
    structure is integral with either or both clasps*, clip*, or
    support-clamp*, the entire assemblage must be multipart in nature (i.e.,
    both clasps*, clips*, or support-clamps* and the rigid* structure must not
    be formed together of a single piece of material).

    (2)     Note.  A rodlike, straight connecting body or region with a
    constant cross section throughout its length is not considered specifically
    shaped.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    298,    for plural fasteners having intermediate flaccid* connector.

    305,    for combined, diverse multipart fasteners.

    457+,   for clasps*, clips*, or support- clamps* connected to a mounting
    means for attachment to a rigid-supporting structure or
    structure-to-be-secured*.

    530,    for plural, resilient* opposing gripping members connected by
    integral or separate rigid structure.

    531,    for integrally combined, independently operable, diverse,
    resilient* clasps*, clips*, or support-clamps*.

    545+,   for plural, one piece, resilient fasteners connected by an integral
    connecting structure.

    900.1,  for shirt collar holders.


CLS 24/486
TXT Gripping member face integral with or rigidly affixed to screw-driving
    portion:

    Clasp*, clip*, or support-clamp* under subclass 455 wherein an engaging
    surface of a gripping member is either formed from or rigidly affixed to
    the end portion of a screw-threaded propelling device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    502,    514, 525, 535, and 569, for a screw type operator* propelling a
    separate relatively movable gripping member face.


CLS 24/487
TXT Having either discrete flaccid or thin, nonbiasing, integral, connecting
    hinge:

    Clasp*, clip*, or support-clamp* under subclass 455 having two opposed
    gripping members connected by either (1) a separate flaccid* connector, or
    (2) a unitary, relatively thin, nonbiasing, connecting portion which has
    both (a) its length no longer than its width (i.e., not elongated) and (b)
    a bending segment about which one of the gripping members moves in a
    pivoting manner (i.e., similar to a conventional pivot pin arrangement).

    (1)     Note.  The connector's or connecting portion's length is considered
    to be the distance it extends between the opposed gripping members while
    its width is transverse to its length and larger than the similarly
    transverse thickness.

    (2)     Note.  Because of the short length of the connector or connector
    portion, it only bends at a single location along its length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    464+,   for gripping members connected by a bendable, nonbiasing elongated
    connecting strap.

    489+,   for pivoted gripping members, per se.


CLS 24/488
TXT Having equally spaced or continual gripping faces revolving about central
    axis:

    Clasp*, clip*, or support-clamp* under subclass 455 having evenly spread or
    relatively smooth and uninterrupted, engaging surfaces with the extremities
    thereof equidistant from a region about which the surfaces can completely
    rotate (i.e., at least 360o) to aid in grasping structure-to-be-secured* or
    support structure.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes rollers or balls which revolve about
    a translating central axis to engage the structure-to-be-secured*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    489+,   for a pivoted gripping member which swings about a constantly
    contacted region.


CLS 24/489
TXT Including pivoted gripping member:

    Clasp*, clip*, or support-clamp* under subclass 455 including a gripping
    member connected to another separate cooperating gripping member in a
    manner allowing it to both (a) swing in an arcuate path about a constantly
    contacted region located on either the other member or intermediate
    structure linking it to the other member, and (b) have relative movement
    between the contacting members or member and link at the region.

    (1)     Note.  A distinct pivoted gripping member which swings about a
    nonfixed point within a fixed region of and maintains constant contact with
    the other member or linking structure is included herein.

    (2)     Note.  The constantly contacted region may never be a spring for
    biasing the gripping members but may be a coat hanger rod if just claimed
    as a generic type pivot rod without any further details of the hanger.

    (3)     Note.  Gripping members which pivot only for the purpose of
    adjustment prior to movement between a gripping and a nongripping position
    are not considered proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    454,    for a single rigid* gripping member pivotally mounted to the
    fastener and wrapping the structure-to-be-secured* therearound when pivoted.

    465+,   for gripping members connected by a flaccid strap* or hinge.

    488,    for a clasp*, clip*, or support-clamp* having equally spaced or
    continued gripping faces revolving about a central axis.

    530+,   for gripping members formed from or mounted on a resilient* member
    without maintaining separate constant contact between the pivoted gripping
    member and either the other member or linking structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 85+ for clamps combined with a
    specifically claimed apparel hanger.


CLS 24/490
TXT Pivoted member also slides:

    Swinging gripping member under subclass 489 which additionally moves in a
    sliding manner along the contact region of the opposed gripping member.

    (1)     Note.  The pivoted gripping member may slide either transversely to
    or along the constantly contacted region.

    (2)     Note.  A slidable engaging face (e.g., button) mounted on a pivoted
    nonsliding gripping member is not considered proper for this and the
    indented subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    492,    for a pivoted gripping member which either supports or coacts with
    a sliding engaging face.


CLS 24/491
TXT Tapered face:

    Gripping member under subclass 490 which has nonparallel engaging surfaces
    which cooperate with the engaging surfaces of the other gripping member and
    wedge the structure-to-be-secured* therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    522,    for track or way guided sliding gripping members which do not pivot.


CLS 24/492
TXT Pivoting gripping member either supports or coacts with sliding engaging
    face:

    Swinging gripping member under subclass 489 which either (a) carries a
    separate, sliding, structure-to-be-secured* engaging surface for
    cooperation with an opposed gripping member, or (b) coacts with an opposed
    gripping member which has a separate sliding, structure-to-be-secured*
    engaging surface carried thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    490+,   for a pivoted member which also slides along its pivot contact
    region.

    503+    and 515+, for a pivoted gripping member having a sliding cam
    operator*.

    505     and 517, for a pivoted gripping member having sliding, locking
    means*.


CLS 24/493
TXT Having three or more pivotally connected gripping members:

    Clasp*, clip*, or support-clamp* under subclass 489 wherein at least two
    swinging gripping members cooperate with a third gripping member to grasp
    the structure-to-be-secured* therebetween.


CLS 24/494
TXT Having toggle operator for moving:

    Clasp*, clip*, or support-clamp* under subclass 489 wherein the swinging
    gripping member is shifted between positions by an operator* including two
    rigid* arms, the first arm being pivotally attached at opposite ends to
    both the second arm and to the separate, swinging gripping member while the
    second arm is additionally pivotally attached to the other gripping member
    or to structure linking it thereto, the operator* transmitting a force of
    varying intensity to the separate, swinging gripping member as pressure is
    applied by moving the common connection of the two arms in a direction
    transverse to the longitudinal axis of either of the arms.

    (1)     Note.  The operator* must not directly contact the
    structure-to-be-secured* to be proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    493,    for similar structure in which one of the arms contacts the
    structure-to-be-secured*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, particularly subclass 228 for  toggle type means
    actuating a movable jaw for holding an object which is being worked upon.


CLS 24/495
TXT Having rigid linking arm pivotally connected to each gripping member:

    Clasp*, clip* or support-clamp* under subclass 489 having the swinging
    gripping member connected to the other gripping member by a rigid* linking
    element which has two spaced, nonaxially aligned, constantly contacted
    rotational regions, one for each gripping member.

    (1)     Note.  While the mechanism herein may function in a togglelike
    manner it is not a toggle operator* since the swinging gripping member acts
    as one of the togglelike arms.

    (2)     Note.  The rigid* linking arm never positively engages (i.e.,
    exerts a holding force thereon) the structure-to-be-secured* in a gripping
    manner although they may touch one another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    493,    for similar mechanisms in which the link positively engages the
    structure-to-be-secured*.

    494,    for a pivoted engaging member moved by a separate toggle operator*.


CLS 24/496
TXT With extended lever portion:

    Linking element under subclass 495 having a portion thereof which (a)
    extends beyond one of the element's rotational connections, and (b)
    transmits a force exerted thereon to manipulate the swinging gripping
    member into interlocking connection with the other gripping member.


CLS 24/497
TXT Having lever end modified for attachment to support:

    Linking element under subclass 496 having the end of its extending portion
    provided with structural modification for connecting it to supporting
    structure (e.g., a garter strap).


CLS 24/498
TXT Pivoted gripping member applies camming force:

    Clasp*, clip*, or support-clamp under subclass 489 wherein the periphery of
    the engaging surface of the swinging gripping member coacts against the
    engaging surface of an opposed gripping member and applies continuous and
    progressively increasing pressure against the structure-to-be-secured* as
    the swinging gripping member is swung towards its final position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    519,    for a U-shaped body having a pivoted projecting member on one leg
    which pushes the structure-to-be-secured* through a cavity in the other leg.


CLS 24/499
TXT Spring or resiliently biased about pivot:

    Swinging gripping member under subclass 489 which is swung about its
    connection and held into or out of contact with the
    structure-to-be-secured* by the biasing force stored in either (a) a
    separate spring, or (b) an integral, resilient* portion of either gripping
    member which does not engage the structure-to-be-secured*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    512,    and the subsequent subclasses under 489 for similar clasp*, clips*,
    or support-clamps* for which there is no resilient* biasing spring or
    portion claimed.

    518,    for pivoted gripping members with springs or resilient* portions
    which only restrain the members to prevent relative movement but do not
    bias the pivoted member about its axis region (e.g., hinge locks).


CLS 24/500
TXT Distinct spring:

    Swinging gripping member under subclass 499 wherein the biasing force on
    the swinging gripping member is applied by a spring separate from both
    gripping members.


CLS 24/501
TXT Attaching solely by spring:

    Swinging gripping member under subclass 500 which (a) is attached to the
    outer gripping member only through the separate spring, and (b) maintains a
    separate different, contact region about which it swings but is not
    attached.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    530+,   for a gripping member mounted on a resilient* or spring member
    without maintaining a separate, different, contact region.


CLS 24/502
TXT With operator for moving pivoted member:

    Swinging gripping member under subclass 500 provided with an operator* to
    cause the swinging motion between the gripping members.

    (1)     Note.  To be proper for this and the indented subclasses the
    operator* must not directly contact the structure-to-be-secured*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    463,    for a gripping member moved directly by fluid force.

    494,    for a pivoted gripping member moved by a separate toggle operator*.

    495+,   for a pivoted gripping member pivotally connected to the other
    gripping member by a rigid* linking arm in a togglelike manner.


CLS 24/503
TXT Camming or wedging element:

    Operator* under subclass 502 including either a rigid* or semirigid*,
    rotatable camming or shiftable wedging element having a contact surface
    which slides against, for causing the movement of, a cooperating contact
    surface on or attached to either the swinging gripping member or the other
    opposed gripping member when a rotating or shifting force is applied to the
    camming or wedging element and wherein the relative orientation or contour
    of one of the contacting surfaces causes the movement of the contacted
    surface of one of the gripping members to be in a direction other than
    (i.e., not identical to) that of the shifting or rotating movement of the
    element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, particularly subclasses 229+ for cam, eccentric, or
    wedge-type means actuating a movable jaw for holding an object which is
    being worked upon.


CLS 24/504
TXT Pivoted or rotated element:

    Camming or wedging element under subclass 503 which is pivoted or rotated
    relative to the swinging gripping member or the opposed gripping member to
    cause the swinging gripping member to move.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    498,    for a rotatably mounted cam gripping member.

    502,    for a rotating screw-type operator*.


CLS 24/505
TXT With position locking-means for gripping members:

    Clasp*, clip*, or support-clamp* under subclass 500 provided with
    locking-means* which (a) prevents the separation of the swinging gripping
    member from the opposed gripping member while holding the relative position
    therebetween and (b) never directly contacts and grasps the
    struc-ture-to-be-secured* (i.e., is not itself a gripping surface).


CLS 24/506
TXT Including pivoted arm:

    Locking-means* under subclass 505 including an arm connected to either one
    of the gripping members or some intermediate linking structure in a manner
    allowing it to swing with relative movement at its connection about a
    constantly contacted region.


CLS 24/507
TXT Having specific surface material or irregularity on or along engaging face:

    Clasp*, clip*, or support-clamp* under subclass 500 wherein one of the
    gripping members includes either a specific, different  substance or uneven
    surface formation forming the structure-to-be-secured* engaging surface of
    the gripping member.

    (1)     Note. Either a specific substance different in composition from
    that of its gripping member or details of the facial contour must be
    positively claimed for proper document classification placement herein as
    an original.

    (2)     Note.  The facial contour may be either integral with, or on
    structure distinct from and attached to, the gripping member.

    (3)     Note.  An engaging surface existing solely in a single plane and
    formed along a curved, looped, or bent, gripping member is not considered
    to be irregular since it is not uneven in the gripping direction.


CLS 24/508
TXT Having specific handle structure:

    Clasp*, clip*, or support-clamp* under subclass 500 having a specific
    portion or element directly engaged by a living being for applying or
    removing the clasp*, clip or support-clamp* to or from a
    structure-to-be-secured* or for transporting it.

    (1)     Note.  Details of the handle structure must be positively claimed
    for proper document classification herein as an original.


CLS 24/509
TXT Coil spring:

    Spring under subclass 500 wound or molded in the form of at least two
    complete similarly shaped loops successively coiled around a common central
    axis.

    (1)     Note.  The loops need not be circular in shape but the ends of the
    coil must at least subtend an arc at 720_ or greater.


CLS 24/510
TXT Having coil portion coaxial or parallel with pivotal axis:

    Spring under subclass 509 having either its looped portion wound about the
    constantly contacted region of the gripping members or its central axis
    collateral with that about which the gripping member swings.


CLS 24/511
TXT Flat or leaf spring:

    Spring under subclass 500 consisting of a thin, semirigid*, resilient*
    strip or plate which is bendable about a line parallel to the largest
    planar surface thereof when applying its biasing force.

    (1)     Note.  The spring or plate may be curved in shape, e.g., tubelike.


CLS 24/512
TXT Closed by gravity or weight of structure- to-be-secured:

    Swinging gripping member under subclass 489 moved into a final gripping
    position by either (a) the force of gravity alone thereon or upon structure
    linked therewith, or (b) the weight of the structure-to-be-secured*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    454,    for a pivoted, gripping member which wraps the
    structure-to-be-secured* about a portion of the clasp* when pivoted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks,  subclasses 50+ and 60.1+ for card, sheet, or
    slender article type gravity actuated, supported holders.


CLS 24/513
TXT With operator means for moving pivoted member:

    Swinging gripping member under subclass 489 provided with an operator* to
    cause the swinging motion between the gripping members.

    (1)     Note.  To be proper for this and the indented subclasses, the
    operator* must not directly contact the structure-to-be-secured*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    463,    for a gripping member moved directly by fluid force.

    494,    for a pivoted gripping member moved by separate toggle operator*.


CLS 24/514
TXT Threaded cylindrical rod and mating cavity:

    Operator* under subclass 513 including a helically threaded, cylindrical
    rod for cooperating with a relatively rotatable helically threaded,
    cylindrical cavity which moves relative to and along the longitudinal axis
    of the rod.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, particularly subclasses 240+ for screw-nut type means
    actuating a movable jaw for holding an object which is being worked upon.


CLS 24/515
TXT Camming or wedging element:

    Operator* under subclass 513 including either a rigid* or semirigid*,
    camming, or shiftable wedging element having a contact surface which slides
    against, for causing the movement of, a cooperating contact surface on or
    attached to either the swinging gripping member or the other opposed
    gripping member when a rotating or shifting force is applied to the camming
    or wedging element and wherein the relative orientation or contour of one
    of the contacting surfaces causes the movement of the contacted surface of
    one of the gripping members to be in a direction other than (i.e., not
    identical to) that of the shifting or rotating movement of the element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, particularly subclasses 229+ for cam, eccentric, or
    wedge-type means actuating a movable jaw for holding an object which is
    being worked upon.


CLS 24/516
TXT Pivoted or rotated element:

    Camming or Wedging element under subclass 515 which is pivoted or rotated
    relative to the swinging gripping member or the opposed gripping member
    causing the swinging gripping member to move.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    498,    for a rotatably mounted cam gripping member.

    514,    for a rotating screw-type operator*.


CLS 24/517
TXT With position locking-means for gripping members:

    Clasp*, clip*, or support-clamp* under subclass 489 provided with
    locking-means* which (a) prevents the separation of the swinging gripping
    member from the opposed gripping member while holding the relative position
    therebetween and (b) never directly contacts and grasps the
    struc-ture-to-be-secured* (i.e., is not itself a gripping surface).


CLS 24/518
TXT Integral locking-means:

    Locking-means* under subclass 517 having all portions thereof formed on and
    unitary with (i.e., not separately movable or rigidly attached to) the
    opposed gripping members.


CLS 24/519
TXT Having inserted and receiving interlocking engaging faces:

    Clasp*, clip*, or support-clamp* under subclass 489 having a projecting
    engaging surface portion on one gripping member (e.g., button, hook)
    inserted within a cavity engaging surface portion on the opposed gripping
    member (e.g., open loop, slot member) which receives both it and the
    structure-to-be-secured* in such a manner as to subsequently restrict their
    relative movement in the direction force is transmitted thereto by the
    structure-to-be-secured*.

    (1)     Note.  The mere intermeshing or mating of opposed gripping members
    is not considered to be interlocking unless the intermeshing or mating
    portions tightly interfit or are otherwise held together to restrict the
    separation of gripping members.


CLS 24/520
TXT Resilient gripping member:

    Clasp*, clip*, or support-clamp* under subclass 519 having at least one
    gripping member (a) made from a resilient* material, or (b) shaped in such
    a manner that it is resiliently biased, to facilitate their coupling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    499+,   for interlocking gripping members resiliently biased about their
    pivotal connection and into or out of contact with the
    structure-to-be-secured*.


CLS 24/521
TXT Having specific surface material or irregularity on or along engaging face:

    Clasp*, clip*, or support-clamp* under subclass 489 wherein one of the
    gripping members includes either a specific, different substance or uneven
    surface formation forming the structure-to-be-secured* engaging surface of
    the gripping member.

    (1)     Note.  Either a specific substance different in composition from
    that of its gripping member or details of the facial contour must be
    positively claimed for proper document classification herein as an original.

    (2)     Note.  The facial contour may be either integral with, or on
    structure distinct from and attached to, the gripping member.

    (3)     Note.  An engaging surface existing solely in a single plane formed
    along a curved, looped, or bent gripping member, is not considered to be
    irregular since it is not uneven in the gripping direction.


CLS 24/522
TXT Including track or way guided and retained gripping member:

    Clasp*, clip*, or support-clamp* under subclass 455 including two separate,
    opposed gripping members permanently retained by and linked to each other
    or an intermediate structure by two distinct, rigid* or semirigid*
    formations which (1) are each integral with or attached to a different one
    of the members, and (2) have mutually cooperating surfaces both (a) in
    sliding or rolling contact with each other, and (b) restricting the
    movement of one of the gripping members relative to the other gripping
    member to a substantially single, primary direction along a linear or
    curvilinear path when moving between a gripping and nongripping position.

    (1)     Note.  Gripping members which slide only for the purpose of
    adjustment prior to movement between a gripping and a nongripping position
    are not considered proper for this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The gripping members are never intended to be connected to
    each other by an operator* (e.g., threaded rod or piston/cylinder) alone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    459+,   for dissociable track or wedge guided gripping members.

    463,    for gripping member actuated by fluid force.

    464+,   for interlocking, sliding gripping members connected by a bendable
    strap.

    486     and 569, for gripping members connected to each other by a threaded
    bar.

    489+,   for a pivotally guided gripping member.

    568+,   for gripping members connected by operators*.


CLS 24/523
TXT Biased by distinct spring:

    Gripping members under subclass 522 having a spring separate from either
    gripping member which applies a biasing force thereon causing the relative
    movement therebetween and into or out of contact with the
    structure-to-be-secured*.


CLS 24/524
TXT With operator for moving guided member:

    Gripping members under subclass 522 provided with an operator* to cause the
    motion between the gripping members.

    (1)     Note.  To be proper for this and the indented subclass the
    operator* must not directly contact the structure-to-be-secured*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    463,    for a gripping member moved directly by fluid force.


CLS 24/525
TXT Threaded cylindrical rod and mating cavity:

    Operator* under subclass 524 including a helically threaded, cylindrical
    rod for cooperating with a relatively rotatable threaded, cylindrical
    cavity which moves relative to and along the longitudinal axis of the rod.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, particularly subclasses 240+ for screw-nut type means
    actuating a movable jaw for holding an object which is being worked upon.


CLS 24/526
TXT Track or way oblique to path of gripping member:

    Rigid* or semirigid* formations under subclass 522 having cooperating
    surfaces which are at an acute or obtuse angle to the linear or curvilinear
    path of the moving gripping member for causing firmer engagement of the
    structure-to-be-secured* by the gripping members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    488,    for a guided roller or ball which rolls along an inclined surface
    to grasp a structure-to-be-secured*.

    524,    for an operator* having a separate camming or wedging element for
    moving a gripping member along a linear or curvilinear path.


CLS 24/527
TXT With position locking-means for gripping members:

    Clasp*, clip*, or support-clamp* under subclass 522 provided with
    locking-means* which (a) prevents the separation and holds the relative
    position of the gripping members, and (b) never directly contacts and
    grasps the structure-to-be-secured* (i.e., is not itself a gripping
    surface).


CLS 24/528
TXT Integral locking-means:

    Locking means* under subclass 527 having all portions thereof formed on and
    unitary with (i.e., not separately movable or rigidly attached to) the
    opposed gripping members.


CLS 24/529
TXT With specific mounting means for attaching to flaccid supporting structure
    or struc-ture-to-be-secured:

    Clasp*, Clip*, or support-clamp* under subclass 522 provided with specific
    means for attaching it to a flaccid* (a) supporting structure or (b)
    structure-to-be-secured*.

    (1)     Note.  The actual mounting means, per se, must be positively
    claimed for the combination to be considered proper for this subclass.  The
    mere claiming of a clasp*, clip*, or support-clamp* which is "adapted" for
    mounting is considered insufficient for placement herein.  The clasp*,
    clip*, or support-clamp*, after being mounted to the supporting structure
    or the structure-to-be-secured* is then capable of gripping a
    structure-to-be-secured* or supporting structure, respectively.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not include peculiar mounting formations
    which either (1) (a) require the supporting structure to first pass through
    the passageway formed by opposed structure-to-be-secured* engaging
    surfaces, and (b) are extensions of this passageway simply located further
    there along or (2) are intended to be capable of alternately being utilized
    to grip the structure-to-be-secured* (e.g., not plural clasping sections).

    (3)     Note.  See (5) Note of the class definition of this class for the
    line between Classes 24 and 248.  Also, see the search note to Class 24 in
    the class definition of Class 248.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    298+,   for plural fasteners having an intermediate flaccid* connector.

    305+,   for the combination of two or more diverse multipart fasteners of
    this class.

    457+,   for a clasp*, clip*, or support- clamp* provided with mounting
    means for attaching to a rigid* or semirigid* supporting structure or
    structure-to-be-secured*.

    478+,   489, 497, and 532+, for other types of clasps*, clips or
    support-clamps* provided with mounting means for attaching to a flaccid*
    supporting structure or structure-to-be-secured*.


CLS 24/530
TXT Having gripping member formed from, biased by, or mounted on, resilient
    member:

    Clasp*, clip*, or support-clamp* under subclass 455 having a gripping
    member which either (a) is formed from a single piece of resilient*
    material having opposed engaging surfaces thereon which are moved into or
    out of engagement with the structure-to-be-secured* and relative to each
    other by the resiliency of the material, (b) is formed from a single piece
    of resilient* material with an engaging surface which coacts against and is
    attached to a separate gripping member having an opposed engaging surface
    which is moved into or out of engagement with the structure-to-be-secured*
    and relative to the first engaging surface by the resiliency of the
    material, or (c) is provided with an engaging surface and resiliently urged
    (i.e., biased) against or attached to a separate, relatively movable
    gripping member and its opposed engaging surface by  a separate element
    made of resilient* material applying a force moving the opposed engaging
    surfaces into or out of gripping engagement with the
    structure-to-be-secured*.

    (1)     Note.  While a broad disclosure of resiliency is sufficient for
    placement hereunder, a gripping member not clearly disclosed as being
    formed from, or mounted on, a resilient* member (e.g., such disclosure
    absent from a specification with no movement shown of an engaging surface
    relative to an opposed engaging surface during operation) has been placed
    as an original elsewhere under subclass 455 (e.g., 570+, if formed of a
    single piece of material) and discretionally cross-referenced to this
    subclass or its indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    462,    470+, 482, 499+, and 523, for other types of resiliently formed or
    biased gripping members.

    485,    for independently operable resilient* clasp*, clips*, or
    support-clamps* connected by specifically shaped, nongripping, rigid*
    structure.

    900.1,  for resilient* shirt collar holders.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, particularly subclass 254 for bias type means
    actuating a movable jaw for holding an object which is being worked upon.


CLS 24/531
TXT Integrally combined, independently operable, diverse clasps, clips, or
    support-clamps:

    Clasp*, clip*, or support-clamp* under subclass 530 combined, through a
    common body portion, with another separately functioning, differently
    shaped or constructed clasp*, clip*, or support-clamp*.

    (1)     Note.  Both fasteners must be clasps*, clips* or support clamps*
    and must be claimed for proper placement herein. The combination of a
    clasp*, clip* or support-clamp* with a different type of fastener (e.g., a
    hook or loop) would be classified according to which fastener occurs first
    in the Class 24 schedule.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305+,   for the combination of two or more diverse multipart fasteners of
    this class.

    457+,   for a clasp*, clip*, or support- clamp* connected to a mounting
    means for attachment to a rigid* supporting structure or
    structure-to-be-secured*.

    485,    for independently operable clasps*, clips* or support-clamps*
    connected by a rigid* nongripping specifically shaped portion (e.g., a
    yoke).

    532+,   for clasps*, clips*, or support- clamps* having specific mounting
    means for attaching to flaccid* supporting structure or
    structure-to-be-secured*.


CLS 24/532
TXT With specific means for mounting to flaccid supporting structure or
    structure-to-be-secured:

    Clasp*, clip* or support-clamp* under subclass 550 provided with specific
    means for attaching it to a flaccid* (a) supporting structure, or (b)
    structure-to-be-secured*.

    (1)     Note.  Details of the actual mounting means, per se, must be
    positively claimed for the combination to be considered proper for this
    subclass.  The mere claiming of a clasp*, clip*, or support-clamp* which is
    "adapted" for mounting is considered insufficient for placement herein.
    The clasp*, clip*, or support-clamp*, after being mounted to the supporting
    structure or the structure-to-be-secured* is then capable of gripping a
    structure-to-be-secured* or supporting structure, respectively.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not include peculiar mounting formations
    which either (1) (a) require the supporting structure to first pass through
    the passageway formed by opposed structure-to-be-secured* engaging surfaces
    and (b) are extensions of this passageway simply located further therealong
    or (2) are intended to be capable of alternately being utilized to grip the
    structure-to-be-secured* (e.g., not plural clasping sections).

    (3)     Note.  See (5) Note of the class definition of this class for the
    line between Classes 24 and 248.  Also see the search note to Class 24 in
    the class definition of Class 248.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    298+,   for plural fasteners having an intermediate flaccid* connector.

    305+,   for the combination of two or more diverse multipart fasteners of
    this class.

    457+,   for a clasp*, clip*, or support- clamp* provided with mounting
    means for attaching to a rigid* or semirigid* supporting structure or
    structure-to-be-secured*.

    478+,   489, 497, and 529, for other types of clasps*, clips* or
    support-clamps* provided with mounting means for attaching to a flaccid*
    supporting structure or structure-to-be-secured*.

    531,    for integrally combined, independently operable, diverse clasps*,
    clips*, or support-clamps*.


CLS 24/533
TXT Mounting means made entirely from integral wire portion of resilient
    gripping member:

    Attaching means under subclass 532 completely constructed from a slender
    semirigid* or rigid* filament which is unitary with (i.e., not separately
    movable or rigidly attached to) a resilient* portion of the gripping member.


CLS 24/534
TXT Wire coiled about flaccid supporting structure:

    Filament under subclass 533 having a portion thereof wound in the form of
    at least two complete, similarly shaped loops successively coiled around a
    common central axis coincident with the longitudinal axis of the flaccid*
    supporting structure.

    (1)     Note.  The loops need not be circular in shape but the ends of coil
    must at least subtend an arc of 720o or greater.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    549+,   for one piece uniform cross section resilient* clasps*, clips*, or
    support-clamps* having coiled portions.

    567,    for multipart or nonsingle piece opposed engaging faces biased by a
    resilient* coiled wire.


CLS 24/535
TXT With operator for moving biased engaging face:

    Clasp*, clip*, or support-clamp* under subclass 530 provided with an
    operator* to cause the motion of the opposed engaging surface against the
    biasing force exerted by the resilient* material.

    (1)     Note.  To be proper for this and the indented subclasses the
    operator* must not directly contact the structure-to-be-secured*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    463,    for a gripping member moved directly by fluid force.


CLS 24/536
TXT Camming or wedging element:

    Operator* under subclass 535 including either a rigid* or semirigid*,
    rotatable camming or shiftable wedging element having a contact surface
    which slides against, for causing the movement of, a cooperating contact
    surface on or attached to at least on gripping member or portion thereof
    when a rotating or shifting force is applied to the camming or wedging
    element and wherein the relative orientation or contour of one of the
    contacting surfaces causes the movement of the contacted surface of one of
    the gripping members or portions to be in a direction other than (i.e., not
    identical to) that of the shifting or rotating movement of the element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, particularly subclasses 229+ for cam, eccentric, or
    wedge type means actuating a movable jaw for holding an object which is
    being worked upon.


CLS 24/537
TXT Encircling sleeve type element:

    Camming or wedging element under subclass 536 comprising a ringlike body
    looped completely around the gripping member and either (a) the opposed
    gripping member, or (b) the opposed portion of the same gripping member,
    and traveling along the length of the contacted surfaces to cause the
    movement thereof.


CLS 24/538
TXT Pivoted or rotated element:

    Camming or wedging element under subclass 536 which is pivoted or rotated
    relative to at least one gripping member or a portion thereof to cause its
    contacted surface to move.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    498,    for a rotatably mounted cam gripping member.

    535,    for similar devices employing a rotating screw-type operator*.


CLS 24/539
TXT Element pivots or rotates in plane parallel to plane bisecting opposed
    engaging faces:

    Pivoted or rotated element under subclass 538 which pivots or rotates
    through a plane substantially parallel and adjacent to a mathematical plane
    which (a) bisects the space between opposed, structure-to-be-secured*
    engaging surfaces, and (b) is radially perpendicular to the mathematical
    line about which the element swings.


CLS 24/540
TXT Elongated element with pivot between cam and handle portions:

    Pivoted or rotated element under subclass 538 having (a) a generally
    slender shape and one end portion intended to be engaged by a living being
    for pivoting or rotating the element and the other end portion serving as
    the contact surface, and (b) the attachment region about which the element
    swings, being positioned between the end portions of the slender element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    565     and 577+, for gripping members formed from, or mounted on,
    resilient* members and having specific handle structure for the
    manipulation or transportation of the clasp*, clip* or support-clamp*.


CLS 24/541
TXT For moving engaging face of U-shaped gripping member:

    Pivoted or rotated element under subclass 540 for moving the engaging
    surface (i.e., the leg) of a separate, generally U-shaped, resilient*
    gripping member into or out of contact with the structure-to-be-secured*.


CLS 24/542
TXT With position locking-means for engaging faces:

    Clasp*, clip*, or support-clamp under subclass 530 provided with
    locking-means* which both (a) prevents the separation and holds the
    relative position of the opposed engaging surfaces, and (b) never directly
    contacts and grasps the structure-to-be-secured* (i.e., is not itself an
    engaging surface).


CLS 24/543
TXT Integral locking-means:

    Locking-means* under subclass 542 having all portions thereof formed on and
    unitary with (i.e., not separately movable or rigidly attached to) at least
    one gripping member or portion thereof.


CLS 24/544
TXT Pivoted lock member:

    Locking-means* under subclass 542 including an element connected to at
    least one gripping member or portion thereof in a manner allowing it to
    swing with relative movement at its connection about a constantly contacted
    region.


CLS 24/545
TXT Opposed engaging faces on gripping member formed from single piece of
    resilient material:

    Resilient* gripping member under subclass 530 formed from a one piece body
    with opposing portions thereof forming the engaging surfaces of the
    gripping member.

    (1)     Note.  The resilient* gripping member may be part of a multipart
    fastener, provided the gripping member itself is a single piece body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    543,    for integral position locking-means to prevent movement of an
    opposed engaging face of a single piece body.


CLS 24/546
TXT Piece totally forms clasp, clip or support-clamp and has shaped, wirelike
    or bandlike configuration with uniform cross section throughout its length:

    Clasp*, clip*, or support-clamp* under subclass 545 completely constructed
    from the resilient* body which has (a) a strandlike or thin, striplike form
    and (b) a constant, uninterrupted, transverse cross section from one end to
    the other end of the form.

    (1)     Note.  To have continuous or uninterrupted transverse cross section
    there must not be any cut outs of holes in the resilient* member although a
    minor (i.e., very small or unclaimed) amount of corner rounding on
    rectangular or similar cross-sections is permissible.  Surface indentations
    or cuts which interrupt the cross-section are not considered proper
    hereunder.  A bandlike configuration may be wider than it is long.

    (2)     Note.  While the resilient* gripping member must be formed from a
    single piece it may have decorative buttons or the like attached thereto
    provided they do not affect the operation of the clasp*, clip*, or
    support-clamp.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    545+,   for a single resilient* gripping member of varying cross sections,
    having cut outs or holes, having an endless ringlike body, or having
    structure which aids in the grasping of the structure-to-be-secured* or the
    actuation of the gripping member.

    570+,   for a single rigid* gripping member which grasps a deformable
    structure-to-be-secured*.


CLS 24/547
TXT Opposed faces located in and bias towards common plane in nonuse position:

    Resilient* body under subclass 546 are positioned, when not engaging the
    structure-to-be-secured*, such that they are in a single plane (i.e.,
    coplanar) and are resiliently biased in a direction transversely of and
    toward that plane.

    (1)     Note.  Portions of the gripping member which do not contact the
    structure-to-be-secured* need not be in the same plane as the engaging
    surfaces.

    (2)     Note.  Engaging faces which intersect or overlap each other in
    their nonuse position are not usually considered to be in the same plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    548,    551+, and 552+, for a gripping member having portions which
    intersect in a nonplanar manner.

    549,    for a gripping member having portions which overlap in a coillike
    manner.


CLS 24/548
TXT Resilient gripping member having tightly twisted portion:

    Resilient* body under subclass 546 having two portions thereof which are
    closely,  securely, and successively wrapped about one another by each
    portion subtending an arc of 720o or greater.

    (1)     Note.  Both portions of the gripping member must cooperate in the
    wrapping or twisting to be proper herein.  A portion which is just wrapped
    about a passive (e.g., straight) portion is considered to be coiled and not
    twisted.  A coiled portion which is merely threaded through another coiled
    portion is not considered to be twisted since it is not securely wrapped
    thereabout.


CLS 24/549
TXT Resilient gripping member having coiled portion:

    Resilient* body under subclass 546 having a portion thereof wound or molded
    in the form of at least two complete, similarly shaped loops successively
    coiled around a common central axis.

    (1)     Note.  The loops need not be circular in shape but the ends of the
    coil must at least subtend an arc of 720o or greater.

    (2)     Note.  See (1) Note of subclass 548 for the distinction between
    coils and twists.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    534,    for a clasp*, clip*, or support-clamp* having specific mounting
    means coiled about the longitudinal axis of a flaccid* supporting structure
    or structure-to-be-secured*.

    567,    for multipart or nonsingle piece opposed engaging faces biased by a
    resilient* coiled wire.


CLS 24/550
TXT Convolutions of coil form faces:

    Loops under subclass 549 forming the opposed engaging surfaces of the
    gripping member.


CLS 24/551
TXT Relatively movable segments of resilient gripping member contact and cross
    in nonuse position:

    Resilient* body under subclass 546 wherein segments thereof are positioned,
    when not gripping the structure-to-be-secured*, such that they touch and
    completely intersect each other at least one location and are resiliently
    biased toward each other.

    (1)     Note.  To completely intersect, one portion must pass entirely over
    both edges of the opposed portion of the body (i.e., not overlap).


CLS 24/552
TXT Segments form opposed engaging faces:

    Resilient* body under subclass 551 in which the intersecting and touching
    segments also form the surfaces for engaging the structure-to-be-secured*.


CLS 24/553
TXT Having specific handle structure:

    Resilient* body under subclass 552 having a specific portion or element
    directly engaged by a living being for either applying or removing it to or
    from a structure-to-be-secured* or for transporting it.

    (1)     Note.  Details of the handle structure must be positively claimed
    for proper document classification herein as an original.


CLS 24/554
TXT Having specific handle structure:

    Resilient* body under subclass 551 having a specific portion or element
    directly engaged by a living being for either applying to removing it to or
    from a structure-to-be-secured* or for transporting it.

    (1)     Note.  Details of the handle structure must be positively claimed
    for proper document classification herein as an original.


CLS 24/555
TXT Terminal end of resilient member having engagement or disengagement
    enhancing structural modifications:

    Resilient* body under subclass 546 having an end thereof bent or curved
    away from the nearest engaging surface and into a specific shape to allow
    easier engagement or disengagement of this surface with the
    structure-to-be-secured*.

    (1)     Note.  The curvature of the ends usually prevents their snagging
    the structure-to-be-secured* during movement relative thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    543,    for integral locking-means* formed on the ends of the gripping
    member.

    556,    for a resilient* body having an engaging surface with a specific
    configuration or modification or for a resilient* body having its ends
    curved towards the structure-to-be-secured to aid in the gripping thereof.


CLS 24/556
TXT Having specific surface irregularity on or along engaging face:

    Resilient* body under subclass 546 wherein a specific, uneven surface
    formation forms one of the structure-to-be-secured* engaging surfaces.

    (1)     Note.  Details of the facial contour must be positively claimed for
    proper document classification herein as an original.

    (2)     Note.  An engaging surface existing solely in a single plane and
    formed along a curved, looped, or bent gripping member is not considered to
    be irregular since it is not uneven in the gripping direction.

    (3)     Note.  A slip resistant coating, sleeve, or cover placed on, or
    attached to, the engaging portion of the gripping member would not be
    considered proper for placement hereunder since the gripping member, taken
    as a whole, would not consist of a single piece of material.


CLS 24/557
TXT Having specific handle structure:

    Clasp*, clip*, or support-clamp* under subclass 545 having a specific
    portion or element directly engaged by a living being for either applying
    or removing the clasp*, clip*, or support-clamp* to or from a
    structure-to-be-secured* or for transporting it.

    (1)     Note.  Details of the handle structure must be positively claimed
    for proper document classification herein as an original.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    540+,   for a pivoted or rotated, camming or wedging operator* element with
    a handle portion on the opposite side of the pivot from the camming or
    wedging portion.


CLS 24/558
TXT Movably attached to gripping member:

    Living being engaged portion or element under subclass 557 which both moves
    relative to, and is not integrally or rigidly attached to, the gripping
    member.


CLS 24/559
TXT Interlocking faces:

    Engaging surfaces under subclass 545 having a projecting portion of one
    engaging surface (e.g., button, hook) inserted within a cavity portion of
    the opposed gripping surface (e.g., open loop, slot member) which receives
    both it and the structure-to-be-secured* in such a manner as to
    subsequently restrict their relative movement in the direction force is
    transmitted thereto by the structure-to-be-secured*.

    (1)     Note.  The mere intermeshing or mating of opposed engaging surfaces
    is not considered to be interlocking unless the intermeshing or mating
    portions tightly interfit or are otherwise held together to restrict the
    separation of the engaging surfaces.


CLS 24/560
TXT With reinforcing member:

    Resilient* gripping member under subclass 545 having a separate
    strengthening element which gives added strength or resiliency to the
    gripping member.


CLS 24/561
TXT Having surface irregularity on or along engaging face:

    Resilient* gripping member under subclass 545 wherein a specific, uneven
    surface formation forms one of the structure-to-be-secured* engaging
    surfaces.

    (1)     Note.  Details of the specific facial contour must be positively
    claimed for proper document classification herein as an original.

    (2)     Note.  An engaging surface existing solely in a single plane and
    formed along a curved, looped, or bent gripping member, is not considered
    to be irregular since it is not uneven in the gripping direction.

    (3)     Note.  A slip resistant coating, sleeve, or cover placed on, or
    attached to, the engaging portion of the gripping member would not be
    considered proper for placement hereunder since the resilient* member,
    taken as a whole, would not consist of a single piece of material.


CLS 24/562
TXT Corrugated or toothed face:

    Engaging surface under subclass 561 having at least two (a) engaging
    recesses distinct from any initial taper of the engaging surface, or (b)
    engaging projections or pointed teeth.

    (1)     Note.  The initial taper of the engaging surface is commonly used
    for smoother, easier, or guiding initial contact with the
    structure-to-be-secured* as it enters the resilient* gripping member.  It
    is not considered a recess but may form one side of a projection or tooth.


CLS 24/563
TXT Clasp*, clip*, or support-clamp* cut or shaped from a single sheet of
    resilient, uniformly thick, planar material:

    Clasp*, clip*, or support-clamp* under subclass 545 cut or shaped
    completely from a one-piece, unitary body made from a planar material of
    nonvarying thickness.

    (1)     Note.  Molded bodies are not considered proper for placement herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    546+,   for clasps*, clips*, or support- clamps* formed from a single,
    continuous cross section, resilient* member which forms the opposing faces
    of the gripping member.


CLS 24/564
TXT Having specific surface material or irregularity on or along engaging face:

    Clasp*, clip*, or support-clamp* under subclass 530 wherein one of the
    gripping members includes either a specific, different substance or uneven
    surface formation forming the structure-to-be-secured* engaging surface of
    the gripping member.

    (1)     Note.  Either specific substance different in composition from that
    of its gripping member or details of the specific facial contour must be
    positively claimed for proper document classification herein as an original.

    (2)     Note.  The facial contour may be either integral with or distinct
    from the gripping member.

    (3)     Note.  An engaging surface existing solely in a single plane and
    formed along a curved, looped, or bent gripping member, is not considered
    to be irregular since it is not uneven in the gripping direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    485,    for independently operable resilient* clasps*, clips*, or
    support-clamps* connected by specifically shaped nongripping, rigid*
    structure.

    900.1,  for resilient* shirt collar holders.


CLS 24/565
TXT Having specific handle structure:

    Clasp*, clip*, or support-clamp* under subclass 530 having a specific
    portion or element directly engaged by a living being either for applying
    or removing the clasp*, clip*, or support-clamp* to or from a
    structure-to-be-secured* or for transporting it.

    (1)     Note.  Details of the handle structure must be positively claimed
    for proper document classification herein as an original.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    540+,   for a pivoted or rotated, camming or wedging operator* element with
    a handle portion on the opposite side of the pivot from the camming or
    wedging portion.


CLS 24/566
TXT Including resilient biasing wire:
    Resilient* material under subclass 530 consisting of an elongated filament
    bent, shaped, or held in such a manner as to apply the force for moving the
    opposed engaging surface into or out of gripping engagement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    546+,   for a clasp*, clip*, or support- clamp* formed solely from a
    resilient* biasing wire which forms the opposed engaging surfaces of the
    gripping member.


CLS 24/567
TXT Coiled wire:

    Elongated filament under subclass 566 wound or molded in the form of at
    least two complete, similarly shaped loops successively coiled around a
    common central axis.

    (1)     Note.  The loops need not be circular in shape but the ends of the
    coil must at least subtend an arc of 720o or greater.

    (2)     Note.  See (1) Note of subclass 548 for the distinction between
    coils and twists.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    534,    for a coiled wire mounting means for attaching the clasp*, clip*,
    or support-clamp* to flaccid* supporting structure or
    structure-to-be-secured*.

    549+,   for one-piece uniform cross section resilient* clasps*, clips*, or
    support-clamps* having coiled portions.


CLS 24/568
TXT Having gripping member shifted by operator:

    Clasp*, clip*, or support-clamp* under subclass 455 having a gripping
    member provided with an engaging surface which cooperates with an opposed
    engaging surface on a separate gripping member and which is moved into or
    out of a gripping engagement by an operator*.

    (1)     Note.  To be proper for this and the indented subclass the
    operator* must not directly contact the structure-to-be-secured*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    456,    481, 483, 502+, 513+, 524+, and 535+, for operators* used with
    specific types of clasps*, clips*, or support-clamps*.

    486,    for a gripping member having its engaging surface integral with a
    screw-driving portion.


CLS 24/569
TXT Threaded cylindrical rod and mating cavity:
    Operator* under subclass 568 including a helically threaded, cylindrical
    rod for cooperating with a relatively rotatable helically threaded,
    cylindrical cavity which moves relative to and along the longitudinal axis
    of the rod.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, particularly subclasses 240+ for screw-nut type means
    actuating a movable jaw for holding an object which is being worked upon.


CLS 24/570
TXT Formed from single rigid piece of material:

    Clasp*, clip*, or support-clamp* under subclass 455 consisting of a single
    gripping member formed or shaped from a rigid* material having opposed,
    relatively stationary, engaging surfaces between which either (a) flaccid*
    or semirigid* material forming the structure-to-be-secured* or a support
    therefor is forceably wedged, or (b) material of the
    structure-to-be-secured* or support therefor is relatively turned, to cause
    the grasping force thereon by the engaging surfaces.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note of subclass 530 for the line between that
    subclass and this one when it is not disclosed whether a gripping member is
    formed from a resilient* or rigid* material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    545+,   for a single, resilient* gripping member which moves when applied
    to a structure-to-be-secured*.


CLS 24/571
TXT Having specific surface irregularity on or along engaging face:

    Gripping member under subclass 570 wherein a specific, uneven surface
    formation forms one of the structure-to-be-secured* engaging surfaces.

    (1)     Note.  Details of the facial contour must be positively claimed for
    proper document classification herein as an original.

    (2)     Note.  An engaging surface existing solely in a single plane and
    formed along a curved, looped, or bent gripping member is not considered to
    be irregular since it is not uneven in the gripping direction.

    (3)     Note.  A slip resistant coating, sleeve, or cover placed on, or
    attached to, the engaging portion of the gripping member would not be
    considered proper for placement hereunder since the gripping member, taken
    as a whole, would not consist of a single piece of material.


CLS 24/572
TXT SEPARABLE-FASTENER OR REQUIRED COMPONENT THEREOF:

    Subject matter under class definition comprising a separable-fastener* or a
    required component of a separable-fastener* (i.e., one of the interlocking
    members).

    (1)     Note.  Securing means having a component which penetrates or forms
    a passageway through the structure-to-be-secured* and then contacts and
    interlocks with a dissociable cooperating member are not considered proper
    for this and the indented subclasses and are found generally below in
    subclass 706 and its indented subclasses.  In addition, securing means
    which penetrate through the structure-to-be-secured* to form and interlock
    with an aperture in the struc-ture-to-be-secured* are also not found in
    this and the indented subclasses and are located in subclasses 706+ and 442.

    (2)     Note.  See (6) Note of the class definition for patent placement
    procedure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68+,    for a device for effectively varying either (1) the girth of
    encircling structure having a principal utility not associated with this
    class (e.g., cuff or collar tightener) or (2) the length of a strap to
    which the device is mounted, and having relatively movable components which
    are intended to either (a) transmit a repositioning force to a portion of
    the encircling structure or strap when the components move relative to each
    other, or (b) allow the repositioning of a portion of the encircling
    structure or strap relative to another portion thereof to which it is
    linked thereto by the device without the components of the device ever
    completely separating from each other during this repositioning operation.

    115+,   for a separable-fastener* component located on the end of a cord or
    rope which utilizes characteristics of the cord or rope in the fastening
    operation (e.g., its ability to bend; its continuous shape) and for cord or
    rope structure which is a component of a separable-fastener* wherein the
    cord or rope has disclosed utility other than use in a separable-fastener*
    (i.e., it is a structure-to-be-secured* since it has principle utility
    outside this class).

    163+,   for a fastener member which interlocks with flaccid* opposed member
    passing therethrough.

    265,    for devices utilized to attach an unclaimed separable-fastener* to
    the end of a strap.

    704,    for two-part interlocking fasteners requiring tool or destructive
    disengagements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 4+ for device (e.g.,
    separable-fastener*) peculiar to, or having a sole disclosure for use in,
    securing a carpet to the floor of a building.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 61.58 for seat
    belt buckles with an electric switch.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, for device (e.g., separable-fastener*) peculiar
    to or having a sole disclosure for use in securing distinct covering
    structure (i.e., structure other than that of the device) over an access
    opening in a receptacle (e.g., handbag, purse).


CLS 24/573.1
TXT With third, detached member completing interlock:
    Separable-fastener* under subclass 572 provided with a third, dissociable
    member which is not directly attached to the two other mating interlocking
    members and which concurrently engages both of them when they are in their
    final fastening position to complete the interlocking connection.

    (1)     Note.  This interlocking member may either be totally separate from
    or linked with the structure-to-be-secured*.

    (2)     Note.  A separable-fastener* which includes three separate members
    and has at least one member which is capable of completing a useful
    interlocking connection between a section of the structure-to-be-secured*
    to which it is mounted and either another section thereof or a support
    therefor by selectively interlocking with either of the remaining two
    dissociable members without requiring (a) all three members to be
    interengaged to complete interlock or (b) their connections to be done in a
    specific sequence with each other is not considered proper for this and the
    indented subclasses and is found below in subclasses 605, 630+, or 697.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    287,    for a detachable fastener connecting two freight containers.

    289+,   for trim molding fasteners.

    305+    and 379.1, for a separable-fastener* member having two distinct and
    diversely shaped interlocking faces which are each intended to engage a
    different, separate, dissociable mating member and independently interlock
    therewith (i.e., there separate interlocking operations have no effect on
    each other and they can be engaged in any sequence) to complete a useful
    connection utilizing all three of the dissociable members.

    453,    for a fastener which includes three separate components and has two
    of these components both formed from the material of the
    structure-to-be-secured* or a support therefor and (b) aligned with each
    other when the fastening operation is completed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclasses 85+ for a
    detachable chain link.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 292+, for two rigid* or
    semi-rigid* structural members having their ends joined together by a
    fastening member inserted into an opening located in each.


CLS 24/573.2
TXT And linking cavities in adjacent parallel panels:
    Separable-fastener* under subclass 573.1 wherein the dissociable member (a)
    enters a cavity formed in each of two distinct planar structures composing
    the structure-to-be-secured* or the support therefor, (b) connects the
    planar structures to each other, and (c) maintains the structures in
    parallel, noncoplanar relationship while connected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    289,    for a trim molding fastener.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 506.01+ for means
    for attaching a facer to disparate structure.

    248,    Supports, subclass 27.3 for a biased clip for holding an instrument
    in a panel.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 405.1+ for a  separate
    connector, fastener, or retainer for holding two adjacent panels in
    nonparallel relationship.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, appropriate subclasses for a fastener having
    general utility which connects two parallel panels together.


CLS 24/573.3
TXT Third member includes independently engaged hooks for linking spaced
    cavities:Separable-fasteners* under subclass 573.1 wherein the dissociable
    member includes two distinct projections which each (a) have one of their
    ends connected to common, generally planar bridging structure and have
    their opposite end (i.e., tip) free from fixed connection with any other
    portion of the dissociable member and bending generally toward the planar
    bridging structure or the other projection and (b) engage one of two spaced
    cavities and separately interlock therewith when their member bridges the
    space therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370+,   for plural hooks which are of a diverse type.


CLS 24/573.4
TXT And movably connected, noninserted gate for closing access throat of
    hook:Separable-fastener* under subclass 573.3 wherein the dissociable
    member includes barrier means for each projection which is movably
    connected to or formed from the bridging structure and which closes or
    reduces the unobstructed spaced between the tip of its projection and the
    bridging structure when located in one of its positions to less than the
    amount of space needed to pass the projection into or out of its
    cooperating cavity.


CLS 24/573.5
TXT Third member includes relatively movable, separate
    components:Separable-Fastener* under subclass 573.1 wherein the third
    member includes two parts connected together which (a) shift relative to
    each other during the fastening operation and (b) are structurally distinct
    from each other (i.e., not integrally formed or rigidly affixed to each
    other).


CLS 24/573.6
TXT For parachute harness:
    Separable-fastener* under subclass 573.5 which is used to attach together
    at least two ends of straps arranged to hold a parachute onto the body of
    its user.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 151 for the combination of a parachute with a
    harness or a particular parachute harness arrangement, per se.


CLS 24/573.7
TXT Third member consists of unitary elongated element:
    Separable-fastener* under subclass 573.1 wherein the dissociable member
    consist of a slender element formed from a single piece of material having
    no appendages along it length.


CLS 24/575
TXT Each mating member having similarly shaped, sized, and operated
    interlocking face:

    Separable-fastener* under subclass 572 wherein the interlocking faces of
    each of the two dissociable, mating members have (a) approximately the same
    structural configuration and size, and (b) require the same manipulation to
    maneuver them together into mutual interlocking contact.

    (1)     Note.  For a separable-fastener* to be proper for this subclass and
    the indented subclasses, the interlocking faces of the mating members must
    be capable of receiving each other to the same degree or alternately when
    maneuvered into contact.  Mating members which have a similar shape, but
    which have a variation in sizes so that one member always surrounds a
    greater area of the other member are classified in other subclasses located
    below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    391+,   for zippers* having two similarly shaped, sized, and operated,
    coiled interlocking surfaces.


CLS 24/576
TXT Including elongated face having identical parallel cross sections
    throughout its length:

    Dissociable mating member under subclass 575 wherein the interlocking face
    (i.e., the portion actually engaging opposed member during interlock)
    includes a single formation or group of contacting aligned formations which
    have (a) a significantly longer dimension in one direction (i.e., the
    magnitude thereof being much greater than that of any dimension of a
    cross-sectional slice taken perpendicular thereto) and (b) identically
    shaped, uniformly sized, cross-sectional configurations positioned along
    and perpendicular to the length of this dimension.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    399,    for a zipper* having two interlocking surfaces which each have a
    continuous cross section along their full length.


CLS 24/577
TXT Including elongated face having varying, parallel cross sections throughout
    its length:

    Dissociable mating member under subclass 575 wherein the interlocking face
    (i.e., the portion actually engaging opposed member during interlock)
    includes a single formation or group of formations which has (a) a
    significantly longer dimension in one direction (i.e., the magnitude
    thereof being much greater than that of any dimension of a cross-sectional
    slice taken perpendicular thereto) and (b) differently shaped or sized
    cross-sectional configurations positioned along and perpendicular to the
    length of this dimension.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401,    for a zipper* having an interlocking surface formed from a single
    member with varying cross section.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclass 364 for interfitted rigid* or
    semirigid* panels (i.e., structure-to-be-secured*) having interdigitated
    interlocking structure forming a joint.


CLS 24/578
TXT Including complementary shaped and alternately useable interlocking faces:

    Dissociable mating member under subclass 575 wherein each mating member
    includes two distinct interlocking faces having configurations which are
    structural counterparts of one another and which are each only capable of
    being alternately used with the opposed mating member to engage and
    interlock with their counterpart configuration thereon.

    (1)     Note.  A mating member having two distinct complementary
    interlocking faces alternately usable before its mounting to a supporting
    surface, but which is intended to utilize only one of these faces after its
    mounting is proper for this subclass.


CLS 24/579.1
TXT Single piece hook-shaped member (e.g., mating garment hooks:Dissociable
    mating member under subclass 575 formed from a single piece of material and
    having a main, generally planar, shank section connected at one end to a
    mounting section of this member or directly to the
    structure-to-be-secured*, and at the other end, to an integral of rigidly
    attached appendage section which appendage section (a) has its opposite end
    free from fixed connection with any other section of this member, and (b)
    bends generally towards either the connection of the shank section with the
    mounting section of this member, the shank section, or the
    structure-to-be-secured*.


CLS 24/580
TXT Including member having distinct formations and mating member selectively
    interlocking therewith:

    Separable-fastener* under subclass 572 including a dissociable mating
    member with an interlocking face having a plurality of spaced, distinct
    structural formations and another opposed mating member with an
    interlocking face selectively interlockable with any of these formations to
    complete the securing operation.

    (1)     Note.  An opposed member having an interlocking face which engages
    more than one of the structural formation on the interlocking face of the
    first member during a particular securing operation is only proper for this
    and the indented subclasses when the number of formations engaged in the
    securing operation can be less than the total number of formations
    available.

    (2)     Note.  When both interlocking members have plural formations, then
    the one considered the formations member is always the one with the large
    number of formations.  If both members have an equal number of formations
    and comply with the restrictions of (1) Note, then they are placed within
    this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for album fasteners having means allowing adjustment of their girth
    (e.g., selectively mating separable-fasteners*).

    16,     for bale and package ties or hose clamps having means allowing
    adjustment of their girth (e.g., selectively mating separable-fas-teners*).

    68+,    for a device for effectively varying either (1) the girth
    encircling structure having a principal utility not associated with this
    class (e.g., cuff or collar tightener) or (2) the length of a strap to
    which the device is mounted, and having relatively movable components which
    are intended to either (a) transmit a repositioning force to a portion of
    the encircling structure or strap when the components move relative to each
    other, or (b) allow the repositioning of a portion of the encircling
    structure or strap relative to another portion thereof to which it is
    linked thereto by the device without the components of the device ever
    completely separating from each other during this repositioning operation.

    163+,   for belt buckles.


CLS 24/581
TXT Formations positioned along wall forming mating-member-guiding cavity:

    Plural formations member under subclass 580 having its spaced, distinct
    structural formations located on a surface which at least partially defines
    one wall of a cavity utilized by this member to guide an inserted portion
    of the mating member towards its final interlock position with the
    formations.

    (1)     Note.  A cavity which is proper for this and the indented subclass
    may or may not fully encircle the segment of the pathway along which the
    selectively interlocking member travels during its initial insertion.
    However, if it only partially encircles this location, then it must clearly
    limit the movement of the inserted member in at least two directions which
    are perpendicular to the direction of its travel and in opposite directions
    to one another at this location.


CLS 24/582
TXT Formations member having movably attached or biased interlocking structure:

    Plural formations member under subclass 581 having at least one
    opposed-member-guiding or contacting component which is (a) utilized to
    enhance the interlocking connecting between the mating members, and (b)
    attached in a manner allowing, or includes a portion resilient* enough to
    allow, the movement of this component relative to the remainder of its
    member during the interlocking operation.

    (1)     Note.  The component of this subclass may be either a part of one
    of the formations, one of the formations, or a totally separate element
    from the formations.


CLS 24/583
TXT Formations member having movably attached or biased interlocking structure:

    Plural formations member under subclass 580 having at least one
    opposed-member-guiding or engaging component which is (a) utilized to
    enhance the interlocking connection between the mating members, and (b)
    attached in a manner allowing, or includes a portion resilient* enough to
    allow, the movement of this component relative to the remainder of its
    member during the interlocking operation.

    (1)     Note.  The component of this subclass may be either a part of one
    of the formations, one of the formations, or a totally separate element
    from the formations.


CLS 24/584
TXT Selectively interlocking member having movably attached or biased
    interlocking component:

    Selective interlocking member under subclass 580 having at least one
    component for guiding or engaging the plural formations on the opposed
    member which (a) enhances its interlocking engagement with one of the
    formations, and (b) is attached in a manner allowing, or includes a portion
    resilient* enough to allow, the movement of this component relative to the
    remainder of its member during the interlocking operation.


CLS 24/585
TXT And cavity for guiding movement of formations:

    Selective interlocking member under subclass 584 having a cavity utilized
    to guide an inserted portion of the plural formations member during the
    interlocking operation and limit its travel by this guidance.

    (1)     Note.  A cavity which is proper for this subclass may or may not
    fully encircle the segment of the pathway along which the formations member
    travels during its initial insertion. However, if it only partially
    encircles this location, then it must clearly limit the movement of the
    inserted member in at least two directions which are perpendicular to the
    direction of its travel and in opposite directions to one another at this
    location.


CLS 24/586
TXT Having mounting means allowing repositioning of member for facilitating
    interlock:

    Separable-fastener* under subclass 580 wherein at least one of the mating
    members is mounted to structure-to-be-secured* or a support therefor by
    means which allows this member to be repositioned during the securing
    operation to facilitate the interlocking of the faces of the two mating
    members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    683+,   for other separable-fasteners* mounted by means allowing at least
    one of their members to move its total interlocking face bodily to
    facilitate interlocking.


CLS 24/587
TXT Including member having elongated, resilient, interlocking face with
    identical, parallel cross sections throughout its length:

    Separable-fastener* under subclass 572 wherein one of the dissociable
    mating members includes a single resilient* interlocking face (i.e., the
    portion actually engaging the opposed member during interlock) or a group
    of contacting, aligned, resilient* interlocking faces having (a) a
    significantly longer dimension in one direction (i.e., the magnitude
    thereof being much greater than that of any dimension of a cross-sectional
    slice taken perpendicular thereto) and (b) identically shaped, uniformly
    sized, cross-sectional configurations positioned along and perpendicular to
    the length of this dimension.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400,    for a zipper* having an interlocking surface with a continuous
    cross-section along its full length.


CLS 24/588
TXT Including receiving member having cavity and mating member having
    insertable projection guided to interlock thereby:

    Separable-fastener* under subclass 572 including one dissociable mating
    member having a cavity portion on its interlocking face and another mating
    member having a projecting portion on its interlocking face insertable
    through the access opening (i.e., the portion of the cavity defining the
    segment of the pathway along which the projection travels during its
    initial insertion) of the cavity which receives and guides the projection
    towards the final position it maintains when the interlocking faces of the
    two mating members are secured together.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in which both interlocking members include a cavity
    at least partially encompassing a portion of the opposed member's structure
    during their association with each other are placed in this and the
    indented subclasses according to the following rule:  the receiving is
    always the member having the largest cavity which encompasses a portion of
    the mating structure's surface at the interlocking connection (i.e., area
    or mutual contact).  The only exceptions to this rule are when either a (1)
    hook, (2) member having a closable access opening, or (3) member having a
    cavity with a partially encircled access opening have a portion of their
    structure maneuvered through a smaller cavity located on the opposed member
    and having a fully encircled access opening which is not intended to be
    fully positioned between side walls of the first member's cavity in its
    final interlocked position.  In these situations the member having the
    cavity with the largest fully encircled access opening is always considered
    the receiving member.

    (2)     Note.  A cavity which is proper for this and the indented
    subclasses may or may not have a fully encircled access opening.  However,
    if it only partially encircles the initial segment of the projection's
    pathway, it must clearly limit the movement of the inserted projection in
    at least two directions which are perpendicular to the direction of
    projection travel and in opposite directions to one another at this segment
    in the pathway.

    (3)     Note.  The cavity referred to in this and the indented subclasses
    is always the largest structural formation of the receiving member which
    fulfills all the requirements of (1) and (2) Notes of this subclass, and
    the projection referred to is always the largest projecting portion
    inserted within this cavity and located on the opposed member.  Patents
    should not be placed in this and the indented subclasses on the basis of a
    small "cavity" or the "projection" therefor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    459+,   for a clasp* having two, interlocking, dissociable members which
    grip the structure-to-be-secured* therebetween.

    464+,   for a clasp* having inserted and receiving interlocking members
    connected by bendable, nonbiasing strap.


CLS 24/589
TXT Having divergent interlock means distinct from cavity or projection of its
    member:

    Separable-fastener* under subclass 588 wherein either the receiving or
    projection member is provided with additional means which (a) completes the
    interlock between the receiving and projection members, (b) is different
    from either the cavity or projection on its member in size, shape, and
    method of interlock, (c) is located completely outside of the cavity or is
    separate from the projection, and (d) respectively engages with structure
    or the opposed member distinct from either the projection or any supporting
    structure forming a rigidly affixed or integral extension of the projection
    or the internal surface of the structure defining the cavity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305+,   for a separable-fastener* member having two distinct and diversely
    shaped interlocking faces which are each intended to engage a different,
    separate, dissociable mating member and independently interlock therewith
    (i.e., their separate interlocking operations have no effect on each other
    and they can be engaged in any sequence) to complete a useful connection
    utilizing all of the dissociable members.

    605,    for plural, similar projections which each engage a different
    cavity and have relatively movable components or surfaces.

    630+,   for separable-fasteners* having two, distinct cavities, one of
    which includes a movable component or surface.

    697,    for plural distinct projections with no relatively movable
    components or surfaces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclass 563 for corsets and girdles having stays at their
    closure's edges and nonflaccid interengaging fasteners therefor.


CLS 24/590
TXT Projection or cavity rotates about axis of cavity access opening to
    interlock:

    Dissociable mating members under subclass 588, wherein either the
    projection or an opposed member  engaging or guiding portion of the
    projection or the receiving member is rotated about the central axis of the
    cavity's access opening (i.e., the portion of the cavity defining the
    opening through which the projection initially enters) after or during the
    insertion of the projection into the cavity to complete the interlock
    between the members.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, for fasteners which are rotated by a torque
    applying tool.


CLS 24/591
TXT Having projection rotatably connected to its member:

    Projection member under subclass 590 having at least a component of its
    inserted projection connected to another component of its member (i.e.,
    either a stationary component of the projection or noninserted component)
    in a manner allowing relative rotation around the connection therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    287,    for rotatably mounted projections connecting two freight containers
    together.


CLS 24/592
TXT And operator therefor:

    Projection member under subclass 591 having an operator* for turning the
    rotatably connected component about its connection.

    (1)     Note.  A component which both (a) prevents the separation of the
    dissociable mating members, and (b) is located on one of the mating
    members and directly engages the interlocking portion of the other mating
    member is not considered a proper operator* for this subclass and is placed
    as a relatively movable interlocking component.


CLS 24/593
TXT And position locking-means therefor:

    Projection member under subclass 591 having locking-means* for retaining
    the rotatably connected component at a particular orientation when it is in
    interlocking engagement.

    (1)     Note.  A component which (a) prevents the separation of the
    dissociable members, and (b) is located on one of the mating members and
    directly engages the interlocking portion of the other mating member is not
    considered a proper position locking-means* for this subclass and is placed
    elsewhere as an interlocking component.


CLS 24/594
TXT Including notch or hump on projection axially biased by spring:

    Locking-means* under subclass 593 including a notch or hump formed on the
    rotatably connected component and resilient* biasing means for shifting
    this rotatable component along its rotational axis and moving the notch or
    hump thereon into engagement with a nonrotating component of its member.


CLS 24/595
TXT Including radially biased element engaging against relatively rotating
    surface at connection:

    Locking-means* under subclass 593 including an element resiliently biased
    in a direction transverse to the central axis of the access opening and
    located on one relatively rotating component of the projection member and
    engaging and pushing against a contact surface located on the other
    relatively rotating component of the projection member at the connection to
    prevent any rotation until the resilient* force of the element is overcome
    by the camming action of the contact surface thereagainst.


CLS 24/596
TXT And spring for axially biasing projection:

    Projection member under subclass 591 provided with resilient* biasing means
    attached thereto for shifting the rotatably connected projection or
    component thereof along its rotational axis.


CLS 24/597
TXT Receiving member includes either movable connection between cavity
    components or variable configuration cavity:

    Receiving member under subclass 590 which includes either (a) two distinct,
    projection contacting or guiding components, in addition to or forming a
    portion or portions of the required guiding cavity, connected together in a
    manner allowing them at their connection point or region to move relative
    to each other for facilitating interlock with the projection of the mating
    member during the securement operation, or (b) a cavity having a projection
    contacting or guiding surface segment which is integral with or rigidly
    affixed to the surface forming the remainder of the cavity and movable
    relative to this remaining surface to change the shape of the cavity's
    periphery for facilitating interlock with the projection of the mating
    member during the securement operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    606+,   for an operator* for causing movement between projection components
    or surfaces.

    633+,   for an operator* for causing movement between components or
    surfaces of the receiving member.

    663,    for a receiving member having a resiliently biased interlocking
    component which is dissociated from its projection by relative rotation
    therebetween.


CLS 24/598.1
TXT Projection passes through cavity then moves toward noninserted portion of
    its member to complete interlock (e.g., snap hook):Projection member under
    subclass 588 in which the projection first passes completely through the
    cavity of the mating member and then relatively moves toward a directly
    cooperating noninserted portion (i.e., a portion which is not inserted into
    the cavity of the opposed member) of its member which is connected or
    linked to the projection in a manner allowing the movement therebetween
    needed to complete the interlocking of the projection and receiving members.

    (1)     Note.  To be proper for this and the indented subclasses the
    cooperating passed-through and noninserted portions of the projection
    member must not have any section of the structure-to-be-secured*, a support
    therefor, or the cavity member located between the nearest segments of
    their relatively movable cooperating surfaces.  Projections of this type
    are found in subclasses 604+ below.


CLS 24/598.2
TXT Entire projection member forms loop or ring when interlocked:Projection
    member under subclass 598.1 wherein the projection and the directly
    cooperating  portion of its member which is initially noninserted have
    curved shapes and together (a) form substantially the complete structure of
    the projection member and (b) in their interlocking position have a closed
    annular or oval shaped outer circumference which is passable through the
    cavity in either direction when turned.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    573.1   and 573.5, for a totally detachable loop or ring linking two spaced
    cavities.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclasses 85+ for a
    detachable chain link.

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclasses 241+ for devices for
    securing a tire chain to a wheel.


CLS 24/598.3
TXT Includes slidable gate closing entrance throat:
    Projection member under subclass 598.2 wherein the noninserted portion of
    the projection member includes barrier means which (a) is movably connected
    to the member by two distinct, rigid* or semirigid* formations integral
    with or fixedly attached to the member and barrier means and having
    mutually cooperating surfaces in sliding contact with each other for
    restricting the movement of the barrier means to a linear or curvilinear
    path and (b) closes the unobstructed space needed for the projection to
    pass into the cavity when initially interlocking therewith.


CLS 24/598.4
TXT Hook type projection member:
    Projection member under subclass 598.1 wherein the projection (a) is
    connected at one end to a generally planar noninserted shank mounted to the
    structure-to-be-secured * or another portion of the projection member and
    (b) has its opposite end (i.e., tip) free from fixed connection with any
    other portion of the projection member and bending (e.g., curving)
    generally toward either the shank or the connection of the projection
    member to the structure-to-be-secured*.

    (1)     Note.  Hooks which are used as tools are excluded from Class 24
    (see (7) Note of the class definition) and are found elsewhere (e.g.,
    294-26).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 7 for methods and apparatus for making a
    hook.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 43.16+ for a
    fishing hook.

    54,     Harness, subclasses 46.1, 46.2 and 62 for a hook shaped device used
    in combination with harness.

    114,    Ships, subclasses 377+ for a connector (e.g., hook) adopted to
    connect a life craft to life craft handling apparatus.

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclasses 241+ for chain securing
    device in combination with, or specially adapted for use with, an annular
    tire chain.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclass 4 for a snap hook used
    with window cleaner harness.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 85+ for a garment hanger (e.g., coat
    hanger) provided with a support hook.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 211, 213, 215, 225.21, 227.1, 290.1, 301, 303,
    304+, and 339+ for a bracket having either a hook type article support or a
    support hook for the bracket.

    278,    Land Vehicles: Animal Draft Appliances, subclasses 51, 111+, and
    127+ for a hook shaped device in combination with a draft appliance.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclasses 95+ for a hooked end bolt.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 82.17+ for a
    hoistline or grab hook having a throat closure.

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Part Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, subclasses 57+ for a hook used to replace a hand.

    D11,    Jewelry, Symbolic Insignia, and Ornaments, subclasses 208+ for a
    hook and eye type fastener.


CLS 24/598.5
TXT Plural hooks entering opposite sides of same cavity:
    Projection member under subclass 598.4 having two bent projections (i.e.,
    hooks) which enter different sides of the same cavity and pass completely
    therethrough.

    (1)     Note.  The noninserted portion of the projection member with which
    each bent projection cooperates may be the shank of the other bent
    projection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 82.18 for
    overlapping, connected hooks which form a loop when closed.


CLS 24/598.6
TXT Hooks formed solely from wire:
    Projection member under subclass 598.5 in which both bent projections are
    completely constructed from a rigid* or semirigid* filament.


CLS 24/598.7
TXT Noninserted portion of projection member includes movably connected gate
    for closing access throat:Projection member under subclass 598.4 wherein
    the noninserted portion of the projection member includes barrier means
    movably connected to the shank which directly closes or reduces (i.e.,
    without the use of intervening projection structure) the unobstructed space
    between the tip of the projection and the shank when located in one of its
    positions to less than the amount of space needed to pass the projection
    into or out of the cavity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements subclasses 82.17+ for a
    hoistline or grab hook having a device for closing the entrance throat of
    the hook.


CLS 24/598.8
TXT Threaded gate:
    Projection member under subclass 598.7 wherein the barrier means includes,
    or is rigidly affixed to, a screw-threaded formation which cooperates with
    a similar formation on the shank in a manner allowing the barrier when
    rotated to move between its obstructing and unobstructing positions.


CLS 24/598.9
TXT Revolvably mounted disc shaped gate:
    Projection member under subclass 598.7 wherein the barrier means includes a
    thin, flat plate having a generally circular perimeter and connected to the
    shank in a manner allowing it to rotate about its central axis.


CLS 24/599.1
TXT Pivotally connected gate:
    Projection member under subclass 598.7 wherein the barrier means is
    connected to the shank in a manner allowing it to both (a) swing in an
    arcuate path about a constantly contacted connection point or region
    located on the shank and (b) maintain movement between the barrier means
    and shank at their contact point or region.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 82.19+ for a
    hoistline or grab hook having a pivoted device for closing the entrance
    throat of the hook.


CLS 24/599.2
TXT Gate swings transversely to plane of hook:
    Barrier means under subclass 599.1 swinging in an arcuate path which is
    perpendicular to the plane of the projection.


CLS 24/599.3
TXT Gate also slides relative to pivot:
    Barrier means under subclass 599.1 additionally having guiding structure
    which allows the connection of the barrier to move in a smooth linear
    manner relative to the contacted connection point or region about which it
    swings.


CLS 24/599.4
TXT Having means biasing gate about pivot:
    Barrier means under subclass 599.1 which is swung about its connection and
    held either in or out of its obstructing positions by a biasing force
    stored in either (a) a separate spring or (b) an integral, resilient*
    extension of the barrier means which does not itself act as a barrier.


CLS 24/599.5
TXT And position locking-means for gate:
    Barrier means under subclass 599.4 also having locking-means* for retaining
    the barrier means at a particular location.

    (1)     Note.  A component which (a) prevents the separation of the
    dissociable members and (b) is located on one of the mating members and
    directly engages the interlocking portion of the other mating member is not
    considered a proper position locking-means* for this subclass and is placed
    elsewhere as an interlocking component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 82.2 and
    82.21 for a hoistline or grab hook having a pivoted device for closing the
    entrance throat of the hook and a latch for holding it in its closed
    position.


CLS 24/599.6
TXT Includes distinct biasing spring:
    Barrier means under subclass 599.4 wherein a separate spring stores the
    biasing force.


CLS 24/599.7
TXT Coil type spring:
    Barrier means under subclass 599.6 wherein the separate spring has a
    segment bent or molded into the shape of at least two partial, similar
    adjacent loops which curve around a common central axis and store the
    biasing force of the spring.


CLS 24/599.8
TXT Coiled about pivotal axis of gate:
    Barrier means under subclass 599.7 wherein the loops of the separate spring
    encircle the connection point or region about which the barrier swings.


CLS 24/599.9
TXT Having position locking-means for gate:
    Barrier means under subclass 599.1 having locking-mean* for retaining the
    barrier at a particular location.

    (1)     Note.  A conponent which (a) prevents the separation of the
    dissociable member and (b) is located on one of the mating member and
    directly engages the interlocking portion of the other mating member is not
    considered a proper position locking-means* for this subclass and is placed
    elsewhere as an interlocking component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 82.2 and
    82.21 for a hoistline or grab hook having a pivoted device for closing the
    entrance throat of the hook and a latch for holding it in its closed
    positons.


CLS 24/600.1
TXT Locking-means pivotally connected:
    Barrier means under subclass 599.9 wherein the locking-means* for the
    barrier is connected to another portion of the projection member in a
    manner allowing it to both (a) swing in an arcuate path about a constantly
    contacted connection point or region and (b) maintain movement between the
    locking-means* and the other portion of the projection at their contact
    point or region.


CLS 24/600.2
TXT Locking-means slidably mounted:
    Barrier means under subclass 599.9 wherein the locking-means* for the
    barrier is connected to another portion of the projection member by two
    distinct, rigid* or semirigid* formations which are integral with or
    fixedly attached to the locking-means* and other portion of the projection
    member respectively and have mutually cooperating surfaces both (a) in
    sliding contact with each other and (b) restricting  the movement of the
    locking-means* to substantially a primary direction along a linear or
    curvilinear path.


CLS 24/600.3
TXT Gate closes when structure-to-be-secured is tensioned:
    Barrier means under subclass 599.1 which is swung about the barrier means'
    connection to the shank and held in its obstructing position by a force
    applied to the structure-to-be-secured* at a point remote from the
    projection member and transmitted thereto through the portion of the
    projecting member mounting the member to the structure-to-be-secured*.


CLS 24/600.4
TXT Track or way guided gate:
    Projection member under subclass 598.7 wherein the barrier means is
    connected to the shank by two distinct, rigid* or semirigid* formations
    which are integral with or fixedly attached to the shank and barrier means
    respectively and have mutually cooperating surfaces both (a) in sliding or
    rolling contact with each other and (b) restricting the movement of the
    barrier means to a substantially single, primary direction along a linear
    or curvilinear path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 82.23 for a
    hoistline or grab hook having a slidable device for closing the entrance
    throat of the hook.


CLS 24/600.5
TXT Having means biasing gate:
    Barrier means under subclass 600.4 which is slid or rolled along its path
    and held in its obstructing or nonobstructing position by a biasing force
    store in either (a) a separate spring or (b) an integral, resilient*
    extension of the barrier means which does not itself act as a barrier.


CLS 24/600.6
TXT Guide of gate encircles shank:
    Barrier means under subclass 600.5 wherein the rigid* or semirigid*,
    movement restricting formation of the barrier means forms a closed ring
    around the shank of the projection member.


CLS 24/600.7
TXT Cavity in shank forms track or way:
    Barrier means under subclass 600.5 wherein the rigid* or semirigid*,
    movement restricting formation of the shank includes a hole therein along
    which the movement restricting formation of the barriers means slides or
    rolls when the barrier means moves between it obstructing and
    nonobstructing positions.


CLS 24/600.8
TXT With position locking-means for gate:
    Barrier means under subclass 600.7 provided with locking-means* for
    retaining the barrier means at a particular location.

    (1)     Note.  A component which (a) prevents the separation of the
    dissociable members and (b) is located on one of the mating members and
    directly engages the interlocking portion of the other mating member is not
    considered a proper position locking-means* for this subclass and is placed
    elsewhere as an interlocking component.


CLS 24/600.9
TXT Resilient, self-biased gate:
    Projection member under subclass 598.7 wherein the barrier means is
    integral with or fixedly attached to the shank and has a surface segment
    both (a) movable relative to the shank and (b) biased either into or out of
    its obstructing position by its own resiliency.


CLS 24/601.1
TXT With position locking-means for gate:
    Barrier means under subclass 600.9 provided with locking-means* for
    retaining the barrier means at a particular location.

    (1)     Note.  A component which (a) prevents the separation of the
    dissociable members and (b) is located on one of the mating members and
    directly engages the interlocking portion of the other mating member is not
    considered a proper position locking-means* for this subclass and is placed
    elsewhere as an interlocking component.


CLS 24/601.2
TXT Gate and hook formed from plastic:

    Projection member under subclass 600.9 in which the shank, projection, and
    barrier means are all completely constructed from a plastic compound (e.g.,
    synthetic resin, polymer).


CLS 24/601.3
TXT Gate and hook formed solely from wire:

    Projection member under subclass 600.9 in which the projection and the
    barrier means are both completely constructed from bent, resilient*
    filament.


CLS 24/601.4
TXT Gate and hook formed from single piece of sheet metal:

    Projection member under subclass 600.9 in which the shank, projection, and
    barrier means are all completely constructed from one thin piece of metal
    which has been cut or bent in such a manner that the barrier is biased by
    its own resiliency.


CLS 24/601.5
TXT Projection pivotally attached to shank or mounting structure:

    Projection member under subclass 598.4 wherein the projection is movably
    connected to either (1) the generally planar noninserted shank or (2)
    another noninserted portion of the projection member mounting the
    projection and shank to the structure-to-be-secured* in a manner allowing
    the projection to both (a) swing in an arcuate path about a constantly
    contacted connection point or region located on the shank or mounting
    portion after insertion into the cavity to interlock therewith and (b)
    maintain movement between the projection and shank or mounting portion at
    their contact point or region.


CLS 24/601.6
TXT Projection slidably mounted to shank or mounting structure:

    Projection member under subclass 598.4 wherein the projection is movably
    connected for allowing interlocking with the cavity after insertion to
    either (1) the generally planar noninserted shank or (2) another
    noninserted portion of the projection member mounting the projection shank
    to the structure-to-be-secured* by two distinct, rigid* or semirigid*
    formations which are integral with or fixedly attached to the projection
    and shank or the shank and mounting portion respectively and have mutually
    cooperating surfaces both (a) in sliding contact with each other and (b)
    restricting the movement of the projection or projection and shank to
    substantially a primary direction along a linear or curvilinear path.


CLS 24/601.7
TXT Projection self-biased towards shank or mounting structure:

    Projection member under subclass 598.4 in which the projection is integral
    with or rigidly affixed to the shank and is biased towards either the
    shank, structure-to-be-secured*, or projection member connecting structure
    by its own resiliency to allow interlocking with the cavity after its
    insertion therethrough.


CLS 24/601.8
TXT And formed solely from wire:

    Projection member under subclass 601.7 having the projection and shank both
    completely constructed from at least one elongated, bent filament.


CLS 24/601.9
TXT Cooperating with relatively stationary wire gate:

    Projection member under subclass 601.8 wherein the noninserted portion of
    the projection member includes a distinct formation (e.g., gate)
    constructed from the filament and nonmovably connected to the shank which
    cooperates with the relatively movable biased projection and acts as a
    barrier to close or reduce the unobstructed space between the tip of the
    projection and the shank when the projection is located in one of its
    positions to less than the amount of space needed to pass the projection
    into or out the cavity.


CLS 24/602
TXT Interlocking portion actuated or released responsive to preselected
    condition (e.g., heat, pressure):Separable-fastener* under subclass 588
    having the interlocking structure of one of the mating members shifted into
    or out of interlocking engagement when a specific, preselected condition
    (e.g., heat, pressure) for which the fastener is designed to be sensitive
    beyond a specific level is encountered in the fastener's working
    environment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    606+,   for an operator* for causing movement between projection components
     or surfaces.

    633+,   for an operator* for causing movement between components or
    surfaces of the receiving member.


CLS 24/603
TXT Having electric or fluid powered, actuation or release, of interlock:

    Separable-fastener* under subclass 588 having interlocking structure
    shifted into or out of interlocking engagement by either (a) direct
    electrically generated or fluid force thereon, or (b) electric or fluid
    powered means pushing thereagainst during the association or separation of
    the receiving and projection members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    303,    for magnetic fasteners which may utilize electric power to create
    their magnetic field.

    606+,   for an operator* for causing movement between projection components
    or surfaces.

    633+,   for an operator* for causing movement between components or
    surfaces of the receiving member.


CLS 24/604
TXT Projection having movable connection between components thereof or variable
    configuration:

    Projection member under subclass 588 wherein the projection inserted in or
    through the cavity includes either (a) two distinct components connected
    together in a manner allowing them at their connection point or region to
    move relative to each other for facilitating engagement and interlock with
    a portion of the receiving member during the securement operation, or (b) a
    surface segment which is integral with or rigidly affixed to the surface
    forming the remainder of the projection and moves relative to this
    remaining surface at a point spaced therefrom to vary the shape of the
    projection for facilitating engagement and interlock with a portion of the
    receiving member during the securement operation.

    (1)     Note.  The portion of the projection member which rigidly affixes
    the movable surfaces of the projection to each other or movably connects
    the components of the projection with each other is not required to be
    inserted in or through the cavity.


CLS 24/605
TXT With additional, similar projection for engaging different cavity:

    Separable-fastener* under subclass 604 provided with an additional
    projection having a similar shape and operation to the first projection for
    engaging another cavity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    589,    for a separable-fastener* having divergent interlock means distinct
    from required cavity or projection of its member.

    630+,   for a separable-fastener* having both a cavity with a movable
    component or surface and an additional cavity, each of which are intended
    to engage a different projection when interlocked.

    697,    for plural distinct projections with no relatively movable
    components or surfaces.


CLS 24/606
TXT And operator therefor:

    Projection member under subclass 604 having an operator* for causing the
    movement between the two projection components or surface segments during
    the securing operation.

    (1)     Note.  A component which both (a) prevents the separation of the
    dissociable mating members, and (b) is located on one of the mating members
    and directly engages the interlocking portion of the other mating member is
    not considered a proper operator* for this subclass and its indented
    subclasses and is placed as a relatively movable interlocking component
    elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    602,    for a separable-fastener* having interlocking structure actuated or
    released responsive to preselected condition.

    603,    for a separable-fastener* having interlocking structure actuated or
    released by electric or fluid power.

    633+,   for an operator* for causing movement between components or
    surfaces of the receiving member.


CLS 24/607
TXT Including camming or wedging element on projection member:

    Operator* under subclass 606 including either a rigid* or semirigid*
    rotatable camming or shiftable wedging element mounted on the projection
    member and having a contact surface which slides against, for causing the
    movement of, a cooperating contact surface on or attached to either the
    interlock component or a surface segment thereof when a rotating or
    shifting force is applied to the camming or wedging element, and wherein
    the relative orientation or contour of one of the contacting surfaces
    causes the movement of the interlocking component or surface segment to be
    in a direction other than (i.e., not identical to) that of the shifting or
    rotating movement of the element.


CLS 24/608
TXT Pivotally attached element:

    Operator* under subclass 607 in which the element is pivotally attached to
    the projection member.


CLS 24/609
TXT Including pivotal connection between projection components:

    Projection under subclass 604 having one of its interlocking components
    connected either to its other interlocking component or another portion of
    the projection member linking it thereto in a manner allowing it to both
    (a) swing in an arcuate path about a constantly contacted connection point
    or region located on either the other component or the intermediate linking
    portion, and (b) maintain the required relative movement between the
    surfaces of the components or the component and linking portion at the
    contact point or region.

    (1)     Note.  An interlocking component which swings about a nonfixed
    region of and maintains constant contact with the other component or
    linking portion is included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    643+,   for a receiving member having a pivotal connection between two of
    its components which allows relative movement between two of its
    interlocking components.

    684,    for a pivotal, mounting connection allowing bodily movement of the
    projection or cavity towards its interlocking connection.


CLS 24/610
TXT Component slides relative to connection:

    Swinging interlock component under subclass 609 which additionally moves in
    a sliding manner along the contact region of the other interlock component
    or linking portion.

    (1)     Note.  The pivoted engaging member may slide either transversely to
    or along the constantly contacted region.

    (2)     Note.  Relatively sliding portions which form part of and are
    supported by the swinging component are not considered proper for this
    subclass.


CLS 24/611
TXT And spring or resilient extension biasing about pivot:

    Swinging interlock component under subclass 609 which is swung about its
    connection and held either in or out of interlock position with the
    interlocking structure of the receiving member by the biasing force stored
    in either (a) a separate spring, or (b) an integral, resilient* extension
    of this interlock component which does not itself interlock with the
    receiving member.


CLS 24/612
TXT Including slidably guided connection between nonself-biasing projection
    components:

    Projection under subclass 604 having one of its interlocking components
    connected either to its other interlocking component or another portion of
    the projection member linking it thereto by two distinct, rigid or
    semirigid* formations which (1) are each integral with or attached to a
    different one of the components or this component and the linking portion
    and (2) have mutually cooperating surfaces both (a) in sliding contact with
    each other, and (b) restricting the relative movement of this interlocking
    component to substantially a single primary direction between its interlock
    and noninterlock positions, and further wherein this interlocking component
    is not biased along the primary direction into or out of interlocking
    engagement with the interlocking structure of the receiving member by its
    own resiliency.


CLS 24/613
TXT And distinct spring biasing component:

    Projection under subclass 612 having a spring separate from its slidably
    moving interlocking component which applies a biasing force to and causes
    the movement of this component into or out of interlock with the receiving
    member.


CLS 24/614
TXT Including resiliently biased projection component or surface segment:

    Projection under subclass 604 having at least one interlocking component or
    surface segment both (a) movable relative to the remaining interlocking
    structure of the projection and (b) biased either into or out of its normal
    interlocking position by its own resiliency or the resiliency of a
    noninterlocking component of the projection member attached thereto or
    contacting therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    662+,   for a cavity member having two, relatively movable, interlocking
    components or segments of which at least one is resiliently biased to allow
    the movement.

    683,    for a projection or cavity having an integral resilient* segment
    which is utilized to mount, and allow bodily movement of, the projection or
    cavity.


CLS 24/615
TXT Requiring manual force applied against bias to interlock or disengage:

    Projection under subclass 614 wherein the resiliently biased component or
    segment is intended to be moved either into or out of its normal
    interlocking position by manual force applied directly to the biased
    component or segment in a direction opposite to that of the biasing force.

    (1)     Note.  To be proper for this and the indented subclasses it is
    required that the direction of this manual force for moving the resiliently
    biased component or segment be always applied at an angle to the direction
    of travel of the projection member during its final stage of association
    with the receiving member.


CLS 24/616
TXT Having connected leading edge and separated trailing arms:

    Projection under subclass 615 having (a) the end of the biased component or
    segment which is initially inserted into the cavity either rigidly
    connected to or integral with an end of the other projection component or
    segment, and (b) the opposite ends of both of these projection components
    or segments fully detached and biased away from each other.


CLS 24/617
TXT Cooperating with cavity having side walls and axially biased component
    capping end:

    Separable-fastener* under subclass 614 wherein the biased component or
    segment of the projection interlocks with a cavity member having (1) an
    access opening, (2) side walls extending in a direction generally parallel
    to the central axis of this opening, and (3) a projection engaging
    component having at least a portion of its surface both (a) biased for
    movement along a path following the central axis of the access opening and
    side walls of the cavity and (b) preventing movement of the inserted
    projection along this axis beyond the location of the axially bias
    component in its retracted position.


CLS 24/618
TXT Forming total external surface of projection:

    Projection under subclass 614 having its outer surface constructed entirely
    from either a single piece or a plurality of rigidly attached pieces of
    resilient* material biased into or out of normal interlock position by its
    or their own resiliency.


CLS 24/619
TXT And encircling hollow central area:

    Projection under subclass 618 wherein the resilient* material forms a
    configuration having a central area (a) encircled by the material, and (b)
    at least partially devoid of any other projection member structure.

    (1)     Note.  A cross section of the projection's encircling configuration
    transverse to the insertion path need not fully enclose the central void
    area with a continuous surface formed by the resilient* material, if there
    are segments of the resilient* material on all sides of the void.


CLS 24/620
TXT Having separate mounting means inserted into area:

    Projection under subclass 619 having separate means inserted into its
    encircled area and engaging with the resilient* material for mounting the
    projection to the structure-to-be-secured* or a support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    682.1+, for means for mounting a projection or cavity portion of a
    separable-fastener*.


CLS 24/621
TXT Plastic deformation of means or surface required for mounting:

    Mounting means under subclass 620 in which either the portion of mounting
    means inserted into the projection or a portion of the projection member
    engaging therewith is permanently deformed during the mounting operation by
    a destructive force (i.e., a force in excess of the amount necessary for
    its plastic deformation to the material) which completes the connection
    between the two.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    691,    for projection or cavity mounting means which is inserted into the
    projection or cavity and deformed.


CLS 24/622
TXT Having separate mounting means encompassing cross section or projection:

    Projection member under subclass 619 having separate mounting means
    encompassing a cross-sectional area of the configuration of the projection
    and engaging with the material thereof to mount the projection to the
    structure-to-be-secured* or a support.

    (1)     Note.  The separate mounting means of this subclass need not fully
    encompass the cross section of the projection with a continuous surface if
    there are segments of the material located on all sides thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    692,    for projection or cavity mounting means which encircles the
    projection or cavity and is deformed.


CLS 24/623
TXT Having dome-shaped head and expansion slit along side:

    Projection under subclass 619 with its configuration having both (a) an
    arched or spherical portion which is the first portion of the configuration
    inserted into the receiving member during the securement operation, and (b)
    a gap along the side of the configuration for facilitating expansion and
    contraction thereof.


CLS 24/624
TXT And connected surface at tip of head:

    Projection under subclass 623 having all sides of the arched or spherical
    portion connection at the leading edge of the projection (i.e., the portion
    of the projection initially inserted into the cavity).


CLS 24/625
TXT Having inserted end formed by oppositely biased surface segments:

    Projection under subclass 618 having the end thereof, which is initially
    inserted into the cavity of the receiving member formed from a plurality of
    the resilient* components or surface segments unattached to each other at
    this end and biased by their resiliency in opposite directions.


CLS 24/626
TXT Constructed from wire:

    Projection under subclass 618 formed from an elongated resilient* filament.


CLS 24/627
TXT Having both resiliently biased and rigid components forming external
    surface of projection:

    Projection under subclass 614 having both a resilient* component and a
    separate rigid* component together forming the interlocking surface of the
    projection.


CLS 24/628
TXT Projection member including noninserted spring for engaging and pushing
    against receiving member:

    Projection member under subclass 588 including a resilient* component which
    both (a) is distinct from the projection of its member and not insertable
    therewith into the cavity of the receiving member, and (b) engages and
    pushes against the receiving member during the securement operation to
    enhance the interlock between the projection and cavity.


CLS 24/629
TXT Receiving member includes either movable connection between interlocking
    components or variable configuration cavity:

    Receiving member under subclass 588 which includes either (a) two distinct
    projection engaging or guiding components, in addition to or forming a
    portion or portions of the required guiding cavity, connected together in a
    manner allowing them at their connection point or region to move relative
    to each other for facilitating interlock with the projection of the mating
    member during the securement operation, or (b) a cavity having a projection
    engaging or guiding surface segment which is integral with or rigidly
    affixed to the surface forming the remainder of the cavity and movable
    relative to this remaining surface to change the shape of the cavity's
    periphery for facilitating interlock with the projection of the mating
    member during the securement operation.


CLS 24/630
TXT With additional cavity for engaging different projection:

    Separable-fastener* under subclass 629 having a receiving member provided
    with another cavity for engaging an additional projection located on either
    the same opposed projection member or a different projection member.

    (1)     Note.  See (2) Note and (3) Note of subclass 588 for clarification
    on what structure is required to form an additional cavity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    589,    for a separable-fastener* having divergent interlock means distinct
    from required cavity or projection of its member.

    605,    for plural, similar shaped projections which each engage a
    different cavity and have relatively movable components or surfaces.

    697,    for plural distinct cavities with no relatively movable components
    or surfaces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclass 563 for corsets and girdles having stays at their
    closure's edges and nonflaccid interengaging fasteners therefor.


CLS 24/631
TXT Having common means actuating or releasing interlocking components or
    surfaces:

    Separable-fastener* under subclass 630 wherein each of the cavities of the
    receiving member is provided with a projection interlocking component or
    surface which is shifted into or out of interlocking engagement with its
    projection by a force transmitted thereto from a single means (e.g., push
    button) which is linked to or integral with the interlocking component or
    surface of both cavities.


CLS 24/632
TXT And interlocking with independently associated or dissociated projection
    members:

    Separable-fastener* under subclass 631 in which the projections engaging
    and interlocking with the cavities are carried by different members capable
    of moving independently of each other during their association with or
    separation from the receiving member.


CLS 24/633
TXT And operator therefor:

    Receiving member under subclass 629 including an operator* for causing the
    relative movement between the two projection engaging or guiding components
    or segments during the securing operation.

    (1)     Note.  A component which both (a) prevents the separation of the
    dissociable mating members, and (b) is located on one of the mating members
    and directly engages the interlocking portion of the other mating member is
    not considered a proper operator* for this subclass and its indented
    subclasses and is placed as a relatively movable interlocking component
    elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    602,    for a separable-fastener* having interlocking structure actuated or
    released responsive to preselected condition.

    603,    for a separable-fastener* having interlocking structure actuated or
    released by electric or fluid power.

    606+,   for an operator* for causing movement between projection components
    or segments.


CLS 24/634
TXT For plural, oppositely shifting, similar interlocking components or
    segments:

    Receiving member under subclass 633 wherein the operator* causes relative
    movement in opposite directions between two, similarly shaped, projection
    engaging or guiding components or segments.


CLS 24/635
TXT Operator includes camming or wedging element:

    Operator* under subclass 634 including either a rigid* or semirigid*,
    rotatable camming or shiftable wedging element having a contact surface
    which slides against, for causing the movement of, a cooperating contact
    surface on or attached to either the interlock component or segment when a
    rotating or shifting force is applied to the camming or wedging element,
    and wherein the relative orientation or contour of one of the contacting
    surfaces causes the movement of the contacted surface of the interlocking
    component or segment to be in a direction other than that of the shifting
    or rotating movement of the element.


CLS 24/636
TXT Including pivotally connected element on receiving member:

    Operator* under subclass 633 including an element connected to the
    receiving member in a manner allowing it to both (a) swing in an arcuate
    path about a constantly contacted connection point or region of the
    stationary remainder of the receiving member, and (b) maintain relative
    movement between the surfaces of the element and remainder of the receiving
    member at the contact point or region when causing the relative movement
    between the components or segments.


CLS 24/637
TXT For shifting pivotally connected interlocking component:

    Receiving member under subclass 636 wherein the operator* element moves a
    projection engaging or guiding component which is connected to the
    stationary remainder of the receiving member in a manner allowing it to
    both (a) swing in an arcuate path about a constantly contacted connection
    point or region on the remainder of the receiving member, and (b) maintain
    relative movement between its surface and that of the remainder of the
    receiving member at the contact point or region when moving between its
    interlock and noninterlock positions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    646,    for a swinging, interlocking component and a relatively movable
    handle therefor.


CLS 24/638
TXT Element and component pivot about same axis:

    Receiving member under subclass 637 in which both the operator* element and
    the projection or guiding component moved by the element swing about the
    same constantly contacted connection point or region located on the
    stationary remainder of the receiving member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    646,    for a swinging, interlocking component and a relatively movable
    handle therefor.


CLS 24/639
TXT For shifting slidably connected and guided, nonself-biasing, interlocking
    component:

    Receiving member under subclass 636 wherein the operator* element moves a
    projection engaging or guiding component interconnected with the remaining
    stationary component of the receiving member by two distinct, rigid* or
    semirigid* formations which (1) are each integral with or fixedly attached
    to a different one of the components, and (2) have mutually cooperating
    surfaces both (a) in sliding contact with each other and (b) restricting
    the relative motion of the moving projection engaging or guiding component
    to substantively a single primary direction between its interlock and
    noninterlock positions, and further wherein this relatively movable
    component is neither biased along the primary direction into or out of
    interlock engagement with the interlocking structure of the projection by
    its own resiliency.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    655,    for a sliding interlocking component and a relatively movable
    handle therefor.


CLS 24/640
TXT Including slidably connected and guided element on receiving member:

    Operator* under subclass 633 including an element connected to a remaining
    stationary component of the receiving member by two distinct, rigid*
    formations which (1) are each integral with or fixedly attached to the
    element and the component, and (2) have mutually cooperating surfaces both
    (a) sliding relative to each other and (b) restricting the relative motion
    of the element to substantively a single primary direction.


CLS 24/641
TXT For shifting pivotally connected interlocking component:

    Receiving member under subclass 640 wherein the operator* element moves a
    projection engaging or guiding component which is connected to the
    stationary remainder of the receiving member in a manner allowing it to
    both (a) swing in an arcuate path about a constantly contacted connection
    point or region on the remainder of the receiving member, and (b) maintain
    relative movement between its surface and that of the remainder of the
    receiving member at the contact point or region when moving between its
    interlock and noninterlock positions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    646,    for a swinging interlocking component and a relatively movable
    handle therefor.


CLS 24/642
TXT For shifting slidably connected and guided, nonself-biasing, interlocking
    component:

    Receiving member under subclass 640 wherein the operator* element moves a
    projection engaging or guiding component connected to a remaining
    stationary component of the receiving member by two distinct, rigid* or
    semirigid* formations which (1) are each integral with or fixedly attached
    to a different one of the components, and (2) have mutually cooperating
    surfaces both (a) in sliding contact with each other and (b) restricting
    the relative motion of the moving projection engaging or guiding component
    to substantively a single primary direction between its interlock and
    noninterlock positions, and further wherein this relatively movable
    component is neither biased along the primary direction into nor out of
    interlock engagement with the interlocking structure of the projection by
    its own resiliency.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    655,    for a sliding interlocking component and a relatively movable
    handle therefor.


CLS 24/643
TXT Having pivotally connected interlocking component:

    Receiving member under subclass 629 having its relatively movable
    projection engaging or guiding component connected to its other projection
    engaging or guiding component in a manner allowing it to both (a) swing in
    an arcuate path about a constantly contacted connection point or region
    located on either the other component or an intermediate linking portion of
    the member, and (b) maintain the required relative movement between the
    surfaces of the components or the component and linking portion at the
    contact point or region.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    609+,   for a receiving member having a pivotal connection between two
    components which allows relative movement between two, distinct, inserted
    components of its projection.

    684,    for a pivotal, mounting connection allowing bodily movement of the
    projection or cavity towards its interlocking connection.


CLS 24/644
TXT Blocking removal of formation on projection from complementary formation on
    side wall of cavity:

    Receiving member under subclass 643 wherein the swinging component moves
    into or out of a position which prevents the separation of a distinct
    interlocking formation (e.g., aperture) located on the projection member
    from a distinct stationary interlocking formation located on the axially
    extending walls of the cavity having a shape complementary to the formation
    of the projection.

    (1)     Note.  The formation within the cavity must be more than a simple
    extension of and be spaced from the initial structure defining the access
    opening.


CLS 24/645
TXT And position locking-means therefor:

    Receiving member under subclass 643 having locking-means* for retaining the
    swinging component at a particular location.

    (1)     Note.  A component which (a) prevents the separation of the
    dissociable members and (b) is located on one of the mating members and
    directly engages the interlocking portion of the other mating member is not
    considered a proper position locking-means* for this subclass and is places
    elsewhere as an interlocking component.


CLS 24/646
TXT And relatively movable handle therefor:

    Receiving member under subclass 643 having an element connected to it which
    is both (1) distinct from the swinging component and neither guides nor
    interlocks with the projection, and (2) connected to its member in a manner
    which allows it to (a) transmit a manual input force applied directly upon
    it to the swinging component when moving therewith and (b) move relative to
    the swinging component only when an input force applied to the element or
    component is not transmitted therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    638,    for a swinging interlocking component and a manually engaged
    pivoting element which requires relative movement between the component and
    element during the transmittal of an input force therebetween.


CLS 24/647
TXT Requiring manual force thereon to interlock or disengage:

    Swinging component under subclass 643 in which manual force is intended to
    be applied directly on, and in the same direction as the motion of, this
    component when swinging it relative to the other component and moving it
    either to or from its interlocking position with the projection.


CLS 24/648
TXT Plural, oppositely shifting, similar interlocking component:

    Receiving member under subclass 647 having two, separate, similarly shaped,
    swinging components which travel in opposite directions when moving between
    their interlock and noninterlock positions.


CLS 24/649
TXT Having aperture therein alignable with parallel access opening:

    Swinging component under subclass 647 having an aperture (e.g., closed
    hole, channel) formed in it which is (a) located in a plane parallel to the
    one in which the access opening of the cavity is located, and (b) travels
    in this plane between a position in which one portion thereof is aligned
    with the central axis of the access opening when the projection is
    interlocked and another position in which this interlocking portion of the
    aperture is in a location which allows the projection to freely pass
    through the access opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    597,    for a receiving member having a component which is mounted to
    rotate about the central axis of the access opening of the cavity and
    includes an interlocking aperture located therein or therethrough.


CLS 24/650
TXT Having interlocking portion thereof housed continuously within cavity:

    Swinging component under subclass 647 having its entire projection engaging
    portion always enclosed within a projection guiding cavity formed by the
    distinct component to which it is connected.


CLS 24/651
TXT Having cavity with side walls and axially biased component capping end:

    Receiving member under subclass 629 having (1) a cavity component or
    surface segment with an access opening and side walls extending in a
    direction generally parallel to the central axis of this opening, and (2) a
    projection engaging component or segment, with at least a portion of its
    surface both (a) biased for movement along a path following the central
    axis of the opening of the cavity and (b) preventing movement of the
    inserted projection along this axis beyond its location in its retracted
    position.


CLS 24/652
TXT Having slidably connected, nonself-biasing interlocking component:

    Receiving member under subclass 629 having its relatively movable engaging
    or guiding component connected to its other engaging or guiding component
    by two distinct, rigid* or semirigid* formations which (1) are each
    integral with or fixedly attached to a different one of the components, and
    (2) have mutually cooperating surfaces both (a) sliding relative to each
    other and (b) restricting the relative motion of the moving component to
    substantively a single primary direction between its interlock and
    noninterlock positions, and further wherein the relatively movable
    component is not biased  along the primary direction into or out of
    interlocking engagement with interlocking structure of the projection by
    it's own resiliency.


CLS 24/653
TXT Blocking removal of formation on projection from complementary formation on
    side wall of cavity:

    Receiving member under subclass 652 in which the relatively movable sliding
    component moves into or out of a position which prevents the separation of
    a distinct interlocking formation (e.g., aperture) located on the
    projection member and a distinct stationary interlocking formation located
    on the axially extending walls of the cavity having a shape complementary
    to the formation of the projection.

    (1)     Note.  The formation within the cavity must be more than a simple
    extension of the access opening and axially spaced therefrom.


CLS 24/654
TXT And position locking-means therefor:

    Receiving member under subclass 652 having locking-means* for retaining the
    sliding component at a particular location.

    (1)     Note.  A component which (a) prevents the separation of the
    dissociable members and (b) is located on one of the mating members and
    directly engages the interlocking portion of the other mating member is not
    considered a proper position locking-means* for this subclass and is placed
    elsewhere as an interlocking component.


CLS 24/655
TXT And relatively movable handle therefor:

    Receiving member under subclass 652 having an element connected to it which
    is both (1) distinct from the sliding component and neither guides not
    interlocks with the projection, and (2) connected to its member in a manner
    which allows it to (a) transmit a manual input force applied directly upon
    it to the sliding component when moving therewith and (b) move relative to
    the sliding component only when an input force applied to the element or
    component is not transmitted therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    642,    for a sliding interlocking component and a manually engaged sliding
    element which requires relative movement between the component and element
    during transmittal of an input force therebetween.


CLS 24/656
TXT Requiring manual force thereon to interlock or disengage:

    Sliding component under subclass 652 in which manual force is intended to
    be applied directly on and in the same direction as the motion of this
    component when sliding it relative to the other component and moving it
    either to or from its interlocking position with the projection.


CLS 24/657
TXT Plural, oppositely shifting, similar interlocking components:

    Receiving member under subclass 656 having two separate, similarly shaped,
    sliding components which travel in opposite directions to each other when
    moving between their interlock and noninterlock positions.


CLS 24/658
TXT Having closed aperture therethrough alignable with parallel access opening:

    Sliding component under subclass 656 having an aperture with a continuous
    circumference formed through it which is in a parallel plane to and has (a)
    one portion aligned with the central axis of the access opening of the
    cavity in the interlocking position of the movable sliding component and
    (b) another portion of the aperture aligned with the central axis of
    noninterlocking position of the movable sliding component.


CLS 24/659
TXT Having flaccid component defining access opening of cavity:

    Receiving member under subclass 629 having at least a segment of the access
    opening of the cavity constructed from a flaccid* material to allow the
    perimeter of the opening to change either its size or shape during the
    interlocking operation.

    (1)     Note.  The flaccid* segment of the access opening of the cavity in
    this and the indented subclasses may be formed by a flaccid* piece of the
    structure-to-be-secured* (e.g., a button hole).

    (2)     Note.  The flaccid* material of this and the indented subclasses
    may also be elastic in nature (e.g., a button loop made of thin rubber
    material).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, subclass 431 for a web or sheet having an aperture (e.g.,
    buttonhole) around which a filamentary material or strandlike tape is sewn;
    subclass 437 for a sewn web or sheet having apertured or openwork (e.g.,
    buttonhole) therein; and subclasses 65+ for buttonhole forming machines.


CLS 24/660
TXT Component formed solely by flaccid* cord:

    Access opening under subclass 659 wherein the flaccid* segment is
    constructed from a long slender element which is the only material defining
    this segment of the perimeter.


CLS 24/661
TXT With nonflaccid component:

    Access opening under subclass 659 also having a segment of its projection
    perimeter constructed from nonflaccid material.


CLS 24/662
TXT Having resiliently biased interlocking component or segment:

    Receiving member under subclass 629 having one of its interlocking
    components or segments both (a) movable relative to the remaining
    interlocking structure of the receiving member, and (b) biased either into
    or out of its normal interlocking position by its own resiliency or the
    resiliency of a noninterlocking component of the receiving member attached
    thereto or contacting therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    614+,   for a projection having two, relatively movable, inserted
    components or segments of which at least one is resiliently biased to allow
    their movement.

    683,    for a projection or cavity having an integral resilient* segment
    which is utilized to mount, and allow bodily movement of, the projection or
    cavity.


CLS 24/663
TXT Cavity or projection rotates about axis of cavity to dissociate:

    Dissociable mating members under subclass 662 wherein it is necessary to
    rotate either a portion of the projection or receiving member about the
    central axis of the access opening of the cavity to dissociate them from
    each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    590+,   for dissociable mating members which must be rotated relative to
    each other about the axis of the cavity access opening to complete
    interlock.


CLS 24/664
TXT Requiring manual force applied against bias to interlock or disengage:

    Receiving member under subclass 662 wherein the resiliently biased
    component or segment is intended to be moved either into or out of its
    normal interlocking position by manual force applied directly to the biased
    component or segment in a direction opposite to that of the biasing force
    on this component or segment.

    (1)     Note.  To be proper for this and the indented subclasses it is
    required that the direction of this manual force for moving the resiliently
    biased component or component segment be always applied at an angle to the
    direction of travel of the projection member during its final stage of
    association with the receiving member.


CLS 24/665
TXT And partially blocking separate, nonresilient access opening of cavity:

    Receiving member under subclass 664 wherein the resiliently biased
    component or segment extends across or into a portion of the access path of
    the projection to (a) reduce the width of this path beyond, and (b) hinder
    its removal or entrance of the projection through a separate (i.e.,
    nonintegral), nonresilient component of the receiving member which forms
    the access opening of the cavity.


CLS 24/666
TXT And closed elongated access opening for guiding transverse projection
    travel after insertion:

    Receiving member under subclass 662 having a component or segment with
    connected walls which (a) fully encircle the access path of the projection
    into the cavity, and (b) have a configuration with one dimension of greater
    length than the corresponding dimension of the projection in its insertion
    attitude to allow the projection after insertion therethrough to abruptly
    change its direction of movement and bodily travel a significant distance
    along the encircling walls in a path which is transverse to the access path.

    (1)     Note.  The distance traveled by the projection during its
    transverse movement should be at least half of the projection's length in
    its corresponding dimension to be considered significant.

    (2)     Note.  A section of the fully encircling walls may be formed by a
    portion of the structure-to-be-secured* connected to two other wall
    sections of the component or segment.

    (3)     Note.  If no abrupt change in travel direction is necessary by the
    projection after its insertion through the access opening, then it is not
    proper for this and the indented subclasses.

    (4)     Note.  A minor expansion gap in the access opening encircling wall
    which does not allow any of the projection member's structure to pass
    therethrough is still considered to be "fully encircling" and proper for
    this and the indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    701,    for similar art not having a resiliently biased interlocking
    component or segment.


CLS 24/667
TXT Nonresilient walls define opening:

    Receiving member under subclass 666 wherein the access path encircling
    walls of the component or segment are constructed in a manner which
    prevents them from expanding in any direction transverse to that of the
    projection access path.


CLS 24/668
TXT Formed from wire:

    Receiving member under subclass 666 wherein the access path encircling
    walls are constructed at least in part from a rigid* or semirigid* filament.

    (1)     Note.  A portion of one of the walls of this subclass may be
    considered the resiliently biased component or segment if it is resiliently
    constructed and this resiliency is necessary for interlock.


CLS 24/669
TXT And access opening with gapped perimeter for allowing movement of
    noninserted projection support therepast:

    Receiving member under subclass 662 also having its cavity defined by a
    component or segment which only partially encircles the access path of the
    inserted portion of the projection at the point where its movement is
    initially restricted by the cavity and wherein the vacant space in the
    component or segment at this point is intended to allow a noninserted
    portion of the projection member supporting the projection (i.e., the
    portion linking or mounting the inserted projection to the
    structure-to-be-secured* or a supporting structure therefor) to travel with
    the projection to a location beyond its entry point into the cavity.

    (1)     Note.  See (2) Note of subclass 588.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    702,    for similar art not having a resiliently biased component or
    segment.


CLS 24/670
TXT Cavity constructed solely from wire:

    Receiving member under subclass 669 wherein the component or segment
    forming the boundaries of the cavity is constructed solely from a rigid* or
    semirigid* filament.


CLS 24/671
TXT Partially blocking separate, nonresilient, access opening of cavity:

    Receiving member under subclass 662 wherein the resiliently  biased
    component extends across or into a portion of the travel path of the
    projection to (a) reduce the width of this path, and (b) hinder the removal
    or entrance of the projection through a separate (i.e., nonintegral)
    nonresilient component of the receiving member which forms the access
    opening of the cavity.

    (1)     Note.  If the resilient* element is located at one side of the
    access opening, it is proper for this and the indented subclasses only if
    structure of the nonresilient component is also found on this side and
    radially spaced a further distance from the central axis of the access
    opening.


CLS 24/672
TXT And bodily shifted into or out or interlock location by manual force
    thereon:

    Resiliently biased component or segment under subclass 671 which is
    intended to be shifted in its entirety relative to the nonresilient access
    opening when moving either to or from its interlocking position with the
    projection by manual force applied directly to an integral force or fixedly
    attached portion thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The resiliently biased component or segment of this subclass
    is either forced against a portion of the projection or a relatively
    stationary portion of the receiving member by the manual force and coacts
    therewith to exceed the biasing force acting on it. If the manual force is
    applied directly to the component or segment in a direction opposite to the
    biasing force thereon, then it is proper for subclass 665 and not this
    subclass.


CLS 24/673
TXT Formed from wire:

    Receiving member under subclass 671 wherein the resiliently biased
    component or segment is constructed from a semirigid* filament.


CLS 24/674
TXT Having curved or bent engaging section conforming to contour of projection:

    Filament under subclass 673 having a section thereof curved or bent in a
    manner allowing this section to engage and generally follow a similarly
    shaped curved or bent portion of a cross-sectional surface of the
    projection which is perpendicular to the central axis of the access opening
    when the projection is in its interlock position.


CLS 24/675
TXT Similar, distinct sections:

    Filament under subclass 674 with two curved or bent projection engaging
    sections having a similar shape to and distinct from (i.e., are
    noncontinuous curves or bends) each other.


CLS 24/676
TXT Having distinct sections engaging projection at spaced points:

    Filaments under subclass 673 having two or more distinct projection
    engaging sections located along its length for engaging different areas of
    the cross-sectional surface of the projection spaced from each other by
    nonengaged portions of this surface.


CLS 24/677
TXT Including separate, nonprojection-engaging spring for biasing:

    Receiving member under subclass 662 including a spring which is (a)
    separate from the projection engaging structure of the receiving member,
    and (b) applies at least a portion of the required biasing force to the
    movable interlocking component or segment.


CLS 24/678
TXT Biased component or segment entirely formed from wire:

    Receiving member under subclass 662 in which all the biased interlocking
    structure of the receiving member is constructed solely from a bent
    resilient* filament.


CLS 24/679
TXT Having portion of cavity deformed during mounting:

    Receiving member under subclass 662 wherein an integral of fixedly attached
    projection receiving cavity has its initial configuration altered during
    the operation mounting the receiving member to the structure-to-be-secured*
    by a deforming force transmitted to the portion in excess of the amount of
    force necessary for plastic deformation of the material from which the
    portion is constructed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    688+,   for deformable mounting means formed from a fixedly attached to
    projection or cavity member.


CLS 24/680
TXT And cooperating with separate mounting component:

    Receiving member under subclass 679 in which a separate component of the
    receiving member cooperates with the altered portion of the cavity to
    enhance the mounting of the receiving member to the
    structure-to-be-secured*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    689,    for a cavity or projection member having a deformable portion
    cooperating with a detached component during the mounting operation.


CLS 24/681
TXT Having axially extending expansion slit along side of cavity:

    Receiving member under subclass 662 wherein the component or segment
    forming the projection receiving cavity has a gap or slit located in one of
    its walls extending in the same direction as the central axis of the access
    opening to allow the cavity to either resiliently expand or contract during
    the interlocking operation.

    (1)     Note.  To be proper for this subclass the length of the gap or slit
    in the direction of the central axis must be of a greater magnitude than
    the thickness of the material from which the cavity is constructed.


CLS 24/682.1
TXT Means for mounting projection or cavity portion:

    Separable-fastener* under subclass 588 wherein means are provided for
    securing either a projection or cavity portion of the dissociable mating
    members to the surface of either the structure-to-be-secured* or a support
    therefor.

    (1)     Note.  For a mounting means to be proper for this subclass or
    indented subclasses, it must retain the projection or cavity member at a
    specific location on, or in the region of  the surface to which it is
    attached (i.e., it does not allow unrestricted movement along or removal
    from the mounting surface).

    (2)     Note. Separable-fastener* mounted solely by a simple encircling
    loop are classified elsewhere based on another feature of the
    separable-fastener*.

    (3)     Note.  Separable fasteners* mounted by another fastener of this
    class are found under ``Combined Diverse Multipart Fasteners" or subclasses
    573+ (see subclass 573 search note to this class, subclasses 305+ and 379.1
    for the line between these areas).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90.1+,  for buttons with means to attach them to the
    structure-to-be-secured*.

    265,    for devices utilized to attach an unclaimed separable-fastener* to
    the end of a strap.

    413+,   for means for mounting individual elements of a zippers
    interlocking surface.

    444,    for means for attaching a mounting surface for numerous filaments
    (e.g., VelcroR) to the structure-to-be-secured* or a support therefor.


CLS 24/683
TXT Allows bodily movement facilitating interlock:

    Mounting means under subclass 682.1 constructed in a manner which allows
    the projection or cavity portion of the dissociable member to move as a
    complete unit relative to the surface to which it is mounted to facilitate
    the interlocking operation.

    (1)     Note.  Mounting means allowing relative movement between
    interlocking components or component segments of either the projection or
    cavity portion are excluded from this subclass and its indented subclasses
    and are found in subclasses 604+ and 629+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    586,    for a separable-fastener* having selective interlocking position
    between opposed faces and mounting means for one of its members allowing
    interlock facilitating repositioning of a face.

    614+,   for a projection having two, relatively movable, inserted
    components or segments, one of which is resiliently biased to allow the
    movement.

    662+,   for a cavity member having two, relatively movable, interlocking
    components or segments, one of which is resiliently biased to allow the
    movement.


CLS 24/684
TXT About pivotal connection:

    Mounting means under subclass 683 which allows (a) the projection or cavity
    portion of the dissociable member to swing in an arcuate path about a
    constantly contacted connection point or region located on the surface to
    which it is mounted, and (b) maintain relative movement at the contact
    point or region between the contacting portions of the mounting means and
    the mounting surface.

    (1)     Note.  A dissociable member having a projection or cavity portion
    which swings about a nonfixed point within a fixed region of the mounting
    surface is included herein if it maintains the required contact and
    relative movement at the connection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    609+,   for a projection member having a pivotal connection between two
    components which allows relative movement between two, distinct, inserted
    components of its projection.

    643+,   for a receiving member having a pivotal connection between two of
    its components which allows relative movement between two of its
    interlocking components.


CLS 24/685
TXT Includes resilient component separate from portion:

    Mounting means under subclass 683 including a resilient component which is
    distinct and separate from (i.e., nonintegral) the projection or cavity
    portion of the dissociable member and allows the portion's movement
    relative to the mounting surface.


CLS 24/686
TXT Allows relocation of portion:

    Mounting means under subclass 682.1 constructed in a manner which allows
    the projection or cavity portion of the dissociable member to be located in
    different positions.


CLS 24/687
TXT Having component of means permanently deformed during mounting operation:

    Mounting means under subclass 682.1 having its initial configuration
    altered during the operation of mounting the dissociable member to the
    structure-to-be-secured* by a deforming force in excess of the amount of
    force necessary for plastic deformation of the material from which this
    component of the means is constructed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    679,    for receiving members having a resiliently biased component or
    segment and a deformed mounting portion.

    703,    for a fastener destructively deformed during fastening.


CLS 24/688
TXT And formed from or fixedly attached to projection or cavity portion:

    Deformed component under subclass 687 also integral with or permanently
    secured to the projection or cavity portion of the dissociable member
    before the beginning of the mounting operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for a one-piece belt fastener mounted to the belt by a deformed
    prong.

    414,    for deformable jaws for mounting* individual elements of zipper's
    interlocking surface.

    679,    for resilient* cavity which is deformed during its mounting
    operation.


CLS 24/689
TXT Cooperates with detached component of means:

    Deformed component under subclass 688 which cooperates after deformation
    with a component of the mounting means previously separate and detached
    therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    680,    for a deformable, resilient* cavity which cooperates with a
    separate component during the mounting operation.


CLS 24/690
TXT Having shape facilitating impaling of mounting surface:

    Deformed component under subclass 688 having a configuration specifically
    designed for piercing through or into the material of the mounting surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    689     and 696, for a mounting component which has a shape facilitating
    impaling of the mounting surface.


CLS 24/691
TXT And inserted into or through cavity or projection:

    Deformed component under subclass 687 which is also inserted into or
    through either the cavity or projection of the dissociable member during
    the mounting operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    621,    for a resilient* projection having deformable mounting means
    inserted into a hollow central area of the projection.


CLS 24/692
TXT And encircling cavity or projection:

    Deformed component under subclass 687 which also encircles either the base
    of the cavity or projection of the dissociable member during the mounting
    operation.

    (1)     Note.  The deformed component of this subclass need not fully
    encircle the base of the cavity or projection with a continuous surface as
    long as there are segments of its material located on all sides thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    622,    for a resilient* projection having deformable mounting means
    encircling it.


CLS 24/693
TXT Consisting of thermally fusible substance:

    Mounting means under subclass 682.1 consisting of a substance which during
    the mounting operation is (a) in contact with both the mounting surface and
    the cavity or projection portion, (b) heated to a temperature melting it
    from its solid state into its liquid or plastic state, and (c) cooled to a
    temperature which allows the substance to return to its solid state and
    weld the cavity or projection portion to the mounting surface.

    (1)     Note.  The fusible substance may be separate from or part of either
    the mounting surface or the cavity or projection portion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 270+ for a fusion bond between
    two rigid* or semirigid* members forming the joint therebetween.


CLS 24/694
TXT Having threaded formation:

    Mounting means under subclass 682.1 having a projecting or concaved
    formation and a helical rib protruding from and located around the
    perimeter of this formation cooperating with a complementary formation on
    another portion of the means during the mounting operation.


CLS 24/695
TXT Having specific structure for cooperating with stitching:

    Mounting means under subclass 682.1 having a component with a formation
    specifically designed to cooperate with a separate, flexible filament,
    mounting component stitched into the supporting surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 406+ for a web or sheet having an external
    fastener (e.g., button) sewn thereto.


CLS 24/696
TXT Having shape facilitating impaling of mounting surface:

    Mounting means under subclass 682.1 having configuration specifically
    designed for piercing through or into the material of the mounting surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    356+,   for a pin combined with another type  Class 24 fastener.

    706+,   for pin fasteners, per se.


CLS 24/697.1
TXT Plural distinct cavities or projections:
    Separable-fastener* under subclass 588 having either (1) a receiving member
    provided with plural cavities which share no common shape defining surfaces
    and are intended to engage different projection, (2) plural separate
    receiving members each provided with a cavity intended to engage a
    different projection, or (3) plural projections located on either a single
    inserted member or plural inserted members each of which is intended to
    engage a different cavity of either (a) a receiving member provided with
    plural cavities which share no common shape defining surfaces or (b) plural
    separate receiving members each provided with their own cavity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305+,   for plural diverse type separable-fasteners having independent
    operation.

    589,    for a separable-fastener* having divergent interlock means distinct
    from required cavity or projection of its member.

    605,    for plural, similar projections which each engage a different
    cavity and have relatively movable components or surfaces.

    630+,   for a separable-fastener* having two, distinct cavities, one of
    which must include movable components or surfaces.

    685,    for plural projections or cavities biased into interlocking
    engagement with each other by a nonintegral resilient mounting element
    (e.g., strip).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclass 381 for interfitted panels (i.e.,
    structure-to-be-secured*) having interlocking structure at their joints
    including enlarged heads and complementary recesses.

    450,    Foundation Garments, subclass 139 for corsets and girdles having
    stays at their closure's edges and nonflaccid interengaging fasterners
    therefor.


CLS 24/697.2
TXT Hook type:
    Separable-fastener* under subclass 697.1 having at least one projection
    which (a) is connected at one end to a generally planar noninserted shank
    mounted to the struc-ture-to-be-secured* or another portion of the
    projection member and (b) has its opposite end (i.e., tip) free from fixed
    connection with any other portion of the projection member and bending
    generally toward either the shank or the connection of the projection
    member to the structure-to-be-secured*

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370+,   for plural diverse type hooks having independent operation.


CLS 24/698.1
TXT Hook-shaped projection member passing through cavity:
    Projection member under subclass 588 having a generally planar noninserted
    shank connected at one end to the structure-to-be-secured* or a mounting
    portion of its member and at its other end to an integral or rigidly
    attached appendage forming the inserted projection which appendage (a) has
    its opposite end free from connection with any other portion of the
    projection member, (b) bends generally toward either the shank portion or
    the connection of the projection member with the structure-to-be-secured*
    or support and (c) passes at least partially through a cavity.

    (1)     Note.  Hooks which are used as tools are excluded from Class 24
    (see (7) Note.  of the class defintion) and are found elsewhere (e.g., 294
    - 26).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 7 for methods and apparatus for making a
    hook.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 43.16+ for a
    fishing hook.

    54,     Harness, subclasses 46 and 62 for a hook shaped device used in
    combination with harness.

    114,    Ships, subclasses 377+ for a connector (e.g., hook) adapted to
    connect a life craft to life craft handling apparatus and subclasses 301+
    for a fluke type anchor.

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclasses 241+ for a chain securing
    device in combination with, or specially adapted for use with, an annular
    for use with, an annular tire chain.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 211, 213, 215, 225.21, 227.2, 290.1, 301, 303,
    304+, and 339+ for a bracket having either a hook type article support or a
    support hook for the bracket.

    278,    Land Vehicles:  Animal Draft Appliances, subclasses 51, 111+, and
    127+ for a hook shaped device in combination with a draft appliance.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclasses 95+ for a hooked end bolt.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 82.1 for a
    hoistline or grab hook.

    623,    Prosthesis, (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Thereof, subclasses 57+ for a hook used to replace a hand.

    D11,    Jewelry, Symbolic Insignia, and Ornaments, subclasses 208+ for a
    hook and eye type fastener.


CLS 24/698.2
TXT Formed from single piece of sheet metal:
    Projection member under subclass 698.1 completely constructed from one thin
    piece of metal which has been or cut to make the shank and inserted
    projection.


CLS 24/698.3
TXT Formed solely from wire:
    Projection member under subclass 698.1 completely constructed from one or
    more rigid* or semirigid* filaments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    601.3   and 601.8+, for a hook and gate formed solely from wire and having
    a relatively movable portion.


CLS 24/700
TXT Cavity having specific shape:

    Receiving member under subclass 588 where in the boundary of its cavity is
    defined by a segment of the member's structure having a detailed
    configuration or contour.


CLS 24/701
TXT Including closed elongated access opening for guiding transverse projection
    travel after insertion:

    Receiving member under subclass 700 including a structural formation with
    connected walls which (a) fully encircle the access path of the projection
    into the cavity, and (b) have a configuration with one dimension of greater
    length than the corresponding dimension of the projection in its inserted
    attitude to allow the projection after insertion therethrough to abruptly
    change its direction of movement an bodily travel a significant distance
    along the encircling walls in a path which is transverse to the access path
    to complete interlock.

    (1)     Note.  The distance traveled by the projection during its
    transverse movement should be at least half of the projection's length in
    its corresponding dimension to be considered significant.

    (2)     Note.  One of the encircling walls may be formed by a portion of
    the structure-to-be-secured* connected to the other walls.

    (3)     Note.  If no abrupt change in travel direction is necessary by the
    projection after it's insertion through the access opening to complete
    interlock, then it is not proper in this subclass.

    (4)     Note.  A minor gap in the access opening encircling wall which does
    not allow any of the projection member's structure to pass therethrough is
    still considered to be "fully encircling" and proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    666+,   for similar art having a resiliently biased interlocking component
    or segment.


CLS 24/702
TXT Having access opening with gapped perimeter for allowing movement of
    noninserted projection support therepast:

    Receiving member under subclass 700 having its cavity defined by structure
    which only partially encircles the access path of the inserted portion of
    the projection at the point where its movement is initially restricted by
    the cavity and wherein the vacant space in the structure at this point is
    intended to allow a noninserted portion of the projection member supporting
    the projection (i.e., the portion linking or mounting the inserted
    projection to the structure-to-be-secured* or a supporting structure
    therefor) to travel with the projection to a location beyond the projection
    entry point into the cavity.

    (1)     Note.  See (2) Note of subclass 588.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    669+,   for similar art having a resiliently biased component or segment.


CLS 24/703.1
TXT FASTENER DESTRUCTIVELY SECURED BY RESHAPING DISTORTION FORCE:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a securing means
    having an initial configuration which is altered during the securing
    operation by a deforming force transmitted to a portion thereof in excess
    of the amount of force necessary for plastic deformation of the material
    from which it is constructed (i.e., a force greater than any natural
    resiliency in the material which causes structural fatigue) and causing it
    to either break or bend into a new configuration it maintains during the
    securing operation after the force is removed.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is intended to provide for securing means
    which either (a) can not be removed without the destruction of the means
    when the securing operation is reversed (i.e., permanently deformed
    fasteners), or (b) will be destroyed by structural fatigue of the material
    after repeated operations weaken the material at the bending portion (i.e.,
    ductilely reshapeable fastener).

    (2)     Note.  See (6) Note of the class definition for patent placement
    procedure.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass and its intended subclasses are intended to
    provide a single temporary locus within Class 24 for deformable fasteners
    currently found in existing subclasses therein.  Until these deformable
    fasteners are gathered together at this locus it is not possible to
    establish clear lines with, and transfer large groups of patents to, either
    Class 411 or Class 403.  Therefore, deformable fasteners have been
    transferred to Class 411 or Class 403 only when an existing subclass
    therein already specifically provides for them.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16+,    for bale ties, package ties, and hose clamps which are reshaped or
    deformed.

    30.5,   for twisted bag fasteners.

    35+,    for bendable, one-piece belt fasteners.

    94+,    for buttons mounted to the struct-ure-to-be-secured* by a
    deflecting prong or rivet.

    115+,   for bendable cord or rope holders.

    265,    for bendable strap-end-attaching devices.

    687+,   for similar art utilized in mounting a separable-fastener* member.

    704.1+, for fasteners which are destructively distorted only when
    disengaged.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclass 655.6 or 696, for a tufting button having air
    venting structure intended for use with a mattress or cushion.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses, for a deformed
    fastener having structure which makes it peculiar to use with a provided
    for joint.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, appropriate subclasses, for general utility
    fasteners having a deformed portion.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 120, 140, 144, and 152 for a tufting button
    having air venting structure intended for use with a seat.


CLS 24/703.2
TXT Distorted structure having shape facilitating impaling:

    Securing means under subclass 703.1 wherein the deformed portion of the
    means has an initial configuration facilitating its penetrating into and
    forming a hole through either the structure-to-be-secured* or a support
    member therefor.

    (1)     Note.  Class 402 takes a deformed fastener which clearly discloses
    that the fastener (a) enters or forms an opening in a sheet of paper, (b)
    can be separated by hand from the sheet after fastening without damage to
    either the sheet or fastener, and (c) has the sole disclosed utility of
    retaining a sheet of a  paper.  A fastener which is reusable after removal
    is assumed to be undamaged under the standards of Class 402.  Also, a paper
    fastener which does not state that it is either damaged or reusable after
    removal in the disclosure is (a) assumed reusable if it is deformed by
    direct manual force and contact and (b) assumed damaged if it is deformed
    by contact with other fastener structure (e.g., anvil plate) which prevents
    direct manual contact with the deformed segment after fastening.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    402,    Binder Devices Releasably Engaging Aperture or Notch of Sheet,
    subclasses 14+, for a deformable sheet retainer secured by folding a
    portion thereof.


CLS 24/703.3
TXT And distinct fastener structure cooperating with impaled structure:

    Securing means under subclass 703.2 wherein the deformed portion after
    penetration engages another portion of the securing means which does not
    penetrate through either the structure-to-be-secured* or a support member
    thereof.


CLS 24/703.4
TXT Detached cooperating structure:

    Securing means under subclass 703.3 which the deformed penetrating portion
    prior to its penetration is completely disconnected from the nonpenetrating
    engaging portion of the means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    402,    Binder Device Releasably Engaging Aperture or Notch of Sheet,
    subclasses 15+ for a deformable retainer cooperating with a holder therefor.


CLS 24/703.5
TXT Including plural impaling elements:

    Securing means under subclass 703.2 in which the deformed portion includes
    two distinct penetrating elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    402,    Binder Device Releasably Engaging Aperture or Notch of Sheet,
    subclass 14 for a deformable sheet retainer.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, subclasses 457+ for a multiple prong impact
    driven fastener.


CLS 24/703.6
TXT Elements form single aperture (e.g., split shank type):

    Securing means under subclass 703.5 wherein the penetrating elements touch
    each other during penetration and form a single hole through the
    structure-to-be-secured* or a support member therefor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    402,    Binder Device Releasably Engaging Aperture or Notch of Sheet,
    subclass 14 for a deformable sheet retainer.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, subclass 502, for headed fasteners having plural
    deflected legs.


CLS 24/704.1
TXT READILY INTERLOCKING, TWO-PART FASTENER REQUIRING EITHER DESTRUCTIVE OR
    TOOL DISENGAGEMENT:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a securing means
    having two repositionable portions which are easily brought into final
    securing engagement with each other by unassisted manual force and are held
    in this engaged position by either (1) the relative movement between
    sections of one of the portions, (2) the reorientation after contact of one
    of the portions relative to the other portion, or (3) an external force
    transmitted to one of the portions by a structure-to-be-secured* or a
    supporting structure therefore, and wherein one of these holding methods
    prevents the portions from separating until either (a) a force of
    sufficient magnitude is applied to the securing means to destructively
    distort an engaging portion thereof rendering it unusable unless repaired,
    or (b) a tool required operation (i.e., an operation which could not be
    done by unassisted manual force or dexterity in the disclosed environment)
    is utilized to manipulate, or apply a force to, an engaging portion of the
    securing means.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and its indented subclasses are intended to
    provide a single locus within Class 24 for destructive or tool disengaged,
    readily interlocking fasteners currently found in existing subclasses
    therein.  Until these fasteners are gathered together at this locus it is
    not possible to establish clear lines with Class 411 or Class 403.
    Therefore, only fasteners of this type already specifically provide for in
    Class 403 or Class 411 have been transferred thereto.

    (2)     Note.  See (6) Note of the class definition for patent placement
    procedure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    572,    for separable-fasteners* which have two separate components
    dissociated from each other by tool manipulation of an operator* attached
    to one of the components.

    703.1+, for a fastener which is both destructively secured and disengaged.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclass 57.1 for a detectable device attached to an article
    by a pin fastener releasable only by a key or special tool.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclasses 307+ for a readily interlocking
    two-part seal.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 326+ for a joint using a biased
    catch, and subclasses 345+ for interfitted members joined together by a
    readily interlocking fastener.


CLS 24/704.2
TXT Including additional fastener structure linking parts:

    Subject matter under subclass 704.1 including structure attached to both
    repositionable portions which (a) does not affect the securing engagement
    therebetween and (b) connects them together before they are in their final
    securing position.


CLS 24/705
TXT PIERCED EARRING FASTENER:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a securing mechanism
    having an elongated component which passes through an existing hole located
    in the earlobe of a person to attach an ornament thereto.

    (1)     Note.  See (3) Note of the class definition to determine the extent
    to which the earring may be claimed and remain proper for this class.

    (2)     Note.  A device intended to imaple the flesh of the earlobe is
    excluded from this subclass and is classified in Class 128.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90.1+,  for a button attached to material with a similar type fastener.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    63,     Jewelry, subclasses 12 and 13 for a pierced earring claiming a
    specific detail (e.g., setting lock contoured to shape of earlobe) or a
    specificity of material (e.g., made from gold) of the earring beyond that
    required for a general fastener.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 759 and 767 for a poke having a skin
    piercing attachment to an animal, subclasses 824+ for a nostril attached
    mouth  restraint, subclasses 835+ for a snout restraint that pierces the
    skin, and subclass 866 for a nose ring.

    128,    Surgery, subclass 329 for earrings which puncture the earlobe.


CLS 24/706
TXT PIN OR SEPARATE ESSENTIAL COOPERATING DEVICE THEREFOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising either (a) a pin*, (b)
    a required portion thereof (i.e., penetrating portion, nonpenetrating
    portion), or (c) a discrete device intended to interact with a required
    portion of the pin* and affect its operation in the final securing position
    of the pin*.

    (1)     Note.  A device intended for impaling the flesh of an animal (e.g.,
    fish hook) is excluded from this and the indented subclasses an is
    classified elsewhere based on its intended use (e.g., Class 17 for a meat
    skewer, Class 604 for a hypodermic needle).

    (2)     Note.  See (6) Note of the class definition for patent placement
    procedure.

    (3)     Note.  The penetrating fasteners found in this and the indented
    subclasses are never intended to be directly driven by a tool into the
    structure-to-be-secured*. A tool driven penetrating fastener (e.g., nail)
    or a penetrating fastener which is commonly known to be either tool driven
    or inserted by hand (e.g., tack) is classified in Class 411.  In addition,
    a device which interacts with and affects the securing operation of a
    penetrating fastener and either (a) is directly moved by a tool to or from
    its secured position with the penetrating portion of the fastener (e.g.,
    nut) or (b) has a component or surface for directing, constraining, or
    shielding the penetrating portion of a fastener directly moved by a tool
    (e.g., distorted lock washer) is excluded from this and the indented
    subclasses.  However, a device which merely has a movable component or
    surface shifted by a tool actuated operator* is proper for this and the
    indented subclasses.

    (4)     Note.  Pins which are used as tools are excluded from class 24 (see
    (7) Note of the class definition) and are found elsewhere (e.g., Class 66,
    Class 223, Class 112).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 56 for an armpit shield with dress-attaching
    feature.

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 4+ for a carpet fastener which
    penetrates through or into a carpet, and subclasses 87.2+ for a flexible
    panel attaching means which penetrates into the panel to attach itself
    thereto and travels along a track.

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 164.5+ for an ice pick.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 1.5+ for a pin
    fastener in combination with a specific detail of a badge, and subclasses
    24 and 25 for a check, label, or tag fastener which penetrates through or
    into the supporting article and has a special check, label, or tag
    accommodating feature (e.g., holder).

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, for devices which
    penetrate the flesh of an animal, particularly subclass 5 for a gaff,
    subclass 6 for a spear, and subclasses 43.16+ for a hook.

    63,     Jewelry, subclass 20 for an ornamental pin claiming a specific
    detail (e.g., setting) or specificity of material (e.g., made of gold) of
    the pin beyond that requiring for a fastener of general utility.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclasses 116+ for knitting needles.

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 222+ for sewing machine needles.

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 339+ for a needle for carrying a suture through
    skin.

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 57.1+ for a pin type fastener attached to a hat
    or  for a detached pin fastener cooperating with a hat attached guide or
    tip protector.

    163,    Needle and Pin Making, subclasses 6+ for methods and apparatus for
    making a pin.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 102+ for sewing needles.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclass 103 for fish and game
    stringers.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 126+ for a
    handling harpoon.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 173 for a stylus.

    402,    Binder Devices Releasably Engaging Aperture or Notch of Sheet, for
    a  fastener which (1) enters or forms an opening in a sheet, (2) can be
    separated by hand without damage to either the sheet or fastener, and (3)
    has the sole disclosed use of retaining a sheet.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, subclasses 439+ for a nail, tack, or staple.

    452,    Butchering, subclass 176 for skewering type devices which are used
    to close the visceral cavities of fowl in preparation for marketing.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 187+ for hypodermic needles.

    D11,    Jewelry, Symbolic Insignia, and Ornaments, subclass 206 for a
    safety pin design and subclass 207 for a hat pin design.


CLS 24/706.1
TXT With separately operable, manually releasable, nonpenetrating means for
    mounting (e.g., drapery hook):

    Subject matter under subclass 706 provided with means for connecting the
    pin* or its interacting device to a portion of the structure-to-be-secured*
    or a supporting member therefor, and wherein the means (a) does not affect
    the operation of the pin* or interacting device when connected or released,
    (b) is connected or released solely by direct manual force, and (c) does
    not penetrate the structure-to-be-secured* or support member when connected.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 4+ for a carpet fastener which
    penetrates through or into a carpet, and subclasses 87.2+ for a flexible
    panel attaching means which penetrates into the panel to attach itself
    thereto and travels along a track.


CLS 24/706.2
TXT Having distinct guiding, holding, or protecting means for penetrated
    portion:

    Subject matter under subclass 706 having means which both (1) does not
    penetrate through the hole formed by the impaling structure of the
    penetrating portion and (2) is intended to cooperate with the penetrated
    portion of the pin* to either (a) direct or constrain the motion of this
    portion (e.g., prevent its withdraw) or (b) shield the impaling structure
    of the portion from harmful contact with other objects.

    (1)     Note.  Directing, constraining, or shielding means considered
    proper for this and the indented subclasses must either partially surround
    or directly contact an exposed section of the penetrating portion which has
    gone completely through the structure-to-be-secured* or a supporting member
    therefor.  Means which (1) merely covers a surface of the material opposite
    to that penetrated into by the penetrating portion or (2) contacts the
    penetrating portion within the material penetrated is classified elsewhere
    under subclass 706 (e.g., 711.5, 710.6).


CLS 24/706.3
TXT Means detachable from or flaccidly connected to pin (e.g., hatpin type):

    Directing, constraining, or shielding means under subclass 706.2 which is
    either (a) completely separate from or (b) only connected by flaccid*
    structure to the pin* when the pin* is not in its final securing position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 69.1 and 72.1 for hat attached devices which
    protect the tip of a pin.


CLS 24/706.4
TXT For pin having plural penetrating portions:

    Directing, constraining, or shielding means under subclass 706.3 intended
    to interact with a pin* having two or more penetrating portions which form
    distinct holes in the structure-to-be-secured* or its supporting member.

    (1)     Note.  The means must interact with at least one of the penetrating
    portions of the pin* for proper document classification herein, but need
    not direct, constrain, or shield the remaining penetrating portion(s).


CLS 24/706.5
TXT Including relatively movable guiding, holding, or protecting components or
    surfaces:

    Directing, constraining, or shielding means under subclass 706.3 including
    either (a) two distinct parts connected together in a      manner allowing
    them at their connection point or region to move relative to each other
    when the penetrating portion is directed, constrained, or shielded by these
    parts or (b) a surface segment integral with or rigidly affixed to another
    surface segment and movable relative to this segment when the penetrating
    portion is directed, constrained, or shielded by these segments.


CLS 24/706.6
TXT Having operator for moving holding component or surface:

    Directing, constraining, or shielding means under subclass 706.5 having an
    operator* for moving either into or out of contact with the penetrating
    portion a part or surface segment of the means which constrains the motion
    of the penetrating portion when it is in contact therewith.

    (1)     Note.  An operator* proper for this and the indented subclasses may
    also help to direct or shield the penetrating portion of the pin*.
    However, if it contacts and directly constrains the motion of the
    penetrating portion, it is not considered a proper operator* for this and
    the indented subclasses and is placed as a relatively movable constraining
    part elsewhere under subclasses 706.5.


CLS 24/706.7
TXT Moves pivoting holding component:

    Directing, constraining, or shielding means under subclass 706.6 wherein
    the part moved by the operator* is connected to another part of the means
    in a manner allowing it to both (a) swing in an arcuate path about a
    constantly contacted connection point or region located on the other part
    of the means and (b) maintain relative movement between its surface and
    that of the other part at the point or region about which it swings while
    traveling to or from its portion contacting position.


CLS 24/706.8
TXT Moves slidably guided, nonself-biasing, holding component:

    Directing, constraining, or shielding means under subclass 706.6 wherein
    the part moved by the operator* is connected to another part of the means
    by two mutually cooperating surfaces which (a) are each integral with or
    fixedly attached to a different one of the parts, (b) contact and slide
    relative to each other when the means constrains the penetrating portion of
    the pin, and (c) restrict the relative motion between the movably connected
    parts to substantively a single primary direction, in addition, neither of
    the above parts are biased along the primary directions of relative
    movement by their own resiliency.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, subclass 75 for a socket having cam actuated
    roller jaws used to hold a shank.


CLS 24/706.9
TXT Having pierceable (e.g., cork) or naturally resilient (e.g., rubber)
    surfaces:

    Directing, constraining, or shielding means under subclass 706.5 having the
    relatively movable surfaces formed from either (a) material impaled by the
    penetrating portion of the pin* when it interacts with the means or (b)
    inherently resilient* material for gripping the penetrating portion of the
    pin* when it interacts with the means.


CLS 24/707
TXT With pivotal connection therebetween:

    Directing, constraining, or shielding means under subclass 706.5 with one
    part connected to the other part in a manner allowing it to both (a) swing
    in an arcuate path about a constantly contacted connection point or region
    located on the other part and (b) maintain relative movement between its
    surface and that of the other part at the point or region about which it
    swings while traveling to or from its portion contacting position.


CLS 24/707.1
TXT With slidable connection between nonself-biasing components:

    Directing, constraining, or shielding means under subclass 706.5 with one
    part connected to the other part by two mutually cooperating surfaces which
    (a) are each integral with or fixedly attached to a different one of the
    parts, (b) contact and slide relative to each other when the means direct,
    constrain, or shield the penetrating portion of the pin, and (c) restrict
    the relative motion between the movably connected parts to substantively a
    single primary direction, in addition, neither of the above parts are
    biased along the primary direction of relative movement by their own
    resiliency.


CLS 24/707.2
TXT Having resiliently biased component or surface:

    Directing, constraining, or shielding means under subclass 706.5 having one
    of the relatively movably parts or surface segments biased either into or
    out of its directing constraining, or shielding position by its own
    resiliency or the resiliency of another part of the means attached to or
    contacting with it.


CLS 24/707.3
TXT Coiled about longitudinal axis of held portion:

    Biased part or surface segment under subclass 707.2 wound or molded in the
    form of at least two complete, similarly shaped connected loops
    successively encircling the longitudinal axis of the penetrating portion in
    its final securing position.


CLS 24/707.4
TXT And aperture therein alignable with another spaced aperture of means:

    Directing, constraining, or shielding means under subclass 707.2 having a
    hole with a continuous closed circumference formed in the biased part or
    surface segment of the means, the central axis of this hole being shifted
    away from the position to which it is normally biased and into alignment
    with the central axis of a hole spaced from it and formed in another part
    or surface segment of the means when the penetrating portion of the pin* is
    inserted through both holes.


CLS 24/707.5
TXT And nonresilient structure for guiding portion thereto:

    Directing, constraining, or shielding means under subclass 707.2 having a
    nonresilient part or surface segment which limits the movement of the
    penetrating portion in at least two directions perpendicular to the one
    followed by the penetrating portion as it moves towards the resilient part
    or surface segment of the means.


CLS 24/707.6
TXT Including structure for cooperating with formation (e.g., cavity) formed on
    penetrating portion:

    Directing, constraining, or shielding means under subclass 706.3 including
    a part or surface for contacting and interlocking with a formation which is
    (a) formed along the length of the penetrating portion and (b) specially
    shaped to mate with the part or surface.


CLS 24/707.7
TXT For pin having plural penetrating portions:

    Directing, constraining, or shielding means under subclass 706.2 intended
    to interact with a pin* having two or more penetrating portions which form
    distinct holes in the structure-to-be-secured* or its supporting member.

    (1)     Note.  The means must interact with at least one of the penetrating
    portions of the pin* for properdocument classification herein, but need not
    direct, constrain, or shield the remaining penetrating portion(s).


CLS 24/707.8
TXT Each independently movable towards and into cooperation with means:

    Directing, constraining, or shielding means under subclass 707.7 wherein
    the movement of each penetrating portion of the pin* toward and into
    interaction with its means is not affected by that of the other penetrating
    portion.


CLS 24/707.9
TXT Including relatively movable guiding, holding or protecting components or
    surfaces:

    Directing, constraining, or shielding means under subclass 706.2 including
    either (a) two distinct parts connected together in a manner allowing them
    at their connection point or region to move relative to each other when the
    penetrating portion is directed, constrained, or shielded by these parts or
    (b) a surface segment integral with or rigidly affixed to another surface
    segment and movable relative to this segment when the penetrating portion
    is directed, constrained, or shielded by these segments.


CLS 24/708
TXT With connection allowing component to revolve about axis of held
    penetrating portion:

    Directing, constraining, or shielding means under subclass 707.9 with one
    part connected to the other part in a manner allowing to to both (a) turn
    about the longitudinal axis of the penetrating portion when the portion is
    in its final securing position and (b) block the movement of the
    penetrating portion from this position after turning.


CLS 24/708.1
TXT With pivotal connection therebetween:

    Directing, constraining, or shielding means under subclass 707.9 with one
    part connected to the other part in a manner allowing it to both (a) swing
    in an arcuate path about a constantly contacted connection point or region
    located on either the outer part or an intermediate linking part of the
    means when directing, constraining, or shielding the penetrating portion
    and (b) maintain relative movement between the contacting surfaces of the
    parts at the point or region of their contact.


CLS 24/708.2
TXT Having position locking means therefor:

    Directing, constraining, or shielding means under subclass 708.1 having
    locking means* to prevent the swinging part from moving.


CLS 24/708.3
TXT Spring or resiliently biased:

    Directing, constraining, or shielding means under subclass 708.1 wherein
    the swinging part is moved into or out of its directing, constraining, or
    shielding position by the force stored in either (a) a separate spring or
    (b) an integral, resilient* extension of the swinging part.


CLS 24/708.4
TXT With slidable connection between nonself-biasing components:

    Directing, constraining, or shielding means under subclass 707.9 with one
    part connected to the other part by two mutually cooperating surfaces which
    (a) are each integral with or fixedly attached to a different one of the
    parts, (b) contact and slide relative to each other when the parts direct,
    constrain, or shield the penetrating portion of the pin, and (c) restrict
    the relative motion between the movably connected parts to substantively a
    single primary direction, in addition, neither of the above parts are
    biased along the primary direction relative movement by their own
    resiliency.


CLS 24/708.5
TXT Component slides parallel to axis of held penetrating portion:

    Directing, constraining, or shielding means under subclass 708.4 wherein
    the primary direction of relative movement between the parts is parallel to
    the longitudinal axis of the penetrating portion when it is located in its
    final securing position.


CLS 24/708.6
TXT Means engages formation formed on penetrating portion:

    Directing, constraining, or shielding means under subclass 707.9 designed
    to contact and interlock with a formation which is (a) formed along the
    length of the penetrating portion and (b) specially shaped to mate with the
    means.


CLS 24/708.7
TXT Having nonresilient and resilient components:

    Directing, constraining, or shielding means under subclass 707.9 having a
    nonresilient component and a separate resilient* component.


CLS 24/708.8
TXT Means formed from single resilient wire:

    Directing, constraining, or shielding means under subclass 707.9 in which
    the relatively movable surface segments are constructed solely from a
    filament bent in a manner making at least one segment of the filament
    resilient*.


CLS 24/708.9
TXT Means formed from resilient sheet metal:

    Directing, constraining, or shielding means under subclass 707.9 where the
    relatively movable surface segments are constructed from a thin piece of
    metal bent in a manner making at least one segment of the piece resilient*.


CLS 24/709
TXT With independent, spaced, intermediate connections, or formations (e.g.,
    coils) about which portion or means moves:

    Subject matter under subclass 706.2 wherein the pin* is provided with two
    or more connections or formations located between and linking its
    penetrating portion and its directing, constraining, or shielding means,
    the connections or formations being physically separated from each other
    and allowing either the portion or the means to move as a unit about one
    without any degree of movement being required at the other connection or
    formation.


CLS 24/709.1
TXT Includes slidable connection:

    Subject matter under subclass 709 including at least one connection having
    two mutually cooperating surfaces which (a) are each integral with or
    fixedly attached to the penetrating portion, the means, or an intermediate
    linking part, (b) contact and slide relative to each other when the
    penetrating portion or the means are moved during the securing operation,
    and (c) restrict the relative motion at the connection between the portion
    and means or linking part to substantively a single primary direction.


CLS 24/709.2
TXT With pivotal connection between penetrating portion and means:

    Subject matter under subclass 706.2 wherein the pin* is provided with a
    connection between its penetrating portion and its directing, constraining,
    or shielding means which allows (a) the penetrating portion to swing in an
    arcuate path about a constantly contacted connection point or region
    located on either the means or an intermediate linking part attached
    thereto during the securing operation and (b) relative movement between the
    contacting surfaces of the portion and means or linking part at the point
    or region of their contact.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 119+ for pivot joints, per se.


CLS 24/709.3
TXT Connection also permits sliding movement:

    Subject matter under subclass 709.2 in which the connection between the
    penetrating portion and the means or linking part also allows the
    penetrating portion to move linearly along the length of the constantly
    contacted connection region (i.e., the pivot point is nonfixed).


CLS 24/709.4
TXT Resiliently biased about connection:

    Subject matter under subclass 709.2 in which the penetrating portion is
    swung about the connection by the force stored in either (a) a separate
    spring or (b) an integral, resilient* extension of the portion, means, or
    linking part.


CLS 24/709.5
TXT With slidable connection intermediate penetrating portion and means:

    Subject matter under subclass 706.2 wherein the pin* is provided with a
    connection between its penetrating portion and its directing, constraining,
    or shielding means having two mutually cooperating surfaces which (1) are
    each integral with or fixedly attached to the penetrating portion, the
    means, or an intermediate linking part, (2) contact and slide relative to
    each other when the penetrating portion and means cooperate during the
    securing operation, and (3) restrict the relative motion between the
    portion and means or linking part to substantively a single primary
    direction.


CLS 24/709.6
TXT Having resilient bridging structure between portion and means:

    Subject matter under subclass 706.2 having an intermediate structure
    linking the penetrating portion of the pin* to the directing, constraining,
    or shielding means and biasing the portion toward or away from the means by
    either its own resiliency or the resiliency of another part of the pin*
    (e.g., spring) attached to or contacting with the structure.


CLS 24/709.7
TXT Means includes structure for cooperating with formation (e.g., cavity)
    formed on portion:

    Subject matter under subclass 709.6 wherein the directing, constraining, or
    shielding means includes a part or surface for contacting and interlocking
    with a formation which is (a) formed along the length of the penetrating
    portion and (b) specially shaped to mate with the part or surface.


CLS 24/709.8
TXT And penetrating portion formed from wire:

    Subject matter under subclass 709.6 also having the penetrating portion of
    the pin* constructed from an elongated filament.


CLS 24/709.9
TXT Bridging structure includes elongated nonwire element:

    Subject matter under subclass 709.8 wherein the structure linking the
    penetrating portion to the means includes an element which (a) has a length
    approximately equal to that of the penetrating portion and (b) is formed
    from material other than an elongated filament.


CLS 24/710
TXT Wire also forms coiled bridging structure about which portion moves:

    Subject matter under subclass 709.8 wherein the elongated filament from
    which the penetrating portion is formed also forms at least a segment of
    the linking structure, this segment being bent or molded into the shape of
    at least two partial, similar, adjacent loops about which the penetrating
    portion moves and is resiliently biased.


CLS 24/710.1
TXT Including distinct device for cooperating with coil:

    Subject matter under subclass 710 including a device which is formed from
    structure other than the elongated filament and designed to interact with
    the loops of the filament.


CLS 24/710.2
TXT Having means also formed from same wire:

    Subject matter under subclass 710 having the directing, constraining, or
    shielding means constructed from the same elongated filament forming the
    penetrating portion and linking structure.


CLS 24/710.3
TXT With cavity for guiding structure-to-be-secured towards penetrating portion
    (e.g., stocking support):

    Pin* under subclass 706 provided with directing structure which prevents
    the structure-to-be-secured* from traveling in at least two directions
    perpendicular to the one along which the structure-to-be-secured* must move
    when engaging the penetrating portion.


CLS 24/710.4
TXT Having penetrating portion retractable or of changeable length:

    Pin* under subclass 706 having either (a) its penetrating portion attached
    to its nonpenetrating portion in a manner allowing it to be extended from
    or drawn back into the nonpenetrating portion or (b) the length of its
    penetrating portion capable of being varied.


CLS 24/710.5
TXT Having interconnected distinct penetrating portions:

    Pin* under subclass 706 having at least two penetrating portions which are
    linked together by the nonpenetrating portion of the pin* and form distinct
    holes in the struc-ture-to-be-secured* or its support member.


CLS 24/710.6
TXT Connection allows movement therebetween:

    Pin* under subclass 710.5 wherein the section of the nonpenetrating portion
    linking at least two of the penetrating portions together allows each to
    move relative to each other during the securing operation.


CLS 24/710.7
TXT Slidable connection:

    Pin* under subclass 710.6 in which the section of the nonpenetrating
    portion linking at least two relatively movable penetrating portions
    includes two mutually cooperating surfaces which (a) are each integral with
    or fixedly attached to one of the penetrating portions or their common
    nonpenetrating portion, (b) contact and slide relative to each other when
    the penetrating portions move during the securing operation, and (c)
    restrict the relative motion between the penetrating portions to
    substantively a single primary direction.


CLS 24/710.8
TXT Resilient connection:

    Pin* under subclass 710.6 in which the section of the nonpenetrating
    portion linking the two relatively movable penetrating portion together
    bias the portions by its own resiliency towards or away from their final
    securing position.


CLS 24/710.9
TXT Formed from common wire:

    Pin* under subclass 710.5 in which two of the penetrating portions are
    constructed from a single elongated filament.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, subclasses 457+ for a multiple prong impact
    driven fastener.


CLS 24/711
TXT And pointing in same direction:

    Pin* under subclass 710.9 wherein the impaling surface of both penetrating
    portions face toward a common direction and are parallel to each other.


CLS 24/711.1
TXT Penetrating portion includes relatively movable structure for resisting
    extraction:

    Pin* under subclass 706 wherein the penetrating portion includes either (a)
    two distinct parts connected together in a manner allowing them at their
    connection point or region to move relative to each other or (b) a surface
    segment integral with or rigidly affixed to another surface segment and
    movable relative to this segment, the relative movement of the parts or
    surfaces occurring after the penetrating portion impales the
    structure-to-be-secured* or its supporting member and inhibiting or
    preventing its withdrawal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 127+ for a
    handling harpoon with mechanically spread barbs.


CLS 24/711.2
TXT Having specific wire penetrating portion:

    Pin* under subclass 706 wherein the penetrating portion is constructed from
    an elongated filament which either (a) has a particular structural
    modification (e.g., stepped point) or (b) is made from a particular
    material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, subclasses 487+ for a nail, tack, or staple
    having specific shank or penetrating end structure.


CLS 24/711.3
TXT Wire curved or bent:

    Pin* under subclass 711.2 in which the elongated filament forming the
    penetrating portion has a turned or twisted shape.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 43.16+ for a
    hook.


CLS 24/711.4
TXT Having distinct head structure:

    Pin* under subclass 706 having its nonpenetrating portion constructed from
    material or structure other than that forming the penetrating portion.

    (1)     Note.  If the nonpenetrating portion of the pin either supports or
    forms guiding, holding, or protecting means for the penetrating portion
    (e.g., contacts or covers the point of the pin), then it is not proper for
    this and the indented subclass and is found in subclasses 706.2+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, subclass 480 for an impact driven fastener having
    a separately attached head.


CLS 24/711.5
TXT Movably connected to penetrating portion:

    Pin* under subclass 711.4 having a connection between its penetrating
    portion and nonpenetrating portion which allows the two portions to move
    relative to each other when fastening.


CLS 24/712
TXT DRAWSTRING, LACED-FASTENER, OR SEPARATE ESSENTIAL COOPERATING DEVICE
    THEREFOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising either (1) a
    drawstring*, (2) a laced-fastener*, (3) a required component thereof (i.e.,
    string, string guiding means) or (4) a discrete device intended to contact
    and interact with a required portion of the laced-fastener* to affect its
    operation.

    (1)     Note.  Some patents within this and the indented subclasses have
    been placed solely on either (1) their principle disclosed use or (2) their
    commonly known use in the disclosed environment (e.g., an eyelet shown near
    the opening of a shoe) when no special art classification for the claimed
    device exist elsewhere.

    (2)     Note.  Patents which merely name an eyelet or grommet mounted on
    flaccid material have been placed within this and the indented subclasses
    even if there is no disclosure that they are string guiding means proper
    for this and the indented subclasses, when their disclosures do not state
    what passes through their guiding cavity and the eyelets or grommets do not
    attach layers of material together.

    (3)     Note.  See (6) of the class definition for patent placement
    procedures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for a cord type packet holder.

    34,     for a laced-fastener* used to connect the ends of a belt.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 270 for means which closes the opening in the
    sleeve or leg portion of apparel.

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 12 for machines or processes for making a
    lacing stud.

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclasses 50.1+ for a laced-fastener*
    in combination with specific shoe structure.

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, for a process or
    apparatus for making a strand.

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 565 and 571 for bandaging having a
    laced-fastener*.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    70 for a method of encasing a drawstring between adhering lamina.

    402,    Binder Device Releasably Engaging Aperture or Notch of Sheet,
    subclasses 8+ for a cord type binder device.

    D2,     Apparel and Haberdashery, subclass 316 for a shoelace.


CLS 24/712.1
TXT Includes separate device for holding drawn portion of lacing:

    Subject matter under subclass 712 including a device which (a) is neither
    part of nor fixedly attached to the string or string guiding means of
    either the drawstring* or laced-fastener* and (b) prevents, or helps to
    prevent, retrograde movement of the extracted portion of the string from
    its securing position.

    (1)     Note.  In general, a device which is part of guiding means for the
    string is not proper for this and the indented subclasses.  However, if a
    guiding means with a device is intended to always be used at the end of a
    series of diverse type guiding means which are not intended to prevent the
    movement of the string, then it is proper for this area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115+,   for a fastener which engages and holds one portion of a cord or
    rope having a principle utility outside this class (i.e., the rope or cord
    is a structure-to-be-secured* and not part of a class 24 fastener).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    411,    Freight Accommodation on Freight Carrier, subclasses 101+ for an
    anchor to secure an end of a load lashing member to a freight carrying
    vehicle so that the remainder of the member may be used to lash a freight
    load unit to the vehicle.


CLS 24/712.2
TXT Device engages tie in lacing:

    Movement preventing device under subclass 712.1 which contacts and works in
    conjunction with a knot or bow formed in cooperating extracted portions of
    the string.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 245 for a shoe ornament.


CLS 24/712.3
TXT And fully covers tie:

    Movement preventing device under subclass 712.2 wherein either the knot or
    bow in the string is entirely concealed beneath the perimeter of the device.


CLS 24/712.4
TXT Device engages element or formation on lacing:

    Movement preventing device under subclass 712.1 which contacts and works in
    conjunction with either (1) a distinct element attached to and supported by
    the string or (2) a structural formation (e.g., aperture) formed in or on
    the string to prevent retrograde movement of the string.


CLS 24/712.5
TXT Having relatively movable holding components or surfaces:

    Movement preventing device under subclass 712.1 having either (1) two
    distinct parts connected together in a manner allowing them at their
    connection point or region to move relative to each other when the
    components contact and act together to prevent retrograde movement of the
    string or (2) a segment integral with or rigidly affixed to another segment
    and movable relative to this segment when the two segments contact and act
    together to prevent retrograde movement of the string.


CLS 24/712.6
TXT With pivotal connection therebetween:

    Movement preventing device under subclass 712.5 with one string contacting
    part connected to another string contacting part in a manner allowing it to
    both (1) swing in an arcuate path about a constantly engaged connection
    point or region located on either the other string contacting part or an
    intermediate linking part of the device and (2) maintain relative movement
    between the engaging surfaces of the parts at the point or region of their
    engagement when shifting toward or away from its string contacting position.


CLS 24/712.7
TXT With integral resilient linking structure therebetween:

    Movement preventing device under subclass 712.5 with one string contacting
    segment connected to another string contacting segment by intermediate
    structure unitarily constructed with the two contacting segments and
    biasing them by its own resiliency either toward or away from their string
    contacting position.


CLS 24/712.8
TXT Formed from wire:

    Movement preventing device under subclass 712.7 in which the intermediate
    structure is constructed from an elongated filament.


CLS 24/712.9
TXT Having lacing wound thereabout or wedged therein:

    Movement preventing device under subclass 712.1 having specifically shaped
    structure either upon which the string is wrapped around or into which the
    string is compressed to prevent retrograde movement thereof.


CLS 24/713
TXT With holding means fixedly mounted on lacing:

    Subject matter under subclass 712 provided with means stationarily attached
    to the string for preventing, or helping to prevent, retrograde movement of
    the extracted portion of the string from its secured position.


CLS 24/713.1
TXT And forming lacing tips:

    Movement preventing means under subclass 713 which also shields or encases
    the ends of the string to either prevent damage to the ends or facilitate
    their passage through the guiding means.


CLS 24/713.2
TXT Includes lacing holding structure within directing means therefor:

    String guiding means under subclass 712 which includes a component of
    surface for preventing, or helping to prevent, retrograde movement of the
    extracted portion of the string from its securing position.


CLS 24/713.3
TXT Having diverse shaped directing means for lacing:

    Subject matter under subclass 712 wherein the string is guided by at least
    two differently configured guiding means.


CLS 24/713.4
TXT Having lacing directing means in particular pattern:

    Subject matter under subclass 712 wherein the string is guided along its
    path by two or more guiding means placed in a specific relationship to each
    other or a design.


CLS 24/713.5
TXT Includes lacing guiding roller within directing means:

    String guiding means under subclass 712 including a component for reducing
    friction which rotates about an axis when the string contacts and is pulled
    across its surface.


CLS 24/713.6
TXT Having eyelet type directing means:

    String guiding means under subclass 712 having structure at least partially
    encircling a string guiding aperture which completely passes through and
    has its central axis perpendicular to the longitudinal plane of the
    structure-to-be-secured.*

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    661,    for a receiving cavity (e.g., button hole) of a separable-fastener*
    which is defined by both flaccid* and nonflaccid components.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 2.1+ for a device which lines
    and reinforces an opening in a structure to prevent abrasion of an element
    passing  therethrough, and subclasses 108+ for an annular protective device
    which prevents abrasion of an element passing through a pipe or conduit.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 27 for a reinforcing
    device which prevents a label or tag from tearing.

    112,    Sewing, subclass 66 for special machines which stitch around the
    edges of an eyelet.

    114,    Ships, particularly subclasses 114 and 115 for an eyelet on a sail.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 152+ for a
    bushing type insulator passing through a wall or plate.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, subclasses 439+, for a fastener securing two
    layers of material together and having a hole formed therethrough which is
    not disclosed for use as a passageway for an element (e.g., lacing).


CLS 24/713.7
TXT With permanently deformed mounting structure:

    String guiding means under subclass 713.6 provided with structure for
    attaching the guiding means to the structure-to-be-secured* which has a
    portion of its initial configuration altered during the attaching operation
    by a deforming force in excess of the amount of force necessary for plastic
    deformation of the material from which the structure is constructed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 505+ for the process of joining two parts
    together by distorting a portion of at least one of the parts beyond its
    elastic limit.


CLS 24/713.8
TXT Mounting structure formed from different material than directing passage:

    String guiding means under subclass 713.7  in which the attaching structure
    is constructed from material diverse from that used in at least one portion
    of the structure which encircles the string guiding aperture.


CLS 24/713.9
TXT Having hook shaped directing means:

    String guiding means under subclass 712 having an elongated planer shank
    and a curved or bent appendage which projects therefrom and has its
    remaining end unconnected thereto, the free end of the appendage and a
    portion of the shank defining a gap through which the string may enter or
    leave the guide means when moved in a direction perpendicular to the
    direction the string travels when guided.


CLS 24/714
TXT And movable component or surface for closing throat:

    String guiding means under subclass 713.9 having either (1) a distinct
    displaceable part connected to or (2) a displaceable surface segment
    integral with or rigidly affixed to the shank or appendage of the guiding
    means for blocking the gap through which the string enter or leaves.


CLS 24/714.1
TXT Mounted by structure allowing bodily movement thereof:

    String guiding means under subclass 713.9 which is attached to the
    structure-to-be-secured* by structure permitting the string guiding portion
    of the means to move as a complete unit relative to the surface to which it
    is attached.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    439,    for Slit Closing means which includes a laced-fastener* between
    parts of its slidable bridging component.


CLS 24/714.2
TXT Formed from wire:

    String guiding means under subclass 713.9 in which the shank and its curved
    or bent appendage are constructed from an elongated filament.


CLS 24/714.3
TXT With mounting structure formed from different material:

    String guiding means under subclass 713.9 provided with structure to attach
    the guiding means to the structure-to-be-secured* which is constructed from
    material diverse from that used in at least one part of the remainder of
    the guide means.


CLS 24/714.4
TXT With permanently deformed mounting structure:

    String guiding means under subclass 713.9 provided with structure for
    attaching the guiding means to the structure-to-be-secured* which has its
    initial configuration altered during the attaching operation by a deforming
    force in excess of the amount of force necessary for plastic deformation of
    the material from which the structure is constructed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 505+ for the process of joining two parts
    together by distorting a portion of at least one of the parts beyond its
    elastic limit.


CLS 24/714.5
TXT Expanding stud:

    Deformed attaching structure under subclass 714.4 having a narrow shank
    portion which first passes through the structure-to-be-secured* and then
    has the width of the end projecting therethrough broadened by the deforming
    force to prevent its withdrawal.


CLS 24/714.6
TXT Having loop or sleeve shaped directing means:

    String guiding means under subclass 712 attached to the
    structure-to-be-secured* and having a curved or bent configuration which
    either fully encircles, or coacts with the structure-to-be-secured* to
    fully encircle, a passage through which the string travels when guided.


CLS 24/714.7
TXT Entirely formed from flaccid material:

    String guiding means under subclass 714.6 which is completely constructed
    from a flaccid* material (e.g., cord).


CLS 24/714.8
TXT Mounted by structure allowing bodily movement thereof:

    String guiding means under subclass 714.6 which is attached to the
    structure-to-be-secured* by structure permitting the string guiding portion
    of the means to move as a complete unit relative to the surface to which it
    is attached.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    439,    for Slit Closing means which includes a laced-fastener* between
    spaced parts of its slidable bridging component.


CLS 24/714.9
TXT Formed from wire:

    String guiding means under subclass 714.6 which is constructed from an
    elongated filament.


CLS 24/715
TXT With permanently deformed mounting structure:

    String guiding means under subclass 714.6 provided with structure for
    attaching the guiding means to the structure-to-be-secured* which has its
    initial configuration altered during the attaching operation by a deforming
    force in excess of the amount of force necessary for plastic deformation of
    the material from which the structure is constructed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 505+ for the process of joining two parts
    together by distorting a portion of at least one of the parts beyond its
    elastic limit.


CLS 24/715.1
TXT Loop or sleeve closed when mounted:

    String guiding means under subclass 715 wherein the passage in the means
    through which the string passes is fully encircled only after the attaching
    structure is deformed.


CLS 24/715.2
TXT Expanding stud:

    Deformed attaching structure under subclass 715 having a narrow shank
    portion which first passes through the structure-to-be-secured* and then
    has the width of the end projecting therethrough broadened by the deforming
    force to prevent its withdrawal.


CLS 24/715.3
TXT Having elastic segment in lacing:

    String under subclass 712 having at least a portion of its length either
    (1) formed from or combined with flaccid* resilient* material or (2)
    attached to and supporting a resilient* element (e.g., spring).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 225+ for an
    indefinite length strand having an elastomeric material core.

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, subclass 2 for
    processes for making an elastic strand.


CLS 24/715.4
TXT Having means covering tip of lacing:

    String under subclass 712 having means located thereon for shielding or
    encasing at least one of its ends to either prevent damage to the end or
    facilitate its passage through the guiding means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    713.1,  for holding means which also covers the tips of its lacing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 232+ for an
    indefinite length strand having a coated or impregnated segment.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    cross-reference art collection 807 for lace tipping apparatus.


CLS 24/715.5
TXT Tasseled:

    Shielding or encasing means under subclass 715.4 which includes either (1)
    multiple parallel cords or (2) a slitted part with multiple parallel
    tentacles, the cords or tentacles having one of their ends fixedly attached
    to the string and the other end extending away from the string and dangling
    freely.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 28 for a
    decorative element placed on the end of an article.


CLS 24/715.6
TXT With plural components:

    Shielding or encasing means under subclass 715.4 provided with two distinct
    parts which are connected together when attached to the string.


CLS 24/715.7
TXT With permanently deformed mounting structure:

    Shielding or encasing means under subclass 715.4 provided with structure
    for attaching the means to the string which has its initial configuration
    altered during the attaching operation by a deforming force in excess of
    the amount of force necessary for plastic deformation of the material from
    which the structure is constructed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 505+ for the process of joining two parts
    together by distorting a portion of a least one of the parts beyond its
    elastic limit.


CLS 24/716
TXT HANGER ON PORTABLE ARTICLE SUPPORT FOR MANUAL ATTACHMENT THEREOF TO
    OVERHEAD SUPPORT (E.G., DRAPERY HOOK):Subject matter under the class
    definition comprising connecting means on transportable article supporting
    structure which is   attached or detached solely by direct manual force to
    a support member (e.g., rod) located above it when the article supporting
    structure is suspended therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    706.1,  for a pin* mounted to supporting structure by manually releaseable
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 87.2, 93, 94, 95, and 96, for a
    drapery support in combination with guide shoe or guide track structure.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclass 404 for
    the combination of a hook element supporting fabric from an  elongated
    support element.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 85+ for a garment hanger (e.g., coat
    hanger) provided with a support hook and Dig. 4 for a garment hanger
    support hook or garment support hook.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 24/900.1
TXT SHIRT COLLAR HOLDERS:

    Fastener designed to hold one or more portions of a neck encircling band of
    a shirt in a particular position relative to either another portion of the
    neck encircling band or the shirt.


CLS 24/901
TXT PENETRATING-TYPE PAPER FASTENER:

    Fastener designed to pierce into or through a sheet of paper.


CLS 24/902
TXT TUFTING BUTTON FASTENER:

    Fastener designed to attach either an affixed head portion or a separate
    button to an upholstery cover.


CLS 24/903
TXT ARMPIT SHIELD FASTENER:

    Fastener designed to attach a perspiration absorbing pad to an article of
    clothing at the section thereof which is nearest to the armpit.


CLS 24/904
TXT GLOVE FASTENER:

    Securing means designed to either (a) close an opening in a hand covering
    or (b) hold one portion of a hand covering relative to another portion
    thereof.


CLS 24/905
TXT WATCH CHAIN FASTENER (E.G., SWIVEL HOOK):

    Securing means designed to releasably attach the end of a chain to a watch
    supported thereby.


CLS 24/906
TXT FASTENER FOR ATTACHING BAND TO WATCH OR SIMILAR ARTICLE (E.G., NAME PLATE):

    Securing means designed to releaseably attach either a watch or another
    article of like size to a band intended to be worn around an appendage of a
    person.


CLS 24/907
TXT PLASTIC HOOK:

    Securing means which is completely constructed from a plastic compound
    (e.g., synthetic resin, polymer) and includes an elongated shank portion
    with a bent or curved appendage projecting therefrom.


CLS 24/908
TXT FISHLINE SUPPORTED ATTACHMENT HOOK:

    Securing means which is designed to be mounted on a fishline and to
    releasably attach fishing apparatus (e.g., fishhook) thereto and which
    includes an elongated shank portion with a bent or curved appendage
    projecting therefrom.


CLS 24/909
TXT WINDERS FOR FLEXIBLE MATERIAL:

    Winders adapted to be attached to a wire, strap, or other line at a point
    along its length to take up slack and remain as a permanent part of the
    line.


CLS 24/910
TXT ONE-PIECE:

    Winders under art collection 909 made in one piece.


CLS 26/
TTL TEXTILES: CLOTH FINISHING

CLS 26/
TXT
    This is the generic class for the treatment of textile fabrics subsequent
    to the fabrication thereof for putting them in better marketable condition.

    Due to the similarity of the shearing of fur in the finishing of a fur skin
    to the shearing of the surface fibers or threads of cloth, particularly
    that of pile fabric, and the finishing of fur by shearing is included in
    this class, subclasses 15+.

    Due to the similarity of apparatus for the stretching or plastic film to
    apparatus for the stretching of fabric, the former has been placed in this
    class (26), subclasses 71+ along with the latter.  However, process for the
    stretching of plastic film is not in this class:  rather it is in Class
    264, Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 288.4 (see particularly subclass 290.2).

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, for processes of bleaching, dyeing, laundering, and
    chemical treatment of fibers and fabrics.  See Class 68, Textiles:  Fluid
    Treating Apparatus, for apparatus for fluid treatment of fibers and fabrics.

    28,     Textiles: Manufacturing, for miscellaneous operations relative to
    the production of textiles.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, for the drying of
    cloth as a distinct step and when not carried out in connection with some
    other treatment.

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, for the finishing of cloth by
    ironing or smoothing and methods and means auxiliary thereto.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting; 87, Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace
    Making; and 139, Textiles: Weaving, for finishing operations carried on in
    connection with the fabrication of the cloth.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, for the finishing of cloth by
    fluid treatment or by combined fluid treatment and manipulation or working
    not provided for in this class.

    101,    Printing, for printing on cloth.

    112,    Sewing, for the sewing of cloth.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, for miscellaneous apparel apparatus.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, appropriate subclasses for a
    winding, unwinding, or reeling device that may be used for handling
    material associated with a cloth finishing means.

    270,    Sheet-Material Associating.

    427,    Coating Processes, for processes of  coating or impregnating in
    general.


CLS 26/1
TXT Inventions falling within this class and not otherwise provided for.


CLS 26/2
TXT Inventions peculiar to the finishing of a fabric having a surface
    consisting of a plurality of upstanding thread ends or loops.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 8.

    (2)     Note.  For pile fabric finishing with ornamentation, see this
    class, subclass 69.

    (3)     Note.  Compare with napping mechanisms in this class, subclasses
    29+.


CLS 26/3
TXT Burning or scorching the projecting fibers or threads of cloth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclass 174 for clearing sheets of
    warp-threads by singeing, and subclass 239 for the clearing of an
    individual thread by singeing.

    219,    Electric Heating, for electric heater structure, per se.

    431,    Combustion, appropriate subclass for burner structure, per se.


CLS 26/4
TXT Singeing cloth in other than continuous-strip form.


CLS 26/5
TXT The support on which the article is placed is connected to the machine
    during the operation.


CLS 26/6
TXT The touching of a hot member, such as a plate or wire, accomplishes the
    singeing.


CLS 26/7
TXT Severing the projecting threads or fibers of cloth by an edged instrument.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, for the general structure of cutting devices.

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses for devices which cut through the
    base or foundation of the cloth.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, for devices peculiarly adapted to operate on hat
    bodies.


CLS 26/8
TXT Peculiar to the cutting of the looped threads on the surface of a fabric to
    produce a plurality of upstanding thread ends.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for devices which are capable of but not limited to the cutting of
    pile loops.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 80.55+ for an embroidering, tufting device
    including a loop catcher with loop cutting means means.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 43, 46+, 116.5+ and 291 for similar
    devices operating as part of the loom mechanism.


CLS 26/9
TXT Includes means for advancing the fabric during the cutting.


CLS 26/10
TXT Includes means peculiarly adapted to stop pile cutting machines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 116.5 and the search
    notes contained in the definitions thereof.


CLS 26/10.4
TXT Processes and apparatus under subclass 7 for the removal of projecting weft
    ends from the edge of fabric, or for the removal of loops connecting
    nonadjacent wefts and floating along the edge of the fabric.

    (1)     Note.  Selvage float loops often are formed in weaving on looms
    equipped with multiple shuttle boxes, one or more of which boxes (at any
    stage of weaving) contain inactive filling packages each of which is still
    connected by an integral length of weft yarn to the last pick of filling
    laid from that package and which, upon re-entry into active filling laying,
    operates to extend such length of weft adjacent to but outside of the
    fabric selvage in the form of a loop or external float thread.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for inventions related to the cutting of threads floating along the
    surface of a fabric.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclass 170.3 for means effective to prevent
    the fouling of inactive filling threads in multiple-shuttle-box looms,
    noting particularly subclass 170.4 for such apparatus combined with a
    cutter; and subclass 302 for loom-mounted selvage trimmers.


CLS 26/11
TXT Peculiar to cutting threads other than pile loops and which have a portion
    spanning some part of the surface of the cloth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10.4,   for inventions related to the severing of threads floating along
    the edge, but not over the surface, of woven fabrics (selvage loops).


CLS 26/11.4
TXT Processes and apparatus under subclass 11 for severing the connecting or
    unwoven warp threads (float or cross threads) in Venetian blind ladder
    tapes.


CLS 26/12
TXT Includes means for advancing the fabric.


CLS 26/13
TXT Cutting the connecting threads of two-ply fabric to produce two-pile
    fabrics.


CLS 26/14
TXT Devices for cutting double-pile fabric which are adapted for mounting on
    the frame of the loom, but not necessarily a part of the loom combination.


CLS 26/15
TXT Cutting the surface fibers or threads of cloth.

    (1)     Note.  The shearing of fur in the finishing of fur is included in
    this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclass 25 for the removal of the coarse or
    "water" hairs from furs by clipping or shearing.


CLS 26/16
TXT Includes nonuniform shearing.


CLS 26/17
TXT Includes means actuated upon the approach of a seam to provided therefor.


CLS 26/18
TXT Devices for holding a fabric strip adjacent the cutting means and whose
    lengths are controlled by the position of the strip.


CLS 26/18.5
TXT Apparatus and processes under the class definition for working a fabric to
    increase its compactness.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18.6    for regular shifting of the warp or weft threads.

    19,     for fulling operations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 114+ and  115.51+ for chemical processes of
    shrinking.


CLS 26/18.6
TXT Apparatus and processes under subclass 18.5 in which the compactness of the
    fabric is increased by crowding together the warp threads or the weft
    treads.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 205, 206 and 361 for
    related structure.


CLS 26/19
TXT Apparatus and processes under subclass 18.5 for working a feltable fabric
    in wet condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacaturing, for analogous devices used in the
    formation of a felt fabric.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, for analogous devices for
    fluid treatment of textiles where the textile is not fulled.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for the
    treatment of fabrics with coating or impregnating materials.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 367.1 for soap compositions not adapted for
    use as detergents and subclass 8.61 for fulling compositions.

    427,    Coating Processes, for processes of coating or impregnating in
    general.

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, for detergents and
    other compositions used for cleaning solid substrates.


CLS 26/20
TXT Apparatus and processes under subclass 19 wherein the fabric is fed
    constantly through the machine.


CLS 26/21
TXT Apparatus and processes under subclass 20 wherein the fabric is bent into
    short transverse folds for the purpose of carrying on the fulling thereof,
    usually by being forced through a constricted passage.


CLS 26/22
TXT Apparatus and processes under subclass 19 wherein the cloth is struck by a
    hammer.


CLS 26/23
TXT Apparatus and processes under subclass 22 in which the hammer is actuated
    in one direction by gravity.


CLS 26/24
TXT Apparatus under subclass 19 wherein means is provided for stopping the
    operation of the apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 116.5 and the search
    notes contained in the definitions thereof.


CLS 26/25
TXT Striking the fabric for purposes other than fulling.


CLS 26/26
TXT Striking the fabric with a hammer to produce an ironing finish.


CLS 26/27
TXT Treating the cloth by friction other than by pressing surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, for rubbing by smooth surfaces to
    iron or smooth a textile fabric or article.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the notes thereunder.


CLS 26/28
TXT The rubbing is done by a sandpaperlike surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, for abrading not limited to the treatment of the cloth
    itself, especially subclasses 466+ for a rotary cylinder having flexible
    abradant flaps extending from the periphery thereof.


CLS 26/29
TXT Raising the fibers of cloth to produce a pilelike surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for the mere application of a sandpaperlike surface to the cloth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, for machines peculiarly adapted to operate upon
    hat bodies.


CLS 26/30
TXT Included nonuniform napping.


CLS 26/31
TXT There is some novelty in the teazlelike element or in the method of
    attaching it to a base.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, for brushes, per se.

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclass 114 for the structure of
    card clothing which is not peculiar to napping.


CLS 26/32
TXT Machines coming under subclass 31 for raising the fiber of the cloth.


CLS 26/33
TXT Rotating napping rolls are carried on the periphery of a rotating drum.


CLS 26/34
TXT Includes novelty in the means for driving either the drum or the individual
    napping rolls.


CLS 26/35
TXT Limited to the means for driving the drum or the napping rolls carried
    thereby.


CLS 26/36
TXT The member which produces the napping has a to-and-fro motion.


CLS 26/37
TXT Devices which have only one napping cylinder which has no motion other than
    that of rotation.


CLS 26/51
TXT Applying tension and distorting strains to the cloth while it is spread out
    in sheet form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71+     for an apparatus for expanding a running web of cloth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 33 for coating apparatus combined with
    means to stretch the work.


CLS 26/51.3
TXT Devices under subclass 51 wherein the fabric working means comprises means
    for changing the angle of weft threads relative to warp threads in a
    traveling woven fabric.

    (1)     Note.  These devices are usually intended for correcting weft bow
    or skew in woven fabrics, but may be used for positively skewing or biasing
    weft threads.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18.6,   for working of woven fabrics by crowding together the parallel
    threads of warp and weft without necessarily changing the angular
    relationship between warp threads, on the one hand, and weft threads on the
    other.


CLS 26/51.4
TXT Devices under subclass 51.3 having means, responsive to improper weft
    position, to correct or introduce skew or bow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for control means for regulating the advance of web or stand material.


CLS 26/51.5
TXT Devices under subclass 51.4 wherein the weft position responsive means
    comprises photo-electric scanners, and wherein the operation of the weft
    position changing means is initiated by the detection of improper weft
    positioning by such scanning means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 200 for photoelectric cells, circuits, and
    associated apparatus.


CLS 26/52
TXT The cloth is gripped by clamps, hooks, or pins which travel along with the
    cloth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71+     for an apparatus for expanding a running web of cloth.


CLS 26/53
TXT The members which carry the means for propelling the clamps, hooks or pins
    have a to-and-fro motion.


CLS 26/69
TXT The production of nonuniform effects on cloth, by mere operation on the
    material thereof, not otherwise provided for.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16      and 30, for ornamentation produced solely by shearing or napping.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 478+ for special ornamental colored
    effects, and subclass 114 for ornamental effects obtained by chemical
    modification of textile fibers and fabrics.


CLS 26/70
TXT Devices for facilitating the inspection and examination of cloth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 159 for fabric testing other than
    mere inspection or visual examination.

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses. Class 269 is the residual
    locus for patents to a device for clamping, supporting and/or holding an
    article (or articles) in position to be operated on or treated.  See notes
    thereunder for other related loci.


CLS 26/71
TXT Structure under the class definition for expanding a running web of cloth;
    i.e., to increase a dimension thereof or to apply tension thereto to
    inhibit shrinkage or to remove wrinkles, creases or folds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51+,    for apparatus for performing diverse operations on running length
    increments of a cloth web including a cloth expanding operation (note,
    moreover, the superior subclasses of this class (26) for apparatus for
    respective specified operations in which cloth expanding structure may also
    be provided).

    69,     for a device for imparting an ornamental stretch to a localized
    zone only of running length web increments.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclass 1.5 for a belt stretching machine,
    and in which running strip increments are stretched.

    83,     Cutting, subclass 18 for the method, and subclass 175 for apparatus
    for cutting and stretching work.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 291+ for fabric manipulating
    structure for a textile weaving machine, which manipulation may include
    expanding the cloth.

    140,    Wireworking, subclass 108 for a device for stretching wire cloth.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    494+ for a stretching device combined with laminating apparatus.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 288.4+ for the method of stretching a running length of plastic;
    e.g., subclass for 290.2 the biaxial stretching thereof.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 171+ for a method of coating which
    includes the expanding (e.g., the stretching, spreading or tensioning
    against shrinkage) of a running length web of cloth.


CLS 26/72
TXT Structure under subclass 71 for expanding cloth in both the longitudinal
    and lateral (or spreading) directions; i.e., coaxially and transversely of
    the running length direction.


CLS 26/73
TXT Structure under subclass 72 in which the cloth expanding means is
    constituted by the series of cloth edge retaining and accompanying spreader
    members defined in subclass 89; and in which means is further provided
    progressively forwardly to increase the spacing between adjacent members
    whereby simultaneous longitudinal expansion of the cloth is also
    accomplished.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 235.8 and 290.2, for the method of biaxially stretching a
    running web of plastic fabric.


CLS 26/74
TXT Cloth expanding structure under subclass 71 including means responsive to a
    particular condition of the running length of cloth to control a cloth
    expanding operation; i.e., to modify, stop or start the operation or to
    prevent or correct improper operation.

    (1)     Note.  Cloth pull to drive an element (even such a spreader element
    as the roller of subclasses 97 or 99+) in itself does not constitute
    operation control for this subclasses (74+).  Compare, however, with
    subclass 77 indented hereunder (74+), in which cloth pull not only drives
    the spreader but, further, controls and adjusts the angle of the roller and
    thereby of the selvage position responsive to the selvage location.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 10+ for
    web-condition-responsive means to control the web advancing mechanism,
    particularly, subclasses 15+ for detection responsive control of the
    location of an edge of the web.


CLS 26/75
TXT Spreader under subclass 74 in which the condition and the control is that
    of the lateral position of a selvage of the running length of cloth.

    (1)     Note.  The "spreader", of the title of this subclasses (75+) is
    defined in subclass 87.

    (2)     Note.  The terms "edge" and "selvage" are used interchangeably and
    are completely synonymous with one another.


CLS 26/76
TXT Spreader under subclass 75 in which selvage detection means controls
    mechanism for adjusting the lateral position of the guide or support for
    the traveling series of spreader members which successively retain the
    selvage increments of the traveling web to accompany the web for the
    spreading operation.  Generally the angle with the running web axis or the
    distance from the axis is controlled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     for the structure of the guide or support for traveling series of
    cloth-edge retaining and accompanying spreaders.  That subclass (91)
    further include means for manually and volitionally adjusting said guide or
    support structure.


CLS 26/77
TXT Spreader under subclass 75 in which the condition responsive means controls
    the (acute, forward) angular position of the axis of the selvage-engaging
    roller spreader relative to the longitudinal axis of the running length of
    cloth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97,     for the structure of selvage-engaging roller spreader.


CLS 26/78
TXT Spreader under subclass 75 in which the condition responsive means controls
    adjustment of one of the rollers of roller-pair spreader means toward or
    away from cloth-directing engagement with the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97,     for the structure of a selvage-engaging spreader of roller-pair
    construction, and subclasses 99+ for the structure of the roller spreader
    pair which completely traverses the successive increments of the running
    length of cloth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclass 35 for nip
    control means responsive to the condition of a web in web advancing
    apparatus.


CLS 26/79
TXT Spreader under subclass 75 in which the condition is the inward movement of
    the (selvage, or) edge from the gripped position between the jaw members of
    the traveling series of spreaders of the clamp type; and in which,
    responsive thereto, a second, inward companion, traveling spreader is
    conditioned to retain that edge at a position closer to the longitudiinal
    axis of the traveling web.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93+,    for the structure of the traveling series of selvage-retaining
    spreaders, which subclass may further discloses the (unclaimed)
    inboard-outboard companion pair of grippers and means responsive thereto
    for activating the companion inboard spreaders.

    95,     for spreader structure which includes the series of accompanying
    series of clamp-type spreaders and also a companion series of the
    edge-penetrating, pin type.


CLS 26/80
TXT Spreader under subclass 71 including a member positioned to be enveloped by
    continuous tubular cloth web increments and dimensioned engagingly to force
    the cloth increments outwardly in a plane transverse to the running
    direction of the web.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18.5+,  for the combination of shrinking and spreading tubular fabric.


CLS 26/81
TXT Spreader under subclass 80 in which (a) the enveloped member is heated for
    transfer of heat to the cloth web or (b) means is provided for impinging
    gaseous heating or drying fluid against the cloth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18.5,   for the combination of shrinking, including fluid-treating and
    drying, with spreading tubular fabric; e.g., expanding the fabric widthwise
    to cause it to shrink lengthwise.


CLS 26/82
TXT Spreader under subclass 80 further including cutting means parting adjacent
    portions of the tubular cloth web from one another along a line coinciding
    with the web advance direction, whereby the cloth is made available for
    single width use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 18 for the method, and subclass 175 for apparatus
    for cutting and stretching work, where the work could be a tubular fabric
    web and the stretcher could be a web-enclosed spreader.  Where details of
    the spreader are at all involved, however, the original document is placed
    in this instant Class 26, subclass (82).


CLS 26/83
TXT Spreader under subclass 80 including rotatable means (e.g., rollers,
    endless belts) engaging the cloth increments at the spreading plane
    extremities to drive or to facilitate movement of the cloth increments
    therepast.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29+,    for the combination of napping and spreading tubular cloth about an
    enclosed tube.


CLS 26/84
TXT Spreader under subclass 83 including motor or transmission means to rotate
    the rotatable means at the spreading plane extremities for driving the
    cloth increments.

    (1)     Note.  The driven web-feeding rollers may be at the ends of at
    least one pair of opposed, enclosed spreader arms or they may be feed
    roller contacting the spreader arm extremities from the outside, with
    opposed web increments passing between the rollers and the spreader arm
    extremities.  It is possible, for indented subclass 85 for an enclosed
    driven cylinder to constitute the web drive means for this locus, with
    diametrically opposed peripheral points thereof constituting the driven
    extremities.


CLS 26/85
TXT Spreader under subclass 84 in which the enveloped spreader member is of a
    width, in at least two intersecting dimensions transverse to the running
    length direction of the web, to spread the cloth along corresponding
    intersecting planes.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note in parent subclass 84, particularly the last
    sentence. Note, moreover, driven rollers across any of the plurality (or
    infinite number) of transverse spreading planes is adequate to satisfy the
    requirement(s) of this subclass.


CLS 26/86
TXT Structure under subclass 71 either (a) in an arrangement, or further
    including means repetitively to bunch successive increments of the running
    web of cloth; or (b) spreader structure including series of cloth edge
    penetrating and accompanying members and rotary disc means positioned to
    engage and force cloth edge increments through the members.

    (1)     Note.  A rotary pinner is so common for overfeed that it is
    classified there with whether or not used or useful, as disclosed, toward
    that purpose (e.g., even when they are idlers).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18.5,   for an overfeed arrangement to effect shrinking.

    80+,    for an overfeed arrangement comprising means about which tubular
    fabric is bunched; see, particularly, subclass 85 thereunder.

    96,     for the structure of series of edge penetrating and accompanying
    spreaders.


CLS 26/87
TXT Structure under subclass 71 including means to extend the running length
    increments of the cloth web in an outward direction (usually, both opposite
    directions) i.e., transverse to the running length direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for structure to extend the cloth web in both the running length
    direction and transversely thereto.

    75+,    for a spreader including means responsive to a cloth web condition
    (commonly, the location of the edge) to control the cloth expanding
    operation.

    80+,    for a spreader for entering and spreading (i.e., transversely
    extending) tubular fabric.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses 65+ for apparatus which
    may include means for spreading the discrete fibers constituting a web in
    which the fibers are free enough to be shifted relative to one another.

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclass 143 for a spreader
    combined with structure peculiar to ironers; e.g., an entrance end and
    means to feed cloth therethrough.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    496 for a spreader which is part of laminating apparatus.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 173 for the method of coating and
    spreading running length work.


CLS 26/88
TXT Spreader under subclass 87 positioned and dimensioned to act upon edge
    increments only of the running length of the fabric web; usually, a spaced
    pair of spreader elements, one for each edge.

    (1)     Note.  The terms "edge" and "selvage" are used interchangeably and
    are completely synonymous with one another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18.6,   for the shrinking of a cloth web of warp and weft construction
    including advancing it through the apparatus in a direction opposite to
    that which would cause spreading.  Where the invention is to apparatus
    selectively to perform one or the other operation, the original will be
    found in that subclass (18.6) and a cross only in the instant subclass (88).

    87,     the parent subclass for spreader structure positioned and
    dimensioned to act upon the cloth web increments inward of the selvages.


CLS 26/89
TXT Spreader under subclass 88 constituted by a (usually paired) series of
    discrete edge-retaining members which become affixed to and which thereby
    accompany successive edge increments of the running length (usually, again,
    both edges by each accompanying pair).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for edge-entraining belt means (usually a pair of belts), for
    continuous and uninterrupted retentive contact with the fabric edge(s),
    rather than the successive contacts by the discrete member of the usually
    paired) series of this subclass (89).


CLS 26/90
TXT Spreader under subclass 89 in which the series of edge-retaining members is
    (are) spaced connected about the periphery of a rotating annular member
    (usually, paried series about spaced peripheries of the member or about
    peripheries of spaced accompanying (disc) members) to retain the running
    length edge(s) of a fabric web to effect spreading during movement of the
    edge(s) about the peripheries.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for edge-entraining-wheel spreader structure in which the selvage
    is continuously and uniterruptedly clamped for travel rather than at
    intervals by the traveling series of this subclass (90).

    93+     and 96, for tenter chains of the clamp or hook series type,
    respectively, in which the course of the chain(s) may bring the series
    about the periphery of a sprocket or drum whereat fabric-edge spreading
    could possibly be effected. The chain of clamps or hooks are guided, but
    not connected about the rotating annulus, as in the instant subclass (90).


CLS 26/91
TXT Spreader under subclass 89 including means to support or guide the series
    of edge retaining and accompanying spreader members at the appropriate
    spacing or (forward, acute) angle relative to the running length axis (or,
    more commonly, relative to the companion support or guide for the opposite
    edge series); and further including means to adjust the guide or support to
    said appropriate spacing or angle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76,     for tenter frame structure the adjustment of which is responsive to
    the detection of the selvage position of the running length of cloth web.


CLS 26/92
TXT Spreader under subclass 89 further including either (a) a heated member
    engageable with the running length of cloth; or (b) means to apply drying
    or heating gaseous fluid to the cloth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     for heating or drying structure for a tubular fabric spreader.

    106,    for heating or drying means for structure which expands cloth
    longitudinally of the running length; which subclass (106) further serves
    for the cross-reference collection of heating or drying means used with
    spreader structure of general character (i.e., other than of instant
    subclass 92 or of subclass 81).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclass
    for the drying of web material, generally, including tenter means to
    advance the material to or through the dryer. See, for example,
    subclass(es):



            4 through 41, for methods of drying (the last being residual for
    the drying of webs);

            43+, for the inclusion of web-condition-responsive dryer control;

            115, for the conveying of the web over or around drying drums;

            158, dryer-and-tenter-structure residually.  That class (34) will
    take the combination of dryer structure for cloth with a tenter which is
    merely broadly claimed.


CLS 26/93
TXT Spreader under subclass 89 in which each of the elements of the series is
    constituted by a pair of jaw members movable relative to one another to
    converge upon and grip opposite sides of successive cloth edge(s)
    increments and to diverge to release the edge(s).


CLS 26/94
TXT Spreader under subclass 93, further including wayside means successively
    engaging the traveling edge-retaining elements in their series at a part
    thereof, or connected thereto, to effect or control said convergent or
    divergent jaw movement.

    (1)     Note.  Mere reference to the clamp manipulation in the disclosure
    of the tentering operation, without even illustration of the manipulator,
    will not serve for placement by disclosure alone of an original patent into
    this subclass rather than parent subclass 93.


CLS 26/95
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93 in which the series includes a further series
    of accompanying companion elements constructed to penetrate the cloth at
    the edge(s).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     for a feeler resembling the clamp defined in this subclass and
    further including means activating the pin members of the series for
    cloth-edge penetration responsive to displacement of that edge from the
    clamp-like feeler member of the series.


CLS 26/96
TXT Spreader under subclass 89 in which the spreader members of the series
    penetrate the running length edge increments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     for a feeler resembling (temporary) clamp and matching inboard
    pins, each of which latter is activated responsive to displacement of the
    cloth edge increment from the former.

    95,     for redundant series of clamp and companion pin travelers which are
    volitionally selectively activatable.


CLS 26/97
TXT Spreader under subclass 88 including rotatable means dimensioned and
    positioned to engage the traveling web increment at the selvage area only
    and effecting outward spreading of the selvage by either (a) being mounted
    for rotation about an axis parallel to the face of the web and at an acute
    forward angle in the direction of the web travel or (b) mounted for
    rotation about said parallel axis and being of such surface configuration
    as to direct said selvage outwardly.


CLS 26/98
TXT Spreader under subclass 88 which deflects the selvage area increments
    outwardly to eliminate folds or wrinkles; e.g., forwardly and outwardly
    directed air blast means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97,     immediately preceding, for an uncurler or dewrinkler which is a
    selvage engaging roller spreader.


CLS 26/99
TXT Spreader under subclass 87 comprising a rotatable cylinder extending
    substantially continuously thwart the entire width of the running length of
    cloth and constructed to compel successive running half-width increments
    oppositely outwardly from the common center.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97,     for roller spreader structure consisting of a pair of roller
    members for the opposite edges.

    99+,    for spreader roll structure extending across the entire width of
    the running cloth web; see, for example subclass 100 or 102+ for spreader
    roll structure made of a plurality of contiguous members extending clear
    across the width of the running web; which members may include one which is
    central and merely passively rolling with the cloth and outside ones acting
    to spread opposite outside half increments.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the notes thereunder.


CLS 26/100
TXT Spreader under subclass 99 in which the rotatable cylinder includes members
    which are coaxially shiftable relative to one another to provide for
    (mutually opposite) outward displacement of the members correspondingly to
    spread the cloth (half-width) increments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99,     the principal subclass, for a roller spreader which is stretchable
    to direct lateral half-width portion(s) outwardly to spread the engaged
    cloth increments.


CLS 26/101
TXT Spreader under subclass 99 of a configuration increasingly to diverge from
    the axis extending between its end supports, whereby the oppositely outward
    spreading of the half-width increments of the running web occurs by being:

    (a)     wedge over the resulting intermediate bulged configuration, or;

    (b)     directed outwardly by contact with a respective one of resulting
    pair of oppositely forwardly angled members or portions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97,     for spreader structure in which each one of a pair of forwardly
    obliquely angled members are located at respective opposite selvages only
    (rather than substantially coextensively athwart the entire width of the
    running length of the web.)


CLS 26/102
TXT Spreader under subclass 101 in which separate, coextensively contiguous
    members constitute the forwardly obliquely angled spreader pair.

    (1)     Note.  The separate members may, or may not, abut or be joined at
    the common center by a separate third (idler) member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97,     for short, noncontiguous roller spreaders for engagement with the
    selvage area(s) only of the traveling web.

    100,    for separate coextensively contiguous members which are axially
    aligned and therefore slidable relative to each other along a common axis.


CLS 26/103
TXT Spreader under subclass 102 in which the separate coextensively contiguous
    members constitute a multiplicity; i.e., a plurality between each opposite
    end to the common center, each member being self-adjustably movable
    relative to the rest to permit rotation thereof notwithstanding the overall
    bowed configuration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, subclasses 16+ for a roll, per se, rotatable
    relative to its supporting shaft, not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 26/104
TXT Spreader under subclass 103 further including a flexible sheath enveloping
    the multiplicity of rotating members.


CLS 26/105
TXT Spreader under subclass 99 in which the opposite outward spreading of the
    running half-width increments is effected by contact with a respective one
    of a pair of helical configurations about the periphery of the roller, each
    winding oppositely outwardly from their common center.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, subclass 35 for a roll, per se, having helically
    aligned surface projections, indentations or slits, not elsewhere provided
    for.


CLS 26/106
TXT Structure under subclass 71 further provided with means to apply heat to
    the fabric web, or to subject the web to a gaseous (e.g., steam) treatment;
    e.g., to dry the fabric.

    (1)     Note.  By its position at the foot of this schedule (the last
    coordinate under subclass 71), this subclass can accept as an original the
    combination with a heater or dryer of cloth expanding structures which are
    not spreaders.  This subclass is available, however, for the
    cross-referencing of the combination of a heater or dryer with spreaders of
    general construction; i.e., other than those of subclasses 81 and 92.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclass 143 for the combination
    of a stretcher and structure peculiar to an ironer; e.g., means to
    manipulate the cloth through the entrance end of the ironer.


CLS 27/
TTL UNDERTAKING

CLS 27/
TXT This class includes coffins or caskets and portable coffin-cases for
    receiving and transporting dead bodies for burial; processes and apparatus
    for embalming and preserving the bodies of persons after death; and various
    attachments, accessories, and devices used in connection with the
    preparation of the bodies or employed at the time of interment   at  the
    grave,  such as    head-rests,    corpse-  carriers, lowering devices,
    life-signals, and the like.


CLS 27/1
TXT Implements and apparatus under the class definition used in burial
    functions not otherwise classified.


CLS 27/2
TXT Receptacles under the class definition for receiving dead bodies for burial.


CLS 27/3
TXT Coffins or burial-caskets under subclass 2 constructed of composite layers
    or sections of two or more different materials.


CLS 27/4
TXT Coffins or burial-caskets under subclass 2 constructed of a plurality of
    sections hinged or movably connected together.


CLS 27/5
TXT Coffins or burial-caskets under subclass 2 constructed of combined layers
    or sections of metal and wood.


CLS 27/6
TXT Coffins or burial-caskets under subclass 2 constructed of metal with or
    without moldings, lining-strips, or the like of other material.


CLS 27/7
TXT Coffins or burial-caskets under subclass 2 constructed of cement or
    moldable materials, other than glass with or without supporting-frames or
    reinforcements.


CLS 27/8
TXT Coffin or burial-caskets under subclass 2 constructed of glass with or
    without supporting-frames or reinforcements.


CLS 27/9
TXT Coffins or burial-caskets under subclass 2 having canopies or canopy-tops
    for receiving draperies or the like.


CLS 27/10
TXT Coffins or burial-caskets under subclass 2 having various forms of corner
    blocks or sections.


CLS 27/11
TXT Coffins or burial-caskets under subclass 2 having structures, chambers, or
    receptacles for disinfectants or preservatives.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, for a refrigerated chamber, per se, which may
    involve cooling a corpse, particularly subclasses 246+ for a refrigerated
    chamber with display features, and subclass 458 for an open access
    refrigerated chamber.


CLS 27/12
TXT Coffins and burial-caskets under subclass 2 having therein and attached
    thereto corpse raising and lowering devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for corpse-carrying devices separate from the coffin.


CLS 27/13
TXT Coffins or burial-caskets under subclass 2 having therein plates, frames,
    or supports for the head of the corpse, or head-rests combined with
    supports for the chin.


CLS 27/14
TXT Coffins or burial-caskets under subclass 2 having lids or covers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, and see the note to subclasses 200+ for closures in
    general.


CLS 27/15
TXT Devices under subclass 14 provided with sliding panels.


CLS 27/16
TXT Devices under subclass 14 in which the lids swing or have swinging or
    hinged sections.


CLS 27/17
TXT Devices under subclass 14 relating to various forms of joints between the
    lids or covers and the bodies of the caskets.


CLS 27/18
TXT Devices under subclass 14 relating to supports and braces for holding
    coffin-lids in various adjusted open positions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclass 60 for supports for ordinary hinged
    lids.


CLS 27/19
TXT Coffins or burial-caskets under subclass 2 having specific linings for the
    body and lid.  The linings or coverings may be of any suitable
    material--such as fabric, paper, or the like--and applied on one or both
    sides of the walls of the casket.  The material may be loosely or closely
    applied.


CLS 27/20
TXT Devices under subclass 2 relating to bars, plates, or frames for covering
    and protecting coffins and bodies in graves. The shields are intended to
    protect the coffin and body from unauthorized removal.


CLS 27/21.1
TXT BODY PREPARATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to the readying of the
    corpse for burial or arranging the corpse for burial or arranging of the
    corpse or parts thereof during the process of readying the same for burial
    or other final disposition, including those devices which function to hold
    the corpse, or parts thereof, such as the eyes or teeth, in the position
    desired.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 600+ for tables designed to serve as a support for
    an animal during surgical or undertaking operations, especially for devices
    attached to or combined with tables comprising mere body supports for
    surgical or undertaking operations.

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 1+ for a
    tiltable supporting surface of general utility.


CLS 27/22.1
TXT Embalming process or composition:

    Subject matter under subclass 21.1 relating to preserving methods,
    processes, or compositions.


CLS 27/22.2
TXT Using specific embalming composition:

    Subject matter under subclass 22.1 using a particular formula in a
    significant or manipulative embalming or preserving process.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclass 75 for
    a composition, per se, intended to be used to preserve or improve the
    appearance of a corpse, or a process which is no more than the nominal use
    of said composition.


CLS 27/23.1
TXT Embalming chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 21.1 relating to a sealed receptable,
    chamber, and the like wherein the corpse is treated in some manner such as
    by cooling, fumigating, evacuating, desiccating, etc., to preserve or
    embalm the corpse.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, for a refrigerated chamber, per se, which may
    involve cooling a corpse, particularly subclasses 246+ for a refrigerated
    chamber with display feature, and subclass 450 for an open access
    refrigerated chamber.


CLS 27/24.1
TXT Injector and ejector:

    Subject matter such as an Instrument or an apparatus under subclass 21.1
    for moving fluids into or from the corpse.

    SEARCH CLASS;

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 264+ for trocars, cannulas, needles, nozzles,
    and catheters insertable into the living body.


CLS 27/24.2
TXT Drainage tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 24.1 specialized to remove fluids from the
    corpse.


CLS 27/25.1
TXT Chin support:

    Subject matter such as an implement or device under subclass 21.1 for
    bearing the weight of the chin and lower jaw of the corpse.


CLS 27/26
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising frames or bars for
    supporting or sustaining coffins at the grave.


CLS 27/27
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising frames, biers, harnesses, or
    the like for lifting and handling coffins.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 640 for folding extensible, wheeled casket
    carriers and subclasses 47.17+ and 47.34 for hand propelled, wheeled casket
    carriers


CLS 27/28
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising frames, straps or the like
    for lifting and handling corpses.


CLS 27/29
TXT Linings made of various materials and supporting devices therefor under the
    class definition for covering or hiding the walls of the grave.


CLS 27/30
TXT Frames, screens and the like under the class definition for temporarily
    covering, hiding, or concealing graves at the time of interment.


CLS 27/31
TXT Alarms or signals under the class definition used in connection with
    coffins for indicating life in persons supposed to be dead.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 573 for electrical
    condition-responsive indicating systems automatically responsive to a
    condition of a human or animal.


CLS 27/32
TXT Supporting frames under the class definition having lowering apparatus for
    lowering coffins in graves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 264+ for hoisting apparatus including a driven device which
    contacts and pulls on a cable when an object is hoisted.


CLS 27/33
TXT Straps, rods, or the like under subclass 32 detachably connected with
    coffins.


CLS 27/34
TXT Devices under subclass 33 having latch- releasing devices.


CLS 27/35
TXT Portable boxes, cases or receptacles under subclass 2 for receiving burial
    caskets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 128+ for
    nonportable vaults receiving a coffin or casket for permanent interment on
    or in the earth.


CLS 28/
TTL TEXTILES:  MANUFACTURING

CLS 28/
TXT This class is a) generic as to processes of or apparatus for the production
    of fabric articles or structures by the mechanical interengagement of
    fibers, threads or the like and b) residual as to processes of or apparatus
    for the production and treatment of fabric articles or structures.  This
    class also provides for processes of or apparatus for a) treating fabric
    articles or structures in a manner not provided for elsewhere, b) preparing
    and handling of a sheet of warp threads or pile threads up to and inclusive
    of its insertion into a textile product fabricating apparatus, c) thread
    finishing or packaging not provided for elsewhere, and d) stripping bobbins
    of waste thread, and for subcombinations peculiar to the above which are
    not provided for elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, appropriate subclass for methods of treating textile
    fabrics, threads, fibers and the like with a fluid to bleach, dye or
    chemically alter the treated material either, per se, or combined with a
    broadly recited textile operation.

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, appropriate subclass methods of or
    apparatus for the preparation of fibers for use in the manufacture of
    fabrics or thread-like structures. The combination of texturing and
    staplizing a thread-like structure will be placed in Class 19 if the
    texturing precedes the staplizing and is performed to enhance a
    characteristic of the fiber produced as a result of the staplizing
    operation.

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, appropriate subclass for the mechanical
    treatment of a running length of textile fabric to put it into a better
    marketable condition.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclass
    for methods of and apparatus for drying textile structures.

    53,     Package Making, appropriate subclass especially subclasses 396 and
    582+ for methods of and apparatus for the packaging of thread units with
    material other than a strand-like wrap and where no additional thread
    finishing operation is recited.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, appropriate subclass
    for methods of or apparatus for treating and twisting a thread, yarn or the
    like, for texturing a thread, yarn or the like by a twisting technique,
    e.g., false twist, or for forming a composite yarn by means of an air jet
    where one strand is wrapped about another in either a continuous or
    discontinuous spiral wrap.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, appropriate subclass for the fabrication of a
    textile product by the interlacing of yarn or thread in a series of
    connected loops and for such fabrication combined with "on the machine"
    treatment of the yarn, thread or the formed textile product.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, appropriate subclass for
    apparatus for contacting a textile product with a gas or liquid in a manner
    not provided for elsewhere.

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, appropriate subclass
    for methods and apparatus a) for intertwining a plurality of strands to
    form a plait-like structure, b) for intertwining or knotting a plurality of
    strands into an open meshed fabric, or c) for forming a plurality of
    strands into an ornamental openwork fabric, and the products formed by such
    methods or apparatus.

    112,    Sewing, appropriate subclass for producing a thread interlaced
    textile structure by a thread stitching operation.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclass for apparatus for applying
    a coating material to textile products, including individual threads, other
    than a sheet of warp threads.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, appropriate subclass for the fabrication of a
    thread interlaced textile product which is formed by arranging one set of
    threads transversely to another set such that each thread of one set lays
    above some and below the remainder of the threads of the other set and is
    clamped in place by this arrangement and for such fabrication combined with
    "on the machine" treatment of thread or yarn used in product fabrication or
    of the formed textile product.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclass, especially subclasses 148+ for the formation of a
    textile fabric or structure by securing a preform, such as a bat, mat,
    thread or yarn, to another preform or to itself by an adhesive bonding
    technique.  Examples of the subject matter to be found in Class 156 are:
    forming a textile product by weaving or knitting and subsequently treating
    the component thread of the product to cause it to fuse or otherwise
    adhesively bind to itself or to another thread at the cross-over point,
    adhesively securing a backing member to a pile fabric formed by weaving,
    knitting or needling, etc.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, appropriate subclass for the
    fabrication or treatment of paper.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclass especially subclasses 89+ for
    yarn heaters of the heat exchange type.

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclass and especially subclasses
    770+ and 469+ for yarn heating apparatus having specific electrical heater
    structure.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 12+ for felting machines which have
    means for forming hat structure, e.g., a brim.  The mere felting of a
    parabolic, conical or cylindrical blank will not exclude a patent from this
    class (28).

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, appropriate subclass for the
    winding of strand-like material onto a carrier and especially subclass 42
    for a winding device combined with a guide means for combining a plurality
    of independent strands into a single untwisted entity which is subsequently
    wound upon a carrier.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 103 for a plastic molding or treating operation combined with a
    step of twining, braiding, plying or twisting multiple elements about each
    other; subclasses 109+ for the process of forming a bat, mat or the like of
    randomly associated fibers which fibers are fused or adhesively bound to
    one another at their cross-over points; subclasses 165+ and   especially
    subclass 168 for the extrusion or extrusion and subsequent treatment of a
    strand-like member; subclasses 280+ for the reshaping of previously formed
    elements of indeterminate length other than thread, yarn or the like,
    except that subclasses 288.4+ takes processes for stretching work of
    indeterminate length whether or not such work is thread, yarn or the like;
    and subclasses 342+ for the treatment of a unitary thread formed of
    distinct, diverse extruded polymeric components which are arranged to run
    the length of the thread in a side by side fashion and which each shrink at
    a different rate when treated, to effect distortion of the thread.

    289,    Knots and Knot Tying, appropriate subclass for methods or apparatus
    for securing the ends of flexible strand-like members by tying and for the
    product of such a tying operation.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, appropriate subclasses for processes
    of forming articles by uniting particulate material containing metal
    particles.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    appropriate subclass for the extrusion or extrusion and subsequent
    treatment of a strand-like member and especially subclasses 66 and 76 for
    the extrusion and subsequent elongation of a strand-like member and the
    imparting of an irregular denier to a strand-like member, respectively.

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclasses for coating or
    impregnating processes combined with a broadly recited textile operation.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclass for
    a stock material product which is made by a method or apparatus provided
    for in this class (28), where such a product is not elsewhere classified.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 8 and 59+ for methods and apparatus for heating
    running lengths of strandlike material, e.g., yarn, in a manner not
    provided for elsewhere.


CLS 28/100
TXT Method or apparatus under the class definition wherein (a) fibers,
    filaments, rovings, slivers, strands, threads, yarns or the like are
    brought together to form a discrete textile article or a textile structure
    of indeterminate length in a manner not elsewhere provided for, (b) a
    textile article or structure, which is made in a manner provided for
    elsewhere, is conditioned in a manner which is not provided for in the
    appropriate manufacture class, or (c) a textile article or structure is
    conditioned in a manner not elsewhere provided for.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is the combination of preconditioning a
    component of a textile article or structure and subsequent assembly of the
    article or structure.

    (2)     Note.  The formation of a nonwoven textile structure of reinforced
    or cross-laid threads is found herein.


CLS 28/101
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 100 wherein a nonwoven textile article
    or structure is formed by deposition of a thread component transversely of
    a longitudinally extended substrate, usually of thread components, by a
    member which pursues a circular or elliptical path of travel about the
    substrate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses 160 and 163 for deposition
    of sliver or web, respectively, in a zigzag fashion.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclasses 84+ for feeding a cross-layed weft
    to a warp knitting machine.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    177 for methods of adhesively bonding cross-layed webs, and subclasses 439+
    for apparatus for adhesively bonding cross-layed webs.


CLS 28/102
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 100 wherein a nonwoven textile article
    or structure is formed by deposition of a thread component transversely of
    a longitudinally extended substrate, usually of thread components, by
    endless movable means which deviate from a thread-  receiving zone of close
    adjacency to a thread deposition zone wherein the means are further apart
    to draw out and the extend the transverse thread component in transit
    therebetween.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses 160 and 163 for deposition
    of sliver or web, respectively, in a zigzag fashion.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclass 84 for feeding a cross-layed weft to
    a warp knitting machine.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    177 for methods of adhesively bonding cross-layed webs, and subclasses 439+
    for apparatus for adhesively bonding cross-layed webs.


CLS 28/103
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 100 wherein the component members of a
    nonwoven textile article or structure are rearranged to intermingle, one
    with the other, and are held in such intermingled condition by interfiber
    friction     existing therebetween.

    (1)     Note.  The term "nonwoven" as utilized herein includes a textile
    article or structure assembled by operations other than weaving, knitting,
    braiding, lacing, knotting or sewing, particularly including a textile
    article or structure assembled by needling, felting, cross-laying (not
    found in this subclass) and combinations thereof.

    (2)     Note.  The term "fiber" as utilized herein generally intends the
    fundamental unit of determinate, i.e., staple, length in the preparation of
    a textile article or structure but may also include a thread of substantial
    determinate or indeterminate length which is either used in the preparation
    of an individual needled or felted nonwoven article or structure or as a
    nonwoven entity of a composite needled or felted nonwoven article or
    structure.

    (3)     Note.  Fiber entangling and interlocking of a thread or a thread
    interlaced   article or fabric, per se, as by needling or felting for
    example, is excluded from this subclass since such treatment operations
    serve to enhance or embellish rather than to create or establish the
    textile article or structure.  However, the preparation of a base, layer or
    substrate by a thread interlacing operation such as by weaving, knitting or
    the like, which base, layer or substrate is subsequently utilized in the
    manufacture of a composite nonwoven article or structure is included herein.

    (4)     Note.  Fiber entangling and interlocking by subjecting a nonwoven
    textile structure under tensionless conditions to the influence of a fluid
    medium to  develop latent shrinkage tendencies of the component members
    thereof, i.e., relaxation after treatment is found herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    271+,   for entangling a running length of thread by fluid jet.

    281,    for entangling a running length of thread by latent bulk or crimp
    development.

    282+,   for blooming or dephasing a running length of bulked or crimped tow
    where the intent is not to create a coherent, entangled, unitary, nonwoven
    web.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses 296+ for assembling a
    web-like structure in a manner not found elsewhere.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 443+ and 531+ for processes and
    apparatus, respectively, for combined glass filament formation and nonwoven
    web formation with coating or treatment thereto.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 109+ for methods of forming articles by uniting randomly
    associated particles which are either fused at their cross-over points or
    adhesively bound to one another.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, appropriate subclasses for processes
    of forming articles by uniting particulate material containing metal
    particles.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    subclasses 80.1+ for air felting type shaping means.


CLS 28/104
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 103 wherein the rearrangement of the
    component members of nonwoven textile article or structure is accomplished
    by means of a gaseous or liquid stream which impinges against and
    penetrates the surface of the textile article or structure to either a)
    merely effect entangling and interlocking of the component members, or b)
    to spread or separate the component members to form a permanent aperture
    through the textile article or structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    for forming perforations in a nonwoven textile article or structure
    by other than fluid jet means.

    107+,   for needling a nonwoven textile article or structure by other than
    fluid jet means.

    271+,   for fluid jet texturing of a running length of thread.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclass 1 for methods of and apparatus
    for needling or perforating cloth.

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclass for methods and apparatus of
    penetrating or cutting work in a manner not provided for elsewhere by
    application of a fluid current thereto.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclass for
    specific nozzle structure.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 289+ for a coating step combined with
    cutting, holing, or severing of the base material to remove a portion
    thereof.


CLS 28/105
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 104 wherein impingement of the fluid
    stream is applied to the nonwoven textile article or structure while
    sandwiched between upper and lower permeable or porous sustaining elements
    which form a rearranging zone for the component members of the article or
    structure.

    (1)     Note.  The sustaining elements commonly comprise an apertured
    forming member through which the fluid stream is first directed and which
    determines the locations of the fluid stream in the rearranging zone and a
    permeable backing member through which the fluid leaves the rearranging
    zone.


CLS 28/106
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 103 wherein the rearrangement of the
    component members of the nonwoven textile article or structure is effected
    by surface penetration thereof to form a permanent aperture or opening
    therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104+,   for perforating a nonwoven textile article or structure utilizing a
    fluid jet.

    163+,   for producing an ornamental or surface textured perforated thread
    interlaced textile fabric.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclass 1 for methods of and apparatus
    for perforating cloth.

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclass for methods of or apparatus for
    penetrating or cutting work in a manner not provided for elsewhere.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 154+ for a method of shaping with an additional step of forming
    holes or apertures in the shaped article.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 290+ for shaping means combined with means to perforate the
    shaped article.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 289+ for a coating step combined with
    contacting the base with a solid member to remove a portion of the base
    material, inclusive of pricking of the base with small needle-like devices.


CLS 28/107
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 103 wherein the rearrangement of the
    component members of the nonwoven textile article or structure is effected
    by surface penetration thereof by thin, usually barbed, rods, bars or the
    like.

    (1)     Note.  The needling operation is usually performed by banks of
    reciprocating needles with the feed of the starting material being stepwise
    between successive needle penetrations to bind together adjacently disposed
    fibers with respect to themselves and/or to a substrate in the formation of
    a unitary, coherent article or structure.

    (2)     Note.  The effects of the needling operation may be varied,
    including the uniting of discrete articles or structures to each other, the
    creation of an upstanding pile on a substrate, drawing or stretching of the
    component members of the article or structure in addition to the
    reorientation or rearrangement thereof, innumerable aesthetic applications
    in addition to conventional usage.

    (3)     Note.  The needling of a thread interlaced article or fabric, per
    se, is not proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104+,   for fluid jet needling of a nonwoven textile article or structure.

    159+,   for producing a thread interlaced pile fabric by a needling
    operation.

    163+,   for producing an ornamental or surface textured fabric by a
    needling operation.

    165+,   for treating a thread interlaced fabric by a needling operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    148+ for a process of needling combined with adhesive bonding.


CLS 28/108
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 107 wherein the needling operation
    effects the formation of continuously extending links, loops or stitches of
    component members or the nonwoven textile article or structure along an
    axis thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Needling devices termed "interlacers" and provided with
    hooked, not barbed, needles which are capable of chain entanglement of the
    fibers of the article or structure will be placed in this subclass and
    appropriately cross-referenced herein below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, appropriate subclass especially subclasses
    85+, for the fabrication of an article or fabric by entangling or
    interlocked successive loops of thread or yarn.


CLS 28/109
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 107 wherein the needling operation
    produces an ornamental or motif nonwoven textile item, structure or effect.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163+,   for the production of a thread interlaced ornamental or surface
    textured, thread interlaced textile fabric.


CLS 28/110
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 107 wherein the needling operation a) is
    performed on, or b) effects a closed loop item or structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for forming an endless or tubular nonwoven textile article or
    fabric by uniting or splicing by a compressive manipulation operation.

    141,    for forming a thread interlaced endless or tubular textile article
    or fabric by a splicing operation.

    142,    for the production of an endless or tubular, thread interlaced,
    textile fabric.


CLS 28/111
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 107 wherein needling is effected at a
    plurality of separate, discrete locations.

    (1)     Note.  Plural needling locations within a single treating device
    will not be formed herein.


CLS 28/112
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 107 wherein an additional operation is
    performed upon the needled nonwoven textile article or structure or a
    component member thereof to enhance a property or characteristic thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    for the additional treatment of a nonwoven textile article or
    structure produced by compressive manipulation or of a component member
    thereof.

    156,    for subsequent treatment of a thread interlaced textile fabric to
    effect differential shrinkage.

    162,    for subsequent treatment of a thread interlaced textile fabric by a
    napping or teasing operation to effect or enhance a pile surface thereof.

    165+,   for subsequent treatment of a thread interlaced textile fabric in
    general.

    281,    for subsequent treatment of a running length of thread, e.g., tow,
    to effect latent bulk or crimp development.


CLS 28/113
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 107 wherein one of a plurality of
    needles or banks of needles a) moves through a cycle different from that of
    another needle or bank, b) moves at a different interval of time than
    another needle or bank, or c) moves simultaneously with but in a different
    direction than another needle or bank.


CLS 28/114
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 107 wherein a) an additional component
    of movement is applied to the surface penetrating rods, bars or the like,
    or b) wherein a lateral or transverse component of movement is applied to
    the component members of or substrate for the textile article or structure
    during the feeding thereof in an axial direction.


CLS 28/115
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 107 involving a) the particular
    structure of a rod, bar or the like, of b) the particular arrangement of
    such elements within the member containing the same.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    163,    Needle and Pin Making, appropriate subclass for methods of and
    apparatus for the manufacture of needles.


CLS 28/116
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 103 wherein fiber entangling and
    interlocking is accomplished by a frictional working or kneading operation
    to effect shrinkage, compaction orcontraction of a nonwoven textile article
    or structure or the attachment thereof to another structure.

    (1)     Note.  The compressive manipulation may be effected by hand or
    mechanically, with or without an assisting fluid medium, and commonly
    referred to in the art as "felting", "fulling" or "milling".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    for compressive manipulation of a nonwoven textile article or
    structure prior to a needling operation.

    165+,   for compressive manipulation of a thread interlaced textile fabric.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclasses 19+ for methods of or an
    apparatus for fulling an already formed fabric.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, appropriate subclass for
    apparatus of general utility for treating a cloth or fabric with a fluid.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 7+ for apparatus for and methods of
    operating the same for making or renovating hats.  The hat body felting
    apparatus found herein are combined with means for forming specific hat
    structures, such as brims.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 8.61 for fulling compositions.


CLS 28/117
TXT Method of apparatus under subclass 116 wherein the compressive manipulation
    operation attaches or secures separate and distinct items or structures or
    portions thereof to each other in the formation of apparel or composite
    structures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for forming an endless or tubular nonwoven textile article or
    fabric by uniting or splicing by a needling operation.

    141,    for splicing or repair of a thread interlaced textile article or
    fabric.

    142,    for the production of an endless or tubular, thread interlaced,
    textile fabric.


CLS 28/118
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 116 wherein fibers are compacted by
    shaping apparatus into a relatively soft absorbed cylindrical article,
    which is adapted to be inserted into a body opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123+,   for compressive manipulation of a nonplanar, nonwoven article or
    fabric.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 435 and 523+ for packaging methods and
    apparatus, respectively, including means to compact or stretch the content
    material.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 242 for apparatus for
    squeezing a mass of textiles to promote drainage of liquid therefrom.

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclass for processes and apparatus not
    provided for elsewhere for producing compressed bales of material.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    62.2+ for processes of forming a preform by bulk deposition of particles
    combined with a step of laminating the formed preform to another preform.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 218+ and 382+ for
    forming discrete articles from a liquid suspension of fibers.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 5+ for formation of particles by liquid comminuting, subclasses
    115+ for liberating and forming of fibers by other than liquid comminuting
    combined with uniting thereof, and subclasses 138+ for molding combined
    with a cutting operation, particularly subclasses 140+ and 145+.

    300,    Brush, Broom, and Mop Making, appropriate subclasses for machines
    and processes for compacting fibers into tufts in the manufacture of
    brushes, brooms or mops.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 80.1+ for shaping articles, utilizing an air felting means to
    distribute particulate stock unto a shaping surface.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 243+ for processes of coating porous
    products.

    508,    Solid Anti-Friction Devices, Materials Therefor, Lubricant or
    Separant Compositions for Moving Solid Surfaces, and Miscellaneous Mineral
    Oil Compositions, particularly subclasses 100+ for lubricants incorporated
    with a fibrous carrier.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 11+ for tampon applicators; subclasses 286+ for
    medicated tampons; subclasses 367+ for materials, fibers, and particles
    from which tampons are made; subclasses 358+ for absorbent pads, diapers,
    and tampons; and subclass 904 for tampon cross-reference collection.


CLS 28/119
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 118 including means for forcing the
    compacted cylindrical article out of the compacting area of the shaping
    apparatus.


CLS 28/120
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 118 wherein a flexible withdrawing cord
    or ribbon is secured to the cylindrical article or tampon.


CLS 28/121
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 116 wherein a textile item is formed by
    wrapping a mass of fibers within a covering and wherein the mass of fibers
    is compressed into a desired shape prior to, during or after the wrapping
    occurs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, appropriate subclass, for methods and apparatus
    making composite articles.

    53,     Package Making, appropriate subclass, for the wrapping of articles
    in packaging material.


CLS 28/122
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 116 including performing an additional
    operation upon the compressively manipulated article or structure or a
    component member thereof to enhance a property or characteristic thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    for the additional treatment of a nonwoven textile article or
    structure produced by needling or of a component member thereof.

    156,    for subsequent treatment of a thread interlaced textile fabric to
    effect differential shrinkage.

    162,    for subsequent treatment of a thread interlaced textile fabric by a
    napping or treating operation to effect or enhance a pile surface thereon.

    165+,   for subsequent treatment of a thread interlaced textile fabric in
    general.

    281,    for subsequent treatment of a running length of thread to effect
    latent bulk or crimp development.


CLS 28/123
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 116 for the compressive manipulation of
    an item or structure having a three-dimensional configuration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118+,   for compressive manipulation of fibers to form a tampon.


CLS 28/124
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 123 wherein the compressive manipulation
    occurs while the nonplanar item or structure is mounted on a shaping or
    forming member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclass 148 for depositing fibers by
    means of an air current on a screen of the shape of the object desired.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 7+ for apparatus for forming hats,
    including felting apparatus, wherein structure is provided for making a
    specific hat feature, such as a brim.


CLS 28/125
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 123 wherein the item is wound on itself
    in roll or cylinder form and worked in such configuration or the working of
    a round, oval or cylindrical item.


CLS 28/126
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 125 including a plurality of cylindrical
    or round members arranged so as to provide a cavity therebetween for
    reception and manipulation of a coil or circular item therewithin.


CLS 28/127
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 126 wherein a coil or circular item is
    caused to pursue a path of travel during the manipulating operation through
    the treating device.


CLS 28/128
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 126 wherein the exterior item contacting
    surface of a cylindrical or round cavity or pocket forming member has
    grooves, projections or like interruptions about the circumference thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the notes thereunder.


CLS 28/129
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 128 wherein the discontinuous exterior
    article or item contacting surface of a cylindrical or round cavity or
    pocket forming member gradually varies in profile along its longitudinal
    axial extent or a portion thereof.


CLS 28/130
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 125 wherein a coil or circular article
    or item is manipulated between spaced, oppositely adjacent, confronting
    members, at least one of which is provided with orbital, reciprocatory or
    oscillatory movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclass for mechanical
    movements and power-transmission structure.


CLS 28/131
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 130 wherein the driven member is
    provided with orbital and reciprocatory movement or orbital and oscillatory
    movement.


CLS 28/132
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 130 wherein both confronting members are
    provided with reciprocating or oscillating movement.


CLS 28/133
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 125 including the placement of an item
    within a receptacle or vessel wherein the treatment is accomplished.


CLS 28/134
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 116 involving the working or kneading of
    an article or structure between opposed beds of round or cylindrical
    members such that the article or structure pursues a sinuous path in
    transit therebetween.


CLS 28/135
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 134 including two or more separate,
    discrete multiroller manipulating operations.


CLS 28/136
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 134 having at least two vertically
    aligned treating paths defined by the roller assemblies with provision for
    directing the article or structure from one to the other.


CLS 28/137
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 134 wherein the rollers are provided
    with either rotary and oscillatory or rotary and reciprocatory movement.


CLS 28/138
TXT Method apparatus under subclass 116 wherein the working or kneading of an
    article or structure occurs between a rotary drum or roller and an
    opposing, confronting member, or members arcuately shaped or contoured to
    conform to a portion of the periphery of the rotary drum or cylinder.


CLS 28/139
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 116 wherein the working or kneading of
    an article or structure occurs between opposed, confronting elongate
    noncircular elements, at least one of which is provided with a to-and-fro
    movement.


CLS 28/140
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 100 for the fabrication or treatment of
    a textile item or structure formed from thread by a braiding, knitting,
    knotting, lacing, sewing or weaving operation or combinations thereof not
    otherwise provided for.

    (1)     Note.  The term "thread" as utilized herein generally intends the
    fundamental unit of substantial determinate or indeterminate length in the
    preparation of a textile structure rendered coherent by an orderly,
    predetermined interlinking or intertwining of the unit with respect to
    itself or another such unit.

    (2)     Note.  "Thread", as utilized herein, generally represents a slender
    elongate element composed of a fiber, filament, roving, sliver, strand,
    yarn or the like, of individual or multiple such elements, having twist
    therein or twistless, of a single or multi-ply and combinations thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    for the manufacture of a thread interlaced article or structure
    utilized as a substrate in the production of a composite, needled,
    nonwoven, textile structure.

    122,    for the manufacture of a thread interlaced article or structure
    utilized as a substrate in the production of a composite, compressively
    manipulated, nonwoven, textile structure.

    218,    for thread texturing by textile product fabrication-defabrication,
    e.g., knit- deknit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, appropriate subclass for methods and apparatus
    for forming a textile product by the interlacing of yarn or thread in
    series of connected loops and for such fabrication combined with "on the
    machine" treatment of the yarn, thread or formed textile product.

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, appropriate subclass
    for methods of and apparatus for a) intertwining a plurality of strands to
    form a plait-like structure, b) for intertwining or knotting a plurality of
    strands into an open mesh fabric, or c) forming a plurality of strands into
    an ornamental openwork fabric.

    112,    Sewing, appropriate subclass for the production of a thread
    interlaced textile structure by a thread stitching operation.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, appropriate subclass for the fabrication of a
    thread interlaced textile product which is formed by arranging one set of
    threads generally transversely to another set such that each thread of one
    set lays above some and below other threads of the other set and is thus
    clamped in position by this arrangement and for such fabrication combined
    with "on the machine" treatment of the thread or yarn used in product
    fabrication or of the formed textile product.


CLS 28/141
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 140 for (a) the renewal or restoration
    of a thread interlaced textile article or structure to its original or
    finished condition, or (b) the uniting of the ends of a thread interlaced
    textile article or structure to each other or an end thereof of another
    textile article or structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for forming an endless or tubular nonwoven textile article or
    fabric by uniting or splicing by a needling operation.

    117,    for uniting discrete nonwoven textile articles or fabrics by
    compressive manipulation.

    142,    for the production of an endless or tubular, thread interlaced,
    textile fabric.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 22+ and 362
    for apparatus for and methods of  joining or uniting threads, cores, rope
    or the like by a twisting or twining operation.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclass 1.5 for methods of and apparatus for
    repairing holes or runs in knitted fabrics.

    140,    Wireworking, subclasses 111+ for joining wire in an end-to-end
    relationship.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    49 for splicing of indefinite length conductors, and subclasses 157+ for
    processes of adhesively joining elements in an end-to-end relationship to
    form a lamina of indefinite length.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 35.6+ for winding
    apparatus having means to unite a reserve thread to the end of an exhausted
    supply and subclasses 58.1+ for winding apparatus having means to unite the
    outer end of a succeeding supply roll to the inner end of a preceding
    supply roll.


CLS 28/142
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 140 for the fabrication or treatment of
    a continuous, interminable thread interlaced textile structure defining a
    closed loop.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for the production of an endless or tubular needled, nonwoven
    textile article or fabric.

    117,    for the production of an endless or tubular nonwoven textile
    article or fabric including a splicing operation by compressive
    manipulation.

    141,    for the production of a thread-interlaced endless or tubular
    article or fabric by a splicing operation.


CLS 28/143
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 140 for the fabrication or treatment of
    a thread interlaced textile item of finite dimensions, specific
    configuration and use.

    (1)     Note.  The mere act of cutting a thread interlaced structure which
    is formed as a continuum into a plurality of discrete items, e.g., sweater
    bodies, or the mere removal of a transitory or temporary thread used to
    hold such articles together will not be found in this or the indented
    subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  Complete disassembly of an article by removal of the
    component members thereof will not be found in this or the indented
    subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168,    for the separation of an article from a thread interlaced structure
    formed as a continuum by fluid contact.

    170,    for the separation of an article from a thread interlaced structure
    formed as a continuum by cutting or transitory thread removal other than by
    fluid contact.

    171,    for the complete disassembly of an      article by removal of the
    component members thereof.


CLS 28/144
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 143 for the fabrication or treatment of
    a thread interlaced elongate thread-like member having a protruding pile
    surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 24 and 203
    for the formation of chenille by twisting a plurality of strand-like
    elements together to bind short transverse threads or filaments.


CLS 28/145
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 143 for the fabrication or treatment of
    an ornamental border comprising short straight or twisted thread portions,
    strips, tassels, tufts and the like projecting from a cut or raveled edge
    of a thread    interlaced item or from a separate fabric band to which such
    projections have been applied.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144,    for the production of chenille, a thread-like member having
    protruding thread portions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, subclass 64 for apparatus for attaching fringes or loops to
    the edge of a fabric.


CLS 28/146
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 145 wherein the ornamental border or
    fringe is produced by disintegration or removal of threads or thread
    portions from an edge of a thread interlaced item or fabric band.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171,    for the complete destruction or disintegration of a thread
    interlaced textile article or fabric by fraying or raveling.


CLS 28/147
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 143 for the fabrication or treatment of
    an ornamental thread interlaced cluster of three-dimensional configuration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 470.23+ for apparatus for sewing one or more
    pieces of cut yarn together in a bunch or to sew them individually or
    collectively to a fabric backing without inserting them through the backing.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 46 for methods and apparatus for making
    bows, tassels, and the like other than binding or thread or yarn in bundles.


CLS 28/148
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 143 for the fabrication or treatment of
    a continuum composed of a plurality of bands, ribbons, strips, webbings and
    the like which are joined to each other by the insertion of a portion of
    one of the bands, ribbons, or the like through a slit formed in the next
    adjacent band, ribbon or the like.


CLS 28/149
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 143 wherein a static structure is
    utilized to retain or tension thread while the interlacing operation is
    performed thereon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclass 4 for thread frames with pins or
    studs around which the loops of a knitted article are formed during a
    knitting operation.

    289,    Knots and Knot Tying, subclass 16.5 for macrame frames.


CLS 28/150
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 149 wherein thread is interlaced into an
    ornamental disc-like item of floral design or fine-figured openwork.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclass 4 for circular thread frames used in
    knitting a tubular fabric as opposed to single rosette, bow, etc.


CLS 28/151
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 149 wherein thread is interlaced into a
    textile item by directing one set of thread components sinuously over and
    under a second set of such components in a particular pattern to unite same
    in a coherent manner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 29+ and especially subclass 34 for
    methods of weaving and for thread frames having means specializing them for
    weaving, e.g., shedding mechanisms, beat up motions, warp feed or take up,
    etc.


CLS 28/152
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 151 wherein the thread frame has
    provision for retaining or securing both sets of thread components of the
    textile item.


CLS 28/153
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 143 for the fabrication or treatment of
    thread interlaced apparel or clothing for the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123     and 124, for the production of a compressively, manipulated,
    nonwoven garment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, appropriate subclass for apparel and methods for the
    production thereof and subclasses 243.1+ for devices and processes
    applicable to garments in general.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, appropriate subclass for methods and apparatus
    for the production of a garment upon a knitting machine.

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, appropriate subclass
    for methods and apparatus for the production of a garment by braiding,
    netting or lace making.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, appropriate subclass for methods of and
    apparatus for the production of garments not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 28/154
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 153 for the fabrication or treatment of
    a thread-interlaced sock, stocking or panty-hose.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 239+ for nether garments of the stocking type
    and methods of making same involving more than the fabricating, e.g.,
    knitting operation.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclasses 178+ for nether garments of the
    stocking type and methods of making same by hand knitting operations.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 60 for methods and apparatus for
    pressing a stocking; subclasses 75+ for a stocking form; and subclass 112
    for a device to remove a stocking from a form.


CLS 28/155
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 140 for the fabrication or treatment of
    a thread interlaced textile structure (a) capable of shape recovery after
    deformation, or (b) having a crinkled surface texture.

    (1)     Note.  The production of elasticity or crepe in localized areas of
    a thread interlaced fabric is included herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclass 114.5 for methods of chemically producing
    ornamental effects in fabric by differential creping and subclass 117 for
    chemically producing wool-like or crinkle effects in fabric.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, appropriate subclass for methods or apparatus
    for the production of an elastic or crepe fabric on a knitting machine.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, appropriate subclass for methods of or
    apparatus for the production of an elastic or crepe fabric on a loom.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 111+ for processes of
    creping paper and subclasses 280+ for apparatus for creping paper.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    subclasses 282+ for processes of creping or crinkling plastic or
    nonmetallic material in a manner not provided for elsewhere.


CLS 28/156
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 155 wherein the component members of a
    thread interlaced textile structure possess dissimilar contractile
    properties which upon contraction impart the elasticity or crepe surface to
    the structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    for particulars of a liquid bath to effect shrinkage during
    compressive manipulation of a nonwoven textile article or structure.


CLS 28/157
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 155 wherein sets of component members of
    the thread interlaced textile structure are inclined or oriented
    nonorthogonally to each other to impart elasticity to the structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclasses 51.3+ for methods and
    apparatus for adjusting the weft angle of a fabric to produce a bias fabric
    or to return the weft angle to perpendicular relationship with the warp.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 2.1+ for the bias cutting of tubular
    stock.


CLS 28/158
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 140 for the fabrication or treatment of
    a textile structure having plural thread interlaced layers interconnected
    via component members interlaced within the layers and extending
    therebetween at intervals along an axis of the structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclasses 13+ for cutting the
    connecting threads of two-ply fabric to produce two-pile fabrics.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclasses 196+ for multi-ply products of a
    knitting apparatus.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 408+ for multi-ply fabrics produced
    by a loom.


CLS 28/159
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 140 for the fabrication or treatment of
    a thread interlaced textile structure having an upright or upstanding
    surface of fibers, filaments, strands, threads, yarns or the like.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclass 2 for the mechanical treatment
    of a pile fabric and subclasses 7+ for cutting the loops of a pile fabric.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclasses 91+ for knitting machines having
    pile loop formers.

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 80.01+ for tufting apparatus and subclass 475.23
    for tufting methods.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 308+ for means for projecting or
    spraying solid particulate matter onto a base, e.g., flocking.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 2+ for looms having pile tufting
    means.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    72 for methods of setting or embedding tufts or discrete pile elements onto
    a backing and subclasses 148+ for the production of a pile fabric by
    weaving, knitting or needling.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 180+ for deposition of solid
    particles or fibers upon a base the same, e.g., flocking.


CLS 28/160
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 159 wherein the upright or upstanding
    pile surface is nonuniform or irregular along an axis of the thread
    interlaced textile structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109,    for the production of a decorative, needled, nonwoven textile
    article or fabric.

    155+,   for the production of a decorative, elastic or crepe,
    thread-interlaced textile fabric.

    163+,   for the production of an ornamental or surface textured,
    thread-interlaced textile fabric.

    184,    for pattern setting of thread in the form of a warp sheet in the
    production of a decorative or ornamental fabric.

    214+,   for pattern setting or thread utilized as the pile in the
    production of a patterned axminster carpet or the like.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclass 16 for methods and apparatus
    for producing a discontinuous or patterned pile surface by a shearing
    operation and subclass 30 for producing such a surface by a napping
    operation.


CLS 28/161
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 159 wherein terminal portions of the
    upstanding pile surface of the thread interlaced textile structure are
    modified to enable the pile surface to effectively engage and retain an
    associated pile surface of similar or looped character.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clamps, etc., subclasses 442+ for separable
    fasteners formed from pile fabric (e.g., VELCROR).


CLS 28/162
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 159 wherein the upright or upstanding
    pile surface of the thread interlaced textile structure is either created
    or further enhanced by an abrading, brushing or combing operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112+,   for subsequent treatment of a needled, nonwoven textile article or
    structure, inclusive of napping or teasing.

    122+,   for subsequent treatment of a compressively manipulated nonwoven
    textile article or structure, inclusive of napping or teasing.

    219,    for napping or teasing a running length of thread.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclasses 29+ for the production of a
    pile in an already fabricated textile product by napping.


CLS 28/163
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 140 for the fabrication or treatment of
    a thread interlaced textile structure having a decorative or motif
    appearance.

    (1)     Note.  The combination of a significantly claimed textile operation
    and effect coloring, inclusive of printing in localized areas, to produce
    pattern effects on a thread interlaced textile structure will be found
    herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109,    for the production of a decorative, needled, nonwoven article or
    fabric.

    155+,   for the production of a decorative, elastic or crepe,
    thread-interlaced textile fabric.

    160,    for the production of a thread-interlaced pile fabric having a
    discontinuous or patterned surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 114+ for methods of producing an ornamental
    effect in a textile product by fluid treatment or chemical modification and
    subclass 117 for the production of wool-like or crinkled effect upon a
    textile fabric by chemical modification.

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclass 69 for methods of or an
    apparatus for producing an ornamental effect by mechanically finishing
    cloth.

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, appropriate subclass
    for methods of and apparatus for the production of net or lace fine work.

    101,    Printing, appropriate subclass for embossing or printing ornamental
    designs on textile products.


CLS 28/164
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 163 wherein the decorative of motif
    appearance is imparted by stitching designs with thread and the like onto a
    substrate.

    (1)     Note.  The fabrication of embroidery by a stitching operation in
    combination with another textile or nontextile operation, not specifically
    provided for elsewhere, will be found herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 78+ for apparatus for embroidering textile
    products and subclass 475.18+ for methods of embroidery.


CLS 28/165
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 140 wherein (a) a thread interlaced
    textile structure of indeterminate length, made in a manner provided for in
    some other textile manufacturing class, is conditioned in a manner not
    specifically provided for in said class, or (b) a thread interlaced textile
    structure of indeterminate length or some component member thereof is
    conditioned in a manner not elsewhere provided for.

    (1)     Note.  The conditioning can occur prior to or subsequent to the
    interlacing step.  Thus, for example, a patent claiming treating a thread
    of a woven product prior to the weaving operation in a manner not provided
    for in Class 139 would be placed in this class (28).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    for subsequent treatment of a needled, nonwoven textile article or
    structure.

    122,    for subsequent treatment of a compressively manipulated, nonwoven
    textile article or structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textile and Fibers, appropriate subclass for the treatments of that class,
    per se, or combined with a broadly recited textile operation.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclasses 147+ for treatment of a textile
    product while on a knitting machine.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 291+ for treatment of a textile
    product while on a loom.

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclass for the treatments of that
    class, per se, or combined with a broadly recited textile operation.

    432,    Heating, subclass 8 for methods of heating a continuum of web-like
    material and subclasses 59+ for heating means including means to advance a
    web-like structure through the heating means.


CLS 28/166
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 165 wherein the treatment involves a
    preparatory conditioning of a component member of the textile structure
    prior to the interlacing operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    for pretreatment of a component member of a nonwoven textile
    article or structure prior to a needling operation.

    122,    for pretreatment of a component member of a nonwoven textile
    article or structure prior to a compressive manipulation operation.

    217+,   for the conditioning of thread, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclasses 125+ for knitting machines having
    additional means to pretreat the threads or yarn used in said machine.


CLS 28/167
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 165 wherein the treatment involves the
    application of a gaseous or liquid medium to the thread interlaced textile
    structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    for particulars of a liquid bath to effect shrinkage during
    compressive manipulation of a nonwoven textile article or structure.

    178,    for the fluid treatment of a sheet of warp threads.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, appropriate subclass for methods of contacting a
    textile product with a fluid to treat or chemically modify the textile
    structure.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, appropriate subclass for
    apparatus for contacting a textile product with a fluid not provided for
    elsewhere.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclass 447.1 for methods for
    carbonizing fibers, fabrics, or textiles.


CLS 28/168
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 167 wherein application of the gaseous
    or liquid medium effects elimination or disintegration of a portion of a
    component member of the thread interlaced textile structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164,    for removal of a transitory thread component to produce an
    ornamental or surface textured effect in a sewn textile fabric.

    170,    for removal of a transitory thread component to divide or open a
    thread-interlaced textile fabric other than by fluid contact.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing;  Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclass 114.6 for processes of treating a textile
    product with a liquid to destroy or to remove some of the fibers to produce
    an ornamental effect and subclass 140, for processes of removing impurities
    from textiles by destruction thereof.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    625 for processes of etching or dissolving in general.


CLS 28/169
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 167 wherein the fluid contact involves
    (a) the application of a finishing, protecting or enclosing layer to the
    thread interlaced textile structure, or (b) the application of a coloring
    thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163+,   for coating or dyeing to produce an ornamental or surface textured
    effect in a thread-interlaced textile fabric.

    178+,   for coating or dyeing of thread in the form of a warp sheet.

    218,    for coating or dyeing a thread-interlaced textile article or fabric
    and subsequent disassembly thereof to produce a coated or dyed textured
    thread.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 400- 696 for processes of dyeing textile
    products.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, appropriate subclass for
    apparatus for contacting a textile product with a fluid not provided for
    elsewhere.

    101,    Printing, appropriate subclass for the application of a decorative
    design to a textile product by an embossing or printing technique.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclass for apparatus for applying
    a coating material to a base.

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclass for processes of applying a
    coating material to a base.


CLS 28/170
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 165 wherein the treatment involves (a)
    dividing a textile structure, or (b) opening such a structure when in
    tubular form either by penetrating the structure with a severing device or
    severing force or by withdrawing a strand which is used to temporarily
    secure one segment or portion of a textile structure to another.

    (1)     Note.  "Detacking"  i.e., the opening of a thread interlaced
    textile structure from tubular to planar form by removal of a draw or
    temporary retaining thread is included herein as is the removal of a draw
    or temporary retaining thread to separate a thread interlaced textile
    structure into discrete articles or items.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164,    for removal of a transitory thread component to produce an
    ornamental or surface textured effect in a sewn textile fabric.

    168,    for removal of a transitory thread component in a thread-interlaced
    textile fabric by fluid contact.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 412+ for methods of obtaining plural
    pieces from a unitary piece.

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclass for cutting implements, per se.
    Those cutting implements which either include means to treat the raw cut
    edge of an interlaced textile structure in a manner not elsewhere provided
    for to prevent raveling or effect such a treatment by the very nature of
    the cutting operation will be found in this class (28).

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, appropriate subclass for device
    for and methods of severing by manually forcing work against a fixed edge
    or by breaking or tearing.


CLS 28/171
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 165 wherein the treatment effects
    destruction or disintegration of the thread interlaced textile structure by
    removal of the component members thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218,    for the disassembly of an article or fabric in the production of a
    textured thread.


CLS 28/172.1
TXT Warp preparing or handling:
    Method or apparatus under the class definition including either assembling
    threads into a sheet of warp threads (a warp sheet) or manipulating the
    assembled sheet prior to or during its insertion into a textile fabricating
    apparatus.


CLS 28/172.2
TXT With drawing or stretching:
    Method or apparatus under subclass 172.1 for attenuating or elongating a
    warp sheet beyond its elastic limit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240+,   for apparatus for stretching a thread beyond its elastic limit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 288.4+ for a process of stretching running work or
    indefinite-length work by applying tension thereto.


CLS 28/173
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 172 including removing lint or other
    foreign matter from the threads of the warp sheet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222+,   for clearing a running length of thread, yarn or the like of
    undesired material.


CLS 28/174
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 173 wherein the lint or other foreign
    matter is removed from the threads of the warp sheet by burning.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239,    for singing a running length of thread, yarn or the like.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclasses 3+ for methods of or
    apparatus for burning or scorching the projecting fibers or threads of
    cloth.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 2 for carbonizing
    apparatus.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 47 for coating means combined with
    means for subjecting either a coated surface or a surface to be coated to a
    flame or fire.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 223+ for processes of coating wherein
    a coating or surface to be coated is subjected to contact with a flame.


CLS 28/175
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 172 wherein either the warp sheet is
    compressed into a rope-like continuum or the formed continuum is handled in
    a manner not elsewhere provided for.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 18+ for the winding of
    a rope-like continuum into masses, balls, or cylindrical packages and
    subclass 42 for winding devices combined with guide means for combining a
    plurality of independent strands into a single untwisted entity which is
    subsequently wound upon a carrier.


CLS 28/176
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 175 including either winding a thread
    spirally around a warp chain or removing such a spirally wound thread.


CLS 28/177
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 175 including the formation of the
    rope-like continuum into a series of interconnected loops or stitches.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, appropriate subclass and especially subclasses
    85+ and 118 for methods and apparatus for forming crochet stitches.


CLS 28/178
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 172 for applying a gas or liquid to a
    sheet of warp threads to condition the same.

    (1)     Note.  Devices or processes for applying a sizing or dyeing
    compound to a warp sheet will be found herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    for needling combined with conditioning of a nonwoven fabric or a
    component thereof.

    122,    for compressive manipulation combined with conditioning of a
    nonwoven fabric or a component thereof.

    167,    for fluid treatment of a thread interlaced article or fabric in a
    manner not provided for elsewhere.

    246,    for spaced, differentially driven thread stretching apparatus
    having intermediate conditioning means.

    261,    for knife edge texturing of a running length of thread combined
    with additional conditioning.

    265,    for stuffier box type texturing of a running length of thread
    combined with additional conditioning.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, appropriate subclass for processes of contacting
    thread with a fluid to treat or chemically modify the same.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, appropriate subclass for
    apparatus for contacting a textile product with a gas or liquid in a manner
    not provided for elsewhere.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclass for means for applying a
    coating material to a base.

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclass for methods of applying a
    coating material to a base.


CLS 28/179
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 178 wherein the fluid treated sheet of
    warp threads is further treated to remove excess moisture therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclass
    for methods of and apparatus for the evaporation of unwanted moisture from
    a solid.


CLS 28/180
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 179 wherein the fluid treated sheet of
    warp threads is dried by a heating device which is physically spaced from
    the warp sheet.

    (1)     Note.  A carrier fluid, such as air, may be used to transmit the
    heat between the heating device and the warp sheet.


CLS 28/181
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 179 wherein the fluid treated sheet of
    warp threads is divided or leased prior to drying.


CLS 28/182
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 178 wherein the warp sheet is introduced
    into a bath of liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 400+ for immersion or work confining
    pool type coating means.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 430.1+ for processes of coating a
    base by immersing or partial immersing the base in a coating material.


CLS 28/183
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 182 wherein the warp sheet passes
    between squeeze or quetch rolls while or after it is immersed in the liquid
    bath.


CLS 28/184
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 172 wherein the warp sheet is composed
    of threads of differing color, texture or the like which are arranged in a
    predetermined manner across the width of the sheet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    214+,   for similar methods and apparatus used with Axminster tuft material.


CLS 28/185
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 172 wherein means are provided to
    perceive variations in a characteristic which deviate from a set norm,
    which means activates or regulates additional means to alter the operation
    of warp preparing or handling device.

    (1)     Note.  Those devices employing means to regulate the speed at which
    a warp sheet is taken up by a beam in response to sensed sheet tension will
    be found herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 10+ for
    means for advancing a running length of work which means is provided with
    means responsive to the condition of the running length.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 36+ for a bobbin or cop
    winder having a detector or stop and subclasses 333+ for an automated stop
    in a magnetic tape or image film winding device.


CLS 28/186
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 185 wherein the additional means brings
    the operation of the warp preparing or handling device to a halt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225,    for stopping structure associated with clearing means for a single
    strand, and see the search notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 349+ for looms having stopping means
    which are responsive to the condition of the warp.


CLS 28/187
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 186 including electrical actuation of
    the stop mechanism.


CLS 28/188
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 186 wherein the stopping is effected by
    an element which is driven to-and-fro through a breakage connection and
    wherein a thread sensing means is allowed to drop into the path of the
    element to thus stop its movement when the sensed thread is either broken
    or exhausted.


CLS 28/189
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 188 wherein the thread sensing means is
    mounted to swing about an axis.


CLS 28/190
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 172 including (a) building up or winding
    an already assembled sheet of warp threads upon a temporary storage drum
    prior to winding on a warp supply package, or (b) winding a sheet of warp
    threads onto a warp supply package which is to be used on a loom or other
    textile machine.


CLS 28/191
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 190 wherein the sheet of warp threads is
    assembled on the reeling or beaming means by winding successive narrow
    segments of warp threads in a side by side fashion until a warp sheet of
    desired width is formed.


CLS 28/192
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 190 including winding a sheet of warp
    threads for fabrication of selvages, ribbons or similar slender wares.


CLS 28/193
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 190 including winding a sheet of warp
    threads direct from cops with automatic means to supply new cops for those
    exhausted and to tie the ends of the exhausted and newly supplied threads.


CLS 28/194
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 190 involving the particulars of the
    device for imposing a predetermined strain upon the warp sheet as it is
    wound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 410+ and 147+ for a
    tension control or brake in a winding device or device of general use for
    running material.


CLS 28/195
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 190 wherein the beam or a warp sheet
    guiding means adjacent the beam is reciprocated during winding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclass 241, 242 and 273 for
    fishing rod type reeling devices with line traversing means and subclasses
    158+ for line traversing devices for use with the winding and reeling
    structure of this class (242) which are not provided for elsewhere.


CLS 28/196
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 190 wherein the threads of the warp
    sheet are engaged by a member once they have been wound on the beam.

    (1)     Note.  Devices to compress a warp sheet as it is being wrapped on a
    beam are found herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 86 for presses, not provided for elsewhere, in
    which material is wound on a mandrel and there is an opposed presser roll.


CLS 28/197
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 196 wherein the beam is rotated by a
    driving device which propels the beam by making contact with the warp sheet
    being wound thereon.


CLS 28/198
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 190 including dividing or separating the
    sheet of warp threads into segments by the insertion of separating means.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of the separating means to be found herein are
    leasing rods or cords.


CLS 28/199
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 198 wherein the separation of the
    threads is effected by a plurality of vertically extending blade-like
    members over, through or between which the threads are drawn, which members
    are either shiftable relative to one another or are so configured that the
    thread separation is effected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212+,   for reeds of combs, per se, specialized for use with a warp sheet.


CLS 28/200
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 190 involving the particulars of the
    means to propel the beaming or reeling apparatus.


CLS 28/201
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 172 (a) for the insertion of a warp beam
    or the thread ends of a warp sheet into a textile fabricating apparatus or
    an element thereof, or (b) for the handling of a warp beam and the threaded
    textile apparatus element or the beam and the thread ends of the warp sheet
    preparatory to their insertion into the textile apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  The term "textile fabricating apparatus" as used herein
    embraces any device using an exhaustible supply of warp threads in the
    manufacture of a textile product, as for example, a weaving loom, a warp
    knitting machine, etc.


CLS 28/202
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 201 including choosing and segregating a
    warp thread from a body or sheet of unseparated warp threads for
    presentation to a thread engaging element which subsequently operates upon
    it.


CLS 28/203.1
TXT Drawing:
    Method or apparatus under subclass 201 including threading or pulling in of
    warp threads through the textile apparatus or elements thereof.


CLS 28/204
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 203 wherein the device which is threaded
    comprises a comb-like thread guide which has a plurality of flat metal
    blades or thin wires and wherein a mechanism is provided for automatically
    inserting the threads of the warp sheet between the blades or wires.


CLS 28/205
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 203 wherein the device to be threaded is
    the thread guide of either a shed manipulating mechanism or a thread
    sensing means which guide has an eyelet therein and which guide is moved
    prior to, during or after the thread has been inserted through the eyelet.


CLS 28/206
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 205 wherein a substantially flat strip
    having a thread receiving eyelet or aperture therethrough is moved away
    from an adjacent strip to facilitate the threading thereof.


CLS 28/207
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 206 wherein the strip is twisted to
    align the eyelet or aperture with a thread inserting instrumentality.


CLS 28/207.1
TXT Hand implement:
    Method or apparatus under subclass 203.1 wherein the threading or pulling
    in its accomplished with the aid of a manually manipulable device or tool
    (e.g., a reed hook).


CLS 28/208
TXT Device under subclass 201 wherein means are provided a) for holding the
    free ends of the warp threads secure prior to their insertion into the
    textile fabricating apparatus, or b) for supporting or manipulating a
    threaded reed, heddle, or the like prior to its insertion into the textile
    fabricating apparatus.


CLS 28/209
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 201 including joining the individual
    thread ends of a substantially exhausted warp sheet to the corresponding
    thread ends of a new warp sheet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    49 for methods of joining at least two electrical conductors or their
    coverings end-to-end; subclasses 157+ for methods of adhesively joining
    laminae of indeterminate length in an end-to-end relationship; and
    subclasses 433+ for apparatus for adhesively joining laminae in an
    end-to-end relationship.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclass 35.6 for bobbin and cop
    winders with reserve thread uniting means.


CLS 28/210
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 209 including uniting the thread ends by
    twirling them together to form interlocking convolutions.


CLS 28/211
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 209 including uniting the thread ends by
    knotting them together.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    289,    Knots and Knot Tying, appropriate subclass for methods of and
    apparatus for joining ropes, threads, yarns and the like by tying their
    adjacent ends together.


CLS 28/212
TXT Apparatus under subclass 172 consisting of a subcombination of a warp
    preparing apparatus particularized for separating the individual threads of
    a warp sheet from one another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199,    for reeds or combs used to lease a warp sheet when in combination
    with a warp reeling or beaming apparatus or method.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclass 192 for reed type beat-up means.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 157+ for a thread
    guide, subclasses 548+ for a convolute winding machine with a particular
    guide, subclass 566 for an unwinding machine with a particular guide, and
    subclasses 615+ for an elongated material guide not classifiable elsewhere.


CLS 28/213
TXT Apparatus under subclass 212 wherein the individual thread segregating
    elements of the thread guide are mounted for movement towards or away from
    each other.


CLS 28/214
TXT Method or apparatus under the class definition for setting or winding
    colored tuft-pile threads into an arrangement suitable for weaving an
    Axminster carpet and the like.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184,    for pattern setting of tapestry warp threads.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 80.01+ for tufting type sewing apparatus.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 2+ for looms having pile tufting
    means.


CLS 28/215
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 214 for facilitating threading of the
    tuft-pile threads through tubes of a loom tube frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216,    for threading of the tuft tubes, per se.


CLS 28/216
TXT Method or apparatus under the class definition for facilitating threading
    of tuft-pile threads through tubes of a loom tube frame such as is
    utilized in an Axminster or similar carpet loom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215,    for combined pattern setting and tuft- tube threading.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 80.01+ for tufting type sewing apparatus.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 2+ for looms having pile tufting
    means.


CLS 28/217
TXT Method or apparatus under the class definition involving operations to
    place slender, elongate textile material composed of fibers or of filaments
    strands, yarns and the like, hereafter termed "thread", of individual or
    multiple components, in better marketable condition or to prepare such
    material for subsequent fabrication into articles or fabrics.

    (1)     Note.  The term thread as used herein is intended to include
    sliver, roving and the like.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    for treatment, inclusive of thread finishing, of a component member
    of a nonwoven textile article or structure prior to a needling operation.

    122,    for treatment, inclusive of thread finishing, of a component member
    of a nonwoven textile article or structure prior to a felting operation.

    166,    for treatment, inclusive of thread finishing, of a component member
    prior to fabrication into a thread interlaced fabric.

    178+,   for the fluid treatment of a running length of a plurality of
    threads in the form of a warp sheet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, appropriate subclass for methods of bleaching and
    dyeing and chemical modification of thread combined with a broadly recited
    textile operation other than spinning, twisting or turning.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, appropriate subclass
    for methods of and apparatus for finishing thread combined with spinning,
    twisting and twining thereof.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 376+ and 484+, respectively, for
    methods of or apparatus for making a glass filament or fiber combined with
    a finishing operation therefor.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, appropriate subclass for
    apparatus for the fluid treatment of thread in general.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclass for apparatus for coating
    thread other than in the form of a warp sheet.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    appropriate subclass for methods of finishing a filament combined with the
    forming thereof and subclasses 342+ for methods of finishing a unitary
    thread or filament formed of distinct, diverse extruded polymeric
    components which are arranged to run the length of the thread in a side by
    side fashion, e.g., a bicomponent filament, to effect distortion thereof by
    differential shrinkage.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compunds, subclasses 447.1+ for methods of
    carbonizing thread.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    appropriate subclass for apparatus for finishing a filament combined with
    forming means therefor.

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclass for methods of coating
    thread combined with a broadly recited textile operation.

    451,    Abrading, for a method of or apparatus for abrading of thread, per
    se.


CLS 28/218
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 217 wherein thread is textured by
    assembly into a textile fabric and subsequently disassembling the fabric
    back into the component thread.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171,    for more disassembly of an article or fabric back to its component
    thread.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, appropriate subclass for the particulars of
    fabrication of thread into a knitted textile fabric.

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, appropriate subclass
    for the particulars of fabrication of thread into a braided textile fabric.

    112,    Sewing, appropriate subclass for the particulars of fabrication of
    thread into a sewn textile fabric.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, appropriate subclass for the particulars of
    fabrication of thread into a woven textile fabric.


CLS 28/219
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 217 for altering a characteristic or the
    physical form of a continuously moving or traveling expanse of thread while
    it is in transit from a source of supply to a take-up or collection site.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is the repository for individual or unitary
    thread finishing operations as, for example, the polishing of a running
    length of thread by brushing, ironing, or rubbing to smooth fibrils into
    the surface thereof, the brushing or rubbing of a running length of thread
    to produce upstanding fibrils on the surface thereof, the assimilating or
    splicing of a running length of thread without the use of adhesives or
    fusion, the condensing or shrinking of a running length of thread without
    the production of coils, crimps, crinkles or like linear distentions, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173+,   for the surface modification of a running length of a plurality of
    threads in the form of a warp sheet.


CLS 28/220
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 219 including plural thread finishing
    treatments which differ in kind, effect or purpose.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of the types of different thread finishing
    operations to be found herein are stretching and texturing, texturing and
    opening or spreading of tow, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Where an additional operation merely perfects or enhances a
    basic thread finishing operation, e.g., heating thread to improve
    texturing, either to facilitate texturing, to retain the texture, or to
    fully develop the texture, the patent is placed on the basis of the basic
    finishing operation.

    (3)     Note.  Coating or dyeing is considered as "conditioning" and such
    an operation will be found with the specific type of surface modification
    of the thread.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223+,   for combined diverse thread clearing operations.

    258,    for combined diverse thread texturing operations.


CLS 28/221
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 220 wherein one of the thread finishing
    operations includes passing the thread through a zone of axial compression.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250+,   for stuffer box texturing including plug or wad control.

    255+,   for stuffer box texturing including jet feed to plug.

    263+,   for stuffer box texturing, per se.


CLS 28/222
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 219 for removing or assisting in the
    removal of material in the nature of either an abrupt enlargement or
    thickened portion, i.e., a knot or slub, or other projecting flaws,
    imperfection, impurities or the like from thread.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is the repository for those patents relating
    to the surface clearing of thread by single or unitary brushing, rubbing,
    scraping or cutting devices which do not form a fixed knot or slub
    entrapment opening of predetermined dimension for passage of the thread
    therethrough in transit to a take-up or collection site and those patents
    relating to the clearing of the thread by rubbing engagement upon itself.


CLS 28/223
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 222 including a plurality of separate,
    spaced or distinct clearing sites or stations through which the thread
    sequentially passes in transit to a take-up or collection site.


CLS 28/224
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 223 wherein each of the clearing
    operations involve transit of the thread through an opening of fixed
    predetermined dimension defined by the exterior boundaries of an element or
    elements for removal of projecting surface impurities by rubbing or
    scraping engagement therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232+,   for clearing of thread by a unitary gap or slot type device.


CLS 28/225
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 222 wherein a means for advancing a
    thread is rendered idle or inoperative when a knot or slub is detected in
    the thread.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186+,   for the stopping of a warp preparing or handling operation.

    242,    for the stopping of a thread stretching operation.

    248+,   for alteration of a thread texturing operation, including stopping.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses 2+ for means for
    mechanically isolating and for manipulating fibers including the step of or
    means for causing cessation of operation in response to some condition
    occurring in the material being fed, or through a defect in the machine or
    its operation.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 80+ for
    spinning or twisting machines provided with means either manually or
    automatically operated by the condition of the strand or material being
    operated on, as by failure, exhaustions, too much or too little tension,
    undue accumulations, etc., to facilitate or to effect the stopping thereof.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclasses 158+ for knitting machines provided
    with means for ceasing the application of power to the driven parts of the
    knitting mechanism in response to an abnormal condition of a strand used by
    the mechanism.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 5 for randomly actuated stopping of a
    metal deforming operation responsive to termination or to the tangling of
    running length work.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 58+ for randomly actuated stopping means for a
    cutting operation.

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, subclasses 18+ for
    braiding netting or lace making apparatus provided with means, either
    automatically or manually controlled, for stopping or starting the entire
    apparatus, inclusive of initiation of the operation by means which sense a
    condition of a strand used by the apparatus.

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 279+ for driving mechanism for sewing machines
    which include devices to facilitate starting and stopping.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 336+ for  mechanism to throw the
    loom out of operation.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.13+ for
    circuit makers and breakers which are controlled by continuous or
    indefinite lengths of material such as motion picture film, rope, yarn,
    endless belts and the like, traveling in a given path or being wound onto
    or unwound from spools or reels.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 10+ for a
    device for advancing material of indeterminate length provided with
    detection means for sensing a condition of the advancing material and with
    a mechanism actuated by said detection means for regulating a part which
    stops, or guides, or moves the material.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 28+ for detectors and
    stops for cone winding devices; subclasses 36+ for bobbin winding devices
    not otherwise classifiable which detect the presence of knots, slubs,
    splits, accumulations of gum, lint, waste, or other imperfections in the
    thread being wound or undue tension thereof; and subclass 49 for detector
    and stop devices not otherwise classifiable for cordage winding machines.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 136+ for means responsive to an abnormal condition to completely
    stop operation of the machine.


CLS 28/226
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 222 wherein (a) the presence of a knot
    or slub of an undesirable character either directly or indirectly effects
    parting of the thread either by retention of the knot or slub or an
    adjacent portion of the thread to break the thread at or about the point of
    retention or by slicing through the thread with a cutting member, or (b)
    the thread passes against or through a rigid stripping member which cuts or
    scrapes away any undesirable protruding material.

    (1)     Note.  Since there is no structural difference between knot or slub
    clearing guides and stripping guides used to clear fibril from thread or
    yarn and since fibril stripping guides will inherently act to clear a knot
    or slub too large to pass therethrough, both type of guides will be found
    herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 16 for a control means energized in
    response to activator stimulated by a condition sensor which is responsive
    to lateral dimension, e.g., thickness.

    83,     Cutting, subclass 371 for a cutting operation controlled by
    detector means responsive to work indicium or irregularity.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 141 for control means responsive to or actuated by means sensing a
    condition, e.g., product thickness, and subclass 142 wherein the control
    means controlled is a severing element.


CLS 28/227
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 226 wherein sensing of the presence of
    the abrupt enlargement or thickened portion creates or alters fluid or
    electric current flow to energize or initiate a thread parting or
    separating operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 37.7 for checking dimensions, shape
    or size of a moving sheet, cable or filament or the spacing of selected
    portions thereof, having at least one unit for the direct application of
    fluid pressure thereto and utilizing the escape of fluid about the specimen
    as an index of its dimension, shape, size or spacing and subclasses 159+
    for testing or inspecting of filaments or strands for defects, etc., other
    than mere inspection or visual examination.

    83,     Cutting, subclass 365 for a cutting operation controlled by
    photoelectric detector means responsive to the work.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 559.4+ for a circuit responsive to a
    photocell and wherein the photocell is arranged relative to the material so
    that circuit provides an output indicative of flaws in the form of voids,
    holes, discoloration, and the like, and for a photocell and additional
    pre-photocell structure positioned to detect imperfections.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 600+ for
    determining impedance, admittance and related quantities of material,
    inclusive of strands.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, indicating subclasses 675+ for an
    electrical condition responsive system automatically responsive to the
    feeding of a web, sheet, or work, inclusive of a strand or thread.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 430+ for optically
    measuring or testing a moving web or thread for flaws or imperfections, and
    subclass 238 for optical inspection of cloth or thread for flaws or
    imperfections.


CLS 28/228
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 226 wherein a thread parting or
    separating operation is actuated or initiated upon detection or sensing of
    the abrupt enlargement or thickened portion in the thread by a movable
    member resting thereon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 66+ for a detector supported on or urged
    against the work for generating a signal or impulse for stopping of the
    cutting operation.


CLS 28/229
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 226 wherein the abrupt enlargement or
    thickened portion of the thread directly engages and moves one of a pair of
    opposed gap defining members in the path thereof toward the other of such
    members to pinch and entrap the enlargement or thickened portion or an
    adjacent thread portion of therebetween to effect a thread parting or
    separating operation.


CLS 28/230
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 229 wherein the knot or slub biased
    wedging member is provided with a curved surface so shaped that the wedging
    or pinching action on the thread increases in intensity as the surface
    approaches the opposing, gap defining member.


CLS 28/231
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 226 wherein the presence of the abrupt
    enlargement or thickened portion directs the thread along the length of an
    elongated, narrow passage formed by the exterior boundaries of an element
    or elements to a clamping or cutting zone for effecting parting of the
    thread.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclass 353 for
    guiding devices provided with means to catch and hold strands to prevent
    entangling when they leave the normal path of travel or become broken,
    kinked, or knotted, during the twisting operation.


CLS 28/232
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 226 wherein the thread passes in transit
    through an opening of fixed, predetermined dimension defined by the
    exterior boundaries of an element or elements which either superficially
    clears the thread by rubbing or scraping contact therewith or which effects
    parting of the thread by blocking the passage of any knot or slub
    therethrough    beyond a predetermined size.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224,    for combined diverse clearing operations of the gap or slot type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 157, 548+, 566, and
    615+ for a guide for elongated material.


CLS 28/233
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 232 including a plurality of surfaces
    forming at least two distinct, alternately utilizable openings of differing
    dimension or alternately utilizable surfaces capable of varying the opening
    to differing dimension.


CLS 28/234
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 232 wherein the opening is an elongate,
    narrow passage which includes notches, sharp-pointed projections, prongs
    and the like for engagement with a knot, slub or the like.


CLS 28/235
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 232 wherein the opening is an elongate,
    narrow passage and one of the exterior boundaries forming the elongate,
    narrow passage is movable relative to the other such boundary to a
    predetermined, desired position to alter or vary the dimension of the
    elongate passage.


CLS 28/236
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 235 wherein one of the surfaces forming
    the elongate, narrow passage is moved to an adjusted position through the
    arcuate movement of a displacement means which rotates about an axis which
    is not coincident with the geometric center thereof.


CLS 28/237
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 235 wherein one of the surfaces forming
    the elongate, narrow passage is carried by a member having a slit therein
    into which a protrusion extends so that the protrusion coacts with the slit
    to limit the amount that one surface can be moved relative to the other.


CLS 28/238
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 235 wherein a screw-like member is
    provided which coacts with a bore having a helical ridge formed therein to
    effect or allow movement of the passage defining surfaces to thereby alter
    passage width.


CLS 28/239
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 222 involving the removal of laterally
    projecting fibrils, fuzz and the like from the surface of the thread by
    combustion or by the application of heat thereto of sufficient temperature
    or intensity to induce melting or flow of such impurities if of a plastic
    nature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174,    for singeing of a plurality of threads in the form of a warp sheet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclasses 3+ for burning or scorching
    the projecting fibers or threads of cloth.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclass 7.5 for machines for searing leather.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 47 for coating apparatus including
    means to subject either the coated surface or the surface to be coated to a
    flame or fire.

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclass for electric heater
    structure, per se, and subclass 223 for electrical heating means adapted to
    contact the hair or to be used with additional structure to transmit its
    heat to the hair for the purpose of hair singeing.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 223+ for subjecting a coating or
    surface to be coated to contact with a flame.

    431,    Combustion, appropriate subclass for burner structure, per se.


CLS 28/240
TXT Apparatus under subclass 219 for attenuating or elongating a thread beyond
    the elastic limit thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220+,   for combined diverse thread finishing operations, including
    stretching.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclass 132 for swelling or plasticizing of
    artificial fibers combined with a stretching operation.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 287+ and 310
    for spinning, twisting or twining devices combined with means to stretch
    the thread being twisted concomitantly with or subsequent to the twisting
    operation and subclass 362 for processes for making strand structures
    either wholly or in part from synthetic filaments or fibers by a combined
    spinning, twisting or twining and stretching operation.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 535+ for apparatus for glass fiber
    or filament formation combined with stretching or drawing means.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclasses 125+ for treating, including
    stretching, and feeding thread to a knitting machine.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 376 for processes of attenuating or
    elongating metal work by application of tensile forces.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 165+ for formation of continuous or indefinite length filaments
    combined with a stretching thereof, and subclasses 288.4+ for process of
    stretching by applying tension.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    subclass 66 for combined filament forming and stretching apparatus.


CLS 28/241
TXT Apparatus under subclass 240 wherein means are provided which sense or
    perceive variations from a set norm in thread or in machine operation and
    which means activates or regulates additional means to alter operation of
    the machine when such variations occur.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185+,   for means responsive to a sensed condition in the preparation or
    handling of a plurality of threads in the form of a warp sheet.

    225,    for means responsive to a sensed condition to stop a thread
    clearing operation.

    226+,   for means responsive to a knot or slub to effect clamping or
    severing of thread.

    248+,   for means responsive to a sensed condition in the texturing of
    thread.


CLS 28/242
TXT Apparatus under subclass 241 including means activated for initiated by the
    sensing means for ceasing operation of the stretching apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186+,   for the stopping of a warp preparing or handling operation.

    225,    for the stopping of a thread clearing operation.

    248+,   for alteration of a thread texturing operation, including stopping.


CLS 28/243
TXT Apparatus under subclass 240 including means to effect irregular or
    discontinuous attenuation or elongation of thread to produce variations in
    the nature of abrupt enlargements, knobs, knots, slubs, thick and thin
    portions and the like along the length thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252+,   for producing discontinuous or irregular coils, crimps, crinkles or
    like distortions in thread during a texturing operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 260 for forming a nonuniform
    cross-section or nonlinear product by extrusion and subclass 276 for
    producing a nonuniform product by pulling a work-piece through a closed
    periphery die, e.g., rod, tube or wire drawing.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 167 for processes of forming filaments of irregular denier.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 66 for apparatus for forming irregular denier by forming and
    stretching filaments and subclass 76 for imparting irregular denier to
    filaments by altering orifice size or by varying flow rate.


CLS 28/244
TXT Apparatus under subclass 240 wherein attenuation or elongation of thread is
    effected by stretching means providing a thread path which extends along
    and is transverse of the longitudinal axis of such means and which path
    continuously or successively increases in length as the thread moves
    therethrough and along the stretching means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219,    for shrinking of thread without the production of coils, crimps,
    crinkles and like linear distentions by similar apparatus having
    progressively decreasing lateral thread paths.


CLS 28/245
TXT Apparatus under subclass 240 wherein attenuation or elongation is effected
    by sequential engagement of thread with revolving or rotating elements
    separated along the path of travel of the thread and powered progressively
    increasing rates of speed.


CLS 28/246
TXT Apparatus under subclass 245 including means located intermediate a pair of
    spaced attenuating or elongating elements for conditioning thread
    therebetween to enhance the characteristics or properties thereof or to
    facilitate the thread stretching operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    178+,   for conditioning a running length of thread in the form of a warp
    sheet.

    261,    for conditioning a running length of thread during an asymmetric
    texturing operation.

    265+,   for conditioning a running length of thread during a stuffer box
    texturing operation.

    281,    for latent bulk or crimp development of a running length of thread.


CLS 28/247
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 219 involving the production of
    interlaced or intertwined adjacent thread portions or coils, crimps,
    crinkles or like distentions in thread or portions thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220+,   for combined diverse thread finishing operations, including
    texturing.

    286,    for texturing of thread while in package form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclass 114.5 for fluid or chemical treatment of
    yarns and fabrics having yarns or areas of different physical or chemical
    characteristics, to produce crepe effects thereon and subclass 117 for
    treating cellulose fibrous materials or fabrics with agents to impart the
    chemical properties of wool thereto or with acid or alkaline gelatinizing
    or shrinking agents without tension, so as to cause the same to curl up and
    take on the physical appearance of wool.

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses .46+ for staplizing of
    continuous filamentary material combined with prior treatment, inclusive of
    crimping or  curling; subclasses .56+ for staplizing of continuous
    filamentary material combined with other operations, inclusive of crimping
    or curling; and subclass 66.1 for crimping or curling of fibers in mass or
    sheet form.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclass 29 for
    apparatus for twisting hair, grass and the like to form yarn or cordage
    therefrom including means to insert additional hard twist to cause the
    strand to curl or coil about its longitudinal axis; subclasses 261+ for
    devices for performing spinning, twisting or twining operations combined
    with other operations, inclusive of texturing, and not elsewhere
    classified; subclasses 332+ for false twist devices for texturing strands;
    and subclass 362 for processes for making textured strand structures either
    wholly or in part from synthetic filaments or fibers by a spinning,
    twisting or twining operation.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 437, 438, and 506 for glass
    filament or fiber making combined with means having functions other than
    filament or fiber forming which serve to perfect the filament or fiber for
    its intended purpose, e.g., crimping or curling.

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclass for method or apparatus for
    deforming metal.

    101,    Printing, subclasses 3.1+ for apparatus for producing characters or
    designs on surfaces by dies adapted to deform or remove portions of the
    material.

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 210+ and 223 for crimping or curling the hair or
    straightening kinky hair.

    140,    Wireworking, subclasses 105+ for forming crimps or kinks in wire or
    wire fabrics.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    183 for methods of bonding flexible filamentary material while in
    indefinite or running length with creping, wrinkling, or crinkling and
    subclasses 459+ for surface bonding means for an indefinite or running
    length flexible web with bending, folding, winding and wrapping means.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 111+ for methods of
    producing a nonuniform, irregular or con-figured web or sheet, and
    subclasses 280+ for apparatus for producing or treating a creped or
    crinkled water or liquid laid fibrous web.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 28+ for apparatus for plaiting,
    fluting and shirring fabrics in the manufacture of garments, ornaments
    therefor, and similar material.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 168 for the combination of forming and crimping or crinkling of
    strands of filaments, and subclasses 280+ for reshaping running or
    indefinite length work.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    appropriate subclass and particularly subclass 66 for combined continuous
    filament forming or film casting means with stretching means comprising
    product advancing means, inclusive of crimping or curling means.


CLS 28/248
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 247 wherein means are provided which
    perceive variations from a set norm in the thread or in machine operation
    and which means activates or regulates additional means to alter the
    operation of the machine when such a variation occurs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185+,   for means responsive to a sensed condition in the preparation or
    handling of a plurality of threads in the form of a warp sheet.

    225,    for means responsive to a sensed condition to stop a thread
    clearing operation.

    226+,   for means responsive to a knot or slub to effect clamping or
    severing of thread.

    241+,   for means responsive to a sensed condition in a thread stretching
    operation.


CLS 28/249
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 248 wherein variations in sensible heat
    are used to regulate the machine.


CLS 28/250
TXT Method of apparatus under subclass 248 for texturing thread wherein the
    sensing means regulates the operation of means for maintaining a desired
    volume of material within a texturing chamber or box.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264+,   for plug or wad control by an in internal chamber retarder.


CLS 28/251
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 250 wherein the maintenance of a desired
    volume within the texturing chamber or box is effected by controlling the
    relative rate of feed or withdrawal of material from the texturing chamber
    or box.


CLS 28/252
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 247 wherein the thread is textured in a
    predetermined intermittent or nonuniform manner such that the production of
    coils, crimps, crinkles or like distentions is varied along the length of
    the thread.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass usually contains those devices modified to
    produce a pattern or program controlled discontinuous or irregular texture
    in thread.  The production of a discontinuous or irregular textured thread
    without design, as by those devices which by their very nature produce such
    effect in a random manner, e.g, fluid jet texturizers utilized to interlace
    thread as a twist substitute, will be found elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243,    for producing irregular or variable denier in thread during a
    stretching operation.

    271+,   and particularly 275, for producing discontinuous or irregular
    entangling or interlacing of thread due to resonance in fluid jet texturing.


CLS 28/253
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 252 wherein a means is provided for
    moving either the strand to be textured or the means to effect texturing
    towards or away from each other such that the strand and the texturing
    device alternately engage and disengage in a rhythmic fashion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280,    for relative movement between reciprocating sinkers and a running
    length thread to effect texturing.


CLS 28/254
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 247 wherein texturing is effected by
    impinging thread against an object by a fluid stream.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262+,   for texturing thread against an impacting surface by other than a
    fluid jet.

    271+,   for particulars of the fluid jet.

    289,    for feeding thread against a deflecting surface during packaging.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 309 for spraying or flinging molding material against a shaping
    surface.


CLS 28/255
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 254 wherein the object against which the
    thread impinges is a wad of previously delivered processed thread.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263+,   for impacting thread against a plug or wad thereof by other than a
    jet feed.


CLS 28/256
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 255 wherein the wad of previously
    processed thread is engaged and advanced by forwarding element or surface
    such that it moves away from the point of impingement.


CLS 28/257
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 254 wherein thread is impinged against a
    moving object which advances the axially compressed thread mass away from
    the point of impingement.


CLS 28/258
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 247 wherein thread is subjected to a
    plurality of different types of distorting or interlacing operations.

    (1)     Note.  Latent bulk or crimp development of thread is construed as a
    conditioning or perfecting operation, not a texturing operation for this
    subclass.


CLS 28/259
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 247 wherein thread is textured by
    conditioning only one side of a running length of thread or by conditioning
    said side in a manner which is different from the manner in which the other
    side is conditioned to thereby induce a nonuniform molecular structure
    across the cross section of the thread.


CLS 28/260
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 259 wherein the nonuniform molecular
    structure of the thread is induced by passing the thread over a sharp
    surface.


CLS 28/261
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 260 wherein thread is subjected to a
    conditioning operation before or after passing over the sharp surface
    either to prepare the thread for texturing or to alter or enhance a
    characteristic or property of the thread.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    178+,   for conditioning a running length of thread in the form of a warp
    sheet.

    246,    for conditioning a running length of thread during a stretching
    operation.

    265+,   for conditioning a running length of thread during a stuffer box
    texturing operation.

    281,    for conditioning a running length of thread to develop latent bulk
    or crimp.


CLS 28/262
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 247 wherein texturing is effected by
    subjecting thread to compression along its longitudinal axis to induce
    crimps, folds and the like therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254+,   for axial compression of thread by jet feed thereof against an
    impact surface.

    289+,   for axial compression of thread against a deflecting surface during
    packaging.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclass 18.6 for shrinking fabric by
    compacting or compressing the  thread components thereof.


CLS 28/263
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 262 wherein the axial compression is
    effected by the impingement of the thread against a mass of previously
    processed thread which is formed into a plug or wad within a thread
    confining chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221,    for combined diverse thread finishing operations, including stuffer
    box texturing.

    250+,   for stuffer box texturing including plug or wad control.

    255+,   for stuffer box texturing including jet feed to plug.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclass 152 for processes of feeding continuously
    moving warps, open width fabrics or ropes by pleating, plaiting or folding
    them into a treating liquid receptacle.

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclass 21 for continuous web fulling
    machines of the pleating type.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 177+ for web or
    rope pleating in a fixed liquid receptacle.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 118.1+, for
    plural material moving means with intermediate storage.


CLS 28/264
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 263 including means intermediate the
    entrance and exit of the thread confining chamber to impede the passage of
    the thread plug or wad therethrough.


CLS 28/265
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 263 wherein thread is subjected to a
    conditioning operation before, after or during the axial compression either
    to prepare the thread for texturing or to alter or enhance a characteristic
    or property thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    178+,   for conditioning a running length of thread in the form of a warp
    sheet.

    246,    for conditioning a running length of thread during a stretching
    operation.

    261,    for conditioning a running length of thread in an asymmetric
    texturing operation.


CLS 28/266
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 265 wherein the conditioning operation
    occurs after the thread has passed through the thread confining chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281,    for conditioning a running length of thread to develop latent bulk
    or crimp.


CLS 28/267
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 265 wherein a gas or liquid contacts the
    plug or wad while in transit through the thread confining chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249,    for control means responsive to a sensed condition to alter the
    temperature of a fluid medium being applied to the chamber plug.


CLS 28/268
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 263 involving the particular structure
    of the means for forwarding the thread into the confining chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251,    for alteration in the feeding of thread to the stuffer box to
    maintain plug or wad control.


CLS 28/269
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 268 involving the particular structure
    of opposed, rotary elements which forward the thread passing therebetween
    directly into the confining chamber or the supporting means therefor,
    inclusive of ancillary means associated therewith.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 181+ for
    constructional details of a rotary pinch pair.


CLS 28/270
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 269 involving the particular structure
    of the ancillary means for directing or guiding the thread in a sinusoidal
    or zigzag path, such that the point at which the thread contacts the rotary
    elements is constantly shifted back and forth across the width of said
    rotary elements prior to the entry thereof into the confining chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 158+ for traverse
    mechanisms, per se.


CLS 28/271
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 247 wherein texturing of the thread is
    effected by the turbulence generated from a gaseous or liquid stream
    applied thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254+,   for fluid jet feeding of thread against an impact surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 3+ and 362
    for apparatus and methods, respectively, for producing a composite yarn by
    fluid apparatus and methods, respectively, for splicing thread by fluid
    current; and subclasses 332+ for false-twisting devices utilizing fluid
    current.

    226, Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, may include a nominal
    recitation of a supply or take-up coil (e.g., less than a support for such
    a coil or a cooperative relationship between a tension or exhaust detector
    and reel driving or reel stopping means, etc.), subclass 7 for a process of
    or subclasses 97.1+ for an apparatus using fluid current to advance the
    material.


CLS 28/272
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 271 for facilitating or initiating
    string-up of the fluid jet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    268,    for threading of a stuffer box texturing device.


CLS 28/273
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 271 wherein the turbulence is induced by
    passing the thread and fluid through an inhibiting orifice connecting a
    converging entrance passageway with a diverging exit passageway or
    connecting a high pressure zone with a low pressure, thread bulking or
    expansion zone usually within the fluid jet.


CLS 28/274
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 271 wherein the turbulence is induced by
    projecting a fluid stream through or against the thread at a right angle to
    the longitudinal axis thereof.


CLS 28/275
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 274 wherein a recess is positioned
    opposite the point of entry of the fluid stream for receiving and altering
    the flow characteristics of the fluid after passage of the same through or
    against the thread to thus modify the degree of turbulence to which the
    thread is subjected.

    (1)     Note.  Such chambers are usually provided to prevent disorderly
    secondary gas currents from interfering with thread entanglement by the jet.


CLS 28/276
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 274 wherein the turbulence is induced by
    projecting fluid streams against opposite sides of the thread.


CLS 28/277
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 247 wherein texturing is effected by
    subjecting the thread to repetitive mechanical impacts or shocks along the
    length thereof.


CLS 28/278
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 247 wherein texturing is effected by
    engagement of the thread with mechanical means which transversely deforms
    the thread into a patterned nonlinear configuration, the shape of which is
    determined by the profile of the mechanical deforming means.


CLS 28/279
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 278 wherein the texturing is effected by
    passing the thread between interdigitated or interlocked moving elements
    which forward and mechanically shape the thread passing therebetween.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclass 66.2 for methods of or
    apparatus for crimping fibers in mass or sheet form.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 196 for an orbitally-moving tool face
    moving in a circular orbit cooperating with a complementary, e.g.,
    conjugate, tool face in the deformation of metal.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    200+, for methods of bending or reshaping running or continuous length work
    combined with surface bonding or assembly therefor and subclasses 461+, for
    means for longitudinally bending an indefinite or running length web
    combined with surface bonding means or assembly means therefor.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 286+ for methods of corrugating running or indefinite length
    work.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 369+ for means corrugating a preform.


CLS 28/280
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 279 wherein the texturing is effected by
    deflecting elements which are reciprocally mounted in a support and which
    each coact with an aligned thread receiving recess into which the thread is
    displaced by the deflecting elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclasses 104+ for particulars of sinkers or
    web holders in the knitting of thread into fabric.


CLS 28/281
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 247 wherein the texturing is effected by
    developing or releasing internal strains or stresses in the thread to cause
    nonlinear deformation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for fiber entangling and interlocking by latent bulk or crimp
    development in a nonwoven article or structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 342+ for treating a shaped or treated article, inclusive of
    thread, to decrease the surface area thereof.


CLS 28/282
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 219 for effecting lateral distention,
    expansion or separation of a condensed or grouped number of parallel
    continuous filaments by flattening out and forcing apart the component
    members thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are opening or spreading operations
    performed on tows of crimped or textured continuous filaments which, in
    addition to expanding and widening the tow, effect level-ing, dephasing or
    deregistering of the crimps throughout the width of the tow band or sheet
    to improve the characteristics thereof.

    (2)     Note.  Ancillary functions of the opening or spreading operation
    include the removal of folds or twist from the tow imposed therein by prior
    processing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103+,   for rearrangement of a tow into a coherent, entangled unitary
    nonwoven web.

    213,    for an expansible thread comb or guide for altering the width of a
    sheet of threads in the form of a warp.

    220+,   for tow opening or spreading combined with another diverse thread
    finishing operation.

    271+,   for fluid jet texturing, i.e., bulking or crimping of a tow.

    287+,   for opening or separating thread in hank or skein form.


CLS 28/283
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 282 wherein the opening or spreading of
    the tow is assisted or effected by a gaseous or liquid stream which causes
    the individual component, continuous filaments to separate and move apart
    to effect flattening and widening of the tow.

    (1)     Note.  Fluid tow opening devices are commonly referred to in the
    art as "banding  jets".


CLS 28/284
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 217 including the finishing of a package
    or unit of wound thread composed of overlapping layers of cylindrical
    configuration or form, usually supported by an internal flangeless core.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290+,   for the formation of thread into a wound package involving more
    than mere winding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 155+ for manipulative fluid treatment of
    wound yarn packages.

    29,     Metal Working, appropriate subclass for removal of the internal
    supporting core of a thread package, inclusive of the replacement thereof
    with another differing supporting core, i.e., a perforate or porous core or
    spring, for dyeing purposes.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 8 for gas, steam or
    mist treating of a textile on a cylinder and subclasses 150, 189, and 198
    for fluid treating devices for wound packages wherein the liquid flows
    axially of the package or holder.


CLS 28/285
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 284 wherein the thread finishing
    operation includes the application of heat or a heated gaseous or liquid
    medium to the thread package or unit to alter or enhance the
    characteristics thereof or to effect drying or setting thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118+,   for conditioning of a tampon.


CLS 28/286
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 285 wherein the thermal conditioning
    causes or effects contraction or reduction in length of the thread of which
    the package or unit is composed, inclusive of the production of crimps,
    crinkles and the like in the thread.


CLS 28/287
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 217 including the finishing of a bound,
    collapsible and coreless, wound thread unit having a multiplicity of
    superposed, elongate loops in parallel relation to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291,    for the formation of thread into a hank or skein involving more
    than mere winding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclass 155.2 for manipulative fluid treatment of
    skeins, cakes or cheeses.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 25+ for
    apparatus for twisting determinate lengths of strands by rotating one or
    both ends.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 149 for liquid flow
    type treating devices having a rotatable skein supporting stick; subclasses
    159+ for movable carrier in vat type treating devices having a skein
    carrying stick or frame; subclass 188 for fixed liquid receptacle type
    treating devices wherein sticks are provided for supporting skeins; and
    subclass 206 for liquid applying tricklers and sprinklers with skein
    supporting sticks.


CLS 28/288
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 287 wherein the hank or skein is
    continuously or intermittently moved about on internal member suspending or
    sustaining same.


CLS 28/289
TXT Method or apparatus under the class definition for forming a unit of thread
    of desired or determinate length portion into an article of commerce in a
    manner not provided for elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  Devices for forming units of thread into folds or coils, per
    se, e.g., plaiters will be found herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175+,   for the formation of a warp sheet into rope-like, continuous
    package form.

    217+,   for the finishing of a thread package in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses 157+ for the packaging of
    silver.

    53,     Package Making, appropriate subclass for depositing thread, yarn or
    the like, into a container which will be subsequently removed from the
    packaging apparatus, and subclasses 396+ and 582+ for making a package by
    encircling the contents with a cover material in one direction only while
    leaving the contents exposed on two sides or ends, where there is no thread
    finishing operation combined with the packaging operation.  For a further
    statement of the line between Class 53 and this class (28) see the (2)
    Note, section IV in the class definition of Class 53.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, appropriate subclass
    for combined spinning and packaging of thread.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 477+, especially subclass 481 for
    glass fiber or filament making combined with winding.

    100,    Presses, subclass 5 for binding combined with winding or folding;
    subclass 40 for pressing methods combined with winding or folding; and
    subclasses 76+ for pressing apparatus combined with means for winding or
    folding a sheet, web or stand.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, appropriate subclass for winding
    and reeling of thread.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 177+ for a coating process combined
    with winding, balling, rolling or coiling.


CLS 28/290
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 289 wherein the formation of the thread
    unit is effected by looping, winding or wrapping thread of a desired or
    determinate length portion about preceding coils, layers, loops or wraps
    thereof, usually about an internal core.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284+,   for the finishing of a wound thread package in the form of a
    bobbin, cheese or cop.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclass 2.5 for
    component winding devices with untwisting and separating; subclasses
    58.65+, for take-up devices for unitary multiple twisters; subclasses
    58.72+ for package control means; and subclass 62 for winding devices for
    delivery twist type twisters.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 16+ for thread
    spoolers; subclasses 18+ for bobbin and cop winding; subclasses 118+ for
    bobbins and spools, per se; and 129.5 for supporters for strand material
    holders.


CLS 28/291
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 290 wherein the formation of the wound
    thread unit is effected by looping, winding or wrapping thread of a desired
    or determinate length portion into a multiplicity of superposed
    collapsible, coreless, elongate coils or loops in parallel relation to each
    other and including binding of the resulting unit at, at least one point to
    retain the elongate coils or loops in position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    287+,   for finishing of a hank or skein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclass 362 for a
    process for forming an endless band by a twisting or twining operation only.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 388 for nonspooled
    filamentary material (e.g., skein).

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclass 53 for hank and skein
    winding, per se, and subclass 127 for skein holders.


CLS 28/292
TXT Method or apparatus under the class definition for removing thread residue
    from a textile thread carrier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 224+ for bobbin stripping combined
    with loom replenishing.


CLS 28/293
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 292 wherein the thread residue is
    removed from the carrier by withdrawal of thread therefrom in continuous or
    running length form.


CLS 28/294
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 293 wherein the unwinding of the thread
    residue from the carrier is aided or effected by gaseous or liquid medium.


CLS 28/295
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 292 wherein the thread residue is
    removed from the carrier by effecting relative movement between the carrier
    and a thread severing agent.


CLS 28/296
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 292 wherein the thread residue is
    removed from the carrier by pulling, shredding or tearing the thread into
    fibers of determinate, i.e., staple length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    293+,   for subsequent staplization of waste thread unwound from a bobbin
    or carrier.


CLS 28/297
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 292 wherein a mass of the thread residue
    is removed as a unit from an end of the carrier by effecting relative
    sliding movement between the carrier and the thread mass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, appropriate subclass for methods of or apparatus for
    thread package core or carrier removal or replacement by relative movement
    between the core or carrier and the wound thread mass thereon.


CLS 28/298
TXT Method or apparatus under subclass 297 wherein the removal of the residue
    is effected by engagement of the thread mass with grasping means which slip
    or slide the mass as a unit off the carrier during movement of the grasping
    means relative to the carrier.


CLS 28/299
TXT Method or apparatus commensurate with the class definition involving
    textile manufacturing operations not otherwise provided for.


CLS 29/
TTL METAL WORKING

CLS 29/
TXT

    I.      This is the generic class of metal working or shaping.  It
    comprises processes, tools, machines, and apparatus not classifiable in the
    specific classes relating to the manufacture of articles from metal.  It
    also includes means which comprise a plurality of operations which
    separately might be classified in the specific classes, but which by their
    joinder include more than is covered by the definitions of such specific
    classes.

    II.     This class has been made the generic class for the subject matter
    of the following subclasses and those indented thereunder, regardless of
    the composition of the blank, stock material, or article recited or worked
    upon.

    25.41+, A process of electric condenser making.

    90.01+  ,A burnishing process,

    592+,   A process of manufacture,

    700+,   Apparatus used to assemble or disassemble.



    III.    DEFINITION OF TERMS

    MANUFACTURING
    The physical act of or means for creating, constructing, fabricating,
    machining, working, shaping, assembling, disassembling, and repairing of
    machines, devices, and things (articles).

    SHAPING
    The physical act of or means for permanently altering the form,
    configuration, dimensions, proportions, or contour of a part or stock,
    either with or without the removal of material.  This term includes
    deforming, compacting, densifying, slitting, machining, and briquetting.

    ASSEMBLING
    The physical act of or means for juxtaposing, associating, integrating,
    joining and/or putting together, with or without securing, of machines,
    devices, and things (articles).

    DEFORMING
    The physical act of or means for shaping without any substantial removal of
    material.  This term includes forging, rolling, densifying, extruding,
    drawing and stretching.

    DISASSEMBLY
    The physical act of or means for dissociating, disengaging, and/or taking
    apart of machines, devices, and things (articles).

    MACHINING
    The physical act of or means for shaping by removing material by means of a
    cutting edge.  This term includes milling, cutting, turning, boring,
    drilling, abrading, broaching, filing, sawing, punching, blanking, and
    planing.

    REPAIR
    The physical act of or means for restoring inoperative machines, apparatus,
    static structures, and things (articles) when the operational limits of
    tolerance have become exceeded by wear, imperfections, destructive
    oxidation, electrolysis, or failure by (1) reshaping parts, (2)
    substituting a part and/or adding supplemental or additional parts or
    material, and/or (3) taking away sections of worn, torn, broken, distorted,
    eroded or otherwise unusable parts or material, and mending them by adding
    supplemental or additional parts or material.

    SLITTING
    The physical act of or means for shaping solely by incising or severing the
    part or stock to form a partial separation along a plane or surface through
    the part or stock.  When this separation is done by a true shearing
    operation, there is no material removed.

    BARRIER LAYER DEVICE
    An electrical component consisting of two conductors placed either in
    contact with each other or separated by an interface layer to which
    contacts or terminals have been secured, which component has a nonlinear
    resistance characteristic, as a result of the electrical action of the
    interface between the two conductors rather than from the characteristic of
    the conductors.

    IV.     MISCELLANEOUS NOTES

    (1)     Note.  Patents claiming both an article or product and a process of
    manufacturing that article or product which process is classifiable in this
    class are classified in a suitable article or product class and cross
    referenced to the appropriate subclass of this class.

    (2)     Note.  Historically, the term "metal working" has included
    assembling.  Therefore assembling is included within the scope of paragraph
    I, above, even though no metal parts are being assembled.

    (3)     Note.  While this is the generic mechanical manufacturing class, it
    is noted that manufacturing by chemistry, electrochemistry, or the related
    arts is provided for in the chemical classes.  See the classes listed on
    pages I-6 and I-7 in the front of the Manual of Classification under "I.
    Chemical and Related Arts".

    (4)     Note.  The relation of other mechanical manufacturing classes to
    Class 29 is detailed on pages I-14 through I-16 in the front of the Manual
    of Classification under "III.  Mechanical Manufacturing and Machine Element
    Arts, Manufacturing (Metal Working)".

    (5)     Note.  Measuring, testing, recording and conveying, per se, are not
    considered "manufacturing" operations for this class.





    V.      SEARCH CLASS:

    See (3) and (4) Notes, above.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 742.1+ for
    processes of filling cavities in situ erected structures and subclasses
    749.1+ for machines and implements particularly adapted to in situ building
    construction not elsewhere provided for.

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 266.1+ for means for filling and closing
    a preformed receptacle and subclasses 285+ for means for closing a package
    or filled receptacle.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, for processes of, or apparatus for
    glassworking and/or treating.

    72,     Metal Deforming, for shaping metal by stressing beyond its elastic
    limit, generally.  Normally, the combination of a metal working process or
    apparatus with additional metal deforming or cutting or with any additional
    operation that is ancillary to the metal deforming will be found in Class
    72.  However, there is an exception to this guideline in regard to a
    process of making a "special article".  A "special article" is one named by
    the title of one of the subclasses of Class 29 for making that particular
    article, which subclasses are physically located in the portion of the
    Class 29 schedule, between subclasses 1.1 and 179.  A process of making a
    "special article" including plural, distinct metal deforming steps, if
    performed in the same die, or in the same processing line will be found in
    Class 72, whereas if not performed in the same die, or in the same
    processing line will be found in the "special article" making portion of
    Class 29.  The metal deforming steps proper for the "special article"
    making portion of Class 29 may comprise different metal deforming types,
    e.g., rolling and drawing, or may comprise two steps of the same deforming
    type, e.g., a first and a second step of rolling.  Note that the
    corresponding combination of apparatus for making a "special article" is to
    be found in Class 72 according to the general guideline not according to
    the exception.

    86,     Ammunition and Explosive-Charge  Making, for making ammunition and
    explosive charges.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, for making and processing foods
    and beverages.

    100,    Presses, for press structure not elsewhere provided for where
    neither features of structure for holding work nor features of tool
    structure for performing the work of a type classifiable in Class 29 are
    claimed.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, for apparatus for making steam.

    132,    Toilet, subclass 201 for methods of and subclass 56 for apparatus
    for making hair structures.

    148,    Metal Treatment, for the combination of significant heat treatment
    for modifying or maintaining internal physical structure (i.e.,
    microstructure) or chemical properties of metal with a metal working,
    machining, fusion bonding, casting, or assembly or disassembly operation
    proper for Class 29.  Particularly, see section III, A, of the Class 148
    definition for amplification of what constitutes significant heat
    treatment.  Furthermore, the combination of reactive coating or chemical
    heat removing (e.g., flame-cutting, etc.) or burning (i.e., oxidizing) to
    remove a portion of a metal workpiece, with a Class 29 metal working,
    machining, fusion bonding, or casting operation goes as an original to
    Class 148.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, as the
    generic class for the adhesive joining of parts utilizing nonmetallic
    cements and as the generic class for manufacturing processes involving a
    chemical reaction.  See the class definition of Class 156 for the line
    between that class and Class 29.

    157,    Wheelwright Machines, subclass 13 for apparatus and processes for
    treating the outer periphery of a rubber tire casing by a slitting or
    machine operation which art (in the absence of this subclass) would
    ordinarily be classified in accord with the particular operation.  (The
    treating of a rubber casing by abrading is classified in Class 451,
    Abrading).

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclass 405 for
    making of shades, blinds, curtains, screens, and venetian blinds.

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, for etching processes not
    otherwise provided for in which one of the manufacturing steps includes a
    chemical etching or physical solvation.  See the class definition of class
    216 for the line between that class and class 29.

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclass for treating and joining by
    means of electrically heated instrumentalities.

    231,    Whips and Whip Apparatus, subclass 1 for machines for making whips.

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), for method of or means for
    perforating a workpiece by one or more cutting tools chosen from a
    plurality of tools constantly available for actuation.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, for metal
    comminution, per se, and in combination with other treatment there provided
    for and see Class 241, section (4) of the class definition.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    for a process of manufacturing nonmetallic articles by shaping and/or
    treating.

    269,    Work Holders, Class 269 is the residual locus for patents to a
    device for clamping, supporting, and/or holding an article (or articles) in
    position to be operated on or treated.  See notes thereunder for other
    related loci.

    300,    Brush, Broom, and Mop Making, for making brushes.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, and see the notes thereto
    for manufacture of sound recordings.

    396,    Photography, appropriate subclasses for photographic apparatus not
    otherwise provided for.

    399,    Electrophotography, appropriate subclasses for roller means to
    accomplish an operation of electrophotography.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, for (1) highway, pathway, or
    walkway structure, per se, or (2) a process or apparatus for making,
    installing, repairing, or maintaining such structure where such structure,
    process, or apparatus is not otherwise classifiable as either (a)
    specifically provided for in other loci or (b) of such general utility as
    to be provided for on that basis.  (See III under Class 404, Class
    Definition, for known collections of such nature and the particular lines
    of demarcation.)  Note particularly subclasses 72+ for process and
    subclasses 83+ for apparatus.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus, for
    apparatus to manufacture by shaping or reshaping plastic materials (e.g.,
    organic plastics, clay, cement, earthenware, powdered metal or glass, etc.)
    including product treating unless such treating is provided for elsewhere.
    The combination of Class 425 apparatus and Class 29 metal working apparatus
    is provided for in Class 29.

    429,    Chemistry: Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process, subclass 49 for regeneration or repair of a battery.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, for process of making radiation images involving chemistry.

    433,    Dentistry, for making dentures.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, for methods of making
    certain electrical devices (e.g., barrier layer type, etc.) utilizing a
    semiconductor substrate.

    483,    Tool Changing, subclass 1 for a process of transferring a tool to
    or from a material treating station or a tool storage means, generally,
    including a Class 29 process combined with transferring the tool used to or
    from the station at which  the Class 29 process occurs; and subclasses 2-69
    for means for transferring a tool to or from a material treating station or
    a tool storage means, generally, including a Class 29 tool combined with
    means to transfer the tool to or from the tool station.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 300+ for processes of producing high temperature (Tc greater
    than 30 K) superconductors.

    602,    Surgery:  Splint, Brace, or Bandage, subclass 900 for methods of
    making bandage structure.

    901,    Robots, appropriate subcollections for industrial robots used in
    metal working operations or in assembly.




CLS 29/1.1
TXT ARMS MAKING:

    Process or apparatus under the class definition specially adapted for
    making an implement of metal for propelling a projectile through a barrel
    or other guideway.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is means for making either a small arms
    weapon or a large gun.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    903,    for a cross-reference art collection directed to making a firearm
    bolt.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, for a small arms weapon, generally.

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, for nonexplosive small arms, e.g.,
    for a spring gun, a bow, or a cross-bow.

    273,    Amusement Devices: Games, subclasses 108+ for game apparatus
    comprising a mechanical gun or projector and subclasses 317+ for game
    apparatus involving the combination of a mechanical gun or projector and a
    game projectile.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclass 308 for a planing
    machine for cutting a spiral groove in the curved inner surface of the
    barrel of a small arms or ordnance device.

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, for a game projectile for a
    mechanical gun or projector (e.g., subclasses 578+ for an arrow, etc.).
    Game apparatus involving the combination of a mechanical gun or projector
    and a projectile is included in Class 473.


CLS 29/1.11
TXT Ordnance:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 1.1 for manufacturing a cannon or a
    similar heavy gun.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    89,     Ordnance, for a large gun, generally.


CLS 29/1.2
TXT PROJECTILE MAKING:

    Process or apparatus under the class definition peculiarly adapted for
    shaping a metal projectile to be propelled through a barrel or other
    guideway.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is means for making a projectile for use in
    either a small arms weapon or a large gun.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, for shaping of metal, generally.

    86,     Ammunition and Explosive-Charge Making, subclasses 10+ for a method
    of making ammunition including assembly therewith of an explosive
    propellant, and subclasses 23+ for a method of otherwise loading ammunition.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, particularly subclasses 501+ for
    projectiles explosively propelled through a gun barrel, cleaning
    projectiles for gun barrels, and dummy projectiles for firearms.

    164,    Metal Founding, for casting to form metal, generally, including
    casting of metal projectiles.

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 416+ for an arrow, per se.


CLS 29/1.21
TXT Hollow shrapnel forming projectile:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 1.2 for making an explosive shell or
    other projectile having a cavity therein to contain a bursting or other
    charge.


CLS 29/1.22
TXT Bullet or shot:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 1.2 peculiarly adapted for shaping a
    small, metal, solid projectile for a small arms weapon, as by a combination
    of metal-working operations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    898.052+ and 898.069, for making a ball for a ball bearing.

    899+,   for ball making, generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, for shaping metal, generally, including shaping to
    form a projectile.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, etc., subclasses 331+ for
    comminuting of liquid metal.

    164,    Metal Founding, for casting to form metal, generally, including
    casting of a metal projectile.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 5 for processes for formation of particulate material directly
    from a molten or liquid mass, other than glass or metal, e.g., liquid
    comminuting.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 6+ for apparatus for making particulate material (e.g., shot,
    etc.) directly from molten material.


CLS 29/1.23
TXT Jacketed or composite:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 1.22 for making a bullet or shot with a
    separate covering over the whole or a part thereof.


CLS 29/1.3
TXT CARTRIDGE CASING MAKING:

    Process or apparatus under the class definition peculiarly adapted for
    shaping a metallic case for fixed ammunition.

    (1)     Note.  "Fixed ammunition" comprises an assembly including a
    projectile and propellant.

    (2)     Note.  The "casing" of this subclass may be referred to as a
    "shell" or as a "hull".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 253.1+ for deforming by extruding,
    particularly subclasses 264+ for the forming of a hollow product and
    subclasses 343+ for push-drawing to form a cup or shell.

    86,     Ammunition and Explosive-Charge Making, for shaping metallic cases
    of fixed ammunition in forming ammunition therewith.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 464+ for cartridge cases.

    413,    Sheet Metal Container Making, for making a container of metal
    involving plural distinct metal working operations, generally.


CLS 29/1.31
TXT Heading:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 1.3 for flattening, flanging, and
    indenting the closed end of a metal tube to adapt it for use as a rim or
    center fire cartridge.


CLS 29/1.32
TXT Trimming:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 1.3 for trimming the head, flange,
    primer hole, or mouth of a cartridge case (or shell).


CLS 29/2
TXT BATTERY-GRID MAKING:

    Process or apparatus under the class definition for making a metallic
    "grid" for an electric battery.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    623.2,  for a process of making a battery cell.

    730,    for apparatus peculiar to assembling a storage cell or battery.

    763,    for apparatus peculiar to disassembling a storage cell or battery.

    897.15, for the method of making a grille.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 32+ for battery grid paste applying means.

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 60 for molding apparatus for forming a grid
    or lattice-type product.

    429,    Chemistry: Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process, subclasses 233+ for battery grids and related structure.


CLS 29/2.1
TXT BIAS (I.E., HELICALLY) CUTTING OF TUBULAR STOCK:

    Process or apparatus under the class definition for severing hollow work of
    generally circular or oval cross section by moving work and tool relative
    to each other so as to describe a helical line of severance along the
    surface of the hollow work.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this and indented subclasses is the bias cutting
    of "article-like" work where there is no "supply".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, for a manually supported cutting implement.

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 21.1+ for means to scribe,
    score, or scratch lines on curved surfaces.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclasses 9+ for skiving or splitting of
    leather.

    82,     Turning, subclass 47 for a process under that class definition of
    cutting hollow work while effecting relative rotary movement about an axis
    passing through the work and subclass 82 for the corresponding apparatus.

    83,     Cutting, especially subclass 54 for a process of cutting a hollow
    workpiece, generally, subclasses 178+ for cutting apparatus including a
    tool inside hollow work and subclasses 401+ for means to move work relative
    to tool station.

    142,    Wood Turning, subclasses 23-35 for spiral groove wood turning.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 209.1+ for a veneering lathe.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, for a device for winding the
    product of this subclass.  Note that the combination of such a cutting
    means with a product winding means is to be found in Class 29, subclasses
    2.1+.

    269,    Work Holders, especially subclasses 47+ for means to support work
    while performing a bias cutting operation. The combination of such support
    means with means to sever being classified in Class 29.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, for cutting tubular
    work by a tool that turns about an axis and moves along that axis but has
    no additional motion during operation.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 65+ for a machine for
    generating a thread (or helix) by relative cutter and blank movements.

    451,    Abrading, subclass 48 for a process of grinding a drill, thread,
    reamer, or hob.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for thread cutting by means of a chasing
    cutter, other than as provided for in Class 408.


CLS 29/2.11
TXT Including orbital cutter:

    Apparatus under subclass 2.1 including a cutting means moving, bodily, in a
    predetermined path about the longitudinal axis or extent of work.


CLS 29/2.12
TXT Within stock support:

    Apparatus under subclass 2.11 wherein the cutter orbits about a path
    internally of the work.


CLS 29/2.13
TXT With orbiting strip accumulator:

    Apparatus under subclass 2.11 provided with means to handle the cut work,
    which means also follows a predetermined path about the longitudinal axis
    or extent of the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, for a device for winding the
    product of this subclass.  Note that the combination of such a cutting
    means with a product winding means is to be found in Class 29, subclasses
    2.1+.


CLS 29/2.14
TXT Including means to inflate stock:

    Apparatus under subclass 2.1 including means to inject gas under pressure
    into the work to cause the work to assume a tubular or hollow shape for
    passing onto a work support or mandrel.


CLS 29/2.15
TXT With means to feed stock along support or mandrel:

    Apparatus under subclass 2.1 including means to engage a portion of work
    being internally supported to effect movement or shift of said portion with
    respect to cutting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, for feeding a workpiece, generally,
    and see the search notes therein for other loci of work feeding.


CLS 29/2.16
TXT Single means produces compound motion:

    Apparatus under subclass 2.15 including utilization of a unitary mechanism
    to effect a compound rotary and axial work movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 431+ for apparatus for
    advancing and rotating an elongated article by means adapted to engage the
    article between its ends.


CLS 29/2.17
TXT Endless belt drive means:

    Apparatus under subclass 2.16 wherein the unitary mechanism is a driven
    closed loop engaging the work and causing the work to move.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 170+ for
    endless belt means for advancing material.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses
    202+ and 237+ for an endless drive belt, generally.


CLS 29/2.18
TXT Axially:

    Apparatus under subclass 2.15 including means to effect work movement or
    shift parallel to the extent of the work supporting means.


CLS 29/2.19
TXT Rotatably:

    Apparatus under subclass 2.15 including means to effect work movement or
    shift in a circular or oval path which path lies in a plane transverse to
    the extent of the work support or mandrel.


CLS 29/2.2
TXT With means to rotate and store stock supply:

    Apparatus under subclass 2.1 including means, other than the work being fed
    to support and cause a rotation of work accumulated thereon, from which the
    work is moved onto a work support or mandrel.


CLS 29/2.21
TXT Axis of rotation parallel to support or mandrel:

    Apparatus under subclass 2.2 wherein the supply is rotated in a plane
    perpendicular to the longitudinal extent of the mandrel.


CLS 29/2.22
TXT With means for arcuate shift of mandrel:

    Apparatus under subclass 2.1 including means to pivot the mandrel in a
    plane parallel to the extent of said mandrel.


CLS 29/2.23
TXT Including means to handle produced strip or web:

    Apparatus under subclass 2.1 including means to feed or convey the product
    subsequent to action of the severing means.


CLS 29/2.24
TXT With common adjustment for cutter:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 2.23 including means to vary the
    position of both cutting means and cut-product handling means as an entity.


CLS 29/2.25
TXT Method:

    Process under subclass 2.1.


CLS 29/3
TXT BUCKLE MAKING:

    Process or apparatus under the class definition for making a part of a
    buckle or for assembling that part with another part in the manufacture of
    a buckle.

    (1)     Note. This subclass includes the manufacture of a buckle from a
    rod, wire, plate, or sheet of metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    417,    for a process of manufacture including obtaining plural pieces from
    a unitary piece by dividing the piece from its leading edge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., especially subclasses 163+ for the
    product of this subclass.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, for a method of or
    apparatus for feeding material without utilizing both the leading and
    trailing ends to effect movement of the material.


CLS 29/4
TXT BUTTON-FASTENER MAKING:

    Process or apparatus under the class definition for making a metallic
    device for securing a button having a shank provided with an eye, e.g., a
    shoe button, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    432+,   for a process of assembling with punching, piercing, or reaming a
    part by engagement with a second part.

    512,    for a process of assembling with joining by deforming comprising
    flaring a tube end inserted in the opening of another workpiece.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclass 33 for combined
    apparatus for juxtaposing a button with the bight of a workpiece and
    driving a member through the bight, i.e., through the eye of the button and
    into a fold of the workpiece.


CLS 29/4.51
TXT SHREDDING METAL OR METAL WOOL ARTICLE MAKING:

    Process or apparatus under the class definition, not elsewhere classified,
    (1) for reducing metal to shreds by cutting operations or (2) for
    producing an article of manufacture from metal wool.

    (1)     Note.  Metal wool is defined as metal filaments or threads matted
    into a densely felted mass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    82,     Turning, subclass 1.11 for a process of turning, including cutting
    shavings from a rotating workpiece.

    140,    Wireworking, subclasses 71+ for a machine or process for making an
    article from wire within the class definition.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 185+ for slivering wood as for excelsior
    making.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 11.5+ for a method of metal working and
    heat treatment within the class definition.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, for a process or
    apparatus for reducing metal to smaller particles without imparting a shape
    thereto. See Class 241, section (4), of the main class definition.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 5+ for a process of forming a particulate material directly from
    molten or liquid mass other than glass, e.g., liquid comminuting.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, for a method of forming an article by
    uniting randomly associated metal particles.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 6+ for apparatus for making particulate material directly from
    molten material.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 605 for metallic
    stock in the form of a mass of fibers and subclass 684 for composite
    metallic stock in which an iron-base component is next to a steel component.


CLS 29/4.52
TXT Metal wool making:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 4.51 for producing metal wool.

    (1)     Note.  Metal wool is defined as metal filaments or threads matted
    into a densely felted mass.


CLS 29/4.53
TXT Shaving or longitudinal cutting:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 4.52 wherein the metal wool is produced
    by severing or slicing off thin layers substantially along the long axis of
    a metal workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  Metal wool is defined as metal filaments or threads matted
    into a densely felted mass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 861+ for cutting other than completely through
    work within the class definition.  Also see cross-section art collection
    subclass 906 for chip making.


CLS 29/4.54
TXT Soap-pad making:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 4.53 whereby the produced metal wool is
    further processed to form a matted mass containing soap which mass is
    generally used for cleaning purposes.

    (1)     Note.  See search note under subclass 4.55.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.56,   for a process or apparatus for bundling metal wool to produce a
    soap pad.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 104.90+ for a
    cleaning tool (e.g., a pad) coated or impregnated with material supply.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 35+ for a coating machine having
    means to cut the work and subclass 44 for coating machine having means to
    deform work.


CLS 29/4.55
TXT Metal wool bundling:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 4.51 wherein metal wool is shaped into
    a longer mass generally to produce an article of manufacture.

    (1)     Note.  Metal wool is defined as metal filaments or threads matted
    into a densely felted mass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, for a method or apparatus for deforming a
    self-shape-sustaining metal workpiece within the class definition.


CLS 29/4.56
TXT Soap-pad making:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 4.55 wherein the metal wool bundle is
    further processed to form a matted mass containing soap which mass is
    generally used for cleaning purposes.

    (1)     Note.  See search notes under subclass 4.54.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.54,   for process or apparatus for making metal wool by a cutting
    technique and further producing a soap pad therefrom.


CLS 29/4.6
TXT CORD-HEDDLE MAKING:

    Process or apparatus under the class definition for fabricating a thread
    guide of a loom's shed forming mechanism from strand-like textile material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, for an operation of that class used in making a
    textile guide, such as a cord heddle.

    139,    Textiles: Weaving, and especially subclasses 93+ for a loom
    employing a heddle, or for a heddle, per se.

    140,    Wireworking, subclass 72 for the making of a wire heddle or heddle
    eye.

    163,    Needle and Pin Making, for making a needle eye which will serve as
    a guide to a textile strand.


CLS 29/5
TXT COTTER-PIN MAKING:

    Process or apparatus under the class definition for forming a split key not
    provided for elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for a process of or apparatus for making a paper-fastener.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclasses 71+.

    72,     Metal Deforming, for bending, or bending and cutting, without an
    additional operation not provided for in that class.

    140,    Wireworking, subclasses 82 and 87 for wire clip and hairpin making.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, for a process of or
    apparatus for feeding material without utilizing both the leading and
    trailing ends to effect movement of material.


CLS 29/6.01
TXT CRANKSHAFT MAKING APPARATUS:

    Means under the class definition for bending, forging, or otherwise
    manufacturing or treating an axial member which has at least one portion
    thereof adapted for applying torque thereto for changing reciprocating
    motion into circular motion or vice versa.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    888.08, for a process of making or treating a crankshaft.

    888.1,  for a process of making or treating a camshaft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 298+ for a process or apparatus of
    twisting a crankshaft beyond its elastic limit.


CLS 29/6.1
TXT EXPANDED METAL MAKING:

    Process or apparatus under the class definition, not elsewhere classified,
    for forming apertures in sheet material and thereafter deforming the
    apertured portion of the sheet to (1) increase the area of, or change the
    shape of, the aperture and (2) increase the length or width of the sheet.

    (1)     Note.  Apertures may be formed by cutting, punching, casting,
    drilling, milling, grinding, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Deforming may include, for example, bending, corrugating,
    forging, rolling, or drawing.

    (3)     Note.  Included herein is expanding of sheet material by
    simultaneously perforating and deforming the sheet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    896.6+, for a process of making multiple perforations in a metallic sheet,
    tube, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, for shaping metal, other than expanded metal
    making, especially subclasses 185+ for cutting and deforming by a "flying"
    tool and subclasses 203+ for cutting and rolling.

    83,     Cutting, for cutting operatures in a sheet preliminary to expanded
    metal making.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclass 157  for bonding of multiple parts
    at spaced offset points into a single member and shaping the member to move
    the parts apart at the nonbonded areas.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 596+ for
    metallic stock having an aperture or cut.


CLS 29/6.2
TXT By use of reciprocating perforator:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 6.1 including a tool which travels back
    and forth in a straight line to form the aperture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 613+ for a cutting machine having a cutter
    having simple rectilinear reciprocating motion only and subclass 697 for a
    cutting machine having a reciprocating tool.


CLS 29/7
TXT EYEBOLT OR HOOK MAKING:

    Process or apparatus under the class definition for making an eyebolt or a
    hook comprising more than bending with incidental cutting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, for bending a rod into the form of a hook or an
    eyebolt with incidental cutting.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, subclasses 11+ for combined operations for making a bolt and
    subclasses 57+ for combined machines for making a bolt.


CLS 29/7.1
TXT FENCE BARB MAKING:

    Process or apparatus under the class definition for making pointed elements
    for subsequent attachment to fence wire, or for striking up pointed
    projections from fence stock material itself.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    140,    Wireworking, subclasses 58+ for a process of or apparatus for
    making and applying wire barbs to a wire strand, particularly, subclass 66
    for applying barbs of sheet metal to a wire strand.

    256,    Fences, subclasses 2+ for barbed fences including barbed strands or
    fabric.


CLS 29/7.2
TXT By use of reciprocating cutter or die:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 7.1 which travel back and forth in a
    straight line and directly contact the work to produce the fence barbs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 613+ for a cutting machine including a cutter
    with simple rectilinear reciprocating motion only and subclass 697 for
    reciprocable type tools, per se.


CLS 29/7.3
TXT By use of rotary cutter or die:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 7.1 wherein the tool which directly
    contacts the work to produce the fence barb is mounted on a rotatable
    cylindrical member.


CLS 29/8
TXT FINGER-RING FORMING OR SIZING:

    Process or apparatus under the class definition for forming a finger ring
    by die cutting a flat ring from a disk and subsequently swaging or die
    shaping it into the desired form or for stretching or contacting a ring by
    use of a die.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    896.4+, for a process of making jewelry, generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    63,     Jewelry, subclasses 15+ for a finger ring.

    72,     Metal Deforming, especially subclass 377 for a process of deforming
    metallic work with attenuation, thickening, elongating, or shortening of
    the work and subclass 379.2 for a process of deforming sheet metal.

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 57 for a mold for casting a ring-type
    product, e.g, a finger ring, etc.


CLS 29/9
TXT FISHHOOK MAKING:

    Process or apparatus under the class definition for making a fishhook,
    including shaping, pointing, or barbing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, for a method of or
    apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing both the leading and
    trailing ends to effect movement of the material.


CLS 29/10
TXT GEM AND JEWEL SETTING:

    Process or apparatus under the class definition for cutting a socket for a
    gem or jewel or for securing the gem or jewel in the socket.

    (1)     Note. This subclass includes jewel holders, feeding devices for
    jewel-setting machines, jewel-burnishing devices, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for process or apparatus for forming a finger ring or for sizing a
    finger ring.

    896.4+, for a process of making jewelry, generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    63,     Jewelry, subclasses 26+ for a "setting" in which a gem is to be set.

    81,     Tools, subclass 7 for a watchmakers jewel setting tool.

    125,    Stone Working, subclass 35 for a work support for stone working.

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclass 114 for electrolytic methods of
    setting or mounting gems.


CLS 29/11
TXT HINGE MAKING OR ASSEMBLING:

    Process or apparatus under the class definition for manufacturing a part of
    a hinge or for assembling that part with another part in manufacturing a
    hinge.


    (1)     Note.  The manufacturing operations of this subclass are mainly die
    cutting, milling, or broaching to finish interlocking parts, bending a
    sleeve, or inserting a pintle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for similar process or apparatus peculiar to making a buckle.

    437+,   for a method of assembling with retaining clearance for motion
    between the assembled parts by deforming interlocking structure.


CLS 29/12
TXT LACING-STUD MAKING:

    Process or apparatus under the class definition for making a lacing stud
    from a metal rod, metal wire, or specially-prepared metal stock.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, for stressing metal beyond its elastic limit,
    generally.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 110+ for apparatus to make a composite from a preform and means
    shaping fluent plastic stock and subclass 807 for lace tipping.


CLS 29/13
TXT PAPER-FASTENER MAKING:

    Process or apparatus under the class definition for making a member
    intended to be inserted in an opening in a paper sheet to secure something
    to that paper sheet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for cotter-pin making.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclasses 71+ for staple
    making.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, for a method of or
    apparatus for feeding material without utilizing both the leading and
    trailing ends to effect movement of the material.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclasses 82+ for combined
    apparatus for forming and driving a member, e.g., nail.


CLS 29/14
TXT PLOW OR CULTIVATOR IRON, MAKING:

    Process or apparatus under the class definition for making that portion of
    a ground turning or stirring implement that comes in direct contact with
    the ground to effect work thereon.

    (1)     Note.  Also included herein is a process of making ancillary plow
    structure, such as a clevis.

    (2)     Note.  A plow "iron" may be called a "share", a "point", or a
    "sweep".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    891+,   for a process of making an agricultural device, generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 470+ for a die for forging generally,
    including forging a plow or a cultivator iron.


CLS 29/15
TXT PUDDLERS' BALLS MAKING:

    Process or apparatus under the class definition for manufacturing a solid,
    generally spherical member intended to be used in molten metal, e.g., to
    assist in refining of metal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, etc., for a process of treating
    metal in the molten state.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, especially subclasses 227+ for means for
    separating metal in a molten mass from undesired material.


CLS 29/16
TXT RAILWAY-CHAIR MAKING:

    Process or apparatus for manufacturing a metal block intended to support
    and hold a railway track with respect to a crosstie.

    (1)     Note.  Manufacture of structure relating to a railway chair, e.g.,
    a clip for holding a chair to a rail, is included herein.


CLS 29/17.1
TXT FOIL OR OTHER THIN SHEET-METAL MAKING OR TREATING:

    Process or apparatus under the class definition for manufacturing or
    modifying small thickness sheet metal, e.g., foil, not provided for in
    another class.

    (1)     Note.  The lines existing between Class 29, subclasses 17.1+, and
    Class 72, Metal Deforming, are as follows:

            Class 72 takes (1) a process or apparatus for rolling sheet metal
    whether a sheet, strip, pack, or otherwise, or (2) a process or apparatus
    for rolling sheet metal whether a sheet, strip, pack, or otherwise when
    combined with any nonrolling operation acceptable in Class 72.

            Class 29 takes (1) a process or apparatus for manufacturing metal
    foil other than by rolling and (2) process or apparatus for rolling sheet
    metal when combined with another operation, which combination is not
    classified in Class 72.

    (2)     Note.  "Foil" is film-like metal, generally less than 0.010 inches
    thick which, because of its frailty must be handled much like a sheet of
    paper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for a machine for performing a combination of operations on a strip.

    81.1+,  for a process or apparatus for removing or preventing scale.

    527.1,  for a process including applying or shaping of fluent material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, and see (1) Note above.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, for metal or nonmetal coating apparatus combined
    with various treating means such as cutting or deforming.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 476 for continuous casting combined with
    rolling.

    427,    Coating Processes, for a method of coating a substrate, generally.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 606+ for
    metallic foil or filament smaller than 6 mils.


CLS 29/17.2
TXT Method:

    Process under subclass 17.1.


CLS 29/17.3
TXT Clad or other composite foil or thin metal making:

    Process under subclass 17.2 comprising manufacturing an article having
    plural layers or distinct components joined together.

    (1)     Note.  At least one layer or component must be metallic and that
    layer or component must be altered for classification in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  In a process of this subclass, any two layers or components
    must have different characteristics.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    527.1+, for applying or shaping of fluent material to a substrate in
    forming a composite product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 240+ for a method of producing a
    reaction coating on a solid metal substrate wherein one component of the
    reaction coating comes from the metal, and subclass 127 for a method under
    that class definition of heat treating a metal composite.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, for a
    process or apparatus for adhesive bonding of a self-sustaining web or
    article.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 31+ for a method under that class
    definition of forming a composite article.

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 76+ for making foil by
    electroforming.


    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, for a process or apparatus for
    metallurgically bonding self-sustaining preforms together.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 241+ for a process under that class definition of producing
    composite, plural part or a multilayered article.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, subclasses 3+ for a method of making a
    sheet of indefinite length.

    427,    Coating Processes, for producing a coated foil, generally.


CLS 29/17.4
TXT With assembling or disassembling of a pack:

    Process under subclass 17.2 including (1) superposing plural work portions
    for metalworking or treating which work portions are to be subsequently
    separated to yield plural manufactured articles or (2) effecting or
    augmenting separation of superposed articles that have been, while
    superposed, subjected to metalworking or treatment.

    (1)     Note.  The pack may be made by folding a single sheet along a line
    if the work portions are to be severed later from the rest of the pack.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18.1,   for apparatus for opening or separating a pack.

    403.3+, for a process of mechanical manufacture including separating
    materials one from another.

    426.1+, for a process of disassembling, especially subclass 426.4 for
    disassembling by alteration or destruction.

    700+,   for apparatus for disassembling, generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    125,    Stone Working, subclass 24 for a process or apparatus for
    separating mica or mica-like substance along its plane of cleavage.

    428,    Stock Metal or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 577+ for a
    metallic intermediate article.


CLS 29/17.5
TXT Using transitory solid cover material:

    Process under subclass 17.4 including superposing a solid member over a
    work portion to facilitate  metalworking or treating of the work portion,
    which solid member does not form part of one of the manufactured articles.

    (1)     Note.  The solid cover material generally constitutes some portion
    of the pack and may itself become a manufactured product but not in the
    course of the claimed invention.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    423+,   for a method of diverse mechanical manufacturing utilizing
    transitory attached or separate material.


CLS 29/17.6
TXT Including bond prevention treatment:

    Process under subclass 17.4 including applying material to a work portion
    or performing a particular operation on the work portion to stop welding or
    adhesion between layers or components of the pack.

    (1)     Note.  The bond preventing material is generally characterized as
    "anti-bond" or "prevent-weld".

    (2)     Note. The bond prevention material may comprise material that is
    normally used as a lubricant applied directly to the work, rather than
    merely to the working apparatus or machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    424,    for a process of mechanical manufacture including use of a
    temporary protective coating, generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclass 118 for a metallurgical bonding
    process under that class definition which uses bond inhibiting separating
    material.


CLS 29/17.7
TXT Disassembling of a pack:

    Process under subclass 17.4 including effecting or augmenting separation of
    superposed articles that have been, while superposed, subjected to
    metalworking or treatment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18.1,   for apparatus for opening or separating a pack.

    403.3+, for a process of mechanical manufacture including separating
    materials one from another.

    426.1+, for a process of disassembling, especially subclass 426.4 for
    disassembling by alteration or destruction.

    700+,   for apparatus for disassembling, generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    125,    Stone Working, subclass 24 for a process or apparatus for
    separating mica or mica-like substance along its plane of cleavage.


CLS 29/17.8
TXT By shaving or longitudinal cutting:

    Process under subclass 17.2 including severing or slicing off a layer
    substantially along the length of the axis of a metal workpiece.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    82,     Turning, for shaving off a rotating workpiece.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 861+ for a process of cutting other than
    completely through work thickness or through work within the class
    definition.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 288+ for shaving off
    a single layer of a workpiece.


CLS 29/17.9
TXT Using transitory material:

    Process under subclass 17.2 wherein material is attached to or associated
    with the work to facilitate the manufacturing, which material forms no part
    of the manufactured product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    423+,   for a method of diverse mechanical manufacturing which utilizes
    transitory attached or associated separate material.


CLS 29/18.1
TXT Means for opening or separating a pack:

    Apparatus under subclass 17.1 for breaking or pulling apart a group of
    superposed workpieces thereby to yield plural manufactured articles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403.3+, for a process of mechanical manufacture including separating
    materials one from another.

    426.1+, for a process of disassembling, especially subclass 426.4 for
    disassembling by alteration or destruction.

    700+,   for apparatus for disassembling, generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    125,    Stone Working, subclass 24 for a process or apparatus for
    separating mica or mica-like substance along its plane of cleavage.


CLS 29/20
TXT SPECTACLE-FRAME MAKING:

    Process or apparatus under the class definition for manufacturing a member
    intended to hold or otherwise support a lens of eyeglass structure.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is structure for assembling a pair of
    spectacles or for manufacture of a portion thereof, such as a "temple" or
    "bridge-piece".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    434+,   for a process of assembling or joining while retaining clearance
    for motion between assembled parts, as in assembling a temple with the lens
    holding portion of a spectacle frame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 61 for grinding to make an article of
    glass, including making and grinding a lens.

    72,     Metal Deforming, for bending metal, generally, especially
    subclasses 362+ for the process.

    140,    Wireworking, subclasses 71+ for a process or apparatus for making
    an eyeglass frame of wire, under that class definition.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    subclasses 239+ for a method including shaping or molding to form or reform
    a shaped article, including molding of an eyeglass frame or lens.

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclasses
    41+ for spectacles or eyeglasses, subclass 177 for a process of making an
    ophthalmic lens not elsewhere provided for (see the appended notes to this
    subclass for a field of search for this subject matter), and subclass 178
    for a process of making spectacles or eyeglasses not elsewhere provided
    for, securing an eyeglass lens to a support, or of assembling lens in
    spectacle frames.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus, for
    making an article of plastic, generally, including making a portion of an
    eyeglass frame or a lens.


CLS 29/20.1
TXT SPIRAL CUTTING OF FLAT STOCK:

    Process or apparatus under the class definition for severing a strip or
    strap from sheet material, in substantially continuous fashion, by relative
    rotation of a tool and work about an axis while moving toward or away from
    each other during the severing operation.

    (1)     Note.  The line of severance described by the cutting operation of
    this subclass comprises a flat spiral in the plane of the sheet material.

    (2)     Note.  The cutting tool is usually at a fixed point or location
    with respect to which point the work is moved.

    (3)     Note.  The combination of spiral cutting (here classified) with
    winding and reeling (classified, per se, in Class 242, Winding, Tensioning,
    or Guiding) is to be found in this subclass.

    (4)     Note.  A subsequent cutting, either to length or desired cross
    section shape, of the severed strip or strap will not bar classification
    here if otherwise within the above definition.

    (5)     Note.  This subclass includes working of sheet material other than
    metal (e.g., rubber, cloth, leather, etc.) as set forth above to produce
    thongs, lacing, belting, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.1+,   for bias cutting tubular stock and see the notes thereunder for
    other cutting loci involving relative rotation between tool and work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    82,     Turning, for cutting of rotating work, generally.

    142,    Wood Turning, subclasses 23-35 for a process or apparatus for
    cutting of a rotating workpiece of wood.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 209.1+ for a veneer lathe.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, for a fastener which may have been produced by a
    rotation of a workpiece.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 592 for metallic
    stock which is helical or has a helical component.


CLS 29/21
TXT STEREOTYPE-PLATE FINISHING:

    Process or apparatus under the class definition for finishing a plane or
    curved stereotype plate by beveling the edge, grooving, or finishing a rib
    on the back of a plate.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus for casting a stereotype plate combined with a
    finishing mechanism which operates on a plate while still associated with a
    casting surface is classified in Class 164, Metal Founding, subclass 140.

    (2)     Note.  Apparatus for merely planing the back of a stereotype plate
    are classified in Class 409, Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses
    288+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclasses 368+ for a printing member, per se.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 28+ for a process of abrading.


CLS 29/21.1
TXT MEANS FOR FORMING CLENCH-TONGUE (E.G., FOR TIEBAND):

    Apparatus under the class definition, including a punch for cutting out a
    flap from a sheet metal work portion, and including means to bend the flap
    to engage and secure plural portions in assembled relation.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a device which cuts and bends the tongue by
    either single or plural means.

    (2)     Note.  Included here is a tongue cutting and clenching device, not
    otherwise classified, which acts on a single work piece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243.5+, for overedge assembling apparatus.

    432+,   for a process of assembling combined with punching, piercing or
    reaming a part by engagement with the surface of a second part.

    509+,   for a process of assembling including joining by deforming by
    overedge clamping of a seated part.

    798+,   for apparatus for assembling including means to drive a
    self-piercing work part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses appropriate to cutting and deforming.

    413,    Sheet Metal Container Making, subclasses 1+ for a method of
    fabricating a sheet metal can.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 350+ for a similar device which operates on
    a nonmetallic material.


CLS 29/22
TXT TIRE UPSETTING, WITH CUTTING, PUNCHING, ETC.:

    Combined process or apparatus under the class definition including use of a
    metal tire thickening device combined with use of a press for cutting or
    shaping the tire or tire blank.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    894.37, for a process of making a metal tire for a wheel, other than in the
    manner of this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, especially subclass 294 for cutting combined with
    upsetting, generally, and subclasses  300 and 301+ for a pair of
    individually nondeforming clamps used to upset a metal strip other than a
    metal tire strip.


CLS 29/23.1
TXT TOOTH-CYLINDER MAKING APPARATUS (E.G., TEXTILE WORKING CYLINDER):

    Means under the class definition for forming, applying, and securing
    metallic teeth to the surface of a cylindrical body such as a cylinder for
    textile machinery.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    891+,   for making a device for use in agriculture, generally.

    895     and 895.31, for a process of  manufacturing a roller having teeth
    assembled thereto or formed thereon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclass 77 for combined
    apparatus for applying a member, e.g., card teeth, and bending the end of
    such member.

    492,    Roll or Roller, subclasses 30+ for a roll or roller with surface
    indentation, projections, or slits having plural alignment of slits.


CLS 29/23.51
TXT IMPELLER MAKING APPARATUS:

    Machines or tool for manufacturing a rotor for a turbine, fan, pump, etc.

    (1)     Note.  A conveyor screw is considered to be an "impeller".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    889+,   for a process of manufacturing an impeller.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 367.1+ for a method of making or
    reshaping a metallic tubular member, generally.

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 657+ for a screw type conveyor.

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, subclasses 71+ for a runner
    having a spirally arranged blade or fluid passage.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., impellers), for an impeller, per se.


CLS 29/24
TXT TYPE FINISHING AND GROOVING:

    Process or apparatus for breaking a "jet" (or "sprue line") from cast
    printing type, removing irregularities (such as a pin or burr) from
    printing type, or for grooving printing type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    413,    for a method of obtaining plural pieces from a unitary blank by
    breaking through a weakened portion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    199,    Type Casting, subclasses 81+ for a machine for casting type
    combined with mechanism for finishing.  See Class 409, Gear Cutting,
    Milling, or Planing, subclass 293 for a process of and subclasses 312 and
    901 for apparatus for cutting to shape a metallic printing surface.

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, subclasses 1+ for a method of
    breaking, generally, and subclasses 93+ for apparatus for breaking,
    generally.


CLS 29/24.5
TXT VENETIAN BLIND ASSEMBLING:

    Process or apparatus under the class definition (including a work holder)
    for assembling a venetian blind.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33+,    for apparatus including an assembling device combined with a
    shaping device, not otherwise classified, and see the notes to that
    subclass (33) for the lines with other classes.

    592+,   for a method of assembling combined with one shaping, not otherwise
    classified, especially subclasses 433+ for a method of assembling by
    stringing and subclasses 559+ for a method of assembling including work
    holding.  See the notes to that subclass (592) for the lines with other
    classes.

    700+,   for apparatus for assembling, generally, especially subclass 241
    for apparatus for assembling by stringing and subclasses 281.1+ for
    apparatus for assembling including use of a workholder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    65 for a process of making a venetian blind ladder by laminating.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclass 166.1
    for a venetian blind, per se, and see that definition for the definition of
    a "venetian blind".

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, for apparatus for inserting a
    member, e.g., a nail or staple, into a venetian blind part, particularly
    subclasses 19+ and 99+ for combined apparatus for handling of a workpiece
    and for driving a member.

    269,    Work Holders, for a work holder, per se, not otherwise classified,
    and see the notes to that class for the lines with other classes.


CLS 29/25
TXT UMBRELLA-FRAME MAKING:

    Process or apparatus under the class definition for forming or assembling
    an umbrella frame including forging an umbrella rib, shaping, or assembling
    a component of an umbrella frame with another component.

    (1)     Note.  A component of an umbrella frame may be a "rib", a "fork", a
    "notch", a "tip", etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, for a process or apparatus for merely die shaping
    the various elements from sheet material.

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclasses 20+ for an umbrella, or
    component, generally.


CLS 29/25.01
TXT BARRIER LAYER OR SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICE MAKING:

    Process or apparatus under the class definition not elsewhere classified
    comprising manufacturing (1) an electrical component consisting of two
    electrical conductors placed either in contact with each other or separated
    by an interface, which component has a nonlinear resistance characteristic
    as a result of the electrical action of the interface, (2) an electrical
    device which exhibits asymmetrical voltage current characteristic, or (3) a
    device incorporating a nonmetallic electric conductor in which current is
    carried by the movement of ions, which device is other than those
    classified in Class 204, Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses include a miscellaneous
    process or apparatus for making a barrier layer-type device, e.g., a
    contact rectifier, a transistor, or an electrolytic capacitor.

    (2)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses are not limited to the
    manufacture of a barrier layer device where a metal working operation is
    involved, but includes the manufacture of such device from any material
    where no specific class provides for the subject matter claimed.

    (3)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses are heavy in semiconductor
    diverse manufacturing apparatus (e.g., cluster apparatus, etc.) not
    provided for in a specific apparatus class.

    (4)     Note.  Where the patent includes a claim to the product in addition
    to a claim for the process of manufacture, the patent is classified in the
    product class and cross-referenced to the appropriate process class.

    (5)     Note.  In these subclasses are found, inter alia, patents relating
    to the manufacture a barrier layer device by the combination of a step
    which is, per se, classified in another class and a step of subjecting the
    barrier layer device to an electrical current for either forming, testing,
    or aging the device.  The step of electrolytically forming a coating on an
    electrode, without more, is not deemed such an operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for a process or apparatus for making an electric battery grid.

    25.41+, for an electric capacitor making process or apparatus wherein the
    capacitor is not a barrier layer or electrolytic device.

    592+,   for a miscellaneous process of assembly, manufacture or repair,
    particularly, subclasses 592.1+ for a process of making a miscellaneous
    electrical device, of which, subclasses 610.1+ relate to a process of
    making an electrical resistor including metal working, or when not
    otherwise classifiable, subclasses 623.1+ relate to a process of making a
    battery, generally, and subclass 874+ relates to the making of a terminal
    including one to be used with a barrier layer device.

    700+,   for miscellaneous assembly or disassembly apparatus, particularly
    subclasses 729+ and 762+ for assembly or disassembly apparatus for an
    electrical device not proper for a superior subclass in this or another
    class, and subclasses 730+ and 763 for electric battery assembly or
    disassembly apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, for a miscellaneous coating or
    plastic composition such as a ceramic or varnish composition.

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes and non-coating apparatus for
    growing therein-defined single-crystal of all types of materials, including
    barrier layer or semiconductor materials.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, for a process of or
    apparatus for cleaning material such as stock material for a barrier layer
    device.

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, for a process, product, or apparatus for
    treating base stock by an electrolytic process, especially, subclass 213
    for the cleaning or etching of aluminum by an electrolytic method,
    subclasses 183+, 188+, 191+, and 198+ for an electrolytic coating process,
    and subclasses 324+ for the oxide coating of aluminum from an aqueous bath.
     See (1) Note, above.

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, subclass 3 for methods of forming
    a Josephson junction device including a chemical etching step.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 62.2 for an electrolyte for an electrolytic
    condenser or rectifier, subclass 62.3 for a composition for a barrier layer
    device, and subclasses 500+ for an electrically conductive and emissive
    composition which composition may be resistive in nature.

     257,   Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses for an active solid-state device, per se, and see
    (2) Note, above.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    for a process of working, molding, or shaping a miscellaneous plastic
    material, per se, or combined with another operation, especially subclasses
    614+ for a sintering method to make a coated or composite electrical
    article or component; subclasses 104+ for shaping electroconductive
    material; and subclasses 272.11+ for shaping to make an encapsulated
    electrical component including a barrier layer or semiconductor device.

    269,    Work Holders, for a miscellaneous work support.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, for an electrical resistor, per se.

    355,    Photocopying, for a process or apparatus under that class
    definition for using an optical aligning mask, etc.

    356,    Optics: Measuring and Testing, for a process or apparatus for
    testing an optical aligning mask.

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, for a
    process or apparatus under that class definition of using an optical
    aligning mask.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, for Handling of a wafer, per se.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, for stock material which may be
    used in the process or apparatus of this and the indented subclasses.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 58+ for a process of coating, per se,
    wherein the product has utility as an electrical product.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, for a stock material
    product in the form of a single or plural layer web, sheet, strand, or
    fiber; especially subclasses 175+, 190, 193+, 196+, and 365 for such a
    product including mechanically interengaged strand or strand portions
    (e.g., woven, knitted) and subclass 62 for metallic composite in which a
    component has a semiconductor base.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 311+ for a process of making an electrical device by
    means of radiation imagery chemistry.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of making a semiconductor electrical device; see the search
    notes thereunder.

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 181+ and 304+ for a woven or knit fabric.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    for a process or apparatus for making such a component or device.

    505,    Superconductor Technology: Apparatus, Material, Process,
    particularly subclass 329 for methods of making a Josephson junction device
    possessing a high temperature superconductor and subclass 922 for methods
    of making a Josephson junction device possessing a low temperature
    superconductor.


CLS 29/25.02
TXT Barrier layer device making:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 25.01 comprising manufacturing (1) an
    electrical component consisting of two electrical conductors placed either
    in contact with each other or separated by an interface, which component
    has a nonlinear resistance characteristic as a result of the electrical
    action of the interface or (2) a device incorporating a nonmetallic
    electric conductor in which current is carried by the movement of ions,
    which device is other than those classified in Class 204, Chemistry:
    Electrical and Wave Energy.

    (1)     Note.  See the search notes under Class 29, subclass 25.01.


CLS 29/25.03
TXT Electrolytic device making; e.g., capacitor:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 25.02 comprising manufacturing a device
    incorporating a nonmetallic conductor in which current is carried by the
    movement of ions, which device is other than those classified in Class 205,
    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions.

    (1)     Note.  See the search notes under Class 29, subclass 25.01.


CLS 29/25.35
TXT PIEZOELECTRIC DEVICE MAKING:

    Miscellaneous process or apparatus under the class definition for
    manufacturing a piezoelectric device or piezoelectric crystal which is not
    classifiable in a specific class relating to the manufacture of such an
    article.

    (1)     Note.  A piezoelectric device under this definition is a device
    which contains a material which exhibits an electrostatic polarization when
    subjected to mechanical stress or which exhibits a mechanical stress,
    tending to produce a deflection, when subjected to electric stress,
    including provision in combination with means to utilize the piezoelectric
    property of said material.  The material may be crystalline or may not be
    so.  The vast majority of piezoelectric substances are crystalline, but a
    few substances which are not obviously crystalline, such as some barium
    titanate ceramics and some wax-resin electrets (the electrostatic analogue
    of the permanent magnet), exhibit piezoelectric properties. Since, in
    theory, piezoelectricity is attributed to certain types of anisotropy in
    the material, those piezoelectric materials which are not obviously
    crystalline may be regarded as having a quasi-crystalline structure and the
    expression piezoelectric crystal is adopted, for convenience of expression,
    as being generic to both types of material in the shaped (as distinguished
    from the bulk) state where the shape (e.g., plate, AT cut) is disclosed as
    being significant to the piezoelectric property of the material.  In
    summary:

            Piezoelectric
    material =  material in bulk.
    Piezoelectric
    crystal   =  material shaped for piezo-
                    electricity.

            Piezoelectric
    device    =    piezoelectric material or
                           crystal + utilization means
    (e.g., electrodes holder).

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is not limited to the manufacture of a
    piezoelectric device by a metal working operation, but includes the
    manufacture of such a device by any type of operation where no other class
    provides for the entire subject matter claimed.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass includes patents relating to the manufacture
    of the type of piezoelectric devices classified in Class 310, Electrical
    Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 8+.  Other classes which provide
    for piezoelectric devices may also include methods and apparatus for
    manufacturing the piezoelectric devices in those other classes.  For a list
    of such other classes consult the search notes below.

    (4)     Note.  Where a patent includes a claim to the piezoelectric device
    in addition to a claim to the process of or apparatus for manufacturing the
    piezoelectric device, the patent is classified in the article class and
    cross-referenced here.

    (5)     Note.  A process or apparatus for manufacturing a piezoelectric
    device when claimed in combination with a method or apparatus for using
    said piezoelectric device, is not classified in this subclass, but is
    classified in the class which pertains to the use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25.41+, and the classes referred to in the search notes of that subclass
    for a method or apparatus for manufacturing an electric condenser which
    method or apparatus may be useful in the manufacture of a piezoelectric
    device.

    592.1+  for a process, not elsewhere classified of manufacturing or
    assembling an electrical conductor or circuit.

    729+,   for miscellaneous apparatus not elsewhere classified for assembling
    electrical apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, for a method or apparatus for sealing a housing or
    envelope which is disclosed as containing piezoelectric crystals and for
    that subject matter where the claims recite merely that the housing
    contains a crystal (as distinguished, for example, from a crystal which is
    mounted within the housing).  Note particularly subclasses 470+ and 239
    where the housing is filled with both an article and fluent material and
    subclasses 403+ and 79+ where the housing is filled with a gas or evacuated
    and closed.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 570 for a piezoelectric transducer
    which couples an alternating current electric circuit and a device having
    mechanical vibrations for testing purposes or for the testing system which
    utilizes such a transducer.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, for a composition useful to coat
    a piezoelectric crystal or device, as for waterproofing.

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes and non-coating apparatus for
    growing therein-defined single-crystal of all types of materials, including
    piezoelectric materials.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, for miscellaneous coating apparatus.  Note
    particularly subclasses 668+ where the coating is under the control of a
    characteristic of the workpiece (as when the coating apparatus is
    controlled by the varying resonant frequency of a piezoelectric crystal
    being coated), subclasses 715+ for vacuum evaporation coating apparatus,
    and subclasses 300+ for projection or spray type coating apparatus.

    125,    Stone Working, for a method or apparatus for shaping (e.g., sawing,
    drilling, surfacing) a piezoelectric crystal which utilizes a cutting tool
    (as distinguished from an abrasive or abradant tool).  Such method and
    apparatus in Class 125 may include determining the crystallographic
    orientation of the crystal.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, for a method or means for
    cleaning a piezoelectric crystal which may include merely treatment in a
    chemical bath or may include a mechanical operation.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    345 provides for differential or pattern etching of piezoelectric
    materials.  Class 156 is also the generic home for a process or apparatus
    for adhesively bonding materials and thus various crystal making steps
    relating to bonding, per se, may be there classified.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 50+ and the
    classes referred to in the search notes of that class for a housing or an
    envelope having means for conducting electricity between the inside and
    outside of the housing.  Included is such housing or envelope as is used
    for piezoelectric crystals.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 181.

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, for an electrical method or
    apparatus for coating a piezoelectric crystal.  Search subclasses 192.1+
    for a method of coating by cathode sputtering, subclasses 193+ for
    electrolytic apparatus, and subclasses 298.01+ for cathode sputtering
    apparatus. Search subclasses 155+, and 164+ for a method of treating a
    compound by electricity or wave energy, such as neutron bombardment or
    X-ray radiation, to produce therein chemical changes which may be
    manifested by associated physical changes.  Such method may be under the
    automatic control of some property of the material being treated or may be
    under manual control.

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 118+ for electrolytic methods of
    applying a coating where an electrolytic and a nonelectrolytic step are
    combined as where copper is electrolytically plated over a chemically
    deposited silver layer.

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, subclass 13 for forming of an
    electrical conductor, e.g., circuit, etc.

    220,    Receptacles, for the structure of housings, casings, and envelopes,
    per se.  Note particularly subclasses 2.1+ where the housing, casing, or
    envelope is of the electric discharge tube or similar (such as
    piezoelectric crystal) type and subclasses 3.2+ where the housing, casing,
    or envelope is of the outlet or junction box type.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 101+ for the method of soldering a
    metal to metal joint, such as the joint between a metallic coating on a
    quartz crystal and an electrode wire, and subclass 903 for an art
    collection of patents directed to a method of bonding metallic and
    nonmetallic part by a metallurgical bond, e.g., a method of joining an
    electrode wire to a quartz crystal.

    250,    Radiant Energy, search subclasses 306+ for methods of testing (as
    distinguished from treating a piezoelectric crystal by subjecting it to
    electronic or ionic rays) and for apparatus for testing or treating a
    piezoelectric crystal by subjecting it to electronic or ionic rays.
    Apparatus for treating piezoelectric crystals in Class 250 may be under the
    automatic control of some property, such as resonant frequency of the
    crystal being treated, or may be under manual control.  Crystal goniometers
    in Class 250 may mark the crystallographic axis on the crystal being tested
    or may position the crystal in a certain orientation with respect to the
    testing ray or may otherwise indicate the crystallographic axis; however,
    crystal goniometers which, in addition, mount the crystal in a holder or
    cut it or perform some operation other than, and in addition, to the
    testing are not classified in Class 250.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 62.9 for piezoelectric compositions.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for a process of crystallizing
    organic compounds, the process being classified with its product.  Note
    particularly subclass 707 for a process of crystallizing organic compounds
    limited to no specific type of compound.  The product of such a process and
    also the seed crystals used in the process are classified as chemical
    compounds. Seed crystals combined with supports are classified as
    crystallizing apparatus in Class 23, subclass 273. Organic piezoelectric
    chemicals, per se, when shaped to claimed configurations where the
    configuration is disclosed as being significant to the piezoelectric
    property of the crystal (e.g., plate, AT cut) are not classified in Class
    260 (see the reference to Class 171, subclass 327, above).  Organic
    chemicals are classified in Class 260, even though claimed as being
    piezoelectric, where the chemical is not claimed as being shaped with
    respect to the piezoelectric property and where it is uncombined with
    piezoelectric structure.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    subclasses 405+ for that class operation by direct application of
    electrical or wave energy to work.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 311+ for
    piezoelectric crystal devices other than those combined with an art device.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 55 for the
    structural combination of a piezoelectric crystal and a space discharge
    device or electric lamp.

    318,    Electricity: Motive Power Systems, subclass 116 for electric motor
    control systems where the electric motor is of the piezoelectric type.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, for a process of or means for
    subjecting a piezoelectric crystal to an electric test as for predicting
    its frequency drift, for determining the polarity of charge produced by
    mechanical stress, or for determining its activity.  Search subclasses
    76.39+ for frequency determination.  Note that indented subclass 76.49
    relates to piezoelectric crystals among other devices.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 73, 139, 156, and 158 for electrical
    oscillator systems utilizing piezoelectric crystals.

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 117+ for frequency modulators which utilize
    a piezoelectric crystal.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 150 for electric
    delay networks utilizing piezoelectric crystals and subclass 187 for
    electric wave filters utilizing piezoelectric crystals.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 31 for methods and
    apparatus for determining the crystallographic axis of a crystal by optical
    means. Crystal goniometers in Class 356 may mark the crystallographic axis
    on the crystal being tested or may position the crystal in a certain
    orientation with respect to the light rays. Methods of determining the
    crystallographic axis which include chemically etching the crystal to
    develop etching pits which can be observed optically are included in
    subclass 31.  Crystal goniometers which, in addition, mount the crystal in
    a holder or cut it or perform some operation other than or in addition to
    the testing are not classified in Class 356.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    230 for light control by a piezoelectric opaque element.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 225+ for
    the step of merely charging or polarizing piezoelectric material.

    366,    Agitating, subclass 127 for method of and apparatus for agitating
    actuated by a piezoelectric device.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave System and Devices,
    subclasses 87+ for echo signaling or object sensing systems which may use a
    piezoelectric transducer, subclasses 118+ and, particularly, subclasses
    157+ for underwater piezoelectric signaling or object sensing transducers,
    and subclass 180 for other piezoelectric signaling or object sensing
    transducers.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 144 for the
    structure of piezoelectric phonograph pickups.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclass 78 for
    piezoelectric crystallography.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, for the structure of a piezoelectric
    microphone.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclass
    173.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 245+ for chemical apparatus for
    producing crystals.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, for inorganic compounds, per se,
    even though claimed as having piezoelectric properties.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 100 for a coating process, per se,
    wherein a product having piezoelectric properties is formed.

    451,    Abrading, for a method or apparatus for abrading the surface of a
    piezoelectric crystal to adjust its resonant frequency.  Such an abrading
    method or apparatus may be under time control or under the control of the
    varying resonant frequency of the crystal being abraded.  Note particularly
    subclasses 32+ for a process of abrading by tumbling, subclass 37 for a
    combined process including tumbling and sand blasting, subclasses 41+ for a
    process of abrading a crystal, subclass 78 for a sandblast machine, and
    subclasses 326+ for a tumbling machine used for abrading.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, for ceramic compositions used as
    dielectrics.

    562,    Organic Compounds, subclass 580 for a process of crystallizing
    Rochelle salt.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, especially subclasses 479 and
    812+ for obtaining hydrocarbons in crystalline form.  See the search note
    in this subclass to Class 260.


CLS 29/25.41
TXT ELECTRIC CONDENSER MAKING:

    Miscellaneous process or apparatus for making an electric condenser which
    is not classifiable in the specific classes relating to the manufacture of
    articles.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses do not include the manufacture
    of electric condensers of the electrolytic type. The patents relating to
    the manufacture of an electrolytic condenser are in Class 29, subclasses
    25.01+, or in the classes referred to in the search notes of that subclass.

    (2)     Note.  This and the indented subclass are not limited to the
    manufacture of electric condensers where a metal working step is involved,
    but include the manufacture of such devices from any material where no
    specific class provides for the claimed subject matter.

    (3)     Note.  Where the patent includes a claim to the article
    manufactured, in addition to claims for the process or apparatus, the
    patent is classified in the article class and cross-referenced to these
    subclasses.

    (4)     Note.  For electric condensers of the type manufactured by the
    process or apparatus of this subclass, under "SEARCH CLASS", see Class 361,
    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 271+.

    (5)     Note.  Work holders are usually classified with the apparatus for
    performing the operation.  Under "SEARCH CLASS", see Class 269, Work
    Holders, for miscellaneous work holders for assembly operations.

    (6)     Note.  Process or apparatus for making a condenser and testing that
    condenser is classified with the art which provides for the manufacturing
    operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17.1+,  for a process or apparatus for forming thin sheet metal and metal
    foil.

    25.01+, and see (1) Note, above.

    33+,    for miscellaneous organized machines adapted to perform a plurality
    of operations upon metal.

    400.1+, for a process for making metallic articles and a process of working
    metal not classified in specific classes.  Note subclasses 592.1+ for
    miscellaneous process of making an electrical device which includes a metal
    working operation.  Subclass 630 provides for a process for making a
    contact or terminal for an electric condenser and other electrical device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 470+ and 239 for a method of or
    apparatus for merely placing a condenser in a container or receptacle and
    filling the container or receptacle with a fluent material.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, for a miscellaneous coating,
    impregnated article or plastic composition.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, for miscellaneous coating apparatus.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, for a
    process for making a condenser where the process recites no more than
    operations of laminating or laminating and impregnating. The lamination may
    be a winding operation.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, for electrolytic and wave
    energy method or apparatus for treating, coating, or forming an article.

    209,    Classifying:  Separating, and  Assorting Solids, subclasses 546+
    for a process or apparatus of testing a group of electric condensers and
    assorting them according to their electrical properties.

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, subclass 6 for forming a capacitor.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, for joining of work portions by soldering,
    welding, or brazing.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 444.1+ for
    simultaneously winding an electrical conductor and dielectric strip to form
    an article such as a condenser without further manufacturing.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    for a process of working, molding, or shaping miscellaneous plastic
    materials, per se, or combined with other operations within the class
    definition.  See Class 264 definitions for the line between this class (29)
    and Class 264.  Some subclasses in Class 264 which are specific to
    production of electrical components or devices are subclasses 104+, 272.11+
    and 615.

    269,    Work Holders, see (5) Note, above.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 60 for a process or
    apparatus for making an electrical test of an electric condenser.  Also see
    (4) Note above.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 271+.  See
    (4) Note, above.

    413,    Sheet Metal Container Making, subclasses 1+ for the method of
    fabricating a sheet metal can.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus, for
    molding apparatus for shaping or reshaping, per se, plastic materials
    (e.g., resins, clay, etc.) or with combined operations not otherwise
    provided for.  See, especially, subclasses 110+ for composite article
    manufacturing involving a preform and fluent material.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 79+ for a coating process, per se,
    wherein the product is a condenser, capacitor, or a subcombination thereof.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, for a stock material
    product in the form of a single or plural layer web or sheet and subclasses
    432+ and 457+ for a plural layer sheet including a layer of metal next to a
    layer of nonmetal material.


CLS 29/25.42
TXT Solid dielectric type:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 25.41 where the condenser being made is
    of the type which includes a solid dielectric material interposed between
    conductive condenser plates.

    (1)     Note.  Search the classes and subclasses referred to in the notes
    to the definition of Class 29, subclass 25.41 for other classes which
    provide for a blank, a process, or apparatus for making electric condensers
    of the solid dielectric type.


CLS 29/26
TXT Drill press:

    Apparatus under subclass 33 for performing various materials treating
    functions, the primary function comprising a cutting operation by a
    rotating axially moving tool and a secondary function comprising either (1)
    a noncutting operation or (2) cutting by milling operation with the same
    milling operation with the same tool which performs the primary cutting
    operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, for a press not elsewhere provided for, particularly,
    subclass 102 for a press combined with other features.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, for a machine for
    cutting by a rotating tool that moves along the tool axis during operation,
    especially, subclasses 20+ for a device of that class which is convertible
    to a cutting operation of another class and subclasses 22+ for a device of
    that class which is combined with structure for performing a cutting
    operation of another class.

    901,    Robots, subcollection 6 for a robot which cooperates with another
    machine.


CLS 29/27
TXT Lathe:

    Apparatus under subclass 33, particularly, a "type of machine"
    characterized by mechanisms for rotating the work while a cutting or
    milling tool is traversing the work, either externally or internally; also
    machines in which the tool is rotated about the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    82,     Turning, for a machine for turning the exterior of a workpiece.


CLS 29/28
TXT Grinding attachment:

    Apparatus under subclass 27 characterized by mechanisms for relatively
    rotating the work and a turning or milling tool and which have in addition
    thereto a grinding mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, for the combination of an abrading machine with a
    nonabrading means.


CLS 29/29
TXT Pulley or wheel:

    Apparatus under subclass 27 specially adapted to turn, face, and bore or
    drill a pulley or a wheel, and, in some instances, to slot the same.  The
    apparatus of this subclass is characterized by the rotation of the work
    about its axis or by the rotation of the tool about the axis of the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    82,     Turning, subclasses 107 and 108.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 20+ for
    a device of that class which is convertible to a cutting operation of
    another class and subclasses 22+ for a device of that class which is
    combined with structure for performing a cutting operation of another class.


CLS 29/30
TXT Planer:

    Apparatus under subclass 33 characterized by a relative reciprocatory
    movement in substantially a straight line between the work and tool, said
    tool being a planing tool, a milling cutter or (in some instances) a drill.


CLS 29/33
TXT PLURAL DIVERSE MANUFACTURING APPARATUS INCLUDING MEANS FOR METAL SHAPING OR
    ASSEMBLING:

    Apparatus under the class definition including (1) two or more diverse
    metal shaping devices, (2) one metal shaping device combined with one or
    more nonmetal shaping devices, or (3) one or more assembling devices
    (classifiable, per se, in subclass 700) combined with a shaping device.

    (.5)    SPECIAL LINE NOTE.  This subclass is intended to collect apparatus
    for metal shaping combined with apparatus for performing another
    manufacturing operation, if that combination is not provided for elsewhere.
    Class 29, subclasses 700-824 of this class have been screened for a
    combination proper for this and the subclasses indented hereunder.  Not all
    classes other than Class 29 have been reviewed for combinations including
    metal shaping means beyond the respective class line; however, the
    following loci have been screened.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, patents whose claimed disclosures include means
    for assembly have been placed in Class 29, subclasses 33+, if they include
    cutting or any other diverse operation.

    83,     Cutting, patents claiming the combination of cutting and assembling
    (in accordance with (3), above, of the subclass definition) have been
    screened from Class 83 and transferred to Class 29, subclasses 33+, except
    for claimed combinations wherein the assembling is limited to orienting,
    and stacking of products resulting from the cutting operation.  This
    combination (cutting, orienting and stacking) is to be found in appropriate
    subclasses of Class 83.

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, for means to force a fastener
    into another member.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus, for
    a combined apparatus including a shaping or reshaping molding means for
    plastic material not otherwise provided for.  The combination of Class 425
    apparatus and metal shaping apparatus is provided for in this subclass and
    the subclasses indented hereunder.

    483,    Tool Changing, subclasses 2-69 for means for transferring a tool to
    or from a material treating station or a tool storage means, generally,
    including "Plural Diverse Manufacturing Apparatus" combined with means to
    transfer the tool to or from the tool station.

    (1)     Note.  The terminology of (1), above, of the subclass definition
    can be read as: means for performing two or more diverse metal shaping
    operations.  Thus read, the language encompasses devices including a
    composite tool as defined in subclass 566, below.  See, also, the
    definitions of terms used, (paragraph III and (2), (3), (4), and (5) Notes
    to the class definition of this class (29).

    (2)     Note.  Diverse apparatus are those apparatus wherein there are two
    or more devices which operate differently on the part or stock and which
    collectively do not fall in any single art classification, e.g., sawing and
    forging, rolling and turning, etc. However, where the two diverse devices
    constitute a hand manipulable tool rather than a machine the combined
    device has been placed in Class 7, Compound Tools.  Plural apparatus which
    operate in the same manner or constitute different phases of a single art
    are found with the single operation, e.g., turning to cylindrically shape
    followed by turning to taper are in Class 82, Turning.

    (3)     Note.  Where the shaping mechanism only operates subsequently to
    fasten or join parts which have been previously assembled, the apparatus
    will be found in Class 29, subclasses 700+, or in the various joining
    classes.

    (4)     Note.  Included here is the combination of means to strip wire and
    means to further modify or treat the wire in other than a manner
    characteristic of Class 140, Wireworking.

    (5)     Note.  The combination of apparatus for plural diverse
    manufacturing (which apparatus falls within the scope of the above
    definition) with apparatus for packaging (which packaging, per se, falls
    within the scope of Class 53) is classifiable in the appropriate subclasses
    of Class 53, Package Making.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    560.1,  for a convertible machine of the vise type, not elsewhere provided
    for.

    592+,   for a related process.

    650,    for plural diverse manufacturing apparatus, including means to
    assemble combined with means to coat.

    700+,   for assembling apparatus, per se, and see (3) Note, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, and see (2) Note, above.

    72,     Metal Deforming, for cutting combined with deforming and for
    deforming of different types of combined with each other.

    83,     Cutting, for a cutting device, per se, for cutting and stacking the
    cut work (product) see (.5) Note, above, for the line and see subclasses
    84+ for a cutting device with means to form or hold a pile of product
    pieces.

    100,    Presses, for a press not elsewhere provided for, particularly,
    subclass 102 for a press combined with other features.

    164,    Metal Founding, for casting means in combination with cutting means
    for trimming the casting, while said casting is associated with the mold,
    or a portion of the mold.  The term "mold" as used here includes (1) the
    core or cores, (2) core-like elements associated with gate portions of the
    casting and used for handling, and (3) conveying means serving to support a
    continuous casting while said casting is still associated with the molding
    means. All other casting in combination with cutting means for trimming the
    casting are classified in Class 29, subclasses 33+.  Further, see
    subclasses 418+ for continuous casting apparatus having roller means
    associated therewith for deforming the continuum as it is cast.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclass 71 for a milling
    machine having a thread or helix milling cutter combined with a nonthread
    milling cutter.

    901,    Robots, subcollection 6+ for a robot which cooperates with another
    machine.


CLS 29/33.2
TXT Slide fastener or slide fastener element:

    Apparatus under subclass 33 for manufacturing by diverse operations a slide
    fastener of the nature indicated under subclass 408, or a working element
    thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    408+,   for a process of making a slide fastener.

    766+,   for apparatus which assembles a slide fastener or a portion thereof.


CLS 29/33.5
TXT Binding or covering and cutting:

    Apparatus under subclass 33 for assembling a first element or portion
    thereof (a binding or covering) around an edge of a second element (a base)
    and into embracing or encompassing relationship with the second element,
    combined with means for cutting  either element, i.e., the binding or
    covering or the base material.


CLS 29/33.52
TXT Cutting covering material only:

    Device under subclass 33.5 having means for cutting only the binding or
    covering material.


CLS 29/34
TXT Forging and bending, cutting or punching:

    Apparatus under subclass 33 adapted to forge or weld metal and also to
    perform one or more of the above-mentioned operations upon the metal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 185+ and 203+ for flexing metal back
    and forth as it is moving along a path.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 70+ for a press not elsewhere provided for
    where there is additional treatment of the material, particularly
    subclasses 94+ for such press in which the additional working is by
    cutting, breaking, piercing, or comminuting.


CLS 29/35.5
TXT With turret mechanism:

    Apparatus under subclass 33 including plural tool and/or plural work
    holding means provided with means to position said holding means.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is a device specific to means to
    securing a tool in the turret and mechanism for mounting the turret upon
    its carriage or upon the lathe bed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 813+ for an assembly of
    general utility, including a turret mechanism for a metal working machine,
    having means to index rotary members, and see the notes thereto.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclass 221 for a milling
    machine having an indexable work support.


CLS 29/36
TXT Multiple turret:

    Apparatus under subclass 35.5 having two or more turrets for carrying the
    tools or the stock.  Nearly all of these machines have tool turrets.


CLS 29/37
TXT Stock turret:

    Apparatus under subclass 563 in which a bar of metal stock of sufficient
    length to form more than one completed article is carried by a rotatable
    turret to the various tools. Multiple-tool holders in these patents are
    usually cam operated and are also provided with one or more rotary tools.


CLS 29/38
TXT Blank turret:

    Apparatus under subclass 563 in which the blank, reduced to substantially
    the length of the finished article, is carried by turret into positions
    which enable it to be operated upon by various tools.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, subclasses 62, 72, 81, 100, 115, 120, 129,135 for machines using
    turret mechanisms for making threaded, headed fastener or washers.


CLS 29/38.9
TXT Endless belt:

    Device under subclass 563 wherein the work conveying means comprises an
    elongated, generally planar, pliant member connected to itself along its
    elongated extent and adapted to move along its elongated extent in an
    orbital path such that work is conveyed as a segment of the member moves
    from a first point to a second; that segment then is guided to move along
    the orbit back to the first point.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 170+ for an
    endless belt work advancing means.


CLS 29/39
TXT Tool turret:

    Apparatus under subclass 35.5 in which some of all of the operating tools
    are carried by a rotatable turret and which are not classifiable in the
    following specific subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclass 35 for
    multiple spindle turret drilling machines.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, subclasses 72 and 81 for turret mechanisms for die tools used in
    making screws and bolts.


CLS 29/40
TXT Rotary tool holder:

    Apparatus under subclass 39 having a rotatable turret which is provided
    with one or more positively-rotated tools.


CLS 29/41
TXT Sliding tool holder:

    Apparatus under subclass 39 having rotatable tool turrets in which the
    tools are mounted upon sliding tool spindles which are thrust forward
    against the blank or stock, usually against the pressure of a spring.


CLS 29/42
TXT Fluid operated:

    Apparatus under subclass 39 having a tool turret which is advanced toward
    and retracted from the work by means of fluid pressure.  In some cases,
    fluid operating mechanisms are employed for actuating the supplemental
    cutting tools, speed controllers, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclass 63 for
    drilling machines having a fluid operated motor to make work move along the
    axis of tool rotation and subclass 130 for drilling machines having a fluid
    operated motor to make a tool move along the axis of tool rotation.

    Cam Operated:
    "Three dot"  Located after subclass 42 subclasses 43 and 44 indented
    hereunder.


CLS 29/43
TXT Longitudinal turret axis:

    Cam-operated apparatus under subclass 39 having a rotatable tool-holding
    turret, the axis of which is disposed parallel to the lathe bed, and which
    is advanced toward and retracted from the work-holding chuck by
    cam-operated mechanisms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclass 64 for
    drilling machines in which there is a cam for feeding the work along the
    tool axis and subclasses 100+ and 129+ for drilling machines in which there
    is a cam for feeding the tool along the tool axis.


CLS 29/44
TXT Transverse turret axis:

    Cam-operated apparatus under subclass 39 having a rotatable tool-holding
    turret, the axis of which is disposed transversely of the lathe bed
    (including both vertical and horizontal axes), and which is advanced toward
    and retracted from the work-holding chuck by cam-operated mechanisms.


CLS 29/45
TXT Lever operated:

    Apparatus under subclass 39 having a rotatable tool turret which is
    advanced toward and retracted from the stock-holding chuck by means of a
    lever or a system of levers, usually hand operated.


CLS 29/46
TXT Rack-and-pinion operated:

    Apparatus under subclass 39 having a rotatable tool turret which is
    advanced toward and retracted from the work-holding chuck by
    rack-and-pinion mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclass 66 for
    drilling machines in which the work is made to move by means including a
    rack and pinion and subclasses 99+ and 135 for drilling machines in which
    the tool is made to move by means including a rack and pinion.


CLS 29/47
TXT Screw operated:

    Apparatus under subclass 39 having a rotatable tool turret which is
    advanced toward and retracted from the stock-holding chuck by a
    screw-feeding mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclass 64 for
    drilling machines in which the work is made to move by means including a
    nut which rotates relative to a screw threaded member and subclasses 100+
    and 129+ for drilling machines in which the tool is made to move by means
    including a nut which rotates relative to a screw threaded member.


CLS 29/48.5
TXT Including rotating and/or locking means:

    Apparatus under subclass 35.5 including means to rotate said holding means
    or means to prevent rotation of such a holding means.


CLS 29/49
TXT Frictional and positive:

    Apparatus under subclass 48.5 wherein the means to prevent or hold against
    rotation include friction, clamping, or wedging action between the turret
    and its carriage as well as a still further positive lock such as a bolt or
    latch.


CLS 29/50
TXT Multiple-tool holder:

    Apparatus under subclass 33 including a single element intended to support
    more than one working member in engagement with a workpiece, either at the
    same or at different times.


CLS 29/51
TXT Laterally movable stock holder:

    Apparatus under subclass 50 having a nonrevolvable tool holder carrying a
    plurality of tools (usually rotary) and a stock holder which is movable
    laterally to present the stock to the various tools.


CLS 29/52
TXT Axial tool and transversely movable slide rest:

    Apparatus under subclass 50 having a nonrevolvable tool holder carrying a
    plurality of tools which is movable transversely of the machine bed and
    having in addition thereto a single tool holder adapted to operate in the
    axial line of the chuck.


CLS 29/53
TXT Rotary tool spindle:

    Apparatus under subclass 52 having nonrevolvable tool holders carrying a
    plurality of tools which are movable transversely of the machine bed and
    having in addition thereto a single tool holder adapted to operate in the
    axial line of the chuck, one or more of said tool holders being provided
    with a rotary tool spindle.  Usually the axial tool is rotatable.


CLS 29/54
TXT Longitudinally and transversely movable:

    Apparatus under subclass 50 having a nonrevolvable tool holder carrying a
    plurality of tools which are adapted to be moved longitudinally of the
    machine bed to bring the tools into operation and transversely of the bed
    to shift the various tools into alignment with the stock or blank holder,
    or vice versa.


CLS 29/55
TXT Rotary tool spindle:

    Apparatus under subclass 54 having a nonrevolvable tool holder carrying a
    plurality of tools provided with one or more positively-rotated tool
    spindles supported in such a manner as to be moved longitudinally of the
    machine bed to bring the tools into operation and transversely of the bed
    to shift the various tools into alignment with the stock or blank holder or
    vice versa.


CLS 29/56
TXT Oscillating tool:

    Apparatus under subclass 50 having a nonrevolvable tool holder carrying a
    plurality of tools which are oscillated about a pivot to place the tools
    into operative position.


CLS 29/56.5
TXT Including machining means:

    Apparatus under subclass 33 including a cutting instrumentality adapted to
    engage work to be treated by a subsequently acting means or to engage the
    product of a previously acting means to mill, cut, turn, bore, drill,
    abrade, broach, file, saw, punch, blank, or plane that work or product.


CLS 29/56.6
TXT And work-holder for assembly:

    Apparatus under subclass 56.5 including a surface which contacts a work
    part to support or hold that part in a desired position while that work
    part is being juxtaposed, associated, or secured to another work part; or
    is being separated from and/or unfastened from another work part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, for a work holding support without an assembly means.


CLS 29/57
TXT Attachment:

    Device under subclass 33 such as special tool holders and tool-operating
    mechanisms which are adapted to be attached to and removed from combined
    machines, usually "automatic lathes", for the purpose of performing some
    special function upon the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    82,     Turning, subclasses 152+.


CLS 29/64
TXT Speed controller:

    Device under subclass 33 for controlling or changing the speed of the
    various parts of automatic machines during the cycle of operations
    performed by the machines.  Most of the speed controllers in this subclass
    are automatically operated.

    (1)     Search this class, subclass 42 for fluid-operated speed controllers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    82,     Turning, subclasses 143+.


CLS 29/65
TXT Carriage stop mechanism:

    Automatic mechanism for stopping the feeding of the carriage which supports
    the turret or multiple tool or stock holder. These mechanisms are usually
    provided with devices for stopping the travel of the carriage at various
    points corresponding to the limit of the operations required by the
    successively-operating tools.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes adjustable stop abutments.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    82,     Turning, subclasses 132+, 137, and 152+ for carriage stop devices
    for lathes.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclass 8 for
    drilling machines including control means energized in response to
    activator stimulated by condition sensor.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclass 343 for a planing
    machine including cutter positioning means and means to effect stopping of
    the positioning means.


CLS 29/76.1
TXT FILING:

    Process or apparatus under the class definition for cutting metal by a hard
    instrument having a series of parallel, sharply ridged surfaces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclass 1 for a machine for roughing leather
    by a filing action and subclass 20 for an implement employed for the same
    purpose.

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclasses 25.1 for a machine
    for filing saws to sharpen them and subclasses 82+ for a machine for filing
    other tools to sharpen them.

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 76.4+ for a manicuring tool which has a file or
    other abrading or polishing surface.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 28.1+ for a pencil sharpening machine
    (i.e., one including movably related cutter and work holder or work guide
    parts) in which the cutter is a file.

    157,    Wheelwright Machines, subclass 13 for a process or apparatus for
    treating the outer periphery of a rubber tire casing by a slitting or
    machining operation which art, in the absence of this subclass, would
    ordinarily be classified in accord with the particular operation.  See
    Class 451, Abrading, for roughening a rubber tire casing by an operation of
    that class.

    168,    Farriery, subclass 48.1 for a tool including a file for cleaning
    and trimming the hoof in fitting it for the shoe.

    433,    Dentistry, subclass 144 for a file particularly adapted for cutting
    tooth structure or bone and gum tissue adjacent to or in the mouth.

    451,    Abrading, for abrading to shape a workpiece.


CLS 29/76.2
TXT Of key article:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 76.1 for cutting an implement provided
    with notches and grooves wherein the implement is insertable into and
    capable of opening and closing a lock.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 81+ for a process or
    apparatus for producing a key by milling.


CLS 29/76.3
TXT Continuous band type:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 76.1 wherein the instrument comprises
    an endless belt.

    (1)     Note.  The endless belt or band of this subclass is generally
    composed of a single piece of flexible material but may consist of a number
    of elements such as in link-type endless belt of loop.


CLS 29/76.4
TXT Reciprocating type:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 76.1 wherein the instrument moves in a
    back and forth motion.


CLS 29/77
TXT File-blank stripper:

    Process or apparatus for preparing file blanks by filing the surfaces of
    the rough blanks.

    (1)     Note.  Machines for grinding the surfaces of file blanks are
    classified in Class 451, Abrading.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclasses 12+ for a machine
    for forming a rib or teeth in making a file or a rasp and see the notes
    thereto for other file forming.

    403,    Joints and Connections, for means connecting a handle to a tool
    wherein only such part of the handle and tool is included as cooperates to
    effect the connection.


CLS 29/81.01
TXT SCALE REMOVER OR PREVENTOR:

    Process or apparatus under the class definition for removing metallic
    oxide, sulfide, or a similar metallic surface deposit from metal article,
    strip, sheet, and bar or for preventing such a surface deposit from
    building up.

    (1)     Note.  The scale removed from the metal is not foreign matter as
    removed by the apparatus of Class 15, Brushing, Scrubbing, and General
    Cleaning, but is a surface deposit having a metallic component such as
    magnetic oxide formed on the surface of iron when heated for processing.

    (2)     Note.  Preventing metallic surface deposits by modifying
    environment in contact with metal is classified in Class 422, subclasses 7+.

    (3)     Note.  Removal must be by mechanical means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

     15,    Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, for related apparatus,
    particularly, subclasses 77 and 88 for brushing machines for sheets, bars,
    and plates.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 39 and 40 for a step or means for
    performing the separation or removal from the work material of all
    substances which may be present thereon and distinguishable from the work
    material, per se, before, during, or after the deforming operation.

    83,     Cutting, subclass 168 for device under the class definition wherein
    means are provided to remove foreign matter from the work or tool.

    114,    Ships, subclass 222 for devices adapted to cleaning, painting, or
    scraping a ship's hull or preventing the growth and deposit of foreign
    matter thereon.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 72+ for apparatus for combined
    cleaning and coating of metal.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, for a miscellaneous
    process of cleaning metal including metal pickling.

    148,    Metal Treatment, appropriate subclasses for cleaning or pickling
    processes combined with significant heat treatment of metal to modify or
    maintain the internal physical structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical
    properties of metal.  See section III, A, of the Class 148 definition for a
    description of what constitutes significant heat treatment.

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 210+  for combined processes of
    metal cleaning and electrolytic methods of cleaning metal.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 164+ for a process for preparing
    metal parts for joining.

    451,    Abrading, for a process or apparatus of cleaning by use of an
    abradant.

    510,    Cleaning, Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, for cleaning
    compositions, including detergents, particularly subclasses 245+ for scale
    removing and metal cleaning compositions; this class also provides for
    processes involving the mere use of such compositions.


CLS 29/81.02
TXT For hollow workpiece:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 81.01 for removing scale from the
    surfaces of a tubular or open cylindrical article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 88 for a
    machine having a cleaning instrument of the brush or broom type especially
    adapted for cleaning wire, rods, or tubes.


CLS 29/81.021
TXT Interior surface:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 81.02 which removes scale from the
    inwardly facing surface of the hollow article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 88 for a
    machine having a cleaning instrument of the brush or broom type especially
    adapted for cleaning wire, rods, or tubes.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 22.1+ for a
    process which includes treating work such as bottles, tubes, or other work
    having cavities by application of the treating agent to the interior
    surfaces.


CLS 29/81.03
TXT Rolling deformation or deflection:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 81.01 wherein a plurality of roll
    elements are utilized to bend or misshape the workpiece causing scale to
    break away from the surface thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 127 for apparatus and methods in which
    metal is worked by bending it back and forth and proceeding with such
    working continuously along the metal to treat successive portions
    similarly, i.e., metal flexing, per se.


CLS 29/81.04
TXT For wire or rod:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 81.03 which removes scale from a
    slender elongated flexible (wire) or inflexible (rod) member.


CLS 29/81.05
TXT With rotary head:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 81.01 which utilizes a body which is
    driven about an axis upon which there is integral with, or mounted thereon,
    scale removal means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    407,    Cutter for Shaping, subclasses 30+ for a device including a cutter
    adapted to turn about an axis and including structure for supporting that
    cutter for rotation.


CLS 29/81.06
TXT Fluid impingement:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 81.01 which removes scale by loosening
    it with the aid of fluid generally applied with force.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, for nozzle and related
    structure for applying fluid to a workpiece.


CLS 29/81.07
TXT With heater:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 81.06 wherein the impinging fluid is
    maintained at a relatively high temperature (i.e., hot gas, etc.).


CLS 29/81.08
TXT Liquid jet:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 81.06 wherein the fluid is in liquid
    form.


CLS 29/81.09
TXT Airblast:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 81.06 wherein the fluid is in gaseous
    form.


CLS 29/81.1
TXT Chainer:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 81.01 wherein the work contacting
    members comprise a series of links.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclasses 78+ for general
    purpose chain structure.


CLS 29/81.11
TXT Scraper or scalper:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 81.01 wherein the workpiece is
    contacted by an edged instrument to remove or scalp the scale from a
    surface thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Placement in this subclass requires more than cutting away
    small pieces of scale from a surface with a sharpened blade or chisel which
    is classified in subclass 81.16.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 93.1 for a
    machine in which the sole cleaning instruments are scrapers.


CLS 29/81.12
TXT Brush type:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 81.01 wherein the work contacting
    member has a plurality of anchored bristles which loosen or remove the
    scale.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 21.1 for a
    cleaning machine whose cleaning instruments are of the brush type.


CLS 29/81.13
TXT Mechanically powered operator:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 81.01 wherein a mechanically driven
    work contacting member removes the scale.


CLS 29/81.14
TXT Tack or needle type:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 81.13 wherein the work contacting
    member includes a plurality of narrow ended elongated members mounted
    adjacently in a work engaging orientation.


CLS 29/81.15
TXT Hammer:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 81.13 wherein the work contacting
    member includes a solid head for striking the workpiece to break and/or
    loosen the scale.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, subclasses 143+ for a tool comprising an impacting
    instrument having the dominant or general structure of a hammer.


CLS 29/81.16
TXT Blade or chisel:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 81.13 wherein the work contacting
    member includes a cutting member such as a blade or chisel.


CLS 29/81.17
TXT Hand tool:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 81.01 wherein a manually driven or
    guided work contacting member is employed to remove or prevent scale.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning.

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making.

    81,     Tools, for all hand tools not structurally limited to any
    classified art.


CLS 29/89.5
TXT BURNING IN, WEARING IN, OR OIL BURNISHING:

    Apparatus under the class definition for burning in or wearing in the
    bearings of engines, usually internal-combustion engines, and running in or
    oil burnishing to limber the bearings and to test for detection of oil
    leakage at the joints of the casings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404,    for a process of treating or assembling a part or parts while
    effecting similar forces or maintaining a similar environment to
    substantially duplicate those forces or environmental factors encountered
    in actual use of the part or parts.


CLS 29/90.01
TXT BURNISHING:

    Process or apparatus under the class definition for condensing, compacting,
    smoothing, or polishing the surface of an article by rubbing or otherwise
    engaging the article with means having a smooth surface of greater hardness
    than that of the article.

    (1)     Note.  Burnishing, by its nature, prevents any significant removal
    of surface material from a treated article or workpiece.  This lack of
    material removal distinguished burnishing from grinding or abrading (which
    generally results in integral surface removal of material) and cleaning
    (which generally results in the removal of foreign material from the
    surface of material).  Consequently, grinding or abrading is generally
    provided for in Class 451, while cleaning is generally provided for in
    Class 15.

    (2)     Note.  See paragraph II of the main class definition.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass includes blasting an article with metal shot
    when not classifiable in Class 72, Metal Deforming, subclass 53.  See the
    definition thereof including notes for the line.  Search Class 15,
    Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 95 for a device or
    process of shotting material to clean it.

    (4)     Note.  This subclass includes a metal rolling device for compacting
    the interior surface of an opening.  For apparatus of like structure
    employed for expanding or a flanging tube, search Class 72, Metal
    Deforming, subclasses 115 and 317.

    (5)     Note.  This subclass includes a burnisher in combination with a
    cutter where the combined device may be employed for burnishing without
    cutting.  For a reamer which has a guiding portion which may burnish but
    has a cutter which is necessarily used during such burnishing, see Class
    408, Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclass 199.

    (6)     Note.  This subclass includes a broach-like device which is forced
    through an opening in order to burnish the inside of the opening.  For a
    broach, i.e., a tool having sharp cutting edges, which is similarly forced
    through a hole for the purpose of cutting the interior thereof, search
    Class 407, Cutters, for Shaping, subclasses 1 and 13+.

    (7)     Note.  This is the residual home for burnishing, not only of metal,
    but of any material unless provided for elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclass 70 for a boot or shoe burnishing
    machine and subclass 104 for a boot or shoe burnishing hand tool.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 95 and see (5)
    Note, above.

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, as the generic class for a process
    or apparatus for producing a smooth appearance on the surface of a textile
    article or fabric by pressing, stretching, rolling, sliding contact, or
    other means.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, particularly, subclass 17 for leather strap
    finishing by burnishing and subclasses 37 to 47 and subclass, 21 for a
    machine or process of burnishing leather.

    72,     Metal Deforming, and see (5) and (6) Notes, above.

    100,    Presses, for a press not elsewhere provided for.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclass 222 for burnishing steps combined with
    electrolytic coating and subclass 141.5 for electrolytic polishing.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 658+ for burnishing means for photographic
    images.

    407,    Cutters, for Shaping, subclass 13 for a broaching machine and see
    (6) Note, above.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 687 for metallic
    stock material having a defined surface feature, e.g., smoothness.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 36+ for a process of abrading by fluent
    abradant (especially subclasses 38+ for a process of sand blasting) and
    subclasses 75+ for a sandblasting machine.


CLS 29/90.1
TXT Of water laid fibrous article (e.g., paper):

    Process or apparatus under subclass 90 for burnishing materials made by a
    paper making operation, i.e., depositing fibrous material from a slurry
    onto a foraminous screen or mold surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclass 205 for the combination
    of forming an endless web and subsequently subjecting it to pressure,
    subclasses 224+ for a process of forming an article and subsequently
    subjecting it to pressure, and subclass 288 for the combination of forming
    and burnishing means.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, for the combination of bending, folding, creasing,
    assembling, i.e., a basic operation of Class 493 combined with burnishing.
    Search especially subclass 271 for making a tube from a nonmetal sheet or
    web combined with minute size change of the formed tube and subclass 291
    for making a nonmetal tube from a sheet or web combined with surface
    treatment.  Search especially subclass 467 for surface treatment of a sheet
    or web other than burnishing.  Burnishing, per se, of paper (or other
    material) is to be found in Class 29, subclasses 90.1+.


CLS 29/90.2
TXT Heated burnishing member:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 90.1 in which the burnishing tool
    operates at an elevated temperature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 377+ for apparatus in
    which a heated die treats paper during a stage of its manufacture.


CLS 29/90.3
TXT Burnishing tool reciprocates across work surface:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 90.2 in which the burnishing tool has a
    back and forth motion while in contact with the work.


CLS 29/90.5
TXT Continuous feed:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 90.01 for burnishing a relatively
    elongated article of indefinite length, such as a wire, rod, tube, etc., by
    feeding the same longitudinally through or past the burnishing device.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes a machine or a process for smoothing,
    polishing, or compacting covered wire such as an insulated electric
    conductor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, especially subclasses
    77, 88, 102, 104.04, and 269.

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, especially subclass 2.

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclasses 217+ for a thread finishing
    method or apparatus not elsewhere provided for.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, especially subclass 138.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 100+ for apparatus having a solid
    member for modifying a coating on the work.

    144,    Woodworking, especially subclass 49 for a miscellaneous single
    operation woodworking machine.

    451,    Abrading, particularly subclasses 64+ for an abrading machine,
    generally, subclasses 67+ for an abrading machine combined with a
    nonabrading means, subclasses 75+ for a sandblast machine, and subclasses
    103+ for an abrading machine comprising a scouring device.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacture
    From a Sheet or Web, subclass 467.


CLS 29/90.6
TXT Of gear article:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 90.01 wherein the article is a toothed
    wheel, cylinder, or other machine element capable of meshing with another
    toothed element to transmit motion, change speed, or change direction.


CLS 29/90.7
TXT By shot peening or blasting:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 90.01 wherein the condensing,
    compacting, smoothing, or polishing is effected by either hammering or
    bombarding the surface with hard shot.


CLS 29/91
TXT UPHOLSTERED ARTICLE MAKING:

    Process or apparatus under the class definition for the shaping and/or
    assembling of a padded or stuffed furniture component.

    (1)     Note.  A full search for pertinent art must include other
    subclasses in this class organized, in the main, on the basis of particular
    mechanisms or method steps.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33+,    for plural diverse manufacturing apparatus.

    592+,   for a specific process of shaping or assembling.

    700+,   for an assembling apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, for a support for sleeping, which may be upholstered.

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 523+ for a reshaping device which
    compacts or stretches material (e.g., as in mattress filling) and
    subclasses 436+ for a related process.

    100,    Presses, for patents to a particular process or device for
    compacting or compressing material.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, for a
    process of or apparatus for adhesive bonding in the manufacture of
    upholstery.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, particularly subclasses 28+ and 52+ for
    pleating, shaping, or stretching of material somewhat analogous to
    upholstery.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    for a method of shaping plastic material, particularly, subclasses 41+ for
    shaping of foam material.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus, for
    apparatus for shaping plastic material, particularly, subclass 4 for means
    for molding foam material.


CLS 29/91.1
TXT Method:

    Process under subclass 91 of making a shaped, padded, or stuffed furniture
    component.


CLS 29/91.2
TXT Tufting:

    Apparatus under subclass 91 for compressing and retaining portions of a
    furniture cushion or padded furniture component usually at regular
    intervals in accord with a desired pattern.

    (1)     Note.  Included here (91.2) are patents which, in addition to means
    for compressing, merely provide access for fastener means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclass 147 for a device for making a
    tuft or tassel.

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 2.1+ for a mattress sewing machine and
    subclasses 117+ for a quilting machine.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    91 for a process of surface bonding and/or assembly therefor including
    separate mechanical joining means, subclasses 250+ for a process of surface
    bonding and/or assembly therefor including punching, and subclasses 510+
    for a surface bonding means and/or assembly means therefor including
    punching.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    especially subclasses 241+ for mechanical shaping or molding to form or
    reform a shaped article to produce a composite, plural part or multilayered
    article and digest 82 for an art collection including embossing by foaming.


CLS 29/91.3
TXT With means to clench fastener:

    Apparatus under subclass 91.2 including means to deform the end or ends of
    a fastener inserted in a compressed portion of a cushion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243.5+, for a means for assembling parts by clenching a fastener thereabout.


CLS 29/91.4
TXT With means to insert guide pin or fastener:

    Apparatus under subclass 91.2 including means for passing an element
    through a compressed portion of a furniture cushion or stuffed mattress
    which element either facilitates the assembly of a fastener member or is a
    fastener member to secure the compression of the entire cushion and/or
    localized portions thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91.3,   for means to insert a fastener as well as clench the fastener end.

    525+,   for a process of assembling by a driven force fit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclasses 19+ for combined
    apparatus for assembling workpieces and applying a member, e.g., nail,
    thereto.


CLS 29/91.5
TXT Cover stretching:

    Apparatus under subclass 91 for drawing or pressing an outer fabric layer
    onto or about a stuffed or padded furniture component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33+,    for plural diverse manufacturing apparatus.

    592+,   for a specific process of shaping or assembling.

    700+,   for an assembling apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, for a support for sleeping, which may be upholstered.

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 523+ for a reshaping device which
    compacts or stretches material (e.g., as in mattress filling) and
    subclasses 436+ for a related process.

    100,    Presses, for patents to a particular process or device for
    compacting or compressing material.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, for a
    process of or apparatus for adhesive bonding in the manufacture of
    upholstery.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, particularly subclasses 28+ and 52+ for
    pleating, shaping, or stretching of material somewhat analogous to
    upholstery.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    for a method of shaping plastic material, particularly, subclasses 41+ for
    shaping of foam material.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus, for
    apparatus for shaping plastic material, particularly, subclass 4 for means
    for molding foam material.


CLS 29/91.6
TXT Edge-roll forming:

    Apparatus under subclass 91 for forming a cylindrical piping-like portion
    along a corner or edge of a stuffed furniture component.

    (1)     Note.  The patents herein provide means to reshape a corner into a
    cord-like bumper along the corner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243.57+,for edge binding or covering apparatus, generally.


CLS 29/91.7
TXT Form or holder:

    Apparatus under subclass 91 which supports and/or provides a desired
    configuration pattern for a stuffed furniture component during manufacture.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are patents for a form with means to hold a
    tuft element in a desired position in a pattern.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, for a work holder of general utility not elsewhere
    provided for.


CLS 29/91.8
TXT With follower:

    Apparatus under subclass 91.7 wherein the support or configuration pattern
    includes a plate or platen movable with respect to an opposite support
    element so as to compress the furniture component.

    (1)     Note.  No means is set forth to effect the movement of the follower.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91.2,   for a device which includes means to compact a furniture cushion in
    localized areas for tufting.


CLS 29/213.1
TXT Valve applying or removing:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 for the assembling, securing, or disassembling
    of various types of valves or valve parts.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses include, for example:

    (a)     the removal or placement of a water main or other main valve or
    engine valve spring and guide units.

    (b)     the removal of placement of a water main or other main valve,
    including a pressure housing for facilitating this operation under the
    pressure of the main, and the insertion and removal of valve plugs to seal
    the main while assembly operation is being carried on.  For similar
    pressure housing usable in boring or drilling mains, see Class 137, Fluid
    Handling, subclasses 315+, for the combination of valve assembling means
    cutting or with fluid handling structure.

    (c)     the manipulation of an engine valve rocker arm.

    (d)     a support for supporting a valve in lifted position with the spring
    compressed.

    (e)     apparatus for holding a valve spring in compressed condition.

    (f)     apparatus for compressing an engine valve spring while on or off an
    engine.


CLS 29/214
TXT Engine valve unit puller or applier:

    Apparatus under subclass 213.1 for pulling an engine valve unit (e.g., a
    valve, spring, or valve guide) from an engine block.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215+,   for apparatus for only compressing an engine valve spring.


CLS 29/215
TXT Engine valve spring compressor (only):

    Apparatus under subclass 213.1 for compressing, or holding compressed, a
    valve spring of an engine (e.g., an internal combustion engine) to
    facilitate extraction of a valve key or pin.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226,    for apparatus for compressing helical transmission springs.

    227,    for apparatus for compressing other helical springs.

    249,    for apparatus for removing or inserting a valve stem key or pin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclass 486 for a resilient article tensioner or compressor.

    254,    Pushing and Pulling Implements, subclass 10.5 for a spring
    stretcher or compressor having a force multiplying operator.


CLS 29/216
TXT Plural spring engagement:

    Apparatus under subclass 215 in which the compressor has provision for
    operating on a plurality of springs for compressing the same simultaneously.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226,    for apparatus for compressing plural helical transmission springs
    simultaneously.


CLS 29/217
TXT Screw operated:

    Apparatus under subclass 215 in which the means for developing the spring
    compressing force involves a screw.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256+,   for a screw operated means to assemble, generally.


CLS 29/218
TXT Parallel or tong type, side entrance:

    Apparatus under subclass 217 in which the compressor includes spaced
    parallel or tong type bars, each having co-planar jaws at one end for
    engaging the spring from the side, the other ends of the bars being
    connected by a screw operated mechanism for moving the jaws and bars toward
    or away from each other in a compressing operation.

    (1)     Note.  The bars may be parallel and maintained parallel by the
    mechanism, or may be substantially parallel but pivoted to the mechanism,
    which mechanism operates the bars around the pivot in quasi tong type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, for a hand tool of general utility or an assembling tool
    which structurally recognizes only one work part.


CLS 29/219
TXT Lever operated:

    Apparatus under subclass 215 in which the compressor has provisions for
    operating on a single spring for compressing the same, the compressor
    having for its prime operating power a lever, or a lever operated linkage
    system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222+,   for a lever operated piston ring inserter or remover.

    246,    for a lever operated battery terminal puller.

    247+,   for a lever operated cotter pin puller.

    249,    for a lever operated valve stem pin or key puller.

    267+,   for a miscellaneous lever operated pusher or puller.


CLS 29/220
TXT Single jaw or valve engagement:

    Apparatus under subclass 219 in which the compressor has a single
    engagement with the valve spring or valve, i.e., a single jaw engages the
    springs or the valve and has reaction against other parts of the motor
    block and not against the spring or valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219     and 221, for a lever operated valve compressor having opposed jaws
    engaging spaced parts of a spring or a spring and valve.


CLS 29/221
TXT Plier type:

    Apparatus under subclass 219 in which the lever operated compressor is of
    the plier type of construction or operation, namely the jaws are caused to
    move toward or away from each other by squeezing in two relatively movable
    handles or levers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216,    for a plier type plural spring compressor.

    218,    for a parallel or tong type side entrance valve compressor having
    levers or handles that are caused to move toward or away from each other by
    a screw.

    223+,   for a plier type piston ring inserter or remover.

    226,    for a plier type transmission spring compressor.

    232,    for a plier type clock or watch staker.

    246,    for a plier type battery terminal puller.

    248,    for a plier type cotter pin puller.

    249,    for a plier type valve stem pin or key puller.

    268,    for a miscellaneous plier type device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, for a hand tool of general utility or an assembling tool
    which structurally recognizes only one work part.


CLS 29/221.5
TXT To or from wheel rim of resilient tire or tube:

    Hand tool under subclass 213.1 or assembling or removing a valve for a
    pneumatic tire or tube with or from the rim or other portion of the wheel
    with which the tire or tube is associated.

    (1)     Note.  The air valve may be encased in a resilient sheath which
    fits in a hole in the rim with a grommet effect to seal the valve to the
    rim.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235,    for a tool for inserting or removing a resilient grommet in a hole,
    and see (1) Note, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 15.2+ for a tool for repairing a resilient tire
    and, especially, subclass 15.4 for a tool for deflating a tire by air valve
    actuation.

    157,    Wheelwright Machines, for assembling a tire or tube to or from a
    rim or a wheel.


CLS 29/221.6
TXT Removal tool:

    Apparatus under subclass 213.1 for disassembling or extracting any of
    various types of valve or valve parts.


CLS 29/222
TXT Piston ring inserter or remover:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 for inserting or removing a piston ring in the
    receiving groove of a piston, (e.g., for an internal combustion engine) or
    for facilitating such an operation.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example:

    (a)     a piston ring compressor for compressing a piston ring around a
    piston or for contracting and holding a single ring for the reception of a
    mandrel holder.

    (b)     apparatus for expanding a ring for removal or application to a
    piston.

    (c)     a guide through which a piston with a ring(s) is moved, the guide
    compressing the ring during such movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229,    for a circular spring applier or remover.

    269,    for apparatus for compressing and holding a group of piston rings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 3.4+ for a similarly constructed tool for use in
    removing receptacle closures.


CLS 29/223
TXT Plier-type operation:

    Apparatus under subclass 222 which is of the plier type or has plier type
    operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, for a hand tool of general utility or an assembling tool
    which structurally recognizes only one work part.


CLS 29/224
TXT With ring encirclement:

    Apparatus under subclass 223 provided with means for partly or completely
    encircling a piston ring.


CLS 29/225
TXT Spring applier or remover:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 for assembling or disassembling components of
    a spring or of a spring and another member.

    (1)     Note.  "Securing" is considered to be a type of "assembling".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213.1+, particularly 215+ for apparatus dealing with a valve (including
    engine valve) spring.

    222+,   for piston ring apparatus.

    270+,   for hand-manipulatable spring nut applier or remover.

    805,    for apparatus for applying a spring retainer in a doll set.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    79,     Button Making, subclass 3 for inserting a spring retainer in a
    button.

    81,     Tools, subclass 3.7 for a device for prying apart the leaves of a
    leaf spring assembly, subclass 7.5 for a mainspring winder for a watch or
    clock, and subclass 486 for  a resilient article tensioner or compressor.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 10.5 for a spring stretcher or compressor.


CLS 29/226
TXT Transmission spring:

    Apparatus under subclass 225 for applying or removing a transmission spring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes means to compress a helical
    transmission spring and includes a compressor engaging a plurality of
    springs at a time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215+,   for a compressor for a helical engine valve spring.


CLS 29/227
TXT Helical spring:

    Apparatus under subclass 225 for applying or removing a helical spring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215+,   for apparatus for compressing a helical engine valve spring,
    holding such a spring, or for otherwise applying or removing an engine
    valve spring.

    226,    for a helical transmission spring compressor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclass 114 for apparatus for compressing coil
    springs and placing them in a cover (e.g., mattress or upholstery ticking).


CLS 29/228
TXT Flat spiral spring (e.g., watch or clock type):

    Apparatus under subclass 225 for applying or removing a flat spiral spring,
    e.g., a watch or clock spring.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclass 7.5 for a tool for winding a mainspring.


CLS 29/229
TXT Circular spring:

    Apparatus under subclass 225 for applying or removing a circular spring,
    i.e., a single convolution spring of general circular shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222+,   for a piston ring inserter or remover.

    249,    means for applying a key of split ring form to a valve stem.

    729+,   for means for applying a split spacer disc to an electrical conduit.

    765,    for means to place a traveler on a ring, or a ring on a bobbin in a
    textile machine.


CLS 29/230
TXT Leaf spring:

    Apparatus under subclass 225 for applying or removing a leaf spring, having
    either single or plural leaves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force, for
    a jack which is to be used to elevate a vehicle chassis relative to its
    running gear to thereby flex the vehicle springs.


CLS 29/231
TXT Means to stake watch or clock:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 for removing arbors from watch pinions or
    hands from shafts, inserting arbors into watch pinions, or inserting the
    leaves of lantern pinions, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177+,   for a process of mechanical manufacture of a watch or a clock.

    244+,   for an assembling device comprising a pusher or puller, in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 6+ for other watchmakers' tools.


CLS 29/232
TXT Plier type:

    Apparatus under subclass 231 of the plier or pincer type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, for a hand tool of general utility or an assembling tool
    which structurally recognizes only one work part.


CLS 29/233
TXT Brake lining to brake shoe:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 for stretching or holding brake lining on a
    brake shoe to facilitate securement of the lining to the shoes, or for
    applying a fastener to secure the lining to the shoe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    525.06+,for a process of riveting to secure a brake lining to a brake shoe.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, for a press for bonding a brake lining to a brake shoe,
    especially subclasses 300+ for a press for securing a lining to a shoe
    combined with means to heat, cool, or dry the article or press.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, for a
    device for adhesively bonding a brake lining to a brake shoe comprising
    more than a mere press.


CLS 29/234
TXT Tube and coextensive core:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 for assembling or disassembling a tube to or
    from a core that in assembled position is substantially coextensive with
    the tube.

    (1)     Note.  The core may be tubular or of any other configuration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235+,   for means for applying or removing a resilient element, including
    means for applying a noncoextensive resilient element to the interior of a
    tube, and means to apply a resilient tube or sleeve to a longer object.

    237,    for means to assemble a coupling to a conduit.

    469.5,  for a process of mechanical manufacture including metal deforming
    with nonmetallic bonding.

    517+,   for a process of axially joining a hollow body to a rod or other
    elongated body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 500.5+ for a control lever
    or linkage system comprising a hand operated flexible transmitter.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 131 for a flexible pipe having
    a spirally wound metal core, subclass 139 for a flexible pipe having a
    metal core and subclasses 142 and 143 for another pipe having a metal core.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, for an
    assembly operation combined with adhesive joining of the assembled parts.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, subclasses 52+ for a flexible shaft within a housing.


CLS 29/235
TXT To apply or remove a resilient article (e.g., tube, sleeve, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 700 for assembling or disassembling a resilient
    member with another member.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is means to apply or remove a resilient
    tube, sleeve, etc., to or from another member; means to flex a resilient
    metal article within its elastic limit to facilitate assembly or
    disassembly; and means to apply a teat cup to a cooperating ring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215+,   for an engine valve spring compressor.

    222+,   for a piston ring inserter or remover.

    225+,   for a spring applier or remover.

    269,    means for compressing and holding a group of piston rings.

    446+,   for a process of stressing a part within its elastic limit and
    assembling it with another part while it is stressed.

    765,    for means to place a traveler on a ring or to place a ring on a
    bobbin of a textile machine.

    805,    for means to apply a spring retainer to a doll set.

    807,    for means to apply watch crystal to a watch case.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclasses 109 and 110+ for a shoe last
    stretcher.

    100,    Presses, subclass 9 for a binder applying device, not otherwise
    provided for, which places a binder about material, the binder being
    circumferentially closed and ringlike prior to such placement.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 14.47+ for teat cup structure.


CLS 29/235.5
TXT Nipple to nursing bottle:

    Apparatus under subclass 235 for elastically expanding the open end of a
    resilient nipple for the insertion of the mouth of a nursing bottle into
    the nipple and removable from between the overlapped ends of bottle and
    nipple to permit the nipple to contract about and grip the bottle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 287+ and 476+ for a method of, or
    apparatus for applying a closure to a portable receptacle.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 11.1+ for a nursing bottle including
    one with means for withdrawing the contents and subclass 387 for a nipple
    applier claimed in combination with a bottle or nipple.


CLS 29/236
TXT Well protector to sucker rod:

    Apparatus under subclass 235 for applying or removing a well protector to
    or from a well sucker rod.

    (1)     Note.  The well protector of this subclass is commonly a resilient
    thick sleeve.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes apparatus for stretching the
    protector and placing the same on the drill pipe or rod apparatus for
    stretching the protector and placing it on a carrier and the carrier that
    transports the expanded protector to a position on the drill pipe or rod.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, subclass 323 for a seal for well
    apparatus having an installation, removal, assembly, disassembly, or repair
    feature.


CLS 29/237
TXT Coupling to conduit:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 for assembling and securing or disassembling a
    coupling and a conduit.

    (1)     Note.  A machine for bringing the coupling and conduit together and
    for crimping is included in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 29 for a jack especially designed for driving or pulling pipe
    otherwise than by impact.


CLS 29/237.5
TXT Loose-leaf sheet binder:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 for supporting and guiding the motion of a
    separable loose-leaf binder device from a closed position to an open
    position to permit insertion or removal of a sheet.

    (1)     Note.  The operation of assembly or disassembly is usually manual,
    the apparatus merely serving as a support and guide for assembly operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 441.1+ for an easel, book, or music score
    holder support.

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses for means supporting a
    loose-leaf book or sheet, per se, for the purpose of writing thereon.


CLS 29/238
TXT Compressing parts together face to face:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 that compress article parts together face to
    face for facilitating assembling.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example:

    (a)     apparatus for pressing overlapping apertured plates together to
    hold them while bolts or rivets are being applied.

    (b)     apparatus for compressing stacked plates together face to face.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244+,   for apparatus for forcing interfitting parts into engagement, or
    for pulling them apart.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 37+ for plural holders which hold
    workpieces relative to each other.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, for a bolt, screw, or rivet that may be used for
    temporary fastening.


CLS 29/239
TXT Spreading parts apart or separating them from face to face engagement:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 having (1) article engaging means moving in
    opposed directions for spreading parts apart or (2) for breaking a face to
    face engagement or for separating parts from a face to face engagement.

    (1)     Note.  The apparatus under (1) is distinguished from that under
    subclasses 244+ by a spreading operation as distinguished from a plain push
    or pull and is characterized by spaced jaws or article engaging means that
    are motivated in opposite directions to create a spreading action.

    (2)     Note.  The apparatus under (2) is generally of the character that
    breaks the adhesion of an automobile head and block.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223,    for a plier type device that engages the ends of a split piston
    ring to force the ends apart.

    252,    for means to assemble or disassemble including means to separate
    parts by fluid expansion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclasses 109 and 110+ for shoe last
    stretching.

    81,     Tools, subclass 3.7 for a special tool for spreading the leaves of
    a leaf spring assembly apart, usually for the purpose of inserting
    lubricant therebetween; subclass 302 for a special tool having
    outwardly-facing work-engaging jaw surfaces; and subclass 485 for a tool
    for spreading one portion of a workpart from another portion, or for
    spreading apart two parts without disassembling them from each other.


CLS 29/240
TXT By rotation of work part:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 in which the apparatus assembles or
    disassembles parts by rotating one or more parts with respect to another
    part or parts.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a device for juxta-positioning and securing
    a screw type closure on an open ended collapsible tube.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 317+ for apparatus for applying screw
    closures to receptacles.

    81,     Tools, subclasses 3.07 for a receptacle closure removing tool and
    subclasses 52+ for a wrench for exerting a twisting strain to a workpart.

    140,    Wireworking, subclasses 92.3+ for intercoiling of helices of wire
    with each other or with successive loops or apertures by rotation of said
    helices with or without the concurrent helix forming.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclass 164 for a means to drive a tool
    about an axis including means to hold and relatively rotate sections of
    tool shaft.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, subclasses 48+ for machines for assembling nuts or bolts by a
    screwing operation.


CLS 29/240.5
TXT Means to insert or remove helix:

    Devices under subclass 240 wherein one of the parts is a wire-like or wire
    coil.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a device for positioning or removing a
    helical thread element with or without further securing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227,    for a helical spring applier or remover of general utility.

    456,    for a process including assembling a spirally convoluted member of
    substantially uniform cross section form to a second member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 409 for a plier type deforming tool.

    140,    Wireworking, subclass 92.3 for a method or apparatus for helix
    screwing through one or more rows of loops or openings.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, subclass 438 for a wire coil spring thread
    insert, per se.


CLS 29/241
TXT Means to string:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 that assemble or disassemble by a stringing
    action, either by stringing parts on an attenuated or elongated means, or
    by passing such means through a part or parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    279,    for a device which having centrifugal separator discs strung
    thereon.

    433,    for a process of assembling by a stringing operation.

    729+,   for apparatus for placing a spacer disc on an electrical conduit.

    765,    for means to place a traveler on a ring or to place a ring on a
    bobbin of a textile machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclass 58.5 for a machine for placing
    lacings in the upper of a shoe or for removing the lacings therefrom.

    53,     Package Making, subclass 581 for means for forming a package by
    placing contents material on a core or spindle.

    100,    Presses, subclass 12 for apparatus, not otherwise provided for, for
    placing a binder which passes through the opening in ring-like material.

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 470.21+ for a machine for inserting a draw
    string by means of a needle, subclass 10 for a sewing machine which seams a
    bag and also inserts a draw string in a hem, and subclasses 223 and 224 for
    a needle threading attachment for a sewing machine.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 48 for bead stringing means; subclass
    50 for a device for inserting a tape, thread, or cord into a garment, lace
    and the like; subclass 99 for a device for threading a needle; subclasses
    102+ for a needle which is a pointed instrument having an eye, hook, or
    equivalent to attach to a thread, tape, or the like for sewing, threading,
    or attaching the thread to a fabric; and subclass 105 for a curtain rod
    threader.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 134.3+ for apparatus for threading electric conductor wire or a
    leader therefor in a conduit or along a messenger cable.


CLS 29/242
TXT Tool handle and tool:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 for assembling or disassembling a tool handle
    and a tool.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example:

    (a)     Apparatus for assembling or disassembling the parts of a handle or
    the parts of a tool.

    (b)     Apparatus for assembling a tool with or disassembling a tool from a
    handle.

    (c)     Apparatus for inserting a pin for securing a tool handle to a tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243,    for means to assemble a tool chuck and a tool.

    244+,   for means to assemble comprising a pusher or puller in general.

    426.1+, for a process of disassembly.

    428+,   for a process of assembling or joining.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 254-271 for wood bending.

    403,    Joints and Connections, for a connection between a tool and a
    handle, wherein only such structure of the tool and handle as cooperates to
    effect the connection is included.


CLS 29/243
TXT Tool chuck and tool:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 for assembling or disassembling a tool chuck
    and a tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242,    for apparatus to assemble a tool handle and a tool chuck.

    244+,   for assembly or disassembling means comprising a pusher or puller
    in general.

    426.1+, for a process of disassembling.

    428+,   for a process of assembling or joining.

    592+,   for a process of mechanical manufacture, generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, for a tool chuck, per se.


CLS 29/243.5
TXT Overedge assembling means:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 for assembling a first element or portion
    thereof around an edge of a second element and into overlapping
    relationship with the second element, the assembly being accomplished in
    whole or in part by deforming, i.e., stressing beyond the elastic, the
    first element.

    (1)     Note.  Subclasses 244 through 283 herebelow, comprising assembly
    apparatus of the nature there specified, were established before this
    subclass (243.5) and indented subclasses and have not been screened.
    Appropriate subclasses among them should be searched when advisable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    509,    for a process of assembling including overedge clamping of a seated
    part.

    769,    for means for attaching a slide fastener element to a tape.


CLS 29/243.51
TXT Belt-hook attacher:

    Apparatus under subclass 243.5 for clinching one or more clips adapted to
    receive a connecting member (e.g., a hinge pin) along  the end of a belt.


CLS 29/243.517
TXT Annular work:

    Apparatus under subclass 243.5 wherein the first element is marginally
    defined by a outer circular border and by an inner circular border,
    concentric with the outer border.

    (1)     Note.  The "first element" of this subclass may be very short in
    the dimension of the axis of the borders in the case of a ring or may be
    longer so that the element is a tube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    726+,   for apparatus used to make a heat exchanger, e.g., to secure a
    boiler tube to a plate.


CLS 29/243.518
TXT With radially acting tool inside annular work:

    Apparatus under subclass 243.517 wherein the first element is deformed by a
    shaping surface urging a portion thereof to move away from the its axis,
    wherein the shaping surface is part of a member between the inner border
    and the axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 391.6 for a device including concentric
    or telescoped deforming tools wherein a tool fits inside a hollow metal
    fastener workpart to reshape that workpart into engagement with another
    member in which the fastener is fitted for securement, wherein no part of
    the device is in engagement with the other member, and subclass 393 for
    three or more tools inside an annular workpiece with provision to effect
    radial expansion of the workpiece by moving one of the tools radially with
    respect to the others.


CLS 29/243.519
TXT With second workpiece inside annular work one workpiece moved to shape the
    other:

    Apparatus under subclass 243.517 wherein a first tool engages the annular
    member and a second tool engages a second member which is inside the cavity
    of the annular member to move the members relative to each other such that
    one member is stressed beyond its elastic limit.


CLS 29/243.521
TXT Comprising driver for snap-off-mandrel fastener: e.g., pop (tm) riveter:

    Apparatus under subclass 243.519 wherein a first tool engages an annular
    end surface of a tube-like workpiece, which surface generally faces the
    device, which first tool includes a passageway coaxial with the tubular
    axis of that workpiece, and wherein a second tool functions within that
    passageway to engage a shank portion of a second workpiece extending
    through the tubular axis of the work and through the coaxial passageway,
    which first tool urges against the annular surface and which second tool
    reactively pulls against the shank with sufficient force moves the second
    workpiece with respect to the first and to ultimately exceed the tensile
    strength of the shank portion and thereby divide one portion of the shank
    from the remainder thereof, which remainder serves with the tubular first
    workpiece as a fastener.

    (1)     Note.  The first and second workpiece of this subclass are normally
    supplied in the magazine as an assembly and are to be brought into assembly
    with another work part not originating in the storage chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    812.5,  for a driver for a snap-off-mandrel fastener including a fastener
    supply magazine.


CLS 29/243.522
TXT Including near side fastener shaping tool:

    Device under subclass 243.522 intended to deform the annular surface of the
    work that faces the device.


CLS 29/243.523
TXT Pneumatic- or fluid-actuated tool:

    Device  under subclass 243.521 wherein one of the tools is urged to move
    with respect to the other to effect metal deformation by a flowable medium.

    (1)     Note.  (1) Incompressible fluid, e.g., liquid; (2) compressible
    fluid, e.g., gas; or (3) a flowable solid, e.g., pelletized material might
    be used as the urging medium of this and the indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  A device having a vacuum "driver", i.e., a piston moved by
    ambient air pressure, is included herein.

    (3)     Note.  A device including an explosively actuated piston is
    included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    453.01+,for a pneumatic- or fluid-actuated metal deforming tool, generally.


CLS 29/243.524
TXT Liquid:

    Device under subclass 243.523 wherein the flowable medium is in the liquid
    state, i.e., is generally incompressible.


CLS 29/243.525
TXT And gas:

    Device under subclass 243.524 wherein flowable medium in the liquid state
    is used as tool urging flowable medium and wherein flowable medium in the
    gaseous state is also used at tool urging medium.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a device having a cylinder powered by a
    gas (e.g., compressed air) that, in turn, drives a piston to pressurize a
    liquid which serves to move the tools.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein is a device utilizing  liquid to effect
    repositioning (and deformation) of the "elements" and gas to return the
    tools to the resting position.


CLS 29/243.526
TXT Having rotary drive mechanism:

    Device under subclass 243.521 including provision to move one tool with
    respect to the other to effect the deforming action, which provision turns
    more than 360 degrees.

    (1)     Note.  The "drive" of this subclass must be mechanically connected
    to one of the tools, e.g., a rotary electric motor that drives a tool via a
    gear box is included herein even though the final drive may not turn more
    than 360 degrees, whereas a rotary electric motor that drives a pump which
    transmits fluid to drive one of the tools is excluded.


CLS 29/243.527
TXT Having allochirial actuating handles:

    Device under subclass 243.521 including provision to move one tool with
    respect to the other comprising a pair of mirror image members intended to
    be engaged by the hands of the operative and moved equally but oppositely
    with respect to each other and with respect to the remainder of the device
    to effect deformation.


CLS 29/243.528
TXT Having repositionable annulus engaging tool:

    Device under subclass 243.521 wherein the tool having a passageway
    therethrough is adapted to be readily removed and replaced by another
    similar tool also mounted on the device, or is mounted to be shifted in
    position with respect to the remainder of the device.


CLS 29/243.529
TXT Including near side fastener shaping tool:

    Device under subclass 243.519 intended to deform the annular surface of the
    work that faces the device.


CLS 29/243.53
TXT Riveter:

    Apparatus under subclass 243.5 including means to  upset or otherwise
    deform a rivet or like rod-shaped first element, or a similar portion of
    work, means to assemble such rivet to other work or to cause such rivet to
    secure components of other work together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243.52, for apparatus which deforms annular work, e.g., a hollow rivet or a
    boiler tube end.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, for metal deforming apparatus (no assembly).

    157,    Wheelwright Machines, subclass 1.55 for a wheelmaking machine with
    a spoke-end header.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, for a rivet-driver, per se.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, for riveting apparatus which
    forcibly drives a rivet into work prior to deforming the rivet.


CLS 29/243.54
TXT Single header:

    Apparatus under subclass 243.53 which deforms only one rivet or like
    element at a time, using the same tool pair (header and anvil) each time.


CLS 29/243.55
TXT Pipe joiner:

    Apparatus under subclass 243.54 which by riveting unites the edges of a
    pipe along a longitudinal seam or secures two or more pipes in an
    overlapping or abutting end-to-end relationship.


CLS 29/243.56
TXT Clip applier:

    Apparatus under subclass 243.5 which when assembling the first element with
    the second element additionally unites the second element to at least one
    other element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 410 for a plier-type clip clencher
    claimed only as a deformer, i.e., without regard to assembly.

    140,    Wireworking, subclass 11 for means for joining intersecting wire
    elements of a wire fabric with a clip, which subclass contains art similar
    to some of that found here.


CLS 29/243.57
TXT Binding or covering:

    Apparatus under subclass 243.5 which assembles by causing the first element
    or portion thereof to single-foldedly embrace or encompass the second
    element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33.5+,  for apparatus for binding or covering combined with cutting.

    243.5,  for patents limited to lockseamed (double folded) assembly of two
    elements.

    728,    for apparatus which sheaths a running length core.


CLS 29/243.58
TXT Edge binding:

    Apparatus under subclass 243.57 for assembling a combination in which the
    second element has a definitive edge (such as that of a plate or sheet),
    and the first element is a U-shaped member which embraces only the edge
    portion of the second element.


CLS 29/244
TXT Puller or pusher means, contained force multiplying operator:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 having means for engaging two work parts to be
    assembled or disassembled and means forming part of the apparatus for
    multiplying the force input to the apparatus (e.g., a lever, screw, force
    multiplying linkage, gearing, etc.) to develop the necessary assembling or
    disassembling force.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this and the indented subclasses, for example,
    are:


    (a)     means for removing from and applying to a shaft, a collar, wheel,
    gear, bearing unit, etc.

    (b)     means for removing from or applying to any of various elements, a
    nonresilient tube, collar, sleeve, ferrule, etc.

    (c)     means for removing from or applying to any of various elements, a
    pin, cap, key, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Except as stated in the following notes, apparatus from
    preceding subclasses indented under subclass 700 and having power
    multiplying means for exerting a pushing or pulling force for assembling or
    disassembling has been cross-referenced in this or the indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213.1+, for means to assemble or disassemble a valve component.

    222+,   for means for pushing a piston ring onto a piston.

    225+,   for means to apply a spring by pushing or pulling.

    231+,   for staking a watch or a clock.

    233,    for means for applying a brake lining to a brake shoe.

    234,    for means for pulling or pushing to assemble or disassemble a
    coextensive tube and core.

    237,    for means to assemble or disassemble a coupling to a conduit.

    238,    for assembling by compressing parts together face to face.

    239,    for means to assemble or disassemble including means to separate
    parts from face to face engagement.

    240,    for means to assemble or disassemble by rotation of one work part
    with respect to the other.

    242,    for means to assemble or disassemble a tool handle and a tools.

    243,    for means to assemble or disassemble a tool chuck and a tool.

    270+,   for a hand manipulable implement not having power multiplying means
    to develop the assembling or disassembling force.

    724+,   for means for inserting or removing balls or rollers from a bearing.

    726+,   for means for inserting or removing the tubes of a heat exchanger.

    729+,   for means for inserting or removing a contact into or from a plug
    connector.

    730+,   for means for removing or inserting a battery plate or
    battery-plate unit.

    732+,   for means for inserting or removing an armature shaft, coil, coil
    slot plug, etc.

    765,    for means to place a traveler on a ring or a ring on the bobbin of
    a textile machine.

    805,    for means for assembling doll parts.

    807,    for means to assemble a clock or watch-crystal into a bezel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 469+ for a lever and
    linkage system.

    157,    Wheelwright Machines, subclasses 3+ for a spoke setter, subclass 11
    for a tire remover, and subclass 12 for a spoke extractor.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 405+ for an ingot stripper.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclasses 19+ for combined
    apparatus for assembling and driving a member, e.g., nail, into the
    assembled parts.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 533+ for a coil
    stripping device for a winding machine.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force, for
    such an implement in general.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, for a handling implement
    of the hand-and-hoist-line type.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 436+ for a shaping surface including product release or removal
    means, especially, subclass 438 for a core remover; see the search notes
    thereunder.

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 3+ for a tool for removing an orthodontic
    appliance from the teeth and subclasses 141+ for other disassembly and
    assembly implement (e.g., a tooth extractor, mold remover, crown remover.)


CLS 29/245
TXT Hubcap and hub:

    Apparatus under subclass 244 for inserting or removing a hubcap onto or off
    of a wheel hub.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus for inserting or removing a "wheel cover" onto or
    off of a wheel is included herein.


CLS 29/246
TXT Battery post and terminal:

    Apparatus under subclass 244 for applying or removing an electricity
    transmitting connector to or from a battery post.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    730+,   for means to assemble a storage cell or battery.


CLS 29/247
TXT Cotter pin and cooperating member:

    Apparatus under subclass 244, for inserting or extracting a cotter pin to
    or from another element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249,    for a valve stem pin or key extractor or remover.


CLS 29/248
TXT Plier type means:

    Apparatus under subclass 247 of the plier type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for a cotter pin making process or apparatus.

    700,    and see the search note to Class 81 thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, for a hand tool of general utility, or an assembling tool,
    especially, subclasses 300+ for general purpose pliers or pliers especially
    adapted for manipulating a cotter pin.


CLS 29/249
TXT Valve stem pin or key and another member:

    Apparatus under subclass 244 for inserting or extracting a valve stem pin
    or key into or away from some other element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213.1+, for valve applying and removing apparatus.

    247+,   for cotter pin applying and removing apparatus.

    250,    for machine key applying and removing apparatus.


CLS 29/250
TXT Machine key and another member:

    Apparatus under subclass 244 for inserting or extracting a machine key into
    or away from some other element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249,    for a valve stem pin or key inserter or remover.


CLS 29/251
TXT Arbor-type press means:

    Apparatus under subclass 244 of the arbor press type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, for a press not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 29/252
TXT Having fluid operator:

    Apparatus under subclass 244 which is operated by fluid pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254,    for assembling device comprising a puller or pusher operated by an
    explosive.

    421.1+, for a process of shaping a part or parts by direct application of
    fluid pressure.

    427,    for a process of disassembly utilizing fluid pressure to separate
    parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 325 for a residual fluid actuator, per se.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, for such motors and their
    controls, per se.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 269.01+ for reciprocating platen presses, not
    elsewhere provided for, in which fluid pressure actuates the movable platen.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, for a valve of general utility and an
    actuating means therefor.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 93 for fluid pressure type.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, for a rotary expansible chamber
    motor, per se.


CLS 29/253
TXT Having wedge operator:

    Apparatus under subclass 244 which is operated by a wedge to develop the
    assembling or disassembling force.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 42 for wedge type printers' quoins and subclass 104 for
    miscellaneous wedge type.

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, subclass 103 for friction grip type having wedge
    means to eject the tool.


CLS 29/254
TXT Having percussion or explosive operator:

    Apparatus under subclass 244 which are operated by percussion, including
    the explosion of a contained medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252,    for apparatus operated by sustained fluid pressure as distinguished
    from an explosion.

    275,    for an impact receiving tool not having contained impacting element.

    427,    for a process of separating parts (e.g., a broken drill stem from a
    drilled hole) utilizing percussion or explosion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 632+ for a one shot explosion actuated
    expansible chamber type motor.

    81,     Tools, subclasses 463+ and see the notes thereto for other impact
    operated apparatus.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 90+ for a tool impacting
    device, per se, of general utility.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 2+ for subject matter
    relating to a device for penetrating the earth by means of a bullet or
    shaped charge which is fired in an inaccessible hole and including such a
    device for forming a perforation in a casing or other wall member in the
    hole.


CLS 29/255
TXT Tube, sleeve, or ferrule inserting or removing:

    Apparatus under subclass 254 designed for inserting a tube, sleeve, ring,
    ferrule, or similar annular body into or removing such from an opening
    designed to receive the same.


CLS 29/256
TXT Having screw operator:

    Apparatus under subclass 244 in which a screw is operated to develop the
    assembling or disassembling force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217+,   for a screw operated engine valve spring compressor.

    250,    for a machine key extractor or inserter.


CLS 29/257
TXT C-frame:

    Apparatus under subclass 256 which is screw operated and of the C-frame
    type, one leg of the C-frame reacting against one part of the article and a
    screw mounted in the other leg of the C-frame reacting against another part
    of the article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217+,   for a screw operated C-frame engine valve spring compressor.

    231,    for a C-frame watch or clock staking device.

    251,    for C-frame arbor presses for assembling or disassembling.

    252,    for C-frame fluid operated presses for assembling or disassembling.


    276,    for a C-frame assembly or disassembly tool designed to receive an
    impact from a separate tool.


CLS 29/258
TXT Central screw, work-engagers around screw:

    Apparatus under subclass 256 in which a central screw develops the
    assembling or disassembling force, whether motivated by turning the nut or
    screw, and which have work engagers on opposite sides of, adjacent to, and
    around the screw, the screw acting on one part of the article and the
    engagers acting on another part of the article.

    (1)     Note.  The side engagers may be arms on each side of the screw or
    constitute tubular or tube segment engagers encircling a major part of the
    screw, and the same may be secured to or have reaction contact with the
    article.


CLS 29/259
TXT Work-engager arms along or parallel to screw:

    Apparatus under subclass 258 in which the side engagers comprise arms
    extending along or parallel with the screw, the arms having engagement with
    the screw nut or nut carrying frame at one end and engagement with an
    article part at the other end.


CLS 29/260
TXT With arm connecting engaging means:

    Apparatus under subclass 259 in which the ends of the arms are connected by
    a means that engages the article part.


CLS 29/261
TXT Pivotal arms:

    Apparatus under subclass 259 in which the arms are connected for pivotal
    movement to the nut or nut carrying frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262,    for pivotal grippers directly carried by the screw.


CLS 29/262
TXT Pivotal grippers on screw:

    Apparatus under subclass 259 which have pivotal grippers mounted on the
    article engaging end of the screw.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261,    for pivotal work engager arms mounted on the nut or nut frame.

    265,    for relatively movable work grippers mounted on the force
    developing screw and of tubular or tube segment form.


CLS 29/263
TXT Tubular or tube segment forms work engager:

    Apparatus under subclass 258 in including a work engager in the form of a
    tube or the segments of a tube.

    (1)     Note.  The tubular or tube segment work engager may be an integral
    portion of the nut.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280,    for other tubular work engager having article gripping detents.


CLS 29/264
TXT Screw threaded work engager:

    Apparatus under subclass 263 in which the tubular or tube segment work
    engager has screw threads for engagement with a threaded work part for
    reaction therewith.


    (1)     Note.  The threaded work engaging part may be mounted on the nut,
    nut frame, or force developing screw.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277,    for a hand manipulatable impact receiving tool having a threaded
    device to be applied to screw threaded work to protect the same from impact.

    281,    for a hand manipulatable for tube sleeve or ferrule applying or
    removing having a thread tapping work grip.


CLS 29/265
TXT Movable grippers on screw:

    Apparatus under subclass 263 in which the tubular or tube segment form a
    work engager having at least two relatively movable parts to grip the work
    which parts are mounted on the work engaging end of the force developing
    screw.


    (1)     Note.  The grippers may be pivotal, slidable, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262,    for pivotal grippers on force developing screws not of tubular or
    tube segment form.

    264,    for similar devices threaded to engage threaded work.


CLS 29/266
TXT Plate or bar forms work-engager:

    Apparatus under subclass 258 in which the work engagers are in the form of
    a plate or bar, the screw extending through the center of the plate or bar.


CLS 29/267
TXT Having lever operator:

    Apparatus under subclass 244 that is lever operated.

    (1)     Note.  A screw may be used for adjusting the parts of the apparatus
    or gripping the part to be moved but the force input and multiplication for
    applying the pushing or pulling force is through a system (not involving a
    screw) operated by a lever.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216     and 219+, for a lever operated engine valve spring compressor.

    222+,   for a lever operated piston ring inserter or remover.

    245,    for a lever operated hub cap remover.

    246,    for a lever operated battery terminal remover.

    247+,   for a lever operated cotter pin remover.

    249,    for a lever operated valve stem pin or key remover.

    256+,   for a miscellaneous device having a screw for force multiplication
    to apply the assembling or disassembling force.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    particularly subclasses 120+ for single throw levers.


CLS 29/268
TXT Plier type means:

    Apparatus under subclass 267 of the plier type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    700,    for assembly or disassembly apparatus, generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, for a hand tool of general utility, or for an assembling
    tool which structurally recognizes only one work part.


CLS 29/269
TXT Means comprising piston ring group contractor or holder:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 for contracting, and/or holding contracted, a
    group of piston rings (usually for the reception of a mandrel holder).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222+,   for a piston ring applier or remover or for means for contracting a
    single piston ring and holding it contracted for the reception of a mandrel
    holder.


CLS 29/270
TXT Means comprising hand manipulatable tool:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 that is a hand tool or is a portable tool
    having no contained force multiplying operator to develop the assembling or
    disassembling force.

    (1)     Note.  There may be force multiplying means for the work engaging
    portions to firmly grip the work, but no such means for developing the
    assembling or disassembling force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213.1+, for a hand manipulatable valve keeper insertion tool.

    244+,   for a hand manipulatable or portable tool with a contained power
    multiplying operator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, for a hand tool united with another hand tool.

    42,     Firearms, subclass 90 for an implement to be used in making or
    maintaining a firearm.

    81,     Tools, for a hand tool, generally.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 450.5 for a hand
    manipulable implement means arranged to assemble edible preforms into a
    sandwich.


CLS 29/271
TXT Aligner or center:

    Apparatus under subclass 270 that aligns one part with another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    468,    for a process of associating two or more parts by engaging each of
    the parts with a tool and moving the tool relative to the parts to effect
    alignment of the parts with respect to each other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 412 for shaft aligning and
    leveling straight edge type instruments.


CLS 29/272
TXT Tube with tube:

    Apparatus under subclass 271 for aligning tubes with tubes.


CLS 29/273
TXT Auto wheel with auto chassis:

    Apparatus under subclass 271 for lifting and/or aligning an automobile
    wheel with an automobile chassis.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass, for example, is a tool intended to pass
    through bolt receiving wheel opening and engage the stud bolts or other
    connecting parts on the hub, brake drum, or other support of the automobile
    chassis and guide the wheel to such supporting means.


CLS 29/274
TXT Clutch plates:

    Apparatus under subclass 271 for aligning clutch plates in the assembly of
    a clutch.


CLS 29/275
TXT Means comprising impact receiving tool:

    Apparatus under subclass 270 to be applied to the work and to receive an
    impact from some outside source and transmit the blow to the work.

    (1)     Note.  The source of the impact is usually a machinist's or
    carpenter's hammer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254+,   for impact or percussion apparatus having a contained source of
    impact producing means, as an explosive or a hammer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 168 for cold chisels and see the notes to such
    subclass.

    81,     Tools, subclasses 463+ for a nail set adapted to drive the head of
    a nail below a wood surface when hit by a hammer.


CLS 29/276
TXT C-frame:

    Apparatus under subclass 275 whose impact receiving tool is mounted in one
    leg of a C-frame, the other leg of the frame constituting an anvil for
    receiving the impact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257,    and see the notes thereto for other C-frame type devices.


CLS 29/277
TXT Thread protector (e.g., wheel axle type):

    Apparatus under subclass 275 in which the impact receiving tool transmits
    the impact to a threaded part and is constructed to protect the threads
    from injury.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes axle drivers that are threaded onto
    the end of an axle and are hit to break the connection between a wheel and
    axle, devices commonly called impact wheel removers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264,    for other screw threaded devices to engage screw threaded work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 2.1+ for protective liners and
    subclasses 108+ for protective caps or collars.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 96 for protectors for the
    threads on pipe ends.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 128+ for an impacting device
    including means to transmit impact from a hammer head to a tool or the like.


CLS 29/278
TXT Hand gripper for direct push or pull:

    Apparatus under subclass 270 that are gripped by the hand and given a
    direct push or pull by the hand.

    (1)     Note.  There may be force multiplying means for operating the parts
    that grip the work, but the assembling or disassembling force is given a
    direct push or pull by the person operating the same.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244+,   for devices that grip the work and have force multiplying means for
    the assembling or disassembling push or pull.


CLS 29/279
TXT Centrifugal separator:

    Hand devices under subclass 278 for applying or removing parts of
    centrifugal separators.

    (1)     Note.  Most of the patents include an elongated means that is
    insertable through the openings of aligned separator plates or cone discs,
    with provisions for securing the bottom one thereto, so that the elongated
    means and the parts secured as a unit may be pulled from or inserted into
    the centrifugal machine by direct hand pull or push on the elongated means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241,    for assembling by stringing objects on an elongated part.


CLS 29/280
TXT Tube sleeve or ferrule applying or removing:

    Apparatus under subclass 278 that operates on tubes, sleeves, or ferrules.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282,    and see the notes thereto for other apparatus for operating upon
    tubes, sleeves, or ferrules.


CLS 29/281
TXT Thread-tapping grip:

    Apparatus under subclass 280 that grips the tube, sleeve, or ferrule by
    means of screwing into the same a tapered threaded point in the nature of a
    tap.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 215+ for
    a tool of that class including pitch stabilizing ridge.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, subclass 197 for  tap dies used in a Class 470 machine for
    cutting interior screw threads.


CLS 29/281.1
TXT With work-holder for assembly:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 including or with a surface which, when the
    work parts are being assembled, is positioned beneath at least a portion of
    each work part to support the work parts against the force of gravity in at
    least one position of adjustment thereof.

    (1)     Note.  A mere pin is not considered to be a work holder for
    assembly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    721,    for similar structure having a signal, scale, or indicator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 289+ for a work holder for assembly not in
    combination with an assembly means or not serving as means to move to
    assemble one work part relatively to another.


CLS 29/281.2
TXT For assembling a luminescent mantle:

    Apparatus under subclass 281.1 intended to juxtapose, associate, or fasten
    one part of an illuminated mantle with respect to another part thereof.

    (1)     Note.  A mantle is a lace-like hood or envelop of some refractory
    material which, when placed in position over a flame, gives light by
    incandescence.

    (2)     Note.  This is the residual home for a work holder for assembling a
    luminescent mantle, even though only one part is recognized (engaged)
    thereby.


CLS 29/281.3
TXT And assembling press (e.g., truss assembling means, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 281.1 including means to hold an assembly of
    several first work parts in a desired relationship and means to force an
    additional work part into the assembly to secure the first work parts in a
    desired relationship.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, particularly subclasses 19+ for
    similar structure wherein the additional work part is an "elongated member"
    as required by that class.


CLS 29/281.4
TXT Having means to permit support movement while work is thereon:

    Apparatus under subclass 281.1 including a holder for a first work part and
    a holder for a second work part, which holders are allowed to move with the
    work parts mounted thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281.6,  for structure holding a first work part such that the structure is
    supported thereby, which structure includes guide means for another work
    part.


CLS 29/281.5
TXT Including means to relatively position plural work parts:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 including means to engage a first and a second
    work part and means to move one relatively to the other into a desired
    positional relationship.


CLS 29/281.6
TXT Work-supported apparatus:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 including means to engage a first work part so
    as to be supported against the force of gravity thereon and including means
    to be engaged by a second work part to be juxtaposed, associated with,
    fastened to, or removed from the first work part.


CLS 29/282
TXT Tube, sleeve, or ferrule:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 for assembling and/or securing or
    disassembling tubes, sleeves, or ferrules to each other or to other
    articles.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the preceding subclasses have special types of
    apparatus for this purpose, some of which are referred to in the following
    note.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    234,    for tube and coextensive core apparatus.

    235+,   for apparatus for operating upon resilient tubes or sleeves.

    255,    for percussive apparatus.

    280+,   for hand grippers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclass 3.05 for devices for extracting a shell, projector,
    or wad from a gun barrel.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 29+ for pipe jacks.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 154+ for a method or
    apparatus for laying a pipe or cable into a subterranean location where a
    step or means for handling the earth material is claimed, or a method or
    apparatus for laying, retrieving, or manipulating a pipe or cable at or
    from a submerged location.


CLS 29/283
TXT Work gripper, anvil, or element:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 claiming only (1) a work gripping
    subcombination, (2) an anvil, or (3) any subcombination of an assembling or
    disassembling apparatus incapable by itself of performing a work assembling
    or disassembling operation and not elsewhere classifiable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 476 for disclosure of a passive tool.

    269,    Work Holders, for a work holder, per se.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, subclass 208 for bolt and rivet anvils.


CLS 29/283.5
TXT By deforming:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 including means to juxtapose, associate,
    fasten together, or separate a plurality of work by stressing one work part
    beyond the elastic limit thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402.11+,for a process of repairing by attaching a repair preform wherein
    damaged material is removed.


CLS 29/284
TXT MISCELLANEOUS APPARATUS:

    Miscellaneous metal working means under the class definition not otherwise
    classifiable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33+,    for a combined metal working machine, generally.


CLS 29/401.1
TXT Converting:

    Process under subclass 592 comprising mechanically modifying or altering an
    existing structure, apparatus, or article of manufacture to produce a
    structure, an apparatus, or an article of manufacture of substantially
    different capacity, size, function, or type of operation.

    (1)     Note.  Since this concept was not specially provided for before
    this subclass was established in 1979 and since most of this class was not
    screened at that time, the art of this subclass is incomplete in that it
    does not include all the patents issued before that date.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402.01+,for a process of repair (see the definition of "repair" in Class 29
    class definition, paragraph III Definition of Terms).

    403.1+, for a process of scrap recovery or utilization.

    411,    for mechanical manufacture including the process of obtaining
    plural pieces from a preassembled blank.

    412+,   for a process including separating a plurality of parts from a
    single part, e.g., cutting.

    426.1,  for a process including disassembly (see the definition of
    "disassembly" in Class 29, class definition, paragraph III).

    428+,   for a process including assembling two or more self-sustaining
    parts (see the definition of "assembly" in Class 29 class definition,
    paragraph III).

    560,    for a convertible metal working machine, generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

     92,    Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 59 for a device under that
    class that is convertible or changeable by assembly or disassembly.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 330+ for a process of reconstructing an
    article of wood.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclass 12 for a device of that class
    that is convertible.

    432,    Heating, subclass 3 for a process wherein converting or assembling
    is an integral part of a heating procedure.


CLS 29/402.01
TXT Repairing:

    Process under subclass 592 comprising restoring an existing device such as
    an article of manufacture, a machine, an apparatus, or a static structure
    to a more functional, stable, or working condition.

    (1)     Note.  See the definition of repair in the class definition of this
    class (29), paragraph III.  These subclasses (402.01+) are intended as the
    residual home for mechanical repairing.  Where a process of repairing a
    particular article is claimed, it is intended that the patent issue in the
    particular device making subclass of this class (29).

    (2)     Note.  To make a complete search for a process of repairing a
    particular device it may be necessary to search the subclass under Class 29
    or elsewhere which provides for manufacturing the particular device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    Appropriate subclasses for various mechanicamanufacturing operations such
    as, for example, combined processes for making specific articles,
    converting one article to produce a different article, uniting, or shaping,
    or joining, which operations might be used in a repair operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclass 142 for a process of repairing a
    boot or a shoe.

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclass 506 for a process of
    repairing a movable or removable closure.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 514 for a building
    component having means for split prevention or which repairs a damaged part.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 77 for a refrigeration process including
    repairing some part of a refrigeration apparatus.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 27 for a process of repairing or
    cleaning glass working apparatus and subclass 28 for a process of mending
    otherwise unusable parts or material by a glass working operation for
    reuse, or preventing spreading of checks or cracks in a glass part during
    formation of the glass part.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclass 1.5 for a process of or apparatus for
    repairing a hole or a run in a knitted fabric.

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclasses 101.1 for a process
    of repairing a tool, generally.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 15 for a process of restoring a fluid
    handling system to a sound condition.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 97+ for a process of or
    apparatus for repairing a leak in a pipe or hose.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 330+ for a process of repairing or
    reconstructing a wooden article.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    94+ for a repairing process including a laminating step.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclass 199 for a process of
    repairing or maintaining paper making machinery.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 92.1 for casting of metal to repair a
    substrate.

    166,    Wells, subclass 277 for a process of repairing an object in a shaft
    or deep boring in the earth.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclass 119 for repairing, restoring, or
    renewing a product for reuse.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    subclass 30 for furnace lining formation or repair and subclass 36 for
    repairing or restoring an article for reuse by an operation of that class.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 15+ for repair of a pipe joint
    or coupling.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclasses for a process of recharging or reconditioning a
    voltaic cell, battery, or capacitor.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, for construction involving the
    titular subject matter.

    413,    Sheet Metal Container Making, subclasses 1+ for a process of
    fabricating sheet metal cans.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 140+ for restoring or repairing by an
    operation of that class.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product and
    Processes, subclass 49 for a process of restoring, or aid in restoring a
    battery to its former condition after decay, injury, or partial
    destruction.

    432,    Heating, subclass 3 for a process in which a step of repairing is
    an integral part of a heat procedure or in which repairing of the apparatus
    is effected in part by the heat incident to the operation of the apparatus.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    subclass 2 for a process of repairing an electric lamp or space discharge
    device.


CLS 29/402.02
TXT Seal or element thereof:

    Process under subclass 402.01 of directly restoring, reconditioning, or
    replacing packing material, door seal, or like sealing material not
    provided for elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235+,   for apparatus which applies or removes a resilient article.

    402.08, for a process of repair wherein the part to be replaced is
    disassembled and a new part substituted therefor.

    450+,   for a process of applying or removing a resilient article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclass 506 for a process of
    repairing movable or removable closures.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 77 for a process of refrigeration which
    includes repairing some part of a refrigeration apparatus.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 15 for a process of restoring a fluid
    handling system to a sound condition.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 97+ for a process of and
    apparatus for repairing a leak in a pipe or hose.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a seal having an installation,
    removal, assembly, disassembly, or repair feature, subclass 323, for a seal
    for well apparatus, subclasses 370+ for a relatively rotatable extending
    sealing face member (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.), subclass 421 for a
    close proximity labyrinth seal, subclass 435 for a piston ring, piston ring
    expander or seat therefore, subclass 511 for a dynamic circumferential
    contact seal intended for containment or compression by a gland member in a
    packing box, subclass 551 for a dynamic, peripheral radially sealing
    flexible projection (e.g., lip seal, etc.) for other than a piston,
    subclass 598 for a static, contact seal for use between parts of an
    internal combustion engine, subclass 609 for a static contact seal intended
    for insertion between an end to end pipe, conduit, or cable joint, or
    subclass 630  for a static, contact seal for other than an internal
    combustion engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 11+ for a joint or connector
    with an adjunctive protector, broken parts retainer, repair, assembly, or
    disassembly feature.


CLS 29/402.03
TXT With disassembling:

    Process under subclass 402.01 wherein the device to be repaired is composed
    of a plurality of interrelated attached components or subcombination
    elements comprising disassociating a component or an element from the other
    components or elements.

    (1)     Note.  See the definition of "disassembly" in the class definition
    of this class (29), paragraph III.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403.3+, for a process of separating one scrap material from another scrap
    material.

    426.1+, for a process including the step of disassembling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 127.1+ for a
    building component with adjunctive means used to aid in an assembling or
    disassembling operation.


CLS 29/402.04
TXT Including reconditioning of part:

    Process under subclass 402.03 including restoring a disassembled component
    or element to its functional, stable, or working condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402.18, for a process of repairing by applying fluent material, e.g.,
    coating, casting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, for reconditioning in the
    manner of that class.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    subclass 30 for furnace lining or repairing and subclass 36 for repairing
    or restoring an article for reuse in an operation of that class.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 140+ for restoring or repairing by an
    operation of that class.


CLS 29/402.05
TXT By  shaping:

    Process under subclass 402.04 of restoring by permanently altering the
    configuration of the part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402.19+,for a process of repairing by shaping.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 362+ for a process under the class
    definition of deforming metal.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 239+ for a process of applying distorting mechanical forces to
    solid self-sustaining workpieces of nonmetallic material wherein the
    configuration of at least one dimension of the workpieces is altered.


CLS 29/402.06
TXT Removing material:

    Process of repairing under subclass 402.05 wherein the shaping comprises
    taking away or destroying integral material of the part.

    (1)     Note.  Removing or cleaning of nonintegral surface or extraneous
    material is not considered removing of material.

    (2)     Note.  To make a complete search for any repair process including
    removing material, it may be necessary to search the class which provides
    for the particular material removing process or apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402.11+,for a process of repairing by attaching a repair preform combined
    with removal of damaged material.


CLS 29/402.07
TXT And by a metallurgical operation, e.g., welding, diffusion bonding,
    casting:

    Process of repairing under subclass 402.06 including a step of metal
    welding, metal casting, or metal heat treating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 92.1 for a process of repairing a metal
    preform by a metal casting technique.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 603+ for a process of induction
    welding, subclasses 50+ for a process of resistance welding, and subclasses
    76.1+ for a process of coating or building up of a base by means of metal
    deposited by an electric arc.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclass 119 for a process including
    metallurgically bonding work faces together wherein a product is repaired,
    renewed, or restored for reuse.


CLS 29/402.08
TXT Replacing of defective part:

    Process of repairing under subclass 402.03 by substituting a new part for a
    damaged, worn, or imperfect part.


CLS 29/402.09
TXT By attaching repair preform, e.g., remaking, restoring, or patching:

    Process under subclass 402.01 of repairing by fastening a solid member
    specially adapted for reinforcing, concealing, or rebuilding a desired
    dimension to a damaged or worn portion of the machine, apparatus, static
    structure, or article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402.08, for a process of repairing by replacing a defective part of an
    assembly.

    428+,   for a process including assembling two or more self-sustaining
    parts.


CLS 29/402.11
TXT And removing damaged material:

    Process of repairing under subclass 402.09 combined with removing some of
    said portion of the machine, apparatus, static structure, or article.


CLS 29/402.12
TXT Mechanically attaching preform with separate fastener:

    Process of repairing under subclass 402.11 comprising fastening the repair
    preform to the existing device by a third member, e.g., by a headed,
    threaded, resilient, or impact driven fastener, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402.14+,for a process of repairing wherein the repair preform is
    mechanically attached with a separate fastener member without removing
    damaged material.

    432,    for a process of attaching a part to a second part by punching,
    piercing, or reaming a sharp edge of one of the parts into the other.

    525.01+,for a process of assembling or joining, generally, by application
    of a separate fastener.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, for securing two members
    together with a separate fastener, generally.


CLS 29/402.13
TXT Metallurgically attaching preform:

    Process of repairing under subclass 402.11 comprising fastening the repair
    preform to the existing device by metal fusion bonding, metal casting, or
    heating of metal.

    (1)     Note.  Since this class (Class 29) is residual, a single or
    combined operation is to be found herein, unless provided for in a superior
    class; e.g., Class 219, Electric Heating; Class 228, Metal Fusion Bonding;
    Class 266, Metallurgical Apparatus, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402.16, for a process of repairing wherein the repair preform is
    metallurgically attached with removing damaged material.

    426.6,  for a disassembling process with prestressing of a work part by
    application of heat differential.

    447,    for an assembling process with prestressing of a work part by
    application of heat differential, e.g., shrink fitting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 92.1 for a process of repairing a metal
    preform by metal casting.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 76.1+ for a process of coating or
    building up a base from metal deposited by an electric arc.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclass 119 for a process including
    metallurgically bonding work faces together wherein a product is repaired,
    renewed, or restored for reuse.


CLS 29/402.14
TXT Mechanically attaching preform by separate fastener:

    Process of repairing under subclass 402.09 comprising fastening the repair
    preform to the existing device by a third member, e.g., by a headed,
    threaded, resilient, or impact driven fastener.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402.12, for a process of repairing including removing damaged material from
    and mechanically attaching the repair preform to the existing device by a
    separate fastener.

    432,    for a process of attaching a part to a second part by punching,
    piercing, or reaming a sharp edge of one of the parts into the other.

    525.01+,for a process of assembling or joining, generally, by application
    of a separate fastener.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, for securing two members
    together with a separate fastener, generally.


CLS 29/402.15
TXT Screw threaded fastener:

    Process of repairing under subclass 402.14 comprising fastening the repair
    preform to the existing device by an externally or internally helically
    ribbed means.


CLS 29/402.16
TXT Metallurgically attaching preform:

    Process of repairing under subclass 402.09 comprising fastening the repair
    preform to the existing device by metal fusion bonding, metal casting, or
    heating of metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402.13, for a process of repairing wherein some of the damaged material is
    removed and the repair preform is metallurgically attached.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 92.1 for a process of repairing a metal
    preform by metal casting.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 76.1+ for a process relating to the
    coating or building up of a base by means of metal deposited by an electric
    arc.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclass 119 for a process including
    metallurgically bonding work faces together wherein a product is repaired,
    renewed, or restored for reuse.


CLS 29/402.17
TXT Screw threaded preform:

    Process of repairing under subclass 402.09 wherein the repair preform has a
    helically ribbed opening or projection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    525.01+, for a process of assembling including application of a separate
    fastener which may be screw threaded.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 200+ for a container of that class
    having a screw threaded cover.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 288+ for a container of that class having a
    screw threaded cover.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-deformed, or
    Locked-threaded Fastener, subclasses 378+ for an externally threaded
    fastener element, i.e., a bolt, screw, etc., per se.


CLS 29/402.18
TXT By applying fluent material, e.g., coating, casting:

    Process of repairing under subclass 402.01 comprising (1) depositing a
    flowable substance upon or into a base material (e.g., coating,
    impregnating) or (2) shaping a flowable substance upon or into a base
    material (e.g., casting, molding).

    (1)     Note.  The terms "coating", "casting" and "molding" as used in this
    definition coincide with these concepts as comprehended in Class 427,
    Coating Processes; Class 148, Metal Treatment, subclasses 6+; Class 164,
    Metal Founding; Class 204, Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy; and Class
    264, Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    424,    for a manufacturing process utilizing a temporary protective
    coating or casting.

    428+,   especially subclasses 458+ or 460 for a process of assembling or
    joining combined with coating or casting.

    526.2+, for a process of casting plus separating, removing, or eliminating
    a defect which has been cast in the ingot.

    527.1+, for a process of applying or shaping of fluent material combined
    with an additional step of manufacturing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 46+ for a process of coating or casting
    liquid material upon a metal base (but not casting the base, per se), and
    then deforming the base, regardless of whether or not the applied material
    is also deformed.  See the definition and notes thereof.

    148,    Metal Treatment, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 538+
    for casting or subclasses 516+ for coating operations combined with
    significant heat treatment of metal to modify or maintain the internal
    physical structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical properties of metal.
    See section III, A, of the Class 148 definition to determine what
    constitutes significant heat treatment.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 92.1 for a process of repairing a metal
    preform by metal casting.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclass 115  for processes there provided for
    in which the object treated is repaired by electrodeposition.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 76.1+ for a process of repairing by
    coating or building up of a base by means of metal deposited by an electric
    arc.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclass 119 for a process including
    metallurgically bonding work faces together wherein a product is repaired,
    renewed, or restored for reuse.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    subclass 30 for furnace lining formation or repair, and subclass 36 for a
    process under the Class 264 definition of repairing or restoring an article
    for reuse.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    subclasses 11+ for plastic shaping or reshaping apparatus peculiar to
    product or preform repair or restoring means; see the search notes
    thereunder.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 140+ for a process of restoring or
    repairing by coating.


CLS 29/402.19
TXT By shaping, e.g., bending, extruding, turning, etc.:

    Process of repairing under subclass 402.01 comprising permanently altering
    the configuration of a portion of the machine, apparatus, static structure,
    or article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402.05+,for a process of repairing, including disassembling and
    reconditioning one or more components or parts by shaping.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 362+ for a process of deforming metal,
    generally.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 239+ for a process of deforming a nonmetal, generally.


CLS 29/402.21
TXT Including heating:

    Process of repairing under subclass 402.19 having a step of substantially
    raising the temperature of a portion of the machine, apparatus, static
    structure, or article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    447,    for a process of assembling including application of heat, e.g., to
    shrink fit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 69 for metal deforming by use of a tool
    acting during relative rotation of the tool and the work about an internal
    center, with modification or control of temperature, and subclass 364 for a
    process of metal deforming with temperature maintenance or modification.

    148,    Metal Treatment, appropriate subclasses for processes of
    significant heat treatment of metal to modify or maintain the internal
    physical structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical properties of metal.
    See section III, A, of the Class 148 definition to determine what
    constitutes significant heat treatment.


CLS 29/403.1
TXT Scrap recovering or utilizing:

    Process under subclass 592 including (1) mechanical manufacture wherein
    scrap (or surplus) material (i.e., material which would otherwise be
    discarded) is produced combined with treating that material to give it
    value, (2) using scrap (or surplus) material from any source to make an
    article of manufacture, or (3) treating of scrap (or surplus) from any
    source to give value to the scrap.


    (1)     Note.  To make a complete search for any process of salvaging a
    particular article of manufacture, it may be necessary to search the
    subclass for the process of making the particular article and to search the
    subclass providing for the article produced.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401.1,  for a process of converting an existing article, structure, or
    apparatus to produce an article, structure, or apparatus of substantially
    different capacity, size, function, or type of operation.

    402.01+,for a process of repairing an article generally.

    415,    for a process of cutting articles from a stock piece in such a way
    as to effect  maximum utilization of the stock and thus minimizing the
    amount of scrap produced.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 28 for a process of using surplus or
    discarded material from glass working or treating operation in a process of
    glass manufacture.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 401+ for treating multi-component metal-containing
    scrap having an integral substrate to separate metal therefrom by
    temperature modification or chemical process other than using nonmetallic
    material which is liquid under standard conditions wherein at least one
    metal remains solid during separation in order to recover free metal and
    subclasses 711+ for treating multi-component metal-containing scrap having
    an integral substrate to separate metal therefrom by using nonmetallic
    material which is liquid under standard conditions in order to recover free
    metal.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    94+ for a laminating process including a step of scrap recovery.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 189+ for a paper
    making process including a step of reclamation, salvage, or reuse of
    materials.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    subclasses 37+ for a process of recycling nonmetallic reclaimed process
    materials.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, for apparatus for salvaging by melting
    metal.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    subclass 2 for a process of salvaging an electric lamp or space discharge
    device.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, for utilization of scrap paper in manufacturing.


CLS 29/403.2
TXT Metalworking to consolidate scrap:

    Process under subclass 403.1 (1) including mechanical manufacture wherein
    scrap metallic material (i.e., material which would otherwise be discarded)
    is produced combined with deforming that scrap material to force it to
    occupy a smaller space, or (2) deforming scrap metallic material from any
    source to force it to occupy a smaller space.

     SEARCH CLASS:

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, subclasses 1+ for a powder metallurgy
    process combined with or including heating or sintering.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, for material from which
    scrap (and usable product) may be formed and for scrap material which has
    been made usable.


CLS 29/403.3
TXT Separating one material from another:

    Process under subclass 403.1 including the step of removing one constituent
    from a different constituent.

    (1)     Note.  Usually at least one of the constituents is metallic
    although this is not a necessity for original placement in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The removing operation may be mechanical, chemical, or
    electric in nature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17.7,   for a method of foil making including disassembling of a pack of
    foil work portions.

    18.1,   for apparatus for foil making including means to disassemble a pack
    of foil work portions.

    426.1+, for a process including the step of mechanically disassembling. The
    principal distinction between the concept of this subclass (29/403.3) and
    subclasses 29/426.4+ is that, in this subclass, there is intent to recover
    or utilize scrap material.

     SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclass 2 for a process
    of separating or removing foreign or undesired matter from solid materials
    having a metallic base.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    344 for a delaminating process, per se, of adhesively or chemically bonded
    laminae.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 509+ for
    a process of separating solid materials or articles and segregating them
    according to their physical characteristics.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 24 for a
    process of comminuting or disintegrating combined with then classifying or
    separating according to the physical characteristics of the parts separated.


CLS 29/403.4
TXT By burning or heating:

    Process under subclass 403.3 in which the step of removing is facilitated
    or accomplished by combustion or by application of thermal energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 346 for a process of incinerating solid or
    liquid refuse.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, for a device for heating, generally.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclass 19 for a process
    of removing foreign matter from solid materials by the application of heat
    or contact with hot products of combustion.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, for means to work metal by application of
    heat, generally; especially subclasses 48+ for a torch used to cut metal
    and subclasses 200+ for means to melt or vaporize metal or means to treat
    liquified metal.


CLS 29/404
TXT During simulated operation or operating conditions:

    Process under subclass 592 including subjecting the product being
    manufactured during such manufacture (1) to forces that duplicate those
    encountered in actual use of the product or (2) to an environment that
    duplicates that encountered in actual use of the product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89.5,   for a machine or device for burning in or wearing in a bearing of
    an engine (usually an internal combustion engine) and for running in or oil
    burnishing to limber a bearing or to test for oil leakage at the joints of
    a casing.

    722,    for apparatus to assemble with control of the environment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 66+ for testing a rotor for
    imbalance under operation simulating conditions.


CLS 29/405
TXT Temperature:

    Process under subclass 404 including maintaining the environmental heat (or
    coolness) level that duplicates that encountered in actual use of the
    product.


CLS 29/406
TXT Center locating and shaping:

    Process under subclass 592 comprising determining the desired axis of
    rotation of a part and forming the surface thereof to provide a
    configuration for support of the part during rotation about its axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 644 for a collocating tool with a
    gauge to mark a center location and subclasses 670+ for a gauge with a
    point marker having marker centering means.

    82,     Turning, subclass 170 for centering apparatus peculiar to turning.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 72+ for
    a cutting tool of that class combined with other work engaging structure,
    particularly, subclass 114 for that combination when the other work
    engaging structure is axially fixed to move with the cutting tool and
    engages a work surface parallel to the axis of the tool.

    451,    Abrading, subclass 436 for an attachment for a lathe intended to be
    used in grinding the lathe ``center" and subclass 460 for a work mounting
    device which may support a rotatable workpiece for a grinding operation.


CLS 29/407.01
TXT With testing or indicating:

    Process under subclass 400.1 combined with (a) detecting or analyzing some
    condition of the part or parts being worked on or assembled or (b) visually
    or audibly indicating the condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402.01+, for a process of repairing a void left in a part by the removal of
    a sample to be tested.

    404,    for a process including simulated operation or operating conditions
    not elsewhere provided for.

    593,    for electrical device making combined with measuring or testing of
    the device or a component thereof.

    705,    for means to assemble or disassemble with means for testing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, for measuring apparatus, generally,
    especially subclasses 666+ for a gauge with a point marker.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, for testing a process and apparatus, in
    general, and see the notes to the general definition of Class 73 for the
    loci of other testing or indicating process or an apparatus.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    64 for a laminating process including a step of measuring, testing, or
    inspecting.


    301,    Land Vehicles: Wheels and Axles, subclasses 5.21+ for a wheel
    balancing device for attachment to a wheel.

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, for testing or indicating in
    the manner of that class, especially subclasses 345+ for testing by
    magnetic means, and subclass 407 for testing a circuit for a diverse-type
    electron tube.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 500+ for an electrical
    automatic condition responsive indicating system.

    356,    Optics: Measuring and Testing, for testing or indicating in the
    manner of that class.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, for testing or indicating in the
    manner of that class.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    subclasses 3+ for a process of making such a device, combined with testing
    or adjusting, and subclasses 63+ for the corresponding apparatus.

    492,    Roll or Roller, subclasses 9+ for a roll, not elsewhere provided
    for, having measuring, testing, or indicating means.


CLS 29/407.02
TXT Torquing threaded assemblage or determining torque herein:

    Process under subclass 407.01 wherein the testing or indicating includes
    (a) applying a predetermined twisting or turning force to a threaded
    fastener component of a threaded assemblage, or (b) quantitatively
    measuring the twisting or turning force on a threaded component of a
    threaded assemblage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 467+ for a wrench or screwdriver responsive to
    torque on work.


CLS 29/407.03
TXT Determining relative number of threaded member rotations:

    Process under subclass 407.02 wherein the number of rotations of the
    threaded component is measured or the threaded component is rotated a fixed
    angular amount after a predetermined event is observed.


CLS 29/407.04
TXT Using optical instrument (excludes mere human eyeballing):

    Process under subclass 407.01 wherein the testing or indicating employs an
    optic or light-sensitive device other than a human eyeball (e.g.,
    microscope, camera, photoelectric cell, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics: Measuring and Testing, for using an optical device for
    measuring or testing, per se.


CLS 29/407.05
TXT Quantitative measuring or gauging:

    Process under subclass 407.01 wherein the testing or indicating includes a
    countable or comparable evaluation using a standard.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, for measuring or testing, per se, and see
    the search notes therein.


CLS 29/407.06
TXT By radioactive tracing:

    Process under subclass 407.05 wherein unstable isotopes are used for
    testing or indicating.


CLS 29/407.07
TXT By vibratory or oscillatory movement:

    Process under subclass 407.05 wherein the testing or indicating includes
    rapid motion about an equilibrium position or swinging back and forth
    between alternative extremes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 570+ for vibration measuring and
    testing, per se.


CLS 29/407.08
TXT Pressure, force, or weight determining:

    Process under subclass 407.05 wherein the testing or indicating includes
    evaluating the magnitude of mechanical stress or gravitation exertion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, for pressure and force measuring and
    testing, per se.

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclass 1 for a process of weighing, per se.


CLS 29/407.09
TXT Aligning, guiding, or instruction:

    Process under subclass 407.01 wherein the testing or indicating includes
    means (a) for arranging the various parts or tools in a desired
    relationship, (b) for directing or regulating a motion or operation, or (c)
    for furnishing with knowledge or teaching.


CLS 29/407.1
TXT Assisting assembly or disassembly:

    Process under subclass 407.09 wherein the aligning, guiding, or
    instructional means are for facilitating assembly or disassembly.

    (1)     Note. See the class definitions, paragraph III, of this class (29)
    for definitions of "assembling" or "disassembly".


CLS 29/408
TXT Of a slide fastener:

    Process under subclass 592 of (1) fabricating the component parts of a
    securing assembly comprised of a device (slider) which travels along rows
    of fastener elements to engage or disengage the elements, and any part
    peculiar to such assembly, or for (2) joining together such component parts
    in operative relation to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33.2,   for plural diverse manufacturing apparatus used in making a slide
    fastener assembly or element.

    34,     for apparatus for forging, bending, cutting, or punching in the
    manufacture of a slide fastener.

    766+,   for apparatus for assembling a slide fastener or element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 381+ for a slide
    fastener assembly or a component thereof.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    subclass 252 for a process of molding portions (e.g., slide fastener
    "teeth") along a sheet edge.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    subclass 814 for an art collection of apparatus for making a slide fastener
    or a component thereof of plastic.


CLS 29/409
TXT Of slider:

    Process under subclass 408 for making the travelling device.

    (1)     Note.  The slider is also known as a "rider".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 415+ for a slider, per
    se.


CLS 29/410
TXT Of interlocking element:

    Process under subclass 408 of fabricating the cooperating interfitting
    fastener elements and/or attaching these elements to a tape.

    (1)     Note.  These fastener elements are also known as "scoops",
    "stringers", "teeth, or "links".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    505+,   for a process of joining one part to another by deforming the first
    part into engagement with the other, generally.


CLS 29/411
TXT Obtaining plural composite product pieces from preassembled workpieces:


    Process under subclass 592 wherein two or more stock elements are
    interengaged or integrally secured comprising subsequently separating a
    product member from the stock elements along lines different than those on
    which the interengagement or securement was effected so that the resultant
    composite member includes a portion of every stock element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    412,    for a process of producing plural product members from grouped
    stock elements wherein the produced members do not include a portion of
    every stock element.


CLS 29/412
TXT Obtaining plural product pieces from unitary workpiece:

    Process under subclass 592 comprising separating a plurality of (similar or
    dissimilar) product members from a single stock element.

    (1)     Note.  A process of subdividing a group of adjacent stock elements
    to form a plurality of product members is included herein.

    (2)     Note.  A process of shaping a stock element of indefinite length
    and then cutting off product members is included herein Class 29,
    subclasses 412+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.1+,   for bias cutting of tubular stock.

    411,    for obtaining composite product members from a preassembled group
    of stock elements.

    426.1,  for a process of dissociating an assembly of parts into component
    parts by separating the parts along the line(s) of joinder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    413,    Sheet Metal Container Making, subclasses 1+ for a process of
    fabricating a sheet metal can.


CLS 29/413
TXT Breaking through weakened portion:

    Process under subclass 412 in which the stock element is provided with a
    localized area which has been reduced in strength so as to be more readily
    fracturable than the remainder of the stock element comprising fracturing
    the stock element through such area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    414,    for a process of dividing a stock element into product members
    through a modified portion of the stock element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 861+ for cutting other than through the
    thickness of a workpiece (stock element) which may be to weaken the
    workpiece for subsequent breaking, especially, search subclasses 875+ for
    grooving and subclasses 879+ for scoring.

    225,    Severing by Breaking or Tearing, subclass 2 for a method of
    preliminarily weakening combined with breaking or tearing and subclasses
    94+ for apparatus to preliminarily weaken combined with apparatus to break
    or tear.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 571 for metallic
    stock material having a portion weakened for severing.


CLS 29/414
TXT Dividing through modified portion:

    Process under subclass 412 in which a stock element (1) has been worked on
    to produce a localized area of a different characteristic from the
    remainder of the stock element or (2) has another part or stock material
    assembled therewith at a localized area comprising separating the product
    member from the stock element through the localized area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    413,    for a process of breaking a stock element through a weakened
    localized area.


CLS 29/415
TXT Dividing on common outline:

    Process under subclass 412 comprising separating at least two product
    members from the stock element along a line which defines at least a
    portion of the configuration of both those members, wherein the line of
    separation is other than perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the
    stock.

    (1)     Note.  No scrap is produced between the adjacent parts.

    (2)     Note.  "Other than perpendicular to the longitudinal axis" excludes
    simply chopping the parts apart.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    417,    for a process of dividing a stock element consisting only in
    separating it along a line perpendicular to the longitudinal axis thereof.


CLS 29/416
TXT Coacting pieces:

    Process under subclass 412 comprising separating product members from a
    stock element wherein the separated product members subsequently cooperate
    as abutting, adjoining, interfitting, or otherwise interacting assembled
    pieces of a blank or finished article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    418,    for a process of removing a temporary holding or handling portion
    from between members being assembled in a particular spacial relationship.

    428+,   for a process of joining or assembling co-acting parts wherein the
    coacting parts are not obtained from a unitary blank.


CLS 29/417
TXT Dividing sequentially from leading end, e.g., by cutting or breaking:

    Process under subclass 412 comprising separating plural product members
    from a forward end of an elongated stock element by repetitively
    subdividing the stock element along a straight line transverse to the axis
    of the stock element.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes a process of (1) cutting to length
    combined with significant treating, or (2) cutting off more than one
    product member from a stock element, unless provided for in a superior
    class.


CLS 29/418
TXT Providing transitory integral holding or handling portion:

    Process under subclass 592 comprising manufacturing a product, wherein the
    stock element is provided with a temporary protuberance, or web which
    facilitates support or manipulation of the stock element during manufacture
    and subsequently eliminating the protuberance or web.

    (1)     Note.  "Assembling" of a plurality of stock elements is considered
    to be "manufacturing" in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    416,    for a process of manufacturing coacting pieces from a unitary piece.

    423+,   for a process of associating a separate part or material with the
    part being worked upon, concurrently shaping both parts, and subsequently
    removing the separate part or material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclass 23 for a pipe joint or coupling
    with an assembly means or feature comprising a holding means functioning
    only during transportation, assembly, or disassembly and subclass 38 for a
    pipe joint or coupling with an assembly means or feature comprising a
    handle or handwheel for rotary engagement.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclass 12 for a joint or connection,
    generally, with an assembly means or feature comprising a holding means
    functioning only during transportation, assembly, or disassembly and
    subclass 17 for a joint or connection, generally, with a handle or
    handwheel.


CLS 29/419.1
TXT Shaping fiber or fibered material:

    Process under subclass 592 comprising changing the external configuration
    of a mass of discrete solid particles, each particle being a slender and
    threadlike body (1) while the particles of said mass are acting as
    individual elements so that each is separately shaped, or (2) treating a
    body formed by uniting or associating such a mass of discrete solid
    particles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.51+,  for apparatus and process of shredding metal or producing an
    article from metal wool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, for means for isolating or
    manipulating textile fibers.

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclass 116 for a process of and
    apparatus for the entangling of fibers by mechanical working (e.g.,
    felting) and see, especially, subclass 118 for the compressing, compacting,
    or shaping fibrous material into a wad or plug, and see the search notes
    thereto for other process of treating fibrous material.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 376+ for processes of manufacturing
    glass fibers, filaments, or preforms; subclasses 17.1+ for processes of
    working or treating glass, especially subclasses 17.3+ for shaping of
    particulate glass material and subsequent fusing of particles.

    140,    Wireworking, subclasses 71+ for a process of making articles from
    wire stock.

    148,    Metal Treatment, for a process including metal treatment under the
    class definition.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    62.2+ for process of forming a surface bonded lamina by bulk deposition of
    discrete particles, subclass 161 for process of surface bonding in stressed
    condition of stressed filament, and subclasses 166+ for process of surface
    bonding flexible filamentary material while in indefinite length or running
    length.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 91+ for a process of metal casting to
    form a composite article.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 109+ for process of forming an article by uniting randomly
    associated particles and subclass 174 for a process of forming continuous
    or indefinite length work comprising a strand-like or filament-like preform.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, for a process of producing a metallic,
    alloy, or metal-containing composition in a solid or compact state from
    particulate material.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, and see the notes thereto for the
    locus of other art relating to the shaping of powdered material.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    subclasses 80.1+ for air felting to form a fibrous mat.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 39+ for the residual home for a process of
    making a cigarette filter even if not constructed of sheet or web material.


CLS 29/419.2
TXT Magnetically shaping:

    Process under subclass 592 including permanently altering the dimensions of
    a magnetically responsive part beyond its elastic limit by means of a force
    effected by direct application of a magnetic field to that part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 54+ for a process of deforming a metal
    part utilizing an energy field.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 466+ for a process of shaping molten
    metal utilizing magnetic force.

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 155+ for a
    process of chemically treating a material using a magnetic field.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    subclass 427 for processes of producing and treating magnetic products or
    precursors by direct application of electrical or wave energy, subclass 437
    for conveying or aligning particulate material by direct application of
    electrical or wave energy, and especially subclass 460 for forming articles
    by uniting randomly associated particles using direct application of
    electrical or wave energy.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 219 for a device of that class combined with a
    diverse-type art device.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 3 for shaping material of that class by magnetic force.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 547+ and 598+ for a process of
    coating utilizing a magnetic field.


CLS 29/421.1
TXT Shaping by direct application of fluent pressure:

    Process under subclass 592 including permanently altering the dimensions of
    a part beyond its elastic limit by means of a pressure differential
    effected by direct action of a flowable material which is in immediate
    contact with the part altered.

    (1)     Note.  Permanently altering the dimensions of a part requires
    stressing the part beyond its elastic limit thereby causing plastic
    deformation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    426.5+, for a process of disassembling one part from a plurality of
    associated parts by means of the application of pressure or impact.

    446+,   for a process of assembling using fluid pressure to temporarily
    elastically deform a member to facilitate assembly.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 54+ for a process of deforming a metal
    article by means of direct application of fluent material.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 500+ for a method of permanently shaping particulate or
    nonmetallic material by means of direct application of fluid pressure
    differential.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 331+ for a method of post-treating a
    coating or a coating material.


CLS 29/421.2
TXT Explosively shaping:

    Process under subclass 421.1 wherein the pressure differential is effected
    by an explosion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 56+ for shaping of metal by kinetic
    energy of a fluid or a field.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 301+ for a process of
    blasting under the class definition.

    148,    Metal Treatment, appropriate subclasses for processes that combine
    use of significant heat treatment of metal as a separate step with metal
    deforming using an explosion to apply working pressure.  Particularly, see
    Class 148, subclass 515, and section III, A, of the Class 148 definition.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 107+ for a process of
    metallurgical bonding utilizing explosive energy.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 84 for a method of applying explosive force to make an article
    from particulate or nonmetallic material.


CLS 29/422
TXT Shaping container end to encapsulate material:

    Process under subclass 592 including inwardly deforming the walls of an
    extant end portion of an article containing or material containing
    receptacle to decrease the size of the end opening and thereby prevent
    escape of contents of the receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  In the patents here classified the "container" has a fixed,
    or more or less permanent, relationship with the material encapsulated
    rather than being merely a temporary or transient cover to form a package;
    for example, in this subclass may be found metal bottles for gas storage
    the claims reciting the association of the metal bottle with an absorbent
    material for holding the gases which association of metal cover and
    absorbent material is a permanent relationship.  The mere association of
    the metal bottle with the contained gases only, however, is an example of
    the type of transient association that is not provided for in this class
    but may be found in other appropriate classes, such as, for example, Class
    53, Package Making and Class 141, Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver
    or Receiver Coacting Means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243.52, for apparatus for assembling by overedge clamping by deforming an
    annular member.

    511,    for a process for joining parts in which one of the parts is a cup
    or tube and the process includes a step of necking in the cup or the tube
    wall at its end.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, for a process of encompassing, encasing, or
    completely surrounding goods or materials with a cover made from sheet
    material stock, or for placing contents in a preformed receptacle and
    closing. The processes of class (53) encase or encompass goods and
    materials with a cover made from sheet material stock which serves for
    identifying, protecting, or unit handling the goods or materials. The cover
    is usually removable from the contents when the latter is used; however,
    some exceptions are found to this removable cover, including, e.g., match
    books, capsules, and tea bags.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    for a process of or device for filling receivers with fluent material and
    see the notes to the class definition of Class 141 for the locus of other
    art relating to filling, and see (1) Note, above.


CLS 29/423
TXT Utilizing transitory attached element or associated separate material:

    Process under subclass 592 including (1) provisionally assembling or
    associating a work part with a separate sacrificial part or material, (2)
    performing a manufacturing operation of treating or shaping on both
    assembled or associated parts or materials, and (3) subsequently discarding
    or destroying the sacrificial part or material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for the temporary association
    of a workpiece with a jig, fixture, tool, or other apparatus used in the
    manufacturing operation. Rather, the material of this subclass is in effect
    a part of the workpiece during the manufacturing operation and is usually
    deformed, distorted, or shaped along with the workpiece during the
    manufacturing operation.  Search the appropriate subclasses, below, for the
    associations mentioned above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17.5,   for a process of making foil with pack formation or treatment
    including use of a transitory solid cover material.

    17.9,   for a process of making foil including use of a gransitory solid
    cover material, generally.

    404,    for a process of placing a part in an environment which is a
    simulation of that encountered in actual operation of the part, treating
    the part, and then removing the part for final assembly with other parts or
    for further treatment.

    418,    for a process involving the use of a transitory integral portion of
    a work piece as distinguished from these subclasses in which a separate
    transitory material is used.

    425,    for a process of associating parts, shaping them, and then
    disassociating and reassembling them in a different position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 465+ for disclosure of a flexible tool
    used during deformation and subclasses 54+ when the tool is made of fluent
    material.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 34+ for metal molding with first making
    the mold, metal molding, and then destruction of the mold pattern to allow
    disassociation of the produced article.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclasses 13, 93, 95+, 116,
    and utilizing a flexible, deformable, or destructible molding surface or
    material.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 9 for a process of
    electoforming a roll, a ring, or a hollow body.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclass 118 for process of assembling a
    plurality of parts including first treating at least two of the contacting
    interfaces of the parts to inhibit bonding, or selecting the materials of
    at least two of the parts to provide a nonbonding interface, then applying
    heat and/or pressure to the assembly to effect bonding at the other
    interfaces.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 221 and 313 therein pertains to a process including the step of
    subsequent destruction of a forming surface or mold.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, for a process of forming articles by
    uniting discrete particles containing metal particles, especially,
    subclasses 61+.


CLS 29/424
TXT Temporary protective coating, impregnation or cast layer:

    Process under subclass 423 in which the separate material associated with
    the part is in the nature of a coating, impregnation, or cast layer.

    (1)     Note.  The coating is usually for the purpose of protecting or
    supporting the coated surface during treating or shaping.

    (2)     Note.  The terms "coating", "impregnation", and "cast layer" as
    used in this definition are defined in the class definition of Class 118,
    Coating Apparatus, sections II and VII, and are as follows:  "the term
    coating is used throughout the definition in a generic sense and could mean
    either (1) an initially fluent film or layer of material lying on or bonded
    to the surface of a base, or (2) an impregnating material which penetrates
    the base either  partially or completely and all or part of which is
    retained therein, either in its original form or physically or chemically
    combined therewith".  Casting includes applying a layer of material on a
    base, in which the layer of such thickness as to require molds, walls, or
    flanges on the base to retain the cast material thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    527.1+, for a casting and/or coating process combined with other mechanical
    manufacturing steps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 41+ for metal deforming with
    lubricating of the work or product.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 91+ for a process of composite article
    forming by shaping liquid metal against a forming surface.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    subclass 264 for molding of that class with preventing adherence of shaped
    material to preform.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 331+ for coating combined with
    post-treatment of coating or coating material.


CLS 29/425
TXT Shaping mating parts for reassembly in different positions:

    Process under subclass 592 including temporarily assembling two or more
    cooperating parts of a device, concurrently altering their dimensions in
    some respect, and then disassembling and putting together the parts in a
    different relationship.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404+,   for a process of treating parts in a similar operational
    environment or during simulated operation.

    423,    for a process of concurrently shaping a part with an associated,
    separate part or material and then discarding the separate part or material.

    445,    for a process of associating parts in their operative relationship
    and altering their dimensions while they are in such relationship.


CLS 29/426.1
TXT Disassembling:

    Process under subclass 592 comprising disconnecting disassociating,
    disintegrating, or otherwise removing (1) one or more parts in a final
    relationship of parts, or (2) parts or articles existing in an unintended
    or unexpected association.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass excludes the mere separation of a tool from
    the work (such as retracting a drill from a bored hole) or removing a
    completed assembly or subassembly from a fixture and is therefor generally
    limited to the disassembly of component parts of an article or subassembly.
     However, under the second alternative in the definition above, there is
    here included a process of separating parts in unexpected or unusual
    relation to each other, i.e., a broken drill stem in a hole, or two
    noncooperating parts frictionally stuck together.

    (2)     Note.  Since the term "manufacturing" has been defined, for the
    purpose of classification, as including disassembly, this and indented
    subclasses have been screened and all relevant patents have been classified
    as originals in the appropriate special article subclasses appearing, above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17.7,   for foil making, including assembling or disassembling a pack.

    700+,   for appatus for disassembly.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 741.1+ for a
    process relating to the assembly of in situ erected building structures.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    344 for a delaminating process, per se.

    166,    Wells, subclass 377 for a process of disassembling well parts from
    a well or in some relationship to a well.


CLS 29/426.2
TXT With other than ancillary treating or assembling:

    Process under subclass 426.1 combined with an additional, diverse step of
    physically altering, juxtaposing, associating, integrating, or joining the
    parts or articles and wherein the additional step is other than an
    auxiliary step to facilitate disassembly.

    (1)     Note.  Mere handling or conveying of a part is not considered
    "treatment" as defined, above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402.03+,for a process of repairing which includes a disassembly step.

    403.1,  for a process of salvaging which may include a disassembly step.

    418,    for a process including providing a temporary integral holding
    portion which portion is later removed.

    423+,   for a process which includes removing or destroying separate
    material which has been temporarily associated or attached to a part while
    a manufacturing operation is performed on the part.

    425,    for a process of temporarily assembling a plurality of parts,
    changing their configuration while they are so associated, and then
    disassembling and reassembling them in different spacial relationship.


CLS 29/426.3
TXT With conveying of work or disassembled work part:

    Process under subclass 426.1 including transporting a part or parts to or
    away from the location at which they were disassembled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    771+,   for automatic assembly or disassembly apparatus including
    interrelated work part conveyors.

    822+,   for assembly or disassembly apparatus including a work conveyor.


CLS 29/426.4
TXT By altering or destroying work part or connector:

    Process under subclass 426.1 comprising disconnecting or disassociating
    parts by or resulting in shaping or destroying either a part or an element
    that fastened the parts together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17.7,   for foil making including assembling or disassembling of a pack.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclass 376 for a process of destroying or dissolving a
    well part in a well or in some relationship to a well.


CLS 29/426.5
TXT By applying force:

    Process under subclass 426.1 in which parts secured together are
    disassembled by the application of pressure or impact in such manner as to
    overcome the instrumentalities holding the parts in securement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244+,   for miscellaneous assembly or disassembly tools having a force
    multiplying operator.

    446,    a process of assembling and/or joining with prestressing of a part.

    525,    for a process of assembly by means of a force fit.


CLS 29/426.6
TXT To elastically deform work part or connector:

    Process under subclass 426.5 wherein the pressure or impact is employed to
    stretch or compress a part or a fastening means within its elastic limit to
    facilitate separation of parts secured together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235+,   for apparatus for applying or removing a resilient article.

    450+,   for a process of assembling or disassembling with prestressing of a
    workpart and elastically joining of parts.

    453,    for a process of assembling or disassembling with prestressing of
    parts by snap fit.


CLS 29/428
TXT Assembling or joining:

    Process under subclass 592 including juxtaposing or bringing into ordered
    association two or more self-sustaining or preformed, parts and/or
    fastening these parts or portions of the same part, or separate parts, to
    each other.

    (1)     Note. A Process of manufacturing a composite article by coating a
    base or casting a layer on a base is not provided for in this and indented
    subclasses in that these subclasses require the parts, when joined, to be
    self-sustaining or preformed.  Therefore, a process wherein a part is
    coated or has material cast upon it, and the cast or coated layer joins to
    the part without any further treatment, is classified in the appropriate
    class which provides for the casting or coating operation, e.g., Class 164,
    Metal Founding; Class 264, Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or
    Treating: Processes; Class 204, Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy;
    Class 427, Coating Processes, etc.; but preforming a part by casting it and
    then joining it to another part or a portion is placed here.  The
    combination of casting or coating and an additional working step other than
    assembly is classified in Class 29, subclasses 527.1+.  However, if after
    solidification of the cast or coated layer, such layer and base are
    treated, e.g., by rolling, extruding, or forging, to effect or improve a
    joint between the base and layer, such process is considered to be joining
    for this and the indented subclasses, unless the particular effecting or
    improving of the joint is provided for specifically in a superior class,
    e.g., Class 228, Metal Fusion Bonding, since at the time of treating, the
    part and layer are self-sustaining.

    (2)     Note.  To be classified in this and the indented subclasses, the
    surfaces to be joined, if part of a single workpiece, must be united so
    that a positive seam is formed.  Thus, for example, mashing the end of a
    tube flat without in any other way joining the mashed sides is merely a
    deforming operation and would not be here classified; but, unless provided
    for in a superior class, such an operation combined with the additional
    step of bending the mashed end over to form a positive seam is provided for
    here.

    (3)     Note.  Generally, when searching for a process of this and the
    indented subclasses, it is advisable to consider expanding the search to
    the subclasses of the product made.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclass 142 for a process of lacing shoes
    and subclasses 147+ for a process of attaching a heel to a shoe.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 741.1+ for a
    process of assembling a building in situ, i.e., on a foundation.  A process
    of assembling a portable building is included in Class 29, subclasses 428+.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, for process of
    assembling a plurality of metal filaments to form a cable, and see (9) Note
    of the class definition of Class 57 for the line between Classes 29 and 57.

    72,     Metal Deforming, for bringing together two edges of a single metal
    part by an operation of that class type, i.e., by exceeding the elastic
    limit of the part without additional operations not included in that class.
     Search, in particular, subclasses 48+ for a tool couple pressing together
    adjacent surfaces of the same work to form a tube with a seam, subclass 66
    for forming a helical member by a work-guide member orbiting the
    longitudinal centerline of a formed coil and subclasses 176+ for a
    troughing operation of continuously advancing metal sheet to form a
    tube-like member.  The assembling of two distinct work parts by metal
    deformation is included in this and the indented subclasses as is the
    combination of metal deforming with assembling, if not included in Class 72.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 344+ for a process for assembling two
    workparts, one of which is wood, combined with a step of woodworking.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    60+ as the generic home for manufacturing articles by an adhesive bonding
    step utilizing nonmetallic cements and assembly steps therefor.  See the
    class definition of that class for a more comprehensive statement of the
    lines between the two classes.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 137 for a process of assembling mold parts
    and subclasses 91+ for a process of forming composite articles by metal
    casting.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 378+ for a process for assembling well parts in a
    well or in some relationship to a well and subclasses 381+ for a process
    for placing or shifting a well part in a similar manner.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 114 and 115 for processes there
    provided  for in which the object treated is repaired or parts of an object
    are united by electrodeposition.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, for uniting two members or portions of the
    same member by welding, soldering or brazing; particularly subclasses 101+
    for such process.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes, for
    a method of shaping nonmetallic material, generally, usually involving flow
    of the material; particularly subclasses 4+ for encapsulating a normally
    liquid material, and subclasses 241+ for a method of molding nonmetallic
    material to produce a product of distinct materials.

    270,    Sheet-Material Associating, subclasses 32+ and subclasses 52.01+
    for associating sheet material.

    413,    Sheet Metal Container Making, for a process of or apparatus for
    changing stock sheet metal into a container, generally.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, for a method of manufacture peculiar
    to powder metallurgy.

    427,    Coating Processes, for a method of placing a relatively thin layer
    of fluent material on a substrate, generally.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 582 for an
    intermediate article, i.e., a blank having an outward flange or gripping
    means.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, subclasses 2+ for methods for assembling and disassembling a
    bolt with a nut or with a washer.

    483,    Tool Changing, subclass 1 for a process of transferring a tool to
    or from a material treating station or a tool storage means, generally,
    including an assembling process combined with transferring the Class 29
    tool to or from the working station.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, for the step of or apparatus for changing paper or
    paper like stock material into a container, or other structure, without
    thickening or thinning of the material, generally. See the notes therein
    for lines with this class, e.g., Class 29.


CLS 29/429
TXT Progressively advancing of work assembly station or assembled portion of
    work:

    Process under subclass 428 including relatively moving an article and a
    part-adding location and fastening a part to the article at such location.


CLS 29/430
TXT Advancing work to successive stations (i.e., assembly line):

    Process under subclass 429 including (1) fastening a part to an article at
    a part-adding location, (2) moving the article to a next part-adding
    location, and (3) fastening a next part at said next part-adding location.


CLS 29/431
TXT Advancing station:

    Process under subclass 429 including (1) fastening a part to an article at
    a part-adding location, (2) moving the part-adding location to a different
    area of the article, and (3) fastening a next part at the new location.


CLS 29/432
TXT Punching, piercing or reaming part by surface of second part:

    Process under subclass 428 in which assembling at least two parts or two
    portions of the same part is preceded by or includes forming or enlarging a
    hole in a first part by shearing, piercing, or reaming using a point or an
    edge on another part.

    (1)     Note.  The step of "forming or enlarging" includes a cutting action
    and does not comprise only deforming, i.e., does not comprise stressing the
    part beyond its elastic limit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    525,    for a process of assembling or joining by force fitting.  Forming
    or enlarging a hole in a part combined with force fitting the part that
    formed the hole with the first part is included in this and the indented
    subclasses (432+).

    716,    for means to assemble or disassemble a self-piercing work part with
    another part.

    798,    for means to assemble or disassemble including means to drive a
    self-piercing work part, which self-piercing part is not an "elongated
    member" which would be properly classified in Class 227.  See the note to
    Class 227, below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    92+ for a process of assembling including the combination of adhesive
    bonding with use of a penetrating or piercing fastener.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, for apparatus to effect
    assembly of a first member with another member which other member is
    elongated and is forced to penetrate the first member.  Search, especially,
    subclasses 19+ for juxtaposing work parts and applying a fastening member,
    e.g., a nail, a rivet, etc., thereto.


CLS 29/432.1
TXT With shaping:

    Process under subclass 432 including an additional step of altering form,
    configuration, dimension, proportion, or contour of any part.


CLS 29/432.2
TXT Of first part:

    Process under subclass 432.1 wherein the step of altering is performed on
    the first part.


CLS 29/433
TXT By stringing:

    Process under subclass 428 including the step of (1) passing a narrow
    attenuated member through a series of pieces, or (2) passing pieces
    serially over the member to arrange these pieces upon the member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24.5,   for a process of assembling slats or cords in the tapes of a
    venetian blind.

    241,    for apparatus for stringing, generally, and see the notes in that
    subclass definition for stringing elsewhere classified.

    432,    for a process of assembling or joining including forming or
    enlarging (e.g., by shearing, piercing, or reaming) a hole in one member by
    a surface of a second member.

    525,    for a process including joining parts by force fitting one part or
    portion thereof into an aperture of another part.


CLS 29/434
TXT Retaining clearance for motion between assembled parts:

    Process under subclass 428 in which the parts are finally assembled to
    provide a tolerance space or clearance of fit sufficient to permit movement
    with respect to each other in the assembled relationship.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found parts which when assembled
    have sliding, pivoting, or rotating motion, one with respect to the other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, for a process of making a
    chain or a swivel, and see the notes thereto for the locus of analogous art
    relating to chain making.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    70 for a process of encasing a movable or loosely confined element between
    adhering lamina, i.e., encasing between adhesively bonded lamina a
    drawstring.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, especially subclasses 223 for a flexible
    pipe joint or coupling.

    384,    Bearings, for structure intended to reduce the friction between or
    guide two relatively movable members.

    403,    Joints and Connections,  subclasses 220+ for flexibly connected
    rigid members, generally.


CLS 29/435
TXT Between tube-forming helical coils:

    Process under subclass 434 including shaping or assembling two or more
    elongated members into spiral intercoiled convolutions to form a wall of a
    tube, which members slide relative to one another to permit bending of the
    tube along its axis while maintaining substantially constant diameters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    456,    for a process including fabricating and assembling, or merely
    assembling a spirally convoluted member to a second member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 285+ for a vehicle spring comprised of
    plural coils.


CLS 29/436
TXT Through resilient media:

    Process under subclass 434 including connecting a surface of an elastic
    means to a surface of each of the parts so that the motion between the
    parts takes place through the elastic means by distorting it within its
    elastic limit.

    (1)     Note.  The elastic means of this subclass substantially fills the
    space between the parts assembled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235+,   for apparatus for assembling or disassembling a resilient part with
    another part.

    450+,   for a process of making a joint between elastic and nonelastic
    parts which includes prestressing the elastic part so that the elastic part
    grips the other part and prevents relative motion between it and the other
    part.


CLS 29/437
TXT By deforming interlock:

    Process under subclass 434 wherein a first part is inserted within an
    opening in a second part or positioned adjacent thereto, and one of the
    parts has its dimensions or shape permanently altered by deformation beyond
    its elastic limit to prevent withdrawal or separation of the other part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243.5+, for apparatus for assembling or disassembling by an overedge
    assembly operation.

    283.5,  for apparatus for assembling or disassembling by deforming one or
    more of the parts assembled.

    505+,   for joining parts by deforming, generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes, for
    a method of shaping plastic material, generally, including shaping one
    margin of a workpiece to interfit with another portion of that workpiece,
    as in making a tube, and including forming nonmetallic material about a
    "preform" which may be metallic.  Search, especially, subclass 242 for a
    method under that class definition including joining parts while allowing
    the parts to move relative to each other.


CLS 29/438
TXT By folding part into plural ears:

    Process under subclass 437 in which the second or outer part has spaced
    preformed openings therein and is bent intermediate the openings to axially
    align the openings and embrace a pair of gudgeons on the first or inner
    part in the openings to thereby journal the gudgeons.


CLS 29/439
TXT By wrapping around:

    Process under subclass 437 wherein the assembly is consummated by forming
    the second or outer part into an encircling bearing surface which surrounds
    at least a portion of the first part.


CLS 29/440
TXT Of link closure:

    Process under subclass 439 in which the second or outer part is provided
    with an eye or opening, and the first part is inserted part way through the
    eye and deformed to encircle a portion of the eye or the edge of the
    opening.


CLS 29/441.1
TXT Of sphere, i.e., ball, in socket:

    Process under subclass 437 wherein the first part has a spherical surface
    which is inserted in a cavity in the second or receiving part comprising
    deforming the receiving part to confine the spherical surface within the
    cavity while permitting relative movement of the parts.


CLS 29/441.2
TXT Ball point pen making:

    Process under subclass 441.1 comprising deforming the second or receiving
    part around the first part having the spherical surface so that the
    spherical surface can extend beyond the end of the receiving part so as to
    form a writing instrument.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a process of inserting a ball into a
    confining receiver to form a writing extremity or "nib" (that part of a
    writing instrument in which the ball is housed or the front end shank
    around the ball and the formed ball seating surface).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 208+ for a
    ball-point pen.


CLS 29/442
TXT Allowing assembled sphere to move in single plane only:

    Process under subclasses 441.1+ wherein the parts are configured such that
    after assembly they interfit with each other in a way that allows relative
    movement therebetween about an axis without allowing relative movement
    therebetween along that axis.


CLS 29/443
TXT Of flange into tubular socket:

    Process under subclass 437 including deforming a protuberance on the first
    part into an annular channel in the second part, or including deforming an
    annular channel into the second part to receive a protuberance of the first
    part whereby the parts may swivel relative to one another.


CLS 29/444
TXT Outwardly deforming internally fitted rod:

    Process under subclass 437 wherein the first part comprises a rod inserted
    in an opening in the second part and subsequent separation of the parts is
    prevented by providing a flange on the rod, which flange is enlarged beyond
    the internal diameter of the entrance of the opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    443,    for a process wherein an inserted part is flanged to fit within an
    annular channel in a surrounding part.

    512,    for a process of uniting two or more parts by a deforming operation
    in which an inserted tube is flared to secure it within a surrounding part.


CLS 29/445
TXT Sizing mating parts during final positional association:

    Process under subclass 428 including assembling two or more cooperating
    parts in their ultimate relationship, and while they are assembled,
    altering their dimensions by machining, deforming, etc., concurrently so
    that a proper fit or tolerance of these parts with themselves or with the
    other cooperating parts of the mechanism is effected.

    (1)     Note.  "Altering" of this subclass is to improve the fit of the
    parts; it does not comprise deforming of the parts to secure them to each
    other.

    (2)     Note.  Both parts must be altered, but this may make them fit
    another part.  For example, a rod assembled into a cylinder altered by
    transverse drilling for placement of a securing bolt is included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404,    for a process of manufacture involving treating the part during the
    simulation of the actual operation or operating conditions for which the
    part will ultimately be used.

    425,    for a process of temporarily associating cooperating parts,
    altering their dimensions, disassociating the parts, and then reassembling
    them in a relationship different from the temporary one.


CLS 29/446
TXT With prestressing of part:

    Process under subclass 428 wherein one part is distorted within its elastic
    limit, e.g., by tension or compression, and while so distorted is
    subsequently fastened to one or more other parts while in a stressed
    condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    525,    for a process of fastening parts by means of a driven force fit.  A
    force fit differs from prestressing of a part in time of application of
    stress, in that the stress in a force fit is initiated at the time of
    joinder whereas in this subclass the stress is applied prior to the time of
    joinder.  For example, forcing a rod into a hole of smaller size so that
    the parts are held by the frictional engagement of the rod and sides of the
    hole is a process of force fitting for subclass 525. However, if the same
    rod is stretched within its elastic limit to thin it and inserted in the
    same hole while stretched, and the stretching force is then released to
    permit the rod to expand radially outwardly to frictionally grip the sides
    of the hole, that process is considered classifiable in these subclasses
    (446+) and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 223.1+ for
    prestressed structure in a static building.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    160+ for a laminating process involving uniting in stressed condition of
    prestressed elements.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes, for
    a process of molding plastic material with prestressing by a metal
    reinforcing means.


CLS 29/447
TXT By temperature differential (e.g., shrink fit):

    Process under subclass 446 in which the tension or compression is effected
    by changing a dimension of one of the parts relative to the other part by
    creating a temperature variation between the parts.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is a process of fastening parts by
    means of a shrink fit for example, heating to expand a rim followed by
    assembling the rim over a wheel and allowing the rim to cool and shrink
    into gripping assembly with the wheel.

    (2)     Note.  "Expansion Fitting", as by cooling to shrink and prestress
    is included herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes, for
    heating a member of plastic having "elastic memory" to effect shrinking for
    assembling that member with another member.  Such "elastic memory" in a
    member of metal utilized in a method of assembling is included in this
    subclass.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclass 381.1 for a pipe joint formed by
    shrink fitting.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclass 273 for a shrink fitted rod joint.


CLS 29/448
TXT Of skin on frame member:

    Process under subclass 446 wherein one of the parts is a sheet or web and
    the other part includes spaced supporting elements to which the edges of
    the sheet are joined such that the sheet is held taut within its elastic
    limit.

    (1)     Note.  Included, for example, are processes of attaching the skin
    of an aircraft to the wings or fuselage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    462,    for a process of joining a plate or sheet to a frame of spaced
    elements which does not involve prestressing of a part.


CLS 29/449
TXT By  flexing:

    Process under subclass 448 wherein the tension or compression is effected
    by bending one of the parts within its elastic limit to reduce the area in
    the surface of a plane through the spaced points of joinder.


CLS 29/450
TXT Elastic joining of parts:

    Process under subclass 446 wherein the part to be distorted is a yieldable,
    flexible, or rubber-like solid, and the other part has a mating portion
    which will not accommodate the first part except when the first part is in
    distorted condition, and as the distorted part attempts to return to its
    undistorted shape, the stress between the two parts prevents relative
    motion and separation therebetween.


CLS 29/451
TXT Confining elastic part in socket:

    Process under subclass 450 wherein the distorted part is assembled or
    retained within a cavity in a surrounding part, and the surrounding part
    prevents the expansion of the rubber-like part to its original dimensions.


CLS 29/452
TXT Prestressing rod, filament or strand:

    Process under subclass 446 wherein the distorted part is long in relation
    to its cross-section, all of its cross-section dimensions are of the same
    order, and the part is tensioned along its length.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 223.1+ for a
    prestressed building structure.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, for winding flexible material
    under tension.  Search subclasses 438+ for a process or apparatus for
    making of an article by winding.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 29 for a tie rod for use in stressing or prestressing.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes, for
    prestressing a steel reinforcement means combined with molding nonmetallic
    material thereabout.


CLS 29/453
TXT By snap fit:

    Process under subclass 446 for joining a resilient part to another part
    comprising distorting the resilient part and passing it (1) over a
    protuberance or (2) through a constriction on the other part and then
    permitting the resilient part to spring into a recess past the protuberance
    or constriction to anchor the parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclass 921 for a cross-reference art
    collection of snap-fit pipe joints.

    403,    Joints and Connections, for a joint between two members, generally.


CLS 29/454
TXT Of flexible wall, expansible chamber devices (e.g., bellows):

    Process under subclass 428 for manufacturing a container, the volume of
    which is changeable by means of relative motion of one or more of the walls
    of the container, which walls are resilient, pliable, or yielding.

    (1)     Note.  The devices manufactured in this subclass are variously
    known in the arts as bellows, bourdon springs, "syphons", expansible
    diaphragms, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 34+ for a bellows type
    expansible chamber.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 118+ for a flexible pipe,
    particularly subclasses 121+ for a flexible corrugated pipe.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 118+ for an expansible-contractible
    chamber spring device.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 226+ for a tubular structure
    adapted for connecting two relatively movable parts to form a flexible and
    expansible fluid tight joint therebetween.  See the search notes thereunder.


CLS 29/455.1
TXT Spaced wall tube or receptacle:

    Process under subclass 428 including assembling a surrounding
    circumferential part to a core, either the core or surrounding part being
    equipped with a spacer element to radially separate the two or joining the
    surrounding part to the core while maintaining the radial separation.

    (1)     Note.  The separating radial space may be occupied by a layer of
    insulating material or by a gas such as air.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 743 for a process
    relating to the filling of a cavity in a building structure, i.e., filling
    a hollow wall.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 344+ for a hot water heater.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, for a spaced wall tube or receptacle,
    generally.

    220,    Receptacles, appropriate subclasses, particularly 415+ and 586+,
    for multilayer receptacle structure.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclass 115 for a process of making a
    multilayer metallic article in which each layer is joined to the adjacent
    layer and subclass 126 for a process of enclosing a tube or rod with a
    separate tubular member and bonding the parts together.


CLS 29/456
TXT Of separate helix (e.g., screw thread):

    Process under subclass 428 including fabricating and assembling or merely
    assembling a spirally convoluted member of substantially uniform cross
    section form to a second member so that the axis of the spiral member lies
    substantially parallel to the axis of a right cylindrical surface upon or
    within the second member.

    (1)     Note.  These helices are usually screw threads assembled either
    upon a rod or within a cylindrical aperture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173,    for a process of making a spring, generally, including making a
    helical spring.

    240.5,  for means to insert and/or remove a helix by rotation.

    435,    for a process of assembling a plurality of interconvoluted spiral
    members to form a tube.

    890.03+, for a process of making a radiator to be filled with a liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 135+ for a process of fabricating a
    helically convoluted metal member.

    140,    Wireworking, for a process of making a product of wire, including
    combined operations, generally.


CLS 29/457
TXT Ribbing:

    Process under subclass 428 including assembling a plurality of elongated
    separate fins or ridges on the surface of a part, parallel to each other
    and to the surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157.3+, for a process of making a radiator to be filled with a liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, especially subclasses 148+ for a radiator type core
    that may have been made by ribbing.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 183+ for a process of making a
    heat exchanger by welding, soldering, or brazing.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 602 and 603+
    for metallic stock material having ribs.


CLS 29/458
TXT With coating before or during assembling:

    Process under subclass 428 in which assembly and/or joining is preceded by
    or takes place simultaneously with coating of one or more of the parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    424,    for a process utilizing a temporary protective coating.

    527.1+, for coating combined with manufacturing operations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, especially
    subclasses 293+ for applying an adhesive coating to a member and
    subsequently bringing the coated member into adhesive engagement with
    another member.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, especially subclasses 14.1+
    for a process of coating under that class definition.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 101+ for a method of applying of a
    coating to facilitate a bonding operation.

    427,    Coating Processes, for coating, generally, without bringing members
    together.


CLS 29/459
TXT To roughen surface:

    Process under subclass 458 in which the coating increases the frictional
    characteristics of the coated surface, e.g., by including a particulate
    roughening material such as grit in the coating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 345+ for a coated interfitted
    joint with an intermediate roughened material.


CLS 29/460
TXT Subsequently coating:

    Process under subclass 428 in which assembly and/or joining is followed by
    coating the assembly or a portion thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    527.1+, for coating combined with manufacturing operations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, especially subclasses 14.1+
    for a process of coating under that class definition.

    427,    Coating Processes, for coating, generally, without bringing members
    together.


CLS 29/461
TXT With spreading of cable strands:

    Process under subclass 428 in which at least one of the parts is a unit
    handled plurality of fibers in rope-like form, including opening the lays
    of fibers.

    (1)     Note.  The opening of the lays may be, for example, for the purpose
    of providing larger surface contact with the part to be joined or assembled
    thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    419.1,  for a process of mechanical manufacture including shaping fiber or
    fibered material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, for
    bonding cable strands, generally.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, for bonding metallic cable strands by
    welding, soldering, or brazing.

    403,    Joints and Connections, for a joint, generally, that includes
    uniting opened cable strands.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, for an electrical connector including
    splaying means to separate the strands of an electrical cable for use with
    the connector.


CLS 29/462
TXT Joining plate edge perpendicularly to frame:

    Process under subclass 428 including fastening a plate to a supporting
    structure extending substantially at right angles to the plane of the plate
    along at least two peripheral edges of the plate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    448+,   for a process of assembling a sheet or a plate to a frame including
    prestressing one of the parts.


CLS 29/463
TXT Peripheral joining of opposed mirror image parts to form a hollow body:

    Process under subclass 428 including juxtaposing allochirial portions of
    parts and joining the edges thereof to enclose a space at the interface.

    (1)     Note.  The parts are usually provided with flanges around the
    periphery or are dished in the center to leave a space intermediate the
    edges.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243.52, for apparatus to assemble annular work by overedge assembly.

    511,    for a process of assembling, including joining by deforming,
    including overedge assembling by necking in cup or tube walls at the end of
    the cup or tube.

    512,    for a process of assembling, including joining by deforming,
    including overedge assembling by flaring an inserted tube end.


CLS 29/464
TXT Associating parts by use of aligning means (e.g., use of a drift pin or a
    "fixture"):

    Process under subclass 428 in which adjunctive to the step of assembling of
    two or more parts (1) the relative position of the parts is compared with a
    separate standard or guide part and adjusted with relation thereto, or (2)
    one or more independent instrumentalities physically cooperates with the
    parts to actively register one with the other.

    (1)     Note.  The aligning means of this subclass, especially under clause
    (1), may be inactive, i.e., it may serve to allow a user to visually align
    parts being assembled or, especially under clause (2), it may be active,
    e.g., it may be base mounted and guide one or more parts into assembled
    position or it may be manipulated by a user to position or align a part
    with respect to another part.  If the aligning means is base mounted,
    normally the parts are brought to it, whereas if it is manually
    manipulated, it is brought to the parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 212+ for the process of soldering,
    brazing, or welding employing supports or clamps to hold the work parts
    being joined.

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 37+ for patents to plural holders which
    hold workpieces relative to each other.


CLS 29/465
TXT Registering mating opposed tool parts (e.g., registering a punch and a
    cooperating die):

    Process under subclass 464 of assembling the cooperating parts of a machine
    tool which cooperating parts will, during use of the machine tool, perform
    a treating, e.g., a cutting or a shaping, operation upon a blank or stock.

    (1)     Note.  The cooperating parts of the machine tool are aligned in
    their supports structure by the process of this subclass so that in
    operation of the machine tool, the cooperating tools come together properly.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclasses 107.1+ for the
    process of making a "cooperating part" of a machine tool.

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 7+ for a guide means that directs movement of
    "cooperating parts" of a machine tool during operation of the machine tool.


CLS 29/466
TXT By multiple cooperating aligning means:

    Process under subclass 464 including first engaging each of two or more
    single parts or subassemblies by a work holding member which has mating
    features cooperable with mating features of one or more other work holding
    members, and then moving the members into mating engagement, and fastening
    the parts or subassemblies to each other.


CLS 29/467
TXT Sequentially associating parts on stationary aligning means:

    Process under subclass 464 of assembling parts upon a single work holding
    member by assembling a part thereon and then adding other cooperating parts
    to the member (1) in a particular pattern, or (2) in a particular order and
    fastening the cooperating parts to the first part.


CLS 29/468
TXT By manipulating aligning means:

    Process under subclass 464 including first engaging two or more parts by
    the work holding member, and then moving the member relative to the parts
    to effect alignment of the parts with respect to each other.

    (1)     Note.  Use of a drift pin is included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    271+,   for means to assemble comprising a hand manipulatable aligning or
    centering tool, such as a drift pin.


CLS 29/469
TXT Assembling a subassembly, then assembling with a second subassembly:

    Process under subclass 428 including assembling a plurality of parts
    together to form a subunit, and then assembling two or more subunits
    together.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    182 for a process of assembling a plurality of parts together to form a
    sandwich and then assembling the sandwich with another sandwich.


CLS 29/469.5
TXT Metal deforming with nonmetallic bonding:

    Process under subclass 428 including stressing a metallic workpiece beyond
    the elastic limit thereof combined with fastening of that workpiece to
    another workpiece by adhesive or fusion bonding wherein the securement is
    by use of a molecular interfit brought about by use of nonmetallic material.

    (1)     Note.  The nonmetallic material may come directly from a workpiece
    (fusion or diffusion bonding) or may be added for bonding (adhesive
    bonding).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33+,    for plural diverse manufacturing apparatus, generally, including
    apparatus to deform metal and perform nonmetallic bonding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, for stressing of a metallic workpiece beyond the
    elastic limit thereof without bonding.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    1+ for the process of bonding by nonmetallic attachment without deforming
    of metallic work and subclasses 196+ for the process of deforming
    nonmetallic work combined with nonmetallic bonding.  Especially search
    subclasses 47+ for making an electrical conductor of indefinite length,
    generally, which may include metal deforming.  (Note that this is an
    exception to the general rule that combined operations including
    plastically deforming metal combined with nonmetallic bonding is to be
    found in Class 29.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 141.1+ for a process of shaping of
    a workpiece combined with metallic bonding of that workpiece to another
    workpiece.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    especially subclasses 249+ for a method of molding a nonmetallic member
    into engagement with a metal member, i.e., in the manufacture of a seal, if
    there is no shaping of the metallic member.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    especially subclasses 110+ for apparatus for molding a nonmetallic member
    into engagement with a metal member, if there is no means to shape the
    metallic member.


CLS 29/505
TXT Joining by deforming:

    Process under subclass 428 in which the fastening of the part or parts is
    effected by distorting a portion of at least one of the parts beyond its
    elastic limit, so that portion interferes with or prevents separation of
    the parts or other portion of the same part.

    (1)     Note.  The distortion may, for example, (1) extend a portion of a
    part beyond a dimension of another part to thereby interlock them (e.g.,
    subclasses 509+), or (2) change a dimension of the first part to
    frictionally grip the other part with or without changing the latter's
    dimensions, (e.g., subclasses 515+ and 522+).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.1     through 25.42, 91+, 592.1 through 623.5, and 825 through 899.1, for
    a process of fastening by deforming in making (1) a special article by
    combined diverse operations or (2) for making a special article by a single
    operation not provided for specifically elsewhere in this class (Class 29),
    i.e., not joining by deforming a single operation provided for in this and
    the indented subclasses.

    437+,   for a process of joining by deforming wherein clearance for
    movement of the parts is retained.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, for shaping of metallic work, generally, including
    "recognition" of only one work piece.  Recognition usually comprises
    physical contact.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 35+ for a process of making an article from
    particulate material in which the particles do not bond to each at their
    respective interfaces but are held together to form a self-sustaining mass
    solely by the intermingling and/or deformation of the particles together.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    especially subclasses 249+ for a method of shaping of a nonmetal,
    generally, including uniting such nonmetal with a metal if there is no
    stressing of the metal beyond its elastic limit.


CLS 29/506
TXT Securing cup or tube between axially extending concentric annuli:

    Process under subclass 505 of assembling a first tubular member with second
    and third relatively short tubular members wherein the second is smaller in
    diameter than the first and the third is larger in diameter than the first,
    comprising telescoping the members, i.e., assembling the members so that
    they share a common axis and that a plane normal to the axis passes through
    each of the members, so that the first member is fastened by deformation
    between the second and third members.

    (1)     Note.  The "second member" and the "third member" may be concentric
    tubular portions of a single annulus or may be distinct members.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein is securing a hose connector to the end of a
    hose and securing a bearing seal of resilient material between inner and
    outer metallic rings.


CLS 29/507
TXT By expanding inner annulus:

    Process under subclass 506 in which the second short tubular member, i.e.,
    the inner member is deformed radially outwardly to confine the end of the
    first tubular member between the second or inner and the third or outer
    tubular members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    523,    for a process of joining parts by outwardly expanding a part in a
    cavity to frictionally grip the cavity walls.


CLS 29/508
TXT By constricting outer annulus:

    Process under subclass 506 in which the third or outer tubular member is
    deformed radially inwardly to confine the end of the first tubular member
    between the third or outer and the second or inner tubular member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    515+,   especially subclass 516 for a process of fastening parts by
    deforming inwardly the walls of a surrounding aperture or hollow body to
    frictionally fasten a part.


CLS 29/509
TXT Overedge assembling of seated part:

    Process under subclass 505 in which one of the parts has a shoulder or stop
    which abuts a portion of the other part when assembled therewith, including
    inserting one part or a portion thereof into a cavity in the other part
    until such relative motion is limited by the stop or shoulder, and
    deforming one of the parts over an end or projection on the other part to
    fasten the inserted part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243.5+, for apparatus for overedge assembling.

    441.1+, for a process of fastening a sphere in a socket by bending over the
    ends of the socket to confine the sphere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 274+ for a joint or connection
    formed by in situ deformation.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, for a fastening means used in overedge assembling.


CLS 29/510
TXT By necking in cup or tube wall:

    Process under subclass 509 in which one of the parts is a cup or tube
    including substantially annularly deforming the wall of the cup or tube
    radially inwardly to fasten therein a second part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    516+,   for a process of assembling by inward deformation of a hollow body
    other than by overedge assembling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 382+ for a connection of that
    class formed by deformation.


CLS 29/511
TXT At cup or tube end:

    Process under subclass 510 in which the deformation is at the open end of
    the cup or tube.


CLS 29/512
TXT By flaring inserted cup or tube end:

    Process under subclass 509 in which a cup or tube is fastened within a
    cavity in a part by substantially annularly, radially expanding the
    terminus of the cup or tube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243.52, for apparatus for overedge assembling of annular work.

    523,    for a process of joining by expanding an inner tube to grip an
    outer surrounding part and in which process no overedge clamping of seated
    part is involved.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 382.4+ for a joint between two
    tubular members formed by radially expanding the inner member.


CLS 29/513
TXT By bending over projecting prongs:

    Process under subclass 509 in which the parts are fastened together by
    bending spaced first and second tabs carried by one part over an edge of
    the other part.


CLS 29/514
TXT Of parallel side-by-side elongated members:

    Process under subclass 505 in which the parts fastened together are
    rod-like or strip-like members and are disposed with their longitudinal
    axes in parallelism.


CLS 29/515
TXT Inward deformation of aperture or hollow body wall:

    Process under subclass 505 in which one part has a cavity therein, i.e.,
    has a passageway therethrough or is hollow and the joining includes the
    step of collapsing at least a part of the cavity wall to fasten at least a
    portion of the other part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    410,    for a process of fastening the interlocking elements of a slide
    fastener to a tape by inserting the edge of the tape between spaced legs of
    an element and deforming the legs inwardly into the tape.

    510,    for a process of overedge clamping of a seated part by necking in a
    cup or tube wall.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 382+ for a connection of that
    class made by deformation.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 274+ for a connection,
    generally, formed by deformation, in situ.


CLS 29/516
TXT Hollow body is axially joined cup or tube:

    Process under subclass 515 in which the part having a cavity is tubular and
    the other part is inserted into an open end of the cup or tube and then
    fastened thereto.


CLS 29/517
TXT Joined to rod:

    Process under subclass 516 in which the part fastened within the hollow
    body is a solid elongated member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 84 for an
    electrical conduit the joints of which are crimped together.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 274+ for a device of that class
    wherein components have been secured together by in situ deformation.


CLS 29/518
TXT Joined to overlapping ends of plural rods:

    Process under subclass 517 in which two or more solid elongated members are
    disposed in parallel side-by-side relationship for a portion of their
    length and are enclosed in a tube at such portion and then fastened to each
    other and to the tube by the inward deformation of the tube wall.


CLS 29/519
TXT After thinning:

    Process under subclass 517 in which the elongated member is reduced in
    cross section at the area of fastening before being fastened to the hollow
    body.


CLS 29/520
TXT By axially applying force:

    Process under subclass 515 in which the cavity has an axis, and the inward
    deformation results from the application of force applied in the direction
    of that axis.


CLS 29/521
TXT Surface interlocking:

    Process under subclass 505 in which the parts have generally planar faces
    that carry projections, including deforming the projections to interengage
    and thereby fasten matching faces of the parts to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    524,    for a process of securing the peripheral edges of abutting plates
    by interlocking.


CLS 29/522.1
TXT Radially expanding part in cavity, aperture or hollow body:

    Process under subclass 505 including inserting a part or portion thereof
    into a cavity in a second part and then distorting the inserted part or
    portion radially outwardly to fill the hole or opening and thereby fasten
    the parts together.


CLS 29/523
TXT Radially expanding internal tube:

    Processes under subclass 522.1 in which the inserted part is tubular.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    512,    for a process of expanding a tube outwardly to grip a surrounding
    part, and in addition, flaring the end of the tube beyond the edge of the
    aperture or cavity in which the tube is fastened.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 382.4+ for a coupling between
    a first and a second pipe formed by outwardly bulging the inner pipe.


CLS 29/524
TXT Peripheral edge joining of abutting plates:

    Process under subclass 522.1 in which the parts have margins that carry
    projections, including deforming the projections to interengage and thereby
    fasten matching margins of the parts to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    521,    for a process of joining overlapping faces of adjacent parts by
    interlocking of portions therefrom.


CLS 29/524.1
TXT Riveting:

    Process under subclass 522.1 including a rod-like part wherein a portion of
    that part within the cavity is enlarged during or after insertion into the
    cavity to fasten the rod-like part to the part having the cavity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, subclasses 501+ for a headed fastener element
    having a plastically flowable or deflectable end, e.g., a rivet, etc.


CLS 29/525
TXT By driven force fit:

    Process under subclass 428 including fastening a first part to another part
    having a cavity by applying force to at least one of the parts to cause a
    portion of the first part to be inserted in the cavity, the relative
    dimensions of the inserted part and cavity being such that the parts are
    distorted within their elastic limits to secure them together.

    (1)     Note.  A force fit is considered to exist if the overall dimensions
    of the hole or inserted part are not permanently changed. Thus, the
    formation of lands and grooves in the hole, effected by forcing a splined
    part thereinto, is found in this subclass since the parts are held together
    in the direction of assembly by the elasticity of the parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    432,    for a process of assembling including punching, piercing, or
    reaming a part by a surface of a second part combined with or including
    force fitting the parts together, and see (1) Note, above.

    433,    for a process of assembling by stringing.

    446+,   for a process of assembling in which the parts are distorted within
    their elastic limit before assembly into the joined position. A force fit
    differs from prestressing a part, i.e., the art in those subclasses, in
    time of application of stress, in that the stress in a force fit is
    initiated at the time of joinder whereas in prestressing of those
    subclasses the stress is applied prior to the time of joinder.  For
    example, forcing a rod into a hole of smaller size so that the parts are
    held by the frictional engagement of the rod and sides of the hole is a
    process of force fitting for subclasses 525+. However, if the same rod is
    stretched within its elastic limit to thin it and inserted in the same hole
    while stretched, and the stretching force is then released to permit the
    rod to expand radially outwardly to frictionally grip the sides of the
    hole, that process is considered classifiable in those prestressing
    subclasses, e.g., subclasses 446+.

    505+,   for a process in which parts are secured together by distorting at
    least one of the parts beyond its elastic limits.


CLS 29/525.01
TXT By applying separate fastener:

    Process under subclass 428 wherein a plurality of parts are mechanically
    joined together by means of a detached connecting member which performs no
    other function in the assembly other than to join the parts together.

    (1)     Note. Utilizing a driven nonrotating fastener which pierces the
    parts, such as a nail or staple, is NOT included in this subclass or any
    indented subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402.12  and 402.14, for repairing by attaching a preform to a part being
    repaired by use of a separate fastener.

    402.17, for patching by use of a screw threaded patching preform.

    432,    for a process of fastening parts together by an operation which
    includes piercing one part by another (e.g., nailing, stapling, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 120 and 189 for an analogous
    process in which a connecting part is metallurgically bonded to each of two
    parts to secure them together.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, for a securing means, per se, of that class type.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making: Process and Apparatus,
    for the process of or apparatus for making a fastener as provided for in
    that class.


CLS 29/525.02
TXT Multipart cooperating fastener (e.g., bolt and nut):

    Process under subclass 525.01 wherein the connecting member comprises a
    plurality of elements adapted to act together such as a nut and bolt.


CLS 29/525.03
TXT Nonthreaded:

    Process under subclass 525.02 wherein the multipart cooperating fastener
    does not rely upon a helical or spiral ridge for effecting the joining.


CLS 29/525.04
TXT At least one part is nonmetallic:

    Process under subclass 525.02 wherein at least one of the fastener elements
    has no metal constituents.


CLS 29/525.05
TXT Fastener deformed after application:

    Process under subclass 525.01 wherein the connecting member is mechanically
    and nonelastically altered in shape after application.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    505+,   for a process of fastening parts together by a deforming operation
    to interlock the parts (e.g., riveting, etc.); especially search subclasses
    509+ for such fastening by overedge assembling.


CLS 29/525.06
TXT Riveting:

    Process under subclass 525.05 wherein the connecting member includes a
    deformable element that passes through holes in the parts and at least one
    end of the deformable element is deformed to form an enlargement.

    (1)     Note. See the definition of "Deforming" in the Class 29
    definitions, paragraph III.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    524.1,  for a process of riveting by expanding one part within a cavity of
    another part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, subclasses 501+ for a rivet having a plastically
    flowable or deflectable end.


CLS 29/525.07
TXT At least one part nonmetallic:

    Process under subclass 525.06 wherein at least one part has no metal
    constituents.


CLS 29/525.08
TXT Nonresilient fastener:

    Process under subclass 525.01 wherein the connecting member holds or
    restrains the parts together in a substantially inelastic manner, the
    connecting member being nonthreaded.

    (1)     Note. In this subclass the connecting member is generally in the
    nature of a pin, clip, clasp, or clamp.

    (2)     Note. Joining by means of a driven nonrotating fastener which
    pierces the parts, such as a nail or staple, is NOT included in this
    subclass or any indented subclass.


CLS 29/525.09
TXT At least one part nonmetallic:

    Process under subclass 525.08 wherein at least one part has no metal
    constituents.


CLS 29/525.11
TXT Threaded fastener:

    Process under subclass 525.01 wherein the connecting member relies upon a
    helical or spiral ridge for effecting the joining.


CLS 29/525.12
TXT At least one part nonmetallic:

    Process under subclass 525.11 wherein at least one part has no metal
    constituents.


CLS 29/525.13
TXT With supplemental joining:

    Process under subclass 525.01 including an additional attaching means.

    (1)     Note. the additional attaching means may be a chemical or
    metallurgical bond.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    91+ for a process of nonmetallic surface bonding including use of a
    separate permanent mechanical joining means.


CLS 29/525.14
TXT Metal fusion joining:

    Process under subclass 525.13 wherein the additional attaching means is a
    metallurgical bond.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, for a process of metallurgical bonding and
    perfecting operations therefor under the class definition.


CLS 29/525.15
TXT At least one part nonmetallic:

    Process under subclass 525.13 wherein at least one part has no metal
    constituents.


CLS 29/526.2
TXT With separating, localizing, or eliminating of as-cast defects from a metal
    casting (e.g., anti-pipe):

    Process under subclass 592 including removing segregating or eliminating an
    impurity, a pipe, a flaw, a blow hole, or the like from the sound portion
    of a cast metal body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    527.1+, for a process of applying or shaping of fluent material which may
    include casting combined with other treating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, for combined operations including metal treatment.
     Treating a metal body (which may be cast) in accordance with Class 148
    will go to that class.  The same treating combined with removing or
    eliminating defects comes to Class 29, subclasses  526.2+.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 47+ for a metal casting process, in
    general, and see Class 29, subclass 527.1 the search note for the line
    between the classes.


CLS 29/526.3
TXT Compressing ingot while still partially molten:

    Process under subclass 526.2 including compacting a cast ingot before it
    completely solidifies.

    (1)     Note.  For example, included here is a process of rolling or
    forging an ingot while its center is still fluid to thereby eliminate gas
    pockets by compacting the metal or to squeeze the impurities toward one end
    of the ingot.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, for continuous casting and for continuous casting
    combined with deforming, generally, without separation, isolation, or
    elimination of defects.  (That combination is in this subclass).


CLS 29/526.4
TXT Removing defects:

    Process under subclass 526.2 including separating an unsound portion of an
    ingot from the sound metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    527.6,  for a miscellaneous manufacturing process, generally, including
    casting followed by removing material.

    557+,   for a miscellaneous manufacturing process, generally, including
    separating and discarding a portion of the part worked upon.


CLS 29/526.5
TXT From center of ingot to leave hollow blank:

    Process under subclass 526.4 in which the unsound portion of the ingot is
    located in its midportion, and the removal of this portion shapes the ingot
    into a tube.


CLS 29/526.6
TXT After deforming:

    Process under subclass 526.4 in which the removal is preceded by a step of
    deforming.

    (1)     Note.  The deforming operation of this subclass is often for the
    purpose of isolating the unsound portion to one end of the ingot.


CLS 29/527.1
TXT Combined manufacture including applying or shaping of fluent material:

    Process, under subclass 592 including the combination of (1) depositing a
    flowable material upon or into a base material (e.g., coating,
    impregnating, casting or other molding on a base) or (2) configuring a
    flowable material (e.g., casting or other molding without a base) with
    additional manufacturing, which combination is not elsewhere classified.

    (1)     Note.  The additional manufacturing may occur before, after, or
    during the fluent material applying or shaping operation.

    (2)     Note.  The term "casting" includes the operation known as
    "molding".  The terms "casting" and "coating" as used in these definitions
    coincide with those concepts comprehended in Class 427, Coating Processes;
    Class 148, Metal Treatment, subclasses 240+; Class 164, Metal Founding,
    Class 204, Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy; and Class 264, Plastic
    and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes.

    (3)     Note.  A process comprising casting a metal workpiece and then
    deforming it by plastic shaping is classified in this and the indented
    subclasses, e.g., Class 29, subclasses 527.1+, except for the casting of
    metal in situ in an extrusion apparatus ("charging" it) and subsequent die
    expression therefrom, which is specifically included in Class 72, Metal
    Deforming, subclass 270.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    424,    for a process utilizing a temporary protective coating or casting.

    428+,   and, especially, subclasses 458+ or 460 for a process of assembling
    or joining combined with a step of coating or casting.

    526.2+, for a process of casting plus the step of separating, removing, or
    eliminating a defect which has been cast in the ingot.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 46+ for a process of coating or casting
    liquid material upon a metal base (but not casting the workpiece, per se)
    and then deforming the base, regardless of whether or not the applied
    material is also deformed.  See the definition and notes thereof. Search
    subclass 270 for casting combined with subsequent die expression, i.e., for
    extruding after solidification of material. (This is an exception to the
    general line expressed in (3) Note, above).

    148,    Metal Treatment, particularly subclasses 538+ for casting or
    subclasses 516+ for coating operations combined with significant heat
    treatment of metal to modify or maintain the internal physical structure
    (i.e., microstructure) or chemical properties of metal.  See section III,
    A, of Class 148 definition to determine what constitutes significant heat
    treatment.

    The metal working classes take:

    (1)     Metal working plus an unspecified heat treatment.


    (2)     Metal working plus annealing broadly wherein the annealing is for
    the purpose of relieving working stress or to facilitate working.


    Class 148 takes:

    (1)     Metal working plus specific heat treatment, other than annealing,
    where the heat treatment is other than conditioning to a working
    temperature or subsequently returning to ambient or handling temperature.


    (2)     Metal working plus a specific annealing step.


    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    47+ for making an electrical conductor of indefinite length, generally,
    which may include metal deforming.  Note that this is an exception to the
    general rule that combined operations including plastically deforming metal
    combined with nonmetallic bonding is to be found in Class 29.

    164,    Metal Founding, as the generic place for metal casting processes.
    A process of preparing a workpiece for casting (e.g., by coating, cutting,
    shaping by deformation, etc.) combined with casting is to be found in Class
    164.  Similarly, a process of forming a product by casting combined with a
    treatment to perfect the casting operation (e.g., removal of an unneeded
    portion of the cast product) is to be found in Class 164.  The combination
    of casting with a distinct metal shaping is to be found in Class 29,
    subclasses 527.1+ if not provided for elsewhere.

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 205+ for electrolytic coating
    process including an additional step of treating the base before coating
    step.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    the generic place for processes of plastic or nonmetallic article shaping
    or treating.

            The general line between Class 264 and the metal working or shaping
    classes, e.g., Class 29 is as follows;


    1)      A process of deforming material broadly, the disclosure reciting
    deformation of a metal or of a nonmetal, is to be found in the appropriate
    metal working class.

    2)      A process limited to deforming metal is to be found in the
    appropriate metal working class.

    3)      A process limited to permanently deforming or other molding of a
    nonmetal will be found in Class 264.

    4)      A patent including a claim directed to a process of deforming a
    metal and including an equally comprehensive and mutually exclusive claim
    drawn to deforming a nonmetal will be found in the appropriate metal
    working class.

    5)      A process of deforming both a metal and a nonmetal (included in the
    same claim) will be found in the appropriate metal working class, e.g.,
    Class 29, Metal Working, depending on the claim as set out.

    6)      An claimed process of working broadly or nondefinitively recited
    material is to be found in the appropriate metal working class, as stated
    above, and this will include disclosures of deforming:

    (a)     A laminate of a metal with a nonmetal

    (b)     A "composite material" such as a metal laminated to a nonmetal
    article or workpiece except where by disclosure only the nonmetal component
    is deformed or shaped.

    7)      A process including plural diverse operations will be found in
    Class 29 unless provided for in a superior class.

    8)      A process of making a mold (which may be of cast metal) combined
    with use of that mold in molding nonmetallic material is to be found in
    Class 264, especially subclasses 219+.

    427,    Coating Processes, for a process of coating a metal base generally.


CLS 29/527.2
TXT Coating:

    Process under subclass 527.1 wherein the first named operation comprises
    depositing a flowable material upon a base material or impregnating a base
    material with flowable material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 567+ for
    particulate metallic stock material having continuous interengaged phases
    of plural metals, e.g., an impregnated particle component.


CLS 29/527.3
TXT And casting:

    Process under subclass 527.2 wherein the additional manufacturing includes
    shaping fluent material by means of a molding surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 72+ for a process of coating a mold
    surface with a treating agent and casting on the coated mold surface and
    subclass 75 for coating a preformed base member prior to casting thereupon,
    generally.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes, for
    a process of plastic or nonmetallic article shaping or treating, generally.


CLS 29/527.4
TXT Subsequent to metal working:

    Process under subclass 527.2 wherein the additional manufacturing includes
    changing the configuration of a metal workpiece and occurs prior to the
    coating operation.


CLS 29/527.5
TXT Metal casting:

    Process under subclass 527.1 wherein said first named operation comprises
    shaping molten metal by means of a molding surface.


CLS 29/527.6
TXT Followed by cutting or removing material:

    Process under subclass 527.5 wherein the additional manufacturing occurs
    after the casting operation and comprises either severing or separating a
    portion of the cast product.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is casting, other than continuous casting,
    combined with trimming.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    526.4+, for a process of casting followed by removal of material to
    separate a defect from the ingot.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 70.1 and 460 for a process of cutting or
    removing material from the product of a casting operation while the product
    is still in the mold, i.e., continuous casting with severing or separating
    a portion of the cast product.


CLS 29/527.7
TXT Combined with rolling:

    Process under subclass 527.5 wherein the additional manufacturing includes
    deforming by use of a roller.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 199+ and 365.2+ for a process of
    deforming metal by rolling.


CLS 29/530
TXT Filling of opening:

    Process under subclass 527.1 in which the casting and/or the coating
    operation comprises depositing flowable material to substantially fill a
    void or opening in work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402.18, for a process of repairing cracked material by depositing material
    in the crack.


CLS 29/557
TXT Shaping one-piece blank by removing material:

    Process under subclass 592 limited to shaping a single part by one or more
    steps of separating and discarding a portion of the part worked upon.

    (1)     Note.  The initial part (the blank) may be composite, i.e., formed
    of a plurality of laminae or of parts integrated into a unit.

    (2)     Note.  The classes listed in the following search notes include
    references to subcombinations of structures included in this subclass.  The
    indicated classes may be beneficial as a field of search, but are not
    intended to designated a required field of search.   Note that, generally,
    combined operations will be found in the class of the subcombination only
    if they are provided for specifically, i.e., in a subclass entitled,
    "COMBINED".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    445,    for a process of assembling or joining including sizing of mating
    parts during final positioning.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, for shaping a one-piece blank by a hand held, work
    supported or randomly manipulated cutting tool.

    72,     Metal Deforming, for shaping a one-piece blank of metal by
    deforming and for shaping a one-piece blank by deforming combined with
    cutting.

    82,     Turning, for shaping a one-piece blank by rotating that blank about
    an axis and engaging it with a fixed cutting tool.

    83,     Cutting, for shaping a one-piece blank by shearing or punching,
    generally.

    142,    Wood Turning, for shaping a one-piece blank of wood by rotating
    that blank about an axis and engaging it with a fixed cutting tool.

    144,    Woodworking, for shaping a one-piece blank or wood, generally.

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, for shaping a one-piece blank by
    tensile forces exceeding the structural strength thereof.

    408,    Cutting by Use of a Rotating Axially Moving Tool, for shaping a
    one-piece blank in the manner of that class.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling or Planing, for shaping a one-piece blank in
    the manner of that class.

    451,    Abrading, for shaping a one-piece blank by engagement of a grinding
    tool.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, for making an article of Class 470 which comprise a one-piece
    blank made by removing material.


CLS 29/558
TXT Successive distinct removal operations:

    Process under subclass 557 which includes a first removal step immediately
    followed by a second removal step of a type different from the first.


CLS 29/559
TXT Work holding:

    Process under subclass 592 of supporting or grasping material to be
    modified or treated.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition of Class 269, Work Holders, for the
    scope of the terms "material", "modified", "treated", and "supporting".
    This subclass is residual to processes of holding work by means provided
    for in said Class 269.

    (2)     Note.  Work holding combined with work treating is to be found in
    the appropriate work treating class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclass 106.1 for making a
    metal work holder not elsewhere provided for.

    269,    Work Holders, for a device for holding work.  See notes thereunder
    for other loci.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 285+ for a work holding magnet.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, especially subclass 786 for a process
    of material handling, generally.


CLS 29/560
TXT CONVERTIBLE METAL WORKING MACHINE:

    Device under the class definition having alterable means by which the
    device is modified by adjustment, addition, removal, or reassembly of one
    or more parts causing the device to perform some function diverse from that
    performed prior to the particular modification.

    (1)     Note.  Included here, for example, is a device which may be
    adjusted to either (a) cut or bend, (b) saw or mill, (c) shear or emboss,
    etc.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is residual and does not include device
    capable of modification to perform a function elsewhere classified, i.e.,
    in a subclass that provides for either a "convertible" device or is a
    recognized locus of such art.

    (3)     Note.  Diverse apparatuses are those wherein there are two or more
    devices which operate differently on the part or stock, and which
    collectively do not fall in any single art classification, e.g., milling
    and forging, rolling, and turning, etc. However, where the two diverse
    devices constitute a hand manipulable tool, rather than a machine, the
    combined device has been placed in Class 7, Compound Tools.  Plural
    apparatus which operate in the same manner or constitute different phases
    of a single art are found with the single operation, i.e., turning to
    cylindrical shape following by turning to a taper are in Class 82, Turning.

    (4)     Note.  This subclass was established with patents originally
    screened from classes listed under (.5) SPECIAL LINE NOTE of subclass 33.
    Only these devices encompassed by the limitation of this (.5) Note are to
    be considered for placement here in subclass 560.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33+,    for a machine capable of diverse functions without modification of
    said machine.

    401.1,  for a process including converting a machine, under the definition
    of this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 20+ for
    a machine of that class type convertible to a different class type cutting
    machine.

    483,    Tool Changing, subclass 1 for a process of transferring a tool to
    or from a material treating station or a tool storage means, generally,
    including a Class 29  process combined with transferring the tool used to
    or from the station at which  the Class 29  process occurs; and subclasses
    2-69 for means for transferring a tool to or from a material treating
    station or a tool storage means, generally, including a Class 29 tool
    combined with means to transfer the tool to or from the tool station.


CLS 29/560.1
TXT Vise type:

    Device under subclass 560 wherein the basic apparatus subject to conversion
    is a work holder with relatively movable jaws.

    (1)     Note.  Though "work holding" is strictly neither a "shaping" nor an
    "assembling" function in accord with the concepts of Class 29, subclass 33
    patents relative to the convertible (compound or combined) vise-shaping art
    are placed here and cross-referenced to the particular work holder or
    shaping class for specific details of such features.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein is a device which by disclosure is intended
    for use with other than metal workpieces-- though not so limited in the
    claimed structure.

    (3)     Note.  Included herein is a device wherein the means for moving the
    vise jaws also serves (a) to effect relative movement between a workpiece
    and a shaping instrumentality and/or (b) to operate or actuate a shaping
    instrumentality.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 86+ for a work holder having relatively
    movable jaws.


CLS 29/561
TXT With means to feed work during tool contact:

    Apparatus under subclass 33 including material handling means which
    provides for uninterrupted movement of material while material modifying
    means engage said material.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are spaced tool means for simultaneously
    operating on material being conveyed past said tool means, the several tool
    means generally treating the same portion of material in sequence to
    further modify said portion.


CLS 29/562
TXT Including nonrotary flying tool:

    Apparatus under subclass 561 wherein at least one material modifying means
    has a component of motion in the direction of the moving material during
    the period of material modification.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include rotary type modifying means,
    machines using such tools being classified on features other than "flying".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 284 for similar devices limited to cutting or
    severing.


CLS 29/563
TXT With means to feed work intermittently from one tool station to another:

    Apparatus under subclass 33 including means to convey material successively
    from one material modifying means to another, the material movement being
    intermittent.

    (1)     Note.  A plurality of tools mounted on a common support or driver,
    which support moves relative to work to effect treatment of said work by
    each tool in a single work contacting cycle--between successive feed
    movement of the work --is not considered to constitute "separate tool
    stations".  Even if the work feed is such that some portions of work are
    acted on more than once by some of the tools (as in progressive shaping
    operations) the congregation of tools so arranged is considered a tool
    complex for subclasses 565 or 566, below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    566,    for apparatus including composite tools and see (1) Note, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    407,    Cutters, for Shaping, subclass 1 for a composite tool, per se.

    483,    Tool Changing, subclass 15 for apparatus including a tool transfer
    means combined with either a tool support or storage means, and further
    including plural machine tools.

    901,    Robots, subcollections 6+ for a robot which conveys work and
    cooperates with another machine.


CLS 29/564
TXT Separate tool stations for selective or successive operation on work:

    Apparatus under subclass 33 including spaced material modifying means
    operable one after the other, or at the option of an operator, generally on
    different portions of material being worked.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note under subclass 563, above.


CLS 29/564.1
TXT Including assembling or disassembling station:

    Apparatus under subclass 564 wherein one of the spaced material modifying
    means (1) includes means for engaging a first work part and includes means
    for engaging a second work part, which means are adapted to either bring
    the two work parts into juxtaposed relationship or cause one of the work
    parts to intimately engage the other to thereby fasten the work parts
    together, or (2) includes means to engage at least one work part and force
    that work part to move out of intimate engagement with another work part to
    which it has previously been secured.

    (1)     Note.  For clarification, see "Assembly" in the Definition of Terms
    of Class 29 and see the definition and notes of subclass 700.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    700+,   for assembling means without additional metal shaping means.


CLS 29/564.2
TXT And means to machine work part to fit cooperating work part:

    Apparatus under subclass 564.1 wherein one of the spaced material modifying
    means includes a cutting instrumentality adapted to remove a portion(s) of
    material from one of the work parts to assure cooperative interfit of the
    work parts.


CLS 29/564.3
TXT And means to sever work prior to disassembling:

    Apparatus under subclass 564.1 wherein one of the spaced material modifying
    means includes means to engage at least one work part and force that work
    part to move out of intimate engagement with another work part to which it
    had previously been secured, including distinct means to cut or subdivide a
    work member into work parts prior to movement of a work part away from
    another work part, and including means to apply force to move one work part
    away from another work part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56.5,   for means to sever prior to disassembly if the severing is done at
    the same work station as the disassembly.


CLS 29/564.4
TXT Comprising means to strip insulation from wire:

    Apparatus under subclass 564.3 wherein the structure is particularly
    adapted to subdivide electrically insulative covering material off a
    conductive metallic strand and disassemble a portion of that covering from
    the remaining covering and the strand.


CLS 29/564.5
TXT And means to stake electric wire to commutator or armature in assembling of
    electric motor or generator:

    Apparatus under subclass 564.1 including means to sever a strand of the
    armature coil of a dynamoelectric device and means to secure the ends of
    the armature coil strand to the commutator of the dynamoelectric device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    735,    for structure for securing the loose strand of coil to the
    commutator in the assembly of a dynamoelectric device without a strand
    severing means.


CLS 29/564.6
TXT And means to sever work from supply:

    Apparatus under subclass 564.1 including means to transport an attenuated
    stock of work to the assembly station and means to subdivide a portion from
    the stock into a work part to be subsequently used in the assembly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56.5,   for an apparatus for performing multiple operations including
    cutting at a single work station.

    566.1,  for composite tool adapted to perform an assembling operation and a
    severing operation at the same stroke.


CLS 29/564.7
TXT And means to machine product:

    Apparatus Under subclass 564.1 including a cutting edge adapted to engage
    the product of the assembly station to mill, cut, turn, bore, drill,
    abrade, broach, file, saw, punch, blank, or plane that product.


CLS 29/564.8
TXT To sever product to length:

    Apparatus under subclass 564.7 including means to cut the product of the
    assembly station to subdivide a portion therefrom.


CLS 29/565
TXT Common reciprocating support for spaced tools:

    Apparatus under subclass 33 wherein separated plural diverse material
    modifying means are mounted on or carried by the same member for to-and-fro
    movement together in the same direction.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note under subclass 563, above.

    (2)     Note.  Nonseparated plural tools which effect either superimposed,
    concentric, or immediate contiguous work modifications in a single work
    contacting cycle are tool complexes for subclass 566.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From Sheet or Web, subclasses 340+ for sheet or web working combined with a
    drill and notcher mounted on a common reciprocating head for forming edge
    notched entry slots and holes in a notebook or ledger sheet.


CLS 29/566
TXT Including composite tool:

    Apparatus under subclass 33 including a unitary or integral work modifying
    means embodying structural elements which, in each and every single work
    contacting cycle, effect plural diverse treatments or modifications of
    work--which modifications are either superimposed, concentric, or in
    immediate contiguous relationship.

    (1)     Note.  Included here, for example, are devices wherein a rotary
    cutter (Class 83) has mounted on its radial face an element which burnishes
    (Class 29), abrades (Class 451), or mills (Class 409).

    (2)     Note.  A platen carrying spaced plural tools which progressively
    act on and modify work, intermittently presented from one tool to another
    in succession, is not considered to be a composite tool; see subclasses 563
    and 565, above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6.1+,   for expanded metal making.

    7.1+,   for fence barb making.

    21.1,   for tie band tongue making--which devices often utilize composite
    tools.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 325+ for a composite metal cutting and
    deforming device.

    407,    Cutters, for Shaping, subclass 1 for a composite tool, per se.


CLS 29/566.1
TXT Including severing means:

    Apparatus under subclass 566 wherein the unitary or integral work modifying
    means includes provision to cut or subdivide one part of the work from
    another part.


CLS 29/566.2
TXT To sever electric terminal from supply strip:

    Apparatus under subclass 566.1 particularly adapted to cut or subdivide a
    work part that is designed to serve as a connection member to transmit
    electrical energy from a supply length of attached similar members.


CLS 29/566.3
TXT To trim electric component:

    Apparatus under subclass 566.1 particularly adapted to cut or subdivide a
    portion of an electrical conductor from some type assembly adapted to carry
    or direct electrical energy.


CLS 29/566.4
TXT Means comprising hand-manipulatable implement:

    Apparatus under subclass 566.3 adapted to, during the cutting of
    subdividing operation, be supported against gravity by an operative and
    adapted to be randomly moved relative to the station at which cutting and
    assembling is to be performed.


CLS 29/592
TXT METHOD OF MECHANICAL MANUFACTURE:

    Process of mechanical manufacturing under the class definition.

    (1)     Note. See the definition of "Manufacturing" in the Class 29
    definitions, paragraph III, Definition of Terms.

    (2)     Note. Whereas Class 29 is the generic mechanical manufacturing
    class; manufacturing by chemistry, electrochemistry, electricity, or the
    related arts is provided for in the chemical and electrical classes. See
    the classes listed on pages I-6 through I-10 in the front of the Manual of
    Classification under "I. Chemical and Related Arts" and "II.
    Communications, Designs, Radiant Energy, Weapons, Electrical, and Related
    Arts."

    (3)     Note. The following definitions of terms are used uniformly in this
    and indented subclasses. Other definitions of terms used uniformly
    throughout will be found in the Class 29 definitions, paragraph III,
    Definition of Terms.


            DISTORTING: The physical act of altering the form, configuration,
    dimensions, proportions, or contour of a part or stock within the elastic
    limits of the material of which it is made without any removal of material.

            PLATE: A sheetlike member the thickness of which is small in
    relation to its area measured in a plane normal to its thickness.

            ROD: An elongated member in which the transverse cross-sectional
    dimensions are substantially uniform and are small in relation to its
    length.

            TUBE: A pipe, hollow cylinder, or hollow rodlike member.

            CUP: A tube having one end closed.

            See Class 29, definitions paragraph III, Definition of Terms for
    other defined terms of this class.

    (4)     Note. A complete search for any process of manufacturing a
    particular article may include the class providing for that article.

    (5)     Note. A process as defined above, whether comprising a single or a
    plurality of operations, is included in Class 29, subclasses 592+, only
    when no other class provides for the same. A typical patent of this
    subclass recites a plurality of steps or operations separately provided for
    in different classes, none of which provide for the combination.

    (6)     Note. Many of the preceding subclasses in Class 29 include
    apparatus and include a process which is a function of an apparatus; see,
    particularly, the subclasses directed to the manufacture of "special
    articles" (i.e., subclasses 1.1 to 25.42, above).

    (7)     Note. Patents are classified here regardless of the material
    operated on and/or the number of operations involved unless provided for
    elsewhere. See the class definition, paragraph II, of this class (29).

    (8)     Note. Measuring, testing, recording, article handling, conveying,
    and cleaning, per se, are not considered manufacturing processes for this
    class (29).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclasses 142+ for a process of making an
    article of that class.

    14,     Bridges, subclass 77.3 for a process of constructing a bridge pier.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 741.1+ for a
    process of manufacturing and assembling a static structure at the job site
    (i.e., in situ).

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 396+ for a process of enclosing contents
    in a container, generally.

    57,     Textiles: Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 1+ for a
    process of making a textile by the operations provided therein.

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, for a process of making an
    article of that class.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, especially subclasses 36+ for process of
    fusion bonding of glass to a formed part and subclass 155 for electronic
    device making means involving fusion bonding.

    72,     Metal Deforming, for a process of deforming metal.

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclasses 101.1+ for a process
    of making various metal tools and implements;  see, especially, the notes
    to all of these subclasses (101.1+) for the loci of other processes of tool
    making.

    79,     Button Making, for a process of making a button.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 13+ for a process of severing or piercing by
    use of a sharp cutting edge, generally.

    112,    Sewing, for making a product by sewing; especially, search
    subclasses 262.1+ for a process thereof.

    125,    Stone Working, for a process of stone working.

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 201+ for a process of making a hair structure.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 1+ for a
    process of cleaning or treating under the class definition.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 15 for a process of repairing or
    assembling a fluid handling device.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 97+ for a process of
    repairing the device of that class.

    140,    Wireworking, for a combined operation involving metallic strandlike
    work.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 329+ for a manufacturing process including
    a significant woodworking step.

    148,    Metal Treatment, appropriate subclasses for a process of mechanical
    working or shaping of metal combined with significant heat treatment of
    metal to modify or maintain internal physical structure (i.e.,
    microstructure) or chemical properties of metal. See section III, A, of the
    Class 148 definition to determine what constitutes significant heat
    treatment.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, (a) Class
    156 is generic to adhesive bonding utilizing nonmetallic cement. (b) Class
    156 is the residual (i.e., unless provided for in a superior loci) class
    for combined chemical reactions used in manufacturing an  article. (c)
    Class 156 is the residual home for a single chemical reaction not provided
    for elsewhere. See the class definition of Class 156 for an amplified
    statement of the lines between Classes 29 and 156. Especially, search
    subclasses 47+ for making an electrical conductor of indefinite length,
    generally, which may include metal deforming. (Note that this is an
    exception to the general rule that combined operations including
    plastically deforming metal combined with nonmetallic bonding is to be
    found in Class 29).

    157,    Wheelwright Machines, subclass 13 for a process of treating the
    outer periphery of a rubber tire.

    163,    Needle and Pin Making, subclass 5 for a process of making a device
    thereof.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 1+ for a process of forming liquid metal.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 378 and 381 for a process for constructing or
    assembling well parts in the well or with some relationship to the well.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, especially subclasses 57+ for a
    process thereof.

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, for an electrical or wave
    energy process of manufacture.

    219,    Electric Heating, for a process of metal heating or welding by
    induction, electrostatic, electromagnetic, electrical resistance, or arc
    means.

    225,    Severing by Breaking or Tearing, subclasses 1+ for a method thereof.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, for an apparatus for driving a
    staple or nail into a workpiece, generally.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 101+ for a process of
    metallurgical bonding under the class definition.

     242,   Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 430+ for a process of
    making a composite object under the class definition.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 134.3+ for a process of placing conductive wire in or through a
    conduit.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes, the
    generic home for a process of shaping or treating nonmetallic or
    particulate material. The general line between Class 264 and the metal
    working or shaping classes (e.g., Class 29) is as follows:

    (1)     A process of deforming material broadly, the disclosure reciting
    deformation of a metal and of a nonmetal, is to be found in the appropriate
    metal working class.

    (2)     A process limited to deforming metal is to be found in the
    appropriate metal working class.

    (3)     A process limited to deforming or other molding of a nonmetal will
    be found in Class 264.

    (4)     A patent including a claim directed to a process of deforming a
    metal and including an equally comprehensive and mutually exclusive claim
    drawn to deforming a nonmetal will be found in the appropriate metal
    working class.

    (5)     A process of deforming both a metal and a nonmetal (included in the
    same claim) will be found in the appropriate metal working class (e.g.,
    Class 29, Metal Working) depending on the claim as set out.

    (6)     A claimed process of working broadly or nondefinitively recited
    material is to be found in the appropriate metal working class, as stated
    above, and this will include disclosures of deforming:

            (a)     A laminate of a metal with a            nonmetal.

            (b)     A "composite material" such     as a metal/nonmetal
    article                     or workpiece except whereby         in
    disclosure only the                     nonmetal component
    is                   deformed or shaped.

    (7)     A process including plural diverse operations will be found in
    Class 29 unless provided for in a superior class.

    (8)     A process of making a mold (which may be of cast metal) combined
    with use of that mold in molding nonmetallic material is to be found in
    Class 264, especially subclasses 219+.

    269,    Work Holders, for apparatus for supporting a workpiece while being
    treated, generally. (Note that a process of holding work is to be found in
    this class (i.e., Class 29, subclass 559)).

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, subclass 316 for a process of using a
    static seal formed in place (i.e., in situ), subclasses 922+ for
    manufacture of a seal by bonding or joining, or subclass 924 for
    manufacture of a seal by deformation, material removal or molding.

    289,    Knots and Knot Tying, subclass 1.5 for a process of tying a knot.

    300,    Brush, Broom, and Mop Making, subclass 21 for a process of making a
    brush, broom, or mop.

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements,
    cross-reference art collection 900 for optical methods.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 72+ for a process
    of making a road structure.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, for a process under the class
    definition.

    412,    Bookbinding: Process and Apparatus, subclass 1 for a process
    specialized for manufacturing a book.

    413,    Sheet Metal Container Making, subclasses 1+ for a process of making
    a sheet metal container.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 786 for a process of
    material handling, generally.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, for a process including a powder
    metallurgy step.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 7+ for a process of maintaining an
    environment nondestructive to metal.

    426,    Food or Edible Material: Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 665+ for a process under the class definition.

    427,    Coating Processes, for a process of coating under the class
    definition.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, for a process under the class definition.

    433,    Dentistry, for a process of making or installing a dental appliance
    under the class definition.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, particularly
    subclasses 26+, 51, 55, 64+, and 106+ for certain methods of packaging a
    semiconductor device; see the search notes thereunder.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    subclasses 1+ for a process of making those devices.

    451,    Abrading, for a process of or apparatus for grinding.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making: Process and
    Apparatus, for a manufacturing operation peculiar to making an article of
    Class 470.

    483,    Tool Changing, subclass 1 for a process of transferring a tool to
    or from a material treating station or a tool storage means, generally,
    including a Class 29 process combined with transferring the Class 29 tool
    to or from the working station.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, for a process under the class definition.

    602,    Surgery: Splint, Brace, or Bandage, cross-reference art collection
    900 for bandage making methods.

    901,    Robots, for a cross-reference art collection including a process of
    using a robot.


CLS 29/592.1
TXT Electrical device making:

    Process under subclass 592 for making an article which will produce,
    transmit, or utilize electrical energy.

    (1)     Note.  Subclasses 597, 598, 602.1, 607-610.1, 613-621, 631, and
    874-885 correspond to subclasses with similar titles formerly identified by
    decimals of subclass 155 of this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    47+ for a method of making an indefinite length electrical conductor
    involving an operation other than metal working and amounting to more than
    mere wire of filament making.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 430+ for methods or
    apparatus for winding elongated material directly onto a support to make an
    article such as an inductor, capacitor, or resistor or  nonelectrical
    article.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 134.3+ for a method of and an apparatus for placing electric
    wire.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, for a method of manufacturing
    including a powder metallurgy step.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    subclasses 110+ for composite article making apparatus for plastic molding
    to encapsulate a preform (e.g., an electrical device).

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 58+ for a  method of coating under
    the class definition to produce an electrical product.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, for method of making an electrical device, employing radiation
    imagery chemistry.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    subclasses 1+ for a process of making an electric lamp or space discharge
    article.


CLS 29/593
TXT Including measuring or testing of device or component part:

    Process under subclass 592.1 including making a qualitative determination
    regarding the device being made.

    (1)     Note.  To be considered measuring or testing for placement in this
    subclass there must be a sensed readout of the qualitative determination.
    A process that employs a transducer that senses the device for generation
    of a signal used to control the manufacturing process is placed below on
    the basis of the particular device made or manufacturing steps employed,
    and see (5) Note, section, III of this class definition.

    (2)     Note.  The testing or measurement of the device frequently requires
    thedevice to be placed in an electrical circuit.  A complete search for
    such a circuit would require investigation of the various electrical
    classes providing for similar circuits based or the  proximate function of
    the circuit, e.g., Classes 329, Demodulators and Detectors; 330,
    Amplifiers; 331, Oscillators, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclass 431 for apparatus for
    winding wire on a core to make a composite electrical coil, which apparatus
    includes operation control means responsive to measurement of an electrical
    property of the work.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, for electrical measuring and
    testing, per se.


CLS 29/594
TXT Acoustic transducer:

    Process under subclass 592.1 for making a device which converts to sound
    energy to electrical energy or vice versa.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    150+.


CLS 29/595
TXT Indicating transducer:

    Process under subclass 592.1 for making a device particularly adapted to
    provide a visual indication of an electrical current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 76.11+ for
    electrical meter structure or a process of use.


CLS 29/596
TXT Dynamoelectric machine:

    Process under subclass 592.1 for making a device which is adapted to
    convert mechanical to electrical energy or vice versa by employing
    electromagnetism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 432+ for a method or
    apparatus for making a motor stator by directly winding a wire onto a
    stator core.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 10+ for a
    dynamoelectric device.


CLS 29/597
TXT Commutator or slip ring assembly:

    Process under subclass 596 in which the device made includes a portion to
    be carried by a rotary part of a dynamoelectric machine and, in cooperation
    with a stationary contact, is designed to transmit current to or from the
    rotary part.


CLS 29/598
TXT Rotor:

    Process under subclass 596 in which the device made includes the rotary
    element in a dynamoelectric device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding Tensioning or Guiding, subclasses 433+ for making a motor
    armature by directly winding wire onto an armature core.


CLS 29/599
TXT Superconductor:

    Process under subclass 592.1 for making a device particularly adapted, by
    reason of a property of constituent material which exhibits an electrical
    resistance of zero under certain physical conditions, to utilize the
    magnetic and current effects of transmission of electrical energy without
    resistance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 14 and 25+ for a resistor device
    which is responsive to temperature.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 300+ for processes of producing high temperature (Tc greater
    than 30 K) superconductors.


CLS 29/600
TXT Antenna or wave energy  "plumbing":

    Process under subclass 592.1 for making a device which either transmits,
    delays, or attenuates electrical wave energy by series of material
    boundaries dimensionally related to the frequency of the wave energy.

    (1)     Note.  Some conductors are capable of transmitting other electrical
    currents as well as radio wave current.  A process of making such a
    conductor is placed here only if it involves a parameter of construction
    which is wave energy dependent, i.e., frequency dependent. If no wave
    energy parameter is present, a method of producing such a conductor is
    placed in subclasses 624+, below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, for a wave energy
    transmitting device or system.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 700+ for a wave
    energy radiating and receiving antenna.


CLS 29/601
TXT With other electrical component:

    Process under subclass 600 including joining the device to another
    electrical device.


CLS 29/602.1
TXT Electromagnet, transformer or inductor:

    Process under subclass 592.1 for making a device which either (1) exhibits
    magnetic attraction when electrical current is applied, or (2) changes the
    magnitude or phase of an alternating current by inductive coupling, or (c)
    impedes a change of current flow by induced magnetism.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this and the indented subclasses is a process of
    making a permanent magnet, that is, a magnetic body which has been
    magnetized, or which may later be magnetized, and an electromagnetic coil,
    with or without a core of magnetic material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 100 through 122 for a process of
    modifying magnetic properties of metal except as indicated in (2) Note in
    the definition of Class 148, subclass 100, and the appended search note to
    Class 29.  Thus, a method consisting of working or assembling metallic
    material, having intended effect upon the magnetic properties of the
    material, combined with broad treatment in a magnetic field, is classified
    in subclasses 602.1+ of this class (29).  See (6) Note, below.

    (1.5)   Note.  For an electromagnet or ransformer or a related  product,
    see below:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 300+ for metal stock having magnetic
    properties resulting from a process classifiable in any of subclasses 100
    to 122.  See the reference to Class 148 in (4) Note, below.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 45 for a conductor which is provided with
    loading (magnetic) means and subclass 46 for the structure of induction or
    inductance coil for cables.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 62.51 and the classes and subclasses
    specified in the notes thereto for a composition specialized and designed
    for use as magnetic material, a substance peculiar to such a composition
    and the process of making such a composition and substance.  Subclass 62.51
    also takes a process of making such a composition combined with magnetizing
    and/or broad molding as well as any combination these steps with a heat
    treating operation except where heat treatment modifies a magnetic property
    of a metallic component of the composition, in which case the process is
    classified in Class 148.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 209 for magnet and electromagnet structure.

    336,    Inductor Devices, for the structure of a transformer or inductive
    reactor.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 131 and
    the classes specified in the notes to the definition of that subclass for
    magnetic records.

    427,    Coating Processes, for a process of coating, per se, note
    especially subclass 58 for process wherein an electrical product is
    produced and subclass 127 for a process wherein a product having a magnetic
    base or coating is produced.

    (2)     Note.  For other classes which provide for combination of winding
    or coiling and coating for impregnating operations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, for a method of or apparatus for encompassing or
    encasing goods or materials with a separate cover or band which serves as
    means for identifying, protecting, or unit handling the goods or materials.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, for a
    process and apparatus for making a laminated article.  Subclasses 184 and
    446, for example, include the operations of winding and adhering the
    windings.  This reference to Class 156 should be compared with the
    reference to Classes 242 and 427 in this note.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 430+ for a machine or
    method of winding an electromagnet, transformer, or inductor coil where a
    coating is applied to the winding as an incident to the winding.  Class 242
    includes coating the wire or other material as it is being wound.  This
    reference to Class 242 should be compared with the reference to Class 156
    in this note.

    (3)     Note.  For the making of an electromagnet, inductance, or coil by a
    winding operation, see note (2) above, where the process or apparatus also
    includes coating or impregnating, and search the following classes for
    other classes and subclasses which provide for winding or coiling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33+,    for a miscellaneous organized machine not otherwise classified
    adapted to perform a plurality of operations upon metal in manufacturing an
    electromagnet, inductor or transformer or a part thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, for a method of or apparatus for encompassing or
    encasing goods or materials with a separate cover or band which serves as
    means for identifying, protecting, or unit handling the goods or materials.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 66, 135, and 371 for wire coiling.

    140,    Wireworking, subclasses 71+ for miscellaneous apparatus for coiling
    or winding wire which involves combined wire working operations.  See
    indented subclass 92.1 for a device on or by which material, generally
    wire, is wound to produce a coil of predetermined form or shape, the device
    being mostly formers for winding an armature inductance and a electromagnet
    coil.  Winding wire upon a stationary form is in subclass 71.  Where the
    coil or winding is intended to be removed from the mandrel or former, or
    where the coil is shaped after winding, the patent is in Class 140.  See
    Class 140, subclass 76  for making a ferrule of wire by coiling, subclass
    86 for making a wire cork or stopper extractor of spiral form and, subclass
    92 for making a spiral stud (shirt stud) which includes a conical of wire.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, for apparatus or process of making
    by winding an article such as an electromagnet, inductor, or coil.  Class
    242 includes other operations incidental or essential to the winding
    operation.  Usually in Class 242, the wire or other material is wound upon
    a mandrel or former upon which the wire or other material is to remain, or
    the wire is wound into a form such as cylinder or conoid which is analogous
    to the form in which wire or thread is wound for the purpose of storage.

    427,    Coating Processes, for a process of coating, per se, and note
    especially subclasses 58+ for a process wherein an electrical product is
    produced and subclass 127 for a process wherein a product having a magnetic
    base or coating is produced.

    (4)     Note.  For making a magnet or magnetic core from comminuted
    materials and for the classes which provide for analogous method or
    apparatus for making an article from comminuted materials.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use therein,
    Consolidated, Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 255+ for loose mixtures of two or more comminuted
    elemental metals or alloys.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclass 104 relating to dust cores for a process
    that involves microstructural change wherein magnetic properties of free
    metal or metal alloys are developed, improved, modified, or preserved.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, for a miscellaneous
    process and apparatus for the comminution and disintegration of solid
    material.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 62.51 for a miscellaneous magnetic
    composition.  The notes of Class 252, subclass 62.51, refer to classes and
    subclasses for miscellaneous compositions containing nonmetallic materials
    and comminuted metals which exhibit magnetic properties.  See also the
    search note to Class 252 in (1.5) Note, above.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 117 for a method of forming an article by uniting of discrete bulk
    assembled particles.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, for a process of making a compact or
    sintered article from comminuted metal or metal-containing composition by
    the application of heat or pressure without melting of the ingredients.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, appropriate subclasses for a
    single metal in comminuted form.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 546+ for a
    metal blank containing metal particles.

    (5)     Note.  For other classes and subclasses which provide for making
    magnets and magnetic cores from laminated metal, see the classes referred
    to under (3) Note above, where the laminating is performed by winding
    operations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, for a
    miscellaneous process of laminating layers with a nonmetallic adhesive.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 432 and 457
    for a plural layer product in which at least one layer is a metal and is
    next to a layer of nonmetal material and subclass 900 (a cross-reference
    art collection) for a product having a magnetic feature.

    (6)     Note.  A process of making a magnet or magnet inductance or
    transformer core which includes the operation of magnetizing the core and
    another operation are in general classified with such other operation
    unless the class which provides for the other operation excludes combined
    operations in which case the patent is classified in this or one of the
    indented subclasses. For example, processes of making magnets and magnet
    inductance or transformer cores which include the operation of magnetizing
    the core and another operation are, in general, classified with such other
    operation unless the class which provides for the other operation excludes
    combined operations in which case the patent is classified in this or one
    of the indented subclasses. For example, Class 148, Metal Treatment,
    subclass 100 contains many patents for significant heat treatment of metal
    and intentionally magnetizing

    (7)     Note.  For other classes which provide for manufacturing process
    and apparatus, see the notes to the definitions of Class 29, subclasses
    25.01+ and subclass 25.41 of this class.  Subclasses 25.41+ provides for
    electric condenser making.  Subclasses 25.01+ provide for a method or
    apparatus for making a semiconductor or barrier layer device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25.01+, see (7) Note, above.

    25.41+, see (7) Note, above.

    33+,    for a miscellaneous organized machine not classified in any other
    class or subclass, adapted to perform a plurality of operations upon metal,
    including a machine designed for making an electromagnet, inductor, or
    transformer, or for making a part thereof.  See the reference to subclasses
    33+ in (3) Note, above.

    598,    for a miscellaneous process of making a rotor or part thereof,
    other than a commutator, for a dynamoelectric machine.

    729+,   for miscellaneous apparatus for assembling or disassembling an
    electrical device, including means to assemble an electromagnet, an
    inductance device, a transformer, or associated parts thereof.  Note that
    indented subclass 732 provides for such apparatus for assembling a motor, a
    generator, or a subcombination thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, for a method of metal deforming, per se, and see
    the reference to Class 72 in (3) Note, above.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use therein,
    Consolidated, Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, for a process of producing a metal or an alloy and subclass 122.1
    for a process of making an alloy.  See the reference to Class 75 in (1.5)
    Note and (4) Note, above.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, for a miscellaneous coating,
    impregnating, or plastic composition.

    140,    Wireworking, for a miscellaneous process and apparatus for wire
    working including the working of wire by banding or twisting it to form a
    specific article or fabric, the applying of wire to an article, and
    cutting, feeding, straightening and tensioning wire.  See the reference to
    Class 140 in (3) Note above.

    148,    Metal Treatment, for a miscellaneous process of treating solid
    metal, including magnetic material, and the resulting product.  See the
    reference to Class 148, Notes (1.5), (4), and (6), above.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, for a
    process and apparatus for making a laminated article or fabric.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 45, see (1.5) Note, above.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, see the reference to
    this class in (4) Note, above.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclass 899 for a miscellaneous
    process and apparatus for making an article by winding and miscellaneous
    apparatus for winding or unwinding flexible material, such as wire or
    fabric, from a holder.  See the reference to Class 242 in (2) and (3)
    Notes, above.

    252,    Compositions, see the reference to this class in (1.5) Note, above.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    for a miscellaneous process for the working, especially by molding and
    casting of miscellaneous plastic materials, to make and reproduce an
    article of definite shape and for a process for the shaping and embossing
    of a sheet of miscellaneous plastic material to make an article of a
    definite shape including combinations with other operations, e.g., coating.
     See the reference to Class 264 in (4) Note, above.

    269,    Work Holders, for a miscellaneous work holder.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 200 for a process
    apparatus for testing the magnetic properties of an article or material and
    also for a testing process and apparatus which utilize magnetic effects.

    336,    Inductor Devices, see (1.5) Note, above.


CLS 29/603.01
TXT Magnetic recording reproducing transducer (e.g., tape head, core, etc.):

    Process under subclass 602.1 of manufacturing a device especially adapted
    to read or write an electrical signal from or onto a moving magnetic
    copying media such as a tape or disc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 102+
    and 110+ for magnetic recording or reproducing transducer.


CLS 29/603.02
TXT Including disassembly step:

    Process under subclass 603.01 having a disassembly operation.

    (1)     Note. The term "disassembly" is defined in the Class 29 general
    class definition, Section III.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    426.1+, for a process of disassembly not elsewhere provided for, and see
    the search notes thereunder.


CLS 29/603.03
TXT Making disc drive:

    Process under subclass 603.01 wherein the manufactured device is especially
    adapted for transmitting motion to or applying mechanical force to a thin,
    flat, circular recording plate.


CLS 29/603.04
TXT Mounting preformed head/core onto other structure:

    Process under subclass 603.01 wherein a premanufactured recording head or
    core is assembled or permanently associated with additional parts or
    components.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    428+,   for a process of assembly or joining not elsewhere provided for,
    and see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 29/603.05
TXT Mounting multitrack head:

    Process under subclass 603.04 wherein the premanufactured recording head or
    core is provided with a plurality of reading or writing portions.


CLS 29/603.06
TXT With bonding:

    Process under subclass 603.04 wherein the assembled or permanently
    associated head or core is solvent or heat joined or secured with glue,
    filler metal, glass, or cement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    469.5,  for an assembly process including metal deforming and nonmetallic
    bonding.


CLS 29/603.07
TXT Fabricating head structure or component thereof:

    Process under subclass 603.01 including producing or manufacturing the
    head, core, or part thereof.


CLS 29/603.08
TXT Treating to affect magnetic properties:

    Process under subclass 603.07 wherein the fabricated head structure or
    component thereof is processed or acted upon to materially alter or
    influence the magnetic characteristics.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 100+ for a process of heat treating
    magnetic material under the class definition; Class 148 specifically
    provides for metalworking or assembly in combination with metal treatment.


CLS 29/603.09
TXT Including measuring or testing:

    Process under subclass 603.07 wherein (a) a dimension, a quantity, or a
    capacity is ascertained, or (b) some condition of the device or component
    is detected or analyzed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404,    for a process including simulated operation or operating conditions
    not elsewhere provided for.

    407.01+,for a process including testing or indicating not elsewhere
    provided for and see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 29/603.1
TXT Using reference point/surface to facilitate measuring:

    Process under subclass 603.09 wherein a specific locus or surface boundary
    is utilized as a benchmark to accomplish the measuring.


CLS 29/603.11
TXT With dual gap materials:

    Process under subclass 603.09 wherein the fabricated head structure
    utilizes at least two substantially different substances in the operating
    magnetic break.


CLS 29/603.12
TXT With significant slider/housing shaping or treating:

    Process under subclass 603.09 wherein the fabricated head structure or
    component thereof is subjected to a meaningful or notable processing or
    forming of the working surface or cover structure.


CLS 29/603.13
TXT Depositing magnetic layer or coating:

    Process under subclass 603.09 wherein at least one magnetic material
    deposition covering or striation is formed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 58+ for a process of producing an
    electrical product by coating steps and perfecting operations.


CLS 29/603.14
TXT Plural magnetic deposition layers:

    Process under subclass 603.13 wherein at least two magnetic deposition
    layers or coatings are created.


CLS 29/603.15
TXT With etching or machining of magnetic material:

    Process under subclass 603.13 wherein the deposited magnetic layer is
    chemically or mechanically shaped by removing material therefrom.


CLS 29/603.16
TXT Machining magnetic material (e.g., grinding, etching, polishing):

    Process under subclass 603.07 wherein the magnetic substance is
    mechanically or chemically shaped by removing material therefrom.


CLS 29/603.17
TXT Employing workholding means:

    Process under subclass 603.16 having means for restraining or supporting
    the workpiece during treating or processing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    557,    for a process of workholding not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 29/603.18
TXT By etching:

    Process under subclass 603.16 wherein the shaping is done by electrolytic
    or chemical action.


CLS 29/603.19
TXT Multitrack heads having integral holding means:

    Process under subclass 603.07 wherein the fabricated head, core, or part
    thereof is provided with a plurality of reading or writing portions, all of
    which have constituent retaining means.


CLS 29/603.2
TXT With bond/laminating preformed parts, at least two magnetic:

    Process under subclass 603.07 wherein the fabricated head, core, or part
    thereof is made up of a plurality of previously fabricated parts adhered or
    secured together, two or more parts being magnetic.


CLS 29/603.21
TXT Using glass bonding material:

    Process under subclass 603.2 wherein the parts are adhered or secured
    together by means of a vitreous composition.


CLS 29/603.22
TXT With work positioning means:

    Process under subclass 603.2 including means for appropriately locating or
    arranging the workpiece or component thereof.


CLS 29/603.23
TXT Providing winding:

    Process under subclass 603.07 wherein the fabricated head structure or
    component thereof is furnished with or supplied with at least one
    electromagnetic coil loop.


CLS 29/603.24
TXT Multilayered winding:

    Process under subclass 603.23 wherein the winding is made up of a plurality
    of substrates or strata.


CLS 29/603.25
TXT By coating:

    Process under subclass 603.23 wherein the winding is formed from a
    deposition layer.


CLS 29/603.26
TXT Preformed winding:

    Process under subclass 603.23 wherein the winding is provided as a
    previously fabricated component.


CLS 29/603.27
TXT Specific diverse magnetic materials:

    Process under subclass 603.07 wherein the fabricated head structure or
    component thereof includes two or more distinct magnetic compositions.


CLS 29/604
TXT Data storage inductor or core:

    Process under subclass 602.1 for making a device particularly adapted for
    use in information storage application.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 129+ for data
    storage/retrieval of information using particular type elements.


CLS 29/605
TXT By winding or coiling:

    Process under subclass 602.1 including feeding a conductor on a rotating
    center member or placing successive turns of a conductor about a fixed
    center.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for a winding or coiling operation
    combined with another step, usually metal working, which precludes
    placement based on the winding or coiling step, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 430+ for making an
    article solely by directly winding an elongated material onto a core,
    particularly subclasses 434+ for winding through a ring shaped core,
    subclasses 437+ for winding on an irregularly shaped core, subclasses 439+
    for winding onto a core by orbiting a material supply about the core, and
    subclasses 443+ for winding onto a rotating core.


CLS 29/606
TXT By assembling coil and core:

    Process under subclass 602.1 including joining a wound inductance in
    operative relation with a solid having magnetic properties.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    452,    for a process of prestressing a filament or strand and while it is
    stressed, assembling it with another part, e.g., a core or mandrel.

    456,    for a process of making and/or assembling a helix upon or within a
    cylindrical member.

    598,    for a process of assembling the windings or coils with the core or
    armature of a rotor for a dynamoelectric machine.

    605,    for this subject matter where the assembling process includes a
    winding or coiling operation.

    729+,   for miscellaneous apparatus for assembling a coil and a core of an
    electromagnet, inductor or transformer, or their associated parts, and
    especially subclasses 732+ for such apparatus for assembling a motor or
    generator, or the parts thereof.


CLS 29/607
TXT Including permanent magnet or core:

    Process under subclass 602.1 for making a permanent magnet or a core for a
    magnet, inductor, or transformer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 62 for a
    permanent magnet used as a component in a magnetic storage device.


CLS 29/608
TXT From comminuted material:

    Process under subclass 607 in which magnet or core is made from comminuted
    material.

    (1)     Note.  See (4) Note to the definition of subclass 602.1 for the
    other classes which provide for a process or apparatus for making a magnet
    or core from comminuted materials.


CLS 29/609
TXT Laminated:

    Process under subclass 607 for making a laminated magnet or core.

    (1)     Note.  See (5) Note to the definition of subclass 602.1 for the
    other classes which provide for a process or apparatus for making a
    laminated magnet or core, or parts thereof.


CLS 29/609.1
TXT Acoustic transducer:

    Process under subclass 602.1 wherein the device either (1) includes wires
    mounted for vibration, and means to induce vibrations in the wires or (2)
    converts electromagnetic energy to sound energy or vice versa.


CLS 29/610.1
TXT Resistor making:

    Process under subclass 592.1 for making an electrical resistor and
    including (1) a process for making a resistor which involves metal working,
    (2) a process for making a resistor which involves metal working combined
    with an nonmetal working process such as chemical or metallurgical and not
    otherwise classifiable, and (3) a process for making a resistor not
    otherwise classifiable.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition under Class 33, Electrical
    Resistors, for the definition of an electrical resistor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    631,    for a method of making an insulator.

    729+,   for apparatus for assembly and disassembly of a electrical device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, for a resistance making method involving incasing
    or covering or depositing fluent materials in a preformed receptacle and
    not otherwise classifiable.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 68, 135 and 371 for wire coiling.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, for resistor coating apparatus.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 4+ for a solid metal treatment process,
    such as case hardening or heat treating, for making resistors.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, for a
    process and device for making a resistor involving only a laminating step
    or in which the resistor is a running or indefinite length conductor.

    164,    Metal Founding, for a metal founding process.

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 1+ for an
    electrolytic process of resistor making and subclasses 155, 157.15, and 164
    for a process of making an electrical resistor involving electrical or wave
    energy chemistry.

    216,    Etching a Substrate: Processes, subclass 16 for the use of a
    resistor in an electrical circuit.

    219,    Electric Heating, for a process not otherwise classifiable of
    making an electrical resistor by an electrical heating step, especially
    subclass 600 for inductive heating, subclass 678 for microwave heating, or
    subclass 764 for a capacitive dielectric heating process, and subclass 50
    for a resistance heating process such as coating, resistance welding, or
    arc welding.  Combinations of an electrical heating process and a
    nonincidental metal working or assembly process of this Class 29, subclass
    610.1.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 430+ for making an
    article by winding onto a core, particularly subclass 437.4 which includes
    the winding of flat card resistors

    252,    Compositions, particularly subclasses 500+ for a process peculiar
    to the making of a composition such as light sensitive, carbon containing,
    free metal containing, carbide containing, radioactive material containing,
    or metal compound containing, which composition may be resistive in nature.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    for a process of working, molding, or shaping a miscellaneous plastic
    material. See Class 264 definitions for the line between this class (29)
    and Class 264.  Some subclasses in Class 264 which are specific to
    production of an electrical component or device are 104, 272.11, and 614+.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, for electrical resistor structure.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, for a powder metallurgy process with
    sintering, in general.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 101 for a process of coating, per se,
    wherein the coated product is an electrical resistor.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    Manufacture and Repair, subclasses 1+ for a method of manufacture, repair,
    or salvage of an electric lamp or discharge device which may include a
    resistance, and subclasses 60+ for apparatus performing the method.

    451,    Abrading, subclass 78 for a machine for making a resistor by
    abrading, without other metal working.


CLS 29/611
TXT Heater type:

    Process under subclass 610.1 for making an electrical resistor adapted to
    change electrical energy to thermal energy and structurally adapted to
    transmit this thermal energy to other structure or ambient surroundings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 200+ for electrical heating devices.


CLS 29/612
TXT Thermally variable:

    Process under subclass 610.1 for making an electrical resistor in which the
    electrical characteristics are dependent on the ambient temperature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 25+ for an electrical resistor
    which is value dependent on ambient temperature.


CLS 29/613
TXT With envelope or housing:

    Process under subclass 610.1 including enclosing or surrounding the
    resistor as by an envelope or housing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    588,    for a method of encapsulating a semiconductor or barrier layer
    device.

    620,    for a process involving the coating of resistive material onto a
    base with no enclosing or housing, but combined with some noncoating step
    such as assembly or metal working.

    627,    for a process of encapsulating a completed circuit board assembly.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 226+ for the structure of a
    resistor, generally, which may be incased, embedded, or housed.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 101+ for a process of coating, per
    se, wherein the coated product is an electrical resistor.


CLS 29/614
TXT Filling with powdered insulation:

    Process under subclass 613 including filling the housing or envelope with
    powdered insulation in a dry condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 473+ and 476+ for a method of filling
    and closing a receptacle.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 238+ for resistance structure
    wherein the element is embedded in powdered material enclosed by a metallic
    sheath.


CLS 29/615
TXT With direct compression of powdered insulation:

    Process under subclass 614 including compressing directly the powdered
    insulation, as by means of a die applied directly to the powder.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this subclass, the device exerting the
    compressive force must be applied directly to the powder.  Compression by
    reduction of a metallic sheath, for example, is in subclass 614.  See also
    subclasses 616 and 617 involving compression of the insulation to reduce it
    to a powder.  Inclusion of a step of compressing by reducing the sheath, in
    addition to the direct application of a compressive, force does not
    preclude classification in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 12 for a material handling process with material treatment
    including compacting.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 109 for a process directed to forming an article by uniting
    discrete bulk assembled particles. See the search notes to Class 264 under
    (4) Note of this Class 29, subclass 602.1.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, for a process of forming an article by
    uniting discrete metal particles, especially subclasses 61+.


CLS 29/616
TXT Powdering the insulation:

    Process under subclass 613 including reducing the solid insulation in which
    the resistance element is embedded, or by which the element is surrounded,
    to a powder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 238+ for the structure of
    resistances embedded in powdered material with a metallic sheath.


CLS 29/617
TXT By oxidation:

    Process under subclass 616 wherein the embedding insulation is powdered in
    situ by oxidation, as by passing steam over a metal such as magnesium.


CLS 29/618
TXT With winding:

    Process under subclass 613 including winding the resistance element onto a
    core.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 430+ for making an
    article by winding onto a core where no other steps, except such as are
    incidental to the winding, are claimed, particularly subclass 437.4 which
    includes the winding of flat card resistors.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 296+ for the structure of a
    helical or wound resistor.


CLS 29/619
TXT Applying  terminal:

    Process under subclass 613 including applying at least one terminal to the
    resistance element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    602.1+, for a method of applying a terminal to an electromagnet,
    transformer or inductor.

    621,    for a method, generally, of applying a terminal to a resistance
    element.

    874+,   for a method of making an electrical contact or terminal, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 322+ for the structure of a
    resistor having a nondetachable (e.g., a solder type) terminal applied
    thereto.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, for the structure of a quickly detachable
    terminal applied to a resistor where the resistor is only nominally claimed.


CLS 29/620
TXT Coating resistive material on a base:

    Process under subclass 610.1 including coating resistive material onto a
    base.

    (1)     Note.  The term "coating" is employed herein to mean both surface
    coating and impregnating.  For classification in this subclass, the coating
    material must be conductive and be intended to modify an electric current
    as a resistor.  Forming a housing about an otherwise complete resistor by
    coating is classified in subclass 613, whether the coating material is
    insulative or conductive, and even though the conductive coating material,
    where used, functions as an electrostatic shield.

    (2)     Note.  A method of coating on or with resistive material is, per
    se, classified in Class 427, Coating Processes, subclasses 101+.  Class 29,
    subclass 620 is residual and includes the application of the resistive
    material by coating plus any additional process or step, not necessary to
    coating, except where the coating and additional process or step is
    provided for in another class.  For example, this subclass includes coating
    plus metal working or coating plus assembly, but does not include coating
    plus molding, which is in Class 264, Plastic and Nonmetallic Article
    Shaping or Treating:  Processes, subclasses 129+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    458+    and 460, for a process of mechanical manufacture generally
    including coating.

    613+,   for forming a protective housing or envelope by a coating step.
    See also (1) Note, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 308+ for resistor structure
    wherein the element is coated on a base.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 101+ for a method of making a
    resistor by coating, and see (2) Note, above.


CLS 29/621
TXT Applying  terminal:

    Process under subclass 610.1 including applying one or more terminals to
    the resistance element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    602.1+, for a process of applying a terminal to an electromagnet,
    transformer, or inductor.

    619,    for a process of applying a terminal to the resistance element
    together with enveloping or housing.

    874+,   for a process of making a contact or terminal, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, particularly subclasses 322+ for the
    structure of a resistor having a terminal applied thereto, and especially
    subclass 322 where the terminal is of the quickly detachable type.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, for the structure of a quickly detachable
    terminal applied to a resistor, or to another device, where the device is
    not significantly claimed.


CLS 29/621.1
TXT Strain gauge making:

    Process under 610.1 wherein the resistor is an element of a larger device
    which uses the change in a resistance under strain to measure force or
    pressure.

    (1)     Note.  To be classified in this subclass, the process must be
    directed to manufacturing the device, and not merely to mounting or to
    securing a strain gauge onto another object.


CLS 29/622
TXT Switch making:

    Process under subclass 592.1 for making a device adapted to interrupt or
    establish an electrical current flow between electrical conductors joined
    to the device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, for an electrical
    switch, per se.


CLS 29/623
TXT Fuse making:

    Process under subclass 592.1 for making a device which is destroyed by the
    thermal energy generated by the current flowing through the conductor to
    break the current carrying connection at a predetermined value.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 402+ for a
    thermal current switch including a fuse.


CLS 29/623.1
TXT Electric battery cell making:

    Process under subclass 592.1 particularly adapted to the manufacture of a
    device to be used for the long term chemical storage of electrical energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for the manufacture of a battery grid.

    730+,   for apparatus for assembling battery cell components.

    763,    for apparatus for disassembling battery cell components.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, for the method of or
    apparatus for manufacture of an electrical energy cell if combined with the
    use of the cell.


CLS 29/623.2
TXT Including sealing:

    Process under subclass 623.1 including the closing of encasing structure
    about the device to be used for the long term storage of electrical energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, for closing a vessel, generally.


CLS 29/623.3
TXT Including laminating of indefinite length material:

    Process under subclass 623.1 including the bringing together of components
    of such longitudinal dimension that the leading and trailing ends thereof
    are not both engaged during the manufacture.

    (1)     Note.  The cutting of the product of this subclass to length
    subsequent to bringing together of the components is not considered to be
    engagement of the trailing end and such a combination is therefore
    considered to be proper for this subclass.


CLS 29/623.4
TXT Including adhesively bonding:

    Process under subclass 623.1 including bringing fluent material between
    components being united, which material is adapted to adhere to the surface
    of each component and thereby hold the components together.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, for
    bonding of structures together, generally.


CLS 29/623.5
TXT Including coating or impregnating:

    Process under subclass 623.1 including placing of a layer of flowable
    material over at least a portion of the structure of the device for storage
    of electrical energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, for apparatus for coating of structure,
    generally.

    427,    Coating Processes, for coating of structure, generally.


CLS 29/650
TXT PLURAL DIVERSE MANUFACTURING APPARATUS:

    Apparatus under the class definition including the combination of a first
    material treating device under the class definition and a second material
    treating device of a recognized, different type.

    (1)     Note.  Assembly means combined with coating means is included in
    this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33+,    for an assembling device combined with a treating device.

    592+,   for the corresponding method.

    791+,   for a first assembling means combined with a second assembling
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, (1) for a device for placing a relatively thin
    coating on work, combined with a device for performing additional treatment
    of work, which additional treatment is ancillary or preparatory to the
    coating operation, provided that the additional device does not include
    means to assemble work parts or (2) for a device for placing a relatively
    thin coating on work combined with a single device for performing a
    nonancillary or preparatory treatment. Therefore, the combination of a
    coating device with either an assembling device or, first and second
    nonancillary or preparatory treating devices will be found in this subclass.


CLS 29/700
TXT MEANS TO ASSEMBLE OR DISASSEMBLE:

    Apparatus under the class definition (1) including means for engaging a
    first work part and including means for engaging a second work part which
    means are adapted to either bring the two work parts into juxtaposed
    relationship or cause one of the work parts to intimately engage the other
    to thereby fasten the work parts together or, (2) including means to engage
    at least one work part and force that work part to move out of intimate
    engagement with another work part to which it has previously been secured.

    (1)     Note.  To be proper for classification in this subclass a patent
    directed to clause (1) "assembly means" of the definition of this subclass
    must include structure to recognize (engage) the first work part and
    structure to recognize (engage) the second work part; whereas, a patent
    directed to clause (2) "means to disassemble" must include a claimed
    disclosure that the parts are either unfastened or moved out of positional
    relationship and must claim structure that recognizes (engages) at least
    one of the parts.

    (2)     Note.  Means to relatively position two elements of a machine,
    i.e., to adjust the machine, is not considered to be an assembly or
    disassembly means for this subclass and those indented hereunder.

    (3)     Note.  A portion of material to be assembled to another portion
    will be considered to be a "part" in this subclass and in the subclasses
    indented hereunder even if both portions to be assembled are surfaces of
    the same member.

    (4)     Note.  This subclass is the residual home for a device for
    assembling or disassembling a first and a second work part.  Therefore,
    classification is in this and the indented subclasses only when no other
    class (or preceding subclass of this class) provides for the type of
    apparatus claimed.  See the search notes below.

    (5)     Note.  A mechanical manufacturing apparatus often includes an
    assembling means combined with a shaping means. Such apparatus will fall
    into one of two groups: (a) those including a shaping means intended to
    operate simultaneously or subsequently to a juxtaposing means and serving
    only to secure the work parts together or, (b) those including a shaping
    device whether acting preliminarily, simultaneously, or subsequently to the
    juxtaposing of the parts intended to shape a work part(s) other than or in
    addition to securing.  Group (a) apparatus recognizing at least two work
    parts (see (1) Note, above) have their generic locus provided for in this
    and the indented subclasses unless elsewhere classified.  The apparatus of
    group (b) are classified either in the preceding subclasses of Class 29,
    particularly subclasses 33+, or in other appropriate classes on the basis
    of the shaping operation.

    (6)     Note.  Generally, apparatus for the manufacture of a particular
    article which apparatus is peculiar to that manufacture will be found in
    the appropriate class directed to making of that article.  Among such
    classes providing for the manufacture of a particular article are the
    following:

    a.      29, Metal Working, subclasses 1.01 through 91.8.

    b.      59, Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making.

    c.      76, Metal Tools and Implements, Making.

    d.      413, Sheet Metal Container Making.

    e.      140, Wireworking.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.1+,   for a process of or apparatus for arms making.

    3,      for a process of or apparatus for buckle assembling.

    11,     for a process of or apparatus for hinge assembling.

    23.1,   for apparatus for making a toothed cylinder.

    23.51,  for apparatus for impeller making.

    25,     for umbrella frame assembling.

    33+,    for a combined machine for performing both an assembling operation
    and a shaping operation.  An operation done as part of an assembling
    operation is not considered to be combined i.e., upsetting a rivet to
    secure the rivet to a plate is not considered to be forging plus
    assembling, but rather simply assembling.

    592+,   for a method of assembling.  Since Class 29, subclass 592, precedes
    this subclass 700 in the schedule, where both a process is claimed and
    apparatus for its practice is claimed, the process claim governs
    classification. Therefore, this subclass 700 has no original patents
    claiming the process of assembling.

    401.1,  for process of converting an article or apparatus to produce an
    article or apparatus of substantially different function, capacity, or type.

    402.01+,for miscellaneous process of repair.

    408+,   for process of making or assembling a slide fastener.

    426.1+, for process of disassembly.

    428+,   for process of associating or fastening, particularly subclasses
    505+, for the process of joining by means of a deforming operation to
    interlock the parts, subclass 525 for the process of joining by means of a
    driven force fit and subclass 526 for the process of joining by means of a
    separate fastener.

    650,    for a combined machine for performing both an assembling and some
    other nonmaterial shaping manufacturing operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, for a miscellaneous combination of two or more hand
    tools usable in assembling or disassembling. The hand tool of Class 7 is of
    general utility; i.e., it is not limited to assembling only a certain
    restricted type of work parts.

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, for boot or shoe assembling.

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation.

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing.

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing.

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, particularly subclasses 501.05+, for a
    collocating gauge.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), particularly subclasses 111+,
    122.1+, 127.1+, 143, and 155+ for a building or a building component with
    fixedly mounted means for handling, assembling, transporting, or installing.

    53,     Package Making, for the method of or apparatus for encompassing or
    encasing goods or materials with a separate cover or band which serves as
    means for identifying, protecting, or unit handling the goods or materials.
     The juxtaposing of a closure and receptacle, with or without securing, is
    also classified in Class 53.  See particularly subclass 331.5 for
    tightening or loosening of a screw-type closure by rotation in combination
    with before or after handling of the work and subclasses 317+ for
    assembling of a screw-type closure onto a receptacle. Included in this
    subclass 700 and the subclasses indented hereunder is the assembly of a
    work part within an encompassing work part for the assembly of a
    manufactured article; e.g., see subclasses 266.1+ for means for assembling
    film into a cassette to form a manufactured assembly, generally, especially
    see subclass 284.4 for inserting X-ray film into a special receptacle.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, for apparatus for
    assembling a plurality of metal filaments to form a cable in the absence of
    metal working and see (9) Note of the Class Definition of Class 57 for the
    lines between Classes 29 and 57.

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclass 7 for assembling or
    disassembling of sprocket chains including apparatus for removing a pin or
    a rivet.  See (6) Note, above.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting.

    72,     Metal Deforming, for deforming of a work part (without recognition
    of a second work part), particularly, subclasses 48+ for a tool couple
    adapted to fasten by pressing together surface portions of a single work
    member.  See (5) Note, above.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 401+ for treating multi-component metal-containing
    scrap having an integral substrate to separate metal therefrom..

    79,     Button Making, for assembling button parts.

    81,     Tools, for a hand tool of general utility, or an assembling tool
    which structurally recognizes only one workpart.

    86,     Ammunition and Explosive-Charge Making, for the making, including
    assembling or disassembling, of an ammunition or explosive device.

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, for means to braid a
    metallic cable, in the absence of metal working.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 450.1+, for making an
    edible composite (e.g., sandwich, filled pie, etc.).

    100,    Presses, especially subclass 78, for a press not elsewhere
    classified, having means to additionally wind material on a mandrel and
    means to pull or push a centrally located mandrel upon which the material
    has been wound from within the roll of material.

    112,    Sewing, for securing two workpieces by a filamentary thread.

    114,    Ships, subclasses 65+ for ship building and subclass 359 for a
    frame or former for assembling a boat hull.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, for means to apply a coating or modify a coating
    on work.

    131,    Tobacco, for cigar or cigarette manufacture.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 315+ for means to assemble a fluid
    system, especially, subclasses 317+ for assembling under pressure.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, for interweaving a plurality of strands.

    140,    Wireworking, especially subclasses 3+ for means for or process of
    making metal fabric involving an operation other than those operations of
    the textile classes. For example, metal deforming while coiling the strands
    of a cable will be found in Class 140.  See (6) Note, above.

    144,    Woodworking, especially subclass 25 for box hooping.

    147,    Coopering, for wooden barrel, box, basket, or crate assembling.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, for
    securing parts together by nonmetallic adhesion including the combination
    with ancillary operation.

    157,    Wheelwright Machines, for process or apparatus for assembling a
    wheel.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation.

    164,    Metal Founding, for means to mold metal onto a preform.  See (5)
    Note, above.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 85.1+ for well head apparatus with assembly or
    disassembly means.

    199,    Type Casting, especially the various "assembling" subclasses.

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, especially subclass 16 for
    process and appropriate apparatus subclasses for electrolytic assembling,
    uniting, or repairing.

    219,    Electric Heating, especially subclasses 78.02, 121.11+, 148, 603,
    633, and 765 for electric heating for welding or soldering and subclasses
    127 and 157 for electric riveting.

    221,    Article Dispensing, for an article dispenser (feeder) not otherwise
    provided for, and see the class definition of Class 221 for a statement of
    the class lines and for the disposition of related disclosures of article
    and strip feeding process or apparatus.

    222,    Dispensing, for means for discharging the contents of a receptacle
    or for material holder.  See the notes to the definition of that class for
    the location of other art of that type.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, particularly subclass 48 for bead stringing and
    subclass 49 for assembling garment supporters.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, especially subclasses 19+ for
    combined apparatus for juxtaposing work parts and applying a fastening
    member, e.g., a nail or rivet, thereto.  This subclass (700) includes
    apparatus for driving one member to pierce and thereby be fastened to
    another member if the driven member is not an "elongated member" as
    required for Class 227.  Also, this subclass includes structure for
    fastening by use of an "elongated member" if no driving structure is
    claimed which would, if claimed, establish classification in Class 227.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, for apparatus for or the method of joining
    metallic work parts by a metallurgical bond.  See subclass 19 for apparatus
    and subclass 125 for the method of removing applied solder.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 430+ for making an
    article by winding an elongated article directly onto a core.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force, see
    paragraph 4 of the class definition of Class 254.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    see (5) Note, above.

    269,    Work Holders, for a device which holds plural parts in desired
    spatial relationship while being joined or secured together, means for
    joining or securing not being claimed. The inclusion of claimed means to
    move work parts relatively to each other or means to guide the parts for
    such movement is a greater combination than is provided for in Class 269
    and is properly classified in Class 29, subclass 700.  Class 269 is the
    residual locus for a device for clamping, supporting, or holding an article
    (or articles) in position to be operated on or treated.  See section VII
    under the class definition of Class 269.

    270,    Sheet-Material Associating, for bringing plural sheets of material
    in a particular array.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a seal having an installation,
    removal, assembly, disassembly, or repair feature, subclass 323 for a seal
    for well apparatus, subclasses 370+ for a relatively rotatable extending
    sealing face member (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.)  subclass 421 for a
    close proximity labyrinth seal, subclass 435 for a piston ring, piston ring
    expander, or seat therefor, subclass 511 for a dynamic, circumferential,
    contact seal intended for containment or compression by a gland member in a
    packing box, subclass 551 for a dynamic peripheral radially sealing
    flexible projection (e.g., lip seal, etc.) for other than a piston,
    subclass 598 for a static contact seal for use between parts of an internal
    combustion engine, subclass 609 for a static, contact seal intended for
    insertion between an end to end pipe, conduit, or cable joint, or subclass
    630 for a static, contact seal for other than an internal combustion
    engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 86.4+ for a
    hand-or-hoist-line grapple.

    412,    Bookbinding:  Process and Apparatus, subclasses 9+ for apparatus
    specialized for the manufacture of books, which may include assembling
    means.

    413,    Sheet Metal Container Making, subclasses 1+ for the a method of
    fabricating sheet metal cans.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 788+ for apparatus for
    assembling articles in a particular relationship wherein the assembling
    comprises or facilitates handling rather than the production of a final
    product.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 48 for a curing bag inserter, releaser, or remover in a tire
    vulcanizing apparatus; subclasses 78+ for means for molding powered metal
    including molding onto a preform and subclasses 110+ for means to mold
    plastic material onto a preform. See (5) Note, above.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 302 and 369 for apparatus
    for use in teaching of the subject of mechanics and subclass 52 for
    apparatus for use in demonstrating manufacturing stages.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, subclasses 2+ for methods for assembling and disassembling a
    bolt with a nut or washer and subclasses 48+ for apparatuses for assembling
    or disassembling a bolt with a nut or washer and subclasses 164+ for a
    distributor or feeder for bolts, nuts, rivets, screws, or washers.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, for making a product from a nonmetal sheet or web,
    generally, particularly subclasses 374+ for assembling nonmetal sheet or
    web workpieces, generally subclasses:

    88,     for applying a bail to a box and for making a box combined with
    applying a bail thereto.

    93+,    for making a box and inserting a lining therein.

    102+,   for making a box and applying an end closure.

    374+,   for applying a reinforced washer to an opening in a tag.

    375+,   for attaching a fastener pin or wire to a tag and for attaching a
    string to a tag.


CLS 29/701
TXT With means to regulate operation by use of templet, tape, card, or other
    replaceable information supply:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 including structure for utilizing the
    characteristics (e.g., physical or electrical) of an element that is
    separate from the work and is separate from the organized structure of the
    device to influence the operation of the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes machines for utilizing a prepared
    information  supply that is to be removably placed in the machine.  This
    subclass does not include structure for utilizing the characteristics of a
    "permanent" part if the machine such as a cam or gear to influence the
    operation of other parts of the machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    901,    Robots, subcollections 3+ for a programming system for an
    industrial robot.


CLS 29/702
TXT With comparator:

    Apparatus under subclass 701 including means to sense a condition of the
    work or product, means to sense a corresponding condition of the
    information supply, means to relate the sensed conditions, and means to
    regulate the operation of the apparatus in accordance with any distinction
    between the sensed conditions.


CLS 29/703
TXT Computer input:

    Apparatus under subclass 702 wherein the information supply includes an
    electronic or magnetic memory bank.


CLS 29/704
TXT Web or strand-carried information supply:

    Apparatus under subclass 701 wherein the separate structure used to
    influence the apparatus is elongated and is adapted to pass through a
    sensing portion of the apparatus or to lie still in a sensing portion of
    the apparatus during operation thereof.


CLS 29/705
TXT With means to test work or product:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 combined with means to determine the weight or
    other characteristics of the material to be assembled or disassembled of
    the material that has been assembled or disassembled.

    (1)     Note.  Orientation of the work or product is not considered to be a
    characteristic of the material.


CLS 29/706
TXT With randomly actuated stopping or disabling means:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 provided with means to bring any or all of the
    moving parts of the apparatus to a halt, i.e., to cease to operate, the
    halting effect being initiated by an abnormal occurrence during the
    operation of the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  A machine capable of stopping will not be placed in this
    subclass unless the stopping means operates as a result of an unplanned or
    unpredictable occurrence.

    (2)     Note.  Termination of a normally continuous work supply is
    considered to be an abnormal occurrence.


CLS 29/707
TXT Responsive to condition of work or product:

    Apparatus under subclass 706 including a detector for sensing a
    characteristic of the work parts being assembled (or disassembled) or of
    the product of the assembly operation and provision to utilize this sensed
    characteristic to cause the apparatus to halt.


CLS 29/708
TXT Responsive to operative (e.g., safety device, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 706 including a detector for sensing a
    characteristic of a person operating the apparatus and provision to utilize
    this sensed characteristic to cause the apparatus to halt.


CLS 29/709
TXT With control means energized in response to activator stimulated by
    condition sensor:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 including means for:

    (1)     detecting any of the following characteristics:  a state or
    property, a change in a state or property, an occurrence of a predetermined
    event; in any of the following:  a work part or parts being assembled (or
    disassembled), the assembled product, the assembling apparatus itself, or
    the environment of the apparatus affecting the operation thereof;

    (2)     initiating or modifying (as a direct result of such detection) a
    force or impulse other than that generated or transmitted by the detecting
    means;


    (3)     regulating or modifying (as a direct result of such initiation) the
    operation of said machine.

    (1)     Note.  The control system of this and the indented subclasses is
    similar in concept to the control system of other classes, particularly,
    Class 72, Metal Deforming, especially subclasses 6+; Class 83, Cutting;
    Class 173, Tool Driving or Impacting, especially subclasses 2+; and Class
    226, Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, especially subclasses 10+.
     The total operation and the claimed combination are, of course, different;
    but, the control system, per se, found in each of these other classes may
    be analogous to that found herein and may be applicable to the machine of
    this class (29).

    (2)     Note.  This definition requires a patent to claim at least four
    instrumentalities for original placement herein.  One of these must be an
    assembly apparatus.  The other three are:

    (a)     a sensor (e.g., photo-cell system, trip-lever, pressure diaphragm)
    to detect a condition as stated in (a) of the definition.

    (b)     an activator (e.g., an element to make or break an electric
    circuit, a clutch, a valve) to cause a release of energy more than or
    different from that accounted for by mere change in condition (e.g.,
    position or movement) of the sensor while it is functioning.

    (c)     a controller (e.g., a motor or driver for said apparatus) to change
    or cause the operation of said apparatus.

            Therefore, a cam follower (or sensor) directly linked to a
    controller, whereby follower movement directly effects controller movement
    is not proper subject matter for this subclass due to lack of an activator
    as defined.  An assembly apparatus with such controlling means are proper
    for subclass 771, below.  On the other hand, disclosure of a cam follower
    that makes and breaks an electrical circuit that energizes a motor, may be
    placed herein.

    (3)     Note.  A voluntary act of the person operating the machine (the
    "operative") is not proper subject matter for this subclass.  For example,
    disclosure of an assembling apparatus having an on-off switch adapted to be
    manipulated by the operative to start or stop the machine (even though the
    switch initiates a release of energy) should be considered for subclass 706
    above rather than for this subclass.


CLS 29/710
TXT Including means to divert defective work part:

    Apparatus under subclass 709 including a line along which assembly normally
    takes place and including means to detect a condition of the work and if
    that work is faulty, including further means to direct that work to move
    out of the line of assembly.


CLS 29/711
TXT Multiple station assembly or disassembly apparatus:

    Apparatus under subclass 709 including means for bringing together and/or
    uniting corresponding work parts or means to unfasten (disunite)
    corresponding work parts at a first location and including means for
    bringing together and/or uniting corresponding work parts or means to
    unfasten corresponding work parts at a second location.

    (1)     Note.  The second location may serve for the assembly of work parts
    that are independent from those of the first location or may serve to
    further assemble or disassemble the work of the first location.


CLS 29/712
TXT Including position sensor:

    Apparatus under subclass 711 including a detector particularly adapted to
    sense the presence of the work being assembled or disassembled or of the
    product of the operation.


CLS 29/713
TXT Responsive to timer:

    Apparatus under subclass 709 including a time period limiting means
    operating independently of the apparatus drive means, which time limiting
    means causes a change in the operation of the apparatus at the end of the
    selected time period.

    (1)     Note.  The timing means must be independent to the extent, for
    example, that a change in apparatus drive speed will not change the period
    measured by the timing apparatus.


CLS 29/714
TXT Responsive to work or work-related machine element:

    Apparatus under subclass 709 wherein the detected condition is a
    characteristic of a work part or parts being assembled (or disassembled) or
    of a machine element partaking of all motion of the work during the
    assembling or disassembling operation.


CLS 29/715
TXT With means to fasten by deformation:

    Apparatus under subclass 714 including means to secure a first and a second
    work part by stressing at least one work part beyond the elastic limit
    thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    761,    for means for fastening of electrical components by deformation and
    see the search notes thereunder for other means for assembly by deformation.


CLS 29/716
TXT Self-piercing work part:

    Apparatus under subclass 715 including means to force a cutting edge of one
    work part to form or enlarge a hole in a second work part and force the
    first work part through or into the second part, whereby the parts are
    secured together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    432+,   for the corresponding process.

    798,    for means to drive a self-piercing work part not including a
    control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, for means for forcing an
    elongated nail or rivet into a work part.


CLS 29/717
TXT With means to fasten by elastic joining:

    Apparatus under subclass 714 adapted to secure a first work part to a
    second work part by stressing at least one of the work parts within the
    elastic limit thereof.


CLS 29/718
TXT With means to fasten by frictional fitting:

    Apparatus under subclass 714 including means to force a first work part
    into interfitting relationship with a second work part such that the work
    parts are secured one to the other without any indication of changing the
    shape of either work part either within or beyond the elastic limit thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The securement of this subclass is generally termed,
    "force-fit" or "press-fit".


CLS 29/719
TXT Including means to apply magnetic force directly to position or hold work:

    Apparatus under subclass 714 including means to apply magnetic force to
    metallic work to move the work relatively to the area at which assembly is
    to be performed or to hold the work at the assembly area.


CLS 29/720
TXT With signal, scale, illuminator, or optical viewer:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 including, in addition to structure for
    performing a class type operation, either (1) means to produce a
    perceptible (e.g., audible or visual) manifestation of a condition of a
    part (or all) of the machine or the work; (2) means to designate a
    characteristic of the apparatus, the work, or the product; (3) means to
    increase the lighting intensity in the vicinity of the apparatus or the
    work; or (4) means to modify light waves to make characteristics of the
    apparatus, the work, or the product more readily discernable to the view of
    the operative.


CLS 29/721
TXT For work-holder for assembly or disassembly:

    Apparatus under subclass 720 including or with a surface which, when the
    work is being assembled or disassembled, is positioned beneath at least a
    part of the work to support the work against the force of gravity in at
    least one position of adjustment thereof.

    (1)     Note.  A mere pin is not considered to be a work holder for
    assembly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281.1+, for similar structure having no signal, indicator, illuminator, or
    optical means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 289+ for a work holder for assembly not in
    combination with an assembly means or not serving as a means to move to
    assemble one work part relatively to another.


CLS 29/722
TXT Including means to provide a controlled environment:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 including provision to affect the atmosphere
    about the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein, for example, is the combination of an
    assembly apparatus with an air conditioned room in which the apparatus is
    operated.


CLS 29/723
TXT Nuclear Device:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 particularly adapted to assembly or
    disassembly of structure intended for the utilization of radioactive
    material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, for filling a vessel with radioactive material in
    the manufacture of a fuel cell.


CLS 29/724
TXT Roller or ball bearing:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 including means to assemble or disassemble
    various parts of an assembly used to support relatively moving machine
    elements, which assembly includes a freely rotatable rod-like,
    frusto-conical, or spherical, load bearing member adapted to permit
    relative movement of the machine elements by rolling contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244+,   for means to assemble (or disassemble) a bearing member to other
    machine structure.

    898.06+, for the process of assembling the parts of a roller or ball
    bearing assembly.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, particularly subclasses 91+ for ball and roller bearing
    structures.


CLS 29/725
TXT Including deforming means:

    Apparatus under subclass 724 including means to secure, confine or detach
    one part of the assembly to another part by stressing at least one part
    beyond the elastic limit thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    564.1,  for means to assemble combined with means to deform, if deformation
    is not to assemble or disassemble.


CLS 29/726
TXT Heat exchanger:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 including means to bring together or secure
    parts of structure particularly adapted to transfer thermal energy or
    including means to detach such previously assembled (or disassembled) parts.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, but is not limited to:

    (a)     Apparatus for inserting a tube into the corresponding hole of a
    fin.


    (b)     Apparatus for compressing radiator sections together.

    (c)     Apparatus for removing a heat exchanger from an assembly nest.

    (d)     Apparatus for assembling refrigeration elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33+,    for apparatus for performing combined operations in the assembly of
    a heat exchanger.

    238,    for apparatus for compressing other work parts in face to face
    relation.

    244+,   particularly subclasses 258+ for an apparatus for merely exerting a
    push or a pull.

    890.03+,for the process of assembling a heat exchanger.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 115+ and 317 for pipe or tube flaring.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, for a heat exchanger used in a heating plant.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 76+ for a heat exchanger including
    assembly structure and appropriate subclasses for the heat exchanger, per
    se.

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses for a work holder, per se,
    used in the assembling of a heat exchanger.


CLS 29/726.5
TXT Including means to manipulate heat exchanger tube bundle:

    Apparatus for effecting assembly of elongated gas or liquid transmitting
    passage devices with respect to a receiving shell.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 745.3 for means to
    manipulate an assembly of heat exchanger tubes without recognition of the
    receiving shell.


CLS 29/727
TXT Including deforming means:

    Apparatus under subclass 726 including means to stress at least one part
    beyond the elastic limit thereof.


CLS 29/728
TXT Means to place sheath on running-length core:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 including means to enclose an inner part of
    indeterminate length with a separate, coextensive, hollow, outer, tubular
    part.

    (1)     Note.  The inner part may be hollow or may be made of multiple
    parts.

    (2)     Note.  The product of this apparatus may be "armored cable".

    (3)     Note.  This subclass includes apparatus which would be classified
    in Class 57, Textiles:   Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 3+,
    except that the apparatus herein includes means to perform a "setting"
    operation. "Setting" denotes a mechanical operation such as interlocking or
    deformation, other than the mere application, which causes the sheath to
    stay put.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33.5+,  for similar apparatus combined with cutting means.

    234,    for apparatus for assembling a tube of definite length into a
    coextensive core.

    435,    for a process of making helically wound armored cable.

    779,    for similar structure for assembling running length work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 3+ for a
    device for applying a strand spirally to a core of indeterminate or
    indefinite length without additionally "setting" the wrapper.  See (3) Note
    to this subclass, above.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 48+ and 135+ for making a helical tube
    or coil from a single workpiece and subclasses 253.1+, especially subclass
    268, for extruding metal sheath material around a core.

    140,    Wireworking, for process of or means assembling wires by a
    wireworking operation, i.e., by setting or deforming a wire, etc.  See (3)
    Note, above.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 126+ for the process of encasing a
    metal core with a metal sheath and fusion bonding the core to the sheath.


CLS 29/729
TXT Means to assemble electrical device:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 including means to assemble work parts in the
    manufacture of an apparatus particularly adapted to transmit or utilize
    electrical energy, wherein the parts assembled serve collectively, to
    effect the passage or action of the electrical energy.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein, for example, is means for assembling a coil
    with an armature because this assembly is used in the handling of
    electrical energy; whereas, means for placing a base on a motor housing is
    excluded from this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25.01+, for a method of or an apparatus for making a barrier layer device
    or semiconductor device.

    25.35,  for method or apparatus for making a piezoelectric device.

    241,    for stringing apparatus.

    592.1+, for a method of making an electricity utilizing device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    47+ for endless or indefinite length conductor making or splicing and
    subclasses 349+ for apparatus for making an electrical device by laminating
    only.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 48 for bead stringing and subclasses
    102+ for a needle.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 134.3+ for electric wire placing apparatus.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    for a method or apparatus for making, including by assembling, an electric
    lamp, etc.


CLS 29/730
TXT Storage cell or battery:

    Apparatus under subclass 729 particularly adapted to the assembly of parts:
     e.g., container, electrodes, terminals, etc., of an apparatus used for the
    chemical storage of electrical energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for the manufacture of a battery grid.

    246,    for means to assemble a terminal to a battery post.

    623.1+, for the process of assembling battery cell components.

    763,    for apparatus for disassembling battery cell components.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, for the method of or
    apparatus for manufacture of an electrical energy cell if combined with the
    use of the cell.


CLS 29/731
TXT Including deforming means:

    Apparatus under subclass 730 including means to secure or confine one part
    of the assembly to another part by stressing at least one part beyond the
    elastic limit thereof.


CLS 29/732
TXT Motor or generator:

    Apparatus under subclass 729 particular to the association or joining of
    work parts in the making of a dynamoelectric device, i.e., a device for (1)
    converting electrical energy to mechanical energy, or (2) converting
    mechanical energy to electrical energy.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example:

    (a)     Apparatus for collecting and assembling commutator segments and
    commutator parts.

    (b)     Apparatus for assembling the various parts of an armature,
    including apparatus for inserting a coil into slots of a commutator;
    apparatus for inserting insulation or insulation plugs into said slots, as
    well as the staking of the coil leads in the commutator slots.  The
    manufacture of a paper insulation plug combined with assembly in a motor or
    generator is included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33+,    for combined machine used in the manufacture of a dynamoelectric
    device.

    243.52, for apparatus not otherwise classified which assembles by "heading"
    a hollow member.

    596+,   for a method of making a dynamoelectric machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 432+ for making a
    stator by winding directly onto a core, and subclasses 433+ for making an
    armature by winding directly onto a core.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, appropriate subclasses for
    generator or motor structure.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 405+ for folding sheet or web material.


CLS 29/733
TXT Means to assemble commutator:

    Apparatus under subclass 732 for making the portion of a dynamoelectric
    device adapted to rotate and transmit electric current from the brushes of
    the stationary structure of the device to the armature.

    (1)     Note.  The brushes of a dynamoelectric device are electric
    terminals adapted to making sliding electrical contact with the commutator.
     The armature is that portion of the dynamoelectric device that rotates and
    includes electric coils, the shaft, bearings, and the commutator.


CLS 29/734
TXT Means to position insulation:

    Apparatus under subclass 732 including means to associate material into the
    dynamoelectric device, which material serves to limit the flow of
    electricity or heat away from a portion of the device.


CLS 29/735
TXT Means to stake wire to commutator or armature:

    Apparatus under subclass 732 including the fastening of the ends of the
    armature coil to the commutator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    564.5,  for similar structure combined with coil strand cutting means.


CLS 29/736
TXT Including deforming means:

    Apparatus under subclass 732 including means to secure or confine one part
    of the assembly to another part by stressing at least one part beyond the
    elastic limit thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    761,    for means for fastening of electrical components by deformation and
    see the search notes thereunder for other means for assembly by deformation.


CLS 29/737
TXT Magnetic memory device:

    Apparatus under subclass 729 including means peculiar to the assembly of a
    device capable of being magnetized at a prescribed area, in accordance with
    a condition, which magnetized area is to be later detected and utilized to
    show that condition.


CLS 29/738
TXT Laminated device:

    Apparatus under subclass 729 adapted to associate or secure a first
    generally planar member to a second similar member along their generally
    planar surfaces.


CLS 29/739
TXT Means to fasten electrical component to wiring board, base, or substrate:

    Apparatus under subclass 729 adapted to be used in the assembly of a
    generally planar, nonconductive member having or to be provided with paths
    of conductive material to an electrical component such that the component
    is electrically secured to at least one of the conductive paths.


CLS 29/740
TXT Chip component:

    Apparatus under subclass 739 wherein the electrical component is a
    semiconductor and is very small in size.


CLS 29/741
TXT Multilead component:

    Apparatus under subclass 739 wherein more than one electrical connection is
    made between the paths of conductive material and the component.


CLS 29/742
TXT Multiple station assembly apparatus:

    Apparatus under subclass 729 including a first work station wherein work
    parts are juxtaposed, associated, or secured together and a second work
    station where work parts are juxtaposed, associated, or secured together.

    (1)     Note.  The work stations may operate independently or dependently
    on one another, may operate on the same or different work, or may operate
    simultaneously or sequentially.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    783,    for multiple station assembly apparatus including means to
    interrelatedly feed plural work parts from plural sources with manual
    intervention.

    791,    for multiple station assembly apparatus in general.


CLS 29/743
TXT Means to apply vacuum directly to position or hold work part:

    Apparatus under subclass 729 including means to create a reduced
    atmospheric pressure on a portion of a work part to cause atmospheric
    pressure on other portions of the work part to either move that part from
    one location to another or to secure the work part in a position.


CLS 29/744
TXT Means to apply magnetic force directly to position or hold work part:

    Apparatus under subclass 729 wherein a work part which is capable of being
    attracted by magnetism (e.g., is ferrous, etc.) is subjected to means
    causing magnetic force to be applied to the work part either to move that
    part from one location to another or to secure the work part in a position.


CLS 29/745
TXT Conductor:

    Apparatus under subclass 729 including means to juxtapose, associate, or
    fasten a structure intended to be used to transport electrical energy.


CLS 29/746
TXT Electrode:

    Apparatus under subclass 745 wherein the assembled product includes an end
    portion or an electrical terminal by which electric flow enters or leaves
    an electrolyte, a gaseous medium, plasma, or a vacuum.


CLS 29/747
TXT Terminal or connector:

    Apparatus under subclass 745 wherein one work part is adapted to serve as a
    disconnectable link to transmit electric current from a first member to a
    second member.


CLS 29/748
TXT Assembled to wire-type conductor:

    Apparatus under subclass 747 wherein the work part to which the connector
    is assembled is an electrical conductor that is generally elongated and
    rod-like.


CLS 29/749
TXT Means to simultaneously assemble multiple, independent conductors to
    terminal:

    Apparatus under subclass 748 including means for assembling a plurality of
    rod-like conductors to a terminal(s) at the same instant, wherein the
    conductors remain electrically separated after the assembly.


CLS 29/750
TXT Means comprising hand-manipulatable implement:

    Apparatus under subclass 748 adapted to be supported and moved randomly by
    an operative.


CLS 29/751
TXT Fastening by deformation:

    Apparatus under subclass 750 adapted to secure a work part to another work
    part by stressing at least one of the parts beyond the elastic limit
    thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    761,    for means to fasten electrical components by deforming one of the
    components, and see the search notes thereunder for other means for
    assembly by deformation.


CLS 29/752
TXT Fastening by elastic joining:

    Apparatus under subclass 750 adapted to secure a work part to another work
    part by stressing at least one work part within the elastic limit thereof.


CLS 29/753
TXT Means to fasten by deformation:

    Apparatus under subclass 748 adapted to secure a work part to another work
    part by stressing at least one of the parts beyond the elastic limit
    thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    761,    for means for fastening of electrical components by deformation,
    and see the search notes thereunder for other means for assembly by
    deformation.


CLS 29/754
TXT Means to fasten by elastic joining:

    Apparatus under subclass 748 adapted to secure a work part to another work
    part by stressing at least one work part within the elastic limit thereof.


CLS 29/755
TXT Multiple, independent conductors:

    Apparatus under subclass 745 including means for juxtaposing, associating,
    or fastening together an electrical assembly including a first structure
    and a second structure intended to be used to transport electrical energy
    wherein the first and second structures are and remain electrically
    insulated from each other.


CLS 29/756
TXT Switch or fuse:

    Apparatus under subclass 745 wherein the assembled means to transport
    electrical energy includes make or break contact means to allow the means
    to selectively transmit or to not transport electrical energy.


CLS 29/757
TXT Means to simultaneously fasten three or more parts:

    Apparatus under subclass 729 including means to secure into a single
    assembly more than two work parts, the securing being done at the same time.


CLS 29/758
TXT Means comprising hand-manipulatable implement:

    Apparatus under subclass 729 adapted to be supported and moved randomly by
    an operative.


CLS 29/759
TXT Means to align and advance work part:

    Apparatus under subclass 729 including means to move work toward a station
    at which assembly is to take place and including means to critically
    position the workpiece at the station.


CLS 29/760
TXT With work-holder for assembly:

    Apparatus under subclass 729 including a surface which contacts a work part
    to support or hold that part in a desired position while that work part is
    being juxtaposed, associated, or secured to another work part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, for a work holding support without an assembly mean.


CLS 29/761
TXT Means to fasten by deforming:

    Apparatus under subclass 729 including means to secure a first work part
    and a second work part together by stressing at least one work part beyond
    the elastic limit thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    715,    for similar assembly apparatus including work responsive control
    means.

    736,    for means for securing parts of an electric motor or generator by
    stressing a part beyond the elastic limit thereof.

    753,    for means for stressing a work part beyond its elastic limit in
    fastening a terminal to an electricity conducting wire.

    788,    for means to fasten by deforming combined with means to feed plural
    workpieces together without manual intervention.

    796,    for multiple station assembly apparatus including means to fasten
    the work parts by deformation.


CLS 29/762
TXT Means to disassemble electrical device:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 including means to separate or unfasten work
    parts of a device particularly adapted to transmit or utilize electrical
    energy, wherein the parts of the device serve collectively, to effect the
    passage or action of the electrical energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    729+,   for structure to assemble a device particularly adapted to transmit
    or utilize electrical energy, and see notes following the definition of
    that subclass.


CLS 29/763
TXT Storage cell or battery:

    Apparatus under subclass 762 particularly adapted to the assembly of parts,
    e.g., container, electrodes, terminals, etc., of a device used for the
    chemical storage of electrical energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    730+,   for structure for assembling an electrical cell or battery.


CLS 29/764
TXT Means comprising hand manipulatable implement:

    Apparatus under subclass 762 adapted to be supported and moved randomly by
    an operative.


CLS 29/765
TXT Means to place traveler on ring or ring on bobbin of a textile machine:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 for (1) applying a traveller to a spinning
    ring; (2) applying a gripping ring to a textile bobbin; or (3) for
    disassembling either of the above assemblies.

    (1)     Note.  In clause (1), a "traveller" is generally a C-shaped
    wire-like member adapted to loosely grip a raised annular ridge on a
    spinning ring, the assembly to be used to twist fibers in textile
    manufacture.  In clause (2), an annular, resilient, wire-like member is
    stressed within the elastic limit thereof over a mandrel-like bobbin, the
    assembly to be used to support a supply of fiber strand in a textile
    manufacture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222+,   for means to assemble (or disassemble) a piston and a resilient
    piston ring.

    229,    for means to assemble (or disassemble) a resilient spring and
    another member.

    235+,   for means to assemble (or disassemble) a resilient member to
    another member, in general.

    241,    for means for assembling by stringing, in general.


CLS 29/766
TXT Slide fastener:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 comprising means for juxtaposing, associating,
    or fastening together the component parts of a slide fastener; or means to
    detach such previously assembled parts.

    (1)     Note.  A slide fastener is an assembly of elements normally used to
    temporarily fasten together garment portions and is comprised of a pair of
    opposing stringers (i.e., elongated members adapted to be each fastened
    permanently to a garment portion and adapted to detachably connect to each
    other by an interlocking fit), a slider (adapted to travel along the
    stringers and cause the stringers to connect or disconnect from each
    other), a lower stop (limiting the extent of travel of the slider in the
    opening direction of the stringers), and an upper stop (limiting the extent
    of travel of the slider in the closed direction of the stringers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33.2,   for apparatus for assembling a slide fastener combined with
    additional apparatus for shaping a work part, e.g., for trimming a
    component.

    408+,   for a process of manufacturing a slide fastener.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 522+ for means to injection mold a component part of a slide
    fastener and cross-reference art collection 814 for apparatus for making a
    slide fastener, generally.


CLS 29/767
TXT Means to assemble stop onto stringer:

    Apparatus under subclass 766 including means to fasten an upper or lower
    slide travel stopping means to at least one of the elongated members
    adapted to detachably connect to each other.


CLS 29/768
TXT Means to assemble slider onto stringer:

    Apparatus under subclass 766 including means to juxtapose or associate the
    slider member with at least one of the stringers.


CLS 29/769
TXT Means to assemble teeth onto stringer:

    Apparatus under subclass 766 for assembling the type of slide fastener
    having distinct teeth forming the interlocking portion of each stringer
    comprising means for attaching the teeth to the stringer.


CLS 29/770
TXT Disassembly means:

    Apparatus under subclass 766 for separating previously fastened slide
    fastener elements one from the other.


CLS 29/771
TXT Means to interrelatedly feed plural work parts from plural sources without
    manual intervention:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 including an assembly station, a first
    conveyor means for transporting a first work part to the assembly station,
    and a second conveyor means for transporting a second work part to the
    assembly station wherein the first and second work parts are assembled at
    the station without requiring manipulation of the work parts by an
    operative.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    709,    for an automatic machine functioning without manual intervention
    that includes means to regulate the machine in response to a sensed
    condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 218 for a reciprocating platen press having means
    to eject material from the surface which supports the material during a
    pressing operation and not elsewhere provided for.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclasses 19+ for means to
    drive an elongated member combined with means to bring two work parts
    together.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, subclasses 44+ and 48+ for automatic machines for assembling or
    disassembling a bolt with a nut or washer.


CLS 29/772
TXT Box or pallet assembly means:

    Apparatus under subclass 771 to assemble wood or wood-like parts to produce
    a container or a portable, generally planar material support.


CLS 29/773
TXT Means to assemble container:

    Apparatus under subclass 771 to assemble a vessel intended for the storage
    of other material therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    772,    for means for assembling a container of wood or wood-like material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, for apparatus or process of closing a filled
    container.


CLS 29/774
TXT Handle to container:

    Apparatus under subclass 773 for assembling to a storage vessel a member to
    be griped by a person for manipulation of the vessel.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a device for supporting a coated
    cardboard, gabled top container of the type used in storage of milk and
    means for assembling therewith a plastic handle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 134.1+ for means for making a package
    combined with means to assemble a handle thereto.


CLS 29/775
TXT Label to container:

    Apparatus under subclass 773 for assembling to a storage vessel a member
    intended to identify the vessel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 135.1+ for means for making a package
    combined with means for applying a lable thereto.


CLS 29/776
TXT Pressurized dispensing container:

    Apparatus under subclass 773 for assembling the component parts of a
    vessel, which vessel includes a nozzle and is to be partially filled with a
    fluent material and partially filled with a propellant gas, adapted to
    expel the fluent material through the nozzle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 394+ for a dispensing container adapted to
    be pressurized by gas pressure combined with a nozzle.


CLS 29/777
TXT Hypodermic syringe:

    Apparatus under subclass 773 including means to assemble the component
    parts of a hypodermic syringe.

    (1)     Note.  A hypodermic syringe includes a hollow needle adapted to
    pierce animal tissue and includes a vessel adapted to support fluent
    material removed from or to be inserted into the animal tissue, connected
    to the needle so that the needle may transmit the fluent material therein,
    from the vessel to the tissue.


CLS 29/778
TXT Including fluid component:

    Apparatus under subclass 773 including means to assemble to a preformed
    vessel part a liquid or gaseous work part that is intended to remain as a
    part of the assembled product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    801,    for means to assemble (or disassemble) a liquid work material to a
    preformed work part wherein the means does not feed plural work parts
    together without manual intervention.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, for closing a filled, preformed vessel with a
    fluent material wherein the material is not intended to be a part of the
    vessel.


CLS 29/779
TXT Running-length work:

    Apparatus under subclass 771 adapted to assemble (i.e., juxtapose,
    associate, or fasten) a first work part to a second work part, wherein at
    least the first work part moves continuously during assembly with respect
    to the apparatus, without any recognition of the trailing end thereof.


CLS 29/780
TXT Means including orbiting running-length work supply:

    Apparatus under subclass 779 including means to wrap a work part about an
    axis-of-bend through more than 360 degrees of wrap by an element that
    engages the work part with sliding contact and revolves about and is
    radially spaced from said axis-of-bend, whereby the work part is
    juxtaposed, associated, with or fastened to another work part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 66, for similar structure for deforming a
    single work part.

    140,    Wireworking, especially subclasses 3+ for means for or process of
    making metal fabric involving an operation other than those operations of
    the textile classes.  For example, metal deforming while coiling the
    strands of a cable will be found in Class 140. (See (6) Note of the
    definition of subclass 700 above).

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, especially subclasses 430+, for
    winding a strand(s) on a core of fixed length.


CLS 29/781
TXT Pipe section:

    Apparatus under subclass 779 wherein the article to be produced is an
    elongated tube.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is means to form an elongated tube and
    simultaneously fill that tube with powder.


CLS 29/782
TXT Assembled to article:

    Apparatus under subclass 779 wherein the second work part is an element of
    definite length to which the continuously moving first part is associated,
    juxtaposed, or fastened.


CLS 29/783
TXT Multiple station assembly apparatus:

    Apparatus under subclass 771 including a first work station wherein work
    parts are juxtaposed, associated, or secured together and a second work
    station where work parts are juxtaposed, associated, or secured together.

    (1)     Note.  The work stations may operate independently or dependently
    one of the other, may operate on the same or different work, or may operate
    simultaneously or sequentially.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    742,    for multiple station assembly apparatus for assembling and
    electrical device.

    791,    for multiple station assembly apparatus, generally.


CLS 29/784
TXT Including assembly pallet:

    Apparatus under subclass 771 including a member adapted to pass through the
    apparatus and serve as a base upon which the work parts are assembled,
    which member is not intended to remain as a permanent part of the assembly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    799,    for assembly apparatus including an assembly pallet for supporting
    the work parts passing from one work station to another work station.


CLS 29/785
TXT Including turret-type conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 771 wherein at least one of the feed means
    includes a circular member having peripherally spaced pockets adapted to
    receive work parts, which annular member is driven intermittently to
    sequentially present work parts from the peripherally spaced pockets to an
    assembly station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    792,    for multiple station assembly apparatus including turret type feed
    means.


CLS 29/786
TXT Including converging conveyors:

    Apparatus under subclass 771 including a first transport means for carrying
    a first work part along a first path and second transport means for
    carrying a second work part along a second path, wherein the first and
    second work parts are moved toward each other for assembly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    793,    for similar apparatus for assembling wherein there may be manual
    intervention.


CLS 29/787
TXT And means to fasten work parts together:

    Apparatus under subclass 771 comprising means to secure one work part to a
    corresponding portion of another work part or the same work part.


CLS 29/788
TXT By deforming:

    Apparatus under subclass 787 including means to secure a first work part
    and a second work part together by stressing at least one work part beyond
    the elastic limit thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    564.1,  for assembly means combined with deforming means wherein the
    deformation is other than to fasten work parts together.

    715,    for similar assembly apparatus including work responsive control
    means.

    736,    for means for securing parts of an electric motor or generator by
    stressing a part beyond the elastic limit thereof.

    753,    for means for stressing a work part beyond its elastic limit in
    fastening a terminal to an electricity conducting wire.

    761,    for means for fastening of electrical components by deformation;
    and, see the search notes thereunder for other means for assembly by
    deformation.

    796,    for multiple station assembly apparatus including means to fasten
    the work parts by deformation.


CLS 29/789
TXT By elastic joining:

    Apparatus under subclass 787 including means to secure a first work part
    and a second work part together by stressing at least one of the work parts
    within the elastic limit thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    717,    for similar apparatus including work responsive control means.

    752,    for handheld means to secure a terminal to an electricity conductor.

    797,    for multiple assembly stations including means to fasten work parts
    together by elastic joining.


CLS 29/790
TXT By friction fit:

    Apparatus under subclass 787 including means to force a first work part
    into interfitting relationship with a second work part such that the work
    parts are secured one to the other without any indication of changing the
    shape of either work part either within or beyond the elastic limit thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The securement of this subclass is generally termed
    "force-fit" or "press-fit".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    718,    for similar apparatus including work responsive control means.


CLS 29/791
TXT Multiple station assembly or disassembly apparatus:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 including a first work station wherein work
    parts are juxtaposed, associated, or secured together or moved out of
    intimate engagement and a second work station where work parts are
    juxtaposed, associated, or secured together or moved out of intimate
    engagement.

    (1)     Note.  The work stations may operate independently or dependently
    one of the other, may operate on the same or different work, or may operate
    simultaneously or sequentially.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    742,    for multiple station assembly apparatus for assembling an
    electrical device.

    783,    for multiple station assembly apparatus including means to
    interrelatedly feed plural work parts from plural sources without manual
    intervention.


CLS 29/792
TXT Including turret-type conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 791 including a feed means comprising a circular
    member having peripherally spaced pockets adapted to receive work parts,
    which annular member is driven intermittently to sequentially present work
    parts from the peripherally spaced pockets to an assembly station, or to
    sequentially remove work parts from a disassembly station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    785,    for a turret type conveyor used in apparatus for assembling work
    parts from plural sources without manual intervention.


CLS 29/793
TXT Including converging conveyors:

    Apparatus under subclass 791 including a first transport means for carrying
    a first work part along a first path and a second transport means for
    carrying a second work part along a second path, wherein the first and
    second work parts are moved toward each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    786,    for similar apparatus for assembling without manual intervention.


CLS 29/794
TXT And primary central conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 793 wherein the first transport means serves to
    receive the second work part from the second transport means.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is the apparatus common to "assembly line"
    technique wherein a work part is transferred manually from a secondary
    transport means to a primary transport means.


CLS 29/795
TXT Means to fasten work parts together:

    Apparatus under subclass 791 comprising means to secure a portion of one
    work member to a corresponding portion of another work member or of the
    same work member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    791,    for multiple station apparatus to unfasten work parts.


CLS 29/796
TXT By deforming:

    Apparatus under subclass 795 including means to secure a first work part
    and a second work part together by stressing at least one work part beyond
    the elastic limit thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    788,    for means to feed distinct work parts from plural sources without
    manual intervention including means to fasten by deforming, and see the
    search notes thereunder for other fastening by deforming.


CLS 29/797
TXT By elastic joining:

    Apparatus under subclass 795 including means to secure a first and a second
    work part together by stressing at least one of the work parts within the
    elastic limit thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    739,    for means to feed distinct work parts from plural sources without
    manual intervention including means to fasten by elastic joining, and see
    the search notes thereunder for other similar fastening.


CLS 29/798
TXT Means to drive self-piercing work part:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 including means to force a cutting edge of one
    work part to form or enlarge a hole in a second work part and force the
    first work part through or into the second work part, whereby the parts are
    secured together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    432+,   for the corresponding process and for a process corresponding to
    the apparatus of Class 227.

    716,    for similar apparatus including a work responsive control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, especially subclasses 19+ for
    combined apparatus for juxtaposing work parts and applying a fastening
    member, e.g., a nail, a rivet, etc., thereto.  This subclass includes
    apparatus for driving one member to pierce and thereby be fastened to
    another member if the driven member is not an "elongated member" as
    required for Class 227.  Also, this subclass includes structure for
    fastening by use of an "elongated member" if no driving structure is
    claimed which would, if claimed, establish classification in Class 227.


CLS 29/799
TXT Including assembly pallet:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 including a detached member adapted to pass
    through the apparatus and serve as a base upon which the work parts are
    assembled, which member is not intended to remain as a permanent part of
    the assembly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    784,    for assembly apparatus including an assembly pallet for supporting
    work parts fed from plural sources without manual intervention.


CLS 29/800
TXT Including provision to utilize thermal expansion of work:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 including provision using the phenomenon that
    work changes dimension when heated to associate, juxtapose, or fasten work
    parts together; or to separate or unfasten one work part from another.


CLS 29/801
TXT Means to assemble or disassemble container and fluid component:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 including means to assemble to a preformed
    work part a liquid or gaseous work part that is intended to remain as a
    part of the assembled product; or means to detach such previously assembled
    parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    778,    for means to assemble a liquid work part to a preformed work part
    without manual intervention in the assembly of a vessel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, for closing a preformed vessel filled with a fluent
    material wherein the material is not intended to be a part of the vessel.


CLS 29/802
TXT Vehicle wheel:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 adapted to assemble or disassemble a circular
    device intended to roll on terrain and support a mobile carriage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    894.3+,for the process of assembling a vehicle wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    157,    Wheelwright Machines, for devices meeting that class definition for
    the building of a wheel, particularly subclasses 1.1+, for apparatus for
    mounting or dismounting a rubber tire from a wheel; and subclasses 1.5+ for
    apparatus for assembling metallic, spoked wheels.


CLS 29/803
TXT Railway wheel:

    Apparatus under subclass 802 adapted for assemble or disassemble a wheel
    that is intended to roll on a prepared ridge of rigid material, generally
    metal.


CLS 29/804
TXT Tumbler lock:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 for juxtaposing, association, or fastening the
    component parts or separating previously assembled parts of a securing
    device, which securing device includes a movable impediment adapted to
    respond to an operating element to move the impediment alternatively from
    an open to a secure condition, or for detaching such previously assembled
    parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, for the device assembled by the apparatus of this subclass.

    81,     Tools, subclass 15.9 for a tool specially adapted to manipulate a
    lock, latch, or portion thereof.


CLS 29/805
TXT Toy doll:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 for juxtaposing, associating, or fastening
    together the component parts of a child's plaything, which plaything
    generally resembles the form of a human being or animal, or for detaching
    such previously assembled parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    434+,   for a process of assembling a doll eye into a doll head to permit
    movement (e.g., closing of the eye relative to the head).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus, for
    molding of doll parts, particularly subclasses 110+ for molding onto a
    preformed part such as a doll's eye.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 268+ for toy dolls.


CLS 29/806
TXT Film or tape cartridge:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 including means to juxtapose or fasten the
    component parts of an article of commerce including a support vessel and a
    relatively thin, pliant, web-like material to be supplied to that vessel
    for subsequent discharge or utilization, or including means to separate or
    unfasten the component parts of such an article of commerce.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, for similar means for assembling an article(s) into
    a vessel wherein the article(s) is stored rather than a device as found
    here wherein the entire assembly is considered to be an article of commerce.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 520+ for winding
    weblike material into a convolute coil.


CLS 29/807
TXT Crystal to watch or clock:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 intended to juxtapose, associate, or fasten
    the face covering transparent window of a time piece to the time piece
    case, or intended to separate or unfasten the face covering transparent
    window of a time piece from the time piece case.

    (1)     Note.  The patents in this subclass, for the most part, distort the
    crystal to decrease the perimeter and enable the crystal to be inserted
    into its bezel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 3.5+, for a tool for operating on and assembling
    a spectacle frame and a lens and subclasses 6+ for a watchmaker's tool.


CLS 29/808
TXT Means to insert or extract pen point:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 for associating, juxtaposing, or fastening the
    portion of a writing pen that engages material to be written on to the
    handle thereof, or for detaching such a portion from the handle to which it
    was previously assembled.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note under the definition of subclass 700 pointing
    out that to meet the requirements of these subclasses "means to
    disassemble" requires only the recognition of a single work part and the
    functional intent to separate:  while "means to assemble" requires
    recognition of two work parts and the functional intent to bring together
    or to fasten together.

    (2)     Note.  Most of the patents in this subclass are specific to means
    for withdrawing (i.e., "means to disassemble") a pen point from its holder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 442 for a pen
    point ejector constituting part of a penholder.


CLS 29/809
TXT With magazine supply:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 including in combination therewith an attached
    storage chamber for a work part and including provision to transport that
    work part to the portion of the apparatus where that work part is to be
    assembled to another work part not originating in the storage chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    776,    for means to convey a first work part from a first source to an
    assembly station and means to convey a second work part from a second
    source to that assembly station without manual intervention.

    822,    for means to convey a first work part to an assembly station, which
    means acts to convey a second work part to the assembly station for
    assembly with the first work part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 215+ for a reciprocating platen press not
    elsewhere provided for with a storage provision for material to be
    subjected to a pressing operation.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for an article dispenser
    (feeder) not otherwise provided for, and see the class definition of Class
    221 for a statement of the class lines and for the disposition of related
    disclosures.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclasses 107+ for means to
    drive an elongated fastener into a workpiece combined with a supply
    magazine.


CLS 29/810
TXT And magnetic work-holder or positioner:

    Apparatus under subclass 809 including means having the property of
    attracting ferrous work material adapted to utilize that property for
    manipulating the work or product or for holding the work in position at the
    location of work securing means.


CLS 29/811.2
TXT Assembling means comprising hand-manipulatable implement:

    Apparatus under subclass 809 adapted to be at least partially supported by
    an operative during the assembly or disassembly operation.


CLS 29/812
TXT One work part comprising living tissue:

    Apparatus under subclass 811 wherein the work in the magazine is adapted to
    be united with work in the form of a live human or animal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, for means to drive a fastener
    into a work part, or human body.


CLS 29/812.5
TXT Comprising driver for snap-off-mandrel fastner; e.g., pop (tm ) riveter:

    Apparatus under subclass 809.2 wherein a first tool engages an annular end
    surface of a tube-like workpiece, which surface generally faces the device,
    which first tool includes a passageway coaxial with the tubular axis of
    that workpiece, and wherein a second tool functions within that passageway
    to  engage a shank portion of a second workpiece extending through the
    tubular axis of the work and through the coaxial passageway, which first
    tool urges  against the annular surface and which   second tool reactively
    pulls against the shank with sufficient force to move the second workpiece
    with respect to the first and to ultimately exceed the tensile strength of
    the shank portion and thereby divide one portion of the shank from the
    remainder thereof, which remainder serves with the tubular first  workpiece
    as a fastner.

    (1)     Note.  The first and second  workpiece of this subclass are
    normally supplied in the magazine as an assembly and are to be brought into
    assembly with another work part not  originating in the storage chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243.521+, for a driver for a snap-off-mandrel      fastner, generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 391.6 for a device including concentric
    or telescoped deforming tools wherein a tool fits inside a hollow metal
    fastner workpart to reshape that workpart into engagement with  another
    member in which the fastner is fitted for securement, wherein no part of
    the device is in engagement with the other member.


CLS 29/813
TXT One work part comprising nut or screw:

    Apparatus under subclass 811 including means to secure one workpiece to
    another by rotating one with respect to the other and utilizing relative
    helical ribbing of one of the workpieces to cause the securement.


CLS 29/814
TXT One work part comprising paper clip:

    Apparatus under subclass 811 including means particularly adapted to
    grippingly secure a multi-convolution spring ring to the margin of a sheet
    of paper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    809,    for means to superimpose two sheets of paper combined with means to
    fasten the sheets using a multi-convolution spring ring.


CLS 29/815
TXT Means to assemble tire stud into tire tread:

    Apparatus under subclass 811 including means particularly adapted to
    assemble a traction improving lug into a prepared socket in a vehicle
    supporting tire.


CLS 29/816
TXT Means to fasten by deforming:

    Apparatus under subclass 811 including means to secure a first and second
    work part by stressing at least one work part beyond the elastic limit
    thereof.


CLS 29/817
TXT Fastening sinker to fishing line:

    Apparatus under subclass 816 intended to deform a heavy, metallic member
    onto a filament, which assembly is to be used in fishing.


CLS 29/818
TXT Means to fasten by deforming:

    Apparatus under subclass 809 including means to secure a first and a second
    work part by stressing at least one work part beyond the elastic limit
    thereof.


CLS 29/819
TXT Running-length work:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 adapted to assemble (i.e., juxtapose,
    associate, or fasten) a first work part to a second work part, wherein at
    least the first work part moves continuously during assembly with respect
    to the apparatus without any recognition of the trailing end thereof; or
    adapted to detach such previously assembled parts.


CLS 29/820
TXT Assembled on core:

    Apparatus under subclass 819 including a second work part on which the
    first work part is flexed and wrapped to encircle (more than 360 degrees)
    thereabout.


CLS 29/821
TXT Including means to vibrate work:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 including means to cause a work part to move
    rapidly to and fro during the assembly or disassembly operation.

    (1)     Note.  The vibration applied by the apparatus of this subclass may
    be to cause assembly or may be to assist some other structure to perform
    the assembly operation.


CLS 29/822
TXT Including work conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 including means to transport work parts from a
    remote position toward an assembly station for assembly with each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    771,    for means to convey a first work part from a first source to an
    assembly station, means to convey a second work part from a second source
    to that assembly station, without manual intervention.

    809+,   for means to convey work parts from a single source to a work
    station for assembly with work part not from that source.


CLS 29/823
TXT Including transporting track:

    Apparatus under subclass 822 including fixed structure adapted to cause the
    work parts to move a prescribed path with respect to the assembly station.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is an endless belt utilized to transport
    work parts.


CLS 29/824
TXT And work carrying vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 823 including a wheeled member adapted to follow
    the fixed path and carry a work part thereon with respect to the assembly
    station.


CLS 29/825
TXT Conductor or circuit manufacturing:

    Process under subclass 592.1 of manufacturing a device or structure which
    confines an electrical current to a conductive path determined by the
    configuration of the device or structure.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and indented subclasses provide for a process
    of manufacturing a conductor characterized by specific physical
    configurations as well as a process of joining electrical elements to form
    an electrical circuit of predetermined electrical and physical
    configuration not classified elsewhere.

    (2)     Note.  Since all materials that have the property of conducting
    electricity and all devices made therefrom may be termed conductors, only a
    process under the class definition which makes a device with the stated
    proximate purpose of providing a conducting electrical current are placed
    in this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  The following are definitions for various terms used
    extensively throughout the following definitions. Whenever these terms
    appear in the definitions they will be denoted by an asterisk (*) to remind
    and clarify their meanings to the user.

            Electrical component (*): a self-contained active or passive
    element designed for and capable of utilizing electricity to produce a
    specified electrical characteristic property, or output other than normal
    conductivity associated with any electrical structure.

            Elongated conductor (*): a body whose longitudinal dimension is
    much greater than any of its lateral dimensions and which is designed for
    the stated proximate purpose of carrying an electric current or
    electromagnetic energy.

            Terminal (*): an electrically conductive connective means having a
    portion or end designed for relatively permanent attachment to an elongated
    conductor and having a second portion or end designed to facilitate
    connection with another elongated conductor, an electrical component, or
    another electrically conductive connective means.

    (4)     Note.  The terms "manufacturing", "shaping", "assembly", and
    "deforming" are defined in part III of the class (29) definitions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, especially subclasses 36+ for process of
    fusion bonding of glass to a formed part and subclass 155 for electronic
    device making means involving fusion bonding.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    47+ for a method of making an indefinite length electrical conductor
    involving an operation other than metal working and amounting to more than
    mere wire of filament making.

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, for a multistep process of
    manufacturing an electrical circuit or conductor which involves a chemical
    reaction, e.g., etching.  See the main class definition of Class 216 for a
    statement of the complete line between Class 216 and this Class 29.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, particularly
    subclasses 26+, 51, 55, 64+, and 106+ for methods of packaging a
    semiconductor device; see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 29/826
TXT Brush:

    Process under subclass 825 of manufacturing an electrically conductive
    element specially designed or adapted to contact and conduct electricity to
    or from the rotor of a rotary dynamoelectric device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    598,    for a process of assembling a brush and rotor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 248+ for
    electrical brush structure with or without an electrical connector.


CLS 29/827
TXT Beam lead frame or beam lead device:

    Process under subclass 825 of manufacturing either: (1) an integrated
    circuit having electrical connecting structure in the form of an
    electrically conductive body having a generally rectangular cross section
    and wherein the body is mounted in a cantilever fashion to the circuit, or
    (2) an intermediate article of manufacture utilized to produce electrical
    connecting structure for integrated circuits consisting of a generally flat
    electrically conductive strap or band section which has been stamped, cut,
    or otherwise deformed to produce an open encasing structure provided with a
    plurality of generally rectangular cross-sectioned inwardly facing bodies
    designed to be attached to the circuit in a cantilever fashion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, subclass 14 lead frame or beam
    lead in an electrical circuit.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 666-677 for electrical lead frames, per se, or combined with
    active solid-state devices.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 813 for a
    lead frame supporting a plurality of diverse electrical components.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 571-574, if
    stock material is claimed either as an individual lead frame without being
    labeled "lead frame" or as a strip of interconnected lead frames prior to
    separation into individual lead frames.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, particularly
    subclasses 111+ and 123 for methods of attaching a lead frame to a
    semiconductor device possessing significant semiconductor device structure;
    see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 29/828
TXT Co-axial cable:

    Process under subclass 825 of making an electrical path structure to be
    utilized to transmit electrical energy in the form of a first elongated
    conductor completely surrounding, co-extensive with, and insulated from a
    second conductor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    517,    for a process in which a member which is secured within a tubular
    shaped hollow body is a rod or similarly proportioned part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 75 for a co-axial
    cable joint with an end structure; subclass 88 for a spliced single or
    plural contact co-axial cable joint; subclass 102 for sheath or armored
    conduit, cable, or conductor structure.


CLS 29/829
TXT On flat or curved insulated base, e.g., printed circuit, etc.:

    Process under subclass 825 (1) of manufacturing a conductive path to, on,
    or in an insulative base, which base has either a curved or planar surface
    and wherein the conductive path lies on, or follows the contour of the
    curved surface, or lies on or runs parallel to the planar surface, (2) of
    assembling of an electrical component to a base having a conductive path
    applied thereto, or formed thereon or therein as set forth in (1) above, or
    (3) of assembling a terminal to, or for forming a terminal or connector on,
    or through a base having a conductive path applied thereto or formed
    thereon or therein as set forth in (1) above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 250+ for printed
    circuit board structure, per se, and subclasses 71 and 72 for a branched or
    multiduct conduit combined with a printed circuit board.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 200 for printed circuit inductor device
    structure.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 748+ for a
    printed circuit board used to mount plural diverse electrical components.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 55+ for an electrical connector
    combined with a printed circuit.


CLS 29/830
TXT Assembling bases:

    Process under subclass 829 of assembling together two or more bases, each
    of which is provided with an electrical current path confining device or
    structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 736 and
    784+ for plural circuit boards housing or mounting a module.


CLS 29/831
TXT Assembling formed circuit to base:

    Process under subclass 829 of assembling a previously fabricated,
    substantially rigid, self-sustaining conductive path to the base.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclass 668  for a lead frame on an electrically insulating carrier other
    than a printed circuit board, subclasses 701-707 for housings made of
    electrically insulating material, and subclasses 787+ for encapsulated
    devices.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 736 for a
    printed circuit board mounting a module.


CLS 29/832
TXT Assembling to base an electrical component, e.g., capacitor, etc.:


    Process under subclass 829 of assembling an electrical component (*) to the
    base.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25.01+, for a process or apparatus for making a semiconductor or a barrier
    layer device.

    739,    for apparatus including means for engaging a planar nonconductive
    member, e.g., a circuit board, having or to be provided with paths of
    conductive material to an electrical component, the component being secured
    to a conductive path.

    741,    for apparatus used to make more than one electrical connection
    between an electrical component and paths of conductive material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclass 668  for a lead frame on an electrically insulating carrier other
    than a printed circuit board, subclasses 701-707 for housings made of
    electrically insulating material, and subclasses 787+ for encapsulated
    devices.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 760+ for
    electrical components connected to a printed circuit board.


CLS 29/833
TXT By utilizing optical sighting device:

    Process under subclass 832 wherein the assembly is performed at least in
    part by using means which aid or enhance visual location or determination
    of the position of a component relative to the base.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclass 86 for manufacturing wherein a picture signal
    generator (i.e., television camera) is utilized for monitoring a
    manufacturing operation.

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, for an optical projector capable of
    being used in an assembly method.

    382,    Image Analysis, subclasses 141+ for manufacturing using image
    analysis.


CLS 29/834
TXT With component orienting:

    Process under subclass 832 including the specific step of aligning or
    positioning the electrical component with respect to a portion of the base.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    759,    for apparatus including means to align and advance a work part.

    760,    for apparatus with a work holder for assembly.


CLS 29/835
TXT And shaping, e.g., cutting or bending, etc.:

    Process under subclass 834 and the step of shaping the electrical component
    or base.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25.01+, for a process or apparatus for making a semiconductor or a barrier
    layer device.

    33.5,   for apparatus for assembling a first element or portion thereof to
    an edge of a second element including binding or covering and cutting.

    838+,   for a process of assembling an electrical component to a base by
    inserting and deforming a component lead or terminal in a base aperture.

    844+,   for a process of assembling a terminal to a base by deforming or
    shaping.


CLS 29/836
TXT Different components:

    Process under subclass 834 wherein plural diverse electrical components are
    assembled to the base.


CLS 29/837
TXT By inserting component lead or terminal into base aperture:

    Process under subclass 832 wherein an electrically conducting wire of the
    electrical component or a terminal  attached thereto is passed into a hole
    in the base.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 761 for
    plural diverse electrical components connected to a printed circuit board
    by the use of aperture therein.


CLS 29/838
TXT With deforming of lead or terminal:

    Process under subclass 837 wherein either the wire or the terminal (*) is
    deformed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33.5,   for apparatus for assembling a first element or portion thereof to
    an edge of a second element including binding or covering and cutting.

    56.5,   for plural devices manufacturing apparatus including machining
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 877+ for an electrical connector
    adapted to be secured by crimping, deforming, or bending.


CLS 29/839
TXT Including metal fusion:

    Process under subclass 838 wherein a portion of the terminal (*) is metal
    and wherein said portion or a portion of the wire is either raised to a
    fusible temperature or subjected to metal in a fused state thereby
    effecting bonding of the electrical component (*) to the base.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    840,    for a process of assembling an electrical component to a base by
    metal fusion.

    843,    for a process of assembling a terminal to a base by metal fusion.

    860,    for a process of assembling a terminal to an elongated conductor by
    metal fusion.

    879,    for a process of assembling contact or terminal by metal fusion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 78.01+ for a process or apparatus for
    bonding (e.g., welding) by use of electrical current and pressure.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 179.1+ for a process of
    simultaneously fusion bonding (e.g., welding, generally) of multiple joints
    of an electrical device.  See Class 228, class definition, V, A, 1, for the
    line between Class 228  and other manufacturing classes.


CLS 29/840
TXT By metal fusion:

    Process under subclass 832 wherein a portion of the electrical component
    (*) or of a terminal (*) attached thereto is composed of metal and further
    wherein the portion is either raised to a fusible temperature or subjected
    to metal in a fused state thereby effecting bonding of the electrical
    component (*) to the base.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 78.01+ for a process or apparatus for
    bonding (e.g., welding) by use of electrical current and pressure.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 179.1+ for a process of
    simultaneously fusion bonding (e.g., welding, generally) multiple joints of
    an electrical device.  See Class 228, class definition V, A, 1, for the
    line between Class 228 and other manufacturing classes.


CLS 29/841
TXT With encapsulating, e.g., potting, etc.:

    Process under subclass 832 including covering a substantial portion of the
    electrical component (*) to protect same from deleterious effects of the
    environment.

    (1)     Note.  The encapsulating is usually effected by molding a flowable
    and settable electrically insulating material about the component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25.01+, for a process or apparatus for making a semiconductor or a barrier
    layer device.

    530,    for a process of (1) depositing a flowable material upon or into a
    void or opening in the work or (2) configuring a flowable material (e.g.,
    casting, molding) combined with additional manufacturing and which
    combination is not elsewhere classified.

    855+,   for a process of assembling electrical components to a terminal or
    elongated with encapsulating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 52.1 for an
    electrical device enclosed in a box or housing.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 272 for a process of encapsulating of electrical components by
    molding.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 424 for an
    electrical device provided with shielding means.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 625+ for an electrical connector
    provided with molded insulation other than a conductor sheath.


CLS 29/842
TXT Assembling terminal to base:

    Process under subclass 829 of assembling a terminal (*) to the base.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 774 for a
    specific shaped lead on a printed circuit board to facilitate connection to
    an electrical component.


CLS 29/843
TXT By metal fusion bonding:

    Process under subclass 842 wherein a portion of the terminal (*) is
    composed of metal which is either raised to a fusible temperature or is
    subjected to metal in a fused state thereby effecting bonding of the
    terminal (*) to the base.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 78.01 for a process or apparatus for
    bonding by electrical current and pressure.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 179.1+ for a process of
    simultaneously fusion bonding multiple joints of an electrical device.  See
    Class 228, class definition, V, A, 1, for the line between Class 228 and
    other manufacturing classes.


CLS 29/844
TXT By deforming or shaping:

    Process under subclass 842 wherein either the terminal (*) or base is
    deformed or shaped.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33.5,   for apparatus for assembling a first element or portion thereof to
    an edge of a second element including binding or covering and cutting.

    56.5,   for plural diverse manufacturing apparatus including machining
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 877+ for an electrical connector
    secured by crimping, deforming, or bonding.


CLS 29/845
TXT With shaping or forcing terminal into base aperture:

    Process under subclass 844 wherein the base is provided with a hole and
    further wherein either the hole is used to shape the terminal (*) or the
    terminal (*) is compelled to pass into the hole.


CLS 29/846
TXT Manufacturing circuit on or in base:

    Process under subclass 829 of manufacturing a conductive path to, on, or in
    an insulative base.

    (1)     Note.  A circuit functions only to electrically connect two points,
    devices, etc., whereas a terminal functions to both electrically and
    mechanically connect two points, devices, etc.

    (2)     Note.  A circuit may be manufactured by molding, coating, etching,
    wire forming, etc., or a combination of these steps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 250+ for
    printed circuit board structure, per se.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 200 for printed circuit inductor device
    structure.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 777 for a
    specific pattern on a printed circuit board facilitating attachment of
    electrical components.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 96+ for coating a process producing a
    printed circuit.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclass 5 for a process of photochemistry using a mask:
    subclasses 311+ for a process of photochemistry producing electrical
    devices.


CLS 29/847
TXT With selective destruction of conductive paths:

    Process under subclass 846 wherein a plurality of paths are formed and
    including the step of destroying a predetermined portion of a path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 118+ for electrolytic coating
    processes of selected areas.


CLS 29/848
TXT With molding of insulated base:

    Process under subclass 846 including the step of forming (i.e., shaping) a
    fluid settable material that is highly resistant to the passage of
    electricity into the shape of a base.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    for a method of molding a plastic or nonmetallic article.


CLS 29/849
TXT Simultaneous circuit manufacturing:

    Process under subclass 848 wherein the circuit manufacture occurs
    concurrently with the molding of the base.


CLS 29/850
TXT By using wire as conductive path:

    Process under subclass 846 wherein the path is formed by a metallic body
    whose longitudinal dimension is much greater than its round cross section
    and which is designed for the stated proximate purpose of carrying an
    electric current.


CLS 29/851
TXT With sintering of base:

    Process under subclass 846 including the cohering base material by heating
    it almost to, but below, its melting point.


CLS 29/852
TXT By forming conductive walled aperture in base:

    Process under subclass 846 of shaping a hole in the base and attaching
    electrically conductive material to the walls of the hole.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 97 for a process of coating a hole wall
    of a printed circuit board.


CLS 29/853
TXT With deforming of conductive path:

    Process under subclass 852 including deforming the electrically conductive
    path to provide conductive material in the hole.


CLS 29/854
TXT Assembling electrical component directly to terminal or elongated conductor:

    Process under subclass 825 of contiguously assembling an electrical
    component (*) to a terminal (*) or an elongated conductor (*).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25.01+, for a process or apparatus for making a semiconductor or a barrier
    layer device.

    619,    for a process of making electrical resistors with at least one
    terminal being applied to a resistance element.

    621,    for a process of making electrical resistors including applying one
    or more terminals to a resistance element.

    739,    for apparatus including means for engaging a planar nonconductive
    member, e.g., a circuit board, having or to be provided with paths of
    conductive material to an electrical component, the component being secured
    to a conductive path.

    741,    for apparatus used to make more than one electrical component and
    paths of conductive material.

    748,    for apparatus including means to juxtapose, associate, or fasten an
    electrical connector member to a conductor, the connector member being
    elongated and rodlike.

    749,    for apparatus including means for assembling a plurality of rodlike
    conductors to a terminal(s) simultaneously.

    750,    for apparatus including means for assembling a plurality of rodlike
    conductors to a terminal(s) simultaneously, said apparatus being hand
    manipulatable.

    751,    for apparatus including means for assembling a plurality of rodlike
    conductors to a terminal(s) simultaneously, said apparatus being hand
    manipulatable and being capable of fastening by deformation.

    752,    for apparatus including means for assembling a plurality of rodlike
    conductors to a terminal(s) simultaneously, said apparatus being hand
    manipulatable and being capable of fastening by elastic joining.

    753,    for apparatus including means for assembling a plurality of rodlike
    conductors to a terminal(s) simultaneously, said apparatus being capable of
    fastening by deformation.

    754,    for apparatus including means for assembling a plurality of rodlike
    conductors to a terminal(s) simultaneously, said apparatus being capable of
    fastening by elastic joining.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 78.01 for a process or apparatus for
    bonding by electrical current and pressure.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 179.1+ for a process of
    simultaneously fusion bonding multiple joints of an electrical device. See
    Class 228, class definition, V, A, 1, for the line between Class 228 and
    other manufacturing classes.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, particularly
    subclasses 26+, 51, 55, 64+, and 106+ for methods of packaging a
    semiconductor device; see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 29/855
TXT With encapsulating:

    Process under subclass 854 including substantially covering a portion of
    the assembled component, (*) terminal, (*) or conductor (*) to protect same
    from deleterious effects of the environment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    530,    for a process including (1) depositing a flowable material upon or
    into a void or opening in the work, or (2) configuring a flowable material
    (e.g., casting, molding) combined with additional manufacturing, which
    combination is not elsewhere classified.

    586,    for a process of making and encapsulating a semiconductor or
    barrier layer device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 52.1 for an
    electrical device enclosed in a box or housing.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 424 for an
    electrical device provided with a shielding.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 271+ for an electrical connector
    provided with a joint sealing gasket or packing and subclasses 607+ for an
    electrical connector with a radio type electrical shield.


CLS 29/856
TXT By molding or insulating material:

    Process under subclass 855 wherein the encapsulating is by forming and
    shaping a settable fluid material highly resistant to the passage of
    electricity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 272.11+ for a process of encapsulating electrical component by
    molding.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 625+ for an electrical connector
    provided with molded insulation other than a conductor sheath.


CLS 29/857
TXT Assembling terminal to elongated conductor:

    Process under subclass 825 for assembling a terminal (*) to an elongated
    conductor (*).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    747,    for apparatus including means to juxtapose, associate, or fasten an
    electrical connector member to a conductor.

    748,    for apparatus including means to juxtapose, associate, or fasten an
    electrical connector member to a conductor, the connector member being
    elongated and rodlike.

    749,    for apparatus including means for assembling a plurality of rodlike
    conductors to a terminal(s) simultaneously.

    750,    for apparatus including means for assembling a plurality of rodlike
    conductors to a terminal(s) simultaneously, said apparatus being hand
    manipulatable.

    752,    for apparatus including means for assembling a plurality of rodlike
    conductors to a terminal(s) simultaneously, said apparatus being hand
    manipulatable and being capable of fastening by elastic joining.

    754,    for apparatus including means for assembling a plurality of rodlike
    conductors to a terminal(s) simultaneously, said apparatus being capable of
    fastening by elastic joining.

    756,    for apparatus including means to juxtapose, associate, or fasten a
    conductor, the assembled structure having a switch or fuse.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 75 for conduits,
    cables, or conductors having a joint with an end structure; subclass 94 for
    bare conductor joints between conduits, conductors, cables, or connectors.


CLS 29/858
TXT With molding of electrically insulating material:

    Process under subclass 857 including forming (i.e., shaping) a fluid
    settable material or plastically reshaping a preform wherein the material
    or preform is highly resistant to the passage of electric current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 625+ for an electrical connector
    provided with shaped insulation other than a conductor sheath.


CLS 29/859
TXT By shrinking of cover:

    Process under subclass 858 wherein the preform is a tube or sleeve
    structure and further wherein said structure is contracted in size about a
    portion of the terminal (*) or conductor (*).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 271+ for an electrical connector
    provided with a joint sealing gasket or packing.


CLS 29/860
TXT By metal fusion bonding:

    Process under subclass 857 wherein either end of the terminal (1) or an end
    of the elongated conductor (2) is metal and further wherein assembly is
    effected by juxtaposing and bonding the metal end of the terminal to the
    end of the conductor either by (a) raising the temperature of the metal end
    to its fusion point, or (b) applying molten metal to the juxtaposed ends.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 78.01 for a process or apparatus for
    bonding by electrical current and pressure.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 179.1+ for a process of
    simultaneously fusion bonding multiple joints of an electrical device.  See
    Class 228, class definition, V, A, 1, for the line between Class 228 and
    other manufacturing classes.


CLS 29/861
TXT By deforming:

    Process under subclass 857 wherein the assembly is effected or enhanced
    either by deforming the terminal (*) or the conductor (*).

    (1)     Note.  The deforming can be of any portion of the terminal or
    conductor including various insulative covering layers thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    751,    for apparatus including means for assembling a plurality of rodlike
    conductors to a terminal(s) simultaneously, said apparatus being hand
    manipulatable and being capable of fastening by deformation.

    753,    for apparatus including means for assembling a plurality of rodlike
    conductors to a terminal(s) simultaneously, said apparatus being capable of
    fastening by deformation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 84 for a crimped
    joint between conduits, cables, or conductors.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 877+ for an electrical connector
    secured by crimping, deforming, or bending.


CLS 29/862
TXT Of ferrule about conductor and terminal:

    Process under subclass 861 wherein the assembly is effected by the use of a
    short tube designed to substantially circumscribe and be deformed about the
    assembled terminal (*) and conductor (*).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes a process of attaching a terminal to
    a wire wherein a separate ferrule is employed. A process utilizing a
    terminal with integral ferrule or ferrule-like structure, which is deformed
    to make the connection between the terminal and wire, is provided in other
    subclasses under 863.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 95+ for an electrical connector
    having means to engage the conductor sheath to ground the sheath.


CLS 29/863
TXT Of terminal:

    Process under subclass 861 wherein the terminal (*) is deformed.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for a process in which the deforming
    force is primarily, if not totally, applied to the terminal. Any
    deformation of the conductive wire resulting from the terminal deformation
    is considered to be secondary and therefore not controlling as to
    classification.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56.5,   for plural diverse manufacturing apparatus including machining
    means.

    871,    for a process of assembling conductive wires by deforming a bridge
    member.


CLS 29/864
TXT With forming eyelet from elongated conductor:

    Process under subclass 863 including deforming an end of the elongated
    conductor(s) into a generally circular configuration to receive the
    terminal (*).


CLS 29/865
TXT With penetrating portion:

    Process under subclass 863 wherein the terminal (*) is provided with
    structure capable of piercing either a single or plural stranded elongated
    conductor (*) or an electrically resistant material covering thereon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 387+ for an electrical connector
    provided with piercing means.


CLS 29/866
TXT Through insulation:

    Process under subclass 865 wherein the penetrating portion pierces a layer
    of electrically resistant material covering the elongated conductor (*).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 387+ for an electrical connector
    provided with insulation piercing means.


CLS 29/867
TXT With insulation removal:

    Process under subclass 863 wherein the elongated conductor (*) is provided
    with material highly resistant to the passage of electric current and
    including removing some of the material.


CLS 29/868
TXT Assembling elongated conductors, e.g., splicing, etc.:

    Process under subclass 825 of joining elongated conductor(s) (*) to one
    another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56.5,   for plural diverse manufacturing apparatus including machining
    means.

    755,    for apparatus including means to juxtapose, associate, or fasten
    multiple independent conductors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    49 for a process of making and splicing an electrical conductor of
    indefinite length.  See notes under subclass 47, particularly notes (3) to
    (7), for the proper classification between Classes 29 and 156 regarding the
    manufacture of indefinite length electrical conductors.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 21 for conduit or
    joint structure; subclasses 71+ for spliced branched and/or multiducted
    conduits; subclass 73.1 for spliced conduits, cables, and conductors having
    conductive stress distributing means; subclass 88 for spliced plural
    conduit, cable, or conductor joints; and subclass 94 for bare conductor
    joints between conduits, cables, or conductors.


CLS 29/869
TXT With end-to-end orienting:

    Process under subclass 868 wherein respective ends of the elongated
    conductors are juxtaposed and manipulated to extend along a common
    longitudinal axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    756,    for apparatus including means to juxtapose, associate, or fasten a
    conductor, the assembled structure having a switch or fuse.


CLS 29/870
TXT Including fluid evacuating or pressurizing:

    Process under subclass 869 including increasing or decreasing the pressure
    of a fluid contained in one of the elongated conductors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 271+ for an electrical connector
    provided with a joint sealing gasket or packing.


CLS 29/871
TXT Including deforming of joining bridge:

    Process under subclass 869 including deforming fastening structure spanning
    the juxtaposed elongated conductors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    50 for a process with mechanical working of a conductor.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 84 for a crimped
    joint between conduits, cables, and conductors.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 877+ for an electrical connector
    adapted to be secured by crimping, deforming, or bending.


CLS 29/872
TXT With overlapping orienting:

    Process under subclass 868 wherein respective ends of the elongated
    conductor(s) (*) are juxtaposed and are manipulated to have parallel
    longitudinal axes, and wherein one elongated conductor (*) extends over a
    portion of the other elongated conductor (*).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    518,    for a process in which two or more rods or similarly proportioned
    parts are disposed in parallel side-by-side relationship for a portion of
    their length and are enclosed in a tube and then joined to each other and
    to the tube by the inward deformation of the tube.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    55 for a process of longitudinally bending of wrapping sheet material about
    plural spaced conductors.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 87 for overlapped
    angled spliced conduit, cable, or conductor joints.


CLS 29/873
TXT Including oppositely facing end orienting:

    Process under subclass 872 wherein end surfaces of the wires are oppositely
    disposed.


CLS 29/874
TXT Contact or terminal manufacturing:

    Process under subclass 825 of manufacturing either: (1) an electrically
    conductive means of a relay, switch, or connector utilized to engage or
    disengage another similar means to open or close an electrical circuit or
    (2) a terminal (*).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    622,    for a process of making a device which is adapted to interrupt or
    establish an electrical current flow between electrical conductors joined
    in the device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 11 for pivoted
    dial-type contact structure, per se, and subclasses 275+ for particular
    contact shape or structure.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 929 for
    electrical contact metallic stock structure.


CLS 29/875
TXT By powder metallurgy:

    Process under subclass 874 wherein the contact or terminal (*) is
    manufactured by pressing, binding, and sintering powdered metal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclass 247 for consolidated metal powder composition having a
    base metal of one or more noble metals or copper.


CLS 29/876
TXT By assembling plural parts:

    Process under subclass 874 wherein the contact or terminal (*) is
    manufactured by assembling two or more cooperating elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 263 for
    cooperating contact structure composed of different material and subclasses
    268 and 269 for a contact composed of two or more layers of different
    material.


CLS 29/877
TXT With bonding:

    Process under subclass 876 including joining the elements by adhesion or
    cohesion.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of the types of bonding to be found in this and the
    indented subclasses includes applying an adhesive coating or lamina,
    tackifying a surface to be united with another by applying a solvent
    thereto, fusion welding, soldering, etc.


CLS 29/878
TXT Of fused material:

    Process under subclass 877 wherein the bond is effected either by bringing
    to or applying material in a molten state to a portion of the element joint.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 874+ for an electrical connector
    secured by fused material.


CLS 29/879
TXT Metal:

    Process under subclass 878 wherein a portion of the fused material is metal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 78.01 for a process or apparatus for
    bonding by electrical current and pressure.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 179.1+ for a process of
    simultaneously bonding multiple joints of an electrical device.  See Class
    228, class definitions, V, A, 1, for the line between Class 228 and other
    manufacturing classes.


CLS 29/880
TXT By impregnating a porous mass:

    Process under subclass 879 wherein a portion of the element joint is
    composed of substance having a plurality of interstices and further wherein
    the fused material is applied to and penetrates the substance interstices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 264 for
    infiltrated porous contact structure, per se.


CLS 29/881
TXT By elastic joining:

    Process under subclass 876 wherein the cooperating elements are joined by
    distorting one of the elements within its elastic limit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 296+ for an electrical connector
    which is held coupled to a cooperating electrical connector by a spring
    actuated or resilient member.


CLS 29/882
TXT With deforming:

    Process under subclass 876 including a step of deforming one of the
    cooperating elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56.5,   for plural diverse manufacturing apparatus including machining
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 877+ for an electrical connector
    adapted to be secured by crimping, deforming or bending.


CLS 29/883
TXT With molding of insulation:

    Process under subclass 876 including a step of forming and shaping a fluid
    material highly resistant to the passage of electricity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    for a process of molding a plastic nonmetallic article.


CLS 29/884
TXT Forming array of contacts or terminals:

    Process under subclass 876 wherein a plurality of contacts or terminal(s)
    (*) are manufactured in a predetermined orderly arrangement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56.5,   for plural diverse manufacturing apparatus including machining
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 822 for a
    housed or mounted array of contacts or terminals.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 55+ for an electrical connector
    for use on a printed circuit board, and subclasses 660+ for a bayonet plug
    or socket connector, per se.


CLS 29/885
TXT With coating:

    Process under subclass 874 including a step of applying a flowable
    substance upon or into a portion of the assembled parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 14.1+ for an
    electrolytic coating process, per se.


CLS 29/886
TXT Electret making:

    Process under subclass 592.1 wherein the article made exhibits a permanent
    external electrostatic field due to internal polarization.

    (1)     Note. An electret possesses persistent electric polarization and is
    generally a solid dielectric. A few substances such as wax-resin electrets
    also exhibit piezoelectric properties. See the (1) Note to the definition
    of Class 29, subclass 25.35.

    (2)     Note. Some of the classes referred to in the search notes of Class
    29, subclass 25.35, have a process that is useful in the manufacture of an
    electret.

    (3)     Note. This subclass is not limited to the manufacture of an
    electret by a metal working operation, but includes the manufacture of such
    a device by any type of operation where no other class provides for the
    entire subject matter claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25.35,  for method of or apparatus for manufacturing a piezoelectric device
    or a piezoelectric material that is not classifiable in the specific
    classes relating to manufacturing.

    610.1+, for a method of making a resistor under the class definition.

    887,    for a method of making an insulator under the class  definition.


CLS 29/887
TXT Insulator making:

    Process under subclass 592.1 where the device made serves to support or
    confine an electrical conductor while preventing current flow between that
    conductor and another conductor or ground.

    (1)     Note. The process classified here may be for making the necessary
    attachments of fittings for mounting the conductor and insulator as well as
    the insulator body, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity: Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 137+ for
    insulators, per se.


CLS 29/888
TXT Prime mover or fluid pump making:

    Process under subclass 592 for manufacturing (1) an internal combustion
    (I.C.) engine, (2) a power device for converting the energy of a
    pressurized gas or liquid to mechanical work, (3) a gas or liquid pump or
    compressor, (4) a part especially adapted for (1), (2) or (3) which is not
    elsewhere classified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    890.08, for a process of making a manifold or exhaust pipe for an internal
    combustion engine.

    890.09,  for a process of making a fluidic or fluid actuated device, i.e.,
    not a fluid power device.

    890.1,  for a process of making a fluid pattern dispersing device, e.g.,
    ink jet, subclasses 428+ for an assembly process.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, for an internal combustion engine.

    184,    Lubrication, for means to lubricate a prime mover or fluid pump


CLS 29/888.01
TXT I.C. (internal combustion) engine making:

    Process under subclass 888 of manufacturing (1) a prime mover, such as a
    gasoline or diesel engine, which burns fuel within the prime mover and the
    combustion products serve as the thermodynamic fluid or (2) a part
    especially adapted for (1) which is not elsewhere classified.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 597+ for a fluid motor driven by waste
    heat or by exhaust energy from an internal combustion engine and subclasses
    272+ for an internal combustion engine with treatment or handling of
    exhaust gas.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 66+ for testing rotor unbalance
    and subclasses 116+ for a device for testing a motor or engine, generally.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 261 for a crankcase, generally.

    123,    Internal Combustion Engines, for an engine of that class, generally.


CLS 29/888.011
TXT Repairing, converting, servicing or salvaging:

    Process under subclass 888.01 wherein an existing I.C. engine is (1)
    restored or otherwise put in a more functional, stable or improved working
    condition; (2) mechanically modified or altered to produce an article of
    substantially different capacity, size, function or type of operation; or
    (3) treated to recover a portion of the whole thereof which would otherwise
    constitute discarded material or using such material in a process of
    mechanical manufacturing.

    (1)     Note.  See the definition of repair in Class 29 definitions,
    paragraph III, Terms of Definitions.

    (2)     Note.  Making a new replacement part, per se, is not found in this
    subclass unless that part is claimed as being installed in the device being
    repaired.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401.1,  for a process of converting.  Also see the search notes thereunder.

    402.01+, for a process of repairing.  Also see the search notes thereunder.

    403.1+, for a process including scrap recovery or utilization. Also see the
    search notes thereunder.


CLS 29/888.012
TXT Rotary or radial engine making:

    Process under subclass 888.01 of manufacturing an I.C. engine wherein (1)
    the thermodynamic cycle is carried out in a mechanism relying entirely upon
    circular movement about an axis without any reciprocating components such
    as a piston, crankshaft or connecting rod; (2) the cylinders are arranged
    like the spokes of a wheel or at equiangular intervals around a crankshaft;
    or (3) a component, part of subcombination of (1) or (2) which are not
    elsewhere specifically provided for.

    (1)     Note.  Stern engine making and stem turbine making are not included
    in this subclass since they are not internal combustion engines.


CLS 29/888.02
TXT Fluid pump or compressor making:

    Process under subclass 888 wherein the manufactured article is especially
    adapted (1) for increasing the pressure of a gas, liquid or vapor; (2) for
    accelerating, conveying or transporting fluid which article generally draws
    the fluid into itself through an entrance port and forces the fluid out
    through an exhaust port; or (3) a part especially adapted for (1) or (2)
    which is not elsewhere classified.

    (1)     Note.  A method of making an impeller is included therein when more
    than the impeller is made.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    889,    for a process of making an impeller, per se.

    890.09, for a process of making a fluidic or fluid actuated device.


CLS 29/888.021
TXT Repairing, converting, servicing or salvaging:

    Process under subclass 888.02 wherein an existing valve or valve seat is
    (1) restored or otherwise put in a more functional, stable or improved
    working condition; (2) mechanically modified or altered to produce an
    article of substantially different capacity, size, function or type of
    operation; or (3) treated to recover a portion or the whole thereof which
    would otherwise constitute discarded material or using such material in a
    process of mechanical manufacturing.

    (1)     Note.  See the definition of repair in Class 29, definitions
    paragraph III, Terms of Definitions.

    (2)     Note.  Making a replacement part, per se, is not found in this
    subclass unless that part is claimed as being installed in the device being
    repaired.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401.1,  for a process of converting. Also see the search notes thereunder.

    402.01+,for a process of repairing.  Also see the search notes thereunder.

    403.1+,for a process including scrap recovery or utilization.  Also see the
    search notes thereunder.

    890.121,        for a process of repairing, converting, servicing or
    salvaging a valve in general.


CLS 29/888.022
TXT Scroll or peristaltic type:

    Process under subclass 888.02 wherein the manufactured fluid pump or
    compressor (1) employs in its operation at least one diaphragm member which
    is spirally wrapped, the walls of which define a closed space that serves
    as the working fluid chamber; (2) employs in its operation a resilient
    tubing that is compressed, which tubing serves as the working fluid
    chamber; or (3) a part especially adapted for (1) or (2) which is not
    elsewhere classified.

    (1)     Note.  A method of making a scroll member or a peristaltic tubing
    is classified in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    888.3,  for a process of making a seal or packing member.


CLS 29/888.023
TXT Screw or gear type, e.g., moineau type:

    Process under subclass 888.02 wherein the driving means or prime mover of
    the manufactured article is (1) a toothed machine element or a train of
    such elements, (2) a cylindrical machine element with a helical groove cut
    into its surface or (3) a part especially adapted for (1) or (2) which is
    not elsewhere classified.


CLS 29/888.024
TXT Centrifugal type:

    Process under subclass 888.02 wherein the manufactured article (1)
    accelerates the fluid radially outward by means of an impeller to a
    surrounding volute casing or (2) is a part especially adapted for (1) which
    is not elsewhere classified.


CLS 29/888.025
TXT Vane type or other rotary, e.g., fan:

    Process under subclass 888.02 wherein the manufactured fluid pump or
    compressor is a displacement device that delivers a steady fluid flow of
    the action of two members in rotational contact, which device is not
    elsewhere classified.

    (1)     Note.  Original placement in this subclass requires that the
    manufactured article be more than an impeller vane assembly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    889+,   for a method of making an impeller, per se.


CLS 29/888.03
TXT Valve lifter making:

    Process under subclass 888 wherein the manufactured article is (1)
    especially adapted for opening a device which regulates or controls the
    flow of fluid to or from a cylinder such as in an I.C. engine or is (2) a
    part especially adapted for (1) which is not elsewhere classified.


CLS 29/888.04
TXT Piston making:

    Process under subclass 888 for manufacturing (1) a sliding metal cylinder
    that reciprocates in a tubular housing, either moving against or moved by
    fluid pressure or (2) a component or part especially adapted for use with
    (1) not elsewhere classified.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclass for a piston, per
    se.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, appropriate subclass for an internal
    combustion engine having at least one piston.

    219,    Electric Heating, for process of electric welding or laser welding.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, appropriate subclass for a process of making
    a piston by metallurgical bonding under the class definition.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, appropriate subclass for making a
    piston utilizing powder metallurgy techniques.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 51+ for a process of grinding a cylinder.


CLS 29/888.041
TXT Repairing, converting, servicing or salvaging:

    Process under subclass 888.04 wherein an existing piston is (1) restored or
    otherwise put in a more functional, stable, or improved working condition;
    (2) mechanically modified or altered to produce an article of substantially
    different capacity, size function, or type of operation; or (3) treated to
    recover a portion or the whole thereof which would otherwise constitute
    discarded material or using such material in a process of mechanical
    manufacturing.

    (1)     Note.  See the definition of repair in Class 29, definitions,
    paragraph III, Terms of Definitions.

    (2)     Note.  Making a replacement part, per se, is not found in this
    subclass unless that part is claimed as being installed in the device being
    repaired.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401.1,  for a process of converting.  Also see the search notes thereunder.

    402.01+, for a process of repairing.  Also see the search notes thereunder.

    403.1+, for a process including scrap recovery or utilization.  Also see
    the search notes thereunder.


CLS 29/888.042
TXT Multi-element piston making:

    Process under subclass 888.04 wherein the piston is manufactured from a
    plurality of associated parts such as multiple body pieces or multiple
    skirt pieces, the parts being joined together to form a piston, but not
    including assembly with a connecting rod or with a gudgeon pin, wrist pin,
    piston pin or a boss therefor.

    (1)     Note.  The multi-element piston may be made by composite casting or
    molding steps, but there must be recited subject matter which is beyond the
    scope of the casting class, Class 164, or the molding class, Class 264, for
    placement in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Making a coated or clad piston, per se, is not sufficient
    for placement in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    888.048,        for method of making a piston by coating or cladding.


CLS 29/888.043
TXT Utilizing a high energy beam, e.g., laser, electron beam:

    Process under 888.042 wherein a very intense, nearly unidirectional flow of
    particles of great velocity, or a like propagation of electromagnetic or
    acoustic waves is used in the manufacture of the multi-element piston.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 121.11+ for a method of metal heating
    using an electron beam, laser or plasma under the class definition.


CLS 29/888.044
TXT With assembly or composite article making:

    Process under subclass 888.04 wherein the manufactured article is (1)
    composed of a plurality of interrelated attached components or
    subcombination elements, some of which are associated or disassociated from
    the other components or elements during the manufacture or (2) a unitary
    structure composed of at least two different materials or compositions with
    each material or composition retaining its identity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    890.124,        for a process of assembling a valve or making a composite
    valve other than an I.C. engine or poppet valve.


CLS 29/888.045
TXT With thermal barrier or heat flow provision:

    Process under subclass 888.044 wherein the manufactured piston has
    structure especially adapted for (1) preventing heat flow or heat build up,
    (2) dissipating heat or (3) transferring heat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    890.045+,       for a process of making a tube with heat transfer means.


CLS 29/888.046
TXT With fiber reinforced structure:

    Process under subclass 888.044 wherein filament or elongated particles are
    employed to strengthen or otherwise improve the mechanical integrity of the
    manufactured piston.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    419.1+, for a process of shaping fibrous material.


CLS 29/888.047
TXT By composite casting or molding:

    Process under subclass 888.044 wherein the piston is fabricated using a
    plurality of distinct materials integrated to produce at least one piston
    element, e.g., a squeeze-cast piston enveloping a fiber material, which
    material is disposed through at least a portion of the piston body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    527.5+, for a process of metal casting in combination with a diverse
    manufacturing operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 91+ for a process of casting a metal
    composite article.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    subclasses 241+ for a process of molding a composite article under the
    class definition.


CLS 29/888.048
TXT By coating or cladding:

    Process under subclass 888.044 wherein the piston is subjected to an
    operation wherein (1) fluent material is deposited upon or within a base
    material or (2) a preformed metal sheath or layer of material is attached
    to the surface of the base material.

    (1)     Note.  The claimed recitation of a chemical reaction will generally
    bar placement of the original reference in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 1.11+ for a
    process of electroplating.

    427,    Coating Processes, for a process of coating including perfecting
    steps for coating.


CLS 29/888.049
TXT Ring groove forming or finishing:

    Process under subclass 888.04 wherein the manufactured piston has a slot or
    recess especially adapted for receiving a piston ring or seal means therein.


CLS 29/888.05
TXT Gudgeon pin, wrist pin, piston pin, or boss therefor:

    Process under subclass 888.04 for manufacturing (1) a fastening member such
    as a wrist pin or a gudgeon pin or (2) a circular protuberance or shaped
    area on the piston especially adapted for use with (1).


CLS 29/888.051
TXT With other attaching provision for connecting rod:

    Process under subclass 888.04 wherein the piston is secured to a connecting
    rod without the use of a fastening element, per se, such as by casting
    about a connecting rod and the piston by swaging or by staking.


CLS 29/888.06
TXT Cylinder, cylinder head or engine valve sleeve making:

    Process under subclass 888 wherein the manufactured article is (1) a tube
    in which a piston moves and where a work is done on the piston by the
    conversion of various forms of energy into mechanical force and motion as
    in an internal combustion engine or fluid pump; (2) a cap that serves to
    close the end of the piston chamber of a reciprocating engine; (3) a
    cylindrical part especially adapted for fitting inside (1) or (2); or (4) a
    covering or deposited layer for the inner surface of (1) or (2).

    (1)     Note.  A method of making a cylinder block by diverse manufacturing
    steps is found in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    888.01, for a process of making an internal combustion engine.


CLS 29/888.061
TXT With liner, coating or sleeve:

    Process under subclass 888.06 wherein the manufactured engine cylinder or
    cylinder head (1) has its surface covered by a cylindrical preform or
    covered with deposited material; or (2) manufacturing such preform.


CLS 29/888.07
TXT Piston ring or piston packing making:

    Process under subclass 888 for manufacturing a circular sealing element or
    component especially adapted for fitting around a piston and extending to
    the cylinder wall thus preventing leakage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    888.3,  for a process of making a seal having plural district layers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclass for a process of shaping or
    working metal stock material.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 434+ for a piston ring or piston ring expander or seat
    therefor, subclasses 922+ for a seal manufactured by bonding or joining or
    subclass 924 for a seal manufactured by deformation, material removal, or
    molding.


CLS 29/888.071
TXT Including forging or hammering:

    Process under subclass 888.07 wherein the manufactured ring is shaped or
    worked by compressive impact force which produces plastic deformation.


CLS 29/888.072
TXT Including casting or molding:

    Process under subclass 888.07 wherein the manufactured ring is produced by
    shaping a liquid or plastic substance into a fixed shape utilizing a
    forming surface or mold.


CLS 29/888.073
TXT Including rolling or die forming e.g., drawing, punching:

    Process under subclass 888.07 wherein the manufactured ring is shaped or
    worked (1) by compressive force exerted by opposed rotating rollers or (2)
    by plastic deformation in a tool used to impart shape.


CLS 29/888.074
TXT Including coating or plating:

    Process under subclass 888.07 wherein the manufactured ring is made by
    depositing a layer of fluent material upon or within a base material.


CLS 29/888.075
TXT Including grinding or honing:

    Process under subclass 888.07 wherein the manufactured ring is shaped or
    polished by abrading which removes surface material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 51+ for process of grinding a piston or
    packing ring.


CLS 29/888.076
TXT Including machining or angular cutting:

    Process under subclass 888.07 wherein the manufactured ring is (1) shaped
    by milling, broaching, or planing or (2) severed on a bias or in a manner
    other than transverse to the longitudinal axis of the ring.


CLS 29/888.08
TXT Crankshaft making:

    Process under subclass 888 of (1) manufacturing an axial member having at
    least one portion thereof adapted for applying torque thereto for changing
    reciprocating motion into circular motion or vice versa (2) performing
    other operation upon such an axle or (3) manufacturing a part especially
    adapted for (1) or (2) which is not elsewhere classified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6.01,   for a machine for making a crankshaft.


CLS 29/888.09
TXT Connecting rod making:

    Process under subclass 888 of manufacturing a link which transmits motion
    or power from one linkage to a second linkage within the prime mover or the
    power device.


CLS 29/888.091
TXT Including metallurgical bonding:

    Process under subclass 888.09 wherein the manufactured connecting rod is
    produced utilizing a soldering, brazing or welding step.


CLS 29/888.092
TXT Including metal forging or die shaping:

    Process under subclass 888.09 wherein the manufactured connecting rod is
    metal which has been plastically deformed (1) by compressive forces into a
    desired shape or (2) by a tool used to impart shape.


CLS 29/888.1
TXT Camshaft making:

    Process under subclass 888 wherein the manufactured article is (1) a
    rotating axle to which is attached a plate or cylinder that communicates
    motion to a follower by means of its edge or a groove cut in its surface or
    (2) a part especially adapted for (1) which is not elsewhere classified.


CLS 29/888.2
TXT Push rod or rocker arm making:

    Process under subclass 888 wherein the manufactured article is (1) a bar or
    slender shaft which is actuated by a cam to open and shut valves such as in
    an I.C. engine (2) a lever that is pivoted near its center and is operated
    at one end by a push rod as defined in (1) which causes the other end of
    the lever to raise and depress a valve stem such as in an I.C. engine or
    (3) a part especially adapted for (1) or (2) which is not elsewhere
    classified.


CLS 29/888.3
TXT Seal or packing making:

    Process under subclass 888 wherein the manufactured article is (1)
    especially adapted to close or make secure against unwanted fluid leakage
    or fluid passage or (2) a part of (1) which is not elsewhere classified.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 922+ for a seal manufactured by bonding or joining or
    subclass 924 for a seal manufactured by deformation, material removal, or
    molding.


CLS 29/888.4
TXT Poppet or I.C. engine valve or valve seat making:

    Process under subclass 888 wherein the manufactured article is (1) a device
    that regulates fluid flow by means of a movable part that opens, shuts or
    partially obstructs a port or passageway, i.e., a valve which device rises
    perpendicularly to or from a circular ring on which the device rests when
    closed; (2) the circular ring for such a device; or (3) a part especially
    adapted for (1) or (2) which is not elsewhere classified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    890.12, for a process of making a valve, per se.


CLS 29/888.41
TXT Valve guide making:

    Process under subclass 888.4 wherein the manufactured article is especially
    adapted for maintenance of alignment of a stem of a poppet valve or I.C.
    engine valve.


CLS 29/888.42
TXT Repairing, converting, servicing or salvaging:

    Process under subclass 888.4 wherein an existing valve or valve seat is (1)
    restored or otherwise put in a more functional, stable or improved working
    condition; (2) mechanically modified or altered to produce an article of
    substantially different capacity, size, function or type of operation; or
    (3) treated to recover a portion or the whole thereof which would otherwise
    constitute discarded material or using such material in a process of
    mechanical manufacturing.

    (1)     Note.  See the definition of repair in Class 29, definitions
    paragraph III, Terms of Definitions.

    (2)     Note.  Making a replacement part, per se, is not found in this
    subclass unless that part is claimed as being installed in the device being
    repaired.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401.1,  for a process of converting.  Also see the search notes thereunder.

    402.01+,        for a process of repairing.  Also see the search notes
    thereunder.

    403.1+, for a process including scrap recovery or utilization.  Also see
    the search notes thereunder.

    890.121,        for a process of repairing, converting, servicing or
    salvaging a valve in general.


CLS 29/888.43
TXT Valve tappet making:

    Process under subclass 888.4 wherein the manufactured article is (1) a
    lever or oscillating member moved by a cam and intended to tap or touch for
    purpose of operation of a valve or part thereof or (2) a part especially
    adapted for (1) which is not elsewhere classified.


CLS 29/888.44
TXT Valve seat making:

    Process under subclass 888.4 wherein the manufactured article is the
    circular ring on which the poppet valve or I.C. engine valve rests when
    closed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    890.122,        for a process of making a valve seat, per se, not for a
    poppet or I.C. engine valve.


CLS 29/888.45
TXT Composite or hollow valve stem or head making:

    Process under subclass 888.4 wherein the manufactured article is a disk
    part of the poppet or I.C. engine valve or a rod part which operates to
    open or close the valve, which disk part or rod part is (1) a unitary
    structure composed of at least two different materials or compositions with
    each material or composition retaining its identity or (2) a structure
    which is concave or has a cavity within.

    (1)     Note.  Composite valves include both solid and substantially solid
    valves having metal or ceramic inserts; and they may contain a heat
    exchange fluid or a particulate material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    890.123,        for a process of making a valve stem, per se.

    890.124+,       for a process of assembling a valve or making a composite
    valve.


CLS 29/888.451
TXT Including forging:

    Process under subclass 888.45 wherein the manufactured article is shaped or
    worked by compressive impact force which produces plastic deformation.


CLS 29/888.452
TXT Including extruding:

    Process under subclass 888.45 wherein the manufactured article is shaped by
    forcing solid material, such as metal, through the orifice of a die to
    produce a continuously formed piece.


CLS 29/888.453
TXT Including casting:

    Process under subclass 888.45 wherein the manufactured article is produced
    by shaping liquid metal into a fixed shape utilizing a forming surface or
    mold.


CLS 29/888.46
TXT With assembly or composite article making:

    Process under subclass 888.4 wherein the manufactured article is (1)
    composed of a plurality of interrelated attached components or
    subcombination elements, plurality of interrelated attached components or
    subcombination elements some of which are associated or disassociated from
    the other components or elements during the manufacture or (2) a unitary
    structure composed of at least two different materials or compositions with
    each material or composition retaining its identity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    890.124,        for a process of assembling a valve or making a composite
    valve other than an I.C. engine or poppet valve.


CLS 29/889
TXT Impeller making:

    Process under subclass 592 of manufacturing a device including a rotor
    (e.g., rotary bladed spindle) for imparting motion in connection with fluid
    flow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), for particular fluid
    flow devices.


CLS 29/889.1
TXT Repairing or disassembling:

    Process under subclass 889 wherein an existing impeller device is restored
    to a more functional, stable or improved working condition or wherein its
    parts are disassociated.

    (1)     Note.  See the definition of repair in Class 29, definitions
    paragraph III, Terms of Definitions

    (2)     Note.  Making a new replacement part, per se, is not found in this
    subclass unless that part is claimed as being installed in the device being
    repaired.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402.01+, for a process of repairing.  Also see the
      search notes thereunder.


CLS 29/889.2
TXT Turbomachine making:

    Process under subclass 889 for manufacturing a device for enclosing and
    directing fluid flow with respect to an axially mounted rotary member
    including flow interacting members thereon (e.g., blades, vanes, buckets,
    etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclasses 204+ for
    turbomachine assembly.


CLS 29/889.21
TXT Assembling individual fluid flow interacting members, e.g., blades, vanes,
    buckets, on rotary support member:

    Process under subclass 889.2 wherein the manufacturing includes the
    permanent association of the flow interacting members with the rotary
    support member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), for specific blade
    assembly under subclass 204.


CLS 29/889.22
TXT Assembling fluid flow directing devices, e.g., stators, diaphragms, nozzles:

    Process under subclass 889.2 wherein the manufacturing includes the
    permanent association of the parts of the fluid flow devices.


CLS 29/889.23
TXT Shaping integrally bladed rotor:

    Process under subclass 889.2 including altering the configuration or
    dimensions of a rotor to form thereon portions serving as a fluid
    interacting member such as a blade or vane.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclass 234 for blade
    structure integrally shaped or blended into hub or rotor.


CLS 29/889.3
TXT Axial blower or fan:

    Process under subclass 889 of fabricating an impeller of the type wherein
    the fluid flow discharge is substantially in the direction of the
    rotational axis of the rotor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), especially subclasses
    189+ for axially extending shroud ring or casing and subclasses 198+ for
    multiple axially spaced working members.


CLS 29/889.4
TXT Centrifugal blower or fan:

    Process under subclass 889 for manufacturing an impeller of the type
    wherein the fluid flow discharge is substantially outwardly in radial
    direction from the central portion of the rotor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclass 178 for
    perimetric blading extending axially between annular members (e.g.,
    squirrel cage type, etc.).


CLS 29/889.5
TXT Fluid coupling device:

    Process under subclass 889 of manufacturing a device including impeller
    means for transmitting force, i.e., a coupling by means of fluid to a
    device such as a turbine, e.g., hydraulic type of torque convertor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 330+ for impeller and turbine unit type
    torque transmitting apparatus.


CLS 29/889.6
TXT Propeller making:

    Process under subclass 889 for manufacturing a device consisting of a
    central hub with radiating blades twisted to form part of a substantially
    helical surface that is used to propel a vehicle, e.g., airplane or ship.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclasses 223+ for
    specific blade structure.


CLS 29/889.61
TXT Utilizing hollow tube blank:

    Process under subclass 889.6 wherein a propeller blade portion is made from
    an open cylindrical workpiece.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclasses 232 and 233
    for hollow blade structure.


CLS 29/889.7
TXT Blade making:

    Process under subclass 889 of manufacturing the individual fluid flow
    interacting members utilized in an impeller device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclasses 223+ for
    specific blade structure.


CLS 29/889.71
TXT Composite blade:

    Process under subclass 889.7 wherein a blade is made of distinctly
    different and identifiable portions or materials.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclasses 229+ for
    laminated, embedded member or encased material type blade structure.


CLS 29/889.72
TXT Hollow blade:

    Process under subclass 889.7 wherein the interior of the blade includes
    substantial open space.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclasses 232 and 233
    for hollow blade structure.


CLS 29/889.721
TXT With cooling passage:

    Process under subclass 889.72 wherein the interior open space serves to
    allow fluid to flow within the blade for heat dissipation purposes.


CLS 29/889.722
TXT Passage contains tubular insert:

    Process under subclass 889.721 wherein the cooling passage receives therein
    a hollow cylindrical member.


CLS 29/890
TXT Catalytic device making:

    Process under subclass 592 for manufacturing an article which utilizes a
    substance that alters the velocity of a chemical reaction and which
    substance may be recovered essentially unaltered in form and amount at the
    end of the reaction.

    (1)     Note.  A recited chemical reaction, per se, will generally bar
    original placement in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Prior to the establishment of this subclass (890), this
    subject matter was indented under "Gas and Water Device Making" (old
    29/157+).  Other subclasses under Class 29 subclasses 592+ have not been
    screened for this subject matter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    890.08, for a method of making a muffler, manifold or exhaust pipe.


CLS 29/890.01
TXT Rocket or jet device making:

    Process under subclass 592 for manufacturing an article especially adapted
    for producing a strong, well-defined stream of fluid which issues from an
    orifice or nozzle or moves within a contracted duct.

    (1)     Note.  Generally a rocket or jet is utilized for propulsion
    purposes.

    (2)     Note.  No method of making carburetor or fuel injector device, per
    se, is found within this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  Prior to the establishment of this subclass (890.01) this
    subject matter was indented under "Gas and Water Device Making" (old
    29/157+).  Other subclasses under Class 29 subclasses 592+ have not been
    screened for this subject matter.


CLS 29/890.02
TXT Burner, torch or metallurgical lance making:

    Process under subclass 592 for manufacturing an article especially adapted
    for (1) consuming fluid fuel to produce a flame or to cut material or (2)
    consuming fluid or gaseous fuel to combust or otherwise remove undesired
    material.

    (1)     Note.  A process of making carburetor or fuel injector, per se, is
    not considered appropriate subject matter for this subclass since the
    combustion reaction occurs at a latter stage of the engine.

    (2)     Note.  Prior to the establishment of this subclass (890.02) this
    subject matter was indented under "Gas and Water Device Making" (old
    29/157+).  Other subclasses under Class 29, subclasses 401.1+ have not been
    screened for this subject matter.


CLS 29/890.03
TXT Heat exchanger or boiler making:

    Process under subclass 592 for manufacturing (1) a water heater for
    generating steam or (2) an article especially useful for recovery of
    thermal energy or for transferring thermal energy from one fluid to another
    fluid or to the environment.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder include
    a method of making a subcombination not elsewhere provided for, which are
    especially useful in heat exchanger or boiler devices.

    (2)     Note.  Prior to the establishment of these subclasses (890.03+),
    this subject matter was indented under "Gas and Water Device Making" (old
    29/157+).  Other subclasses under Class 29, subclasses 592+ have not been
    screened for this subject matter.

    (3)     Note.  Making a heat sink device, per se, or heat absorbing
    material, per se, is not included in this subclass or indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, especially subclasses 112+ for testing
    power plant or unit efficiency, subclasses 116+ for testing a motor or
    engine and subclasses 700+ for a fluid pressure gauge, generally.

    110,    Furnaces, for a heating system, generally.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizors, for a heating unit specific to that
    class.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, for a heating unit, generally.

    137,    Fluid Handling, for a fluid system, generally.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    60+ for a method of making a heat exchanger or boiler by means of adhesive
    or nonmetallic bonding where no metalworking takes place.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, for an evaporator for cooling, and
    Digest 18 an art collection specific to an accumulator.

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclass 73 for an electrolytic method of
    making a hollow body such as a heat exchanger or boiler.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    appropriate subclass for a process of shaping or treating nonmetallic
    material under the class definition.


CLS 29/890.031
TXT Repairing, converting, servicing or salvaging:

    Process under subclass 890.03 wherein an existing heat exchanger or boiler
    is (1) restored or otherwise put in a more functional, stable or improved
    working condition; (2) mechanically modified or altered to produce an
    article of substantially different capacity, size, function or type of
    operation; or (3) treated to recover a portion or the whole thereof which
    would otherwise constitute discarded material or using such material in a
    process of mechanical manufacturing.

    (1)     Note.  See the definition of repair in Class 29, definitions
    paragraph III, Terms of Definitions.

    (2)     Note.  Making a replacement part, per se, is not found in this
    subclass unless that part is claimed as being installed in the device being
    repaired.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401.1,  for a process of converting.  Also see the search notes thereunder.

    402.01+,for a process of repairing.  Also see the search notes thereunder.

    403.1+, for a process including scrap recovery or utilization.  Also see
    the search notes thereunder.


CLS 29/890.032
TXT Heat pipe device making:

    Process under subclass 890.03 wherein the article made is a heat-transfer
    device consisting of a sealed receptacle which absorbs radiant energy at
    one end by vaporization of a liquid and releases energy at the other end by
    condensation of the vapor.


CLS 29/890.033
TXT Solar energy device making:

    Making under subclass 890.03 wherein the article made is especially useful
    for capturing, transmitting, storing or otherwise utilizing radiation from
    the sun.


CLS 29/890.034
TXT Regenerator or recuperator making:

    Process under subclass 890.03 wherein the article made is especially useful
    for recovering thermal energy from effluent or exhaust fluids, which
    thermal energy is usually transferred to incoming fluids.

    (1)     Note.  These articles generally are either reversible--one is in a
    heat absorbing cycle whereas a second is in a heat transmitting cycle, or
    utilize counter principles.


CLS 29/890.035
TXT Cooling apparatus making, e.g., air conditioner, refrigerator:

    Process under subclass 890.03 wherein the article made is especially useful
    for (1) removing thermal energy from an enclosed chamber and its contents
    or (2) comfort treating an ambient area by lowering the air temperature and
    reducing the humidity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, for an evaporator for cooling, and
    Digest 18 an art collection specific to an accumulator.


CLS 29/890.036
TXT Tube inside tube:

    Process under subclass 890.03 wherein the heat exchanger or boiler made has
    an elongated hollow generally cylindrical structure housed inside a similar
    structure.


CLS 29/890.037
TXT Tube wound about tube:

    Process under subclass 890.03 wherein the heat exchanger or boiler made
    comprises a first elongated hollow generally cylindrical structure wrapped
    around a second elongated hollow generally cylindrical structure.


CLS 29/890.038
TXT Tube joined to flat sheet longitudinally, i.e., tube sheet:

    Process under subclass 890.03 wherein the heat exchanger or boiler made
    comprises a broad generally flat member attached to an elongated hollow
    generally cylindrical structure which passageways constitute substantially
    all of the heat exchanger or boiler passageways.

    (1)     Note.  Tube plate structure is quite different and distinct from
    tube sheet structure.  A tube plate has traverse passageways therethrough
    and generally serves as end joint structure for a heat exchanger made up of
    a large plurality of associated tubes.


CLS 29/890.039
TXT Sheet joined to sheet:

    Process under subclass 890.03 wherein the heat exchanger device or boiler
    made comprises a plurality of broad generally flat members joined directly
    together.


CLS 29/890.04
TXT With inserted tubes:

    Process under subclass 890.039 wherein the heat exchanger device or boiler
    made comprises a plurality of broad generally flat members joined directly
    together having a plurality of elongated hollow generally cylindrical
    members extending therethrough.


CLS 29/890.041
TXT Utilizing bond inhibiting material:

    Process under subclass 890.039 wherein the heat exchanger or boiler is
    selectively bonded together making use of coating composition or applied
    substance which prevents or minimizes bonding in particular interface areas.

    (1)     Note.  The above method is one type of "roll bonding".


CLS 29/890.042
TXT With subsequent fluid expansion:

    Process under subclass 890.041 herein the selectively bonded heat exchanger
    or boiler is pneumatically or hydraulically inflated.


CLS 29/890.043
TXT Tube joint and tube plate structure:

    Process under subclass 890.03 wherein the heat exchanger or boiler is made
    by joining elongated hollow generally cylindrical members to one another or
    to associated heat exchanger members.

    (1)     Note.  Tube sheet structure is quite different and distinct from
    tube plate structure.  A tube sheet has longitudinal passageway therein,
    whereas a tube plate has traverse passageways therethrough.


CLS 29/890.044
TXT Including conduit expansion or inflation:

    Process under subclass 890.043 wherein the tube joint or tube plate
    structure is plastically deformed to increase its size or volume.

    (1)     Note.  Generally, the expansion or inflation is done to perfect the
    joint structure integrity or to prepare the structure for its particular
    use.


CLS 29/890.045
TXT Tube with heat transfer means:

    Process under subclass 890.03 wherein the heat exchanger or boiler has an
    elongated hollow generally cylindrical member having features especially
    adapted for transferring thermal energy.


CLS 29/890.046
TXT Finned tube:

    Process under subclass 890.045 wherein the heat transfer means include at
    least one protuberance.


CLS 29/890.047
TXT Common fin traverses plurality of tubes:

    Process under subclass 890.046 wherein at least one fin extends across and
    is attached to or associated with more than one of the tubes.


CLS 29/890.048
TXT Helically finned:

    Process under subclass 890.046 wherein the heat exchanger or boiler has an
    elongated hollow generally cylindrical structure having spiral
    protuberances thereon for facilitating heat transfer.


CLS 29/890.049
TXT Internally finned:

    Process under 890.046 wherein the protuberance is located on the inside
    surface of the tube.


CLS 29/890.05
TXT Made from unitary workpiece, i.e., no assembly:

    Process under subclass 890.046 wherein the finned tube is manufactured from
    a single preform member or bonded monolithic structure.


CLS 29/890.051
TXT Boiler making:

    Process under subclass 890.03 wherein the article made is especially useful
    for (1) generating steam or (2) heating water in a closed system for
    distribution of thermal energy.

    (1)     Note.  Hot water heaters which are not closed systems are excluded
    from this subclass.


CLS 29/890.052
TXT Header or manifold making:

    Process under subclass 890.03 wherein the article made includes a conduit
    or chamber for distributing fluid from a series of smaller conduits.


CLS 29/890.053
TXT Tube making or reforming:

    Process under subclass 890.03 wherein (1) the article made comprises an
    elongated hollow generally cylindrical member or (2) such an existing
    cylindrical member is reshaped.


CLS 29/890.054
TXT With metallurgical bonding:

    Process under subclass 890.03 wherein the article made is manufactured
    employing metal soldering, brazing or welding.


CLS 29/890.06
TXT Accumulator making:

    Process under subclass 592 for manufacturing a gas and water device which
    (1) acts upon a contained fluid to allow the fluid to be discharged rapidly
    thereby yielding high pneumatic or hydraulic power or (2) enables a uniform
    steam boiler output to meet an irregular steam demand.

    (1)     Note.  Prior to the establishment of this subclass (890.06), this
    subject matter was indented under "Gas and Water Device Making" (old
    29/157+).  Other subclasses under Class 29, subclasses 592+ have not been
    screened for this subject matter.


CLS 29/890.07
TXT Condenser, evaporator or vaporizer making:

    Process under subclass 592 for manufacturing a gas and water device
    especially useful for changing matter in its vaporous or gaseous phase to a
    liquid phase or in its liquid phase to a vaporous or gaseous phase.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass excludes making driers, per se, since the
    phase change involved is only incidental to the drying use.

    (2)     Note.  Prior to the establishment of this subclass (890.07), this
    subject matter was indented under "Gas and Water Device Making" (old
    29/157+).  Other subclasses under Class 29, subclasses 592+ have not been
    screened for this subject matter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    592.1+, for a method of making an electrical device.


CLS 29/890.08
TXT Muffler, manifold or exhaust pipe making:

    Process under subclass 592 for manufacturing a gas and water device which
    is (1) useful for deadening the noise produced by escaping gas or vapor,
    (2) a duct through which spent gas leaves an engine or gas turbine or (3) a
    branch duct arrangement which connects valve parts of a multicylinder
    internal combustion engine to a carburetor or to an exhaust gas handling
    system.

    (1)     Note.  Prior to the establishment of this subclass (890.08), this
    subject matter was indented under "Gas and Water Device Making" (old
    29/157+).  Other subclasses under Class 29, subclasses 592+ have not been
    screened for this subject matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, for a tubular member for transmitting
    gas, generally.


CLS 29/890.09
TXT Fluidic or fluid actuated device making:

    Process under subclass 592 for manufacturing a gas and water article which
    (1) operates by the interaction of streams of fluids or (2) employs fluid
    dynamic phenomena to perform control, processing or actuation functions.

    (1)     Note.  Automatic transmission making and brake system making are
    not included in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Fluidic power device making is not included in this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  Fluidic devices are themselves classified in Class 137,
    subclasses 803+.

    (4)     Note.  Prior to the establishment of this subclass (890.09), this
    subject matter was indented under "Gas and Water Device Making" (old
    29/157+).  Other subclasses under Class 29, subclasses 592+ have not been
    screened for this subject matter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    888+,   for process of making a fluidic power device.


CLS 29/890.1
TXT Fluid Pattern dispersing device making, e.g., ink jet:

    Process under subclass 592 for manufacturing a gas and water article which
    is especially useful for projecting, depositing, ejecting, or emitting
    fluid for producing graphic, printing, or other information characters.

    (1)     Note.  Prior to the establishment of this subclass (890.1), this
    subject matter was indented under "Gas and Water Device Making" (old
    29/157+).  Other subclasses under Class 29, subclasses 592+ have not been
    screened for this subject matter.


CLS 29/890.11
TXT Tapping device making:

    Process under subclass 592 for manufacturing a gas and water article which
    is especially useful for gaining entry or access into a fluid system at a
    location which was not previously an entry or access point.

    (1)     Note.  Prior to the establishment of this subclass (890.11), this
    subject matter was indented under "Gas and Water Device Making" (old
    29/157+).  Other subclasses under Class 29, subclasses 592+ have not been
    screened for this subject matter.


CLS 29/890.12
TXT Valve or choke making:

    Process under subclass 592 for manufacturing a gas and water device which
    is especially useful for regulating or controlling the flow of fluids in a
    piping system or in machinery.

    (1)     Note.  Installing a preformed valve or valve assembly, per se, into
    a fluid system, per se, is not herein or hereunder unless some significant
    shaping or manufacturing occurs such as valve seat forming or assembling
    valve subcomponents.

    (2)     Note.  Prior to the establishment of these subclasses (890.12+),
    this subject matter was indented under "Gas and Water Device Making" (old
    29/157+).  Other subclasses under Class 29, subclasses 592+ have not been
    screened for this subject matter.


CLS 29/890.121
TXT Repairing, converting, servicing or salvaging:

    Process under subclass 890.12 wherein an existing valve or choke is (1)
    restored or otherwise put in a more functional, stable or improved working
    condition; (2) mechanically modified or altered to produce an article of
    substantially different capacity, size, function or type of operation; or
    (3) treated to recover a portion of the whole thereof which would otherwise
    constitute discarded material or using such material in a process of
    mechanical manufacturing.

    (1)     Note.  See the definition of "repair" in Class 29, definitions,
    paragraph III, Terms of Definitions.

    (2)     Note.  Making a replacement part, per se, is not found in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401.1,  for a process of converting.  Also see the search notes thereunder.

    402.01+,for a process of repairing.  Also see the search notes thereunder.

    403.1+, for a process including scrap recovery or utilization.  Also see
    the search notes thereunder.


CLS 29/890.122
TXT Valve seat forming:

    Process under subclass 890.12 including the step of permanently deforming,
    shaping or making the annular or circular ring upon which the valve head
    rests when the valve is in a closed position.


CLS 29/890.123
TXT Valve stem or tire valve making:

    Process under subclass 890.12 including the step of manufacturing (1)
    connector structure by means of which a disk or plug is moved thereby
    opening or closing the valve or (2) an elongated valve for use on pneumatic
    tires.


CLS 29/890.124
TXT With assembly, disassembly or composite article making:

    Process under subclass 890.12 wherein the valve or choke which is
    manufactured is (1) composed of a plurality of interrelated attached
    components or subcombination elements, some of which are associated or
    disassociated from the other components or elements during the
    manufacturing or (2) a unitary structure composed of at least two different
    materials or compositions with each material or composition retaining its
    identity.


CLS 29/890.125
TXT Joining plural semi-circular components:

    Process under subclass 890.124 wherein the valve or choke is manufactured
    from at least two arcuate members or elements assembled together.


CLS 29/890.126
TXT With material shaping or cutting:

    Process under subclass 890.124 wherein the valve or choke is manufactured
    (1) utilizing a deforming, casting or molding operation or (2) employing a
    machining, drilling or severing step.

    (1)     Note.  A coating step, per se, is not a material shaping for the
    purpose of this subclass.


CLS 29/890.127
TXT Including molding or casting:

    Process under subclass 890.126 wherein the material shaping operation
    includes shaping a liquid or plastic substance into a fixed shape utilizing
    a forming surface or mold.


CLS 29/890.128
TXT Including machining or drilling:

    Process under subclass 890.126 wherein the material shaping operation
    includes the use of a cutter to remove excess material to produce the
    desired shaped valve or component thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The cutter herein is generally a milling, drilling,
    grinding, broaching or planing tool.


CLS 29/890.129
TXT Including metallurgical bonding:

    Process under subclass 890.126 including a metal soldering, welding or
    brazing step.


CLS 29/890.13
TXT Including metal deforming:

    Process under subclass 890.126 including metal shaping employing forces
    which exceed the elastic limit of the metal, which forces plastically shape
    the metal without any substantial removal of material.

    (1)     Note.  See the definition of "deforming" in the Class 29,
    definitions, paragraph III, Terms of Definitions.


CLS 29/890.131
TXT Including metallurgical bonding:

    Process under subclass 890.124 wherein the valve or choke is manufactured
    employing metal soldering, brazing, or welding.


CLS 29/890.132
TXT Including metal shaping and diverse operation:

    Process under subclass 890.12 wherein the valve or choke is manufactured by
    the combined steps of (1) permanently altering the form, configuration, or
    contour of the workpiece or stock, with or without removal of material,
    together with (2) an unlike or different manufacturing step, which second
    step is distinct from the first step although the second step may also
    constitute another metal shaping operation.


CLS 29/890.14
TXT Gas and water specific plumbing component making:

    Process under subclass 592 for manufacturing an article especially adapted
    for use with gaseous phase matter or with aqueous material, which article
    is utilized generally by a skilled plumber in the practice of his trade.

    (1)     Note.  Original placement in this subclass or the indented
    subclasses requires more than the process of assembling two or more
    self-sustaining parts, per se.

    (2)     Note.  Prior to the establishment of this subclass (890.14+), this
    subject matter was indented under "Gas and Water Device Making" (old
    29/157+).  Other subclasses under Class 29, subclasses 592+ have not been
    screened for this subject matter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    428+,   for a process including assembling two or more self-sustaining
    parts.  See the definition of "assembly" in Class 29, definitions,
    paragraph III, Terms of Definitions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, for utilization of gas
    or water in that class operation.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, for means to transmit gas or water.


CLS 29/890.141
TXT Plumbing fixture making:

    Process under subclass 890.14 wherein the manufactured article is a fixed
    or attached gas and water utility device which is to be installed into a
    fluid system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, for a plumbing fixture,
    generally


CLS 29/890.142
TXT Nozzle making:

    Process under subclass 890.14 wherein the manufactured article is an
    especially adapted tubelike device, generally streamlined, for
    accelerating, directing, and dispersing a fluid, whose pressure decreases
    as it leaves the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    890.01, for a method of making a rocket or jet device.


CLS 29/890.143
TXT Sprayer:

    Process under subclass 890.142 wherein the manufactured nozzle is
    especially useful for dispersing or projecting the fluid so as to form a
    spray.


CLS 29/890.144
TXT Flexible conduit or fitting therefor:

    Process under subclass 890.14 wherein the manufactured article is (1) a
    pliant or nonrigid tube or pipe or (2) an accessory part or component
    especially adapted for use with (1).


CLS 29/890.145
TXT Flue connector device making:

    Process under 890.14 wherein the manufactured article forms at least part
    of an enclosed passageway or channel for conveying flame, hot gases, or
    smoke to a chimney or to the ambient atmosphere.


CLS 29/890.146
TXT Trap making:

    Process under subclass 890.14 wherein the manufactured article is
    especially useful in a fluid system for preventing the passage of sewer gas
    or noxious effluent gas while allowing other material and fluid to proceed
    therethrough.

    (1)     Note.  A trap generally consists of a bend or partitioned chamber
    in which the liquid forms a seal to prevent passage of the undesired gas.


CLS 29/890.147
TXT Return connector device making:

    Process under subclass 890.14 wherein the manufactured article forms at
    least part of an enclosed passageway or channel for conveying gas or water
    back to its starting point or previous location.


CLS 29/890.148
TXT T-shaped fitting making:

    Process under subclass 890.14 wherein the manufactured article is an
    accessory, part, or component especially adapted for use in a fluid system,
    which part or component has a form or configuration similar to the 20th
    letter of the English alphabet.


CLS 29/890.149
TXT Elbow or L-shaped fitting making:

    Process under subclass 890.14 wherein the manufactured article is an
    accessory part or component especially adapted for use in a fluid system,
    which part or component has a form or configuration similar to the bent
    joint in the human arm or to the 12th letter of the English alphabet.


CLS 29/890.15
TXT Ferrule making or reforming:

    Process under subclass 890.14 wherein the manufactured article has a
    structure similar to a band, ring, cap, collar, or a short tube or bushing.


CLS 29/891
TXT Agricultural device making:

    Process under subclass 592 for manufacturing apparatus utilized in the
    cultivation of the soil producing crops.


CLS 29/891.1
TXT Traction apparatus, e.g., for tractor:

    Process under subclass 891 for manufacturing devices related to the
    motivation of agricultural machinery (e.g., crawler type tractor, etc.)
    with respect to ground contact.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 9+ for track driven motor vehicle
    structure and subclass 16 for traction wheel attachments.


CLS 29/891.2
TXT Harvester guard:

    Process under subclass 891 for manufacturing a protection device for the
    user of a crop cutting device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 307+ for guard finger and bar structure for
    cutter members.


CLS 29/892
TXT Pulley making:

    Process under subclass 592 of manufacturing a wheel for transmitting power
    by means of a band or belt type member passing over its rim.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses
    152+ for positive drive pulley structure and subclasses 166+ for friction
    drive pulleys or guide roll structure.


CLS 29/892.1
TXT Assembly:

    Process under subclass 892 wherein the pulley is manufactured from a
    plurality of permanently associated parts.


CLS 29/892.11
TXT With shaping:

    Process under subclass 892.1 including a step of altering form,
    configuration, or contour of a pulley component.


CLS 29/892.2
TXT Disc splitting to form pulley rim groove:

    Process under subclass 892 wherein a circular metal blank is rotated and
    caused by a tool to divide at its periphery into at least one band or belt
    receiving channel which is incorporated into a pulley rim.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 82 for metal deforming by use of rotating
    shape imparting tool during work spinning by work holder.


CLS 29/892.3
TXT Groove forming in sheet metal pulley rim:

    Process under subclass 892 wherein a thin metal blank is shaped into at
    least one band or belt receiving channels which is incorporated into a
    pulley rim.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses
    166+ for pulleys with single or plural rim groove structure.


CLS 29/893
TXT Gear making:

    Process under subclass 592 of manufacturing a wheel having segmented force
    transmitting portions thereon such as teeth extending about its periphery.

    (1)     Note.  Processes herein classified may include steps of removing,
    disassembling, and repairing as part of the gear making process.


CLS 29/893.1
TXT Assembling of gear into force transmitting device:

    Process under subclass 893 including the joining of at least one gear into
    a unit for conveying driving energy or power.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 412+ for directly
    cooperating gears.


CLS 29/893.2
TXT Gear mounting:

    Process under subclass 893 wherein at least one gear is joined or assembled
    with elements such as an axle, thus forming a gear component assembly.


CLS 29/893.3
TXT Gear shaping:

    Process under subclass 893 including mechanically permanently altering the
    form, configuration, dimensions, proportions or contour of a part or stock
    either with or without the removal of material to form a gear.


CLS 29/893.31
TXT Worm gear:

    Process under subclass 893.3 for the shaping of a gear of the kind having a
    thread type element which revolves and intermeshes with the driven elements
    of a rack or wheel device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 425+ and 458+ for worm
    type gear structure.


CLS 29/893.32
TXT Roll forming:

    Process under subclass 893.3 wherein the shaping of the gear includes
    deforming the gear stock by means of a shaped forming tool which comes in
    rolling contact with the gear stock during its deformation thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 102+ for deforming during relative
    rotation between work and tool using a noncylindrical rotating tool.


CLS 29/893.33
TXT Punching or stamping:

    Process under subclass 893.3 wherein the shaping of the gear includes the
    use of a cutting tool to sever the desired shape from the confines of
    relatively thin gear stock.


CLS 29/893.34
TXT Die-press shaping:

    Process under subclass 893.3 wherein the shaping of the gear includes
    deforming the gear stock by means of a shaped forming tool or die which
    substantially imparts its shape to the gear stock as the tool or die
    applies its deformation force thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 343+ for deforming with use of
    closed-die and coacting work forcer (e.g., push-drawing).


CLS 29/893.35
TXT Gear tooth cutting:

    Process under subclass 893.3 wherein the shaping of the gear includes
    removing material from a gear blank utilizing an operating tool, i.e., to
    cut teeth in its periphery by removal of material between said teeth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 1 to 62 for gear
    cutting as defined thereunder.


CLS 29/893.36
TXT Gear blank making:

    Process under subclass 893.3 wherein stock for material forming a gear is
    shaped or treated.


CLS 29/893.37
TXT With specific gear material:

    Process under subclass 893.3 utilizing particular or special materials both
    metallic and nonmetallic.


CLS 29/894
TXT Wheel making:

    Process under subclass 592 for manufacturing a device having a generally
    circular, relatively narrow peripheral surface, i.e., a rim, framing an
    inner surface element, i.e., a connected hub, capable of turning on its
    central axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 45 for caster wheel structure and
    subclass 117 for hand wheel type structure.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 572+ for flywheel and
    rotor structure.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 261+ for rotor
    structure.


CLS 29/894.01
TXT Railway or trolley wheel making:

    Process under subclass 894 wherein the device is especially adapted for use
    on rail transportation vehicles or streetcars.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, for making a wheel by deforming a metal workpiece.


CLS 29/894.011
TXT Multiple part or composite:

    Process under subclass 894.01 wherein the device is made  of a plurality of
    distinct or assembled components.


CLS 29/894.012
TXT With axle or hub:

    Process under subclass 894.011 wherein the device includes (a) a center
    portion or (b) a supporting shaft or member upon which the device revolves.


CLS 29/894.1
TXT Steering wheel:

    Process under subclass 894 wherein the wheel made is of the type which is
    generally manually rotated about its axis to control by means of linkages
    the direction of movement of a vehicle such as an automobile.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 372+ for a hand wheel.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating Processes, for
    molding or shaping processes within the class definition which may include
    molding and uniting.


CLS 29/894.2
TXT Material winding, e.g., reel, spool:

    Process under subclass 894 for manufacturing a device having a core which
    receives material to be wound thereon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, directed to particular material
    winding structure such as a reel, bobbin, spool, etc.


CLS 29/894.3
TXT Land wheel:

    Process under subclass 894 wherein the wheel made is of the type that is
    generally mounted on a vehicle or other apparatus so that it supports the
    vehicle or apparatus against the force of earth's gravity while contacting
    the earth's surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, for a land wheel, per se.


CLS 29/894.31
TXT Assembling tire to wheel body:

    Process under subclass 894.3 wherein a wheel surrounding element, i.e., a
    tire, which may be replaceable is attached to a portion, i.e., the rim, of
    a wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    894.37  for a process of making a nonresilient tire.


CLS 29/894.32
TXT Disc type wheel:

    Process under subclass 894.3 wherein the central portion of the wheel is in
    the form of a generally thin solid circular element, i.e., a disc which
    supports the rim for turning about the wheel axis upon its hub.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, directed to disc type wheel
    structure.


CLS 29/894.321
TXT Assembling wheel disc to rim and hub:

    Process under subclass 894.32 including joining the disc to both the rim
    and hub portions of the wheel.


CLS 29/894.322
TXT Assembling wheel disc to rim:

    Process under subclass 894.32 including joining the rim portion to the disc
    portion of the wheel.


CLS 29/894.323
TXT With disc shaping:

    Process under subclass 894.322 including a step of altering form,
    configuration, or contour of the wheel disc.


CLS 29/894.324
TXT Integral rim and disc making:

    Process under subclass 894.32 wherein the disc and rim portion are formed
    out of a unitary blank.


CLS 29/894.325
TXT Disc shaping:

    Process under subclass 894.32 comprising of altering the form,
    configuration, or contour of the wheel disc.


CLS 29/894.33
TXT Tensioned spoke type wheel making:

    Process under subclass 894.3 wherein the wheel has individual elements,
    i.e., spokes which radiate from the center of the wheel and support the rim
    portion thereof, the elements supporting the rim being in a mechanical
    state of tension.

    (1)     Note.  Determining spoke tension and adjusting such accordingly
    (i.e., wheel truing) is considered wheel making as defined in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, directed to tensioned spoke type
    wheel structure.


CLS 29/894.331
TXT Tensioning all spokes simultaneously:

    Process under subclass 894.33 wherein elongation stress is applied at one
    moment of time to all spokes of a wheel to place them in a state of
    mechanical tension.


CLS 29/894.332
TXT Tensioning spokes in series:

    Process under subclass 894.33 wherein a plurality of wheel spokes, but less
    than all, have the tensioning stress applied to them followed by a separate
    step of tensioning a further plurality of spokes.


CLS 29/894.333
TXT Tensioning spokes individually:

    Process under subclass 894.33 wherein each wheel spoke has the tensioning
    stress applied to it in a separate operation.


CLS 29/894.34
TXT Compression, e.g., nontension, spoke type wheel making:

    Process under subclass 894.3 wherein the wheel has individual elements,
    i.e., spokes radiating from the center of the wheel which support the rim
    portion thereof, the elements supporting the rim being subjected to no
    axial force prior to the supporting of any weight by the wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, directed to nontensioned spoke
    type wheel structure.


CLS 29/894.341
TXT Joining spokes to rim and hub:

    Process under subclass 894.34 including attaching the spokes to both the
    rim and hub portion of the wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclasses 67 to 85 for spoke
    connections to felly (rim) and hub.


CLS 29/894.342
TXT Joining spokes to rim:

    Process under subclass 894.34 including attaching the spokes to the rim
    portion of the wheel.


CLS 29/894.343
TXT Joining spokes to hub:

    Process under subclass 894.34 including attaching the spokes to the hub
    portion of the wheel.


CLS 29/894.344
TXT Making plural spokes from a single blank:

    Process under subclass 894.34 wherein a plurality of spokes are
    manufactured from a unitary workpiece.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclass 66 for integrally
    connected spoke type wheels.


CLS 29/894.345
TXT Individual spoke making:

    Process under subclass 894.34 wherein a spoke member is fabricated from
    stock material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclass 104 for spoke structure.


CLS 29/894.35
TXT Rim making:

    Process under subclass 894.3 for manufacturing the outer peripheral portion
    of a wheel which is joined to a hub or central portion thereof such as by
    spokes or a disc element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclasses 95+ for felly or rim
    structure.


CLS 29/894.351
TXT With assembling:

    Process under subclass 894.35 wherein the rim is manufactured from a
    plurality of permanently associated parts.


CLS 29/894.352
TXT Demountable rim making:

    Process under subclass 894.351 wherein the manufactured rim includes a
    special feature to facilitate the attaching or detaching of an element such
    as a tire upon the rim.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclasses 10.1+ for demountable
    rim structure.


CLS 29/894.353
TXT Die-press shaping:

    Process under subclass 894.35 wherein stock material is deformed by means
    of a forming tool which substantially imparts its shape to the material as
    deformation force is applied thereto to form the rim.


CLS 29/894.354
TXT Roller forming:

    Process under subclass 894.35 wherein the rim is manufactured from stock
    material deformed by means of a forming tool which comes in rolling contact
    with such material.


CLS 29/894.36
TXT Hub making:

    Process under subclass 894.3 for manufacturing the central portion of a
    wheel especially a structure which may be joined at the wheel center with
    other wheel elements, e.g., spokes, and is used for mounting the wheel for
    rotation during use.

    (1)     Note.  A process of repairing a hub is included herein as well as
    method of demounting a hub from associated elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheel and Axles, subclasses 105.1+ for hub
    structure.


CLS 29/894.361
TXT With assembling:

    Process under subclass 894.36 wherein the hub is manufactured from a
    plurality of permanently associated parts.


CLS 29/894.362
TXT Hub shaping:

    Process under subclass 894.36 wherein the hub is manufactured of stock
    material altered in form, configuration, or contour.


CLS 29/894.37
TXT Tire making:

    Process under subclass 894.3 for manufacturing a wheel surrounding element
    joined thereto, usually by means of the wheel rim, said element generally
    comprising the land contacting surface.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are the resilient tire molding
    processes, per se, as defined in Class 156 and the corresponding apparatus,
    Class 425.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    894.31  for process of assembling tire to wheel body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclasses 39.1+ for emergency
    tire structure and 86+ for nonresilient tire structure.


CLS 29/894.38
TXT Wheel trim making, e.g., wheel cover, hubcap:

    Process under subclass 894.3 for manufacturing a device secured to and
    rotating with a wheel which device ornaments or protects the wheel.


CLS 29/894.381
TXT With means for retaining trim member on wheel:

    Process under subclass 894.38 including a component for securing, generally
    removably, a trim member to a wheel.


CLS 29/895
TXT Roller making:

    Process under subclass 592 for manufacturing a device having a generally
    cylindrical work contacting surface which surface revolves about the
    longitudinal axis thereof with rolling motion relative to the surface of
    the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    898.068,        for process of manufacturing a cylindrical rolling
    component for use in a anti-friction bearing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 236 for a disclosure of roller
    reconditioning or lubricating.

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclass 107.1 for a process of
    making a die roll.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, for method
    of making rolls by lamination.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclass 73 for the electroforming of a roll,
    ring, or hollow body; subclasses 131+ for the electrolytic coating of an
    internal surface (e.g., inside of a cylinder, etc.); and subclass 151 for
    the electrolytic coating of a predominantly single metal or alloy cylinder,
    roll, or hollow article.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes, for
    molding and shaping of plastic materials within the class definition.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclass 305 for a machine for
    planing a groove in the curved surface of a roll to provide a scored
    surface, e.g., for forming the surface of a grinding roll, a crushing roll,
    etc.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 230+, for a process of coating the
    interior of a hollow article, including a roll, by other than immersion.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 49+ for a process of grinding a roll, roller,
    shaft, ball, or piston.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roller of general utility not elsewhere
    provided for; see the notes thereunder.


CLS 29/895.1
TXT Repairing or servicing:

    Process under subclass 895 comprising the restoring of an existing roller
    to a more functional, stable, or improved working condition.

    (1)     Note.  See the definition of "repair" in the Class 29, definitions
    paragraph III, Terms of Definitions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402.01+,for particular repair operations which may be utilized in repair of
    a roller. Also see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 29/895.2
TXT Assembling preformed components:

    Process under subclass 895 for joining or juxtaposing in a permanent
    relationship the previously manufactured elements of a roller.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll not elsewhere provided for, and see the
    notes thereunder.


CLS 29/895.21
TXT Work contacting surface element assembled to core:

    Process under subclass 895.2 wherein a previously formed work contacting
    surface is assembled to an interior centrally portioned support element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll not elsewhere provided for, and see the
    notes thereunder.


CLS 29/895.211
TXT Work contacting surface wound about core:

    Process under subclass 895.21 wherein the previously formed work contacting
    surface is in the form of an elongated strip-like element which is caused
    to sinuously encircle the interior centrally positioned support element.


CLS 29/895.212
TXT With prestressing of component by heat differential, e.g., shrink fit:

    Process under subclass 895.21 including the use of temperature variation to
    change a dimension of a part relative to another part to facilitate the
    joining of the parts by a subsequent temperature variation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    447,    for general processes of assembly or joining during mechanical
    manufacture with prestressing of part by heat differential.


CLS 29/895.213
TXT Work contacting surface having annular axial sections:

    Process under subclass 895.21 wherein the work contacting surface includes
    at least two abutting annular elements axially of another along the axis of
    rotation of the roll.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, subclasses 40+ for a roll, not elsewhere provided
    for, having axially stacked annular members.


CLS 29/895.22
TXT Work contacting surface element assembled to end support members:

    Process under subclass 895.2 wherein the opposing end portions of a
    cylindrical work contacting surface element are assembled to end engaging
    holding or driving members.


CLS 29/895.23
TXT Includes securing removable cover on roller:

    Process under subclass 895.2 including the step of placing and holding a
    sheet, strip, or tube element in position on a roller body element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, subclasses 22+ for a roll, not elsewhere provided
    for, having means to hold the edge of a sheet, strip, or tube element
    thereon.


CLS 29/895.3
TXT Fabricating and shaping roller work contacting surface element:

    Process under subclass 895 including the steps of manufacturing the body of
    or configuring the roller work contacting surface element.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes treating the surface of a roller work
    contacting surface element to change its surface characteristic or shape
    (i.e., roughening or crowning).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll not elsewhere provided for, and see the
    notes thereunder.


CLS 29/895.31
TXT Toothed roller:

    Process under subclass 895.3 for forming, applying, and securing metallic
    teeth to the surface of cylindrical bodies.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23.1,   for machines and tools for forming, applying, and securing metallic
    teeth to the surface of cylindrical bodies.


CLS 29/895.32
TXT With coating or casting about a core:

    Process under subclass 895.3 wherein the work contacting surface element is
    formed by covering the surface of an interior support element with a
    relatively thin layer of material applied, for example, projecting a liquid
    material against said surface or by molding a fluent material against said
    surface which material hardness to form said layer.

    (1)     Note.  In some instance, the formed work contacting surface element
    is formed on a mandrel from which it may be removed and mounted on another
    interior support element for use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    for molding and shaping within the class definition.


CLS 29/895.33
TXT One-piece roller making:

    Process under subclass 895 wherein the roller is made of one piece such as
    by molding or casting.

    (1)     Note.  A blank may be shaped by forming steps such as drawing,
    coining, and swaging into the final roller configuration.


CLS 29/896.1
TXT Dental appliance making:

    Process under subclass 592 for manufacturing a device pertaining to or for
    the teeth such as a denture, a bridge, a crown, or an artificial tooth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 215+ for a method or material for testing,
    treating, restoring, or removing natural teeth.


CLS 29/896.11
TXT Orthodontic device making:

    Process under subclass 896.1 wherein the device is especially adapted for
    correcting abnormally aligned or positioned teeth.


CLS 29/896.2
TXT Sound device making:

    Process under subclass 592 for manufacturing a device especially adapted
    for producing, recording, amplifying, modifying, or otherwise altering a
    vibratory disturbance in a fluid or solid, which disturbance is capable of
    being detected by the organs of hearing.


CLS 29/896.21
TXT Hearing aid component making:

    Process under subclass 896.2 wherein the manufactured device is especially
    adapted to be worn in order to compensate for poor hearing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclass 25 for a process of surgically implanting a
    vibratory hearing aid. Also see the search note thereunder.


CLS 29/896.22
TXT Musical instrument or tuning fork making:

    Process under subclass 896.2 wherein the manufactured device is especially
    adapted (a) for producing sounds or tones possessing rhythm, melody, and
    harmony or (b) for producing a sound of fixed pitch useful as a reference,
    as in adjusting a musical instrument.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, subclasses 1+ for a musical instrument, per se, and
    subclasses 454+ for a turning device, per se.


CLS 29/896.23
TXT Including diaphragm or support therefor:

    Process under subclass 896.2 wherein the manufactured device (a) includes a
    thin disk whose vibrations convert electric signals to sound waves or sound
    waves to electric signals or (b) bears the weight of or holds in position
    such a disk.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, especially subclasses 148+ for a diaphragm and enclosure
    and subclasses 157+ for a diaphragm, per se, and/or mounting or suspension
    means therefor.


CLS 29/896.24
TXT Phonograph component making:

    Process under subclass 896.2 wherein the manufactured device is a machine
    for reproducing sound from a record disk or a part of such a machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 99+ for
    specific detail of information handling portion of system.


CLS 29/896.3
TXT Watch or clock making:

    Process under subclass 592 for manufacturing (a) a device especially
    adapted for measuring or indicating time such as by means of a numbered
    dial and moving hands or pointers or (b) a part of such a device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228,    for means to apply or remove a flat spiral spring to or from a
    watch or clock.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    368,    Horology: Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 62+ for a
    chronological device, per se.


CLS 29/896.31
TXT Having arbor, pinion, or balance:

    Process under subclass 896.3 wherein the manufactured device or part
    includes (a) a spindle of a wheel, (b) a small cogwheel engaged by a larger
    cogwheel or a rack, or (c) a wheel adapted for attaining equilibrium.

    (1)     Note. Included herein is a blank to be made into an arbor, pinion,
    or balance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    368,    Horology: Time Measuring Systems or Devices, especially subclasses
    127+ for a balance wheel-type escapement and subclass 322 for arbor and
    pinion details.


CLS 29/896.32
TXT Having indicia, face, or dial:

    Process under subclass 896.3 wherein the manufactured device or part
    includes (a) identifying marks for indicating the time or (b) the front
    marked side indicating the time.

    (1)     Note. Included herein is a blank to be made into an indicia, face,
    or dial.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    368,    Horology: Time Measuring Systems or Devices, especially subclasses
    232+ for dial details, per se.


CLS 29/896.33
TXT Having case, cover, or back:

    Process under subclass 896.3 wherein the manufactured device or part
    includes (a) a container or receptacle or (b) a wrapper or protector.

    (1)     Note. Included herein is a blank to be made into a case, cover, or
    back.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 343+ for disclosure of push-drawing or
    deep-drawing, subclasses 412+ for a tool couple embodying a nonplanar tool
    face, and cross-reference art collection 703 for knurling.

    368,    Horology: Time Measuring Systems or Devices, especially subclasses
    276+ for a case.


CLS 29/896.34
TXT Having crown, stem, or pendent:

    Process under subclass 896.3 wherein the manufactured device or part
    includes (a) a small projecting shaft by which a watch or clock is set or
    wound; (b) an expanded button or knob for use on (a); or (c) a dangling,
    suspended, or projecting member.

    (1)     Note. Included herein is a blank to be made into a crown, stem, or
    pendent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 343+ for disclosure of push-drawing or
    deep-drawing, subclasses 412+ for a tool couple embodying a nonplanar tool
    face, and cross-reference art collection 703 for knurling.

    368,    Horology: Time Measuring Systems or Devices, especially subclasses
    301+ for cases with pendent details and subclasses 319+ for crown or stem
    details.


CLS 29/896.4
TXT Jewelry or locket making:

    Process under subclass 592 for manufacturing a device or component
    especially adapted for adornment purposes such as an ornament made of
    precious or decorative material or set with gems or gem imitations.

    (1)     Note. A method of making a jewelry box or a case for containing
    jewelry is included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for gem or jewel setting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    163,    Needle and Pin Making, subclasses 1+ for making a needle,
    generally.


CLS 29/896.41
TXT Human adornment device making:

    Process under subclass 896.4 wherein the manufactured device or component
    is especially adapted to decorate or lend beauty to a person who wears the
    device or component.


CLS 29/896.411
TXT Bracelet making:

    Process under subclass 896.41 wherein the manufactured device or component
    is for encircling the human wrist, arm, ankle, or leg.


CLS 29/896.412
TXT Finger ring making:

    Process under subclass 896.41 wherein the manufactured device or component
    is for encircling one of the five digits on the human hand or foot.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for forming or sizing a finger ring.


CLS 29/896.42
TXT Latch, clasp, or fastener component making:

    Process under subclass 896.4 wherein the manufactured device or component
    is especially adapted for securing or holding together a jewelry or locket
    device.


CLS 29/896.43
TXT Ornamental stock making:

    Process under subclass 896.4 wherein the manufactured device or component
    is raw material or a blank especially adapted for producing an ornament
    therefrom.


CLS 29/896.5
TXT Knob or knob shank making:

    Process under subclass 592 for manufacturing a device or component having
    (a) a rounded protuberance offset from a surface or extremity or (b) a tang
    or stem for mounting (a).

    (1)     Note. A knob is generally useful for opening or operating purposes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclass 347 for a closure knob, generally.


CLS 29/896.6
TXT Multiperforated metal article making:

    Process under subclass 592 for making multiple perforations in a metallic
    sheet, tube, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6.1+,   for a process or apparatus for making apertures in sheet material
    and thereafter deforming the apertured portion of the sheet to form an
    expanded metal article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 13+ for a process of cutting, generally.

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclass 75 for an electrolytic method of
    making a perforated article.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 592 for metallic
    stock material which is helical or has a helical component and subclass 596
    for such material which has apertures or cuts.


CLS 29/896.61
TXT Coil wound wall screen:

    Process under subclass 896.6 for making a perforated filtering device which
    includes a spiral element for performing the filtering.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    905,    for a cross-reference art collection of methods for making a coil
    wound wall screen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclass 231 for a spiral well screen.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 497.1 for a helically
    wound filter.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclass 7.21 for making a
    composite hollow object by an operation of that class.


CLS 29/896.62
TXT Filter:

    Process under subclass 896.6 of making a perforated article which will be
    used to separate particles from material flowing through the article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    902,    for a cross-reference art collection including a method for making
    a filter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 498 for a filter having
    a perforated or grooved plate.


CLS 29/896.7
TXT Turnbuckle making:

    Process under subclass 592 for (a) manufacturing a coupling device used for
    tightening a rod or cable or (b) assembling a tensioning member to such a
    device.


CLS 29/896.8
TXT Spring-head clip making:

    Process under subclass 592 for manufacturing a clasp or fastener especially
    adapted for use on railway rolling stock such as a carriage spring head or
    a spring clip.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 455+ for a clip, per se,
    generally.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 157.1+ for a railway truck
    including a spring-head clip.


CLS 29/896.9
TXT Spring making:

    Process under subclass 592 for manufacturing an elastic device or component
    that regains its original shape after being compressed or extended.

    (1)     Note. A spring made (a) by metal working without an assembly or
    diverse manufacturing step or (b) including any tempering or hardening step
    is generally not found as an original patent in Class 29.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    896.8,  for a process of making a spring-head clip peculiar to railway
    usage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, for bending, generally, a metal workpiece;
    especially subclass 66 for coiling by a work-guide member orbiting about
    the longitudinal centerline of a formed coil and subclasses 135+ for making
    a helical coil by deflecting.

    140,    Wireworking, for working wire stock by operations other than
    provided for in the metal deforming class, especially subclass 89 for
    spring setting and subclass 103 for the loop forming of a coil spring.

    148,    Metal Treatment, for modifying or maintaining metal microstructure
    (i.e., tempering, hardening, solution heat treating, etc.) with or without
    assembly or diverse operations.

    267,    Spring Devices, for a spring, per se.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 592 for metallic
    stock material which is helical.


CLS 29/896.91
TXT For vehicle or clutch:

    Process under subclass 896.9 wherein the elastic device is especially
    adapted for use in (a) a device or conveyance for carrying passengers,
    freight, goods, or equipment or (b) a device for engaging and disengaging
    two working parts of a shaft or of a shaft and a driving mechanism.


CLS 29/896.92
TXT For human comfort:

    Process under subclass 896.9 wherein the elastic device is especially
    adapted for providing physical ease or well being to mankind.

    (1)     Note. Generally these devices are for use in cushions, chairs,
    beds, furniture, or sofas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    896.93, for a method of making a shock or vibration absorber, per se.


CLS 29/896.93
TXT Resilient shock or vibration absorber utility:

    Process under subclass 896.9 wherein the elastic device is especially
    adapted for damping or dissipating mechanical impact, collision, wave
    fluctuation, or periodic quivering.


CLS 29/897
TXT Structural member making:

    Process under subclass 592 of manufacturing an element utilized in
    supporting relationship with other elements as components of an entity such
    as a building or vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  Prior to the issuance of the classification order
    establishing this subclass (897), this subject matter was indented under
    "Braces and Brackets" (old 29/150) and "Columns and Girders" (old 29/155).
    Other subclasses under Class 29, subclasses 592+ have not been screened for
    this subject matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, for apparatus or process for the mechanical
    treatment of metal work.


CLS 29/897.1
TXT Restoring existing member, e.g., reinforcing, repairing:

    Process under subclass 897 wherein an element is returned or improved to a
    more functional or stable working condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, for joining the meeting faces of engaged
    metal work parts.


CLS 29/897.15
TXT Grille making:

    Process under subclass 897 wherein the manufactured structural member is a
    grating or screen.

    (1)     Note. A grille is generally used to protectively cover or shield an
    opening for fluid or a communication receiver, transmitter, or amplifier.


CLS 29/897.2
TXT Vehicular structural member making:

    Process under subclass 897 for manufacturing a structural member which is
    integral with a transporting device, e.g., an automobile, airplane, or ship.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, for structural element of wheeled cars
    bodies, etc., of such vehicles.

    280,    Land Vehicles, for structural elements of wheeled and other type of
    such vehicles.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, for body and top structural
    elements of such vehicles.


CLS 29/897.3
TXT Static structure, e.g., a building component:

    Process under subclass 897 of manufacturing elements utilized in immovable
    ground attached shelter and other utility type construction, e.g., masts,
    light, and telephone poles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), for building and other
    structural elements.


CLS 29/897.31
TXT Openwork, e.g., a truss, joist, frame, lattice-type or box beam:

    Process under subclass 897.3 for manufacturing a structural element area
    having passages or openings wherein the openings are formed by plural
    members held at spaced intervals or by perforating sheet-like members.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 633+ for openwork
    structures including truss, screen, frame, etc.


CLS 29/897.312
TXT Frame component:

    Process under subclass 897.31 for manufacturing a constituent part of an
    openwork structure for enclosing or supporting something such as a window,
    door, etc.


CLS 29/897.32
TXT Panel:

    Process under subclass 897.3 for manufacturing (1) a pair of opposed
    facings or sheet-like members retained by internal supporting structure or
    (2) a thin sheet-like member forming a surface or part of a larger surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 474+ for facer and
    subclasses 782.1+ for composite prefabricated panel.


CLS 29/897.33
TXT Columnar member:

    Process under subclass 897.3 of manufacturing a member used for supporting
    compressional loads while in a substantially vertical orientation, e.g.,
    column, pole, post, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    897.35, for process of manufacturing a beam or girder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 720.1+ for shaft or
    elongated rigid structure and 633+ for openwork structures.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 45 for towers,
    poles, or posts.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 431 for pole or post type support.


CLS 29/897.34
TXT Metal reinforcement member for nonmetallic, e.g., concrete, structural
    element:

    Process under subclass 897.3 for manufacturing an element of a metallic
    nature, e.g., iron, steel, etc., which is incorporated for strengthening
    purposes within a substantially nonmetallic element such as a cast concrete
    column.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 600+ for opaque
    stonelike module with elongated reinforcing and 721.1+ for shaft with
    stonelike component, e.g., concrete.


CLS 29/897.35
TXT Beam or girder:

    Process under subclass 897.3 of manufacturing an elongated rigid member
    whose longitudinal dimension is much greater than its width and depth and
    is utilized as a principle horizontal support member in building.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    897.33, for method of manufacturing a column.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 720.1+ for shaft or
    elongated rigid structures.


CLS 29/898
TXT Process for making bearing or component thereof:

    Process under subclass 592 for manufacturing a machine part or a component
    thereof, which part is designed for general use, where one member
    continuously bears the weight of another and wherein there is either linear
    motion (a crosshead), rotary motion (of a shaft or axle), or oscillating
    movement (a lever between the two members).

    (1)     Note.  The subclasses hereunder include (a) methods of mounting and
    demounting bearings where such methods are especially utilized to connect
    or disconnect a specified bearing to supporting structure, (b) methods of
    lubricating bearing, (c) methods of sealing bearings, (d) methods of
    surface treating bearing elements, and (e) pre-usage processes (i.e.,
    freeing, preloading, adjusting and aligning bearing, or bearing elements).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 343+ for a process or apparatus for
    deforming metal by use of a closed die and coacting work forcer, including
    making a ball or a race.

    384,    Bearings, for a bearing, generally, especially subclasses 276+ for
    a sleeve or lining, per se.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, subclass 28 for a process of making a
    miscellaneous article from comminuted metal in which a bond is obtained by
    heat with or without pressure and including significant subsequent shaping
    of the blank.


CLS 29/898.01
TXT Repairing:

    Process under subclass 898 wherein an existing bearing or component thereof
    is restored to a more functional, stable, or improved working condition.

    (1)     Note.  See the definition of repair in Class 29, definitions
    paragraph III, Terms of Definitions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402.01+,for particular repair operations which may be utilized in repair of
    a bearing.


CLS 29/898.02
TXT Fluid bearing:

    Process under subclass 898 of manufacturing a bearing wherein liquid or gas
    under pressure is used to support a component in whole or in part during
    relative movement of the manufactured bearing.

    (1)     Note.  Fluid (i.e., liquid, or gas) support and lubrication both
    involve interposing a fluid between relatively moving members. In general,
    the difference between them is that lubrication merely minimizes contact
    between the members whereas fluid support eliminates it altogether via a
    thicker layer of fluid. Almost all gas, hydrodynamic, or hydrostatic
    bearings involve fluid support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, subclass 12 for linear fluid bearings and subclass 100
    for rotary fluid bearings.


CLS 29/898.03
TXT Linear Bearing:

    Process under subclass 898 of manufacturing a bearing wherein a bearing
    surface supports a member which has sliding or line movement in a straight
    direction relative to it.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 7+ for specified linear type bearing devices.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 52+ for two or more members
    connected together by a joint which includes a guide or slide.


CLS 29/898.04
TXT Rotary bearing:

    Process under subclass 898 of manufacturing a bearing wherein the relative
    motion between the bearing and supported members includes a rotary
    component.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes a bearing arrangement wherein the
    relative motion between the supported and bearing members may be a result
    of flexure of a portion of the bearing (i.e., a resilient rotary
    oscillating movement).


CLS 29/898.041
TXT Thrust bearing:

    Process under subclass 898 of manufacturing a bearing designed for loads
    imposed in the direction of the axis of rotation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, for various types and structural features of thrust
    bearings.


CLS 29/898.042
TXT Plain bearing:

    Process under subclass 898.04 of manufacturing a bearing wherein a bearing
    surface supports a member which has sliding or line contact relative to it.

    (1)     Note.  The term plain is used to distinguish from the so-called
    anti-friction type bearing which employs balls or rollers.


CLS 29/898.043
TXT Self-adjusting or self-aligning, including ball and socket type, bearing
    and component making:

    Process under subclass 898.042 for manufacturing a bearing wherein
    relatively sliding surfaces in a support structure for the bearing permit
    continuous self-movement of the position of the bearing thereby correcting
    a misalignment of related components of the bearing included herein are
    bearings wherein one component has a spheroid portion, i.e., a ball, which
    is received in a recess of another component, i.e., a socket, and there
    relative sliding movement between the two components.

    (1)     Note.  The term "ball" is broadly used to refer to a bearing
    component which includes a spherically shaped bearing portion but does not
    refer necessarily to a "ball" in the sense of an entire spheroid surface.
    The ball in many instances is a truncated "ball", i.e., cut off (more or
    less) at opposite ends thereof.


CLS 29/898.044
TXT Deforming socket to secure ball:

    Process under subclass 898.043 of altering the shape of the ball receiving
    socket to facilitate the retention therein of the ball.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243.5+, for overedge assembling apparatus.

    441.1,  for a method of assembling a sphere within a socket including
    deforming while retaining clearance for motion between the assembled parts.

    725,    for apparatus for assembling a roller or ball bearing by
    deformation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 362+ for deforming processes.

    384,    Bearings, subclass 207 for sheet metal socket structure and
    subclass 208 for ball and socket assembly structure.


CLS 29/898.045
TXT Die-press shaping:

    Process under subclass 898.044 wherein the step of deforming the socket is
    done by means of a shaped forming tool or die which substantially imparts
    its shape to the socket as the tool or die applies its deformation force
    thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 343+ for deforming by use of closed die
    and coacting work forcer.


CLS 29/898.046
TXT Having liner:

    Process under subclass 898.045 including the step of providing a structural
    element between the ball and socket components which element provides a
    sliding surface for at least one of said components.

    (1)     Note.  The liner element is distinct from a mere coacting layer on
    either of the ball and socket components.


CLS 29/898.047
TXT Having liner:

    Process under subclass 898.043 including the step of providing a structural
    element between the ball and socket components, which element provides a
    sliding surface, for a least one of said components.

    (1)     Note.  The liner element is distinct from a mere coacting layer on
    either of the ball and socket components.


CLS 29/898.048
TXT Socket making:

    Process under subclass 898.043 including the step of manufacturing the
    socket component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, subclass 207 for sheet metal socket.


CLS 29/898.049
TXT By molding or casting:

    Process under subclass 898.048 wherein the socket component is made by
    shaping substantially flowable and settable material about the ball
    component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 47+ for shaping liquid metal against a
    forming surface.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    subclasses 239+ for mechanical shaping or molding to form or reform shaped
    article.


CLS 29/898.05
TXT Nonmetallic socket:

    Process under subclass 898.048 wherein material other than metal is
    utilized to form the socket component.


CLS 29/898.051
TXT By assembling:

    Process under subclass 898.048 wherein the socket is manufactured from a
    plurality of permanently associated parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, subclass 208 for assembly structure of ball and socket
    type bearing.


CLS 29/898.052
TXT Ball making:

    Process under subclass 898.043 including the step of manufacturing the ball
    component.

    (1)     Note.  The term "ball" is broadly used to refer to a bearing
    component which includes a spherically shaped bearing portion, but does not
    refer necessarily to "ball" which in many instances is a truncated ball,
    i.e., cut off (more or less) at opposite ends thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, subclass 211 for structure or assembly of ball of "ball
    and socket" type bearing.


CLS 29/898.053
TXT With metallurgical bonding:

    Process under subclass 898.052 wherein the step of making the ball
    component includes joining separate elements together by metal fusion
    techniques such as welding, soldering, or brazing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, subclass 212 for structure for assembly of sectional type
    ball of ball and socket type bearing.


CLS 29/898.054
TXT Sleeve or bushing making:

    Process under subclass 898.042 including the manufacture of a usually
    removable cylindrical lining for an opening which lining supports an
    element either rotary, oscillating, or nonrotary which has sliding or line
    contact relative to it.

    (1)     Note.  The lining may include cylindrical shaped segments.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 276+ for plain type bearing structure with
    specified sleeve or liner.


CLS 29/898.055
TXT Nonmetallic:

    Process under subclass 898.054 wherein material other than metal is
    utilized in the manufacture of the sleeve or bushing which material
    provides functional sleeve characteristics such as flexibility.

    (1)     Note.  The inclusion of a metallic backing or lining member as a
    component of such bearings does not effect their nonmetallic designation
    since the dominant functional characteristics of such bearings result from
    the nonmetallic components thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 297+ for a plain bearing with specified
    nonmetal sleeve or liner.


CLS 29/898.056
TXT Strip or blank material shaping:

    Process under subclass 898.054 including the step of shaping an elongated
    substantially narrow workpiece, i.e., a strip or a bendable predimensioned
    sheet blank into a sleeve or bushing type bearing element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 362+ for appropriate metal deforming
    processes.


CLS 29/898.057
TXT Die-press shaping:

    Process under subclass 898.056 wherein the means for manufacturing or
    altering the shape of the sleeve or bushing includes a movable member to
    forcibly press strip or blank material into a shaped cavity to such an
    extent that the work has impressed therein a shape in substantial
    conformance with at least a portion of said shaped cavity.


CLS 29/898.058
TXT Having inner lining layer:

    Process under subclass 898.057 including the step of forming an adhering
    layer of material on the inner bearing surface of the sleeve or bushing.


CLS 29/898.059
TXT Having liner:

    Process under subclass 898.054 including the step of providing an element
    on the inner cylindrical surface of the sleeve or bushing which slidably
    supports a movable element thereon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 282 for a plain bearing with specified sleeve
    or liner having a bearing surface insert.


CLS 29/898.06
TXT Anti-friction bearing or component thereof:

    Process under subclass 898.04 wherein the relative motion between the
    weight bearing and the supported member includes a rotary component and the
    friction between the members is in the nature of rolling friction, as in a
    ball or roller bearing.

    (1)     Note.  The components of anti-friction bearings include races,
    cages, and rolling friction members, i.e., rollers or balls, which terms
    are used uniformly in this and the indented subclasses as defined hereafter:

    RACE
    A structural member including the contact surface or raceway for rolling
    friction members such as rollers or balls.

    CAGE
    Members for mechanically spacing the rolling function members such as balls
    or rollers in their contact with the raceway.

    ROLLING FRICTION MEMBERS
    Those members, commonly balls or rollers, which provide that the friction
    between the relatively movable anti-friction bearing members is of the
    rolling type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    724,    for roller or ball bearing type anti-friction bearing assembling or
    disassembling means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclass 73 for a process of making a roll, a
    ring, or a hollow body by electroforming.

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 445+ for anti-friction bearing assemblies and
    components.


CLS 29/898.061
TXT Assembling of race, cage and rolling anti-friction members:

    Process under subclass 898.06 including the assembly of anti-friction
    bearing components, specifically, races, cages, and rollers or balls.

    (1)     Note.  See "assembly" in the definition of terms of this class (29).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 510, 511, and 537 for specified means
    facilitating assembly of a ball bearing; subclasses 559+, 584, and 585 for
    roller bearing assembling means; and subclasses 600 and 617 for thrust
    bearing type assembling means.


CLS 29/898.062
TXT Assembling of race and rolling anti-friction members:

    Process under subclass 898.06 wherein the assembled elements include races
    and either rollers or balls.

    (1)     Note.  See search notes to subclass 898.061 regarding means
    facilitating assembly, etc.


CLS 29/898.063
TXT With race making:

    Process under subclass 898.062 including the step of manufacturing the race.


CLS 29/898.064
TXT Assembling of cage and rolling anti-friction members:

    Process under subclass 898.06 wherein the assembled elements include a cage
    and either a roller or a ball.

    (1)     Note.  See search notes to subclass 898.061 regarding means
    facilitating assembly, etc.


CLS 29/898.065
TXT With cage making:

    Process under subclass 898.064 including the step of manufacturing the cage.


CLS 29/898.066
TXT Race making:

    Process under subclass 898.06 for manufacturing a race.

    (1)     Note.  See defined terms under subclass 898.06 for definition of a
    race.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    898.063,        for race making included with steps of assembling the race,
    ball, or roller members.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, directed to race structure as part of ball, roller, and
    thrust type anti-friction bearings.

    451,    Abrading, subclass 52 for means for the grinding of a bearing
    raceway.


CLS 29/898.067
TXT Cage making:

    Process under subclass 898.06 for manufacturing a cage.

    (1)     Note.  See defined terms under subclass 898.06 for definition of a
    cage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    898.065,        for cage making included with steps of assembling the cage
    with ball or roller members.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, directed to cage structure as part of ball, roller, and
    thrust type anti-friction bearings.


CLS 29/898.068
TXT Roller making:

    Process under subclass 898.06 of manufacturing a cylindrical rolling
    component for use in an anti-friction bearing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    895+,   for method of making a roller for general usage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 565+ for roller structure.


CLS 29/898.069
TXT Ball making:

    Process under subclass 898.06 of manufacturing a spheroid element for use
    in an anti-friction bearing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    899+,   for method of making a ball of general usage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclass 73 for a process of making a roll, a
    ring, or a hollow body by electroforming.

    384,    Bearings, subclass 491 for ball structure and subclass 492 for ball
    composition or material.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 49+ for means for the grinding of a roll or
    roller.


CLS 29/898.07
TXT Mounting:

    Process under subclass 898 including the step of providing means or process
    for holding a bearing or elements thereof in a substantially fixed position
    in its environment, usually secured to a support element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS SUBCLASS:

    428+,   for assembling, generally, including assembling a bearing on a
    shaft or inside a holder.


CLS 29/898.08
TXT Demounting:

    Process under subclass 898 for removing a bearing or elements thereof from
    a substantially fixed position in its environment, usually secured to a
    support means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    426.1+, for disassembling, generally, including removing a bearing from a
    shaft or from inside a holder.

    724,    for apparatus including means to assemble or disassemble a roller
    or ball bearing.


CLS 29/898.09
TXT Pre-usage process, e.g., preloading, aligning:

    Process under subclass 898 including the step of readying a manufactured
    bearing for utilization such as by (1) freeing the component parts for
    relative movement, (2) mechanically adjusting the position of component
    parts with or without stressing force applied such as preloading
    (simulating operating conditions), and (3) the aligning of such bearing
    components in their installed position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    898.044,        for step of freeing bearing components after deforming step
    to secure same during assembly.


CLS 29/898.1
TXT Lubricating:

    Process under subclass 898 including a step of supplying lubricant to a
    bearing by means of a lubricating element, of treating bearing components
    to retain lubricant, and of forming lubrication structure within the
    bearing members such as passage for lubricant to circulate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, directed to lubricating means as part of and combined
    with anti-friction bearings.


CLS 29/898.11
TXT Sealing:

    Process under subclass 898 of manufacturing a means for preventing matter
    from entering into, passing through, or escaping from a bearing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 130+ and 477+ for specified seals.


CLS 29/898.12
TXT Coating or casting:

    Process under subclass 898 wherein the manufacturing of a bearing or
    component thereof includes the covering of a surface of such workpiece with
    a relatively thin layer of material applied, for example, by projecting a
    liquid material against said surface or by molding a fluent material
    against said surface which material hardens to form said layer.


CLS 29/898.13
TXT Bearing surface treatment:

    Process under subclass 898 of operating on the bearing surface supporting
    portions of a bearing element to change its physical properties, e.g.,
    peening.


CLS 29/898.14
TXT Specific metallic composition:

    Process under subclass 898 wherein a bearing or component thereof is
    manufactured utilizing specific metallic compositions to provide their
    inherent qualities to the resulting structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, Cross-Reference Art Collection 912.


CLS 29/898.15
TXT Nonmetallic bearing element:

    Process under subclass 898 wherein nonmetallic material is utilized to
    manufacture the bearing components or parts thereof to provide their
    inherent qualities to the resulting structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, Cross-Reference Art Collections 907+.


CLS 29/899
TXT Ball making:

    Process under subclass 592 for manufacturing a spheroid element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.22,   for bullets or shot making.

    34,     for plural diverse manufacturing apparatus used for ball making.

    413,    for process of obtaining plural pieces by breaking through weakened
    portion.

    417,    for process of obtaining plural pieces by dividing sequentially
    from leading end.

    898.069,        for process of manufacturing a spheroid element for use in
    a anti-friction bearing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deformation, subclass 365 for "rolling" type process.

    148,    Metal Treatment, directed to particular operations defined therein.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 15 for spheroiding or rounding of solid particles.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 49+ for a method of ball grinding.


CLS 29/899.1
TXT Hollow ball:

    Process under subclass 899 wherein the spheroid element comprises an outer
    member enclosing an empty portion thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    463,    for process of mechanical manufacture including peripheral joining
    of opposed mirror image parts to form hollow bodies.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclass 173.6 for bonding by deforming sheet
    metal.

    Dig. 20,Process and apparatus for double blank.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS

    The documents in the following collections have been placed without regard
    to their original classification or to their claimed subject matter and are
    therefore not exhaustive of the art subject matter but are only examples of
    the art. Consequently, a complete search for an art subject matter provided
    here would require a review of the higher portions of this classification
    schedule.


CLS 29/900
TXT METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR ASSEMBLY BY ELECTROSTATIC ATTRACTION:

    Cross-reference art collection of documents wherein self-sustaining parts
    are juxtaposed, associated, or fastened to each other by the use of
    electrostatic attraction wherein one part is given an electrostatic charge.

    (1)     Note.  The purpose of the processes of this subclass is usually the
    attachment of sheets and/or objects to each other for ready detachment at a
    measurably later time.

    (2)     Note.  Adherence of liquids or of fluent solids to a solid material
    is excluded from this subclass; the objects of this subclass must be
    handled as units.

    (3)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass has not been clearly
    provided for in any patent class heretofore; thus, this subclass is
    established as a collection place for such art.  Because it is impossible
    to locate all art classifiable herein, a search of this subclass cannot be
    considered authoritative for patents issued before its establishment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    428+,   for a process of mechanical assembly, and see the notes thereto for
    locus of other subject matter concerned with assembly of objects.

    700+,   for apparatus for mechanical assembly, and see the notes thereto
    for the locus of other subject matter concerned with assembly of objects.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, for a process or apparatus using electrostatic
    charging in package making.

    83,     Cutting, for electrostatic charging in a cutting process or
    apparatus.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 621+ for electrostatic projection or
    attraction of liquid or fluent solid coating material to work.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    60+ for a surface-bonding process using tacky or other adhesive substances.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 691 for electrostatic means to
    enhance the adherence between a conveyor and its load.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclass 94 for
    electrostatic means enhancing adherence work being moved by an advancing
    means.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, for a process or apparatus using
    electrostatic charging in winding or reeling.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 324+ for electrostatic charging of
    objects by corona discharge.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclass 18.1 for electrostatic
    separators and subclass 193 for electrostatic deliver conveyors.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 225+ for
    electrostatic charging by other than corona discharge.

    399,    Electrophotography, for electric photography which involves charged
    photoconductive materials.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, for electrostatic charging used in
    material or article handling.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 174.8 for means of applying electrostatic charges to an object in
    a plastic or earthenware shaping or treating machine.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 13+ for a process of coating with a
    liquid or with fluent solids which utilizes an electrostatic charge.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 31+ for a process of electric photography including the
    electrostatic charging of chemically defined photoconductive materials.


CLS 29/901
TXT BALANCING METHOD:

    Cross-reference art collection of documents under the class definition
    relating to a process of bringing a dynamic device into or maintaining a
    state of equilibrium or harmony relative to mechanical forces or torques.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    407.01+, for a method of testing or indicating under the class definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, for a testing process and apparatus in
    general, and see the notes to the general definition of this class (73) for
    the loci of other testing and indicating processes and apparatus.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    64 for a laminating process including measuring, testing, or inspecting.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+ for an electrical
    automatic condition responsive indicating systems.


CLS 29/902
TXT FILTER MAKING:

    Cross-reference art collections of documents under the class definition
    relating to a method of manufacturing a perforated or porous metal article
    which separates particles from materials flowing through the articles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    896.62, for a method of making a multiperforated metal filter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 41+ for a method of pore forming in situ a nonmetallic article
    or an article formed from particulate material, and subclasses 109+ for a
    method of forming articles by uniting randomly associated particles.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, for a method of making an article by
    powder metallurgy techniques.


CLS 29/903
TXT FIREARM BOLT MAKING:

    Cross-reference art collection of documents under the class definition
    relating to a method manufacturing (1) a sliding bar that positions or
    manipulates a cartridge in a breech-loading rifle or (2) a similar device
    in any breech mechanism or any rifle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.1,    for means for making a firearm.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, subclasses 69.01+ for a gun lock or firing mechanism.


CLS 29/904
TXT LAMINATED METAL ARTICLE MAKING:

    Cross-reference art collection under the class definition relating to a
    method of manufacturing metal ware having united superposed layers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    60+ for a method of surface bonding under the class definition.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 101+ for a method of
    metallurgically bonding.

    413,    Sheet Metal Container Making, subclasses 1+ for a method of
    fabricating a sheet metal receptacle or an element thereof.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 402+ for a method of applying
    superposed diverse coating or coating a coated base.


CLS 29/905
TXT MAKING COIL WOUND WALL SCREEN:

    Cross-reference art collection of documents under the class definition
    relating to a method of manufacturing a filtering device which includes
    spiral elements for performing the filtering.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    896.61, for a method of fabricating a coil wound wall screen of
    multiperforated metal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    140,    Wireworking, subclasses 71+ for a method of making an article from
    wire.


CLS 29/906
TXT NUCLEAR DEVICE MAKING:

    Cross-reference art collection of documents under the class definition
    relating to a method of manufacturing an article which releases energy by
    atomic fission or fusion or by radioactive decay.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements, for a
    nuclear device or an element thereof.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, for a method including a powder
    metallurgy step.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 5+ for a method of coating a
    radioactive base or applying a radioactive coating.  Fish Tail Shore was
    named for its natural shape.  Over the ages, sand deposits have built up
    from both sides of the point creating a natural harbor. This campsite is
    located on the north side of the reservoir.


CLS 30/
TTL CUTLERY

CLS 30/
TXT

    (1)     This is the broad generic class for cutting implements including
    those for cutting by a sharp point, which are manipulable by hand so as to
    be movable in their entirety relative to the work during the cutting
    operation as distinguished from moving the work relative to the cutter.
    Such implements may be power operated and the motive power means may be
    built into the structure of the cutting implement.

    (2)     This class also includes some special machines which are not hand
    manipulable, as above defined, namely, special machines and fixed cutters
    in which the work moves relative to the machine or cutter, since these
    structures are too closely related to the hand cutters to separate; see
    necked receptacle seal cutters, subclass 1.5; can openers, subclasses 400+;
    carton openers, subclass 2; cigar tip cutters, subclasses 109+; cord
    cutters, subclasses 290 and 296.1; and segmenters, subclass 114.

    (3)     This class also includes hand manipulable scrapers having a
    sharpened scraping or cutting edge.

    (4)     This class also includes culinary and table forks and spoons due to
    their close relation to knives in use and manufacture.

    (5)     Many hand manipulable cutters under the above definition have not
    been placed in this class.  Their location is set forth in the notes
    appended to the definitions of this class and the subclasses thereunder.

    (6)     Many hand manipulable instruments having structure for cutting and
    in addition structure for performing other functions, such that the
    combination is restricted to some special art use, are not in this class
    but with the appropriate art class, as set forth in the notes appended to
    the definitions of this class and the subclasses thereunder.

    NOTES

    (1)     KNIVES:  Hand manipulable:

    Pocket knives and other knives foldable or retractable into a handle or
    otherwise sheathed are in Class 7, Compound Tools, subclasses 118+ and
    167+, when combined with some tool other than a tool defined as coming
    within this class (30), and in Class 30, subclasses 143 and 151+.

    Other knives in Class 30 are in subclasses 165 and 272.1 through 321, and
    329 through 357, knives combined with other things including other forms of
    cutlery being in subclasses 123 and 408.

    (2)     ABRADING MACHINE OR TOOL:


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35+,    for the combination of a razor of this class with an accessory
    sharpener therefor.

    138+,   for the combination of a cutter device, generally, with an
    accessory sharpener therefor.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 75.6 and 76.4 for a manicuring abrader, file, or
    buffer.

    451,    Abrading, for a tool which cuts by the abrasive action of a natural
    cutting media (e.g., the sharp edges of randomly positioned crystals) as
    distinguished from an ``artificial" cutting edge such as is formed on a
    file, milling tool, knife, shear, etc.  Class 30 takes a blade holder
    designed to hold a specific blade relative to a stone or strop, generally.
    Class 451 takes a blade holder, generally; and takes a blade holder
    designed to hold a specific blade relative to a stone or strop only when
    including a ``special feature" which renders the holder unsuitable for use
    with a general purpose knife.  Examples of a ``special feature" are:

            1.      Means for reversing a blade relative to
            a strop or abrading stone.

            2.      An opening or guide in a blade support
            or guide to determine the relationship
            of the blade to a strop or stone.

            3.      Means at or in front of the cutting edge
            to prevent improper contact between a
            blade edge and a strop or stone.

            Search particularly subclasses 419+ of Class 451, Abrading, for an
    abrading device intended to be attached to a cutting machine where no
    significant feature of the cutlery device is claimed.

            Search subclasses 45+ for a process of sharpening a razor, knife,
    or scissors.



    (3)     BORING OR DRILLING MACHINES AND IMPLEMENTS:



    See     Classes:

    29,     Metal Working, particularly subclass 26.

    79,     Button Making, particularly subclasses 6,  11 and 14.

    144,    Woodworking,

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, appropriate
    subclass.

    300,    Brush, Broom, and Mop Making, particularly subclass 3.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, appropriate
    subclasses, for methods, apparatus, implements, or tools for cutting in the
    manner of that class.



    (4)     CUTTING BY HEAT:



    See this class, subclass 140, and Notes thereunder.



    See Classes:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 320+ for refrigerating means or a
    refrigerated mold having means for comminuting or cutting the product.

    148,    Metal Treatment, particularly subclass 194 for processes of
    chemical-heat removing (e.g., flames cutting, etc.) or burning (i.e.,
    oxidizing) of a metal workpiece.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 11+ for processes or
    means for earth boring or penetrating by directly applying heat to fluidize
    or comminute the material of the earth.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 68+ and 384 for cutting or
    disintegrating by the use of electric energy applied to the workpiece.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 48+.



    (5)     CHISELS:



    See this class, subclass 168, and notes thereunder.



    (6)     FILES AND RASPS:



    See Classes:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclasses 41.7 and 104.5.

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 76.1.

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 75.6 and 76.4.

    168,    Farriery, subclasses 48.1+.

    433,    Dentistry, subclass 144.



    (7)     PLANNING OR SHAVING MACHINES AND IMPLEMENTS:



    See Classes:

    29,     Metal Working, particularly subclass 30.

    125,    Stone Working, particularly subclass 9.

    144,    Woodworking, particularly subclasses 114.1+ for a woodworking
    planer, subclasses 2.1+ for a special woodworking machine, and subclasses
    1.1+ for a combined woodworking machine..

    147,    Coopering, particularly subclass 33.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses for shaving machines for reducing a solid mass to smaller
    particles.  See section 12 of the main class definition of Class 241 for
    the line.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclass 34.01
    and see the search notes therein for a hard material disintegrating machine
    having a planer type cutter.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 288+.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, appropriate subclass.



    (8)     SAWS:



    See this class, subclass 166.3, and the notes thereunder.

    (9)     TOOL HANDLES AND FASTENINGS THEREFOR:



    See this class, subclass 340, and the notes thereunder.

    (10)    TOOL CLASSES:



    7,      Compound Tools, the miscellaneous class for combinations of two or
    more tools.

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclasses 12+ for forming
    cutting ribs in a file or rasp, subclasses 82+ for a cutting device for
    sharpening a tool, and subclasses 104.1+ for a blank for or process for
    making cutlery.

    81,     Tools, the generic class of hand manipulable    tools, particularly
    subclasses 9.4+ for tools for stripping insulation from cables or
    conductors which have cutters and also structure performing additional
    functions, and subclasses 181+ for wrenches combined with or convertible to
    cutters where the parts which operate the jaws of the wrench also apply
    pressure to the cutters.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, for implements for
    engaging or supporting articles or materials for handling or manipulating
    purposes.



    (11)    OTHER MAIN SEARCH CLASSES:



    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclasses 7+ for cutting devices
    particularly designed for use in cloth finishing operations, particularly
    subclasses 15+ for devices for shearing the surface fibers of cloth and
    fur, including hand manipulable tools, and see Note (29).

    56,     Harvesters, for hand manipulated or operated cutters having
    additional claimed structure specially useful for harvesting purposes, such
    as wheels or runners for guiding them a definite distance from the ground,
    or means for catching produce.  Other hand manipulable cutters not having
    such additional means are in this class (30).  Particular attention is
    called to the following subclasses in Class 56:  subclasses 233+ for hedge
    trimmers having means to guide the cutter in a definite path relative to
    the hedge; subclasses 328.1+ for fruit gatherers having cutters and also
    means other than a mere stem gripping means, for holding or catching the
    fruit.  The devices in Class 30 which may be used for harvesting purposes
    are structurally classified, for example, as shears, subclasses 194+,
    scythes, subclass 309; swinging stroke cutters, subclass 318, etc.

    83,     Cutting, and see section III of the class definition for the line
    between these classes.

    433,    Dentistry, and 128, Surgery, for cutting implements specially
    designed for dental and surgical use, particularly Class 433, subclasses
    144+, and Class 606, subclasses 167+.  Mere knives, even though called
    surgical knives, are in this class (30).

    452,    Butchering, particularly subclasses 4, 6, 63+, 102+, 120+, 132+,
    137, 148, 160+, 166+, and 171 for hand manipulated cutting tools
    specifically adapted and solely disclosed for use in the slaughtering or
    dressing of meat or fish and subclasses 145-147 for hand held meat
    tenderizers not having a continuous cutting edge so as to adapt them to a
    more general use as a cutter.



            Attention is also directed to the following classes comprised
    largely of cutting machines:

    82,     Turning.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling and Planing.

            Note. 99, Foods and Beverages:
    Apparatus, subclasses 537+ for a food cutting machine of that class (99)
    type wherein there are two specifically distinct portions of a food item.



            Where a base or work support has means for locating or guiding a
    hand manipulable instrument, the combination has been construed to be a
    machine. If it is not the type of machine classified in this Class (30),
    (see paragraph 2 of this class definition), it will be found in the
    appropriate machine class.

    142,    Wood Turning.

    144,    Woodworking



            Additional places for machines and implements having cutting
    features and in addition other structure limiting them to the art use are:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, particularly subclasses 27+, 40, 41.7, 46,
    47, et seq.  50.1+, 57.5+, 58, 62+, 85+, 103, and 104.5.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 105.53.

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, particularly subclasses 7+ and see Note
    (16.5).

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclasses 222+ for thread clearing
    apparatus using means to shear away fibrils and other unwanted, protruding
    material.

    29,     Metal Working, particularly subclasses 22 and 34, filing,
    subclasses 76.1+.

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, particularly subclasses 18.1+ and 628.

    42,     Firearms, particularly subclasses 53, 86 and 90.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, particularly subclasses 6+, 8 and 12.

    53,     Package Making, subclass 435 for methods and subclasses 513+ for
    apparatus to form packages combined with means to cut the contents; and
    subclasses 381.3+, for envelope opening apparatus.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 112+ for a process of glass
    treating combined with severing or perforating, and see the collection of
    "Search Notes" thereunder for a process of, or apparatus for glassworking
    or treating combined with cutting, scoring, scribing or perforating of
    glass; and subclass 334 for a gob cutting or scraping means that coacts
    with a surface of a glass melt dispenser or receiving means.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, particularly subclasses 2, 9+ and 20.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses appropriate to cutting and deforming.

    81,     Tools, subclasses 15.2+. (54) 166, Wells, subclasses 54.5+ for
    means for cutting cable or rope below ground and subclasses 55+ for means
    for perforating, weakening, bending or separating pipe at any point.

    86,     Ammunition and Explosive-Charge Making, particularly subclasses 21.

    112,    Sewing, particularly subclasses, 68, 122+ and 285-301.

    114,    Ships, particularly subclass 42.

    131,    Tobacco, particularly subclasses 233+, 248+, and 253+.

    132,    Toilet, particularly subclasses 75.4+.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, particularly subclasses 43, 44, 260, 263+, and
    302+.

    140,    Wireworking, particularly subclass 26 for slat cutting and
    subclasses 139+ for wire cutting in combination with straightening.

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 28.1.

    168,    Farriery, particularly subclasses 48.1+.

    172,    Earth Working, appropriate subclasses for implements  for cutting
    the earth in situ such as colters, disks, hoes or weeders. An implement
    intended merely to make a slit in sod is classifiable in Class 30.  Class
    172  takes patents in which the claims are restricted to or  the sole
    disclosed use is for earth working, except patents for those hand devices
    in which the cutting edge extends generally in the direction of the handle,
    and patents for a tool for merely cutting a plant below the surface of the
    earth.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, appropriate subclasses, for a
    receptacle particularly configured or modified to retain or enhance the
    packaging of a cutlery item.  See especially subclasses:  204, 207+, 228,
    and 394+.

    220,    Receptacles, particularly subclasses 267 and 277+.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, particularly subclasses 232+ for a
    receiver supported by an animate bearer for holding a knife, bayonet,
    sword, or ice pick, and subclass 234 for a receiver carried by an animate
    bearer for holding an axe, hatchet, or splitting wedge.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, for significantly
    claimed nozzle or sprinkler structure in combination with grass or sod
    cutting tools for coactive use therewith, e.g., where the sprinkler part
    serves as a ledger plate for the cutter.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 19, 21, 48, and 521+.

    407,    Cutters, for Shaping, appropriate subclasses for cutters.

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, particularly subclasses 19 and 31.

    606,    Surgery, subclasses 167+.

            Cutlery designs:

    D7,     Equipment for Preparing or Serving Food or Drink Not Elsewhere
    Specified, subclasses 693+ for cutting type handtool; and subclasses 649+
    for place setting or table service knife.

    D22,    Arms, Pyrotechnics, Hunting and Fishing Equipment, subclasses 117+
    for daggers and swords.

    (12)    Miscellaneous notes and index to all notes to the class definition:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, see Notes 1 and 10.

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, see Notes 6 and 26.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, see Note 26a.

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, see Note 29.

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, see Note 30.

    29,     Metal Working, see Notes 3, 6, 7, and 31.

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, see Note 32.

    42,     Firearms, see Note 33.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, see Note 34.

    53,     Package Making, subclass 402 for methods and subclass 56 for
    apparatus to form packages combined with means to cut the contents.

    56,     Harvesters, see Note 19.

    62,     Refrigeration, see Note 4.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, see Note 37.

    72,     Metal Deforming, see (38) Note.

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, see Note 11.

    79,     Button Making, see Note 3.

    81,     Tools, see Notes 12 and 53.

    82,     Turning, see Note 12.

    83,     Cutting, see (18) Note.

    86,     Ammunition and Explosive-Charge Making, see Note 39.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, see Note 22.5.

    112,    Sewing, see Note 44.

    114,    Ships, see Note 45.

    125,    Stone Working, see Note 7.

    128,    Surgery, see Notes 15 and 46a.

    131,    Tobacco, see Note 48.

    132,    Toilet, see Notes 2, 6 and 49.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, see Note 50.

    140,    Wireworking, see Note 51.

    142,    Wood Turning see Note 23.

    144,    Woodworking, see Notes 3, 7, 25, and 51a.

    147,    Coopering, see Note 7.

    148,    Metal Treatment, see (4) Note.

    164,    Metal Founding, appropriate subclasses for mold making and metal
    casting, especially subclasses 34+ (pattern removing from mold, e.g., lost
    wax, etc.), 286+ (centrifugal casting machines) and 376 (dental flasks).

    166,    Wells, see Note 54.

    168,    Farriery, see Notes 6 and 55.

    172,    Earth Working, see Note (55a).

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, appropriate subclass for subject matter
    directed to driving or impacting a tool, when such subject matter includes
    combined features peculiar to tool driving, but which does not include
    features limiting the subject matter to a specific tool art, such as
    specific shape of the work contacting portion of a tool, related tools, or
    an opposed work support.



    Class 30 has not been cleared as to subject matter in conflict with this
    line.



    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, see Notes 3 and 4.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, see Note 58.

    219,    Electric Heating, see Note 4.

    220,    Receptacles, see Note 59.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, see Note 60.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, see Note (61a).

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, see Note 7.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, see Note (62).

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, see Note 4.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, see Note 14.

    300,    Brush, Broom, and Mop Making, see Note 3.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclass 74 for process of
    providing an expansion joint including a step of cutting, subclass 75 for
    in situ treatment of earth or roadway including comminuting, subclasses 87+
    for means to cut a joint in a roadway, and subclasses 90+ for means to
    comminute earth or road surface in situ.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling and Planing, see Notes 7 and 22.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 289 for the combination of plastic material shaping or reshaping
    apparatus and preform severing means; see the search notes thereunder; and
    subclass 276 for an ice cream scoop or plugger including a shaping cavity.

    433,    Dentistry, see Notes 6 and 15.

    451,    Abrading, see Note 2.

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, see note 47.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, appropriate subclasses.

    D22,    Arms, Pyrotechnics, Hunting and Fishing Equipment.


CLS 30/1
TXT Inventions under the class definition, not provided for below.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes inventions under the class definition
    which are not limited to any particular cutting tool provided for below nor
    to forks or spoons.

    (2)     Note.  For razor attachments and accessories, see this class,
    subclass 90.

    (3)     Note.  For elements for sheath knives, see this class, subclass 164.

    (4)     Note.  For inventions applicable to any of the cutlery implements
    provided for in this class but limited merely to the material from which
    the implement is made, see this class, subclass 345.


CLS 30/1.5
TXT Cutting devices under the class definition provided with means for severing
    destructible and anti-tampering means applied to containers having a
    narrowing portion forming a closure receiving opening.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are cutters for bottle closure seals, either
    in the form of (1) an encompassing thimble for the closure and bottle neck,
    or (2) a strand or wire, fastened to the bottle neck and passing over the
    closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for carton openers.

    94+,    for external rod or pipe cutters.

    173+,   for plural cooperating blade cutters.

    400,    for can openers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclass 3.1 for receptacle closure removers.


CLS 30/2
TXT Cutting apparatus and tools specially designed for cutting open paper
    cartons.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 2.

    (2)     Note.  See this class, subclass 167.1 for devices for prying off
    the lids of boxes.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass includes apparatus and tools for cutting the
    carton contents as well as the carton.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 120.011+ and
    308 for a box or envelope combined with a cutter.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 202 for a bag combined with a cutter.


CLS 30/26
TXT Cutting implements having structure specially adapting them for use in
    manicuring a person's nails or cutting corns or callouses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 75.4 and 75.5, for cutters combined with other
    manicuring implements.

    606,    Surgery, subclass 133 for tweezers for removing slivers, hair or
    parasites from the skin, subclass 210 for tweezers in general.


CLS 30/27
TXT Cutters under subclass 26 in which the cutting edge is guarded.

    (1)     Note.  For other guarded cutters, see this class, the razor
    subclasses and subclasses 278+ and 286+.


CLS 30/28
TXT Cutters under subclass 26 in which two cooperating blades or a blade and
    anvil meet edge to edge to perform the cutting operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175+,   for other cutters of this type.


CLS 30/29
TXT Cutters under subclass 26 in which the edges of two cooperating blades move
    past and in substantial contact with each other to perform the cutting
    operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194+,   for shears of general utility.


CLS 30/29.5
TXT Cutting implements under the class definition having special configuration
    disclosed for cutting or shaving hair from the inside of small passages or
    cavities such as nostrils or ears.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for curved edge razors, many of which are disclosed for use in
    removing hair from armpits.


CLS 30/30
TXT Devices having a sharp cutting edge utilizing guards having elongated
    teeth, projecting beyond the edge, which prevent cutting the hair adjacent
    the skin.  Many of these patents involve the combination of a conventional
    comb or such comb modified to hold a blade.

    (3)     Note.  For combined combs and shears see this class (30),
    subclasses 233.5+, where the comb acts as a guard, guide or gauge for the
    shear, and Class 7, Compound Tools, subclass 136 where the comb and shear
    are independently used.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32+,    (and particularly 53+) for razors having comb type guard structure.

    195,    for hair thinners.

    233.5,  and see (3) Note, above.

    286+,   and see the Notes thereto for other  cutlery with guards and/or
    guides.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, subclass 136, and see (3) Note, Above.

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 219+ for combs, per se, designed to be used by
    inserting the teeth into the hair of a person and for such combs combined
    with other structure not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 30/31
TXT Devices under subclass 30 constructed to be converted to a razor for
    ordinary shaving purposes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    and the notes thereunder, for other convertible implements.


CLS 30/32
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising cutting and shearing
    implements particularly adapted to shaving of the beard, i.e., arranged to
    sever the hair of the beard close to the skin; parts thereof, attachments
    and accessories therefor, not specifically classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30+,    for hair planers for trimming the hair at the back of the neck; and
    particularly subclass 31 for such planers which are convertible to razors.

    196+,   for hair clippers provided with plural teeth.

    329+,   for holders for detachable blades, which may be razor blades,
    arrangement of the holder being such that it is not adapted to shaving.

    345,    for blades in general characterized by the material of which the
    blade is made.

    346+,   for razor blades, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclasses 1 and 104.1+ for
    processes of and apparatus for making razors.

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 289+ for shaving kits.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 208 for a razor container
    or package including a contacting medium, subclass 228 for a razor kit,
    subclass 351 for a powered razor package and subclass 352 for a razor blade
    receptacle or package.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses, for receptacles and
    packages including dispensing means of the type provided for in that class.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 118+ for a
    shaving kit consisting of a supply of shaving material (i.e., soap) and an
    independent applicator therefor.


CLS 30/34.05
TXT Combined:

    Razor under subclass 32 in combination with other structure, not directly
    associated therewith in the action of shaving of the beard.

    (1)     Note.  A razor combined with means to stretch the skin being shaved
    is included herein.

    (2)     Note.  A razor combined with a distinct cutting device (which may
    be a distinct razor) is included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30+,    for a hair planer, which may be combined with other structure.

    42+,    for a motor driven razor.

    51+,    for a razor having a guarded cutting edge.

    123+,   for cutlery, generally, in combination with distinct other
    structure not directly associated therewith in a cutlery function.

    535,    for a razor having a hollow handle, comprising a receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 289+ for a shaving kit, which may include a
    razor.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 115 for the combination of a razor and a
    lamp.


CLS 30/34.1
TXT Razors under subclass 34.05 wherein the "other thing" includes a second
    means, other than a second razor, for severing the beard or hair.


CLS 30/34.2
TXT Razors under subclass 34.05 wherein the other thing includes either (1)
    means to lift the beard, permitting shaving thereof closer to the skin; or
    (2) means to pull the surface being shaved, holding the surface taut during
    the shaving operation.


CLS 30/35
TXT Razors under subclass 34.05, in which the razor is combined with structure
    which permits or assists in sharpening of the blade.

    (1)     Note.  Where the structural feature merely permits of the separate
    removal of the guard so that sharpening of the blade is possible, see this
    class, subclasses 51+; and where the mere action of shearing incidentally
    serves to sharpen and/or maintain the cutter in sharpened condition, see
    this class, subclass 43.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43+,    and see (1) Note above.

    51+,    and see (1) Note above.

    138+,   for other types of cutlery combined with means to facilitate
    sharpening.

    329+,   for mere holders for unguarded blades which are  capable of
    operation against a sharpening device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclasses 81-89.2.

    451,    Abrading, for grinding a workpiece, generally.  For a statement of
    the line between Class 451, Abrading, and this class, see Paragraph (2)
    under ``Notes" of the Class Definition of Class 30.  Search particularly
    subclass 45 for a method of sharpening a razor, subclasses 126 and 322 for
    a machine for sharpening a razor blade by reversing the blade as it is
    presented to an abrading tool, subclass 191 for an abrading machine having
    a rotary grinding tool for sharpening a razor blade, and subclass 556 for a
    razor hone.


CLS 30/36
TXT Razors under subclass 35 in which the sharpening element is built in as a
    permanent part of the organization.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    132,    Toilet, subclass 292 for magnets used for sharpening.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 283 for blade sharpening or conditioning type
    magnets and subclasses 285+ for magnets holding sharpening devices which
    devices are  separate from the razors that they are used to sharpen.


CLS 30/37
TXT Razors under subclass 35 in which the razor is provided with means to hold
    or guide an independent sharpener relative to the razor blade.


CLS 30/38
TXT Razors under subclass 37 in which mechanism, operated by relative motion
    between the sharpener and razor, operates to shift the blade relative to
    the sharpener to cause the blade edge to always have trailing contact.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 126 and 322 for a machine for sharpening a
    razor blade by reversing the blade as it is presented to an abrading tool.


CLS 30/39
TXT Razors under subclass 38, in which mechanism is provided to insure that the
    blade is moved out of contact with the sharpener prior to a reversal of
    relative motion to prevent cutting of the sharpener.


CLS 30/40
TXT Razors under subclass 34.05 in which a magazine holding blades is claimed
    in combination with the razor, the structure being such that blades may be
    positioned in the razor without touching the same with the hands.  The
    magazine may be built into the razor structure or be separate therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    536,    for a razor having a hollow handle, comprising a receptacle for
    receiving razor blades

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 352+ for a blade magazine
    or package, per se.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for such structures
    including article dispensing features.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, particularly subclasses 35+ for
    removal facilitating magazine type cabinets.


CLS 30/40.1
TXT Razors under subclass 40 including means to store an elongated blade and
    means to support the blade so that a selected portion of the blade is
    exposed for shaving, which storage means and supporting means will allow
    the elongated blade to move parallel to the cutting edge thereof to expose
    another selected portion of the blade.


CLS 30/40.2
TXT Razors under subclass 40 wherein the blade storage means (i.e., magazine)
    is secured to the razor while a blade is being positioned in the razor and
    wherein the blade storage means is removed from the razor during the
    shaving operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 232 for magazines for supplying razor
    blades, not combined with structure for cooperatively engaging with razor
    structure.


CLS 30/41
TXT Razors under subclass 34.05, combined with any one or any combination of
    the following three features:

    (a)     With means for collecting the waste material, as lather and hair,
    resulting from the shaving operation:

    (b)     With means for cleaning the razor including means for removing
    lather from the blade and reapplying the same to the face; means for
    whirling to throw off water, etc.,

    (c)     With means to dispense fluent materials as water or lather.


CLS 30/41.5
TXT Razors under subclass 41 having means to create and/or direct the flow of
    fluent material to and/or from the region of shaving action for collecting
    or dispersing hair clippings and/or lather or other shaving preparations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    and see the notes thereto, for suction disposal means combined with
    multiple shearing position type shears.


CLS 30/41.6
TXT Razors under subclass 41 having means for receiving the loose hair that
    results from the shaving operation.

    (1)     Note.  The razors of this subclass are usually "dry shavers".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.5,   for dry shavers which are provided with fluid means for flowing the
    cut hair into a collecting chamber.


CLS 30/41.7
TXT With blade usage indicator:

    Razor under subclass 34.05 wherein the addition structure comprises
    designation means setting forth a particular portion of the cutting member
    or of the sharp edge thereof or setting forth the number of times the
    cutting member or the sharp edge thereof has been used.


CLS 30/41.8
TXT With blade flexure indicator:

    Razor under subclass 34.05 including means to bend the cutting blade within
    its elastic limit and wherein the additional structure comprises
    designation means setting forth the amount of the bend.


CLS 30/41.9
TXT Razors under subclass 32 including at least two opposed cutting edges
    having relative movement bringing the cutting edges into abutment to sever
    the hair.


CLS 30/42
TXT Razors under subclass 32 having mechanism for moving the blade during the
    shaving operation.

    (1)     Note.  For other motor driven cutlery implements, see this class,
    subclass 408, and the notes thereunder.

    (2)     Note.  For other nippers, see this class, subclasses 175+.


CLS 30/43
TXT Razors under subclass 32 including two or more cutters, which cutters have
    cutting edge that cooperate by moving past and in substantial contact with
    each other to perform the shaving operation.

    (1)     Note.  The cutters of a typical razor in this subclass and the
    subclasses indented hereunder are positioned in use so that one cutter is
    closer to the surface being shaved than the other cutter.  The cutter
    closer to the surface being shaved is referred to as the "outer cutter" and
    the cutter farther from the surface being shaved is referred to as the
    "inner cutter".


CLS 30/43.1
TXT Razors under subclass 43 including means to vary the position of one part
    of the razor structure with respect to another part of the razor structure.


CLS 30/43.2
TXT Razors under subclass 43.1 including means to vary the  distance between
    the cutting edge of the outer cutter and  the cutting edge of the inner
    cutter.


CLS 30/43.3
TXT Razors under subclass 43 wherein a plurality of simple motions are given to
    one of the cutters simultaneously.


CLS 30/43.4
TXT Razors under subclass 43 wherein one of the cutters turns continuously
    about an axis.


CLS 30/43.5
TXT Razors under subclass 43.4 having a pair of cutters positioned during use
    such that one of the cutters is closer to the surface being shaved than the
    other wherein the cutter which is farther from the surface being shaved
    (i.e., the inner cutter) turns continuously about an axis.


CLS 30/43.6
TXT Razors under subclass 43.5 wherein the other cutter (outer) is fixed
    against movement.


CLS 30/43.7
TXT Razors under subclass 43 wherein one of the cutters moves to an fro about
    an axis such that any point on the movable cutter moves back and forth in a
    circular path.


CLS 30/43.8
TXT Razors under subclass 43.7 wherein the cutter which moves to-and-fro about
    an axis is the inner of a pair.


CLS 30/43.9
TXT Razors under subclass 43.8 wherein the other cutter (outer) is fixed
    against movement.


CLS 30/43.91
TXT Razors under subclass 34.05 wherein the inner of a pair of  cutters moves
    rectilinearly to-and-fro.


CLS 30/43.92
TXT Razors under subclass 43.91 wherein the other cutter  (outer) is fixed
    against movement.


CLS 30/44
TXT Razors under subclass 42 having only one blade, which is moved to
    reciprocate rectilinearly.


CLS 30/45
TXT Razors under subclass 44 having electrical means for imparting motion to
    the blade edge.

    (1)     Note.  Many patents in this class, subclass 210, have electrical
    vibratory mechanisms applied to analogous devices and search should be
    continued there.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 15+ for
    vibratory electric motors, and subclass 47 for rotary magnetic motors, for
    hand tools or dry shavers.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses  220+ for magneto-mechanical devices, e.g.,
    electromagnet with armature.


CLS 30/46
TXT Razors under subclass 44 in which the blade edge is given its motion by
    means receiving its actuating power by frictional engagement with the
    surface being shaved.

    (1)     Note.  Some patents in this class, subclass 247, show a traction
    drive for other types of cutting implements.


CLS 30/47
TXT Razors under subclass 32 in which the claimed features provide for
    positioning the parts in compact form.  The parts may be (1) separated and
    reassembled, (2) merely folded together, or (3) both.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40+,    for razors provided with magazines having means to feed blades into
    cutting positions.

    532,    for means to assemble and disassemble blades pivotally connected to
    handle.

    534,    for handles connected to blades by threaded connection means.


CLS 30/48
TXT Razors under subclass 32 in which the blade edge is straight and structure
    is provided by which the blade edge is inclined relative to the shaving
    stroke, resulting in a draw cut.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    527,    for razors provided with means for adjusting the head and handle
    relative to each other.


CLS 30/49
TXT Razors under subclass 32 having curved edge blades.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for circular rotary blade razors.

    347     and 356, for blades, per se, having curve edges.


CLS 30/50
TXT Razors under subclass 32 provided with a plurality of blades which may be
    arranged in tandem.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42+,    for plural blade razors provided with means for moving the blade
    during shaving.

    299+,   for other cutlery devices provided with a plurality of blades.


CLS 30/51
TXT Miscellaneous razor organizations under subclass 32 having a guarded
    cutting edge in which the blade or other part is separable for removal from
    the organization.

    (1)     Note.  The razors of this and the indented subclasses are provided
    with securing or clamping mechanism for holding a detachable blade in
    position on the razor, consisting of a blade support which remains fixed
    with respect to the razor during blade removal and replacement cooperating
    with a clamping plate or cap which moves to grip the blade against the
    blade support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77+,    for guards claimed as subcombinations of razors.

    286+,   for other cutting tools with guarded cutting edges.

    329+,   for devices not adapted to shaving that detachably hold razor
    blades.


CLS 30/52
TXT Razors under subclass 51 in which the blade edge is tensioned.  The usual
    purpose alleged is to improve the shaving characteristics.


CLS 30/53
TXT Razors under subclass 51 of the longitudinal or "old style" razor type.

    (1)     Note.  The razors in this subclass and the indented subclasses are
    of both the single and the multiple guarded edge type.

    (2)     Note.  All longitudinal or old style razors appear either
    originally or as cross-references in this class (30) in the following
    subclasses: 30+, 53+, 77+, 85+, 329+, and 346+.  No razors of the
    longitudinal type should appear originally in the following subclasses: 51,
    57-76.


CLS 30/54
TXT Razors under subclass 53 in which the blade edge and guard are adjustable
    relative to each other, to vary the closeness of the cut.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 283+.


CLS 30/55
TXT Razors under subclass 53 in which the guard is movable independently of the
    blade to provide an unguarded blade edge.  The device may then be used as
    an unguarded razor or it may be stropped.  The guard may be separately
    removable, or it may be pivoted or otherwise arranged for movement away
    from the blade edge.

    (1)     Note.  Search should be completed in this class, subclass 54, most
    of the patents therein being arranged so that an unguarded blade edge may
    be provided.

    (2)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 284 and 285.


CLS 30/57
TXT Razors under subclass 51 in which the blade or its holder is pivoted, means
    being provided for securing the blade in stationary position.

    (1)     Note.  The major portion of these patents show but do not claim
    razors of the type in subclasses 38+, of this class, in which subclasses
    the search must be completed.


CLS 30/58
TXT Razors under subclass 51 in which the cap is pivoted to some portion of the
    razor organization and is arranged to swing about its pivots for detachment
    of the blade or other parts.


CLS 30/59
TXT Razors under subclass 58 in which there is a blade having a plurality of
    cutting edges and guard means providing a guard for a plurality of such
    edges.


CLS 30/60
TXT Razors under subclass 59 in which there is provided either or both (a)
    means, other than a mere lever or projection fastened to the cap, to
    operate the cap to cause it to swing about its pivots and (b) structure by
    which the blade edge and guard may be adjusted relative to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for razors of similar construction provided with a single guarded
    edge.


CLS 30/60.5
TXT Razors under subclass 60 in which the cap is formed by a plurality of cap
    members pivoted to the razor.


CLS 30/61
TXT Razors under subclass 58 in which there is provided either or both or (a)
    means, other than a mere lever or projection fastened to the cap, to
    operate the cap to cause it to swing about its pivots and (b) structure by
    which the blade edge and guard may be adjusted relative to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59+,    for razors provided with multiple guards.


CLS 30/62
TXT Razors under subclass 51 in which the blade is positioned in or removed
    from the organization with a simple sliding motion.

    (1)     Note. Compare this class, subclasses 335+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    335,    for other cutlery devices having blades that can be detached by a
    simple sliding motion.


CLS 30/63
TXT Razors under subclass 62 in which means are provided by which the blade
    edge and guard may be adjusted relative to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41+,    for razors provided with waste receiving means.


CLS 30/64
TXT Razors under subclass 62 in which means are provided to hold or lock the
    blade in the position to which it is slid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     for other razors having a lock.


CLS 30/65
TXT Razors under subclass 62 having blades with a plurality of cutting edges,
    at least two of which are guarded.


CLS 30/66
TXT Razors under subclass 51 in which the separable parts are held together by
    means of a slidable member, generally of U-shape.


CLS 30/67
TXT Razors under subclass 51 in which a plurality of hooks engage one edge of
    the blade, the blade being swingable about such hooks as pivots so that an
    opposite edge of the blade may be engaged by some locking device.


CLS 30/68
TXT Razors under subclass 51 in which a bolt extends through the separable
    parts to hold the same together.


CLS 30/69
TXT Razors under subclass 68 in which the bolt is threaded.


CLS 30/70
TXT Razors under subclass 69 having a single blade with a plurality of cutting
    edges, at least two of which are guarded.


CLS 30/71
TXT Razors under subclass 70 in which the blade edge and guard may be adjusted
    relative to each other.


CLS 30/72
TXT Razors under subclass 71 in which the blade may be flexed to provide the
    relative adjustment.


CLS 30/73
TXT Razors under subclass 72 in which structure is provided to maintain at all
    times a definite space between blade edge and guard.


CLS 30/74
TXT Razors under subclass 51 in which the separable parts are held together by
    magnetic force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for razors provided with sharpening means attached by magnetic
    means.


CLS 30/74.1
TXT Razors under subclass 51 involving a blade having a plurality of cutting
    edges and a guard means providing a guard for a plurality of such edges.


CLS 30/75
TXT Subcombinations of devices under subclass 51 claiming the means for
    aligning blade edge and guard.

    (1)     Note.  Substantially all patents having detachable blades and
    guards have some form of aligning means.


CLS 30/76
TXT Subcombinations of devices under subclass 51 claiming means for guarding or
    shielding the corner or end of a sharpened blade edge.


CLS 30/77
TXT Subcombinations of devices under subclass 51 claiming guard structure, per
    se.  The mere specifying of the blade in the claim does not exclude the
    patent from this or indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for razors provided with blade sharpening elements which also act
    as guards.

    48,     for razors having guard structures which provide a blade edge
    inclined to the shaving stroke of the razor.

    286,    for other cutter organizations having guards.


CLS 30/78
TXT Devices under subclass 77 in which the guard is constructed for mounting on
    the blade.


CLS 30/79
TXT Devices under subclass 78 in which structure is provided for adjusting the
    position of the guard relative to the blade edge.


CLS 30/80
TXT Devices under subclass 79 in which the guard has an edge portion of rail
    form.


CLS 30/81
TXT Devices under subclass 77 in which the edge structure, per se, of the guard
    is claimed.


CLS 30/82
TXT Devices under subclass 81 claiming the guard tooth structure.


CLS 30/83
TXT Devices under subclass 81 claiming guard rail structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27      and 80, for similar devices.


CLS 30/84
TXT Subcombinations of devices under subclass 51 claiming modified cap or
    clamping plate structure.


CLS 30/90.1
TXT Device under class definition having a cutter specifically adapted to slice
    through a flexible, strand-encompassing cover of indeterminate length
    without slicing into the encompassed strand.

    (1)     Note.  A rigid conduit into which wires are placed is not
    considered to be a sheath.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92+,    for a device adapted to slice through a rigid conduit.

    286+,   for a device of similar characteristics for cutting material other
    than a sheath.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 9.4+ for a similar device which, in addition to a
    sheath cutter, is provided with means to remove the sheath from the strand.


CLS 30/90.2
TXT Device under subclass 90.1 for cutting a metallic cover which cover is
    formed by a strip(s) wrapped in screw-thread fashion about the encircled
    strand.


CLS 30/90.3
TXT Device under subclass 90.2 including a cutting tool that turns, during the
    cutting operation, about an axis which is not coextensive with the central
    axis of the elongate cover.


CLS 30/90.4
TXT Device under subclass 90.1 wherein the cutter is specifically adapted to
    slice the strand cover in a direction parallel to the centerline of the
    strand.

    (1)     Note.  A device adapted to make a spiral slice in a strand cover is
    not considered to cut longitudinally.


CLS 30/90.6
TXT Device under subclass 90.4 including an additional cutter adapted to slice
    the strand cover in a direction other than parallel to the centerline of
    the strand without slicing the strand.


CLS 30/90.7
TXT Device under subclass 90.4 wherein the cutter is adapted to be used
    alternatively to slice the cover in a direction parallel to the centerline
    of the strand or to slice it in some other direction.


CLS 30/90.8
TXT Device under subclass 90.4 with structure adapted to bear against the cover
    on a surface thereof directly opposite the surface engaged by the cutter so
    that such cover-engaging structure resists movement of the cover away from
    the cutter.


CLS 30/90.9
TXT Device under subclass 90.8 wherein the cover-engaging structure has a
    generally cylindrical periphery and is mounted for rotation so that such
    periphery may roll along the cover.


CLS 30/91.1
TXT Device under subclass 90.8 wherein the cutter is joined to the
    cover-engaging structure by means which permits relative arcuate movement
    between the cutter and the cover-engaging structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91.2,   for similar structure for cutting a sheath other than
    longitudinally.


CLS 30/91.2
TXT Device under subclass 90.1 with structure adapted to bear against the cover
    on a surface thereof directly opposite the surface engaged by the cutter so
    that such cover-engaging structure resists movement of the cover away from
    the cutter, wherein the cutter is joined to the cover-contacting structure
    by means which permits relative arcuate movement between the cutter and the
    cover-engaging structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91.1,   for similar structure wherein the cutter is specifically adapted to
    cut the sheath in a direction parallel to the longitudinal dimension of the
    sheath.


CLS 30/92
TXT Cutting devices and implements, under the class definition specially
    designed for cutting cylindrical pipes or rods and which are supported in
    their entirety by the work and/or manually during the cutting operation.

    (1)     Note.  Cutting tools adapted for this purpose but of more general
    application will be found in the structure subclasses of this class.

    (2)     Note.  In the above definition the term "work" may include work
    parts adjacent to the pipe or rod, e.g., a boiler head carrying pipes, or
    one of the several pipes forming a boiler.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 70+ for disclosure of tube cutting and
    flaring.

    81,     Tools, particularly subclasses 300+ for tool-jaw(s) positioned by
    relatively movable plural handles (e.g., pliers).

    82,     Turning, subclasses 46+ for cut-off devices wherein the work
    rotates.

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses for pipe, rod, or tube cutters
    which are neither supported in their entirety by the work nor manually
    supported during the cutting operation.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 55+ for apparatus for cutting and perforating
    apparatus which operates on well pipe in situ.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 2+ for a device for
    firing a bullet or exploding a shaped charge in an inaccessible bore to
    penetrate the earth formation or perforate or cut a tubular casing or other
    wall member in the bore.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, appropriate
    subclasses, for cutting of screw threads of tubular or rod-like work by a
    rotating, axially moving tool having no additional motion during operation;
    especially subclass 28, for means for cutting in the manner of that class
    (408) combined with means for cutting tubular orrod-like work to length in
    the manner of this class (30).

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, subclasses 183+ for implements for cutting threads except as
    provided for in Class 408.  See the note  below.


CLS 30/92.5
TXT Device under subclass 92 specifically adapted to cut the cylindrical member
    (pipe or rod) in a direction parallel to the centerline of the member.


CLS 30/93
TXT Cutters under subclass 92 in which the cutting element is rotated relative
    to the pipe or rod.


CLS 30/94
TXT Cutters under subclass 93 in which the cutting element is rotated about the
    exterior of the tube or rod.


CLS 30/95
TXT Cutters under subclass 94 in which the cutter completely encircles the pipe
    or rod.


CLS 30/96
TXT Cutters under subclass 95 in which means is provided for clamping a part of
    the cutter to the pipe or rod and on which the part carrying the cutter
    rotates.


CLS 30/97
TXT Cutters under subclass 96 in which the cutter element is rotated about the
    pipe by means of some rotary power source such as a motor or hand operated
    crank.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400,    for motor driven can openers.


CLS 30/98
TXT Cutters under subclass 96 in which the cutter element is moved by a pawl
    and ratchet mechanism.


CLS 30/99
TXT Cutters under subclass 95 in which the cutter element is moved by a pawl
    and ratchet mechanism.


CLS 30/100
TXT Cutters under subclass 95 in which the pipe or rod encircling structure is
    in the form of a plurality of chain-like links.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 65.2+ for flexible link wrenches.


CLS 30/101
TXT Cutters under subclass 95 in which the cutting element is in the form of a
    rotatable disc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    347,    for rotary blades, per se, for use in tools found in this class.


CLS 30/102
TXT Cutters under subclass 94 in which the cutting element is in the form of a
    rotatable disc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    347,    for rotary blades, per se, and see the notes thereunder for other
    rotary blade cutters.


CLS 30/103
TXT Cutters under subclass 93 in which the cutter element is rotated internally
    of the pipe.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclass 55.8.


CLS 30/104
TXT Cutters under subclass 103 in which the cutter element is pivoted
    eccentrically of the tool axis.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is to be distinguished from subclass 108 of
    this class, where the cutter element is mounted on a pivoted lever but not
    pivoted eccentrically of the tool axis.


CLS 30/105
TXT Cutters under subclass 103 in which the cutter element is slidably
    projected to working position.


CLS 30/106
TXT Cutters under subclass 105 in which a wedge is provided for projecting the
    cutter element to its cutting position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclass 55.3.


CLS 30/107
TXT Cutters under subclass 106 in which screw means is provided  to move the
    wedge.


CLS 30/108
TXT Cutters under subclass 103 in which the cutter element is mounted on a
    pivoted lever.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is to be distinguished from subclass 104, in
    this class, where the cutter element is pivoted eccentrically of the tool
    axis.


CLS 30/109
TXT Cutting devices and implements specially constructed for cutting the tips
    of cigars.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the patents in this and indented subclasses have
    receptacles for catching the clippings and in many patents the cutting is
    done by a shearing action.  For other cutters with material holders, see
    this class, subclasses 124+ and for shears of general application, see
    subclasses 194+.

    (3)     Note.  Cigar tip cutters combined with other things and tools other
    than cutlery will be found in Classes 7, Compound Tools, appropriate
    subclass and 131, Tobacco, subclasses 233 and 248+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124,    and see (1) Note, above.

    142,    for cigar tip cutters combined with other cutlery implements.

    194,    and see (1) Note, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, and see (3) Note, above.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 461 for advertising
    devices provided with cigar end cutters in which the operation of the
    cutter controls the actuation of the advertising device.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 635, 636, and 643 for
    cutting the end from food.

    131,    Tobacco, and see (3) Note, above.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 238+ for a tobacco
    product package combined with cutting means.


CLS 30/110
TXT Cutters under subclass 109 in which the cutter element is driven from a
    rotary power source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400+,   and the notes thereunder, for motor driven cutting tools generally.


CLS 30/111
TXT Cutters under subclass 109 in which the cutter is hand held and manipulated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    234+.


CLS 30/112
TXT Cutters under subclass 111 in which the cutting blade is pivoted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244+.


CLS 30/113
TXT Cutters under subclass 111 in which the cutting blade reciprocates during
    the cutting operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241+.


CLS 30/113.1
TXT Device under class definition including a cutting implement constructed to
    disconnect, divide, or otherwise disunite that portion of food that is
    located in and around the geometrical center of the food (e.g., the "stone"
    in a peach) from the rest of the food.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 547 for machines which
    remove a core-pit.


CLS 30/113.2
TXT Device under subclass 113.1 including two co-operating core-pit removing
    members which are mounted on hinges or flexible portions of the implement
    so that they can be made to approach one another during the core-pit
    removing operation.


CLS 30/113.3
TXT Device under subclass 113.1 including a core-pit remover combined with some
    other structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123,    for other combinations, and see Note (5) for other places to search.


CLS 30/114
TXT Cutting devices and implements specially designed to cut segments from
    cylindrical material, such as pies and cakes.

    (1)     Note.  The cutters may be attached to an ordinary baking pan and
    have gages to gage the size of the segment.

    (2)     Note.  For such gages, per se, see Class 33, Geometrical
    Instruments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302,    for combined segmenters and corers.


CLS 30/115
TXT Cutters specially designed for cutting plastic materials.

    (1)     Note.  Traveling roller cutters, radiating or crossed blade
    cutters, and annular blade cutters which may be used for cutting dough,
    will be found in this class, subclasses 128, 130, 292, 301+, 303, 316, and
    319.

    (2)     Note.  Plastic material cutters which are not hand manipulable or
    have structure for performing functions other than mere cutting, will be
    found in Class 425, Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:
    Apparatus, subclasses 289+ for molding apparatus for plastic material
    combined with preform severing means; (see the search notes thereunder).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, subclasses 93+ for a hand device
    that penetrates, and then breaks apart light textured, fluffy foods, such
    as cakes and breads.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 168+ for
    dividing or mashing light-textured or fluffy foods.


CLS 30/116
TXT Cutters under subclass 115 in which the cutting element is in the form of a
    wire or wires.


CLS 30/117
TXT Cutters under subclass 116 in which a plurality of cutting elements of wire
    are provided.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    299+,   and the notes thereunder, for other plural blade cutters.


CLS 30/118
TXT Cutting implements specially constructed to cut buttonholes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses and especially subclass 905 for an
    art collection of machines for cutting buttonholes.

    112,    Sewing, subclass 68 for sewing machines for making buttonholes and
    also having cutting features.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 2+.


CLS 30/119
TXT Cutting implements under subclass 118 in which a cutter is provided to cut
    a hole at the end of the buttonhole slit.


CLS 30/120
TXT Cutting implements under subclass 118 in which the edges of two cooperating
    blades move past and in substantial contact with each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194+,   for other shears.


CLS 30/120.1
TXT Device under class definition including a sharp- edged, pointed, blunt or
    other stress applying member for severing, piercing or fracturing a friable
    outer covering  of food.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 498 and 568+ for shell
    breaking machines.

    452,    Butchering, subclass 17 for a hand tool for opening bivalves.


CLS 30/120.2
TXT Device under subclass 120.1 especially adapted to fracture the shell of a
    nut.


CLS 30/120.3
TXT Device under subclass 120.2 having two stress applying members and a pivot
    about which the members may rotate towards each other.


CLS 30/120.4
TXT Device under subclass 120.3 having more than one point about which parts
    rotate or a point which is positionable  relative to other parts of the
    device.


CLS 30/120.5
TXT Device under subclass 120.2 having at least one movable stress applying
    member which member is moved by another  member which rotates about a pivot
    point.


CLS 30/121
TXT Cutting implements especially designed for cutting or scraping the bark
    from trees or logs or for grooving the same.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280     and 317, for similar tools.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 208.1 for a machine for crossing bark.


CLS 30/121.5
TXT Device under class definition having an edge that engages the
    circumferential periphery of the cob portion of an ear of corn and scrapes
    the kernels from the cob by relative movement between it and the ear of
    corn in the direction of  the longitudinal axis of the ear.


CLS 30/122
TXT Implements in which the parts are relatively movable or interchangeable to
    convert the implement from one cutlery implement within the class
    definition to another such implement.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is to be distinguished from subclasses 142+,
    where cutlery implements are combined, i.e., each implement always retains
    its distinctive characteristics.

    (2)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 31 and 203.

    (3)     Note.  Where the implement is convertible from a cutlery implement
    into some other noncutlery implement, search should be made in Classes 7,
    Compound Tools, and 81, Tools, subclasses 181+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 54 for
    convertible hand forks and shovels.


CLS 30/123
TXT Cutlery implements combined with other structure, except as otherwise
    provided for.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 200+ for hair clippers combined
    with a cut regulator.

    (2)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 34.05+ for razors combined with
    other structure, and appropriate subclasses below, for cutters with guards
    or guides or with supports.

    (3)     Note. Cutters combined with motive power, such as motors, have been
    placed elsewhere in this class.  See subclasses 400+, and the notes
    thereunder.

    (4)     Note. See Class 7, Compound Tools, appropriate subclass, for
    cutlery implements combined with some other non-cutlery tool provided both
    such tools are not classified in the same class.

    (5)     Note.  Search the following classes for cutters combined with other
    structure for performing an additional function within the definition of
    the noted class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, and see (4) Note above.

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclass 103.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 105+.

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, appropriate subclasses, especially
    subclass 628.

    42,     Firearms, subclasses 53 for pistol swords; 86 for bayonets, and 90,
    for wire cutters combined with guns or bayonets.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, appropriate subclasses.

    56,     Harvesters, especially subclasses 324+, 327.1+, 328.1+, and 400.05+.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclass 20.

    81,     Tools, subclasses 9.3, 9.4+, 13, 15.2+, and 181+ for hand tools
    having a cutting device combined with a specific type of work manipulating
    means.

    86,     Ammunition and Explosive-Charge  Making, subclasses 21+.

    114,    Ships, especially subclasses 221+.

    131,    Tobacco, especially subclasses, 233+, 248+, and 253+.

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 75.4 and 75.5.

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclass 66.

    140,    Wireworking, subclasses 123 and123.6.

    168,    Farriery, subclasses 45+.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, particularly subclasses 5,
    21+, 24, 29, 30, 31+, 40, and 41+ for cutters for plants or plant parts
    combined with machines for unearthing such plants or plant parts.

    172,    Earth Working, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 133+
    and 371+ for cutting tools which work the earth combined with other types
    of earth working tools.

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 278 for can openers combined with claimed
    structure for fastening the opener to the can so that the cutters may be
    capable of repeated use as a closure for the opening formed thereby.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 30+ for article dispensing means not
    otherwise provided for having cutting or punching means combined therewith
    for cutting the supply container or the wrapper therefor.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 5 and 80+ for fluent material and gas
    dispensing means with cutting or punching means for material or containers.

    225,    Severing by Tearing Or Breaking, subclasses 7 and 94+.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclass 21 for combined
    apparatus for driving a member; e.g., nail, into work and means for cutting
    the work or member, see "Search This Class, Subclass", thereunder for other
    loci of the above combination in Class 227.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 120.011+ and
    308 for a box or envelope combined with a cutter and subclass 401 for a cup
    with an attached spoon.

    289,    Knots and Knot Tying, subclass 17.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 2 and 51.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, appropriate
    subclasses.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclass 52 for a cutlery
    device combined with, or attachable to, a pencil; and subclass 195 for such
    a device combined with, or attachable to, a pen.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus - see (41) under class
    definition of Class 30.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, appropriate
    subclasses, for cutting of screw threads on tubular or rod-like work by a
    rotating, axially moving tool having no additional motion during operation;
    especially subclass 28 for means for cutting in the manner of that class
    (408) combined with means for cutting tubular orrod-like work to length in
    the manner of this class (30).

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    subclasses 289+ for a preform severing means combined with a shaping or
    reshaping apparatus for plastic material, especially subclass 292 for a
    pie-type crimper and trimmer.

    452,    Butchering, appropriate subclasses.

    463,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclass 47.4 for police clubs combined
    with cutters.


CLS 30/123.3
TXT Implement under subclass 123 provided with means secured thereto for
    supplying a liquid medium to the implement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 169 for a cutting machine having means to direct
    a lubricant to the tool or work.


CLS 30/123.4
TXT Implement under subclass 123.3 including a plurality of cutter elements
    pivotally interconnected, one with another,  forming a closed loop, said
    loop being wrapped about guide  means, and wherein said liquid supply means
    supplies a  friction reducing substance to said cutter elements or  guide
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 830+ for a cutter assemblage or cutter element
    therefor; e.g., for a chain saw chain, per se.


CLS 30/123.5
TXT Device under subclass 123 constructed to remove from the rest of an article
    of food, that portion of the outer  periphery of the article of food that
    is dissimilar with  respect to the inner portion in at least one of the
    following respects: color, consistency, density, firmness, flexibility,
    hardness, texture or toughness.


CLS 30/123.6
TXT Device under subclass 123.5 in which there are at least two food-contacting
    portions, the position of one of which can  be varied with respect to the
    other.


CLS 30/123.7
TXT Device under subclass 123.5 in which there is at least one cutter which
    consists of two cutting edges that intersect at an acute angle.


CLS 30/124
TXT Cutlery implements combined with means to hold or dispose of material to be
    cut, being cut or which has been cut.

    (1)     Note.  This group includes cutlery implements with a receptacle in
    the handle for holding material, for which see this class, subclass 125.

    (2)     Note.  This group also includes means to grip the material being
    cut before, during or after it is cut, for which see this class, especially
    subclasses 134+.

    (3)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 40, 41, 535, and 537.

    (4)     Note.  Many cigar tip cutters in this class, subclasses 109+, have
    means for catching the clippings.

    (5)     Note.  Compare Class 56, Harvesters, subclasses 324+, 327.1+ and
    328.1+.  Fruit picking cutters which have means for merely gripping the
    stem of the fruit being cut are in Class 30 while cutters with baskets,
    chutes, etc., are in Class 56.

    (6)     Note.  See Class 229, Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes,
    appropriate subclasses, for paper receptacles combined with spoons or
    having spoons formed integrally with a portion of the receptacle structure,
    particularly subclasses 8, 401, and 800.

    (7)     Note.  See Class 294, Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements,
    subclasses 50.6+ for hand shovels or similar blade-like members having
    means coacting with the shovel or blade member to retain a load therein or
    thereon.  The line between these classes is that the grippers in this class
    act to hold the material independently of the cutting blade.

    (8)     Note.  Search Class 7, Compound Tools, subclasses 114+ for cutters
    combined with hand operable beet lifters or beet pullers.

    (9)     Note.  Search Class 83, Cutting, subclasses 649+ for all patents
    including a cutting tool and means to support a reserve supply of work in
    which the work supply is in the form of a web or strand wrapped upon itself
    and the supply is supported for rotation upon an axis.  Note that the usual
    lines between this class (30) and Class 83 do not apply in this situation.
    (See the third paragraph under III A in the definition of Class 83).  A
    patent directed to the same type work supply means combined with a breaking
    or tearing, as distinguished from a cutting tool, will be found in Class
    225.

    (10)    Note.  Search Class 225, Severing by Tearing or Breaking, for
    patents including a tearing edge or a breaking device and means to support
    a reserve supply of work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    410,    for can openers combined with means for holding the lid that is
    being severed to prevent it from dropping into the can.


CLS 30/125
TXT Cutlery implements having receptacles in their handles for holding material.

    (1)     Note.  Includes salt and pepper shakers when forming the handle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40      and 535.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 110.5 and the notes thereto
    appended for handles which also serve as receptacles.


CLS 30/127
TXT Cutters combined with means to hold or guide the strand of twine or thread
    to be cut.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, subclass 55 for a fixed-blade
    carrier slidably supported on running length work in which the work is
    manually forced against the blade edge for severing.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 125+ for guides for
    bobbins and spools.


CLS 30/128
TXT Cutlery implements combined with means to eject or strip the material from
    the implement and/or the material holder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 50+ for
    strippers for hand forks and shovels.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 282+ for a shaping means of the ice-cream scoop type combined
    with product release means, especially subclasses 284+ for such apparatus
    including a movable blade.


CLS 30/129
TXT Implements under subclass 128 in which the implement is a culinary or table
    fork.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322+,   for such forks without a stripper.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 400.08+ for rakes with cleaning or stripping
    members.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 50 for fork or
    shovel implements with cleaning means.


CLS 30/130
TXT Implements under subclass 128 in which the implement is an annular cutter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301     and 316, for annular cutters, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 50.5 for
    annular fork or shovel implements with clearing  means.


CLS 30/131
TXT Implements under subclass 124 in which the implement is in the form of a
    shear, i.e., plural cooperating blade edges move past and in substantial
    contact to perform the cutting operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194+,   for shears, per se.

    233.5,  and see the Notes thereto for shears combined with hair combs where
    the comb comprises a guide, guard or gauge for the material being cut.


CLS 30/132
TXT Implements under subclass 131 in which the implement has a plurality of
    positions for simultaneously cutting material at all such positions.
    Usually a plurality of fingers are provided for guiding the material into
    position to be cut.

    (1)     Note.  These are of the type usually designated hair clippers or
    hedge trimmers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196+,   for other shears of this type.


CLS 30/133
TXT Implements under subclass 132 in which the material is drawn away from the
    cutter by suction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.5    for fluid current disposal means combined with razors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 300.1+ for
    devices for the purpose of dislodging and/or removing up wanted foreign
    material from a work piece or work surface by contact with a draft of air,
    steam, or equivalent gaseous fluid.


CLS 30/134
TXT Implements under subclass 131 in which the material, usually a fruit stem,
    wire, tree branch or twine, is gripped, usually between two jaws on the
    cutting blade.

    (1)     Note.  In some patents one blade enters a slot in the other so as
    to wedge the wire, etc., between the first blade and one wall of the slot.
    For similar structure, search should be made in this class, subclass 258.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 328.1+ for other fruit pickers having means
    other than a mere gripping means for catching the fruit.


CLS 30/135
TXT Implements under subclass 134 in which the blades are spring urged to open
    position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261+.


CLS 30/136
TXT Implements under subclass 124 in which the material holder is applied to a
    knife or scraper.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 51 for hand
    implements in which a scraper or chipper is combined with a scoop or shovel
    adapted for use apart from the scraper or chipper.


CLS 30/136.5
TXT Implements under subclass 136, in which (1) the material holder comprises a
    receptacle provided with a closure, or (2) the knife or scraper is provided
    with means to support a material holder which is removable from the support
    for use.

    (1)     Note.  Most of the implements in this group are ice shavers or
    scrapers provided with means to receive and hold the removed ice.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128,    for implements of the above defined type, in which the holder
    closure is combined with means to eject the material from the holder.

    164.5+, for ice picks and chippers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making subclasses 513+ for cutting machines provided with
    supports for portable receptacles.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 200+ and the notes thereunder, for
    receptacles provided with closures.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 51 for similar
    devices in which the chipper or shaver is combined with a scoop or shovel
    adapted for use apart from the chipper or scraper.


CLS 30/137
TXT Implements under subclass 124 in which the material holder is applied to a
    culinary or table fork.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322,    for other forks.


CLS 30/138
TXT Implements under subclass 123 in which a cutter is combined with means to
    sharpen the cutter or with means to facilitate sharpening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35+,    for a razor with means to facilitate sharpening the blade thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclass 38.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 283 for magnetic cutting blade sharpeners where
    the cutting edge is held in contact with a magnetic pole piece.

    451,    Abrading, particularly subclasses 28+ for a process of abrading and
    subclasses 64+ for an abrading machine.


CLS 30/139
TXT Implements under subclass 138 in which the sharpener consists of a rotary
    sharpening element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 420+ for an attachment to a cutting device to
    sharpen the blade thereof, which attachment uses a rotary abrading tool.


CLS 30/140
TXT Implements under subclass 123 in which a cutter is combined with means to
    heat the same.

    (1)     Note.  See Classes 126, Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 226+ and
    401+; and 219, Electric Heating, subclasses 221+ for heated tools in
    general.  The general line is that where significant structure of the
    cutting tools is claimed other than a mere modification thereof, for the
    purpose of applying the heater, tool will be found in Class 30 and the
    heater plus the mere application thereof to a cutter will be found with the
    heating classes.


CLS 30/141
TXT Spoons combined with fluid conductors. Usually the conduit runs through the
    handle and it may or may not communicate with the bowl of the spoon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324+,   for other spoons.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 33, and see the
    notes thereto for fluid conductors designed to be carried around by the
    user and to be applied to a fluid source of supply for drinking purposes.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 277 for an ice-cream scoop or plugger having a shaping cavity and
    including integral heat exchange means.


CLS 30/142
TXT Combined implements in which one cutlery implement is combined with another
    such implement.

    (1)     Note.  This group of subclasses is to be distinguished from
    subclass 122 of this class, where one cutlery implement is changeable into
    another such implement, but not combined.

    (2)     Note.  Where two or more of the same type of cutlery are combined,
    they will be found in this class with that particular type.  See especially
    subclasses 152, 176, 197, 226+, 279.2, 287, 299+, and 412.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34.05,  for razors combined with other cutlery.

    90.6,   for a first cutter means for cutting a strand-encircling sheath in
    a longitudinal direction combined with a second cutter means for cutting
    the sheath in another direction.

    408,    for can openers combined with other cutlery.


CLS 30/143
TXT Implements under subclass 142 in which the various implements or some of
    them are foldable or otherwise retractable into the handle or have some
    other form of sheath to protect the blades when not in use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154,    and the notes thereunder, for other sheathed cutlery.


CLS 30/144
TXT Hand manipulated implements in which a saw is combined with some other form
    of cutter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166.3+, and the notes thereunder, for saws, per se.


CLS 30/145
TXT Hand implements having at least two sets of cutters, one of which is in the
    form of two cooperating blades having edges which meet to perform the
    cutting operation, and the other is in the form of two cooperating blades
    having edges which move past and in substantial contact with each other to
    perform the cutting operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176,    197 and 226+.


CLS 30/146
TXT Hand implements in which two cooperating blades having edges which move
    past and in substantial contact with each other to perform the cutting
    operation are combined with a knife blade.


CLS 30/147
TXT Knives, culinary forks and spoons combined in one implement.


CLS 30/148
TXT Knives and culinary forks combined in one implement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147,    for knives, culinary forks and spoons combined in one implement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, subclass 115 for pitch forks combined with cutters.


CLS 30/149
TXT Knives and spoons combined in one implement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147,    for knives, culinary forks and spoons combined in one implement.


CLS 30/150
TXT Culinary forks and spoons combined in one implement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147,    for knives, culinary forks and spoons combined in one implement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 51.


CLS 30/151
TXT Cutlery implements which are foldable or otherwise retractable into the
    handle or have some other form of sheath to protect the blade while not in
    use.

    (1)     Note.  Pocket knives are in this group.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143     and 90.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, subclasses 118+ and 167+ for sheathed compound
    tools.  The line is as follows:  Class 30 takes pocket tools showing and
    claiming handles for cutlery implements or showing cutlery and other tools
    but claiming only features limited to cutlery.  Class 7 takes patents
    showing and claiming cutlery implements combined with other implements and
    handles for tools showing cutlery implements and other tools.

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 110.5 for handles which include in
    the handle structure a storage cavity or other receptacle.

    81,     Tools, subclass 3.35 for sheathed receptacle closure removing tools
    and subclasses 177.2 and 177.6 for a wrench having a portion which is
    foldable or retractable into the handle.

    132,    Toilet, subclass 143 for hair combs combined with a teeth guard or
    sheath, subclass 76.2 for manicure tools where a portion of the device is
    folded, withdrawn, or otherwise sheathed when not in use, including
    sheaths,per se, subclasses 286+ for toilet kits, and subclasses 328+ for
    tooth picks in which the tooth engaging part of the tool is folded, slid or
    retracted into the handle when not in use.


CLS 30/152
TXT Implements under subclass 151 in which the handle or sheath is specially
    designed to sheathe a plurality of cutlery implements of the same or
    unspecified nature.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is not intended to take patents where a
    plurality of blades are provided either at opposite ends or at the same end
    when this amounts to a mere duplication, but some structure must be
    claimed, e.g., a division plate, etc., which limits the invention to a
    plural blade tool.

    (2)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 299+, and the notes thereunder,
    for other plural blade tools.

    (3)     Note.  Where a plurality of blades are provided but different
    characters of implements are specified, they will be found in this class,
    subclass 143, or in Class 7, Compound Tools, subclasses 118+ and 167+.


CLS 30/153
TXT Implements under subclass 151 in which the sheath, usually the handle, has
    pivoted parts whereby it may be folded over the blade to protect it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255     and 330+.


CLS 30/154
TXT Implements under subclass 151 in which the blade has more than one simple
    movement, such as pivoting or reciprocating, in being moved into or from
    retracted position in the sheath or handle.


CLS 30/155
TXT Implements under subclass 151 in which the blade is pivoted to the sheath
    or handle so as to be folded into the sheath or handle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258,    where a pivoted shear blade moves into a slot in the second blade
    during the cutting operation.

    321,    and the notes thereto.

    527,    for razor handles pivotally connected to blade, especially subclass
    528 for blades extending longitudinally to the handle, where the blade is
    designed to fold into the sheath or handle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    132,    Toilet, subclass 76.2.


CLS 30/156
TXT Implements under subclass 155 in which the blade is detachable from the
    sheath or handle or from a separate holder.

    (1)     Note.  For unsheathed detachable blade knives, see this class,
    subclasses 329+ and Class 279, Chucks or Sockets, appropriate subclasses.


CLS 30/157
TXT Implements under subclass 156 in which the blade has an end tang which is
    detachably connected to the sheath or handle.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 236 and 260.


CLS 30/158
TXT Implements under subclass 155 in which means is provided for positively
    moving the blade from the sheath, either partially or wholly.

    (1)     Note.  Does not include mere nicks in the blade to be engaged by
    the finger nail or some pointed instrument for the purpose of opening the
    blade.


CLS 30/159
TXT Implements under subclass 158 in which a spring is provided for projecting
    the blade from its sheath or handle.


CLS 30/160
TXT Implements under subclass 156 in which means is provided to lock or latch
    the blade either in closed or open position or both.

    (1)     Note.  Practically all the patents in this class, subclass 159,
    show blade locking means and search should be continued there.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161.


CLS 30/161
TXT Implements under subclass 155 in which means is provided to lock or latch
    the blade either in open or closed position, or both.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159     and 160.


CLS 30/162
TXT Implements under subclass 151 in which the blade may be slid to or from
    retracted position in the sheath or handle.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is to be distinguished from subclass 320 of
    this class, which takes patents in which structure is provided to hold the
    blade in a plurality of positions intermediate the retracted and open
    position, whereas in this subclass the blade is either wholly retracted or
    wholly open.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 99+ for an
    implement including a coating tool with material supply which is slidably
    projectable and retractable between an exposed and a concealed position.


CLS 30/163
TXT Implements under subclass 162 in which when the implement is held in a
    vertical position and a latch released, the blade will drop by gravity to
    extended position from the sheath or handle.


CLS 30/164
TXT Elements, such as handles, scales, linings, etc., limited by structure to
    use with sheathed cutlery.

    (1)     Note.  Elements limited to a particular type of sheathed cutlery
    will be found in the appropriate subclass in this class.

    (2)     Note.  Handles and blades of more general utility will be found in
    this class, subclasses 340+ and 346+.

    (3)     Note.  Elements and accessories of other cutlery will be found in
    this class with the particular type.  See especially subclass 537, except
    where not limited to any type, for which see subclass 1.


CLS 30/164.5
TXT Implements of the type especially adapted for picking or chipping ice or
    similar hard material, not provided for elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  Most of these implements are provided with sharp points for
    engaging the material as distinguished from a cutting edge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    for ice picks or chippers provided with a plurality of blades
    adapted for interchangeable use.

    124,    for ice picks and chippers provided with means to hold the removed
    ice.

    136+,   for ice shavers or scrapers provided with means to receive and hold
    the removed ice.

    164.9,  for pointed scratching implements.

    142,    for implements having a plurality of ice picking, chipping or
    shaving portions.

    151+,   for ice picks and chippers provided with means to sheath the
    operating part of the implement.

    366+,   for pointed perforating or indenting implements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, for ice picks or chippers combined with other
    tools, one of which is not of the type provided for in Class 30, Cutlery,
    particularly subclass 158 for ice handling tongs combined with ice picks or
    chippers.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 236.01+ for
    hand manipulable scrapers for cleaning ice coatings from miscellaneous
    objects.

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 478+ for a hand operated plane.

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 266+ for hand manipulable scrapers for
    removing ice from pavements and analogous surfaces.

    125,    Stone Working, appropriate subclasses, for machines for trimming,
    scoring or splitting ice blocks and subclass 36 for implements limited by
    structure to use as splitters or scorers or cutters combined with splitters
    for ice.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 18 for means to bore a
    hole in ice.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses, for machines for comminuting ice by shaving or crushing.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 61 for pointed
    implements for impaling articles for the purpose of handling, subclass 51
    for ice chippers or scrapers combined with material handling means such as
    scoop or shovel, subclass 54 for shovels combined with scrapers or chippers
    for removing ice from pavements, et cetera.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 24+
    for a machine or cutter specifically adapted to work ice in situ.


CLS 30/164.6
TXT Implements under subclass 164.5 in which there is provided means to impart
    a blow to the operating portion of the pick or chipper to effect movement
    thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277,    for cutting tools provided with impact blade moving means.


CLS 30/164.7
TXT Implements under subclass 164.5 in which there is provided (1) means to
    guide the operating part of the chipper or pick in a predetermined relation
    to the ice, or (2) a guard to control the movement of the removed ice.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124+,   for ice picks or chippers provided with means to hold the removed
    ice particles.

    162+,   for ice picks or chippers provided with means to sheath the pick
    member which means may constitute a guide therefor while in use.

    286+,   for cutting tools provided with guards or guides.


CLS 30/164.8
TXT Implements under subclass 164.5 in which the portion of the ice pick or
    chipper which operates on the ice comprises a plurality of points or edges.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172,    279.2, 287, and 299+, for cutting tools provided with plural blades
    or cutting edges.


CLS 30/164.9
TXT Devices under the class definition for marking by means of a point or
    cutting edge.

    (1)     Note.  These devices are often called scoring tools, scribers, or
    scratch awls.

    (2)     Note.  A patent for a brush having glass bristles for scratching,
    and thereby erasing indicia from, a surface will be placed in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164.5,  for ice picks.

    366+,   for pointed perforating or indenting implements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 435+ for
    dip-pen type marking devices.

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 18.1+ for marking devices
    combined with structure to make a geometrical instrument.

    81,     Tools, subclass 9.2 for an indenting or a manifolding stylus (i.e.,
    respectively, one which makes an impression by grooving without removing
    material; or by transfer to an underlying surface); and subclass 9.21 for a
    stamp scarifier.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 879+ for machines and/or processes of scoring
    material; see the "Search Notes" under subclass 6 for other classes
    providing for scoring of material.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, appropriate subclasses,
    for a marking device with material supply; e.g., subclasses 49+ for a
    pencil.


CLS 30/164.95
TXT Device under subclass 164.9 wherein the marking means comprises a disk
    having a cutting edge on the radially outer periphery thereof and turnable
    about its central axis during operation, which disk is driven by frictional
    engagement with the workpiece.

    (1)     Note. Many of the patents in this subclass are particularly adapted
    to mark hard glass or hard glass-like material.  See Class 65, Glass
    Manufacturing, subclass 112 and the collection of notes thereunder for
    glassworking or treating combined with cutting.


CLS 30/165
TXT This is the generic subclass for hand manipulated cutting tool of general
    utility not provided for in the subclasses below.

    (1)     Note.  An organized cutter must be claimed to cause classification
    in this or the indented subclasses.  Inventions within the class definition
    but which may be applied to cutters, spoons, or forks, are placed in
    subclass 1 as are subcombinations not provided for in subclasses 340+ and
    346+.

    (2)     Note.  Where the invention resides solely in the material from
    which the cutting tool is made, it will be found in this class, subclass
    345.

    (3)     Note.  For cutters limited to a special use, see this class,
    subclasses 2-121.

    (4)     Note.  For convertible cutlery, see this class, subclass 122.

    (5)     Note.  For combined cutlery and cutlery combined with other things,
    see this class, subclasses 123+ and the notes thereunder.

    (6)     Note.  For sheathed cutlery, see this class, subclasses 151+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 28.11 for a hand-manipulable
    pencil-sharpening device including a cutter and a work holder or guide
    relatively movable thereto so as to facilitate the sharpening operation.


CLS 30/166.3
TXT Saw:

    Cutting tool under subclass 165, including a blade carrying a set of
    cutting teeth, adapted to cut relatively hard material, e.g., wood or metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144,    for the combination of a saw with a distinct cutlery device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses 55+ for a saw adapted for
    use in fiber preparation.

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 202 for an indicating gauge for
    use with a saw.

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclasses 25.1+ for a method
    or apparatus for making a saw.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 13+ for a method of cutting, generally,
    including cutting with a saw; appropriate subclasses for apparatus for
    cutting, generally, with a base mounted machine, especially subclasses 835+
    for a saw blade, per se, or the component parts thereof.

    125,    Stone Working, subclasses 12+ for the method or apparatus for
    sawing stone.

    128,    Surgery, appropriate subclasses for method or apparatus for sawing
    in the inspection or treatment of diseases or abnormal conditions of the
    body of a man or of a lower animal.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 1.1+ for the method of shaping wood,
    generally, particularly for the method of sawing wood and appropriate other
    subclasses for apparatus for cutting wood, generally, with a saw mounted on
    a fixed base not provided for elsewhere, particularly for sawing to give a
    desired surface configuration to a workpiece and for combined woodworking
    operations.  Note especially subclasses 8, 18, 35.1+, 48.1+, 189, and those
    subclasses under the title "cutters".

    147,    Coopering, appropriate subclasses for the method or apparatus of
    using a saw in making a barrel.

    452,    Butchering, subclasses 160+ for carcasses splitting saws.


CLS 30/167
TXT Chisel:

    Device under subclass 165 including an elongated shank having a cutting
    edge at one end.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    125,    Stone Working, subclasses 40+ for an impact-driven tool adapted to
    cut stone or a stone-like material.

    144,    Woodworking, for a chiseling machine.


CLS 30/167.1
TXT Compound:

    Device under subclass 167 having two or more cutting edges.


CLS 30/167.2
TXT With gauge:

    Device under subclass 167 including a member adapted to either limit depth
    of cut or measure a dimension.


CLS 30/168
TXT Cutting tools under subclass 165 commonly known as cold chisels for cutting
    metal in a cold state.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is not intended to take tools intended for use
    with organized machines such as are not hand manipulable under the class
    definition.

    (2)     Note.  Compare this class subclass 277.

    (3)     Note.  For other chisels attention is directed to the following
    classes:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclass 28.

    125,    Stone Working, subclass 41.

    142,    Wood Turning, subclasses 21, 35 and 42+.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 75+ for a chiseling machine.

    147,    Coopering, subclass 39.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, appropriate subclasses for subject
    matter directed to driving or impacting a tool or the like, and
    particularly subclasses 90+ for an impacting device adapted to drive a cold
    chisel.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 69+
    and 100.


CLS 30/169
TXT Cutting tools under subclass 165 in which the blade edge or the blade edges
    are so formed and so related to the handle that the tool is especially
    adapted to be moved over a single surface and/or a plurality of adjacent or
    contiguous surfaces to remove material from such surface or surfaces by a
    scraping action of the edge or edges of the tool.

    (1)     Note.  Cutting tools having a more general cutting function will be
    found in the structure subclasses of this class, even though called
    scrapers.

    (2)     Note.  Cutting tools with single movable blades, even though called
    "scrapers", will be found in this class, subclasses 272.1+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136,    for scrapers with means to catch the material, and subclasses 329+
    for holders for detachable scraping blades.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, subclass 124 for a scraper, used for erasing,
    combined with a burnishing tool which restores the disturbed area to smooth
    condition.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, appropriate subclass,
    under subclasses 104.001+ for special scraping implements and for scrapers
    combined with other general cleaning implements, and subclass 236.01 for
    scraping tools for a general cleaning purpose.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 458 for a putty-type knife compressing a hand movable, substrate
    traversing, plural dimension shaping means.

    452,    Butchering, subclasses 102+ for scraping implements specialized for
    use in the butchering art.


CLS 30/170
TXT Scrapers under subclass 169 in which the implement is provided with wheels
    whereby it can be more readily drawn over the surface to be scraped.


CLS 30/171
TXT Scrapers under subclass 169 in which the blade is set at a substantial
    angle to the handle somewhat in the manner of an ordinary hoe so that the
    blade can be pulled over the surface to be scraped to perform the scraping
    action.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 317, and the notes thereunder, for
    other pull cutters.


CLS 30/172
TXT Scrapers under subclass 169 which are provided with more than one blade.
    Usually all of the blades are operative at the same time.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 299+ and the notes thereunder,
    for other plural blade cutting tools.

    (2)     Note.  Single scraper blades having plural edges are not here, but
    are in subclass 169 or other appropriate indented subclasses.


CLS 30/173
TXT Cutting tools in which two or more blades cooperate to perform the cutting
    operation; at least one of the blades must be movable relative to the other.

    (1)     Note. Does not include plural blade knives even though all such
    blades operate simultaneously, for which see this class, subclasses 299+,
    and the notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    433,    Dentistry, subclass 1 for veterinary crown slitters; and subclasses
    144+ for other crown slitters.


CLS 30/174
TXT Implements under subclass 173 in which the two blades move toward one
    another and are of such a shape as to cut a depression in the surface of
    the material, usually for the purpose of cutting a core from fruit.

    (1)     Note.  Search should be continued in this class, subclasses 113.1+,
    and for other coring tools, search should be continued in subclasses 278,
    301+, 316, and 352.


CLS 30/175
TXT Implements under subclass 173 in which the cooperating blades have edges
    which meet edge to edge or in which one of the blades has a cutting edge
    which contacts an anvil on the other blade to perform the cutting operation.

    (1)     Note.  For combined nippers and shears, see this class, subclass
    145.

    (2)     Note.  Search this class, subclass 28.

    (3)     Note.  Many tools in Class 81, Tools, subclasses 52+ and 300+ have
    structures similar to those in this group of subclasses, except for the
    cutting edges, and search for the general organization should be continued
    there.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, particularly subclasses 300+ for tool jaw(s) positioned by
    relatively movable plural handles (e.g. pliers), and see (3) Note above.


CLS 30/176
TXT Nippers under subclass 175 in which two or more independent cutter
    organizations of the nipper type are provided.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145,    for similar organizations where one of the cutter organizations is
    of the nipper type and the other of the shear type.

    226+,   where both are of the shear type, and compare subclasses 197 and
    226+.


CLS 30/177
TXT Nippers under subclass 175 in which the cutter organization is adjustable
    to a plurality of positions relative to the handle.

    (1)     Note. Compare this class, subclass 320, and see the search notes
    thereunder.


CLS 30/178
TXT Nippers under subclass 175 in which the blades are so formed as to make a
    particular shaped cut.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 229+, 301, 316, and 355.


CLS 30/179
TXT Nippers under subclass 175 which are provided with a material or cutter
    guide or gage.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 233 and 286+.


CLS 30/180
TXT Nippers under subclass 175 provided with a motor as the blade moving means.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 401, and the notes thereunder, for
    other cutting tools with motor driving means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 632+ for one shot explosion actuated
    expansible chamber type motors.


CLS 30/181
TXT Nippers under subclass 175 in which the blades move relative to each other,
    other than in a simple pivoting or straight line reciprocating movement
    toward one another during the cutting operation.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 204, 237+ and 259.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 642-647.5 for compound movement cutters of that
    class (83) type.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 201+ for
    compound movement comminutors of that class (241) type.


CLS 30/182
TXT Nippers under subclass 175 in which the blades move in a straight line
    reciprocating movement toward one another during the cutting operation.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 208+, 241+, and 272.1+.


CLS 30/183
TXT Nippers under subclass 182 in which motion is imparted to the blade or
    blades by means of a lever and cam.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 189 and 219.


CLS 30/184
TXT Nippers under subclass 182 in which motion is imparted to the blade or
    blades by means of a lever and link.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 190, 242, and 251.


CLS 30/185
TXT Nippers under subclass 182 in which motion is imparted to the blade or
    blades by means of teeth on the sliding part and a toothed lever to
    cooperate therewith.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 243.


CLS 30/186
TXT Nippers under subclass 175 in which the blades are pivoted together so as
    to move toward each other in the cutting operation.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 208+ and 244+.


CLS 30/187
TXT Nippers under subclass 186 in which some means is provided for multiplying
    the power applied to the handles in moving the blades or some other
    mechanism is provided for moving the blades other than handles rigid with
    the blades.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 245+.

    (2)     Note.  See this class, subclass 272.1, and the notes thereunder,
    for other cutting implements with blade moving means.


CLS 30/188
TXT Nippers under subclass 187 in which only one of the blades is movable
    during the cutting operation.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 249+.


CLS 30/189
TXT Nippers under subclass 188 in which motion is imparted to the blade by
    means of a lever and cam.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 183 and 219.


CLS 30/190
TXT Nippers under subclass 188 in which motion is imparted to the blade by
    means of a lever and link.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 184, 242, and 251.


CLS 30/191
TXT Nippers under subclass 187 in which the power applying means are pivoted
    handles suitably connected to the blades.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211,    250+, and 252.


CLS 30/192
TXT Nippers under subclass 191 in which the operating handles have separate
    pivots but are interconnected between the pivots so as to move in unison.


CLS 30/193
TXT Nippers under subclass 191 in which the operating handles have a common
    pivot.


CLS 30/194
TXT Implements under subclass 173 in which the blades have edges which move
    past and in substantial contact with each other to perform the cutting
    operation.

    (1)     Note.  For combined nippers and shears and combined shears and
    knife, see this class, subclasses 145 and 146.

    (2)     Note.  Many patents in this class, subclass 109, cut by a shearing
    action and search should be continued there.

    (3)     Note.  Many patents in Class 81, Tools, subclasses 52+ and 300+
    have structure similar to this group in so far as the operating mechanism
    is concerned, and search for the operating mechanism should be continued
    there.

    (4)     Note.  Search this class, subclasses 29, 43, 120, 131, and 428.

    (5)     Note.  For shears adapted for use on portions of the human body,
    see Class 606, Surgery, subclasses 174+, for shear cutting devices used on
    human or other animal body portions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, particularly subclasses 300+ for tool-jaw(s) positioned by
    relatively movable plural handles (e.g., pliers), and see (3) Note above.


CLS 30/195
TXT Shears under subclass 194 which are specially designed to thin hair.  The
    blades usually have noncutting portions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30+,    for hair planers.


CLS 30/196
TXT Shears under subclass 194 in which the implement has a plurality of
    positions for simultaneously cutting material at all such positions.
    Usually a plurality of fingers are provided for guiding the material into
    position to be cut.

    (1)     Note.  Hair clippers and hedge trimmers have been placed in this
    and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132+,   for similar shears combined with a material holder or disposal.

    258,    for single blade and slot cutters which cut out a narrow strip of
    material.


CLS 30/197
TXT Shears under subclass 196 which have a plurality of independent cutter
    organizations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145,    176 and 226+.


CLS 30/198
TXT Shears under subclass 196 which are provided with means whereby they may be
    supported from the body of the operator or the person's body whose hair is
    being cut.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231+,   290+, and 296.1+ and the notes thereto.


CLS 30/199
TXT Shears under subclass 196 in which the cutter organization is adjustable
    relative to the handles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    320+,   and the notes thereunder, for other cutters which are adjustable
    relative to the handle.


CLS 30/200
TXT Shears under subclass 196 in which the cutter is provided with some means
    by which the length of cut may be regulated. The majority of the patents
    are hair clippers and the length of cut is regulated by means of the
    regulator contacting the head of the person whose hair is being cut.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233.5,  for shears of the single position type combined with hair combs
    where the comb comprises a guide, guard or gauge for the material being cut.

    286,    and see the notes thereto for other cutlery with guards and/or
    guides.


CLS 30/201
TXT Shears under subclass 200 in which the regulator is adjustable relative to
    the cutter organization.


CLS 30/202
TXT Shears under subclass 201 in which the regulator is adjusted automatically,
    usually by the operation of the clipper.


CLS 30/203
TXT Shears under subclass 196 which have structure whereby they may be operated
    by hand and also means whereby they may be power operated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    and the notes thereto.


CLS 30/204
TXT Shears under subclass 196 in which the blades move relatively, other than
    in a simple pivoting or straight line reciprocating movement, during the
    cutting operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181,    237+ and 259.


CLS 30/205
TXT Shears under subclass 196 in which at least one of the blades has a rotary
    motion during the cutting operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    347,    for rotary blades, per se, and see the notes thereunder for other
    rotary blade cutting tools.


CLS 30/206
TXT Shears under subclass 205 in which the blade or blades are moved by means
    of a motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401,    and the notes thereunder, for other motor driven cutting tools.


CLS 30/207
TXT Shears under subclass 205 in which there is provided means for applying the
    proper pressure between the cooperating blades.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213,    214, 221+, and 266+.


CLS 30/208
TXT Shears under subclass 196 in which at least one of the blades reciprocates
    or oscillates relative to the other.


CLS 30/209
TXT Shears under subclass 208 in which the blades are moved by the application
    of a reciprocating or oscillating power source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses, for the
    mechanical movements, per se.


CLS 30/210
TXT Shears under subclass 209 in which the reciprocating or oscillating power
    source is in the form of a motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401,    and the notes thereunder, for other motor driven cutting tools.


CLS 30/211
TXT Shears under subclass 209 in which the reciprocating or oscillating power
    source is in the form of pivoted handles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191+,   250+ and 252.


CLS 30/212
TXT Shears under subclass 211 in which the handles are returned to initial
    position by means of a spring.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 261+.


CLS 30/213
TXT Shears under subclass 212 in which means is provided to apply the proper
    pressure between the cooperating blades.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207,    and the notes thereunder.


CLS 30/214
TXT Shears under subclass 211 in which means is provided to apply the proper
    pressure between the cooperating blades.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207,    and see the notes thereunder.


CLS 30/215
TXT Shears under subclass 208 in which movement is imparted to the blade or
    blades from a rotary power source.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 401, and the notes thereunder, for
    motor driven tools generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 25, or appropriate subclass
    thereunder.


CLS 30/216
TXT Shears under subclass 215 in which the rotary power source is in the form
    of a rotary motor.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 401, and the notes thereunder, for
    other motor driven cutting tools.


CLS 30/217
TXT Shears under subclass 215 in which the movement is imparted to the blades
    by means of a crank or cam, a pitman and a lever.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 42+.


CLS 30/218
TXT Shears under subclass 215 in which movement is imparted to the blade or
    blades by means of a crank or cam, a lever and a sliding element, which
    latter may be the blade.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 45+.


CLS 30/219
TXT Shears under subclass 215 in which movement is imparted to the blade or
    blades by means of a crank or cam and a lever.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 183 and 189.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machines Element or Mechanism, subclasses 47+, and 54.


CLS 30/220
TXT Shears under subclass 215 in which movement is imparted to the blade or
    blades by means of a crank or cam and a sliding element, which latter may
    be the blade.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 49+ and 55.


CLS 30/221
TXT Shears under subclass 208 in which means is provided to apply the proper
    pressure between the cooperating blades.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207,    and see the notes thereunder.


CLS 30/222
TXT Shears under subclass 221 in which some friction reducing feature is
    provided including lubrication.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224     and 267.


CLS 30/223
TXT Inventions under subclass 196 in which the claimed invention resides in the
    relationship and form of both cooperating blades.

    (1)     Note.  Many patents in this class, subclasses 196+, show blade
    assemblies but claim in addition some other feature and to make a complete
    search on the subject matter of this subclass, the above subclasses should
    also be searched.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225,    for the structure of a single multiple position blade.

    (2)     Note.  Compare Class 56, Harvesters, subclasses 289+.


CLS 30/224
TXT Inventions under subclass 223 in which means is provided to reduce the
    friction of the moving blades including lubricating features.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222     and 267.


CLS 30/225
TXT Inventions in the multiple shearing position blade, per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    346+,   for other cutting blades.


CLS 30/226
TXT Shears under subclass 194 in which a plurality of independent cutter
    organizations are provided for independent cutting operations.

    (1)     Note.  For combined shears and nippers, see this class, subclass
    145.

    (2)     Note.  Where the shears have two sets of handles and/or blades or
    where the handles are reversible and both edges of the blades are sharpened
    for the purpose of adapting them for use in either hand, see this class,
    subclass 256.

    (3)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 176 and 197.


CLS 30/227
TXT Shears under subclass 226 in which some means is provided to multiply the
    power applied to the handles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    245+,   and see subclass 272.1 and the notes thereto, for other cutting
    tools with blade moving means.


CLS 30/228
TXT Shears under subclass 194 in which a motor is provided to move the blade or
    blades.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 401 and the notes thereunder, for
    other motor driven cutting tools.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 632+ for one shot explosion actuated
    expansible chamber type motors.


CLS 30/229
TXT Shears under subclass 194 in which the blades are so formed or the work
    held in such a position that a particular shaped cut can be made.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 178 and the notes thereunder.


CLS 30/230
TXT Shears under subclass 229 in which the form of cut is of zigzag or wavy
    shape.

    (1)     Note.  Pinking shears are here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    355,    for wavy blades, per se.


CLS 30/231
TXT Shears under subclass 194 combined with a support therefor.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 290+ and 296.1+, and see the
    notes to the last subclass for other supported cutters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, for supports of general utility.

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses for supports for holding work
    for the disclosed purpose of treating the work.


CLS 30/232
TXT Shears under subclass 231 in which some means other than the ordinary
    handles are provided to attach the shears to the hand or fingers of the
    operator.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291     and 298.


CLS 30/233
TXT Shears under subclass 194 which have means (1) so related to an edge as to
    prevent cutting other than in a desired manner, (2) to cause the shears to
    move in a predetermined relation to the material being cut, (3) to cause
    the material being cut to move in a predetermined relation to the shears,
    (4) to protect the hand from injury by either the shears or the material
    being cut, and/or (5) comprising a work table or other support for the
    material being cut.

    (1)     Note.  The same device may function as either guard, guide, or
    gauge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179,    for guards and/or guides for nippers.

    286+,   and see the notes thereto, for other cutlery with guards and/or
    guides.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 631 and see the notes thereto for
    the line between these subclasses (233)+ and subclass 631 of Class 33.


CLS 30/233.5
TXT Shears under subclass 233 wherein the guide, guard or gauge is in the form
    of a hair comb.

    (1)     Note.  Many of these combs serve as gauges for determining the
    length of hair being sheared.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   for comb type guards or guides for multiple position type shears.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, subclass 136 for combined shears and hair combs,
    where the two devices are independently used.

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 219+ for toilet combs, per se, and combined with
    other structure when not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 30/234
TXT Shears under subclass 194 in which the blades and/or handles are connected
    together by a spring independently of any pivot or other such attaching
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111.


CLS 30/235
TXT Shears under subclass 234 in which the plane of the blades is offset from
    that of the handles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248,    257 and 318.


CLS 30/236
TXT Shears under subclass 234 in which the blade is detachable from the handle.

    (1)     Note.  Where the blade edge is detachable from the blade and
    substantially coextensive therewith, search should be made in this class,
    subclass 349.

    (2)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 157 and 260.


CLS 30/237
TXT Shears under subclass 194 in which the blades move relatively, other than
    in simple pivoting or straight line reciprocating movement, during the
    cutting operation.  This is usually for the purpose of giving the shears a
    draw cut. Where the pivot is offset for the same purpose, see this class
    subclass 259.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181     and 204.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 638, 642+
    and 644+ for "draw-cut" devices in that class.


CLS 30/238
TXT Shears under subclass 237 in which movement is imparted to but one of the
    blades.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188+    and 249+.


CLS 30/239
TXT Shears under subclass 237 in which the blades are rigid with the handles
    and pivoted intermediate the handles and blade ends.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254+.


CLS 30/240
TXT Shears under subclass 194 in which a rotary movement is imparted to the
    blade or blades.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    347,    for rotary blades, per se, and see the notes thereunder for other
    rotary blade cutting tools.


CLS 30/241
TXT Shears under subclass 194 in which a straight line reciprocating movement
    is imparted to the blade or blades in the cutting operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    182+, 208+, and 272.1+.


CLS 30/242
TXT Shears under subclass 241 in which the movement is imparted to the blade or
    blades by a lever and link.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184,    190 and 251.


CLS 30/243
TXT Shears under subclass 241 in which motion is imparted to the blade or
    blades by means of teeth on the sliding part and a toothed lever to
    cooperate therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185.


CLS 30/244
TXT Shears under subclass 194 in which the blades are pivoted together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    186+ and 208+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, particularly subclasses 597+ for a cutter of that class
    (83) type with simple oscillating motion.


CLS 30/245
TXT Shears under subclass 244 in which means is provided to multiply the power
    applied to the handles in moving the blades, or some other mechanism is
    provided to move the blades other than the handles rigidly attached to the
    blades.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 187+, and see the notes under
    subclass 272.1 for other cutting tools having blade moving means.


CLS 30/246
TXT Shears under subclass 245 in which motion is imparted to the blade or
    blades by a mere push or pull of the blades against the work, usually by a
    linkage system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    314,    and the notes thereto, for other push or pull cutting tools.


CLS 30/247
TXT Shears under subclass 245 in which the power for moving the blades is
    derived from a rotary source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for traction driven devices.

    228,    for motor driven shears of this type.

    401,    for motor driven cutting tools.


CLS 30/248
TXT Shears under subclass 245 in which the plane of the blades is offset from
    that of the handle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235,    257 and 318.


CLS 30/249
TXT Shears under subclass 245 in which only one blade is moved in the cutting
    operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188+    and 238.


CLS 30/250
TXT Shears under subclass 249 in which movement is imparted to the blade by one
    handle being pivoted relative to the other.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 191+, 211 and 252.


CLS 30/251
TXT Shears under subclass 250 in which a link connects the pivoted handle to
    the movable blade.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 184, 190 and 242.


CLS 30/252
TXT Shears under subclass 245 in which movement is imparted to the blades by
    pivoted handles.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 191+, 211+ and 250+.


CLS 30/253
TXT Shears under subclass 244 in which the blades are pivoted together at the
    end of the blade.


CLS 30/254
TXT Shears under subclass 244 in which the blade and handles are rigid and the
    blades pivoted together intermediate the handles and blades.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 239.

    (2)     Note.  For joints for this type of shear, see this class,
    subclasses 266+.


CLS 30/255
TXT Shears under subclass 254 in which the implement may be folded into a more
    compact form or a form convenient for carrying.

    (1)     Note.  Some of the shears fold into a position in which each blade
    is alongside one handle.

    (2)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 151+ and 330.


CLS 30/256
TXT Shears under subclass 254 in which structure is claimed making them
    specially adaptable to be used in either hand.

    (1)     Note.  Shears having two sets of handles and/or blades, or having
    the handles reversible and both edges of the blades sharpened for the
    purpose of the above adaptation, are here.

    (2)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 226+.


CLS 30/257
TXT Shears under subclass 254 in which the plane of the blades is offset at an
    angle from that of the handle.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is to be distinguished from subclass 259 of
    this class where the pivot is offset from the cutting line of the blades.

    (2)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 235, 248 and 318.


CLS 30/258
TXT Shears under subclass 254 in which one blade has a slot into which the
    other blade moves during the cutting operation. These shears usually cut
    out a narrow strip of the material.

    (1)     Note.  Where one blade enters a slot in the other blade and wedges
    the material against the side of the slot for the purpose of gripping it,
    see this class, subclasses 134+.

    (2)     Note.  Where the slotted member merely constitutes a sheath for the
    cutting blade, see this class, subclass 155.


CLS 30/259
TXT Shears under subclass 254 in which the blades are pivoted at a point offset
    from the median line of the blades.  This is usually for the purpose of
    giving the shears a draw cut.

    (1)     Note.  Where the blades have a compound movement for the same
    purpose, see this class, subclasses 181, 204 et seq., and 237+.


CLS 30/260
TXT Shears under subclass 254 in which the blade end is detachable from the
    handle at the pivot or on either side thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Where the cutting edge is detachable and is substantially
    coextensive with the blade as distinguished from where the blade end is
    detachable, see this class, subclass 349.

    (2)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 157 and 236.


CLS 30/261
TXT Shears under subclass 254 in which a spring is provided to either open or
    close the blades.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 212+.


CLS 30/262
TXT Shears under subclass 261 in which a latch is provided to hold the blades
    in closed position.


CLS 30/263
TXT Implements under subclass 173 in which at least one of the cooperating
    blades is rotary.

    (1)     Note.  Tailors' cloth cutting machines are here, as well as in
    subclasses 273+.

    (2)     Note.  The patents in this group are to be distinguished from the
    shear subclasses, since here the blade edges do not move past each other in
    the cutting operation, although some are called shears.

    (3)     Note.  Many of the patents here are base supported and in that
    respect are like those in subclasses 273+, and search for the base feature
    should be continued there.

    (4)     Note.  For rotary blades, per se, see this class, subclass 347, and
    see the notes thereunder for other rotary blade cutting tools.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90.1+.


CLS 30/264
TXT Implements under subclass 263 in which the rotary blade is motor driven.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 4, and the notes thereunder, for
    other motor driven cutting tools.


CLS 30/265
TXT Implements under subclass 263 in which both of the cooperating blades are
    rotary.


CLS 30/266
TXT Inventions in the joint between two cooperating blade cutting tools, many
    of which have means for applying the proper pressure between the two blades.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 207, 213, 214, and 221+.


CLS 30/267
TXT Joints under subclass 266 in which the joint is provided with means to
    reduce the friction between the blades including lubrication features.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222     and 224.


CLS 30/268
TXT Joints under subclass 266 in which the proper pressure is applied to the
    blades by a spring.


CLS 30/269
TXT Joints under subclass 268 in which the blades are connected by a threadless
    pin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, subclasses 337+ for threadless bolts provided as
    securing means; and subclasses 500+ for threadless bolts, per se.


CLS 30/270
TXT Joints under subclass 266 in which means is provided for locking the
    threaded part against becoming loosened.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, subclasses 81+ for a threaded fastener (i.e.,  a
    bolt or nut) and means for restricting the rotation thereof relative to a
    coacting substructure.


CLS 30/271
TXT Devices for limiting the movement of two cooperating blades or their
    handles, either in the opening or closing movement.


CLS 30/272.1
TXT With blade moving means:

    Cutting tool under subclass 165 including means to effect movement of the
    cutting edge during hand manipulation.

    (1)     Note.  Means for moving the blade of a cutting tool to a desired
    position of adjustment is not included herein because the blade moving
    means is not intended to function during operation of the cutting tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

     2+,    for a can opener having a driven cutting blade.

    42+,    for a razor having a driven cutting blade.

    92+,    for a pipe or rod cutter having a driven cutting blade.

    110,    for a cigar tip cutter having a driven cutting blade.

    166+,   for a saw having a driven cutting blade.

    182+,   for nippers having a cutting blade driven to move to-and-fro.

    187+,   for nippers having a cutting blade driven to move about a pivot.

    205+,   for shears having multiple shearing positions and a driven rotary
    cutting blade.

    209+,   for shears having multiple shearing positions and a driven
    reciprocating or oscillating cutting blade.

    215+,   for shears having multiple shearing positions and having a rotary
    power source to drive a cutting blade.

    227,    for shears of the multiplex type having blade moving means.

    235,    for spring joint shears having offset handles and a driven blade.

    237+,   for shears having compound blade movement, wherein the blade is
    driven.

    240,    for shears having a driven rotary blade.

    241+,   for shears having a driven reciprocating blade.

    245+,   for shears having a driven pivoted blade.

    263,    for shears having a driven rotary blade.


CLS 30/273
TXT Implements under subclass 272.1 in which the implement is supported on a
    base so as to be moved about over the work or over a work table upon which
    the work rests.  The implement may be provided with means to raise the
    material into position to be cut by the blade.

    (1)     Note.  Tailors' cloth cutting machines are here, as well as in
    subclasses 263+.

    (2)     Note.  Many patents in this group are motor driven; see this class,
    subclass 401, and the notes thereto.

    (3)     Note.  Many patents in subclass 263 in this class have base
    supports similar to those in this group.  Search for the base should be
    continued there.


CLS 30/274
TXT Implements under subclass 273 in which the blade is in the form of an
    endless band or in which a plurality of blades are secured to an endless
    band.  The endless band moves continuously over wheels or pulleys in the
    cutting operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 244+.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 788+ for machines using endless flexible band
    knives, and subclass 661 for the cutter element, per se.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 82.1+
    for a chain type hard material cutter head.


CLS 30/275
TXT Implements under subclass 273 in which a presser foot is provided to hold
    the material in proper position during the cutting operation.


CLS 30/275.4
TXT With support or attaching means:

    Cutting tool under subclass 272.1 combined with means to hold the assembly
    thereof against the force of gravity or against the reaction of the
    material being cut.

    (1)     Note.  A twine cutter is included herein, even if fixed to an
    immobile twine support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for a base mounted or otherwise supported can opener.

    109+,   especially subclass 110, for a base mounted or otherwise supported
    cigar tip cutter.

    198,    for multiple shearing position shears that are body supported.

    231+,   for supported shears.

    263+,   for supported cutter having plural cooperating blades, one of which
    is rotary.

    273+,   for a base supported cutting tool with blade moving means.

    290+,   for a cutting tool with a guard or material guide and a support.

    296.1,  for a cutting tool with support or attaching means.

    323,    for a fork with a hand guard and/or a support.

    327,    for a spoon with a support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    69,     Leather Manufacturers, subclasses 11+ for a machine for using a
    fixed knife for skiving or splitting leather.

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses for a base supported cutting
    machine, generally.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 120+ for a planer using a stationary
    cutter; and subclasses 155+ for a shaver using a stationary cutter.

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, appropriate subclasses for
    subdividing material by tensile or bending force, generally.


CLS 30/276
TXT Implements under subclass 272.1 in which the blade is given a rotary
    movement to perform the cutting operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    347,    for rotary blades, per se, and see the notes thereunder for other
    rotary blade cutting tools.


CLS 30/277
TXT Implements under subclass 272.1 in which the blade moving means is in the
    form of mechanism to give the tool an impact blow to perform the cutting
    operation.

    (1)     Note.  Compare cold chisels in this class, subclass 168 and see
    subclass 164.6 for ice picks and chippers provided with impact moving means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclass 463 and see the notes thereto for other impact
    tools.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 90+ for an impacting device
    adapted to drive a cutting tool.


CLS 30/277.4
TXT Including a motor:

    Apparatus under subclass 272.1 caused to function by a prime mover
    utilizing stored energy or utilizing energy from an external supply.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is an electric motor, a hydraulic motor, or
    a spring motor.


CLS 30/278
TXT Implements under subclass 165 which are provided with an opening adjacent
    the cutting edge through which the cut material may pass during the cutting
    operation in the normal operation of the implements.

    (1)     Note.  Tools having a guard which in conjunction with the blade
    forms the material receiving opening are here included.

    (2)     Note.  So-called gage paring knives, coring knives, and tire and
    other groovers, are here, where the material passes through an opening.

    (3)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 27, 80 and 83.


CLS 30/279.2
TXT Plural blade or cutting edge:

    Cutting tool under subclass 278 (a) having more than one cutting blade, at
    least one of which includes an opening adjacent the cutting edge through
    which the cut material may pass during the cutting operation; or (b) having
    a cutting blade with more than one distinct sharp cutting edge, at least
    one of which edges includes an opening adjacent thereto through which the
    cut material may pass during operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    253,    for a cutting tool, generally having more than one cutting edge on
    its blade.

    287,    for a cutting tool having plural blades or cutting edges with a
    guard and/or a guide.

    299+,   for a cutting tool, generally, having more than one cutting blade.


CLS 30/279.4
TXT Swinging-stroke vegetation cutter:

    Apparatus under subclass 279.2 intended to be manually supported and moved
    to-and-fro in the manner of a pendulum to cut living plant material on the
    forward stroke and again on the return stroke.


CLS 30/279.6
TXT Border of opening limits cutting depth, e.g., peeler:

    Cutting tool under subclass 278 having structure defining the opening
    through which the cut material may pass, intended to engage the material
    being cut to thereby limit the degree of cutting penetration.


CLS 30/280
TXT Implements under subclass 278 in which the cutting edge is so related to
    the handle that the tool may be operated by a direct push or pull on the
    handle or handles in its normal operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    314+,   and the notes thereto, for other push or pull cutting tools.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclass 34.01
    and see the search notes therein for a machine for disintegrating hard
    material in situ having a planer type cutter.


CLS 30/281
TXT Implements under subclass 280 in which the tool has a handle at each end so
    that the implement may be drawn toward the operator in its normal operation.

    (1)     Note.  In addition to spoke shaves, cutters disclosed for various
    purposes, as shoe, heel and sole edge trimmers, are here when of this type.

    (2)     Note.  See this class, subclass 313, for draw knives.


CLS 30/282
TXT Implements under subclass 278 which have in addition to the material
    receiving opening a guide for guiding the tool relative to the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    288     and 289+.


CLS 30/283
TXT Implements under subclass 278 in which the opening is adjustable to vary
    the thickness of the material to be cut.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    appropriate subclasses under the razor group.


CLS 30/284
TXT Implements under subclass 283 in which the guard which forms, in
    conjunction with the blade, the material opening is detachable from the
    blade.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55      and 285.


CLS 30/285
TXT Implements under subclass 278 in which the guard which forms, in
    conjunction with the blade, the material opening is detachable from the
    blade.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55      and 284.


CLS 30/286
TXT Implements under subclass 165 which have either (1) a guard for the cutting
    edge so related to such edge as to prevent cutting other than in a desired
    manner, or (2) a guide to cause the implement to move in a predetermined
    relation to the material being cut or a work table or other support for the
    material or to cause the material to move in a predetermined relation to
    the implement, or (3) a guard to protect the hand from injury by the blade
    or material. The same device may function as both a guard and guide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for guards and/or guides for manicuring cutters.

    30+,    for guards and/or guides for hair planers.

    32+,    (especially subclass 51) for guards and/or guides for razors.

    90.1+,  for a similar device for cutting a strand-encircling sheath.

    164.7,  for guards and/or guides for ice picks and chippers.

    179,    for guards and/or guides for nippers.

    196+,   (especially subclasses 200+) for guards and/or guides for multiple
    shearing position type shears.

    233+,   for guards and/or guides for shears.

    263+,   for guards and/or guides for rotary blades.

    273+,   for guards and/or guides for base supported cutting implements.

    278+,   for cutters having a material receiving opening, which opening may
    be formed by a guide and/or guard in conjunction with the blade or cutting
    edge.

    308.2,  for an ax, hatchet, or adze which is foldable to cover the blade
    edge.


CLS 30/287
TXT Cutting tools in which the tool has more than one cutting blade or more
    than one cutting edge on a single blade, at least one such blade or edge
    having a guard or guide as defined in subclass 286.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    279.2,  299+ and 353+, for other plural blade cutting tools or blades
    having plural cutting edges.


CLS 30/288
TXT Implements under subclass 286 in which the tool has a plurality of guards
    or guides of different nature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282.


CLS 30/289
TXT Implements under subclass 286 which have a guide to cause the tool to move
    in a predetermined relation to the material being cut by mere engagement
    with the material or a work supported member or a work table or other
    support for the material or to cause the material to move in a
    predetermined relation to the implement.  The same device may function as
    both a guard and guide.

    (1)     Note.  A work supported member serving as a tool guide is, per se,
    classified in Class 269, Work Holders, subclasses 1+. The combination of
    the work supported tool guide and the tool guided therein is originally
    classified in this and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      263+, 273+, and 282.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, see (1) Note.


CLS 30/290
TXT Implements under subclass 289 which also have means for supporting the
    cutter either when in use or not in use.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 296.1+, and the notes thereto.


CLS 30/291
TXT Implements under subclass 290 in which means is provided other than a mere
    handle for attaching the tool to the hand or finger of the operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232     and 298.


CLS 30/292
TXT Implements under subclass 289 in which the blade is in the form of a
    traveling roller.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 306+ and 319 for other traveling
    roller blade cutters.


CLS 30/293
TXT Implements under subclass 289 in which the guide is adjustable relative to
    the tool.


CLS 30/294
TXT Implements under subclass 289 in which the blade is so related to the
    handle that the tool may be operated by a direct push or pull on the handle
    in its normal operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280     and 314+.


CLS 30/295
TXT Implements under subclass 286 which are provided with a guard to protect
    the hand of the user from injury by the blade during cutting or from
    material being cut.

    (1)     Note.  Mere handles of such shape as to be more readily grasped by
    the hand will be found in this class, subclass 340, and indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  For hand guards for culinary and table forks, see this
    class, subclass 323.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 131 for similar
    guards of more general application.


CLS 30/296.1
TXT With support or attaching means:

    Cutting tool under subclass 165 combined with means to hold the assembly
    thereof against the force of gravity or against the reaction of the
    material being cut.

    (1)     Note.  A twine cutter is included herein, even if fixed to an
    immobile twine support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

     2+,    for a base mounted or otherwise supported can opener.

    109+,   especially subclass 110 for a base mounted or otherwise supported
    cigar tip cutter.

    198,    for multiple shearing position shears that are body supported.

    231+,   for supported shears.

    263+,   for supported cutter having plural cooperating blades, one of which
    is rotary.

    273+,   for a base supported cutting tool with blade moving means.

    275,    for a cutting tool having blade moving means, with support or
    attaching means.

    290+,   for a cutting tool with a guard or material guide and a support.

    323,    for a fork with a hand guard and/or a support.

    327,    for a spoon with a support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    69,     Leather Manufacturers, subclasses 11+ for a machine for using a
    fixed knife for skiving or splitting leather.

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses for a base supported cutting
    machine, generally.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 120+ for a planer using a stationary
    cutter; and subclasses 155+ for a shaver using a stationary cutter.

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, appropriate subclasses for
    subdividing material by tensile or bending force, generally.


CLS 30/297
TXT Implements under subclass 296.1 in which means is provided for securing the
    tool to the leg or foot of the operator.


CLS 30/298
TXT Implements under subclass 296.1 in which means is provided other than a
    mere handle for securing the tool to the hand or finger of the operator.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 198, 232 and 291.

    (2)     Note.  Compare Class 84, Music, subclass 322.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, subclass 121 for combined cutters and thimbles.


CLS 30/298.4
TXT Nonuse support:

    Apparatus under subclass 296.1 including support structure intended to
    function when the apparatus is out of use.

    (1)     Note.  A holder, per se, for use with a cutting tool is included in
    this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 553 for a receptacle or
    package for holding an eating or kitchen type tool.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 70.7 for a support for storage of plural
    similar cutlery items, generally.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 37.3+ for a cutlery support for, with, or on
    structure (e.g., a pan, plate, or chopping block) associated with the use
    of the cutlery, which support is (a) carried by the cutler when performing
    a cutlery function or (b) intended to be placed adjacent the work area of
    the cutlery to receive the cutlery only for relatively short intervals,
    e.g., during cooking.


CLS 30/299
TXT Implements under subclass 165 which have a plurality of cutting blades for
    either simultaneous or alternative cutting of material.

    (1)     Note.  Does not include plural cooperating blades, for which see
    this class, subclasses 173+.

    (2)     Note.  For other plural blade cutters in this class, see the
    following subclasses: 50, 113.1+, 114, 145, 146, 152, 164.8, 172, 176, 197,
    226+, 279.2, 287, and 412.


CLS 30/300
TXT Implements under subclass 299 in which the cutters travel about a fixed
    point usually in the arc of a circle.

    (1)     Note.  Includes cutters for cutting out washers even though adapted
    to be operated by a hand brace.

    (2)     Note.  For other sweep cutters, see this class, subclasses 310+ and
    the notes thereto.


CLS 30/301
TXT Implements under subclass 299 in which at least one of the blades is an
    annular blade.

    (1)     Note.  Includes sheet material and dough cutters.

    (2)     Note.  For other annular blade cutters, see this class, subclass
    316, and the notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    subclass 281 for an ice-cream scoop type shaping means having a serrated or
    cutting edge.


CLS 30/302
TXT Implements under subclass 301 in which at least one of the blades is an
    annular cutter and others are radiating or crossed blades.

    (1)     Note. Combined apple corers and segmenters are here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    303,    and compare subclass 114.


CLS 30/303
TXT Implements under subclass 299 in which the plural blades are crossed or
    radiate from the axis of the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302.


CLS 30/304
TXT Implements under subclass 299 in which the plural blades are parallel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, particularly subclasses 651+ for a cutter of that class
    (83) type that may have plural parallel blades.


CLS 30/305
TXT Implements under subclass 304 in which the cutting edges are so related to
    the handle that the tool may be operated by a direct push on the handle or
    by a stamping action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315+,   and the notes thereto, for other push or stamp cutting tools.


CLS 30/306
TXT Implements under subclass 299 in which the blades are on or in the form of
    a traveling roller.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    292     and 319.


CLS 30/307
TXT Implements under subclass 306 in which the blades are in the form of rotary
    discs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    347,    for rotary blades, per se, and see the notes thereunder for other
    rotary blade cutters.


CLS 30/308
TXT Implements under subclass 165 in which the tool is of the form generally
    known as a butcher's cleaver, i.e., having a comparatively broad, heavy and
    substantially rectangular blade extending from the handle along its length.

    (1)     Note.  Mere blades will be found in this class, subclasses 346+.

    (2)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 318.

    (3)     Note.  Power operated butchers' cleavers which are disclosed as
    being of general use are classified in this class, subclass 272.1, and
    those peculiar to or having sole disclosure to the burtchering art are
    classified in Class 452, Butchering, subclasses 149+.


CLS 30/308.1
TXT Hatchet, ax or adze:

    Device under subclass 165 including a weighted head having a cutting edge
    thereon, the head being attached to one end of an armlike handle member,
    the other end of the armlike handle member being adapted to be held in the
    hand of the user, the cutting action occurring on impact of the head of the
    work.


CLS 30/308.2
TXT Foldable to cover bit:

    Device under subclass 308.1 wherein (a) the head may be swung into a
    receptacle in or on the lever armlike handle, or (b) a portion of the lever
    armlike handle may be swung into a position covering the cutting edge.


CLS 30/308.3
TXT Detachable bit:

    Device under subclass 308.1 wherein the cutting edge is designed to easily
    separate from the remainder of the head for purposes of replacement,
    sharpening, or the like.


CLS 30/309
TXT Cutting tools under subclass 165 having a substantially crescent shaped
    blade lying in or out of the plane of the handle but otherwise extending at
    a substantial angle thereto.  They are usually used for cutting grass, or
    grain, including corn.

    (1)     Note.  Mere blades will be found in this class, subclasses 346+,
    especially subclass 348.

    (2)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 318.

    (3)     Note.  Where such cutters have cradle fingers for catching grain,
    see Class 56, Harvesters, subclasses 324+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for a connection
    between a handle and a blade or between a handle nib and a snatch wherein
    no structure of the handle blade, nib or snatch is involved other than that
    which cooperates to effect the connection.


CLS 30/310
TXT Implements under subclass 165 in which the cutter is moved about a fixed
    point in a sweeping action even though intended for use with a hand brace.

    (1)     Note. For other sweep cutters in this class, see the following
    subclasses: 93+, 123.5+, 300, 433, and 435.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 27.01+ for a sweep cutter
    combined with measuring structure.

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 24 for a woodworking machine including a
    sweep cutter having motions during operations other than pure rotary plus
    axial.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, for a sweep cutter
    wherein the tool is restricted to pure rotary motion combined with
    simultaneous axial motion.


CLS 30/312
TXT Implements under subclass 165 which are provided with a plurality of
    handles.


CLS 30/313
TXT Implements under subclass 312 which are provided with a handle at each end
    of the tool and so related to the blade that the implement can be drawn
    toward the operator to perform the cutting operation in its normal use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281,    for spoke shaves.


CLS 30/314
TXT Implements under subclass 165 in which the blade or cutting edge thereof is
    so related to the handle that the tool may be moved by a direct push or
    pull, or both, on the handle to perform the cutting operation in its normal
    use.

    (1)     Note. For other push or pull implements in this class, see the
    following subclasses:  27, 51+, 90.1+, 113.1+, 114, 115+, 119, 121, 130,
    168, 169, 171, 246, 272.1, 277, 280+, 294, 301+, 303, 305, 313, 411, and
    443.

    (2)     Note. Mere blades will be found in this class, subclasses 346+ and
    353.


CLS 30/315
TXT Implements under subclass 314 in which the blade or cutting edge is so
    related to the handle that the tool may be moved by a direct push on the
    handle to perform the cutting operation in its normal use.

    (1)     Note.  For other push tools in this class, see the following
    subclasses:  113.1+, 114, 115+, 119, 121, 130, 168, 169, 246, 272, 277,
    280+, 294, 301+, 303, 305, 414, 443, and 445.


CLS 30/316
TXT Implements under subclass 315 in which the blade is annular.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113.1+  130, 278+, 301+, and 443, for other annular blade cutters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 50.7 for
    annular fork or shovel implements.


CLS 30/317
TXT Implements under subclass 314 in which the blade or cutting edge is so
    related to the handle that the tool may be moved by a direct pull on the
    handle to perform the cutting operation in its normal use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      27, 51+, 90.1+, 121, 246, 280+, 294, and 313, for other pull
    cutting tools.


CLS 30/318
TXT Implements under subclass 165 in which the plane of the blade lies at such
    an angle to the plane of the handle that the operator may stand in an
    upright position and swing the tool to cut material substantially even with
    the ground in its normal use.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 235, 248, 257, 308, and 309.

    (2)     Note.  Mere blades are in this class, subclasses 346+.

    (3)     Note.  For axes, see this class, subclasses 308.1+. Hatchets and
    hammers combined are in Class 7, Compound Tools, subclass 145.


CLS 30/319
TXT Implements under subclass 165 in which the blade is in the form of a
    traveling roller.

    (1)     Note.  For other traveling roller cutters in this class, see the
    following subclasses:  101, 102, 128, 263+, 292, 300, 306+, 310, and 422+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    347,    for rotary blades, per se, and see the notes thereunder for other
    rotary blade cutting tools.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the notes thereunder.


CLS 30/320
TXT Implements under subclass 165 in which the blade is adjustable relative to
    the handle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92+,    177, 199, 438, and 527+, for other adjustable blade cutters.

    151,    where the blade is so related to the handle as to lie wholly within
    or wholly without the handle in its normal operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 52+ for adjustable connections
    in general.


CLS 30/321
TXT Implements under subclass 320 in which the blade is pivotally connected
    relative to the handle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155,    where the blade folds into the handle.

    177     and 199, for other pivoted blade cutters.

    527,    for a handle pivotally connected to the blade.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclass 52 for pivotal connections in
    general.


CLS 30/322
TXT Culinary and table forks having a plurality of tines designed for handling
    food.

    (1)     Note.  For inventions not limited to forks, spoons or knives, but
    coming within the class definition, see this class, subclass 1.

    (2)     Note.  Where the invention is merely in the material from which the
    fork is made, see this class, subclass 345.

    (3)     Note.  For these forks combined with material holders or ejectors
    or with other cutlery implements, see this class, subclasses 129, 137, 147,
    148, and 150.

    (4)     Note.  Search this class, subclasses 340+, for mere handles and
    their connections.

    (5)     Note.  For hand or pitch forks combined with cutters, see Class 7,
    Compound Tools, subclass 115.

    (6)     Note.  For hand or pitch forks designed for handling material in
    general, see Class 294, Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass
    55.5

    (7)     Note.  For similar implements having a single tine, see Class 294,
    Handling: Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 61.

    (8)     Note.  For designs for forks, see Class D7, EQUIPMENT FOR PREPARING
    OR SERVING FOOD OR DRINK Not Elsewhere Specified, subclasses 645+.

    (9)     Note.  See Class 56, Harvesters, subclass 374 for tedder forks.

    (10)    Note.  For hand-manipulable fork-like devices whose tines are
    intended to penetrate and then break apart light textures, fluffy foods
    such as cakes and breads, see Class 225, Severing by Tearing or Breaking,
    subclasses 93+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 419 for supports for the
    heat treatment of food in the form of forks combined with means to rotate
    or otherwise manipulate the tines with respect to the handle.


CLS 30/323
TXT Forks under subclass 322 which are provided with a guard to protect the
    hand of the operator, with a support for the fork while in inoperative
    position, or a combination of the two.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    296.1,  and see the notes thereunder.


CLS 30/324
TXT Culinary or tablespoons having a bowl shaped portion designed for the
    purpose of handling food.

    (1)     Note.  For inventions which may be applied to such spoons but which
    are applicable to other cutlery implements, see this class, subclass 1.

    (2)     Note.  For spoons with material strippers, see this class, subclass
    128, and the notes thereunder.

    (3)     Note.  For spoons with material conducting handles, see this class,
    subclass 141.

    (4)     Note.  For spoons combined with other cutlery implements, see this
    class, subclasses 147, 149 and 150.

    (5)     Note.  For inventions merely in the material from which a spoon is
    made, see this class, subclass 345.

    (6)     Note.  For mere handles and their connection to the bowl, see this
    class, subclasses 340+.

    (7)     Note.  For scoops, see Class 294, Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line
    Implements, subclass 55.

    (8)     Note.  For measuring spoons, see Class 73, Measuring and Testing,
    subclasses 426+.

    (9)     Note.  For designs for spoons, see Class D7, EQUIPMENT FOR
    PREPARING OR SERVING FOOD OR DRINK Not Elsewhere Specified, subclasses 645+.

    (10)    Note.  For hand shovels for handling material in general, see Class
    294, Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 49+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 276+ for an ice-cream scoop or plugger having a shaping cavity.


CLS 30/325
TXT Spoons under subclass 324 in which the bowl is perforated, usually for the
    purpose of straining.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 470+ for handled
    filters, per se.


CLS 30/326
TXT Spoons under subclass 324 in which the bowl has a cover or a guard to
    prevent the material from spilling or to prevent contact with some outside
    body.

    (1)     Note.  Medicine and mustache spoons are here.


CLS 30/327
TXT Spoons under subclass 324 which are provided with a support to hold them
    level while full or to support them in inoperative position.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 296.1, and see the notes
    thereunder.


CLS 30/328
TXT Spoons under subclass 324 in which the blade and handle are reinforced,
    such as by reinforcing ribs, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Mere reinforced handles will be found in this class,
    subclass 340.


CLS 30/329
TXT Devices for holding detachable cutting blades.

    (1)     Note.  The holder may be claimed, per se, or in combination with
    the blade.

    (2)     Note.  The patents in this group are for holding a blade without a
    guard for shaving purposes, for sharpening purposes, and for use as a knife
    or scraper.

    (3)     Note.  Connections between a blade having a tang and its handle
    will be found in this class, subclass 341 et seq., except when there noted
    to be elsewhere.

    (4)     Note.  For detachable blade razors having guarded cutting edges,
    see this class, subclasses 51+.

    (5)     Note.  Compare also this class, subclasses 2, 27 and 30+.

    (6)     Note.  For sheath knives having detachable blades, see this class,
    subclasses 156+.

    (8)     Note.  Where a blade has a tang which enters a socket in the handle
    with means to hold the tang in the socket, search should be made in Class
    279, Chucks or Sockets, subclass 9.1, or the appropriate indented subclass.
     The mere naming of the blade as a knife blade in the claims will not
    operate to keep the patent out of Class 279.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    407,    Cutters, for Shaping, subclasses 66+ for a cutter adapted to be
    clamped to a tool post.

    451,    Abrading, especially subclasses 169, 316, 318, 322, 364+, and 370+
    for a blade holder specially designed to hold a blade for stropping or
    honing purpose.  The line is set forth under ``Note", (2), SEARCH CLASS,
    451, of the definition of Class 30.


CLS 30/330
TXT Blade holders under subclass 329 in which the holder is provided with at
    least one pivoted part which can be operated to release the blade from the
    holder.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 153.


CLS 30/331
TXT Blade holders under subclass 330 in which the pivot for the parts is at
    either the blade end or handle end of the holder.


CLS 30/332
TXT Blade holders under subclass 329 in which the parts of the holder are
    readily separable to release the blade.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 47, 68+, and 156.


CLS 30/333
TXT Blade holders under subclass 332 in which one side of the blade engaging
    part of the holder is removable from the remainder of the holder.

    (1)     Note.  Compare Class 279, Chucks or Sockets, subclass 44.


CLS 30/334
TXT Blade holders under subclass 329 in which a U-strap usually of metal is
    passed end-wise around the blade and has means to hold the blade in the U
    of the strap.


CLS 30/335
TXT Blade holders under subclass 329 which are so constructed that the blade
    and holder may be assembled by a straight sliding movement of the blade
    relative to the holder.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 62+.


CLS 30/336
TXT Blade holders under subclass 335 in which the holder is provided with
    spring jaws to grip the blade.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 338.


CLS 30/337
TXT Blade holders in which a lug, depression or the like cooperates with an
    aperture, depression or lug on the blade to hold the blade in the holder.

    (1)     Note.  Many blade holders of the special types provided for above
    have interlocked blades and holders and search should be made there for
    interlocked blades and holders of the particular type there provided for,
    and compare this class, subclasses 68+.


CLS 30/338
TXT Blade holders under subclass 337 in which the holder is provided with
    spring jaws to grip the blade.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 336.


CLS 30/339
TXT Blade holders under subclass 337 in which the blade has an aperture or
    apertures to cooperate with lugs on the holder to hold the blade to the
    holder.


CLS 30/340
TXT Handles specific to cutlery implements and inventions in the means for
    attaching the blades thereto, not otherwise provided for.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 40 and 125 for cutlery handles
    having receptacles in the handles, 151+ for sheathed cutlery handles, and
    526+ for razor handles, especially subclasses 535+ for razor handles with
    receptacles.

    (2)     Note.  Holders for detachable blades and handles therefor will be
    found in this class, subclasses 329+, where the handle is not attached
    directly to the blade tang.

    (3)     Note.  For tool and implement handles generally, attention is
    called to the following classes:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, especially subclasses 118 and 167.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 436+ for
    implements having elements, couplings or retaining means and subclasses
    143.1+ and 147.1+ for handles for cleaning implements.

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 110+.

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 80.

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclasses 90+.

    42,     Firearms, subclasses 71.01+.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 519+ for levers, and 543+
    for handles.

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclasses 104.1+, especially
    subclass 106, for making hollow handles.

    81,     Tools, subclasses 427.5 and 177.1.

    101,    Printing, particularly subclasses 405+.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 94.

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 11 for making of a wood handle.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 329+ for earth working implements with
    handles.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, appropriate subclass for subject matter
    directed to driving or impacting a tool or the like, and including
    manipulating handle structure, and particularly subclasses 168+ for a
    manipulating handle having a passage for motive fluid, and subclass 170 for
    a manipulating handle having a drive control means operable by the engaging
    hand thereof.

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclasses 39 and 115+.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 139+ and 427+.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 752+.

    294,    Handling: Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, particularly subclasses
    57+; subclass 137 for a handle provided with means to attach the handle to
    an article to carry the article.

    300,    Brush, Broom, and Mop Making, subclass 20.

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, subclasses 298+, 549+, and 562.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, subclass 9.1, or appropriate indented subclass,
    for handles having a socket into which a blade tang is inserted with means
    for holding the tang therein, whether removably or permanently attached.
    The mere naming of a designated cutlery implement as such will not operate
    to keep the patent out of Class 279.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for a connection
    between a tool and a handle which does not involve any part of the tool or
    handle other than that which cooperates to effect the connection.


CLS 30/341
TXT Handles under subclass 340 in which the handle is specially designed for a
    plural cooperating blade implement of the shear or nipper type.


CLS 30/342
TXT Inventions in the handles plus the connecting means for joining them to the
    blade tang.

    (1)     Note.  The line between this group and other places is set out in
    the notes under subclass 340 of this class.

    (2)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 236 and 260.


CLS 30/343
TXT Inventions under subclass 342 in which the handle is cast or molded on to
    the blade tang.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 98+ for processes of casting metal
    against a preform, and particularly subclass 111 for interlocks between the
    parts.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    appropriate subclasses 259+ which pertains to shaping material and uniting
    to a preformed self-sustaining body.

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, subclass 105.


CLS 30/344
TXT Inventions under subclass 342 in which the handle is welded, riveted or
    bolted to the implement or its tang.

    (1)     Note.  Does not include separate side scales when bolted to the
    tang, for which see this class, subclass 342.


CLS 30/345
TXT Inventions applicable to any of the cutlery implements falling within the
    definition of this class in which the invention resides in the material
    from which the implement is made.

    (1)     Note.  The metallurgical feature of mere blades is excepted and
    will be found in this class, subclass 350.

    (2)     Note.  If features are claimed limiting the tool to any of the
    particular types provided for above, the patent will be placed there and
    cross-referenced here, where necessary.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 544+ for stock
    material, e.g., of indefinite length, which is all metal or has adjacent
    metal components.


CLS 30/346
TXT Inventions in cutting blades, per se, for use with hand manipulated
    implements.

    (1)     Note.  If a cutter organization including blades with guards, etc.,
    provided for above, is claimed, the patents will be placed there and
    cross-referenced to this group where necessary.

    (2)     Note.  For blades for multiple shearing position shears, see this
    class, subclass 225.

    (3)     Note.  Blades intended for use with any of the machine cutting
    classes will be found there in the appropriate subclasses;  Class 83,
    Cutting, subclass 651; and subclass 835+ for saw blades and saw teeth, per
    se; Class 144, Woodworking, subclasses 218+; Class 407, Cutters, for
    shaping.

    407,    Cutters, for Shaping, subclasses 29.1+ for files and rasps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 600+ for a
    metallic stock material having a variation in thickness, e.g., tapered
    edges, and subclass 932 for such material where a cutting feature is
    disclosed.


CLS 30/346.5
TXT Device under subclass 346 specifically adapted to be used in a razor to
    shave off the beard or hair.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    353,    for a blade having plural cutting edges which may be similar to a
    razor blade.


CLS 30/346.51
TXT Device under subclass 346.5 comprising a cutter adapted to perform a
    cutting function by cooperation with another blade to either shear or nip
    off the beard.

    (1)     Note.  The term "shear" is used here to denote the cutting action
    of a cooperating pair of cutters, the edges of which approach, and continue
    to move past, each other.  The term "nip" is used here to mean the cutting
    action of a pair of co-operating cutters, the edges of which move directly
    toward each other so that, if the motion continues, the edges will abut.


CLS 30/346.52
TXT Device under subclass 346.5 on which a recognizable, characteristic mark is
    present.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is a blade having a coating that
    changes color after being submerged in water. Also included in the concept
    of this subclass is a blade having plural cutting edges, each of which is
    numbered.

    (2)     Note.  Normal rules of the U. S. Patent Classification System have
    been followed in the placement of the patents into this subclass.
    Therefore, if no claim recites a blade having such indicia, the patent will
    be found in the subsequent subclasses according to characteristics that are
    claimed.  If none of the characteristics of the following subclasses are
    claimed the patent will be found in this subclass because of the disclosure
    of indication means on the claimed blade.


CLS 30/346.53
TXT Device under subclass 346.5 characterized by the chemical composition or a
    metallurgical feature of the blade.


CLS 30/346.54
TXT Device under subclass 346.53 characterized by internal characteristics of
    the metal of which the device, or a portion thereof, is composed.

    (1)     Note.  A steel blade with a "tempered" cutting edge, or a
    "magnetic" blade or an "annealed" blade, is within the subject matter
    confines of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    350,    for a blade (other than a razor blade) having a metallurgical
    feature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 544+ for stock
    material, e.g., of indefinite length, which is all metal or has adjacent
    metal components.


CLS 30/346.55
TXT Device under subclass 346.5 reciting specific characteristics of the
    portion of the blade adapted to perform the cutting operation.

    (1)     Note.  A claim setting forth a groove parallel to the cutting edge,
    but slightly removed therefrom will be found in this subclass if the groove
    is disclosed as intended to improve the action of the cutting edge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    346.53+, for a razor blade characterized by the chemical composition or a
    metallurgical feature of the cutting edge.

    346.6,  for a razor blade having a groove specifically adapted to make the
    blade more rigid.

    356,    for a blade (other than a razor blade) having a longitudinally
    curved cutting edge.

    357,    for a blade (other than a razor blade) having a particular edge
    structure.


CLS 30/346.56
TXT Device under subclass 346.55 having a cutting edge of serrate or undulate
    form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    355,    for a blade (other than a razor blade) having a toothed or waved
    edge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 573 for metallic
    stock material having a width which varies regularly.


CLS 30/346.57
TXT Device under subclass 346.5 reciting more than two distinct, marginal
    portions each of which independently serves to perform a cutting operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    353,    for a blade (other than a razor blade) having plural cutting edges.


CLS 30/346.58
TXT Device under subclass 346.5 constructed of a plurality of distinguishable
    elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    348,    for a blade (other than a razor blade) that is reinforced by being
    made up of a plurality of elements.

    349,    for a blade (other than a razor blade) that includes a detachable
    cutting edge.


CLS 30/346.59
TXT Device under subclass 346.58 consisting of a plurality of elements each
    having a cutting edge and having a portion that meshes with a complementary
    portion on another element to form a unit that functions as a single,
    multiple-edge blade.


CLS 30/346.6
TXT Device under subclass 346.5 characterized by physical conformation which is
    disclosed as making the device more rigid than it would be.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    346.55, for a razor blade having irregularities near the cutting edge that
    improve the cutting action of the edge.

    346.58, for a razor blade that is made more rigid by additional elements.

    348,    for a blade (other than a razor blade) that is reinforced.


CLS 30/346.61
TXT Device under subclass 346.5 having an opening there through, a recession in
    a margin thereof, or a raised portion in a generally planar surface thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The structural irregularities described in the disclosures
    are usually provided for the purpose of securing the blade to other
    portions of the razor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    346.52, for a razor blade having an irregularity in its surface serving as
    an indicating characteristic.

    346.55, for a razor blade having irregularities in the vicinity of the
    cutting edge for the purpose of improving the action of the cutting edge.

    346.6,  for a razor blade with an irregularity intended to make the blade
    more rigid.

    351,    for a blade (other than a razor blade) that is apertured, notched
    or lugged.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 596 for metallic
    stock material having an aperture or cut.


CLS 30/347
TXT Blades under subclass 346 in which the blade is so constructed as to be
    rotated during the cutting operation.

    (1)     Note.  For organized cutting tools within this class having rotary
    blades, see the following subclasses:  26, 42+, 101, 102, 110, 128, 167,
    205+, 240, 263+, 276, 292, 300, 306+, 310+, 319, 418+, 422+, 433+, and 440.

    (2)     Note.  For other rotary blade implements and machine specialized to
    art uses, special attention is drawn to the following classes:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclasses 77, 86.7, 87, 88+, and 91+.

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 205+, 209+, 222, 223+, 238, 242+, and 244+
    for a rotary snow excavator.

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 249+, 255+, 294, and 295.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclasses 9.5 and 16.

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclasses 37+ and 85.

    79,     Button Making, subclass 16.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 663+.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 593.

    125,    Stone Working, subclasses 13.01+.

    142,    Wood Turning, subclasses 9, 22, 26+ and 40+.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 82+, 116 through 119.2, 150, 176, 200, 201,
    203+, and 218 through 241.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 35+ and 518+ for rotating earth working
    tools.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 213+ for a drive means
    peculiar to driving a tool or the like about an axis.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 373 and the search there
    noted for a disc cutter for a rolling cutter bit used for earth boring.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclass 86 for
    a hard material disintegrating cutting head with a relatively rolling
    tooth, and subclass 101 for a rotary cutter head having plural teeth.

    407,    Cutters, for Shaping, for a cutter to be used in a milling machine
    or lathe.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 199+ for
    a tool, per se, of that class type.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 1+ for a gear cutting
    machine or process; and subclasses 64+ for a milling machine or process.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 289+ for a preform severing means combined in a shaping or
    reshaping apparatus for plastic material.

    433,    Dentistry, subclass 1 for veterinary crown slitters; and subclasses
    144+ for other crown slitters.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 177+, 541+ and 548+.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, subclasses 149, 185+ and 198+, except as provided for in Class
    408.


CLS 30/348
TXT Blades under subclass 346 in which the invention resides in a reinforcement
    for the blade.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    328,    for a reinforced spoon.

    346.58+ for a razor blade that is reinforced by additional elements.

    346.6,  for a razor blade that is reinforced; and see the notes thereto.


CLS 30/349
TXT Blades under subclass 346 in which the cutting edge is substantially
    coextensive with the blade and is detachable therefrom for purposes of
    renewal or sharpening.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include blades which are detachable
    from the handle by means of a connection at the end of the blade, for which
    see this class, subclasses 236 and 260 and Class 279, Chucks or Sockets,
    subclass 9.1, or appropriate indented subclass.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not include holders for detachable
    blades, for which see this class, subclasses 329+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    346.58+, for a razor blade made of plural elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 143.1+ for a
    cleaning implement handle and subclasses 147.1+ for a mop holder.


CLS 30/350
TXT Blades under subclass 346 wherein there is a recitation of some
    metallurgical feature along with the recitation of blade construction.

    (1)     Note.  Blade construction includes a recitation of the nature or
    composition of the cutting edge which differs from the rest of the blade,
    or a coating on the blade.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    346.54, for a razor blade characterized by a metallurgical feature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 400+ for metal stock which may be a
    blade which has been uniformly treated to change its metal metallurgical
    characteristic.  See the definition of subclass 400 for the line between
    stock proper for 148 and alloys proper for Class 420.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, appropriate subclass for a blade
    of uniform character which is characterized solely by the alloy or metallic
    composition from which it is made.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 544+ for stock
    material, e.g., of indefinite length, which is all metal or as adjacent
    metal components.


CLS 30/351
TXT Blades under subclass 346 in which the invention resides in providing
    apertures, notches or lugs on the blade for cooperation with some organized
    cutting tool or blade holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    339,    for apertured blades combined with interlocked holders therefor.

    346.61, for a razor blade that is apertured, notched or lugged.


CLS 30/352
TXT Blades under subclass 346 which are depressed transversely of the blade,
    usually in the arc of a circle, and provided with a cutting edge at one or
    both of the raised sides so that the blade can be used for cutting out
    apertures in material.

    (1)     Note.  So-called leather punches and some of the fruit corers are
    here. Other fruit corers will be found in this class, subclasses 278+, 301+
    and 316.


CLS 30/353
TXT Blades under subclass 346 which have more than one continuous cutting edge.

    (1)     Note.  This group does not include serrated cutting edge blades,
    for which see this class, subclass 355.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    279.2,  287 and 314, for an organized cutter having plural cutting edges.

    346.5+, for a razor blade which may have plural cutting edges.

    352     and 356, for other blades having plural cutting edges.


CLS 30/355
TXT Blades under subclass 346 in which the blade itself is waved and/or its
    edge is toothed or serrated.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 230.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    346.56, for a razor blade having a cutting edge that is toothed or waved.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 573 for a
    metallic stock material having a width which varies regularly, and subclass
    604 for metallic stock material having intersecting corrugations or dimples
    not in a single line.


CLS 30/356
TXT Blades under subclass 346 which are curved longitudinally or along their
    length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123.5+, for a citrus fruit cutter having a longitudinally curved blade.

    346.55+, for a razor blade having a curved cutting edge.


CLS 30/357
TXT Inventions in the edge structure of the blades, e.g., the form in which
    they are ground, etc.

    (1)     Note.  For the edge structure of razor guards, see this class,
    subclass 81.

    (2)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 349 and 355.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    346.55+, for a razor blade characterized by details of the cutting edge.


CLS 30/358
TXT Device under the class definition for cutting work by (1) penetrating
    through one dimension of the work with the cut not intersecting an edge of
    the work other than the edges defining the 82+, 116-119.2, 150, 176, 200,
    201, 203+, and 218-241dimension referred to, or (2) effecting a partial
    penetration of work by movement toward or into a surface of the work
    without any significant movement along said surface.

    (1)     Note.  The work portions cut out by the tools of this subclass are
    usually intended to be scrap.  If the part cut out is intended to be used,
    the tool for effecting such cut will usually be found elsewhere in this
    class, see particularly subclasses 139, 301 and 316.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    443,    for a can punch of the push or punch type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 666+ for a perforating or
    indenting implement having means thereon for locating the perforation or
    indentation with respect to other structure.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses appropriate to cutting and deforming,
    for disclosure of structure that has claimed means for both perforating and
    bending metal.

    81,     Tools, subclass 9.2 for a stylus which produces indicia by
    indentation of a surface without cutting, or by a manifolding transfer
    operation; and subclass 9.22 for a marking device which includes means for
    perforating a surface and for introducing marking material into the
    perforations.

    101,    Printing, subclasses 3.1+ for cutting on or adjacent the printed or
    written matter on a document to prevent unauthorized or fraudulent
    alteration of such matter due to the proximity of the cut surfaces to the
    printed or written matter (e.g., check protecting); also for a cutting tool
    cutting work in the form of a character, a design, or a pattern which will
    impart information to an observer, which cut is disclosed as extending only
    part way through the thickness of the work (e.g., embossing).

    128,    Surgery, appropriate subclasses for a tool that marks an animal by
    a perforating or indenting operation.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 80+ for can opening devices having
    dispensing characteristics as a part thereof.

    346,    Recorders, for a recorder which may also include a perforating or
    indenting implement.

    402,    Binder Device Releasably Engaging Aperture or Notch of Sheet,
    subclass 1 for a sheet binder device which includes a separate aperture
    making device in which no part cooperates with the sheet retainer to make
    an opening in a sheet; subclass 7 for a device including a sheet retainer
    which penetrates and inserts a binder strand through a sheet and subclass
    25 for a sheet retainer device which includes means to force a sheet upon a
    sheet retainer.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, appropriate
    subclasses, for an implement for making a hole (or enlarging an existing
    hole) by a cutting tool which rotates about an axis passing through the
    tool and moves parallel to the axis of rotation.

    493,    Manufacturing Container of Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 340+ for a tool that has claimed means for
    both perforating and bending paper.


CLS 30/359
TXT Device under subclass 358 having, in addition to a perforating or indenting
    instrumentality, a cutting device which, per se, is provided for elsewhere
    in this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, appropriate subclasses for a perforating or
    indenting tool combined with a tool which, per se, is provided for in
    another class.


CLS 30/360
TXT Device under subclass 358 comprising an element, which is disclosed as
    extending through an existing opening in the work during the cutting
    operation.

    (1)     Note.  The opening through which the element extends is other than
    the opening to be made in the work by the tool.


CLS 30/361
TXT Device under subclass 358 having means thereon for fixedly securing the
    implement to the work to be cut so as to enable the implement to be
    supported by the work.


CLS 30/362
TXT Device under subclass 358 adapted to be guided by hand over the work and
    constructed so that the perforating or indenting tool may be operated by
    machine power.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 9.22 for an implement which includes motor driven
    means for perforating a surface and means for introducing coating material
    into the perforations (e.g., tattooing pen).


CLS 30/363
TXT Device under subclass 358 comprising a pair of cooperating tool carriers or
    tool drivers connected to each other so that one carrier or driver may be
    swung about a fixed axis relative to the other, each of the carriers or
    drivers being adapted to be grasped by the operator and moved relative to
    the other so as to effect relative movement of the tools toward each other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, particularly subclasses 300+ for tool jaws positioned by
    relatively movable plural handles (e.g., pliers).

    100,    Presses, subclass 234 for plier type hinged platen reciprocating
    presses, not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 30/364
TXT Device under subclass 363 wherein at least one of the tool carrier mounts a
    plurality of tools swingably mounted on the carrier so that any of the
    tools may, at the option of the operator, be placed in position to effect
    cutting of the work.


CLS 30/365
TXT Device under subclass 358 wherein the tool comprises a pivotally mounted
    member adapted to be rolled over the work to perforate or indent it.


CLS 30/366
TXT Device under subclass 358 wherein the portion of the tool that is designed
    to first enter the work to perforate or indent it is pointed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164.9,  for hand manipulable devices for  marking by means of a point or
    cutting edge.

    443,    for can punches 164.5 for ice picks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 18.1+ for scribers and
    subclasses 666+ for point markers.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 102+ for needles and especially
    subclass 104, for awl type, and see the notes to these subclasses for
    related needle-like structures.


CLS 30/367
TXT Device under subclass 366 having a hammer- like plunger that is not
    directly secured to the perforating or indenting instrumentality and is
    effective to force said instrumentality into the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclass 463 and see the notes thereto, for other impact
    drives.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 90+ for a tool impacting
    device of general utility.


CLS 30/368
TXT Device under subclass 366 having one or more of the following:  (1) a
    stripper to separate the work and the perforating or indenting
    instrumentality; (2) a sheath to protect the tool and/or the user when the
    tool is not in use; and (3) a gauge to limit the penetration of the tool
    into the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151+,   for cutlery sheaths.

    164.7,  for ice picks with gauges or guides.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 666+ for point markers combined
    with locating means.


CLS 30/369
TXT Device under subclass 166.3 comprising two or more blades in side-by-side
    contact throughout the extent of their cutting-span, with each blade moving
    in a direction counter to the movement of the next adjacent blade, said
    blades cooperating to form a single kerf.


CLS 30/370
TXT Device under subclass 166.3 having means adapted to protect the surface
    subjacent the work from contact by the tool.

    (1)     Note.  The devices included herein cut work that is positioned on
    or closely adjacent a nonwork member, without damaging or cutting the
    nonwork member (e.g., cutting ring from finger, plaster cast from body
    member, or floor covering while in place on the floor).


CLS 30/371
TXT Device under subclass 166.3 having means in addition to the blade or cutter
    which (1) contacts and remains stationary with respect to the work during
    cutting and provides support for or movement to the said cutter, but does
    not guide or assist in guiding said cutter in a predetermined path with
    respect to the work or (2) contacts and moves with respect to the work
    during cutting, and guides or assists in guiding the cutter with respect to
    the work, or limits undesired movement between the cutter and the work.


CLS 30/372
TXT Device under subclass 371 wherein the work contacting means is adapted to
    be positively connected to the work in order to prevent relative movement
    between the work and said work contacting means.


CLS 30/373
TXT Device under subclass 371 in which the work contacting means comprises a
    member having a relatively flat work engaging surface, with the saw blade
    carried relative to the member in a manner such that the plane in which the
    blade lies is coextensive with, or at all points equidistant from, the
    plane of the work engaging surface which is adapted to be moved across the
    work, whereby the saw blade is guided relative to said planar portion of
    the work.


CLS 30/374
TXT Device under subclass 371 in which the work contacting means comprises a
    member having a relatively flat, work engaging surface, wherein the saw
    blade is carried by the member in a manner such that the blade projects
    through the plane of said work engaging surface, said work engaging surface
    being adapted to be moved across the work as the saw is fed through the
    work.


CLS 30/375
TXT Device under subclass 374 provided with means to permit positional
    alteration between the blade and the work engaging surface.


CLS 30/376
TXT Device under subclass 375 in which the means for changing the relationship
    between the blade and the work engaging surface permits the plane of cut to
    be changed relative to the plane of the work engaging surface.


CLS 30/377
TXT Device under subclass 375 in which the means for changing the relationship
    between the saw blade and the work engaging surface permits the length of
    blade which projects beyond the plane of the work engaging surface to be
    altered.


CLS 30/378
TXT Device under subclass 371 having means to constantly urge the work into
    engagement with the saw blade.


CLS 30/379
TXT Device under subclass 166.3 wherein the saw is mounted on a
    ground-traversing, wheeled carrier which is randomly moved under control of
    the operator during the cutting operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 928 for a cutting device mounted on wheeled
    vehicles which vehicles are parked (i.e., stationary) during the cutting
    operation.


CLS 30/379.5
TXT Device under subclass 166.3 wherein the saw is mounted on a
    ground-traversing, wheeled carrier; is moved with respect to the carrier
    and is moved randomly with respect to the ground and work during the
    cutting operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    379,    for similar structure wherein the carrier for the saw and the
    carrier for the wheels are fixed to move together during cutting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 928 for an art collection of cutting machines
    including a work support which is mounted on a vehicle.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 34.1+ for the combination of a randomly
    manipulated saw and means to assist the operation of the saw (e.g., a
    pusher) in the felling of a tree.


CLS 30/380
TXT Device under subclass 166.3 wherein the saw blade comprises a strip forming
    a closed loop wrapped about a plurality of pulleys or drums and having a
    substantially continuous cutting edge on at least one edge of said strip,
    and including means to move said cutting edge in the path defined by such
    loop during the cutting operation of said tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    274,    for based-supported band knives having blade moving means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    69,     Leather Manufactures, for a band knife specifically adapted for
    cutting leather.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 788+ for a band and chain knife machine wherein
    the cutter is not randomly manipulable during cutting.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 202+ for a positive drive belt; and subclasses 237+ for a
    friction drive belt.


CLS 30/381
TXT Device under subclass 166.3 wherein the saw member comprises a plurality of
    cutter elements pivotally interconnected with one another forming a closed
    loop, said loop being wrapped about guide means, and including means for
    moving said loop through the path defined by said guide means.

    (1)     Note.  In the definitions of the subclasses indented hereunder, the
    phrase "cutting span" will be used to designate that portion of the loop
    transiently in engagement with the work during cutting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 788+ for a chain and band knife machine wherein
    the cutter is not hand manipulable during cutting.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 202+ for a positive drive belt and subclasses 237+ for a
    friction drive belt.


CLS 30/382
TXT Device under subclass 381 provided with a hood or casing or other
    protective member in close spaced association with the cutter elements to
    prevent harm to the operator or to prevent damage to the cutter elements
    while the device is in use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151+,   for cutting implement provided with a "sheath" to protect the blade
    while the implement is not in use.


CLS 30/383
TXT Device under subclass 381 in which at least a portion of the guide means
    comprises a relatively thin, generally flat member having a marginal edge
    portion which engages cutting elements along the cutting span and enters
    the kerf produced by the cutter elements during the cutting operation.


CLS 30/384
TXT Device under subclass 383 in which a second portion of the guide means
    comprises an idler-member in the form of a rotatable wheel, disk, or drum,
    in addition to the guide bar, which idler-member does not transmit driving
    force to the cutter elements.


CLS 30/385
TXT Device under subclass 384 in which means are provided to permit the
    position of the idler member to be changed with respect to the relatively
    thin, generally flat member.


CLS 30/386
TXT Including means to adjust guide bar relation to its support:Device under
    Subclass 383 wherein the generally flat portion of the guide means is
    provided with means to reposition that portion with respect to the
    remainder of the device.

    (1)     Note.  Adjustment of this subclass commonly  is to establish
    Tension on  the saw chain.


CLS 30/387
TXT Device under subclass 383 in which the relatively thin, generally flat
    member comprises a plurality of elements.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are guide bars which are laminated
    or formed from a plurality of relatively movable elements.


CLS 30/388
TXT Implement under subclass 166.3 in which the saw element is rotated during
    the cutting operation.

    (1)     Note.  For other rotary blade saws, see search notes under subclass
    166.3 of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    347,    and see the notes thereunder for other rotary blade, cutting tools.


CLS 30/389
TXT Implement under subclass 388 wherein the means which effects rotational
    movement of the rotary cutter is applied at the outer rim portion thereof.


CLS 30/390
TXT Device under subclass 388 provided with a hood or casing or other
    protective members in close, spaced association with the saw blade to
    prevent harm to the operator or to prevent damage to the saw blade.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151+,   for a cutlery implement provided with a "sheath" to protect the
    blade while the implement is not in use.


CLS 30/391
TXT Device under subclass 390 in which the position of the protective member
    can be shifted or moved away from its protective position.


CLS 30/392
TXT Device under subclass 166.3 including means to move the saw blade
    to-and-fro along its cutting edge.


CLS 30/393
TXT Device under subclass 392 in which the drive means causes the saw blade to
    have motions in addition to the to-and-fro movement along its cutting edge,
    said additional motions being in the same plane as said to-and-fro movement.


CLS 30/394
TXT Device under subclass 392 in which the drive means comprises an
    intermediate connector having a bearing at each end, one bearing connecting
    it to the saw blade or support for transmitting motion to the saw blade by
    a push and pull movement, the other bearing being connected to some force
    transmitting mechanism.


CLS 30/400
TXT Device under the Class Definition including at least one cutting element
    having one or more cutting edges for piercing through the wall of a closed
    metal container.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass and the subclasses indented
    hereunder, in addition to patents directed to implements, are patents
    directed to base mounted machines intended to open metal cans.  See
    paragraph (2) of the Class Definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for openers for paper receptacles.

    406,    for a can opener combined with sanitizing means.

    408,    for a can opener combined with another cutlery device.

    410,    for a can opener combined with a lid retaining means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound tools, subclasses 152+ for the combination of a hand held
    can opener and a diverse tool.

    81,     Tools, subclasses 3.07+ for receptacle closure removers in general.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 5 and 80+ for can openers having dispensing
    characteristics as a part thereof.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 461+ for a can opener combined with cutlery
    grinding means.


CLS 30/401
TXT Device under subclass 400 having means for:

    (a)     detecting any of the following characteristics:  a state or
    property; or a change in a state or property.  The occurrence of a
    predetermined event in any of the following:  the container or its
    contents; the can opener itself, or the environment of the can opener
    affecting the operation thereof; and,

    (b)     initiating or terminating (as a result of such detection) a force
    or impulse other than that generated or transmitted by the detecting means;
    and

    (c)     regulating or modifying (as a direct result of such initiation) the
    operation of the can opener.

    (1)     Note.  This definition requires a patent to claim at least 4
    instrument abilities for original placement herein.  One of these must be a
    can opener.  The other 3 are:

    (a)     a senser (e.g., trip lever, push button, photo cell system) to
    detect a condition as stated in (a) of the definition.

    (b)     an activator (e.g., an element to make-break an electric circuit, a
    clutch, a valve) to cause a release of energy more than, or different from
    that accounted for by mere change of condition (e.g., position or movement)
    of the senser while it is functioning, and

    (c)     a controller (e.g., a motor or driver) to change or cause the
    operation of the can opener.

            Therefore, a cam follower, (or senser) directly linked to the
    controller, whereby follower movement directly effects controller movement
    is not proper subject matter for this subclass due to lack of an activator
    as defined above.

            On the other hand, disclosure of a cam follower that makes and
    breaks an electrical circuit that energizes a motor, may be placed herein.

    (2)     Note.  Patents claiming an on-off switch for activating a motor
    circuit, and which is adapted to be voluntarily manipulated by the
    operative, will be placed as originals herein.

    (3)     Note.  The control system of this and indented subclasses is
    similar in concept to the control system of other classes, particularly
    Class 83, Cutting, especially subclasses 58+.


CLS 30/402
TXT Device under subclass 401 including a reciprocating cutting element driven
    by a prime mover (controller) and adapted to cut one or more holes in the
    can, and in which the cutting element, upon activation of the controller,
    is driven into the can from an original at-rest position, and then returns
    through a single cycle to its at-rest position without further input from
    the operative.


CLS 30/403
TXT Device under subclass 401 in which the cutting element traverses the wall
    of the container to detach a portion of the container wherein the detecting
    means senses completion of the cutting operation and the regulating means
    acts to stop the operation of the device.

    (1)     Note.  The stopping means may comprise a timing mechanism which, by
    disclosure, deactivates the controller (e.g., motor, etc.) at a point in
    time corresponding to the completion of the cutting operation.


CLS 30/404
TXT Device under subclass 403 wherein the cutting element is forced to traverse
    the metal of the can against a resistance developed between the cutting
    element and the can, including provision to detect the amount of resistance
    and stop the operation of the device if that resistance drops below a
    predetermined level.


CLS 30/405
TXT Device under subclass 401 including means to detect the presence or absence
    of a container and to energize or de-energize a controller in response to
    said detection.


CLS 30/406
TXT Device under subclass 400 combined with means to remove debris from or kill
    bacteria on the cutting element of the can opener.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123.3,  for a cutter of general utilization combined with means to apply
    transient fluid to the cutter.

    140,    for a cutter of general utilization combined with means to heat the
    cutting blade.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 292+ for sterilizing apparatus, per
    se.


CLS 30/407
TXT Device under subclass 400 including means (1) either inherent in the
    structure of the cutter element or (2) combined therewith, adapted to
    deform or bend the material of the container to form a pouring spout.


CLS 30/408
TXT Device under subclass 400 in combination with a noncan opener cutlery
    implement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142,    and see the notes thereto, for other combined cutlery.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, subclasses 152+ for the combination of a hand held
    can opener and a diverse tool.


CLS 30/409
TXT Device under subclass 400 having structure adapting the device for support
    or drive by either hand of an operative; i.e., the device is capable of
    being operated in either direction about the container.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a progressive fulcrum type can opener
    including a fulcrum extending from each side of the cutting blade.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256,    for a noncan opener cutter device adapted to either left or right
    hand operation.

    412,    for a can opener including two independent cutters.


CLS 30/410
TXT Device under subclass 400 including means to sever a portion from the
    container and means to either (1) prevent the severed portion from dropping
    into the container or (2) raise the severed portion out of the container.


CLS 30/411
TXT Device under subclass 400 combined with means to cover an opening in the
    container made by the cutting element wherein the device is completely
    disassociated from the can when it is desired to remove contents therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 267 and 277+, for metal can opening or
    arrangements made up as a part of or secured to the container during
    manufacture, and particularly subclass 278 for a cutting or puncturing tool
    which serves as a closure for the opening so cut or punctured, and which
    remains associated with the container while the same is being emptied of
    its contents.


CLS 30/412
TXT Device under subclass 400 including a first can opener and a second can
    opener that is adapted to operate without regard to the operation of the
    first can opener wherein the operation of the second can opener does not
    necessarily precede or succeed the operation of the first, or including a
    first cutting element and a second cutting element that is adapted to
    operate without regard to the operation of the first cutting element
    wherein the operation of the second cutting element does not necessarily
    precede or succeed the operation of the first element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    408,    for a can opener combined with a non- can opener cutlery device.

    415,    for a can opener including plural cutting elements sequentially
    operated in the same hole.


CLS 30/413
TXT Device under subclass 412 in which at least one of the can openers is of
    the type including an actuating handle that is lever-like, and including
    provision to establish a pivot point which (1) may be established by
    contact between the container and a portion of the handle engaging the
    container or (2) may be between the handle and a reaction member engaging
    the container, which device is intended to cut a continuous path in a
    series of cutting strokes wherein the pivot point is progressively
    translated relative to the container.


CLS 30/414
TXT Device under subclass 412 in which at least one of the cutting elements or
    can openers included at least one sharp cutting edge and is adapted to
    pierce through the wall of the container in a single stroke.


CLS 30/415
TXT Device under subclass 400 including a first cutting element adapted to
    pierce and form an opening in the wall of the container and including a
    second cutting element adapted to enter that previously pierced opening of
    the container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    446,    for a punch-type can opener including a cutting element with
    plural, spaced cutting edges.


CLS 30/416
TXT Device under subclass 400 particularly adapted to pierce a container
    composed of a generally planar wall and a generally cylindrical
    intersecting wall and including a chime (i.e., a bead formed at the joint
    or seam extending about the periphery of the planar wall), the device
    including an annular, driven, wheel-like member adapted to continuously
    engage the chime and thereby cause transversal of the cutting element
    relative to the container, during the opening operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    431,    for a can opener in which a lever is employed to drive a roller
    that intermittently engages the bead.


CLS 30/417
TXT Device under subclass 416 in which the cutting element is adapted to pierce
    the container.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is a can opener with a cutting
    element intended to pierce a cylindrical wall of the chime (or bead).


CLS 30/418
TXT Device under subclass 417 in which the cutting element is circular about a
    central axis, includes a cutting edge extending peripherally about the
    cutting element, and includes means to drive the cutting element about the
    axis as the cutting edge pierces and traverses the container.


CLS 30/419
TXT Device under subclass 416 including structure specifically intended to
    enable the cutting element to be readily removed by the operative.


CLS 30/420
TXT Device under subclass 416 wherein force applied to rotate the wheel-like
    member causes the cutting element to initially pierce the wall of the
    container.


CLS 30/421
TXT Device under subclass 420 which includes means to rotate the wheel-like
    member comprising a motor or other power source, as distinguished from a
    hand operated mechanism.


CLS 30/422
TXT Device under subclass 420 in which the cutting element is circular about a
    central axis, includes a cutting edge extending peripherally about the
    cutting element, and is supported to turn freely about the axis as the
    cutting edge pierces and traverses the container.


CLS 30/423
TXT Device under subclass 416 which includes means to rotate the wheel-like
    member comprising a motor or other power source as distinguished from a
    hand operated mechanism.


CLS 30/424
TXT Device under subclass 423 in which the cutting element is circular about a
    central axis, includes a cutting edge extending peripherally about the
    cutting element, and is supported to turn freely about the axis as the
    cutting edge pierces and traverses the container.


CLS 30/425
TXT Device under subclass 424 in which the circular cutting element is
    positively forced to rotate about the central axis during the opening
    operation.


CLS 30/426
TXT Device under subclass 416 in which the cutting element is circular about a
    central axis, includes a cutting edge extending peripherally about the
    cutting element, and is supported to turn freely about the axis as the
    cutting edge pierces and traverses the container.


CLS 30/427
TXT Device under subclass 426 in which the circular cutting element is
    positively forced to rotate about the central axis during the opening
    operation.


CLS 30/428
TXT Device under subclass 400 including a first cutting element and a second
    cutting element, the cutting elements cooperating so that their respective
    cutting edges move pass and in substantial contact with one another to
    perform the cutting operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194+,   for a shear of general application.

    431,    for similar structure in which a cutting element moves past but
    does not contact a cooperating reaction member.


CLS 30/429
TXT Device under subclass 400 including an actuating handle that is lever-like,
    and including provision to establish a pivot point which (1) may be
    established by contact between the container and a portion of the handle
    engaging the container or (2) may be between the handle and a reaction
    member engaging the container, which device is intended to cut an
    continuous path in a series of cutting strokes wherein the pivot point is
    progressively translated relative to the container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    409,    for a progressive fulcrum-type can opener which includes structure
    adapting the device to be operated in either direction about the opening
    formed in the container.

    413,    for a device including plural independent can openers wherein one
    of the openers is of the progressive fulcrum type.

    450,    for a can opener including a cutting element intended to pivot
    about a fulcrum, adapted to pierce a hole in a container.


CLS 30/430
TXT Device under subclass 429 adapted to pierce a container composed of a
    generally planar wall and a generally cylindrical intersecting wall in
    which the cutting element is adapted to pierce the generally cylindrical
    wall.


CLS 30/431
TXT Device under subclass 429 including a pivotable connection between the
    cutting element and the reaction member or the handle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    428,    for a similar device of the shear type, wherein the cutting element
    moves past and in substantial contact with the reaction member.


CLS 30/432
TXT Device under subclass 429 adapted to pierce a container composed of
    intersecting walls including structure in addition to the fulcrum adapted
    to extend along the side of the container during the cutting operation to
    engage a wall of the container and guide the cutting element along a path
    conforming to the periphery of the intersecting wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286,    and see notes thereunder for a non-can opener cutlery device with a
    guide.


CLS 30/433
TXT Device under subclass 400 including a force multiplying means employed to
    relatively turn the container and cutting element about a fixed point to
    force the cutting element to traverse the container.

    (1)     Note.  A simple lever or handle to be manipulated by the operator
    to relatively rotate the container and opener is not considered to be a
    force multiplying means under the definition of this subclass.


CLS 30/434
TXT Device under subclass 433 including a supporting base, wherein the force
    multiplying means is employed to turn the container relative to the cutting
    element and the base.


CLS 30/435
TXT Device under subclass 400 including (1) means to establish a pivot point
    between the cutting element and the container, which pivot point is
    generally in the center of the area to be removed, (2) means to be gripped
    by an operative to carry the cutting element about the pivot point, and (3)
    a cutting edge adapted to pierce and traverse the wall of the container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310,    and see the notes thereunder, for a noncan-opener sweep cutter.

    433+,   for a can opener including a sweep cutter and a force multiplying
    means to relatively rotate the container and opener.


CLS 30/436
TXT Device under subclass 435 including a base and structure for holding the
    container on the base against the force of gravity while the container is
    being opened.


CLS 30/437
TXT Device under subclass 435 in which the pivot point is determined by an
    element of the device other than the cutting edge, adapted to pierce
    through the top of the can.


CLS 30/438
TXT Device under subclass 437 in which the distance between the cutting element
    and the can penetrating pivot may change.


CLS 30/439
TXT Device under subclass 438 including a guide arm slidably mounted to either
    the cutting element or the piercing pivot means to cause rotation of the
    cutting element about the pivot and permit relative sliding movement
    between the same radially along the guide arm during the cutting operation.


CLS 30/440
TXT Device under subclass 439 in which the cutting element is circular about a
    central axis, includes a cutting edge extending peripherally about the
    cutting element, and is supported to turn freely about the axis as the
    cutting edge pierces and traverses the container.


CLS 30/441
TXT Device under subclass 438 in which the cutting element is circular about a
    central axis, includes a cutting edge extending peripherally about the
    cutting element, and is supported to turn freely about the axis as the
    cutting edge pierces and traverses the container.


CLS 30/442
TXT Device under subclass 435 having means to engage opposing surfaces of a
    wall of the container to frictionally hold and prevent movement of the
    container.


CLS 30/443
TXT Device under subclass 400 wherein the cutting element includes at least one
    sharp cutting edge and is adapted to pierce through the wall of the
    container in a single stroke.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    411,    and see the notes thereunder for a punch-type can opener combined
    with means to close a punched opening.

    414,    for plural independent can openers wherein one is of the punch type.


CLS 30/444
TXT Device under subclass 443 including a motor or other power source, as
    distinguished from a hand operated mechanism, employed to force the cutting
    element to move relative to the container to open the container.


CLS 30/445
TXT Device under subclass 443 comprising a cutting element including one or
    more cutting edges which lie along a line corresponding to the opening to
    be formed in the container and are adapted to cut substantially the entire
    periphery of the opening during a single stroke substantially normal to the
    wall of the container.


CLS 30/446
TXT Device under subclass 443 including a first cutting edge and a second
    cutting edge separated from the first, both edges adapted to pierce the
    container during a single operating stroke.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    412,    for a can opener having plural independently operated cutting
    elements.

    415,    for a can opener having plural, distinct, cutting elements adapted
    for sequential cutting in the same hole.


CLS 30/447
TXT Device under subclass 446 including a base and structure for holding the
    container on the base against the force of gravity while the container is
    being opened.


CLS 30/448
TXT Device under subclass 443 including a base and structure for holding the
    container on the base against the force of gravity while the container is
    being opened.


CLS 30/449
TXT Device under subclass 443 in which the cutting element is adapted to
    traverse the wall of the container after initially puncturing the same.


CLS 30/450
TXT Device under subclass 443 including an actuating handle that is lever-like,
    and including provision to establish a pivot point which (1) may be
    established by contact between the container and a portion of the handle
    engaging the container or (2) may be between the handle and a reaction
    member engaging the container.


CLS 30/451
TXT STATIC PENCIL SHARPENER:

    Device under the class definition adapted to shape a workpiece, consisting
    of or including a piece of attributable marking material (pencil), by the
    removal of a portion of an end or edge thereof, wherein the device
    comprises a cutter, and a holder or guide for the workpiece in static
    relation to the cutter.

    (1)     Note.  A static relationship is denoted when, aside from
    adjustability (as when a cutter is yieldingly urged against the work), the
    shaping operation requires no movement of the cutter relative to the
    workpiece holder of guide.

    (2)     Note.  A cutter having a notch into which the workpiece is inserted
    for the shaping operation (e.g., a V-shaped cutter) is considered to
    include a work guide for this and the indented subclasses.  A mere edge or
    surface against which the workpiece is steadied for shaping the end or edge
    thereof is likewise considered to be a guide for these subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151+,   for a sheathed-blade sharpening device, which may be an attachment
    for a pencil and has no work holder or guide; and subclasses 169+ for a
    pencil-sharpening device having a scraping blade but no work holder or
    guide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 28.1+ for a pencil sharpening machine
    wherein the cutter moves relative to a support therefor or relative to a
    work holder or guide.

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 1+ for a hand maneuvered work holder for a
    pencil-sharpening operation combined with a tool guide.

    407,    Cutters, for Shaping, subclasses 29.1+ for a pencil-sharpening file
    or rasp having no work holder or guide.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 461+ for an abrasive pencil sharpener with a
    wiper to clean the cut surface.


CLS 30/452
TXT Plural, sequentially engaged cutters:

    Device under subclass 451 including a plurality of successively employed
    cutters adapted to perform a plurality of shaping operations on a workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  To be considered successively employed, cutters must either
    be spaced from one another so that the workpiece must be separated from, or
    shifted along the device in order to be moved from one of the cutters to
    the other, or they must be diverse (i.e., cutters of a plurality of types
    from the group consisting of:  single wire, multiwire, single-blade,
    multiblade, abrasive, rasp, and any type distinct from these).


CLS 30/453
TXT With debris receiver:

    Device under subclass 451 including means, other than mere work holder or
    work guide structure specifically designed to receive and retain particles
    of material removed from the workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136+,   for an implement including a knife or scraper combined with means
    to hold or dispose of material which has been cut.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, subclass 15 for a work holder including a debris
    receptacle.


CLS 30/454
TXT Conical or cylindrical work holder or guide:

    Device under subclass 453 wherein the work holder of work guide is
    cylindrical or conical in shape and completely surrounds the end or the
    section adjacent the end of the workpiece to be sharpened.


CLS 30/455
TXT Surface type cutter:

    Device under subclass 453 wherein the cutter is in the form of a surface
    (e.g., planar surface) which comprises a multiplicity of cutting edges or
    points over which the end portion of the workpiece is drawn for the shaping
    operation.


CLS 30/456
TXT Workpiece drawn over transverse, single edge cutter:

    Device under subclass 451 in which the cutter has only one cutting edge
    transversely positioned to the direction the workpiece moves during the
    shaping operation.

    (1)     Note.  The cutting edge may be curved or angular (i.e., V-shaped).
    See (3) Note in subclass 451 concerning a V-shaped cutter.


CLS 30/457
TXT Having conical or cylindrical work guide:

    Device under subclass 451 wherein the work holder or guide is cylindrical
    or conical in shape or the section adjacent the end of the workpiece to the
    shaped.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    454,    for a pencil sharpener including a conical or cylindrical guide and
    a debris receptacle.

    456,    for a pencil sharpener including a conical or cylindrical guide and
    wherein a workpiece is movable transversely of a single-edge cutter.


CLS 30/458
TXT And mounting base or handle:

    Device under subclass 457 including either (a) structure engageable with a
    supporting surface, whereby the device may be stabilized on, or attached
    to, the surface; or (b) a specific manually engageable projection extending
    from the cutter or guide to provide for ease of use.


CLS 30/459
TXT With diverse feature:

    Device under subclass 458 wherein either the stabilizing structure or the
    projection is intended to serve a purpose different than and in addition to
    that required for the shaping operation (e.g., receptacle, pocket clip).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    453+,   for a pencil sharpener including a debris receptacle in the handle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 50+ for a
    mechanical pencil combined with a sharpener for the lead and wherein the
    pencil casing may serve as a handle during the sharpening operation.


CLS 30/460
TXT Open-ended for point protection during writing:

    Device under subclass 457 having an opening through the end thereof
    opposite and aligned with the entrance portion of the guide, which opening
    is large enough to permit the protrusion therethrough of only a reduced
    working end of the workpiece so as to permit retention of the device on the
    workpiece during, and without interference with, the marking operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclass 91 for a
    pencil-point protector which includes no sharpener structure.


CLS 30/461
TXT Adjustable or resilient cutter structure:

    Device under subclass 457 including a cutter or cutter support which is
    shiftable or yieldable to accommodate various sizes of workpiece, or to
    permit variation in the nature of the cut.

    (1)     Note.  A cutter which is fixed to a digitally compressible guide to
    tighten the cutter about the workpiece is considered yieldable or shiftable
    for this subclass.


CLS 30/462
TXT Surface type cutter:

    Device under subclass 451 wherein the cutter is in the form of a surface
    (e.g., planar surface) which comprises a multiplicity of cutting edges or
    points over which the end portion of the workpiece is drawn for the
    shaping operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172,    for a cutter having a plurality of scraper blades; and see subclass
    164.8 for a plural edge or point ice scraper.

    455,    for a pencil sharpener including a debris receptacle and a face
    type cutter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 83+ for a
    comminuter having openings through its face for passage of cut particles;
    and subclasses 168+, for a hand-manipulable comminution device.

    407,    Cutters, for Shaping, subclasses 29.1+ for a file or rasp, per se.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 344+, 490+, and 452+ for a portable abrading
    device.


CLS 30/475
TXT POWDERED PLANER:

    Device under the class definition having a base and an opening through the
    base, a tool having a cutting edge projecting through the opening, and a
    motor means adapted to drive the tool relative to a workpiece for the
    purpose of removing small amounts of wood from the workpiece to provide a
    flat or configured smooth surface thereon.

    (1)     Note.  The motor may drive the tool directly, or it may be linked
    thereto by a gear, chain, belt, or flexible drive.  The motor and/or drive
    need not be claimed.

    (2)     Note.  Art in this and indented subclasses is distinguishable from
    a planing machine in that a device classified herein is adapted to be
    manipulated by hand and moved in its entirety relative to a stationary
    workpiece, as opposed to a planing machine wherein the workpiece is adapted
    to be moved relative to a stationary planing device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    478+,   for a nonpowered bench plane, and appropriate subclasses for a hand
    manipulable cutting device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, particularly subclasses
    49.1+ and 98+ for a portable floor brushing and wiping machine, and
    subclasses 300.1+ for such a machine combined with air blast and/or suction
    application to the floor.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 114.1+ for a wood planing machine wherein
    the workpiece is adapted to be moved relative to the stationary machine.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 344+ for a portable abrading device.


CLS 30/476
TXT With rolling supports (e.g., wheels, casters):

    Device under subclass 475 mounted on rotational support members.


CLS 30/477
TXT Tool rotates about axis perpendicular to work:

    Device under subclass 475 wherein the cutting edge is carried by a member
    adapted to revolve about an axis normal to the planar surface of the
    workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    475     and 476, for a rotary material removing member mounted on an axis
    parallel to the workpiece.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 118 for a planing machine in which the
    cutting edge is set in the face of a disk and describes a circular path in
    contact with the workpiece.


CLS 30/478
TXT BENCH PLANE:

    Device under the class definition having a base, and a blade having a
    cutting edge, the blade being associated with the base at a predetermined
    angle thereto for the purpose of (a) removing wood from the work piece to
    provide a flat or configured surface thereon; or (b) removing a strip of
    wood from the workpiece of predetermined cross-section, e.g., toothpick.

    (1)     Note.  In use, the device is usually passed over the workpiece many
    times to produce the results of (a) above, but only once to provide a
    result of (b) above.


CLS 30/479
TXT Core box former type:

    Device under subclass 478 adapted to cut a channel having a rounded
    cross-section in a workpiece by means of an arcuate movement of the cutting
    edge relative to the base.

    (1)     Note.  Art in this subclass is of the type used to form a mold
    section adapted for casting cylindrical cores.


CLS 30/480
TXT Strip cutter:

    Device under subclass 478 adapted to remove a strip of wood of cut material
    having such a form predetermined cross-section from the workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  The strip of wood so removed is usually suitable for a
    predetermined application such as a splint or toothpick.


CLS 30/481
TXT With gauge or guide:

    Device under subclass 478 including means to measure a dimension or guide
    the plane along a limited or predetermined path.


CLS 30/482
TXT Having plane extension:

    Device under subclass 478 including means to enlarge the base.


CLS 30/483
TXT With lubricant dispenser:

    Device under subclass 478 including means adapted to supply a friction
    reducing substance to the base.


CLS 30/484
TXT To form configured or beveled surface:

    Device under subclass 478 adapted to either impart a specific
    configuration, shape, indentation or angled surface to the workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  A device classified herein creates, for example, a bevel,
    groove, bead, etc., on a surface of the workpiece.


CLS 30/485
TXT Changeable:

    Device under subclass 484 wherein the angle or configuration of the cut may
    be altered.


CLS 30/486
TXT Recess forming:

    Device under subclass 484 adapted to form a depression in a workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    485,    for a device having means to alter the base's configuration.


CLS 30/487
TXT Having means for adjusting cutting blade:

    Device under subclass 478 including a mechanism for adjusting the blade
    relative to the base.

    (1)     Note.  Planes in which the adjustment is made by loosening the
    blade and subsequently resetting it manually are not included in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 132 for planing machines with adjustable
    cutters.


CLS 30/488
TXT Pivoted lever and saw:

    Devices under subclass 487 wherein the mechanism includes a shaft adapted
    to turn about an axis intermediate its ends, and a threaded adjusting
    member engaging the blade shaft on one side of the axis, the shaft engaging
    the blade on the other side of the axis.


CLS 30/489
TXT Screw:

    Device under subclass 487 wherein the mechanism includes a threaded
    adjusting member engaging the blade.


CLS 30/490
TXT Adjustable mouthpiece:

    Device under subclass 478 including a channel for passage of material cut
    from a workpiece, and means for changing the channel's size.


CLS 30/491
TXT Handle or handle attaching means:

    Device under subclass 478 wherein significance is attributed to either (a)
    member adapted to be gripped by an operator, or (b) means to fasten the
    member to the device.


CLS 30/492
TXT Cutting blade clamp:

    Device under subclass 478 wherein significance is attributed to means for
    securing the blade in position.


CLS 30/493
TXT Cutting blade:

    Device under subclass 478 wherein significance is attributed to the blade.


CLS 30/494
TXT BILLIARD CUE TRIMMER:

    Device under the class definition adapted to shape an end of a billiard cue
    stick.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    473,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclass 1 for a device of this class
    (473) specifically adapted and intended to be used for resurfacing (e.g.,
    roughening), cleaning, or trimming the ball-projecting tips of cue sticks.


CLS 30/495
TXT CYLINDRICAL TENON CUTTER:

    Device under the class definition adapted to cut a cylindrical end portion
    of a workpiece having a circular cross-section.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    142,    Wood Turning, subclass 45 for a device including a hollow mandrel
    for cutting a threaded tenon.


CLS 30/500
TXT Subject matter under the class definition drawn to a hand manipulable
    cutting device adapted to be power operated, wherein the prime mover for
    the device may be easily detached there from so as to be used as the prime
    mover for some other power operated device.


CLS 30/501
TXT Having plural cutting edges:

    Device under subclass 166.3 including sets of cutting teeth carried on (a)
    a plurality of blades, or (b) a plurality of sides of a blade.


CLS 30/502
TXT Oppositely directly cutting edges:

    Device under subclass 501 wherein one set of cutting teeth face in a
    direction opposite from another set of cutting teeth.


CLS 30/503
TXT Simultaneously cutting:

    Device under subclass 501 wherein a plurality of the sets of teeth are
    adapted to engage with a workpiece at the same time.


CLS 30/503.5
TXT Parallel cutting:

    Device under subclass 503 wherein the sets of teeth are oriented in the
    same direction.


CLS 30/504
TXT Having tooth or blade protective or strengthening means:

    Device under subclass 166.3 including a protective cover or shield for the
    cutting teeth, or a reinforcing member for the blade to protect against
    breakage.


CLS 30/505
TXT With gauge for limiting depth of cut:

    Device under subclass 166.3 including a member adapted to restrict the
    blade to a predetermined amount of penetration into a workpiece.


CLS 30/506
TXT Mounted in truss frame (e.g., bucksaw):

    Device under subclass 166.3 including (a) a pair of arms attached to, and
    extending from, the blade at opposite ends; (b) a connector spaced from the
    blade, adapted to connect the arms; and (c) a tensioning member engaging at
    least one of the arms, adapted to exert tension upon the blade through the
    arms.


CLS 30/507
TXT Mounted in U-frame:

    Device under subclass 166.3 including a pair of generally parallel arms
    joined to form an open ended, "U" shaped support, the arms being adapted to
    hold the blade between the open ends.


CLS 30/508
TXT Offset blade:

    Device under subclass 507 wherein the blade is either fixed in, or
    adjustable to, a position which is laterally offset from the support.


CLS 30/509
TXT Coping saw:

    Device under subclass 507 having a relatively fine blade adapted to cut a
    curve, angle, or interior cut in a workpiece.


CLS 30/510
TXT Extensible:

    Device under subclass 507 wherein the support member can be varied in
    length or depth.


CLS 30/511
TXT Length and depth:

    Device under subclass 511 wherein both the length of the arms and the
    length of the structure connecting the arms may be adjusted.


CLS 30/512
TXT Collapsible frame:

    Device under subclass 507 wherein the support can be collapsed (e.g., for
    storage).


CLS 30/513
TXT Blade-tensioning means:

    Device under subclass 507 including a member adapted to exert tensile force
    upon the blade.


CLS 30/514
TXT With accessory or handle:

    Device under subclass 166.3 combined with means (a) designed to either be
    held by an operator (i.e., handle), (b) to otherwise enhance the operation
    of the device in its intended function, or (c) to perform an additional
    function, wherein significance is attributed to the means.


CLS 30/515
TXT Lubricant dispenser:

    Device under subclass 514 wherein the means includes a device intended to
    supply a friction reducing substance to the blade.


CLS 30/516
TXT Dust blower:

    Device under subclass 514 wherein the means includes a device intended to
    create a flow of air about the blade sufficient to remove particles of cut
    material.


CLS 30/517
TXT Handle:

    Device under subclass 514 wherein the means includes a member designed
    specifically to be manually grasped by an operator.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and its indents include patents with nominal
    recitation of saw structure.


CLS 30/518
TXT Offset:

    Device under subclass 517 wherein the grasped member is either fixed in, or
    adjustable to, a position which is laterally offset from the blade.


CLS 30/519
TXT Angularly adjustable:

    Device under subclass 517 wherein the grasped member can be selectively
    oriented at various angles relative to the blade.


CLS 30/520
TXT Double grip:

    Device under subclass 517 wherein the grasped member is adapted to be
    grasped by both the operator's hands.


CLS 30/521
TXT Spindle type (e.g., for double end cross-cut saw:

    Device under subclass 517 wherein the grasped member comprises a rod-like
    hand grasp whose longitudinal axis is coplanar with and substantially
    perpendicular to the blade.


CLS 30/522
TXT Having side clamping plates:

    Device under subclass 521 wherein the handle is secured to the blade by
    means of a pair of relatively flat plate elements placed on either side of
    the cutting blade and clamping the cutting blade there between.


CLS 30/523
TXT Fastener passes through transverse passage in handle:

    Device under subclass 521 including a fastening element adapted to secure
    the hand grasp to the blade and a transversely oriented opening in the hand
    grasp through which the fastening element passes.


CLS 30/524
TXT Fastener passes through longitudinal extending passage in handle:

    Device under subclass 521 wherein the element which secures the handle to
    the cutting blade extends or passes through a passage which follows the
    longitudinal axis of the handle.


CLS 30/525
TXT Scroll type:

    Device under subclass 517 wherein the grasped member has an opening adapted
    to receive the operator's fingers.


CLS 30/526
TXT Including particular handle or razor handle, per se:

    Subject matter under subclass 32 including specific detail of the structure
    of the portion of a razor to be grasped by the user or such portion alone.

    (1)     Note. Flexible handles (e.g., rubber) are placed here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    340+,   for a handle or blade connection for other cutlery devices.


CLS 30/527
TXT Having pivotal connection to blade:

    Subject matter under subclass 526 including means connecting the handle to
    a razor head, allowing a limited rotary motion of the razor head with
    respect to the handle.



    (1)     Note. For example, the limited rotary motion may occur about an
    axis parallel to the longitudinal axis of the handle, or an axis parallel
    to either the lateral or longitudinal axis of the blade, as shown in the
    preceding figure.

    (2)     Note. A razor with a bendable or deformable material serving as the
    only connection between a razor head and handle is included herein.

    (3)     Note. A razor having a pivotal connection between the blade and
    handle and can flex during the shaving operation is included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155+,   for a cutlery device in general having a blade that is pivotally
    attached to its handles.


CLS 30/528
TXT With blade extending longitudinally to handle:

    Subject matter under subclass 527 wherein the longitudinal axis of the
    handle is substantially  parallel to the longitudinal cutting edge of the
    blade during use.

    (1)     Note. Included herein is an old style or straight razor

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for a longitudinal razor having a detachable blade.


CLS 30/529
TXT Ball and socket joint:

    Subject matter under subclass 527 in which the means pivotally connecting
    the razor head to the handle comprises either (a) a spherical portion on
    the razor head seated in an adjacent cavity on the handle or (b) a
    spherical portion on the handle seated in an adjacent cavity on the razor
    head.



CLS 30/530
TXT Slotted pintle:

    Subject matter under subclass 527 in which the means pivotally connecting
    the razor head to the handle comprises either (a) a pin on the razor head
    extending into a groove in the handle or (b) a pin on the handle extending
    into a groove in the razor head, thereby permitting the pin to roll or
    slide along the longitudinal axis of the groove, as the razor head moves
    through a limited angle with respect to the handle.



CLS 30/531
TXT Including separate means to retain the joint in selected position:

    Subject matter under subclass 527 in which discrete means are provided to
    maintain the razor head in a predetermined position with respect to the
    handle.

    (1)     Note. The retaining means may  allow the razor head to flex with
    respect to the handle during the shaving operation.

    (2)     Note. Included herein are spring biased and threaded retaining
    means.


CLS 30/532
TXT With means to facilitate the assembly and disassembly of blade head from
    handle:

    Subject matter under subclass 527 in which  means are provided to allow a
    user to put together or take apart the razor head from the handle, such as
    for travel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    534,    for a threaded means to secure a razor head to a razor handle in a
    nonpivotal connection.


CLS 30/533
TXT Retractable pintle with limited motion:

    Subject matter under subclass 532 in which a pivot pin is carried by either
    the razor head or the handle and protrudes into an opening or recess in an
    adjacent razor head or handle, including means to permit limited axial
    movement of the pivot pin to withdraw it from the opening or recess and
    disconnect the two members.


CLS 30/534
TXT Having threaded connection means between blade and handle:

    Subject matter under subclass 526 in which the cooperating means to secure
    the razor head to the handle includes a helically ribbed member adapted to
    turn about its axis and engage an interfitting member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    532,    for a threaded member to secure a razor head to its handle by means
    of a pivotal connection.


CLS 30/535
TXT With receptacle:

    Subject matter under subclass 526 in which the handle forms a repository
    for various articles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40+,    for a razor holding magazine claimed in combination with a razor.

    125,    for cutlery devices in general in which the handle forms a
    receptacle.


    541,    for a receptacle not comprised of handle elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 110.5, and the notes thereto
    appended, for handles which also serve as receptacles.

    132,    Toilet, subclass 289 for shaving kits.


CLS 30/536
TXT Providing blade supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 535 where the receptacle stores one or more
    razor blades.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40+,    for a magazine, including a magazine holding blades, wherein a
    blade may be inserted into the razor head without being touched by the user.


CLS 30/537
TXT Attachment or accessory:

    Subject matter under subclass 32 including a discrete device to be used
    with a razor or attached to a razor not otherwise provided for designed to
    enhance the usefulness and improve the performance of the razor.

    (1)     Note. Included herein is an insert to  be placed between the blade
    edge and guard.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1       and 164, for an attachment or accessory  for a cutlery device.

    34.05+, for a razor combined with a guard, guide, or support.

    34.2,   for a razor combined with a skin tensioning device.

    42,     for a razor having means to provide motion to the blade.

    200+,   for a hair clipper combined with a cut regulator.

    400+,   for cutters combined with motive power devices, such as a motor or
    vibrator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 289+ for a shaving kit.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 47+ for a motor
    for a shaving appliance.


CLS 30/538
TXT Blade conditioner (e.g., blade lubricator):

    Subject matter under subclass 537 comprising a discrete device to treat the
    razor blade either before or after the shaving operation and provide some
    manner of treatment to improve or maintain the state of the blade.

    (1)     Note. To be included in this subclass the blade conditioner must be
    claimed as a separate device from the razor structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35+,    for a razor combined with a blade sharpening means.

    41+,    for a razor combined with a cleaning means.

    138+,   for a cutlery device in general, combined with a sharpener.


CLS 30/539
TXT Protective blade cover:

    Subject matter under subclass 537 comprising a removable protective shield,
    which preserves the cutting blade between uses.


CLS 30/540
TXT Made of flexible material:

    Subject matter under subclass 537 in which the protective cover is
    constructed of a pliable substance.

    (1)     Note. The flexible material of this subclass may be rubber,
    plastic, cloth, etc.

    (2)     Note. Material which protects the blade, but would permanently
    deform under any impact, such as aluminum, is not included herein.


CLS 30/541
TXT Razor holder or storage receptacle:

    Subject matter under subclass 537 comprising means to (a) engage the razor
    and retain it in one place or position or (b) encase the razor body between
    uses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    535,    for a receptacle formed from the handle of the razor.

    FOREIGN ART COLLECTIONS

    The definitions for FOR 100 - FOR 105 below correspond to the definitions
    of the abolished subclasses under Class 30 from which these collections
    were formed. See the Foreign Art Collection schedule for specific
    correspondences. [Note: The titles and definitions for indented art
    collections include all the details of the one(s) that are hierarchically
    superior.]


CLS 30/FOR100
TXT Foreign art collection including devices claiming the structure of
    razor handles, per se, or the relation of handle to other parts of a razor
    organization.


CLS 30/FOR101
TXT Foreign art collection including devices in which the handle forms
    a receptacle for various things.


CLS 30/FOR102
TXT Foreign art collection including devices in which the handle is
    connected by a pivot or like means to the razor blade or holder structure.


CLS 30/FOR103
TXT Foreign art collection including devices of the longitudinal or
    old style razor type.


CLS 30/FOR104
TXT Foreign art collection including devices in which the structure
    provides for varying the angular relation of handle and head, including
    universal adjustment.


CLS 30/FOR105
TXT Foreign art collection including devices to be used with razors
    not otherwise provided for, as, devices for shielding the cutting edge when
    the razor is not in use, inserts to be placed in a detachable razor to
    cause spacing of the blade edge and guard, liquid applying means such as
    oiling means, etc.


CLS 33/
TTL GEOMETRICAL INSTRUMENTS

CLS 33/
TXT This class provides for means for determining the characteristics and the
    mutual relation of points, lines, angles, surfaces, and solids, considered
    as having no properties but those arising from extension and difference of
    situation.  It includes mechanically guided means for describing lines.
    Processes or methods are classified in the appropriate subclasses with
    instruments unless specifically provided for by a process subclass.  For
    the most part specific subclasses are not provided for compound
    instruments; but an invention comprising matter classifiable in more than
    one specific subclass is placed in the subclass having the lowest number
    and cross-referenced into the subclass or subclasses having the higher
    number or numbers.

    (1)     Note.  This class includes the combination of recording means with
    significant measuring structures of the type provided for in this class.

    (2)     Note.  The following matter is excluded:The measurement of fluent
    material. Instruments falling in this class in combination with
    check-controlled means or in combination with a series of signals exceeding
    two.  Observation instruments in which the principle of operation depends
    upon diverting light.  Means for guiding or stopping tools other than
    scribers.Means for automatically assorting objects. Means connected with a
    device classifiable elsewhere to automatically indicate the relative
    position of movable parts of said device.  (This does not refer to means
    connected with a device classifiable elsewhere to indicate the position of
    said device with relation to other things not a part of the device).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, subclass 150 for hand saws combined with straight
    edges, levels, etc., to be used as gauges, try squares, etc.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 89.2 for the
    combination of a straightedge with a blotter.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclass for combinations of
    geometrical instruments with other characters of measuring and testing
    devices.

    84,     Music, subclasses 461+ for devices for recording the movement of
    keys of a keyboard.

    194,    Check-Actuated Control Mechanisms, appropriate subclasses for
    instruments of the type found in this class in combination with
    check-controlled means for restricting their use.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 13+ for electrical resistors whose
    resistance value is responsive to a condition or with a condition sensing
    actuator, no structure being claimed such as a meter for indicating the
    resistance value.  See also section XVI of the class definitions of Class
    338.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 870.01+ for telemetric
    means per se comprising electrical transmitting means in combination with
    means designed to be located at a distance having a movable indicator
    electrically controlled by the transmitter but not limited to any
    particular instrument. The combinations of telemetric signaling means with
    measuring means of the type provided for in Class 33 are in Class 33.

    346,    Recorders, appropriate subclasses for recorders, per se.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, for optical angle, distance,
    alignment, or configuration determining or measuring instruments, or other
    mensuration or fiducial instruments.  See sections III and V of the Class
    356 definitions for the particular measuring instruments found in Classes
    33 and 356.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 6+ for determining a
    distance or position by measuring a related thermal quantity.


CLS 33/1
TXT Inventions falling under the class definition not provided for in the
    following subclasses.


CLS 33/2
TXT Subject matter under the class definition for ascertaining the size and
    shape of clothing for the human body and for laying out the work from the
    data obtained.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18+,    for devices which may be used in scribing the outlines of patterns.

    175+,   for devices adapted to be adjusted to conform to a portion of the
    body and retain the form of that portion of the body when removed therefrom.

    178+,   when the dimension desired is one of circular size only.

    572     and 662, for devices for marking the position of buttons and
    buttonholes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 66+ for forms upon which garments may
    be fitted.


CLS 33/3
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2 relating to footwear.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclass 8.4, for fitting shoes.


CLS 33/4
TXT Means under subclass 3 employed in laying out footwear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    650,    for gauges for marking the location of buttons and buttonholes for
    shoes.


CLS 33/5
TXT Means under subclass 4 having shapes corresponding to the desired shape of
    the portion of the footwear being laid out.


CLS 33/6
TXT Methods under subclass 3 employed in taking measurements for or in laying
    out footwear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for methods employed in taking measurements for or in laying out
    apparel other than footwear.


CLS 33/7
TXT Instruments under subclass 2 for ascertaining garment dimensions having
    level or plumb attachments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    365+,   for level or plumb structure, per se.


CLS 33/8
TXT Instruments under subclass 2 having a portion adapted to rest on a support
    other than the body being fitted.


CLS 33/9
TXT Stand-supported instruments under subclass 8 for ascertaining the
    dimensions of skirts.  Usually gauges for marking the bottom of the skirt.


CLS 33/10
TXT Devices under subclass 9 having platforms upon which the person being
    fitted stands.


CLS 33/11
TXT Means under subclass 2 employed in laying out the garment on the cloth.
    Tailors' squares, unless especially designed for taking measurements from
    the body are considered laying out instruments and are classifiable here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403+,   for square and bevel and ruler structure generally.


CLS 33/12
TXT Means under subclass 11 having shapes or outlines corresponding to the
    desired shape of the portion of the garment being designed.  Also includes
    fabrics having pattern lines placed thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11      and 16, for curves and rules of various shapes which conform in
    part to the portion of the garment being laid out, but which are intended
    to be moved about from one side to another and not intended to correspond
    in shape to the entire portion under consideration.


CLS 33/13
TXT Devices under subclass 12 having perforated outlines through which the
    garment may be marked on the fabric.


CLS 33/14
TXT Devices under subclass 12 having relatively adjustable parts.


CLS 33/15
TXT Devices under subclass 14 adjustable by being placed upon the person and
    caused to conform thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    512+,   for gauges which will retain a shape corresponding to the shape of
    the object when removed therefrom.


CLS 33/16
TXT Means under subclass 11 adapted for laying out the garment, which have
    relatively adjustable parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14+,    for adjustable patterns and charts.


CLS 33/17
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2 comprising methods employed in taking
    measurements for and laying out apparel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for analogous methods involving footwear.


CLS 33/18.1
TXT SCRIBER:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising mechanically guided
    relatively traveling means for describing a line.

    (1)     Note.  The "means for describing a line" generally includes a
    scribing member.

    (2)     Note.  The scribing member may scratch, score, engrave, ink, pencil
    or mark by other means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    574+    and 666+, for devices having marking points, but in which no
    special means is provided for permitting travel of the point or in which
    both points are not designed for drawing lines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 164.9+ for hand manipulable devices for marking
    by means of cutting and subclass 310 for sweep cutters.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 174+ for a glassworking apparatus
    combined with a mechanical cutter, scorer or scriber; see the "Search
    Notes" thereunder.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 861+ for devices for cutting other than
    completely through work thicknesswise.

    84,     Music, subclasses 461+ for devices for recording the movement of
    keys of a keyboard.

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 42 for a woodworking machine which scores a
    board and slices it, and subclasses 136.1+ for a machine for longitudinally
    scoring and corrugating a wood surface.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 126+ for a means for making a guide line
    in the earth combined with some other earth working means and see other
    appropriate subclasses for means for making a furrow in the earth.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 48+ for devices for cutting
    metal by means of a blow torch.

    346,    Recorders, appropriate subclasses for machine responsive recorders.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling and Planing, subclasses 288+ for devices in
    which a cutting tool is rigidly set, so that it may not yield to the
    inequalities of the work surface, or in which the tool is given a relative
    travel in close-lying consecutive lines over the work and caused to produce
    solid effects by cutting during a portion of its travel only.

    413,    Sheet-Metal Ware, Making, subclass 55 for devices for making
    weakened lines in cans.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 59+ for machines which cut and score box
    blanks and machines which either cut or score such blanks and are
    especially designed for use in the manufacture of paper boxes.


CLS 33/18.2
TXT Writing:

    Subject matter under subclass 18.1 wherein the means for describing a line
    produces script.


CLS 33/18.3
TXT Perspective drawing:

    Subject matter under subclass 18.1 wherein the means for describing a line
    generates an oblique three-dimensional drawing from plan and elevational
    drafting views.


CLS 33/19.1
TXT Graduating:

    Subject matter under subclass 18.1 for scribing scale divisions on dials,
    rules and the like.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 221+ for an indexing
    device for a milling machine.


CLS 33/19.2
TXT Straightline:

    Subject matter under subclass 19.1 wherein the means for describing a line
    marks along a linear path.


CLS 33/19.3
TXT Circular:

    Subject matter under subclass 19.1 wherein the means for describing a line
    marks along a round path.


CLS 33/20.1
TXT Sight-line controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 18.1 wherein the movement of a scribing
    member is controlled by sighting means between the eyes of an observer and
    distant point.


CLS 33/20.2
TXT Course tracking:

    Subject matter under subclass 20.1 wherein an observer, moving to a fixed
    distant point, establishes at various points in his movement a line of
    sight through the sighting means to the distant point to note with the
    scribing member points in the path of the observer to the distant point.


CLS 33/20.3
TXT Perspective view tracing;

    Subject matter under subclass 20.1 wherein the sighting means moving about
    a distant scene causes movement of the scribing member to duplicate the
    distant scene.


CLS 33/20.4
TXT Stereoscopic mapping:

    Subject matter under subclass 20.1 wherein the sighting means views two
    stereoscopic images to control the scribing member.


CLS 33/21.1
TXT Curved surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 18.1 wherein the means for describing a line
    marks a surface that is not planar.


CLS 33/21.2
TXT Spherical:

    Subject matter under subclass 21.1 wherein the surface marked is a
    three-dimensional round surface or a portion of such a round surface.


CLS 33/21.3
TXT Pipe junction:

    Subject matter under subclass 21.1 wherein the surface is a first tube
    marked to show the intersection outline of a second tube on the surface of
    the first tube.


CLS 33/21.4
TXT Tumbler engraving:

    Subject matter under subclass 21.1 wherein the surface marked is a drinking
    glass.


CLS 33/22
TXT Devices under subclass 21 employing a pantographic movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23+,    for other pantographic scribers.


CLS 33/23.01
TXT Pantographic:

    Subject matter under subclass 18.1 which includes a tracing member designed
    to be grasped by hand and moved as desired and a scribing member so
    connected with the tracing member that movement of the tracing member
    causes a similar movement to be transmitted to the scribing member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for pantographic scribers for curved surfaces.

    41.1+,  for parallel line hand scribing gages comprising merely a bar
    having a guiding or tracing member at one end and a scribing member at the
    other where the entire instrument moves bodily.


CLS 33/23.02
TXT Single beam:

    Subject matter under subclass 23.01 wherein the tracing member and the
    scribing member are supported by the same elongated lever.


CLS 33/23.03
TXT Superposed carriages:

    Subject matter under subclass 23.01 wherein the means for describing a line
    includes plural movable supports each movable on a different transverse
    direction in a different plane.


CLS 33/23.04
TXT Sliding pivot:

    Subject matter under subclass 23.01 wherein the means for describing a line
    includes a guideway and a pin that frictionally contacts and follows the
    guideway.


CLS 33/23.05
TXT Opposite replica:

    Subject matter under subclass 23.01 wherein the scribing member produces an
    opposite curve to the curve traced by the tracing member.

    (1)     Note.  A symmetrical pattern may be traced by tracing one half of
    the pattern to produce an opposite half and the remaining half of the
    pattern is traced to produce the other negative half.


CLS 33/23.06
TXT Plural reproduction:

    Subject matter under subclass 23.01 which includes plural scribing members
    connected at the same time to the tracing member.

    (1)     Note.  Devices that duplicate a hand written signature are here.


CLS 33/23.07
TXT Pattern grading:

    Subject matter under subclass 23.01 wherein the scribing member produces a
    copy of an outline traced by the tracing member which is one of a group of
    copies which differ from each other not in configuration but the width of
    the outline.


CLS 33/23.08
TXT Pattern follower:

    Subject matter under subclass 23.01 which includes an outline and the
    tracing member contacts and moves around the outline to cause the scribing
    member to reproduce the outline.


CLS 33/23.09
TXT Human form:

    Subject matter under subclass 23.01 wherein the tracing member contacts the
    surface of a person and causes the scribing member to copy the same surface.


CLS 33/23.1
TXT Telautograph:

    Subject matter under subclass 23.01 wherein the tracing member and the
    scribing member are each connected to a separate means for describing a
    line remote from each other.


CLS 33/23.11
TXT Template and stylus details:

    Subject matter under subclass 23.01 which includes a (A) pattern, (B) a
    tracer member or (C) a scribing member when claimed in more than name only.


CLS 33/24.1
TXT Multiplane:

    Subject matter under subclass 23.01 wherein the tracing member and the
    scribing member move over different planes.


CLS 33/24.2
TXT Pendulum:

    Subject matter under subclass 24.1 wherein the tracing or the scribing
    member is mounted on a member pivoted at one end to move in an arc.


CLS 33/24.3
TXT Coaxial styli:

    Subject matter under subclass 24.1 wherein the tracing member and the
    scribing member have a common axis.


CLS 33/25.1
TXT Parallelogram type:

    Subject matter under subclass 23.01 in which the connection between the
    tracing and  the scribing members comprises four bars pivoted together in
    substantially the form of a parallelogram.


CLS 33/25.2
TXT Simple parallelogram:

    Subject matter under subclass 25.1 wherein the connection between the
    tracing and the scribing members is only four pivoted bars forming the
    parallelogram linkage.


CLS 33/25.3
TXT Universally parallel bar:

    Subject matter under subclass 25.1 wherein a parallel bar of the linkage,
    the tracer member or the scribing member has movement in addition to the
    motion caused by the parallelogram pentographic linkage.


CLS 33/25.4
TXT Progressive lettering:

    Subject matter under subclass 25.1 which includes structure to serially
    contact the tracing member with plurality of symbol patterns used in
    printing or writing.


CLS 33/25.5
TXT Tandem pantographs:

    Subject matter under subclass 25.1 wherein there are serial parallelogram
    linkage forming the connection between the tracing member and the scribing
    member.


CLS 33/26
TXT Devices under subclass 18 having means designed for producing curved lines
    and also means designed for producing straight lines.

    (1)     Note.  Patents are not crossed referenced from this subclass to
    subclass 27 or 32.


CLS 33/27.01
TXT Curved line:

    Subject matter under subclass 18.1 wherein the means for describing a line
    is designed for producing a line which is not straight.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for a device describing both straight and curved lines.

    558.01, for pivoted opposed contact distance measurers including dividers.

    810+,   for beam-trammal type distance measurers.


CLS 33/27.02
TXT Compass:

    Subject matter under subclass 27.01 which includes a pivot member and a
    scribing member rotating about the pivot member with a constant radius.


CLS 33/27.03
TXT Beam type:

    Subject matter under subclass 27.02 wherein a bar connects the pivot member
    to the scribing member.


CLS 33/27.031
TXT With scoring means:

    Subject matter under subclass 27.02 wherein the marking point is a member
    that scratches a surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 164.9+ for hand manipulatable device for
    working by means of cutting.


CLS 33/27.032
TXT Including scale:

    Subject matter under subclass 27.031 wherein the compass has a member with
    indicia for setting the compass to a desired measurement.


CLS 33/27.033
TXT With screw adjustment means:

    Subject matter under subclass 27.031 having a rotatable threaded member for
    moving the pivoted member.


CLS 33/27.04
TXT Circle forming frame support:

    Subject matter under subclass 27.01 which includes structure to support a
    circle scribing device at its pivot point.


CLS 33/27.05
TXT Circle forming roller:

    Subject matter under subclass 27.01 which includes two circular members
    having different diameters joined by a connecting member to have their
    centers on a common axis and a scribing member supported by the connecting
    member.


CLS 33/27.06
TXT Circle forming pin and jointed arm:

    Subject matter under subclass 27.01 which includes two movably connected
    members having a point at the intersection of the two members used to mark
    a point on a circle when each member at the same time touches a point on
    the circle.


CLS 33/27.07
TXT Circle forming rotating table:

    Subject matter under subclass 27.01 which includes a movable support
    turning about an axis coacting with the means for describing a line to form
    a circle.


CLS 33/27.08
TXT Conic section:

    Subject matter under subclass 27.01 wherein the curved line is produced by
    the intersection of a plane with a right circular cone and is not provided
    for elsewhere.


CLS 33/27.09
TXT Spiral:

    Subject matter under subclass 27.01 which includes a scribing member
    continuously circling about a point always increasing in size in a plane.


CLS 33/27.1
TXT Sine curve:

    Subject matter under subclass 27.01 which includes a scribing member moving
    in a path wherein each point in the path has a "y" coordinate equal to the
    sine of the angle corresponding to the same point.


CLS 33/27.11
TXT Rose engine:

    Subject matter under subclass 27.01 which includes a device to cause a
    scribing member to move in the shape of a rosette.


CLS 33/27.12
TXT Pattern follower:

    Subject matter under subclass 27.01 which includes an outline and a tracing
    member which contacts and moves around the outline to cause a scribing
    member to produce a curved line.


CLS 33/28
TXT Devices under subclass 27 designed for describing the outlines of lenses.


CLS 33/29
TXT Devices under subclass 27 designed for laying out stair curves.


CLS 33/30.1
TXT Ellipsograph:

    Subject matter under subclass 27.01 wherein the curve has a major and a
    minor axis with two foci on the major axis so that the sum of the distances
    from each focus to a point on the curve is equal to the length of the major
    axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27.01+, for nonelliptical curve scribers in which the scribing member is
    guided around a curved pattern which may or may not be elliptical in form.


CLS 33/30.2
TXT Pivoted circular pattern:

    Subject matter under subclass 30.01 which includes a round outline turnable
    to fixed positions about its diameter and a tracing member which contacts
    and moves about the outline at a fixed position to cause a scriber member
    to move in the shape of an ellipse.


CLS 33/30.3
TXT Pattern follower:

    Subject matter under subclass 30.1 which includes a shaped outline and a
    tracing member which contacts and moves about the outline to cause a
    scriber member to move in the shape of an ellipse.


CLS 33/30.4
TXT Harmonic component:

    Subject matter under subclass 30.1 which includes two transverse motion
    devices connected to the scribing member wherein at least one of the
    devices is adjustable to vary the length of the minor axis of the ellipse
    being scribed.


CLS 33/30.5
TXT Flexible cord type:

    Subject matter under subclass 30.1 wherein the means for describing a line
    includes a string having each string end held to a different focus point on
    the ellipse to be drawn and scribing member contacts the cord when taut at
    various positions to form points on the ellipse.


CLS 33/30.6
TXT Sliding leg:

    Subject matter under subclass 30.1 wherein the means for describing a line
    includes an axis and a member movable in the direction of the axis and
    simultaneously movable about the axis.


CLS 33/30.7
TXT Planetary scriber arm:

    Subject matter under subclass 30.1 wherein the means for describing a line
    includes a scribing member on a radius that moves about a first circle
    while simultaneously moving about a second circle so that the scribing
    member forms an elliptical motion.


CLS 33/31
TXT Devices under subclass 30 comprising two guides at right angles to each
    other and a scribing member having means to engage the guides.


CLS 33/32.1
TXT Straight-line:

    Subject matter under subclass 18.1 designed for producing (a) a line
    wherein any two points on the line have the same slope or (b) a figure
    composed entirely of straight lines.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for straight and curved lines.

    403+,   for a straight edge.


CLS 33/32.2
TXT Portable:

    Subject matter under subclass 32.1 wherein the means for describing a line
    or a figure composed of straight lines is constructed to be carried from
    place to place.


CLS 33/32.3
TXT Moving scriber:

    Subject matter under subclass 32.1 which includes a scribing member that is
    mounted for movement.


CLS 33/32.4
TXT And sheet:

    Subject matter under subclass 32.3 which includes means to move a sheet
    into contact with the moving scribing member.


CLS 33/32.5
TXT Stationary scriber and moving support or sheet:

    Subject matter under subclass 32.1 which includes a motionless scribing
    member and (a) a moving surface to move a sheet into contact with the
    scribing member or (b) a moving flat surface which moves into contact with
    the scribing member.


CLS 33/32.6
TXT Moving sheet:

    Subject matter under subclass 32.5 which includes the moving flat surface.


CLS 33/32.7
TXT Sheet support and handling details:

    Subject matter under subclass 32.1 which includes a scribing member and
    structure to (a) hold a sheet against the force of gravity or (b)
    manipulate a sheet before, during or after contact with the scribing member.


CLS 33/33
TXT Devices under subclass 32 designed for marking clapboards preparatory to
    sawing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    411,    for straight edges designed for marking clapboards.


CLS 33/34
TXT Devices under subclass 32 having members adapted to mark with ink.


CLS 33/35
TXT Devices under subclass 34 in which the marking member travels.


CLS 33/36
TXT Devices under subclass 35 which rotate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37+,    for other rotary straight line markers.


CLS 33/37
TXT Devices under subclass 34 having a rotary marking member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for traveling rotary markers.


CLS 33/38
TXT Devices under subclass 37 having means whereby the marking is interrupted
    during a predetermined interval of travel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for other blank space straight line markers.


CLS 33/39.1
TXT Blank space:

    Subject matter under subclass 34 having means whereby the marking is
    interrupted during a predetermined interval of travel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for rotary blank space straight line markers.


CLS 33/39.2
TXT Hand pen:

    Subject matter under subclass 39.1 wherein the marking member is manually
    operated.


CLS 33/40
TXT Devices under subclass 32 designed for ruling parallel lines having a
    positive gauge to limit the transfer of the ruling member from line to line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    450,    for straight edges employed as guides in like work.


CLS 33/41.1
TXT Parallel line:

    Subject matter under subclass 18.1 wherein the means for describing lines
    produces lines at any unvarying distance from each other throughout their
    length, or at an unvarying distance from a guiding edge or the like.

    (1)     Note. While this group of instruments is almost always employed in
    producing straight lines, still they are not necessarily limited to that
    use and are therefore not classifiable under the "Straightline" group.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 435 for a pen
    point or a pen holder.

    101,    Printing, subclasses 328+ for rolling contact printing implements
    for making parallel lines having no provision for mechanically guiding the
    implement.

    104,    Railways, subclass 244.1 for a vehicle guided for travel parallel
    to a furrow.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 126+ for an earth working means producing
    a marking line parallel to a furrow.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 34+ for plural
    exposed tools each with individual supply, subclasses 49+ for a pencil or
    chalk holder and subclasses 258+ for a stylus with coating material supply.


CLS 33/41.2
TXT Lettering guide:

    Subject matter under subclass 41.1 which includes a pattern, per se, to be
    used with a straight edge for guiding a scribing member to produce lines
    which determine the height of symbols to be printed.


CLS 33/41.3
TXT Rotary marker:

    Subject matter under subclass 41.1 which includes a scribing member which
    turns about a pivot point.


CLS 33/41.4
TXT Multi-marking:

    Subject matter under subclass 41.1 which includes a plurality of scribing
    members.


CLS 33/41.5
TXT Profile tracing:

    Subject matter under subclass 41.1 which includes a contact member to touch
    point by point a surface shape to be duplicated and a scribing member to
    duplicate each position point of the contact member.


CLS 33/41.6
TXT Single marker with spacing guide:

    Subject matter under subclass 41.1 which includes a scribing member and a
    guide connected to the member contacting a scribing surface to steady the
    member while in use.


CLS 33/42
TXT Devices under subclass 41 designed to be guided by the edge of the material
    upon which the line or lines are being produced.


CLS 33/43
TXT Devices under subclass 42 in which the edge contacting member is pivotally
    adjustable with respect to the gauge bar.


CLS 33/44
TXT Devices under subclass 42 having more than one scribing point.


CLS 33/45
TXT Devices under subclass 41 designed to be used on machines, as distinguished
    from hand instruments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34+,    for machines for ruling straight lines by the application of ink
    and which usually carry devices of the type found in this subclass.


CLS 33/121
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising integrating means for
    determining superficial extent directly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for planimeter type calculators for determining geometrical
    properties other than area, such as mean radius, mean square foot radius,
    and moment of inertia of area.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 379+ for optical area or
    volume integrators.


CLS 33/122
TXT Area integrators under subclass 121 having a tracing member designed to
    travel around the outline of the area to be determined, and frequently
    specially designed to determine effective pressure and horsepower from
    engine indicator diagrams.


CLS 33/123
TXT Area integrators under subclass 121 having electrically operated mechanism.


CLS 33/124
TXT Area integrators under subclass 121 employing one or more rolling contact
    distance measurers as a part of the structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129+    and 141+, for rolling contact distance measurers.


CLS 33/193
TXT Devices under subclass 501 designed to determine the form of axles.


CLS 33/194
TXT Devices under subclass 501 designed for fitting doors and windows or their
    surrounding parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    197,    for gauges designed for laying out mortises for hinges or locks.


CLS 33/195
TXT Devices under subclass 501 designed for determining the shape of hoofs in
    preparing shoes for the same.


CLS 33/196
TXT Devices under subclass 501 designed for determining the trueness of
    millstone faces.


CLS 33/197
TXT Devices under subclass 501 designed for laying out mortise work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18+,    for scribers designed for this purpose.


CLS 33/199
TXT Devices under subclass 501 designed to determine characteristics of screw
    thread structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143+,   for special contact members used with "opposed contact" instruments
    for taking the diameter of the threaded bar.

    501.7+, for gauges having means to determine the lead angle or spur gearing.


CLS 33/200
TXT Devices under subclass 501 designed to be employed in fitting spectacles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclasses
    200+ for eye examining and testing instruments.


CLS 33/201
TXT Devices under subclass 501 designed to determine the form of tools.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    626+,   for gauges for collocating tools.


CLS 33/202
TXT Devices under subclass 201 designed to determine the form of saws.


CLS 33/203
TXT Devices under subclass 501 designed for determining the form or trueness of
    wheels.


CLS 33/203.1
TXT Devices under subclass 203 specially constructed for gauging watch wheels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclass 6 for watchmakers' tools.


CLS 33/203.11
TXT Devices under subclass 203 for determining the shape or contour of a wheel
    tread.


CLS 33/203.12
TXT Devices under subclass 203 provided with means for supporting the wheels
    undergoing test.


CLS 33/203.13
TXT Devices under subclass 203.12 in which the supports are rollers or drums.


CLS 33/203.14
TXT Devices under subclass 203.12 in which the supports are pivoted or sliding
    scuff boards.


CLS 33/203.15
TXT Devices under subclass 203 which contact the axle or wheel and are
    supported on a base, usually a floor.


CLS 33/203.16
TXT Subject matter under subclass 203.15 for determining the radius of the
    wheel, or its variation from a plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203.19, for axle vehicle or wheel supported devices.


CLS 33/203.17
TXT Subject matter under subclass 203.15 in which contacting members are
    slidingly mounted on a beam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203.2,  203.21 and 810+, for other trammel type devices.


CLS 33/203.18
TXT Wheel gauges under subclass 203 which are supported by the axle, vehicle or
    wheel.


CLS 33/203.19
TXT Subject matter under subclass 203.18 having wheel contacting members for
    determining the radius of a wheel or its variation from a plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203.16, for floor supported devices.


CLS 33/203.2
TXT Subject matter under subclass 203.18 in which contacting members are
    slidingly mounted on a beam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203.17, 203.21 and 810+, for other trammel type devices.


CLS 33/203.21
TXT Wheel gages under subclass 203 having wheel contacting members slidingly
    mounted on a beam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203.17, 203.2 and 810+, for other trammel type devices.


CLS 33/227
TXT Devices or method under class definition utilizing nonrefracted light rays
    and direct sighting for determining the characteristics and the mutual
    relations of points, lines, angles, surfaces and solids considered as
    having no properties other than those arising from extension and/or
    relationship of position or location.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for a sight line controlled scriber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for a geometric
    instrument combined with measuring and testing.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for an
    optical geometrical instrument which includes significant optical
    structure; and see the class definition, section V for the relationship to
    Class 33.

    362,    Illumination, appropriate subclasses for means for throwing a beam
    of artificial light in a straight line, including devices in which size of
    the beam may be varied.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 163+ for
    apparatus for measuring a dimension and/or locating the position by
    measuring means of an object combined with an X-ray device.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 373+ for light deflecting camera
    viewfinders.


CLS 33/228
TXT Method under subclass 227.


CLS 33/229
TXT Device under subclass 227 including means for sighting an object upon which
    it is desired to drop a bomb or other air dropped projectile and which
    includes means for determining or compensating for one or more of the
    following factors; air or ground speed of an aircraft, speed of a moving
    target, altitude of the craft, angular relation between the course of the
    aircraft and target, the moment of releasing the bomb, and other fixed or
    variable factors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    89,     Ordnance, subclasses 1.51+ for devices for holding and releasing
    bombs, flares and signals from aircraft.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives subclasses 382+ for explosive devices
    designed to be dropped, usually from air or water craft, upon an objective
    below.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 15 and 19+ for training in
    the use of gun or bomb sights.


CLS 33/230
TXT Device under subclass 299 including gyroscopic means maintaining the
    equilibrium of the device with respect to a given reference plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236,    for an ordnance type gun sight including a gyroscope.

    318,    for a gyroscopically controlled or stabilized direction indicator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 5+ for a gyroscope
    combined with other structure.


CLS 33/231
TXT Device under subclass 229 including means for measuring and indicating the
    velocity of the moving craft with respect to the ground.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 488+ for a device there provided
    responsive to a speed condition.


CLS 33/232
TXT Device under subclass 227 for use with an aerial or marine craft for
    measuring and indicating the velocity of the moving craft with respect to
    the ground or a fixed object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231,    for an aircraft ground speed indicator combined with an aerial bomb
    sight.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 488+ for a device there provided
    responsive to a speed condition.


CLS 33/233
TXT Device under subclass 227 comprising (1) attachments for guns whereby a
    line of sight may be established parallel to the longitudinal axis of the
    gun barrel or at an angle relative thereto, or (2) means for supporting the
    device on or attaching it to a gun.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses take gun and sight
    combinations where only so much of the gun is included or modified as is
    necessary to accommodate the sight.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, appropriate subclasses for gun and sight combinations
    involving more gun structure than is necessary for the mere accommodation
    of the sight.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 247+ for similar subject
    matter including significant optical structure.

    434,    Education and Demonstration subclasses 19+ for a device for
    instructing or training in the use of a gunsight.


CLS 33/234
TXT Device under subclass 233 so structured or shaped as to permit its
    installation within the bore of a gun.


CLS 33/235
TXT Device under subclass 233 for use with mounted or heavier caliber guns,
    e.g., howitzer, cannon, mortar, anti-aircraft gun, etc.


CLS 33/236
TXT Device under subclass 235 including gyroscopic means for maintaining the
    equilibrium of the device with respect to a given reference plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230,    for an aerial bomb sight including a gyroscope.

    318+,   for a gyroscopically controlled or stabilized direction indicator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 5+ for a gyroscope, per
    se, and especially subclass 5.22 for a gyroscope combined with other
    structure.

    235,    Registers, subclass 407 for gyroscopic means which provides
    electrical signals or mechanical movements to a computing device to
    compensate for weapon movement (e.g., tilt, roll, etc.).


CLS 33/237
TXT Device under subclass 235 including means for establishing or maintaining a
    desired angular relation between the line of sight and the barrel axis of a
    moving gun, without manual adjustment of the sighting member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 5.22 as the generic place
    for gyroscopes combined with other structures.

    89,     Ordnance, subclass 41 for the combinations, of a sight and gun with
    gun moving means responsive to angular movement at the sight.

    235,    Registers, subclasses 404+ for ordnance control calculators wherein
    the azimuth and elevation angles of the gun are determined in order to
    strike a given target.


CLS 33/238
TXT Device under subclass 237 including means to correct for or offset the
    effect of a target having movement relative to the gun.


CLS 33/239
TXT Device under subclass 238 including means to correct for or offset the
    effects of relative movement of the firing craft (e.g., aircraft or gun
    carrier).


CLS 33/240
TXT Device under subclass 237 including means to correct for or offset the
    effects of nonlevel condition of the gun trunnion or uneveness of the
    ground upon which the gun carriage rests.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclass 407 for means providing electrical signals or
    mechanical movements to a computing device to compensate for trunnion tilt.


CLS 33/241
TXT Device under subclass 233 including an incandescent component or a
    component made of self-illuminating material, e.g., fluorescent,
    phosphorescent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 458.1+ for radiant energy devices in
    which fluorescent or phosphorescent properties utilized.

    362,    Illumination, appropriate subclasses for an illuminating device
    combined with other structure.


CLS 33/242
TXT Device under subclass 233 including a component having a particular color
    or being constructed of a specific material and wherein the performance of
    its intended function is materially enhanced by the use of such color or
    material.


CLS 33/243
TXT Device under subclass 242 having a particular color.


CLS 33/244
TXT Device under subclass 233 including covering means to protect the device
    from damage or to prevent glare from the device being reflected into the
    eye of the user.


CLS 33/245
TXT Device under subclass 233 wherein the sight comprises a tubular optical
    instrument or a mount for such instrument.


CLS 33/246
TXT Device under subclass 245 including a system of lines, dots, cross hairs,
    wires or the like in the focal plane of the device and provided with means
    to displace or selectively move the lines, cross hairs, etc. relative to
    each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    297,    for a sight line device of more general utility having an
    adjustable reticule.


CLS 33/247
TXT Device under subclass 245 wherein the sight or its support may be moved
    with respect to the gun barrel or stock upon which it is mounted.


CLS 33/248
TXT Device under subclass 247 wherein the sight or its support is movable both
    in a direction transverse to the line of sight and in an up or down
    direction.


CLS 33/249
TXT Device under subclass 247 wherein the sight or its support may be readily
    installed on or moved from an operative position to an out of the way
    nonuse position.


CLS 33/250
TXT Device under subclass 245 wherein the sight or its support may be readily
    installed on or removed from a gun barrel or stock without the necessity of
    removing bolts, screws, fasteners or the like or without the use of tools.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    245,    for sight mounts.


CLS 33/251
TXT Device under subclass 233 provided with means permitting adjustment of the
    size of the sight opening.


CLS 33/252
TXT Device under subclass 233 wherein the sight may be moved with respect to
    the gun barrel or stock upon which it is mounted.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this and indented subclasses are patents to
    sights which are movable to compensate for range, windage or the velocity
    of a moving target.


CLS 33/253
TXT Device under subclass 252 comprising a series of sights mounted upon a
    common pivot wherein either (1) the entire series may be rotated to bring a
    desired sight into use position or (2) a single sight of the series may be
    individually and selectively rotated to bring it into use position.


CLS 33/254
TXT Device under subclass 252 wherein the sight may be moved upwardly or
    downwardly relative to the longitudinal axis of the barrel.


CLS 33/255
TXT Device under subclass 254 wherein the sight may also be folded to an
    inoperative position.


CLS 33/256
TXT Device under subclass 255 wherein the sight may also be moved in a
    direction transverse to the line of sight.


CLS 33/257
TXT Device under subclass 254 wherein the sight may also be moved in a
    direction transverse to the line of sight.


CLS 33/258
TXT Device under subclass 257 wherein the vertical movement is effected by
    displacement of the sight other than in a straight line.


CLS 33/259
TXT Device under subclass 254 wherein vertical adjustment is effected by
    displacement of the sight other than in a straight line.


CLS 33/260
TXT Device under subclass 259 wherein displacement of the sight is about an
    axis which is normal to the longitudinal axis of the barrel.


CLS 33/261
TXT Device under subclass 233 comprising a single sighting device having a
    plurality of sight directing elements spaced at a predetermined distance or
    angle with respect to each other, which elements may be selectively used
    without adjustment of parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    253,    for plural sights in which selective use of a single sight is
    effected by manual adjustment of parts.

    276+,   for a multisight line device of more general application.


CLS 33/262
TXT Device under subclass 227 which is supported from or related to some part
    of a user's body.


CLS 33/263
TXT Device under subclass 227 installed in or mounted upon a device performing
    a function external to the subject matter of this class, the installation
    being made in such a manner as not to interfere with the normal operation
    of the device.


CLS 33/264
TXT Device under subclass 263 installed in or mounted upon a vehicle.


CLS 33/265
TXT Device under subclass 263 installed or mounted upon a archer's bow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, for an archery bow and a sighting
    means therefor.


CLS 33/266
TXT Device under subclass 263 installed or mounted upon a camera.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    396,    Photography, subclasses 373+ for light deflecting camera
    viewfinders.


CLS 33/267
TXT Device under subclass 227 including means for transmitting the
    determination to a distant indicator or recorder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 870.01+ for telemetric
    means, per se, comprising electrical transmitting means in combination with
    means designed to be located at a distance having a movable indicator
    electrically controlled by the transmitter but not limited to any
    particular instrument.


CLS 33/268
TXT Device under subclass 227 including means for locating the position of a
    heavenly body or means by which an observer may determine his own
    geographic location by direct observation of the heavenly body.


CLS 33/269
TXT Device under subclass 268 including means whereby the time of day may be
    determined.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, appropriate
    subclasses for time measuring instruments, per se.


CLS 33/270
TXT Device under subclass 269 including an element which by the position or
    length of its shadow cast upon a dial or surface indicates the time of day.


CLS 33/271
TXT Device under subclass 270 including means responsive to an external
    magnetic field, usually that of the earth, for indicating direction.


CLS 33/272
TXT Device under subclass 227 including means responsive to an external
    magnetic field, usually that of the earth, for indicating direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300+,   for a direction indicator, per se, responsive to an external
    magnetic field.


CLS 33/273
TXT Device under subclass 272 including means responsive to terrestrial
    gravitation for indicating deviation from a horizontal or vertical plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    365+,   for a level or plumb, per se.


CLS 33/274
TXT Device under subclass 227 having a marker, rule, protractor, square or the
    like adapted to be used in plotting or in forming geometrical figures on a
    map or chart, the sides and angles of which correspond to various positions
    and angles taken by the sighting instrument.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 75+ for a straight edge type
    geometric instrument.


CLS 33/275
TXT Device under subclass 227 comprising a device in addition to or combined
    with the straight line light ray type instrument (1) having functions other
    than determining the characteristics or mutual relations of points, lines,
    angles, surfaces and solids or (2) serving to perfect the instrument for
    its intended function.


CLS 33/276
TXT Device under subclass 227 including a plurality of means for directing the
    eye of an observer along different lines of sight without adjustment of
    parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261,    for similar type gunsight.


CLS 33/277
TXT Device under subclass 276 in which the different lines of sight are taken
    from the same sight directing means.


CLS 33/278
TXT Device under subclass 276 wherein at least one of the sight directing means
    may be moved or adjusted with respect to another.


CLS 33/279
TXT Device under subclass 278 wherein the sight directing means are movable
    both about an axis and in a straight line relative to each other.


CLS 33/280
TXT Device under subclass 278 wherein each sight directing means may be moved
    or adjusted independently of another.


CLS 33/281
TXT Device under subclass 227 for measuring both an angle which is in a plane
    perpendicular to the plane of the horizon and an angle which is in the
    plane of or parallel to the horizon.


CLS 33/282
TXT Device under subclass 227 for measuring an angle which is in a plane
    perpendicular to the plane of the horizon.


CLS 33/283
TXT Device under subclass 282 wherein the magnitude of the angle is measured by
    means of a gravity actuated or pendulous indicating means.


CLS 33/284
TXT Device under subclass 282 including means for determining the distance from
    the instrument.


CLS 33/285
TXT Device under subclass 227 for measuring an angle in the plane of or
    parallel to the horizon.


CLS 33/286
TXT Device under subclass 227 including means for positioning, or determining
    the position of, one object with respect to another; e.g., tool and work
    piece or a part of an object with respect to another part, e.g., shaft.


CLS 33/287
TXT Device under subclass 286 comprising means for aligning railway track.


CLS 33/288
TXT Device under subclass 286 for positioning or determining the position of
    automotive wheels, headlamps or frame parts with respect to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228,    for methods for positioning or determining the position of
    automotive components.


CLS 33/289
TXT Device under subclass 286 comprising means for locating a ball
    longitudinally of a playing field with reference to a previous location of
    the ball on the field.


CLS 33/290
TXT Device under subclass 227 comprising a sighting instrument including means;
    e.g., bubble in a liquid, or pendulum, to indicate and/or effect adjustment
    to the horizontal of the line of sight of the device.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this and indented subclass are devices for
    determining the difference in altitude between two points but provided with
    no angle measuring scales.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282,    for a vertical angle measurer.

    365+,   for a level, per se.


CLS 33/291
TXT Device under subclass 290 wherein adjustment to the horizontal is effected
    by means requiring no manual handling of the device; e.g., means responsive
    to terrestrial gravitation.


CLS 33/292
TXT Device under subclass 290 wherein the sighting means comprises an elongated
    tubular housing which may be provided with a lens.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    245+,   for a telescopic type gun sight.


CLS 33/293
TXT Device under subclass 227 comprising (1) a graduated rod useable in
    conjunction with a surveyor's instrument located at a point remote from the
    rod for measuring the vertical distance between a point on the ground and
    the line of sight of the instrument or (2) other devices; e.g., target,
    usable in conjunction with the instrument to distinguish the terminal end
    of the line of sight.


CLS 33/294
TXT Device under subclass 293 wherein the rod includes means permitting the
    difference in elevation between the two points to be read directly from the
    rod without computation.


CLS 33/295
TXT Device under subclass 293 including means responsive to terrestrial gravity
    for use in aligning the rod vertically or horizontally with respect to a
    defined reference point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    365+,   for a level or plumb, per se.


CLS 33/296
TXT Device under subclass 293 wherein the rod comprises a plurality of
    slideably or telescopically connected sections which may be longitudinally
    adjusted relative to each other.


CLS 33/297
TXT Device under subclass 227 including a system of lines, dots, cross hairs or
    the like in the focal plane of the device.


CLS 33/298
TXT Device under subclass 297 wherein the lines, cross hairs or the like may be
    displaced or selectively moved relative to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246,    for a telescopic gun sight having an adjustable reticle.


CLS 33/299
TXT Device under subclass 227 comprising means for mounting the device upon a
    supporting structure for supporting the device against the pull of gravity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    245,    for means for mounting or supporting a telescopic type gun sight
    upon a gun.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses for supports of more general
    application, especially subclasses 163.1+ for a plural leg support, e.g.,
    tripod and subclasses 176+ for means for supporting an article on a stand.


CLS 33/300
TXT Device or method under the class definition for indicating a direction
    related to that of some force (e.g., magnetic field, gravity etc.), of the
    type which will pass through a natural media (e.g., air, earth, water), the
    media apparently being passive to such passage, and not elsewhere
    classified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    355+,   for an instrument there provided for having, as a perfecting
    feature, an indicator of direction of force traversing natural media.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 178+, for navigating instruments
    in general, and subclasses 170.01+ for indicators of directions of fluid
    flow.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 5.22 as the generic place
    for gyroscopes combined with other structures.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 244 for devices for
    determining magnetic field strength and for devices generic to the
    determination of, or the determination of both, magnetic field strength and
    direction.

    434,    Education and Demonstration subclasses 111, 186, and 239+ for
    devices for instructing or training in the use of direction indicators,
    including devices for simulating compasses and for simulating their
    performance under conditions encountered in actual use.


CLS 33/301
TXT Process under subclass 300.


CLS 33/302
TXT Process under subclass 301 involving the study of the interior of a
    borehole or tube.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 152.01+ for borehole testing, per
    se, and subclass 152.57 for a borehole casing study, per se, wherein the
    test is not purely electrical or purely magnetic.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 250.01+ for processes there provided for
    including indicating testing, measuring, or locating.


CLS 33/303
TXT Device under subclass 301 for coordinating a plurality of variables in a
    directional indicator system by a mathematical process, e.g., computing, or
    by matching one variable against another; such as found in gyroscopically
    controlled directional indicators.


CLS 33/304
TXT Device under subclass 300 comprising means for determining the bearing, or
    deviation from the vertical, of a deep hole in the earth, such as well
    bores.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302,    for processes used in determining the direction or inclination of
    boreholes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 152.01+ for means for measuring
    or testing other physical conditions of well bores.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 44 for a process or means
    for determining the orientation of a core sample, while in situ, combined
    with a step or means for cutting the core and subclass 45 for a process or
    means to determine the direction or inclination of an earth boring tool
    located in a bore hole combined with more than a nominally recited boring
    step or nominally recited boring apparatus.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 853.8 for a wellbore
    telemetering system having orientation sensing of the subsurface equipment.


CLS 33/305
TXT Device under subclass 304 wherein said determining means includes a liquid
    which reacts with or makes an impression on a cylinder or platen to record
    the deviation of the borehole.


CLS 33/306
TXT Device under subclass 304 wherein the borehole direction or inclination
    indicator reacts to or is controlled by the presence or motion of a fluid
    within the borehole.


CLS 33/307
TXT Device under subclass 306 wherein the inclination of the borehole is
    interpreted from pressure changes in the drilling fluid at the borehole
    outlet or from generated pressure surges in the drilling fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 37+ for measuring and testing
    means utilizing fluid pressure.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 81+ for wellbore acoustic wave telemetering, per se.


CLS 33/308
TXT Device under subclass 304 including a pendulum for determining inclination
    and further including means for marking a surface to give a permanent
    record of the inclination, and wherein said marking means is carried by or
    guided by the pendulum.


CLS 33/309
TXT Device under subclass 308 wherein the marking means includes (1) wave
    energy transmitted through a natural media and guided through the pendulum
    to the record surface or (2) an electrically conducting point on the
    pendulum which produces a marking spark between the pendulum and record
    surface or marks the record surface by electrolysis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    314,    for other radiant energy produced marking.


CLS 33/310
TXT Device under subclass 308 provided with means influenced by a magnetic
    field to determine the bearing of the well bore.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    313,    for other borehole inclination and directional indicators.

    355,    for magnetic indicators in general.


CLS 33/311
TXT Device under subclass 308 wherein the record surface is normally spaced
    from the pendulum marker and wherein means is provided for imparting
    movement to the record surface to move the record surface into engagement
    with the pendulum marker.


CLS 33/312
TXT Device under subclass 304 including an electrical telemetering circuit for
    transmitting an indication of the direction or inclination of the borehole
    to a receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    363,    for electrical telemetering circuits utilized in magnetic field
    responsive devices and see the search notes thereto for the loci of other
    electrical telemetering circuits in this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 853.1+ for borehole
    electrical telemetric means, per se.


CLS 33/313
TXT Device under subclass 304 including means for determining both the bearing
    of the borehole and the deviation of the borehole from the vertical.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310,    for a borehole pendulum inclinator and magnetic heading indicator.

    351+,   for other plural directional indicators.


CLS 33/314
TXT Device under subclass 304 provided with a record member (film) which reacts
    to light to produce an optical counterpart of the direction or inclination
    indicator, or an optical impression of the orientation of the indicator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    309,    for a pendulum directed radiant energy marker.


CLS 33/315
TXT Device under subclass 300 including means responsive to a change in
    temperature, the responser influencing the indication.

    (1)     Note:  Provision for the accommodation of change in size, due to
    change in temperature, has not been placed in this subclass unless it
    effects the indication. For instance, a bubble level including means to
    accommodate a change in liquid volume with change in temperature, so that
    the bubble may remain substantially constant in size, is in this subclass
    while a liquid buoyed magnetic needle type compass with similar liquid
    expansion provision will be found in subclass 364.


CLS 33/316
TXT Device under subclass 300 wherein a magnetic field sensitive device
    (compass, flux valve) is utilized to monitor a directional gyroscope by
    orienting the gyroscope in the direction of the magnetic meridian.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    318+,   for a gyroscopically controlled or stabilized directional
    indicator, especially subclass 319 for a magnetic compass which is
    controlled or stabilized by a gyroscope.


CLS 33/317
TXT Device under subclass 316 including an electrical telemetering circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    363,    for electrical telemetering circuits there provided for.


CLS 33/318
TXT Device under subclass 300 including a gyroscope utilized to (1) indicate
    direction or (2) maintain the equilibrium of a directional indicator or
    datum structure with respect to a reference plane (plurality of
    coordinates).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 504.02+ for a gyroscope combined
    with a speed responsive device.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 5+ for special features of
    gyroscope, per se, and especially subclass 5.22 as the generic place for
    gyroscopes combined with other structure.

    114,    Ships, subclasses 21.1 and 24 for gyroscopically controlled torpedo
    steering mechanism, subclass 122 for gyroscopic antirolling stabilizers
    combined with ships, and subclass 144 for gyroscopic controlled steering.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 79 for gyroscope actuated automatic aircraft
    control.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 18+ for gyroscope
    actuated follow-up systems of electric motor control and subclass 489 for
    automatic motor control in response to direction.


CLS 33/319
TXT Device under subclass 318 wherein a directional indicator influenced by an
    external magnetic field is additionally controlled or stabilized by the
    gyroscope.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    316,    for a directional gyroscope con- trolled by a magnetic compass.

    355+,   for a magnetic compasses, per se.


CLS 33/320
TXT Device under subclass 318 wherein the gyroscopic means is used to indicate
    the latitude or longitude of the point on the earth's surface occupied by
    the gyroscope.


CLS 33/321
TXT Device under subclass 318 comprising two or more gyroscopes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 5.34 for special features of
    plural gyroscopes, per se.


CLS 33/322
TXT Device under subclass 321 including means for indicating two or more
    different directions (e.g., heading and attitude).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    328+,   for a single gyroscope combined with plural attitude indications.

    351+,   for other diverse directional indicators.


CLS 33/323
TXT Device under subclass 321 wherein one of said gyroscopes is utilized to
    indicate direction and another of said gyroscopes is utilized to apply a
    correcting or controlling force to a component of said first gyroscope or
    said first gyroscope system to maintain the equilibrium thereof.


CLS 33/324
TXT Device under subclass 318 in which one or more gyroscopic rotors are
    arranged to seek a known direction relative to the meridian as by
    precession induced by couples applied directly as indirectly through the
    action of gravity.


CLS 33/325
TXT Device under subclass 324 including means to transmit the direction
    indication from the gyroscope to an indicator separated from the gyroscope,
    usually a repeater compass.


CLS 33/326
TXT Device under subclass 324 provided with means to compensate for forces or
    disturbances causing deflection in the meridian seeking action of the
    gyroscope by presetting the compensating means to a desired position.
    Included in this subclass are adjustable means for correcting the readings
    of such compasses for errors due to the speed, course or latitude of the
    craft on which they are carried.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    356+,   for correcting devices for magnetic field responsive indicators.


CLS 33/327
TXT Device under subclass 324 including fluid means for (1) wholly or partially
    supporting the gyroscope components or (2) applying a force to the
    gyroscope, as in the air jet controlled type or the liquid ballistic type
    of gyroscope.


CLS 33/328
TXT Device under subclass 318 wherein the gyroscopic means is used to indicate,
    with respect to a horizontal plane, the extent of right or left tilt of a
    craft or upward or downward tilt of a craft on which the gyroscope is
    mounted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 488+ for attitude indicators
    combined with speed responsive devices.


CLS 33/329
TXT Device under subclass 328 including an indicator comprising a pivotally
    mounted rigid arm, and a background member for the indicator, and wherein
    both said rigid arm indicator and background member are connected to
    components of the gyroscope.


CLS 33/330
TXT Device under subclass 328 wherein the gyroscopic indicator is in the form
    of a sphere or a segment thereof.


CLS 33/331
TXT Device under subclass 300 having means for making a discrete record of the
    sensed direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304+,   for borehole direction or inclination indicators, many of which
    include a recorder.


CLS 33/332
TXT Device under subclass 300 combined with means for making a visible sign,
    impression or tracing on a surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305,    for a liquid used in marking borehole direction.

    308,    for a pendulum mounted or directed marker used with borehole
    indicators.


CLS 33/333
TXT Device under subclass 300 including means relating it to a peculiarity of a
    device serving some function other than that of indicating direction.


CLS 33/334
TXT Device under subclass 333 related to a portable implement designed to be
    held by a person while it performs its intended function.


CLS 33/335
TXT Device under subclass 300 particularly adapted for cooperation with the
    running gear, or with the headlights, of a vehicle for determining a
    deviation (e.g., caster and/or camber angle, headlight alignment) thereof
    from the horizontal or vertical.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203+,   for other vehicle wheel alignment gauges.

    288,    for a vehicle chassis, running gear, or head lamp, alignment device
    utilizing a straight line light ray instrument.


CLS 33/336
TXT Device under subclass 335 supported entirely by a wheel, or wheels, of the
    vehicle.


CLS 33/337
TXT Device under subclass 335 supported entirely by an axle, or axles, of the
    vehicle.


CLS 33/338
TXT Device under subclass 300 provided with means for determining the gauge and
    level of a railway track.


CLS 33/339
TXT Device under subclass 300 having combined therewith a cord, or a cord
    holder, adapted, when stretched tight, to form a straight line guide member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    353,    for the combination of a bubble level and a plumb line, both of
    which fall within the class definition, wherein the plumb line may also
    serve as a vertical straight line guide.

    392+,   for a plumb line which may also serve as a vertical straight line
    guide.


CLS 33/340
TXT Device under subclass 300 having combined therewith means for
    simultaneously measuring an extent in two or more directions or measuring a
    nonlinear shape.


CLS 33/341
TXT Device under subclass 340 including means for measuring an angle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    343,    for a direction indicator combined with angle or shape
    determination.


CLS 33/342
TXT Device under subclass 300 having combined therewith means for making a
    linear determination, this means being independent of the determination of
    direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    375,    for a level or plumb having relatively moveable reference surface
    sections wherein the relative position is related to the direction being
    determined. Linear indicia may be utilized to indicate the relative
    position of the sections.


CLS 33/343
TXT Device under subclass 300 combined with means for determining an angle or a
    non- linear shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    341,    for a direction indicator combined with both an angle indicator and
    plural distance measurers.


CLS 33/344
TXT Device under subclass 300 having means whose function is to dampen, or
    otherwise control the rate of motion of, the direction sensing and/or
    indicating portion thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    355+,   for a magnetic compass having means to latch the magnetic needle in
    a fixed position.

    368,    for a level or plumb having means to latch the direction indicator
    in a fixed position.


CLS 33/345
TXT Device under subclass 344 wherein the damping means includes a generator of
    a magnetic field.


CLS 33/346
TXT Device under subclass 344 wherein the damping means includes a fluid and
    means on, or actuated by, the direction sensing and/or indicating portion
    coacting with the fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327,    for fluid supported, gyroscopic compass components, the fluid
    producing a damping effect.

    364,    for a magnetic compass including a liquid buoyed magnetic needle,
    the liquid producing a damping effect.

    396,    for a liquid buoyed pendulum, the liquid producing a damping effect.


CLS 33/347
TXT Device under subclass 300 provided with means for mounting a directional
    indicator on an object or supporting member by (1) glue or other viscous
    substance,  (2) the force of magnetism, or (3) atmospheric pressure acting
    on the indicator by reason of a reduced pressure beneath the indicator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370+,   for other means for attaching a level or plumb to the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 205.5+ and 309.3 for vacuum mounted brackets
    and 206.5 and 309.4 for magnetic mounted bracket.


CLS 33/348
TXT Device under subclass 300 having means to assist the person viewing the
    indicating portion of the device, said means including either an
    illuminator, (e.g., lamp, fluorescent paint, etc.), an illumination
    director (e.g., mirror) or an optical viewer (e.g., magnifying lens,
    microscope, etc.).

    (1)     Note.   An illuminator, illumination director, or optical viewer
    used as a part of a telemetering system (e.g., electric eye system) or as
    the indicator (e.g., oscilloscope) will be found in the appropriate
    subclasses below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, appropriate subclasses for the combination of an
    illuminator and some other device wherein no novelty of the other device is
    indicated.


CLS 33/348.2
TXT Subject matter under subclass 348 wherein the illuminator is electrically
    powered and the device is a spirit level.


CLS 33/349
TXT Device under subclass 300 having means, in addition to the force responsive
    direction indicator, which is selectively positioned to indicate the
    desired orientation of some structure with respect to the indicated
    direction of the force.


CLS 33/350
TXT Device under subclass 300 having added thereto means to shelter all or part
    thereof, to cushion the device as a whole, or to otherwise protect the
    device from physical damage.

    (1)     Note.   Included in this subclass are such things as storage
    casings and covers and shock absorbing work attaching means. Shock
    absorbing features within the device, such as fluid supported direction
    sensors (see subclasses 327, 346+, 364, and 396), have not been placed here
    since they affect the device in its use and are thus an essential part
    thereof rather than being combined therewith.


CLS 33/351
TXT Device under subclass 300 provided with (1) two different types of
    directional indicators, or (2) two different kinds of the same type, e.g.,
    bubble and float.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    313,    for means for indicating the inclination and direction of boreholes.

    322,    for diverse indicators controlled by plural gyroscopes.


CLS 33/352
TXT Device under subclass 351 wherein one of the directional indicators is
    influenced by an external magnetic field (e.g., combined magnetic compasses
    and inclinometers).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310,    for a pendulum inclinator and a magnetic heading indicator for
    boreholes.

    313,    for inclination and direction indicators for boreholes.

    355+,   for magnetic compasses, per se.


CLS 33/353
TXT Device under subclass 351 wherein one of the directional indicators is a
    pendulum weight suspended by a flexible line and another directional
    indicator is a bubble formed in a closed receptacle, nearly filled with
    liquid.


CLS 33/354
TXT Device under subclass 300, (1) combined with subject matter of another
    class or (2) united with a second device, said second device having a
    function serving to perfect the class device for its intended function.


CLS 33/355
TXT Device under subclass 300 comprising means influenced by an external
    magnetic field, usually that of the earth, and either (1) indicating a
    direction or deviation from a direction, related to that of the field or
    (2) controlling a telemetering system to an indicator of such direction or
    deviation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310,    for a magnetic compass supported on a pendulum for use in a
    borehole.

    313,    for means indicating inclination and direction, usually magnetic,
    of a borehole.

    316+,   for a gyromagnetic compass.

    319,    for a gyroscopically stabilized magnetic compass.

    352,    for a magnetic compass combined with a different directional
    indicator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 259 for testing a
    magnetic field by using a permanent magnet (e.g., compass needle).

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 302+ for permanent magnets of a particular
    structure or material.


CLS 33/356
TXT Device under subclass 355 including means for indicating the amount of,
    preventing the effect of, or compensating for the effect of some force
    other than that of the magnetic field under investigation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    344+,   for a direction sensing indicator having means to dampen, or
    otherwise govern, motion of the sensor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclass 293 for
    somewhat similar structures employed on watches and the like.


CLS 33/357
TXT Device under subclass 356 wherein the means prevents the extraneous force
    from affecting the magnetically influenced means by either absorbing said
    extraneous force or providing an opposing force of an equal amount.


CLS 33/358
TXT Device under subclass 357 wherein a permanent magnet is utilized to produce
    the opposing force.


CLS 33/359
TXT Device under subclass 358 wherein the permanent magnet is supported for
    pivotal or swinging movement.


CLS 33/360
TXT Device under subclass 355 wherein either the means influenced by the
    magnetic field, the telemetering system, or the indicator includes a
    cathode-ray tube projecting a deflectable electron beam, the deflection
    being related to the direction or deviation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing subclass 250 for testing a
    magnetic field by a cathode ray beam.


CLS 33/361
TXT Device under subclass 355 wherein the means influenced by the external
    magnetic field is either an electromagnet (e.g., electromagnetic compass
    needle) or an inductor (e.g., armature, flux valve, flux gate, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    363,    for a magnetic compass utilizing an electromagnet or an inductor in
    a telemetering circuit.


CLS 33/362
TXT Device under subclass 361 including an inductor, i.e., armature and means
    to rotate it, or to vibrate it, through the magnetic field under
    investigation.


CLS 33/363
TXT Device under subclass 355 including an electrical telemetering circuit.

    (1)     Note.   The combinations of telemetric signaling means with
    measuring means of the type provided for, are in this class (33).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 870.01+ for telemetric
    means, per se, comprising electrical transmitting means in combination with
    means designed to be located at a distance having a movable indicator
    electrically controlled by the transmitter but not limited to any
    particular instrument.


CLS 33/364
TXT Device under subclass 355 wherein the means influenced by the external
    magnetic field is a magnetic element (i.e., compass needle) partially or
    wholly supported by a liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    346+,   for a liquid buoyed compass needle having means secured thereto, or
    operated thereby, for the sole purpose of cooperating with the liquid to
    produce a damping effect.


CLS 33/365
TXT Device under subclass 300 responsive to terrestrial gravitation and
    establishing either a horizontal or a vertical direction.


CLS 33/366
TXT Device under subclass 365 including an electrically actuated signal or
    indicator, under the control of the part which is responsive to terrestrial
    gravitation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312,    for a borehole direction or inclination device including electrical
    telemetering of the sensed condition.


CLS 33/367
TXT Device under subclass 365 including separable, independently movable liquid
    containers interconnected by a liquid conductor, the upper surfaces of the
    liquid in the containers establishing a horizontal direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    377+,   for other liquid levels utilizing the upper surface of the liquid.


CLS 33/368
TXT Device under subclass 365 including means for securing the direction
    indicator in a fixed position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    344+,   for means including a portion whose function is to resist, or
    otherwise govern, motion of the direction sensor.


CLS 33/369
TXT Device under subclass 365 including, or adapted to cooperate with, a line
    in such a manner as to indicate when the line is horizontal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    373,    for a level or plumb provided with a clamp, loop or strap for
    encircling attachment to a workpiece.


CLS 33/370
TXT Device under subclass 365 including means adapted for attachment to a
    workpiece or to a person handling a workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333,    for a force responsive direction indicator installed in a device
    performing some disparate function, the relationship of the indicator to
    the device going beyond a mere supporting relationship.


CLS 33/371
TXT Device under subclass 370 adapted for attachment to the workpiece without
    any modification thereof.

    (1)     Note.   Nails and screws modify the workpiece.


CLS 33/372
TXT Device under subclass 371 wherein the attaching means includes an elastic
    member exerting a yieldable clamping force upon the workpiece or workman.


CLS 33/373
TXT Device under subclass 371 wherein the attaching means includes a part
    encompassing the workpiece.


CLS 33/374
TXT Device under subclass 365 including a plurality or relatively moveable
    members, each having a surface adapted for simultaneous contact with a
    workpiece, and which surfaces together determine that direction of the
    workpiece which is to be related to the level or plumb.


CLS 33/375
TXT Device under subclass 374 wherein the members are moveable in such a
    manner, that an imaginary line between the workpiece contact surfaces
    thereof will be shifted in its relationship to the level or plumb during
    such movement.


CLS 33/376
TXT Device under subclass 365 including a surface for cooperation with a
    workpiece to determine a direction thereof, the surface involving several
    separable parts which cooperate to enlarge or diminish the effective
    surface by adding on, taking away, or substituting parts.


CLS 33/377
TXT Device under subclass 365 including a body of liquid having an upper
    surface indicative of terrestrial gravitational direction, this upper
    surface either serving to indicate or to control an indicator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304+,   for congealing or solidifying substance used to determine borehole
    inclination.

    367,    for a level of the plural, interconnected, separable, liquid
    columns type.

    396,    for a pendulum type of level or plumb wherein liquid is utilized
    for its buoyant effect in supporting the pendulum.


CLS 33/378
TXT Device under subclass 377 wherein an element is supported by the liquid,
    the element serving to indicate or to control an indicator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    396,    for a level or plumb indicator of the pendulum type wherein the
    pendulum is wholly or partially supported by liquid.


CLS 33/379
TXT Device under subclass 377 wherein the liquid is within, and nearly filling,
    a closed receptacle, sufficient space being left superjacent the upper
    surface of the liquid to simulate a bubble.


CLS 33/380
TXT Device under subclass 379 provided with means for quantitatively changing
    the bubble simulating space.


CLS 33/381
TXT Device under subclass 379 including a plurality of said nearly filled
    receptacles.


CLS 33/382
TXT Device under subclass 381 wherein the two nearly filled receptacles are so
    related that they function simultaneously and at an angle to each other,
    thus determining two horizontal lines which in turn determine a horizontal
    plane.


CLS 33/383
TXT Device under subclass 381 wherein the receptacles are adjustable in their
    relationship to each other.


CLS 33/384
TXT Device under subclass 379 wherein the nearly filled receptacle is supported
    by a member having a surface of reference, usually adapted to be placed
    against a workpiece, the support being such as to provide for adjustment of
    the receptacle with respect to said surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    374+,   for a level of plumb having relatively movable, coacting reference
    surface sections.


CLS 33/385
TXT Device under subclass 384 including a cam (e.g., screw thread, gear, wedge,
    etc.) for controlling the amount of adjustment.


CLS 33/386
TXT Device under subclass 385 including a resilient member exerting its force
    in opposition to one direction of motion of the cam.


CLS 33/387
TXT Device under subclass 385 provided with means on the receptacle and the
    member for indicating the relative position of adjustment.


CLS 33/388
TXT Device under subclass 384 provided with means on the receptacle and the
    member for indicating the relative position of adjustment.


CLS 33/389
TXT Device under subclass 379 wherein the nearly filled receptacle is supported
    by a member having a surface of reference, usually adapted to be placed
    against a work piece, the member having thereon indicia for cooperating
    with the bubble to indicate the position thereof with respect to the
    reference surface.


CLS 33/390
TXT Device under subclass 379 wherein the receptacle is so shaped as to either
    (1) define a level plane as distinguished from a level (horizontal) line or
    (2) have two separate and distinct sections for cooperation with the
    bubble, usually one section to indicate level and the other to indicate
    plumb.


CLS 33/391
TXT Device under subclass 365 wherein the responsive portion is a body, so
    supported as to be free to swing to a position wherein (1) its center of
    gravity, or (2) its center of buoyancy, is utilized to determine the
    vertical.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    308+,   for a pendulum controlled indicator of borehole inclination.


CLS 33/392
TXT Device under subclass 391 wherein the body is a plumb bob suspended by a
    flexible line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 403 for a paper weight and
    subclass 404 for other generic, weighting means.


CLS 33/393
TXT Device under subclass 392 including means about which the flexible line is
    wound for storage or for adjusting effective line length.


CLS 33/394
TXT Device under subclass 393 provided with resilient means for urging the line
    to a retracted position.


CLS 33/395
TXT Device under subclass 391 wherein two bodies are so related that they
    function simultaneously and in planes at an angle to each other.


CLS 33/396
TXT Device under subclass 391 wherein the body is supported, partially or
    wholly, by a liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    378,    for a level of plumb indicator including a float or piston related
    to the upper surface of a body of liquid.


CLS 33/397
TXT Device under subclass 391 wherein the pendulum is so suspended as to
    incline freely in any direction (e.g., universal joint, ball and socket,
    etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    308+,   for gimbal supported borehole direction indicators with a recorder.


CLS 33/398
TXT Device under subclass 391 wherein the body includes means for adjusting it
    quantitatively or for adjusting its center of gravity.


CLS 33/399
TXT Device under subclass 391 including an indicium for indicating a
    relationship of some other part to the suspended body, the indicium being
    adjustably fixed to either the body or to the carrier from which the body
    is suspended.


CLS 33/400
TXT Device under subclass 399 wherein the adjustably fixed relationship is
    controlled by an operating cam, e.g., screw, gear, wedge, etc.


CLS 33/401
TXT Device under subclass 391 including means for transmitting motion from the
    suspended body to the indicating means, such as links, gearings, nonrigid
    coupling means, (e.g., magnetic, etc.)


CLS 33/402
TXT Device under subclass 391 wherein the supporting structure for the
    suspended body is such as to prevent complete freedom of swing about said
    axis.


CLS 33/403
TXT STRAIGHTEDGE TYPE:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising means having a
    straight edge, slot, or the like for testing, measuring, fixing, or drawing
    straight lines.

    (1)     Note.   Straightedges may differ only in their indicia or scales,
    which differences, however, make some of them more useful for one purpose
    than any other.Thus, in order to classify such straightedges with those
    limited by structure to the same purposes, some specific or "ultimate"
    functions of straightedges have been designated as the bases for
    classification in some of the subclasses indented under this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for various other plotters and for protractors not provided with a
    straightedge designed to be set at various angles.

    32+,    for similar devices having scriber attachments.

    196,    for devices for truing millstone faces that sometimes include
    straightedge features.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 89.2 for the
    combination of a straightedge with a blotter.

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, subclass 91 for a straightedge
    disclosed for use as a tearing edge for web or sheet.

    235,    Registers, appropriate subclasses for mechanical calculating
    devices.

    434,    Education and Demonstration subclasses 111, 186, and 239+ for
    devices for instructing or teaching navigation.


CLS 33/404
TXT Wall guide and plumb (e.g., building construction):

    Subject matter under subclass 403 wherein the device, as disclosed, is to
    be used in the construction of buildings, especially where the upright
    portion of the building may form an outside wall or inner partition.


CLS 33/405
TXT Batter board type:

    Subject matter under subclass 404 comprising upright board type devices
    erected at the corners of a building foundation or lot over which
    horizontal lines are stretched to define the shape of the building,
    positions of walls, and the like.


CLS 33/406
TXT Adjustable vertically:

    Subject matter under subclass 404 wherein the devices can be moved in an up
    or down direction along the building or wall portion.


CLS 33/407
TXT Building is the vertical support:

    Subject matter under subclass 404 wherein the building or a wall portion is
    the support for the guide.


CLS 33/408
TXT Connected to brick:

    Subject matter under subclass 407 wherein the wall is a brick wall and the
    wall guide is directly connected to a brick in the wall.


CLS 33/409
TXT By line tension only:

    Subject matter under subclass 408 wherein the wall guide is a line which is
    stretched by a spring-type mechanism from one end of a brick wall portion
    to another.


CLS 33/410
TXT Having adjustable clamp:

    Subject matter under subclass 408 comprising a device connected to a brick
    or wall portion which is adapted to be varied in its position along the
    brick or wall portion.


CLS 33/411
TXT Clapboard marking:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 comprising devices supported or
    positioned for marking building materials prior to sawing.


CLS 33/412
TXT Shaft aligning:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 comprising a device utilized as a
    straight line guide for positioning rodlike machine elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    339,    for a cord type straight line guide including a level or plumb.


CLS 33/413
TXT Cord type:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 wherein the straightedge is a flexible
    line connected at one end to a support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404+,   for other flexible lines guides which are used in building
    construction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 370+ for a reeling
    device for holding a cord when no specific chalking feature is defined.


CLS 33/414
TXT With chalking feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 413 having means for applying a marking
    medium onto the flexible line.


CLS 33/415
TXT Multiplane angularly adjustable:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 comprising a plurality of connected
    straightedges for varying the relative position of the straightedges in
    more than one plane.


CLS 33/416
TXT Roofing framing:

    Subject matter under subclass 415 comprising a multiplane straightedge type
    device specifically designed for measuring and laying out the length and
    bevels of roof rafters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    481,    for other multiplane straightedges which are fixed at various
    angles.


CLS 33/417
TXT Having rafter cut indicia (e.g., pitch, rise, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 416 wherein the straightedge device comprises
    various markings or numerical tables specifically designed for use in
    solving roof cutting problems.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    423,    476 and 494, for other types of straightedges having special types
    of tables or indicia.


CLS 33/418
TXT Square and pivoted straightedge:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 comprising means establishing at least
    one right angle and one or more straightedge members angularly adjustable
    on the right angle means.

    (1)     Note.  A square is a device having two straightedges at a 90o angle
    to each other, the straightedges being of substantial length.  A rule is
    comprised of a single straightedge member of determinate length and does
    not function as a square of this subclass type.


CLS 33/419
TXT And sliding:

    Subject matter under subclass 418 wherein the straightedge member is
    arranged to have both pivotal and sliding adjustment.


CLS 33/420
TXT Straightedge as a hypotenuse of the square:

    Subject matter under subclass 418 comprising two straightedges connected to
    each other at an angle of 90o and one or more straightedges or other means
    to determine a straight line arranged to slide over the first-named
    straightedges, so as to be connected to each of them at selectable
    distances from the right angle.


CLS 33/421
TXT Having angle or slope indicating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 having indicia on the straightedges for
    indicating a degree of incline or divergence.


CLS 33/422
TXT Having circumferential pivot, only:

    Subject matter under subclass 418 wherein the straightedge can be rotated
    from its connected point in a circular manner.


CLS 33/423
TXT With indicia for rafter cuts:

    Subject matter under subclass 418 wherein the device includes various
    markings or numerical tables specifically designed for use in solving roof
    cutting problems.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    417,    for similar types of straightedge devices having roof cutting
    tables or indicia.


CLS 33/424
TXT With protractor:

    Subject matter under subclass 418 including a device having a circular
    pattern of indicia for indicating angles in degrees.


CLS 33/425
TXT And sliding straightedge:

    Subject matter under subclass 424 wherein a straightedge or a portion
    thereof can have a circular type of sweeping motion on the protractor.


CLS 33/426
TXT Located on straightedge:

    Subject matter under subclass 424 wherein the protractor is attached to the
    straightedge.


CLS 33/427
TXT Square and sliding nonpivotal straightedge(s):

    Subject matter under subclass 403 wherein the straightedge can be adjusted
    along a straight line on the square.


CLS 33/428
TXT Straightedge bisects right angle of square (i.e., centering square):

    Subject matter under subclass 427 wherein the straightedge is situated such
    that as it slides on the square, an edge of the straightedge indicates two
    equal angles of 45o.


CLS 33/429
TXT Square and fixed straightedge:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 comprising two straightedges connected to
    each other at angle of 90o and at least one other straightedge is immovably
    attached to the other two straightedges.


CLS 33/430
TXT Base attached:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 comprising a support upon which the
    straightedge device is attached.

    (1)     Note.  If the straightedge and the base are both specially modified
    to engage with each other, the device is classified here, even though the
    straightedge may be easily removed from the base.


CLS 33/431
TXT Navigation:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 comprising a device specially designed
    for plotting or computing a given course through the air or on land and
    water.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclass 61 comprising calculating machines for
    mechanically performing the various mathematical functions.


CLS 33/432
TXT Perspective drawing:

    Subject matter under subclass 430 comprising a device specially designed to
    help depict from a plan or elevation a view as it would appear to the eye.


CLS 33/433
TXT With T-square straightedge:

    Subject matter under subclass 432 comprising a headpiece or stock having at
    least one straightedge and another straightedge connected to the headpiece
    at substantially its median point at a 90o angle and designed to project
    beyond the head on its straightedge side.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    468     and 479, for similar T-square type devices but not base attached.


CLS 33/434
TXT With parallel straightedge arrangement (i.e., drafting machine):

    Subject matter under subclass 432 comprising a straightedge device which
    may be moved over the supporting base or surface with the ruling edge of
    the straightedge at all times in line with a vanishing point as relates to
    drawing perspectives.


CLS 33/435
TXT Rotary base:

    Subject matter under subclass 430 wherein the support base can be moved in
    a circular motion while the straightedge device maintains a constant
    position.


CLS 33/436
TXT Linear counter rule:

    Subject matter under subclass 430 comprising a straightedge on the
    supporting base with special indicia markings for determining various
    lengths or widths of work placed on the support.


CLS 33/437
TXT With guide or catch for T-square type:

    Subject matter under subclass 430 comprising means for maintaining the
    straightedge in positive rectilinear path relative to the base as it is
    moved along the edge of the supporting base.


CLS 33/438
TXT Universal parallelism arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 430 wherein the straightedge device is so
    attached to the base for movement that it may be set for movement in any
    one direction relative to the base and moved over all portions of the
    surface of the base in that direction.


CLS 33/439
TXT Wheel and band:

    Subject matter under subclass 438 comprising a rotatable cylindrical guide
    and a flexible belt or cord traveling over the cylindrical guide and
    attached to the straightedge to assist in guiding the movement of the
    straightedge device.


CLS 33/440
TXT With counterbalance:

    Subject matter under subclass 439 including a weight device connected to
    the band to oppose or offset the weight of or forces acting on the
    straightedge device.


CLS 33/441
TXT Double linkage:

    Subject matter under subclass 438 comprising a pantographic-type connection
    to the straightedge device and adapted to move freely over the support work
    surface at all time in a predetermined angular relationship to the support
    surface.


CLS 33/442
TXT With counterbalance:

    Subject matter under subclass 441 including a weight device connected to
    the pantographic device to oppose or offset the weight of or force acting
    on the straightedge device.


CLS 33/443
TXT Both ends connected:

    Subject matter under subclass 430 wherein the straightedge is attached to
    the supporting base at each extremity by some means to guide the
    straightedge on the support base.


CLS 33/444
TXT By cord and roller:

    Subject matter under subclass 443 comprising a rotatable cylindrical guide
    and flexible means traveling over the guide so as to assist in the
    mechanical movement of the straightedge device.


CLS 33/445
TXT By rack and pinion:

    Subject matter under subclass 443 comprising a bar with teeth on one face
    for gearing with a pinion or worm gear to assist in a positive manner the
    mechanical movement of the straightedge device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    447     and 450, for other straightedge devices which have means for
    positive movement.


CLS 33/446
TXT One end moveable along straightedge:

    Subject matter under subclass 443 comprising means on one extremity of the
    straightedge for accurately guiding the straightedge on one edge of the
    support base.


CLS 33/447
TXT Set shift, positively:

    Subject matter under subclass 430 comprising means for moving the
    straightedge device a predetermined increment along the surface of the
    support base.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    445     and 450, for devices for accurately advancing the straightedge over
    the work.


CLS 33/448
TXT With means for moving straightedge over a surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 comprising means incorporated into the
    straightedge device for facilitating the movement over the work supported
    on the base.


CLS 33/449
TXT By rollers:

    Subject matter under subclass 448 wherein the means for moving the
    straightedge includes rotatable cylindrical supports.


CLS 33/450
TXT Set shift:

    Subject matter under subclass 448 comprising means for moving the
    straightedge device in predetermined increments along the surface of the
    work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    445     and 447, for devices for accurately advancing the straightedge over
    the work.


CLS 33/451
TXT Combined with level:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 having means to assist in the alignment
    of the straightedge with respect to the direction of the force of gravity
    comprising gravity indicating means.

    (1)     Note.  Level of plumb structure per se can be found in other
    sections of this class under subclasses 300+, "Indicator of Direction of
    Force Traversing Natural Media". The primary difference is that the
    intended function of the device is that of indicating direction rather than
    it being utilized as a straightedge device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    365+,   for levels including those similar to those found in this subclass,
    although a straightedge-type device may be disclosed.


CLS 33/452
TXT Plural straightedges, relatively moveable:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 comprising two or more straightedges
    which can be adjusted in relation to each other for the purpose of
    positioning either straightedge on the work as needed.


CLS 33/453
TXT Triangulation (e.g., solving trigonometric functions):

    Subject matter under subclass 452 including means for the measurement of
    triangles on the earth's surface (e.g., surveying) or broadly for
    performing any similar trigonometric operation for finding a position or
    location by means of bearings from two fixed points a known distance apart.


CLS 33/454
TXT Parallel type:

    Subject matter under subclass 452 comprising at least two straightedges
    linked together so as to permit one of the straightedges to assume
    positions of varying distances from the other while maintaining parallelism
    with the stationary straightedge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    427,    for devices having a bar slidingly mounted on another bar and which
    may be used for drawing parallel lines.

    430+,   for base attached parallel type straightedge.


CLS 33/455
TXT Intercontrolled bevel blades:

    Subject matter under subclass 452 comprising a plurality of straightedges
    connected and pivoted to each other so that one of the straightedges cannot
    be adjusted to a new position without a proportional movement of the other
    straightedge(s).

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass generally relates to an
    angle determinator and bisector for use by skilled carpenters, mechanics,
    and other craftsmen in the measuring of angles and for determining the
    bisector of any angle measured.


CLS 33/456
TXT Multipivoted straightedges:

    Subject matter under subclass 452 comprising a plurality of straightedges
    each having more than one pivot point to permit the pivoted adjustment of
    one straight edge relative to another.


CLS 33/457
TXT Navigational:

    Subject matter under subclass 456 comprising a device specially designed
    for plotting or computing a given course through the air or on land or
    water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    431,    for similar type of navigation devices having a base.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclass 61 for calculating machines for mechanically
    performing the various mathematical functions.


CLS 33/458
TXT Folding rule type:

    Subject matter under subclass 456 comprising a plurality of straightedges
    pivotally connected at their extremities and particularly designed to be
    used as measuring devices when all the sections are laid out in a straight
    line.

    (1)     Note.  When the device has more than one pivot which are adjusted
    to positions other than a straight line or other measuring purposes, the
    patents are placed elsewhere in the schedule.

    (2)     Note.  The patents in this subclass relate to devices which are
    folded for the purpose of storage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    456,    for multipivoted straightedges which are designed for the purpose
    of making a geometrical relationship.


CLS 33/459
TXT Two straightedges pivoted at the ends of a central straightedge:

    Subject matter under subclass 456 comprising one straightedge having
    another straightedge adjustable at each of the extremities of the one
    straightedge.

    (1)     Note.  The middle straightedge is generally the longest of the
    other two straightedges, while the outer straightedges are generally work
    contact edges.


CLS 33/460
TXT At least one pivot is sliding:

    Subject matter under subclass 459 wherein one or both of the outer
    straightedges can traverse the pivot.


CLS 33/461
TXT Central straightedge longitudinally adjustable:
    Subject matter under subclass 460 wherein the middle straightedge is
    constructed in sections that can be varied in length by telescoping one
    section relative to the other.


CLS 33/462
TXT Central straightedge longitudinally adjustable:

    Subject matter under subclass 459 wherein the middle straightedge is
    constructed in sections that can be varied in length by telescoping one
    section relative to the other.


CLS 33/463
TXT Three straightedges forming a triangle:

    Subject matter under subclass 459 wherein the various straightedges are
    adjustable to construct a three-sided geometrical figure.


CLS 33/464
TXT Sliding:

    Subject matter under 452 wherein the straightedges can be adjusted by
    traversing one relative to the others.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    423     and 470, for other sliding straightedges.


CLS 33/465
TXT Single pivot:

    Subject matter under subclass 452 wherein the various straightedges are
    connected together so as to be rotatable relative to one another about a
    single axis.


CLS 33/466
TXT Handsaw attachment:

    Subject matter under subclass 465 comprising a disclosed manually usable
    carpenter's saw having a straightedge-type device for guiding the tool or
    indicating some type of measurement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, subclass 150 for details of a handsaw combined with
    a straightedge, level, etc.


CLS 33/467
TXT Lettering guide:

    Subject matter under subclass 465 comprising a device utilized for
    steadying or directing the motion of a tool for writing or printing alpha
    or numeric characters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    477,    for similar type lettering devices having a single pivotal movement.


CLS 33/468
TXT T-Head with pivoted straightedge:

    Subject matter under subclass 465 comprising a headpiece or stock having at
    least one straightedge and another straightedge connected to the headpiece
    about an axis at substantially its median point at a 90o angle and designed
    to project beyond the headpiece on its straightedge side.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    433     and 474, for similar type T-head construction.


CLS 33/469
TXT Locking:

    Subject matter under subclass 468 having means for holding the position of
    the pivoted straightedge with respect to the head or stock at one or more
    definite points.


CLS 33/470
TXT Sliding:

    Subject matter under subclass 468 wherein the straightedge is arranged for
    transverse adjustment through the pivot point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    464     and 473, for other sliding straightedges.


CLS 33/471
TXT With angle indicating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 465 having indicia on the straightedge for
    indicating a degree of incline or divergence.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    Appropriate subclass for angle indicating means bearing particular types of
    indicia.


CLS 33/472
TXT Pivot straightedge and sliding nonpivoted:

    Subject matter under subclass 465 comprising a straightedge having a
    pivotal adjustment which may slide relative to a base straightedge and
    another straightedge having a sliding but nonpivotal motion on the base
    straightedge.


CLS 33/473
TXT Sliding pivotal adjustment:

    Subject matter under subclass 465 wherein one of the straightedges can
    traverse its connection at the axis in addition to its rotary movement.

    (1)     Note.   Included in this subclass are devices best known in the art
    as bevels.


CLS 33/474
TXT Plural straightedges nonadjustably fixed at right angles (e.g., T-square,
    triangles, squares):

    Subject matter under subclass 403 comprising various straightedges which
    are conjointly secured at an angle of 90o.


CLS 33/475
TXT With right angle truing adjustment:

    Subject matter under subclass 474 provided with means to accurately
    position the straightedges at a 90o angle relative to each other.


CLS 33/476
TXT With special scale markings:

    Subject matter under subclass 474 provided with indicia pertaining to a
    specific type of a measurement desired.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    494,    for other similar type for scale indicia on single straightedge
    devices.


CLS 33/477
TXT Lettering guide:

    Subject matter under subclass 474 comprising a device utilized for
    establishing boundaries for writing or printing alpha or numeric characters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    467,    for similar type lettering guides.


CLS 33/478
TXT Folding or separable:

    Subject matter under subclass 474 wherein the straightedges are adjustable
    from a storage position to a 90o angle or one of the straightedges can be
    removed from the device.

    (1)     Note.  The devices are generally intended to be used only at fixed
    right angles and folded merely for storage purposes.


CLS 33/479
TXT T-square:

    Subject matter under subclass 474 comprising a headpiece and a straightedge
    secured to the headpiece at substantially its median point at an angle of
    90o, the straightedge being designed to project beyond the headpiece.


CLS 33/480
TXT Try square:

    Subject matter under subclass 474 comprising two straightedges conjointly
    secured at a 90o angle for the purpose of ascertaining whether a piece of
    work is at a true 90o angle.


CLS 33/481
TXT Multiplane:

    Subject matter under subclass 474 wherein the straightedge device is
    constructed to ascertain a desired measurement in more than one plane.


CLS 33/482
TXT Plural nonadjustable straightedges forming nonright angles:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 comprising a closed straightedge
    geometrical figure having other than angles at 90o.

    (1)     Note.  The patents included in this subclass are known in the art
    as polygons.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    418+,   427+, and 429, for devices which include closed geometrical figures
    having right angles.


CLS 33/483
TXT Rules:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 comprising a single nonattached straight
    bar of rigid enough material to guide a tool for drawing straight lines and
    having some type of indicia on the straightedge for making some type of
    measurement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 89.2 for a
    ruler combined with a blotter.


CLS 33/484
TXT With attachment:

    Subject matter under subclass 483 comprising some additional device to
    facilitate the use of the straightedge for drawing straight line.


CLS 33/485
TXT For performing diverse function:

    Subject matter under subclass 484 wherein the attachment comprises
    additional means to permit the use of the straightedge for some other
    purpose than drawing straight lines.


CLS 33/486
TXT Index:

    Subject matter under subclass 484 including an indicator or marker which
    may be adjusted on the straightedge to point out sequentially desired
    indicia.


CLS 33/487
TXT For subdividing:

    Subject matter under subclass 486 comprising means on the straightedge for
    indicating equal increments.


CLS 33/488
TXT Optical (e.g., magnifying):

    Subject matter under subclass 486 provided with means on the straightedge
    to enlarge or emphasize the indicia on the straightedge.


CLS 33/489
TXT For supporting above work surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 484 provided with means on the straightedge
    to space it relative to the surface upon which the straightedge is
    positioned.


CLS 33/490
TXT Located on end:

    Subject matter under subclass 484 wherein a device is positioned at the
    extremities of the straightedge for the purpose of facilitating the drawing
    of a straight line.


CLS 33/491
TXT Selectable:

    Subject matter under subclass 484 wherein the straightedge is constructed
    to provide a choice of ruling edges.


CLS 33/492
TXT Edge details:

    Subject matter under subclass 483 wherein the straightedge is constructed
    to provide a ruling edge having one or more designs on said edge for
    drawing other than straight lines.


CLS 33/493
TXT Particular material:

    Subject matter under subclass 483 wherein the straightedge is constructed
    of some specified type of material.

    (1)     Note.  Included in these minerals are plastics, wood, and metals.


CLS 33/494
TXT Special scale markings:

    Subject matter under subclass 483 provided with indicia pertaining to a
    specific type of a measurement desired.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    476,    for other or similar type of scale indicia on single straightedge
    devices.


CLS 33/495
TXT Pivot joints:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 comprising structure wherein
    straightedges are connected about a common axis to provide limited rotary
    movement only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    468,    for T-head and pivoted straightedge.


CLS 33/496
TXT 180 degree limit:

    Subject matter under subclass 495 wherein the rotary movement is limited to
    extend the straightedges into a straight line position (i.e., 180o).


CLS 33/497
TXT Locking:

    Subject matter under subclass 496 having means for positively securing the
    movement or position of the straightedges at one or more definite points.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    469,    for pivoted straightedge having means for securing the straightedge
    to a definite position.


CLS 33/498
TXT 90 degree limit:

    Subject matter under subclass 495 wherein the rotary movement of the
    straightedges is to a right angle maximum.


CLS 33/499
TXT Locking:

    Subject matter under subclass 498 having means for positively securing the
    movement or position of the straightedges at one or more definite points.


CLS 33/500
TXT Locking:

    Subject matter under subclass 495 having means for positively securing the
    movement or position of the straightedges at one or more definite points.


CLS 33/501
TXT GAUGE:

    Subject matter under the class definition which includes a contact member
    ("Probe") to touch an animate or inanimate object (a) to determine a
    geometrical characteristic of the object, or (b) to support and position a
    workpiece for gauging.

    (1)     Note.  Probes which physically contact an object with or without a
    transducer are in this group of subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  Gauging subcombinations are classifiable in this group of
    subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  Tolerance gauges are in this group of subclasses.

    SUBCLASS THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for an apparel gauge.

    18+,    for a scriber.

    121+,   for an area integrator.

    227+,   for a straight line light ray gauge.

    300+,   for an indicator of direction of force traversing natural media.

    463+,   for a straight edge type gauge.

    700+,   for a distance gauge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 104+ for surface and cutting edge
    testing including roughness, subclass 147 for a dynamic wing area or
    propeller study in a wind tunnel and subclass 149 for volume content
    measuring.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 531+ for
    sorting bottles, ampoules, jars, drinking vessels or ceramic and glass
    containers by means of a contact gauge and subclasses 601+ for sorting
    items by a contact gauge.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 200+ for testing a
    magnet. An electromagnetic field, material, stress in material,
    displacement, eddy current and flaw testing by means of a magnetic field,
    subclasses 600+ for determining a nonelectric property by means of an
    impedance, admittance or a related quantity, and subclass 457 for
    electrostatic field testing.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 678 for a geometrical gauge
    responsive indicating system.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing subclasses 345+ for a light
    interference type gauge, subclasses 138+ for an angle measurement or axial
    alignment gauge, and subclasses 372+ for a mensuration or contour
    comparison gauge.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 50+ for an analyzer, structured
    indicator, or manipulative laboratory device.

    451,    Abrading, subclass 46 for a process of grinding a gauge.

    483,    Tool Changing, subclasses 19 and 31 for apparatus for supporting a
    particular tool, such as a probe, combined with tool transfer means.


CLS 33/501.01
TXT Leather grading or size:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein the contact member determines the
    size of weight of a piece of leather.


CLS 33/501.02
TXT Continuous gauging:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein the contact member engages a
    moving material or article to determine the grade or size of the material
    or article.

    (1)     Note.  An indicator that measures plus or minus zero setting or
    markings, that do not give an actual measure are here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    501.01, for continuous grading of leather.


CLS 33/501.03
TXT Including electric means:

    Subject matter under subclass 501.02 having an electric circuit and/or
    electric indicator.


CLS 33/501.04
TXT Pivoted probe:

    Subject matter under subclass 501.03 wherein the contact member is movable
    about a point.


CLS 33/501.05
TXT Comparator:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 having means for comparing an article or
    material with a given size or measurement.

    (1)     Note.  These gauges have set probes, a zero dial with plus or minus
    mark, etc., but do not give a variable measurement as classified in
    subclasses 700.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    700,    for distance measurement.


CLS 33/501.06
TXT Beam type:

    Subject matter under subclass 501.05 having mounted on a bar or rod, at
    least two contact members of which at least one is movable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    545,    for comparison with a standard.

    795,    for a beam type measuring means.


CLS 33/501.07
TXT Three contact probes:

    Subject matter under subclass 501.06 wherein the beam has three contact
    members mounted on it.


CLS 33/501.08
TXT Hand held:

    Subject matter under subclass 501.05 wherein the gauge is supported by a
    human hand.


CLS 33/501.09
TXT Plural contact probes:

    Subject matter under subclass 501.08 having more than one contact member.


CLS 33/501.1
TXT Only three probes:

    Subject matter under subclass 501.09 wherein the comparator has only three
    contact members.


CLS 33/501.11
TXT Implement type:

    Subject matter under subclass 501.7 wherein the gauge is held by a person's
    hand when in use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    501.13, for gauging pairs of gears.


CLS 33/501.12
TXT Internal:

    Subject matter under subclass 501.7 wherein the teeth are on the inside
    surface of a passageway, cavity or hole.


CLS 33/501.13
TXT By pair of engaged gears:

    Subject matter under subclass 501.7 wherein the contact member is a gear
    which is rotated while in contact with another gear.

    (1)     Note.  All gears in this subclass are production gears whereas in
    subclass 501.19 one of the gears is a master which is used for test only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    501.19, for test by using a rotating master gear.


CLS 33/501.14
TXT By probe:

    Subject matter under subclass 501.7 wherein the contact member has a
    slender elongated shape which contacts a tooth during a test.


CLS 33/501.15
TXT Teeth spacing:

    Subject matter under subclass 501.14 wherein the probe is used to determine
    the distance between adjacent teeth.


CLS 33/501.16
TXT Including a master:

    Subject matter under subclass 501.14 wherein the probe compares a gear to a
    standard reference gear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    501.19, for gear testing by a master, per se.


CLS 33/501.17
TXT Plural probes:

    Subject matter under subclass 501.14 having more than one contact member.


CLS 33/501.18
TXT Only two:

    Subject matter under subclass 501.17 wherein exactly two probes are used
    for measuring.


CLS 33/501.19
TXT By rotary master:

    Subject matter under subclass 501.7 wherein the contact member is a
    standard reference gear that turns about an axis through its center.


CLS 33/501.2
TXT With rotary indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 501.1 having a movable readout member which
    turns about an axis so as to indicate measurement.


CLS 33/501.3
TXT Only four probes:

    Subject matter under subclass 501.09 wherein the comparator has only four
    contact members.


CLS 33/501.4
TXT With rotary indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 501.09 having a movable readout member which
    turns about an axis so as to indicate measurement.


CLS 33/501.45
TXT Fixed size:

    Subject matter under subclass 501.09 having two different single size
    contact members and only one member at a time contacts an article to
    determine if the size is over, under or just right.


CLS 33/501.5
TXT With pivot means:

    Subject matter under subclass 501.08 having a member which includes a
    contact member that moves about a point.


CLS 33/501.6
TXT Electric type:

    Subject matter under subclass 501.05 having an indicator controlled by an
    electric circuit or an electric indicator.


CLS 33/501.7
TXT Tooth testing (e.g., gear, rack):

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein the contact member engages a gear
    type element for determining the form, shape, etc., of a tooth or teeth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 162 for processes and apparatus for
    determining other physical characteristics of gears such as tooth strength,
    noise produced by meshing, etc.


CLS 33/501.8
TXT By electrical comparison:

    Subject matter under subclass 501.7 wherein the gear type element is
    examined by using an electrical reference pattern to observe similarities
    or differences.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communication:  Electrical, subclass 825.3 for intelligence
    comparison.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 527+
    for measuring or testing using specific data processing.


CLS 33/501.9
TXT Including a probe:

    Subject matter under subclass 501.8 having a contact member which has a
    slender elongated shape.


CLS 33/502
TXT With calibration device or gauge for nuclear reactor element:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 (a) which includes structure to check and
    adjust the response of the gauge or (b) wherein the contact member gauges a
    nuclear fuel element, control element or element container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    545+,   for comparison of a tested article with a standard.

    567,    for a gauge block, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 1.75+ for proving or calibration
    of an angle, direction, or inclination measuring apparatus; and subclasses
    1.79+ for proving or calibration of a displacement, motion, distance, or
    position measuring apparatus.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 252.1 for calibration or standardization
    methods and subclasses 336.1+ for testing particle or wave nuclear
    radiation.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclass 450 for fuel component structure with condition sensing or
    indicating means.


CLS 33/503
TXT Coordinate movable probe or machine:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein the contact member is (a) part of
    a device to determine a position or change in position in at least two
    perpendicular direction with respect to a common origin or (b) movable in
    at least two perpendicular direction with respect to a common origin.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for a two-coordinate motion device.

    18+,    for a scriber controlled by coordinate motion probe support.

    505,    for a gauge having a computer control or an analogue-to-digital
    device.

    520,    for a center locator or center line location.

    551+,   for a profile test with a support for tested article.

    556,    for a profile gauge having a movable contact probe.

    558,    for a movable contact probe which has movement in a least two
    perpendicular direction where no linear movement in the perpendicular
    directions is involve.

    568,    for a work support adjustment in at least two perpendicular
    directions.


CLS 33/504
TXT With computer responsive to contact probe:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein the contact member is movable and
    includes a calculator, responsive to the movable member, to perform some
    mathematical function.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 506+
    for measuring, testing or monitoring a distance dimension.


CLS 33/505
TXT Having program control or an analogue to digital device:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 which includes a device (a) to control
    the logical order of events in a gauging operation or (b) convert analogue
    information into digital information or digital information into analogue
    information.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    504,    for a gauge with a computer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 126+ for analog to
    or from digital conversion, per se.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 300 for
    programmable methods or procedures and subclasses 560+ for measuring,
    testing or monitoring a dimension.


CLS 33/506
TXT Target, weapon or weapon projectile:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein the contact member contacts (a) a
    target to locate a projectile hit, (b) weapon part to determine the size or
    shape of the weapon part or some other geometrical characteristic of the
    part, or (c) a projectile of a weapon to determine some geometrical
    characteristic of the projectile.

    (1)     Note.  Archery bow and gun gauges are here.

    (2)     Note.  Arrow and cartridges gauges are here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, subclasses 55+, for breech loading weapons, subclasses
    59+ for revolvers, subclasses 71+ for stocks and subclasses 76+ for gun
    barrels.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 430+ for cartridges
    particularly subclasses 464+ for a cartridge case.

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, subclasses 16+ for spring type guns
    and projectors, subclasses 23.1+ for an archery bow and subclass 56 for
    fluid pressure guns and projectors.

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclass 408 for a target penetrated by
    a projectile.

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, subclasses 578+ for an arrow.


CLS 33/507
TXT Lens:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein the contact member contacts a
    lens.

    (1)     Note.   A lens includes a lens blank.

    (2)     Note.   Gauging (a) curvature, or length and width, or locating (b)
    a point, (c) the mechanical axis or (d) the optical axis of a lens, is
    classifiable here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for lens scribers.

    520,    for center, point between centers or center line location.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing subclass 127 for optical center
    cylinder axis or prism measuring or determining.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 42+ for a method of grinding a lens and
    subclasses 246+ for an abrading machine having a rotary, cylindrical
    abrading tool adapted to engage a rotating workpiece, such as a lens.


CLS 33/508
TXT Golf stance, swing or club analysis:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein the contact member touches the
    feet, ball, hands or club to check a golfers posture, swing, club face
    angle with respect to the hole or a geometrical condition of the golf club.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for angular measurement.

    533,    for straightness or alignment.

    534,    for an angle measurement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    434,    Education and Demonstration subclass 252 for golf instruction.

    473,    Amusement Devices: Games, subclasses 198+, 201+, 207+, 218, 219+
    and 266+ for indicators associated with golfing equipment or with golf
    practice devices used in playing or practicing the game.


CLS 33/509
TXT Bowling ball:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein the contact member determines the
    position of the holes to be made in an undrilled bowling ball so that the
    undrilled bowling ball can be marked and drilled to custom fit the ball to
    individuals.

    (1)     Note.  Here are contact type gauges to show the angle that the
    bowling fingers makes with the surface of a bowling ball.

    (2)     Note.   "Pitch" is the angle the finger hole center line makes with
    the surface of a ball.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    391+,   for a pendulum type indicator of direction of fare caused by the
    attraction of the mass of an article to the mass of the earth.

    534+,   for an angle gauge generally.

    542+,   for an internal gauge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by the Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 1+
    for a method of drilling a bowling ball.

    434,    Education and Demonstration subclass 249 for teaching bowling.

    473,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 54+ for a bowling game,
    particularly subclasses 55+ for a bowling practice or assist device,
    subclasses 67+ for an indicator for a bowling pin handling device, and
    subclasses 125+ for a bowling ball with means to change finger hole
    location or size.


CLS 33/510
TXT Grip:

    Subject matter under subclass 509 which includes a simulated bowling ball
    and the contact member has variable thumb and finger holes spaced from each
    other on the ball and means to determine the spacing between the thumb and
    the fingers used to grip a bowling ball.

    (1)     Note.   "Grip" is the distance between the bowlers thumb and
    bowling fingers when gripping a bowling ball.


CLS 33/511
TXT Anatomical:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 which includes a contact member which
    touches an animal, a human being  or a dental prosthesis part to be used by
    a human being.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195,    for a hoof gauge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    54,     Harness, subclasses 19.1+ for collars.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 856+ for a collar or other body- or
    appendage-encircling device.


CLS 33/512
TXT Human:

    Subject matter under subclass 511 wherein the contact member contacts a
    human body or prosthesis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for an apparel or apparel layout gauge.

    23,     for a scriber pantograph of human form.

    508,    for a golf stance, swing or club analysis gauge.

    509+,   for a bowling ball gauge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 587+ for measuring an anatomical characteristic.


CLS 33/513
TXT Dental:

    Subject matter under subclass 512 wherein the contact member is restricted
    to dental use.

    (1)     Note.   The gauge may be used on the head, supported by the head,
    contacts the head as at the chin or the forehead or the gauge may be used
    with the gauging of artificial teeth or a tooth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 72+ for dental apparatus having a gauge or
    guide.


CLS 33/514
TXT With mouth or teeth contact:

    Subject matter under subclass 513 wherein the contact member contacts the
    mouth or the teeth of a person.


CLS 33/514.1
TXT Ring type:

    Subject matter under subclass 512 wherein the contact member contacts a
    finger of a person for determining ring size.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    544.3,  for a gauge to measure the size of a ring.

    555.1+, for a gauge for determining circular size.


CLS 33/514.2
TXT Conformator:

    Subject matter under subclass 512, wherein the contact member is
    constructed such that when pressed against a human body it will conform to
    the same and when removed it will retain a shape corresponding to the shape
    of the body or the contact member can be formed to a shape of a human body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    561.1+, for conformator used on objects.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 12+ and 24+ for combined conformator
    and stretcher.


CLS 33/515
TXT Having support or foot locator for body:

    Subject of matter under subclass 512 with a support for the human body or a
    foot locator which is part of the contact member apparatus.


CLS 33/516
TXT Point reproducer:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein the contact member contacts a
    point on a three dimensional object to (a) duplicate the point on a three
    dimensional copy of the object or (b) check or transfer a point on the
    three dimensional object to or from another object.


CLS 33/517
TXT Bearing or bearing part:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 which includes a device to gauge a
    bearing or bearing part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 898+ for a process for making bearing or
    component thereof, and subclass 724 for means to assemble or disassemble a
    roller or ball bearing.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 9 for a frictional resistance test.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 682 for testing a bearing
    condition responsive indicating system.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 49+ for grinding of a roll, roller, shaft,
    ball, or piston.


CLS 33/518
TXT Masonry construction:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein the contact member gauges
    structure constructed of brick, stone or block.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    562+,   for a template.


CLS 33/519
TXT Cam profile or keyway:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein the contact member contacts (a)
    the working face of a cam or (b) a groove, in a part, designed to be used
    with a key.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    546+,   for a profile test involving a comparison with a standard.

    551+,   for a profile test including a support for the article tested.

    556+,   for  a profile test using a movable contact probe.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 567+ for a cam.


CLS 33/520
TXT Center, point, distance between centers or center line location:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 for a single object wherein the contact
    member locates or checks (a) the center of a  hole, (b) a point on a
    surface, (c) the center of an arc, (d) the distance between hole centers or
    (e) the location of a center line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclass 75 for a
    centering means adapted to be replaced by a cutting tool, subclasses 115+
    for an adjustable tool guiding bushing with a cutting tool and subclass 241
    for a drill bushing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    644+,   for the relative location of the center of two or more objects.


CLS 33/521
TXT Earth profile or road grade or shrub or tree trim guide:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein there is (a) a contact member or
    members forming a plurality of points contacting the earth or a road bed to
    establish or check the elevation at each of the points or (b) wherein the
    contact member serves as a profile or trim guide for a shrub or a tree.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclass 381 for a road grader.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclass 27 for a pavement
    with a road bed.


CLS 33/522
TXT Container:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein the contact member inspects some
    geometrical characteristic of a receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 37+ for testing sealed or
    unsealed objects including a receptacle with fluid pressure, particularly
    subclasses 40+ for a leakage test with or without discard of defective
    objects and subclass 52 for testing a sealed receptacle.

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclass 1 for processing of weighing and
    subclasses 52+ for a conveyor means handling successive receivers relative
    to filling and weighing means.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 522+ for
    sorting a ceramic or glass container.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 223 for testing a bottle by a
    photoelectrical optical or preoptical system.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 613 for a condition
    responsive to weight in a container.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 427 for testing container
    content by rotation or agitation and subclass 428 for testing a container
    by rotation or agitation.


CLS 33/523
TXT With conveying wheel support:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 which includes a wheeled support for the
    contact member for moving the member along the surface tested.

    (1)     Note.   Classified here are gauges to examine a road or railroad
    track.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    556+,   for movably supported contact probe gauge.

    572,    for a gauge contact member support.

    651+,   for railway track gauge.


CLS 33/523.1
TXT For railway track:

    Subject matter under subclass 523 wherein the contact member contacts rails
    for aligning or checking purpose.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    651.1,  for a track gauge of general use.


CLS 33/523.2
TXT With recording means:

    Subject matter under subclass 523.1 including means to make a record of
    track condition.


CLS 33/524
TXT Food portion:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein the contact member determines
    geometrically (a) the amount of food to make a portion of a meal, (b) a a
    portion of a constituent material making a food item, or which consists of
    or includes a pattern to form portions of a food item, or a marker to form
    a design on the food item.

    (1)     Note.   The food may be cooked or uncooked.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125+,   for a distance measurement.

    534+,   for an angle gauges.

    555.1+, for a circular gauge.

    562+,   for a template.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 426 for a measuring vessel.


CLS 33/525
TXT Pie, cake, cheese, pizza or sandwich portion:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 wherein the member determines a portion
    of pie, cake, cheese, pizza or sandwich.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 289 for a knife with a cutting guide.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 821+ for a cutter with means to guide the
    cutter.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 450.3 for a pie making
    machine and subclass 450.4 for a sandwich making machine.


CLS 33/526
TXT Flooring, floor or wall covering, or molding:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein the contact gauge member contacts
    flooring room molding or floor or wall covering material for the purpose of
    marking or cutting the material.

    (1)     Note.   The marking or the cutting member is not claimed with this
    gauge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18+,    for a scriber.

    103+,   for a straight edge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 289 for material guide to cause a cutting tool to
    move in a predetermined manner to the material.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 13+ for cutting methods and subclass 651 for a
    cutting tool or  a cutting tool with a support.


CLS 33/527
TXT Floor covering:

    Subject matter under subclass 526 wherein the material gauged is a floor
    tile, linoleum carpet or rug.


CLS 33/528
TXT Wall panel outline marker for utility:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein the contact member is used to
    note the location and the outline of a utility cutout to be made in a wall
    of a building.

    (1)     Note.   The utility includes electrical power, lighting, heating,
    cooling and water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    562+,   for a template.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 220.1+ for a
    service duct within a barrier.


CLS 33/529
TXT Pipe layout or fitting:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein the  contact member is (a) a
    pattern to lay out the shape of sheet metal to form a pipe, (b) a fitting
    gauge to determine the length, size or angle of a pipe section to be formed
    or (c) a gauge to determine how to cut an existing pipe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for a layout instrument and an angular measurement.

    18+,    for a scriber.

    534+,   for an angle gauge.

    562+,   for a template.

    700+,   for a distance instrument.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 199+ for metal deforming by use of a
    roller or roller-like tool element, subclass 253.1 for metal deforming by
    extruding through an orifice and subclasses 362+ or a process of metal
    deforming.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 155 for joined sections and
    subclass 156 for a longitudinally seamed pipe.


CLS 33/530
TXT Pitchometer:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein the contact member contacts a
    propeller blade to determine or check a relationship between a surface of
    the blade with a fluid to be contacted by the blade surface.

    (1)     Note.   Marine and aircraft propellers are tested here.

    (2)     Note.   The contact member may test a contour, angle or a distance
    related to the pitch of the blade.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    534,    for an angle measurement.

    551+,   for a profile test gauge having a support for the tested article.

    556+,   for movable contact probe testing an article for profile or some
    other characteristic.

    572,    for a gauge contact probe support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 149 for a aerodynamic propeller
    study and subclasses 455+ for a propeller rotor unbalance test.


CLS 33/531
TXT Taper:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein the contact member gauges an
    object surface which is symmetrical about an axis and decreases gradually
    in size in a dimension perpendicular to the axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199+,   for a screw thread gauge.

    452+,   for plural straight edges, relatively movable to measure taper.

    542+,   for an internal gauge.

    734+,   for an angle gauge.


CLS 33/532
TXT External:

    Subject matter under subclass 531 wherein the taper is outside of the
    object.


CLS 33/533
TXT Straightness, flatness or alignment:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein the contact member (a) gauges an
    object that has an axis to determine whether the axis is a straight line,
    (b) gauges an object to determine if the surface has every point in the
    same flat plane, or (c) gauges an object at certain points to determine
    that the points are at the proper location.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180+,   for positioning a plurality of objects relative to each other.

    286,    for a straightline light ray alignment device.

    290,    for a straightline light ray level device.

    412,    for a straightedge type shift alignment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 104+ for surface testing.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 371 for flatness testing,
    subclass 153 for alignment of axes nominally coaxial, and subclass 399 for
    alignment in a lateral direct.


CLS 33/534
TXT Angle:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein the contact member sets up an
    angular relationship or the gauge includes an angle determining device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for an angular measurement and an angular position transducer.

    281,    for vertical and horizontal angle measurements by straight line
    light rays.

    282+,   for a vertical angle measurement by straight line light rays.

    285,    for a horizontal angle measurement by straight line light rays.

    424,    for a straightedge type instrument having a square pivoted
    straightedge and a protractor.

    508,    for an angular measurement used in golf stance, swing or club
    analysis.

    511+,   for an angle measurement used in an anatomical gauge.

    530,    for a pitchometer which measures the pitch or angle of a propeller
    or turbine blade.

    569+,   for adjustable work supports which position a workpiece support at
    known angles.


CLS 33/535
TXT Squareness:

    Subject matter under subclass 534 wherein the contact member checks for a
    ninety degree angle formed by one side of an article and an adjacent side
    of the same article.


CLS 33/536
TXT Sine, cosine or tangent bar:

    Subject matter under subclass 534 wherein the contact member forms a plane
    which makes an angle with a known plane, the angle being defined in terms
    of a sine, cosine or tangent trignometric function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    531+,   for an internal or external taper gauge using a bar.

    537,    for an adjustable article support to position an article by a sine,
    cosine or tangent bar.

    567,    for a gauge block, per se.


CLS 33/537
TXT Article support:

    Subject matter under subclass 536 wherein the contact member is an article
    support.


CLS 33/538
TXT Fixed pivot at one end:

    Subject matter under subclass 536 wherein there is a fixed pivot point for
    the contact member close to one of its ends.


CLS 33/539
TXT Lock or key:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 which includes a contact member to (a)
    contact a lock, pin or lever position on a key or (b) contact a pin or
    lever of a cylinder lock.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclasses 336+ for a key.


CLS 33/540
TXT Cylinder lock tumbler decoder:

    Subject matter under subclass 539 wherein the contact each pin or lever of
    the lock to determine the shape of a key which will unlock the lock.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclasses 266+ for a dock operating mechanism and subclass
    394 for key picking.


CLS 33/541
TXT Postage stamp or mechanical coupling gauge:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein the contact member (a) checks the
    edge serrations of a postage stamp or (b) touches a mechanical coupling
    part.

    (1)     Note.   A mechanical coupling part includes hose, tube and railway
    car couplings.


CLS 33/542
TXT Internal:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein the contact member contacts the
    inside of a passageway or cavity within an object or the earth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    178,    for an internal circular size gauge.

    509+,   for bowling ball gauges to determine where to drill the finger hole
    positions in a ball.

    531,    for an internal taper gauge.


CLS 33/542.1
TXT Telescoping caliper or stem gauge:

    Subject matter under subclass 542 wherein the gauge has contact members
    which are movable so as to conform to an inside dimension of a workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  If the caliper has indication for giving an indication of
    the distance between the contacts, see subclasses 33-783.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    501.09, for hand held comparator.

    783,    for telescoping calipers with a distance indicator.


CLS 33/543
TXT Concentricity or eccentricity:

    Subject matter under 542 wherein the passageway or cavity has an axis and
    the contact member determines if points of the passageway or cavity are or
    are not at the same distance from the axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    550,    for an external concentricity gauge having a support for a gauged
    article.

    556+,   for a movable contact probe to test external concentricity.


CLS 33/543.1
TXT Fluid type:

    Subject matter under subclass 542, wherein a fluid pressure moves a probe
    into contact with an object being gauged or is used for gauging.


CLS 33/544
TXT Earth cavity or tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 542 wherein the passageway or cavity is a
    pipe, casing, or hole in the earth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    178,    for internal or external size of circular objects including bore
    hole size.

    304+,   for a borehole direction or inclination indication of force
    traversing natural media.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 152.01 for a borehole and drilling
    study.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 256+ for well testing apparatus and
    methods.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 323+ for subsurface
    testing including a borehole and subclass 220 for magnetic sensor testing
    within a pipe or borehole.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 241 for bore inspection.

    367,    Communication, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 81+ for wellbore telemetering.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 101+ for an endoscope.


CLS 33/544.1
TXT Including means to rotate probe:

    Subject matter under subclass 544 having means to turn the contact member
    about a longitudinal axis of the earth cavity or tube.


CLS 33/544.2
TXT Having means to actuate probe:

    Subject matter under subclass 544 including means to move the contact
    member into contact with an object to be gauged.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    543,    for concentricity or eccentricity gauge.


CLS 33/544.3
TXT Biased probe:

    Subject matter under subclass 544.2 having resilient means to urge the
    contact member into contact with the passageway or cavity.


CLS 33/544.4
TXT Tapered probe:

    Subject matter under subclass 542 wherein the contact member has a contact
    surface which is symmetrical about an axis and decreases gradually in size
    in a dimension perpendicular to the axis.


CLS 33/544.5
TXT Having more than two probes:

    Subject matter under subclass 542 having at least three contact members
    that contact an object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    542.1,  for telescoping caliper or stem gauge with two probes.


CLS 33/544.6
TXT Only three probes:

    Subject matter under subclass 544.4 wherein exactly three probes are used
    for gauging.


CLS 33/545
TXT Comparison with a standard:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 which includes a standard to compare the
    sensing of an article by the contact member with a corresponding distance
    of the standard.

    (1)     Note.   The standard includes a master article, a template or a
    curve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    501.06, for a beam terminal comparator.


CLS 33/546
TXT Profile:

    Subject matter under subclass 545 wherein the purpose of the test is for
    comparing the shape of the tested article with the shape of a standard.

    (1)     Note.  The comparison may involve tolerance between the tested
    article and the standard.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    519,    for a cam profile test.

    521,    for an earth surface profile or a road grade profile test.

    551+,   for an external profile test which includes a tested object support.

    556+,   for an external profile test using a movable contact probe.


CLS 33/547
TXT Optical comparison:

    Subject matter under subclass 546 which includes a projection screen having
    a curve to compare a point on the article contacted by the contact member
    by projecting the point unto the corresponding point on the curve on the
    screen.


CLS 33/548
TXT Plural tests:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 which includes more than one contact
    member to measure more than one geometrical characteristic of an object.

    (1)     Note.   This subclass is not restricted to an integral mount for
    all of the testing devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    552,    for plural contact members to indicate the profile of an object
    when it is supported during the test.

    577,    for plural contact members used in a single test.

    560,    for plural contact members with or without a transducer responsive
    to a contact members.


CLS 33/549
TXT With support for gauged article:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 which includes structure to hold an
    article while being gauged by the contact member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    515,    for a gauge having a support for human being.

    568+,   for linear or angular change of workpiece position.

    573,    for an article support, per se, used in a gauge of subclasses 501+.


CLS 33/550
TXT Concentricity:

    Subject matter under subclass 549 wherein the article has an external
    surface having an axis of symmetry and the contact member contacts points
    on the external surface to determine whether the points are at the same
    distance from the axis or not.

    (1)     Note.   Eccentricity testing is here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    543,    for an internal concentricity or eccentricity gauge.

    556+,   for an external concentricity or eccentricity gauge.


CLS 33/551
TXT Profile:

    Subject matter under subclass 549 wherein the contact member examines the
    held article for the shape of the gauged article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    519,    for a cam profile.

    521,    for an earth or road profile.

    530,    for a profile of a propeller

    546+,   for an external profile test by comparison with a standard profile
    which may be a curve of a standard profile.

    556+,   for an external profile test having a movable contact probe.


CLS 33/552
TXT Having plural contact members:

    Subject matter under subclass 551 wherein the shape of the article is
    examined by plural contact members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    546+,   for a profile test which involves comparison with a standard.

    557,    for a profile test using plural movable probes.


CLS 33/553
TXT Member contacts successive points on the article:

    Subject matter under subclass 551 wherein the contact member is movable to
    contact successive points on the held article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    546+,   for a profile test where a standard profile is compared with the
    profile of tested article.

    552,    for a profile test using plural contact members where a member
    contacts successive points on an article.

    554,    for contact member which successively contacts a plurality of
    points on an object and a recording is made of each contact.


CLS 33/554
TXT With recording of contact member position at each point on the article:

    Subject matter under subclass 553 wherein a recording means is responsive
    to the position of the movable contact member contacting the article at
    each point to show the profile of the article.


CLS 33/555
TXT Having indicator of probe position or movement:

    Subject matter under subclass 549 wherein the contact member is movable
    when gauging the supported article and there is an indicator responsive to
    the movement or position of the contact member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125+,   for a distance gauge determining one dimension.

    503,    for a coordinate machine.

    531+,   for an internal or external taper gauge.

    534+,   for an angle measurement.

    542+,   for an internal gauge.

    545+,   for a gauge including comparison with a standard.

    548,    for plural tests.


CLS 33/555.1
TXT Circular size:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein the contact member contacts a
    point on the external surface of a circular article to determine the size
    of the article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    501.05+, for comparing the size of a circle.

    542+,   for internal circular size.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    194,    Check-Controlled Apparatus, subclasses 344+ for analogous structure
    in check testers.

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, subclass 111, for chucks provided with means to
    indicate the size of opening of the jaws.


CLS 33/555.2
TXT Aperture type:

    Subject matter under subclass 555.1 wherein the contact member has a series
    of holes or a single adjustable hole to determine the size of the circular
    article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    514.1,  for hole type ring gauge.


CLS 33/555.3
TXT "V" type:

    Subject matter under subclass 555.1 having two angularly related contact
    members and the article contacts the surface of the members to determine
    its size.


CLS 33/555.4
TXT Flexible band type:

    Subject matter under subclass 555.1 wherein the contact member is wrapped
    around the circular object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    561.2,  for a flexible band used for determining the shape of an object.


CLS 33/556
TXT Having a movable contact probe:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein the contact member is movable
    when in use as a gauge and includes an indicator responsive to the contact
    member.

    (1)     Note.  Adjustment of a contact member and the fixed in position
    when a gauging step is performed is in subclass 501.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    555,    for an indicator responsive to a movable contact probe with a
    support for probe sensed article.

    572,    for a support, per se, for a contact probe.


CLS 33/557
TXT Plural probes;

    Subject matter under subclass 556 wherein there is more than one member and
    the indicator may be responsive to more than one member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    548,    for plural gauges involving plural contact probes.

    552,    for a supported article gauged for profile by plural probes.

    560,    for plural contact probes with or without a transducer responsive
    to a probe.


CLS 33/558
TXT Electrical switch or transducer responsive to probe or probe is part of
    electrical circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 556 wherein (a) an electric switch or an
    electrical transducer is responsive to the probe or (b) the contact member
    is part of the electrical circuit and the indicator is responsive to the
    switch transducer or the contact member.


CLS 33/558.01
TXT Pivoted probes (e.g., divider, caliper, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein there is more than one contact
    member and they are movable about a point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27.02,  for a compass.

    797,    for a pivoted type implement with measuring means.


CLS 33/558.02
TXT Proportional:

    Subject matter under subclass 558.01 having two pairs of contact members so
    interconnected that a movement of one pair produces a proportional movement
    of the other.

    (1)     Note.  These implements are used in laying out distances
    proportional to other distances.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    663,    for proportional line segmenter.


CLS 33/558.03
TXT Point parallelizing:

    Subject matter under subclass 558.01 having means for maintaining the
    extremities at the contacting members in parallel relation at all points of
    adjustment.


CLS 33/558.04
TXT Having adjustable legs:

    Subject matter under subclass 558.01 including means to move or hold legs
    of the gauge in a desired position.


CLS 33/558.05
TXT By screw means:

    Subject matter under subclass 558.04 wherein the legs are moved by a
    rotatable threaded member.


CLS 33/558.06
TXT Tangent:

    Subject matter under subclass 558.05 wherein the screw is arranged to
    tangentially engage with an arc structure having a joint as its center.


CLS 33/558.07
TXT Median:

    Subject matter under subclass 558.05 wherein the screw adjustment means is
    arranged in a median line with relation to the legs.


CLS 33/558.08
TXT Quick adjustment:

    Subject matter under subclass 558.05 including means to initially position
    the legs.


CLS 33/558.09
TXT Having opposed threads:

    Subject matter under subclass 558.05 including a threaded member having
    left and right helices so that rotation of said member causes relative
    movement in opposite direction between the legs.


CLS 33/558.1
TXT Rotatable nut:

    Subject matter under subclass 558.05 wherein an internally threaded member
    is rotated to cause the legs to move.


CLS 33/558.2
TXT Plural legs or contact probes:

    Subject matter under subclass 558.01 wherein there are more than one leg or
    contact member.


CLS 33/558.3
TXT Removable probe:

    Subject matter under subclass 558.01 wherein at least one contact member
    can be removed from an element holding it.


CLS 33/558.4
TXT Pivoted probe:

    Subject matter under subclass 558.01 wherein the contact member is movable
    about a point with respect to an element holding it.


CLS 33/558.5
TXT Median handle:

    Subject matter under subclass 558.01 including a handle arranged to project
    from the pivot in a line median to the legs and extended through the pivot.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    558.07, for a median handle where the handle is part of the screw
    adjustment means.


CLS 33/559
TXT Movable contact probe, per se:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 which includes only the contact member
    with or without a transducer responsive to the contact member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    549,    for supported article gauged by movable contact probe.

    556,    for an indicator responsive to a movable contact probe.


CLS 33/560
TXT Plural probes:

    Subject matter under subclass 559 wherein there is more than one probe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    552,    for a supported article gauged for its profile by plural contact
    members.

    557,    for plural movable contact probes with at least one indicator
    responsive to a probe.


CLS 33/561
TXT With electrical switch or transducer responsive to probe:

    Subject matter under subclass 559 wherein there is an (a) electric switch
    or (b) electric transducer responsive to the contact member or the contact
    member forms part of an electric closure device.

    (1)     Note.   The term "electric" includes a magnetic, piezoelectric or
    electrostatic transducer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    558,    for an indicator responsive to a probe actuated electrical switch
    or electrical transducer, or probe part of an electrical circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 61.62 for a
    special application circuit maker responsive to a feeler moving into
    contact with an object.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 754+ for an
    electrical probe.


CLS 33/561.1
TXT Conformator or adjustable curve template:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein the contact member is so
    constructed that when pressed against an object it will conform to the same
    and when removed it will retain a shape corresponding to the shape of the
    object or the contact member can be formed to a desired shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    514.2,  for a conformator used on human.

    562+,   for fixed type template.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 12+ and 24+ for combined conformator
    and stretcher.


CLS 33/561.2
TXT Flexible type:

    Subject matter under subclass 561.1 wherein the contact member is able to
    bend or change shape without breaking.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    555.4,  for a flexible band used for determining the size of an object.

    562+,   for a template.


CLS 33/561.3
TXT Including plural adjustment means:

    Subject matter under subclass 561.2 having means for moving different areas
    of the flexible contact member to a desired shape.


CLS 33/562
TXT Template:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein the contact member is a pattern
    used to (a) gauge an article, (b) guide a tool (c) form symbols used in
    writing, (d) form lines or (e) figures used in layout work or drafting.

    (1)     Note.   A "template" is a guide or a pattern for manufacturing,
    layout, or repair of articles, a pattern for gauging, or a guide for making
    alphabetical, numerical or other type symbols or representations of three
    dimensional objects as two dimensional objects on plans.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 372 for a process of mechanical routing or
    grooving by using a template or pattern and subclass 144.51 for a templet
    used in shaping of woodwork.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclass 115 for an
    axially moving tool with a work clamp with an adjustable tool guiding jig
    and subclass 241 for a drill guide.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling or Planing, subclass 130 for a template to be
    used with a milling cutter.


CLS 33/563
TXT Single sheet type:

    Subject matter under subclass 562 wherein the pattern is a solitary member
    having two parallel side surfaces having the sides separated by a minimal
    thickness.


CLS 33/564
TXT Alphabetical or numerical symbol type:

    Subject matter under subclass 563 wherein the member has a partial or
    complete outline for a character which is representation of an alphabetical
    or arithmetical character.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclass 159 for alphabet letter
    formation and subclasses 163+ for writing or printing by hand by tracing
    with or without  the use of a slotted path.


CLS 33/565
TXT Geometrical figure, three dimensional to two dimensional figure or curve:

    Subject matter under subclass 563 wherein the pattern is a plane
    geometrical figure or a representation of a three dimensional object in two
    dimensional form or a curve not provided for elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177,    for a curve ruler type gauge.


CLS 33/566
TXT Line or guide:

    Subject matter under subclass 563 wherein the pattern includes an outline
    of various types of lines or a guide for a margin or a border.

    (1)     Note.   The lines include solid, dotted, center-lines, break lines
    and hatch lines.


CLS 33/567
TXT Surface plate or gauge block:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 which includes (a) a precision surface to
    support an article for gauging or layout purposes or (b) a precision gauge
    having surfaces parallel or at an angle to each other wherein the distance
    between or the angle between the surfaces is accurately known.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for a table layout.

    534+,   for angle measurement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 346.01+ for supporting bases.

    269,    Work Holders, subclass 8 for a magnetic work holder and subclass
    289 for a work underlying support.

    451,    Abrading, subclass 46 for a process of gauge grinding.


CLS 33/567.1
TXT Adjustable gauge block:

    Subject matter under subclass 567 wherein the gauge block is made of
    several parts and has means to move or hold the parts in a desired position.


CLS 33/568
TXT Work support adjustment:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein the contact member supports a
    workpiece and includes means to vary the position of the member in precise
    manner.

    (1)     Note.   Linear or angular adjustments are in this group of
    subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    537,    for an adjustable angular work support of the sine, cosine or
    tangent bar type.

    549,    for a gauge with an article support.

    573,    for a work support, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 1+ for a
    tiltable surface, subclasses 20+ for a power driven surface, subclasses
    137+ for a horizontally adjustable surface and subclasses 144.11+ for a
    vertically adjustable surface.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 127+ for a stand and subclasses 200+ for a
    bracket.

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 55+ for a holder mounted for movement,
    particularly subclasses 63+ for a holder with indexing steps.


CLS 33/569
TXT Rotary:

    Subject matter under subclass 568 wherein the contact member has a center
    of rotation and the means to vary the position of the member has structure
    to change the angular position of the member.

    (1)     Note.   Indexing and dividing heads are here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for an angle measurement.

    534+,   for an angle gauge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 35.5 for plural diverse manufacturing
    apparatus with turret mechanism including a tool turret.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 813+ for a rotary member
    or shaft indexing.

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 58+ for a movable holder including means
    to shift the holder position and subclasses 63+ for a movable work holder
    with indexing steps.

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, subclass 5 for angularly adjustable or indexing
    chucks or sockets.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 364+ for a work holder for use in abrading.


CLS 33/570
TXT Pin and slot type:

    Subject matter under subclass 569 wherein the structure to change the
    angular position of the member includes slots or holes about a center of
    rotation and a peg inserted into a selected slot or hole.


CLS 33/571
TXT With scale:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 which includes a graduated indicator.


CLS 33/572
TXT Probe support:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 which includes a support, per se, for a
    contact member not provided for elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    537,    for a movably supported sine, cosine or tangent bar.

    549+,   for a movably supported contact member gauge with or without an
    indicator responsive to the member and an article support with the gauge.

    556+,   for movably supported contact member with or without an indicator
    responsive to the member.

    562,    for a template and its support.

    568+,   for a movably supported contact member work support to accurately
    position the member angularly or linearly.


CLS 33/573
TXT Work support:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 which includes a work support, per se,
    for supporting an article when gauged by a contact member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    515,    for a gauge having a support for a human being.

    537,    for a sine, cosine or tangent bar with an article support.

    549+,   for a gauge having a support for an article gauged by a contact
    member.

    568+,   for an article support which can change, in a precise way, the
    linear or rotary position of a point on the support.


CLS 33/574
TXT POINT MARKER GUIDE:

    Subject matter under the class definition which comprises means to direct
    the path of a point marker towards a predetermined point.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 366+ for a pointed perforating or indenting
    implement which may be used as a point marker.

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching),  appropriate subclasses, for
    selective punching devices which may be used as point markers.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclass 72 for an
    axially moving cutter with work engaging structure including a bushing
    guide for the cutter and subclasses 241 for a drill guide including a drill
    bushing.


CLS 33/575
TXT Button or buttonhole marker guide:

    Subject matter under subclass 574 wherein the means to direct the path of a
    point marker guides the marker to mark the location of a button or a slit
    in some material to accommodate a button.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    662,    for a button or button location or size gauge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 572+ for a button and
    subclasses 659+ for a button hole.


CLS 33/576
TXT With workpiece support:

    Subject matter under subclass 575 which includes a structure to hold an
    article against the force of gravity so that the means to direct the point
    marker can guide the marker to mark the article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, for supports of general utility, especially subclasses
    127+ for stand-type supports.


CLS 33/577
TXT With support for workpiece:

    Subject matter under subclass 574 which includes a structure to hold an
    article against the force of gravity so that the means to direct the point
    marker can guide the marker to mark the article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    576,    for a support to hold a workpiece with a button or button hole
    marker or guide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, for supports of general utility, especially subclasses
    127+ for stand-type supports.


CLS 33/578
TXT For plural markers:

    Subject matter under subclass 574 which includes means to direct the paths
    of a plurality of markers.


CLS 33/579
TXT For marker movement in direction of marker axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 574 wherein a point marker has an axis and
    the means to direct the path of the marker allows movement in the direction
    of the marker axis.


CLS 33/600
TXT Automotive:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein the gauge contacts a self-powered
    road vehicle or a vehicle part.


CLS 33/601
TXT Mechanical engine timing by piston contact in engine cylinder:

    Subject matter under subclass 600 wherein the gauge contacts a piston
    within an engine cylinder of an internal combustion engine to note the
    piston position axially in the cylinder.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes gauges for timing the exhaust or
    intake valve with respect to the piston position in the cylinder.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes gauges for timing ignition by
    checking the position of the piston in a cylinder.


CLS 33/602
TXT Distributor point setting:

    Subject matter under subclass 600 wherein the gauge contacts (a) a
    distributor cam and the movable electrical contact of the distributor
    associated with the cam, (2) the fixed and the movable electrical contacts
    of a distributor to set the contact separation or (c) dual ignition
    contacts, to set the angular separation of the contacts.


CLS 33/603
TXT Connecting rod:

    Subject matter under subclass 600 wherein the gauge contacts (a) an
    internal combustion engine connecting rod or (b) a connecting rod pin in
    the bore of the rod to test some geometrical relationship with respect to
    the rod or rod pin.

    (1)     Note.  Gauges of this subclass type may test for the straightness
    of the connecting rod, the parallelism of the crankshaft bore and the
    piston pin bore, or the offset portions of the connecting rod.


CLS 33/604
TXT With piston:

    Subject matter under subclass 603 wherein the gauge contacts the piston
    attached to the connecting rod.


CLS 33/605
TXT Piston, piston ring, or crankshaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 600 wherein the gauge contacts (a) a piston
    or a piston bushing in a piston pin opening, (b) a piston ring or (c) a
    main shaft of an internal combustion engine, to gauge some characteristic
    of the part contacted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    604,    for gauges for pistons with connecting rods.


CLS 33/606
TXT Power train:

    Subject matter under subclass 600 wherein the gauge contacts a part which
    controls or transmits mechanical motion from the engine to the wheels of a
    vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of classification in this subclass, the term
    "power train" encompasses clutches, manual or automatic transmissions,
    drive shafts and differentials.

    (2)     Note.  The gauges of this subclass type generally contact a second
    power train part associated with the first part to check some relationship
    between the two parts.


CLS 33/607
TXT Fuel pump, injection nozzle or valve, or carburator:

    Subject matter under subclass 600 wherein the gauge contacts at least a
    part of a (a) fuel pump, (b) injection nozzle, (c) nozzle seat or (d)
    carburetor.

    (1)     Note.  Gauges of this subclass type generally contact a second fuel
    system part associated with the first part to check or determine a
    geometrical measurement.


CLS 33/608
TXT Frame alignment:

    Subject matter under subclass 600 wherein the gauge contacts a vehicle
    frame to set known distances or to check known distances to points on the
    vehicle from points external to the vehicle or from other points on the
    vehicle.

    (1)     Note. Subject matter of this subclass type includes the contact
    member with or without scales or other parts of complete alignment gauges.


CLS 33/609
TXT Brake:

    Subject matter under subclass 600 wherein the gauge contacts a vehicle
    brake element.

    (1)     Note.  Gauges of this subclass type generally contact another part
    of the vehicle to check or determine a geometrical measurement.


CLS 33/610
TXT Drum or shoe:

    Subject matter under subclass 609 wherein the element is a wheel brake drum
    or a brake shoe.


CLS 33/611
TXT Engine valve, valve stem, or tappet:

    Subject matter under subclass 600 wherein the gauge contacts an intake or
    exhaust valve of an internal combustion engine, or a part of the valve
    actuating mechanism, to determine some geometrical distance with respect to
    the part being contacted or to some other part of the engine.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes gauges for (a) measuring the length
    of an intake or exhaust valve, (b) the distance between the intake or
    exhaust valve stem end and the motor block or (c) the length of a valve
    stem by gaging the distance between a valve seat on a motor block and a
    valve tappet.


CLS 33/612
TXT Torsion bar:

    Subject matter under subclass 600 wherein the gauge contacts a torsion bar
    of a vehicle to check the height of the suspension on each side of the
    vehicle.


CLS 33/613
TXT Collocating:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein the gauge contacts a first part
    and a second part to (a) verity the alignment or proper mutual arrangement
    of the two parts, or to (b) check or (c) set the distance or spacing
    between the two parts.  Note.  The two parts may be two different objects.
    Under "SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS", cancel the 144+ note.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144+,   for devices designed both for positioning track rails with relation
    to each other and for testing the distances between those already in use.

    179.5,  for gauges used to determine the proper relationship of axes of
    spur gears to produce proper meshing.

    666+,   for gauges used in marking points regardless of whether objects are
    to be located at the marked points.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 700+ for a gauge combined with means for
    assembling.


CLS 33/614
TXT Printing member registration:

    Subject matter under subclass 613 wherein the gauge contacts a printing
    element and (a) a support for the printing element, (b) a second printing
    element or (c) a sheet to be printed by the printing element.

    (1)     Note.  The term "printing element" includes (a) a photographic
    negative or positive, (b) printing type, or (c) a printing plate.


CLS 33/615
TXT Photographic member or holder with respect to surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 614 which includes (a) a support and (b) a
    photographic element or element holder, and (c) positioning means including
    a contact member to position the photographic element or element holder
    with respect to the support.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type includes a positive or
    negative exposed, developed and fixed film, plate or sheet material
    positioning device.


CLS 33/616
TXT Transparent registration sheet to align printing on member:

    Subject matter under subclass 614 wherein the gauge is a see-through sheet
    having printing thereon for superpositioning on a printing member whereby
    the alignment of printing on the member may be compared with the printing
    on the sheet.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of classification in this subclass,
    "translucent" is considered to be included within the meaning of the term
    "transparent".


CLS 33/617
TXT Printing type or plate:

    Subject matter under subclass 614 wherein the gauge contacts (a) a printing
    element having a raised symbol which may be grouped with other similar
    elements to from the printing to be printed, or (b) a composited element
    having plural symbols forming the printing to be printed.


CLS 33/618
TXT Curved printing member with respect to its support:

    Subject matter under subclass 617 wherein the printing element is nonlinear
    and a cylinder supports the element and the gauge contacts both the element
    and the cylinder to align the printing element with respect to the cylinder
    support.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type includes collocating
    attachments to the support cylinder.

    (2)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type includes alignment
    markings or the outline the elements with respect to the shape and
    dimension of the support cylinder.


CLS 33/619
TXT Page form registration with respect to its support or to another form on
    same support:

    Subject matter under subclass 617 having one or more printing elements,
    each forming a page of material to be printed, and a support for the
    elements, wherein the gauge contacts one or more of the elements to (a)
    check the alignment of the elements with respect to each other, or (b)
    check the alignment of an element with respect to its support.


CLS 33/620
TXT Plate registration with respect to second plate or printing sheet:

    Subject matter under subclass 617 having (a) two supported plates having
    points on each plate in common, or (b) a supported printing plate and a
    printed sheet having points in common, wherein the gauge contacts the
    points in common to check the alignment of the two plates or the plate and
    printed sheet.


CLS 33/621
TXT Plate registration with respect to plate support:

    Subject matter under subclass 617 which includes a flat, sheet-like
    printing element and its support wherein the contact member contacts the
    printing element or its support to align or check the alignment of the
    printing element with respect to its support.


CLS 33/622
TXT Hand stamp registration with respect to printing location on sheet to be
    printed:

    Subject matter under subclass 614 comprising a member forming (a) a
    straight edge or (b) a radius to locate a hand stamp on a surface at each
    point  at which it is desired to sequentially hand print a symbol by
    stamping the symbol on the surface.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type may or may not be
    claimed in combination with a hand stamp.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclasses 368+ for a printing member, including subclass
    405 for a stamp handle and subclass 371 for a mail cancelling stamp.


CLS 33/623
TXT Sheet registering device:

    Subject matter under subclass 613 wherein the gauge is (a) mating member
    attached to a sheet or (b) attached to a mating member  attached to a
    surface or to another sheet for the purpose of positioning a sheet in a
    predetermined location on a surface or with respect to an additional sheet.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type includes either mating
    member of the registering device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    483,    for straight rules.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 53+ for a pin type holder.

    283,    Printed Matter, subclasses 36+ for indexes printed matter.


CLS 33/624
TXT Earth contacting or working:

    Subject matter under subclass 613 wherein the gauge contacts a tool which
    touches the earth or performs some type of work on the earth or a support
    for such a tool.

    (1)     Note.  Earth working of this subclass type includes excavating or
    scraping the earth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    521,    for earth-contacting gauges for determining the local profile of
    the earth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 430 for earth working apparatus with
    sighting means.


CLS 33/625
TXT Trenching tool depth:

    Subject matter under subclass 624 wherein the tool is a ditch digger and
    having means to gauge the depth of the digging tool in the earth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    624,    for collocating gauges for earth moving equipment used in
    construction or in agriculture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 350+, 353+, and 366+ for ditchers of the
    screw, endless bucket or plow  type.


CLS 33/626
TXT Tool or surrogate:

    Subject matter under subclass 613 wherein the first part is an instrument
    which does some type of work, or is a substitute for such an instrument.

    (1)     Note.  In the subject matter of this subclass type, the gauge
    contact member typically locates a tool with respect to (a) its tool
    holder, (b) and object to be worked on by the tool, or (c) the object
    support.


CLS 33/627
TXT Die:

    Subject matter under subclass 626 wherein the instrument shapes material by
    force imparted to the material.

    (1)     Note.  The force of this subclass type may, for example, be applied
    to the material by punching or stamping means.


CLS 33/628
TXT Cutter or shaper:

    Subject matter under subclass 626 wherein the instrument severs material
    from a workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  Cutter or shaping tools of this subclass type include, for
    example, saws, grinders, files, drills and punches.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 268+ for gauges which form a guide for a knife
    either by engagement with the material or a work table.


CLS 33/629
TXT Screw thread:

    Subject matter under subclass 628 wherein the cutter or shaper forms the
    spiral of a screw thread.

    (1)     Note.  The threads of this subclass type include, for example,
    tapered, straight and ACME-type threads.


CLS 33/630
TXT Cutter with respect to workpiece end:

    Subject matter under subclass 628 wherein the gauge contacts a cutter or a
    cutter support and an end of material in order to determine the length of
    material to be cut off.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type may include, for
    example, a chain saw with a distance gauge to show the length of material
    to be cut off.


CLS 33/631
TXT Shears:

    Subject matter under subclass 630 wherein the cutter is a hand held
    manipulable cutter having two opposed cutting edges.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, subclass 163 for a gauge or other measuring means
    in combination with a cutter.

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 233 for a shears in combination with a gauge.


CLS 33/632
TXT Axis of rotary cutter with respect to axis of cylindrical workpiece:

    Subject matter under subclass 628 wherein the gauge contacts a rotary
    cutter and a cylindrical workpiece or a support for such a workpiece to
    locate the axis of the cutter with respect to the axis of the workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  The member contacting the workpiece typically contacts it at
    two points on its surface lying in a plane perpendicular to its axis and is
    connected to the member contacting the cutter in such a way that the axis
    of the cutter bisects the arc between the workpiece-contacting points and,
    by extension, intersects the axis of the workpiece.


CLS 33/633
TXT Planar blade with respect to its holder or another part:

    Subject matter under subclass 628 wherein the instrument is a flat knife
    and the gauge contacts an adjustable support for the knife or another part
    of a machine containing the knife and its support.


CLS 33/634
TXT With respect to its rotary holder:

    Subject matter under subclass 633 wherein the knife support permits
    movement of the knife about a center.


CLS 33/635
TXT Plural blade holder:

    Subject matter under subclass 634 wherein there is more than one knife
    supported by the knife support.


CLS 33/636
TXT Bit with respect to its holder:

    Subject matter under subclass 628 wherein the instrument is a cutter bit
    and the gauge contacts a machine tool cutter bit holder.


CLS 33/637
TXT Boring bar holder:

    Subject matter under subclass 636 wherein the tool holder is a boring bar
    for the bit.


CLS 33/638
TXT Bit with respect to workpiece or workpiece holder:

    Subject matter under subclass 628 wherein the instrument is a machine tool
    bit and the gauge contacts a workpiece or workpiece support having an axis,
    the gauge thus serving to assist in positioning the bit on the axis.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type includes levels claimed
    in combination with the gauge to assist in determining the axis of the
    workpiece or workpiece support.


CLS 33/639
TXT Drill or bit with respect to chuck or spindle holder:

    Subject matter under subclass 628 wherein the gauge contacts a drill or a
    machine tool bit and a socket or a spindle for the drill or the tool bit or
    the holder or support for such socket or spindle.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass, the cutter or shaper is collocated with
    respect to its chuck or spindle holder either directly or indirectly by
    being collocated with respect to the chuck or spindle itself.


CLS 33/640
TXT Circular cutter with respect to workpiece or workpiece support:

    Subject matter under subclass 628 wherein the cutting edge of the cutter
    revolves in a circular path  and the gauge contacts the cutter and the
    workpiece or the workpiece support to locate the cutter with respect to the
    workpiece or workpiece support.

    (1)     Note.  Typically, but not necessarily, the cutting edges of the
    cutters of this subclass type are so oriented on the cutter with respect to
    the cutter's axis of rotation as to generate a cylinder when the cutter is
    rotated.


CLS 33/641
TXT With respect to support:

    Subject matter under subclass 628 wherein the gauge contacts the cutter or
    shaper and the support for the cutter or chapter to locate the cutter or
    shaper with respect to its support.


CLS 33/642
TXT Spindle or chuck with respect to workpiece or workpiece support:

    Subject matter under subclass 626 wherein the gauge includes a shaft having
    an axis adapted to be chucked or held by a rotating machine tool spindle
    and also contacts a workpiece to align the axis of the shaft with a point
    or plane on a workpiece to check the perpendicularity of the shaft with the
    workpiece.


CLS 33/643
TXT Millstone with respect to millstone shaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 626 wherein the instrument is a grinding
    stone of a grain mill having an axle and the gauge contacts the axle and
    either the grinding stone thereon or a cooperating, fixed grinding stone to
    determine whether the stone is at right angles to the axle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196,    for devices for testing the trueness of a millstone face.


CLS 33/644
TXT Centering or point location:

    Subject matter under subclass 613 wherein the gauge contacts a first part
    and second part to position or locate (a) the first part centrally of the
    second part, (b) the first part centrally with respect to a dimension of
    the second part, or (c) a point or axis on the first part centrally with
    respect to a point on the second part.


CLS 33/645
TXT Alignment:

    Subject matter under subclass 613 wherein the gauge contacts a first and
    second object, or a first part and a second part of one object to assist in
    the positioning of the two in or on a straight line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    520,    for gauges for centering or locating a point on a single object.

    644,    for gauges for centering a first part with respect to a second part
    or for locating a point on the first part with respect to a point on the
    second part.


CLS 33/646
TXT Clapboard lapping:

    Subject matter under subclass 613 wherein the gauge contacts a weatherboard
    edge for alignment.

    (1)     Note.  Edges of weatherboards of this subclass type includes upper,
    lower or side edges of the weatherboard.

    (2)     Note.  Gauges of this subclass type generally set the distances
    between the lower edge of the lower board and the lower edge of the
    partially-covering board to establish the area of the boards exposed to the
    weather.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    648+,   for a collocating gauge for shingle lapping.


CLS 33/647
TXT Having tab for supporting bottom of clapboard:

    Subject matter under subclass 646 wherein the gauge has a blade to fit
    under the lower surface of a weatherboard.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    649,    for a shingle lapping gauge having a tab to fit underneath a
    shingle.


CLS 33/648
TXT Shingle lapping gauge:

    Subject matter under subclass 613 wherein the gauge contacts a roof shingle
    for alignment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    646+,   for a collocating gauge for clapboard lapping.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclass 45 for a roof scaffold
    and shingle gauge.


CLS 33/649
TXT Having tab on underside of shingle:

    Subject matter under subclass 648 wherein the gauge has a blade to fit next
    to the lower side of a shingle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    647,    for a clapboard lapping gauge having a tab to fit underneath a
    clapboard.


CLS 33/650
TXT Shoe, shoe part or last:

    Subject matter under subclass 613 wherein the gauge contacts a covering for
    a human foot or a part of the covering in order to establish a spatial
    relationship with a support for the covering or covering part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, for combinations of shoe making machines and
    gauges of this subclass type, particularly, subclasses 7+ for a lasting
    machine, subclasses 17+ for a sole machine, subclasses 42+ for a heel
    machine, subclasses 51+ for an upper machine, and subclasses 142+ for a
    process for making a boot or a shoe.

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclass 25 for a sole, subclasses 34+
    for a heel, subclasses 45+ for an upper and subclasses 83+ for a boot or
    shoe, per se.


CLS 33/651
TXT Railway track or railway vehicle part:

    Subject matter under subclass 613 wherein the gauge aligns railway tracks
    or railway vehicle parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    238,    Railways:  Surface Track, subclasses 24+ for a railroad tie,
    subclasses 122+ for a railroad rail and subclasses 209+ for a railroad base
    plate.


CLS 33/651.1
TXT Track type:

    Subject matter under subclass 651 wherein the gauge is used for checking or
    aligning railway track.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    287,    for a track aligning means utilizing a sight line.

    338,    for a track spacing and level indicating instruments.


CLS 33/652
TXT Burner fuel emitting member with respect to electrode spacing:

    Subject matter under subclass 613 wherein the gauge contacts a fuel
    emitting nozzle or pipe and a electrical igniter.


CLS 33/653
TXT Insignia with respect to garment, e.g., uniform:

    Subject matter under subclass 613 wherein the gauge is a template
    contacting an emblem on an article of clothing to place the emblem at a
    specific location on the article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for a clothing size and shape or layout gauge.

    575+,   for a button or button hole placement marker.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 246 for apparel insignia.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 1.5 for a badge.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 66+ for a garment fitting form.


CLS 33/654
TXT Valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 613 wherein the gauge contacts different
    portions of a device regulating the flow of a fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    607,    for a gauge for a fuel igniter valve or nozzle part.

    611,    for a valve, valve stem or tappet gauge for an internal combustion
    engine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 356 for a valve generally.


CLS 33/655
TXT Machine parts:

    Subject matter under subclass 613 wherein the first and the second parts
    are elements of a machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    501.13, for gauges for determining the position of axes of spur gearing to
    produce proper meshing.


CLS 33/656
TXT Electrical dynamo:

    Subject matter under subclass 655 wherein the machine is an
    electrical-mechanical device which creates electrical power or changes
    electrical power into mechanical work.


CLS 33/657
TXT Rolls, or roll and coacting part:

    Subject matter under subclass 655 wherein the machine elements include a
    circular cylinder associated with a second circular cylinder or the axis of
    a second circular cylinder, or a part associated with a circular cylinder.


CLS 33/658
TXT Typewriter:

    Subject matter under subclass 655 wherein the machine elements are parts of
    a manually operated typewriter.


CLS 33/659
TXT Watch:

    Subject matter under subclass 655 wherein the machine elements are parts of
    a time piece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203.1,  for gauges for determining the form or trueness of watch wheels,
    per se.


CLS 33/660
TXT Wheel quartering or crank arm, connecting rod or crank pin with respect to
    one or the other:

    Subject matter under subclass 655 wherein the machine elements are parts of
    a steam locomotive drive train.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type includes gauges for
    setting the crank-pin on a locomotive drive wheel with respect to the
    corresponding crank-pin on the other side of the locomotive, for setting
    the centerline of a crank-pin with the respect to the centerline rod with
    respect to a crank-pin, crack or wheel of a steam engine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    534,    for angle gauges, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 96 for a wheel or axle drive.


CLS 33/661
TXT Plural axes center for common axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 655 wherein the gauge contact one of the
    shaft axes indicates the alignment or nonalignment of two or more shafts on
    a common axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    572,    for a support for a probe to check the alignment of two shafts.


CLS 33/662
TXT Button or buttonhole:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein the gauges determines the
    placement of a button or buttonhole or the size of a button or buttonhole.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass type includes, for
    example, templates.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for an apparel gauge to ascertain the size and shape of clothing
    and for laying out clothing or footwear.

    562+,   for a template gauge, generally.


CLS 33/663
TXT Proportional line segmenter:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 having at least three relatively movable
    contact members (or contact member guides) arranged so that their
    object-contacting points contact the object in a straight line and are so
    interconnected that while the distances between the contact points may be
    selectively increased or decreased, the ratios of the distances between
    them at successive settings remain the same.

    (1)     Note.  One or more of the object contacting members may also
    function to mark the object.

    (2)     Note.  The guides provided for in this subclass and the subclasses
    indented hereunder are used generally in conjunction with markers which may
    not be part of the claimed invention but which are used to mark the object
    at points designated by the guide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    670+,   for proportionally repositionable contact members which do not
    contact the object at points lying in a straight line and which also have a
    marker for locating and marking the center of the area defined by the
    contact members.


CLS 33/664
TXT Parallelogram type:

    Subject matter under subclass 663 wherein the means interconnecting the
    members consists of a series of crossed bars pivoted at their midpoints and
    at each of their ends to a succeeding group of crossed bars capable of
    being folded or extending to form at any particular setting a plurality of
    equidistant contact points.


CLS 33/665
TXT Dividers:

    Subject matter under subclass 663 having three contact members having their
    object-contacting points movable along a straight line and interconnected
    such that the distances between the two outer contact points and the middle
    contact point are always equal.


CLS 33/666
TXT With point marker:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 in combination with a visual spot marker
    or spot marker guide to mark or guide a marker at a location determined by
    the gauge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for perforated apparel patterns and charts.

    197,    for gauge employed in laying out mortise work having points to
    outline the mortise.

    574,    for point marker guides which do not include means to measure a
    geometrical characteristic of an object.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), subclasses 59+ for a
    pattern-controlled selective punching device, and particularly subclass 89
    for a pattern useable with such a device.


CLS 33/667
TXT For door or drawer hinge, pull or securing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 666 which includes a door or hinge contact
    member to locate the center of a lock or holes to attach a hinge or pull on
    a door or drawer and a point marker or a point marker guide located on the
    gauge to mark the location of the lock center or holes to attach the hinge,
    drawer, pull or door securing means (e.g., bolts or latches).


CLS 33/668
TXT For windup tape or tape casing, or marker attachment for tape:

    Subject matter under subclass 666 which includes (a) a distance tape, (b) a
    point marker attachment for a distance  tape, or (c) a subcombination of a
    tape device, combined with the visual point marker.


CLS 33/669
TXT Plural markers:

    Subject matter under subclass 666 wherein there are at least two visual
    markers or point marker guides.


CLS 33/670
TXT Having marker centering means:

    Subject matter under subclass 666 wherein the gauge contacts an object at
    two points and includes means to position the marker or guide on a point
    equidistant from the contacted points on the object.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 72+ for
    analogous devices used as guides for center drills.


CLS 33/671
TXT For marking center of hole:

    Subject matter under subclass 670 with means to center the marker or its
    guide within a hole.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type may include a template
    with a hole to establish a point on an object or the center of a hole in an
    object.


CLS 33/672
TXT Having diverging-angle bisector workpiece-contacting members with marker on
    angle bisector:

    Subject matter under subclass 670 wherein there are two contact members
    forming an angle between them and a support for the spot marker or its
    guide to position the marker or guide on a point equidistant form the
    contact members.


CLS 33/673
TXT Having adjustable workpiece-contacting  centering  means:

    Subject matter under subclass 670 wherein the contacting members are
    movable to adjust the centering means to locate the guide or marker at the
    center of the object.


CLS 33/674
TXT Pivoted caliper workpiece-contacting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 673 wherein the contact members turn about a
    center to locate the guide or marker at the center of the contacted object.


CLS 33/675
TXT Rack and pinion operating workpiece-contacting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 673 wherein the centering contact members
    include a rack and gear means meshing with each other to move the members
    toward and away from each other to center the guide and the marker at the
    center of the object.

    (1)     Note.  The racks need not be in a straight line.


CLS 33/676
TXT Having workpiece-contacting tapered centering means:

    Subject matter under subclass 670 which includes a cone-shaped contact
    surface and the marker or guide has an axis coaxial with the axis of the
    cone-shaped surface.


CLS 33/677
TXT Having workpiece-contacting device with marking to align with workpiece
    marking:

    Subject matter under subclass 666 wherein the contact member is a visual
    design on a support for the spot marker or the spot marker guide which
    matches a design on a workpiece to locate the marker or guide at a desired
    point on the workpiece.


CLS 33/678
TXT Angularly adjustable about an axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 666 wherein the contact member positions a
    pivot point and the point marker or the point marker guide is angularly
    positioned about the pivot point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for angular measurement devices.

    277+,   for a straight line ray type geometrical instrument, particularly
    subclass 281 for a vertical and horizontal angle measurement, subclasses
    282+ for a vertical angle measurement, and subclass 285 for a horizontal
    angle measurement.

    300+,   for an indicator of direction of force traversing natural media,
    particularly subclass 341 for a measurement in plural direction or shape
    with a variable angle determination and subclass 343 for an angle
    determination.

    418+,   for a pivoted straight edge and a square, particularly subclass 434
    with a protractor and subclass 421 having angle indicating means and
    straight edge as hypotenuse.

    534+,   for an angle gauge.

    569+,   for a rotary work support adjustment.


CLS 33/679
TXT Marker located with respect to two different directions:

    Subject matter under subclass 666 wherein the gauge serves to locate the
    point marker or the guide with respect to the workpiece at the intersection
    of two different paths.

    (1)     Note.  The point marker or guide may be movable with respect to the
    workpiece or the workpiece support may be movable with respect to the
    marker or guide.


CLS 33/679.1
TXT Special scale markings:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein the gauge is provided with
    indicia pertaining to a specific type of a measurement desired, wire size,
    pipe size or ring size.


CLS 33/700
TXT DISTANCE MEASURING:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising means having indicia
    on it for indicating a variable length.

    (1)     Note.  Gauges for comparing or determining size or standard are
    classified in subclasses 501+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for instruments designed for fitting apparel.

    203+,   for size or shape of tire or wheel.

    458+,   for distance measuring by a rigid straight bar.

    501+,   for gauges which include measuring as to a size, standard, etc.

    511+,   for gauging animals, humans or dental.

    520+,   for gauging a center point, distance between centers or centerline
    location.

    524+,   for gauging food portion.

    545+,   for a gauge comparison with a standard.

    558.01+, for pivoted probes, e.g., divider, caliper, etc.

    609+,   for a gauge measuring a brake drum or shoe.

    679.1,  for gauges which have special scale markings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 37+, for measuring devices in
    which fluid pressure or fluid flow is used in the measurement or testing.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 64 and 254.1+ for well processes or apparatus
    including means for measuring distance.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for optical
    measuring.  See sections III and V of the Class 356 definitions for the
    subject matter in classes 33 and 356.


CLS 33/701
TXT Process:

    Method under subclass 700 for making distance measurement.


CLS 33/702
TXT Error compensation (e.g., temperature):

    Subject matter under subclass 700 which includes structure to make a
    correction of the distance measured.


CLS 33/703
TXT Environmental isolation:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 which includes structure for protecting
    the distance measuring means from adverse physical conditions which may
    affect the measurement being made.


CLS 33/704
TXT Thermal:

    Subject matter under subclass 703 wherein the adverse condition is heat or
    temperature.


CLS 33/705
TXT Sealing:

    Subject matter under subclass 703 wherein the adverse condition is foreign
    matter which is kept away from the measuring means by a barrier.


CLS 33/706
TXT Scale reading position sensor (e.g., grid counting):

    Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein the means for indicating the
    measured distance is a scanning element which receives pulses from a scaled
    element of the measuring means as the scanning element and scaled element
    are moved relative to each other.


CLS 33/707
TXT Optical:

    Subject matter under subclass 706 wherein the scanning element responds to
    light pulses.


CLS 33/708
TXT Magnetic:

    Subject matter under subclass 706 wherein the scanning element responds to
    a magnetic field.


CLS 33/709
TXT Convertible to another type measuring means:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein a measuring device can be charged
    by a rearranging of parts or selective use of its parts for making
    different measurements provided for below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    826,    for use of interchangeable parts of different sizes.


CLS 33/710
TXT Machine parts:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 having one element of a machine moving
    relative to another element of the machine and means to measure the
    distance moved.


CLS 33/711
TXT Rolling contact:

    Subject matter under subclass 710 wherein a measuring means has an element
    which bears on a machine element which causes the measuring means element
    to rotate to determine how far the machine element has moved.


CLS 33/712
TXT Article support integral with measuring means:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 having means for holding an article which
    forms part of the measuring means.

    (1)     Note.  Means for measuring endless belts are classified here.


CLS 33/713
TXT Sounding type:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 having means for (a) ascertaining the
    depth of bodies of fluent material or (b) measuring the distance from a
    datum to the surface of fluent material.

    (1)     Note.  Such devices for measuring distances from an aerial vehicle
    to the earth's surface are here included.

    (2)     Note.  See the notes to the class definition of Class 73, Measuring
    and Testing for a statement of the line for devices for determining depths
    and distances by sonic or electrical wave means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 290+ for means for measuring
    depth of liquid other than by mere measurement of distance, as by static
    liquid pressures, float-operated devices, propeller wheels, sight glasses,
    etc.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 113, for devices designed to give
    a signal or warning when a particular depth is reached, but not designed to
    measure variable depths.


CLS 33/714
TXT With electric control means:

    Subject matter under subclass 713 having electric means for moving the
    measuring or sounding means to a desired position.


CLS 33/715
TXT Of line:

    Subject matter under subclass 714 wherein the measuring means is a flexible
    line or tape.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing and Pulling Force,
    subclasses 173+, for winding drums of general application provided with
    automatic control.


CLS 33/716
TXT Including electric signal means:

    Subject matter under subclass 713 having an electric circuit which is
    actuated when a fluid is contacted resulting in a visual or audible signal.


CLS 33/717
TXT With sampling means:

    Subject matter under subclass 713 combined with means for taking a small
    part or quantity of solid matter or fluent material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 863+ for sampling structure but
    having no graduations.

    166,    Wells, subclass 64 for well apparatus including distance measuring
    means and subclasses 250.01+, for well processes involving distance and
    sampling.


CLS 33/718
TXT Hole type:

    Subject matter under subclass 717 wherein the sampling means has openings
    which hold the fluent material.


CLS 33/719
TXT Depth indication:

    Subject matter under subclass 713 having means to measure the distance from
    the top of a surface to the bottom.


CLS 33/720
TXT Line with weight:

    Subject matter under 713 having a weight or bob attached to a flexible line
    or tape.

    (1)     Note.  Sounding leads, per se, are in this subclass:

    (2)     Note.  Stack line indicators employing a weight or rod suspended
    from a line to gauge material in a kiln blast furnace, etc. are in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    716,    for electric signal means and line with weight.

    719,    for measuring depth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 403 for a paper weight and
    subclass 404 for other generic, weighting means.


CLS 33/721
TXT For nongaseous material:

    Subject matter under subclass 713 wherein the material being measured is a
    liquid or solid fluent.


CLS 33/722
TXT Liquid (e.g., dipstick):

    Subject matter under subclass 721 wherein the fluid being measured is of
    the liquid type.


CLS 33/723
TXT With means to adjust measuring rod:

    Subject matter under subclass 722 wherein the measuring means is a shaft or
    bar and includes means to move the measuring means.


CLS 33/724
TXT Having plural contacts:

    Subject matter under subclass 723 wherein a measuring means has a first
    means to touch the liquid and while in contact a second means to touch the
    liquid to indicate the top of the liquid.


CLS 33/725
TXT With cleaning means:

    Subject matter under subclass 722 having means to remove the liquid from a
    measuring means.


CLS 33/726
TXT With guide:

    Subject matter under subclass 722 having means to direct the course or
    motion of an indicator.

    (1)     Note.  A tube, per se, is not a guide for this subclass.


CLS 33/727
TXT With filter or vent:

    Subject matter under subclass 722 having means to prevent impurities from
    entering the fluid or onto an indicator, or means to permit passage or
    escape of gas from the fluid.


CLS 33/728
TXT With lock means:

    Subject matter under subclass 722 having means to secure an indicator so
    that it cannot be removed by normal operation.


CLS 33/729
TXT Shape of indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 722 having a particular contour, form or
    structure.


CLS 33/730
TXT With holder or housing for indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 722 having means to support or enclose an
    indicator.


CLS 33/731
TXT Including seal:

    Subject matter under subclass 730 having means for preventing matter from
    entering into, passing through, or escaping from the fluid.


CLS 33/732
TXT Of flexible material:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 having means to measure material which is
    able to bend without breaking.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    436,    for a straight edge adapted to measure flexible material.

    772,    for general rolling contact measurers.


CLS 33/733
TXT Supply (e.g., bolt, roll):

    Subject matter under subclass 732 wherein the material is measured while in
    a bolt or package form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    761,    for a flexible tape reel having a projection through which the tape
    may be passed between the layers of the supply.


CLS 33/734
TXT By rolling contact:

    Subject matter under subclass 732 having means adapted to bear on the
    material and caused to rotate by relative movement between the measuring
    means and material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    772,    for a rolling contact measuring means of general use.


CLS 33/735
TXT With computing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 734, including means for performing
    calculations, so that the result will indicate terms other than length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    773,    for a computer and a rolling contact means of general use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 61+ for mechanical computers.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, appropriate
    subclass for electronic computers.


CLS 33/736
TXT With particular electric output or circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 734 including an electronically operated read
    out measuring means or electrical elements for carrying current which
    control at least part of the measuring means or indicating means.


CLS 33/737
TXT With recording or marking means:

    Subject matter under subclass 734 including means to make a record of the
    measurement or to mark the material being measured.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    751,    for marking means of general use.


CLS 33/738
TXT Having rectilinear scale:

    Subject matter under subclass 734 wherein the means to indicate distance is
    restricted to move in a straight path.


CLS 33/739
TXT With signal means:

    Subject matter under subclass 734 including means to produce an audible or
    visual manifestation of a position or amount of a supply.

    (1)     Note.  A visual length indicator is not a signal means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    750,    for signal means of general use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 63+ for cutting machines including signal means.

    235,    Registers, subclass 128 for a register including a signal means.


CLS 33/740
TXT With stop means:

    Subject matter under subclass 734 provided with means capable of bringing
    any or all of the moving parts of the measuring means or supply of flexible
    material to a halt.


CLS 33/741
TXT For motor:

    Subject matter under subclass 740 wherein a motor is stopped.


CLS 33/742
TXT By clutch:

    Subject matter under subclass 740 having means for making a temporary
    connection between the moving parts.


CLS 33/743
TXT Combined:

    Subject matter under subclass 734, to which has been added a subcombination
    or assembly which is recognized as subject matter of some other class.


CLS 33/744
TXT Belt type:

    Subject matter under subclass 734 wherein the means that bears on the
    material is an endless band.


CLS 33/745
TXT Zero setting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 734 includes means to turn the measuring
    means back to zero.


CLS 33/746
TXT Rotating and stationary surfaces:

    Subject matter under subclass 734 wherein the surface of a rotatable member
    bears on a nonmovable surface while the material is moved between them.


CLS 33/747
TXT Opposed rotating surfaces:

    Subject matter under subclass 734 wherein the material is moved between
    rotatable members.


CLS 33/748
TXT Plural:

    Subject matter under subclass 747 wherein there are more than two rotatable
    members.


CLS 33/749
TXT Only three:

    Subject matter under subclass 748 having only three rotatable members.


CLS 33/750
TXT Predetermined stop or signal means:

    Subject matter under subclasses 732 including means bringing the measuring
    means to a halt or producing an audible, visual or other manifestation when
    a set length of material has passed.


CLS 33/751
TXT With marking means:

    Subject matter under subclass 732 including means to mark the work or
    material being measured.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    737,    for material marking means with a roller type measuring means.


CLS 33/752
TXT With ratchet means to move indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 732 including a wheel with teeth adapted to
    be engaged by a pawl which imparts intermittent motion to the wheel which
    moves the indicator.


CLS 33/753
TXT With gear means to move indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 732 including a toothed wheel and means to
    move the toothed wheel which moves the indicator.


CLS 33/754
TXT With take up reel:

    Subject matter under subclass 732 including means that rotate and receive
    the material after it has been measured.


CLS 33/755
TXT By flexible tape:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein a measuring means is made of a
    material which is able to bend without breaking.


CLS 33/756
TXT Cord type:

    Subject matter under subclass 755 wherein a measuring means is in the form
    of a rope or thread.


CLS 33/757
TXT Means to keep tape straight:

    Subject matter under subclass 755 wherein the tape shape or structure
    prevents the tape from bending when extended.


CLS 33/758
TXT With adhesive or securing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 755 including means that will hold the
    measuring means permanently to an object being measured by sticking,
    clinging or fastening.

    (1)     Note.  A hook at the end of a tape is means for temporary holding
    the tape to an object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    770,    for a hook attachment.


CLS 33/759
TXT Specified use:

    Subject matter under subclass 755 wherein the measuring means has a special
    shape, attachment or condition so that it is used to measure a particular
    device or in a particular environment, e.g., ball field or underwater.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    758,    for measuring means that are secured to an element which can be
    used in specified areas.

    763,    for computing means which read out is other than measurement.


CLS 33/760
TXT Combined:

    Subject matter under subclass 755 to which has been added a subcombination
    or assembly which is recognized as subject matter of some other class.


CLS 33/761
TXT Specified reel housing feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 755 having a particularly described structure
    to contain the tape.


CLS 33/762
TXT With meter:

    Subject matter under subclass 761 including means for indicating the
    distance.


CLS 33/763
TXT Including computing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 762 having means for performing mathematical
    operations, so that the result will be indicated in other terms than length
    units.


CLS 33/764
TXT Plural tapes:

    Subject matter under subclass 761 having more than one tape in the housing.


CLS 33/765
TXT Opening in housing for reading tape:

    Subject matter under subclass 761 wherein the housing has an aperture in
    which the tape can be seen.


CLS 33/766
TXT Inside-outside measure:

    Subject matter under subclass 761 including means for measuring the inside
    or outside of an object.


CLS 33/767
TXT Including brake or lock:

    Subject matter under subclass 761 having means for preventing rotation of
    or means to hold the tape at a certain position.


CLS 33/768
TXT Including attachment:

    Subject matter under subclass 761 wherein an element is added to the tape
    or housing to help in measuring or wherein the tape is so shaped that it
    can be attached to a housing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    770,    for attachments with no specified reel housing features.


CLS 33/769
TXT Housing shape, structure or material:

    Subject matter under subclass 761 having a particular configuration for the
    housing means to support the tape housing or specified material the housing
    is made of.


CLS 33/770
TXT Including attachment:

    Subject matter under subclass 755 wherein an element is added or held on
    the tape or housing to help in measuring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    757,    for attachments to keep a tape straight.

    768,    for attachments and specified housing features.


CLS 33/771
TXT Specified tape material:

    Subject matter under subclass 755 having a particularly described material
    for the tape.


CLS 33/772
TXT Of length by rolling contact:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 having means adapted to bear on the
    material and caused to rotate by relative movement between the measuring
    means and material to determine the length of the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    734,    for a rolling contact measuring means on flexible material.


CLS 33/773
TXT With computing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 772 including means for performing
    calculations so that the result will indicate terms other than length.

    (1)     Note.  See search notes, subclass 735.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124,    for similar devices used in determining area.

    735,    for a computing and a rolling contact  means on flexible material.


CLS 33/774
TXT Having rectilinear indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 772 wherein an indicator is restricted to
    move in a straight path.


CLS 33/775
TXT Combined:

    Subject matter under subclass 772 to which has been added a subcombination
    or assembly which is recognized as subject matter of some other class or
    part of this class.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are other geometrical instruments such as
    means for determining angles or grades.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, appropriate subclass for rolling contact distance
    measuring devices combined with means for recording irregularities in
    surfaces by shock or vibration and appropriate subclass for devices for
    measuring and recording distance and functions not included in this class.


CLS 33/776
TXT Belt type:

    Subject matter under subclass 772 wherein the means that bears on the
    material is an endless band.


CLS 33/777
TXT Inside tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 772 wherein the means that bears on the
    material is within a hollow cylinder or pipe.


CLS 33/778
TXT On running material (e.g., mill type):

    Subject matter under subclass 772 wherein the means that bears on material
    is caused to rotate by movement of the material.


CLS 33/779
TXT Implement:

    Subject matter under subclass 772 wherein the measuring means is manually
    manipulated.


CLS 33/780
TXT With digital indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 779 wherein the distance is shown in numerals.


CLS 33/781
TXT Including handle for implement:

    Subject matter under subclass 780 wherein the rolling contact is supported
    on a frame having an extension which is grasped by a person.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    782,    for a handle on a nondigital indicator.


CLS 33/782
TXT With handle:

    Subject matter under subclass 779 having an extension which is grasped by a
    person.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    781,    for a handle on a digital indicator.


CLS 33/783
TXT Opposed contacts:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 having at least two relatively movable
    contact members for contacting an object to be measured.

    (1)     Note.  The gauge area has contact members that are movable but are
    held in a set position when being used.  They may also include a meter
    member that indicates if an article is over or under size.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    501+,   for gauge means.


CLS 33/784
TXT Digital indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 783 including an indicator that has a readout
    in numerals to indicate distance.


CLS 33/785
TXT Fluid indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 783 wherein the indicator is moved by fluid
    pressure or fluid is the indicator.


CLS 33/786
TXT Liquid column indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 785 wherein a column of liquid is subjected
    to a pressure and the height of the liquid indicates the distance.


CLS 33/787
TXT Extensometer:

    Subject matter under subclass 783 having means for measuring small degrees
    of movement.


CLS 33/788
TXT With circuit means:

    Subject matter under subclass 787 including electric members for carrying
    electrical current to the indicator.


CLS 33/789
TXT Including differential transformer:

    Subject matter under subclass 788 having a transformer which joins two or
    more sources of signals to a common transmission line.


CLS 33/790
TXT Including means to clamp indicator to material:

    Subject matter under subclass 787 having means to hold the indicator on a
    member being measured.


CLS 33/791
TXT Optical indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 783 having means for conveying information
    which may include optic members, lenses or mirrors.


CLS 33/792
TXT Rotary indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 783 having an indicator with a movable
    readout member which turns about an axis to indicate information.


CLS 33/793
TXT Electrically controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 792 wherein the movable member is regulated
    by electric means.


CLS 33/794
TXT Hand held implement:

    Subject matter under subclass 792 wherein the indicator is supported by a
    human hand.


CLS 33/795
TXT Beam type:

    Subject matter under subclass 794 wherein the contacting members are
    mounted on a bar or rod.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    501.06, for a beam type comparator.


CLS 33/796
TXT Nonpivoted type with scale:

    Subject matter under subclass 795 having a member with indicia for
    measuring in addition to the rotary indicator.


CLS 33/797
TXT Pivoted type:

    Subject matter under subclass 794 wherein the contact members are movable
    about a point.


CLS 33/798
TXT Center pivot:

    Subject matter under subclass 797 having two contact members and wherein
    the pivot point is on a line median of the members.


CLS 33/799
TXT With screw or gear adjustment means:

    Subject matter under subclass 798 including a threaded member or member
    with teeth which will cause the contact member to move.


CLS 33/800
TXT With spring adjustment means:

    Subject matter under subclass 798 including resilient means tending to move
    the contact members.


CLS 33/801
TXT With scale:

    Subject matter under subclass 798 having a member with indicia for
    measuring in addition to the rotary indicator.


CLS 33/802
TXT Rectilinear push or pull actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 794 having means to move the contact member
    back and forth in a straight line.


CLS 33/803
TXT Bench type:

    Subject matter under subclass 792 wherein the contact members have a base
    for supporting them.


CLS 33/804
TXT Lever actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 803 having a bar turning about an axis to
    give motion to the contact members.


CLS 33/805
TXT With work support:

    Subject matter under subclass 792 including means to hold an article or
    material while being measured.


CLS 33/806
TXT Rectilinear indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 783 wherein the indicator has a movable
    readout member which is restricted to move in a straight path to indicate
    information.


CLS 33/807
TXT Pivoted type with scale:

    Subject matter under subclass 783 wherein the contact members turn about a
    point or axis and include a member with indicia for measuring.


CLS 33/808
TXT With adjustment means:

    Subject matter under subclass 807 including means to move the contact
    members.


CLS 33/809
TXT Extensible-rule type:

    Subject matter under subclass 783 wherein the contact members are part of a
    rule having sections which can be adjusted by sliding one section relative
    to the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    452+,   for plural straightedges, relatively movable.


CLS 33/810
TXT Beam type with scale:

    Subject matter under subclass 783 wherein the contact members are mounted
    on a bar or rod and include a member with indicia for measuring.


CLS 33/811
TXT With means to adjust one contact member:

    Subject matter under subclass 810 including means to move one of the
    contact members.


CLS 33/812
TXT Including means to lock one contact member:

    Subject matter under subclass 810 wherein one of the contact members is
    movable and means to hold the movable member at a fixed position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    811,    for means to adjust one contact member and means to lock the member.


CLS 33/813
TXT Micrometer:

    Subject matter under subclass 783 including threaded elements for advancing
    at least one of the contacts and having means for indicating the distance
    between the contacts which includes a thimble, spindle or barrel having
    indicia for indicating the distance between the contact.

    (1)     Note.  The indicating means provides for registering full and
    fractional turn of the threaded element.

    (2)     Note.  Subcombination of micrometer which are not provided
    elsewhere in this class are properly included here.

    (3)     Note.  Generally the movable contact moves only a fraction of the
    total distance measured, see subclass 821 for preliminary setting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    821,    for preliminary setting of a micrometer.


CLS 33/814
TXT Differential screw:

    Subject matter under subclass 813 wherein one of the contacts is advanced
    by the difference between the movement produced by two threaded elements.


CLS 33/815
TXT With means for maintaining a constant or limited pressure on the contacts:

    Subject matter under subclass 813 wherein (a) means are provided which stop
    further movement of the contacts after a predetermined force is applied to
    the threaded element, or (b) wherein means are provided which indicate when
    the proper force is applied to the contacting members.


CLS 33/816
TXT With wear compensation or backlash prevention means:

    Subject matter under subclass 813 wherein the threaded element is provided
    with adjustment means which take up for inaccuracies produced by use or the
    nature of the threaded element.


CLS 33/817
TXT With lock:

    Subject matter under subclass 813 having means for preventing movement of
    one of the contacts by securing either the contact or barrel against
    actuating movement.


CLS 33/818
TXT With additional indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 813 having (a) additional means for
    indicating the measured distance, or (b) indicating means not of the
    thimble and barrel type.


CLS 33/819
TXT Digital:

    Subject matter under subclass 818 wherein the indicator includes numerals
    as the form of indicia.


CLS 33/820
TXT Electrical:

    Subject matter under subclass 818 wherein the indicating means includes a
    transducer which is responsive to the contact member movement for producing
    in an electrical circuit an indication of the distance between the contact
    members.


CLS 33/821
TXT With preliminary setting arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 813 wherein one of the contacts may be moved
    to the approximate distance before one of the contacts is moved by the
    operation of the threaded element.


CLS 33/822
TXT By disengaging threaded element:

    Subject matter under subclass 821wherein the threaded element is
    disconnected so that one of the contacts may be moved without rotating the
    threaded element.


CLS 33/823
TXT Micrometer slidably mounted on a beam:

    Subject matter under subclass 821 wherein a micrometer is movably mounted
    as a unit on a support for bringing one of the contacts to an approximate
    distance.


CLS 33/824
TXT Other contact slidable on beam:

    Subject matter under 823 wherein the other contact is also movable along
    the support.


CLS 33/825
TXT Spindle of micrometer slidable:

    Subject matter under subclass 821 wherein a spindle has a contact member
    and is adjustable to the approximate distance.


CLS 33/826
TXT By use of interchangeable parts of different sizes:

    Subject matter under subclass 821 wherein the preliminary adjustment of the
    contacts is made by substituting elements of various dimensions of the
    micrometer.


CLS 33/827
TXT Inside measurement only:

    Subject matter under subclass 813 wherein the contacts are arranged for
    measuring the internal space between selected portions of an object.

    (1)     Note.  The measurement of the inside diameter of a workpiece is
    provided for here.

    (2)     Note.  Stem gauge calipers which measure internally are in subclass
    542.1

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    542.1,  for stem gauge caliper.


CLS 33/828
TXT With attachment:

    Subject matter under subclass 813 comprising an additional device employed
    in combination with micrometers to enhance the use of the micrometer.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for improvements in a
    micrometer feature.


CLS 33/829
TXT Particularly adapted for measuring threaded element:

    Subject matter under subclass 828 wherein the object is a screw or screw
    gear.


CLS 33/830
TXT With special scale markings:

    Subject matter under subclass 813 provided with indicia pertaining to a
    specific type of measurement desired or a specified arrangement of indicia
    for enhancing reading of the indicia.

    (1)     Note.  Braille indicia for the blind can be found in this subclass.


CLS 33/831
TXT Details (e.g., spindle or anvil adjustment, material):

    Subject matter under subclass 813 which is directed to a detail of a
    specific element of the micrometer.

    (1)     Note.  If the improvement is a subcombination which is not
    classified elsewhere, such improvement may be included in this subclass.


CLS 33/832
TXT Single contact with a work engaging support:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 for measuring the shortest distance
    between a contacting member and a reference surface, comprising a member
    which is supported on the reference surface and wherein the contacting
    member is movably mounted on the supported member.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are means which measure the distance that an
    object extends above a reference surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    613+,   for a single contact gauge which is used for collocating, aligning
    or centering.


CLS 33/833
TXT Adapted for a particular workpiece:

    Subject matter under subclass 832 for measuring dimensions of various
    articles which require the support member and/or the contacting probe to
    have a configuration so as to conform to the shape of the articles.

    (1)     Note.  The shape of the workpiece dictates the shape of this group
    of devices.  Not measuring of general application and generally cannot be
    readily used with other articles.

    (2)     Note.  The workpiece itself may provide the reference surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    511+,   for measuring of humans, animals or dental devices.


CLS 33/834
TXT Coating or surface layer thickness:

    Subject matter under subclass 833 wherein the article being measured is  a
    laminated material.


CLS 33/835
TXT Reeled material:

    Subject matter under subclass 833 wherein the article being measured is
    wound on a cylindrical support.


CLS 33/836
TXT Depth of aperture or groove:

    Subject matter under subclass 833 wherein the article being measured has
    spaced surfaces and the supported member contacts one of the surfaces and
    the contacting member contacts one of the other of the spaced surfaces.


CLS 33/837
TXT Fluid actuated indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 832 wherein the contacting member is
    activated by a liquid or gas in a passageway for measuring the movement of
    the member.


CLS 33/838
TXT Screw adjustment:

    Subject matter under subclass 832 wherein the contacting member includes a
    threaded element for adjustably moving the probe along the supported member.


CLS 34/
TTL DRYING AND GAS OR VAPOR CONTACT WITH SOLIDS

CLS 34/
TXT

    I.      This is the generic class for:

    (1)     The separation of liquids from solids, i.e., drying.

    (2)     The contacting of solids with either, or both, gases or vapors.

    (3)     Feather treatment.

    II.     It has both process and apparatus not elsewhere provided for but no
    products thereof.  When a product is claimed it is classified in the class
    appropriate thereto and cross-referenced here for the process or apparatus.

    III.    In the definitions of this class, "material" means that which is
    undergoing treatment, which may be of any kind or form and includes the
    living body.

    NOTES



    The lines existing between Class 34 and other classes are as follows:

    (0.5)   Note.  Class 134, Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, is the
    generic class for contacting solid material with liquids, and see the line
    with Class 34 stated in Note (5) to the class  definition of Class 134.

    (1)     Note.  Material heating and heat generating classes:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, Line with Class 34.  Class 99
    takes all cooking apparatus.

    110,    Furnaces, has solid fuel furnaces with means for drying the fuel
    burned and/or with means to contact the fuel with gases or vapors as an
    incident to burning, and corresponding processes.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, having means to dry the solid fuel
    burned and/or with means to contact the fuel with gases or vapors as an
    incident to burning, and corresponding processes.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, has:


    (1)     Solid Fuel burning subcombinations having means to dry the solid
    fuel burned and/or with means to contact the fuel with gases or vapors as
    an incident to burning and corresponding processes.

    (2)     Combination of fuel (solid or fluid) burners with means to apply
    heat or general utility, having no means specialized for drying, and
    corresponding processes.  If a patent has any claim restricted to a drying
    process, the patent is placed in Class 34 and cross-referenced to Class 126
    for the heating apparatus.

    165,    Heat Exchange.  The line with Class 34 is:


    (1)     Class 34 takes all patents having any claim restricted to a process
    of drying.

    (2)     Class 34 takes all patents having any claim restricted to a process
    which involves contacting a solid undergoing treatment with a gas or vapor.

    (3)     Class 165 takes all heat exchange processes not limited as in (1)
    or (2) above.

    (4)     Class 34 takes apparatus for exchanging heat between fluent
    materials combined with added means for drying and/or contacting solids
    undergoing treatment with gases or vapors.

    (5)     Class 165 has apparatus exchanging heat between fluent materials
    not having the added features set forth in (4) above, even though discharge
    of gases or vapors to an enclosure is claimed, where there is no means to
    promote contact with solids and/or to handle solids therein.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic.  See section III C of the
    class definition of Class 201 for the line.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus.  See section III B of the class
    definition of Class 202 for the line.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory.  See section III C of the
    class definition of Class 203 for the line.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 600+ for inductive heating, subclasses
    678+ for microwave heating, subclasses 764+ for capacitive dielectric
    heating, and subclass 50, has metal heating even though involving gas or
    vapor contact with the metal heated. Note especially subclasses 72+
    subclasses 200+ has electric heating means combined with means to apply
    heat of general utility, having no means specialized for drying, and
    corresponding processes; see particularly subclass 280 for liquid and gas
    heaters, subclasses 391+ for ovens.  If a patent has claim restricted to a
    drying process, it is placed in Class 34 and cross-referenced to Class 219
    for the heating apparatus, except that if the claimed process is in fact no
    more than electric heating of the work the patent is classified in Class
    219.

    237,    Heating Systems.  The line with Class 34 is:



    (1)     Class 34 takes all processes limited to drying.

    (2)     Class 237 takes processes of heating enclosures, not limited to
    drying.

    (3)     Class 34 takes the combination of a heating system not claiming
    combustion heating means in combination with means to apply the heat and/or
    the heated gases or vapors to solids or such means in combination with
    material handling or supporting means. For such combinations with
    combustion heating means, see Class 432, Heating.

    (4)     Class 237 takes the heating system subcombination and in
    combination with an enclosure to be heated.

    373,    Industrial Electrical Heating Furnaces.  Line with Class 34:



    (1)     Class 34 takes all patents claiming a process of drying, even
    though electric furnace structure is also claimed.

    (2)     Class 373 takes electric furnace processes of heating, not limited
    to drying.

    (3)     Class 373 takes electric furnace structures.

    426,    Food or Edible Material: Processes, Compositions, and Products, for
    processes.  Line with Class 34.



    (1)     Class 34 takes the drying, per se, of edible material.

    (2)     Class 426, takes the cooking and roasting of foods, gas or vapor
    contact for moistening edible material and a food working step combined
    with a gas or vapor contact with a solid (edible material).

    432,    Heating, subclasses 1+ for a residual heating process, even though
    involving gas or vapor contact with solids, not limited to drying;
    subclasses 159+ for the combination of a specific combustion products
    generator and means providing for contact between work and the generated
    products; subclass 198 for apparatus heating work in an externally heated
    closed chamber while in contact with a protective or treating gas; and
    appropriate subclasses for a drier with specific combustion heating means
    claimed and for residual heating apparatus.

    (2)     Note. The following classes are superior to this class (34) and
    takes the subject matter there provided for, even though involving drying
    and/or gas or vapor contact with solids:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers.

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, has the following line:  Processes and
    apparatus for drying only are in Class 34.  Where in addition to the drying
    there are steps of or means for shoe manufacture, the patents are in Class
    12.  Class 12 also includes (see particularly subclasses 1, 41.1, 41.3, and
    41.5) processes and apparatus for treating shoes or shoe parts by steam or
    other vapors, moisture or moist air to temper or soften the shoes.

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation.

    26,     Textiles: Cloth Finishing. Subclasses 71+ take cloth drying or
    heating with means for expanding (e.g., stretching, spreading) a running
    length web of the cloth; or steps for applying a stretching or spreading
    force to the fabric in addition to that incidental to mere feed of the
    fabric through the machine.

    28,     Textiles: Manufacturing, subclasses 217+ for thread finishing
    combined with drying.

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, has processes and apparatus for
    producing a smooth appearance on the surface of a textile article or
    fabric, most of which necessarily produce a concurrent drying action and
    some of which have gas or vapor contact means, particularly subclasses 3,
    14+ and 77.1+.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying.  See particularly
    subclasses 124+ for destruction of vermin by gases and vapors.

    44,     Fuel and Related Composition.

    47,     Plant Husbandry.

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, particular attention being
    called to subclasses 5+ for textile gas or vapor treating apparatus;
    subclasses 19+ for drying combinations, and subclasses 241+ for wringers,
    per se.

    71,     Chemistry: Fertilizers.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 41+ for disclosure of work lubricating.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures.

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, (1) takes apparatus for treating
    food materials, in which, in addition to drying and/or gas or vapor contact
    there are additional means for performing additional treating operations on
    food (for example, adding ingredients, comminuting, forming, etc.); (2)
    takes apparatus for treating foods by gas or vapor contact for moistening.
    See Class 99, subclasses 468+ for apparatus of that class type providing an
    enclosed modified atmosphere, and subclasses 516+ for the application of
    treating fluid.

    101,    Printing.  Note particularly subclasses 416.1+ and the notes
    thereto.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclasses 20 and 29+.

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates.

    132,    Toilet.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving.

    140,    Wireworking.

    144,    Woodworking, see particularly subclasses 50+, 254 and 271.

    148,    Metal Treatment.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, for drying apparatus or processes which
    start with a liquid suspension or solution of solids and concentrate the
    same, even though carried to the point of complete dryness of the solids.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, for combination of drying or gas
    or vapor contact with solids combined with a paper making or fiber
    liberation step there provided for; see especially subclasses 290, 359 and
    375+ for such combinations including heating or heat exchange means.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, for such apparatus and processes, per se, Class
    34 having combinations involving such subject matter; see particularly
    subclasses 43+, 83 and 90.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, for apparatus for the treatment of
    mineral oils.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic.  See section III C of the
    class definition of Class 201 for the line.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, and see section III B to the class
    definition of Class 202 for the line.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory.  See section III C of the
    class definition of Class 203 for the line.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, for processes of treating
    and preparing mineral oils including their separation from sands, coal or
    shales.

    245,    Wire Fabrics and Structure.

    252,    Compositions, particularly subclasses 60 and 61, for physical
    separation agents; subclass 302, particularly subclasses 319+ for processes
    of resolving of colloids and subclasses 360+ for colloid resolving
    apparatus.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds.  It is noted that the removal of
    water of crystallization is considered a chemical manufacturing operation
    for Class 260.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    the line between Classes 34 and 264 in regard to processes for spinning (by
    extrusion) and drying the extruded filament in a significant manner, is
    that Class 34 takes such inventions when the extrusion step is not
    significantly claimed.  Class 264 takes methods, per se, for treating a
    plastic body with a vapor to smooth or polish the surface, subclass 341.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 251+ for means treating solid
    metal objects by contacting the object with a gas to bring about a
    metallurgical change in the object, e.g., gas quenching.

    270,    Sheet-Material Associating.

    291,    Track Sanders, particularly subclasses 3+, 18, and 19+.

    396,    Photography, subclass 579 for the use of a gaseous fluid treating
    apparatus in photography.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclass 338 for fixing an image to a copy
    medium by heat contact.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 83+.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, has the following line with Class 34: Processes
    and Apparatus for preserving, disinfecting, or sterilizing by drying only,
    or drying combined with special ray treatment only, are in Class 34. Where
    in addition to the drying and/or special ray treatment steps or apparatus,
    there are additional steps or apparatus to perform disinfecting,
    deodorizing, preserving, or sterilizing, the patent is placed in Class 422,
    or placed in classes which provided for the additional combined operations,
    e.g., Class 8, Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical
    Modification of Textiles and Fibers, or Class 427, Coating Processes, etc.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, it is noted that the removal of
    water of crystallization is considered a chemical reaction for Class 423.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    appropriate subclass for shaping or reshaping apparatus for plastic
    material combined with drying means, especially subclasses 72.1+ for a
    shaping orifice and downstream gaseous treating means and subclasses 73+
    for such apparatus combined with a ventilating hood or chamber.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    (1) takes all.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof.

    435,    Chemistry: Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 283.1+,
    particularly subclass 284.1, for apparatus for preserving differentiated
    tissue or organs; subclass 307.1 for apparatus for preserving
    micro-organisms and subclass 308.1 for apparatus for separating
    micro-organisms from culture media.

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent or Support, Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, subclasses 20+ for a process of regenerating or reactivating a
    catalyst or sorbent, other than mere drying.

    504,    Plant Protecting and Regulating Compositions.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclass 15 for synthesis of a
    hydrocarbon hydrate with subsequent removal of water therefrom.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, this is the
    generic class for destroying or containing any form of nonradioactive
    hazardous or toxic waste.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, see
    particularly subclasses 1+.

    935,    Genetic Engineering:  Recombinant DNA Technology, Hybrid or Fused
    Cell Technology, and Related Manipulations of Nucleic Acids, which provides
    a search collection for processes of altering the genetic structure of
    micro-organisms; genes and methods of modifying genes and their expression;
    vectors and methods of modifying vectors; methods of introducing DNA into a
    cell; micro-organisms, per se, which have had their genetic sequence
    altered by recombinant DNA techniques or by cell fusion or by uptake of
    DNA; testing; separation techniques; apparatus; and methods of use of
    vectors or of the genetically engineered micro-organisms; methods of gene
    therapy or genetic modification of living organisms.



    (3)     Note.  The following classes have special types of Class 34 subject
    matter or combinations involving such subject matter not treated above:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, has such subject matter
    having as a part thereof means to dry and/or contact with gases or vapors
    particularly subclasses 111.1+ for dry closets with driers or burners,
    subclasses 524+ for vapor or hot air baths, and subclasses 209+ for
    ventilating means.

    5,      Beds, appropriate subclasses particularly subclasses 421, 690, or
    724+ for mattress ventilation, inspection or heating.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, has the characters of
    apparatus there provided for, even though the sole disclosed function is
    for drying.  Relative to the air blast and suction apparatus, those which
    remove liquids by an air blast or suction cleaner action are in Class 15
    and those which remove liquids by evaporative action are in Class 34.
    Apparatus for drying and/or gas or vapor contact with solids involving the
    types of operations for Class 15 in combination with other types for Class
    34 are placed in Class 34. Apparatus involving Class 15 type structures
    (excepting the situation outlined in the first and third sentences of this
    paragraph) combined with Class 34 type structures are placed in Class 15.

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 34.05 and 123 and their indented subclass,
    particularly subclasses 41, 128+ and 140, has cutlery combined with driers
    and/or gas or vapor contact means built as part of the structure thereof.

    36,     Boot, Shoes, and Leggings, subclasses 2.6 and 3, has heated and
    ventilated boots and shoes.

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, for an
    abrasive tool making process involving drying and/or gas or vapor contact
    with solids.

    62,     Refrigeration, has apparatus and processes for separating liquids
    from other materials by refrigerating operations, Class 34 having the same
    combined with other apparatus or processes for drying and/or gas or vapor
    contact with solids.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, appropriate subclasses (a) for the
    separation of a gas from a fluid mixture in combination with the
    regeneration of the separating media by drying or by gas or vapor contact
    and (b) the subcombination of the separation of a gas from a fluid mixture.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, appropriate subclasses (a) for
    apparatus for the separation of a gas from a fluid mixture in combination
    with means to regenerate the separating media by drying or by gas or vapor
    contact and (b) the subcombination of apparatus for the separa-tion of a
    gas from a fluid mixture.

     100,   Presses, appropriate subclasses for presses not elsewhere provided
    for, and particularly subclasses 92+ for presses combined with means to
    heat the material.  Class 100 has expressing of liquids from material, per
    se, (particularly in subclasses 104+) and expressing combined with heating
    of the materials undergoing expressing.  Expressing combined with drying of
    the solids other than by heating necessary for expressing is in Class 34.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 58+ for coating apparatus combined
    with means to heat, dry, cool or contact the work with a noncoating gas or
    vapor, and subclasses 715+ for apparatus for coating work with a gas or
    vapor other than steam. Coating or impregnating with steam is in Class 34.
    Apparatus for treating a coating with a solvent vapor, per se, to smooth,
    polish or coalesce the coating is in Class 34.

    131,    Tobacco.  Line with Class 34:

    (1)     Processes of drying and/or treating tobacco with gases and/or
    vapors both, per se, and combined with other treatments are in Class 131.

    (2)     Tobacco drying apparatus combined with means to perform other
    operations is in Class 131.

    (3)     Tobacco drying apparatus, per se, is in Class 34.

    164,    Metal Founding, appropriate subclasses for processes and apparatus
    for mold forming and drying.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, has drying means
    constituting a part of the structure, particularly subclasses 8+.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, has the combination
    with drying, particularly subclasses 2, 3, 10, and 11, except where the
    sole separation is of a portion of the material for recirculation for
    further drying, which is in Class 34, particularly subclasses 10, 11, 57,
    and 102, and those patents in which the treating gas or vapor may
    incidentally carry away some solids where no classifying, separating or
    assorting is intended, even though such solids may be separated from the
    gas or vapor, are in subclasses 26+, 32, and 79+.  Class 209 has all
    processes and apparatus for contacting solids with gases or vapors for the
    purposes of such class see subclasses 132+.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation has (1) apparatus for separating
    or treating liquids mixed with solids, which mixture is in a flowable
    condition, see particularly subclasses 175+ for separators combined with
    means to heat the separator. Class 34 takes such separators and
    corresponding processes when combined with additional and independent
    driers or means to contact the separated solids with gas.  (2) Class 210
    also takes centrifugal extractors having a perforate wall surrounding the
    material or article to be separated from a liquid and Class 34, in
    subclasses 8 and 58+, takes centrifugal separators having means to support
    an article but not provided with a perforate wall (and corresponding
    processes where no filtration is defined).

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, and see Note (6) to the main class definition
    thereof for the line with Class 34.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, has such means and
    corresponding processes not involving specific characteristics of the
    apparatus or process steps for this class (34).

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses, for solid material comminution combined with either drying or
    gas and vapor contact.  Where the material handling means has no special
    features of construction to cause comminution (as feeding means, agitating
    means, etc.), the patent is in Class 34, even though incidental breaking up
    of the material may occur.  See section 6 of the main class definition of
    Class 241.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, has the structure of such devices,
    including those combined with static gas or vapor treating means in
    subclass 31, and see note (1) to the definition of subclasses 31+ for the
    line.  Cabinet structures combined with ventilating means are in subclass
    166 and with heater for purposes other than drying, are in subclass 167.

    366,    Agitating.  The line with Class 34 is: Class 34 takes all patents
    having any claim restricted to a drying process. Class 366 takes agitating
    processes not limited to drying. Class 366 takes agitators, per se,
    including agitators in which the mixing is through the medium of a fluid
    fed for mixing and not drying purposes, agitators with means to dry
    materials prior to feeding to and/or subsequent to discharge from the
    agitator, agitators combined with means to heat the material during
    agitation for purposes other than drying, and agitators with means to
    incorporate a fluid (including a gas) in the final product. Class 34 has
    drying apparatus and apparatus for contacting solids with gases or vapors,
    even though agitating means is included, not classifiable in Class 366,
    under (3).

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 372.2+ for processes of drying a
    coating.  Processes of coating portions of a substrate to shield the
    substrate against drying are provided for in this class, subclass 9.

    451,    Abrading, particularly subclass 56 for a process of making or
    treating an abrasive tool which may involve drying and/or gas or vapor
    contact with solids.

    494,    Imperforate Bowl:  Centrifugal Separators, appropriate subclasses
    for apparatus and process for breaking up a mixture of fluids or fluent
    substances into two or more components by centrifuging within a generally
    solid-walled, receptacle-like member.      Included therein is the
    separation of a particulate solid from a liquid; however, such drying as
    may concurrently take place is secondary to the recovery of one or the
    other or both, of the components. Specifically provided for therein are
    certain aspects of the separating apparatus such as means for exchanging
    heat, means for furnishing an auxiliary fluid, and so forth.



    (4)     Note.  The following classes take the subcombinations of Class 34
    subject matter there provided for:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings).

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, particularly subclasses 160.5 and 451.

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With  Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means.

    192,    Clutches, and Power-Stop Control.

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven.

    211,    Supports:  Racks.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate  subclasses for article dispensers
    not otherwise provided for.  Class 221 takes subcombinations of Class 34
    subject matter as relate to article dispensing (feeding) devices, per se.
    See the class definition of Class 221 for the disposition of other related
    art.

    222,    Dispensing, and see the reference to Class 34, under section 24 of
    the main class definition for the line.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding.

    248,    Supports.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 31+ for cabinets with gas
    or vapor treatment of material, subclass 213 for cabinets with ventilated
    or foraminous walls, subclass 214 for cabinets with spaced or insulated
    walls, subclass 229 for cabinets with drains and subclass 236 for cabinets
    with heat exchange means.

    406,    Conveyors: Fluid Current, for such conveyors and processes having
    no means or steps for drying and/or contacting solids with gases or vapors
    in addition to those required for fluid current conveying.

    414,    Material or Article Handling.

    431,    Combustion.

    454,    Ventilation, attention being called  to ventilated storage
    chambers, subclasses 173+.


CLS 34/58
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means for subjecting
    material undergoing treatment to centrifugal force.

    (1)     Note.  The art is placed here on the disclosed function of
    subjecting the material undergoing treatment to centrifugal force.
    Apparatus having rotary parts acting on the material but not disclosed for
    the purpose of subjecting the material to centrifugal force has been placed
    in appropriate subclasses below, particularly subclasses 126 through 142,
    179+ and 184+.

    (2)     Note. The following classes, especially in the subclasses noted,
    have means subjecting material to centrifugal force:



    30,     Cutlery, subclass 41.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 19+.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 479, 503, 511+, and 519
    for centrifugal food treating apparatus.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 52+ for coating apparatus having
    means to centrifuge the work.

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, subclasses 19 and 56.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclass 6.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclass 384.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 86+ for a heat exchanger with heated or
    cooled movable surface.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 60, 148
    and 199.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 781+, 787+, 210+, and
    360.1+ for centrifugal extracting processes and apparatus there provided
    for, and see the reference to Class 210 under (3) Note of the class
    definitions of this class (34).

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 24+.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 7, 650+,
    appropriate subclasses, 214+ and 380+ for scattering fluent material by
    centrifugal force.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 5 and 275.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, subclasses 107+, 704 and 705.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 313.

    494,    Imperforate Bowl:  Centrifugal Separators, appropriate subclasses
    for apparatus of that class, and see the reference to that class appearing
    in (3) Note of the definition of this class (34).

    (3)     Note.  The following classes involve use of centrifugal force:



    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, subclasses 4+.

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclass 642.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 120.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing subclasses 214+.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus,subclasses 83+.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 263+.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclass 71.

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, particularly subclasses 89,
    93 and 203+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312.


CLS 34/59
TXT Apparatus under subclass 58 including a rotary member such as a plate, disc
    or cup which throws the material against a receiver such as a conical
    hopper.

    (1)     Note.  In many of these apparatuses the material is thrown into a
    receiver from which it falls to another thrower and so on in succession.
    For other similar apparatus not using centrifugal force, see this class,
    subclass 165 and appropriate indented subclasses.


CLS 34/60
TXT Apparatus under the class definition claiming diverse means for performing
    two or more diverse treating operations on material undergoing treatment.
    At least one must be either (1) drying or (2) gas or vapor contact with
    solids.  Treating operations are operations designed to change
    characteristics of the solid material.  Means for feeding, discharging,
    conveying, agitating, testing or other ancillary operations on the
    material, which operations do not change the characteristics of the
    material, are not, of course, included in this group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass has the combination of lamps to apply light
    energy within or outside of the visible spectrum.  Complete the search in
    this class, subclasses 266+, and see the notes thereto.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass and the indented subclasses do not include
    plural apparatus of the same kind for performing plural drying and/or gas
    or vapor contact operations of the same type on the solids even though the
    units are referred to by different names as steaming and drying chambers.
    Such plural units, stage operations, plural chambers, etc., are with the
    subclasses appropriate to the type of apparatus.  See Note (4) in subclass
    209 of this class.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass and indented subclasses do not include single
    vacuum type apparatus; see subclass 92 and notes.

    (4)     Note.  For processes for performing diverse operations, see this
    class, subclasses 418+.

    (5)     Note.  Apparatus providing for treatment of the gas or vapor
    applied to the solids for treatment, or evolved from the solids, is in this
    class, subclasses 72+.

    (6)     Note.  See Note (2) to the class definition of this class for
    drying and/or gas or vapor contact apparatus for performing other
    operations provided for in other classes.


CLS 34/61
TXT Apparatus under subclass 60 including one or more means to remove liquids
    from solids and two or more means to perform operations on solids other
    than drying.


CLS 34/62
TXT Apparatus under subclass 60 claiming in addition to drying means, means for
    cooling the treated material.

    (1)     Note.  Where both the drying and cooling operations upon the
    material are by gas or vapor contact apparatus, the patents have not been
    placed in this subclass or the indented subclasses, but with the
    appropriate gas or vapor contact apparatus subclasses, even though one or
    more of the contacts with the solid material are claimed as cooling, when:



    (a)     There are plural contact apparatus of the same kind with
    independent gas or vapor streams, even though some are and some are not
    heated; see, for example, subclasses 209+ and notes.

    (b)     There is a single contact apparatus having plural similar means for
    causing contact of plural independent gas or vapor streams, even though
    some are and some are not heated; see, for example, subclass 223 and notes.

    (c)     There is a single contact apparatus with means to selectively heat
    and prevent heating of the contact gas or vapor (as by-passing the heater),
    including the recirculating type apparatus; see, for example, subclass 219
    and note.

    (2)     Note.  Single types of apparatus within the class definition
    disclosed solely for cooling are with the appropriate type of apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    391+    and 428+, and see the notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 61+ for combined heating and cooling heat
    exchanger apparatus.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 77+ for residual heating apparatus combined
    with work cooling structure.


CLS 34/63
TXT Apparatus under subclass 62 including rotary drum driers of the internal
    type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    and indented, subclasses for other devices of this type, including
    devices providing a cooling circuit for the treating gas or vapor,
    particularly subclass 131.


CLS 34/64
TXT Apparatus under subclass 62 in which a gravity material flow or "shaft
    type" drier has combined with it cooling means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165,    and indented, subclasses for other driers of this type.


CLS 34/65
TXT Apparatus under subclass 64 in which the cooling means is either (1) a
    section integral with the drier, or (2) a similar "shaft type" gravity flow
    section.

    (1)     Note.  Devices which draw gases through one section to cool the
    material and then heat it and pass it through another section are here.


CLS 34/66
TXT Apparatus under subclass 62 in which the cooling means which is combined
    with any drier is a chamber integral with or similar to the drier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     and see note thereto.


CLS 34/67
TXT Apparatus under subclass 62 in which the cooling is done by means of
    atmospheric air contacting the solids, regardless of the means employed,
    such as blowers, conveyors or receptacles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63      through 66, for type driers and coolers there provided for in which
    atmospheric air is used for contact cooling.


CLS 34/68
TXT Apparatus under subclass 60 in which the only means for treatment is by (1)
    diverse heating type apparatus, (2) diverse apparatus that treats by gas or
    vapor contact, or (3) combinations of heat type with gas or vapor type.

    (1)     Note.  There must be at least two diverse types of apparatus.  A
    single type of apparatus having both heating means and gas or vapor contact
    is placed with the type of apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     and indented subclasses, for similar drier and cooler combinations.

    418+.


CLS 34/69
TXT Apparatus under subclass 60 including two or more distinct means for
    removing liquids from solid materials undergoing treatment, but involving
    no other character of operation on such material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    397+.


CLS 34/70
TXT Which at least one of the means causes liquid removal by applying
    mechanical pressure to the solid material treated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     95, and 111, for driers including means for removing liquids from
    solid absorbents and drier belts or felts, even though done by expressing
    or wringing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclasses 119.1, 120.1 and 260 and indented subclasses.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 21, 22 and 235 and
    indented subclasses, particularly subclass 241 and indented subclasses.

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 92+ for
    pressing combined with heating, cooling or drying.  And see the reference
    to Class 100 in (3) Note to the class definition of this class (34) for a
    statement of the line between the classes.


CLS 34/71
TXT Apparatus under subclass 69 including means to remove liquids from the
    material undergoing treatment by contacting the same with solid material
    which removes the liquids by absorption, absorption or adhesion.

    (1)     Note.  External drum type driers utilizing belts or felts have not
    been treated as solid material contact driers even when the belts or felts
    are claimed as absorbent or absorbent; see subclasses 111, 116 and indented
    subclasses, and 123 for such type driers, per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95      and 329+, and see the notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning for brushing and wiping
    apparatus in general.


CLS 34/72
TXT Apparatus coming within the class definition including means to treat the
    gas or vapor which either contacts or is evolved from the solid material
    undergoing treatment.

    (1)     Note.  When heating of the gas or vapor that contacts the solid is
    the only treating means the patent is classified with appropriate type of
    apparatus.

    (2)     Note.  Means to mix treating gases or vapors of the same kind
    though differing in physical characteristics are placed with the
    appropriate type of apparatus.  If the gases or vapors are recirculated
    with the addition to or replacement thereof the patents are placed in the
    various subclasses for recirculation of treating gases or vapors; see (1)
    Note to subclass 219.

    (3)     Note.  For means for cooling gases or vapors by refrigeration see
    Class 62, Refrigeration, appropriate subclasses, Class 312, Supports:
    Cabinet Structure, subclasses 31.01+ and by heat exchange see Class 165,
    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses.

    (4)     Note.  For other gas or vapor treatment, see Classes 260, Chemistry
    of Carbon Compounds and 422, Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting,
    Deodorizing, Preserving, or Sterilizing and 423, Chemistry of Inorganic
    Compounds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280+,   for feather treating.  Many of these devices inject steam and also
    separate dust, etc., from the exhaust gases.

    467+,   for processes involving treatment of gas or vapor.

    524,    particularly subclasses 526+, 548, and 557, for automatic control
    combinations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for apparatus
    for the separation of a gas from a fluid mixture.

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 119 and indented subclasses; 126, Stoves and
    Furnaces, subclasses 113 and 280; and 266, Metallurgical Apparatus,
    subclass 144 and indented subclasses.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for gas
    and liquid contact devices, per se.

    435,    Chemistry: Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 283.1+
    for fermentation apparatus, including means to treat gases or vapors;
    particularly subclass 300.1 for apparatus for trapping output gas; and
    subclass 301.1 for apparatus for separating foam.

    454,    Ventilation, appropriate subclasses for gas and liquid contact
    devices in combination with ventilating systems.


CLS 34/73
TXT Apparatus under subclass 72 having means to condense vapors.

    (1)     Note.  For condensers, per se, see Class 257, Heat Exchange,
    subclass 24 and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    468+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, appropriate subclasses for a
    thermolytic distillation process including condensing vapors.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, particularly subclasses 185+ for the
    association of a still and a condenser.

    203,    Distillation: Processes, Separatory, appropriate subclasses for a
    process of vaporizing a liquid material and condensing the vapor.


CLS 34/74
TXT Apparatus under subclass 73 including means other than the condensing means
    to treat the treating gases or vapors by the addition or subtraction of
    substances from the treating fluids.


CLS 34/75
TXT Apparatus under subclass 73 in which the vapors directly contact the
    cooling substance such as cold water or ice.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     74, 83, and 84, for other devices for contacting treating gases or
    vapors with liquids.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 75+ for vapor
    condensers of the direct contact type; and subclass 140 for contact
    apparatus of general utility with a refrigeration producer.


CLS 34/76
TXT Apparatus under subclass 73 in which the vapor or gas and vapor mixture
    undergoing condensation is forced to circulate by some mechanical means.


CLS 34/77
TXT Apparatus under subclass 76 in which the treating gases or vapors are
    recirculated in whole or part over the condensing means and the material
    treated.

    (1)     Note.  For other subclasses involving recirculation of the treating
    gases or vapors, see (1) Note  to subclass 219 of this class.


CLS 34/78
TXT Apparatus under subclass 73 in which the treating gases or vapors are
    recirculated in whole or part due to the thermosyphonic action of the
    condensing and/or heating means.

    (1)     Note.  For other subclasses involving recirculation of the treating
    gases or vapors, see (1) Note to subclass 219 of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220,    for similar apparatus not including condensers.


CLS 34/79
TXT Apparatus under subclass 72 in which substances are separated from gases or
    vapors used to contact the material under going treatment, or from the
    evolved gases or vapors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    576+,   for fluid current conveyor type driers which are usually provided
    with means to separate the material from the treating, i.e., conveying gas
    or vapor.


CLS 34/80
TXT Apparatus under subclass 79 in which the substances are removed by
    absorbing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71      and 95, and see notes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 108+ for solid sorbent
    apparatus.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 31+ and see the notes.


CLS 34/81
TXT Apparatus under subclass 80 in which the absorbing means are in or form
    part of the treating chamber walls, floor or ceiling.


CLS 34/82
TXT Apparatus under subclass 79 in which the substances are removed by a filter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80      and 81, for means for passing gases or vapors through absorbing
    means which may also act to filter, or such means combined with a filter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, the subclasses beginning with subclass 474 for
    filter media for gas separation.


CLS 34/83
TXT Apparatus under subclass 72 in which means are provided for injecting into
    the gas or vapor some treating material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes means for injecting steam or water
    for fire extinguishing purposes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74      and 75.

    SEARCH  CLASS:

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclasses 76 through 78.1.


CLS 34/84
TXT Apparatus under subclass 83 in which the injecting devices act to circulate
    or promote flow of the treating gas or vapor.

    (1)     Note.  Many of these devices cause gas or vapor recirculation. For
    other subclasses involving gas or vapor recirculation, see (1) Note  to
    subclass 219 of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221,    in which a fluid similar in kind to the treating fluid is injected.


CLS 34/85
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having either, or both, (1) means to
    clean the apparatus or some portion thereof, (2) means to collect for
    removal from the apparatus (with or without a removing means) material
    escaping from the desired and intended treating path.

    (1)     Note.  Devices for agitating, feeding and/or discharging the
    material treated are not included.  See particularly subclasses 117 and 120
    for means to strip material from external drum type driers, and subclasses
    173, 178 and 179 and indented subclasses, for apparatus provided with
    stirrers or scrapers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69+,    for apparatus within the class definition combined with draining
    devices.

    71      and 95+, for means to separate solids used to dry material
    undergoing treatment from such material, with or without means to dry such
    solids and/or return such solids to the machine.

    72,     and indented subclasses, (particularly subclass 79 and indented
    subclasses, for means for removing material from the gases or vapors used
    to treat the solids or from the gases or vapors evolved due to treatment of
    the solids.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 70 for a heat exchanger with a leakage
    collector, and subclass 95 for a heat exchanger with cleaning means.

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 494+ for conveyor cleaners.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclass 2 for a carbonizing
    process directed to cleaning the apparatus.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 241 for means for cleaning and
    decarbonizing a retort or still.


CLS 34/86
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means to conserve heat from
    gases or vapors exhausted from the apparatus as by heat  exchangers, means
    to use exhaust gases or vapors for heating purposes or the use of exhaust
    or treating gases or vapors to drive engines.

    (1)     Note.  Mere recirculation of gases or passing gases from chamber to
    chamber is excluded, being placed with the type of apparatus; see (1) Note
    to subclass 219 of this class.

    (2)     Note.  See this class, subclass 73 and indented subclasses for
    means for condensing vapors, and subclass 79, for means for burning waste
    products carried in gases or vapors.

    (3)     Note.  For means using exhaust gas in two types of driers, see this
    class, subclass 68.

    (4)     Note.  For means using gases drawn through a cooler or cooling
    section, see this class, subclass 62 and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    427     and 513+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, appropriate subclasses.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 66 for a combined heating and cooling
    device that includes a means for exchanging heat between supply and exhaust
    lines.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclasses 13+ for a
    carbonizing process including the recovery of heat by indirect heat
    exchange.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclasses 21+ for a process
    of distilling a liquid and recovering heat by indirect heat exchange.

    220,    Receptacles, and 234, for apparatus wherein the heater causes a gas
    circulation.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 78+ for a combustion type heater in which
    combustion air recovers heat from exiting work; subclass 82 for a heater in
    which entering work recovers heat from exiting work; and subclasses 135+
    for a heating chamber in which combustion feed materials recover heat from
    the chamber exhaust.


CLS 34/87
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which means are provided for
    interlocking or connecting various parts of the treating apparatus so that
    upon an operation of one part other operating elements are cut off, stopped
    or operated.

    (1)     Note.  Mere common drive means are not included but are found under
    appropriate type of apparatus.

    (2)     Note.  Electrical connections for simultaneous energization or
    deenergization are included.

    (3)     Note.  Compare automatic control subclasses 524+ and indented
    subclasses, and see notes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclasses 416.1+ for drying devices interlocked or
    synchronized with a press.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, particularly subclass 116.5  and
    indented subclasses.


CLS 34/88
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means to display or inspect
    the solids undergoing treatment or to illuminate the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  See (6) Note to subclass 201 of this class, for other
    treating enclosures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89,     which contains, among other things, sampling devices, and see notes.

    93,     for apparatus primarily designed to use solar heat which may have
    glass covers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 433+ for refrigerating display apparatus.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus,  subclass 341.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 85+ for separators
    combined with signals or indicators.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 602, 662+ and 377+ for transparent closure.

    221,    Article Dispensing, and see the class definition for the
    distribution of art on article dispensing, per se.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, particularly subclasses 114+ for
    similar display apparatus.

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 82, and see the notes thereto, for structures
    wherein a transparent panel is mounted in a wall.

    454,    Ventilation, particularly subclasses 173+ for ventilated structures
    which may contain material.


CLS 34/89
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means, such as weighers,
    samplers, thermometers, overflow indicators, and position indicators, for
    indicating or testing the operation of the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 88, and see the notes.

    (2)     Note.  For signals such as lights, bells, etc., combined with
    automatic controls, see this class, subclasses 524+, particularly
    subclasses 527+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing.

    116,    Signals and Indicators.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 502.1+.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 500+.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 141+ for a thermometer
    combined with a diverse art device.


CLS 34/89.1
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which, in combination with means
    for removing liquids from material undergoing treatment by contacting the
    same with solid material which removes the liquids by absorption, there is
    means for any purpose other than drying and/or contacting solids with gas
    or vapor; or wherein, in combination with said liquids-removing means,
    there is means for attaching it to such other purpose means.

    (1)     Note.  Mere indicia or mere storage space intrinsic to blotting
    means structure (e.g., the interior of the cylinder of the rolling contact
    means of subclass 95.3) is not considered to be other purpose means for
    this subclass.  Blotting means so claimed will be placed in subclasses
    95.1+ (e.g., subclass 95.3).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 105 for a
    patent to the combination of blotting means, with a penholder claimed in
    greater detail than is necessary to define a relationship of the blotting
    means thereto.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 358 for blotting means
    combined with means for displaying a car, picture, or sign.

    248,    Supports, subclass 504 for a desk pad (of construction common to
    blotter holders) wherein the invention is to means to overlie and thereby
    hold-down another, planar article (e.g., glass panel).

    281,    Books, Strips, and Leaves, subclasses 3+ for blotting means
    combined with a book.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclass 52 or 195 for the
    combination of blotting means with a writing implement with material
    supply, where more of the implement is claimed than is necessary to define
    a relationship of the blotting means thereto.


CLS 34/89.2
TXT Apparatus under subclass 89.1 wherein the other purpose means is a
    geometrical instrument of the straightedge type.


CLS 34/90
TXT Apparatus under the subclass definition in which, in combination with the
    apparatus for drying and/or contacting solids with gases or vapors, there
    is apparatus for other purposes and not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  The combined features are in addition to the apparatus for
    feeding, discharging, agitating or conveying the solids, heating, causing
    or directing gas or vapor flow for contact with the material undergoing
    treatment.

    (2)     Note.  For example, this subclass contains transportation means for
    the apparatus, power take-offs, means to protect persons from burning, as
    in hair driers, head rests, etc.

    (3)     Note.  For devices operable to relieve pressure, including safety
    devices, see this class, subclass 558, and for means to inject steam or
    water, including fire extinguishers, see subclass 83.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91      and 111, for drum driers including a belt or felt and means to dry
    the belt or felt, and subclasses 71 and 95 for means to dry by contact with
    solid matter plus means to dry the solid matter.

    427,    for drying processes combined with a process of some other kind.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 102 for presses not elsewhere provided for and
    combined with other features.


CLS 34/91
TXT Apparatus under the class definition combined with or including means to
    convert the apparatus in whole or part to other apparatus not under the
    class definition or into different types of apparatus within the class
    definition.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus having a treating gas or vapor circulation in
    which the gas or vapor can be caused to flow over heating means or to
    bypass the heater are not here but in the appropriate subclasses below.
    See (1) Note to subclass 62 of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72+,    for apparatus including means to inject substances into the gas so
    that the apparatus may have more than one function, as drying and
    moistening.


CLS 34/92
TXT Apparatus under the class definition for treating material under less than
    atmospheric pressure.

    (1)     Note.  The enclosure may be heated or treating gas or vapor
    circulated and such operation, if carried out under less than atmospheric
    pressure, is not considered a plural operation for subclass 60.

    (2)     Note.  The means must apply definite sub-atmospheric pressures and
    not merely cause the gas or vapor to flow onto or through the solids, for
    which see the appropriate type of apparatus.

    (3)     Note.  For other apparatus or classes which may include vacuum
    treating, see classes:



    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 300.1+ for
    air blast and/or suction cleaning apparatus.

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclasses 89+ and 119+.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 100, 169 and 268+ for processes and
    apparatus for refrigeration involving vacuumizing an open outlet chamber.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 472.

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, subclass 16.

    128,    Surgery, subclass 204.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coating Means,
    subclasses 65+ for apparatus for merely evacuating and/or gas or vapor
    charging receivers.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclasses 3, 17 and 22+.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, particularly subclass 114 for apparatus
    adapted for distilling a mineral oil under reduced pressure.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 803 for rotary transfer valves.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclass 35 for a process of
    carbonizing under less than atmospheric pressure.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, particularly subclass 205.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclasses 74+ and 91+ for a
    process of distilling a liquid under less than atmospheric pressure.

    220,    Receptacles, appropriate subclass for receptacle structure.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 54, 63, 110+, and
    140+.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 285+ and 307+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191,    for means for causing a pulsating gas or vapor flow.

    242     402+ and 558, and see notes.


CLS 34/93
TXT Apparatus under the class definition peculiarly adapted for the use of
    solar energy to treat material.

    (1)     Note.  For frames for supporting hair on the head while drying, see
    this class, subclass 96.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 17.

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 641.1+.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 561+ and 569+ and in particular
    subclass 680 for a solar energy concentrator with a support for material
    heated.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 250, 377, 602, and 662+, Radiant Energy,
    subclass 253 for apparatus to irradiate material within or on the earth,
    subclass 324 for the corona irradiation of material or an object,
    subclasses 453.1+ for apparatus to support an object for irradiation.


CLS 34/94
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which sheets, webs or strands are
    dried while spaced from one another or parts of a web are spaced from other
    parts by means of spacer sheets, webs or strands.

    (1)     Note.  Complete the search in this class, process subclass 306, and
    see notes thereto.

    (2)     Note.  For such devices claiming no positive drying, search Class
    101, Printing, subclasses 417 and 419, and for other sheet or web handling,
    see Class 226, Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length and Class 271,
    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, appropriate subclasses; and for other means
    for associating sheets, see Class 270, Sheet-Material Associating or
    Folding, particularly subclasses 58.01+.


CLS 34/95
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means to remove liquids from
    the material undergoing treatment by contacting the same with solid
    material which removes the liquids by adsorption, absorption or adhesion.

    (1)     Note.  Where the absorption or adsorption means are claimed, the
    patent is in this subclass or in subclass 71, except external drums having
    absorbent or adsorbent belts or felts (subclasses 116 and indented
    subclasses and 123) and absorbent or adsorbent spacer sheets or webs
    (subclass 94).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71      and 329+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, appropriate subclasses
    for means for cleaning which may remove liquids by brushing, wiping or
    squeegeeing; particularly subclasses 21.1+, 97.1+, 105, 147.1, and 159.1
    and their indented subclasses; 208, 235, 245, and 250.001 and indented
    subclasses.  Razor blade driers designed to wipe as well as absorb are in
    Class 15, subclass 218.

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 537.

    101,    Printing, particularly subclasses 417 through 419, for contact
    absorbers associated with a printing press.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 16 and 47 for packages
    which may contain an absorption drier for blades.

    248,    Supports, subclass 504 for a desk pad; i.e., the desk article with
    its overlying means to hold down an edge or corner of a sheet other than a
    blotter.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a structurally defined web or sheet, or for a coated or structurally
    defined fiber or filament or a mass of such fibers or filaments which may
    be disclosed as useful for contacting and thereby removing liquids from
    work, and see especially subclasses 304.4+ for a plural layer web or sheet
    having a component which is porous or cellular.


CLS 34/95.1
TXT Apparatus under subclass 95 including means facilitating manual engagement
    thereof for transportation to, contact with, and removal from the material
    to be dried.

    (1)     Note.  The means facilitating handling may be a mere, stiffening
    insert.

    (2)     Note.  Apparatus which is so manipulated that the work-contacting
    face (e.g., the cylindrical face of indented subclass 95.3 or the arcuate
    face of subclass 95.4) wipes a work surface by being drawn there across,
    will be placed in Class 15, Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, in
    accordance with (4) Note in principal subclass 95.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a blotter which is mere stock material, and see especially subclasses
    311.11+ and 357+.


CLS 34/95.2
TXT Apparatus under subclass 95.1 wherein the means facilitating manual
    engagement is adapted to be secured to the hand.


CLS 34/95.3
TXT Apparatus under subclass 95.1 in which the solid material for removing
    liquids is arranged in the form of a cylinder for rolling contact with a
    work surface so that any point therein can contact a point only of said
    surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89.1,   for a rolling-contact blotter attachment for a pen.


CLS 34/95.4
TXT Apparatus under subclass 95.1 in which the solid material for removing
    liquids is arranged to provide an arcuate work-contacting surface, whereby
    the apparatus is capable of arcuate oscillation so that any point thereon
    can contact a point only of the work surface.


CLS 34/96
TXT Apparatus coming within the class definition including means specialized to
    dry the hair on the human head.

    (1)     Note.  For hair drying processes, see this class, subclass 283.
    All apparatus disclosures have been cross-referenced to appropriate
    apparatus subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass and the indented subclasses do not include
    mere hot air blowers for which see other appropriate class noted below.
    Also see (1) Note  to subclass 97 of this class.

    (3)     Note.  For hot air blowers including combustion means for
    indirectly heating the air, see Class 126, Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 99
    and indented subclasses.

    (5)     Note.  For means for heating gases by electricity, see Class 219,
    Electric Heating, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 280+.

    (6)     Note.  For heating systems adapted to distribute a heating fluid to
    a plurality of points but not claiming means specialized for hair drying,
    see Class 237, Heating Systems, particularly subclass 50 and indented
    subclasses.

    (7)     Note.  For an encased blower moving air through a heat exchanger
    see Class 165, Heat Exchange, subclasses 122+.

    (8)     Note.  For hair driers including means to medicate the hair, see
    Class 604, Surgery, subclasses 23 and 291 for hair dryers including hair
    medicating.

    (9)     Note.  For a hair dryer combined with other means for treating the
    hair, see Class 132, Toilet, particularly subclasses 227+ for curlers
    combined with heaters, and subclass 271 for a dryer combined with a brush.

    (10)    Note.  For shields, not attached to the hair drying hood, for the
    face and other parts of the body, see Class 2, Apparel, particularly
    subclass 174.

    (12)    Note.  For apparatus in this class for treating gases or vapors by
    vapor condensation, see this class, subclasses 73+, and by absorption, see
    subclasses 80+.

    (13)    Note.  For heated brushes, see Class 15, Brushing, Scrubbing, and
    General Cleaning, subclass 160.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    132,    Toilet, subclass 14.


CLS 34/97
TXT Apparatus under subclass 96 including means to circulate a gas or vapor in
    contact with the hair.

    (1)     Note.  For hand driers and miscellaneous blowers and distributors,
    see this class, subclass 202.

    (2)     Note.  For a gas or vapor hair dryer combined with other means for
    treating the hair, see Class 132 Toilet, particularly subclass 228 for
    those combined with a curler, and subclass 271 for those combined with a
    brush.

    (3)     Note.  For a gas or vapor hair dryer combined with other treating
    means, see Class 132 Toilet, particularly subclass 228 for those combined
    with a curler, and subclass 271 for those combined with a brush.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 369+, for mere blowers plus electrical
    heating means.


CLS 34/98
TXT Apparatus under subclass 97 including a plurality of gas or vapor
    distributing units.

    (1)     Note.  See (6) Note  to subclass 96 of this class.


CLS 34/99
TXT Apparatus under subclass 97 including a distributor unit conforming to the
    shape of the head.  Usually this is a hood or ducts fitting around the head.


CLS 34/100
TXT Apparatus under subclass 99 including means to recirculate the treating gas
    or vapor.

    (1)     Note.  For other subclasses involving gas or vapor recirculation
    see (1) Note  to subclass 219 of this class.


CLS 34/101
TXT Apparatus under subclass 97 including means to support the hair, such as
    racks or supports.

    (1)     Note.  Complete the search in this class, subclass 96 for hair
    supports not provided with means to circulate a gas or vapor into contact
    with the hair.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239,    of this class.


CLS 34/102
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means to recirculate the
    treated material in whole or part through the material treating zone or
    through a part of such zone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95,     for means to recirculate solids which contact the material
    undergoing treatment to dry the same.

    376+,   for corresponding processes.

    576+,   for fluid current type driers provided with material recirculating
    means, and see notes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 580 for plural conveyors
    arranged to recycle all or a portion of the conveyed load on a closed path,
    and subclass 720 for a pusher conveyor having the same arrangement.


CLS 34/103
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the article is held on or in
    forms, and forms not otherwise provided for.

    (1)     Note.  Complete the search in this class, process subclasses 437+
    and see the notes thereto.

    (2)     Note.  Hollow articles held on mandrels inserted in the hollow are
    in this class, subclass 104 and indented subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  Patents for treating articles while held between pressing
    members or platens are not here but in subclass 143 and indented subclasses
    of this class.

    (4)     Note.  The line between the patents in this class and Class 223,
    Apparel Apparatus is:  Class 223 takes all patents claiming features of a
    form to fit or hold a garment.Class 34 takes patents claiming forms by name
    only as "forms", "flat forms", "garment forms", "boards", or a particular
    named garment as "stocking forms", where no features of the form except
    such designation by name are claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151     and 163, for means for holding sheets, webs or strands.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 803.01+ and 803.3+ others for a
    conveyor having a load holder.


CLS 34/104
TXT Apparatus under the class definition restricted to operating on hollow
    articles.

    (1)     Note.  The patents on apparatus for hollow articles include means
    for introducing and/or withdrawing from the interior of the article either
    the treating medium or the means for handling the article.  Apparatus
    restricted to treating hollow cakes or bobbins of strands is in this
    subclass or indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  Devices of more general application claiming a hollow
    article by name only are classified in appropriate subclasses below, for
    instance, racks for hose or strands, for which see subclasses 151 and
    appropriate indented subclasses, and 239.

    (3)     Note.  For gas or vapor delivery means insertable into bulk
    material, search this class, subclass 243 and Class 454, Ventilation,
    subclasses 175+.

    (4)     Note.  Complete the search in this class, apparatus subclass 103
    and process subclasses 437+, and see the notes thereto.

    (5)     Note.  See this class, subclass 202 where articles, particularly
    shoes, are inserted into openings in a treating chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 150+ and 451.

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, appropriate subclasses for forms inserted in
    shoes, and particularly subclass 129.4 for heated forms.

    68,     Textiles, Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 150.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 230+ for processes of coating the
    interior of a hollow article.

    432,    Heating, subclass 224 for an in an inserted emitter type of hollow
    article interior heater.


CLS 34/105
TXT Apparatus under subclass 104 including means to move the articles from one
    point to another during treatment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 388 and 803.12 for a conveyor
    having means contacting the interior of a hollow load.


CLS 34/106
TXT Apparatus under subclass 104 having means to suspend hollow articles and
    means to hold the bottom portion thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Most of the patents herein are clothes driers with means for
    driving a gas up through the garment thus causing inflation and drying.


CLS 34/107
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means specially designed for
    holding or handling slender substantially rigid articles, such as rods.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    and indented subclasses, for apparatus restricted to hollow
    articles.

    148+,   for treating and handling of flexible material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 60.1+ for racks for slender articles.


CLS 34/108
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a hollow drum or receptacle
    member through, over, by, or in which the material is carried to be treated
    and rotating about an axis.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the axis coincides with the axis of the drum or
    receptacle. The member is usually, but not always, circular in cross
    section.

    (2)     Note.  Drums and rollers that are mere conveyor guides or in
    themselves are mere conveyors or material feeders are not here but in other
    subclasses appropriate to the type of apparatus.

    (3)     Note.  For drums with inspection or sampling means, see this class,
    subclasses 88 and 89.

    (4)     Note.  For drums using both internal and external surfaces for the
    solid material undergoing treatment, see this class, subclass 68.

    (5)     Note.  The following additional classes and subclasses involve
    rotary drums or receptacles:



    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 75 and 90.

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 290, 354 and 400.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, particularly subclasses 16,
    20, 58, and 139+.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclass 30.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 323.9, for rotary drum
    cereal poppers: subclass 443, and see note II thereto, for movable food
    supports; and subclass 630, for a rotary container with skin removal means.

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 226.

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 305.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclasses 9.2, 10-12.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 89+.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 658.

    201,    Distillation: Processes, Thermolytic, appropriate subclass for a
    process of carbonizing carbonaceous material.

    202,    Distillation: Apparatus, particularly subclasses 100, 131, 136,
    216, 218, and 238.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 238, 288
    and indented subclasses, particularly subclass 295.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 210+, 217, 297, 326,
    360.1+, 384+, 385, 391+, and 402+.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 54, 70+,
    91, 137, 153, and 176+.

    384,    Bearings, subclass 549 for a fixed  supporting roller.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 83+.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, appropriate subclasses 209+.

    435,    Chemistry: Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 303 and
    312.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 106 and 326+ and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184,    and indented subclasses, for rotary carriers or racks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 22+ for a heating or drying mortar mixing
    chamber, and subclasses 54+ and 220+ for rotatable mixing chambers having
    no claimed drying or gas or vapor contact means.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 103+ for a residual tumbler type rotary furnace.


CLS 34/109
TXT Apparatus under subclass 108 in which the material is carried in two or
    more distinct compartments.

    (1)     Note.  The pocketed or compartmented type is distinguished by the
    fact that the material is fed to and discharged from at least two distinct
    pockets or compartments separately.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    and indented, subclasses for plural internal drums or receptacles.

    184     and 614+, and indented subclasses.


CLS 34/110
TXT Apparatus under subclass 108 in which the material is carried on the
    outside surface of a rotary treating drum.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes among other structure not provided
    for below, drum mounting or driving means, drum structure and drums heated
    other than by exchange fluids.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    611     and indented subclasses, subclass 625 for sheet, web or strand
    driers not of the external drum type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, appropriate subclasses for
    external rotary drum textile ironers or smoothers.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses for rotary
    conveyors, particularly subclasses 608, 611+ and 803.16.

    432,    Heating, subclass 228 for an internally heated work supporting roll.


CLS 34/111
TXT Apparatus under subclass 110 having belts or felts as defined in subclass
    116 and also means to dry such belts or felts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     95+ and 329+, for processes or means to dry material by contact
    with solid matter including means to dry the solid matter, and see notes to
    these subclasses.

    90,     for driers combined with other features.

    116+    and 123.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    432,    Heating, subclass 59 for a residual heater including an internally
    heated roll flexing, looping or coiling a sheet, web or strand.


CLS 34/112
TXT Apparatus under subclass 110 including a hopper feeding means or distinct
    article securing means.

    (1)     Note.  For drums including material retaining belts or felts, see
    this class, subclasses 111, 116 and 123.


CLS 34/113
TXT Apparatus under subclass 110 in which two or more drums of the external
    type are claimed in combination.


CLS 34/114
TXT Apparatus under subclass 113 including means to contact the solids
    undergoing treatment with a gas or vapor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    where the sheet web or strand is fed through the drum assembly by
    fluid (usually air) blasts.

    122,    for single drums having this combination.


CLS 34/115
TXT Apparatus under subclass 114 in which the treating fluid is passed through
    the treated material and/or through the drum surface.


CLS 34/116
TXT Apparatus under subclass 113 in which belts or felts are provided for
    holding the material against the drum or against an intermediate belt or
    felt which contacts the drum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123,    and in subclass 111, for belt or felt driers, and see the notes
    thereto.

    523,    for belts or felts, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 688.1+ for means for holding a
    conveyed load against its conveyor, and subclasses 604+ and 620+ for
    opposed, load gripping conveyors.


CLS 34/117
TXT Apparatus under subclass 116 in which means to strip the material from the
    drums or to guide or thread it through the drum assembly are provided.

    (1)     Note.  Complete the search in this class, subclass 120 for such
    devices without belts, and see notes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85,     for apparatus cleaners.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 367+, 370.07 through 370.09,
    370.1, 370.11 through 370.13, 426+, 463.1, 497, 597+, 599, 637, and others
    for means for moving an article or material off a conveyor.


CLS 34/118
TXT Apparatus under subclass 116 in which there is a tightener for the belt or
    belts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 709 and 813+ for conveyor belt
    tighteners.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 410+ and 147+ for
    tensioning a running length of elongated material.


CLS 34/119
TXT Apparatus under subclass 113 including means to supply and/or remove the
    heat exchange fluids from the drums.

    (1)     Note.  While some of the patents included here include nonautomatic
    means to control the pressure throughout the drums, such as restrictions in
    the feed or discharge lines, this subclass does not include means
    responsive to a condition to be controlled to actuate a condition
    controlling means.  Complete the search in this class, subclasses 524+ and
    indented subclasses, particularly subclasses 549+ and 556, which contain
    such devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124     and 125, for single drums.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 67 and 68 for steam heating systems.


CLS 34/120
TXT Apparatus under subclass 113 including means to strip the material from the
    drums or to thread, or guide the material through the drum assembly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85,     for apparatus cleaners.

    117,    for such devices with belts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 367+, 370.07 through 370.09,
    370.1, 370.11 through 370.13, 426+, 463.1, 497, 597+, 599, 637, and others
    for means for moving an article or material off a conveyor.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 389+.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, appropriate
    subclasses for a device for guiding or driving an endless belt in a power
    transmission.


CLS 34/121
TXT Apparatus under subclass 113 including drum mounting and/or driving means.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 475, Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or
    Components, appropriate subclasses, for plural loads driven by planetary
    gearing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for plural drum arrangements where the drum mounting or drive is
    conventional.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclasses 650 and 665+.


CLS 34/122
TXT Apparatus under subclass 110 including means to contact the solids with a
    gas or vapor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114     and 115.


CLS 34/123
TXT Apparatus under subclass 110 in which belts or felts as defined in subclass
    116 are used.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 358.1+ for press roll
    couples having a belt or felt for conveying a moist fibrous web
    therethrough.

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 688+ for means for holding a
    conveyed load against its conveyor, and subclasses 604+ and 620+ for
    opposed, load gripping conveyors.


CLS 34/124
TXT Apparatus under subclass 110 including means to supply and remove the heat
    exchange fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    for plural drums.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 89+ for a rotary drum heat exchanger.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, particularly subclasses 120.1+ especially
    subclasses 121.3+, for the coupling means, per se.  See the Search Notes
    thereunder.


CLS 34/125
TXT Apparatus under subclass 124 claiming only means to remove the heat
    exchange fluid.

    (1)     Note.  These devices are mainly for handling the condensed steam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 123+ for siphons, and subclasses 171+
    for traps for separating condensate from steam, or any two diverse fluids.


CLS 34/126
TXT Apparatus under subclass 108 in which means are provided for moving the
    drum or receptacle in some manner in addition to the rotary motion of the
    drums.For instance, the entire assembly may be mounted on wheels, the drums
    may be conveyed as by chains, roll down tracks or moved by other means
    including means to adjust the position of the drum bearings, and drums
    mounted for rotation about an axis other than the axis of rotation of the
    drum or receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  Mere motion of the drum or receptacle to cause feeding
    and/or discharging of the material treated is placed with the appropriate
    apparatus groups below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 861.1+ for an adjustable
    conveyor frame.


CLS 34/127
TXT Apparatus under subclass 108 including a plurality of drums through or into
    which material undergoing treatment is passed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109,    for plural compartment drums.

    126,    for plural translating drums.


CLS 34/128
TXT Apparatus under subclass 127 including a plurality of drums nested one
    within another.  The material usually passes from one drum to another in a
    zigzag path.


CLS 34/129
TXT Apparatus under subclass 127 including means to feed material from one drum
    to another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128,    for nested rotary drums or receptacles.

    135+,   141 and 142, for other drums or receptacles in which the material
    moves through the drum or receptacle.

    165+,   and indented subclasses, for gravity feed type driers.


CLS 34/130
TXT Apparatus under subclass 108 including means to contact the material
    undergoing treatment with a gas or vapor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140     and 141, for drums or receptacles having foraminous walls which act
    only to vent gases or vapors.


CLS 34/131
TXT Apparatus under subclass 130 including means to recirculate the treating
    gas or vapor.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note to subclass 219 of this class for other
    subclasses involving gas or vapor recirculation.


CLS 34/132
TXT Apparatus under subclass 130 including heating means for either, or both,
    (1) the treating gas or vapor, or (2) the material undergoing treatment.

    (1)     Note.  Such means may include gas or vapor conducting conduits
    which act to heat as well as conduct gases and/or vapors into the
    apparatus, for which see this class, subclass 134 and notes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131,    for the subject matter provided for in this subclass, plus
    recirculation of the treating gas or vapor.


CLS 34/134
TXT Apparatus under subclass 132 in which either or both, (1) indirect heat
    exchange conduits, or (2) conduits for conducting the treating gas or vapor
    are located within the drum or receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  The conduits may be part of or attached to the drum or
    receptacle walls.

    (2)     Note.  For other treating gas or vapor conduits without heating
    means, search this class, subclass 138.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280+.


CLS 34/135
TXT Apparatus under subclass 130 of the type in which the material to be
    treated is introduced into one end of the drum or receptacle, travels along
    the interior in the direction of the axis of rotation, and is discharged
    from the other end.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    and indented subclasses.

    134,    for the subject matter there provided for, including axial material
    flow.


CLS 34/136
TXT Apparatus under subclass 135 in which the gas or vapor that contacts the
    material is introduced into and discharged from the same ends as the
    treated material, i.e., the directions of flow of the material being
    treated and the treating gas and/or vapors are the same.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135,    for this character of gas or vapor flow combined with other
    characters of flow.


CLS 34/137
TXT Apparatus under subclass 135 in which the gas or vapor that contacts the
    material is introduced at the material discharge end and is discharged at
    the material feed end, i.e., the directions of flow of the material being
    treated and the treating gas and/or vapor are opposite.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135,    for this character of gas or vapor flow combined with other
    characters of flow.


CLS 34/138
TXT Apparatus under subclass 130 wherein conduits for conducting the treating
    gas or vapor for contact with the material undergoing treatment are located
    within the drum or receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  The conduits may be part of or attached to the drum walls.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134     and 280+.


CLS 34/139
TXT Apparatus under subclass 130 in which the drum or receptacle is totally or
    partially enclosed in a housing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135     through 138, for the subject matter there provided for plus
    enclosing housings.

    595+,   for such housings combined with heating means, and in subclass 131.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 860.1+ for a conveyor casing.


CLS 34/140
TXT Apparatus under subclass 108 having means to exhaust the gases or vapors
    generated or evolved from the solid material undergoing treatment.

    (1)     Note.  Exhaust means does not include an open end but does include
    foraminous walls.


CLS 34/141
TXT Apparatus under subclass 140 having treated material feed therethrough as
    defined in subclass 135.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    and indented subclasses.


CLS 34/142
TXT Apparatus under subclass 108 having treated material feed therethrough as
    defined in subclass 135.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    and indented subclasses.


CLS 34/143
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the material to be treated is
    held between two opposed members which are movable or expansible towards
    one another to press or retain the material, and away from each to release
    the material. Usually at least one member is a fixed bed supporting the
    material.

    (1)     Note.  Opposed conveying, feeding or discharging means which may
    apply pressure to the material conveyed are not here, but are with the
    appropriate type of apparatus; see particularly subclasses 110+, for
    external drum type, and the various subclasses under subclasses 201+,
    particularly subclasses 203+.

    (2)     Note.  For devices wherein an absorbent member claimed as such
    contacts an article to be dried, see this class, subclasses 95+ and for
    other drying combined with absorbing, see subclass 71 and for spacing
    sheets or webs by alternate spacer sheets or webs, see subclass 94.

    (3)     Note.  For driers combined with expressing or wringing, see this
    class, subclass 70.

    (4)     Note.  For textile washing and wringing presses, see Class 68,
    Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, particularly subclasses 94 and 241 and
    their indented subclasses.

    (5)     Note.  For baling, expressing, copying, packing, and bundling
    presses, see Class 100, Presses, particularly subclasses 211+ for presses
    having a flexible or deformable pressure surface, and subclasses 214+ for
    reciprocating platen presses not elsewhere provided for.

    (6)     Note.  For similar treating presses, see Class 144, Woodworking,
    subclasses 256.1+.

    (7)     Note.  For heat exchanger platens, per se, see Class 165, Heat
    Exchange, subclasses 168+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    437+,   for processes involving drying on forms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, appropriate subclasses.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 377+ for apparatus
    for making articles from fibrous pulp wherein a heated die is employed.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    appropriate subclasses for a molding press for plastic product
    manufacturing, especially subclasses 363+ for a press couple including an
    endless surface, subclasses 394+ for a press type preform reshaping or
    vulcanizing means, and subclasses 406+ for a press couple forming
    apparatus; see the search notes under the above identified subclasses.


CLS 34/144
TXT Apparatus under subclass 143 including a plurality of press couples.  These
    may constitute single or plural machines.

    (1)     Note.  For other means for feeding material in plural independent
    paths, see this class, subclass 205.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 193+ for plural presses not elsewhere provided
    for.


CLS 34/145
TXT Apparatus under subclass 143 including means to pass a gas or vapor into
    contact with the material treated.

    (1)     Note.  Presses with heated vented platens or presses having heated
    platens which separate to allow gas or vapor circulation (breathing) are
    not classified here but in other appropriate subclasses in this group.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 92+ for presses, not elsewhere provided for,
    having means to heat, cool or dry the material pressed.


CLS 34/146
TXT Apparatus under subclass 143 in which the pressing members, of nonplanar
    form are shaped to hold a solid to be treated.  Many of these are matrix
    driers.


CLS 34/147
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the material undergoing
    treatment travels in a generally spiral or helical path.

    (1)     Note.  For the most part the material moves by gravity, sliding
    down a spiral guide or being carried on supports which move along a spiral
    path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165     and indented subclasses, for shafts for material moving downwardly
    by gravity in various irregular paths.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, subclasses 12 and 13.


    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 657+ and 778 and indented
    subclasses.


CLS 34/164
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means to vibrate supports
    for material undergoing treatment, thus vibrating the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85,     for apparatus including means to strike the apparatus to loosen the
    material or deposits.

    172     and 178, for gravity feed from shelf to shelf, the shelves not
    vibrating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 86+.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 631, and 752+ for a vibrating
    conveyor.


CLS 34/165
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which material is fed in at an
    elevated level and flows generally downward through the treating zone or
    from one treating zone to another at least in part by gravity.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and the indented subclasses do not include
    plural conveyors feeding one to another usually by gravity, for which see
    this class, subclass 203 and indented subclasses, nor conveyors or cars
    which carry the material, the material not flowing, for which see
    subclasses 194, and 201 and indented subclasses, particularly subclasses
    215, 216, 227, and 228.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58      and 59, for apparatus involving centrifugal force, subclass 164,
    for material vibrating type, and subclass 147, for spiral path type.

    64+,    for devices here provided for plus cooler or cooling sections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclasses 13 and 15.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 93.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 311, 359+ and 523+.

    202,    Distillation: Apparatus, subclass 221.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 95+ for a residual gravity flow shaft type
    material heater.


CLS 34/166
TXT Apparatus under subclass 165 having two or more troughs and/or tubes having
    therein agitators or conveyors rotating about and extending along the axis
    of the troughs or tubes.

    (1)     Note.  The gravity flow is usually from one trough or tube to the
    next.

    (2)     Note.  Complete the search in this class, subclasses 180, 182 and
    183, for other axial feed apparatus where there is no gravity feed from one
    trough or tube to another, and see the notes to subclass 179.


CLS 34/167
TXT Apparatus under subclass 165 having two or more separate gravity feed paths
    and either, or both, (1) two or more separate feeding means to two or more
    of such paths, or (2) two or more separate discharge means from two or more
    of such paths.

    (1)     Note.  There may be a nongravity feed from one such path to a
    second, i.e., series arrangements with nongravity feed therebetween.

    (2)     Note.  For plural gravity feed paths with single feed and
    discharge, see other appropriate subclasses of this group.


CLS 34/168
TXT Apparatus under subclass 165 including means to contact the material
    treated with a treating gas or vapor.


CLS 34/169
TXT Apparatus under subclass 168 including pro- vision for recirculating the
    treating gas or vapor in whole or part.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note to subclass 219 of this class for other
    subclasses involving recirculation of the treating gas or vapor.


CLS 34/170
TXT Apparatus under subclass 168 in which the treating gas or vapor is
    distributed into contact with the material by imperforate members of
    generally inverted "V" or "U" configuration.


CLS 34/171
TXT Apparatus under subclass 168 in which there is either, or both, (1)
    arrangement for dropping material from one shelf member to a lower shelf
    member, or (2) plural baffle members forming a tortuous or zigzag course
    for the material being treated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164,    for vibrating shelves.

    178,    for such structure without gas or vapor contact means.

    211,    for superposed floors where no means for gravity flow are claimed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 336+ for baffles in a stationary mixing
    chamber.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 130+, for a material heater of the
    shelf-to-shelf type having combustion products generating structure.


CLS 34/172
TXT Apparatus under subclass 171 involving dumping shelves or pockets which
    oscillate or rotate about a horizontal axis for dumping the material from
    an upper to a lower level.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194,    for means for dumping removable shelves or trays.

    237,    for dumping floors, per se.


CLS 34/173
TXT Apparatus under subclass 171 including shelves and/or stirrers that rotate
    or revolve about a substantially vertical axis.

    (1)     Note.  The stirrer blades are usually arranged at an angle to move
    the material towards the discharge which may be radial openings in the
    shelves or openings at the edges or center.

    (2)     Note.  Complete the search in this class, subclasses 179+, for
    stationary receptacle with agitator and conveyor, and in subclass 185, for
    revolving or swinging carrier with discharging scrapers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    366,    Agitating, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 279+,
    and 432, Heating, subclass 131 for a shelf-to-shelf material heater having
    a rotary pusher and combustion products generating structure.


CLS 34/174
TXT Apparatus under subclass 168 including ducts or walls provided with a
    plurality of openings for the purpose of distributing the treating gas or
    vapor into contact with the material treated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168,    for the subjects matter there provided for, including foraminous
    walls.

    175,    for heating by radiation and conduction plus venting means
    including foraminous walls.

    225     and 233.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 174+.


CLS 34/175
TXT Apparatus under subclass 165 including means to vent the gases or vapors
    given off by the material treated.

    (1)     Note.  Venting means does not include an open top.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140     and 235.


CLS 34/176
TXT Apparatus under subclass 165 in which the material moves through tubes.


CLS 34/177
TXT Apparatus under subclass 165 including in- direct heat exchange tubes for
    the material being treated.

    (1)     Note.  Complete the search for combined material and heating tubes
    in this class, subclass 176.


CLS 34/178
TXT Apparatus under subclass 165 having shelf to shelf or zigzag structure as
    defined in subclass 171.

    (1)     Note.  Notes to subclass 171 and indented subclasses apply here.


CLS 34/179
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a stationary receptacle or
    tube that receives and holds the material undergoing treatment in contact
    with at least the receptacle or tube bottom, and has either, or both, (1)
    an agitator for the material within the receptacle or tube, or (2) a
    conveyor (other than an endless conveyor); see note (3) for causing the
    material to move in the receptacle or tube.

    (1)     Note.  Complete the search in this class, subclasses 280+ for the
    type of apparatus classified in this subclass, and the indented subclasses,
    disclosed for treating feathers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165+,   particularly subclass 166, for such devices in which the agitators
    or conveyors are vertically spaced so that the material undergoing
    treatment moves by gravity from one to another. Subclass 166 consists of
    plural apparatus similar to those classified in this subclasses (179+).

    201+,   for houses, kilns or receptacles in which the material does not
    contact the receptacle bottom, i.e., some conveyor or support for the
    material prevents contact with the house, kiln or receptacle bottom. Also,
    as between subclass 179, and subclasses 201+, all endless conveyors are in
    subclasses 201+.

    241.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclasses 22+ and 32+.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 94 for a scraper removing a product from a
    heat exchange surface, subclass 109.1 for a heat exchanger with agitator or
    stirrer, and subclass 120 for an impeller or conveyor moving material
    through a heat exchanger.

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 396+, 582 and 616.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 241+.


CLS 34/180
TXT Apparatus under subclass 179 including two or more of such means claimed in
    combination.

    (2)     Note.  Complete the search in this class, subclass 166, where there
    is gravity feed from one trough or tube to another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclasses 17+.


CLS 34/181
TXT Apparatus under subclass 179 including means to contact the material
    undergoing treatment with a gas or vapor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    432,    Heating, subclass 139 for a heater in which material is moved or
    agitated in a stationary receptacle to which combustion products are fed
    from a combustion products generator.


CLS 34/182
TXT Apparatus under subclass 181 in which the material is introduced at one
    end, moves in the direction of the receptacle or tube axis, and is
    discharged at the other end.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166     and 183.


CLS 34/183
TXT Apparatus under subclass 179 having material feed of the type defined in
    subclass 182.

    (1)     Note.  Complete the search in this class, subclasses 166 and 182.


CLS 34/184
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means for carrying material
    and moving about an axis, and not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  Search rotary drums or receptacles, particularly subclass
    109, for a hollow rotary member provided with compartments or material
    supporting means even though such means are removable or detachable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59      and 165+, particularly subclasses 171+ for means for including
    rotary members such as shelves where the material is caused by gravity to
    pass from shelf to shelf, and subclass 147, where the material moves
    spirally.

    103,    for rotary members carrying forms.

    150     and 163, and Classes 108, Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces,
    subclasses 20+ and 39; 198, Conveyors:  Power- Driven, subclasses 608,
    611+, 803.16, and others; 211, Supports:  Racks, subclasses 1.5 and 163+
    and 312, Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 125, 135, 252, 266, 267,
    and 305.

    162     and 163, for rotary carriers peculiar to sheet, web or strand
    material.

    207     and 208, for conveyors moving in a rectilinear or irregular plural
    path which may have material supporting members mounted on pivots.


CLS 34/185
TXT Apparatus under subclass 184 having either, or both (1) agitating means, or
    (2) a scraper to cause discharge of the material undergoing treatment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85,     for cleaning means.

    173     and 178, for gravity material flow type.


CLS 34/186
TXT Apparatus under subclass 184 including a plurality of separately movable
    carrier or rack units. The units may themselves be mounted on a rotary
    member.

    (1)     Note. Plural support elements mounted for motion together as a
    single unit are not included in this subclass, being classified in subclass
    184 or the subclasses below.

    (2)     Note.  See (4) Note  to subclass 209 of this class for other
    subclasses involving plural units or compartments.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 608, 624 and others for plural
    rotating conveyors.


CLS 34/187
TXT Apparatus under subclass 184 provided with means for causing a flow of
    treating gas or vapor into contact with the material treated.


CLS 34/188
TXT Apparatus under subclass 187 (1) provided with a member projecting from the
    rotary member, usually a curved plate, and acting to force a flow of gas or
    vapor over the material treated, or (2) in which the material supports are
    suspended from the carrier as in a Ferris wheel, or both (1) and (2).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 797+ for a load elevating
    platform which remains level as it moves on an orbital path.


CLS 34/189
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including mechanism acting to elevate
    or lower material by gripping the material or supporting removable material
    carriers, such as trays, so that the carriers may be elevated or lowered
    during treatment or the mechanism may be used to load or unload the
    apparatus, plus positive means to treat the material.The trays or supports
    usually move vertically and in superimposed relation.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 612 for elevator apparatus
    restricted to handling or treating sheet material. If sheets are carried on
    trays adapted to carry other material and the apparatus is not otherwise
    peculiar to sheet handling, the patents are classified here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94,     and notes thereunder, for apparatus which may raise or lower stacks
    of sheets.

    147,    for devices moving material spirally.

    165+,   where the material moves at least partially by gravity, i.e., falls
    freely through space.

    194,    and notes, for means for loading containers on fixed floors,
    shelves or guides.

    203+,   for devices feeding material from one conveyor to another at
    different levels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power Driven, subclass 346.1 and appropriate indented
    subclasses, 465.1, 604+, 625, 626+, 663, and 793+.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 788+, 564, 589, and 591.


CLS 34/190
TXT Apparatus under subclass 189 in which the material supports are carried in
    two or more elevator columns.


CLS 34/191
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having either, or both, (1) means to
    cause the contact gas or vapor to pulsate, or (2) means to cause the
    contact gas or vapor to flow into contact with the material being treated
    first in one direction and then in an opposite direction at the same place.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include those apparatuses in which
    the treating gas or vapor flows in reverse directions in different places,
    for which see this class, subclasses 203+, 210 and other subclasses,
    particularly subclasses 223, 224, 225, 226, 230, and 232.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92,     402+, and 558+,  for sub- or superatmospheric treatment including
    varying such pressures.

    222,    and 229, for movable gas distributors.

    463+,   and notes, for processes involving gas or vapor flow directing or
    control.

    562+,   for such means combined with timing means, and subclass 54 for
    automatic control of the flow of treating gas or vapor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclass 315 for reversible flow pumps.


CLS 34/192
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which an enclosure or supporting
    means has means providing for the insertion or removal of shelves, trays or
    drawers from the enclosure or supporting means.

    (1)     Note.  Such  means may be, for example, guides or supporting
    surfaces.

    (2)     Note.  Complete the search in this class, subclasses 237+, and see
    notes, for container, drawer, tray, shelf, or floor structure where the
    shelf, tray or drawer supporting or enclosing means are not claimed, or for
    heated drying floors or surfaces, per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94,     where sheets are spaced by loose spacer sheet or web even though
    supported by shelves or trays.

    143+,   for press type where the supporting members are opposed and exert a
    pressing action.

    148+,   for removable shelf or tray type apparatus restricted to handling
    sheet material, particularly subclass 163.

    149,    189, and 190, for elevator type for shelves.

    165+,   where the material goes from one level to another by gravity.

    184+,   for rotary carriers which may include removable shelves or trays.

    201+,   particularly subclass 211 for houses, kilns and containers,
    including superposed floors, shelves or chambers, where an arrangement for
    removable insertion of shelves, trays, or drawers is not claimed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 78 and 120.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 293 and 294+, for cabinets
    having movable and removable components.


CLS 34/193
TXT Apparatus under subclass 192 in which two or more of the removable shelf,
    tray or drawer elements are arranged in other than vertical alignment.


CLS 34/194
TXT Apparatus under subclass 192 including means for handling the trays or
    shelves except mere guides on which the shelves or trays are supported.

    (1)     Note.  Such means may be trucks on which the trays or shelves are
    removably mounted, or other mechanical means operating to insert or remove
    the same, but see and search subclass 201, particularly subclasses 204,
    207, 208, 215+, 216, 217, 227, and 228, for apparatus including tray
    handling means, such as trucks, or conveyors, but no means providing for
    the insertion or removal of shelves, trays or drawers are claimed.

    (2)     Note.  For dumping shelves in shaft type, see this class,
    subclasses 172 and 178.


CLS 34/195
TXT Apparatus under subclass 192 including means to contact the material
    treated with a treating gas or vapor.

    (1)     Note.  Complete the search for the subject matter provided for in
    this subclass in subclasses 193 and 194. Subject matter for the indented
    subclasses below is cross-referenced from subclasses 193 and 194.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    432,    Heating, subclass 162 for a heating chamber in which combustion
    products contact work material supported on a shelf, rack, or tray on a
    guide or pivot and subclass 204 for a work chamber in which heated air
    traverses material held on a separable tray where the air is heated by a
    specific combustion type heating means.


CLS 34/196
TXT Apparatus under subclass 195 including means to recirculate the treating
    gas or vapor in whole or part.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note to subclass 219 of this class, for search for
    gas or vapor recirculation.


CLS 34/197
TXT Apparatus under subclass 195 including heating means for either, or both,
    (1) the treating gas or vapor, or (2) the material treated.


CLS 34/198
TXT Apparatus under subclass 197 having a liquid heater or vaporizer for
    supplying a heat exchange heater.

    (1)     Note.  See (2) and (3) Notes to subclass 192 of this class.


CLS 34/199
TXT Apparatus under subclass 195 in which the treating gas or vapor flows in a
    back-and-forth path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226,    and see notes.


CLS 34/200
TXT Apparatus under subclass 192 having a liquid heater as defined in subclass
    198.

    (1)     Note.  See (2) and (3) Notes to subclass 192 of this class.


CLS 34/201
TXT Apparatus within the class definition including an enclosure which may be
    open on one side (including the top side).

    (1)     Note.  See this class, apparatus subclass 92 and notes, for vacuum
    drying.

    (2)     Note.  For other enclosures which are or may be used for treating
    material, see classes:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 111.1+ and 524+.

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 147+.

    19,     Textiles: Fiber Preparation, subclass 66.

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclasses 3, 51, and 71+, and their
    indented subclasses.

    44,     Fuel and Related Composition, subclasses 630+.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclasses 1.01 and 17.

    48,     Gas: Heating and Illuminating, subclasses 62, 89, and 119 and their
    indented subclasses, 173 and 174+.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses.

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclasses.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses
    349+ for glass annealing or tempering furnaces.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, particularly subclasses 5+,
    18, and 20.

    71,     Chemistry: Fertilizers, subclasses 64.01+.

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 451.

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 235+.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 302+ and 311+.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, appropriate subclasses.

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 300+.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclasses 17+ and 22+.

    164,    Metal Founding, appropriate subclasses.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 72+ for a heat exchanger with a removable
    cover for an access opening, and subclass 169 for an enclosure formed by
    attempering wall means.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 861.1+.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for kilns.

    237,    Heating Systems, appropriate subclasses; see particularly
    subclasses 48 and 53 for tobacco barns where the tobacco holding or
    handling means are not claimed.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 168+, for apparatus for
    treating an ore by contacting it with a gas while there is contained in an
    enclosure and subclasses 250+, for means for contacting a solid metal
    object with a gas while the object is enclosed in a housing.

    312,    Supports: Cabinet Structure, subclass 213, for ventilated wall
    cabinets, and subclass 236, for cabinets with heat exchange means.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 36+ for the preparation
    of a material for an optical test.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, appropriate subclasses.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 564+ for photographic fluid-treating which
    may include drying.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, appropriate subclasses.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 120+, for a residual work chamber having
    heating means.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 283+ and
    291+.

    454,    Ventilation, for the ventilation subcombination, particularly
    subclasses 173+, for ventilated storage chambers.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses
    1+, particularly subclasses 81+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for enclosures with display, inspecting or illuminating means, and
    see notes.

    192+,   for removable shelf or tray type.

    237     and 238, for floors or trays on which material is piled but having
    no means other than a mere surrounding flange to enclose the same.  Such
    devices are not in this group unless combined with additional means such as
    covers or walls to enclose the material.

    242,    for material entrance seals including enough house, kiln or
    container structure to cooperate with a seal, including those seals in the
    form of a material transfer chamber.


CLS 34/202
TXT Apparatus under subclass 201 including structure forming an enclosure
    having one or more openings or an open front through which an article is
    partially inserted to project into the enclosure and be treated as by a gas
    or vapor or by heat.  Many of these patents are devices for treating the
    toes or soles of shoes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    and indented subclasses, for apparatus restricted to hollow article
    drying.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclass 1, and see the reference to Class 12
    in the main class definition, (2) Note, of this class.


CLS 34/203
TXT Apparatus under subclass 201 including conveyors for transporting material
    in plural or zigzag paths.

    (1)     Note.  The above definition excludes the mere handling of material
    as by supports, trucks, tracks, or trays where no mechanical means are
    provided for causing the material to be conveyed while within the house,
    kiln or container.

    (2)     Note.  Complete the search in this class, subclasses 646, 647, and
    657, which include plural run conveyors peculiar to the handling of sheets,
    webs or strands.

    (3)     Note.  For other houses, kilns or containers having conveyors, see
    appropriate preceding subclasses, particularly subclasses  105, 108+, 147,
    576+, 611+, particularly subclasses 647+, 657+, and 658+, 164, 179+, 189,
    and 190.

    (4)     Note.  For houses, kilns or containers having a single conveyor for
    conveying material in a single path, see this class, subclasses 201+ and
    other appropriate indented subclass, and subclasses 216 and 217, for plural
    units or compartments having handling means such as trucks and rails for
    moving material in single or plural paths.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    481     and 482+, for processes involving material speed, thickness or
    quantity control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses for systems of
    plural conveyors, and subclasses 599 and 603 for plural conveyors forming
    an ascending or descending zigzag path.


CLS 34/204
TXT Apparatus under subclass 203 in which the conveyor has provision for
    carrying or moving material supports which are detachable therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194,    for other shelf, tray or drawer handling, and see notes to
    subclasses 192+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, appropriate subclasses, such as 172.1+, 173.1+ and 202+.


CLS 34/205
TXT Apparatus under subclass 203 in which the material travels in two or more
    independent paths.

    (1)     Note.  For means feeding material through plural press couples in
    independent paths, see this class, subclass 144.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 570 for plural conveyors
    providing independent conveying paths.


CLS 34/206
TXT Apparatus under subclass 203 including means contacting the material and
    moving it by pushing along a support, as by reciprocating or continuously
    moving blades.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes devices which may both carry and push
    the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208,    for single endless conveyors, both courses carrying but neither
    pushing, material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 717+.


CLS 34/207
TXT Apparatus under subclass 203 including an endless conveyor having portions
    thereof extending in different directions, and which thus carries the
    material to be treated in an irregular (generally zigzag) path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208,    for two course endless conveyors, both courses carrying material.


CLS 34/208
TXT Apparatus under subclass 203 including a single endless conveyors traveling
    in a closed two course circuit with both courses of the conveyor carrying
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206,    for single endless conveyors in which one course may carry and the
    other course push material.


CLS 34/209
TXT Apparatus under subclass 201 including either, or both, (1) two or more
    houses, kilns or containers, or (2) an enclosure divided into a plurality
    of material treating compartments, as by partitions.

    (1)     Note.  The following subclasses in this class involve plural units
    or compartments:  61, 62 and indented subclasses, 68, 98, 113 and indented
    subclasses, 127 and indented subclasses, 144, 167, 180, 186, 190, and 193.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    192,    and indented subclasses, for removable shelf or tray type.

    203,    and indented subclasses for subject matter provided for in this
    subclass or the indented subclasses, plus conveyors providing plural
    treating units or compartments.

    226,    where baffles or deflectors not forming distinct material
    compartments cause a tortuous gas flow.

    238,    for plural tray units.


CLS 34/210
TXT Apparatus under subclass 209 including means to contact the material
    treated with a treating gas or vapor.


CLS 34/211
TXT Apparatus under subclass 210 in which two or more of the treating units or
    compartments are vertically arranged with respect to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171,    and indented subclasses, and subclass 178 for gravity material flow
    type.

    192,    and indented subclasses, for vertically arranged removable shelf or
    tray type and subclasses 237 and 238, for vertically arranged trays or
    floors.


CLS 34/212
TXT Apparatus under subclass 210 including means to recirculate the treating
    gas or vapor in whole or part.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note  to subclasses 219+, this class, for other gas
    or vapor recirculation.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not include the reuse of the gas or vapor
    in successive compartments or units without recirculation through each or
    through two or more.


CLS 34/213
TXT Apparatus under subclass 212 in which each separate unit or compartment has
    a gas or vapor recirculation path individual to it.

    (1)     Note.  The flow may be caused by a single gas or vapor forcing
    means but where there are two or more separate recirculation paths and any
    one thereof includes two or more units or compartments, see this class,
    subclasses 212+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    214,    for parallel circulation only, not involving recirculation.


CLS 34/214
TXT Apparatus under subclass 210 in which each separate unit or compartment has
    a gas or vapor path individual to it.

    (1)     Note.  Where there are two or more gas or vapor paths and any one
    thereof includes two or more units or compartments, see this class,
    subclass 210 or other appropriate indented subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213,    for parallel circulation involving recirculation.


CLS 34/215
TXT Apparatus under subclass 210 including heating means for either, or both,
    (1) the treating gas or vapor, or (2) the material undergoing treatment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209,    for heaters without gas or vapor contact means.


CLS 34/216
TXT Apparatus under subclass 215 having either, or both, (1) a conveyor for
    conveying the material undergoing treatment into and out of the unit or
    compartment, or (2) a support for the material undergoing treatment (such
    as a rack or car) movable into and out of the unit or compartment.


CLS 34/217
TXT Apparatus under subclass 210 having means as defined in subclass 216.


CLS 34/218
TXT Apparatus under subclass 201 including means to contact the material
    undergoing treatment with a gas or vapor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    432,    Heating, subclasses 201+ for a work chamber supporting work to be
    transversed by a steam of air heated indirectly by a specific combustion
    device.


CLS 34/219
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 including means to recirculate the treating
    gas or vapor in whole or part.

    (1)     Note.  The following apparatus subclasses include recirculation of
    the treating gas or vapor:  565+, 576+, 77, 78, 84, 100, 114, 115, 122,
    131, 629+, and indented subclasses, 169, 181, 182, 187+, 191, 196, 212, and
    213.


CLS 34/220
TXT Apparatus under subclass 219 in which the recirculation is caused by the
    heater only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78.

    234,    for gas or vapor flow caused by heater action, without
    recirculation.


CLS 34/221
TXT Apparatus under subclass 219 in which the treating gas or vapor is caused
    to recirculate by the jet action (Venture or aspirating effect) caused by
    injection or flow of treating gases or vapors into the treating chamber.

    (1)     Note.  Complete the search in this class, subclass 84 for jet
    devices which add a treating material to the treating gas or vapor and
    cause circulation thereof, and subclass 75 for direct contact condensers.


CLS 34/222
TXT Apparatus under subclass 219 in which, (1) the means for delivering or
    distributing the treating gas or vapor to the treating chamber is mounted
    for motion, or (2) the gas or vapor forcing means is mounted for motion in
    addition to the motion necessary to force the gas or vapor.

    (1)     Note.  Such motion may be for either (1) changing the direction of
    gas or vapor flow, or (2) for removal from the treating chamber of the
    delivering or distributing means or the forcing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229,    and notes thereto.


CLS 34/223
TXT Apparatus under subclass 219 including more than one means for forcing the
    flow of the treating gas or vapor.

    (1)     Note.  Complete the search in this class, subclasses 191, 203 and
    indented subclasses, particularly subclass 207, and subclasses 212, 213,
    226, and 230 and see notes thereto.  Subclass 191 includes plural
    reversible blowers or plural blowers with means for causing a reverse flow.


CLS 34/224
TXT Apparatus under subclass 219 including two or more inlets and/or two or
    more outlets for the treating gas or vapor to the material treating
    chamber.This is usually to obtain a desired distribution of the treating
    gas or vapor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203,    and indented subclasses, and 220-223, for the subjects matter there
    provided for which may include plural inlets and/or outlets.

    232+.


CLS 34/225
TXT Apparatus under subclass 224 in which one or more of the partitions forming
    the material treating chamber are provided with plural openings.

    (1)     Note.  This includes foraminous walls, such as walls formed of
    slats or pervious fabrics.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233.


CLS 34/226
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 having means for causing the treating gas or
    vapor to move through the treating chamber in other than a rectilinear path
    (as a spiral, helical or zigzag path).

    (1)     Note.  Complete the search on tortuous treating gas or vapor path
    in this class, subclasses 199, 203 and 209 and their indented subclasses,
    particularly subclasses 212, 215 through 217 and 223.  In subclass 209 and
    indented subclasses the flow is through distinct material compartments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229,    230, and 231.


CLS 34/227
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 in which the treating gas or vapor flows
    through the treating chamber (1) from either the treated material entrance
    or exit toward opposite end, or (2) is introduced at some intermediate
    point and flows toward either the treated material entrance or exit, or (3)
    both.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209,    and indented subclasses, particularly subclasses 215 through 217
    and 226 and in subclass 203 and indented subclasses.


CLS 34/228
TXT Apparatus under subclass 227 in which the gas and/or vapors that contact
    the material have opposite directions of flow only.


CLS 34/229
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 having a movable gas or vapor distributor as
    defined in subclass 222.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191,    for means for causing reversible or pulsating flow.

    226,    for baffles causing a tortuous flow.

    231,    for fixed gas or vapor baffles and see notes thereto.


CLS 34/230
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 having plural gas or vapor forcing means as
    defined in subclass 223.

    (1)     Note.  Complete the search in this class, subclasses 212 through
    214, 223, and 226 and see notes thereto.


CLS 34/231
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 including one or more baffles for guiding the
    treating gas or vapor in a definite path through the treating chamber.

    (1)     Note.  Where baffles cause a recirculation, see this class,
    subclass 219 and indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  Complete the search in this class, subclass 226, where the
    baffles cause a tortuous gas or vapor flow; in subclass 209 and indented
    subclasses, where partitions forming units or compartments act as baffles;
    in subclasses 222 and 229, for movable baffles, and in subclass 203 and
    indented  subclasses, for baffles between conveyors or conveyor runs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195,    and indented subclasses, for baffles causing a desired flow of the
    treating gas and/or vapor over removable shelves or trays.

    232     and 233, for ducts, openings, etc., for introducing the treating
    gas or vapor into or removing it from the treating chamber.


CLS 34/232
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 having two or more gas or vapor inlets and/or
    outlets as defined in subclass 224.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    454,    Ventilation, particularly subclass 173 and indented subclasses.


CLS 34/233
TXT Apparatus under subclass 232 having openings in the wall, ceiling or floor
    as defined in subclass 225.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174     and 211, for superposed floors many of which are perforated.


CLS 34/234
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 in which the flow of treating gas or vapor
    into contact with the material is caused by the heater alone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73,     74, 75, 197, and 198.

    220,    for recirculation caused by heater action, and search notes thereto.

    235,    where the heater causes the evolved gases or vapors to vent.


CLS 34/235
TXT Apparatus under subclass 201 including means to vent the gases or vapors
    evolved due to treatment of the material.

    (1)     Note.  For means to vent gases and/or vapors which contact material
    for treatment, see this class, subclasses 210 and 218 and their indented
    subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  See process subclass 521 and apparatus subclass 72 and
    indented subclasses of this class for means to treat the treating gas or
    vapors or the evolved gases or vapors, and subclass 92 for vacuum apparatus.


CLS 34/236
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising material handling means or
    material conveying means combined with means to dry and/or contact the
    material being treated with a treating gas or vapor.

    (1)     Note.  See appropriate subclasses of this class for the apparatus
    here defined combined with other apparatus, and complete the search in
    subclass 162 for means peculiar to sheet, web or strand, and subclass 71
    for absorbent conveyors combined with other drying means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    576+,   for fluid current conveyors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven.


CLS 34/237
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including supporting surfaces upon
    which material is placed.  These may include a mere surrounding flange.

    (1)     Note.  Complete the search in this class, subclass 192 and indented
    subclasses, particularly subclasses 197, 198 and 200.  These subclasses
    must be searched for housings or supports as well as for the subject
    provided for in this and the indented subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172     and 178, for plural floors with gravity flow therebetween.

    225     and 233, and see notes.

    239     and 240.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 660+ for fabric or
    lattice openwork, e.g., gratings, not elsewhere provided for.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 392+ for
    sifting element dress.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 498 and 499 for
    filter plates or screens.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 253+, for a means specialized to holding,
    shielding, or supporting work within a furnace.


CLS 34/238
TXT Apparatus under subclass 37 including the structure of single trays and
    combinations of two or more tray structures.

    (1)     Note.  Subclass 237 of this class has such devices combined with
    either, or both, (1) heating means, or (2) gas or vapor forcing means.

    (2)     Note.  Search various receptacle classes, such as Classes 217,
    Wooden Receptacles, 220, Receptacles, and 229, Envelopes, Wrappers, and
    Paperboard Boxes, for other tray structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201+,   particularly subclass 233 for receptacle structure.


CLS 34/239
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means to support the
    material treated and not provided for above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101     and 106.

    143+,   for platens in press type driers.

    237     and 238.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, and 248, Supports, for supports not combined with
    drying and/or gas or vapor contact means.

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses. Class 269 is the residual
    locus for patents to a device for clamping, supporting and/or holding an
    article (or articles) in position to be operated on or treated.  See notes
    thereunder for other related loci.


CLS 34/240
TXT Apparatus under subclass 239 restricted to the structure of supporting rods
    or rolls, per se.

    (1)     Note.  For external drying drums, see this class, subclasses 110+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 5.5, 19.1+,
    and particularly, subclass 243.5 for supporting rods used in handling.

    452,    Butchering, subclasses 187+ for supports used in butchering.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the notes thereunder.


CLS 34/241
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including an agitator for material in
    combination with means for delivering a gas or vapor for contact with such
    material.

    (1)     Note.  Where such means is claimed in combination with the treated
    material supporting means, see the appropriate group above.


CLS 34/242
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means to seal an opening in
    a treating chamber against gas or vapor leakage inwardly or outwardly and
    providing for the feeding of material through the opening.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes only enough of the chamber structure
    to cooperate with the seal.  Where other housing or treating is claimed,
    the patents are elsewhere appropriately classified.  This applies to a
    chamber acting as a seal or air lock only.For other plural chambers or
    compartments which may have seals therebetween, see this class, subclasses
    209+.

    (2)     Note.  See this class, subclass 231 and notes for deflecting
    baffles causing a definite gas or vapor flow.

    (3)     Note.  Complete the search in this class, subclass 92 and see
    notes.  Such subclass includes vacuum treating chambers including feeders
    and chamber seals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 860.3+.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 269.

    221,    Dispensing, subclasses 106 and 108, for rotary trap chamber feeders.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process.

    396,    Photography, subclass 579 for the use of a gaseous fluid treating
    apparatus in photography.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 217+ for apparatus for
    moving material between zones having different pressures and inhibiting a
    change in the pressure gradient there between.

    432,    Heating, subclass 242, for a closure or seal for the work entrance
    passage of a heating furnace.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 188+ for the use of a protective air
    current which seals an opening against gas or vapor leakage therethrough.


CLS 34/245
TXT MATERIAL TREATED BY ELECTROMAGNETIC ENERGY:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which a physical substance or
    object is subjected to electrical power or radiation extending across the
    entire range of frequencies from 1023 cycles per second to 0 cycles per
    second or corresponding wavelengths from 10-13 cm to infinity to remove
    moisture from the substance or object.

    (1)     Note.  Where the energy is not applied to the object or material,
    but is used for generating heat energy that is transferred to the material
    or object, see other subclasses of this class or other appropriate heating
    classes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 451 for apparatus for
    directing an electric current, field, or discharge through food.

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 299 for a process of drying tobacco in which
    electrical energy is applied to the tobacco.

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclasses for
    electrical or wave energy processes, especially subclasses 450+ for drying
    solids by electro-osmosis or electrophoresis, subclasses 155+ for chemical
    production of a compound or element by electrical or wave energy in a
    magnetic field, and subclasses 164+ for chemical treatment of a compound or
    element by an electrostatic field or electrical discharge.

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, for drying by electrolysis, especially
    subclasses 687+.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, for miscellaneous
    systems supplying electric energy to an electric space discharge device of
    the gas or vapor ionization type.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, and Class 219, Electric
    Heating, for a process and apparatus for applying electrical energy to
    material or an object for heating only.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 20, 21, and 22+ for process of
    disinfecting, deodorizing, preserving, or sterilizing by electrical or wave
    energy.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 237+ for a process involving the application of electrical or
    wave energy to foods.


CLS 34/246
TXT Electric current applied directly through material:

    Subject matter under subclass 245 wherein a flow of electric charge is
    carried through the material as if the material itself were an electrical
    conductor.


CLS 34/247
TXT Induction heater:

    Subject matter under subclass 245 wherein the electrical energy creates
    heat by generating an electromotive force through the use of a varying
    magnetic flux.


CLS 34/248
TXT Magnetic field:

    Subject matter under subclass 245 wherein the material is subjected to a
    magnetic field.


CLS 34/249
TXT Controls particle movement in a fluidized bed:

    Subject matter under subclass 248 wherein the magnetic field regulates the
    motion of small pieces of material suspended in a gas stream.


CLS 34/250
TXT Electrostatic field:

    Subject matter under subclass 245 wherein the electromagnetic energy is in
    the form of a stationary electric field.


CLS 34/251
TXT Having suction means:

    Subject matter under subclass 250 including means to create a reduced
    pressure around the material being treated.


CLS 34/252
TXT Having vibration means:

    Subject matter under subclass 250 including means to rapidly oscillate the
    material.


CLS 34/253
TXT Having needlelike electrodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 250 including thin pointed electric
    conductors to emit an electrostatic field.


CLS 34/254
TXT Having heating or cooling means:

    Subject matter under subclass 250 including means to vary the temperature
    of the material, a treating gas or vapor, or other parts of a drying system.


CLS 34/255
TXT Radio or high-frequency energy:

    Subject matter under subclass 245 wherein the radiation used in drying is
    approximately 107-108 Hz with a corresponding wavelength of 104-102 cm.


CLS 34/256
TXT Having additional heating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 255 including a separate means to increase
    the temperature of the material, a treating gas or vapor, or other parts of
    a drying system.


CLS 34/257
TXT Having pressure reducing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 255 including means to establish a vacuum or
    a suction.


CLS 34/258
TXT Plural units or chambers:

    Subject matter under subclass 255 including more than one high-frequency
    device or multiple compartments.


CLS 34/259
TXT Microwave energy:

    Subject matter under subclass 245 wherein the radiation used in drying is
    approximately 1010 Hz with a corresponding wavelength of 1.0 cm.


CLS 34/260
TXT Clothes dryer:

    Subject matter under subclass 259 wherein the microwave dryer is used for
    removing moisture from articles of apparel.


CLS 34/261
TXT Having rotating drum:

    Subject matter under subclass 260 wherein the microwave clothes dryer has a
    cylindrical chamber which turns about the cylinder axis.


CLS 34/262
TXT Having vibrating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 259 including means to rapidly oscillate the
    material.


CLS 34/263
TXT Having pressure reducing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 259 including means to establish a vacuum or
    suction.


CLS 34/264
TXT Plural units or chambers:

    Subject matter under subclass 259 including more than one microwave device
    or multiple compartments.


CLS 34/265
TXT Having treating gas or vapor circulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 259 including means to distribute gas or
    vapor through the dryer.


CLS 34/266
TXT Infrared energy:

    Subject matter under subclass 245 wherein the radiation used in drying is
    in the frequency range of 1013-1014 Hz with a corresponding wavelength of
    10-3 cm.


CLS 34/267
TXT Having treating gas or vapor circulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 266 wherein gas or vapor is distributed in
    the same treating area as that treated by the infrared radiation.


CLS 34/268
TXT Radiation controlled by other drying parameters:

    Subject matter under subclass 266 wherein the infrared radiator output is
    regulated by sensed drying conditions such as moisture content of the
    treated material, temperature of the treated material, speed and quantity
    of the treated material, moisture content of the treating gas, etc.


CLS 34/269
TXT Having temperature control:

    Subject matter under subclass 268 wherein the temperature of the material,
    the temperature of the treating gas, or the temperature of the treating
    chamber is varied or regulated.


CLS 34/270
TXT Vehicle paint dryer:

    Subject matter under subclass 266 wherein infrared radiation alone is
    applied to a vehicle for the purpose of drying or curing a painted vehicle
    surface.


CLS 34/271
TXT Including evolved gas or vapor treatment:

    Subject matter under subclass 270 in which gas or vapor emitted due to
    heating is condensed or otherwise treated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    467,    for a process of treating the contacting gas or vapor.


CLS 34/272
TXT Including vehicle conveyor:

    Subject matter under subclass 270 wherein the vehicle being treated is
    transported through the treating zone.

    (1)     Note.  Should gas or vapor circulation occur in a process wherein
    the gas circulation and infrared treatment are not applied in the same
    treatment location then these patents should be properly placed in subclass
    418 for diverse types of drying operations.


CLS 34/273
TXT Sheets, webs, or strands:

    Subject matter under subclass 266 wherein the treated material is a broad,
    thin, rectangular piece, a mesh, or cords.


CLS 34/274
TXT Having gas or vapor treatment:

    Subject matter under subclass 273 wherein the gas or vapor is handled in
    some manner.


CLS 34/275
TXT Ultraviolet energy:

    Subject matter under subclass 245 wherein the radiation used in drying is
    approximately 1016 Hz with a corresponding wavelength of 10-5-10-6 cm.


CLS 34/276
TXT Inert gas atmosphere:

    Subject matter under subclass 275 wherein a dryer has a nonreactive gas
    environment.


CLS 34/277
TXT Having shutter means:

    Subject matter under subclass 275 wherein a movable cover is positioned
    between the material and ultraviolet radiation source.


CLS 34/278
TXT With cooling means:

    Subject matter under subclass 275 including means to remove heat.


CLS 34/279
TXT MATERIAL TREATED BY ACOUSTIC ENERGY:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which a physical substance or
    object is subjected to sound waves.


CLS 34/280
TXT FEATHER TREATING:

    Subject matter under the class definition disclosed for processing bird
    plumage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 404 and 94.1+. For the line between Class
    8, subclasses 94.1+, and this subclass, see (3) Note in that subclass.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, appropriate subclasses.

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclass 4.

    71,     Chemistry:  Fertilizers, subclass 18.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    appropriate subclasses for filling a mattress or the like with fluent
    material wherein the material is handled as fluid material.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, particularly
    subclasses 2 and 133+.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 47.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 1 through 143.


CLS 34/281
TXT With agitator:

    Subject matter under subclass 280 including means to stir, beat, or shake
    the feathers being treated.


CLS 34/282
TXT PROCESS:

    Method under the class definition.


CLS 34/283
TXT Hair on head:

    Process under subclass 282 for treating human hair while on the head.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96+,    and see the notes to indented subclasses for apparatus to dry human
    hair while on the head.


CLS 34/284
TXT Freeze-drying:

    Process under subclass 282 of drying a treated material by cooling by
    evaporating moisture contained within the material to produce a frozen mass
    and then applying a means to remove or decrease the amount of moisture in
    the treated material.

    (1)     Note.  Freezing by application of a vacuum plus other treating is
    in this subclass; for other vacuum treating see subclasses 406+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    391,    for combined drying or cooling not involving freezing, and subclass
    428 for cooling by gas or vapor contact.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 532+ and 123+ for separating liquids by
    freezing.

    252,    Compositions, for a process of breaking colloids, particularly
    subclasses 346+.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 5+ for a method for comminuting liquids into particulate solid
    material which may include freezing with or without drying of cooling fluid.


CLS 34/285
TXT With separating of frozen fluid from treated material:

    Process under subclass 284 of physically removing frozen fluid from the
    treated material (e.g., scraping, vibrating, shearing, etc.).


CLS 34/286
TXT With gas or vapor flow to remove frozen fluid:

    Process under subclass 285 of contacting the frozen treated material with a
    gas or vapor flow to remove the frozen fluid.

    (1)     Note.  This gas or vapor flow could melt, sublimate, or separate
    the moisture from the treated material.


CLS 34/287
TXT Including vacuum:

    Process under subclass 284 of applying subatmospheric pressure to the
    material being treated during the freeze-drying process.


CLS 34/288
TXT And spray freeze or immersion:

    Process under subclass 287 involving injecting the material being treated
    into a chamber subjected to a vacuum, or submerging the material in a
    cooling fluid also within a chamber subjected to a vacuum.


CLS 34/289
TXT And heating:

    Process under subclass 287 involving increasing the temperature of the
    material treated or the separated frozen or unfrozen fluid to promote the
    removal or separation of the moisture from the treated material or a
    treatment chamber.


CLS 34/290
TXT Continuous processing:

    Process under subclass 289 including moving material to be treated into and
    out of a drying zone without interruption of the drying process.


CLS 34/291
TXT Including mixing or agitating:

    Process under subclass 290 involving stirring or churning of the treated
    material.


CLS 34/292
TXT With gas or vapor treating (e.g., filtering or condensing):

    Process under subclass 290 combined with adding any character of material
    to or removing any character of material from the gas or vapor derived from
    the freeze-drying process.

    (1)     Note.  This process could involve filtering, condensation,
    moisturizing, etc. of the derived gas or vapor.


CLS 34/293
TXT With gas or vapor treating:

    Process under subclass 289 combined with adding any character of material
    to or removing any character of material from the gas or vapor derived from
    the freeze-drying process.

    (1)     Note.  This process could involve filtering, condensation,
    moisturizing, etc. of the derived gas or vapor.


CLS 34/294
TXT Desiccant or molecular sieve:

    Process under subclass 289 wherein the gas or vapor is subjected to a
    substance that has a high affinity for water, such as calcium oxide, or a
    straining device at the molecular level that primarily removes moisture
    from the gas or vapor by absorption or adsorption.


CLS 34/295
TXT Including mixing or agitating:

    Process under subclass 289 involving stirring or churning of the treated
    material.


CLS 34/296
TXT Having specific container:

    Process under subclass 289 wherein the vessel for the treated material is
    of a unique or special type such as a glass bottle, test tube, jar, etc.


CLS 34/297
TXT Having specific type of material support:

    Process under subclass 289 wherein the underlying holder for the treated
    material is of a unique or special type such as shelving, a removable tray,
    stacked treatment units, etc.


CLS 34/298
TXT With gas or vapor treating:

    Process under subclass 284 combined with adding any character of material
    to or removing any character of material from the gas or vapor derived from
    the freeze-drying process.

    (1)     Note.  This process could involve filtering, condensing,
    moisturizing, etc. of the derived gas or vapor.


CLS 34/299
TXT Desiccant or molecular sieve:

    Apparatus under subclass 298 wherein the gas or vapor is subjected to a
    substance that has a high affinity for water, such as calcium oxide, or a
    strainer at the molecular level that primarily removes moisture from the
    gas or vapor by absorption or adsorption.


CLS 34/300
TXT Using filter:

    Process under subclass 298 wherein the gas or vapor derived from the
    freeze-drying process is subjected to a straining process primarily to
    remove particulate material.


CLS 34/301
TXT With additional material cooling by separate refrigeration means:

    Process under subclass 287 combined with use of an extra means for cooling
    the treated material in addition to the basic cooling means that produces
    cooling by the vaporization of liquid from the treated material.


CLS 34/302
TXT Congealing or thickening:

    Process under subclass 282 of treating a flowable material wherein the
    material is jelled or stiffened in any way.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 6+ for apparatus to make particulate material (e.g., shot)
    directly from liquid or molten material.


CLS 34/303
TXT By adding congealing or thickening agent:

    Process under subclass 302 wherein a substance is mixed with the material
    treated which does not result in a chemical reaction with the treated
    material but the result of the interaction is a congealing or thickening of
    the material treated.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass differs from subclasses 329+ in that the
    processes in this subclass involve treating a flowable material to increase
    its viscosity, while subclasses 329+, which also provide for the addition
    of a treating agent, involve treating both flowable and nonflowable
    material to produce a solid or particulate mass.


CLS 34/304
TXT By cooling of treated material:

    Process under subclass 302 wherein the material treated is thickened or
    congealed by reducing its temperature.


CLS 34/305
TXT By evaporating moisturizing fluid:

    Process under subclass 302 wherein the material treated is thickened or
    congealed by the vaporization of the wetting agent in the material treated.

    (1)     Note.  This includes boiling, vacuum treatment, evaporation by
    exposure to a desiccant, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    287+,   for freeze-drying by vacuum.


CLS 34/306
TXT Sheet or web contact preventing by spacer sheet, web, or strand:

    Process under subclass 282 in which sheets are treated while separated from
    one another by another separating sheet, web, or strand or parts of a web
    are separated from other parts by an added separating sheet or web.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94,     for the corresponding apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclasses 417 and 419 for interleaving sheets with other
    sheets or webs where no positive drying step is claimed or where such
    processes are combined with printing, whether or not positive drying is
    claimed.


CLS 34/307
TXT Retarding or shielding of treatment:

    Process under subclass 282 involving slowing of the treating action either
    over the entire object being dried or over selected areas by buffering
    against the treating operation.

    (1)     Note.  The buffering may be done in any manner such as coating,
    mounting in a frame, etc.


CLS 34/308
TXT Radiation applying with shielding:

    Process under subclass 307 wherein radiation treatment strength is
    selectively applied to particular areas of the material treated through the
    action of a radiation barrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    245+,   for full application of radiation during treatment.


CLS 34/309
TXT Shielding by selective application of gas or vapor flow:

    Process under subclass 307 wherein the treating gas or vapor is directed to
    particular areas on the treated material by altering the velocity or
    direction of flow of the treating gas or vapor from its source, which
    results in differential exposure by the treating gas or vapor.


CLS 34/310
TXT Application of temporary coating:

    Process under subclass 307 wherein a material is attached to the material
    treated to transiently cover the material treated, which would provide
    particular areas with differential treatment.


CLS 34/311
TXT Shielding by use of physical barrier to treating gas or vapor:

    Process under subclass 307 wherein a buffer not attached to the material
    treated is associated with the material and arranged to provide
    differential gas or vapor contact on successive areas of the material
    treated.


CLS 34/312
TXT By centrifugal force:

    Process under subclass 282 comprising subjecting the materials undergoing
    treatment to the force on an object in curvilinear motion that is directed
    away from the center of curvature or axis of rotation.

    (1)     Note.  This may be for any purpose, as for causing the material to
    move, preventing shrinkage of material, etc.

    SEARCH THIS SUBCLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58      and 59, for an apparatus that uses centrifugal force.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 17 and 33 for a
    process using centrifugal force.

    494,    Imperforate Bowl:  Centrifugal Separators, subclass 37 for a
    process of that class and see the reference to that class appearing in (3)
    Note of the definition of this class (34).


CLS 34/313
TXT Continuous processing:

    Process under 312 wherein the material treated enters and exits the
    centrifugal force applying means without interruption of the centrifugal
    action on the material.


CLS 34/314
TXT With centrifugal spraying of the treated material:

    Process under 313 wherein the material treated is a suspension or slurry
    injected into a treatment zone in a manner such that solids within the
    dispersed material are separated from a carrier liquid by the action of
    centrifugal force.


CLS 34/315
TXT With heating:

    Process under subclass 313 wherein an increase in temperature is provided
    in the treating process.


CLS 34/316
TXT With recirculation of treated material:

    Process under subclass 313 wherein a portion of the entire stream of
    treated material is directed back into the treatment zone after exiting the
    treatment zone.


CLS 34/317
TXT With carrier for thin discrete article:

    Process under subclass 312 wherein a thin substrate-type article is
    supported in a device that holds individual or a plurality of articles
    while being subjected to centrifugal force.


CLS 34/318
TXT Rotating drum or basket:

    Process under subclass 312 wherein a vessel containing the treated material
    is a revolvable container that subjects the material undergoing treatment
    to centrifugal force as a result of its revolving.


CLS 34/319
TXT Variable speed:

    Process under subclass 318 wherein the velocity of rotation of the vessel
    containing the treated material is changed during treatment.

    (1)     Note.  The variable speed set forth in this subclass definition
    does not include the speed variations that occur during the activation or
    deactivation of the means causing the rotation of the rotatable vessel.


CLS 34/320
TXT With pressurized atmosphere:

    Process under subclass 318 wherein the pressure within the treating vessel
    is maintained above atmospheric pressure for a portion of or the entire
    treating process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    325,    for pressurized treatment without the application of centrifugal
    force in a rotatable vessel.


CLS 34/321
TXT Including heating:

    Process under subclass 318 wherein an increase in temperature is applied to
    the treated material.


CLS 34/322
TXT Foraminous basket:

    Process under subclass 318 wherein the vessel holding the treated material
    has a plurality of openings in its wall members that permit the flow of
    liquid or gas or vapor yet hold the treated material within the vessel.


CLS 34/323
TXT With fluidizing of treated material:

    Process under subclass 322 including liquefying the treated material during
    the treating process.


CLS 34/324
TXT With inert atmosphere:

    Process under subclass 318 wherein a gas or vapor or mixture of gas or
    vapor other than air alone is supplied to the rotatable vessel and the gas
    or vapor or mixture is not chemically reactive with the treated material.


CLS 34/325
TXT With pressurized atmosphere:

    Process under subclass 312 wherein the pressure within the treating zone is
    above atmospheric.


CLS 34/326
TXT Rotating gas or vapor stream:

    Process under subclass 312 wherein the treated material is conveyed by a
    revolving gas or vapor current such that the material is subjected to
    centrifugal force.


CLS 34/327
TXT With heating:

    Process under subclass 326 wherein an increase in temperature is supplied
    to the treating process.


CLS 34/328
TXT With additional conveying means:

    Process under subclass 312 wherein the treated material is subjected to a
    means for transporting other than the transporting means applied to the
    treated material that causes the material to be subjected to centrifugal
    force.


CLS 34/329
TXT With contacting of material treated with solid or liquid agent:

    Process under subclass 282 involving contacting the treated material with
    either a liquid or solid to promote drying or fluid cooling operation of
    the treated material but not merely to cause motion of or apply mechanical
    pressure to the material undergoing treatment.

    (1)     Note.  The drying operation on the treated material is usually by
    absorption, adsorption, or adhesion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     94, and 95, for corresponding apparatus for contacting material
    undergoing treatment with solids.

    306,    for spacer sheets and webs.

    307,    for the shielding or retarding of drying by the application of
    solid material to the material undergoing treatment or the use of a surface
    coating on the treated material.

    376,    for recirculation of the material undergoing treatment, including
    the adding of material to be treated to the recirculated treated material.

    397,    for expressing or other mechanical liquid removal combined with
    drying.

    402+    and 414+, for passing material through a liquid seal.

    443+,   for a process including contact of the material with gases and
    vapors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, for a process of cleaning
    combined with drying and for a process of cleaning, per se, even though the
    cleaning is by gas or vapor contact with solids. Class 34 has drying, per
    se, regardless of the operations used.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclasses 10+ for a
    thermolytic distillation process involving contacting the material
    undergoing treatment with a hot liquid or solid.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, subclasses 110 and 705 for
    extraction.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 255+ for dissolving, extracting, or
    bleaching apparatus.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, for a process directed to
    extracting, leaching, or dissolving therein provided for, and subclass
    658.5 for extracting, leaching, or a dissolving process not elsewhere
    provided for.

    427,    Coating Processes, for a process of applying a liquid to a
    substrate to form a coating.


CLS 34/330
TXT With regeneration or removal of treating agent:

    Process under subclass 329 wherein the solid or liquid treating agent added
    to the material is treated itself to renew its capacity to treat the
    material or is removed from the treatment process after use.


CLS 34/331
TXT Treating agent consists of both solid and liquid:

    Process under subclass 330 wherein the treating agent has both solid and
    liquid constituents.


CLS 34/332
TXT Treating agent is a solid:

    Process under subclass 330 wherein the treating agent is a solid material
    that collects moisture from the treated material.


CLS 34/333
TXT With treating of solid material:

    Process under subclass 332 wherein the treated material is a solid material.


CLS 34/334
TXT With treating of suspension or slurry:

    Process under subclass 332 wherein the material treated is a flowable
    mixture of solid particles dispersed in a liquid.


CLS 34/335
TXT Using absorbent band or belt:

    Process under subclass 332 wherein moisture is soaked up by a blotting
    ribbon or strap of material contacting the material being treated.


CLS 34/336
TXT Using absorbent roller:

    Process under subclass 332 wherein moisture is soaked up by a blotting
    cylinder contacting the treated material.


CLS 34/337
TXT Treating agent is a liquid:

    Process under subclass 330 wherein the treating agent is a liquid.


CLS 34/338
TXT With treatment of suspension or slurry:

    Process under subclass 337 wherein the material treated is a mixture of
    solid particles dispersed in a liquid.


CLS 34/339
TXT With treatment of solid material:

    Process under subclass 337 wherein the material treated is a solid material.


CLS 34/340
TXT Treating liquid displaces moisture:

    Process under subclass 339 wherein the liquid treating agent replaces
    moisture in the material by the action of the treating liquid supplanting
    the moisture.


    (1)     Note.  Normally, additional treatment is necessary to remove the
    treating liquid from the treated material after displacement of the
    moisturizing fluid.


CLS 34/341
TXT Treating liquid absorbs moisture:

    Process under subclass 339 wherein the moisture is removed from the treated
    material by the action of the moisture being drawn into the treating liquid.


CLS 34/342
TXT Using multiple treating liquids:

    Process under subclass 339 wherein more than one treating liquid is applied
    to the treated material.


CLS 34/343
TXT With addition of heat to drying process:

    Process under subclass 329 wherein external heat is added to the drying
    process to increase the drying action of the treated material.

    (1)     Note.  The heat added during this process is primarily added for
    the purpose of enhancing the interaction between the solid or liquid agent
    and the material treated, with the ultimate purpose of increasing the rate
    of the drying process.


CLS 34/344
TXT Treating agent consists of both solid and liquid:

    Process under subclass 343 wherein the treating liquid has both solid and
    liquid constituents.


CLS 34/345
TXT Treating agent is a solid:

    Process under subclass 343 wherein the treating agent is a solid material
    that collects moisture from the treated material.


CLS 34/346
TXT Solid treating agent treats same material:

    Process under subclass 345 wherein the solid treating agent is a solid
    dehydrated form of the treated material.


CLS 34/347
TXT Treating of suspension or slurry:

    Process under subclass 345 wherein the treated material is a mixture of
    solid particles dispersed in a liquid.


CLS 34/348
TXT Treating agent is a liquid:

    Process under subclass 343 wherein the treating agent is a liquid that
    removes moisture from the treated material without the addition of external
    heat.


CLS 34/349
TXT Treating suspension or slurry:

    Process under subclass 348 wherein the treated material is a mixture of
    solid particles dispersed in a liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, for concentrating slurries, suspensions,
    or solutions without the addition of a treating agent or cooling.


CLS 34/350
TXT Treating solid material:

    Process under subclass 348 wherein the treated material is a solid.


CLS 34/351
TXT Treating agent displaces moisture:

    Process under subclass 350 wherein the liquid treating agent replaces
    moisture in the material by action of the treating liquid supplanting the
    moisture.


CLS 34/352
TXT Treating agent absorbs moisture:

    Process under subclass 350 wherein the liquid treating agent assimilates
    moisture from the treated material.


CLS 34/353
TXT Solid treating agent treats solid material:

    Process under subclass 329 wherein the treating agent is a solid material
    and the treated material is also a solid material.

    (1)     Note.  Solid treated material here differs from the mixture of
    solids and liquids treated that are found in subclass 356.


CLS 34/354
TXT Using agitation or mixing:

    Process under subclass 353 wherein the treating agent and the treated
    material are subjected to churning or stirring.


CLS 34/355
TXT Using absorbent band or belt:

    Process under subclass 353 wherein moisture is blotted up by a ribbon or
    strap of material that contacts the treated material.


CLS 34/356
TXT Solid treating agent treats suspension or slurry:

    Process under subclass 329 wherein the treated material is a mixture of
    solid particles dispersed in a liquid and the treating agent is a solid
    material.


CLS 34/357
TXT Liquid treating agent treats solid material:

    Process under subclass 329 wherein a liquid treating agent contacts a
    treated material that is a solid material.


CLS 34/358
TXT Treating agent absorbs moisture:

    Process under subclass 357 wherein the liquid treating agent assimilates
    the moisture.


CLS 34/359
TXT With fluid current conveying or suspension of treated material:

    Process under subclass 282 in which the treated material is moved or buoyed
    up by a gas or vapor flow during treating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    443,    for a process for contacting material with gas or vapor that does
    not suspend the material.

    444,    for a process for conveying a sheet, web, or strand and 640 for
    apparatus for conveying a sheet, web, or strand.

    576,    for fluid current conveying.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclass 31 for a process of
    thermolytic distillation in which the material being treated is held
    suspended by a gas or vapor.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, and see the search
    notes in this class (34) for the line between these classes.

    432,    Heating, subclass 15 for a process of heating particulate work
    including the maintenance of a fluidized bed.


CLS 34/360
TXT Suspension of treated material:

    Process under subclass 359 wherein the gas or vapor supplied to the treated
    material primarily buoys up the treated material.


CLS 34/361
TXT Including applying vacuum:

    Process under subclass 360 wherein the material treated is subjected to
    subatmospheric pressure while the material is suspended.

    (1)     Note.  This treatment will normally be carried out in a closed or
    sealed chamber to maintain the subatmospheric environment.


CLS 34/362
TXT Including pressurizing atmosphere:

    Process under subclass 360 wherein the treated material is subjected to
    pressure above atmospheric during treatment.

    (1)     Note.  This treatment will normally be carried out in a closed or
    sealed chamber to maintain the pressurized environment.


CLS 34/363
TXT With additional heat exchange:

    Process under subclass 360 wherein the treated material is subjected to
    supplementary heat transfer other than that supplied by the vapor or gas
    used for suspending the treated material.


CLS 34/364
TXT Including gas or vapor flow variation:

    Process under subclass 360 wherein the rate of the gas or vapor flow is
    controlled to change during the processing of the treated material.


CLS 34/365
TXT Pulsed flow:

    Process under subclass 364 wherein the gas or vapor is controlled to be
    discharged in short, distinct, timed bursts of gas onto the treated
    material.


CLS 34/366
TXT Including downward impinging fluid flow:

    Subject matter under subclass 360 wherein the suspending current of the gas
    or vapor is directed to the upper surface of the treated material.


CLS 34/367
TXT With additional conveying:

    Process under subclass 360 combined with use of a means for transporting
    the treated material other than the suspending current.


CLS 34/368
TXT Including agitating or comminuting of treated material:

    Process under subclass 360 wherein the treated material is mixed or
    pulverized by a means other than the suspending current.


CLS 34/369
TXT Including baffle or deflector to adjust material flow:

    Process under subclass 360 wherein the flow of the treated material is
    controlled by a variable or fixed obstruction to the flow path of the
    treated material.


CLS 34/370
TXT With plural treating zones:

    Process under subclass 360 wherein the treated material is subjected to
    multiple suspension or fluidized treatments at different locations or the
    material is subjected to the combination of a suspension or fluidized
    treatment at one location and another gas or vapor treatment at a different
    location.


CLS 34/371
TXT Including material separators or sorters:

    Process under subclass 360 wherein means are provided to remove the treated
    material from other suspended material in the treating zone or combined
    with means provided to sort and classify the treated material.


CLS 34/372
TXT Spray drying and cooling of slurry or suspension:

    Process under subclass 359 wherein a mixture of particles dispersed in a
    liquid is directed through a nozzle to atomize the suspension or slurry for
    promoting intimate contact with drying gas or vapor stream that in addition
    to drying the suspension or slurry reduces the temperature of the
    suspension or slurry.

    (1)     Note.  It is essential that the suspension or slurry undergoes
    cooling to be placed here. If the suspension or slurry is heated during the
    drying process then the subject matter should go in Class 159,
    Concentrating Evaporators.


CLS 34/373
TXT With contact with additional gas or vapor flow:

    Process under subclass 372 wherein a first gas or vapor is used to convey
    the suspension or slurry through an atomizing nozzle and a second gas or
    vapor is used to dry the resulting atomized solid-liquid stream.


CLS 34/374
TXT Additional flow is countercurrent:

    Process under subclass 373 wherein the additional gas or vapor flow is
    directed either totally or partially against the direction of flow of the
    atomized solid-liquid stream.


CLS 34/375
TXT Having embedded loop circulation of treated material:

    Process under subclass 359 wherein a portion or the entire body of the
    treated material is conveyed by way of a treating gas or vapor in a
    complete circle.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 376, where the material is caused to
    recirculate without the assistance of a conveying fluid stream.


CLS 34/376
TXT With treated material recirculation:

    Process under subclass 282 wherein the treated material after undergoing
    initial treatment is conveyed back to the same source for treatment.


CLS 34/377
TXT Recirculation of a portion of the treated material:

    Process under subclass 376 wherein only a segment of the treated material
    is returned to the initial source for further treatment.


CLS 34/378
TXT With additional treating of recirculated portion (e.g., heating, cooling,
    separating):

    Process under subclass 377 wherein an extra drying or nondrying treatment
    is applied to the portion of the treated material that is recirculated
    before the material is returned to the initial treatment source.


CLS 34/379
TXT Recirculated portion mixed with untreated material:

    Process under subclass 377 wherein the recirculated portion of treated
    material is mixed with material not yet treated.


CLS 34/380
TXT With nondrying treating of material:

    Process under subclass 282 wherein in addition to the primary drying or gas
    or vapor contact with the treated material there is an additional treating
    applied other than drying.

    (1)     Note.  Steps for moving, feeding, discharging, agitating, piling,
    arranging, or controlling the thickness of the material have been treated
    as incidents to drying or gas and vapor contact operations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    428,    for cooling the material by contact by gas or vapor.

    443+,   for a process wherein the gas or vapor contacts the material
    multiple times, even though the contacting gas or vapor moisture content is
    varied for the purpose of controlling the moisture content of the material
    undergoing treatment.


CLS 34/381
TXT Nondrying treating precedes drying:

    Process under subclass 380 wherein the nondrying treating takes place prior
    to the drying or gas or vapor contact with the treated material.


CLS 34/382
TXT Material shaping:

    Process under subclass 381 wherein the nondrying treating consists of
    forming the treated material into pellets or treating the material to
    granulate it.


CLS 34/383
TXT Puncturing or incising of treated material:

    Process under subclass 381 wherein the treated material is subjected to
    piercing or scoring for the purpose of promoting the drying process.


CLS 34/384
TXT Grinding or comminuting:

    Process under subclass 381 wherein the treated material is subjected to
    crushing to promote the drying process.


CLS 34/385
TXT Material shaping:

    Process under subclass 380 wherein the nondrying treating consists of
    forming the material into pellets or treating the material in order to
    granulate it.


CLS 34/386
TXT Mixing or grinding:

    Process under subclass 380 wherein the nondrying treating consists of
    stirring or crushing the treated material.


CLS 34/387
TXT Shearing or comminuting:

    Process under subclass 380 wherein the nondrying treating consists of
    shearing or deagglomerating the treated material.


CLS 34/388
TXT Compacting or restraining:

    Process under subclass 380 wherein the treated material is subjected to a
    force that compresses the material without expressing moisture or applying
    physical means to prevent the treated material from changing shape or form
    during treating.


CLS 34/389
TXT Adding of nondrying treating substance:

    Process under subclass 380 wherein a non-chemically reactive substance is
    added to the treated material where the added substance does not promote
    the removal of moisture from the treated material but does affect the
    physical nature of the treated material or the manner in which the drying
    operation is carried out.

    (1)     Note.  Some examples of the addition of nondrying treating
    substances could be the addition of saturated steam added to a wood drying
    process to encourage uniform drying of the wood, the addition of an inert
    gas to a drying process for the purpose of preventing combustion of the
    treated material, addition of a fabric softener to the drying process for
    clothes, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310,    for shielding the treated material by application of a transient
    coating.


CLS 34/390
TXT Deodorizer:

    Process under subclass 389 wherein the nondrying treating substance
    functions to absorb or displace odors in the treated material.


CLS 34/391
TXT Cooling of treated material:

    Process under subclass 380 wherein the temperature of the treated material
    is reduced.


CLS 34/392
TXT Contacting material with cooling drum or roller:

    Process under subclass 391 wherein the temperature of the treated material
    is reduced by physically touching the material with a cylinder or barrel
    having a reduced temperature.


CLS 34/393
TXT Contacting material with cooling fluid:

    Process under subclass 391 wherein the treated material is contacted by a
    fluid having a lower temperature than the treated material.

    (1)     Note.  Fluid applied should be for cooling the material without
    adding moisture that would have to be removed by the drying process.


CLS 34/394
TXT Cooling fluid drawn through material treated:

    Process under subclass 393 wherein the cooling fluid is pulled through the
    treated material by suction.


CLS 34/395
TXT Cooling fluid is ambient air:

    Process under subclass 393 wherein the cooling fluid is encircling air.


CLS 34/396
TXT Treated material is wood:

    Process under subclass 393 wherein the treated material is wood.


CLS 34/397
TXT Mechanical liquid removal:

    Process under subclass 282 involving the removal of liquid from solids
    mechanically (i.e., by an operation other than heating or gas or vapor
    contact).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69+,    and see the notes thereto.

    397+,   for other mechanical liquid removal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, for expressing and see the reference to Class 100 in (3)
    Note of the main class definition of this class (34) for the line between
    classes.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, for decanting or filtering and
    see the reference to Class 210 in (3) Note of the class definition of this
    class (34) for the line between classes.


CLS 34/398
TXT Using compression:

    Process under subclass 397 wherein mechanical force is applied to compact
    the treated material, which results in the removal of moisture.

    (1)     Note.  When centrifugal force is applied for removal of moisture
    proper placement is in subclasses 312+.


CLS 34/399
TXT Expressing liquid by use of roller:

    Process under subclass 398 wherein a cylinder contacts the treated material
    to create the compressive forces within the material to cause the removal
    of moisture.


CLS 34/400
TXT Expressing liquid by moving treated material through restriction:

    Process under subclass 398 wherein the treated material is forced through a
    narrow passage in its path of flow, which creates compressive forces in the
    material that causes liquid to be removed from the material.


CLS 34/401
TXT Using vibration:

    Process under subclass 397 wherein the treated material is subjected to
    mechanical reverberation to remove moisture from the treated material.


CLS 34/402
TXT Gas or vapor pressure varies during treatment:

    Process under subclass 282 wherein treated material is subjected to a gas
    or vapor whose treatment pressure is maintained at multiple levels in at
    least one closed treatment vessel during treating or the pressure is
    changed in a continuous or discontinuous manner during the treating process.

    (1)     Note.  Varying of pressure does not include the change in treating
    pressure as a result of starting up or shutting down the gas or vapor
    treating process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284+,   for a process including freezing by application of a vacuum plus
    other treating.

    329+,   for other liquid contact processes.


CLS 34/403
TXT Including subatmospheric pressure:

    Process under subclass 402 wherein the treated material is subjected to a
    below-atmospheric pressure during treating.

    (1)     Note.  If subject matter is directed to freezing of treated
    material by vacuum, then the subject matter should be placed in subclasses
    87+.


CLS 34/404
TXT With addition of treating agent:

    Process under subclass 403 wherein a substance is applied to the treated
    material or the gas or vapor contacting the material for regulating or
    promoting the treating material.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of such treating agents would be steam, inert
    gases, liquids that are evaporated during treating, or any combination of
    such agents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329+,   for the application of a liquid or solid for the express purpose of
    drying.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, for a chemical reaction between the treated
    material and the treating agent.


CLS 34/405
TXT Including superatmospheric pressure:

    Process under subclass 402 wherein the treated material is subjected to an
    above-atmospheric pressure during treating.


CLS 34/406
TXT Gas or vapor pressure is subatmospheric:

    Process under subclass 282 wherein the treated material is subjected to a
    constant below-atmospheric pressure in at least one treating vessel during
    treating.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass differs from subclass 403 in that subclass 403
    has a variable pressure level, where the pressure levels in this subclass
    are constant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87+,    for freezing of treated material by vacuum.


CLS 34/407
TXT With condensation of vapor:

    Process under subclass 406 wherein moisture is removed from the treating
    vapor during the treating process.


CLS 34/408
TXT With heating:

    Process under subclass 407 wherein the temperature of the treated material
    or the treating vapor increases.


CLS 34/409
TXT Including addition of treating agent:

    Process under subclass 406 wherein a modifying agent is added to the
    treating process to regulate or promote the treating of the material
    without a chemical reaction.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 404 for a definition of a treating agent.


CLS 34/410
TXT Treating agent is inert gas:

    Process under subclass 409 wherein the treating agent used is a chemically
    nonreactive gas such as nitrogen, argon, helium, etc.


CLS 34/411
TXT Treating agent is steam:

    Process under subclass 409 wherein the treating agent is steam added to the
    treating gas or vapor.


CLS 34/412
TXT With heating:

    Process under subclass 406 wherein the treated material or the treating gas
    or vapor has its temperature increase.


CLS 34/413
TXT Gas or vapor pressure is superatmospheric:

    Process under subclass 282 wherein the treated material is subjected to a
    constant pressure above atmospheric in at least one closed treating vessel.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note in subclass 406.


CLS 34/414
TXT Sheet, web, or strand:

    Process under subclass 413 wherein the treated material is a broad, thin,
    rectangular piece or a cord or running-length member.


CLS 34/415
TXT Including addition of treating agent:

    Process under subclass 413 wherein a modifying agent is applied to the
    treated material or the treating gas or vapor to regulate or promote the
    treating of the material without a resulting chemical reaction.


CLS 34/416
TXT Contacting gas or vapor with solid sorbent to store gas or vapor:

    Process under subclass 282 wherein gas or vapor under the influence of
    pressure or vacuum is absorbed by a material that has an affinity for the
    gas or vapor, such as a hydride.


CLS 34/417
TXT With sealing of treating chamber:

    Process under subclass 282 using a fluid to close off the treating chamber
    from the atmosphere.


CLS 34/418
TXT Diverse types of drying operations:

    Process under subclass 282 in which two or more distinct drying operations
    are used.

    (1)     Note.  Where a plurality of drying operations of the same type are
    employed, the patent is in the appropriate succeeding subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     to complete the search for the apparatus.

    443,    for the application of a flame to the material.

    498,    for agitation or other motion of the treated material.

    516     and 517, for sequential treatment of material with diverse gases or
    vapors.


CLS 34/419
TXT Sheet, web, or strand:

    Process under subclass 418 wherein the material is a broad, thin,
    rectangular piece or a cord or running-length member.


CLS 34/420
TXT Including radiation or convection treatment:

    Process under subclass 419 wherein the diverse types of drying operations
    include at least radiation or direct contact with a heated surface where
    the radiation treatment is infrared.


CLS 34/421
TXT Running length:

    Process under subclass 420 wherein the treated material is conveyed through
    a treating zone as a continuous length.


CLS 34/422
TXT Running length:

    Process under subclass 419 wherein the treated material is conveyed through
    a treating zone as a continuous length.


CLS 34/423
TXT Sequential drying treatments:

    Process under subclass 418 wherein multiple drying operations are applied
    individually and in a specific order.


CLS 34/424
TXT Of slurry or suspension:

    Process under subclass 423 wherein the treated material is a mixture of
    solid particles dispersed in a liquid.


CLS 34/425
TXT Using rotating drum:

    Process under subclass 423 wherein at least one of the diverse drying
    treatments uses a revolving cylinder.


CLS 34/426
TXT Plural treatments at same location:

    Process under subclass 418 wherein the diverse drying operations are
    applied to the treated material at the identical location.


CLS 34/427
TXT Combined:

    Process under subclass 282 in which there is combined with the material
    drying or gas or vapor contact process a process step or steps of some
    other kind, not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  The material drying or gas or vapor contact process includes
    the treatment of the gas or vapor used or evolved.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85      through 90, for corresponding apparatus combinations.

    513,    for processes involving the treatment of the material with a gas or
    vapor and the conservation of heat during the process.


CLS 34/428
TXT Cooling by gas or vapor contact:

    Process under subclass 282 wherein the temperature of the treated material
    is lowered by passing a gas or vapor in contact with the material.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus for cooling only by contacting a gas or vapor with
    the material is classified in the appropriate apparatus subclass below and
    cross-referenced here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    391     and apparatus subclasses 6+, for cooling combined with drying.

    402,    for cooling by application of a vacuum.


CLS 34/429
TXT Including conveyor:

    Process under subclass 428 wherein the material is moved through a cooling
    zone by a transporting means.


CLS 34/430
TXT Gas or vapor flow to top and bottom of treated material:

    Process under subclass 429 wherein gas or vapor is directed to upper and
    lower surfaces of conveyed, treated material.


CLS 34/431
TXT Gas or vapor flow to bottom of treated material:

    Process under subclass 429 wherein gas or vapor is directed to the lower
    surface of conveyed, treated material.


CLS 34/432
TXT Gas or vapor flow concurrent or countercurrent to treated material flow:

    Process under subclass 429 wherein the treating gas or vapor is directed in
    a parallel path flowing in the same direction as the treated material, or
    is directed in a parallel path flowing in the opposite direction of the
    treated material.


CLS 34/433
TXT Gas or vapor flow to top and bottom of treated material:

    Process under subclass 428 wherein the gas or vapor is directed to upper
    and lower surfaces of treated material.


CLS 34/434
TXT Gas or vapor flow to bottom of treated material:

    Process under subclass 428 wherein gas or vapor is directed to the lower
    surface of treated material.


CLS 34/435
TXT Gas or vapor flow concurrent or countercurrent to treated material flow:

    Process under subclass 428 wherein the treating gas or vapor is directed in
    a parallel path flowing in the same direction as the treated material, or
    is directed in a parallel path flowing in the opposite direction of the
    treated material.


CLS 34/436
TXT Gravity flow of treated material:

    Process under subclass 435 wherein the motion of the treated material is
    due entirely to the effects of gravity.


CLS 34/437
TXT Treating hollow article:

    Process under subclass 282 wherein the treated article has an empty space
    in its interior.


CLS 34/438
TXT Having conveyor:

    Process under subclass 437 wherein the hollow article is moved through a
    treating zone by a transporting means.


CLS 34/439
TXT Treating fluid directed to interior and exterior of hollow article:

    Process under subclass 437 wherein the treating fluid is directed to the
    inside and outside of the hollow article.


CLS 34/440
TXT With specific support for hollow article:

    Process under subclass 437 wherein the hollow article is mounted on a
    specialized brace during treating.


CLS 34/441
TXT Support surrounds hollow article:

    Process under subclass 440 wherein the exterior of the hollow article is
    encompassed by the support.


CLS 34/442
TXT Form-supported treated article:

    Process under subclass 282 wherein the treated article is held on supports
    that have the configuration of the treated article.


CLS 34/443
TXT Gas or vapor contact with treated material:

    Process under subclass 282 in which the material is treated with a gas or
    vapor that may or may not be heated.

    (1)     Note.  Treatment by a flame or combustion product is in this
    subclass or the indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402,    for a process including vacuum, gas, or vapor pressure varying or
    control or fluid sealing.

    418,    for treating with a gas or vapor either heated or unheated in
    combination with heating of the material or in combination with any other
    diverse treatment or the material itself.

    511+,   for a process that merely supports the material in the air and lets
    nature take its course.


CLS 34/444
TXT Sheet, web, or strand:

    Process under subclass 443 wherein the treated material is a broad, thin,
    rectangular piece or a cord or running-length member.


CLS 34/445
TXT With drying parameter control:

    Process under subclass 444 wherein gas or vapor conditions that influence
    the drying processes are regulated or varied.


CLS 34/446
TXT Temperature or moisture control of material treated or treating gas or
    vapor:

    Process under subclass 445 wherein the temperature or humidity of the
    treating gas or vapor or the treated material is regulated.


CLS 34/447
TXT Material speed control:

    Process under subclass 445 wherein the velocity of the treated material is
    regulated during treating.


CLS 34/448
TXT Vapor or gas treatment:

    Process under subclass 444 having any one or a combination of (a) the use
    of gases having different degrees of vapor concentration; (b) changing or
    maintaining constant the vapor concentration by adding or removing gases or
    vapors; (c) adding any characteristic of material to or removing any
    characteristic of material from the treating gas or vapor.


CLS 34/449
TXT Condensation of gas or vapor:

    Process under subclass 448 wherein the treating gas or vapor is treated to
    cause the condensation of the treating gas or vapor or any constituent
    thereof.


CLS 34/450
TXT Combustion of gas or vapor:

    Process under subclass 448 wherein the treating gas or vapor undergoes
    burning during the treating process.


CLS 34/451
TXT Plural treating chambers:

    Process under subclass 444 wherein the treated material is treated in more
    than one gas or vapor treating chamber.


CLS 34/452
TXT Gas or vapor drawn through treated material:

    Process under subclass 444 wherein the treating gas or vapor is pulled from
    one side of the material to the other side of the material.


CLS 34/453
TXT Using vacuum roller:

    Process under subclass 452 wherein the sheet, web, or strand is transported
    over a cylinder having a vacuum inside that draws the gas or vapor through
    the material.


CLS 34/454
TXT With contact with heat exchanger (e.g., drum or roller):

    Process under subclass 444 wherein the treated material directly touches a
    heat removing device, such as a barrel or a cylinder.


CLS 34/455
TXT Pocket ventilator:

    Process under subclass 452 wherein a loop formed by the web between
    adjacent drying or web guiding devices is subjected to an aerating flow of
    gas or vapor into or out of a pocket.


CLS 34/456
TXT Vacuum causes web to contact wire or felt:

    Process under subclass 455 wherein ventilation of the pocket creates a
    vacuum that causes the treated web to be urged into contact with or
    increases the contact pressure between the web and its supporting wire or
    felt.


CLS 34/457
TXT With guide roller:

    Process under subclass 455 wherein a cylinder contacts the web being
    treated primarily for the purpose of directing the treated web through a
    series of treating drums.

    (1)     Note.  It is possible to have heat exchange or vapor contact with
    the web by contact with a guide roller. However, this function would be
    secondary to its intended purpose of directing the web through the major
    treatment drums.


CLS 34/458
TXT With vacuum guide roller:

    Process under subclass 452 wherein a cylinder whose surface is subjected to
    a vacuum contacts the web being treated primarily for the purpose of
    directing the web through a series of treating drums.


CLS 34/459
TXT Running length of treated material:

    Process under subclass 444 wherein a sheet, web, or strand is conveyed
    through a treating zone in a continuous manner without a designed physical
    separation in the length of the treated material.


CLS 34/460
TXT Gas or vapor suspends treated material:

    Process under subclass 459 wherein the sheet, web, or strand is conveyed on
    a cushion of gas or vapor.


CLS 34/461
TXT Gas or vapor directed to opposed surfaces of material:

    Process under subclass 460 wherein the supporting gas or vapor stream is
    directed to surfaces that are directly opposite each other.


CLS 34/462
TXT With spacing or coiling:

    Process under subclass 459 wherein the sheet, web, or strand is held in
    spaced relation such as loops or successive passes to facilitate the
    circulation of a gas or vapor, or is treated while rolled or coiled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306,    for a process involving spacer sheet or web.

    437,    where the sheet, web, or strand is in the form of a hollow article
    (e.g., is coiled or rolled so as to form a cake or bobbin) and is treated
    or handled as a hollow article.

    518,    for piling or arranging material other than a sheet or web.


CLS 34/463
TXT Directing of gas or vapor:

    Process under subclass 459 wherein the location of application of the
    treating gas or vapor is controlled.


CLS 34/464
TXT Gas or vapor directed to opposed surfaces of material:

    Process under subclass 463 wherein the treating gas or vapor is directed to
    surfaces of the material that are directly opposite each other.


CLS 34/465
TXT Gas or vapor directed to single surface of material:

    Process under subclass 463 wherein the gas or vapor is directed to only one
    surface of the treated material.


CLS 34/466
TXT With spacing, coiling, or rolling:

    Process under subclass 444 wherein the sheets or parts of webs or strands
    are held in spaced relation such as in loops or successive passes to
    facilitate the circulation of a gas or vapor, or are treated while rolled
    or coiled.


CLS 34/467
TXT Treatment of gas or vapor:

    Process under subclass 443 involving any one or a combination of:  (a) the
    use of gases having different degrees of vapor concentration regardless of
    how obtained; (b) changing or maintaining constant the vapor concentration
    by adding or removing gas or vapors; (c) adding any characteristic of
    material to or removing any characteristic of material from the treating
    gas or vapor.

    (1)     Note.  Dry steam is treated as a gas.

    (2)     Note.  Since the contact of a gas or vapor with material to be
    dried is for the purpose of removing liquids from the material with
    necessary increase in concentration, and heating necessarily decreases the
    vapor concentration, the vapor concentration control or varying must be
    from other causes.

    (3)     Note.  The removal of materials from the gases or vapors after
    discharge from the treating zone is included here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    516     and 517, for mere sequential treatment with gases or vapors without
    treating the gas or vapors.


CLS 34/468
TXT Condensation of gas or vapor:

    Process under subclass 467 wherein the treating gas or vapor undergoes a
    change from gas or vapor to liquid during the treating of a material.


CLS 34/469
TXT Collecting of condensed gas or vapor:

    Process under subclass 468 wherein the condensate from the treating gas or
    vapor is directed to a means to store the condensate as a product or reuse
    in the treating process.


CLS 34/470
TXT With vaporization of condensed gas or vapor:

    Process under subclass 469 wherein the collected condensate is revaporized
    for reuse as a treating gas or vapor.


CLS 34/471
TXT Regulating temperature of gas or vapor:

    Process under subclass 468 involving any combination of:  (a) using a gas
    or vapor at particular temperatures; (b) employing a step or steps to
    maintain particular temperatures; (c) employing a plurality of different
    temperatures of either the same or different gas or vapor treating media;
    (d) heating the gas or vapor a plurality of times.

    (1)     Note.  Mere specification that the gas is heated or the mere step
    of heating does not cause classification here; see appropriate subclass
    below.

    (2)     Note.  Since hot gases or vapors contacting cooler material are
    necessarily cooled, the statement of such fact does not cause
    classification here. The different temperatures must be the temperatures
    before contact.


CLS 34/472
TXT Absorption/adsorption of gas or vapor released from treated material:

    Process under subclass 467 wherein the treating gas or vapor or
    constituents within the treating gas or vapor are drawn into and collected
    in a material that has an affinity for the treating gas or vapor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80      and 81, for apparatus that use absorption/adsorption for treating
    gas or vapor.


CLS 34/473
TXT Regeneration of absorption/adsorption material:

    Process under subclass 472 wherein the collected gas or vapor is removed
    from the collecting material.


CLS 34/474
TXT Gas or vapor humidity regulation:

    Process under subclass 467 wherein the percentage of moisture within the
    treating gas is controlled.


CLS 34/475
TXT And gas or vapor temperature regulation:

    Process under subclass 474 wherein the temperature of the treating gas or
    vapor is controlled.


CLS 34/476
TXT Gas or vapor temperature regulation:

    Process under subclass 467 wherein the temperature of the treating gas or
    vapor is controlled.


CLS 34/477
TXT With recirculation of gas or vapor:

    Process under subclass 476 wherein the treating gas or vapor after
    contacting the treated material is brought back into contact with the
    material to treat the material at least one more time.


CLS 34/478
TXT Combustion of gas or vapor:

    Process under subclass 467 wherein the treating gas or vapor is subjected
    to burning after contacting the treated material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    443,    for the production of treating gas by combustion of a fuel gas.


CLS 34/479
TXT Combusted gas or vapor recirculated to treating chamber:

    Process under subclass 478 wherein the products of combustion from the
    burning of the treating gas or vapor are returned to the treating
    environment.


CLS 34/480
TXT Filtering of gas or vapor:

    Process under subclass 467 wherein the treating gas or vapor is directed
    through a purifying medium to remove or separate particulate matter from
    the treating gas or vapor.


CLS 34/481
TXT Material thickness controlled:

    Process under subclass 443 wherein the dimensions of a layer of treated
    material are regulated.


CLS 34/482
TXT Material speed or quantity controlled:

    Process under subclass 443 wherein the rate of motion or the amount of
    treated material is regulated.


CLS 34/483
TXT By moisture content of treated material:

    Process under subclass 482 wherein the percentage of moisture contained in
    the treated material regulates the speed or quantity of the treated
    material.


CLS 34/484
TXT And temperature of material or chamber:

    Process under subclass 483 wherein the temperature of the treated material
    or the temperature of a treating chamber regulates the speed or quantity of
    the treated material.


CLS 34/485
TXT By temperature of material or chamber:

    Process under subclass 482 wherein the temperature of the treated material
    or the temperature of a treating chamber regulates the speed or quantity of
    the treated material.


CLS 34/486
TXT Timing of application of gas or vapor to treated material based on drying
    variables:

    Process under subclass 443 wherein the amount of time that the treating gas
    or vapor is applied to the treated material is regulated as a result of (a)
    measurements of drying parameters; (b) comparison of drying parameters; (c)
    calculations based on drying parameters.

    (1)     Note.  Drying parameters are basically defined as those physical
    characteristics associated with the drying process whose variability
    directly or indirectly affect the rate of drying of a treated material.


CLS 34/487
TXT Gas or vapor flow directing or control:

    Process under subclass 443 wherein the location of application of the
    treating gas or vapor or the quantity of treating gas or vapor is regulated.


CLS 34/488
TXT Flow direction changes during treatment:

    Process under subclass 487 wherein the point of application of the treating
    gas or vapor is varied or changed during treatment.


CLS 34/489
TXT Reversible flow:

    Process under subclass 488 wherein the direction of flow of the treating
    gas or vapor onto the treated material is directed to flow substantially
    opposite to its initial flow direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191,    for apparatus using reversible gas or vapor flow.


CLS 34/490
TXT Timed control:

    Process under subclass 489 wherein the treating gas or vapor flow is
    reversed under the control or influence of a clock.


CLS 34/491
TXT Temperature or moisture content of treated material or chamber controls or
    directs gas or vapor:

    Process under subclass 487 wherein the temperature or humidity of the
    treated material affects the point of application of the treating gas or
    vapor.


CLS 34/492
TXT Gas or vapor flow varied during treatment:

    Process under subclass 487 wherein the amount of gas or vapor applied to
    the treated material is changed during the treating process.


CLS 34/493
TXT Temperature of treating gas or vapor controlled:

    Process under subclass 443 wherein the temperature of the treating gas or
    vapor is maintained or varied to desired levels.


CLS 34/494
TXT To prevent damage to material or system:

    Process under subclass 493 wherein the temperature of the treating gas or
    vapor is maintained at specified levels to prevent destruction to the
    treated material or the apparatus that constitutes the system.


CLS 34/495
TXT Temperature of gas or vapor regulated by other drying variables:

    Process under subclass 493 wherein the temperature of the gas or vapor is
    determined or controlled as a result of (a) measurements of drying
    parameters; (b) comparison of drying parameters; (c) calculations based on
    drying parameters.


CLS 34/496
TXT Multiple temperature levels of gas or vapor:

    Process under subclass 493 wherein the treating gas or vapor is maintained
    at several constant temperature levels during treatment.


CLS 34/497
TXT Temperature of treating chamber regulated:

    Process under subclass 443 wherein the temperature within the treating
    container is controlled.


CLS 34/498
TXT With treated material motion:

    Process under subclass 443 wherein the treated material is caused to have
    motion during treatment (a) relative to the support on which it rests, (b)
    relative to the enclosure in which it is located, or (c) the various parts
    of the material have motion relative to each other; such motion may be
    caused in any way, including the action of the gas or vapor.

    (1)     Note.  A car or conveyor that moves through the treating chamber is
    considered to cause the treated material motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359,    for gas or vapor current conveying or suspending the treated
    material.

    560,    for apparatus for automatic control of rate of material motion.


CLS 34/499
TXT Rotating drum:

    Process under subclass 498 wherein the material motion is produced by a
    revolving cylinder.


CLS 34/500
TXT With conveyor:

    Process under subclass 498 wherein the material is moved through a treating
    zone by a transporting means.


CLS 34/501
TXT Gas or vapor directed above and below material:

    Process under subclass 500 wherein gas or vapor is applied to the upper and
    lower surfaces of the treated material.


CLS 34/502
TXT Gas or vapor directed below material:

    Process under subclass 500 wherein gas or vapor is applied to the lower
    surface of the treated material.


CLS 34/503
TXT Concurrent gas or vapor flow:

    Process under subclass 498 wherein the direction of flow of the treating
    gas or vapor and the direction of movement of the treated material are the
    same.


CLS 34/504
TXT Countercurrent gas or vapor flow:

    Process under subclass 498 wherein the direction of flow of the treating
    gas or vapor and the direction of movement of the treated material are
    opposite to each other.


CLS 34/505
TXT Gravity flow of material:

    Process under subclass 504 wherein the treated material is conveyed through
    a treating zone by gravity-induced motion.


CLS 34/506
TXT Transverse flow of gas or vapor:

    Process under subclass 498 wherein the treating gas or vapor flows across
    the treated material perpendicular to the direction of travel of the
    material.


CLS 34/507
TXT Treating gas or vapor drawn through material:

    Process under subclass 443 wherein the treating gas or vapor flows through
    the treated material normally under the influence of a vacuum.


CLS 34/508
TXT Gas or vapor directed above and below treated material:

    Process under subclass 443 wherein the treating gas or vapor is directed to
    upper and lower surfaces of the treated material.


CLS 34/509
TXT Gas or vapor directed below treated material:

    Process under subclass 443 wherein the treating gas or vapor is directed to
    the lower surface of the treated material.


CLS 34/510
TXT Gas or vapor directed above treated material:

    Process under subclass 443 wherein the treating gas or vapor is directed to
    the upper surface of the treated material.


CLS 34/511
TXT Natural ambient air drying of material:

    Process under subclass 443 wherein the treated material is dried by
    exposure to the encircling air.


CLS 34/512
TXT Solar assisted:

    Process under subclass 511 wherein passive sun energy is applied to the
    treated material.


CLS 34/513
TXT Heat conserving:

    Process under subclass 443 including steps for preserving heat.

    (1)     Note.  This may be done in any way, as by exchanging heat between
    incoming and outgoing gas and vapor or by burning the discharged gas or
    vapor and using the evolved heat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86,     for apparatus for other modes of heat conservation, and see the
    notes there.

    427,    for other modes of heat conservation.


CLS 34/514
TXT Exhaust gas or vapor from treatment zone heats treating gas or vapor:

    Process under subclass 513 wherein the treating gas or vapor is heated by
    direct or indirect contact with dispelled gas from treating zone.


CLS 34/515
TXT Heat pump or recompression increases heating effect:

    Process under subclass 514 wherein a heat pump or a compressor is used to
    increase the energy level of the exhausted gas prior to its heat exchange
    with the treating gas or vapor entering the treating zone.


CLS 34/516
TXT Special gas or vapor:

    Process under subclass 443 in which a gas or vapor is used that is other
    than atmospheric air.

    (1)     Note.  Where there are sequential treatments by means of gas or
    vapor at least one treatment must be by a gas or vapor other than
    atmospheric air.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     for a special gas used with or generated by infrared energy.

    446+,   for treating the contact gas or vapor.


CLS 34/517
TXT Vapor:

    Process under subclass 516 in which a vapor is used.

    (1)     Note.  It may be used either in a sequence with a gas or alone.
    When used in sequence with a gas, the gas may be air.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402+,   for use of vapor under vacuum or superatmospheric pressure.


CLS 34/518
TXT Piling or arranging material treated:

    Process under subclass 443 directed to the piling, supporting, or arranging
    of the material treated in such a manner as to promote contact of the
    treating gas or vapor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclass 40 for a
    carbonizing process directed to the step of arranging the charge in the
    retort.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 8 for apparatus for placing
    articles in superposed abutment or in mutually sustaining relation in a
    horizontally extending row, or for shaping a formed group.

    432,    Heating, subclass 6 for a process of heating including stacking or
    aligning objects.


CLS 34/519
TXT Conductive heating:

    Process under subclass 282 wherein the treated material is dried by direct
    contact with a heated surface.


CLS 34/520
TXT Within drum:

    Process under subclass 519 wherein the treated material is enclosed within
    a cylinder structure for treatment.


CLS 34/521
TXT With evolved gas or vapor treatment:

    Process under subclass 519 wherein the gases generated during the
    conductive drying process are treated.


CLS 34/522
TXT Solar drying:

    Process under subclass 282 wherein energy from the sun is the primary
    source of energy to conduct the drying process.


CLS 34/523
TXT APPARATUS:

    Device under the class definition.


CLS 34/524
TXT With automatic control:

    Apparatus under subclass 523 combined with means to sense a condition or
    change of condition and cause a control operation, including timing means
    which is other than the drive means for the machine.

    (1)     Note.  The ``condition" sensed may be any condition or property of
    the material undergoing treatment, of the treating medium, or of the
    operation of the apparatus.

    (2)     Note.  Unless otherwise clearly indicated by title and definition,
    classification is on the basis of the condition controlled, and not the
    means employed or the condition sensed, for example, humidistatic means to
    control a heater is in subclass 557.

    (3)     Note.  For mere periodic sequential or other operation of the
    machine due to its drive mechanism or to manual intervention, see
    appropriate apparatus subclasses of this class, such as 87, 143+, and 191.

    (4)     Note.  Apparatus disclosed for all subject matter elsewhere
    classified in this class is appropriately cross-referenced except to
    subclasses 467+, which must be searched for complete search on treatment of
    gas or vapor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 335+ for hygrometers and
    hygrostats.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 200+ for an automatically controlled heat
    exchanger.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, for temperature and
    humidity responsive means and systems.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 2+ for an automatically controlled
    heating system.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclasses 98+ for a thermostatic switch.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 100+ for a thermometer.


CLS 34/525
TXT By web breaking:

    Apparatus under subclass 524 having means responsive to severing  a piece
    of material of indeterminate length.


CLS 34/526
TXT Of plural operations:

    Apparatus under subclass 524 in which two or more conditions or operations
    are controlled.

    (1)     Note.  The only exceptions are subclass 572, which has starting or
    stopping, and subclass 573, which has feeding or discharging.

    (2)     Note.  The patents in this subclass and the indented subclasses are
    cross-referenced to the appropriate subclass for single operations, except
    subject matter in subclasses 535+ is not cross-referenced into subclasses
    538+, 557, and 548.


CLS 34/527
TXT Of specific operational sequence:

    Apparatus under subclass 526 having means for causing a plurality of the
    same or different operations on the material to occur in proper order.

    (1)     Note.  For example, the operations may be measuring the material,
    feeding to the dryer or contact apparatus, applying the drying medium,
    discharging and cooling.


CLS 34/528
TXT Using specific moisture sensor structure:

    Apparatus under subclass 527 having the components of the means to
    determine the amount of liquid remaining in the material.


CLS 34/529
TXT With photoelectric device:

    Apparatus under subclass 527 combined with a means to provide a light and a
    means to sense the amount of light.


CLS 34/530
TXT With vacuum sensor:

    Apparatus under subclass 527 combined with a means to sense a reduced
    pressure in the treating apparatus.


CLS 34/531
TXT With threshold circuit device:

    Apparatus under subclass 527 combined with a component in a control circuit
    which becomes conductive only with the application of a certain minimum of
    electromotive force.


CLS 34/532
TXT Gaseous tube (e.g., neon):

    Apparatus under subclass 531 wherein the conductive element is a tube
    filled with a conducting gas.


CLS 34/533
TXT Silicon-controlled rectifier (SCR):

    Apparatus under subclass 531 wherein the conductive device is a
    silicon-controlled rectifier.


CLS 34/534
TXT With door switch:

    Apparatus under subclass 527 having an element that makes or breaks a
    control circuit that is mounted on the door of the apparatus.


CLS 34/535
TXT Having two of heater, contacting gas humidity, or gas mixing:

    Apparatus under subclass 526 in which at least two of, (a) the heating
    means, (b) humidity of the gas that contacts the material, or (c) mixing of
    at least two gases are controlled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    548,    for automatic control of air mixing only, even though the alleged
    result is temperature or contact gas humidity control.

    549+    and 556, for control of heater only.

    557,    for control of contacting gas humidity.


CLS 34/536
TXT With weight measuring means:

    Apparatus under subclass 535 wherein a means is provided to determine the
    heaviness of the object being acted upon.


CLS 34/537
TXT Having wet bulb and dry bulb thermometers:

    Apparatus under subclass 535 wherein wet bulb and dry bulb thermometers are
    used to determine relative humidity or dew point.


CLS 34/538
TXT With means to produce reduced or negative pressure:

    Apparatus under subclass 535 wherein a means is provided to lessen the
    pressure or create a vacuum around an object being treated.


CLS 34/539
TXT With fuel burner:

    Apparatus under subclass 535 wherein the heater has a means to combust fuel.


CLS 34/540
TXT Having plural compartments:

    Apparatus under subclass 535 wherein multiple enclosures for treating an
    object are provided.


CLS 34/541
TXT With delivery nozzle for contacting gas or vapor:

    Apparatus under subclass 535 wherein an outlet for a discharge of the
    contacting gas or vapor is provided.


CLS 34/542
TXT With means to increase humidity of contacting gas or vapor:

    Apparatus under subclass 535 wherein a means to increase the water vapor
    content of the contacting gas or vapor is provided.


CLS 34/543
TXT With heater:

    Apparatus under subclass 526 wherein one of the operations controlled is
    the means to apply heat.


CLS 34/544
TXT And fire control means:

    Apparatus under subclass 543 having a means to suppress or extinguish a
    fire in the apparatus.


CLS 34/545
TXT And conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 543 wherein one of the operations controlled is
    the means to transport the material being treated.


CLS 34/546
TXT And blower:

    Apparatus under subclass 543 wherein one of the operations being controlled
    is the means to propel the gas or vapor doing the treating.


CLS 34/547
TXT And drive motor:

    Apparatus under subclass 543 wherein one of the operations being controlled
    is the power means for the operation of the machine.


CLS 34/548
TXT Of gas mixing:

    Apparatus under subclass 524 in which the mixing of two or more gases (with
    or without their contained vapors) is controlled.


CLS 34/549
TXT Of heater:

    Apparatus under subclass 524 in which the action of the heating means is
    controlled.

    (1)     Note.  Control of the pressure or flow of steam when used as an
    individual heating medium is treated as heater control.

    (2)     Note. Automatic heater cut-offs and starters are here.

    (3)     Note.  Since a temperature change of a gas without changing the
    moisture content results in a change in the relative humidity, control of
    heating by humidostatic means is placed in this subclass (and not subclass
    557) even though a change in humidity is the claimed result.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    and the notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 9 and 10 for automatic control of a
    steam heating system.

    432,    Heating, subclass 49 for the automatic control of heat generation
    or transmission in a material heating apparatus not specialized to drying
    or having a specific heat generator.


CLS 34/550
TXT Sensor engages material:

    Apparatus under subclass 549 including a means that touches the substance
    being dried.


CLS 34/551
TXT Having burner control:

    Apparatus under subclass 549 wherein the fuel combustor is regulated.


CLS 34/552
TXT By steam pressure or temperature:

    Apparatus under subclass 549 wherein the heater is controlled by varying
    the force of heated water vapor or its temperature.


CLS 34/553
TXT Electric heater:

    Apparatus under subclass 549 wherein the heating is performed by an
    electric resistance element.


CLS 34/554
TXT Of heater blower:

    Apparatus under subclass 549 wherein a means is provided to regulate a fan.


CLS 34/555
TXT With means to remove excess heat:

    Apparatus under subclass 549 wherein a means is provided to eliminate an
    overabundance of heat.


CLS 34/556
TXT By web or strand tension or breaking:

    Apparatus under subclass 549 in which means responsive to degree of web or
    strand stretching or separation causes a heating control operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 10+ for a
    material-advancing device that is responsive to the tension of a web or
    strand.


CLS 34/557
TXT Of contacting gas humidity:

    Apparatus under subclass 524 in which the moisture content or relative
    humidity of the gas or vapor that contacts the material being treated is
    controlled.

    (1)     Note.  Humidostatic control of heaters for the treating gas or
    vapor is in subclasses 549+ and 556, even though a change in humidity is
    the claimed result.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    467+    and appropriate indented subclasses, for other treatment of
    treating gas or vapor that is not automatically controlled.

    548,    for mixing two gas streams even though a change in humidity is the
    claimed result.


CLS 34/558
TXT Of gas or vapor pressure in treating enclosure:

    Apparatus under subclass 524 in which the force of the gas or vapor within
    the treating chambers is controlled.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes blow-out panels or valves opened by
    pressure, including pressure caused by fires or explosions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 494+, particularly subclasses 505+ for
    the fluid-pressure regulator subcombination.


CLS 34/559
TXT Subatmospheric pressure:

    Apparatus under subclass 558 wherein the pressure in the enclosure is below
    atmospheric or under a vacuum.


CLS 34/560
TXT Of rate of treated material motion:

    Apparatus under subclass 524 in which the velocity of the material during
    drying or gas or vapor contact is controlled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    432,    Heating, subclass 45 for automatic control of or by means sensing
    or controlling work movement in heating apparatus not specialized to
    drying, or having specific heat generating structure.


CLS 34/561
TXT Web or strand:

    Apparatus under subclass 560 wherein the material being treated is of
    indeterminate length.


CLS 34/562
TXT Of time period:

    Apparatus under subclass 524 wherein a means is provided which regulates
    the time interval of a treating or machine operation.

    (1)     Note.  Where there is no timing means other than the drive means
    for the apparatus, see the appropriate type of apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191,    for reverse or pulsating treating gas or vapor flow which maybe
    caused periodically by machine connections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    432,    Heating, subclass 51 for the control of nondrying heating apparatus
    by timing, programming, or cycling control means, or of a drying means
    having a specific combustion heat generator.


CLS 34/563
TXT By timing motor and cam:

    Apparatus under subclass 562 wherein the interval is controlled by an
    electrical motor and an eccentric.


CLS 34/564
TXT By plural timers:

    Apparatus under subclass 563 wherein more than one timer is used.


CLS 34/565
TXT Of flow of gas or vapor treating fluid:

    Apparatus under subclass 524 wherein the movement of the material treating
    gas or vapor is controlled.

    (1)     Note.  Flow control includes starting flow, stopping flow,
    regulating rate of flow, or any other control of flow.

    (2)     Note.  Complete the search in this class (34), subclass 562, for
    timing of flow, including timed reversal of flow, and subclasses 535+ and
    548 for gas mixing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    432,    Heating, subclass 48 for nondrying heating apparatus or apparatus
    having a specific heat generator with automatic means controlling the
    cooling, dilution, withdrawal, by-pass, or circulation of work chamber
    atmosphere.


CLS 34/566
TXT With diverter means to alternate flow paths:

    Apparatus under subclass 565 wherein a means is provided that redirects
    treating gas or vapor from one flow path to another.


CLS 34/567
TXT Exhaust controlled by solvent concentration:

    Apparatus under subclass 565 wherein the removal of exiting treating gas or
    vapor is controlled by the amount of a solvent contained in the treating
    gas or vapor.


CLS 34/568
TXT Steam pressure controlled:

    Apparatus under subclass 565 wherein the force per unit area of heated
    vapor which treats the material is regulated.


CLS 34/569
TXT Of circulation means:

    Apparatus under subclass 565 having means to regulate the means of moving
    the gas or vapor.


CLS 34/570
TXT With flow control valve:

    Apparatus under subclass 565 wherein the flow of gas or vapor treating
    fluid is regulated by a device which opens or closes.


CLS 34/571
TXT With flow control dampers at outlet:

    Apparatus under subclass 565 wherein adjustable plates modify the flow of
    gas or vapor treating fluid at an orifice inside the treating chamber.


CLS 34/572
TXT Of starting or stopping:

    Apparatus under subclass 524 having means to (a) begin the operation of the
    machine, (b) finish operation of the machine, or (c) both.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    526+,   for the above combined with other automatic control operations.


CLS 34/573
TXT Of treated material feeding or discharging:

    Apparatus under subclass 524 having means to (a) control feeding of
    material undergoing treatment, (b) control discharge of such material, or
    (c) both.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    526+,   for the above combined with other automatic control operations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 9+ for an article dispensing
    (feeding) device, per se, not otherwise provided for, including automatic
    control.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 5+ for automatic control of dispensing
    feeder.


CLS 34/574
TXT Controlled by weight:

    Subject matter under subclass 573 wherein the means for feeding or
    discharging is powered after an accumulation of a certain mass of the
    material being treated.


CLS 34/575
TXT Controlled by temperature:

    Subject matter under subclass 573 wherein the means for feeding or
    discharging is powered depending on the temperature of the material.


CLS 34/576
TXT With fluid current conveying of treated material:

    Subject matter under subclass 523 wherein the treated material is moved by
    a fluid flow from one part of the apparatus to another, the arrangement
    being such that the material would not be so transported in the absence of
    the fluid flow.

    (1)     Note.  Since this subclass usually of necessity includes drying
    plus material separation, it includes all fluid current type dryers,
    including plural operations on the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359+,   for the process of fluid current conveying.

    376,    for a device that recirculates material.

    640+,   for a device supporting or guiding a web, cord, or strand by a gas
    or vapor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 467+ and 516+ for an
    enclosed modified atmosphere and fluid application apparatus respectively,
    including fluid moving means.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclasses 3, 4.1+, and 16.1+ for a
    similar device relating to a concentrating evaporator.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclass 251 for ore treating apparatus
    having a heated zone within which pulverulent material is suspended within
    a flowing fluid.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, and see the search notes under the main
    definition for other fluid current conveyors.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclass 94 for process of coating foods involving suspension of
    particulate material in a gaseous medium.

    432,    Heating, subclass 58 for residual heating apparatus in which
    heating gas conveys, agitates, scatters, or disintegrates the work.


CLS 34/577
TXT Downward fluid flow impinging solid floor:

    Subject matter subclass 576 wherein a fluidizing current is in a downward
    direction where it impacts a hard surface and reflects up through the
    material.


CLS 34/578
TXT Having tubular heat exchanger:

    Subject matter under subclass 576 wherein the fluidly conveyed material
    contacts a pipe filled with a heat transfer material.


CLS 34/579
TXT With means to vary gas or vapor flow:

    Subject matter under subclass 576 having a means to control the gas or
    vapor current, such as a valve.


CLS 34/580
TXT With additional conveying means:

    Subject matter under subclass 576 having an extra transporting means
    besides the fluid current conveying means.


CLS 34/581
TXT Suction conveyor:

    Subject matter under subclass 580 wherein the additional conveying means
    uses a vacuum.


CLS 34/582
TXT With specific gas distributor:

    Subject matter under subclass 576 that has a gas delivery means having
    special details.


CLS 34/583
TXT Having angled floor or wall:

    Subject matter under subclass 582 wherein the gas or vapor distributor
    comprises a floor or wall that is inclined from the horizontal or the
    vertical.


CLS 34/584
TXT Having thermal expansion adjustment:

    Subject matter under subclass 582 provided with a means to correct for an
    enlarging of the distributor caused by heat.


CLS 34/585
TXT Gas or vapor delivery nozzle:

    Subject matter under subclass 582 wherein the gas distributor is a
    projecting opening.


CLS 34/586
TXT With means to agitate or comminute material:

    Subject matter under subclass 576 combined with a means to mix or grind the
    treated material.


CLS 34/587
TXT Gas or vapor presses material against screen or sieve:

    Subject matter under subclass 576 wherein the conveying gas or vapor pushes
    the treated materials against a rigid mesh.


CLS 34/588
TXT With baffle or deflector to adjust material flow:

    Subject matter under subclass 576 wherein the flow of the treated material
    is controlled by a variable or fixed obstruction in the path of the
    material.


CLS 34/589
TXT With plural treating zones or compartments:

    Subject matter under subclass 576 wherein the conveyed material flows
    through more than one treating area or chamber.


CLS 34/590
TXT Serpentine path for material:

    Subject matter under subclass 589 wherein the flow path through the plural
    treating zones is S-shaped.


CLS 34/591
TXT With material separator:

    Subject matter under subclass 576 having a means to remove the treated
    material from the conveying fluid.


CLS 34/592
TXT Plural cyclone separators:

    Subject matter under subclass 591 wherein the treated material is removed
    from the conveying fluid by more than one centrifugal separator.


CLS 34/593
TXT With mechanical rotating element:

    Subject matter under subclass 576 wherein the treated material is suspended
    in a fluid by a physically revolving component.


CLS 34/594
TXT Using rotary gas current:

    Subject matter under subclass 576 wherein the treated material is suspended
    by a revolving fluid flow.


CLS 34/595
TXT With drum or receptacle enclosing housing:

    Subject matter under subclass 132 in which the drum or receptacle is
    totally or partially contained in a surrounding enclosure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139,    for such a housing without heating means.


CLS 34/596
TXT Combined washer-dryer:

    Subject matter under subclass 595 in which the device can be used to both
    clean and dry the material.


CLS 34/597
TXT With material conditioner dispenser:

    Subject matter under subclass 595 combined with a distributor to supply an
    additive to improve the treated material.


CLS 34/598
TXT And heat retaining material:

    Subject matter under subclass 595 including a substance that holds heat for
    later use.


CLS 34/599
TXT And material tumbling assisting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 595 including ribs, vanes, etc. in the drum
    to lift or agitate the material being treated.


CLS 34/600
TXT And stationary trays in rotatable drum:

    Subject matter under subclass 595 including nonmoving supports inside the
    drum for the treated material.


CLS 34/601
TXT And supporting, driving, sealing, or bearing means for drum:

    Subject matter under subclass 595 including means to bear the weight of the
    drum; means to power the drum for movement; means to close the drum off
    from other parts of the device; or journal means to support the drum for
    rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242,    for seals for use in dryers in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, for support of general utility.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, cross-reference art collection 903 for seal for a rotating kiln or
    drum.

    384,    Bearings, for bearings of general utility.


CLS 34/602
TXT Specific drum structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 595 relating to explicit details of the drum.


CLS 34/603
TXT Specific housing structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 595 relating to explicit details of the
    housing.


CLS 34/604
TXT Including gas or vapor circulating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 595 including means to move the gas or vapor
    through the drum or housing.


CLS 34/605
TXT Suction means:

    Subject matter under subclass 604 wherein the means to move the gas or
    vapor is a means to create a negative or reduced pressure.


CLS 34/606
TXT And gas or vapor flow regulating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 604 also including a means to control or
    direct the gas or vapor flow such as a valve, shutter, damper, diverter,
    etc.


CLS 34/607
TXT And conduit to deliver gas or vapor to drum:

    Subject matter under subclass 604 also including a duct or pipe that
    conveys the gas or vapor directly to the drum.


CLS 34/608
TXT Vertical gas or vapor flow:

    Subject matter under subclass 604 also including a circulation of the gas
    or vapor from top to bottom or bottom to top.


CLS 34/609
TXT Axial gas or vapor flow:

    Subject matter under subclass 604 wherein a circulation of the gas or vapor
    is in the line about which the drum rotates.


CLS 34/610
TXT Radial gas or vapor flow:

    Subject matter under subclass 604 wherein a circulation of the gas or vapor
    is in a direction from the axis of rotation to the walls of the drum, like
    the spoke of a wheel.


CLS 34/611
TXT Sheet, web, or strand:

    Subject matter under subclass 523 for the treatment and handling of
    articles such as a broad, thin piece of material; a woven textile fabric;
    or a continuous fiber or filament such as a cable, rope, thread, or yarn.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and the following subclasses include means
    such as racks for holding planar articles such as lumber in spaced relation
    but the mere separation of such article in stacks that are treated in an
    enclosure is excluded, being found in subclasses 201+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103     and 104+, for a sheet, web, or strand that constitutes a hollow
    article and is treated and handled as a hollow article.

    201+,   for a house, kiln, and container, including a conveyor, disclosed
    for handling a sheet, web, or strand but adapted to handle other material,
    particularly subclass 205 for superposed roller-type conveyors disclosed
    for handling veneer or a board.


CLS 34/612
TXT Sheet elevator type:

    Subject matter under subclass 611 including a mechanism to raise or lower a
    sheet or other planar sheetlike material and having means peculiar to the
    handling of a sheet individually.

    (1)     Note.  The sheet handling means may be in the form of a sheet
    gripper, flier, sheet, or can lid edge engaging screw, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147,    for means moving material, including sheetlike material, in a
    spiral path.

    189     and 190, for similar apparatus even though disclosed for handling a
    sheet but having no means for individually handling the sheet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, for a conveyor, or plural conveyors,
    having a platform, gripper, or opposed surfaces that move vertically and
    thus provide means suitable for raising or lowering sheet material,
    including subclasses 346.1+, 463.1+, 604+, 625, 626.1+, 663, and 793+.


CLS 34/613
TXT Coacting parallel threaded members:

    Subject matter under subclass 612 wherein the elevator mechanism is made up
    of two nondiverging, screwlike members wherein the material is positioned
    between the two members and in the threads such that the material is
    elevated by turning the screws.


CLS 34/614
TXT Sheet on edge:

    Subject matter under subclass 611 for handling and treatment of planar
    pieces resting on their thin sides.

    (1)     Note.  The patents herein in the main include a rack or conveyor
    holding sheet material on edge.


CLS 34/615
TXT Stationary support:

    Subject matter under subclass 614 including a nonmoving means on which the
    material rests.


CLS 34/616
TXT Rotary wheellike conveyor:

    Subject matter under subclass 614 wherein the means to hold a sheet or edge
    is a revolving disk or ring with spokes that support the material.


CLS 34/617
TXT Endless conveyor with fingers:

    Subject matter under subclass 614 wherein the means to hold a sheet or edge
    is a closed band travelling in an endless path having upstanding appendages.


CLS 34/618
TXT For flexible sheet, web, or strand:

    Subject matter under subclass 611 including means to treat a pliable sheet,
    web, or strand such as textile, paper, cord, or filament.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184+,   for a rotary rack not limited to sheet, web, or strand.

    239,    for a plate on which sheetlike material is placed.

    240,    for a supporting rod.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclasses 81, 92, or 106 for drying or
    heating textiles combined with positive stretching means.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclass 19.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, appropriate subclasses.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclass 127.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 199+ for a similar device not including any positive drying
    means.

    432,    Heating, subclass 59 for a residual heater flexing, looping, or
    coiling a sheet, web, or strand.


CLS 34/619
TXT Including horizontal support:

    Subject matter under subclass 618 including a level platform.


CLS 34/620
TXT Including roller-type conveyor:

    Subject matter under subclass 618 including rotating cylinders that move
    the material.


CLS 34/621
TXT Including means to suspend work:

    Subject matter under subclass 618 including a means to let the material
    hang free.


CLS 34/622
TXT Portable or collapsible:

    Subject matter under subclass 621 wherein the treating device can be moved
    from place to place or folded compactly.


CLS 34/623
TXT Running length:

    Subject matter under subclass 618 wherein the web or strand is a moving
    continuous length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110+,   for an external rotary drum where the sheet, web, or strand is
    passed over the external surface of a drum.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, particularly subclasses 157+.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, for feeding material
    without utilizing the leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the
    material.


CLS 34/624
TXT With contact heater:

    Subject matter under subclass 623 wherein the material moves across a
    surface that has a means to increase its temperature.


CLS 34/625
TXT Winding reel:

    Subject matter under subclass 623 in which the material is wrapped up on a
    rotating member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94,     for devices interwinding a spacing sheet and a sheet to be dried.

    110+,   for rotary drums of the external drum type.

    629,    647, and 657, for treating material travelling a tortuous path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 20 and 21 for
    a fishing rod reel.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, particularly subclass 370+ for a
    reel having no added means as a heater or gas or vapor contact producing
    means to cause drying.


CLS 34/626
TXT With fluent heating means inside reel:

    Subject matter under subclass 625 wherein the reel has a means to circulate
    a heating fluid in its interior.


CLS 34/627
TXT Plural webs or strands:

    Subject matter under subclass 623 including means to handle and treat more
    than one web or strand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144,    for feeding sheetlike material between plural press couples.


CLS 34/628
TXT With means to separate individual webs or strands:

    Subject matter under subclass 627 including means to partition multiple
    webs or strands into single webs or strands.


CLS 34/629
TXT With gas or vapor circulation for contact with treated material:

    Subject matter under subclass 623 including means to impinge the treated
    material with a gas or vapor or to distribute a gas or vapor.


CLS 34/630
TXT Having solvent chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 629 including a compartment that contains a
    gas or vapor solution that is capable of dissolving an impurity on the
    material.


CLS 34/631
TXT Having means to adjust relative distance between distributor and material:

    Subject matter under subclass 629 including means to vary the interval
    between the material and a means to deliver a gas or vapor to the material.


CLS 34/632
TXT Having means to produce turbulence in gas or vapor:

    Subject matter under subclass 629 including a means to generate a
    nonlaminar flow of a gas or vapor.


CLS 34/633
TXT Having baffle redirect gas or vapor flow:

    Subject matter under subclass 629 including a partition or shutter to
    provide alternative flow paths for gas or vapor.


CLS 34/634
TXT Having sealing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 629 including means to prevent the escape of
    gas or vapor from a treating chamber.


CLS 34/635
TXT Including suction means:

    Subject matter under subclass 629 including a vacuum pump or means to
    create a reduced pressure.


CLS 34/636
TXT Including plural chambers or zones:

    Subject matter under subclass 629 including more than one treating
    compartment or treating area.


CLS 34/637
TXT Having drive roller:

    Subject matter under subclass 629 including a power cylinder to propel the
    web or strand through a treating area.


CLS 34/638
TXT Including gas or vapor nozzle or distributor outlet:

    Subject matter under subclass 629 including a projecting discharge opening
    or an aperture which dispenses a gas or vapor.


CLS 34/639
TXT Having gas or vapor flow transverse to treated material movement:

    Subject matter under subclass 629 including a gas or vapor flow which is
    perpendicular to the direction in which the material is moving.


CLS 34/640
TXT Fluid current support or guide:

    Subject matter under subclass 629 including means to direct or suspend the
    running length by means of a fluid blast or flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117     and 120, for means for threading, stripping, or guiding a web in
    conjunction with drum dryers including fluid current guiding means.

    576+,   for similar apparatus for treating other material, and subclasses
    359+ for a similar process.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, may include a nominal
    recitation of a supply or take-up coil (e.g., less than a support for such
    a coil or a cooperative relationship between a tension or exhaust detector
    and reel driving or reel stopping means, etc.), subclasses 97.1+ for fluid
    current means to advance the material.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, for more than a nominal supply or
    take-up coil structure (e.g., a support for such a coil, a cooperative
    relationship between a tension or exhaust detector and reel driving or reel
    stopping means, etc.), subclasses 615.11+ a residual locus for a material
    fluid suspension guide or guard.


CLS 34/641
TXT Having airfoil or Coanda nozzle:

    Subject matter under subclass 640 including a surface that controls the gas
    or vapor flow or a nozzle that establishes a laminar flow along a surface
    that remains locked along the surface means unless disturbed.


CLS 34/642
TXT Having nozzles around circular manifold:

    Subject matter under subclass 640 including gas or vapor flow distributors
    positioned on the circumference of a drum.


CLS 34/643
TXT Having nozzles on opposite sides of web:

    Subject matter under subclass 640 including gas or vapor distributors
    situated to face each other and different sides of the web.


CLS 34/644
TXT Adjustable distance between opposed nozzles:

    Subject matter under subclass 643 including means to vary the spacing
    between facing nozzles.


CLS 34/645
TXT Suspended loops:

    Subject matter under subclass 629 in which the material is supported in
    hanging loops over rods.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    647,    for means to guide material in a zigzag path in which the material
    is positively guided at each bend.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 681 for a conveyor having
    load-suspending members extending between parallel drive means such as
    endless belts.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, especially subclasses
    104+ for a festooning device, per se.


CLS 34/646
TXT Edge holding means:

    Subject matter under subclass 629 including means to grasp the material by
    its edges as by gripping or impaling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclasses 52+ and 92 for fabric
    stretching combined with drying or heating. The line is:  Class 26 takes
    fabric stretching combined with drying or heating when special means or
    steps are provided in addition to the stretching caused by the feed of the
    material through the machine.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 468.01+ and 469.1+ for a
    conveyor having load gripping members, and subclasses 692+ for a conveyor
    having a load impaler.


CLS 34/647
TXT Zigzag runs of treated material:

    Subject matter under subclass 629 including means to guide the running
    length in a tortuous path having a guiding means at each bend.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, particularly subclasses 158,
    159, and 160.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, may include a nominal
    recitation of a supply or take-up coil (e.g., less than a support for such
    a coil or a cooperative relationship between a tension or exhaust detector
    and reel driving or reel stopping means, etc.), subclasses 118.1+ for
    plural material moving means having intermediate storage.


CLS 34/648
TXT Including material tension adjusting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 647 including means to vary the amount of
    stretch applied to the material.


CLS 34/649
TXT Including gas or vapor recirculation:

    Subject matter under subclass 647 including means to capture and reuse some
    of the treating gas or vapor.


CLS 34/650
TXT Including endless conveyors:

    Subject matter under subclass 647 wherein the zigzag pattern for the
    running length is composed of a series of closed bands travelling in a
    boundless path.


CLS 34/651
TXT Plural zones or chambers:

    Subject matter under subclass 647 wherein the material passes through more
    than one treating area or compartment.


CLS 34/652
TXT Elongated thin gas or vapor stream:

    Subject matter under subclass 629 including means to direct a blast of gas
    upon, or draw gas over the material in a relatively fine slender stream.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    640+,   for apparatus where the blast guides or floats the web.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 300.1 and
    particularly 303+, 316.1, and 405+, for blast or suction removal of foreign
    material such as water from a work piece, and see the reference to Class 15
    in (3) Note in the main class definition of this class for a statement of
    the line.


CLS 34/653
TXT Including distributor comprising tube with elongated slot:

    Subject matter under subclass 652 including a cylinder having a long thin
    slit as an exit for the gas or vapor.


CLS 34/654
TXT Including distributor comprising perforated plate:

    Subject matter under subclass 652 wherein the means to create the elongated
    gas or vapor stream is a sheet having multiple apertures.


CLS 34/655
TXT Including distributor having elongated slot:

    Subject matter under subclass 652 wherein the means to create the elongated
    gas or vapor stream is a long thin slit.


CLS 34/656
TXT Plural associated elongated slots:

    Subject matter under subclass 655 wherein the means to create the elongated
    gas or vapor stream are plural long thin slits that coact to produce one
    stream.


CLS 34/657
TXT Zigzag runs of treated material:

    Subject matter under subclass 623 including means to guide the running
    length in a tortuous path having a guiding means at each bend.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, may include a nominal
    recitation of a supply or take-up coil (e.g., less than a support for such
    a coil or a cooperative relationship between a tension or exhaust detector
    and reel driving or reel stopping means, etc.), subclasses 118.1+ for
    plural material moving means having intermediate storage.


CLS 34/658
TXT Endless conveyor or movable gripper:

    Subject matter under subclass 618 including either (a) a boundless
    transport means for the sheet, web, or strand material, or (b) means to
    grasp the material where such means are mounted for motion and driven by
    the device, or both.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 468.01+ and 469.1+ for a
    conveyor having load gripping members, and subclasses 804+ for an endless
    belt conveyor.


CLS 34/659
TXT Endless conveyor:

    Subject matter under subclass 658 having a boundless transport means for
    the material.


CLS 34/660
TXT Endless conveyor having material gripper:

    Subject matter under subclass 659 including a boundless conveyor with means
    to grasp the material.


CLS 34/661
TXT Endless conveyor having material hanger:

    Subject matter under subclass 659 having a means to suspend the material
    connected to the boundless transport means.


CLS 34/662
TXT Plural opposed cooperating endless conveyors:

    Subject matter under subclass 659 wherein two boundless conveyors have
    coacting faces between which the material is moved.


CLS 34/663
TXT Endless conveyor contacts solid perforated guide:

    Subject matter under subclass 659 wherein the face of a boundless conveyor
    moves across a rigid apertured plate so the material is moved between the
    guide and conveyor.


CLS 34/664
TXT Movable treated material holder:

    Subject matter under subclass 618 including holding means for the sheet,
    web, or strand that are mounted for motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184,    for rotary carriers or racks, and 192+, for shelf- or tray-type
    dryer not restricted to sheets, webs, or strands.

    658+,   for endless conveyors or movable grippers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclass 81, 92, or 106, and see the
    reference to this class (34) in the definition of subclass 646.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclass 19 for boards on which hides, skins,
    or leather is ``put out" for drying.


CLS 34/665
TXT Rotary holder:

    Subject matter under subclass 664 wherein the material holder is mounted to
    revolve.


CLS 34/666
TXT Car dryer:

    Apparatus under subclass 201 wherein the enclosure is adapted for drying an
    automobile.


CLS 34/667
TXT Debris guard:

    Apparatus under subclass 523 having a means to shield against waste
    entering the treating chamber.


CLS 36/
TTL BOOTS, SHOES, AND LEGGINGS

CLS 36/
TXT This class is intended to receive foot coverings which are generally
    provided with reinforced tread surfaces.

    This class also receives leg protecting devices generally designated as
    leggings or gaiters.

    This class also receives antislip devices and wear members to be applied to
    boots and shoes.

    This class, in subclass 8.2 also receives shoes which are specifically
    designed to be placed on the feet of deceased persons.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 61 for stocking protectors which extend into the
    shoe and which when placed on the leg of a wearer usually require that the
    shoe be removed before the protector is taken off; and subclasses 239+ for
    stockings, per se.

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for and
    methods of making shoes and shoe parts.

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 3+ for processes and apparatus
    for ascertaining the dimensions of footwear and for laying out the same.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 204, 206 and 208+ for
    nonelectrically heated foot and leg coverings not intended for use as boots
    or shoes.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclass 221 for shoe attached
    climbing devices.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 766 for capacitive dielectric bonding in
    the manufacturing or repairing of shoes, and subclasses for electrically
    heated foot and leg coverings not intended for use as boots or shoes.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 11.3+ for devices for attaching skates to
    shoes.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 223+ for
    footwear combined with means to conduct electricity from or bypass it
    around the body.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses
    particularly Class 523, subclass 167 for a composition containing a
    synthetic resin or natural rubber having utility in the manufacturing or
    repairing of shoes or to processes of preparing said composition.

    602,    Surgery:  Splint, Brace, or Bandage, subclass 66 for arch
    supporting bandages and arch supports provided with bandage structure for
    securing them to the foot.

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, subclasses 27+ for artificial foot extensions
    which are secured to the leg of the wearer and are not removed therefrom
    upon removal of the shoe.


CLS 36/1
TXT Footwear and devices attached to or specifically to be applied to footwear
    within the class definition of this class and not provided for in other
    subclasses.

    (1)     Note.  Footwear having pockets for receiving articles or other
    holders are included here.


CLS 36/1.5
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising footless leg coverings
    detachably combined with and forming extensions of boots, shoes or
    overshoes in which the leg coverings are provided with means for detachable
    support by or connection with the uppers of the footwear to which they are
    to be applied or the uppers of footwear are modified to cooperate with the
    leg coverings.


CLS 36/2
TXT Devices under the class definition in the form of footless leg coverings to
    be worn above and/or over a boot or shoe.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 61 for stocking protectors, which differ from
    stockings only in that they lack foot pieces, which are designed to be worn
    over the stockings and extend below the uppers of footwear.


CLS 36/2.6
TXT Boots and shoes under subclass 83 which are provided with, (1) means to
    hold a heated filler or (2) means to produce heat within the footwear.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 204, 206, and 208+ for
    nonelectrically heated foot and leg coverings not intended for use as boots
    or shoes.

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclasses, for electrically heated
    foot and leg coverings not intended for use as boots or shoes.


CLS 36/3
TXT Boots and shoes under subclass 83 provided with means to allow air to
    circulate within the shoe or which are provided with means to drain excess
    moisture therefrom.


CLS 36/4
TXT Boots and shoes under subclass 83 in which the uppers at least are made of
    rubber or fabric impregnated with rubber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.3,    for rubber overshoes.

    7.4,    for heelless rubber overhoes.

    102,    for a resilient or flexible shoe.


CLS 36/7.1
TXT Boots and shoes under subclass 83 constructed to be worn over footwear as
    protective coverings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58.5+,  for means for retaining the overshoe on the shoe or for preventing
    relative movement between the shoe and the overshoe and modification of the
    overshoe for these purposes.


CLS 36/7.2
TXT Overshoes under subclass 7.1 in which the sole portions do not extend under
    the heels of the shoes to be protected.


CLS 36/7.3
TXT Overshoes under subclass 7.1 in which the uppers at least are made of
    rubber or fabric impregnated with rubber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for rubber shoes other than overshoes.


CLS 36/7.4
TXT Heelless overhoes under subclass 7.2 in which the uppers at least are made
    of rubber or fabric impregnated with rubber.


CLS 36/7.5
TXT Overshoes under subclass 7.1 provided with a sole secured to a shoe by mere
    straps or a toe piece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11.5,   for sandals not of the overshoe type.


CLS 36/7.6
TXT Overshoes under subclass 7.5 provided with antislipping means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59+,    for antislipping means for boots and shoes in general.


CLS 36/7.7
TXT Heelless overshoes under 7.2 provided with antislipping means.


CLS 36/7.8
TXT Overshoes under subclass 7.5 provided with cushioning means.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes the so- called "jumping sandals" used
    for exercising and amusement.


CLS 36/8.1
TXT Boots and shoes under subclass 83 particularly designed for use in swimming
    and under showers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for rubber boots and shoes.

    7.3,    for heelless rubber overshoes.

    11.5,   for sandals including those adapted for use in bathing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, appropriate subclasses for foot
    carried swimming aids.


CLS 36/8.2
TXT Boots and shoes under subclass 83 designed for use on the bodies of
    deceased persons.

    (1)     Note.  The shoes in this subclass have the appearance of normal
    shoes but lack structural features which are necessary in shoes for normal
    use.

    (2)     Note.  Many of the patents here included have adjusting means for
    permitting them to be used on feet of varying size.


CLS 36/8.3
TXT Boots and shoes under subclass 83 so constructed or provided with means so
    as to adapt them for use in dancing.

    (1)     Note.  Herein are included toe dancing slippers as well as tap
    dancing shoes.


CLS 36/8.4
TXT Boots and shoes under subclass 83 which are designed to be placed on the
    feet of persons to determine the proper size shoe to be worn.

    (1)     Note.  The shoes in this subclass are usually provided with means
    to locate the toes of a person with relation to a particular size shoe.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 3+ for processes and apparatus
    for ascertaining the dimensions of footwear and for laying out the same.


CLS 36/9
TXT Boots and shoes under subclass 83 in which the upper at least is made of
    felt, fabric or cloth, except rubber coated cloth or fabric.


CLS 36/10
TXT Devices under the class definition in the form of foot coverings generally
    of thin material to be worn inside the boot or shoe.

    (1)     Note.  Herein are included felt and other slippers designed to be
    worn inside rubber boots.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 61 for stocking protectors to be worn between the
    stockings and the foot of the wearer.


CLS 36/11
TXT Boots and shoes under subclass 83 in which the sole member has a
    substantial part raised above the tread surface and forms a part or all of
    the shoe upper.


CLS 36/11.5
TXT Boots and shoes under subclass 83 in which the foot covering comprises a
    sole member secured on the foot merely by straps or a toe piece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    for a shoe lacking an upper.


CLS 36/12
TXT Devices under the class definition in the form of foot coverings and
    subcombinations thereof directed to the securement of an upper to a sole
    and/or to the securement of a member attached to an insole to form a tread
    surface.

    (1)     Note.  When the upper is attached to an insole the structure so
    formed is known as an "Assembled Shoe" and may have at this stage of its
    manufacture, a welt, a rand or intermediate sole or soles which in certain
    types of shoes are called platforms.

    (2)     Note.  The member attached to the shoe structure which is to form
    the wearing surface is designated as the wearsole.

    (3)     Note.  In the usual case the wearsole is the outermost layer which
    contacts the walking surface, but this term may apply to a plurality of
    sole layers adapted to be used successively as wearing surfaces.


CLS 36/13
TXT Sole attaching means under subclass 12 in which the sole being attached is
    formed of wood.


CLS 36/14
TXT Sole attaching means under subclass 12 in which the upper or sole or both
    of these members are formed of rubber and are secured together by means
    peculiar to such materials, usually by vulcanization.


CLS 36/15
TXT Sole attaching means under subclass 12 in which the wearsole is provided
    with means whereby it may be readily attached to, or detached from the
    remaining shoe structure.


CLS 36/16
TXT Sole attaching means under subclass 12 in which the upper is provided with
    an outwardly extending flange which is connected to the sole member.


CLS 36/17
TXT Sole attaching means under subclass 12 in which the connection of the upper
    to the wearsole is (1) through a welt strip being connected to the upper by
    any means, the welt strip being attached to the wearsole, by fastening
    means which pierces the wearsole, or (2) through an intermediate (welt)
    sole which is fastened to the upper by any means, which intermediate sole
    is attached to the wearsole by fastening means which pierces the wearsole,
    the upper not being directly fastened to the wearsole by such means in (1)
    or (2).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for out-turned uppers provided with welts.

    18,     for shoes of the single face stitch type in which the upper is
    directly fastened to the wearsole by a stitch lying on one side of the sole
    which may pass through a welt strip or intermediate sole.

    19,     for shoes of the McKay or through and through type where the
    connection of the upper to the wearsole is direct even though it also
    passes through the welt strip or intermediate sole and even though the welt
    strip or intermediate sole has additional separate fastening to the upper.

    19.5,   for structures similar to the type found in this subclass but in
    which the connection between the welt or intermediate sole and wearsole is
    solely by means of a cement union.


CLS 36/18
TXT Sole attaching means under subclass 12 in which the wearsole is connected
    to the upper by stitching which does not pass through the wearsole but goes
    in and out on the same side of the wearsole.


CLS 36/19
TXT Sole attaching means under subclass 12 in which the wearsole is connected
    to the upper or the shoe structure by fasteners which pass through the
    upper or upper structure.


CLS 36/19.5
TXT Sole attaching means under subclass 12 in which the wearsole is attached to
    the upper or shoe structure solely by an adhesive union.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for connection between the outer or wearsole and the upper
    structure by a union peculiar to rubber, usually vulcanization.

    16,     for shoes of the out-turned upper type even though the union
    between the upper structure and sole is a cement union.


CLS 36/21
TXT The arrangement of the pegs or threads to form the seam which secures the
    upper to the sole.


CLS 36/22
TXT Sole-blanks prepared for attachment by channeling, ribbing, or the like.


CLS 36/23
TXT Fasteners for securing soles and uppers together.


CLS 36/24
TXT Pegs and peg-ribbons from which pegs are cut.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus of general utility for applying a member such as pegs to shoe
    parts, and in particular subclasses 93+ for combined apparatus for cutting
    and applying a peg.


CLS 36/24.5
TXT Boots or shoes in which the sole and heel are both modified so as to make a
    neat or strong interfitted connection between the sole and heel.


CLS 36/25
TXT This subclass includes such structures of soles as are not herein more
    specifically classified.


CLS 36/26
TXT Soles lined with fleece to be used in the ordinary house-slipper with knit
    uppers.


CLS 36/27
TXT One piece of material covers the whole shoe-bottom, being "sprung" to form
    the heel elevation.


CLS 36/28
TXT The sole is made yielding or has a spring attachment to cushion the foot in
    walking.


CLS 36/29
TXT The cushioning device is a pneumatic pad.


CLS 36/30
TXT The sole is made up of several layers, and the novelty lies in the material
    used or the arrangement of the layers or the means of securing the layers
    together to make a sole-blank.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for soles lined with fleece as in the ordinary house slipper.

    44,     for innersoles made up of several layers of material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclass 144
    for solelike structure.


CLS 36/31
TXT The sole-blank is made up of several pieces joined edge to edge and no one
    of them big enough to cover the sole.


CLS 36/32
TXT The outer tread-sole is made of rubber.


CLS 36/33
TXT The main outer sole is made of wood.


CLS 36/34
TXT Devices under the class definition designed to provide means at the rear of
    a foot covering to support the wearer's heel in a raised position relative
    to the support provided by the sole member(s) at the ball portion of the
    foot covering.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are heels, per se, i.e., prior to their
    attachment to shoes, heels with attaching means, and heels attached to
    shoes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for "spring heels" wherein the sole member is bent (sprung) to
    provide a layer of the heel, usually the tread layer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclass 147 for processes directed to the
    making and attachment of heels to shoes.


CLS 36/35
TXT Products under subclass 34 provided with means for absorbing, at least
    partially, the shock generated at the heel area by walking, so that none or
    only a diminished part of such shock is transmitted to the heel of the
    wearer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for resilient means in the rear portions of foot coverings for
    circulating air in the foot coverings for ventilation.

    59+,    for anti-slipping devices, which may include resilient means, for
    the rear portions of foot coverings.


CLS 36/36
TXT Products under subclass 35 in which the cushion heel, or some part of it,
    is so connected to the shoe or to some other part of the cushioned heel
    that it may be readily removed therefrom, as for adjustment or replacement.


CLS 36/37
TXT Products under subclass 35 in which the cushioning means is (1) so
    positioned in a shoe; or (2) so constructed that, when applied to a shoe;
    it provides a resilient support between the heel of the wearer and the heel
    seat surface of the shoe (that is, the area of a sole at which a heel is
    attached).

    (1)     Note.  Included here are yielding heel pads for attachment to the
    insoles of shoes.


CLS 36/38
TXT Products under subclass 35 in which the cushioning means includes a
    resilient member of elementary metal or metal alloy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for heels provided with springs for cushioning the shock between
    the heel seat surface of the shoe and the heel of the wearer.


CLS 36/39
TXT Products under subclass 34 at least a portion of which is mounted for
    movement about an axis which is substantially perpendicular to the wear
    surface of the heel.

    (1)     Note.  Such rotation may occur during walking, or may be merely for
    adjustment.


CLS 36/40
TXT Products under subclass 34 in which the heel includes a framework or hollow
    casing of elementary metal or metal alloy, which is the major weight
    carrying member of the heel structure.

    (1)     Note.  The metallic shell may be provided with an appropriate
    filler, e.g., a plug.


CLS 36/41
TXT Products under subclass 40 in which means are provided to permit ready
    removal of the metallic shell from the shoe, as for replacement.


CLS 36/42
TXT Products under subclass 34 in which means are provided to permit the ready
    removal of the heel or a portion thereof from the shoe, as for replacement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for detachable cushion heels.

    41,     for detachable metal shell heels.


CLS 36/43
TXT Includes both fixed and removable insoles and heel-pads.

    (1)     Note.  Where the novelty lies in the channeling or other
    arrangement for securing to the upper, see this class, subclass 22.

    (2)     Note.  Insoles combined with means for applying any one or
    combination of light or analogous rays, electricity, or thermal treatments,
    which are limited by structure to therapeutic use, are in Class 607,
    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclass 144.

    (3)     Note.  See this class, subclass 76 for insoles modified solely by
    the addition of a shank stiffener thereto.


CLS 36/44
TXT The insole is formed of several layers of material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for soles lined with fleece as in the ordinary house slipper.

    30,     for soles made up of several layers of material.


CLS 36/45
TXT The novelty lies in the part forming the upper of the boot or shoe as
    distinguished from the sole and heel.


CLS 36/46.5
TXT Uppers under subclass 45 modified to facilitate lasting, as by threading a
    puckering cord around its sole edge, by provision of lasting tabs, by
    having a premolded shape.


CLS 36/47
TXT The novelty lies in the arrangement and shape of the part or parts which
    make the upper.

    (1)     Note.  Modifications of the top to allow the insertion and
    withdrawal of the foot are found in this class, subclass 50.


CLS 36/48
TXT A single piece of material forms the vamp and quarters or counters of the
    boot or shoe.


CLS 36/49
TXT A single piece of material is crimped or split so that it forms an endless
    vamp and quarters.


CLS 36/50.1
TXT Closure:
    Subject matter under subclass 45 wherein the upper includes means intended
    to permit the user to open or close the foot covering in order to insert or
    withdraw a foot.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., appropriate subclasses for a
    fastener of general utility which may be used to fasten an upper.


CLS 36/50.5
TXT For ski boot:
    Subject matter under subclass 50.1 wherein the closure is intended to be
    used on a foot covering worn in the sport known as "skiing".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117.1+, for a ski boot closure claimed in combination with a ski boot.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., appropriate subclasses for a
    fastener of general utility which may be used to fasten a ski boot, see
    particularly subclasses 68 through 71 for a strap tightener.


CLS 36/51
TXT The closure is effected through the elasticity of the parts forming the top
    or part of the top of the shoe.


CLS 36/52
TXT The structure of the buttonhold-pieces; mostly stays to prevent the
    material from tearing at the buttonhole.


CLS 36/53
TXT Bars, tacks, and other stays to be placed at the lower end of the
    closure-slit to prevent the material from tearing.


CLS 36/54
TXT The ordinary tongue which bridges the closure-slit.  Some devices for
    attaching the upper end of the tongue to the lacing to hold it in position
    are also found here.


CLS 36/55
TXT The structure and arrangement of the upperlinings.


CLS 36/56
TXT Boot-straps and other devices attached to the boot or shoe to be grasped in
    pulling the boot or shoe on.


CLS 36/57
TXT This subclass includes the arrangement of parts to form an upper seam or to
    stay it and the pipings to stiffen and protect the edge of the upper.

    (1)     Note.  For inclusion in this subclass a patent should recite the
    seam as connecting two dissimilar parts of a shoe (e.g., vamp to upper) or
    the location of the seam in a particular zone of a shoe (e.g., front, back,
    side, heel-seam) as worn on the foot.  Such terms as "inner" or "outer"
    will not be construed as locations on the shoe but as surfaces of the
    material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, appropriate subclasses for related subject matter and
    particularly subclasses 418+ for a seam, welt or piping in general or
    claimed in combination with a merely named part(s) of a shoe.


CLS 36/58
TXT A metal rod, strip or spring is laid in the upper seam to stiffen it.


CLS 36/58.5
TXT Means for retaining the shoe on the foot or the overshoe on the shoe or for
    preventing relative movement between the shoe and the wearer's foot and
    modifications of the shoe or overshoe for these purposes.


CLS 36/58.6
TXT Overshoe-retaining means engaging the heel of the shoe.


CLS 36/59
TXT The sole or heel or both of a boot or shoe are modified or an attachment is
    secured thereto to prevent slipping.

    (1)     Note.  For sandals provided with antislipping means, search this
    class, subclasses 7.6 and 7.7.


CLS 36/61
TXT Antislipping devices so arranged that without removal from the boot or shoe
    the spur-points can be thrown into or out of position to engage the surface
    walked on.


CLS 36/62
TXT Antislipping devices designed to be readily attached to and removed from
    the boot or shoe at the pleasure of the wearer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.6,    for sandals provided with antislipping means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclass 221 for a shoe attached
    climbing device.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 11.3+ for devices for attaching skates to
    shoes.


CLS 36/64
TXT Detachable antislipping device secured to the boot or shoe by a positive
    clamping mechanism.


CLS 36/65
TXT Detachable antislipping device secured to the boot or shoe by a
    screw-operated clamp.


CLS 36/66
TXT Detachable antislipping device secured to the boot or shoe by means of a
    nut, slotted locking-plate, or the like, which is permanently attached to
    the shoe.


CLS 36/67
TXT A calk consisting of spur-point and a shank forms the antislipping device,
    the shank being permanently inserted in the sole or heel.


CLS 36/68
TXT The structure and arrangement of counter- stiffeners.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet.

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 59+ for coated and impregnated fabric or textile in general.


CLS 36/69
TXT Braces or supports, generally metal, attached to the boot or shoe to
    stiffen the counter and heel so that they will not run over.


CLS 36/70
TXT Attachments, such as hooks or shields, to be attached to the boot or shoe
    to hold the pantaloon or skirt out of contact with the ground, or at least
    to prevent it rubbing against the shoe.


CLS 36/71
TXT Pads to be worn inside the shoes and such pads as are built into the boot
    or shoe to protect the foot.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for yielding heel pads, per se, to be inserted in the shoe.

    76,     for shank stiffeners, per se, or shoes having shank stiffeners,
    which will reinforce the shoe.

    89+,    for ankle supports.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 581+ for devices accommodating shoes to foot
    deformities and remaining in the shoe upon removal of the shoe from the
    foot.


CLS 36/71.5
TXT Articles under the class definition shaped to fit a cavity, depression, or
    other worn external area of a boot or shoe part so that, when applied to
    such area or to an interconnected area of the footgear not within the
    foot-receiving sheath, the article will fill out the worn area or cause an
    adjacent portion of the boot or shoe to fill out such area, so as to
    restore the apparel substantially to its original shape or contour.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes only those devices which are to be
    attached for the purpose of correcting already worn areas of footgear.  It
    does not include attachments for the purpose of preventing wear or for
    correcting the posture of the wearer, for which see SEARCH THIS CLASS,
    SUBCLASS, below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8.3,    for attachments intended to facilitate dancing.

    43,     for internally applied sole portions capable of adapting themselves
    to worn insoles.

    72,     for externally applied wear preventive attachments.

    76,     for attachments, for application to the waist or shank of footwear,
    intended to strengthen or preserve the arch of a shoe.


CLS 36/72
TXT Devices to be placed on boots and shoes to protect the boot or shoe during
    the process of manufacturing or when in service.  The protector be
    permanently attached to the shoe or detachably connected.


CLS 36/73
TXT Plates, studs, and the like to be secured to and protect soles and/or heels
    from heat, moisture or wear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59+,    for antislipping means for boots and shoes in general.


CLS 36/74
TXT The protector consists of a plate or head provided with one or more spurs
    or projections and is secured in place by driving the spurs into the sole
    or heel from the outside.


CLS 36/75
TXT Protectors wholly or partly embedded in the sole or heel, usually during
    the making of the shoe.


CLS 36/76
TXT Stiffening-pieces inserted in the shank or waist of the shoe to preserve
    the arch of the sole.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclass 589 for outside shank stiffeners in which the
    supporting means comprises means located beneath the shank of the shoe, for
    providing support for the longitudinal arch, and subclass 623 for devices
    in which the supporting means comprises a shank stiffener provided with
    means to underlie and support the metatarsal arch of the foot.


CLS 36/77
TXT Box-toe stiffeners, also tips and caps designed to protect the toe of the
    upper which are permanently attached to the shoe and form a part thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet.

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 59+ for coated or impregnated fabric or textile, especially
    subclass 103 for stiffened fabric or textile.


CLS 36/78
TXT Welts used in connecting the sole and upper and the beveled pieces used in
    building up the heel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for welts combined with shoe upper structure, particularly subclass
    17 for Goodyear welt shoes.


CLS 36/80
TXT Devices under the class definition in which the boot or shoe is provided
    with means for receiving the heel so as to prevent forward motion of the
    foot in the boot or shoe.


CLS 36/81
TXT Devices under the class definition in which the boot or shoe is provided
    with means for raising the apparent stature of the wearer.

    (1)     Note.  These devices are similar to those used in shoes for
    shortened limbs, but are to be used in shoes for both feet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, subclasses 27+ for foot extensions which are
    secured to the leg of the wearer and are not removed upon removal of the
    shoe.


CLS 36/82
TXT Devices under the class definition in which the boot or shoe is provided
    with a support which comprises a flat rigid member under-lying the heel of
    the wearer.


CLS 36/83
TXT Foot covering under the class definition provided with means for providing
    a covering or a protection to at least the forward plantar area of a
    wearer's foot and with means for securing or adhering, at least
    temporarily, this covering or protection to the wearer's foot.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,1+, for a foot convering configured or constructed to faciliate
    attachment to a ski.


CLS 36/84
TXT Foot covering under subclass 83 which is manufactured using a substance
    that is not the hide of an animal.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a shoe made of a cloth or a braided fiber
    material.


CLS 36/85
TXT Foot covering under subclass 84 wherein the substance is relatively stiff
    and unyielding.


CLS 36/86
TXT Foot covering under subclass 85 wherein the substance is the product of a
    tree.


CLS 36/87
TXT Foot covering under subclass 84 wherein the substance is a man-made pliable
    or moldable substance.

    (1)     Note.  Included within the meaning of the term "man-made", are
    materials whose constituents are natural or organic, but whose physical
    properties have been chemically altered by manufacturing processes.


CLS 36/88
TXT Foot covering under subclass 83 wherein the shape of the foot covering is
    particularly configured to the shape of the wearer's foot, either to
    sustain the wearer's foot, or to provide for peculiarities in the shape of
    the wearer's foot.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this and indented subclasses emphasize those
    features in a shoe that fit the shape of the shoe to the shape of the
    wearer's foot. This concept distinguishes from those in subclasses 97
    through 109 below, wherein the structure of the shoe itself is emphasized.


CLS 36/89
TXT Foot covering under subclass 88 wherein the configuration is shaped to the
    joint connecting the foot with the leg of the wearer, to sustain said joint.


CLS 36/90
TXT Foot covering under subclass 89 intended for the foot of a young person,
    especially one who is learning to walk and therefore requires supplemental
    ankle support.


CLS 36/91
TXT Foot covering under subclass 88 wherein the configuration is shaped to that
    portion of a foot that lies between the toes and heel on the undersurface
    of the foot.


CLS 36/92
TXT Foot covering under subclass 88 wherein the configuration is shaped to the
    back part of a foot below and behind the ankle.


CLS 36/93
TXT Foot covering under subclass 88 wherein a substantial or a particular
    portion of the inside of the foot covering is configured to the shape of
    the wearer's foot.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117.6,  for a ski boot having interior padding or filling, and see (1) Note
    under subclass 119 for the difference.


CLS 36/94
TXT Foot covering under subclass 93 wherein the inside is configured to the
    shape of the digits at the front of a foot to provide space for movement of
    the digits within the foot covering.


CLS 36/95
TXT Foot covering under subclass 93 wherein the inside is configured to the
    shape of an extraneous hard growth on a toe or other portion of a foot.


CLS 36/96
TXT Foot covering under subclass 88 having a supplemental covering for a foot
    within a boot or shoe, or including a supplemental means for protecting the
    wearer's foot against injury.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass disclose the intended purpose of
    the foot shield as for absorbing moisture or guarding the foot against
    abrasion or impact.


CLS 36/97
TXT Foot covering under subclass 83 wherein the construction is such as to
    permit variation in the dimensions of the foot covering to accommodate
    variations in the dimensions of the wearer's foot.


CLS 36/98
TXT Foot covering under subclass 83 wherein the foot covering, or the material
    of which it is made, is subjected to an agent or action that tends to
    improve or enhance the foot-covering characteristics thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass disclose coating a shoe to
    waterproof it, applying chemicals to the shoe to strengthen the material
    thereof, or applying plastics for various purposes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87,     for a shoe manufactured of plastic material.


CLS 36/99
TXT Foot covering under subclass 83 constructed with a deliberate duplication
    of one of the portions usually found in a foot covering.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass disclose a shoe having two heels
    spaced apart to provide stability, or a shoe having two tongues.


CLS 36/100
TXT Foot covering under subclass 83 constructed so as to be changeable in type
    of foot covering or appearance thereof.


CLS 36/101
TXT Foot covering under subclass 100 constructed so as to permit that portion
    of a foot covering above the sole to be removed and replaced.


CLS 36/102
TXT Foot covering under subclass 83 constructed so as to permit yielding or
    bending of a portion thereof relative to the remainder thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for a rubber shoe.


CLS 36/103
TXT Foot covering under subclass 83 constructed with significance attributed to
    an outside portion of the foot covering which lies between the foot of the
    wearer and the ground or surface upon which the wearer walks.


CLS 36/104
TXT Foot covering under subclass 103 wherein said portion is substantially
    planar.


CLS 36/105
TXT Foot covering under subclass 83 constructed with significance attributed to
    that portion of the foot covering which supports, encloses or at least
    partially embraces the lower rear portion of the wearer's foot.

    (1)     Note. Patents in this subclass include those directed to a heel
    strap (i.e., a relatively narrow belt connected to the shoe and spaced from
    the inner heel of the shoe) and those directed to a heel- strap support
    (i.e., a member connecting the heel strap to the inner heel to keep the
    heel strap in position).


CLS 36/106
TXT Foot covering under subclass 83 constructed with significance attributed to
    the absence of a portion of the foot covering.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11.5,   for shoe, known as a "sandal", having similar construction.


CLS 36/107
TXT Foot covering under subclass 83 constructed with significance attributed to
    means for strengthening the foot covering.


CLS 36/108
TXT Foot covering under subclass 107 wherein the foot covering is strengthened
    in that portion thereof that lies between the broad ball of the wearer's
    foot and the heel of the wearer's foot.


CLS 36/109
TXT Foot covering under subclass 83 constructed with a part thereof to cover
    that portion of the wearer's leg which extends between the ankle and the
    knee.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the construction of a shoe, and
    particularly of its leg portion, is significant. For a ski boot wherein a
    leg extension is a part thereof, see subclass 118.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117.1   and 118.2+, and see (1) Note above.


CLS 36/110
TXT Foot covering under subclass 83, especially adapted to cover a foot that
    has been encased in a rigid surgical dressing.


CLS 36/111
TXT Foot covering under subclass 83 especially adapted to cover a foot that is
    part of a living thing that is not a plant and not a human.


CLS 36/112
TXT Foot covering under subclass 83 especially adapted to cover a foot that is
    part of a young person or a child's toy made in miniature to simulate a
    person.


CLS 36/113
TXT Foot covering under subclass 83 intended to be worn while the wearer
    thereof is participating in significant work activities or significant
    physically active sports activities.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass disclose such work-related
    activities as, for example, roof climbing (i.e., having specific portions
    on the shoe to grip the roof or compensate for its inclination), or
    painting (i.e., having means on the shoe with which to apply paint), or
    gardening.


CLS 36/114
TXT Foot covering under subclass 113 intended to be worn while the wearer
    thereof is participating in physically active sports activities; or a
    member that is auxiliary to a foot covering worn for sports activities,
    which member adds a function related to the sports activity, but not itself
    having a foot-covering function.

    (1)     Note.  Patents including a sports-related shoe accessory will be
    found in subclasses 132+ below. Patents including a shoe accessory not
    related to sports activities will be found in subclasses 136+ below.

    (2)     Note.  In the schedule of subclasses indented hereunder will be
    found subclasses pertaining to a shoe used in one of several
    particularly-named athletic activities. The differences between shoes found
    in each of the named subclasses are not necessarily large differences, but
    they are significant when considered in light of the special requirements
    peculiar to each of the named activities. The weight of the shoe, the
    material of which it is made, the design and placement of the spikes or
    cleats used to give traction or stability to the wearer, and the provision
    of means for fastening the shoe to the wearer or to equipment used in the
    particular activity, are all factors inherent in the design of a shoe
    intended for that athletic sport. This is not to imply that a shoe intended
    for a particular activity may not be worn for another activity, but does
    indicate that the differences between subclasses and shoes found therein
    are more than named differences, they are significant to the athletic
    activity for which the shoe is intended to be worn.


CLS 36/115
TXT Foot covering under subclass 114 intended to be worn while the wearer
    thereof is participating in sports activities wherein the wearer's foot
    covering has motion with respect to the surface that the foot covering
    contacts and is supported by.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass disclose shoes worn while skating,
    either on ice or on a floor.


CLS 36/116
TXT Foot covering under subclass 115 intended to be worn while moving over a
    surface that is not stable, that is, the particles or molecules that form
    the surface can move relative to each other.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass disclose shoes intended to be worn
    while "walking" on water or sand.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass usually disclose a boot that is
    especially padded to retain the boot on the foot, or having a filling of
    foam to insulate the wearer's foot as well as retain the boot on the foot.
    Such patents are found here rather than in subclass 93 above because the
    function of the filling is for retention of the ski boot on the wearer
    rather than for support of the foot.


CLS 36/117.1
TXT Ski Boot:

    Foot covering under subclass 116 wherein a sole and upper portion of the
    boot are configured or constructed to facilitate attachment     to a
    generally long, flat runner (e.g., ski) so as to enable         control of
    the ski.

    (1)     Note. Control of a ski by a ski boot wearer generally includes both
    the attachment of the boot to the ski and the configuration of the boot
    components which engage the foot, ankle, and leg portion of the wearer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50.5,   for a closure for a ski boot which is not claimed in combination
    with a ski boot.

    109,    for a leg portion of a boot, also see (1) Note.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., appropriate subclasses for a
    fastener of general utility which may be used to fasten a ski boot, see
    particularly subclasses 68-71 for a strap tightener.


CLS 36/117.2
TXT Cross-country ski boot:

    Foot covering under subclass 117.1 wherein toe and ankle portions of the
    boot are configured and constructed to provide the longitudinal flexibility
    necessary for use in cross-country or Nordic skiing.

    (1)     Note. The flexibility of a cross-country ski boot usually permits a
    heel to move freely upward out of contact with the ski.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 614 and 615 for cross-country ski boos
    with binding.


CLS 36/117.3
TXT Sole feature:

    Foot covering under subclass 117.1 wherein the portion of the ski  boot
    between the bottom of the wearer's foot and the bottom of the boot includes
    means to enhance skiing or walking related functions of the ski boot.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117.2,  for a boot with a sole intended for cross-country skiing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 611+ for: (1) a ski boot binding positively
    recited in combination with a ski boot or sole or (2) a binding component
    mounted on a ski, even when broadly recited, combine with a ski boot or (3)
    a component within a ski boot sole which dynamically reacts to forces
    encountered while skiing and is intended to cooperate with ski binding
    structure on the ski.


CLS 36/117.4
TXT For walking:

    Foot covering under subclass 117.3 wherein the sole includes means to
    facilitate walking without skis (e.g. hinged sole, curved sole, removable
    inner boot, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117.2,  for a boot with a sole facilitating walking intended for
    cross-country skiing.


CLS 36/117.5
TXT Canting, lifting, or orthopedic sole, midsole, or insole:

    Foot covering under subclass 117.3 wherein the sole, midsole, or insole
    includes means to modify the ski-foot interface by tilting, raising, or
    force redistribution of the user's foot to increase ski control or to
    correct for foot deformities.


CLS 36/117.6
TXT Having interior foot retaining means:

    Foot covering under subclass 117.1 wherein the upper portion includes an
    outer foot covering and inner foot holding means for firmly constraining a
    user's foot from movement within the boot.

    (1)     Note. Patents in this subclass usually disclose a boot that is
    specially padded to retain the boot on the user's foot, or having a filling
    of foam to insulate the user's foot as well as a retain the boot on the
    foot.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93,     for a boot with form fitting interior which supports the foot.


CLS 36/117.7
TXT With adjustment mechanism:

    Foot covering under subclass 117.6 wherein foot retaining means is combined
    with adjustable tensioning or compression means which cooperates with the
    interior foot retaining means to adjust the force applied to the user's
    foot.


CLS 36/117.8
TXT Retaining means engages rear of foot or leg:

    Foot covering under subclass 117.7 wherein the foot retaining means
    includes a foot engaging portion which applies force on the user's
    Achilles' tendon, rear of heel, or calf of a leg so as to urge the user's
    foot forward in the boot.


CLS 36/117.9
TXT Retaining means engages instep or shin:

    Foot covering means under subclass 117.7 wherein the foot retaining means
    includes a foot presser which urges the user's foot toward the heel portion
    of the boot engaging either the front upper portion of the foot above the
    metatarsals where the user's foot is substantially curved or the front of
    the user's lower leg.


CLS 36/118.1
TXT Adjustable mechanism includes flexible elongated member tensioned by boot
    closure or pivoting movement of boot upper:

    Foot covering under subclass 117.9 wherein the instep or shin engaging foot
    retaining means includes a cable or strap tensioning ("traction") means
    which is operated by closing the boot or the pivoting movement of the upper
    relative to the sole.


CLS 36/118.2
TXT Having pivotable upper:

    Foot covering under subclass 117.1 wherein the upper portion of the foot
    covering includes hinge means for oscillation of the upper hinged portion
    relative to the sole about a longitudinal or lateral axis of the boot.

    (1)     Note. Pivoting about a lateral axis of the boot provides for
    forward lean while pivoting about a longitudinal axis provides for canting
    of the boot upper and is usually locked in a desired position.

    (2)     Note. The hinge means can be a specially configured flexible area
    intended to permit relative movement between the upper and sole portions


CLS 36/118.3
TXT Adjustable pivot stiffness:

    Foot covering under subclass 118.2 wherein the pivotable upper includes
    means (e.g., spring, damper, etc.) to adjust the force required to cause
    the upper to pivot relative to the sole.


CLS 36/118.4
TXT And adjustable pivot range:

    Foot covering under subclass 118.3 wherein the pivotable upper further
    includes limiting means such as stops or cables, to adjust the bounds of
    oscillation relative to the sole.

    (1)     Note. Foot coverings found in this subclass usually include a stop
    to set a forward lean or rake angle while permitting additional movement in
    the forward direction.


CLS 36/118.5
TXT Forward mounted stiffness adjustment means:

    Foot covering under subclass 118.3 wherein the stiffness adjustment means
    is attached to the boot on a toe, instep, or front quarter of the ski boot.


CLS 36/118.6
TXT Flush instep mounted stiffness adjustment means:

    Foot covering under subclass 118.5 wherein the stiffness adjustment means
    is attached to a front curved portion of the boot upper and configured such
    that the stiffness adjustment means does not protrude from the boot shell.


CLS 36/118.7
TXT Locking pivot:

    Foot covering under subclass 118.2 wherein the pivotable upper includes
    means to maintain it at a prescribed angle to the sole.

    (1)     Note.  The locking device is usually used to hold the user's leg in
    a forward leaning position or rake angle while skiing but also includes
    devices which hold the user's ankle at an angle so as to effect canting of
    the ski.


CLS 36/118.8
TXT Adjustable pivot range:

    Foot covering under subclass 118.2 wherein the pivotable upper includes
    limiting means, such as a stop or cable, to adjust the bounds of
    oscillation relative to the sole.

    (1)     Note.  Foot coverings found in this subclass usually include a stop
    to set a forward lean or rake angle while permitting additional movement in
    the forward direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118.4,  for a ski boot having means to adjust pivot stiffness which also
    affect pivot range.


CLS 36/118.9
TXT Pivot on rear quarter:

    Foot covering under subclass 118.2 wherein the upper portion includes a
    hinged posterior section allowing for flexibility of the upper portion or
    the removal of the user's foot from the boot.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50.5,   for a closure for a ski boot where sufficient details of the boot
    are not claimed for placement in 117.1.


CLS 36/119.1
TXT Having semi-rigid upper with adjustable flexibility:

    Foot covering under subclass 117.1 wherein an upper portion of the foot
    covering includes a zone of adjustable stiffness and means to adjust the
    stiffness to allow a user's leg to pivot within the boot with respect to
    the sole.


CLS 36/122
TXT Foot covering under subclass 116 intended to be worn while walking on a
    surface formed by snow.

    (1)     Note.  The term "snow shoe" includes a) a foot covering that
    encases a wearer's foot while participating in the sports activity, and b)
    a piece of equipment of relatively large surface area that lies between a
    wearer's foot and the surface to distribute the weight of a wearer over a
    large surface.


CLS 36/123
TXT Foot covering under subclass 122 wherein the overall dimensions thereof may
    be reduced when it is not being worn, so as to increase the portability
    thereof.


CLS 36/124
TXT Foot covering under subclass 122 having means to reduce the possibility of
    sliding relative to the surface over which the wearer travels.


CLS 36/125
TXT Foot covering under subclass 122 having means for attaching the foot
    covering to the foot of the wearer in such manner that the wearer's foot
    may oscillate relative to the foot covering.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass are directed to the piece of
    equipment described in "b" of (1) Note to subclass 122, and to the pivotal
    binding that fastens the equipment to the wearer's foot.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 611 for a ski binding.


CLS 36/126
TXT Foot covering under subclass 114 intended to be worn while the wearer
    thereof is participating in the athletic activity known as baseball.


CLS 36/127
TXT Foot covering under subclass 114 intended to be worn while the wearer
    thereof is participating in the athletic activity known as golf.


CLS 36/128
TXT Foot covering under subclass 114 intended to be worn while the wearer
    thereof is participating in the athletic activity known as football.


CLS 36/129
TXT Foot covering under subclass 114 intended to be worn while the wearer
    thereof is participating in the athletic activity known as track.


CLS 36/130
TXT Foot covering under subclass 114 intended to be worn while the wearer
    thereof is participating in the athletic activity known as bowling.


CLS 36/131
TXT Foot covering under subclass 114 intended to be worn while the wearer
    thereof is participating in an athletic activity involving a
    self-propelled, wheeled vehicle, or an animal mounted by the wearer.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass disclose shoes worn by bicycle
    riders or equestrians.


CLS 36/132
TXT Member under subclass 114 that is auxiliary to a foot covering worn for
    athletic activities, which member adds a function related to an athletic
    activity, but not itself having a foot-covering function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136+,   for an accessory not related to athletics.


CLS 36/133
TXT Member under subclass 132 intended to be attached to a shoe that is being
    worn while the wearer thereof propels an object with the wearer's foot, the
    member having a face so related to the shoe as to direct the object in the
    intended direction of movement.


CLS 36/134
TXT Member under subclass 132 comprising a small portion for attachment to the
    sole of a shoe and intended to protrude from the surface of the sole for
    purpose of increasing traction between the shoe and the surface over which
    the wearer of the shoe is traveling.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass disclose a cleat that is movable
    relative to the shoe or detachable therefrom.


CLS 36/135
TXT Member under subclass 134 comprising means to cover the protrusions or
    protect a surface against the action of the protrusions.

    (1)     Note.  The blocking device covers the sole temporarily while the
    wearer is walking over a surface which would be injured by cleats, and is
    removed when the wearer is to walk on the surface where the activity is
    participated on.


CLS 36/136
TXT Foot covering member under subclass 83 that is auxiliary to a foot
    covering, which member adds to the foot covering a function not having a
    foot-covering function.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass disclose such nonshoe members as an
    ornament, a pocket on the shoe, a weapon for attachment to a shoe, and etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132+,   for an accessory to an athletic shoe.


CLS 36/137
TXT Member under subclass 136 including means attached to a foot covering that
    uses visible radiant energy that is cast back from itself or that
    originates from itself to make the means visible or cast radiant energy to
    make the surrounding environment visible.


CLS 36/138
TXT Member under subclass 136 attached to a foot covering, which member makes
    it easier for the wearer to take the foot covering off the wearer's foot,
    or to put the foot covering on the wearer's foot than would be possible
    without the attached member.


CLS 36/139
TXT Member under subclass 136 attached to a foot covering, which member
    generates sound. Appliance under the class definition comprising a foot
    correcting device which is placed within or forms a part of a boot or shoe.


CLS 36/140
TXT ORTHOPEDIC BOOT OR SHOE WITH CORRECTIVE ELEMENT:

    Appliance under the class definition comprising a foot correcting device
    which is placed within or forms a part of a boot or shoe.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of simplifying the definitions, the simple
    terms "boot" or "shoe" shall be construed to be inclusive of both boots and
    shoes unless otherwise indicated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclass 142 for processes of making shoes,
    including orthopedic shoes, and subclass 146 for processes of making shoe
    parts including orthopedic devices such as arch supports.


CLS 36/141
TXT With means to massage foot:

    Appliances under subclass 140 in which the shoe includes means to provide
    rubbing, stroking, kneading, or similar contact of the foot with the shoe
    during walking.

    (1)     Note.  Usually intended to increase the circulation of blood.


CLS 36/142
TXT With means to turn foot about long axis of leg:

    Appliances under subclass 140 in which the shoe includes means to correct
    the angle of the forepart of the foot about the heel in relation to the
    longitudinal axis of the leg.

    (1)     Note.   (e.g., to correct "Pigeon Toes").


CLS 36/143
TXT With means to turn foot about its long axis:

    Appliances under subclass 142 in which the shoe also includes means to
    control the foot from tilting about its longitudinal axis.


CLS 36/144
TXT With means to turn foot about its long axis:

    Appliances under subclass 140 in which the shoe includes means to control
    the foot from tilting about its long axis.


CLS 36/145
TXT Arch support:

    Appliances under subclass 140 in which the correcting device is a support
    which acts on one or more of the arches of a foot.


CLS 36/146
TXT With suction retaining means:

    Appliances under subclass 145 in which the supporting means is retained in
    the shoe by means providing a subatmospheric pressure at a shoe engaging
    surface.


CLS 36/147
TXT With ventilating means:

    Appliances under subclass 145 in which the support includes means to
    provide air circulation to all or part of it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for all modifications of a boot and its parts to ventilate it.


CLS 36/148
TXT Comprising outside shank stiffener:

    Appliances under subclass 145 in which the supporting means includes means
    external to the shoe and located beneath the shank of the shoe for
    providing support to the longitudinal arch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclass 76 for stiffening pieces
    inserted in the shank or waist of a shoe to preserve the arch of the sole.


CLS 36/149
TXT Shank integral with heel or sole:

    Appliances under subclass 148 in which the supporting means comprises a
    component part of a monolithic heel or sole.


CLS 36/150
TXT Adjustable:

    Appliances under subclass 148 in which the support includes means for
    varying its height or position with respect to the shank of the shoe.


CLS 36/151
TXT Including metal spring means:

    Appliances under subclass 148 in which the supporting means includes a
    metal spring attachment to cushion the foot in walking.


CLS 36/152
TXT Metal plate only:

    Appliances under subclass 148 in which the supporting means consists solely
    of a metal plate.


CLS 36/153
TXT Comprising fluid cushion:

    Appliances under subclass 145 in which the supporting means includes a
    fluid material, for providing a flexible support for a portion of the foot.


CLS 36/154
TXT Comprising a moldable composition, e.g., "plastic":

    Appliances under subclass 145 in which the support is formed from material,
    which is initially pliable or impressionable and subsequently hardens to a
    self-shape-sustaining state.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are supports formed of phenol resins, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153,    for materials which do not attain a condition wherein they are
    self-shape-sustaining.


CLS 36/155
TXT Adjustable position or shape:

    Appliances under subclass 145 in which the support is provided with means,
    for selectively altering its inserted location in the shoe or its shape or
    form.


CLS 36/156
TXT By screw means:

    Appliances under subclass 155 in which the support is provided with
    helically threaded means, for varying the height or configuration  of the
    support.


CLS 36/157
TXT With multiple screws:

    Appliances under subclass 156 in which the support is provided with a
    plurality of helically  threaded means, for varying the height or
    configuration of the support.


CLS 36/158
TXT By spring placement:

    Appliances under subclass 155 in which the support is provided with a
    movable resiliently flexible device, for varying the height or
    configuration of the support.


CLS 36/159
TXT By shims:

    Appliances under subclass 155 in which the support is provided with
    multiple separate or  separable layers, for varying the height or the
    configuration of the support by the addition or removal of one or more
    layers.


CLS 36/160
TXT With plural selective positioning means:

    Appliances under subclass 155 in which the support and shoe or shoe part
    are provided with coacting means, which hold the support in the desired
    position in the shoe.


CLS 36/161
TXT Comprising alternately usable fastening elements on insert:

    Appliances under subclass 160 in which the support is provided with means
    to cooperatively engage in a correspondingly located hole or holes or
    recess or recesses formed in the covering or stiff plate, for placement of
    the support as desired or as needed.


CLS 36/162
TXT Comprising prongs:

    Appliances under subclass 161 in which the support is provided with prongs,
    for placement of the support as desired or as needed.


CLS 36/163
TXT Comprising snap fasteners:

    Appliances under subclass 161 in which the support is provided with snap
    fasteners, for placement of the support as desired or as needed.


CLS 36/164
TXT Comprising multiple alternately usable pockets:

    Appliances under subclass 160 in which the supporting means includes
    multiple pockets to receive a pad to be placed in one of the selected
    pockets.


CLS 36/165
TXT With pockets:

    Appliances under subclass 155 in which the supporting means is provided
    with pockets to receive variously sized pads.


CLS 36/166
TXT For the longitudinal arch:

    Appliances under subclass 145 in which the supporting means underlies the
    longitudinal arch of the foot and supports this portion of the foot.


CLS 36/167
TXT Single rigid metal plate only:

    Appliances under subclass 166 in which the support for the longitudinal
    arch consists solely of an inflexible metal plate.


CLS 36/168
TXT Including metal spring means:

    Appliances under subclass 166 in which the support includes a resiliently
    flexible metal device, for supporting the longitudinal arch of the foot.


CLS 36/169
TXT Built into boot or shoe:

    Appliances under subclass 166 in which the support for the longitudinal
    arch of the foot is built into the shoe during the manufacture of the shoe.


CLS 36/170
TXT Sling type:

    Appliances under subclass 169 in which the support consists of a strap
    suspended in the shoe, for supporting the longitudinal arch of the foot.


CLS 36/171
TXT Including arch-contacting metal plate:

    Appliances under subclass 169 in which the support also includes a metal
    plate, for supporting the arch of the foot.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76,     for stiffening pieces inserted in the shank or waist of a shoe to
    preserve the arch of the sole.


CLS 36/172
TXT Wedge on sole only:

    Appliances under subclass 169 in which the support consists solely of a
    wedge-shaped member secured on the sole portion of the shoe, for supporting
    the longitudinal arch of the foot.


CLS 36/173
TXT With heel support:

    Appliances under subclass 166 in which the support underlies the heel and
    longitudinal arch of the foot, and has means for supporting those portions
    of the foot.


CLS 36/174
TXT And metatarsal support:

    Appliances under subclass 173 in which the supporting means also includes
    means for underlying the metatarsal arch of the foot, and has means for
    supporting that portion of the foot.


CLS 36/175
TXT With metal reinforcing means:

    Appliances under subclass 174 in which the supporting means also includes
    metal reinforcing means to stiffen and preserve the supporting means.


CLS 36/176
TXT Integral:

    Appliances under subclass 174 in which the supporting means comprises an
    integral structure, for supporting the heel, longitudinal, and metatarsal
    arches of the foot.


CLS 36/177
TXT Metal plate only:

    Appliances under subclass 176 in which the supporting means consists solely
    of a metal plate.


CLS 36/178
TXT Comprising multiple layers:

    Appliances under subclass 174 in which the supporting means is made up of
    several laminae which supports the heel, longitudinal, and metatarsal
    arches.


CLS 36/179
TXT Including metal spring means:

    Appliances under subclass 174 in which the supporting means includes metal
    spring means, for supporting the heel, longitudinal, and metatarsal arches.


CLS 36/180
TXT With metatarsal support:

    Appliances under subclass 166 in which the supporting means underlies the
    longitudinal arch and the metatarsal arch of a foot, and has means for
    supporting those portions of the foot.


CLS 36/181
TXT Comprising multiple layers:

    Appliances under subclass 166 in which the supporting means is made up of
    at least two layers which support the longitudinal arch of the foot.


CLS 36/182
TXT Metatarsal support integral with shank stiffener:

    Appliances under subclass 145 in which the supporting means comprises a
    shank stiffener provided with means to underlie and support the metatarsal
    arch of a foot.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76,     for stiffening pieces inserted in the shank or waist  of a shoe to
    preserve the arch of the sole.


CLS 37/
TTL EXCAVATING

CLS 37/
TXT This class relates to the broad art of digging, moving, and handling
    material. This class includes method or apparatus for the removal of a
    tree, stone, soil, or snow from an in situ location, either on the earth's
    surface or beneath a body of water.

    (1)     Note.  For the relationship between Class 172, Earth Working, and
    Class 37 see the Class Definition of Class 172, (1) Note and the Search
    Class Notes.

    (2)     Note.  The following classes contain art relating to this class,
    but special in application:  Classes 15, Brushing, Scrubbing, and General
    Cleaning; 44, Fuel and Related Compositions; 56, Harvesters; 104, Railways;
    111, Planting; 125, Stone Working; 166, Wells; 171, Unearthing Plants or
    Buried Objects; 175, Boring or Penetrating the Earth. (See sections IV and
    V of the class definition of Class 175 for the line between Class 37 and
    Class 175); 198, Conveyors:  Power-Driven; 209 Classifying, Separating, and
    Assorting Solids; 212, Traversing Hoists; 241, Solid Material Comminution
    or Disintegration (see section 9 of the Class Definition of that class for
    the line); 294, Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements; 299, Mining or
    In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material (see section V of the class
    definition of Class 299 for the line); 406, Conveyors: Fluid Current; 366,
    Agitating; 404, Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus; 405, Hydraulic and
    Earth Engineering; and 414, Material or Article Handling.  Hence patents
    properly classifiable in these classes would be excluded from this class
    (37).


    GLOSSARY

    APRON
    This device is the pivotally mounted front covering for a scoop adapted to
    pivot to an open position when loading and unloading and to a closed
    position when holding and transporting material.

    BACKHOE
    This is a material handling machine which includes a boom pivoted to a
    vehicle, a handle or dipstick pivoted to the boom, and bucket or scoop
    pivoted to the dipstick with the open top of the bucket facing back toward
    the vehicle.

    BOOM
    This is a device comprising an elongated beam adapted to project from an
    excavating device for the purpose of supporting the excavating equipment
    and wherein the device is normally pivoted to a support.

    BOWL
    This device is a portion of a scoop which holds and carries the excavated
    material during transport. The scoop portion can be adapted to be used in
    connection with an apron, elevator, or ejector.

    CLAMSHELL
    This device is an excavating or handling tool having two similar jaws which
    close upon material for excavating and open for dumping.

    DREDGE
    This is a machine for excavating material at the bottom or the banks of a
    body of water.

    EARTH
    This term is applied to the fragmental material composing part of the
    surface of the globe.

    GROUND
    This term is applied to the solid surface of the earth or the floor of a
    body of water, especially a sea, river, or lake.

    ORANGE-PEEL
    This implement comprises an excavating tool having two hemispherical jaws
    which close upon material for excavating and open when dumping.

    SPUD
    In a dredge, this is an elongated member provided with a lifting tackle at
    the top and fused to hold or remove the dredge by contact with the earth.

    GENERAL NOTE:
    WHEREVER THE DRAWINGS ARE ASSOCIATED WITH THE DEFINITIONS, THEY ARE MERELY
    USED TO ILLUSTRATE THE BASIC CONCEPT ENCOMPASSED BY THE DEFINITION OF THAT
    SUBCLASS AND SHOULD NOT BE CONSTRUED AS LIMITING THE SCOPE OF THE SUBJECT
    MATTER COVERED BY THAT SUBCLASS.


CLS 37/3
TXT Devices under the class definition for excavating peat.

    (1)     Note.  Compare Class 44, Fuel and Related Compositions, subclasses
    630+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 19 for sod cutters.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, appropriate
    subclass for subject matter relating to the mining of coal.


CLS 37/91
TXT Apparatus under subclass 347 wherein the digger is a wheel.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 393.


CLS 37/92
TXT Apparatus under subclass 91 wherein the axis of the digging wheel extends
    longitudinally of the ditch.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses  209+, 244+, and 331.


CLS 37/93
TXT Apparatus under subclass 92 wherein the excavator delivers to a conveyor.


CLS 37/94
TXT Apparatus under subclass 91 wherein the axis of the excavator extends
    across the axis of the ditch.


CLS 37/95
TXT Apparatus under subclass 94 wherein the excavator delivers to a conveyor.


CLS 37/96
TXT Apparatus under subclass 95 wherein an endless conveyor runs longitudinally
    of the ditch.


CLS 37/97
TXT Apparatus under subclass 95 wherein an endless conveyor extends crosswise
    of the ditch.


CLS 37/104
TXT Devices under the class definition forming the bed or slopes of a railway.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 353+.

    (2)     Note.  Compare Class 104, Railways, subclass 2.


CLS 37/105
TXT Devices under subclass 104 for working on the sides of a railway and
    shaping the bed.


CLS 37/106
TXT Devices under subclass 105 wherein the earthworking implement is some form
    of scoop or shovel.


CLS 37/107
TXT Devices under subclass 106 wherein the scoop delivers to an endless
    conveyor.


CLS 37/142.5
TXT Apparatus under the class definition which is specially adapted to place
    earth in a ditch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    395,    for a cable-operated boom-type scraper or the like adapted to place
    earth in a ditch.


CLS 37/182
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising grab buckets having more
    than two grapples.


CLS 37/184
TXT Subject matter under subclass 461 wherein each side grapple has a common
    pivot on which they are hinged together.


CLS 37/185
TXT Subject matter under subclass 184 wherein the operating levers extend from
    each shell and cross each other at the common pivot.


CLS 37/186
TXT Subject matter under subclass 461 wherein each shell grapple is pivoted on
    a separate pivot close together.


CLS 37/187
TXT Subject matter under subclass 461 wherein the pivots are spaced far apart
    on the supporting frame.


CLS 37/188
TXT Subject matter under subclass 461 wherein the shells are connected
    indirectly to the support by means of links.


CLS 37/189
TXT General miscellaneous subclass under the class definition with the rotary
    excavators.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 209+, 238, 242+, 244+, 326+,
    350+, 351, 355, and 357.

    (2)     Note.  Compare Class 198, Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclass 9.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, appropriate subclasses for a
    rotary tool for boring into the earth and particularly subclasses 327+ for
    a rotary type bit or bit element adapted for boring into the earth.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, appropriate
    subclass, and particularly subclass 101 and see the search notes therein
    for a rotary type cutter for mining or disintegrating hard material in situ.


CLS 37/190
TXT Subject matter under subclass 189 wherein the digger delivers material to
    an endless conveyor.


CLS 37/195
TXT Methods under the class definition of excavating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    197,    for a method of excavating snow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 57+ for processes of
    earth boring.


CLS 37/196
TXT SNOW OR ICE REMOVING OR GROOMING BY PORTABLE DEVICE:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to either (a) a process
    of clearing snow or ice from a surface, or preparing snow or ice for
    passage thereover, by the use of the movable excavating apparatus; or (b)
    the excavating apparatus or a component part thereof.


CLS 37/197
TXT Process:

    A method under subclass 196 including steps performed when either clearing
    the surface or preparing the snow or ice.


CLS 37/198
TXT Railway clearer:

    Apparatus under subclass 196 adapted to remove snow or ice from a railroad
    trackway.


CLS 37/199
TXT With melter:

    Apparatus under subclass 198 including means for changing the excavated
    snow or ice from its solid state to a liquid state.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227,    for a general purpose snow excavator with melter, and see search
    notes therein for reference to other classes.


CLS 37/200
TXT Heated plow:

    Apparatus under subclass 199 including a transversely extending, generally
    vertically disposed moldboard, wherein heat is supplied to the moldboard.


CLS 37/201
TXT Explosive:

    Apparatus under subclass 198 including means for blasting through snow or
    ice with an explosive.


CLS 37/202
TXT Fluid current conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 198 wherein snow or ice is transported by a stream
    of flowable material.


CLS 37/203
TXT For clearing single rail of set:

    Apparatus under subclass 198 wherein the trackway includes a plurality of
    rails, and including an implement adapted to remove snow or ice from an
    individual rail of the plurality.

    (1)     Note.  There may be a plurality of implements, each removing snow
    or ice from a different rail.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclasses 279+ for a device which clears a track of
    material other than snow or ice.


CLS 37/204
TXT Electrified rail:

    Apparatus under subclass 203 including an implement adapted to remove snow
    or ice from a rail which carries electricity.


CLS 37/205
TXT Including rotary excavating tool:

    Apparatus under subclass 203 which includes an implement fixed to a shaft
    adapted to rotate when in use.


CLS 37/206
TXT And scraper blade:

    Apparatus under subclass 205 also including a transversely extending,
    generally vertically disposed moldboard.


CLS 37/207
TXT Including means clearing side of, or groove in, rail:

    Apparatus under subclass 203 wherein the implement includes a portion
    depending vertically below the top of the rail and functioning to remove
    snow or ice either alongside the rail or within a slot formed in the
    surface of the rail.


CLS 37/208
TXT With endless conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 198 including a closed loop, belt or chain-type
    conveying means.


CLS 37/209
TXT Having rotary excavating tool:

    Apparatus under subclass 198 including an implement fixed to a shaft
    adapted to rotate when in use.


CLS 37/210
TXT Plural rotary tools:

    Apparatus under subclass 209 wherein a plurality of implements is carried
    either by a plurality of rotary shafts, each carrying an implement, or by a
    single rotary shaft.


CLS 37/211
TXT Diverse tools performing different stages of operation:

    Apparatus under subclass 210 wherein the implements are differently
    configured, adapted to accomplish various steps in the process of
    excavating snow or ice.


CLS 37/212
TXT And V-shaped scraper blade:

    Apparatus under subclass 210 including a generally vertically disposed
    moldboard having two working faces angled relative to one another about a
    generally vertical axis, diverging from an apex to ends on opposite sides
    of the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  The working faces have a V-configuration in plain view.


CLS 37/213
TXT Screw-type auger:

    Apparatus under subclass 209 wherein the implement comprises a helical vane
    means arranged to rotate upon its axis.


CLS 37/214
TXT Having scraper blade:

    Apparatus under subclass 198 including a transversely extending, generally
    vertically disposed moldboard.


CLS 37/215
TXT Inclined plane with V-divider:

    Apparatus under subclass 214 wherein the moldboard includes a pair of
    working faces angled  relative to one another about a generally vertical
    axis, the moldboard being carried by a substantially horizontal base plate
    sloping upwardly from its leading edge.


CLS 37/216
TXT Having auxiliary blade or shiftable divider:

    Apparatus under subclass 215 wherein either the moldboard, or an
    additionally vertically disposed moldboard, is mounted for angular
    adjustment upon the base plate.


CLS 37/217
TXT V-shaped:

    Apparatus under subclass 214 wherein the moldboard includes a pair of
    working faces angled relative to one another about a generally vertical
    axis, diverging from an apex to ends on opposite sides of the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  The working faces have a V-configuration in plain view.


CLS 37/218
TXT Diagonal:

    Apparatus under subclass 214 wherein the moldboard is obliquely angled
    about a generally vertical axis relative to its intended direction of
    motion.


CLS 37/219
TXT Snow or ice surface groomer:

    Apparatus under subclass 196 adapted to prepare a layer of snow or ice for
    use as a support surface.

    (1)     Note.  The layer may be prepared for use as a ski trail, a
    snowmobile trail, an ice-skating rink, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclass for or ice-making apparatus.

    104,    Railways, subclass 136 for sledways having an ice track.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 24+
    for ice-harvesting devices.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 90+ for
    road-building apparatus with means for in situ comminution of surface
    material.


CLS 37/220
TXT Including rut cutter:

    Apparatus under subclass 219 which includes means adapted to cut a groove
    in the surface.


CLS 37/221
TXT Having diverse tools:

    Apparatus under subclass 219 including a plurality of implements having
    different sizes,  shapes,  or character of operation.


CLS 37/222
TXT Including rotary tool:

    Apparatus under subclass 221 including an implement fixed to a shaft
    adapted to rotate when in use.


CLS 37/223
TXT Having rotary tool:

    Apparatus under subclass 219 including an implement fixed to a shaft
    adapted to rotate when in use.


CLS 37/224
TXT Compacting roller:

    Apparatus under subclass 223 wherein the tool is a cylindrical member
    adapted to roll over and compress the layer of snow or ice.


CLS 37/225
TXT With compressor die:

    Apparatus under subclass 196 including a device for compacting and molding
    the excavated snow or ice.

    (1)     Note.  An example of apparatus found herein is one wherein snow is
    excavated and subsequently pressed into a given shape and size.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclass for a compressor die, per se.


CLS 37/226
TXT And heater:

    Apparatus under subclass 225 including means for adding heat to the snow or
    ice.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 92+ for a compressor die with heater, per se.


CLS 37/227
TXT With melter:

    Apparatus under subclass 196 including a means for changing the excavated
    snow or ice from it solid state to a fluid state.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 12.2 for a motorized harvester using heat form
    the engine.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 271.1+ for in situ melting by a
    surface heater; and subclass 343.5 for a melting furnace, per se.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 650+ for a
    scatterer for a solid material which causes melting.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 70 for a material which causes in situ
    melting of snow or ice.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 3+
    for the in situ conversion from solid to fluid of a material within the
    earth.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 77 and 79 for a
    method for building a road with material other than ice or snow, wherein
    the material is heated; and subclass 95 for apparatus for building a road
    with material other than ice or snow, wherein the material is heated.


CLS 37/228
TXT Having heated transport chamber:

    Apparatus under subclass 227 including a receptacle adapted to receive and
    carry the liquified snow or ice, and means for supplying heat to the
    receptacle.


CLS 37/229
TXT Electric or solar heat source:

    Apparatus under subclass 228 wherein the means for heating the receptacle
    uses energy produced either by electricity or by the sun.


CLS 37/230
TXT Manually powered:

    Apparatus under subclass 227 wherein a human being provides the power to
    either move or operate the heated excavator.


CLS 37/231
TXT With specific means to facilitate connection to, or disconnection from,
    vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 196 including means adapted to expedite the
    attachment or detachment of the implement to a vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 272+ for means to facilitate mounting an
    earthworking implement on a vehicle; and subclass 817 for an earthworking
    blade removably attached to a vehicle.


CLS 37/232
TXT Vehicle mount with obstacle responsive trip, or yieldable tool (e.g.,
    brush):

    Apparatus under subclass 196 wherein either (a) means is provided for
    attaching an excavating implement to a vehicle, including means permitting
    the implement to shift with respect to the vehicle when it contacts an
    obstacle, or (b) an excavating implement itself includes a portion which
    yields when it contacts an obstacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 10.4 for a harvester having a cutter unit
    which retracts in response to an obstruction.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 261+ for an earthworking tool which
    retracts in response to an overload.


CLS 37/233
TXT Resilient impeller or blade:

    Apparatus under subclass 232 including either a van means carried by a
    shaft, or a moldboard, which contains either an elastically deformable
    portion or a plurality of segments mounted elastically relative to one
    another.


CLS 37/234
TXT Including specific hydraulic control system to position implement:

    Apparatus under subclass 196 wherein adjustment of an excavating implement
    relative to a carrying means is performed by a control system which
    incorporates fluid circuitry and includes means for producing or
    controlling fluid pressure within the system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclass for a
    hydraulic motor, per se.

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 812 for an hydraulic system controlling an
    earthworking blade.


CLS 37/235
TXT Vehicle mount including power lift:

    Apparatus under subclass 196 including means to connect an excavating
    implement to a vehicle, and a power system for vertically moving the
    implement.

    (1)     Note.  The purpose of the power system might be either to adjust
    the excavating height of the implement, or to raise the implement for
    transporting it.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 452+ for power means to lift an
    earthworking implement for transporting; and subclasses 828+ for power
    means to lift an earthworking blade.


CLS 37/236
TXT Power means is hydraulically actuated piston:

    Apparatus under subclass 235 in which the power system includes a piston
    axially movable within a cylinder by liquid pressure.


CLS 37/237
TXT With endless conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 196 including a closed loop, belt or chain-type
    conveying means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305,    for a self-loading vehicle, other than a snow or ice excavating
    apparatus, which includes an endless conveyor.

    SEARCH  CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 33 for earthworking apparatus including a
    power driven, endless conveyor.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclass for an endless
    conveyor, per se.


CLS 37/238
TXT And rotary excavating tool:

    Apparatus under subclass 237 including an implement fixed to a shaft
    adapted to rotate when in use.


CLS 37/239
TXT Multistage conveyors:

    Apparatus under subclass 237 including a plurality of various closed loop
    conveying means, the various means each adapted to accomplish a different
    step in the excavating process.


CLS 37/240
TXT Carrying excavating tool:

    Apparatus under subclass 237 wherein the conveying means carries an
    implement adapted to scrape snow or ice from the surface to be cleared.


CLS 37/241
TXT Combined or convertible:

    Apparatus under subclass 196 having means associated therewith for
    performing some function, normally the subject matter of another class, in
    addition to the basic operation of excavation; or which can by an
    adjustment, addition, removal, or reassembly of one or more of its parts
    become basic subject matter or another class.


CLS 37/242
TXT Rotary excavating tool:

    Apparatus under subclass 241 including an implement fixed to a shaft
    adapted to rotate when in use.


CLS 37/243
TXT Lawnmower:

    Apparatus under subclass 242 combined with, or convertible to, apparatus
    adapted to cut grass.


CLS 37/244
TXT Motorized rotary excavating tool:

    Apparatus under subclass 196 including an implement fixed to a shaft driven
    rotationally by a mechanical power means when in use.


CLS 37/245
TXT Tool arresting means responsive to sensed condition:

    Apparatus under subclass 244 including means reacting to a sensed operating
    condition encountered by the apparatus which interrupts the rotation of the
    shaft.


CLS 37/246
TXT Electric motor drive:

    Apparatus under subclass 244 wherein the shaft is driven by an electric
    motor.


CLS 37/247
TXT Rotor shaft adjustable relative to direction of travel:

    Apparatus under subclass 244 including means to adjust the shaft to any one
    of a plurality of selected angular orientations with respect to the
    intended direction of motion.


CLS 37/248
TXT Diverse multistage rotary tools or tool portions (e.g., feeding and
    throwing, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 244 including either a plurality of differently
    configured rotary implements, or a rotary implements having a plurality of
    a differently configured sections, the implements or sections adapted to
    accomplish various steps in the process of excavating snow or ice.

    (1)     Note.  An example of the apparatus found in this subclass and its
    indents comprises a first rotary implement feeding snow to a second rotary
    implement, which throws the snow and away from the apparatus.


CLS 37/249
TXT Including screw-type auger for first stage:

    Apparatus under subclass 248 wherein the implement or section adapted to
    accomplish the primary step comprises a helical vane means arranged to
    rotate upon its axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclasses 53+ for a general purpose,
    fluid current conveyor cooperating with a driven screw-type conveyor.


CLS 37/250
TXT Augers on separate shafts:

    Apparatus under subclass 249 including a plurality of shafts carrying
    helical vane means.


CLS 37/251
TXT And centrifugal impeller for final stage:

    Apparatus under subclass 249 wherein the implement or section adapted to
    accomplish the last setup includes a generally radially projecting vane
    means which transports snow or ice by centrifugal force.


CLS 37/252
TXT Auger and impeller on single shaft:

    Apparatus under subclass 251 wherein both the helical vane means and the
    planar vane means are carried by the same shaft.


CLS 37/253
TXT Fed by scraper blade:

    Apparatus under subclass 244 wherein snow or ice is directed to the
    rotating implement by a transversely extending, generally vertically
    disposed moldboard.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    267+,   for a scraper blade, per se.


CLS 37/254
TXT Including screw-type auger:

    Apparatus under subclass 253 wherein the implement comprises a helical vane
    means arranged to rotate upon its axis.


CLS 37/255
TXT Augers on separate shafts:

    Apparatus under subclass 254 including a plurality of shafts carrying
    helical vane means.


CLS 37/256
TXT Including centrifugal impeller:

    Apparatus under subclass 253 wherein the implement includes a generally
    radially projecting vane means adapted to transport snow or ice centrifugal
    force.


CLS 37/257
TXT Screw-type auger:

    Apparatus under subclass 244 wherein the implement comprises a helical vane
    means arranged to rotate upon its axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 657+ for a screw-type
    conveyor, per se.


CLS 37/258
TXT Having plural vane segments:

    Apparatus under subclass 257 wherein the vanes means comprises a plurality
    of plate-like elements secured to the shaft.


CLS 37/259
TXT Centrifugal impeller:

    Apparatus under subclass 244 wherein the implement includes a generally
    radially projecting vane means adapted to transport snow or ice by
    centrifugal force.


CLS 37/260
TXT Having specific flow guide:

    Apparatus under subclass 244 wherein significance is attributed to a guide
    means adapted to control the flow path of snow or ice being discharged from
    the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  A guide means found herein generally comprises either a
    chute or a deflector shield.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, subclasses 2+ for a
    chute, per se.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Drive, subclasses 640 and 641 for a chute or
    deflector controlling discharge from a throwing conveyor for general use.


CLS 37/261
TXT Having motor powered adjustment:

    Apparatus under subclass 260 wherein the flow guide can be adjusted by a
    mechanical power means.

    (1)     Note.  Adjustment of the guide means functions to change the
    discharge flow path.


CLS 37/262
TXT Vane within chute controls flow path:

    Apparatus under subclass 260 including a thin, substantially flat
    deflecting element situated within the discharge flow path whereby the
    direction of the flow is controlled.


CLS 37/263
TXT Tool prepares wheel path for passage of wheel:

    Apparatus under subclass 196 having an implement adapted to be attached at
    one side of a vehicle, wherein the implement clears only a path at the one
    side.

    (1)     Note.  The implement may be duplicated on the other side of the
    vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203+,   for a railway clearer including an implement adapted to clear only
    one rail of a plurality.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 833 for an earthworking scraper blade which
    prepares a wheel path for passage of the wheel.


CLS 37/264
TXT Scoop:

    Apparatus under subclass 196 having an excavating implement which includes
    a bottom enclosed upon three sides by vertically extending walls and an
    open fourth side at its front.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304+,   for a general purpose self-loading vehicle.

    403+,   for a general purpose scraper convertible to a scoop.

    411+,   for a general purpose excavating scoop, per se.


CLS 37/265
TXT Manually powered:

    Apparatus under subclass 264 wherein a human being provides the power to
    move or operate the scoop.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 54.5 for a
    hand-operated snow shovel which may have relatively abbreviated lips on
    three sides; and subclass 55 for a general purpose hand-operated scoop.


CLS 37/266
TXT Scraper blade:

    Apparatus under subclass 196 including a transversely extending, generally
    vertically disposed moldboard which has a working face fixed to a carrying
    means, adapted to deflect or push snow from the surface to be cleared, and
    a cutting edge at the base of the working face adapted to scrape snow from
    a surface and feed it to the working face.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    446+,   for a cutting edge, per se, adapted to be fixed to a scoop.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 701.1+ for an earthworking moldboard, per
    se; subclasses 781+ for an earthworking moldboard mounted intermediate to
    the front and rear of a vehicle; and subclasses 810+ for an earthworking
    moldboard mounted on the front of a vehicle.


CLS 37/267
TXT Invertible:

    Apparatus under subclass 266 wherein the moldboard can be reversed top to
    bottom.

    (1)     Note.  Reversing the moldboard in this manner makes it possible to
    use either the upper or lower edge of the moldboard as a cutting edge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 34 for an earthworking implement which is
    adapted to be used upside down.


CLS 37/268
TXT Pulled (e.g., by horse or vehicle):

    Apparatus under subclass 266 including a moldboard adapted to be drawn by a
    propelling means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 684.5 for a frame supported, earthworking
    blade drawn by a vehicle; and subclass 799.5 for a towed earthworking blade
    with ground support wheels.


CLS 37/269
TXT V-shaped:

    Apparatus under subclass 268 wherein the moldboard includes a pair of
    working faces angled relative to one another about a generally vertical
    axis and diverging from an apex to ends on opposite sides of the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  The working faces have a V-configuration in plan view.


CLS 37/270
TXT Mounted on surface contacting support or guide:

    Apparatus under subclass 266 having auxiliary means attached to the
    moldboard for either supporting it upon the surface, or giving it direction.

    (1)     Note.  The support or guide may comprise either a skid or a wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 832 for an earthworking scraper blade
    carrying ground support means.


CLS 37/271
TXT For adjusting height of blade:

    Apparatus under subclass 270 wherein the moldboard can be adjusted to a
    plurality of elevations above the support means.


CLS 37/272
TXT V-shaped:

    Apparatus under subclass 266 wherein the moldboard includes a pair of
    working faces angled relative to one another about a generally vertical
    axis and diverging from an apex to ends on opposite sides of the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  The working faces have a V-configuration in plan view.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 732 and 733 for a triangular or V-shaped
    blade for earthworking.


CLS 37/273
TXT Adjustable or collapsible apex:

    Apparatus under subclass 272 wherein the angle of divergence is adapted to
    be varied.

    (1)     Note.  The angle might be varied either to change the angle of
    attack of the working faces when in use, or to facilitate storage of the
    plow.


CLS 37/274
TXT And auxiliary wing or extension:

    Apparatus under subclass 272 including an additional moldboard-like element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for an apparatus for forming a railway slope.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 782 for a road grader with a laterally
    offset, inclined shoulder forming blade; subclasses 786+ for a road grader
    having plural blades; and subclass 815 for a bulldozer having plural blades.


CLS 37/275
TXT Top flap:

    Apparatus under subclass 274 wherein the auxiliary wing or extension is a
    moldboard like element adapted to be attached adjacent and parallel to the
    top edge of its primary moldboard.

    (1)     Note.  A common function of a top flap is to prevent snow or ice
    from blowing over the plow.


CLS 37/276
TXT Diverging forwardly:

    Apparatus under subclass 272 wherein, when the moldboard is moving in its
    intended direction for use, the apex follows the working faces.


CLS 37/277
TXT Supported on inclined plane:

    Apparatus under subclass 272 wherein the working faces are carried by a
    substantially horizontal base plate sloping upwardly from its leading edge.


CLS 37/278
TXT Manually powered:

    Apparatus under subclass 272 wherein a human being provides the power to
    either move or operate the moldboard.


CLS 37/279
TXT Diagonally oriented:

    Apparatus under subclass 266 wherein the moldboard is obliquely angled
    about a generally vertical axis relative to the intended direction of
    motion.


CLS 37/280
TXT Including side gate discharge preventer:

    Apparatus under subclass 279 including an element which can be moved into a
    position adjacent and substantially perpendicular to the working face to
    selectively act as a barrier preventing discharge of excavated snow from
    the moldboard.


CLS 37/281
TXT And auxiliary wing or extension:

    Apparatus under subclass 279 including an additional moldboard-like element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for an apparatus for forming a railway slope.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 782 for a road grader with a laterally
    off-set inclined shoulder forming blade; subclasses 786+ for a road grader
    having plural blades; and subclass 815 for a bulldozer having plural blades.


CLS 37/282
TXT Supported on inclined plane:

    Apparatus under subclass 279 wherein the moldboard is carried by a
    substantially horizontal base plate sloping upwardly from its leading edge.


CLS 37/283
TXT Adjustable about central vertical hinge:

    Apparatus under subclass 279 including means for attaching the moldboard to
    carriage, the means comprising a pivotal connection having a generally
    vertical axis at the longitudinal midpoint of the moldboard, about which
    the mold board can be angularly adjusted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 792+ and 820+ for an earthworking blade
    which is adjustable about a central, vertical axis.


CLS 37/284
TXT Manually powered:

    Apparatus under subclass 279 wherein a human being provides the power to
    either move or operate the moldboard.


CLS 37/285
TXT Manually powered:

    Apparatus under subclass 196 wherein a human being provides the power to
    either move or operate the excavator.


CLS 37/300
TXT GRAVE DIGGER:

    Apparatus under the class definition including means to penetrate the
    ground and remove earth to form a cavity in the ground for receiving a
    casket or corpse to be buried therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 300+ for a conveying apparatus
    entirely supported by mobile ground engaging means.


CLS 37/301
TXT LAND CLEARER:

    Apparatus under the class definition including means to penetrate the
    ground to loosen, lift, or remove earth from the ground containing tree,
    brush, stone, stump, or similar material.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus for cutting roots below ground for removal of the
    tree, brush, or stump is proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, for a randomly manipulated implement or machine for
    cutting a tree above the ground, especially subclasses 166.3+ for a saw,
    particularly subclass 379.5 for a vehicle mounted, randomly manipulated saw.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclasses 73+ for a plant receptacle for
    facilitating transplanting of a live plant, e.g., tree.

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 400.01+ for a hand manipulated stone rake.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 301+ for subject matter for
    removing a stump by use of an explosive.

    111,    Planting, subclass 101 for an excavating transplanter.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 34.1+ for a machine for cutting a tree for
    timber purposes; subclass 334 for a stump removing process which does not
    include excavation; subclasses 335+ for timber harvesting or processing.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 681+ for plows adapted for cutting roots
    and incidentally loosening or lifting them, especially subclass 698 for an
    earth working tool with two standards which may cut roots as it passes
    through the earth.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 506+ for hoisting stone or
    stump.

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclasses 76+ for hoisting stone or stump.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 199+ for apparatus for extracting stump.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-line Implements, subclasses 49+ for a
    hand fork or shovel; subclasses 82.1+ for a hoist line and grab hook.


CLS 37/302
TXT Tree or stump remover:

    Apparatus under subclass 301 (a) for permanently withdrawing a relatively
    large wooded elongated perennial plant having a single main stem from the
    earth or (b) for withdrawing a lower portion of such plant from which the
    upper portion has been removed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    111,    Planting, subclasses 100+ for an  implement having means to hold or
    guide a plant into the ground.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 2.1+, 34.1+, 334, and 335+ for a stump
    grinder.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 681+ for plows adapted for cutting roots
    and incidentally loosening or lifting them, especially subclass 698 for an
    earth working tool with two standards which may cut roots as it passes
    through the earth.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 199+ for apparatus for extracting stump.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 23, for subject matter which
    includes a device used for removing, transporting, or transplanting a tree
    but does not include a digging tool for breaking soil or cutting roots.


CLS 37/303
TXT Stone remover:

    Apparatus under subclass 301 having at least one tine, hook, or similar
    implement especially adapted for removing a piece of rock from the earth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 400.01+ for a hand manipulated stone rake.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclasses 63+ for stone
    gathering or unearthing by impelling a plant or object portion above the
    ground.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 63+ for a nondriven earth working tool
    (e.g., plow, harrow, scraper, or knife).


CLS 37/304
TXT SELF-LOADING VEHICLE:

    Apparatus under the class definition including a digging tool and an earth
    holding container which are separately mounted on the same vehicle, wherein
    the digging tool is either manipulated to place dug earth in the container
    or directs the earth to an intermediate element (e.g., a conveyor) which
    places the dug earth in the container.

    (1)     Note.  If the apparatus is so constructed that the earth receiving
    container on the vehicle actually takes part in the digging such as by
    engaging the earth with a leading edge, then the apparatus is a scoop-type
    excavator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104+,   for a self-loading railway grader (e.g., ballast machine).

    411+,   for a scoop-type excavator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 811+ for a scraper without a bottom
    (e.g., a bulldozer) to hold earth.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 701+ for a bucket-type load
    engaging and conveying means.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 467+ for a vehicle having
    a load receiving and transporting portion and handling means carried by
    such vehicle.


CLS 37/305
TXT Having endless digger or conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 304 including a continuous feeder belt used to
    either dig the earth from the ground or remove earth from the digging tool
    for delivery to a container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237+,   for snow or ice removing device having an endless conveyor.

    462+,   for an endless digger including conveyor not used in conjunction
    with a container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 300+ for a load conveyor or
    conveyor system supported upon a wheeled carrier; subclasses 506+ for a
    conveyor section with means to gather or remove material from a mound or
    pile; subclasses 701+ wherein the load-engaging and conveying section
    comprises structure in the form of a bucket.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 398 for a driven-type
    conveyor for moving a load onto or into a wheeled-type vehicle; subclasses
    507+ for a vehicle which carries a conveyor for loading or unloading.


CLS 37/306
TXT Elevating wheel:

    Apparatus under subclass 304 including a rotating circular frame having
    digging elements used to either dig the earth from the ground or remove
    earth from the digging tool for delivery to a container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclasses 63+ for apparatus
    for collecting small stones resting on or partially embedded in the ground
    which may be driven by a tractor wheel.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 439+ for a ground
    wheel-driven load-handling means.


CLS 37/307
TXT BENEATH A BODY OF WATER (E.G., DREDGER):

    Apparatus under the class definition especially adapted to excavate
    material under a mass of liquid such as a sea, lake, river, or stream.

    (1)     Note.  Class 37 includes a dredger which selectively picks up
    material (e.g., by a screen in the intake of a suction nozzle). But a
    dredger means to pick up material and subsequently separate the components
    thereof is classified in Class 299, Mining or In Situ Disintegration of
    Hard Material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 8+ for a device used for underwater cutting
    or removing marine plant growth.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 5+ for boring a
    submerged formation.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 7+
    for excavating under water combined with separating materials under water.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, appropriate subclasses, for
    control or treatment of water in open channels or other bodies of water,
    especially subclasses 136+ and 158+ for a step or means for placing a
    tunnel, string, or conduit beneath a body of water.



CLS 37/308
TXT With signal, scale, indicator, or inspection means:

    Apparatus under subclass 307 including means to either acknowledge,
    measure, detect, or examine a change in the excavation apparatus, the
    excavated material, or the environment associated therewith.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, for an alarm, indicator, or signal of a
    mechanical nature.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, for an alarm, indicator, or signal of
    an electrical nature.


CLS 37/309
TXT With means to control dredger operation (e.g., movement of dredged
    material) in response to sensed condition:

    Apparatus under subclass 307 wherein a means is provided for (a) sensing a
    change in either the excavation apparatus, the excavated material, or the
    environment associated therewith, and (b) regulating the excavation
    apparatus, the excavated material, or the environment associated therewith
    in response to that change.

    (1)     Note.  For a patent to be classified in this subclass, the claim
    must include at least three elements: (a) a dredger, (b) a sensor to detect
    a condition, and (c) a controller which responds to the sensor (e.g., pump,
    motor, valve, solenoid).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 445+ for condition responsive control of
    pump or motor displacement.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 2+ for a fluid handling process
    including control of flow by a condition or characteristic of a fluid.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclass 1 for
    subject matter relating to automatic control involved in recovering
    valuable earth material and disintegrating hard material in situ.


CLS 37/310
TXT Swell compensator:

    Apparatus under subclass 309 including a shock absorbing, tension restoring
    means provided on the dredger to negate or offset the heave motion of the
    waves in a body of water so that the excavation apparatus can be maintained
    at a desired underwater coordinate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 5+ for related
    structure in connection with a drilling platform at sea.

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclasses 272+ for subject matter having means
    to prevent or dampen load oscillations.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 277 for apparatus for hauling or hoisting a load, including a
    driven device which contacts and pulls on a cable and includes fluid or
    resilient shock absorbing means or tension maintaining means attached to
    the cable supporting structure; subclass 392 for apparatus for contacting
    and guiding a moving cable wherein the cable contacting wheel element has
    fluid, shock absorbing or tension restoring mechanism connected thereto;
    subclass 900 for a cable pulling drum having a wave motion responsive
    actuator.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 195.1+ for a buoyancy
    compensator on a marine platform.


CLS 37/311
TXT Suction relief valve:

    Apparatus under subclass 309 wherein pressure or force in a dredge pipe is
    maintained within predetermined limits by operation of a membranous
    structure which restores the pressure or force back to normal operating
    conditions by elimination of an obstruction from the pipe.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the function of the relief valve is to relieve
    excessive vacuum in the suction pipe resulting from plugging of the intake
    end with the material and to correct velocity drop in the discharge pipe
    resulting from overloading with the material.

    (2)     Note.  The valve eliminates suction-slugging caused by caving
    banks, sudden changes of material, or pockets of gas.

    (3)     Note.  When triggered by an abnormal pumping condition, the cable
    will remain open, admitting water in an amount required to maintain
    velocity. When the abnormal condition no longer exists, the valve closes
    slowly, at a rate depending upon the recovery characteristics of the pump.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 455+ for subject matter wherein a valve
    is controlled in response to a change in the fluid condition.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclasses 29+ for regulating the
    introduction of the load through the inlet of the fluid current conveyor.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 307+ for a pressure responsive relief valve used
    for controlling pumped fluid.



CLS 37/312
TXT Control of swing or swing speed:

    Apparatus under subclass 309 including means to automatically regulate the
    cyclical lateral movement of the dredger suction pipe or of the vessel
    which carries the dredger.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes subject matter in which the automatic
    control system varies the speed of the swing motors (responsive to the
    pressure in the fluid circuit driving the cutterhead or to the fluid
    pressure in the dredge pump), and consequently the swinging movement of the
    ladder, in order to maintain a constant load upon the cutterhead or to the
    fluid pressure in the dredge pump.

    (2)     Note.  In actual operation, a dredge swings from side to side,
    using the port spud as a pivot. The action of the dredge is controlled by
    swing cables attached to swing anchors. To advance, after the swing of the
    dredge has stopped, the starboard spud is dropped as the port spud is
    raised.


CLS 37/313
TXT By use of submarine or undersea vessel:

    Apparatus under subclass 307 especially adapted for sea floor operation
    wherein the excavating is controlled in whole or part from a submerged,
    hollow, usually cylindrical receptacle of watertight construction made of a
    buoyancy material, manned or unmanned, which is either adapted to be
    propelled through the water or travel along or rest on the sea floor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195,    for a dredging process.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclass 55 for means to remove sand or mud from a submerged
    hull; subclasses 312+ for an underwater habitat which is not permanently
    secured to the marine floor or an independently propelled submersible
    vessel.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 8+ for a pressurized
    caisson; subclasses 154+ for subject matter including pipe or cable laying,
    retrieving, or underwater manipulation; subclasses 185+ for submersible
    means which is remotely controlled by personnel at the water surface or is
    operated or occupied by a diver for underwater manipulation; subclasses
    205+ for a device having ballasting means to be sunk or positioned at site.


CLS 37/314
TXT Adapted to excavate specific discrete material:

    Apparatus under subclass 307 especially adapted for recovering deep-ocean
    minerals or other distinct material (e.g., manganese nodules, gold, iron
    ore).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclass 9 for
    separation of materials mined or excavated under water.


CLS 37/315
TXT Shellfish:

    Apparatus under subclass 314 especially adapted for recovering aquatic
    animals, such as an oyster, a clam, or a mussel, whose external covering
    comprises a pivoted shell.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 6.5 for means to
    catch or gather fish and convey the catch to a boat; subclasses 7+ for a
    net designed and used for capturing fish or other aquatic animals;
    subclasses 100+ for a fish trap especially adapted for aquatic use to catch
    fish.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 62 for an extractor
    with a digger or root cutter; subclasses 84+ for a separating digger
    comprised of vertically disposed digger elements arranged in a generally
    rakelike formation which comb through the soil to remove buried objects;
    subclasses 111+ for means to excavate a mass of earth having plant roots or
    other objects.


CLS 37/316
TXT Including rake or scoop structure:

    Apparatus under subclass 315 including a wire mesh basket, net, or similar
    implement having a row of spaced, curved teeth or a cagelike device, closed
    at top, bottom, and sides, used to collect the aquatic animals.


CLS 37/317
TXT Suction:

    Apparatus under subclass 307 wherein the material is removed from the
    bottom of a body of water by a flexible, noncollapsible pipe, provided at
    its lower end with a weighted nozzle having means (e.g., suction pump) for
    creating a pressure less than the surrounding environment for entrainment
    of the material into the pipe.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclasses 151+ for subject matter
    wherein the load is drawn into the conveyor by a vacuum at the inlet by
    forcing or withdrawing conveying fluid into or from the fluid flow path at
    a point subsequent to the inlet.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 65+ for subject matter wherein one fluid is
    pumped by contact or entrainment with another.


CLS 37/318
TXT Having intake screen:

    Apparatus under subclass 317 including a grid made of materials such as
    wire cloth, grate bars, or perforated material being adapted to allow only
    dredged material of a predetermined size to enter the suction device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 233+ for
    a sifter for separating solids.


CLS 37/319
TXT And material size reducer (e.g., crusher):

    Apparatus under subclass 318 including means, other than a digging element,
    for breaking large objects into smaller pieces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, for a comminuting
    apparatus, generally.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 29+
    for hard material disintegrating means peculiar to mining.


CLS 37/320
TXT With pumping chamber:

    Apparatus under subclass 317 including an enclosure intermediate to the
    suction inlet and outlet adapted for controlling the flow of the motive
    fluid and dredged material.

    (1)     Note.  The dredged material is initially drawn into the enclosure
    by suction and is subsequently forced out of the enclosure for disposal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 118+ for the pumping of liquid by supplying or
    exhausting the gaseous motive fluid to or from the pumping chamber.


CLS 37/321
TXT With means to introduce lift agent directly into suction pipe:

    Apparatus under subclass 317 wherein the suction of the dredged material is
    enhanced by adding a fluid or buoyant substance to the dredged material at
    or near the suction inlet.

    (1)     Note.  The dredged material is drawn toward the surface of the
    water body by direct contact or entrainment with another fluid to create
    second stage or secondary acceleration of the dredged material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 5+ for means to bore a
    submerged formation; subclasses 65+ for process of boring with fluid.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclasses 93+ for means to introduce
    booster fluid into conveyors.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 118+ wherein the liquid is pumped by supplying
    gaseous motive fluid to the pumping chamber.


CLS 37/322
TXT With downstream directed jet nozzle:

    Apparatus under subclass 321 wherein a high-velocity fluid stream is forced
    under pressure out of an opening and is brought into contact with the
    dredged material to impart energy to the dredged material by the action of
    entrainment and frictional contact of the fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 602+ for systems having multiple inlets
    and a single outlet with mixing, diffusing, or injecting means.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclasses 93+ for apparatus having
    means to introduce booster fluid into conveyor; subclasses 151+ for subject
    matter wherein the load is drawn into the conveyor by creating a vacuum at
    the inlet by forcing or withdrawing conveying fluid into or from the fluid
    flow path at a point subsequent to the inlet.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 151+ for subject matter in which motive and
    pumped fluids are brought into intimate contact in an enclosed flow path,
    the motive fluid having a higher velocity than the pumped fluid and
    imparting energy to the pumped fluid by the action of entrainment and
    frictional contact.


CLS 37/323
TXT With fluid jet digger adjacent suction inlet:

    Apparatus under subclass 317 including a device for emitting a
    high-velocity gas or liquid stream for loosening, disintegrating, and
    eroding material surrounding the suction pipe to facilitate removal by
    suction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 67 for method of using a
    stream of pressurized fluid to dislodge the earth formation.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 16+
    for process wherein a source of fluid at above atmospheric pressure is
    applied directly to material to mine or disintegrate the material.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 163 for subject matter
    relating to bottom fluidizing means wherein an initially relatively firm
    bottom material which supports the pre-positioned string or conduit is
    caused to assume a flowable state.


CLS 37/324
TXT Including driven digger adjacent suction inlet (e.g., cutterhead dredger):

    Apparatus under subclass 317 including cutting or breaking means
    operatively connected adjacent the suction pipe or conduit for excavating
    material which is to be drawn into the suction pipe or conduit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    319,    for material size reducer (e.g., crusher).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 7+
    for excavating under water combined with separating materials under water.



CLS 37/325
TXT With specific bearing, or means to lubricate or seal:

    Apparatus under subclass 324 combined with means related to a digging
    element in which a journal, gudgeon, pivot, pin, or other part revolves,
    oscillates, or slides or to a substance used to reduce friction between
    moving parts or to a device or system to create a nonleaking union between
    rotating elements (e.g., pump shafts).


CLS 37/326
TXT Rotary:

    Apparatus under subclass 324 wherein the means for excavating moves in a
    circular orbit about a single axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189+,   for a rotary digger generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 383+ for a
    rotary agitator.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 518+ for apparatus having an earth
    working tool which has a rotational motion in use.



CLS 37/327
TXT Specific cutterhead structure:

    Apparatus under subclass 326 further including particular recitation of a
    discrete digger or an attachment on a digging edge or surface of such
    digger.


CLS 37/328
TXT Including distinct tooth or tooth mounting:

    Apparatus under subclass 327 including particular recitation of a digging
    or cutting tip or an assembly means for a cutting or digging tip.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    446+,   for specific digging edge or mounting structure used on a scoop.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclass 101 for
    a particular tooth structure; subclasses 106+ for a particular tooth
    mounting of that class.

    403,    Joints and Connections, for a tooth mounting or adaptor structure.


CLS 37/329
TXT Axis transverse with respect to suction pipe:

    Apparatus under subclass 326 in which the cutting or digging element turns
    about an axis that is substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal axis
    of the suction inlet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94+,    for a ditcher having a wheel excavator with a transverse axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 177 for a rolling tool having
    circumferentially spaced blades; subclasses 548+ for a tooth or blade unit
    on a single axle.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 277+ for a
    rotating comminuting surface.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 39.1+
    for a hard material disintegrating machine having rotary cutter.


CLS 37/330
TXT Axis vertical with respect to surface of body of water:

    Apparatus under subclass 326 in which the axis about which the excavating
    element rotates is substantially perpendicular to the free water surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 6 for boring a submerged
    formation  with  an  underwater  tool  drive; subclass 107 for a
    rotary-type below ground tool drive.


CLS 37/331
TXT Axis longitudinal with respect to suction pipe:

    Apparatus under subclass 326 in which the cutting or digging element turns
    about an axis that is parallel to the axis of the suction inlet.


CLS 37/332
TXT Endless:

    Apparatus under subclass 324 wherein the cutting or breaking device is in
    the form of a series of elements connected to one another in a continuous
    loop travelling about two or more pulleys, sprockets, or drums.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 506+ for a conveyor having
    means specialized for collecting a load from the ground.


CLS 37/333
TXT Draghead dredger (e.g., dustpan dredger):

    Apparatus under subclass 317 wherein the mouth of the suction pipe
    comprises a plain pipe cut at an angle or a mouthpiece in the shape of a
    hook being adapted to be dragged along the bottom as the pipe is pulled
    along by the dredger travelling through the water.

    (1)     Note.  The material is literally sucked into a nozzle, much the
    same way as in a vacuum cleaner, and then is transferred to the vertical
    means rising to the surface.



CLS 37/334
TXT With pipe suspension or support (e.g., ladder structure):

    Apparatus under subclass 317 including means formed of structural steel or
    similar material having side beams, cross beams, and braces to maintain the
    suction pipe or conduit in a controlled and stable position relative to the
    dredger structure from which the pipe or conduit extends or to some other
    predetermined datum.

    (1)     Note.  The suction pipe for dislodging earth from a bank is carried
    upon a radial arm commonly known as a ladder which includes means for
    strengthening or protecting the suction pipe whereby the entire length of
    the pipe is braced and means for connecting the pipe protector to the
    dredger structure so that the pipe and its protector may swing in unison.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 49+ for a pipe or cable support generally.


CLS 37/335
TXT Pipe or nozzle structure:

    Apparatus under subclass 317 wherein the significance is attributed to a
    particular shape of the conduit which carries the dredged material or of
    the inlet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 300.1+ for a
    device constructed and arranged particularly for applying suction to a work
    piece.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 118+ for a flexible pipe
    conduit.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclass 152 for a specific intake
    nozzle structure upstream of the suction source; subclasses 191+ for pipe,
    duct, or channel for guiding the load.


CLS 37/336
TXT With coupling (e.g., connector):

    Apparatus under subclass 335 including particular feature of the joint
    between separate sections of suction pipe or conduit or between suction
    pipe and nozzle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 615+ for subject matter including spout,
    nozzle, or similar fluid flow conduit having two or more sections jointed
    for relative angular movement in one or more planes.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 118+ for means to join
    various flexible pipe or conduit sections.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, for means to join sections of pipes or
    conduits.


CLS 37/337
TXT Rotary digger (e.g., bucket wheel):

    Apparatus under subclass 307 in which the digging element is arranged on
    the circumference of a circular frame which rotates about an axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189+,   for a rotary digger.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 140.9+ for handling of
    bulk material.



CLS 37/338
TXT Endless:

    Apparatus under subclass 307 in which the dredger includes a continuous
    conveying belt with a plurality of digging elements to hold or feed the
    dredged material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327,    for a suction dredger having digging elements on an endless belt.

    353+,   for a ditcher with an endless bucket.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 701+ for subject matter
    wherein a load-engaging and conveying part includes a structure in the form
    of a bucket.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclasses 77+ for an endless
    power-driven conveyor.



CLS 37/339
TXT Specific bucket structure:

    Apparatus under subclass 338 wherein the significance is attributed to a
    particular shape of the cutting element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    465,    for a digging element associated with a land-based endless digger.


CLS 37/340
TXT Grab:

    Apparatus under subclass 307 wherein the dredging tool consists of two
    pivotally cooperating digging elements which are adapted to be dropped in
    the open position into material to be excavated and then adapted to be
    closed to thereby encompass the material between the two elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    461,    for a clamshell bucket.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclasses 81 and 84 for a grab combined with
    means to swing or shift the grab.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 86.4+ for a
    device adapted for grasping a load and having handling and hoist-line
    terminals.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 618+ wherein the load
    carrier is a seizing, grasping, or clamping device.



CLS 37/341
TXT Scoop or bucket:

    Apparatus under subclass 307 wherein the dredging tool consists of a ladle
    or cylindrical container having a bottom, back and side walls and which is
    capable of digging and holding the material and transporting it to a dump
    position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    379+,   for a ditcher having a shovel or scoop.

    398+,   for cable operated excavators with scoop.

    444+,   for scoop or bucket structure, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-line Implements, subclasses 68.22+ for a
    bucket-type hoistable receptacle.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 565 for a vertically
    swingable shovel or scoop.



CLS 37/342
TXT With means to scour or scrape (e.g., propeller means, digging teeth, plow):

    Apparatus under subclass 307 including an eroding device such as a
    propeller means or raking teeth which flushes or rub underwater
    obstructions such as sandbars or shoals by loosening the sand, mud, or silt
    at the bottom surface of a body of water.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclass 55 for a vessel raising means including provision
    for loosening of sand or mud about a submerged hull.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 73 for subject matter
    relating to the removal of a sediment deposit by the concentration of a
    natural current.


CLS 37/343
TXT Rotary digging element:

    Apparatus under subclass 342 wherein the eroding device moves in a circular
    path about a central axis.


CLS 37/344
TXT Nozzle:

    Apparatus under subclass 342 wherein the removal or cleaning of sand, mud,
    or silt is effected by the action of high-pressure air or water which is
    forced through a projecting part with an opening in a localized stream.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclass 55 for a vessel raising means including provision
    for loosening of sand or mud about a submerged hull.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 73 for subject matter
    relating to the removal of a sediment deposit by the concentration of a
    natural current.


CLS 37/345
TXT With vessel, propulsion, or anchor structure (e.g., bank spud, spud brace):

    Apparatus under subclass 307 wherein the invention is particularly directed
    toward (a) the feature of the barge, ship, or boat which supports the
    dredging equipment in the body of water, or (b) the detail of the means
    which is attached to a barge, ship, or boat to hold it stationary or under
    controlled movement in the body of water while dredging.

    (1)     Note.  Spud usually consists of (a) one of four sharp pointed
    vertical posts or piles that can be forced by a tackle or by power through
    a socket in a floating or a land dredge or scow to anchor it and (b) one of
    the two foot pieces of the legs of the A-frame of a floating dredge that
    are set in the banks of the body of water to steady the dredge and give it
    support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclass 256 for a floating or semisubmersible storage
    vessel; subclasses 293 and 294+ for an anchor or an anchoring arrangement.


CLS 37/346
TXT Bottom spud anchor:

    Apparatus under subclass 345 including an elongated member which extends
    from the vessel to the bottom of the body of water to hold the dredger
    stationary or move it in a controlled manner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclasses 293 and 294+ for an anchor or an anchoring
    arrangement.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 5+ for boring a
    submerged formation, especially subclass 10 for using a submersible guide
    means engaging the marine floor.


CLS 37/347
TXT DITCHER:

    Apparatus under the class definition including means to penetrate the
    ground for digging a long narrow trench in the surface of the ground.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    307+,   for a device for forming an underwater trench.

    381+,   for a device for working on forming a road.

    446+,   for a detailed digging edge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 19+ for boring
    successive, parallel, or overlapping holes vertically in the earth to
    ultimately form a trench.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 24+
    and 29+ for trenching in hard material such as rock or ice.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 154+ for trenching in
    combination with pipe or cable laying, retrieving, or underwater
    manipulation; subclasses 282+ for trench shoring.


CLS 37/348
TXT Condition responsive:

    Apparatus under subclass 347 having means to activate ditching or trenching
    means into digging condition by the control of a pre-established sequencing
    means such as a template, cam, electromagnetic tape, etc., responsive to a
    condition which may or may not exist.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    381,    for a condition responsive excavator used for forming roadways.

    414+,   for a condition responsive scoop or excavating and transporting
    container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 2+ for an earth working implement with
    automatic power control.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 24+ for a process or
    apparatus including step or means for sensing a condition of operation and
    controlling a power operated means in response to said sensed condition.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 699+ for control means
    responsive to sensed condition for a shovel or fork-type vertically
    swinging load support.

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclass 50 for vehicleguidance, operation, or indication of a construction
    or agricultural vehicle.


CLS 37/349
TXT With crumber:

    Apparatus under subclass 347 combined with a blade or a shoe adapted to
    follow an endless conveyor for the purpose of dressing or removing
    irregularities from the bottom of the trench.

    (1)     Note.  The function of the crumbing blade or crumber is to catch
    loose earth which may be removed or dropped by the excavator and to
    collect, carry, gather, and push forward such loose earth so that it may be
    taken up by the excavator at the lowest point of travel.


CLS 37/350
TXT Having screw digger:

    Apparatus under subclass 347 including a trenching tool of the auger type
    with a helical surface rotated about a longitudinal axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 624+ for a rotating conveyor
    section having a load engaging portion in the form of a helical surface.



CLS 37/351
TXT With conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 350 including a carrier to remove the material cut
    by the auger.


CLS 37/352
TXT Having endless digger:

    Apparatus under subclass 347 wherein the cutting or breaking device is in
    the form of a series of elements connected to one another in a continuous
    loop travelling about two or more pulleys, sprockets, or drums.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    464,    for a miscellaneous endless digger or details thereof.



CLS 37/353
TXT Endless bucket:

    Apparatus under subclass 352 wherein the cutting or breaking device is in
    the form of a series of elements connected to one another in a continuous
    loop to hold and feed the excavated material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    326+,   for miscellaneous endless digger or details thereof.

    338+,   for an endless digger used in dredging.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 509 for a conveyor section
    having buckets specialized to gather load batches; subclasses 703+ for a
    conveyor section having means to facilitate loading or discharging load
    from the bucket.


CLS 37/354
TXT Transverse cut:

    Apparatus under subclass 353 wherein the endless bucket rotates
    perpendicular to the direction in which the trench is being formed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 307.1 for a bucket conveyor.


CLS 37/355
TXT Longitudinal cut:

    Apparatus under subclass 353 wherein the endless bucket rotates parallel to
    the direction in which the trench is being formed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 318+ for conveying apparatus
    having a vertically swingable conveyor.



CLS 37/356
TXT With side cutters:

    Apparatus under subclass 355 combined with means for further trimming the
    trench by removing material on the side faces of the trench.

    (1)     Note.  The side cutters usually include shearing bars, slice
    blades, reamers, or wheel-like cutters.


CLS 37/357
TXT With distinct rotary digger:

    Apparatus under subclass 355 combined with a supplementary excavating
    mechanism (e.g., a rotary cutting disc, a rotary cutting knife, a rotary
    cutting pick) operating in unison with the chain to widen the trench dug by
    the excavator.


CLS 37/358
TXT Reciprocating endless digger:

    Apparatus under subclass 355 wherein the endless excavator or an excavating
    device associated therewith (e.g., spade, plow, pick, scraper) is adapted
    to move back and forth to excavate the material.


CLS 37/359
TXT With longitudinal endless conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 355 combined with an orbiting continuous carrier
    extending parallel to the trench which receives material excavated from the
    trench.


CLS 37/360
TXT With transverse endless conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 355 including an orbiting continuous carrier
    extending perpendicular to the trench which receives material excavated
    from the trench.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 818+ for an endless conveyor
    having upwardly facing trough configuration in transverse direction on
    conveying reach.


CLS 37/361
TXT Drive-related feature:

    Apparatus under subclass 360 wherein the significance is attributed to the
    motion transmitting mechanism of the endless conveyor (e.g., sprocket,
    chain).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    362,    for a drive-related feature of ditcher with longitudinal cut.

    423,    for a drive-related feature of endless load distributor of scoop or
    excavating and transporting container.


CLS 37/362
TXT Drive-related feature:

    Apparatus under subclass 355 wherein the significance is attributed to
    motion transmitting mechanism of the endless digging bucket (e.g.,
    sprocket, chain, mounting).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    361,    for a drive-related feature of a transverse endless conveyor.

    423,    for a drive-related feature of an endless load distributor of scoop
    or excavating and transporting container.


CLS 37/363
TXT Hand operated:

    Apparatus under subclass 355 including a compact trencher capable of being
    maneuvered or guided by a human being and adapted to operate in a confined
    and restricted area.


CLS 37/364
TXT With side or auxiliary cutter:

    Apparatus under subclass 347 combined with means for widening the trench by
    removing material on the side faces of the trench.

    (1)     Note.  The cutter acts as a trimmer, evener, or smoother for
    sidewalk of a ditch, irrigation canal, drain ditch, trench, stream, or
    canal for the removal of sod, weeds, vegetation upon the wall, or other
    debris.

    (2)     Note.  The side or auxiliary cutter usually includes shearing bar,
    slice blade, reamer, or wheel-like cutter member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 329+ for an earth working element having
    a manipulating and supporting handle and an implement having a handle
    wherein the device is guided or propelled by a working attendant.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 19.1+ for a vehicle having steering
    means adapted to be actuated by an attendant who walks with the vehicle.


CLS 37/365
TXT Rotary:

    Apparatus under subclass 364 wherein the additional or auxiliary cutter
    moves in a circular orbit about an axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 39.1+
    for a hard material disintegrating machine having rotary cutter.


CLS 37/366
TXT Plow:

    Apparatus under subclass 347 including a V-shaped or diagonally oriented
    blade used for penetrating the ground to form a trench.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    389+,   for a road grader-type plow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 721+
    for apparatus in which earth working implement is symmetrically arranged
    with respect to the line of draft; subclasses 754+ for apparatus in which
    the tool is of the type having a landslide to receive the side pressure of
    the earth working element and to act as a runner, a point for making an
    initial cut in the earth, a shave to cut a slice of earth, and a moldboard
    to guide the furrow slice.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 180+ wherein the means
    for placing the string or conduit below the surface includes a plowlike
    digging tool for forming a trench.



CLS 37/367
TXT Slit ditcher:

    Apparatus under subclass 366 in which the plow is a narrow, elongated blade
    which forms a long, narrow trench embanked with its own soil or which cuts
    the bottom and sides of the trench, thereby forcing the dirt up.

    (1)     Note.  Slit ditcher is especially adapted for stripping the earth
    from a pipeline which is buried therein, or for opening a ditch for laying
    drainage tubes, cable ducts, drainage tiles, or water supply piping.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    380,    for slit ditcher having shovel or scoop rather than a plow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 699+ for an earth working implement
    specifically disclosed as working deep in the soil.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 154+ for a slit
    trencher in combination with a cable laying structure.


CLS 37/368
TXT Including longitudinal endless conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 367 including an orbitally travelling continuous
    carrier extending parallel to the trench, positional to receive the
    loosened earth from the trench.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    375,    for a plow having a longitudinal endless conveyor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 33 for a power-driven conveyor or handler.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 510.1+ for a conveyor having
    power-driven feed means.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 179+ for a pipe or
    cable laying apparatus having backfill or bedding material conveying or
    dispensing means.


CLS 37/369
TXT And transverse endless conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 368 including an additional orbitally travelling
    continuous carrier extending perpendicular to the trench to receive
    loosened earth from the trench.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    376+,   for a plow with a transverse endless conveyor.


CLS 37/370
TXT Mole plow:

    Apparatus under subclass 366 including a shoe (e.g., conical, pyramidal,
    wedge shaped) especially adapted for forming a continuous tunnel or small
    covered passage through the earth.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a device for forming a subterranean
    passage for draining purposes. Its action upon the earth in forming a
    passage is such as to densely compress the sides and top of the passage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    111,    Planting, subclass 123 for a chisel opener or furrow opener used
    for liquid or gas soil treatment.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 699+ for an earth working implement
    specifically disclosed as working deep in the soil.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 180+ wherein the
    apparatus for placing the string or conduit below the surface includes a
    plowlike digging tool for forming a trench.



CLS 37/372
TXT With plow supported wheel or supported on wheel frame:

    Apparatus under subclass 366 wherein the plow is combined with a solid
    circular disk or a rigid circular ring connected by spokes to a hub,
    designed to turn around an axle passed through the center mounted on a
    trencher frame to carry the device.


CLS 37/373
TXT With conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 366 including means to carry the earth loosened
    from the trench.

    (1)     Note.  The conveyor usually consists of a spiral, screw, or
    auger-type carrier or rotary disk with receptacles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 33 for an earth working means combined with
    a power-driven means for handling the earth after it has been severed from
    the ground or loosened by the earth working means.


CLS 37/374
TXT Wheel and belt:

    Apparatus under subclass 373 wherein the means to carry or discharge the
    earth includes a rotary, circular disk having peripheral side flanges
    combined with revolving endless track to carry the earth loosened from the
    trench.


CLS 37/375
TXT Longitudinal endless conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 373 wherein the means to carry or discharge the
    earth includes an orbiting continuous carrier extending parallel to the
    trench to receive the loosened earth from the trench.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    368,    for a slit ditcher having a longitudinal endless conveyor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 33 for a power-driven conveyor or handler.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 300+ for a conveying apparatus
    entirely supported by mobile ground engaging means; subclasses 506+ for a
    conveyor having means specialized for collecting a load from a static
    ground support.


CLS 37/376
TXT And transverse endless conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 375 wherein the means to convey or discharge the
    earth also includes an additional orbiting continuous carrier extending
    perpendicular to the trench to further receive and discharge the excavated
    soil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    369,    for a slit ditcher having a transverse endless conveyor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 510.1+ for a conveyor with
    means to collect a load from the ground including power-driven feed means.


CLS 37/377
TXT With colter:

    Apparatus under subclass 376 combined with a blade adapted to cut a slit in
    the ground in advance of the plow.

    (1)     Note.  The colter of this subclass may include a fixed blade (i.e.,
    knife) or a rotary disk (i.e., rolling).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    378,    for a ditcher plow having a colter, generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 3 for an unearthing
    device with stabilizing colter or fin.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 19+ for a sod cutter including vertical
    transverse cutting means.



CLS 37/378
TXT With colter:

    Apparatus under subclass 366 combined with a blade or disk adapted to cut a
    slit in the ground in advance of the plow.

    (1)     Note.  The colter of this subclass may include a fixed blade (i.e.,
    knife) or a rotary disk (i.e., rolling).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    377,    for a colter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 3 for an unearthing
    device with stabilizing colter or fin.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 165+ for an earth working apparatus
    having a colter for cutting a vertical slit in the ground in advance of the
    earth working implement.


CLS 37/379
TXT Shovel or scoop:

    Apparatus under subclass 347 including a hol-lowed-out blade with a concave
    front surface, convex rear surface, and opposite side edges or a bucket
    having a bottom, back and side walls used for removing the earth to make a
    trench.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    443,    for a dipper-type excavator.


CLS 37/380
TXT Slit ditcher:

    Apparatus under subclass 379 wherein the shovel or scoop is adapted to form
    a long, narrow ditch embanked with its own soil which cuts the bottom and
    sides of the trench, thereby forcing the dirt up.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    367+,   for a slit ditcher having a plow as a digging blade.


CLS 37/381
TXT ROAD GRADER-TYPE:

    Apparatus under the class definition including means to penetrate the
    ground for working on and forming the ground for the passage of vehicles,
    persons, or animals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    309+,   for a self-loading vehicle.

    347+,   for a ditcher.

    411+,   for a scoop.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 4.5, 63, 197, 199, 684.5, 779, 780, 781,
    and 811+ for a drag, scraper, or other leveling tool.

    404,    Road Structure, Process and Apparatus, subclass 83 particularly for
    road building means combined with earth digging, handling, or moving means.



CLS 37/382
TXT Condition responsive:

    Apparatus under subclass 381 having means to activate digging means into
    digging condition by the control of a pre-established sequencing device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    348,    for condition responsive ditching or trenching means.

    414+,   for a condition responsive scoop or excavating and transporting
    container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 2+ for an earth working implement with
    automatic power control.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 699+ for control means
    responsive to a sensed condition for a shovel or fork-type vertically
    swinging load support.

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclass 50 for vehicle guidance, operation, or indication of a
    construction or agricultural vehicle.


CLS 37/383
TXT Including ground supported, grader guiding rail:

    Apparatus under subclass 381 including a structural steel bar fixed outside
    the grader itself to create a track for maintaining the grader on a
    predetermined path of travel.

    (1)     Note.  In the process of grading a road, the surface is usually
    plowed and the main body of the material removed by the grader scraper. The
    tracks are then placed in position and the grader is passed over the
    surface to remove the remaining loose material and to give the roadbed the
    desired contour. The tracks serve as a gauge for the scraper carried by the
    road grader as well as maintaining the grader at a predetermined level
    whereby the proper height and cross section of the roadbed between the
    forms are established.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclass 119 wherein the
    means to level or smooth previously laid road material is positioned and
    guided above the roadway by the side forms which also serve as a trackway.


CLS 37/384
TXT Adjustable digger:

    Apparatus under subclass 383 wherein the means for removing or loosening
    the earth is combined with means for selectively varying the elevational or
    angular position of the loosening means.


CLS 37/385
TXT Rotary digger:

    Apparatus under subclass 384 wherein means for loosening the earth moves in
    a circular orbit about an axis.


CLS 37/386
TXT Rotary digger:

    Apparatus under subclass 381 including means for removing or loosening the
    earth which moves in a circular orbit about an axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189+,   for an excavator having a rotary digger.

    385,    for other road grader-type rotary digger.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 518+ for a rolling, rotating, or
    orbitally moving tool.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 90+ for an earth
    or a road surface comminuting means; subclass 118 for a bar, beam, or
    striker means used to level or smooth previously laid road material.






CLS 37/387
TXT Adjustable:

    Apparatus under subclass 386 wherein a means is provided to selectively
    vary the elevational or angular position of the rotary digger.


CLS 37/388
TXT Transverse endless digger:

    Apparatus under subclass 381 wherein the cutting or breaking device is in
    the form of a series of elements (e.g., blade, bowl) connected to one
    another in a continuous loop traveling about two or more pulleys,
    sprockets, or drums excavating the surface of the road perpendicular to the
    direction of the road axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 506+ for a conveyor having
    means specialized for collecting a load from the ground.


CLS 37/389
TXT Plow with transverse endless conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 381 combined with continuous carrier positioned
    perpendicular to the road for removing earth loosened by a V-shaped or
    diagonally oriented blade.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclass 308.1 for a conveying apparatus
    entirely supported by a mobile ground engaging means with a shovel or tine.



CLS 37/390
TXT Disc plow:

    Apparatus under subclass 389 wherein the earth loosening or removing means
    is a thin, flat, circular plate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 33 for a power-driven moldboard, conveyor,
    or handler; subclasses 299+ for an earth working tool forward or rear of a
    motor vehicle.

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclass 308.1 for a conveying apparatus
    entirely supported by a mobile ground engaging means with shovel or tine;
    subclasses 312+ for a conveyor shiftably mounted on a vehicle.



CLS 37/391
TXT Plow with transverse conveyor wheel:

    Apparatus under subclass 381 including a V-shaped or diagonally oriented
    blade combined with a rotary transporting implement having buckets or
    receptacles on its periphery and having an axis perpendicular to the
    direction of travel wherein the transporting implement receives earth from
    the blade.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    393,    for a plow having inclined axis conveyor wheel.



CLS 37/392
TXT And endless conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 391 also combined with a series of elements
    connected to one another in a continuous loop for carrying the excavated
    material for further discharge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 311+ for a gravity conveyor
    section and subclasses 523+ for a conveyor system having a gravity conveyor
    section.



CLS 37/393
TXT Plow with inclined axis conveyor wheel:

    Apparatus under subclass 381 including a rotary material transporting
    implement having buckets or receptacles on its periphery supported to run
    upon the ground in an angular position and adapted to receive the loosened
    soil from a V-shaped or diagonally oriented scraper or blade.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    391+,   for a plow combined with a transverse conveyor wheel.


CLS 37/394
TXT CABLE-OPERATED (E.G., DRAGLINE):

    Apparatus under the class definition including means to pull by a strand
    capable of exerting only tensile force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    341,    for a dredger having a tool in the form of a shovel or bucket.

    347+,   for a ditcher having a digging tool in the form of a shovel or
    bucket.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 26.5+ for subject matter of that class
    wherein a scraper is adapted to be connected by a cable or similar flexible
    means to a fixed structure and is driven relative to that structure.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 264+ for subject matter of that class which includes a drive
    device which contacts and pulls on a cable when a load is hauled or hoisted
    between locations.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 570 for an endless or a
    rotary carrier and a dragline scoop.


CLS 37/395
TXT Boom-type:

    Apparatus under subclass 394 including an elongated member from which the
    strand extends to the scoop or bucket.

    (1)     Note.  Boom usually consists of a mast, crane body, or other
    supporting structure.

    (2)     Note.  The boom-type excavator usually has four motions:


    (a)     loading, which is accomplished by pulling the bucket toward the
    machine with a drag cable attached to the bucket chain;

    (b)     hoisting, which is accomplished by a second cable from the
    bucket-chain hoist over the boom point sheave;

    (c)     swinging and returning, which are accomplished by interrelated
    manipulation of the drag cable and the hoisting cable via a gear train;

    (d)     dumping of the bucket, which is controlled by means of an
    equalizing dump cable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182,    for an excavator having an orange-peel bucket.

    341,    for a dredger having a tool in the form of a shovel or bucket.

    461,    for an excavator with a clamshell bucket.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclasses 199+ for apparatus having boom
    including supporting structure; subclasses 255+ for a vertically swinging
    boom; subclasses 347+ for a subcombination under the class definition
    including an elongated structural member disclosed as being part of a
    traversing hoist.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 264+ for apparatus for hauling or hoisting a load, including a
    driven device which contacts and pulls on cable.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 569 for a vertically
    swinging load support including a hoist or a dragline; subclass 570 for an
    endless or a rotary carrier and a dragline scoop; subclasses 592+ for an
    elevator or a hoist with loading and unloading means; subclasses 680+ for a
    vertically swinging load support.



CLS 37/396
TXT Including means to control digging, hoisting, and dumping:

    Apparatus under subclass 395 wherein the hauling and hoisting wires are
    manipulated by a spring, latch, control briddle, draft briddle, toggle
    mechanism, or similar implement to regulate loading and unloading
    operations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclass 167 for a traversing hoist with a
    haul-in line; subclass 239 for means to swing boom vertically having a
    flexible cable.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 264+ for a power transmitting pulley and a rope or belt in
    either drive or in cable return means and a device or member for contacting
    and guiding a moving cable.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 142.9 for loading or
    unloading on a marine vessel by use of a hoist line having a scoop or
    scraper.



CLS 37/397
TXT Including mounting or support structure (e.g., boom support, sheave or
    pulley support):

    Apparatus under subclass 395 wherein the significance is attributed to the
    boom or bearing support means (e.g., sheave or pulley support).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 678 for a base or platform for a machinery
    support.


CLS 37/398
TXT Scoop or bucket:

    Apparatus under subclass 394 including an excavating tool consisting of a
    ladle or cylindrical container having a bottom, back and side walls
    particularly adapted for use with a cable operated excavator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    341,    for a dredger with a scoop as a digging tool.

    379+,   for a ditcher with a scoop or shovel as a digging tool.

    444+,   for a scoop or bucket structure.

    465,    for an endless digger bucket structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 394 for load-transporting
    vehicle having a bucket or scoop-type holder; subclasses 618+ for an
    elevator or a hoist with a grab-type loading and unloading means.



CLS 37/399
TXT Including support or mounting device (e.g., hitch, shackle, lifting or
    dumping trunion):

    Apparatus under subclass 398 including attaching means to facilitate
    attachment of a scoop or bucket to a cable line.

    (1)     Note.  The cable line usually consists of a hauling line, briddle
    line, or holding line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buttons, Buckles, Clasps, etc., subclasses 115+ for a cord and rope
    holder.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 274.1+ for an adjustable bracket.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-line Implements, subclasses 68.26+ for a
    hoistable receptacle with a tilting discharge or loading, having trunions.



CLS 37/400
TXT Trolley-supported:

    Apparatus under subclass 394 wherein the scoop or bucket is movable along
    or upon a cableway, the cableway being so arranged to permit the scoop or
    bucket to engage the ground for digging and filling, and to be tightened to
    cause the scoop or bucket to be operated free of the ground.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclasses 76+ for a load handling hoist
    including a track, a carriage thereon, a hoisting machine fixed in relation
    to the track, and one or more cables extending from the hoisting machine to
    the carriage for hoisting and traversing the load.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 264+ for apparatus for hauling or hoisting load; subclasses 389+
    for a device or member for contacting and guiding a moving cable.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 560+ for a traversing,
    hoisting-type material holding implement; subclasses 595+ for an elevator
    or a hoist including loading or unloading means.



CLS 37/401
TXT Including cable or rope control means to facilitate loading, transporting,
    or dumping:

    Apparatus under subclass 400 including manipulating means (e.g., spring,
    latch, lever, and link mechanism) to regulate loading and unloading
    operations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclasses 73+ and 76+ for load handling hoists
    including a track, a carriage thereon, a hoisting machine fixed in relation
    to the track, and one or more cables or ropes extending from the hoisting
    machine to the carriage for hoisting and traversing the load.


CLS 37/403
TXT COMBINED OR CONVERTIBLE:

    Apparatus under the class definition wherein the excavator includes an
    excavating tool properly classifiable in this class in some way mounted or
    structurally arranged for use along with another tool which may be either a
    tool of this class or a tool of another class not superior to this class or
    in which the excavator includes a tool properly classifiable in this class
    which is particularly adapted to be changed or modified in some way, or
    rearranged in some manner, so as to either be used as a different type of
    tool or to effectively become a different type of tool.

    (1)     Note.  Class 37 is superior to Class 172; therefore, the
    combination of a Class 37 tool with a Class 172 tool is proper for this
    subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Class 37 is superior to Class 414; therefore, the
    combination of a Class 37 tool with a Class 414 tool is proper for this
    subclass.

    (3)     Note.  For a proper placement of a patent for this subclass, at
    least one claimed tool must be of the Class 37 type.

    (4)     Note.  The change in the apparatus must be more than merely placing
    a part in one of a series of adjacent holes or in general making a change
    which amounts to only an adjustment or a minor alteration in the overall
    functioning of the device.

    (5)     Note.  The change must be more than to change a part between an
    operative and an inoperative position.

    (6)     Note.  If one of the tools is used in snow removal, it should be
    classified in this class, subclass 241, and cross-referenced in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 245+ for an earth working tool which is
    convertible or changeable by disassembly or assembly; subclass 438 for a
    combined earth working implement.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 685+ for a shovel or
    fork-type material handling implement; subclasses 722+ for a material
    handling implement including shovel, rake, handle, or boom structure; and
    subclass 912 for a material handling implement which is combined or
    convertible.


CLS 37/404
TXT Combined with subsoiler:

    Apparatus under subclass 403 in which the excavator is provided with an
    earth ripping tooth for ripping or scarifying the earth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 699+ for specifics of a subsoiler;
    subclasses 784+ and 817 for a subsoiler combined with a scraper.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 37.1+
    and 67 for a hard material disintegrating machine having similar cutter.



CLS 37/405
TXT Combined with fork or rake:

    Apparatus under subclass 403 wherein one of the implements includes a
    plurality of elongated tines.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301+,   for a fork or rake used in clearing the land.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 815 for a tine attached to a leveling blade.





CLS 37/406
TXT Combined with clamp, grapple, or shear:

    Apparatus under subclass 403 wherein one of the implements includes means
    for gripping, holding, or clasping material or object, or cutting means
    such as a fixed blade and a movable blade with means to move the movable
    blade toward and away from the fixed blade.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 34.05+ for a material handler having a
    grip-type shear.

    83,     Cutting, subclass 928 for a vehicle mounted cutting device.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 34.1+ for a cutting or gripping device used
    in tree felling.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-line Implements, subclasses 86.4+ for a
    specific grapple.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 722+ for a material
    handling implement including shovel, rake, handle, or boom structure;
    subclasses 729+ for a material handler including a grab.


CLS 37/407
TXT With scraper:

    Apparatus under subclass 403 wherein one of the implements is a leveling
    blade.

    (1)     Note.  If the scraper is used in snow removal, it should be
    classified in Class 37, subclass 241, and cross-referenced here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241,    for a digging implement combined with or convertible to a snow
    removal device.

    266+,   for a snowplow scraper blade.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 810+ for specifics of a bulldozer-type
    leveling blade.


CLS 37/408
TXT Integrally mounted to a tool body and independently usable by repositioning
    the tool body:

    Apparatus under subclass 407 including a leveling or scraping blade fixed
    to another tool which becomes operational by movement of the tool
    combination (e.g., by pivotal rotation or movement) so that only one tool
    can be used at a time.

    (1)     Note.  The structure upon which the tools are mounted must be
    manipulated in some fashion such that while one tool is in a working
    position the other tool is held in a nonoperative position, and, by reverse
    manipulation, one tool can be moved to nonoperative position while the
    other tool is moved to working position.


CLS 37/409
TXT Multicomponent tool (e.g., scoop or bucket) convertible by relative
    movement of tool parts:

    Apparatus under subclass 407 wherein two or more implements movably
    cooperate with one another whereby in one position of relative movement a
    scraper blade is formed while in a different position of relative movement
    another tool is operational.


CLS 37/410
TXT Separate tools simultaneously mounted and independently usable:

    Apparatus under subclass 407 including plural implements which are mounted
    on the same vehicle or support structure but are not particularly designed
    to cooperate with one another.

    (1)     Note.  The tools are intended to be used separately and are more or
    less just conveniently mounted on the support structure.


CLS 37/411
TXT SCOOP OR EXCAVATING AND TRANSPORTING CONTAINER:

    Apparatus under the class definition wherein the excavator includes a
    ladle, shovel, or bucket capable of digging and holding the material.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in which the scoop is claimed in conjunction with a
    boom, dipstick, or liftlinks constitute a recitation of a handling
    structure and are classified in Class 414, Material or Article Handling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106+,   for a railway grader with a scoop.

    264+,   for a snow or ice removing device having a scoop.

    341,    for a dredger having scoop as a digging tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 26.5+ for a dragline scraper; subclasses
    63+ for a nondriven tool; subclasses 197 and 199 for a drag, scraper, or
    leveling blade; subclass 684.5 for a frame supported blade or scraper;
    subclasses 777, 779, 780, and 781 for a scraper; subclasses 811+ for a
    transversely mounted blade.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 55 for a scoop;
    subclasses 68.1+ for a hoistable receptacle.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 722+ for a shovel, rake,
    handle, or boom structure.


CLS 37/412
TXT Supported on vehicle between longitudinally spaced ground supports:

    Apparatus under subclass 411 wherein the scoop or container is held in
    position by a vehicle having front or rear wheels or their equivalent.


CLS 37/413
TXT With alarm, indicator, signal, or inspection means:

    Apparatus under subclass 411 including means to either acknowledge,
    measure, detect, or examine a change in the excavator, the excavated
    material, or the environment associated therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    308,    for signal, scale, indicator, or inspection means for a dredger.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, for an alarm, indicator, or signal of a
    mechanical nature.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, for an alarm, indicator, or signal of
    an electrical nature.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 698 for a material handling
    device of the tilting shovel or fork-type having an indicating means.

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclass 50 for vehicle guidance, operation, or indication of a
    construction or agricultural vehicle.


CLS 37/414
TXT Condition responsive or programmable means controls the excavating
    operation:

    Apparatus under subclass 412 having means to activate digging means into
    digging condition by the control of a pre-established sequencing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    348,    for a condition responsive ditcher.

    382,    for a condition responsive road grader.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 2+ for an earth working device having
    automatic control.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 424.07
    for a vehicle guidance, operation, or indication of a construction or
    agricultural vehicle.

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclass 50 for vehicleguidance, operation, or indication of a construction
    or agricultural vehicle.


CLS 37/415
TXT Control of attitude or depth of cut:

    Apparatus under subclass 414 wherein the regulating means is specifically
    adapted to regulate the earth penetration.


CLS 37/416
TXT Control of scoop component (e.g., elevator, apron, or ejector):

    Apparatus under subclass 414 wherein the significance is attributed to
    regulating the operation of one or more of the various components which
    make up the excavator (e.g., the loading mechanism, the gate which swings
    to close the bucket to retain the pile of earth, or the gate which
    discharges the earth).


CLS 37/417
TXT With specific suspension or means to steer or facilitate mounting of
    implement on vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 412 wherein the significance is attributed to a
    system of springs, shock absorbers, and other devices supporting the upper
    part of the excavator, to a mechanism for directional control of the
    excavator or to the draft frame for the excavator.



CLS 37/418
TXT With tandem or plural scoops or compartments:

    Apparatus under subclass 412 including at least two buckets one behind the
    other, or the bucket being divided into separate parts or sections
    partitioned from one another with each separate part being adapted to hold
    the excavated material.


CLS 37/419
TXT With means to aid loading or load distribution:

    Apparatus under subclass 412 combined with means to help in directing the
    material into the container as it moves over the ground or to help in
    spreading the material more or less evenly throughout the container.




CLS 37/420
TXT By auger:

    Apparatus under subclass 419 wherein the mechanism which aids loading or
    load distribution consists of a rotary conveyor having a shank with a
    spiral channel or channels in the shape of a screw and is adapted to feed
    or distribute the material.


CLS 37/421
TXT By digging movement of apron:

    Apparatus under subclass 419 wherein the mechanism which aids loading or
    load distribution consists of a front gate or short ramp which normally
    closes the front of the scoop to retain the load.

    (1)     Note.  The "apron" aids loading or load distribution by performing
    a hoeing motion to engage the earth being excavated as the scoop moves
    along and then pulling it up into the scoop.


CLS 37/422
TXT By endless conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 419 wherein the mechanism which aids loading or
    load distribution is in the form of a series of elements connected to one
    another in a continuous loop travelling about two or more pulleys,
    sprockets, or drums.


CLS 37/423
TXT With particular conveyor feature including drive means:

    Apparatus under subclass 422 wherein the significance is attributed to
    structure or the motion transmitting mechanism of the endless conveyor
    (e.g., sprocket, chain, gearing).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    361,    for a drive-related feature of a transverse conveyor.


CLS 37/424
TXT With coaction between apron or elevator and bowl:

    Apparatus under subclass 412 wherein the significance is attributed to a
    relative movement or interaction between the bucket that carries the earth
    and the gate which swings to close the bucket to retain the pile of earth
    or the mechanism which distributes earth evenly in the bucket.




CLS 37/425
TXT Actuated by fluid means:

    Apparatus under subclass 424 wherein the relative action between the apron
    or elevator and bowl is controlled by hydraulic or pneumatic means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    428,    for a fluid-actuated bowl manipulation.

    430,    for a fluid-actuated apron manipulation.


CLS 37/426
TXT With coaction between apron or elevator and ejector:

    Apparatus under subclass 412 wherein the significance is attributed to a
    relative movement or interaction between the load pushing or discharging
    member and the gate which swings to close the bucket to retain a pile of
    earth or the mechanism which distributes the earth evenly in the bucket.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    424+,   for the coaction between the apron or elevator and bowl.

    429+,   for an apron structure manipulation.






CLS 37/427
TXT With significant bowl structure or manipulation:

    Apparatus under subclass 412 wherein the significance is attributed to the
    way in which the scoop components are arranged or put together to form a
    particular scoop shape or to the improvement in the operational control of
    the body portion of the scoop.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    429+,   for an apron structure or manipulation.


CLS 37/428
TXT Actuated by fluid means:

    Apparatus under subclass 427 wherein the bowl manipulation is controlled by
    hydraulic or pneumatic means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    430,    for a fluid-actuated apron structure manipulation.


CLS 37/429
TXT With significant apron structure or manipulation:

    Apparatus under subclass 412 wherein the significance is attributed to the
    way in which the gate components are arranged or put together to form a
    particular shape or to the improvement in the operational control of the
    gate.

    (1)     Note.  Apron usually assists in the loading of the bowl, closes the
    loaded bowl, and is elevated for dumping. The simplest type of apron is a
    one-piece plate, usually curved, having mounting arms that are pivoted on
    the bowl side walls so that the lower edge of the apron moves from elevated
    position to closed position in an arc of a circle struck about the axis
    formed by the mounting pivot.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    424+,   for coaction between apron or elevator and bowl.





CLS 37/430
TXT Actuated by fluid means:

    Apparatus under subclass 429 wherein the manipulation or movement of the
    apron is controlled by hydraulic or pneumatic means.


CLS 37/431
TXT With particular unloading feature:

    Apparatus under subclass 412 in which the significance is attributed to act
    of removing the excavated earth from the scoop.



CLS 37/432
TXT Rear unloading:

    Apparatus under subclass 431 wherein the earth is discharged from the back
    of the scoop.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    437+,   for rear unloading of a bowl.


CLS 37/433
TXT Revolving-type:

    Apparatus under subclass 431 wherein the entire scoop or its bottom is
    rotated.


CLS 37/434
TXT Manually operated (e.g., two-wheel barrow):

    Apparatus under subclass 411 wherein the scoop is provided with a handle or
    handles for hand manipulation for digging, transporting, and unloading of
    material.



CLS 37/435
TXT Mounted rearwardly of vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 411 wherein the bucket or scoop is mounted at the
    back of a vehicle, usually on a vehicle's three-point linkage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 703 for a bucket or
    scoop-type load carrier attached to a rear mounted draft member.


CLS 37/436
TXT Bowl operatively connected to wheel axle:

    Apparatus under subclass 435 wherein the bucket is pivotally connected to
    the wheel supporting shaft through a lever mechanism, rack and pinion
    mechanism, or ratchet and pawl mechanism whereby the rotation of the wheel
    supporting shaft imparts necessary force to the mechanism to operate the
    bucket.


CLS 37/437
TXT Including rear unloading:

    Apparatus under subclass 436 wherein the material is discharged from the
    back of the bowl.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    432,    for a rear unloading feature in a bowl supported on a vehicle
    between longitudinally spaced ground supports.


CLS 37/438
TXT Actuated by fluid means:

    Apparatus under subclass 437 wherein the movement of the unloading
    mechanism is controlled by hydraulic or pneumatic means.


CLS 37/439
TXT With caster wheel or shoe:

    Apparatus under subclass 436 wherein the bowl is additionally supported on
    a pilot wheel or sliding contact plate.


CLS 37/440
TXT Lever and latch mechanism:

    Apparatus under subclass 436 wherein a metal bar pivoted on a fixed fulcrum
    causes the pivotal movement of the bowl.


CLS 37/441
TXT Dumping runner or revolving-type:

    Apparatus under subclass 435 including a lever mechanism, rack and pinion
    mechanism, or similar means for controlling the bowl when it is inverted
    for unloading.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 205 and 236+ for an earth working means
    manipulated by a ground engageable draft responsive means.


CLS 37/442
TXT Pushed forwardly of vehicle for filling:

    Apparatus under subclass 411 wherein the container or scoop is attached at
    the front of a wheeled or tracked vehicle and is adapted to be pushed into
    the material to be excavated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 810+ for a mounting means for connecting
    an earth working element to, and ahead of, a self-propelled vehicle and
    wherein a claim may include the tool, the vehicle, or a control system for
    the adjusting linkage.


CLS 37/443
TXT Dipper-type (e.g., backhoe bucket):

    Apparatus under subclass 411 wherein the scoop or excavating container is
    normally mounted on a pivoted boom which is mounted to a vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    379+,   for a ditcher having a shovel or scoop.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 694+ for an apparatus
    comprising a boom mounted to swing horizontally about an axis and having a
    shovel or fork handle attached thereto for a fixed pivot.



CLS 37/444
TXT Scoop or bucket structure, per se:

    Apparatus under subclass 411 wherein the significance is attributed to the
    components of the excavating container itself or some portion thereof
    (e.g., scoop bottom, cutting edge).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    398+,   for the bucket structure of a dragline or cable operated excavator.

    465,    for the bucket structure of an endless digger.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 701.1+ for a bulldozer blade.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 722+ for subject matter
    which includes details of the construction of a scoop, shovel, or tine.


CLS 37/445
TXT Including door structure or operator:

    Apparatus under subclass 444 wherein the significance is attributed to the
    operable and closable member which in the closed position retains the load,
    and in the open position allows the load to fall from the bottom of the
    scoop or container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 725 for means to force a
    load out of the scoop.


CLS 37/446
TXT DIGGING EDGE:

    Apparatus under the class definition including a leading portion of a
    scoop, shovel, or other implement which cuts into the material to be
    excavated or the attachment structure thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 701.1+ wherein the earth working tool is
    a transversely elongated bulldozer blade.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 327 for an earth boring
    or penetrating bit or bit element.


CLS 37/447
TXT Oscillating or reciprocating:

    Apparatus under subclass 446 wherein the leading portion of the excavating
    implement is vibrated or moved back and forth relative to the remainder of
    the implement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 40 for a vibrating earth working tool.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 37.1+
    for a disintegrating machine having a reciprocating cutter; subclasses 85.1
    and 85.2 for a cutterhead or teeth having parts moving relatively during
    operation.


CLS 37/448
TXT Corner guard (e.g., corner tooth):

    Apparatus under subclass 446 wherein at least one side of a bucket or scoop
    is provided with an additional separable cutting or wear protection element
    specifically adapted for being located at the junction of a digging edge
    and the side wall of the bucket or scoop.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 701.2 for a bulldozer blade having a
    removable corner bit and subclass 701.3 for a bulldozer blade having a
    removable cutting edge.


CLS 37/449
TXT Repositionable digging edge (e.g., reversible):

    Apparatus under subclass 446 wherein a cutting implement is adapted to be
    disassembled and reassembled in a different position so that a different
    portion of the cutting implement can be used to directly engage the
    material to be excavated.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are patents having digging
    implement which is adjustably positioned in a variety of positions or can
    be easily interchanged to provide various cutting edge contours by rotation
    through 180 degrees or reattachment.

    (2)     Note.  After the digging edge has received a desired degree of
    wear, its operating position on the base member may be reversed so as to
    present a fresh or unworn surface so that the life of the digging edge will
    be effectively prolonged.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 702+ for a tool or standard wherein a
    part of the tool may have its position changed through 180 degrees for the
    purpose of presenting a new wear portion or edge of the tool or for
    adjusting the position of some part of the tool.


CLS 37/450
TXT Removable digging edge having integral tooth adaptor:

    Apparatus under subclass 446 including a separable shroudlike cutting edge
    having means for mounting cutting teeth thereon.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are patents wherein upon wear of a
    particular cutting edge or an adapter module, only the particular worn
    component need be replaced and this is accomplished without disturbing of
    the other components.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 701.3 for a bulldozer tool having a
    transversely elongated blade with a removable cutting edge; subclasses 772+
    for a removable cutting or wearing edge or element for a tool.


CLS 37/451
TXT Distinct wear element mounted between teeth:

    Apparatus under subclass 446 wherein the removable cutting edge sections
    are mounted between the digging teeth to increase life of the permanent
    surface of a bucket or scoop.


CLS 37/452
TXT Tooth or adaptor:

    Apparatus under subclass 446 combined with a shearing point or projection
    extending from a digging edge being specifically adapted for penetrating or
    breaking the ground, or a socket or projection having a structure
    specifically adapted for mounting a digging tooth.


CLS 37/453
TXT Having wear cap:

    Apparatus under subclass 452 including a replaceable element mounted on an
    upper or a lower edge of a tooth or adaptor for prolonging the life of the
    tooth or adaptor.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are patents in which the main
    tooth body has some additional wear structure added thereto or to the
    adaptor. The tooth itself is not considered a wear cap.



CLS 37/454
TXT Repositionable or replaceable tooth (e.g., reversible):

    Apparatus under subclass 452 wherein the digging tooth is adapted to be
    disassembled and reassembled in a different position so that a different
    portion of the digging point can be used to engage the material which is to
    be excavated.

    (1)     Note.  The operating position of the tooth is usually reversed on
    the digging edge to present a new surface so as to prolong the life of the
    digging point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    449,    for a repositionable or reversible digging edge.




CLS 37/455
TXT Mounting or retaining means:

    Apparatus under subclass 452 including the specifics of the attachment
    structure (e.g., clamp, pin, key, or interlocking surfaces) for releasably
    securing a tooth or adaptor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 106+
    for a tooth mounting means.


CLS 37/456
TXT Including pin or key:

    Apparatus under subclass 455 wherein the attachment structure includes a
    removable wedge or rod-type retainer adapted to hold the tooth.



CLS 37/457
TXT Having resilient elastomeric element:

    Apparatus under subclass 456 also combined with a polymeric or rubberlike
    substance having elastic properties adapted to provide a frictional
    retention force.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclass 107 for
    a tooth mounting means having a resiliently biased retaining means.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, subclass 512 for a fastener securing element
    having an elastomeric material..


CLS 37/458
TXT Having resilient metallic element:

    Apparatus under subclass 456 also combined with a hard springlike material
    having elastic properties adapted to provide a frictional retention force.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 705 for a spring biased or formed tool or
    tool part.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, subclass 516 for a fastener securing element
    having a metallic springlike element.


CLS 37/459
TXT Wire or rod formed:

    Apparatus under subclass 458 wherein the resilient metallic element is made
    from an elongate element of a circular cross section.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 154+ for a distinct pin retainer.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, subclass 530 for a wire or rod formed resilient
    metallic element.


CLS 37/460
TXT Specific material (e.g., specialty steel, heat treatment of material,
    specific hardness test):

    Apparatus under subclass 446 wherein the significance is attributed to a
    substance or treatment used in forming at least a part of a digging edge.

    (1)     Note.  A mere recitation that a digging element or adapter is made
    of iron or steel is excluded from this subclass.


CLS 37/461
TXT CLAMSHELL BUCKET:

    Apparatus under the class definition wherein the digging tool consists of
    two pivotally cooperating digging elements which are adapted to be dropped
    in the open position into the material to be excavated and then adapted to
    be closed, thereby encompassing the material between the two elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-line Implements, subclasses 86.4+ for a
    grapple adapted for grasping a load and having a handling or hoist-line
    terminal.





CLS 37/462
TXT ENDLESS DIGGER:

    Apparatus under the class definition wherein the cutting or breaking device
    is in the form of a series of elements connected to one another in a
    continuous loop travelling about two or more pulleys, sprockets, or drums.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305,    for an endless digger or conveyor.

    332,    for an endless driven digging element.

    338+,   for endless bucket line.

    352,    for a ditcher with an endless nonbucket-type digging means.

    353+,   for a ditcher with an endless bucket.

    388,    for a road grader having a transverse endless scraper or bucket.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 89+ for an earth boring
    tool element on a continuously driven flexible endless member.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 509 for a conveyor having
    buckets specialized to gather load batches; subclasses 701+ for an endless
    bucket conveyor of general utility.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 79.1+
    for a cutterhead or tooth, especially subclasses 82.1+ for a chain-type
    head with plural teeth on a single link.


CLS 37/463
TXT With endless conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 462 wherein the means to carry or discharge the
    earth includes an orbiting continuous carrier to receive the loosened earth
    from the digger.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237+,   for a snow or ice removal machine with an endless conveyor.

    359,    for a ditcher with a longitudinal endless conveyor.

    360+,   for a ditcher with a transverse endless conveyor.

    368+,   for a slit ditcher with an endless conveyor.

    375+,   for a plow ditcher having an endless conveyor.

    389+,   for a road grader plow with an endless conveyor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 307.1 for a bucket conveyor;
    subclasses 312+ for a conveyor shiftably mounted on a vehicle; subclass 509
    for a conveyor having buckets specialized to gather load batches.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 398 for a power-driven
    conveyor for loading a wheeled vehicle; subclass 502 for a self-loading or
    unloading vehicle having a power-driven conveyor.



CLS 37/464
TXT Having nonbucket-type digging means:

    Apparatus under subclass 463 including cutting or breaking implements
    adapted to drag the material during the excavating operation and do not
    have any bottom and side walls to hold the excavated material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332,    for an endless driven digging elements for a dredger.

    352,    for a ditcher with an endless digging means.

    388,    for a road grader having a transverse endless scraper.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 519 for a conveyor section
    having means which enables the section's conveying member to engage and to
    remain in contact with the surface of a mound or loose material.


CLS 37/465
TXT Digging chain, bucket, blade, or tooth structure, per se:

    Apparatus under subclass 462 wherein the significance is attributed to the
    configuration or shape of the excavating implement or to the improved
    cutting effectiveness of the excavating implement or to the additional or
    improved support or guide means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327+,   for a specific cutterhead structure of a dredger.

    339,    for a bucket structure of a dredger.

    444,    for a scoop or bucket structure of an excavating and a transporting
    container.

    455+,   for a mounting or retaining means of an excavating tooth or adapter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 381+ for a chain structure including a guide
    bar or guide means.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 830+ for a diverse chain saw cutting element.

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 100 for a blade on an endless driven belt
    or chain.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 327+ for a cutter bit
    or bit element.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 79.1+
    for a cutterhead or tooth.


CLS 37/466
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Apparatus under the class definition not properly classifiable in any
    preceding subclasses of this class.


CLS 37/467
TXT Handled or hand operated:

    Apparatus under subclass 435 wherein the scoop or bowl is adapted to be
    controlled at one end by a human being who walks rearwardly of the scoop or
    bowl and controls its operation by grasping the handlebar or similar means
    while the other end is connected to a suitable source of power such as a
    draft animal or a tractor to draw the scoop or bowl over the surface to be
    excavated.



CLS 37/468
TXT Having quick-connect coupling:

    Apparatus under subclass 403 including a readily separable operating device
    and a support device for connecting the bucket or scoop to the excavator
    consisting of means operable to take up a condition to retain the bucket
    with the excavator in engagement, or a release condition to allow the
    detachment of the bucket from the excavator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 345+ for interfitted members.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 723 for means to facilitate
    attachment of shovel or rake to handle or boom; subclass 724 for a handling
    device releasably attached to a bucket or rake.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 37/901
TXT Bucket cleaners.


CLS 37/902
TXT Hydraulic motors.


CLS 37/903
TXT Scoop or scraper attachments.


CLS 37/904
TXT Vibration means for excavating tool.


CLS 37/905
TXT Nondredge excavating by fluid contact or explosion.


CLS 37/906
TXT Visual aids and indicators for excavating tool.


CLS 37/907
TXT Automatic leveling excavators.


CLS 37/908
TXT Canal cleaners.


CLS 38/
TTL TEXTILES:  IRONING OR SMOOTHING

CLS 38/
TXT This class is the generic class for devices and processes for producing a
    smooth appearance on the surface of a textile article or fabric, by
    pressing, stretching, rolling, sliding contact, or other means, as well as
    accessory means used in conjunction with the devices or operations.

    (0.5)   Note.  See Class 12, Boot and Shoe Making, subclass 57.1 for upper
    turning combined with seam smoothing.

    (1)     Note.  For devices for cleaning the flat iron sole surfaces, see
    Class 15, Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 104.

    (2)     Note.  Devices for stretching a textile web or fabric to straighten
    the edges or stretch the web are in Class 26, Textiles: Cloth Finishing,
    subclasses 51 and 71.

    (2.5)   Note.  See Class 29, Metal Working, subclass 90.01+ for machines
    and processes for condensing, compacting, smoothing, or polishing the
    surface of metallic or nonmetallic articles, usually by rubbing with a
    smooth surface of greater hardness than that of the articles being operated
    upon.

    (3)     Note.  Devices and methods of drying generally are in Class 34,
    Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, particularly subclasses 94,
    110, 306, 414, 419+, 444+, 466, 556, and 611+.

    (4.5)   Note.  See Class 69, Leather Manufactures, particularly subclasses
    7, 27 and 37 to 47 for apparatus for smoothing of fur, hides, skins, or
    leather.

    (7)     Note.  See Class 100, Presses, appropriate subclasses, for presses,
    per se, not elsewhere provided for.

    (8)     Note.  For flat irons which are electrically heated and in which
    the invention lies in the heating means, see Class 219, Electric Heating,
    subclass 245. If heated by gas or liquid fuel and the invention lies in the
    heating means, see Class 126, Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 411. If heated
    by extraneous means, see Class 126, Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 227,
    228 and 230.

    (9)     Note.  Devices for and methods of shaping or forming a fabric such
    as an article of apparel and combined means for both forming or shaping
    with smoothing or ironing are in Class 223, Apparel Apparatus.  The ironing
    and shaping of collars, cuffs and garments by stretching or molding them to
    shape over a form is in Class 223, Apparel Apparatus, as are all devices
    for smoothing the edges of collars and cuffs, whether the article is formed
    at the same time or not.  If a fabric or garment is slipped loosely over a
    support to facilitate ironing or smoothing, it is in this class (38).
    Devices for shaping and smoothing the neckband of a shirt as an incident to
    ironing the shirt as a whole, are in this class (38) and devices
    illustrating a device for forming and smoothing, but claiming only a
    smoothing operation, are in this class and cross-referenced into Class 223,
    Apparel Apparatus.

    (10)    Note.  For flat iron stands, per se, see Class 248, Supports,
    subclass 117.1.

    (11)    Note.  For wall accommodated or wall mounted enclosures, see Class
    312, Supports: Cabinet Structure, subclasses 242 and 245.

    (12)    Note.  For machines and processes for smoothing tobacco leaves, see
    Class 131, Tobacco, subclasses 290+.

    (14)    Note.  Class 118, Coating Apparatus, subclass 271 for pads
    impregnated with a heat liquefiable coating material.

    (15)    Note.  For articles named as adjuncts of Class 38 structure wherein
    the only characteristic claimed is a base carrying a coating, see Class
    428, Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses, for
    a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet, and especially subclasses 411.1+ for a composite web or sheet
    characterized solely by the compositions of the layers.


CLS 38/1
TXT Smoothing machines within the class definition, not otherwise provided for.


CLS 38/2
TXT Smoothing machines of this class combined with a machine which does not
    iron or smooth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 102 for presses not elsewhere provided for,
    combined with added features.


CLS 38/3
TXT Wherein the other machine is a fabric moistener.

    (1)     Note.  Where the moistening is effected during the smoothing
    operation and not prior or subsequent to the smoothing operation, see this
    class, subclass 14.

    (2)     Note.  For moistening devices, combined with sad irons, see this
    class, subclasses 77.1+.

    (3)     Note.  For moistening devices of specific types, see Class 68,
    Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 5 and 200.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 73 for pressing devices not elsewhere provided
    for and having means to add liquid or steam to the material being pressed.


CLS 38/4
TXT Multiple smoothing machines of this class having independent pressing
    couples.

    (1)     Note.  Where some of the pressing elements are common to two or
    more pressing machines, see this class, subclasses 19-24 and 44.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 193 for plural presses not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 38/5
TXT Multiple machines of this class having independent pressing couples, all
    pressing elements being platens.


CLS 38/6
TXT Machines wherein a smoother element is common to two other smoother
    elements of unlike character.  An apron pressing the fabric against another
    smoother element is regarded as a smoother element and may be the common
    element.


CLS 38/7
TXT A machine with a movable device for transferring the article smoothed to,
    through, from or back to the front of the machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 144 for presses not elsewhere provided for of a
    concurrent pressing and conveying type, and subclass 214 for reciprocating
    platen presses not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 38/8
TXT Devices under subclass 7 wherein the movable device is a conveyor belt.


CLS 38/9
TXT Devices under subclass 8 wherein the conveyor belt passes between opposed
    pressing elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 153 for concurrent pressing and conveying presses
    of the endless conveyer type, not elsewhere provided for, and in which a
    roll element coacts with an endless conveyer to effect the pressing action.


CLS 38/10
TXT Devices under subclass 9 wherein the opposed pressing elements are platens.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 222 for reciprocating platen presses not
    elsewhere provided for, having a belt-type plural or indexing material
    support.


CLS 38/11
TXT Devices under subclass 8 wherein the conveyor belt is opposed to a single
    smoother with the work between the belt and the smoother.


CLS 38/12
TXT Machines of this class with means for clamping or stretching a garment on
    one of the smoothing elements.

    (1)     Note.  For clamps and stretchers used in conjunction with ironing
    tables, see this class, subclasses 108 and 109.


CLS 38/13
TXT Devices under subclass 12 with means for clamping or stretching a garment
    on one of the smoothing elements combined with means for engaging the
    neckband of a shirt while on the smoothing element.

    (1)     Note.  For simple hand-operated implements for smoothing and
    stretching a fabric, see this class, subclass 70.

    (2)     Note.  For clamps and stretchers and neckband engaging devices used
    in conjunction with ironing tables, see this class, subclasses 108-110.


CLS 38/14
TXT Smoothing machines with means for effecting flow of fluid, whether it be a
    gas, a liquid or a vapor to or through the work during the smoothing
    operation.

    (1)     Note.  Where the fluid is applied to the work prior to entering the
    smoothing machine, or subsequent thereto, see this class, subclass 3.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 73 for pressing apparatus, not elsewhere
    classified, having means for introducing liquid and/or steam into contact
    with the material.


CLS 38/15
TXT Devices under subclass 14 wherein the smoothing elements are of the platen
    type.

    (1)     Note.  Where condensate is drained from a platen by the action of
    gravity, see this class, subclass 66.


CLS 38/16
TXT Devices under subclass 15 wherein the novelty is solely in the platen
    structure.


CLS 38/17
TXT Smoothing machines wherein the work is smoothed between platens.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 214 for reciprocating platen presses not
    elsewhere provided for.


CLS 38/18
TXT Devices under subclass 17 wherein one of the platens has a rotary movement
    about an axis perpendicular to the plane surface.


CLS 38/19
TXT Devices under subclass 17 wherein four or more platens are arranged one
    above another with the work smoothed between each pair of opposing faces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 194 for plural presses of the stacked plate type,
    not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 38/20
TXT Devices under subclass 17 wherein one of the press platens has parts which
    are adjustable with respect to other parts of the platen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 237 for reciprocating platen presses not
    elsewhere provided for, in which there are plural movable platens moving
    parallel to one another and opposing a single platen.


CLS 38/21
TXT Devices under subclass 17 wherein three or more press elements, not
    otherwise specifically provided for below, are involved.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses subclass 232 for reciprocating platen presses not elsewhere
    classified, in which there are three or more platens moving on intersecting
    paths, not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 38/22
TXT Devices under subclass 21 wherein the machine is so constructed as to
    facilitate the laying of a fabric on one press platen while the fabric on
    another press platen is being subjected to pressure.


CLS 38/23
TXT Devices under subclass 22 wherein one of the press platens is a
    reciprocable platen.


CLS 38/24
TXT Devices under subclass 21 wherein an interchange of platens may be obtained
    to effect pressure between platens and in which a fabric cannot be dressed
    on a press platen while a fabric on another press platen is being subjected
    to pressure.


CLS 38/25
TXT Devices under subclass 17 wherein there are but two press platens and it is
    necessary in effecting the smoothing of a textile to move both press
    platens.  The movement of one press platen may be effected by inflating a
    bag, one wall of which forms a platen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 211 for presses not elsewhere provided for,
    having a flexible sheet platen, and subclass 264 for reciprocating platen
    presses, not elsewhere provided for, in which opposed platens are both
    actuated.


CLS 38/26
TXT Devices under subclass 25 wherein one of the two press platens has a
    reciprocable motion, i.e., a back and forth motion, without intervention of
    an operator.


CLS 38/27
TXT Devices under subclass 17 wherein there are but two press platens and it is
    necessary, in effecting the smoothing of a textile, to move but one of the
    press platens.


CLS 38/28
TXT Devices under subclass 27 wherein the movable press platen has a
    reciprocable movement.


CLS 38/29
TXT Devices under subclass 28 wherein there is a roll about which a textile is
    wound positioned between a platen and a second reciprocable platen.


CLS 38/30
TXT Devices under subclass 27 wherein a platen is moved rectilinearly in both
    horizontal and vertical directions to effect a smoothing operation.


CLS 38/31
TXT Devices under subclass 30 wherein the movement is effected by power
    mechanism.


CLS 38/32
TXT Devices under subclass 27 wherein a platen is moved in both an orbital path
    about a fixed axis and in a rectilinearly horizontal path to effect a
    smoothing operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 226 for reciprocating platen presses, not
    elsewhere classified, in which the actuated piston or platen is movable
    transversely of the direction of compressive movement to a nonuse position.


CLS 38/33
TXT Devices under subclass 32 wherein the movement is effected by power
    mechanism.


CLS 38/34
TXT Devices under subclass 27 wherein the platen is moved in both an orbital
    path about a fixed axis and in a rectilinearly vertical path to effect a
    smoothing operation.


CLS 38/35
TXT Devices under subclass 34 wherein the movement is effected by power
    mechanism.


CLS 38/36
TXT Devices under subclass 27 wherein the platen is moved in an orbital path
    about a fixed axis to effect the pressing action.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 233 for reciprocating platen presses not
    elsewhere provided for, of the oscillatory or hinged platen or piston type.


CLS 38/37
TXT Devices under subclass 36 wherein the movement is effected by power means.


CLS 38/38
TXT Devices under subclass 37 wherein the power means is an electric motor.


CLS 38/39
TXT Devices under subclass 38, wherein the platen is moved in two sharply
    delimited stages.  One stage may be personally operated.  Both stages may
    be motor operated either by a pair of electric motors operating
    successively or by a single electric motor subjected to two different
    voltages or operating through a linkage which abruptly changes its
    leverage.  The subclass does not include patents wherein the change in
    leverage is effected solely by reason of the contour of a cam.


CLS 38/40
TXT Devices under subclass 37 wherein the power means is a fluid motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclasses for
    expansible chamber motors, per se.  Class 91 will take a motor with a
    nominally claimed load, such as a press platen, but will not take the
    combination of a motor and cooperating press platens even if the platens
    are nominally claimed.


CLS 38/41
TXT Devices under subclass 40 wherein the platen is moved in two sharply
    delimited stages.  One stage may be personally operated.  Both stages may
    be motor operated, either by a pair of fluid motors operating successively
    or by a single fluid motor subjected to two different pressures or
    operating through a linkage which abruptly changes its leverage.  The
    subclass does not include patents wherein the change in leverage is
    effected solely by reason of the contour of a cam.


CLS 38/42
TXT Devices under subclass 27 wherein the machine has mechanism for
    facilitating the movement of the platen element horizontally only.  Guiding
    means to suspend the platen above the surface of the cooperating platen may
    be included.


CLS 38/43
TXT Devices under subclass 27 wherein the movable platen element has a vertical
    movement only.


CLS 38/44
TXT Roller pressers not otherwise specifically provided for herein below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 155 for roller-type presses of the concurrent
    pressing and conveying type, not elsewhere provided for.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    especially subclass 168 for a roller, or roller pair, which advance web or
    strand material.


CLS 38/45
TXT Devices under subclass 44 wherein there is a reciprocable smoothing element
    in the organization, i.e., an element that moves back and forth without the
    intervention of an operator.


CLS 38/46
TXT Devices under subclass 45 wherein the reciprocable smoothing element is
    solely a roll.


CLS 38/47
TXT Devices under subclass 45 wherein the reciprocable smoothing element is
    solely a platen or concave fitting the roll.


CLS 38/48
TXT Devices under subclass 44 wherein four or more roller pressers are arranged
    with their axes lying in a single plane.


CLS 38/49
TXT Devices under subclass 44 wherein there is a single presser roller having
    contact with two or more pressing rollers.


CLS 38/50
TXT Devices under subclass 49 wherein one of the rollers is an aproned roll and
    the textile to be smoothed is wound together with the apron around the roll.


CLS 38/51
TXT Devices under subclass 49 wherein one of the rolls is a textile roll on
    which the textiles to be smoothed are wound.


CLS 38/52
TXT Devices under subclass 44 wherein the presser roll cooperates with a single
    other presser roll.


CLS 38/53
TXT Devices under subclass 52 wherein the cooperating pressing roll is a roll
    about which the textiles are wound, with or without another textile
    material.


CLS 38/54
TXT Devices under subclass 44 wherein the presser roll cooperates with a
    plurality of beds, generally arcuate surfaces which conform to the
    curvature of the roller presser.


CLS 38/55
TXT Devices under subclass 54 wherein there are a plurality of roller pressers
    as well as a plurality of beds.


CLS 38/56
TXT Devices under subclass 44 wherein the roller presser cooperates with a
    single bed.


CLS 38/57
TXT Devices under subclass 56 wherein there are a plurality of roller pressers
    cooperating with a single bed.


CLS 38/58
TXT Devices under subclass 56 wherein the roller presser is moved bodily.


CLS 38/59
TXT Devices under subclass 58 wherein the movement of the roller presser is
    effected by power means.


CLS 38/60
TXT Devices under subclass 56 wherein the bed is moved bodily.


CLS 38/61
TXT Devices under subclass 60 wherein the move- ment of the bed is effected by
    power means.


CLS 38/62
TXT Devices under subclass 44 wherein the roller presser is a roller with an
    apron adapted to be rolled there-around with the fabric pressed between the
    convolutions of the apron.


CLS 38/63
TXT Elements of machines of this class not otherwise provided for below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the notes thereunder.


CLS 38/64
TXT Tables, aprons or the like to support the work to facilitate the smoothing
    operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68.


CLS 38/66
TXT Elements under subclass 63 involving (1) the structure of platen or bed,
    (2) covers therefor, or (3) combinations therebetween.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 140, for ironing table covers.

    (2)     Note.  See this class, subclass 68, for aprons.


CLS 38/67
TXT Strippers for use with machines of this class.


CLS 38/68
TXT Aprons especially adapted for machines of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64.


CLS 38/69
TXT Implements adapted for use for ironing or smoothing textile fabrics.


CLS 38/70
TXT Devices under subclass 69, of a simple elemental character, which have
    means to press the fabric combined with means to stretch the same

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12      and 13, for machines for accomplishing the same results.


CLS 38/71
TXT Platen presses under subclass 69, involving simple elemental devices for
    effecting pressure between the platens.

    (1)     Note.  For the most part these patents are structures not supported
    by legs.

    (2)     Note.  For more complex mechanisms for effecting pressure between
    the elements, see this class, subclass 17.


CLS 38/72
TXT Devices under subclass 71 wherein the platen devices comprise three or more
    superposed platens.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     For more complex mechanisms for effecting pressure between the
    elements.


CLS 38/73
TXT Devices about which textile fabrics are wrapped to smooth the same.


CLS 38/74
TXT Flat irons not otherwise classifiable.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 126, Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 227, 230 and
    411; and Class 219, Electric Heating, subclass 245.  See Note (8) to the
    main class definition of this class for a statement of the line.

    (2)     Note.  For fluting irons, see Class 223, Apparel Apparatus,
    subclasses 35 and 36.

    (3)     Note.  Search Class 100, Presses, subclasses 92+ for presses
    combined with heating, cooling, or drying and subclass 295 for platens or
    pressure surfaces for presses not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 38/75
TXT Flat irons combined with instrumentalities for performing some function
    other than ironing or smoothing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 102 for presses not elsewhere provided for and
    having additional features.


CLS 38/76
TXT Devices under subclass 75 wherein there is a roller in the plane of the
    pressing face.


CLS 38/77.1
TXT Device under subclass 75 including means for handling or storing a liquid
    or vapor material in the pressing operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for a combined pressing machine having moistening means.

    14,     for a pressing machine having moistening means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 5 for a steam
    applying machine and subclass 222 for a steam applying implement.

    100,    Presses, subclass 73 for a pressing apparatus, not otherwise
    provided for, having moistening means.


CLS 38/77.2
TXT Device under subclass 77.1 having means to indicate, or to provide a visual
    view of, the quantity of moisture in the flat iron.


CLS 38/77.3
TXT Device under subclass 77.1 wherein the moisture handling or storing means
    is capable of being disassociated from the remainder of the flat iron.


CLS 38/77.4
TXT Device under subclass 77.1 wherein a handle is hingedly connected to the
    flat iron to expose or cover a filling opening.


CLS 38/77.5
TXT Device under subclass 77.1 wherein moisture is applied to the fabric in
    both a liquid and vapor form.


CLS 38/77.6
TXT Device under subclass 77.1 having means capable of being attached to a
    moisture supply means and wherein said supply means is not supported by the
    flat iron.


CLS 38/77.7
TXT Device under subclass 77.1 having means to control the heat for converting
    liquid into vapor.


CLS 38/77.8
TXT Device under subclass 77.1 including a compartment or container for storing
    liquid prior to its conversion into steam.


CLS 38/77.81
TXT Device under subclass 77.8 having means to increase atmospheric pressure in
    the reservoir or means, other than a opening for filling, to connect the
    reservoir to the atmosphere during filling, emptying or while generating
    steam.


CLS 38/77.82
TXT Device under subclass 77.8 wherein the reservoir is provided with a
    partition for obstructing fluid flow or is composed of a plurality of
    distinct storage areas.


CLS 38/77.83
TXT Device under subclass 77.8 wherein the conversion into steam occurs in a
    compartment other than a liquid storage compartment.


CLS 38/77.9
TXT Device under subclass 77.1 including means for handling moisture which is
    in the form of a heated vapor.


CLS 38/79
TXT Devices under subclass 75 wherein the flat iron is provided permanently
    with a support to maintain the ironing surface, when desired, out of
    contact with the goods being ironed. 96, for supports in the form of
    attachments to an iron requiring neither structural modification of the
    iron, such as drilling or filing, nor other adaptation such as preshaping
    of any part of the iron to cooperate with the support.


CLS 38/80
TXT Flat irons which have more than one ironing face and which faces may be
    shifted relative to a handle to present a selected one of them to the work.


CLS 38/81
TXT Flat irons in which a pressing plate is detachable from the body of the
    iron but in which the iron is incomplete without the plate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97,     for attachments consisting of sole surfaces attachable to an
    already complete flat iron.


CLS 38/82
TXT Devices under subclass 74 wherein the flat iron is provided with means to
    heat the same or to facilitate heating of the same not otherwise provided
    for.

    (1)     Note.  For the construction of means extraneous to a flat iron
    especially adapted to heat the same, see Class 126, Stoves and Furnaces,
    subclass 226.

    (2)     Note.  For the construction of a burner within a flat-iron, see
    Class 126, Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 411.

    (3)     Note.  For the construction of an electric heating element within a
    flat iron, see Class 219, Electric Heating, subclass 254.


CLS 38/83
TXT Devices under subclass 82 wherein the flat iron is heated by a preheated
    solid, removably positioned in the iron in heat conducting relationship to
    the sole plate of the iron.


CLS 38/84
TXT Devices under subclass 82 wherein the flat iron is heated by a hot fluid in
    the iron.


CLS 38/85
TXT Devices under subclass 84 wherein the flat iron is heated by steam coursing
    through the iron but not passing through the pressing face thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77.1,   wherein the steam passes through the face of the iron to moisten
    the fabric.


CLS 38/86
TXT Devices under subclass 82 wherein the body structure is modified so that an
    auxiliary heating means, such as an open flame playing within the iron, may
    readily heat the same.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 230, for the structure of a burner
    adapted to be temporarily inserted into a flat iron to heat the same.


CLS 38/87
TXT Devices under subclass 86 wherein the iron is heated by a combustible solid
    placed within it.


CLS 38/88
TXT Devices under subclass 74 relating to the general form, shape or materials
    of which a flat iron is made.


CLS 38/89
TXT Devices under subclass 88 wherein means are provided to heat insulate the
    body of an iron so as to hinder radiation of heat from the body of the iron.


CLS 38/90
TXT The handle structure of an iron.

    (1)     Note.  For handles in general, see Class 16, Miscellaneous
    Hardware, subclass 110.

    (2)     Note.  403, Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for a
    connection between a tool and a handle wherein only so much of the tool or
    handle is included as is necessary to effect the connection therebetween.


CLS 38/91
TXT Devices under subclass 90 wherein both the handle and a shell surrounding
    the body portion of an iron are detachable as a unit from the rest of the
    iron.


CLS 38/92
TXT Devices under subclass 90 wherein the handle is readily detachable from the
    iron.


CLS 38/93
TXT The structure of the plate which affords the ironing surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77.9,   or a sole plate which is perforated to permit the application of
    fluid to the work.


CLS 38/94
TXT Attachments for flat irons which are not otherwise provided for.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 36 for flutting attachments.


CLS 38/95
TXT Hand grips applicable to the handle of a flat iron to heat insulate the
    hand of an operator from the conductive heat of an iron and shields
    applicable to an iron to heat insulate the hand of an operator from the
    radiant heat of an iron.


CLS 38/96
TXT Devices attachable to an iron, without deformation of the structure
    thereof, for supporting the pressing surface of the iron out of contact
    with the work, when so desired.

    (1)     Note.  For similar devices forming a part of the iron and not of a
    readily attachable and detachable character, see this class, subclass 79.


CLS 38/97
TXT Sole plates, additional to the sole plate already on a completed flat iron,
    which may be readily attached or detached from the complete iron.

    (1)     Note.  For a detachable sole plate of a flat iron, see this class,
    subclass 81.


CLS 38/98
TXT Flat irons with weights which may be removed or added at will to vary the
    total weight of the iron.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 16, Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 403 for a
    paper weight and subclass 404 for other generic weighting means.


CLS 38/99
TXT Smoothing implements with nonplanar, or curved surfaces fixedly mounted so
    that garments or fabrics may be presented to the same and moved relative
    thereto to smooth the same.  Included in this subclass are the ironers
    known in the trade as "puffers".


CLS 38/100
TXT Smoothing implements consisting of a roller or rollers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the notes thereunder.


CLS 38/101
TXT Where the implement consists of opposite rollers engageable on opposite
    face of the fabric being smoothed.


CLS 38/102
TXT Devices for smoothing a fabric merely by stretching the same.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclass 46 for the stretching of leather by
    racking or rubbing; i.e., by submitting a leather sheet to the force of
    blows by oscillating or reciprocating rod ends while held in arched
    configuration (e.g., by the oscillations or reciprocations of a group of
    spaced rods whose ends define a convex array).


CLS 38/102.1
TXT Subject matter under subclass 102 comprising an apparatus across which a
    sheet(s) of cloth is to be placed to effect stretching thereof and which is
    in the form of (1) a device comprising spaced linear elongated rigid
    members and means for retaining said members in spaced relation, said
    members further including means for securing a portion of the cloth thereto
    (2) a first member which is designed to fit or telescope within a second
    member (e.g., embroidery hoop) and secure the cloth therebetween or (3) two
    or more cloth securing elements spaced apart on a base (e.g., spaced pins
    on a peg board).

    (1)     Note.  The patents found in this and indented subclasses are
    analogous to but are distinguishable from patents found in Class 160,
    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 371 and 382
    in that the patents found herein are directed to an apparatus across which
    a sheet(s) of cloth is temporarily placed to effect stretching thereof,
    while the patents found in Class 160 are directed to a product of
    manufacture wherein the sheet (i.e., flexible panel) which is stretched is
    a permanent component thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 5 for a combined carpet fastener
    and stretcher.

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclass 71, for apparatus for
    stretching a running length web of cloth.

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclass 149 for a frame upon which
    threads are to be stretched and held while being fabricated into a
    structure by some textile operation.

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 91.5 for an upholstery making apparatus for
    drawing or pressing an outer fabric layer onto or about a stuffed or padded
    furniture component.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 618 for the
    drying of cloth (by heating or the application of a gas) while maintained
    on a stretching frame.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 222 for a building
    panel having a tensioned or flexed sheet facing.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclass 19.1 for an apparatus for stretching
    a hide, skin or leather stock.

    112,    Sewing, subclass 119 for the combination of sewing (quilting) and
    stretching work on a frame.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclass 371 for
    a fabric filled or covered frame or a frame for such use; especially
    subclass 372 for a device wherein the fabric may be stretched by adjusting
    the frame size and subclass 378 for a frame-type device including means for
    applying tension to the fabric therein when not including means for
    affording mechanical advantage.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 61 for a device for stretching apparel
    on forms.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 200 for patents directed to a stretcher for use in forcing a
    carpet or like covering into place in laying it, when including means for
    affording mechanical advantage.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 8.6 for patents
    directed to a stretcher for use in forcing a carpet or like covering into
    place in laying it, when not including means for affording mechanical
    advantage.


CLS 38/102.2
TXT Device under subclass 102.1 comprising an inner frame member of such
    geometry and/or structure as to fit or telescope within an outer frame
    member and being adapted to secure at least a portion of the web or sheet
    of cloth there-between.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclass 380 for
    a flexible, fabric filled or covered frame or a frame for such use wherein
    the frame is made of two sections, each in the form of a complete frame
    arranged in superimposed relation and between which a fabric is secured.


CLS 38/102.21
TXT With wound material support:

    Subject matter under subclass 102.1 wherein one of the rigid members is
    rotatable for winding the sheet of cloth about this member, thereby
    enabling successive lengths of the sheet to be stretched.

    (1)     Note.  Typically both rigid members are rotatably mounted, so that
    a length of sheet material is unwound from the first member (supply coil)
    which is then locked while the second member (take-up coil) is rotated to
    stretch the sheet material between the members.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 538+ for convolute
    winding combined with unwinding.


CLS 38/102.3
TXT Device under subclass 102.1 comprising spaced linear elongated rigid
    members and means for retaining said members in spaced relation in
    combination with an additional elongated member extending therebetween to
    which at least a portion of the sheet of cloth may be attached, another
    portion of said sheet being attachable to at least one of said spaced
    elongated rigid members, said additional member being selectively
    adjustable in the plane of the spaced members.


CLS 38/102.4
TXT Device under subclass 102.1 comprising spaced linear elongated members and
    means for retaining said members in different positions with respect to
    each other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclass 372 for
    a flexible fabric filled or covered frame or a frame for such use provided
    with means for adjusting the frame size.


CLS 38/102.5
TXT Device under subclass 102.4 wherein the frame is adjustable with respect to
    its length as well as with respect to its width.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclass 374 for
    a flexible fabric filled or covered frame or a frame for such use wherein
    the frame is adjustable both longitudinally and laterally.


CLS 38/102.6
TXT Device under subclass 102.5 wherein the adjustment of the device is
    accomplished by an inter-connection of a pair(s) of adjacent members by
    means of an elongated connector secured to a first member and passing
    through and slidable in an elongated aperture in a second member.


CLS 38/102.7
TXT Device under subclass 102.5 wherein the adjustment of the device is
    accomplished by an interconnection of a pair(s) of adjacent members by
    means of a securing element capable of applying compression to at least one
    of the members, said member being selectively movable through or past said
    element.


CLS 38/102.8
TXT Device under subclass 102.5 wherein one or more of the members comprise a
    plurality of longitudinally interconnected components which may be moved
    axially relative to each other either by the sliding of the components into
    or on one another.


CLS 38/102.9
TXT Device under subclass 102.1 which may be folded or disassembled to provide
    a structure of reduced volume.


CLS 38/102.91
TXT Device under subclass 102.1 including means for securing the cloth to the
    frame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., appropriate subclasses for a fabric
    fastening element, per se.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclass 383 and
    see the notes thereto for patents directed to a frame side or other
    elongated element including means for fastening an edge of a fabric thereto.


CLS 38/103
TXT Structures including a board especially configurated or covered to
    facilitate the smoothing of a fabric when used in conjunction with a flat
    iron or similar instrumentality.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 295 for platens or pressure surfaces for presses
    not otherwise provided for.

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, appropriate subclasses for
    horizontal planar surfaces in general.

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses. Class 269 is the residual
    locus for patents to a device for clamping, supporting and/or holding an
    article (or articles) in position to be operated on or treated.  See notes
    thereunder for other related loci.


CLS 38/104
TXT Ironing tables combined with means for performing functions other than
    those which facilitate smoothing of a fabric, and not otherwise provided
    for and wherein each device is capable of having such other function
    performed upon it or by it at the same time.

    (1)     Note.  For ironing tables combined with cabinets, see Class 312,
    Supports:  Cabinet Structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 102 for presses not elsewhere provided for, and
    having additional features.


CLS 38/106
TXT Devices under subclass 104 wherein the ironing table is combined with a
    rack.


CLS 38/107
TXT Devices under subclass 104 wherein the ironing table is combined with a
    flat iron support.

    (1)     Note.  For flat iron supports in combination with other devices,
    adapted to be attached to or rest on an ironing board, see this class,
    subclass 142.

    (2)     Note.  For flat iron supports adapted to be attached to or rest on
    an ironing table, see Class 248, Supports, subclass 117.1, and indented
    subclasses.


CLS 38/108
TXT Devices under subclass 104 wherein the ironing table is combined with means
    to clamp the article being smoothed onto the board, or with means to
    stretch the article over the board, or both.

    (1)     Note.  For clamping and stretching devices used in conjunction with
    a smoothing machine, see this class, subclasses 12 and 13.


CLS 38/109
TXT Devices under subclass 108 wherein, in addition to clamping or stretching
    devices, some means is provided to hold in shape the neckband of a shirt.

    (1)     Note.  For neckband shapers on a smoothing machine, see this class,
    subclass 13.

    (2)     Note.  For other neckband shapers on an ironing board, see this
    class, subclass 110.


CLS 38/110
TXT Devices under subclass 104 wherein an ironing board is provided with means
    for holding in shape the neckband of a shirt, and shapers themselves when
    independent of the board but adapted to used in conjunction with the board
    when a garment is applied to the board.

    (1)     Note.  For neckband shapers on a smoothing machine, see this class,
    subclass 13.

    (2)     Note.  For neckband shapers associated with clamping or stretching
    devices on an ironing board, see this class, subclass 109.


CLS 38/111
TXT Wherein an ironing table is equipped with means, other than racks, to
    support a fabric below the level of the ironing board.

    (1)     Note.  For racks to support a fabric while being smoothed, see this
    class, subclass 106.


CLS 38/112
TXT Wherein an ironing table is convertible into some other instrumentality and
    wherein the ironing table and the other instrumentality are not available
    at the same time to perform their respective functions.

    (1)     Note.  Where an ironing table is combined with other
    instrumentalities and the ironing table and one of the instrumentalities
    are capable of performing their functions at the same time, see this class,
    subclass 104 and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclass 29 for a ladder
    convertible to an ironing board.


CLS 38/135
TXT Ironing tables affording more than one pressing face.


CLS 38/136
TXT Ironing boards under subclass 135 which are invertible for presentation to
    the iron of any one of a plurality of pressing surfaces.


CLS 38/137
TXT The structure of an ironing board having a single ironing surface. The
    "ironing board" may include the board, per se, with its cover.


CLS 38/138
TXT Devices under subclass 137 wherein the ironing board is made up of two or
    more pieces alineable into one plane.


CLS 38/139
TXT Devices under subclass 138 wherein the pieces are hinged to each other.


CLS 38/140
TXT Covers for ironing boards or the means for securing the cover in place on
    the ironing board.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 66, for bed or platen covers; and
    subclass 68, for aprons.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, subclass 48 for a roll cover, per se, not elsewhere
    provided for, and see the notes thereunder.


CLS 38/141
TXT Miscellaneous devices accessory to smoothing.


CLS 38/142
TXT Flat iron stands combined with other instrumentalities.

    (1)     Note.  For flat iron stands combined with ironing tables, see this
    class, subclass 107.

    (2)     Note.  For flat iron stands, per se, see Class 248, Supports,
    subclass 117.1.


CLS 38/143
TXT Devices for shaking out or spreading fabrics preliminary to their being
    subjected to a smoothing process.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclass 278 for machines for piling
    sheets.


CLS 38/144
TXT Processes under the class definition relating to the smoothing and ironing
    of fabrics, unless otherwise provided for.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclass 137 for general laundering processes which
    may involve ironing as well as washing.

    28,     Textiles: Manufacturing, subclass 118 for processes of and
    apparatus for pressing loose fibers into tampons either with or without the
    application of heat.

    100,    Presses, subclass 35 for pressing methods not elsewhere provided
    for.


CLS 40/
TTL CARD, PICTURE, OR SIGN  EXHIBITING

CLS 40/
TXT This class includes means for displaying information by printed or painted
    cards, calendars, photographic transparency viewers, railroad train station
    indicators, pictures, labels or tags or index files.  Picture frames and
    stands for supporting pictures are also included.  Albums are included in
    subclasses Changing exhibitors, Hinged leaves; Changing exhibitors, Pivoted
    plates, and in Picture frames, Mats, Mounts and backs, Pocketed.  Such
    station-indicators as change the reading matter displayed are included
    under the several subclasses of Changing exhibitors. This class includes in
    subclasses under the heading, CHECKS, LABELS AND TAGS, CHANGING, READING,
    devices which select or point out one or more of several inscriptions,
    characters, or legends by means of a movable pointer. This class includes
    in the subclasses under CALENDARS means to indicate the date desired by
    means of pointers. This class includes devices for viewing a picture
    including a transparency or a series of such pictures or transparencies.
    Excluded from this class are devices which display a plurality of pictures
    at such a rate as to create an illusion of motion due to persistence of
    vision of the observer.  Also excluded are devices provided with a double
    lens so that each eye may view a single picture which differs slightly from
    the other picture in order to produce a sense of depth, which devices are
    designated stereoscopes. This class also includes dummy display devices
    which are provided with means to attract and hold the attention of a
    viewer, and particularly those which give the impression of falling water
    and flickering flames.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 209.13 for a head covering carrying an indicia
    where the structure of the head covering is modified in a manner other than
    for merely receiving the indicia.

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclass 600 for a solid fuel
    treated to modify its appearance, e.g., by the application of an indicium
    thereto.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 38 for a specific
    building structure combined with a discrete sign, and subclasses 103+ for a
    marker or monument which has a shape which in its entirety has inherent
    stability against overturning and which serves to indicate a particular use
    of or position on the earth or which includes features having a function
    other than imparting information, e.g., a storage compartment.

    63,     Jewelry, subclasses 18+ for lockets adapted to carry a concealed
    picture, and subclass 20 for ornamental pins.

    70,     Locks, subclasses 57+ for locks of special application designed to
    secure specific articles where the tag or sign structure has not been
    modificated for the anti-theft device and subclasses 432+ for locks
    provided with indicators for disclosing whether the lock has been opened or
    otherwise tampered with, or its present condition, open or locked.

    84,     Music, subclasses 486+ for turning devices particularly designed
    for use with musical instruments.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclasses, for devices
    provided with a pointer to a particular legend or other insignia where the
    device is neither a calendar or a check, a label or a tag.

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 347+ for tobacco products carrying indicia
    where the product is modified in a manner other than for merely receiving
    the indicia, and subclass 360 for plug tobacco products carrying indicia.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, appropriate
    subclasses, for (1) panel units in which a flexible fabric or other
    flexible sheet material forms the panel portion, (2) panel units formed of
    plural strips, slats or panels interconnected for relative motion
    (excluding those connected only by a common operator or mounted only in a
    common frame or on a common support), (3) panel units in the form of
    portable partitions, and (4) parts (1)-(3) combined with each other or with
    rigid closures or other rigid panels.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 30+ for clutches, per
    se, and subclasses .02 to .098 for devices controlling the motor and the
    clutch.

    194,    Check-Actuated Control Mechanisms, appropriate subclasses for coin
    controlled exhibitors.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 736+ for packages in
    which the box is convertible to a display package by means forming part of
    or contained within the box when shipped to the dealer.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, appropriate subclasses, for devices for
    supporting plural articles and particularly subclasses 1.51+ for power
    operated rotary racks.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 365+ for receptacles having means for
    indicating that the contents of the receptacle have been tampered with, the
    quantity of material in the receptacle or means to call attention of the
    user to the dangerous character of the contents; subclasses 201+ for
    closures which indicate the dangerous character of the receptacle contents;
    subclass 227 for closures combined with a card or other indicia bearing
    article; and subclass 230 for closures which bear visual indicia.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 2+ and particularly subclass 8 for
    article dispensing devices not otherwise provided for including indicating
    or display means which are dispenser-operated, and see also subclass 199
    for other article dispensing devices having combined display means.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 3+ for gas dispensers not specialized for
    skywriting.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.

    235,    Registers, appropriate subclasses for changeable exhibitors where
    the numerals are changed by accumulator devices.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 325+ for an unwinding
    and rewinding a machine convertible endless coil (i.e., closed loop)
    information carrier (e.g., magnetic tape or photographic film, etc.), or
    subclasses 615+ for a residual guide or guard that directs elongated
    flexible material that may be combined with more than nominal winding
    structure.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclasses 167+ for details of
    devices on moving vehicles actuated by devices on the track.

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses for mere supports or holders for
    signs, license plates, etc.; particularly, subclasses 441.1+ for a holder
    for copy, sheet music, or a book, which holder retains the article in
    position for reading.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 329 for record projection methods and
    apparatus using invisible radiation and luminescent screens, subclasses
    458.1+ for method and apparatus for irradiating fluorescent or
    phosphorescent devices and subclasses 483.1+ for fluorescent and
    phosphorescent devices.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 647+, 301.16+, 301.36, and 301.4+ for
    fluorescent and phosphorescent compositions; subclass 305 for smoke or fog
    compositions; and subclass 359 for smoke-generating apparatus wherein the
    composition is not limited to sky writing.

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 288+ for game pieces such as
    checkers, chessmen, etc., which are intended to cooperate with a board in a
    board game, and subclasses 292+ for cards or tiles which cooperate with
    each other in a card or tile game.

    281,    Books, Strips, and Leaves, appropriate subclasses for devices which
    are directed to book, strip or leaf structure, per se.

    283,    Printed Matter, appropriate subclasses, for checks, labels or signs
    where the device relates to printed matter rather than the physical
    characteristics of the devices noted above.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 92+ for torque
    transmitting electrical clutches.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 513+ for electric
    lamps formed into the shape of indicia or having indicia formed on or
    within the envelope or bulb of the lamp, or otherwise combined with the
    lamp.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for electric systems for supplying electric energy to electric
    lamps.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 445+ for automatic
    electric motor starting and stopping systems, subclasses 494+ for electric
    motor starting and stopping by armature circuit control, and subclasses
    521+ for electric motor starting and stopping by field circuit control.

    345,    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclass 56 for mosaic display
    light systems.

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclasses
    239+ for test charts or targets used in vision testing; and subclass 243
    for such charts or targets when illuminated.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, appropriate subclasses for motion picture
    methods and apparatus.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, for
    viewers which contain optical features which go beyond the nominal
    recitation of a lens or reflector.  See (1) Note under subclass 806 and (8)
    Note under subclass 600+ in Class 359.  See Class 359, subclasses 467+ for
    stereoscopes.

    362,    Illumination, appropriate subclasses for lighting devices which do
    not form part of signs or exhibiting devices.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 28+ for
    devices wherein the dates of day, month or year are actuated by the
    mechanism which operates the clock or watch.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 718+ for a copyholder linked to or
    mounted on a typewriter.

    402,    Binder Device Releasably Engaging Aperture or Notch of Sheet,
    appropriate subclasses for a sheet retainer device which includes impaling
    means which means passes through a sheet and releasably secures such sheet
    so that it may be removed or inserted without mutilation or destruction.

    (1)     Note.  A sheet retainer device disclosed alternatively for (1) the
    display of sheet (e.g., overlapped, etc.) or (2) for the mere retention of
    sheets in superposed coextensive relation (e.g., loose-leaf binder, etc.),
    will be placed in Class 402; however, where the sole disclosure is directed
    to (1) above or to (2) above including and index means, classification will
    be in this class (40).


    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 9+ for traffic
    director or sign including significant road structure, other than required
    to accommodate the sign or sign support.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    for edible labels and labeled food products and processes relating to same,
    see especially subclasses 87 and 383.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet, especially subclasses 4 through 30, and 542.2+ for decorative
    articles not elsewhere provided for, and subclasses 195+ for a web or sheet
    having a discontinuous or differential coating or impregnation similar to a
    picture, design or indicia.

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclass 65 for an amusement type
    illusion or stage device appropriate therefor wherein the illusion is
    caused by a visual imitation of an event occurring in nature, e.g., rain,
    snow, fire, etc.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Class 523, subclass 172 for a composition containing a
    synthetic resin or natural rubber having utility as an applied marking for
    pavements or roads, or for signs defining traffic lanes, pedestrian
    crosswalks, traffic instruction, etc., or as an applied reflex-reflector or
    to processes of preparing said composition.


CLS 40/1
TXT Miscellaneous devices for continuously or temporarily displaying cards,
    pictures, maps, and signs which are not properly classifiable in any of the
    following subclasses.


CLS 40/1.5
TXT Devices for attachment to the clothing, designed to display information.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    63,     Jewelry, subclass 20 for purely ornamental devices to be attached
    to the clothing.


CLS 40/1.6
TXT Badges in which the information displayed may be changed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    63,     Jewelry, subclasses 18 and 19 for personal wear ornaments adapted
    to carry a concealed picture.


CLS 40/5
TXT Devices subclass 299 designed for attachment to articles of merchandise, in
    which one or more of several legends are exposed for display for such time
    as desired and afterwards changed at will or in which one or more of
    several legends which are constantly displayed may be indicated as the ones
    disclosing the particular information to be imparted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 200+ for indicating signals in
    general.


CLS 40/6
TXT Devices subclass 299 for temporary attachment to baggage for identification
    purposes or to designate the destination of the baggage or for both
    purposes.


CLS 40/27
TXT Devices under subclass 299 which are strengthened by miscellaneous
    reinforcing devices to prevent tearing or mutilation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 382+,
    particularly subclass 384 and subclasses 385+.


CLS 40/27.5
TXT Devices under subclass 299 comprising checks of the coin or token type.

    (1)     Note.  This is the generic place for coins, tokens, or the like,
    not elsewhere provided for.

    (2)     Note.  The coin or token is usually, but is not necessarily, of
    circular shape, but must be adapted for pocket or personal use in a manner
    similar to coins.  The information conveyed is usually the value
    represented by the coin or token (which, however, need have no inscription
    thereon) or some advertising matter inscribed on the coin or token.  Game
    tokens which act merely as substitutes for money, such as poker chips, are
    included but game pieces, such as checkers, dominoes, chessmen, and the
    like, which have a function in the game are in Class 273, Amusement
    Devices:  Games, subclasses 288+ and 292+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for changeable reading baggage checks.

    616,    for embossed, molded, rolled, or     stamped signs.

    657,    for check boards and racks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    194,    Check-Actuated Control Mechanisms, subclass 214, for coins, tokens,
    or the like, modified in structure so as to be useful solely in connection
    with a particular type of check controlled apparatus.

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 288+ for game pieces such as
    checkers, chessmen, etc., which are intended to cooperate with a board in a
    board game, and subclasses 292+ for cards or tiles which cooperate with
    each other in a card or tile game.  See (2) Note above.

    283,    Printed Matter, subclass 53 for theater tickets.


CLS 40/107
TXT Miscellaneous devices for disclosing the relation of the days and months in
    a given year or series of years.  In some instances they disclose
    additional astronomical data. Calendars also comprise devices for calling
    attention to memoranda or appointments to be noted on particular days of
    the month.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    335,    for pencils or pens carrying indicia in the form of calendars.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 28+ for
    devices wherein the dates of the day, month, or year are actuated by the
    mechanism which operates the clock or watch.


CLS 40/109
TXT Calendars embodying a charactered plate or sliding part which slides back
    of one or more openings in a suitable support to disclose a number of
    characters therethrough or which slides upon the face of a charactered
    support to shift certain of the characters on the sliding part opposite
    certain other characters upon the support to bring into proper relation the
    names of the days of the week and the corresponding numbers of the days of
    the month for any desired month.


CLS 40/110
TXT Calendars comprising a charactered plate and a movable pointer or marker
    which may be placed at will opposite any particular character to attract
    attention thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 200+ for indicating signals.


CLS 40/111
TXT Calendars comprising charactered rollers mounted to rotate in a suitable
    frame, so as to present different characters as the rollers are rotated.


CLS 40/112
TXT Calendars comprising one or more rotatable charactered parts placed back of
    openings in the face of a suitable support, so that the characters may be
    observed through such openings, and suitable clutch mechanism whereby such
    charactered parts may be rotated.


CLS 40/113
TXT Calendars comprising charactered disks mounted upon the back of a suitable
    support, so that the characters upon the faces of the disks may appear
    through sight-openings in the support.  This subclass includes calendars
    comprising overlapping eccentric disks which when rotated show different
    combinations of figures to make different numbers; also, a single rotating
    charactered disk mounted upon a charactered support, so that by rotating
    the disk a different combination of characters can be effected.


CLS 40/114
TXT Calendars comprising a plurality of charactered drums, cylinders, or prisms
    arranged to be rotated upon a single axis, so as to arrange a plurality of
    combinations of calendar characters suitable for different periods of time.


CLS 40/115
TXT Calendars comprising several charactered disks of different sizes mounted
    concentrically to turn a single axis.  The disks may be upon the face of a
    suitable support and present rings of characters, or they may be upon the
    rear of the support, and the characters exposed through suitable
    sight-openings.


CLS 40/116
TXT Calendars comprising a charactered web and a suitable roller to which the
    web may be attached and about which the web may be wound.  The roller may
    be carried in bearings in a suitable support.


CLS 40/117
TXT Calendars comprising a charactered web having its ends connected to
    rollers, the web being adapted to be wound upon one of the rollers as it is
    unwound from the other.


CLS 40/118
TXT Calendars comprising one or more endless webs bearing the numbers of the
    days of the month, the numbers of the years, and the names of days of the
    week, or the names of the months of the year and capable of being shifted
    to properly designate the dates of any particular week or month.


CLS 40/119
TXT Calendars comprising a plurality of charactered leaves flexibly connected
    together, as in a book, do that the leaves may be turned over to expose the
    characters upon the succeeding leaves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120.


CLS 40/120
TXT Stands or frames for supporting block, pad, or tablet calendar leaves of
    such construction as to permit the front leaves to be successively removed
    or turned back to display the face of the following leaf.


CLS 40/121
TXT Calendars comprising a block, pad, or tablet of charactered leaves so
    constructed as to permit the leaves to be successively removed as the dates
    designated thereon have expired.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    283,    Printed Matter, subclasses 2+ for printed calendars, per se.


CLS 40/122
TXT Calendars comprising a pack of calendar-cards held in a suitable open faced
    envelope, receptacle, or frame, so that the front card may be removed and
    inserted at the rear of the pack to expose the following card to view.


CLS 40/124
TXT Subject matter under main class definition including a support means in
    combination with a display of a plurality of display sheets or such means,
    per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    534,    for a similar device wherein the sheets are in overlapped relation
    and are hinged to permit exposure.


CLS 40/124.01
TXT Display card:

    Card having advertising matter or a picture to be displayed.

    (1)     Note. This subclass includes the supports for  a  card which is  an
    integral part of the card or is combined therewith.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 466+ for  a support  for a display card.


CLS 40/124.02
TXT Having illuminating means:

    Display card under subclass 124.01 including a lighting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    714,    for a picture frame combined with a lighting device, subclass
    661.02 for holder having illuminating means.


CLS 40/124.03
TXT Having sound-producing means:

    Display card under subclass 124.01 including an audio device (e.g.,
    speaker, radio, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    455,    for display device with sound, subclass 717 for picture frame with
    sound producing means.


CLS 40/124.04
TXT Having magnetic means:

    Display card under subclass 124.01 including a magnetic element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    600,    for signs or holder with magnetic attaching feature, subclass 711
    for picture frame having magnetic means, and subclass 661.01 for holder
    having a magnetic element.


CLS 40/124.05
TXT Having mounting means adapted for attachment to longitudinal C-shaped
    channel:

    Display card under subclass 124.01 wherein the display card includes means
    for allowing securement of the display card to a channel having parallel
    longitudinal grooves.


CLS 40/124.06
TXT Combined with receptacle means (e.g., pocket, container, envelope, etc.):

    Display card under subclass 124.01 further including means to contain the
    display card or a removable display object.


CLS 40/124.07
TXT Having a curved display panel:

    Display card under subclass 124.01 wherein the display card includes a
    display section having a surface deviating from straightness in a generally
    smooth continuous way.


CLS 40/124.08
TXT Three-dimensional pop-up display card:

    Display card under subclass 124.01 wherein the display card includes
    display elements relatively connected to each other and folded in a manner
    such that when the display card is in an open position, the display
    elements are automatically erected from a surface of the display card to
    form a three-dimensional image.


CLS 40/124.09
TXT Folded:

    Display card under subclass 124.01  wherein the display card includes a
    sheet having a fold line defining plural panels, and wherein the sheet can
    be folded along said fold line to form a display object or card.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    539,    for folding dummy sign.


CLS 40/124.11
TXT Single sheet folded in half to form two equally dimensioned panels (e.g.,
    greeting cards, etc.):

    Display card under subclass 124.09 wherein the display card consists of a
    single sheet of material  and is folded along said fold line which divides
    said sheet into two identically dimensioned sections.


CLS 40/124.12
TXT Single sheet folded into thirds to form three equally dimensioned panels
    (e.g., greeting cards, etc.):

    Display card under subclass 124.09 wherein the display card consists of a
    sheet of material and said fold line comprises two fold lines which divide
    said sheet into three identically dimensioned sections.


CLS 40/124.13
TXT Accordion fold display card:

    Display card under subclass 124.09  comprises plural parallel fold lines,
    and wherein said sheet is folded alternately back and forth along said fold
    lines to form a display panel.


CLS 40/124.14
TXT Single sheet folded to form a three-dimensional display configuration:

    Display card under subclass 124.09  wherein the display card consists of a
    single sheet of material and plural fold lines and is folded along the
    plural fold lines to form a three-dimensional display figure.


CLS 40/124.15
TXT Triangular prism:

    Display card under subclass 124.14 wherein said three-dimensional display
    figure has a cross-section in the form of a closed plane figure having
    three sides.


CLS 40/124.16
TXT Single sheet folded to form a vertical display panel and a horizontal
    support surface:

    Display card under subclass 124.09 wherein the display card consists of a
    single sheet of material and plural fold lines, and wherein the single
    sheet of material is folded along said plural fold lines to form an upright
    exhibit surface and a horizontal support surface.


CLS 40/124.17
TXT Having rearwardly pivoting support leg:

    Display card under subclass 124.09  includes  a display front surface and a
    back surface, and a support leg adapted to move into a support position by
    turning backwardly about an axis or a pivot point.


CLS 40/124.18
TXT Plural rearwardly pivoting legs:

    Display card under subclass 124.17 comprising  multiple  legs  adapted to
    turn backwardly.


CLS 40/124.19
TXT Having distinct members connected by locking tabs and slots:

    Display card under subclass 124.09 wherein the display card includes
    different separate sections having elongated narrow slits and projections,
    and wherein said  sections are joined by placing the projections  into the
    elongated narrow slits.


CLS 40/124.191
TXT Multilayer sheet:

    Display card under subclass 124.01 wherein the display card comprises
    superimposed layers.


CLS 40/124.2
TXT Subject matter under subclass 124 wherein the support means includes means
    to secure one or more of the cards in a display arrangement which securing
    means engages and completely overlies at least one end of each card held
    thereby.  508+, for similar subject matter wherein the cards are intended
    to be shifted (i.e. moved within the plane containing the card) relative to
    their securing means (e.g., pocket, etc.), to expose display subject matter
    hidden from view.


CLS 40/124.4
TXT Subject matter under subclass 124 wherein the support means includes means
    to secure the cards thereto in the form of (1) through openings (2) grooves
    or (3) tab portions continuous therewith, each tab of which projects or
    protrudes from a surface thereof and forms, at least in part, a through
    opening in the support.


CLS 40/124.5
TXT Devices in the nature of name plates and picture retainers designed to be
    placed on monuments and used for like purposes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 103+ for a
    structure which, as a whole, acts as a marker or monument, and see the
    reference to Class 52 in the class definition of this class (40).


CLS 40/200
TXT Devices under the class definition required by law to be applied to moving
    land vehicles for identification purposes.

    (1)     Note.  Such devices in this country are generally designated as
    license plates or license tags and include indicia which designate the
    State in which the plate was issued, its expiration date and the number of
    the plate.

    (2)     Note.  Also included within the scope of this definition and
    particularly in subclasses 205+, are glass or other  translucent license
    plates which are legal in certain European countries, for example, Italy.


CLS 40/201
TXT License plates under subclass 200 provided with means to prevent theft of
    the plate or to indicate unauthorized use of the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  The theft of the car may be indicated by covering the plate,
    or by removing the plate or a portion thereof.


CLS 40/202
TXT License plates under subclass 201 in which the plate is secured against
    theft.


CLS 40/203
TXT License plates under subclass 202 in which in removing the plate it must be
    so mutilated as to make it unusable.


CLS 40/204
TXT License plates under subclass 200 provided with lighting means for the
    plate.


CLS 40/205
TXT License plates under subclass 204 in which the license plate is translucent
    or perforated.


CLS 40/206
TXT License plates under subclass 205 in which the device is provided with
    multiple plates or the plates have sectional portions.


CLS 40/207
TXT License plates under subclass 200 in the form of suitable insignia to be
    applied to a plate now on the vehicle to extend its legal term of use.


CLS 40/208
TXT License plates under subclass 200 provided with means to reflect the
    headlights of vehicles approaching the one carrying the plate.


CLS 40/209
TXT License plates under subclass 200 provided with means to enclose or
    surround the plate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclass for license plate holders including
    mere clamps for the plate.


CLS 40/210
TXT License plates under subclass 200 provided with means for attaching other
    insignia such as a city designation.


CLS 40/211
TXT License plates under subclass 200 which are so mounted as to provide for
    pivotal movement of the plate.


CLS 40/212
TXT Devices under the class definition for (1) forming or displaying indicia in
    the air wherein the means for forming or displaying the indicia includes an
    aeroplane, balloon or other aerostatic devices or (2) ground indicia
    particularly designed to be observed from such aerostatic devices.


CLS 40/213
TXT Aerostatic devices under subclass 212 which are provided with means for
    forming indicia in the air by means of smoke or luminous material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 3+ for gas dispensers not specialized to
    skywriting, and see section 4 of the class definition of Class 222 for gas
    dispensing in other classes.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 305 for smoke or fog producing compositions
    and for processes not specialized to skywriting, and subclass 359 for smoke
    generating apparatus not specialized to skywriting.


CLS 40/214
TXT Aerostatic devices under subclass 212 in which the indicia is mounted on a
    balloon or other aerostatic which is held by a ground line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 33 for captive ballons, per se.


CLS 40/215
TXT Aerostatic devices under subclass 212 in which the indicia or carrier
    therefor is connected to the aeroplane or other aerostat by cables and the
    aerostat pulls the display through the air.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 3 for towed aircraft in general.


CLS 40/216
TXT Aerostatic devices under subclass 212 in which (1) means are provided on
    the aerostat for dispersing the indicia or (2) the leaf or pamphlet is so
    constructed as to cause it to float downward when released.


CLS 40/217
TXT Aerostatic devices under subclass 212 which relate to so forming or
    constructing indicia that it may be read from an aerostat moving thereover.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 114+ for landing fields for aircraft.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 981+ for aircraft beacons.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 62 for aircraft lighting devices.


CLS 40/218
TXT Devices under the class definition for causing movement of pennants,
    banners, etc., in order to secure the attention of an observer for
    exhibition or advertising purposes.


CLS 40/219
TXT Devices under the class definition in which a mirror surface is provided
    and indicia is associated therewith which becomes visible when light is
    allowed to fall upon the opposite side of the mirror surface.


CLS 40/299
TXT Check, label or tag:

    Devices under the class definitions comprising a display medium in the form
    of a check, label or tag, adapted to bear indicia intended to convey
    information to a person in close proximity to the display medium.

    (1)     Note.  A device of the type included herein may convey information
    about an object to which it is attached; or it may be a token which denotes
    a value, conveys information about a specific though unattached object, or
    functions as a display advertising a related object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.5+,   for badges adapted to be attached to articles of clothing;

    584+,   for indicia-bearing display media which are designed to convey
    information to a person distant from the media (i.e., signs).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses for mere supports for display
    media.

    283,    Printed Matter, subclasses 72+ for a label or tag which is neither
    combined with an object, modified for use with a specific object, nor
    combined with means for holding it or fastening it to an object.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclass 41 for a
    memorandum holder combined with an horological device.


CLS 40/300
TXT Devices under subclass 299 which are attached to live animals or are
    particularly designed for such attachment.


CLS 40/301
TXT Devices under subclass 300 which are designed for attachment to the ears or
    wings of the animals.


CLS 40/302
TXT Devices under subclass 301 which are so designed as to have portions on
    opposite sides of the ears or wings and a portion designed to be free of
    said ears or wings and lying adjacent the edges of these members.


CLS 40/303
TXT Devices under subclass 300 which are designed for attachment saddles, brow
    bands, collars or other harness members.


CLS 40/304
TXT Devices under subclass 300 which are designed for attachment to the leg of
    animals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    665,    for band attached checks, labels or tags in general.


CLS 40/305
TXT Devices under subclass 299 carried by or specially designed for attachment
    to baled articles, such as cotton bales.


CLS 40/306
TXT Devices under subclass 299 carried by or specially designed for attachment
    to round containers, such as kegs, cans or round boxes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    665,    for band carried indicia in general.

    666,    for clip attached indicia in general.


CLS 40/307
TXT Devices under subclass 306 in which the indicia is supported on or carried
    by the closure for the container.


CLS 40/308
TXT Devices under subclass 299 carried by or particularly designed for
    attachment to baskets, particularly that type used in super markets.


CLS 40/309
TXT Devices under subclass 299 carried by or specially designed for attachment
    to rolls or material, such as woven material, which are called bolts.


CLS 40/310
TXT Devices under subclass 299 carried by or particularly designed for
    attachment to bottles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 365+ for bottles with indicating means
    combined with a bottle construction more than a mere modification to
    provide a label receiving portion, and particularly subclass 367 for poison
    identifying devices comprising rough or pointed means so that the fact that
    the bottle contains a poisonous substance may be detected by touch.


CLS 40/311
TXT Devices under subclass 310 in which the indicia is arranged to be attached
    to the closure means for the bottle; for example the cork.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclass 227 for bottle closures designed to
    removably hold a card or indicia bearing article; and subclasses 250+ for
    bottles with labels connected to closure means in such a manner that when
    the closure is removed, the label is destroyed.


CLS 40/312
TXT Devices under subclass 299 carried or particularly designed to be carried
    by polysided containers, generally termed boxes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 459.1 for a special
    receptacle or package with an indicator and subclass 459.5 for a special
    receptacle or package with indicia.


CLS 40/313
TXT Devices under subclass 312 in which the indicia is carried by or forms part
    of the means which is placed on the box to support the lid in open position.


CLS 40/314
TXT Devices under subclass 299 having indicia carried by or particularly
    designed to be attached to combs or brushes, especially tooth brushes.


CLS 40/315
TXT Devices under subclass 299 having indicia carried by or especially designed
    to be attached to buttons.


CLS 40/316
TXT Devices under subclass 299 having indicia carried by or particularly
    designed for attachment to electrical conductors, cords or ropes.


CLS 40/317
TXT Devices under subclass 299 having indicia carried by or particularly
    designed to be attached to walking sticks, sunshades, etc., generally
    termed canes or umbrellas.


CLS 40/318
TXT Devices under subclass 299 having indicia carried by or especially designed
    for attachment to hand gripping devices in public conveyances such as
    buses, street cars, etc.


CLS 40/319
TXT Devices under subclass 299 in which the indicia is attached to cash
    registers or particularly designed for such attachment.


CLS 40/320
TXT Devices under subclass 299 in which the indicia is attached to chairs or
    seats or particularly designed for such attachment.


CLS 40/321
TXT Devices under subclass 299 in which the indicia is attached to cigars or
    cigarettes or particularly designed for such attachment.


CLS 40/322
TXT Devices under subclass 299 in which the indicia is attached to devices for
    supporting coats or particularly designed to be attached to such devices.


CLS 40/323
TXT Devices under subclass 299 in which the indicia is attached to means for
    supporting change so that it may be easily picked up or particularly
    designed to be attached to such means.


CLS 40/324
TXT Devices under subclass 299 in which the indicia is attached to cups,
    saucers, plates or trays or particularly designed to be attached to these
    objects.


CLS 40/325
TXT Devices under subclass 299 in which the indicia is supported by drawer
    pulls or particularly designed to be carried by these members.


CLS 40/326
TXT Devices under subclass 299 in which the indicia is supported by a fluid
    medium or particularly designed to be carried by such a medium.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes float supported signs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclass 600 for a solid fuel
    treated to modify its appearance, e.g., by the application of an indicium
    thereto.


CLS 40/327
TXT Devices under subclass 299 in which the indicia is carried by game balls
    and the indicia is other than means to indicate the portion of the ball to
    be hit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, for a series of balls carrying
    interrelated indicia to be used in playing a game (e.g., a series of balls
    for playing the games of billiards, pool, croquet, etc.), subclass 268 for
    a sighting device such as may be on a golf ball to direct a golfer's vision
    to a particular point on the ball, and subclass 353 for a golf ball having
    indicia to indicate its position on the course.


CLS 40/328
TXT Devices under subclass 299 comprising hand stamps carrying indicia or
    indicia particularly designed to be mounted on such devices.


CLS 40/329
TXT Devices under subclass 299 comprising head coverings carrying indicia or
    indicia particularly designed to be mounted on such head coverings.


CLS 40/330
TXT Devices under subclass 299 comprising keys supporting indicia or indicia
    particularly designed to be supported by the keys.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    634,    for indicia to be attached to keys by means of chains, strings,
    etc., wherein the key so attached merely forms part of a combined assembly
    which includes the key, the indicia and the connecting means therebetween.


CLS 40/331
TXT Devices under subclass 299 wherein the indicia is carried by or
    particularly designed to be attached to round end projections such as gear
    shift levers, doorknobs, organ stops, etc.


CLS 40/332
TXT Devices under subclass 331 in which the knob is formed on the handle of a
    spigot valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 277 for indicia carried by valves
    which cooperate with the valve to disclose the amount of opening of the
    valve.


CLS 40/333
TXT Devices under subclass 299 carried by, or particularly designed for,
    attachment to meters used in parking spaces for vehicles provided with
    indicia.


CLS 40/334
TXT Devices under subclass 299 comprising pens and pencils carrying indicia
    wherein these members are merely modified to provide for the indicia
    carried thereby.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    358,    for some other type of clerical article (e.g., penrack) provided
    with means to display a card, picture, or sign (e.g., calendar).


CLS 40/335
TXT Devices under subclass 334 wherein the indicia displayed is a calendar.


CLS 40/336
TXT Devices under subclass 299 carried by, or particularly designed to be
    attached to, phones wherein the phones are merely modified to receive the
    indicia.


CLS 40/337
TXT Devices under subclass 336 wherein the indicia is carried by, or designed
    to be placed on, the phone dial.


CLS 40/338
TXT Devices under subclass 336 wherein the indicia is carried by, or designed
    to be placed on, the mouthpiece of the phone.


CLS 40/339
TXT Devices under subclass 336 wherein the indicia is carried by, or designed
    to be placed on, the post of old style upright phones.


CLS 40/340
TXT Devices under subclass 299 wherein the indicia is carried by, or
    particularly designed to be placed on, the records to be played by
    phonographs.


CLS 40/341
TXT Device under the class definition for displaying charactered material
    (e.g., charactered sheet, web, pad) in such a manner as to facilitate
    transcription of the material by an observer, which device includes means
    for guiding or advancing either:

    (1)     Note. The material relative to a viewing locus, or (2) an indicator
    (e.g., line guide or pointer) relative to the material and a support
    therefor.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass, rather than a subclass indented hereunder, is
    the locus for patents to a copy holder in which the copy is advanced
    relative to a static guide by manual force applied directly to the copy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, may include a nominal
    recitation of a supply or take-up coil (e.g., less than a support for such
    a coil or a cooperative relationship between a tension or exhaust detector
    and reel driving or reel stopping means, etc.), subclass 196.1 for a
    passive guide combined with a material feeder.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 157+ for a residual
    guide that directs a strand, subclasses 346+ for a particular guide or
    guard for an unwinding and rewinding coil to coil machine convertible
    information carrier (e.g., magnetic tape or photographic film, etc.)
    cartridge system, subclass 377 for a reeling device with a spring motor
    having a particular guide structure, subclass 548 for particular guide or
    guard for convolute winding of material, subclass 566 for an unwinding
    apparatus having a particular guide or guard, or subclasses 615+ for a
    residual guide or guard that directs elongated flexible material that may
    be combined with more than nominal winding structure.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 441.1+ for a copy holder of static structure
    (i.e., unadjustably supporting copy and including no line guide or other
    movable indicator).

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 718+ for a copyholder linked to or
    mounted on a typewriter.


CLS 40/342
TXT Device under subclass 341 which includes means for moving a charactered web
    or sheet to and away from the viewing locus.

    (1)     Note.  A patent to a subcombination limited to means for advancing
    a web (i.e., sheet material of indeterminate length) will be placed in
    Class 226, Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, (principally in
    subclasses 120+ and 168+) according to the line expressed in (61) Note in
    the definition of Class 226.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclass 120 for
    apparatus for intermittently moving a web; and subclasses 168+ for orbital
    surface means for moving a web; and see (1) Note, above.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 718+ for a copyholder linked to or
    mounted on a typewriter.


CLS 40/343
TXT Device under subclass 342 which includes an electrical, fluid, or spring
    power source, or means attachable to and activatable by such source, for
    supplying energy to drive said advancing means.


CLS 40/344
TXT Device under subclass 342 wherein the advancing means has a surface in
    continuous driving engagement with a web or sheet moving relative thereto,
    any point on which surface moves in a closed loop, (e.g., spindle, roller,
    endless belt).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 168+ for
    apparatus including orbitally traveling means to move a web or sheet.


CLS 40/345
TXT Device under subclass 344 wherein the advancing means comprises juxtaposed
    rotatable members between which a web or sheet of copy is gripped and by
    rotation of which members the copy is caused to advance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 181+ for
    web- advancing apparatus including rotary pinch pair advancing means.


CLS 40/346
TXT Device under subclass 345 including means to rotate one of said members,
    said means comprising an oscillating or reciprocating element having a
    stroke during which the element is in driving relationship with said one
    member or a part fixed thereto, and a return stroke in nondriving
    relationship therewith, whereby said one member is caused to rotate
    incrementally, moving one or several lines of copy at a time relative to
    the viewing locus.


CLS 40/347
TXT Device under subclass 342 wherein the advancing means comprises a roller
    about which the web or sheet is wound and a second roller from which the
    material is unwound, the viewing locus being in the path of travel of the
    web or sheet between the two rollers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    518+,   for a changeable exhibitor including double-reel-and-web means for
    moving a charactered web or sheet so as to bring a particular portion
    thereof into view.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 324+ for winding and
    unwinding a convertible information carrier such a magnetic tape or image
    film, and subclasses 538+ for a convolute winding machine with both a
    coiled take-up and supply.


CLS 40/348
TXT Device under subclass 342 wherein the advancing means includes means
    (usually attached to a drum or roll) to retain the end of the web or sheet
    whereby said advancing means applies an advancing force thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 579+ and 125+ for
    particular means to attach an elongated material to a spool for winding.


CLS 40/349
TXT Device under subclass 342, provided with a platen for supporting the copy,
    and wherein the advancing means moves said platen in a single, vertical or
    substantially inclined plane.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 105+ for mechanism including astep-by-step traveling bar which
    engages and applies a push or a pull directly upon a load; see indented
    subclasses 108+ for reciprocating pawl means engaging the bar for such
    operation, and 112, for rack and lever means therefor.


CLS 40/350
TXT Device under subclass 349 wherein the advancing means comprises an
    elongated member (e.g., rod or bar) connected to the platen; reciprocating
    means engaging at least opposite sides of said member to grip and advance
    said member for one stroke and release and slide along said member on the
    return stroke, which means is actuable for a series of reciprocations to
    effect a series of advances; and means for retaining the elongated member
    in each of the advanced positions of the series.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    355,    for clutch-actuated mechanism to move a line indicator relative to
    copy which is held stationary on the copy holder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 106+ for a device wherein a load is moved by a step-by-step
    traveling bar actuated by reciprocating clutch means; and see the search
    notes thereto.


CLS 40/351
TXT Device under subclass 349 wherein the advancing means comprises a pliant
    strand-like member (e.g., chain, tape, cable) connected or linked at one
    end to said platen.


CLS 40/352
TXT Device under subclass 341 which includes means for supporting a pad or
    sheet of charactered material, and an indicator which is shiftable relative
    to said means to point out a particular segment of the material for
    transcription.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 234+ for an indicator (e.g.,
    line guide) removably and movably associated with a page of a book to
    indicate a portion of the written material on the page.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes Thermolytic, subclass 42 for an indicator
    (e.g., line guide) permanently attached to a book or book cover to indicate
    a portion of the written material thereon.


CLS 40/353
TXT Device under subclass 352 which includes means drivingly connected or
    linked to said indicator, said means including a member having a motion
    which is different in kind or direction from the motion of said indicator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses for mechanical
    actuating means of general utility; see subclasses indented under
    "MECHANICAL MOVEMENTS" for means, other than gearing, for imparting motion
    to one body through a motion of different form, type or degree of another
    body; subclasses 111+ for means for imparting step-by-step movement to a
    unidirectionally driven member; subclasses 640+ for gearing to impart
    motion to, or receive motion from, a member; subclasses 469+ for control
    lever and linkage systems; and subclasses indented under "ELEMENTS" for
    elements of such mechanisms.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, for planetary
    gear drive systems.


CLS 40/354
TXT Device under subclass 353 wherein the means drivingly connected or linked
    to the indicator includes an elongated, toothed member and a gear or
    finger-like member adapted to engage successive teeth of said member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 422 for rack and pinion
    mechanisms of general utility; and see the "Search Class" note to Class 74
    in subclass 353, above.


CLS 40/355
TXT Device under subclass 353 in which the member is reciprocatory and in which
    the means includes structure adapted to grip and be moved by said member
    during one stroke of said member and release and slip relative to said
    member during the return stroke, the indicator being moved by the structure
    during said one stroke of the member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    350,    for a copy holder which includes clutch-actuated mechanism for
    elevating a copy-supporting platen relative to a line indicator.


CLS 40/356
TXT Device under subclass 353 in which the means drivingly connected to the
    indicator includes a pliant, strand-like member attached to the indicator
    or to structure rigidly connected to the indicator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    351,    for a copy holder comprising means, including a flexible elongated
    member, for elevating a copy-supporting platen relative to a line indicator.


CLS 40/357
TXT Device under subclass 352 including hinge means swingably associating the
    indicator with the support means for a pad or sheet.

    (1)     Note.  The hinge means usually permits the indicator to be swung
    away from the plane of a support platen to facilitate placement or removal
    of copy.


CLS 40/358
TXT Device under the class definition including an article usually supported on
    a desk and used in conjunction with clerical work other than viewing (e.g.,
    paperweight, desk pad, blotter, inkwell) combined with structure for
    supporting or exhibiting a card, picture, sign or calendar thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310+,   for an ink bottle combined with means to support a label, tag, or
    advertisement.

    334+,   for a pen or pencil merely modified so as to carry indicia; and see
    indented subclass 335, wherein the supported indicia is a calendar.


CLS 40/359
TXT Device under subclass 299 wherein a one-piece or composite sheet is folded
    upon itself and includes means for identifying the sheet or contents which
    may be disposed within the fold of the sheet which means is in the form of
    a discrete label, label holder or a portion of the sheet intended to
    receive a number, letter of an alphabet, marks, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    642.02+, for a label holder, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclass 369 for a device of that class including a
    printing component having a tab portion thereon, which portion contains
    holding means to receive an addressing plate.

    112,    Sewing, subclass 400 for a sewn single or plural layer stock
    material web or sheet.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 67.1+ for a
    file folder or file envelope.

    281,    Books, Strips, and Leaves, subclass 51 for a leaf in some form
    other than stock material or as elsewhere provided for and subclass 38 for
    a sheet element of a book.

    283,    Printed Matter, appropriate subclasses for a folded sheet including
    printed matter thereon.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, especially subclasses 183 and 184 for
    a cabinet with support means (e.g., suspension file with rails, etc.), for
    a sheet-likemember (partition, card, sheet, etc.) or file folder.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Article, appropriate subclasses for
    a single or plural layer stock material product in the form of a web or
    sheet, and especially subclass 121 for a folded sheet of such stock
    material.


CLS 40/360
TXT Device under subclass 299 wherein a sheet-like member includes means for
    identifying the sheet which means is in the form of (1) a discrete label or
    label holder or (2) a peripheral protrusion (e.g., tab, etc.), of the sheet
    which protrusion is intended to receive a label (e.g., number, letter of an
    alphabet, mark, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    642.02+, for a label holder, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclass 369 for a device of that class including a
    printing component having a tab portion thereon, which portion contains
    holding means to receive an addressing plate.

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 400+ for a sewn single or plural layer stock
    material web or sheet.

    235,    Registers, subclasses 487+ for records carrying indicia which are
    adapted to be read by machines.

    281,    Books, Strips, and Leaves, subclass 51 for a leaf in some form
    other than stock material or as elsewhere provided for and subclasses 38+
    for a sheet element of a book.

    283,    Printed Matter, appropriate subclasses for a sheet bearing printed
    matter.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a single or plural layer stock material web or sheet, and especially
    subclasses 77+ and 189+ for a plural component web or sheet in which the
    components are either laterally or longitudinally noncoextensive and there
    may be an extension or protrusion.


CLS 40/361
TXT PHOTOGRAPHIC TRANSPARENCY VIEWER, E.G., X-RAY VIEWER:

    Device under the class definition comprising a means to display an image
    borne by a light-transmitting film for an observer, the means comprising a
    means for illuminating the film, said film being located intermediate the
    observer and the illuminating means so that the observer looks toward the
    illuminating means when viewing the image.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    707,    for a mount for a segment of photographic film.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, appropriate subclasses for the
    presentation of a series of pictures at such a rate as to create an
    illusion of motion due to the persistency of vision of the observer, and
    especially subclass 129 for motion-picture film strip viewer.

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, appropriate subclasses for viewers with
    image pro- jection, and especially subclasses 25+ for microfilm viewers.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    616+ for kaleidoscopes, subclasses 466+ for stereoscopic viewers, and
    subclasses 804+ for viewers with specific optics or relatively movable lens
    and transparency for viewing only a selected portion of the transparency.


CLS 40/362
TXT Hand held slide viewer:

    Device under subclass 361 adapted to be manually supported and operated by
    the observer.


CLS 40/363
TXT With external light source (e.g., with translucent window opposite viewing
    lens):

    Device under subclass 362 wherein the illuminating originates outside of
    the device to render the slide visible to the viewer eye.


CLS 40/364
TXT Strip film viewer:

    A hand held slide viewing device under sub- class 363 having an external
    light source and the device is used to pass a sequence of transparencies
    before the viewer eye.


CLS 40/365
TXT Folding or collapsible film viewer:

    Device under subclass 363 which can be folded into a nonuse position.


CLS 40/366
TXT Portable slide viewer:

    Device under subclass 361 other than X-ray viewers designed to display an
    individual film fragment mounted in a relatively rigid frame.


CLS 40/367
TXT With internal light source:

    Device under subclass 366 wherein the illumination originates from within
    the device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclass 253 for viewer "combined" with an
    illuminating means.


CLS 40/368
TXT STATION INDICATOR:

    Device under the class definition that displays information pertaining to
    the arrival, departure, destination of a train, trolley or bus.


CLS 40/369
TXT Post mounted:

    Device under station indicator wherein said indictor is mounted on a post
    or column in a station or depot.


CLS 40/370
TXT Railroad car mounted:

    Device under station indicator wherein said indicator is mounted on a
    train, trolley, bus or similar vehicle.


CLS 40/371
TXT REGISTER, OR FILE (E.G., TELEPHONE DIRECTORY FILE):

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a telephone file,
    record, list or other orderly arrangement of items, name card, etc.;
    including supports and receptacles combined therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    446+,   for similar devices where file item is a changing exhibitor.


CLS 40/372
TXT With means to separate or riffle file item (e.g., magnet):

    Device under subclass 371 for supporting the item (e.g., card, etc.) in
    adjacent relation (e.g., stacked, rotary), and including a mechanism or
    magnet to spread apart said adjacent items to permit the exposure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    372,    for a similar device not included in this subclass.

    377+,   for a similar device wherein the file item is supported on a rotary
    carrier which device may include riffle means for the file items.

    380+,   for a similar device which supports the item in superposed relation
    and exposure of the item or a portion thereof is accomplished by motion of
    the item in a plane containing the item.


CLS 40/373
TXT Interchangeable file item:

    Device under subclass 371 consisting of a structure provided with recesses
    within which a charactered plate may be shifted or replaced at will.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    489,    for a similar changing exhibitor.

    618+,   for a sign provided with interchange-able letters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    434,    Education and Demonstration, appropriate subclasses for a similar
    device used for instruction purposes.


CLS 40/374
TXT Sliding item:

    Device under subclass 373 comprising a structure provided with slide
    grooves or rods within or upon which is temporarily secured a detached
    charactered plate or slide. The construction is such that the charactered
    slide may be changed readily.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    490,    for a similar changing exhibitor.

    618,    for a sign provided with interchangeable letters.


CLS 40/375
TXT Sliding panel:

    Device under subclass 371 provided with a sliding plate containing items
    wherein said plate may be moved at will so that information may be observed
    on an otherwise hidden plate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    491,    for a similar changing exhibitor.


CLS 40/376
TXT Pivoted panel:

    Device under subclass 371 wherein the expo- sure of the item is
    accomplished by movement of the panel about one fixed corner within the
    geometric plane containing the item and about an axis normal to such plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    380,    for a device including shiftable items in which each item is
    retrieved for viewing by a movement in an edgewise direction within the
    plane in which the item lies.

    492,    for a similar changing exhibitor.


CLS 40/377
TXT Rotatable carrier for file:

    Device under subclass 371 wherein a file item support is attached to or
    disposed on a body (e.g., cylinder, rack, board, prism, etc.), which body
    may be moved about an axis internal to the body through 360o the rotation
    of which facilitates the exposure.

    (1)     Note.  Search other appropriate subclasses under subclass 371 for a
    similar device which has some other structural feature dictating
    classification placement and especially subclasses 388+ for a similar
    device wherein the body can pivot less than 360o.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    348,    for a drum or endless belt displaying copy to be transcribed and
    includes holding means for the lead end of the copy.

    439+,   for a fluid operated rotated cylinder, prism, etc.

    493+,   for a similar changing exhibitor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 58 for a device of that class which
    includes means to support an article on a rotatable base (e.g., display
    rack, etc.).


CLS 40/378
TXT With means to select:

    Device under subclass 377 including (1) an index means, (2) prearranged
    dispositions for the item arranged in compliance with the index means, and
    (3) mechanical or electrical means which, when actuated in accordance with
    the index means, moves or makes readily accessible an item at a particular
    prearranged disposition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    381,    for a similar device wherein selection of the item involves planar
    motion thereof for exposure.

    389,    for a hinge mounted file including associated selecting means to
    pivot and expose the file.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 547, 554,
    and 608-613 for a similar device for assorting an article which cooperates
    with varying physical characteristics thereof to perform the assorting
    operation; subclasses 547 and 608 for such device which cooperates with
    variations in the peripheral shape of a sheet in a group to assort the
    same; and subclasses 547, 554, and 613 for such device which cooperates
    with variations in sheet aperture in a group to assort the same; and
    subclass 609 for such device which performs an assorting function based on
    a difference in the magnetic properties of an article in a group of
    articles.


CLS 40/379
TXT With rod or channel for retaining file item:

    Device under subclass 377 wherein the file is held in a substantially
    radial position relative to the rotational axis of the carrier by an
    elongated element or groove (e.g., ring integral with carrier, etc.),
    disposed substantially concentric with the axis of the carrier and
    cooperating with a hole, notch or protrusion of each item.


CLS 40/380
TXT Shiftable file item or file item support (nonsliding, arcuate path):

    Device under subclass 371 wherein the exposure is accomplished by
    nonsliding movement of the item substantially within an arcuate path
    substantially parallel to the plane containing the item which movement may
    be performed (a) manually (e.g., movement from file box, file drawer,
    etc.), or (b) by drive means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124,    which includes patents directed to a card rack the structure of
    which requires a like movement of the card to expose a hidden portion of
    the card or to retrieve the card.

    376,    for a plurality of files in superposed relation and wherein
    exposure of the items or portion thereof is accomplished by a pivoted
    motion of the item about one of its corners.

    508+,   for a similar changing exhibitor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, appropriate subclasses for a device of that class
    which may accommodate a plurality of sheets disposed in coextensive
    relation and especially  subclasses 500+ for a compartment container.

    283,    Printed Matter, subclasses 36+ for an indexed article not provided
    for elsewhere.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, appropriate subclasses for (1)
    cabinet structure including a file folder and means to support the file
    folder therein, or (2) a folder, per se, including structure (e.g.,
    suspension hook or notch, etc.), for cooperation with such support means.


CLS 40/381
TXT With shift mechanism:

    Device under subclass 380 which facilitates the changing of the position or
    location of a file item relative to a group of file items.


CLS 40/382
TXT Overlaying:

    Device under subclass 380 wherein a series of files may be shingled to
    permit relative movement therebetween, which movement positions the
    components in an arrangement to provide exposure of portions of an adjacent
    item.


CLS 40/383
TXT Depository with positioning channel or retention means (e.g., rod):

    Device under subclass 380 wherein a receptacle is provided with (1)
    appendage means cooperating with the file item to locate the adjacent item,
    or (2) means to secure the file item to the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    391,    for a device including overlapped adjacent files hinged to said
    device.


CLS 40/384
TXT Plural index:

    Device under subclass 380 having plural file items each of which has
    either: (1) a plural separate visible portion, or (2) one visible portion
    and some other indicia medium (e.g., attached label or indicator) which
    have or are intended to receive indicia (e.g., alphabet letters, marks,
    numbers, etc.), to permit a selective choice of any one of the items by the
    combined utilization of the portion(s) and said other indicia.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    393,    for hinge mounted file item in overlapping arrangement having
    plural visible arrangements of identifying means for each item, which means
    permits a selective choice of the desired item.


CLS 40/385
TXT Reel and web:

    Device under subclass 371 comprising a charactered web with at least one
    roller, about which the web is adapted to be wound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    347,    for a double reel and charactered web which expose copy to be
    transcribed.

    348,    for a device comprising a single reel and a charactered web
    windable thereon in the form of copy to be transcribed.

    518+,   for a similar changing exhibitor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, particularly
    subclasses 238+ for similarly mounted screens.


CLS 40/386
TXT Reversing gears:

    Device under subclass 385 comprising a charactered web having each end
    connected to a roller which is operated in an opposite direction by means
    of a gear-shifting device.


CLS 40/387
TXT Intergeared reels:

    Device under subclass 385 comprising a charactered web which has each end
    connected to a roller, so as to be wound from one roller upon the other. In
    this subclass, each roller is caused to turn with the same velocity by
    means of intermeshing gears or equivalent connecting mechanism.


CLS 40/388
TXT Hinge mounted file item or file item support:

    Device under subclass 371 wherein the file items are supported by means
    permitting flexure or arcuate movement along one margin thereof to
    facilitate the exposure of an underlying file item.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    377+,   for similar subject matter wherein such hinge mounted file item is
    mounted on a rotatable support.

    530+,   for a similar changing exhibitor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    402,    Binder Device Releasably Engaging Aperture or Notch of Sheet, for a
    sheet retainer disclosed alternatively for (1) the sheets (e.g.,
    overlapped, etc.), or (2) for the mere retention of sheets in superposed
    relation (e.g., loose-leaf binder, etc.).


CLS 40/389
TXT With means to pivot:

    Device under subclass 388 including an assembly of files mounted on one or
    more axes with a mechanism to pivot each file for exposure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, subclasses 486+ for leaf turning devices particularly
    designed for use with musical instruments.


CLS 40/390
TXT Hinged on single axis:

    Device under subclass 388 wherein the file items are interconnected by
    hinge means having a mutual rod about which the items are rotated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    391,    for a file device including two or more separately hinged
    overlapped file items.


CLS 40/391
TXT Overlying with end exposed (i.e., shingled):

    Device under subclass 388 wherein the file items are in the form of
    sheet-like bodies overlapped in superposed relation to present visible
    portions of the underlying item and wherein the exposure is accomplished by
    pivoting of the hinged superposed item to reveal a hidden portion of the
    underlying item.


CLS 40/392
TXT With stop or follower:

    Device under subclass 391 including a base with means to secure the
    overlapped items on the base; the combination of which is supplemented by
    means movable along the length of the means to secure, to hold or position
    items on the means to secure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 51+ for a rack including a follower
    for sheet material.


CLS 40/393
TXT Plural index:

    Device under subclass 391 having underlying items each of which either: (1)
    two or more separate visible portion, or (2) one visible portion and some
    other indicia medium (e.g., attached label or indicator, etc.), which have
    or are intended to receive indicia (e.g., letters, numbers, colors, etc.),
    to permit a selective choice of any one of the underlying items by the
    combined utilization of the portion(s) and other indicia medium.


CLS 40/394
TXT Hinge element cooperating with base:

    Device under subclass 391 with a base whose cross section has
    channel-shaped portions disposed in spaced face-to-face relation, connected
    by a sheet-like web, which portions by virtue of their shape cooperate with
    the hinge means or an element thereof in holding a file item in an
    overlapped relation with the next item.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400,    for similar subject matter wherein the said channel-shaped portion
    contains apertures which help hold items in overlapped relation.


CLS 40/395
TXT Releasably attached to file item:

    Device under subclass 394 wherein (1) the hinge element disengageably
    supports said item by securing means attached thereto, or (2) said item has
    means therewith which is disengageably secured to the hinge element.


CLS 40/396
TXT Cooperating with sheet fold:

    Device under subclass 395 wherein the said item is doubled upon itself the
    juncture of which at least partially encircles and is rotatable upon a rod
    which functions as a pivot means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    281,    Books, Strips, and Leaves, subclasses 46+ for a book or
    leaf-holding device, which device includes a component which either engages
    (1) a book between adjacent pages, or (2) a leaf at its fold juncture.


CLS 40/397
TXT Extended hinge:

    Device under subclass 394 wherein the said item includes a hinge retainer
    means which means extended beyond the display portion of the file.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    394,    for a similar device wherein said file item includes an exposed
    portion (e.g., tab, etc.) disposed within the confines of the file.


CLS 40/398
TXT Hinge cooperating with outwardly directed flanges of base:

    Device under subclass 391 with a sheet-like base for holding file items in
    an overlapped relation; said base having a cross section including a web
    with channel-shaped portions along opposite margins, which channel-shaped
    portions are disposed in a spaced and back-to-back relation to cooperate
    with the hinge means, or an element thereof, in holding said file items.


CLS 40/399
TXT File item hinges to adjacent file item:

    Device under subclass 391 wherein an element or portion of the hinge of one
    item is secured directly to a contiguous item.


CLS 40/400
TXT Hinge cooperating with aperture in base:

    Device under subclass 391 wherein a portion or element of the hinge
    supporting each item through spaced openings in a support therefor which
    spaced openings position the items in overlapped relation.

    (1)     Note.  A fastener (e.g., rivet, etc.), which secures a hinge to a
    support will not be considered an element of the hinge as provided for in
    this class.


CLS 40/401
TXT Secured by means through aperture or notch or engaging a protrusion in the
    file item:

    Device under subclass 391 wherein the overlapped relation is accomplished
    by a retainer means (1) passing through a hole extending therethrough which
    hole is disposed within the periphery of the item, (2) passing through a
    hole extending therethrough the periphery of which hole (e.g., incised
    opening along the margin of the item, etc.), forms a portion of the
    periphery of the item, (3) engaging a marginal portion of the item, which
    portion (e.g., tab, etc.), extends beyond the edge of the item.


CLS 40/402
TXT Opposed prongs cooperating with aperture:

    Device under subclass 401 in accordance with part (1) or (2) thereof
    wherein a pair of elongated components pass through the thickness dimension
    of the sheet and cooperate to releasably secure the sheet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107+,   for a similar device for the retention of calendar leaves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    402,    Binder Device Releasably Engaging Aperture or Notch of Sheet,
    subclass 20 for elongated opposed resilient sheet-retainers which require
    deflection for sheet removal; subclasses 26+ for opposed sheet-retainers
    requiring an arcuate motion of the retainers for removal of a sheet
    therefrom; and subclasses 31+ for opposed elongated.


CLS 40/403
TXT Hinge cooperating with aperture or channel in base:

    Device under subclass 388 wherein the hinge for the file item includes a
    portion or element which engages a through opening or through-like groove
    in a support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    394+,   for a similar device wherein the hinge cooperates with inwardly
    directed channels of a support to position the file items in overlapped
    relation.

    398,    for a similar device wherein a hinge cooperates with outwardly
    directed channels to support the file items in overlapped relation.

    400,    for a similar device wherein the hinge supporting the file item
    cooperates with spaced openings in a base to position the item in
    overlapped relation.


CLS 40/404
TXT Secured by means engaging aperture in file item or file item support:

    Device under subclass 388 wherein an elongated retainer extends through an
    opening in the thickness dimension of the file item or the support for the
    item.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401,    for a similar device wherein the file items are disposed in
    overlapped arrangement.


CLS 40/405
TXT File item secured to carrier by aperture or pocket:

    Device under subclass 388 wherein hinged sustainer for the file item
    engages and overlies at least one marginal portion of a file item to secure
    the item thereto.


CLS 40/406
TXT DISPLAY DEVICE WITH GAS OR LIQUID MOVEMENT:

    Device under the class definition for attracting attention of the observer
    and generally used in advertising in which the exhibitor is provided with
    means for moving a gas or liquid so that it is sensed by the observer.


CLS 40/407
TXT With dispersion of fluid medium:

    Device under subclass 406 in which the gas or liquid is freed.

    (1)     Note.  Herein are to be found exhibitors in which the fluid
    dispersed is to represent the smoke of a pipe, a cigar, or a cigarette.

    (2)     Note.  In this subclass are also included devices wherein the gas
    or liquid diffused is scented.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclass 9 for hand manipulable smoking
    toys.


CLS 40/408
TXT As soap bubble:

    Device under subclass 407 provided with means to produce bubbles from a
    saponifiable solution in order that the dispersion of the fluid is in the
    form of soap bubbles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 15+ for hand manipulable soap
    bubble-blowing devices, which may include either a power-driven blower or
    power driven dipper.


CLS 40/409
TXT DISPLAY DEVICE WITH FREE ARTICLE MOVEMENT:

    Device under the class definition for attracting attention of the observer
    and generally used in advertising in which the exhibitor is provided with
    means for allowing an object to fall freely or move freely along a path
    while it is seen by the observer.


CLS 40/410
TXT Snowfall simulator:

    Display device under subclass 409 in which the falling objects create the
    impression of snowfall.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclass 65 for an amusement type
    illusion or stage device appropriate therefor which may cause a visual
    imitation of falling snow.


CLS 40/411
TXT THREE-DIMENSIONAL MOVABLE FIGURE DISPLAY DEVICE:

    Device under the class definition in which a representation of an object is
    moved or has at least one moving part in view of an observer and which
    representation has length, breadth, and thickness.

    (1)     Note.  The display devices herein include automatons in the form of
    figures for displaying articles of wearing apparel as well as figures of
    animals or inanimate objects.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    446+,   for display devices which have movable charactered exhibiting
    devices such as changeable signs combined with a three-dimensional movable
    figure display device, and particularly subclasses 455+ for
    three-dimensional movable figure display devices combined with sound
    producing means.

    463,    for three-dimensional figure display devices in which the device is
    electrically controlled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 1.5+ for power operated supports for
    objects in general which could be used for supporting figures, etc.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 86, 256, and 267+ for
    three-dimensional movable figure display devices for use in teaching.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 268+ for motor-operated figure
    toys.


CLS 40/412
TXT Fluid operated:

    Device under subclass 411 in which the representation of the object is
    operated by pressure of a fluid such as air, gas, steam, or water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    477+,   for changing exhibitors which are fluid operated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, appropriate subclasses 199+ for a
    fluid-operated figure toy.


CLS 40/413
TXT Automobile hood ornament:

    Device under subclass 412 mounted on the hood or radiator cap of an
    automobile and designed to be actuated by air pressure caused by the
    automobile in transit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    591,    for signs which are attached to an automobile.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 30+ for
    aerodynamically-supported tethered toy aircraft, and subclasses 34+ for
    other aerodynamically-supported toy aircraft.


CLS 40/414
TXT Electromotor operated:

    Device under subclass 411 in which the representation of the object is
    operated by an electric motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    466     and 470, for changing exhibitors which are operated in a similar
    manner.

    614,    for signs which are caused to vibrate by an electric motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, appropriate subclasses for a motor
    operated-toy which is an imitate representation of some object.


CLS 40/415
TXT With translation of figure:

    Display device under subclass 411 in which the figure is moved bodily with
    a movement other than around a single axis.


CLS 40/416
TXT With eye or lip movement:

    Display device under subclass 411 in which the figure is provided with
    means to move the eyes or lips to give the impression that the figure is
    speaking.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 337+ for toy dolls having
    moving eyes or lips.


CLS 40/417
TXT With wing movement:

    Display device under subclass 411 in which the figure represents a bird and
    the device is provided with means to cause movement of the wings thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclass 35 for a flying toy having
    flapping wings.


CLS 40/418
TXT With arm and leg movement:

    Display device under subclass 411 in which the figure is provided with
    means to give motion to both the arms and legs of the figure.


CLS 40/419
TXT With arm movement:

    Display device under subclass 411 in which the arms of the figure only are
    provided with movement.


CLS 40/420
TXT With leg movement:

    Display device under subclass 411 in which the legs of the figure only are
    provided with movement.


CLS 40/421
TXT TWO-DIMENSIONAL MOVABLE FIGURE DISPLAY DEVICE:

    Device under the class definition in which a planar representation of an
    object is moved or has at least one moving part, moving in the the plane of
    the representation, in view of an observer and which representation has
    length and breadth and the thickness is only incidental.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    446+,   for display devices which have movable charactered exhibiting
    devices such as changeable signs combined with a two-dimensional movable
    figure display device, and particularly subclasses 455+ for two-dimensional
    movable figure display devices combined with sound producing means.

    463,    for two-dimensional figure display devices in which the device is
    electrically controlled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 86, 256, and 267+ for
    two-dimensional figure display devices for use in teaching.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 149+ for picture having a
    hand-operated movable portion.


CLS 40/422
TXT Fluid operated:

    Device under subclass 421 operated by pressure of a fluid such as air, gas,
    steam, or water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    477+,   for changing exhibitors operated in a similar manner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, appropriate subclasses 166+ and 176+ for
    fluid-operated toys.


CLS 40/423
TXT Electromotor operated:

    Device under subclass 421 is operated by an electric motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    466     and 470, for changing exhibitors operated in a similar manner.

    614,    for signs which are vibrated by means of an electric motor.


CLS 40/424
TXT Operated by vibration of vehicle:

    Display device under subclass 421 in which the display device is carried by
    a moving vehicle and operated by the sway or jolting of the vehicle.


CLS 40/425
TXT With eye or lip movement:

    Display device under subclass 424 in which the figure is provided with
    means to move the eyes or lips to give the impression that the figure is
    speaking.


CLS 40/426
TXT DISPLAY DEVICE WITH MAGNETICALLY MOVED OBJECT:

    Device under the class definition which is provided generally with a
    support on which is placed metal objects which are caused to be moved by
    movable magnets on the opposite side of the support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 129+ for a toy in which a
    permanent magnet is employed to produce movement of a portion of the toy.


CLS 40/427
TXT DISPLAY WITH SPECIAL EFFECTS:

    Device under the class definition for attracting the attention of an
    observer by the creation of an illusionary effect of motion or by the
    creation of a psychedelic effect.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    453+,   for changing exhibitors which change as a result of relative
    movement of the observer and the display.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclass 253 for "combined" display and illumination
    means.

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclasses 57+ for an amusement
    type illusion or stage device appropriate therefor.


CLS 40/428
TXT Simulated fireplace:

    Display device under subclass 427 in which fire is simulated by an
    artificial fireplace (or fire logs) which utilize an illumination source to
    simulate flickering flames.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, appropriate subclasses for specific illumination
    structure.

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclass 65 for an amusement type
    illusion or stage device appropriate therefor which may cause a visual
    imitation of fire.


CLS 40/429
TXT Electromotor operated:

    Display device under subclass 427 wherein the effect is created by
    apparatus which is operated by an electric motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    470+,   for changing exhibitors which are operated in a similar manner.


CLS 40/430
TXT Rotatable:

    Display device under subclass 429 in which the apparatus which creates the
    effect rotates.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    473+,   for changing exhibitors which are rotatable.


CLS 40/431
TXT Illuminated:

    Display device under subclass 430 wherein the apparatus which creates the
    effect contains a light source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    502,    for rotating illuminated changing exhibitors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclass 35 for revolving illumination device, per se.


CLS 40/432
TXT Rotating lamp:

    Display device under subclass 431 wherein the light source comprises one or
    more lamps which rotate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclass 35 for revolving illumination device, per se.


CLS 40/433
TXT Disk:

    Display device under subclass 431 which includes one or more rotating disks
    which may act as a mask, filter, or the like.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    474,    for changing exhibitors employing motor operated rotating disks.

    495,    for additional disk structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclass 35 for revolving illumination device, per se.


CLS 40/434
TXT Polarized:

    Display device under subclass 433 wherein the rotating disk(s) acts as a
    light polarizer, thus masking or filtering light emanating from a specific
    angle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    548,    for illuminated signs which employ polarizing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    483+ for nonmodulating polarizing devices.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 35 for revolving illumination device, per se.


CLS 40/435
TXT Disk:

    Display device under subclass 430 which includes one or more rotating
    disks, the rotation of which provides the illusion or special effect.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclass 35 for revolving illumination device, per se.


CLS 40/436
TXT Movable screen:

    Display device under subclass 429 which includes one or more screens moved
    relative to an observer by the motor.


CLS 40/437
TXT Grid or artwork:

    Device under subclass 436 wherein a grid of alternate opaque and
    transparent areas overlies an artwork composed of alternating sections of
    two or more pictures, and movement of either the grid or the artwork causes
    the illusion or effect.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    453,    for changing exhibitors which vary as an observer changes his
    location with respect to the exhibitors.

    476,    for changing exhibitors which utilize motor operated shifting
    (reciprocating) mechanisms.


CLS 40/438
TXT Moving belt:

    Display device under subclass 436 wherein the movable screen is an endless
    or reciprocating belt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    472,    for changing exhibitors utilizing endless belts.


CLS 40/439
TXT Fluid operated:

    Display device under subclass 427 wherein the effect is created by an
    apparatus operated by pressure of a fluid such as air, gas, steam, or water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    477+,   for changing exhibitors operated in a similar manner.

    613,    for signs which vibrate as a result of fluid or wind pressure.


CLS 40/440
TXT Rotatable:

    Display device under subclass 439 wherein the apparatus which creates the
    effect rotates.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    479,    for changing exhibitors which operate in a similar manner.


CLS 40/441
TXT Illuminated:

    Display device under subclass 440 wherein the apparatus which creates the
    effect includes a light source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    480,    for changing exhibitors which operate in a similar manner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclass 35 for revolving illumination device, per se.


CLS 40/442
TXT Selective or intermittent illumination:

    Display device under subclass 427 wherein the effect is created by
    illuminating selective portions of the display initially and at least some
    other portions of the display subsequently.  The illumination may be
    flashing or progressive.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    463,    for similar lighting control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, for details of circuit control.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 35 for revolving illumination device, per se.


CLS 40/443
TXT Alternate front and rear illumination:

    Display device under subclass 442 having a front and a rear surface, a
    first display visible to a viewer as ambient or artificial light
    illuminates the front surface and a second display visible to the viewer as
    light is passed through the device from the rear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219,    for translucent mirrors which reflect images when light strikes the
    front thereof and display other pictures or images when light from the rear
    is passed therethrough.

    541,    for light source which illuminates signs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclass 35 for revolving illumination device, per se.


CLS 40/444
TXT Colored lights:

    Display device under subclass 442 wherein different images are presented
    when light of varying color is used to illuminate the display.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    581,    for colored lights used in conjunction with a sign.


CLS 40/445
TXT Movable card:

    Display device under subclass 427 wherein the effect is created by hand
    manipulation of a foldable or slidable card.


CLS 40/446
TXT CHANGING EXHIBITOR:

    Device under the class definition including either: (1) a display item
    (e.g., card, picture, sign, message indicia, etc.) having drive means
    permitting manipulation of a portion, or (2) plural display items wherein
    one item or a portion of one item is hidden from view.

    (1)     Note.  The term "item" as employed in the above definition shall be
    interpreted to include (1) an item, per se, (2) an item and its support
    (e.g., frame, etc.), or (3) a support for the item.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    406+,   for display devices in which a liquid is moved in view of an
    observer or dispersed as in smoking and bubble making display devices.

    409,    for display devices in which an article has free movement in view
    of an observer.

    411+,   for three-dimensional movable figure display devices which are not
    combined with changing charactered exhibiting devices such as changing
    signs.

    421+,   for two-dimensional movable figure display devices which are not
    combined with changing charactered exhibiting devices such as changing
    signs.

    427+,   for changing exhibiting devices provided with means to give to the
    viewer the impression of movement of an object.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 200+ for devices comprising a
    charactered board and a movable pointer for selecting a particular
    character for observation.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, appropriate subclasses for methods and
    apparatus for presenting a plurality of pictures at such a rate as to
    create an illusion of motion due to the persistency of vision of the
    observer.

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, subclasses 103+ for a slide changer for
    an image projector.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    466+ for stereoscopes.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 253 for changing exhibitor "combined" with
    an illuminating means not provided for in subclasses 446-537 of Class 40 or
    otherwise specifically provided for in Class 362.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, appropriate subclasses for movable
    exhibits designed for teaching or instruction purposes.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, appropriate subclasses for
    hand-manipulatable  amusement devices, toy trains, and dancing dolls.


CLS 40/447
TXT Alphanumeric (monogram) device:

    Exhibitor under subclass 446 wherein letters or numbers are selectively
    presented by activating one or more of a plurality of elements, such
    elements being arranged in a matrix which will allow, upon elemental
    selective activation, the presentation of (1) any number, (2) any letter,
    or (3) any number or letter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    550+,   for lamps arranged to form letters or numerals.

    583,    for reflective elements which are arranged to form letters or
    numerals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 25+ for alphanumeric displays
    by a CRT, subclasses 33+ for segmented display elements, subclass 59 for a
    display matrix which conveys alphanumeric information, and subclasses 141+
    for character information displayed on a generic display device, wherein
    selective electrical control is specifically set forth.


CLS 40/448
TXT Liquid crystal:

    Exhibitor under subclass 447 wherein the elements of the matrix are liquid
    crystal devices, the activation of which causes its color to change from
    that of its surrounding environment, thus presenting the number or letter
    desired.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 50+ and 87+ for similar
    display systems with specific selective electrical control means.

    349,    Liquid Crystal Cells, Elements and Systems, appropriate subclasses
    for processes and apparatus for making a liquid crystal device.


CLS 40/449
TXT Magnetic:

    Exhibitor under subclass 447 wherein the elements are activated by magnetic
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    621,    for letters with magnetic attaching means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclass 111 for similar display systems
    with specific selective electrical control means.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclass 430 for plans and charts
    having magnetic features.


CLS 40/450
TXT Bar segment, e.g., figure eight:

    Exhibitor under subclass 447 wherein the matrix has at least seven bar
    elements forming a rectangular figure eight.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclass 34 for seven segment displays
    and particularly subclasses 48+ for light-controlling display elements in
    similar devices wherein specific selective electrical control is provided.


CLS 40/451
TXT Illuminated:

    Exhibitor under subclass 450 wherein the elements are activated by the
    energization thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    546+,   for edge illumination of elements.

    550+,   for lamps arranged to form letters or numbers wherein the message
    displayed can be varied only by manual disconnection of certain lamps
    (elements).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 41+ and 44+ for similar
    light-emitting devices wherein specific details of the selective electrical
    control are claimed.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 253 for a changing exhibitor "combined" with
    an illuminating means and not provided for in Class 40, subclasses 446-537
    or otherwise specifically provided for in Class 362.


CLS 40/452
TXT Illuminated:

    Exhibitor under subclass 447 wherein the elements are activated by the
    illumination thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    463,    for circuit control.

    546+,   edge illumination.

    550+,   lamps arranged to form letters or     numbers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 41+ and 44+ for similar
    light-emitting devices wherein specific details of the selective electrical
    control are claimed.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 253 for changing exhibitor "combined" with
    an illuminating means not provided for in subclasses 446-537 of Class 40 or
    otherwise specifically provided for in Class 362.


CLS 40/453
TXT Variable reading stationary exhibitor:

    Exhibitor under subclass 446 wherein two or more message displays are
    housed in or on a stationary, nonmoving display unit, each single message
    being visible to a viewer only at a given viewing angle and changeable to
    the viewer as the viewing angle is changed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    427,    for devices in which an illusion of motion is created by a change
    in viewing angle.

    436+,   for devices where the viewer remains stationary and the picture
    (message) moves to cause a change in the viewing angle.


CLS 40/454
TXT Lenticular lens:

    Exhibitor under subclass 453 wherein a plurality of lenticular lens are
    superimposed over the messages to be viewed thereby blocking out all but
    one message, and that message being dependent on the viewing angle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements,
    appropriate subclasses for lenticular lens structure.


CLS 40/455
TXT With sound:

    Device under subclass 446 in which the display is combined with sounding
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 1 for motion pictures with sound
    accompaniment.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 297+ for an animate figure toy
    having a sounder, and see the Search Notes thereunder for related loci.


CLS 40/456
TXT Exhibitor (e.g., toy doll) rotated or operated by turntable or phonograph:

    Device under subclass 455 in which the exhibit is operated from the
    rotating shaft on which the rotary plate which supports the phonograph
    record is mounted, or from the rotary plate, or the phonograph record
    rotatably carried thereon.


CLS 40/457
TXT Exhibitor controlled by sound circuit:

    Device under subclass 455 in which the sounding means associated with the
    changing exhibitor is operated through an electric circuit and the
    exhibitor is actuated or controlled by said sound circuit.


CLS 40/458
TXT Scale operated:

    Device under subclass 446 that is operated or controlled by the mechanism
    of the weighing device with which it is associated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    177,    Weighing Scales, appropriate subclasses for weighing devices, per
    se.


CLS 40/459
TXT Door operated:

    Device under subclass 446 wherein the movement of a closure such as a gate
    or a door causes movement of the display device.


CLS 40/460
TXT Door latch operated:

    Device under subclass 446 wherein movement of the means for bolting or
    unbolting the closure means causes movement of the display device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclasses 432+ for locks provided with indicators for
    disclosing whether the lock has been opened or closed or otherwise tampered
    with, or its present condition locked or unlocked.


CLS 40/461
TXT Cigar cutter or lighter operated:

    Device under subclass 446 in which the movement of the display device is
    controlled by the operation of a cigar cutting mechanism or a cigar
    lighting device associated with the display device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 109+ for devices for severing the tip end of
    cigars.

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 248+ for devices for severing the tip end of
    cigars in combination with other devices such as ash trays, match holders,
    lighters, etc.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 247+ for
    cigar lighters in which electric means are involved.


CLS 40/462
TXT Train-order holder:

    Display device under subclass 446 comprising supports for temporarily
    holding and displaying dispatches and messages for railway trainmen.


CLS 40/463
TXT With electric circuit control:

    Exhibitor under subclass 446 wherein particular emphasis is placed on the
    electrical circuitry which causes the change in exhibits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, appropriate subclasses for selective
    electrically controlled visual display systems.


CLS 40/464
TXT Mechanical switch:

    Exhibitor under subclass 463 wherein the circuitry which causes the
    exhibitor to change is controlled by a mechanical switching means.


CLS 40/465
TXT Photoelectric and capacity switching:

    Exhibitor under subclass 463 wherein the circuitry which causes the
    exhibitor to change is controlled by a light-darkness sensing switching
    means.


CLS 40/466
TXT Electromotor operated:

    Exhibitor under subclass 463 wherein the circuitry controls an electromotor
    which in turn causes the exhibitor to change.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    470,    for changing exhibitors having an electric drive motor but without
    the specific control circuitry.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 445+ for automatic
    electric motor starting and stopping systems; subclasses 494+ for electric
    motor starting and stopping by armature circuit control; subclasses 521+
    for electric motor starting and stopping by field circuit control.


CLS 40/467
TXT Web advancing means in combination with sensing or selector means:

    Exhibitor under subclass 466 provided with means to advance an exhibiting
    web to any one of a plurality of exhibiting positions and (1) means to
    sense that a predetermined position has been reached, or (2) means to
    select one of the plurality of exhibiting positions.


CLS 40/468
TXT Magnetoclutch let off:

    Device under subclass 463 where the desired change is produced by an
    electrically-controlled magnet-armature so connected with a clutch as to
    release the motor or to disconnect the motor and change-producing mechanism
    at will.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses .02 to .098 for motor
    control and clutch; subclasses 30+ for clutches, per se.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 92+ for torque
    transmitting electrical clutch.


CLS 40/469
TXT Magnetoclutch take-up:

    Device under subclass 463 comprising an electromagnet and an armature, the
    latter provided or connected with a ratchet-pawl to engage with and operate
    a ratchet-wheel of the changing exhibitor when an electric current is
    passed through the electromagnet.


CLS 40/470
TXT Motor operated:

    Exhibitor under subclass 446 which is provided with an electric motor for
    effecting the changes in the display device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    411+,   for three-dimensional movable motor operated figure display devices
    which are not combined with charactered exhibiting devices such as movable
    signs.

    421+,   for two-dimensional movable figure display devices which are not
    combined with changing charactered exhibiting devices such as changeable
    signs.


CLS 40/471
TXT Double reel and web:

    Exhibitor under subclass 470 in which the display device is a charactered
    web or chain of charactered plates, each end of such web being connected to
    a roller and at least one of the rollers is caused to rotate by the motor
    means thus presenting different portions of the web for observation.


CLS 40/472
TXT Endless web:
    Exhibitor under subclass 470 in which the motor causes rotation of at least
    one of a plurality of rollers over which is mounted and endless charactered
    web or endless chain of charactered plates.


CLS 40/473
TXT Rotatable:

    Exhibitor under subclass 470 in which the display device is a plate, prism,
    or cylinder which is rotated so that the characters thereon may be
    successively displayed for observation.


CLS 40/474
TXT Disk:

    Exhibitor under subclass 473 in which the display member is a planar member
    having a substantially circular outline.

    (1)     Note.  The charactered disk may be rotated in back of a face plate
    provided with an opening through which the characters are successively
    viewed.


CLS 40/475
TXT Hinged leaves:

    Exhibitor under subclass 473 in which the display device comprises a series
    of plates or leaves flexibly attached to a rotatable shaft so that they may
    be successively displayed as the shaft is rotated.


CLS 40/476
TXT Shifter:

    Exhibitor under subclass 470 comprising means to successively dispose one
    of a plurality of independent plates into viewing position.

    (1)     Note.  The display devices in this subclass are generally provided
    with a magazine from which the plates are individually taken and returned.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    194,    Check-Actuated Control Mechanisms, appropriate subclasses for coin
    operated display devices.


CLS 40/477
TXT Fluid operated:

    Exhibitor under subclass 446 in which the device is operated by pressure of
    a fluid such as air, gas, steam or water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    406+,   for display devices in which fluid is moved or diffused as in
    drinking, smoking, or bubble making devices.


CLS 40/478
TXT Double reel and web:

    Exhibitor under subclass 477 in which the display device is a charactered
    web or chain of charactered plates, the respective end of such web being
    connected to a roller and at least one of the rollers is caused to rotate
    by the fluid means thus presenting different portions of the web for
    observation.


CLS 40/479
TXT Rotatable:

    Exhibitor under subclass 477 in which the display device is rotatably
    mounted.


CLS 40/480
TXT Illuminated:

    Exhibitor under subclass 479 in which the rotatable display device is
    provided with lighting means therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclass 35 for revolving lanterns; also see this
    class (40) subclass 446, Search Class 362.


CLS 40/481
TXT Pedal operated:

    Exhibitor under subclass 446 wherein a plurality of display items are
    selectively or sequentially placed into display position by a mechanical
    operator means, the movement of which is at least initiated by a foot
    operated pedal.


CLS 40/482
TXT Axle operated:

    Device under subclass 446 which is operated by motion imparted from the
    rotation of a vehicle axle or wheel.


CLS 40/483
TXT Double reel and web:

    Device under subclass 482 comprising a charactered web which is actuated
    from the revolving axle or wheel of a vehicle to successively display the
    characters to an observer.


CLS 40/484
TXT Rotatable:

    Device under subclass 482 which comprises one or more rotating charactered
    drums, cylinders, prisms, etc., which successively display the characters
    carried thereby as they are rotated.


CLS 40/485
TXT Pendulum operated:

    Device under subclass 446 comprising a swinging weight connected by ratchet
    or clutch mechanism with a roller, so that as the weight is vibrated the
    roller is rotated to change the characters of a suitable exhibiting device
    actuated by such roller.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    408,    for motor operated vibrating signs.


CLS 40/486
TXT Inscription cover:
    Device under subclass 446 comprising a movable cover for temporarily
    shutting one or more of the characters or inscriptions from observation and
    leaving nothing exposed except what is to be observed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 200+ for indicating signals.


CLS 40/487
TXT Movable curtain:
    Device under subclass 486 wherein the cover is a flaccid material.


CLS 40/488
TXT Sliding:
    Device under subclass 486 comprising a sliding shutter by means for which
    one or more of the characters or inscriptions may be obscured from view and
    only such as are to be observed are exposed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 200+ for indicating signals.


CLS 40/489
TXT Interchangeable plate:
    Device under subclass 446 comprising interchangeable letters, consisting of
    a frame provided with recesses within which charactered plates may be
    shifted or changed at will.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    618+,   for signs provided with interchangeable letters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    434,    Education and Demonstration, appropriate subclasses for similar
    devices used for instruction purposes.


CLS 40/490
TXT Sliding:
    Device under subclass 489 comprising a frame provided with slide grooves or
    rods within or upon which are temporarily secured detached charactered
    plates or slides.  The construction is such that the charactered plates may
    be changed at will.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    618+,   for signs provided with interchangeable letters.


CLS 40/491
TXT Sliding plate:
    Device under subclass 446 provided with sliding charactered plates which
    may be projected from the back of the board at will so that the characters
    may be observed either beyond the edges of the board or through an aperture
    therein.


CLS 40/492
TXT Pivoted plate:
    Device under subclass 446 in accordance with part (2) thereof wherein the
    exposure of the item is a accomplished by movement of the same within the
    geometric plane containing the item and upon an axis normal to such plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    508,    for a device including shiftable display items in which each item
    is retrieved for viewing by a movement in an edgewise direction within the
    plane in which the item lies.


CLS 40/493
TXT Rotatable carrier for display item:

    Device under subclass 446 in accordance with part (2) thereof wherein
    display items or item supports are attached to or disposed on a body (e.g.,
    cylinder, rack, board, prism, etc.), which body may be moved about an axis
    internal to the body through 360 or more degrees the rotation of which
    facilitates the exposure.

    (1)     Note.  Search other appropriate subclasses under subclass 446 for a
    similar changeable display device which has some other structural feature
    dictating classification placement, and especially subclasses 530+ for a
    similar device wherein the body can rotate but through less than 360o.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    348,    for a drum or endless belt which displays copy to be transcribed
    and includes holding means for the lead end of the copy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 58 for a device of that class which
    includes means to support articles on a rotatable base (e.g., display rack,
    etc.).


CLS 40/494
TXT Including encircling retention rod for display item:

    Device under subclass 493 wherein the display items are held in a
    substantially radial position relative to the rotational axis of the
    carrier by an elongated element or groove (e.g., ring integral with the
    carrier, etc.), disposed substantially concentric with the axis of the
    carrier and cooperating with a hole, notch, or protrusion of each item.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    499,    for a device wherein the display items are flaccid to the extent
    that the items at least partially wrap around the carrier during rotation.


CLS 40/495
TXT Disk-like:

    Device under subclass 493 wherein the carrier includes a surface disposed
    perpendicular to its rotational axis (e.g., polygonal drum and end surface
    of a cylinder, etc.), and one or more items are attached to or disposed on
    that surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111+,   for calendars provided with rotatable means for carrying indicia.

    503+,   for a device including means to support display items tangential to
    or concentric with the axis of plural coaxial or biaxial carriers.

    506+,   for a device in the form of a cylindrical or polygonal carrier
    including display items disposed on the carrier tangential to or concentric
    with its axis of rotation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 284+ and 309+ for rotary carried
    signals.


CLS 40/496
TXT Clutch take-up:

    Device under subclass 495 including means for rotating the carrier in a
    step-by-step motion to expose the items which means includes (1) a first
    means for applying torque to the carrier to rotate the carrier about its
    axis to select loci, and (2) a second means to then prevent further
    rotation of the carrier at such loci until such time as the first means is
    again actuated.

    (1)     Note.  For clutch take-up devices combined with exhibitors of this
    class (40), see appropriate subclasses; for additional clutch take-up
    mechanism, see Class 74, subclass 111 and Class 192, subclass 111.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 813+ for a clutch take-up
    mechanism per se, which may be used to index a rotary turret.


CLS 40/497
TXT Hinged display item:

    Device under subclass 493 wherein the display item is mounted for flexure
    or pivotal movement relative to the rotatable carrier which mounting makes
    possible the exposure.


CLS 40/498
TXT Clutch take-up:
    Device under subclass 497 including means for rotating the carrier in a
    step-by-step motion to expose the items which means includes (1) a first
    means for applying torque to the carrier to rotate the carrier about its
    axis to selected loci, and (2) a second means to then prevent further
    rotation of the carrier at such loci until such time as the first is again
    actuated.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note under subclass 496 for clutch take-up devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 813+ for a clutch take-up
    mechanism per se, which may be used to index a rotary turret.


CLS 40/499
TXT Flaccid type:
    Device under subclass 497 wherein the display items are in the form of
    readily flexible sheets (e.g., cloth, paper, etc.), which (1) are mounted
    on the rotatable carrier and at least partially encircle the carrier, and
    (2) attain the hinge action relative thereto by flexure of the items.


CLS 40/500
TXT Sequential exposure of display item:
    Device under subclass 497 which includes means to successively expose one
    or more display items to be viewed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    497,    for a similar device requiring manual manipulation of the display
    items for viewing.


CLS 40/501
TXT Radially movable display item:
    Device under subclass 493 wherein the display items are so mounted as to
    permit movement in a radial direction relative to the axis of the rotatable
    carrier to obtain the exposure.


CLS 40/502
TXT Illuminated:
    Changing exhibitor under subclass 493 including means to provide artificial
    light to improve exposure or visibility.

    (1)     Note.  See this class (40), subclass 446, under Search Class 362.


CLS 40/503
TXT Plural cylindrical or polygonal rotatable carrier:
    Device under subclass 493 including two or more rotatable carriers each
    with the items disposed to extend in a direction tangential to or
    concentric with the axis of its carrier (e.g., card or indicia on
    cylindrical or polygonal drums, conventional odometer, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    495,    for a rotatable carrier wherein the display items are disposed to
    extend in a direction perpendicular to the axis of rotation of the carrier.


CLS 40/504
TXT Biaxial:
    Device under subclass 503 wherein the carriers are mounted on spaced
    separate parallel or divergent axes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    503,    for plural rotatable carriers in coaxial relation.


CLS 40/505
TXT Carrier with common positive drive:
    Device under subclass 504 including drive means for rotating plural
    carriers which drive means produces rotation of a first carrier constantly
    proportional (e.g., 1:1, 2:1 ratio, etc.), to the rotation of a second
    carrier (e.g., carriers interconnected by sprocket chain drive, gear drive,
    etc.).


CLS 40/506
TXT Cylinder or polygonal carrier:
    Device under subclass 493 including display items disposed to extend in a
    direction tangential to or concentric with the rotational axis of its
    carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    495,    for a device wherein the carrier includes a surface disposed
    perpendicular to its rotational axis (e.g., face of a disk, etc.), and the
    items are disposed on that surface.

    503,    for a similar device including plural cylindrical or polygonal
    carriers.


CLS 40/507
TXT Clutch take-up:
    Device under subclass 506 including means for rotating the carrier in a
    step-by-step motion to expose the items which means includes (1) a first
    means for applying torque to the carrier to rotate the carrier about its
    axis to selected loci, and (2) a second means to then prevent further
    rotation of the carrier at such loci until such time as the first means is
    again actuated.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note under subclass 496 for clutch take-up devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 813+ for a clutch take-up
    mechanism, per se, which may be used to index a member in step-by-step
    rotation.


CLS 40/508
TXT Shiftable display item or item support:

    Device under subclass 446 in accordance with part (2) wherein the exposure
    is accomplished by movement of the item substantially within a geometric
    plane coincident with or substantially parallel to the plane containing the
    item which movement may be performed (a) manually (e.g., movement from file
    box, file drawer, etc.), or (b) by drive means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124,    which includes patents directed to a card rack the structure of
    which requires a like movement of the card to expose a hidden portion of
    the card or to retrieve the card.

    492,    for a plurality of display items in superposed relation and
    exposure of the items or portion thereof is accomplished by a pivoted
    motion of the item in a plane containing the item.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, appropriate subclasses for a device of that class
    which may accommodate a plurality of sheets disposed in coextensive
    relation and especially subclasses 500+ for a compartment container.

    283,    Printed Matter, subclasses 36+ for indexed articles not provided
    for elsewhere.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, appropriate subclasses for (1)
    cabinet structure including file folders and means to support the file
    folder therein, or (2) a folder, per se, including structure (e.g.,
    suspension hook or notch, etc.), for cooperation with such support means.


CLS 40/509
TXT Including shift mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 508 in accordance with part (b) of the
    definition wherein the drive means is in the form of a mechanical or
    electrical actuator which changes, or facilitates the changing of, the
    position or location of a display item relative to a group of display items.


CLS 40/510
TXT For random selection of item from group thereof:

    Device under subclass 509 including means which may be actuated to position
    a display item at one particular prearranged location.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    493,    for a rotatable carrier including means to select a display item
    from a predetermined location.

    532,    for hinge mounted display items including associated selecting
    means to pivot and expose the display item.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 547, 554,
    and 608-613 for a similar device for assorting an article which cooperates
    with varying physical characteristics thereof to perform the assorting
    operation; subclasses 547 and 608 for such device which cooperates with
    variations in the peripheral shape of a sheet in a group to assort the
    same; and subclasses 547, 554, and 613 for such device which cooperates
    with variations in sheet aperture in a group to assort the same; and
    subclass 609 for such device which performs an assorting function based on
    a difference in the magnetic properties of an article in a group of
    articles.


CLS 40/511
TXT Having continuous cycle of item or item support:

    Device under subclass 509 including means which may be actuated without
    interruption to repeatedly and sequentially expose the items.


CLS 40/512
TXT Endless carrier type:

    Device under subclass 511 wherein a component of the shift mechanism is in
    the form of a continuous support (i.e., belt, chain, etc.), which engages
    and moves the items relative to the group.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    524,    for a device wherein the display items are sequentially attached to
    an endless carrier.


CLS 40/513
TXT Reciprocating:

    Device under subclass 508 wherein the item is returned to substantially its
    initial position after exposure thereof.


CLS 40/514
TXT Single reel and web:

    Device under subclass 446 comprising a charactered web having one end
    connected to a roller, about which it is adapted to be wound more or less
    to expose different characters for observation.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include patents for displaying
    samples of articles of merchandise.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    348,    for a device comprising a single reel and a charactered web
    windable thereon in the form of copy to be transcribed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, particularly
    subclass 238 for similarly mounted screens, etc.


CLS 40/515
TXT Reel cabinet:

    Device under subclass 514 comprising a plurality of charactered web-bearing
    rollers which are compactly mounted in a protecting frame of such
    construction as to permit the webs to be unrolled from the rollers and
    depend therefrom for observation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 519+ for stands and bases for supporting
    Christmas trees, aerial masts and other similar staff-like bodies.


CLS 40/516
TXT Revolving:

    Device under subclass 515 wherein said cabinet is disposed to turn about an
    axis.


CLS 40/517
TXT Spring rewind:

    Device under subclass 514 comprising a charactered web having one end
    connected to and wound upon a spring-controlled roller, from which it is
    adapted to be unwound more or less to expose different characters for
    observation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, appropriate
    subclasses, particularly subclasses 291+ and 309+ for similarly mounted
    screens, etc.


CLS 40/518
TXT Double reel and web:

    Device under subclass 446 comprising a charactered web having its ends
    connected with rollers in such manner as to be wound upon one roller as it
    is unwound from the other and to thereby successively display the
    characters thereon for observation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    347,    for a double reel and charactered web which displays copy to be
    transcribed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclass 241 for
    similarly mounted screens, etc.


CLS 40/519
TXT Clutch take-up:

    Device under subclass 518 including means for rotating the roller in a
    step-by-step motion to expose the items which means includes (1) a first
    means for applying torque to the roller to rotate the roller about its
    axis, and (2) a second means to then prevent further rotation of the roller
    until such time as the first means is again actuated.


CLS 40/520
TXT Spring rewind:

    Device under subclass 518 wherein one of said rollers is so connected with
    a spring that it is wound closer as the web is unwound from the roller and
    tends to keep the web stretched taut between the rollers and to wind the
    web upon the spring-controlled roller when permitted to do so.


CLS 40/521
TXT With clutch:

    Device under subclass 520 including pawl and ratchet means cooperating with
    said spring means to wind or unwind said rollers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 118+ for intermittent
    grip, mechanical movement for ratchet and pawl actuation to a rotary output.


CLS 40/522
TXT Reversing gear:

    Device under subclass 518 wherein said rollers are operated in opposite
    directions by means of gear-shifting devices.


CLS 40/523
TXT Clutch take-up:

    Device under subclass 522 wherein said rollers are controlled in their
    movement by reversing gears and clutch take-up devices.


CLS 40/524
TXT Endless conveyor:

    Device under subclass 446 wherein the display item is sequentially or
    selectively moved to a point of exposure by means joined to itself (e.g.,
    endless chain, belt, web, etc.), which means is or serves to support the
    display item.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118,    for endless calendars.

    472,    for this subject matter in combination with a motor operator.

    477+,   for this subject matter in combination with a hydraulic or
    pneumatic operator.

    483,    for this subject matter in combination with an axle operator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 325+ for winding an web
    from a endless spool.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 202+ for a positive drive belt; and subclasses 237+ for a
    friction drive belt.


CLS 40/525
TXT Driven by frictional contact:

    Device under subclass 524 wherein the conveyor is moved by intimate
    anti-slip contact with a substantially smooth roller.


CLS 40/526
TXT Hinged leave:

    Device under subclass 524 comprising a web having flexibly secured thereto
    depending charactered leaves which are successively displayed to the
    observer as the carrying web is caused to move along.


CLS 40/527
TXT Radial leave:

    Device under subclass 524 comprising an endless web or chain of links or
    plates from which project rigid charactered plates or picture holders which
    project at right angles from the web, so that as the web is moved along the
    charactered plates or pictures, they are successively displayed for
    observation.


CLS 40/528
TXT Clutch take-up:

    Device under subclass 524 wherein said endless conveyor is supported by at
    least one roller including means to rotate said roller in a step-by-step
    motion which means includes (1) a first means for applying torque to the
    roller to rotate this roller about its axis, and (2) a second means to then
    prevent further rotation of this roller until such time as the first means
    is again actuated.


CLS 40/529
TXT Folding web and reel:

    Device under subclass 446 comprising a chain of charactered plates which
    are adapted to be folded back and forth to occupy a small space and to be
    unfolded and successively displayed for observation by the rotation of a
    polygonal or sprocket roller which engages with the plates.


CLS 40/530
TXT Hinge mounted display item or item support:

    Device under subclass 446 in accordance with part (2) thereof wherein the
    display items are supported by means permitting flexure or rotation along
    one margin thereof to facilitate the exposure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    497+,   for similar subject matter wherein such hinge mounted display items
    are mounted on a support which support is rotatable through greater than
    360o.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    402,    Binder Device Releasably Engaging Aperture or Notch of Sheet, for a
    sheet retainer device disclosed alternatively for (1) the display of sheets
    (e.g., overlapped, etc.), or (2) for the mere retention of sheets in
    superposed coextensive relation (e.g., loose-leaf binder, etc.); where the
    sole disclosure is directed to (1) above or to (2) above including an index
    means, see this class (40) subclasses 530+.


CLS 40/531
TXT With means to rotate:
    Device under subclass 530 including an assembly of items mounted on one or
    more axes with a mechanism to revolve each item thereabout for exposure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, subclasses 486+ for leaf turning devices particularly
    designed for use with musical instruments.


CLS 40/532
TXT With means to select:
    Device under subclass 531 including means which, when actuated, moves or
    makes readily accessible any display item disposed at any one particular
    prearranged disposition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    493,    for a rotatable carrier including means to select a display item
    from a predetermined location.

    510,    for a similar device wherein selection of the display item involves
    planar motion thereof for exposure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 547, 554,
    and 608- 613 for a similar device for assorting an article which cooperates
    with varying physical characteristics thereof to perform the assorting
    operation; subclasses 547 and 608 for such device which cooperates with
    variations in the peripheral shape of a sheet in a group to assort the
    same; and subclasses 547, 554, and 613 for such device which cooperates
    with variations in sheet aperture in a group to assort the same; and
    subclass 609 for such device which performs an assorting function based on
    a difference in the magnetic properties of an article in a group of
    articles.


CLS 40/533
TXT Display item hinged on single axis:
    Device under subclass 530 wherein the items are interconnected by hinge
    means having a mutual rod or coaxially disposed rods about which the items
    are rotated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    534,    for a display device including two or more separately hinged
    overlapped groups of display items wherein one or more of the groups
    includes display items hinged on a single axis.


CLS 40/534
TXT Overlaying:
    Device under subclass 530 in accordance with part 2 (b) thereof wherein (1)
    the items are in the form of sheet-like bodies which are disposed in
    superposed and noncoextensive relation to present visible and hidden
    portions of the underlying item and (2) wherein the exposure is
    accomplished by rotation of the hinged superposed item to reveal the hidden
    portion of the underlying item.


CLS 40/535
TXT Hinge cooperating with aperture or channel in base:
    Device under subclass 530 wherein the hinge for the display items includes
    a portion or element which engages a through opening or trough-like groove
    in a support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    534,    for a similar device wherein the hinge cooperates with channels of
    a support to position the display items in overlapped relation.


CLS 40/536
TXT Secured by means engaging aperture in item or item support:
    Device under subclass 530 wherein an elongated retainer extends through an
    opening in the thickness dimension of the display item or the support for
    the item.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    534,    for a similar device wherein the display items are disposed in
    overlapped arrangement.


CLS 40/537
TXT Item secured to carrier by aperture or pocket:
    Device under subclass 530 wherein hinged sustainer for the display item
    engages and overlies at least one marginal portion of a display item to
    secure the item thereto.


CLS 40/538
TXT DUMMY SIGN:
    Imitation article including figures used for display purposes and generally
    intended for use in advertising or sale of articles of commerce.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 15+ for
    three-dimensional imitation or "treated" natural product for articles of a
    similar nature.


CLS 40/539
TXT Folding display:
    Device under subclass 538 capable of being dismantled and folded to occupy
    a small space for storage or transportation.


CLS 40/540
TXT Illuminated:
    Device under subclass 538 including lighting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclass 253 for dummy signs "combined" with an
    illuminating means.


CLS 40/541
TXT ILLUMINATED SIGN:
    Sign under the class definition in which the legend or message thereon is
    formed by lighting elements or made more apparent by a source of
    illumination.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 513+ for electric
    lamps formed into the shape of indicia or having indicia formed on or
    within the envelope or bulb of the lamp, or otherwise integrally combined
    with the lamp.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for electric systems for supplying electric energy to electric
    lamps.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, appropriate subclasses for similar
    display systems with specific selective electrical control means claimed.

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, for a projection system which forms a
    real image on a screen or other viewing surface.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    483+ for nonmodulating polarizing devices.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 806+ for decorative lights, and subclass
    253 for an illuminating device "combined" with a sign not specifically
    provided for in subclasses 541-583 of Class 40 or otherwise specifically
    provided for in Class 362.


CLS 40/542
TXT Luminescent:
    Sign under subclass 541 in which the message thereon is visible due to
    light not ascribable directly to incandescence, e.g., signs which glow in
    the dark.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 458.1+ for the irradiation of
    fluorescent and phosphorescent devices, and subclasses 483.1+ for
    fluorescent and phosphorescent devices.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 646 for fluorescent and phosphorescent
    compositions.


CLS 40/543
TXT Ultraviolet source:
    Sign under subclass 542 in which the light source is ultraviolet.


CLS 40/544
TXT Electroluminescent:
    Sign under subclass 542 in which the elements of the indicia are rendered
    visible by direct electrical excitation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 13, 79-103, and 918 for incoherent light emitting injection
    luminescent devices.


CLS 40/545
TXT Gas filled tube:
    Sign under subclass 541 wherein the illumination means comprises one or
    more closed tubes filled with a rarefied gas such as neon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 513+ for electric
    lamps formed in the shape of indicia or having indicia formed in or on the
    envelope thereof.


CLS 40/546
TXT Edge illuminated:
    Sign under subclass 541 wherein the illumination means is located at an
    edge of a generally rectangular, internally transparent or partially
    transparent sign structure and the light rays from the illumination means
    are transmitted through the transparent portion into view.


CLS 40/547
TXT Fiber optic, i.e., light pipe:
    Sign under subclass 546 wherein the transparent portions are in the form of
    pipes or rods which transmit light rays from one point to another within
    the confines of their outer surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, for the combination of a light pipe and a photocell.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 815.31 for visual signals
    involving light pipes.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 806+ for decorative lights involving fiber
    optics.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, appropriate subclasses for light pipes or fiber
    optical elements, per se.


CLS 40/548
TXT Polarized:
    Sign under subclass 541 wherein the light rays from the source of
    illumination pass through a polarizer which acts to direct the light rays
    in a definite direction or filter out light rays from a definite direction.


CLS 40/549
TXT Extruded frame:
    Sign under subclass 541 wherein the sign is housed in an extruded frame
    (usually aluminum) wherein a raceway is provided for housing the electrical
    wires to connect the light to an energy source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    574,    for signs where the cover is hinged for easy access into the
    interior thereof.

    607+,   for pole mounted signs.

    700+,   for frames which house pictures, cards, etc.


CLS 40/550
TXT Light bulbs arranged in the outline of indicia:
    Sign under subclass 541 wherein a plurality of light bulbs are manually
    arranged to form a number or letter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215,    for airplane towed banners with lamps arranged to form indicia.

    447+,   for changing exhibitors with automatic changing of number (letter).

    579,    for lamp boxes wherein letters are formed by perforations or lenses
    in the sign face.

    583,    for signs wherein reflectors are arranged to form indicia.


CLS 40/551
TXT Mounted on three-dimensional alphanumeric structure:
    Sign under subclass 550 wherein the light bulbs are mounted on a
    three-dimensional structure having the same alphanumeric configuration as
    the arrangement of the bulbs.


CLS 40/552
TXT Three-dimensional alphanumeric structure:
    Sign under subclass 541 wherein the sign itself comprises a
    three-dimensional alphanumeric figure and has the illumination means within.


CLS 40/553
TXT Having multiple function (i.e., illumination per se):
    Sign under subclass 541 wherein the source of illumination serves a dual
    function, e.g., that of making the sign visible and illuminating an area
    such as a street or hallway.


CLS 40/554
TXT Lamp shade attached:
    Sign under subclass 553 in the form of a lamp shade.


CLS 40/555
TXT Flashlight attached:
    Sign under subclass 553 wherein the source of illumination is a flashlight.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 473 and 908+ for portable
    signal lights which may include illuminated indicia.


CLS 40/556
TXT Vehicle light:
    Sign under subclass 553 wherein the source of illumination is a vehicle
    headlight, taillight, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204+,   for illuminated vehicle license plates.

    589+,   for vehicle attached signs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements,
    appropriate subclasses for vehicle light lens which may include a sign or
    indicia.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 37+ for vehicle lighting, per se.


CLS 40/557
TXT Streetlight:
    Sign under subclass 553 wherein the lamp is what is commonly known as a
    street lamp used to illuminate city streets at night.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    607,    for pole attached signs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclass 35 for an illumination device "combined"
    with a sign.


CLS 40/558
TXT Elongated tubular light:
    Sign under subclass 553 wherein the lamp is an elongated tubular lamp,
    e.g., fluorescent-type bulb.


CLS 40/559
TXT External light source:
    Sign under subclass 541 wherein the light source is external to the sign
    housing.


CLS 40/560
TXT Projected:
    Sign under subclass 559 wherein the image of a stationary sign is projected
    onto a surface.


CLS 40/561
TXT Concentration of natural light:
    Sign under subclass 559 wherein the source of illumination is the sun.


CLS 40/562
TXT With auxiliary light source:
    Sign under subclass 561 wherein there is an auxiliary (additional) light
    source within the housing of the sign whereby the sign may function at
    night or in the absence of sunlight.


CLS 40/563
TXT Indirect:
    Sign under subclass 541 wherein a source of illumination is located
    adjacent to the area to be illuminated, and (1) the illumination is
    effected in total or at least substantially aided by a reflective surface,
    or (2) the area to be illuminated is made of reflective material and will
    reflect the source of illumination as well as be illuminated thereby.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    582,    for reflective signs where no source of illumination is provided.


CLS 40/564
TXT Lamp box:
    Sign under subclass 541 wherein the sign housing comprised a box having at
    least one side provided with indicia and a source of illumination housed
    within the box, such illumination being transmitted through the indicia,
    thus making it visible or more visible.


CLS 40/565
TXT Pavement embedded:
    Sign under subclass 564 wherein the lamp box is embedded in pavement such
    as a street, sidewalk, or curb.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    612,    for highway or road signs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 17+ for specific
    road structure combined with a sign.


CLS 40/566
TXT Mailbox receptacle:
    Sign under subclass 564 wherein the lamp box is combined with structure to
    receive mail.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312+,   for nonilluminated mailbox-type signs.


CLS 40/567
TXT Trash receptacle:
    Sign under subclass 564 wherein the lamp box is combined with structure to
    receive trash.


CLS 40/568
TXT Directory, e.g., building type:
    Sign under subclass 564 wherein the indicia is directory or location
    information, e.g., office building tenant location.


CLS 40/569
TXT Map type:
    Sign under subclass 568 wherein the indicia is a directory of the map type
    with a legend of items having corresponding switches or buttons which, when
    activated, will illuminate corresponding lamps to indicate the location of
    the legend item on the map.


CLS 40/570
TXT Exit:
    Sign under subclass 564 wherein the indicia indicates a building exit and
    the lamp box is adapted to be attached to the building wall or ceiling.


CLS 40/571
TXT Collapsible:
    Sign under subclass 564 wherein the lamp box housing is constructed in such
    a manner so as to be collapsible for ease of storage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124.01, for collapsible display cards.

    610+,   for collapsible picture frames.

    780+,   for collapsible picture frames.


CLS 40/572
TXT Double face:
    Sign under subclass 564 wherein two opposite sides of the lamp box have
    indicia thereon.


CLS 40/573
TXT Compartmented:
    Sign under subclass 564 wherein the internal portion of the lamp box is
    separated into a plurality of compartments, each compartment having
    separate illumination means and being visible at an external surface of the
    lamp box.


CLS 40/574
TXT Detachable or hinged cover:
    Sign under subclass 564 wherein one or more sides of the lamp box is hinged
    or removable for the purpose of gaining access to the interior of the lamp
    box.


CLS 40/575
TXT Interchangeable plate:
    Sign under subclass 564 wherein the indicia is in the form of one or more
    removable plates and may be changed by removal and replacement with a plate
    or plates of similar external configuration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    489+,   for changing exhibitors with interchangeable indicia plates.

    611,    for nonilluminated signs having changeable or removable indicia
    plates.


CLS 40/576
TXT Interchangeable letters or numbers:
    Sign under subclass 575 wherein the removable indicia plates are in the
    form of letters or numbers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    618+,   for nonilluminated interchangeable letters.


CLS 40/577
TXT Multiple spaced screen:
    Sign under subclass 564 wherein the sign portion includes two or more
    screens which are spaced apart in such a manner as to create a
    three-dimensional halo or similar effect.


CLS 40/578
TXT Light or weather seal:
    Sign under subclass 564 including a gasket or seal means, the function of
    which being to 1) protect the interior of the lamp box housing from rain or
    other damaging elements, or 2) prevent light from leaking about the
    periphery of the sign or other unwanted places.


CLS 40/579
TXT Perforated face:
    Sign under subclass 564 wherein the face of the sign has perforation or
    holes therein which generally serve to outline the message indicia.

    (1)     Note.  The perforations may be filled with spherical light
    transmitting beads or other such lens means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    452,    for changing exhibitors having a perforated indicia face.

    550+,   for lamps arranged in the outline of indicia.

    583,    for reflectors arranged in the outline of indicia.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclass 456 for lens, perforated plate.


CLS 40/580
TXT Stencil screen:
    Sign under subclass 579 wherein a letter, number or other indicia bit is
    formed by a single perforation, hole or cut-out, or no more  perforations,
    holes or cut-outs than necessary for structural rigidity, e.g.,
    stencil-like.


CLS 40/581
TXT Colored light:
    Sign under subclass 541 in which the source of illumination is one or more
    colored lights.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    431+,   for rotating color wheels.


CLS 40/582
TXT Reflective:
    Sign under subclass 541 wherein the sign or indicia thereon is made of,
    outlined or otherwise set out by reflective material and generally does not
    have a light source connected therewith, but depends for visibility on
    random light sources which shine thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    453+,   for reflective signs with varying messages depending on the angle
    of the light shone thereon.

    612+,   for nonreflective highway signs.


CLS 40/583
TXT Reflectors arranged in the outline of indicia:
    Sign under subclass 582 in which the indicia of the sign is formed by a
    plurality of individual small reflectors which are arranged to form each
    letter or numeral of the sign.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    447,    for changing exhibitors which outline letters or numbers.

    550+,   for lamps arranged to outline letters or numbers.

    579,    for perforations or lenses which outline letters or numbers.


CLS 40/584
TXT SIGNS:
    Device under the class definition which comprises inscribed boards, cards,
    plates, objects, etc., whereby definite information may be conveyed to an
    observer.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are signs which may be changed but
    require assembly or disassembly to do so.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    299+,   for checks, labels, or tags intended to convey information to an
    observer in close proximity to the display.

    538,    for dummy structures which simulate a definite thing.


CLS 40/585
TXT Directory:
    Device under subclass 584 designed to display a plurality of individually
    removable and replaceable plates or the like, each plate or a group of
    plates identifying a different unit or person, the function of which is to
    locate said unit or person, as, for example, an office directory.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are signs on which the information
    can be changed, but which require assembly or disassembly to do so.


CLS 40/586
TXT Person carried:
    Sign under subclass 584 which is designed to be worn or carried by a human
    being.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    555,    for flashlight attached signs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, appropriate subclasses.


CLS 40/587
TXT Tire or wheel:
    Sign under subclass 584 wherein the sign is combined with, mounted on or
    attached to a wheel, tire, or hubcap.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    589,    590 and 591+, for signs mounted on a vehicle body.


CLS 40/588
TXT Tanker truck or car carried, reversible type:
    Sign under subclass 584 designed to be mounted on liquid carrying tank
    cars, trucks, trailers, or the like and be reversible or capable of being
    partially repositionable so that at least two messages may be selectively
    displayed, e.g., flammable, nonflammable.


CLS 40/589
TXT Streetcar carried:
    Sign under subclass 584 mounted on the type of vehicle commonly known as a
    streetcar, trolley car, etc., as opposed to an automobile or bus.


CLS 40/590
TXT Trailer, wagon or cycle carried:
    Sign under subclass 584 designed to be mounted on a cycle, wagon, or towed
    trailer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    587,    for signs mounted on wheels, tires or hubcaps.


CLS 40/591
TXT Automotive vehicle carried:
    Sign under subclass 584 designed to be mounted on an automobile, truck, or
    bus, or the like.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   for license plates.

    587,    for signs mounted on wheels, tires, or hubcaps.

    643+,   for display holders for labels or tags carried by an automotive
    vehicle.


CLS 40/592
TXT Roof mounted:
    Sign under subclass 591 mounted on the roof of the vehicle.


CLS 40/593
TXT Interior mounted:
    Sign under subclass 591 designed to be mounted in the interior of the
    vehicle.


CLS 40/594
TXT Adhesive attaching feature:
    Sign under subclass 584 designed to be mounted by means of an adhesive
    substance on the back of the sign.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 467 for picture supports utilizing adhesive
    means.


CLS 40/595
TXT Lettering kit:
    Device under subclass 594 wherein a plurality of individual letters or
    numbers which may be selected from a set of letters or numbers to make up
    any desired sign.


CLS 40/596
TXT Three-dimensional letter:
    Sign under subclass 584 comprising one or more three-dimensional numbers or
    letters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    551     and 552, for illuminated three-dimensional letters and numbers.

    618+,   for three-dimensional letters and support means therefor.


CLS 40/597
TXT Suction cup mounting means:
    Sign under subclass 584 wherein the sign is mounted with suction cups onto
    a surface.


CLS 40/598
TXT Football line or down marker:
    Sign under subclass 584 which is designed to indicate (1) the current down
    of a football game, or (2) the yard line of a football field or gridiron.


CLS 40/599
TXT Door handle bar attached:
    Sign under subclass 584 which is designed to be attached to the handle,
    bar, or railing of a door, such handle, bar, or railing generally used for
    pushing or pulling the door open or closed.


CLS 40/600
TXT Magnetic attaching feature:
    Sign under subclass 584 wherein the sign is attached to a signboard or
    other support surface by magnetic attaching means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    621,    for letters or numbers attached by magnetism to a sign.


CLS 40/601
TXT With raising or lowering means:
    Sign under subclass 584 provided with means to raise or lower from one
    height to another for purposes of better viewing or maintenance.


CLS 40/602
TXT With wind spilling feature:
    Sign under subclass 584 designed or intended for outdoor use and provided
    with means to reduce the impact force of the wind and thereby prevent or
    lessen the structure's tendency to act as a sail.


CLS 40/603
TXT Stretched or tensioned:
    Sign under subclass 584 made of a flaccid or flexible material and having
    means to maintain such material in a stretched or taut state.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclasses 102+ for canvas
    stretchers.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclass 378 for
    fabric stretching under that class definition.


CLS 40/604
TXT Banner type:
    Sign under subclass 603 in the shape of or used as a banner, flag, pennant,
    streamer, bunting, or the like.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215,    for airplane towed banners.

    607,    for pole mounted signs.


CLS 40/605
TXT Modular:
    Sign under subclass 584 wherein the framework structure is made of a
    plurality of identical or very similar sections, and the size of which is
    limited only by the number of sections added thereto or subtracted
    therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses for
    modular building panels.


CLS 40/606
TXT Sign stand and support:
    Sign under subclass 584 combined with specific support or stand structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    603,    for stretched or tensioned signs.

    607+,   for signs constructed to be mounted on a post.

    617,    for signs constructed to hang.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses for various types of generic
    supports.


CLS 40/607
TXT Post attachment:
    Device under subclass 606 which is particularly adapted to be secured to
    and supported by a post.  This subclass also includes devices which are
    specially constructed for securing signs to posts.


CLS 40/608
TXT Self-righting post:
    Device under subclass 607 including means to realign said post in a proper
    position after dislodgement.


CLS 40/609
TXT Pump top:
    Sign under subclass 606 constructed to be supported on top of a gasoline
    pump or the like.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    592,    for signs which may be supported on an automobile roof top in a
    similar manner.

    597,    for signs mounted by suction cups.


CLS 40/610
TXT Collapsible:
    Sign under subclass 606 wherein the sign stand or support is collapsible or
    foldable to facilitate storage or transport.


CLS 40/611
TXT Removable panel or sheet:
    Sign under subclass 584 wherein the sign includes one or more sign panels
    or sheets which may be readily removed or interchanged, without damage to
    the sheet or panel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    489+,   for changing exhibitors with interchangeable sign plates.

    575+,   for illuminated signs having interchangeable sign plates.

    618+,   for individual sign letters which may be interchanged.


CLS 40/612
TXT Highway or street marker:
    Sign under subclass 584 specifically designed to be used adjacent a
    highway, street, roadway, or the like, and convey to the observer,
    location, direction, or specific traffic behavior information.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    624,    for billboard-type signs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 63+ for traffic cones,
    reflective triangles, and the like.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 9+ for traffic
    directors where the road pavement has been modified.


CLS 40/613
TXT Vibratory:
    Device under subclass 584 which in whole or in part vibrate, and thus
    attract attention thereto.


CLS 40/614
TXT Motor operated:
    Device under subclass 613 wherein the vibration is effected by some
    mechanical motor.


CLS 40/615
TXT Multiple layer:
    Device under subclass 584 formed of superimposed layers of differently
    colored materials, not simply painted boards.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for the manufacture of signs by a laminating
    operation.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a laminated stock material product in the form of a web or sheet.


CLS 40/616
TXT Embossed, molded, rolled, or stamped:
    Device under subclass 584 formed of material which is given the desired
    configuration by means of embossing, molding, rolling, or stamping
    processes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    700+,   for molded picture frames.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a laminated stock material product, especially subclasses 116+ for a
    composite web or sheet product of varying thickness, and subclasses 125+
    for a uniform thickness nonplanar composite web or sheet.


CLS 40/617
TXT Hanging:
    Device under subclass 584 which depends from an overhead support.


CLS 40/618
TXT Interchangeable:
    Device under subclass 584 comprising letters of a miscellaneous character
    constructed to be arranged together upon a suitable support to form the
    design or legend, and fastening devices for such letters special thereto.


CLS 40/619
TXT Glass:
    Device under subclass 618 comprising interchangeable letters, the principal
    ingredient of which is glass.


CLS 40/620
TXT Fastener:
    Device under subclass 618 comprising miscellaneous fastening devices for
    securing the sign letters in position upon a suitable support to form the
    legend or design.


CLS 40/621
TXT Magnetic:
    Device under subclass 620 where the letters are magnetically attracted to
    this support.


CLS 40/622
TXT Prong:
    Device under subclass 620 in which a prong or spur projection is used as
    the means for securing the letter to the background or support.


CLS 40/623
TXT String:
    Device under subclass 620 in which letters are threaded or strung along a
    string, wire, or band which passes through the letters or through one or
    more projections formed upon the letters.


CLS 40/624
TXT Billboard type:
    Sign under subclass 584 which are relatively large, designed for outdoor
    use, usually at roadside, atop, or on the side of a building and commonly
    known as a "billboard".


CLS 40/625
TXT Permanent identification device:
    Subject matter under subclass 299 drawn to a check, label, or tag
    specifically structured to identify an article or object, i.e., an
    identification device, wherein the device is secured, attached or otherwise
    associated with the article or object such that removal or alteration of
    the device is difficult and would be readily detected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.5+,   for badges structured to display information.

    633,    for identification bracelets intended for temporary use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    283,    Printed Matter, subclasses 72+, and 74, for printed matter
    specifically structured to identify a person with or without the use of
    means concealing information, or preventing or detecting fraudulent use of
    the printed matter. This subclass (625) of Class 40 provides for a device
    for the identification of articles or objects, wherein the patent claims an
    attachment or association means other than mere adhesive for the device,
    while Class 283 provides for devices in the form of printed matter used for
    the identification of person and wherein the patent does not claim the
    attachment or association means for the device.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclasses 307+, for closure fasteners in the
    form of sealed structure.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 29+ for stock
    material or miscellaneous articles provided with latent images.


CLS 40/626
TXT Having transparent member:
    Subject matter under subclass 625 wherein the device is provided with an
    element or structure capable of allowing light to pass therethrough.


CLS 40/627
TXT And illuminator:
    Subject matter under subclass 626 further provided with means capable of
    producing light.


CLS 40/628
TXT Secured, attached, or associated by shaping:
    Subject matter under subclass 625 wherein the identification device is
    fastened, affixed to, or joined together by changing the configuration of
    the device or material brought into contact with the device to produce the
    securement, attachment, or association.


CLS 40/629
TXT Incorporated within article or thing by shaping operation:
    Subject matter under subclass 628 wherein the identification device is made
    integral with or virtually integral with the article or object by a process
    which permanently changes the configuration of the article or object or of
    material used to fasten, affix or join together the device and the article
    or object.


CLS 40/630
TXT Secured, attached or associated by adhesive:
    Subject matter under subclass 625 wherein the identification device is
    fastened to, affixed to, or joined together with the article or object by a
    tacky glue, cement, or similar substance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 40.1+ for
    stock material or miscellaneous articles composed of multiple layers, one
    layer of which is attached by adhesive.


CLS 40/631
TXT Secured, attached or associated by threaded member:
    Subject matter under subclass 625 wherein the identification device is
    fastened to, affixed to or joined together with the article or object by a
    helically or spirally ridged element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener appropriate subclasses for nuts and bolts used for
    fastening elements together.


CLS 40/632
TXT Strip or wire formed:
    Subject matter under subclass 625 wherein a portion of the identification
    device is composed of a long, narrow piece of material having a constant
    width, i.e., a strip, or of a metallic body having a round cross-section
    and whose longitudinal dimension is much greater than the cross-section
    dimension, i.e., a wire.


CLS 40/633
TXT Identification bracelet:
    Device under subclass 299 adapted to encircle a wearer's arm and carrying
    indicia identifying the wearer.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are bracelets having insertable
    indicia for temporary use, such as those used in hospitals for patient
    identification.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    625+,   for devices of this type wherein the indicia is permanently
    inscribed on a bracelet intended for ornamental use (i.e., jewelry).


CLS 40/634
TXT Key identification:
    Devices under subclass 299 adapted to be attached to a key or group of keys.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    330,    for a display medium carried directly upon a key.


CLS 40/635
TXT For use with cake of soap:
    Devices under subclass 299 adapted to be associated with a piece of soap.


CLS 40/636
TXT For attachment to shoe:
    Devices under subclass 299 adapted to be attached to an article of footwear.


CLS 40/637
TXT Food-carried indicia:
    Devices under subclass 299 attached to either an article intended for
    consumption as food or a container for such.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    for edible labels and labeled food products and processes relating to same;
    see especially subclasses 87 and 383.


CLS 40/638
TXT Adhesive-backed label (e.g., postage or revenue:  stamp):
    Devices under subclass 299 consisting of a sheet of flexible material
    coated on one side with an adhesive.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310+,   for bottle-carried labels and tags.


CLS 40/639
TXT Carried by finger ring:
    Devices under subclass 299 attached to a generally annular member designed
    to encircle a wearer's finger.


CLS 40/640
TXT Carried by belt or buckle:
    Devices under subclass 299 attached to either an article of apparel adapted
    to encircle a wearer's torso, or a fastening means for such an article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 311+ for belts, per se.

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 163+ for buckles, per se.


CLS 40/641
TXT Index tabs:
    Devices under subclass 299 specifically designed for use in a document
    storage environment, comprising a tab-like display medium projecting from a
    support and adapted to carry indicia conveying information about the stored
    documents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359,    for an index tab combined with a folder.

    360,    for an index tab combined with a sheet.


CLS 40/642.01
TXT For use with horizontal merchandise support hook:

    Devices under subclass 299 wherein the display medium is adapted to be
    attached to a mounting portion or an end of a horizontally elongated
    product-suspension  hook.


CLS 40/642.02
TXT Holder:

    Devices under subclass 299 including means adapted to retain the display
    medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses for mere supports for display
    media.

    283,    Printed Matter, appropriate subclass both for a strip, book, or
    leaf bearing indicia, and for an article bearing indicia, wherein the
    article is " not a part of the invention or is deemed to be conventional".

    402,    Binder Device Releasably Engaging Aperture or Notch of Sheet,
    subclass 3 for a device of that class in combination with a label holder.


CLS 40/643
TXT For use with automobile:
    Devices under subclass 642.02 adapted to be associated with an automotive
    vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    591+,   for signs and holders for signs associated with an automotive
    vehicle.


CLS 40/644
TXT Flexible holder:
    Devices under subclass 643 wherein the retaining means is flexible.


CLS 40/645
TXT For holding plant marker:
    Devices under subclass 642.02 specifically designed to mount a display
    medium bearing information about an associated plant.


CLS 40/646
TXT For mounting at or near cornice:
    Devices under subclass 642.02 designed to be located in the vicinity of the
    junction of a wall with a ceiling.


CLS 40/647
TXT Having hinged clamp:
    Devices under subclasss 658 wherein said pair of members are relatively
    swingable about an axis.


CLS 40/648
TXT And projecting spur:
    Devices under subclass 647 including a lateral projection extending from
    one of the parts.


CLS 40/649
TXT Item slid into holder during installation:
    Devices under subclass 642.02 wherein the retaining means is adapted to
    receive the display medium by translation of the display medium along its
    own axis.

    (1)     Note.  The axis along which it is translated may be either its
    longitudinal axis or its transverse axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359,    for a folder with a discrete display holder secured thereto.

    360,    for a sheet with a discrete display holder secured thereto.

    641,    for index tabs with holders.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclass 369 for a device of that class including a
    printing component having a tab portion thereon, which portion contains
    holding means to receive an addressing plate.

    402,    Binder Device Releasably Engaging Aperture or Notch of Sheet,
    subclasses 14+ for a pliant, deformable sheet retainer (e.g., a prong-type
    fastener, etc.) secured by means engaging a folded portion engaging thereof.


CLS 40/650
TXT Adapted to impart curve to card:
    Devices under subclass 649 wherein the display medium consists of
    relatively stiff material (e.g., cardboard), and the retaining means
    creates a curvature in the medium as displayed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    660,    for a tubular holder containing and preserving a display medium.


CLS 40/651
TXT With fastener:
    Devices under subclass 649 including means to secure the retaining means to
    a support.


CLS 40/652
TXT Spring biased clamp:
    Devices under subclass 651 wherein the securing means includes relatively
    movable parts urged together by a resiliently deformable member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., appropriate subclass for a clasp,
    clip, or fastener, per se, which is biased by a spring.


CLS 40/653
TXT Having locking detent:
    Devices under subclass 649 including a lateral projection adapted to lock
    the display medium within the retaining means.


CLS 40/654
TXT Permitting limited movement:
    Devices under subclass 653 wherein the locked display medium is allowed to
    move a fixed distance.


CLS 40/654.01
TXT Pocket type:

    Holder under subclass 642.02 wherein the retaining means is a receptacle
    having an access opening and adapted to contain the display medium therein.


CLS 40/655
TXT Having lock:
    Devices under subclass 642.02 including means to maintain the retaining
    means securely closed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclasses 57+ for locks designed for use in particular
    applications.


CLS 40/656
TXT Adapted for use with mine equipment or personnel:
    Devices under subclass 655 intended to be used in a mining environment.


CLS 40/657
TXT Board or rack holding plurality of items:
    Devices under subclass 642.02 wherein the retaining means includes a planar
    surface designed to support several checks, labels or tags.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 26 for similar structures including
    means to dispense the display media, wherein the display media are torn or
    deformed as they are dispensed.


CLS 40/658
TXT Clip- or clamp-type holder:
    Devices under subclasss 642.02 wherein the retaining means includes a pair
    of members adapted to engage opposite sides of the display medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    651,    for a slide-type holder which includes a clip-type fastener for
    attachment to a support.

    666,    for a clip-type fastener, per se.


CLS 40/659
TXT Holder made of wire:
    Devices under subclass 658 wherein the retaining means consists of a
    metallic filament.


CLS 40/660
TXT Tubular:
    Holder under subclassses 642.02+ wherein the retaining means includes
    structure adapted to either fit inside of or encircle a hollow elongated
    supporting means.


CLS 40/661
TXT Transparent:
    Devices under subclass 642.02 wherein the retaining means is translucent.


CLS 40/661.01
TXT Having magnetic means:

    Holder under subclass 642.02 including a magnetic element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    600,    for signs  or holder  with magnetic attaching feature, subclass 711
    for picture frame having magnetic means, subclass  124.04 for display card
    having a magnetic element.


CLS 40/661.02
TXT Having illuminating means:

    Holder under subclass 642.02 including a lighting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    714,    for a picture frame combined with a lighting device, subclass
    124.02 for display card having illuminating means.


CLS 40/661.03
TXT Having mounting means adapted for attachment to longitudinal C-shaped
    channel:

    Holder under subclass 642.02 wherein the retaining means includes a means
    for allowing securement of the display medium  to a channel having parallel
    longitudinal grooves.


CLS 40/661.04
TXT Having means for attachment to garment:

    Holder  under subclass 642.02 wherein the retaining means includes a means
    for securement of the display medium to clothing.


CLS 40/661.05
TXT Circular holder:

    Holder under subclass 642.02 wherein the retaining means is round.


CLS 40/661.06
TXT Having connected hinged sections:

    Holder under subclass 642.02 wherein the retaining means includes plural
    panels which are secured together such that one panel  pivots relative to
    the other about an axis or a point.


CLS 40/661.07
TXT Sections only pivot about one point:

    Holder under subclass 661.06 wherein the panels are pivotally connected to
    each other only about one point.


CLS 40/661.08
TXT Formed by a single folded or bent sheet:

    Holder under subclass 642.02 wherein the retaining means is a single sheet
    of material provided with either (a) various fold lines defining plural
    panels, wherein the single sheet of material is folded along said fold
    lines to form a means for securing the display medium in place, or (b)
    marginal portions or corners which are bent to form inturned flanges for
    retaining the display medium in place.


CLS 40/661.09
TXT Having adhesive securing means:

    Holder under subclass 642.02 including a bonding means (e.g., means  for
    bonding  the display medium to the retaining means, or for bonding the
    retaining means to a support surface, etc.).


CLS 40/661.11
TXT Including securing means for penetrating into a support surface:

    Holder under subclass 642.02 wherein the retaining means includes attaching
    means adapted to pass through  a support surface.


CLS 40/661.12
TXT Attached to handle:

    Holder under subclass 642.02 wherein the retaining means is affixed to a
    handgrip.


CLS 40/662
TXT Fastener:
    Devices under subclass 299 including means to secure the display medium to
    a support.


CLS 40/663
TXT Fastener mounted in support hole:
    Devices under subclass 662 wherein the support includes an aperture, and
    the securing means is attached to the support therein.


CLS 40/664
TXT Penetrating fastener looped through tag:
    Devices under subclass 662 wherein the securing means is adapted to
    penetrate the support's surface and loops through an aperture in the
    display medium.


CLS 40/665
TXT Band-type fastener:
    Devices under subclass 662 wherein the securing means comprises a strip of
    material in the form of, or adapted to form, a closed loop.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304,    for leg bands to be applied to the animals.

    310+,   for band-type fasteners to be applied to bottles.

    625+,   for jewelry-type identification bracelets.

    633,    for hospital-type identification bracelets.

    640,    for display-carrying belts or buckles.


CLS 40/666
TXT Clip-type fastener:
    Devices under subclass 662 including a pair of members adapted to attach to
    opposite surfaces of the support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302,    for identifying devices clip attached to animals.

    359,    for a folder with a discrete display holder secured thereto.

    360,    for a sheet with a discrete display holder secured thereto.

    641,    for index tabs.

    658,    for clip-type holders.


CLS 40/667
TXT Fastener having spring hook:
    Devices under subclass 662 wherein the securing means includes a
    resiliently deformable member in the form of a hook.


CLS 40/668
TXT Fastener having head or barb:
    Devices under subclass 662 wherein the securing means includes either a
    transversely enlarged portion, or a sharp point, on one end.


CLS 40/669
TXT Tag having fastening spur:
    Devices under subclass 662 comprising a tag having an integral projection
    adapted to interlock with a complementary formation.


CLS 40/670
TXT For use with tobacco:
    Devices under subclass 669 adapted for use with tobacco or tobacco products.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 347+ for tobacco products carrying indicia
    where the tobacco product is modified in a manner other than for merely
    receiving the indicia; and subclass 360 for plug tobacco products carrying
    indicia.


CLS 40/700
TXT PICTURE FRAME:

    Structure under the class definition for partially enclosing and displaying
    a generally planar article to preserve it in shape and permit observation
    of it.

    (1)     Note. A frame may be formed from stiffening devices secured to the
    edges of an article to be displayed or a  built-up structure, which
    encloses an article at the back or an edge.

    (2)     Note. This subclass does not include a device in which the
    structure of the card, picture, sign, or transparency is an essential
    element of the combination claimed. For such combinations see search note
    to Class 428 below.

    (3)     Note. this and indented subclasses the term "picture" is used to
    designate to any planar article which is partially enclosed and displayed
    and includes a card, sign, or transparency.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 466+ for a support specifically designed to
    maintain a flat object such as a picture, mirror, etc., in a vertical
    position on a horizontal surface such as a table.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 13 for the
    combination of a display article enclosed with a surrounding peripheral
    casing, a display article enclosed within a transparent casing, or a three
    dimensional representation including an article of commerce or a product of
    nature.


CLS 40/701
TXT Film holder (e.g., filmstrip, slide, etc.):

    Picture frame under subclass 700 wherein the planar article is designed to
    transmit light therethrough for viewing purposes and wherein the enclosing
    structure cooperates with the article to allow light to pass through the
    article.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    716,    for a picture frame having a means to transmit light through a
    planar article contained within the frame.


CLS 40/702
TXT Adhesive attaching feature:

    Film holder under subclass 701 having a sticky surface for securing the
    article.


CLS 40/703
TXT Aperture card:

    Film holder under subclass 701 comprising a sheet of material having a
    cut-out therein for holding the article.

    (1)     Note. This subclass contains computer punch-out cards, various
    record cards as well as other data type cards, provided the card includes a
    section of film.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclass 71 for a
    display envelope.


CLS 40/704
TXT Filmstrip jacket:

    Film holder under subclass 701 designed to be a protective pocket for a
    segment of film.


CLS 40/705
TXT Pivotally connected frame members adapted to engage opposed faces of film:

    Film holder under subclass 701 comprising two hingedly connected members
    with adjacent openings which are adapted to be positioned along opposed
    planar surfaces  of film.


CLS 40/706
TXT Interconnected members adapted to engage opposed faces of film:

    Film holder under subclass 701 comprising two members with adjacent
    openings which are fixed to one another, with the two members being adapted
    to be positioned along opposed planar surfaces of film.


CLS 40/707
TXT Film retention means (e.g., lug, clamp, button, beading-strip, spring, etc):

    Film holder under subclass 706 including a means for holding film in place
    within the frame.


CLS 40/709
TXT Insertion slit:

    Film holder under subclass 701 having an access opening on the outer
    periphery for mounting film within the frame.


CLS 40/710
TXT Film retention means (e.g., lug, clamp, button, beading-strip, spring, etc):

    Film holder under subclass 701 including a means for securing the film in
    place within the frame.


CLS 40/711
TXT Having magnetic means:

    Picture frame under subclass 700 having a magnetic element.


CLS 40/712
TXT Having lock:

    Picture frame under subclass 700 having a mechanism which is designed to
    prevent unauthorized access to the frame or the contents of the frame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, for specific lock structure.


CLS 40/713
TXT With leveling indication means:

    Picture frame under subclass 700 combined with a means to display the
    picture frame alignment relative to a horizontal plane.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 403+, for a level indicator,
    per se.


CLS 40/714
TXT With illumination means:

    Picture frame under subclass 700 combined with a lighting device
    specifically adapted to illuminate a picture contained within a frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    541+,   for an illuminated sign.

    727,    for a picture frame combined with a lighting device which is not
    specifically adapted to illuminate a picture contained within a frame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 127+ for furniture with lighting,
    subclasses 135+ for a viewing mirror with lighting and subclass 812 for a
    sign with lighting.


CLS 40/715
TXT External light source:

    Illuminated picture frame under 714 wherein the lighting source is outside
    the outer periphery of the frame.


CLS 40/716
TXT Back illuminated:

    Illuminated picture frame under subclass 714 wherein the lighting source is
    positioned to project from behind and through the picture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    701+,   for a frame designed to hold film in a manner which permits the
    passage of light through the film.


CLS 40/717
TXT With sound producing means:

    Picture frame under subclass 700 in combination with an audio device (e.g.,
    speaker, radio, etc.).


CLS 40/718
TXT Having seal:

    Picture frame under subclass 700 provided with a means to prevent passage
    of fluid or impurities (e.g., water, air, or dust) through the frame.


CLS 40/719
TXT With handle:

    Picture frame under subclass 700 wherein structure is provided for
    facilitating manual lifting or  transportation of the frame.


CLS 40/720
TXT Photo block:

    Picture frame under subclass 700 having multiple sides designed to retain
    planar article therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    734,    for a single frame designed to display planar aricle in opposed
    directions.


CLS 40/721
TXT Having storage for nondisplayed picture:

    Picture frame under subclass 700 including provision for containing a
    planar article such that it is not displayed.


CLS 40/722
TXT With receptacle:

    Picture frame under subclass 700 in combination with a container means for
    a disparate article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 44+ for a convertible
    display/container.

    211,    Supports: Racks, for a display device which comprises  a rack.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses 9, 10, 11, 58, and 63 for a wooden
    display box or a display closure.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclass 71 for a
    display envelope.

    312,    Supports: Cabinet Structure, subclasses 114+ for display cabinets
    of the show case type.


CLS 40/723
TXT Pivoted frame element:

    Picture frame with storage means under subclass 722 wherein a first
    segment, a picture frame, is hingedly connected to a second segment of the
    frame to allow the first segment to move with respect to the second segment.


CLS 40/724
TXT Receptacle closure includes frame:

    Picture frame with storage means under subclass 722 wherein the receptacle
    is formed with an open end and is provided with a cover for said open end
    and wherein the frame structure is a part of the cover.


CLS 40/725
TXT Combined:

    Picture frame under subclass 700 cooperatively united with a structure not
    encompassed by the Class 40 definition.


CLS 40/726
TXT With book or pad of paper:

    Picture frame under subclass 725 in combination with an object consisting
    of planar sheets of printed or blank material.


CLS 40/727
TXT With furniture:

    Picture frame under subclass 725 which is in combination with an article
    which is designed to make a room fit for living or working (e.g., table,
    chair, sofa, desk, or lamp).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    714,    for a picture combined with a means specifically adapted to
    illuminate a picture within a frame.


CLS 40/728
TXT With time piece:

    Picture frame under subclass 725 in combination with a time measuring
    device (e.g., stop watch, clock, or watch).


CLS 40/729
TXT Plural connected frames or frame having means to connect with another frame:

    Picture frame under subclass 700 wherein either two independent frame
    structures are attached to provide holding means for plural planar article
    or an element of a first frame is provided with a means for securement to
    an element of a second frame.


CLS 40/730
TXT Detachable connector:

    Plural connected picture frames under subclass including a removable
    element for interconnecting the frames.


CLS 40/731
TXT Detachable connector forms suspension device:

    Plural connected picture frames including a removable element for
    connecting the frames under subclass 730 wherein the removable element is
    designed to support the frames on a vertical support surface.


CLS 40/732
TXT Frame within frame:

    Plural picture frame under subclass 729 comprised of two independent frame
    structures, each adapted to hold a picture, with one frame structure
    disposed interiorly of the other.


CLS 40/733
TXT Hingedly connected:

    Plural picture frames under subclass 729 wherein the attachment means
    comprises an element which allows one frame to pivot with respect to the
    other.


CLS 40/734
TXT Double sided frame:

    Picture frame under subclass 700 designed to display two planar article in
    a back-to-back manner.


CLS 40/735
TXT Single frame for plural pictures:

    Picture frame under subclass 700 which is designed to display more than one
    picture.

    (1)     Note. Included in this subclass is a picture frame with a plurality
    of planar article either separated by divider means (e.g., masking strips)
    or formed with plural slots for holding individual planar article.


CLS 40/736
TXT Inflated:

    Picture frame under subclass 700 wherein either the frame or a retained
    planar article is formed from material which expands when filled with fluid
    (e.g., air, water, etc.).


CLS 40/737
TXT Light transmissive frame:

    Picture frame under subclass 700 wherein the structure of the frame is
    designed to permit  light to pass through it (e.g., made of transparent or
    translucent material).

    (1)     Note. This subclass only takes patents where the structure which
    partially encloses and displays a planar article is transparent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    771,    for a picture including a mat, mount, or backing having a
    transparent picture holder.

    772,    for a picture frame including a mat, mount, or backing having a
    transparent cover.


CLS 40/738
TXT Curved picture:

    Picture frame under subclass 700 which is designed to display a generally
    planar article in a nonplanar manner (e.g., bowed or flexed).


CLS 40/739
TXT Adjustable frame height, width, or thickness:

    Picture frame under subclass 700 which may be altered, reconfigured, or
    reoriented to retain planar articles having different dimensions by
    adjusting the frame along one of the axes of the frame.


CLS 40/740
TXT Thickness:

    Adjustable picture frame under subclass 739 which may be altered,
    reconfigured, or reoriented to accommodate planar articles having different
    depth dimensions.


CLS 40/741
TXT Height and width:

    Adjustable picture frame under subclass 739 which may be altered,
    reconfigured, or reoriented both along the vertical and horizontal extent
    of the frame.


CLS 40/742
TXT Including biasing means:

    Adjustable picture frame under subclass 741 wherein a means is provided
    either to urge the frame elements either together or apart.


CLS 40/743
TXT For providing a three dimensional effect:

    Picture frame under subclass 701 wherein the frame is designed to support
    the generally planar article in a manner that makes it appear to have a
    depth dimension.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    800,    for a planar article having a raised surface or for a game piece,
    such as a stuffed and mounted skin of a small animal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 13 for objects
    displayed in a frame or transparent casing which include or are imitative
    of a real object, and subclasses 15+ for three dimensional imitation or
    treated natural objects.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 295+ for devices for use in
    the instruction of biology and taxidermy.


CLS 40/744
TXT Cord or wire frame:

    Picture frame under subclass 700 constructed of a thin, elongated, flexible
    structure.


CLS 40/745
TXT Support:

    Picture frame under subclass 700 in combination with a means for holding
    the planar article in a fixed position with respect to a supporting
    surface, (e.g., for viewing purposes).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 466+ for a support specifically designed to
    maintain a flat object such as a picture, mirror, etc., in a vertical
    position on a horizontal surface such as a table.


CLS 40/746
TXT Plural diverse supports:

    Picture frame support under subclass 745 comprised of two different means
    to hold it in a fixed position with respect to a supporting surface (e.g.,
    frame having a means to suspend it on a vertical support surface and a
    hingedly connected support to allow it to stand on a horizontal supporting
    surface), located on the frame, to hold the frame in position for viewing.


CLS 40/747
TXT Rotatable:

    Picture frame support under subclass 745 designed to hold a picture frame
    in a manner which will permit either the picture frame or a retained planar
    article to revolve.


CLS 40/748
TXT Support movable to a nonsupporting position:

    Picture frame support under subclass 745 which includes means to allow the
    support to move to a nonuse location on the frame.


CLS 40/749
TXT Pivotal bent rodlike support:

    Support movable to a nonsupporting position under subclass 748 wherein the
    support is formed from a thin bar or wire type material which is hingedly
    attached to the frame.


CLS 40/750
TXT Folded unitary frame and support:

    Support movable to a nonsupporting position under subclass 748 movable to a
    nonsupporting position which was formed by bending a blank or preshaped
    structure about a fold or score line.


CLS 40/751
TXT Adhesively secured frame segments:

    Support movable to a nonsupporting position under subclass 750 wherein
    portions of the frame are bonded by a gummy or sticky substance.


CLS 40/752
TXT Picture edge securement (e.g., slit, tab, corner- pocket):

    Support movable to a nonsupporting position under subclass 750 wherein the
    frame structure is provided with structure specifically designed to retain
    a portion of the outer periphery of  the held article.


CLS 40/753
TXT Within recess on back portion of frame:

    Support movable to a nonsupporting position under subclass 748 wherein the
    support is received in a notch or opening in the rear portion of the frame
    when in the nonsupporting position.


CLS 40/754
TXT Folded support:

    Support movable to a nonsupporting position under subclass 748 wherein the
    support is mounted to pivot about a fold or score line.


CLS 40/755
TXT Support retained in supporting position by member folded from frame or
    support:

    Folded picture frame support under subclass 754 comprising an element which
    is pivotable with respect to the frame or support about a score or fold
    line to maintain the support in a supporting position.


CLS 40/756
TXT Member connected to frame and support to limit pivoting:

    Picture frame support under subclass 748 wherein the support is hingedly
    attached to the picture frame and an element attached to the picture frame
    and  support to restrict support movement.


CLS 40/757
TXT Suspended frame:

    Picture frame support under subclass 745 consisting of a structure designed
    to allow the frame to be mounted on a vertical support surface.


CLS 40/758
TXT Suspension device unitary with corner
    connector:

    Suspended picture frame under subclass 757 wherein the vertical mounting
    means is formed on an element which connects the ends of two intersecting
    frame members.


CLS 40/759
TXT Detachable member having notch or opening for securing frame to vertical
    support surface:

    Suspended picture frame under subclass 757 wherein a member having a recess
    or aperture is releasably secured to the frame for securing the frame to a
    vertical support surface.


CLS 40/760
TXT Frame adhesively secured to support surface:

    Picture frame under subclass 745 wherein a sticky substance is used to
    cause the frame to adhere to a  support surface.


CLS 40/761
TXT Detachable support:

    Picture frame support under subclass 745 wherein the means to hold the
    frame in a fixed position is removable from the frame.


CLS 40/762
TXT Multiple frame connection points:

    Detachable frame support under subclass 761 capable of being connected to
    the frame at different locations.


CLS 40/763
TXT Support covers picture insertion slot:

    Detachable frame support under subclass 761 wherein the means for holding a
    frame in a fixed position is designed to cover an opening in the frame
    through which a planar article is passed.


CLS 40/764
TXT Frame received in channel in support:

    Detachable frame support under subclass 761 wherein the frame is received
    in an elongated recess in the means for holding a frame in a fixed position.


CLS 40/765
TXT Slidably received article:

    Picture frame under subclass 700 having a means to receive an article
    (e.g., picture, mat, or backing) linearly along a guide with respect to the
    frame.


CLS 40/766
TXT Insertion opening with peripheral closure means:

    Frame structure under subclass 765 having an access opening which allows
    passage of a picture therethrough and a cover for closing the access
    opening.


CLS 40/767
TXT Including biasing means:

    Frame structure under subclass 766 comprising a resilient member which
    urges the closure towards either an open or closed state.


CLS 40/768
TXT Mat, mount, or backing:

    Picture frame under subclass 700 comprised of a sheet of material, useful
    for placing around the planar article as a border, for holding a planar
    article onto it, or for strengthening a planar article, preventing it from
    being easily bent or holding it securely in a rigid frame.

    (1)     Note. The mat mount or backing may be enclosed within a frame or
    may serve as a frame.


CLS 40/769
TXT Plural exposed mats:

    Picture frame including a mat, mount, or backing under subclass 768 wherein
    more than one mat is simultaneously viewable.


CLS 40/770
TXT Cooperating closure and aperture:

    Picture frame including a mat, mount, or backing under subclass 768 having
    an opening therein which allows the mat, mount, or backing to be inserted
    or removed and a movable cover attached to the frame which allows or
    prevents access to the opening.


CLS 40/771
TXT Transparent holder:

    Picture frame including a mat, mount, or backing under subclass 768 further
    comprised of a receiving member which is adapted to transmit light
    therethrough and is designed to contain a picture therein.


CLS 40/772
TXT Separable transparent cover:

    Picture frame including a mat, mount, or backing under subclass 768 having
    a flexible, light transmissive cover which can be moved allowing a picture
    to be attached or removed from the mat, mount, or backing.


CLS 40/773
TXT Including adhesive for securing picture:

    Picture frame including a mat, mount, or backing under subclass 768 having
    a gummy or sticky surface for holding a picture.


CLS 40/774
TXT Foldable (e.g., for enclosing picture therein):

    Picture frame including a mat, mount, or backing under subclass 768 wherein
    the picture frame is a unitary structure and is capable of being folded so
    as to contain the generally planar article within.


CLS 40/775
TXT Pocketed:

    Picture frame including a mat, mount, or backing under subclass 768
    comprising a member either attached to or formed from the mat, mount, or
    backing wherein a receptacle having an access opening is formed.

    (1)     Note. The member may only engage a picture at peripheral edges of
    the picture or at the minimal number of necessary points for retention of
    the picture.


CLS 40/776
TXT Having transparent cover:

    Picture frame including a mat, mount, or backing under subclass 768 having
    a light transmissive sheet forming a portion of the pocket allowing the
    picture to be viewed.


CLS 40/777
TXT Having structure to secure picture (e.g., tab. catch, slot, etc.)

    Picture frame including a mat, mount, or backing under subclass 768 wherein
    structure is provided to retain a picture within the frame.


CLS 40/778
TXT Corner piece:

    Picture frame including a mat, mount, or backing under subclass 777 having
    an element located at a point of intersection of frame members to retain a
    picture therein.


CLS 40/779
TXT Hingedly connected frame elements:

    Picture frame under subclass 700 comprising two pivotally attached segments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    722,    for a picture frame combined with a receptacle.

    733,    for plural hingedly connected picture frames.


CLS 40/780
TXT Knockdown or set-up type:

    Picture frame under subclass 700 wherein the structure is capable of being
    (a) disassembled either partially for insertion of a picture or completely
    for storage and transportation purposes or (b) erected to an assembled
    state from a folded or disassembled state.


CLS 40/781
TXT Interconnected sections (e.g., frame including a front section attached to
    a back section):

    Knockdown or set-up frame structure under subclass 780 wherein two sections
    which are connected to one another, without the use of a separate fastening
    device.


CLS 40/782
TXT Corner connector:

    Knockdown or set-up frame structure under subclass 780 wherein structure is
    provided for securing frame elements that intersect.


CLS 40/783
TXT External connector:

    Corner connector under subclass 782 wherein a portion of the structure
    which secures the intersecting frame elements is secured outside a
    peripheral portion of a secured frame element.


CLS 40/784
TXT Connector having aperture to receive fastener:

    External corner connector under subclass 783 wherein the connector is
    provided with an opening to receive a member which secures a frame element
    and connector together.


CLS 40/785
TXT Connector having aperture to receive fastener:

    Corner connector under subclass 782 wherein the connector is provided with
    an opening to receive a member which secures a frame element and connector
    together.


CLS 40/786
TXT Folded:

    Knockdown or set-up type frame structure under subclass 780 formed by
    bending either a blank or a preshaped structure.

    (1)     Note.  The frame may be formed either from a single folded element
    of a plurality of joined elements, one of which is folded.


CLS 40/787
TXT Elastic retention element:

    Folded picture frame under subclass 786 wherein a flexible member retains
    the frame in a folded condition.


CLS 40/788
TXT Frame formed from single unitary blank:

    Folded picture frame under subclass 786 wherein the frame is formed by
    bending one planar sheet of material.


CLS 40/789
TXT Having display window formed in blank:

    Folded picture frame under subclass 788 wherein the unbent sheet has an
    opening therein which will allow a displayed planar article to be viewed
    after the blank has been folded to form a frame.


CLS 40/790
TXT Picture retainer:

    Frame structure under subclass 700 comprising means; e.g., a clamp, button,
    beading-strip, spring, etc., for securing a displayed planar article in
    place within the frame.


CLS 40/791
TXT Picture retainer and frame structure unitarily formed:

    Biased picture retainer under subclass 790 wherein the frame structure and
    retainer are a one piece structure (i.e., not formed from connected
    elements).


CLS 40/792
TXT Biased:

    Picture retainer under subclass 790 wherein the securing means contains a
    resilient member (e.g., a spring) stressed within its elastic limit to
    force a displayed planar article within the frame 3.


CLS 40/793
TXT Retainer member covering picture:

    Biased picture retainer under subclass 792 wherein the retainer overlies a
    portion of a displayed picture and is viewable with a displayed picture.


CLS 40/794
TXT Adjustable thickness (i.e., designed to hold planar article, fronts, or
    backings having different thicknesses):

    Biased picture retainer under subclass 792 which is designed to accommodate
    frame components having plural thicknesses.

    (1)     Note. This subclass is intended to take frames which may be made to
    accommodate similar components having different thicknesses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    740,    for frame structure wherein the thickness of the outer periphery of
    the frame may be adjusted.


CLS 40/795
TXT Secured to opposed frame elements:

    Biased picture retainer under subclass 792 wherein the flexible member
    extends completely across an elongated dimension of a frame and is secured
    to facing portions of the frame.


CLS 40/796
TXT Pivoted into notch on frame:

    Picture retainer under subclass 790 wherein the securing means is operative
    to be selectively moved about an axis so a portion thereof is received in a
    recessed portion formed in the a segment of the frame.


CLS 40/797
TXT Cover retainer:

    Frame structure under subclass 700 comprising means for securing protecting
    material (e.g., gauze, netting, etc.) over a planar article.


CLS 40/798
TXT Decorative feature:

    Frame structure under subclass 700 constructed of material shaped by being
    cast in molds, embossed, rolled, or stamped with a desired pattern.


CLS 40/799
TXT Detachable:

    Decorative frame structure under subclass 798 removably connected to an
    existing frame.


CLS 40/800
TXT RELIEF PICTURE:

    Structure under the class definition for a three dimensional planar article
    or a display having a raised surface.

    (1)     Note. This subclass includes three dimensional displays, such as
    stuffed and mounted skins of small animals and relief pictures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 13 for an object
    displayed in a frame or transparent casing which include or are imitative
    of a real object, and subclasses 15+ for three dimensional imitation or
    treated natural objects.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 295+ for device for use in
    the instruction of biology and taxidermy.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 40/900
TXT MIRROR THAT HAS CHANGING EFFECT:
    Changing exhibitor wherein a reflective or partially reflective surface is
    employed (e.g., one-way mirror, semisilvered mirror, etc.).


CLS 40/901
TXT TV/RADIO PROGRAM INDICATOR:
    Device used in conjunction with a radio or television tuning dial to
    indicate the program material or station being tuned.


CLS 40/902
TXT CIRCUIT CONTROL (FLASHING LIGHT, ETC.):
    Device used to activate an exhibitor or to activate an illumination means
    of an exhibitor.


CLS 40/903
TXT REFLECTIVE TRIANGLE FOR HIGHWAY USE:
    Device of a substantially portable nature used to warn oncoming traffic of
    a disabled vehicle or other obstacle.


CLS 40/904
TXT MAP OR CHART HOLDER:
    Device for holding a map or chart to facilitate its use, primarily in a
    vehicle.


CLS 40/905
TXT PEN AND PENCIL:
    Device such as a pen, pencil, or the like with indicia thereon.


CLS 40/906
TXT SOUND:
    Exhibit or display device including sound as an adjunct to the advertising
    or display, or to attract the attention of a viewer.


CLS 40/907
TXT OUT-TO-LUNCH TYPE:
    Device, usually placed on a door or adjacent thereto, to indicate that the
    occupant is out, said devices usually provide additional information or
    advertising, or provide means for a visitor to leave a message.


CLS 40/908
TXT ANIMAL OR FUR SKIN IDENTIFICATION:
    Cross-reference art collection drawn to an identification device for use in
    marking animal or fur skins.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300+,   for animal markers.


CLS 40/909
TXT STORAGE BATTERY IDENTIFICATION:
    Cross-reference art collection drawn to an identification device for
    marking or dating an electric storage battery.


CLS 40/910
TXT AUTOMOBILE LICENSE IDENTIFICATION:
    Cross-reference art collection drawn to an identification device displaying
    or indicating the owner of an automobile.


CLS 40/911
TXT AUTOMOBILE BODY IDENTIFICATION:
    Cross-reference art collection drawn to an identification device for use
    with an automobile body.


CLS 40/912
TXT AUTOMOBILE MOTOR IDENTIFICATION:
    Cross-reference art collection drawn to an identification device for use
    with an automobile motor.


CLS 40/913
TXT TOOL IDENTIFICATION:
    Cross-reference art collection drawn to an identification device for use
    with a tool.


CLS 40/914
TXT NUCLEAR FUEL ELEMENT IDENTIFICATION:
    Cross-reference art collection drawn to an identification device for use
    with a nuclear fuel element.


CLS 40/915
TXT GOLF CLUB IDENTIFICATION:
    Cross-reference art collection drawn to an identification device for use
    with a golf club.

    FOREIGN ART COLLECTIONS

    The definitions for FOR 100 and FOR 101 below correspond to the definitions
    of the abolished subclassesunder Class 364 from which these collections
    were formed. See the Foreign Art Collections schedule for specific
    correspondences. [Note: The titles and definitions for indented art
    collections include all the details of the one(s) that are hierarchically
    superior.]


CLS 40/FOR100
TXT Foreign art collection including cards having advertising matter
    or pictures on their face to be dusplayed.


CLS 40/FOR101
TXT Foreign art collection including a receptacle means adapted to
    contain the display medium.


CLS 42/
TTL FIREARMS

CLS 42/
TXT This class includes all the portable firearms, i.e., those which are
    supported by hand when operated, such as shoulder guns, pistols, toy
    firearms and cane guns, except the automatic or explosion-operated
    firearms.  This class also has such firearms combined with cleaners,
    intrenching devices, bayonets, and other cutters (including specifically
    pistol-swords).  The following devices are likewise found here either, per
    se, or in combination with the firearm; ram rods, gun-rests and some body
    supported arm rests.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, subclass 158 for hand manipulable cutters
    (including bayonets) combined with other tools.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 104.05+ for
    gun cleaners.

    30,     Cutlery, pertinent subclasses, for hand manipulable cutters
    (including bayonets), per se, and subclasses 142+ for the combination of
    two or more cutters.

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 233+ for gun sights, per se,
    and gun and sight combinations where only so much gun structure is included
    as is necessary to accommodate the sight and subclass 244 for a gun sight
    cover.

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 632+, for one shot explosion actuated
    expansible chamber type motors.

    81,     Tools, subclass 3.05 and the notes thereto appended for shell
    projectile or wad extractors.

    86,     Ammunition and Explosive-Charge Making.

    89,     Ordnance, for heavier mounted guns,subclass 14.1 for all barrels
    with heat exchangers, and subclasses 125+ for automatic or
    explosion-operated firearms.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, appropriate subclasses, for gun
    projectiles, per se.

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, for mechanical projectile throwing
    or impelling apparatus in which the propelling agent is nonexplosive.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 317 for a weapon container
    (e.g., gun case).

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 24 for article dispensers shaped to
    simulate various figures and which may include firearm simulations.  Also,
    see the class definition of Class 221 for article dispensers in other
    classes related to magazine feed in general.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 79 for dispensers simulating firearms, e.g.,
    water pistols, and subclass 192 for dispensers combined with firearms where
    only so much of the firearm as is necessary to support or operate the
    dispenser is claimed.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 49+ for
    intrenching tools of the shovel type.


CLS 42/1.01
TXT INDICATORS:
    Devices under class definition having means to convey information to one of
    the senses.


CLS 42/1.02
TXT Magazine shot:
    Devices under subclass 1.01 comprising a compartment which holds ammunition
    ready for chambering and having means for indicating the presence or
    absence of ammunition or for indicating the number of ammunition rounds
    left or spent from the compartment.


CLS 42/1.03
TXT Single shot, e.g., digital type:
    Devices under subclass 1.01 having means for either indicating the total
    number of shots discharged from the firearm or whether a projectile has
    been fired.


CLS 42/1.04
TXT Hammer position:
    Devices under subclass 1.01 having means to designate the position of that
    part of the firing mechanism of a gun that strikes the firing pin or
    cartridge primer.


CLS 42/1.05
TXT Chamber status:
    Devices under subclass 1.01 having means to designate the presence or
    absence of ammunition in that part of a gun in which the ammunition is
    placed for firing.


CLS 42/1.06
TXT WITH RECOIL REDUCER:
    Devices under the class definition having means to decrease the reaction of
    a gun after being discharged.

    (1)     Note.  Recoil, particularly as pertains to small firearms, is
    popularly called "kick".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for cushioned stocks.


CLS 42/1.07
TXT WITH ADJUSTABLE HEAD SPACE:
    Devices under the class definition having adjustable means to compensate
    for the distance between the face of the locked bolt or breech block of a
    firearm and some specified point in the chamber.

    (1)     Note.  With guns designed for rimless, bottlenecked cartridges,
    head space is the space between the bolt face and specified point on the
    shoulder of the chamber; with guns using rimmed cartridges, the head space
    between the bolt face and the ridge or abutment in the chamber against
    which the rim rests; and with guns using rimless straight-case cartridges,,
    the space between the bolt face and the ridge or point in the chamber where
    the mouth of the cartridge case rests.


CLS 42/1.08
TXT FOR DISCHARGING A STUNNING AGENT:
    Firearms under the class definition specifically designed to fire a
    projectile containing a gas or other medium so as to render physical
    insensibility to any one of the senses.


CLS 42/1.09
TXT DISGUISED AS BODY ARTICLE:
    Firearms under the class definition concealable in such a manner as to
    appear as an object normally worn, or carried by person, e.g., pen gun,
    watch, etc.


CLS 42/1.11
TXT BODY BORNE REMOTE OPERATED:
    Firearms under the class definition attachable to some part of the body and
    discharged from or by another part of the body.


CLS 42/1.12
TXT CATTLE SLAUGHTER TYPE:
    Firearms under the class definition specifically designed to discharged a
    projectile solely for the purpose of the humane slaughter of animals.


CLS 42/1.13
TXT TRIP, TRAP OR BURGLARY PREVENTION:
    Devices under the class definition including hidden means attached to a
    firearm device which can discharge the firearm from a remote area when the
    hidden means are disturbed.


CLS 42/1.14
TXT UNDERWATER TYPE:
    Firearms under the class definition adapted to be used and/or discharge in
    subaqueous conditions, e.g., spear guns, share cartridges, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 6+ for fishing
    with harpoons and spears.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclass 399 for marine-type projectiles.

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, appropriate subclass.


CLS 42/1.15
TXT FLARE TYPE GUN:
    Firearms under the class definition particularly adapted to discharge a
    pyrotechnic medium designed to produce a source or light.


CLS 42/1.16
TXT BILLY CLUB TYPE:
    Firearms under the class definition disguised as a wooden club which would
    normally be used by policeman.


CLS 42/2
TXT Miscellaneous firearms adapted for loading at the breech.  The subclasses
    under this title, except those of the spring-motor guns, and the
    grip-magazine pistols, are based on the movements of the breechblock or
    barrel in opening the breech.  Features of magazine structure may be found
    in any of the magazine subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for frame and barrel fastenings for take-down purposes only.  Where
    the barrel must be separated from the frame for the purpose of loading and
    unloading, the patent is in this subclass (2).


CLS 42/5
TXT Firearms in which a spring, which is wound up, is utilized to furnish the
    power for opening the breech, usually by sliding the breechblock rearward,
    ejecting the shell, reloading and closing the breech. Usually one winding
    of the spring is sufficient for a magazine full of cartridges.


CLS 42/6
TXT Miscellaneous breech-loading magazine-guns not classifiable in any of the
    other subclasses of magazine-guns.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5       and 7.


CLS 42/7
TXT The magazine is placed in the handle or grip of the pistol.  Usually the
    breech-block slides rearward or the barrel forward to open the breech.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 110.5 and the notes thereto
    appended for handles which also serve as receptacles.

    89,     Ordnance, subclasses 195+ for automatic guns of the grip magazine
    type.


CLS 42/8
TXT "Breakdown" guns in which the hinge is located at the breech.


CLS 42/9
TXT The breechblock turns about a central fixed axis, which is perpendicular to
    the longitudinal axis of the barrel like a faucet valve, to open and close
    the breech.  The charge is sometimes received in this block and there
    retained when fired.  In other cases the block closes the breech containing
    the charge.


CLS 42/10
TXT The barrel slides forward to open the breech.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    89,     Ordnance, subclass 161 for automatic guns of this type.


CLS 42/11
TXT Magazine-guns in which the barrel slides forward to open the breech, this
    movement also operating to reload the gun from the magazine.


CLS 42/12
TXT The barrel, to open the breech, is made to swing to one side.


CLS 42/13
TXT The barrel, to open the breech, is made to swing to one side on a pivot, or
    axis parallel to the length or axis of the barrel.


CLS 42/14
TXT The breechblock is made to slide in guides to open or close the breech.


CLS 42/15
TXT Firearms under subclass 14 having a chamber which is movable relative to
    the barrel and surrounds or holds a cartridge or load in firing position,
    and which may be integral with, connected to, or separate from, the sliding
    breechblock.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also includes sectional chambers if at least
    one section is movable relative to the barrel.

    (2)     Note.  A magazine as distinguished from a chamber, does not hold
    the cartridge or load in firing position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27      and 39.5, for other firearms having movable chambers.

    59+,    for all firearms, whether breech or muzzle loaded, having a
    revolving cylinder adapted to hold two or more cartridges and to bring each
    successively to firing position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    89,     Ordnance, subclasses 155+ for automatic guns with movable chambers.


CLS 42/16
TXT The breechblock, in opening the breech, is made to slide rearward
    substantially in line with the barrel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5       and 7.


CLS 42/17
TXT Magazine-guns having a breechblock made to slide rearward substantially in
    line with the gun-barrel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5       and 7.


CLS 42/18
TXT The magazine is of the side-feeding or "box" type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5       and 7.


CLS 42/19
TXT Firearms in which a rotary magazine, like a revolver-cylinder, is employed
    to bring the cartridges successively to position in line with the breech,
    where they are pushed into the barrel by the returning breechblock. In
    revolvers the cartridges are retained in the cylinder when fired.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59.


CLS 42/20
TXT Guns of this type in which a pivoted hammer is employed to strike the
    charge or a firing-pin which transmits the blow to the charge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5       and 7.


CLS 42/21
TXT Magazine-guns of the type in the preceding subclass.


CLS 42/22
TXT Magazine-guns with this breech-block movement which have the side-feeding
    or "box" magazine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5       and 7.


CLS 42/23
TXT The breech-block, in opening the breech, slides vertically in a mortise.


CLS 42/24
TXT Magazine-guns which have the breechblock fitted to slide in a vertical
    mortise.


CLS 42/25
TXT Shell-extracting devices pertaining to this type of gun.


CLS 42/26
TXT The breech-block is hinged or pivoted and made to swing to open the breech.


CLS 42/27
TXT Firearms under subclass 26 having a chamber which is movable relative to
    the barrel and which surrounds or holds a cartridge or load in firing
    position, and which may be integral with, connected to, or separated from,
    the swinging breechblock.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     39.5 and 59+, and see the notes under subclass 15.


CLS 42/28
TXT The breech-block being pivoted at its rear end, its front end swings
    downward and to the rear to uncover the breech.


CLS 42/29
TXT Magazine-guns in which the breech-block is pivoted at its rear end, so its
    front end swings downward and to the rear.


CLS 42/30
TXT The breech-block, pivoted at its forward end, swings outward and forward at
    its rear end to open the breech.


CLS 42/31
TXT The breech-block is pivoted at its rear end, and its front end swings
    outward and to the rear to open the breech.


CLS 42/32
TXT The breech-block, to open the breech, swings on a pivot or hinge which is
    parallel with the gun-barrel axis.


CLS 42/33
TXT Magazine-guns in which the breech-block, to open the breech, swings on a
    pivot or hinge which is parallel to the gun-axis.


CLS 42/34
TXT The breech-block is pivoted below the gun- axis, and the upper part of the
    block, to open the breech, swings rearward and downward.


CLS 42/35
TXT Magazine-guns in which the breech-block, to open the breech, swings to the
    rear and downward.


CLS 42/36
TXT The breech-block is pivoted at its forward part, and, to open the breech,
    its rearward part swings upward and forward.


CLS 42/37
TXT Magazine-guns in which the breech-block is pivoted at its forward part and,
    to open the breech, swings the rearward part upward and forward.


CLS 42/38
TXT The breech-block is pivoted at the rear end, and to open the breech, its
    forward end swings upward and to the rear.


CLS 42/39
TXT Magazine-guns in which the breech-block is pivoted at its rear end.  To
    open the breech, its forward end swings upward and to the rear.


CLS 42/39.5
TXT Firearms under subclass 2 having a chamber which is movable relative to the
    barrel and which surrounds or holds the cartridge or load in firing
    position.

    (1)     Note.  Plural chambers carried by endless carriers and moved by
    star wheels or formed by tangential contact of two cylinders having
    complementary grooves, are in this subclass rather than subclasses 59+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     27 and 59+, and see the notes under subclass 15.


CLS 42/40
TXT The barrel is pivoted to the stock at a point in advance of the breech,
    and, to open the breech, the barrel swings on this pivot, the muzzle
    downward and breech upward.  These are often styled "breakdown" guns.


CLS 42/41
TXT Guns under subclass 40 having means functioning to ignite or to control the
    igniting of the charge.

    (1)     Note.  The term "lock" is sometimes used to designate firing
    mechanism, particularly in the older patents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65+,    for firing mechanism limited to revolvers.

    69+,    for firing mechanism not limited to revolvers nor to upward
    swinging breech guns.


CLS 42/42.01
TXT With single actuator:
    Devices under subclass 41 having a single trigger that is interconnected to
    two or more firing train mechanisms of a firearm which is comprised of
    plural barrels and may be discharged either simultaneously or sequentially.


CLS 42/42.02
TXT Plural triggers:
    Devices under subclass 42.01 wherein the plural triggers are interconnected
    to a firing train mechanism and plural triggers are operated by a single
    trigger actuator.


CLS 42/42.03
TXT Single trigger and hammer:
    Devices under subclass 42.01 wherein a single trigger actuator is utilized
    to operate the firing train mechanism device which discharges each of the
    plural barrels.


CLS 42/43
TXT In the breaking down of the gun or in closing the breech the hammer is
    cocked.


CLS 42/44
TXT Devices for holding or locking the breech in the closed position.


CLS 42/45
TXT Barrel-locking devices which also operate to cock or partly cock the hammer.


CLS 42/46
TXT Shell-extracting mechanism usually operated by the breakdown of the gun.


CLS 42/47
TXT Mechanism, usually operated by the breakdown of the gun, for throwing out
    or ejecting the cartridge-shells.


CLS 42/48
TXT The ejector is struck by an ejector hammer, usually in breaking down the
    gun, and thus throws out the cartridge-shells.


CLS 42/49.01
TXT Magazines:
    Devices under subclass 2 comprising a dtructure or compartment for storing
    ammunition or explosives ready for chambering and which may be detachable
    or nondetachable to the firearm.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for magazines guns.

    11,     17, 18, 21, and 22, for breech loading firearm type magazines.

    59+,    for revolving cylinders containing cartridges.

    87+,    for magazine chargers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    89,     Ordnance, subclasses 33.01+ for cartridge feeding devices.


CLS 42/49.02
TXT Adapters or capacity reducers:
    Devices under subclass 49.01 including structure which provides for the
    feeding and firing of difference size caliber rounds within the firearm.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for bolt adapters.

    77,     for barrel adapters.


CLS 42/50
TXT The novelty resides solely in the magazine, of the side-feeding or "box"
    type.

    Search This Class, Subclass:
    88.


CLS 42/51
TXT Firearms which can be loaded only through the muzzle.


CLS 42/52
TXT Walking-canes, which are adapted also to be used as firearms.


CLS 42/53
TXT Those pistols which combine therewith a sword or knife attachment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, appropriate subclasses for cutters not attached to or
    combined with a gun.


CLS 42/54
TXT Devices--such as toy pistols, cannon, etc., -- made to imitate firearms and
    which either fire an explosive, like a cap or match, by means of some sort
    of a lock or which have a barrel in which an explosive is placed and fired.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 202+ for caps for toy
    firearms.

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, subclass 2 for spring or air guns
    which project a missile and also explode a cap.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 79 for simulated firearms, e.g., water
    pistols, and subclass 192 for dispensers (other than cartridge magazines)
    combined with firearms where only so much of the firearm as is necessary to
    support or operate the dispenser is claimed.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 398+ for cap-exploding toy
    which do not simulate firearms; and subclass 473 for toy firearms which do
    not explode caps.


CLS 42/55
TXT Devices made in imitation of cannon, mortars, etc., and adapted to hold an
    explosive charge, generally a firecracker. A projectile may or may not be
    used.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, subclass 29 for devices made in
    imitation of pieces of ordnance adapted to project a missile by some
    mechanical means.


CLS 42/57
TXT The device is adapted to receive a "ribbon" of the explosives or caps and
    feed this ribbon as the caps are successively exploded by the hammer.


CLS 42/58
TXT The toy is made to imitate a revolver.


CLS 42/59
TXT Pistols or rifles in which there is a revolving cylinder adapted to carry a
    plurality of loads and bring each load successively to firing position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.5,   for plural chambers carried by endless chains or formed by
    tangential contact of two cylinders having complementary grooves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    89,     Ordnance, subclasses 13.05+ for machine guns with revolving
    cylinders, and subclasses 155+ for automatic guns with movable chambers.


CLS 42/60
TXT The revolver carries a fixed magazine from which the cylinder is supplied
    or fed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
    19.


CLS 42/61
TXT The cylinder can be loaded only from the forward end.


CLS 42/62
TXT The cylinder swings outward to reload, clean, etc.


CLS 42/63
TXT Revolvers of the breakdown type.


CLS 42/64
TXT Devices for locking or holding the barrel in its closed operative position.


CLS 42/65
TXT Guns under subclass 59 having means functioning to ignite or to control the
    igniting of the charge.

    (1)     Note.  The term "lock" is sometimes used to designate firing
    mechanism, particularly in the older patents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41+,    for firing mechanism limited to upward swinging breech guns.

    69+,    for firing mechanism not limited to upward swinging breach guns nor
    to revolvers.


CLS 42/66
TXT Arrangements for preventing premature explosion of the charge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
    83.


CLS 42/67
TXT Devices for checking the revolution of the cylinder and holding it during
    the firing.


CLS 42/68
TXT Shell-extracting mechanism.


CLS 42/69.01
TXT FIRING MECHANISM:
    Devices under the class definition having devices which enable the firing
    train mechanism or any part thereof to be actuated to discharge the firearm.


CLS 42/69.02
TXT Rearward sliding breech bolt:
    Devices under subclass 69.01 wherein the firearm has a rearwardly sliding
    breech bolt for closing the rear part of the barrel during firing.


CLS 42/69.03
TXT With pivoted hammer:
    Devices under subclass 69.02 wherein the firing train includes a pivoted
    hammer for striking a firing pin.


CLS 42/70.01
TXT SAFETY MECHANISM:
    Devices under the class definition having means for temporarily securing
    some part of a firearm to render it inoperative.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     65+ and 69.01+, for other types of safety devices on the firearm.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    89,     Ordnance, subclasses 137+, 142 and 148 to 154 for safety devices
    used in automatic guns.


CLS 42/70.02
TXT Magazine operated:
    Devices under subclass 70.01 wherein the security mechanism for rendering
    the firearm inoperative is operated by the magazine or some element thereof.


CLS 42/70.03
TXT Shoulder operated:
    Devices under subclass 70.01 wherein a hand held firearm includes mechanism
    in the butt end of the firearm that is activated from a security condition
    to an operative condition by bracing the butt end against the shoulder of a
    person firing the firearm.


CLS 42/70.04
TXT Sear trigger lock:
    Devices under subclass 70.01 wherein the security mechanism prevents
    movement of the firing train by preventing the operation of both the
    trigger and the sear device.

    (1)     Note.  Sear is the part or device which engages the hammer, striker
    or other firing device and holds it in the cocked position until firing is
    desired.  The sear is disengaged to cause firing by trigger movement.


CLS 42/70.05
TXT Sear lock:
    Devices under subclass 70.01 wherein the security mechanism prevents
    movement of the firing train by preventing the operation or movement of the
    sear device.


CLS 42/70.06
TXT Trigger lock:
    Devices under subclass 70.01 including means that prevent the trigger
    device of a firearm from movement.


CLS 42/70.07
TXT On trigger guard:
    Devices under subclass 70.01 wherein the firearm includes a protective
    device over the trigger and further includes means to cover the protective
    device so as to prevent access to the trigger.


CLS 42/70.08
TXT Hammer of firing pin:
    Devices under subclass 70.01 wherein the security mechanism is located on
    or engages that part of the firing mechanism that strikes the firing pin or
    percussion cap to prevent discharging the firearm.


CLS 42/70.09
TXT Responsive to particular firing angle:
    Devices under subclass 70.01 having means which prevent the firearm from
    being discharged unless the firearm is disposed at a particular elevation.


CLS 42/70.11
TXT Firearm lock:
    Devices under subclass 70.01 designed to prevent the use of the firearm.


CLS 42/71.01
TXT STOCKS:
    Devices under the class definition comprising supporting framework or
    structure which is normally attached to a firearm for supporting the barrel
    and receiver of the firearm.


CLS 42/71.02
TXT For pistols:
    Devices under subclass 71.01 wherein the framework or structure is designed
    to support a small caliber firearm which is held and fired with one hand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for pistol grip magazines.


CLS 42/72
TXT Additional or auxiliary stocks to be attached usually to pistol-handles to
    convert them into shoulder-guns.


CLS 42/73
TXT Adjustably-attached stocks to permit varying the angle between the stock
    and barrel.


CLS 42/74
TXT Rubber, spring, air, or other cushioned gunbutt to diminish the effect of
    the recoil or "kick" of the gun.


CLS 42/75.01
TXT STOCK OR BARREL CONNECTORS:
    Devices under the class definition having means for fastening the stock of
    a firearm, the receiver and/or the barrel to each other.

    (1)     Note.  A receiver is that part of the gun which contains the firing
    mechanism and the stock and barrel are connected thereto.


CLS 42/75.02
TXT Barrel to receiver:
    Devices  under subclass 75.01 having means for fastening the barrel of a
    firearm to the receiver.


CLS 42/75.03
TXT Receiver to stock:
    Devices under subclass 75.01 having means for fastening the receiver to the
    stock.


CLS 42/75.04
TXT Hinged or pivoted barrel:
    Devices under subclass 75.01 wherein the barrel may be moved in any
    direction about an axis relative to the stock and/or receiver.


CLS 42/76.01
TXT BARRELS:
    Device under the class definition comprising a tubular structure through
    which a projectile is fired.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are barrels having means for
    uniting two or more barrels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    89,     Ordnance, subclasses 14.05+ for barrels and barrel structure used
    with ordnance devices.


CLS 42/76.02
TXT Materials or coatings:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.01 comprising the substance of which the
    barrel is made of compositions for treating the surface or the barrel.


CLS 42/77
TXT Barrels some of which are adapted to be placed within the usual barrel to
    make a rifle in place of a shotgun or for some other reason to reduce the
    usual bore; some barrels adapted to be placed by and removed from the side
    of the usual barrel to make a double-barreled gun or one with a shot and
    also a rifle barrel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    89,     Ordnance, subclass 29.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 444+ for auxiliary barrels
    having a subcaliber bore and adapted to be loaded or otherwise handled like
    a practice cartridge.


CLS 42/78
TXT Gun barrels in which the novelty resides in the rifling.  This subclass
    includes rifling for heavy ordnance as well as for the lighter firearms.


CLS 42/79
TXT Gun muzzle constructions or muzzle attachments designed to prevent the shot
    scattering when the charge leaves the gun.


CLS 42/83
TXT Nipple structures and also guards either carried by the stock or by the
    hammer and adapted to prevent the hammer prematurely striking the nipple.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
    66.


CLS 42/84
TXT Principally electric firing devices.  Some alarms for indicating when the
    guns of the "hammerless" type are set at "unsafe".

    (1)     Note. For electrical releasing devices for mechanical projecting
    devices, see Class 124, Mechanical Guns and Projectors, subclass 32.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    89,     Ordnance, subclasses 28.05+ for electric firing devices for non
    automatic ordnance, and subclass 135 for electric firing devices for
    automatic guns.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 110+ for electric-lighting devices
    combined with firearms.


CLS 42/85
TXT Hands, clips, hooks, etc., combined with the gun, for sling-strap
    attachment, gun-stacking, and ram or wiper rod attachment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps,  etc., subclass 2.5 for bands which hold
    the barrel of a gun to its stock and in addition perform some other
    function, e.g., support a hook and/or one or more loops, and subclass 265
    for strap-end-attaching devices.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclass 150, for gun slings and
    carriers not claiming significant gun structure.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 683+ for article carried supports which
    support the article in storage position and remain with the article when in
    use.


CLS 42/86
TXT Gun bayonets of various kinds in combination with the firearm.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     for cane guns combined with swords.

    53,     for pistols combined with swords.

    90,     for other type cutters combined with guns.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, subclass 158 for cutters combined with other
    implements, and particularly subclass 116 for cutters combined with
    intrenching tools.

    30,     Cutlery, pertinent subclasses, for bayonets and other cutters, per
    se, and subclass 142 and indented subclasses, for combined cutlery.

    482,    Exercise Devices, particularly subclass 12 for exercise apparatus
    involving thrusting a pointed weapon, e.g., a fencing foil, etc., or a
    simulation thereof.


CLS 42/87
TXT Devices for temporarily holding a series of cartridges or gun charges and
    inserting them in the gun-magazine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
    49.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclasses 196, 199, 223, 239, 600+,
    660+, and cross-reference art collect 931 for cartridge holders combined
    with carrying means.


CLS 42/88
TXT Cartridge-holding clips or packs for temporarily holding the loads and
    inserting them in the gun-magazine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
    50.


CLS 42/89
TXT Devices for temporarily holding cartridges in such position as to readily
    insert them in the cylinder of a revolver.


CLS 42/90
TXT Various implements intimately associated with the use of firearms, such as
    cartridge-openers, loaders for muzzle-loading guns, wire-fence-cutting
    attachments when combined with the gun, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, appropriate subclasses, for cutters not attached to or
    combined with a gun.


CLS 42/93
TXT Digging implements combined with the gun.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, subclass 116 for shovel type tools combined with
    cutters (including bayonets).

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 49, and
    indented subclasses, for intrenching implements.


CLS 42/94
TXT Various forms of arm-rests and also gun-rests adapted to partially support
    the usual shoulder firearms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    89,     Ordnance, subclasses 37.01 for gun mounts which completely support
    a firearm or heavy gun.


CLS 42/95
TXT For barrel cleaning:
    Devices under subclass 90 including means adapted to purge residue from the
    bore of the barrel of a firearm.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 104.16 for
    reciprocating type scrapper, cutter, wiper or brush.


CLS 42/96
TXT Firearm protectors:
    Devices under subclass 90 including means which are utilized to preserve or
    safeguard the outer or inner parts of the firearm.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70.07,  for devices that fit on trigger guard to prevent access to trigger.

    74,     for cushioned pads that fit over the firearm stock.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 317 for a receptacle for a
    weapon (e.g., gun case).


CLS 42/97
TXT Weights and balances:
    Devices under subclass 90 including means which are attached to portions of
    the firearm to equalize or to compensate for imbalance in the firearm
    weight.


CLS 42/98
TXT Shell catchers:
    Devices under subclass 90 including means attached to the firearm to
    capture ejected shells.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    89,     Ordnance, subclass 33.4 for empty shell receivers for ordnance
    devices.


CLS 42/99
TXT Magnetic holding devices:
    Devices under subclass 90 including means adapted to secure devices to the
    firearm magnetically.


CLS 42/100
TXT Sight devices:
    Devices under subclass 90 including attachments for hand held firearms
    wherein  a line of sight may be established parallel to the longitudinal
    axis of the firearm or at an angle thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 233+ for gun sights, per se.

    89,     Ordnance, subclasses 41.19+ for gun sights on ordnance devices.


CLS 42/101
TXT Telescopic:
    Devices under subclass 100 comprising a tubular optical type device for
    providing a closer and magnified view of a target.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 245+ for telescopic sights, per
    se.


CLS 42/102
TXT Ventilated sights:
    Devices under subclass 100 comprising metallic type strips attached
    longitudinally to the barrel of a firearm for aiding in aiming the firearm
    at a target.


CLS 42/103
TXT Including lights:
    Devices under subclass 100 having means for receiving light either
    originating from a target or reflected from a light source on the firearm
    for directing the firearm at a target.

    (1)     Note.  Laser aiming devices are included in this subclass, also
    included are devices for directing a light beam at target for target
    practicing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 110+ for  illumination devices or firearms.


CLS 42/104
TXT Finger recoil pad:
    Devices under subclass 90 including devices which cushion the shock of the
    reaction of trigger reversion.


CLS 42/105
TXT For launching grenades:
    Devices under subclass 90 comprising means attached to the firearm to
    propel a projectile toward a target, e.g., grenade.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 483+ for grenades, per se.


CLS 42/106
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:
    Devices under the class definition including firearms and accessories not
    classifiable in any of the subclasses.


CLS 43/
TTL FISHING, TRAPPING, AND VERMIN  DESTROYING

CLS 43/
TXT
    I.      This class includes inventions which deal with the trapping of wild
    animals, the catching of fish, especially food fish, and the destruction of
    all animal life obnoxious or pestiferous to man.  It does not include
    catching and restraining devices for use with domestic animals or fowls nor
    the destruction of insects on such live stock.  It does not include bee-
    moth catchers.

    II.     The class is divided into three groups, as its title indicates.
    The trapping group of inventions is further subdivided into:

    (1)     Traps for general use or for animals other than fish and insects.

    (2)     Traps peculiarly adapted for fish and not readily usable on land
    without modification.

    (3)     Traps designed especially for insects and not useful in capturing
    other forms of life.

    (4)     Traps designed to catch human beings, as thieves or burglars.

    III.    The vermin-destroying group of inventions is subdivided into:

    (1)     Inventions useful for the destruction of vermin of all kinds.

    (2)     Inventions adapted to kill obnoxious insects only and not useful
    for killing other forms of vermin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 801+ for animal catching devices and
    156+ or anti-vermin devices for killing of insects on livestock.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses,
    for fluid distributors or discharge devices of general utility.  For a
    statement of the line between Classes 43 and 239 in regard to liquid vs.
    powder or dust discharge devices see the class definition, section III(h),
    of Class 239.

    449,    Bee Culture, subclass 4 for bee moth catchers.


CLS 43/1
TXT Devices under the class definition and not provided for under the more
    specific subclasses which follow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 333+ for pole supported, pivoted jaw fruit
    gatherers.


CLS 43/2
TXT Devices under class definition designed primarily to allure all forms of
    animal life, usually, though not necessarily, into danger, not classifiable
    in the following subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for blinds to conceal hunters.

    7+      and 100+, for various nets and fish- traps employing lights to
    attract fish where the light is not the chief feature of the invention.

    17.5,   for illuminating fish-attracting devices.

    42+,    for fish lures.

    113,    for illuminated insect traps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, particularly subclasses 707+ for a lure or
    related device used to entice an animal or associated with such a device.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 153+ for aquatic figure toys;
    and subclass 268 for figure toys.


CLS 43/3
TXT Decoys under subclass 2 formed into a semblance of a duck and designed to
    attract wild ducks within range of a hunter's gun. The subclass also
    includes floating frames for supporting dead ducks in a lifelike position
    to act as decoys.


CLS 43/4
TXT Apparatus and methods under the class definition for hooking or gathering
    fish.

    (1)     Note.  The term "fish" as used herein includes all animals not
    classifiable as insects which breathe in water or pass their lives in water.

    (2)     Note.  The trapping of fish is not included herein but will be
    found lower in the schedule, particularly in subclass 100; see the
    definition of subclass 58 for the distinction between "trapping" and the
    subject matter of this and the indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     and especially 65 for nonreturn entrance type traps.

    85,     for fish snares, and see (2) Note.

    88,     and especially 89 for suspended jaw type traps.

    100,    for fish traps, and see (2) Note.


CLS 43/4.5
TXT Methods under subclass 4 for hooking or gathering fish.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.53,  for methods of making artificial baits.

    58+,    for methods of trapping fish.


CLS 43/5
TXT Devices under subclass 4 having means cooperating with line fishing tackle
    and    functioning to assist in "landing" or hauling in fish caught on the
    line.

    (1)     Note.  These devices commonly are gaffs and grapples designed to
    run on or be guided by the fishing line to engage the fish.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17.2,   for line and/or hook or lure releasing devices guided by or sliding
    along the fishing line.

    85+,    for fish snares and loops.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 333+ for pole supported pivoted jaw fruit
    gatherers.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 26 for fish
    grapples, when not modified for cooperation with line fishing tackle.


CLS 43/6
TXT Those hunting or fishing weapons under subclass 4 which comprise a shank
    having a pointed head and which catch aquatic animals by being thrown or
    thrust into them.  Spring-actuated spears are found here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for fish-grapples, and gaff hooks combined with the tackle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, for hand manipulatable cutlery.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclass 371 for bomb lances used in
    whaling.

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, for mechanical projecting devices,
    per se.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 61 for spears
    for general use in material handling; subclasses 126+ for hayfork type
    harpoons.


CLS 43/6.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 4 having means to catch or gather fish and convey
    the catch to a boat.

    (1)     Note.  Lines with hooks, net devices or hydraulic currents are
    included as catching or gathering devices; in the latter example, the
    current may also act to convey the fish.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 315+ for shellfish dredgers including means
    operating to remove or detach the shellfish from the marine bed.


CLS 43/7
TXT Those open fabrics of twine or equivalent material under subclass 4, woven
    or tied with meshes of any size, designed and used for capturing fish or
    other aquatic animals in their native element and improvements closely
    allied to nets, such as net-stakes, and not provided for in other
    subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43.1+,  for floats and sinkers.

    100+,   for fish traps constructed largely of netting and for fish traps
    which are towed like certain nets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, subclasses 1-13 for
    such fabrics, particularly subclasses 3+ and subclass 12 for intertwisted
    strand and knotted mesh types.

    114,    Ships, subclass 241 for nets used to protect ships from torpedoes,
    mines, etc.

    245,    Wire Fabrics and Structure, appropriate subclasses, for
    wire-netting.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 175+, 190,
    193, and 196+ for a stock material product in the form of a web or sheet
    embodying mechanically interengaged strands or strand-portions (e.g.,
    weave, knit).

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 181+ and 304+ for a woven or knit fabric and especially
    subclasses 43+ and 58 for a coated or impregnated net or open mesh.


CLS 43/8
TXT Devices under subclass 7 special to the art of fishing for handling,
    hoisting, pulling, and otherwise manipulating fish nets where the invention
    lies in the handling apparatus by itself and not in the net.

    (1)     Note.  Where the invention resides in the net chiefly, appropriate
    subclasses below should be searched.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for apparatus for manipulating fishing-lines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    54,     Harness, subclasses 80.4+ for animal protecting nets.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 370+ and 520+ for
    apparatus for winding a web material which may include a net.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 264+ for cable-pulling devices which are in some instances
    disclosed as pulling in nets or purse lines, but have no special structure
    adapting them to handle the nets or controls adapting them to manipulate
    the nets or lines for fishing purposes.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, especially subclasses 137.7+ for
    means for loading or unloading a marine vessel directly from the sea,
    generally.


CLS 43/9.1
TXT Trawl:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein the open fabric of twine or
    equivalent material, i.e., net, is shaped to form a large, flattened bag
    and is adapted to be towed behind a boat-like vessel at a desired depth,
    e.g., along the bottom of a body of water, etc., or wherein structure
    closely allied to such a net is provided.

    (1)     Note.  A device which digs into the earth along the bottom of the
    body of water in order to dislodge fish is not proper for this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for a towable fish trap.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 307+ for a device which digs into the earth
    along the bottom of a body of water, particularly subclasses 315+ for a
    shellfish dredger.


CLS 43/9.2
TXT Having excluder device:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.1 wherein the large, flattened, bag shaped
    net includes structure for causing an unwanted item to either pass through
    or by the net or be retained in a separate section of the net so that a
    targeted fish or other aquatic animal may be retained in the net or
    separated from the unwanted item.

    (1)     Note.  The unwanted item may include debris or an undesired fish or
    other aquatic animal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9.3,    for a spiller type limiting device which releases excess fish upon
    reaching a predetermined limit in the net.


CLS 43/9.3
TXT Having limiting or limit indicating feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.1 wherein the large, flattened, bag shaped
    net includes structure which (1) restricts the amount the net may constrict
    or expand due to the stress caused by filling the net, (2) restricts the
    quantity of fish or other aquatic animal permitted to fill the net or (3)
    signals the amount of fish or other aquatic animal caught upon reaching a
    particular quantity.

    (1)     Note.  Constriction or expansion of the net beyond a certain limit
    must usually be avoided to prevent damage to the net as the net is filled.

    (2)     Note.  A device commonly known as a spiller which releases any
    excess fish or aquatic animal upon the net reaching a predetermined limit
    is included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9.2,    for an excluder device which prevents unwanted items, e.g., debris,
    fish, etc., from being caught in the net.


CLS 43/9.4
TXT Bottom running sled:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.1 wherein the large, flattened, bag shaped
    net utilizes a runner construction for supporting the net during travel
    along the bottom of the body of water.


CLS 43/9.5
TXT Bottom running roll:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.1 wherein the large, flattened, bag shaped
    net utilizes a rotatably mounted element for supporting the net during
    travel along the bottom of the body of water.


CLS 43/9.6
TXT Utilizing electrical shock to control fish or aquatic animal:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.1 wherein the large, flattened, bag shaped
    net uses electric current to provide a charge which may lure, reposition,
    stun or otherwise influence the fish or other aquatic animal.

    (1)     Note.  The electrical shock is never intended to kill the fish or
    other aquatic animal.


CLS 43/9.7
TXT Having specific flow affected board device for holding net mouth open,
    e.g., an otter board, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.1 wherein the large, flattened, bag shaped
    net includes detailed panel structure which, when engaged by a stream of
    water generated as the net is towed through the body of water, helps hold
    an entry area of the net agape for the fish or other aquatic animal to pass
    through.

    (1)     Note.  A device of this type is commonly known as an otter board, a
    gate or a door.


CLS 43/9.8
TXT Having specific line element:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.1 wherein significance is attributed to
    structure, e.g., a float, weight, etc., attached to a rope-like member
    connected to the large, flattened, bag shaped net.


CLS 43/9.9
TXT Having specific chafe preventing element:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.1 wherein significance is attributed to
    structure which helps prevent abrasion damage to the large, flattened, bag
    shaped net.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9.8,    for a line element used to prevent chafing of a line or a line and
    the net together.


CLS 43/9.95
TXT Fabric construction:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.1 wherein significance is attributed to the
    structural make up of the large, flattened, bag shaped net itself.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, particularly
    subclasses 12 and 53, for the process or apparatus for making a knotted
    mesh fabric or a knotted mesh fabric, per se, absent any trawl net details.


CLS 43/10
TXT Nets under subclass 7 set upright in the water, as by stakes, in the meshes
    of which the fish become caught by their gills. Usually gill-nets are set
    crosswise of a stream or watercourse.


CLS 43/11
TXT Scoop, landing, or hand nets under subclass 7 designed to be used
    principally for landing fish caught by hook and line or in a larger net,
    but also used for catching and landing the smaller species of fish.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for frog-nets and the like.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for a loop-to-handle
    connection wherein only so much of the loop or handle is included as is
    necessary to effect the connection therebetween.


CLS 43/12
TXT Dip or landing nets under subclass 11 the parts of which are foldable or
    collapsible for greater ease in carrying and sometimes for such
    manipulation of the foldable parts as will catch fish.


CLS 43/13
TXT Revolving nets under subclass 7 of wheel-like structure operated by water
    or other power and comprising a plurality of net-like dipping elements,
    which capture fish, usually as the latter are ascending streams.


CLS 43/14
TXT Encircling fish-nets under subclass 7 held upright in the water by floats
    and sinkers and designed to be hauled to the shore, a boat, or some other
    landing-place by the ends or closed around a body of swimming fish.
    Includes purse-seines, which have bottoms closable like a bag-mouth by
    heaving overboard a weight attached to a rope, called the "purse-line",
    rove through rings attached to the foot rope of the net which purses or
    closes the bottom of the net and confines the shoal of fish around which
    the net has been cast.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for towable fish traps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 264+ for cable-pulling devices which are in some instances
    disclosed as pulling in nets or purse lines, but have no special structure
    adapting them to handle the nets or controls adapting them to manipulate
    the nets or lines for fishing purposes.


CLS 43/15
TXT Devices under subclass 4 which, when a fish nibbles at a hook, act in such
    a way as to tend to force the barbed end of the hook into the fish's mouth
    to securely hook it.  Includes also devices which go a step further and not
    only hook the fish, but reel in the line automatically, where such devices
    are not spring-operated reels mounted on fishing-rods.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18.1+,  for rods.

    21,     for motor operated reels.


CLS 43/16
TXT Automatic hookers or catchers under subclass 15 which give a visible or an
    audible signal to let the fisherman know the fish has been hooked.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for other signals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 573 for condition responsive
    indicating systems automatically responsive to fish.


CLS 43/17
TXT Devices under subclass 4 which make either a visible or an audible signal
    when the fish has been hooked on a line.

    (1)     Note.  Sounds made by mere reel-brake, drag, or clicker mechanisms
    or mere visual movement of the reel have not been considered as signal
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for automatic hookers with signals.

    58,     for signal devices designed for animal-traps where the invention
    resides in the signal device and not in the trap.  Signal devices attached
    to traps where the invention is in the trap structure are to be found with
    the various types of traps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 305+ for a fishing reel
    with a signal or indicator, and subclass 912 for an indicator or signal
    analogous to Class 242 in general use.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, for miscellaneous electric signals and
    signal systems which may be automatically responsive to a condition.  Note
    especially subclass 573.


CLS 43/17.1
TXT Apparatus under subclass 4 applying electric currents or sonic wave energy
    to the fish or to the water to capture fish or to lure or to drive the fish
    to a point where other catching or gathering means can be brought into use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17.5,   for electric illuminating devices functioning to illuminate the
    fishing apparatus or to lure fish by the light.

    98,     for similar means for killing or disabling fish.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 219+ for a fish diverter or barrier,
    especially subclass 220 for electric type.


CLS 43/17.2
TXT Devices under subclass 4 adapted to be mounted on or to slide along a
    fishing line and functioning to engage the line or a line-attached body
    such as a hook, lure, or sinker for the purpose of freeing the line and/or
    body when held fast by a submarine obstruction.

    (1)     Note.  The device may operate to cut or break the line itself.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for fish gaffs and grapples adapted to run on or be guided by the
    fishing line to engage a fish caught on the line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclass 21.1 for devices for cutting a ship's cable when
    the anchor is caught or for other reason.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 54.5+ for devices for cutting a rope or cable in
    a bore hole.


CLS 43/17.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 4 having means to illuminate the apparatus or to
    give off light rays.

    (1)     Note.  The illumination may be associated with the apparatus to
    lure fish to the vicinity of the catching or gathering device and need not
    directly illuminate such device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for signal devices which give off light rays when actuated.

    113     and 139, for insect traps having illuminating features.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 541+ for illuminated
    and luminous signs.

    362,    Illumination, for illuminating devices claiming no significant
    features of fishing apparatus or tackle.


CLS 43/17.6
TXT Devices under subclass 17.5 in the form of an artificial bait or lure
    wherein the light source is in or on the lure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.32+, for lures modified to reflect external light, especially subclasses
    42.33 for transparent lures with reflecting means, and 42.34, for metal
    lure bodies with faceted exterior to produce a multiple reflecting surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 541+ for illuminated
    and luminous signs.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 462.1+ for self luminous articles.


CLS 43/18.1
TXT Rod:

    Apparatus under subclass 4 usually in the form of a rod or pole (1) of such
    length or shape as to facilitate or promote handling a fishing line for
    casting or for playing a fish, or (2) having the line attached or supported
    in such a manner as to take advantage of the elasticity or "spring" of the
    rod or pole.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses include fishing rods, per
    se, and also attachments therefor not elsewhere classified.

    (2)     Note.  Joints for fishing rods are classified in the appropriate
    joint class unless more of the rod is included than is structurally
    necessary to define the joint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    for automatic hooking devices frequently including a rod.

    17,     for signal devices frequently including a rod.

    27.4,   for fixed support line handling means other than rods.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclasses 65+ for rodlike canes.

    231,    Whips and Whip Apparatus, subclasses 2 and 3 for rodlike whips.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 223+ for a fishing
    reel, per se, and subclasses 345+ for a hand-held reeling device of general
    use.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, appropriate subclasses especially
    subclasses 399+ for socket type joints, wherein the joint involves
    significant internal wall structure of one of the coupled members; see (2)
    Note above, for the line with Class 43.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses, for rod joints and
    connections in general; see (2) Note above, for the line with Class 43.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, particularly subclasses
    364+ for a stock material product in the form of a rod, strand or fiber
    which is either coated, or has similar structure.


CLS 43/18.5
TXT Fiber glass or graphite fishing rod:

    A rod or pole under subclass 18.1 formed or made from material having a
    portion thereof utilizing (1) a spun glass fiber or (2) a graphite fiber,
    particle or strand as a structural component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for a fiber glass or graphite fishing rod having specific details
    of the handle or butt portion being claimed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, particularly subclasses
    364+ for a stock material product in the form of rod, strand or fiber which
    is either coated, or has similar structure.


CLS 43/19
TXT Fishing-rods under subclass 18.1 having means for automatically expelling
    or feeding the fishing-line at the will of the operator, so that the line
    is dropped at the desired spot in the water.  Includes also automatic means
    which may not only cast the line, but may also draw it in after the fish
    has hooked itself--i.e., where there is no automatic hooking of the fish.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for spring-revolved reels which reel in a fish-line and which may
    unreel it in addition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, for mechanical projecting devices,
    per se, appropriate subclasses.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 223+ for rods having
    spring-operated reels integral therewith, which merely rewind a cast line.


CLS 43/19.2
TXT Fishing rods under subclass 18.1, having means other than or in addition to
    mere line reeling means coacting with the rod to rotate, reciprocate, or
    move the line or rod and line in such a manner as to impart motion to a
    bait or lure attached to the line; the motion imparting means may be
    actuated by the reeling means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for line trajecting or casting means.

    21,     for motor operated reels.

    42.11+  and 42.46, for lures or artificial baits rotating as a unit and
    possibly rotating or twisting the line.

    43.13,  for line-attached bodies reacting with the surrounding fluid media
    to control or prevent rotation of the fishing line.


CLS 43/20
TXT Improvements relating to fishing-rods under subclass 18.1 having a portion
    modified structurally to receive a reel, which is built in or otherwise
    made a permanent integral part of the rod. Frequently the reel is turned by
    hand operated mechanism forming a part of the rod.  Mere reels and
    improvements directed to detachable line winders are not included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for automatic reels which are used in a fish-catching apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 625 for
    driers having winding reels.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 223+ for a fishing reel
    adapted to be mounted on an unspecified rod, and subclasses 386+ for a reel
    of general use which may include fishing.


CLS 43/21
TXT Rods under subclass 20 whose reel-section includes a spring or other motor,
    which turns the built-in integral reel to rewind the line upon the reel
    after it has been cast.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for rods which impel a fishing-line outwardly to make a "cast"
    which, however, do not depend on a reel for the throwing of the line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 225 and 250+ for reels,
    per se.


CLS 43/21.2
TXT Fishing rods under subclass 18.1 having means for supporting, steadying, or
    holding the rod other than, or in addition to the usual handle portion on
    the rod.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+     and 17, for fishing rod holders including features for automatic
    hooking of fish and for signalling a strike or bite, respectively.

    23,     for fishing rod handles or butts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclass 200 for body or belt attached supports for fishing rods.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 511+ for a supporting device having means for
    receiving a staff, which may be a fishing pole or rod. However, this
    subclass (21.2) is proper if the supported member has a nonstaff-like
    feature (e.g., a finger grip, reel mount, etc.), common to a fishing rod
    and which feature the supporting device must cooperate.


CLS 43/22
TXT Modification of fishing-rods under subclass 18.1 which permit a reel to be
    detachably mounted thereon.

    (1)     Note.  Unless the reel-mount is the essence of the invention or
    unless the mount is designed specially for fishing rods the patent is not
    classified in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclass 316 for reels, per se.


CLS 43/23
TXT Fishing-rods under subclass 18.1 where the invention is confined to the
    handle or butt or to the modification of the butt, by which the latter is
    united to the rod, where such modification is peculiar to fishing-rods and
    not to rods in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 448+ for attaching the
    eyelets to or otherwise winding on a fishing rod.


CLS 43/24
TXT Devices under subclass 18.1 for guiding the line as it moves along the
    fishing-rod and for guiding and easing the strain on the line where it
    leaves the rod at the tip thereof.  Mere antifriction devices for guiding
    lines not peculiar to fishing rods are excluded.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclass 196.1 for a
    passive guide combined with a material feeder.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 157+ for line guiding
    means of general utility, and particularly subclasses 158+ for line guide
    traverse mechanism.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 389+ for a device or a member intended to guide a moving cable;
    the cable is attached to or supports an object being pulled by the cable
    from one position or location to another.


CLS 43/25
TXT Miscellaneous attachments for fishing-rods under subclass 18.1 not
    classifiable elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclass 442 for a handheld device
    for winding an article and subclasses 448+ for a particular holder for
    holding an article being wound.


CLS 43/25.2
TXT Devices under subclass 25 functioning to (1) support the line, hook, lure,
    and/or any line-attached body for purposes of facilitating transportation
    of the rod, or (2) to provide convenient stowage for hooks, lures, bait,
    and other articles used in or on fishing tackle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for catch or bait holders not adapted for attachment to a fishing
    rod.

    57.1+,  for holders for flies and hooks when not adapted for attachment to
    a fishing rod.


CLS 43/26
TXT Covers and containers peculiarly adapted to hold the sections of jointed
    fishing-rods, and sometimes other fishing equipment as well, such as reels,
    tackle, etc., under subclass 18.1.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, appropriate subclasses for similar
    cases or holders.


CLS 43/26.1
TXT Apparatus under subclass 4 with relatively movable parts which are actuated
    by a motor.

    (1)     Note.  The term "motor", as used here, includes electric, spring,
    fluid, or other motors, and mechanisms for deriving energy from the
    relative motion of the surrounding media and transmitting it through shafts
    or relatively movable parts to move the apparatus or part of it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for motor-operated duck decoys.

    6.5,    for motorized devices for catching or gathering fish and conveying
    them to a boat.

    7+,     for motorized netting apparatus.

    18.1+,  for fishing rods including motor means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclass 158 for a motor-operated aquatic
    figure toy.


CLS 43/26.2
TXT Devices under subclass 26.1 in the form of an artificial bait or lure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.11+, 42.19+, 42.46, and 42.51, for lures shaped or provided with fins or
    vanes directly secured thereto to cause rotation of the whole lure or a
    part thereof as it is drawn through the water.


CLS 43/27.2
TXT Apparatus under subclass 4 having a standing line extending from the angler
    to a remote anchor or securing point and including means to run a catching
    or gathering device along the standing line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17.2,   for line or lure releasing devices including a line guided device
    which runs along the line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 400+ for trolley type cable-operated
    dredging or excavating apparatus.


CLS 43/27.4
TXT Apparatus under subclass 4 having line attached catching or gathering means
    and means for mounting said line on a support, said line being accessible
    to the fisherman for handling and securing.

    (1)     Note.  The support must be something other than a fisherman, such
    as a boat or the ground, etc.

    (2)     Note.  The apparatus must be intended to be used while actively
    engaged in a fishing operation as paying out or pulling in the line.

    (3)     Note.  If the apparatus is a holder which is intended to be used
    while actively fishing and also for transportation or storage,
    classification in subclass 27.4 results if the means for mounting the line
    on a support is claimed, otherwise classification is subclasses 54.5+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18.1+,  for fishing rods, and especially 21.2 for steadying or supporting
    means for rods.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 223+ for a fishing reel
    and subclasses 370+ for a reeling device in general use.


CLS 43/34
TXT Devices under subclass 4 having at least one hook or hook-like device
    mounted on a base or supporting part in a nonhooking or housed position for
    movement relative thereto to hooking position and including means for
    causing the relative motion.

    (1)     Note.  The motion causing means may comprise hooks biased to
    operative position and having catch or other releasable means holding the
    hook in inoperative position.

    (2)     Note.  Hook apparatus including means and arrangements guarding
    against the catching or snagging of plant growth, rocks, etc., usually
    called "guarded" or "weedless" devices are classified below except when the
    apparatus includes means for moving a hook as defined above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for apparatus for automatically hooking fish, which apparatus does
    not depend on the structure of a hook to function.

    42.1,   for artificial bait lures made of flexible material for housing or
    protecting the hook and being compressible or collapsible to allow fish to
    be hooked upon taking the bait.

    42.4+,  for artificial bait lures having guarded or weedless hook
    arrangements, and see (2) Note above.

    43.2+,  for guarded and weedless hook arrangements and see (2) Note.

    81,     for impaling or smiting traps with swinging striker.

    89,     for trap-hooks of the closing-jaw type.


CLS 43/35
TXT Trap-hooks under subclass 34 usually of the spring-actuated type, which are
    combined with and form an integral part of an artificial bait.  The
    invention here resides in the trapping feature and not primarily in the
    artificial bait.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42+,    for artificial bait.

    42.4+,  for artificial bait having hook-guards.


CLS 43/36
TXT Spring-actuated trap-hooks under subclass 34 comprising two or more hooks
    normally held close together and tending to spread apart from each other to
    snag or catch a fish biting at the same.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     for artificial bait having trap hooks combined therewith.

    77,     for impaling or smiting traps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclass 302 for expanding pliers and tongs.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 93+ for
    expanding grapples.


CLS 43/37
TXT Trap-hooks under subclass 34 actuated only by a pull, either from the fish
    or from the fisherman, or both, and not by a spring or weight.  The
    trap-hooks in this subclass comprise, usually, a baited hook and a pivoted
    snagging-hook.


CLS 43/41
TXT Bait-holders under subclass 4 designed to protect live or food type bait so
    as to conserve the bait for prolonged use as in repeated casting or
    successive strikes.

    (1)     Note.  These holders may be in the form of a harness, case, netting
    or the like for live bait such as frogs and minnows, or may be holders for
    edible bait which allow the fish to smell or taste the bait without eating
    it. Edible bait in an inedible bait holder of wrapper, cloth sack or the
    like form are here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44.99,  for bait distributors or chumming devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclass 1 for edible baits and processes relating to same.


CLS 43/41.2
TXT Bait holders under subclass 41 which protect the bait during the cast but
    permit it to become free and unguarded after the bait is in the water.


CLS 43/42
TXT Artificial or imitation bait under subclass 4 designed to attract fish and
    catch or aid in catching the same.  Such lures frequently look like, or
    when moved through the water, take on the appearance of live bait.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17.4,   for lures with movable parts which are actuated by a motor.

    17.6,   for lures which give off a light by illuminating means within or
    adjacent to the body.

    35,     for lures with trap hooks.

    41,     for fishing lures in the form of containers for live bait and/or
    fish food frequently having the external appearance of artificial bait.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclass 1 for edible baits and processes relating to same.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 153+ for aquatic figure toys
    and subclasses 268 for figure toys.

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, appropriate subclasses for artificial members for
    living bodies.


CLS 43/42.02
TXT Lures under subclass 42 with movable body parts or attracting means which
    are actuated by a surge of the fishing line and which are biased to return
    to their original position when the line is given slack.

    (1)     Note.  The biasing means must be in addition to the natural
    resilience of parts and may be afforded by springs, buoyant members, etc.
    It does not include mere gravity return of pivoted or flexible parts except
    when there is a relatively movable connection between the line and the part
    or between the part and a return weight.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.03,  for constant line pull actuated parts which are shifted to and fro
    by a vane which is turned at each shift to oppose the fluid current
    prevailing in the changed direction of the lure, and thus returned to its
    previous position, where it is again opposed as the lure again changes
    direction.

    42.11+, 42.19+, 42.46, and 42.51, for baits having vanes effective to cause
    rotation when the lure is drawn through water.  The vanes may comprise the
    entire lure or part thereof or be rigidly attached thereto.

    42.22,  for rudder type vanes which may be attached in more than one
    relation to the body to give the lure a different course through the water.

    42.47,  for rudder type vanes rigidly attached to solid body baits to
    influence the path taken through the water in response to a pull on the
    line.

    43.4,   for line operated hook guards.


CLS 43/42.03
TXT Lures under subclass 42 having vanes, bodies or body parts operated by
    continuous movement through the water to swing or flex from side to side by
    the pressure of the water on them each time the lure changes its direction,
    causing the lure to turn immediately in the opposite direction, the lure
    being thereby given a wobbling motion.

    (1)     Note.  The directing member may be either a pivotally connected
    vane or a flat member pivotally mounted at or near its ends so that the
    center part is flexed back and forth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.02,  for lures having parts which shift in response to a pull on the
    line and which have means to return them to the first position when the
    pull is released.

    42.15+, for pivotally connected rigid bodies or body parts which have
    wobbling motion.

    42.47,  for solid body lures with rigidly connected vanes or plates.


CLS 43/42.04
TXT Lures under subclass 42 with a shiftable body, body part, or hooks which
    are normally held in one position either by releasable detents, friction,
    or the pull of the line, but which are actuated and moved relative to one
    another upon the strike of a fish, either to free the hook from the lure or
    separate it enough so that the fish can be held securely.

    (1)     Note.  Hooks releasably held adjacent to the lure body to be
    shifted by the strike of a fish are included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for lures with trap hooks.

    42.1,   for flexible body hook guards which collapse on strike.

    42.4+,  for lures having weed guards relatively movable with respect to the
    bait.


CLS 43/42.05
TXT Lures under subclass 42.04 loosely and slidably mounted on the line or hook
    and line connector to allow the lure body to move away from the hook or
    hooks.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.08,  for lures relatively movable on a line or hook connector for
    shielding the hook and line connection to prevent accidental separation of
    the hook.

    42.36,  for hook to line connections fixed relative to lure.


CLS 43/42.06
TXT Lures under subclass 42 which (1) give off, in their passage through the
    water, an attracting material originally contained within or on the body,
    and/or (2) which have an inlet and outlet for the passage therethrough of
    water through which the lure is moving.

    (1)     Note.  The attracting material given off may be a colored liquid, a
    scent, gas bubbles produced by chemical action, etc.

    (2)     Note.  The water passage through the lure may produce such effects
    as diving, spinning, guiding, bubbling, movement of flexible parts, etc.,
    or aid in the dissemination of the attracting material.

    (3)     Note.  Those flat bodies, such as spoons, which are apertured for
    the flow there through of water, the apertures having no other function,
    such as spinner, line or hook receiving, are included in this subclass.

    (4)     Note.  The channel for the passage of water through a solid body
    not giving off an attracting material must be closed at least in part, not
    a mere groove, though it may be a groove with a closure plate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for bait bodies containing food or live bait and having means for
    the passage of water therethrough.

    42.05,  for bait bodies slidably mounted on a line or hook.

    42.12,  for relatively rotatable body members, one mounted in an aperture
    or passage in the other.

    42.36,  for bait bodies apertured only for the passage of a line, hook,
    and/or hook connector there through.

    42.45+  and 42.5+, for plugs and spoons, respectively, which produce a
    bubbled wake in their passage through the water.


CLS 43/42.08
TXT Lures under subclass 42 in which (1) the lure must be shifted relative to
    the hook connection to give access to the hook holding means before the
    hook can be disconnected, or (2) the means for holding the line on the lure
    and the means for holding the hook on the lure are so interrelated that one
    must be moved from operative position before the other can be removed or
    disengaged from the lure or operated to release the hook or line held by it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.22,  for lures manually adjustable to give any one of a number of
    effects or degree of effects in the water, such as diving, wobbling, etc.

    42.49,  for lures equipped with line attaching means other than mere eyes
    or holes at the extremity of the lure.


CLS 43/42.09
TXT Lures under subclass 42 which have interchangeable lure parts for the
    substitution of parts of different form, color, etc., or means permitting
    ready interchange of such parts.

    (1)     Note.  Disconnectable or shiftable body parts for the attachment of
    various attracting elements and bodies with multiple covers which are
    removable and expendable are included in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Patents in which the entire bait is removably mounted on the
    line, hook, or other support, or in which an auxiliary lure, such as a
    spinner or pork rind, is detachably connected to the main lure, have been
    classified on the basis of the particular mounting or bait form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.29,  for detachable bait strips, such as pork rinds.  See (2) Note.

    42.38,  for baits detachably mounted on a hook.  See (2) Note.


CLS 43/42.1
TXT Lures under subclass 42 which are made of a flexible material and which
    either house the hook or protect it by preceding and/or shielding the hook
    points or barbs.  The bait is compressible or collapsible to allow fish to
    take the hook.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.24+, for flexible appendages for lures which may also have the effect of
    guarding the hook.

    42.4+,  for lures having auxiliary guarding members which are not of a
    nature to attract fish, and especially subclass 42.41 for rigid bodies
    having a hook or hook point lying in a slot or indentation in the body.


CLS 43/42.11
TXT Lures under subclass 42 comprising a plurality of lures all connected to a
    single line or to each other, or a plurality of rigid lure members movably
    connected to one another.

    (1)     Note.  Plural lures comprise only (1) plural duplicate complete
    lures, or (2) plural lures, two or more of which have at least one lure
    member of rigid material.

    (2)     Note.  The rigid members may or may not be body simulating parts,
    and may be of solid form, spoon-like, in shape of an impeller with
    oppositely directed blades; e.g., spinners, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.09,  for interchangeable or disconnectable body parts.

    42.24+, for lure bodies with flexible appendages and rigid lures associated
    more remotely with flexible lures, such as pork rinds. See (1) Note.


CLS 43/42.12
TXT Lures under subclass 42.11 comprised of plural members, at least one lying
    within another, one or more of which members are designed to rotate as the
    bait is drawn through the water.

    (1)     Note.  If the inner member or members rotate, their bearings or
    shaft ends or points of attachment must be within the confines of the outer
    body.

    (2)     Note.  If the outer member rotates, it must have bearings or points
    of attachment at both extremities of the inner member or members.

    (3)     Note.  If more than one member rotates, their motion must be
    independent.


CLS 43/42.13
TXT Lures under subclass 42.11 comprising a lure with two or more movably or
    pivotally connected rigid members either offset from the body or attached
    intermediate the ends of the body to rotate or swing about a pivotal
    connection.  The members may be spoons, spinners, or mere vanes or
    appendages.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.26+, for bait bodies with flexible side appendages.

    42.4,   for outrigger type weed guards which do not rotate or swing about
    their connection.


CLS 43/42.14
TXT Lures under subclass 42.11 with a plurality of body parts or elements, two
    or more of which are designed to revolve or rotate independently.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.12,  for plural independently rotating lure members when one lies within
    the confines of the other.

    42.13,  for plural rotating appendages offset from or mounted at the sides
    of the lure, usually wing or fin simulations.


CLS 43/42.15
TXT Devices under subclass 42.11 comprising a plurality of lures or rigid lure
    members movably connected in tandem one behind the other.

    (1)     Note.  The second and succeeding lures or members may be connected
    either to the preceding member, or the members may be connected in
    succession to the line, hook, and/or hook connector.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes multiple solid bodied lures with a
    hinged or pivotal connection between bodies or body parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.02,  for pivotally connected bodies flexed by line surge and biased to
    return to original position.

    42.03,  for pivotally connected directing vanes which move automatically.

    42.11,  for plural lures connected to the line at a single point or plural
    bodies rigidly connected.


CLS 43/42.16
TXT Lures under subclass 42.15, one of the bodies or body parts being freely
    rotatable or revolvable about longitudinal axis, either its own or that of
    the assembly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.19+, for spinning lures rotating about the shaft on which they are
    mounted.

    42.46,  for solid body lures vaned or shaped for spinning.

    42.51,  for spoon type lures vaned or shaped for spinning.


CLS 43/42.17
TXT Lures under subclass 42.16 in which the member which rotates (1) is of
    sheet material form, (2) is mounted on the hook or hook connector, and (3)
    precedes and rotates independently of the other lure members.

    (1)     Note.  The other lure member is usually the main attracting element
    of the lure, such as a plug or spoon or simulation of a live bait as a
    minnow, shellfish, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.19+, for spinners rotatably mounted on a shaft.


CLS 43/42.18
TXT Lures under subclass 42.15 which are constructed of sheet material or
    material the cross-section of which forms a line rather than an area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.24,  for baits of flexible sheet material.

    42.5+,  for spoon type lures.


CLS 43/42.19
TXT Lures under subclass 42 which are attached to a shaft so as to rotate or
    revolve about this shaft in its passage through the water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.11+, for plural lures or lure members, one or more of which may be
    spinning bodies.

    42.5+,  for spoon type lures.


CLS 43/42.2
TXT Lures under subclass 42.19 in which the body is caused to rotate either by
    vanes or blades turned oppositely thereon or by reason of the spiral shape
    of the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.17,  for similar sheet material spinning baits combined with other lures
    or movably connected rigid lure members.

    42.51,  for spoon-type spinning bodies having a spiral shape or oppositely
    turned vanes.


CLS 43/42.21
TXT Lures under subclass 42.2 in which the rotating body has a cross-section
    which forms an area rather than a line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.16,  for similar baits combined with other lures or movably connected
    rigid lure members.

    42.46,  for solid body lures which do not have a central shaft, but rotate
    around their longitudinal axis.


CLS 43/42.22
TXT Lures under subclass 42 with directing parts, buoyancy devices or line
    connections adjustable to vary the path of the bait through the water.
    Diving, guiding, depth below the surface, etc., may be affected.

    (1)     Note.  The adjustments are made manually when the lure is not in
    the water.

    (2)     Note.  Hollow bodies containing variable weights, valved hollow
    bodies into which air or water may be introduced, and adjustable vanes or
    other directing means are included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.03,  for bodies provided with a movable directing vane by which they
    automatically change direction.

    42.15,  for bodies or parts pivotally connected in series which have
    continuous wobbling effect.

    42.31,  for lure bodies containing loose material or objects, the shifting
    of which may cause noise and/or change in the path of the lure.

    42.47,  for bodies having attached thereto a rigid vane susceptible of
    being bent to different positions.


CLS 43/42.23
TXT Lures under subclass 42.22 having an adjustable connection for the line.

    (1)     Note.  The connecting means on the bait can be either a series of
    eyes to which the line can be attached selectively or a means manually
    adjusted to a plurality of positions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for means for attaching hooks and leaders, etc., to lines.

    42.49,  for other special means for attaching lines to lures; i.e., means
    other than apertures at the margin or extremities of the bait or mere
    attached eye forming means.


CLS 43/42.24
TXT Lures under subclass 42 in which either the entire body or a body appendage
    is made of a flexible material.

    (1)     Note.  Lures composed entirely of flexible material as pork rind
    strips, and simulations of worms and other legless live bait are included
    in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.1,   for flexible bodies housing or guarding a hook.

    42.15+, for bodies formed by a plurality of rigid parts movably or
    pivotally connected.


CLS 43/42.25
TXT Lures under subclass 42.24 constructed of flexible materials, such as
    feathers, strands, fibers, etc., secured together or to the shank of a hook
    or other linear support, without the use of lure members of other material.

    (1)     Note.  So-called flies are included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.24,  for lures comprising a single flexible strand or strip.

    42.27,  for solid bodies with flexible wing simulations, many of which
    imitate insects.  See (1) Note.

    42.28   and 42.3, for solid lure bodies with flexible trailing appendages
    which may be composed of strands, feathers, etc.

    42.37,  for other lures mounted on a hook.

    42.53,  for methods of making or putting together flies.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 430+ for a process or
    apparatus for tying flies.


CLS 43/42.26
TXT Lures under subclass 42.24 comprising a body with plural flexible elements
    or appendages attached intermediate its ends.

    (1)     Note.  The device is usually a simulation of live bait with legs,
    fins, or similar members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.13,  for rigid appendages movably attached to the lure body between its
    ends.

    42.3,   for lures with plural rearwardly directed appendages usually
    simulating frogs.  See (1) Note.


CLS 43/42.27
TXT Lures under subclass 42.26 having flexible side attached appendages shaped
    or positioned to simulate wings such as those of an insect.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.13,  for plural movably attached rigid members intermediate the ends of
    a lure body.

    42.25,  for fly type lures constructed solely of fibers, strands, feathers,
    etc., attached to a hook or other support, without lure members of other
    materials.


CLS 43/42.28
TXT Lures under subclass 42.24 comprising a body having one or more elongated
    members of flexible material at or near its rear end to be trailed
    rearwardly in its passage through the water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.15+, for pivotally connected rigid trailing members, especially subclass
    42.1 for spinning tail members.

    42.25,  for lures consisting of strand, fiber or feather members secured
    together or to a support.


CLS 43/42.29
TXT Lures under subclass 42.28, having trailing appendages in the form of
    detachable, flexible strips of material, such as a pork rind.

    (1)     Note.  Bait with holders for such strips are included even if the
    strips are not claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.09,  for interchangeable body parts, where the substitution of parts of
    different appearance is facilitated.

    42.24,  for such strips comprising the entire bait.

    44.2+,  for bait holders and retainers for natural food of fishes.


CLS 43/42.3
TXT Lures under subclass 42.28 comprising a body with two flexible, trailing
    appendages, usually simulating a frog.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.02,  for frog simulations which appear to swim in response to
    intermittent line pull.


CLS 43/42.31
TXT Lures under subclass 42 having (1) means producing a noise during the
    passage of the bait through the water, or (2) material loosely confined on
    or in the body to shift during the changing position of the bait, usually
    to produce a sound effect.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.22,  for lures in which the amount of material or the number of weights
    or bodies can be changed or the weight or body is adjustably secured in
    place.


CLS 43/42.32
TXT Lures under subclass 42 constructed with a special surface or embellished
    in various ways for the attraction of fish.

    (1)     Note.  Features other than or in addition to the basic subject
    matter of the group, which comprises a lure body, whether solid, hollow or
    of sheet material hook and/or line connections, guards and weights, are
    included here; e.g., rigid projections, as eyes, feelers, ears, legs, etc.,
    real or artificial skins covering bait bodies, and other surfaces
    simulating scales, etc., reflectors, which are not mere polished lure
    members, special materials as wire mesh or shells, and multiple layer
    effects, including certain coatings.  Coatings are included only if they
    cover a reflector or pattern or form a patterned effect.

    (2)     Note.  Rigid fins which may be guiding vanes are classified as such
    in succeeding subclasses, even though disclosed as simulations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.24+, for flexible bodies and body appendages which frequently have the
    effect of simulating live bait.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    D22,    Arms, Pyrotechnics, Hunting, and Fishing Equipment, subclasses 126+
    for designs for fish lures.


CLS 43/42.33
TXT Lures under subclass 42.32 with a special attracting body or body surface
    formed by either a transparent coating over an attracting surface or a body
    made of transparent or translucent material with a backing of reflecting
    material or patterned to give an attractive effect.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17.6,   for transparent bodies with luminous means.

    41,     for transparent bodies enclosing live bait.


CLS 43/42.34
TXT Lures under subclass 42.32 having a body (1) formed with a pitted,
    roughened, ridged, etc., surface, for attracting fish, usually by imitating
    the skin of a fish or other live bait or by reflecting light, or (2)
    provided with indentations or projecting members which may be reflectors or
    simulations of eyes, feelers, or similar body parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.02,  for movably attached rigid appendages actuated by line surge and
    with biased reaction.

    42.11,  for movably attached rigid appendages on lure bodies.

    42.24+, for flexible appendages on lure bodies.

    42.45+, for fixed, rigid vanes on solid bodies.

    42.5+,  for fixed, rigid vanes on spoon-type bodies.


CLS 43/42.35
TXT Lures under subclass 42 constructed with a hollow interior for various
    reasons, such as buoyancy, materials and methods of construction, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26.2,   for hollow bodies containing motors to operate the lure or members
    thereof.

    41,     for food containing hollow baits.

    42.06,  for lure bodies having openings or passages for water flow or
    carrying substances to be emitted during use.

    42.07,  for hollow bodies containing luminous substances or illuminating
    means.

    42.1,   for hollow, flexible bodies housing or guarding hooks.

    42.22,  for hollow bodies having means for changing the air, water or
    weight content to adjust buoyancy.

    42.33,  for hollow transparent or translucent bodies containing reflectors
    or ornamental material.


CLS 43/42.36
TXT Lures under subclass 42 having a direct hook to line connection which
    either passes through the body of the lure or is fixedly attached along the
    length of the body.

    (1)     Note.  When the hook to line connector is merely an eye or loop to
    which the lure is also connected, the patent is classified on the
    characteristics of the bait itself.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.05,  for hook and line connections extending through the lure body, the
    body being shiftable along the line or line connector when a strike is made
    or by the pressure exerted by the fish.

    42.08,  for interlocked hook, lure and line connections.

    42.19+, for lure bodies rotatably mounted on a shaft which forms the hook
    to line connection.


CLS 43/42.37
TXT Lures under subclass 42 formed by a body mounted solely on a hook, the hook
    being directly connected to the line or to a leader connected to the line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.1,   for flexible lure bodies mounted on hooks to house or guard the
    same.

    42.25,  for fly type lures made of fibers, strands, feathers, etc., secured
    to a hook shank.


CLS 43/42.38
TXT Lures under subclass 42.37, in which the body is detachably mounted on the
    hook.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.24,  for detachable, flexible bait strips mounted on hook and forming
    the body of the lure.

    42.29,  for detachable bait strips, such as pork rinds, mounted on the lure
    body.

    44.8,   for holders for natural bait mounted on, integral with, or rigidly
    connected to the hook.


CLS 43/42.39
TXT Lures under subclass 42 which have weights as components of or additions to
    the body of the lure, for reasons such as balance, diving, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Lure bodies consisting of a sinker or weight and bodies
    shaped for unbalance are not considered weights in the meaning of this
    subclass.


CLS 43/42.4
TXT Lures under subclass 42 with means or arrangements for guarding the body or
    the hook or both, against the catching or snagging of weeds, marine plant
    growth, submerged logs, or for nonuse, constituted either by multiple hooks
    arranged to guard each other or by the relation of the lure body to the
    hook or by wire or other projecting or opposed elements protecting the lure
    body, hook or hook points.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25.2,   for rod attached hook holders which guard the point of the hook
    while not in use.

    42.04,  for lures with hooks shiftable on strike from a guarded position to
    a position better adapted to hold the hooked fish.

    42.1,   for flexible body hook housing and guarding means.

    42.28+, for lures with flexible trailing means which precede or surround
    the hook and act as a guard.

    43.2,   for guards for hooks and guards for bait holders for natural bait.


CLS 43/42.41
TXT Lures under subclass 42.4 with a weed guard element for the attached hooks
    constructed so the hook or hook point is guarded by being housed within or
    located adjacent to a slot or depression in a lure body.  The hooks are
    either loosely or flexibly attached so they can impale the fish upon its
    strike.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.1,   for hooks guarded by being housed in or closely associated with a
    flexible body.

    42.44,  for hooks pivotally attached to a lure and having motion limiting
    means which tend to keep the hook from becoming entangled with weeds, etc.


CLS 43/42.42
TXT Lures under subclass 42.4 with weed guard elements projecting downwardly to
    guard the hooks or body and hooks against vegetation passing underneath or
    fend the bait off the bottom.


CLS 43/42.43
TXT Lures under subclass 42.42, with weed guards formed by elements projecting
    from a point forward of the hook point, and which substantially close or
    cover the point of the hook.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43.6,   for hooks with hook closing guards.


CLS 43/42.44
TXT Lures under subclass 42 with pivotally attached hooks and means to limit
    the plane or extent of swing of the hooks, as by abutments provided by the
    edges of a recess or slot, or by stops on the hook holding clamp, etc.


CLS 43/42.45
TXT Lures under subclass 42, the cross-section of which is an area rather than
    a line; for example, minnows and blunt nosed bodies such as plugs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.15,  42.16, and 42.17, for such lure members forming one or more members
    of a movably connected series.

    42.21,  for solid body spinners mounted for rotation on a shaft.

    42.35,  for hollow lure bodies.


CLS 43/42.46
TXT Lures under subclass 42.45 of the type in which the main body part either
    is in the form of a spiral or has integral or rigidly attached oppositely
    turned vanes to produce body rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.11+, for plural lures or movably connected rigid body parts, one or more
    of which may be designed to spin.

    42.2,   for spiral bodies or bodies vaned for spinning about a shaft.

    42.51,  for spoon bodies in spiral shape or vaned for spinning.


CLS 43/42.47
TXT Lures under subclass 42.45 in which the body has rigidly attached sheet
    material plates or vanes for diving, guiding, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.22,  for similar plates or vanes adjustably mounted on the lure body.


CLS 43/42.48
TXT Lures under subclass 42.45 in which the lure has the nose and sometimes
    also the body proper formed for producing erratic motion or diving and
    rising when the bait is drawn through the water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.47,  for solid body lures having an attached plate or vane for producing
    erratic motion.


CLS 43/42.49
TXT Lures under subclass 42 adapted (1) for attaching the lure to the line by
    means other than a mere eye or loop on the line or line connector, or a
    mere eye or hole on or in the lure body, or (2) for attaching the lure to
    the line at points other than the margin or extremity of the lure body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.08,  for interlocked line, lure and hook connections.

    42.19,  for lines rotatably mounted or attached to a shaft.

    42.23,  for adjustable or selective lure to line attachments.

    42.36,  for lures having a hook to line connection extending through or
    along the body.

    44.83+, for attaching devices for hooks only.


CLS 43/42.5
TXT Lures under subclass 42, the cross-section of which is a line rather than
    an area, and which have a curved or troughed cross-section in at least one
    plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.18,  for plural lures or movably connected rigid body parts, all of
    sheet material.

    42.19,  for sheet material spinners rotatably mounted on a shaft.


CLS 43/42.51
TXT Lures under subclass 42.5 either in the form of a spiral or with fixed
    oppositely turned vanes to produce body rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.11+, for plural lures or movably connected lure members, one or more of
    which may be vaned or shaped for spinning.

    42.2,   for spiral bodies or bodies with oppositely turned vanes for
    spinning about a shaft.

    42.46,  for solid bodies in spiral shape or vaned for spinning.


CLS 43/42.52
TXT Lures under subclass 42.5 in which the hook or hooks are attached rigidly
    or for nonpivoted movement, or in which the hook or hooks are attached at a
    point inward from the margin of the spoon.


CLS 43/42.53
TXT Methods of making and constructing lures under subclass 42 not otherwise
    classified.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles: Manufacturing, appropriate subclasses, for methods of
    preparing strands, fibers, and other materials which could be used to form
    bodies or body parts of lures.

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 9 for machines and processes for making
    fishhooks.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, appropriate subclasses
    especially subclass 362 for methods of covering or wrapping materials which
    could be used to form the body of a lure or cover it.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for laminating methods of covering lure bodies.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 439+ for winding an
    article by orbiting an elongated material about the article and subclasses
    443+ for winding an article by rotating the article, which winding may be
    for the purpose of snelling a fishing hook, making an artificial lure, or
    holding a hook or lure during winding.

    300,    Brush, Broom, and Mop Making, appropriate subclasses for methods
    and machines for making brushes, brooms, and the like, generally involving
    arranging the fastening fibers, feathers, and the like.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclass 1 for edible baits and processes relating to same.


CLS 43/42.7
TXT Apparatus under subclass 4 having a plurality of hooks or tines arranged on
    a rigid support or mounting means in such a way as not to be taken into the
    mouth of the fish, but to snag or pierce the body of the fish or shell fish.

    (1)     Note.  Shellfish, sponges, etc., may be taken by these rigs.  In
    the case of shellfish, the tines may enter the open shell to be gripped
    thereby.

    (2)     Note.  There may be bait or lures associated with the device, but
    it is not "set" in the usual manner in the mouth of a fish.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43.16+, for hooks, and particularly subclass 44.82, for those having plural
    piercing points adapted to be taken into or "set" in the mouth of a fish.


CLS 43/42.72
TXT Line fishing apparatus under subclass 4 having a resilient element or
    organization usually in the hook or line to absorb shocks and ease the
    stresses on the tackle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18.1+,  for fishing rods having resilient features.


CLS 43/42.74
TXT Line fishing apparatus under subclass 4 utilizing a plurality of hooks or
    hook-carrying lines and having means functioning to keep the hooks or lines
    spaced apart from each other to prevent or minimize fouling of the rig.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27.4,   for a "set" or "trawl" line carrying a plurality of hooks or hooked
    lines.


CLS 43/43.1
TXT Fishing apparatus under subclass 4 including (1) devices attachable to and
    usable on fishing lines to perfect or promote control of the line or
    capture of the fish, and (2) line rigs or outfits utilizing such devices.

    (1)     Note.  The term "attach" as used herein is intended to be generic
    to "affix" but the latter term is used with the connotation of securing or
    non-movably attaching.

    (2)     Note.  Hooks, sinkers, floats, guiding vanes, stops and similar
    means which are employed on the line during the fishing operation are
    included in the term "devices".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    for fishing floats and other line attached bodies which include
    automatic hooking features.

    42+,    for artificial lures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., appropriate subclasses particularly
    subclass 115, for fasteners, per se, used for line end or leader end
    connections.

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclass 95 for fishing
    swivels having simple loops or hooks for line connections; other swivels
    which include a specific fastener are found in Class 24, in the appropriate
    fastener subclasses.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 305+ for float type gauges
    functioning solely to measure liquid level or depth.


CLS 43/43.11
TXT Line attached bodies under subclass 43.1 having a reel or other line
    storing means.

    (1)     Note.  The line may be the main fishing line or may be a separate
    line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    for automatic hooking devices which may include a line-storing
    float.


CLS 43/43.12
TXT Line attached bodies under subclass 43.1 so constructed or so connected to
    the line as to release the entire body or a separable portion thereof from
    attachment with the line without any direct manual handling of the body.

    (1)     Note.  The release may be caused by contact with the water, as by
    frangible or water soluble means or by a pull or strain on the line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.04+, for artificial baits, shiftable or releasable on strike.

    44.88,  for bodies releasable from fixed to sliding connection with the
    line in response to line motion or strain.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 572+ for separable
    fastening devices, per se.


CLS 43/43.13
TXT Line attached bodies under subclass 43.1 having vanes, or otherwise shaped
    or arranged, to react with the water upon relative motion thereto to guide
    or control the line as to depth, direction, or twist about the axis of the
    line.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes line rigs having pendulous weights so
    arranged as to control axial twist of the line or rig; these are usually
    associated with a swivel in the line.

    (2)     Note.  Swivel devices, per se, are excluded and will be found in
    the appropriate fastening or coupling class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.11+, 42.19+, and 42.45+, for artificial baits shaped for spinning or
    irregular motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., see (2) Note.

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, see (2) Note.

    403,    Joints and Connections, see (2) Note, above.


CLS 43/43.14
TXT Bodies under subclass 43.1 having means for adjusting or varying the weight
    and/or buoyancy of the body.

    (1)     Note.  Frangible sinkers are included where the tearing or breaking
    is for the purpose of adjusting the weight to be attached to the line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.22,  for artificial baits having means for adjusting weight, buoyancy or
    position of the lure body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 406+, and particularly
    subclass 414 for means for adjusting the buoyancy of a submarine mine.


CLS 43/43.15
TXT Apparatus under subclass 43.1 including a plurality of bodies separately
    attached to a line or strand, the bodies being of diverse types.

    (1)     Note.  The bodies may be formed in the line, as knots, and may
    include arrangements such as a sliding body on the line and a knot in the
    line acting as a stop.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42+,    for similar combinations where one of the elements is an artificial
    lure.

    44.81,  for weighted hooks where the sinker is formed with the hook and the
    assembly has a single point of attachment to the line.

    44.82,  for hooks with plural piercing points which may include a plurality
    of individual hooks assembled into a unitary device or body.


CLS 43/43.16
TXT Line fishing apparatus under subclass 43.1 having devices usually in the
    form of a hook with a pointed bill arranged to be connected to the line or
    to a lure and adapted to be engaged in the mouth of a fish to permit the
    capture of the fish.

    (1)     Note.  So-called "crab hooks" which usually have means for
    retaining a bait and which depend on the tenacity of the grip of the crab
    rather than being engaged in its mouth are excluded from this and the
    indented subclasses and will be found in subclass 43.1 above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for gaff hooks guided by the fishing line to "gaff" a fish caught
    on a line attached hook.

    6,      for harpoons and spears.

    34+,    for trap hooks and see the definition and notes to that subclass
    for the line.

    42.7,   for snagging or jigging hook devices.

    43.1+,  see (1) Note.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 26 for fish
    gaff hooks.


CLS 43/43.2
TXT Fishing hooks under subclass 43.16 with means and arrangements guarding
    against the catching or snagging of weeds, marine plant growth, submerged
    logs, etc., constituted, for example, by single and multiple wire elements
    preceding or adjacent to the hooks and arrangements of multiple hooks to
    guard each other.

    (1)     Note.  Certain of these are known as "weedless", hooks.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25.2,   for rod attached hook holders which guard the point of the hook
    when not in use.

    35,     for trap-hooks which act as guards.

    42.1,   for flexible bait body hook guarding means.

    42.4+,  for artificial baits combined with guards.

    43.15,  for plural diverse separately attached members one being a hook and
    the other a nonuse guard.

    57.1+,  for guards or like elements to house an individual hook or fishing
    fly when not in use.


CLS 43/43.4
TXT Fishing hooks under subclass 43.2 with weed guarding means (1) constituted
    by an elastic, collapsible element extending from the shank of the hook to
    cover the hook point, (2) having a shiftable connection between the guard
    and the hook allowing them to slide bodily relative to each other on a
    strike of a fish, or (3) having means whereby the pull on the line operates
    to shift the guard.


CLS 43/43.6
TXT Fishing hooks under subclass 43.2 which are guarded against the snagging of
    weeds, etc., by a single wire or similar element extending from adjacent
    the shank of the hook to substantially cover or close the point of the hook.

    (1)     Note.  Some of these guards serve also to retain the bait on the
    hook.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.43,  for hook closing guards combined with artificial baits.

    44.2+,  especially subclass 44.8 for means closing the hook to retain bait
    thereon but not so placed as to make the hook a "weedless" type.  See (1)
    Note.


CLS 43/44.2
TXT Modifications of and attachments to hook structure under subclass 43.16
    designed to hold bait in place.  If the bait is live, the device is
    designed to maintain it in a natural position in that state.

    (1)     Note.  The baits are either the natural food of fish or are actual
    foods which are intended to be eaten by the fish and do not include natural
    materials which, while possessing flavor and the possibility of food use,
    are intended to remain on the line indefinitely, as pork rinds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for foods baits which are substantially entirely enclosed in a
    retaining device.

    42.24+, for flexible artificial baits or appendages to artificial baits
    which, in many cases, are pork rinds or other artificial foods of fishes.
    See (1) Note.


CLS 43/44.4
TXT Bait holders and retainers under subclass 44.2 in which at least one
    element substantially encircles the bait and holds or assists in holding it
    on the hook or hook connectors.  Additional bait holding means of other
    types may also be provided on the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for baits enclosing live bait or other natural food of fishes.


CLS 43/44.6
TXT Bait holders and retainers under subclass 44.2 comprising separable members
    which receive the bait between them and which are either resiliently biased
    to closing position clasping the bait or are held in closed relationship by
    a latch, slide, or other equivalent device.  The members may or may not
    have penetrating points.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for trap hooks comprising two or more hooks normally held close
    together and tending to spread apart from each other to snag a fish biting
    at the same, where bait could be held between the hooks.

    44.4,   for opposed clasping bodies which substantially encircle the bait.


CLS 43/44.8
TXT Bait holders and retainers under subclass 44.2 comprising a hook which has
    bait retaining means integral therewith or movably or rigidly mounted
    thereon, said means usually consisting of a movable hook opposing member, a
    clasp, a prong, point, or second hook, and the bait having no other support
    except the fishhook.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.29,  for artificial baits with means for holding a detachable flexible
    bait strip, such as pork rind.

    43.6,   for resilient or guarded hooks in which a member opposed to the
    point of the hook may also serve as a bait retainer.


CLS 43/44.81
TXT Fishing hooks under subclass 43.16 having a weight or sinker attached
    thereto.

    (1)     Note.  The weight may be used to fasten together the associated
    parts of a hook.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43.13,  for hooks with weights in the form of vanes or otherwise shaped or
    arranged to guide the hook or control twist thereof in trolling.


CLS 43/44.82
TXT Hooks under subclass 43.16 having more than one point for piercing the
    mouth of the fish.

    (1)     Note.  The hook may have only one shank or may comprise a plurality
    of individually complete hooks intimately associated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.7,   for snagging or jigging devices not intended to be taken into the
    mouth of the fish.


CLS 43/44.83
TXT Hooks under subclass 43.16 including means for rigging or attaching to a
    line or leader.

    (1)     Note.  Mere swivels or fastening devices adapted to be serially
    connected in a fishing line are classified in the appropriate outside class
    where there provided for, with the exception of the special types set out
    in the indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., particularly subclasses 369+ for
    double-ended or multiple type fasteners, and  subclasses 598.4+ for a snap
    hook type separable - fastener, and see (1) Note for the line.

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclass 95 for mere swivels
    having eyes or open hooks for line attachment and see (1) Note for the line.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 439+ for winding an
    article by orbiting an elongated material about the article and subclasses
    443+ for winding an article by rotating the article, which winding may be
    for the purpose of snelling a fishing hook, making an artificial lure, or
    holding a hook or lure during winding.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclass 164 for a swivel wherein a rod or
    strand end forms a part of the swivel joint.


CLS 43/44.84
TXT Connections under subclass 44.83 for connecting hooks laterally into the
    fishing line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 115+ for other cord and
    rope holders, some of which might be useful for connecting hooks laterally
    into a fishing line.


CLS 43/44.85
TXT Connections under subclass 44.84 wherein the point of attachment to the
    line is adjustable along the line.

    (1)     Note.  The connection is considered to be adjustable even though it
    requires that the connection be undone in order that it may be moved,
    provided however that the undoing requires no cutting of lines or untying
    of knots in the line. Usually the line is merely looped or laced or led
    through a tortuous path.


CLS 43/44.86
TXT Hook connections under subclass 44.83 in which the hook shank or some part
    of its connecting devices is gripped by a chuck or is otherwise secured by
    a sleeve or ring element which moves to grip or enclose some part of the
    fastening to prevent displacement or separation of the elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 126 and 136 for cord and
    rope connectors or holders in which the rope is gripped by a sliding collar
    on a tapering member, and subclasses 598.4+ for a snap hook type separable
    - fastener.


CLS 43/44.87
TXT Line attached bodies under subclass 43.1 so constructed and arranged that
    (1) by change in position or addition, deletion, or substitution of parts,
    or (2) by change in the rigging thereof on the line, relative motion
    between the body and the line may be selectively permitted or prevented.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.04+, for artificial baits shifting relative to the line on the strike of
    a fish.

    43.12,  for line attached bodies wherein the whole or any separable part
    thereof may be released from attachment to the line.


CLS 43/44.88
TXT Line attached bodies under subclass 44.87 wherein a strain imposed on the
    line or motion imparted to the line functions to actuate an affixing
    connection between the line and the body.

    (1)     Note.  The connection may be actuated by contact of the body with
    the tip of a fishing rod as the line is reeled in.

    (2)     Note.  The affixing connection may be actuated to grip or to
    release the line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 315 for float type gauges
    functioning solely to measure liquid level or depth and provided with means
    to lock the float against motion.


CLS 43/44.89
TXT Bodies under subclass 43.1, usually sinkers wherein the line attachment is
    effected by bending or deforming the body or some part thereof, the
    material of which is not resiliently elastic and tends to remain in the
    bent or deformed position.


CLS 43/44.9
TXT Bodies under subclasses 43.1+ having an opening through the center thereof,
    usually axially of an elongated body, for the passage of the line
    therethrough.

    (1)     Note.  The opening may be in the form of a hole or bore, or may be
    in the form of a slot or kerf if the slot provides a line passage at the
    center or axis of the body.


CLS 43/44.91
TXT Bodies under subclass 44.9 having means effective to grip the line to affix
    the body thereto.

    (1)     Note.  These bodies usually are floats or "fishing bobs".


CLS 43/44.92
TXT Bodies under subclass 43.1 having two or more parts relatively movable one
    to another, or having resilient material which is temporarily deformed to
    effect the attachment to the line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44.9,   for bodies with relatively movable parts or resilient construction
    wherein the line passes through the center of the body.


CLS 43/44.93
TXT Bodies under subclass 44.92 wherein one of the movable parts is a wedge or
    ring type element and is arranged to effect the attachment of the body to
    the line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44.91,  for bodies wherein the line passes through the center of the body
    and a movable or resilient part engages the line to affix the body to the
    line.


CLS 43/44.94
TXT Bodies under subclass 44.92 having a stem extending therefrom and means in
    the form of a coil, spiral, or pigtail usually of resilient wire
    surrounding the stem whereby the line may be manipulated to lie between the
    stem and the coil means to effect the attachment of the body to the line.


CLS 43/44.95
TXT Bodies under subclass 44.92 having resilient portions or devices for
    gripping or clamping the line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44.91,  for bodies wherein the line passes through the center of the body
    and a movable or resilient part engages the line to affix the body to the
    line.

    44.94,  for bodies wherein the resilient means is in the form of a coil or
    the like, wrapped around a stem on the body.


CLS 43/44.96
TXT Line attached bodies under subclass 43.1 constructed and arranged to sink
    in the water and to rest on the bottom and having means to engage in the
    material on the bottom; for example, flukes or spikes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclasses 294+ for anchors disclosed for uses other than or
    in addition to fishing.


CLS 43/44.97
TXT Line attached bodies under subclass 43.1 constructed and arranged to sink
    to the bottom of a body of water and having means (1) to prevent or
    minimize fouling or catching on rough bottoms or on marine growth or other
    obstacles, or (2) to permit the effective line attaching point to shift or
    otherwise cause the sinker to tend to free itself from obstacles upon mere
    pulling of the line by the fisherman.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43.12,  for sinkers and the like which are detached from the line when
    caught on an obstacle.


CLS 43/44.98
TXT Apparatus under subclass 4 including determinate lengths of line and the
    like constructed and arranged to promote or facilitate the handling of the
    line and/or fishing rig, as in casting or the catching of fish as by
    "invisible" leaders.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 200+ for a
    twisted or twined strand of indeterminate length.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 364+ for a
    coated or structurally defined strand or filament not specifically provided
    for in another class.


CLS 43/44.99
TXT Apparatus under subclass 4 having provisions for containing a supply of
    food or other material to attract fish and being arranged to discharge or
    diffuse the material into the water.

    (1)     Note.  The line between this subclass and related arts, such as
    dispensers, diffusers, and material containing and handling, is sole
    disclosed use; where the disclosure indicates uses other than for chumming,
    the apparatus will be classified in the appropriate outside class and
    cross-referenced to this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.06,  for artificial bait lures which give off, in their passage through
    the water, an attracting material originally contained within or on the
    body of the lure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass .5 for infusion containing
    receptacles and see (1) Note.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 198.1+ for apparatus
    for adding water purification agents, and see (1) Note.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for dispensers of general use,
    and particularly 630+ for fluid flow discharge type, and see (1) Note.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 34 and see (1)
    Note therein.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 255+ for extracting and leaching
    apparatus, and see (1) Note.


CLS 43/53.5
TXT Devices under subclass 4 for assisting the fisherman in loosening a hook
    from a fish's mouth.  The disgorges classified here are implements designed
    for the single purpose specified and not of general surgical application;
    nor are they parts of combination tools.  Gags are implements for holding
    open a fish's jaw while the hook is being removed.  Only gags specially
    designed for fish are found here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 184+ and 202+ for surgical devices related to
    fish gags.


CLS 43/54.1
TXT Holder:

    Apparatus under subclass 4 comprising a receptacle or support specifically
    designed for use in fishing for holding the catch, bait, tackle, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21.2,   for rod holders, supports or steadying devices.

    25. 2,  for hook and tackle holding attachments for rods.

    26,     for rod cases which may also contain tackle.

    41+,    for enclosed or protected bait holders.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package appropriate subclasses for holders of
    other types of articles.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, appropriate subclasses for holders
    for carrying other types of articles.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, particularly subclasses 188+ for chair or seat
    type devices with holders or receptacles for articles.


CLS 43/55
TXT Holders under subclass 54.1 for (1) live bait holders and natural bait
    holders designed to keep such bait in a fresh condition and (2) holders
    designed to keep alive the fish caught by the angler.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 201+ for aquatic animal handling and
    transportation devices, especially fish trans-  portation.


CLS 43/56
TXT Live-bait holders under subclass 54.1 designed especially for minnows which
    are to serve as bait.  Frequently some means for freshening or aerating the
    water and for protecting the minnows against special harm form a part of
    the invention.  These holders for the most part are adapted to be
    transported over land, as well as placed in water; but in no case is mere
    fish- transporting apparatus included.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 203 for fish transportation included
    under aquatic animal culturing and subclass 263 for an aquarium including
    aerator means.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclass 1 for edible baits and processes relating to same.


CLS 43/57
TXT Buckets under subclass 56 having an air pump attached, designed to
    introduce air into the water contained in the bucket, so as to revivify the
    minnows.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, for aerators of general utility
    even though disclosed for use in minnow buckets where no structure which
    specializes it for use in a minnow bucket is claimed.


CLS 43/57.1
TXT Hook:

    Apparatus under subclass 54.1 wherein the specific receptacle or support is
    for holding a hook or the hook of a lure, fly or snell.

    (1)     Note.  The specific holding means may also guard or protect either
    the hook, the hook of the lure, fly or snell or the user thereof when the
    hook or hook portion is not in actual use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25.2,   for holders attached to the fishing rod which support the hook or
    tackle for facilitating transportation of the rod or storage of the hooks
    or tackle.

    43.2,   for fishing hooks with means and arrangements guarding against the
    catching or snagging of weeds, logs, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 171+ for a head covering in general and
    subclasses 175.1+ for a head covering having a crown and crown encircling
    band; especially, subclass 175.3 for a head covering having a crown, brim,
    and hat band, not specifically designed as holders for use in fishing.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, appropriate subclasses for holders
    not designed for use in fishing.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 106- 109, for holders for sewing
    equipment.


CLS 43/57.2
TXT Holder for snelled hook under tension:
    Apparatus under subclass 57.1 wherein the specific receptacle or support is
    for holding a hook and its attached leader line, i.e., a snelled hook,
    through a pulling, i.e, tensile, force applied thereto or provided therefor.

    (1)     Note.  The tensile force may be applied by either a resilient
    element or portion of the holder or the snelled hook or by a mechanical
    force applying means, e.g., a lever.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force
    particularly subclasses 264+ for apparatus of a more general nature for
    applying tensile force to line or cable.


CLS 43/57.3
TXT Trotline holder:

    Apparatus under subclass 54.1 wherein the specific receptacle or support is
    for holding a relatively long fishing line which has attached along its
    length a plurality of shorter fishing lines with hooks attached to them.


CLS 43/58
TXT Devices under class definition which lure animals not domesticated or take
    advantage of some habit of the same and which by reason of some voluntary
    action on the part of the said animals catch or wound or paralyze or kill
    the same or in general render them helpless, that man may work his will
    upon them.  By "animals" is meant all sentient living organisms which have
    the power of voluntary motion whether mammals, reptiles, fish, birds, or
    insects.  While many traps destroy, they are distinguishable from vermin
    destroyers by the fact that animals approach traps of their own free will,
    whether impelled by curiosity, hunger or habit.  Destroyers seek out the
    animals to exterminate them and force them, in spite of themselves, to
    destruction. Devices in the nature of traps for domestic or farm
    animals--as cattle, poultry, or bees--are not included.  Devices which hold
    animals for the express purpose of releasing the same are not considered to
    be traps within the meaning of the term as here used.  Mere poison-holders,
    although the poison will attract animals, are considered more properly
    classifiable under "Vermin-destroying", which see.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 22 for devices for repelling
    animals, fish, and insects by means of sound waves.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 339+ for poultry trap nests, and
    subclasses 801+ for catching and holding tools.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, appropriate subclasses for trap closure
    fasteners.

    293,    Vehicle Fenders, subclasses 15+ for body and animal catchers and
    retainers for vehicle-fenders.


CLS 43/59
TXT Devices under subclass 58 designed to catch thieves and burglars and
    prevent their escape and having no function additional to entrapping and
    sometimes raising an alarm.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60+     and 64+, for animal-traps which might be used to catch thieves and
    burglars.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, appropriate subclasses for closures
    of the type provided for.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 394 for train-robber-trapping
    devices.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclasses 3+ where
    the trap is manually actuated to release position by an outside
    intelligence; subclass 47 for devices wherein the safe itself is removed
    from the immediate position upon attack by an outside source; and
    subclasses 29+, especially subclasses 31 and 32 for fluid ejecting devices
    to prevent train robberies.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 75- 99 for burglar-alarms if
    mechanically operated.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+ for electric alarms
    which are automatically responsive to a condition.  Note especially
    subclasses 541+ for intrusion detection, and subclass 574 for holdup
    detection.


CLS 43/60
TXT Traps under subclass 58 which capture or make prisoners of animals,
    especially fur-bearing animals, so that they are not harmed or injured in
    any way.  These traps must be set after each capture and are cage-like in
    structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65+,    for nonreturn entrances for self and ever set traps.

    74,     for rotating door or platform for self- reset traps.

    76,     for victim reset traps with special entrance features.


CLS 43/61
TXT Traps under subclass 60 which make captives of animals by the closing of a
    door or the like, which is hinged or is slidable at the trap entrance.  The
    animals usually bring about the movement of the closure by an attempt to
    reach bait.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for rotating door or platform for self- reset traps.

    76,     for special entrance features for victim reset traps.


CLS 43/62
TXT Traps under subclass 60 which comprise an elevated cage-like structure
    adapted to fall and capture the animal when it moves some element of a
    trigger, usually in an effort to reach bait.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for traps having an entrance section which sinks with the victim to
    carry it to a lower level.

    78,     for an elevated striker which descends on the victim with a
    straight line motion.


CLS 43/63
TXT Traps under subclass 60 comprising two jawlike parts movable toward each
    other to inclose and capture the animal, where the jaws do not grip any
    part of the animal's body, but form in the closed position a kind of a cage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for jaw-traps in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    293,    Vehicle Fenders, subclasses 15+ for body or animal grasping devices
    on vehicle fenders.


CLS 43/64
TXT Traps under subclass 58, which because of their peculiar construction are
    not set manually, but reset themselves under the influence of gravity.
    Includes also those traps which catch any number of animals up to the
    capacity of the trap and by reason of their peculiar construction need no
    setting.  These traps unlike imprisoning traps, may capture more than one
    animal and frequently injure or even kill the animal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     where some traps are classified which might be regarded as self and
    ever set, but which are not within the definition of the present subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 348+ for means for separating solids from liquids.

    232,    Deposit and Collection Receptacles, subclasses 47+ for letter box
    traps and subclasses 55+ for coin traps.


CLS 43/65
TXT Traps under subclass 64 having an entrance so made that once the animal is
    inside he finds it impossible to return by that entrance, whether through
    physical impossibility or because of some peculiarity of habit or the like.
     Tilting trap-doors are not regarded as entrances.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100+,   and particularly subclasses 101, 103, and 105, for fish traps
    adapted to be set in water, which are generally characterized by such
    entrances.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    232,    Deposit and Collection Receptacles, subclasses 47+ for letter box
    traps and 55+ for coin traps.


CLS 43/66
TXT Traps under subclass 65 whose entrance is normally closed, as by a gravity
    door or gate, which is opened by the animal's effort to get in the trap and
    which closes behind him, thus capturing him.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for tiltable platform self-set traps. 71 and 74, for rotatable
    platform self and self-reset traps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    232,    Deposit and Collection Receptacles, subclasses 47+ for letter box
    traps and 55+ for coin traps.


CLS 43/67
TXT Traps under subclass 65 whose entrance is normally open to the free passage
    of the animal, but is closed automatically as soon as the animal is within
    the trap.  There is a second entrapping compartment designed to receive the
    animal, which is frightened by his capture in the first compartment.  As
    soon as the animal enters the second compartment or leaves the vicinity of
    the trap entrance the latter resumes its open state; but the arrangement is
    such that if the animal turns back the entrance closes in front of him.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76,     for victim reset traps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    232,    Deposit and Collection Receptacles, subclasses 47+ for letter box
    traps and 55+ for coin traps.


CLS 43/68
TXT Traps under subclass 64 in which the animal as it enters steps into a
    compartment or cage that descends to a lower level because of the weight of
    the animal, thus cutting off his escape, and allows him to leave the
    compartment at a lower level, whereupon the compartment ascends to its
    original position, thus leaving the animal trapped in a cage or otherwise
    disposed of.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for cage-like traps which must be set after each capture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 158 for means for dumping live stock
    into a medicated or disinfecting bath.


CLS 43/69
TXT Traps under subclass 64 including one or more trap-doors or platforms
    normally held in a substantially horizontal position by gravity, springs,
    weights, etc., but capable of tilting under the weight of the animal to
    precipitate the latter into a container below.  These traps are
    distinguishable from the nonreturn-entrance traps having victim-opened
    gates by the fact that here the animals are precipitated into a container
    below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for self-reset traps with a rotating door or platform.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 158 for means for dumping livestock into
    a treating bath.

    232,    Deposit and Collection Receptacles, subclass 47 for letter box
    traps and 55, for coin traps.


CLS 43/70
TXT Traps under subclass 69 in which the platforms are normally held against
    tilting and will not tilt to precipitate the animal until the latter has
    moved some portion of a trigger mechanism, such as a bait-holder, a
    treadle, or the like.  The word "trigger" as here used is given its
    broadest significance to mean any element or group of elements performing
    the functions of a trigger or catch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for similar traps having a rotatable platform.

    74,     for self-reset traps having a rotatable platform.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 158 for means for dumping animals into a
    treating bath.


CLS 43/71
TXT Traps under subclass 64 having a rotatable structure with wings or webs
    forming a plurality of platforms operated by the weight of the animal to
    revolve about a horizontal axis, the arrangement being such that the animal
    is precipitated into a receptacle below, while the rotating structure stops
    only because of friction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for similar self-reset traps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    232,    Deposit and Collection Receptacles, subclasses 60+ for rotatable
    coin traps.


CLS 43/72
TXT Traps under subclass 71 having a trigger mechanism actuated by the animal
    to release the platform on which it stands and to prevent indefinite
    rotation by stopping the rotating element in position to present the
    succeeding platform to the next victim.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for trigger-released trap platforms which merely tilt.


CLS 43/73
TXT Traps under subclass 58 which are originally set by the operator, usually
    by winding up a spring or the equivalent, which are capable of catching a
    number of animals, and which reset themselves without any attention after
    each animal is disposed of.  These traps are distinguishable from self and
    ever set traps by the fact that they must be originally set and that they
    eventually run down, whereupon they must be set again.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76,     for victim reset traps.


CLS 43/74
TXT Traps under subclass 73 having a door rotated on a vertical axis or a
    platform rotated on a horizontal axis by means of a spring or the like.  In
    either case the animal is forced or precipitated into a receiver, from
    which it is prevented from escaping by the closing of the trapdoor or by
    other means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69+,    for self and ever-set traps having a tilting platform.

    71,     for self and ever-set traps having a rotatable platform.


CLS 43/75
TXT Traps under subclass 73 which kill the victim by a sharp blow, usually on
    the head or back.  The blow usually throws the animal clear of the trap or
    else within a receptacle.  This subclass is distinguishable from other
    smiting-traps chiefly by the fact that the traps here are self-reset and
    from other self-reset traps by the fact that the animal is killed by a blow
    and is not captured bodily.  The smiting element in these traps never holds
    the victim, as in the case of other smiting traps.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77+,    for impaling or smiting traps which retain the victim.


CLS 43/76
TXT Traps under subclass 58 which are reset by one victim, so as to be in
    condition to catch the next victim, where the resetting is accomplished
    wholly by the muscular force of the animal or by the weight of the animal's
    body and not by a spring or weight or similar auxiliary power source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73+,    for self-reset traps.


CLS 43/77
TXT Traps under subclass 58 which stun, wound, make helpless, or kill animals
    by delivering a blow, which may or may not impale the animals.  The blow
    which these traps deliver usually comes from above, and the instrument
    which strikes the animal usually holds it fast, so that it cannot escape
    and soon dies.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for smiting traps which do not retain the body of the victim under
    the striking element, though it may be retained in a receptacle.


CLS 43/78
TXT Traps under subclass 77 in which the striker moves in a straight-line path,
    usually being guided and descending by gravity.  The inventions in this
    subclass crush or break the spinal columns of the animals.


CLS 43/79
TXT Traps under subclass 78 whose striker moves in a straight line and pierces
    the flesh of the victim.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34+,    for fish hooks which automatically strike or snag the fish.


CLS 43/80
TXT Traps under subclass 79 peculiarly adapted to trap burrowing animals--as
    gophers, ground-hogs, moles, and the like--as they move along their burrows.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91      and 94, for other traps suitable for use in burrows.


CLS 43/81
TXT Traps under subclass 77 having a striker which swings on an axis in the
    arcuate path, impelled by spring or similar power. The striker is usually
    in the form of a jaw and grips the victim.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 372 for a trip-switch controlling the operation
    of a cutting means of that class (83) type.


CLS 43/81.5
TXT Traps under subclass 81 having devices designed to hold the swinging
    striker of an impaling or smiting trap temporarily in a position to permit
    setting of the elements of the trap in their set positions.


CLS 43/82
TXT Traps under subclass 81 in which the striker is held by a latch engaging
    directly therewith, without intermediate elements, the latch itself being
    moved by the victim either directly or indirectly in its effort to get
    bait, whereupon the striker is released to catch the victim. Unless the
    element moved by the animal touches some part of the striker and helps to
    hold the latter in set position it is not considered to be a
    direct-engaging latch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93,     for similar construction in a jaw trap.


CLS 43/83
TXT Traps under subclass 82 of the direct-engaging latch type in which the
    latch is so made that when the striker is swung back to the set position
    the latch automatically catches or engages with the striker to hold it in
    that position without any aid from the operator.  The inaccurately-styled
    "self-setting" impaling traps are classified here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83.5,   for similarly operated latching elements not of the direct-engaging
    type.

    95,     for similar mechanism in jaw traps.


CLS 43/83.5
TXT Impaling or smiting traps under subclass 81 of swinging striker type having
    means for setting the striker, other than a direct-engaging latch, and in
    which movement of the striker towards set position automatically sets the
    trap without further manipulation by the operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83      and 95, for details of the latching element.


CLS 43/84
TXT Traps under subclass 58 actuated by explosive force to kill animals.  So
    called "trap-guns" are classified here.  These traps either kill the animal
    by means of a bullet or by a striker impelled by the force of an explosive
    charge, usually gun-powder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 200+ for igniting devices to
    set off explosive devices.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 11, 15, 17, 78, 83, and 87 for
    detonating alarms.


CLS 43/85
TXT Traps under subclass 58 which catch the victim by the throat and choke it
    or which catch it by some other portion of the body and hold it with a
    squeezing action, so that it usually dies.  These traps, while structurally
    similar to many smiting-traps having a swinging striker, differ therefrom
    in that they do not kill by a neck-breaking or similar blow, but choke or
    squeeze to death.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81+     and 88+, for traps which might choke or squeeze a victim to death,
    but which are not properly classifiable as mere choking or squeezing traps.


CLS 43/86
TXT Choking or squeezing traps under subclass 85 having a loop of wire or
    similar material, which catches the victim, usually by rising and engaging
    with its throat. "Wire-choker" traps are classified here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     for "movable loops" which deliver a blow, usually upon the spinal
    column.


CLS 43/87
TXT Choking or squeezing traps under subclass 85 in which the victim is held by
    a flexible noose originally expanded when the trap is set and constricted
    about some portion of the victim's body when the trap is sprung.  Many of
    the traps in this subclass merely hold the victim from escape and do not
    work any special injury on the same.


CLS 43/88
TXT Traps under subclass 58 which comprise two jawlike catching elements
    separated when the trap is set, which move toward each other to grip the
    animal between them. While many of these traps, when sprung, deliver what
    amounts to a blow to the victim, they are distinguishable from
    smiting-traps of the swinging-striker class in that the present traps are
    designed especially to grip and not to smite and have two jaws moving
    toward each other, while all smiting-traps catch the animal between a
    single striker and some base, which is stationary.  Traps including a
    stationary jaw and a movable jaw are not classified as jaw-traps, but as
    smiting-traps.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81+,    for single-jaw traps delivering a blow to the animal, but also
    holding it, as do jaw-traps, against escape.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    293,    Vehicle Fenders, subclass 16 for vehicle fenders having laterally
    closable body traps.


CLS 43/89
TXT Jaw-traps under subclass 88 which are hung or suspended upon a line or
    similar support.  The jaws of many of these are hook-like in structure, and
    the traps themselves are usually designed to catch fish.  All those
    trap-hooks which include two spring-actuated hooks movable toward each
    other are classified here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34+,    for other trap hooks.

    96,     for jaw-trap supports designed to hold the traps under water in
    proper position.


CLS 43/90
TXT Jaw-traps under subclass 88 where the invention lies in some modification
    of the jaw structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclass 186 for wrench jaw faces.


CLS 43/91
TXT Jaw-traps under subclass 90 comprising two parallel rods carrying jaws at
    one end and oscillated, when sprung, to move said jaws toward each other to
    entrap an animal. These traps are usually designed for use in burrows.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     for burrow type impaling traps.


CLS 43/92
TXT Jaw-traps under subclass 88 where the invention lies in some modification
    of the trigger mechanism or some part thereof. All elements which assist in
    holding the jaws in set position and release the jaws when the trap is
    sprung are considered parts of the trigger mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70      and 72, for other traps where the invention resides largely in the
    trigger mechanism.


CLS 43/93
TXT Jaw-traps under subclass 92 where the invention lies in such a modification
    of the trigger mechanism that one of the jaws or the trap-spring is engaged
    directly by an element which is designed, to be moved by the victim in its
    effort to get the bait, whereupon the jaws are released to catch the
    victim.  If there are intermediate parts between the element moved by the
    victim and the element which holds the jaws set, the trigger is not
    regarded as a direct-engaging trigger.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     for similar devices for traps with swinging striker.


CLS 43/94
TXT Jaw-traps under subclass 93 having a trigger introduced between two
    spring-jaws and holding the latter part by its interposition.  The trigger
    may be a rigid element (wedge-trigger) designed to be knocked out of
    engagement with the jaws of the victim, whereupon the jaws close upon the
    latter.  It may be a joined element (toggle-trigger) parts of which are in
    a straight line when the trap is set, and which is moved by the victim at
    the joint or hinge, whereupon the trigger bends and the trap-jaws approach
    each other to catch the animal.  The traps in this subclass are specially
    adaptable for burrows.


CLS 43/95
TXT Jaw-traps under subclass 92 frequently but not necessarily, of the
    direct-engaging-trigger type, in which the trigger mechanism is so
    fashioned that when the trap parts are swung to the set position the
    trigger automatically engages with and holds some part of the trap, so that
    it is maintained in the set position without any further aid from the
    operator.  So called "self-setting" jaw-traps are classified here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83      and 83.5, for "self-setting" swinging striker traps.


CLS 43/96
TXT Devices under subclass 88 comprising attachments for jaw-traps not
    classifiable in other jaw-trap subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for miscellaneous trap attachments not classifiable elsewhere.


CLS 43/97
TXT Jaw-trap appurtenances under subclass 96 designed to aid in setting the
    traps, especially to hold the jaws while the trigger mechanism is being
    manipulated. These devices may be permanent attachments for the traps or
    may be separate implements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81.5,   for auxiliary striker holders for swinging striker traps.

    83      and 95, for automatic catches.


CLS 43/98
TXT Traps under subclass 58 which are designed to attract animals to a position
    where they will receive an electric shock, which either kills them at once
    or so injures them as to make them helpless and kills them in the course of
    time.  Here are classified also traps which paralyze their victims by an
    electric current where the electricity is the medium which is depended upon
    to capture, although other means may eventually kill the animals.  Electro
    cutting-traps especially adapted for insects are excluded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    for devices for electro cutting insects.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    256,    Fences, subclass 10 for wire fences charged with electricity.


CLS 43/99
TXT Traps under subclass 98 in which the arrangement is such that the bodies of
    the paralyzed or dead animals are removed by gravity or by power-operated
    means or are at least concealed from sight, so that the trap presents an
    inviting rather than an alarming appearance to the next victim.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59,     68, 69, 71, 74, 75, and 76, for traps having body-receiving
    features usually receptacles which conceal the body.


CLS 43/100
TXT Traps under subclass 58 specially adapted for aquatic use to catch fish.
    Traps which, while designed to entrap fish, are equally well adapted to
    catch land-animals will be found classified with ordinary animal traps.  By
    "fish" is meant all animals not classifiable as insects which breathe or
    pass their lives in water, whether cetaceans, crustaceans, mollusks, or
    echinoderms, or those vertebrate animals with gills and fins more commonly
    called "fish".  All true fishtraps, however, catch only by reason of the
    power of locomotion of their ultimate victims, and devices for capturing
    fish which depend solely upon the motion imparted to them through the water
    are regarded not as traps, but as nets, and are so classified. Structures
    which will entrap fish when stationary in the water and also when towed
    through the water, if they have a trap-entrance or nonreturn entrance, are
    classified as fish traps.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7+,     for fishing nets.

    65      and 66, for fishtraps which are well  adapted to catch land-animals
    without undergoing modification.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, appropriate subclasses for costumes for hunters and
    fishermen.

    147,    Coopering, subclass 48 for forms on which fishtraps and eels-pots
    are to be made.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 154+ for fish-screens
    to keep fish out of flumes.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 81+ for fishways around
    hydraulic apparatus.


CLS 43/101
TXT Large fixed fishtraps under subclass 100 consisting of fences of stakes,
    with netting or the like, forming successive inclosures, into which the
    fish are directed by a prolonged fence called the "leader" and from which
    they do not escape.


CLS 43/102
TXT Fishtraps under subclass 100 comprising a support, usually floating, and a
    cage, into which the fish are enticed and which is lowered into the water
    and elevated out of the water by hoisting means on the support to catch the
    fish.  Frequently the cage is guided, and in all cases it is hoisted in a
    vertical direction.  The cage may be a fishtrap per se or may entrap only
    by reason of the hoisting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8+,     for net handling means.

    11+,    for dip nets.


CLS 43/103
TXT Fishtraps under subclass 100 which are anchored in place and are so made
    that they may be moved readily from one location to another, as to take
    advantage of the tide or current, and which may be taken out of the water
    without disassembling.  These are to be distinguished from weirs, which
    must be disassembled when removed from the water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7+,     for fishing nets.

    101,    for weirs.


CLS 43/104
TXT Traps under subclass 103 which are designed to be towed through the water
    by one or more vessels. These are more than mere nets, being structurally
    traps having nonreturn entrances, usually funnel-shaped, and being by
    reason of their structure capable of use, when stationary, to entrap fish.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9.1+,   for nets of the trawl type.

    14,     for seines.


CLS 43/105
TXT Fishtraps under subclass 100 customarily manipulated by hand, usually
    baited, and comprising a foldable net-like structure or a collapsible frame
    which is open under water to permit fish to gather and which is closed
    about the fish and then hauled up to the surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for foldable dip nets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclasses 143+ for foldable tents.


CLS 43/106
TXT Fishtraps under subclass 100 designed to catch porpoises, which have the
    habit, when meeting an obstruction like a net, of jumping over the same.
    Either the trap is so formed as to prevent this jumping or it captures the
    porpoises after they leap.


CLS 43/107
TXT Traps under subclass 58 designed specially to effect the capture of
    insects, but which are not adapted to catch animals in general.  These
    traps, as a rule, take advantage of certain habits of insects which are
    peculiar to insects and are unknown in other forms of animal life. Insect
    traps, like other traps, are usually baited.  By "insects" as used in this
    art is meant not only true insects all of which are Hexapods, or
    six-legged, but creatures, often confounded with insects, belonging to the
    classes known as "Arachnida" and "Myriapoda", examples of the former class
    being scorpions, spiders, and mites and of the latter being centipedes and
    millipedes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclasses 24 and 25 for insect guards and baffles
    on trees.

    114,    Ships, subclass 221 for baffles on ships' cables to keep vermin
    from reaching the vessels.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 156 for cattle fly traps.

    449,    Bee Culture, subclass 22 for the combination of a bee hive with a
    moth control means, such as a moth trap.


CLS 43/108
TXT Traps under subclass 107 designed to be attached to tree trunks and to
    catch those insects which crawl up the trunks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclasses 23+ for guards or baffles for tree
    trunks.


CLS 43/109
TXT Traps under subclass 107 attached to and forming, usually, an integral part
    of some article of furniture. Most of these traps are connected with
    furniture casters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    for insect traps for windows, screens and doors.


CLS 43/110
TXT Traps under subclass 107 which make prisoners of and frequently destroy
    insects only because of some movement of the trap parts by an attendant or
    operator, without which the insects would not be caught.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135,    for spring operated insect catchers.


CLS 43/111
TXT Traps under subclass 107 having moving parts driven by machinery or
    mechanism, frequently like clockwork, which catch the insects because of
    these moving parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, or Animal Powered, subclass 37 for spring
    motor, per se.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, appropriate
    subclasses for clock-works, per se.


CLS 43/112
TXT Insect traps under subclass 107 which lure insects upon an electrified
    surface and which destroy the lured insects by electrocution.  Only
    electrocuting traps designed for insects alone are classified here.  Traps
    which are adapted to electrocute either insects or other animals are found
    with electrocuting traps.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98,     for electrocuting traps for either insects or other animals.


CLS 43/113
TXT Insect traps under subclass 107 which capture and destroy insects,
    especially nocturnal insects attracted by an artificial light forming a
    part of the trap.  The insects may fly directly into the flame of the light
    or may dash themselves against an illuminated obstacle and fall into a
    receptacle, from which there is no escape, or may fly toward the light and
    being dazzled, fall into such a receiver.  Usually a liquid or sticky
    substance is employed in connection with the light to trap the insects.
    Unless an artificial light or some light not daylight be depended upon to
    lure the insects traps are not classified as "illuminated". Insect traps
    which use indifferently bait or artificial light to lure their victims and
    which entrap insects whether or not such a light is used are not classified
    here.  Traps using phosphorescent of self-luminous substance are found in
    this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    for electrocuting insect traps.

    119,    for insect traps on windows, screens or doors.

    139+,   for traveling suction machines for catching insects, which may be
    illuminated.

    141,    for traveling machines for catching insects by using a blast of
    air, and which may be illuminated also.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 541+ for illuminated
    signs.

    362,    Illumination, appropriate subclasses, for structural details of
    lanterns.


CLS 43/114
TXT Insect traps under subclass 107 which are designed especially to catch
    winged insects, as flies, by providing an inviting perch, or roost covered
    with an adhesive substance, which will hold the insects which alight on the
    same, or by providing a glossy adhesive-covered surface having an
    attractive appearance or so placed as to be where flies are likely to form
    the habit of alighting without noticing the same.  The adhesive may or may
    not be poisonous.  The traps in this subclass catch insects whether or not
    they poison.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for similar devices which are illuminated.

    131,    for poison holders which do not catch the insects.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses for
    adhesive compositions in general, not containing synthetic resin or rubber.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses for an insecticidal composition; subclasses 416 for an insect
    trap, which is no more than an adhesive coated base; subclass 77 for an
    adhesive trapping composition and subclass 84 for a nonfood lure or bait
    composition.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, for synthetic resin or natural
    rubber containing adhesives.


CLS 43/115
TXT Insect traps under subclass 114 comprising ordinary fly-paper of the
    "Tanglefoot" type and a holder or guard for the same.  This subclass does
    not include mere means by which fly-paper may be safely transported; nor
    does it include insect-catchers which are hand-wielded to catch insects on
    the wing or at rest, where such catchers use fly-paper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for illuminated devices of this type.


CLS 43/116
TXT Traps under subclass 114 for insects which consist of a receptacle, usually
    containing a supply of adhesive, or of a reel-like holder carrying a
    flexible band, tape, cord, or the like, withdrawable from its holder.
    Frequently the withdrawn or exposed section of the tape or band is severed
    when covered with insects, to be destroyed like any other used flypaper.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 761+ for reel type measuring
    tapes.

    206,    Special Receptacles and Packages, subclasses 52+ for roll packages
    and 58 for paper roll dispensers.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 390.2+ for a reeling
    apparatus of general use.


CLS 43/117
TXT Traps under subclass 114 for insects which comprise an upright more or less
    rigid pole or rod serving as a perch or roost for the insects, which rod
    has a receptacle for an adhesive slidable thereon.  The receptacle, when
    moved up and down, coats the rod with the adhesive and removes caught flies
    and when in its lowest position catches any surplus adhesive which may run
    down the rod.


CLS 43/118
TXT Insect traps under subclass 107 designed to catch winged insects,
    especially house flies, and composed chiefly of reticulate wire fabric and
    not classifiable elsewhere. Most of these traps depend upon bait to attract
    the insects.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    111, 119, and 121, for flytraps of special types employing
    reticulated fabric in their construction.


CLS 43/119
TXT Insect traps under subclass 107 especially designed to be used in
    connection with a window, window-screen, door-screen, or door and which
    cannot be readily used elsewhere without modification.  Usually the screen
    is modified.  Also includes screens having integral traps and traps serving
    as screens.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for illuminated traps of this type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 58+ for a closure
    combined with means for blocking, repelling or chasing animals away from
    the closure or its opening.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 12+
    for flexible or portable panels and rigid closures providing for exit of
    insects which exits are intended to prevent re-entrance but do not trap.


CLS 43/120
TXT Insect traps under subclass 107 especially adapted for attachment to or
    association with garbage receptacles, which serve as the means for
    attracting the insects, usually flies.  Most of these traps are attached to
    the lids or covers of the receptacles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58+,    appropriate subclasses, particularly subclass 66 for garbage can
    traps designed to catch animals only.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, appropriate subclasses for metallic garbage cans.


CLS 43/121
TXT Insect traps under subclass 107 of the non- return-entrance type the
    entrances of which are reached and traversed by crawling insects.  These
    traps are specially designed to entrap wingless insects--as ants,
    cockroaches, waterbugs, and the like--though they may catch flies and other
    winged insects.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for similar traps on tree trunks.

    109,    for crawling-insect traps on furniture.

    123,    for bedbug traps.


CLS 43/122
TXT Traps under subclass 107 designed especially for flies or other winged
    insects of like habits and including a trapping-body of transparent
    material, as glass, or a body made chiefly of such material.


CLS 43/123
TXT Traps under subclass 107 especially designed for those crawling insects
    which seek shelter in cracks, crevices, and the like.  Bedbugs, chinches,
    larvae, etc., are the types of insect life caught by these traps.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109,    for similar traps associated with furniture.

    121,    for traps for crawling insects which do not normally seek shelter
    in cracks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclasses 23+ for tree trunk guards.


CLS 43/124
TXT Devices and processes under class definition the primary object of which is
    to destroy or kill vermin without trapping them.  By "vermin" is meant all
    noxious or troublesome animals, including insects which are injurious to
    game, to vegetation or to domestic animals, and obnoxious or parasitic to
    man.  Burrowing animals, such as gophers, and insect pests such as the
    cotton-boll weevil, are examples of vermin which are destroyed rather than
    trapped. Vermin-destroyers, unlike traps, as a rule seek out the pest,
    usually where it feeds or lives, and forces the same to its destruction
    without making any attempt to lure or attract it.  Any device which first
    attracts the animal and then destroys it is classified as a trap, except as
    noted below.  Poison-distributors are classified as vermin-destroyers.
    Mere holders for poison are also included as more properly
    vermin-destroyers than traps, even though the vermin are necessarily
    attracted to the poison.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     77+, 84, 85+, and 98+, for animal-traps which cause the destruction
    of their victims almost invariably.  Many other animal traps, especially of
    the self and ever set and the victim-reset types, frequently kill their
    victims by drowning.

    107,    108, 109, 110, 112, 113, and 114+, for insect traps which destroy
    the caught insects.  Other types of insect traps may also be searched for
    victim-destroying features.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 23 for insect-destroying in connection
    with treatment of trees and plants.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 101 for a building
    construction combined with an animal (insect) blocking structure.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclass 334 for smoke generating for
    smoke screens or general use.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 15.05+ for
    insecticidal paints.

    111,    Planting, subclasses 130+ for apparatus somewhat similar to
    poison-distributors and subclasses 118+, for devices for impregnating the
    earth with a liquid or gas and subclass 92 for manually operated dibbles.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 22 for devices for repelling
    animals, fish and insects by means of sound waves.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, appropriate
    subclasses.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 1+ for processes and 243+ for
    apparatus, not elsewhere provided, for disinfecting, deodorizing,
    preserving, or sterilizing.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses for a biocidal composition for killing or disabling vermin.


CLS 43/125
TXT Apparatus under subclass 124 for creating or involving fumes or smoke when
    such fumes are used for destroying vermin and not for general disinfecting
    or similar purposes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Food and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 467+ and 516+ for
    apparatus subjecting food to an enclosed modified atmosphere and fluid
    application, respectively.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 367+ for gas generating
    ammunition and explosive devices.

    119,    Animal Husbandry subclasses 156+ for anti-vermin treatment for
    animals.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, appropriate subclasses for smoke-producing
    process or apparatus for that class.


CLS 43/126
TXT Devices under subclass 125 used in fumigating trees, especially fruit
    trees, to destroy vermin infesting the same. Trees of the citrus species,
    which are attacked by scale insect, are usually the ones fumigated.
    Hydrocyanic acid is usually the insecticide employed.  Includes tree tents
    or covers, handling apparatus for the same, and all devices designed
    especially for the fumigation of trees not of general application.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclasses 20+ for tree covers for frost
    protection, etc.

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, appropriate subclasses, for tents
    and canopies of general utility.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses
    for apparatus for discharging fluids generally and especially subclasses 77
    and 78 for the mobile orchard sprayer type which discharges a fluid
    insecticide or the like into the path of an air blast for disseminating the
    insecticide onto the foliage of trees.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, appropriate subclasses, for tent
    handling apparatus.


CLS 43/127
TXT Apparatus under subclass 125 for creating fumes or smoke by combustion, to
    destroy vermin life.  May include apparatus designed primarily to create a
    smoke which will stupefy bees, so that they may be handled; but such
    apparatus is always capable of being used to kill, the effect of the smoke
    being dependent only on the mixture burned.  Unless the fumes result from
    the combustion of some substance they are not considered to be "smoke".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 213 for skywriting
    devices.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclass 334 for devices under the
    definition of that class for producing incendiary or noxious gases or smoke
    for screens.

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 203.26+ for heated vaporizers for medicaments.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, appropriate subclasses for smoke-producing
    process or apparatus for that class.


CLS 43/128
TXT Smokers under subclass 127 generally to smoke honey-bees, in which the
    combustion is maintained by means creating an artificial draft.  Such means
    may be bellows, a piston-pump or a rotary fan. Also includes smokers
    modified so that a forced draft may be maintained by apparatus not
    specifically disclosed.  Usually the substance burned in these devices does
    not burn freely and a forced draft is necessary to keep the fire alive.
    The draft also expels the smoke, usually through a nozzle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 472+ for bellows type pumps and compressors.


CLS 43/129
TXT Fumigators under subclass 125 in which the fumes are evolved in any way
    other than by combustion from a liquid or solid material, where the fumes
    are more or less toxic to vermin or where the heat of the fumes is
    sufficient in itself or aided by the toxic nature of the fumes to destroy
    life.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 203.12+ for vaporizers for medicaments.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 128+ for
    fluid distributing devices of general utility and which may be disclosed
    for destroying vermin, and which by the action of heat or a heated fluid
    may tend to vaporize the fluid.


CLS 43/130
TXT Vaporizers under subclass 129 in which steam alone is the vapor generated
    and having a nozzle to direct the steam in a jet, so as to concentrate the
    heat of the steam upon insects in their hiding places, whereby the insects
    are killed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 203.12+ for vaporizers for medicaments.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 128+ for
    fluid distributing devices of general utility and which may be disclosed
    for destroying vermin, and which by the action of heat or a heated fluid
    may tend to vaporize the fluid.


CLS 43/131
TXT Devices under subclass 124 for holding poisonous material, whether solid or
    liquid, adapted to attract and kill vermin, such as rodents and insects.
    These holders are not regarded as true traps, because the poison does not
    necessarily deprive the vermin of power to escape after eating the poison.
    Many of these poison holders act as guards for the poison, preventing
    children and domestic animals from partaking thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114+,   for poisoned fly-paper and adhesive used in insect traps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing subclasses 34+ for
    devices which slowly diffuse or disseminate materials into the air.


CLS 43/132.1
TXT Insect:

    Devices or processes under subclass 124 for destroying invertebrate
    animals, i.e., insects.

    (1)     Note.  While the specific process of spraying liquid insecticide is
    found in this subclass the sprayer apparatus itself is more properly found
    in Class 239.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 424, Drug, Bio- Affecting and Body Treating
    Compositions, Class Definitions II, D for the line between the processes of
    that class and this.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107+,   and particularly subclasses 110, 112, 113, and 114+ for insect
    destroying traps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses,
    for liquid sprayer apparatus, and subclasses 1+ for processes of spraying
    of liquids which are not insecticides.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses for an insecticidal composition to be sprayed upon a field or
    plant and for a method involving the mere application or spraying of a
    biocidal composition.


CLS 43/133
TXT Apparatus under subclass 132.1 for seeking out and capturing insects for
    destruction thereof.  Most of the apparatus is traveling--i.e., it can be
    propelled from place to place where the insects are likely to be found.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 329 for fruit catchers and 330, for berry
    pickers.

    449,    Bee Culture, subclasses 27+ for bee  swarm catching device.


CLS 43/134
TXT Instruments under subclass 133 carried or manually used which are designed
    to effect the capture of insects, usually those infesting cultivated
    plants, for the subsequent destruction thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144,    for insect burners.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 328.1+ for fruit gatherers.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 87 for animal-curry combs having
    vermin-traps.


CLS 43/135
TXT Hand carried and wielded insect-catchers under subclass 134 having a spring
    which moves a member to either crush or smash the insect or to catch the
    insect on an adhesive surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for operator-controlled insect traps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, appropriate subclasses for rubber
    band or spring projecting devices, sometimes used for crushing insects.


CLS 43/136
TXT Insect catchers under subclass 134 comprising hand carried and wielded
    devices which are operated to catch the insects on the wing or at rest by
    means of an adhesive or sticky surface.


CLS 43/137
TXT Insect catchers under subclass 134 comprising fly-swatters, except those
    having a spring-actuated striker.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for operator-controlled insect trap.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 159.1+
    appropriate subclasses, for brooms which are similar to fly-swatters.

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, subclasses 524+ for tennis rackets
    which are similar to fly swatters.


CLS 43/138
TXT Insect-destroyers under subclass 133 which catch the insect and which are
    true machines or which include machines as part of the catching mechanism.
    By "machines" is meant an instrument composed of one or more of the
    mechanical powers and capable, when set in motion, of producing by its own
    operation certain predetermined physical effects.  A machine differs from
    all other mechanical instruments in that its rule of action resides within
    itself.  It operates in a specific manner through agents of a specific
    character.


CLS 43/139
TXT Machines under subclass 138 for catching insects by pneumatic suction for
    the destruction thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for insect trapping devices using an illuminator; the combination
    of a suction device with illuminating means is classified in subclass 139
    and cross-referenced in subclass 113.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 300.1+ for
    air blast and/or suction devices not limited to insect trapping or catching.


CLS 43/140
TXT Machines of the suction type under subclass 139 for catching and destroying
    insects, which are propelled to where the insects are likely to be.
    Includes also machines of this type which first disturb or dislodge the
    insects by an airblast and then suck them up.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, appropriate subclasses for vehicle structure, per se.


CLS 43/141
TXT Machines under subclass 138, usually traveling, which are taken to where
    the insects may be found and which catch them by blowing them off their
    resting-place with a blast of air.  Usually the machine takes the dislodged
    insects and destroys them at once, as by some crushing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for insect trapping devices using an illuminator; the combination
    of a blast device with illuminating means is classified in subclass 141 and
    cross-referenced in subclass 113.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 300.1+ for
    air blast and/or suction devices not limited to insect trapping or catching.


CLS 43/142
TXT Machines under subclass 138 in which a rotating agitator beats the plants,
    vines, or bushes on which the insects are found, usually to knock said
    insects into pans or troughs, where they are killed, or onto crushing means
    or the like.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclasses 4, 24, 28, and 55+
    for plant engaging structure which unearths plants, comminutes plants or
    removes parts from plants and which may incidently crush or cut insects in
    or on the plants.


CLS 43/143
TXT Insect-destroying machines under subclass 138 in which an oscillating
    agitator beats the plants, vines, or bushes on which the insects are found,
    usually to knock said insects into pans or troughs where they are killed or
    from which there is no escape, so that they may be subsequently killed.


CLS 43/144
TXT Apparatus under subclass 132.1 which is used to seek out the insects and
    destroy them by heat from a flame or by physical contact with the flame
    itself.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 271.1 for surface heaters, per se,
    even though disclosed solely for insect burning and even though of the
    straddle row type.

    431,    Combustion, appropriate subclass for a burner or torch structure,
    per se, particularly subclass 327 for a capillary mass having a handle,
    subclasses 344 for a flame holder and fuel tank assembly and 345 for a
    flame holder having an attached handle.

                CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTION


CLS 43/900
TXT LIQUID INSECTICIDE SPRAYER:

    Apparatus for dispersing i.e., spraying, a liquid mass or jet of droplets
    used to destroy insects.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132.1,  for processes of destroying insects with liquid insecticide
    sprayers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses
    for liquid insecticide sprayer apparatus.


CLS 44/
TTL FUEL AND RELATED  COMPOSITIONS

CLS 44/
TXT This class includes most patents for

    1.      A liquid or solid composition designed primarily to react
    chemically, usually with oxygen in air, to produce heat in controllable
    amounts, included are most compositions designed to produce both heat and a
    deoxygenating effect in metallurgical and similar processes, designated to
    be dispersed in air for explosive combustion in an engine and/or designed
    to produce illumination light along with heat upon combustion.



    2.      A process for making such composition by adding substances, by
    removing components (using chemical or physico-chemical procedures) by
    shaping or reshaping or arranging fuel elements or object in a particular
    relation to each other, except where provided for in another class.



    3.      Apparatus specialized for use in an above process and not provided
    for in a single other class.



    4.      An additive which imparts desire aesthetic, handling or burning
    properties to a fuel, or a composition useful only for scratching a match
    or removing soot from a combustion-related apparatus.



    5.      Certain combinations of fuel with an igniting composition, an
    incombustible carrier for the fuel, a wrapper of bundling material or an
    additive as described in paragraph 4.



    6.      A solid product of a Class 201 thermolytic distillation process not
    elsewhere classifiable.



    7.      A process for treating coal not elsewhere classifiable.

    (1)     Note.  A list of superiority of some composition classes appears in
    the main class definition of Class 252, Compositions (5) Note.  This note
    in Class 252 explains classification of a generic composition with several
    disclosed uses.

    (2)     Note.  A briquet is defined as a fuel object, of a size suitable to
    be manipulated by a human hand, made, by consolidating, usually including
    pressing and shaping, smaller-sizes, loose, broken, comminuted or other
    divided carbonaceous powder, particles, chunks, lumps, fibers, sheets, etc.

    (3)     Note.  In this class a process for making a fuel product is
    classified with the product, except where specifically provided for
    elsewhere.

    (4)     Note.  When the expression "organic compound" is used in this
    class, it means a compound which fulfills the requirements of the Class 260
    class definition, i.e., the molecule is characterized by two carbons bonded
    together, one atom of carbon bonded to at least one atom of hydrogen or
    halogen, or one atom of carbon bonded to at least one atom of nitrogen by a
    single or double bond.  Certain compounds are exceptions to this rule,
    i.e., HCN, CN-CN, HNCO, HNCS, cyanogen halides, cyanamide, fulminic acid
    and metal carbides.

    (5)     Note.  When the term "hydrocarbon" is used in this class, it means
    an organic compound which consists exclusively of carbon and hydrogen.

    (6)     Note.  The organic chemical structure terminology used in this
    class is consistent with that used in the Glossary for the Class 532 -
    Organic Compounds-Part of the Class 532-570 Series (Published May 22, 1984
    in Addendum No. 1 - Order No. 946), except as otherwise noted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses
    for a process limited to a drying step for the removal of moisture or other
    liquid impurity from a solid fuel.

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illumination, appropriate subclasses especially
    subclasses 197+ for a fuel composition which is a mixture of gages and a
    process for making such a composition from solid and/or liquid material,
    e.g., coal, oil, water, etc., especially subclasses 209, 210 and 211 for a
    process for producing a gas as a desired product from wood, coal and/ or
    oil, weather or not a liquid and/ or solid fuel is produced as a by-product
    or an additional desired product.

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 200.1 for a reaction motor which may contain
    a claimed fuel.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, appropriate subclasses for a method which produces a free metal
    from a metal compound, whether or not a fuel composition is also produced.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, appropriate subclasses for incendiary
    bombs and projectiles, and appropriate subclasses for an ammunition or
    explosive charge or device having a fuse for ignition mass or surface.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses for a
    coating or plastic composition not useful primarily as a fuel, including a
    composition which may be used as a binder for fuel particles for a coating
    for fuel.

    110,    Furnaces, appropriate subclasses for industrial apparatus for
    burning a solid fuel, which apparatus does not claim the fuel itself, or a
    process for burning or igniting solid fuel, including a process wherein
    fuels are blended or mixed or an additive is applied to a fuel within a
    solid-fuel burner or apparatus ancillary thereto, such as provided for in
    that class (110).

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for a device useful only
    for applying a coating material to a substrate, e.g., a solid fuel.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, appropriate subclasses for a domestic
    apparatus and process along the same lines as Class 110, above.

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 329 and 349+ for tobacco-containing products
    intended to be burned.

    137,    Fluid Handling, appropriate subclasses fora method or apparatus for
    transporting or allowing the transporting or allowing the transport of, a
    liquid or gaseous material, e.g, a fuel.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 50+ for match making.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, appropriate
    subclasses for thermite-type compositions, and those which include
    sufficient oxidizer (such as a chlorate or a nitrate) as a component
    thereof to provide at least the major portion necessary for its combustion.
     Solid rocket-propellant fuels are classified in Class 149.  Fuels which
    undergo combustion in air are classified in this class (44).  See (2) Note
    and (3) Note in the class definition of Class 149.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, for a process or apparatus for
    the purification or recovery of cellulose or other fibrous material for use
    other than as fuel.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for dewaxing,
    solvent extraction, refining, vaporizing, etc., apparatus.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, appropriate subclasses for a
    process of carbonizing coal, oil shale, wood or other solid carbonaceous
    material not otherwise provided for, wherein a recoverable vapor or gas
    product is produced, whether or not a usable fuel composition is also
    produced.  The solid product of a Class 201 thermolytic distillation
    process, not elsewhere classifiable, is classified in this class (44).

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for
    carbonizing solid carbonaceous material.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclasses for
    a chemically reactive treatment of a fuel or related composition by direct
    exposure to electrical or wave energy where such treatment is performed
    either as a single step process or as the last step of a multistep process.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, for electrolytic production or treatment of a
    fuel or related composition where such production or treatment is performed
    either as a single step process or as the last step of a multistep process.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 85+ for a tobacco package
    with an igniter for the content, subclasses 96+ for a match packet,
    container assemblage of diverse components (i.e., a kit), one or more
    components of which may contain a fuel composition.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 15+ for a liquid
    fuel which is entirely mineral oil-derived, and appropriate other
    subclasses for a process for producing such fuel from a solid or liquid
    mineral material.  Also, a process for producing coke from mainly mineral
    oil material is classified in class 208.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses, for a nonchemical method of removing an impurity from a solid
    fuel composition, e.g., by magnetism, sleving, flotation, etc.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses for a process or apparatus for comminuting or breaking up solid
    fuel substances, alone or combined with a procedure for separating solids.

    252,    Compositions, appropriate subclasses for a composition no
    classifiable elsewhere, especially subclass 70 for composition which may
    release heat due to a readily-reversible chemical reaction, subclass 373
    for a gas composition which may have fuel value but which is intended for
    use as a chemical reactant and subclasses 502+ for an electrically
    conductive or emissive composition, e.g., an electrode, etc., containing
    elemental carbon.  See also (1) Note, above.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Articles Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses for plastic-shaping methods, e.g., subclass 5 for
    shaping or treating explosive or propellant compositions, etc.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 60 for a consumable electrode.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, for an apparatus in general in which a chemical
    reaction takes place.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses for an
    inorganic compound or element in a relatively pure state or a process for
    making such a material, especially subclasses 445+ for a method of
    producing pure elemental carbon, including a shaped form thereof, and
    subclasses 511+ for the recovery of elemental sulfur, for example, from
    mineral materials such as coal.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 40+
    for a composition which in burnable to produce an odorizing or deodorizing
    effect upon the atmosphere to other material, e.g., incense, etc.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 314+ for the application of a gaseous combustion product to a
    food or beverage.

    431,    Combustion, appropriate subclasses for a residual combustion or
    combustion-starting method or device, especially subclass 289 for a candle
    device and subclass 288 for a candle or taper, per se, subclass 6 for a
    procedure for starting a fire, subclasses 72+ for the automatic control of
    an igniter and burner feed control, subclasses 258+ for a burner not
    specialized to the use of solid fuel having an electrical igniter, (and see
    the search notes to this subclass for a statement of the classification of
    electrical igniters) and subclass 267 for a  residual frictional, chemical
    or percussive-type igniter, and see the search notes to this subclass for a
    statement of the classification of other igniters of this type.  See the
    Search Class references in the class definitions of Class 431 to other
    classes in which such methods or devices may be found.  See particularly
    the reference to class 44 for a statement of the distribution of the art
    between Classes 44 and 431.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent or Support Therefor:  Product or Process of
    Making, subclasses 416+ for a composition containing free carbon intended
    for use as an adsorbent or a method for making such composition.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclasses 1+, especially
    subclass 14, for a fuel composition which is is mixture of only
    hydrocarbons, and appropriate subclasses, especially subclass 302, for
    methods of making such compositions involving the synthesis of at least one
    hydrocarbon component.


CLS 44/250
TXT FLAMELESS OR GLOWLESS:
    Compositions under the class definition intended, when its elements are
    brought into contact with each other and/or with a suitable irreversible
    outside agent, to set up such chemical reaction as to generate heat without
    light.

    (1)     Note.  Processes for preparing such compositions by mixing
    ingredients are included herein.

    (2)     Note.  Processes for producing heat by merely mixing the
    ingredients of such composition or by merely exposing the composition to an
    activating agent are included herein.

    (3)     Note.  Compositions included herein are often packaged,
    transported, and handled in such a way that less than all of the
    ingredients are in admixture before the start of the exothermic reaction;
    they are classified herein, however, as if all of the ingredients are
    contained in a single mixture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    902,    for a collection of patents which illustrate the combination of a
    fuel of this subclass with an article to be heated, e.g., a hair curler, a
    package of food, a laminating press, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 252+ for a mass of loose metal particles.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 263.01+ for a fuel composition in a
    container in which it is used, when the proximate function of the claimed
    device is merely the production of heat.

    132,    Toilet, subclass 220 for a hair device having a heat generating
    composition.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, for fuels combined
    with an oxidizer for nonair combustion to produce explosive force,
    propellant gases, and/or intense or glowing heat, whether or not
    accompanied by flames or sparks, especially subclasses 37+ and 108.2 for
    such compositions containing free metal.  Where the composition claimed in
    a patent is similar to those of Class 149 but the disclosure leaves doubt
    as to whether classification in this class (44) or Class 149 is proper, the
    doubt is resolved as follows:

    (1)     Where a significant amount of water is required for the exothermic
    reaction to take place, the patent is classified here (class 44, subclasses
    250+).

    (2)     Where the exothermic reaction takes place while in contact with a
    living thing, it is classified here.

    (3)     Where neither of these conditions is disclosed, classification is
    in Class 149.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    583.1+ for a device containing a fuel, for pressing against a tube or hose
    to adhere a patch thereto by, for example, vulcanization.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclass 198 for a process of that class in
    which a filler metal is supplied by an in situ chemical reaction.  Such
    reaction is usually an exothermic, thermic-type reaction.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 70 for, among others, a composition which
    gives off heat in a readily reversible chemical reaction, heat being
    applied to the composition to reverse the reaction, and subclass 188.1 for
    a composition comprised of chemically interactive ingredients, which does
    not produce a significant amount of usable heat in the reaction.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 113+ for a package of food combined with means to heat the food.


CLS 44/251
TXT Activatable by or containing water:

    Subject matter under subclass 250 in which the composition requires the
    presence of water (free or combined as water of crystallization) in order
    to produce its exothermic effect.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 157 for gas-generating compositions, which
    may be exothermic, intended solely for cleaning, for example, drains, and a
    process for cleaning which merely uses a composition suitable for this
    subclass.


CLS 44/252
TXT Free metal-containing:
    Subject matter under subclass 251 which contains a metal in elemental form,
    usually in finely divided condition.


CLS 44/253
TXT With organic or second elemental material:
    Subject matter under subclass 252 containing a second metal in uncombined
    form (which may be alloyed with the first elemental metal), a nonmetal in
    uncombined form, or an organic compound.

    (1)     Note.  See (4) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    "organic compound".


CLS 44/265
TXT SOLIDIFIED LIQUID (E.G., GEL, ETC.):
    Compositions under the class definition wherein a normally liquid fuel is
    supplied in a solidified form.

    (1)     Note.  The normally liquid fuel is often in the form of a gel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280+,   for dispersions of solid carbonaceous fuels, such as coal,
    charcoal, peat, etc., in a liquid.

    551+,   for consolidated solid fuels which employ a binder that may be
    liquid.


CLS 44/266
TXT Liquid alkanol base:
    Compositions under subclass 265 wherein an alkanol, or a mixture of
    alkanols, constitutes at least 50 percent of the normally liquid fuel.

    (1)     Note.  An alkanol is a compound wherein a single -OH group replaces
    a hydrogen on an alkane.


CLS 44/267
TXT With carbohydrate (e.g., cellulose compound, cotton, etc.):
    Compositions under subclass 266 wherein a carbohydrate is a component of
    the solidified liquid fuel composition.

    (1)     Note.  The carbohydrate is usually, but not always, present as a
    binder.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 536, the main class definition, for the meaning of
    the term carbohydrate.


CLS 44/268
TXT Liquid hydrocarbon base (e.g., gasoline, etc.):
    Compositions under subclass 265 wherein a hydrocarbon, or a mixture of
    hydrocarbons, constitutes at least 50 percent of the normally liquid fuel.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of such normally liquid fuels provided for herein
    are gasoline, kerosene, and naphtha.

    (2)     Note.  See (5) Note of the class definition for the definition of
    the term hydrocarbon.


CLS 44/269
TXT With plant derivative of unknown composition (except rosin or rosin
    derivatives) or carbohydrate:Compositions under subclass 268 wherein a
    plant derivative, excluding rosin or a rosin derivative, of unknown
    composition or a carbohydrate is a component of the solidified liquid fuel
    composition.

    (1)     Note.  Each of the components specified is usually, but not always,
    present as a binder.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 536, the main class definition, for the meaning of
    the term carbohydrate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272,    for solidified liquid fuel compositions which contain rosin or a
    rosin derivative as a component.


CLS 44/270
TXT With organic nitrogen compound:
    Compositions under subclass 268 wherein an organic nitrogen compound is a
    component of the solidified liquid fuel composition.

    (1)     Note.  The organic nitrogen compound is usually, but not always,
    present as a binder.

    (2)     Note.  An organic nitrogen compound is one which has nitrogen
    attached directly or indirectly, by nonionic bonding, to carbon of an
    organic compound.

    (3)     Note.  See (4) Note of the class definition for the definition of
    "organic compound".


CLS 44/271
TXT With organic polymer polymerized through olefinic or acetylenic bond (e.g.,
    methacrylate polymers, polypropylene, etc.):Compositions under subclass 268
    wherein an organic polymer compound, which has been formed by the
    polymerization of an olefinic or acetylenic bond in a monomer, is a
    component of the solidified liquid fuel composition.

    (1)     Note.  The organic polymer is usually, but not always, present as a
    binder.

    (2)     Note.  See (4) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    "organic compound".


CLS 44/272
TXT With organic -C(=X)X- compound, wherein the X's are the same or diverse
    chalcogens (e.g., aluminum carboxylates, rosin salts, etc.):Compositions
    under subclass 268 wherein the solidified liquid fuel composition contains
    as a component an organic-C(=X)X- compound, wherein the X's are the same or
    diverse chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  The organic -C(=X)X- compound is usually, but not always,
    present as a binder.

    (2)     Note.  An organic -C(=X)X- compound is one in which the carbon of
    the    -C(=X)X- group is, or is attached directly or indirectly by nonionic
    bonding to, the carbon of an organic compound.

    (3)     Note.  See (4) Note of the class definition for the definition of
    "organic compound".

    (4)     Note.  Rosin, the principal substituent of which is abietic acid,
    is also known as colophony.


CLS 44/275
TXT CANDLE COMPOSITION:
    Compositions under the class definition adapted and designed for use in
    making candles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    subclass 803 for a collection of patents drawn to candle-shaping apparatus.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 289+ for a device additional to the wick and
    fuel, forming a part of a candle or taper or peculiarly adapted for use
    with a candle or taper, and subclass 288 for a candle or taper.


CLS 44/280
TXT SOLID CARBONACEOUS FUEL DISPERSED IN A LIQUID MEDIUM (E.G., DISPERSED COAL,
    COKE, CARBON POWDER, PEAT, ETC.):Compositions under the class definition
    wherein a liquid medium acts as dispersant for a solid carbonaceous fuel.

    (1)     Note.  Asphalt and asphaltenes are considered to be mineral oil
    substances, even if solid.  Class 208, particularly subclasses 15+,
    provides for fuel compositions which are mixtures having mineral oil
    components only.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of compositions provided for herein are aqueous
    coal slurries to which has been added a surfactant.

    (3)     Note.  Included in the solid carbonaceous fuels encompassed are
    coal, charcoal, lignite, wood, coke, peat, carbon black, carbon powder,
    shale, solid asphalt, solid asphaltene, and solid bitumen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    311,    for fuel compositions which contain pitch, sludge, or tar.


CLS 44/281
TXT The liquid medium is, or contains, hydrocarbon:
    Compositions under subclass 280 wherein liquid hydrocarbon constitutes all,
    or part of, the liquid medium.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compositions provided for herein are
    gasoline-coal-water slurries having additives such as surfactants or
    stabilizers.

    (2)     Note.  See (5) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    hydrocarbon.


CLS 44/282
TXT Liquid hydrocarbon, or liquid hydrocarbon and water, are the only
    components:Compositions under subclass 281 wherein the composition consists
    of solid carbonaceous fuel and liquid hydrocarbon or solid carbonaceous
    fuel, liquid hydrocarbon, and water.

    (1)     Note.  See (5) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    hydrocarbon.


CLS 44/300
TXT LIQUID FUELS (EXCLUDING FUELS THAT ARE EXCLUSIVELY MIXTURES OF LIQUID
    HYDROCARBONS):Compositions under the class definition pertaining to liquid
    fuels containing at least one nonhydrocarbon ingredient or solid
    hydrocarbon polymer ingredient; the fuel itself may be hydrocarbonaceous,
    such as gasoline, etc., or it may be a nonhydrocarbon fuel, such as
    alcohol, ether, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Since the lighter mineral oil fractions (naphtha, kerosene,
    gasoline, etc.) are inherently fuels, this subclass and its indents provide
    for compositions of such fractions admixed with nonhydrocarbon or solid
    hydrocarbon polymer material and not limited to a use or function provided
    for elsewhere; examples of such compositions are gasolines mixed with
    antioxidants, gum inhibitors, etc.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass and its indents provide not only for
    compositions of liquid fuels, as supra, but also for compositions of
    additives intended for incorporation into liquid fuels, the purpose of said
    additive compositions being to improve the combustion characteristics of
    the fuel characteristics, per se, of the liquid fuel.  Examples of such
    additive compositions are antiknock compositions, cetane improving
    compositions, carburetting compositions, smoke reduction compositions, etc.

    (3)     Note.  Since additives to liquid fuel compositions may serve more
    than a single function, the primary basis of classification for this
    subclass and its indents is the chemical structure of the nonhydrocarbon
    ingredient(s) of the composition.

    (4)     Note.  This subclass and its indents provide for processes under
    the class definition not classified elsewhere, for the production and
    treatment of the liquid fuel compositions encompassed.

    (5)     Note.  Class 508, Solid Anti-Friction Devices, Materials Therefor,
    Lubricant or Separant Compositions for Moving Solid Surfaces, and
    Miscellaneous Mineral Oil Compositions, subclasses 110+ is the generic
    residuum for heavy mineral oil fractions admixed with nonhydrocarbon or
    solid hydrocarbon polymer additive. If such a composition is disclosed
    solely as a fuel or as a fuel containing a lubricant mixed therewith, Class
    44 controls; if it is disclosed solely as a lubricant, Class 508 controls.
    If there is no use or function limitation, such compositions are divided
    between Classes 44 and 508 on the basis of their being light or heavy
    mineral oil fractions, respectively.

    (6)     Note.  Examples of liquid fuel compositions provided for in this
    subclass are:  (a) the mixture of a liquid hydrocarbon fuel with diethyl
    selenide and (b) the mixture of a liquid hydrocarbon fuel with n-butyl
    lithium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, particularly subclasses 15+,
    for liquid fuels which are mineral oils or blends of two different mineral
    oils.  The expression "mineral oil" embraces natural petroleum, asphalt,
    pitches, waxes, and tars which are primarily mixtures of hydrocarbons, as
    well as distillates of such tars of indeterminate composition.  Included
    also are Fischer-Tropsch crudes, that is, the liquid hydrocarbonaceous
    mixture resulting from the hydrogenation of a carbon oxide, wood tars, wood
    tar oils, and wood tar distillates which are similar to coal tar in that
    they include an unidentified mixture, including hydrocarbons.  It embraces
    "coke" and "resin" only if the "coke" or "resin" results from a Class 208
    process performed on a mineral oil or a mineral oil fraction.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 380+ for stabilizing compositions, per se,
    even though they may be intended for incorporation into liquid fuels.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, particularly subclass 14, for
    liquid fuels which are mixtures of hydrocarbons, at least one of which is a
    nonmineral oil hydrocarbon.


CLS 44/301
TXT Emulsion fuel (e.g., water-gasoline emulsions, etc.):
    Compositions under subclass 300 which are emulsions.

    (1)     Note.  To be placed in this subclass, the liquid fuel composition
    must be described as an "emulsion" or "microemulsion" in either the claims
    or the specification.

    (2)     Note.  Classified herein are emulsions of water and
    hydrocarbonaceous fuels, usually with added surfactants.

    (3)     Note.  See (5) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    hydrocarbon.


CLS 44/302
TXT Alkanol component:
    Compositions under subclass 301 in which an alkanol, i.e., ROH, wherein R
    is an alkyl group, is a component of the emulsified fuel.


CLS 44/303
TXT Oxo still bottoms containing (i.e., distillation residues from reaction
    product of carbon monoxide, hydrogen, and olefin):Compositions under
    subclass 300 which contain still bottoms from the oxo reaction.

    (1)     Note.  The reaction of carbon monoxide, olefin, and hydrogen is
    referred to as the "oxo" reaction. Desired products are generally removed
    from this reaction mixture by a distillation process.  The residue
    remaining in the still pot after distillation, a mixture of diverse
    compounds, is the material encompassed by this subclass.


CLS 44/304
TXT Organic compound of indeterminate structure which is a reaction product of
    an organic compound with sulfur halide or elemental sulfur
    containing:Compositions under subclass 300 which contain a compound of
    indeterminate  structure which has been prepared by the reaction of an
    organic compound with sulfur or with a sulfur halide.

    (1)     Note.  Included within this subclass are both (a) the reaction
    products, per se, of sulfur or sulfur halide with an organic compound and
    (b) such reaction products which have been themselves further reacted.

    (2)     Note.  See (4) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    "organic compound".


CLS 44/305
TXT Phosphosulfurized or phosphooxidized organic compound of indeterminate
    structure containing (i.e., reaction products of organic compounds with
    phosphorus sulfides or oxides):Compositions under subclass 300 which
    contain a compound of indeterminate structure which has been prepared by
    the reaction of an organic compound with phosphorus sulfides or phosphorus
    oxides.

    (1)     Note.  Included within this subclass are both (a) the reaction
    products, per se, of phosphorus sulfide or phosphorus oxide with an organic
    compound, and (b) such reaction products which have been themselves further
    reacted.

    (2)     Note.  See (4) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    "organic compound".


CLS 44/306
TXT Rosin, tall oil, or derivatives thereof containing (except abietic acids or
    fatty acids derived therefrom):Compositions under subclass 300 which
    contain tall oil, rosin or derivatives thereof, excluding fatty acids, per
    se, or abietic acids, per se, derived from tall oil or rosin.

    (1)     Note.  Tall oil is a by-product of the wood pulp industry and is
    usually recovered from pine wood "black liquor" of the sulfate or kraft
    paper processes.  A typical composition of tall oil includes 50-60 percent
    fatty acids (e.g., oleic, linoleic, etc.), 34-40 percent rosin acids, and
    5-10 percent unsaponifiable matter, such as long chain alcohols and sterols.

    (2)     Note.  Rosin, also known as colophony, is usually designated
    according to its source, e.g., gum rosin (from exudate of incisions on
    living trees); wood rosin (from Southern pine stumps); and tall oil rosin
    (from by-products of the wood pulp industry).  The principal constituents
    isolated from rosin are carboxylic acids with a hydrophenanthrene nucleus,
    comprising abietic acid and its isomers, such as pimaric acid.  The acids
    may exist in rosin as acid anhydrides.  The mixed acids are known in the
    trade as rosin acids or resin acids, the two expressions being used
    interchangeably.

    (3)     Note.  Abietic acid has the following structure:


CLS 44/307
TXT Plant or animal extract mixtures or extracts of indeterminate structure
    containing:Compositions under subclass 300 which contain extracts from
    plant or animal matter, which extracts are either (a) mixtures or (b) of
    indeterminate structure.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of ingredients provided for are extracts of
    slippery elm, alkanet, Irish moss, and onions.


CLS 44/308
TXT Containing triglycerides (e.g., castor oil, corn oil, olive oil, lard,
    etc.):Compositions under subclass 307 wherein the extract contains
    triglycerides.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of ingredients provided for herein are linseed oil
    and coconut oil extracts.

    (2)     Note.  Triglycerides are characterized by the structure:


            wherein the R's may be the same or different fatty acid radicals.


CLS 44/309
TXT Organic oxidate of indeterminate composition containing (e.g., paraffin wax
    oxidate or petroleum oxidate, etc.):Compositions under subclass 300 which
    contain a compound of indeterminate structure which has been prepared by
    oxidation of an organic compound.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of ingredients provided for herein are naphthenic
    acid oxidates, petroleum lubricating oil oxidates, tri-isobutylene oxidate,
    paraffin oxidates, and triglyceride oxidates.

    (2)     Note.  The oxidates of this subclass are generally complex
    mixtures.  An indication that the oxidate contains carboxylic acids is not
    sufficient to remove it from this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  See (4) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    "organic compound".


CLS 44/310
TXT Chemically reacted organic oxidate (e.g., esterified, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 309 which contain an oxidate of indeterminate
    composition which has been made to undergo a further reaction, after being
    oxidized.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of ingredients provided for herein are oxidates
    which are reduced to decrease active oxygen content, and oxidates which
    have been reacted to esterify the carboxylic acid content thereof.


CLS 44/311
TXT Sludge, pitch, tar, or tar distillate containing:

    Compositions under subclass 300 which contain tar, tar distillate, pitch,
    or sludge.

    (1)     Note.  Pitch, tar, and tar distillate are generally considered as
    mineral oils.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    208,    Mineral Oils: Processes and Products, especially subclasses 15+ for
    liquid fuel compositions which are mixtures of mineral oil materials only.


CLS 44/312
TXT Quinone or anthraquinone containing (e.g., quinhydrone, benzoquinones,
    etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 300 which contain quinone compounds.

    (1)     Note.  Quinone compounds have one of the two following structures:

            wherein substitution may be made for ring hydrogens only.


CLS 44/313
TXT Carbohydrate containing:

    Compositions under subclass 300 which contain a carbohydrate compound.

    (1)     Note.  See the Class 536 class definition for the definition of a
    carbohydrate.


CLS 44/314
TXT Boron containing:

    Compositions under subclass 300 which contain elemental boron or a boron
    compound.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 44/315
TXT Phosphorus attached directly or indirectly to the boron:

    Compositions under subclass 314 wherein the compound containing boron also
    contains phosphorus.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 44/316
TXT Three carbons or three fluorines bonded directly to the boron:

    Compositions under subclass 314 wherein the boron is bonded directly to
    three carbons or to three fluorines.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of ingredients provided for herein are:
                   and


CLS 44/317
TXT Nitrogen attached directly or indirectly to the boron:

    Compositions under subclass 314 wherein the boron is attached directly or
    indirectly to nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of ingredients provided for herein are:



CLS 44/318
TXT Three identical or diverse chalcogens bonded directly to the
    boron:Compositions under subclass 314 wherein the boron is bonded directly
    to three identical or diverse chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium,
    or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of ingredients provided for herein are boric acid,
    and:


CLS 44/319
TXT Carbon, chalcogen, and boron in the same ring:

    Compositions under subclass 318 wherein the boron, carbon, and chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium) are members of the same ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 44/320
TXT Silicon containing:
    Compositions under subclass 300 which contain elemental silicon or a
    silicon compound.


CLS 44/321
TXT Free metal or alloy containing:
    Compositions under subclass 300 which contain an alloy or an elemental
    metal.

    (1)     Note.  Coated metals are included within the scope of this subclass.


CLS 44/322
TXT Containing acyclic oxygen single bonded to acyclic oxygen (i.e., peroxy
    compounds):Compositions under subclass 300 which contain a compound having
    two acyclic oxygens bonded directly to each other.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of ingredients provided for herein are:  hydrogen
    peroxide, peroxycarboxylic acid esters, dialkyl peroxides, and alkyl
    hydroperoxides.


CLS 44/323
TXT Containing -X-N(=X) or -X-N(=X)
    (=X)bonded directly to carbon, wherein the X's are the same or diverse
    chalcogens (e.g., thionitrite esteres, etc.):Compositions under subclass
    300 which contain a compound wherein carbon is bonded directly to an
    -X-N(=X) group or to an -X-N(=X)(=X) group, wherein the X's are the same or
    diverse chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of ingredients provided for herein are:



CLS 44/324
TXT Nitrates or thionitrates (i.e., -X-N(=O) (=O) bonded directly to
    carbon):Compositions under subclass 323 which contain a compound wherein
    carbon is bonded directly to an -X-N(=O)(=O) group, wherein X is oxygen or
    sulfur.

    (1)     Note.  Nitrate esters and thionitrate esters are the principal
    substances provided for herein.

    (2)     Note.  The ingredients provided for by this subclass generally
    exhibit cetane-improving properties in diesel fuels.


CLS 44/325
TXT With organic nonnitrate nitrogen compound:
    Compositions under subclass 324 which contain, in addition to a nitrate or
    a thionitrate compound, an additional compound which is an organic nitrogen
    compound that does not contain an -X-N (=O)(=O) group.

    (1)     Note.  An organic nitrogen compound is one which has nitrogen
    attached directly or indirectly, by nonionic bonding, to carbon of an
    organic compound.  See (4) Note of the class definition for the definition
    of "organic compound".


CLS 44/326
TXT With organic nonnitrate chalcogen compound:
    Compositions under subclass 324 which contain, in addition to a nitrate or
    a thionitrate compound, an additional compound which is an organic oxygen
    compound that does not contain an-X-N (=O)(=O) group.

    (1)     Note.  An organic oxygen compound is one which has oxygen attached,
    directly or indirectly, by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.  See (4) Note of the class definition for the definition of
    "organic compound".


CLS 44/327
TXT Organic azide compound, or organic compound having acyclic nitrogen double
    bonded to acyclic nitrogen (e.g., diazo compounds, etc.):Compositions under
    subclass 300 which contain organic compounds having acyclic nitrogen double
    bonded to acyclic nitrogen or organic azide compounds.

    (1)     Note.  The azide group has no single definite structure; it can be
    represented by different resonance forms, such as:

            The azide group is generally depicted as:


    (2)     Note.  Organic azide compounds have the azide group attached
    directly or indirectly, by nonionic bonding, to carbon of an organic
    compound.  See (4) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    "organic compound".

    (3)     Note.  Similarly, organic compounds having acyclic nitrogen double
    bonded to acyclic nitrogen must have the nitrogens attached directly or
    indirectly, by nonionic bonding, to carbon of an organic compound.

    (4)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is:



CLS 44/328
TXT Azo compound (i.e., each of the nitrogens is single bonded to carbon):

    Compositions under subclass 327 which contain an azo compound, i.e., a
    compound wherein carbon is bonded directly to each of two acyclic nitrogens
    that are double bonded directly to each other.

    (1)     Note.  Azo compounds are often used to give a distinctive
    coloration to fuels.

    (2)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 44/329
TXT Heterocyclic carbon compound containing a hetero ring having chalcogen or
    nitrogen as the only ring hetero atoms:

    Compositions under subclass 300 which contain a compound having a
    heterocyclic ring whose ring members are carbon and at least one hetero
    atom selected from nitrogen and chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium,
    and tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of ingredients provided for herein are heterocyclic
    ring compounds wherein seven or more ring members are present in the hetero
    ring.


CLS 44/330
TXT Compound of indeterminate structure prepared by reacting a heterocyclic
    compound of known structure:

    Compositions under subclass 329 which contain a compound of indeterminate
    structure, resulting from the reaction of a heterocyclic compound of known
    structure.


CLS 44/331
TXT The heterocyclic compound reactant is a dicarboxylic acid anhydride (e.g.,
    reaction product of succinic anhydride with a polyamine, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 330 which contain a compound of indeterminate
    structure resulting from the reaction of a cyclic dicarboxylic acid
    anhydride.


CLS 44/332
TXT The heterocyclic compound reactant is an oxirane (e.g., reaction product of
    epihalohydrin with amine, epoxide reactions, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 330 which contain a compound of indeterminate
    structure resulting from the reaction of a compound containing a
    three-membered hetero ring whose ring members are two carbons and one
    oxygen.


CLS 44/333
TXT The hetero ring contains six members including nitrogen and carbon:

    Compositions under subclass 329 which contain a six-membered hetero ring
    compound with carbon and nitrogen ring members.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 44/334
TXT Chalcogen in the hetero ring:

    Compositions under subclass 333 wherein the six-membered hetero ring has
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) as a ring member.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 44/335
TXT Plural nitrogens in the hetero ring (e.g., piperazines, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 333 wherein the six-membered hetero ring has
    plural nitrogen ring members.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the ingredients provided for herein are piperazine
    compounds.  Piperazine, per se, has the structure:


CLS 44/336
TXT Triazine or 1,3-diazine:

    Compositions under subclass 335 wherein the six-membered hetero ring has
    three nitrogen ring members, or has two nitrogen ring members in the 1- and
    3-positions of the ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 44/337
TXT Polymer or copolymer of a vinyl pyridine:

    Compositions under subclass 333 wherein the six-membered hetero ring
    compound results from polymerization or copolymerization of a vinyl
    pyridine.

    (1)     Note.  Polymerization or copolymerization normally occurs through
    the olefinically unsaturated vinyl group.

    (2)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is a
    copolymer of vinyl pyridine and t-butyl styrene.


CLS 44/338
TXT Acyclic chalcogen or acyclic nitrogen bonded directly to ring carbon of the
    hetero ring:

    Compositions under subclass 333 wherein a ring carbon of the six-membered
    hetero ring is bonded directly to acyclic nitrogen or to acyclic chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of ingredients provided for herein are:



CLS 44/339
TXT The hetero ring is unsubstituted or hydrocarbyl substituted only, or salts
    thereof (e.g., pyridyl salicylate salts, isoquinoline, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 333 wherein the ring members of the
    six-membered hetero ring may be unsubstituted or hydrocarbyl-substituted
    only, or salts thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of ingredients provided for herein are:



CLS 44/340
TXT The hetero ring contains five members including nitrogen and carbon (e.g.,
    pyrrolidones, porphines, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 329 which contain a five-membered hetero ring
    compound with carbon and nitrogen ring members.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is:



CLS 44/341
TXT Chalcogen in the hetero ring:
    Compositions under subclass 340 wherein the five-membered hetero ring has
    chalcogen (i.e. oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) as a ring member.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 44/342
TXT Plural nitrogens in the hetero ring (e.g., imidazolines, etc.):Compositions
    under subclass 340 wherein the five-membered hetero ring has plural
    nitrogen ring members.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 44/343
TXT At least three nitrogens in the hetero ring (e.g., triazoles, tetrazoles,
    etc.):Compositions under subclass 342 wherein the five-membered hetero ring
    has three or four nitrogen ring members.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 44/344
TXT Having -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen or NH, attached indirectly to the
    hetero ring by nonionic bonding:Compositions under subclass 342 wherein the
    five-membered hetero ring is attached indirectly, by nonionic bonding, to
    carbon of a -C(=X)- group, where X is NH or chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 44/345
TXT Carboxylic acid salt of the hetero ring compound, or a free carboxylic acid
    is present:Compositions under subclass 342 wherein the five-membered hetero
    ring compound is salified with a carboxylic acid, or exists in mixture with
    a carboxylic acid.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 44/346
TXT Polymeric or copolymeric compound having plural occurrences of the hetero
    ring (e.g., alpha-olefin maleimide copolymers, etc.):Compositions under
    subclass 340 wherein the five-membered hetero ring is present plural times
    in a polymeric or copolymeric compound.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is the
    copolymer of N-vinyl pyrrolidone with lauryl methacylate.


CLS 44/347
TXT Acyclic chalcogen bonded directly to each carbon adjacent to the ring
    nitrogen (e.g., succinimides, etc.):Compositions under subclass 340 wherein
    each carbon adjacent to the ring nitrogen of the five-membered hetero ring
    is bonded directly to acyclic chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 44/348
TXT Substituent on the ring nitrogen contains an acyclic -C(=X)-) group,
    wherein X is chalcogen:Compositions under subclass 347 in which acyclic
    -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium), is present in the ring nitrogen substituent.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 44/349
TXT The hetero ring contains six members including carbon and chalcogen (e.g.,
    six-membered sorbitans, ketone peroxides, etc.):Compositions under subclass
    329 which contain a six-membered hetero ring compound with carbon and
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) as the only ring
    members.


CLS 44/350
TXT The hetero ring contains five members including carbon and
    chalcogen:Compositions under subclass 329 which contain a five-membered
    hetero ring compound with carbon and chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) as the only ring members.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 44/351
TXT Acyclic chalcogen bonded directly to ring carbon of the hetero ring (e.g.,
    five-membered lactones, anhydrides, sorbitans, etc.):Compositions under
    subclass 350 in which ring carbon of the five-membered hetero ring is
    bonded directly to acyclic chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is the
    copolymer of ethylene and maleic anhydride.


CLS 44/352
TXT Ring carbons of the hetero ring are unsubstituted or hydrocarbyl
    substituted only:Compositions under subclass 350 in which the ring carbons
    of the five-membered hetero ring may be unsubstituted or hydrocarbyl
    substituted only.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of an ingredient provided for herein are:


CLS 44/353
TXT The hetero ring contains three or four members:
    Compositions under subclass 329 which contain a hetero ring compound with
    three or four ring members.


CLS 44/354
TXT Aluminum or heavy metal, other than lead, containing:
    Compositions under subclass 300 which contain an aluminum compound or a
    heavy metal, other than lead, compound.

    (1)     Note.  Arsenic is considered a heavy metal.

    (2)     Note.  Heavy metals are considered to be those having a specific
    gravity greater than 4.0.

    (3)     Note.  Lead compounds, except those containing lead and aluminum or
    an additional heavy metal, are excluded from this subclass and its indents,
    and placed in appropriate subclasses below.

    (4)     Note.  Examples of ingredients provided for by this subclass are
    aluminum hydroxide, vanadium trichloride, silver iodide, and ferrous oxide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    Appropriate subclasses, for compounds containing both lead and an
    additional functional group.  As examples, lead acetate is classified in
    subclass 385; lead sulfonates are classified in subclasses 370+.

    454+,   for tetrahydrocarbyl lead compounds.


CLS 44/355
TXT Inorganic metal carbonyl compound (e.g., iron carbonyl, etc.):Compositions
    under subclass 354 wherein carbon of carbon monoxide is bonded directly to
    metal.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of ingredients provided for herein are iron
    pentacarbonyl and:


CLS 44/356
TXT With organic -C(=O)O- containing compound (e.g., carboxylic acids, esters,
    etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 355 which contain, in addition to an inorganic
    metal carbonyl compound, an organic -C (=O) O- containing compound.

    (1)     Note.  An organic -C(=O)O- containing compound is one in which the
    carbon of the -C (=O)O- group is, or is attached directly or indirectly by
    nonionic bonding to, the carbon of an organic compound.

    (2)     Note.  See (4) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    "organic compound".

    (3)     Note.  Examples of ingredients provided for herein are oleic acid
    and isopropyl formate.


CLS 44/357
TXT Inorganic compound of Zr, Cr, Cu, Zn, or Ni:
    Compositions under subclass 354 which contain zirconium, chromium, copper,
    zinc, or nickel inorganic compounds.


CLS 44/358
TXT Organic compound containing the heavy metal or aluminum:
    Compositions under subclass 354 wherein heavy metal or aluminum is bonded
    directly or indirectly to carbon of an organic compound.

    (1)     Note.  See (4) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    "organic compound".

    (2)     Note.  Examples of ingredients provided for herein are dibutyl
    mercury and aluminum triethyl etherate.


CLS 44/359
TXT Metal carbonyl compound (e.g., cyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl,
    etc.):Compositions under subclass 358 wherein carbon of carbon monoxide is
    bonded directly to metal of the organo metal compound.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is benzene
    chromium tricarbonyl.


CLS 44/360
TXT Substituted or unsubstituted cyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl, with
    an organic compound having -C(=O)O-not bonded to heavy metal or
    aluminum:Compositions under subclass 359 which contain an organic -C(=O)O-
    compound, that is not a heavy metal or aluminum carboxylic acid salt, and
    which also contain cyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl which may be
    substituted.

    (1)     Note.  See (4) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    "organic compound".


CLS 44/361
TXT Five-membered, unsaturated carbocycle bonded directly to the heavy metal or
    aluminum (e.g., ferrocene, etc.):Compositions under subclass 358 wherein
    heavy metal or aluminum is bonded directly to a five-membered unsaturated
    carbocycle.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is
    cyclopentadienyl nickel nitrosyl.


CLS 44/362
TXT Heavy metal or aluminum complex of compounds having two -C(=X)- groups,
    wherein X is chalcogen, bonded to the same carbon, or enols thereof (e.g.,
    iron acetylacetonate, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 358 which contain complexes of compounds having
    two -C(=X)- groups, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium,
    or tellurium), bonded to the same carbon, or the enols thereof with heavy
    metal of aluminum.

    (1)     Note.  An example of the keto-enol tautomerism referred to above
    is:

            Either of these two tautomer types can form complexes with heavy
    metal or aluminum.


CLS 44/363
TXT Heavy metal or aluminum carboxylate salt or complex:
    Compositions under subclass 358 which contain a carboxylic acid salt or
    carboxylic acid complex of a heavy metal or aluminum.


CLS 44/364
TXT The heavy metal is Cr, Zr, or a lanthanide:
    Compositions under subclass 363 wherein the heavy metal that forms the salt
    or complex is chromium, zirconium, or a lanthanide element.

    (1)     Note.  The lanthanide elements are those of atomic numbers 57-61.

    (2)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is cerium
    naphthenate.


CLS 44/365
TXT Heavy metal or aluminum sulfonate salt or complex:
    Compositions under subclass 358 which contain a sulfonic acid salt or
    sulfonic acid complex heavy metal or aluminum.

    (1)     Note.  The general formula of a sulfonic acid is:

            wherein R is an organic radical.


CLS 44/366
TXT Heavy metal or aluminum salt of organic phosphorus acid:
    Compositions under subclass 358 which contain a phosphorus acid salt of
    aluminum or heavy metal.

    (1)     Note.  The phosphorus acids referred to herein are any organic
    phosphorus compounds having-XH, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), bonded directly to the phosphorus.

    (2)     Note.  See (4) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    "organic compound".


CLS 44/367
TXT Nitrogen bonded directly or indirectly to the heavy metal or
    aluminum:Compositions under subclass 358 wherein the heavy metal or
    aluminum is bonded directly or indirectly to nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of ingredients provided for herein are:


CLS 44/368
TXT Organic compound containing arsenic, antimony, or bismuth:
    Compositions under subclass 358 wherein the heavy metal is arsenic,
    antimony, or bismuth.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 44/369
TXT Containing -O-S(=O)(=O)O- or
    -O-S(=O)O-attached directly or indirectly to carbon by nonionic bonding
    (e.g., sulfate esters, sulfite esters, etc.):Compositions under subclass
    300 which contain a compound having carbon attached directly or indirectly
    to -O-S(=O) (=O)O- or to -O-S(=O)O- by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of ingredients provided for herein are:



CLS 44/370
TXT Containing organic -S(=O)(=O)O- compound (i.e., sulfonates):Compositions
    under subclass 300 which contain a compound having an organic sulfonate,
    i.e., -S(=O)(=O)O-, group.

    (1)     Note.  An organic sulfonate group is one wherein the -S(=O)(=O)O-
    group is attached directly or indirectly to carbon of an organic compound
    by nonionic bonding.  See (4) Note in the class definition for the
    definition of "organic compound".

    (2)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is an alkyl
    benzene sulfonic acid.


CLS 44/371
TXT Nitrogen or -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen, attached indirectly to the
    sulfonate group by nonionic bonding:Compositions under subclass 370 wherein
    the -S(=O)(=O)O- is attached indirectly to nitrogen or to -C(=X)-, wherein
    X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) by nonionic
    bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 44/372
TXT Hydrazine or organic nitrogen compound salts of sulfonic acids:Compositions
    under subclass 370 which contain a sulfonic acid which has been salified
    with hydrazine or with an organic nitrogen compound.

    (1)     Note.  A sulfonic acid has the general formula

            wherein R is an organic radical.

    (2)     Note.  By organic nitrogen compound is meant a compound having
    nitrogen attached directly or indirectly, by nonionic bonding, to carbon
    of an organic compound.  See (4) Note in the class definition for the
    definition of "organic compound".

    (3)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 44/373
TXT Overbased sulfonate or carbonated alkaline earth metal
    sulfonate:Compositions under subclass 370 which contain sulfonate compounds
    which are overbased or are carbonated.

    (1)     Note.  An overbased sulfonate is one in which an amount of alkaline
    metal (i.e., Mg, Ca, Ba, Sr) is present which is greater than the
    stoichiometric amount of metal which would be present if the parent
    sulfonic acid, R-S(=O) (=O)OH, were fully neutralized.  The exact structure
    of this type compound has not been determined.

    (2)     Note.  A carbonated alkaline earth metal sulfonate is the complex
    resulting from the reaction of carbon dioxide with alkaline earth metal
    sulfonate.


CLS 44/374
TXT With organic -C(=O)O- compound (e.g., carboxylic acids, esters,
    etc.):Compositions under subclass 370 which contain, in addition to an
    organic sulfonate compound, an organic -C(=O)O- group containing compound.

    (1)     Note.  An organic -C(=O)O- containing compound is one in which the
    carbon of the-C(=O)O- group is, or is attached directly or indirectly by
    nonionic bonding to, the carbon of an organic compound.

    (2)     Note.  See (4) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    "organic compound".


CLS 44/375
TXT Containing compound having phosphorus bonded directly to chalcogen and
    directly or indirectly to carbon by nonionic bonding (e.g., alkyl acid
    phosphates, etc.):Compositions under subclass 300 which contain
    phosphorous, bonded directly or indirectly to carbon by nonionic bonding,
    and bonded directly to chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium) by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of ingredients provided for herein are:


CLS 44/376
TXT Nitrogen attached to the phosphorus directly or indirectly by acyclic
    nonionic bonding:Compositions under subclass 375 wherein the phosphorus is
    attached to nitrogen directly or indirectly by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 44/377
TXT Lecithin or indeterminate structure reaction product thereof:Compositions
    under subclass 376 which contain a  lecithin, or a product of indeterminate
    structure formed by reaction of a lecithin.

    (1)     Note.  Lecithins have the following structure:

            wherein the R's are the same or different, and are acyclic
    hydrocarbon radicals of at least seven carbon atoms chain length.


CLS 44/378
TXT Carbon bonded directly to the phosphorus:
    Compositions under subclass 375 wherein the phosphorus is bonded directly
    to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 44/379
TXT Chalcogen or halogen attached indirectly to the phosphorus by acyclic
    nonionic bonding:Compositions under subclass 375 wherein the phosphorus is
    attached indirectly to halogen or to chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of ingredients provided for herein are:


CLS 44/380
TXT Organic nitrogen compound salt of organic phosphorus acids:
    Compositions under subclass 375 wherein an organic phosphorus acid is
    salified with an organic nitrogen compound.

    (1)     Note.  By organic nitrogen compound is meant a compound having
    nitrogen attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of
    an organic compound.  See (4) Note in the class definition for the
    definition of "organic compound".

    (2)     Note.  by organic phosphorus acid is meant a compound having
    phosphorus attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of
    an organic compound, and having -XH, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), bonded directly to the phosphorus.

    (3)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 44/381
TXT Chalcogen or additional nitrogen in the organic nitrogen
    compound:Compositions under subclass 380 wherein the organic nitrogen
    compound employed to salify the phosphorus acid contains chalcogen (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) or plural nitrogens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 44/382
TXT Phosphorus triester:
    Compositions under subclass 375 wherein phosphorus is bonded directly to
    three chalcogens, each of which is bonded to carbon, which carbon is not
    multiple bonded to a hetero atom.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 44/383
TXT Containing organic -C(=X)X- compound, wherein the X's are the same or
    diverse chalcogens, with at least one X being sulfur:Compositions under
    subclass 300 wherein the carbon of -C(=X)X- group, in which the X's are the
    same or diverse chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium),
    at least one X being sulfur, is, or is attached directly or indirectly by
    nonionic bonding to, carbon of an organic compound.

    (1)     Note.  See (4) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    "organic compound".

    (2)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 44/384
TXT Organic compound containing -NC or -CN group:
    Compositions under subclass 300 which contain the cyano group, -CN, or the
    isocyano group, -NC, attached directly or indirectly to carbon of an
    organic compound by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  See (4) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    "organic compound".

    (2)     Note.  Examples of ingredients provided for herein are
    olefin-heifenmethacrylonitrile polymers and methyl isonitrile.


CLS 44/385
TXT Containing organic -C(=O)O- compound (e.g., fatty acids, etc.):Compositions
    under subclass 300 wherein the carbon of a -C(=O)O- group is, or is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to, the carbon of an
    organic compound.

    (1)     Note.  See (4) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    "organic compound".

    (2)     Note.  Examples of ingredients provided for herein are saturated
    and unsaturated fatty acids, naphthenic acid, and alkali metal or ammonium
    salts of said fatty acids or naphthenic acid.


CLS 44/386
TXT Compound of indeterminate structure prepared by reacting an organic
    -C(=O)O-compound:Compositions under subclass 385 which contain a compound
    or compounds of indeterminate structure resulting from the reaction of an
    organic -C(=O)O- compound.


CLS 44/387
TXT Nitrogen or oxygen bonded directly to the carbon of the -C(=O)O- group
    (e.g., carbamic and carbonic compounds, etc.):Compositions under subclass
    385 wherein the carbon of the -C(=O)O- group is bonded directly to nitrogen
    or to oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of ingredients provided for herein are:



CLS 44/388
TXT The single bonded oxygen is bonded directly to an additional carbon, which
    carbon may be single bonded to any element but may be multiple bonded only
    to carbon (i.e., carboxylic acid esters):Compositions under subclass 385
    wherein an additional carbon is bonded directly to the single bonded
    oxygen, which additional carbon may be single bonded to any element but may
    be multiple bonded only to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is:



CLS 44/389
TXT Plural -C(=O)O- groups attached to each other directly or indirectly by
    nonionic bonding (e.g., polyesters, half ester-half acid compounds,
    etc.):Compositions under subclass 388 wherein the -C(=O)O- group is
    attached directly or indirectly to an additional -(C=O)O- group by nonionic
    bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 44/390
TXT Halogen or sulfur attached indirectly to the -C(=O)O- by nonionic
    bonding:Compositions under subclass 389 wherein the -C(=O)O- group is
    attached indirectly to sulfur or to halogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of ingredients provided for herein are chlorinated
    copolymers of ethylene and vinyl acetate, and:


CLS 44/391
TXT Nitrogen attached indirectly to the      -C(=O)O- by nonionic
    bonding:Compositions under subclass 389 wherein the -C(=O)O- group is
    attached indirectly to nitrogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 44/392
TXT Product polymerized through an olefinic double bond:
    Compositions under subclass 391 in which the compound containing the
    nitrogen and plural -C(=O)O- groups has been formed by polymerization of an
    olefinic double bond.

    (1)     Note. Olefinic double bonds are carbon to carbon double bond
    between acyclic carbons or alicyclic carbons.

    (2)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is the
    tripolymer of styrene, lauryl methacrylate, and N-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)
    methacrylamide.


CLS 44/393
TXT Copolymer of olefinically unsaturated hydrocarbon monomer and additional
    monomer (e.g., ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymers, etc.):Compositions under
    subclass 389 which are copolymers of a hydrocarbon monomer having an
    olefinic double bond and of one or more additional monomers.

    (1)     Note.  Olefinic double bonds are carbon to carbon double bonds
    between acyclic carbons or alicyclic carbons.


CLS 44/394
TXT With organic nitrogen compound:
    Compositions under subclass 393 which contain, in addition to the compound
    having plural -C(=O)O- groups, an additional compound which is an organic
    nitrogen compound.

    (1)     Note.  An organic nitrogen compound is one which has nitrogen
    attached directly or indirectly, by nonionic bonding, to carbon of an
    organic compound.  See (4) Note in the class definition for the definition
    of "organic compound".


CLS 44/395
TXT With additional synthetic nonhydrocarbon polymer:
    Compositions under subclass 393 which contain, in addition to the compound
    having plural -C(=O)O- groups, an additional compound which is a synthetic
    polymer having elements other than carbon and hydrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an ingredient combination provided for herein
    is the combination of ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer together with
    acylated polystyrene.


CLS 44/396
TXT One of the monomers contains a benzene ring (e.g., styrene,
    etc.):Compositions under subclass 393 wherein a benzene ring is present in
    one of the monomers that forms the copolymer.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of ingredients provided for herein are: a copolymer
    of ethylene and vinyl benzoate, and alkyl esters of styrene-maleic
    anhydride copolymers.


CLS 44/397
TXT Polymer or copolymer or nonhydrocarbon olefinically unsaturated monomers
    polymerized through an olefinic double bond (e.g., trimer esters,
    etc.):Compositions under subclass 389 wherein the compound having plural
    -C(=O)O- groups is a polymer or a copolymer of nonhydrocarbon olefinically
    unsaturated monomer(s) polymerized through an olefinic double bond.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of ingredients provided for herein are:  the
    homopolymer of lauryl methacrylate, and the esterified copolymer of vinyl
    methyl ether and maleic anhydride.


CLS 44/398
TXT Mono-, di-, or polyester of polycarboxylic acids:
    Compositions under subclass 389 which contain a polycarboxylic acid which
    is mono-, di-, or polyesterified.

    (1)     Note.  By polycarboxylic acid is meant a compound in which the
    carbons of plural -C(=O)O- groups are attached to each directly or through
    an acyclic or cyclic chain of atoms.


CLS 44/399
TXT Nitrogen attached indirectly to the      -C(=O)O- group by nonionic
    bonding:Compositions under subclass 388 wherein the -C(=O)O- group is
    attached indirectly to nitrogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 44/400
TXT Chalcogen or halogen attached indirectly to the -C(=O)O- group by nonionic
    bonding:Compositions under subclass 388 wherein the -C(=O)O- group is
    attached indirectly to halogen or to chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of ingredients provided for herein are:


CLS 44/401
TXT Alkyl ester of formic or alkanoic acids:
    Compositions under subclass 388 which contain formic or alkanoic acid alkyl
    esters.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of ingredients provided for herein are amyl acetate
    and methyl formate.


CLS 44/402
TXT With alkanol or dialkyl ether:
    Compositions under subclass 401 which contain, in addition to the formic or
    alkanoic acid ester, an alkanol or a dialkyl ether; alkanols have the
    formula ROH and dialkyl ethers have the formula ROR, with R in each case
    being alkyl.


CLS 44/403
TXT Plural -C(=O)O- groups attached to each other directly or indirectly by
    nonionic bonding:Compositions under subclass 385 wherein the -C(=O)O group
    is attached directly or indirectly to an additional -C(=O)O- group by
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of ingredients provided for herein are:


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322,    for ingredients containing the structural group:


CLS 44/404
TXT Carboxylic acid dimer, trimer, or homopolymer:
    Compositions under subclass 403 which contain dimers, trimers, or
    homopolymers of a carboxylic acid.


CLS 44/405
TXT Nitrogen attached indirectly to the      -C(=O)O- group by acyclic nonionic
    bonding:Compositions under subclass 385 wherein the -C(=O)O- group is
    attached indirectly to nitrogen by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 44/406
TXT The nitrogen is bonded directly to an additional -C(=O)- group:Compositions
    under subclass 405 wherein an additional -C(=O)- group is bonded directly
    to the nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 44/407
TXT Plural nitrogens or plural chalcogens attached indirectly to the -C(=O)O-
    group by acyclic nonionic bonding:Compositions under subclass 406 wherein
    the -C(=O)O- group is attached indirectly by acyclic nonionic bonding to
    plural nitrogens or to plural chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium,
    or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 44/408
TXT Organic nitrogen compound salt of carboxylic acids:
    Compositions under subclass 385 which contain a carboxylic acid which has
    been salified with an organic nitrogen compound.

    (1)     Note.  By organic nitrogen compound is meant a compound having
    nitrogen attached directly or indirectly, by nonionic bonding, to carbon of
    an organic compound.  See (4) Note in the class definition for the
    definition of "organic compound".


CLS 44/409
TXT Plural nitrogens in the organic nitrogen compound (e.g., diamines,
    aminoamides, guanidines, etc.):Compositions under subclass 408 wherein the
    organic nitrogen compound salifying agent contains plural nitrogens.


CLS 44/410
TXT Nitrogen or chalcogen attached indirectly to the -C(=O)O- group by nonionic
    bonding:Compositions under subclass 385 wherein the -C(=O)O- group is
    attached indirectly by nonionic bonding to nitrogen or to chalcogen (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of ingredients provided for herein are:


CLS 44/411
TXT With alkanol, ketone, or phenol:
    Compositions under subclass 385 which contain, in addition to the -C(=0)0-
    compound, an alkanol, ketone, or phenol; alkanol has the formula ROH
    wherein R is alkyl, phenol is characterized by having the -OH group bonded
    directly to a benzene ring, and ketone is characterized by having a -C(=O)-
    group bonded directly to two carbon atoms.


CLS 44/412
TXT Organic nitrogen compound containing:
    Compositions under subclass 300 which contain nitrogen compound, i.e., one
    in which an organic nitrogen is attached directly or indirectly, by
    nonionic bonding, to carbon of an organic compound.

    (1)     Note.  See (4) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    "organic compound".

    (2)     Note.  Examples of ingredients provided for herein are alkyl
    monoamines, alkenyl monoamines, and alicyclic amines.


CLS 44/413
TXT Nitro or nitroso bonded directly to carbon:
    Compositions under subclass 412 wherein carbon is bonded directly to a
    nitro or nitroso group.

    (1)     Note.  The nitro group is depicted as:

    (2)     Note.  The nitroso group is depicted as:

    (3)     Note.  Examples of ingredients provided for herein are:


CLS 44/414
TXT The carbon is acyclic or alicyclic:
    Compositions under subclass 413 wherein the nitro or nitroso group is
    bonded directly to an acyclic or alicyclic carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 44/415
TXT Compound of indeterminate structure prepared by reacting a phenol, an
    aldehyde, and ammonia or substituted ammonia:Compositions under subclass
    412 which contain a compound of indeterminate structure, resulting from the
    reaction of a phenol, an aldehyde, and ammonia or substituted ammonia.

    (1)     Note.  Many compounds which result from this type reaction are of
    known structure.  In this class, subclasses 424+ provide for many compounds
    of this type.


CLS 44/416
TXT The nitrogen is single bonded directly to nitrogen:
    Compositions under subclass 412 wherein two nitrogens of the organic
    nitrogen compound are single bonded directly to each other.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of ingredients provided for herein are:



CLS 44/417
TXT Plural nitrogens bonded directly to the same -C(=X)- group, wherein X is
    chalcogen (e.g., ureas, etc.).Compositions under subclass 412 wherein a
    -C(=X)- group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium) is bonded directly to plural nitrogens.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of ingredients provided for herein are:


CLS 44/418
TXT Having -C(=X)- bonded directly to the nitrogen, wherein X is
    chalcogen:Compositions under subclass 412 wherein the nitrogen is bonded
    directly to a-C (=X)- group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Carboxylic acid amides and thiocarboxylic acid amides are
    the principal ingredients for which provision is made herein.


CLS 44/419
TXT Additional nitrogen attached indirectly to the -C(=X)- group by acyclic
    nonionic bonding:Compositions under subclass 418 wherein the -C(=X)- group
    is attached indirectly to an additional nitrogen by acyclic nonionic
    bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 44/420
TXT Carbon double bonded to the nitrogen:
    Compositions under subclass 412 wherein the nitrogen is double bonded to
    carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 44/421
TXT Plural nitrogens attached indirectly to each other by acyclic nonionic
    bonding:Compositions under subclass 420 wherein nitrogen is attached by
    acyclic nonionic bonding to a further nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  Neither of the nitrogens in the text of this definition has
    to be the nitrogen that is double bonded to carbon.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of ingredients provided for herein are:



CLS 44/422
TXT Quaternary ammonium salt or amine oxide:
    Compositions under subclass 412 which contain amine oxide compounds or
    quaternary ammonium salts.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an amine oxide ingredient provided for herein
    is:

    (2)     Note.  An example of a quaternary amine salt ingredient provided
    for herein is:


CLS 44/423
TXT Chalcogen or phosphorus attached directly to the nitrogen by nonionic
    bonding:Compositions under subclass 412 wherein the nitrogen is attached
    directly to phosphorus or to chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium) by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples  of ingredients provided for herein are:



CLS 44/424
TXT Benzene ring attached indirectly to the nitrogen by acyclic nonionic
    bonding:Compositions under subclass 412 wherein the nitrogen is attached
    indirectly to a benzene ring by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 44/425
TXT Additional nitrogen attached indirectly to the nitrogen by acyclic nonionic
    bonding:Compositions under subclass 424 wherein the nitrogen is attached
    indirectly to an additional nitrogen by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 44/426
TXT Benzene ring bonded directly to the nitrogen:
    Compositions under subclass 412 in which the nitrogen is bonded directly to
    a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of ingredients provided for herein are aniline and
    the various alkyl substituted anilines.


CLS 44/427
TXT Chalcogen attached directly or indirectly to the benzene ring by nonionic
    bonding:Compositions under subclass 426 wherein the benzene ring is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to chalcogen (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 44/428
TXT Acyclic carbon bonded directly to the nitrogen:
    Compositions under subclass 427 wherein the nitrogen bonded to the benzene
    ring is also bonded directly to acyclic carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 44/429
TXT The benzene ring is part of a polycyclo ring system:
    Compositions under subclass 426 wherein the nitrogen is bonded directly to
    a benzene ring that is part of a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is
    alpha-naphthylamine.


CLS 44/430
TXT Plural nitrogens bonded to the same benzene:
    Compositions under subclass 426 wherein the benzene ring is bonded directly
    to plural nitrogens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is phenylene
    diamine.


CLS 44/431
TXT Plural rings bonded to the same nitrogen atom:
    Compositions under subclass 430 wherein a nitrogen is bonded directly to
    plural rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 44/432
TXT Plural nitrogens attached indirectly to each other by acyclic nonionic
    bonding:Compositions under subclass 412 in which an additional nitrogen is
    attached indirectly to the nitrogen by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 44/433
TXT Chalcogen attached indirectly to one of the nitrogens by acyclic nonionic
    bonding:Compositions under subclass 432 wherein one of the nitrogens is
    attached indirectly

            by acyclic nonionic bonding to chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 44/434
TXT Chalcogen or halogen attached indirectly to the nitrogen by acyclic
    nonionic bonding:Compositions under subclass 412 wherein the nitrogen is
    attached indirectly by acyclic nonionic bonding to halogen or chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of ingredients provided for herein are:



CLS 44/435
TXT Sulfur or phosphorus attached directly or indirectly, by nonionic bonding,
    to carbon of an organic compound:Compositions under subclass 300 wherein
    carbon of an organic compound is attached directly or indirectly, by
    nonionic bonding, to phosphorus or sulfur.

    (1)     Note.  See (4) Note, in the class definition, for the definition of
    "organic compound".


CLS 44/436
TXT Organic oxygen compound containing (e.g., alicyclic alcohols,
    hypochlorites, etc.):Compositions under subclass 300 which contain an
    organic oxygen compound, i.e., a compound wherein oxygen is attached
    directly or indirectly, by nonionic bonding, to carbon of an organic
    compound.

    (1)     Note.  See (4) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    "organic compound".

    (2)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is:



CLS 44/437
TXT The oxygen is part of a -C(=O)- group:
    Compositions under subclass 436 wherein the organic compound has the oxygen
    present as a carbonyl group, -C(=O)-.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of ingredients provided for herein are aldehydes,
    aromatic ketones, and carboxylic acid halides.


CLS 44/438
TXT With alkanol or dialkyl ether:
    Compositions under subclass 437 which contain, in addition to the -C(=O)-
    compound, an alkanol or a dialkyl ether; alkanol is ROH and dialkyl ether
    is ROR, with R in all occurrences being alkyl.


CLS 44/439
TXT Acyclic ketone:
    Compositions under subclass 437 wherein the -C(=O)- compound is an acyclic
    ketone.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is acetone.


CLS 44/440
TXT Plural benzene rings bonded directly to each other or to the same acyclic
    carbon:Compositions under subclass 436 wherein an acyclic carbon is bonded
    to plural benzene rings, or plural benzene rings are bonded directly to
    each other.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of ingredients provided for herein are:


CLS 44/441
TXT Oxygen bonded directly to a polycyclo carbocyclic ring system:Compositions
    under subclass 436 wherein a polycyclo carbocyclic ring system is bonded
    directly to oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of ingredients provided for herein are alpha- and
    beta-naphthol.


CLS 44/442
TXT Plural oxygens bonded directly to the same monocyclic benzene
    ring:Compositions under subclass 436 wherein a benzene ring is bonded
    directly to more than one oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 44/443
TXT Plural oxygens attached indirectly to each other by acyclic nonionic
    bonding:Compositions under subclass 436 wherein plural oxygens are
    attached, by acyclic nonionic bonding, indirectly to each other.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 44/444
TXT Plural oxygens bonded directly to the same acyclic or alicyclic carbon
    (e.g., acetals,etc.):Compositions under subclass 443 wherein an acyclic or
    alicyclic carbon is bonded to more than one oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 44/445
TXT All the oxygens are present as -OH groups (e.g., glycols, triols,
    etc.):Compositions under subclass 443 wherein the oxygens of the ingredient
    are present only as -OH groups.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of ingredients provided for herein are glycols and
    higher polyols.


CLS 44/446
TXT Alkanol compound with dialkyl ether compound:
    Compositions under subclass 436 which contain an alkanol compound, ROH, in
    combination with a dialky ether compound, ROR; R, in each instance, is
    alkyl.


CLS 44/447
TXT Ether:
    Compositions under subclass 436 wherein an oxygen is bonded directly to two
    carbon atoms.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 44/448
TXT Dialkyl ether:
    Compositions under subclass 447 wherein oxygen is bonded directly to two
    identical or different alkyl groups.


CLS 44/449
TXT Tertiary carbon bonded directly to the ether oxygen:
    Compositions under subclass 448 wherein the oxygen is bonded directly to a
    tertiary carbon atom.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 44/450
TXT Phenol or salt thereof:
    Compositions under subclass 436 which contain the -OH group bonded directly
    to a benzene ring, and the salts thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of ingredients provided for herein are phenol, the
    various alkyl-substituted phenols, and the alkali metal salts of such
    compounds.


CLS 44/451
TXT Alkanol:
    Compositions under subclass 436 wherein oxygen is present as an -OH group
    which is bonded directly to an alkyl group.


CLS 44/452
TXT Mixture of alkanols:
    Compositions under subclass 451 wherein at least two different alkanols are
    present.


CLS 44/453
TXT Dehydration processes, and products thereof:
    Processes under subclass 451 which are directed to removal of water from
    alkanols, and the products of such processes.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a process provided for herein is the treatment
    of a gasoline-isopropanol-water mixture with a water coalescer to remove
    water.


CLS 44/454
TXT Lead-containing organic compound:
    Compositions under subclass 300 which contain compounds in which lead is
    attached directly or indirectly to carbon of an organic compound.

    (1)     Note.  See (4) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    "organic compound".

    (2)     Note.  Examples of ingredients provided for herein are tetraethyl
    lead, tetraphenyl lead, and tetramethyl lead.

    (3)     Note.  Ingredients containing both a functional group, previously
    provided for, and lead in the same compound are classified with the
    functional group previously provided for.  See the search notes in subclass
    354.


CLS 44/455
TXT With inorganic additive:
    Compositions under subclass 454 which contain, in addition to an organolead
    compound, an ingredient which is inorganic.


CLS 44/456
TXT Halogen bonded directly to carbon:
    Compositions under subclass 300 which contain carbon bonded directly to
    halogen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of ingredients provided for herein are
    dichloroacetylene and benzotrifluoride.


CLS 44/457
TXT Inorganic component (e.g., carbon dioxide, etc.):
    Compositions under subclass 300 in which an inorganic ingredient is present.

    (1)     Note.  Water is provided for as an ingredient herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301+,   for liquid fuels which are aqueous emulsions.


CLS 44/458
TXT Nitrogen or sulfur containing (e.g., carbon disulfide, etc.):Compositions
    under subclass 457 wherein the inorganic ingredient contains nitrogen or
    sulfur.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of ingredients provided for herein are ammonia,
    sodium nitrate, hydrazine, and hydrogen persulfides.


CLS 44/459
TXT Solid hydrocarbon polymer containing:
    Compositions under subclass 300 which contain polymeric ingredients which
    are both solid and hydrocarbonaceous.

    (1)     Note.  The polymers provided for herein can be homopolymeric or
    copolymeric.

    (2)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is solid
    polyisobutylene.


CLS 44/490
TXT PEAT:
    Composition according to the class definition including peat, which is
    defined as partly decayed vegetable matter accumulation in marshes,
    containing about 25 percent water and about 50 percent wood fiber, and a
    method for preparing such composition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    605,    for fuel compositions containing vegetation.


CLS 44/491
TXT Briquet:
    Subject matter under subclass 490 in the form of a fuel briquet, which form
    is described in the (2) Note to the class definition.


CLS 44/492
TXT Process including heat:
    Process under subclass 490 specific to preparing peat for a fuel, which
    utilizes the wet carbonizing processes and related steps to dehydrate the
    material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas: Heating and Illuminating, (subclasses 209 - 211) for processes
    of making gas from wood, coal, or oil.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclass 25 for a process of
    thermolytic distillation of peat.


CLS 44/500
TXT PARTICULATE (E.G., POWDERED, ETC):

    Product or process under the class definition comprising a mass of solid
    fuel particles, each particle of which generally is too small to be
    manipulated individually by a human hand.

    (1)     Note.  A process for comminuting solid fuel to achieve a powdered
    state is included in this subclass when the comminution is the only step of
    the process, is the final step of a multi-step procedure or is otherwise
    not merely incidental to subsequent treatment step, e.g., purification,
    etc., of a fuel substance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    595,    for a fuel consolidation process using a specified comminuting
    condition or technique.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclass 42 for a collection
    of patents concerned with the particle size of a material fed to a process
    of that class (201).


CLS 44/501
TXT Treated to reduce spontaneous ignition:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 in which the fuel product mass has a
    reduced tendency to burst into flame or otherwise burn without the
    application or external energy.


CLS 44/502
TXT Solid particles containing liquid fuel:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 in which a fuel product particle has a
    normally-void portion or passageway which if filled or partly filled with a
    liquid fuel.


CLS 44/503
TXT Mixed with particles of different size:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 in which a fuel product particle has
    normally-void portion or passageway which is filled or partly filled with a
    liquid fuel.

    (1)     Note.  The other particle may be a fuel particle or a nonfuel
    particle.


CLS 44/504
TXT Mixed with particles of different composition:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 in which a fuel particle is mixed with
    another particle having a different chemical make-up.

    (1)     Note.  The other particle may be fuel particle or a nonfuel
    particle.


CLS 44/505
TXT Process including removal of undesirable:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 drawn to a process for making a
    particulate fuel in which, during the course of the procedure, impurities
    are removed from the fuel.


CLS 44/506
TXT COMBINED WITH FRICTION IGNITING MASS OR SURFACE:

    Product or process under the class definition in which a fuel product or
    object carries a surface or mass which, upon frictional engagement with a
    suitable surface, can burst into flame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclass 1 for apparatus, and subclass 2 for a
    process, for making match-book packages.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 275.6, 275.11 and 380 for
    subject matter of that class having an igniter.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 50+ for a wood match-making process or
    apparatus.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, appropriate
    subclasses for a match-head composition, per se.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 85+ and 96+ for a match
    or matches with a holder, folder or case.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 296+ for an igniting charge-holding and
    firing means.


CLS 44/507
TXT Hand manipulable (e.g., match, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 506 designed to be held in the hand of the
    user for ignition purposes.

    (1)     Note.  Patents which claim a match head composition and also a
    claim to a base having a single coating of the composition even though the
    composition of the base is specified with no inclusion of structure other
    than by name only, e.g., splint, stick, tape, card are classified as
    original in Class 149, Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, and
    cross referenced to this class (44).  A previously coated base to which the
    match head composition is applied is considered structure for this class
    (44).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 394+ for apparatus or a method for
    making a matchbook.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 50+ for a wood match-making process or
    apparatus.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, appropriate
    subclasses, for thermic compositions, per se, and see (1) Note, above.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 96+ for a match or
    matches with a holder, folder, or case.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 269+ for an igniting charge holding and
    firing means.


CLS 44/508
TXT Plural integral (e.g., string, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 507 in which a single object has a plurality
    of ignition areas or surfaces, usually designed for being torn apart to
    constitute individual matches.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass, the potentially individual matches are
    joined head-to-toe.


CLS 44/509
TXT Parallel:
    Subject matter under subclass 508 in which the potentially individual
    matches are arranged side-by-side, i.e., head-to-head and/or toe-to-toe.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclass 395 for processes of making matchbook
    covers.


CLS 44/510
TXT With scratcher:
    Devices under subclass 507 in which each match has on its stem or otherwise
    individually associated with it a friction surface on which a match,
    usually another match, can be scratched.


CLS 44/511
TXT MATCH SPLINT OR STICK:
    Subject matter under the class definition in which the composition
    comprises a hand-manipulable fuel object suitable for bearing an ignition
    device or surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 288+ for a candle or taper.


CLS 44/512
TXT Process of making:
    Processes under subclass 511 of handling or steps in manipulating the
    splints or sticks in constructing them.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 50+ for a wood match-making process or
    apparatus.


CLS 44/519
TXT PROVIDED WITH WICK OR FUSE:

    Product or process under the class definition in which fuel product carries
    an elongated element which, upon ignition, either (a) has capillarity
    sufficient to convey a melted component of the fuel product from one part
    of the product to the point of ignition (flame), to be burned thereat or
    (b) comprises a thermic or explosive composition which rapidly conveys the
    flame or ignition point from one part to another or the fuel product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclass 275.9 for a fuse, per se.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, appropriate
    subclasses for a fuse composition, per se.

    431,    Combustion, for a wicked product in which all of the fuel is
    meltable, e.g., a candle.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent or Support Therefor: Product or Process of
    Making, subclasses 400+ for a wick composition, per se.


CLS 44/520
TXT FUEL PRODUCT HAVING PASSAGE WAY FOR GAS:

    Product or process under the class definition having a void space which is
    specified as being suitable for the passage or gas or vapor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions for Charges, subclasses 2+ for
    such subject matter under subclass 520 in which the fuel product comprises
    one integral fuel element attached to another element, the gas passageway
    extends from one side all the way through to an opposite side of the
    product, and no material obstructs the void.


CLS 44/521
TXT Plural elements, with passageway unobstructed from side to opposite side:
    Subject matter under subclass 520 in which the fuel product comprises one
    integral fuel element attached to another element, the gas passageway
    extends from one side all the way through to an opposite side of the
    product, and no material obstructs the void.

    (1)     Note.  A criterion for considering a passageway as being
    unobstructed is whether light can pass through the passageway.


CLS 44/522
TXT Single element having aperture:

    Subject matter under subclass 520 in which an integral fuel element has one
    or more holes in it.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 131+ for an
    apertured sheet or web in general.


CLS 44/530
TXT FUEL PRODUCT OF DEFINED SHAPE OR STRUCTURE:
    Subject matter under the class definition in which the composition is
    described in geometrical terms, e.g., round, hollow, tapered, etc., or in
    terms of the dimensions of one portion relative to another portion, e.g.,
    smaller, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, appropriate subclasses, especially
    subclasses 283+ for shaped explosive, pyrotechnic, and thermic compositions.

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 1+ for a tobacco product intended to be burned.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, subclasses 2+ for
    explosive or thermic compositions of a particular shape or structure.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 288+ for a candle or taper, i.e., a shaped
    fuel block of a meltable material with an embedded wick.


CLS 44/531
TXT Composed of moveable (e.g., articulated, etc.) or readily-breakable
    sections:Subject matter under subclass 530 having weakened (e.g.,
    perforated, thinned, etc.) into smaller pieces, or having such pieces
    attached to each other in a moveable fashion, usually to change the overall
    dimensions of the product.


CLS 44/532
TXT Shaped or arranged for easier ignition:
    Subject matter under subclass 530 having a fuel element so shaped or
    arranged with other elements that catching fire is made easier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, subclasses 2+ for
    explosive compositions of particular shape or structure.


CLS 44/533
TXT And containing easier-igniting material:
    Subject matter under subclass 532 containing a first material which catches
    fire at a lower temperature than a second material making up the product.


CLS 44/534
TXT Material acts as at least part of a wrapper or packaging:
    Subject matter under subclass 533 in which the first material encloses or
    ties up the second material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    541,    for a fuel product package or bundle in which the fuel elements are
    of undefined shape.


CLS 44/535
TXT Cylindrical, e.g., log, etc.:
    Subject matter under subclass 530 in which thr product is elongated and has
    a roughly circular cross-section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    522,    for a hollow log fuel product.


CLS 44/540
TXT WITH INCOMBUSTIBLE CARRIER     (E.G., TORCH ETC.):
    Product or process under the class definition in which the fuel composition
    is contained within or is handlable by means of a nonburnable element.

    (1)     Note.  The carrier may be such that the burning fuel can be
    transported from place to place.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 59.5 for a smudge pot.


CLS 44/541
TXT BUNDLED, COVERED OR WRAPPED:
    Product or process under the class definition on which a plurality of fuel
    elements of generally undefined shape is covered by or contained within a
    wrapper or has separable elements which can be handled together.

    (1)     Note.  The wrapping or bundling material is usually combustible.

    (2)     Note.  The wrapping or packaging may be for ease of selling or
    handling the fuel, for protection from the weather, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    602,    for a fuel composition having an antidusting additive mixed
    therewith or coated thereon on individual fuel elements or pieces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 442 for a bale-tie package
    not primarily intended for fuel use.

    428,    Stock Material or miscellaneous Articles, subclass 2 for a
    compacted trash or refuse bundle, and subclass 576 for a shaped metallic
    configuration or package suitable for melting.


CLS 44/542
TXT COATED OR IMPREGNATED FOR EASIER IGNITION:

    Product or process under the class definition in which a first fuel
    material is coated or impregnated with a second material having a lower
    ignition temperature.

    (1)     Note.  The first material often is a conventional piece of wood,
    lump or coal, or body occurring in nature, e.g., a corn-cob, a pine-cone,
    etc.

    (2)     Note.  Where the lower-ignition material is added to fuel particles
    before consolidation and serves as a binder for the fuel particles, the
    composition is provided for below in subclasses 542+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    533,    for a shaped body coated or impregnated with a combustion-aiding
    composition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions for Charges, subclasses 3+ for a
    product of that class having a coated component.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 327 for a burner comprising a flame holding
    structure including an incombustible porous, capillary or permeable member
    of the type charged with liquid fuel by immersion.


CLS 44/543
TXT Solid fiber or particle in coating (e.g., sawdust, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 542 in which the second material envelops the
    first and includes particulate or fibrous material.


CLS 44/544
TXT With wax:

    Subject matter under sublass 542 in which the second material is one which
    melts under the influence of combustion.


CLS 44/545
TXT With normally-liquid material:

    Subject matter under subclass 542 in which the second material is liquid
    under ambient conditions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    502,    for a fuel particle containing a liquid fuel.


CLS 44/550
TXT CONSOLIDATED SOLIDS (E.G., BRIQUET, ETC.):

    Product or process under the class definition in which a processed fuel
    comprises a larger object, particle, etc., than existed in the natural or
    synthetic starting fuel material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclass 42 for a collection
    of patents dealing with the size of particles fed to a process of that
    class (201).

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    for molding processes in general.


CLS 44/551
TXT Containing specified binder:
    Subject matter under subclass 550 wherein a material, described in terms of
    its chemical composition or chemical structure, is added to a solid fuel in
    order to achieve consolidation to a larger physical size.

    (1)     Note.  To be classified herein, a claim must recite a binding
    material characterized in terms of its chemical nature, i.e., its
    composition or structure; use of functional language, e.g., "agglomerating
    binder", etc., does not satisfy this criterion.

    (2)     Note.  A substance meeting the requirement of an indent under
    subclass 551 shall be presumed to serve  a binding function, in the absence
    of a specific statement to the contrary.  If a material in a consolidated
    fuel composition is stated specifically to serve a purpose other than
    binding, is not specified as a binder, and there is no specified binder in
    the claim, the composition shall be classified in another appropriate
    subclass under subclass 550.

    (3)     Note.  Examples of binding substances provided for herein as part
    of a consolidated solid fuel composition are:  (1) hydrocarbon oils which
    are solid, (2) fly ash, and (3) liquid extract of cactus plants.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses, for a
    coating or plastic composition which may be used as a binder for fuel
    particles or as  coating for fuel, but which is not, per se, useful as a
    fuel.


CLS 44/552
TXT With sewage, animal blood, or animal manure:
    Subject matter under subclass 551 wherein sewage, animal blood, or animal
    manure is a component in a consolidated solid fuel composition.

    (1)     Note.  The sewage, animal blood, or animal manure will normally,
    but not necessarily, serve a binding function.

    (2)     Note.  Such expressions as "town trash", "town garbage", "refuse",
    etc. will not be construed to include sewage, animal blood, or animal
    manure, unless such is specifically stated.  Claims classifiable on the
    basis of such substances as "town trash", "town garbage", and "refuse" are
    classified in this class, subclass 551.


CLS 44/553
TXT With synthetic organic polymer prepared by polymerizing specified monomer
    (e.g., polyacrylonitrile, urea-formaldehyde resins, etc.):Subject matter
    under subclass 551 wherein a synthetic polymer or copolymer, prepared via
    polymerization of a specified monomer or copolymerization of specified
    monomers, is a component in a consolidated solid fuel composition.

    (1)     Note.  The polymers will normally, but not necessarily, serve a
    binding function.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for consolidated solid fuel
    compositions solely because of the presence of a naturally-occurring
    polymeric substance which has been chemically modified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    563,    573 and 579, for consolidated solid fuel compositions containing
    "resin" as a component.


CLS 44/554
TXT With vegetable flour, vegetable meal, or dairy product:
    Subject matter under subclass 551 wherein vegetable flour, vegetable meal,
    or a dairy product is a component in a solid fuel composition.

    (1)     Note.  The vegetable flour, vegetable meal, or dairy product will
    normally, but not necessarily, serve a binding function.

    (2)     Note.  Description of a substance as "coal flour" does not qualify
    for inclusion in this subclass as a binder.  Coal flour is generally
    considered as a solid fuel, per se, and, as such, may be classified in any
    of subclass 551 or its indents when claimed in admixture with a specified
    binder.

    (3)     Note.  The vegetable flour and vegetable meal will most often be
    described as flour, flour paste, and meal; examples of dairy products
    provided for herein are milk and cheese.


CLS 44/555
TXT With glue or gelatin:
    Subject matter under subclass 551 wherein glue or gelatin is a component in
    a consolidated solid fuel composition.

    (1)     Note.  The glue or gelatin will normally, but not necessarily,
    serve a binding function.

    (2)     Note.  The term "gelatinized" often has no reference to gelatin,
    per se, but instead refers to a modification of physical state; the term,
    therefore, does not, per se, qualify for classification herein.

    (3)     Note.  Gelatin is a protein; glue, without further specification,
    is a naturally occurring animal product.

    (4)     Note.  The term "glutinous" often refers simply to the consistency
    of a substance, and does not, per se, qualify for classification herein.


CLS 44/556
TXT With nonproteinaceous organic nitrogen compound (e.g., hexamethyl
    enetetramine, alkanolamine salts, etc.):Subject matter under subclass 551
    wherein a nonproteinaceous organic nitrogen compound is a component in a
    consolidated solid fuel composition.

    (1)     Note.  An organic nitrogen compound is one wherein nitrogen is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.

    (2)     Note.  See (4) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    "organic compound".

    (3)     Note.  The organic nitrogen compound normally, but not necessarily,
    serves a binding function.


CLS 44/557
TXT With phosphorus- or boron-containing compound:
    Subject matter under subclass 551 wherein a phosphorus-containing compound
    or a boron-containing compound is a component in a consolidated solid fuel
    composition.

    (1)     Note.  The phosphorus- or boron-containing compound normally, but
    not necessarily, serves a binding function.


CLS 44/558
TXT With oxidant (e.g., nitrates, chlorates, chromates, permanganates, black
    manganese oxide, etc.):Subject matter under subclass 551 wherein an
    oxygen-furnishing substance is a component in a consolidated solid fuel
    composition.

    (1)     Note.  The oxygen-furnishing substance may also serve a binding
    function.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, subclasses 17+, for
    solidified matrices which include an oxidizing agent, and which function as
    explosives or propellants as provided by Class 149.


CLS 44/559
TXT With gypsum or silicon-containing material (e.g., clay, portland cement,
    water glass, etc.):Subject matter under subclass 551 wherein gypsum or a
    silicon-containing  material is a component in a consolidated solid fuel
    composition.

    (1)     Note.  The gypsum or silicon-containing material normally, but not
    necessarily, serves a binding function.

    (2)     Note.  Gypsum, calcium sulfate, is also known as plaster of paris.

    (3)     Note.  Cement, without further specification, shall be considered a
    silicon-containing material; there do exist, however, nonsiliceous cements,
    and such cements specified as being nonsiliceous shall be classified
    commensurate with their specified nature.


CLS 44/560
TXT With nonfibrous carbohydrate (e.g., molasses, starch, etc.):Subject matter
    under subclass 559 wherein the consolidated solid fuel composition also
    contains a nonfibrous carbohydrate as a component.

    (1)     Note.  The nonfibrous carbohydrate normally, but not necessarily,
    serves a binding function.

    (2)     Note.  For the definition of carbohydrate, see the Class 536 class
    definition.

    (3)     Note.  The expression "nonfibrous" is intended to differentiate
    paper and raw, woody-type material, such as leaves, sawdust, seaweed, bark,
    etc., from carbohydrate substances which, by virtue of processing, no
    longer retain fibrous character.


CLS 44/561
TXT With pitch, tar, tar oil, or bitumen:
    Subject matter under subclass 559 wherein the consolidated solid fuel
    composition also contains a pitch, tar, tar oil, or bitumen as a component.

    (1)     Note.  Bituminous coal is not a bitumen; asphalts and asphaltenes
    are bitumens.

    (2)     Note.  Pitch, tar, and tar oil must be identified as such in order
    to be classified herein; pitch, tar, and tar oil from any source are
    classified herein.


CLS 44/562
TXT With paraffin, liquid hydrocarbon, or wax hydrocarbon:
    Subject matter under subclass 559 wherein the consolidated solid fuel
    composition also contains paraffin, a liquid hydrocarbon, or a hydrocarbon
    wax as a component.

    (1)     Note.  The paraffin, liquid hydrocarbon, and hydrocarbon wax
    normally, but not necessarily, serve a binding function.

    (2)     Note.  Hydrocarbon oils shall be considered to be liquid
    hydrocarbon oils, unless otherwise specified.

    (3)     Note.  Hydrocarbon residuums and petroleum residuums shall be
    considered liquid, unless otherwise specified.

    (4)     Note.  Wax, without further specification, shall be considered
    hydrocarbon wax.

    (5)     Note.  See (5) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    hydrocarbon.


CLS 44/563
TXT With fibrous vegetable material, resin, or organic -C(=O)O- compound (e.g.,
    rosin, tall oil, tallow, pine resin, etc.):Subject matter under subclass
    559 wherein the consolidated solid fuel composition also contains fibrous
    vegetable material, resin, or an organic -C(=O)O- compound.

    (1)     Note.  Fibrous vegetable material is vegetable material whose
    fibrous nature has not been destroy by processing; examples of fibrous
    vegetable materials are paper, cellulose, wood, bark, and sawdust.

    (2)     Note.  The term "resin" is intended to include all material
    identified as unspecified resin, all natural resins, and synthetic resins
    not prepared by polymerization or copolymerization of a specified monomer
    or specified monomers.

    (3)     Note.  An organic -C(=O)O- compound is one in which the carbon of
    the    -C(=O)O- group is, or is attached directly or indirectly by nonionic
    bonding to, the carbon of an organic compound.

    (4)     Note.  See (4) Note in the class definition of the definition of
    "organic compound".

    (5)     Note.  The components of the consolidated solid fuel compositions
    specified in this subclass normally, but not necessarily, serve a binding
    function.


CLS 44/564
TXT Tar, pitch, or tar oil:
    Subject matter under subclass 551 wherein tar, pitch, or tar oil is a
    component in a consolidated solid fuel composition.

    (1)     Note.  The tar, pitch, or tar oil normally, but not necessarily,
    serves a binding function.

    (2)     Note.  Tar, pitch, or tar oil must be identified as such in order
    to be classified herein; tar, pitch, and tar oil from any source are
    classified herein.


CLS 44/565
TXT With nonfibrous carbohydrate (e.g., molasses, starch, etc.):Subject matter
    under subclass 564 wherein the consolidated solid fuel composition also
    contains a nonfibrous carbohydrate as a component.

    (1)     Note.  The nonfibrous carbohydrate normally, but not necessarily,
    serves a binding function.

    (2)     Note.  For the definition of carbohydrate, see the Class 536 class
    definition.

    (3)     Note.  The expression "nonfibrous" is intended to differentiate
    paper and raw, woody-type material, such as leaves, sawdust, seaweed, bark,
    etc. from carbohydrate substances which, by virtue of processing, no longer
    retain fibrous character.


CLS 44/566
TXT With elemental metal, metal oxide, limestone, or inorganic metal salt
    (e.g., lime, etc.):Subject matter under subclass 564 wherein the
    consolidated solid fuel composition also contains elemental metal, metal
    oxide, limestone, or an inorganic metal salt.

    (1)     Note.  The metal, metal oxide, limestone, or inorganic metal salt
    normally, but not necessarily, serves a binding function.


CLS 44/567
TXT With fibrous vegetable material (e.g., cellulose, wood, paper, sawdust,
    etc.):Subject matter under subclass 564 wherein the consolidated solid fuel
    composition also contains fibrous vegetable material.

    (1)     Note.  The fibrous vegetable material normally, but not
    necessarily, serves a binding function.

    (2)     Note.  Fibrous vegetable material is vegetable material whose
    fibrous nature has not been destroyed by processing; examples of fibrous
    vegetable materials are paper, cellulose, wood, bark and sawdust.


CLS 44/568
TXT Solid fuel, or solid fuel and water, are the only other components of the
    composition:Subject matter under subclass 564 wherein, besides the tar,
    pitch, or tar oil, the only additional components of the consolidated solid
    fuel composition are solid fuel, or a mixture of water and solid fuel.


CLS 44/569
TXT With bitumen or asphaltic material:
    Subject matter under subclass 551 wherein a bitumen or asphaltic material
    is a component in a consolidated solid fuel composition.

    (1)     Note.  The bitumen or asphaltic material normally, but not
    necessarily, serves a binding function.

    (2)     Note.  Bituminous coal is not considered a bitumen.

    (3)     Note.  Asphalt, asphaltum, and asphaltene are the asphaltic
    materials intended to be classified herein.


CLS 44/570
TXT With elemental metal, metal oxide, limestone or inorganic metal salt (e.g.,
    lime, etc.):Subject matter under subclass 569 where the consolidated solid
    fuel composition also contains elemental metal, metal oxide, limestone, or
    inorganic metal salt.

    (1)     Note.  The metal, metal oxide, limestone, or inorganic metal salt
    normally, but not necessarily, serves a binding function.


CLS 44/571
TXT With paraffin, liquid hydrocarbon, or wax hydrocarbon:
    Subject matter under subclass 569 wherein the consolidated solid fuel
    composition also contains paraffin, a liquid hydrocarbon, or a wax
    hydrocarbon as a component.

    (1)     Note.  The paraffin, liquid hydrocarbon, and hydrocarbon wax
    normally, but not necessarily, serve a binding function.

    (2)     Note.  Hydrocarbon oils shall be considered to be liquid
    hydrocarbon oils, unless otherwise specified.

    (3)     Note.  Hydrocarbon residuums and petroleum residuums shall be
    considered liquid, unless otherwise specified.

    (4)     Note.  Wax, without further specification, shall be considered
    hydrocarbon wax.

    (5)     Note.  See (4) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    "organic compound".


CLS 44/572
TXT With paraffin, liquid hydrocarbon, or wax hydrocarbon:
    Subject matter under subclass 551 wherein a paraffin, liquid hydrocarbon,
    or a wax hydrocarbon is a component in a consolidated solid fuel
    composition.

    (1)     Note.  The paraffin, liquid hydrocarbon, or wax hydrocarbon
    normally, but not necessarily, serves a binding function.

    (2)     Note.  Hydrocarbon oils shall be considered to be liquid
    hydrocarbon oils, unless otherwise specified.

    (3)     Note.  Hydrocarbon residuums and petroleum residuums shall be
    considered liquid, unless otherwise specified.

    (4)     Note.  Wax, without further specification, shall be considered
    hydrocarbon wax.

    (5)     Note.  See (4) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    "organic compound".


CLS 44/573
TXT With resin or organic -C(=O)O- compound (e.g., rosin, tall oil, tallow,
    pine resin, carboxylic acid esters, etc.):Subject matter under subclass 572
    wherein the consolidated solid fuel composition also contains a resin or an
    organic -C(=O)O- compound as a component.

    (1)     Note.  The resin or organic
    -C(=O)O-compound normally, but not necessarily, serves a binding function.

    (2)     Note.  The term "resin" is intended to include all material
    identified as unspecified resin, all natural resins, and synthetic resins
    not prepared by polymerization or copolymerization of a specified monomer
    or specified monomers.

    (3)     Note.  An organic -C(=O)O- compound is one in which the carbon of
    the    -C(=O)O- group is, or is attached directly or indirectly by nonionic
    bonding to, the carbon of an organic compound.

    (4)     Note.  See (4) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    "organic compound".


CLS 44/574
TXT With preliminary purification of coal (e.g., oil agglomerates of
    desulfurized or deashed coal, etc.):Subject matter under subclass 572
    wherein the solid fuel to be consolidated is coal and, prior to
    consolidation with paraffin, liquid hydrocarbon, or wax hydrocarbon, the
    coal is subjected to a purification process.

    (1)     Note.  Most often, the preliminary purification process concludes
    with a water washing, after which the coal is subject to, e.g.,
    agglomeration with oil.


CLS 44/575
TXT With elemental metal, metal oxide, limestone, or inorganic metal salt
    (e.g., lime, etc.):Subject matter under subclass 572 wherein the
    consolidated solid fuel composition also contains elemental metal, metal
    oxide, limestone, or an inorganic metal salt.

    (1)     Note.  The elemental metal, metal oxide, limestone, or inorganic
    metal salt normally, but not necessarily, serves a binding function.


CLS 44/576
TXT With fibrous vegetable material (e.g., cellulose, wood, paper, sawdust,
    etc.):Subject matter under subclass 572 wherein the consolidated solid fuel
    composition also contains a fibrous vegetable material as a component.

    (1)     Note.  The fibrous vegetable material normally, but not
    necessarily, serves a binding function.

    (2)     Note.  Fibrous vegetable material is vegetable material whose
    fibrous nature has not been destroyed by processing; examples of fibrous
    vegetable materials are paper, cellulose, wood, bark and sawdust.


CLS 44/577
TXT With nonfibrous carbohydrate (e.g., molasses, starch, etc.):Subject matter
    under subclass 551 wherein a nonfibrous carbohydrate is a component in a
    consolidated solid fuel composition.

    (1)     Note.  The nonfibrous carbohydrate normally, but not necessarily,
    serves a binding function.

    (2)     Note.  For the definition of carbohydrate, see the Class 536 class
    definition.

    (3)     Note.  The expression "nonfibrous" is intended to differentiate
    paper and raw, woody-type material, such as leaves, sawdust, seaweed, bark,
    etc., from carbohydrate substances which, by virtue of processing, no
    longer retain fibrous character.


CLS 44/578
TXT With lignin, lignin derivative, or sulfite liquor (e.g., lignones,
    lignosulfonates, etc.):Subject matter under subclass 551 wherein a lignin,
    lignin derivative, or sulfite liquor is a component in a consolidated solid
    fuel composition.

    (1)     Note.  The lignin, lignin derivative, or sulfite liquor normally,
    but not necessarily, serves a binding function.

    (2)     Note.  Lignin is an amorphous product of indeterminate structure
    that forms the lamella of many plant fibers, and cements the plant fibers
    together.

    (3)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass, to be a lignin derivative, a
    substance must be identified as such; the prefix "ligno" is taken as prima
    facie  indication of lignin derivation.

    (4)     Note.  Sulfite liquor is the waste liquor from the pulping of wood
    by the sulfite process; lignosulfonates, ash, calcium compounds, free
    sulfur dioxide, etc. are components thereof.

    (5)     Note.  Lignite is not considered as a lignin derivative for
    purposes of this subclass; rather, it is considered as a solid fuel and, as
    such, may be classified in any of subclass 551 or its indents when claimed
    in admixture with a specified binder.


CLS 44/579
TXT With rubber, resin, or organic -C(=O)O- compound (e.g., rosin, tall oil,
    tallow, pine resin, carboxylic acids, etc.):Subject matter under subclass
    551 wherein a rubber, resin, or organic -C(=O)O- compound is a component in
    a solid fuel composition.

    (1)     Note.  The rubber, resin, or organic -C(=O)O- compound normally,
    but not necessarily, serves a binding function.

    (2)     Note.  The term "resin" is intended to include all material
    identified as unspecified resin, all natural resins, and synthetic resins
    not prepared by polymerization or copolymerization of a specified monomer
    or of specified monomers.

    (3)     Note.  An organic -C(=O)O- compound is one in which the carbon of
    the -C(=O)O- group is, or is attached directly or indirectly by nonionic
    bonding to, the carbon of an organic compound.

    (4)     Note.  See (4) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    "organic compound".


CLS 44/580
TXT With limestone, elemental metal, elemental sulfur, or inorganic compound
    (except water):Subject matter under subclass 551 wherein limestone,
    elemental metal, elemental sulfur, or an inorganic compound is a component
    in a consolidated fuel composition, excluding those compositions wherein
    water is the sole inorganic compound present.

    (1)     Note.  The limestone, elemental metal, elemental sulfur, or
    inorganic compound will normally, but not necessarily, serve a binding
    function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    551,    for consolidated solid fuel compositions with specified binders
    that contain undifferentiated inorganic or inorganic-organic materials such
    as earth, loam, etc.


CLS 44/589
TXT Vegetation or refuse:

    Subject matter under subclass 550 in which the starting material is derived
    from a plant or a material which would ordinarily be thrown away if it were
    not salvaged for its fuel value.

    (1)     Note.  "Refuse" includes the ordinarily waste product is of
    combustion or fuel processing, e.g., cinders, fly-ash, soot, coal fines,
    etc., as well as municipal waste, industrial waste, sewage products, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 2 for a
    compacted trash or refuse bundle not intended primarily for use as a fuel.


CLS 44/590
TXT Wood, sawdust or paper:

    Subject matter under subclass 589 in which the vegetation or refuse is a
    solid derived from the trunk or branches of trees or bushes, or from
    manufactured cellulosic sheet materials.


CLS 44/591
TXT Carbonized material (e.g., coke, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 550 in which the starting fuel material is
    one containing free carbon, usually produced by a thermolytic distillation
    process, or in which a product is claimed which results from the conversion
    of a carbon compound to free carbon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    599,    for a process of making a consolidated-solids fuel composition in
    which carbonization conditions or a carbonization technique is specified.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, appropriate subclasses for a
    process of complete carbonization with recovery of volatile materials.


CLS 44/592
TXT "Low-rank" coal (e.g., lignite, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 550 in which a starting material is coal of
    lesser heat value that bituminous coal, including brown coal, lignite, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    491,    for a fuel briquet having peat as a starting material.


CLS 44/593
TXT Consolidation process using specified condition or technique:

    Process under subclass 550 which includes a step which takes place under a
    described condition, e.g., a designated temperature, etc., or is descried
    in more than merely nominal term, e.g., using a particular apparatus,
    material transportation method, etc.


CLS 44/594
TXT Predrying or moistening:

    Subject matter under subclass 593 in which the condition or technique
    described has the function or wetting a material or drying a material
    before the consolidation step or steps.


CLS 44/595
TXT Comminuting (e.g., grinding, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 593 in which the condition or technique
    described is one for making pieces of fuel smaller.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500,    for a comminuting process in which a particulate fuel is the
    desired final product.


CLS 44/596
TXT Pressing:

    Subject matter under subclass 593 in which the condition or technique
    described is one involving the application of pressure to the furl
    composition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    appropriate subclasses for a molding process, per se.


CLS 44/597
TXT With applied heat:

    Subject matter under subclass 596 in which the condition or technique is
    one for removing moisture form the consolidated product or subjecting the
    product to a temperature considerably above ambient temperature.


CLS 44/598
TXT Baking or drying of formed product:

    Subject matter under subclass 593 in which the condition or technique is
    one for removing moisture form the consolidated product or subjecting the
    product to a temperature considerably above ambient temperature.


CLS 44/599
TXT With chemical reaction (e.g., carbonizing, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 593 in which the condition or technique
    involves a chemical reaction to produce a compound or a material in
    elemental form not present in the composition before the reaction, for
    example, reducing a carbon compound to elemental carbon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    201,    Distillation:  Process, Thermolytic, appropriate subclasses for the
    high-temperature treatment of carbonaceous materials to produce coke or
    charcoal along with recoverable gases or vapors.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 50+ for a
    plural-conversion mineral-oil treating process which includes coking.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    subclasses 29.1+ for a process of that class which includes carbonizing to
    form an article.


CLS 44/600
TXT WITH APPEARANCE MODIFYING ADDITIVE OR TREATMENT:
    Product or process under the class definition in which the fuel is treated
    or material is added to a fuel to result in a changed vidual effect, e.g.,
    dyeing or marking the fuel, polishing it, etc.

    (1)     Note.  It is the appearance of the cold fuel, before or after
    burning, which is modified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    642,    for a colorant composition for burning flames.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, for fluid-carried indicia, per
    se.


CLS 44/601
TXT WITH ANTIFREEZING ADDITIVE OR TREATMENT:
    Product or process under the class definition in which fuel is treated or
    material is added to the fuel to prevent undesired clumping of fuel
    portions under the influence of cold temperatures.


CLS 44/602
TXT WITH ANTIDUSTING ADDITIVE:
    Product or process under the class definition in which the fuel product
    contains a material which prevents formation of dust in handling the fuel
    or prevents fuel dust from being dispersed  into the atmosphere or a
    combustion zone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 88.1 for a dust or particle-adherent
    composition, per se.


CLS 44/603
TXT WITH COMBUSTION IMPROVER:
    Product or process under the class definition in which the fuel is combined
    with a material which imparts improved characteristics to the fuel which it
    is being burned.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    502     or 542, for a fuel particle or product, respectively, having
    combustion properties improved by containing a more readily ignitable
    coating or impregnant

    520,    for a fuel product having combustion characteristics improved by
    holes therein.

    532,    for a fuel product having combustion characteristics improved by
    its shape.


CLS 44/604
TXT Sulfur bindant:
    Subject matter under subclass 603 in which the additive improves burning by
    retarding sulfur-containing material form passing off with the combustion
    gases.


CLS 44/605
TXT FROM VEGETATION OR REFUSE:
    Product or process under the class definition in which the starting
    material is plant materia or a material which would ordinarily be thrown
    away if it were not salvaged for its fuel value.

    (1)     Note.  "Refuse" Includes the ordinarily waste products of
    combustion or of fuel processing, e.g., cinders, fly-ash, soot, coal fines,
    etc., as well as municipal waste, industrial waste, sewage products, etc.


CLS 44/606
TXT Wood, sawdust or paper:
    Subject matter under subclass 604 in which the vegetation or refuse is a
    solid derived from the trunk or branches of trees for bushes, or from
    manufactured cellulosic sheet materials.


CLS 44/607
TXT CARBONIZED COMPONENT (E.G., COKE, ETC.):
    Product or process under the class definition in which the product contains
    for is derived from the product of a thermolytic distillation or other
    chemical reaction which produces free carbon from a carbon compound.

    (1)     Note.  See the references under SEARCH CLASS in subclass 559.


CLS 44/608
TXT "LOW-RANK" COAL (E.G., LIGNITE, ETC.):
    Product or process under the class definition in which a starting material
    is coal of less heat value than bituminous coal, including brown coal,
    lignite, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    490,    for fuel made of peat.


CLS 44/620
TXT COAL TREATING PROCESS OR PRODUCT THEREOF:
    Process under the class definition in which a solid mineral
    hydrocarbonaceous material is treated by a chemical or physico-chemical
    procedure to improve its value as a fuel, or a product resulting from such
    a process.

    (1)     Note. Where a patent claims a process only, and the process yields
    other recoverable products than treated coal, see the search notes to the
    main class definition for the proper placement of such patent.

    (2)     Note.  Where a treated coal solid product is the only product
    claimed, the patent is placed here (Class 44) regardless of any process
    claimed for its manufacture; however, where other products are also
    claimed, see (1) Note of the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    490     and 608, for the treatment of peat and subbituminous coal,
    respectively.

    500,    for a treatment process designed to result in a particulate coal
    product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, appropriate subclasses
    especially subclasses 6 and 8 for shaping or comminuting coal,
    respectively, prior to charging it to a carbonizing zone.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 400+ for a coal
    liquefaction process, especially subclass 403 for a chemical modification
    of coal before hydrogenation.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclass 461 for the recovery of
    pure elemental carbon from coal.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclass 943 for a collection
    of patents concerned with production of a relatively pure hydrocarbon from
    coal.


CLS 44/621
TXT Removal of undesirable:
    Subject matter under subclasses 620 wherein the coal is purified.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclass 17 for such a
    process which includes refining the resulting char.


CLS 44/622
TXT Sulfur:
    Subject matter under subclass 621 wherein sulfur is removed from coal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    604,    for a process wherein a material is added to coal to retard escape
    of sulfur-containing materials with combustion gases, or the product of
    such a process.


CLS 44/623
TXT Using a transition metal-containing material:
    Subject matter under subclass 622 wherein a process includes the use of a
    free metal or metal compound in which the metal has an inner electron
    shell, rather than an outer shell, partially filled.

    (1)     Note.  In the periodic table this class of metals includes elements
    21 through 30 (scandium through zinc), 39 through 48 (yttrium through
    cadmium), 57 through 80 (lanthanum through mercury) and 80+ (actinium
    through the transuranium elements).


CLS 44/624
TXT Using liquid aqueous material:
    Subject matter under subclass 622 wherein the process includes the use of a
    liquid material and requires the presence of liquid water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    623,    for a process wherein the liquid material contains a compound of a
    transition metal.


CLS 44/625
TXT And treatment with gas:
    Subject matter under subclass 624 in which the coal is treated also with a
    gaseous material, prior, subsequent to or concurrently with, the liquid
    aqueous material.


CLS 44/626
TXT Water (e.g., drying, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 621 in which free or combined water is
    removed form coal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    594     and 598, for a drying procedure involved in the manufacture of fuel
    briquets.


CLS 44/627
TXT Ash or ash-former:

    Subject matter under subclass 621 wherein incombustible materials are
    removed from coal, generally noncarbonaceous, earthy, materials.


CLS 44/628
TXT MISCELLANEOUS FUEL COMPOSITION:

    Fuel composition under the class definition not provided for above, or a
    process for making such a composition.

    (1)     Note.  The composition usually has a main component a synthetically
    produced solid carbonaceous material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    589     and 605, for a fuel product made from industrial or municipal
    waste, e.g., ordinarily unusable resin or rubber compositions, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, subclasses 120+ for
    a collection of patents drawn to "high-energy" fuel compounds useful in
    rocket propellant compositions.


CLS 44/629
TXT APPARATUS FOR MAKING OR TREATING FUEL COMPOSITION:

    Apparatus under the class definition for performing a process of this class.

    (1)     Note.  A patent for apparatus performing only one operation or
    function, and or general character or utility, but which may be used in
    fuel-making, such as stirring, sawing, sifting, pressing, etc., is usually
    classed with a patent in the more general class, unless specifically
    limited to the making of fuel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 70+ for presses combined with means to
    additionally treat the material.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 50+ for a wood match-making process or
    apparatus.

    202,    Distillation: Apparatus.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses for comminution combined with prior shaping operations.

    366,    Agitation, appropriate subclasses for agitation devices absent
    molding means.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing.


CLS 44/630
TXT Peat:
    Apparatus under subclass 629 specialized for working with peat in its
    preparation for fuel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses, for presses not elsewhere provided
    for.


CLS 44/631
TXT Plural operations:
    Apparatus under subclass 630 special to the working of peat which performs
    more than one operation on the material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 102, for presses not elsewhere provided for
    combined with other features.


CLS 44/632
TXT With molding:
    Apparatus under subclass 631 specialized for working peat by performing
    more than one operation and including the final molding of the peat into
    briquets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 70+ for presses combined with means to
    additionally treat the material, not otherwise provided for, especially
    subclasses 316+ for a piston and box type press having heating, cooling, or
    drying means.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus, see
    the reference in the class definition of Class 44.


CLS 44/633
TXT Disintegrating:
    Apparatus under subclass 630 specially designed to disintegrate peat,
    generally to separate the coarser roots, stones, etc., from the finer
    material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, for comminution of
    solid material, per se.

    366,    Agitating, for machines for mixing by agitation.


CLS 44/634
TXT Briquetting:
    Subject matter under subclass 629 specially adapted for use in
    manufacturing a fuel briquet.


CLS 44/635
TXT Plural operations:
    Apparatus under subclass 634 which performs more than one operation in the
    preparation of the fuel for briquetting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 102, for presses not elsewhere provided for,
    combined with other features.


CLS 44/636
TXT With molding:
    Apparatus under subclass 635 which performs more than one operation in the
    making of briquets, and includes in such operations the final one of
    briquetting the material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 70+, for presses combined with means to
    additionally treat the material, not elsewhere provided for, especially
    subclasses 316+ for a piston and box type press having heating, cooling, or
    drying means.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses, for comminution combined with shaping operations.

    366,    Agitating, appropriate subclasses.


CLS 44/639
TXT Liquid:

    Subject matter under subclass 629 specialized for use in the compounding of
    a liquid fuel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, appropriate subclasses for process and apparatus
    for mixing, transporting and regulating the flow of liquids and gases in
    general.


CLS 44/640
TXT WALL DEPOSIT PREVENTING OR REMOVING COMPOSITION (E.G., SOOT REMOVAL, ETC.):

    Composition under the class definition designed to be added to a fuel or a
    combustion apparatus so that in the combustion of the fuel carbonaceous
    deposits will be removed from the combustion and associated apparatus, or
    prevented from being deposited thereon, or a process for making such a
    composition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    603,    for a solid fuel composition containing a soot preventing or
    removing component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses
    fora cleaning process in general.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 175+ for scale preventing compositions.

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, for cleaning
    compositions, including detergents, and subclasses 245+ for scale removing
    compositions.


CLS 44/641
TXT SOLID FUEL COMBUSTION IMPROVING COMPOSITION:

    Composition under the class definition which in itself is not a fuel,
    designed to be added to a solid fuel while it is being burned, or a process
    for making such a composition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    603,    for a fuel product containing a combustion improver.


CLS 44/642
TXT FLAME COLORANT COMPOSITION:

    Composition under the class definition designed to be added to a solid fuel
    so that during burning of the fuel a flame will have a color different from
    the color produced without the additive, or a process for making such a
    composition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    431,    Combustion, subclass 126 for a combustion process wherein a flame
    coloring additive is used.


CLS 44/643
TXT MATCH SCRATCHER COMPOSITION OR STRUCTURE:
    Composition or device under the class definition carrying friction-surface
    on which matches may be scratched.

    (1)     Note.  The devices are frequently formed on articles having some
    other function.  Some are to be fastened on the wall, some to clothing;
    some are carried in the pocket.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, for an
    abrasive composition or configuration.

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 351, for match-scratching surfaces combined with
    cigars and cigarettes, and subclasses 185, 234, and 249, for
    match-scratching surfaces combined with tobacco users' appliances.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 98+, 108+ 112+, and 137+
    for a match packet, container or holder including scratcher means.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 137+, for article-dispensing devices
    including match striking means.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 250, for a burner having a flame enclosure
    with a match scratching surface within the enclosure; and subclasses 269+
    for a residual igniting device holding and firing a charge type igniting
    unit, e.g., match, etc.

        CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 44/901
TXT FUEL COMBINED WITH MATERIAL TO BE HEATED:
    Collection of patents under the definition of this class or of Class 149
    which show a heating means combined with a material or object to be heated.

    (1)     Note.  The purpose of this subclass is not completeness, but rather
    to show a variety of materials or objects, usually hand-manipulable
    material or objects, combined with means to heat them.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, for heating devices, per se, especially
    subclasses 263.01+ for the combination of a fuel with a container in which
    it is used, and the defintions thereto for a directory of similar subject
    matter.


CLS 44/902
TXT Flameless or glowless, e.g., hair curler, etc.:

    Patents under subclass 901 having a flameless or glowless fuel of the type
    provided for in subclasses 250+ of this class.


CLS 44/903
TXT METHOD INCLUDING MEASURING, TESTING OR AUTOMATIC CONTROL:

    Collection of patents drawn to the manufacturing process of a fuel
    composition which process includes a step which is automatically
    controlled, or a step of measuring or testing a quality or quantity of a
    component, the resulting composition or a process variable.


CLS 44/904
TXT METHOD INVOLVING ELECTRIC OR WAVE ENERGY:

    Collection of patents drawn to the manufacturing process of a fuel
    composition which process includes a step wherein electricity or wave
    energy, including conic energy, is directly applied to a starting,
    intermediate or final material in a process.


CLS 44/905
TXT METHOD INVOLVING ADDED CATALYST:

    Collection of patents drawn to the manufacturing process of a fuel
    composition which process includes a step wherein a material described as a
    catalyst, reaction accelerator or acceleration retarder is added to a
    starting, intermediate or final material in the process.


CLS 47/
TTL PLANT HUSBANDRY

CLS 47/
TXT This is the parent class for apparatus and processes employed in treating
    the earth and its products and includes all inventions relating thereto
    that have not been especially provided for in other classes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, appropriate subclasses for mere cutting implements adapted
    for use in plant husbandry, but of more general utility.

    83,     Cutting appropriate subclasses for the cutting and slicing of
    material in general including vegetables and other foods.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus relating to the preservation and preparation of foods and
    beverages, including earth products, and for separating one distinguishable
    portion of a food item from another.

    111,    Planting, appropriate subclasses for processes and implements for
    inserting in the ground seed, fertilizer, poison, plants, or other material
    or objects handled in a similar manner.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 13+ for apparatus for coating edible
    material.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses and
    the notes thereto for apparatus for applying liquid to solid earth products.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, for (1) panel
    units in which a flexible fabric or other flexible sheet material forms the
    panel portion, (2) in the form of panel units formed of plural strips,
    slats, or panels interconnected for relative motion (excluding those
    connected only by a common operator or mounted on a common support), (3)
    panel units the form of  portable partitions and (4) parts (1)-(3) combined
    with each other or with rigid closures or panels.

    172,    Earth Working, appropriate subclasses, for subject matter relating
    only to working the earth.  Combinations of earth working means with other
    means, such as for treating the earth by heating or for plant handling are
    in Class 47.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses for the comminution of material in general including vegetables
    and other foods.

    366,    Agitating, for apparatus for mixing materials with earth products.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    appropriate subclasses for products and processes of perservation and
    preparation of edible material, including earth products.

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclasses, especially subclass 4
    for processes of coating plant members, including seeds, with compositions
    which do not affect their growth characteristics.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 17+ for either
    simulated or treated nonliving, natural articles having the general
    appearance and structure of plants.

    435,    Chemistry: Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 93 and
    185 for materials and processes that contain germinated seeds; subclasses
    291.1+ for apparatus for malting or mashing; and appropriate subclasses for
    materials that contain molds, yeasts, bacteria plant cells or other living
    organisms, or for processes of making such materials or using such
    materials in fermentations, or propagating such living organisms, or for
    compositions or apparatus for use in such processes, or processes of making
    such compositions.

    504,    Plant Protecting and Regulating Compositions, subclasses 116+ for
    compositions for        treating terrestrial or aquatic plants or their
    habitat with chemicals which affect the growth characteristics of the
    plants and processes of mere use of said compositions.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Class 523, subclass 123 for a composition containing a
    synthetic resin or natural rubber having utility as a plant receptacle
    composition; subclasses 124+ for a composition containing a synthetic resin
    or natural rubber which is claimed or solely disclosed as having enhanced
    degradability by exposure to an environmental stimuli or to processes of
    preparation thereof; and subclasses 132+ for a composition containing a
    synthetic resin or natural rubber having utility in situ as a soil
    conditioner or stabilizer or to preparation thereof.

    800,    Multicellular Living Organisms and Unmodified Parts Thereof,
    appropriate subclasses for living multicellular organisms, e.g., plants,
    etc., and separated or severed parts thereof that have not undergone any
    modification or treatment subsequent to their separation, e.g., untreated
    seeds, etc.

    935,    Genetic Engineering:  Recombinant DNA Technology, Hybrid or Fused
    Cell Technology, and Related Manipulations of Nucleic Acids, which provides
    a search collection for processes of altering the genetic structure of
    microorganisms; genes and methods of modifying genes and their expression;
    vectors and methods of modifying vectors; methods of introducing DNA into a
    cell; microorganisms, per se, which have had their genetic sequence altered
    by recombinant DNA techniques or by cell fusion or by uptake of DNA;
    testing; separation techniques; apparatus; and methods of use of vectors or
    of the genetically engineered microorganisms; methods of gene therapy or
    genetic modification of living organisms.


CLS 47/1.01
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Patents not otherwise classifiable.

    (1)     Note.  Search this class, subclass 58, for miscellaneous processes.

    (2)     Note.  Seeds treated for planting, as by coating, are found in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    71,     Chemistry:  Fertilizers, subclasses 5+ for compositions of seeds
    and fertilizer.

    504,    Plant Protecting and Regulating Compositions, subclasses 116+ for
    compositions of seeds and growth regulating substances.


CLS 47/1.1
TXT Apparatus and processes for the culture of mushrooms and other edible
    fungi, except yeast, comprising unobvious uses of mushroom fertilizers,
    mushroom beds and their structure, houses and caves adapted particularly
    for mushroom culture, and receptacles for growing and transporting mushroom
    spawn before planting in beds.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    71,     Chemistry:  Fertilizers, subclass 5 for fertilizers of general use.

    435,    Chemistry: Molecular Biology and Microbiology, particularly
    subclasses 254.1 through 256.8 for unicellular fungi (including molds,
    rusts, yeasts, etc.) and processes and compositions involved in their
    propagation (i.e., maintenance, growth, production, purification,
    preserving, etc.); and subclasses 283.1+ for apparatus used to perform said
    processes and make said compositions.


CLS 47/1.3
TXT Methods and apparatus for culture of plants by means of electricity, other
    than electric heating; for example, production of fertilizers in the soil,
    killing of insects and weeds, stimulation of plant growth and treatment of
    seeds before planting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, for electrical and wave
    energy chemistry in general.

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, for electrolysis in general.


CLS 47/1.4
TXT Apparatus for or method of fostering the growth or cultivation of
    nonunicellular algae.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry: Molecular Biology and Microbiology, particularly
    subclasses 257.1 through 257.6 for unicellular algae (prokaryotic and
    eukaryotic), and processes and compositions involved in their propagation
    (i.e., maintenance, growth, production, purification, preserving, etc.);
    and subclasses 283.1+ for apparatus used to perform said processes and make
    said compositions.


CLS 47/1.41
TXT Apparatus for or method of assisting the natural generation, propagation or
    reproduction of plant life by either a discriminate or indiscriminate
    transfer of pollen to fertilize a plant flower.

    (1)     Note.  To be classified here, there must be more than the locating
    of one plant near another or enhancing the pollen productivity of a flower.

    (2)     Note.  Subject matter classified here mainly involves increasing
    the natural scattering of pollen or individual application of pollen to
    plant flowers.


CLS 47/1.42
TXT Apparatus for or method of conditioning soil in which a plant is to be
    grown comprising separating soil from the ground and subjecting the
    separated soil to a heat treatment to improve the soil for plant growing
    purposes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    111,    Plant, subclass 118 and the subclasses indented thereunder,
    especially subclasses 120+ for devices that disturb the soil in situ and
    apply flame or the heat therefrom to the disturbed soil and see the search
    notes thereunder.


CLS 47/1.43
TXT Apparatus for or method of destroying crop plants in situ for the purpose
    of reducing the number of such plants to enable the remaining plants to
    achieve a better growth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, appropriate subclasses for apparatus and methods for
    harvesting plants.

    172,    Earth Working, appropriate subclasses for apparatus and methods for
    destroying crop plants in situ by working the earth in which they grow,
    especially subclass 534 for a wheel or roller with peripherally spaced
    plant saving means.


CLS 47/1.44
TXT Apparatus for or method of either destroying undesired vegetation in the
    vicinity of growing crop plants or inhibiting its growth by at least
    partially burning the undesired vegetation by directly applying thereto the
    blaze of a combustion action.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 144 for similar
    devices that destroy insects by burning and see the search notes thereunder.

    111,    Planting, subclass 118 and the subclasses indented thereunder,
    especially subclasses 120+ for devices that disturb the soil in situ and
    apply flame on the products of a combustion action to the disturbed soil
    and see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 47/1.5
TXT Apparatus under the class definition which includes a means specially
    adapted to brush, wipe or otherwise engage an erect, growing plant and to
    transfer a liquid material to a surface of said plant.

    (1)     Note.  The material may be fertilizer, insecticide, herbicide or
    other plant coating, coloring, insulating or the like.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.01,   for devices which are adapted to roll or slide along the surface of
    a lawn, turf or sod and to transfer thereto a fertilizer, herbicide,
    insecticide or the like.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, appropriate subclasses
    for brushing and wiping implements of general utility capable of applying
    any desired material to a surface of a plant or any other object.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 142 and 143
    for devices which brush or wipe a growing plant to dislodge insect
    parasites.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 207+ for machines of general utility
    and adapted to contact an object to transfer a coating thereto.

    427,    Coating Processes, and note especially subclass 4 for processes of
    coating wherein the base is a plant member or animal specimen.


CLS 47/1.7
TXT Apparatus under class definition which includes a means to distribute a
    material into contact with an erect, growing plant and having either (1) a
    means to move parts of the plant, e.g., to expose them to the material or
    to protect the plants from injury by the device, (2) a means to disturb the
    soil around a plant to weed, mulch or till said soil, or (3) a means to
    detect the presence and/or position of the plant and to either move the
    distributor relative to the plant or to control the material supply or some
    other characteristic of the distributor.

    (1)     Note.  Where a patent claims the combination of material
    distributor with soil disturbing (e.g., scratching, plowing or
    cultivating), a disclosure that the material is applied to a plant has been
    considered sufficient basis for classification in this subclass while a
    disclosure of disturbing the same area of ground that the material is
    applied to, before, after or during the material application, has been
    considered a basis for classification in Class 111.

    (2)     Note.  The plant manipulating means may consist of a blast of air
    in addition to that necessary to constitute the distribution.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.01,   for combinations of material distributing and earth disturbing
    means in which, as disclosed, the earth is disturbed at an area other than
    that on which the material is discharged.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    111,    Planting, appropriate subclasses for discharging of a material on
    the earth as an incident to, or in combination with the planting of a seed
    or other object or material in the soil, and for similar combinations of
    material distributors and soil disturbing means where the soil is disclosed
    as disturbed in the same area in order to facilitate penetration of the
    material into the soil.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 668 for control of a coating sprayer in
    response to some sensed condition of the object to be sprayed.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses,
    for means to distribute material onto the ground and/or growing plants
    where no particular relation between the plants and the distributing means
    is involved.


CLS 47/2
TXT Methods and devices for preventing the freezing of trees and plants and
    their fruit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      9, 17, and 19-32, for devices capable of preventing frost.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 59.5, for smudge pots.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 136 for means for discharging and diffusing
    material from aircraft.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 70 for frost preventing compositions,
    subclass 305 for smokes, fogs, or gaseous primary dispersants, a period.


CLS 47/3
TXT Apparatus and processes for whitening growing celery.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    504,    Plant Protecting and Regulating Compositions, subclasses 116+ for
    compositions which employ a specific chemical to affect the color of fruit,
    etc., or for plant growth regulating compositions.


CLS 47/4
TXT Apparatus and processes for fashioning a growing hedge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    256,    Fences, subclass 20 for hedge fences.


CLS 47/5
TXT Includes apparatus and processes for ripening cotton.


CLS 47/5.5
TXT Apparatus for or method of producing roots on a plant portion other than a
    root portion while the plant portion is still attached to the parent plant
    by covering said portion with a medium in which roots can grow so that the
    plant portion will be able to maintain independent growth after it is
    severed from the parent plant.

    (1)     Note.  A mere wrapping is not intended to be included here;
    however, a wrapping having properties so as to enhance or promote root
    growth is included.


CLS 47/6
TXT Apparatus and processes for uniting parts of a tree or plant to another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, appropriate subclasses for mere implements adapted for use
    in plant husbandry but of more general utility.


CLS 47/7
TXT The bud of a tree or plant is set into a part of a tree.


CLS 47/8
TXT Apparatus and processes for repairing trees.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, appropriate subclasses for mere cutting implements adapted
    for use in plant husbandry but of more general utility.


CLS 47/9
TXT Apparatus and processes for covering or mulching plants.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    111,    Planting, subclass 102 for a process or apparatus for placing
    plants in soil through a mulch layer; and subclass 144 for mulch
    accessories claimed in combination with a planting machine.


CLS 47/10
TXT Apparatus or processes for gathering the sap, gum or resin from pine or
    rubber trees.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50      through 54.


CLS 47/11
TXT Buckets, cups, spouts, and gutters for collecting the sap of the trees.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50      through 54.


CLS 47/12
TXT Tools used in obtaining the sap or gum.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, especially subclass 121 for mere cutting implements for
    cutting or scraping the bark of or grooving a tree.


CLS 47/14
TXT Apparatus and processes for ascertaining the life in the seed.


CLS 47/15
TXT The seeds are inclosed in a moistened strip rolled up.


CLS 47/16
TXT The chamber or incubator for the seeds is provided with a heater.


CLS 47/17
TXT Houses provided with transparent walls or with some other apparatus to
    accelerate the growth of vegetable life.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for frames and their closures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses for a
    building structure or component which may be translucent or transparent but
    which does not define a feature specialized to plant husbandry.


CLS 47/18
TXT The structure of the plant supports in the greenhouse.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 209 for fluid
    distributing apparatus having a supply conduit fixed to the ceiling of a
    building which may be a greenhouse.


CLS 47/19
TXT Frames and their closures for accelerating the growth of plants.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
    17.


CLS 47/20
TXT Apparatus for covering, inclosing, or shading trees.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26+,    for plant covers, shades and screens.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 126 for tree
    fumigators.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 3 for an article
    supported cover.

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclasses 87+ for tents and
    canopies of general utility.


CLS 47/21
TXT Inclosure for each individual tree.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
    28.1    through 31.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 126.


CLS 47/22
TXT There is a heater combined with the cover.

    (1)     Note.  See Classes 43, Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying,
    subclass 126, and 126, Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 59.5, for smudge pots
    used in the orchard.


CLS 47/23
TXT Inclosures around the tree trunk for preventing injury by bugs or other
    insects, cattle, sheep, etc.


CLS 47/24
TXT The guard is in the form of a band spaced from the ground.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 108.


CLS 47/25
TXT The guard surrounds the tree and rests on and covers the ground above the
    roots or extends below the surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
    32.


CLS 47/26
TXT Devices for inclosing, shading, screening or covering plants.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19      through 22.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclasses 87+ for tents and
    canopies of general utility.


CLS 47/27
TXT The device is provided with an irrigator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
    79+.


CLS 47/28.1
TXT Cover:

    Subject matter under subclass 26 for means for enclosing a plant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

     20     through 25, for covers for trees.


CLS 47/29
TXT The top has a transparent closure for admitting light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
    19.


CLS 47/30
TXT The inclosure has an open top.


CLS 47/31
TXT The inclosure has a reticulated screen or is formed as a screen.


CLS 47/32
TXT Covers for the soil around the plant which may also serve as a support for
    the berries on the plant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
    25.


CLS 47/32.1
TXT Inflatable:

    Subject matter under subclass 28.1 wherein a portion of the means for
    enclosing a plant, i.e., the cover, is defined by a fluid sealed
    compartment capable of containing a fluid in a gaseous state and further
    wherein the compartment is capable of maintaining the fluid at a pressure
    greater than ambient pressure.


CLS 47/33
TXT Beds and borders or other ornamental configurations in a flower or garden
    bed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 102 for an earth
    supported coping or edging of more general application.


CLS 47/39
TXT Apparatus or supports for holding plant or flower pots or receptacles
    having sprinkler, water pipes or special plant-treating means.

    (1)     Note.  Search this class, subclass 41.01.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 248, Supports, for supports generally.

    (3)     Note.  See Class 211, Supports: Racks, for plant stands not
    restricted by inclusion of special watering or plant-treating means.

    (4)     Note.  For flower pot stands not limited by structure to such use,
    see Class 248, Supports, subclasses 128+ and 146+.


CLS 47/40
TXT Means for supporting flowerpots in or near a window of a house and modified
    therefor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
    68.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks.


CLS 47/40.5
TXT Devices under the class definition in the form of a base or stand for
    supporting the trunk of a cut tree in a generally upright position and with
    its severed end in contact with liquid contained by a reservoir which is
    in, on, or under the base.  The reservoir usually is in the form of a
    receptacle (e.g., container, cup, pan, etc.) and may or may not be an
    integral component of the base.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass comprises patents for Christmas tree holders
    with a liquid supply, which patents previously were classified in the staff
    support area of Class 248, Supports.  The presence of a liquid supply for
    the purpose of keeping a cut tree fresh and moist, in addition to a means
    to support the tree, is considered to make this subject matter more
    appropriate for this class than for Class 248.

    (2)     Note.  The claiming of a supporting base with a liquid resevoir is
    not sufficient for placement herein in the absence of an indication that
    the liquid is for a purpose beneficial to the tree (e.g., for keeping it
    fresh or green or moist, etc.).  If, on the other hand, the liquid serves
    only as ballast, for example, classification is in Class 248.  In the rare
    instance when the disclosure is silent as to the purpose of the liquid,
    then it is presumed to be for the benefit of the tree.

    (3)     Note.  The claiming of (1) means to support a liquid reservoir in
    an operative relationship to the severed end of the tree, or (2) a spatial
    relationship of the severed end (as supported) to the underlying surface on
    which the base rests for the purpose of accommodating a liquid reservoir,
    are acceptable alternatives to the claiming of the liquid reservoir.

    (4)     Note.  In order to collect as much as possible of the related art,
    cross- referencing is extended to include the disclosure of a liquid
    reservoir, provided, of course, that the 'beneficial purpose' qualification
    is met.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 519+ for a base or stand type of supporting
    device having means for receiving a staff, wherein the staff may be a tree
    trunk.  Classification in that area is upon features such as how the staff
    is gripped, etc.; accordingly, cross-reference copies of the patents of
    this subclass (40.5) are placed there on that basis.


CLS 47/41.01
TXT Flower holder:

    Device for holding or supporting a cut flower or plant.

    (1)     Note.  The line between this class and Class 206, Special
    Receptacle or Package is:  The combination of a receptacle and a plant or a
    receptacle modified for a purpose running to the preservation of the life
    of the plant is classified in this subclass.  Where the receptacle is
    utilized merely for a shipping purpose and is of the Class 206 type, it is
    classified therein.  The same line is followed with Classes 220,
    Receptacles and 229, Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 5+ for flower holders
    where the flowers are to be attached to clothing.

    27,     Undertaking, subclass 30, for structures which may have flowers
    secured thereon and designed to be used in covering the open grave.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, see (1) Note.  See subclass 423 for
    a plant, flower or tree receptacle.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 17+ for either
    stimulated or treated nonliving, natural articles having the general
    structure and appearance of plants, and especially subclass 23 for such a
    product with a holder, and subclass 27 for a frame or structure upon which
    flowers or foliage, either natural or artificial, may be secured to produce
    a design. See also "SEARCH CLASS" notes in subclass 17 of that class (428).


CLS 47/41.1
TXT Apparatus under subclass 41.01 in which a receptacle is at least partially
    embedded in the ground or in a fixed structure such as a stone grave marker.


CLS 47/41.11
TXT Apparatus under subclass 41.01 comprising a means engaging the stem or any
    portion of a cut flower to maintain the same in a desired position in a
    container, the said means being supported at the container top.


CLS 47/41.12
TXT Apparatus under subclass 41.01 comprising a device made of a yieldable
    material into which the stem end of the flower is forcibly thrust so as to
    create an opening in the material and be held thereby, the device being
    adapted for use with a container, support, etc.

    (1)     Note.  A device with a pre-existing, discrete opening which the
    stem merely enlarges is not included, though devices with numerous minute
    porelike openings are included.

    (2)     Note.  The stem may be provided with a strengthening wire or a pick
    which is forcibly thrust into the yieldable material.


CLS 47/41.13
TXT Apparatus under subclass 41.01 comprising a device especially adapted to
    hold or at least to limit movement of the end portion of a stem of a cut
    flower in all lateral directions.


CLS 47/41.14
TXT Having ground anchor support:

    Subject matter under subclass 41.01 wherein a device is provided with means
    to mount and secure the device into the earth.


CLS 47/41.15
TXT Single stem type:

    Subject matter under subclass 41.01 wherein a device is structured to hold
    or support only one flower or plant.


CLS 47/42
TXT Devices for supporting trees or their limbs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40.5,   for a support for a cut tree in the form of a stand or base with a
    liquid reservoir for supplying moisture to the severed end of the tree.

    44,     for devices for supporting plants, flowers, vines or small shrubs,
    hops and grapes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 538 for a bracket type of supporting device
    having means for receiving an inclined staff, which staff may be in the
    form of a natural or an artificial branch of a tree which is to be attached
    to a tree trunk or to a trunk-like member for the purpose of filling out or
    creating a "tree".


CLS 47/43
TXT The prop, brace or support rests on or is driven into the ground.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44      through 47.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 351+ for props in general.


CLS 47/44
TXT Devices for supporting plants, flowers, vines or small shrubs, hops and
    grapes.


CLS 47/45
TXT The support is in the form of a cage or a plurality of supports, poles,
    stakes, or racks are joined together.

    (1)     Note.  Hop and grape vine supports are found here as well as in
    subclasses 46 and 47 of this class.


CLS 47/46
TXT The support has a linear extension.

    (1)     Note.  Grapevine trellises are included when they have linear
    arrangement.


CLS 47/47
TXT Supports for a single plant or plants in clusters; generally with a
    vertical rod or stake.

    (1)     Note.  Mostly for small plants, but includes bean, hop, and grape
    poles.


CLS 47/48.5
TXT Apparatus and devices of container or cartridge form usually inserted of
    buried permanently in the ground near growing plants and adapted to contain
    water or other material utilized by the plants to encourage the growth
    thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The water or other material usually may be discharged into
    the soil by means of some special feature of the device, such as
    perforations in the container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.01,   for installed irrigating systems having means to supply fertilizer
    to the irrigating water.

    58,     for processes of irrigating or enriching the soil.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    111,    Planting, subclasses 118+ for implements and machines having earth
    working means and means for directing liquid, gas or vapor into contact
    with or beneath the surface of the soil.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 36+ for installed
    irrigation devices or systems functioning to conduct the flow of water
    below ground or in open channels.


CLS 47/50
TXT Receptacles for receiving sap, generally, from a maple tree, and the
    necessary appurtenances thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
    11.


CLS 47/51
TXT The combination of the bucket, its cover, and spout for connecting it to a
    hole bored in a tree.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
    11.


CLS 47/52
TXT The conduit that conveys the sap from tree to bucket.


CLS 47/53
TXT Provided with means for supporting the bucket.


CLS 47/54
TXT Covers for the sap bucket.


CLS 47/55
TXT Stems generally made of wire for attaching to the short stem or calyx of a
    flower.


CLS 47/56
TXT Strips or ribbons to which seeds are secured in spaced relation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclass 450 for methods and subclasses 545+ for
    apparatus for forming seed tapes or ribbons.

    111,    Planting, subclass 109 for seed tape combined with planting
    apparatus therefor.


CLS 47/57.5
TXT Devices for injecting materials into living plants, e.g., trees, and
    injection processes which are peculiar to the treatment of living plants.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the patents in this subclass are for the injection
    of coloring or preserving material into trees to produce colored or
    preserved timber.

    (2)     Note.  See this class, subclass 48.5, for devices designed to be
    buried in the soil for applying water, fertilizer, or the like.

    (3)     Note.  See Class 8, Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and
    Chemical Modification of Textiles and Fibers, subclass 402, for processes
    of injecting wood with coloring material and Class 427, Coating Processes,
    appropriate subclasses, especially subclass 291, for coating or
    impregnating wood other than standing timber.

    (5)     Note.  See Class 111, subclasses 118+ for devices for impregnating
    the soil with liquid or gas, the devices having earthworking means.


CLS 47/57.6
TXT Coated or impregnated seed not more specifically provided for elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    71,     Chemistry:  Fertilizers, subclasses 5+ for seeds and fertilizers.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, for seeds
    employed as bait material with a biocide or repellent or processes of
    treating a seed with a biocide.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 15+ for other "treated" natural products and
    subclasses 403+ for coated particulate matter.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 185 for
    materials containing germinating seeds, and subclass 93 for processes that
    include germinating seeds.

    504,    Plant Protecting and Regulating Compositions, subclass 100 for seed
    coated with agricultural chemicals other than fertilizers and subclasses
    116+ for compositions which enhance the germinating of a seed.

    800,    Multicellular Living Organisms and Unmodified Parts Thereof,
    subclasses 200+ for plants and separated or severed parts thereof that have
    not undergone any modification or treatment subsequent to their separation;
    e.g., untreated seeds, etc.


CLS 47/58
TXT Miscellaneous processes under the class definition.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides the generic place for processes for
    preparing seeds for planting. Corresponding apparatus is classified in
    other classes on the basis of the function or structure of the apparatus
    involved, in such Classes as 34, 118, 134, and 366.  See the main class
    definition of this class (47) for notes to these classes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.1,    1.3, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 14, and  59-65 for processes
    relating to the subject matter thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, see (1) Note above.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    miscellaneous food preparation apparatus.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, see (1) Note above, and see section VIII of the
    class definition of Class 118 for location of patents relative to coating
    edible material.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, see (1) Note above.

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 1 for processes involving only earth
    working.

    366,    Agitating, see (1) Note. 424, Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating
    Compositions, for a fungicidal, insecticidal, bactericidal, or disinfecting
    composition which may be applied to a plant, seed or the soil and for a
    process which is no more than the mere use of said composition.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    appropriate subclasses for processes of preparing plant material for
    consumption.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 172.1,
    172.2 and 172.3 for processes of altering the genetic material of whole
    plants by use of recombinant DNA technology, cell fusion and nucleic acid
    manipulation that result in a new whole plant or part thereof.  Subclasses
    410+ include plant cells or cell lines; compositions thereof; processes of
    propagating, maintaining, or preserving a plant cell or cell line;
    processes of regenerating plant cells into tissue, plant part, or plant,
    per se, where no genotypic change occurs; medium therefore.

    504,    Plant Protecting and Regulating Compositions, subclasses 116+ for
    compositions for treating terrestrial or aquatic plants or their habitat
    with a specific chemical which affects the growth characteristics of the
    plants and for the processes of mere use of said compositions.  In Class
    504, subclass 116, under SEARCH CLASS, see the reference to Class 47 for
    the line between that subclass and this class (47).


CLS 47/59
TXT Apparatus and processes under the class definition for fostering growth
    beyond germination of plants in a nutrient environment and without soil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for structures adapted only for germinating seeds in water and
    without nutrient solution, usually provided with means for identifying the
    ear or batch whence the seeds came for the test.

    79+,    for structures adapted to hold either soil or inert powder, and to
    supply either plain water or nutrient solution thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 93 for
    patents relating to the sprouting of seeds for making malt.


CLS 47/60
TXT Device under subclass 59 comprising an enclosed space or cavity in a
    container where plants or crops are grown from seeds, bulbs, sprouts or
    shoots.


CLS 47/61
TXT Apparatus under subclass 60 wherein the initial stage of growth is begun
    and a sprout is the final result.


CLS 47/62
TXT Apparatus under subclass 59 wherein nutrient is automatically supplied to
    seeds, seedlings or plants at intervals or continuously to revitalize or
    refresh.


CLS 47/63
TXT Apparatus under subclass 59 comprising a receptacle adapted to hold each
    seed or plant apart from other seeds or plants.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85+,    for a plant receptacle adapted to separate individual plants
    nurtured in soil.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 27.8 for plant holders.


CLS 47/64
TXT Apparatus under subclass 63 which is a permeable prop upon which only the
    roots may rest or by which the entire plant may be held in an upright
    position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     for a porous flower pot containing a plant nurtured in soil.


CLS 47/65
TXT DYNAMIC PLANT RECEPTACLE TRANSPORT:
    Device under the class definition comprising containers kinetically
    manipulated so that seeds or plants are exposed to heat or sunlight or
    other weather conditions for their nurturing and growth.


CLS 47/65.5
TXT RECEPTACLE FOR GROWING MEDIUM:

    Apparatus or processes under the class definition that comprise a pot, box,
    or other container adapted to hold earth, soil, or a manufactured growing
    composition in which a plant is to be grown.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.01,  for cut flowers in a receptacle that may be in or out of soil.

    56,     for sheets of growth medium which are not contained in a receptacle.

    59+,    for growing plants in water culture receptacles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses, for
    roof structure, per se.

    523,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, particularly subclass 123 for
    a composition having utility as a plant receptacle or to processes of
    preparing a growing medium.


CLS 47/65.6
TXT Drain covers:

    Apparatus under subclass 65.5 including a specific cover for the drain
    opening to permit drainage under appropriate conditions and to prevent the
    drain from becoming plugged by the growing medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 650+ for drain
    covers not specific to plant husbandry.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses, for
    filters that will allow water to pass, but retain solids.


CLS 47/65.7
TXT Specific container material:

    Apparatus under subclass 65.5 wherein the patentable feature resides in the
    walls of the receptacle being made of a specific material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for a biodegradable material.


CLS 47/65.8
TXT Flaccid material (e.g., bag):

    Apparatus under subclass 65.7 wherein the container material is a flaccid
    material such as a fabric bag.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66.4,   for stiff foldable materials like paper or cardboard.

    78,     for root ball bags which control root growth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 262 for a retaining wall
    formed from bags.


CLS 47/65.9
TXT Sheet of plants (e.g., roof-top garden):

    Walled container under subclass 65.5 in which the container is designed to
    support a  sheet of plants as in a bench or roof top garden.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.01,   for sheets of plants growing in a field or a field which has been
    modified to be hospitable to a sheet of plants as for example, a football
    field.

    18,     for benches which support multiple containers.

    82      and 83, for tiered containers forming a roof or covering a slope.

    56,     for sheets of plant material without a container.


CLS 47/66.1
TXT Sectional construction:

    Apparatus under subclass 65.5 in which a container is formed from a
    plurality of discrete sections which may be readily assembled or
    disassembled.


CLS 47/66.2
TXT Push out bottom closure:

    Apparatus under subclass 66.1 including a reusable peripheral wall and a
    bottom which is fictionally or removably attached in order to eject the
    plant from the peripheral wall.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package,  appropriate subclasses for
    containers having movable walls.


CLS 47/66.3
TXT Foldable or hingedly connected sections:

    Apparatus under subclass 66.1 in which the container is formed from
    foldable material or the sections are pivotally connected to each other.


CLS 47/66.4
TXT Integral hinge:

    Apparatus under subclass 66.3 wherein the hinge means is integral with the
    walls of the receptacle, i.e. scored paper or cardboard.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66.5,   for integral hinges forming an array of cells.

    65.8,   for flaccid material like cloth or plastic foil forming an array of
    cells

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 408, for containers with hinged compartments.


    229,    Envelops, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 400+ for
    integral hinges in stiff panels.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 33, for flaccid hinges.


CLS 47/66.5
TXT Array of cells:

    Apparatus under subclass 66.1 in which container sections form an array of
    connected cells.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for an array of plants or an array of porous modules (not
    containers).


    82      and 83, for tiered containers forming a roof or covering a slope, a
    multilevel array.

    85,     for an array of containers formed by a divider in a peripheral
    frame.

    86,     for a plurality of containers which are adapted to be assembled
    into a planar array of cells.

    87,     for a monolithic body forming an array of cells.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 262 for a multilevel
    array of containers used as a retaining wall and subclass 284 for a
    multilevel array of containers having earth anchors.


CLS 47/66.6
TXT Combined:

    Apparatus under subclass 65.5 in which the plant receptacle is combined
    with one or more diverse device such as a lamp, bookcase, indicia means,
    air purifier, etc.


CLS 47/66.7
TXT Method of using a plant receptacle:

    Subject matter under subclass 65.5 that deals with a process related to a
    plant receptacle or the use thereof.


CLS 47/67
TXT Device under subclass 65.5 adapted to hold a suspended flower pot.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 317 for a device for supporting an article by
    hanging it from an overhead member.


CLS 47/68
TXT An appurtenance under subclass 65.5 constructed for outdoor use and adapted
    to be juxtaposed to and contiguous with the sill of an opening in a wall
    wherein said appurtenance is further adapted to contain soil with growing
    plants therein or to contain already potted growing plants.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for window-type plant stands.


CLS 47/69
TXT Device under subclass 65.5 wherein said container completely encloses the
    plant and there is a cyclic use of the moisture in the enclosure.


CLS 47/70
TXT Device under subclass 65.5 which is a lattice structure used to vertically
    support a gangling plant or flower.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 27.8 for plant holders.


CLS 47/71
TXT A shallow vessel used to support the plant receptacle of subclass 65.5
    wherein (1) air and water may be introduced to the plant roots, and (2)
    excess water may be accumulated therein.


CLS 47/72
TXT A facade under subclass 65.5 that is a fancy flower pot dressing designed
    to surround the outer crock wall but not cover the top of the pot so that
    the receptacle conveys a better appearance than a plain earthen crock.


CLS 47/73
TXT Apparatus under subclass 65.5 in which a container facilitates transference
    by (1) being readily removable from the soil so as to avoid injury to the
    roots therein, or (2) being a specially constructed device to remove a
    living plant from the earth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclass 302 for device for removing stumps, or the
    like, together with root surrounding soil from the earth.

    111,    Planting, subclass 101 for an apparatus which removes a plant from
    the soil for transplanting purposes or sets a plant into soil and which may
    use a transplanting container.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, appropriate subclasses for a
    process or apparatus for boring a hole in the earth.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 132 for means for pulling roots from the earth.


CLS 47/74
TXT Container under subclass 73 wherein the receptacle is decomposable in the
    ground.


CLS 47/75
TXT A series or set of containers under subclass 73 fitting one container
    within the other thus having inner and outer receptacles.


CLS 47/76
TXT Big ball tree:
    Container under subclass 73 specially adapted to hold a large living plant
    or tree with its root structure and surrounding soil intact.

    (1)     Note.  For unearthing plants or buried objects without
    transplanting, see Class 171.


CLS 47/77
TXT Seedling:
    Container or container assembly under subclass 73 specially adapted to hold
    a very small or young  tree plant.


CLS 47/78
TXT Interwoven or interworked device under subclass 73 usually of a fabric,
    wire, or plastic type material to protect the plant or tree during
    uprooting, moving and replanting of the tree or plant.


CLS 47/79
TXT Device under subclass 65.5 for supplying water or water vapor to the soil
    and roots to refresh or revitalize the plant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59+,    for promulgating growth of plants in a nutrient solution without
    soil.


CLS 47/80
TXT Device under subclass 79 wherein a container, per se, or rocks or sponge
    type material in the receptacle is adapted to retain water.


CLS 47/81
TXT Device under subclass 79 comprising a filamentous material adapted to water
    the plants soil and roots by capillary action.


CLS 47/82
TXT Device under subclass 79 in which plants may be placed or caused to grow at
    various levels.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter for this subclass usually comprises a
    receptacle with openings spaced at varying levels, from which plants
    protrude or a stand with receptacles spaced at different levels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 128+ and 146+ for flower pot stands not
    limited by structure to such use.


CLS 47/83
TXT Device under subclass 65.5 in which plants may be placed or caused to grow
    at diverse levels.

    (1)     Note.  See the note under the definition to subclass 82 in this
    class (47).


CLS 47/84
TXT Apparatus under subclass 65.5 in which the receptacle is specially designed
    for convenience in the transpiration of living plants or plant bulbs.

    (1)     Note.  See the note under the definition to subclass 41.01 in this
    class (47), for the line between this class and Class 206, Special
    Receptacle or Package.

    (2)     Note.  For packaging methods and apparatus, see Class 53, Package
    Making.


CLS 47/85
TXT Device under subclass 65.5 used to partition the receptacle, e.g.,
    separable divider rack of an ice tray.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter under this subclass is distinguished from
    modular and monolithic in that modular provides for individual separate
    receptacles for insertion into an array; monolithic devices are comprised
    of static compartments or cells that are not separable from the array,
    while dividers are generally planed surfaces places within a receptacle to
    form smaller compartments.


CLS 47/86
TXT Device under subclass 65.5 in which a multitude of individual units such as
    plants, seedlings or pots are formed into an array.

    (1)     Note.  See the note under the definition to subclass 85 in this
    class (47).


CLS 47/87
TXT Device under subclass 65.5 formed as a single unit with compartments
    therein for seedlings, plants or bulbs.

    (1)     Note.  See the note under the definition to subclass 85 in this
    class (47).

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTION

    The documents in the following collections contain only cross-references
    which have been placed without regard to their original classification or
    to their claimed subject matter and are therefore not exhaustive of the art
    or subject matter but are only examples thereof.  Consequently, a complete
    search for art or subject matter provided for here would require a review
    of the higher portions of the classification schedule.


CLS 47/901
TXT PLANT CONTAINER WITH FLATS,   FILLING, PLANTING, OR CONVEYING:

    Cross-reference art collection of documents relating to planting a seedling
    flat, filling a container with root media, or conveying a flat, media, or a
    container.


CLS 47/902
TXT Including a recycled component (e.g., tires):

    Subject matter which includes one or more components or materials which are
    being reused or recycled.

    (1)     Note. Biodegradable materials, as found in this class (47),
    subclass 74, should not be collected here.  Tires used as a retaining wall
    or old bottles used as a  water reservoir are examples of subject matter
    which should be placed in this subclass.


CLS 47/903
TXT Operator means for cold-frame or window:

    Subject matter which includes an operator in combination with a greenhouse,
    cold-frame, or growth chamber to automatically vent excess heat by opening
    some portion of the structure.


CLS 47/904
TXT OPENWORK CONTAINER FOR A GROWING MEDIUM (E.G., WIRE BASKET):

    A plant receptacle comprising a rigid gridwork container such as might be
    formed by intersecting or interwoven elongated strips or strands of metal,
    e.g., a cage or wire basket.


CLS 48/
TTL GAS:  HEATING AND  ILLUMINATING

CLS 48/
TXT This class relates only to gas for heating and illuminating purposes and
    includes apparatus, processes, and compositions for the manufacture of such
    gas and means for the purification, distribution, and storage thereof.

    (1)     Note.  This class does not include the manufacture of gas--such,
    for example, as oxygen, ozone, nitrous oxide, carbonic-acid gas, and
    chemical gases in general.  These are not heating or illuminating gases.
    Gases consisting of a single "pure" carbon compound and a process for
    synthesizing such a compound where the intent is to recover the compound,
    per se, are in Class 260, Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, its daughter
    Classes 530-570, or Class 585, Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds.

    (2)     Note.  This class does not include charging and discharging devices
    for retorts, nor does it include charging devices for cupola-generators,
    such as the well-known bell-and-hopper type. For these two classes of
    inventions see Class 202, Distillation:  Apparatus, and Class 266,
    Metallurigical Apparatus, respectively, and Class 414, Material or Article
    Handling, subclasses 147+.

    (3)     Note.  Every plant for producing gas from the combustion of fuel
    necessitates the use of a furnace of some sort, and where the invention
    alleged includes more than the furnace and extends into apparatus for
    treating the gases or modifications of the furnace, adapting it to treat
    them, the application belongs in Class 48, whether the furnace, per se, be
    a limekiln or a smelting-furnace.  In either case the furnace is merely an
    element of the plant and if divided out may be sent to its proper class.

    (4)     Note.  This class does not provide for the destruction of gaseous
    hazardous or toxic waste.  See Class 588, Hazardous or Toxic Waste
    Destruction or Containment, subclasses 208, 213, 226, 233, and 239 wherein
    the use of hydropyrolysis or destructive steam gasification is used.  For
    the use of heat or vacuum to drive off or produce a volatile substance, see
    subclasses  209, 213, 216, 220, 228, 234, 240, and 245.  Also, see
    subclasses 218, 221, 224, 236, 242, and 246 for the use of chemical agents
    in the destruction or containment of hazardous or toxic waste.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, appropriate subclasses for a solid
    or liquid fuel composition or a method for making or purifying such
    composition which may incidentally produce a burnable gas.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, appropriate subclasses for devices for
    the purpose set forth above that are claimed in combination with an
    internal combustion engine or with any element thereof.  This is not
    intended to apply to claims which, while in the form of a combination,
    state merely the intended use of the device--as, for example, "The
    combination, with an internal-combustion engine, of" followed by words
    defining the structure of a mixture-producing device not itself classified
    in internal-combustion engines.


            Devices for producing an explosive mixture from a liquid
    hydro-carbon and air or for producing the combustible constituent for such
    an explosive mixture, in which the operation of the mixture-producing
    device does not necessarily depend upon the suction produced by an
    internal-combustion engine, which mixture-producing device is capable of
    operation independent of the engine and if continued in operation would
    continue to produce an explosive mixture whether or not the engine
    continued to operate, go in appropriate subclasses under Class 48, GAS:
    HEATING AND ILLUMINATING, notwithstanding the fact that the device may be
    actually designed for the purpose of supplying an internal-combustion
    engine with an explosive mixture and may be operated by such engine.


            Devices in which it does not positively appear whether they are
    operated by suction produced by an internal-combustion engine or not, which
    could be so operated, but which do not necessarily depend upon suction for
    their operation, go in appropriate subclasses under Class 48, GAS:  HEATING
    AND ILLUMINATING. These devices ordinarily consist, essentially, of a
    chamber containing a liquid hydrocarbon over or through which air flows, it
    not positively appearing whether such air is forced through such chamber as
    by a pump or is caused to flow therethrough by suction produced by an
    engine.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 44 for a stove structure in which
    carbureted gas is burned.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, appropriate subclass for a
    process directed to the production of both coke and gas.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, appropriate subclass for apparatus for
    the production of both coke and gas.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 15+ for a mineral
    oil fuel, and other appropriate subclasses for a process of deriving  or
    treating a mineral oil in which process no burnable gas composition is
    intended to be recovered.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 581+ for a high-pressure-gas tank.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 237+ and 352+ for
    processes of purifying or producing ammonia involving a chemical reaction.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 11 for a combustion process involving a gas
    mixing or generating step, subclasses 36+ for a burner fed by a generator
    with automatic control of the generator; subclasses 203+ for a generating
    fuel tank and an associated burner; subclasses 233+ for a system in which a
    generator feeds generated gas to an external structure without
    purification, fixation or storage of the gas and also feeds gas to the
    burner heating the generator; subclasses 207+ for a generator feeding an
    immediately associated burner; and subclasses 354+ for a combined burner
    and mixer.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclass 6 for a blend of
    gaseous hydrocarbons, subclass 14 for a hydrocarbon fuel and other
    appropriate subclasses for a process of deriving or treating a hydrocarbon
    in which process no burnable gas composition is intended to be recovered.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, this is the
    generic class for destroying or containing  nonradioactive hazardous or
    toxic waste.


CLS 48/1
TXT Apparatus and processes for the combined generation and liquefaction of
    acetylene gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 600+ for processes and apparatus, per se,
    specialized to the manufacture of a solidified or liquefied product from a
    gas by physical treatment.


CLS 48/2
TXT Connected generators and gas-holders, the pressure in the generator
    regulating the supply of water in a to-and-fro or ebb-and-flow movement to
    the carbid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclass 98 for inflatable
    devices combined with an acetylene generator.


CLS 48/3
TXT Apparatus and processes in which the acetylene gas is generated and
    combined with some aeriform or gaseous fluid.  It includes those in which
    acetylene gas and another gas are simultaneously generated in the same or
    adjacent apparatus or gas is generated and passed over calcium carbid or
    mingled with acetylene gas.


CLS 48/4
TXT Structures whereby water is fed to the carbid.  The water is fed by gravity
    and controlled by the pressure of the gas in the generator or by the
    operation of the gas-holder.  It also includes structures for feeding the
    water to the carbid by capillary attraction.  This subclass includes
    generators in which water is fed by gravity to the top of the carbid and
    automatically regulated by the gas-pressure in the generator.  A hand-valve
    is employed to turn on and off the water-feed.


CLS 48/5
TXT Generators in which the water-feed is regulated by the movement of the
    gas-holder.  This subclass includes structures whereby the gas-holder
    operates a valve which feeds water to the top of the carbid in the
    generator.


CLS 48/6
TXT Generators in series of two or more and in which the water-feed is
    controlled by the gas-holder.


CLS 48/7
TXT Generators in series of two or more in which the water-feed is controlled
    by the gas-holder and automatically directed from one generator to another.


CLS 48/8
TXT Receptacles for carbid divided into communicating compartments to which
    water, fed successively, is controlled by the holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.


CLS 48/9
TXT Receivers to which the after-generation is conducted--that is, when the
    gasometer has been filled with gas.


CLS 48/10
TXT Structures feeding water from the gas-holder tank to the generator, the
    gas-holder operating a valve located within the tank.  It also includes
    structures wherein a valved water-tank is located within or on the
    gas-holder bell.


CLS 48/11
TXT Cylinders, slatted or otherwise, for carbid which are caused to rotate by
    the gas-holder and in which the water-feed is controlled by the action of
    the gas-holder. This subclass also includes cylinders rotated by gravity or
    hand in which the water-feed is operated by the gas-holder.


CLS 48/12
TXT Generators to which the water is supplied beneath the upper surface of the
    carbid and regulated by the movement of the gas-holder.


CLS 48/13
TXT Apparatus in which no valve is employed to regulate the feed of water to
    the generator.  It includes means for displacing water, a flexible tube, a
    siphon or tilting vessel operated by the gasholder.  In this subclass the
    feed of water is controlled by the gas-pressure in the generator or holder
    acting upon the column of water to be fed.  It also includes means carried
    by the gas-holder not otherwise classified under the subclasses of
    "Valveless feed".


CLS 48/14
TXT Devices, such as a wedge, piston, bucket, float, etc., carried by the
    gas-holder for displacing water contained in a tank, causing it to overflow
    and pass to the generator.


CLS 48/15
TXT Flexible tubes for feeding water to the generator carried by the gas-holder
    connected to and elevated and depressed within or above and below the
    water-supply.


CLS 48/16
TXT Generators directly connected to the interior of the gas-holder and caused
    to dip in and out of the water in the gasholder tank to feed water to the
    interior of the generator.


CLS 48/17
TXT Siphon-tubes carried by the gas-holder for making connections between the
    water-tank and the generator for feeding water.


CLS 48/18
TXT Trunnioned or pivoted vessels operated by the gas-holder so as to discharge
    water into a pipe leading to the generator.


CLS 48/19
TXT Generators containing carbid to which the water is admitted by an
    ebb-and-flow movement produced by the gas-pressure in the generator.


CLS 48/20
TXT Two or more generators having means for supporting carbid to which a body
    of water is supplied from beneath in an ebb-and-flow movement produced by
    the pressure of the gas in the generator.


CLS 48/21
TXT Receptacles for carbid divided into separate compartments or superposed and
    to which water fed successively from below in a body is controlled by the
    pressure of the gas in the generator.


CLS 48/22
TXT Receptacles in the form of a bell and tank stationary one within the other,
    and means provided within the bell for supporting the carbid to which water
    is fed from beneath by a to-and-fro or ebb-and-flow motion controlled by
    the pressure of the gas in the bell.


CLS 48/23
TXT Structures in which two or more generators are employed and which are used
    successively.


CLS 48/24
TXT Receptacles for carbid divided into communicating compartments to which
    water is fed successively.  The receptacles may be in series.  In this
    subclass the water is fed drop by drop to the top of each successive cell
    and controlled by the pressure of the gas in the generator.


CLS 48/25
TXT Generators in which water is supplied to the carbid by capillary
    attraction.  In this subclass an absorbent is used to conduct the water.


CLS 48/26
TXT Structures whereby the absorbent through which the water is fed by
    capillary attraction, may be adjusted to and from the carbid.


CLS 48/27
TXT Generators wherein means and materials are employed, except capillary feed,
    through which water seeps in its passage to the carbid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59.


CLS 48/28
TXT Percolating water-feed generators having valves operated by the pressure of
    the gas in the generator to regulate the flow of water.


CLS 48/29
TXT Cans or cases for carbid constructed of telescopic sections each having a
    closed end, one of which sections may be spring- pressed or it may be an
    open-top can containing carbid in which is placed a follower which may be
    spring or weight pressed.


CLS 48/30
TXT Vessels constructed of flexible elastic material for feeding water to the
    carbid, the pressure in the generator causing a to- and-fro movement.


CLS 48/31
TXT Vessels divided by a partition-wall into two communicating compartments,
    one of the compartments connecting with the generator to supply water
    thereto and receive gas therefrom, the pressure of the gas in the generator
    and compartment regulating the water-feed to the generator and causing the
    water to flow to and from the second compartment.


CLS 48/32
TXT Trunnioned receptacles provided with a support for the carbid and means to
    oscillate the same, whereby water in the lower part of the receptacle may
    be intermittently brought in contact with the carbid.


CLS 48/33
TXT Cylinders of or for containing carbid, caused to rotate or oscillate,
    whereby the hydrate, due to decomposition of the carbid and water, is
    removed by agitation.  This subclass includes cylinders, slatted or
    otherwise, rotated or oscillated by hand or gravity, also cylinders
    composed of carbid, and cylindrical carriers for carbid-packages.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11.


CLS 48/34
TXT Generators having a rotary grate for supporting the carbid and removing the
    hydrate.


CLS 48/35
TXT Generators to which the water is supplied within and beneath the upper
    surface of the carbid drop by drop.


CLS 48/36
TXT Devices for preventing accidents in the handling of the generator including
    means for interlocking two or more valves or means which extend over or
    secure the cover to the generator and simultaneously operate either one or
    more of the following valves; the gas-outlet valve, the water-inlet valve,
    or the sludge-valve, or vent the generator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58.


CLS 48/37
TXT Means for operating the water-feed valve by gas-pressure in the generator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28.


CLS 48/38
TXT Generators containing water into which the carbid is fed.  This subclass
    contains generators to which the carbid is fed not otherwise classified
    under the various subclasses of "Carbid-feed".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for article feeding
    subcombination, per se, Class 48 having only significant generator
    combinations or feeding subcombinations so specialized to the performance
    of the generating function as to preclude classification in a general
    dispensing art.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for fluent material feeding, per
    se, not combined with generator structure or not specialized for use with
    generators.


CLS 48/39
TXT Generators in which an endless belt or an apron is employed to feed the
    carbid to the water.  It does not include aprons or belts carrying buckets
    containing measured charges of carbid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48      and 49, for aprons or belts carrying buckets containing measured
    charges of carbid.


CLS 48/40
TXT Generators containing water to which the feed or carbid is regulated by
    means of a cock.


CLS 48/41
TXT Generators in which the carbid is caused to dip in and out of the water.
    In this subclass the carbid may be suspended from or held in suitable means
    supported by the gas-holder or supported by a piston or supported by
    yielding means within the tank.


CLS 48/42
TXT Dip carbid-feed generators wherein the carbid-receptacle is composed of a
    number of chambers or compartments which are successively brought in
    contact with the water.


CLS 48/43
TXT Carbid-feed generators having flap valves hinged at or near the mouth of
    the chute or hopper through which the carbid passes, automatically operated
    to feed the carbid.


CLS 48/44
TXT Generator-tanks to which the carbid is fed by hand.  In this subclass the
    carbid may be fed loosely or put in holders.  Does not include cartridges.


CLS 48/45
TXT Generators provided with suitable means for supporting carbid which is
    caused to dip in and out of the water, the carbid being fed through a
    hand-operated valve.


CLS 48/46
TXT Means for feeding definite charges of carbid.  In this subclass will be
    found devices not otherwise classified under "Measured charges".  This
    subclass includes those structures caused to reciprocate and discharge in
    the tank.


CLS 48/47
TXT Devices for feeding cartridges containing carbid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59,     for construction of the cartridge.


CLS 48/48
TXT Includes a series of receptacles arranged on the same horizontal plane
    supported by means caused to rotate and discharge the receptacles
    successively.  The receptacles may be provided with hinged bottoms and
    means for securing and releasing the same, or the receptacles may be
    trunnioned and provided with means for dumping the same or an endless belt
    provided with pockets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 82+ for article dispensers not
    otherwise provided for having similar structures and modes of operation.


CLS 48/49
TXT Pocket-wheels arranged to rotate on a vertical plane and discharge
    successively. The pocket may be provided with lids and means for opening
    and closing the same.  It also includes an endless belt having cups or
    carriers.


CLS 48/50
TXT Receptacles for carbid which have a fixed relation with the generator.
    They may be hinged and caused to dump, or they may be receptacles provided
    with hinged or sliding bottoms with catches and releasing means or a
    receptacle divided by a series of hinged or sliding shelves with catches
    and releasing means.


CLS 48/51
TXT Generators where a piston is used to feed the carbid.


CLS 48/52
TXT Carbid feed generators having a plate arranged beneath the
    discharge-opening of the carbid-hopper with an intervening space, the
    carbid resting upon the plate. The plate may be in the form of a disk, or
    curved.


CLS 48/53
TXT Carbid feed generators having valves caused to pass to and fro or through
    the discharge-opening of the carbid-hopper in a vertical plane.


CLS 48/53.1
TXT Carbid feed pop-valves operated by the rising and falling movement of the
    bell.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53.2,   for pop valves in which the carbid holder is carried by the bell.


CLS 48/53.2
TXT Bell-operated carbid feed pop-valves in which the carbid holder is carried
    by the bell.


CLS 48/53.3
TXT Carbid feed pop-valves operated by the movement of the diaphragm.


CLS 48/53.4
TXT Carbid feed pop-valves operated by the movement of the float.


CLS 48/54
TXT Generators having a screw conveyer to feed the carbid thereto.


CLS 48/55
TXT Carbid feed generators in which the valve slides upon its seat
    distinguished from the structure in subclass 52, in that there is no
    intervening space between the valve and the mouth of the hopper or seat.


CLS 48/56
TXT Structures used in connection with the generator whereby excess pressure in
    the generator permits gas to escape.


CLS 48/57
TXT Means located in and attached to the generator for stirring and removing
    the hydrate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47.


CLS 48/58
TXT Generators in which the valves controlling the water-feed and the gas
    outlet are connected so as to open or close simultaneously.  It also
    includes the simultaneous venting of the generator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36.


CLS 48/59
TXT Structures such as cans or cases to be used in generators and in which a
    small quantity of carbid is placed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, particularly subclasses .6, .7 and
    524.1, and the places specified in the notes to such class and subclasses
    for other packages of chemicals.


CLS 48/60
TXT Cartridges in which the carbid is combined with an agglutinating and
    protecting substance and formed into briquets, tablets, sticks, etc.


CLS 48/61
TXT Miscellaneous generators not otherwise classifiable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 30 for processes directed to furnace lining formation or repair
    and the search notes thereto, and subclasses 31+ for forming structural
    installations in situ.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 305 and 306 for gas-generating
    apparatus.


CLS 48/62
TXT Miscellaneous generators, having an upright, substantially cylindrical body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 171+.


CLS 48/63
TXT Cupola structures wherein air and steam are simultaneously injected for the
    continuous production of gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64.


CLS 48/64
TXT Means for superheating the air or steam, or both, before entering the
    cupola.


CLS 48/65
TXT Structures of the cupola type in which an electric current is used or
    produced for heating purposes.

    (1)     Note.  For electrical or wave energy apparatus, excepting radiant
    energy apparatus provided for in Class 250, Radiant Energy, specialized for
    the preparation of gaseous compounds or elements and involving chemical
    reactions which are caused by more than the mere thermal effects of the
    electrical or wave energy, see Class 204, Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave
    Energy, appropriate subclasses, and other related classes.


CLS 48/66
TXT Cupola structures provided with a bottom for supporting the fuel,
    constructed to rotate or rock.  Does not include rotary grates.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68.


CLS 48/67
TXT Cupola structures having a water-jacket.


CLS 48/68
TXT Water-jacketed cupola structures having a rotary bottom for supporting the
    fuel.


CLS 48/69
TXT Cupola structures having an open bottom and a basin or trough for water,
    forming a seal for closing said open bottom and through which the ash is
    removed.


CLS 48/71
TXT Cupola structures in which coal is distilled or gasified and into which
    steam or water is injected and decomposed and into which oil or oil-vapor
    is also injected.  The oil-vapor may be added to the coal and water gas
    outside of the distilling chamber.


CLS 48/72
TXT Generators in the form of a cupola or shaft in which coal is distilled or
    gasified and into which oil or oil-vapor is introduced or oil-gas is added.


CLS 48/73
TXT Cupola structures in which coal is distilled or gasified and into which
    steam is injected and decomposed.  Water-gas may be made separately and
    added to the coal-gas.


CLS 48/74
TXT Cupola structures having a filling of refractory material, such as brick,
    so as to be heated to a high temperature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80.


CLS 48/75
TXT Cupola structures adapted for injection of oil or oil-vapor and steam into
    incandescent coal.


CLS 48/76
TXT Cupola structures wherein ignited fuel is subjected to an air-blast.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     68 and 69.


CLS 48/77
TXT Generators in the form of a cupola or shaft in which coal is distilled or
    gasified.


CLS 48/78
TXT Cupola structures for containing a bed of incandescent fuel to which steam
    is admitted.  This subclass includes the alternate process of first
    blasting with air and then decomposing steam.


CLS 48/79
TXT Cupola structures for producing water-gas by the alternate process by first
    blasting and then decomposing steam.  The water-gas thus produced is then
    carbureted by the addition of a hydrocarbon fluid, oil vapor, or oil-gas.
    In this subclass the water-gas is passed through an ordinary carbureting
    vessel containing oil.


CLS 48/80
TXT Containing in addition to the cupola structure for the production of
    water-gas by the alternate process a chamber filled with refractory
    material to be highly heated and into which a hydrocarbon oil is admitted.
    Oil-gas may be admitted into this chamber, the oil or oil-gas combining
    with the water-gas.


CLS 48/81
TXT Combining with the well known cupola structure for the production of
    water-gas a retort to and through which the water-gas passes and to which a
    hydrocarbon oil or vapor is simultaneoulsy admitted.


CLS 48/82
TXT Cupola structures containing a body or bodies of incandescent fuel through
    which the steam is caused to pass first upwardly and then downwardly, or
    vice versa.


CLS 48/83
TXT Cupola structures for making water-gas by the up-and-down run provided with
    connected valves for changing the direction of the run.


CLS 48/84
TXT Combined cupola structure for the production of water-gas and a means for
    producing oil-gas and combining the two gases.


CLS 48/85
TXT Apparatus for making and carbureting and processes for carbureting or
    making carbureted carbon monoxide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 246+ and 418.2 for
    processes of purifying or making carbon monoxide wherein a chemical
    reaction is involved.


CLS 48/85.1
TXT Cupola generators in which the cupola body or a section thereof is movable
    for the purpose of agitating the fuel to prevent "scaffolding" and the like.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is not intended to include structures of the
    cupola or cylindrical type wherein the bottom or the cover, per se, is
    caused to rotate, such as are found in this class, subclasses 66 and 68.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66      and 68.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 108+.


CLS 48/85.2
TXT Cupola generators having means within the cupola for stirring the fuel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    432,    Heating, subclass 98 for a residual shaft furnace having an
    agitator for the heated material.


CLS 48/86
TXT Miscellaneous means for feeding fuel to the cupola gas-generator.

    (1)     Note.  Does not include the bell-and-hopper structure, such being
    classified in Class 266, Metallurgical Apparatus, appropriate subclasses
    and in Class 414, Material or Article Handling, subclasses 147+.


CLS 48/87
TXT Means applied to cupola structures, such as pressure-indicators, means for
    distributing steam, means for switching the blast or run, removable
    bottoms, fuel-rammers, poke-holes, peep-holes, oil-spraying devices, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus.


CLS 48/89
TXT Closed heated retorts for the gasification of carbonaceous material not
    otherwise classifiable.


CLS 48/90
TXT Individual plants consisting of a retort, purifier, condenser, and holder.
    The retort may be placed in an ordinary cookstove.  They may omit the
    purifier, condenser, or holder.


CLS 48/92
TXT Retorts containing heated molten metal into which materials to be gasified
    are injected.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 219 for a retort containing a
    mass of fusible material through which heat is conveyed.


CLS 48/93
TXT Retorts into which oil and gas are injected.


CLS 48/94
TXT Retorts into which oil and steam or water are injected.


CLS 48/95
TXT Retorts into which oil, steam, or water and air are injected to be
    gasified.  The air may be added to the gas produced from the oil and steam
    or water.


CLS 48/96
TXT Retorts into which oil and steam or water are injected and the resultant
    gas passed through a vessel containing hydrocarbon fluid.


CLS 48/98
TXT Combined retorts for gasifying coal and means for introducing steam or
    water and oil.  The water or steam may be converted into CO, H, and the oil
    gasified in separate retorts and combined with the coal-gas.


CLS 48/99
TXT Combined retorts for the gasification of coal and means for introducing
    water, steam, or water-gas.


CLS 48/100
TXT Combined retorts for gasifying coal and means for introducing oil therein
    or for combining the coal and oil gas.


CLS 48/101
TXT Retorts for producing gas from coal.


CLS 48/102
TXT Retorts containing a body of oil or into which oil is injected.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 568+ for a vapor generator
    forming a part of an explosive engine.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 207+ for a burner fed by a retort and for a
    retort utilizing heat derived from the generated gas.  However, where an
    unburned portion of the gas generated in the retort is purified, fixed or
    stored classification is in appropriate subclass of Class 48.


CLS 48/103
TXT Retorts in which is located an electric heater for gasifying the oil.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include apparatus or processes where
    an electrolytic action is effected upon the material gasified, for example.

    (2)     Note.  For electrical or wave energy generators, excepting radiant
    energy apparatus provided for in Class 250, Radiant Energy, specialized for
    the preparation of gaseous compounds or elements, and involving chemical
    reactions which are caused by more than the mere thermal effects of the
    electrical or wave energy, see Class 204, Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave
    Energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    392,    Electric Resistance Heating Devices, subclasses 301+.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 208 for a burner fed by gas generated by an
    electrical heating means.


CLS 48/104
TXT Retorts in which oil is gasified the gas- pressure being used to entrain
    air on its way to the gasometer.  In this subclass the gas is purified or
    fixed on its way to the storage-gasometer.  The retort is heated by a
    portion of the gas generated.  Does not include similar devices where a
    portion or all of the gas is burned to heat the retort, in which is no
    fixation, purification, or storage of the gas.


CLS 48/105
TXT Vessels containing a body of oil into which steam is injected.  Also
    includes devices feeding oil for gasification into a highly-superheated jet
    of steam for decomposition.


CLS 48/106
TXT Devices whereby the oil fed to the retort is regulated by the pressure of
    the gas either in the retort or gasometer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104.


CLS 48/107
TXT Combined retorts for gasifying oil and means for introducing air or oxygen.
     The air or oxygen may be added to the oil-gas after it leaves the retort
    or in the gasometer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 210+ for a fuel burner fed by a retort
    supplied with both fuel and air.


CLS 48/108
TXT Retorts constructed to contain incandescent coal and into which steam is
    injected.


CLS 48/109
TXT Retorts constructed to contain incandescent coal for making water-gas,
    which is after carbureted.


CLS 48/110
TXT Retorts for separately making water and oil gases, which may afterward be
    mixed.


CLS 48/111
TXT Retorts in which wood, peat, sawdust, or other vegetable matter is
    distilled for making gas and to which steam may be added and decomposed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, appropriate subclasses.


CLS 48/112
TXT Retorts in which wood, etc., is distilled for making gas and into which oil
    is injected or separately gasified and added to the wood-gas.  Steam may
    also be injected.


CLS 48/113
TXT Furnace structures to generate for producer-gas for heating benches of
    retorts.  The furnace may have flues for the passage of air, also flues for
    the passage of the products of combustion whereby the air is heated.
    Includes settings for the retorts and processes for heating the retorts.


CLS 48/116
TXT Combined hydrogen-generators and means for carbureting the hydrogen by
    passing the same in contact with or through a hydrocarbon liquid.


CLS 48/117
TXT Combined hydrogen-generators and means for carbureting air and mixing the
    two gases. They may further carburet the mixture.


CLS 48/118
TXT Generators in which a hydrocarbon oil floats on the surface of the acid
    solution and through the generated hydrogen passes.


CLS 48/118.5
TXT Generators constructed to be transported from place to place for the
    purpose of filling local gasometers.


CLS 48/119
TXT Vessels constructed of metal, clay etc., for gasifying materials by heat
    applied thereto.  This subclass includes retorts of various designs
    arranged on a horizontal plane.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    432,    Heating, subclasses 253+ for residual means for holding, shielding
    or supporting work within a furnace while being heated.


CLS 48/120
TXT Retorts divided or formed into two or more chambers.


CLS 48/122
TXT Retorts constructed to be placed in the furnace in an inclined position.


CLS 48/123
TXT Retorts vertically arranged within the furnace.


CLS 48/124
TXT Doors for closing the mouth of retorts. Includes special fastening means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 173+.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclasses 242+.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 200+.


CLS 48/126
TXT Auxiliary devices applied to retorts, such as mouthpieces, door-seats,
    stoppers, etc.


CLS 48/127.1
TXT CONVERSION OF HYDROCARBON GAS AND BLENDING OF PRODUCT WITH FURTHER
    HYDROCARBON GAS, PROCESS:

    Process under the class definition in which a normally gaseous hydrocarbon
    or gaseous mixture containing predominantly such hydrocarbon is subjected
    to a chemical reaction and a normally gaseous hydrocarbon or gaseous
    mixture is mixed with the reaction product.

    (1)     Note.  The unreacted hydrocarbon gas may have the same composition
    as the gas fed to the reaction or a different composition.

    (2)     Note.  The process often has for its purpose the lowering of the
    BTU value of a batch of natural gas, which is split, one part treated, and
    recombined.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    197     and 198.1+, for the conversion of a hydrocarbon gas to a different
    combustible gas composition.


CLS 48/127.3
TXT METHANE (NATURAL GAS)-CONTAINING PRODUCT, OR TREATMENT OR RECOVERY PROCESS:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which a gaseous product
    composition containing methane is claimed or in which a process is claimed
    which results in such a product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    197,    for a combustible gas product composition other than one containing
    methane.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 372+ for a gaseous composition in general
    or a method for manufacturing it.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclass 6 for mixture of gases
    containing only hydrocarbons.


CLS 48/127.5
TXT Process including chemical reaction:

    Process under subclass 127.3 in which a compound included in the feedstock
    to the process is changed to another compound.

    (1)     Note.  The resulting compound may be methane or the entire reaction
    may be concerned with a compound other than methane, for example, an
    impurity compound in a mainly-methane stream may be reacted to remove it or
    make it less objectionable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198.3,  for a process wherein an impurity is removed after chemical
    conversion of methane to a different gaseous composition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclasses 700+ for synthesis
    of methane as a relatively pure compound.


CLS 48/127.7
TXT Catalytic:

    Subject matter under subclass 127.5 which employs an extraneous accelerator
    or retarder for the reaction.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass (127.7) serves as a collection place for
    cross-reference copies of patents wherein a methane-containing mixture is
    recovered from an enzyme-catalyzed reaction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 603 for a process in
    which methane is collected incidental to sewage or other waste liquid
    treatment.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 167 for
    the manufacture of methane by fermentation, that is, bacterial or other
    enzyme-catalyzed synthesis.


CLS 48/127.9
TXT APPARATUS FOR CONVERTING OR TREATING HYDROCARBON GAS:

    Apparatus under the class definition which uses a hydrocarbon gas as a
    feedstock or in which a hydrocarbon gas is an effluent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127.1,  127.3+, 197, and 198.1+, for the corresponding processes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

     422,   Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, appropriate subclasses for chemical reactors in
    general.


CLS 48/128
TXT Means not otherwise classifiable wherein gas is subjected to the action of
    a medium capable of removing impurities.


CLS 48/144
TXT Vessels for containing liquid hydrocarbon through or over which air or gas
    is passed.

    (1)     Note.  See also main class definition under this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses  568+.


CLS 48/160
TXT Vessels constructed to contain hydrocarbon liquid, or to which the same is
    fed drop by drop, and to which air is admitted under atmospheric pressure,
    and from which the carbureted air passes by gravity.


CLS 48/170
TXT Means for directing the passage of the gas through two or more purifiers
    and for by- passing one or more.


CLS 48/173
TXT Means for drawing the gas from the generator, regulating the action of the
    same, and preventing the formation of a vacuum.


CLS 48/174
TXT Vessels for the storage of gas.  This subclass includes stationary vessels
    and independent parts to be used in the construction of the holder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 358.

    220,    Receptacles.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 53+ for underground
    storage of fluids.


CLS 48/175
TXT Means combined with the holder so related that on excessive pressure in the
    holder the gas escapes.


CLS 48/176
TXT Structures consisting of an open-top tank and an inverted bell.  The tank
    may be provided with a purifier through which the gas passes on its way to
    the bell; or with a chamber for storing oil or various utensils used around
    the works.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5       and 104.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 93+ for gas pumps having a moving contracting
    chamber in a liquid tank.


CLS 48/177
TXT Structures where the bell is divided horizontally into sections having
    water-seal joints and telescoping.


CLS 48/178
TXT Holders comprising a plurality of sections of which one or more is flexible
    and so related that the holder may collapse.


CLS 48/179
TXT Open-top chambers within which the bell moves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 581+ for a high-pressure-gas tank.


CLS 48/180.1
TXT Mixers:

    Processes and apparatus for mixing combustible gases or a gas and a
    supporter of combustion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 195+ for meters for feeding gases
    in definite proportions.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 568+ for mixers peculiar to
    explosive-engines.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 3 for a process of general utility
    involving control of the mixing of diverse fluids, subclasses 98+ for a
    self-proportioning flow system of general utility and subclasses 602+ for a
    fluid handling system having plural inlets and a single outlet for fluids
    other than heating or illuminating gas.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 8+ for a
    sprinkling, spraying or diffusing process of general utility involving
    mixing; and subclasses 398+ for a combined mixing and spraying structure of
    general utility including a flow modifying terminal outlet means.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 354+ for a fuel-oxidizer mixing and flame
    holding assembly where the flame holder is no more than an abruptly
    terminated flow means.


CLS 48/181
TXT Mixers comprising a bell and tank within which the gases are mixed, the
    movement of the bell controlling the supply of gases or air and gas.


CLS 48/182
TXT Devices where the mixture of gases or gas and air takes place before
    entering the bell and is controlled thereby.


CLS 48/183
TXT Devices where the mixture of gases or air and gas is made beyond the bell
    and controlled thereby.


CLS 48/184
TXT Devices where a diaphragm operates the valves controlling the supply of
    gases or gas and air, the pressure of the gas operating the diaphragm.


CLS 48/185
TXT Devices where a body connected to and operating the supply-valves for the
    gases or gas and air is made buoyant by the specific gravity of the gas.


CLS 48/186
TXT Devices where pumps are employed to deliver the gases or air and gas to a
    mixing- chamber.


CLS 48/187
TXT Bladed rotary drums located within a casing for drawing in the gases or air
    and gas and mixing them.


CLS 48/188
TXT Devices where the air and gas or gases are mixed before entering the drum.


CLS 48/189
TXT Devices where the air and gas or gases are mixed beyond the drum, the drum
    being used to force one or both of the elements.


CLS 48/189.1
TXT Three or more different fluids entering apparatus:

    Apparatus under subclass 180.1 having provision for three or more different
    combustible gases or gases which support combustion to separately enter the
    apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  Any difference in the gases is sufficient to make them
    different.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes for example devices which mix a high
    calorific fuel gas, a low calorific fuel gas and air.


CLS 48/189.2
TXT With heating means:

    Apparatus under subclass 180.1 additionally including means to heat the
    mixture produced or component thereof.


CLS 48/189.3
TXT Auxilary air inlet:

    Apparatus under subclass 180.1 having means for adding air to an existing
    mixture of air and a combustible gas.


CLS 48/189.4
TXT Mixer in flow path of existing mixture:

    Apparatus in the flow path of an existing mixture which improves the extent
    of mixing.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus in this or indented subclasses is characterized by
    adding no additional component to the mixture.


CLS 48/189.5
TXT Rotating mixer:

    Apparatus under subclass 189.4 wherein an element rotates in the flow path
    of the existing mixture.

    (1)     Note.  The rotation may be caused either by the motion of the
    mixture itself or by external force.


CLS 48/189.6
TXT Includes element made of engaged strands or fibers, e.g., screen, fabric,
    etc.:

    Apparatus under subclass 189.4 which includes an element made of fibers or
    strands which cross and touch each other, including a single strand which
    loops and touches itself.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes for example screen, woven or nonwoved
    fabric, a mass of steel wool, etc.  The fibers or strands may or may not be
    attached together where they cross as by adhesive, etc.


CLS 48/190
TXT Means and methods for the distribution of gas.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains miscellaneous patents not otherwise
    classified, such as those for preventing the freezing in the pipes,
    charging distributing holders on trains, ships, etc.

    (2)     Note.  For pipes or tubes, see Class 138, Pipes and Tubular
    Conduits, and for devices of general application for the prevention of
    fluid in pipes from freezing, see Class 138, subclasses 32+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, particularly subclasses 561+ for fluid handling and
    distribution systems not otherwise provided for.


CLS 48/191
TXT Means for reducing and regulating the pressure of gas in a distributing
    system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 494+, particularly subclasses 505+ for
    fluid-pressure regulators, per se.


CLS 48/192
TXT Means for preventing, also localizing and confining, explosions in a
    gas-distributing system.


CLS 48/193
TXT Means for detecting and providing for the escape of leakage gas from mains.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 40.5 for positively creating a
    condition to produce leakage of defective mains.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 68, 299.01+ and 408.1 for gas leak testing
    compositions.


CLS 48/194
TXT Means for preventing the leakage of gas from the mains at their couplings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 13+ for a coupling combined
    with leakage disposal means, and subclasses 148.6+ for compound joints.
    See the Search Notes thereunder.


CLS 48/195
TXT Means for charging gas with an odorous substance.


CLS 48/197
TXT Processes not otherwise classifiable for the manufacture and accessory
    treatment of gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127.1,  for a process in which a hydrocarbon gas feedstock is converted to
    fuel gas of a different composition and this latter composition is blended
    with hydrocarbon gas.

    127.3+, for a fuel gas product containing methane or a process for treating
    or recovering such a product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclasses 300-459 for liquefied,
    normally gaseous fuel compositions, classified principally on the basis of
    nonhydrocarbon additives thereto.

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, for production of gaseous
    compounds or elements involving chemical reactions which are caused by more
    than the mere thermal effects of electrical or wave energy, especially
    subclasses 170+ for a process involving a chemical reaction brought about
    by an electrostatic field or electrical discharge to produce a gaseous
    hydrocarbon.

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, for electrolysis, especially subclasses 334+
    for electrolytic synthesis of a chemical compound or element.

    518,    Chemistry: Fischer-Tropsch Processes;  or Purification or Recovery
    of  Products Thereof, for processes of producing nonfuel gases, which are
    not specifically set forth as being useful as fuels, by the reaction of
    hydrogen with carbon oxides.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, particularly subclass 14, for
    liquified, normally gaseous fuel compositions which are mixtures of
    hydrocarbons only.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the  use of heat, vacuum, or chemical agents when destroying
    or containing hazardous or toxic waste.


CLS 48/198.1
TXT Manufacture from methane (natural gas):

    Subject matter under subclass 197 in which the feedstock to the process
    includes a significant amount of methane gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127.9,  for the corresponding apparatus.


CLS 48/198.2
TXT Employing carbon particles, porous barrier element or molten
    material:Subject matter under subclass 198.1 in which the conversion
    process employs a normally solid material in its liquid state or carbon
    particles (which may be carbon particles produced in the same or a
    different stage of the process) or self-sustaining element having pores
    which permit the passage of some, but not all, components of a gaseous
    composition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200,    201, 202 and 210, for the production of fuel gas from coal or other
    carbon particles without the use of methane-containing gas.


CLS 48/198.3
TXT With specified treatment of converted product, e.g., purification,
    particular cooling, testing, etc.:Subject matter under subclass 198.1 in
    which the gaseous product of the process is subjected to a further
    treatment which does not change the chemical nature of the finished desired
    product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclasses for a process for purifying
    or separating gas compositions via the liquefaction or solidification of
    normally gaseous materials.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, for testing methods in general, and the main
    class definition thereto for a directory of other loci for the testing art.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, appropriate subclasses for processes,
    per se, for the separation of gas from a fluid mixture.

    165,    Heat Exchange, for cooling methods and apparatus, in general.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 210+ for gas
    purification by a method involving a chemical reaction.


CLS 48/198.5
TXT Employing oxygen donor particles or carbidable metal particles:Subject
    matter under subclass 198.1 in which a feedstock or an intermediate mixture
    contacts particles of a metal which can be converted to a carbide of the
    metal or oxygen-containing particles which can give up their oxygen to
    another gas used in the process.

    (1)     Note.  The particles involved must be described as carbidable or
    oxygen-donating or the carbiding or oxygen-donating reaction must be
    described as taking place.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198.7,  for a process including contact with particles described as
    catalytic.


CLS 48/198.6
TXT Specified direction of gas travel through particle mass, e.g.,
    fluidization, flow reversal, etc.:Subject matter under subclass 198.1 in
    which a gas involved in the process is described as traveling through a
    particle mass in a specified direction, e.g., vertically, downwardly, etc.,
    or in opposite directions through the same particle mass at different
    stages of the process.

    (1)     Note.  The mere statement that the particle mass is fluidized, or
    words to that effect, is sufficient for placement in this subclass.


CLS 48/198.7
TXT Employing catalytic particles:

    Subject matter under subclass 198.1 in which a gas contacts a reaction
    accelerating or retarding material in particle form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198.2,  for a similar process in which carbon particles may act as a
    catalyst.

    198.5,  for a similar process in which metal or oxide particles, ordinarily
    considered a catalyst, chemically combine with carbon or yield oxygen to a
    reactant.

    198.6,  for a similar process in which a mass of catalytic particles is
    fluidized.


CLS 48/198.8
TXT With specified reactant velocity, angle of entry to reactor or mechanical
    energy production, e.g., use of internal combustion engine, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 198.1 in which an internal combustion engine
    or other producer of mechanical energy is used as a reactor apparatus, or
    where the speed of gas flow to, through or from the reactor is specified or
    where the angle of the path of gas flowing into a reactor is specified.


CLS 48/199
TXT Processes wherein hydrogen gas is brought in contact with a liquid
    hydrocarbon.


CLS 48/200
TXT Processes for gasifying coal and oil and decomposing water and combining
    the resultant gases.  These elements may be separately gasified and united
    or conjointly gasified.


CLS 48/201
TXT Processes for making and combining coal and olefiant gases.  They may be
    made separately and united or made combined.


CLS 48/202
TXT Processes for gasifying coal and combining therewith water-gas or
    simultaneously gasifying coal and decomposing steam in the same retort.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclass 38 for a process of
    carbonizing coal in the presence of steam.


CLS 48/203
TXT Processes for making the well-known Siemens producer gas, which consists in
    blasting with air an ignited bed of fuel.


CLS 48/204
TXT Processes whereby a body of fuel is first heated to incandescence and then
    steam injected.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclass 38 for a process of
    carbonizing coal in the presence of steam.


CLS 48/205
TXT Processes whereby steam is decomposed by being passed through a body of
    incandescent fuel and then carbureted by means of a volatile hydrocarbon
    either in the form of a liquid, vapor, or gas.


CLS 48/206
TXT Processes for the continuous manufacture of water-gas by bringing steam
    into contact with coal maintained at a decomposing temperature either by
    internal combustion or heat applied.


CLS 48/207
TXT Processes wherein steam is admitted to the top of a bed of incandescent
    fuel, passes through, and the resultant gas drawn off at the bottom.


CLS 48/208
TXT Processes in which steam is caused to pass upwardly and downwardly, or vice
    versa, through a body or separate bodies of incandescent fuel.


CLS 48/209
TXT Processes for gasifying wood, sawdust, peat, or other vegetable matter.
    The gas generated may be carbureted or have added to it oil or oil gas or
    other gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, for a process of destructive
    distillation of wood, sawdust, peat or other vegetable matter.


CLS 48/210
TXT Methods for generating gas from coal.


CLS 48/211
TXT Processes for gasifying oil.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, particularly subclasses 106+
    for the production of both a gas and a mineral oil from a mineral oil
    unless the oil produced is merely incidental to the production of a gas
    from the oil feed.


CLS 48/212
TXT Processes where oil and air are injected into a heated retort.  The air may
    be added to the gas produced from the oil.


CLS 48/213
TXT Processes wherein oil and gas are injected into a highly heated retort.


CLS 48/214
TXT Processes wherein oil and steam or water are injected into a highly heated
    retort.


CLS 48/215
TXT Processes wherein oil, steam, and air are injected into a highly heated
    retort.  The air may be added to and mixed with the gas resulting from the
    decomposition of the oil and steam or water.


CLS 48/216
TXT Processes for generating acetylene gas by the mutual decomposition of
    calcium carbid and water and for preparing calcium carbid for such use.
    This subclass covers processes of the first type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 171 for processes
    of producing acetylene gas by a chemical reaction brought about by an
    electrostatic field or an electrical discharge.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, for electrolysis, especially subclass 462 for
    electrolytic synthesis of a hydrocarbon.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclasses 534+ for a process
    of synthesizing acetylene or a hydrocarbon derivative thereof where the
    intent is to produce a relatively pure organic compound.


CLS 48/217
TXT Processes in which a retarded generation of acetylene is produced in
    contra-distinction to the usual rapid generation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60.


CLS 48/219
TXT Processes for carbureting air or gas generally by passing the same in
    contact with hydrocarbon liquid.


CLS 49/
TTL MOVABLE OR REMOVABLE  CLOSURES

CLS 49/
TXT INDEX TO THIS BULLETIN



    I.      CLASS DEFINITION

    II.     GLOSSARY

    III.    GENERAL LINE WITH CERTAIN OTHER CLASSES

    IV.     CLOSURES IN OTHER CLASSES

    V.      INDEX TO CLASSES NOTED IN SECTIONS III, IV AND THE SUBCLASSES OF
    THE CLASS

    I.      CLASS DEFINITION


    This is the residual class of closures, which are movable or removable, and
    of ancillary devices not elsewhere classifiable.

    (1)     Note.  The terms "closure", "movable closure", and "removable
    closure", are defined in the glossary.

    (2)     Note.  The schedule of this class was built on patents issued since
    1930. Older patents were placed in the schedule mainly on the basis of
    disclosure and not necessarily on the basis of claimed subject matter.



    II.     GLOSSARY

    ACTUATOR

    (See OPERATOR)  The force input means to the closure for imparting movement
    thereto, e.g., an operator.  The term is broader than "operator" since a
    handle which does not move relative to the closure is considered an
    actuator.

    BARRIER

    A construction forming an extended indefinite surface preventing or
    inhibiting the passage of persons or things, e.g., wall, ceiling, floor,
    roof or cover.

    CABLE

    A flexible connector such as a rope, chain or the like.

    CLOSURE

    A closure is an obstructive structure whose presence in or before a passage
    bars traffic through the passage.  The character of passage varies
    depending on the thing or things the passage is intended to accommodate.
    For example, a single rod across a doorway prevents passage of a person but
    not a small animal; a letter slot permits passage of a letter but not a
    large package, a window sash permits passage of light but not air, a
    shutter permits passage of air but restricts the passage of light.

    LEVER

    An elongated rigid arm which is pivoted at least one point along its length.

    LINK

    A type of lever which is pivoted at two or more points along its length,
    usually at its extremities.

    MOTOR DRIVEN OR ACTUATED

    A powered means such as a motor or engine utilized as the moving force or
    input of the operator.  A mere spring is not a powered means, but a motor
    having a spring as the source of power is included within the meaning of
    the term defined.

    MOVABLE CLOSURE

    A closure mounted to move in a regular, repetitive, predetermined path with
    respect to a passage so as to alternately open or close the passage.

    MULTIDIRECTIONAL MOVEMENT

    Motion along two or more distinct lines of travel or about two or more axes
    of rotation or a combination thereof, in a single operation.

    OPERATOR

    A manipulatable mechanical means, movable relative to the closure, for
    imparting movement to the closure relative to its mounting means, in its
    opening or closing movement.  A mere spring which effects the movement of
    the closure, for example, by utilizing the stored energy to return the
    closure to starting position, is not included within the meaning of this
    term.

    PANEL

    A sheet-like member which is a section of a closure structure.

    PORTAL

    Structure defining an opening through a barrier for the passage of persons
    or things, e.g., the framing of a door or window opening.

    REMOVABLE CLOSURE

    A closure which is mounted so as to be readily physically disassociated
    from its supporting structure to form a passage.

    RECTILINEAR MOVEMENT OF CLOSURE

    Straight line motion in opposite directions, such as up and down, right and
    left, to open or close a passage.

    SLIDING MOVEMENT OF CLOSURE

    Rectilinear motion which is constrained by stationary guides on the
    supporting member(s).

    SLIDE-STILE

    An elongated member extending along the edge of a closure in opposition to
    a portal frame member, e.g., jamb, and connectable to the closure for
    sliding therewith.

    SWINGING MOVEMENT OF CLOSURE:

    A turning motion about a pivot to open or close a passage.

    III.    GENERAL LINE WITH CERTAIN OTHER CLASSES

    (A)     The following classes take closure combinations where only so much
    of the closure is claimed as pertains to the subject matter of the class
    noted:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, except, see the search note in this class
    (49), subclass 445 for the line between the counterbalances in that
    subclass and the counterbalances in subclass 193 of that class (16).

    70,     Locks.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, except, see the search notes in this class (49),
    subclass 414 for the line between the friction bearings of that subclass
    and the double acting bolts in subclasses 14+ and 70+ of Class 292, and see
    the note in subclass 356 for the line between the push rod actuators of
    this class (49) and the extension links in subclasses 262+ of Class 292.



    (B)     The following classes take a closure claimed as the load by name
    only or in general terms: 60, Power Plants 74, Machine Element or Mechanism
    91, Motors: Expansible Chamber Type 92, Expansible Chamber Devices
    192,Clutches and Power-Stop Control 318, Electricity: Motive Power Systems
    418, Rotary Expansible Chambers Devices, 475, Planetary Gear Transmission
    Systems or Components.



    (C)     Special situations



            Class 52, Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), takes (1) a building
    or barrier having building features in addition to that of merely forming
    the opening or support for a movable closure, (2) means forming an opening
    through a barrier, (3) structure having features for removal of a panel
    section for purposes of repair or initial assembly or final disassembly,
    (4) a transparent panel (window) with means to treat the panel not
    elsewhere provided for, and (5) for panels, per se, even though defined as
    a closure.  Also see section IV (F), for the subclass location of closures
    in Class 52.

            Class 454, Ventilation, takes a plurality of spaced movable
    closures especially arranged to utilize natural laws or phenomena to effect
    ventilation, e.g., top and bottom ventilation for a window whereby fresh
    air enters at the bottom and stale air leaves at the top, and for a movable
    closure combined with ventilation means to supply, distribute, regulate,
    treat or direct air in a tortuous path or to change the direction of flow
    of the air.  A mere through passage in a wall combined with a closure for
    the passage of air is classified in this class (49).

            Class 160, Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, for:

    (a)     Closures utilizing flexible material or fabrics in their panel
    portions;

    (b)     Closures made of plural strips, slats or panels interconnected with
    one another for relative motion;

    (c)     Closures of either or both types (a) and (b) combined with closures
    of other types.  Note that subclasses 90+ of Class 160 provide for the
    combination of a Class 49 and a Class 160 closure.



            Class 160 will take a flexible panel of the type provided for where
    the sole disclosure is flexible, even though the claims are not limited
    thereto.  Class 49 is superior to Class 160 and will take a flexible
    closure panel under the following conditions:

    (1)     An impact absorbing flexible barricade as set forth in subclass 9
    of Class 49.

    (2)     A flexible movable closure combined with an animal blocker,
    repeller or chaser.  See subclasses 58+ of Class 49.

    (3)     Plural flexible movable closures on opposite sides of an
    independently movable or removable center post.  See subclass 365 of Class
    49.

    (4)     When the closure does not depend upon its flexibility for movement,
    e.g., a flexible panel within a rigid frame which is mounted for movement,
    and is not provided for in the Class 160 schedule.

            Class 296, Land Vehicles: Bodies and Tops, subclasses 146.1+ for
    either (a) a plurality of access barriers or closures about a vehicle body
    or (b) an access barrier or closure combined with a feature or accessory of
    a vehicle body (e.g., sill, side rail, windshield, seat armrest, visor,
    etc.); subclasses 210+ for an access barrier or closure combined with
    structure defining a vehicle top (roof) (e.g., sun roof and/or moon roof,
    etc.). Class 49, Movable and Removable Closures, is the controlling class
    for a single door and/or window for a single opening in either a vehicle
    body or top in the absence of a defining feature or accessory correlated to
    a vehicle body or top, respectively.

    IV.     CLOSURES IN OTHER CLASSES

    A.      Art devices having a closure as a part of the combination are
    classified for the most part with the particular art.  The following notes
    mention some such art combinations, but no attempt has been made to mention
    all.  An attempt has, however, been made to list all classes and subclasses
    for closures, per se.



    B.      Dispensing:

    Closures constructed for dispensing, specially related to receptacles or
    containers to assist to promote dispensing, or combined with other
    dispensing structure have (for the most part) not been listed.  In some
    instances, dispensing structures and/or closures having structure closely
    related to nondispensing closure structures, have been listed.  For such
    devices, see the appropriate dispensing classification, Class 222,
    Dispensing, being the generic class, and see the notes in that class for
    the distribution of dispensing art.



    C.      Valves:

    Valve type closures are not here listed; see the following which are the
    main classes for valves:

    37,     Fluid Handling.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation.



    D.      Firearms, Ordnance and Ammunition:

    42,     Firearms, subclasses 2+ for breech closures.

    89,     Ordnance, subclasses 17+ for breech closures and subclass 30 for
    touch-hole stoppers.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 304 and 333 for plugs to be
    placed in blast holes to confine the blasting charge, and subclass 532 for
    gun or cartridge wads.



    E.      Furnace and Heating Classes:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating,subclass 124 for retort lids,
    subclass 176 for tanks with bell type closures.

    110,    Furnaces, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 112, 116
    and 158 for furnace doors in combination with other furnace structure;
    subclass 172 for furnace fronts with doors; subclasses 173+ for furnace
    doors; subclass 180 for doors and casings with cooling means and subclasses
    181+ for casings and arches for furnace doors.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 360+ for the structure of
    headers for water tube boilers; subclasses 497+ for water cooled boiler
    fronts, subclass 498 having water cooled furnace doors.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, particularly the following subclasses which
    occur in the class list in the order noted:

        190+,       for stove doors and windows.

        201+,       for stove and fireplace fenders.

        211+,       for stove lids and tops.

        319,        for flue stoppers.

        544+,       for closures for fireplace openings.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 72+ and 134.1+ for a heat exchanger with
    a removable closure; subclasses 98+ for a movable closure combined with a
    radiator, and subclass 158 for a heat exchanger with a head closure that
    forms a manifold.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 190 where a condenser forms a
    cap or closure for a still, and subclasses 242+ for retort and still
    closures.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclass 272 for devices for closing the
    tap hole or tuyere to stop flow of molten material.



    F.      Receptacle, Building Structure and Vehicle Body Classes:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), for closures and related
    structure provided in that class (52), particularly: subclasses 19+ for
    manholes and roof entrance ways, subclass 37 for disparate articles on or
    adjacent a closure portal, subclasses 64+ for a barrier section mounted for
    repositioning, subclass 85 for a curved arch type doorway, subclass 107 for
    a window well and cover, subclasses 171.3+ for a window pane with treating
    means, subclass 186 for a closure related to a stair, subclass 199 for a
    roof vent, subclass 201 for a bay window, subclasses 204.1+ for a closure
    portal with a specified building feature, subclasses 302.1+ for a wall
    drain, subclasses 393+ for a window pane spaced from its frame by a
    yieldable separator, subclasses 455+ for a plural panel door, subclass 473
    for a louvered panel with fixed slats, subclass 476 for a releasable, frame
    section which permits removal of a closure panel for repair, subclasses
    764+ for a closure panel, e.g., pane, retained by a separable fastener and
    subclasses 782.1+ for a closure panel.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, for closures associated with both passenger
    and freight cars, particularly subclasses 239+ for dumping cars, subclasses
    332+ for convertible open and closed passenger cars and for various other
    closures or closure combinations, subclasses 341+, 343, 348+, 350+, 353,
    377, 378, 395, 398, 426+, 437+, 439+, and 450.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclasses 6+ for
    plural closures used as a trapping mechanism, subclasses 11+ for a
    protective shield movable from a retracted position to an operative
    position, and subclasses 64+ for a movable closure combined with a safe or
    like structure.

    114,    Ships, subclasses 27+ for dumping and unloading means for scows,
    particularly subclasses 35 and 36+ for those having side and bottom doors;
    subclass 47 for floating dry-docks with end gates; subclasses 116+ for
    bulkheads and bulkheads provided with doors; subclasses 173+ for ports;
    subclass 180 for Hawse pipe stoppers and covers; subclass 197 for boat
    plugs with valves; subclasses 201+ for hatches and covers and subclasses
    227+ for leak stoppers.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 11 for a movable partition closure in a
    stock car, and subclasses 15+ for a confining and housing device having a
    closure, especially subclass 15.2 for a race track starting stall having a
    movable gate.

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclass 117 for tent doors.

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, particularly the following
    subclasses which occur in the class list in the order noted.  118+ for
    purse closures.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 50+ for bottle necks which are
    breakable and include a stopper, subclasses 54+ for bottle necks which are
    breakable and include a stopper and a stopper fastener and 200+ for bottle
    closures in general.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses: 56+,    for box closures.76+,   for
    barrel closures.98+,    for barrel bungs.124,   for basket closures.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 200+ for movable or removable closures for
    a receptacle.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes subclasses 76+ for an
    envelope closure, 124+ for a box closure, and 92.5 and 92.7 for a letter
    sheet closure.

         25+,       33, 36, 38+, 124+ for  folded blank box closures.

         43+,       for other box closures.

         62+,       for bag closures.

         76+,       for envelope closures.

         92.5,      92.7, for letter sheet closures.

    232,    Deposit and Collection Receptacles, particularly subclasses:

         14,        for change gates.

         22,        for letter boxes combined with door or window.

         25+,       for letter boxes combined with cooperative closures.

         42,        for milk receptacles combined with door or window.

        43.1+,      for deposit and collection receptacles having separate
    inlet and outlet openings and closures for said opening.

         44+,       for closures and chutes.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, particularly subclasses:

          50+,      for end gates.

        77.1+, for storm fronts including windshields.

         146.1+, for doors and windows.

    298,    Land Vehicles: Dumping, particularly subclasses 6, 23 and 27+ for
    closures for dumping vehicles.

    312,    Supports: Cabinet Structure, for appropriate subclasses for
    closures which are components of cabinets.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 42+ for  a bag closure.

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 189+, for a lid or closure plate for an
    exterior car journal box.

    410,    Freight Accommodation on Freight Carrier, subclasses 143+ for a
    brace panel or bulkhead movably or removably positioned wall-to-wall
    athwart a freight carrier.

    G.      The following are miscellaneous classes, not above mentioned, that
    have closures combined with other things, closures, per se, devices used
    with closures and devices not used as closures but having analogous
    structure, considered worth noting:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 96 for front closures for coats; subclass 128 for
    shirt closures; subclass 141.1 for the combination of a collar and a collar
    closure; subclass 218 and 219 for placket and waist closures for skirts;
    subclasses 234 and 235 for trouser closures; subclass 252 for pocket
    closing attachments; and subclass 270 for sleeve or leg closures.

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses:

         234+,      for closet seats combined with covers.

        242.1,      for covers for closet seats.

      246.1+, for operators for closet seats and covers.

        253,        for closet bowl closures.

        256.1,      for devices for closing openings in closet bowls.

        267+,       for spittoon covers and operators.

        286+,       for covers and stoppers and plugs for basins, sinks and
    tubs.

        607,        for movable closures which include means to drain, deflect,
    or repel shower spray water.

        694,        for closures for bath or basin overflow fittings.

    5,      Beds, subclass 171 for a bed carried by the door and shifted to
    position by movement of the door.

    14,     Bridges, subclasses 50+ for a movable closure combined with a
    bridge.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 257.6 for a
    debris receptacle with a movable closure.

    27,     Undertaking, subclasses 14+ for coffin lids.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 242 for a
    closure sealing an opening in a treating chamber against gas leakage, and
    having means to permit the introduction of objects through the closure
    without voiding the seal, e.g., air locks.

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclasses 50.1+ for closures for shoe
    uppers.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 58+ for trap
    closures.

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclass 89 for chain links
    having a pivoted closure.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 265 for a closure on a cooled compartment,
    and means blocking the outflow of cooled air when the closure is opened.

    63,     Jewelry, subclass 19 for lockets with hinged covers.

    68,     Textiles: Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 196 for covers for
    fixed liquid receptacle textile treating machines.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 330+ and subclass 334 for
    transparent closure plate type sight glasses.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclasses for a closure
    limited for use as a closure for a working chamber of an expansible chamber
    device.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclasses, for nonelectrical
    signals and indicators for closures.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, for a movable closure which directs
    the flow of a coolant, e.g., air, to an internal-combustion engine.

    131,    Tobacco, particularly subclasses 176+, 206, 215.1+, 223, 228, and
    242 for tobacco users' appliances having closures.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 247.41+ for U-seal traps which may
    include a closure.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 89 for closures and plugs,
    and subclasses 98+ for patches.

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclass 514 for pneumatic tire casing
    closures and flaps, subclasses 367+ for patches; and subclasses 428 and 431
    for inflating valve stem cap combinations.

    166,    Wells, subclass 75.13 for well heads having some fluid handling or
    other feature peculiar to wells.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, for a shield or screen
    having anti-inductive properties, and subclasses 66+ for covers and face
    plates.

    181,    Acoustics, subclass 287 for movable/foldable sound absorbing panels.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclass 21 for a window guard or
    shutter convertible to a ladder, and subclasses 77+ for a door combined
    with a ladder.

    184,    Lubrication, particularly subclasses 80 for lubricator cups with
    closure and valve, and 88.1+ for oil cup closures.

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclasses 313+ for a barrier in combination with other elevator structure
    which regulates access to or from an elevator car and subclasses 336+ for
    means for closing an elevator shaft opening through a landing.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 135+ for automatic
    guards for stop mechanism involving covers.

    194,    Check-Actuated Control Mechanisms, appropriate subclasses, and see
    the search note in subclass 35 of this class (49) for the line.

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclass 704 for bucket conveying elements
    with discharging doors.

    200,    Electricity: Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.62+ for
    switches actuated concurrently with the use or operation of closures,
    closure operators or accessories.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 372 for
    closures for sifting bins and casings.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 163+ for grated inlet
    surface drains, subclasses 244+ for filters in a portable receptacle having
    a hood or closure, subclasses 435+ for filters in a closed casing, and
    subclass 541 for filter adjuncts, e.g., filter casings peculiar to that art.

    211,    Supports: Racks, subclasses 76 and 82-84 for receptacle racks
    having closures or closure operators for the supported receptacles.

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclass 166 for door lifters.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 289+ for article dispensers having
    closures operated to effect the mechanical release or separation of
    articles from a source of supply.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses, and see Note IV B supra.

    231,    Whips and Whip Apparatus, subclass 6 for caps analogous to closures.

    238,    Railways: Surface Track, subclasses 74, 75, 76 for ties in the form
    of rectangular tubes with separate top and/or bottom plates, and subclass
    104 for end closures for tubular ties and tie casings.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, particularly subclasses:



    (A)     125+,for closures automatically actuated or controlled from a
    moving train or vehicle by electrical means.

    (B)     For actuating means, many of which are for closures:

    218+,   for electric for electric actuating means.

    257+,   for fluid motor actuating means, particularly subclass261.

    262+,   for mechanical motor actuating
     means.

    270+,   for vehicle-energy actuating means, particularly subclasses 272 and
    292+.

    248,    Supports, subclass 134 for a receptacle, tiltably mounted on a
    stand, and wherein movement of the receptacle operates a closure.

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 205 for stoppers for use in metal ingot and
    pig molds.

    256,    Fences, subclass 1 for fences with gate closures.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, cross-reference art collection 921 for a closure or weather strip
    seal.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclass 119 for a pipe end closure
    combined with a spaced pipe-to-plate joint, and subclasses 148.6+ for a
    pipe or cable and box coupling comprising pipe or cable clamping means
    having an attached closure flange.

    303,    Fluid-Pressure and Analogous Brake Systems, subclass 6.1 for a
    fluid pressure brake for controlling a fluid motor which operates a closure.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 545+ for electrical signals
    automatically responsive to the condition of a closure.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    591+ for means to illuminate the interior of a building with exterior light.

    362,    Illumination, particularly subclasses 100 for door knob or keyhole
    illuminators, subclass 375 for casing closures for lanterns, subclasses
    455+ for devices analogous to closures for dimming lanterns, subclass 127
    for socket covers and for lens holders.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 242+ for a stirrer mounted in a removable
    closure of a stationary mixing chamber, and subclass 347 for mixing chamber
    covers and shields.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, particularly
    subclasses 294+ for bezels and crystals; and subclass 312 for spring covers.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 452+ for camera shutters and subclasses
    517+ for plateholders having closures.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 713+ for resilient covers for
    typewriter keys analogous to closures.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclass 23 for a pavement
    with removable light admitting means and subclasses 25+ for a pavement with
    a vault-cover closure.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 6 for dry dock gates;
    subclass 42 for an end cap on an irrigation conduit; subclasses 85+ for
    canal locks; subclass 87 for water gates; and subclass 107 for dams and
    levees.

    406,    Conveyors: Fluid Current, subclasses 147+ and 176+ for pneumatic
    dispatch transmission tube terminals, many of which have closures; and
    subclasses 186 and 188+ for carriers having side openings and end openings,
    respectively, with closures.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 164, 169+, 200+, 221,
    328+, 369, 387+, 407, 414, 472, 519+, 545, 556+, 616, 644, and 657+ for
    structure in the nature of a closure.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for a sheet with corner or perimeter structure, as in subclasses 81+ which
    may be usable as a closure.

    429,    Chemistry: Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process, subclasses 174, and 185 for battery having sealing means
    (material), and subclasses 175 and 177 for battery covers.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 135+ for an electrical connector
    with a movable or removable closure therefore.

    449,    Bee Culture, subclasses 20+ for a passageway in a bee hive or into
    a bee hive.

    454,    Ventilation, for closures of various types having ventilating
    features, particularly subclasses 284+ for registers and specifically
    subclasses 309+ for louvers.

    V.      INDEX TO SEARCH NOTES AND SEARCH CLASSES

    Class 2

    In Class 49, section IV (G).

    Class 4

    In Class 49, section IV (G), subclass 263.

    Class 5

    In Class 49, section IV (G).

    Class 14

    In Class 49, section IV (G), subclass 33.

    To Class 49 class definition and subclass 50.

    Class 15

    In Class 49, section IV (G).

    Class 16

    In Class 49, section III (A), subclasses 1, 235, 237, 350, 353, 381, 382,
    387, 405, 409, 410, 445, and 456.

    To Class 49, subclasses 1, 48.5, 49, 71, 81, 110, 193, and 220.

    Class 24

    In Class 49, subclasses 490.1 and 492.1

    Class 27

    In Class 49, section IV (G).

    Class 29

    In Class 49, subclass 506.

    Class 34

    In Class 49, section IV (G), subclass 475.1

    Class 36

    In Class 49, section IV (G).

    Class 42

    In Class 49, section IV (D).

    Class 43

    In Class 49, section IV (G), subclasses 58 and 59.

    To Class 49, subclasses 59 and 119.

    Class 48

    In Class 49, section IV (E).

    Class 52

    In Class 49, section III (C), subclasses 37, 50, 58, 61, 71, 95, 371, 428,
    438, 463, 475.1, 476.1, 477.1, 492.1, 501, 504, 505, and 506.

    To Class 49, section III, subclasses 2, 37, 64, 74, 106, 140, 202, 204.1,
    206, 217, 393, 408, 471, 473, 476, 716, and 764+.

    Class 59

    In Class 49, section IV (G).

    Class 60

    In Class 49, section III (B).

    Class 62

    In Class 49, section IV (G), subclass 475.1

    Class 63

    In Class 49, section IV (G).

    To Class 49, subclass 19.

    Class 68

    In Class 49, section IV (G).

    Class 70

    In Class 49, section III (A), subclasses 35, 141 and 503.

    Class 73

    In Class 49, section IV (G).

    To Class 49, subclass 77.

    Class 74

    In Class 49, section III (B), subclasses 29, 42, 51, 59, 136, 139, and 334.

    Class 88

    In Class 49, section IV (G), subclass 70.

    To Class 49, subclass 61.

    Class 89

    In Class 49, section IV (D).

    Class 91

    In Class 49, section III (B), subclasses 139 and 334.

    Class 92

    In Class 49, section III (B), section IV (G), subclass 334.

    Class 102

    In Class 49, section IV (D).

    Class 104

    In Class 49, subclasses 229 and 409.

    Class 105

    In Class 49, section IV (F), subclasses 24, 31, 46, 49, 141, 193, and 409.

    To Class 49, subclasses  280, 281, 341, and 378.

    Class 109

    In Class 49, section IV (F), subclasses 1, 9, 13, 50, 95, 171, 208, and
    475.1

    To Class 49, class definition, subclasses 6, 8, 33, 58.5, 64, 69, and 75.

    Class 110

    In Class 49, section IV (E), subclass 263.

    To Class 49, subclasses 173, 176, 177, and 178.

    Class 114

    In Class 49, section IV (F), subclass 404.

    To Class 49, subclasses 117, 118, 120, 173, and 201.

    Class 116

    In Class 49, section IV (G), subclasses 1, 13, 21, and 263.

    Class 119

    In Class 49, section IV (F).

    To Class 49, subclass 15.2.

    Class 122

    In Class 49, section IV (E).

    Class 123

    In Class 49, section IV (G).

    To Class 49, subclasses 41.01, 41.04 and 41.58.

    Class 126

    In Class 49, section IV (E), subclass 1.

    In Class 49, section IV (G).

    To Class 49, class definition and subclasses 190 and 192.

    Class 131

    In Class 49, section IV (G).

    Class 135

    In Class 49, section IV (F).

    Class 137

    In Class 49, section IV (C), section IV (G), subclasses 1 and 21.

    To Class 49, subclasses 232 and 388.

    Class 138

    In Class 49, section IV (G).

    Class 144

    In Class 49, subclass 506.

    Class 150

    In Class 49, section IV (F).

    Class 152

    In Class 49, section IV (G).

    Class 160

    In Class 49, section III (C), subclasses 2, 13, 34, 54, 61, 64, 73.1, 74.1,
    125, 169, 197, 199, 206, 263, 372, 380, 383, 409, 463, and 475.1

    To Class 49, subclasses 4, 5, 37, 40, 90, and 180.

    Class 165

    In Class 49, section IV (E).

    To Class 49, subclass 72.

    Class 166

    In Class 49, section IV (G).

    Class 169

    In Class 49, subclass 1.

    Class 174

    In Class 49, section IV (G).

    Class 182

    In Class 49, section IV (G), subclass 70.

    Class 184

    In Class 49, section IV (G).

    Class 187

    In Class 49, section IV (G), subclasses 322 and 324.

    To Class 49, subclasses 313, 315, 317, 334, 336, and 400.

    Class 188

    In Class 49, subclass 43.

    Class 192

    In Class 49, section III (B), section IV (G).

    Class 194

    In Class 49, subclass 35.

    To Class 49, class definition, search class.

    Class 198

    In Class 49, section IV (G).

    Class 200

    In Class 49, section IV (G), subclasses 1, 13, 21, and 27.

    To Class 49, subclass 61.62.

    Class 202

    In Class 49, section IV (E).

    To Class 49, subclass 242.

    Class 206

    In Class 49, subclass 380.

    Class 209

    In Class 49, section IV (G).

    To Class 49, subclass 372.

    Class 210

    In Class 49, section IV (G).

    Class 211

    In Class 49, section IV (G).

    Class 212

    In Class 49, section IV (G), subclasses 210 and 324.

    To Class 49, subclass 166.

    Class 215

    In Class 49 section IV (F).

    To Class 49, subclass 200.

    Class 217

    In Class 49, section IV (F).

    To Class 49, class definition.

    Class 220

    In Class 49, section IV (F), subclasses 475.1 and 477.

    Class 221

    In Class 49, section IV (G).

    Class 222

    In Class 49, section IV (B), section IV (G), subclasses 1, 49 and 263.

    To Class 49, subclasses 54, 179 and 483.

    Class 229

    In Class 49, section IV (F).

    Class 231

    In Class 49, section IV (G).

    Class 232

    In Class 49, section IV (F), subclass 171.

    To Class 49, class definition.

    Class 235

    In Class 49, subclass 42.

    Class 236

    In Class 49, subclass 1.

    Class 238

    In Class 49, section IV (G).

    Class 244

    In Class 49, subclass 9.

    Class 246

    In Class 49, section IV (G).

    To Class 49, class definition sections V and VIII, and subclasses 125, 261,
    272, and 292.

    Class 248

    In Class 49, section IV (G), subclass 386.

    To Class 49, subclass 417.

    Class 249

    In Class 49, section IV (G).

    Class 250

    In Class 49, subclass 25.

    Class 251

    In Class 49, section IV (C).

    Class 256

    In Class 49, section IV (G), subclasses 10, 59 and 477.

    To Class 49, class definition and subclasses 13, 14 and 23.

    Class 266

    In Class 49, section IV (E).

    Class 277

    In Class 49, section IV (G), subclasses 475.1, 477.1, 478.1, 482.1, 483.1,
    489.1, 490.1, and 498.1.

    To Class 49, class definition, 629, 630, 641, 642, 645, 646, and 921.

    Class 285

    In Class 49, section IV (G).

    Class 292

    In Class 49, section III (A), subclasses 1, 90, 141, 276, 324, 356, 414,
    428, and 503.

    To Class 49, class definition and subclasses 14, 70, 262, and 345.

    Class 294

    In Class 49, subclass 461.

    To Class 49, subclass 19.1.

    Class 296

    In Class 49, section III (C), subclasses 166, 208, 323, 324, 365, 372, 463,
    467, 475.1, 476.1, and 502.

    To Class 49, class definition, (5) Note, subclasses 93, 146.1, 146.2, 149,
    150, 154, 155, 166, and 206.

    Class 298

    To Class 49, class definition.

    Class 303

    In Class 49, section IV (G).

    To Class 49, subclass 6.1.

    Class 307

    In Class 49, subclass 25.

    Class 312

    In  Class 49, section IV (F), subclasses 246, 254, 381, 404, and 475.

    Class 318

    In Class 49, section III (B), subclass 25.

    Class 340

    In Class 49, section IV (G), subclass 13.

    Class 361

    In Class 49, subclasses 1 and 25.

    Class 362

    In Class 49, section IV (G), subclass 74.1

    Class 366

    In Class 49, section IV (G).

    Class 368

    In Class 49, section IV (G).

    Class 383

    In Class 49, section IV (F).

    Class 384

    In Class 49, section IV G, subclass 425

    To Class 49, subclass 189,

    Class 400

    In Class 49, section IV (G).

    Class 403

    In Class 49, subclass 346.

    Class 404

    In Class 49, section IV (G), subclass 33.

    To Class 49, subclasses 25 and 47.

    Class 405

    In Class 49, section IV G, subclass 10.

    Class 406

    In Class 49, section IV G.

    Class 414

    In Class 49, section IV (G).

    Class 418

    In Class 49, subclass 334.

    Class 428

    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles

    In Class 49, section IV (G); subclass 475.1

    To Class 49, class definition, subclasses 542.2 and 595.

    Class 429

    section IV (G).

    Class 439

    In Class 49, section IV (G).

    Class 449

    In Class 49, section IV (G).

    Class 454

    In Class 49, section III (C), section IV (G), subclasses 1, 38, 50, 51, 52,
    71, 171, and 276.

    Class 475

    In Class 49, section IIIB, subclasses 136, 139.


CLS 49/1
TXT Device under the class definition provided with means for retaining a
    closure in a desired position, or with means for imparting movement to the
    closure, said means including a device which when under the influence of
    heat will release the retaining means or set in motion actuating means to
    permit or cause the closure to move to a different position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 48.5 for a thermally released door
    check or closer.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), for a static structure with a
    reactive component, e.g., meltable section.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclass 33 for a bank
    protection device with thermally controlled fluent material means.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 101+ for thermal alarms.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 287.5 for a thermally released damper.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 72+ for valves controlled by a fusible
    or heat destructible element, and subclasses 79+, 457 and 468 for other
    heat responsive valves.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, subclasses 56+ for condition responsive
    controls in special applications, subclass 19 for automatic valves,
    subclasses 37+ for sprinkler heads, and subclass 42 for fusible connections.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 54 for a thermally controlled dispensing
    device.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 32 and 33
    for thermostats.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclass 144 for thermally operated sliding
    bolts and subclass 201 for thermally operated swinging bolts.

    337,    Electricity: Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclasses 298+ for thermally controlled electrical switches.

    361,    Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 103+ for
    thermally controlled (e.g., fusible) circuit interruption.

    454,    Ventilation, subclass 28 for a thermally released outlet cowl and
    subclass 369 for thermally actuated fire dampers used in ventilating
    systems.


CLS 49/2
TXT Device under subclass 1 wherein the heat responsive device returns to its
    original shape and position when the heat of actuation is removed, and
    reacts cyclically upon the reapplication of heat, as distinguished from
    meltable elements, such as fusible links, which must be replaced after each
    use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclass 6 for a
    nonfusible thermal initiator for the automatic control of a closure of that
    class.


CLS 49/3
TXT Device under subclass 1 provided with a plurality of closures for a
    plurality of openings and wherein a single thermally responsive device,
    releases all of the closures, e.g., separate fusible means for each closure
    arranged so that the fusing of any one of the fusible means will permit all
    closures to be released.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for plural sliding closures for a single opening wherein the
    closures are counter-balanced by each other, and wherein a single thermally
    responsive device releases all closures.


CLS 49/4
TXT Device under subclass 1 wherein the retaining means includes a cable which
    is grasped by hand to move the closure, e.g., against gravity or a biasing
    means, and wherein thermally responsive device will release the cable and
    permit the closure to return.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    347,    for a one direction pull cable actuator for a closure.


CLS 49/5
TXT Device under subclass 1 wherein the retaining means includes a
    counterweight which counteracts the weight of the closure, and wherein the
    thermally responsive device includes means which disturbs the balance of
    the counterweight and closure, e.g., devices in which the weight of one
    closure balances the weight of another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    for closures interconnected for opposed concurrent movement in
    which one closure counter-balances the weight of the other.


CLS 49/6
TXT Device under subclass 5 wherein the thermally responsive device releases a
    weight which, together with the counterweight, overcomes the weight of the
    closure to move it.


CLS 49/7
TXT Device under subclass 1 wherein the retaining means holds the closure in a
    desired position, and wherein the device melts to release the closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    503,    for a closure panel modified to receive a latch or lock, and see
    the search notes thereto for the loci of closure latches.


CLS 49/8
TXT Device under subclass 7 wherein the retaining means includes a locking
    device provided with a holding detent, and means to withdraw or permit it
    to withdraw from its holding position upon melting of the fusible means to
    release the closure.


CLS 49/9
TXT Device under the class definition comprising a flaccid or resilient closure
    supported in closed position by a yieldable means, so that the inertia of a
    moving object striking the closure is absorbed and the object is slowed or
    stopped.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are highway barricades placeable before
    bridges, chasms and crossings to selectively bar traffic thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for a flexible closure which distorts in its opening or closing
    movement.

    192+,   for a railroad crossing gate, normally swinging in a vertical plane
    between open and closed positions and movable about a vertical axis in its
    closed position, e.g., when struck by a vehicle attempting to use the
    barred passage.

    460+,   for a protector which guards a closure against damage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclasses 64+ for
    safe and bank closures constructed to absorb attacks of force.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 110+ for airplane landing arresting gear.


CLS 49/10
TXT Device under the class definition wherein the closure is mounted in or
    adjacent a stream bed to extend thereacross and to impede passage of
    objects therethrough, and wherein the closure is opened by the presence of
    abnormal amounts of water, e.g., flood stage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for a closure released for movement or directly actuated by an
    ambient fluid, e.g., rain or snow.

    131,    for a closure pivoted adjacent its lower edge so that in open
    position it lies upon or below the surface upon which it is mounted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    256,    Fences, subclass 13 for fence panels which are not mounted for
    movement, but are particularly adapted for use on shores or in beds of
    streams.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 87+ for gates or
    closures adapted to regulate the height of a water level.


CLS 49/11
TXT Device under subclass 10 provided with a means which is responsive to a
    rise in the height of the water in the stream or to an increase in the
    velocity of the stream to release means holding the closure in closed
    position.


CLS 49/12
TXT Device under subclass 10 comprising a shaft having bars or rods projecting
    therefrom to form a barrier, and wherein the shaft is mounted to turn about
    an axis parallel to the axis of the shaft.


CLS 49/13
TXT Device under the class definition comprising a means acting only to produce
    a perceptible, e.g., audible or visual manifestation of a position of a
    closure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclass 38 for a
    device of that class combined with a signal or indicator, particularly
    subclass 43 for one which is initiated by closure movement.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 85 for closure operated burglar
    alarms, i.e., alarms to announce unauthorized attempts to use the
    closure-barred opening, and subclass 100 for structurally installed closure
    operated alarms to indicate the presence of a visitor, or combined with a
    fire alarm box to give a local alarm when the box closure has been opened,
    e.g., to actuate the fire alarm.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclass 10 for
    a signal or indicator combined with a closure of that class.

    200,    Electricity: Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 61.62 for a
    closure or closure operator actuated switch, e.g., to actuate a signalling
    circuit.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 545+ for electrical
    communications, e.g., alarm, automatically responsive to the condition of a
    closure.


CLS 49/14
TXT Device under subclass 13 wherein the signalling means is located at a place
    removed from the closure to indicate its position to a nonuser of the
    passage closed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 517+ for electrical
    indicating systems responsive to a plurality of sensed conditions;
    subclasses 524+ for same with position of the condition indicator;
    subclasses 531+ for electrical condition responsive system where the sensed
    condition is at a remote location and there is a particular coupling link;
    and subclasses 545+ for electrical condition responsive indicating systems
    automatically responsive to door or window movement.


CLS 49/15
TXT Device under the class definition comprising a closure for a detention
    area, and means for moving or restraining the movement of the closure;
    which means is operable at a point at a distance from the closure and which
    point is inaccessible to a person having direct access to the closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for a closure having means at a remote location to indicate the
    position of the closure.


CLS 49/16
TXT Device under subclass 15 comprising a plurality of closures and a closure
    restrainer on each closure, which restrainer requires a specially
    contrived, insertable implement, or a prearranged secret or nonpublic order
    of movement of elements in order to be operated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for other closures, each with an individual control, and a remote
    master control.


CLS 49/17
TXT Device under subclass 15 comprising a box or casing containing the distant
    control means.

    (1)     Note.  The enclosure may usually be separately locked.


CLS 49/18
TXT Device under subclass 15 comprising a motor actuator, i.e., powered means,
    other than a mere spring for the mover or restrainer of the closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334,    for a motor driven coaxial operator and see the search notes
    thereto for the loci of other motor driven closures.


CLS 49/19
TXT Device under subclass 15 comprising a bar extending along a plurality of
    closures and rotatable along its longitudinal axis to operate two or more
    of the closures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97,     for a rock shaft interconnecting closures in spaced openings along
    a barrier.


CLS 49/20
TXT Device under subclass 15 comprising a means to control two or more closures
    conjointly, and provided with additional means to selectively couple a
    closure to the control means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98,     for closures interconnected for concurrent movement one of which
    closures is also capable of independent movement.


CLS 49/21
TXT Device under the class definition provided with (1) means which react to
    the presence or motion of a fluid in the surrounding atmosphere to move or
    permit movement of a closure, or (2) a means connected to the closure and
    movable by ambient fluid to move the closure.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are storm doors having relief
    vents for relieving the air pressure or vacuum between the storm door and
    the exterior house door.

    (2)     Note.  The word "ambient" is intended to exclude the fluid of a
    fluid motor operator, which operators are classified below, for example, in
    subclass 324.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for a stream spanning closure responsive to the amount or velocity
    of water in the stream, especially subclass 11 for a float controlled
    operator or latch release for such a closure.

    89,     for a louver closure biased to an open position in which the
    surface of the louvers is exposed to the action of a fluid, such as air or
    rain, which acts in opposition to the biasing means.

    386,    for a swinging closure which is counterbalanced to a desired
    position, and wherein the surface of the closure is exposed to the action
    of a fluid, such as air, against action of the counterbalance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclass 118 for a bulkhead door which automatically closes
    on the entry of water to a certain height.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 69 for alarms actuated by the fall
    of rain, and subclass 70 for alarms actuated by a variation in fluid
    pressure.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 388 for a liquid level responsive device
    which excludes an external liquid from a gas inlet or outlet such as a
    shipboard ventilator.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclass 5 for
    rain actuated initiations for closures of the type found in that class.

    200,    Electricity: Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 61.04 for a
    liquid or moisture responsive circuit maker or breaker.


CLS 49/22
TXT Device under subclass 21 comprising a means to hold a closure against the
    action of gravity or a biasing means, and wherein one of the elements of
    the holding means is of a material which is dissolved or weakened by a
    fluid, such as water, so that the holding means becomes inoperative in the
    presence of the fluid.


CLS 49/23
TXT Device under subclass 21 wherein the fluid reacting means includes a
    collector for water, e.g., a rain trap, so that the means is responsive to
    a predetermined amount or to the rate of increase of the fluid.


CLS 49/24
TXT Device under the class definition comprising a plurality of closures, each
    having a means to effect, prevent or permit movement of its closure, and a
    separate common means to effect, permit or prevent movement of all of the
    closures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for jail type closures having individual controls and a remote
    master control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 341 for a railway passenger car
    having entrance and exit closures, controlled individually, and jointly
    through a master control.


CLS 49/25
TXT Device under the class definition comprising means to sense the
    transmission of wave energy through natural media, and means responsive to
    the sensing means to impart to or permit movement of a closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for a closure with thermal release means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclass 5 for a
    closure of that class responsive to variations in light intensity.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 336.1+ for a device for the detection
    and measurement of invisible radiation and subclasses 206+ for photocell
    controlled circuits.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 117
    for a closure motor switching system controlled by radiant energy.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 16 for an electric
    closure motor controlled by a space transmitted electromagnetic or
    electrostatic energy, and subclasses 445+ for an electric closure motor
    controlled by other radiant energy sources.

    361,    Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 173+ for a
    closure controlling relay responsive to radiant energy.


CLS 49/26
TXT Device under the class definition wherein an element of a closure moving
    means has provision for discontinuing, reversing or preventing the
    application of a moving force to the closure if the closure meets abnormal
    resistance or is subjected to a force in a different direction.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are closures having a moving means
    which includes an overload responsive coupling which continues to urge the
    closure to a closed position, and which moves the closure in this direction
    upon the removal of the obstruction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141,    for a closure having means to permit its emergency release.

    192,    for a crossing gate movable vertically to block a passageway, and
    additionally yieldably movable horizontally when struck by a vehicle using
    the passageway.


CLS 49/27
TXT Device under subclass 26 comprising a member yieldably mounted on the
    leading edge of the closure, and wherein means are provided, which upon
    relative movement of the member and closure, detects the presence of the
    abnormal resistance or force in a different direction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity: Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 61.43 for a
    sensitive edge closure switch.


CLS 49/28
TXT Device under subclass 26 wherein the closure moving means ceases to urge
    the closure to a closed position, or moves the closure in an opposite
    direction, when the closure meets the abnormal resistance.


CLS 49/29
TXT Device under the class definition provided with a means for measuring or
    determining a time interval or lag, and which imparts to or permits
    movement of the closure after a predetermined interval or at a specified
    time.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 3.5+ for a trip releasable
    at a particular time or after a predetermined interval.


CLS 49/30
TXT Device under subclass 29 wherein the means detains the closure in its open
    position for a preselected period of time before imparting or permitting
    closing movement, e.g., cyclically operated closures which, after a
    movement initiation; open, delay, and then close.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    for a closure having a means to vary its speed during closing
    movement.


CLS 49/31
TXT Device under the class definition comprising a means to sense a condition
    or change of condition, and means responsive to the sensing means to effect
    a control on a closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for means acting continuously to control the rate of motion of a
    revolving closure.

    262,    for an actuator, moved by the passage of a closure user to or
    through a closure opening.

    263+,   for an operator actuated by the weight of a closure user.

    322,    for a safety catch, operable upon breakage of a closure support to
    prevent falling of the closure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 349 for railway car closures
    automatically actuated upon the occurrence of an emergency condition, such
    as the overturning of the car.


CLS 49/32
TXT Device under the class definition provided with a motor, i.e., power input
    means other than a mere spring, responsive to initial manual movement of
    the closure or a closure actuator in one direction, to drive the closure in
    the same direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    276+,   for an operator which imparts an initial opening movement to a
    closure and then disengages to permit the opening to be concluded by other
    means.


CLS 49/33
TXT Device under the class definition comprising a traffic path including an
    impediment to traffic in the form of a hole or cavity in the path, and
    including means movable to cover the hole or cavity to provide a passageway
    thereover, a pit is usually acting to prevent the passage of animals and
    therefore may take the place of a gate in a fence.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for a closure which converts to a gangway.

    131+,   for a closure which moves to an inoperative position flush with the
    ground.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    14,     Bridges, subclasses 31+ for a draw bridge, and particularly
    subclasses 50+ for an interrelated draw bridge and gate.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclass 23 for a pavement
    with removable light admitting means and subclasses 25+ for a pavement with
    a vault cover-closure.


CLS 49/34
TXT Device under class definition comprising a closure having flexible parts or
    joints which permit the shape of the closure to be altered in opening and
    closing;  e.g., to fit the opening or to effect a tight seal, including a
    barricade consisting of a single, resilient bar.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for an impact absorbing closure which distorts on impact.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, appropriate
    subclasses, for a closure comprising a flexible panel, particularly
    subclasses 327+ for a nonframed plural edge held fabric panel which is
    distorted when released for movement.


CLS 49/35
TXT Device under the class definition including a means responsive to the
    insertion of a coin, check or key, for operating or permitting the
    operation of the closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for a jail type closure with an additional key or combination
    control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclasses 77+ for a lock for a closure and see the class
    definition of that class (70) for the definition of a key.

    194,    Check-Actuated Control Mechanisms, appropriate subclasses for a
    similar device in which the "coin controlled means" is claimed in detail,
    and see (2) Note  in the class definition of that  class (194) for the line.


CLS 49/36
TXT Device under the class definition wherein the opening extends on both sides
    of and through the line of juncture between a sidewall and a ceiling or
    roof or between two converging sidewalls, and wherein mating closures are
    provided, one for each barrier, or wherein a single closure is provided for
    the entire opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for a concave or convex closure for a similarly shaped opening.

    94,     for a separate opening in each of two converging surfaces and
    closures interrelated for concurrent movement for each opening.


CLS 49/37
TXT Device under the class definition wherein by reorientation of a closure or
    an adjunct thereof, there is formed another and different structure which
    if claimed alone would be classifiable in another class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for a closure which is reoriented to bridge a pit or obstacle.

    71,     for a closure pivoted above an opening and movable from an awning
    forming position to a position overlying the opening to constitute a storm
    shutter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 64+ for a barrier
    or major section mounted for repositioning.


CLS 49/38
TXT Device under the class definition provided with a passage blocking member
    having a plurality of openings spaced in the same plane, and further
    provided with a movable closure back to back with the member and having a
    plurality of spaced openings therein and movable while maintaining the back
    to back relationship, whereby a movement of the closure aligns or misaligns
    the openings in the closure with the openings in the passage blocking
    members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95+,    for a plurality of interconnected closures in spaced openings along
    a barrier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 196+ for a register-type ventilator
    combined with a window and subclasses 284+ for registers combined with
    heating or ventilating structure.


CLS 49/39
TXT Device under subclass 38 wherein the openings in the closure are spaced
    circumferentially about a common point and wherein the closure moves about
    the common point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for arcuate closure which moves in a circular opening.


CLS 49/40
TXT Device under the class definition wherein the closure surface and the means
    defining an opening for the closure are arched or bulged.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for plural wing closures revolving about a center axis within an
    arc- shaped casing.


CLS 49/41
TXT Device under the class definition comprising a closure having a curved edge
    surface, and a passage blocking member having an annular opening therein,
    and wherein said closure moves about an axis concentric with the axis of
    the opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for a radially movable closure for plural openings.


CLS 49/42
TXT Device under the class definition comprising a plurality of closures which
    are mounted to radiate from and rotate in the same direction about a common
    axis through an arc of 3600 or more.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    381+,   for a closure mounted to swing about an axis, and especially
    subclasses 388+ for a swinging closure mounted on opposing frame members.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclass 8 for bank
    protection device which includes a plural-bladed revolving door.

    235,    Registers, subclass 93 for a turnstile operated register.


CLS 49/43
TXT Device under subclass 42 provided with means to govern or control the rate
    of revolution.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46+,    for revolving closures having a means to limit the rotation to
    incremental steps, including means to slow down the closure just before a
    stop position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 180+ for speed responsive to regulators, per se.


CLS 49/44
TXT Device under subclass 42 wherein the wings are foldable from a radiating
    relationship to lie adjacent each other or to one side of the passageway
    out of a passage barring position, including "panic" type revolving doors
    in which the means holding the wings radially yield upon abnormal force to
    permit passage on both sides of the pivot at once.


CLS 49/45
TXT Device under subclass 44 wherein the wings are mounted to move to the side
    of the opening to clear the mid-portion of the passage.


CLS 49/46
TXT Device under subclass 42 wherein are provided means to restrict rotation of
    the wings to one direction, and wherein after each pass-through portion of
    a revolution of a wing, a mechanism centers a succeeding wing in passage
    barring position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 341.5 for a railroad car entrance
    or exit control, including a turnstile.


CLS 49/47
TXT Device under subclass 46 in which the wings are mounted to project
    outwardly in passage barring position when they complete rearward travel
    and to move inwardly or downwardly as they complete forward travel, so as
    to occupy a lesser plan area.


CLS 49/48
TXT Device under the class definition wherein the closure is provided with a
    cut-out portion or a movably mounted section, openable to a size to permit
    a person to thrust his arm through the opening to give a signal, e.g., to a
    following vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146,    for a closure adjustable as an entity while in the raised closed
    position to provide a vertical ventilating opening.

    169+,   for a closure with an independently movable wicket, and especially
    subclass 171 for a closure for a peep hole or letter slot.


CLS 49/49
TXT Device under the class definition comprising a closure mounted to bar a
    passage, and further provided with means to either (1) guide or point out
    the course of travel through the passage, (2) restrict travel through the
    passage to only one direction, or (3) regulate the number of persons
    permitted through the passage, e.g., at the same time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42+,    for a revolving closure for directing or controlling traffic
    through a passage, especially subclasses 46+ for a turnstile.

    68,     for a passage which confines the path of travel of the user, and a
    series of closures for the passage, used successively by the traveler.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 341+ for a railroad car having an
    entrance or exit control.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 483 for a discharge controller interrelated
    with the movement or position of a plurality of closures.


CLS 49/50
TXT Device under the class definition comprising (1) a main closure and an
    openwork panel overlying the main closure in back-to-back relationship, one
    of which is movable or removable, or (2), a movable or removable shield
    which blocks a passage vacated by a closure to prevent unlawful entry or
    accidental travel through the passage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38+,    for a single closure with spaced openings which register with the
    openings in a passage blocking member.

    61+,    for an auxiliary closure and see the search notes thereto for the
    loci of other back-to-back closures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 37 for a workman's
    guard or support on or adjacent a portal frame, and subclass 208 for a
    grille or panel permanently mounted on a barrier adjacent a portal opening.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclasses 11+ for
    movable protective shields for display partitions and counters.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 196+ for a window ventilator insertable in
    a passage vacated by a closure.


CLS 49/51
TXT Device under subclass 50 wherein the open-work panel overlies louver type
    closures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74.1+,  for louver type closures, the definition thereof; and see the
    search notes thereto for the loci of other louver type closures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclass 15 for bank
    protection devices which include movable louvers.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 313+ for a device for admitting air into a
    ventilated space which includes moveable louvers, subclasses 347+ for an
    air pump which exhausts air from a ventilated space and which may be
    associated with moveable louvers, and subclasses 358+ for a device which
    exhausts air from a ventilated space which may be associated with moveable
    louvers.


CLS 49/52
TXT Device under subclass 50 provided with a mechanical means movable relative
    to the closure for imparting movement to the closure which means extends
    through the openwork panel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for an operator for louver type closures extending through a grille.

    356,    for a single lever push rod operator for a movable closure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 290 and 322+ for an operator extending
    through a register grille to impart movement to a pivoted valve combined
    with ventilating structure, e.g., air duct, air directing structure.


CLS 49/53
TXT Device under subclass 52 provided with means applying a force to a closure
    and which includes a member which is adapted to be grasped by hand and
    moved in an arcuate path.


CLS 49/54
TXT Device under subclass 50 provided with means joining the grille or guard to
    a closure, wherein movement of the closure moves the grille or guard to the
    position in the opening vacated by the closure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclass 102 for
    a flexible panel connected to and moved by a slidable rigid closure.


CLS 49/55
TXT Device under subclass 50 provided with means to adjust the grille or guard
    to fit openings of different widths or heights.


CLS 49/56
TXT Device under subclass 50 provided with means mounting the grille or guard
    for movement along a predetermined path with respect to the main closure.


CLS 49/57
TXT Device under subclass 50 provided with means mounting the grille or guard
    so as to be readily physically disassociated from its supporting structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for a removable grille or guard adjustable to fit various size
    openings.

    463+,   for a removably mounted closure and see the search notes thereto
    for the loci of other removable closures.


CLS 49/58
TXT Device under the class definition including a means to prevent or deter the
    use of the closure passage by animal life, or to frighten or repulse animal
    life away from the closure.

    (1)     Note.  The word "animal" includes mankind, insects and birds.

    (2)     Note.  With respect to the subject matter of this subclass, this
    class (49) is superior to Class 160, Flexible or Portable Closure,
    Partition, or Panel.  Consequently, patents otherwise classifiable in Class
    160 are placed here on the basis of the subject matter of this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 58+
    particularly subclasses 61 and 119 for a device for trapping and/or killing
    an animal, and subclasses 124+ for a device for killing animals.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 101 for an animal;
    blocking lateral projection, flap or scarer.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclass for a composition for repelling an animal, including an insect,
    e.g., moth repellent, etc.


CLS 49/59
TXT Device under subclass 58 in which the closure is supplied with an electric
    potential to shock an animal or person coming in contact therewith.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 98 for an animal
    trap having means to deliver a lethal or paralyzing electric shock to the
    animal, and subclass 112 for a device for electrocuting insects.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclass 35 for a
    device of that class having an electrically charged surface.

    256,    Fences, subclass 10 for an electrically charged fence.


CLS 49/60
TXT Device under subclass 58 provided with means interconnecting the closure
    and the blocker, repeller or chaser so that movement of the closure effects
    movement of the latter.


CLS 49/61
TXT Device under the class definition comprising a main closure for an opening
    and an additional supplementary closure which overlies the main closure in
    a back-to-back relationship in their operative closed position, one of
    which closures is movable or removable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50+,    for a grille, face to face with a closure, or a guard occupying a
    passage vacated by the closure and adapted to prevent unlawful entry or
    unintentional travel through the passage.

    68,     for a plurality of closures spaced at intervals along a course of
    travel.

    125+,   for plural closures for a single opening which move to an
    inoperative position overlying one another in back-to-back relationship.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 202+ for an
    auxiliary shield attached to a main panel, barrier, or frame.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 90+
    for facially opposed primary and screened auxiliary closures.


CLS 49/62
TXT Device under subclass 61 in which the auxiliary closure is mounted on the
    main closure for movement thereon or so as to be readily, physically
    disassociated therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163+,   for a closure movable independently of and with another closure.

    463+,   for a removable closure.


CLS 49/63
TXT Device under subclass 61 provided with means mounting the auxiliary closure
    for movement along a predetermined path of travel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404+,   for a closure mounted for reciprocating movement.


CLS 49/64
TXT Device under subclass 63 wherein the auxiliary closure is a louvered
    closure of the type defined in subclass 74.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74.1+,  for louver type closures, and see the search notes thereto for the
    loci of other louver type closures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclass 104 for
    louvers facially opposing a flexible panel.


CLS 49/65
TXT Device under subclass 63 provided with means mounting the main closure for
    movement and further provided with means joining the auxiliary closure to
    the main closure so that the auxiliary closure is carried by the main
    closure in its movement, or movement of the main closure effects a movement
    of the auxiliary closure on its mounting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for a safety guard carried by a main closure to a substitute
    position.


CLS 49/66
TXT Device under subclass 65 wherein the main closure is mounted for sliding
    movement and the auxiliary closure is mounted for swinging movement, and
    wherein the sliding movement of the main closure causes a swinging movement
    of the auxiliary closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73,     for a sliding closure and a swinging closure interconnected for
    concurrent movement.


CLS 49/67
TXT Device under subclass 63 wherein the means mount the auxiliary closure for
    swinging movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    381+,   for a closure mounted for swinging movement.


CLS 49/68
TXT Device under the class definition comprising a course of travel which
    confines the user thereto, and a plurality of closures spaced at intervals
    along the course, and used in turn by the user passing from one end of the
    course to the other, e.g., an air shaft having a hatchway on successive
    floors or "air locks" from ambient to a special atmosphere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for a closure in a passageway combined with a means to restrict the
    direction of travel or number of users.

    50+,    for a grille mounted face to face with a closure and mounted in the
    same opening.

    61+,    for two or more closures mounted face to face and occupying the
    same opening.

    93,     for interconnected closures on opposite approaches to a crossing.


CLS 49/69
TXT Device under the class definition having a main opening and adjacent and
    continuous therewith a small opening which is adapted to accommodate a
    conveyor track, closures for each opening, and wherein means are provided
    so that movement of the closure for the main opening imparts a movement to
    the closure for the other opening.


CLS 49/70
TXT Device under the class definition cooperatively united with an adjunctive
    second device, said second device, e.g., automatic control, having a
    function serving to perfect a movable closure for its intended purpose,
    other than being an ancillary device, e.g., operator, hinge, seal, for the
    movable closure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclass 171 for a bed carried by a closure and shifted into
    position by movement of the closure.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 77+ for a ladder
    combined with a door.


CLS 49/71
TXT Device under the class definition comprising distinct wings on the side
    edges of the closures and angularly related to and movable therewith.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 64+ for a side
    winged barrier mounted for repositioning, such as a wall swingable from a
    vertical to nonvertical position, and subclasses 74+ for a fixed awning
    having side panels.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 196+ for air deflecting side panels fixed
    to the portal frame.


CLS 49/72
TXT Device under the class definition comprising a first closure (door) mounted
    for movement, a second closure (window) mounted for movement on said first
    closure, a means for holding the first closure in position, a means for
    moving or sensing the location of the second closure, and a connection
    between the two means so that movement of one affects movement of the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73.1+,  for closures interconnected for concurrent movement.

    163+,   for a window mounted on a movable closure and movable independently
    of the closure.

    279+,   for a closure operator interrelated with a closure latch release.


CLS 49/73.1
TXT CLOSURES INTERCONNECTED FOR CONCURRENT MOVEMENT:
    Closures under the class definition mounted for movement on independent
    mounting means and further provided with means joining said closures to
    each other so that movement of one of said closures affects a simultaneous
    movement of another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66,     for a sliding main closure which imparts swinging movement to an
    auxiliary closure.

    69,     for a main closure which actuates a supplemental track closure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, appropriate
    subclasses for panel units interconnected for relative motion as defined in
    section III, class definition of Class 160.


CLS 49/74.1
TXT Louver-type closures (e.g., slats or panels):
    Closures under subclass 73.1 which are superimposed or aligned panels
    mounted to swing together in the same direction for varying the angle, said
    panels form a plane or surface defined by the longitudinal terminal edges
    of said panels and wherein adjacent edges of the panels contact each other
    in the closed position to effect a closure between them.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is a  shutter-type structure with
    movable fin-type members (i.e., panel) or window  panes  (i.e., transparent
    panel)  e.g., jalousie-type.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass are louvered closures which are
    mounted on a movable frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for louver-type closures face-to-face with a protective grille.

    64,     for louver-type auxiliary closures.

    163+,   for a closure movable independently of and with another closure.

    371,    for independently swinging louvers which bar a single opening.

    403,    for a clip for pivotally mounting a movable louver panel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 130+
    for louver devices in which the slats are flexible, or in which the slats
    are interconnected to each other for relative movement, or in which the
    slats may be accumulated; i.e., moved toward each other to form a bunch or
    holding them so accumulated and see section III of the class definition of
    this class.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 325 for a projector screen having movable
    slats; e.g., louvers.

    454,    Ventilation, subclass 31 for louvers in combination with a fluid
    moving means (e.g., fan).


CLS 49/77.1
TXT Distinct groups of louver-type closures:

    Closures under subclass 74.1 which are divided into sets with each set
    concurrently movable panels.


CLS 49/79.1
TXT Manipulation of control louver panel connects or disconnects remaining
    louver panels:

    Closures under subclass 74.1 wherein the means uniting the panels include a
    mechanism for securing one of the panels to the remaining panels, whereupon
    movement of said one panel within a predetermined limit will operate the
    remaining panels concurrently, and further movement of said one panel will
    alternately disengage said mechanism to permit independent movement of said
    one panel and re-engage said mechanism for concurrent movement of all the
    panels.


CLS 49/80.1
TXT Louver panels move sequentially or independently:

    Closures under subclass 74.1 wherein (1) one of the panels begins its
    movement in advance of another or (2) is capable of a movement which is
    separate and distinct from another member's movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79.1,   for a manipulatable control louver panel which connects and
    disconnects the remaining panels.

    98+,    for other closures with concurrent and independent movement.

    103,    for other interconnected closures with sequential movement.


CLS 49/81.1
TXT Multidirectional louver panel movement:

    Closures under subclass 74.1 wherein the panels move either (1) along at
    least two lines or planes of travel; e.g., shift vertically and swing out,
    or (2) about two or more axes of travel, or (3) both in a single operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208+,   for a closure mounted for multidirectional movement.


CLS 49/82.1
TXT Geared, interconnector, or operator:

    Closures under subclass 74.1 wherein the (1) joining means between the
    panels or (2) operator for the closure joining means includes a rotatable
    body imparting or receiving motion or power from some other member by
    rolling contact.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are rotatable meshing toothed
    wheels, worm-type mechanism, rack and pinion-type mechanism, thrust
    bearing-type, or ratchet wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107+,   for a geared interconnector or operator for concurrently swinging
    closures.

    335+,   for an operator for a swinging closure which includes a gear
    coaxial of the closure pivot.

    341+,   for an operator for a swinging closure which includes a gear driven
    lever.


CLS 49/86.1
TXT Cable, interconnector, or operator:

    Closures under subclass 74.1 wherein the (1) joining means between the
    panels or (2) operator for the panel joining means includes a flexible
    element such as a wire, rope or the like.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for a cable interconnecting swinging closures.


CLS 49/87.1
TXT Operating system includes a handle:

    Closures under subclass 74.1 provided with an actuator which is grasped by
    the hand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for a louver-type closure handle actuator which extends through a
    grille.


    359,    for an operator for a movably mounted closure which includes a
    lever actuator which is manually grasped.


CLS 49/89.1
TXT Operating system includes biasing means:

    Closures under subclass 74.1 provided with a means to urge the panels in a
    desired direction or to a desired position; e.g., a spring or weight.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21+,    for a louver closure biased to a desired position, and having means
    responsive to the presence of a fluid to move the closure against the
    action of the biasing means.

    386+,   for a biasing means for a swinging closure.


CLS 49/90.1
TXT With position holder for operating system:

    Closures under subclass 74.1 with means in addition to an actuator or
    operator for maintaining the panels in a desired position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87.1,   for a position holder associated with a handle-type actuator.

    503,    for a closure panel modified to accommodate a latch or lock.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclass 345 for blind slat holders.


CLS 49/91.1
TXT With weather seal feature:

    Closures under subclass 74.1 provided with means acting at the juncture of
    two adjacent panels or between the mounting framework and panels to oppose
    the passage of fluid therebetween.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are devices wherein the panels are
    shaped to fit within or against a portion of the adjacent panel to provide
    a weather seal therewith.

    (2)     Note.  A mere overlap of planar surfaces is not considered
    "configured" within the meaning of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    475.1+, for a closure seal or striker gasket.


CLS 49/92.1
TXT Specific louver structure:

    Closures under subclass 74.1 in which particular significance is attributed
    to the design of the panel.


CLS 49/93
TXT Device under subclass 73 wherein there is a first passageway intersecting
    the path of travel of a second passageway, e.g., a motor road and railroad
    with the concurrently movable closures being positioned in the path of
    travel at opposed accesses to the first passageway.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for successive closures along a passageway.

    95,     for interconnected closures on opposite barriers.


CLS 49/94
TXT Device under subclass 73 provided with opposite or converging
    passage-blocking surfaces, e.g., wall and roof, each having an opening, and
    wherein a concurrently movable closure is mounted in an opening on each
    surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for a continuous opening in converging passage blocking surfaces,
    and having either a concurrently movable closure for each surface opening
    or a single closure for the entire opening.


CLS 49/95
TXT Device under subclass 73 provided with an extended passage-blocking surface
    having a plurality of separate openings, and wherein a concurrently movable
    closure is mounted in each of the openings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for closures in plural openings with a common fusible release.

    15+,    for jail type closures in spaced openings along a barrier.

    24,     for a master control for individually controlled closures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 206+ for a wall with
    plural portals.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclass 13 for a
    plurality of openings with protective shields.


CLS 49/96
TXT Device under subclass 95 provided with an elongated, rigid, pivoted member
    joining each of the closures to the common means connecting all of the
    closures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    353+,   for an operating lever and closure which swing about parallel axes.


CLS 49/97
TXT Device under subclass 96 wherein the interconnector includes a shaft
    mounted for partial rotation along its longitudinal axis to impart movement
    to the closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for a plurality of jail type closures interconnected by a rotary
    bar.


CLS 49/98
TXT Device under subclass 73 wherein one of the closures is capable of a
    movement, to a limit of its travel, which is separate and distinct from its
    concurrent movement with another closure, e.g., one door opens completely
    without movement of the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for jail type ganged closures with means to selectively couple a
    closure to the gauge control.

    79.1,   for a control louver type closure which is alternately connected
    and disconnected to the remaining closures.

    80.1,   for interconnected louver type closures with concurrent and
    independent movements.


CLS 49/99
TXT Device under subclass 98 provided with a flexible chain, rope or the like
    joining the closures so that the weight of one closure assists in balancing
    the weight of the other closure, and wherein means are provided to
    lengthen, shorten or disconnect the cable to move or permit movement of the
    one closure independently of the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121,    for a cable interconnector for counterbalancing closures.

    347,    for a pull type cable operator for a sliding closure.


CLS 49/100
TXT Device under subclass 73 wherein the means joining the closures moves one
    closure faster than another in their opening or closing movement; e.g., so
    that the closures may move different distances but arrive simultaneously at
    their limit of movement, and closures may move from a stacked open position
    on one side of the closure opening to an overlapped closed position.


CLS 49/101
TXT Device under subclass 100 wherein the means joining the closures includes
    an elongated, rigid, pivoted arm.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359,    for a lever actuator mounted on and moving a single closure.


CLS 49/102
TXT Device under subclass 100 wherein the means joining the closures includes a
    cable, i.e., a flexible chain, rope or the like.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123,    for a cable interconnecting oppositely moving closures, and see the
    search note thereto for the loci of other cable interconnectors.


CLS 49/103
TXT Device under subclass 73 wherein one of the closures begins its movement in
    advance of another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80.1,   for interconnected louvers with sequential movement.


CLS 49/104
TXT Device under subclass 73 provided with means mounting the closures for
    rotation about an axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    366+,   for bipartite, center-opening, independently swinging closures for
    a single opening.

    381+,   for a closure mounted for swinging movement.


CLS 49/105
TXT Device under subclass 104 wherein an operator includes a member or a pair
    of members joined by a transverse connector, the member or members being
    movable by the weight of the user of the closure, and connected to each
    closure so as to compel concurrent movement of each closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110+,   for a treadle actuated pivoted lever or lever system connected to
    each closure to compel concurrent movement.

    263+,   for a pedal, treadle or impact actuated operator.


CLS 49/106
TXT Device under subclass 105 wherein the treadle is located adjacent the
    user's path of movement to and from each side of the closures and wherein
    the treadles are connected by the same means which interconnects the
    closures.


CLS 49/107
TXT Device under subclass 104 wherein the means for uniting the closures or the
    operator of the closure joining means includes meshing gears.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82.1,   for a geared interconnector or operator for interconnected louvers.


CLS 49/108
TXT Device under subclass 107 wherein the means joining the closures include a
    lever pivoted to each closure, and wherein the meshing gears impart
    movement to each lever.


CLS 49/109
TXT Device under subclass 104 wherein the means joining the closures includes a
    lever pivoted at two or more points or a series of such levers which are
    pivotally connected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    for a lever interconnecting closures for opposed movement.


CLS 49/110
TXT Device under subclass 109 provided with a manipulatable mechanical means
    movable relative to a closure or a means to store potential energy, e.g., a
    spring for imparting an opening movement to the closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for a meshing gear operator which drives a closure pivoted lever.

    353+,   for an operating lever and closure which swing about parallel axes.

    379,    for a latch release of movement-stored energy.


CLS 49/111
TXT Device under subclass 110 comprising two mirror image elongated, pivoted,
    rigid arms or such arm systems, each extending from a closure to a common
    connection on the means which applies an opening force to the closures.


CLS 49/112
TXT Device under subclass 111 wherein the two mirror image arms each comprise a
    single lever pivoted at one end to a closure and converging at its other
    end to a common pivotal connection, and wherein the opening force is
    applied to the common pivotal connection.


CLS 49/113
TXT Device under subclass 112 wherein the common pivotal connection of the arms
    is carried by a member which reciprocates along a guide rail.


CLS 49/114
TXT Device under subclass 110 wherein the moving force of the manipulative
    mechanical means is applied to one closure which in turn transmits the
    moving force to another closure.


CLS 49/115
TXT Device under subclass 104 wherein the means joining the closures includes a
    cable, i.e., flexible chain, rope or the like and wherein the cable is
    trained on a pulley or drawn coaxial with the closure pivots.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for other cable interconnections for swinging closures.

    288,    for a cable operator, interrelated with a closure latch release,
    sheaved on a closure pivot.

    333+,   for a cable operator sheaved on a closure pivot.


CLS 49/116
TXT Device under subclass 73 wherein the closures move in the same manner but
    in a reverse direction in their opening movement.


CLS 49/117
TXT Device under subclass 116 provided with a force input mechanical means to
    impart movement to the closures, and wherein the input thereof is located
    adjacent the user's path of movement to and from each side of the closures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327+,   for a closure operator actuated from opposite approaches, and see
    the search notes thereto for the loci of other operators actuated from
    opposite approaches.


CLS 49/118
TXT Device under subclass 116 provided with a motor, i.e., powered means, other
    than a mere spring, for imparting movement to the closures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334,    for a motor driven coaxial operator, and see the search notes
    thereto for the loci of other motor driven closures.


CLS 49/119
TXT Device under subclass 116 wherein the weight of one closure assists in
    balancing the weight of another closure moving in a reverse direction,
    i.e., opposed vertical movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5+,     for counterbalanced, interconnected closures with a fusible
    connection therebetween.

    98+,    for counterbalanced opposed closures with means to permit
    independent movement.


CLS 49/120
TXT Device under subclass 119 wherein the closures move apart in opposite
    directions from an edge to edge closed position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    366+,   for reciprocating, bipartite center-opening closures.


CLS 49/121
TXT Device under subclass 119 wherein the counterbalancing effect is through a
    cable, i.e., flexible chain, rope or the like joining the closures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99,     for counterbalancing closures with an adjustable
    cable-interconnector in which the cable is adjustable or detachable.


CLS 49/122
TXT Device under subclass 116 wherein the means uniting the closure includes a
    lever, i.e., elongated, rigid, pivoted arm.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    for a lever interconnecting closures which move at different speeds.

    109+,   for a lever interconnecting swinging closures.


CLS 49/123
TXT Device under subclass 116 wherein the means uniting the closures includes a
    cable, i.e., a flexible chain, rope or the like.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for a cable interconnecting closures which move at different speeds.

    104,    for a cable interconnecting swinging closures.

    115,    for a cable interconnector sheaved on closure pivots.

    121,    for a cable interconnecting counterbalancing closures.


CLS 49/124
TXT Device under the class definition comprising shaft sections connected
    together and relatively movable to increase the effective length thereof to
    close or open an opening as by telescoping, folding or contracting.


CLS 49/125
TXT Device under the class definition comprising two or more closures, each
    mounted to move from a relatively extended, nonoverlapping passage blocking
    position to an inoperative, overlapping position at one side of the passage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44+,    for a plural wing revolving door in which the wings fold against
    one another to form a through opening.

    100+,   for closures interconnected for concurrent movement which move from
    a stacked open position to an extended passage blocking position at
    different speeds.

    124,    for a closure consisting of extensible bar sections which stack in
    the open position of the closure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclass 202 and
    subclass 218 for stacked closure sections each having interengagement with
    a following section, so that the first moved connects to and moves the
    second, and so forth.


CLS 49/126
TXT Device under subclass 125 wherein the closures are vertically arranged in
    passage blocking position and move upwardly to a substantially horizontal
    elevated stacked position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    197+,   for a single closure movable from a vertical to a withdrawn
    horizontal overhead position.


CLS 49/127
TXT Device under subclass 125 in which the closures are in edge to edge
    alignment in their closed position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128+,   for a closure movable from colinear alignment with another closure
    to an offset position.


CLS 49/128
TXT Device under the class definition wherein two or more closures are in edge
    to edge alignment in the closed position, and wherein one of the closures
    is displaced from alignment to a parallel nonaligned position, to allow
    travel of one of the closures or to bypass another closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for closures which move from a closed, colinear position to a
    stacked open position.

    209+,   for a single closure which moves to an offset position relative to
    an aligned wall.


CLS 49/129
TXT Device under subclass 128 wherein the closure which moves to an offset
    position has a further movement distinct from its movement to and within
    its offset position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149+,   for a closure having a plurality of distinct, optionally used
    movements.


CLS 49/130
TXT Device under subclass 128 wherein the movement subsequent to the movement
    to an offset position is constrained and rectilinear.


CLS 49/131
TXT Device under the class definition provided with means mounting the closure
    for movement, and wherein said means is located at the lower edge of the
    closure so that the closure in its open position lies upon or below the
    surface it closes or barricades, the user passing over the closure face
    while it is in said open position, e.g., highway mounted gates which pivot
    down to permit a vehicle to ride over them.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10+,    for a flood gate which moves to a flush position.

    33,     for a pit or obstacle bridging flush closure.

    372+,   for a closure stored in a housing adjacent an opening wherein the
    object may pass over the closure edge.


CLS 49/132
TXT Device under subclass 131 provided with a treadle operated mechanical means
    imparting movement to the closure, the operation of the means being
    effected by the weight of an object, such as a foot or vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263+,   for a pedal, treadle or impact actuated operator.


CLS 49/133
TXT Device under subclass 132 wherein actuation of the treadle moves the
    closure from an inoperative flush position to an elevated passage blocking
    position, usually closures extending between or across the rails of a
    railroad track to prevent cattle from straying up or down the track.


CLS 49/134
TXT Device under subclass 133 which include either (1) two separate closures on
    opposite sides of a crossing, each actuated by a treadle, or (2) a closure
    having a treadle operator on each approach so as to be actuated if
    approached from either end.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93,     for closures on opposite approaches to a crossing interconnected to
    move concurrently.


CLS 49/135
TXT Device under the class definition comprising an imperforate portion mounted
    on the opposite side of the mounting means from the closure and
    constituting an extension thereof, to counterbalance the force of the wind
    tending to move the closure about its mount.


CLS 49/136
TXT Device under the class definition provided with means for mounting each of
    a plurality of closures for individual movement; and further provided with
    a single closure moving means, and wherein each closure is selectively
    connected to the closure moving means for movement thereby.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for jail type closures with a common remote operator and individual
    proximate operators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 665+ for plural power
    paths to or from separate devices to be moved, and a common actuating
    gearing.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, for planetary
    transmission to drive plural loads.


CLS 49/137
TXT Device under the class definition provided with a fluid driven operator,
    said operator including additional fluid means which cushions the closure
    movement as it approaches its open or closed position.


CLS 49/138
TXT Device under the class definition provided with means for applying a force
    to impart movement to a closure, said means including in its train a
    mechanism for (1) changing the force of its output to vary the rate of the
    closure movement, or (2) changing the limit of the total movement of the
    closure in an opening direction.


CLS 49/139
TXT Device under the class definition provided with powered means (other than a
    mere spring) to move the closure and with a manipulatable mechanical means
    to move the closure or means to disconnect the motor drive to closure, the
    means or motor being used interchangeably and at the choice of the user.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26+,    for a motorized closure operator having means responsive to an
    obstruction to release the drive; e.g., to permit manual arrestation or
    reversal of closure movement.

    98+,    for closures interconnected for concurrent movement and having
    means permitting independent movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 625+ for alternate manual
    and power operators for devices of that class.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 391 for a motor of that
    class and alternate manual means for moving the load.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses 1+
    for plural power inputs.


CLS 49/140
TXT Device under subclass 139 provided with a hand actuated mechanical means
    which is movable relative to the closure for imparting movement thereto.


CLS 49/141
TXT Device under the class definition (1) comprising a closure which is defined
    as made of frangible or easily broken material which is destroyed to gain
    access through the closed passage, or (2) wherein the closure is retained
    in closed position by a defined means which must be deformed or destroyed
    or which requires an excessive amount of force to release the closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44+,    for a plural winged closure with means to permit the wings to
    collapse for emergency exit.

    139+,   for a closure moved by a motor and having means providing for
    emergency manual operations; e.g., in the event of motor failure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclass 92 for door locks having emergency release means.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 348+ for emergency exits for
    railway passenger cars.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclasses 92+, for panic bar latches.


CLS 49/142
TXT Device under the class definition comprising two or more closures mounted
    for movement, and wherein the type of movement of each closure is different
    from and independent of the other, including closures mounted for swinging
    about differently oriented axes or sliding in different angular directions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163+,   for a closure which moves independently of and as a part of another
    closure.


CLS 49/143
TXT Device under subclass 142 provided with means supporting one of the
    closures for a constrained sliding rectilinear movement and means mounting
    another closure for swinging movement about a fixed pivot.


CLS 49/144
TXT Devices under subclass 143 wherein the sliding closure moves vertically to
    an elevated passage blocking position and the swinging closure or turns
    about a vertically oriented pivot to provide a ventilating slot or opening
    at an upright edge of the closure.


CLS 49/145
TXT Devices under subclass 143 wherein the sliding closure moves in an up and
    down direction and the swinging closure turns about a horizontally arranged
    pivot.


CLS 49/146
TXT Device under the class definition provided with means to mount a sliding
    closure for raising and lowering movement, and further provided with means
    to permit movement of the closure in a raised position to provide a
    ventilating slot or opening adjacent an upright edge of the closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for a closure having a cut-out portion or a movably mounted section
    to provide a vertical opening for hand signalling.

    227,    for a housed closure mounted for multidirectional movement in its
    plane to and from an open housed position and a raised, closed position out
    of its housing.


CLS 49/147
TXT Device under the class definition wherein the means mounting the closure
    for movement is flexible, or limp, such as a rope, chain or fabric.


CLS 49/148
TXT Device under the class definition comprising either (1) a device other than
    the means to guide the closure in its movement, located adjacent the
    closure opening or (2) a closure movement guide movable to a nonguiding
    position which means (1) or (2) acts to brace or hold a closure when the
    closure is disassociated from the movement support or its
    supported-for-movement position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    463+,   for a removable closure not having a disparate support.


CLS 49/149
TXT Device under the class definition wherein the closure is mounted for two or
    more distinct opening and closing movements, used interchangeably and
    optionally by the user, and wherein different or additional mounting means
    are provided for the several movements, e.g., structures in which the
    closure may be adjusted vertically to permit the passage of small animals
    and may either be moved in this adjusted position to form another opening
    or returned to its original lowered position and then moved. See
    particularly subclasses 158+ and 190+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for a revolving door in which the wings may be moved to one side of
    the opening to provide a through opening.

    129,    for a closure having optional movements in which one of the
    movements is from an edge to edge alignment to an offset position with
    respect to another closure.

    208+,   for a closure mounted to have a combination of simple movements
    (e.g., sliding and swinging) in a single opening movement.

    382,    for a closure having means for mounting the same hinge at different
    points usually to allow swinging in reversed directions.

    453+,   for a reciprocating closure having a movable or removable guide to
    permit removal of the closure from its supporting frame.


CLS 49/150
TXT Device under subclass 149 wherein the optional movements include a sliding,
    i.e., guided rectilinear and swinging, i.e., turning about a fixed pivot
    and comprising a means to compensate for the weight of the closure to hold
    it in an adjusted position during either movements, as by connection to the
    closure above the horizontal pivots on which it swings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    445+,   for a counterbalance for a reciprocating closure and see the search
    notes thereto for the loci of other counterbalances.


CLS 49/151
TXT Device under subclass 150 wherein a flexible cable transmits the
    counterbalancing force of the closure weight compensating means to the
    closure with the cable being trained around a cable guide on a nonswinging
    element so that the direction of the counterbalancing force is changed
    during the swinging movement of the closure.


CLS 49/152
TXT Device under subclass 149 wherein one of the optional opening or closing
    movement is multidirectional, i.e., along two or more different lines or
    planes of travel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208+,   for a closure with a single opening and closing movement which is
    multidirectional, and see the search notes thereto for the loci of other
    multidirectional movements.


CLS 49/153
TXT Device under subclass 152 wherein the multidirectional movement is effected
    by a link pivoted at one end on a support and at its opposite end to the
    closure so that the closure moves about the axes of both pivots.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246+,   for a closure mounted to swing about plural axes; e.g., at each end
    of a link arm.


CLS 49/154
TXT Device under subclass 153 wherein the end of the link which pivotally
    supports and carries the closure is adjacent its center of mass and is
    further provided with means mounting said closure on said end of the link
    for a distinct and alternate opening and closing sliding movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    253,    for a closure with a single opening and closing movement on a
    pivotal link arm which mounts the closure adjacent its center of mass.


CLS 49/155
TXT Device under subclass 153 which in addition to the link effected
    multidirectional movement there is means providing for sliding movement of
    the closure relative to frame defining the opening for the closure.


CLS 49/156
TXT Device under subclass 152 wherein the multidirectional movement is effected
    by a link pivoted mounted at one end on a support and at its opposite end
    to the closure, said opposite end also being mounted for reciprocation
    relative to the closure arm for reciprocation prior to swinging, and
    wherein the other movement is effected by means to vary the position of the
    closure vertically relative to the pivoted arm.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    190+,   for a closure which adjusts vertically on a vertical supporting
    pivot.

    258,    for a closure which translates on a pivoted support in a single
    opening and closing movement.


CLS 49/157
TXT Device under subclass 152 wherein in addition to the multidirectional
    movement there is means providing for a guided rectilinear vertical
    movement.


CLS 49/158
TXT Device under subclass 149 provided with means mounting the closure for
    sliding movement along and swinging movement about a fixed elongated
    slender guide bar at one side of the closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    190+,   for a closure swingable with a vertically oriented pivot member and
    adjustable vertically with respect to the pivot member.


CLS 49/159
TXT Device under subclass 158 comprising a means to hold the closures in a
    selected one of a plurality of possible positions along the rod, including
    an operator which both moves the closure and holds it in an adjusted
    position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    503,    for a closure panel modified to accommodate a lock or latch, and
    see the search notes thereto for the loci of other closure locks and
    latches.


CLS 49/160
TXT Device under subclass 159 wherein the closure holding means is mounted on
    or engages the rod.


CLS 49/161
TXT Device under subclass 149 comprising upper and lower vertically sliding
    closures mounted within a common frame, and wherein an enclosed section is
    mounted within the surrounding marginal frame of one of said closures for
    swinging movement relative thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176+,   for a closure pivotally movable relative to side slides.


CLS 49/162
TXT Device under subclass 161 wherein the enclosed section swings about a
    vertically oriented axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177+,   for a closure which is mounted on a pivoted slide mount for
    swinging about a vertically oriented axis.


CLS 49/163
TXT Device under subclass 149 wherein there are means providing for several
    closure movements, one means mounting one closure for a movement distinct
    and separate from the movement of another closure and another means
    mounting said closures for movement together as a unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for a movable closure having an independently movable section for
    hand signalling.

    62,     for an auxiliary closure carried by a primary closure for movement
    therewith and movable or removable relative thereto.

    74.1,   for concurrently movably louvers mounted in a movable frame.


CLS 49/164
TXT Device under subclass 163 wherein the separate movement of the closures
    mounted is a sliding movement within a pivotally mounted common supporting
    frame which allows the closures to swing as a unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196,    for a sliding closure which swings with a pivoted guide.


CLS 49/165
TXT Device under subclass 164 wherein the supporting frame comprises fixed and
    pivoted sections.


CLS 49/166
TXT Device under subclass 163 wherein a first closure is mounted for turning
    about a vertical axis, and a second closure is carried by the upper portion
    of said first closure and wherein means are provided for mounting said
    upper closure for movement distinct and separate from said first closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for a combined window regulator and door latch operator.

    374+,   for a closure which reciprocates in and out of a housing formed in
    a door.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclass 146.2 for a combination
    of a door and a window associated in a vehicle body; and subclasses 149+
    for a vehicle body having a plurality of swinging doors having sliding
    windows which convert a vehicle body from an open to a closed type.


CLS 49/167
TXT Device under subclass 166 provided with a powered means for imparting
    movement to the upper closure, said means includes a housing or protective
    covering for an electric or hydraulic conductor which spans the space
    between the hinge side of the first closure and frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334,    for a motor driven operator, coaxial of the closure and see the
    search notes thereto for the loci of other motor driven closures.


CLS 49/168
TXT Device under subclass 163 comprising two or more closures each mounted for
    movement irrespective of any movement of the other but which can be
    connected together for movement as a unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142+,   for a plurality of closures in which the type of movement of each
    closure is different from and independent of the other.

    164+,   for a plurality of independently sliding closures which swing
    together on a pivoted frame.


CLS 49/169
TXT Device under subclass 163 including an auxiliary closure (often termed a
    wicket) mounted within a main closure so that the major portion of its
    periphery (i.e., three sides) is surrounded by the main closure, and
    wherein the auxiliary closure is mounted for movement relative to the main
    closure.

    (1)     Note.  A mere surrounding marginal frame has not been considered a
    main closure for this and the indented subclasses.  The main closure must
    be a closure for a substantial area in and of itself.  See the search notes
    below for exemplary loci of closures mounted for movement in surrounding
    frames.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for a closure with a section for signalling.

    161,    for a pivoted closure in a double hung frame.

    176+,   for a closure pivotally movable relative to a sliding frame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclass 180 for
    a similar arrangement of the type of closure in that class.


CLS 49/170
TXT Device under subclass 169 wherein the auxiliary closure is mounted to close
    and opening extending inwardly from the periphery of the main closure so
    that in closed position of the auxiliary closure its outer edge and that of
    the main closure coincide.


CLS 49/171
TXT Device under subclass 169 wherein the auxiliary closure is movable to cover
    or uncover a viewing or ventilating opening or a slotted opening for the
    passage of mail, e.g., "door peeps", "peep holes", "interviewers" or
    "observation doors".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclass 21.5 for a
    bank protection device comprising a protected voice transmitting path, and
    subclass 58.5 for port type bank protection means.

    232,    Deposit and Collection Receptacles, subclasses 19+ for a mail box
    and subclasses 45+ for a chute, having means for mounting the box or chute
    on a surface; e.g., a closure or its mounting frame.  Closure structure in
    addition to that necessary to mount the box or chute is beyond the scope of
    Class 232 and will be found in this class (49) and subclass (171).

    454,    Ventilation, subclass 211 for a ventilating closure mounted on a
    sash frame combined with subject matter not included in Class 49 (e.g., a
    screen) and subclass 212 for a ventilating closure substituted for a pane
    in a sash.


CLS 49/172
TXT Device under subclass 149 provided with a sliding member substantially
    coextensive with the side of the closure on which the closure is mounted
    for sliding therewith and further provided with means connecting the
    closure to said member for swinging about a horizontal axis, said member
    being movable in a plane parallel to the plane of reciprocation of the
    closure and member to permit swinging of the closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174+,   for a bearing strip, laterally retractable to permit swinging of a
    closure.

    184+,   for a longitudinal key strip between opposed grooves in a closure
    and a sliding stile, which strip is laterally retractable into the closure
    or stile to permit rotation of the closure about its stile mounted pivot.

    316+,   for an operator for a movably mounted sealing, guiding or locking
    strip between a frame and a closure, e.g., to release the closure for
    swinging movement, and see the search notes thereto for the loci of other
    movable sealing, guiding or locking strips.


CLS 49/173
TXT Device under subclass 172 wherein the closure and stile slide are urged
    together by a coil spring having the same longitudinal axis as the closure
    pivot.


CLS 49/174
TXT Device under subclass 149 comprising a slide or guide strip acting between
    the edge surface of the closure and the adjacent portal frame surface to
    restrict the movement of the closure to a longitudinal reciprocation
    parallel to the surfaces; which said slide or guide is movable in a plane
    parallel to the plane of reciprocation to thereby permit movement of the
    closure about a pivot.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172+,   for a closure which is pivoted on a sliding stile, wherein the
    stile is laterally retractable to permit swinging of the closure.

    194+,   for a closure to frame guide strip which is otherwise moved or
    removed to permit rotation of the closure.

    316+,   for an operator for a movably mounted sealing, guiding or locking
    strip between a frame and a closure, e.g., to release the closure for
    swinging movement, and see the search notes thereto for the loci of other
    movable sealing, guiding or locking strips.

    414+,   for a biased bearing surface for a reciprocating closure wherein
    the biasing means permit lateral displacement of the bearing surface.


CLS 49/175
TXT Device under subclass 174 wherein the guide strip retracts into or
    alongside the closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185,    for a longitudinal key strip between a closure and a sliding stile
    retractable into the closure to permit pivoting of the closure.


CLS 49/176
TXT Device under subclass 149 wherein the closure is connected by a pivot to a
    sliding member, e.g., stile which moves in a guideway on a portal frame
    member or equivalent support member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161,    for an enclosed section which pivots on a slidably mounted
    surrounding marginal frame.

    172+,   for a sliding member between a closure and a portal frame.


CLS 49/177
TXT Device under subclass 176 wherein the axis of the pivot is vertically
    oriented.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162,    for an enclosed section which swings on a vertically oriented axis
    relative to a sliding surrounding marginal frame.


CLS 49/178
TXT Device under subclass 177 comprising a vertically guided member on the
    opposite side of the closure from the pivot (free side) and which is
    connectible to the closure for vertical reciprocation and disconnectable
    therefrom to permit swinging of the closure, and wherein means is provided
    between the guided member and the frame of the opening to restrain said
    member from vertical movement when said closure has been disconnected
    therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  In counterbalanced windows a weight is often attached to the
    free stile as well as to the hinge stile and the lock prevents the free
    stile movement when the weight of the sash is disconnected, as in swinging
    movement.


CLS 49/179
TXT Device under subclass 177 comprising a vertically extending guide mounted
    on the portal frame and confining the closure to a reciprocating path, and
    wherein the guide is movably or removably mounted to permit the closure to
    swing on its pivot.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194+,   for a closure guide strip which is moved or removed to permit an
    optional movement of the closure.


CLS 49/180
TXT Device under subclass 177 comprising a vertically guided member (stile) on
    the opposite side of the closure from the pivot, substantially coextensive
    in length with the side of the closure, and connectible to the closure for
    vertical reciprocation and disconnectible therefrom to permit swinging of
    the closure, with the connector being carried by the closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183+,   for a key or latch which connects a closure to a stile slide.


CLS 49/181
TXT Device under subclass 176 comprising a means to lock the sliding member
    against reciprocating up and down movement, which means is motivated by the
    pivoting action of the closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172+,   for a separable stile slide which is actuated laterally by vertical
    swinging of the closure.


CLS 49/182
TXT Device under subclass 176 wherein the sliding member (stile) is
    substantially coextensive in length with the edge of the closure, and
    wherein the stile or closure includes movement limiting portions (stops) on
    or at an edge surface adjacent edge surface of the other, the portions
    being above and below the pivot and diagonally opposed relative to the edge
    surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    392+,   for diagonally opposed stops or seals for a swinging closure
    mounted on opposing frame members.


CLS 49/183
TXT Device under subclass 176 wherein the sliding member (stile) is
    substantially coextensive in length with the side of the closure pivoted
    thereto, and wherein a releasable means connects the adjacent side of the
    closure to the stile so that they move together, or is disconnected
    therefrom to permit the sash to pivot about its stile axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180,    for a latch which connects the free stile and a horizontally
    swinging closure.


CLS 49/184
TXT Device under subclass 183 wherein the releasable means is an elongated
    member fitting into or against opposed parallel surfaces or grooves of the
    stile and closure.


CLS 49/185
TXT Device under subclass 184 wherein the key is movable in its plane toward
    the closure to be disengaged from the stile.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172,    for a vertically swinging closure supported on a laterally
    separable stile slide.


CLS 49/186
TXT Device under subclass 183 wherein the key or latch is between the smallest
    transverse end surface of the stile, e.g., top end and the adjacent corner
    portion of the closure.


CLS 49/187
TXT Device under subclass 176 wherein the sliding member (stile) is
    substantially coextensive in length with the edge of the closure, and
    wherein a link is pivoted to the stile and closure to limit the pivoting
    movement of the closure and act as a brace in the open position.


CLS 49/188
TXT Device under subclass 149 in which disconnectable hinge members are
    provided on both the closure and the portal frame which members are
    engageable to permit swinging of the closure and disengageable to permit
    reciprocation of the closure.


CLS 49/189
TXT Device under subclass 188 wherein a portion of the hinge is mounted to move
    to an inoperative position relative to the closure or portal frame to which
    it is attached and out of register with the remaining hinge portion.


CLS 49/190
TXT Device under subclass 149 wherein the closure is mounted to swing
    horizontally about a vertically oriented pivot, and wherein means are
    provided to select desired positions of the closure in a vertical direction
    relative to the vertically oriented pivot.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156,    for a closure which translates on a pivoted arm and optionally
    adjusts vertically relative thereto.

    158+,   for a closure movable vertically and swingable about a fixed
    vertically oriented rod.


CLS 49/191
TXT Device under subclass 190 wherein the closure can be tilted about a
    horizontally oriented axis to an inclined position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240+,   for a closure which tilts about a horizontal oriented axis to
    impart a bias to the horizontally swinging movement of the closure, wherein
    the tilting movement precedes the swinging movement.

    396,    for means to raise the front end of the closure to compensate for
    sag.


CLS 49/192
TXT Device under subclass 149 provided with two or more axes of turning,
    useable in turn.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191,    for a closure which swings about a vertical pivot and tilts to
    various positions of angular adjustment about a horizontal pivot.

    246+,   for a swinging closure which turns about two or more axes in the
    opening or closing movement.

    382,    for a closure in which the position of the hinge mounting means is
    changed to reverse the direction of the swinging movement.


CLS 49/193
TXT Device under subclass 192 wherein the two axes are at opposite ends of the
    closure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 281 for a railway car dumping door
    with releasable hinges on opposite edges of the door.


CLS 49/194
TXT Device under subclass 149 wherein the closure is mounted on a guiding
    surface for reciprocating movement and wherein the surface is mounted on a
    support for movement or for ready disjointure to permit swinging movement
    of the closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174+,   for a closure-to-frame bearing strip which is laterally retractable
    to permit swinging of the closure.

    316+,   for an operator for a movably mounted sealing, guiding or locking
    strip between a frame and closure, e.g., to release the closure for
    swinging movement, and see the search notes thereto for the loci of other
    movable guiding strips.


CLS 49/195
TXT Device under subclass 194 wherein the guiding surface is mounted on the
    support swinging movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    455,    for a guideway movably mounted to permit closure removal.


CLS 49/196
TXT Device under subclass 195 wherein the closure is supported by and moves
    with the guide during the pivotal movement of the latter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164+,   for double hung closures within a pivoted frame which carries the
    closures during its pivoting movement.


CLS 49/197
TXT Device under the class definition in which a closure is mounted for
    movement upwardly from a vertical closed position to a horizontal or
    inclined elevated open position, and in which (1) the mounting means for
    the closure movement is out of the plane of the frame forming the opening,
    or (2) the movement is multidirectional, e.g., overhead doors known as the
    up-and-over type.

    (1)     Note.  The definition of subclass 208 defines the term
    "multidirectional".

    (2)     Note.  A closure which merely pivots about an axis in the plane or
    on the surface of the closure will be found elsewhere, e.g., subclasses
    381+. However, a closure mounted to swing on a bracket or link which is
    pivoted at the end remote from its connection to the closure and which
    moves in the manner defined above, is here, e.g., in subclasses 203+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126,    for a folding closure which moves from a vertical to a horizontal
    overhead stacked position.

    208+,   for a closure moving sidewardly from a vertical closed position to
    an open position by the combination movements there provided for.

    381+,   for a closure pivoted about an axis in or on the surface of the
    closure, and especially subclasses 388+ for a closure pivoted to opposing
    frame members, and see (2) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 130+
    for plural strip, slat or panel type closures which move from a vertical
    closed position to a withdrawn overhead horizontal position.


CLS 49/198
TXT Device under subclass 197 provided with a plurality of closure sections,
    and wherein the movement of the sections are separate and distinct from
    each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    464,    for a removable closure comprising a plurality of closure sections.


CLS 49/199
TXT Device under subclass 197 provided with manipulatable mechanical means
    movable relative the closure for imparting movement to it.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 188+
    for a closure of the plural strip, slat or panel type, provided with an
    operator.


CLS 49/200
TXT Device under subclass 199 provide with additional means acting against the
    force of gravity for balancing the closure in an adjusted position.


CLS 49/201
TXT Device under subclass 197 wherein a final swinging movement towards the
    horizontal over-head position is separate from and sequential to an upward
    sliding movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254+,   for a closure other than the up-and-over type having an initial
    translation followed by a swinging movement.


CLS 49/202
TXT Device under subclass 201 wherein the closure slides upwardly on a pivoted
    guide and then, together with the guide, swings to a horizontal overhead
    position.


CLS 49/203
TXT Device under subclass 197 wherein the closure is mounted on a rigid pivoted
    arm.


CLS 49/204
TXT Device under subclass 203 wherein the closure is pivotally mounted on an
    arm for turning movement relative thereto with the distal end of the arm
    also being pivotally mounted.


CLS 49/205
TXT Device under subclass 204 in which there are a plurality of the arms
    arranged in a nonparallel relationship.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248+,   for a closure mounted on a plurality of angular related links which
    effect multidirectional movement other than the up-and-over type.


CLS 49/206
TXT Device under subclass 204 provided with resilient means which assist in
    moving the closure and wherein said means extends in substantially the same
    directions as the arm or wherein the force of the spring is transmitted
    through the link to the closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205,    for a spring acting co-directionally with or on one of a plurality
    of angularly related links.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 191
    and 192 for a spring operating means which moves a plural strip type panel
    to a horizontal overhead position.


CLS 49/207
TXT Device under the class definition provided with a plurality of closures for
    a single opening, arranged one above the other, and wherein each is movable
    in the direction of its length separately from the movement of the other
    closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for independently movable closures which move to a horizontal
    overhead position.

    125,    for independently movable closures which move to a stacked position.

    464,    for removable, independently stacked closures.


CLS 49/208
TXT Device under the class definition provided with means mounting the closure
    for movement along two or more distinct lines or planes or about two or
    more axes of rotation or a combination thereof, in a single opening and
    closing movement.

    (1)     Note.  Movement along an incline is considered a combination of
    motions in vertical and horizontal planes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81.1,   for interconnected louvers with multidirectional movement.

    128+,   for a closure having a multidirectional movement in moving from a
    colinear to an offset position with respect to another closure, and
    especially subclass 129 for such a closure having an additional
    multidirectional movement.

    152+,   for a closure with optional movement wherein one movement is
    multidirectional.

    197+,   for a closure which moves multi-directionally from a vertical to a
    withdrawn overhead position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclasses 69+ for
    bank protection closures with multidirectional movement.

    296,    Land Vehicles: Bodies and Tops, subclasses 210+ for a land vehicle
    having a roof and having an opening therein and a closure for said opening.


CLS 49/209
TXT Device under subclass 208 wherein the closure moves first from or finally
    to the plane of the closure opening, which plane is parallel to the main
    back and forth sliding direction of the closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128+,   for a closure movable from a plane common to another closure to
    permit its translation.


CLS 49/210
TXT Device under subclass 209 provided with a single mechanical means movable
    relative to and acting to move the closure both transversely and
    translationally in its opening and closing movements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324+,   for an operator for a movably mounted closure and see the search
    notes thereto for the loci of other closure operations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclass 166 for a traversing hoist which
    raising a closure and shifts it laterally, and which is not permanently
    connected to a single door.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 684.3 for door removing
    apparatus which are not permanently connected to a single door, and which
    include a vertically swinging-door supporting member.


CLS 49/211
TXT Device under subclass 209 provided with a pocket or receptacle formed in an
    adjacent framework and wherein the transverse movement positions the
    closure relative to the pocket for travel into said pocket.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    372+,   for a reciprocating closure stored in a housing, and see the search
    notes thereto for the loci of other closures stored in a housing.


CLS 49/212
TXT Device under subclass 209 provided with a track mounted for transverse
    movement adjacent the closure opening, and wherein the sliding closure is
    mounted on the track for transverse movement therewith and sliding movement
    therealong.


CLS 49/213
TXT Device under subclass 209 provided with a track on which the closure is
    mounted for sliding movement and wherein the track has a curved or offset
    portion to move the closure transversely.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128+,   for a closure movable from a colinear to an offset position with
    respect to another closure by means of a skewed track.


CLS 49/214
TXT Device under subclass 213 wherein an independent track or portion of track
    is provided adjacent the closed position of the far end of the closure, and
    wherein the far end of the closure is mounted to move on such independent
    track or portion of track.


CLS 49/215
TXT Device under subclass 213 wherein the near end of the closure moves
    transversely on the skewed track, and wherein the far end is mounted on a
    rigid arm having an offset extension, said extension being rotatable about
    an axis parallel to the offset to move the far end of the closure
    transversely.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218+,   for a closure, both ends of which move transversely on a crank arm.


CLS 49/216
TXT Device under subclass 209 provided with a pivoted arm on which the closure
    is also pivotally mounted for transverse movement.


CLS 49/217
TXT Device under subclass 216 wherein the closure is pivotally mounted to a
    link attached to or having a carriage portion swingably and slidably
    engaging its track.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222,    for a closure mounted on a tilting carriage.


CLS 49/218
TXT Device under subclass 216 wherein the pivoted arm is a crank, i.e., has an
    extension which is offset therefrom, whereby rotation of said arm with said
    extension moves the closure transversely

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215,    for a closure having one end movable transversely on a skewed track
    and the other end movable transversely on a crank arm.


CLS 49/219
TXT Device under subclass 218 provided with two sets of the crank arms, each
    set comprising two corresponding crank arms.


CLS 49/220
TXT Device under subclass 219 provided with an operator interconnecting the
    sets of crank arms, so that manipulation of the operator actuates both sets
    of crank arms.


CLS 49/221
TXT Device under subclass 209 provided with a track adjacent the closure
    opening and a carriage member reciprocable on the track, and wherein the
    closure is supported by said member for reciprocation therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212,    for a closure carried carriage mounted on a movable track.

    213+,   for a closure carried carriage mounted on a skewed track.

    216+,   for a closure carried carriage in which a link or crank is the
    connection between the carriage and the closure.


CLS 49/222
TXT Device under subclass 221 wherein the carriage swingably engages the track,
    and the transverse movement is effected by such swinging.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217,    for a closure pivoted to a tilting carriage.


CLS 49/223
TXT Device under subclass 221 wherein the closure is pivoted to the carriage
    and the transverse movement is effected by such pivot.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176+,   for a closure mounted on a sliding pivot mount to optionally open
    by a sliding or a swinging movement.

    216+,   for a closure hinged to a carriage by means of a link.


CLS 49/224
TXT Device under subclass 221 wherein a guide is provided adjacent the closure
    opening which is inclined and normal thereto, and wherein the closure or
    the carriage is mounted to move on said guide to effect both a transverse
    and an up or down movement to close the opening.


CLS 49/225
TXT Device under subclass 221 wherein a camming surface is positioned in the
    path of the closure adjacent its final position, to be engaged thereby to
    impart a terminal movement to it.


CLS 49/226
TXT Device under subclass 208 wherein the multidirectional movement of the
    closure lies within the plane formed by the length and width of the
    closure, e.g., moves in an inclined direction which is a resultant of
    motion in a horizontal and vertical plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for an arcuate closure in an arcuate opening which moves in an
    arcuate path.


CLS 49/227
TXT Device under subclass 226 provided with a housing, and wherein the
    multidirectional movement of the closure enables the closure to be elevated
    from the housing to a passage blocking position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146,    for a closure which is adjusted in a raised position to open and
    close vertical ventilating opening.

    372+,   for a reciprocating closure stored in a housing, and see the search
    notes thereto for the loci of other closures stored in a housing.


CLS 49/228
TXT Device under subclass 226 provided with an inclined guideway on either the
    closure or its support, and wherein movement of the closure is effected by
    the force of gravity acting upon the guideway and a mating relatively
    sliding or rolling surface on the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237+,   for a curved track and a closure positioned to slide along the
    track under the influence of gravity.


CLS 49/229
TXT Device under subclass 228 wherein the track is pivoted to permit reversal
    of the direction of inclination, so that the closure may gravitate in
    opposite directions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 164 for a railway propulsion system utilizing a
    tilting track.


CLS 49/230
TXT Device under subclass 229 wherein the track comprises two or more
    guideways, or deviates from a straight line.


CLS 49/231
TXT Device under subclass 228 wherein the closure hangs from an inclined
    overhead guideway.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    409+,   for a closure which reciprocates on an overhead guideway.


CLS 49/232
TXT Device under subclass 226 wherein the closure is pivoted to a rigid pivoted
    arm which lies or acts in the plane of the closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153+,   for a closure with optional movements in which one of the movements
    is on a link.

    204+,   for a closure which moves from a vertical to a withdrawn overhead
    position on a link.

    246+,   for a closure mounted for multidirectional movement on a link.

    405,    for a closure mounted for reciprocation on a link.


CLS 49/233
TXT Device under subclass 232 wherein a plurality of the arms, which are
    parallel and to each of which the closure is pivotally connected at
    separate points along the length of the closure.


CLS 49/234
TXT Device under subclass 226 wherein the closure is mounted for horizontal
    reciprocation and additionally for movement vertically, the latter movement
    positioning the closure to resist the motion in a horizontal direction, and
    wherein said latter movement is effected by means of an operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255+,   for a closure actuated vertically to permit horizontal swinging.

    276+,   for a starter type closure operator.


CLS 49/235
TXT Device under subclass 234 wherein the closure is reciprocable on a track,
    and wherein track engaging roller means are provided for supporting the
    closure in its horizontal reciprocation movement, and wherein the
    antifriction means and closure are displaced relative to each other by the
    operator to free the closure for horizontal travel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 99 for means for releasing and
    elevating a closure or antifriction supporting frames.


CLS 49/236
TXT Device under subclass 208 wherein the closure is mounted to turn from an
    initial position about a pivot, and wherein the closure is additionally
    moved in a direction against the force of gravity, so that when released,
    the closure moves about the pivot under the influence of gravity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228+,   for a closure biased for gravitational movement along an inclined
    track.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 309 for a gravity actuated hinge,
    per se.


CLS 49/237
TXT Device under subclass 236 wherein the additional movement is effected by an
    inclined surface on either the closure or its support and of a relatively
    sliding or rolling surface of either on the other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 312+ for a hinge having
    cooperating cam surfaces to raise and bias a closure to return position.


CLS 49/238
TXT Device under subclass 237 wherein the inclined surface is movable to change
    its inclination so that the sliding or rolling surfaces are urged in
    opposite directions.


CLS 49/239
TXT Device under subclass 237 wherein the cam and sliding surface have
    interengaging inclined surfaces.


CLS 49/240
TXT Device under subclass 236 provided with means to move or permit movement of
    one of the pivots of the closure relative to that of the axis of the other
    pivot to thereby change the direction of the turning axis of the closure,
    e.g., a closure is tipped about a corner while turning on an edge.


CLS 49/241
TXT Device under subclass 240 provided with a shaft turnable about its
    longitudinal axis and having a portion spaced laterally from said
    longitudinal axis, and wherein the movable pivot of the closure is carried
    by the laterally spaced portion.


CLS 49/242
TXT Device under subclass 240 wherein the movable pivot of the closure is
    carried by a lever or disc which pivots about an axis different from that
    of the closure.


CLS 49/243
TXT Device under subclass 242 wherein the lever is pivoted to the top of the
    post which mounts the closure for movement and extends outwardly therefrom
    to carry the upper hinge of the closure.


CLS 49/244
TXT Device under subclass 242 wherein the lever which carries the closure pivot
    swings about a horizontal axis.


CLS 49/245
TXT Device under subclass 240 wherein the movable pivot of the closure includes
    a pivot shaft and an elongated opening in the pivot mounting means receives
    the shaft and limits its displacement.


CLS 49/246
TXT Device under subclass 208 wherein there is means pivoting the closure to
    swing about each of two different axes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153+,   for a closure which swings on a pivoted arm and has an additional
    alternate opening and closing movement.

    192+,   for a closure which optionally swings on alternate axes in two or
    more opening and closing movements.

    204+,   for a closure which moves from a vertical to a withdrawn overhead
    position on a pivoted arm.

    216+,   for a closure having a translational movement and an initial or
    terminal movement on a pivoted arm to one side of the plane of translation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports: Cabinet Structure, subclass 325 for a cabinet component
    which pivots on a pivoted arm.


CLS 49/247
TXT Device under subclass 246 wherein the axes are at right angles to each
    other.


CLS 49/248
TXT Device under subclass 246 provided with a plurality of nonparallel pivoted
    arms to each of which the closure is pivotally connected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205,    for a closure which moves from a vertical to a withdrawn horizontal
    overhead position on a plurality of angular related pivoted arms.


CLS 49/249
TXT Device under subclass 248 wherein one of the pivoted arms comprises two or
    more sections pivoted together.


CLS 49/250
TXT Device under subclass 246 wherein the closure is additionally mounted to
    swing on means which translates along a guideway.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176+,   for a closure which optionally swings and slides on a sliding pivot
    mount.

    215,    for a closure pivot axis which moves along a guide or slot.


CLS 49/251
TXT Device under subclass 250 wherein the closure guideway is defined as
    bearing or rubbing against a surface with sufficient force to retard
    movement of the closure, e.g., it is resiliently urged against said surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    414+,   for a reciprocating closure with a biased bearing surface.


CLS 49/252
TXT Device under subclass 250 wherein the closure opening is formed by
    surrounding frame members and wherein the closure guideway is mounted on
    the frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     for a similar structure which mounts interconnected louvers for
    concurrent multidirectional movement.


CLS 49/253
TXT Device under subclass 246 wherein the closure pivoting means comprises a
    member or assemblage of members pivoted at one end to a support, and the
    other end pivotally supports and carries the closure adjacent its center of
    mass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154,    for a closure with optional movement wherein one of said movements
    is on a link at the balance point of the closure.


CLS 49/254
TXT Device under subclass 208 wherein the closure movements occur in turn, and
    wherein a translation precedes or follows a pivoting about an axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201+,   for a closure movable to an overhead position by an upward sliding
    movement followed by a distinct swinging movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports: Cabinet Structure, subclasses 322+ for a cabinet
    component with pivotal and rectilinear sequential movement.


CLS 49/255
TXT Device under subclass 254 provided with a manipulatable mechanical means
    for imparting vertically translation to the closure to permit pivoting
    about a vertical axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    190,    for a closure which is adjusted vertically on a vertical supporting
    pivot to permit passage of small objects.

    234,    for a closure which is actuated vertically to retard horizontal
    travel.

    276+,   for a starter type closure operator.


CLS 49/256
TXT Device under subclass 255 wherein the motion imparting means is a rigid arm
    which is pivoted to either the closure or its frame and directly engages
    the other with a sliding action to cause relative movement of the closure
    to its frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278,    for a starter type operator which includes a single camming lever.


CLS 49/257
TXT Device under subclass 254 wherein the translation of the closure
    repositions the pivot axis to permit swinging about said axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    260,    for a closure in which its pivot axis moves along a guide or slot.


CLS 49/258
TXT Device under subclass 254 provided with a support mounted for pivoting
    about an axis and wherein the closure is mounted on the support for
    translation relative thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156,    for a closure having this movement and an additional alternate
    movement.


CLS 49/259
TXT Device under subclass 258 wherein the support includes a member projecting
    beyond the pivot axis in the plane of the closure's translating movement.


CLS 49/260
TXT Device under subclass 208 provided with a trackway, e.g., a slot, along
    which the pivot axis of the closure is guided.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250+,   for a closure which swings on a link and slides along a guide.

    257,    for a closure in which its initial translation shifts its pivot
    axis to permit swinging about said axis.


CLS 49/261
TXT Device under subclass 208 wherein the closure tilts on a portion of a frame
    on which it rests and is free to move away from or translate along said
    portion.


CLS 49/262
TXT Device under the class definition comprising force input means for
    imparting movement to the closure which is engaged by a vehicle passage
    user and includes (1) a cylindrical body movable about its longitudinal
    axis by traction wheels of the vehicle, or (2) a member movable along a
    guideway or track, or (3) an adjunct, carried by the vehicle for specific
    cooperation with an element of the operating mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263+,   for a treadle or lever actuator operable by the weight of the user.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclasses 270+ for signals,
    switches, gates and other movable elements of that class actuated by the
    energy of the moving vehicle, either by direct mechanical connection or
    indirectly by springs, clockworks, etc., released by track-trips.


CLS 49/263
TXT Device under the class definition which includes manipulatable mechanical
    means movable relative to and imparting movement to the closure and means
    to effect its operation by a weight or impact, as from a foot or vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    for a treadle or treadle bar interconnector for closures
    interconnected for concurrent swinging movement.

    132+,   for a flush type closure operated by a pedal or treadle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 246.1+ for a pedal
    operated seat or cover and subclass 272 for a pedal operated spittoon cover.

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 178 for a pedal operated furnace door.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 98 for a treadle operated burglar
    alarm.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclass 4 for
    similar devices for the type of closures found in that class.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 179 for a pedal actuator for a dispensing
    device.


CLS 49/264
TXT Device under subclass 263 wherein the weight or impact operated means is in
    the path of travel of the closure user and is connected to close
    circuit-controlling means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334,    for a motor driven coaxial operator for a movable closure and see
    the search notes thereto for the loci of other motor driven operators.


CLS 49/265
TXT Device under subclass 263 wherein the weight or impact operated means is in
    the path of travel of the closure and is connected to a fluid controlling
    means, e.g., a valve or pump controller.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334,    for a motor driven coaxial operator for a movable closure and see
    the search notes thereto for the loci of other motor driven operators.


CLS 49/266
TXT Device under subclass 263 comprising an additional hand manipulated means
    connected to the closure or the weight or impact actuated means usable
    instead at the latter to effect operation of the closure.


CLS 49/267
TXT Device under subclass 263 wherein the weight or impact actuated means is
    depressed twice, as by both the front and rear wheels of a vehicle, to
    effect a single opening or closing of the closure, and wherein one
    depression of the pedal (1) sets the drive mechanism so that another
    depression of the pedal will move the closure or (2) starts the opening
    movement of the closure with the second depression of the pedal completing
    the closure movement.


CLS 49/268
TXT Device under subclass 263 comprising two weight or impact actuated means
    engageable in turn to effect a movement of the closure, wherein one
    actuates a latch release and the other effects the closure movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    279+,   for an operator interrelated with a closure latch release.


CLS 49/269
TXT Device under subclass 263 wherein at least two weight or impact actuated
    means are provided in the path of movement of the closure user and located
    on opposite sides of the closure, which means are connected to operators
    performing different functions and engaged in succession, e.g., to open and
    then close the closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327+,   for a closure operator actuated from opposite approaches and see
    the search notes thereto for the loci of other operators actuated from
    opposite approaches.


CLS 49/270
TXT Device under subclass 269 wherein a pair of said impact initiated means are
    located on each side of the closure, and wherein each of the pair on one
    side is connected with a respective one on the other side.


CLS 49/271
TXT Device under subclass 269 is also provided with a holding means which is
    disengaged by the weight or impact actuated means from either side of the
    closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272,    for a latch release interrelated with a pedal or treadle actuated
    operator.

    282+,   for an actuator which is manually grasped on either side of the
    closure to release a latch and move the closure.


CLS 49/272
TXT Device under subclass 263 wherein the weight or impact actuated means
    disengages a holding means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    271,    for a weight or impact actuated latch release and closure operator
    actuated from either side of the closure.

    279+,   for an operator interrelated with a latch release.

    364,    for a latch release actuated by an impact or blow.


CLS 49/273
TXT Device under subclass 263 wherein the closure is opened and retained in
    open position by the weight of the closure user upon a treadle and wherein
    means are provided to close the closure when the weight of the user is
    removed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    for a similar treadle operator which actuates interconnected
    closures.

    386+,   for a biasing means for a closure mounted for swinging movement and
    see the search notes hereto for loci of other closure biasing means.


CLS 49/274
TXT Device under subclass 273 wherein a resilient means closes the closure.


CLS 49/275
TXT Device under the class definition provided with an operator having
    kinematical ratios such that a full movement of the input member is
    incapable of moving the closure through its full range of motion, so that
    relatively short input strokes impart serial movements to the closure to
    move it from one extreme position to the other, e.g., closures such as
    freight car doors movable step-by-step by a pry bar or crow bar.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    267,    for a pedal or treadle operator requiring two actuations to effect
    a single complete movement of the closure.


CLS 49/276
TXT Device under the class definition provided with an operator which engages
    to impart an initial opening movement to the closure and then disengages to
    permit the opening to be concluded manually or by another operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for a motor drive for a closure which is energized by initial
    manual movement of the closure.

    139,    for a closure optionally moved manually or by a motor.

    209,    for an operator which imparts initial movement transverse to the
    plane of translation of a closure.

    234,    for an operator which initially moves the closure vertically to
    permit horizontal travel.

    255,    for an operator which first moves a closure vertically to permit
    horizontal swinging.

    275,    for an operator requiring a plurality of actuations to effect
    closure movements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    292,    Closure Fasteners, appropriate subclasses for devices for starting
    a closure open, or drawing it from a substantially closed to a fully closed
    position, wherein such operation is accomplished by cooperating surfaces on
    the latch bolts and keepers, which effect this operation during movement of
    the bolts into or out of latching condition relative to the keepers.

    454,    Ventilation, subclass 89 for a starter type operator for an
    ice-bunker closure, wherein the operator has means to prop the closure in
    ventilating position.


CLS 49/277
TXT Device under subclass 276 provided with a lever which engages either a
    fastening strap or a bar which is moved in the direction of its length, and
    wherein a force applied to the lever is transmitted through the strap or
    bar to impart movement to the closure.


CLS 49/278
TXT Device under subclass 276 comprising a lever having a handle at one end
    which is pivoted to either the closure or its frame and directly engages
    the other with a sliding action to cause relative movement of the closure
    and its frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256,    for a camming lever which actuates a closure vertically.


CLS 49/279
TXT Device under the class definition provided with a mechanical operating
    means movable relative to and imparting movement to a closure and a
    separate position holder between the closure and its frame or support
    wherein the operating means is interconnected with a means to effect a
    disengagement of the position holder so that it effects both disengagement
    of the position holder and movement of the closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272,    for a latch release interrelated with a pedal, treadle or impact
    actuator.

    276+,   for a closure latch release interrelated with a starter type
    operator.

    319,    for a latch interrelated with a sealing, guiding or locking strip
    operator.

    324+,   for an operator for a movably mounted closure wherein the latch
    components are part of the drive train.

    363,    for a biased closure having a bump actuated latch release not
    interconnected with the biasing means.

    394+,   for a swinging closure with a latch or lock.

    449+,   for a reciprocating closure for a latch or lock.


CLS 49/280
TXT Device under subclass 279 wherein the position holding means is
    interrelated with the actuation of a closure operating powered means other
    than a mere spring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334,    for a motor driven coaxial operator and see the search notes
    thereto for the loci of other motor driven closures.


CLS 49/281
TXT Device under subclass 279 wherein a single mechanical motion imparting
    means effects a closure movement by one type or direction of manipulation;
    (e.g., reciprocation) and a movement of position holding means by another
    kind or direction of manipulation; e.g., rotation.


CLS 49/282
TXT Device under subclass 279 including force input means imparting movement to
    the closure and release of the position holding means, which means are
    positioned on opposite sides of the closure in the approaches thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236+,   for a closure in which a movement against the force of gravity
    imparts bias to a swinging movement, and wherein said movements are
    actuated from opposite approaches.

    327+,   for an operator for a movably mounted closure actuated from
    opposite approaches.


CLS 49/283
TXT Device under subclass 282 wherein a means holding a position of the closure
    is effected at different positions of the closure and different closure
    drive trains release the holding means at the several positions.


CLS 49/284
TXT Device under subclass 282 provided with two separate systems of motion
    transmission, wherein one system releases the position holding means and
    the other moves the means imparting movement to the closure with each
    system being connected at spaced points to common actuating means extending
    to opposite sides of the closure approaches.


CLS 49/285
TXT Device under subclass 282 provided with a rigid pivoted arm which is
    actuated by the closure movement imparting means and wherein two separate
    systems of motion transmission, one moving the position holding means and
    the other the closure, are connected to the arm.


CLS 49/286
TXT Device under subclass 282 wherein the input means applies its force to a
    pivoted edge of the closure or to the pivot itself, and wherein a
    connection is made between the release of the position holding means and
    the force input means so that said force will effect a rotation of the
    closure edge on its pivots and release the latch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333+,   for an operator acting coaxially of a closure pivot.


CLS 49/287
TXT Device under subclass 286 wherein the means applying force to the closure
    includes a gear which is mounted on the hinge stile or is coaxial with the
    closure pivot.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    335,    for an operator which includes a coaxial gear.


CLS 49/288
TXT Device under subclass 286 wherein the means applying force to the closure
    includes a cable, pulley or drum which is mounted on the hinge stile or is
    coaxial with the closure pivot.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    289,    for an endless or looped cable operator, and see the search notes
    thereto for the loci of other cable operators actuated from opposite
    approaches.


CLS 49/289
TXT Device under subclass 282 wherein the operator includes a closed loop
    flexible member or a flexible member looped around a pulley with the free
    ends extending towards opposite ends of the closure, and wherein the latch
    or closure forms a circuit with the member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    288,    for a pivot applied cable input to release the closure latch and
    move the closure.

    290,    for a branched cable lost motion operator interrelated with a latch
    release.

    297,    for a cable operator interrelated with a latch release in which the
    opening thrust includes a closure mounted guide.

    332,    for a cable operator for a movably mounted closure actuated from
    opposite approaches.


CLS 49/290
TXT Device under subclass 282 wherein flaccid members such as ropes or cables
    are connected to the latch and closure and to each other, and wherein one
    cable has a slack portion to permit the other branch to be first actuated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    289,    for an endless or looped cable operator and see the search notes
    thereto for the loci of other cable operators actuated from opposite
    approaches.


CLS 49/291
TXT Device under subclass 282 wherein a lost motion joint comprising a
    projection on one member or a lever is movable in an elongated opening in
    another and imparts an initial movement to the latch release prior to
    movement of the closure.


CLS 49/292
TXT Device under subclass 282 wherein motion imparting means slides relative to
    an element of the latch release while forcing it in another direction there
    being an element of the means which permits movement of the latch release
    prior to the movement of the closure.


CLS 49/293
TXT Device under subclass 282 wherein the latch or its releaser is fastened to
    the closure, and wherein the closure moving force is applied to the latch
    or its releaser to first disengage the latch from its keeper, and then by
    continued application of force to the latch or its releaser, effects
    movement of the closure.


CLS 49/294
TXT Device under subclass 293 wherein two similar arms with each being
    pivotally connected to a separate actuator but being pivotally connected to
    the same latch.


CLS 49/295
TXT Device under subclass 293 wherein the operator includes a rigid member
    having a central shaft portion turnable about its longitudinal axis and
    pivot means at the ends of and spaced outwardly on opposite sides of the
    shaft portion with the pivot means being connected respectively to the
    actuator and the latch.


CLS 49/296
TXT Device under subclass 293 wherein the operator includes a member having
    arms fixed at an angle with a pivot at their intersection and pivot means
    at their ends respectively connected to the actuator and latch release.


CLS 49/297
TXT Device under subclass 293 wherein the latch releaser includes a cable
    trained over a cable guiding element, which element is supported by the
    closure, and wherein the runs of the cable to and from the guide are at an
    angle to each other, so that part of the closure moving force is derived
    from the guide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    289,    for an endless or looped cable operator, and see the search notes
    thereto for the loci of other cable operators actuated from opposite
    approaches.


CLS 49/298
TXT Device under subclass 293 including a series of links pivoted to each other
    which are connected at one end of the series to means imparting movement to
    the closure and at its opposite end to the latch releaser.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329+,   for an operator for a movably mounted closure which includes
    pivoted levers.


CLS 49/299
TXT Device under subclass 293 wherein are provided two mirror image closure
    actuators each on an opposite side thereof, and wherein each is connected
    to the latch releaser by a common drive.


CLS 49/300
TXT Device under subclass 279 comprising a single manipulatable element
    connected to move a juncture common to two separate systems of motion
    transmission, wherein one system actuates the latch and the other moves the
    closure, and wherein the common juncture is located at a point remote from
    the connection of the closure moving system to the closure.


CLS 49/301
TXT Device under subclass 279 wherein the operator includes a flexible chain,
    rope or the like which is grasped by hand and pulled to move the closure in
    one direction and to effect disengagement of the latch, and wherein the
    closure movement in the other direction is obtained by means other than the
    pull cable, e.g., a spring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    347,    for a one direction pull cable operator for a movably mounted
    closure.


CLS 49/302
TXT Device under subclass 279 wherein the input means to effect movement of the
    closure and disengagement of the latch is located at a place removed from
    the closure, for use by a nonuser of the closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    357,    for another remote actuator for a movably mounted closure.


CLS 49/303
TXT Device under the class definition provided with an elongated strip mounted
    for movement and spanning the space between the closure and frame so as to
    (1) preclude the passage of fluid therebetween or (2) to aid or (3) prevent
    their relative movement, and further provided with means to impart movement
    to the plate, responsive to movement of the closure, to or from a locking,
    guiding or sealing position.

    (1)     Note.  Mere deflection or deformation of the strip as it engages on
    opposed surface has not been considered an actuation for this and the
    indented subclasses; however, if the strip engages a surface other than the
    sealing surface to move the strip into contact with its sealing surface, it
    has been so considered.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    316+,   for an operator for a movably mounted sealing, guiding or locking
    strip not retracted by closure movement and see the search notes thereto
    for the loci of other such strips.


CLS 49/304
TXT Device under subclass 303 wherein the strip is mounted for movement on a
    sill, i.e., a member positioned beneath the movable closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    467+,   for a threshold, per se, and particularly subclasses 469+ for a
    threshold having an attached seal.


CLS 49/305
TXT Device under subclass 304 provided with an additional strip mounted on the
    closure for mating engagement with the strip on the sill.


CLS 49/306
TXT Device under subclass 303 wherein the movement of the strip lies in the
    plane delineated by the length and width of the closure or in a plane
    parallel and adjacent thereto.


CLS 49/307
TXT Device under subclass 306 wherein the means imparting motion to the strip
    includes a horizontally sliding rod or bar which is connected to the strip
    and which has a strip moving portion extending outwardly from the closure
    to abut against an adjacent stationary member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310,    for a plunger actuator for a pivotally mounted strip resiliently
    biased to an inoperative position.


CLS 49/308
TXT Device under subclass 307 including a pivoted elongated rigid arm joining
    the plunger to the strip.


CLS 49/309
TXT Device under subclass 306 wherein the strip has movement combining a
    vertical and horizontal displacement.


CLS 49/310
TXT Device under subclass 303 provided with a spring or elastic member for
    urging the strip about an axis to an inoperative or nonuse position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306+,   for a resilient means biasing a strip having movement in the plane
    of the closure to an inoperative position.


CLS 49/311
TXT Device under subclass 310 wherein the actuating means includes (1) an
    extension or projection extending to one side of the strip rotatable with
    the strip about the strip axis, or (2) a lever whose pivot axis is oriented
    in the direction of the axis of the strip.


CLS 49/312
TXT Device under subclass 311 wherein the resilient means includes a spring
    which is mounted on and turns about the strip axis.


CLS 49/313
TXT Device under subclass 310 provided with a cam or strike member arranged in
    the way of movement of the strip to force the strip into its operative
    sealing position.

    (1)     Note.  A mere contact area mounted on the jamb, to be engaged by a
    portion of the closure in its closed position which may incidentally or
    inherently deflect the strip has not been considered as a deflector, and
    will be found in other subclasses, e.g., subclass 310.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    311+,   for a deflector in the path of an offset or lever actuator on the
    strip, which rotates about an axis parallel to that of the strip.


CLS 49/314
TXT Device under subclass 313 wherein the deflector is mounted on the side
    frame member of the opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    311+,   for a jamb cam in the path of an offset or lever actuator on the
    strip, which rotates about an axis parallel to that of the strip.


CLS 49/315
TXT Device under subclass 303 wherein the strip is acted upon by the force of
    gravity or a weight to urge it to its inoperative or nonuse position.


CLS 49/316
TXT Device under the class definition provided with an elongated strip mounted
    for movement and spanning the space between the closure and frame so as to
    (1) preclude the passage of fluid therebetween, or (2) to aid or (3)
    prevent their relative movement, and further provided with a manipulatable
    mechanical means to impart movement to the strip to or from a locking,
    sealing or guiding position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172+,   for a closure carrying an edge nested stile slide which is
    laterally separable therefrom to permit swinging of the closure.

    174+,   for a guide strip between a closure and its frame permitting
    sliding movement of a closure and laterally retractable to permit swinging
    of the closure with respect to its frame.

    179,    for a stop strip, displaceable to permit movement of a sliding
    pivot mounted closure about a vertical pivot axis.

    185,    for a longitudinal key between a closure and a stile, laterally
    retractable into the closure.

    194+,   for an optionally moved closure, one of the movements being
    permitted by a movable or removable guide.

    303+,   for a sealing strip actuated by movement of the closure.

    414+,   for a reciprocating closure having a distinct biasing means acting
    on the closure bearing surface, and particularly subclasses 417+ for a
    means to adjust or retract the bias.

    455,    for a reciprocating closure having a movably mounted guideway to
    permit closure removal.

    466,    for a sealing or binding strip which is displaceable to permit the
    removal of the closure.

    472+,   for a sealing strip carried by a closure to seal the closure-frame
    gap, reinforce the closure panel, and limit the movement of the closure.

    475+,   for a closure mounted seal or striker gasket.


CLS 49/317
TXT Device under subclass 316 provided with strips adjacent opposite side edge
    faces of the closure, i.e., at the ends of the closure and further provided
    with means interconnecting said strips to a common mechanical means
    imparting movement to them.


CLS 49/318
TXT Device under subclass 317 provided with an additional strip at a side edge
    face of the closure which strip extends between the opposite side edge
    faces and is further provided with means joining said additional strip to
    the common operator.


CLS 49/319
TXT Device under subclass 316 provided with a separate position holder acting
    to hold the closure relative to its frame, and wherein the means imparting
    movement to the strip is joined to a means to release the position holder,
    i.e., the same operator effects movement of both the strip and the position
    holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    279+,   for a closure moving operator interrelated with a closure latch
    release.


CLS 49/320
TXT Device under subclass 316 wherein the means imparting movement to the strip
    includes a rod or bar mounted for turning about an axis extending at right
    angles to the plane of movement of the strip.


CLS 49/321
TXT Device under subclass 316 wherein the means imparting movement to the strip
    includes a rigid pivoted arm.


CLS 49/322
TXT Device under the class definition comprising a closure supported for
    movement and provided with a position holder which is rendered operative by
    breakage or failure of the closure supporting means to prevent falling of
    the closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    279+,   for an operator and a latch release interrelated to the operator,
    so that actuation effects both a disengagement of the latch and a movement
    of the closure.

    449+,   for a latch or locking means for a reciprocating closure.


CLS 49/323
TXT Device under the class definition provided with a housing for receiving a
    closure, which housing is formed in an adjacent framework and further
    provided with a closure guiding support which is mounted to move from a
    withdrawn inoperative position to an extended guiding position beyond the
    housing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    372+,   for a reciprocating closure stored in a housing, and see the search
    notes thereto for the loci of other closures stored in a housing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    296,    Land Vehicles: Bodies and Tops, subclass 150 for a vehicle having a
    displaceable pillar intermediate the closures in their raised, closed
    position.


CLS 49/324
TXT Device under the class definition provided with a manipulatable mechanical
    means which is movable relative to and actuates the closure, which means is
    other than a mere spring which stores energy by movement of the closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for a thermally responsive actuator.

    11,     for a float controlled operator for a flood gate.

    74.1+,  for an operator for a louvered closure.

    95+,    for an operator for interconnected closures in spaced openings
    along a barrier.

    132,    for an operator for a closure which opens to be flush with the
    ground.

    137,    for a combined fluid operator and closure check.

    140,    for a closure optionally moved by motor or manual operator.

    199+,   for an operator for a closure which moved from a vertical to a
    withdrawn horizontal overhead.

    210,    for a common operator for transversely and translationally moving a
    closure.

    263+,   for a pedal, treadle or impact actuated operator.

    275,    for an operator with step by step actuation.

    276+,   for a starter type operator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 176+ for an operator for a furnace door.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 192 for an operator for a stove door
    or window.

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclasses 315+ for a motor, or motor driven linkage, in combination with
    other elevator structure for shifting a barrier which regulates the access
    to or from an elevator car.

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclass 166 for a traversing hoist which raises
    a closure from above and shifts it laterally.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclasses 262+ for a link movably secured to a
    closure for securing it in closed or adjusted position, with no additional
    means to facilitate manipulation of the link to act as an operator for the
    closure.

    296,    Land Vehicles: Bodies and Tops, subclass 223 for land vehicle top
    structure having an opening therein, a closure for said opening and a means
    to actuate the closure between open and closed position.

    312,    Supports: Cabinet Structure, subclass 139 for an operator for a
    closure in a cabinet structure.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 684.3 for discrete door
    removing apparatus which includes a vertically swinging door-supporting
    member.

    454,    Ventilation, subclass 89 for an operator for an ice bunker closure,
    having a brace to hold the hatch in ventilating position.


CLS 49/325
TXT Device under subclass 324 wherein the closure moving means includes an
    actuator which is rigid to an axially applied force to move a closure but
    bendable in one direction transverse of its longitudinal axis to coil for
    storage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 108 for a reversibly
    flexible and rigid strip-like unit.


CLS 49/326
TXT Device under subclass 324 wherein closure is mounted for movement in
    opposite directions and the moving means can be actuated in either
    direction from its closed position, e.g., away from the direction of
    movement of the user.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS;

    149+,   for a closure movable, at the option of the user, on either of two
    or more distinct mounting means from a closed to an open position.

    263+,   for a pedal actuated closure mounted for movement in opposite
    directions from a closed position.


CLS 49/327
TXT Device under subclass 324 wherein the actuator of the closure operating
    means is located adjacent the user's path of movement to and from and on
    each side of the closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for interconnected concurrently movable closures, actuated from
    opposite approaches to the closures.

    236+,   for a closure in which a movement against the force of gravity
    imparts return bias to a swinging closure, in which the movements are
    imparted from opposite approaches.

    269+,   for a pedal or treadle actuator on opposite sides of the closure.

    282+,   for an operator interrelated with a closure latch release actuated
    from opposite sides of the closure.

    326,    for a closure mounted for swinging movement in opposite directions
    from a closed position, i.e., away from the direction of movement of the
    user, and having an actuator adjacent the user's patch of movement on each
    side of the closure.


CLS 49/328
TXT Device under subclass 327 wherein the actuator of the closure operating
    means includes pivoted arms which move back and forth about a horizontal
    axis which are alternately worked by the closure user to impart closure
    movement.


CLS 49/329
TXT Device under subclass 328 provided with a series of arms which are pivoted
    to each other and join the operating means to the closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    298,    for a series of pivoted rigid arms connected at opposite ends of
    the series to an actuator and an interrelated latch release and closure
    mover.


CLS 49/330
TXT Device under subclass 329 wherein the means actuating the series of pivoted
    arms transmits a force intermediate the length of the assembly of arms so
    as to extend or contract its ends, e.g., a toggle.


CLS 49/331
TXT Device under subclass 327 wherein the closure actuating means includes a
    flexible element and a pivoted arm which joins the cable to the closure,
    the closure being actuated by pulling on the cable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    347,    for a one direction pull cable actuator.


CLS 49/332
TXT Device under subclass 327 wherein the closure actuating means includes a
    flexible hoisting element and a pulley, sprocket, or winding drum over
    which the element is trained.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    352,    for a cable and pulley or drum operator concealed within the
    closure housing.


CLS 49/333
TXT Device under subclass 324 wherein the closure actuating means is coaxial
    with the axis of a swingably mounted closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    for swinging closures, with a cable interconnection sheaved on
    their pivots.


CLS 49/334
TXT Device under subclass 333 provided with a powered means, other than a mere
    spring, to actuate the closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for a motor operated control for a jail type closure.

    32,     for a motor operated closure in which the drive is energized by an
    initial manual displacement of the closure.

    118,    for motor driven closures interconnected for opposed, concurrent
    movement.

    137,    for a combined fluid motor operator and closure check.

    138,    for a motor driven closure having means to vary the closure speed
    or range of movement.

    139,    for a closure optionally moved, by a motor or by manual means.

    167,    for a motor operated window carried by a swingably mounted door in
    which the power conduit for the motor extends across the hinge of the door.

    199,    for a motor operated closure which moves from a vertical to a
    horizontal overhead position.

    264,    for an electric motor operated closure, activated by a pedal or
    treadle switch.

    265,    for a fluid motor operated closure, activated by a pedal or treadle
    valve.

    280,    for a closure latch release interconnected with a motor drive for
    the closure.

    340,    for a motor driven operating lever which swings about an axis
    parallel to that of the closure.

    349,    for a motor drive concealed within a housing for the closure.

    358,    for a motor mounted on and movable with the closure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses, for a
    nominally recited motor moving a nominally recited load (closure) through a
    force transmitting means of that class.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclasses, for a
    motor of that class moving a nominally recited closure (load), and see (2)
    Note to 1 Class Definition of that class for the line.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclasses, for a motor of
    that class moving a nominally recited closure (load), and see (2) Note to I
    Class Definition of that class for the line.

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 177 for a motor operated furnace door.

    246,    Railway Switched and Signals, for closures such as gates combined
    with railway switches or signals, especially subclass 261 for a fluid-
    motor actuated railway gate and subclass 272 for a vehicle energy actuated
    gate using a fluid transmission.

    303,    Fluid-Pressure and Analogous Brake Systems, subclass 6.1 for a
    fluid-pressure brake for controlling a fluid motor which operates a closure.

    318,    Electricity: Motive Power Systems, subclasses 3+ for a nominally
    recited closure (load) having an electric motor drive combined with a
    control for the motor.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, for a rotary expansible chamber
    device moving a nominally recited closure (load) and see (2) Note in
    section I of the Main Class Definition to Class 91 for the line between
    Classes 91 and 49, the line between Classes 49 and 418 being the same.


CLS 49/335
TXT Device under subclass 333 wherein the coaxial closure actuating means
    includes a rotating, radially toothed body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     for a coaxial gear interconnection or operator for concurrently
    movable louver type closures.

    287,    for an operator, which includes a coaxial gear, interrelated with a
    closure latch release.


CLS 49/336
TXT Device under subclass 335 wherein the closure actuating means includes an
    elongated bar having teeth on one face thereof which mesh with the radially
    toothed body.


CLS 49/337
TXT Device under subclass 335 wherein the closure actuating means includes a
    helical gear which mesh with the radially toothed body.


CLS 49/338
TXT Device under subclass 333 wherein the closure actuating means includes an
    arm which is pivoted at one end to an element coaxial with the closure axis
    and at another point to an element of the closure actuator.


CLS 49/339
TXT Device under subclass 324 wherein the closure actuating means includes a
    pivoted arm which turns an axis parallel to the axis of a swingably mounted
    closure, including pivotally mounted motors or screw and nut devices which
    act as operating levers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     for a common drive which imparts movement to closure connected
    levers in spaced openings.

    356,    for a push or pull handle pivoted to a closure in which the pivot
    axis is parallel to the closure axis and in which the handle does not react
    against a fixed point.


CLS 49/340
TXT Device under subclass 339 in which the closure actuating means includes a
    powered means, other than a mere spring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334,    for a motor driven coaxial operator, and see the search note
    thereto for the loci of other motor driven closures.


CLS 49/341
TXT Device under subclass 339 in which the closure actuating means includes a
    body having force transmitting teeth or threads which move the pivoted arm.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82.1,   for louver type closures having a geared interconnector or operator
    to move the louvers.

    107+,   for a geared interconnector or operator for concurrently swinging
    closures.


CLS 49/342
TXT Device under subclass 341 wherein the pivoted arm has teeth at one end
    thereof which teeth mesh with the teeth on a rotating body.


CLS 49/343
TXT Device under subclass 341 wherein the toothed body comprises a helically
    threaded rod and a mating toothed block with one of these elements being
    mounted on the pivoted arm.


CLS 49/344
TXT Device under subclass 339 wherein the closure actuating means includes a
    sliding bar having a to and from motion which engages the pivoted arm.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    356,    for a reciprocating rod directly connected to and moving the
    closure.


CLS 49/345
TXT Device under subclass 339 wherein the closure actuating means includes a
    plurality of arms which are pivotally connected to each other.


CLS 49/346
TXT Device under subclass 339 wherein the closure actuating means includes a
    pivoted arm having terminal portion connected to and confined for sliding
    movement along or in an elongated slot or guide on the closure.



    403,    Joints and Connections, subclass 61 for a pivot stud slidable in an
    elongated opening.


CLS 49/347
TXT Device under subclass 324 wherein the closure actuating means comprises a
    flexible chain, rope or the like which is grasped by hand and pulled to
    move the closure in one direction, and wherein the closure movement in the
    other direction is obtained by means other than the pull cable, e.g., a
    spring, the weight of the closure, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for a pull cable with a fusible connection.

    301,    for a pull cable closure mover and closure latch release.

    331,    for a pull cable actuator on opposite approaches to closure,
    interconnected by a lever.

    356,    for a closure moved by a push rod in one direction and biased to
    move in the other direction by a spring, etc.


CLS 49/348
TXT Device under subclass 324 provided with a pocket or receptacle, formed in
    the structure adjacent the closure opening to store the closure in its open
    position, and wherein the closure actuating means is enclosed within said
    pocket or receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    372+,   for a closure stored in a housing, and see the search notes thereto
    for the loci of other closures stored in a housing.


CLS 49/349
TXT Device under subclass 348 wherein the closure actuating means within the
    pocket or receptacle includes a powered means, other than a mere spring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334,    for a motor driven coaxial operator, and see the search notes
    thereto for the loci of other motion driven closures.


CLS 49/350
TXT Device under subclass 348 wherein the closure actuating means includes a
    rotating toothed body which actuates a pivoted arm and wherein the movement
    of said arm is within the confines of the pocket or receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146,    for a similar operator which both raises the closure and moves it
    horizontally.

    349,    for a motor actuated gear driven lever.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 200 for similar lever arrangements
    connected to a spring to hold the closure in adjusted position.


CLS 49/351
TXT Device under subclass 350 wherein the closure actuating means includes two
    or more pivoted arms.


CLS 49/352
TXT Device under subclass 348 wherein the closure actuating means includes a
    flexible chain, rope or the like and a pulley, sprocket, or winding drum
    over which it is trained.


CLS 49/353
TXT Device under subclass 348 wherein the closure actuating means includes a
    pivoted arm and a handle which extends exteriorly of the pocket or
    receptacle to transmit a force to the lever.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    350+,   for a gear driven lever operator actuated by an exposed handle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 200 for similar lever arrangements
    connected to a spring to hold the closure in adjusted position.


CLS 49/354
TXT Device under subclass 324 wherein the closure actuating means includes
    means at one side of and extending through a transverse passage in a wall
    to a closure located on the opposite side of the wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    357,    for an operator, the input of which is located at a place removed
    from the closure.


CLS 49/355
TXT Device under subclass 354 provided with means to close or reduce the area
    of the transverse passage to prevent or reduce the flow of ambient air or
    moisture therethrough.


CLS 49/356
TXT Device under subclass 324 wherein the closure actuating means includes an
    elongated bar which is manually grasped by hand and pushed or pulled to
    impart a movement to the closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for a handle actuator which extends through a grille.

    325,    for a push rod which is reversibly flexible and rigid.

    354+,   for a push rod actuator of the through wall type.

    460+,   for a residual combination of a handle with a closure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclasses 262+ for a link movably secured to a
    closure for securing it in closed or adjusted position, with no additional
    means such as a handle or extension to facilitate manipulation of the link
    to act as an operator for the closure.


CLS 49/357
TXT Device under subclass 324 wherein a closure actuating means is located at a
    place removed from the closure usually for use by a nonuser of the closure
    passage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    for a jail type closure with remote closure control.

    302,    for a remote actuator for an operator interrelated with a closure
    latch release.

    334,    for a motor powered closure operator coaxial with a closure pivot
    and see the search notes for other motor powered closure combinations.

    347,    for a closure operated by a remote pull cable actuator.

    354,    for a through wall type operator.


CLS 49/358
TXT Device under subclass 324 wherein all of the means movable relative to and
    actuating the closure is carried by it, except the component attached to
    the closure supporting structure.


CLS 49/359
TXT Device under subclass 358 wherein the closure carried means includes a
    pivoted arm.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    for a similar lever structure which imparts movement to closures at
    different speeds.


CLS 49/360
TXT Device under subclass 324 provided with a guide mounting the closure for
    sliding movement, and wherein the closure actuating means moves the closure
    along the guide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359,    for a closure mounted lever operator for a sliding closure, e.g.,
    elevator door type.


CLS 49/361
TXT Device under subclass 360 including closure actuating means adjacent
    opposed closure guides and wherein a single power source is interconnected
    to the opposed actuating means.


CLS 49/362
TXT Device under subclass 360 wherein the closure actuating means includes an
    elongated bar with teeth on one face or an elongated rotating helical gear,
    and wherein said bar or gear extends in a direction parallel to the closure
    guide.


CLS 49/363
TXT Device under subclass 360 wherein the closure actuating means includes a
    pivoted arm.


CLS 49/364
TXT Device under the class definition provided with an impact receiver which is
    connected to a position holder to effect disengagement thereof upon impact,
    as from the bumper of a vehicle, and means for urging the closure to an
    open or a closed position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    279+,   for closure operator interconnected with a latch release.

    503,    for a closure panel modified to accommodate a latch or lock, and
    see the search notes thereto for the loci of other latches and locks.


CLS 49/365
TXT Device under the class definition provided with an upright frame member
    adapted to be engaged by adjacent closures in their closed position or
    adapted to support the adjacent closures for movement, and wherein said
    frame member is mounted for a separate and distinct movement relative to
    the closures so as to double the useable area of the closure opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for a plural wing revolving closure in which the center post about
    which the wings revolve is movable to one side of the opening.

    316,    for a retractable upper support which guides a closure from a
    housing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclass 119 for
    a plural strip, slat or panel assembly mounted on opposite sides of a
    single support, which support is not independently movable or removable.

    296,    Land Vehicles: Bodies and Tops, subclass 150 for a convertible
    vehicle body with a displaceable pillar intermediate adjacent closures.


CLS 49/366
TXT Device under the class definition comprising two closures which move apart
    in opposite directions from an edge to edge closed position to form an
    opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116+,   for similar device wherein the closures are interconnected to move
    in unison.

    168,    for plural closures which move together and independently.

    371,    for plural swinging closures for a single opening in which the
    closures move from a closed position in which a hinge edge of one abuts a
    free edge of another.

    464,    for removable, independent closure sections.


CLS 49/367
TXT Device under subclass 366 wherein the adjacent edges of the closures in
    their closed positions extend over and beyond each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    458,    for interengaging meeting rails on side by side sliding closures.


CLS 49/368
TXT Device under subclass 367 comprising a sealing member of different material
    from that of the closures which member acts between the overlapping meeting
    edges.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    473,    for a disparate seal between a combined stop, seal and stiffener on
    a closure and its frame.

    475.1+, for a closure combined with a seal and see the notes thereto for
    the loci of similar art.


CLS 49/369
TXT Device under subclass 367 in which one of the closures includes a meeting
    edge of generally Z shape in cross-section, and the other closure has a
    meeting edge to fit within the Z bar.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    472+,   for a closure having a Z-bar combined seal, stop and stiffener.


CLS 49/370
TXT Device under subclass 366 wherein the closures are guided for rectilinear
    movement in opposite directions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for arcuate closures moving across a single opening.

    367+,   for sliding bipartite center opening closures having overlapping
    meeting edges.

    409+,   for a sliding closure dependent from an upper hanger.

    425+,   for a sliding closure mounted on balls, rollers or the like.


CLS 49/371
TXT Device under the class definition comprising two or more closures moving
    about a fixed pivot and which close or vacate a single opening.

    (1)     Note.  Plural duplicate closures in plural openings have been
    classified in appropriate subclasses below on the basis of the single
    closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61+,    for back to back closures for a single opening.

    73.1+,  for closures interconnected for concurrent movement, particularly
    subclasses 74+ for louver closures, and subclasses 104+ for swinging
    closures.

    171,    for a single closure for plural openings.

    366+,   for bipartite, center opening, plural swinging closures.

    381+,   for plural closures for plural openings, and see (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 206+ for a wall
    having closures for plural openings in the wall.


CLS 49/372
TXT Device under the class definition comprising a closure, and a pocket or
    receptacle formed in the structure adjacent the closure opening to house
    the closure when it moves to vacate a portal (nonhoused) position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for a closure storable in a housing and having a cut out or movably
    mounted section to permit hand signalling therethrough.

    125+,   for folding or stacking closures stored in a housing.

    131+,   for a flush swinging closure storable in a recess in the passage it
    closes and over the surface of which the user passes.

    207,    for closures having independent longitudinal movement into and out
    of a storage housing.

    211,    for a multidirectional closure in which a transverse movement
    aligns the closure with a housing opening or guide.

    227,    for a closure having a multidirectional movement in the plane of
    the closure from a housing.

    348+,   for an operator concealed within a closure housing.

    409+,   for a pendant closure, reciprocable into and out of a housing.

    425+,   for a closure mounted on anti-friction means, reciprocable into and
    out of a housing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 19+
    for closures, partitions and panels, of the type provided for, movable into
    a storage chamber, particularly subclass 37.

    296,    Land Vehicles: Bodies and Tops, subclass 146.2 for a combination of
    a door and window associated in a vehicle body; and subclasses 149+ for
    closure receiving pockets on a vehicle door and on an adjacent vehicle body
    section.


CLS 49/373
TXT Device under subclass 372 provided with means other than the closure edge
    which closes or seals the mouth of the opening formed in the closure
    receiving pocket or receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    316+,   for an operator for a sealing, locking or guiding strip.


CLS 49/374
TXT Device under subclass 372 provided with means mounting the closure for
    sliding movement in an up and down direction to and from a housed position.


CLS 49/375
TXT Device under subclass 374 provided with means extending downward from the
    lower edge of the closure which engages a bearing surface within the pocket
    or receptacle.


CLS 49/376
TXT Device under subclass 374 provided with a frame member extending from the
    pocket or receptacle and forming an enclosure to receive the closure in its
    out-of-housing (portal) position, in which one of the closure receiving
    side edges of the frame member forms an angle other than a right angle with
    the means defining the portal opening.


CLS 49/377
TXT Device under subclass 374 provided with flexible or elastic means engaging
    between the closure and frame at the mouth of the pocket or receptacle
    opening to prevent or dampen the movement of one with respect to the other,
    e.g., antirattlers, seals and bumpers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    414+,   for a reciprocating closure having a distinct biasing means for the
    bearing surface.

    428+,   for a reciprocating closure having a spring bearing surface.

    485.1+, for a seal between an overlapping closure and frame.


CLS 49/378
TXT Device under subclass 374 provided with a frame member adjacent the pocket
    or receptacle forming an opening to receive the closure in its passage
    blocking (portal) position, and wherein the closure guide is carried by a
    continuous integral member forming a facing panel for the pocket or
    receptacle and one side of the frame member for the portal opening.


CLS 49/379
TXT Device under the class definition comprising a means to store potential
    energy upon the movement of a closure in one direction, and a means to hold
    the closure in that direction against return movement, and a device to
    release the closure from the holding means to permit the stored energy to
    return the closure to its beginning position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for a latch responsive to heat (e.g., fusible) to release a closure
    for movement by movement stored energy.

    21,     for a latch responsive to a fluid, such as water, to release a
    closure for movement by movement stored energy.

    29,     for a time controlled latch for releasing a closure for movement by
    movement stored energy.

    110+,   for movement stored energy which acts on a lever interconnecting
    concurrently swinging closures.

    236+,   for a latched closure having a multidirectional opening movement,
    one component of which is against the force of gravity, so that when
    released, the closure returns to closed position.

    273+,   for a pedal actuated, load maintained, self-returning closure.

    324+,   for a closure having energy storing means as defined above combined
    with an operator for moving it to an energy storing position.

    364,    for a bump actuated latch release.

    386,    for biasing means for a swinging closure.

    394,    for a latch or lock for a swinging  closure.

     449,   for a latch or lock for a sliding  closure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 2+ for a trip mechanism to
    release a closure latch to permit the closure to move.


CLS 49/380
TXT Device under the class definition comprising a movable closure and a
    structure supporting the closure for movement, and wherein the closure and
    supporting structure are handled as a unit for insertion into an opening or
    for conveyance from one place to another, e.g., a movable closure mounted
    on a removable frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for a plural wing revolving door in which the wings and their
    mounting means are bodily moved to one side of the opening to provide a
    through passage.

    163+,   for a closure and frame unit, in which the closure is movable
    independently of and with another closure on which it is mounted, and
    especially subclass 171 for a peephole or letter slot closure and frame
    unit.

    365,    for a closure mounted on a center post which is movable or
    removable independently of the closure.

    463+,   for a closure removable relative to its supporting structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclass 351 for
    portable closure and frame units of that class.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 331 for a building
    component packaged closure and frame unit; i.e., having additional means to
    hold the parts in position, or to protect them, during shipping or storage.


CLS 49/381
TXT Device under the class definition provided with means mounting the closure
    for movement about a pivot to open or close a passage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for an axially pivoted picket pole flood gate.

    67,     for an auxiliary closure mounted for swinging movement.

    131+,   for a closure mounted to swing flush with the ground.

    147,    for a closure which swings on a flaccid connector.

    149+,   for a closure with optional movements in which one of the movements
    is a swinging movement.

    208+,   for a closure with multidirectional movement which includes a
    turning about a pivot.

    324+,   for an operator for a swinging closure.

    371,    for a plural swinging closures and see the search notes thereto for
    the loci of other plural swinging closures.

    501+,   for a closure modified to accommodate a hinge.

    504+,   for a frame modified to accommodate a hinge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 221+ for a hinge, per se, or a
    hinge attached to a closure or frame, wherein the only recitation of the
    closure or frame structure is that which is necessary to mount the hinge.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 210+ for land vehicles
    having a roof and having an opening therein and swingably mounted closures
    for said opening.

    312,    Supports: Cabinet Structure, subclass 319.2 for a cabinet component
    which pivots about a fixed axis.


CLS 49/382
TXT Device under subclass 381 provided with means at a plurality of alternately
    used space points to receive hinge mounting means, whereby the closure may
    be mounted to swing from either side and in either direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    192+,   for a closure with optional movement on alternate axes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 265 for reversible hinge hardware.


CLS 49/383
TXT Device under subclass 381 provided with a seal or guard device acting at
    the juncture nearest the mounting means of the closure and frame which
    device (1) is different from that provided at other sides of the closure to
    seal the juncture gap, (2) prevents the insertion of a finger or similar
    object in the juncture, or (3) prevents opening of the closure upon removal
    of the hinges, e.g., an antipeep seal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    475+,   for a closure seal or striker gasket which inherently functions as
    a finger guard, and see the search notes thereto for the loci of other
    seals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 40+
    for fillers to close small openings between a frame and a closure of that
    class due, for example, to improper fit.


CLS 49/384
TXT Device under subclass 383 wherein the seal or guard device includes a
    cylindrical portion and a mating concave recess portion, the recess and
    cylindrical portion having the same axis.


CLS 49/385
TXT Device under subclass 381 wherein the closure swings about an axis passing
    through the thickness dimension thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for an arcuate closure which moves about an axis concentric with
    the axis of the opening.

    327+,   for a pivoted closure of this type provided with an operator
    actuatable from opposite sides of the closure.


CLS 49/386
TXT Device under subclass 381 provided with means for urging or retaining the
    closure to an open or a close position by a biasing action thereon, e.g.,
    spring weight.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21+,    for closure biased to a desired position, and having means
    responsive to the presence of a fluid to move the closure against the
    action of the biasing means.

    60,     for a closure having a biasing means, such as a spring, in which
    energy is stored by the operation of an animal scarer while the closure is
    being opened, and which means urges the closure to a closed position.

    89,     for a biasing means for interconnected lower type closures.

    197+,   for a means to bias a closure from a vertical to a withdrawn
    horizontal overhead position.

    236+,   for a swinging closure having multidirectional opening and closing
    movement in which one direction is against the force of gravity to bias the
    closure to move oppositely; e.g., rising hinge type.

    273+,   for a load maintained; self-returning pedal or treadle actuated
    closure.

    379,    for a latch release, self-returning closure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 277+ for resiliently biased
    hinges; and subclass 71 for closer hardware.

    248,    Supports, subclass 417 for a biased or self-returning rotating
    stand.


CLS 49/387
TXT Device under subclass 386 wherein the biasing means includes a disparate
    weight, not a part of the mass of the closure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 81 for closer hardware utilizing
    weights.


CLS 49/388
TXT Device under subclass 381 wherein the mounting means are positioned in
    frame members on opposite sides of the swinging closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74.1+,  for a series of louvers mounted on opposing frame members and
    interconnected for concurrent movement.


CLS 49/389
TXT Device under subclass 388 wherein the mounting means on the closure and the
    frame may be readily disengaged to permit removal of the closure, when the
    closure is angularly related to the frame in an open position.


CLS 49/390
TXT Device under subclass 388 wherein portions of the closure on each side of
    the pivot when the closure is swung to open position extend outwardly of
    the frame of the opening on opposed transverse sides thereof; i.e., the
    pivots are intermediate the length of side edges of the closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176+,   especially subclass 181, et seq., for a closure mounted on a
    sliding member for swinging to an optional open position on opposite sides
    of the closure opening.


CLS 49/391
TXT Device under subclass 390 wherein the opposing pivot mounting members are
    not parallel, e.g., wing type "ventilator" windows for vehicles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144,    for a "ventilator" closure combined with a vertically sliding
    closure.

    333+,   for a closure and operator with coaxial pivots.


CLS 49/392
TXT Device under subclass 390 wherein a means to seal the closure juncture or
    to limit the movement of the closure includes movement limiting portions,
    i.e., stops or seals on the edge surfaces of the frame or closure the
    portions being above and below the pivot axis and diagonally opposed
    relative to the edge surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182,    for diagonally opposed flanges on a stile slide and closure mounted
    thereon.

    391,    for a vehicle vent window having diagonally opposed stops or seals.


CLS 49/393
TXT Device under subclass 392 wherein the stops or seals are mounted on the
    opposing frame members carrying the pivots.


CLS 49/394
TXT Device under subclass 381 provided with a separate position holder, i.e.,
    latch or lock.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46+,    for a turnstile having a latch or detent to hold successive arms in
    passage barring position.

    49,     for a closure having means to restrict the direction of travel
    through a passage, or to regulate the number of users of a passage.

    279+,   for a closure operator interconnected with a latch release.

    383,    for a lock or latch adjacent the hinge edge.

    391,    for a vehicle vent window having a friction applying means on its
    pivot to hold the vent in adjusted position.

    503,    for a closure panel modified to accommodate a latch or lock and see
    the search notes thereto for the loci of other latches and locks.


CLS 49/395
TXT Device under subclass 394 including a plurality of position-holders which
    are operable separately or concurrently on the same closure.


CLS 49/396
TXT Device under subclass 381 comprising a means in addition to the closure
    pivot means which acts to relieve the turning moment about the closure
    pivot and in the plane of the closure, e.g., counterweights, tension chains
    and extensions of the closure acting on the hinge side of the closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191+,   for a means to tilt the closure about a horizontally opened axis in
    a vertical direction.

    192+,   for a closure swingable on pivots about a vertical axis, and
    additionally swingable in the plane of the closure about one of the pivots
    to open a lower corner of the closure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 291 for a building
    structure, e.g., panel, with warp correction means.


CLS 49/397
TXT Device under subclass 381 wherein the pivot means or a portion thereof is
    integral with the frame or closure structure.


CLS 49/398
TXT Device under subclass 381 wherein the pivot means is a hinge, the axis of
    which is disposed behind the plane formed by the outside face of the
    closure to avoid any outside projection of the hinge and to hide it from
    view in the closed position of the closure.


CLS 49/399
TXT Device under subclass 381 in which the mounting means includes a leaf-type
    hinge, a leaf of which is mounted on edge surface of the closure, i.e.,
    that portion which lies between the major faces of the closure.


CLS 49/400
TXT Device under subclass 381 wherein the closure or a portion thereof, in its
    closed position, fits within or projects into the closure opening formed by
    surrounding frame members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161+,   for a sliding closure with a swinging enclosed section nested
    within its marginal frame.


CLS 49/401
TXT Device under subclass 400 wherein the closure is provided with a marginal
    flange which overlies the frame of the opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402,    for a closure which overlies the frame members forming the closure
    opening.

    470,    for a threshold and a closure having overlapping angle members.


CLS 49/402
TXT Device under subclass 381 wherein the closure, in its closed position,
    abuts against the exterior lateral faces of the frame members forming the
    opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401,    for a closure which has an overlying marginal flange in addition to
    that portion which fits within the closure opening.


CLS 49/403
TXT Device under subclass 381 comprising mounting means, per se, which mounting
    means includes a journal portion and means for fastening the mounting to an
    end of a louver panel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74.1+,  for a louver having a mounting clip or bracket and interconnected
    for movement with other louvers.


CLS 49/404
TXT Device under the class definition provided with means mounting the closure
    for rectilinear reciprocation, i.e., straight-line motion in opposite
    directions, e.g., sliding while constrained by a guide which acts as a
    bearing surface portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     for a sliding auxiliary closure.

    149+,   for a closure mounted for two or more alternative movements, one of
    which is reciprocation.

    207,    for superimposed closures with independent longitudinal rectilinear
    movement.

    208+,   for a closure whose movement is multidirectional, and in which one
    component of movement is reciprocation.

    316,    for a rectilinearly moving closure having closure guiding supports
    which move from a withdrawn inoperative position to an extended guiding
    position.

    360+,   for an operator for a reciprocating closure.

    374+,   for a closure which reciprocates vertically in and out of a housing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclass 120 for bulkheads and doors of a ship mounted for
    sliding movement.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 330.1+ for a cabinet
    component with horizontal sliding movement.


CLS 49/405
TXT Device under subclass 404 wherein the mounting means includes a pivoted arm.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233,    for a closure mounted on a pivotal link arm and having a
    multidirectional movement in the plane of the closure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 92 for a hanger comprising links
    and levers.


CLS 49/406
TXT Device under subclass 404 provided with an inserted plug, a flap or a
    bridging plate member positioned or movable to be positioned when the
    closure(s) is in its closed position (1) to span the space between a side
    portal frame member and a meeting rail, i.e., the upper rail of a lower
    sash or the lower rail of an upper sash; or (2) to bridge the gap between
    the meeting rails of adjacent sashes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    458,    for meeting rails having portions which interfit with each other.

    472+    and 475.1+, for another seal between meeting rails, particularly
    subclass 483.1 for meeting rails each having mating seal portions and
    subclass 485.1 for a seal between overlapping meeting rails, where a
    seal(s), per se, or a seal(s) and sufficient structure to mount a seal or
    to juxtapose seal components, is defined.


CLS 49/407
TXT Device under subclass 404 provided with a stop means disposed at or near
    the end of a vertical guide mounting the closure for sliding movement, so
    as to limit the movement of the closure to a point spaced from the sill.


CLS 49/408
TXT Device under subclass 404 provided with a device on a means mounting the
    closure for movement, or on the closure itself, to channel or convey fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    476,    for a fluid drain in a closure mounted seal, or for a closure face
    mounted deflector, and see the search notes thereto for the loci of other
    drains, vents and deflectors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclass 213 for vehicle having a
    roof and having an opening therein and a closure for said opening and
    having means to guide or drain water.


CLS 49/409
TXT Device under subclass 404 wherein the closure hangs from an overhead guide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209+,   for a pendant closure with initial or terminal movement transverse
    to a plane of translation.

    231,    for a pendant closure which gravitates on a tilted track.

    372+,   for a pendant closure combined with a housing in which it is stored.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 86.1+ for a hanger for a pendant
    sliding gate, and subclasses 87+ for a hanger or a track for other pendant
    sliding closures.

    104,    Railways, subclass 93 for a suspended railway of the single rail
    type.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 150+ for suspended railway
    rolling stock of the single rail type.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 19+,
    123+, 196+, and 330+ for closures, partitions and panels of the type there
    classified having hangers, travelers and track devices.


CLS 49/410
TXT Device under subclass 409 provided with means engaged by the lower portion
    of the closure to direct that portion along its path of travel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 90 for a guide bracket for the
    lower end of a pendant closure, and subclass 91 for a guide roller.


CLS 49/411
TXT Device under subclass 410 wherein the guide for the lower portion of the
    closure lies within or extends upwardly from the upper surface of the lower
    horizontal component of the frame of the opening.


CLS 49/412
TXT Device under subclass 409 provided with members of angular cross-section
    adjacent the juncture of the guide and the closure, and wherein the flanges
    of each extend over and beyond the other to oppose the passage of dust or
    debris into the closure opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    458,    for overlapping angles at the meeting rails of adjacent closures.


CLS 49/413
TXT Device under subclass 404 wherein the closure is a unitary pane with the
    edge portion thereof serving as a bearing surface for movement along a
    horizontal guide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    440+,   for a sashless closure guided for vertical reciprocation in channel
    guides.


CLS 49/414
TXT Device under subclass 404 wherein the mounting means includes a slide or
    guide, and wherein either the slide or guide is provided with means
    disparate from its inherent resilience for biasing it into either a
    supporting frame or a closure engagement, e.g., to increase friction to
    hold the closure.

    (1)     Note.  A spring guide on one side of a reciprocating closure
    inherently urges a guide on the opposite side into engagement with that
    side of the frame. However, such devices have not been considered as
    distinct biasing means for bearings for this subclass and have been
    classified below, e.g., in subclasses 428+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251,    for a biased slide mount on which a closure is pivotally mounted.

    377,    for a biased cushioning means adjacent a housing opening.

    480.1+, for a closure seal or striker gasket with a distinct biasing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclasses 14+ and 70+ for a closure fastener
    which resiliently or frictionally holds a closure in position.  A double
    acting fastener with distinct biasing means which functions as a bearing
    for a sliding closure is found in this subclass 414 and subclasses indented
    thereunder.


CLS 49/415
TXT Device under subclass 414 wherein the biasing means acts in a direction
    normal to the plane of the sliding movement of the closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    436,    for a transversely acting resilient bearing surface.


CLS 49/416
TXT Device under subclass 415 wherein the biasing means acts on that portion of
    the closure guide which lies to one side of the closure or acts on a stop
    which is intermediate sliding closures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    423,    for a parting strip biased laterally.


CLS 49/417
TXT Device under subclass 414 provided with means to vary or withdraw the force
    of the disparate biasing means which urges the slide or guide into
    engagement with the frame or closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    316+,   for an operator for a sealing, guiding or locking strip.


CLS 49/418
TXT Device under subclass 417 wherein the biasing means is a coil spring, and
    wherein the adjusting means is a screw having the same axis as the coil
    spring.


CLS 49/419
TXT Device under subclass 414 wherein the biasing means is a material other
    than metal, e.g., rubber.


CLS 49/420
TXT Device under subclass 414 wherein the slide or guide surface makes contact
    with a cooperating surface, e.g., utilizes a ball or roller bearing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    417+,   for a ball or roller bearing with an adjustable biaser.

    425+,   for a reciprocating closure guided by a ball or roller bearing.


CLS 49/421
TXT Device under subclass 414 wherein the biased slide is mounted on and moves
    with the closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    437+,   for a diverse or springy bearing mounted on the closure.


CLS 49/422
TXT Device under subclass 414 wherein a single bearing member forms a guiding
    surface for a plurality of closures, and wherein the biasing means engages
    the member to vary the force with which the surface engages the edge
    surfaces of the closures, e.g., spring means adjust the guide to the
    closure to compensate for variations in them or the guide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    434+,   for an integral, diverse or spring, bearing surface for plural
    closures.


CLS 49/423
TXT Device under subclass 414 wherein the biased slide or guide has a means
    thereon which engages the closure and acts to limit its movement in a
    direction normal to the plane in which the closure reciprocates.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    436+,   for a diverse or spring bearing surface which includes a transverse
    restraint.


CLS 49/424
TXT Device under subclass 404 wherein the mounting means includes a closure
    guiding and receiving slot in one side of a walled space, and a plate on
    the closure projecting through the slot and serving to deflect and retard
    movement of a fluid, e.g., air, around the edge of the closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    436+,   for a rib and slot type guide in which the rib or slot edges are a
    diverse or spring bearing surface, particularly subclasses 437+ for a
    closure mounted rib, guided in its reciprocation by a slot in the frame,
    and subclasses 442+ for a fixed rib or plate engaging a slot in a closure.


CLS 49/425
TXT Device under subclass 404 provided with a rolling means interposed between
    the closure and its support to guide the closure in its movement, e.g.,
    revolving bearing component on gear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228+,   for a closure provided with rolling means which gravitates on a
    tilted track.

    409+,   for pendant closure with a ball or roller bearing.

    420,    for a closure provided with a ball or roller having a distinct
    biasing means acting upon the journals thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, appropriate subclasses for bearing and/or bearing
    surfaces, per se.


CLS 49/426
TXT Device under subclass 425 wherein the rolling means is spaced to the side
    of the major plane of the frame which forms the closure opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235,    for a closure which is moved vertically by a relative movement
    between an offset track roller and the closure to retard horizontal travel.


CLS 49/427
TXT Device under subclass 425 wherein rolling means is carried by a structure
    edgewise of the side of the means defining a passage.


CLS 49/428
TXT Device under subclass 404 wherein the mounting means includes a slide or
    guide provided with a resilient or flexible bearing portion or wherein the
    bearing surface of the slide or guide is of a material dissimilar to the
    closure or frame; e.g., metal versus wood.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    414+,   for a reciprocating closure having a distinct biasing means for a
    diverse or spring bearing surface.

    475.1+, for a seal for a closure, and see the notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 204.591+ for a
    spring or diverse mounting element fastening a pane in a peripheral frame,
    e.g., sash.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclasses 14+ and 70+ for a closure fastener
    which resiliently or frictionally holds a closure in position but does not
    function as a bearing for a sliding closure.


CLS 49/429
TXT Device under subclass 428 wherein the slide or guide engages or
    accommodates counter-balance hardware.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    445+,   for a sliding closure having a counterbalance.


CLS 49/430
TXT Device under subclass 429 wherein a guide is mounted outwardly of the side
    jamb of the frame and between the jamb and closure, and wherein the
    counterbalance spring or weight is received between the guide and jamb.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    447+,   for a counterbalance weight received within a recess behind a
    guide, i.e., within a hollow jamb.


CLS 49/431
TXT Device under subclass 428 wherein the slide or guide comprises two or more
    separate and mating parts and wherein one of the parts is mounted on the
    frame and another on the closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    483,    for a closure seal with interengaging sections on adjacent members.


CLS 49/432
TXT Device under subclass 431 wherein the bearing part of the frame includes a
    parting bead intermediate adjacent closures, and wherein said parting bead
    is engaged by bearing parts on the closures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    434,    for an integrally formed parting strip having portions engaged by
    side by side closures.


CLS 49/433
TXT Device under subclass 431 wherein each of the mating parts resemble, in
    cross-section, a plurality of fingers which interfit with a plurality of
    fingers of the other part to provide a torturous course guide.


CLS 49/434
TXT Device under subclass 428 wherein an integrally formed bearing portion is
    engaged by side by side closures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    422,    for a biaser which permits self- adjustment of a single unitary
    guide for plural closures.


CLS 49/435
TXT Device under subclass 434 wherein the bearing portion includes a stop or
    bead separating two closures and having integral flanges extending on
    opposite sides of the stop or bead and wherein the stop or bead is mounted
    between the closures so that the flanges form the slide path of the
    closures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    432,    for a parting strip having integral, opposite wings which
    inter-engages with a diverse or spring bearing surface on a closure.


CLS 49/436
TXT Device under subclass 428 wherein a hearing surface portion of a slide or
    guide acts to limit movement of a closure in a direction normal to the
    plane in which it reciprocates.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    415,    for a biaser transversely applied to a bearing surface.


CLS 49/437
TXT Device under subclass 436 wherein the bearing surface portion is carried by
    and moves with the closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    421,    for a bearing portion having a distinct biaser and carried by a
    closure.

    431,    for a bearing portion mounted on a closure, interengaged with a
    bearing portion mounted on a frame part.


CLS 49/438
TXT Device under subclass 437 wherein the bearing surface portion is mounted on
    the edge surface of the closure, i.e., on that portion of the closure which
    lies between and at an angle to the major faces of the closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    488,    for a seal mounted on a closure edge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 624+ for a panel
    edge enclosed by a channel.


CLS 49/439
TXT Device under subclass 438 wherein the bearing surface portion encompasses
    the edge surface of the closure and extends parallel to the major surfaces
    toward the center thereof.


CLS 49/440
TXT Device under subclass 436 wherein the bearing surface portion is U-shaped
    in cross section and receives the closure between the legs thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    438+,   for a channel shaped bearing surface mounted on an edge of a
    closure.


CLS 49/441
TXT Device under subclass 440 wherein the sides or free ends of the channel
    incline or bend towards the closure.


CLS 49/442
TXT Device under subclass 436 wherein the bearing surface portion includes a
    projecting rib or protuberance which slidingly interfits with an elongated
    opening running the length of the closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    421,    for a closure mounted baffle plate guided in a slot in a wall of a
    chamber.

    440+,   for a sashless closure having its edge guided in a channel bearing.


CLS 49/443
TXT Device under subclass 442 wherein the slot lies in one of the major
    surfaces of the closure.


CLS 49/444
TXT Device under subclass 442 wherein the bearing surface portion includes a
    side portion which extends along the plane formed by the edge surface of
    the closure and guides said surface.


CLS 49/445
TXT Device under subclass 404 provided with means acting against the force of
    gravity for balancing the reciprocating closure during movement or in a
    selected stop position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5+,     for a counterweighted closure wherein a thermally responsive device
    disturbs or offsets the balance of the closure and counterweight.

    98+,    for counterbalancing interconnected closures with additional means
    to permit independent movement.

    119+,   for counterbalancing interconnected closures.

    150+,   for a closure with optional sliding and swinging movements with a
    counterbalance for both movements.

    200,    for a counterbalanced closure which has a means to move it from a
    vertical to a withdrawn overhead horizontal position.

    206,    for a counterbalanced closure which is mounted on a pivotal link
    arm to move from a vertical to a withdrawn horizontal overhead position.

    386,    for a swinging closure with biasing means.

    414+,   for a biased bearing surface which holds the closure against the
    force of gravity.

    429+,   for a sliding closure with a diverse or spring bearing surface
    which cooperates with counterbalance hardware.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 193+ for counterbalance
    hardware, or a counterbalance cooperating between a frame and a single sash
    in which there is no recitation of means for mounting the sash for movement.


CLS 49/446
TXT Device under subclass 445 wherein the closure is joined to a counterbalance
    member which slides in a guideway in a frame, the connection between the
    closure and member being such that the closure may readily be disjoined
    from the member for removal from the frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150,    for a counterbalance connected to a closure mount which permits
    optional movements of the closure and removal.

    454,    for a detachable and displaceable slide mount which permits closure
    removal.


CLS 49/447
TXT Device under subclass 445 wherein the counterbalance includes a weight
    enclosed by and operable within a chamber, and wherein a closure guiding
    surface forms one of the walls of the chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    424,    for a guide concealed weight pocket having a slot opening in which
    a closure carried baffle plate is guided.


CLS 49/448
TXT Device under subclass 447 wherein the slide or guide on a portion thereof
    is movably or removably mounted to reveal or permit access to an opening to
    said chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    453+,   for a guideway which is movable or removable to permit removal of
    the closure.


CLS 49/449
TXT Device under subclass 404 provided with securing means for retaining the
    closure against opening or closing movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209,    for a sliding closure which is moved transversely to the sliding
    movement of the closure to tightly engage a side stop.

    277,    for a closure having a hasp type fastener, and a starter lever
    acting on the hasp to effect initial opening or final closing of the
    closure.

    322,    for a means to secure the closure against movement, operable upon
    breakage of the closure supporting means.

    503,    for a closure panel modified to accommodate a lock or latch and see
    the search notes thereto for the loci of other locks and latches.


CLS 49/450
TXT Device under subclass 449 wherein the securing means includes a defined
    feature to retain the closure in selected open positions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    316+,   for a closure having a movably mounted locking strip and an
    operator for moving the strip.


CLS 49/451
TXT Device under subclass 450 wherein the feature involves means which bears or
    rubs against a fixed surface with sufficient force to prevent movement of
    the closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    414+,   for a biased guide or slide surface which frictionally retains the
    closure in various positions of adjustment.

    421,    for a reciprocating closure having a baffle plate guided in an
    opening provided with friction gripping means.

    428+,   for a reciprocating closure in which the closure or its mounting
    means is provided with a spring bearing surface which frictionally detains
    the closure.


CLS 49/452
TXT Device under subclass 404 provided with means for varying the relative
    position of the guide components or the guide to the frame to compensate
    for variations between the closure and frame or the conform itself to the
    dimensions of the closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    316+,   for a manipulatable mechanical means to move a guide or seal in or
    out of guiding or sealing position.

    417+,   for means to adjust or retract means biasing a guide or slide for a
    closure.

    482.1,  for an adjustable seal.

    505,    for an adjustable frame.


CLS 49/453
TXT Device under subclass 404 wherein the mounting means includes a closure
    guiding structure and wherein the structure is modified to permit removal
    of the closure from the mounting means, e.g., portal frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194+,   for a closure having a movable or removable guide to permit one of
    a plurality of optional movements of a closure.

    414+,   for a biased bearing surface in which the biasing means is
    yieldable for closure removal.

    428+,   for a spring bearing surface which is deflected to permit closure
    removal.


CLS 49/454
TXT Device under subclass 453 wherein the closure is connected to a member
    which slides in a guideway in a portal frame, and wherein the connection
    between the closure and member is such that the closure may readily be
    disjoined from the member, or the member moved relative to the closure to
    thereby permit the closure alone or the closure and member to be removed
    from the frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172+,   for a closure having a frame guided strip, laterally retractable to
    permit pivoting of the closure.

    176+,   for a stile mounted closure, reciprocable with the stiles and
    relatively movable thereto to permit pivoting of the closure.

    446,    for a common slide mount for a counterbalance and a removal closure.


CLS 49/455
TXT Device under subclass 453 wherein the closure guiding structure includes a
    stationary guiding surface to confine the closure during its reciprocation,
    and wherein the surface is mounted for repetitive movement without
    disassembly to permit removal of the closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194+,   for a fixed guide which is movably mounted to permit a closure to
    have a movement in addition to reciprocation.

    316+,   for a guiding surface moved by an operator.

    414+,   for a biased guiding surface, movable against the biasing force to
    permit removal of the closure.

    428+,   for a spring guiding surface which is deflectable to permit removal
    of the closure.


CLS 49/456
TXT Device under subclass 453 wherein the closure guiding structure includes a
    stationary guideway to confine the closure during its reciprocation and
    wherein the guideway is mounted for ready disjointure or removal from its
    support to permit removal of the closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194,    for a fixed guide which is removable to permit a closure to have a
    movement in addition to reciprocation.

    454,    for a slide movable with a closure in its reciprocation and
    removable from the closure to permit removal of the closure from the frame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 220 for a window-bead fastener,
    per se.


CLS 49/457
TXT Device under subclass 456 comprising mating portions on or carried by the
    removable guideway and the frame which interjoin to retain the guideway in
    position.


CLS 49/458
TXT Device under subclass 404 including adjacent reciprocating closures each
    having a peripheral frame member which interfits with the other to seal the
    juncture therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    367,    for overlapping meeting edges between bipartite center-opening
    closure sections.

    485.1,  for a distinct closure seal intermediate meeting rails.


CLS 49/459
TXT Device under subclass 404 wherein the mounting means includes a guide or a
    portion thereof formed by extruding, forging, rolling or casting metal or
    plastics.


CLS 49/460
TXT Device under the class definition provided with means (1) to facilitate
    manual movement of the closure or (2) to prevent damage to the closure or
    an adjacent object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    364,    for an impact receiver or a closure which effect a disengagement of
    a latch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 402 for a kickplate or pushplate
    or a push and pull bar, per se, subclasses 82+ for a closure bumper or
    buffer and subclass 110 for a handle for a closure. Nominal recitation of a
    closure with the above hardware will be found in Class 16.


CLS 49/461
TXT Device under subclass 460 provided with means on the closure adapted to be
    engaged by a pole or rod, whereby a push or pull on the pole imparts
    movement to the closure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling: Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 19.1+ for a
    pole-like device, per se, for manipulating an object at a distance.


CLS 49/462
TXT Device under subclass 460 wherein the means to prevent damage protects an
    edge portion of the closure.


CLS 49/463
TXT Device under the class definition wherein the closure is mounted so as to
    be readily physically disassociated from its supporting portal forming
    structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for a removable substitute safety guard adjustable to various size
    closure openings.

    57,     for a removable protective grille or substitute safety guard.

    62,     for an auxiliary closure which is removably mounted on a primary
    closure.

    380,    for a movable closure mounted on a removable supporting frame.

    389,    for a swinging closure which is removable in an inclined position.

    453,    for a reciprocating closure in which the slide or guide permits
    removal of the closure, and see the search notes thereto for the loci of
    other removable reciprocating closures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses, and
    especially subclass 476 for a peripheral frame with a releasable section to
    enable removal of a damaged panel and subclasses 764+ for a rigid frame
    member with a separable fastener for a panel, usually a pane.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 215+
    for a removable plural strip, slat or panel type closure.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclass 148 for removable side
    panels which converts a vehicle body from an open to a closed type; and
    subclass 218 for a vehicle having a roof and having an opening therein and
    closure for said opening wherein the closure may be removed from the roof.


CLS 49/464
TXT Device under subclass 463 wherein the closure comprises a plurality of
    readily disassociated sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198,    for a closure comprising a plurality of independent sections
    movable from a vertical closing position to a withdrawn horizontal overhead
    position.

    207,    for superimposed closures with independent longitudinal movement.

    366+,   for removable bipartite, center opening closures.


CLS 49/465
TXT Device under subclass 463 wherein the means to permit removal of the
    closure is carried by it.


CLS 49/466
TXT Device under subclass 463 wherein the means to permit removal of the
    closure includes a strip mounted for movement and adapted to either span
    the space between the closure and frame or force the closure into a holding
    engagement with its frame, e.g., movable jamb, brace bar.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    316+,   for an operator for a sealing or locking strip.


CLS 49/467
TXT Device under the class definition comprising a raised device adapted to be
    mounted on a floor to underlie a door when it is in a closed position,
    commonly called a threshold.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclass 199 for a scuff plate for
    the sill of an automobile door opening.


CLS 49/468
TXT Device under subclass 467 provided with means to alter the relative
    position of the threshold components or the threshold to a floor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    505,    for an adjustable frame.


CLS 49/469
TXT Device under subclass 467 provided with a disparate means joined to the and
    acting at the juncture of the threshold and the door to oppose the passage
    of fluid therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304+,   for a closure actuated sealing strip mounted on a sill.

    475.1,  for a closure seal or striker gasket and see the search notes
    thereto for loci of other seals.


CLS 49/470
TXT Device under subclass 469 in which the disparate means is mounted on the
    door.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305,    for a closure carried sealing strip actuated by closure movement
    which engages a movable strip mounted on a sill.

    316+,   for a movably mounted threshold seal carried by a closure, and
    having an operator to move the seal.


CLS 49/471
TXT Device under subclass 467 provided with means on the threshold to channel
    or convey moisture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    476.1,  for a closure seal with a fluid drain or a closure face mounted
    deflector, and see the search notes thereto for the loci of other drains
    and vents.


CLS 49/472
TXT Device under the class definition comprising a strip mounted on the edge of
    the closure and acting to (1) span the space between the closure and a
    portal frame for sealing the juncture between the closure and frame, (2)
    limit the movement of the closure, and (3) reinforce the closure panel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    316+,   for an operator for a sealing, locking or guiding strip.

    466,    for a displaceable sealing or binding strip which releases a
    closure for removal.

    475.1,  for another closure seal or striker gasket.


CLS 49/473
TXT Device under subclass 472 comprising a sealing member of different material
    and in addition to and acting at the same opening, as the combined sealing,
    stopping and stiffening strip.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    368,    for bipartite, center opening closures having a disparate seal
    between their overlapping meeting edges.


CLS 49/474
TXT Device under subclass 472 wherein the sealing, stopping and stiffening
    strip is usually attached to a vehicle closure and has (1) a portion which
    projects outwardly therefrom to produce a swirling of air moving relatively
    thereto or (2) a cavity adjacent the strip and the portal to entrap or
    detain moisture or dirt directed towards the portal opening, and discharge
    it axially of the strip, as by gravity.


CLS 49/475.1
TXT CLOSURE SEAL; E.G., STRIKER GASKET OR WEATHERSTRIP:

    Device under the class definition comprising means acting at the juncture
    of a closure and an adjacent member; e.g., portal frame or another closure,
    to oppose or block the passage of fluid therebetween, hereinafter termed a
    "seal" even though some fluid flow may occur.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91.1,   for a weather seal between louver-type closures.

    303+,   for a seal shifted into sealing position by movement of the
    closure.


    316+,   for an operator which shifts a movably mounted seal into a sealing
    position.

    355,    for a weather seal or flap for a through wall operator.

    383,    for a seal for the hinge edge of a swinging closure.

    414+,   for a bearing surface for a reciprocating closure having a distinct
    biasing means.

    428+,   for a device or spring bearing surface which functions as a
    weatherstrip for a reciprocating closure.

    466,    for a displaceable sealing strip which permits closure removal.

    469,    for a weatherstrip combined with a threshold.

    470,    for a closure carried seal which engages a threshold.

    472,    for a combined weatherstrip, stop, and stiffener.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 242 for a
    chamber seal for a drying oven.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 140+ for a burial
    vault with a seal between the vault and closure; subclasses 393+ for a
    yieldable preformed separator between adjacent building elements; and
    subclasses 716.1+ for attached type channel or trim strip or edging.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 275 for heating coils combined with seals
    for a refrigerated unit.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclass 75 for bank
    protection closures with seals.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 40+
    for a filler for a small opening left due to improper fit of a closure of
    that class in an opening.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 200+ for a packing between a receptacle and
    closure.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, cross-reference art collection 921 for a closure or weather strip
    seal.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclass 93 for a seal between the
    windshield and body of a vehicle; subclass 146.2 for a seal involved in the
    mounting of a window within a door for the body of a vehicle; subclass
    146.9 for a seal between a plurality of doors upon a vehicle body or
    between a door and the body of a vehicle; and subclass 146.16 for a seal
    established through a cooperative combination of a movable window and a
    vehicle body.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 296 for a wiper or seal for
    the movable component of a cabinet.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    especially 122 and 358 for a strip of indeterminate length which may be
    usable or defined as a weatherstrip.


CLS 49/476.1
TXT With fluid drain, or closure face mounted deflector; e.g., sill seal:

    Seal under subclass 475.1 provided with (1) means on the seal to direct or
    convey moisture, or (2) means mounted on the major face of the closure to
    divert moisture that is running down the closure from the seal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    408,    for a drain in the guide or sash of a sliding closure.

    471,    for a threshold with a drain or vent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 97 for an externally
    projecting liquid deflector; subclass 209 for a drain or vent on the reveal
    of a portal; and subclasses 302.1+ for an interior passage to ambient.

    296,    Land Vehicles: Bodies and Tops, subclass 146.2 for a seal involved
    in the mounting of a window within a door for the body of a vehicle;
    subclass 146.9 for a seal between a plurality of doors upon a vehicle body
    or between a door and the body of a vehicle; subclass 146.16 for a seal
    established through a cooperative combination of a movable window and a
    vehicle body; and subclass 154 for a rain deflector mounted on a vehicle
    vent window which depends on vehicle movement for its effective
    functioning, or in which rain is deflected from the vehicle interior when
    the window is open.


CLS 49/477.1
TXT Inflatable or fluid pressure responsive:

    Seal under subclass 475.1 wherein (1) the seal comprises a closed chamber
    having a deformable wall and is further provided with means to introduce
    fluid into said chamber to expand and move said wall into sealing
    engagement, or (2) the seal is responsive to internal or external fluid
    pressure to expand or contract a portion thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    496.1,  for seal cantilevered from an underlying base flange.

    498.1,  for a tubular seal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 2.11+ for
    inflatable buildings.

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 232 for inflatable gaskets for closures of
    the class.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclass 646 for a static contact seal for other than an internal
    combustion engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable having a particular
    cross-section that is hollow, fluid-filled or has an inflatable chamber.


CLS 49/478.1
TXT Magnetic:

    Seal under subclass 475.1 having a magnetic element, usually to hold it in
    position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclass 629 for a static contact seal for other than an internal
    combustion engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable that uses magnetism.


CLS 49/479.1
TXT With corner or corner forming portions; i.e., corner seal:

    Seal under subclass 475.1 comprising the construction of the seal adjacent
    the meeting point; i.e., corner, of angularly related edge surfaces of a
    frame or closure.


CLS 49/480.1
TXT With distinct biasing means:

    Seal under subclass 475.1 provided with distinct means apart from the
    inherent resilience of the seal for urging it into a sealing engagement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    414+,   for a distinct biasing means for the bearing surface of a
    reciprocating closure.


CLS 49/482.1
TXT With feature for  segmenting, replacing, adjusting or severing:

    Seal under subclass 475.1 including (1) a seal which is divided into
    sections along its length, or (2) means to permit replacement of a section
    of the original seal or (3) being shiftably mounted to fit various size
    openings or to vary its position relative to the closure edge, or (4) means
    to permit a portion of the seal to be disjoined from the seal proper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    452,    for an adjustable guide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclass 630 for a static contact seal for other than an internal
    combustion engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable having an installation,
    removal, assembly, disassembly, or repair feature.


CLS 49/483.1
TXT Having complementary engaging portions on closure or closure and portal
    frame:

    Seal under subclass 475.1 comprising at least two mating parts and wherein
    one of the parts is respectively mounted on a closure and the other is on
    an adjacent member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304+,   for interengaging seals on the closure and sill, in which movement
    of the closure actuates a seal.

    431+,   for a bearing surface of interengaging sections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 641+ for a static contact seal for other than an
    internal combustion engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable including a groove
    structure on the seal or part for associated mounting or retaining means.


CLS 49/484.1
TXT Plural distinct seals:

    Seal under subclass 475.1 provided with at least two independent and
    separate seals, spaced along the juncture of the closure and an adjacent
    member, to provide a series of fluid opposing obstructions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    495.1,  for a single seal having two sealing portions.


CLS 49/489.1
TXT Anchored in channel or slot in closure or portal frame:

    Seal under subclass 475.1 which is fastened in a groove in the closure or
    in an adjacent member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    490.1,  for a U-shaped channel or clamp carried by the seal for mounting
    the seal on the frame or closure.

    493.1,  for a channel-shaped seal containing a holder or molding which is
    secured to the closure or frame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclass 642 for a static contact seal for other than an internal
    combustion engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable including a channel shaped
    groove structure on the seal or part for associated mounting or retaining
    means.


CLS 49/490.1
TXT U-shaped member or portion mounts seal:

    Seal under subclass 475.1 which is provided with a U-shaped retaining
    member or portion and wherein a flange or plate, on the closure or adjacent
    member, is frictionally gripped by the legs of the U-shaped member or
    portion in a groove.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 289+ for combined
    fasteners, per se.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclass 642 for a static contact seal for other than an internal
    combustion engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable including a channel-shaped
    groove structure on the seal or part for associated mounting or retaining
    means.


CLS 49/492.1
TXT Held by snap fastener:

    Seal under subclass 475.1 that is provided with a means to hold it in
    position, comprising a resilient catch which is deformed or deflected when
    fitted into an aperture in an adjacent member or closure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 289+ for combined
    fasteners, per se.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 716.1+ for an
    attached channel or trim strip.


CLS 49/493.1
TXT With holder; e.g., securing sheath:

    Seal under subclass 475.1 provided with means separate and distinct from
    the sealing member for anchoring or retaining the seal on the closure or
    frame.


      (1)   Note.  Included in this subclass is a protective casing which
    receives a penetrating anchor that mounts the seal to a closure, frame,
    molding, trim strip, or other supporting structure but not an attaching
    flange integral with and extending from a sealing portion.


CLS 49/495.1
TXT Plural sealing contact points:

    Seal under subclass 475.1 comprising two or more spaced apart sealing
    portions which contact an opposed member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    484.1,  for a plurality of separate seals.


CLS 49/496.1
TXT Spaced or superposed flange cantilevered from edge of base portion; e.g.,
    leaf-spring type:

    Seal under subclass 475.1 including a base plate (or strip) and a sealing
    plate (or strip) wherein the plates are joined along corresponding edges,
    so that a free edge of the sealing plate is adapted to sealingly engage an
    opposed surface.


CLS 49/498.1
TXT Tubular or tubular portion:

    Seal under subclass 475.1 wherein the seal or gasket includes a portion
    having the form of a hollow enclosed conduit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 645+ for a static contact seal for other than an
    internal combustion engine, or a pipe, conduit or cable having a particular
    hollow or filled chamber cross-section.


CLS 49/499.1
TXT Bulged sealing surface intermediate securing ends:

    Seal under subclass 475.1 including a protuberance or outwardly bent
    sealing surface intermediate the portions that attach to an adjacent member
    or to a closure.


CLS 49/500.1
TXT Windlace-type:

    Seal under subclass 475.1 comprising means exposed to view which extends
    across the interstice between the closure and an adjacent member and
    includes an ornamental feature which present a pleasing appearance.

    (1)     Note.  This type is commonly used to seal the crevice between an
    automobile door and body with the ornamental portion visible from the
    interior of the vehicle body.


CLS 49/501
TXT Device under the class definition comprising a closure panel, per se,
    combined with a feature particularly adapting the panel for use as a
    closure, e.g., a lock, a recess for the reception of a hinge, a
    counterbalance, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 613+ for a
    composite panel having a disparate edging, and subclass 630 for a panel
    with integral reinforcement.


CLS 49/502
TXT Device under subclass 501 wherein the feature includes an adjunct, or
    supporting means therefore, for use with a window which is adapted for
    movement relative to the panel, e.g., a window regulator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166+,   for an automobile type swinging door with a sliding window mounted
    thereon.

    374+,   for a window which reciprocates in and out of an automobile door
    housing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclass 146.2 for the combination
    of a window and door with a correlated feature or accessory of a vehicle
    body.


CLS 49/503
TXT Device under subclass 501 wherein the feature is a construction to receive
    means for securing the closure against opening or closing movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for a thermal sensitive closure latch release.

    11,     for a float or vane controlled latch release.

    35,     for a key or check controlled closure.

    90.1,   for a position holder for interconnected louver type closure.

    159+,   for a latch for the sliding movement in a sliding and swinging
    closure.

    279+,   for an operator interrelated with a closure latch release.

    316+,   for a movably mounted locking strip having an operator therefor.

    364,    for a bump actuated latch release.

    379,    for a latch release, self-returning closure.

    394+,   for a latch or lock for a closure mounted for swing movement.

    449+,   for a latch or lock for a closure mounted for sliding movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclasses 77+ for a closure lock, per se, or in which only
    the details of closure necessary to mount the lock are recited.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, appropriate subclasses, for a closure fastener,
    per se, or in which only the details of the closure necessary to mount the
    fastener are recited.


CLS 49/504
TXT Device under the class definition comprising a member insertable in or
    defining an opening forming a passageway, combined with means particularly
    adapted for cooperation with opening or closing movement of a closure,
    e.g., a stop.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    381+,   for a frame combined with means for mounting a closure for swinging
    movement.

    404+,   for a frame combined with means mounting a closure for
    reciprocating movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 204.1+ for a
    building structure with a feature for a portal, and subclasses 656.2+ for a
    cornered or peripheral border in an openwork structure.


CLS 49/505
TXT Device under subclass 504 wherein the member cooperates to alter the
    relative position of the frame member components or the frame member to a
    wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    452,    for a means to adjust the position of a guide member.

    468,    for an adjustable threshold.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 217 for a retaining
    feature which permits a size adjustment between a frame and a reveal.


CLS 49/506
TXT Processes of using, making or assembling a device under the class
    definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, appropriate subclass, for a process not specialized
    to the assembly of a closure on a portal frame.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 741.1+ for a
    process specialized to the manufacture, erection or assembly of a building
    structure at the job site.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 329+ for a process of assembly or
    manufacture of an article having at least one wood component, not peculiar
    to the assembly of a closure on a portal frame.


CLS 49/507
TXT Device under the class definition not classifiable in any prior subclass.


CLS 51/
TTL ABRASIVE TOOL MAKING PROCESS, MATERIAL, OR COMPOSITION

CLS 51/
TXT
    This is the class of:

    I.      Making an abrading tool, expressed as a process, material, or
    composition; which tool is comprised of randomly situated sharp edges of a
    mass of natural or manmade (synthetic) mineral crystals; or

    II.     A material or composition designed for an abrading purpose if not
    provided for elsewhere. In the definitions of this class, the term
    ``material" or ``composition" is intended to include an abrasive tool
    distinguished solely by the abrasive material or composition incorporated
    therein.

    (1)     Note.  In general, a chemical compound which may be used as an
    abradant, or a method of preparing such a compound, is classified elsewhere
    on the basis of the compound or its method of preparation.

            Patents having all claims limited to an abrasive material which is
    a chemical compound are included within this group of subclasses (Class
    51), together with patents directed to abrasive materials comprising
    compositions having a plurality of ingredients and their methods of
    preparation.  Abrasive compositions of matter having uses other than as an
    abrasive are here included if the use as an abradant is disclosed, and no
    other classification is specifically provided.

            An ``abrasive" material expressed as a chemical compound is
    included within this class (Class 51).  An ``abrasive" material comprised
    of a composition of a plurality of ingredients or a method of preparation
    of such a composition is included herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclass 643 for a match scratcher
    composition or structure.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 35+ for a method of compacting material not
    elsewhere provided for.

    106,    Compositions: Coating or Plastic, for a composition containing
    material intended to impart a coating to work, generally.

    148,    Metal Treatment, for a composition to remove material from metal by
    combined detergent and abrading action, and for a composition containing
    material intended to impart a coating to metallic work.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 291 for a
    comminuting member distinguished by the composition thereof.

    252,    Compositions, for a composition to remove material by combined
    detergent and abrading action, generally; for a composition including
    elements having an absorbent function; or for an ``abrasive" composition
    having uses other than as an abrasive if no other classification is
    specifically provided.  A composition having plural functions including
    ``abrading" is generally included in Class 51.

            A list of superiority of some composition classes appears in the
    main class definition of Class 252, (5) Note.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for a chemical compound under that
    class definition which may be used as an abradant.  See (1) Note.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article  Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    for a process of making an article which may be abrasive in nature
    involving molding within that class definition.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, for a chemical compound under
    that class definition which may be used as an abradant.  See (1) Note.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, for a chemical compound under
    that class definition which may be used as an abradant.  See (1) Note.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 49+
    for a dentifrice composition which may contain an abrasive; however, an
    abrasive composition for drilling teeth is classified in this class (51).

    427,    Coating Processes, for a coating process, generally.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 687 for metallic
    stock having a rough surface and cross-reference art collection 932 for
    such stock having an abrasive feature.

    451,    Abrading, for a process of or apparatus for using a tool made by
    the composition or method of Class 51.

    508,    Solid Anti-Friction Devices, Materials Therefor, Lubricant or
    Separant Compositions for Moving Solid Surfaces, and Miscellaneous Mineral
    oil Compositions, for compositions with components having a lubricating
    function.

    520-528,        Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, particularly Class
    523, subclasses 149+ for a composition containing a synthetic resin having
    utility as a friction element or to a process of preparation thereof.


CLS 51/293
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:
    Miscellaneous abrasive tool making process, material, or composition under
    the class definition.


CLS 51/294
TXT BAG OR FILLED CLOTH:
    Subject matter under the class definition including (a) a process of making
    an abrasive tool comprising a flexible wall container which flexible wall
    may be porous or (b) an abrasive tool of this type distinguished solely by
    the abrasive composition.

    (1)     Note.  An abrasive material or composition to be used inside a bag
    are not included in this subclass, but rather, will be found in subclasses
    295 through 309, and 293.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, subclass 526 for a flexible abrasive tool.


CLS 51/295
TXT IMPREGNATING OR COATING AN ABRASIVE TOOL:

    Subject matter under the class definition  including  impregnating or
    coating a tool already embodying an abrasive and other material, or a
    composition for such use, wherein the coating or impregnating composition
    may contain additional abrasive material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, for a process of coating in general.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 568 for metallic
    stock having a consolidated particulate phase impregnated with a continuous
    phase of a different metal.


CLS 51/296
TXT PORE FORMING:
    Subject matter under the class definition including (a) a process or tool
    defined thereby including  forming pores or voids in the finished article
    or (b) an abrading tool composition including one or more materials which
    will form pores or voids therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, particularly subclasses 122,
    601+, and 672+ for a pore forming composition.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 10+ for a process of incorporating gas into
    mortar.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 550 for
    composite metallic stock comprising metal particles, at least one component
    of which has pores; subclass 566 for composite metallic stock having a
    component in which there are interconnected, unfilled pores; and subclass
    613 for nonparticulate metallic material which is, at least in part, porous.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, subclasses 39 and 80+ for a pore forming
    composition.

    520-528, Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, particularly Class 521,
    subclasses 50+ for a process of forming pores in synthetic resin or natural
    rubber.


CLS 51/297
TXT LAMINATING:
    Subject matter under the class definition including a laminating step,
    material, or compositions for use therein.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this classification, mere coating of an
    abrasive on a binder or on a backing member is not considered to be
    laminating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, the
    generic home for a laminating process or apparatus for making an article
    other than an abrading tool.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, for a plural layer stock
    material product in the form of a web or sheet, see especially subclass
    411.1 for a nonstructural laminate in which the composition of the layers
    is specified.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 533+ for a laminated, flexible-member abrading
    tool, per se; and 544 for a laminated cylindrical, rigid abrading tool.


CLS 51/298
TXT WITH SYNTHETIC RESIN:
    Subject matter under the class definition including (a) a process involving
    the use of a synthetic resin or (b) an abrading material or composition
    including such synthetic resin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, for synthetic resins or
    natural rubbers, and composition thereof.

    (1)     Note.  For the purposes of this classification, the term
    ``synthetic resin" has been interpreted as defined in Class 520.


CLS 51/299
TXT WITH RUBBER OR REACTION PRODUCT THEREOF:
    Subject matter under the class definition including (a) a process involving
    the use of rubber or a reaction product thereof or (b) an abrading material
    or composition including rubber or a reaction product thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 424+ for an
    erasing implement having an erasive body of rubber, unmixed with
    crystalline particles which have sharp cutting edges; and see (1) Note in
    that subclass for the distinction between the erasers in Class 15 and those
    in Classes 51 and 451.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 1+ for a rubber or
    rubber composition in general.


CLS 51/300
TXT WITH NATURAL RESIN OR REACTION PRODUCT THEREOF:
    Subject matter under the class definition including (a) a process involving
    the use of one or more natural resins or a reaction product thereof or (b)
    an abrading material or composition including one or more natural resins or
    a reaction product thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives; Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclasses 200+ for a natural resin
    in general or a reaction product thereof.


CLS 51/301
TXT WITH PROTEIN OR REACTION PRODUCT THEREOF:
    Subject matter under the class definition including (a) a process involving
    the use of protein material or reaction product thereof or (b) an abrading
    material or composition including protein material or reaction product
    thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives; Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclasses 350+ for a protein or
    reaction product thereof in general.


CLS 51/302
TXT WITH CARBOHYDRATE OR REACTION PRODUCT THEREOF:
    Subject matter under the class definition including (a) a process involving
    the use of carbohydrate material or reaction product thereof or (b) an
    abrading material or composition including carbohydrate material or
    reaction product thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    536,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 1.11+ for a carbohydrate or
    derivative thereof in general.


CLS 51/303
TXT Cellulose or derivative thereof:
    Subject matter under subclass 302 including (a) a process involving the use
    of cellulose or a derivative thereof or (b) a material or composition
    including cellulose or a derivative thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    536,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 30+ and 56+ for a cellulose or
    derivative thereof in general.


CLS 51/304
TXT WITH FATS, FATTY OILS OR FATTY OIL ACIDS AND SALTS THEREOF:
    Subject matter under the class definition including (a) a process involving
    the use of fats, fatty oils or fatty oil acids and salts thereof or (b) a
    material or composition including fats, fatty oils or fatty oil acids and
    salts thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, particularly subclass 398 for fats
    or fatty oils in general.


CLS 51/305
TXT WITH ESTER-TYPE WAX, BITUMINOUS MATERIAL, OR TARRY RESIDUE:
    Subject matter under the class definition including (a) a process involving
    the use of an ester type wax, bituminous material or tarry residue or (b)
    an abrading material or composition containing an ester-type wax,
    bituminous material, or tarry residue.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 4+ and 22+ for
    asphalt, tar, or pitch, per se, or a mixture thereof with another mineral
    oil.


CLS 51/306
TXT WITH HYDROCARBON:
    Subject matter under the class definition including (a) a process involving
    the use of a hydrocarbon or (b) a material or composition including a
    hydrocarbon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, for a hydrocarbon, per se, or a
    process of making a hydrocarbon.


CLS 51/307
TXT WITH INORGANIC MATERIAL:
    Subject matter under the class definition including (a) a process involving
    the use of inorganic material or (b) a material or composition including
    inorganic material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subject matter under subclass 307
    in which the inorganic material comprises clay, silica, or silicate.


CLS 51/308
TXT Clay, silica, or silicate:
    Subject matter under subclass 307 in which the inorganic material comprises
    clay, silica, or a silicate.


CLS 51/309
TXT Metal or metal oxide:
    Subject matter under subclass 307 in which the inorganic material comprises
    a metal or metal oxide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 4.51+ for shredding metal or metal wool
    article making.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, for a method involving use of a
    sintering powder comprising a metal and a nonmetal in the final product,
    especially subclasses 10+.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, for an inorganic metal compound
    (e.g., comprised of a carbide and a nonmetal element (e.g., diamond, per
    se)) or a process for preparation of an inorganic metal compound involving
    a chemical reaction.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 564 and 565
    for metallic stock material having a particulate metal component which
    contains nonmetal particles; subclass 605 for steel wool, per se; and
    subclass 610 for metallic stock material having a composition gradient.


CLS 52/
TTL STATIC STRUCTURES (E.G.,  BUILDINGS)

CLS 52/
TXT I.      CLASS DEFINITION

    II.     GLOSSARY

    III.    MISCELLANEOUS MAIN CLASS NOTES

    IV.     INDEX TO SEARCH NOTES AND SEARCH CLASSES

    I.      CLASS DEFINITION

    This is the residual class for static structures.  It includes on site
    erected structures generally identified by terms such as:  civil
    engineering, public works, shelter, housing, buildings or masts and other
    related components used in such structures, e.g., panels, beams, columns.
    etc.  Also, included are selected structurally similar components, such as,
    table top panels, poles, posts, window sash elements or door panels even
    though not disclosed as specialized as components of a building structure.
    Also, are included processes, machines and implements used in the
    construction of such structures which are not elsewhere provided for.

    II.     GLOSSARY

    ARCHITRAVE

    The finish around and extending away from a door or window opening.

    BACKER

    Means forming an extended surface against which a settable material is
    cast, e.g., troweled, spread, poured etc., the material when set forming a
    wear surface or facing.

    BARRIER

    A construction forming an extended indefinite surface preventing or
    inhibiting the passage of persons or things, e.g., wall, ceiling, floor,
    roof or cover.

    BLOCK

    A module whose depth is substantial relative to its length and height and
    which in use forms a stable load-bearing member.

    COVER

    Generally synonymous with "roof" but used where "roof" in some instances
    may be inapt, e.g., a covering supported by an article, a canopy, a
    man-hole closure, etc.

    DISPARATE ARTICLE

    An article which does not form an essential component of a building
    construction of plural components, but is in the nature of an adjunct
    having no essential load-bearing, supporting, joining or protective
    function.

    ENCLOSURE

    Means surrounding an area or volume to be occupied by persons, animals or
    goods.

    ENTRANCE

    An opening for persons or things, but not for a fluid or a mass of
    particles having a fluid like characteristic.

    FACER OR FACING (SEE MODULE)

    An element or structure which (1) forms an exposed surface section of a
    barrier or (2) the panel held by a frame, a framing element or an elongated
    sustainer, e.g., the movable closure part of a door or window.  In the
    latter respect it differs from a module in that it is not used in
    repetition to form an extended surface.

    FLASHING

    Thin sheet of material covering or extending into a joint to deflect liquid
    from the joint.

    LOAD-BEARING

    A construction or component which is sufficiently strong and rigid to act
    as the primary support for other constructions or components against
    gravity or to resist transverse loading (see sustainer).

    MODULAR

    A construction utilizing modules.

    MODULE

    A component of building construction, usually designated by terms such as;
    brick, block, slab, panel, tile, sheet, precast monolith, etc., which when
    assembled in repetitious juxtaposition with other such preformed shapes
    (with or without interposed connecting means or material) define a surface
    of a construction, e.g., of a wall, ceiling or floor.

    MONOLITH

    A structure erected in situ by casting a water-settable composition, e.g.,
    plaster or concrete.

    22PANEL (SEE MODULE)

    The term panel is used to denote a thin rigid sheetlike structure which may
    not be disclosed as used repetitiously, e.g., table top or pane.

    PORTAL

    Structure defining an opening through a barrier for the passage of light,
    air, persons or things, e.g., the framing for a door or a window opening.

    PREFORM OR PRESHAPE

    A component of a building construction which is in completed form before
    its use at the job site. (Compare Module).

    REBAR

    An art term for a concrete reinforcing rod.  A rebar chair is a device for
    spacing a rebar from a concrete form.

    REINFORCEMENT, EMBEDDED

    A body placed within and covered by a cast material or a foraminous member
    wherein the holes are filled by a cast material.

    REVEAL

    The sides of a door or window opening between the faces of the barrier.

    ROOF (SEE COVER)

    A rigid cover extending above and supported by the uppermost termini of
    walls or columns.

    SETTABLE MATERIAL

    A component which is applied or formed in a fluent condition but sets or
    hardens in the final product, e.g., concrete, cement or plaster.

    SHAFT (SEE SUSTAINER)

    A member which has a limited closed periphery and which is greatly
    elongated relative to its length. It is generic to "sustainer" in that it
    may not have a load bearing function.

    SPECIFIED

    The subclass definition must be referred to.

    STIFFENER

    Means embedded in cast material or extending between sustainers or load
    bearing components which act to strengthen a construction in
    contradistinction to acting as a primary load-bearing or bend-resisting
    member.

    SUSTAINER

    A rigid member or construction having a limited closed periphery which is
    (1) greatly elongated relative to any lateral dimension (2) resists
    transverse loading and (3) supports or retains other components of a
    building construction, e.g., stud, joist, beam, or column.

    TENDON

    A tensioned strandlike component of a unit which places the principal part
    of the unit under compression.

    TILE

    A thin, relatively rigid module which when applied repetitiously in
    edge-to-edge relationship to a backing surface forms an exposed facing

    III.    MISCELLANEOUS MAIN CLASS NOTES

    SEARCH CLASS:

    14,     Bridges, appropriate subclasses for nonmasonry or nonconcrete
    static structure specialized to carrying traffic across a space between
    supports.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate
    subclasses, particularly subclasses 201+ for houses and kilns having means
    for drying and/or gas or vapor contact with solids, and subclass 237 for
    reticulated floors for distributing a drying medium.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, for buildings having features specialized to the
    care, treatment and support of the growth of plants.

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, for closure panels mounted for
    movement or removal including support means  for such closures having
    features providing for such movement or removal of a closure panel.  This
    class (52) takes panels, per se, (1) even though defined as doors or
    windows, (2) structure defining an opening through a barrier, (3) structure
    having a feature for movement or removal of a panel section for purposes of
    repair or assembly or disassembly, (4) a transparent panel (window) with
    means to treat the panel not elsewhere provided for and (5) a building or
    barrier with a movable closure and having an additional feature other than
    one merely forming an enclosure or support for the movable closure.  See
    Class 52, subclass 204.1 and notes.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, appropriate subclass, for a vehicle
    specialized to use as railway rolling stock, particularly subclasses 375
    and 422 for floors, and subclasses 396+ for car framing and structure.  In
    general, structure forming a box-like enclosure of general application is
    in Class 52, even though defined as a "vehicle body" or the like.  Also a
    vehicle body with a feature for conversion from a vehicle to a static
    structure is also in Class 52, e.g., a vehicle with ground engaging braces
    or guys.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, appropriate
    subclasses, for a static structure of a building combined with devices
    provided for in Class 109, i.e., means resisting attack which do more than
    merely contribute to structural strength, particularly subclasses 78+ for
    wall structure with specific penetration resistant features.

    110,    Furnaces, appropriate subclasses for furnace structure with
    features specialized to furnace operation, e.g., subclasses 297+ for a
    furnace provided with fluid supply structure; subclass 308 for fluid heater
    wall structure; subclasses 331+ for furnace arch or roof structure;
    subclasses 336+  for furnace wall structure; and subclasses 338+ for
    furnace brick structure.  The mere recitation of a refractory, coated or
    oxidizably coated refractory, is not considered a recitation of a feature
    specialized to furnace operation.  Also see the references to Class(es) 34,
    122, 126, 165, 202, 266, and 432 herein.

    114,    Ships, particularly subclasses 65+ for a structure specialized to a
    ship and see the reference to Class 105, Railway Rolling Stock, above.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 301, 302+, 311+, 329+, 400+, and 416+
    for enclosures having significant structure or combined with a feature for
    that class.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 6 and 494 for furnace
    structure combined with tubes for liquid to be heated.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, appropriate subclasses for a structure with
    features peculiar to that class, particularly subclasses 144+ for fire pots
    and linings, and see the above reference to Class 110.

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane. The line is:  Class 52  takes:
    (1) structures which are strengthened or shaped by fluid pressure (see
    subclass 2.11), (2) an in situ erected enclosure or shelter having as a
    component thereof a rigidly framed prefabricated panel even though it may
    have flexible surfacing (see subclass 63) and (3) certain covers which are
    entirely supported by an article or pile of material (see subclasses 3+)
    and (4) other in situ erected type rigid buildings.  Class 135 takes other
    portable covers, or shelters surfaced with flaccid material, whether hand
    or earth supported.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits.  The line between Class 52 and Class
    138 is: Class 52 takes rigid tubular structures specialized to use as or in
    an in situ erected static structure, e.g., (1) a tubular structure of like
    components (modules) juxtaposed in an axial direction, (2) a curved
    segment, e.g., a curved cast arch or a curved module per se, (3) a module
    having intersecting passages, (4) a module having a through passage and a
    joint forming feature on at least one end surface intersecting said
    passage, (5) a tubular structure with means projecting from the wall
    thereof having a rigidifying function other than merely forming the tube,
    e.g., a tube with means to support a structural component or  (6) an
    open-work  load-bearing tube such as a box girder, mast, etc.  Class 138
    takes a tubular structure of more general application, e.g., (1) a tubular
    structure forming a clear through passage which is only  defined  by  a
    cross-section normal to a longitudinal axis, (2) a flexible (nonrigid)
    tubular structure or (3) a tubular structure having reinforcement generally
    conforming to and embedded in or applied to the wall thereof to increase
    the strength of the tube rather than to adapt it for use as a load-bearing
    component of a building component.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel.  The line is:
    Class 160, takes:

    (a)     Closures and other panel units utilizing flexible sheet material or
    fabrics to constitute the panel portion.

    (b)     Closures and panel units made of plural strips, slabs or panels
    interconnected with one another for relative motion.

    (c)     Closures and panel units of either or both types (a) and (b)
    combined with closures or panel units of other types.

            Class 52 takes:   (1) rigid panels or (2) plural panels with a
    flexible section forming an enclosure.  As to (a) above, the subject
    matter, if claimed generically or defining Class 160 subject matter, is
    placed in Class 160.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 53+ for a heat exchanger related to a
    wall, ceiling or floor which heat exchanger is defined as more than a mere
    heating or cooling duct within a barrier.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, appropriate subclass for a
    pole, post or anti-inductive shield, e.g., building having defined a
    feature specialized to such use, e.g., conductor, insulator or means
    supporting it or a barrier or enclosure having means forming a conductive
    path between components, particularly subclasses 35+ for anti-inductive
    shields.

    181,    Acoustics, particularly subclasses 30 and 284+ for a panel having a
    physical configuration or relationship of components, peculiar to the
    attenuation of sound.  This class takes such a panel combined with an
    additional feature for a static building structure, e.g., means for
    mounting them to form an enclosure or barrier.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, for (1) ladder, i.e., stairs
    without risers except helical stairs, (2) ladder or scaffold attached to a
    building where only sufficient structure to attach the ladder or scaffold
    is defined, (3) ladder, scaffold or tower with a platform which in use is
    intended to support a person and (4) structure with additional features
    specialized to escaping from a building.

    202,    Distillation: Apparatus, subclasses 222+ for structural features
    peculiar to a thermolytic distillation retort.

    220,    Receptacles, appropriate subclasses for a portable type container
    especially subclasses 1.5,  3.2+, 216, 484, 565+, and 581+ and also other
    containers made of other materials not specifically provided for in other
    container classes.

    238,    Railways:  Surface Track, subclasses 84+ for a plastic, e.g.,
    concrete, railway tie.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 117+ for an aircraft structure having a
    defined feature specialized to Class 244 and see the reference to Class
    105, Railway Rolling Stock, above.

    249,    Static Molds, for molds in which the form panels are removed after
    molding and see the reference in subclasses 1 and 213 of Class 249.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 517.1 for a ray energy shielding structure
    having defined features specialized for such use.

    256,    Fences, for a structure having features peculiar to such use,
    particularly fences limited structurally to a definite height or posts
    having features for retaining fence wires or rails.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclasses 280+ for an apparatus having structure with a feature
    specialized to such use, e.g., a leak proof furnace bottom construction,
    blast furnace bell cover, localized lining or oxidizable  blocks,
    oxidizable  devices between refractory blocks, etc., and see the above
    reference to Class 110.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, appropriate subclasses for an
    enclosure having a feature specialized to use as or with land vehicles and
    see the reference to Class 105, Railway Rolling Stock, above.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, for a construction forming an
    enclosure which as an entity is portable, i.e., merely rests on a surface
    in its use position as distinct from a structure for Class 52 which is
    generally assembled at the job site.  See also (1) Note in subclass 27 of
    Class 52.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 1+ for a specialized photographic studio.


    403,    Joints and Connections, for joints or junctures formed by members
    connected together at a single locus of more general application.  Class 52
    takes joints specialized to use in constructions generally identified by
    terms such as:  housing, public works or civil engineering, e.g., rigid
    module or panel joints.  In interpreting this line the following exemplary
    subject matter is in Class 52; (1) a system of physical connected joints
    forming a load bearing construction or accommodating itself to a transverse
    loading, e.g., a truss frame or a composite or tapered shaft; (2) connected
    rigid panels or modules having integral or permanently attached
    modifications on plural edges thereof for repetitious edge-to-edge
    connection, (3) a rigid panel connected by or to elongated rigid load
    resisting members, e.g., studs, columns, etc., in generally parallel
    planes, (4) rigid panels held in a fixed relationship to each other or to a
    sub-structure by a plurality of mechanical connectors, (5) a composite
    structure having a specified feature for receiving an impaling type
    fastener, e.g., a nailing beam or panel, (6) rigid panels with edge
    portions lapped so their edges lie in different planes, (7) rigid panels
    having a bridger strip overlying their edge juncture and (8) joined
    components incorporating an adjunct having a Class 52 function, e.g., a
    joint with means for retaining an external dissimilar element, e.g., a
    panel.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    road structure limited to highway or walkway use.  Structure of general
    utility, and particularly where Class 52 provides a specific subclass locus
    for such structure - is classified in Class 52.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 15+ for bank, shore, or
    bed protecting structures (e.g., revetments, breakwaters, etc.); subclasses
    52+ for fluid control structures (dams, dikes, canals, channels, etc.);
    subclasses 132+ for underground shaft and tunnel construction; subclasses
    195.1+ for miscellaneous static marine structures; subclasses 229+ for
    foundations not provided for elsewhere; and subclasses 258+ for earth
    treating or control structures (e.g., retaining walls, sheet piles, etc.).

    410,    Freight Accommodation on Freight Carrier, subclasses 129+ for load
    bracing panels or movable or removable bulkheads.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, for a stock material
    product or article of that class not having either a physical feature for
    cooperation with another panel structure or mechanical means for connecting
    plural components of the panel, and see section VI C, 2, a; C, 3, d and C,
    5, c of the main definition of Class 428.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 247+ for chamber structure specialized to
    heating, and see the above reference to Class 110.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 85+ for construction toys; and
    subclasses 476+ for toy buildings.

    454,    Ventilation, for buildings having means for directing air in a
    desired internal path or including air flow compelling means and see the
    reference to Class 454 in Class 52, subclass 198.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses
    81+ for a cabinet having features for treating a patient by light, heat, or
    electrical effects.


    IV.     INDEX TO SEARCH NOTES AND SEARCH CLASSES

    Class 4.



    In      Class 52, subclasses 2.11, 34 and 633.

    To      Class 52, class definition and subclasses 419, 488, and 538.

    Class 5.



    In      Class 52, subclasses 2.11 (1) Note, 5, 27 and 301.

    To      Class 52, subclasses 10.1, 10.2 and 281.

    Class 14.



    In      Class 52, class definition and subclasses 86, 169.1, 174, 318, 633,
    639, and 741.1.

    To      Class 52, class definition and subclasses 13,  21, 24, 73, 74.5,
    75, and  77.1

    Class 15.



    In      Class 52, subclasses 171.3, 177, 633, and 749.

    To      Class 52, subclasses 215, 220.1+, 236.01, 239, 250.001+, 250.05,
    and 250.351+.

    Class 16.



    In      Class 52, subclasses 178, 204.1, and 273.

    Class 24.



    In      Class 52, subclasses 223.12, 357, 698, and 718.01.

    To      Class 52, subclass 336.

    Class 27.



    In      Class 52, subclasses 124.1, 128 and 129.

    To      Class 52, subclass 35.

    Class 29.



    In      Class 52, subclasses 223.1, 514, 633, 670, 690, and 741.1.

    To      Class 52, class definition and subclasses 402.03+, 402.09+,
    402.19+, 426.1, 446, 452, 455.1, and 700+.

    Class 33.



    In      Class 52, subclass 364.

    To Class 52, subclass 528.

    Class 34.



    In      Class 52, misc. main class notes and subclasses 172 and 633.

    To      Class 52, class definition and subclasses 201 and 237.

    Class 40.



    In      Class 52, subclasses 38 and 103.

    To      Class 52, class definition and subclass 124.5.

    Class 43.



    In      Class 52, subclass 101.

    To      Class 52, subclass 124.

    Class 47.



    In      Class 52, class definition and subclass 102.

    To      Class 52, subclasses 17, 20, and 33.

    Class 49.



    In      Class 52, class definition III and subclasses 2.11, 37, 64, 74,
    106, 140, 202, 204.1, 206, 209, 217, 393, 473,716.1, 764, and  782.

    Class 51.



    In      Class 52, subclasses 27 and 177.

    Class 53.



    To      Class 52, class definition.

    Class 55.



    In      Class 52, subclasses 172 and 633.

    To      Class 52, subclass 306.

    Class 62.



    In      Class 52, subclasses 27, 169.1, 171.3, 220.1, and 503.

    To      Class 52, class definition and subclasses 248, 272, and 440.

    Class 63.



    To      Class 52, subclass 25.

    Class 65.



    To      Class 52, class definition.

    Class 68.



    To      Class 52, subclass 232.

    Class 69.



    To      Class 52, subclass 29.

    Class 73.



    In      Class 52, subclass 27.

    Class 74.



    In      Class 52, subclasses 27, 109, and 121.

    Class 89.



    In      Class 52, subclass 27.

    Class 91.



    In      Class 52, subclass 115.

    Class 92.



    In      Class 52, subclasses 2.11 and 115.

    To      Class 52, class definition and subclass 51.

    Class 100.



    In      Class 52, subclasses 3 and 633.

    Class 104.



    In      Class 52, subclass 27.

    Class 105.



    In      Class 52, subclasses 17, 45, 64, 143, 238.1, 518, and 633.

    To      Class 52, subclasses 375, 396, 401, 409, and 443.

    Class 106.



    In      Class 52, subclasses 232, 612, and 741.1.

    Class 108.



    In      Class 52, subclasses 27, 71, 182, and 783.

    To      Class 52, subclass 42.

    Class 109.



    In      Class 52, class definition and subclass 106.

    To      Class 52, class definition and subclasses 1, 77, 78, and 83.



    In      Class 52, class definition and subclass 106.

    To      Class 52, subclasses 99,181, and 333.

    Class 114.



    In      Class 52, class definition and subclasses 143, 238.1, and 749.

    To      Class 52, subclass 206.

    Class 118.



    In      Class 52, subclass 749.

    Class 119.



    In      Class 52, class definition.

    To      Class 52, subclasses 7, 14.04, 16, 17, 28, 74, 121, and 122.

    Class 122.



    In      Class 52, class definition.

    To      Class 52, subclass 494.

    Class 126.



    In      Class 52, class definition and subclasses 171.1, 218, and 633.

    Class 128.



    In      Class 52, class definition and subclass 2.11.

    Class 134.



    To      Class 52, class definition.

    Class 135.



    In      Class 52, class definition and subclasses 2.11+, 3, 63, 64, 74,
    80.1, 83, 109, and 633.

    To      Class 52, class definition and subclasses 87, 90, 114, 115, 118,
    121, 124, 144, 905.

    Class 137.



    In      Class 52, subclasses 1, 98, 127.1, 168, 169.1, 192, and 220.1

    To      Class 52, class definition and subclasses 356, 357, and 373.

    Class 138.



    In      Class 52, class definition and subclasses 1, 2.11, 245, 249, 514,
    606, and 731.1.

    To      Class 52, class definition and subclass 100.

    Class 139.



    In      Class 52, subclass 633.

    Class 141.



    To      Class 52, class definition.

    Class 144.



    In      Class 52, subclasses 514 and 741.1.

    Class 152.



    In      Class 52, subclass 2.11.

    Class 156.



    In      Class 52, subclasses 2.11 (1) Note, 384 and 746.

    To      Class 52, class definition and subclass 71.

    Class 160.



    In      Class 52, class definition and subclasses 5, 27, 64, 74, 101,
    238.1, 473, 518, 633, and 666.

    To      Class 52, subclasses 38, 45, 130, 179, 222, 229, 231, and 282.

    To      Class 52, class definition and subclasses 1, 5, 8, 19, 32, 36 41,
    45, 48, 53, 68, 70, 109, 116, 165, 172, and 612.

    Class 162.



    To      Class 52, subclass 233.

    Class 165.



    In      Class 52, class definition and subclasses 27, 127.1, 169.1, 220.1,
    503, 596, and 633.

    To      Class 52, subclasses 9.1, 81 and 136.

    Class 166.



    In      Class 52, subclasses 2.11, 127.1, 633, and 749.

    To      Class 52, class definition and subclasses 242 and 285.

    Class 169.



    In      Class 52, subclass 168.

    Class 173.



    In      Class 52, subclasses 173.1 and 749.

    To      Class 52, class definition and subclass 28.

    Class 174.



    In      Class 52, class definition and subclasses 27, 40, 155, and 220.1

    To      Class 52, class definition and subclasses 6, 45, 48, 50, and 137.
    Class 175.

    Class 175.



    To      Class 52, subclasses 19, 263, 327, and 394.

    Class 177.



    In      Class 52, subclass 515.

    Class 181.



    In      Class 52, class definition and subclass 144.

    Class 182.



    In      Class 52, class definition and subclasses 7, 36.4, 109, 111, 182,
    633, 637, 651.01, and 690.

    To      Class 52, class definition and subclasses 2, 4, 21, 46, 53, 178,
    179, 194, 222, 224, and 228.

    Class 184.



    In      Class 52, subclass 182.

    Class 185.



    To      Class 52, subclass 25.

    Class 187.



    In      Class 52, subclasses 30 and 109.

    To      Class 52, class definition.

    Class 193.



    In      Class 52, subclass 195.

    Class 196.



    To      Class 52, subclass 133.

    Class 198.



    In      Class 52, subclass 31.

    Class 202.



    In      Class 52, subclass 633.

    Class 206.



    In      Class 52, subclass 127.2.

    Class 209.



    In      Class 52, class definition.

    Class 210.



    In      Class 52, subclass 127.1.

    To      Class 52, subclasses 163 and 463.

    Class 211.



    In      Class 52, subclasses 27, 37, 112, 146, 633, 637, and 651.01.

    Class 219.



    In      Class 52, subclass 171.2.

    Class 220.



    In      Class 52, class definition and subclasses  2.11, 3, 27, 40, 80.1,
    98, 192, 194, 220.1, 633, and 698.

    To      Class 52, subclasses 3.3, 200, 501+, 602, and 662+.

    Class 222.



    To      Class 52, class definition.

    Class 224.



    In      Class 52, subclass 749.

    Class 232.



    To      Class 52, subclass 43.4.

    Class 237.



    In      Class 52, subclasses 171.2, 220.1, and 503.

    Class 238.



    In      Class 52, class definition.

    Class 239.



    In      Class 52, subclasses 168, 171.2, and 749.

    To      Class 52, class definition and subclass 284.1.

    Class 241.



    In      Class 52, subclass 633.

    To      Class 52, subclass 285.1.

    Class 242.



    In      Class 52, subclass 108.

    Class 244.



    In      Class 52, class definition and subclasses 2.11 and 84.

    To      Class 52, subclasses 37, 114, and 119.

    Class 245.



    In      Class 52, subclass 633.

    To      Class 52, class definition and subclass 11.

    Class 248.



    In      Class 52, subclasses 11, 27, 39, 40, 111, 112, 292, 698, and 716.1.

    To      Class 52, class definition and subclasses 29, 44 156, 251, 346,
    351, and 357.

    Class 249.



    In      Class 52, class definition and subclass 699.

    To      Class 52, class definition, sections III 2C, III 2D, V4, and
    subclasses 1, 2, 13, 14, 16, 17, 18, 26, 27, 28, 30, 33, 34, 35, 37, 38,
    39, 42, 48, 50, 51, 52, 85, 98, 99, 101, 143, 144, 190, 213, 214, 215, and
    216.

    Class 250.



    In      Class 52, class definition.

    Class 252.



    In      Class 52, subclass 232.

    Class 254.



    In      Class 52, subclasses 2.11, 111, 112, and 223.12

    To      Class 52, subclass 387.

    Class 256.



    In      Class 52, class definition and subclasses 40, 102, 182, 633, and
    720.

    To      Class 52, class definition and subclasses 19, 21, 24, 46, 49, 50,
    and 51.

    Class 260.



    In      Class 52, subclass 309.

    Class 261.



    In      Class 52, subclass 633.

    Class 264.



    In      Class 52, subclasses 127.3, 223.1, and 741.1.

    To      Class 52, class definition and subclasses 30, 31, and 35.

    Class 266.



    In      Class 52, class definition.

    Class 267.



    In      Class 52, subclass 2.11.

    Class 269.



    In      Class 52, subclasses 127.2 and 749.

    To      Class 52, class definition.

    Class 273.



    In      Class 52, subclasses 2.11 and 783.

    Class 277.



    In      Class 52, subclasses 2.11, 140, and 393.

    To      Class 52, SEAL COMBINED WITH OTHER STRUCTURE and subclass 628.

    Class 280.



    In      Class 52, subclasses 67, 182 and 393.

    To      Class 52, class definition and subclasses 153.5, 163, 169, 638, and
    781+.

    Class 285.



    In      Class 52, subclasses 58, 127.1, 219, 220.1, and 232.

    To      Class 52, class definition.

    Class 293.



    To      Class 52, subclasses 102 and 126.

    Class 294.



    In      Class 52, subclass 749.

    To      Class 52, subclasses 93, 121, and 126.

    Class 296.



    In      Class 52, class definition and subclasses 64, 74, 143, and 203.

    To      Class 52, class definition and subclasses 146.1 and 146.15.

    Class 297.



    In      Class 52, subclass 27.

    To      Class 52, class definition and subclasses 232 and 452.

    Class 301.



    To      Class 52, subclass 37.1

    Class 312.



    In      Class 52, class definition and subclass 63.

    To      Class 52, class definition and subclasses 114 and 210.

    Class 343.



    In      Class 52, subclasses 27, 80.1, 84, 110, 111, and 633.

    To      Class 52, subclasses 700, 715, 874, 875, 878, 883, 888, 890, 900,
    901, and 907.

    Class 361.



    In      Class 52, subclass 27.

    Class 362.



    In      Class 52, subclasses 11, 28, and 633.

    Class 383.



    In      Class 52, subclass 2.11.

    To Class 52, subclass 3.

    Class 396.



    In      Class 52, section III.

    Class 403.



    In      Class 52, class definition and subclasses 296, 719, 721, and 726.1.

    To      Class 52, class definition.

    Class 405.



    In      Class 52, class definition and subclasses 11, 155, 169.1, 238, 292,
    319, 378, 414, 720, 726, 727, 742,  and 749.

    To      Class 52, class definition and subclasses 29, 53, 119, 216, 229,
    231, 244, 250, 251, 255, 256, and 259.

    Class 411.



    In      Class 52, subclasses 361, 372, 514, 549, and 698.

    Class 414.



    In      Class 52, subclasses 174+.

    To      Class 52, subclasses 227+.

    Class 424.



    In      Class 52, subclass 130.

    Class 425.



    In      Class 52, subclass 749.

    Class 427.



     Coating Processes.

    In      Class 52, subclass 445.

    Class 428.



    Stock Material and Miscellaneous Articles.

    In      Class 52, class definition and subclasses 57, 98, 104, 105, 177,
    272, 306, 309.1, 311.1, 312, 313, 314, 316, 384, 403, 408, 449, 450, 453,
    518, 612,   630, 631, 633, 656.1, 660, 673, 712, 719, 720, 726.1, 729,
    730.6, 734, 735, 736, 741.1, 782, and 806.

    To      Class 52, class definition and subclasses 3, 15, 28, 34, 99, 116,
    131, 156, 220, 223, 225, 364, 542.2, 544, 573, 578, 592, 593, 594, 595,
    596, 597, 598, 603, 615, 621, and 630.

    Class 429.



    In      Class 52, subclass 633.

    Class 432.



    In      Class 52, class definition and subclass 633.

    To      Class 52, subclasses 3, 247.

    Class 434.



    To      Class 52, subclass 72.

    Class 441.



    In      Class 52, subclass 2.11.

    Class 446.



    In      Class 52, class definition and subclasses 2.11 and 233

    To      Class 52, subclasses 85, 105, 108, 111, 122, 124, and 476.

    Class 450.



    In      Class 52, subclass 2.11.

    Class 454.



    In      Class 52, class definition and subclasses 1, 132, 171.3, 198, 199,
    200, 218, 220.1, 302.1, 473, 518, and 633.

    Class 472.



    In      Class 52, subclasses 6 and 65.

    Class 600.



    In      Class 52, subclass 2.11.

    Class 604.



    In      Class 52, subclass 2.11.

    Class 606.



    In      Class 52, subclass 2.11.


CLS 52/1
TXT Structure under the class definition comprising means to sense a condition
    and to exercise a control operation of a structure or component thereof in
    response to said condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 67+ for a destructible or deformable
    control of a fluid device and subclass 468 for a residual thermal
    responsive valve.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 26+ for such a device with a
    pressure compensator.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, subclasses 56+ for condition responsive control
    of an extinguishing system and subclass 42 for a fusible connection, per se.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 70+, 75, 229, 238, 239, 255, 256, and 340
    for automatic control of ventilating systems.


CLS 52/2.11
TXT SHAPED OR STRENGTHENED BY FLUID PRESSURE:

    Structure under the class definition in which a totally enclosed fluid is
    utilized to shape, support, or strengthen a building structure or component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclass 499 for an air
    inflatable or air supported covering for a pool, or subclass 588 for an
    inflatable bath tub for an infant.

    5,      Beds, subclasses 449+ for an inflatable mattress or cushion.

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclass 477.1 inflatable or fluid
    pressure responsive closure seal.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 34+ for a bellows-type,
    expansible chamber or subclasses 89+ for a collapsible chamber wall portion
    (e.g., hinged, flexible wall, etc.).

    128,    Surgery, subclass 118.1 for an inflatable pad to press against a
    human body as part of a method or apparatus of doing a diagnostic test or
    subclass 865 for an inflatable or expandable ear protector.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 93 for an inflatable closure
    or plug for a pipe.

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclasses 450+ for a pneumatic tire or
    inner tube.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    145+ for a method of encapsulating permanently fluent material in hollow or
    porous lamina or filling of space between adhered laminae, subclass 156 for
    a method of using fluid pressure to prevent collapse of hollow structure
    during assembly and/or joining, or subclass 286 for a method of using
    direct application of vacuum or fluid pressure during bonding to remove gas
    from between assembled laminae.

    166,    Wells, subclass 187 for a packer or plug expanded by confined fluid
    from a central chamber, pump, or plunger.

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 232 for a receptacle having a closure that
    includes an inflatable gasket or packing.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 5 for a heavier-than-air aircraft that has
    its weight diminished by buoyant gas, subclasses 24+ for aircraft that is
    lighter than air, subclass 98 for a gas bag inflation control for a
    lighter-than-air aircraft, or subclass 128 lighter-than-air aircraft gas
    cell construction and arrangement.

    254,    Implement or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 93+ pushing and pulling implements actuated by fluid pressure.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 64.11+ for a spring device for a vehicle
    that uses compressible fluid.

    273+,   Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 65+ for an inflatable
    football or basketball.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 331+ for an inflatable packer for well apparatus,
    subclass 583 for a dynamic circumferential contacting inflatable seal or
    seal biased by an inflatable member, subclass 605 for a hollow, fluid
    filled or inflatable static contacting seal for a pipe, conduit, or cable,
    or subclass 646 for an inflatable static contact seal for other than an
    internal combustion engine, or pipe, conduit, or cable.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 3 for an inflatable bag.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclasses 40+ for an inflatable
    raft or subclasses 90+ for a personal water rescue or life protecting
    flotation device including mechanical inflation means.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 220+ for an inflatable toy.

    450,    Foundation Garments, subclass 38 for a device designed to fit a
    breast or chest (e.g., brassieres, etc.) of a human body to protect,
    compress, support, restrain, or alter its configuration including
    inflatable or liquid-containing chambers.

    600,    Surgery, subclass 31 for an implanted urinary or colonic
    incontinent device or treatment (e.g., artificial sphincters, etc.) having
    fluid actuated occluding means (e.g., inflatable cuff, etc.) for a human
    body.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 96+ for treating material introduced or removed
    through a conduit, holder, or implantable reservoir inserted in a human
    body orifice and inflated in a human body (e.g., inflatable nozzle,
    dilator, balloon catheter, occluder, etc.).

    606,    Surgery, subclasses 191+ for an internal pressure applicator (e.g.,
    dilator) that is inflatable or expandable by fluid or subclass 202 for a
    pneumatic cuff external pressure applicator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for an article or material supported cover.

    63,     for an enclosure which includes a flaccid, nonmetallic, or
    foraminous surfacing.

    115,    for a fluid pressure actuated, relatively movable shaft assembly.

    204.52, for a passage between the internal volume of a double pane panel
    and the ambient, which passage may be plugged and the internal volume
    pressurized.


CLS 52/2.12
TXT Loading dock doorway seal:

    Structure under subclass 2.11 wherein the building structure or component
    comprises one or more tubular members, which members are mounted around at
    least a substantial part of the periphery of an opening defining a passage
    into and out of a building (e.g., a warehouse) and which will, when
    inflated, perform a sealing and cushioning function.

    (1)     Note.  The members are intended, most commonly, to be engaged by
    the rear of a body of a vehicle which is being loaded or unloaded through
    the opening, the purpose being to minimize the infiltration of outside air
    into the building and the vehicle.

    (2)     Note.  The presence or absence of a conventional closure member for
    the opening is immaterial insofar as the subject mattre of this subclass is
    concerned.


CLS 52/2.13
TXT Confined tubular element exerts force:

    Structure under subclass 2.11 wherein the building structure or component
    comprises a tubular element which is located between two, relatively rigid
    members and which, when inflated, develops an outward force against the
    members.

    (1)     Note.  In some instances, both of the member are fixed, but, in
    other instances, at least one of the members is intended to have some
    degree of movement.


CLS 52/2.14
TXT For sealing a closure panel:

    Structure under subclass 2.13 wherein the tubular element is utilized as a
    seal for a plate-like member (e.g., of glass, wood, etc.) which serves to
    close a passage.


CLS 52/2.15
TXT Form for hardenable material:

    Structure under subclass 2.11 wherein the building structure or component
    comprises a member, often sheetlike in nature, which is shaped by the fluid
    it encloses and which, in turn, serves to shape or support one or more
    elements of a building that are being formed from material initially
    lacking a shape-retaining property, but which material subsequently
    undergoes a change of state and becomes relatively rigid.

    (1)     Note.  Upon the change of state of the material, the member often
    becomes superfluous, and, in some instances, is removed.


CLS 52/2.16
TXT Fluid pressure is subatmospheric:

    Structure under subclass 2.11 wherein the enclosed fluid is at a pressure
    which is less than that of the ambient air; i.e., a vacuum of one degree or
    another has been established.

    (1)     Note.  The density of certain materials can be increased by
    subjecting them to a vacuum.


CLS 52/2.17
TXT Including ingress/egress provision:

    Structure under subclass 2.11 wherein the enclosure includes a system,
    device, element, etc., which enables entry or exit, usually that of persons.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is an air lock, a door, a flap, etc.


CLS 52/2.18
TXT Intersecting tubular elements form  framework:

    Structure under subclass 2.11 wherein the building structure or component
    comprises tubular elements which intersect one another and which, when
    inflated, form the frame members of a building.


CLS 52/2.19
TXT Supported on rigid-walled structure:

    Structure under subclass 2.11 wherein the building structure or component
    comprises a sheetlike member which rests on and is affixed to the
    relatively rigid walls of an open-top enclosure.

    (1)     Note.  The member sometimes serves as an upward extension of the
    enclosure, but, in other instances, is more nearly in the nature of a cover
    therefor.


CLS 52/2.21
TXT Upstanding column (e.g., mast, tower):

    Structure under subclass 2.11 wherein the building structure or component
    comprises a tubular member, anchored at one end, which is extended by the
    fluid into a generally vertical position.

    (1)     Note.  A structure of this subclass may be "self-erecting".

    (2)     Note.  A structure of this subclass may consist of a plurality of
    members connected end-to-end.


CLS 52/2.22
TXT Comprising spaced, sheetlike members and fluid chamber therebetween:

    Structure under subclass 2.11 wherein the building structure or component
    comprises two or more flexible panels which are in a spaced-apart, more or
    less parallel relationship with one another and which are joined, at least
    along their perimeters, in a fluid-tight manner.


CLS 52/2.23
TXT Including subdividing elements:

    Structure under subclass 2.22 wherein a plurality of elements (e.g., webs),
    extending more or less transversely of, and fluid-tightly joined to, the
    members are provided for dividing the chamber into a plurality of smaller
    chambers.


CLS 52/2.24
TXT Sheetlike member comprises plural, edge-joined sections:

    Structure under subclass 2.11 wherein the building structure or component
    is a flexible panel which is fabricated from number of smaller sections
    which have been joined (e.g., by a seam) to one another, fluid-tightly,
    along their perimeters.


CLS 52/2.25
TXT Including holddown means:

    Structure under subclass 2.11 wherein the building structure or component
    is provided with means for securing it to an underlying object, structure
    or surface.

    (1)     Note.  Frequently, the building structure or component is being
    anchored to the ground.


CLS 52/2.26
TXT Comprising strandlike element:

    Structure under subclass 2.25 wherein the hold-down means, or a component
    thereof, comprises at least one elongated, nonrigid elements (e.g., a
    cable, a rope, etc.).


CLS 52/3
TXT Structure under the class definition including means covering and supported
    by an article or a body of material, which article or body of material is
    not part of a static building structure, and which is not configured for a
    specific article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 65+ for such structure compacting material
    within a silo.

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclasses 87+ for nonarticle
    supported canopies.

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, subclasses 154+ for a
    protective cover of flaccid material for covering, and being supported by,
    a specific article, and see the Notes and the extensive Search Class notes
    thereof.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 216+ for a receptacle with a cover which
    floats on its contents.


CLS 52/4
TXT Structure under subclass 3 including a feature which retains the cover and
    penetrates the ground or the article covered.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155+,   for an earth piercing or expanding anchor.


CLS 52/5
TXT Structure under subclass 3 which comprises a plurality of strips or slats
    fastened together by means which allow pivoted motion of one strip or slat
    relative to another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    342+,   for openly spaced slat type lath.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 218+
    for movably interconnected slats or strips of more general utility.


CLS 52/6
TXT Subject matter under class definition specialized to the presentation of an
    attraction or accommodation of an audience group, such specialized
    structure including (1) an arrangement of seats or slopes relative to the
    locus of the attraction, (2) a structure having means peculiar to the
    accommodation of the audience or (3) a stage, screen or area of activities
    which aid in the presentation of or serves as the locus of the attraction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36.1+,  for an enclosure combined with a piece of furniture or a fixture of
    more general application, e.g., a movable platform or support even though
    defined as a stage or theater seat but which is capable of use in other
    environments or individual seats.

    182+,   for a stepped structure which could as well be used as strips,
    e.g., do not define seat and foot rest portions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclasses 75+ for an apparatus or
    setting intended to be used on or in cooperation with the stage of a
    theater and subclasses 92+ for a playing or exhibition area enclosure.


CLS 52/7
TXT Structure under subclass 6 including a movable floor or platform
    particularly related to a proscenium or to a seating arrangement for
    viewers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, appropriate subclass for a
    platform of more general application.


CLS 52/8
TXT Structure under subclass 6 relating to a particular arrangement of seats
    relative to an enclosure or area of the presentation or attraction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for an outdoor theatre having traffic paths so that vehicles are
    disposed in a desired arrangement and 174+ for another structure with a
    traffic guiding feature.


CLS 52/9
TXT Structure under subclass 8 including a section of seats mounted for
    movement with respect to another section or to the floor upon which it
    rests.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183,    for a mere stepped structure of more general application having
    interconnected relatively movable components.


CLS 52/10
TXT Structure under subclass 9 wherein the shifting of the section is
    accomplished by, or aided by means releasing stored or generated energy,
    e.g., motor, spring, etc.


CLS 52/11
TXT Subject matter under the class definition which forms a cover (roof) having
    an edge or forms a valley and in which there is a means located in, at or
    near the edge of the valley which provides for the drainage or discharge of
    liquid flowing from the upper surface of the cover into the means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95,     for a gable or eave construction with water discharge means for
    handling liquid from a subjacent area of the cover.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 48.1 for an eave trough support.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 119+ for a trough or
    channel having no feature relating it to a roof.


CLS 52/12
TXT Structure under subclass 11 comprising means for preventing debris from (1)
    entering the eave trough or (2) entering a downspout or other structure
    associated with said eave trough.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclasses 154+, 459+, and 473+ for a strainer, per se, or a
    strainer combined with an eave trough which does not have any features
    particularly adapting it for association with a roof.


CLS 52/13
TXT Structure under subclass 11 wherein there is means forming a gutter located
    at the vertex of two portions of a cover construction which slope towards
    each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58+,    for exterior type flashing.


CLS 52/14
TXT Structure under subclass 13 in which there is means forming a second gutter
    on the under side of the cover structure.


CLS 52/15
TXT Structure under subclass 11 in which the means forming a trough is, at
    least in part, within the peripheral edge of the cover.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24+,    for cover means to retain solid material deposited on the roof,
    e.g., an anti-snow slide.


CLS 52/16
TXT Structure under subclass 11 including means forming or connected to a
    downspout.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for a gutter or eave trough with strainer.


CLS 52/17
TXT Structure under the class definition peculiar to railway car roofs combined
    with means situated in the roof under its exterior covering acting to
    inhibit or retard the passage of heat, sound, vibrations, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144+,   for a building construction with an exposed surface with an
    acoustical feature, and see notes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 238.1+ for railway rolling stock
    comprising a special car body.


CLS 52/18
TXT Structure under the class definition wherein (1) at least one portion of
    the roof is offset to form a plurality of roof surfaces at different
    levels, said offset portion being substantially coextensive with one
    dimension of the roof or (2) the roof surface has distinct surfaces
    inclined from a common plane to form a serrated roof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200,    for a cupola or turret construction, i.e., a small building
    extending upwardly of a roof which as an entity is within the outer
    periphery of a roof.

    639+,   for a truss member of more general utility forming a peak or curved
    chord.


CLS 52/19
TXT Structure under the class definition comprising a horizontal or inclined
    cover and entrance means defining an opening for persons or objects which
    pass through the cover.


CLS 52/20
TXT Structure under subclass 19 in which the cover is supported by a wall
    construction enclosing a space which is entered through the opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131+,   192+, 198+, 200, 204.1+, 218, 219, 220.1+, 302.1+, and 553 for a
    building construction with a material (e.g., air or water) port, duct or
    channel.


CLS 52/21
TXT Structure under subclass 19 including a masonry or concrete component which
    is constructed entirely of masonry or concrete.


CLS 52/22
TXT Structure under the class definition including means forming the uppermost
    exposed surfacing of a building and having features peculiar to such use,
    e.g., a ridge, arch, coping, inclined rafter, etc., combined with a ceiling
    construction which is openly spaced from said means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    275+,   for a construction of laterally related modules which form an
    intersection.

    479+,   for a construction of face to face barrier sections spaced by an
    internal frame or shaft.


CLS 52/23
TXT Structure under the class definition including a rod-like member extending
    over the outside of a building structure, usually the roof, and acting to
    hold such structure to the ground or substructure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for an article supported cover which may utilize exterior hold-down
    strands.


CLS 52/24
TXT Structure under the class definition including means for preventing or
    restraining the movement of foreign objects or material not permanently
    part of the roof; e.g., anti-slides for snow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    for an animal, e.g., bird, blocker which is a trap, scarer or
    lateral projection.


CLS 52/25
TXT Structure under subclass 24 comprising a horizontal rod-like portion
    supported by a plurality of spaced members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    677+,   for a spacer-positioner for a rod, e.g., a support spacer
    reinforcing a rod from a support.


CLS 52/26
TXT Structure under subclass 24 comprising means to penetrate the base which
    supports the means for restraining movement of foreign objects.


CLS 52/27
TXT INCLUDING COMPONENT (E.G., WALL) DESIGNED TO RECEIVE A DISPARATE ARTICLE
    HAVING DISPARATE ARTICLE MOUNTED THERETO:

    Structure under the class definition having a modification of a static
    structure or component for attaching an article, in which the article is
    not essential to the subject matter of this class.

    (1)     Note.  The exemplary classes and subclasses noted here below under
    "SEARCH CLASS" provide for an article or article support installed in means
    forming an enclosure or part thereof. Many classes provide for static type
    devices, e.g., supports or furniture, and take such combinations wherein no
    structure is defined other than that required to accommodate or isolate the
    article provided for such a class. Others take such combinations relating
    to operative apparatus wherein an operating unit or significant
    characteristic for such a class is defined, e.g., electrical device or a
    burner, wherein the enclosure is a furnace, a casing for a machine, a tool,
    etc.  Others are referred to in subclasses indented hereunder or in the
    class definition of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6+,     for a building combined with an auditorium or theatre feature.

    24,     for a projecting object restrainer.

    57,     for a finial or cresting.

    73,     for a cantilevered rigid barrier, e.g., rigid awnings.

    101,    for an animal blocker which is a trap scarer or lateral projection.

    129     through 133, for a burial vault and adjunct.

    173.1,  for static structures combined with subject matter from another
    class.

    220.1+, for a service duct including an electrical conduit within a barrier.

    273,    for a flexible shaped or attached floor covering.

    698+,   for anchor or ties of more general application.

    716.1+, for an in situ attached channel or trim strip which may be
    disclosed as enclosing a wire or pipe.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 2.1, 10.1 and 159.1.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 259.1+.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 431.

    89,     Ordnance, subclass 36.04

    104,    Railways, subclasses 27+.

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 42+.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 19+.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 48 and 158+.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 87+.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 3.3+.

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 14+ and 147.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 242, 245+, and 351.1+.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 872+.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 600+.


CLS 52/27.5
TXT With a telephone (e.g., booth or stand):

    Static structure or component under subclass 27 which encloses or supports
    an audio transmission and receiving means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    764+,   for sheet like sections between framing members.


CLS 52/28
TXT Structure under subclass 27 wherein the article is an artificial
    illuminating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 145+ for combined light and structure
    there provided for.  The line between this class (52) and Class 362
    subclass is: Class 362, subclasses 145+ takes structure illuminated by
    artificial means or merely supporting illuminating means.  Class (52) takes
    building structure including features having functions in addition to
    merely supporting the illuminating means or forming the enclosure, barrier
    or other structure illuminated.  In interpreting this line the presence of
    a claim to building structure not including illuminating means is
    considered conclusive of the fact that such additional function features
    are present.


CLS 52/29
TXT Structure under subclass 27 wherein the securing means causes or permits
    movement of the article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36.4,   for a structure wherein the article is a fixed bed, chair, table or
    shelf.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    483,    Tool Changing, generally for apparatus or method for transferring
    tools combined with support or storage means.


CLS 52/30
TXT Structure under subclass 29 comprising a multi-level structure provided
    with a platform and hoisting machinery therefor for conveying persons or
    goods to or from the different levels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    appropriate subclasses for  an  elevator and building combination wherein
    no more structure of the building is defined than is necessary to support
    the elevator.


CLS 52/31
TXT Structure under subclass 29 wherein the article, device or adjunct includes
    means for conveying, or aiding in the conveying of articles which means
    includes a revolving member or endless web or strand type conveyor wherein
    the article is readily removable from the conveyor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses for such apparatus
    combined with a mere enclosure, particularly subclass 860.3.


CLS 52/32
TXT Structure under subclass 29 wherein the supporting means can oscillate
    about a fixed axis.


CLS 52/33
TXT Structure under subclass 27 wherein an article or articles or adjunct, are
    so arranged so as to form a defined path for traffic, e.g., a store with a
    defined furniture arrangement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174+,   for other structure with a traffic guiding feature.


CLS 52/34
TXT Structure under subclass 27 wherein the article is a fixture for receiving
    body waste matter or for washing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, appropriate subclass for
    apparatus having a fixture with a feature for the purpose of that class,
    e.g., drains, flow lines, etc.  This class (52) takes (1) structures merely
    forming enclosures or barriers, (2) joints between a lavatory fixture and a
    barrier or (3) an in situ type enclosure having features with functions
    other than merely enclosing a class 4 device.


CLS 52/35
TXT Wall juncture (e.g., bathtub surround kit): Structure under subclass 34 in
    which a discrete connector joins at least an edge of a lavatory fixture;
    e.g., tub or basin and a wall.


CLS 52/36.1
TXT Task-area type repositionable component (e.g., modular booth, workstation,
    or concession stand):

    Component under subclass 27 in which user or work related equipment is self
    supporting and is designed to be assembled and disassembled (i.e.,
    transportable).


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79.1+,  for a floor to ceiling assembly; e.g., wall, defining an occupiable
    space.

    205,    for a partition framed for a door or window.

    481.2,  for demountable partitions separating two areas.


CLS 52/36.2
TXT With top covering:

    Task area component under subclass 36.1 including a ceiling above an
    occupant.


CLS 52/36.3
TXT Fireplace mantel:

    Component under subclass 27 in which a casing and shelf are attached to
    both a portion of the static structure and a framed opening made in a
    chimney to hold an open fire.


CLS 52/36.4
TXT Component having specific attachment for an article comprising a
    horizontal, planar surface (e.g., shelf, bed):

    Component under subclass 27 which is specifically designed or modified for
    furniture of the type having a relatively level area lying in a plane that
    carries an item, items, or a person.

    (1)     Note.  Articles that have means for mounting on an existing wall,
    floor, or ceiling are classified with the article.

    (2)     Note.  A static structure component that is made to incorporate the
    article is classified in Class 52.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for a static structure including an auditorium or stadium feature
    arranged relative to a center or attraction.

    29+,    for an article mounted for movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 2.1, 10.1+, and 159.1 for specific bed structure
    with a static structure.

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 33+ and 42+ for
    specific planar surface structure with a static structure.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 19+
    for specific partition structure with a static structure.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 222+ for a ladder,
    scaffold, or mast with a workman's platform with a static structure.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 87.01+ for specific rack structure
    with a static structure.

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses for specific supports (e.g., shelf
    brackets).

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 14+ and 147 for specific chair or seat
    structure with a static structure.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 242, 245+, and  351.1+ for
    specific cabinet structure with a static structure.


CLS 52/36.5
TXT Connecting feature for modular-type panels having article (e.g., cabinet,
    shelf bracket) attachment:

    Component specific attachment under subclass 36.4 in which a means securing
    two edge-abutting thin rigid sheet-type members includes a means for
    supporting the horizontal planar surface.


CLS 52/36.6
TXT Including a slotted tubular portion:

    Connecting feature under subclass 36.5 in which the securing means consists
    of a hollow elongated cylindrical-like section with apertures for the
    article holding piece.


CLS 52/37
TXT Structure under subclass 27 wherein the article support means is attached
    to or adjacent a door or window frame, usually a window washer's hook to
    which a safety belt may be attached.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 50+ for a movable or
    removable shield which blocks a passage vacated by a closure.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 53+ for a balcony-like
    platform detachably mounted in a window opening.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 87.01+ for a rack with means
    specializing it for mounting on a window frame.


CLS 52/38
TXT Structure under subclass 27 wherein the disparate article is a sign, e.g.,
    name plate or ornamental plaque.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103+,   for a structure which, as a whole, serves as a marker or monument
    and see notes thereto.

    105,    for a building component with indicia.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 124.5 for memorial
    tablets and  subclasses  541+  for  illuminated signs and subclasses 584+
    for signs, and see the reference to Class 52 in the class definition of
    Class 40.


CLS 52/39
TXT Structure under subclass 27 in which there is means supporting the
    disparate article from means forming a ceiling, i.e., the under side of a
    roof or floor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 317+ for a suspended support of more general
    application.


CLS 52/40
TXT Structure under subclass 27 in which the disparate article is supported by
    an elongated rigid structure, i.e., pole, post or mast.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for a shaft mounted on a vehicle shell.

    651.01+,for a three dimensional open-work, particularly subclass 649 for a
    mast with distinct terminal structure, e.g., a horned type power line tower.

    697,    for a shaft with braced cross arm.

    720.1+, for a miscellaneous shaft, e.g., pole, post, column, etc.,
    particularly subclass 721 for a composite shaft with laterally extending
    member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 40+,
    particularly subclasses 45 and 149 for elongated members, e.g., poles and
    posts, having claimed features specialized to electrical use such as: (1)
    positive recitation of an electrical conductor, (2) an insulator supporting
    or retaining an electrical conductor or (3) means supporting said insulator.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 475, 567, and 628+ for an elevated tank
    involving specific receptacle structure.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 127+, particularly subclass 146 for a stand
    not involving a specific in situ erected article supporting skeleton tower.

    256,    Fences, for a fence or post having features for retaining a wire or
    rail.


CLS 52/41
TXT Structure under the class definition forming a walkway above a roof or
    forming a support (saddle) for such a walkway, usually present on a railway
    car.


CLS 52/42
TXT Structure under subclass 41 in which the roof covering includes a seam and
    the walkway conforms to the shape of the seam.


CLS 52/43
TXT Structure under subclass 42 in which the walkway or saddle also conforms to
    and accommodates means forming a ridge cap extending along the roof.


CLS 52/44
TXT Structure under subclass 41 in which the walkway is fastened to a roof seam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42+,    for walkways conforming to a roof seam.


CLS 52/45
TXT Structure under the class definition comprising roof construction peculiar
    to railroad cars.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for an insulated car roof.

    18,     for a clerestory or sawtooth roof.

    41+,    for a roof with running board or  saddle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 238.1+ for railway rolling stock
    comprising a special car body.


CLS 52/46
TXT Structure under subclass 45 comprising a covering supporting member
    (carline) which extends laterally of the roof and is substantially
    coextensive with the transverse dimension of the car.


CLS 52/47
TXT Structure under subclass 46 associated structurally with a ridge running
    centrally and longitudinally of the car roof.


CLS 52/48
TXT Structure under subclass 46 comprising a plurality of carlines and
    interconnecting structural members extending longitudinally of the roof or
    diagonally of the carlines.


CLS 52/49
TXT Structure under subclass 46 comprising a cover strip overlying the carline
    and a joint between two juxtaposed roofing sheets, said strip being
    substantially coextensive with the joint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    459+,   for a surfacing with a strip covered joint of more general
    application.


CLS 52/50
TXT Structure under subclass 46 in which the carline is composed of distinct
    sections which diverge or converge toward each other in a nonvertical plane
    or (2) form chords of a truss which diverge or converge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    639+,   for a peaked truss of more general application.


CLS 52/51
TXT Structure under subclass 46 including a separate support or connecting
    means attached to the end of a carline and engaging a vertical support,
    e.g., car wall.


CLS 52/52
TXT Structure under subclass 46 in which the carline is positioned above the
    joint between plural covering sheets.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    459+,   for similar structure of more general utility.


CLS 52/53
TXT Structure under subclass 45 comprising one or more transversely extending
    ribs formed integrally with the roof sections, and rib being substantially
    coextensive with the transverse dimension of the roof.


CLS 52/54
TXT Structure under subclass 45 comprising a central cover sustaining member
    elevated above the edges and extending longitudinally of the roof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for a carline and longitudinal ridge construction.


CLS 52/55
TXT Structure under subclass 54 including relatively movable roof sheets,
    usually to compensate for car motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204.1+, for another construction with a feature for a closure, e.g., a
    removable panel over an opening.

    573.1,  for a residual structure having means accommodating a dimensional
    variation responsive to varying conditions.


CLS 52/56
TXT Structure under subclass 45 comprising a continuation of the facing member
    of the roof which overhangs the junction of the roof and car walls.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11+,    for a cover with section overhanging a gutter.

    94+,    for another gable or eave terminal construction.


CLS 52/57
TXT Structure under the class definition including ornamental means at a ridge
    or peak of a roof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 3 through 30,
    and 542.2+ for a miscellaneous ornamental article not provided for
    elsewhere.


CLS 52/58
TXT Structure under the class definition including sheet material on the
    exterior of a building structure which material is anchored at at least one
    edge and extends over a joint of the structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94+,    for a gable or eave covering sheet material often termed "roof edge
    flashing".

    101,    for an insect blocking means, e.g., termite shield.

    302.5,  for a liquid directing sheet material disposed within the confines
    of a barrier.

    408+,   for a sheet laminae separating components  of  an  in  situ
    construction, e.g., through wall type flashing.

    459+,   for a construction of more general application involving a strip
    covering a juncture of panels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 42+ for a roof or floor drain
    type flashing forming a seal around a duct or pipe.


CLS 52/59
TXT Structure under subclass 58 including a block forming part of a vertical
    structure and having a groove which receives part of the flashing.

    (1)     Note.  For definition of a "BLOCK" see glossary.


CLS 52/60
TXT Structure under subclass 58 wherein the sheet material comprises at least
    two interfitting sections.


CLS 52/61
TXT Structure under subclass 60 wherein the parts which interfit are within a
    vertical structure, i.e., wall.


CLS 52/62
TXT Structure under subclass 58 wherein a part of the sheet material extends
    into a wall.


CLS 52/63
TXT Structure under the class definition forming a complete enclosure and
    including a thin, flexible, flaccid, nonmetallic or foraminous membrane
    which forms an exposed surfacing and is stretched between elongated members
    of its substructure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.11+,  for a structure strengthened by internal fluid pressure, e.g.,
    inflated.

    3+,     for an article supported cover.

    64+,    for a collapsible type structure of rigid panels interconnected for
    repositioning.

    222,    for a tensioned sheet facing.

    273,    for a shaped or edge attached flexible covering, e.g., carpet, in
    contact with a barrier.

    393+,   for a relatively yieldable preformed separator.

    404.1+, for insulation in a hollow cavity.

    518+,   for a shingle type surfacing.

    782.1+, for a composite panel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclasses 87+ for structures
    having a flexible covering without rigid panels preformed before in situ
    erection and see the reference to Class 135 in the class definition of
    Class 52.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 3+ for an enclosure having
    a flexible covering and also an article support.


CLS 52/64
TXT Structure under the class definition including at least one component which
    is a wall, ceiling, roof, cover section or major section thereof which are
    fixedly mounted for repetitious or continuous movement relative to a base
    without total disconnection therefrom for purposes of changing the size or
    function of the structure or a portion thereof or providing continuous
    movement during use, e.g., revolving building.

    (1)     Note.  A movable closure, e.g., door or window is not a barrier
    component except where a door or window constitutes a major section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for a movable stage combined with a static structure forming an
    enclosure therefor.

    29,     for a movable support for a disparate article.

    55,     for a car roof with a relatively movable section.

    63,     for an enclosure including as a component a nonmetallic flexible
    surfacing section.

    79.1+,  for  a  three  dimensional  sub- enclosure which in use is often
    assembled with another enclosure.

    111+,   for a tower or mast with powered motive means.

    122.1+, for a structure with hoist or handle means.

    127.1+, for another structure with an adjunct provided solely for
    facilitating assembly or disassembly.

    143,    for a structure with means transportating it from place-to-place.

    183,    for a stepped structure with interconnecting relatively movable
    components.

    204.1+, for a structure having means forming a window or door opening.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, appropriate subclasses for a
    repetitiously movable closure providing for the passage of persons or
    things through a barrier.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 238.1+, especially subclasses
    377.01+ and 379 for a freight car with a movable body component.

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, for a tent with a foldable frame
    and see the reference to that class in subclass 85 of this class.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, for such a
    structure which does not form an enclosure for a usable space.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 177+ for a collapsible
    vehicle body and subclasses 107+ for a let-down-type vehicle top.


CLS 52/65
TXT Structure under subclass 64 wherein the barrier or major section thereof is
    mounted for rotation in a horizontal plane about a vertical axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for a theater with a movable stage.

    31      and 32, for an enclosure with a disparate article support mounted
    for swinging or rotation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclasses 1+ for an amusement
    roundabout appropriate therefor.


CLS 52/66
TXT Structure under subclass 64 wherein the movable barrier is a complete roof
    which is connected to and movable as an entity relative to its supporting
    columns or walls defining or within an area normally covered by the roof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     for a construction including a flaccid surfacing component.

    69,     for a barrier swingable to act as a wall or canopy.

    83,     for a roof or enclosure suspended by flexible means and fixedly
    related to support means.


CLS 52/67
TXT Structure under subclass 64 wherein the movable barrier sections include
    one structure defining an occupiable space which structure is arranged to
    telescope, either by sliding or swinging, within another such structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79.1+,  for another three-dimensional, preassembled subenclosure which is
    not mounted for movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 638+ for an extensible vehicle structure
    there provided for.


CLS 52/68
TXT Structure under subclass 64 comprising a wall construction having an
    extension, which extension is adapted to be manipulated to form a roof
    section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66,     for an entire roof movably connected to a substructure.

    69,     for a vertical section hinged to swing to form a horizontal
    barrier, e.g., canopy.


CLS 52/69
TXT Structure under subclass 64 in which at least two of the components are
    connected to each other by a hinge fastened to both, with one of the
    components in the erected or use position being vertical but which can be
    folded to a nonvertical, e.g., collapsed position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for a structure, e.g., stile, having a wall extension convertible
    to a roof.

    73,     for a rigid barrier, e.g., canopy, cantilevered from a vertical
    support.


CLS 52/70
TXT Structure under subclass 64 including three walls interconnected by hinge
    means allowing folding of the walls in order to collapse the structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66,     for a foldable enclosure wherein a complete roof is connected to
    walls.

    71,     for a barrier hinged intermediate its length.


CLS 52/71
TXT Structure under subclass 64 wherein the movable barrier section cooperates
    with other sections in forming a barrier, the sections being hingedly
    connected so as to allow the barrier to be collapsed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 166+ for such a
    structure which is freely movable over a supporting surface, e.g., a
    foldable stage, per se.


CLS 52/72
TXT Structure under subclass 64 comprising a structural unit mounted on and
    projecting above a roof surface and communicating with the space below the
    roof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for a centrally ridged car roof with a movable cover section.

    64,     for an upright support member connected to a movable cover section.

    66,     for a cover assembly movable as an entity.

    200,    for a cupola or skylight mounted on a roof and having no movable
    major components.


CLS 52/73
TXT Structure under the class definition including a barrier which extends
    laterally from an upright support with the barrier being unsupported except
    by means connected to the upright support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11+,    for a cover with a surface water receiver at an eave or valley.

    64+,    particularly 66, 68, and 69 for a movable mounted barrier section
    which may be cantilevered in one position.

    97,     for an externally projecting liquid deflector.

    201,    for a bay window which extends downwardly to a base, e.g., the
    earth.

    260,    for a cast in situ column with radial reinforcement for a floor.


CLS 52/74
TXT Structure under subclass 73 including means defining an inclined panel
    overlying an open space which panel extends downwardly and outwardly of a
    vertical structure, usually a wall, to which the upper edge of the panel is
    secured.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    473,    for a louvered panel having no feature for holding it as a unit in
    a cantilevered, e.g., inclined position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclass 71 for a movable rigid
    awning which also acts as a closure.

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclasses 15.1+ for an umbrella.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 45+
    for a flexible panel type awning.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 152+ for a vehicle door
    or window canopy.


CLS 52/75
TXT Structure under subclass 74 wherein the inclined surface consists of a
    series of parallel slats, the longitudinal axes of which are downwardly and
    outwardly inclined.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    518+,   for another lapped multiplanar surfacing.


CLS 52/76
TXT Structure under subclass 75 wherein the outside edges of the outside slats
    are intersected by vertically depending side panels which are secured and
    extend generally perpendicular to the vertical structure.


CLS 52/77
TXT Structure under subclass 76 in which the side panels construction differs
    in kind from that of the inclined surface panel construction.


CLS 52/78
TXT Structure under subclass 74 wherein the inclined surface consists of a
    series of integral or separated slats disposed with their longitudinal axes
    parallel to the major plane of the vertical structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    473,    for another louvered panel.

    518+,   for another lapped multiplanar, e.g., shingle-like surfacing.


CLS 52/79.1
TXT Structure under the class definition including one or more preassembled or
    prefabricated structural means, each defining 1) at least a two sided or
    walled sub-occupiable space assembly, 2) a preassembled or prefabricated
    room or occupiable space which is to be assembled with like or unlike
    structures to form a complete structure, or 3) a single or composite wall,
    usually having a curved cross-section which acts, with other structure to
    form one or more occupiable spaces.

    (1)     Note.  The structures classified in this subclass usually fall into
    one of the following categories: a) one or more prefabricated room units
    which can be associated with other like or unlike units to form a building
    or plurality of occupiable spaces; or b) one or more prefabricated partial
    room units which can be associated with other like or unlike structure to
    form one or more occupiable spaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     for a telescoping three-dimensional subenclosure mounted for
    movement relative to means forming another enclosure.


CLS 52/79.11
TXT Structure under subclass 79.9 wherein the subenclosures include spaced
    forms to accept a cast in situ material, such as concrete, which acts as a
    binder to attach the subenclosures together.


CLS 52/79.12
TXT Structure under subclass 79.9 wherein the sub-enclosures are supported, and
    thereby attached, by a separate framework or vertical and horizontal
    sustainer means.


CLS 52/79.13
TXT Structure under subclass 79.9 wherein a plurality of occupiable
    sub-enclosures or building units are superposed, one above the other, and
    are attached by a separate and distinct vertical tie member.


CLS 52/79.14
TXT Structure under subclass 79.1 wherein the sub-enclosure or building unit is
    a single piece, continuous barrier, e.g., poured concrete monolith.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 405 for concrete modules.


CLS 52/79.2
TXT Structure under subclass 79.1 wherein two or more occupiable units are
    arranged in such a manner that each unit is vertically offset (higher or
    lower) with respect to its adjacent unit, but not directly above or below
    its adjacent unit.


CLS 52/79.3
TXT Structure under subclass 79.1 wherein a plurality of occupiable spaces are
    superposed, one over the other in such a manner as to have their respective
    floors horizontal and parallel to each other, and at least one vertical
    wall of one unit at an angle to at least one vertical wall of another unit.


CLS 52/79.4
TXT Structure under subclass 79.1 wherein the occupiable space has a floor plan
    which is nonrectangular.


CLS 52/79.5
TXT Structure under subclass 79.1 which is made in such a manner so as to be
    collapsible to a more compact form for ease of transport from its place of
    manufacture to the building site.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64+,    for barriers mounted for repetitious movement relative to base
    without disconnection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclass 27 for collapsible
    trailers.


CLS 52/79.6
TXT Structure under subclass 79.1 wherein the occupiable space is a porch or
    vestibule.


CLS 52/79.7
TXT Structure under subclass 79.1 wherein each of two or more subenclosures is
    provided with an opening through one side thereof, such openings to mate
    with each other to form a passage for people from one subenclosure to the
    other.

    (1)     Note.  An opening, for this subclass, may be the absence of an
    entire wall, in which case, each subenclosure would form half of a room.


CLS 52/79.8
TXT Structure under subclass 79.7 wherein the mating openings in each
    occupiable space are doors for the passage of people.


CLS 52/79.9
TXT Structure under subclass 79.1 wherein two or more occupiable spaces have
    therebetween means to attach them together or to another common structure.


CLS 52/80.1
TXT COMPOUND CURVE STRUCTURE:

    Structure under the class definition having a major exposed portion which
    conforms to a surface generated by a curved line moving along a curved
    path; e.g., a sphere, hyperbolic parabloid, or dome.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.11+,  for a construction which is shaped by fluid pressure.

    82,     for a conical structure.

    85,     for a two-dimensional curvilinear entrance archway.

    86+,    for a two-dimensional vertically curved arch.

    200,    for a skylight.

    245+,   for a noncompound curve curvilinear barrier.

    639+,   for a two-dimensional curved or peaked truss.

    648.1+, for openwork.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclasses 124+ for portable
    structures formed with an arc or dome structure.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 565+ for a compound curve; e.g.,
    spheroidal, fluid confining tank.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 872 for a dome-like
    antenna housing having a defined electrical characteristic; e.g., a radome.


CLS 52/80.2
TXT Hyperbolic parabloid shape:

    Compound curve structure under subclass 80.1 which is in the form of a
    saddle shaped quadric surface wherein all sections parallel to one
    coordinate plane are hyperbolas while all the sections parallel to another
    coordinate plane are parabolas (if proper orientation of the coordinate
    axes is assumed).


CLS 52/81.1
TXT Geodesic shape:

    Compound curve structure under subclass 80.1 comprising distinct polygonal
    panels connected to form a surface which is or approximates a segment of a
    sphere.


CLS 52/81.2
TXT Having an underlying grid frame:

    Geodesic shape under subclass 81.1 comprising a network of uniformly spaced
    members which support cover panels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    648.1+, for three dimensional openwork.


CLS 52/81.3
TXT Frame connection detail:

    Frame under subclass 81.2 in which a node of the structural network members
    is particularly designed to hold the members together and transmit forces.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 169+ for a joint designed for
    frame members.


CLS 52/81.4
TXT Comprised entirely of a single self-supporting basic geometrical shaped
    panel:

    Shape under subclass 81.1 in which all the panels are of a simple
    configuration; i.e., triangle or diamond.


CLS 52/81.5
TXT Trapezoidal or rectangular design:

    Panel under subclass 81.4 in which the configuration is a quadrilateral
    having (1) two parallel sides and two diverging (or converging) sides or
    (2) all corners at right angles.


CLS 52/81.6
TXT Monolithic construction:

    Shape under subclass 80.1 which is cast as a single piece.


CLS 52/82
TXT Structure under the class definition forming a cover which has a conical
    surface or formed by three or more generally triangular surface forming
    members the abutting edges of which form seams or ribs which converge upon
    a common locus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for a wall extension movable to form a roof in which an extension
    component is often formed of triangular sections which pivot to form a
    radially ribbed cone.

    80.1+,  for a compound curve structure, e.g., dome, and see notes.

    90.1+,  for another inclined roof or rafter with a substructure.


CLS 52/83
TXT Structure under the class definition including means covering or enclosing
    an area which means is suspended by flexible devices attached to structure
    which extends into the ambient above and beyond said means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22+,    for a vertically spaced roof section.

    73+,    for a cantilevered structure which may include a diagonal guy means.

    120+,   for a mast with cable hoist.

    121     and 122.1+, for a static structure combined with hoist means.

    506.06+, for an internal facer suspended by flexible or pivoted hanger.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclass 90 for a flexible, canopy
    suspended by flexible means.


CLS 52/84
TXT Structure under the class definition which has a curvilinear cross-section
    peculiar to the reduction of wind resistance generally termed air foils or
    streamlined.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    245+,   for a structure having or formed by a curvilinear barrier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 123+ for an aircraft airfoil construction.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 887 for an antenna
    support with a streamlined cross-section.


CLS 52/85
TXT Structure under the class definition including a facing member in the form
    of curvilinear arch having structure for the adherence or retention of
    plastic-to-rigid, water settable material, e.g., plaster, which material
    forms a curved exposed surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204.1+, for another construction forming a portal.

    250+,   for a settable material corner construction of more general
    application.


CLS 52/86
TXT Structure under the class definition peculiar to an in situ erected
    primary, load bearing construction which as a whole forms a curved arch
    whose mid-point is above the externally supported terminal edges.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     for a telescoping three-dimensional section which may include a
    curved segment.

    80.1+,  for a compound curve cover.

    85,     for a settable material, curved, entrance archway.

    245+,   for a space enclosing, curvilinear wall.

    319+,   particularly subclasses 329 and 389 for a generally planar concrete
    barrier which may include a curved backing member supporting a cast section.

    575,    for a key type block, per se, which can be used to form a curved
    arch.

    639+,   for a curvilinear or peaked truss.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    14,     Bridges, subclasses 24+ for an arch bridge which is not primarily
    of stone-like material.


CLS 52/87
TXT Structure under subclass 86 including a horizontal deck construction, e.g.,
    roadway, supported by the structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174+,   for a construction with traffic guiding feature.


CLS 52/88
TXT Structure under subclass 86 in which the arch as a whole is formed by
    flowable cast material which, when set, forms an entity.


CLS 52/89
TXT Structure under subclass 86 in which the arch is formed by abutting masonry
    or concrete-like units.


CLS 52/90.1
TXT INCLINED TOP COVER (E.G., ROOF, A-FRAME):

    Structure under the class definition including cover construction or
    rafters which are at an angle to a horizontal plane.

    (1)     Note.  The rafter are attached to a vertical supporting
    substructure; e.g, walls, studding, columns, etc.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass takes ridge connections without a venting
    function.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45+,    for a car roof construction.

    73+,    for a cantilevered barrier which is more than a mere eave.

    82,     for a conical or radially ribbed cover.

    262+,   for a floor, ceiling, or roof not having a defined feature relating
    to an inclined roof or rafter resting on a substructure.

    272+,   for a construction, per se, formed by intersecting barriers even
    though disclosed or claimed as being at the ridge of a roof.

    478,    for a lapped or strip cover joint surfacing attached to a
    substructure arrangement; e.g., rafter and purlin.

    639,    for a peaked truss construction.


CLS 52/90.2
TXT On existing roof:

    Inclined cover under subclass 90.1 which is erected on a previously built
    cover.


CLS 52/91.1
TXT Self-supporting cover (i.e., without distinct rafters):

    Inclined cover under subclass 90.1 in which a roof spans from eaves to
    ridge without being supported by an underlying frame, beam, etc.


CLS 52/91.2
TXT Eave fixed by masonry or settable material:

    Self-supporting cover under subclass 91.1 specialized to the use of
    cementitious or adhesive type material at the junction of the cover and the
    supporting substructure; e.g., of a wall.


CLS 52/91.3
TXT Connection for abutting cover sections:

    Self-supporting cover under subclass 91.1 where the entire cover is in
    portions which are secured together by a fastening means to make a complete
    cover.


CLS 52/92.1
TXT Rafter tie-in at horizontal-type support (e.g., wall plate):

    Inclined cover under subclass 90.1 in which a roof support beam is (1) set
    or (2) fabricated or cut to a particular shape for attachment to the
    supporting substructure (e.g., wall top plate).


CLS 52/92.2
TXT Distinct connector fixing rafter to wall plate:

    Tie-in under subclass 92.1 in which a discrete fastener secures the roof
    support beam to the supporting substructure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92.1,   for a roof support beam attached to a bearing member without a
    fastener.


CLS 52/92.3
TXT Rafter end terminating at wall exterior face:

    Tie-in under subclass 92.1 in which the end of the roof support beam, at
    the eaves, is in the same plane as the supporting substructure outside
    surface.


CLS 52/93.1
TXT Rafter to vertical support (e.g., stud, column, post) connection:

    Inclined cover under subclass 90.1 in which a roof support beam is directly
    fastened to a load bearing upright element of the supporting substructure.


CLS 52/93.2
TXT Rafter overhangs vertical support outside surface:

    Connection under subclass 93.1 in which a roof support beam extends beyond
    the supporting substructure exterior face.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92.2,   for a rafter connected to a vertical support with a fastener.


CLS 52/94
TXT Structure under the class definition comprising means forming a
    construction at the gable or eave terminus of a roofing surface which is
    different in kind from that forming the surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11+,    for a cover with an eave gutter.

    45+,    for a car roof, particularly subclass

    56      for a  cover  sheet  with  over-hanging, continuing edge section.

    73+,    for a rigid cantilevered barrier, e.g., awning.

    90.1+,  for an inclined roof having supporting substructure.

    262+,   for a roof extending over at least two vertical supports in which
    the construction merely involves a roof overhang (eave).


CLS 52/95
TXT With conduit or passage means (e.g., eave vent, insulation shield for eave
    vent):

    Structure under subclass 94 including means forming a passage or conduit
    from a subjacent area communicating to outside of the roof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11+,    for an eave or valley gutter receiving liquid flowing from the
    upper surface of a roof.

    302.1+, for a construction with fluid passage between the interior of it
    and the ambient, and see notes.

    553,    for a lapped multiplanar surfacing with a unit spacing or space
    forming feature.


CLS 52/96
TXT Structure under subclass 94 wherein the material forming at least part of
    the upper exposed surfaces of a roof between the gables or eaves is bent to
    form a flange-like portion which extends downwardly to a subjacent edge
    portion of the roof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for a car roof with an overhanging edge section.


CLS 52/97
TXT Structure under the class definition including means extending outwardly of
    the plane of a surface means is defined as functioning to deflect a liquid
    (rain) away from the barrier surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11+,    for a cover with an eave gutter.

    56,     for a car cover with overhanging sheet edge.

    58+,    for an exterior type flashing.

    74+,    for a rigid outrigged awning usually having a flashing or liquid
    deflector at the wall juncture.

    94+,    for a coping which may have an edge overhanging a wall.

    302.1+, for a structure with means draining or venting the interior of a
    construction to the ambient.

    302.5   and 408+, for sandwiched preformed imperforate member even though
    they may have a flanged portion bent to contact the wall.

    503+    and 606+, for a liquid deflector within an internal through passage.


CLS 52/98
TXT Structure under the class definition including a distinct section or means
    which facilitates fracturing of the structure or section thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    for an indicia combination including means indicating a cutting or
    breaking line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 797 for an element for that class which is
    breakable, and see the notes.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 265+ for a frangible or knockout receptacle
    closure, and see the notes.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 43 for a stock
    material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or sheet which
    has been weakened to permit fracturing through the thickness thereof, and
    subclass 156 for such a stock material product having a component or layer
    which varies in thickness.


CLS 52/99
TXT Structure under subclass 98 in which the frangible means is made of a
    material differing in kind from that of the primary structure, e.g., a
    metal member attached or embedded in a concrete base member.


CLS 52/100
TXT Structure under subclass 98 in which the frangible section or means is so
    arranged relative to the original circumscribing boundary surfaces that a
    corner or a section within such circumscribing boundary surfaces is
    severable from the original unit.


CLS 52/101
TXT Structure under the class definition which deters the movement of animal
    life having (1) a trap, (2), a device which by movement or force repels
    them or (3) a projection which extends outwardly of a surface of structure
    to block landing on or movement along the structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for a projecting restrainer, e.g., a snow slide stop.

    58+,    for an exterior type flashing.

    97,     for an externally projecting liquid deflector.

    170,    for a shaft reinforcement adjacent the surface of the earth which
    may act as a protector.

    408+,   for a "through type" flashing which may have a protruding edge.

    517,    for a structure with an insect repellent coating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 124+ for a
    vermin destroying device not structurally combined with a building
    structure.


CLS 52/102
TXT Structure under the class definition including a single monolithic unit or
    a single course of connected modules which unit or course rests on the
    earth and defines a low wall edging for an area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for a support for a name plate.

    103,    for a marker or monument.

    128+,   for a burial vault.

    146,    283, 296+, 300+, and 720+, for a shaft or a related structure of
    more general application.

    169.1+, for a structure with defined geographic feature.

    245,    for a tubular structure of more general application.

    311.1+, for a structure with relief pattern forming an ornamental facing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 33 for an edging for gardens there
    provided for.

    256,    Fences, for a structure of greater height than a mere coping or
    edging.


CLS 52/103
TXT Structure under the class definition which indicates a position on or
    particular use of the earth and has (1) a feature, e.g., indicia, serving
    such function or (2) a shape which in its entirety has inherent stability
    against overturning.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for a building structure supporting a sign.

    102,    for an earth supported coping, and see notes.

    105,    for a building structure or building component with indicia.

    128+,   for a grave vault.

    311.1+, for an ornamental component of a building structure for having no
    feature specialized to use as a marker or monument, particularly subclass
    315 for visible embedded elements and subclass 316 for integrally relieved
    surfaces.


CLS 52/104
TXT Structure under subclass 103 including a visible component that permits the
    passage of light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306+,   for a glass block or embedded translucent component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 34 for a pair of
    substantially coextensive light transmissive sheets, spaced from each other
    and sealed at their edges to each other, and subclass 38 for a light
    transmissive mass having a frame or an opaque border around it.


CLS 52/105
TXT Structure under the class definition including (1) means, e.g., writing,
    grooves or markings; which (a) indicates a property or characteristic of an
    element or (b) serves as a gage in the positioning or alignment of a
    structure; or (2) means identifying the location of an embedded or hidden
    device or structure.

    (1)     Note.  Devices having a structural function, e.g., for locking,
    positively positioning, receiving, fasteners, etc., are classified in
    appropriate subclasses below even though they may also serve as an
    indicator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for a supported sign, e.g., name plate.

    103+,   for a marker or monument.

    364+,   for a member acting as a gage for after-applied plaster coating,
    e.g., screed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 187 for a stock
    material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or sheet in
    which one component is of uniform thickness but nonplanar to form a figured
    pattern or to yield information, and subclasses 195+ for a stock material
    product having a discontinuous or differential coating, impregnation or
    bond to form a pattern or to yield information.


CLS 52/106
TXT Structure under the class definition having features peculiar to buildings
    for confining a person so that he cannot leave the building or compartment
    thereof without outside intervention.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65,     for buildings with revolvable section, e.g., revolving prison cells.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 15+ for a jail structure
    restricted to movable doors, their mountings, operators and/or locks.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, appropriate subclasses
    for a related structure for preventing entrance of persons into a building
    or part thereof, except subclass 21.5 which is the residual subclass for a
    structure allowing voice transmission through a closure of barrier
    irrespective of disclosed purpose.


CLS 52/107
TXT Structure under the class definition including means defining a wall
    outside of and attached to the outside of a building wall adjacent a portal
    opening which in use is below grade level.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69+,    for a structure with a defined terrane an feature.


CLS 52/108
TXT Structure under the class definition including flexible strands or strips
    or discrete connected sections which when fed from a coiled or collapsed
    storage position form an elongated rigid shaft section extending from the
    storage position and vice versa.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.11+,  for a structure shaped or strengthened by fluid pressure.

    109,    for a lazy tong extension unit, and see the search notes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclass 41 for a
    self-rigidifying upwardly extensible flexible ladder or escape means.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 370+ and 901 for a
    reeling device which may store a strip that is convertible from a coiled to
    an extended rigid state.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 877 for an antenna
    with reel and subclasses 900+ for rod type antennas.


CLS 52/109
TXT Structure under the class definition comprising a series of diagonal levers
    pivoted together at their mid-points and at their ends by which arrangement
    the device as a whole can be extended and retracted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    14,     Bridges, subclass 45 for a lazy tong draw bridge.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 521 for a lazy tong
    mechanical movement.

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclasses 131 and 145 for
    lazy-tong type frameworks for portable shelters.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 69.1+ for a lazy tong
    means for extending an extension ladder and subclass 141 for a platform
    elevating means which may include lazy tong extension means.

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclasses 211 and 269 for an elevator with lazy tong elevating means.


CLS 52/110
TXT Structure under the class definition including an elongated member mounted
    on a part of the shell of a vehicle body which can be projected or is
    fixedly mounted to extend outwardly of the shell, which member is usually
    disclosed as being an antenna.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    109, and 111+, for another extensible or relatively movable shaft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 711+ for an
    antenna attached to a vehicle wherein a significant electrical or radiation
    limitation is defined.


CLS 52/111
TXT Structure under the class definition comprising  a rigid elongated member
    or construction at least part of a section of which is movable relatively
    to another section or to a base and mechanical motive means for applying
    power to affect such movement, e.g., motor, spring, pulley, crank or cable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for a strip which can be coiled for storage or projected outwardly
    to a rigid position.

    109,    for a lazy tong extension unit.

    110,    for a vehicle shell attached shaft, e.g., antenna.

    122.1+, for a static structure with hoist or handle means for adjusting
    component level or assembling.

    143,    for another static structure with a transportation feature.

    146+,   for a vertical structure with diagonal brace or guy.

    632,    for a manually extensible shaft.

    633+,   for openwork structures, particularly subclasses 648+ for three
    dimensional open work, e.g., tower or mast.

    726.1+, for an end-to-end connected section shaft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, appropriate subclasses for a mast
    with a workman's platform, particularly subclass 62.5 for such an apparatus
    having extensible vertical and nonvertical sections.

    212,    Traversing Hoists, appropriate subclasses for a collapsible,
    extensible, horizontally swinging, or vertically swinging, boom for a
    load-handling apparatus. Patents placed as originals in Class 212 should
    claim structure peculiar to load-handling apparatus.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 351+ for a prop or brace there provided for.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 264+ for a derrick hoist having means to hoist an external load.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 874+ for mast or
    tower type antennas with a significant recitation of an electrical feature.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 431 for an electrically operated light
    supporting post.


CLS 52/112
TXT Structure under subclass 111 in which the terminal ends of shaft section
    which are movable longitudinally each have on their outer ends means for
    engaging opposed barriers, e.g., floor and ceiling of a mine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122.1+, for a building component with hoist or handle means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 31+ for such devices with
    work engaging means supporting the tool device.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 123+ for a horizontal rod type rack
    which includes means engaging opposed walls.

    248,    Supports, subclass 200.1 for an extensible column mounted between
    opposed surfaces for supporting a bracket; and subclass 644 for such a
    column for supporting a machine.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    appropriate subclass for an extensible device, designed to move an object,
    particularly subclass 93 for a fluid operated device, subclass 95 for a
    rack and pinion operated device, subclasses 98+ for a screw-operated
    device, and subclass 387 for a cable-operated device.


CLS 52/113
TXT Structure under subclass 111 wherein spring means are provided to return
    the rigid elongated member or construction to an upright position after
    deflection by a transversely applied outside force.


CLS 52/114
TXT Structure under subclass 111 wherein the structure is mounted to move in a
    substantially horizontal plane about an axis normal to said plane, e.g., a
    rotatable building.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclasses 223+ for a load-handling boom and
    sluing mechanism therefor.


CLS 52/115
TXT Structure under subclass 111 wherein the means for moving the shaft
    includes a motor utilizing a fluid as its source of power which motor is
    connected to the shaft and its base.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclasses for an
    expansible chamber type motor, particularly subclasses 167+ for an
    apparatus wherein some of the extension equals the extension of individual
    chambers.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclasses particularly
    subclasses 51+ for a mutually relatively movable cylinder or sleeve device.

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclasses 238 and 261 for a load-handling
    (i.e., crane) boom and a fluid ram for swinging it in a vertical plane.
    See also subclass 297 for a crane-boom supporting tower and a fluid
    cylinder to raise the same from a horizontal-transport position.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 902 for a
    telescoping fluid pressure actuated rod type antenna having a feature
    specialized to such use.


CLS 52/116
TXT Structure under subclass 111 wherein the shaft is pivoted so as to allow it
    to tilt relative to a base.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for a spring actuated return post or column.


CLS 52/117
TXT Structure under subclass 116 wherein the shaft is divided into multiple
    discrete sections which may change their position with respect to each
    other.


CLS 52/118
TXT Structure under subclass 117 wherein one of said sections is extensible
    from within the other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclass 296 for a telescoping boom-supporting
    tower and means to permit the tower to collapse to a position for
    transporting the crane; and subclasses 231 and 264 for an extensible,
    vertically swinging crane boom.


CLS 52/119
TXT Structure under subclass 117 including a rigid member extending between the
    shaft and base and connected to one and slidably contacting the other,
    acting to elevate the shaft.


CLS 52/120
TXT Structure under subclass 117 including a cable passing over a drum or
    pulley mounted on a vertical member acting to elevate the shaft or shaft
    section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121,    for a cable hoist to extend a non- tilting sectional mast.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclasses 239+ and 262 for a vertically
    swinging crane boom actuated by a flexible cable.


CLS 52/121
TXT Structure under subclass 111 wherein the elongated assembly is extended and
    collapsed by means of a flexible cable, e.g., Bowden wire, or hoisted by a
    cable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for a tilting mast with relatively movable sections utilizing a gin
    pole hoist.

    632,    for a manually extensible shaft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 500.5+ for a hand operated
    control lever and linkage system with a flexible transmitter.

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclasses 230+, 264, and 267 for extensible
    boom structure for load-handling apparatus.


CLS 52/122.1
TXT WITH LIFTING OR HANDLING MEANS FOR PRIMARY COMPONENT OR ASSEMBLY:

    Structure under the class definition including installed means which has
    utility for raising or lowering a construction, or a primary component
    thereof during in situ assembly, or for adjustment while in use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6+,     for a building with a theatre, or stadium feature which may be
    movable.

    29+,    for a disparate article, or its support, mounted for movement.

    64+,    for a barrier, or major component thereof mounted for in situ
    repositioning, i.e., to change size, or shape, or for continuous movement.

    111+,   for a mast or tower with motive power means.

    365,    for a screed having a position adjusting means.

    678,    for means adjustable spacing a concrete reinforcing rod from a form
    surface.

    698+,   for an anchor or tie which may be adjustable.


CLS 52/123.1
TXT Mast or enclosure section elevated to superimposed position:

    Structure under subclass 122.1 wherein the installed means raises (a) a
    disconnected elongated vertical shaft or group of shafts, i.e., a mast, or
    a construction surrounding an area or volume to be occupied by persons,
    animals, or goods, i.e., an enclosure section, to a vertically extending
    position above a lower mast or enclosure section or, (b) a first mast or
    enclosure section to make room for a similar disconnected section below,
    the mast or enclosure sections in their superimposed position being
    longitudinally joined to form an erected structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111+,   for a shaft or mast having power means for moving the shaft or mast
    as an entirety relative to a base section thereof or relative to other
    connected sections thereof during use.


CLS 52/124.1
TXT Vault component:

    Structure under subclass 122.1 in which the primary component is a unit,
    e.g., the cover, of an enclosed receptacle capable of receiving an organic
    or inorganic body for either burial or installment at a particular site.

    (1)     Note.  The body may be, for example, a dead being, a casket, or
    electrical, or sewer connections which are placed within the stationary
    vault at a given location below or on the ground surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128+,   for vaults, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    27,     Undertaking, for a coffin, casket, or portable coffin case for
    receiving and transporting a dead body to a burial site.


CLS 52/124.2
TXT Having hand, hoist, or tackle engaging means embedded in settable material:

    Structure under subclass 124.1 in which the installed means (a) is a
    separate means for positively contacting, i.e., engaging, a living being's
    hand or a mechanical lifting, or grasping device and (b) is, or is attached
    to an element that is, intimately surrounded and held, i.e., embedded, in
    an initially fluent material which has hardened, i.e., set, into a firm
    connection with the engaging means or element all of which substantially
    forms the unit of the receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of settable materials are concrete, cement and
    plaster.

    (2)     Note.  Hand, hoist, or tackle engaging means which are screwed,
    nailed, or otherwise attached to the primary component after it has been
    made are not proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124.1,  for a handle that is integrally cast i.e., not a separate element
    embedded in the settable material.


CLS 52/125.1
TXT Lift slab:

    Structure under subclass 122.1 wherein the construction or primary
    component is a horizontal barrier which is specifically configured to be
    elevated from a stack, or point of manufacture to a final, in-use position
    in a building or other construction such that during elevation the barrier
    maintains a horizontal orientation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126.1+, for installed means which only adjusts the final position of a
    construction or primary component thereof and is not used to lift the
    component into place.

    745.1+, for a process involving forming a unit and moving it into position.

    749.1+, for apparatus especially adapted for in situ construction.


CLS 52/125.2
TXT Construction or component having means to engage hand or cable-type lifting
    means:

    Structure under subclass 122.1 in which the installed means is a means
    attached to, integrally formed with, or embedded in the construction or
    primary component for positively contacting, i.e., engaging, (a) a living
    being's hand, or (b) a flaccidly suspended or constructed hoisting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    698+,   for anchor elements, per se, which may be used as engaging means.


CLS 52/125.3
TXT Unitary engaging means in monolithic or single construction or component:


    Structure under subclass 125.2 in which the construction or primary
    component is formed from a monolithic or single piece of material having a
    portion thereof which is given a specific shape to form the engaging means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124.1,  for vault components having unitary engaging means.


CLS 52/125.4
TXT Embedded in settable material:

    Structure under subclass 125.2 in which the engaging means is, or is
    attached to an element that is, intimately surrounded and held, i.e.,
    embedded, in an initially fluent material which has hardened, i.e., set,
    into a firm connection with the engaging means or element all of which
    substantially forms the construction or primary component.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of settable materials are concrete, cement and
    plaster.

    (2)     Note.  Engaging means which are screwed, nailed, or otherwise
    attached to the construction or  primary component after it has been made
    are not proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    698+,   for an anchor or other handling means adapted to be embedded in
    settable material.


CLS 52/125.5
TXT Embedded socket element:

    Structure under subclass 125.4 where the engaging means comprises a
    separate, female type, or concave receiving chamber embedded in the
    construction or primary component with the sides of the receiving chamber
    being engaged by the hand or the hoisting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    704+,   for sockets, per se.


CLS 52/125.6
TXT Engaging means cooperates with rigid, intermediate device which distributes
    load or lifts multiple components:

    Structure under subclass 125.2 wherein the engaging means is connected to
    the cable type lifting means through a solid, i.e., rigid, element
    suspended from the cable type lifting means which element either (a)
    distributes the component's load between plural locations on the element,
    or (b) lifts a plurality of components.


CLS 52/126.1
TXT Position adjusting means; e.g., leveling:

    Structure under subclass 122.1 having installed means consisting of
    position adjusting means (a) for moving a construction or primary component
    thereof towards its final position, (b) for holding the construction or
    component in its final position relative to a nonparallel subsurface, or
    (c) for leveling the construction or component relative to a support
    surface.

    (1)     Note.  A support surface may be a predominantly horizontal surface
    such as the earth, or it may be another primary component of a static
    structure or construction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122.1,  123.1, 124.1, 124.2, 125.1 - 125.6, for installed means which move
    a construction or primary component thereof from an inoperative location to
    an operative, or in use position.


CLS 52/126.2
TXT For service duct or outlet:

    Structure under subclass 126.1 wherein the construction or primary
    component is either (a) a conduit for water, fuel, heating or cooling
    fluids, or electrical conductors, or (b) an outlet element for the conduit,
    and the position adjusting means moves the conduit or the outlet element
    relative to each other or the support surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220.1+, for a service duct, per se, within a barrier.


CLS 52/126.3
TXT For vertical barrier only:

    Structure under subclass 126.1 wherein the construction or primary
    component has its largest, generally planar, surface perpendicular to the
    horizon, i.e., vertical, in its final assembled form and prevents or
    inhibits the passage of persons, or things, i.e., acts as a barrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126.1+, for both vertical and horizontal barriers being adjusted together.

    238.1+, for adjustable components of a vertical barrier, e.g., a wall,
    which engage a floor or ceiling without adjusting the position of the
    barrier.


CLS 52/126.4
TXT Threaded element engages support surface:

    Structure under subclass 126.3 wherein the position adjusting means
    consists of a helically ridged, i.e., threaded, element which contacts the
    supporting surface and, through rotation of the threaded element, serves to
    adjust the position of the vertical barrier.

    (1)     Note.  The threaded element may be internally or externally
    threaded, e.g., a nut or a bolt.


CLS 52/126.5
TXT For horizontal barrier only:

    Structure under subclass 126.1 wherein the construction or primary
    component has its largest, generally planar, surface parallel with the
    horizon, i.e., horizontal, in its final assembled form and prevents or
    inhibits the passage of persons or things, i.e., acts as a barrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126.1+, if both vertical and horizontal barriers are being adjusted
    together.


CLS 52/126.6
TXT Adjustable pedestal:

    Structure under subclass 126.5 wherein the position adjusting means has a
    wide base which engages a lower supporting surface and holds an upper,
    relatively movable portion which engages the horizontal barrier.


CLS 52/126.7
TXT Threaded element engages support surface:

    Structure under subclass 126.1 wherein the position adjusting means
    consists of a helically ridged, i.e., threaded, element which contacts the
    supporting surface and, through rotation of the threaded element, serves to
    adjust the position of the construction or primary component thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The threaded element may be internally or externally,
    threaded, e.g., a nut or a bolt.


CLS 52/127.1
TXT WITH ADJUNCTIVE MEANS FOR ASSEMBLY OR DISASSEMBLY:

    Structure under the class definition including means which facilitates the
    physical positioning of a component in the static structure or its removal
    therefrom and is not essential to the completed structure but is in the
    nature of an accessory, i.e., an adjunct, which is useful only in joining
    or uniting, i.e., assembling, the component to the structure, or separating
    or dividing, i.e., disassembling, the component from the structure.

    (1)     Note.  Tools, or access openings used in the assembly or
    disassembly of a component and structure are included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122.1+, for a static structure with an installed lifting or handling means
    which is often used for assembling and disassembling, and the notes
    thereunder.

    514,    for a damaged element which has been repaired by the use of an
    additional element.

    641     and 645+, for a truss wherein the components are formed for
    adjustment, collapse, or demounting.

    741.1+, for a process of assembly or manufacture of an in situ construction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 315+ for a fluid handling device with
    assembly means.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 76+ for heat exchange apparatus with
    assembly means.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 85.1+ for wells with below and above ground
    modifications of an assembly or disassembly nature.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 232+ for liquid
    purification or separation devices with assembly means.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 18+ for pipe joints or
    couplings with assembly means or features.


CLS 52/127.11
TXT Cam surface:

    Structure under subclass 127.7 wherein the adjunctive means manipulates or
    provides admittance to a sliding, wedging or rotating eccentric means,
    i.e., a camming means, which uses its sloped or eccentric face in the
    assembly or disassembly of the structure.

    (1)     Note.  Threaded engaging surfaces alone are not considered camming
    surfaces although if they propel a camming surface or are tapered for
    causing a camming action they would be considered proper herein.


CLS 52/127.12
TXT Threaded engagement means:

    Structure under subclass 127.7 wherein the tool manipulates, or is provided
    admittance to a helically ridged element, i.e., a threaded element, whereby
    the threaded element positively contacts and is used for assembly or
    disassembly of the structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127.11, for a threaded element which engages or comprises a cam or wedge.


CLS 52/127.2
TXT Removable prop or brace combined with structure component:

    Structure under subclass 127.1 wherein the adjunctive means includes a
    removable, compressive or tensile, element, i.e., a prop or brace, which
    bridges between spaced parts of the static structure to support or hold the
    component of the static structure during assembly of the structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127.3,  for a prop or brace which is not temporary and positions the
    component relative to a flowable, or settable material.

    146,    for a prop or brace which is otherwise not temporary.

    749.1+, for props and braces for assembly of a static structure which are
    not claimed in combination with the static structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, for a prop or brace used only in
    shipping of a static structure component.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 354.1+ for an adjustable prop or brace for an
    article.

    269,    Work Holders, for general purpose braces and work holders.


CLS 52/127.3
TXT Having component positioning means or control means for flowable material:

    Structure under subclass 127.1 wherein the adjunctive means (a) locates the
    component relative to the static structure or another component thereof to
    provide reaction against, space for, drying or setting time for, or a
    shaping configuration to, a fluent substance, or (b) regulates or directs
    the flow of the substance.

    (1)     Note.  The fluent substance need only be fluent during the
    positioning of the component and may harden or set thereafter, e.g.,
    concrete, cement, plaster, or glue.

    (2)     Note.  Adjunctive means which excludes the flowable material from a
    building part, or permits it to flow into a building part are included
    herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127.2,  for a removable (i.e., temporary) prop or brace combined with a
    component for positioning the component relative to a flowable or settable
    material during assembly.

    371,    if the component being positioned is a screed.

    603,    if the means is integral with the module or element being
    positioned.

    677+,   if the component being positioned is an open-work, or rebar.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    for a means positioning a building component in a removable form- work, or
    means retaining removable formworks.


CLS 52/127.4
TXT Opening or passageway for flowable material:

    Structure under subclass 127.3 wherein the adjunctive means provides an
    ingress for the fluent material to enter into the component of the static
    structure.


CLS 52/127.5
TXT Specific hand or tool engaging surface on structure component:

    Structure under subclass 127.1 wherein the adjunctive means includes a face
    on the component of the static structure to be positively contacted, i.e.,
    engaged, directly by a hand of a living being or by a mechanical force
    transmitting implement, i.e., a tool, during assembly or disassembly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127.7,  for an opening, or component configuration which merely provides
    access for a tool, but is not intended to be engaged by the tool, or if
    only a locking, latching, or attaching means is engaged.


CLS 52/127.6
TXT Panel and frame connection:

    Structure under subclass 127.5 wherein a flat, planar component or assembly
    and a peripheral  framework  component or assembly are joined together and
    either of the components or assemblies, or a retaining trim strip therefor,
    has the tool engaging face.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127.8,  for a tool, or an opening providing access for tool, used in
    locking, latching, or attaching and wherein the tool only engages the lock,
    latch, or attaching means.


CLS 52/127.7
TXT Structure includes tool or opening to provide access for a tool used in
    operating a locking, latching, attaching, or adjusting means:

    Structure under subclass 127.1 wherein the adjunctive means includes either
    a mechanical force transmitting implement, i.e., a tool, for manipulating a
    securing, connecting, fastening, or regulating means during the assembly or
    disassembly, or a tool admitting aperture which is only used during the
    assembly, or disassembly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    584,    for a clamp type joining means where no tool or access opening is
    claimed.

    749.1+, for a tool, or implement for in situ construction where no part of
    the building is claimed.


CLS 52/127.8
TXT Panel joined to or released from peripheral frame:

    Structure under subclass 127.7 wherein the component is a flat, planar
    sheet of material to be attached to or removed from a surrounding framework
    without disassembling the framework.


CLS 52/127.9
TXT Tool operates swinging arm latch:

    Structure under subclass 127.7 wherein the adjunctive means manipulates or
    provides admittance to a connecting means having a pivot attaching it to
    one component and spaced engaging means adapted to engage a second
    component, i.e., a pivoted or swinging arm latching means.


CLS 52/128
TXT Structure under the class definition including means defining a receptacle
    having a space which receives a dead body, casket or coffin at the burial
    site for interment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    Particularly 19, 192+, 198+, 234+, 245+, and 261+ for a construction
    forming an enclosure of more general application.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    27,     Undertaking, subclasses 2+ for a coffin, casket or portable
    coffin-case for receiving and transporting a body for burial.


CLS 52/129
TXT Structure under subclass 128 including apparatus and materials for treating
    the corpse or products, e.g., fluids and gasses emitted by it.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    27,     Undertaking, subclasses 21.1+ for a coffin or burial casket having
    means for disinfecting or preserving.


CLS 52/130
TXT Structure under subclass 129 including a disinfectant means acting to
    preserve the corpse or to treat the corpse product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclass for a disinfecting composition.


CLS 52/131
TXT Structure under subclass 128 including an opening, e.g., port, in an outer
    barrier of the receptacle which communicates the enclosed space with the
    ambient atmosphere or earth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129+,   for a drain or vent with a corpse product treating feature.

    198+,   for a similar structure of more general application.


CLS 52/132
TXT Structure under subclass 131 including structure within the enclosed space
    for directing circulating air.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    454,    Ventilation, appropriate subclass, for a ventilated enclosure of
    more general application having means for directing or forcing air to or
    from an enclosed space relative to the ambient atmosphere.


CLS 52/133
TXT Structure under subclass 128 including means combined with the receptacle,
    e.g., vault, having functions other than primarily forming the structure of
    the receptacle or perfecting such structure for its primary purpose, e.g.,
    tombstones, transparent section, wheels, closure operations, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124.1+, for a vault element with handling means.

    129+,   for a corpse or corpse product treating combination.

    131+,   for a vault with fluid guiding means.

    139+,   for a vault with a closure which may include a hinge or operator.


CLS 52/134
TXT Structure under subclass 128, including a building construction in addition
    to that forming the receptacle, e.g., a mausoleum.

    (1)     Note.  The building construction usually holds a plurality of
    vaults arranged to form a wall which defines a side of an access corridor
    in a building and each vault has an entrance opening into the corridor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    234+,   for a multiroom building of more general utility.


CLS 52/135
TXT Structure under subclass 128 including concentric inner and outer wall
    layers with a sealing material that is different from the material of the
    receptacles, e.g., asphalt or Portland cement, between the receptacles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    265,    for a floor and wall formed by a laminated barrier enclosing a
    space.

    267+,   for a laminated wall enclosing a space.

    408+,   for a construction involving a preshaped dividing lamina.


CLS 52/136
TXT Structure under subclass 128 including structure dividing the enclosed
    space into a plurality of compartments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    for a building having plural corpse compartments.

    135,    for a vault of concentric receptacles with dissimilar lamina
    between them.

    234+,   for a compartment construction of more general utility, e.g., a
    multiroom building.


CLS 52/137
TXT Structure under subclass 136 including plural cover type members, one above
    the other, defining a compartment therebetween, and a compartment for the
    corpse below the lower cover member.

    (1)     Note.  A vault having a casket chamber and a dead air chamber above
    the casket chamber are here included.


CLS 52/138
TXT Structure under subclass 128 including a continuous concave, open-bottom,
    cover (hood) having substantial side walls adapted to envelop a casket or
    coffin and usually resting upon a base.


CLS 52/139
TXT Structure under subclass 128 including a separate closure, forming one
    barrier wall of the receptacle, which is placed against terminal edges of
    other walls of the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    for a hood-like receptacle the vertical walls of which rest on a
    floor.


CLS 52/140
TXT Structure under subclass 139 including a feature which confines flowable,
    plastic or elastomeric material acting as a hermetic seal between the
    closure and the walls of the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    393+,   for a construction with resilient divider between opposed layers.

    416+,   for lapped multiplanar or strip covered joint surfacing utilizing a
    settable material applied in situ.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 475.1+ for a closure
    seal, e.g., striker gasket or weather strip and see the search notes
    thereto for loci of other seals.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 628+ for a static contact seal for other than an
    internal combustion engine, or pipe, conduit, or cable.


CLS 52/141
TXT Structure under subclass 140 including a closure and receptacle wall
    juncture feature of the tongue-and-groove type and in which the sealing
    material is in the groove and the tongue is embedded in the sealing
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    436,    for a construction where there is a settable material section
    between integral interengaging means or modules.


CLS 52/142
TXT Structure under subclass 139 in which the receptacle side walls and the
    floor are composed of a plurality of distinct sections or units assembled
    together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250+,   for a construction forming an intersection with a cast component.

    264+,   for a construction wherein a floor supports spaced walls.


CLS 52/143
TXT Structure under the class definition including means facilitating the
    transportation of an entire building or a component specialized to such use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122.1+, for a structure with lifting or handling means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, for a railway vehicle specialized to such
    use.

    114,    Ships, for an enclosure specialized to use on water.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, for a vehicle having running gear
    or other features specialized to travel over the earth.  Class 52 takes a
    separable enclosure which is convertible to in situ ground supported use
    and a mere structure forming a box-like enclosure.


CLS 52/144
TXT Structure under the class definition which in the completed construction
    presents an exposed, i.e., visible, face having a defined physical
    configuration peculiar to the attenuation of sound.

    (1)     Note.  Mere definition of a material, e.g., fibrous, porous, rock
    wool, etc., is not a definition of a physical configuration and such
    subject matter classified elsewhere in this class on other features, and
    see the references herein after under "Search Class".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for an insulated car roof.

    167.1+, for means compensating earth- transmitted force, e.g., earthquakes.

    238.1+, for a resilient spacer, holding a partition from a barrier, which
    may act to absorb sound waves.

    347,    for a member isolating a backing from support.

    380+,   for a cast in situ barrier having an isolated space filled with
    insulated material.

    393+,   for a component separated by a relatively yieldable spacer.

    404.1+, for a construction with a nonsettable insulating material within a
    cavity.

    573.1,  for a structure having means accommodating dimension variation
    responsive to changing conditions, which means may also act as buffer to
    sound waves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, particularly subclasses 30 and 290+ for a sound
    deadening unit, per se, even though it may be made of multiple layers,
    i.e., not including features for a building structure combination.


CLS 52/145
TXT Structure under subclass 144 wherein a perforated exposed sheet conceals a
    sound absorbing material.


CLS 52/146
TXT Structure under the class definition including an elongated rigid
    vertically extending primary structure, e.g., wall, column or post, which
    is held against a laterally applied force by a brace or guy which is
    outside of and extends away from the primary structure diagonally downward
    to a base for the primary structure, usually the earth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    296+,   for a footing.

    651.01+,for a three dimensional openwork, e.g., skeleton tower, which often
    includes diagonal bracing between corner shafts.

    720.1+, for a shaft structure of general application.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 119.01+ for a clothes line with
    isolated poles in which the poles may be guyed.


CLS 52/147
TXT Apparatus under subclass 146 including (1) discrete guard member attached
    to the brace or guy and serving as a protector therefor or (2) such a
    guard, per se.


CLS 52/148
TXT Apparatus under subclass 146 wherein the guy is a flexible strand, e.g.,
    rope or cable.


CLS 52/149
TXT Apparatus under subclass 146 including means to adjust the brace or guy.


CLS 52/150
TXT Apparatus under subclass 149 in which the adjusting means is at or adjacent
    the point of contact of the brace or guy and the primary structure.


CLS 52/151
TXT Apparatus under the subclass 149 having a lateral tie between the brace and
    structure which tie is provided with an adjustment to vary the stress
    therein.


CLS 52/152
TXT Apparatus under subclass 146 having braces which are spaced or angularly
    related to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148,    for a flexible diagonal member which often requires a plurality of
    such members to properly guy the vertical structure.


CLS 52/153
TXT Structure under the class definition including an elongated rigid structure
    (shaft) or its base having a rigid sheet form brace member mounted on and
    projecting outwardly thereof with the juncture of the shaft and member
    extending in the direction of the shaft axis, said member in use serving to
    resist lateral movement of the shaft relative to the earth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155+,   for a shaft with a terminal earth piercing or expanding feature.


CLS 52/154
TXT Structure under subclass 153 in which two or more of the projecting sheet
    form members are not in a single plane.


CLS 52/155
TXT Structure under the class definition including anchoring means having a
    component which in use is held below ground and which holds another
    component usually extending above the earth's surface, which means has (1)
    a feature for piercing the earth or (2) an anchor component which moves
    outwardly relative to the element held and thereby acts to prevent or
    retard movement of the latter relative to the earth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153+,   for a shaft with an embedded wing type brace.

    166,    for a "deadman" type anchor.

    169.1+, for a residual construction having a defined terranean feature.

    292+,   for a wall or shaft footing.

    679+,   for a support for a reinforcing rod having a base penetrator with a
    limiting stop.

    698+,   for a residual anchor or tie acting between components of a
    building construction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclasses 206+ for an expansible anchor or casing operating
    in or as a well casing.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 6+ for
    structurally related means acting to ground an electric charge to the earth.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 327+ for a bit or bit
    element adapted for boring or penetrating the earth.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 85, 87, 156, and 545 for a support comprising
    a ground inserted anchor.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 231+ for a pile to be
    driven into the earth, particularly subclass 244 for a process or apparatus
    for placing a shaft provided with laterally projecting structure to anchor
    the shaft; and subclasses 259.1+ for a structure for preventing undesired
    earth movement and provided with earth anchors to secure the structure to
    an earth formation.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, subclasses 1 through 80 for an anchor or holding
    device in the form of an expansible member which merely cooperates with a
    preformed opening in a preformed component, e.g., a wall.


CLS 52/156
TXT Structure under subclass 155 in which the below-ground components are
    discrete units each differing in kind and acting to prevent or retard
    translatory withdrawal or swinging movement of the structure as a whole
    after final positioning.


CLS 52/157
TXT Structure under subclass 155 having means attached to, extending outwardly
    of and inclined relatively to the longitudinal axis of the element held,
    which means penetrates and acts to pull the element into the earth or base
    when the element held is rotated.


CLS 52/158
TXT Structure under subclass 155 in which a piercing element is attached
    outside of the anchored structure with the pierce being mounted for
    translatory movement relative to the anchored structure when it is driven
    into the earth.


CLS 52/159
TXT Structure under subclass 155 in which an anchoring component is mounted for
    movement in a plane normal to the principal longitudinal axis of an
    elongated rigid structure held thereby.


CLS 52/160
TXT Structure under subclass 155 including a movable cam or plate which acts to
    spread the movable anchor component relative to the parts to which it is
    attached.


CLS 52/161
TXT Structure under subclass 160 in which the actuating means for the cam or
    plate includes a screw.


CLS 52/162
TXT Structure under subclass 155 including a part including a barbed head or
    hook member movably connected through pivot means to the major component of
    the earth held means.


CLS 52/163
TXT Structure under subclass 162 in which the pivot means for the barb or hook
    member is substantially spaced from the terminals or edges thereof.


CLS 52/164
TXT Structure under subclass 162 including a separate brace or tie which is
    pivotally connected between the harbor hook member and the part held by it.


CLS 52/165
TXT Structure under subclass 155 including an elongated rigid member and a
    separate earth piercing section substantially axially aligned therewith and
    attached thereto.


CLS 52/166
TXT Structure under the class definition including means having a component
    which in use is buried below ground and holds another component which
    components are substantially different in kind and extend at substantially
    right angles to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155+,   for a piercing or expanding type earth anchor.


CLS 52/167.1
TXT MEANS COMPENSATING EARTH-TRANSMITTED FORCE (E.G., EARTHQUAKE):

    Structure under the class definition including features (a) allowing motion
    between supported and supporting structures when a force is transmitted to
    the structure through the earth, (b) which compensate for earth motion
    without affecting structure supported by the earth, or (c) having means for
    absorbing or confining a force transmitted through the earth to a structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    393+,   for a resilient member sandwiched in between two opposed members.

    573.1,  for other constructions having means to provide dimensional
    variation responsive to changing conditions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    14,     Bridges, appropriate subclasses, for roller bearing expansion
    devices which allow relative movement between the bridge structure and its
    support.

    384,    Bearings, for devices which reduce friction between relatively
    moving elements.


CLS 52/167.2
TXT Dynamic force generator:

    Structure under subclass 167.1 including active apparatus for producing
    counteractive accelerations in the mass of the building or in the mass of
    the apparatus which tends to nullify the effects of an earthquake.

    (1)     Note.  Moving weights, sloshing liquids, pendulums, and
    eccentrically weighted flywheels are some examples of apparatus appropriate
    for inclusion in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 559 for general purpose moving weights which may
    be part of a vibration dampening means or attenuation system.


CLS 52/167.3
TXT Cross bracing:

    Structure under subclass 167.1 including an array of strategically placed
    members which triangulate an otherwise conventionally constructed building
    to minimize the tendency for that structure to rock when subjected to an
    earth-transmitted force.


CLS 52/167.4
TXT Relative motion means between a structure and its foundation:

    Structure under subclass 167.1 including a means allowing movement between
    a static structure and its supporting foundation.


CLS 52/167.5
TXT Rolling support:

    Structure under subclass 167.4 wherein the means allowing motion comprises
    a rolling device (e.g., a ball bearing or a cylindrical bearing) between
    the structure and its supporting foundation.


CLS 52/167.6
TXT With damping or limiting means:

    Structure under subclass 167.5 including an additional means to retard
    movement of the structure or to confine or restrict movement of the
    structure relative to its supporting foundation.


CLS 52/167.7
TXT Elastomeric support:

    Structure under subclass 167.4 wherein the means allowing motion includes a
    deformable bearing surface of rubber or a rubberlike supporting device
    positioned between the structure and the supporting foundation.


CLS 52/167.8
TXT With damping or limiting means:

    Structure under subclass 167.7 including an additional means to retard
    movement of the structure or to limit or confine movement of the structure
    relative to its supporting foundation.


CLS 52/167.9
TXT Polymeric support structure (e.g., TeflonR):

    Structure under subclass 167.4 wherein the means allowing motion includes
    providing a supporting surface of polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE or TeflonR)
    or other similar polymeric substance between a structure and its supporting
    foundation.


CLS 52/168
TXT Structure under the class definition including means for holding a supply
    of liquid which is attached to or is related to a building structure or
    building component, the liquid in this container acting to preserve or
    protect the structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 357+ for a fluid handling system of more
    general application which is installed in a building.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, subclasses 5+ for fluid fire extinguishing
    systems installed in a building.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 208+ for a
    building having a liquid supply means and a sprinkling, spraying or a
    diffusing device.


CLS 52/169.1
TXT Structure under the class definition including a claimed feature of the
    earth or relationship to the earth, e.g., grade level, material between a
    wall and the earth, underground structures resisting external objects,
    position in the earth, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23+,    for a structure with an exterior hold down anchored to the earth.

    86+,    for vertically curved arch with earth supported abutments.

    102,    for an earth supported type coping.

    128+,   for a shaft with diagonal earth engaging brace or guy.

    155+,   for a structure with earth piercing features.

    167.1+, for a structure combined with means for compensating earth
    transmitted forces, e.g., earthquake.

    274     and 292+, for a footing or footing combination.

    741.11+, for a construction process utilizing the earth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    14,     Bridges, appropriate subclasses for structure there provided for
    which carries traffic across an open space.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 260 for such systems with a subterranean
    feature.

    89,     Ordnance, subclass 36.01 for ordnance shields which may be
    underground.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 234.6 for fluid systems with a vehicle
    guide or support, 236.1 for fluid distribution systems involving geographic
    features and 363 for a ground supported enclosure for such a system.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 45 for a heat exchanger structurally
    related to the earth.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 170, for such system
    combined with a geographic feature.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, appropriate subclasses for a
    process or apparatus there provided for, particularly  subclasses 53+ for
    underground fluid storage; subclasses 229+ for foundations which are not
    provided for elsewhere and methods and apparatus for constructing the same;
    and subclasses 258+ for a structure or method for preventing the earth from
    shifting.


CLS 52/169.11
TXT Structure under subclass 169.1 with means to control the transfer of heat
    between a building and the earth.  The means can include a positioning of a
    building relative to a "frostline", i.e., the maximum depth of freezing.


CLS 52/169.12
TXT Structure under subclass 169.1 for enclosing the space between the earth's
    surface and the floor of a mobile home.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155+,   for piercing or expanding earth anchors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 768 for trailer skirts.


CLS 52/169.13
TXT Structure under subclass 169.1 which is an elongated rigid substantially
    upright member, e.g., column, pole post, etc.


CLS 52/169.14
TXT Structure under subclass 169.1 provided with means, such as a lamina or
    coating, to prevent the passage of water through the floor or wall of the
    structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169.5,  for waterproofing means which includes a conduit, pipe or porous
    medium.


CLS 52/169.2
TXT Structure under subclass 169.1 wherein 1) separate static structures, 2)
    roads or pavements, 3) subdivided land areas, 4) naturally occurring
    geographic landmarks, such as rivers, mountains, etc., or 5) any
    combination of 1) through 4) thereof, are established in a specified
    relationship to each other.

    (1)     Note.  The mere fact that land is inclined is not considered a
    geographic feature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169.4,  for a single building positioned on inclined land.


CLS 52/169.3
TXT Structure under subclass 169.2 wherein the specified relationship is
    between at least two buildings or two subdivided land areas.


CLS 52/169.4
TXT Structure under subclass 169.1 wherein a structure is positioned on land
    which is inclined.


CLS 52/169.5
TXT With drain or vent exterior to foundation perimeter:

    Structure under subclass 169.1 in which a fluid conducting means, such as a
    pipe, pipe system or a porous medium, facilitates the flow of water or air
    adjacent the outside of the static structure base but not beneath the base.

    (1)     Note.  Under the basement or cellar floor drain or vent is
    classified in Class 52, subclasses 302.3+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198,    for an enclosure or cover with a fluid guiding part between ambient
    and enclosed usable space.

    302.1+, for a wall, ceiling, or floor with a passage for a gas or liquid.


CLS 52/169.6
TXT Structure under subclass 169.1 which is underground and defines an enclosed
    usable space with portal means at or leading to the earth's surface.
    Included herein are root cellars, bomb shelters, tornado shelters,
    underground storage tanks and the like.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19+,    for enclosures having horizontal or inclined covers with an
    entrance for persons or objects.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, for protective devices
    of that class.


CLS 52/169.7
TXT Structure under subclass 169.1 which is embedded in the earth and has an
    open top adjacent the earth's surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 488+ for a
    complete pool-type receptacle, and see note to Class 52 for line details.


CLS 52/169.8
TXT Structure under subclass 169.7 wherein the vertical walls which define the
    container structure have laterally spaced foundation elements with
    interconnecting means.


CLS 52/169.9
TXT Structure under subclass 169.1 which includes spaced column-like or
    pad-like discrete foundation elements in a building structure extending
    from the structure downwardly into the earth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155+,   for a piercing or expanding earth anchor.

    169.13, for a post related to the earth.

    299,    wherein a framework spans spaced footings.


CLS 52/170
TXT Structure under subclass 169.1 wherein an elongated rigid substantially
    upright member is provided with means defined as acting to reinforce it at
    or adjacent the earth's surface.


CLS 52/171.1
TXT VIEWING PORT FOR SPECIFIC ENVIRONMENT:

    Structure under the class definition in which a transparent panel is
    installed in a wall, ceiling, or floor of, usually, a high temperature or
    pressure chamber for the purpose of watching an operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204.1+, for a window or door frame.

    204.5+, for a window.

    455+,   for a door.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 200 for a heated stove door or window
    with a transparent panel.


CLS 52/171.2
TXT VEHICLE-TYPE WINDSHIELD DEFOGGER OR DEICER:

    Structure under the class definition in which a transparent panel is
    installed in an automobile, truck, airplane, train, etc., and includes
    means to either dissipate condensation or melt frozen water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    397+,   for edging around a window pane.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 203 for an electrically heated window.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclass 28 for such a system including a window
    heater.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 84.1+ for a windshield
    on a vehicle body and top structure.


CLS 52/171.3
TXT TRANSPARENT PANEL HAVING ACTIVE TREATMENT WITH GAS OR LIQUID:

    Structure under the class definition in which a window includes means for
    altering opacity, translucence, insulating ability, or color, etc., of the
    window.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204.5+, for a window.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 250.001+ for
    a window cleaning attachment, particularly subclasses 250.01+ for such a
    combination with material supply means.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 248 for a display-type refrigerator with
    condensate remover or preventer and subclasses 275+ for a refrigerator with
    an additional heater to prevent or remove frozen condensate caused by the
    refrigerating means.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 85, 93, 95+, 121+, 128+, and 196+ for means
    for directing air relative to a window pane.


CLS 52/172
TXT Structure under subclass 171.3 in which the treating is a sorbent for water
    vapor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 80, 81,
    467,  and 468  for a process of drying a gas and directing it relative to
    discrete articles for the purpose of treating the article.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 108+ for solid sorbent
    apparatus, per se.


CLS 52/173.1
TXT COMBINED:

    Structure under the class definition in which claimed subject matter
    provided for in another class (e.g., heater) is incorporated with a static
    construction, a component thereof, or a panel structurally similar to a
    building panel.

    (1)     Note.  Combinations relating to operative apparatus wherein an
    operating unit or significant characteristic for such a class is defined;
    e.g., electrical device or a burner, or wherein the enclosure is a furnace,
    a casing for a machine, a tool, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27+,    for a static structure specifically modified to hold a disparate
    article.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 259.1+ for a structural installation.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 431 for an instrument casing.

    89,     Ordnance, subclass 36.04 for shields for a fixed structure.

    104,    Railways, subclasses 27+ for terminals and stations.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, 158+ for insulator
    supporting or attaching means.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 872+ for housings.


    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 600+ for
    mounting assembly.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 145+ with static structure.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 451+ for a guard or housing for use with an
    abrading device.


CLS 52/173.2
TXT With a loading dock seal:

    Structure under subclass 173.1 in which an impact absorbing and weather
    sheltering device is secured to the static structure specifically for the
    reception of a vehicle, usually of a tractor-trailer type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.12,   for inflatable loading dock seals


CLS 52/173.3
TXT With a sunlight activated device (e.g., passive solar or photoelectric):

    Structure under subclass 173.1 in which a solar energy collecting apparatus
    is an integral portion of the static structure but does not change the
    static structure or its arrangement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for a static structure controlled by condition responsive means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 633 for a wall or floor constructed
    with a passage for solar heated fluid to warm a building and subclass 623
    for a solar collector housing supported on a roof-type structure.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for photocells.


CLS 52/174
TXT Structure under the class definition including means peculiar to the
    direction or control of vehicular or pedestrian surface traffic, e.g.,
    curbs, sidewall guard rails or traffic strips.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for installed furniture or fixtures defining a traffic path.

    87,     for a vertically curved arch construction combined with a
    superimposed deck.

    184+,   for steps with additional building structure which inherently
    guides traffic.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    14,     Bridges, for such a construction not principally of masonry or
    concrete.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 6+ for a traffic
    guide or barrier, per se, and subclasses 9+ for a traffic direction, per se.


CLS 52/175
TXT Structure under subclass 174 wherein different levels are formed by a
    continuous floor which is helical in structure or wherein the different
    levels are interconnected by an inclined passageway.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185,    for a multi-level building with steps.

    236.1+, for another multi-level compart- mented structure.


CLS 52/176
TXT Structure under subclass 175 wherein the inclined passageway means is
    positioned centrally of the building, usually forming a true helix or an
    interrupted helical core.


CLS 52/177
TXT Structure under the class definition including (1) a claimed exposed
    surface having a physical characteristic specialized to increasing friction
    or reducing wear caused by pedestrian or other traffic or (2) a separate
    member covering the end of a stair tread which member conforms to the
    nosing, i.e., that portion of the tread beyond a riser, for the purpose of
    reducing wear or increasing friction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182+,   for (1) a stair construction wherein the member forming the
    permanent treads of the stairs may have a configuration defining a nosing
    which is integral with a stair component or (2) a stair covering combined
    with a stair construction or a tread covering having a defined feature
    other than for wear or friction reduction.

    273,    for an intersection having a flexible covering, e.g., carpeting.

    327+,   for a cast floor with additional coextensive section.

    479+,   for a facing held by a sustainer which may include plural layer
    flooring.

    506.01+, for a facer attached to dissimilar sub-structure, e.g., linoleum
    or wood on a dissimilar sub-floor.

    660+,   for a fabric or lattice open-work not having a defined friction or
    wear surface feature.

    716.1+, for in situ attached channel or trim strip.

    782.1+, for a composite panel.

    800.1+, for a composite panel with an attached edging.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 238+ for a
    foot scraping mat.

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 4+ for a carpet fastener wherein
    a barrier or stair component is only nominally defined.

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, for an
    abrasive material or composition even though nominally defined as a wear or
    antislip surface.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 19+ for a
    pavement with an antislip surface.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 98+ for a
    single or plural layer stock material product which is structurally
    defined, especially subclasses 141+ for a product having an irregular or
    nonuniform surface, subclasses 156+ for such a product in which at least
    one component varies in thickness, and subclasses 174+ for such a product
    in which at least one component is nonplanar.


CLS 52/179
TXT Structure under subclass 177 having means at the exposed edge of a stair
    tread or floor mat which protects the edge from wear or increases friction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182+,   for stepped construction including uniform surfacing, e.g.,
    carpeting covering plural successive treads and risers.

    254+,   for an intersection of cast stone-like material having a revealed
    embedded protector.

    716.1+  for a panel of more general utility having a separately attached
    edging.


CLS 52/180
TXT Structure under subclass 177 having (1) spaced bars or strips which are
    twisted along their length or (2) a grating or perforated sheet having a
    feature forming a defined traffic carrying surface which is discrete with
    respect to the sheet or grating itself.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    660+,   for another openwork lattice or fabric surface forming structure.


CLS 52/181
TXT Structure under subclass 177 including (1) an element which is embedded in
    a settable material of (2) elements which are inserted into openings formed
    in a prefabricated sheetlike holder for the elements and which in the final
    product are exposed at the traffic receiving surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    318,    for cast in situ barrier, e.g., floor, having revealed intersecting
    strips and see notes.


CLS 52/182
TXT Structure under the class definition defining (1) a stepped structure,
    i.e., surfaces which are arranged in repetitious vertical and horizontal
    offset relationship or (2) a specific building structure having attached
    footholds or rungs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6+,     for a construction with an auditorium, stadium or theater feature
    in addition to a mere stepped structure, e.g., a stepped structure with
    seat means.

    179,    for a tread nosing wear or anti-skid feature.

    518+,   for lapped multiplanar surfacing, e.g., shingled, in which
    surfacing sections are offset and lapped.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 92+ for a
    terraced article supporting structure with a specific understructure.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, appropriate subclasses for a
    ladder, per se, with rungs, steps or treads in the plane of a stile or
    stringer but which lack a riser, i.e., a vertical closing plate between
    tread members.

    256,    Fences, subclass 22 for a stair rail (banister).

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 163+ for a step structure specialized to
    vehicle use.


CLS 52/183
TXT Structure under subclass 182 having means forming a connection between at
    least two step forming components which allow relative movement between
    them, e.g., folding stairs.


CLS 52/184
TXT Structure under subclass 182 in which the stepped structure is formed in
    conjunction with or attached to a barrier or other component of an in situ
    erected building structure having a load bearing or shielding function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193,    for liquid or fluent material container with a rod crossing a
    material port in a wall, which rod may serve as a rung.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclasses 90+ and 93+ for a floor or wall attached rung, step
    or ladder where no feature of construction other than that merely serving
    as a support for such elements is defined.


CLS 52/185
TXT Structure under subclass 184 wherein the stepped means is combined with a
    building having floors at different levels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175+,   for multilevel building with a spiral or ramp.


CLS 52/186
TXT Structure under subclass 184 including a movable closure means structurally
    related to the stepped structure.


CLS 52/187
TXT Structure under subclass 182 in which the stepped structure is arranged
    around a vertical center line.


CLS 52/188
TXT Structure under subclass 182 in which a horizontal surface (tread) member,
    is supported above another discrete horizontal member, the latter being
    connected to a vertical front member (riser).


CLS 52/189
TXT Structure under subclass 182 in which at least one part, e.g., tread, riser
    or stringer, of the stepped construction is made of settable material which
    has set to rigidity before being used at the site.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    600+,   for a reinforced cast module.


CLS 52/190
TXT Structure under subclass 189 in which a tread and riser are cast as a
    monolith.


CLS 52/191
TXT Structure under subclass 182 in which the vertical components of the step
    structure are individually connected to an elongated member formed as a
    single component serving as the primary beam (stringer).


CLS 52/192
TXT Structure under the class definition including a container or receptacle
    structure, e.g., tank, bin or cistern particularly adapted to retain liquid
    or fluent solid materials and having a port, i.e., an opening in its outer
    barrier structure through which the material is either deposited within or
    withdrawn from the structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168,    for a static structure combined with a protective liquid reservoir.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 154+, 356, 583, and 613 for an enclosure
    having more than one fluid handling port.

    220,    Receptacles, appropriate subclass for a receptacle having a port
    there provided for.


CLS 52/193
TXT Structure under subclass 192 in which the rods or ladder rungs cross the
    port and are usually secured to the side edges of the container or
    receptacle which form the port.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184,    for a building structure combined with means for a stair or ladder
    and see notes.


CLS 52/194
TXT Structure under subclass 192 wherein the fluent material hopper or
    container is supported by legs or is otherwise elevated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 567 for an elevated tank for confining a
    fluid.


CLS 52/195
TXT Structure under subclass 192 wherein the container is provided with wall
    attached means forming an elongated passageway communicating with the
    material port.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, subclasses 2+ for a
    chute, per se, or merely combined with enough structure to support it.


CLS 52/196
TXT Structure under subclass 192 in which the port is defined by a discrete
    frame structure mounted in the container or receptacle structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204.1+, for a construction having a feature for a closure or window opening.


CLS 52/197
TXT Structure under subclass 192 in which the port is located in the bottom,
    i.e., floor of the container or receptacle structure.


CLS 52/198
TXT Structure under the class definition forming an enclosure for or a cover
    over a usable space (a room or compartment) and having a fluid guiding port
    in an outer barrier (wall, ceiling or floor) communicating with the space
    and the ambient earth or air.

    (1)     Note.  A door or window and/or opening therefore is not a fluid
    guiding port. Search this class, subclass 204 for a construction with means
    forming such a portal opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19+,    for a closure with top entrance opening for persons or things.

    192+,   for a fluent material container with a port for the material.

    220.1+, for a construction with service duct within a barrier.

    270+,   for a barrier construction with a fluid handling feature within the
    barrier.

    503+,   for barriers having a fluid passage formed by modules.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    454,    Ventilation, appropriate subclasses for a ventilating structure
    with air directing or controlling features other than mere windows.


CLS 52/199
TXT Structure under subclass 198 in which the port is within the roof or cover
    of the enclosure and acts to vent the space below the roof or cover.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64+,    for construction with a barrier or mounted for repositioning, e.g.,
    hinged roofs or skylights wherein the hinged roof is a movable section.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    454,    Ventilation, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 1+ and
    339+ for building with air guiding or forcing means.


CLS 52/200
TXT Structure under the class definition including means forming an enclosure
    located on and within the periphery of a roof and having an open bottom or
    passage communicating with the space beneath the roof.

    (1)     Note.  Where the entire cover structure is considered a skylight
    (e.g., greenhouse roof), the claims should be classified under the
    appropriate cover structure; e.g., compound curve cover, inclined cover.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for a clerestory or sawtooth type roof.

    72,     for a cupola or roof section mounted for repositioning.

    80.1+,  for a compound curve cover construction, e.g., dome.

    90.1+,  for an inclined roof or rafter with supporting substructure.

    202+    and 204.1+, for a construction relating to a window or door through
    a barrier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    454,    Ventilation, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 339+
    for a related structure combined with an air directing or control means.


CLS 52/201
TXT Structure under the class definition including a generally, U-shaped
    enclosure extending outwardly of a building wall and having an open side
    facing the interior of a building.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73+,    for a guyed or cantilevered barrier, e.g., a cantilevered bay
    window.


CLS 52/202
TXT Structure under the class definition including (1) two panels of different
    size, the smaller of which protects and is attached to, facially contacts,
    or is sealed to the surface of the larger panel or to a frame surrounding
    the larger panel, or (2) a panel which is attached to the outside of a
    barrier and which protects and covers an opening in the barrier, which
    opening is occupied by another, usually permanent, panel, e.g., storm
    panels over permanent windows.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204.1+, for another construction defining or relating to an opening through
    a barrier, particularly subclasses 204.5+ for a window with attached bars
    or the like acting to reinforce the glass.

    476,    for a cornered frame with a releasable facer retainer, e.g., for
    holding a window light in a surrounding framing section for it.

    479+,   for a barrier construction having facially opposed surfacing
    sections.

    483.1+, for a facer abutting and concealing a frame.

    506.01+, for a facer attached to another dissimilar in situ erected type
    structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 50+ for a protective
    grille which overlies a main closure, one of which is movable or removable
    and subclasses 61+ for an auxiliary closure which overlies a main closure
    one of which closure is movable or removable.


CLS 52/203
TXT Structure under subclass 202 wherein a transparent, relatively smaller,
    auxiliary pane or film is mounted on and contacts or is sealed to an
    exposed surface of a main pane, usually removably.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204.52, for a double pane panel having a drain or vent to the ambient
    atmosphere.

    396.01+, for a structure including plurality of facially spaced similar
    panels held apart by a resilient separator.

    788+,   for a unit including parallel panes, i.e., double glass panels,
    usually held by a peripheral frame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 97.1+ for glare shields
    attached to a windshield or its frame.


CLS 52/204.1
TXT FRAMING TO RECEIVE DOOR, DOOR JAMB, OR WINDOW SASH:

    Structure under the class definition having defined structure outlining a
    passageway which traverses a barrier (e.g., wall), said passageway is
    designed for a means which allows access of light, air, people, or a pet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19+,    for a roof with an entrance way through it.

    64+,    for a barrier section mounted for repositioning.

    85,     for a curved arch type doorway.

    97,     for an outwardly extending liquid projector including a window sill
    having a claimed feature for this function.

    171+,   for a transparent panel for a specific environment.

    186,    for a closure related to a stair.

    200,    for a cupola or skylight above a roof.

    201+,   for a bay window.

    202+,   for an auxiliary shield and/or main panel or frame arrangement.

    220.1,  for a service duct with a lateral outlet.

    302.1+, for a structure with a vent or passage to its interior; e.g., a
    wall drain.

    306+,   for a structure with a translucent block or embedded translucent
    component.

    473,    for a louvered panel.

    633+,   for a foraminous structure; e.g., repetitious members defining the
    peripheries of openings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 193+ for sash structure.

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclass 504 for a frame member
    insertable in an opening having means adapting the member for use with a
    closure; e.g., a stop.


CLS 52/204.2
TXT Lintel:

    Framing under subclass 204.1 defining a load bearing generally horizontal
    member spanning an opening.


CLS 52/204.5
TXT WINDOW OR WINDOW SASH, SILL, MULLION, OR GLAZING:

    Structure under the class definition defining a framework surrounding at
    least one piece of transparent material (as glass) for the admission of
    light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for a below grade wall for a portal opening.

    171.1+, for a transparent panel for a specific environment.

    201,    for a bay window.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclass 380 for a window and frame
    or sash transferable as a unit.


CLS 52/204.51
TXT Having a fixed pane and a movable pane:

    Window under subclass 204.5 comprising a stationary portion and a
    displaceable portion.


CLS 52/204.52
TXT With a plug:

    Drain or vent under subclass 209 in which a distinct device closes the sash
    or window frame fluid conveying means.


CLS 52/204.53
TXT Architrave; i.e., molding or finish strip touching pane face:

    Window under subclass 204.5 including a strip form element which extends
    over the pane face (the art term being "the architrave") so that the plane
    of the strip form element intersects the plane of the surface defining a
    window opening, i.e., the strip form element covers and outlines the
    portion of the wall face that intersects the surface defining the inside of
    a window frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58+,    for flashing.

    716.1+,for molding strips.


CLS 52/204.54
TXT Separable and lapped sections:

    Architrave under subclass 204.53 wherein the strip form element comprises
    two sections covering a major portion of the pane with the sections being
    in face-to-face lapped relationship with each other.


CLS 52/204.55
TXT Sash having integral securing means (e.g., nailing strip):

    Window under subclass 204.5 in which the framework includes a portion,
    usually with holes or slots, for fasteners to attach the framework to the
    wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211+,   for an architrave.


CLS 52/204.56
TXT For size adjustment:

    Securing means under subclass 204.55 including means to adjust the
    framework to the size of the wall opening.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclass 505 for a means to alter
    the relative a position of the closure frame components or the closure
    frame to a wall.


CLS 52/204.57
TXT Intersection of panes having coextensive exposed sustainer (i.e., corner):

    Window under subclass 204.5 in which a juncture member that connects two
    panes along their length or width is visible to an observer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282.1,  for an exposed intersection member for panels or modules.

    287,    for a sheetlike trim member at an intersection.

    764+,   for coplanarily arranged sections having a framing member between
    and separating the section edges and having an   interfitting configuration
    between the framing member and the section.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclass 79 for vault
    corners.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclass 65 for box corners.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for just a corner
    connector.


CLS 52/204.58
TXT Finite tie for intersection of panes (i.e., corner):

    Window under subclass 204.5 in which a juncture member connects two panes
    along their length or width.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    712+,   for a sheet and wire tie of more general application.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclass 79 for vault
    corners.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclass 65 for box corners.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for just a corner
    connector.


CLS 52/204.59
TXT Ornamental-type; e.g., stained glass or mosaic-type:

    Window under subclass 204.5 wherein the panes of glass are (1) colored or
    (2) cut in unique shapes and fitted into a sash.


CLS 52/204.591
TXT Spacing pane from disparate edging:

    Structure under subclass 204.5 in which the separator member or a part
    thereof acts to space the edge or face of a window pane from a section or
    component of a strip-like member positioned at its edge, which section or
    component (e.g., a sash component), acts to hold or retain the panel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    785+,   for sandwich or hollow panels.


CLS 52/204.593
TXT At least two spaced panes:

    Structure under subclass 204.591 including at least two similar panels held
    in facially spaced parallel relationship by the separator member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204.52, for a double pane vented panel.

    811+,   for another composite panel formed by facially spaced panes.


CLS 52/204.595
TXT Spaced by unitary or contacting U-channels:

    Structure under subclass 204.593 in which the separator means is either a
    single unitary member or plural members in side-by-side contact which have
    two or more U-shaped channels, each of which overlaps the edge and adjacent
    faces of a different one of a pair of laterally spaced panels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204.597,        for single U-shaped channel overlapping edge and face of a
    panel.

    811+,   for a parallel spaced pane or panel.

    823+,   for a panel, per se, with U-shaped edging.


CLS 52/204.597
TXT Overlapping edge and face of pane:

    Structure under subclass 204.591 in which one of the separated components
    of a panel, usually a glass pane, is separated from an adjacent component
    by means which covers the edge and adjacent areas of the faces of the panel
    (e.g., a U-shaped strip).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204.595,        for similar devices spacing plural panels.

    811+,   for a parallel spaced pane panel.

    823+,   for panel, per se, with disparate U-shaped channel edging.


CLS 52/204.599
TXT Metallic spring (e.g., strip separator):

    Structure under subclass 204.591 wherein the resilient separator is a
    metallic spring, frequently a longitudinally deformed metallic strip.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    769,    for a springy strip panel retainer which does not act as a
    separator.


CLS 52/204.6
TXT Multiple panes within a sash:

    Window under subclass 204.5 in which at least two window pieces are
    positioned in one peripheral framework.


CLS 52/204.61
TXT Decorative grill attached to sash:

    Window under subclass 204.5 in which a lattice type structure is fastened
    to the sash presenting a multiple pane appearance.


CLS 52/204.62
TXT Attaching means securing a pane to a sash member or to another pane:

    Window under subclass 204.5 wherein (1) a distinct member fixes a pane to
    the framework or (2) a distinct member completely separates two adjacent
    panes in the same plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235,    for a curtain wall.

    764,    for a wall, ceiling, or floor section separated by a framing
    member.


CLS 52/204.63
TXT Sash piercing element (e.g., glazing points):

    Window securement under subclass 204.62 wherein the pane retaining means
    includes a member which pierces the framework to fix the pane in position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    765,    for wall, ceiling, or floor framing or section piercing means.


CLS 52/204.64
TXT Including cam or wedge:

    Window securement under subclass 204.62 wherein the pane retaining means
    includes (1) a rotating or sliding piece that imparts motion to a pin free
    to move in a groove or (2) a rectangular-shaped piece that tapers to a thin
    edge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    766,    for a wall, ceiling, or floor section with attaching means that has
    a cam or wedge.


CLS 52/204.65
TXT Clamped against pane by turning cam engaging screw:

    Window securement cam under subclass 204.64 including a screw which engages
    the surface of the rotating or sliding piece that imparts motion to a pin
    free to move in a groove and which, when turned, in cooperation with said
    piece causes a retaining element to press against the pane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    767,    for a wall, ceiling, or floor section clamped to framing by turning
    a cam engaging screw.


CLS 52/204.66
TXT Pivots or includes pivoting actuating means:

    Window securement under subclass 204.62 wherein the pane retaining means is
    (1) mounted for rotational motion or (2) includes a rotating part which
    moves a retainer into its retaining position adjacent the pane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    768,    for a wall, ceiling, or floor section including a pivotable
    attaching means.


CLS 52/204.67
TXT Contacting pane front and back then fastens to sash:

    Window securement under subclass 204.62 wherein separate retaining members,
    either angularly, or curvilinearly shaped, touch opposite faces of a pane,
    said members, or one of said members being interconnected by a separate
    fastener to the framework.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    770,    for a wall, ceiling, or floor section attaching means that contacts
    section front and back faces then is fastened to a frame member.


CLS 52/204.68
TXT Interconnected by intermediate member and fastener:

    Window securement connector under subclass 204.67 including at least one
    separate element located between the retaining members and mutually joined
    by at least one fixing means such as a screw.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    771,    for a wall, floor, or ceiling section attaching means contacts
    section front and back faces then is fastened to a frame member by an
    intermediate member and fastener.


CLS 52/204.69
TXT Pane to sash attaching means resiliently biased:

    Window securement under subclass 204.62 wherein the pane retaining means is
    formed of springy thin-walled material or is made of wire, said retaining
    means being flexed when in its pane retaining position so as to press the
    pane into a predetermined position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    773,    for a wall, ceiling, or floor section attached to frame by a
    resiliently biased member.


CLS 52/204.7
TXT With attaching means element received in channel or aperture in sash:

    Window securement under subclass 204.62 wherein a portion of the pane
    retaining means is situated either in (1) an opening extending through the
    framework or (2) in a groove in the framework.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    775,    for a wall, ceiling, or floor section attaching element received in
    a frame channel or aperture.


CLS 52/204.705
TXT Solid three-sided glazing strip:

    Structure under subclass 764 wherein the pane retaining means consists of a
    solid strip having  a triangular shape and used for holding a pane against
    a sustainer in a window.


CLS 52/204.71
TXT U-shaped channel formed of separate strips overlapping pane edge, front,
    and back:

    Window under subclass 204.5 wherein the periphery of the window has
    independent members forming the letter "U" which cover both the pane
    thickness and extend over a portion of both major faces.


CLS 52/204.72
TXT With mechanical fastener for securing strips:

    Channel under subclass 204.71 in which a bolt, screw, etc., is used to fix
    the members to the sash.


CLS 52/205
TXT Structure under subclass 204.1 including a partition on the inside of an
    enclosure, which partition has the passageway therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238.1+, for another construction wherein an interior type partition is used.


CLS 52/206
TXT Structure under subclass 204.1 in which the barrier construction is a wall
    having means defining plural, separate passageways.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 95+ for closures in
    spaced openings along a barrier and interconnected for concurrent movement.


CLS 52/207
TXT Structure under subclass 204.1 including a barrier having crossing or
    intersecting elongated members defining plural areas some of which are
    occupied by fixed panels, e.g., panes, and at least one being a passageway
    occupied by a movable floor or window.


CLS 52/208
TXT Structure under subclass 204.1 including a panel and means for attaching it
    over or in a passageway in a barrier by adhering or clamping it in contact
    with the major face of the barrier or in contact with a seal sandwiched
    between said face and the panel.


CLS 52/209
TXT Structure under subclass 204.5 including means for draining or venting the
    surface between the opposed barrier faces, e.g., the space within a barrier
    behind a door or window frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302.1,  for a drain, vent or vent plug combination of more general
    application.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclass 408 for a drain in the
    guide or sash of a sliding closure, subclass 471 for a threshold with a
    drain or vent and subclass 476.1 for a closure seal with a fluid drain or a
    closure face mounted deflector.


CLS 52/210
TXT Structure under subclass 204.1 wherein the framing of a door or window
    opening is directly attached to the studding of a wall or wherein the
    studding itself is part of the passageway frame.


CLS 52/211
TXT Structure under subclass 204.1 including a strip from element, which
    extends over the barrier face (the art term being "the architrave") so that
    its plane intersects the plane of the surface defining a door or window
    opening (the art term for this surface being "the reveal"), i.e., the strip
    form element covers and outlines a portion of a wall face intersecting the
    surface defining the inside of a door or window frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    716.1+, for molding strips and see notes.


CLS 52/212
TXT Structure under subclass 211 wherein the strip-form element comprises two
    sections covering a major portion of the reveal with the sections being in
    face-to-face lapped relationship with each other.


CLS 52/213
TXT Structure under subclass 204.1 having framing means defining the
    passageway, which means differs in kind from that forming the barrier and
    including means rigidly and permanently connecting together the means and
    the means defining surface forming the opening through the barrier (reveal).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211+,   for a reveal and a border strip extending over the barrier surface
    (architrave).


CLS 52/214
TXT Structure under subclass 204.55 including (1) a resilient strip (2) a
    fastening device, held between the reveal and the framing means.


CLS 52/215
TXT Structure under subclass 213 having sub- framing means to be enclosed by
    framing means defining the opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    364+,   for a penetrating receiver ground member construction where no
    feature forming a frame is defined, i.e., where the ground member may be
    defined as a "buck" of "frame member".


CLS 52/216
TXT Structure under subclass 213 in which the means defining an opening has a
    foraminous portion embedded in a plastic to-rigid settable material, e.g.,
    plaster.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255+,   for a cast in situ embedded protector for a corner.

    660+,   for a fabric or lattice surface forming type sheet which may be
    used as an embedded reinforcement.


CLS 52/217
TXT Structure under subclass 213 including means to adjust the frame to the
    size of the passageway.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclass 505 for a means to alter
    the relative position of the closure frame components or the closure frame
    to a wall.


CLS 52/218
TXT Structure under the class definition comprising tubular means confining
    gaseous products and including means directing a gaseous fluid (air or
    other gas) therein to or therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 184 for a metal smokestack peculiar to solid
    fuel burning furnaces.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 500+ for a flue construction
    including a fireplace and subclasses 307+ for a stovepipe peculiar to that
    class.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 1+ for a chimney or stack which conducts
    air or products of combustion between a ventilated space and the
    surrounding environment.


CLS 52/219
TXT Structure under the class definition including tubular means guiding
    gaseous products, a specific building structure and connecting means
    therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218+,   for flue structures combined with a gaseous fluid director there
    provided for.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 42+ for a combined flue and
    roof flashing, per se.


CLS 52/220.1
TXT WALL, CEILING, OR FLOOR DESIGNED FOR UTILITIES:

    Structure under the class definition in which a distinct duct-type path for
    water, fuel, heating fluid, cooling fluid, or electrical systems is an
    integral part of the barrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34+,    for an installed lavatory fixture.

    95,     for a roof end structure with conduit or passage means.

    192+,   for liquid or fluent material container with material port.

    209,    for window with drain or vent.

    219,    for a flue connection to a specific building structure.

    302.1+, for a barrier construction within exteriorly opening fluid handling
    feature.

    503+,   for a barrier with a through fluid passage formed by the component
    modules of the barrier.

    533+,   for a lapped surfacing with fluid handling feature in the joint.


    553,    for a lapped multiplanar surfacing with an interior space.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 440+ for a cooled enclosure having means
    or a relationship of components specialized to refrigeration, particularly
    subclass 451 for a duct confining a flowing coolant and covered by
    insulation means.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 633 for a wall or floor constructed
    with a passage for solar heated fluid to warm a building.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 234.6 for a fluid handling system related
    to a vehicle guide or support, subclass 236.1 for such a system related to
    a geographical feature and subclass 343 for such a system in a static
    structural installation.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 156+ for ducts.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 53+ for a specific heat exchanger
    structurally installed in a wall, ceiling, or floor.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 48+, 50+, and
    68.1+ for a passageway specifying electrical features; e.g., a wire.

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 3.2 for an outlet or junction box even though
    a mere connection to a buried conduit may be defined.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclass 69 for a heating system including a duct
    in a  floor.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclass 64 for a pipe joint supported by
    an element of a building construction.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 270+ for a hollow wall structure with air
    distributors; e.g., inlet to space.


CLS 52/220.2
TXT Load-bearing, prefabricated, abutting units with aligned utility passages:

    Unit under subclass 220.1 which is constructed with; e.g., ducts that, upon
    assembly, line up with a matching unit to receive a utility therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302.2,  for drain or vent with an aligned passage.


CLS 52/220.3
TXT Multiple passageway or multicellular load-bearing units (e.g., grid or two
    parallel pipes in a slab):

    Unit under subclass 220.1 containing (1) two parallel duct-type paths  or
    (2) a network of uniformly arranged horizontal and perpendicular spaces.


CLS 52/220.4
TXT Corrugated type:

    Unit under subclass 220.3 in which the paths are defined by alternating
    parallel ridges and grooves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    783.11+, for a corrugated sheet.


CLS 52/220.5
TXT Completely accessible continuous trench duct type:

    Floor under subclass 220.1 containing an opening that runs the length or
    width thereof and is covered to provide a planar trafficable surface.


CLS 52/220.6
TXT Suspended ceiling:

    Ceiling under subclass 220.1 in which the utilities are carried in a space
    beneath a floor and sheetlike elements held by a grid hanging from the
    floor.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    506+,   for suspended ceilings.


CLS 52/220.7
TXT Partition type (e.g., raceway arrangement):

    Wall under subclass 220.1 in which the utility is in demountable panel-type
    or modular-type structures.


CLS 52/220.8
TXT Having a passageway through the entire wall, ceiling, or floor thickness
    (e.g., poke-through):

    Wall, ceiling, or floor under subclass 220.1 in which an opening, made at
    the smallest wall, ceiling, or floor dimension, provides access from one
    side of; e.g., a wall, to the other side for the utility to pass through.


CLS 52/222
TXT Structure under the class definition including an exposed facing sheet
    which is attached to another structure which sheet is defined as (1) being
    under tension, (2) flexed or (3) defining that the other structure has
    means operating to pull on the sheet, the sheet acting to stress a
    substructure or frame so that the components of the assembly act to
    strengthen the structure as a whole.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179+,   for a stair tread nosing which may be formed by a tensioned sheet,
    e.g., carpet.

    223.1+, for a precompressing, e.g., prestressing construction.

    273,    for a flexible barrier covering which may be stretched to hold it
    flat.


CLS 52/223.1
TXT WITH COMPONENT HAVING DISCRETE PRESTRESSING MEANS:

    Structure under the class definition including a compressive preloading of
    a static structure or portion thereof by either a pre-tensioning or
    post-tensioning member to reduce or eliminate tensile stress.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222,    for a tensioned sheetlike facing.

    231,    for a related structure having means stretching the reinforcement
    but not applying compressive stress to the material.

    291,    for an adjustable stressing means acting to correct warp.

    600+,   for a module with embedded reinforcement.

    721.1+, for a sustainer with a feature for resisting transverse loading;
    e.g., monolith with eccentric reinforcing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 446+ for a process of assembly and/or
    joining involving prestressing of a part, particularly subclass 452 for
    prestressing of a rod, filament, or strand.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 228+ for processes there provided for involving precompressing.


CLS 52/223.11
TXT Connecting adjacent ends of monolithic beam or girder:

    Beam, girder, or truss under subclass 223.08 in which preformed,
    independent, separately reinforced structural members are joined by the
    prestressing means to form a continuous type of structural element (i.e,
    continuous beam).


CLS 52/223.12
TXT Homogenous design (e.g., all metal):

    Beam, girder, or truss under subclass 223.8 in which the structural element
    including the prestressing means is fabricated from a single material
    (e.g., steel).


CLS 52/223.13
TXT Anchorage (e.g., end):

    Pre-loaded structure under subclass 223.1 including a device for holding
    the prestressing means after tensioning.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 122.3, 122.6, and 127
    for strand holder of general application.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus, for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 29 for an apparatus applying tension to a rod or strand.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 314 and 365+ for an end coupler
    including wedging or camming means and interfitted members including
    radially interposed shim or bushing, respectively.


CLS 52/223.14
TXT Specific prestressing means:

    Pre-loaded structure under subclass 223.1 in which significance is
    attributed to the tensioning member.


CLS 52/223.2
TXT Pressure vessel:

    Pre-loaded structure under subclass 223.1 comprising a specialized
    container that is specifically designed to withstand, over the entire
    interior face, a fluid force that is substantially greater than normal
    atmospheric conditions.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 565+ for stationary tanks.


CLS 52/223.3
TXT Tubular shaped tank, silo, cooling tower, etc.:

    Pre-loaded structure under subclass 223.1 which is vertically extending,
    has a generally circular cross-section, and  strengthened to reduce the
    effect of radial forces.


CLS 52/223.4
TXT Axially loaded vertical structure (e.g., column, derrick):

    Pre-loaded upright structure under subclass 223.1 which is strengthened
    along an axis perpendicular to or at a high angle to the earth's surface.


CLS 52/223.5
TXT Composed of stacked sections:

    Upright structure under subclass 223.4 which is made up of a plurality of
    preformed sections placed one on top of the other.


CLS 52/223.6
TXT Slab or panel construction:

    Pre-loaded structure under subclass 223.1 which is an architectural element
    having a generally flat surface (e.g., wall, floor, or ceiling section) and
    is strengthened to overcome forces in either the vertical or horizontal
    direction.


CLS 52/223.7
TXT Composed of abutting modular panels or blocks:

    Slab under subclass 223.6 in which the architectural element is made up of
    a plurality preformed sections.


CLS 52/223.8
TXT Beam, girder, or truss construction:

    Pre-loaded structure under subclass 223.1 which is a distinct generally
    horizontal structural member strengthened along a major or minor axis to
    counteract forces from additional loads (e.g., floor, roof).


CLS 52/223.9
TXT Composed of abutting sections:

    Beam, girder, or truss under subclass 223.8 which is made up of a plurality
    of preformed sections.


CLS 52/231
TXT Structure under the class definition including a cast type structure having
    a sustainer supporting the structure and additional reinforcing means
    cooperating with the material, which additional reinforcing means including
    means associated therewith to stretch or tension them.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223.1+, for a cast material with means precompressing it.

    240,    for a partition between rooms combined with tensioning means.

    414,    for a monolithic cast in situ barrier with sustainer and
    untensioned embedded reinforcement.


CLS 52/232
TXT Structure under the class definition including (1) a component in one layer
    which reacts chemically with a component of another layer or (2) a
    component which irreversibly changes in physical or chemical structure
    other than a mere dimensional change with variations in ambient conditions,
    e.g., heat or moisture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for means responsive to a condition to control movement of a
    component.

    573,    for a structure allowing mere expansion or contraction in response
    to a change in an ambient condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 15.05+ for a
    fireproofing, biocidal or antifouling composition there provided for.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 2+ for a fire extinguishing composition
    there provided for.

    285,    Pipe Joints and Couplings, subclasses 2+ for pipe joints with
    safety release and subclass 187 for temperature responsive pipe joints.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 920+ (a cross-
    reference art collection) for a product having a heat or fire protective
    coating or impregnation.


CLS 52/233
TXT Structure under the class definition including shaft-like elements held in
    edge-to-edge relationship which (1) present coplanar curved exposed faces
    exhibiting grooves between them, (2) have terminal ends projecting beyond
    the limits of the intersection or (3) constructions defined as imitating a
    log wall construction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclass 106 for a toy log house.


CLS 52/234
TXT Structure under the class definition defining plural areas formed by
    subdividing a larger area, which areas function to shelter or enclose a
    person, animal or a movable object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6+,     for a construction with means defining a stage or arena area.

    29+,    for a structure where a horizontal surface type article may move
    into a compartment.

    33,     for a structure wherein installed fixtures, e.g., store shelving,
    define a traffic path.

    64+,    for a construction wherein a wall, floor or roof may move to
    subdivide a larger area.

    79.1+,  for a preassembled subenclosure specialized to assembly to form a
    large building.

    106,    for a residual jail type structure.

    185,    for a multilevel building with stairs.

    201,    for a bay window construction.

    205,    for a portal in an interior partition.


CLS 52/235
TXT Structure under subclass 234 in which the outside or sheathing wall of a
    building includes preformed panels which are supported in crossing
    relationship to the terminal outside edge of a floor or by the load bearing
    beams or columns which define the outside limits of the building frame by
    attachment of the panels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236.3+, for another construction having floors at plural levels.

    483.1+, for another construction wherein a facer (panel) is held laterally
    of a repositioned elongated rigid member, a stud or column.


CLS 52/236.1
TXT Structure under subclass 234 in which at least one compartment is
    nonrectangular in shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80.1+,  for a compound curve cover, e.g., dome.

    85+,    for a curvilinear entrance archway.

    89+,    for a vertically curved arch.

    245,    for another construction forming a curvilinear barrier.

    639+,   for a curvilinear or peaked truss.


CLS 52/236.2
TXT Structure under subclass 236.1 wherein at least one wall of the
    nonrectangular structure is curvilinear in shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79.4,   for a prefabricated nonrectangular subenclosure.

    245,    for a curvilinear barrier.


CLS 52/236.3
TXT Structure under subclass 234 wherein the enclosed areas are on different
    vertically spaced levels, e.g., multistory buildings.


CLS 52/236.4
TXT Structure under subclass 236.3 wherein two or more enclosed areas arranged
    in such a manner that each unit is vertically offset (higher or lower) with
    respect to its adjacent unit, but not directly above or below its adjacent
    unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79.2    for vertically staggered prefabricated subenclosures.


CLS 52/236.5
TXT Structure under subclass 236.3 wherein a substantial portion of the
    vertical walls of at least two adjacent levels and the floor-ceiling
    barrier therebetween are cast as a single monolithic structure, e.g.,
    poured concrete.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250+,   for cast, stone-like intersection.


CLS 52/236.6
TXT Structure under subclass 236.3 wherein a horizontal barrier (floor-ceiling)
    is disposed between the upper and lower edges of a vertical barrier (wall).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    283,    for the intersection of a barrier seated on a projection.


CLS 52/236.7
TXT Structure under subclass 236.3 wherein horizontal barrier (floor-ceiling)
    is disposed between two vertically spaced distinct walls or columns.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262+,   for a barrier resting on walls or floor supporting walls.


CLS 52/236.8
TXT Structure under subclass 236.7 wherein a portion of the horizontal barrier
    has a cast in situ component at the juncture with the vertical walls or
    columns.


CLS 52/236.9
TXT Structure under subclass 236.3 having distinct walls or columns in
    vertically aligned end-to-end relationship and a horizontal barrier
    (floor-ceiling) at and spanning the juncture.


CLS 52/238.1
TXT Partition secured to and crossed by preconstructed barrier:

    Structure under subclass 234 wherein the enclosed areas (i.e.,
    compartments) are formed by a vertical partition secured to and crossed by
    an intermediate portion of at least one in situ preconstructed wall,
    ceiling, or floor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64+,    for a partition mounted relative to a base for repositioning
    without being totally disconnected therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 375 for auxiliary freight car
    floors.

    114,    Ships, subclass 116 for ship bulkheads.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclass 351 for
    portable partitions.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 283 for a movable shield
    used in trench excavation.


CLS 52/239
TXT Structure under subclass 238.1 wherein the partitions which form the
    compartments terminate in spaced relationship to a floor or ceiling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for a collapsible structure which may form collapsible cubicle,
    e.g., voting booth, but which remains connected to a wall.


CLS 52/240
TXT Structure under subclass 238.1 including supporting means which are
    tensioned or drawn taut by means acting between spaced preconstructed
    barriers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223.1+, for a construction including tensioned reinforcement means which
    compresses the construction.

    231,    for a cast monolith including a sustainer and means tensioning an
    additional reinforcement.


CLS 52/241
TXT Structure under subclass 238.1 including a distinct elongated member fixed
    to or resting on a ceiling and/or floor with the construction forming the
    vertical partition proper being coextensive with and terminating at its top
    and/or bottom at the member.


CLS 52/242
TXT Structure under subclass 241 including a trim-type plate or strip which is
    interfitted with either the terminal member or with a clip which retains
    said plate or strip relative to the terminal member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290,    for strip sections with an end of a sustainer therebetween which
    are usually a part of the type of construction in this subclass.


CLS 52/243
TXT Structure under subclass 238.1 including a plurality of separate rigid
    elongated members (sustainers) extending between and individually connected
    to the preconstructed barriers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    690+,   for shafts held side-by-side by spacers, e.g., a truss.


CLS 52/243.1
TXT Movable element on partition engages overhead barrier; i.e., ceiling, to
    secure partition in place:

    Structure under subclass 238.1 wherein a body mounted on the vertical
    partition shifts into contact with an intermediate portion of a ceiling to
    hold the vertical partition in position between that portion and an
    intermediate portion of a floor beneath the vertical partition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126.3+, for a vertical partition which is lifted into engagement with the
    ceiling.


CLS 52/244
TXT Structure under the class definition including means defining a cap which
    in use is mounted on and covers the exposed terminal edge of a barrier
    which encloses a space, e.g., chimney top guards.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for markers or monuments which may include capped stones, slabs or
    posts.

    300+,   for another vertical structure with an upper terminus bearing plate
    or cap.


CLS 52/245
TXT Structure under the class definition including a barrier, e.g., wall, which
    has its opposite faces both curvilinear and substantially parallel or a
    module specialized to use in forming such a barrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80.1,   86+, 192+, 223.3, 236.1, 236.2, 244, 329+, and 639+, for another
    construction having a curvilinear feature.

    503,    for a barrier with an internal fluid passage formed by modules.

    575,    for a module having non-parallel joint faces e.g., keystone shaped
    block.

    606+,   for a hollow block which may be used to form a construction with a
    through passage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclasses 100+ and 157+, and see the reference to Class 138 in the class
    definition of this class (52).


CLS 52/246
TXT Device under subclass 245 including a horizontal structure, e.g., floor or
    roof, mounted on and crossing at least the inner edge of the curved barrier.


CLS 52/247
TXT Structure under subclass 245 wherein the curvilinear barrier rests on a
    discrete base and wherein additional means are provided for securing the
    barrier to the base.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    274,    for an intersection supported on a base.

    292+,   for a footing supporting a planar wall.


CLS 52/248
TXT Structure under subclass 245 including a strip or rod-like member which
    encircles the barrier construction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223.3,  for a similar construction wherein the member has means radially
    compressing a tubular construction.


CLS 52/249
TXT Structure under subclass 245 in which the curvilinear barrier is formed of
    plural layers which are facially opposed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    561+,   for a barrier of laterally related, individually assembled courses
    and see the search notes under subclass 561 for other constructions
    involving plural layers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 114 for plural coaxial ducts
    and subclass 148 for tubular structures having plural spaced layers and see
    the reference to Class 138 in the class definition of this class (52).


CLS 52/250
TXT Structure under the class definition including a reinforced construction
    having a cast component which forms (a) wall, ceiling, floor or roof, (b) a
    load bearing column or (c) a girder or beam at least two of a, b or c being
    arranged in connected relationship with their principal dimension
    intersecting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86+,    for a vertically curved stone-like arch construction.

    91.2,   for inclined roof with supporting substructure and cast material at
    the eave.

    128+,   for a burial vault type construction.

    174+,   for a building construction with a traffic guiding feature.

    192+,   for a liquid or fluent material container with a fluid port.

    198+,   for an enclosure with fluid guiding port between the ambient and a
    usable space.

    218,    for a flue with a gaseous fluid directing feature.

    219,    for a flue with a connection to a building structure.

    294+,   for a concrete type footing structure.

    319+,   for a barrier construction having rib-like portions projecting from
    the face of the barrier.

    606+,   for a module, per se, with a traversing passage.


CLS 52/251
TXT Structure under subclass 250 which is specialized to a reinforced
    construction having a vertical component supporting a horizontal component,
    e.g., monolithic intersection of a column and beam.


CLS 52/252
TXT Structure under subclass 251 in which the horizontal component is an
    elongated sustainer, e.g., a beam or a ribbed cast slab.


CLS 52/253
TXT Structure under subclass 251 including embedded plates or rings in the
    columns, which rings or plates are engaged or contacted by the
    reinforcement of the horizontal member.


CLS 52/254
TXT Structure under subclass 250 including a device extending beneath the
    exposed faces of a corner defined by intersecting faces of the
    construction, a portion of the device, usually the outside edge of an angle
    member, being exposed at the intersection of said faces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85,     for a curved entrance arch having edge protectors.

    179,    for a stepped stair tread nosing.

    371,    for a screed for a planar settable material surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 4+ and 7+ for
    road curb structure.


CLS 52/255
TXT Structure under subclass 254 in which the member constitutes a reinforcing
    protector for a corner, created by the intersection of two generally planar
    facing layers of cast in situ material, e.g., plaster.


CLS 52/256
TXT Structure under subclass 255 in which the member has at least two separably
    connected portions, one forming an exposed corner edge and the other
    extending into or along the cast in situ facing layers.


CLS 52/257
TXT Structure under subclass 255 wherein the reinforcement has a plurality of
    discrete, separate anchor parts disposed at spaced intervals along its
    length.


CLS 52/258
TXT Structure under subclass 250 including a sustainer of cast in situ settable
    material which sustainer is surrounded by modules forming an intersection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259     and 260, for other intersection constructions with cast in situ
    material.

    415+,   for a barrier formed by a facer bonded by a cast section, e.g.,
    brick wall.


CLS 52/259
TXT Structure under subclass 250 including cast in situ material at the
    juncture of intersecting modules.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258,    for a cast in situ sustainer concealed within an intersection
    formed by laterally related modules.

    415+,   for modules bonded to an internal cast in situ section forming a
    construction of more general application.


CLS 52/260
TXT Structure under subclass 250 including a cast in situ reinforced column
    provided with distinct reinforcing members, e.g., rods, extending
    transversely of and radiating therefrom into an intersecting cast in situ
    floor, roof or beam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     for a cover construction with radial ribs.

    251+,   for a sustainer supporting a transverse structure with reinforcing
    at the juncture.

    258     and 259, for related constructions and see notes.


CLS 52/261
TXT Structure under the class definition including two or more spaced
    structures, at least one being a wall, ceiling, floor or roof, which
    structures are angularly related, usually at 90_, the combined structure
    defining at least two intersections, e.g., columns supporting a roof, three
    or more intersecting columns, etc., and thus defining at least three sides
    of an area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    Appropriate subclass above for various enclosure constructions involving
    two or more intersections, particularly subclasses 241+, for a partition
    secured to a barrier by a base-board type member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250+    and 272+, for other constructions forming a single intersection.


CLS 52/262
TXT Structure under subclass 261 in which one barrier is a ceiling or roof
    resting on the upper terminus of two or more spaced vertical load-bearing
    constructions, e.g., columns or walls.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11+,    for a roof with an eave or a valley gutter.

    73+,    for a rigid barrier cantilevered from a vertical structure.

    86+,    for a vertically curved arch.

    90.1+,  for an inclined cover or rafter with supporting substructure.

    94+,    for a structure peculiar to a roof having a defined structure
    forming an exposed terminal edge.


CLS 52/263
TXT Structure under subclass 262 in which the vertical structures are columns.


CLS 52/264
TXT Structure under subclass 261 in which two or more walls rest upon and are
    supported by a floor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    274,    for a footing supporting intersecting walls.

    293.1+, for a footing supporting a wall.


CLS 52/265
TXT Structure under subclass 264 in which a barrier (floor or wall)
    construction is composed of two or more layers of material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249,    258, 267, and 275+, for a construction forming an intersection
    involving a barrier of plural layers of material.

    506.01+, for a residual construction of dissimilar layers and see the
    references under  "SEARCH CLASS" in subclass 506.01 for various
    constructions involving a layered structure.


CLS 52/266
TXT Structure under subclass 261 wherein at least one wall is formed by
    distinct wall sections which are arranged in vertically aligned end-to-end
    relationship.


CLS 52/267
TXT Structure under 261 including wall construction having plural, distinct,
    coextensive layers or sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    265,    for a construction wherein a floor supports a wall at least one of
    which is of a layered construction.


CLS 52/268
TXT Structure under subclass 267 including a coextensive layer of material
    differing in kind from the material on both sides thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    408+,   for another construction having a disparate lamina separating other
    components.


CLS 52/269
TXT Structure under subclass 267 including a liner or shell of preformed,
    sheet-form material and another layer of material differing in kind from
    that of the liner or shell.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    268,    for a disparate material separating facer sections.

    506.01+, for a construction formed of modules with an attached sheetlike
    facing, e.g., metal on brick courses.


CLS 52/270
TXT Structure under subclass 261 in which at least one wall structure is
    composed of preformed modules.


CLS 52/271
TXT Structure under subclass 270 in which the modules are superimposed and
    keying means extend between adjacent surfaces of the modules.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    578+,   for a module or panel with a discrete edgewise connecting feature,
    e.g., integral key or separate fastener.


CLS 52/272
TXT Structure under class definition including a barrier, i.e., wall, floor,
    ceiling or roof, which intersects another barrier or a beam or column and
    also an adjunct or component specialized to use in such a construction,
    e.g., a corner trim member or corner block.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64+,    73+, 86+, 90.1+, 128+, 234+, 246, 250+, and 261+, for a
    construction which may include two or more intersections of barriers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 604 for metallic
    stock material having intersecting corrugations.


CLS 52/273
TXT Structure under subclass 272 including a flexible sheetlike member, e.g.,
    carpet or linoleum, usually in face-to-face contact with a wall and floor
    which member is shaped to conform to an intersection or is held at an edge
    portion by retaining means lying at the intersection corner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179,    for a member which is shaped to conform to the nosing of a stair
    tread member and subclasses 182+, for other covered stepped constructions.

    287.1+, for an intersection having a corner cove type channel or trim
    member.

    506.01+, for a construction having facer attached to dissimilar
    substructure, particularly subclass 511, for a mounting means attached to
    an upholstered facing panel.

    716.1+, for a residual in situ attached channel, or trim strip.

    800.1+, for a panel with separate attached edging.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 4+ for a carpet fastener wherein
    a barrier or a component thereof is only nominally defined.


CLS 52/274
TXT Structure under subclass 272 in which the intersection rests upon a
    structure differing substantially in kind or size from the supported
    structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264,    for a structure wherein a floor supports plural walls.

    292+,   for a footing (foundation) of more general utility.


CLS 52/275
TXT Structure under subclass 272 wherein the construction defining an
    intersection has inner and outer barrier facing sections formed by separate
    modules which are placed in juxtaposed position, i.e., front to back across
    a wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    506.01+, for a residual construction of dissimilar layers and see the
    reference under "SEARCH CLASS" in subclass 506.01 for various constructions
    involving a layered construction.


CLS 52/276
TXT Structure under subclass 275 wherein the module defining one of the
    sections comprises a discrete, integral corner member, e.g,, angle or L,
    which member overlaps the contiguous faces of the intersecting modules of
    the other section, the exposed surface of the discrete member and the
    exposed surfaces of the intersecting modules lying in offset planes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    279,    for outer L and abutting inner modules forming intersecting
    barriers having coplanar exposed surfaces.


CLS 52/277
TXT Structure under subclass 276 wherein the corner member is curved along a
    substantial portion between terminal longitudinal edges thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    287.1+, for a corner type trim member, per se.


CLS 52/278
TXT Structure under subclass 276 wherein the corner member has means integral
    or attached to it which means extends below the inner face of the other
    section and is attached to a supporting substructure for the latter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209+,   for a cap-like bridger strip over the juncture of coplanar panels.


CLS 52/279
TXT Structure under subclass 275 having inner modules in abutting relationship
    or separation by a mere divider such as mortar and also an outer L-shaped
    module covering the juncture of the abutting modules.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    276+,   for intersections where the sections of an integral angle overlap
    the abutting barrier sections.


CLS 52/280
TXT Structure under subclass 272 including at least three elongated rigid
    shafts lying in three intersecting planes each containing two of the shafts
    at least one sheetlike member forming a barrier or facing attached to at
    least one of the members and being parallel to its plane.


CLS 52/281
TXT Structure under subclass 272 including an elongated sustainer, e.g., beam
    or column which is located at, and is longitudinally coextensive with the
    juncture of angularly related panels or modules.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258,    for an intersection formed by laterally related modules and having
    a concealed cast in situ sustainer.


CLS 52/282.1
TXT Exposed sustainer:

    Intersection under subclass 281 in which the juncture member is visible to
    an observer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    287.1+, for a sheetlike trim member at an intersection.

    764+,   for coplanarily arranged sections having a framing member between
    and separating the section edges and having an   interfitting configuration
    between the framing member and the section.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclass 79 for vault
    corners.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclass 65 for box corners.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclass 205 for a corner connector for two
    members.


CLS 52/282.2
TXT With three or more identical panel or module connection points:

    Visible intersection under subclass 282.1 in which the juncture member has
    at least three similar securing portions.


CLS 52/282.3
TXT Wall, ceiling, or floor section designed to receive corner connector:

    Visible intersection under subclass 282.1 in which the juncture member fits
    into a designated location in a static structure component.


CLS 52/282.4
TXT With fastener:

    Visible intersection under subclass 282.1 in which the juncture member has
    a bolt, screw, rivet, or nail type securing member through the wall
    juncture pieces.


CLS 52/282.5
TXT Compressing a clamping means:

    Fastening means under subclass 282.4 in which the juncture member has a
    threaded bolt-type fastener which presses at least one discrete member
    against the juncture member.


CLS 52/283
TXT Structure under subclass 272 including a rigid vertical structure, e.g.,
    column or wall, provided with a laterally extending feature which supports
    a barrier or preform extending generally horizontally of the vertical
    structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    289,    for a construction of coplanar sustainers (joists) intersecting a
    wall.

    702,    for a saddle-like cantilevered anchor which holds a joist
    transversely of a wall.


CLS 52/284
TXT Structure under subclass 272 including plural angularly related modules or
    a single module specialized by its shape for use in forming an
    intersection, e.g., corner blocks.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281,    for corner sustainer coextensive with modules.

    608+,   for nonrectangular cross-section modules of more general
    application.


CLS 52/285.1
TXT Finite (i.e., not coextensive), disparate material tie:

    Intersection under subclass 284 including a determinate juncture member
    composed of a different material than the sections of a wall, floor,
    ceiling, or roof being secured.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    712+,   for a sheet and wire tie of more general application.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclass 79 for vault
    corners.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclass 65 for box corners.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for just a corner
    connector.


CLS 52/285.2
TXT Including threaded tie member:

    Intersection under subclass 285.1 in which the determinate juncture member
    has a bolt or screw-type fastener.


CLS 52/285.3
TXT Clip-type tie:

    Intersection under subclass 285.1 in which the juncture member resiliently
    grips the static structure components in position.


CLS 52/285.4
TXT Lockpin-type tie:

    Intersection under subclass 285.1 in which the juncture member has a
    generally short cylindrically or rectangularly shaped piece that fixes the
    static structure components in position.


CLS 52/286
TXT Structure under subclass 284 which the module has a key on a vertical
    surface and a key on a horizontal surface which lock vertically and
    horizontally, respectively with other modules.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    589.1+, for a module in the same course with keys on angularly related
    faces.


CLS 52/287.1
TXT CONDUIT, TRIM, OR SHIELD MEMBER AT CORNER:

    Structure under the class definition wherein a trim-type element; e.g.,
    tile or baseboard, forms an exposed surface which is attached at a
    floor-wall, wall-wall, or wall-ceiling intersection and serves as a
    channel, conduit, or covering strip for protective or decorative purposes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179,    for a stair or tread nosing.

    254,    for a partition with an interfitted trim plate at a base or ceiling
    board.

    716.1+, for edging.


CLS 52/288.1
TXT With mechanical fastener:

    Corner conduit, trim, or shield under subclass 287.1 which is held in
    position by a nail, screw, bolt, nut, rivet, pin, etc.


CLS 52/289
TXT Structure under subclass 272 including two or more spaced sustainers, e.g.,
    columns or joists, which extend normally to a construction with which they
    form an intersection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    283,    for a module supported on a laterally projecting part of an
    intersecting barrier construction.

    702,    for a joist hanger wherein no arrangement of spaced sustainers and
    an intersecting barrier is defined.


CLS 52/290
TXT Structure under the class definition including facially spaced, parallel
    coextensive strips or flanges, with a rigid elongated shaft extending
    normally to the strips with an end portion only thereof between the strips,
    i.e., two back-to-back baseboards with the end of a stud therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241+,   for a compartment forming partition having baseboards.

    481.1,  for a barrier with facers spaced by an internal sustainer, e.g.,
    wall boards on either side of a stud.

    690+,   for open-work with side-by-side shafts, e.g, truss.


CLS 52/291
TXT Structure under the class definition having adjustable means which is
    attached to a principal structure and which acts in compression, torque,
    tension or flexure to (1) correct deflection, warp or sag of the principal
    structure or (2) acts to reinforce one member of the principal structure so
    as to equalize the unit stress on the load-bearing members of the said
    principal structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222,    for a construction utilizing a tensioned or flexed facing.

    223.1+, for means acting under tension to compressively stress a structure
    in which the means is incorporated.

    640,    for a curvilinear or peaked truss with means to vary its camber.


CLS 52/292
TXT Structure under the class definition forming a discrete stable base which
    in use is peculiar to the support of and differs substantially in size and
    shape from that of a superimposed structural body such as a wall, post or
    column which body or base is not merely a coplanar component of or section
    of a floor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    Appropriate subclass for various other constructions involving a dissimilar
    base and attached section particularly:

    27+,    for an in situ erected structure with a feature for supporting a
    disparate article.

    169.1+, for a structure wherein a combination with or feature related to
    the earth is defined.

    247,    for curvilinear barrier anchored to a base.

    274,    for barrier intersection construction with a foundation.

    506.01+, for a construction wherein a facer is attached to a dissimilar in
    situ erected section.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses for  bases  of  more general
    application, particularly subclasses 678+ for machinery supports;
    subclasses 519+ for staff supporting bases; and subclasses 346+ for
    miscellaneous article supporting bases.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 230+ for a connection between a
    rod end and a transverse surface of general application.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 222 and 224+ for a
    marine foundation, or a method or apparatus for installing the same; and
    subclasses 229+ for subject matter relating to foundations not provided for
    elsewhere (e.g., piers, or piles).


CLS 52/293.1
TXT For a wall:

    Footing or foundation under subclass 292 in which the base member
    substantially supports a vertical barrier construction; i.e., a wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    274+,   for a corner and a footing.


CLS 52/293.2
TXT Of block (e.g., masonry) type:

    Wall footing or foundation under subclass 293.1 composed of concrete, wood,
    metal, or clay generally rectangular cube-like building units.


CLS 52/293.3
TXT With wall-securing means between wall bottom and footing (e.g., sill or
    sill plate):

    Wall footing foundation under subclass 293.1 wherein the base and vertical
    barrier are attached by a discreet connection which also spaces the barrier
    from the footing or foundation.


CLS 52/294
TXT Structure under subclass 292 in which the base is composed primarily of a
    stone-like cast material, e.g., concrete.


CLS 52/295
TXT Structure under subclass 294 in which there is a tie embedded in the base
    and projects upwardly and outwardly thereof, which tie connects the
    supported structure to the base.


CLS 52/296
TXT Structure under subclass 294 supporting a vertical, rigid, pole, post,
    column or the like.


CLS 52/297
TXT Structure under subclass 296 in which the base surrounds, e.g., embeds, the
    lower portion of the elongated rigid member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    298,    or another socket type footing for a shaft.


CLS 52/298
TXT Structure under subclass 292 wherein either the stable base or the
    supported body includes a recess which receives the other in telescopic
    interfitted relation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291,    for a footing which embeds a shaft.

    704+,   for a socket type anchor or tie, either, per se, or embedded in a
    wall or ceiling.


CLS 52/299
TXT Structure under subclass 292 including a plurality of separated bases
    supporting structure extending from and between said bases, e.g., tower
    with feet on separate footings.


CLS 52/300
TXT Structure under the class definition which is vertical, i.e., wall or
    column, and includes a distinct member mounted at its top and so shaped as
    to be the final upper terminal of the structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for a roof finial or cresting.

    102,    for a border formed as an earth supported coping which may include
    a low wall with a cap.

    103+,   for a marker or monument which may include a cap.

    179,    for a nosing of a step tread member.

    218,    for a flue which may include a cap therefor.

    244,    for a wall enclosing a space with a terminus edge protector.

    254+,   for a corner with a revealed embedded protector.

    283,    for an intersection wherein means at a joint may be a cap.


CLS 52/301
TXT Structure under subclass 300 in which the vertical structure is a rigid
    member having a limited closed periphery and which is greatly elongated
    relative to any lateral dimension.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146+,   for a vertical structure with a diagonal brace or guy engaging a
    base or the earth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclass 281 for a bed post top or ornament.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 173, for a flagstaff having a
    feature specialized to such use.


CLS 52/302.1
TXT WALL, CEILING, FLOOR, OR ROOF DESIGNED FOR VENTILATION OR DRAINAGE:

    Structure under the class definition in which a static structure, or a
    component, is specifically fabricated or modified to convey a fluid (e.g.,
    a wall with a passage for air or water).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12+,    for a cover with external water receiver at eave or valley; e.g.,
    gutter.

    95,     for a roof with gable or eave structure and conduit or passage
    means for a subjacent area.

    131+,   for a grave vault with fluid ports.

    169.5,  for a drain or vent exterior to the building foundation perimeter.


    198+,   for an enclosure with a port from the ambient to an enclosed usable
    space.

    209,    for a door or window opening and a drain or vent for the reveal
    area.


    220.1+, for a service duct within a barrier.

    310,    for a construction with a feature for removing excess moisture from
    cast material.

    311.3,  for grill-work in which there is a defined color, thickness
    variation, dissimilar characteristics, or irregular periphery of
    components.

    503+,   for a construction of plural modules forming a through fluid
    passage.


    508,    for dissimilar abutted facer sections which together form
    unoccupied spaces within barrier.

    514.5,  for a construction with means for injecting or connecting with
    grouting means.

    533+,   for lapped multiplanar surfacing having a joint with fluid handling
    feature.

    553,    for a similar surfacing with space or space forming feature.

    606+,   for an individual unit with a traversing passage.

    633+,   for openwork; i.e., a surface forming structure which exhibits open
    uniform through passages or openings extending from one face to another;
    e.g., trusses, grilles, particularly subclass 663 for a barrier having
    through passages extending from one side to another formed by stacked
    discrete components.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 633 for a wall or floor constructed
    with a passage for solar heated fluid to warm a building.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 156+ for a duct.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 36+ for drainage
    devices.


    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 254+ for a specific inlet, outlet, or flow
    controlling device (damper, louver, etc.) to circulate and exchange air
    from one area to another.


CLS 52/302.2
TXT For a grain bin:

    Floor under subclass 302.1 in which the static structure is designed to
    allow air to circulate around a harvested crop.


CLS 52/302.3
TXT With the vent or drain entirely along at least one substantial dimension
    (e.g., length, not thickness):

    Wall, ceiling, floor, or roof under subclass 302.1 comprising a distinct
    cavity, space, chamber, channel, groove, or other three dimensional
    hollow-type area through which a liquid or gas flows to be discharged.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263,    for a three-way corner construction on a column (e.g., elevated
    floor).


    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 47+ for a structural installation.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 254+ for devices allowing the flow of air
    in a building.


CLS 52/302.4
TXT Composed of interfitting blocks:

    Hollowed wall, ceiling, floor, or roof under subclass 302.3 wherein the
    hollow-type area is constructed from a hand-carried rectangular building
    unit attached to similar building units to form an; e.g., wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    415+,   for modules bonded by internal settable material.

    503+,   for hollow modules that form through passages in a barrier
    interior.


    592.6,  for modular panel or block with integral key designed for stacking.

    606+,   for an opaque stonelike module with a passage.


CLS 52/302.5
TXT For a pole or post:

    Structure under subclass 302.1 in which a self-supporting vertical-type
    structure is fabricated to allow the flow of a gas or liquid.


CLS 52/302.6
TXT Embedded flashing:

    Wall under subclass 302.1 in which a preformed, imperforate member acting
    as a separator between contacting elements is so formed as to allow a fluid
    to flow along it; e.g., a sheet metal piece inside of a wall which deflects
    liquid.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58+,    for exterior-type flashing.

    408+,   for a similar construction without a liquid flow feature.


CLS 52/302.7
TXT Including a plug for drain or vent:

    Wall, ceiling, floor, or roof under subclass 302.1 in which a distinct
    device closes the fluid conveying means.


CLS 52/306
TXT Structure under the class definition including a material that permits the
    passage of light and which material is embedded in but visible at a face of
    the embedding material or is a facing for or forms a glass block, i.e., a
    unit which has inherent stability against overturning as opposed to a glass
    pane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80.1+,  for a compound curve cover, e.g., dome roof or skylight.

    104,    for a marker or monument including a translucent feature.

    133,    for a burial vault with a viewing feature.

    171.1+, 203, 204+, 204.591+, 304, and 624+, for various constructions
    wherein a panel is often a glass pane.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    591+ for elements to illuminate the interior of buildings with outside
    light.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 67 for an
    article having an element embedded therein and which is visible.


CLS 52/307
TXT Structure under subclass 306 wherein the construction including a visible
    translucent component also includes an element which is made of a material
    different from that of the translucent component and is preformed before
    assembly with the translucent component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    782+,   for a composite panel with sheets in face-to-face contact.


CLS 52/308
TXT Structure under subclass 307 wherein the preshaped component of different
    material is placed at an edge of a translucent component, i.e., between the
    sides of components and extends normal to the face of the resultant
    barrier, usually to frame a glass block.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    475.1,  for construction involving modules in openings of a lattice frame.

    601,    for a stone-like module with dissimilar material edging.

    782+,   for a parallel-pane panel having a disparate edging which usually
    holds the plural panes in their parallel positions.

    782+,   for a composite panel with a disparate edging.


CLS 52/309.1
TXT Structure under the class definition, including (1) a significant building
    structure having bonded thereto or embedded therein a synthetic resinous
    component, or (2) a defined synthetic resin building component having a
    physical configuration peculiar to use as a structural component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208,    for panels closing an opening and having means for attaching to a
    barrier, which panel is often defined as a "safety glass" sandwich having
    as its core layer a resinous plastic sheet.

    384+    and 390+, for a plastic veneer tile not limited to a specific
    synthetic resinous compound or composition.

    612     and 782+, for a construction unit with layered components, and see
    the references under "SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS" and "SEARCH CLASS" in
    those subclasses for other locales of this type of structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, for synthetic resin compounds
    and compositions there provided for which are not limited by a particular
    physical configuration to a structural use.


CLS 52/309.11
TXT Structure under 309.9 wherein the exterior, nonporous components are tied
    together by an element distinct from the porous, foam-like component
    therebetween.


CLS 52/309.12
TXT Structure under subclass 309.8 wherein the nonfoam-like component is a
    hydraulic, cementitious material, e.g., concrete.


CLS 52/309.13
TXT Structure under subclass 309.1 wherein the synthetic resinous component has
    a nonresinous component bonded thereto or embedded therein, and is
    coextensive therewith in at least one dimension.


CLS 52/309.14
TXT Structure under subclass 309.13 wherein the nonresinous components are the
    outermost or exterior faces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for laminations in general.


CLS 52/309.15
TXT Structure under subclass 309.13 wherein the nonresinous component is the
    core or center component, being sandwiched between or surrounded by the
    resinous component.

    (1)     Note.  The exterior nonresinous component (s) may be openwork in
    structure.


CLS 52/309.16
TXT Structure under subclass 309.13 wherein the synthetic resinous component
    has embedded therein an elongated nonresinous component.


CLS 52/309.17
TXT Structure under subclass 309.13 wherein the nonresinous component is a
    hydraulic cementitious material, e.g., concrete.


CLS 52/309.2
TXT Structure under subclass 309.1 wherein a specific, limited area of the
    resinous component is reinforced to aid in receiving a fastening means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    782+,   for an internal receiver for an elongated fastener.


CLS 52/309.3
TXT Structure under subclass 309.1 wherein the synthetic resinous component is
    not a foam, and functions to bond two surfaces together.


CLS 52/309.4
TXT Structure under subclass 309.1 wherein the synthetic resinous component is
    made of porous foam-like material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for laminations containing foam; subclasses 69+, for a foam or cellular
    material, the cells being filled with a gas other than air.


CLS 52/309.5
TXT Structure under subclass 309.4 wherein the foam-like porous component is an
    adhesive.


CLS 52/309.6
TXT Structure under subclass 309.4 wherein the cells or voids make up the
    porous, foam-like material are not closed spheres, but are open and
    interconnect with one another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 322.7, for stock
    material of open cell foam.


CLS 52/309.7
TXT Structure under subclass 309.4 wherein the porous, foam-like component has
    embedded therein an elongated component, such elongated component being
    completely surrounded, at least along its longitudinal dimension by the
    porous, foam-like component.


CLS 52/309.8
TXT Structure under subclass 309.4 wherein the porous, foam-like component is
    directly adjacent to at least one nonfoam-like component.


CLS 52/309.9
TXT Structure under subclass 309.8 wherein the exterior or outermost components
    are of nonfoam-like material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    782+,   for sandwich type panels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 312.8+, for a
    cellular or porous component including a nonporous or noncellular layer.


CLS 52/310
TXT Structure under the class definition including an element or feature of a
    particular composition or porosity which is specialized to absorbing or
    draining excess moisture from a mass of an initially fluid but settable
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302.1+, for constructions with an exteriorly opening fluid part and see
    notes.


CLS 52/311.1
TXT ORNAMENTAL:  COLOR, THICKNESS VARIATION, OR DISSIMILAR ELEMENTS FORMING
    PATTERN:

    Structure under the class definition including means forming an exposed
    face which exhibits a particular desired visual effect, which effect is
    gained by:  (1) having a defined coloring, (2) relief or intaglio surface
    shape of a monolith or component element, or (3) by a defined pattern
    formed as the result of the edge-to-edge relationship of elements which
    have differing surface characteristics or an irregular periphery.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for a roof with finial or cresting.

    103+,   for a marker or monument.

    105,    for a structure with indicia.

    384+    and 390+, for a veneer tile construction which may form a regular
    pattern.

    554+,   for a lapped covering of generally similar sections; e.g.,
    shingles, which together form a pattern.

    557+,   for lapped multiplanar generally similar elements forming a
    surfacing which simulates a single element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclass 42 for modules with
    a patterned face.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 3+ and 542.2+
    for a miscellaneous ornamental article not provided for elsewhere and
    subclass 598 for a metallic stock material having a T- or X-shaped
    cross-section.


CLS 52/311.2
TXT Elements interfit or abut to create design:

    Ornamental structure under subclass 311.1 wherein a static structure
    component (e.g., wall, ceiling, floor, door) is composed of distinct pieces
    that, when assembled, make a unique pattern or configuration.


CLS 52/311.3
TXT Decorative feature on a grille-type support:

    Ornamental structure under subclass 311.1 wherein an assembly of structural
    members form an array or grid-type pattern for a wall, or ceiling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204.61, for window decorative grilles.


CLS 52/312
TXT Structure under subclass 311 wherein a portion of the construction
    comprises a member with a slot or groove into which an elongated strip fits.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    716.1+, for a residual in situ attached trim strip.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 156+ for a
    stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or sheet
    in which at least one component varies in thickness.


CLS 52/313
TXT Structure under subclass 311 wherein the desired visual effect is achieved
    by the arrangement of separate sections made of wood, there being a visible
    difference in the grain of at least two sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    316,    for integral relief which may utilize or simulate wood grain.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 44 through 62
    for plural stock material sheets or webs abutting edge to edge, whether or
    not joined, and subclass 106 for a plural component web or sheet comprising
    wood grain in two layers or components angularly related.


CLS 52/314
TXT Structure under subclass 311 in which the exposed face of a preformed unit
    gives the appearance of being formed of multiple units, this effect being
    gained by deformation or marking of the base material of at least one
    facing section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    316,    for other integral relief ornamental facings.

    557+,   for a similar construction involving a multiplanar overlapping
    sectional surface, e.g., shingles forming a pattern.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 156+ and 174+
    for  nonuniform thickness or nonplanar uniform thickness stock material
    which may simulate multiple units and subclass 573 for a metallic stock
    material having a width or thickness variation which repeats longitudinally.


CLS 52/315
TXT Structure under subclass 311 which discrete elements, e.g., natural stone,
    are partially embedded in a structural unit, the portions not embedded
    being exposed to provide the desired effect.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    318,    for a cast type surfacing with revealed intersecting stiffness.

    384+    and 390+, for a veneer tile construction which forms a regular
    pattern.


CLS 52/316
TXT Structure under subclass 311 in which the desired effect is obtained
    through a relief or intaglio surface deformation of a face of the material
    of a panel like member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    314,    for a facer deformed to simulate plural facer units.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    59 for a process of etching involving formation of relief or intaglio
    surfaces.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 156+ for a
    structurally defined stock material product in the form of a single or
    plural layer web or sheet in which at least one component varies in
    thickness and subclass 598 for a metallic stock material having aT - or X -
    shaped cross section.


CLS 52/317
TXT Structure under the class definition wherein a wall cavity is broken up
    into a plurality of dead air spaces by elongated transverse elements the
    ends of which engage adjacent vertical framing members (studs) and the
    sides of which engage the opposed inner surfaces of the wall surfacing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404.1+, for insulation inserted in barrier cavity.


CLS 52/318
TXT Structure under the class definition including a cast in situ barrier with
    intersecting or crossing reinforcing stiffeners embedded therein, with the
    common edges of said members being exposed at a surface of the barrier,
    usually to reduce wear on the barrier material, e.g., terrazzo paving.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181,    for a wear surface with an embedded or inserted filler.

    315,    for an ornamental cast panel with revealed embedded components.

    455+,   for a sectional imperforate facing within a peripheral frame, e.g.,
    a multipaneled door or window sash.

    475.1+, for a preformed panel within a preassembled frame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    14,     Bridges, subclass 73 for a similar construction peculiar to bridge
    floors.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 47+ for a
    pavement including joint means, subclass 67 for terrazzo-like components
    and subclass 70 for a pavement including reinforced structure.


CLS 52/319
TXT Structure under the class definition including a cast in situ primary
    concrete body, which forms a major face of a barrier (wall or floor)
    combined with an elongated sustainer for the concrete body having at least
    one terminal longitudinal edge projecting laterally outward of said major
    face, the structure as a whole being such as to resist relatively heavy
    transverse loads, e.g., a concrete, ribbed, reinforced floor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    344+,   for a construction for walls or partitions wherein a settable
    material (plaster) backer is fixed to a furring, stud or joist.

    483.1+, for a construction wherein a pre-formed facer element is wholly
    positioned to one side of a sustainer.

    602,    for a cast reinforced module with monolithic ribs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 233+ for a method or
    apparatus for installing a cast in situ pile; and subclass 257 for a cast
    in situ pile, per se.


CLS 52/320
TXT Structure under subclass 319 including a rigid self-sustaining filler
    member between spaced sustainers, which member has a depth which is
    substantial relative to its length and height, the member being used in
    side-by-side relationship with others, one coplanar face formed by the
    members being covered by the cast in situ barrier material, e.g., a ribbed
    concrete floor with hollow tile fillers.


CLS 52/321
TXT Structure under subclass 320 including a reinforcing member extending
    between and transversely of the sustainers, which member engages the
    sustainers and retains them in position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239+,   326, 335+, and 338+, for a sheetlike backer between sustainers.

    475.1+, for a facer within a cornered peripheral frame.


CLS 52/322
TXT Structure under subclass 320 in which the sustainer consists of reinforced
    settable material, which sustainer is preformed before it is placed, it is
    joined to the settable material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    721.1+, for a stone-like sustainer, per se, with feature for resisting
    transverse loading.


CLS 52/323
TXT Structure under subclass 320 including fillers which are subdivided into
    two or more sections, which sections cooperate with each other to form a
    complete filler unit, which unit forms a void within the cast in situ
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    380+,   for cast in situ barrier construction defining an isolated space
    and lacking a laterally projecting rib-type sustainer.

    576,    for a module with an isolated internal cavity.

    577,    for embedded type void former, per se.


CLS 52/324
TXT Structure under subclass 320 including distinct means underlying the face
    of a sustainer section which fills the space between the filler members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    440+,   for a construction of facer sections bonded together by settable
    material sections which are covered by a surfacing section or other means.


CLS 52/325
TXT Structure under subclass 320 in which the filler member circumscribes a
    cavity and has an external shape which in silhouette is other than a
    rectangle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    608+,   for a nonrectangular cross-section block, per se, which may be used
    in a cast ribbed-type construction.


CLS 52/326
TXT Structure under subclass 319 including (1)  sheetlike members against which
    the concrete is cast or (2) elongated members extending transversely of the
    sustainers which act to strengthen the barrier construction combined with
    means engaging members (1) or (2) and acting to suspend them from the
    sustainer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    321,    for a similar construction of block-type fillers with a transverse
    retainer engaging a sustainer.

    506.06+, for a facer suspended from a sustainer lacking the settable
    material component, e.g., a so-called "suspended ceiling".


CLS 52/327
TXT Structure under subclass 319 including a separately identifiable additional
    facing section which is carried by the cast barrier section either directly
    or by the rib-type sustainer, which section is coextensive with an extended
    surface of the construction forming the primary load-bearing barrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    367,    for nailing strips embedded in and supported by a stone-like base
    structure.

    479+,   for another type of barrier with face-to-face sections.

    506.01+, for a barrier formed by modules and attached dissimilar section.


CLS 52/328
TXT Structure under subclass 327 in which the additional facing section rests
    on or is fixed to the surface of the barrier on the side thereof opposite
    to the side from which the sustainer projects, e.g., flooring above a
    ribbed concrete subfloor.


CLS 52/329
TXT Structure under subclass 327 including a generally sheet-form curvilinear
    member which is supported by the rib-type sustainer and against the convex
    side of which the concrete forming the barrier surface is poured, i.e., the
    sustainer and arched backer constitute a form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86+,    for structure which as a whole forms a vertical curvilinear arch.

    339,    for a similar construction involving only a cast barrier.


CLS 52/330
TXT Structure under subclass 329 in which the rib-type sustainer includes an
    elongated flange-web type (I or T beam) reinforcement embedded therein.


CLS 52/331
TXT Structure under subclass 327 including distinct means, e.g., hanger,
    bracket or spacer, interposed between the additional section and the
    terminal face of the sustainer which is adjacent thereto.


CLS 52/332
TXT Structure under subclass 327 in which the additional section is formed by
    thin rigid units arranged in edge-to-edge relationship.


CLS 52/333
TXT Structure under subclass 327 in which the additional section is formed of
    settable material and the extremity of the sustainer opposite the barrier
    is anchored or embedded in the material of the section.


CLS 52/334
TXT Structure under subclass 319 including means, usually a projection, fixed
    to the sustainer, usually a metal beam which means anchored or embedded
    within the cast barrier material and acts to reduce or eliminate
    longitudinal movement or slippage, i.e., shear, between the sustainer and
    the barrier forming material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    647,    740.7, 740.6, 740.3+, and 740.9, for a shaft with a lateral
    projection.


CLS 52/335
TXT Structure under subclass 319 including a preformed sheetlike member carried
    on the upper surface of the sustainer and spanning the space between plural
    sustainers, which member supports the cast barrier-forming material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    344+,   particularly subclass 354 for a settable material (plaster) backer
    fixed to a furring, joist or stud.


CLS 52/336
TXT Structure under subclass 335 in which the sheetlike member is corrugated,
    with the axis of the corrugations extending normal to the sustainer axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    416+,   for lapped multiplanar or bridge strip type surfacing in which
    sheets are held by settable material.

    450+,   for a corrugated imperforate sheet member which acts as a backer
    for settable material.

    630,    for a panel with integral reinforcing, e.g., a corrugated panel.


CLS 52/337
TXT Structure under subclass 319 in which parallel sustainers of settable
    material are intersected by, and are integral with, parallel sustainers
    disposed normally to the first mentioned sustainers, and together form a
    grid or lattice, often termed a "waffle ceiling" in the art.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252,    for cast reinforced column with distinct sustainers therebetween.

    475.1+, for a preshaped unit in a preassembled cornered peripheral frame.


CLS 52/338
TXT Structure under subclass 319 in which the sustainer is of the flange-web (I
    or T beam) type and a section forming a backing for the cast material is
    supported from a surface of a flange forming an inside corner with the web.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    469,    for a structure wherein a sustainer section, e.g., flange extends
    into a notch or rabbet in a module.

    506.01+, for a related construction wherein a facer is attached to a
    dissimilar barrier section.


CLS 52/339
TXT Structure under subclass 338 in which the backer section is generally
    curvilinear and sheetlike and wherein the barrier material is supported
    from the convex side of the curved backer section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329+,   for a similar structure with an additional facing section.


CLS 52/340
TXT Structure under subclass 319 in which the material of the barrier or
    similar material completely encloses a member which acts as a laterally
    projecting sustainer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    721.1+, for a reinforced stone-like beam or girder, per se, having a
    defined structural feature resisting transverse loading.

    738.1,  for a beam or girder with a dissimilar shell.


CLS 52/341
TXT Structure under subclass 340 in which the primary barrier includes embedded
    reinforcing means, e.g., rods, which reinforcing is modified or altered
    where it crosses the sustainer.


CLS 52/342
TXT Structure under the class definition in which a plurality of thin, flat
    slat-like members whose width is greater than their depth and whose length
    is greater than either, the members being arranged with a flat major face
    in planar, side-by-side spaced relationship, the structure as a whole
    receiving a settable material which extends between the members and also
    covers the major faces, e.g., wood-lath plaster wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    367+,   for a flat ground member serving as a screed or fastener receiver,
    i.e., with a revealed surface at the settable material face.

    454,    for a panel with attached filament or mesh for retaining settable
    material.

    660+,   for a fabric or lattice sheetlike open work, e.g., mesh.


CLS 52/343
TXT Structure under subclass 342 wherein the members are (1) connected by means
    of a filament or (2) intersect and pass over and under each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    669,    for a foraminous fabric or lattice openwork formed by discrete
    rod-like members which are dissimilar in cross-section.

    676,    for a fabric or lattice openwork formed as a mesh with attached
    bodies.


CLS 52/344
TXT Structure under the class definition including panel means (backer)
    attached to an elongated rigid member serving as a spacer or sustainer and
    known to the art as a furring, joist or stud, the panel means or
    arrangement thereof being specialized to the reception or retention of a
    settable material which sets to rigidity, e.g., plaster covered panel,
    panel with plaster retaining features, combination of panels wherein the
    fasteners therefor act to retain plaster, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238.1+, for a vertical partition secured to a preconstructed transverse
    barrier.

    342+,   for openly spaced slat type lath.

    364,    for an installed screed or unit with a feature retaining a
    penetrating fastener.

    443+,   for an imperforate type settable material receiving backer, per se.

    474+,   for a construction of more general application wherein modules are
    fixed to an elongated sustainer, particularly subclasses 483.1+ for a
    module held laterally of sustainer.

    660+,   for a fabric or lattice openwork which in use may be embedded.


CLS 52/345
TXT Structure under subclass 344 including adjustable means spacing the backer
    from the elongated rigid member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    365,    for an adjusting means for a screed or penetrating fastener
    receiver.


CLS 52/346
TXT Structure under subclass 344 including means allowing the backer to float
    or to move relative to the elongated rigid member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    345,    for a similar combination with an adjustable spacer.

    573.1,  for a structure of more general application having means
    accommodating a dimension variation responsive to changing conditions,
    e.g., expansion by heat.


CLS 52/347
TXT Structure under subclass 344 including means on the support side of the
    backer for inhibiting or moderating the passage of vibrations, moisture or
    temperature variations through the assemblage, e.g., sound or heat
    insulating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for an insulated car roof.

    144+,   for structure including an element having physical features for
    acoustical purposes.

    167.1+, for means compensating earth transmitted force.

    380+,   for a cast in situ barrier with a filler within it.

    404.1+, for a nonsettable insulating material within a cavity in a barrier.

    408+,   for a disparate sheet lamina separating components of an in situ
    construction.


CLS 52/348
TXT Structure under subclass 344 having at least two spaced elongated rigid
    members arranged in an intersecting or crossing relationship to two other
    such spaced members thus defining a supporting framework for a backer
    parallel thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    762+,   for a facer lateral of a pre-positioned polygonal frame.


CLS 52/349
TXT Structure under subclass 348 in which the backer frame includes an
    elongated rigid member, i.e., stud or joist, which terminates at the flange
    of a flanged member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241+,   for a partition having an elongated terminal member joined to a
    preconstructed barrier.


CLS 52/350
TXT Structure under subclass 348 in which one member is supported by the flange
    of a crossing or intersecting member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    349,    for a like structure where an elongated rigid member terminates at
    the flange of a flanged member.


CLS 52/351
TXT Structure under subclass 344 including a load-bearing barrier section and
    means permanently embedded in said section, which means is connected to
    elongated rigid member which supports the backer and/or to the backer
    itself.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    698+,   for an anchor or tie, per se, specialized to use in an in situ
    construction and see the search notes thereunder for other constructions
    utilizing a tie.


CLS 52/352
TXT Structure under subclass 344 comprising a pair of spaced parallel sheets,
    at least one of which is a backer for retaining settable material, and a
    longitudinal projection integral with at least one sheet, which projection
    retains the sheets in parallel, spaced relation.


CLS 52/353
TXT Structure under subclass 344 in which a distinct tie member crosses or
    extends through opposed backers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    698+,   for an anchor or tie, per se, and see the search notes thereunder
    for other constructions utilizing a tie.


CLS 52/354
TXT Structure under subclass 344 in which an integral part of the elongated
    rigid support usually a rib, extends between opposed edges of coplanar
    backers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    338+    for a barrier with a cast in situ section and a lateral rib wherein
    a backer is supported by an interposed flange-web sustainer.

    468,    for a cap-like bridger strip extending between edges of panels.


CLS 52/355
TXT Structure under subclass 354 including a discrete separable fastener
    cooperating with the part of the support between the backers and acting to
    retain a backer in position.


CLS 52/356
TXT Structure under subclass 344 in which the elongated rigid member is
    structurally modified to engage and retain a backer or an intermediate
    holder for such backer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    482,    for a shaft having a ductile type deformable grip for a facer.


CLS 52/357
TXT Structure under subclass 344 including a separate clip-type fastener, one
    end of which engages the distal surface of the backer relative to the
    elongated support member and the other end of which engages a distal
    surface of the member disposed relative to the backer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    712+,   for a sheet and wire tie, per se, which is used to connect
    components of an in situ construction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclass 339 for fastener not specialized to building
    construction.


CLS 52/358
TXT Structure under subclass 357 in which the clip-type fastener is formed by a
    wire, a length of which extends completely across a face of a backer
    section.


CLS 52/359
TXT Structure under subclass 357 in which the member is a flange-web (I or T)
    member, the backer or its support abutting or being fixed to the flange,
    which flange is also engaged by the clip.


CLS 52/360
TXT Structure under subclass 359 in which there are flanges extending from
    opposite sides of the web and the clip includes means engaging the distal
    edges of the oppositely projecting flanges.


CLS 52/361
TXT Structure under subclass 344 including a fastener which passes into or
    through either the backer, the member or both.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    364+,   for another construction having a defined feature for receiving a
    penetrating fastener.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, subclasses 439+ for impact driven fasteners of
    general application, and see the reference to Class 411 in Class 52,
    subclass 698.


CLS 52/362
TXT Structure under subclass 361 in which the fastener penetrates or passes
    into the material of the member.


CLS 52/363
TXT Structure under subclass 362 in which the fastener also passes into the
    material of the backer.


CLS 52/364
TXT Structure under the class definition including a component having a defined
    structural modification (1) specialized to the purpose of retaining that
    type of fastener which forces retaining surfaces apart or makes its own
    hole or (2) acts as or retains a screed, i.e., a guide for a stricker which
    levels unset material such as plaster or concrete other than a mere
    preferred smooth or threaded hole.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    361+,   for a settable material backer (plaster board) attached to a
    furring, joist or stud by a penetrating fastener.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 404 through 410 for a straight
    edge wall guide or plumb tool, not specialized to a structural installation
    in an in situ building construction.


CLS 52/365
TXT Structure under subclass 364 including a feature for shifting the screed or
    fastener receiver relative to the base structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    345,    for a backer fixed to furring, joist or stud by an adjustable
    spacer.


CLS 52/366
TXT Structure under subclass 364 in which the screed or fastener receiver is
    attached to the base structure by a settable adhesive.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    390,    for an adhesively secured veneer facing tile.

    416,    for a lapped surfacing or bridge strip held by a settable material
    section, e.g., adhesive strip.


CLS 52/367
TXT Structure under subclass 364 in which the screed or means receiving a
    penetrating type fastener is embedded or formed within a stone-like
    material base, e.g., concrete.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27+,    for a screed with a support for a disparate article.

    213+,   for a closure or window frame member which may act as a screed.

    254+,   for a corner protector which may act as a screed.

    318,    for a monolithic barrier with revealed intersecting stiffeners.

    344+,   for a settable material backer fixed to a furring, joist or stud.

    480,    for a structure having modules fixed to an elongated sustainer and
    a sleeper for an additional section.

    698+,   for another anchor or the tie, per se, specialized to use in
    retaining components of a building construction.


CLS 52/368
TXT Structure under subclass 367 including an elongated rigid load sustaining
    member formed by particularly related discrete components of materials
    which differ in kind, the material of one component being specialized to
    receiving a fastener that is driven into and held by that component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    361+,   for settable material backer which is fixed to a furring, joist or
    stud by a penetrating type fastener.

    376,    for another composite structure wherein one component is a
    non-metal and receives a penetrating fastener.

    720.1+, for other shaft-structures, particularly subclasses 724, 725, and
    727+, for a shaft having a dissimilar material shell or facing.


CLS 52/369
TXT Structure under subclass 367 including a holding member having an integral
    portion for penetrating the screed or fastener receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    361+,   for a penetrating type fastener holding a settable material backer
    (plasterboard) to furring, joist or stud.


CLS 52/370
TXT Structure under subclass 367 including a holder member having opposed legs
    for retaining therebetween the screed or fastener receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    715,    for a structurally similar tie.


CLS 52/371
TXT Structure under subclass 367 in which the embedded means is a thin-flat
    member, an edge of which is a guide for a leveling striker.


CLS 52/372
TXT Structure under subclass 367 wherein the fastener receiver is an insert
    having a particular external configuration, or distinct means connected
    thereto, cooperating with the base structure in such a manner as to prevent
    separation therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    480,    for a structure including modules fixed to a sustainer and an
    additional section fixed to a sleeper.

    762+,   for an interfitted shaft and facer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, subclasses 15+ for an anchor or holding device
    into which a fastener is forced, and see the reference to Class 411 in
    Class 52, subclass 698.


CLS 52/373
TXT Structure under subclass 372 including a hollow member which has an
    internal configuration or means, acting to retain the fastener.


CLS 52/374
TXT Structure under subclass 373 including a material which fills at least a
    section of the internal cavity of the hollow member and into which material
    the fastener is driven.


CLS 52/375
TXT Structure under subclass 372 in which the supporting substructure is a
    module or panel which is preformed before use at the job site.


CLS 52/376
TXT Structure under subclass 364 wherein the driven fastener retaining means is
    in the nature of a filler such as a wooden strip or plug held by the unit
    and formed of a material differing in kind from the basic material of the
    unit, usually metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    368,    for a composite shaft wherein the pierceable component is embedded
    in a stone-like base.


CLS 52/377
TXT Structure under subclass 364 wherein the penetrating fastener retaining
    means is shaped to deflect and bend the fastener as it is driven in place.


CLS 52/378
TXT Structure under the class definition including (1) a monolithic
    load-bearing cast in situ section, (2) a second section which is distinct
    from and coextensive with (1), and (3) a separate dissimilar member rigidly
    connecting (1) and (2), the resultant composite structure being such that
    parts (1), (2) and (3) must be assembled to each other on the site.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327+,   for a cast in situ concrete barrier with a projecting rib and
    additional coextensive section.

    383,    for a structure with a cast barrier sections spaced by a tie and
    defining an isolated space.

    506.01+, for a residual construction wherein a facer is attached to a
    dissimilar section and see notes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 233+ for a method or
    apparatus for installing a cast in situ pile; and subclass 257 for a cast
    in situ pile, per se.


CLS 52/379
TXT Structure under subclass 378 in which the second section is composed of
    preformed block-like units, a portion of the dissimilar member being
    located between opposed faces of the units, i.e., concrete supporting wall
    tied to brick veneer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    698+,   for a tie, per se, and see search notes for other constructions
    utilizing a tie.


CLS 52/380
TXT Structure under the class definition comprising a barrier formed by a
    material cast at the site in a monolithic mass or separate sections, the
    barrier including cells or cavities which do not open through the major
    boundary faces of the barrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    353,    for a plastered type hollow wall with the between backers.

    378+,   for a load-bearing cast in situ monolith, e.g., concrete wall, with
    coextensive section and tie in which the monolith and section may be
    laterally spaced.

    404.1+, for another construction having an insulating insert in a cavity in
    a preconstructed barrier.

    577,    for embedded void former, per se.


CLS 52/381
TXT Structure under subclass 380 in which the cells or cavities are formed by a
    discrete liner formed by a wall structure closing on itself, the material
    of the barrier being cast around and in contact with the wall structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323,    for a cast, ribbed type cast material barrier with a filler formed
    of cooperating void forming sections.


CLS 52/382
TXT Structure under subclass 381 in which the liner is curvilinear at least
    along a substantial section thereof, e.g., ball or cylinder.


CLS 52/383
TXT Structure under subclass 380 in which the barrier comprises a pair of
    continuously spaced substantially parallel coextensive sections or slabs
    with tie means, of a material other than that of the barrier material,
    extending between the spaced sections and retaining them in their spaced
    relation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    378+,   for a barrier, one section of which is a cast in situ load-bearing
    monolith to which a tie and an additional coextensive section are assembled.

    562+,   for laterally related individually assembled courses utilizing a
    dissimilar material tie.

    698+,   for an anchor or tie, per se, and see search notes for other
    constructions utilizing a tie.


CLS 52/384
TXT Structure under the class definition including thin, sheetlike,
    nonload-bearing facing elements which have their hidden faces attached
    closely adjacent to or in contact with the opposed surface of a
    preconstructed barrier by means comprising preformed components which
    together form a sheetlike retainer means (backer) for the elements, e.g., a
    grid with tiles in its openings.

    (1)     Note.  See "Glossary" in class definition of "load-bearing".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127.1+, for a tile attached to a handling sheet or strip which is removed
    before the tiles are applied at site of use.

    311.1+, for a construction wherein a desired effect is obtained by color,
    thickness variation or dissimilar elements forming a pattern.

    390+,   for a facing of tiles held by an adhesive (mastic) and tiles, per
    se, having structural features for such use.

    415+,   for facers, e.g., bricks, bonded to each other by a settable
    material, e.g., mortar.

    474+,   for a facer, e.g., panel, supported by a sustainer, i.e., elongated
    load-bearing structural component, particularly subclasses 484+, for a
    suspended ceiling of edge abutted panels (sometimes called tiles).

    506.01+, for another construction having facers attached to another in situ
    erected substructure.

    518+,   for lapped multiplanar (shingle type) facing.

    DIG 16, for a tie or shingle with cover means for adhesive on it.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclass for processes of bonding discrete lamina to a single
    face of another lamina, particularly subclass 71 for bonding lamina to a
    previously erected building structure.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a single or plural layer stock material product which does not have a
    physical feature or a mechanical connector for cooperation with a panel or
    a supporting substructure.


CLS 52/385
TXT Structure under subclass 384 including means attaching the ties or backer
    to a supporting substructure other than the backer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    344+,   for a settable material receiving backer attached to a furring,
    joist or stud.

    478,    for a lapped multiplanar surfacing attached to substructure.


CLS 52/386
TXT Structure under subclass 384 in which the backer has integral projections
    for connecting the tiles to the backer.


CLS 52/387
TXT Structure under subclass 386 in which the projections engage the peripheral
    edges of the tile.


CLS 52/388
TXT Structure under subclass 384 in which the backer is formed of interwoven or
    criss- crossed strands, e.g., woven fabric, wire mesh.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    343,    for spaced slat type lath connected by filaments.

    660+,   for a residual fabric or lattice type openwork structure.


CLS 52/389
TXT Structure under subclass 384 including a material which is initially
    flowable but sets to rigidity, the tiles being partially embedded in the
    material while it is in the unset condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315,    for an ornamental facing feature formed by revealed embedded
    discrete elements.

    366,    for an adhesively secured ground member.

    390+,   for a facing of tiles held by an adhered to substructure other than
    a sheetlike nonload-bearing backer and tiles, per se, peculiar to such use.

    416,    for lapped multiplanar or strip covered joint surfacing held by
    flowable material applied in situ, e.g., an adhesive.


CLS 52/390
TXT Structure under the class definition including (1) a thin, nonload-bearing
    veneer facing tile having features on a face cooperating with an adhesive,
    e.g., mortar, which attaches it to a substructure, or (2) such a tile held
    by an adhesive to a substructure which extends beyond the edges of the
    tile, the tiles in use being arranged edge-to-edge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    378+,   for a load-bearing monolith with a coextensive section held by a
    tie.

    384+,   for a tile held by a preformed sheetlike, nonload-bearing backer,
    particularly subclass 389 for tiles embedded in a settable backer and see
    notes.

    415,    for modules bonded to each other by internal cast in situ section.

    596+,   for a module with individual coextensive preformed section.


CLS 52/391
TXT Structure under subclass 390 wherein said facing tile has additional
    discrete securing means, e.g., a clip or an embedded projecting tie.


CLS 52/392
TXT Structure under subclass 390 wherein said tiles have deformations
    integrally formed at the edges thereof to facilitate the engagement and/or
    spacing of the tile with adjacent tiles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    589.1+, for a module with edge engaging keys of more general application.

    603,    for an opaque stone-like module with monolithic spacing projections.


CLS 52/393
TXT Structure under class definition including fixedly related juxtaposed
    components with a substantial area of the opposed faces of the components
    being spaced from each other by a preformed, yieldable separator which is
    compressed between and acts to resiliently resist movement of the
    components towards each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140+,   for a burial vault with sealing material between its closure and
    the vault body.

    167.1+, for means compensating earth-transmitted force, e.g., an earthquake.

    208,    for a closure panel directly clamped or sealed to a barrier.

    214,    for a retaining feature incorporating a resilient strip between a
    frame and a portal opening.

    346,    for means accommodating movement of a settable material backer with
    a spring.

    502,    for an interfitted facer and shaft with a springy strip type
    retainer.

    573.1,  for a residual structure having means accommodating expansion or
    contraction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 475.1+ for a closure
    seal, e.g., striker gasket or weatherstrip and see the search notes thereto
    for the loci of other seals.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 614 and 681 for a packing element for a
    receptacle joint.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 628+ for a static contact seal for other than an
    internal combustion engine, or pipe, conduit, or cable.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 153.5 for a joint welting between running
    board, molding or dust guard and a vehicle body.


CLS 52/394
TXT Structure under subclass 393 which in the yielding separator lies between
    overlapping edges portions of lapped-multiplanar surfacing sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    518+,   for a residual lapped multiplanar surfacing.


CLS 52/395
TXT Structure under subclass 393 in which the yielding separator lies between a
    strip bridging the juncture of or space between the edges of edge-to-edge
    related cover sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    459+,   for a residual construction including a bridger strip covering the
    juncture of panels.


CLS 52/396.01
TXT Fire or heat resistive-type (e.g., for furnace wall):

    Separator under subclass 393 which is designed to withstand the temperature
    of; e.g., combustion, melting.


CLS 52/396.02
TXT Separator inserted prior to or during pouring of two adjacent concrete
    sections:

    Separator under subclass 393 which is installed before or while pouring a
    settable material.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are joints made by removable forms
    with an insertable separator.


CLS 52/396.03
TXT Including a collapsible-cell (e.g., hollow), bight, or accordion-shaped
    portion:

    Inserted separator under subclass 396.02 which contains a yieldable portion
    that is (1) an air enclosing compartment, (2) a web of material having a
    bend for slack, or (3) pleated.


CLS 52/396.04
TXT Exposed separator between (1) set or cured concrete, (2) metal, wood,
    plastic, etc., or (3) prefabricated components:

    Joint under subclass 393 which is in contact with the ambient atmosphere
    (i.e., uncovered) and installed in a gap amid (1) at least two hardened or
    cured sections, or (2) components in finished form.


CLS 52/396.05
TXT With embedded anchor means:

    Exposed joint under subclass 396.04 which includes a discrete portion (1)
    placed in the sections prior to complete hardening or curing, or (2)
    built-in with the components.


CLS 52/396.06
TXT Composed of at least one collapsible cell (e.g., hollow):

    Exposed joint under subclass 396.04 which contains a portion that is an air
    enclosing compartment.


CLS 52/396.07
TXT Having a bight portion:

    Exposed joint under subclass 396.04 which contains a portion that is bent
    for slack.


CLS 52/396.08
TXT Between (1) brick or block courses, or (2) individual adjacent bricks or
    blocks:

    Exposed joint under subclass 396.04 which is installed at the horizontal or
    vertical juncture of a brick or block.


CLS 52/396.09
TXT Bricks or blocks designed to receive separator:

    Exposed joint for bricks or blocks under subclass 396.08 in which the
    bricks or blocks are fabricated with a portion to accept the separator.


CLS 52/396.1
TXT Between tile-type components:

    Exposed joint under subclass 396.04 which is between thin relatively rigid
    hand-carried modules.


CLS 52/402
TXT Structure under subclass 393 in which a yieldable separator member is held
    or supported by another member which acts to space the yieldable member
    from one of the separated components.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    480,    for another face-to-face barrier section construction with a
    spacing sleeper or subflooring.


CLS 52/403.1
TXT UNDERLYING COMPRESSIBLE LAYER OR PAD (E.G., FLOOR SYSTEMS):

    Structure under the class definition in which a discrete lamina or a thin
    flat mat allows for relative movement between two planar surfaces; e.g., a
    traffic bearing surface and its substructure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product, in the form of a plural layer product, in
    which one layer is resilient, particularly subclasses 455+ for a cork layer
    and subclasses 492+ for a natural rubber layer.


CLS 52/404.1
TXT INSULATING INSERT; E.G., FILLER IN CAVITY IN PRECONSTRUCTED OR CAST
    STRUCTURE:

    Structure under the class definition including a cavity within a wall,
    ceiling, or floor and a discrete filler body of insulating material within
    said cavity, differing in kind from that of the barrier, which material
    tends to inhibit the passage of heat and/or sound therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for an insulated car roof.

    144+,   for an exposed surface having an acoustical function.

    167.1+, for means compensating earth transmitted force.

    265     and 267+, for a plural intersection construction with a layered
    barrier.

    317,    for a draft stop between studs.

    347,    for isolating means on the supported side of a settable material
    backer which is fixed to a furring, joist, or stud.

    393+,   for a relatively yielding preformed means compressed by abutting
    components.

    408+,   for a dividing sheet form sheet lamina between components.

    424+,   for laterally related modules bonded by internal settable material
    section (e.g., mortar).

    479+,   for back to back sections spaced by framing.

    576+,   for a cavity former within a module and embedded-type void former.

    742.1+, for a process of filling a preformed cavity in an in-situ
    construction.

    783.1+, for a sandwich or hollow panel.


CLS 52/404.2
TXT With retaining means penetrating insulating layer:

    Insulating insert under subclass 404.1 including filler piercing means or
    means intertwining with the filler to effect holding the filler in a
    desired position in the cavity.


CLS 52/404.3
TXT With divider between and holding insulating layer:

    Insulating insert under subclass 404.1 including a discrete means for
    retaining and supporting the insulation in spaced apart cavities.


CLS 52/404.4
TXT Composed of modules having complementary abutting edges:

    Insulating insert under subclass 404.1 where a section containing the
    insulating filler (body) includes a portion adapted to fit into and contact
    a receiving portion of an adjacent section.


CLS 52/404.5
TXT Insulation suspended from discrete member (e.g., rod) within cavity:

    Insulating insert under subclass 404.1 wherein the filler body of
    insulation material hangs from a support within the cavity.


CLS 52/405.1
TXT Stonelike-type (e.g., concrete, masonry) shell:

    Insulating insert under subclass 404.1 in which the barrier is or contains,
    as a primary component, a settable material, e.g., concrete.


CLS 52/405.2
TXT Shell having end interfitting means:

    Insulating insert shell under subclass 405.1 including a module having
    features such as projections and depressions on at least one side thereof
    that align with similar features of adjacent modules for connecting the
    modules together.


CLS 52/405.3
TXT Having reinforcement in shell or insert:

    Insulating insert shell under subclass 405.1 wherein a means of stiffening
    such as a rod, cage, or grid-type network is located in the shell, cavity,
    insulation, or any combination thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    438,    for modules mutually bonded by settable material including
    dissimilar material member in section.

    600+,   for stonelike modules including elongated reinforcing.


CLS 52/405.4
TXT Insert having aligning feature:

    Insulating insert shell under subclass 405.1 wherein the filler body within
    a block has features that position adjacent or subjacent blocks.


CLS 52/406.1
TXT Enveloped-type filler:

    Insulating insert under subclass 404.1 wherein the filler body of
    insulating material is covered by means surrounding at least four sides
    thereof.


CLS 52/406.2
TXT Self-contained insulating unit:

    Enveloped filler under subclass 406.1 wherein the filler material is within
    a specific wrapping.


CLS 52/406.3
TXT Insert containing chamber:

    Enveloped filler under subclass 406.1 wherein the insulating filler
    includes spaced apart air-enclosing cells or compartments.


CLS 52/407.1
TXT Filler spaced from inside face of cavity:

    Insulating insert under subclass 404.1 wherein there is a vacant space
    between at least the major surface of one inside wall of the cavity and the
    filler.


CLS 52/407.2
TXT Filler suspended by supporting means surrounding at least four sides
    thereof:

    Spaced filler under subclass 407.1 wherein the perimeter surfaces of the
    filler are held in spaced relation from the structure by; e.g., chains,
    springs, or clips (Dyar patents).


CLS 52/407.3
TXT Filler pieces within barrier frame (e.g., rafter, joist):

    Spaced filler under subclass 407.1 wherein the insulation filler is
    positioned in spaced apart spaces formed by supporting means of the barrier.


CLS 52/407.4
TXT Means (e.g., fastener) to position insulation via supporting means for the
    barrier:

    Spaced filler under subclass 407.1 where the insulation means is being held
    stationary adjacent or in spaced relation to the barrier by a fastener
    (e.g., clip), or load bearing member (e.g., purlin).


CLS 52/407.5
TXT Insulation defines air enclosing cell or compartment:

    Spaced filler under subclass 407.1 wherein the insulating filler forms
    spaced apart air-enclosing chambers.


CLS 52/408
TXT Structure under the class definition in which a construction assembled at
    the job site includes a sheet form member which is imperforate except for
    openings accommodating preformed means, e.g., ties, the member being held
    between opposed surfaces of components or layers which are made of a
    material which differs in kind from that of the member, with the major
    faces of the member being in contact and substantially coextensive with the
    opposed surfaces of the components or layers or are embedded in a bonding
    material between such surfaces.

    (1)     Note.  Dividing laminae, per se, having features on opposed
    surfaces for retaining opposed layers are in this or the indented
    subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    Appropriate subclasses for other layered constructions, particularly:

    58+,    for a flashing extending outwardly of the exposed face of a wall.

    101,    for a construction with a defined animal blocker.

    135,    for a layered burial vault.

    249,    for a transversely layered curvilinear barrier.

    265     and 267+, for a plural intersection construction involving a
    layered barrier.

    302.5,  for a drain passage formed by a preformed separator.

    347,    for a construction having isolating means between a settable
    material backer and a sustainer.

    380+,   for a cast barrier with insulation within an isolated cavity.

    393+,   for a construction with a relatively yieldable separator.

    404.1+, for an insulating insert within a cavity in a preconstructed or
    cast structure.

    415+,   for a construction formed by facers separated by a bonding cast
    section.

    459+,   for a bridger strip over a panel juncture.

    479+,   for face-to-face barrier sections separated by a sustaining shaft.

    561+,   for a construction of laterally related individually assembled
    courses.

    720.1+, for a shaft with a dissimilar material shell.

    782.1+, for a residual composite panel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product of single or plural layers and having no
    structural feature for connection to an adjacent building structure.


CLS 52/409
TXT Structure under subclass 408 in which the sheet form separator is between
    the lapped portions of components forming multiplanar surfacing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    394,    for a similar construction wherein the separator is resilient.

    518+,   for a residual lapped multiplanar surfacing.


CLS 52/410
TXT Structure under subclass 408 including means tying the layers or components
    together and extending through or around an edge of the dividing member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    353,    for a construction wherein a tie crosses opposed backers for
    settable material.

    383,    for a cast in situ spaced barrier section with a dissimilar tie.


CLS 52/411
TXT Structure under subclass 408 including an additional material which bonds
    the layers of the construction and also a dissimilar material tie acting
    between the layers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    415+,   for another construction of more general application having an
    internal cast bonding section, e.g., brick and mortar.


CLS 52/412
TXT Structure under subclass 411 wherein the sheet form separating member
    extends into intersecting joints between one layer or component and two
    other layers or components, e.g., nonporous members positioned within the
    mortar along one horizontal side and one vertical side of a brick in a
    brick wall.


CLS 52/413
TXT Structure under subclass 411 wherein the sheet form separating member has a
    generally planar face with integral projections extending from said face.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    443+,   for an imperforate backer having means therewith for retaining a
    cast layer or facing on said backer.


CLS 52/414
TXT Structure under the class definition including a poured-in-place barrier
    having an elongated rigid primary load-bearing member and an additional
    secondary different form reinforcement completely embedded in the poured
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223.1+, 231, 250+, 318, 319+, 378+, 380+, and 404.1+, for another
    reinforced poured in place structure.

    740.1+  through 740.9, for a rod which is usually used as concrete
    reinforcing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 233+ for a process or
    apparatus for installing a cast in situ pile or pier; subclass 257 for a
    cast in situ pile or, per se; and subclasses 267+ for subject matter
    relating to earth treatment and specifically the formation of an
    underground wall of cementitious material.


CLS 52/415
TXT Structure under the class definition including a plurality of assembled
    preformed modules or facer sections and an applied-in situ section of
    initially fluid but subsequently set bonding material which lies within the
    outer perimeter of the construction and serves to adhesively bond the
    modules together, e.g., brick and mortar or adhesively secured facers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140+,   216, 250+, 318, 319+, 389, 390+, and 443+, for another structure
    involving elements bonded together by settable material.


CLS 52/416
TXT Structure under subclass 415 wherein the settable material bonds together
    (1) the lapped edge sections of cover sections or (2) a bridger strip over
    the juncture of coplanar end-to-end related panels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    459+,   for another construction having a bridge strip over a panel
    juncture.

    518+,   for another lapped multiplanar surfacing.


CLS 52/417
TXT Structure under subclass 416 including a preformed strip  of  a  material
    or configuration different from the material or configuration of the
    sections, which strip overlaps or engages the edge portions of a pair of
    adjacent sections and is secured thereto by the flowable material or
    cooperates with the flowable material.


CLS 52/418
TXT Structure under subclass 416 including means for fastening plural surfacing
    sections together, said means being embedded in the flowable material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    698+,   for an anchor or tie and see search notes for other subclasses
    utilizing a tie.


CLS 52/419
TXT Structure under subclass 416 wherein the fluid material is applied between
    superimposed elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    516,    for superimposed layers of fluid material continuous therewith and
    not defined as acting as an internal bond but merely as a coating.


CLS 52/420
TXT Structure under subclass 419 in which fluid material only covers part of a
    surfacing section, usually a surfacing strip edge.


CLS 52/421
TXT Structure under subclass 415 including a member in or adjacent to a joint,
    which member acts between modules to stop the flow of the material of a
    cast section into a hollow of at least one of the modules.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    381+,   for a structure having a lined cavity within a cast in situ barrier.

    411+,   for an internal type flashing within a cast bonding section which
    may form a mortar dam.


CLS 52/422
TXT Structure under subclass 415 wherein the exterior of a module is so
    constructed as to facilitate the attachment of additional materials on an
    exposed face of the resulting construction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327+,   for a ribbed type barrier with additional coextensive section.

    344+,   for a settable material receiving backer fixed to elongated
    sustainer.

    444,    for a block type backer with feature for retaining plaster type
    facing.


CLS 52/423
TXT Structure under subclass 415 wherein the assembled preformed modules form a
    straight, rigid construction having a limited closed periphery, said
    construction being greatly elongated relative to any lateral dimension and
    having a shell or covering which is made up of said modules.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    724,    725 and 727+, for a similar structure with a core within a
    dissimilar material shell.


CLS 52/424
TXT Structure under subclass 415 wherein bonded modules are arranged in
    contiguous, back-to-back position relative to the depth dimension (distance
    from major face to major face) of the construction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    561+,   for another construction of laterally related module courses which
    are not bonded.


CLS 52/425
TXT Structure under subclass 424 wherein the laterally related modules contain
    therebetween a cast monolith which is continuous both vertically and
    longitudinally of the construction, i.e., fills a hollow wall formed by
    coextensive module courses.


CLS 52/426
TXT Structure under subclass 425 wherein the laterally spaced modules are
    connected together by a tie member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    698+,   for an anchor or tie, per se, and see the search notes for other
    subclasses containing a construction utilizing a tie.


CLS 52/427
TXT Structure under subclass 424 wherein the laterally related modules are
    spaced apart and have members extending transversely therebetween, which
    members act as forms for a cast in situ section, said members being made of
    a material differing in kind from the preshapes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    421,    for structure utilizing a hollow module and a dam for the cast
    bonding section.


CLS 52/428
TXT Structure under subclass 424 including a distinct separately placeable
    member extending transversely between the laterally related modules with at
    least the ends thereof engaging the modules, which member is bonded to the
    modules by the cast section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    698+,   for an anchor or tie, per se, and see the search notes for other
    subclasses containing a construction utilizing a tie.


CLS 52/429
TXT Structure under subclass 424 wherein the modules have flanges formed
    integrally therewith, which flanges cooperate with flanges of opposed
    modules and function as forms for the cast in situ section, the flanges and
    modules enclosing the cast in situ section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    569+,   for construction including preshapes with opposed lateral
    monolithic projections.


CLS 52/430
TXT Structure under subclass 424 including integral opposed projections on the
    modules, which opposed projections are in overlapping relationship with the
    cast section bonding the opposed projections to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    429,    in which flanges on modules enclose a cast section.


CLS 52/431
TXT Structure under subclass 424 including reinforcing elements embedded in the
    modules, which elements have ends or portions projecting from the body of
    the modules which are embedded in the cast section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    582.1+, for a related construction or component thereof having projecting
    reinforcing means.


CLS 52/432
TXT Structure under subclass 415 including reinforcing elements in the modules
    having the ends or a portion thereof projecting into the spaces between the
    modules and anchored within the cast section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155,    for intersections with cast material at the juncture of modules.

    431,    for similar construction involving  laterally related modules.

    698+,   for an anchor or tie, per se, and see the search notes for other
    subclasses relating to a construction utilizing a tie.


CLS 52/433
TXT Structure under subclass 415 comprising an elongated rigid construction
    formed of a plurality of modules bonded in end-to-end relation, which
    construction includes (1) a nonuniform or eccentrically positioned
    reinforcement or (2) a cross-sectional shape of such special form that it
    rigidities the construction and resists forces or loads applied normally of
    its longitudinal axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    721.1+, for other transverse load resisting stone-like sustainers.


CLS 52/434
TXT Structure under subclass 415 in which the facers are fixed to an elongated,
    rigid preformed, load bearing member and the section either (1) bonds the
    member or (2) bonds the facers to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    474+,   for other like structure lacking the cast in situ bonding section.


CLS 52/435
TXT Structure under subclass 434 in which the elongated member includes a web
    and flange portion, which portion is at least in part embedded within the
    cast section.


CLS 52/436
TXT Structure under subclass 415 wherein the modules include integral edge
    means which cooperate in interfitting relationship, e.g., tongue and
    groove, with corresponding complementary integral means on adjacent
    modules, with the section occupying a space between the complementary means
    and bonding the modules together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    595,    for a module with tongue-and-groove keying means defining an
    internal space which may receive mortar.


CLS 52/437
TXT Structure under subclass 415 wherein the modules have channels defining
    edge grooves, which are in opposed relation on adjacent modules with the
    cast section occupying the space defined by the opposed grooves.


CLS 52/438
TXT Structure under subclass 437 including a distinct member differing in
    material or form from the modules, which member is within the section.


CLS 52/439
TXT Structure under subclass 415 wherein the modules are hollow or channel
    shaped and the section fills the hollow or channel of the modules to form a
    continuous cast section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    421,    for a mortar dam structure there provided for.

    436     and 437+, for another related construction wherein the cast section
    fills hollows or channels.


CLS 52/440
TXT Structure under subclass 415 including means, e.g., an integral flange or
    separate plate, which cooperates with a similar means on the adjacent
    module to close one side of the space between the adjacent module and to
    overlie or cover one surface of the cast section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324,    for a ribbed construction wherein the means covers and underlies a
    cast rib-like sustainer between filler blocks.

    437+,   for structure wherein opposed sides of channel sections enclose a
    cast section.


CLS 52/441
TXT Structure under subclass 440 wherein the section covering means comprises a
    member which is separate from the module.


CLS 52/442
TXT Structure under subclass 415 wherein a distinct member is embedded in the
    section disposed between adjacent modules.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    340+,   for a construction with projecting- ribs of a cast in situ barrier
    enclosing a sustainer.

    438,    for a construction wherein the cast section is formed by opposed
    channels in the modules.


CLS 52/443
TXT Structure under the class definition including a backer which is
    imperforate over a substantial area and which has a feature on a major face
    for retaining a settable material, e.g., plaster facing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144+,   for a structure having a surface physically modified for acoustical
    purposes.

    316,    for a structure with integral relief ornamental facing feature.

    342+,   for openly spaced slat type lath.

    344+,   for a settable material receiving backer fixed to furring, joist or
    stud.

    408+,   for an imperforate dividing lamina between components of in situ
    construction.

    415+,   for a module bonded to internal cast in situ sections.

    515+,   for surfacing with a uniform coextensive fluid material coating.

    660+,   for a fabric or lattice type openwork which may receive a settable
    material.


CLS 52/444
TXT Structure under subclass 443 including juxtaposed block-like units having
    integral means on an exposed face for retaining settable material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    422,    for constructions of modules bonded to an internal cast section
    which modules have a settable material retaining feature on an exposed face.

    605,    for block having grooves on a juncture surface.


CLS 52/445
TXT Structure under subclass 443 including discrete particles adhered to the
    backer, e.g., a coating with particles of gravel adhered thereto, for
    bonding with a water-settable material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 180+ for processes of coating, per
    se, wherein solid particles or fibers are applied to a substrate.


CLS 52/446
TXT Structure under subclass 443 including an initially fluid coating which
    differs in kind from the retained settable material, i.e., a coating of the
    type commonly referred to as paints, lacquers or enamels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    445,    for a like construction wherein the coating retains discrete
    particles.

    515+,   for another structure utilizing a disparate material coating.


CLS 52/447
TXT Structure under subclass 443 in which the backer is made of plural rigid
    sheetlike sections including discrete means or integral configurations
    which connect them in edge-to-edge relationship.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    578+,   for another construction or a panel involving a discrete
    edge-to-edge connecting feature.


CLS 52/448
TXT Structure under subclass 447 including a physical configuration of opposed
    edges of sections which mutually interengage.


CLS 52/449
TXT Structure under subclass 443 in which the backer has a core of rigid
    water-settable material which is covered by an apertured sheet of material
    of a different kind, which sheet is adhered to the core.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    408+,   for a panel including a sheet faced on both sides by other material.

    782.1+, for another composite panel of facially contacting sheets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 131+ for a
    stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or sheet
    and in which at least one component is apertured.


CLS 52/450
TXT Structure under subclass 443 wherein the backer includes a sheet which is
    shaped to form continuous alternating ridges and grooves on opposed faces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    453,    for a backer having a groove formed into a face.

    630,    for a residual corrugated panel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 156+ for a
    stock material product having a component of varying thickness for that
    class (428), particularly subclasses 163 and 167+ for such a product having
    parallel ribs and grooves, and subclasses 174+ for a stock material having
    a nonplanar uniform thickness component, particularly subclasses 182+ for a
    corrugated component.


CLS 52/451
TXT Structure under subclass 450 wherein the sheet has secured thereto a
    flat-surfaced sheet in coextensive contact therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    408+,   for an imperforate sheet laminated between opposed material layers.


CLS 52/452
TXT Structure under subclass 450 including a filament, e.g., wire or cord,
    extending transversely of the ridges and grooves.


CLS 52/453
TXT Structure under subclass 443 wherein (1) the backing member has a groove
    formed in a face thereof or (2) a groove formed by a configuration of the
    abutting edges of plural backers, said grooves serving to aid in retaining
    the settable material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    450+,   for a corrugated backing member.

    605,    for another module with grooves on a juncture surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 163 and 167+
    for a stock material for that class having a component which varies in
    thickness in the form of parallel ribs or grooves.


CLS 52/454
TXT Structure under subclass 443 in which a filament or a mesh type sheet,
    e.g., expanded metal, is attached to the backer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    452,    for corrugated backer with transverse filament.

    661,    for a foraminous open-work sheet with attached filaments.

    676,    for mesh-type open-work with attached discrete bodies.


CLS 52/455
TXT Structure under the class definition including an assemblage of elongated
    members defining a border which (1) encompasses two or more edge-to-edge
    related panel members or (2) encompasses a single panel which carry strips
    and thus presents the appearance of panels arranged as in (1) the structure
    as a whole presenting an imperforate face, e.g., a sectioned door panel or
    multi-light sash.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    459+,   for another structure with a bridger strip over a panel juncture.

    475.1+, for a single panel within a peripheral frame.

    656.1+, for cornered or peripherally bordered open frame.


CLS 52/456
TXT Structure under subclass 455 including two or more crossing or intersecting
    strips which terminate at the elongated border members, which strips
    separate the panels from each other.


CLS 52/457
TXT Structure under subclass 455 wherein the panel members form a sectioned
    face having edge-to-edge abutted panel components.


CLS 52/458
TXT Structure under subclass 457 wherein flanges on the edges of the abutting
    panel components are interconnected to form the sectioned face.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    588.1,  for plural panels with interfitted lateral flanges.


CLS 52/459
TXT Structure under the class definition in which the edge juncture of
    edge-to-edge abutted or spaced panel-like components is covered by a
    prefabricated sealing, concealing or protective bridger strip not serving
    primarily as a load-bearing shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    417,    for a construction wherein a bridger strip is bonded to surfacing
    sections.


CLS 52/460
TXT Structure under subclass 459 wherein the panel-like components are attached
    to an arrangement of supporting members in a defined spaced or crossing
    relationship, e.g., roofing on rafters or wall boards on studs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    474+,   for another construction wherein facers are structurally related to
    elongated rigid member, usually a load-bearing member, e.g., column or beam.


CLS 52/461
TXT Structure under subclass 459 wherein in addition to the bridger strip there
    is another elongated member which usually is a sustainer, e.g., column or
    beam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for a carline beneath and a cover strip above a joint in a car roof.


CLS 52/462
TXT Structure under subclass 461 wherein the plural elongated members cooperate
    with the juncture, formed by overlapping cover sections, the overlapping
    portions being in contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    518+,   for another construction of lapped multiplanar cover sections.


CLS 52/463
TXT Structure under subclass 461 including a fastener which holds the bridger
    strip to either a panel, the elongated member or both with the fastener
    being separable, at least in part from the component held.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    698+,   for an anchor or tie, per se, and see the search notes for other
    subclasses relating to a construction utilizing a tie.


CLS 52/464
TXT Structure under subclass 463 in which a part of the bridger strip extends
    into a space between the panel edges.


CLS 52/465
TXT Structure under subclass 459 in which the elongated member is a cap-like
    member which covers the joint between contiguous edges of the sections and
    is disposed on and extends at least in part beyond the exposed surfaces of
    the sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    417,    for cover strip at juncture of sections held by adhesive.


CLS 52/466
TXT Structure under subclass 465 including a separate and distinct anchor means
    other than the cap or sections which means serves to hold the cap and
    sections in position relative to another element.


CLS 52/467
TXT Structure under subclass 466 in which a portion of the anchor means extends
    completely through the cap which covers the joint mean.


CLS 52/468
TXT Structure under subclass 465 wherein a portion of the cap extends between
    spaced coplanar edges of the sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    464,    for a construction having two elongated members and a bridging
    strip with a portion of the bridging strip extending between panel edges.


CLS 52/469
TXT Structure under subclass 465 wherein the entire cap is outside of the
    sections, i.e., rests on exterior surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49      and 52, for a similar structure in a car roof construction.


CLS 52/470
TXT Structure under subclass 459 in which the elongated member covering the
    joint between sections has means interfitting with at least one of the
    sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    519+,   for interfitted lapped multiplanar surfacing sections.


CLS 52/471
TXT Structure under subclass 470 wherein at least a portion of the elongated
    member is disposed in a recess of one of the sections.


CLS 52/472
TXT Structure under subclass 471 wherein the recess in the section is formed by
    deforming the section in situ while its cross-section is maintained
    substantially uniform.


CLS 52/473
TXT Structure under the class definition including a set of plurality of
    slat-like sections which are inclined relative to a plane defined by the
    terminal edges of the set and which are arranged in facially spaced
    parallel planes so as to form openings between the slats.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74+,    for rigid awning type constructions which often include louvered
    surfacing.

    660+,   for other fabric or lattice type open work space.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 74.1+ for louver type
    closures interconnected for concurrent movement.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses
    166.1+ for venetian blind type panel.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 221 for a louvered ventilating panel
    associated with a window, subclasses 265+ for a louvered ventilating panel
    associated with a structure for mixing plural air streams together,
    subclasses 277+ for a louvered panel associated with a cover or shield for
    an exterior vent opening, subclasses 309+ for a louvered air distributer,
    subclasses 335+ for a louvered damper, subclasses 358+ for a louvered
    ventilating panel associated with a pump driven air exhaust, and subclass
    358 for a louvered panel associated with an air outlet, per se.


CLS 52/474
TXT FACER HELD BY STIFFENER-TYPE FRAME:

    Structure under the class definition including a panel section which is
    fixedly positioned to a generally elongated member (e.g., sustainer) acting
    to support or rigidify the panel,in use, which member is part of a larger
    structure; e.g., building frame, with the structure of the final assembly
    being such that the panel must first be assembled to and then fastened to
    the member.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass would be sheets directly attached
    to the bottom joists or beams of the floor above to form a ceiling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for a car roof with carline or ridge member.

    90.1+,  for an inclined cover with supporting substructure.

    238.1+, for a partition secured to a preconstructed barrier.

    272+,   for a construction forming the intersection of columns, walls,
    floors, ceilings or roofs.

    319+,   for a cast in situ construction, e.g., concrete, with projecting
    rib-type sustainer.

    344,    for a settable material backer fixed to a furring, joist or stud.

    364,    for a construction with a sustainer having a penetrating fastener
    receiving feature.

    434+,   for a module bonded to internal cast in situ section and including
    a sustainer.

    461+,   for a bridger strip and sustainer at edge juncture of panels.

    473,    for a construction which exhibits openings between the leading and
    trailing edges of inclined slats.

    478,    for lapped multiplanar or strip covered surfacing attached to
    substructure arrangement.

    506.01+, for a facer attached to another in situ erected substructure which
    differs in kind from the facer.

    578+,   for a module with discrete edgewise connecting feature.

    800.1+, for a composite panel with a separately attached edging which is
    assembled to it, e.g., a composite manually manipulable wall panel, table
    top, etc.


CLS 52/475.1
TXT Self-supporting section (e.g., facing) attached to nonload bearing framing:

    Facer with frame under subclass 474 including a preassembled panel
    surrounded by sustainer-type members and attached to an existing structure
    (e.g., facade).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235,    for a curtain wall-type structure.

    384+,   for tiles positioned by nonload-bearing holding means.

    390+,   for adhered tile-type facer.

    455+,   for sectioned imperforate facing within peripheral frame.

    578+,   for a module with discrete edgewise connecting feature.

    656.1,  for an open frame; i.e., one without a surrounded panel, which
    frame is defined as forming a complete frame or definite corners thereof.

    782.1+, for another edged panel usually a type which is portable and
    wherein the edging is assembled onto the panel.


CLS 52/476
TXT Structure under subclass 475 in which at least one of the elongated
    components of the frame is held by defined means which allows it to be
    readily removed so that a panel, usually a broken pane, can be removed or
    replaced.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    489,    for a construction defining only a single frame member having a
    separable retainer for a panel or pane.


CLS 52/477
TXT Structure under subclass 475 in which either the facer or a frame component
    is primarily stone-like material, usually concrete, which component is
    sufficiently heavy, strong and rigid to act as a support for other
    components against their weight or to resist transverse loading.


CLS 52/478
TXT Structure under subclass 474 including panels or modules, e.g., shingles
    with overlapping edges to form a surfacing attached to load supporting
    members in a specifically defined spaced or crossing relationship.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90.1+,  for an inclined roof with a supporting substructure.

    416+,   for a bonded lapped multiplanar surfacing.

    459+,   for a surfacing having a bridger ship over the juncture of
    surfacing sections.

    518+,   for another lapped multiplanar surfacing.


CLS 52/479
TXT Facer with framing under subclass 474 including an additional panel section
    structure which is coextensive with a previous panel type structure on
    opposite side of a sustainer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22+,    for a ceiling construction vertically spaced from roof sections.

    202+,   for an auxiliary shield attached to main panel, e.g., storm window.

    204.52, for a drained or vented hollow space.

    265     and 267+, for a laminated barrier, e.g., wall in a construction
    having plural intersections.

    275+,   for laterally related modules forming a barrier intersection.

    327+,   for a construction having an additional coextensive section fixed
    to a rib of a cast, e.g., concrete barrier.

    344+,   for a settable material receiving backer, e.g., lathe, fixed to
    furring, joist or stud.

    384+    and 390+, for a veneer tiling type construction and related tiles,
    per se.

    424+,   for laterally related modules bonded to each other.


CLS 52/480
TXT Structure under subclass 479 including strips or a coextensive discrete
    section which spaces and supports the additional coextensive section
    laterally of (usually above) the principal construction formed by
    sustainers and modules.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    364+,   for an anchored ground member acting as a screed or receiver for a
    penetrating fastener.


CLS 52/481.1
TXT With vertical support (e.g., stud) between facers:

    Parallel panel-type facers and concealed framing under subclass 479 wherein
    the facers have a portion of their unexposed surfaces fastened to an
    upright sustainer-type support; e.g., a stud hidden within a wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    506.04, for a furnace-type double wall


CLS 52/481.2
TXT Demountable type (e.g., partition):

    Vertical support between back to back sections under subclass 481.1 in
    which the panel-type sections and supporting means are designed to be
    disassembled from a floor or ceiling.


CLS 52/482
TXT Structure under subclass 474 including means attached to or integral
    therewith which is permanently deformed, i.e., beyond its elastic limit, to
    grip the facer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    356,    for a furring, joist or stud structurally modified to engage a
    settable material backer.

    364+,   for a member serving as a receiver for penetrating fastener which
    may deform it.


CLS 52/483.1
TXT Facer back abuts and conceals frame:

    Facer and section with framing under subclass 474 in which an unexposed
    face of a panel section structure both (1) opposite the front or exposed
    face and (2) hidden by panel edges, is directly fastened to a
    sustainer-type support.

    (1)     Note.  The underlying frame may be hidden by the adjacent panel
    edges.


CLS 52/489.1
TXT Including clip-type fastener:

    Facer and underlying frame under subclass 483.1 including a clasping-type
    connector which engages the section, frame, or both.


CLS 52/489.2
TXT Having a prong-type portion:

    Facer and underlying frame fastener under subclass 489.1 in which the
    fastener includes a pointed part (e.g., tooth, barb, penetrant portion,
    tang, impaling point) intended to puncture the section or the frame.


CLS 52/503
TXT Structure under the class definition including (1) modules each having an
    internal through passage or (2) channel shaped modules which are placed in
    channel- to-channel facing relationship to form a through fluid passage
    parts (1) or (2) being juxtaposed to form a barrier with a continuous
    passage traversing the juxtaposed parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302.1+, for a construction with a passage from its interior to the ambient
    and see the references under "SEARCH CLASS" in subclass 302.1 for other
    constructions having hollows, passages or vents.


CLS 52/504
TXT Structure under subclass 503 including a distinct facing layer formed of
    solid block-like modules which do not have openings communicating with the
    continuous passage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270+,   for a construction of sectional units enclosing an area.

    378+,   for a cast in situ structure with a distinct section and dissimilar
    tie.

    384+,   for a facing of veneer tiles held by sheetlike backer.

    390+,   for an adhesively secured facing tile.

    424+,   for bonded together laterally related modules.


CLS 52/505
TXT Structure under subclass 503 wherein the through passages or channels in
    the modules are located so that they form continuous passages through the
    barrier in both horizontal and vertical directions, e.g., tortuous or
    lattice like passages.


CLS 52/506.01
TXT SHEETLIKE ELEMENT ASSEMBLED PARALLEL TO EXISTING WALL, CEILING, OR FLOOR
    (E.G., INSULATING PANEL, SHEATHING):

    Structure under the class definition including a panel-type element forming
    an exposed face or major component thereof which element is separate from
    but assembled to another structure ,e.g., a wall which usually differs in
    material from the panel, e.g., an upholstery panel fastened to a metal
    subpanel or a panel section attached to a pre-erected wall, ceiling, or
    floor.

    (1)     Note.  In most cases the material of the existing wall is
    dissimilar to that of the wall, ceiling, or floor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for a defined roof spaced from a ceiling.

    135,    for a burial vault of concentric receptacles with a dissimilar
    intermediate lamina.

    202+,   for an auxiliary imperforate shield attached to a main panel,
    barrier, or frame (e.g., storm window).

    235,    for a panel attached outside a floor beam; e.g., curtain wall.

    249,    for a transversely layered curvilinear barrier.

    265     and 267+, for a construction having spaced intersections and a
    layered barrier component.

    275+,   for an intersection of barriers at least one of which is composed
    of laterally related modules.

    327+,   for a cast-in-situ ribbed-type concrete barrier with an additional
    coextensive section; e.g., a concrete roof with an attached ceiling.

    344+,   for a construction of a settable material receiving backer (plaster
    board) fixed to an elongated member.

    364+,   for a construction with means specialized to retaining a
    penetrating fastener which may hold a floor or the like to a beam.

    378+,   for a cast-in-situ monolith with an attached section.

    384+,   for a facing of tiles attached to a nonload bearing backer (e.g.,
    grid).

    390+,   for an adhered tile-type facer.

    408+,   for a construction having a disparate lamina between other
    components.

    424+,   for bonded together laterally related similar modules (e.g.,
    bricks).

    461+,   for edge related panels and a bridger strip related to another
    elongated member.

    474+,   for a section attached to a pre-positioned frame or shaft.

    518+,   for edge lapped sections which together form a surface,
    particularly 520 and 543 for such surfacing fastened to a structure.

    561+,   for laterally related individually assembled courses of generally
    similar modules.

    612,    for a stonelike module with layered components.

    698+,   for an anchor or tie, per se, often used to connect layers of a
    barrier construction.

    782.1+, for a composite panel with a disparate edge or imperforate facer.


CLS 52/506.02
TXT For furnace or refrigeration:

    Sheathing or insulator under subclass 506.01 in which the panel is designed
    to inhibit the transfer of temperature therethrough to hold or maintain a
    temperature.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are constructions with a heating
    means.


CLS 52/506.03
TXT Mounted on frame:

    Furnace or refrigerator elements under subclass 506.02 in which the panel
    is fixedly positioned to a generally elongated member (sustainer) acting to
    support or to rigidify the panel.


CLS 52/506.04
TXT Double wall, ceiling, or floor:

    Furnace or refrigerator elements on a frame under subclass 506.03 including
    an additional planar structure fixed to one side of the member, wherein
    said structure is coextensive with a previous wall, ceiling, or floor fixed
    to the other side of the member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    481.1+, for stud between vertical sheetlike sections.


CLS 52/506.05
TXT Assembled with fastening device:

    Sheathing or insulator under subclass 506.01 in which a discrete retaining
    means fixes the panel or panels to an existing static structure component
    (e.g., a wall).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    518+,   for siding or shingle-type fastening devices.


CLS 52/506.06
TXT Element spaced from wall, ceiling, or floor and held by discrete retaining
    means (e.g., suspended ceiling or wall):

    Sheetlike section with framing under subclass 506.01 wherein the sections
    are distinctly positioned away from a load bearing support by a particular
    framework.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22+,    for specified roof spaced from a ceiling.

    235,    for a curtain wall-type structure.

    327+,   for a barrier with a projecting rib-type sustainer combined with an
    additional section.

    344+,   for a settable material backer fixed to furring, joist, or studding.


CLS 52/506.07
TXT Inverted T-bar type:

    Retaining means for element under subclass 506.06 where the particular
    framework has a component shaped as an upside down letter T.


CLS 52/506.08
TXT Section designed (e.g., groove, integral hanger) to fasten to retaining
    means:

    Retaining means for element under subclass 506.06 in which the panel-type
    section is fabricated with the intention of being fixed to (1) another
    unique element which is connected to the framework or (2) the framework
    itself.


CLS 52/506.09
TXT Having abutting edges to conceal retaining means:

    Retaining means for a particular section under subclass 506.08 where the
    edges of two adjacent sections touch in order to hide the framework.


CLS 52/506.1
TXT Edges interfit:

    Edge abutting section under subclass 506.09 where the edge of one section
    is fabricated to accept a complementary edge of another section.


CLS 52/507
TXT Structure under subclass 506 in which the module is an openwork panel,
    e.g., grille or grating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    660+,   for a fabric or lattice openwork, per se.


CLS 52/508
TXT Structure under subclass 506 in which one section including plural facers
    and a dissimilar in situ erected section together form unoccupied enclosed
    spaces in a wall, ceiling or floor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302.1+, for a construction having a drain or vent which opens to the
    ambient and see the search notes for other constructions having passages or
    hollows, particularly 479+ for  face-to-face barrier sections spaced by a
    prepositioned frame or shaft and 503+ for abutted modules of channel or
    tubular cross-sections which form a barrier with through flow passages.

    511,    for a panel with mounting means thereon attached to another panel
    which may form a cavity, e.g., upholstered automobile doors.


CLS 52/509
TXT Structure under subclass 506 including a separate fastening means at least
    part of which is outside of a peripheral edge of a module, e.g., a corner
    rosette or an edge clamp.


CLS 52/510
TXT Structure under subclass 506 wherein the facers each have a distinct
    projection monolithically formed therewith and extending from the rear face
    thereof which projection seats in or on the other structure.


CLS 52/511
TXT Structure under subclass 506 including distinct attaching or mounting means
    which is rigidly fastened to or integral with the facer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    716.1+, for a similarly attachable trim strip.


CLS 52/512
TXT Structure under subclass 506 wherein the module is attached to the
    supporting structure by a separate securing element which engages the
    module and is fixedly held to said supporting structure by a nail or screw
    type of fastener.


CLS 52/513
TXT Structure under subclass 506 wherein said modules are of stone-like
    material and have discrete dissimilar tie means acting between them.


CLS 52/514
TXT Structure under the class definition including a damaged element which has
    been repaired by the use of an additional element which covers, strengthens
    or pulls the damaged part together or which element prevents splitting of a
    part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127.1+, for a construction with a means serving only to aid in the assembly
    or disassembly of the construction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 402.01+ for a residual method of
    repairing.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 97+, for such structure with
    repairing means.

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 330 for a residual process of repairing wood
    objects.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, subclasses 464+ for an impact driven corrugated
    strip type fastener.


CLS 52/514.5
TXT Using settable material (e.g., grout):

    Split prevention or repair under subclass 514 in which a device is embedded
    in the static structure with the specific purpose of receiving a thin
    mortar used for filling spaces, said device then becomes part of the static
    structure.


CLS 52/515
TXT Structure under the class definition including a coating of material which
    is initially fluid of the type commonly referred to as paints, lacquers or
    enamels, i.e., coatings of the kind which are applied by a brush, roller or
    spray.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232,    for a building structure with an irreversibly reactive component.

    311.1+, for a construction with an ornamental feature there provided for.

    415+,   for a module or facer bonded by an internal cast in situ section,
    e.g., mortar.

    443+,   for a plaster type imperforate area backer, e.g., plaster boards,
    particularly subclasses 444 and 445, for coated backer.

    740.1+, for an embedded type member with protective coating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet (e.g., miscellaneous coated product).  The line is:  Class 52 takes a
    base of plural components forming a building construction or single coated
    building component having defined structural features. This includes a
    specific backing member with material known as plaster thereon.  Class 428
    takes a coated base defined by name or material only and of general use.


CLS 52/516
TXT Structure under subclass 515 wherein the initially fluid material is
    applied in a substantially uniform layer which is coextensive with at least
    one individual section of a surface formed by lapped cover sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    416+,   for a lapped section type surfacing wherein the sections are bonded
    to each other by an internal settable material, e.g., mortar.

    518+,   for a residual surfacing of lapped multiplanar surfacing.


CLS 52/517
TXT Structure under subclass 515 in which the coating is for the purpose of
    repelling insects, fungi, plants or animals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    for structures forming an animal trap, scarer or physical block.


CLS 52/518
TXT Structure under the class definition including preshaped sections, e.g.,
    shingles, which together form a facing serving as a cover and having the
    opposite surfaces of edge portions of adjacent sections in contacting
    overlapping relationship, with facial portions of the sections at the area
    of overlap being in different planes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    416+,   for a similar construction where lapped edges are bonded by an
    adhesive to each other.

    459+,   for a construction wherein a bridge strip covers the edge-to-edge
    juncture of surfacing panels.

    473,    for a louvered construction, i.e., for lapped inclined slats spaced
    from each other at the lapped portions.

    516,    for a coated lapped multiplanar surfacing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 401 for a metal sheathing for
    railway car wall structure.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 130+,
    for flexibly connected plural strips, slats or panels, e.g., venetian
    blinds.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for a residual stock material product in the form of a single or plural
    layer web or sheet, merely defined as a "shingle", "siding", or the like
    and see especially subclasses 143+ for such a product having a rough or
    textured surface made up of particulate matter, in which subclass are many
    patents directed to roofing or shingles.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 221 for a louvered ventilating panel
    associated with a window, subclasses 265+ for a louvered ventilating panel
    associated with a structure for mixing plural air streams together,
    subclasses 277+ for a louvered panel associated with a cover or shield for
    an exterior vent opening, subclasses 309+ for a louvered air distributer,
    subclasses 335+ for a louvered damper, subclasses 358+ for a louvered
    ventilating panel associated with a pump driven air exhaust, and subclass
    358 for a louvered panel associated with an air outlet, per se.


CLS 52/519
TXT Structure under subclass 518 in which the sections have portions which are
    shaped to interconnect with each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    557+,   for an element of lapped joint surfacing which may include tabs or
    slits.


CLS 52/520
TXT Structure under subclass 519 wherein a surfacing section is secured to a
    support or to another surfacing section by a separate retainer located in
    the area of the overlapped sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    276+,   for a corner section overlapping and anchored to subjacent
    intersecting sections.

    465+,   for a cap-like bridge strip with a separate anchor element.

    543+,   for anchor lapped multiplanar surfacing construction utilizing a
    fastener or anchor.


CLS 52/521
TXT Structure under subclass 520 wherein the retainer passes entirely through
    at least one of the surface forming elements.


CLS 52/522
TXT Structure under subclass 519 wherein at least one of the interfitting
    portions is resilient and is adapted, when engaged by a portion of the
    adjacent section, to be biased to a position which will resist separation
    of the sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    482,    for a shaft with a permanently deformable type gripping feature.


CLS 52/523
TXT Structure under subclass 519 in which one section is provided with a
    relatively narrow slit extending inwardly from an edge thereof, which slit
    receives the marginal edge of the adjacent section.


CLS 52/524
TXT Structure under subclass 523 in which one section is provided with a slit
    extending inwardly from an edge thereof, which slit interfits with
    similarly disposed slit in the adjacent section.


CLS 52/525
TXT Structure under subclass 523 in which one section is provided with a tab
    which is received by a slit in the other section.


CLS 52/526
TXT Structure under subclass 519 wherein one section is provided with a tab and
    the other section with an aperture intermediate the edges which receives
    said tab.


CLS 52/527
TXT Structure under the subclass 519 wherein one of the interfitting sections
    is provided with a tab projecting in the plane of the section from a
    marginal edge which tab extends over or under the surface of the adjacent
    section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    525     and 526, for other arrangements of interfitted surfacing sections
    with tabs.


CLS 52/528
TXT Structure under subclass 519 in which adjacent sections are held together
    by an interfitted joint formed by folding, rolling or mutually indenting
    marginal portions of adjacent sections when installed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    520+,   for facing sections and an anchoring means which may be interfitted
    by mutual deformation.


CLS 52/529
TXT Structure under subclass 519 wherein a marginal portion of one of the
    sections is folded back upon itself so as to define a space and extends
    under another portion of the same section, the space receiving an
    interfitting part of the adjacent section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    520+,   for sections which may be interfitted with anchor means by a
    reentrant fold.

    528,    for a similar construction formed in situ.


CLS 52/530
TXT Structure under subclass 529 wherein the folded back portion of one of the
    sections interfits for hooks into a bent portion of the adjacent section,
    the spaces defined by folded and bent portion opening towards each other.


CLS 52/531
TXT Structure under subclass 530 wherein a flange on an edge of one of the
    sections extends beyond the joint formed by the oppositely opening spaces.


CLS 52/532
TXT Structure under subclass 529 in which the folded back portion is the corner
    of its section.


CLS 52/533
TXT Structure under subclass 519 wherein the cross section of the lapped
    sections at their interconnecting portions are such that a space wall be
    formed at the joint for conducting a fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302.1+, for a construction having a passage between its interior and the
    ambient and see the subclasses under "SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS":  In
    subclass 302.1 for other constructions with passage forming means.


CLS 52/534
TXT Structure under subclass 533 wherein the sections are formed of sheet
    material whose full cross section is deformed, e.g., bent or flexed, to
    provide the interfitting cross sections at the fluid handling joint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    472,    for elongated member interfitted with a deformed section.

    528,    for a lapped multiplanar section construction wherein interfitting
    sections are folded, rolled or indented in situ.


CLS 52/535
TXT Structure under subclass 519 wherein one of the sections has at least three
    planar surfaces, two of which are consecutively offset transversely in the
    same direction from the first, i.e., in the manner of steps.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182+,   for a construction which, as a whole, is stepped.


CLS 52/536
TXT Structure under subclass 519 in which a major face of one section has
    thereon a tongue, flange or rib, and is in face-to-face contact with the
    adjacent section which has a groove which closely conforms to and mates
    with the tongue, flange, or rib, which groove may also be formed by flanges.


CLS 52/537
TXT Structures under subclass 536 wherein the sections are made of sheet
    material having a full cross section uniformly deformed to provide a
    meshing tongue and groove.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    630,    for a single panel with integral reinforcement, e.g., corrugating.


CLS 52/538
TXT Structure under subclass 536 wherein each of the sections has plural
    upstanding flanges, including sections forming a tongue or groove which
    mesh with each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    537,    for a similar structure wherein entire sheets are corrugated to
    provide meshing sections.


CLS 52/539
TXT Structure under subclass 519 in which a tongue on an edge of one section
    closely conforms to and mates with a groove on an adjacent edge of the
    other section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    536+,   for a surfacing of facing sections with tongue and groove on the
    section faces.

    589.1+, for a module of more general application which has integral keying
    means.


CLS 52/540
TXT Structure under subclass 519 in which one section is formed of laminated
    layers, one layer of which extends beyond the main body of material and
    overlaps the adjacent section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    535,    for a similar construction having plural offset portions.


CLS 52/541
TXT Structure under subclass 519 in which one of the sections has a portion
    formed by a two-walled groove at a terminal end (arris edge), which portion
    cooperates with a similar portion in the adjacent section in an overlapping
    manner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    589.1+, for a module, e.g., block of more general application, which has
    integral keying means.


CLS 52/542
TXT Structure under subclass 519 in which one of the sections has a flange
    which is generally perpendicular to the plane of its exposed face, which
    flange engages a similar flange or opposed face on the adjacent section
    overlapping it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    536+,   for overlapping facing sections with face-to-face preformed closely
    mated tongue and groove joints.

    588.1,  for a structure formed by coplanar facers with interfitted lateral
    flanges.

    593+,   for a structure formed by a shaft and facers with abutting clamped
    flanges.


CLS 52/543
TXT Structure under subclass 518 having discrete means for securing the facing
    sections to each other or to a substructure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    520+,   for another lapped multiplanar joint facing section utilizing a
    discrete fastener.

    698,    for an anchor or tie, per se, and see references under "SEARCH THIS
    CLASS, SUBCLASS"; for other subclasses providing for components held by a
    discrete dissimilar fastener.


CLS 52/544
TXT Structure under subclass 543 wherein the discrete securing means comprises
    a plurality of parts, one of which is secured to a facing section and the
    other of which is secured to the substructure, said parts being adapted to
    interengage and be connected to each other upon installation.


CLS 52/545
TXT Structure under subclass 543 wherein an edge of a facing section, or a
    strip attached thereto, is folded back upon itself and the discrete means
    engages, e.g., is covered by, the folded portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    520+,   for a structure where lapped edge interfitting sections have a
    fastener at the lapped juncture.


CLS 52/546
TXT Structure under subclass 543 in which the discrete means fits in a slot or
    notch extending inwardly of an edge of a facing section.


CLS 52/547
TXT Structure under subclass 543 in which the discrete means extends over and
    clamps an end or edge of a facing section.


CLS 52/548
TXT Structure under subclass 547 in which the discrete means is provided with a
    piercing point integral with it.


CLS 52/549
TXT Structure under subclass 543 wherein the facing section is clamped between
    the substructure and a member which is completely exterior of the facing,
    e.g., nailed strip on outside of shingle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    489,    wherein a facer panel is held laterally of a preassembled or
    prepositioned shaft by a separable clip type fastener.


CLS 52/550
TXT Structure under subclass 543 wherein (1) the discrete means encompasses at
    least two sides of a substructure element or (2) the discrete means and a
    substructure element are so constructed as to interfit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    498+,   for a structure wherein a facer and shaft interfit and the shaft
    carries a retainer for the facer.


CLS 52/551
TXT Structure under subclass 543 including an elongated strip under a facing
    section or sections which cooperates with the securing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    459+,   for a strip bridging facer panel.

    549,    for a facing section held to a     substructure by a subjacent.


CLS 52/552
TXT Structure under subclass 543 in which the discrete means, at least in part,
    is integral with or permanently secured to a facing section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    511,    for a structure having attaching means fixed to a facer which is
    attached to a dissimilar subjacent structure.


CLS 52/553
TXT Structure under subclass 518 including a feature forming a space within or
    under a facing section or for spacing one facing section or portion thereof
    from another or from the supporting substructure, e.g., brace, filler or
    drain.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302.1+, for a construction with a passage between its interior and the
    ambient and see the subclasses listed under "SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS"
    for other constructions with passage forming means.


CLS 52/554
TXT Structure under subclass 518 in which a facing section has a feature which,
    when it and other sections are juxtaposed, results in a complete cover
    assembly which exhibits a particular pattern or configuration not produced
    by any one section.


CLS 52/555
TXT Structure under subclass 554 in which the facing section has a
    configuration simulating a plurality of sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    314,    for another ornamental construction wherein an integral face
    simulates plural units.

    557+,   for a facing section having features on a surface simulating plural
    facing sections.


CLS 52/556
TXT Structure under subclass 518 in which a facing section has a metal element
    extending over the face and end thereof, usually to resist weathering.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    596+,   for a stone-like module with an individual coextensive preformed
    section.


CLS 52/557
TXT Structure under subclass 518 wherein a facing section has a plurality of
    tabs attached thereof simulating plural facing sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    314,    for another ornamental structure wherein a single panel is formed
    to simulate plural units.

    554+,   for generally similar lapped multiplanar sections which together
    form a surfacing not apparent from a single section.


CLS 52/558
TXT Structure under subclass 557 wherein the simulating features include raised
    portions or grooves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    316,    for another ornamental structure having an integral relief formed
    on a major face.


CLS 52/559
TXT Structure under subclass 557 wherein the tabs or facing simulations are
    formed by slots which extend through the facing section.


CLS 52/560
TXT Structure under subclass 518 including a facing section whose thickness
    varies from one end to the other.


CLS 52/561
TXT Structure under the class definition in which modules, usually bricks, are
    arranged in plural parallel courses each individually assembled with each
    set of parallel courses forming a facing so that the modules in one facing
    are in back-to-back relation to those in the opposed facing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    506.01+, for a construction formed by laterally related modular and a
    dissimilar construction and see the subclasses listed under "SEARCH THIS
    CLASS, SUBCLASS" in subclass 506.01 for other constructions involving
    back-to-back related barrier sections.


CLS 52/562
TXT Structure under subclass 561 including a discrete tie means extending
    between the courses which tie means is of a material differing in kind from
    that of the modules.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    344+,   particularly subclass 351 for a construction of a settable material
    backer fixed to a furring, joist or stud.

    426,    for adhesively bonded laterally related modules with a transverse
    tie.

    698+,   for an anchor or tie, per se, and see the subclasses under "SEARCH
    THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS" for other constructions utilizing an anchor or tie.


CLS 52/563
TXT Structure under subclass 562 wherein at least one of said preformed modules
    has an integral projection formed thereon which in use projects laterally
    towards an opposed course and the dissimilar material tie means engages
    said projection.


CLS 52/564
TXT Structure under subclass 562 wherein at least two of the modules of a
    course or superposed courses have preformed deformations in opposed faces
    and a part of the tie extends into the opposed deformations.


CLS 52/565
TXT Structure under subclass 562 wherein a portion of the tie means is embedded
    within at least one of the modules.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    583,    for means connecting projecting, embedded elements of
    longitudinally abutting modules.


CLS 52/566
TXT Structure under subclass 561 in which the laterally related course modules
    are connected by a transverse unit which passes between and through the
    modules of a course.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    503+,   for related structures which form a through passage.


CLS 52/567
TXT Structure under subclass 566 wherein the transverse unit has a head portion
    which is within the outside faces of the courses, which portion is locked
    to a mating configuration formed by the course modules or formed integral
    with a module of a course.


CLS 52/568
TXT Structure under subclass 561 including a member extending transversely
    between the parallel courses, which member is not visible at the outer
    faces of the courses and connects the parallel courses to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    562,    for a construction utilizing a dissimilar material tie.

    566,    for a construction wherein a header unit passes through a course.


CLS 52/569
TXT Structure under subclass 561 wherein the laterally related course modules
    each have laterally extending projections monolithically formed thereon,
    said modules being arranged so that said projections are oriented in
    opposed relationship.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    562+,   for a similar construction utilizing a dissimilar material tie.


CLS 52/570
TXT Structure under subclass 569 wherein the projections include means which
    mutually engage and positively prevent separation of the modules in opposed
    courses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    567,    for a construction with traversing header with internal lockhead.

    568,    for a construction with a hidden joining member.


CLS 52/571
TXT Structure under subclass 570 including discrete additional means acting
    between the opposed mutually engaging projections and holding them fixed
    relative to each other.


CLS 52/572
TXT Structure under subclass 569 wherein portions of the opposed projections
    abut each other.


CLS 52/573.1
TXT INCLUDING DESIGN FEATURE (E.G., INTEGRAL CORRUGATION, TENSIONERS)
    ACCOMMODATING DIMENSIONAL VARIATION RESPONSIVE TO CHANGING CONDITIONS:

    Structure under the class definition in which the static structure, or a
    component, has the ability to adjust depending upon atmospheric
    circumstances (i.e., variable temperature or humidity).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144+,   for a construction with an exposed physical configuration for an
    acoustical effect.

    167.1+, for means compensating earth transmitted forces.

    345,    346, and 347, for means fixing a settable material backer to
    furring, joist, or stud, which means may allow movement.

    393+,   for a yieldable preformed separator.

    474+,   for a sheet-type section fixed to framing.

    515+,   for a construction with a disparate coating (e.g., grease).


CLS 52/574
TXT Structure under the class definition including modules of identical but
    nonrectangular form in which alternate modules are placed in reversed
    position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    473,    for a louver panel having spaced parallel slats which may be
    reversed.

    561+,   for a construction of course modules in which major distinct
    portions of the modules in opposed courses are laterally related to each
    other, particularly subclasses 569+, for such a construction wherein the
    modules have opposed monolithic projections.


CLS 52/575
TXT Structure under the class definition including a module having two opposed
    faces which extend in a nonparallel relationship transversely of the major
    surfaces of a barrier in which the module is a component, e.g., keystone
    block.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270+,   for a block with opposed parallel curved faces and nonparallel edge
    faces.

    284+,   for a corner block which may have nonparallel joint faces.

    574,    for a construction with alternating reversed identical form units.


CLS 52/576
TXT Structure under the class definition including a module having a preformed
    member formed of a material closing on itself and embedded therein, thus
    forming a cavity within the preshape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    577,    for an embedded type void former, per se, and see references under
    "SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS" for other subclasses relating to a
    construction with a void therein.


CLS 52/577
TXT Structure under subclass 576 including a thin-walled member or members
    defining a closed periphery, which member in use is embedded in a settable
    material and forms an unoccupied void within the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for a construction of vertically spaced roof sections.

    220.1,  for a service duct within a barrier.

    302.1+, for a construction with a fluid passage communicating with an
    enlarged space, e.g., a hollow in a wall and see search notes.

    320,    for a cast barrier with ribs and blocks forming voids.

    380+,   for a cast in situ barrier defining an isolated space.

    404.1+, for a nonsettable insulating material within a cavity.

    503+,   for a construction of wherein modules form a barrier with a through
    fluid passage.

    553+,   for a lapped multiplanar surfacing with spacing or space forming
    feature.

    576,    for a cavity former within a module.


CLS 52/578
TXT Structure under the class definition including plural modular or panel
    units connected by means lying between their major exposed faces by (1) a
    discrete fastener which differs in material and shape from that of the
    units or (2) units with configuration on one face or edge shaped for
    interfitting or keying with a mating configuration on an opposed adjacent
    unit or (3) a unit, per se, with a feature specialized to (1) or (2).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    415+,   for facers bonded by a settable material section, e.g., brick and
    mortar wall which may have interfitting sections.

    459+,   for a construction utilizing a bridger strip over a panel juncture.

    474+,   for a panel interfitting with a shaft.

    506.01+, for a construction wherein a facer is attached to a disparate
    structure.

    519+,   for lapped multiplanar interfitted sections forming a surface.

    561+,   for a construction of laterally related individually assembled
    courses.

    574,    for a construction of alternating reversed identical form modules.

    596+    and 613+, for an opaque stone-like module or a composite panel
    which may include an edge feature which could be used to interengage
    another module but which is not critically defined for such use,
    particularly subclass 604 for one module usually facially related to
    another.

    660+,   for fabric or lattice-like open work, particularly subclass 663 for
    such a construction wherein annuli-members are arranged in a coplanar
    relationship.


CLS 52/579
TXT Structure under subclass 578 in which the modular or panel units are
    arranged in side-by-side relationship which members in cross-section
    exhibit a generally U or Z shape with the terminal flange sections aligned
    in parallel planes so as to form the major faces of a hollow barrier
    construction.


CLS 52/580
TXT Structure under subclass 578 wherein the modular or panel units are made of
    sheets which are located in face-to-face spaced apart relationship by
    members joining and forming at least two of the opposing edges of the
    resultant composite module and also connecting the resultant panel edgewise
    of an adjacent panel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    782.1+, for a composite panel wherein its facing is spaced by edger-spacers
    but having no feature for edge-to-edge interkeying of adjacent panels.


CLS 52/581
TXT Structure under subclass 578 in which the panel units are grille or
    lattice-like panels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    448,    for an imperforate area plaster backer having sections with
    interengaging edges.

    656.8+,for cornered or peripherally bordered frame, per se.

    660+,   for a residual fabric or lattice open work.

    782.1+, for a perforate panel with attached disparate edging.


CLS 52/582.1
TXT With joining means of dissimilar material and separate from unit:

    Discrete connecting feature under subclass 578 which differs in composition
    from the panel, block, or tile unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    698+,   for an anchor or tie assembled in situ.


CLS 52/582.2
TXT Includes lock or latch mechanism:

    Dissimilar joining means under subclass 582.1 with an additional securing
    device that (1) requires a key or (2) is yieldably biased to a particular
    position (e.g., closed).


CLS 52/583.1
TXT Connecting protruding ends of units' reinforcement (e.g., rebar):

    Dissimilar joining means under subclass 582.1 wherein the units are
    fastened to each other via a jutted-out portion of embedded strengthening
    elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    432,    for a construction wherein the reinforcement of a facer unit is
    embedded in a facer bonding section (mortar).

    565,    for a construction of laterally related modules with reinforcement
    embedded in them.

    587.1,  for a module with a projecting tie embedded in a unit.


CLS 52/584.1
TXT Clamp type:

    Dissimilar joining means under subclass 582.1 which is a member engaging
    two adjoining modules and urging one toward the other; e.g.,  U-shaped
    ties, threaded bolts, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    357+,   for a clip engaging a settable material receiving backer and
    furring, joist, or stud.


CLS 52/585.1
TXT Tie (e.g., dowel) placed in preformed opposed openings:

    Dissimilar joining means under subclass 582.1 which is an elongated rigid
    member fitting into like, aligned, and opposed openings or depressions in
    units.


CLS 52/586.1
TXT Tie along and within edge or face groove; e.g.,  spline:

    Dissimilar joining means under subclass 582.1 which is designed to fit
    within (1) a plurality of prefabricated openings or (2) a slot or channel
    in the units.


CLS 52/586.2
TXT Spline having particular shape (bone, arrow, dovetail, etc):

    Dissimilar fitted tie under subclass 586.1 which is fabricated to generally
    resemble a short straight section with enlarged portions of a certain
    configuration at both ends.


CLS 52/587.1
TXT Protruding tying means (hook or eyebolt) embedded in unit at other end:

    Dissimilar joining means under subclass 582.1 in which fastening members
    are fixed a short distance into the unit body with a portion of the member
    extending outside the unit edge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    583.1,  for connecting protruding ends of unit reinforcement.


CLS 52/588.1
TXT Interfitted integral flange:

    Discrete connecting feature under subclass 578 which both has a portion
    that mates with a corresponding portion of the abutting unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    528,    529, and 542, for a construction of lapped multiplanar surfacing
    with interengaged flanges.

    584.1,  for a construction of units with lateral flanges clamped together.


CLS 52/589.1
TXT Having integral key:

    Discrete connecting feature under subclass 578 in which the modular panel,
    block, or tile unit has two portions with at least one projection or at
    least one recess that are a constituent part of the entire panel, block, or
    tile.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS

    271,    for a construction with spaced intersections with a key joint
    between a superimposed unit.

    286,    for a corner block-type module with horizontal and vertical   keys.

    436,    for a cast-in-situ section bonding interengaging section of
    modules.

    448,    for a plaster-type imperforate area backer having interengaging
    edge joints.

    474+,   for a module fixed to an elongated sustainer which may conform in
    shape to the sustainer.

    519+,   for an interfitted, lapped, multiplanar section forming a
    surfacing; e.g., shingle-type.

    561+,   particularly subclasses 567 and 570 for laterally related module
    courses which may include mating deformations on the modules.


CLS 52/590.1
TXT Dovetail-type key:

    Integral key under subclass 589.1 wherein the unit has a fan-shaped
    projection or indentation (e.g., mortise) that mates with an identical
    indentation or projection of an adjacent unit.


CLS 52/590.2
TXT Keys, mortises, or key and mortise on opposed faces or edges:

    Integral dovetail key under subclass 590.1 wherein one unit has sides that
    are substantially parallel and said sides have: (1) at least two fan-shaped
    projections with at least one projection on each side or (2) at least two
    fan-shaped indentations with at least one indentation on each side; or (3)
    at least one fan-shaped indentation on one side and a fan-shaped projection
    on the other side.


CLS 52/590.3
TXT Having mortise with internal space:

    Integral dovetail key under subclass 590.1 wherein the fan-shaped
    indentation is designed to accommodate both the projection and; e.g., a
    settable material such as grout.


CLS 52/591.1
TXT Key on angularly related edges or faces:

    Integral key under subclass 589.1 wherein one unit has at least two
    projections that are located on two surfaces which share a common juncture
    plus the unit engage indentations on an adjacent unit.


CLS 52/591.2
TXT Multiple, finite keys (e.g., perpendicular sawtooth):

    Integral key on angularly related edge under subclass 591.1 wherein the
    unit contains a plurality of projections that are a length substantially
    shorter than the entire length of the unit.


CLS 52/591.3
TXT Key designed for four direction lock:

    Integral key on angularly related edge under subclass 591.1 wherein the
    unit contains a projection which prevents movement in the horizontal and
    vertical planes.


CLS 52/591.4
TXT Rabbet on two perpendicular faces or edge and face (e.g., ship lap) for key:

    Integral key on angularly related edge under subclass 591.1 wherein the
    unit has a groove cut into two exposed intersecting portions that creates a
    projection which corresponds to a similar groove in an adjacent unit.


CLS 52/591.5
TXT With additional locking feature (e.g., fastener):

    Integral key on angularly related rabbeted edge under subclass 591.4
    wherein the projection includes another distinct element that ensures
    contact with an adjacent unit.


CLS 52/592.1
TXT Keys, mortises, or key and mortise on opposed edges or faces:

    Integral key under subclass 589.1 wherein one unit has sides that are
    substantially parallel and said sides have: (1) at least two projections
    with at least one projection on each side; or (2) at least two indentations
    with at least one indentation on each side; or (3) at least one indentation
    on one side and a projection on the other side.


CLS 52/592.2
TXT Key designed for four direction lock:

    Integral key on opposed edges under subclass 592.1 wherein the unit
    contains a projection which prevents movement in the horizontal and
    vertical planes.


CLS 52/592.3
TXT In a vertical arrangement:

    Integral four direction lock key on opposed edges under subclass 592.2
    wherein the unit is assembled in an upright position.


CLS 52/592.4
TXT Having mortise with internal space:

    Integral key on opposed edges under subclass 592.1 wherein the indentation
    is designed to accommodate both the projection and, e.g., an internal
    settable material such as grout.


CLS 52/592.5
TXT And provided for stacking:

    Opposed edges having mortise with space under subclass 592.4 wherein the
    projection and corresponding indentation are manufactured to prevent
    movement in the horizontal plane.


CLS 52/592.6
TXT Designed for stacking (e.g., key on top surface, mortise on bottom):

    Integral key on opposed edges under subclass 592.1 wherein the projection
    and corresponding indentation are manufactured to prevent movement in the
    horizontal plane.


CLS 52/596
TXT Structure under the class definition including a modular unit composed
    principally of masonry or concrete-like materials, which when assembled in
    juxtaposed relationship with like units forms a surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    578+,   for a modular unit with discrete edgewise connecting feature.

    630,    631, and 782.1+, for a panel primarily of nonstone-like material,
    e.g., wood, metal, plastics or glass.

    662,    for lattice-type openwork forming by annular-like members
    coplanarly arranged.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 9.1 for a shaped module of refractory
    material particularly adapted to be stacked to form a heat exchange mass.


CLS 52/597
TXT Structure under subclass 596 in which a discrete clip, generally having a
    portion thereof embedded  in the stone-like modular unit, grips a sheetlike
    facing member for the modular unit.


CLS 52/598
TXT Structure under subclass 596 in which a sheetlike preformed facing
    sheetlike member is equipped with an integral feature, e.g., flange,
    tongue, for making a connection between a stone-like modular unit and the
    facing member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    601,    for a stone-like module with edging reinforcement of a different
    kind of material.

    782.1+, for another type of composite panel.


CLS 52/599
TXT Structure under subclass 598 in which the facer retaining feature is in the
    form of flanges on the terminal edges of the facing member.


CLS 52/600
TXT Structure under subclass 596 in which the opaque stone-like unit has
    embedded therein at least one rod-like member of a different kind of
    material, usually steel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189+,   for a pre-cast stair unit.

    583     and 587, for a unit with embedded projecting means acting as a tie.

    633+,   for openwork.

    740.1+, for a shaft which may be used as a concrete reinforcing.


CLS 52/601
TXT Structure under subclass 600 in which the embedded member is an elongated
    member over or adjacent an edge of the module.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254+,   for a corner with a revealed embedded protector.

    392,    for a tile with integral edge engaging or spacing feature.

    443+,   for a plaster receiving backer which may be framed.

    556,    for a shingle type member with a metal face and end cover.

    598+,   for a coextensive section which grips the edges of a stone-like
    module.

    782.1+, for another type of panel with a disparate edging.


CLS 52/602
TXT Structure under subclass 600 wherein the module is thin and has one face
    with a continuous surface with at least two elongated ribs formed integral
    with and projecting outwardly of its opposed face, the width of the rib
    being substantially less than the width of the unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248,    for hoop tie engaging ribs on sections held by them.

    319+,   for a ribbed cast in situ barrier.

    569+,   for a ribbed slab arranged with their ribs in opposed relation.

    603,    for an unreinforced module with monolithic spacing projections.

    611,    for a block of generally T-shape cross-section.


CLS 52/603
TXT Structure under subclass 596 in which the stone-like module has a plurality
    of integral projections thereon which act to space the major surface of the
    module from another or from a subsurface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    267,    for walls or spaced layers enclosing a space wall.

    578+,   for a module or panel with a feature specialized to forming an
    edge-to-edge connection.

    592.5,  for a module with integral mating key means providing an internal
    space.

    604,    for another construction formed by particularly related modules,
    e.g., by spacers.

    605,    for a stone-like module with grooves coextensive with, a major
    surface.

    712+,   for sheet or wire tires which may act as spacers.


CLS 52/604
TXT Structure under subclass 596 including two or more stone-like modules which
    are related to each in a specifically defined relationship not provided for
    above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    578+,   for a panel or related panels having a feature specialized to
    forming an edge-to-edge relationship.


CLS 52/605
TXT Structure under subclass 596 in which the stone-like module has a plurality
    of narrow elongated indentations extending across a surface thereof from
    one edge to another, which surface, in use, faces an adjacent module.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    437+,   for a module with mortar filled channels in adjacent faces.

    444,    for a block type backer for plaster type facing in which the blocks
    have an integral settable material retaining feature.

    603,    for an integral spacing projection or protuberance which extends
    outwardly of a major surface of a stone-like module.

    606,    for a mortar gripping feature in the form of projections located
    within a traversing passage of a stone-like module.


CLS 52/606
TXT Structure under subclass 596 including a module having a passage which
    extends completely through the module.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    503,    for a barrier with a through passage and see the search notes
    therein for other constructions with internal passages or spacers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, appropriate subclasses for tubular wall
    structure, subclasses 115+ for pipes in the form of a module having plural
    passages and see the reference to Class 138 in the class definition of
    Class 52.


CLS 52/607
TXT Structure under subclass 606 wherein the module has an additional passage
    or a groove extending through the unit and intersecting and cooperating
    with the first passage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    505,    for a combination of preshaped units forming a barrier having
    two-way interior passage intercommunication.


CLS 52/608
TXT Structure under subclass 596 including a module in which any through
    cross-section taken normal to a major face thereof defines a shape which is
    not a rectangle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    245+,   for a curvilinear barrier construction including a module, per se,
    peculiar to such construction.

    284+,   for a corner block module.

    323,    for a filler of cooperating void forming sections between a rib of
    a cast barrier.

    429,    for a construction having flanges on modules confining a
    cast-section.

    474+,   for another construction having a module fixed to an elongated
    sustainer which are shaped to fit the sustainer.

    503+,   for modules forming barrier with a through fluid passage.

    510,    for a module with integral seating ledge supporting a dissimilar
    section.

    561+,   for laterally related courses of modules which often include
    modules peculiarly shaped to tie the courses together.

    574,    for an alternating reversed form module.

    575,    for a module with nonparallel joint faces.

    589.1+, for a module with integral keys.

    602,    for a ribbed slab-type reinforced cast module.

    603,    for a module with a spacing projection.

    606,    for a module with a traversing passage.


CLS 52/609
TXT Structure under subclass 608 in which the modules have at least two outer
    faces lying in spaced parallel planes which faces are limited by terminal
    edges, at least one terminal edge of one face being offset from the
    proximal terminal edge of the other of said faces.


CLS 52/610
TXT Structure under subclass 609 in which the entire peripheral silhouette of
    the module suggests the letter "L".


CLS 52/611
TXT Structure under subclass 609 in which the entire peripheral silhouette of
    the module suggests the letter "T".


CLS 52/612
TXT Structure under subclass 596 including an imperforate solid body comprising
    a stone-like unit having at least two discrete components which differ in
    form or material, which components are arranged in contiguous layers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144+,   for a construction having an acoustical feature which may include
    diverse materials.

    232,    for a construction having a reactive component.

    249+    and 267+, for walls with layers enclosing a space.

    309.1+,for a structure including a synthetic resinous component.

    311.1+, particularly subclass 315 for a module wherein an exposed layer has
    a particular configuration to produce an ornamental effect.

    364,    for a construction having a component with a feature specialized to
    receiving a penetrating fastener.

    404.1+, for a nonsettable insulating material within a cavity.

    408,    for a structure having preformed dividing lamina of a disparate
    material.

    443+,   for a plaster type facing adhered to an imperforate area backer.

    515,    for a structure with a disparate material coating.

    556,    for a shingle with a metal face and end covering.

    576,    for a module with an internal void former.

    782.1+, for a residual composite panel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 411.1+ for a
    stock material product in the form of a plural layer web or sheet and
    characterized merely by the composition of the layers, and subclass 540 for
    a natural solid such as stone and permeated or saturated with a fluid.


CLS 52/630
TXT Structure under the class definition including a sheetlike substantially
    imperforate member having ribs, flanges, or other projections formed of the
    material of the member and acting to strengthen it, e.g., a corrugated
    sheet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    671+,   for a corrugated expanded metal sheet.

    782.1+, for a hollow or sandwich panel with a corrugated sheet component
    and see notes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 604 for metallic
    stock material having intersecting corrugations.


CLS 52/631
TXT Structure under the class definition including a laminated member bent to
    form a corner, one facing lamina thereof being continuous throughout the
    bent area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    656.1+, for a residual cornered or peripherally bordered frame particularly
    subclass 658 for a bent shaft forming a corner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 119+, 121+,
    and 174+ for a residual, structu-rally defined single or plural layer stock
    material product which may have a bent portion, and subclass 603 for
    metallic stock material having an L-shape.


CLS 52/632
TXT Structure under the class definition comprising a structure including a
    rigid elongated member in the form of a shaft or openwork wherein a section
    thereof is mounted for movement relative to another to lengthen or shorten
    the structure without collapse or disassembly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111+,   for powered, movable or extensible mast assemblies.

    645+,   for an openwork having components adjustably or collapsibly
    connected.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclasses 230+, 264, and 267 for extensible
    boom structure for load-handling apparatus.

    248,    Supports, subclass 200.1 for a bracket on a extensible column
    mounted between opposed surfaces; and subclasses 354.1+ for an adjustable
    length prop or brace for an article.


CLS 52/633
TXT Structure under the class definition which, per se, or when resting on a
    supporting surface defines an area having through passages or openings even
    though in use such passages or openings are filled by material in which the
    structure may be embedded, said structure consisting of: (1) a perforated
    sheet (2) plural members held at spaced intervals, (3) a single elongated
    member shaped to define an area or (4) means spacing an elongated member
    from a surface, e.g., truss, frame, trellis, lattice, grating, grid,
    grille, screen, ring, loop, reinforcing rod spacer (often called a rebar
    chair), foraminous sheet and the like.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180,    for a structure with a perforate wear surface.

    207,    for a lattice barrier with fixed and movable panels.

    342+,   for openly spaced slat type laths.

    503+,   for hollow modules forming a through passage in barrier interior.

    581,    for a structure formed by connected perforate panels.

    606+,   for a stone-like unit with traversing passage.

    631,    for a corner formed by bent laminate.

    782.1+, for a perforate panel with separate attached edging.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclass 292 for a screen
    specialized for use with the class type devices.

    14,     Bridges, subclasses 3+ for a bridge truss and subclass 73 for a
    bridge floor.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 215+ for a
    mat with a feature for cleaning special work and subclasses 238+ for a mat
    with a feature for scraping footwear.

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 897.15 for a process of making a grille.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 237+ for a
    tray or floor with a feature specialized to an operation for that class.

    55,     Gas Separation, particularly subclasses 306, 490+, and 522 for a
    foraminous, solid form, gas separating media.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 295+ for a foraminous platen or pressure
    surface for that class.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 152+ for a fuel supporting grate.

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclasses 121+ for a tent frame.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 383+ for a fabric formed by
    interlacing flexible strands, particularly subclass 425 for such a fabric
    with a metal reinforcement.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, particularly
    subclasses 218+ for a movably interconnected plural strip, slat or panel
    closure and subclasses 371+ for a framed single flexible fabric.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 9.1+ for a structure of checker bricks.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 227+ for a screen for that class.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, for a structure of that class,
    particularly subclasses 194+ for a ladder, per se.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 392+ for
    a sifting screen and subclasses 404 to 408 for a frame for such screens.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 163+ for a grate-like
    liquid inlet surface drain and subclasses 483+ for a supported, shaped or
    superimposed filter screen.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 153 for a rack shelf which may be
    foraminous and subclass 181.1 for a residual wire rack.

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclass 347 for a crane boom or bridge, per se,
    having structure peculiar to a load-handling apparatus.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 485+ for a  wire container.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, for a grate, grid,
    etc. comminutor of that class (241) type.

    245,    Wire Fabrics and Structure, appropriate subclass for structure for
    that class.

    256,    Fences, appropriate subclass for a structure for that class.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, for a foraminous structure for
    the function of that class particularly subclasses 100+ for a porous sheet
    contact device and subclass 113 for a perforated wetted baffle.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 80+ for a spring panel.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 781+ for land vehicle frames.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, for an antenna having
    features of that class, particularly subclasses 866+ for loop type,
    subclass 896 for cage or hollow post type and subclass 897 for mesh, woven
    braided or multiple strip antennas.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 330 for a screen adapted to intercept,
    diffuse or divert projected light.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 2+ for drain
    structure, subclass 70 for reinforced pavement structure and subclasses
    134+ for road reinforcement structure, per se.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 116+ for a
    honeycomb-like layer, subclasses 175,+ 190, 193, and 196+ for a web or
    sheet of mechanically interengaged strands or strand-like portions, and
    subclasses 131+ and 596+ for apertured stock material, see also section VI,
    C, 3, d of the Class 428 main definition.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product and
    Process, subclass 233.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 258+ for a support structure for heat treating
    ceramics and subclass 261 for an openwork tray, basket or grid structure
    for heat treating metal.

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 181+ and 304+ for a woven or knit fabric.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 284+ for an air distributing register, and
    particularly, subclasses 309+ for air distributing louvers.


CLS 52/634
TXT Structure under subclass 633 in which the elongated rigid structure has
    parts acting as elongated runners (chords) and cross members (struts) with
    the struts being integral with a chord.


CLS 52/635
TXT Structure under subclass 634 in which the chords and web are of the type
    which has been formed from a slit sheet wherein the slits are opened by
    pulling on the sheet to produce the final truss form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    670+,   for another expanded metal openwork.


CLS 52/636
TXT Structure under subclass 634 including side-by-side opposing sections,
    wherein each section comprises an integral chord and strut section with
    discrete terminal strut portions of each section united to each other.


CLS 52/637
TXT Structure under subclass 633 wherein the openwork structure includes
    discrete three-dimensional sections, each formed of intersecting elongated
    members, which are joined in vertically aligned and stacked relationship.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    632,    for a shaft or openwork permanently connected for axial extension.

    662,    for openwork panels stacked face-to-face.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 178.1+ for a platform
    type scaffold comprising stacked sections.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 186+ and 189+ for a rack of stacked
    shelf or rack sections.


CLS 52/638
TXT Structure under subclass 637 wherein means spacing the elongated members
    includes horizontal and diagonal braces connected to the elongated members
    adjacent the joined ends of the sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    652.1,  for other three-dimensional openwork with inclined ties or struts.


CLS 52/639
TXT Structure under subclass 633 comprising a truss formed by (1) elongated
    peripheral members (chords) which meet at a vertex, are connected by a base
    member and have at least one subsidiary member extending from the base to
    an adjacent peripheral member or (2) a curved peripheral member terminating
    at or running generally parallel to an elongated base member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     for a conical or radially ribbed roof.

    84,     for structures that have an airfoil section.

    90.1+,  for an inclined cover or rafter with supporting substructures in
    which the rafter portion is usually a peaked truss.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    14,     Bridges, subclasses 3+ for a bridge truss.


CLS 52/640
TXT Structure under subclass 639 provided with means to change the deflection
    or convexity of the peripheral member of the truss.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    632,    for an axially extensible openwork.


CLS 52/641
TXT Structure under subclass 639 having an arrangement of components or mating
    configurations on components specialized to enabling collapsing or
    disconnecting the component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127.1+, for a structure with adjunctive means useful only in assembly or
    disassembly of the structure, e.g, an access opening.


CLS 52/642
TXT Structure under subclass 639 in which one or more of the members include
    coextensive components in face-to-face contacting relationship.


CLS 52/643
TXT Structure under subclass 639 comprising a structural relationship among a
    plurality of distinct trusses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    637+,   645+, and 648.1+, for other structurally related trusses, i.e,
    three- dimensional openwork.


CLS 52/644
TXT Structure under subclass 639 wherein one of the elongated peripheral
    members is longitudinally curved.


CLS 52/645
TXT Structure under subclass 633 having means for allowing movement of the
    elongated members forming the openwork so as to merely adjust one member
    with respect to the other or to allow movement for collapse without
    disconnecting them.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111+,   for a mechanically operated, extensible or relatively movable mast
    assembly.

    632,    for a shaft or openwork construction which is axially extensible
    without disassembly or collapsibility.

    641,    for a collapsible or demountable peaked or curved truss.


CLS 52/646
TXT Structure under subclass 645 in which the three or more planes defined by
    corner chords of the collapsible openwork define a three-dimensional space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    637,    643, and 648.1+, for another three-dimensional openwork structure.


CLS 52/647
TXT Structure under subclass 633 in which a wire-like member is attached in
    spaced relationship to a flange of a flange-web (I or I beam type) member
    usually to serve as embedded means tying concrete to the flange-web member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231,    for means tensioning embedded reinforcement held between sustainers.

    334,    for a ribbed concrete barrier with a shear resister between
    concrete and a metal beam.

    348+,   for settable material backer frame formed by intersecting or
    crossing members.

    414,    for cast in situ barrier having a sustainer and embedded
    reinforcement.


CLS 52/648.1
TXT Three-dimensional space-defining:

    Structure under subclass 633 so constructed that planes intersecting at a
    terminal corner of, and defined by, all outer longitudinal edges of the
    structure define an enclosed space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90.1+,  for an inclined rafter on supporting substructure.

    111+,   for a mast with powered motive means.

    632,    for an axially extensible shaft or openwork.

    637+,   for longitudinally superimposed three-dimensional units.

    643,    for a construction of structurally related or curved or peaked
    trusses.

    662,    for a stack of plural facially contacting openwork fabrics or
    lattices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclasses 194+ for a stair without a riser and subclasses
    128, 141+, and 222+ for a tower with a workmen's platform.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 180, 181.1, and 182 for a rack of
    screens, wire, pipes, or bars.


CLS 52/649.1
TXT Reinforcement for settable material:

    Subject matter under subclass 648.1 which serves to add tensile strength to
    a substance, usually concrete, in which it is ultimately imbedded.


CLS 52/649.2
TXT For beam, column, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 649.1 wherein the reinforced substance
    comprises a slender supporting structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    650.1+, for beam, girder, column, etc., per
     se.


CLS 52/649.3
TXT Having perimeter-surrounding element:

    Structure under subclass 649.2, including distinct members defining
    terminal edges, or a terminal corner that delimits an area within the
    enclosed space in two directions, i.e., a complete frame surrounding an
    area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    581,    for an edge-to-edge connected openwork panel.

    631,    for a corner formed by laminate with bent facing section.

    660+,   for an openwork planar fabric or lattice which is indefinite as to
    length or width.

    690+,   for a construction formed by side-by-side terminal edge shafts
    connected by cross members which construction is limited in depth only by
    the terminal shafts (e.g., a truss or ladder-like openwork).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 578 for a
    metallic panel having a nonrectangular perimeter.


CLS 52/649.4
TXT Helical:

    Subject matter under subclass 649.3 wherein the perimeter-surrounding
    element has the configuration of a helix or spiral.


CLS 52/649.5
TXT Collapsible:

    Subject matter under subclass 649.4 wherein the perimeter-surrounding
    element is extensible when constructed, but may be collapsed for shipping
    or storage purposes.


CLS 52/649.6
TXT Additional laterally projecting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 649.2 wherein the reinforcing assembly for
    the beam or column includes a member disposed outwardly to the space
    defining construction and extending exteriorly of the defined space.


CLS 52/649.7
TXT Spacer-positioner:

    Structure under subclass 649.6 including means projecting outwardly of the
    defined space functioning to space the construction from a base, casting
    mold, or the like.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    677,    for a spacer-positioner for a single rod (e.g., a concrete rod
    support known in the art as a "chair").


CLS 52/649.8
TXT Spacer-positioner:

    Structure under subclass 649.1 including means projecting outwardly of the
    defined space functioning to space the construction from a base, casting
    mold, or the like.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    649.7,  for a spacer-positioner in a rebar lattice for a beam, girder,
    column, etc.

    677,    for a spacer-positioner for a single rod (e.g., a concrete rod
    support known in the art as a "chair").


CLS 52/650.1
TXT Beam (e.g., girder, joist, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 648.1 the structure of which defines a
    horizontal, elongate, load supporting unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    649.2+, for concrete girder, etc., having rebar in a three-dimensional grid.


CLS 52/650.2
TXT Inclined struts or ties meeting at intermediate runner:

    Structure under subclass 650.1 including longitudinal primary shafts
    (runners) connected by struts or tie members which are inclined towards the
    longitudinal (major) axis of the structure with the distal ends of each
    member of a pair being connected to spaced runners and with their adjacent
    ends forming an apex which is connected to an intermediate runner.


CLS 52/650.3
TXT Openwork deck, walkway, ceiling, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 648.1 comprising a horizontal,
    openwork-platform, usually supported by girders, joists, etc., or the
    framework supporting said subject matter.


CLS 52/651.01
TXT Vertically oriented (e.g., tower, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 648.1 comprising a structure having imposing
    vertical dimensions.


CLS 52/651.02
TXT For electrical conductor (e.g., line-pole,
     line-tower, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 651.01 comprising a support structure for an
    electrical energy transmission conductor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 45+ for both
    towers, poles or posts and specified conductor.


CLS 52/651.03
TXT Internal transverse spacer for runners:

    Structure under subclass 651.02  including an elongated shaft (e.g., mast
    or beam) having longitudinally extending elements which are connected by
    internal, transversely disposed spacers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    650.2,  for a girder, joist, beam, etc., incorporating inclined struts or
    ties meeting at intermediate runner.

    651.06, for a derrick incorporating inclined struts or ties meeting at
    intermediate runner.


CLS 52/651.04
TXT Having perimeter-surrounding element (e.g., helical, etc.):

    Structure under subclass 651.02 including distinct members defining
    terminal edges or a terminal corner that delimits an area within the
    enclosed space in two directions, i.e., a complete frame surrounding an
    area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    581,    for an edge-to-edge connected openwork panel.

    631,    for a corner formed by laminate with bent facing section.

    649.3+, for a settable material reinforcing structure having a
    perimeter-surrounding element.

    660+,   for an openwork planar fabric or lattice which is indefinite as to
    length or width.

    690+,   for a construction formed by side-by-side terminal edge shafts
    connected by cross members which construction is limited in depth only by
    the terminal shafts (e.g., a truss or ladder-like openwork).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 578 for a
    metallic panel having a nonrectangular perimeter.


CLS 52/651.05
TXT For supporting hoisting or boring equipment (e.g., derrick, gantry):

    Subject matter under subclass 651.01  wherein the openwork structure is
    intended to be used to support hoisting or boring equipment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111+,   for drill columns, crane booms, etc.


CLS 52/651.06
TXT Inclined struts or ties meeting at intermediate runner:

    Structure under subclass 651.05  including longitudinal primary shafts
    (runners) connected by struts or tie members which are inclined towards the
    longitudinal (major) axis of the structure, with each member having a
    distal end connected to a runner and having its other end connected to an
    intermediate runner so as to form an apex with the other member at the
    intermediate runner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    650.2,  for a girder, joist, beam, etc., incorporating inclined struts or
    ties meeting at intermediate runner.

    651.09, for a column, mast, etc., incorporating inclined struts or ties
    meeting at intermediate runner.


CLS 52/651.07
TXT Column, mast, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 651.01  wherein the unit is a slender
    supporting structure or electromagnetic radiation antenna.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300+,   for a vertical structure with a cap covering the upper terminus.


CLS 52/651.08
TXT Internal transverse spacer for runners:

    Structure under subclass 651.07  including an elongated shaft (e.g., mast
    or beam) the longitudinally extending elements of which are connected by
    internal, transversely disposed spacers.


CLS 52/651.09
TXT Inclined struts or ties meeting at intermediate runner:

    Structure under subclass 651.07  including longitudinal primary shafts
    (runners) connected by struts or tie members which are inclined towards the
    longitudinal (major) axis of the structure, with each member having a
    distal end connected to a runner and having its other end connected to an
    intermediate runner so as to form an apex with the other member at the
    intermediate runner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    650.2,  for a girder, joist, beam, etc., incorporating inclined struts or
    ties meeting at intermediate runner.

    651.03, for line-pole, line-tower, etc., incorporating inclined struts or
    ties meeting at intermediate runner.

    651.06, for a derrick incorporating inclined struts or ties meeting at
    intermediate runner.


CLS 52/651.1
TXT Scaffolding:

    Subject matter under subclass 651.01 comprising a plurality of similar
    pieces which connect together to form a temporary construction to aid in
    performing work on a structure, when assembled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclasses 128, 141+, and 222+ for a tower with a workmen's
    platform.


CLS 52/651.11
TXT Having perimeter-surrounding element:

    Structure under subclass 648.1 including distinct members defining terminal
    edges, or a terminal corner that delimits an area within the enclosed space
    in two directions, i.e., a complete frame surrounding an area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    581,    for an edge-to-edge connected openwork panel.

    631,    for a corner formed by laminate with bent facing section.

    649.3+, for a caged lattice which reinforces settable material.

    651.04, for line-pole, line-tower, etc., having a perimeter-surrounding
    element.

    660+,   for an openwork planar fabric or lattice which is indefinite as to
    the length or the width.

    690+,   for a construction formed by side-by-side terminal edge shafts
    connected by cross members which construction is limited in depth only by
    the terminal shafts (e.g., a truss or ladder-like openwork).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 578 for a
    metallic panel having a nonrectangular perimeter.


CLS 52/652.1
TXT Triangular lattice:

    Subject matter under subclass 648.1 including three-sided, bracing modules.


CLS 52/653.1
TXT Framework:

    Subject matter under subclass 648.1 comprising elongate members that form
    the skeleton which limits and defines the complete utilitarian volume
    (i.e., for occupancy, buoyancy, fireplace, etc.) of a subunit of a
    structure.

    (1)     Note.  The earth, or a separate structure, may compose one or more
    enclosing barriers of the volume.


CLS 52/653.2
TXT Having tubular member:

    Subject matter under subclass 653.1  wherein the elongate members of the
    framework have a hollow cross-section.

    (1)     Note.  Said cross-section of the member is usually, but not
    necessarily, circular in configuration.


CLS 52/654.1
TXT Parallel trellises or sheets held by disparate connector:

    Structure under subclass 648.1 in which uniplanar trellis structures (e.g.,
    trusses, or foraminous sheets) are held in parallel spaced relationship by
    connectors which differ in form or arrangement from the struts of the
    trellises or sheets.


CLS 52/655.1
TXT Having specific connector, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 648.1  wherein significance is attributed to
    the means fastening individual members of the structure.


CLS 52/655.2
TXT Spheroidal:

    Subject matter under subclass 655.1 wherein the fastening means has a
    spherical configuration.


CLS 52/656.1
TXT Outside corner or peripherally bordered (i.e., framing, etc.):

    Structure under subclass 633 including distinct members defining terminal
    edges or a terminal corner that delimits an area within the enclosed space
    in two directions, i.e., a complete frame surrounding an area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    581,    for an edge-to-edge connected openwork panel.

    631,    for a corner formed by laminate with bent facing section.

    660+,   for an openwork planar fabric or lattice which is indefinite as to
    length or width.

    690+,   for a construction formed by side-by-side terminal edge shafts
    connected by cross members which construction is limited in depth only by
    the terminal shafts (e.g., a truss or ladder-like openwork).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 578 for a
    metallic panel having a nonrectangular perimeter.


CLS 52/656.2
TXT Portal frame or closure frame:

    Subject matter under subclass 656.1 comprising the framing of an opening
    for a structure or the framing of the barricading panel, itself, for such
    an opening.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, for closure panels mounted for
    movement or removal including support means for such closures having
    features providing for such movement or removal of a closure panel.


CLS 52/656.3
TXT Fireproof:

    Subject matter under subclass 656.2 wherein the frame or associated door
    comprises material, or is constructed in a fashion, which specifically
    serves as a block to extreme heat or flame.

    (1)     Note.  A closure or frame that is merely constructed of
    noncombustible material, such as metal or glass, is not considered proper
    for placement in this subclass.


CLS 52/656.4
TXT For door:

    Subject matter under subclass 656.2  wherein the closure portal is an
    access-way for a person or thing.


CLS 52/656.5
TXT For window:

    Subject matter under subclass 656.2 wherein the closure portal serves
    primarily as a passage-way for air or light.


CLS 52/656.6
TXT Metal sash or frame:

    Subject matter under subclass 656.5  wherein the components comprising the
    structure are made of metal.


CLS 52/656.7
TXT For screen or storm door or window or shutter, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 656.2 wherein the framed unit is an auxiliary
    closure.


CLS 52/656.8
TXT Grille-type insert:

    Subject matter under subclass 656.1  wherein the framed unit is, itself,
    openwork, such as a grid or grate.


CLS 52/656.9
TXT Joint, connector:

    Subject matter under subclass 656.1  wherein the individual members
    comprising the frame elements are held together by a significant fastening
    means.


CLS 52/657
TXT Structure under subclass 656.1 including crossing diagonal members
    traversing the quadrilateral area and attached to at least two of the
    shafts or means such as a gusset plate bracing a corner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    693+,   for two spaced parallel shafts with diagonal bracing.


CLS 52/658
TXT Structure under subclass 656.1 in which at least one of the corners is
    formed by a bent single piece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    631,    for a laminate with a bent facing section.


CLS 52/659
TXT Structure under subclass 633 including a group of members which are free to
    move with respect to each other but which in use are disposed in an
    embedding mass in intermeshing or intersecting relationship.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    663,    for a fabric or lattice type openwork wherein members are fixedly
    related to other members surrounding them.


CLS 52/660
TXT Structure under subclass 633 including means forming a surface of
    indeterminate dimensions and having a repetitive pattern of openings
    formed by (1) a single foraminous sheet, (2) elongated intersecting members
    or (3) members connecting each other, e.g., rods, circles, polygons, etc.,
    which are coplanarly arranged.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    633,    for miscellaneous openwork and see search notes therein for
    additional subclasses and other classes involving openwork structures.

    690+,   for connected side-by-side shafts forming longitudinal edges, i.e.,
    those which have a defined means forming the terminal edges in the manner
    of a ladder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 596 for
    apertured metallic stock material.


CLS 52/661
TXT Structure under subclass 660 wherein the member is a perforated sheet and
    has filaments, e.g., wire or mesh, attached thereto usually to promote
    adherence to concrete.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    454,    for an imperforate area plaster backer with an attached filament or
    mesh.

    647,    for a wire connected to "I" or "T" type member.


CLS 52/662
TXT Structure under subclass 660 in which plural and distinct surface forming
    means are arranged in a stacked facially contacting relationship.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    654.1,  for a construction formed by parallel trellises held by a disparate
    connection.


CLS 52/663
TXT Structure under subclass 660 in which there is at least one separate member
    surrounded by other members, i.e., components such as squares, triangles or
    circles arranged side-by-side to form a planar surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302.1+, for structures having a vent from the interior thereof to the
    ambient and see search notes for other constructions having a passage from
    its interior to the ambient.

    606+,   for a masonry module having a through passage a plurality of which
    may be arranged to form an openwork.


CLS 52/664
TXT Structure under subclass 660 comprising a first set of elongated elements
    extending generally parallel to each other in one direction, and a second
    set of elongated elements extending generally parallel to each other in a
    direction to meet or cross the elements of the first set.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    633,    for miscellaneous openwork and see the search notes therein.


CLS 52/665
TXT Structure under subclass 664 in which the elements of the sets cross each
    other and there are separate connectors at plural crossings which hold the
    elements together.


CLS 52/666
TXT Structure under subclass 664 including sets of relatively thin, flat,
    elongated members arranged in parallel relationship with their major faces
    opposed and spaced and their terminal edges coplanar.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    473,    for a louvered panel, i.e., connected spaced inclined slats and see
    notes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 130+
    for plural strips, slat or panel type having relatively movable components.


CLS 52/667
TXT Structure under subclass 666 in which a slat passes through a closed
    periphery opening in another slat, the latter intersecting or crossing the
    first slat.


CLS 52/668
TXT Structure under subclass 666 in which at least one first slat has a depth
    wise slot extending from an edge thereof, which slot receives another slat
    which crosses the first.


CLS 52/669
TXT Structure under subclass 664 in which the shape of transverse
    cross-sections of one set of elements at a point taken approximately
    centrally between two adjacent elements of the crossing set differs in kind
    from that of a similar cross-section of the crossing set.


CLS 52/670
TXT Structure under subclass 660 in which the structure is an unitary
    foraminous sheet formed by slitting it and opening the slits by opposed
    pulling forces thus forming a sheet of integral connected strips, which
    strips thus define openings through the sheet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    635,    for a truss with unitary chord and web of expanded metal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 6.1+ for processes and machines for
    forming expanded metal sheets.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 596 for expanded
    metal stock material.


CLS 52/671
TXT Structure under subclass 670 in which sections of the expanded sheet are
    permanently displaced laterally of the plane of the original sheet.


CLS 52/672
TXT Structure under subclass 671 in which the laterally displaced sections are
    of open channel form, e.g., U-shaped, and are formed in strips which have
    not been expanded, e.g., the ribs are of imperforate metal or have
    substantially imperforate areas.


CLS 52/673
TXT Structure under subclass 660 wherein the member is a perforated sheet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    670+,   for an expanded metal sheet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 596 for
    perforated metallic stock material.


CLS 52/674
TXT Structure under subclass 673 comprising continuous alternating ridges and
    grooves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    671,    for a corrugated expanded metal sheet.

    783.11+, for a sandwich or hollow panel with a corrugated sheet and see
    search notes.


CLS 52/675
TXT Structure under subclass 673 wherein those portions of the sheet which
    define the perforations are disposed laterally to the general plane of the
    sheet, e.g., form tabs or ridges at the perforations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    671,    for expanded metal with laterally displace sections, e.g., expanded
    corrugated metal.


CLS 52/676
TXT Structure under subclass 660 including discrete bodies attached to a
    sheetlike body formed by intermeshing filaments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    454,    for an imperforate settable material receiving backer with attached
    filaments or mesh.


CLS 52/677
TXT Structure under subclass 633 including a distance defining means which (1)
    spaces a member from a surface, usually that of a form used to shape the
    plastic-to-rigid, water-settable material or (2) which spaces one elongated
    reinforcing member from another, e.g., reinforcing rods from each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    344+,   for a settable material backer fixed to a furring, joist or stud,
    including means spacing the backer from its support.

    649.7,  for a cage type member with spacer positioner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclass 135 for road
    reinforcement with a road chair and subclass 136 for road chair structure,
    per se.


CLS 52/678
TXT Structure under subclass 677 including support means for adjusting the
    distance of a reinforcing member from a base.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122.1+, for a hoist or handle means for raising or lowering a building
    relative to the earth or a barrier or load-bearing building component
    relative to another.


CLS 52/679
TXT Structure under subclass 677 shaped to penetrate a mold or base member and
    having a feature which determines the depth of penetration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    361,    for a penetrating type fastener holding a settable material backer
    to a furring, joist or stud.

    700,    for an anchor or tie with an integral feature for penetrating a
    form.


CLS 52/680
TXT Structure under subclass 679 comprising a headed end opposite to a
    penetrating end, which headed end includes a hook-like projection integral
    with the shank.


CLS 52/681
TXT Structure under subclass 679 including a headed, penetrating type fastener
    and a separate spacer or stop through which the fastener passes.


CLS 52/682
TXT Structure under subclass 681 in which the stop includes a cup, bulb or
    U-shaped component which the principal fastener element traverses axially.


CLS 52/683
TXT Structure under subclass 681 in which the stop or spacer is a mass of
    material whose depth is substantial relative to its longitudinal and
    lateral dimensions.


CLS 52/684
TXT Structure under subclass 679 including a member which is moved or deformed
    at least in part to overlie the supported reinforcing member to positively
    secure it to distance defining means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    686,    687+, and 719, for a similar device which may be simply flexed,
    rather than permanently deformed, to provide a friction grip.


CLS 52/685
TXT Structure under subclass 684 particularly adapted to support crossing
    primary reinforcing members at their intersection.


CLS 52/686
TXT Structure under subclass 679 particularly adapted to support two crossing
    or intersecting primary reinforcing members at the intersection thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    685,    for a similar device in which a portion is moved or deformed to a
    final position.


CLS 52/687
TXT Structure under subclass 679 including plural seats or recesses for the
    reinforcement member or plural supporting feet for the distance defining
    means.


CLS 52/688
TXT Structure under subclass 687 in which plural units having plural feet or
    seats are attached to or formed by a separate elongated member at spaced
    intervals, e.g., a spacer-positioner spaced along a connecting rod.


CLS 52/689
TXT Structure under subclass 687 comprising a single seat for engaging a
    primary reinforced member, including a single seat formed by two spaced
    sections which cooperate to form, in effect, a single seat.


CLS 52/690
TXT Structure under subclass 633 including primary parallel longitudinal
    members (chords) held in spaced relationship by connecting or spacing
    means, the space between the primary members being void, e.g., a truss or
    ladder-like structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    634+,   for parallel members having spacing means integral therein.

    656.1+, for crossing or intersecting elongated members which form a frame
    enclosing an area.

    660+,   for fabric or lattice type openwork of indefinite extent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 897.35  for process of assembling beams and
    girders.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 194+ for similar
    openwork used primarily for climbing.


CLS 52/691
TXT Structure under subclass 690 wherein the chords and spacing means form a
    rigid framework with one chord having a web section or terminal portion
    inclined relative to the other chord.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    639+,   for a truss which as a whole is peaked or curved.


CLS 52/692
TXT Structure under subclass 690 wherein the chords and webs comprise a rigid
    framework with a plurality of coextensively abutted members forming a chord.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    642,    for a curvilinear or peaked truss with a laminated member.

    730.1+, for a composite shaft of fully overlapped composite sections.

    736.2,  for an intersecting elongated composite structure with an axially
    intersecting member.


CLS 52/693
TXT Structure under subclass 690 wherein the spacing (web) means include a
    member which joins a shaft at an angle other than 90_.


CLS 52/694
TXT Structure under subclass 693 wherein the spacing means comprises a single,
    integral sinuous or zig-zag member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    650.1+  and 651.01+, for a three-dimensional openwork of inclined struts
    meeting at intermediate runners.


CLS 52/695
TXT Structure under subclass 693 provided with an additional web member which
    crosses the inclined member.


CLS 52/696
TXT Structure under subclass 690 in which the elongated members are connected
    to and spaced from each other by a sheet-metal strip which has been shaped
    to strengthen it or a sheet-metal component which is bent to form a
    connecting feature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    634+,   for truss with unitary chord and web, e.g., one piece sheet metal.


CLS 52/697
TXT Device under subclass 633 comprising an intersecting member and a brace
    triangularly related to a shaft and the member, e.g., a diagonally braced
    telephone pole and a cross arm.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for a discrete support for a wire or rail on a cross-arm which may
    be diagonally braced.


CLS 52/698
TXT Structure under the class definition specialized to means anchored in a
    previously erected barrier or load-bearing construction which means
    functions to attach an external element or which is incorporated into such
    structures as they are erected to prevent such components from parting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    Appropriate subclass above for various constructions utilizing a tie or
    anchor which differs in kinds from the components held, particularly:

    27+,    for means holding a disparate article to a building construction.

    223.12+, for a tie compressibly stressing abutting modules.

    248,    for a hoop tie around a cylindrical barrier.

    285.1+, for an intersection of barriers utilizing a disparate material tie.

    295,    for a concrete footing with a pro-jecting tie.

    344+,   for a settable material, e.g., plaster, backer fixed to a furring,
    joist or stud.

    364+,   for a construction with a component specialized to receiving a nail
    or screw.

    378+,   for a cast monolith held to a dissimilar section by a tie.

    410,    for components separated by a lamina  which is crossed by a tie.

    426     and 428+, for a construction of laterally related bonded units and
    a tie.

    463+    and 466+, for a construction utilizing a bridger strip and tie.

    489.1+, for a panel held laterally of a shaft by a clip type fastener.

    506.01+, for a residual structure wherein a facer is held to another
    structure differing in kind from the facer.

    519+    and 543+, for a lapped multiplanar (shingle type) surfacing
    utilizing a fastener or anchor.

    562+,   for laterally related courses held by a tie.

    582.1+, for panels held edgewise by a dissimilar joining means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., appropriate subclasses for
    fasteners there provided for and of more general utility.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 3.3+ for wall, floor or panel mounted
    outlet or junction box receptacle.

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses, for an anchored support not
    specialized to building construction.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses
    15+ for expanding anchors.  The line with Class 411 is:  Class 411 takes
    (1) an anchor and insert, per se, which is adapted to be positioned in a
    preformed opening in a base and subsequently secured therein; (2) a base
    and anchor where the base or opening there is merely identified by name and
    where no preshaped structural modification of the walls forming the opening
    cooperating with surface configuration of the insert is recited; and (3) an
    anchor, per se, capable of being frictionally retained in a preformed
    opening or bonded within a base.  Class 52 takes (1) an anchor and insert,
    per se, when there is recited specific means specialized for intimately
    bonding with a settable material or attachment to or locking with a
    subsurface member; and (2) an anchor and a structural modification of a
    base other than a mere opening to accommodate the base.


CLS 52/699
TXT Structure under subclass 698 including a feature providing securement to or
    support by a form against which settable material is cast.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 207 for in- situ construction engineering
    mold adjuncts which facilitate the mold operation.


CLS 52/700
TXT Structure under subclass 699 including an integral securing means for
    penetrating a form member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    361+,   for penetrating means fastening settable material backer to a
    furring, joist or stud.


CLS 52/701
TXT Structure under subclass 699 in which the securing means for engaging the
    form is a separate element and projects from a socket.


CLS 52/702
TXT Structure under subclass 698 including a leg portion extending downwardly
    along the face of the base structure and from the lower portion of which a
    cantilever seat projects for supporting the separate element, usually to
    support a joist from a wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    289,    for a construction having spaced sustainers intersecting another
    construction, e.g., multiple joists set into a wall of which the joist
    anchor of this subclass is usually a part.


CLS 52/703
TXT Structure under subclass 698 so formed that it passes through the base
    structure thus revealing its opposed ends.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223.1+, for a construction with a precompressing feature, e.g., concrete
    under compression applied by tie-rods.

    353,    for a tie crossing opposed backer for a settable material.

    410,    for a tie crossing dividing lamina.

    520+,   for a multiplanar lapped surface with anchor or fastener extending
    through a joint between sections.


CLS 52/704
TXT Structure under subclass 698 including a socket forming member, i.e., one
    having walls or flanges defining a space open on at least one side, said
    space receiving the support for the separate element.


CLS 52/705
TXT Structure under subclass 704 including a helical feature on the exterior of
    the socket member for holding it in the base structure.


CLS 52/706
TXT Structure under subclass 704 including a rod traversing the socket and
    passing across it inside of the base of the socket.


CLS 52/707
TXT Structure under subclass 704 including a discrete member attached to the
    anchor and embedded in the base structure.


CLS 52/708
TXT Structure under subclass 704 including separate, but usually attached, wall
    and base members which form the socket.


CLS 52/709
TXT Structure under subclass 704 including stops against which the element held
    can be selectively positioned.


CLS 52/710
TXT Structure under subclass 704 including spaced parallel supporting edges
    defining an elongated opening across the face of the base support, i.e.,
    rail type.


CLS 52/711
TXT Structure under subclass 704 including an internal stop which engages a
    head or nut on the inserted end of the member held, which stop is in the
    form of (1) a separate discrete element which grips the head or nut of said
    member or (2) the socket sidewalls are converging or are shaped to form
    internal discrete portions with parts (1) or (2) holding said member
    intermediate the terminal ends of said socket.


CLS 52/712
TXT Structure under subclass 698 including a connector for holding two adjacent
    components of a building construction from parting which connector is made
    of wire or nonrigid sheet material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    357+    and 361+, for a clip or fastener specialized to holding settable
    material backer to a furring, joist or stud.

    440,    for a separable dissimilar joining means between modules and see
    the search notes in subclass 582 for other constructions utilizing ties.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 544+ for
    indefinite-length metallic wires, etc.


CLS 52/713
TXT Structure under subclass 712 made in two distinct sections each providing
    means for ready assembly in connected relation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    428,    for a separable bonded tie between modules.

    565,    for a sectional tie having portions embedded within each of two
    laterally spaced modules.

    583,    for a module having an embedded tie joined to a similar module by
    separable means.


CLS 52/714
TXT Structure under subclass 712 including a one piece member having terminal
    parts one of which is of different form from the other so as to connect to
    or bond with materials or structural shapes of differing characteristics.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 227+ for apparatus
    particularly adapted for charging or discharging a facility which comprises
    one or more sites for the parking of wheeled vehicles.


CLS 52/715
TXT Structure under subclass 712 including a sheet form member having parts
    extending laterally of a plane section of the sheet and in opposed
    directions away from said plane section, which parts serve to hold the
    components in a fixed spatial relationship to either.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370,    for a sheetlike holder engaging opposite sides of a ground member.

    413,    for a dividing lamina with integral projections on a planar face.

    447+,   for a plaster type backer of separate sections holding a sheet form
    clip.

    584,    for a clamp type means joining modules.


CLS 52/716.1
TXT IN SITU ATTACHED-TYPE CHANNEL OR TRIM STRIP (E.G., EDGING):

    Structure under the class definition including a strip-like channel or trim
    member, which in use is attached to a pre-erected face of a substructure
    (e.g., a wall).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179,    for a stair nosing.

    211+,   for an architrave, i.e., molding strip on wall around a door or
    window opening.

    220.1+, for a service duct within a barrier.

    241+,   for a baseboard for a partition.

    287.1+, for a corner type channel and trim member.

    290,    for a structure of baseboards and a vertical sustainer therebetween.

    312,    for an ornamental trim strip having an inlay.

    459+,   for a nonsustaining bridger strip over a juncture of panels.

    601,    for a stone-like module with a dissimilar material edging.

    656.1+, for an open frame with a defined corner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 475.1+ for an in situ
    attached closure seal (e.g., striker gasket or weatherstrip).

    248,    Supports, subclass 345 for a scuff plate or bumper attached to an
    article of furniture.


CLS 52/716.2
TXT Water-guard:

    Subject matter under subclass 716.1 which comprises material or is
    constructed in a manner such that water drainage or protection from
    moisture is provided.

    (1)     Note.  Exemplary in this subclass are swimming pool copings and
    sink trims.


CLS 52/716.3
TXT Upholstery trim:

    Subject matter under subclass 716.1 which is used as a finishing strip for
    the plush of furniture or a vehicle (e.g., beading)


CLS 52/716.4
TXT With separate means attaching to substructure:

    Structure under subclass 716.3 including means distinct from the
    substructure or channel or trim strip member which means acts to fasten the
    member to the substructure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., particularly subclasses 289+ for
    molding fasteners, per se.


CLS 52/716.5
TXT Vehicle trim:

    Subject matter under subclass 716.1  which is used as finishing on the hard
    surface of a vehicle (e.g., exterior or interior brightwork).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    716.3,  for vehicle upholstery trim.


CLS 52/716.6
TXT Interengaging fastener and strip edges or flanges (e.g., snap-on type):

    Structure under subclass 716.5 including a fastener which engages either
    internal edges of or flanges on the channel or trim strip and attaches the
    latter to a substructure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., particularly subclasses 289+ for
    molding fasteners, per se.


CLS 52/716.7
TXT Having resilient-type anchor (e.g., spring clip):

    Subject matter under subclass 716.6 wherein the fastener is held by a
    deformable retainer which is easily pressed into a hole or recess in the
    substructure.


CLS 52/716.8
TXT Panel gripping channel:

    Subject matter under subclass 716.1  comprising a U-shaped strip which is
    retained over the edge of a panel by tension or friction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    716.5,  for panel gripping channel trim used in or on vehicles.

    717.01, for panel gripping channel trim used with portals, especially
    windows.


CLS 52/717.01
TXT Portal or closure trim:

    Subject matter under subclass 716.1  which comprises finishing for an
    opening barrier such as a door, window, or the perimeter of said opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211+,   for finish strip on barrier or panel for an architrave.


CLS 52/717.02
TXT Thermal break:

    Subject matter under subclass 717.01 wherein the trim functions as an
    insulating barrier or seal.


CLS 52/717.03
TXT Flexible strip:

    Subject matter under subclass 716.1  wherein the strip includes material
    which is easily deformed to accommodate any geometrical configuration.


CLS 52/717.04
TXT Multilayer composite:

    Subject matter under subclass 716.1  wherein the strip or channel includes
    laminae of different material (e.g., wood and metal).


CLS 52/717.05
TXT Polymeric:

    Subject matter under subclass 716.1 wherein the strip or channel is
    comprised of a synthetic plastic-like material.


CLS 52/717.06
TXT Metallic:

    Subject matter under subclass 716.1 wherein the strip or channel is
    comprised of metal.


CLS 52/718.01
TXT With separate means attaching to substructure:

    Structure under subclass 716.1 including means distinct from the
    substructure or channel or trim strip member which means acts to fasten the
    member to the substructure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., particularly subclasses 289+ for
    molding fasteners, per se.


CLS 52/718.02
TXT Having rigid shank-type anchor:

    Subject matter under subclass 718.01  wherein the fastener is a nail,
    rivet, screw, etc.

    (1)     Note.  The fastener has an inflexible stem which must be driven,
    peened, or torqued into the substructure.


CLS 52/718.03
TXT Having resilient-type anchor:

    Subject matter under subclass 718.01 wherein the fastener is a deformable
    retainer which is easily pressed into a hole or recess in the substructure
    (e.g., spring clip).


CLS 52/718.04
TXT Interengaging fastener and strip edges or flanges (e.g., snap-on type):

    Structure under subclass 718.01 wherein the fastener includes means which
    engage either internal edges of or flanges on the channel or trim strip and
    attaches the latter to a substructure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., particularly subclasses 289+ for
    molding fasteners, per se.


CLS 52/718.05
TXT Having rigid shank-type anchor:

    Subject matter under subclass 718.04  wherein the fastener is a nail,
    rivet, screw, etc.

    (1)     Note.  The fastener has an inflexible stem which must be driven,
    peened, or torqued into the substructure.


CLS 52/718.06
TXT Having resilient-type anchor:

    Subject matter under subclass 718.04  wherein the fastener is held by a
    deformable retainer which is easily pressed into a hole or recess in the
    substructure (e.g., spring clip).


CLS 52/718.07
TXT Wire type:

    Subject matter under subclass 718.06  wherein the deformable member of the
    retainer is an extremely thin rod-like element.


CLS 52/719
TXT Structures under the class definition including a connecting fastener
    having means engaging two crossing or intersecting primary reinforcing
    members and connecting the two together in that relationship, usually such
    an arrangement of concrete reinforcing bars.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 346+ for a joint between crossed
    rods comprising interfitting rod portions and subclass 400 for a joint
    between crossed rods in general.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 598 for metallic
    stock material having a T, I, or X- shaped cross-section.


CLS 52/720.1
TXT SHAFT (I.E., ELONGATED RIGID STRUCTURE):

    Structure under the class definition including a rigid member having a
    limited closed periphery and which is greatly elongated relative to any
    lateral dimension.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for shaft supporting a disparate article.

    103+,   for a marker or monument.

    108,    for a reversible flexible and rigid strip-like unit.

    146+,   for a vertical structure with diagonal brace or guy extending to
    its base.

    155+,   for a shaft having an earth piercing feature.

    170,    for a shaft reinforcement adjacent the earth's surface.

    223.1+, for a pre-compressed (i.e., prestressed structure).

    296+,   for a footing with a supported shaft.

    300+,   for a vertical structure with terminal cap or bearing plate.

    364+,   for a composite member with means receiving a penetrating fastener.

    489.1+, for a shaft with a separable retainer for a facer panel.

    633+,   for an openwork structure including a tower or mast.

    712+,   for a sheet or wire tie.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    256,    Fences, appropriate subclass for a post with means for retaining a
    fence, wire, or rail.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 781+ for land vehicle frames.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 231+ for elongated
    columnar structures (e.g., piles, piers, etc.) driven or otherwise placed
    in the earth for the purpose of providing a stable base for a
    superstructure.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 364+ for a
    residual rod-like material not specialized to use as a component of an in
    situ erected building (e.g., poles, posts, columns, beams, reinforcing
    rods) and see the notes in that subclass for other rod-like or strand-like
    structures.


CLS 52/720.2
TXT Baluster type (e.g., newel post, spindle, etc.):

    Structure under subclass 720.1 that includes the newel post or supporting
    spindles of a handrail (e.g., stairway balustrade).


CLS 52/720.3
TXT Security bar:

    Subject matter under subclass 720.1 wherein the shaft's structure is
    configured to prohibit entry or egress (e.g., to a jail cell, vault, etc.).


CLS 52/721.1
TXT Stone-like Component (e.g., concrete, etc.):

    Structure under subclass 720.1 which includes as a component, stone or a
    settable material (e.g., concrete, plaster, asphalt, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223.1+, for a ``prestressed" structure, often elongated concrete members.

    251+,   for a cast stone-like member forming an intersection.

    299+,   for a concrete type footing.

    596+,   for a stone-like module (e.g., concrete block).

    730.2,  for a metallic rod (e.g., concrete reinforcement).


CLS 52/721.2
TXT Upright:

    Structure under subclass 721.1 wherein the longitudinal axis of the shaft
    is vertical when in its utilitarian position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    726.3+, upright comprising end-to-end connected sections.


CLS 52/721.3
TXT Sustainer:

    Structure under subclass 721.2 wherein the shaft is configured to resist
    axial force and is intended to be used as a load-bearing unit.


CLS 52/721.4
TXT Having outer layer or shell:

    Structure under subclass 721.3 having an outer covering of a material or
    structural feature differing from that of the enclosed portion of the shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    269,    for a wall enclosed usable space with a pre-formed dissimilar
    material lining or shell.

    423,    for a similar construction wherein a module is bonded together by
    an internal cast in situ section.

    736.3+,737.4+, and 738.1, for a shaft with a dissimilar material shell or
    facing without a stone-like component


CLS 52/721.5
TXT Partial sleeve or collar:

    Structure under subclass 721.4 including a covering which circumferentially
    envelopes only a portion of the longitudinal dimension of the shaft.


CLS 52/722.1
TXT Conduit:

    Structure under subclass 721.2 wherein the intended purpose of the shaft is
    to convey a fluid (e.g., stack, well curbing, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    726.5,  a chimney or flue comprising end-to-end connected sections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 177 for conduit structure, per
    se.

    454,    Ventilation, subclass 1 for chimneys or stacks.


CLS 52/723.1
TXT Having shell-like outer layer:

    Structure under subclass 721.2 having an outer covering of a material or
    structural feature surrounding the shaft which differs from that of the
    enclosed portion of the shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    269,    for a wall enclosed usable space with a pre-formed dissimilar
    material lining or shell.

    423,    for a similar construction wherein a module is bonded together by
    an internal cast in situ section.

    721.4+, for a similar construction shaped to resist transverse loading.

    736.3+,737.4+, and 738.1, for a shaft with a dissimilar material shell or
    facing without a stone-like component.


CLS 52/723.2
TXT Partial sleeve (e.g., collar, etc.):

    Structure under subclass 723.1 including a covering which circumferentially
    envelopes only a portion of the longitudinal dimension of the shaft.


CLS 52/724.1
TXT Having feature resisting transverse loading (e.g.,  beam):

    Structure under subclass 721.1 comprising an elongated, rigid construction
    of great length compared to its width and depth which includes a nonuniform
    or eccentric reinforcement, or is particularly shaped in cross-section to
    add rigidity and resist force applied transversely to its longitudinal axis
    (e.g., girder, joist, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    649.2+, an array of reinforcement members for a concrete beam.


CLS 52/724.2
TXT Tension member having attached projection:

    Structure under subclass 724.1 wherein the feature resisting transverse
    loading is a member having tensile strength, which member has attached to
    an end an element (e.g., shear member) interconnected by mechanical means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    740.7,  for a tension member having an attached projection.


CLS 52/724.3
TXT Lattice-type structure:

    Structure under subclass 724.1 which features regular patterned spaces
    along the length of its physiognomy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    650.1+, for openwork beams which are not stone-like.


CLS 52/724.4
TXT Having arch feature:

    Structure under subclass 724.1 wherein the longitudinal dimension of the
    shaft describes an arc or the shaft has arcuate features within it (e.g.,
    scalloped, etc.).


CLS 52/724.5
TXT Having outer layer or shell:

    Structure under subclass 724.1 having an outer covering of a material or
    structural feature differing from that of the enclosed portion of the shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    269,    for a wall enclosed usable space with a preformed dissimilar
    material lining or shell.

    423,    for a similar construction wherein a module is bonded together by
    an internal cast in situ section.

    736.3+,737.4+, and 738.1, for a shaft with a dissimilar material shell or
    facing without a stone-like component.


CLS 52/726.1
TXT End-to-end connected sections:

    Structure under subclass 720.1 wherein the shaft has more than one axially
    aligned section, there being a fastener or configuration at their juncture
    to hold them aligned.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    632,    for an axially extensible shaft or openwork.

    738.1+, for a structure of axially aligned sections held by a coextensive
    shell or core.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for rod-like members
    connected together and see the reference thereto in the class definition of
    this class (52).  For example, this subclass takes connected shafts having
    features for resisting bending stress and other connected rod arrangements
    having features other than those merely fastening together ends of rod-like
    members.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 250 for sections of
    dissimilar materials and subclass 251 for a foundation pile formed of
    end-to-end connected sections of similar material.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 411.1 and 615+
    for nonmetallic and metallic composites, respectively, defined in terms of
    the composition of their components.


CLS 52/726.2
TXT Beam:

    Subject matter under subclass 726.1 wherein the shaft is intended to be
    used, when in place, as a horizontal, elongate, load supporting unit.


CLS 52/726.3
TXT Upright:

    Subject matter under subclass 726.1 wherein the longitudinal axis of the
    shaft is vertical when in its final position.


CLS 52/726.4
TXT Utility pole:

    Subject matter under subclass 726.3 wherein its intended use is to support
    an electrical conduit or fixture.


CLS 52/726.5
TXT Chimney, flue, etc.:

    Upright structure under subclass 726.3 which is intended to function as an
    outlet for a noxious gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218,    for a flue with gaseous fluid directing feature.

    219,    for flue connection to a structure.

    722.1,  for a stone-like conduit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    454,    Ventilation, subclass 1 for chimney or stack structure.


CLS 52/729.1
TXT I-beam:

    Structure under subclass 720.1 including at least two flange members joined
    by a web member, which provide a cross-section of the shaft in the shape of
    an ``I" or ``H".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    737.1,  for a beam with a cross-section which is different from an ``I" or
    ``H".


CLS 52/729.2
TXT Compound construction:

    Structure under subclass 729.1 wherein the web and flange of the shaft are
    comprised of separate members which are joined together or the web or
    flange of the shaft is comprised of plural members.


CLS 52/729.3
TXT Corrugated web:

    Subject matter under subclass 729.2 wherein the shaft's web is undulant.


CLS 52/729.4
TXT Wooden component:

    Structure under subclass 729.2 wherein the I-beam includes timber or a
    timber product.


CLS 52/729.5
TXT Folded sheet material:

    Structure under subclass 729.1 which is made from flat stock material which
    is bent along a fold line.


CLS 52/730.1
TXT Longitudinally related striplike sections:

    Structure under subclass 720.1 including two or more elongated members
    extending side by side along their lengthwise dimensions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    690+,   for an openwork structure including two or more coextensive spaced
    members.

    729,    for an I-beam type shaft.

    736.3+, 737.4+, and 738.1, for another shaft construction with a dissimilar
    shell or facing.


CLS 52/730.2
TXT Reinforcement for settable material:

    Subject matter under subclass 730.1, wherein the longitudinal elements are
    intended to be imbedded in a substance, usually concrete, for the purpose
    of adding tensile strength.

    (1)     Note.  These longitudinal elements are commonly known as "rebar".


CLS 52/730.3
TXT Closure related (e.g., stile, sash bar, mullion, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 730.1, wherein the longitudinally related
    strip-like sections are components of a closure frame.


CLS 52/730.4
TXT Forms hollow enclosure (e.g., tubular):

    Subject matter under subclass 730.3, wherein the cross-section of the
    assembly is hollow.


CLS 52/730.5
TXT Having interlocking feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 730.4, wherein each component is constructed
    in a fashion which permits it to be interfitted with another component for
    facilitation of assembly or disassembly.


CLS 52/730.6
TXT Having angular component (e.g., having L, T, Z cross-section):

    Structure under subclass 730.1 wherein one or more of the elongated members
    have a flange running along its length.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 603 for metallic
    stock having an L-shaped cross-section.


CLS 52/730.7
TXT Wood:

    Subject matter under subclass 730.1  which comprises laminated wood.


CLS 52/731.1
TXT Structural support:

    Subject matter under subclass 730.1 wherein the elongated structure is
    intended to support a load.


CLS 52/731.2
TXT Forms hollow enclosure (e.g., box beam):

    Structure under subclass 730.1 wherein the elongated members are joined
    together at their longitudinal edges to form a hollow enclosure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    648.1+,for a three dimensional space surrounding structure (e.g., box type
    truss, mast, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, for tubular structures of more general
    application.  Features considered suitable for Class 52 include: a tubular
    structure with attached features or discrete projecting portions having a
    rigidifying function other than merely forming or supporting the tube wall
    (e.g., a tube with support means for structural elements such as a beam,
    panel, etc., means such as ribs or defined shapes acting to resist
    transverse loading, open structure such as box girders, or masts, etc.).


CLS 52/731.3
TXT Having interlocking feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 731.2 wherein the elongated members which
    form the hollow shaft are constructed so as to interfit, thereby
    facilitating assembly or disassembly.


CLS 52/731.4
TXT Upright:

    Subject matter under subclass 731.2 wherein the longitudinal axis of the
    hollow shaft is vertical when in its final position.


CLS 52/731.5
TXT Partition support (e.g., stud, furring, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 731.4 wherein the upright hollow shaft is
    intended to have a vertical barrier attached to it.


CLS 52/731.6
TXT For vehicle:

    Subject matter under subclass 731.2 wherein the hollow shaft is intended to
    be used as a support in a vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, for a vehicle frame.


CLS 52/731.7
TXT Having angular component (e.g., having L, T, Z cross-section):

    Structure under subclass 730.1 wherein one or more of the elongated members
    have a flange running along its length.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 603 for metallic
    stock having an L-shaped cross-section.


CLS 52/731.8
TXT Upright:

    Subject matter under subclass 731.7 wherein the longitudinal axis of the
    elongated structure is vertical when it is in its final position.


CLS 52/731.9
TXT Partition support (e.g., stud, furring, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 731.8 wherein the upright support is intended
    to have a vertical barrier attached to it.


CLS 52/732.1
TXT Forms hollow enclosure:

    Structure under subclass 730.1 in which the members are joined together at
    their longitudinal edges to form a hollow shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    648.1+,for a three dimensional space surrounding structure (e.g., box type
    truss, mast, etc.).

    730.4+,for closure related strips which are tubular.

    731.2+,for tubular structural supports.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, for tubular structures of more general
    application.  Features considered suitable for Class 52 include: a tubular
    structure with attached features or discrete projecting portions having a
    rigidifying function other than merely forming or supporting the tube wall
    (e.g., a tube with support means for structural elements such as a beam,
    panel, etc., means such as ribs or defined shapes acting to resist
    transverse loading, open structure such as box girders, or masts, etc.).


CLS 52/732.2
TXT Having interlocking feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 732.1 wherein the elongated members which
    form the hollow shaft are constructed so as to interfit, thereby
    facilitating assembly or disassembly.


CLS 52/732.3
TXT Upright:

    Subject matter under subclass 732.1 wherein the longitudinal axis of the
    hollow shaft is vertical when in its final position.


CLS 52/733.1
TXT Ceiling hanger:

    Structure under subclass 720.1 wherein the shaft is intended to be located
    and configured to support an interior overhead panel, tile, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    506.06+,a ceiling hanger combined with the element which it supports.


CLS 52/733.2
TXT Stud, furring-strip, lath-strip, etc.:

    Structure under subclass 720.1 wherein the shaft is configured and intended
    to be used as a sustaining member for a wall panel or covering.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    731.4+,731.9, and 732.3, for related structure comprising longitudinally
    related strip-like sections.

    792.1+  and 793.1+, for wall panels having integrated sustaining members.


CLS 52/733.3
TXT Having projection which is one piece with shaft:

    Structure under subclass 733.2 wherein the shaft includes an angularly
    extending portion formed by severing some of the shaft material and bending
    it to provide a projection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    740.6,  for a tension member (e.g., re-bar) having a projection.


CLS 52/733.4
TXT Curtain wall joint:

    Structure under subclass 733.2 which is configured and intended to be used
    to connect abutting wall or partition panels.


CLS 52/734.1
TXT For closure or closure portal:

    Structure under subclass 720.1 wherein the shaft is intended to be used as
    a component in a door, window, skylight, etc., or the peripheral enclosure
    thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    656.2+, for portal or closure framing.

    717.01+,for portal or closure trim strip.

    730.3+, for structure comprising longitudinally related strip-like sections.


CLS 52/734.2
TXT Window came, glazing bar, etc.:

    Structure under subclass 734.1 comprising a slender grooved bar whose
    intended purpose is to hold together the panes in a stained glass or
    latticework window.


CLS 52/735.1
TXT For vehicle:

    Structure under subclass 720.1 wherein the shaft is intended to be used as
    a component in a conveyance (e.g., automobile, truck, airplane, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    731.6,  for structural support for vehicle comprising longitudinally
    related strip-like sections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 117+ for beams used in an aircraft
    structure.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 781+ for land vehicle frames.


CLS 52/736.1
TXT Upright (e.g., post, pole, etc.):

    Structure under subclass 720.1 wherein the longitudinal axis of the shaft
    is vertical when in its utilitarian position and said shaft is generally
    considered to be free-standing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103+,   for a marker or monument.

    146+,   for a vertical structure with diagonal brace or guy extending to
    its base.

    155+,   for a shaft having an earth piercing feature.

    300+,   for a vertical structure with terminal cap or bearing plate.

    651.01+,for an openwork structure including a tower or mast.

    721.2+, for an upright structure featuring a stone-like component (e.g.,
    concrete).

    726.3+, for an upright structure which comprises end-to-end connected
    sections.

    737.1+, for load-bearing uprights.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    256,    Fences, appropriate subclass for a post with means for retaining a
    fence, wire or rail.


CLS 52/736.2
TXT Having attached intersecting member (e.g., cross-arm):

    Structure under subclass 736.1 having connected thereto, at least one
    member extending at an angle to the principal axis of said structure (e.g.,
    cross-arm).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    651.02+,for an openwork structure having a line support.

    726.4,  for a utility pole constructed of end-to-end sections.


CLS 52/736.3
TXT Having shell-like outer layer:

    Structure under subclass 736.1 having an outer covering of a material or
    structural feature surrounding the shaft which differs from that of the
    enclosed portion of the shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    269,    for a wall enclosed usable space with a pre-formed dissimilar
    material lining or shell.

    423,    for a similar construction wherein a module is bonded together by
    an internal cast in situ section.

    721.1+, for a shaft with a dissimilar material shell or facing with a
    stone-like component.

    737.4+, for a similar construction shaped to resist transverse loading.


CLS 52/736.4
TXT Partial sleeve (e.g., collar, etc.):

    Structure under subclass 736.3 including a covering which circumferentially
    envelopes only a portion of the longitudinal dimension of the shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170,    for a shaft with reinforcing means defined as being related to the
    earth's surface.

    721.5   and 723.2, for a concrete or stone-like shaft having a collar.


CLS 52/737.1
TXT Girder, column, etc.:

    Structure under subclass 720.1 wherein the shaft is designed to resist
    transverse or axial force and is intended to be used as a load-bearing unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    649.2+,650.1+, and 651.07+, for three-dimensional openwork shafts.

    721.1+, for concrete girders and columns.

    729.1+, for girders in the shape of an ``I" or ``H".


CLS 52/737.2
TXT Plural or composite having attached intersecting member:

    Structure under subclass 737.1 including (a) spaced elongated members or
    (b) a shaft which is a composite of elongated sections held in edge-to-edge
    relationship, said structure (a) or (b) having attached thereto at least
    one member extending at an angle to the principal axis of the structures or
    composite columns supporting a beam or girder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290,    for opposed strips (e.g., baseboards on opposite sides of a stud.

    633+,   for openwork, a construction which delineates an open area;
    particularly subclasses 660+ for a fabric or lattice type open-work (e.g.,
    grilles or grating).


CLS 52/737.3
TXT Wood/metal composite:

    Structure under subclass 737.1 wherein the shaft comprises the combination
    of wood and metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    729.4,  for an I-beam comprising wood and metal.


CLS 52/737.4
TXT Having shell-like outer layer:

    Structure under subclass 737.1 having an outer covering of a material or
    structural feature differing from that of the enclosed portion of the shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    269,    for a wall enclosed usable space with a preformed dissimilar
    material lining or shell.

    423,    for a similar construction wherein a module is bonded together by
    an internal cast in situ section.

    721.1+, for a shaft with a dissimilar material shell or facing with a
    stone-like component.


CLS 52/737.5
TXT Partial sleeve (e.g., collar, etc.):

    Structure under subclass 737.4 including a covering which circumferentially
    envelopes only a portion of the longitudinal dimension of the shaft.


CLS 52/737.6
TXT Box-type, channel, or angle, cross-section:

    Structure under subclass 737.1 having a hollow or a C, U, or L shaped
    cross-section.


CLS 52/738.1
TXT Having shell-like outer layer:

    Structure under subclass 720.1 having an outer covering of a material or
    structural feature differing from that of the enclosed portion of the shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    269,    for a wall enclosed usable space with a pre-formed dissimilar
    material lining or shell.

    423,    for a similar construction wherein a module is bonded together by
    an internal cast in situ section.

    723.1+  and 724.5, for a shaft with a dissimilar material shell or facing
    with a stone-like component.

    736.3+, for a free-standing shaft with a dissimilar material shell or
    facing with a stone-like component.

    737.4+, for a load-bearing shaft with a dissimilar material shell or facing
    with a stone-like component.


CLS 52/739.1
TXT Strut:

    Structure under subclass 720.1 wherein the shaft is configured to be used
    as a stiffener or bracing member within or exterior to a primary shaft.

    (1)     Note.  Struts are generally relatively short compared to other
    shafts in this section of subject matter.


CLS 52/740.1
TXT Tension member (e.g., re-bar):

    Structure under subclass 720.1 wherein the shaft is a thin bar or rod
    having tensile strength and which is intended to be used to increase
    tensile strength of a composite construction, usually in a settable
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    649.1+, for an openwork array or bundle of tension members.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 544+ for
    re-bar, per se.


CLS 52/740.2
TXT Embossed or dimpled:

    Structure under subclass 740.1 having node-like protuberances or
    depressions.


CLS 52/740.3
TXT Ribbed:

    Structure under subclass 740.1 having elongated, raised ridges or grooves.


CLS 52/740.4
TXT Longitudinal:

    Structure under subclass 740.3 wherein the ridges or grooves extend
    parallel to the longitudinal axis of the rod.


CLS 52/740.5
TXT Spiral:

    Structure under subclass 740.3 wherein the ridges wind helically about the
    surface of the rod.

    (1)     Note.  A single spiral ridge is included here.


CLS 52/740.6
TXT Having projection which is one piece with shaft:

    Structure under subclass 740.1 wherein the shaft includes an angularly
    extending portion formed by severing some of the shaft material and bending
    it to provide a projection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 597 for metallic
    stock material having stuck-out projections.


CLS 52/740.7
TXT Mechanically attached or bonded:

    Structure under subclass 740.6 wherein a feature resisting transverse
    loading is a member having tensile strength, said member having attached to
    an end a projection (e.g., shear member) interconnected by mechanical means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334,    for a concrete barrier with a rib-type sustainer having shear means
    between the sustainer and barrier.

    724.2,  for a tension member with an attached projection which is imbedded
    in a shaft comprising a settable material.


CLS 52/740.8
TXT Sinuous curve type:

    Structure under subclass 740.1 having an undulating, generally sinuous
    configuration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    740.6,  for an axially twisted type rod.

    740.7,  for a rod with attached projections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 592 for metallic
    stock material which is helical or has a helical component.


CLS 52/740.9
TXT Axially twisted:

    Structure under subclass 740.1 which is twisted about its longitudinal axis
    to present a generally helical shape or edge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    740.8,  for a sinuously curved rod.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 592 for metallic
    stock material which is helical or has a helical component.


CLS 52/741.1
TXT PROCESSES:

    Processes under the class definition which are used in the construction and
    assembly of structures of this class and which are not provided for
    elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  Construction processes also include repair, alteration, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    749.1+, for a residual machine or implement specialized to in situ building
    construction and see search notes for exemplary other classes providing for
    such apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    14,     Bridges, subclasses 77.1+  for a process of erecting a bridge.

    29,     Metal Working, appropriate subclass, for a process not specialized
    to the manufacture, erection, or assembly of a building structure at the
    job site (e.g., erecting a wall, attaching a component to a previously
    erected barrier, connecting a floor to a wall, etc.) are in Class 52.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, for a composition and a process
    of making it there provided for.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 329+ for a process of assembly or
    manufacture of an article having at least one wood component, not peculiar
    to the manufacture or erection of a building structure at the job site.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    appropriate subclasses, particularly 31+ for a residual process of casting
    settable material and see the reference to Class 52 in section I of the
    class definition and in subclasses 31 and 35 thereof.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 72+ for a process
    of making, repairing, or maintaining  a roadway.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a residual stock material product of single or plural layer form not
    elsewhere provided for; see also section IV, A, 2  of the main definition
    or that class (428).


CLS 52/741.11
TXT Requiring soil work:

    Subject matter under subclass 741.1 wherein manipulation of the earth at
    the construction site is a requisite step (e.g., trenching, digging, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169.1+, for a structure having a defined relationship to the earth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 132+ for subject matter
    relating to tunnels and tunneling; subclasses 229+ for foundations and
    methods and apparatus for constructing the same; and subclasses 258+ for
    earth control structures and earth treatment methods.


CLS 52/741.12
TXT Container:

    Subject matter under subclass 741.11 wherein the construction requiring the
    soil work (e.g., tank, swimming pool, etc.) is intended to be used to
    confine a mass in storage.


CLS 52/741.13
TXT Wall:

    Subject matter under subclass 741.11 wherein the construction requiring the
    soil work is a vertical barrier.


CLS 52/741.14
TXT Upright erection:

    Subject matter under subclass 741.11 wherein the construction requiring the
    soil work is a free standing vertical structure (e.g., post, pole, etc.).


CLS 52/741.15
TXT Support:

    Subject matter under subclass 741.11 wherein the construction requiring the
    soil work is a foundation of another structure.


CLS 52/741.2
TXT Stair:

    Subject matter under subclass 741.1 wherein the process comprises a method
    of construction of a staircase, riser, tread, etc.


CLS 52/741.3
TXT Protection:

    Subject matter under subclass 741.1 wherein the process comprises a method
    of treatment or construction of a unit, whereby deterioration of said unit
    (e.g., by fire, corrosion, etc.) is prevented or retarded.


CLS 52/741.4
TXT Sealing:

    Subject matter under subclass 741.1 wherein the process comprises a method
    for controlling fluid flow, heat transfer, sound transmittal, etc.


CLS 52/741.41
TXT Cementitious surfacing:

    Subject matter under subclass 741.4 wherein a structure is covered with a
    layer of mortar or a mortar-like substance.


CLS 52/742.1
TXT Filling preformed cavity:

    Subject matter under subclass 741.1 relating to filling a void such as the
    interior of a hollow wall with material (e.g., insulation, concrete, etc.).


CLS 52/742.11
TXT For appliance:

    Subject matter under subclass 742.1 wherein the hollow wall is a component
    of a utility device such as an oven, refrigerator, or the like.


CLS 52/742.12
TXT Filler is sheet material:

    Subject matter under subclass 742.1 wherein the filler material is of a
    planar configuration (e.g., insulation paper or batting, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    793.11  and 794.1, for panels having insulation batts as a component.


CLS 52/742.13
TXT Filler material is flowable:

    Subject matter under subclass 742.1 wherein the filler is an aerated or
    pelletized material (e.g., insulation foam, granules, etc.).


CLS 52/742.14
TXT Filler is cementitious (e.g., concrete, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 742.13 wherein the filler is a dense,
    settable material (e.g., concrete, etc.).


CLS 52/742.15
TXT Fastening:

    Subject matter under subclass 742.14 wherein the filler material is
    intended to be used to set an anchor.


CLS 52/742.16
TXT Grouting or pointing:

    Subject matter under subclass 742.10 in which a settable material is
    injected into a void or the exposed surface of the injected material is
    finished off.


CLS 52/745.01
TXT Storage facility construction:

    Subject matter under subclass 741.1 wherein the process comprises a method
    of building a structure which is used for storage (e.g., tanks, silos,
    etc.).


CLS 52/745.02
TXT Using prefabricated subenclosure:

    Subject matter under subclass 745.2 wherein a preassembled subenclosure or
    substructure section or unit (e.g., room) of a building is formed at one
    location and lifted or moved to a final location in a building.


CLS 52/745.03
TXT Stacked:

    Subject matter under subclass 745.02 wherein a substructure section or unit
    is stacked on top of another one to form a multistory structure.


CLS 52/745.04
TXT Tower support:

    Subject matter under subclass 745.03 wherein a plurality of subenclosed
    building units are supported from a tower or framework.


CLS 52/745.05
TXT Barrier construction:

    Subject matter under subclass 741.1 wherein the process comprises a method
    for building a confining unit of a structure (e.g., floor, ceiling, etc.).


CLS 52/745.06
TXT Cover:

    Subject matter under subclass 745.05 wherein the barrier is commonly known
    as a roof.


CLS 52/745.07
TXT Arcuate:

    Subject matter under subclass 745.06 wherein the barrier is curved (e.g.,
    dome, hemicylindrical, etc.).


CLS 52/745.08
TXT Using prefabricated unit:

    Subject matter under subclass 745.07 wherein the construction comprises
    plural elements which are preformed or preassembled, and is then moved into
    a final position.


CLS 52/745.09
TXT Vertical:

    Subject matter under subclass 745.05 wherein the barrier is commonly known
    as a wall.


CLS 52/745.1
TXT Using prefabricated unit:

    Subject matter under subclass 745.09 wherein the construction comprises
    plural elements which are preformed or preassembled, and is then moved into
    a final position.


CLS 52/745.11
TXT Pivoted unit:

    Subject matter under subclass 745.1 wherein the unit is formed horizontally
    and tilted up, or down, into position.


CLS 52/745.12
TXT Support:

    Subject matter under subclass 745.09 wherein the process comprises a method
    of supporting a wall or portion thereof.


CLS 52/745.13
TXT Using prefabricated unit:

    Subject matter under subclass 745.05  wherein the construction comprises
    plural elements which are preformed or preassembled, and is then moved into
    a final position.


CLS 52/745.14
TXT Hinged unit:

    Subject matter under subclass 745.13 wherein separate units are joined by
    hinge elements.


CLS 52/745.15
TXT Portal or closure construction:

    Subject matter under subclass 741.1 wherein the process comprises a method
    of construction of (a) an opening in a barrier or (b) an adjunct thereto.


CLS 52/745.16
TXT Using prefabricated unit:

    Subject matter under subclass 745.15  wherein the construction comprises
    plural elements which are preformed or preassembled, and is then moved into
    a final position.


CLS 52/745.17
TXT Column, mast, etc., construction:

    Subject matter under subclass 741.1 wherein the process comprises a method
    for constructing a free-standing, nonresidential, vertical structure.


CLS 52/745.18
TXT Using prefabricated unit:

    Subject matter under subclass 745.17 wherein the construction comprises
    plural elements which are preformed or preassembled, and is then moved into
    a final position.


CLS 52/745.19
TXT Fabrication of member, module, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 741.1, wherein the process comprises a method
    of forming a structural component.


CLS 52/745.2
TXT And moving into position:

    Subject matter under subclass 745.19 wherein the process comprises a method
    of forming a structural component from plural elements and moving said
    component into final position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122.1+, for a structure having a hoist or handle means.

    127.1+, for a structure with an assembly for disassembly means.

    514,    for a structure with means for a split prevention or damaged part
    repair.


CLS 52/745.21
TXT Anchor, bond, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 741.1 wherein the process comprises a method
    of uniting two or more elements or components of a structure.


CLS 52/746.1
TXT Adhering preformed sheet-form member:

    Subject matter under subclass 741.1 including the step of utilizing a
    settable material (e.g., adhesive to attach a hidden face of a sheet or
    block to another type of structure).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    390+,   for a barrier with an adhered veneer tie.

    408,    for a structure with a preformed dividing lamina.

    446,    for a coated settable material backer.

    515,    for a residual structure including a coextensive coating of
    disparate material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclass for a laminating process, per se, and see especially
    subclass 71 for a process of securing a lamina to a building or installed
    structure and see the reference to Class 52 under section ``B" in the class
    definition and in subclass 71 of Class 156.


CLS 52/746.11
TXT For roofing:

    Subject matter under subclass 746.1 wherein the sheet-form member is
    attached to an overhead cover.


CLS 52/746.12
TXT Mosaic veneer:

    Subject matter under subclass 746.1 wherein the attached sheet comprises a
    tile-like decorative facing.


CLS 52/747.1
TXT Assembling exposed modules:

    Subject matter under subclass 741.1 relating to assembling modules (e.g.,
    laying bricks, building veneered walls, roofing shingles).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 446+ for processes of assembling or
    joining reformed parts involving pre-stressing of at least one part.


CLS 52/747.11
TXT Tiling:

    Subject matter under subclass 747.1 wherein the module is a unit of a
    decorative array of units of vitreous or ceramic-like material, or
    comprising material to resemble ceramic-like units (e.g., asphaltic floor
    tiles).


CLS 52/747.12
TXT Stone-like module:

    Subject matter under subclass 747.1 wherein the module is a brick, block,
    or panel of cementitious material (e.g., concrete).


CLS 52/747.13
TXT Refractory:

    Subject matter under subclass 747.12 wherein the module includes the
    specificity of resistance to extreme heat or the by-products thereof (e.g.,
    lining or construction of an oven, kiln, furnace, ladle, chimney, etc.).


CLS 52/748.1
TXT Overlapping or interfolding edges (e.g., shingling, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 747.1 in which the edges of the assembled
    modules are overlapped or interfolded (e.g., shingling).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    518,    for a lapped multi-planar surfacing (e.g., a shingle roofing).


CLS 52/748.11
TXT Sheathing:

    Subject matter under subclass 748.1 wherein the modules are intended to be
    used as an external covering on a vertical wall of a structure (e.g.,
    siding).


CLS 52/749.1
TXT MACHINE OR IMPLEMENT:

    Apparatus under the class definition specialized to the assembly or
    manufacture of a building.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122.1+, for a structure with a hoist or handle means.

    127.1+, for a structure with removable construction means.

    173.1+, for various building structures combined with an adjunctive feature
    (e.g., a wall with built-in grout injecting means).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, appropriate subclasses
    for machines and implements therein provided and particularly subclass
    105.5 for tool and mortar joint finisher; subclass 235.3 for mortar joint
    finisher; and subclass 235.4 for mason's trowel and float.

    114,    Ships, subclass 224 for ship caulking implement.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 504+ for a work shield, mask or
    protector, there provided for.

    166,    Wells, appropriate subclasses for subject matter relating to wells,
    especially subclasses 285+ for cementing processes and subclasses 378+ for
    assembling processes.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclass 90 for impacting tools.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclass 44.5 for a hod.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses
    for a device which may project fluid, mortar, cement or plaster.

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses for a work holder capable of
    repeated use.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclasses 261+ for a hand-manipulable mortar-applying
    implement with material supply and a blade-like applying or spreading tool;
    and see section V, B, I of the class definition for Class 401 for the line
    between Class 401 and Class 425 which latter two classes include implements
    for applying plastic material.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 83+ for apparatus
    to make, repair, or maintain a roadway.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, appropriate subclasses for an
    apparatus related to the formation of a structure for that class.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    subclass 60 for a combined depositing and shaping means mounted in a
    rotating boom, subclasses 63+ for a building form with dynamic
    repositioning means for progressive molding of a building, etc., and
    subclass 458 for a putty knife type shaper including means to shape plural
    dimensions.


CLS 52/749.11
TXT Tiling:

    Apparatus under subclass 749.1 intended to be used for the installation or
    repair of a mosaic facade or covering.


CLS 52/749.12
TXT Roofing:

    Apparatus under subclass 749.1 intended to be used in the construction or
    repair of an overhead cover.


CLS 52/749.13
TXT Masonry:

    Apparatus under subclass 749.1 intended to be used to facilitate assembly
    or repair of a stone-like construction.


CLS 52/749.14
TXT Bricklaying machine:

    Apparatus under subclass 749.13 intended to be used to facilitate the
    placement of modules in a stone-like construction.


CLS 52/749.15
TXT Lining:

    Apparatus under subclass 749.13 intended to be used to facilitate the
    construction or repair of the inner wall of a structure (e.g., vessel,
    kiln, oven, mill, etc.) with a refractory material which is resistant to
    extreme heat or a hostile environment.


CLS 52/750
TXT Structure under the class definition not-other wise provided for.


CLS 52/761
TXT Frame substantially cylindrical in cross- section:

    Structure under subclass 474 wherein the sustainer-type support is
    substantially cylindrical in form in a plane normal to its major axis.


CLS 52/762
TXT Facer between framing members having unitary flanges or integral retainer
    for attachment to frame:

    Structure under subclass 474 wherein the facers have flanges which project
    normal to major faces of the facers and are held in opposed relation by the
    sustainer-type support itself or by a fastener associated therewith.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are facers disposed in either parallel or
    oblique relation to each other, e.g., facer panels connected to a corner
    post and disposed at a 90_ angle relative to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    542,    for surfacing, per se, of lapped multiplanar surfacing sections
    having perpendicular flanges.

    588.1,  for a surfacing, per se, of coplanar facers with interengaged
    flanges.


CLS 52/763
TXT Interkeyed edge configurations of adjacent facers cooperate with shaft:

    Structure under subclass 474 wherein edge-to-edge related facers have
    interfitting edge configurations (e.g., edges of tongue and groove type, or
    edges oblique to major faces of the facers), which configurations cooperate
    with the sustainer.

    (1)     Note.  The term "interfitting" does not require contact between the
    edge configurations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    578+,   for plural facers with edgewise connecting features without a
    sustainer.


CLS 52/764
TXT Facer attached between frame members:

    Facer with framing under subclass 474 where a sustainer-type support
    completely separates two adjacent facers.

    (1)     Note.  In some patents included in this subclass and subclasses
    indented thereunder a facer is secured between two members which appear to
    form a two-part sustainer. Classification of such patents has been made on
    the basis that one of the composite sustainer portions is the sustainer and
    the other portion is a means for retaining the facer thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127.1+,for a construction having a defined feature which is in the nature
    of an adjunct used for assembly and/or disassembly.

    282.1,  for a module connected by an exposed corner shaft, e.g., a divided
    sustainer holding facers at an angle.

    393+,   for a related construction having resilient means facially spacing
    a module and sustainer.

    765,    for a retainer having preassembled therewith a screw, nail, or the
    like which pierces a sustainer to hold the retainer thereon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 463+ for a means which
    releases a closure so that the closure may be physically disassociated from
    its supporting structure to form a passage.


CLS 52/765
TXT Attaching device with piercing means:

    Structure under subclass 764 wherein the facer retaining means includes as
    an integral part thereof, or has preassembled therewith, a member which
    pierces the sustainer or the facer to attach the retaining means thereto.


CLS 52/766
TXT Attaching means includes cam or wedge:

    Structure under subclass 764 wherein the facer retaining means includes a
    wedge or a camming means.

    (1)     Note.  Included here as a wedge is any means, even if not tapered,
    which is used to wedge a facer against a sustainer, e.g., a block of wood
    driven into a gap between a facer and a shoulder on a sustainer to wedge
    the facer against another shoulder of the sustainer.


CLS 52/767
TXT Clamped against facer by turning cam-engaging screw:

    Structure under subclass 766 including a screw which engages the surface of
    a cam and which, when turned, in cooperation with said cam causes a
    retaining element to press against the facer.


CLS 52/768
TXT Attaching means pivots or includes pivoting actuating means:

    Structure under subclass 764 wherein the facer-retaining means is mounted
    for  pivotal motion or includes a pivoting part which moves a retainer into
    its retaining position adjacent to the facer.


CLS 52/769
TXT Attaching means held in position by a spring-type member:

    Structure under subclass 764 wherein a facer-retaining element is held in
    retaining position by a spring.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a spring which biases a retaining element
    against a facer and also a spring which cooperates with other holding
    means, such as a latch, to lock a retaining element in its retaining
    position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    773+,   for retainer formed of wire or thin-walled material (such as sheet
    metal or thin-walled metal extrusions) and biased by their own springiness
    against a facer to hold it on a sustainer.


CLS 52/770
TXT Attaching means contacts facer front and back faces then is fastened to a
    frame member:

    Facer between frame members under subclass 764 wherein separate retaining
    members, either angularly or curvilinearly shaped, touch opposite faces of
    a facer, said members or one of said members being interconnected by a
    separate fastener, such as a screw.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    800.13+, for a door having a panel fitted into a U-shaped channel formed of
    separate strips attached to an edging, the strips retaining the panel in
    position on the edging.


CLS 52/771
TXT Retaining elements interconnected by intermediate member and fastener:

    Structure under subclass 770 including at least one separate element
    located between the retaining members and interconnected therewith by at
    least one fastener such as a screw.


CLS 52/772
TXT Exposed attaching element holds two spaced facers to frame:

    Facer between frame members under subclass 764 wherein the frame and
    retaining element cooperate to hold gapped adjacent facers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282.1,  for an exposed shaft at the intersection of barriers.

    320,    for a cast in situ ribbed barrier with a block-type filler between
    the ribs.

    354,    for a settable material receiving backer with part of a furring,
    joist, or stud between the edges of coplanar backers.

    434+,   for a module bonded to an internal cast in situ section including a
    preformed sustainer.

    475.1,  for a self supported panel attached to a frame.

    479+,   for facially opposed facer panels combined with support.


CLS 52/773
TXT Facer to frame attaching means resiliently biased:

    Structure under subclass 764 wherein the facer retaining means is formed of
    springy thin-walled material (e.g., sheet metal or thin-walled metal
    extrusions) or is made of wire, said retaining means being flexed when in
    its facer retaining position so as to press the facer into a predetermined
    position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204.599, for a springy strip acting as a separator between primary
    components.

    482,    for a frame member with a permanently deformable means gripping a
    panel.

    769,    for a retainer biased against a facer by a separate spring.


CLS 52/774
TXT Attaching means in joint between adjacent facers:

    Facer resiliently biased between frame members under subclass 773 wherein
    the facer retaining  means engages the face of the facer which is next to
    the frame.


CLS 52/775
TXT Attaching element received in channel or aperture in frame:

    Facer between frame members' channels under subclass 764 wherein a portion
    of the facer retaining means is situated either in (1) an opening extending
    through the frame element, or (2) in a groove in the frame element having
    generally opposed sides extending from a portion thereof, thereby securing
    said retaining means to said frame in a facer holding position.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a retaining element received in a channel
    formed by a support and a separate element permanently attached thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    766,    for a wedge-type retaining element received in a channel or
    aperture in a support.

    772,    for a springy retaining element cooperating with a support shaft to
    hold facers in spaced end-to-end relation on said support.

    773,    for a springy retaining element formed of thin-walled material or
    wire and received in a channel or aperture in a support.


CLS 52/777
TXT Facer touches frame in two planes (e.g., notched facer or frame):

    Facer between notched frame member under subclass 474 wherein the frame has
    a preformed configuration so that two surfaces of the facer, at its joint
    face, confront two surfaces of the frame.


CLS 52/778
TXT Facer rabbeted to receive frame:

    Structure under subclass 777 wherein a portion of the frame is situated in
    a rabbet formed in the facer.


CLS 52/779
TXT Facer grooved to receive frame:

    Structure under subclass 777 wherein a portion of the frame is situated in
    a channel having generally opposed sides, in the facer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    778,    for a shaft having a portion thereof received in a rabbet formed at
    the intersection of barrier and joint faces of a facer, and another portion
    thereof received in a recess formed in the joint face of the facer.


CLS 52/780
TXT Frame recessed to receive facer:

    Structure under subclass 777 wherein the facer is held in a recess in the
    frame.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a facer abutting the horizontally extending
    flange portion of a beam having the cross-sectional shape of a T.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    779,    for a frame having on one side  thereof a protrusion which
    interfits in a recess formed in an edge of a facer, and having on an
    opposite side thereof a recess in which an edge of a facer is received.


CLS 52/781
TXT Frame member fabricated from thin-walled material:

    Structure under subclass 780 wherein the frame member is made of
    thin-walled material either angularly or curvilinearly shaped (e.g., an
    I-beam, the vertical web and horizontal flanges of which are relatively
    thin compared to their width, or sustainers formed of sheet metal or
    thin-walled metal extrusions).


CLS 52/781.3
TXT Additional stiffener between facer and frame:

    Structure under subclass 474 including a stiffening or reinforcing member
    engaging spaced sustainers and extending transversely thereto with the
    stiffener spacing the facing from the sustainer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238.1,  for a vertical partition secured to a transverse barrier.

    321,    for a barrier with projecting rib-type sustainer and a transverse
    retainer.


CLS 52/781.5
TXT Preformed concrete frame:

    Structure under subclass 474 in which the sustainer is of concrete and is
    preformed before use at the job site.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    319+,   for a cast in situ ribbed barrier with a preformed, settable
    material sustainer.


CLS 52/782.1
TXT COMPOSITE PREFABRICATED PANEL INCLUDING ADJUNCTIVE MEANS:

    Structure under the class definition comprising a prefabricated panel
    (i.e., a member which is very thin relative to its width and length) which
    includes (a) a separate mechanical fastener (e.g., a nail, bolt, screw,
    etc.) securing components of the panel together; or (b) a mechanical
    structure facilitating securement of the panel to a separate support (e.g.,
    a flange or an aperture at a panel edge for receiving a nail; or (c)
    multiple plies and a disparate, elongated edging or stiffener which extends
    outwardly of a major or edge face of the panel; or (d) a single ply and a
    disparate, elongated edging or edge face of the panel; or (e) spaced sheets
    having in-turned opposed flanges forming an edge of the panel.

    (1)     Note.  The combination of an adhesive fastening means and a
    mechanical fastening means with a composite panel is classified in Class
    52, subclasses 782.1+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202+,   auxiliary imperforate panel-like member attached to main panel,
    barrier, or frame.

    208,    for a panel clamped or sealed to a barrier wherein the panel is
    often of the ``safety glass" sandwich type.

    404.1+, for an insulating insert in a preconstructed barrier cavity.

    443+,   for a settable material facing adhered to imperforate area backer.

    455+,   sectioned imperforate facing within peripheral frame (e.g., plural
    panel door).

    474+,   for a panel held by a pre-positioned frame or shaft.

    506.01+,facer attachable to disparate structure.

    514,    stiffened for split prevention in panels.

    515+,   for coated means specialized to use as a component of a static
    building construction.

    556,    for a shingle with a metal face and end covering.

    576,    for a cavity former within a module.

    578+,   for a panel with discrete edgewise connecting feature.

    596+,   for a stone-like module with a pre-formed dissimilar attached
    facing or edging; particularly subclass 612 for a layered module.

    630,    imperforate panel with integral reinforcing.

    633+,   openwork panels (e.g., grill, screen, or frame).

    716.1+, in situ attached-type channel or trim strip (e.g., edging).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 897.32 for a metallic stock material
    product in the form of a web or sheet of indeterminate length or width.  A
    patent for a product in the form of a web, sheet, or panel generally
    employed as a portion of a building structure and including specific
    structure to facilitate (a) securing thereof to a support, (b) attaching a
    facing to a core by an applied mechanical fastener or mating configuration,
    or (c) edge-to-edge mating with an adjacent unit will be placed in Class 52.

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 501+ for a composite
    panel having means particularly adapting it for use as a closure (e.g.,
    lock).

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product of single or plural layer form which is
    non-rigid or, if rigid, has no mechanical fastener or interfitting means
    for forming a structural combination between its components or with an
    adjacent unit or mounting structure.


CLS 52/782.11
TXT Railroad car door:

    Structure under subclass 782.1 that is intended to be used as a component
    of a closure for a railroad car.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    783.12+,for a corrugated door.

    798.1,  for a corrugated or embossed panel.


CLS 52/782.2
TXT Rimmed furniture top formed of face-to-face sheets:

    Structure under subclass 782.1 including an edging trim strip-like member
    positioned against the edge face of a panel securing a covering member to a
    horizontally positioned sheet-like furniture top member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclass 27 for a table
    with a peripheral guard.


CLS 52/782.21
TXT Game table top:

    Structure under subclass 782.2 which is portable, or easily carried and
    having a removable top, or the property of being collapsible (e.g., card
    table, camping table, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclass 309 for a game board or table
    which may have an edge flange.


CLS 52/782.22
TXT Including flexible top sheet:

    Structure under subclass 782.2 comprising a top covering of material such
    as linoleum, fabric, leather, or the like.


CLS 52/782.23
TXT With mechanical fastener for securing the rim:

    Structure under subclass 782.22 including a mechanical fastener (e.g.,
    screw, bolt, or nail-type, etc.) which secures the edging trim strip-like
    member to the panel.


CLS 52/782.24
TXT With mechanical fastener for securing the rim:

    Structure under subclass 782.2 including a mechanical fastener (e.g.,
    screw, bolt, or nail-type, etc.) which secures the edging trim strip-like
    member to the panel.


CLS 52/783.1
TXT Sandwich or hollow with sheet-like facing members:

    Structure under subclass 782.1 including sheet-like members, either
    separate or joined at an edge thereof, disposed on either side of a core
    (e.g., honeycomb, sheet-like member, spacers, etc.) or void.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171.1+, for a residual transparent panel with treating means therefor
    (e.g., double pane window sash with drying means).

    202+,   for auxiliary panel attached to a main panel (e.g., storm sash to a
    window frame).

    302.1+, for a structure with a drain from its interior to the ambient
    (e.g., double panel window with a vent).

    393+,   for a structure with a resilient separator yieldably resisting
    movement of facing elements toward each other.

    408+,   for a disparate material lamina separating components of an in situ
    construction.

    506.1+, for a removable facer panel attachable to a pre-erected or
    assembled dissimilar substructure (e.g., a rigid upholstery panel to an
    automobile body).

    612,    for an opaque stone-like module of layered components.

    730.4+, for tubular stiles, sash bars, etc.

    731.2+, for a hollow beam, or column, etc., formed of connected strips.

    732.1+, for a non supporting hollow enclosure (e.g., post).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 116+ for
    honeycomb-like articles and subclass 223 for an article having a plurality
    of layers or components connected by a separate and distinct mechanical
    connecting member extending over the edges of or into a plurality of layers
    or components.

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 181+ and 304+ for a woven or knit fabric.


CLS 52/783.11
TXT Corrugated component:

    Structure under subclass 783.1 wherein at least one member is formed of a
    uniform cross-section providing alternating ridges and grooves on its
    opposed faces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    537,    for lapped corrugated sheets.

    630,    for a residual corrugated panel.

    671+    and 674, for a corrugated perforated sheet.

    798.1,  for a corrugated sheet with separate attached edging or stiffener.


CLS 52/783.12
TXT For door or door shutter:

    Structure under subclass 783.11 that is intended to be used as a component
    of a closure for an entrance or egress.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    784.1,  for a noncorrugated door panel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, for doors, per se.


CLS 52/783.13
TXT Fire resistant:

    Structure under subclass 783.12 which is specifically designed to retard
    flame or the transfer of extreme heat caused by flame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    784.13, for a noncorrugated fire door panel.


CLS 52/783.14
TXT Juxtaposed corrugated sheets:

    Structure under subclass 783.11 including two corrugated sheet-like members
    positioned in facing relationship.

    (1)     Note.  It is not necessary for the sheet-like members to contact
    each other for placement in this subclass.


CLS 52/783.15
TXT Abutting trough to crest:

    Structure under subclass 783.14 in which the juxtaposed sheets are in
    contacting relationship via the trough of a first sheet-like member and the
    crest of a second sheet-like member.


CLS 52/783.16
TXT Angled abutting corrugations:

    Structure under subclass 783.15 in which the axis of the corrugations of
    one sheet-like member is in a nonparallel relationship with the axis of a
    second sheet-like member.


CLS 52/783.17
TXT Corrugated intermediate sheet:

    Structure under subclass 783.11 including a corrugated sheet is positioned
    between two additional sheet-like elements to form a sandwich panel unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    537,    for lapped corrugated sheets.

    630,    for a residual corrugated panel.

    671+    and 674, for corrugated perforated sheets.

    798.1,  for a corrugated sheet with separate attached edging or stiffener.


CLS 52/783.18
TXT Core of elongated, corrugated spacers:

    Structure under subclass 783.11 in which a core is formed of a plurality of
    corrugated strips which are greatly elongated relative to their width.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    793.1+,for a multicellular core formed of a plurality of spaced, elongated
    strip-like members.


CLS 52/783.19
TXT Corrugated sheet and flat sheet juxtaposed:

    Structure under subclass 783.11 in which a two-ply panel is formed having a
    first corrugated sheet-like member in face-to-face confrontation with a
    second substantially flat sheet member.


CLS 52/784.1
TXT For door or door shutter:

    Structure under subclass 783.1 that is intended to be used as a component
    of a closure for an entrance or egress.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    800.13+,for a door or shutter having a U-shaped channel overlapping panel
    edge and major faces.


CLS 52/784.11
TXT Fire resistant:

    Structure under subclass 784.1 which is specifically designed to retard
    flame or the transfer of extreme heat caused by flame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    783.13, for a corrugated panel for a fireproof door.

    784.15, for a door which is merely insulated.


CLS 52/784.12
TXT In-turned opposed flanges form edge of door panel:

    Structure under subclass 784.11 wherein each of the facing sheets has an
    integral edge flange, the free end of which is directed toward the opposite
    sheet, the flanges of the sheets being opposed to one another (e.g.,
    opposed pan-like members).


CLS 52/784.13
TXT In-turned opposed flanges form edge of door:

    Structure under subclass 784.10 wherein each of the facing sheets has an
    integral edge flange,  the free end of which is directed toward the
    opposite sheet, the flanges of the sheets being opposed to one another
    (e.g., opposed pan-like members).


CLS 52/784.14
TXT Multicellular core:

    Structure under subclass 784.1 in which the panel core member is formed
    having a plurality of completely enclosed chambers.


CLS 52/784.15
TXT Insulating core:

    Structure under subclass 784.1 in which a core of material that resists
    transfer of sound, heat or vibration is located between two sheet-like
    components.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404.1+, for an insulating insert (e.g., filler in cavity in preconstructed
    or cast structure).

    784.11+,for a fire resistant door.

    791.1,  for a panel having an insulating core of a woven material.


CLS 52/784.16
TXT Having a single hollow cavity:

    Structure under subclass 784.1 in which a solitary, unfilled, completely
    enclosed chamber is formed within the door panel.


CLS 52/785.1
TXT Mirror:

    Structure under subclass 783.1 in which one of the facing sheet-like
    members includes a glass or polished substance that form a true likeness by
    reflection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 466+ for supports for mirrors.

    312,    Supports: Cabinet Structure, subclasses 224+ for mirrors combined
    with cabinet structure.

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    838+ for mirrors, per se.


CLS 52/785.11
TXT Portable (e.g., hand-held):

    Structure under subclass 785.1 which is designed to be easily held in the
    human hand.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    132,    Toilet,  subclasses 102+ for a brush-type mirror, subclasses 301+
    for a compact mirror, and subclasses 316+ for toilet kits having a mirror.


CLS 52/785.12
TXT For vehicle:

    Structure under subclass 785.1 that is intended to be affixed onto some
    part of a vehicle.


CLS 52/786.1
TXT Parallel, transparent panes (e.g., double glass window panel, etc.):

    Structure under subclass 783.1 including at least two facing sheet-like
    members which are previous to light without intended diffusion.

    (1)     Note.  See the notes under subclass 783.1 for other subclasses
    which may include a transparent, or translucent sandwich-type panel.

    (2)     Note.  A pane is defined as a glass-like panel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 34 for light
    transmissive sheets with gas space therebetween and edge sealed; subclass
    38 for a mass transmitting light through layers thereof and having an
    opaque border; and subclass 46 for a ``two dimensionally sectional" layer
    having a transparent or translucent layer or section.


CLS 52/786.11
TXT Intermediate non-glass sheet-like component:

    Structure under subclass 786.1 in which the parallel transparent panes
    include a third sheet-like member between the panes which is formed of a
    non-glass material and is also transparent (e.g., plastic, etc.).


CLS 52/786.12
TXT For vehicle:

    Subject matter under subclass 786.11 which is used in the structure of a
    conveyance (e.g., automobile, airplane, etc.).


CLS 52/786.13
TXT Internal spacer:

    Structure under subclass 786.1 including a spacer member located between a
    pair of spaced, parallel transparent panes and positioned entirely within
    the boundary formed by the peripheral edge faces of the panes.


CLS 52/787.1
TXT Having internal receiver for elongated lateral fastener:

    Structure under subclass 783.1 wherein the panel has an internal bushing or
    elongated member receiving a screw or penetrating-type fastener which
    extends outwardly from a major face of the panel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    364+,   for a construction specially formed to receive a screw or nail
    (i.e., other than a mere hole or threaded hole).


CLS 52/787.11
TXT Sound or heat resistant:

    Structure under subclass 787.1 which is insulated to prevent the transfer
    of acoustical or thermal energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    783.13  and 784.11+, for a fireproof door.

    784.15, for an insulated door.

    794.1,  for other panels having an insulating core.


CLS 52/787.12
TXT For vehicle:

    Subject matter under subclass 787.1 which is used in the structure of a
    conveyance (e.g., automobile, airplane, etc.).


CLS 52/788.1
TXT Hermetically sealed, opaque or translucent panel:

    Structure under subclass 783.10 which includes a perfectly closed or
    airtight panel formed of a pair of spaced sheet-like, non-transparent
    members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    786.1+, for parallel transparent panes (i.e., double glass panel, which may
    be hermetically sealed).


CLS 52/789.1
TXT Dimpled or Embossed Sheet:

    Structure under subclass 783.1 which includes a sheet-like member having
    slight depressions or indentations in the surface of the member or having
    bosses, protuberances, or reliefs in the surface of the member other than
    that of a continuous corrugation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    783.11+,for sheet-like members which are corrugated.


CLS 52/790.1
TXT Internal, diagonal, elongated stiffener:

    Structure under subclass 783.1 which includes an elongated strengthening
    member located between two spaced sheet-like members and positioned at an
    oblique angle to at least one panel edge face plane.


CLS 52/791.1
TXT Perforate or Woven Sheet:

    Structure under subclass 783.1 including at least one sheet-like member
    formed of a pre-formed foraminous surfacing or of a fabric-type surface of
    interlaced strands.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    633+,   for an openwork panel (e.g., grill, screen, or frame).

    799.1+,for a perforate sheet with a separate attached edging or stiffener.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 131+ for a
    structurally defined web or sheet which includes an aperture.


CLS 52/792.1
TXT In-turned opposed flanges form panel edge:

    Structure under subclass 783.1 in which a fastening means (e.g., nail,
    screw, or bolt) is used to secure the opposed flanges in a fixed
    relationship.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    784.12, for a fireproof door having in-turned opposed flanges forming panel
    edge.

    784.13, for a door having in-turned opposed flanges forming panel edge.


CLS 52/792.11
TXT Flanges interfit:

    Structure under subclass 792.1 in which the opposed flanges lockingly
    interengage in a folded or recessed manner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    784.12, for a fireproof door having lockingly interengaged flanges.

    784.13, for a door structure having lockingly interengaged flanges.


CLS 52/793.1
TXT Multicellular core:

    Structure under subclass 783.1 in which the panel core member is formed
    having a plurality of completely enclosed chambers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    784.14, for a door having a multicellular core.

    794.1,  for a panel having a multicellular core that is filled with
    insulation.


CLS 52/793.11
TXT Elongated strip-like laterally spaced elements form core:

    Structure under subclass 793.1 in which the multicellular core is formed of
    a plurality of laterally spaced strips which have a length substantially
    greater than their width and thickness.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    799.11+,for a perforate panel formed of elongated laterally spaced strips.


CLS 52/794.1
TXT Insulating core:

    Structure under subclass 783.1 in which a core of material that resists
    transfer of sound, heat, or vibration is located between two sheet-like
    components.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404.1+, for an insulating insert (e.g., filler in cavity in preconstructed
    or cast structure).

    733.2+, especially subclass 733.4 for joined wall panels that are insulated.

    784.11+,for a fireproof door.

    784.15, for a door having an insulating core.

    791.1,  for a panel having an insulating core of a woven material.

    793.1,  for an insulated panel having a multicellular core.


CLS 52/795.1
TXT Having a single hollow cavity:

    Structure under subclass 783.1 in which a solitary, unfilled, completely
    enclosed chamber is formed within the panel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    784.16, for a door having a single hollow cavity.


CLS 52/796.1
TXT Face-to-face sheets in substantially continuous contact:

    Structure under subclass 782.1 including a sheet having an individual
    coextensive discrete section disposed in substantially continuous
    face-to-face contacting relationship with another sheet (e.g., faces in
    contact).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    783.1+,for sandwich or hollow modules or panels.


CLS 52/796.11
TXT For furniture top:

    Structure under subclass 796.1 that is intended to be used as a furniture
    top (e.g., desktop, tabletop, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    782.2+,for a rimmed furniture top formed of face-to-face sheets.


CLS 52/796.12
TXT Having separate attached, elongated edging or stiffener:

    Structure under subclass 796.11 which includes an elongated edging member
    applied over the edge face of the face-to-face sheets or includes an
    elongated stiffening member secured to at least one of the sheet-like
    members.


CLS 52/797.1
TXT Having separate attached, elongated edging or stiffener:

    Structure under subclass 796.1 which includes an elongated edging member
    applied over the edge face of the face-to-face sheets or includes an
    elongated stiffening member secured to at least one of the sheet-like
    members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    782.2+,for a rimmed tabletop of face-to-face sheets.

    798.1,  for a corrugated or embossed sheet with separate attached edging or
    stiffening.

    799.1+,for a perforate sheet with separate attached edging or stiffening.

    800.1+,for a panel with separate attached, elongated edging or stiffening.


CLS 52/798.1
TXT Corrugated or embossed panel having separate attached, elongated edging or
    stiffener:

    Structure under subclass 782.1 in which a single sheet having corrugations
    or patterned deformations (e.g., ridges, grooves, dimples, etc.) is bounded
    with an attached, elongate perimeter component or stiffener.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    782.11, for above structure used in a railroad car door.


CLS 52/799.1
TXT Perforate panel having separate attached, elongated edging:

    Structure under subclass 782.1 in which a foraminous sheet is bounded with
    an attached, elongate perimeter component or stiffener.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    782.2+,for a rimmed furniture top of face-to-face sheets.

    798.1,  for a corrugated or embossed sheet with separate attached,
    elongated edging or stiffening.

    800.1+,for a panel with separate attached, elongated edging or stiffening.


CLS 52/799.11
TXT Elongated, laterally spaced strips or strands:

    Structure under subclass 799.1 in which the foraminous sheet is formed of
    thin, elongate elements which are spaced laterally from each other with
    their elongate axes substantially parallel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    793.11, for a sandwich or hollow panel having a multicellular core formed
    of elongated strip-like laterally spaced elements.


CLS 52/799.12
TXT Intersecting strips or strands:

    Structure under subclass 799.11 in which the foraminous sheet is formed of
    a first set of elongated elements extending generally parallel to each
    other in one direction, and a second set of elongated elements extending
    parallel to each other in a direction to meet or cross the elements of the
    first set.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    664+,   for intersecting strips or strands in an openwork structure.


CLS 52/799.13
TXT Strip having orifice encompassing intersecting strip:

    Structure under subclass 799.12 in which a slat passes through a closed
    periphery opening in another slat, the latter intersecting or crossing the
    first slat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    667,    for an openwork structure comprising intersecting strips or strands
    and including a slat which is encompassed within an orifice in another slat.


CLS 52/799.14
TXT Strip interfits edge slot of intersecting strip:

    Structure under subclass 799.12 in which at least one first slat has a
    depth-wise slot extending from an edge thereof, which slot receives another
    slat which crosses the first slat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    668,    for intersecting strips or strands having interfitted edge slots in
    an openwork structure.


CLS 52/800.1
TXT Having separate attached, elongated edging or stiffener:

    Structure under subclass 782.1 wherein a disparate elongated element forms
    an edging for a panel edge face or wherein an elongated stiffener forms a
    stiffener for a panel edge face or stiffens a major face of the panel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    474+,   for a panel assembled to a previously positioned, elongated
    sustainer member.

    514,    for a sustainer with a stiffener for split prevention.

    656.1+, for openwork structure which merely defines an open work area
    (e.g., a frame, per se).

    782.2,  796.12, 797.1, 798.1, and 799.1+, for a related panel with an
    edging.


CLS 52/800.11
TXT Overlaps panel edge face and panel major face:

    Structure under subclass 800.1 in which the edging or stiffener laps or
    extends over the panel edge face and at least one major face of the panel,
    but not necessarily in contacting relationship.


CLS 52/800.12
TXT U-shaped channel overlaps panel edge and major faces:

    Structure under subclass 800.11 in which the edging or stiffener member is
    U-shaped in cross section and laps or extends over an edge face and both
    major faces of the panel, but not necessarily in contacting relationship.


CLS 52/800.13
TXT Closure:

    Structure under subclass 800.12 that is intended to be used as a component
    in a door, window, or the like.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    656.2+, for a closure frame.

    717.01+,for a closure trim strip. 730.3+, longitudinally related strip-like
    sections for a closure.

    734.2,  for a window came.


CLS 52/800.14
TXT Having transparent or translucent panel:

    Structure under subclass 800.13 in which a substantial area of the panel is
    a pane.


CLS 52/800.15
TXT Separate strips form U-shaped channel:

    Structure under subclass 800.14 wherein said U-shaped edging or stiffening
    member is formed of plural members.


CLS 52/800.16
TXT Having mechanical fastener (e.g., nail, bolt, screw, etc.) for securing
    channel:

    Structure under subclass 800.15 in which a mechanical fastener (e.g., nail,
    bolt, screw, etc.) is used to secure the U-shaped elongate edging or
    stiffener to the panel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    782.1,  for a composite panel having a core sandwiched between outer layers
    at least one of which is not a thin sheet (e.g., a panel formed of layers
    of blocks or boards having a core sandwiched therebetween).


CLS 52/800.17
TXT Separate strips form U-shaped channel:

    Structure under subclass 800.13 wherein said U-shaped edging or stiffening
    member is formed of plural members.


CLS 52/800.18
TXT Having mechanical fastener (e.g., nail, bolt, screw, etc.) for securing
    channel:

    Structure under subclass 800.12 in which a mechanical fastener (e.g., nail,
    bolt, screw, etc.) is used to secure the U-shaped elongate edging or
    stiffener to the panel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    782.1,  for a composite panel having a core sandwiched between outer layers
    at least one of which is not a thin sheet (e.g., a panel formed of layers
    of blocks or boards having a core sandwiched therebetween).


CLS 52/801.1
TXT Overlaps major face only:

    Structure under subclass 800.1 in which the elongate edging or stiffener
    overlaps solely the major face of the panel.


CLS 52/801.11
TXT Spaced inwardly of edge face:

    Structure under subclass 801.1 wherein the stiffening member is spaced
    inwardly from a plane formed by the panel edge face.


CLS 52/801.12
TXT Closure:

    Structure under subclass 801.11 that is intended to be used as a component
    in a door, window, or the like.


CLS 52/802.1
TXT Overlaps edge face only:

    Structure under subclass 800.1 in which the elongated edging or stiffening
    member overlaps the edge face, only, of the panel.


CLS 52/802.11
TXT Extends laterally of edge:

    Structure under subclass 802.1 in which the elongated edging or stiffening
    member extends outwardly of a major face of the panel.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTION


CLS 52/900
TXT Hazardous material permeation prevention (e.g., radon):

    A collection of documents relating to shielding, ducting, venting, or
    otherwise controlling the flow or migration of dangerous substances,
    emanating from the surrounding earth, into an enclosed habitat such as the
    basement of a building.

    (1)     Note.  This collection is intended to provide a locus for formation
    regarding the control of the several varied gases which have been
    identified as being health hazards; an example which is considered to be
    illustrative, but not limiting, is radioactive radon gas; also included are
    any organic toxic waste fumes which have been linked to ill health.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169+,   for vapor barriers, drains, and other structures designed to
    insulate and prevent the flow of water into a basement.


CLS 53/
TTL PACKAGE MAKING

CLS 53/
TXT INDEX TO CLASS DEFINITIONS AND NOTES



    I.      CLASS DEFINITION

    II.     EXPLANATORY NOTE ON SCOPE OF CLASS

    III.    DEFINITIONS OF TERMS USED

    IV.     PACKAGING AND BINDING ELSEWHERE CLASSIFIED

    V.      OTHER COVERING

    VI.     PACKAGES, AND PACKAGED AND BANDED ARTICLES

    VII.    PACKAGING AND BINDING SUBCOMBINATIONS

    VIII.INDEX TO CLASSES REFERRED TO IN THIS CLASS

    I.      CLASS DEFINITION

    This class is the generic class of apparatus for and methods of
    encompassing, encasing or completely surrounding goods or materials with a
    cover made from sheet material stock.

    (1)     Note.  This class does not provide for methods of permanently
    encompassing, encasing, or immobilizing hazardous or toxic waste.  Methods
    of packaging binding and immobilization of hazardous or toxic waste for the
    sole intent of permanently containing the waste are found in Class 588.
    Methods of packaging to move potentially hazardous or potentially toxic
    materials through commerce where the materials are removed from the
    container for subsequent use or treatment are proper for Class 53.

    This class is also the generic class of apparatus for and methods of
    partially encasing or surrounding goods and materials by a partial cover
    made from sheet material stock, which completely encircles and is in
    frictional contact with the goods or materials so as to be retained thereon.

    This class is also the generic class of apparatus for and methods of
    assembling and/or securing a separate closure (hood, cap, capsule, crown,
    seal, cork, disk, cot, etc.,) to the aperture of preformed receptacle so as
    to complete the encasement of contents.  Assembling includes any
    manipulation or handling of the receptacle resulting in the sealing of a
    filling orifice by the closure.

    This class is also the generic class of apparatus for and methods of
    depositing articles and arranging fluent materials in preformed
    receptacles.  See subclasses 235+.

    This class is the residual class of apparatus for and methods of subjecting
    the contents to a treatment before, during or after packaging combined with
    the packaging operation not otherwise provided for.  See particularly
    subclasses 111+ and 428+. Treatment includes plural diverse manufacturing
    provided for, per se, in Class 29, subclasses 33+.

    This class is also the generic class for apparatus for, and processes of,
    making match books.  (See subclasses 394+).

    This class also includes apparatus for exposing the contents of a package
    by opening one or more folds of the cover.

    The apparatus and processes in this class include the shaping of the cover
    about the article, the partial or complete shaping of the cover followed by
    a filling operation, the filling of a preformed receptacle with articles
    and the filling of a preformed receptacle followed by a closing operation.

    The apparatus and processes in this class include the application of
    wrappers and encircling bands and labels, and the application of partial
    covers encircling the contents.

    The apparatus and processes in this class may include the making of the
    cover prior to packaging and/or the treatment of cover before, during or
    after packaging.  See particularly subclasses 140, 141, 208, 289, 290+, and
    545+.

    The apparatus and processes in this class include the printing and/or
    embossing of the contents and/or the cover, the coating of the package, the
    making and/or applying of cover opening adjuncts such as tear strips, and
    the application of a strand, handle, strip, stamp, and/or label to the
    package.  See particularly subclasses 128.1+ and 410+.

    The apparatus and processes in this class include the association of
    articles into groups for packaging, and also include the packaging of
    individual units followed by a grouping of such units for further
    packaging, whether or not the further packaging is claimed.  See
    particularly subclasses 147+ and 443+.

    The apparatus and processes in this class encase or encompass goods and
    materials with a cover, which serves for identifying, protecting or unit
    handling the goods or materials.  The cover is usually removable from the
    contents when the latter is used. However, some exceptions are found to
    this removal including, e.g., match books, capsules and tea bags.

    II.     EXPLANATORY NOTE ON SCOPE OF CLASS

    Class 53 was designed with the purpose of recognizing that the packaging of
    manufactured products so that they may pass through the channels of trade
    in a safe, convenient and attractive condition, is an art deserving of a
    separate status in the system of classifying inventions.

    Heretofore, for the most part, the packaging operation was treated either
    as an appendage to the manufacture of the product to be packaged or as a
    special instance of container manufacture.  Neither was in accord with the
    activities of those who devise packaging machinery or processes, who are
    neither the manufacturers of the product nor of the packaging materials.

    Where patent claims include subject matter limiting the process or
    apparatus to use in manufacturing a particular article other than as
    specifically provided for in the definition below such patent is excluded
    from this class and will be found in the class best providing for making
    said article.  If the claims merely recite, by name, the article being
    manufactured but the process or apparatus is of general utility, such
    recitation alone will not exclude the patent from this class.

    Since it is not desirable to withhold from use those portions of the
    reclassification which can be completed and handled as a unit, Class 53 was
    established even though numerous inventions pertaining to the art of
    packaging are as yet represented therein only by search notes to other
    classifications.

    The art relating to filling and closing and closing, per se, of preformed
    receptacles, and depositing articles in preformed receptacles, formerly
    classified in Class 226, Filling and Closing Portable Receptacles, is now
    classified in appropriate subclasses of this class (53) unless otherwise
    excluded by the notes to the various subclasses herein.

    III.    DEFINITIONS OF TERMS USED

    BAND

    A species of cover in which the cover material completely encircles the
    contents in one direction only, such as girth, leaving the contents fully
    exposed on two sides or ends, and which is in frictional contact with the
    contents so as to be retained thereon.  See "BINDING".

    BINDING

    The embracing by means of a filament, strand or wire of either an
    accumulated bunch of articles, a series of coils, or a single encased
    package. It differs from banding in that no substantial area of the
    contents is covered, and the binder is usually tied, knotted, or twisted.
    Except where applied to a package for this class, (see subclass 138.6), the
    process of and apparatus for applying a binding is not here classified.
    See (41) Note, section IV of the Class Definition for binding, per se.

    CLOSURE

    A species of cover in which a separate cover member completes the
    encasement or confinement of contents within a preformed receptacle when
    said member is assembled within, over or around the aperture of said
    receptacle.

    CONTENTS

    The goods or materials which are, or are to be, confined within the space
    defined by the cover of the package, An insert sheet or coupon, to be
    packaged with other goods is considered to be a part of a group contents.
    See "GROUP FORMING".  A package resulting from a first packaging operation
    may become the contents of a second packaging operation.

    COVER

    A member, made from sheet material stock which serves to confine the
    contents by either a complete encasement or a partial encasement, and which
    fully encircles or encompasses the contents in at least one direction.  A
    band, closure, preformed container, carton or receptacle, though said
    members are not "made from sheet material", are each considered covers for
    this class.  A spindle or core which extends into or through a preformed
    aperture in the contents is considered to be a partial cover.  See subclass
    581.  See "BAND", "CLOSURE", and "RECEPTACLE".

    COVER-ADJUNCT

    Some accessory, device or abiding characteristic which is supplied to, or
    formed integral with, a cover to perform some function in addition to the
    mere enclosing of the contents.  Such adjuncts include the addition to a
    cover of (1) a filament, strand, wire, stamp, label, handle, or display
    support, (2) a filler piece for the gap resulting between two or more
    folded flaps, (3) some auxiliary cover seam retaining device, including a
    staple, a clip, a sewn stitch, or a simultaneously integrally formed and
    set tab-and-slot retaining means, (4) a coating, printing, embossing or
    other marking, ornamenting or display feature, (5) some means to provide
    for opening the cover such as, e.g., a tear strip, (6) a cover attached
    reinforcement, article holder, or article remover, or (7) a window or
    window opening, (8) a contents contacting sealing spot, disc or gasket, (9)
    a superimposed disc which is applied to a hood or cap so as to depress said
    disc and a portion of the hood or cap within the aperture of a receptacle,
    (10) a cam actuated sealing or gripping means on the closure for fastening
    said closure, or (11) a protection strip placed over the contents of a
    receptacle (e.g., matches) and inserted between the side of the receptacle
    and the contents.  However, the operations of slitting or notching of cover
    blanks and flaps preparatory to the shaping of the cover, or the
    application of adhesive to the cover to aid in seam retaining are not
    considered cover-adjuncts for this class.  Nor is the addition of a
    transitory characteristic to a cover for the purpose of aiding in the
    packaging, e.g., the addition of moisture to a wrapper, considered to be a
    cover-adjunct.

    FEED

    Feed or delivery, as distinct from infeed, is transfer, conveyance,
    movement or translation of assembly components to or from what is
    established as a work position; at which position further motion of the
    components with respect to each other - generally a straight line movement
    along the major axis of either or both components - is called infeed. Thus,
    for example, motion of a closure element from a hopper or magazine to a
    superimposed position over the aperture of a receptacle is referred to as
    feed or delivery while the final juxtapositioning of the closure and
    receptacles previously aligned and oriented is considered infeed.

    FILLING

    The step of placing a contents within a cover.  It is not necessary that
    the contents occupy the entire space encased; i.e., the cover may be only
    partially filled by a filling operation.

    GROUP FORMING

    The accumulating or gathering of an associated collection of articles, of
    the same or of different characteristics, by means of a plurality of
    feeding operations, for placement as a contents in a single cover.  An
    insert sheet or coupon to be packaged with other goods is considered to be
    an article of different characteristics from the goods.  On the other hand,
    an inner cover, or a section of plural section cover is not considered to
    be a part of the contents of an outer cover.  See "CONTENTS".

    HEADER

    The means to either (1) hold and position, (2) hold and secure, or (3)
    juxtaposition and secure a separate closure element during infeed.

    INITIAL WRAP

    The wrapping of a cover around a contents to form a package is invariably
    done in two stages, viz: first, the shaping of the cover about a single end
    or surface of the contents, and second, a further shaping of the cover by
    bending or folding the previously unfolded portions thereof so that the
    latter portions are in contact with the contents end or surface opposite to
    the end or surface about which the cover was previously shaped.  The
    intermediate state of the cover at the end of the first stage is referred
    to as the Initial Wrap.  The initial wrapping operation begins with the
    contact between the first end or surface of the contents with the cover and
    proceeds in two ways, either by (a) an unidirectional relative movement
    (which is not necessarily continuous) between the folding instrumentalities
    and the cover material-contents unit or (b) by a first relative movement
    between the folding instrumentalities and the cover material-contents unit,
    and one or more succeeding relative movements therebetween, at least the
    first of which is in a direction different from the first movement, and
    which serves to complete the shaping of the cover along the first end or
    surface of the contents without bending or folding the remaining unfolded
    portions of the cover into contact with the opposite end or surface of the
    contents.

    PACKAGE

    A unit consisting of an assembled cover material and contents, where the
    contents is, or is to be, encased or encircled by the cover material.  The
    cover need not be shaped around the contents, e.g., the unit resulting from
    the final positioning of a contents upon a cover blank or web, which is
    then handled as a unit through further packaging operations including an
    encasement or encirclement, is also termed a package.

    RECEPTACLE

    A stage of cover formation in which the cover material has been fashioned
    into such shape as to at least partially confine the contents, as for
    example, against lateral displacement.  A sheet of bendable or foldable
    cover material which has received a single preliminary fold, such as a
    U-fold, as well as a completely formed carton, are both considered to be
    receptacles.

    SEAM

    Two or more edges of the cover material brought together with or without
    adhesion.  Usually the seam is implemented by adhesion, folding or
    interfitting but a mere overlapping of two edges is sufficient to
    constitute a seam.

    WRAPPER

    A species of flexible cover material in which the initial wrap is bent or
    folded about the contents as the first step in the encasement of the
    contents to make a package.

    IV.     PACKAGING AND BINDING ELSEWHERE CLASSIFIED

    (1)     Note.  Banding apparatus is found in this class, subclass 582 and
    the corresponding processes are found in subclass 399.  Banding machines
    and processes, either, per se, or combined with other machines or steps,
    are also found in many places; see the notes under Search Class to the
    following classes: 19, Textiles:  Fiber Preparation; 57, Textiles:
    Spinning, Twisting, and Twining; 66, Textiles:  Knitting; 87, Textiles:
    Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making; 100, Presses; 131, Tobacco.

    (2)     Note.  Combined packaging and binding apparatus is found in this
    class, subclasses 138.6+, and corresponding processes are found in
    subclasses 410+. Because the related arts have often treated banding and
    binding as equivalents, the references to the Binding art have been placed
    in this section, rather than section V.  Binding machines and processes,
    either, per se, or combined with other machines or steps, are also found in
    many places, see the notes under Search Class to the following classes:
    28, Textiles:  Manufacturing; 56, Harvesters; 100, Presses; 493,
    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing From a
    Sheet or Web.

    (3)     Note.  Since practically all packaging and binding elsewhere
    classified includes not only packaging and binding, per se, but the
    combination therewith of other devices or steps no attempt to distinguish
    between the references to packaging and binding, per se, and to combined
    packaging and binding, has been made.

    (4)     Note.  Methods of packaging, binding, and immobilization of
    hazardous or toxic waste for the sole intent to permanently containing the
    waste are found in Class 588.  Methods of packaging to move hazardous or
    toxic materials through commerce where the materials are removed from the
    container for subsequent use or treatment are proper for Class 53.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 58 for methods of making arm pit shields.

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclasses 289+ for machines to form
    skeins of filamentary stock, such as yarn, ribbon, etc., and to gather and
    secure the stock into a package by means of a strand, and see (2) Note
    above.  See subclasses 118+ and 121 for tampon or compacted fiber making,
    and see (1) Note above.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 400.1+, for processes, not otherwise
    provided for, including assembly of parts, one of which may be a cover or
    band, and subclasses 33.5+ and 243.57+ for band-type bag closure applying
    means.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 742.1+ for a
    process relating to filling a cavity in an in situ erected building
    structure.

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 432+ for combined compressing and binding,
    and see (2) Note above.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 3+ for
    apparatus for, and subclass 362 for processes of spirally covering or
    wrapping a core of indefinite length, and see (1) Note above.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclasses 9, 80 and 190 for incorporating
    unknit material into a knit tube of indefinite length, and see (1) Note
    above.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclass 4 for apparatus for stuffing padding
    material into horse collars.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 409+ for disclosure of a plier type
    tool usable in applying a wire band.

    79,     Button Making, subclass 5 for making cloth covered buttons.

    86,     Ammunition and Explosive-Charge Making, subclasses 23+ for
    ammunition loading, especially subclasses 25+ for loading and closing,
    subclasses 29+ for filling and ramming, subclasses 31+ for filling, and
    subclasses 47+ for cartridge packing.

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, subclass 6 for
    methods of and subclass 29 for apparatus for making tubular fabrics with
    cores, and see (1) Note above.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 1+ for methods and apparatus for applying a
    flexible filament, strand or band binder.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for
    applying a complete or partial coating, including therein devices for
    completely immersing a package, and for applying adhesive to parts of a
    cover.

    131,    Tobacco, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 280+ for
    methods of and apparatus for making cigarettes and cigars, which making
    constitutes, in a final analysis, a mere packaging of tobacco within a
    wrapper or receptacle, and see (1) Note above, subclasses 282 and 283 for
    methods of and apparatus for making tobacco products and packaging them,
    and subclass 107 for processes of and apparatus for bundling or banding a
    plurality of cigars or cigarettes, and see (1) Note.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    for methods of and apparatus for filling receivers (receptacles) with
    fluent materials where making of the receptacle is not involved or where
    the receiver is self closing.  Class 141 takes systems for filling
    receivers which close upon separation or uncoupling from the supply (e.g.,
    valved bags, aerosols).  See particularly subclasses 38, 68, 76, 315, and
    329, but also see subclass 424 of this class (53).  Class 141 also takes
    treatment of the contents material before, during or after placement in the
    receiver provided the treatment is not of the manufacturing type.  See the
    notes and definitions to subclasses 69+ of that class (141) and the Search
    Note in subclass 111 of this class for the limitations as to the type
    treatment which Class 141 will take.  Class 141 also takes gas filling
    and/or evacuating of receivers where no closing is included.  See
    particularly subclasses 4+, 37+ and 65+.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 50+ for match making with or without
    packaging, especially subclass 61 for packaging, per se, of matches.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses as the generic home for processes and apparatus for
    making articles of manufacture by a laminating process.  That class (156)
    also provides for adhering labels, strips or stamps, etc., to packages as
    well as subcombinations of making a container part limited to laminating.
    This class (53) takes such steps or devices combined with packaging, and
    will also take banding an article or package where the band does not adhere
    to the package or article, but only to itself, except where cover material
    is preliminarily formed from a fluent material by Class 264, Plastic and
    Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes, operation which is
    provided for in Class 156.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 125+ for power-stop
    control of packaging machines, or subcombinations thereof, wherein the
    machine or subcombination is broadly claimed, especially subclass 126 for
    sheet material control.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 1 for a method of and apparatus for
    mounting stockings on forms and subclass 54 for machines and machine
    processes for making dress shields.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus, of general utility, for driving a member into a workpiece which
    may be a cover.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 430+ for winding
    elongated material about a core to form an article.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    for processes wherein a cover material, i.e., primary encompassing or
    encasing material, is shaped from a material in a fluent or nonpreformed
    plastic state preliminarily to or simultaneously with a packaging
    operation.  Where a laminating step, e.g., cut seaming, is included in any
    stage of the above indicated procedure, the process is provided for in
    Class 156, Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture.  Class
    264, subclass 4, provides for processes for encapsulating normally liquid
    materials.  See also subclasses 500+ for forming plastic sheets by a fluid
    pressure, e.g., vacuum, and subclasses 241+ for composite article making.

    413,    Sheet Metal Container Making, appropriate subclasses for the method
    and apparatus of manufacturing cans.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 6 for means shaping a fluent material into a casing and means
    simultaneously encapsulating a normally liquid material therein; and
    subclass 524 for means for blow molding a workpiece and simultaneously
    filling that workpiece with the blowing agent, wherein the blowing agent is
    intended to remain a part of the product.  Otherwise, Class 53 provides for
    means shaping or reshaping a plastic combined with means for making a
    package including cover material production (see Class 53 subclasses 111+
    and 140+).

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 392+, for process of packaging food combined with a food working
    step.

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclasses, for processes of
    coating, per se, including processes of coating packages or containers.

    452,    Butchering, subclasses 35+ for sausage stuffers and subclasses 46+
    for sauage linkers.

    453,    Coin Handling, subclasses 31 and 59 for coin handling devices
    including coin group forming means which devices may include packaging
    means.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 51+ for making a container to be
    subsequently filled.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, this is the
    generic class for destroying or permanently containing any form of
    hazardous or toxic waste.  The containment methods include packaging,
    binding, an immobilization of hazardous or toxic waste for the sole intent
    of permanently containing the waste.



    V.      OTHER COVERING

    (1)     Note.  Since covering is a form of assembly, reference is made to
    the notes to Class 29, Metal Working, subclass 234, for assembling of a
    tube and a coextensive core, subclasses 400.1+, for processes of assembly
    and to the notes to subclasses 700+, for apparatus for assembly, and
    particularly subclass 724, for means for assembling a ball or roller
    bearing into races.

    (2)     Note.  Because the related arts have often treated banding and
    binding as equivalents, references to the binding art have been placed in
    section IV, rather than in this section.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 234, 592.1+, 700+, and 724, and see (1)
    Note above.

    100,    Presses, subclass 101 for presses having means for folding a cloth
    to enclose it in the material to be pressed.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for
    applying a complete or partial coating, including devices for completely
    immersing a package.

    270,    Sheet-Material Associating, subclasses 45+ for associating sheets
    and then folding, and subclass 55 for inserting an additional sheet into a
    folded sheet.

    412,    Bookbinding:  Process and Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    processes and apparatuses for manufacturing books.

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclasses for processes of coating,
    per se, including processes of coating packages.


    VI.     PACKAGES, AND PACKAGED AND BANDED ARTICLES

    (1)     Note.  Capsules are found in Class 99, Foods and Beverages:
    Apparatus, appropriate subclasses particularly subclass 140 for capsulated
    condiments; Class 424, Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Composition;
    Class 206, Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 484 for a laminate
    packet; subclasses 46+ for capsulated material in general; Class 128,
    Surgery, subclass 272 for medicator containers of the capsule type, which
    may be of dispensing type, and Class 222, Dispensing, subclasses 92+ for
    collapsible wall type containers with dispensing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 53+ for arm pit shields which are formed by
    encasing an adsorbent material, subclass 66 for muffs, subclasses 267+ and
    see the Notes thereto for encased garment pads.

    5,      Beds, subclasses 636+ for pillows, and subclasses 690+ for
    mattresses.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 56 for strips or ribbons to which seeds
    are secured in spaced relation.

    54,     Harness, subclasses 65+ for harness pads.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 210+ for
    spirally wrapped or covered cores of indefinite length.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclasses 190+ for a knit tube of indefinite
    length having unknit material incorporated therein.

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, subclass 6 for
    tubular fabrics with cores.

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 347+ for tobacco products, especially
    subclasses 360+ for cigars and cigarettes which, in the final analysis
    constitute a mere package of tobacco within a wrapper or receptacle.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, appropriate subclasses, for a
    container, particularly, configured to hold a specific article or
    material-including article(s) or material(s) put up as a mercantile unit,
    particularly subclasses 20+ for special receptacles for matches, subclass
    29 for match packages, subclasses 46+ for capsulated material in general,
    and see Note, above, and see subclass 48 for combined packages of matches
    and cigarettes, subclass 83.5 for bales, and subclasses 139+ for a carrier,
    for potable beverage containers (e.g., cans, bottles, etc.), having means
    to space the containers in a desired arrangement, and additionally having
    hand or finger engaging means to pendulously support the containers.  See
    also subclasses 303+ for a package for an annular article (e.g., tire, wire
    coil, etc.).

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 359 for a receptacle having a closure which
    is removed by breaking through soldered parts.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 92+, and see Note, above.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, for articles of that
    type.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 137 for
    hand-held package or article carriers.

    383,    Flexible Bags, for bags made out of flexible or flaccid material.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 14+,
    for a capsulated composition provided for therein.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 106+, for packaged edible products.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet or miscellaneous coated articles, especially subclass 576 for
    metallic stock so configured as to facilitate its melting or fusing, and
    subclass 583 for metallic stock having a discrete fastener or marginal
    fastening.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 403+ for containers which may have dispensing
    functions.

    VII.    PACKAGING AND BINDING SUBCOMBINATIONS

    (1)     Note.  See Class 221, Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses
    for article dispensers (feeders) not otherwise provided for and see the
    class definition of Class 221 for a statement of the class lines and for
    the disposition of related disclosures of article and strip feeding
    processes and apparatus.

    (2)     Note.  For cutting and/or scoring sheets for cover blanks, see
    Class 83, Cutting, and 493, Manufacturing Container of Tube From Paper; or
    Other Manufacturing From a Sheet or Web, for cutting generally,
    particularly subclasses 879+ for scoring by cutting; and see Class 493,
    Manufacturing Container of Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing From a
    Sheet or Web, subclass 355 for cutting combined with form-scoring; and
    subclasses 396+ for form-scoring generally of a sheet or web.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 16 for bale and package
    ties.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 428+ for a process of assembling
    generally, and subclasses 505+ thereunder for deforming a metal tie around
    a bag neck.  The apparatus for such is classified in Class 29, subclasses
    33.5+ and 243.57+.

    86,     Ammunition and Explosive-Charge Making, subclasses 31+ for filling,
    subclasses 36+ for capping and uncapping, subclasses 39+ for crimping and
    subclasses 45+ for feeding devices.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 1+, particularly subclass 34 for holders for
    material during manual application of a binder.

    112,    Sewing, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclass 11 for
    devices to sew filled sacks, subclass 470.21+ for stringers, 470.35 for
    sewing covers on spherical objects, and subclasses 475.17+ for methods of
    forming stitches.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for
    applying adhesive to parts of a cover.

    131,    Tobacco, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for and methods of
    treating tobacco, and making tobacco products, especially subclasses 280+
    for methods of and apparatus for making cigarettes and cigars.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 50+ for match making, especially subclass
    51 for making of match combs for insertion into match books.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for package making subcombinations relating to the
    manufacture of laminated stock material or seam or joint forming.  This
    class (53) takes package seam forming where means are provided to handle
    the package.  See, also, subclasses 441.5+ for envelope moistening and
    sealing apparatus.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 125+ for power-stop
    controls in general, especially subclass 126 for sheet material control.

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, appropriate subclasses
    for conveyors of the chute, skid, guide and way type, per se.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses for power-driven
    conveyors, particularly subclasses 373+ for a conveyor having means for
    changing the attitude of the conveyed load relative to the conveying
    direction.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 200+, 604, 633, and 767 for electric
    heaters which may be employed for heat sealing packages.

    221,    Article Dispensing, see (1) Note above.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 37+ for garment folders.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, for apparatus, of general
    utility, for applying a member, e.g., nail, to a receptacle or package.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses for crushers, per se, for material.  The material may be in a
    cover such as a bag during the crushing.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses for processes within the class definition for (1)
    stretching and/or shrinking, per se, or combined with a significant molding
    or shaping step and (2) casting or molding.

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses. Class 269 is the residual
    locus for patents to a device for clamping, supporting and/or holding an
    article (or articles) in position to be operated on or treated.  See notes
    thereunder for other related loci.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, appropriate subclasses, for the
    feeding of sheets such as cover sheets, insert sheets, etc.

    283,    Printed Matter, subclasses 21+, for labels and stamps.

    289,    Knots and Knot Tying, appropriate subclasses, for knot tying, and
    subclasses 18.1 for a knot.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 35+ for supports of the
    cabinet type having article containing magazine structures including means
    for facilitating removal of the articles therefrom.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or treating:  Apparatus,
    appropriate subclasses for meat briquette making.

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclasses for coating, per se.

    453,    Coin Handling, subclasses 31, 59 and 61+ for coin handling devices
    including coin group forming means.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, for making a container of paper of for making a
    product form a sheet or web, generally; particularly subclasses 51+ for
    making a container, generally; subclasses 52+ for making a box; and
    subclasses 186+ for making a bag or envelope.  Making a container combined
    with filling that container with a commodity is to be found in this class
    (53).  Placing a cover on a container which is, by disclosure at least,
    filled with a commodity is considered to be packaging and is proper for
    this class (53).




    VIII.   INDEX TO CLASSES REFERRED TO IN                 THIS CLASS

    Class   Class 53 Subclass       Section in Class
                    53 Definition
    2       ----    IV, VI
    5       ----    VI
    7       317, 363        ----
    16      134.1   ----
    19      430     ----
    24      138.1   VII
    28      147, 524        IV
    29      138.4, 285, 291, 302,
            317, 416, 476,
             581    IV, V, VII
    34      403, 557        ----
    44      394, 395        ----
    47      ----    VI
    54      ----    VI
    56      138.1   IV
    57      ----    IV, VI
    62      127, 440        ----
    65      403     ----
    66      ----    IV, VI
    69      ----    IV
    72      138.1, 334, 344 IV
    79      ----    IV
    81      317, 331.5, 363,
            381.1, 403      ----
    83      51, 66, 208, 296,
            389.1, 513, 547,
            552     VII

    86      142, 147, 266.1,
            285     IV, VII
    87      ----    IV, VI
    99      111, 127, 138.1,
            403     ----
    100     77, 113, 138.1, 215,
            257, 258, 285, 341,
            359, 362, 364, 368,
            387.1, 409, 414,
            436, 476, 523   IV, V, VII
    101     131.2, 411      ----
    102     403     ----
    112     138.5, 285, 418,
            476,545 VII

    118     52, 127, 131.1,
            140, 382.1      IV, V, VII
    128     ----    VI
    131     52, 111, 131.2, 138.1,
            147, 211, 215   IV, VI, VII
    134     431     ----
    137     403     ----
    141     52, 73, 77, 79, 84,
            86, 88, 111, 122,
            127, 167, 205, 235,
            237, 242, 243, 245,
            249, 255, 261, 272,
            274, 299, 303, 323,
            367, 368, 381.1,
            390 - 392, 403, 405,
            428, 469, 470, 473,
            493, 502, 505, 507,
            510, 523 - 525, 535,
            570     IV
    144     111, 236, 394,  IV, VII
    152     403     ----
    156     49, 131.2, 135.1, 211, 220,
            376.3, 411, 412,
            415, 429, 430, 441,
            450, 452, 455, 463,
            477, 478, 545, 552,
            558, 559, 562, 569,
            580     IV, VII
    164     423     ----
    177     502     ----
    192     52, 56, 64      IV, VII
    193     152, 248        VII

    198     52, 55, 56, 64, 73,
            92, 148, 152, 299,

            367, 391, 392,

            493, 501, 502, 531,
            544     VII
    206     133.3, 204, 410 - 413, 441      VI
    209     54, 147 VII
    219     80, 83, 266.1, 370.7, 373.7,
            375.9, 376.6, 377.7, 403, 477,
            545, 557, 604, 633, 767 VII
    220     48.1, 133.3, 403        VI
    221     111, 147, 148, 154,
            168, 235, 239, 287,
            295, 304, 308, 507,
            508, 525, 531   ----
     222    111, 147, 403, 502,     VII
            503, 507, 525   VI
    223     117, 403        IV, VII
    224     ----    VI

    226     51, 64, 389.1   VII
    227     128.1, 138      IV, VII
    228     80 - 82, 403, 404       ----
    229     128.1, 169, 410,
            413, 441        VI
    235     55, 493, 501    ----
    241     121     VII
    242     118, 204, 409, 430,
            580     IV
    244     403     ----
    248     390     ----
    252     403     ----
    264     140, 423, 452, 453      IV, VII
    270     117, 157, 429   V, VII
    271     389.1   VII
    279     344, 351, 353, 356      ----
    283     ----    VII
    289     138.1   VII
    294     147, 300        ----
    312     79      VII
    316     403     ----
    366     437, 525        ----
    413     133.3, 285, 290, 334,
            340, 344, 403, 412,
            476     IV, VII
    414     381.1, 531, 535, 541, 542       ----
    417     403     ----
    418     403     ----
    422     403, 425, 426, 431      ----
    423     403     ----
    425     111, 140, 513, 558,
            559, 561        IV, VII
    426     403, 428        IV, VI
    427     411      IV, V, VII
    428     170     VI
    441     403     ----
    446     403     ----
    451     344     ----
    452     255,545 IV
    453     212, 501, 532, 558      IV, VII
    493     48.1, 128.1, 131.2, 133.3,      ----
            134.1, 147, 156, 170,
            175, 205, 208, 290,
            370, 372.8, 381.1, 387.1,
            389.1, 393, 410, 411,
            412, 413, 450, 452
            455, 456, 545, 558,
            562     ----


CLS 53/48.1
TXT MULTIPLE BOTTLE OR CAN CARRIER TYPE PACKAGE:
    Apparatus under the class definition for placing a cover, about a group of
    containers, e.g., bottles or cans, which cover, after being placed about
    the containers has (1) an accessible handle and (2) means to establish the
    spacial relationship of the containers relative to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49+,    for apparatus for applying a cover to an individual bottle.

    134,    for apparatus for making a package having a handle, generally.

    398,    for a method of applying a partial cover over a plurality of
    bottles or cans.

    594,    for apparatus for forming a partial cover leaving a reduced
    projecting portion of the contents exposed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 101 and 102+ for a carrier, e.g., to hold a
    bottle or the like, having a base depending from a handle or for a carrier
    to hold a plurality of said bottles, etc., on a base in a desired spacial
    relationship, regardless of the material from which the carrier is made.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, for a process of or apparatus for making a paper cover
    or wrapper, generally; e.g., for making a wrapper blank with a tear strip
    to be erected to the form of a multiple bottle or multiple can carrier.


CLS 53/48.2
TXT Of shrinkable or memory material:
    Apparatus under subclass 48.1 adapted to supply a cover of material which,
    when thermally or chemically treated, will change size to establish the
    spacial relationship of the containers relative to each other.


CLS 53/48.3
TXT Of stretchable material:
    Apparatus under subclass 48.1 adapted to supply a cover of material which,
    as it is placed about the containers, is stressed within its elastic limit
    so that the cover will change size when removed from the apparatus to
    establish the spacial relationship of the containers relative to each other.


CLS 53/48.4
TXT Continuous web:
    Apparatus under subclass 48.3 particularly adapted to deliver packaging
    material which comprises an elongated sheet, wherein the sheet is of
    sufficient length that at least one of the leading and trailing ends
    thereof is not recognized (engaged) by the delivering apparatus.


CLS 53/48.5
TXT Endless loop:
    Apparatus under subclass 48.1 wherein the cover is a band connected to
    itself.


CLS 53/48.6
TXT Wrap:
    Apparatus under subclass 48.1 intended to place a cover having two ends
    about a group of containers such that the ends overlap.


CLS 53/48.7
TXT Of moving bottles or cans:
    Apparatus under subclass 48.6 intended to place a cover about a group of
    containers as they translate through the apparatus.


CLS 53/48.8
TXT Wrap of preformed blank:
    Apparatus under subclass 48.6 intended to receive stock material for the
    cover which is already cut to shape when it enters the apparatus.


CLS 53/48.9
TXT Having means to interlock or tighten:
    Apparatus under subclass 48.8 intended to utilize a mechanical feature of
    the blank for latching the ends together or for drawing the wrap into
    closer engagement about the containers.


CLS 53/49
TXT Apparatus under the class definition for applying cover material to bottles
    with accommodation of the cover material to a necked-down or progressively
    reduced portion of the bottle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48.1+,  for apparatus for making packages for carrying a plurality of
    bottles.

    287+,   for means for applying separate closures to receptacles including
    hoods or cots for bottles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for apparatus for adhesively securing labels to
    bottles.


CLS 53/50
TXT Apparatus under the class definition for opening a previously filled
    package or receptacle by unfolding one or more folds of the cover or by
    forming or opening a preformed access in the cover, and placing further
    contents within the cover.

    (1)     Note.  The additional contents is usually a coupon or coins.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186+,   for apparatus for opening a collapsed preshaped receptacle and
    filling it.

    266.1+, for apparatus for filling and closing preformed receptacles which
    include opening a flap, lid etc., for filling.

    381.1+, for apparatus for opening a collapsed preshaped receptacle (e.g.,
    bag, envelope) or for manipulating the flaps.


CLS 53/51
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means for insuring that
    prescribed areas of the cover are accurately centered with relation to
    either the contents or opposite edges of the package.

    (1)     Note.  The prescribed area of the cover may, for example, have
    indicia thereon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 72+ for self-regulating web cutting devices and
    subclasses 360+ for cutting devices whose operation is controlled by means
    responsive to work, e.g., photocell sensing of reference marks on web.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 15+ and 27+
    for web registering devices.


CLS 53/52
TXT Apparatus under the class definition for sensing (1) and abnormal or
    undesired condition of the packaging apparatus, (2) a normal or desired
    condition or position of the package, or any component part thereof, (3) an
    abnormal or undesired condition or position of the package, or any
    component part thereof, or (4) the absence of the package or some component
    part thereof; and as a result of this sensing and without external
    intervention, having means to bring about an alteration in the operation or
    control of such apparatus, including the starting or stopping of the drive
    therefor or for some component part thereof, so as to correct, avoid damage
    from, or mitigate the effects of such condition, or to cause the normal
    operation or stopping of the apparatus or some part thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    507,    for sensing or triggering mechanisms which control alarms, signals,
    indicators and counters without bringing about any alteration in the
    operation of the apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 663+ for contents controlled adherent
    applicators, per se.

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 21+ for apparatus and processes relating to
    tobacco manufactures including means responsive to a condition to
    automatically control the apparatus or a part thereof.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 138+ and 156+ for material transfer cycles controlled by
    presence or absence of contents or receiver in material handling systems of
    the separable supply and receiver type.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 125+ for power stop
    control of packaging apparatus or subcombinations thereof wherein the
    apparatus or subcombination is broadly claimed, and see the Notes thereto
    for other types of automatic power stop control.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses for different
    types of conveyors or systems of plural conveyors having operation control
    means responsive to a condition of a conveyor or to a condition of the
    conveyed load.


CLS 53/53
TXT Apparatus under subclass 52 having means which senses packages deficient in
    some respect, and which deflects the defective package from the normal
    delivery path without interrupting the packaging operation on other
    packages.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for apparatus to cause separate delivery of defective contents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses, for methods of and apparatus for classifying, separating and/or
    assorting with separate discharging of sorted articles.


CLS 53/54
TXT Apparatus under subclass 52 which senses a contents, deficient in some
    respect, and which deflects the defective contents from the normal delivery
    path without interrupting the packaging operation on other contents.

    (1)     Note.  Such deficiency may be, for example, a deformed article or
    an incomplete group contents normally composed of two or more elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for apparatus to cause separate delivery of defective packages.

    147+,   for apparatus for accumulating and/or associating a plurality of
    contents portions of a package.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses for methods of and apparatus for classifying, separating and/or
    assorting solids.


CLS 53/55
TXT Apparatus under subclass 52 wherein the control of both the supplying of
    contents and of covers or cover material is simultaneously or conjointly
    effected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64+,    for apparatus for controlling the supply of the cover, or cover
    material without affecting the supply of the contents.

    493,    for apparatus for controlling the supply of the contents without
    affecting the supply of the cover or cover material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclass 132 for apparatus comprising a register and
    means for controlling the movement of articles and receptacles in a
    packaging line upon a particular or predetermined register reading being
    obtained.


CLS 53/56
TXT Apparatus under subclass 55 wherein the condition, presence or absence of a
    contents disables the supply of both the contents and cover or cover
    material to an extent requiring manual intervention to restart.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 125+ for power stop
    control of packaging machines or subcombinations thereof, wherein the
    machine or subcombination is broadly claimed, especially subclass 126 for
    sheet material control.


CLS 53/57
TXT Apparatus under subclass 56 wherein the failure of the apparatus to present
    the contents disables the supply.


CLS 53/58
TXT Apparatus under subclass 55 wherein the effected control is initiated by
    the mere presentation of the contents to the machine, or to some part
    thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for cover or cover material feed, or cover adjunct feed or
    application, triggered by presence of contents.

    76,     for end closing triggered by presence of the package.


CLS 53/64
TXT Apparatus under subclass 52 in which the control effects (1) the cover or
    cover material supply to, or (2) the supply or addition of a cover adjunct
    to, the packaging apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "cover adjunct" see section III of the
    class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55+,    for apparatus for simultaneously or conjointly controlling the
    supply of both the contents and the cover.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 125+ for power stop
    control of packaging apparatus or subcombinations thereof wherein the
    apparatus or subcombination is broadly claimed, especially subclass 126 for
    sheet material control.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    and note especially subclasses 10+ for feeding controlled by
    material-responsive means.


CLS 53/65
TXT Apparatus under subclass 64 wherein an abnormal package or package
    component initiates the operation of a device which brands or otherwise
    identifies the abnormal package or package component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131.2,  for the application of printing to a cover or cover material.


CLS 53/66
TXT Apparatus under subclass 64 in which the amount of cover material cut off
    for each contents unit is controlled by sensing at least one dimension of
    such unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    389.1+, for apparatus for feeding cover material, per se, which may include
    cutting a cover blank from a web.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 72+ and 360+
    for cutting a web responsive to a condition sensing means.


CLS 53/67
TXT Apparatus under subclass 64 wherein the effected control is initiated by a
    sensing of the presence or absence of a preformed receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  See the Class Definition, section III for the meaning of the
    term "receptacle".


CLS 53/68
TXT Apparatus under subclass 67 including means, effective upon the sensing of
    the presence or absence of a preformed receptacle, to remove a previously
    placed closure from assembly position.


CLS 53/69
TXT Apparatus under subclass 67 wherein the sensing is effected during a final
    assembly or juxtapositioning of the component elements.


CLS 53/70
TXT Apparatus under subclass 67 wherein the sensing means actuates an
    electromagnetic control.


CLS 53/71
TXT Apparatus under subclass 67 wherein the sensing means serves to activate or
    deactivate a clutch governing the feed means.


CLS 53/72
TXT Apparatus under subclass 67 wherein the effected control is responsive to a
    sensing of both the preformed receptacle and a closure.


CLS 53/73
TXT Apparatus under subclass 64 in which the sensing of the absence of a
    contents to be packaged interrupts the feeding operation of the cover
    material for that package.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 139 and 153 for automatic control by contents of filling systems
    having means for presenting successive receivers to be filled.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 232 for devices for controlling
    the stopping of a conveyor by the presence or absence of an article thereon.


CLS 53/74
TXT Apparatus under subclass 64 wherein the effected control is initiated by
    the mere presentation of the contents to the machine, or to some part
    thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for concurrent control of contents and cover or cover material
    feeds triggered by presence of contents.

    76,     for end closing triggered by presence of the package.


CLS 53/75
TXT Apparatus under subclass 52 wherein the control effects the encasement of
    the contents by closing the last open side of the cover or receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are devices wherein the control effects the
    opening of a package for purposes of further packaging (e.g., adding
    additional material to the contents).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    285+,   for apparatus for closing packages and filled receptacles.

    381.1+, for a device which opens a package for  further packaging.

    476,    for methods of closing packages and filled receptacles.


CLS 53/76
TXT Apparatus under subclass 75 wherein the effected control is initiated by
    the mere presentation of a package to the machine or some part thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The juxtapositioning and securing of closure to a preformed
    container as virtually a single operation, triggered by the presence of the
    container, has been placed in subclass 67 and no cross-reference to this
    subclass made.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for concurrent control of contents and cover or cover material
    feeds triggered by presence of contents.

    67,     and see (1) Note.

    74,     for cover or cover material feed, or cover adjunct feed or
    application, triggered by presence of contents.


CLS 53/77
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which (1) two or more portions of
    the apparatus having distinct functions each have the regulating elements
    therefor so arranged as to require one element to assume a desired position
    simultaneously or in proper sequence with the position of another element,
    whereby the operation of one part is directly dependent upon the correct
    positioning of the regulating element of another part, or (2) some
    nonautomatic mechanism is so arranged as to prevent operation of part or
    all of the machine when such operation would (a) endanger the person of an
    operator or (b) injure some part of the machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 53 for presses not elsewhere provided for, which
    have interrelated or safety controls.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 97 for filling systems having a guard or screen for the operator;
    subclass 155 for safety-stops or interlocks of the safety type in filling
    systems having means for presenting successive receivers to be filled;
    subclass 346 for interlocks in other filling systems of a separable type.


CLS 53/79
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means to charge and/or
    evacuate receptacles with gas or vapor only combined with means to complete
    the receptacle enclosure.

    (1)     Note.  The Notes under subclasses 403, 405 and 408 must be referred
    to as most of said notes apply to this subclass with equal force.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is restricted to gas or vapor handling in
    combination with closing.  Any additional filling with and/or treatment of
    articles or fluent material require that the combination be classified in
    the appropriate subclasses below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266.1+,for apparatus to the combination of means for filling and closing a
    preformed receptacle; particularly, subclass 267 for gas or vapor handling
    in conjunction with filling and closing of a performed receptacle.

    403+,   for processes of charging receptacles with gas and/or evacuating
    receptacles and completing the enclosure.

    432+,   for the process of treating the contents of a package by
    application of vacuum or gas.

    510+,   for apparatus to treat the contents with a vacuum and/or an inert
    atmosphere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 37+ for closed systems which handle diverse fluids, one usually
    a gas, in such a way as to modify the gaseous content of a receiver, and
    subclasses 65+ for evacuation apparatus including filling with gas.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 31+ for miscellaneous
    containers combined with means to treat contained material or articles with
    a gas or vapor.


CLS 53/80
TXT Apparatus under subclass 79 including means to apply and/or fuse a heat
    sensitive bonding agent to seal or secure the closure of a receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  See (2) Note under subclass 404 for the scope of the term
    "solder", as here used.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404,    for equivalent processes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclasses for solder fusing means
    including electric heating.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, appropriate subclasses for bonding of a cover
    on a container by soldering, brazing or welding without filling of the
    container.


CLS 53/81
TXT Apparatus under subclass 80 limited to the application or juxtapositioning
    of solder and/or flux.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 14 and 33 +for apparatus for
    applying flux or solder in a metal-fusion bonding operation.


CLS 53/82
TXT Apparatus under subclass 80 limited to the means for juxtapositioning the
    heated members or heating members required for fusion of the solder
    material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 25+ and 45 for means to move or
    guide the heated member in a metal fusion bonding operation.


CLS 53/83
TXT Apparatus under subclass 82 wherein the members required to provide fusion
    heat are either electrodes which strike an arc or electrodes that complete
    a circuit including the solder material, which material is heated by the
    flow of current therethrough.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclasses for resistance type
    soldering electrode means.


CLS 53/84
TXT Apparatus under subclass 79 including means to initiate the receptacle
    closing mechanism actuated by pressure sensitive means.

    (1)     Note.  The actuating means is responsive to the gas filling
    pressure or degree of evacuation in the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    269,    for closing mechanism tripped by vented air.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 39+ for automatic control of diverse fluid handling systems in
    response to gas condition in a separable receiver.


CLS 53/85
TXT Apparatus under subclass 79 wherein the completion of a chamber or bell
    about the receptacle initiates the filling and closing cycle of the
    mechanism.


CLS 53/86
TXT Apparatus under subclass 79 including a bell, chamber or vault into which
    the receptacle is placed during the filling and/or evacuating and closing.

    (1)     Note.  Except for valved inlets and outlets, the closed bell,
    chamber or vault is isolated from the atmosphere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 51 for diverse fluid handling systems having gas condition control
    in the housing for a separable receiver.


CLS 53/87
TXT Apparatus under subclass 86 including either (1) a sieve-like device to
    retain contents entrained in the gas or gases being removed from the
    enclosure or (2) a series of varying sized openings through which a vacuum
    is gradually applied to the receptacle.


CLS 53/88
TXT Apparatus under subclass 86 in which the enclosure is restricted to either
    (1) the aperture of the receptacle or (2) the aperture and the adjacent
    portion of the receptacle the rest of the receptacle not being enclosed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    268+,   for similarly restricted enclosure means in conjunction with
    filling (other than or in addition to gas) and closing of receptacles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 287 for devices including a gas expanding seal means between a
    vented filling head and a separable receiver.


CLS 53/89
TXT Apparatus under subclass 86 including means to feed or convey receptacles
    and/or closures into, through and/or out of the filling and closing chamber.

    (1)     Note.  Mere infeed (see definition of terms) at a given work
    station into or out of the bottom of a chamber is not here considered to be
    positioning for this subclass and such handling is to be found throughout
    the subclasses indented under subclass 86.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    268,    for devices which position receptacles and/or closures with respect
    to a common fill-close station.

    276,    for devices which position receptacles and/or closures with respect
    to separate fill-close stations.

    299     through 310, for positioning means in conjunction with devices for
    applying separate closures.


CLS 53/90
TXT Apparatus under subclass 89 including means to pass receptacles and/or
    closures into or out of a chamber without directly exposing the interior of
    said chamber to the atmosphere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    274,    for filling and closing devices including closure port valve means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 217+ for apparatus for
    moving material between zones having different pressures and inhibiting a
    change in the pressure gradient existing therebetween.


CLS 53/91
TXT Apparatus under subclass 90 wherein the receptacle is seated in a concavity
    constrained to move about an axis and alternately open to either the
    chamber or the atmosphere at any one time but not to both simultaneously.


CLS 53/92
TXT Apparatus under subclass 91 wherein a group of radially arranged
    concavities serve both as ingress and exit means for the chamber.


CLS 53/93
TXT Apparatus under subclass 92 wherein a common in-out valve cooperates with
    two or more pocketed rotary members to effect the in-out sealing means.


CLS 53/94
TXT Apparatus under subclass 90 wherein a lock or valve is provided with
    additional means to pass a separate closure member into the chamber.


CLS 53/95
TXT Apparatus under subclass 89 wherein each receptacle is fed or moved into a
    separate chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272     and 276, for plural filling and closing heads rotatively indexing
    and progressively acting.


CLS 53/96
TXT Apparatus under subclass 95 wherein the individual receptacle chambers
    constitute a unitary member.


CLS 53/97
TXT Apparatus under subclass 86 including means to juxtapose and/or secure a
    closure member and receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  Except for representative patents no effort was made to
    cross reference into this subclass (97) the many disclosures of
    conventional assembling means utilized within an enclosure in which the
    assembling means and enclosure means do not coact in an unusual or a more
    than additive manner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    287+,   for separate closure applying, per se.


CLS 53/98
TXT Apparatus under subclass 97 wherein a closure member is urged into sealing
    position on a receptacle by a yieldable means only.

    (1)     Note.  The yielding means is usually for the purpose of retaining a
    closure in approximate sealing position while permitting the escape of gas
    or gases during evacuation of the receptacle, the resulting pressure
    differential then serving to hold the closure in place.


CLS 53/99
TXT Apparatus under subclass 97 wherein a weight acts on a closure member to
    urge said member into sealing position.


CLS 53/100
TXT Apparatus under subclass 99 including means to initiate the action of the
    gravity means.


CLS 53/101
TXT Apparatus under subclass 97 including mechanism to place a closure member
    in sealing position.

    (1)     Note.  The mechanism, here classified, requires machine means to
    effect infeed between the closure and receptacle.  See definitions of terms
    for "infeed".

    (2)     Note.  Sealing position is taken to be the assembled or packaged
    position of the closure which may or may not then be secured to maintain
    said position.


CLS 53/102
TXT Apparatus under subclass 101 including means to provide for uniform
    pressure on a plurality of closure members.


CLS 53/103
TXT Apparatus under subclass 97 wherein the application of atmospheric pressure
    is the means serving to hold or retain a closure in sealing position.


CLS 53/104
TXT Apparatus under subclass 103 including means to augment or increase the
    effective force of atmospheric pressure on a closure member.


CLS 53/105
TXT Apparatus under subclass 103 wherein the atmospheric pressure is exerted or
    applied through a yieldable batt or membrane.


CLS 53/106
TXT Apparatus under subclass 103 wherein the atmospheric pressure is applied or
    exerted against a rigid force transmitting member, the movement of which
    member serves to position the closure for sealing.


CLS 53/107
TXT Apparatus under subclass 106 wherein a separate force transmitting member
    acts to position each closure.


CLS 53/108
TXT Apparatus under subclass 107 wherein the force transmitting member acts
    against the bottom of a receptacle.


CLS 53/109
TXT Apparatus under subclass 86 including means to raise the closure.

    (1)     Note.  The closure is raised to facilitate the passage of gas in or
    out of the receptacle prior to sealing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    343,    for closure applying means including magnetic closure holding means.


CLS 53/110
TXT Apparatus under subclass 79 wherein the closing and charging and/or
    evacuating means are applied to a receptacle while said receptacle, or the
    aperture portion thereof, is partially enveloped by a hood or channel.

    (1)     Note.  The hood or channel serve to provide a measure of control
    over the nature of the gaseous atmosphere about the aperture portion of the
    receptacle.


CLS 53/111
TXT Apparatus under the class definition combined with means for subjecting the
    contents material, either before, after or during packaging, to an agency
    which alters a physical or chemical characteristic of the contents material
    or which prevents a constituent of the ambient atmosphere, or another
    ambient condition from altering a physical or chemical characteristic of
    the contents material.

    (1)     Note.  Other main classes appropriate to the type of treatment must
    be searched in addition to those listed hereunder as search classes.

    (2)     Note.  Mere change of position of separate contents parts relative
    to one another, as by accumulating separate contents units into a group, or
    flowing fluent material into a receptacle, such as a contents charge
    holding chamber, is not regarded as treating the contents to change a
    physical property. Group forming of contents units combined with subsequent
    or further packaging is included in this class (53) in subclasses 147+.
    Apparatus having a contents charge holding chamber is not set out
    separately in this class (53), but may appear in any subclass.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass includes apparatus having means to emboss a
    design or lettering upon the contents.  See subclasses 113+ indented
    hereunder for apparatus having means to reshape the contents particularly
    subclass 122 for molding or plastic deformation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113+,   see (3) Note above.

    122,    see (3) Note above.

    131.2+,for apparatus for package making including means for printing to
    form an adjunct on a cover.

    135.1+,for apparatus for package making including means to apply a
    nonencircling strip, e.g., a stamp, label or gap filler.

    147+,   see (2) Note above.

    428,    for corresponding methods.

    525,    see (2) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 352+ for apparatus to
    make an edible composite (e.g., pie, etc.) combined with cooking means.

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 282 and 283 for tobacco products manufacture
    combined with packaging.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 69 for filling receivers with fluent material including treating
    the contents when the treatment is of the "nonmanufacturing" type.  Any
    treatment which, per se, would be included in any of the manufacturing
    classes as set forth in section III on pages VI and VII of the Manual of
    Classification has not been considered mere material handling for Class 141
    and will be found in this and indented subclasses in Class 53.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 50+ for combined apparatus for or method of
    making and packaging matches.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 135+ for article dispensing
    apparatus having means to treat the articles dispensed.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 190 for fluent material dispensing apparatus
    having miscellaneous means to treat the material dispersed, and see the
    search notes to that subclass for other material treating combinations in
    the class.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 112 for mold means to form a composite article from a preform and
    plastic material and means to reshape the preform.


CLS 53/113
TXT Apparatus under subclass 111 in which the contents material as a result of
    the agency action undergoes a change in size, configuration or proportion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111,    for packaging apparatus combined with means for embossing a design
    or lettering upon the contents.

    147,    for apparatus for reorienting a plurality of contents portions to
    change the shape of the groups contents without changing the shape of the
    individual contents portions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 31+ especially subclass 31 for means to coil
    wire, strands or hose combined with banding and/or binding mechanisms.


CLS 53/114
TXT Apparatus under subclass 113 for enclosing helical springs within a cover.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes apparatus for turning an already
    encased coil spring within its cover.


CLS 53/115
TXT Apparatus under subclass 113 for positioning over the contents of
    receptacle a material to occupy substantially the remainder of the
    receptacle to prevent movement of the contents.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes inserting cotton into a bottle of
    pills and conforming the cotton to the shape of the bottle.


CLS 53/116
TXT Apparatus under subclass 113 in which flexible contents undergoes a
    doubling or winding operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    429,    for methods of folding.

    430,    for methods of winding.


CLS 53/117
TXT Apparatus under subclass 116 wherein the contents is thin relative to its
    length and breadth.

    (1)     Note.  Flat garments are regarded as sheet material for this
    subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 37, for garment folders.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 405+ for folding, per se, of a sheet or web.


CLS 53/118
TXT Apparatus under subclass 117 in which the contents material is coiled upon
    itself by rotation of the entire contents.

    (1)     Note.  Opposite margins of the contents material must be brought at
    least to overlapping relation for the operation to be considered winding or
    coiling for this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 520+, particularly
    subclass 528 for convolutely winding material to form a storage coil.


CLS 53/119
TXT Apparatus under subclass 118 in which the winding or coiling is around a
    core which is gapped to receive the edge of the sheet material.


CLS 53/120
TXT Apparatus under subclass 117 in which the contents is folded upon itself by
    forcing the material between spaced abutments by means of a thin edge
    travelling between the abutments.


CLS 53/121
TXT Apparatus under subclass 113 in which the contents material is subjected to
    mechanical forces which cause indiscriminate breakage of larger masses of
    the material into smaller masses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses for crushers, per se, for material.  The material may be in a
    cover such as a bag during the crushing.  See especially subclass 100 for
    crushers with independent removable or detachable material receiver or
    receiver engaging means.


CLS 53/122
TXT Apparatus under subclass 113 in which the material is subjected to a
    pressure and/or temperature which will cause the material to flow until it
    assumes the form of a confining structure.

    (1)     Note.  The confining structure is frequently a container but may be
    the nozzle of a die expressing press.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111+,   for packaging apparatus combined with means for embossing a design
    or lettering upon the contents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    appropriate subclasses, for filling systems in which plastic material is
    extruded into a preformed receiver by a discharge assistant which may or
    may not have the same outlet area and shape as the receiver.


CLS 53/127
TXT Apparatus under subclass 111 in which the material is subjected to a
    treatment which either raises or lowers the temperature of the contents
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    373.7,  for apparatus for heating or cooling an out turned seam of the
    cover material, and see the notes thereto for other heating or cooling of
    the cover material.

    440,    for corresponding methods.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclasses for refrigeration processes
    and apparatus, particularly subclass 60 for methods involving specific
    refrigerating steps combined with packaging, subclass 322 for disparate
    treating apparatus serially arranged with refrigeration means, subclass 331
    for a refrigerator combined with other structure, and subclasses 340+ for
    refrigeration means producing a shaped product.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 359+, for apparatus for
    heat treating food packages in containers.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 58+ for apparatus for combined
    coating and heat treatment of work.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 82 for apparatus for filling receivers with fluent materials
    including means to heat or cool the contents, and see the search notes
    thereto for other material handling means with heating or cooling.


CLS 53/128.1
TXT WITH COVER-ADJUNCT APPLICATION OR FORMATION:
    Apparatus under the class definition which performs an operation with
    respect to the cover* to supply thereto some accessory, device or abiding
    characteristic in addition to or beyond the mere enclosure of the contents.

    (1)     Note.  See section III, of the class definition, for the meaning of
    the terms "cover" and "cover-adjunct".  An asterisk (*) is used in these
    subclasses to designate terms that are so defined.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141,    for packaging apparatus combined with means to condition the cover
    material effective during the packaging operation.

    208,    for apparatus to wrap packages combined with means to notch or slit
    the cover blank.

    410+,   for a process of package making including application of an adjunct
    to a cover member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, for apparatus for driving a
    member, e.g., a nail or a staple.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, especially subclasses
    124+ for a paperboard box with a closure for access opening, subclasses 48+
    for a box including a seam, and subclasses 76+ for an envelope having a
    closure.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, especially subclass 89 for apparatus to fold a box
    blank into shape and to apply metal stays thereto.


CLS 53/129.1
TXT Adjunct comprising packing disk, sealing gasket, or "spot" applied to a
    closure:Apparatus under subclass 128.1 wherein the package made includes a
    first portion that contains most of the packaged material and a second
    portion that serves to complete the containment; i.e., a closure*, which
    apparatus includes means to supply a contents contacting protective
    element, as for example, a foil, a disc, etc., to the closure* with
    substantially simultaneous  assembling of the first and second portion to
    close the package.


CLS 53/130.1
TXT Adjunct comprising closure retainer seated into and depressed with portion
    of bottle hood:Apparatus under subclass 128.1 for use with a container
    comprising a rigid vessel having a neck with an opening at its extent to
    receive a cap, which container is packaged by a hood, i.e., a cap and neck
    covering member, which apparatus includes means to insert a cap securing
    member, usually a disc, into the hood so as to depress said member and a
    portion of said hood to exert pressure on the cap.


CLS 53/131.1
TXT Adjunct comprising protective coating:
    Apparatus under subclass 128.1 which includes means to supply a fluid film
    or impregnant on a surface of the cover material or a part thereof during
    some portion of the operation of forming a package, which supplied film or
    impregnant serves to prevent damage to the cover material or to the
    contents of the package.

    (1)     Note.  Exception is made in the case of application of bonding
    material such as an adhesive or solvent in that this material is not
    regarded as producing an adjunct to the cover in view of the common
    practice to so seal the seams of a cover.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141,    for a package making apparatus with means to subject the cover to
    an operation which causes some transient change in a chemical or physical
    property thereof prior to its fabrication into a package.

    170+,   for apparatus for applying a plurality of covers formed from sheet
    material to a package.

    411,    for a method of packaging including application of a protective
    coating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, for apparatus for coating a web, a cover blank
    or a completed package, generally.

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 284 for cigar or cigarette making combined with
    coating.


CLS 53/131.2
TXT By printing:
    Apparatus under subclass 128.1 which includes means to supply recognizable
    indicia or a design on a surface of the cover or cover adjunct by
    impression of a type or die or by applying coating material thereto through
    openings of pervious portions of a pattern sheet, as in stenciling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65,     for a packaging making apparatus wherein an abnormal or defective
    package or package component, or a printed mark, initiates the operation of
    a device which bands or otherwise identifies the abnormal package or
    package component.

    111+,   for package making apparatus with contents treating, such as
    printing on contents.  See (3) Note under that subclass definition.

    411,    for a method of packaging including printing on the cover or an
    adjunct.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, for printing apparatus, per se, especially subclasses 35+
    for apparatus to imprint on a special article.

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 284 for cigar or cigarette making combined with
    printing.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    384+ for laminating apparatus combined with printing means.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 187+ for bag or envelope making apparatus
    having a printing attachment.


CLS 53/131.3
TXT On cover having separate closure or on such a separate closure:Apparatus
    under subclass 131.2 wherein the package made includes a first portion that
    contains most of the packaged material and a second portion that serves to
    complete the containment, wherein the recognizable indicia or design is
    supplied to either the first or the second portion.


CLS 53/131.4
TXT Before or during packaging:
    Apparatus under subclass 131.2 wherein the recognizable indicia or design
    is supplied to the cover prior to formation of a package, or simultaneously
    therewith.


CLS 53/131.5
TXT On continuous web:
    Apparatus under subclass 131.4 wherein the cover to which the recognizable
    indicia or design is supplied is in the form of a flat strip having no more
    than one utilized end at the time of application.

    (1)     Note.  A coil of web material is considered to be a continuous web.


CLS 53/132.1
TXT Adjunct comprising lever actuated to constrict passage of contents into
    package:Apparatus under subclass 128.1 wherein the supplied accessory
    serves to throttle flow or movement of material into or out of the package
    and includes a pivotally swinging protuberance manipulated to effect such
    throttling.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are devices which assemble the closure onto
    the receptacle and then operate the lever as well as devices which merely
    operate the lever.


CLS 53/133.1
TXT Adjunct comprising provision to allow access to contents, e.g., spout,
    straw, drain, opening, etc.:Apparatus under subclass 128.1 for supplying
    structure associated with the cover material to permit input or removal of
    a part or all of the contents.

    (1)     Note.  A cap on a container is part of the container, therefore is
    not an adjunct.  However, an addition to a cap, e.g., a string on the cap
    to facilitate removal of the cap, is such an adjunct.


CLS 53/133.2
TXT Fitment to dispense flowable contents, e.g., spout:
    Apparatus under subclass 133.1 wherein the contents access comprises a
    structure distinct from the package, but attached thereto.

    (1)     Note.  Attachment may be permanent, as by fusion so that the
    fitment may become integral with the package.

    (2)     Note.  A cap is part of the cover, therefore a cap is not
    considered to be a fitment.


CLS 53/133.3
TXT Adjunct comprising provision to open package:
    Apparatus under subclass 133.1 for forming on, applying to, or otherwise
    making provision for some structure associated with the cover material
    which will modify at least a portion of the cover to expose a part or all
    of the contents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133.1,  for packaging of flowable contents in an openable package,
    generally.

    412,    for a method of package making including forming or applying a
    cover adjunct comprising a package opening device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 265+ for devices to open metallic
    receptacles by breaking through or ripping the soldered parts.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 200+ for a
    paperboard box having severing means.

    413,    Sheet Metal Container Making, subclass 15 for the method of forming
    a frangible area in a can lid.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 212+ for making a pliable container
    including applying a tear strip thereto.


CLS 53/133.4
TXT Reclosable:
    Apparatus under subclass 133.3 wherein the supplied access is intended to
    be opened and closed, repeatedly.


CLS 53/133.5
TXT Tear string or tape under cover:
    Apparatus under subclass 133.3 including means to install a round or flat
    strand under a package cover which is intended to be pulled at one end to
    rip the package to yield access to the contents.


CLS 53/133.6
TXT Cover weakened for tearing:
    Apparatus under subclass 133.5 wherein the supplied access comprises a
    portion of the cover* having less strength than other portions thereof, so
    that upon application of sufficient force the cover will rend such that the
    contents can be removed or added.


CLS 53/133.7
TXT With graspable tab on cover or adjunct:
    Apparatus under subclass 133.5 wherein said cover or adjunct has a member
    to be engaged by the hand of a user to assist in application of force to
    rend the cover.

    (1)     Note.  Parallel notches in the cover may provide a graspable tab
    for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133.3,  for a graspable tab without a tear string.


CLS 53/133.8
TXT Cover weakened for tearing, e.g., having integral tear strip:Apparatus
    under subclass 133.3 wherein the supplied access comprises a portion of the
    cover* having less strength than other portions thereof, so that upon
    application of sufficient force the cover will rend such that the contents
    can be removed or added.


CLS 53/134.1
TXT Adjunct comprising graspable appendage, e.g., handle:
    Apparatus under subclass 128.1 for supplying to the cover some extension
    particularly adapted to be gripped by the hand of a user.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for apparatus for making a package for carrying a plurality of
    bottles or cans.

    176,    for apparatus for making a package by applying plural layer covers,
    where one of the layers is a band.

    413,    for a method of package making including formation or application
    of a handle.

    582,    for apparatus for making a package by applying a band or tube
    contents.

    594,    for apparatus to apply a cover to contents which have an extending,
    reduced handle portion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 110+ for a handle, per se, and
    see the search notes thereto.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclass 88 for making a rigid container from a sheet
    or web, combined with assembling a handle therewith, and subclass 226 for
    making a pliable container from a sheet or web, combined with assembling a
    handle therewith.


CLS 53/134.2
TXT For permeable package, e.g., tea bag:
    Apparatus under subclass 134.1 wherein the package comprises a cover
    through which liquid is intended to pass to allow access of the liquid to
    the contents of the package and wherein the appendage comprises a strand
    attached to the cover to assist in removal of the package from such liquid.


CLS 53/135.1
TXT Adjunct comprising nonencircling strip, e.g., stamp, label or gap
    filler:Apparatus under subclass 128.1 for supplying an area of sheet
    material of less extent than a complete encirclement of the package to a
    surface of the cover material, or for supplying a sheet of material to the
    cover so as to fill the space resulting from failure of the edges of
    opposite flaps to abut or overlap each other.

    (1)     Note.  The sheet material of this definition may be or may not be
    preprinted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111+,   for package making apparatus with contents treating, such as
    applying a label to contents.  See (3) Note under that subclass definition.

    131.2+, for packaging apparatus including means for imprinting directly on
    the cover or on a cover adjunct.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    349+ for surface bonding apparatus, generally.


CLS 53/135.2
TXT Applied to cover material before packaging:
    Apparatus under subclass 135.1 wherein the strip is supplied to the cover*
    prior to formation of the package.


CLS 53/135.3
TXT Applied to continuous web material:
    Apparatus under subclass 135.2 wherein the strip is supplied to cover
    material having no more than one utilized end at the time when the strip is
    supplied thereto.

    (1)     Note.  A coil of web material is considered to be "continuous".


CLS 53/136.1
TXT Applied to package:
    Apparatus under subclass 135.1 wherein the package has been made at the
    time when the strip is supplied thereto.


CLS 53/136.2
TXT Applied to end of roll:
    Apparatus under subclass 136.1 wherein the package made is cylindrical and
    wherein the strip is attached to a face normal to the axis of the package.


CLS 53/136.3
TXT To seal package:
    Apparatus under subclass 136.1 wherein the strip is intended to function to
    prevent contents from escaping or to keep contaminating material from
    entering the package or hold portions of the cover in closed position.

    (1)     Note.  An envelope is included as a package in this subclass. An
    envelope is not considered to be three dimensional.


CLS 53/136.4
TXT Box:
    Apparatus under subclass 136.3 wherein the cover is three dimensional and
    is rigid, i.e., is intended to generally retain its shape during use.

    (1)     Note.  Means to apply an adjunct to a glass jar is not included
    herein.


CLS 53/136.5
TXT Bag:
    Apparatus under subclass 136.3 wherein the cover is three dimensional and
    is flaccid, i.e., is intended to not retain its shape during use.


CLS 53/137.1
TXT Adjunct comprising bottle hood securing means:
    Apparatus under subclass 128.1 for use with a container comprising a rigid
    vessel having a neck with an opening at its extent to receive a cap, which
    container is packaged by a hood, i.e., a cap and neck covering member,
    which apparatus includes means to supply structure to hold the hood in
    position on the vessel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130.1,  for package making including supplying an adjunct comprising a
    closure retainer seated into and depressed with a portion of bottle hood.


CLS 53/137.2
TXT Adjunct comprising package encircling sealing strip:
    Apparatus under subclass 128.1 for applying a strip of less width than the
    cover, but completely encircling the package to secure or render airtight
    separate parts of the cover.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    419,    for a method of package making including formation of a cover
    adjunct comprising an encircling sealing strip.

    580,    for devices for applying cover material and leaving a portion of
    the contents exposed and see the notes thereto for the locus of other
    patents relating to partial cover application.


CLS 53/138.1
TXT Adjunct comprising provision to secure cover:
    Apparatus under subclass 128.1 wherein an accessory is supplied to hold the
    cover* in position about the contents of the package.

    (1)     Note.  A metallic ring or wire band contracted or crimped onto the
    closure member is considered to be a binding element and the application of
    such ring or band is to be found in this and the indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass are devices for applying an
    elastic band to secure a hood or cap onto a bottle.

    (3)     Note.  For binding which is  elsewhere classified, see section IV
    of the class definition. For the meaning of binding, see class definition
    section III.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136.3+, for means to apply a label to a package to secure the cover.

    176,    for package making apparatus including means to apply plural layer
    covers, where one of the layers is a string, a wire, or a band.

    416,    for a method of package making including forming a cover adjunct
    including fastening or sealing.

    582,    for apparatus to merely apply a band or tube over the contents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 16 for bale or package
    ties.

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 342+ for combined compressing and binding,
    and see (1) Note above.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 409.01+ for disclosure of a plier type
    tool usable in applying a wire band.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 350 for cooking apparatus
    in which a food support encircles the article and compresses the food
    therein, solely by said encirclement and not by end closures or the like.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 1+ for binding material in a flexible filament,
    strand or band.

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 15 for wrappers or binders for tobacco products.

    289,    Knots and Knot Tying, appropriate subclasses for knot tying.


CLS 53/138.2
TXT Staple or clip:
    Apparatus under subclass 138.1 wherein the accessory comprises a bifurcated
    member intended to (1) pierce cover material or other material with
    generally parallel bifurcations or (2) grip cover material between
    generally parallel bifurcations and thereby secure closure of the cover.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus to apply a staple or a clip to secure two portions
    of a cover is included herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    driving a member, e.g., a staple into work.


CLS 53/138.3
TXT Bag closing:
    Apparatus under subclass 138.2 wherein the cover secured is three
    dimensional, i.e., has a bottom and side walls but is open at the top, and
    is intended to not retain its shape during use, which apparatus applies the
    bifurcated member to secure to top of the cover closed.

    (1)     Note.  An envelope is not considered to be "three dimensional" and
    therefore an apparatus for closing an envelope with a staple or a clip is
    not considered proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    417,    for a method of package making including applying a fastener to a
    gathered bag neck.


CLS 53/138.4
TXT Deformed staple or clip:
    Apparatus under subclass 138.3 including means to stress the securing means
    beyond its elastic limit to grip the cover material between generally
    parallel bifurcations and thereby secure closure of the cover.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    417,    for a method of package making including applying a fastener to a
    gathered bag neck.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 243.56 for a clip applier to assemble a
    clip over the edge of a member and subclass 243.57 for means to assemble a
    clip over the edge of a member to bind two elements or a cover to a base.


CLS 53/138.5
TXT Adjunct comprising sewn seam:
    Apparatus under subclass 138.1 comprising means to stitch the cover.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    418,    for package making including formation of a cover adjunct and
    fastening by sewing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, subclass 110 for apparatus to sew bags and subclass 11 for
    devices to sew filled sacks.


CLS 53/138.6
TXT Tie string or wire:
    Apparatus under subclass 138.1 wherein the accessory applied comprises a
    strand, generally round in cross-section, made of nonmetal or of metal
    which serves to hold the cover in position about the contents of the
    package.


CLS 53/138.7
TXT Bag closing:
    Apparatus under subclass 138.6 wherein the cover secured is three
    dimensional, i.e., has a bottom and side walls but is open at the top, and
    is intended to not retain its shape during use, which apparatus applies a
    member to secure the top of the cover closed.


CLS 53/138.8
TXT Twisting of string or wire:
    Apparatus under subclass 138.7 wherein securement of the strand about the
    package is effected by helically co-wrapping one portion of the strand
    about another.


CLS 53/139.1
TXT Bag banding:
    Apparatus under subclass 138.1 wherein the cover secured is three
    dimensional, i.e., has a bottom and side walls but is open at the top, and
    is intended to not retain its shape during use, which apparatus wraps a
    tape or web member about the top to close and secure the top of the cover.


CLS 53/139.2
TXT Reclosable, e.g., ziplock (TM) or with valve:
    Apparatus under subclass 138.1 wherein the supplied access is intended to
    be opened and closed, repeatedly.


CLS 53/139.4
TXT Adjunct comprising string or wire:
    Apparatus under subclass 128.1 wherein the accessory applied comprises a
    strand, generally round in cross-section, made of nonmetal or of metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    414,    for a method of package making including forming a binding string
    thereon.


CLS 53/139.5
TXT Adjunct comprising means to protect contents, e.g., padding or
    spacer:Apparatus under subclass 128.1 comprising structure to prevent
    damage to the material inside the package.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a member to cushion the contents or to
    serve as a spacer between the contents and the cover.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    411,    for a method of package making including application of a
    protective coating.

    472,    for a method of packaging including wrapping and cover forming with
    application of a protective media (e.g., shock absorbing).


CLS 53/139.6
TXT To protect contents from binder:
    Apparatus under subclass 139.5 comprising structure to prevent damage to
    material inside the package from physical force of a relatively narrow
    strand or band on the package.


CLS 53/139.7
TXT Adjunct comprising edge protector:
    Apparatus under subclass 139.5 wherein the package includes two surfaces
    meeting at approximately 90 degrees or sharper and wherein the means to
    protect serves to prevent damage to the meeting line of the two surfaces.


CLS 53/140
TXT Apparatus under the class definition for creating or generating the cover
    material into a sheet or sheet-like form.

    (1)     Note.  The generation of a thin tubular stock material is
    considered to be the production of a sheet-like form and will be found here.

    (2)     Note.  The casting or molding of discrete container-like elements,
    even though the walls are relatively thin, and which elements are later
    filled and closed, is not considered to be the production of a sheet-like
    form, such apparatus being classified in Class 425, Plastic Article or
    Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus.

    (3)     Note.  The mere formation of a thin enclosing cover upon an article
    by a coating operation, e.g., by spraying or immersion is found in Class
    118, Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses and in the special case
    where the enclosed material is in the form of a liwuid which is coated by
    immersion, the apparatus will be classified in Class 425, Plastic Article
    or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus, subclass 5.

    (4)     Note.  The encapsulating of liwuid by extrusion of both a drop and
    encapsulating material from a nozzle and hardening the composite drop as
    formed will be found in Class 264, Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping
    or Treating:  Processes, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclass 4.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, and see (3) Note above.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    and see (4) Note above.


CLS 53/141
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the cover material prior to
    its fabrication into a package or package element, is subjected to a means
    which causes some transient change in a physical or a chemical property of
    the cover material to modify its work-ability during packaging.

    (1)     Note.  Heating or cooling of the cover material and/or closure
    elements to improve the holding, shaping or adhering qualities are here
    classified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128.1+, for apparatus which adds some abiding feature to the cover material.

    373.7,  for apparatus for heating or cooling an out turned seam of the
    cover material and see the notes thereto for other heating or cooling of
    the cover material.


CLS 53/142
TXT Apparatus under the class definition for packaging articles which have an
    enlargement at one end thereof or which are larger at one end than at the
    other, having means utilizing this shape in the handling of the articles or
    arranging the articles so as to form a substantially uniform package.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236,    for apparatus for filling receptacles with matches and wherein the
    apparatus does not utilize the heads of the matches in handling nor reverse
    a portion of the matches in the receptacle.

    594,    for apparatus for applying a partial cover to objects such as
    lollipops and leaving an exposed reduced end portion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    86,     Ammunition and Explosive-Charge Making, subclass 47 for means for
    packing cartridges.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 788.2+ for means
    superposing or imbricating tapered or nested articles.


CLS 53/143
TXT Apparatus under subclass 142 having means to turn at least one of the
    articles through an angle of 180_ with respect to the other articles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    544,    for apparatus for forming a contents group and inverting at least
    one of the portions with respect to the other portions and wherein the
    contents portions are not tapered or headed articles.


CLS 53/144
TXT Apparatus under subclass 143 for depositing a portion of the articles in a
    receptacle, turning the receptacle through an angle of 180_ and depositing
    another portion of the articles.


CLS 53/145
TXT Apparatus under the class definition for facilitating the formation of
    attractive display layers of articles.

    (1)     Note.  The display layer is usually packed by hand with the use of
    a facing plate and the remainder of the articles disposed in random or bulk
    arrangement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    390+,   for packing tables, conveyor arrangements, etc., to facilitate
    manual packaging.

    531+,   for forming multiple layers or columns of articles into groups and
    subsequently packaging same.


CLS 53/146
TXT Apparatus under subclass 145 including a surface upon which the display
    layer is placed, the profile of the surface being alterable.

    (1)     Note.  The contour of the facing plate is usually made convex to
    place the display layer thereon and then concave to receive the remainder
    of the contents.


CLS 53/147
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means for accumulating
    and/or associating a plurality of contents portions of a package, by means
    of a plurality of feeding operations prior to completion of a package unit,
    and for subsequently packaging the collected portions as a unit.

    (1)     Note.  Feeding of similar articles from a single hopper having its
    discharge end divided into a plurality of separate or segregated channels
    has been considered to constitute a plurality of feeding operations within
    the terms of this and the subclasses indented hereunder.

    (1.5)   Note.  Packaging apparatus which feeds a plurality of contents
    portions from plural sources or a multiple channeled hopper directly into a
    receiver by the same feeding operation and in which no further packaging is
    performed (e.g., wrapping, closing) is not considered to involve subsequent
    packaging for this or indented subclasses.

    (1.7)   Note.  The plurality of feeding operations for this and indented
    subclasses must place the contents portions in the same relationship that
    they are to assume in the final package.

    (2)     Note.  The contents portions which comprise the group may be
    identical, dissimilar in physical and/or chemical properties, or of similar
    size and shape but differing in some property, such as color or taste.

    (3)     Note.  Packaging apparatus in which a plurality of contents
    portions are segregated as a unit from a single mass or magazine of such
    portions, are classified as if the contents were comprised of but a single
    portion.

    (4)     Note.  Apparatus to assemble paper articles in bunches, and
    bunching of paper articles plus the application to the bunch of a string,
    cord or other securing means adapted to be knotted, will be found in 493,
    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing From a
    Sheet or Web, subclasses 374+, unless the securing means forms and adjunct
    to a cover, for which see this class (53), subclass 134.1, or the securing
    means is a band, for which see this class, subclasses 198+.  For other
    apparatus to apply a knotted binding member, see section IV (2) Note, and
    for other apparatus to apply a band, see section I the definition of this
    class (53).

    (5)     Note.  The inner cover or covers of plural cover members do not
    constitute contents portions within the scope of this or of the subclasses
    indented hereunder, but have had separate provision made therefor for which
    see subclasses 169, 170+, 286, 449, and 558.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for automatic or triggered control apparatus including means to
    cause separate delivery of an incomplete or defective contents portion or
    contents group.

    60,     for apparatus including automatic or triggered control of contents
    feed effected by absences of part of group contents.

    61+,    for apparatus to control the feed of a contents group, triggered by
    completion of the group.

    134.1,  and see (4) Note above.

    142+,   for forming a group of tapered or headed articles and subsequently
    packaging same.

    168,    for apparatus providing for separate or alternate supply of plural
    contents, packaged singly.

    169,    170+, 558, and see (5) Note above.

    237,    for depositing contents from a plurality of different contents
    sources into a single receiver or receptacle.

    244+,   for successively depositing articles in a receiver or receptacle.

    247,    for simultaneously depositing a plurality of articles in a receiver
    or receptacle.

    286,    and see (5) Note above.

    443,    for corresponding methods of packaging.

    449,    and see (5) Note above.

    513,    for packaging apparatus in which a  plurality of similar contents
    portions are produced by cutting or severing them from a larger amount of
    the contents material.

    582,    and see (4) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles: Manufacturing, subclasses 289+ for devices to form skeins
    of filamentary stock, such as yarn, and to secure the so gathered stock
    into a package by means of a strand.

    86,     Ammunition and Explosive-Charge Making, subclasses 23+ for
    apparatus to load ammunition.

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 25 for cigar and cigarette making combined with
    collecting, arranging, packing or packaging, subclass 107 for processes and
    apparatus for tying cigars and cigarettes in bundles, and subclasses 112+
    for processes and apparatus for packing plugs or shapes in groups or
    bundles.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 418+ for a system of plural
    conveyors having means for establishing and moving a group of items, and
    subclasses 434+ for a system of plural conveyors having means arranging or
    rearranging a stream or streams of items.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses for methods of and apparatus for classifying, separating and/or
    assorting solids.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 92+ for article dispensers not
    otherwise classified having a plurality of separate sources stacks or
    compartments, at least one having article dispensing means.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 129+ for fluent material dispensing
    containers having a plurality of separate compartments, at least one having
    dispensing means.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, appropriate subclasses
    for hand manipulated devices for gathering units into a group.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, and see (4) Note above.


CLS 53/148
TXT Apparatus under 147 in which the contents portions comprise articles the
    diameter or width of which is very small compared to the length.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses include patents for apparatus
    for forming cigarettes into groups for packaging, but in which the
    subsequent packaging operation is not claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236,    for apparatus for depositing long slender articles in receptacles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for article dispensing,
    per se.


CLS 53/149
TXT Apparatus under subclass 148 for forming a group of articles in juxtaposed
    rows or layers, the numbers of articles contained in any two adjacent
    layers being different.


CLS 53/150
TXT Apparatus under subclass 148 for forming a plurality of separate rows or
    layers of articles and then juxtaposing the rows so formed or for
    juxtaposing a plurality of previously formed rows of articles.


CLS 53/151
TXT Apparatus under subclass 148 having a source of supply for the articles,
    the outlet of the source being divided into a plurality of adjacent
    channels or ways from which the articles are removed as a group.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 311, 359+, and 523+ inter alia
    for a chute or other gravity conveyor combined with a power-driven conveyor.


CLS 53/152
TXT Apparatus under subclass 147 having a plurality of substantially horizontal
    channels or tracks spaced in a vertical plane in which articles are
    deposited to form a group and then concurrently ejected therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, appropriate subclasses
    for a single chute feeding a plurality of chutes.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 788.1+ for means for
    forming vertical self-sustaining or stable stacks of articles.


CLS 53/153
TXT Apparatus under subclass 152 for forming a plurality of horizontally spaced
    groups or layers of articles in the channels or ways, all of the groups
    then being simultaneously ejected from the channels.


CLS 53/154
TXT Apparatus under subclass 147 in which the plural feeding operations are
    from two or more distinct contents retainers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168,    for apparatus having selective or alternate supply of plural covers
    and/or plural contents.

    237+,   for apparatus for depositing contents in a receptacle from two or
    more distinct contents sources.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, for article dispensers, per se.


CLS 53/155
TXT Apparatus under subclass 154 for packaging in which the external contours
    or physical dimensions of the contents portions are so different as to
    require dissimilar feed mechanisms.


CLS 53/156
TXT Apparatus under subclass 155 for packaging in which at least one of the
    contents portions is of sheet material which is either flat or bent up to
    partly encircle another portion of the contents and is of sufficient
    rigidity to materially assist the cover in establishing or maintaining the
    desired shape of the completed package.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclass 89 for making a rigid container including
    assembling therewith structure reinforcement.


CLS 53/157
TXT Apparatus under subclass 155 in which at least one of the portions of the
    contents is very thin in relation to its length and breadth.

    (1)     Note.  The inserted sheet may carry preinscribed indicia thereon,
    such as a label, coupon, advertising matter, instructions pertaining to
    other parts of the contents, etc.

    (2)     Note.  The inserted sheet may be placed between other contents
    portions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111,    for devices combined with a packaging apparatus to imprint on the
    contents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    270,    Sheet-Material Associating, subclasses 52.19+ for inserting an
    additional sheet into a folded sheet.


CLS 53/158
TXT Apparatus under subclass 147 including means for individually inserting
    various of the portions of the contents within two or more separate and
    distinct cavities or portions of a single cover, and subsequently to fold
    the cover in such a manner that the filled cavities or portions therein are
    moved relatively one to the other to further enclose the contents.


CLS 53/167
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means associated therewith for
    performing some function in addition to or in perfecting the basic
    encirclement or encasement of the contents in its cover and not provided
    for in the preceding subclasses.

    (1)     Note.  The combination of mechanism to feed the cover, cover web or
    blank including severing means therefor, mechanism to feed the contents,
    mechanism to apply an adhesive to the cover, mechanism to cause the cover
    to be placed around or about the contents, or to place the contents within
    the cover and close the same, and mechanism to discharge the completed
    package from the machine, which mechanism may have incorporated therewith a
    stacking or piling device where no further packaging is involved, has not
    been considered as including means or features perfecting the basic
    encirclement or encasement of the contents in its cover.

    (2)     Note.  In this subclass have been placed patents which claim
    packaging machines within the scope of this class and add an additional
    feature thereto such as a vacuum cleaner to pick up severed edges of a tea
    bag; a chute to catch dust and convey same clear of the machine; a portable
    conveyor to gain access to an improperly wrapped article; a brush to cause
    an incompletely filled package to leave a vacancy; brushes for cleaning
    spilled granular contents from the machine bed; a tray to catch crumbs
    during a bread wrapping operation; a device to remove surplus ice cream; a
    device which imprints web contents, forms a carbon copy, folds contents
    into separate covers and stores the copies; a device to smooth the cover
    after the package is formed; a device to remove a rubber band from contents
    parts and to place a cover over said parts; and machines which alternately
    form a carton (a Class 93 operation) or close the flap or flaps of a filled
    carton; and machines which test or inspect.

    (3)     Note.  See section IV of the Class Definition for search notes to
    various related loci of art for packaging and binding combined with other
    operations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 85+ for drip collecting and machine parts cleaning in fluent
    material filling systems; subclasses 115+ for overfill removal in such
    systems.


CLS 53/168
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which any one of two or more
    sources of covers or cover material and/or any one of two or more sources
    of contents may be used in conjunction with a single packaging device
    either by manual adjustment of the machine or by a cyclic control.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154+,   for apparatus to form groups of contents units by feeding same from
    plural or different supply sources.

    202,    for apparatus which package articles in two or more separate lines,
    or streams.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 92+ for article dispensing devices
    not otherwise provided for having plural sources, stacks, or compartments
    for articles to be dispensed, with means to release or eject articles
    therefrom.


CLS 53/169
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means for (1) arranging the
    contents with respect to a first sliding cover section, which section
    consists of a slide, drawer or tray having at least five sides and for
    encompassing said slide by a second section having the form of a shell,
    open at one or both ends, or for (2) inserting a filled slide drawer or
    tray having at least five sides into a shell; the two sections having
    relative sliding motion after assembly to give access to the contents, the
    shell and portions of the slide forming a complete encasement of the
    contents.

    (1)     Note.  Either one or both of the sections can be preformed or the
    apparatus can form either one or both of the sections.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes the opening of the shell or shuck in
    combination with the placing of the slide herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176,    for apparatus to apply plural layer covers where one layer is a
    band.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclass 125.125 for a
    paperboard box having a sleevelike closure.


CLS 53/170
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means to encircle or encase
    the contents of a single package in two or more separate and distinct
    covers, one cover being superimposed over the other.

    (1)     Note.  The covers may be associated with the contents either as a
    multi-layered unit or as layers applied in succession.

    (2)     Note.  The application of a closure and a super-imposed hood or cap
    at a single station in substantially a single infeed operation is not
    considered to be plural layer cover application for this subclass.  See
    subclasses 287+ for the locus of this art.

    (3)     Note.  The application of a cork, cap or crown closure and a
    sealing spot, disc or gasket (i.e.; contents contacting, protective
    element) - substantially, simultaneously with the assembling operation - is
    not considered to be plural layer cover application for this subclass.  See
    subclass 129.1 for the locus of this art.

    (4)     Note.  The insertion of a disc into a hood or cap so as to depress
    said disc and a portion of the hood or cap within the aperture of a
    receptacle is not considered to be plural cover layer application for this
    subclass.  See subclass 130.1 for the locus of this art.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129.1,  see (3) Note.

    130.1,  see (4) Note.

    131.1,  for apparatus to apply plural cover layers where one layer is a
    coating.

    169,    for apparatus for forming a package having a cover of the slide and
    shell type.

    266.1,  for apparatus to fill a receptacle consisting of two or more
    preformed, nested cover members and to subsequently close same.

    286,    for apparatus to close a filled package having plural cover members.

    287+,   See (2) Note.

    449,    for corresponding methods of packaging.

    580,    for apparatus for applying plural partial covers which do not
    overlap or are not superimposed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet, and especially subclasses 121+ for such a product embodying a
    component with a fold at an edge, and subclasses 192+ for such a product
    having specific edge feature.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 111+ for apparatus to fold a box blank into
    shape and to afterwards apply ornamental covering paper thereto; and
    subclasses 386+ for apparatus to fix covering material to a box otherwise
    complete.


CLS 53/171
TXT Apparatus under subclass 170 for encasing contents in a cover or receptacle
    and for further enclosing a plurality of units so formed in an outer cover
    or receptacle; or for placing a plurality of receptacles in an outer cover
    or receptacle and placing contents in the inner receptacles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147+,   for apparatus for placing covers over individual contents parts,
    grouping the parts into a contents unit, and performing a subsequent or
    further packaging operation.


CLS 53/172
TXT Apparatus under subclass 170 for folding, wrapping or otherwise forming two
    or more flat, superimposed blanks into a plural layered cover for the
    contents, at least the initial wrap being applied simultaneously to all the
    blanks.

    (1)     Note.  A laminated cover material, having the various layers
    uniformly adhered to each other over their contacting surfaces prior to the
    fabrication of the material into a cover and handled by the packaging
    machine as though there were but a single layer, is classified as if the
    cover material were in fact composed of but a single layer.


CLS 53/173
TXT Apparatus under subclass 170 including means to place or position the
    contents within a previously shaped receptacle and to then further incase
    or encircle the filled receptacle by placing an additional cover layer
    thereabout.

    (1)     Note.  See the Class Definition, section III, for the meaning of
    the term "receptacle".

    (2)     Note.  The term "cover" as used above does not include the cap or
    hood closure applied to a preformed container for completing the encasement
    of contents or for shielding the aperture portions of said container
    subsequent to filling.  See subclass 266.1 and Notes thereunder for the
    locus of such art.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266.1,  see (2) Note.


CLS 53/174
TXT Apparatus under subclass 170 for encasing or encircling the contents by
    folding a cover layer thereabout and for then placing the so-formed package
    within a previously shaped receptacle.


CLS 53/175
TXT Apparatus under subclass 170 including means for inserting a cover layer
    within and in intimate relation with respect to the inner walls of a
    previously shaped receptacle prior to the introduction of the contents.

    (1)     Note.  The inner cover layer may be either a separate receptacle or
    a blank for wrapping or handling the contents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 93+ for inserting a lining in a rigid
    container.


CLS 53/176
TXT Apparatus under subclass 170 for applying two or more superimposed cover
    layers at least one of which completely encircles the contents in one
    direction only, such as girth, leaving the contents and/or the other cover
    layer or layers completely exposed on two sides or ends and which has
    frictional contact with the contents so as to be retained thereon.

    (1)     Note.  The band may be of narrow width, such as a cigar band and
    may serve as a retaining means for an inner cover layer.

    (2)     Note.  See the class definition, section III, for the meaning of
    "contents".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135.1,  for apparatus to apply a second layer of sheet material to a cover
    which second layer does not encircle the contents.

    138.1,  and see the notes thereto for apparatus to apply a binding or tying
    string about a package.

    169,    for apparatus to apply covers of the slide and shell type.

    580+,   for apparatus to apply plural partial covers in such a manner that
    the covers are not superimposed or do not overlap one on the other and
    especially subclass 198 for apparatus to apply single or plural spaced
    bands.


CLS 53/201
TXT Apparatus under the class definition which can be caused to serve as any
    one of two or more distinctly different packaging devices by an adjustment,
    addition, removal or reassembly of one or more of the parts.


CLS 53/202
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which two or more separate streams
    of contents are coincidently packaged as they move through the machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147+,   for apparatus which includes a plural line packaging operation, and
    selects and wraps together units supplied by each of the lines.

    168,    for apparatus for packaging with selective or alternative supply of
    plural covers and/or contents.

    546,    for plural line apparatus of the progressively seamed cover webs or
    web folds type.


CLS 53/203
TXT Apparatus under the class definition by which a flexible or foldable cover
    material is bent, with or without creasing, around the contents to encase
    it.

    (1)     Note.  This apparatus shapes the cover material into contents
    retaining form subsequent to the bringing together of contents and cover
    material.  For apparatus which shapes the cover  material to contents
    retaining form prior to association of contents therewith see this class,
    subclasses 558+.

    (2)     Note.  This apparatus shapes the cover material so as to completely
    enclose the contents therein.  For apparatus which shapes the cover
    material around the contents in such manner as to leave the contents
    exposed, see this class subclasses 580+.

    (3)     Note.  Shaping a closure into engagement or conformity with a
    portion of a preformed receptacle is not considered wrapping for this and
    indented subclasses.  Such apparatus will be found in subclasses 285+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    285+,   for apparatus for closing packages and filled receptacles, and see
    (3) Note.

    461+,   for corresponding method.

    558+,   see (1) Note.

    580+,   see (2) Note.


CLS 53/204
TXT Apparatus under subclass 203 by which a cover is applied to contents having
    an opening extending therethrough and the cover material is inserted into
    or through such opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    409,    for corresponding methods.

    581,    for partial covers comprising spindles or cores.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 303+ for a package for an
    annular article (e.g., tire, wire coil, etc.).

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Reeling, subclasses 434+ for winding
    elongated material through a central opening of a ring-shaped core.


CLS 53/205
TXT Apparatus under subclass 203 by which the cover is bent around contents
    that is particulate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    appropriate subclasses for material handling systems for placing
    particulate and other fluent materials in separable receivers.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclass 296 for making folded powder papers such as
    are used by druggist to enclose medicinal powders.


CLS 53/206
TXT Apparatus under subclass 203 by which the cover material is bent around the
    contents so that portions of the cover on opposite sides of the contents
    are formed by a single fold or crease, the thickness of the contents being
    accommodated by a slight flexing of opposed faces of the cover.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    460,    for corresponding methods.


CLS 53/207
TXT Apparatus under subclass 203 in which the cover material to be bent has
    portions which are cut out, or partially severed or incised adjacent an
    edge of the cover material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    376.3,  for apparatus for closing packages by folding a single flap.

    376.4+, for apparatus for closing packages by folding multiple flaps.


CLS 53/208
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 combined with mechanism for cutting out or
    partially severing or incising the cover material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128.1,  for a machine for notching a cover  blank for something  other than
    forming a notch or slit as an aid for  folding the blank.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 58+ for making a container including
    cutting and form-scoring a carton blank.


CLS 53/209
TXT Apparatus under subclass 203 in which the cover blank and the contents
    material are initially brought together and are then conveyed to another
    location for the bending of the cover material around the contents.


CLS 53/210
TXT Apparatus under subclass 203 in which the bending of the cover material
    about the contents includes placing one edge, or portion of the cover
    material making up the longitudinal seam, against one side of the contents
    and then bringing the cover material across the opposite side of the
    contents and then the other edge of the cover around the contents and into
    seaming relation to the first edge.


CLS 53/211
TXT Apparatus under subclass 210 in which the bringing together of edges making
    up the longitudinal seam is effected by revolving the contents about an
    axis passing through the contents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 27+ for cigar and cigarette making apparatus in
    which the tobacco is rotated to place a wrapper thereon.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    446+ for applying a label to a rotating article.


CLS 53/212
TXT Apparatus under subclass 211 in which the contents is comprised of a series
    of articles each positioned with respect to any adjacent article only by a
    face-to-face relationship of one of two opposed surfaces.

    (1)     Note.  The stacked articles are frequently coins.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254,    for apparatus for filling receptacles with coins in stacked
    formation.

    531+,   for apparatus having means for stacking the contents for packaging.


CLS 53/213
TXT Apparatus under subclass 212 in which the rotation of the stack is by the
    hands of a person.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219,    for manual wrapping on a fixed support.

    390+,   for aids to manual packing.


CLS 53/214
TXT Apparatus under subclass 211 in which the cover material is attached to the
    contents in whole or in part by an adhesive action therebetween.

    (1)     Note.  The adhesive may be temporary and effective only during the
    wrapping operation or it may permanently adhere the cover and contents.


CLS 53/215
TXT Apparatus under subclass 211 in which the rotation of the contents and
    cover material is by means of a flexible band which encircles the contents
    sufficiently to grip it.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 87 for presses having, additionally, means for
    winding material in which the winding means includes a flexible member and
    the material is wound within a loop formed in the flexible member.

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 47+ for apron type cigarette making machines.


CLS 53/216
TXT Apparatus under subclass 211 in which the axis of rotation of the contents
    translates as the cover material is wrapped around the contents.


CLS 53/217
TXT Apparatus under subclass 211 in which the projecting ends of the cover
    material are rotated relative to the contents to form an enclosure for the
    package.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370,    for apparatus for closing package by twisting and see the Notes
    thereto for related art elsewhere classified.


CLS 53/218
TXT Apparatus under subclass 203 in which the bending of the cover material is
    completed in the location at which the cover material and the contents were
    first associated.

    (1)     Note.  In this apparatus the contents and a portion of the cover
    material usually remain in fixed relation to a support while other portions
    of the cover material are being bent around the contents.


CLS 53/219
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 in which the cover is folded over the contents
    by the hands of a person.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213,    for manual wrapping with rotation of contents.

    390+,   for aids to manual packing.


CLS 53/220
TXT Apparatus under subclass 203 in which the bending of the cover material
    about the contents is effected by motion of an associated cover blank and
    contents through a confining space or passage such that the cover material
    is smoothed along the sides of the contents by the walls of the passage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    483+ for laminating devices in which the applied flexible sheet is bent
    around the article to which it is secured by movement along a passageway.


CLS 53/221
TXT Apparatus under subclass 220 in which one surface of a contents contacts a
    cover member and forces the cover member through a second member having a
    substantially completely enclosed opening, the entire periphery of the
    opening smoothing and/or wiping the cover member around the contents so
    that the contacting surface of the contents and the surfaces contiguous
    thereto are snugly enclosed by the cover member.

    (1)     Note.  It is not necessary that all portions of the cup or pouch
    extend above the top of the contents.

    (2)     Note.  This particular enclosure of the contents constitutes and
    "initial wrap"; see the Class Definition, section III.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    464,    for corresponding methods.


CLS 53/222
TXT Apparatus under subclass 221 in which the cup or pouch is one of a
    substantially rectangular bottom and four contiguous sides.


CLS 53/223
TXT Apparatus under subclass 222 in which the partially wrapped packaged as it
    is delivered by the four-sided corner forming chute is next passed through
    a second fold chute for further folding of the cover material about the
    contents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230+,   for wrapping machines in which a package having an initial U-fold
    wrap is passed through a succeeding fold chute.


CLS 53/224
TXT Apparatus under subclass 222 in which the package as shaped by the
    four-sided corner forming chute or pocket is advanced by a movable package
    support, during which advance the cover material is further folded about
    the contents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232+,   for wrapping machines in which a package having an initial U-fold
    wrap is advanced by a folding carrier.


CLS 53/225
TXT Apparatus under subclass 224 in which the movable package support is one
    which carries the package in a circular path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    234,    for wrapping machines in which a package having a U-fold initial
    wrap is advanced by a folding carrier of the rotary type.


CLS 53/226
TXT Apparatus under subclass 221 in which ends of the cover material projecting
    beyond the contents are pleated inwardly without the formation of end flaps.


CLS 53/227
TXT Apparatus under subclass 221 in which projecting ends of the cover material
    are collapsed and rotated relative to the contents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370,    for apparatus for closing packages by twisting and see the Notes
    thereto for related art elsewhere classified.


CLS 53/228
TXT Apparatus under subclass 220 in which the contents with one face contacting
    its cover material is passed through a die passage or pocket such that the
    two opposite adjacent sides of the package have the cover smoothed along
    the same so that the two sides and original contacting side of the cover
    material form a U in cross-section.


CLS 53/229
TXT Apparatus under subclass 228 in which the free edges of the U-fold are
    brought together so that the inner faces of such edges are brought into
    face-to-face relationship.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    373.2,  for apparatus for closing packages by an outturned seam closure and
    see the Notes thereto for related art elsewhere classified.


CLS 53/230
TXT Apparatus under subclass 228 in which the package as it leaves the U-fold
    passage is then moved through a second passage containing folding elements
    which are stationary with respect to the passage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224+,   for wrapping machines in which a package having an initial cup or
    pouch wrap is passed through a succeeding folding chute.


CLS 53/231
TXT Apparatus under subclass 230 in which a transporting means is supplied to
    convey the package from the initial U-fold apparatus to a succeeding fold
    chute without any folding taking place during the transfer.


CLS 53/232
TXT Apparatus under subclass 228 in which the package as shaped by the die
    passage or pocket is advanced by a movable package support, during which
    advance the cover material is further folded about the contents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224+,   for apparatus in which a package having an initial cup or pouch
    wrap is advanced by a folding carrier.


CLS 53/233
TXT Apparatus under subclass 232 in which the package is loaded on the conveyor
    and the package forwarded by the conveyor through the folding means without
    the conveyor stopping.


CLS 53/234
TXT Apparatus under subclass 232 in which the conveyor progresses the packages
    about a circular path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225,    for wrapping machines in which a package having a four-sided cup or
    pouch initial wrap is advanced by a folding carrier of the rotary type.


CLS 53/235
TXT Apparatus under the class definition by which covers at least in part
    previously formed into receptacles are charged with contents consisting of
    or including articles or consisting of fluent materials which are placed in
    definite permanent patterns or arrangements in the receptacles.

    (1)     Note.  A charge which is formed from a fluent material (e.g.,
    cotton or fibers) and is then placed in the receiver as a unit and is
    handled as an article during the filling operation by means which would not
    likewise handle fluent material, is considered to be an article for this
    and indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  For this and indented subclasses it is required that the
    filling mechanism deposit the contents in the receptacle or the receptacle
    on the contents, or that a guide be provided to associate the contents and
    receptacle in a hand filling operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142+,   for packaging tapered or headed articles.

    145+,   for packaging fruits and vegetables in which a display layer is
    formed.

    147+,   for associating a group of articles into a contents unit and then
    placing the same into a receiver.

    473+,   for corresponding methods.

    558+,   for forming or partially forming a receiver and then placing the
    contents therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    appropriate subclasses, for filling preformed receivers with liquids and
    fluent material and for disposing fluent material in receivers where the
    arrangement of the material is merely a result of the flow of material or
    the action of a discharge assistant.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for article dispensers,
    per se, or those operated merely by engagement with a receptacle, if the
    operation could also be accomplished by hand and no special modification is
    made to accommodate the particular shape of the receptacle.


CLS 53/236
TXT Apparatus under subclass 235 in which the contents comprises articles the
    diameter or width of which is very small compared to the length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124+,   for means for compacting or agitating and packaging long slender
    articles.

    142+,   for apparatus particularly adapted to package tapered or headed
    articles.

    148+,   for apparatus for forming groups of long, slender articles and
    subsequently packaging same.

    169,    for apparatus for filling a tray with matches and inserting the
    tray into an outer shell or shuck.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 61 for apparatus for making and boxing
    matches.


CLS 53/237
TXT Apparatus under subclass 235 in which a single receptacle has deposited
    therein contents from a plurality of distinct contents retainers and/or at
    a plurality of separate locations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154+,   for apparatus which forms a contents unit from a plurality of
    separate contents sources and subsequently packages the unit.

    168,    for apparatus for alternately or selectively supplying contents to
    be packaged from different contents sources.

    202,    for apparatus for coincidently packaging two or more separate
    streams of contents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 100 for filling apparatus including plural material supplies or
    placing plural materials or charges of fluent material in a receiver.


CLS 53/238
TXT Apparatus under subclass 237 in which the components of the contents have
    differing contours or dimensions such as to require dissimilar depositing
    mechanisms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155+,   for apparatus which forms a contents unit from portions so
    dissimilar as to require different feed mechanisms and subsequently
    packages the unit.


CLS 53/239
TXT Apparatus under subclass 237 in which the contents deposited in the
    receptacle comprises at least one article and fluent material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes devices for depositing fluent material
    or articles into receivers wherein there is provided means to support an
    article in the receiver during the deposit of the fluent material or
    wherein the fluent material or article depositing means is so constructed
    as to take cognizance of the presence of an article or fluent material in
    the receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    474,    for corresponding processes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 96 for dispensers for both articles
    and fluent materials.


CLS 53/240
TXT Apparatus under subclass 237 in which a single receptacle has contents
    deposited therein at a plurality of separate locations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266.1+, for apparatus for filling a receptacle at one station and closing
    it at another station.


CLS 53/241
TXT Apparatus under subclass 235 having means to suspend or support the
    contents, said means passing through the receptacle prior to its
    association with the contents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256,    for a guide or support on which a garment is placed, the support
    and garment then being inserted into a receptacle (e.g., bag) and the
    support withdrawn leaving the garment in the receptacle.


CLS 53/242
TXT Apparatus under subclass 235 having means to support or feed a receptacle
    with the filling opening facing downward and for placing the contents
    therein while in said position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241,    for devices to apply a bag to a garment by drawing the bag down
    over the suspended garment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 113 for apparatus for filling receivers with fluent material
    through the bottom or while inverted.


CLS 53/243
TXT Apparatus under subclass 242 having means to turn the receptacle through an
    angle of substantially 180_ in a vertical plane after the contents has been
    deposited therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    392,    for means to turn over a filled receptacle after a manual packing
    operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 164, 171, 273+ for fluent material filling systems involving
    inversion or tilting of the receiver.


CLS 53/244
TXT Apparatus under subclass 235 having means to place in turn a plurality of
    single articles or groups of articles into a receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237+,   for supplying contents to receivers from different sources of
    supply or at successive filling stations.

    254,    for guides used in stacking coins or discs in a receiver by hand.

    534,    for means for forming groups of articles and successively
    depositing the groups in a receiver.


CLS 53/245
TXT Apparatus under subclass 244 in which the holding means for the receiver is
    depressed as the articles are successively deposited in the receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    535+,   for means for depositing successive articles on a lowering support
    and then packaging the articles or for forming groups of articles and
    successively depositing the groups in a receptacle on a lowering support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 100+ for filling a receiver with plural charges of fluent
    material; subclasses 258+ and 263+ for fluent material filling systems
    having relatively receding receiver support and filling means.


CLS 53/246
TXT Apparatus under subclass 244 in which the receptacle is divided into
    sections, each section receiving a single article or group of articles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263,    for means to divide a receptacle into sections for the placement of
    the contents therein, the means being then removed and forming no part of
    the completed package.

    539,    for forming a group of articles by a plurality of feeding
    operations and then placing the group into a compartmented receiver.


CLS 53/247
TXT Apparatus under subclass 235 for concurrently placing a plurality of
    articles in a receptacle, the article being handled individually by the
    depositing mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    531+,   for apparatus for arranging a group of articles in a layer, stack
    or column and then packaging same, and note particularly subclasses 160 and
    166.


CLS 53/248
TXT Apparatus under subclass 235 having means to impede the progress of
    articles moving solely under the influence of gravity prior to or as they
    enter the receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  The fall retarding means is usually to prevent the breakage
    or bruising of the articles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, subclass 32 for chute
    conveyors having retarders.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 534 for a power-driven conveyor
    combined with a chute having means to retard movement of the conveyed load.


CLS 53/249
TXT Apparatus under subclass 235 having means to affirmatively move a
    receptacle to and/or from the point of filling.

    (1)     Note.  A filling means (e.g., plunger) which forces the contents
    into a receptacle and coincidently or by an extended motion moves the
    receptacle away from the point of filling is not included in this or
    indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258+,   see (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 129+ for means to supply successive receivers and fill with
    fluent material; subclasses 250+ for filling receivers with fluent
    materials including means to move the receivers to, from or during flow
    relation.


CLS 53/250
TXT Apparatus under subclass 249 in which a series of receptacles are supplied
    to the filling station by the means which affirmatively moves the
    receptacles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    571+,   for apparatus for supplying successive receptacles from a magazine
    and opening and filling same.


CLS 53/251
TXT Apparatus under subclass 250 in which both the receptacles and contents
    units are carried by conveying means and means are provided to move the
    contents from its conveyor to the receptacle conveyor or vice versa to fill
    the receptacles with the contents units.


CLS 53/252
TXT Apparatus under subclass 251 wherein the means to transfer the contents
    units or receptacles comprises a member which has alternate forward and
    backward motion.


CLS 53/253
TXT Apparatus under subclass 250 in which the conveying means for the
    receptacles comprises a member which partakes of movement about a fixed
    axis in one direction only.


CLS 53/254
TXT Apparatus under subclass 235 for filling receptacles with disc like
    articles, usually coins, in stacked formation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212+,   for machines for wrapping stacked discs or coins.

    531+,   for apparatus for forming stacks of articles and performing a
    subsequent packaging operation.


CLS 53/255
TXT Apparatus under subclass 235 having contents receiving means in or on which
    the contents is placed, the receiving means then being inserted into the
    receptacle or the receptacle into the receiving means and the receptacle
    with its contents then removed; or having directing means which enters or
    contacts the receptacle to guide the contents into the receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 279+ and 331+ for funnels and similar fluent material guides;
    subclasses 297, 316, 365, and 390+ for internal and/or external forms or
    protectors for receivers in fluent material filling systems.

    452,    Butchering, subclasses 35+ for similar devices used for stuffing
    sausage meat into sausage casings.


CLS 53/256
TXT Apparatus under subclass 255 for applying a cover, usually in the form of a
    paper sack, to an article of clothing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241,    for garment baggers in which the support for the garment extends
    through the cover prior to its association with the garment.


CLS 53/257
TXT Apparatus under subclass 255 in which means are provided to selectively
    vary the dimension of the guide or inserted form or support to accommodate
    different size receptacles and/or contents units.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 242 for presses of the box and piston type which
    are adjustable in size and may include an adjustable size discharge guide
    through which the pressed material is expelled.


CLS 53/258
TXT Apparatus under subclass 255 having means to affirmatively move the
    contents into the receptacle, said means being movable with respect to the
    guide or inserted form or support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251+,   for affirmative means for moving contents into receptacles wherein
    the contents and receptacles are carried by conveyors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 218 for reciprocating presses including ejectors
    for displacing the material from the press.  The mere claiming of a
    discharge guide from the press which may be for the disclosed purpose of
    holding a receiver (e.g., mattress tick) does not preclude classification
    in Class 100.


CLS 53/259
TXT Apparatus under subclass 258 in which the means to affirmatively move the
    contents is in the form of or is carried by at least one continuous member.


CLS 53/260
TXT Apparatus under subclass 255 in which the form or support on which the
    contents is placed has a portion which is movable relative to the remainder
    of the form after insertion into the receptacle to permit the form to be
    withdrawn leaving the contents in the receptacle; or in which the form is
    made of separate or separable parts which are withdrawn from the receptacle
    individually.


CLS 53/261
TXT Apparatus under subclass 255 in which the guide or inserted form is capable
    of spreading or extending to conform to or expand the receptacle to
    facilitate placement of the contents therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 312 for expansible spreading or holding means for the receiver in
    fluent material filling systems.


CLS 53/262
TXT Apparatus under subclass 261 in which the guide or form comprises an
    element or elements made of elastic material which exert a return pressure
    when bent out of their normal rest position.


CLS 53/263
TXT Apparatus under subclass 255 having means which partitions or divides the
    receptacle during the filling thereof and is then removed after the
    receptacle has been at least partially filled.


CLS 53/264
TXT Devices under the class definition including means to complete the
    enclosure of contents by seating a separate-type closure captive within a
    receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are devices which both fill and close and
    devices which merely close.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266.1+, for devices which fill and close preformed receptacles.

    287+,   for devices which apply separate closures to filled packages or
    receptacles.


CLS 53/265
TXT Devices under the class definition for completing the enclosure of contents
    in a receptacle with a captive or attached bail-type closure, including
    means to seat said closure.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are devices which both fill and close and
    devices which merely close.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266.1+, for devices which fill and close preformed receptacles.

    287+,   for devices which apply separate closures to filled packages or
    receptacles.


CLS 53/266.1
TXT MEANS TO FILL AND CLOSE PREFORMED RECEPTACLE:
    Apparatus under the class definition by which a cover at least in part
    previously formed into a receptacle is charged with contents and the
    enclosure of the contents thereafter completed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174,    for apparatus in which the contents are first covered and then the
    cover and contents are placed in a preformed receptacle.

    175,    for apparatus in which a lining is applied to a preformed
    receptacle prior to the placing of the contents within the lined receptacle.

    381+,   for a package unfolding device, per se.

    467,    for a method of package making including filling a preformed
    receptacle and closing the package.

    558+,   for apparatus which makes a receptacle and then inserts contents
    therein.

    900,    a cross-reference art collection for apparatus for or a  method of
    handling or manipulating a capsule.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    86,     Ammunition and Explosive-Charge Making, subclasses 25+ for
    apparatus for loading explosives into a shell and for closing the open end
    thereof.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 59.1+, 78.16 and 604+ for sealing off
    a metal tube by the use of electrically generated heat.


CLS 53/267
TXT Apparatus under subclass 266.1, wherein one of two receptacles
    simultaneously charged with diverse contents at separate stations is also
    sealed with a closure at one of said stations, said one receptacle having
    been previously partly charged at the other of said stations.

    (1)     Note.  Supplying syrup to one bottle, while adding water or
    carbonated water to a bottle previously syruped, and then closing the
    bottle at the water or carbonated water station is classified here.

    (2)     Note.  Patents which disclose, but do not claim, a compound
    fill-close station have been classified on the basis of the claimed
    disclosure; that is, on the basis of a filling apparatus or a simple
    fill-close apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    268,    for filling and closing preformed receptacles as a common
    fill-close station.

    276,    for filling and closing preformed receptacles including diverse
    heads rotatably indexing and progressively acting.


CLS 53/268
TXT Apparatus under subclass 266.1 wherein the receptacle is filled and the
    closure applied at the same station.

    (1)     Note.  Where there is motion other than infeed between the
    receptacle and the aperture engaging portion of the fill-close mechanism
    the apparatus is not considered to be a common fill-close station for this
    subclass. See subclasses 276+ and 281+ for the locus of such apparatus.


CLS 53/269
TXT Apparatus under subclass 268 in which the closure applying means is
    initiated by air forced out of the receptacle during the filling operation.


CLS 53/270
TXT Apparatus under subclass 268 wherein a closure is supplied by separation of
    the fill means and receptacle, one from the other.


CLS 53/271
TXT Apparatus under subclass 268 wherein during the fill-close operation there
    is no reversal of the relative motion between the mechanism effecting such
    fill-closing and the receptacle.


CLS 53/272
TXT Apparatus under subclass 268 wherein plural heads rotatively indexing and
    progressively acting on rotatively conveyed receptacles constitute the
    common station mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 144+ for similar machines for filling successive receivers.


CLS 53/273
TXT Apparatus under subclass 268 wherein receptacle aperture engaging means
    includes a reciprocating or oscillating mechanism to alternately present a
    fill or close device to the receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  The receptacle aperture engaging means is common to both
    fill and close devices.


CLS 53/274
TXT Apparatus under subclass 268 including means to seal the closure supplying
    entrance so as to maintain the system pressure or vacuum.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 62 for filling machines of this type having closed diverse fluid
    containing pressure systems, e.g., vacuum or counter-pressure.


CLS 53/275
TXT Apparatus under subclass 268 wherein a closure is either within or forms a
    sealing portion of a pressure or vacuum system established during filling
    of the receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are those devices wherein
    individual closures are inserted within a fill-close mechanism and the
    mechanism is then applied to a receptacle for filling and closing the
    individual receptacle.


CLS 53/276
TXT Apparatus under subclass 266.1 wherein the fill and close devices are
    mounted on a common rotatively indexing conveyor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272,    for turret or indexing conveyor with a common fill-close station.


CLS 53/277
TXT Apparatus under subclass 276 wherein the individual fill and close stations
    rotate about a common axis which axis in turn rotates about still another
    axis.


CLS 53/278
TXT Apparatus under subclass 276 wherein the individual fill and close devices
    are rotatively indexed about a common axis.


CLS 53/279
TXT Apparatus under subclass 276 whereby the fill device is rotatively indexed
    about one axis and the close device rotatively indexed about another axis.


CLS 53/280
TXT Apparatus under subclass 279 wherein the final positioning of preformed
    receptacles with respect to both a fill and a close device is effected by a
    single means.


CLS 53/281
TXT Apparatus under subclass 266.1 wherein individual fill and close devices
    are arranged to operate successively upon a receptacle conveyed past said
    devices, the close device applying a separate closure.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are mechanisms comprising a turret station
    associated with a nonturret station.

    (2)     Note.  Also included here are the mechanisms which handle a
    plurality of preformed receptacles in a case or carton.


CLS 53/282
TXT Apparatus under subclass 281 wherein the means conveying the receptacle is
    of the endless conveyor type.


CLS 53/283
TXT Apparatus under subclass 281 wherein the means effecting the final
    juxtapositioning between (1) fill and close devices and (2) the receptacle
    is common to both fill and close devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280,    for similar devices in multiple turret machines.


CLS 53/284
TXT Apparatus under subclass 266.1 in which a receptacle open at opposite ends
    has each end operated upon to complete the enclosing of the contents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228+,   for wrapping apparatus which forms sheet material into an open
    ended tube and then closes the opposite ends of the tube.


CLS 53/284.2
TXT Receptacle comprising film mount:
    Apparatus under subclass 266.1 wherein the cover includes upper and lower
    sheets, each having a window through which light may pass to be transmitted
    through a transparent sheet-like contents member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    520,    for package making, including reshaping of contents, which contents
    are of film, sheet or weblike material.


CLS 53/284.3
TXT Receptacle comprising envelope:
    Apparatus under subclass 266.1 wherein the cover is comprised of upper and
    lower planar sheets which, after formation of the package, will engage each
    other and be united at their perimeters, which cover is intended to receive
    sheet-like goods.

    (1)     Note.  An "envelope" with a bellows or gusset is not included
    herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    460,    for a method of package making wherein the package is an envelope
    or is closed by a triangular flap fold.


CLS 53/284.4
TXT Means to insert X-ray film into and to close special receptacle:Apparatus
    under subclass 266.1 wherein the cover is intended to contain negative
    photographic information material.


CLS 53/284.5
TXT Rigid receptacle:
    Apparatus under subclass 266.1 wherein the cover is sufficiently stiff to
    retain its shape during use.


CLS 53/284.6
TXT Glass receptacle, e.g., ampoule:
    Apparatus under subclass 284.5 wherein the cover is of vitreous or ceramic
    material which has been solidified directly from the liquid state without
    crystallization.

    (1)     Note.  A glass ampoule is included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284.5,  for means to fill and close a ceramic package generally, i.e.,
    other than glass.


CLS 53/284.7
TXT Receptacle comprising bag:
    Apparatus under subclass 266.1 wherein the cover is made of generally
    flexible material, i.e., will not retain its shape when filled with the
    weight of contents; is generally three dimensional, i.e., has sides and a
    bottom; and is open at the top before being filled and closed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    469,    for a method of package making comprising filling a preformed,
    flexible, expandable receptacle and closing it.


CLS 53/285
TXT Apparatus under the class definition for completing the enclosure of the
    contents within a package or receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75+,    for apparatus having automatic or triggered control of end closing.

    169,    for apparatus for closing tray and shell type receptacles.

    203+,   for wrapping machines which form the receptacle and subsequently
    close it.

    476,    for corresponding methods.

    580+,   particularly subclass 200 for apparatus for bringing portions of
    partial covers into such position as to retain the contents and cover
    together.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 240 for juxtapositioning and securing of
    screw type closures on open ended collapsible tubes.

    86,     Ammunition and Explosive-Charge Making, subclasses 39+ for
    apparatus to close a cartridge shell by crimping.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 54+ for presses for applying lids to portable
    receptacles, not elsewhere provided for.

    112,    Sewing, subclass 11 for sewing closed filled sacks.

    413,    Sheet Metal Container Making, subclass 26 for seaming the can body
    to a respective closure.


CLS 53/286
TXT Apparatus under subclass 285 by which the enclosure of contents within an
    inner and an outer cover is completed by displacing both covers to
    enclosing position with at least a portion of at least one of the covers
    being displaced without displacing any portion of the other cover.

    (1)     Note.  For the displacing together of both inner and outer covers
    search this class in the subclass appropriate to the type or types of
    closure involved.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170+,   for apparatus including applying plural covers to contents in
    addition to closing.


CLS 53/287
TXT Apparatus under subclass 285 which completes the enclosure of the contents
    by securing a separate closure member to another cover member or receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this and indented subclasses is the assembly of
    a cap, capsule, cork, cot, crown, disk; stopper or hood closure to an
    aperture of a bottle, container, jar, or tube.

    (2)     Note.  Included hereunder is the application of a closure and a
    superimposed hood or cap at a single station in substantially a single
    infeed operation.

    (3)     Note.  Included hereunder is the partial encasement of the neck end
    of a bottle (whether or not said bottle has been previously corked or
    capped) by a closure which is conformed to said neck portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128.1+, for apparatus which in addition to securing or assembling a
    separate closure member also applies a contents contacting sealing spot,
    disk, or gasket; a superimposed disk which depresses a portion of the
    separate closure member within the aperture of a receptacle; and/or applies
    a binding string or wire or a resilient band and/or a staple or clip to
    fasten the closure member onto the receptacle.

    170+,   for apparatus to apply two or more separate and distinct closures,
    said closures being superimposed and applied at separate stations or in
    substantially distinct sequential operations at the same station.

    376.3,  for apparatus which completes the enclosure of the contents by
    displacing a single projecting flap portion of the cover or a hinged lid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate sub- classes particularly
    subclasses 236+, for devices which remove a closure from a magazine and
    then dispense said closure in a direction normal to the movement from said
    magazine.  Where a claimed disclosure provides for means operated by
    coaction of a receiver to actuate dispensing manipulating means the patents
    are classified in this (287) and indented subclasses.


CLS 53/288
TXT Apparatus under subclass 287 restricted to the assembly of milk can and
    cover.

    (1)     Note.  The milk cans and covers are usually being assembled after a
    washing and/or sterilizing operation, the means for said operation not
    being claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    for apparatus combining means to clean milk cans and means to apply
    the cover to said can.


CLS 53/289
TXT Apparatus under subclass 287 which includes means to modify a receptacle
    prior to assembly and securing of a closure member.

    (1)     Note.  The term "modify" includes cutting, crimping and compressing.


CLS 53/290
TXT Apparatus under subclass 287 which includes means to modify the separate
    closure member prior to assembly with the receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  Modification of a separate closure element while said
    element is contacting the receptacle is not considered a preliminary
    working for this and indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  Heating or cooling of separate closure members to improve
    the shaping or adhering qualities of said members has been considered a
    fugitive preconditioning and placed in subclass 141.

    (3)     Note.  The compression of inserted closure members, e.g., corks,
    prior to inserting is not classified here.  See subclass 324.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141,    for treatment to improve workability of closure members.  See (2)
    Note.

    324,    for compression of corks, etc.  See (3) Note.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    413,    Sheet Metal Container Making, subclasses  1+ for the method of
    making and assembling cans and lids.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 162+ for making a container including
    folding.


CLS 53/291
TXT Apparatus under subclass 290 including means to expand, set-up, or further
    shape a previously formed closure to permit assembly of said closure and a
    preformed receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are devices for applying cellulosic cots to
    corked bottles, paper or foil hoods to bottles or containers, and resilient
    closures to preformed receptacles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128.1+, for a device which applies a hood, capsule or cot combined with
    means to seal or secure a closure.

    580,    for devices which apply a partial cover to nonapertured portions of
    a preformed receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 235+ for devices which assemble and
    disassemble resilient articles such as tubes, sleeves, nipples, etc.  See
    the Notes thereto for the locus of other similar art.


CLS 53/292
TXT Apparatus under subclass 291 including pneumatic means which aid in the
    initial unfolding or opening of the closure member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    384.1+  and 570+, for pneumatic devices used in opening bag type receivers.


CLS 53/293
TXT Apparatus under subclass 291 wherein the cot or sheath is stripped onto the
    preformed receptacle by the receptacle itself.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    313+,   for apparatus wherein a closure is selected and assembled by a
    moving receptacle.


CLS 53/294
TXT Apparatus under subclass 293 including cot stretching means actuated by
    wedging action of the receptacle.


CLS 53/295
TXT Apparatus under subclass 291 including means to feed or deliver cot or
    sheath elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for dispensing devices,
    per se.


CLS 53/296
TXT Apparatus under subclass 290 including means to shape and/or sever closure
    elements prior to assembly with a receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  Mere severing of a blank from stock material as well as
    cutting a blank or stock material to a desired shape are found here.

    (2)     Note.  Cutting or forming of closure elements while said element is
    in contact with a preformed receptacle is not considered preliminary
    treatment for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138.2+, for cutting and/or forming of auxiliary securing elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses.


CLS 53/297
TXT Apparatus under subclass 296 wherein cutting and/or forming means operate
    during infeed of a closure element to a receptacle, or cutting and forming
    means are substantially co-axial with the line of infeed.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass, for example, is a single station
    operation combining a cutting and/or forming as well as an assembly
    operation.  A multiple station set up is to be found in subclass 296.


CLS 53/298
TXT Apparatus under subclass 297 wherein preliminary shaping is limited to a
    mere separation of blank from stock material.


CLS 53/299
TXT Apparatus under subclass 287 including means to position or convey
    receptacles in aligned groups or ranks to apply separate closure.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are positioning or conveying means which
    handle the crate or box within which the preformed receptacles are already
    placed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281+,   for devices which handle receptacles by case or row combined with
    filling and closing operations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    for filling systems having supply means for successive receivers in crates
    or trays.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 418+ for a system of plural
    conveyors having means for establishing and moving a group of items, and
    subclasses 434+ for a system of plural conveyors having means for arranging
    or rearranging a stream or streams of items.


CLS 53/300
TXT Apparatus under subclass 287 including means to position, transport or
    convey receptacles by embracing or partially embracing a neck or flange
    portion of said container.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are devices which position or convey bottles
    by grasping the neck portion or the flange immediately adjacent the bottle
    aperture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    367,    for devices which align or center receptacles by engagement with a
    neck or flange portion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 27.1+ for
    receptacle lifters.


CLS 53/301
TXT Apparatus under subclass 287 including means which convey or position
    receptacles with respect to one and then the other of two closure applying
    devices acting in turn one after the other.


CLS 53/302
TXT Apparatus under subclass 287 including three or more closure applying
    and/or securing members acting successively and progressively.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are devices wherein the plural headers are
    either rotatively indexing or moving in a straight line during closure
    application.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272,    for common fill-closed station devices with plural heads rotatively
    indexing and progressively acting, and subclass 276 for separate fill and
    closed stations with diverse heads rotatively indexing and progressively
    acting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 35.5+  for turret structure and see
    search notes thereunder.


CLS 53/303
TXT Apparatus under subclass 302 wherein the plural headers are rotatively
    indexed about a horizontal axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 163 for horizontal axis conveyors for successive receivers in
    filling systems.


CLS 53/304
TXT Apparatus under subclass 302 including a single cap, cork, hood or disc
    delivery means cooperating with all the headers.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 221, Article Dispensing, section III, under
    definition of terms used for the definition of the term "stack".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306     through 312, for similar delivery means in conjunction with single
    headers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses, for article dispensing,
    per se.


CLS 53/305
TXT Devices under subclass 287 including a manually operated means for removing
    a closure from a source of supply and applying said closure to a receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  The force of actuation for devices in this subclass is the
    resultant of hand applied force and receptacle reaction to said hand
    applied force.

    (2)     Note.  See the reference to Class 221 under the search notes to
    subclass 680.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    363,    for closure securing means including a die with a handle.


CLS 53/306
TXT Apparatus under subclass 287 including means to position or place a closure
    member within or immediately adjacent and coaxial with the bottom of the
    closure applying means.

    (1)     Note.  The bottom or lower portion of the closure applying device
    is considered to be that portion facing or immediately adjacent the
    receptacle during the applying or conforming infeed motion.

    (2)     Note.  Closure supporting means in relatively fixed position
    immediately adjacent or contacting the bottom of the applying means,
    coaxial with said applying means, are considered to be a portion of the
    header for purposes of this subclass.


CLS 53/307
TXT Apparatus under subclass 306 wherein subsequent to positioning or placing
    of a closure member within the bottom of a header said header is swiveled
    or relatively rotated about an axis transverse to the line of infeed so as
    to align the closure held coaxial with the line of infeed.


CLS 53/308
TXT Apparatus under subclass 306 wherein a closure member is positioned or
    conveyed into alignment below the bottom of a header by means of an
    indexing dial or plate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302+,   for closure member support means of the turret or indexing dial
    type combined with sequentially acting plural headers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 289+ for gravity feed with release
    mechanism and subsequent manipulation, and subclasses 236+ for gravity feed
    with discharge assistant and subsequent manipulation.


CLS 53/309
TXT Apparatus under subclass 287 including means to position or convey a
    closure member into or within a closure applying and securing member from a
    source above said applying member, the closure member being moved or
    translated within the applying member along the line of infeed.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are devices wherein the closure member is
    inverted or obverted during its passage through closure applying member.


CLS 53/310
TXT Apparatus under subclass 287 including means whereby a closure element is
    separated from a source of elements and positioned or conveyed into the
    side of a closure applying member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    274,    for filling and closing preformed receptacle at a common fill-close
    station including cap port valve means, associated with lateral insertion
    of a closure element into a header.

    301,    for lateral feed of closure elements into header in apparatus where
    receptacles are delivered to alternately acting headers.

    302,    for sequentially acting plural headers with closure feed laterally
    into header.


CLS 53/311
TXT Apparatus under subclass 310 wherein a closure element positioned in the
    header, immediately prior to assembly with a receptacle, is in a plane
    transverse to the plane said closure is in while within the supply chute or
    column.

    (1)     Note.  Where a supply chute curves so as to vary the plane within
    which the closure element lies, such supply chute has been considered
    properly classifiable with the art in this subclass.  Generally, though not
    exclusively, this subclass provides for those closure applying devices
    wherein a crown or cap type of closure is fed from a hopper by means of a
    gravity chute into the side of a header, the crowns or caps being arranged
    within the hopper in an edge-to-edge abutment rather than a face-to-face
    relation as usually found in subclass 310.


CLS 53/312
TXT Apparatus under subclass 310 wherein a closure member and receptacle are
    moved with respect to each other along a horizontal line to effect assembly.


CLS 53/313
TXT Apparatus under subclass 287 wherein a closure member is contacted by a
    receptacle moving relative to said closure, the continued relative motion
    of the receptacle and the closure contacted thereby effecting a separation
    or removal of said closure member from a supply.

    (1)     Note.  The supply may consist of an inclined chute containing
    closure members or a vertical stack of nested closures.

    (2)     Note.  Included here are devices which move closures from a first
    supply to a second supply from which second supply said closures are
    stripped by a receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     for apparatus wherein a cap is selected by a moving receptacle
    including means providing for a preliminary release for feed of closure
    members responsive to either presence or absence of a receptacle and/or a
    closure member.


CLS 53/314
TXT Apparatus under subclass 313 including means to fasten a stripped or
    separated closure resting on a receptacle to said receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    317+    and 329+, for closure securing means, per se.


CLS 53/315
TXT Apparatus under subclass 313 including means to maintain the position of
    the closure member on a receptacle as said closure leaves the supply and/or
    means to tilt or pivot a closure member into a substantially horizontal
    position on a receptacle as said closure leaves the supply.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are devices wherein the wiper or leveler means
    consists of a spring like lever, a pivoted lever, or a length of
    articulated chain.


CLS 53/316
TXT Apparatus under subclass 315 wherein the wiper or leveler means is a
    rotatable cylindrical or wheel-like element.


CLS 53/317
TXT Apparatus under subclass 287 including devices which first position a
    separate closure member on a receptacle and then secure said closure by
    relative rotation with respect to said receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  The relative rotation of the closure and receptacle effects
    an interengagement of threads or similar projections.

    (2)     Note.  Juxtaposing of closure and receptacle may be either by means
    of the same instrumentality which effects the relative rotation or by means
    of a separate instrumentality.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304     through 313, for various devices under the class definition
    including means for supplying or providing a closure member for an
    assembling head or chuck.

    331,    for devices which secure a separate closure member on a receptacle
    by both interthread engagement and crimping (or shaping) portions of the
    closure member into engagement with the receptacle.

    331.5,  for securing devices, which effect relative rotation between a
    receptacle and a closure already on the receptacle, including means to
    convey or feed the so partially assembled closure and receptacle to the
    securing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, subclasses 151+ for receptacle closure removing
    implements attached to screw closure applying tools.

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 240 for apparatus utilizing rotational
    means for assembly and disassembly.

    81,     Tools, subclasses 3.1+ for devices which rotate a closure with
    respect to a receptacle either to tighten or loosen the closure, the
    partially or wholly assembled closure and receptacle being presented to the
    device by hand, and subclasses 53+ for wrenches of general utility.


CLS 53/318
TXT Apparatus under subclass 317 wherein the cycle of operation includes
    rotating a closure member relative to a receptacle in one direction and
    then in the other direction.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are devices which operate on a receptacle and
    a previously placed or juxtaposed closure member, inasmuch as the reverse
    rotation is considered an assembling operation rather than a mere
    tightening or loosening for Class 81, subclasses 3.1+.

    (2)     Note.  Included here are devices wherein a reverse rotation is for
    the disclosed, but unclaimed, purpose of facilitating filling or evacuating
    a receptacle.


CLS 53/319
TXT Apparatus under subclass 287 wherein a closure member is placed within the
    aperture of a preformed receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are devices which juxtapose the closure member
    and the preformed receptacle and then secure said closure in the receiver
    aperture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329+,   for closure securing means, per se, and particularly subclass 330
    for means which secure a closure internally of a preformed receptacle.


CLS 53/320
TXT Apparatus under subclass 319 including means providing for the escape of
    contents displaced by closure insertion.

    (1)     Note.  Ordinarily the displaced contents consists of air in the
    upper portion of a receptacle.


CLS 53/321
TXT Apparatus under subclass 319 including means whereby the straightening
    and/or buckling of portions of a closure member inserted within the
    aperture of a preformed receptacle serves to engage the sides of said
    aperture, either merely frictionally or by interlock with receptacle
    projections, thereby securing said closure member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359+,   for filler or forcer die means which distort or shape portions of
    the closure member to secure said closure to the receptacle.


CLS 53/322
TXT Apparatus under subclass 319 including means to retract the means directing
    a closure member into a receptacle.


CLS 53/323
TXT Apparatus under subclass 322 wherein retraction means bear directly on a
    receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 281 for means for positively separating a filled receptacle from
    the filling head or from its support.


CLS 53/324
TXT Apparatus under subclass 319 including means to compact or resiliently
    distort a closure member during and/or immediately prior to inserting in a
    preformed receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are devices with simple taper or bell shape
    dies through which a closure element is forced to compress said closure
    member.


CLS 53/325
TXT Apparatus under subclass 324 wherein compacting means include a rotary
    cylindrical element bearing against the closure member.


CLS 53/326
TXT Apparatus under subclass 324 wherein compacting means include a split die,
    one portion of which is radially reciprocable to impart a compressing force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    353,    for conforming dies with radially reciprocating jaws.


CLS 53/327
TXT Apparatus under subclass 324 wherein at least one element of a split die
    oscillates in an arcuate path to effect the compression.


CLS 53/328
TXT Apparatus under subclass 319 including details of means moving a closure
    member along the line of infeed.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are devices with plunger structure wherein the
    plunger is made up of a plurality of relatively movable elements.


CLS 53/329
TXT Apparatus under subclass 287 including means to fasten, shrink, wipe, crimp
    or conform a closure member onto a receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128.1+, for a device which secures a closure member on a receptacle by
    means of an auxiliary securing element rather than by merely deforming the
    closure member itself or a portion thereof.

    314,    for devices wherein a closure selected by a moving receptacle is
    subsequently secured to said receptacle.

    317+,   for devices which secure a closure member on a receptacle by thread
    engagement.


CLS 53/329.2
TXT Heated securing means:
    Apparatus under subclass 329 including provision to apply thermal energy to
    the means to fasten, shrink, wipe, crimp or conform a separate closure
    member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    478,    for a method of package making including closing a package and heat
    sealing a separate closure thereon.


CLS 53/329.3
TXT Adapted to engage flange (e.g., outturned seam) of package cover:Apparatus
    under subclass 329.2 in which  opposing edges of the closure project beyond
    the contents, wherein said means engages the projecting edges and completes
    the enclosure by bringing the opposing inwardly facing surfaces of the
    opposing edges together in face-to-face, e.g., abutting, relationship.


CLS 53/329.4
TXT With means to advance package during securing:
    Apparatus under subclass 329.3 combined with structure to cause the filled
    package to move as the enclosure is secured while engaged by the securing
    means.


CLS 53/329.5
TXT With means to trim excess cover:
    Apparatus under subclass 329.3 combined with structure to remove any
    unwanted portion of the cover of the package.


CLS 53/330
TXT Apparatus under subclass 329 wherein a closure member is secured within the
    aperture of a preformed receptacle by shaping or distorting portions of
    said closure member so as to engage the inner surface of said aperture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    319+,   for devices which secure a closure within the aperture of a
    preformed receptacle by compressing said closure member prior to or during
    insertion.


CLS 53/331
TXT Apparatus under subclass 329 including means to secure a closure member by
    interengagement of projections on both closure and receptacle by relative
    rotation plus a reshaping or distortion of a portion of the closure member
    to conform to or embrace the receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  The combination of means (1) to interengage the threads or
    lugs of a closure and a receptacle by relative rotation and means (2) which
    deform a portion of the closure member simultaneously or subsequent to such
    interthread engagement is considered beyond the scope of Class 81,
    subclasses 3.1+ and such art is here classified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    317+,   for screw or lug closure applying means, per se, and subclasses
    following this subclass (331) for closure securing by means of reshaping or
    distorting portion of the closure member.


CLS 53/331.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 329 including means to rotate closure and
    receptacle relative to each other so as to interlock the threads or
    projections carried by one with the threads, projections or apertures
    carried by the other.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are devices with means to convey or feed a
    receptacle supporting a closure to and/or from the securing mechanisms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    317+,   for means which juxtapose or position a screw type closure and
    receptacle as well as secure one to the other.

    331,    for means to secure a closure both by rotation and deformation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 3.1+ for devices which rotate a closure with
    respect to a receptacle either to tighten or loosen the closure; the
    partially or wholly assembled closure and receptacle being presented to the
    device by hand.


CLS 53/332
TXT Apparatus under subclass 329 wherein a tubular portion of a closure member,
    extending above the opening of a receptacle, is inverted so as to embrace
    the external neck portion of said receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are means for doubling back the upper portion
    of a rubber stopper, which doubled back portion serves to cover and protect
    the opening of the bottle.


CLS 53/333
TXT Apparatus under subclass 329 wherein plural conforming operations are
    performed sequentially on adjacent sections of a closure member.

    (1)     Note.  The plural operations performed on the closure member may be
    effected by the same conforming element or by separated conforming elements.

    (2)     Note.  The simultaneous shaping or conforming of adjacent sections
    of a closure member is not classified here. Such art is classified on the
    basis of the particular shaping operation.


CLS 53/334
TXT Apparatus under subclass 329 wherein a closure shaping or conforming
    element is moved or movable about an axis during application to a closure
    member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79+,    for head seaming devices of the rotary tool type in combination
    with means to vacuumize; the seaming device is usually within a vacuum
    chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 48+ for disclosure of seaming by
    pressure.

    413,    Sheet Metal Container Making, subclasses 31+ for roller die seaming
    means.


CLS 53/335
TXT Apparatus under subclass 334 wherein a rotary tool or die is brought to
    bear against a closure member as a result of forces set up by the rotation
    of said tool or die.


CLS 53/336
TXT Apparatus under subclass 335 wherein a configured projection is brought to
    bear on a rotary tool or die holder so as to counteract the action of
    centrifugal force.


CLS 53/337
TXT Apparatus under subclass 335 wherein centrifugal force restores a rotary
    tool or die to an initial position permitting removal or insertion of a
    closure member.


CLS 53/338
TXT Apparatus under subclass 334 wherein a conforming tool or die rotates about
    an axis which axis is rotating about the line of infeed.


CLS 53/339
TXT Apparatus under subclass 338 wherein a tool or die element is oscillated
    about an axis normal to the line of infeed during shaping of a closure
    member.


CLS 53/340
TXT Apparatus under subclass 338 wherein a tool or die element oscillates about
    an axis parallel to the line of infeed during shaping of a closure member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    349     through 355, and subclass 344 for sectional die means including
    various mechanical movements effecting such oscillation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    413,    Sheet Metal Container Making, subclasses 31+ for roller die seaming
    means.


CLS 53/341
TXT Apparatus under subclass 329 wherein a closure conforming or shaping means
    consists of a hollow internally configured tool, the movement or relative
    movement of said tool and a closure element effecting the desired shaping
    or deforming of said closure element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 295+ for presses having a pressure surface and
    see the search notes thereunder for the locus of pressure surfaces utilized
    to shape material.


CLS 53/342
TXT Apparatus under subclass 341 wherein a closure conforming member includes
    means to position or hold a closure element immediately prior to assembly
    with a receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  Mere frictional engagement between a closure element and a
    conforming die member to support said closure element is not considered a
    support means for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304     through 312, for closure delivery means combined with closure
    support means.


CLS 53/343
TXT Apparatus under subclass 342 wherein a closure is supported or held by
    means of a permanent or electromagnet.


CLS 53/344
TXT Apparatus under subclass 342 wherein a closure conforming or shaping member
    comprises two or more elements.

    (1)     Note.  The individual elements constituting the closure shaping
    member may act independent of each other or together as a unit.

    (2)     Note.  The subclasses indented hereunder are subdivided on the
    basis of the mechanical movement or actuation necessary to effect closure
    conforming or shaping.  Similar apparatus which serves to merely release
    the die sections after conforming of the closure member involves a search
    of all the subclasses indented hereunder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    330,    for sectional dies used to conform inserted closure members.

    334,    for sectional dies that rotate during closure conforming.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 409.01+ for disclosure of a plier type
    tool usable in severing a closure.

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, appropriate subclasses for segmental gripping
    devices.

    413,    Sheet Metal Container Making, subclasses 31+ for roller die seaming
    means.

    451,    Abrading, subclass 487 for a carrier for a radially movable
    abrading tool.


CLS 53/345
TXT Apparatus under subclass 344 wherein the individual die elements are
    provided with bearing or working surfaces of an elastic or yieldable nature.

    (1)     Note.  The resilient face is either a continuous annulus or
    sectional in form.


CLS 53/346
TXT Apparatus under subclass 345 wherein the resilient or yielding face is
    affixed to, or associated with, a sectional die limited to two elements.


CLS 53/347
TXT Apparatus under subclass 345 wherein the resilient face consists of a wire
    coil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    358,    for dies consisting of a helical spring annulus.


CLS 53/348
TXT Apparatus under subclass 344 wherein the individual die elements are
    actuated in response to the exertion of a hydraulic or pneumatic force
    against said elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    361,    for fluid pressure distorted filler or forcer.


CLS 53/349
TXT Apparatus under subclass 344 wherein the individual die members are urged
    or pressed against the closure member by the curved surface of a member
    rotatable about the infeed axis.


CLS 53/350
TXT Apparatus under subclass 344 wherein the individual die elements are
    actuated by the change in alignment of the several members making up a
    multi-link lever system.


CLS 53/351
TXT Apparatus under subclass 344 wherein the individual die elements are
    actuated to shape or form the closure member by direct or indirect contact
    with projection of definite shape as a result of relative motion with
    respect to said projection along the line of infeed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, appropriate subclasses under subclasses 9.1+ for
    socket type devices using an axial cam actuator.


CLS 53/352
TXT Apparatus under subclass 351 wherein the mating engaging bearing for the
    working cam surface is curved or rounded as the exterior of a sphere.


CLS 53/353
TXT Apparatus under subclass 351 wherein the die elements move in a path normal
    to the infeed motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, subclasses 66+ for socket type chucks including
    radially reciprocating jaws.


CLS 53/354
TXT Apparatus under subclass 344 wherein an axial or infeed motion against one
    end of an intermediate lever causes said intermediate lever to pivot
    thereby actuating individual die shaping elements.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are those devices wherein the intermediate
    lever slides along the arc of a circle to effect motion of the die elements.

    (2)     Note.  Force applied to an intermediate lever along a line other
    than an axial or infeed is considered to be a cam action for subclass 351.


CLS 53/355
TXT Apparatus under subclass 344 wherein the individual element constituting
    the die are resiliently urged to resist passage of a closure member,
    thereby deforming said closure member onto a receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  The bias or resiliency imparted to the die elements is the
    result of separate springlike elements applied against said die elements.


CLS 53/356
TXT Apparatus under subclass 344 wherein the sectional die element itself is
    made of a spring or resilient material and divided or partially severed
    lengthwise on one or more sides forming yieldable fingers whereby the
    inserted closure may be shaped or conformed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, subclasses 46.1+ for split or spring collect
    chucks.


CLS 53/357
TXT Apparatus under subclass 341 wherein the conforming member consists of a
    yieldable medium in the general shape of a torus or band, which torus or
    band is rolled or wiped over the closure element during infeed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220,    for wrapping apparatus in which the bending of the cover material
    is effect-ed by motion of a blank and contents through a confining space or
    passage.


CLS 53/358
TXT Apparatus under subclass 357 wherein the torus member is a yielding wire
    spring coil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    347,    for sectional dies utilizing a helical spring coil as a face member.


CLS 53/359
TXT Apparatus under subclass 341 wherein the die or conforming member consists
    of a substantially incompressible resilient medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 211 for presses utilizing a deformable platen;
    also see search notes thereunder for the locus of such art.


CLS 53/360
TXT Apparatus under subclass 359 wherein the bending of a yieldable medium
    counter to its original configuration serves to embrace the closure element
    and shape it onto the receptacle.


CLS 53/361
TXT Apparatus under subclass 359 wherein the resilient medium, subjected to
    hydraulic or pneumatic pressure, is distorted against the closure element
    to shape same.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are devices wherein a resilient membrane-like
    member, generally conforming to the shape of the upper portion of a bottle,
    is forced into intimate contact with said bottle by means of fluid
    pressure; thereby conforming a cot or hood placed over the bottle to said
    bottle top.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    348,    for fluid pressure actuated sectional dies.


CLS 53/362
TXT Apparatus under subclass 359 wherein the shaping medium is so restricted
    that force applied at one portion of said medium effects a distortion
    elsewhere to shape the closure element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 211 and see search notes thereunder for presses
    in which one of the pressure surfaces is bendable.


CLS 53/363
TXT Apparatus under subclass 341 wherein the die or closure element is provided
    with a hand grip for application and/or actuation of the die element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305,    for closure applying by hand operation with magazine supply.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, subclasses 151+ for hand cappers combined with
    receptacle closure remover.

    81,     Tools, subclasses 3.34+ for hand manipulated types of receptacle
    closure removers.


CLS 53/364
TXT Apparatus under subclass 341 wherein the die is mounted intermediate a
    pivot point and a force applying point of co-acting levers one of which
    carries the die, the other cooperating lever grasping or positioning the
    receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 293 for fixed fulcrum lever devices.


CLS 53/365
TXT Apparatus under subclass 341 wherein the die or conforming member is so
    mounted on a linkage that infeed with respect to a receptacle by said die
    is effected by moving a lever linked to said linkage so as to bring the
    linked elements of said linkage into line or past said alignment.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are devices wherein the actuation of the
    toggle mechanism grasps the receptacle as well as effects the infeed motion.


CLS 53/366
TXT Apparatus under subclass 329 wherein a closure is retained or secured in
    assembled position by a deformation of the receptacle or package cover
    material.


CLS 53/367
TXT Apparatus under subclass 287 including means providing for the proper
    juxtaposing of receptacle and closure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 165 for conveyor associated centering means for receivers in fluid
    material filling systems supplying successive receivers; subclasses 370+
    for receiver guides and shields in filling systems generally.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 373+ for a conveyor having
    means for changing the attitude of the conveyed load relative to the
    conveying direction.


CLS 53/368
TXT Apparatus under subclass 287 including (1) some form of yielding, resilient
    or adjustable means permitting variations between the final position of
    closure head and receptacle support during infeed and/or (2) means to
    assist the gravity removal of a completed package from the closure head.

    (1)     Note.  The claimed recitation of a closure head, capping head, die,
    throat, tapered throat, and the like without further recitation of
    structural detail for said closure applying element has been deemed
    insufficient to warrant classification in subclasses 341+ and, where
    otherwise coming within the scope of the above definition, has been here
    classified.

    (2)     Note.  Included here are devices which provide for compensating
    means in the closure head or die-structure as well as compensating means in
    the receptacle support.

    (3)     Note.  The mere yielding of a plunger to provide an ejection means
    for the assembled closure and receptacle is not necessarily a variable
    height compensating means, and such mechanism not in fact providing for
    height deviation is to be found in subclass 369.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 214 for reciprocating press structure which
    functions similarly to provide a constant force or pressure.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 177 for filling systems supplying successive receivers and having
    filling nozzle, guide or conveyor adjustable to receiver size; subclasses
    266 and 378+ for adjustable supports for receivers; subclasses 176 and 281+
    for means for discharging filled receivers from their support in a filling
    system.


CLS 53/369
TXT Apparatus under subclass 368 limited to devices which include means to
    eject or remove the completed package from the closure applying head.


CLS 53/370
TXT Apparatus under subclass 285 for rotating a tubular projecting end portion
    of the cover relative to the contents contacting portion of the cover so as
    to cause the projecting portion to be collapsed inwardly to contents
    enclosing position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181,    for closing a progressively seamed web between package units by
    twisting.

    217,    for wrapping apparatus in which a cinched or wiped around cover is
    closed by end twisting.

    227,    for wrapping apparatus in which an initial pouch shape is closed by
    twisting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 183+ for making a rigid container including
    closing the end of a tube by folding end flaps; subclasses 260+ for making
    a pliable container including folding end flaps; and subclass 308 for
    apparatus to close the end of a tube, e.g., by twisting.


CLS 53/370.2
TXT Including provision for pleat of cover overhang:
    Apparatus under subclass 285 by which portions of the cover material
    extending beyond the contents are turned inwardly with the formation of a
    tuck or gusset.


    (1)     Note.  This subclass is intended to include package making
    apparatus wherein a pleat is merely disclosed as a part of the completed
    package, i.e., a showing of a pleat on the completed package in the
    drawings is sufficient to cause a package making apparatus to be included
    in this and the indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    373.2+, for means to engage an outturned seam of a package cover in making
    a package, wherein there is no disclosure of formation of a pleat.


CLS 53/370.3
TXT With means to apply adhesive:
    Apparatus under subclass 370.2 combined with structure to supply bonding
    material to the cover of the package.


CLS 53/370.4
TXT With means to trim excess cover:
    Apparatus under subclass 370.2 combined with structure to remove any
    unwanted portion of the cover of the package.


CLS 53/370.5
TXT And means to advance package during closing:
    Apparatus under subclass 370.4 including structure to cause the filled
    package to move as enclosure is completed while engaged by the enclosure
    completing means.


CLS 53/370.6
TXT With means to engage cover at spaced points and move together to form
    pleat:Apparatus under subclass 370.2 including a first member to engage the
    filled package at a first location and a second member to engage the filled
    package at a second location and including provision to effect relative
    motion of the two members toward each other to effect formation of a
    gusset.


CLS 53/370.7
TXT With means to heat or cool seam:
    Apparatus under subclass 370.2 in which means is provided to apply or
    remove thermal energy from engaging surfaces of the cover.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    373,    for apparatus having means to apply or remove heat from an
    outturned seam without a pleat, and see the notes thereto for heat sealing
    elsewhere classified.

    479,    for a method of closing a preformed nonfreestanding container by
    heat sealing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, for heating by electrical resistance, especially
    subclasses  59.1+ and 78.16, respectively, for heating a metal tube by the
    use of electrically generated heat, and subclasses 603+ for inductive
    heating of metal tubes.


CLS 53/370.8
TXT Spaced from cover during heating or cooling:
    Apparatus under subclass 370.7 wherein the means to apply or remove thermal
    energy is out of contact with the surfaces of the cover being treated.


CLS 53/370.9
TXT Comprising means to force heated fluid to contact cover:
    Apparatus under subclass 370.8 including means to supply thermal energy by
    driving a flowable medium directly into engagement with the surface of the
    cover that is being treated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370.8,  for closing a package or filled receptacle with means to heat by
    radiant energy.


CLS 53/371.2
TXT Having nonplanar sealing surface:
    Apparatus under subclass 370.7 wherein the means to supply or remove
    thermal energy has a surface that is other than flat along the full length
    of the seam.


CLS 53/371.3
TXT With means to advance package during closing:
    Apparatus under subclass 370.7 including structure to cause the filled
    package to move as enclosure is completed while engaged by the enclosure
    completing means.


CLS 53/371.4
TXT Closing means comprising roller or roller-like member:
    Apparatus under subclass 371.3 wherein the means to close the package or
    filled receptacle turns about an axis and engages with its radially
    outwardly-facing radial extremity with rolling engagement.


CLS 53/371.5
TXT Closing means moving with package during closing:
    Apparatus under subclass 371.3 wherein the means to complete the enclosure
    travels in the same direction as the package during its operation.


CLS 53/371.6
TXT And moving perpendicularly to package movement during closing:Apparatus
    under subclass 371.5 wherein the means to complete the enclosure also
    travels normally to the direction of package travel as it functions.


CLS 53/371.7
TXT Including provision for pleat and fold of cover:
    Apparatus under subclass 371.3 by which portions of the cover material
    extending beyond the contents are pleated and subsequently folded.


CLS 53/371.8
TXT With package stationary during closing:
    Apparatus under subclass 370.7 wherein the package is motionless as
    enclosure is completed.


CLS 53/371.9
TXT Pivoted means to close cover:
    Apparatus under subclass 371.8 wherein the means to complete the enclosure
    turns about an axis to function.


CLS 53/372.2
TXT Including provision for pleat and fold of cover:
    Apparatus under subclass 371.8 by which portions of the cover material
    extending beyond the contents are pleated and subsequently folded.


CLS 53/372.3
TXT Means to cool seam:
    Apparatus under subclass 370.7 in which the means is provided to remove
    thermal energy from engaging surfaces of the cover.


CLS 53/372.4
TXT With means to advance package during closing:
    Apparatus under subclass 370.2 including structure to cause the filled
    package to move as enclosure is completed while engaged by the enclosure
    completing means.


CLS 53/372.5
TXT Including provision for pleat and fold of cover:
    Apparatus under subclass 372.4 by which portions of the cover material
    extending beyond the contents are pleated and subsequently folded.


CLS 53/372.6
TXT With package stationary during closing:
    Apparatus under subclass 370.2 wherein the package is motionless as
    enclosure is completed.


CLS 53/372.7
TXT Including provision for pleat and fold of cover:
    Apparatus under subclass 372.6 by which portions of the cover material
    extending beyond the contents are pleated to closure and subsequently
    folded.


CLS 53/372.8
TXT To serially pleat cover overhang:
    Apparatus under subclass 370.2 by which at least three adjacent portions
    proceeding around the package in a single direction are tucked successively.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 156+ and 183+ for closing the end of a tube
    by folding over the material in a manner to sequentially form overlapping
    flaps.


CLS 53/372.9
TXT Including means to rotate package or pleating means during
    pleating:Apparatus under subclass 372.8 having means to support the cover
    and contents against gravity and to cause said cover and contents to move
    about an axis passing through the contents, thereby presenting successive
    portions of the cover to the tucking apparatus; or having means to support
    the cover and contents against gravity and to cause said cover and contents
    to be stationary; and further having means to cause the tucking apparatus
    to move about an axis passing through the contents, thereby presenting
    successive portions of the cover to the tucking apparatus.


CLS 53/373.2
TXT By means adapted to engage outturned seam of package cover:
    Apparatus under subclass 285 wherein opposing surfaces of the cover project
    beyond the contents, and wherein enclosure is completed by bringing the
    opposing inwardly facing surfaces together in face-to-face, i.e., abutting,
    relationship.

    (1)     Note.  In the apparatus of this subclass, there is no disclosed
    formation of a tuck or gusset.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229,    for apparatus for making an initial U-fold and then forming an
    outturned longitudinal seam.

    370.2+, for apparatus for closing a package or a filled receptacle
    including provision for a disclosed formation of a pleat, i.e., a tuck or a
    gusset.

    481+,   for corresponding methods.


CLS 53/373.3
TXT With means to apply adhesive to seam:
    Apparatus under subclass 373.2 combined with structure to supply bonding
    material to the cover of the package in the vicinity of engagement of the
    opposing faces.

    (1)     Note.  Adhesive may be applied either before or after closure.

    (2)     Note.  Adhesive may serve to hold the fold down.


CLS 53/373.4
TXT With means to trim excess from cover:
    Apparatus under subclass 373.2 in which a portion of projecting cover
    material unnecessary to the enclosure is removed by severing.


CLS 53/373.5
TXT With means to advance package during closing:
    Apparatus under subclass 373.4 including structure to cause the filled
    package to move as enclosure is completed while engaged by the enclosure
    completing means.


CLS 53/373.6
TXT With means to engage cover at spaced points and move apart to flatten
    seam:Apparatus under subclass 373.2 including a first means to contact the
    projecting portion of the cover at a first location and including means to
    engage the projecting portion of the cover at a second location, including
    provision to effect movement of the means away from each other to draw the
    walls of the opening defined by the projecting portions together in planar
    form.


CLS 53/373.7
TXT With means to heat or cool seam:
    Apparatus under subclass 373.2 having means to apply to or remove from the
    "opposing surfaces" thermal energy.

    (1)     Note.  The abutting faces of the cover may be heated to seal the
    seam or may be cooled to cause the setting of adhesive previously applied
    thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for apparatus for packaging with means to heat or cool the contents.

    370.7,  for apparatus for applying heat to or removing heat from a pleated
    cover overhang.

    376.6,  for apparatus for applying or removing heat from a multiple flap
    closure seam.

    380.4,  for flap holders having heating or cooling means.

    463,    for methods of encasing involving heat sealing.

    477,    for methods of heat sealing closure seams.

    479,    for a method of closing a preformed nonfreestanding container by
    heat sealing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 200+ for electric heaters, per se, for
    heating cover seams.


CLS 53/373.8
TXT Spaced from cover during heating or cooling:
    Apparatus under subclass 373.7 wherein the means to apply or remove thermal
    energy is out of contact with the surfaces of the cover being treated.


CLS 53/373.9
TXT Comprising means to force heated fluid to contact cover:
    Apparatus under subclass 373.8 wherein thermal energy is supplied to or
    removed by a flowable medium directed into engagement with the surfaces of
    the cover that are being treated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    373.8,  for closing a package or filled receptacle with means to heat by
    radiant energy.


CLS 53/374.2
TXT With nonplanar sealing surface:
    Apparatus under subclass 373.7 wherein the means to supply or remove
    thermal energy has a surface that is other than flat along the full length
    of the seam.


CLS 53/374.3
TXT With means to advance package during closing:
    Apparatus under subclass 373.7 including structure to cause the filled
    package to move as enclosure is completed while engaged by the enclosure
    completing means.


CLS 53/374.4
TXT Closing means comprising roller or roller-like member:
    Apparatus under subclass 374.3 wherein the means to close the package or
    filled receptacle turns about an axis and engages with its radially
    outwardly facing radial extremity with rolling engagement.


CLS 53/374.5
TXT Closing means moving with package during closing:
    Apparatus under subclass 374.3 wherein the means to complete the enclosure
    travels in the same direction as the package during its operation.


CLS 53/374.6
TXT And moving perpendicularly to package movement during closing:Apparatus
    under subclass 374.5 wherein the means to complete the enclosure also
    travels normally to the direction of package travel as it functions.


CLS 53/374.7
TXT With means to fold cover after closing:
    Apparatus under subclass 374.3 by which face-to-face portions of the cover
    are subsequently folded.


CLS 53/374.8
TXT With package stationary during closing:
    Apparatus under subclass 373.7 wherein the package is motionless as
    enclosure is completed.


CLS 53/374.9
TXT Pivoted means to close package:
    Apparatus under subclass 374.8 wherein the means to complete the enclosure
    turns about an axis to function.


CLS 53/375.2
TXT With means to fold cover after closing:
    Apparatus under subclass 374.8 by which face-to-face portions of the cover
    are subsequently folded.


CLS 53/375.3
TXT Means to cool seam:
    Apparatus under subclass 373.7 including structure provided to reduce the
    thermal level of the cover in the region where portions are face-to-face.


CLS 53/375.4
TXT With means to advance package during closing:
    Apparatus under subclass 373.2 including structure to cause the filled
    package to move as enclosure is completed while engaged by the enclosure
    completing means.


CLS 53/375.5
TXT With means to fold cover after closing:
    Apparatus under subclass 375.4 by which face-to-face portions of the cover
    are subsequently folded.


CLS 53/375.6
TXT With package stationary during closing:
    Apparatus under subclass 373.2 wherein the package is motionless as
    enclosure is completed.


CLS 53/375.7
TXT With means to fold package cover after closing:
    Apparatus under subclass 375.6 by which face-to-face portions of the cover
    are subsequently folded.


CLS 53/375.8
TXT By means adapted to engage overlapped seam:
    Apparatus under subclass 285 wherein the unfinished package includes a
    first edge and a second opposing edge, which apparatus includes means to
    lay the inner face of the first edge over the outer face of the second edge
    to close the package such that the second edge is hidden by the first edge.


CLS 53/375.9
TXT With means to heat or cool seam:
    Apparatus under subclass 375.8 in which means is provided to apply or
    remove thermal energy from engaging surfaces of the cover.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    373.7+, for apparatus having means to apply or remove heat from an
    outturned seam without a pleat, and see the notes thereto for heat sealing
    elsewhere classified.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, for heating by electrical resistance, especially
    subclasses  59.1+ and 78.16, respectively, for heating a metal tube by the
    use of electrically generated heat, and subclasses 603+ for inductive
    heating of metal tubes.


CLS 53/376.2
TXT With means to advance package during closing:
    Apparatus under subclass 375.8 including structure to cause the filled
    package to move as enclosure is completed while engaged by the enclosure
    completing means.


CLS 53/376.3
TXT Package or receptacle having closure flap, e.g., carton flap, box lid,
    etc.:Apparatus under subclass 285 in which the enclosure of the contents is
    completed by displacing a portion of the cover that projects therefrom
    which is either integral with the cover or is a distinct member that is
    attached to the cover.

    (1)     Note.  Closing the flap of an envelope is included in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Closing an egg carton with a single flap is included herein.

    (3)     Note.  A "flap" may pivot about an axis or may pivot about a
    loosely defined axis. A distinct lid pivotally attached to a cover is
    considered to be a "flap".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284.3,  for apparatus which fills an envelope and closes it by displacing a
    flap.

    287+,   for apparatus which completes the enclosure of the contents by
    securing a separate closure member to another cover member.

    376.4+, for closing an egg carton by engagement with multiple flaps of the
    carton.

    377.5,  for closing an egg carton by tucking a closure flap inside the
    cover.

    484,    for a method of closing a preformed, freestanding, rigid or
    semi-rigid container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    441.5+, for apparatus for moistening and sealing an envelope.


CLS 53/376.4
TXT Multiple closure flaps:
    Apparatus under subclass 376.3 wherein a package or filled receptacle
    having, prior to folding, a plurality of slot separated flaps which package
    is then closed by folding the flaps inwardly upon one another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for corresponding methods.

    207+,   for wrapping machines which shape a notched or corner slit cover
    blank about the contents as well as close the package thus formed.

    491,    for a method of closing a preformed, freestanding, rigid or
    semi-rigid container by folding multiple preformed flaps.

    564+,   for apparatus by which a carton is set up and filled.


CLS 53/376.5
TXT With means to apply adhesive:
    Apparatus under subclass 376.4 combined with structure to supply bonding
    material to the cover of the package in the vicinity of engagement of the
    face of a flap with a face of the cover engaged thereby.


CLS 53/376.6
TXT With means to heat or cool flap:
    Apparatus under subclass 376.4 in which means is provided to apply or
    remove thermal energy from engaging surfaces of the cover.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    373.7+, for apparatus having means to apply or remove heat from an
    outturned seam without a pleat, and see the notes thereto for heat sealing
    elsewhere classified.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, for heating by electrical resistance, especially
    subclasses 59.1+ and 78.16, respectively, for heating a metal tube by the
    use of electrically generated heat, and subclasses 603+ for inductive
    heating of metal tubes.


CLS 53/376.7
TXT With means to advance package during closing:
    Apparatus under subclass 376.6 including structure to cause the filled
    package to move as enclosure is completed while engaged by the enclosure
    completing means.


CLS 53/376.8
TXT With package stationary during closing:
    Apparatus under subclass 376.6 wherein the package is motionless as
    enclosure is completed.


CLS 53/377.2
TXT With means to advance package during closing:
    Apparatus under subclass 376.4 including  structure to cause the filled
    package to move as enclosure is completed while engaged by the enclosure
    completing means.


CLS 53/377.3
TXT With package stationary during closing:
    Apparatus under subclass 376.4 wherein the package is motionless as
    enclosure is completed.


CLS 53/377.4
TXT With means to apply adhesive:
    Apparatus under subclass 376.3 combined with structure to supply bonding
    material to the cover of the package in the vicinity of engagement of the
    face of a flap with a face of the cover engaged thereby.


CLS 53/377.5
TXT Tucked inside cover:
    Apparatus under subclass 376.3 including means to place the projecting flap
    portion under another portion of the cover.


CLS 53/377.6
TXT Attached flap:
    Apparatus under subclass 376.3 wherein a closure member fastened to and
    pivotable with respect to a preformed receptacle is positioned in or over
    an aperture of said receptacle, so as to complete the enclosure.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a device for closing a paper or carboard
    carton provided with a hinged, staple-attached closure.


CLS 53/377.7
TXT With means to heat or cool flap:
    Apparatus under subclass 376.3 in which means is provided to apply or
    remove thermal energy from engaging surfaces of the cover.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    373.7+, for apparatus having means to apply or remove heat from an
    outturned seam without a pleat, and see the notes thereto for heat sealing
    elsewhere classified.

    477,    for a method of closing a package or filled container by heat
    sealing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, for heating by electrical resistance, especially
    subclasses 59.1+ and 78.16, respectively, for heating a metal tube by the
    use of electrically generated heat, and subclasses 603+ for inductive
    heating of metal tubes.


CLS 53/377.8
TXT With means to advance package during closing:
    Apparatus under subclass 377.7 including structure to cause the filled
    package to move as enclosure is completed while engaged by the enclosure
    completing means.


CLS 53/378.3
TXT With means to advance package during closing:
    Apparatus under subclass 376.3 including structure to cause the filled
    package to move as enclosure is completed while engaged by the enclosure
    completing means.


CLS 53/381.1
TXT MEANS TO OPEN OR ERECT RECEPTACLE:
    Apparatus under the class definition (1) for engaging a portion of the
    cover, such as a flap for moving such portion as to permit ready access for
    filling or other operation of the cover or (2) for engaging a formed but
    collapsed receptacle and expanding or erecting the receptacle to an open or
    contents receiving form.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a device for shifting or removing a
    closure, lid, cap or seal with respect to a receptacle so as to uncover an
    aperture for filling, emptying or treatment of said receptacle.  The closed
    receptacle is handled, positioned or oriented by the mechanism which then
    shifts or removes the closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     for apparatus for unfolding or opening a filled package and
    inserting additional contents therein.

    75+,    for package making apparatus including automatic or triggered
    control of package and filled receptacle closing or opening means.

    169,    for apparatus for opening the shell or shuck of a tray and shell
    type package and placing the slide therein.

    331.5,  for package making including use of a securing device which effects
    relative rotation between a receptacle and a closure already on the
    receptacle, including means to convey or feed the so partially assembled
    closure and receptacle to the securing means.

    492,    for a method of package making comprising opening only.

    564+,   for apparatus for opening a collapsed receptacle and subsequently
    filling the same.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 3.2+ for means to remove a receptacle closure
    wherein a closed receptacle is manually presented to said means or the
    means is manually applied to said receptacle or closure.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    for a filling system for fluent material having means to open a
    self-closing receiver.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 411+ for a device for
    emptying a portable receptacle, which device includes means for opening
    prior to emptying the receptacle.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 51+ for forming a receptacle or container
    from paper or other sheet or web.


CLS 53/381.2
TXT With cutting means:
    Apparatus under subclass 381.1 combined with a sharp provision for
    penetration to divide one portion of the cover material from another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 400+ for a can opener.


CLS 53/381.3
TXT To open envelope:
    Apparatus under subclass 381.2 particularly adapted to provide access into
    a cover comprised of upper and lower planar sheets which, before access to
    the package, engaged each other and were united at their perimeters, which
    cover was intended to hold sheet-like goods.

    (1)     Note. An "envelope" with a bellows or gusset is not included herein.


CLS 53/381.4
TXT Means to remove separate closure:
    Apparatus under subclass 381.1 for use with a receptacle including a first
    cover and a second distinct cover portion that serves in conjunction with
    the first to contain the contents, comprising structure particularly
    adapted to removing the second cover portion from the first.


CLS 53/381.5
TXT Means to open envelope:
    Apparatus under subclass 381.1 particularly adapted to provide access into
    a cover comprised of upper and lower planar sheets which, before access to
    the package, engaged each other and were united at their perimeters, which
    cover was intended to hold sheet-like goods.

    (1)     Note. An "envelope" with a bellows or gusset is not included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    569,    for apparatus for forming and filling a letter-type envelope.


CLS 53/381.6
TXT Including means to apply suction to grip envelope:
    Apparatus under subclass 381.5 including means to engage the cover and
    reduce the pressure at the area of engagement such that atmospheric
    pressure forces the cover area to adhere to the engaging means in order to
    manipulate that area of the cover.


CLS 53/381.7
TXT Means to open flap:
    Apparatus under subclass 381.5 including means particularly intended to
    lift a portion of the cover that projects therefrom which is either
    integral with the cover or is a distinct member attached to the cover.

    (1)     Note.  A "flap" may pivot about an axis or may pivot about a
    loosely defined axis.  A distinct lid pivotally attached to a cover is
    considered to be a "flap".


CLS 53/382.1
TXT Means to open flap, e.g., carton flap, box lid, etc.:
    Apparatus under subclass 381.1 including means particularly intended to
    lift a portion of the cover that projects therefrom which is either
    integral with the cover or is a distinct member attached to the cover.

    (1)     Note.  A "flap" may pivot about an axis or may pivot about a
    loosely defined axis.  A distinct lid pivotally attached to a cover is
    considered to be a "flap".


CLS 53/382.2
TXT Means to fold flap about line perpendicular to receptacle
    movement:Apparatus under subclass 382.1 wherein the receptacle is moved and
    wherein the flap lifting means is particularly adapted to move a flap at
    the leading or trailing side of the receptacle.


CLS 53/382.3
TXT And means to fold another flap about line parallel to receptacle
    movement:Apparatus under subclass 382.2 also particularly adapted to move a
    flap at a lateral side of the receptacle.


CLS 53/383.1
TXT With means to apply adhesive:
    Apparatus under subclass 381.1 combined with structure to supply bonding
    material to the cover of the package in the vicinity of engagement of the
    face of a flap with a face of the cover engaged thereby.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, for coating means, generally.


CLS 53/384.1
TXT Means to open bag:
    Apparatus under subclass 381.1 particularly adapted to provide access into
    a cover of a pliable container including a bottom and sides but open at the
    top for filling and closing.


CLS 53/385.1
TXT Including means to apply air blast:
    Apparatus under subclass 384.1 including structure to cause flow of
    atmospheric air or air under compression to flow against the bag to provide
    access therein.


CLS 53/386.1
TXT Including means to apply suction:
    Apparatus under subclass 384.1 including structure to remove atmospheric
    pressure (i.e., establish a vacuum) from one surface of the cover to
    provide access to the bag.


CLS 53/387.1
TXT MEANS TO HOLD FLAP:
    Apparatus under the class definition including means to engage a projecting
    portion of the cover and press or maintain that portion under pressure for
    a sufficient time that after release of the pressing means that portion
    will remain in position.

    (1)     Note.  The apparatus of this subclass may hold the flap for a
    sufficient time to (1) affect a bond or (2) set or dry the cover material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, for a press not elsewhere provided for.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 183+ for making a rigid container including
    closing the end of a tube by folding end flaps; subclasses 260+ for making
    a pliable container including folding end flaps; and subclass 308 for
    apparatus to close the end of a tube, e.g., by twisting.


CLS 53/387.2
TXT While package is moving:
    Apparatus under subclass 387.1 particularly adapted to engage the
    projecting portion of a cover as that cover and its contents are in motion.


CLS 53/387.3
TXT With means to heat or cool flap:
    Apparatus under subclass 387.2 including structure intended to raise or
    lower the thermal level of the projecting portion.


CLS 53/387.4
TXT With means to heat or cool flap:
    Apparatus under subclass 387.1 including structure intended to raise or
    lower the thermal level of the projecting portion.


CLS 53/389.1
TXT MEANS TO FEED COVER MATERIAL:
    Apparatus under the class definition for delivering unformed packaging
    material to a package-making machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64+,    for automatic or triggered control of the cover feed, especially
    subclass 66 for devices to sever cover lengths which are determined by the
    size of the contents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, for a material feeder combined with a severing device,
    generally.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, for methods of, or
    apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing both the leading and
    trailing ends to effect movement of the material.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, for sheet feeding or delivering
    apparatus, and see the search note under the class definition of Class 271.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 210+ for making a container including
    feeding a cover for assembly therewith.


CLS 53/389.2
TXT Continuous web cover material:
    Apparatus under subclass 389.1 particularly adapted to deliver packaging
    material which comprises an elongated sheet, wherein the sheet is of
    sufficient length that at least one of the leading and trailing ends
    thereof is not recognized (engaged) by the delivering apparatus.


CLS 53/389.3
TXT With cutter:
    Apparatus under subclass 389.2 combined with means including a sharp
    cutting edge adapted to piercingly engage the packaging material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, for a material feeder combined with a severing device,
    generally.


CLS 53/389.4
TXT Roller or roller-like feeder:
    Apparatus under subclass 389.2 including means to deliver the packaging
    material by engagement therewith by a surface of a member turning about an
    axis, which surface faces radially away from that axis such that the
    surface and the packaging material move at the same speed.


CLS 53/389.5
TXT Comprising endless belt:
    Apparatus under subclass 389.4 wherein the surface is part of a band
    connected to itself and guided to move along a path that is not about said
    axis during a portion of its loop.


CLS 53/390
TXT Apparatus under the class definition for assisting the formation of a
    package or the filling of a receptacle by a hand operation.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses includes plural supports for
    holding a plurality of package components (e.g., receptacles and contents)
    within reach of a packer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145,    for devices for packing articles in receivers and forming a dress
    or display layer, the packing usually being accomplished by hand.

    219,    for wrapping machines in which the wrapper is folded over the
    contents by hand.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 391 for aids to manual packing of fluent materials, and see the
    search notes to the subclass definition.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 128+ and 146+ for receptacle supports which
    may be for the disclosed purpose of supporting a receptacle while being
    manually packed.


CLS 53/391
TXT Apparatus under subclass 390 which includes at least one mechanism to
    affirmatively move the package components to and/or the assembled package
    from the point of packaging.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 250+ or 391 for conveyor aids for manually filling receivers
    with fluent materials.


CLS 53/392
TXT Apparatus under subclass 390 including means to turn or facilitate turning
    the package or filled receptacle through an angle of substantially 180_ in
    a vertical plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243,    for means for filling a receptacle while in the inverted position
    and then inverting the filled receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 319+ for apparatus for filling a receiver with fluent materials
    in which the supply and receiver are manually coupled and inverted.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 402+ for a conveyor having
    means for inverting the conveyed load.

    414,    Materials or Article Handling, subclasses 754+ for devices for
    inverting an article.


CLS 53/393
TXT Apparatus under the class definition for making a package or for devices in
    which less than a complete packaging operation is effected and not provided
    for in the subclasses above or in other existing classes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 51+ for making a container to be
    subsequently filled.


CLS 53/394
TXT MATCHBOOK MAKING:

    Methods and apparatus under the class definition for fabricating previously
    dipped or headed matches or match containing assemblies into a unitary
    structure with a cover.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclasses 507+ for match structures
    and manipulating processes for constructing them, especially subclasses
    508+ for multiple matches and subclass 509 for match cards.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 50+ for apparatus for or process of
    matchmaking, especially subclass 51 for making match combs for insertion
    into match books.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, sub- classes 90+ for a package
    combined with a match(es) for igniting the tobacco content; and subclasses
    96+ for a match packet, container, or holder.


CLS 53/395
TXT Methods:

    Methods under subclass 394.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142+,   for packaging match books and other tapered or headed articles.

    396+,   for other packaging methods.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclass 512 for manipulating
    processes for constructing matches.


CLS 53/396
TXT METHODS:

    Methods under the class definition not provided for elsewhere.


CLS 53/397
TXT Applying a partial cover:

    Methods under subclass 396 for applying a cover or cover material and
    leaving a substantial portion of the contents exposed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    441+,   for the applying of a partial cover to contents and subsequent
    shrinking of the partial cover.

    449,    for the applying of plural partial covers which are superimposed or
    overlapped.

    473,    for the depositing of articles in an orderly arrangement upon a
    tray or flat.

    476+,   particularly subclass 488 for the partial encasing of the mouth of
    a bottle by a hood, cot, or sleeve to either close the bottle or protect
    the closure.

    580,    for corresponding apparatus.


CLS 53/398
TXT Partial covering of multiple cans, bottles (e.g., six-pack carrier):

    Methods under subclass 397 for associating a plurality of containers,
    usually six or eight bottles or cans, with a partial cover.

    (1)     Note.  The cover may have a handle means whereby the resultant
    package may be picked up and carried with one hand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48.1+,  for apparatus for fabricating cover material to make a package or
    for filling a preformed receptacle, the contents of which comprises a
    plurality of bottles or cans.


CLS 53/399
TXT Banding:

    Methods under subclass 397 for applying cover material (e.g., band, sleeve,
    or wrapper) which encircles the contents in one direction only, such as
    girth, but leaves both sides or ends thereof fully exposed, the cover or
    cover material frictionally contacting the contents so as to be retained
    thereabout.

    (1)     Note.  See section III for definitions of "bands" and "binding" and
    section IV for banding and binding classified elsewhere.

    (2)     Note.  The placing of binding around a package, the primary purpose
    of which is to aid in or contribute to the retention of a cover about the
    contents, is not considered a band for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    414,    see (2) Note above.

    582+,   for corresponding apparatus.


CLS 53/400
TXT With adsorption or absorption of contents:

    Methods under subclass 396 in which the contents is adsorbed or absorbed by
    the cover.

    (1)     Note.  An absorbent or adsorbent material which remains associated
    with the cover upon discharge of the contents is considered to be part of
    the cover.

    (2)     Note.  The patents in this subclass relate mainly to the storage of
    acetylene gas.


CLS 53/401
TXT With nonreactive packaging materials:

    Methods under subclass 396 in which the cover is made of a particular
    material or is treated to prevent chemical reaction with the contents.


CLS 53/402
TXT With inhibitor:

    Methods under subclass 396 including introducing into the package as a
    portion of the contents a substance which acts to prevent chemical reaction
    between the contents and cover material.

    (1)     Note.  The introduction of inert gas into a package is not
    considered to be an inhibitor for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401,    for methods of packaging in which the cover is made of a particular
    material to prevent chemical reaction with the contents.

    432,    for methods of packaging which include subjecting the contents to
    an inert gas.  See (1) Note above.


CLS 53/403
TXT Gas filling and/or evacuating and closing:

    Methods under subclass 396 of charging and/or evacuating receptacles with
    gas or vapor only and completing the enclosure.

    (1)     Note.  Where the charging of the receptacle with gas or the
    evacuation of the receptacle is an incident to the making of the
    receptacle, such as blowing a glass receptacle or using a vacuum to hold
    parts together while joining them, the patent is excluded from this class
    and will be found in the appropriate receptacle making class; see the Notes
    below.

    (2)     Note.  Where the claims of the patent include any subject matter
    which limits the process or apparatus to use in manufacturing a particular
    article, such as claiming operations which could be performed only where an
    electric switch or electric lamp was being manufactured, the patent is
    excluded from this class and will be found in the particular class which
    provides for making the article claimed.  If the claims merely recite by
    name the article being manufactured but the process or apparatus is of
    general utility, such recitation alone will not be sufficient to exclude
    the patent from this class.

    (3)     Note.  Where the gas charging or the evacuation involves the use of
    a chemical reaction either to generate the gas to be charged into the
    receptacle or to combine with the gas in the receptacle to produce the
    vacuum (gettering), the patent is excluded from this class and will be
    found in the particular class which provides for making the article: see
    the Notes below.

    (4)     Note.  Merely stating that a machine has exhaust heads does not
    constitute subject matter for this or indented subclasses where the claimed
    operations performed on the article held in the exhaust is neither
    exhausting nor gas filling.

    (5)     Note.  Gas charging and/or evacuating combined with assembly other
    than that of applying a closure to a receptacle is not classified herein;
    see Notes below for the classes providing for such combination.

    (6)     Note.  This subclass is restricted to gas or vapor handling in
    combination with closing.  Any additional treatment of contents or filling
    with articles or fluent material requires that the combination be
    classified in the appropriate subclasses below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     for apparatus including gas charging and/or evacuating of
    receptacles combined with closing.

    266.1+, for apparatus to fill and close preformed receptacles.

    285+,   for apparatus to close packages and filled receptacles.

    432+,   for methods of subjecting the contents of a package to a vacuum or
    gas treatment.

    467,    for methods of filling and closing receptacles with contents other
    than gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate
    subclasses, especially subclasses 92, 191, 242, 284+, 402+, and 558 for
    miscellaneous processes and apparatus for drying receptacles by the use of
    gas or vacuum.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 34 for a glassworking or treating
    process including evacuation of a glass product; and subclass 270 for glass
    envelope tipping off apparatus with or without evacuating means; see
    section I in Class 53 for the line between Class 53 and receptacle
    manufacturing classes.

    81,     Tools, subclass 15.4 for tools enabling air to escape from
    pneumatic tires.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 472 for apparatus for
    removing air from foodstuffs which includes a chamber and means for
    exhausting the air therefrom.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosive, subclass 39 for gas containing or
    generating cartridges.

    137,    Fluid Handling, is the generic class for fluid handling (including
    gas); see particularly subclasses 223+ for inflatable article filling
    chucks and/or stems.  (See the Notes to subclass 223 for the line).

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 4+ for processes of modification of the gaseous content of a
    receiver, per se.

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclasses 415+ for inflating pneumatic
    tires combined with vehicle or wheel structure, including means more or
    less permanently connected with the individual tire and means for inflating
    one tire from another.  This subclass includes pneumatic tires with valve
    structure as well as inflating devices.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses .6+ for gas container.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 50+ and 602+ for inductive heating and
    for electric heating of metal, respectively.  Note particularly subclasses
    59.1+ and 607+ where the metal is a tube.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 581+ for a high-pressure-gas tank.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 3+ for gas dispensing and see search classes
    listed in section 4 of the class definition of Class 222.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 67 for inflatable forms.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, appropriate subclass for making or closing a
    receptacle by an operation which includes soldering, brazing, or welding.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 97 for devices for expanding or compressing
    the gas cells of a lighter-than-air craft to alter the buoyancy of the
    craft; subclass 98 for devices for inflating the buoyant gas containers of
    such aircraft; and subclass 99 for devices for releasing the buoyant gas
    from such aircraft.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 181.1 for getters; and subclass 364 for
    solvents.

    413,    Sheet Metal Container Making, subclasses 31+ for roller die seaming
    means.

    417,    Pumps, for pumps, per se, which may handle gaseous fluids.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, for rotary expansible chamber
    devices, per se, used for evacuating and gas charging a sealed body.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 56+ which is the generic place for
    apparatus for chemically purifying or separating gases.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 210+ for processes,
    involving a chemical reaction, for separating or purifying gaseous mixtures.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclass 404 for packing food products under reduced pressure combined with
    a food working operation.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclasses 92+ for inflatable
    structures for sustaining a user partially immersed in a liquid and
    provided with a pneumatic envelope and a source of gas for distending the
    envelope embodied in or forming a part of the inflatable structure.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    subclasses 53+ and the subclasses specified in the Notes to those
    subclasses for process; and subclasses 70 and 73 for apparatus which is
    limited by claimed subject matter to use in manufacturing electric lamps or
    electric space discharge devices.  For a statement of the line between
    Class 445 see the reference to Class 53 in the Notes to the class
    definition of Class 445.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 176+ for
    pneumatically-operated toys, and subclasses 220+ for inflatable toys.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, especially subclasses 60+ and 400+ for a sorbent composition,
    per se.


CLS 53/404
TXT With solder or wax sealing:

    Methods under subclass 403 including the step or steps of applying and
    fusing or merely fusing a heat sensitive bonding agent in conjunction with
    the step of closing.

    (1)     Note.  The fusing of the material either seals and secures a
    separate closure onto a receptacle or serves as a closure itself for a
    vent-like opening.

    (2)     Note.  The term "solder" is here used, loosely, to include any
    metallic or nonmetallic heat sensitive bonding agent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81+,    for apparatus including means to charge and/or evacuate receptacles
    with gas or vapor only combined with means to complete receptacle enclosure
    by soldering.

    477,    for methods of heat sealing packages and filled receptacles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 101+ for the process of joining by
    soldering, brazing, or welding.


CLS 53/405
TXT Evacuating only and closing:

    Methods under subclass 403 limited to exhausting or removing gas or vapor
    from a receptacle and completing the enclosure.

    (1)     Note.  The exhausting or removing requires a positive pumping or
    suction. Mere valving or venting so as to allow a flow of gas is not here
    considered to be evacuating.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is restricted to gas or vapor handling in
    combination with closing.  Any additional treatment of contents or filling
    with articles or fluent material requires that the combination be
    classified in the appropriate subclasses below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     for apparatus including gas charging and/or evacuating combined
    with closing.

    408,    for methods of gas charging a receptacle and completing the
    enclosure including evacuating.

    432+,   for methods which subject the contents of a package to a vacuum.

    440+,   for apparatus including gas charging and/or evacuating combined
    with closing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 4+ for processes of modification of the gaseous content of a
    receiver, per se.


CLS 53/406
TXT With gas igniting:

    Methods under subclass 403 including the step or steps of causing
    combustion of the gas or gases with which a receptacle is charged.

    (1)     Note.  The combustion of the gas or gases is usually restricted to
    the head space and area adjacent to the head space of a receptacle so as to
    sterilize and/or create an inert atmosphere in said head space.


CLS 53/407
TXT With steam filling:

    Methods under subclass 403 including the step or steps of utilizing water
    vapor.

    (1)     Note.  The steam is used to sterilize and/or assist in the creation
    of a vacuum within the head space of a receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79+,    especially subclass 110 for apparatus which applies steam to the
    head space of a receptacle.


CLS 53/408
TXT Including evacuating:

    Methods under subclass 403 of both evacuating and gas charging receptacles
    with the step of completing the enclosure.

    (1)     Note.  The evacuation may precede the gas charging or may follow
    the gas charging.

    (2)     Note.  See (1) Note under subclass 405 for the concept of
    evacuating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79+,    for apparatus to gas charge and/or evacuate a receptacle and
    complete the enclosure.

    405,    for the methods limited to evacuating receptacles and completing
    the enclosure.


CLS 53/409
TXT Annular package:

    Methods under subclass 396 for making a package in which the contents to
    which the cover is applied has a through opening into or through which the
    cover material is inserted, or for filling a receptacle which has a through
    opening which forms a contents-containing space of annular shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204,    for apparatus for applying a cover to contents having a through
    opening into or through which the cover is inserted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 12 for apparatus, not otherwise provided for, for
    placing a binder which passes through the opening in ring-like material.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 434+ for winding
    elongated material through a central opening of a ring-shaped core.


CLS 53/410
TXT Forming a cover adjunct or application of a cover adjunct to a cover:

    Methods under subclass 396 for performing an operation with respect to the
    cover to provide it with some accessory, device, or abiding characteristic
    in addition to or beyond the mere enclosing of the contents.

    (1)     Note.  See section III for meaning of the term "cover adjunct".
    The operations of slitting or notching of cover blanks and flaps
    preparatory to shaping the cover or the application of adhesive to the
    cover to aid in seam retention are not considered cover adjuncts for this
    subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The partial encasement of the mouth portion of a bottle by a
    hood, cot, or sleeve to either close the bottle or protect the closure is
    not considered a cover adjunct application.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128.1+, for corresponding apparatus.

    476+,   especially subclass 488 (see (2) Note above).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, appropriate subclass for receptacles
    with handles.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 117.09+ for a
    handle combined with a paperboard box.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 6+ for bags with handles.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 102+ for making a rigid container including
    application of a cover thereto.


CLS 53/411
TXT Printing or protective coating:

    Methods under subclass 410 which include means for (a) producing a
    character or design on a surface of the cover or cover adjunct by
    impressing of dies or type or by applying coating material thereto through
    openings in a pattern sheet (e.g., stenciling), or for (b) applying a
    protective film or impregnant on a surface of the cover material or a part
    thereof during some portion of the operation of forming a package.

    (1)     Note.  The application of bonding material, e.g., an adhesive, is
    not considered a printing or coating application for this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The application of a protective coating to a cover can be
    found here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401,    for methods of treating a cover to prevent chemical reaction with
    the contents.

    402,    for methods of introducing as part of the contents an inhibitor
    which acts to prevent chemical reaction between the cover and contents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, appropriate subclasses, especially subclass 483 for
    printing processes.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    277 through 280 for methods of laminating combined with printing or coating.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 459.1 for a special
    receptacle or package  with an indicator and subclass 459.5 for a special
    receptacle or package with indicia.

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclasses for coating processes.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 187+ for making a pliable container
    combined with printing.


CLS 53/412
TXT Package opening device (e.g., tear strip):

    Methods under subclass 410 for forming on, applying to, or otherwise
    providing for some structure associated with the cover material for
    facilitating the removal of at least a portion of the cover thereby
    exposing part or all of the contents.

    (1)     Note.  Methods including a notching or slitting operation, if
    performed for the expressed purpose of providing for removal of portions of
    cover to expose contents, will be found here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133.3,  for the corresponding apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    166+ for methods of bonding filamentary material to a web or sheet.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, appropriate subclasses, e.g., 12,
    222, 227, 239, 250, and 264 for receptacles and packages with opening
    devices; paper receptacles, subclasses 601+ for receptacles having devices
    for readily opening same.

    413,    Sheet Metal Container Making, subclasses 31+ for roller die seaming
    means.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclass 86 for making a rigid container combined with
    assembling therewith a member having a tearing edge.


CLS 53/413
TXT Handle:

    Methods under subclass 410 for (a) securing on or applying over the cover
    material or the completed package material to serve as a handle, or for (b)
    forming a handle from the existing cover material of the package.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134.1,  for corresponding apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, appropriate subclasses for
    receptacles and packages with handles.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 117.09+ for a
    handle combined with a paperboard box.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 6+ for bags with handles.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclass 88 for making a container with assembling a
    handle therewith.


CLS 53/414
TXT Binding string:

    Methods under subclass 410 for placing a binding about the package to aid
    in the retaining of the cover about the contents.

    (1)     Note.  See section III for definition of binding.

    (2)     Note.  For binding classified elsewhere see section IV.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138.6,  for corresponding apparatus.

    399,    for methods of placing a band about a package.

    424,    for methods of placing a binding about the skirt of a closure
    element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 2+ for methods of binding.


CLS 53/415
TXT Strip, stamp, nonencircling label, or space filler:

    Methods under subclass 410 for applying sheet material of less extent than
    complete encirclement of the package to a surface of the cover material, or
    for applying a sheet of material to the cover to bridge the gap resulting
    from failure of the edges of opposite flaps to abut or overlap each other.

    (1)     Note.  The sheet material may comprise a strip, tape, or stamp and
    may either comprise simply a label or may serve to retain seams of flaps in
    sealed relationship.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135.1,  for corresponding apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, for
    methods of applying labels.


CLS 53/416
TXT Fastening or sealing:

    Methods under subclass 410 for applying an element such as a staple, clip,
    or rivet to secure or seal closure member, or to join two portions of a
    closure cover together to complete the enclosing of the contents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138.1,  for corresponding apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 505+ for methods including applying a
    deformable band around a crimped mouth of a package such as a bag.


CLS 53/417
TXT Applying the fastener to a gathered bag neck (e.g., staple or clip):

    Methods under subclass 416 wherein said closure cover comprises a bag or
    sleevelike element gathered at one end and held closed by applying a
    fastener.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138.2,  for corresponding apparatus.

    583,    for apparatus for applying a band to a bag neck.


CLS 53/418
TXT Sewing:

    Methods under subclass 416 for stitching at least two portions of the cover
    together to enclose the contents within the package.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138.5,  for corresponding apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 475.01+ for methods of sewing.


CLS 53/419
TXT Encircling sealing strip (e.g., adhesive tape):

    Methods under subclass 416 for applying a tapelike strip completely
    encircling the package to hold, secure, or render airtight separate parts
    of the cover.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137.2,  for corresponding apparatus.

    399,    for methods of band applying.

    449,    for methods of applying plural covers one of which may be a band.


CLS 53/420
TXT For preformed receptacle with separate closure:

    Methods under subclass 410 relating to the assembly of a separate closure
    member onto or into the aperture of a preformed receptacle and the
    application or formation of a cover adjunct in connection therewith.


CLS 53/421
TXT Including gasket compressing:

    Methods under subclass 420 including the step or steps of deforming a
    gasket between a separate closure element and a receptacle.


CLS 53/422
TXT Against side of receptacle:

    Methods under subclass 421 wherein the gasket is deformed between part of
    the closure and the peripheral wall of the receptacle.


CLS 53/423
TXT Including casting or molding:

    Methods under subclass 420 including the step of confining a fluid or
    semifluid material so as to form a closure seal by solidification.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, appropriate subclasses for metal casting methods
    and apparatus.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses for molding methods.


CLS 53/424
TXT Constricting closure by binding:

    Methods under subclass 420 including the step of folding, corrugating, or
    drawing in the skirt of a closure element by means of a resilient band
    about said skirt or by deforming a wire band or strip about said skirt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138.6+, for apparatus including means to secure a bottle hood by means of a
    binding string.


CLS 53/425
TXT Sterilizing complete package:

    Methods under subclass 396 for subjecting the cover and contents as a unit
    to a process adapted to disinfect, decontaminate, pasteurize, or otherwise
    render the package aseptic.

    (1)     Note.  Methods limited to the sterilization of the contents alone
    are not classified here.  See the appropriate contents treating subclasses.
     The fact that the contents is positioned in or on the cover during
    sterilization will not justify classification in this subclass unless there
    is clear disclosure that a significant portion of the cover is sterilized
    in the process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    for packaging apparatus combined with sterilizing devices.

    428+,   see Notes above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 33 for methods of sterilizing, per se.


CLS 53/426
TXT Sterilizing cover only:

    Methods under subclass 396 for aseptically treating only the cover before
    or during a packaging operation and concurrently or subsequently filling
    the cover with sterile contents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 99 for apparatus for sterilizing
    containers, per se.



            An alternative electronic search of U.S. patents based upon a
    modification of the European Patent Office Classification (ECLA) System for
    certain subject matter in this subclass may also be found in Class 422
    Cross-Reference Art Collections 908 - 948. (There are no definitions
    associated with these Cross-Reference Art Collections. The most available
    disclosure as to the types of documents contained herein is given in any
    notes associated with the titles.)


CLS 53/427
TXT Skin packaging (e.g., vacuum forming by conforming cover over contents):

    Methods under subclass 396 for enclosing contents in sheet material to form
    a skinlike covering, e.g., by fluid pressure, into tight conforming
    engagement with a contents material placed on a base and securing the
    covering sheet to the base to complete the package.

    (1)     Note.  The medium for applying force to the covering is usually
    vacuum but is not limited thereto for this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  If the base or covering sheet is formed with a
    product-retaining recess prior to association with the contents, the patent
    is excluded from this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  Incidentally subjecting the contents to vacuum as the
    covering is applied will not preclude classification into this subclass.

    (4)     Note.  The base may comprise a card, blank, web, or sheet material
    and may be different from, or the same as, the covering material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    433,    for methods of forming a receptacle and subjecting contents therein
    to vacuum or gaseous medium.

    453,    for methods of forming receptacles by applying heat and pressure.

    509,    for corresponding apparatus.


CLS 53/428
TXT With contents treating:

    Methods under subclass 396 for subjecting the contents, either before,
    during, or after packaging, to an agency (a) which alters a physical or
    chemical characteristic of the contents or (b) which prevents constituents
    of the ambient atmosphere or another ambient condition from altering a
    physical or chemical characteristic of the contents material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111+,   for corresponding apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 11+ for processes of filling receivers with fluent material
    which include treatment of the material, and see the search note to
    subclass 111 for a statement as to the type of treatment applicable to
    Class 141.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    appropriate subclasses for methods of packaging food combined with a food
    working step.


CLS 53/429
TXT Folding:

    Methods under subclass 428 for doubling or bending a contents material back
    upon itself thereby reducing a physical dimension.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116+,   for corresponding apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    196+ for bending sheet material involving surface bonding or assembly.

    270,    Sheet-Material Associating, subclasses 52.01+ for the folding of
    sheet material.


CLS 53/430
TXT Winding:

    Methods under subclass 428 for rolling or coiling the contents material
    upon itself.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118+,   for apparatus for winding sheet material or garments.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclass 149 for article winding; and
    subclass 159 for coiling slivers.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    184+ for methods of winding webs or sheets involving surface bonding or
    assembly.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, appropriate subclasses for winding
    material upon a core.


CLS 53/431
TXT Liquid treating:

    Methods under subclass 428 for treating contents material with a liquid
    substance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 1+ for
    processes for treating with a liquid.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 33 for methods which may preserve,
    disinfect, or sterilize a contents material by treatment with a liquid.


CLS 53/432
TXT Vacuum or gas treating:

    Methods under subclass 428 including the step of subjecting the contents to
    the effects of a gaseous medium or a subatmospheric pressure or both.

    (1)     Note.  The combination of contents handling or treatment plus the
    step of applying a vacuum or gaseous medium is found here.

    (2)     Note.  See the search notes under subclass 403 for gassing or
    vacuumizing provided for elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    440,    for methods wherein a gaseous atmosphere or vacuum is generated by
    subjecting the contents to a temperature modification.

    510,    for apparatus for treating contents with a vacuum or inert
    atmosphere.


CLS 53/433
TXT Receptacle forming:

    Methods under subclass 432 including the step of fabricating a cover into
    contents-retaining form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    427,    for methods of skin packaging.

    452+,   for methods for forming or partially forming receptacles and
    subsequent filling thereof.

    511,    for apparatus for forming a receptacle before or during vacuum or
    gas treatment.


CLS 53/434
TXT Flexible preform cover (e.g., bags, pouches):

    Methods under subclass 432 in which the cover comprises a prefabricated
    baglike receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    459,    for methods for opening and filling bags.

    469,    for methods for filling and closing bags.

    512,    for apparatus for treating with vacuum or inert gaseous atmosphere
    wherein cover is a bag.


CLS 53/435
TXT Cutting:

    Methods under subclass 428 for severing the contents material into two or
    more discrete smaller portions by forces acting along predetermined lines.

    (1)     Note.  Forces which produce indiscriminate breakage, i.e., crushing
    or pulverizing are not considered to be acting along predetermined lines
    for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    428,    for methods involving crushing or pulverizing the contents.

    513,    for corresponding apparatus.


CLS 53/436
TXT Compacting or stretching:

    Methods under subclass 428 including subjecting the contents material to
    forces which crowd portions of the contents into a more confined space or
    which contract or elongate the contents without breaking.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    523+,   for corresponding apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 35+ for methods of compacting or compressing
    with presses.


CLS 53/437
TXT Agitating (e.g., vibrating or jarring):

    Methods under subclass 436 in which the forces shake, vibrate, or jar the
    contents into a more confined space.

    (1)     Note.  Merely vibrating contents for the purpose of conveying is
    not sufficient for classification in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    525,    for corresponding apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    366,    Agitating, appropriate subclasses for methods of agitating, per se.


CLS 53/438
TXT Before association with cover material:

    Methods under subclass 436 in which the crowding forces are applied to the
    contents material prior to association of the contents material with the
    cover.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    529,    for corresponding apparatus.


CLS 53/439
TXT By simultaneously conveying and compressing:

    Methods under subclass 438 for crowding the said contents into a smaller
    volume by conveying and constricting the contents concurrently.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    530,    for corresponding apparatus.


CLS 53/440
TXT Heating or cooling:

    Methods under subclass 428 for subjecting the contents material to a
    treatment which either raises or lowers its temperature.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are methods which effect a subatmospheric
    pressure on the contents by subjecting contents and receptacle to
    temperature variations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for corresponding apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 60 for methods involving specific
    refrigerating steps combined with packaging.


CLS 53/441
TXT Conforming by stretching or shrinking of cover over contents:

    Methods under subclass 396 for conforming the cover material to the
    contents by reducing the size of the cover to the size of the contents by
    heating or stretching a smaller cover over a larger contents means.

    (1)     Note.  The cover may be conformed to the contents (a) by shrinking
    a larger cover or (b) by stretching a smaller cover over the contents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    427,    for methods of skin packaging.

    556+,   for corresponding apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    84+ for shrinking of material of laminae in adhesive bonding.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 497 for shrink film
    packages, per se.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, Digest 12 for shrink
    packaging.


CLS 53/442
TXT By heating:

    Methods under subclass 441 including applying heat to cause the cover
    material to shrink into conformance with the contents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    557,    for corresponding apparatus.


CLS 53/443
TXT Group forming of contents into a unit:

    Methods under subclass 396 including the bringing together of a plurality
    of separate contents parts to form the contents for a single cover.

    (1)     Note.  See section III of the class definition for the meaning of
    the terms "contents" and "group forming".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147+,   for corresponding apparatus, and see the notes thereto for related
    art classified elsewhere.


CLS 53/444
TXT Of slender rod-shaped contents (e.g., cigarette):

    Methods under subclass 443 for forming contents portions comprising
    articles, the diameter or width of which is very small compared to the
    length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148+,   for corresponding apparatus.

    236,    for apparatus for packaging slender, rod-shaped articles.


CLS 53/445
TXT Of diverse contents (e.g., can and coupon):

    Methods under subclass 443 for forming contents in which the external
    contours or physical dimensions of the contents portions are so different
    as to require separate, dissimilar packaging steps to form the package unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155,    for corresponding apparatus.

    238,    for apparatus for packaging diverseforms of contents.

    474,    for methods of packaging diverse contents in which no preliminary
    group forming takes place.


CLS 53/446
TXT With orienting (e.g., turning labels face out):

    Methods under subclass 443 for changing the attitude of one or more
    articles to facilitate formation of a desired group arrangement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    544,    for corresponding apparatus.


CLS 53/447
TXT Stacking upon another before packaging:

    Methods under subclass 443 for placing a plurality of articles or layers of
    articles one upon the other before being associated with a cover.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    531+,   for apparatus which may include stacking mechanisms.


CLS 53/448
TXT Single layer forming:

    Methods under subclass 443 for gathering a group of contents portions into
    a coplanar arrangement or in a single, continuous orderly sequence or
    linear arrangement.

    (1)     Note.  The single layer, sequence, or arrangement must be the sole
    contents for the package of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    531+,   particularly subclass 543 for apparatus for forming a single
    coplanar group.


CLS 53/449
TXT Plural covers:

    Method under subclass 396 for applying a multiplicity of separate covers
    around the same contents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170+,   for apparatus for applying two or more separate or distinct covers
    around the contents of a single package, one cover being superimposed over
    the other, and see the notes thereto for related art classified elsewhere.


CLS 53/450
TXT Enclosing contents within progressively formed web means:

    Methods under subclass 396 for forming tubular packages successively from a
    continuous web or a plurality of continuous webs of cover material
    including the steps of (a) bringing together marginal portions of the
    web(s) and continuously securing the resulting longitudinal seam(s), or (b)
    bringing together marginal portions of plural, superposed webs and
    periodically forming and securing transverse seams.

    (1)     Note.  If the contents are placed on or between webs after trailing
    transverse seals are made, the patent is considered involving fabrication
    of the cover for subclasses 452+.

    (2)     Note.  If the web is treated by heat or pressure to stretch form
    the web into a contents-retaining form prior to or during packaging, the
    art is in subclass 453.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    455,    for methods of folding and side sealing web material.

    545+,   for corresponding apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    203 for methods of forming a tube.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclass 198 for forming a series of interconnected
    pliable containers.


CLS 53/451
TXT Vertically formed, filled, and sealed tubular package:

    Methods under subclass 450 in which the longitudinal axis of the tubular
    cover is maintained generally perpendicular to a horizontal plane during
    the forming and filling steps.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    551,    for apparatus for forming vertically extending tubes from a single
    folded web.

    554,    for apparatus for forming vertically extended tubes from plural
    webs.


CLS 53/452
TXT Forming or partial forming a receptacle and subsequent filling:

    Methods under subclass 396 for fabricating a receptacle or for shaping
    cover material into contents-retaining form and thereafter filling with
    contents, with or without closing.

    (1)     Note.  Opening a collapsed receptacle (e.g., bag) is partial
    forming; and subsequent filling places the art in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    450,    for methods of forming a tubular enclosure or receptacle and
    simultaneously filling with contents.

    492,    for methods of opening a cover, enclosure, or package without
    filling.

    558+,   for corresponding apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for methods of forming receptacles involving
    adhesive bonding.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses for methods of shaping plastic receptacles.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 52+ for making a box; subclasses 186+ for
    making a bag; and subclasses 269+ for making a tube.


CLS 53/453
TXT Forming a pocket or depression in cover material by applying heat or
    pressure (e.g., stretch forming):

    Methods under subclass 452 for making contents-receiving cavities in a
    blank or web (sheet) by the application of mechanical or fluid force or
    increasing temperature to cause the sheet or blank material to flow at
    select locations.

    (1)     Note.  The cavity must not be merely a transient condition in the
    cover material but must substantially maintain its formed shape after the
    package is complete.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    559,    for corresponding apparatus.

    578,    for apparatus for forming a receptacle in a die wherein no plastic
    deformation of the cover material occurs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping and Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 500+ for methods of molding, filling, and closing of receptacles
    where the receptacles are filled and/or closed before removal from the
    molding device.


CLS 53/454
TXT Forming a capsule:

    Methods under subclass 453 which produce a continuous strip containing a
    series of small pockets usually employed for encapsulating small doses of
    fluent materials or articles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    560,    for corresponding apparatus.

    900,    for apparatus and method for handling or manipulating a capsule.


CLS 53/455
TXT Making a pocket in web material by folding and side sealing (e.g., flat bag
    making):

    Methods under subclass 452 for making a flat receptacle by overlapping a
    web of sheet material upon itself and seaming perpendicular to the fold
    line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    450,    for methods wherein marginal portions of web material are seamed
    during or after association of the contents with the web.

    562,    for corresponding apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for methods of folding and bonding laminae.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 189+ for making a pliable container
    including heat sealing.


CLS 53/456
TXT Forming three-dimensional receptacles from web or blank:

    Methods under subclass 452 for making a receptacle from sheet material and
    the shape of a cylinder or parallelepiped is retained after filling.

    (1)     Note.  Methods which form sheet material in or around a forming
    device and fill the formed receptacle before or after removal from the
    former are found here.

    (2)     Note.  Also found here are methods which involve forming a
    receptacle from a flat blank which may or may not be prescored.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    457,    for methods involving erecting collapsed, previously formed
    receptacles.

    563,    for apparatus for forming receptacles around a forming device.

    574+,   for apparatus for filling a receptacle while on a forming means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 52+ for making a rigid container from a
    sheet or web.


CLS 53/457
TXT Opening or setting up collapsed, preformed receptacle:

    Methods under subclass 452 for erecting or expanding covers which are at
    least partially fabricated but collapsed, usually for storage purposes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    492,    for methods of opening, per se.

    564+,   for corresponding apparatus.


CLS 53/458
TXT Box, carton:

    Methods under subclass 457 for setting up a freestanding receptacle made of
    rigid material such as cardboard.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    564+,   for corresponding apparatus, especially subclass 566 for apparatus
    for setting up and horizontally loading boxes and cartons.


CLS 53/459
TXT Bag, tube, center-folded web:

    Methods under subclass 457 in which the cover comprises a flexible wall
    receptacle which may be made of thermoplastic material or paper.

    (1)     Note.  The collapsed receptacle may comprise a bag, a tube, or
    merely a web pre-folded upon itself.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    469,    for methods of filling and closing flexible receptacles.

    567,    568, 570 through 573, for opening and filling flexible receptacles.


CLS 53/460
TXT Envelope or triangular flap fold:

    Methods under subclass 396 in which the cover produced has sides contacting
    opposite portions of the contents which are connected by a single fold or
    crease or in which the packaging involves folding triangular flaps to form
    a flat package with the flaps overlapping centrally of one side of the
    package.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206,    for wrapping machines making pocket or envelope-type packages.


CLS 53/461
TXT Wrapping contents including cover forming:

    Methods under subclass 396 for encasing the contents by bending or folding
    sheet cover material around the contents.

    (1)     Note.  The methods of this subclass shape the cover into
    contents-retaining form after association with the contents to completely
    enclose the contents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203+,   for corresponding apparatus.

    397+,   for methods of wrapping contents in a partial cover.

    450,    for methods of enclosing contents within a tubular container.

    452+,   for methods of shaping a cover prior to association of the contents.


CLS 53/462
TXT With slotted or scored wrapper blank:

    Methods under subclass 461 in which the cover material to be bent or folded
    has portions which are cutout or partially incised, adjacent an edge of the
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207+,   for corresponding apparatus.


CLS 53/463
TXT With heat sealing or wrapper:

    Methods under subclass 461 for modifying the temperature of the cover
    material sufficient to fuse or soften at least a portion or ingredient of
    such cover material to effect an attachment of contacting areas of the ends
    of the cover material.

    (1)     Note.  The portion of the cover fused may be either the surface of
    the cover material or an added coating layer on the cover material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    373.7,  for apparatus for heating or cooling an outturned closure seam and
    see the Notes thereto for art related to seam heating elsewhere classified.

    477,    for methods of closing covers involving heat sealing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses as the generic home for making adhered seams and
    laminating processes for producing articles.


CLS 53/464
TXT Cup or pouch about forming contents from web or blank:

    Methods under subclass 461 in which the shaping of the sheet cover material
    around the contents involves the formation of an open top bag or pocket.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221+,   for wrapping apparatus having a cover-wiping passage for forming a
    cup or pouch initial wrap about material.

    452+,   for methods in which an open top bag or pocket is formed prior to
    the placing of contents therein.


CLS 53/465
TXT Cinching or wiping around to form initial wrap:

    Methods under subclass 461 for bending cover material about the contents
    including placing one edge or portion of the cover material against one
    side of the contents, bringing the cover material across the opposite side
    of the contents, and then placing the other edge of the cover around the
    contents and into seaming relation to the first edge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210+,   for corresponding subclasses.


CLS 53/466
TXT U-fold forming initial wrap:

    Methods under subclass 461 in which the initial bending of the cover
    material about the contents is such that the two opposite, adjacent sides
    of the package have the cover smoothed along the sides so that the said
    sides and original contacting face of the cover material form a U in cross
    section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228+,   for corresponding apparatus.


CLS 53/467
TXT Filling preformed receptacle and closing:
    Methods under subclass 396 for depositing contents in a cover previously
    formed into a receptacle and subsequently completing the enclosure of the
    contents within the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266.1+, for corresponding apparatus.

    452+,   for methods which involve receptacle forming or shaping steps.


CLS 53/468
TXT Opening prior to filling and closing:

    Methods under subclass 467 which include the step of uncovering a
    previously sealed or closed preformed receptacle prior to filling and
    closing.

    (1)     Note.  Merely opening a collapsed receptacle is not considered an
    uncovering step for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    381+,   for apparatus for opening receptacles.

    457,    for methods of opening or setting up a collapsed receptacle.

    492,    for methods of opening, per se.


CLS 53/469
TXT Flexible, expandable receptacle (e.g., bag, tube):

    Methods under subclass 467 in which the cover member being filled is a
    flexible wall preformed receptacle such as a bag, pouch, tube, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    452+,   for methods of forming flexible wall containers and subsequently
    filling.

    459,    for methods of opening collapsed bags and subsequently filling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 10 for methods of filling self- closing bags (i.e., valve bags).


CLS 53/470
TXT Aerosol container:

    Methods under subclass 467 for filling and closing an aerosol-type
    receptacle, e.g., the contents material is dissolved in or carried by a
    vaporizing propellant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 3 for the methods filling and closing of aerosol receptacles which
    close (i.e., self-closing) upon separation or uncoupling from the supply.


CLS 53/471
TXT With separate closure attaching (e.g., cap or plug):

    Methods under subclass 467 for closing receptacles with a discrete closure
    member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    485+    and 478, for methods of applying separate closure.


CLS 53/472
TXT With protective media (e.g., shock absorbing):

    Methods under subclass 467 for including additional material with or around
    the primary contents to protect against vibration, shock, or rough handling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    474,    for methods of filling containers with diverse contents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle for Package, subclass 521 for shock protection
    type packages and other appropriate subclasses for packages for fragile
    articles.


CLS 53/473
TXT Filling preformed receptacle:

    Methods under subclass 396 for depositing article contents in a cover
    previously formed into a receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is restricted to methods of placing an article
    or fluent material in a definite, permanent pattern or arrangement in the
    receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235+,   for corresponding apparatus.

    443+,   for methods of group forming contents.

    452+,   for methods of forming and filling a receptacle.

    467+,   for methods of filling and closing a receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 1+ for methods of filling a receiver with fluent material and
    for arranging fluent material in a receiver where such arrangement is
    merely the result of the flow of material into the receiver or the action
    of a discharge assistant.


CLS 53/474
TXT With diverse contents:

    Methods under subclass 473 for successively filling the receptacle with
    contents that differ in shape, form, or size, e.g., a crate of eggs and
    dividers between each layer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238+,   for corresponding apparatus.

    445,    for grouping together diverse elements to form a group contents
    prior to depositing into a receptacle.

    472,    for methods of filling and closing a receptacle containing
    protective media for the contents.


CLS 53/475
TXT With successive like contents or layers on like contents:

    Methods under subclass 473 for filling a receptacle progressively by
    placing in turn a plurality of single articles of groups of articles
    therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244+,   for corresponding articles.


CLS 53/476
TXT Closing package or filled receptacle:

    Methods under subclass 396 for completing the enclosure of contents within
    a package or receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    285+,   for corresponding apparatus.

    417,    for methods of applying a clip to a bag neck.

    418,    for methods of sewing a container closed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 592+, or methods of mechanical assembly.

    100,    Presses, subclass 54 for portable receptacle lid applying.

    112,    Sewing, subclass 11 for sewing closed a filled sack.

    413,    Sheet Metal Container Making, subclasses 31+ for roller die seaming
    means.


CLS 53/477
TXT By heating sealing:

    Methods under subclass 476 including the step of modifying the temperature
    of the cover material or closure element to facilitate completing the
    encasement of the contents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370.7+, 373.7+, 376.6+, 379, and 387.4, for apparatus for closing packages
    involving temperature modification of the package cover or closure.

    463,    for methods of heat sealing wrappers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for methods of heat sealing.

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclasses for methods of electric
    heating.


CLS 53/478
TXT Separate closure:

    Methods under subclass 477 in which the closure element is independent of
    the cover receptacle until bonded thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    471,    for methods of filling and then closing a container with separate
    closure.

    485,    for methods of applying separate closures in the absence of heat
    sealing or bonding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    69 for applying end closures to containers.


CLS 53/479
TXT Of preformed nonfreestanding container deformed by contents (e.g., bag,
    tube):

    Methods under subclass 477 in which the cover comprises a flexible wall
    receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  The cover material is usually thermoplastic material or
    paper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    455,    for methods of making and filling bags.

    459,    for methods of opening and filling bags, tubes, etc.

    469,    for methods of filling and closing bags, tubes, etc.

    480,    for methods of closing bags, tubes, etc., by steps other than
    temperature modification of the cover material.


CLS 53/480
TXT Closing preformed container deformed by contents:

    Methods under subclass 476 in which the cover comprises a flexible wall
    receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  The receptacle is normally limp until filled and depends on
    the contents to render it freestanding.

    (2)     Note.  The receptacle is usually made of thermoplastic material or
    paper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    476,    for methods of closing a package wherein the cover is a wrapper.

    479,    for heat sealing flexible wall receptacle and see the notes thereto
    for related art elsewhere classified.


CLS 53/481
TXT By collapsing mouth portion (e.g., to form single flap):

    Methods under subclass 480 for closing the receptacle by bringing together,
    in close facing relationship, oppositely disposed inner surfaces of cover
    material extending beyond the contents.


CLS 53/482
TXT Folding or rolling-in:

    Methods under subclass 481 for doubling a single flap over upon itself
    after the inner surfaces have been brought together.


CLS 53/483
TXT Twisting:

    Methods under subclass 481 for rotating the mouth end portion of the
    receptacle relative to the contents after the inner surfaces have been
    brought together to collpase the end portion.


CLS 53/484
TXT Closing a preformed, freestanding, rigid or semi-rigid container (e.g.,
    box, carton, bottle):

    Methods under subclass 476 for closing a prefabricated receptacle not
    deformed by or not taking the shape of the contents, for example, box,
    carton, bottle, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    477+,   for methods of closing a prefabricated receptacle wherein a
    temperature modification of the cover or closure is involved in completing
    the enclosure.


CLS 53/485
TXT By applying a separate preformed closure (e.g., lid, cap):

    Methods under subclass 484 for completing the enclosure of the contents by
    securing a discrete closure member to the preformed receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    478,    for methods of securing separate closures by heat sealing or
    bonding.


CLS 53/486
TXT With receptacle deforming or shaping:

    Methods under subclass 485 for reshaping a receptacle before, during, or
    after the step of applying a separate closure in order to facilitate the
    application or securement of the closure to the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    366,    for apparatus which deforms portions of the receptacle to
    facilitate closure application.


CLS 53/487
TXT With preliminary closure shaping:

    Methods under subclass 485 for altering the size or shape of a separate
    preformed closure before applying it to a receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290+,   for apparatus including preliminary closure-shaping means.


CLS 53/488
TXT By conforming closure to container:

    Methods under subclass 485 for distorting portions of a closure element so
    as to frictionally interengage or interlock the closure with the container.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are methods of securing a closure by so
    deforming the closure as to conform to threads or projections on the
    receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329+,   for corresponding apparatus.

    486,    for similar methods which involve significant shaping or deforming
    of the receptacle.


CLS 53/489
TXT By plugging closure into container:

    Methods under subclass 485 for inserting a separate preformed closure
    within, or partially within an aperture of a filled receptacle to close the
    receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are methods of closing utilizing a resilient
    closure element which is compressed, inserted into a receptacle aperture,
    and allowed to expand to seal the aperture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264,    for apparatus for applying closures of internally stoppered
    receptacles.

    319+,   for closure inserting devices.

    488,    for methods of closing receptacles including inserting closures
    into receptacle apertures and then conforming portions of the closure to
    the receptacle.


CLS 53/490
TXT By screwing closure on container:

    Methods under subclass 485 for applying a separate preformed closure onto
    the open end or neck of a filled receptacle by relative rotation of the
    closure and receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  The relative rotation of the closure and receptacle normally
    effects an interengagement of threads or similar projections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    317+,   for apparatus for applying closures by relative rotation with
    respect to the receptacle.


CLS 53/491
TXT By folding multiple preformed flap:

    Methods under subclass 484 for closing a package having plural, integral
    flaps by folding the flaps inwardly upon one another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    376.4+, for corresponding apparatus.

    458,    for methods of erecting boxes.

    462,    for methods which shape a slotted blank around a contents.


CLS 53/492
TXT Opening only:

    Methods under subclass 396 for (a) expanding or erecting a formed collapsed
    receptacle into a contents-receiving form or for (b) manipulating a portion
    of a cover or covering material to permit filling or other operation.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are methods of shifting or removing a closure
    or engaging a flap so as to uncover an aperture of a receptacle to permit
    filling, emptying, or treatment of the receptacle or contents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     for apparatus for opening a filled package and inserting additional
    contents.

    381.1+, for corresponding apparatus.

    457,    for methods of opening or erecting receptacles and subsequent
    filling.

    468,    for methods of opening, filling, and closing receptacles.

    564+,   for apparatus for opening and subsequently filling collapsed
    receptacles.


CLS 53/493
TXT Of individual contents or group feed or delivery:

    Apparatus under subclass 52 wherein, in response to the sensing means, a
    control means brings about the starting, stopping, or continuation of the
    supply of the contents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55+,    for apparatus in which both the supply of the contents and the
    supply of the cover are controlled concurrently.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 139, 153, and 192+ for automatic control of filling apparatus by
    the contents material.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 855+ for devices for
    controlling the stopping of conveyors by the presence or absence of an
    article thereon.

    235,    Registers, subclass 132 for apparatus with control means operable
    on predetermined register reading.


CLS 53/494
TXT Responsive to incomplete group or subgroup (no group - no feed):

    Apparatus under subclass 493 wherein the control is brought about by
    sensing the absence of one or more portions of a plural contents group.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for apparatus which senses a contents deficient in some respect and
    ejects or deflects the deficient contents from the packaging line.

    247,    for apparatus for concurrently placing plural articles into a
    receptacle, each article being handled individually by the depositing
    mechanism.


CLS 53/495
TXT Responsive to complete group or subgroup: Apparatus under subclass 493
    including means to sense the completion of the accumulation of a contents
    group or subgroup composed of plural individual portions and, as a result
    of the sensing, to effect the feed of the accumulated contents as a unit.


CLS 53/496
TXT Responsive to the presence of only the lead article of a completed group:

    Apparatus under subclass 495 wherein the sensing means comprise means to
    sense the proper position of only the leading article or articles of an
    accumulated group to signify completion of the group.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    537+,   for apparatus for forming successive layers and depositing into
    receptacles.


CLS 53/497
TXT Plural lead articles:

    Apparatus under subclass 496 in which the group comprises a plurality of
    rows or columns and wherein the sensing means senses the proper positioning
    of the leading article of each row or column to signify the completion of
    the group.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    539,    for apparatus for grouping plural rows of articles and depositing
    the articles of a group.


CLS 53/498
TXT By sensing each individual article of the group or subgroup:

    Apparatus under subclass 495 wherein the sensing means comprises means to
    sense each element or portion of the contents group to determine completion
    of the group.


CLS 53/499
TXT Individual sensors (one for each article in the group or subgroup):

    Apparatus under subclass 498 including an individual sensing means for each
    individual element or portion of the group.


CLS 53/500
TXT Single sensor for successively sensing each article of the group or
    subgroup (e.g., counter):

    Apparatus under subclass 498 in which a single sensing means, e.g.,
    counter, successively senses in turn each element or portion of the group
    and effects the feed of the accumulated group based on a predetermined
    count.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes apparatus under the class definition
    including counting devices combined with mechanism to form counted articles
    into a group prior to their insertion or deposit into a cover.  Devices
    which merely count articles as they are being deposited into a cover are
    not proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    501,    for apparatus for counting contents wherein no subsequent group
    accumulation and feed is claimed.


CLS 53/501
TXT By totalizing of individual contents:

    Apparatus under subclass 493 wherein the control is brought about by means
    which sense the totality of the contents portions individually, e.g.,
    counters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500,    for apparatus in which the counting accompanies group forming and
    feeding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 502+ for counters combined
    with conveyors.

    235,    Registers, subclass 132 for mechanisms having control means
    operable upon a predetermined register reading.


CLS 53/502
TXT By weight of contents:

    Apparatus under subclass 493 wherein the control is responsive to means
    which senses or measures the weight of the contents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    for packaging apparatus combined with weighing scale.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 83 for fluent material handling with receiver contents weighing.

    177,    Weighing Scales, appropriate subclasses for weighers, per se.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 504 for weighing on conveyor.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 52+ for automatic control of dispensing
    devices by weight of product.


CLS 53/503
TXT By volume of contents:

    Apparatus under subclass 493 wherein the control is effected by means which
    senses or measures the volume of the contents.

    (1)     Note.  Those devices which sense the rise of contents in a
    preformed receptacle and effect control based on the contents reaching a
    predetermined level are considered to be measuring volume for this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 52+ for automatic control of dispensed
    product by measurement of volume.


CLS 53/504
TXT By dimension of contents:

    Apparatus under subclass 493 wherein the control is responsive to means
    which senses or measures a finite dimension, e.g., length, of the contents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    503,    for apparatus in which control is brought about by sensing a
    predetermined level of the contents.


CLS 53/505
TXT Responsive to presence or absence of cover material (e.g., wrapper,
    receptacle, lid):

    Apparatus under subclass 493 wherein the sensing means senses (a) a normal
    or desired condition of the cover or (b) an abnormal or undesired condition
    of the cover and as a result feeds, interrupts, or otherwise controls the
    supply of the contents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for apparatus which senses packages deficient in some respect and
    ejects or deflects the deficient package from the packaging line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver Coacting Means, subclasses
    140+ and 156+ for apparatus where the material supply is controlled by
    sensing the presence of the receiver.


CLS 53/506
TXT Responsive to absence of cover material (no can - no fill):

    Apparatus under subclass 505 wherein the sensing means senses that no cover
    is in position to receive the contents.


CLS 53/507
TXT WITH ALARM, SIGNAL, OR INDICATOR:

    Apparatus under the class definition having a register, recorder, counter,
    gauge, or display device for indicating a normal or abnormal condition,
    such devices consisting of an audible information-giving element or a
    changeable indicia-bearing device.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this subclass there must be visible
    indicia or audible signal of some type.  As to visual indicia there must be
    graduations, numbers, or markings to relate a condition.  Counting devices
    which do not supply a visual or audible indication of the count are not
    proper for this subclass.  A mere transparent viewing means is not
    considered to be a display device for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52+,    and particularly 500 and 501, for counters which cause a control to
    bring about some change in the operation of an apparatus.

    167,    for counter combined with packaging apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 94 for filling systems having signals, indicators, recorders,
    inspection means, and similar combined devices.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 2 for article dispensers having
    signals, indicators, and recorders.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 23 for dispensing devices having signals,
    indicators, and recorders.


CLS 53/508
TXT Visual or audible alarm:

    Apparatus under subclass 507 in which the condition-indicating device
    produces an alarm which can be seen or heard by a machine operator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 3 for audible alarm in dispensing
    devices.


CLS 53/509
TXT SKIN PACKAGING:

    Apparatus under the class definition including means to enclose a contents
    between sheet material comprising a flat base sheet and a covering sheet in
    which the covering sheet is forced by fluid pressure, e.g., vacuum, into
    tight engagement with the contents and is secured at its free margins to
    the base sheet to form a thin, skinlike covering over the contents.

    (1)     Note.  If the base sheet is formed with a product-retaining recess
    either before or during packaging, the patent is excluded from the subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The fact that the contents may be subject to the effects of
    the fluid pressure which forces the cover sheet into engagement with the
    contents will not preclude classification in this subclass unless an inert
    gaseous atmosphere is provided thereby.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    427,    for corresponding methods.

    511,    for apparatus for forming a receptacle and subjecting contents
    thereof to a vacuum or inert gaseous atmosphere.


CLS 53/510
TXT Vacuum or inert atmosphere:

    Apparatus under subclass 111 in which the contents material is subjected to
    the action of either a partial vacuum or a gas which does not react with
    the contents.

    (1)     Note.  The vacuum or inert gas atmosphere may or may not be
    continued within the package after the closing thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79+,    for apparatus for gas filling or evacuating a receptacle and then
    closing the receptacle.

    403+,   for methods of gas filling and/or evacuating receptacles and
    closing the receptacle.

    432+,   for methods of packaging including treating the contents by
    subjecting it to a vacuum.

    527,    for apparatus which utilize suction to compact material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 37+ for closed systems for gas filling or evacuation of a
    receiver or modification of the gaseous conditions in a receiver being
    filled with fluent material; subclass 70 for fluid treatment of contents
    not in a closed system, i.e., jetting.


CLS 53/511
TXT With receptacle forming:

    Apparatus under subclass 510 including means to fabricate a cover material
    into a shape capable of confining a contents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    509,    for apparatus for conforming a cover sheet about contents on a base
    by fluid pressure, i.e., skin packaging, in which the contents may be
    incidentally subject to a vacuum during packaging.

    558+,   for apparatus for forming or partially forming a receptacle and
    subsequently filling.


CLS 53/512
TXT With preformed bag:

    Apparatus under subclass 510 in which the cover for the contents being
    treated comprises a prefabricated pouch-like receptacle of flexible
    material.


CLS 53/513
TXT Cutting:

    Apparatus under subclass 113 in which the material is subjected to a force
    acting along a predetermined line which severs the material into two or
    more smaller portions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    389.1,  for apparatus for feeding and cutting cover material.

    435,    for corresponding methods.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses for cutting device, per se.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 289+ for severing means.


CLS 53/514
TXT Food or edible material:

    Apparatus under subclass 513 in which the material is a food product or
    other edible material.


CLS 53/515
TXT Fruit or vegetable:

    Apparatus under subclass 514 in which the food product is a fruit or
    vegetable.


CLS 53/516
TXT Bread, pastry, or confection:

    Apparatus under subclass 514 in which the product is a bread, pastry, or
    confection.

    (1)     Note.  Candy cutting is found here.


CLS 53/517
TXT Meat or fish product:

    Apparatus under subclass 514 in which the contents comprise a meat or fish
    product.


CLS 53/518
TXT Dairy product:

    Apparatus under subclass 514 in which the contents comprise a dairy product.

    (1)     Note.  The cutting of ice cream is found here.


CLS 53/519
TXT Butter:

    Apparatus under subclass 518 in which the dairy product is butter.


CLS 53/520
TXT Film, sheet or weblike material:

    Apparatus under subclass 513 in which the material includes paper,
    photographic film, or other sheetlike contents.


CLS 53/521
TXT Stuffing (e.g., mattress ticking):

    Apparatus under subclass 513 in which the contents comprises a mass of
    fibrous material used to stuff mattresses and cushions.


CLS 53/522
TXT Strand, tube, or rodlike material (e.g., drinking straw):

    Apparatus under subclass 513 in which the material comprises (a)
    filamentary or strand material or (b) cylindrical articles, the diameters
    of which are small in comparison with their lengths.


CLS 53/523
TXT Compacting or stretching:

    Apparatus under subclass 113 in which the contents material is subjected to
    mechanical forces which (a) crowd portions of the contents into a more
    confined space or which (b) contract or elongate the contents material
    within its elastic limit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for apparatus for encasing coil springs.

    436,    for corresponding methods.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses for compacting apparatus, per se.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 71+ for compacting fluent materials in receivers.


CLS 53/524
TXT Mattress filling:

    Apparatus under subclass 523 for compacting fibrous material into a batt
    and placing it within a cover to form a mattress.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for apparatus for encasing coil springs.

    255,    for apparatus including forms in which the contents is placed, the
    form and contents then being inserted into a cover and the form removed
    leaving the contents in the cover.

    521,    for apparatus including cutting fibrous material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclasses 118+ for apparatus for
    compacting loose fibers into a wad or tampon and inserting same into a
    sheath.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 71 and 249 for compacting or reshaping a charge of fluent
    material comprising fibrous material and placing same into a receiver.


CLS 53/525
TXT By agitation:

    Apparatus under subclass 523 for shaking, vibrating, or jarring the
    contents to crowd the same into a more confined space.

    (1)     Note.  The agitation must occur while the contents is in the
    receptacle or cover.  Agitation of the contents in the supply or during
    feeding thereof is not considered to be treatment for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    437,    for corresponding methods.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 74+ for means to agitate contents in receiver.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 200+ for article dispensers with
    agitating means.

    222,    Dispensing, for fluent material dispensers with agitating means.

    366,    Agitating, appropriate subclass for agitating devices, per se.


CLS 53/526
TXT Compressing with or through cover:

    Apparatus under subclass 523 in which the compressive force is applied to
    the contents material through the enclosing cover.

    (1)     Note.  Devices which (a) shape the filled package before or after
    sealing, (b) close hinged flap of a filled carton to compress the material
    therein, or (c) force a separate cover onto a container to compress the
    material are classified here.


CLS 53/527
TXT Compressing contents within preformed receptacles:

    Apparatus under subclass 523 in which the compressive force is applied to
    the contents material after the material is placed in a preformed container.

    (1)     Note.  Devices which compress material in the container to either
    provide space for additional contents or to provide clearance for
    subsequent closing of the container are classified here.

    (2)     Note.  Devices which utilize suction or vacuum to compact material
    in a preformed container have been placed here.


CLS 53/528
TXT Compressing while engaging contents with wrapper or band:

    Apparatus under subclass 523 in which the compressive force is applied to
    material in engagement with a cover, which cover is subsequently wrapped
    around the compressed contents.


CLS 53/529
TXT Compressing before packaging:

    Apparatus under subclass 523 in which the compressive force is applied
    before the contents is associated with a cover.

    (1)     Note.  Devices which form a compressed load or charge and
    subsequently wrap or deposit the load into a container are found here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    438,    for corresponding methods.


CLS 53/530
TXT Through restricted passage:

    Apparatus under subclass 529 in which the compressive force is applied by
    moving the contents through a restricted passage.

    (1)     Note.  The shaping of plastic material by extrusion is not herein
    contained.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    439,    for methods of simultaneously conveying and compressing.


CLS 53/531
TXT Layer, stack, or column:

    Apparatus under subclass 147 including means to form a group of contents
    portions (a) in a coplanar arrangement or (b) in a single, continuous
    orderly sequence or linear arrangement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    443,    for corresponding methods.

    495,    for a group-forming apparatus with automatic controls.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 434+ for apparatus for
    arranging articles on conveyor.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 175+ forming a stack of articles and
    dispensing from the stack.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 788.1+ for article
    stacking apparatus.


CLS 53/532
TXT Assembling, gathering, and stacking coins or similar disc-like articles:

    Apparatus under subclass 531 for stacking or grouping disc-shaped articles,
    particularly coins, in a face-to-face relationship.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212,    for apparatus for wrapping a stack of coins.

    254,    for disc-packing apparatus.


CLS 53/533
TXT Assembling sticks or chewing gum:

    Apparatus under subclass 531 for stacking or grouping slat or slablike
    units of chewing gum.

    (1)     Note.  The group usually consists of five prewrapped sticks of gum
    which are then further wrapped as a unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    542,    for apparatus for grouping articles on edge.


CLS 53/534
TXT Receptacle advances as row groups are deposited therein:

    Apparatus under subclass 531 which form successive rows of contents
    portions and deposit the rows in turn a receiver or receptacle and move the
    receptacle during or between the deposit of each row group.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244+,   for apparatus for successively depositing articles in a receptacle.


CLS 53/535
TXT Lowered support or raised wall:

    Apparatus under subclass 531 including means for depositing the contents
    portions on a collecting or receptacle-holding member, said member being
    depressed as the portions are deposited thereon, or there being an
    additional member which at least partially encircles the contents portions
    and is elevated as the portions are deposited on the collecting member.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes apparatus for forming groups of
    articles and successively depositing the groups in a receiver or receptacle
    carried by a support which is lowered as the groups are deposited.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    245,    for apparatus which successively deposit articles in a receptacle
    wherein the receptacle is lowered as the articles are deposited therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 258+ and 263+ for fluent material filling systems having
    receiver support and filling means relatively receding during filling.

    414,    Material and Article Handling, subclasses 924+ for article handling
    apparatus with a lowerable receiver.


CLS 53/536
TXT Within receptacle:

    Apparatus under subclass 535 in which a collecting member is depressed
    while situated inside of the receptacle in which the contents portions are
    to be enclosed.


CLS 53/537
TXT Forming successive coplanar layers and depositing in cover means:

    Apparatus under subclass 531 including means to form in turn a plurality of
    coplanar groups of contents portions and subsequently deposit the groups in
    a cover.

    (1)     Note.  The layers may be successively deposited in the receptacle
    as the layers are formed or a plurality of layers may be grouped and
    deposited as a unit in the cover.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150,    for apparatus for forming separate rows of long slender articles
    and placing the rows atop one another.

    153,    for apparatus for forming a plurality of layers of articles in
    vertically spaced ways and ejecting the layers into a receptacle.

    244,    for apparatus for successively depositing articles in a receptacle.

    534,    for apparatus for successively forming rows of contents portions
    and advancing a receptacle as the row groups are deposited therein.


CLS 53/538
TXT Varying strokes of depositing means:

    Apparatus under subclass 537 including a reciprocating member for moving
    and depositing the successive layers of contents portions in a receptacle
    and wherein the length of the reciprocation of the member varies during the
    cycle of filling each receptacle.


CLS 53/539
TXT Simultaneous deposit to fill compartmented receptacle:

    Apparatus under subclass 531 for forming a group of contents portions and
    depositing the group as a unit into a receptacle divided in plural
    sections, each section receiving one contents portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246,    for apparatus for successively depositing articles in the sections
    of a compartmented receptacle.

    247,    for apparatus for simultaneously depositing plural articles into a
    receptacle.

    534,    for apparatus for successively forming rows of contents portions
    and advancing a receptacle which may be compartmented as the row groups are
    deposited therein.


CLS 53/540
TXT Stacking one article or group of articles upon another:

    Apparatus under subclass 531 for placing contents portions comprising
    singular units or singular rows one upon the other in vertical array and
    subsequently completing the packaging of the group as stacked.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    535,    for apparatus involving stacking on a lowerable support.

    537,    for apparatus which stack successive coplanar layers.


CLS 53/541
TXT Building up the stack from the bottom:

    Apparatus under subclass 540 for elevating successive contents portions in
    order to form a stack from below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242+,   for apparatus which deposits articles into the bottom of a
    receptacle by means of an elevatable mechanism.

    537+,   for apparatus which form successive layers by means of an elevating
    mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material and Article Handling, subclasses 794.9+ for apparatus for
    stacking articles from below.


CLS 53/542
TXT Grouping articles on edge in a linear relationship:

    Apparatus under subclass 531 for arranging normally thin or flat articles
    in a face-to-face horizontal array.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    532,    for apparatus for stacking disc-like articles on edge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 798.2+ for apparatus for
    piling articles on edge.


CLS 53/543
TXT Forming single generally horizontal groups comprising plural rows and
    columns: Apparatus under subclass 531 for forming a single coplanar
    arrangement comprising multiple rows and columns of singular articles
    wherein the arrangement comprises the sole contents of the package.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    537,    for apparatus for forming successive coplanar groups.

    539,    for apparatus for the simultaneous deposit of a group to fill a
    compartmented receptacle.


CLS 53/544
TXT Oriented one or more units of the group: Apparatus under subclass 531 for
    changing the attitude of one or more articles of a group with respect to
    other members of the group.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    533,    for apparatus for assembling sticks of chewing gum wherein certain
    sticks may be inverted with respect to others in a stack.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 373+ for apparatus for
    orienting articles on a conveyor.


CLS 53/545
TXT PROGRESSIVELY SEAMED COVER WEB OR WEB FOLDS:

    Apparatus under the class definition (a) for folding a single web of cover
    material longitudinally thereof and over upon itself as the web advances to
    produce at least one longitudinal seam thereon opposite the fold, (b) for
    assembling a plurality of generally parallel, spaced or superposed webs as
    they are advanced by forming longitudinal seams at least at the outer
    longitudinal edges thereof whereby a tube is formed, the seaming operation
    occurring concurrently with or subsequent to the association of the
    contents with the cover material, or (c) for assembling spaced or
    superposed webs and forming transverse seams to produce transverse tubular
    covers which may or may not be subsequently longitudinally seamed.

    (1)     Note.  The seam may be secured by an operation such as heat
    sealing, folding, pasting, etc.

    (2)     Note.  If the web is formed by heat or pressure into
    contents-retaining form (e.g., stretch forming), the patent is excluded
    from this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128.1+, for apparatus which secures a seam by the use or application of a
    cover adjunct, e.g., staple, sealing strip, thread, etc.

    450,    for corresponding methods.

    559,    for apparatus for stretch forming receptacles from a web.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for forming a seam by
    stitching.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for laminating devices, per se, when not combined
    with filling operation, see especially subclasses 461+ for apparatus for
    longitudinally bending an endless web and forming a seam; and subclasses
    543+ for joining endless webs.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 200+ for electric heaters which may be
    employed for seaming.

    452,    Butchering, subclasses 32+ for sausage stuffers and subclasses 46+
    for sausage linkers.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclass 248 for making a pliable container including
    infeeding a blank to a passive folder.


CLS 53/546
TXT Multirow:

    Apparatus under subclass 545 having means to form two or more
    longitudinally extending tubes in the cover material wherein each tube has
    its contents segregated from the contents of the other tube or tubes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202,    for apparatus in which two or more separate streams of contents are
    coincidentally packaged as they move through the machine.


CLS 53/547
TXT With package severing and subsequent closing of severed end:

    Apparatus under subclass 545 including means to transversely cut or
    separate the cover after a longitudinal seam is formed and thereafter
    closing the severed ends to complete the enclosure of a plurality of
    individual package units.

    (1)     Note.  The severed ends of the package units may be closed by any
    suitable means such as by twisting, folding, heat sealing, gluing, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    548+,   for apparatus in which severing may occur concurrently with or
    subsequent to transverse seaming.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclass for apparatus for feeding and cutting
    webs.


CLS 53/548
TXT With closing of web between package units: Apparatus under subclass 545
    including means to periodically form a seam transversely of the web to
    thereby isolate the contents into package units.

    (1)     Note.  For this and indented subclasses the transverse seam may be
    formed prior to the longitudinal seam.

    (2)     Note.  For this and indented subclasses the means for forming the
    transverse seam may also simultaneously sever the cover along the seam.


CLS 53/549
TXT By twisting:

    Apparatus under subclass 548 including means to form the transverse seam
    (a) by relatively rotating one portion of the tube with respect to a
    stationarily held adjacent second portion or (b) by relatively rotating two
    adjacent tube portions in opposite directions, the rotation being about the
    longitudinal axis of the tube whereby a coiled or convolved winding is
    produced forming a necked down section in the tube to segregate the package
    units.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217     and 370, for apparatus to close a filled package by twisting.

    483,    for methods of closing packages by twisting.


CLS 53/550
TXT Longitudinal tube formed from single web: Apparatus under subclass 548 in
    which a single web is folded longitudinally upon itself and seamed
    longitudinally to entube the contents prior to the formation of a
    transverse seam which isolates the contents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    553,    for apparatus for forming tubular covers from opposed webs.


CLS 53/551
TXT Vertically disposed tube:

    Apparatus under subclass 550 for forming an upwardly open tubular cover,
    the longitudinal axis of which is maintained generally perpendicular to a
    horizontal plane during forming, filling, and closing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    451,    for corresponding methods.


CLS 53/552
TXT Concurrent severing:

    Apparatus under subclass 551 including a device which seams the cover
    transversely between adjacent contents units and simultaneously separates
    the cover along that seam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    550,    for devices which concurrently seal and sever a horizontally
    disposed tube.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for feeding and
    cutting webs.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    515 for devices which simultaneously seam and sever.


CLS 53/553
TXT Plural webs:

    Apparatus under subclass 548 for enclosing articles or quantities of
    material between distinct, opposed webs.


CLS 53/554
TXT Vertically disposed tube:

    Apparatus under subclass 553 whereby two or more webs are joined for
    forming an upwardly open tubular pocket closed on three remaining sides,
    the transversely formed seam serving to close one pocket while providing
    the bottom seam for a succeeding pocket.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    551,    for apparatus forming an upwardly open pocket from a single web.


CLS 53/555
TXT Simultaneously longitudinal and transverse seaming:

    Apparatus under subclass 533 in which a longitudinal and transverse seam is
    made simultaneously to completely isolate the contents.


CLS 53/556
TXT APPARATUS FOR CONTRACTION OF COVER BY STRETCHING OR SHRINKING:

    Apparatus under the class definition for associating a cover or cover
    material with its contents and then drawing the cover or cover material
    into tight frictional engagement about or against the contents by elastic
    memory of the cover or cover material.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are devices which stretch a cover to a
    slightly larger cross section than the contents and then allow the cover to
    shrink tightly over the contents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255+,   for apparatus including devices which may enter and incidentally
    stretch a cover receptacle.

    441,    for corresponding methods.


CLS 53/557
TXT By heat shrinking:

    Apparatus under subclass 556 in which the cover or cover material is
    contracted by raising its temperature.

    (1)     Note.  Heat shrinking apparatus per se are not included here unless
    combined with means to associate the cover with the contents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    287+,   for devices which apply a separate closure by shrinking.

    442,    for corresponding methods.

    580,    for apparatus which apply a partial cover which may be subsequently
    heat shrunk about the contents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 201 for
    heat-shrinking apparatus, per se.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 385+ for electrically heated shrinking
    ovens.


CLS 53/558
TXT APPARATUS FOR FORMING OR PARTIALLY FORMING RECEPTACLE AND SUBSEQUENTLY
    FILLING:

    Apparatus under the class definition including means to fabricate a cover
    material into a shape capable of at least partially confining a contents
    prior to the association of the contents with the cover receptacle so
    fabricated.

    (1)     Note.  See section III of the class definition for "receptacle" as
    here used.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for fabricating a carrier-type package.

    452+,   for corresponding methods.

    545+,   for apparatus for forming a receptacle by a progressively formed
    cover, web, or web fold.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for apparatus for forming receptacles including
    adhesive bonding.

    413,    Sheet Metal Container Making, appropriate subclasses for can making.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    appropriate subclasses for shaping plastic receptacles.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 51+ for making a paper receptacle.


CLS 53/559
TXT Forming a pocket, depression or hollow compartment by application of heat
    or pressure (e.g., stretch forming):

    Apparatus under subclass 558 for shaping contents-receiving cavity or
    indentation in cover material by stressing and distorting a portion of the
    material against or around a forming member to distend or constrict the
    material.

    (1)     Note.  The medium used to induce the shaping of the cavities may be
    positive pressure, vacuum, mechanical pressure, or temperature
    modification; however, there must be included a former element (e.g., a
    die) which controls the shape of the cavity or indentation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140,    for apparatus for generating cover material in sheetlike form.

    141,    for apparatus for preconditioning cover material prior to
    fabrication into a receptacle.

    453,    for corresponding methods.

    511,    for receptacle forming combined with treating the contents with gas
    or vacuum.

    556,    for apparatus which stretch a cover material prior to association
    of the contents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    500 for apparatus for casting, plastic molding, or extruding articles.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 522 for apparatus for forming containers by direct application of
    fluid pressure.


CLS 53/560
TXT Capsule:

    Apparatus under subclass 559 for encapsulating small dosages of fluent
    contents.

    (1)     Note.  The contents are usually but not limited to medicinal
    products.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281+,   for filling and closing preformed capsules.

    454,    for corresponding methods.

    900,    for apparatus and method for handling or manipulating a capsule.


CLS 53/561
TXT Molding or extruding a container:

    Apparatus under subclass 559 for forming a discrete, thin-walled receptacle
    from thermo-plastic material by extrusion or blow molding of the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    574+,   for apparatus for filling receptacles while on the
    receptacle-forming means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 326 and 387 for blow-molding devices.


CLS 53/562
TXT Forming a pocket or pouch by folding and side sealing (e.g., flat bag
    making):

    Apparatus under subclass 558 in which a single continuous web of material
    is folded longitudinally and seamed transversely to form a flat receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  See section III, Definition of Terms Used, for the
    definition of the term "receptacle" as here used.

    (2)     Note.  The device may apply to either a single or plural transverse
    seams prior to filling, however, at least one transverse seam of a given
    receptacle must be completed prior to a longitudinal seal which may close
    that receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    455,    for corresponding methods.

    548,    for apparatus for forming progressively seamed tubes and
    subsequently closing between package units.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclass for fabricating bags involving adhesive bonding.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper: or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 189+ for making a pliable container
    including heat sealing.


CLS 53/563
TXT Forming a receptacle around a mandrel or former and removing therefrom
    prior to filling:

    Apparatus under subclass 558 in which the receptacle is made around a form
    and removed therefrom prior to filling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    456,    for methods of forming three-dimensional receptacles.

    575,    for apparatus in which the receptacle is filled around a form and
    filled before removal from the form.


CLS 53/564
TXT Forming by opening or setting up collapsed receptacle:

    Apparatus under subclass 558 in which the cover receptacle is made or
    supplied in a formed but collapsed condition and is opened into
    contents-receiving form.

    (1)     Note.  The collapsed receptacle is more than a mere notched or
    preformed sheet; it must be partially fabricated although collapsed,
    usually for storage purposes.

    (2)     Note.  See section III of the class definition for the meaning of
    the term "receptacles".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for apparatus which opens or erects bottle or can carriers.

    49,     for apparatus for applying cover material to a necked-down portion
    of the bottle.

    157,    for devices which erect and assemble divider with contents.

    381.1+, for apparatus for opening collapsed receptacles.


CLS 53/565
TXT Gable-top carton (e.g., milk carton):

    Apparatus under subclass 564 for erecting a freestanding receptacle having
    sides adjacent its mouth prescored or prefolded to facilitate closing into
    a gable top.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266.1+, for apparatus for filling and closing preformed containers.

    563,    for devices which form liquid- retaining containers around a solid
    mandrel.


CLS 53/566
TXT Horizontally loaded box or carton:

    Apparatus under subclass 564 for erecting normally freestanding receptacle
    with their fill opening positioned in a vertical plane and subsequently
    filling the receptacle while so positioned.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284,    for apparatus for filling and closing receptacles open at opposite
    ends.


CLS 53/567
TXT Flexible tubular stock - preformed continuous tube:

    Apparatus under subclass 564 in which the collapsed receptacle comprises a
    preformed continuous tube which may be further fabricated prior to filling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    545+,   for apparatus forming tubes by progressively seaming a cover web.

    576,    for devices storing expanded, preformed tubular stock on a mandrel.


CLS 53/568
TXT Longitudinally prefolded web stock:

    Apparatus under subclass 564 in which the collapsed receptacle comprises a
    continuous web of flexible material flat folded longitudinally and stored
    upon itself.

    (1)     Note.  The web after opening may be seamed transversely to isolate
    contents and simultaneously severed to separate the packaged unit from the
    folded web supply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    562,    for devices for folding and side-seaming webs to form flat bags.


CLS 53/569
TXT Letter-type envelope:

    Apparatus under subclass 564 in which the receptacle (a) has sides
    contacting opposite portions of the contents which sides are connected by a
    single fold or crease and (b) is closed by a single triangular flap.

    (1)     Note.  The receptacle may be used to enclose postal matter for
    mailing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266.1,  for apparatus for filling and closing envelopes.

    376.3+, for devices for closing envelopes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    441.5 for devices for sealing envelopes.


CLS 53/570
TXT Bag or sack:

    Apparatus under subclass 564 in which the receptacle is a sack or pouch
    made of flexible material.

    (1)     Note.  The opening mechanism may open the bag from either a
    completely or partially collapsed condition, but the mechanism must have at
    least a portion the sole utility of which is to expand the bag.

    (2)     Note.  A filling spout or guide which also serves to expand a
    collapsed bag as it is slipped onto the spout is not considered a
    bag-opening device for this or indented subclasses, except when the empty
    bags are stored in a magazine.  See (1) Note, subclass 571.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255+,   for inserted forms or guides for articles which may serve to expand
    a bag placed thereon.  See (2) Note, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 311+ and 390+ for filling
    heads or nozzles for fluent materials which may serve to expand a bag
    placed thereon.  See (2) Note, above.


CLS 53/571
TXT Magazine:

    Apparatus under subclass 570 in which a supply of bags is provided in a
    collapsed stacked condition with or without means to confine the stacks at
    the top or sides.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses include apparatus in which the
    bags are stored in a magazine, opened by any means and filled.


CLS 53/572
TXT Filled before removal from magazine:

    Apparatus under subclass 571 in which the stacked bags are confined and
    have the contents deposited therein prior to complete disassociation from
    the confining means.


CLS 53/573
TXT Combined extractor and opener:

    Apparatus under subclass 571 in which the same instrumentality which
    removes the bags from the stack also serves to expand or open the bags.


CLS 53/574
TXT Forming receptacles whereby the receptacle is subsequently filled while on
    the forming means:

    Apparatus under subclass 558 in which the cover receptacle is made around
    or within a die or form and the contents is placed within the receptacle
    before it is removed from said die or form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    561,    for apparatus for molding or extruding thin-walled receptacles.


CLS 53/575
TXT Hollow forming mandrel or plunger:

    Apparatus under subclass 574 in which the die or form includes a part
    fitting within the receptacle, said part being provided with a space for
    receiving, or a channel for directing, the contents into the receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  The hollow forming part may be either stationary, as a
    mandrel, or movable, as a plunger.

    (2)     Note.  The hollow forming part may be the only forming part or it
    may be one of a plurality of cooperate forming means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    563,    for devices for forming a receptacle around a mandrel, the
    receptacle being removed before filling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 162+ for forming a rigid container about a
    mandrel; and subclasses 25+ for forming a pliable container about a mandrel.


CLS 53/576
TXT Tubular receptacle stored on mandrel:

    Apparatus under subclass 575 in which the forming member has an indefinite
    length hoselike receptacle shirred or gathered thereover.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    581,    for apparatus for shirring or gathering a tubular cover onto a form.


CLS 53/577
TXT Gathered mouth receptacle:

    Apparatus under subclass 575 in which the internal forming part or mandrel
    (a) coacts with the cover material to cause the material to be pleated
    therearound and formed into a receptacle with a single closed end or (b)
    has means to smooth a cover material there-about to form a receptacle with
    a single closed end, which receptacle is adapted to have its open end
    closed by forcing the open edges toward the center to form a puckered
    closed end.


CLS 53/578
TXT External former:

    Apparatus under subclass 574 in which the die or form has a cavity within
    which the receptacle is made and in which the receptacle remains while the
    contents is being placed therein.


CLS 53/579
TXT Former mounted on conveying means:

    Apparatus under subclass 578 in which the hollow die or form is carried on
    a movable support for presenting the filled receptacle to a closing means
    therefor.


CLS 53/580
TXT PARTIAL COVER APPLICATION:

    Apparatus under the class definition for applying a cover means and leaving
    a substantial portion of the contents exposed.

    (1)     Note.  The application of plural partial covers are here, except
    when they are superimposed or overlapped, for which see subclasses 170+
    above.

    (2)     Note.  The partial encasement of the mouth portion of either a
    closed or opened bottle by means of a hood or crown closure (to either
    close the bottle or protect said closure) has not been considered partial
    cover application.  See subclasses 287+ and Notes thereto for the locus of
    such art.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48.1+,  for apparatus for packaging multiple bottles or cans in
    carrier-type packages.

    49,     for apparatus for packaging bottles wherein some portion of the
    bottle remains exposed.

    170+,   for apparatus for applying plural superimposed or overlapped
    partial covers, and see (1) Note above, and particularly subclass 176 where
    one partial cover is a band.

    287+,   see (2) Note above.

    397+,   for corresponding methods of packaging.

    558+,   for apparatus for making a partial cover and then applying it.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses, and especially subclasses 446+ and 475+ for
    apparatus for applying a bond or label to a container or article where the
    applied label is adhered to the container or article.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclass 471 for spirally wrapping
    tape about an article and subclasses 430+ for forming a composite article
    by wrapping material around a core.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 102+ for fixing a covering material to a
    box otherwise complete.


CLS 53/581
TXT Spindle or core:

    Apparatus under subclass 580 for applying cover means in the form of
    spindles or cores which pass into or through an aperture in the contents,
    leaving the major portion of the contents exposed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 241 for apparatus for assembling parts by a
    stringing action, and see the search notes thereto for related art.


CLS 53/582
TXT Band or tube:

    Apparatus under subclass 580 for applying the cover means which encircles
    the contents in one direction only, such as girth, but leaves both sides or
    ends thereof fully exposed, and which is in frictional contact with the
    contents so as to be retained thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135.1,  for apparatus for applying nonencircling bands or labels.

    138.6,  for apparatus for binding completed packages by means of strands
    and/or wire.

    169,    for apparatus for applying the tubular shell part of a sliding tray
    and shell-type receptacle.

    176,    for plural superimposed cover and cover material applying apparatus
    in which at least one applied cover is a band.

    399,    for corresponding methods.

    545,    for apparatus which applies a band by progressively seaming one or
    more webs about the contents and successively severing the webs to form
    individual-banded units.


CLS 53/583
TXT Bag neck banding:

    Apparatus under subclass 582 for applying a band to the gathered portion of
    a flexible container collapsed adjacent to the contents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138.2,  for devices for applying a staple or clip to the mouth of a bag.


CLS 53/584
TXT Cigar banding:

    Apparatus under subclass 582 for applying wrapper bands to cigars.


CLS 53/585
TXT Preformed tube:

    Apparatus under subclass 582 for placing a prefabricated tubular member
    about a contents.


CLS 53/586
TXT U-fold forming initial banding:

    Apparatus under subclass 582 in which a band is applied by contacting one
    face of the contents with the band and then so moving the contents that the
    two opposite sides of the contents have the band applied therealong so that
    the two sides and original contacting side of the band form a U in cross
    section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228+,   for applying a wrapper with an initial U-fold operation.


CLS 53/587
TXT Applied by rotation of contents:

    Apparatus under subclass 582 in which placing the band about the contents
    includes placing one edge of the band against the contents and then
    revolving the contents so that the other edge of the band is brought into
    seaming relation to the first edge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211+,   for applying a wrapper by rotation of the contents.


CLS 53/588
TXT Applied by rotation of band:

    Apparatus under subclass 582 in which placing the band about the contents
    includes placing one edge of the band against the contents and revolving
    the band supply or the ultimate other edge of the band about the contents
    to bring the other edge of the band into a seaming relationship with the
    first edge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210,    for apparatus for applying a wrapper by rotation of same.


CLS 53/589
TXT Applied by guiding band end about contents:

    Apparatus under subclass 582 in which placing the band about the contents
    includes guiding a first end via a guide means to form a loop about the
    contents and applying tension to close the loop about the contents.


CLS 53/590
TXT Applied by manipulating opposed band ends about contents:

    Apparatus under subclass 582 in which placing the band about the contents
    includes positioning one side of the contents centrally of the band and
    bringing the respective ends of the band into seaming relationship on the
    opposite side of the contents.

    (1)     Note.  The initial positioning may include either placing the
    contents on the band or placing the band onto the contents.


CLS 53/591
TXT Applied about series contents:

    Apparatus under subclass 582 in which banding material is applied serially
    to band together a plurality of individual articles in seriatim.

    (1)     Note.  The banded articles may be subsequently separated into
    discrete lengths or they may remain together in indefinite lengths.


CLS 53/592
TXT Applied by manual operation:

    Apparatus under subclass 582 in which placing the band about the contents
    includes substantial manipulation of the contents, the band, or a banding
    tool by hand.

    (1)     Note.  The hand operation must involve more than the mere feed or
    positioning of the contents or band with respect to a banding apparatus.


CLS 53/593
TXT End or band interleaved with contents (e.g., book or magazine band):

    Apparatus under subclass 582 having means to insert an end of a band-type
    cover between the leaves of a book or magazine, or between the elements of
    a stack or group, and to encircle the band about the book, magazine, group,
    or stack.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157,    for apparatus which introduce separators between adjacent units of
    a stack or group contents.


CLS 53/594
TXT Uncovered reduced projection or handle (e.g., lollypop):

    Apparatus under subclass 580 for applying a partial cover to a contents
    comprising a main portion and an extending portion of lesser
    cross-sectional area, said apparatus having means to apply a cover to
    encase the main portion, leaving at least a part of the extended portion
    exposed.

    (1)     Note.  The extended portion usually serves as a handle for the
    contents.

    (2)     Note.  Lollypop and tooth brush packaging mechanisms which leave
    the handle exposed are here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for apparatus for applying covers or cover materials to bottles and
    which leave a portion of the bottle exposed.

    134.1+, for apparatus for applying handles to a package.

                 CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTION


CLS 53/900
TXT Capsules:

    Apparatus and method for handling or otherwise manipulating a capsule for
    packaging purposes.

    (1)     Note.  Capsule are generally employed to contain small doses of
    fluent material or small artificial such as medicinal products.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266.1+, for apparatus for filling and closing a preformed receptacle.

    454,    for method of forming and filling a capsule.

    560,    for apparatus for forming and filling a capsule.


CLS 54/
TTL HARNESS

CLS 54/
TXT This class includes, besides the usual harness for attaching animals to
    vehicles, such harness arrangements or devices in connection with harnessed
    animals as are used for breaking or training animals, preventing their
    kicking; also horse-boots, riding saddles, spurs, ox-yokes, fly-nets, and
    such bonnets and protectors or shields for protecting the animal from sun,
    rain, etc., as are adapted to be attached to the animal or the harness;
    also, blanket- fasteners when not useful in other relations; also all pad,
    collar, and hame fasteners, halter, hame, and trace, trace and whiffletree
    couplings, and trace- carriers, generally relating to working animals.

    Patents relating solely to harness buckles, hooks, clips, clamps, clasps,
    couplings or fastenings of a general nature are in Class 24, Buckles,
    Buttons, Clasps, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 303 for indicia in the
    form of letters, symbols, etc., carried by harness parts.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 712+ for a device for controlling,
    restricting, or handling an animal, subclasses 850+ for body worn
    protective apparel, and subclasses 856+ for a body- or appendage-encircling
    device.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 290 for body harness for the occupant of a
    velocipede.

            GENERAL NOTE:
    WHEREVER THE DRAWINGS ARE ASSOCIATED WITH THE DEFINITIONS, THEY ARE MERELY
    USED TO ILLUSTRATE THE BASIC CONCEPT ENCOMPASSED BY THE DEFINITION OF THAT
    SUBCLASS AND SHOULD NOT BE CONSTRUED AS LIMITING THE SCOPE OF THE SUBJECT
    MATTER CONVERED BY THAT SUBCLASS.


CLS 54/1
TXT Harness structures and parts not classifiable in any of the other
    subclasses.


CLS 54/2
TXT Harness especially adapted to race-track purposes.  Usually the collar and
    hames of the breast-collar is omitted and the thills are attached to the
    back-band or harness-saddles.


CLS 54/3
TXT Double harness in which there is a cross-piece or pieces extending from one
    animal to the other and the draft connection is made between the animals to
    this cross-piece, much as the connection to an ox-yoke is made, the
    ordinary traces being omitted.


CLS 54/4
TXT Special forms of back-bands.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38.


CLS 54/5
TXT Harness in which the novelty lies in the breeching-straps or their relative
    arrangements.

    (1)     Note.  Holdback-hooks and other fastening devices especially
    adapted to secure the hold-back straps to the thills are in Class 278, Land
    Vehicles:  Animal Draft Appliances, subclasses 127+, while hooks and
    buckles of a general nature are to be found in Class 24, Buckles, Buttons,
    Clasps, etc. Search Class 248, Supports, subclasses 211, 213, 215, 225.21,
    227.1, 290.1, 294.1, 301, 303, 304+, 339+ for simple supporting hooks.


CLS 54/6.1
TXT BRIDLE:
    Subject matter under the class definition compring a headstall, a bit, and
    a rein used for guiding or restraining a working animal, such as a horse or
    mule.

    (1)     Note.  A head-stall usually includes a blinker, a browband, a
    noseband, cheek-straps,  a   head   strap,   and  throatlash.  A bit
    usually consists of a metal bar which works on the corner of the horse's
    mouth.  It is fitted to rest on the gums of the mouth above the teeth and
    on the horse's tongue.  A rein consists of a long, narrow leather strap
    which is attached to each end of the bit and is usually held by a driver or
    rider to control or guide the working animal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7+,     for bits.

    10+,    for blinds.

    12,     for brow bands.

    24+,    for halters.

    36,     for reins.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous subject
    matter designed to limit or restrain the free movements of animals.




CLS 54/6.2
TXT With halter:
    Subject matter under subclass 6.1 including an additional control device
    consisting of a loop, a link or a rope formed of material that is adapted
    to be patterned to correspond with the size of the head of a draft animal
    and is usually supported by a headstall and chinstrap.

    (1)     Note.  During training of the draft animal the halter rope is used
    to tie back the animal without the animal pulling against the bit all the
    time and harming its mouth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for stranglers.

    24,     for halters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 66 for halter-supported feed bags.


CLS 54/7
TXT Inventions relating solely to the bridle-bit.


CLS 54/8
TXT Inventions relating solely to the part of the bit which is to be placed in
    the animal's mouth or relating to the attachment of the mouthpiece to the
    end rings or cheek-pieces.


CLS 54/9
TXT Inventions relating to those bits characterized by two connected
    mouth-pieces so arranged as to be separated laterally or slid in opposite
    direction by the pull on the reins; also those patents in which the
    check-bit is attached to the driving-bit.


CLS 54/10
TXT Blinds and their attachment to the bridle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 837 for a device for limiting use of an
    eye.


CLS 54/11
TXT Inventions which relate to such blinds as, by means of a cord or other
    connection operated by the driver, can be quickly brought entirely over the
    animal's eyes to blindfold him.  Usually employed when the animal takes
    fright.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15.


CLS 54/12
TXT Inventions relating to the brow-band of the bridle.


CLS 54/13
TXT The loops or guides on top of the bridle for guiding the overdraw-checkrein.


CLS 54/14
TXT The runners or guides attached to the sides of the bridle and through which
    the side checkrein is made to pass.


CLS 54/15
TXT Devices to be operated by the driver, either through the driving-reins, a
    separate line, or other connection, adapted to interfere with the breathing
    of the animal, either by choking or by compressing or covering the
    nostrils, usually to stop runaway or vicious horses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11.


CLS 54/16
TXT Reins for holding up the animal's head.


CLS 54/17
TXT Retaining-loops or devices for connecting and holding the checkrein on the
    check-loop, Some rein-spreading bars are here included.


CLS 54/18.1
TXT COMBINED COLLAR AND HAME:
    Subject matter under the class definition consisting of a ring or a roll
    made of leather or of similar material having a rigid frame with a means of
    attachment for the neck of a draft animal and against which the animal
    strains in pulling a load.

    (1)     Note.  A hame consists of one of the two curved wooden or metal
    supports that go along the sides of the collar and often terminate in
    essentially nonfunctional projections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21      and 26+, for features of fastening devices.


CLS 54/18.2
TXT With padding:
    Subject matter under subclass 18.1 including a cushion made up of or
    stuffed with soft material to protect a draft animal from friction or
    jarring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65+,    for neck and back pads.


CLS 54/18.3
TXT Adjustable:
    Subject matter under subclass 18.2 including a means for separating the
    collar to fit different size necks and which can also be taken apart for
    inspection or repair.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19.3,   for adjustable collar.


CLS 54/19.1
TXT COLLAR:
    Subject matter under the class definition consisting of a ring or a roll
    made of leather or of similar material for the neck of a draft animal which
    is also a part of the harness against which the animal strains in pulling a
    load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18.1+,  for combined collar and hame.

    65+,    for pads for collars.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 712+ for restraining devices,
    especially subclasses 856+ for neck-embracing bands, chains, or other
    flexible devices.


CLS 54/19.2
TXT Pneumatic:
    Subject matter under subclass 19.1 in which the collar is adapted to be
    filled by a cushion consisting of an element usually made of rubber, and is
    filled with air.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18.2,   for padded collar and hame.

    65+,    for back and neck pads.


CLS 54/19.3
TXT Adjustable:
    Subject matter under subclass 19.1 including selectively usable apertures,
    teeth, or slots which permit the collar to fit different size necks and
    which can also be taken apart for inspection and repair.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18.3,   for a separable collar.


CLS 54/20
TXT The collar portion of what is commonly known as "breast harness".


CLS 54/21
TXT Means for fastening the collar ends together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26      and 68.


CLS 54/22
TXT Inventions relating to harness-crupper.


CLS 54/23
TXT Inventions in which the novelty lies in the saddle or harness girth or
    surcingle.


CLS 54/24
TXT Novel forms of halters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6       and 15.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., for clamps or coupling devices for
    rope halters.


CLS 54/25
TXT Inventions in which the novelty resides in the hame structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18.


CLS 54/26
TXT Devices for fastening the hames together when in position on the collar and
    on the animal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASSES:

    18      and 21.


CLS 54/27
TXT Fastening devices involving a lever action in their operation.


CLS 54/28
TXT Such devices as comprise a strap fastening, usually with a specially
    adapted buckle.


CLS 54/29
TXT Devices for fastening the top or upper ends of the hames.


CLS 54/30
TXT Devices or couplings for connecting together the hames and the tugs or
    traces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc.


CLS 54/31
TXT Such connections as are capable of an adjustment as to bring the point of
    connection higher or lower upon the hames.


CLS 54/32
TXT That part of the harness sometimes considered the forward part of the
    trace, but which connects the trace proper with the hame.


CLS 54/33
TXT Tugs adapted to be adjusted in length.


CLS 54/34
TXT Various devices for hitching animals, straps or ropes to be attached to
    bridle bits or halters or passed about the animal's neck or nose, devices
    for engaging posts or similar stationary objects; also, arrangements for
    converting the driving rein into a hitching strap.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 769+ for such devices as are
    stationary and not adapted to be carried with the animal; also, such
    arrangements as are for tethering animals for grazing purposes.


CLS 54/35
TXT Devices adapted to be attached to the animal's head and also to the girth
    to serve as a means for properly holding the animal's head.


CLS 54/36
TXT The structure or arrangement of the driving reins.


CLS 54/37.1
TXT PACK SADDLE:
    Subject matter under the class definition consisting of a high frame or a
    large mat-covered pad designed to secure a nonhuman load (e.g., equipment,
    miscellaneous articles) on the back of the load-carrying animal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 195.1+ for saddle seats in general,
    e.g., for a velocipede or a bicycle.



CLS 54/38.1
TXT HARNESS SADDLE:
    Subject matter under the class definition consisting of a device comprising
    a saddle tree, a tree plate, and a checkhook mounted as a support for gear
    or tackle centered on a draft animal's back.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for girth.

    36,     for reins.


CLS 54/39.1
TXT Cart:
    Subject matter under subclass 38.1 especially adapted for attaching a
    two-wheeled or a four-wheeled vehicle to a horse or other draft animal--
    the vehicle being used for carrying loads.

    (1)     Note.  Patents for two-wheeled vehicles used in races (e.g., sulky)
    are classified in this Class 54, subclass 2.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for racetrack harness.

    50+,    for thill tugs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 63+ for two-wheeled land vehicles.



CLS 54/40.1
TXT Pivoted side plates:
    Subject matter under subclass 38.1 consisting of a plurality of smooth,
    flat, relatively thin, rigid bodies of uniform thickness or "jockey" plates
    which are rotated or swung either to each other or to a central
    intermediate piece in order to adapt the saddle to different draft animals.

    (1)     Note.  Some of the pivots are adapted to be clamped at any desired
    adjustment, while others are free to permit the plates to move.


CLS 54/41.1
TXT Cushion:
    Subject matter under subclass 38.1 including a pad made of or stuffed with
    soft material to protect a horse or other draft animal from friction or
    jarring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65+,    for back and neck pads.


CLS 54/42.1
TXT Saddle connecting means:
    Subject matter under subclass 38.1 consisting of a slot, a lug, and
    projection and frictional retaining means adapted to secure a hook to the
    check-rein and a tree plate to the saddle tree.


CLS 54/43.1
TXT Tug bearers:
    Subject matter under subclass 38.1 including guides consisting of a
    metallic plate or a loop used for fastening the thill-tug straps.

    (1)     Note.  A thill consists of either of the two long shafts between
    which an animal is fastened when pulling a wagon or carriage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50+,    for thill tugs.


CLS 54/44.1
TXT RIDING  SADDLE:
    Subject matter under the class definition consisting of a seat made of
    leather or of similar material secured on a draft animal's back and shaped
    to fit the inside contours of the buttocks of a rider.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 195.1+ for saddle seats, in general.


CLS 54/44.2
TXT Including supplemental child saddle:
    Subject matter under subclass 44.1 including an auxiliary or secondary seat
    used in conjunction with the standard riding saddle and shaped to fit the
    inside contours of the buttocks of a child allowing the child to ride on a
    standard saddle.

    (1)     Note.  Also included in this subclass are small, miniaturized
    saddles or similar toy saddles which are adapted to be strapped to the back
    or to the shoulder of an adult person to carry a child or to simulate the
    child riding a horse.

    (2)     Note.  Child saddles which are independently supported like
    standard saddles are classified in subclass 44.1.



CLS 54/44.3
TXT Adjustable:
    Subject matter under subclass 44.1 including a plurality of selectively
    usable appertures, teeth, slots, or similar means to allow for changing the
    configuration of the saddle or for disassembly thereof for inspection or
    repair.


CLS 54/44.4
TXT With spring:
    Subject matter under subclass 44.1 including an elastic, resilient means to
    constitute a cushioned seat for the rider.


CLS 54/44.5
TXT With padding:
    Subject matter under subclass 44.1 consisting of a thin, cushion-like mass
    of soft material used as filling to protect a horse or draft animal from
    friction or jarring and to provide a cushioned seat for the rider.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65+,    for back and neck pads.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 652+ for a cushion.


CLS 54/44.6
TXT Pneumatic:
    Subject matter under subclass 44.5 wherein the padding consists of an
    element preferably made of rubber or of similar material adapted to be
    filled with air.


CLS 54/44.7
TXT Specific material:
    Subject matter under subclass 44.1 wherein significance is attributed to
    the material from which the saddle or a part thereof is made.

    (1)     Note.  Normally the saddles are made of leather or wood.  However,
    to be classified in this subclass, a claim must include a recitation of the
    material which is of a novel nature, e.g., specially treated leather,
    plastic, or Teflon.


CLS 54/45.1
TXT Side:
    Subject matter under subclass 44.1 especially adapted for a female rider
    wherein the rider usually keeps both her legs on one side of the horse or
    other draft animal.


CLS 54/46.1
TXT With stirrup strap or connector:
    Subject matter under subclass 44.1 including a flat-based loop, a ring, or
    a long, narrow band equipped with an adjustable fastener which is hung from
    either side of a horse or other draft animal's saddle to support the
    rider's foot in mounting and riding or as a girth for the horse.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     fo r   girths.


CLS 54/46.2
TXT With rigging bar:
    Subject matter under subclass 44.1 including a generally horizontal rigid
    piece of solid material which provides points of attachment for various
    saddle harness elements to a saddle tree.


CLS 54/47
TXT Riding stirrups and their housing or fenders.


CLS 54/48
TXT Stirrups so constructed as to yield under the rider's weight to reduce the
    jar of the animal's motions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 69+.


CLS 54/49
TXT Stirrups constructed with a view to preventing the rider's foot hanging or
    catching after dismounting or in case the rider is thrown.


CLS 54/49.5
TXT Stirrups combined with spurs and spurs, per se, designed to be attached to
    stirrups.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83,     for spurs worn by the rider.


CLS 54/50
TXT The tug, lug, or loop attached to the harness saddle and through which the
    shaft or thill is passed to be supported.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54.


CLS 54/51
TXT Tugs adapted to be opened laterally so the thill can be put in from the
    side without the necessity of inserting it into the tug end first.


CLS 54/52
TXT Novel trace structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for the connecting  devices between the hame and trace or tug.

    32,     for the forward portion of the tug or trace which extends from the
    hame to the backband.

     53,    for the connections to the whiffle-tree.

    SEARCH CLASS :

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., for trace or tug buckles.


CLS 54/53
TXT Devices including the usual cockeyes for attaching the traces to the
    whiffletree.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    278,    Land Vehicles: Animal Draft Appliances, subclasses 111+ for such
    whiffletree-hooks and trace-coupling devices as do not involve any
    modifications of the trace part.


CLS 54/54
TXT Devices adapted to guide, hold, or support the trace at some point between
    the hame and single-tree, usually opposite the back-band or harness-saddle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50.


CLS 54/55
TXT Such carriers as are adpated to hook into or around the trace (usually a
    chain trace) to support it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56      and 62.


CLS 54/56
TXT Hooks, clips, or other devices to which the free ends of traces are
    attached after being unhitched from the whiffletree.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55      and 62.


CLS 54/57
TXT Devices attached below the animal's head to hold it up and in proper
    position.  Usually the device is a rigid bar and acts to push up the head
    of the animal.


CLS 54/58
TXT Straps or chains which are attached to the hames and to the neck-yoke or
    wagon-tongue to hold up the latter.


CLS 54/59
TXT Various slides, shields, or other arrangements for protecting the strap
    from the wear of the neck-yoke; also, other connecting devices between the
    strap and neck-yoke.


CLS 54/61
TXT Hooks, usually attached to the harness-saddles or back-bands for holding
    the checkreins.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for the means for securing the hook to the saddle, and 70.


CLS 54/62
TXT Checkrein-hooks which have a movable part to keep the rein in the hook.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     56 and 70.


CLS 54/63
TXT Guides or rings usually attached to the back-band, harness-saddle, collar,
    or hames to guide the driving reins.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for means for attaching the terret to its support, and 38.


CLS 54/64
TXT Devices, usually clips, clasps or clamps, attached to some convenient part
    of the harness for holding the free end of the hitching-strap when the
    latter is not in use.


CLS 54/65
TXT Various cushioning-pads for harness.


CLS 54/66
TXT Pads especially designed to be placed upon the animal's back as harness and
    riding-saddle pads.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41      and 44, for such pads as are adapted to be permanently attached to
    and become part of the harness or riding-saddle.


CLS 54/67
TXT Neck-pads, usually for collars.

    (1)     Note.  For shoulder pads for collars, see this class, subclass 65.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19.


CLS 54/68
TXT Devices for fastening the pads to the harness part.


CLS 54/69
TXT Special arrangements of harness and such special vehicle attachments as are
    to cooperate therewith for quickly connecting and disconnecting the animal
    and vehicle. Usually the driver can operate the disconnecting devices
    without leaving the vehicle.  Usually the connection is made to the thills
    opposite the back-band or thill- loops, no singletree being used.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    278,    Land Vehicles: Animal Draft Appliances, subclass 21 for such
    attaching and detaching devices as involve no harness modification other
    than the usual trace-eye connection, which is usually between the tugs or
    traces and the singletree ends.


CLS 54/70
TXT Devices for this purpose which are adapted to be operated by the driver
    while remaining in the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for check-hook structures, 61 and 62.


CLS 54/71
TXT Various harness arrangements for controlling vicious or unruly animals or
    training animals to trot, pace, etc. Kicking-straps, devices for throwing
    animals, stopping them from running away, increasing leg or knee action,
    etc., are here included.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 712+ for a device for controlling or
    handling an animal, and subclasses 856+ for a body- or appendage-encircling
    device.


CLS 54/72
TXT Devices for pulling or causing the animal to throw the legs farther apart
    in traveling to prevent interference.

    (1)     Note.  Such devices as are in nature of so-called "horseboots" will
    be found in this class, subclass 82.


CLS 54/73
TXT Various devices, other than terrets, carried by the harness for guiding or
    guarding the reins to prevent them catching on the harness or under the
    animal's tail.

    (1)     Note.  Devices for holding the animal's tail to prevent it being
    switched about or over the reins are in this class, in subclass 78.


CLS 54/74
TXT Various hand-loops, buttons, clamps, or other devices designed to enable
    the driver to get a firmer or better grip or pull on the reins.


CLS 54/75
TXT Various covered harness-trimmings, such as buckles, rings, check-hooks,
    terrets, etc.


CLS 54/76
TXT The various ornamental harness attachments, such as rosettes, plumes,
    tassels, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 303 for indicia in the
    form of letters, symbols, etc., carried by harness parts.


CLS 54/77
TXT Yokes for oxen.


CLS 54/78
TXT Devices for holding the animal's tail for various purposes, such as to keep
    it out of the mud, prevent it from being switched about or over the reins,
    to cause it to hang in proper curve, or to take out undesirable curves or
    shapes.

    (1)     Note.  Devices for holding a cow's tail while she is being milked
    are found in Class 119, Animal Husbandry, subclass 165 and indented
    subclasses thereunder.


CLS 54/79.1
TXT BLANKET OR GARMENT:
    Subject matter under the class definition consisting of a piece of fabric
    or of article of outer clothing used exclusively as a covering to protect
    the body of the horse or other animal from cold, illness, or that may be
    used as a covering to decorate the animal.

    (1)     Note.  A means to protect any part of the animal (e.g., head, nose,
    eyes, or mouth) is classified in subclasses 80.1+, for bonnet or shield.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, appropriate subclasses for a body covering.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 850+ for shields designed to protect
    the animals.


CLS 54/79.2
TXT With retaining means:
    Subject matter under subclass 79.1 consisting of a link, a bar, a resilient
    loop, or a strap with a buckle used to hold the blanket or garment tightly
    against the draft animal.


CLS 54/79.3
TXT With padding:
    Subject matter under subclass 79.1 including a thin, shock absorbing,
    cushion-like mass of soft material used as filling to protect the animal
    from friction or jarring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44.5,   for a riding saddle having padding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 652+ for a cushion.


CLS 54/79.4
TXT Specific material:
    Subject matter under subclass 79.1 wherein significance is attributed to
    the material from which the blanket or garment is made.


CLS 54/80.1
TXT BONNET OR SHIELD:
    Subject matter under the class definition including a shade, a deflector,
    or a protector consisting of an article made from canvas, synthetic
    flexible sheet material (e.g., nylon), or other flexible material (e.g.,
    woven straw) adapted to be attached to the animal to protect a portion  of
    the animal from sun, wind, rain, dust, or insects.

    (1)     Note.  Canopies which are adapted to be carried by the vehicle or
    its thills or shafts are classified in Class 135, Tent, Canopy, Umbrella,
    or Cane, subclasses 87+, portable shelter, i.e., tent or canopy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 15+ for eyeshields and subclasses 171+ for head
    coverings for human beings.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 850+ for shields designed to protect
    the animals.

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane.  See the note above.


CLS 54/80.2
TXT Eye shield:
    Subject matter under subclass 80.1 including a flexible mask portion
    especially adapted for protecting the eyes of the horse or other draft
    animal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10+,    for blinds.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 410+, for guards  and protectors for a wearer's
    head.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 712+ for restraining devices,
    especially subclass 836 for blinders.


CLS 54/80.3
TXT Nose guard:
    Subject matter under subclass 80.1 including a generally cylindrical body
    with a cup-shaped bottom end formed of a material having sufficient
    flexibility especially adapted for protecting a horse or other draft
    animal's nostrils.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 410+ for guards and protectors for a wearer's
    head.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 821+ for mouth restraints, and
    subclasses 850+ for shields.

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 206.12+ for a face mask covering with a
    breathing passage.





CLS 54/80.4
TXT Fly net:
    Subject matter under subclass 80.1 consisting of a fabric made of threads,
    cords, or ropes woven or knitted together at regular intervals such as a
    mesh or screen used for protecting an animal against insects.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for covered trimmings, and 79.1 for a blanket or a garment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 455+ for guards and protectors.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 8 for
    net-handling apparatus.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 827 and 832 for a muzzle having mesh
    or screen structure and subclasses 850+ for shields.


CLS 54/80.5
TXT Face guard:
    Subject matter under subclass 80.4 consisting of a body member of cloth,
    leather, or plastic shaped to fit over, to cover, and to protect the head
    and face of an animal against flies or insects.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 4 for an insect-repelling guard or a protector
    and subclasses 9 and 24 for a face guard or a protector.


CLS 54/82
TXT Various devices, commonly styled "horse- boots", adapted to be secured to
    the animal's leg or hoof to secure protection, prevent interfering, hold
    medicating substances, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Such devices as in any way engage or pass beneath the hoof
    to cushion, protect, or hold medicating substances to it are to be found in
    Class 168, Farriery, subclass 26, and indented subclasses.


CLS 54/83.1
TXT SPUR:
    Subject matter under the class definition consisting of a pointed device
    worn on a rider's heels which is used to urge a horse or other draft animal
    forward.

    (1)     Note.  Spurs are usually made of polished steel or brass, some
    being silver-plated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49.5,   for stirrups with spurs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclass 74, for spur-attached sole or
    heel.



CLS 54/83.2
TXT Adjustable to operative position:
    Subject matter under subclass 83.1 consisting of a hinge or a spring by
    which the spur may be adapted to be held in a projecting or in an operative
    position when desired.  It also may be adapted to be held in an inoperative
    position when desired.


CLS 54/84
TXT Devices for suspending or supporting harness, usually so it can be quickly
    lowered upon the animals, as for fire-engines, police-patrols,
    hospital-vans, etc.


CLS 54/85
TXT Limited to the various metallic connecting pieces employed on strap halters.

    (1)     Note.  Metallic couplings for rope halters are found in Class 24,
    Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24      and 34.


CLS 54/87
TXT Such loops and rings as are adapted for use on various parts of the harness
    where two or more straps are to be joined or connected together.


CLS 55/
TTL GAS SEPARATION

CLS 55/
TXT
    Class 55 is an integral part of Class 96 and follows subclass 220 in Class
    96 in the schedule hierarchy.  Class 55 uses the class definition and class
    lines established in and for Class 96.  Class 55 provides for the gas
    separation apparatus that has not yet been reclassified.


CLS 55/209
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having surfaces of different
    temperatures between which the fluid passes, the different temperatures of
    the surfaces causing separation of the components.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes this special type of gas separating
    apparatus, regardless of any claimed refrigeration apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclass 289 for corresponding
    processes.  Patents are not cross-referenced from Class 95, subclass 289 to
    this subclass based only on disclosure.  Therefore, relevant disclosures
    for gas separation apparatus may be found in the process area.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 176 and 775 for
    method and similar apparatus to separate components of a liquid mixture.


CLS 55/210
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means to sense a condition
    which may or may not occur, or a change in such condition or a lack or such
    a condition or the result of such a condition, the sensing means causing or
    permitting operation of a separate means for controlling, without the
    intervention of a human attendant, means to (1) regulate (e.g., divert,
    halt or commence) the flow of system fluid through the apparatus or part
    thereof or (2) regulate the movement from the apparatus of accumulated
    separated constituent exclusive of that which may be retained in or on the
    separating media itself.

    (1)     Note.  The automatic control means must comprise more than a member
    directly  actuated by the mere flow or pressure of the controlled material
    on the operative surface thereof (e.g., direct flow or weight responsive
    gate valve) or by gravity or inertia.  That is, the sensing function must
    be distinct from the control function (e.g., float valve.

    (2)     Note.  Time is not considered a "condition" in this definition.
    For separators with timing means see subclasses 271+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225,    for automatic control of a treating liquid responsive to a
    condition of system fluid flow.

    227,    for automatic inflow control of a treating liquid.

    283,    for automatically controlled filter or separator wall cleaning
    means.

    352,    for automatically controlled means causing movement of a continuous
    or indefinite length separating media into or out of the gas stream.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 1+ for processes of gas
    separation with control responsive to sensed condition.


CLS 55/211
TXT Apparatus under subclass 210 including means to move the separated material
    (residue) collecting means or the media which effects separation wholly or
    partially from its normal operating position in the apparatus and to a
    position apart and operatively disconnected from other media or collecting
    means remaining, if any, to thereby permit disposal thereof without direct
    effect upon the said others.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    351+,   for means to remove from its normal use position a portion of a
    continuous separating media.

    362,    for nonautomatic ejecting means for flexible or collapsible
    separator bags.


CLS 55/212
TXT Apparatus under subclass 210 in which the system fluid is prevented from
    passing through the apparatus by diverting its flow, blocking it by some
    stop means, or by causing cessation of the flow effecting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211,    for apparatus for ejecting a separating media and also controlling
    the flow of system fluid.


CLS 55/213
TXT Apparatus under subclass 212 in which the flow control means is actuated by
    a separate sensing means responsive to a pressure exerted thereon by the
    system fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310+    and 313, for pressure relief and separator bypass means directly
    responsive to a force exerted thereon by the system fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 19+ for processes of gas
    separation with control responsive to pressure.


CLS 55/214
TXT Apparatus under subclass 212 in which the sensing means senses the presence
    of a container for separated material to cause or permit actuation of a
    control means for system fluid.


CLS 55/215
TXT Apparatus under subclass 212 in which the flow control function is
    initiated by the amount of constituent material separated and retained by
    the apparatus.


CLS 55/216
TXT Apparatus under subclass 215 in which a buoyant body supported on
    accumulated liquid initiates the flow control function.


CLS 55/217
TXT Apparatus under subclass 212 in which the means for controlling the system
    fluid flow is actuated in response to a temperature or humidity variance
    sensing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclass 10 for processes of gas
    separation with control responsive to humidity and subclasses 14+ for
    processes of gas separation with control responsive to temperature.

    96,     Gas Separation: Apparatus, subclass 111 for solid sorbent apparatus
    with control means responsive to concentration, and subclass 112 for solid
    sorbent apparatus with control means responsive to temperature.


CLS 55/218
TXT Apparatus under subclass 210 wherein the discharge from the apparatus of a
    constituent which has been separated from the system fluid and accumulated
    is automatically controlled in response to a sensed condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 53-60 for
    thermostatically controlled steam condensate traps.


CLS 55/219
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 in which the sensing means comprises a buoyant
    body supported on accumulated liquid which has been separated from the
    system fluid and retained by the apparatus, the buoyant body initiating the
    control function in response to the amount of liquid accumulation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 157+ for degasifying means
    for liquid with liquid level sensing means.


CLS 55/220
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having (A) means to bring the system
    fluid into (1) intimate confluent, counter current or generally mingling
    relationship with a liquid furnished from a separate supply for such liquid
    or (2) contact with the surface of a reservoir or supply tank of liquid or
    (B) liquid distributing means for an apparatus part for cleaning thereof or
    the like.

    (1)     Note.  In order to qualify under portion (A) (1) of this definition
    the liquid contacting means must be of the type described as classified,
    per se, in Class 261, see line note to Class 261 in section III in Class
    definition.

    (2)     Note.  Treatment of cleaning by contact with steam is not
    considered liquid contact and will be found in subclasses 263 and 282+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263,    for gas treatment by steam and see (1) Note above.

    282+,   for filter and deflector cleaning by fluid means other than liquid
    and see (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 149+ for processes of gas
    separation involving liquid contact.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    gas-liquid contact apparatus wherein liquid contact is the only physical
    gas separation step involved and see the class definition of Class 55 for a
    statement of the line.


CLS 55/222
TXT Apparatus under subclass 220 provided with a conduit or flow conductor for
    passing a nonsystem fluid relative to but not in direct contact with at
    least a portion of a bounded system fluid stream to effect heat exchange
    therebetween, said nonsystem fluid being separate and distinct from the
    system fluid.

    (1)     Note.  The system fluid may be passed via a conduit through a
    confined non- system fluid for heat exchange purposes.

    (2)     Note.  The heat exchange fluid may be a liquid which in another
    part of the separator intimately contacts the system fluid, but heat
    exchange must be more the mere unintended result of heat transfer through a
    wall which acts as a confining path for the system fluid or treating liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228,    for treating liquid conditioning means involving heat exchange.

    261+,   for gas treatment by direct contact with a diverse fluid or with a
    solid.

    268+,   for indirect heat exchange means for affecting the temperature of
    the system fluid and in which there is no gas-liquid contact.


CLS 55/223
TXT Apparatus under subclass 220 having two or more unlike means which effect
    liquid contact with the system fluid or liquid distribution to an apparatus
    part.

    (1)     Note.  Diverse liquid contacting or applying means for this
    subclass include spray, immersion, flowing film, bath, etc.  Plural
    dissimilar means of the same general type (e.g. sprays) are included when
    one is intended for gas-liquid contact and the other is for apparatus
    cleaning, whereas a single means which performs both of said functions is
    not included, nor are plural dissimilar means of the same general type
    (e.g. different kinds of spray heads) which perform one or the other of
    said functions in either the same or different zones.


CLS 55/224
TXT Apparatus under subclass 220 having means for dividing system fluid into
    two or more flowing streams so that less than all of said divided streams
    are brought into direct contact with a liquid (e.g. bath, sheet or spray)
    in at least one phase of the separating operation.


CLS 55/225
TXT Apparatus under subclass 220 in which means responsive to or actuated by
    velocity or pressure of the flowing system fluid affects movement of
    treating liquid to, from, or within the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  A venturi through which the gas passes and which educts the
    liquid qualifies under this definition.

    (2)     Note.  Automatic control means comprising a member sensing a
    condition of the flowing system fluid (e.g. pressure, velocity, force) and
    which causes actuation of a separate control means for the liquid is also
    accepted under this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227,    for apparatus having liquid level maintaining or automatic control
    means for the treating liquid responsive to a condition of the system fluid
    other than flow (e.g. temperature).


CLS 55/226
TXT Apparatus under subclass 220 having direct responsive or other nonautomatic
    control means for the system fluid to alter or determine the amount of
    liquid carried or retained by the said controlled fluid.


CLS 55/227
TXT Apparatus under subclass 220 having means (1) to control the inflow of
    treating liquid to the apparatus by means responsive to a condition of the
    said liquid, the system fluid or the apparatus, or (2) to prevent more than
    a desired quantity of liquid to be retained by the apparatus in accordance
    with some predetermined liquid level requirement.

    (1)     Note.  The liquid level maintaining means must be more than a mere
    overflow outlet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225,    for liquid control, including automatic means, by flow of the
    system fluid or a condition thereof (e.g. pressure, velocity, force).


CLS 55/228
TXT Apparatus under subclass 220 having means to (1) remove contaminants or
    foreign matter from the liquid (2) add agents (e.g. anti-foamers or wetting
    agent) to said liquid, (3) strip sorbents or remove a diluting fluid from
    the liquid and make the liquid sufficiently strong to further treat the
    system fluid (i.e. reconcentrate) or (4) change the temperature or other
    physical characteristics (e.g. density, viscosity) of the liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, appropriate subclass, for the structure
    of the concentrating elements, per se.


CLS 55/229
TXT Apparatus under subclass 220 having (1) manual or power operated means
    (e.g. pump) located at some point in a liquid recirculation system for
    recirculating at least a portion of the liquid back to the point of initial
    use, or (2) means to drain, control the flow of, or return a treating
    liquid to a liquid bath or reservoir spaced apart from the contact zone.


CLS 55/230
TXT Apparatus under subclass 220 having a continuously or intermittently moving
    liquid discharging or applying means to effect contact of the said liquid
    with the system fluid or with an apparatus part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247,    for movable means situated at least partially within a treating
    liquid bath to agitate said bath for commingling the liquid with the system
    fluid.


CLS 55/231
TXT Apparatus under subclass 230 in which the liquid discharging or applying
    means (e.g. sorbent filter pad) is directly contacted by the gaseous system
    fluid to effect gas-liquid contact.

    (1)     Note.  The distributor is usually a sorbent pad or a member
    provided with liquid retaining pockets, grooves or the like.


CLS 55/232
TXT Apparatus under subclass 231 in which there are means for moving the liquid
    discharging or applying means or some part thereof between a submerged
    position in a liquid bath and a position for contact by the system fluid.


CLS 55/233
TXT Apparatus under subclass 220 having means to apply liquid to a member
    comprised of (1) a plurality of discrete solids or (2) wick-like or fibrous
    massed material, said member providing interstices and thereby surface
    extending paths for liquid contact of the system fluid passing therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240+,   for baffle members of corrugated, ribbed or projecting form over
    which liquid flows for contact with gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 210+ for processes of gas
    separation involving liquid contact on a surface extending mass.


CLS 55/234
TXT Apparatus under subclass 233 in which the member has one of its extremities
    submerged in a liquid supply tank or reservoir.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230+,   for movable sorbent members which may extend into a liquid
    reservoir.


CLS 55/235
TXT Apparatus under subclass 220 comprising a chamber or static flow guide
    means designed to cause the system fluid to spin about an axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    447+,   for fixed gas whirler or rotator means, per se.


CLS 55/236
TXT Apparatus under subclass 235 having means defining system fluid flow paths
    arranged so that one path flows about or surrounds a center or inner axial
    path and having means to distribute liquid in the centermost of the paths.


CLS 55/237
TXT Apparatus under subclass 235 having liquid distributing means arranged
    coincident with or upstream of the whirler or rotator means.


CLS 55/238
TXT Apparatus under subclass 237 comprising means projecting, sprinkling or
    distributing the liquid in drop, mist or sheet form.


CLS 55/239
TXT Apparatus under subclass 235 having a bath of treating liquid and system
    fluid flow conducting means arranged to direct the system fluid to the
    region of the bath to make contact therewith, to thereby generally reverse
    the direction of system fluid flow.


CLS 55/240
TXT Apparatus under subclass 220 in which the system fluid is impinged against
    or passed through a moving liquid mass or cascade as distinguished from
    spray drops or mist, said mass being extremely thin in relation to its
    length and breadth, said mass being caused to flow by means other than
    system fluid contact or disturbance of a liquid supply bath or reservoir.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the patents classified under this definition are
    article coating spray booth subcombinations in which foreign material
    removal (e.g. paint) from the gasiform or air environment is the subject
    matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 326 for projection or spray type
    coating apparatus having hoods or offtakes for waste material.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 49+ for ventilating hoods and offtakes for
    gas or fume removal from a building or inclosure.


CLS 55/241
TXT Apparatus under subclass 240 in which the system fluid is impinged against
    a liquid as the liquid is flowing across and in contact with an impermeable
    surface.


CLS 55/242
TXT Apparatus under subclass 220 comprising means to apply a cleaning liquid to
    the separating media as by sprinkling, projecting, washing down or
    submerging in a bath.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282+,   for cleaning a separating media with a nonliquid.

    431,    for contacting an apparatus part with a fluid for cleaning thereof
    by affecting the discharge of the residue.

    466,    for treating the residue by a liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclass 281 for processes of gas
    separation with cleaning of a filter by use of a liquid.


CLS 55/243
TXT Apparatus under subclass 242 wherein the means for cleaning an apparatus
    part comprises a means for dipping or submerging such part in a bath.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232,    for gas contacting distributor wetted by immersion and wherein the
    distributor retains liquid for gas cleaning contact.


CLS 55/244
TXT Apparatus under subclass 220 having a reservoir of treating liquid and a
    system fluid flow conducting means whereby the system fluid is brought into
    contact with said liquid.


CLS 55/245
TXT Apparatus under subclass 244 having (1) a gas escape means so arranged as
    to prevent system fluid blow back in the direction of the reservoir or (2)
    a supplemental liquid chamber or a liquid directing or retaining means to
    accept or channel liquid displaced from the reservoir by blow back.


CLS 55/246
TXT Apparatus under subclass 244 having means for maintaining the liquid at or
    near the surface of the bath in a relatively quiescent state or having
    means which prevents the liquid of the bath from escaping during other than
    normal attitudes of the apparatus.


CLS 55/247
TXT Apparatus under subclass 244 having means retained or mounted for movement
    in the reservoir, the movement of which increases the contact relationship
    of the system with the liquid in said reservoir.


CLS 55/248
TXT Apparatus under subclass 244 having a gas separating media of non-liquid
    form arranged vertically above the reservoir in the normal use attitude.

    (1)     Note.  To come under this definition, the separator (1) must be
    vertically spaced above the liquid bath so that a vertical plane passes
    through at least a portion of the bath and at least a portion of the
    separator, or (2) may be above but laterally offset from a vertical plane
    passing through the liquid bath but positioned so that any drain therefrom
    is confined only by the gas flow path walls and must be discharged to the
    liquid bath.


CLS 55/249
TXT Apparatus under subclass 248 having system fluid conducting means arranged
    to cause distortion of the surface of the bath into a jet-like spray or a
    lifting up of the surface of the bath.


CLS 55/250
TXT Apparatus under subclass 248 wherein the separating media is of the filter
    type (i.e. solids or vapor removal is effected by blockage or coalescence
    by fine openings or interstices).


CLS 55/251
TXT Apparatus under subclass 250 having a system fluid flow directing or
    blocking means adjacent the upstream face of the media to thereby restrict
    or limit the area of said media face exposed to the system fluid flow.

    (1)     Note.  The usual purpose of this feature is to provide a liquid
    return path through the filter out of contact with the gas passing
    therethrough.


CLS 55/252
TXT Apparatus under subclass 250 in which the media is of annular configuration
    and is coaxial with a gas passage at its center.


CLS 55/253
TXT Apparatus under subclass 252 comprising a removable liquid retaining
    receptacle situated for gravity flow of the liquid from the filter medium
    to the said receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  Patents showing separable sump means for air bath type
    cleaners should be cross referenced to this subclass whether or not the
    patent shows a superposed filter surrounding a gas flow path.


CLS 55/254
TXT Apparatus under subclass 252 having means to prevent or discourage the
    egress of liquid from the media by gas flow action or capillarity, usually
    at the downstream boundary of said media.


CLS 55/255
TXT Apparatus under subclass 250 having an inlet conductor for the system fluid
    which extends below the surface of the liquid to effect subsurface contact
    of the system fluid and liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256,    for a submerged inlet to a liquid bath, the apparatus not having a
    superposed filter.


CLS 55/256
TXT Apparatus under subclass 244 having an inlet conductor for the system fluid
    which extends below the surface of the liquid to effect subsurface contact
    of the system fluid and liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255,    for a submerged inlet to a liquid bath and a superposed filter.


CLS 55/257.1
TXT Gas separating means downstream of contacting means:

    Apparatus under subclass 220 having nonliquid means to separate
    constituents from the system fluid located beyond the liquid contacting
    means in the direction of flow.


CLS 55/257.2
TXT Parallel vanes:

    Apparatus under subclass 257.1 in which the nonliquid means comprises at
    least two plates between which the gas flows in a tortuous or sinuous path,
    said plates being bent, deformed or provided with projections,and arranged
    relatively one to the other so that a bend, deformation or projection of
    one plate is spaced from the corresponding bend, etc. of the other, so as
    to provide substantially constant area for the gas flow.


CLS 55/257.3
TXT Overlapping vanes:

    Apparatus under subclass 257.1 in which the nonliquid means comprises a
    plurality of surface means which effects an abrupt change in direction of
    the system fluid gas flow or guides said gas flow to cause the heavier
    constituents thereof to dropout and remain behind, while the lighter
    constituents (e.g., clean gas) flow on, at least a portion of each surface
    means being superposed with respect to the next adjacent in the direction
    of gas flow.


CLS 55/257.4
TXT Centrifugal:

    Apparatus under subclass under 257.1 in which the nonliquid means comprises
    a nonstatic member designed to cause the system fluid to rotate or spin
    around an axis.


CLS 55/257.5
TXT Impact plate:

    Apparatus under subclass 257.1 in which the nonliquid means comprises a
    surface the flow path of the system fluid to be impinged upon by the fluid
    for redirecting or altering the flow path for separation of nongaseous
    constituents therefrom.


CLS 55/257.6
TXT Perforated plate:

    Apparatus under subclass 257.1 in which the nonliquid means comprises a
    plate having at least one opening and being positioned transverse to the
    flow path of the system fluid.


CLS 55/257.7
TXT Heat exchange:

    Apparatus under subclass 257 in which the nonliquid means comprises a means
    for cooling the temperature of the system fluid to condense and separate.


CLS 55/258
TXT Apparatus under subclass 257 having a non- liquid separating means arranged
    upstream of the liquid contacting means.


CLS 55/259
TXT Apparatus under subclass 257 in which the nonliquid means for separating
    the system fluid is of the filter type (i.e. foraminated plates or closely
    or intimately arranged elements or members which collectively act as a
    barrier to physically hold back or retain at least one constituent of a
    mixture while permitting passage of the remainder).


CLS 55/260
TXT Apparatus under subclass 220 having system fluid separating means arranged
    upstream of the liquid contact means, said separating means comprising a
    surface means which effects an abrupt change in direction of the system
    fluid gas flow, or guides said gas flow, to cause the heavier constituents
    thereof to drop out while the lighter constituent (e.g. clean gas) flows on.


CLS 55/261
TXT Apparatus under class definition providing in-flow means for a nonliquid
    material other than the system fluid, said material commingling with and
    effecting a change of said system fluid, but not including inflow of
    ambient air for purposes of pressure relief or addition of air for mere
    flow induction of system fluid.

    (1)     Note.  Steam used for the purpose of induction flow of system fluid
    is regarded as a nonliquid material under this definition.

    (2)     Note.  If treated fluid is discharged into an enclosure (e.g. room)
    and then a portion thereof enters the apparatus through a recirculation
    inlet to be mixed with fluid entering through the normal inlet, the portion
    is considered as a nonliquid material other than system fluid under this
    definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    309+,   for apparatus in which the system fluid is relieved to or from the
    same source.

    468,    for gas flow effecting means comprised of jet or flow induction
    means.


CLS 55/262
TXT Apparatus under subclass 261 in which a solid, or a gas derived from a
    normally solid source, is the material introduced into the system fluid.

    (1)     Note.  A normal solid is one which at ordinary temperatures and
    pressures is in the solid state.  Solid carbon dioxide and other solidified
    normally gaseous or liquid materials do not qualify under this definition.


CLS 55/263
TXT Apparatus under subclass 261 comprising steam as the material.


CLS 55/264
TXT Apparatus under subclass 261 provided with a discharge port for liquids or
    solids formed by temperature reduction resulting from the mixing of the
    system fluid and the material.


CLS 55/265
TXT Apparatus under subclass 261 in which the in-flow means is positioned to
    add the material to the system fluid after the system fluid has been
    separated at least in one stage.


CLS 55/266
TXT Apparatus under subclass 261 in which the material is a gas and may enter
    through the inflow for the system fluid or through a distinct inflow path,
    and in which (1) there is a single flow controller located in the common
    inflow line to regulate the proportion or mixture of the diverse gases or
    (2) controllers individual to each inflow path are provided for the
    regulation.


CLS 55/267
TXT Apparatus under the class definition provided with means for affecting the
    temperature of the system fluid, or to prevent heat exchange between the
    system fluid and the surrounding atmosphere.

    (1)     Note. A circuitous gas conduit, otherwise unmodified, exposed to
    ambient atmosphere is not proper subject matter under this definition.

    (2)     Note. Included are insulating jackets, refractory materials or
    surfaces, heat radiating or cooling fins or coils and heat dissipating
    rods, for example, as well as indirect contact of diverse fluids.


CLS 55/268
TXT Apparatus under subclass 267 provided with a conduit or flow conductor for
    passing a nonsystem fluid relative to but not in direct contact with at
    least a portion of a bounded system fluid stream to effect heat exchange
    therebetween, said nonsystem fluid being separate and distinct from the
    system fluid.

    (1)     Note.  The system fluid may be passed via a conduit through a
    confined non- system fluid for heat exchange purposes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222,    for similar heat exchange devices, including means to bring a
    liquid into contact with the system fluid or the separating media.


CLS 55/269
TXT Apparatus under subclass 268 in which the nonsystem fluid conduit or
    conductor is structurally associated with the confined system fluid stream
    at or proximate the locus of separation so that the temperature of the
    system fluid is affected at the separator.


CLS 55/270
TXT Apparatus under class definition having (1) means to indicate or
    predetermine the rate or amount of system fluid flow passing through the
    apparatus, (2) means to remove a portion of constituent material from the
    system fluid for purposes of analysis, or (3) means to determine some
    physical characteristic (e.g. weight, temperature) of the system fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 863 for a sampler, per se; and
    subclass 200 for liquid flow meters combined with liquid and gas separating
    means whereby gases entrained in a liquid to be metered may be separated
    therefrom before the liquid enters the meter and see the class definition
    of Class 55 for a statement of the line with Class 73 regarding feed back.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 1+ for processes of gas
    separation with control responsive to sensed condition.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 72 for dispensers having volume or rate of
    flow metering combined with gas separating means.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 138 for temperature
    measurement of a fluid stream with a flow deflector to eliminate undesired
    boundary effects.


CLS 55/271
TXT Apparatus under class definition having horological means or selectively
    changeable cyclical control means for (1) limiting the duration of
    operation or (2) determining the interval or period between operations of
    the apparatus or some part thereof.


CLS 55/272
TXT Apparatus under subclass 271 in which the period or cycle is for the
    control of or is related to the mechanism which removes constituent
    material or residue from the separating media.


CLS 55/273
TXT Apparatus under subclass 272 having two or more separating members or
    elements from which residue or separated constituents is removed one after
    another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284,    for sequential cleaning of plural separating media according to a
    fixed mode of operation of the machine.


CLS 55/274
TXT Apparatus under class definition having information giving means of an
    audible or visual nature (other than fixed exhibitors e.g. signs) which
    give information about or permit viewing of a condition of the apparatus or
    extent of motion or movement of some apparatus part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+ for electrical
    automatic condition responsive indicating systems.


CLS 55/275
TXT Apparatus under subclass 274 in which the information is caused to be given
    by a chemical or electrical change depending on the presence or absence of
    water or water vapor.


CLS 55/276
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means other than mere flow
    channels or conducting means for the system fluid for silencing the flow of
    said fluid through the apparatus as by sound traps or barriers, or as by
    fabricating surfaces of the separator from material having sound absorbing
    properties.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclass 231 for sound attenuating devices.


CLS 55/277
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means for producing
    compressional vibratory wave energy in a fluid medium to effect or enhance
    separation, said waves being below, within, or beyond the audible spectrum.

    (1)     Note.  Pressure pulses in a fluid generated merely by intermittent
    discharge of a gas are not considered to be compressional vibratory waves
    under this definition.  However, compressional vibratory waves under this
    definition may be produced by intermittent discharge of a gas, as in a
    siren.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    292,    for devices utilizing sonic waves for cleaning separating media.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 29+ for processes of gas
    separation in which sound waves are used.


CLS 55/278
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having (1) material separating flow
    passages resulting from closely spaced parallel or concentrically arranged
    members along the faces of which system fluid is constrained to pass
    without reliance upon change of direction for separation but which provide
    either (a) a screen or grid-like pattern at the inflow end of the
    arrangement or (b) surfaces on which constituent material may settle or
    drop; or (2) surface member(s) with somewhat exaggerated nap-like or
    pile-like covering along which the system fluid moves such that in effect
    the constituent material is swept out of the fluid stream.

    (1)     Note.  The shelf-like member must have sufficient space above it
    for movement of system fluid so that not all of the fluid is constrained to
    pass through the interstices formed by the nap or pile.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    440,    for parallel nonplanar plates which cause gas to flow in a tortuous
    or sinuous path for separation.

    477,    for filter media of strand or bristle type, having unsupported or
    free extremities, through which gas passes.


CLS 55/279
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means acting to render the
    apparatus parts or constituent materials passing through or being delivered
    from the apparatus in a sterile condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclass 16 for electric field
    separation apparatus including an ultraviolet light ionizer.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, appropriate subclasses for similar devices, and
    see the class definition of Class 55 for a statement of the line.


CLS 55/280
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means to catch or otherwise
    dispose of material, exclusive of concentrate or residue, per se, separated
    from the system fluid, said material dripping, leaking, or otherwise being
    lost through other than the discharge outlets especially provided for the
    constituents of the system fluid.

    (1)     Note.  A deliquescent or hygroscopic material in solution (e.g.
    dissolved in liquid concentrate) is not considered as concentrate and may
    be classified herein.

    (2)     Note.  The drip could be a treating liquid escaping through a seal,
    or a viscous material running off or escaping to the exterior of the
    apparatus, but not to a reservoir or sump specifically provided for
    redistributing said liquid or material.


CLS 55/282
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means (1) to apply a nonliquid
    cleaning agent (gas or solid) to a separator part, (2) to remove separated
    constituents adhering to the surfaces or from within the interstices of the
    separating media, or (3) to prevent (in as far as possible) accumulation of
    constituents on the separating surfaces by some active means or through the
    use of materials having special characteristics or properties for such
    purpose.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242+,   for cleaning or flushing of a separating part by the use of a
    liquid.

    272+,   for means timing or programming the cleaning mechanism of a
    separating media.


CLS 55/283
TXT Apparatus under subclass 282 comprising a means to sense a condition which
    may or may not occur, or a lack of such condition, or the result of such
    condition, the sensing means causing or permitting operation of a separate
    means for controlling said cleaning agent applying means, said constituent
    removing means or said accumulation preventing means, without the
    intervention of a human attendant.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an automatic means under this definition is a
    device in which a diaphragm, responding to a differential pressure across
    the media, an increased pressure upstream of the media or a decreased
    pressure downstream of the media, moves a stem attached to the diaphragm to
    open a valve for applying a cleaning agent to the media.

    An example of means which is not automatic control under this definition is
    a motor or clock driven cam which controls the valve for applying a
    cleaning agent at predetermined times or revolutions.


CLS 55/284
TXT Apparatus under subclass 282 having two or more substantially independently
    functioning separating media and further including means whereby the media
    are serially refurbished in some predetermined order defined by the law of
    the machine.

    (1)     Note. For this and the indented subclasses the qualification of
    independent separating media is considered met by apparatus in which a
    running length of separating material has been supported or maintained in a
    manner to form from such length a plurality of separate and distinct media
    simultaneously used for separation, i.e. some portions at the region of
    support thereof blocked from gas separating operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273,    for sequential cleaning of separating media under control of a
    timer or selectively changeable programming means.


CLS 55/285
TXT Apparatus under subclass 284 in which the separating media are arranged
    about a horizontal axis and form a type of circular cylinder or wheel and
    spoke-like arrangement with the said entities at the periphery or rim.


CLS 55/286
TXT Apparatus under subclass 284 having means to prevent flow of system fluid
    through selected ones of the media.


CLS 55/287
TXT Apparatus under subclass 286 in which the operation of the flow preventing
    means is controlled simultaneously with or by the refurbishing mechanism or
    the control therefor.


CLS 55/288
TXT Apparatus under subclass 282 wherein cleaning of the separating media is
    dependent on and occurs as a direct result of the actuation or operation of
    (1) means (e.g. valve) for completely preventing the flow of system fluid
    to the separating media or (2) means (e.g. on-off gas flow switch) for
    completely closing down the separating operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286+,   for devices for sequentially cleaning a plurality of separating
    media combined with means for preventing the flow of gas undergoing
    separation from reaching the media which is being cleaned.


CLS 55/289
TXT Apparatus under subclass 282 comprising a multiple tined member peculiarly
    adapted to enter spaced interstices, openings or parallel bars or wires of
    the media to remove accumulated solids either by a motion generally at
    right angles to the plane of said media or longitudinally of the elements
    thereof.


CLS 55/290
TXT Apparatus under subclass 282 comprising means for refurbishing media of the
    endless type (e.g. of cylindrical form) or media which is handled and
    supported without regard to a leading or trailing edge or end, said media
    being in motion during use for its separating function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    351+,   for similar separating media.


CLS 55/291
TXT Apparatus under subclass 282 involving the use of two or more cleaning
    agent applying, constituent removing or accumulation preventing means of
    different types (e.g. pneumatic nozzle and vibrating means).


CLS 55/292
TXT Apparatus under subclass 282 having means for producing compressional
    vibratory wave energy in a fluid medium in relation to or associated with
    the separating media to cause adhered constituents to be removed from the
    separating media, said waves being below, within or beyond the audible
    spectrum.

    (1)     Note.  Pressure pulses in a fluid generated merely by intermittent
    discharge of a gas are not considered to be compressional vibratory waves
    under this definition.  However, compressional vibratory waves under this
    definition may be produced by intermittent discharge of a gas, as in a
    siren.  Devices in which cleaning of the separating media is effected by
    pressure pulses of a gas will be found in subclasses 293 and 301+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277,    for devices utilizing sonic waves to effect or enhance separation.


CLS 55/293
TXT Apparatus under subclass 282 comprising means to effect motion of small
    amplitude and relative high frequency of the media by contact of gasiform
    fluid therewith to effect the cleaning thereof.


CLS 55/294
TXT Apparatus under subclass 282 comprising a gasiform fluid discharging means
    directed against or along the media and being supported for motion relative
    to said media to dislodge accumulated constituent material.


CLS 55/295
TXT Apparatus under subclass 282 in which a nonfluid agent (e.g., brush,
    rapper, scraper blade) moves relative to the apparatus to effect a physical
    contact therebetween or to advance across a surface thereof.


CLS 55/296
TXT Apparatus under subclass 295 comprising an agent which has a prescribed
    relative movement across, and in contact with, at least a portion of a
    surface of a separating media.


CLS 55/297
TXT Apparatus under subclass 296 in which the operation of the agent to
    traverse the media is integrated with the separating apparatus operation
    such that the two operations function simultaneously.


CLS 55/298
TXT Apparatus under subclass 297 in which the agent is caused to move as a
    result of the flow of system fluid through the apparatus.


CLS 55/299
TXT Apparatus under subclass 296 wherein the media is of nonrigid form and is
    flexed or deformed by contact of the agent therewith.


CLS 55/300
TXT Apparatus under subclass 295 in which either the separating surface or some
    portion of the apparatus is struck by the agent with relatively sharp and
    repeated blows to shake the separating media.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 32+ for electric field
    separation apparatus having vibrating, jarring, or rapping means for
    cleaning parts of the apparatus.


CLS 55/301
TXT Apparatus under subclass 282 for renovating or refurbishing a coherent
    sheet or mass type filter media.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282,    for means for cleaning discrete fibrous or particulate material
    filter media.

    351,    for continuous type filters with means for advancing or replacing
    the used filter with a new or cleaned portion thereof.


CLS 55/302
TXT Apparatus under subclass 301 in which a gasiform fluid is brought into
    contact with the media in a direction opposed to system fluid flow during
    separation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    294,    for pneumatic scanning nozzles.


CLS 55/303
TXT Apparatus under subclass 302 in which the gasiform fluid is bled or taken
    at one face (upstream or downstream) of the media and directed to the other.


CLS 55/304
TXT Apparatus under subclass 301 comprising means effecting or enabling filter
    motion or a relative movement among portions thereof whereby accumulations
    are removed or prevented.


CLS 55/305
TXT Apparatus under subclass 304 wherein the means is arranged for actuation by
    a human being (e.g. by hand).


CLS 55/306
TXT Apparatus under the class definition associated with an aircraft and
    related to the air intake means of the power plant (e.g., ram jet engine)
    of said aircraft to prevent the inflow of ground or air borne objects or
    creatures to the said power plant by screen or deflector like means.

    (1)     Note. Gratings, grids, grilles and foraminous members structurally
    similar to the devices of this subclass are classifiable in many other
    classes as partially indicated under Search Class as follows.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 238+ for
    scrapers comprising wire or pivoted link mats.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 633+ for an
    openwork-structure not elsewhere provided for and see the notes for other
    classes having openwork structures.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 227+ for screens or other filters disclosed for
    separating solids from the earth fluid flowing into a well conduit.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 127.1+ and
    265.11+ for a reaction motor discharge nozzle which may have a screen or
    deflector associated with the fluid inlet.

    244,    Aeronautics, appropriate subclasses for similar means involving
    modified aircraft structure.

    245,    Wire Fabrics and Structure, subclasses 2+ for screens or grids
    comprising wires looped or twisted around each other.

    256,    Fences, various subclasses for similar devices.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 131+ for a
    single or plural layer stock material product in the form of a web or sheet
    including an apertured component.

    454,    Ventilation, appropriate subclasses for gratings, louvers, or
    screens associated with chimneys, ventilation air inlets, or registers.


CLS 55/307
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a separator means
    positioned at least in part within a confined system fluid path, there
    being an unobstructed space between it and the side wall of the flow path
    as supported therein and being further comprised of a member or material
    having (1) multiple openings, pores or passages (2) massed discrete filter
    particles, or (3) a single opening therethrough.

    (1)     Note.  A unit is any member or assemblage of members adapted to be
    handled as a subassembly when being associated with a conduit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    309,    for open separator bypass means provided by discontinuous separator
    members placed at the terminus of the flow line or there beyond and not
    relying upon valves or other movable flow controlling means.

    422,    for movably mounted or supported media adjustable to various
    positions of use or to nonuse.

    445+,   for members which are either perforated and coextensive with the
    flow path wall or solid and spaced from the wall, so that the mixture has
    only one path to follow, either around or through the member.


CLS 55/308
TXT Apparatus under subclass 307 comprising at least two of said separator
    means which are substantially identical and are spaced within the confined
    flow path in the direction of gas flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    442+,   for serially spaced deflector surfaces.

    482+,   for serially spaced filter members.


CLS 55/309
TXT Apparatus under the class definition provided with means (1) to permit
    total flow of the system fluid directed through the apparatus to avoid the
    separating means, or at least one stage of serially arranged separating
    means, (2) to admit ambient air to the apparatus through other than the
    normal inflow path of fluid to be separated, or (3) to permit discharge or
    escape of system fluid to the ambient air through other than the normal gas
    effluent path.

    (1)     Note.  Pressure relief is not a matter of mere multiple discharge
    paths or inlet paths, but some modified arrangement for flow which responds
    to excessive or back pressures.

    (2)     Note.  A bypass means under this definition does not include a mere
    movably or removably mounted separator means, but does include a separating
    means which, in response to certain gas pressure or flow characteristics,
    is moved out of its normal use position to provide for a bypass therearound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261+,   for inlet means from diverse fluid or solid source for gas
    treatment.


CLS 55/310
TXT Apparatus under subclass 309 having means responsive to super or
    sub-atmospheric pressures within the apparatus either to discharge system
    fluid therefrom to the surrounding atmosphere or to permit inflow of air
    from the surrounding atmosphere through other than the normal system fluid
    inlet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213,    for system fluid control means having a separate reactor surface
    responsive to the gas pressure.


CLS 55/311
TXT Apparatus under subclass 310 in which the means is physically situated
    below the separating means in the path of travel of the system fluid.


CLS 55/312
TXT Apparatus under subclass 309 having valve means to permit flow of system
    fluid around a separating means to thereby avoid the separating function of
    at least that one separating means.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass are collected patents having an auxiliary
    inlet which is downstream of the separator and which is hand controlled.

    (2)     Note.  Flow control of gas for separators in parallel either as
    distinct units or as separator parts of a single unit is not subject matter
    for these subclasses.


CLS 55/313
TXT Apparatus under subclass 312 in which the means permitting flow around or
    by the separating means is responsive to a force exerted thereon by the
    system fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213,    for system fluid diversion means having a separate reactor surface
    responsive to gas pressure.


CLS 55/314
TXT Apparatus under subclass 312 having flow conducting means between the
    apparatus inlet and outlet permitting all of the inflowing system fluid to
    pass to the egress means without flowing through the separating means or at
    least one stage thereof if serially arranged distinct separators are
    included.


CLS 55/315
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having two or more discrete separators
    arranged one downstream of the other, at least two of the separators being
    of differing basic types.

    (1)     Note.  Basic types of separators here included are, for example;
    expansion chambers, deflectors (fixed baffles, whirl chambers and moving
    members), filters (screens, porous mass or pad, cohesive sheet material),
    sorbers and the like.

    (2)     Note.  The patents in these subclasses usually comprise separate
    and distinct diverse separating members.  However, in subclass 335 indented
    hereunder will be found integral or connected deflectors and filters,
    usually a conical screen with an upstream deflector surface for the gas to
    first impinge upon and be deflected by the surface and then be screened or
    filtered through the foraminous member.

    (3)     Note.  Concentrate collection receptacles or retainers provided
    with gas escape means and which serve to permit concentrate to be in part
    air borne to the said receptacle and therefore act as a secondary separator
    are not considered as separators for classification with serially arranged
    diverse separators under this definition, but as proper subject matter for
    subclass 428.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    342+,   for serially arranged multiple similar separators.


CLS 55/317
TXT Apparatus under subclass 315 comprising at least one separator arranged for
    continuous movement relative to a fixed point or support and effecting
    separation of a gas mixture while so moving.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400+,   for a separator comprising a continuously moving member, but not in
    combination with a separator of a diverse type.


CLS 55/318
TXT Apparatus under subclass 315 comprising separators of different basic types
    arranged in a single housing or flow confining means.


CLS 55/319
TXT Apparatus under subclass 318 comprising an enlarged section of the flow
    line, the enlarged section being disclosed for retarding the velocity of
    the gas mixture and allowing the heavier constituents to settle out
    therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition, search class notes, Classes 137
    and 261, for placement of patents comprising expansion chambers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 171+ for fluid separating traps or vents
    including the expansion chamber type and see (1) Note above.


CLS 55/320
TXT Apparatus under subclass 318 including an impingement or flow redirecting
    separator means together with a separator means of the type which retains
    thereon or prevents passage therethrough of nongaseous particles, the
    latter being comprised of massed entangled individual strands, massed
    individual discrete elements, numerous unentangled discrete strands (brush
    type) or coherent sheet porous or foraminous material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    318,    for similar combinations wherein the filter comprises a solid,
    rigid, porous member (e.g. sintered or ceramic).


CLS 55/321
TXT Apparatus under subclass 320 comprising three or more separators, at least
    two of which are of the same basic type, and at least one of a different
    basic type, the separators of the same basic type being spaced either
    transverse across, or serially along the flow line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    342+,   for multiple similar separators in series or parallel, but with the
    discrete flow inlet and outlet paths as defined therein.

    442+,   for plural impingement or flow redirecting surfaces serially spaced.

    482+,   for two or more filters of the same type arranged in series or in
    parallel.


CLS 55/322
TXT Apparatus under subclass 321 in which one of the multiple similar or same
    basic type separators is positioned upstream and another downstream of one
    or more of a different type separator.


CLS 55/323
TXT Apparatus under subclass 321 in which the multiple, similar separators are
    of the type which retain thereon or prevent passage therethrough of
    nongaseous particles.


CLS 55/324
TXT Apparatus under subclass 323 in which the separators are spaced
    transversely across the flow line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    483     and 484, for multiple filters arranged in parallel, but not
    combined with a diverse separating member.


CLS 55/325
TXT Apparatus under subclass 321 in which the multiple similar separators are
    of the flow impingement or redirecting type and are spaced along the flow
    path in the direction of gas flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    442+,   for redirecting or impingement surfaces spaced serially in a flow
    path.


CLS 55/326
TXT Apparatus under subclass 325 in which at least one of the flow redirecting
    or impingement means is provided with a basin, box, gutter or other similar
    member having a closed bottom and open top for receiving and retaining or
    guiding the separated heavier constituent.


CLS 55/327
TXT Apparatus under subclass 320 in which the member first contacted with the
    fluid mixture in the housing or flow confining means is of the type which
    retains thereon or prevents passage therethrough of nongaseous particles.


CLS 55/328
TXT Apparatus under subclass 320 in which any one of the diverse separating
    members is supported for motion to various positions to or from a position
    wherein the member does not affect the fluid mixture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    422,    for a filter or deflection separator, per se, supported as herein
    described.


CLS 55/329
TXT Apparatus under subclass 320 in which the means other than the impingement
    or flow redirecting means comprises a mass of entangled strands or numerous
    unentangled discrete strands.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    477,    for brush type filters.

    512+    and 527+, for entangled fibrous or    strand mass type filters.


CLS 55/330
TXT Apparatus under subclass 329 in which the means is hollow and arranged
    within the flow line so that the system fluid flow is toward or away from
    the central axis.


CLS 55/331
TXT Apparatus under subclass 320 in which the impingement or flow redirecting
    means comprises a member which increases in diameter in the direction of
    gas flow and at its maximum diameter is provided with an arched or curved
    element extending outwardly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    463,    for a similar impingement surface, per se.


CLS 55/332
TXT Apparatus under subclass 320 in which the means other than the impingement
    or flow redirecting means comprises a coherent sheet of porous or apertured
    material (e.g. paper, woven wire or fabric).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    495+    and 522+, for coherent sheet material filters.


CLS 55/333
TXT Apparatus under subclass 332 in which the means comprises two or more
    layers each in contact with the next adjacent and either stacked or wound
    upon the other so as to form a tubular member and so arranged in the flow
    line that the system fluid flow is toward or away from the tube axis.


CLS 55/334
TXT Apparatus under subclass 332 in which the coherent sheet means comprises
    one closed and one open end defined by a side wall to encompass a space,
    the system fluid flow being into or out of the space through the porous or
    apertured material.

    (1)     Note.  The bag filter need not be capable of being flexed or
    distorted while in use position as required for the bag filters provided
    for in subclass 361 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    341     and 361+, for other bag type separators and see (1) Note above.


CLS 55/335
TXT Apparatus under subclass 334 in which the coherent sheet encompassing the
    space has included therewith, in use position, an impingement or
    redirecting surface so fixed or associated with the sheet as to be
    contacted by the system fluid prior to said fluid coming in contact with
    the sheet.

    (1)     Note.  These filtering and deflecting elements may be integral, one
    with the other.  See (2) Note under subclass 315.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    368,    for flexible or collapsible bag type separators having a spaced
    interior inflow path or with means modifying air flow in the bag usually to
    define a trap or collecting chamber for the separated constituent rather
    than to effectuate the separation of a constituent from the gas stream.


CLS 55/336
TXT Apparatus under subclass 332 in which the coherent sheet like filter means
    tapers towards or from a point.

    (1)     Note.  There need not be an apex for the cone.  The material may be
    in the form of a frusto cone.


CLS 55/337
TXT Apparatus under subclass 332 in which the impingement or flow redirecting
    means causes the system fluid to assume a spinning or turning motion around
    an axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    345+    and 447+, for other apparatus in which separation is caused by the
    gas rotating around an axis.


CLS 55/338
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means to direct system fluid
    which has passed through a stage of separation back through or
    substantially through the inlet to the apparatus or back through a distinct
    stage of serially arranged separators.

    (1)     Note.  Redirecting system fluid substantially back to the inlet is
    meant to include both internal and external arrangements of flow means
    wherein the redirected fluid enters upstream of the first apparatus part
    which influences the separating action.

    (2)     Note.  Recycle apparatus may never lose control of the system
    fluid; e.g., effluent may not be discharged to the atmosphere and then
    sucked back again.

    (3)     Note.  For these subclasses system fluid may be the partially or
    totally cleansed effluent, or may be the gas which has escaped to the
    concentrate or residue chamber.


CLS 55/339
TXT Apparatus under subclass 338 in which the fluid returned to the inlet for
    recycle is derived from or bled off the effluent making its way through the
    apparatus cleansed gas outlet means.

    (1)     Note.  Effluent refers to fluid which has been through a stage of
    separation and is regarded as at least partially voided of the nongaseous
    constituent and is departing the system.


CLS 55/340
TXT Apparatus under subclass 339 in which the return path for the effluent
    comprises a conductor arranged exteriorly of the rest of the separator
    apparatus.


CLS 55/341.1
TXT MULTIPLE BAG TYPE FILTERS IN CHAMBER:

    Apparatus under the class definition having a plurality of bag type filters
    (with fluid flow ingress or egress means) located within a chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    361+,   for flexible or collapsible bags.


CLS 55/341.2
TXT Gas flow from inside to outside of filter:

    Apparatus under subclass 341.1 in which the direction of gas flow is from
    inside to outside of the bag type filters.


CLS 55/341.3
TXT Modular compartments:

    Apparatus under subclass 341.2 in which the chamber includes means which
    divide the chamber into a plurality of compartments in such a manner that
    each compartment has a wall common to an adjacent compartment and
    communication between adjacent compartments is inhibited.


CLS 55/341.4
TXT Horizontally mounted filters:

    Apparatus under subclass 341.2 in which the bag type filters are
    horizontally disposed.


CLS 55/341.5
TXT Modular compartments:

    Apparatus under subclass 341.1 in which the chamber includes means which
    divide the chamber into a plurality of compartments in such a manner that
    each compartment has a wall common to an adjacent compartment and
    communication between adjacent compartments is inhibited.


CLS 55/341.6
TXT Partitioned bag filter chamber:

    Apparatus under subclass 341.1 in which the chamber includes a partition
    means which divides the chamber into a plurality of compartments, all of
    the compartments formed by the partition means being in open communication
    with one another.


CLS 55/341.7
TXT Horizontally mounted filters:

    Apparatus under subclass 341.1 in which the bag type filters are
    horizontally disposed.


CLS 55/342
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a plurality of separating
    devices each having a separate and individual system fluid inlet or outlet
    conduit of extended length.

    (1)     Note.  Concentrate collection receptacles provided with gas escape
    means and which serve to permit concentrate to be in part air borne to the
    said receptacle and therefore may act as a secondary separator are not
    considered as separators for classification with a similar serially
    arranged separator under this definition, but as proper subject matter for
    subclasses 428+.

    (2)     Note.  Cyclone or centrifugal whirl separators in parallel are
    classified under this definition and will be found in subclasses 346+
    regardless of the length of the inlet or outlet conduit. Separating devices
    which have whirl producing stages in series, or other separators in series
    or parallel must each have a gas inlet or outlet conduit of length
    sufficient to be readily identifiable in order to come under this
    definition.  A device in which only the casing wall forms the flow path for
    a plurality of separators is excluded and will be found in subclasses 442+
    or 482+, unless the casing wall between series related separating devices
    is modified to form a flow path portion of different area than the
    preceding or following portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315+,   for serial arrangements of cyclone and other types of separating
    devices.

    428+,   for residue handling means and see (1) Note under subclass 428.


CLS 55/343
TXT Apparatus under subclass 342 comprising more than one separating device
    each arranged in or forming a branch of a divided fluid flow conduit to
    thereby treat a portion of the divided fluid, and not the total flow,
    preceded or followed by another separating device which treats the total
    flow of fluid passing to or from at least one of the branched separators.


CLS 55/344
TXT Apparatus under subclass 342 comprising means which modifies, varies or
    regulates the fluid flow to, from or among the separating devices, or
    permits the portion of the fluid passing through one separator to be
    substantially equal to that passing through any other separator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    410+    and 418+, especially 413, for other devices in which there is
    control of the gas to or from the separator.


CLS 55/345
TXT Apparatus under subclass 342 comprising a plurality of separating devices,
    each of which have means to spin or rotate the system fluid.


CLS 55/346
TXT Apparatus under subclass 345 in which each separating device is arranged
    in, or forms a branch of a divided fluid flow conduit to thereby treat a
    portion of the divided fluid, and not the total flow.


CLS 55/347
TXT Apparatus under subclass 346 in which the system fluid after being
    separated moves in a direction away from the inlet, i.e., is not reversed
    back towards the inlet, and the axes of the system fluid inlet and outlet
    of each separating device lie substantially in the same plane.


CLS 55/348
TXT Apparatus under subclass 346 in which each separating device has the system
    fluid discharged thereinto through (1) more than one inlet, each such inlet
    arranged to cause the incoming system fluid to spin or rotate, or (2) a
    single inlet having a plurality of baffles associated therewith, to cause
    the system fluid to spin or rotate into or through the separator zone.


CLS 55/349
TXT Apparatus under subclass 346 wherein each separating device comprises a
    separator casing having a system fluid inflow conductor which directs the
    fluid into said casing in a path other than one which intersects or is
    parallel to the longitudinal axis of the casing.


CLS 55/350.1
TXT Filters:
    Apparatus under subclass 342 comprising at least two filters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    482+,   for two or more filters not provided with discrete and
    longitudinally confined gas inlets or outlets.


CLS 55/351
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the separator media is
    endless or of extent greater than the gas flow path with which it is used
    and including means for moving an unused or new portion of said media to
    within the flow path.

    (1)     Note.  A crank, handle or the like attached to the media or to a
    support means for the media for positively moving the media is sufficient
    to qualify under this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290,    for means, exclusive of liquid contact, for cleaning moving,
    indefinite or continuous length separating media.

    474,    for separator means comprising a continuous flow of particulate
    filter material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclass 42 for electric field
    separation apparatus with cleaning means in which the electrode is carried
    on an endless belt or the electrode is belt type.


CLS 55/352
TXT Apparatus under subclass 351 in which the operation of the means causing
    the removal or advancing of the separator media (1) is directly responsive
    to an element subjected to the presence or absence of the gas flow, or (2)
    results utimately from a device sensing the pressure or pressure
    differential across a portion of the gas flow path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210+,   for automatic control to divert the gas flow or to cause discharge
    of the separated material.

    283     and 288, for similar apparatus for initiating or controlling the
    cleaning means of the separating media.


CLS 55/353
TXT Apparatus under subclass 351 made up of a plurality of continuous or
    indefinite length separating media arranged in series or parallel
    relationship relative to the gas flow, or in which the separator is
    comprised of a plurality of independent separating members arranged
    relatively one to the other so as to form a continuous or indefinite length
    separating media.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    342+,   appropriate subclasses for multiple, similar separators in parallel
    or series, but each having a separate, defined gas inlet or outlet.


CLS 55/354
TXT Apparatus under subclass 351 comprising a separating media which is
    advanced into the gas stream without regard to leading or trailing ends or
    is fed from or to a roll or wound package, usually outside of the gas flow
    path.

    (1)     Note.  All these members are generally of sheet form and of
    nonrigid quality so that they may be distorted or caused to change shape
    under normal usage.

    (2)     Note.  A continuous media (i.e. one which is drum type or has no
    free ends) is not classified in this subclass, but is found in subclass 351.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    497+    and 500, for sheet form filters which are maintained in nonplanar
    form, similar to the arrangements of many of the sheet form separators in
    this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 550+ for unwinding an
    elongated material and subclasses 570+ for a coil holder of general use.


CLS 55/355
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means to maintain a liquid
    at some desired location to act as a stop, seal or closure between adjacent
    system parts.

    (1)     Note.  Fluent material comprised of particulate solids, which act
    as a stop, seal, or closure, is proper subject matter for this subclass if
    a means (e.g. a valve) is provided to maintain said material at a desired
    location.


CLS 55/356
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including (1) means to support the
    apparatus with respect to a surface comprising wheels, skids, runners or
    the like for movement across such surface or (2) means such as handles,
    carrying straps or the like attached to and facilitating the repositioning
    or transfer of the apparatus or apparatus part during the use or nonuse
    thereof.


CLS 55/357
TXT Apparatus under subclass 356 comprising modified apparatus means grasped or
    held by the hand and attached to the apparatus or apparatus part to
    facilitate the movement thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    Appropriate subclasses, especially 369+, 436, 478+, and 503+, for
    separators with which tools or detached handle means may be useful for
    changing, replacing or gaining access to filters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for a joint between
    an implement and a handle therefor.


CLS 55/358
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means other than mere casing or
    enclosing structure for sustaining the separating apparatus against
    gravity, such means being adapted to rest upon the ground or other
    supporting surface and not including a flow line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    356+,   for other features involving support means.

    490+,   for combinations involving supporting means for separating media
    within or at the extremity of a flow line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 301+ for
    installed vacuum cleaners and see the class definition of Class 55 for a
    statement of the line.


CLS 55/359
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having a cover provided with means
    whereby a portion of said cover is easily removable, the cover enclosing,
    sealing or embracing an apparatus part to render the part nonusable until
    the portion is mutilated, torn or removed.

    (1)     Note.  Packaged or encased apparatus requiring total removal of an
    outer covering or enwrapping means, e.g. removing filter bags from a box or
    packing container, is not included.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, appropriate subclasses for packaged
    articles and see (1) Note above.


CLS 55/360
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having electrical energy conductor
    means arranged to provide a flow path to discharge an apparatus part or to
    prevent accumulation of electrical charges in the apparatus.


CLS 55/361
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having a separating member comprised
    of nonrigid cohesive material of essentially globular, tubular, or
    cylindrical container configuration which encloses a space and has at least
    one opening for passing gas into or out of said member, said member
    comprised in part or entirely of gas permeable filter material.

    (1)     Note.  In use position the bag is capable of being flexed by reason
    that the material is not rigidly nor inflexibly supported or sustained
    against such action as by being held sandwich style.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    341,    for multiple bag type separators in a plenum chamber.


CLS 55/362
TXT Apparatus under subclass 361 with positive means to remove a separator bag
    partially or completely from within a separator housing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211,    for bag ejecting means responsive to a sensed condition.


CLS 55/363
TXT Apparatus under subclass 361 wherein the separating member in use position
    forms a tube axially directed along an arcuate or circular path (e.g.
    doughnut-like).


CLS 55/364
TXT Apparatus under subclass 361 wherein the separating member is comprised of
    both gas permeable and impermeable material, said impermeable material
    comprising the major portion of said member.


CLS 55/365
TXT Apparatus under subclass 361 having non- filtering means of greater tensile
    strength than the filter material of the bag extending substantially the
    length of the bag and between means for holding the bag in operative
    position.

    (1)     Note.  The strain relief means may be a permanent part of the bag
    or a separate member joinable thereto, and is so related to the bag that
    any force exerted thereon through the bag support means is taken by the
    said strain relief means.  Mere bag structure reinforcing means is excluded
    and will be found in subclass 381 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    378+,   for bag securing or supporting means.

    381+,   for bag structure, per se, and see (1) Note above.


CLS 55/366
TXT Apparatus under subclass 361 having a gas impermeable receptacle for
    collecting solids separated from the gas, said receptacle removably
    associated with the separating member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    429,    for other separable or removable collecting receptacles for the
    heavier constituents.


CLS 55/367
TXT Apparatus under subclass 361 in which the separating member or apparatus
    has means which act to shut or seal the gas inlet opening of said member,
    whereby the member may be removed from the apparatus with the inlet opening
    in shut or sealed condition.

    (1)     Note.  The means may be an inherent biasing of the sealing means to
    closed position resulting from a characteristic or property of the material
    or of its relation to other parts of the structure.


CLS 55/368
TXT Apparatus under subclass 361 having gas flow conducting means defining a
    confined flow path within the separating member, or having means associated
    with the member which affects the direction or pattern of gas flow within
    said member.


CLS 55/369
TXT Apparatus under subclass 361 in which a filter member or a nonrigid member
    enclosing said filter member has an opening separate and distinct from the
    opening attachable to the gas flow conduit, and means for closing said
    separate and distinct opening.


CLS 55/370
TXT Apparatus under subclass 369 providing an arrangement which permits or
    effects the  removal of the accumulated separated constituents from the
    device while at least a portion of the filter member or enclosure therefor
    remains connected to the gas conduit.


CLS 55/371
TXT Apparatus under subclass 370 having means which permits the filter member
    to be substantially or completely removed from within the confines of the
    enclosing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    362,    for means for ejecting a filter bag from within a housing.


CLS 55/372
TXT Apparatus under subclass 361 in which the gas is passed through two or more
    filters, and in which less than all of said filters are of the flexible or
    collapsible bag type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334,    for a bag type filter and a serially arranged basically different
    type separator.

    482,    for two or more filters, none being of the flexible bag type.


CLS 55/373
TXT Apparatus under subclass 361 in which the filter member in use position is
    enclosed within a housing and the means which secures the member in the
    housing is an integral part of or depends on a means which provides
    admission to the interior of said housing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    480,    for separate flow line access means for securing filters of other
    than the bag type within a flow line.


CLS 55/374
TXT Apparatus under subclass 361 having means to connect or join the separating
    member to a gas conduit in gas flow relationship.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses will take a direct coupler
    between a bag and flow line, or a modified bag end means to which a
    separate flow line coupler is joined, whether or not the flow line is
    claimed.


CLS 55/375
TXT Apparatus under subclass 374 in which the connecting means comprises a
    pliable or nonrigid gas conveying channel.


CLS 55/376
TXT Apparatus under subclass 374 in which an essential part of the connecting
    means is integrally associated with and modifies the structure of the
    separating member.

    (1)     Note.  The means permanently attached to the bag may be static,
    such as a ring element permanently attached to a bag end, or manipulable,
    such as a jointed or expansible clamping means permanently attached to a
    bag end.


CLS 55/377
TXT Apparatus under subclass 376 in which the connecting means comprises
    elastic or other deformable material that recovers its original shape when
    released after being distorted, or is readily capable of being spread apart
    or enlarged.


CLS 55/378
TXT Apparatus under subclass 361 wherein (1) a means sustains or bears at least
    a part of the weight of the separating member against the force of gravity
    or prevents at least a portion of said member from collapsing, or (2) the
    separating member is structurally modified to provide a means for
    connecting the member to a support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    365,    for strain relief type supports.

    374+,   for flow line coupling means which are also securing or supporting
    means.


CLS 55/379
TXT Apparatus under subclass 378 in which said sustaining or connecting means
    is located within the separating member.


CLS 55/380
TXT Apparatus under subclass 361 wherein the separating member comprises (1) a
    plurality of permeable bags one within the other, in spaced or face-to-face
    relationship and in which at least one of said bags is a filter, or (2) a
    single filter bag folded or foldable in such a manner that the lateral wall
    thereof is comprised of plural, facially unsecured layers or a chamber is
    formed between layers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    382,    for a filter bag made of two or more folds or layers substantially
    facially secured to each other so as to form a single separating surface.


CLS 55/381
TXT Apparatus under subclass 361 relating to the arrangement or interrelation
    of the parts or materials which comprise the permeable separating member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    361,    for bag filter material, per se.

    522+    for separator materials.


CLS 55/382
TXT Apparatus under subclass 381 in which at least a portion of the member is
    comprised of two or more sheets, or surface extending masses, in
    face-to-face relation, or in which the material of the member is comprised
    of physically interrelated layers of different characteristics.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    380,    for a single filter bag with a wall folded upon itself, both folds
    being facially unsecured so as to form plural separating surfaces, or a
    chamber therebetween.


CLS 55/383
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means to effect gas flow
    through, or relative to, a separator, said gas passing from the flow
    effecting means to the separator, or vice versa, through an unbounded area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    437+    and 467+, for gas pumps or fans in a confined flow path combined
    with a gas separating media.


CLS 55/385.1
TXT COMBINED OR CONVERTIBLE:

    Apparatus under the class definition in combination with features other
    than flow or residue conducting or handling structure, media retaining or
    access structure, or separating structure and not provided for above; or
    having means or parts capable of structural rearrangement or modification
    to selectively provide either a separating organization having some other
    mode of operation or a device of some other description.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of patents classified under this definition include
    those claiming a separator combined with a shield to prevent rain from
    entering the gas inlet, or with a protective shield to prevent damage to
    the separator or casing or with a showcase.


CLS 55/385.2
TXT In environmental air enclosure:

    Apparatus under subclass 385.1 wherein an enclosure, e.g., clean air room,
    bomb shelter, incubator, etc., has means to provide air for a desired
    purpose.


CLS 55/385.3
TXT In motor vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 385.1 located within a motor vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 313 for
    cleaning apparatus involving air blast or suction means installed within a
    motor vehicle.


CLS 55/385.4
TXT In vented container:

    Apparatus under subclass 385.1 located within a container having a vented
    opening.


CLS 55/385.5
TXT Involving mining or metallurgical apparatus:

    Apparatus under subclass 385.1 associated with mining or metallurgical
    structure.


CLS 55/385.6
TXT Involving communication receiving or transmitting apparatus:

    Apparatus under subclass 385.1 associated with communication receiving or
    transmitting structure.


CLS 55/385.7
TXT Involving shielding apparatus:

    Apparatus under subclass 385.1 associated with structure having shielding
    means.


CLS 55/385.8
TXT Involving ash tray:

    Apparatus under subclass 385.1 associated with an ash tray.


CLS 55/391
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a casing with a collecting
    zone for a separated constituent and a gas outlet conduit leading
    therefrom, said conduit provided with a radially outwardly extending guide
    or shield stopping short of the casing to form an annular opening between
    it and the casing wall for the influent mixture to enter the collecting
    zone.


CLS 55/392
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a separating chamber
    including static means (e.g. skimmer) so positioned therein as to direct
    the flow of a layer of one or more of the system fluid constituents in a
    stratified gas mixture out of the flowing gas stream to an escape from the
    separating zone or to a collection zone.

    (1)     Note.  The directing means must be more than an aperture in a
    deflecting surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    407,    for a concentrate flow groove, guide or channel on a moving member.


CLS 55/393
TXT Apparatus under subclass 392 in which the directing means is arranged for
    movement between fixed positions to vary the effect thereof in use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    422,    for adjustably mounted or supported deflectors and see the search
    notes thereunder.


CLS 55/394
TXT Apparatus under subclass 392 in which the directing means is at or forms
    the outlet means through which the heavier constituent layer leaves the
    separator chamber.


CLS 55/395
TXT Apparatus under subclass 394 comprising a receptacle, removable from the
    separator, into which the heavier constituent is discharged.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    429,    for other separable or removable collecting receptacles for the
    heavier constituents.


CLS 55/396
TXT Apparatus under subclass 394 wherein the directing means comprises an
    opening for the heavier constituents defined between the outflow gas
    conduit and a wall surrounding and spaced therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    448+,   for annular outlets for the concentrate in which there is no guide
    or directing means for the concentrate.


CLS 55/397
TXT Apparatus under subclass 394 comprising one or more openings for the
    discharge of the heavier constituents, each opening defined by two walls,
    one wall being spaced inwardly from the other and both walls being
    intersected by the same diametric axis of the separator chamber.


CLS 55/398
TXT Apparatus under subclass 394 comprising more than one flow directing means
    for the heavier constituents, each means being spaced circumferentially
    around the axis of the separator chamber.


CLS 55/399
TXT Apparatus under the subclass 392 in which the directing means is of helical
    configuration.


CLS 55/400
TXT Apparatus under the class definition wherein the separator includes a
    continuously moving unitary member, other than a mere impeller, so arranged
    relative to associated structure, or itself so designed, as to perform a
    separating function.

    (1)     Note.  To be classified under this definition a nonfilter member
    must stratify, deflect, or otherwise initiate separation of the system
    fluid constituents by reason of the member's motion relative thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    317,    for continuously moving separating means combined with at least one
    other separator of a diverse type (e.g. filter).

    351,    for continuous or indefinite length separating means movable during
    use.

    422,    for a surface which is removably or adjustably mounted.

    437+    and 467+, for those separating devices in which the moving means is
    nothing more than a fan or pump.

    474,    for particulate solids movable during use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 107+ for processes of gas
    separation involving a moving solid sorbent.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 125 and 150 for solid
    sorbent apparatus having a moving bed.


CLS 55/401
TXT Apparatus under subclass 400 comprising two or more separating means, at
    least one of which is continuously moving, each functioning substantially
    independently of the other (1) as a separating means for only a portion of
    the system fluid or (2) as one of a series of separation phases wherein
    each downstream separating means treats the effluent of the preceding
    upstream means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    342+,   for plural separators of the type classified in this subclass
    wherein each is provided with a discrete and longitudinally confined gas
    inlet or outlet flow path.


CLS 55/402
TXT Apparatus under subclass 401 wherein at least two of the separator means
    are of the continuous motion type, each of the moving means acting on only
    a portion of the system fluid and the effective areas encompassed by said
    means overlapping one another.


CLS 55/403
TXT Apparatus under subclass 401 wherein at least two of the separator means
    are of the continuous motion type, the moving separating means being
    arranged one downstream of the other in the direction of gas flow.


CLS 55/404
TXT Apparatus under subclass 400 wherein the continuously moving means is so
    arranged in or in relation to a flow confining means for the system fluid
    as to be actuated by the normal flow of said fluid through the separator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    298,    for a member actuated by gas flow to clean a deflector.

    352,    for a means actuated by gas flow to advance a continuous or
    indefinite length separator e.g. a drum.


CLS 55/405
TXT Apparatus under subclass 404 wherein the continuously moving means
    comprises a member rotatable about a fixed axis, the direction of system
    fluid inflow to said separator member being at right angles to said axis.


CLS 55/406
TXT Apparatus under subclass 400 wherein the continuously moving means
    intercepts the flow of system fluid and deflects one or more constituents
    thereof to a greater extent than the remainder.

    (1)     Note.  A rotating member which throws the system fluid outwardly
    therefrom for separation by impingement of the heavier constituents on a
    static surface (slinger) is not considered to be a differential deflecting
    means for this subclass but is considered to be more than just a fan or
    pump and is classifiable in any of the other preceding subclasses of this
    group.


CLS 55/407
TXT Apparatus under subclass 406 wherein the moving means includes one or more
    grooves, guides or channels as an integral part thereof by means of which a
    flowing concentrate layer of one of the system fluid constituents is
    directed to suitable outlet means.


CLS 55/408
TXT Apparatus under subclass 406 wherein the continuously moving means
    comprises a rotating member at least a portion of which comprises a
    confined flow path, coaxial with the axis of rotation, for the separated
    gas.


CLS 55/409
TXT Apparatus under subclass 408 wherein the outlet flow path comprises a
    tubular shaft which rotatably supports the continuously moving separator
    means.


CLS 55/410
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means which acts on the gas
    flow subsequent to separation to (1) vary the quantity of such gas flow or
    (2) spread out, render less turbulent, or disperse such gas flowing out of
    the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  Patents are placed in this and indented subclasses rather
    than in subclass 418 and indented subclasses when the direction of flow is
    indeterminable or is of no moment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    418+,   for means upstream of the separating media to control the flow of
    gas thereto.


CLS 55/411
TXT Apparatus under subclass 410 comprising a flow confining means for the gas
    flowing out of the apparatus, said means arranged for movement relative to
    the separator casing.


CLS 55/412
TXT Apparatus under subclass 411 in which the flow confining means is arranged
    for rectilinear movement along the flow path axis.


CLS 55/413
TXT Apparatus under subclass 410 having means to deflect or direct the gas flow
    subsequent to separation.


CLS 55/414
TXT Apparatus under subclass 413 in which the means is positioned within a flow
    confining means for the gas flowing out of the apparatus or spaced
    therefrom in the direction of gas flow.


CLS 55/415
TXT Apparatus under subclass 414 wherein the deflecting or directing means is
    arranged for movement to vary the effect thereof on the gas flow.


CLS 55/416
TXT Apparatus under subclass 414 comprising means to reduce or eliminate a
    whirling, spinning, or turbulent motion of the outlet gas.


CLS 55/417
TXT Apparatus under subclass 410 having a valve to vary gas flow to control the
    quantity of separated gas flowing through or out of the apparatus.


CLS 55/418
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means which acts on the gas
    flow to the separator, prior to separation to (1) vary the quantity of such
    gas flow or (2) spread out, guide or disperse such gas flow to the
    separating means.

    (1)     Note.  Inflow control does not include a mere unmodified gas inlet
    or means for imparting a whirling or centrifuging motion to the gas which
    is essential to the operation of the device for the purpose of separating a
    constituent from the system mixture.

    (2)     Note.  When the direction of flow is of no moment, see subclass 410
    and the notes thereto.

    (3)     Note.  The guide, distributor or diffuser must be positioned wholly
    upstream of the separating means.  If any part thereof is within the
    separated gas outlet conduit, the patent will be found in subclass 414.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210+,   for gas flow control means actuated by means responsive to a sensed
    condition.

    417,    for gas outflow control valves and see (2) Note above.

    447+,   for fixed gas whirlers and see (1) Note above.


CLS 55/419
TXT Apparatus under subclass 418 in which the means comprises a plurality of
    apertures, a manifold means or flow paths to distribute flow to the
    separating means.

    (1)     Note.  Perforated plates, reticulated end members or foraminous
    containers are not properly herein classified if such member or means
    comprise mere supporting or retaining means for the filter media.


CLS 55/420
TXT Apparatus under subclass 418 comprising a valve of the direct response
    type, i.e. the valve moves in one direction in response to change in the
    flow or pressure of the incoming gas and resumes its normal, neutral or
    biased position when the original flow or pressure condition is restored.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 511+ for the structure of the valve, per
    se.


CLS 55/421
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means to separate a
    plurality of different liquids, or a liquid and a solid, one from another,
    in order to collect each liquid or solid individually.

    (1)     Note.  A reservoir comprising a plurality of different outlet
    openings or conduits so arranged that each of a plurality of different
    liquids, or a liquid and a solid, will be obtained separately at each
    outlet is included under this definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 149+ and 253 for processes
    of gas separation involving separation of two or more liquids from each
    other.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 182+ for degasifying means
    for liquid with a separator for multiple liquids.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 171+ for fluid separating traps or vents
    having separate outflows for diverse liquids or solids, but not combined
    with a gas separating structure.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, for gas separation
    devices combined with means to separately guide or collect each of a
    plurality of diverse solids (e.g., means to separately collect fine and
    coarse solid materials).

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses for
    separation of liquids in general.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 2+ for gas and liquid
    contact apparatus involving separating means for two or more liquids.


CLS 55/422
TXT Apparatus under the class definition wherein the separating media is
    mounted for movement to various operative positions or to a position of
    nonuse with respect to the gas mixture acted upon while attached to the
    separating apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306,    for movably mounted separators of the aircraft anti-ingestion type.

    328,    for movably mounted separators which comprise at least one of the
    separating elements in a plurality of diverse separators.

    393,    for adjustably mounted flowing concentrate layer guide means.


CLS 55/423
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a separating chamber
    including therein a means within the system fluid gas stream, other than
    the separating media, for channeling the flow of a separated  constituent
    out of the separation zone to a concentrate collection zone within the
    separator.


CLS 55/424
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means associated with a gas
    separating device for averting (1) remixing of a system fluid constituent,
    after substantial separation, with the clean outflow gas or (2) the flowing
    of a separated system fluid constituent toward the gas outflow path.


CLS 55/425
TXT Apparatus under subclass 424 having means which in at least one position of
    use completely shuts off the interflow of gases or concentrate between the
    separator and a concentrate collector means.


CLS 55/426
TXT Apparatus under subclass 424 in which the means comprises a guide or shield
    (e.g. plate, deflector) positioned in the path the separated constituent,
    after collection, would tend to follow towards the gas outflow conduit.

    (1)     Note.  The guide or shield might function in one of two ways:  (1)
    deflect the heavier constituents away from the gas outflow conduit, or (2)
    restrict the suction effect of the exit gas on the separated constituents
    in the collector zone.


CLS 55/427
TXT Apparatus under subclass 426 in which the guide or shield is mounted on
    means which allows it to be selectively positioned relative to the gas
    outlet or concentrate collector zone.


CLS 55/428
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means associated with a gas
    separating device for manipulating, transporting, or providing access to a
    collected mass of nongaseous residue or concentrate comprising (1)
    affirmative means to transport or carry away the separated material, (2)
    means (e.g. a valve) which selectively retains the separated material
    within an apparatus part or permits the material to escape from said part,
    (3) removable receptacles for nongaseous material, or (4) movable means
    (e.g. hinged doors) for permitting admission to the interior of nongaseous
    material receptacles.

    (1)     Note.  Concentrate collection receptacles or retainers provided
    with gas escape means and which serve to permit concentrate to be in part
    air borne to the said receptacle and therefore may act as a secondary
    separator are not considered as separators for classification with serially
    arranged separators or with diverse separators for subclass 428 or
    subclasses 342+, respectively but as proper subject matter under this
    definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282+,   for means for removing separated constituent from the interstices
    or surfaces of a separator.

    466,    for means conducting or conditioning a flowing mass of separated
    materials, said materials having continuous flow and at no stage being
    collected as a mass or transported by affirmative means.


CLS 55/429
TXT Apparatus under subclass 428 comprising a receptacle or storage bin for the
    heavier separated constituent arranged to be removed from its normal
    collecting position relative to the separator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    366,    for separable residue containers combined with flexible or
    collapsible bag type separators.

    395,    for other removable collection receptacles combined with a
    separator having a guide means for the heavier constituents at the escape
    opening.


CLS 55/430
TXT Apparatus under subclass 428 comprising a means which positively effects or
    aids removal of the collected residue rather than merely permitting such
    removal.


CLS 55/431
TXT Apparatus under subclass 430 in which the means is a fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242,    for cleaning a separating media by contact with a liquid.

    282+,   for cleaning a separating media with a nonliquid.

    466,    for treating the residue with a liquid.


CLS 55/432
TXT Apparatus under subclass 428 comprising a separated material receiver
    having means which in one position retains the separated materials therein
    and in an alternate position allows the materials to issue therefrom (e.g.
    valved residue outlet).


CLS 55/433
TXT Apparatus under subclass 432 in which the means is placed in and out of the
    position by a motion transmitted by an attendant's hand or foot.


CLS 55/434
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a surface means which
    effects an abrupt change in direction of the system fluid gas flow or
    guides said gas flow to cause the heavier constituents thereof to (1) drop
    out and remain behind, while the lighter constituent (e.g. clean gas) flows
    on, or (2) move to the outer periphery of a rotating gas stream in a
    concentrated layer to permit such layer to be separated from the mass of
    lighter constituent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 267+ for processes of gas
    separation by deflection.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclasses 157+ and 168+ for fluid
    current conveyors having a material separating deflector at the conveyor
    outlet.


CLS 55/435
TXT Apparatus under subclass 434 having (1) means in addition to casing walls
    or mere separating means flow passages especially designed to reduce or
    prevent erosion or abrading of apparatus parts or (2) separating surfaces
    of peculiar composition or especially treated as by alloying, coating or
    hardening to withstand rapid deterioration of such surfaces.


CLS 55/436
TXT Apparatus under subclass 434 wherein the deflector surface may be readily
    withdrawn or detached from its support, the connecting or supporting
    elements, if any, being reusable.


CLS 55/437
TXT Apparatus under subclass 434 including a means which effects flow of the
    gas being separated to and through the separator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    383,    for other gas pumps or fans wherein there is no confined flow
    between the impeller and the separator.

    467+,   for other gas pumps or fans in an apparatus for gas separation.


CLS 55/438
TXT Apparatus under subclass 437 wherein the means is positioned within the
    confines of the casing enclosing the separating media.


CLS 55/439
TXT Apparatus under subclass 437 in which the means is positioned on the gas
    egress side of the separating media.


CLS 55/440
TXT Apparatus under subclass 434 in which the surface means comprises at least
    two plates between which the gas flows in a tortuous or sinuous path, said
    plates being bent, deformed or provided with projections, and arranged
    relatively one to the other so that a bend, deformation or projection of
    one plate is spaced from the corresponding bend, etc. of the other, so as
    to provide substantially constant area for the gas flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278,    for material separating means comprised of closely spaced parallel
    plates, said plates not relying upon change of direction of gas flow for
    separation.


CLS 55/441
TXT Apparatus under subclass 434 comprising a plurality of coaxial tubular
    members having different diameters, each surrounding the next smaller, each
    coaxial tube having a closed end and an open end, and each except the
    smallest having one closed end across and spaced from the open end of the
    surrounded tube.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclass 191 for similar conduits used
    for eliminating moisture particles from a gas evolved in an apparatus for
    degassing a liquid.


CLS 55/442
TXT Apparatus under subclass 434 comprising a plurality of said surfaces, at
    least a portion of each surface being superposed with respect to the next
    adjacent in the direction of gas flow.


CLS 55/443
TXT Apparatus under subclass 442 comprising a plurality of surfaces spaced from
    one another in a general linear disposition and in a direction
    substantially normal to the gas flow path.


CLS 55/444
TXT Apparatus under subclass 443 comprising at least three linear arrangements
    normal to the gas flow in which the corresponding surfaces in the first and
    third arrangements are in a straight line with each other but laterally
    displaced from the corresponding surfaces in the second or intervening
    arrangement.


CLS 55/445
TXT Apparatus under subclass 442 in which the surfaces are either (1) provided
    with openings for permitting gas flow therethrough or (2) arranged within
    the flow path to provide a small space for gas flow between edges of said
    surfaces and the flow path conduit wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    307+,   for a unit comprising a filter or an apertured deflector, which
    unit is spaced inwardly from the flow path wall.


CLS 55/446
TXT Apparatus under subclass 445 in which the openings or spaces are
    complemented by an imperforate portion of the next adjacent surface in the
    direction of gas flow.


CLS 55/447
TXT Apparatus under subclass 434 in which the direction of gas flow is changed
    by a static member designed to cause the gas to rotate or spin around an
    axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235+,   for the subject matter of this subclass in combination with liquid
    contacting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclass 173 for a fluid current
    conveyor having a cyclone separator at the outlet.


CLS 55/448
TXT Apparatus under subclass 447 including an outlet gas flow conduit wall
    defining (1) a space between it and a surrounding, radially spaced wall for
    the concentrated nongaseous material to leave the separator, (2) one wall
    of a closed end, surrounding concentric chamber for collecting the
    concentrated nongaseous material, or (3) a space between it and another
    surrounding, radially spaced wall for gas in flow to the separating chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    396,    for similar annular outlet means, but having a guide means for the
    concentrate layer.


CLS 55/449
TXT Apparatus under subclass 448 wherein the gas outlet wall comprises the
    inner wall of the surrounding gas inlet.


CLS 55/450
TXT Apparatus under subclass 448 including a residue discharge opening from the
    collection chamber.


CLS 55/451
TXT Apparatus under subclass 450 wherein the discharge opening comprises a
    conductor which discharges the residue in a path other than one which, if
    extended as a straight line at the chamber wall, would intersect or be
    parallel to the longitudinal axis of the chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    454,    for a tangential outlet pipe from a whirler means.


CLS 55/452
TXT Apparatus under subclass 447 provided with a bounding wall extending along
    the axis of rotation, having a radius of curvature, and more than one
    opening through which the concentrate escapes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    398,    for similar structure having means to guide the concentrate through
    the openings.


CLS 55/453
TXT Apparatus under subclass 447 comprising parallel end members supporting
    between them vanes directed obliquely to a common axis to direct the inflow
    angularly with respect to the axis, at least one of the end members
    provided with one or more openings for the escape of the rotating
    concentrate layer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    455,    for other similar structures for causing gas whirl.


CLS 55/454
TXT Apparatus under subclass 447 comprising an outlet pipe for the heavier
    constituents arranged to discharge the heavier constituents in a path other
    than one which, if extended as a straight line at the wall of the whirling
    chamber, would intersect or be parallel to the axis of the chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    451,    for a tangential outlet pipe for heavier constituents from a
    collector surrounding a gas inlet pipe.


CLS 55/455
TXT Apparatus under subclass 447 comprising a perimetric wall having multiple
    inlet means for the gas, each means directed obliquely to a common axis to
    direct the gas flow angularly with respect to the axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    453,    for similar gas whirling structure provided with outlet openings
    for the concentrate layer.


CLS 55/456
TXT Apparatus under subclass 447 wherein said member is situated within a gas
    flow passage and is twisted or turned about its axis.


CLS 55/457
TXT Apparatus under subclass 456 comprising a solid or hollow element
    positioned interiorly of a portion of the gas flow passage to provide for
    gas flow in the space between it and the wall of the gas passage, with the
    twisted member positioned in the space.


CLS 55/458
TXT Apparatus under subclass 447 wherein an inlet gas conduit extends into a
    separator casing and is arranged, formed, or has openings to cause the
    ensuing gas to assume a curved path.


CLS 55/459.1
TXT Tangential gas inlet opening in casing:
    Apparatus under subclass 447 wherein the gas whirling means comprises a
    separator casing having an inflow gas conductor which directs the gas into
    said casing in a path other than one which intersects or is parallel to the
    longitudinal axis of the casing.


CLS 55/459.2
TXT Inclined inflow:
    Apparatus under subclass 459.1 wherein the gas inflow conductor is sloped.


CLS 55/459.3
TXT Scroll:
    Apparatus under subclass 459.1 wherein the gas inflow conductor is a scroll
    means.


CLS 55/459.4
TXT Inflow nozzle or vane:
    Apparatus under subclass 459.1 wherein the gas inflow conductor is a
    nozzler or vane structure.


CLS 55/459.5
TXT Varying inlet area:
    Apparatus under subclass 459.1 wherein the area of the gas inflow changes.


CLS 55/460
TXT Apparatus under subclass 459.1 having, in addition, a gas outlet flow
    conduit which conducts the gas out of the separator casing in a path other
    than one which, if extended as a straight line at the casing wall, would
    intersect or be parallel to the longitudinal axis of the casing.


CLS 55/461
TXT Apparatus under subclass 447 comprising a conduit or other gas conducting
    member, imperforate except for means provided for gas inlet, gas outlet and
    concentrate outlet, and designed to separate while conveying the gas to be
    treated in a curved path.


CLS 55/462
TXT Apparatus under subclass 434 comprising a surface in the flow path of the
    gas stream to be contacted by the stream for redirecting or altering the
    flow path for separation of nongaseous constituents therefrom.


CLS 55/463
TXT Apparatus under subclass 462 in which the surface has circular cross
    sections of increasing diameter with the smallest diameter section facing
    upstream.


CLS 55/464
TXT Apparatus under subclass 462 wherein the surface has bends, folds,
    projections or ridges and the like irregularities.


CLS 55/465
TXT Apparatus under subclass 462 in which the surface is flat.


CLS 55/466
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising (1) residue or concentrate
    flow guide means which permits a continuous flow of separated materials to
    leave the apparatus or (2) means for changing the physical properties (e.g.
    temperature, density, viscosity, etc.) of the separated materials for
    affecting the flow characteristics of said materials.

    (1)     Note. This subclass is intended to provide a locus of search for
    modified  outlets (i.e. not mere openings) and accordingly, all patents
    disclosing significant outlet structure should be cross-referenced hereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282+,   for means for removing separated constituent from the interstices
    or surfaces of a separator.

    428+,   for affirmative or permissive means for removing collected
    separated materials from a gas separating device.


CLS 55/467
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means to positively force
    system fluid gas through, or to pass relative to, a separating media.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    383,    for gas pumps or fans to force gas in an unbounded area to move
    relative to a separating media.

    437+,   for gas pumps or fans in a confined flow path combined with a
    separating media of the deflector type.


CLS 55/468
TXT Apparatus under subclass 467 in which flow effecting means is provided for
    the system fluid gas by an independent flow of motive fluid so related to
    the flow path for said gas as to induce flow thereof by venturi effect or
    the like.

    (1)     Note.  A motive fluid which also treats the system fluid, e.g.
    steam, is classified in subclasses 261+ above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261+,   for apparatus having a diverse fluid or solid source with inlet
    means to the system fluid for treatment thereof and see (1) Note above.

    400+,   for separators mounted for continuous motion to effect separation.

    437+,   for deflector related gas pumps or fans.


CLS 55/469
TXT Apparatus under subclass 467 in which the gas is forced to pass through, or
    relative to the separating media by hand or foot actuated means, by
    mechanically actuated means having contact with a surface along which it
    moves, or by a weight motor means.


CLS 55/470
TXT Apparatus under subclass 467 having a plurality of separate and distinct
    impelling means, each impelling means acting only on a portion of the total
    gas flow, or at least one impelling means serving a purpose other than
    merely forcing the gas to or from the separating media.

    (1)     Note.  An arrangement of two impelling means, one of which forces
    system fluid to the motor of the other impelling means for cooling thereof
    is an example of a diverse function and is proper subject matter under this
    definition.


CLS 55/471
TXT Apparatus under subclass 467 in which the impelling means is wholly or
    partially within the space defined by a nonplanar separating media or  is
    so close to said space that a definite flow line cannot be distinguished
    between the impeller and the media.


CLS 55/472
TXT Apparatus under subclass 467 having (1) a pump, motor, and gas separating
    means arranged one above the other, in any order, within an upstanding
    casing in its normal operative position, or (2) a plurality of chambers
    having a confined flow path therebetween, and in which at least one
    material flow effecting means and the gas separating means are in different
    chambers.

    (1)     Note.  This is the locus for apparatus of the vertical type in
    which stability, compactness, maneuverability, access to the filter
    compartment, etc., is of importance.


CLS 55/473
TXT Apparatus under subclass 467 in which the forcing means is located ahead of
    the separating media, or of at least one of a plurality of serially
    arranged separating media, in relation to the direction of gas flow.


CLS 55/474
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a separating media of
    individual portions or bits of solid matter and further provided with means
    (1) for mixing or causing relative motion among the particles or (2) for
    rendering the media in a flowing state during use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    390,    for solid sorbent separating media which are moved during use.

    400+,   for apparatus mounted or supported for continuous motion effective
    to separate gasiform fluid and see the collected search notes thereunder
    for other moving separating media.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclass 275 for processes for gas
    separation using a moving bed of particulate solids.


CLS 55/475
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means in addition to mere flow
    coupling joints, resilient retainers or biasing means to selectively or
    cyclically cause exertion of different compacting forces on the media.


CLS 55/476
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having flow inlet means which is
    substantially surrounded, (i.e. embraced) by the separating media except
    where the said flow inlet means enters the outer confines of the media
    securing or retaining means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    418+,   for inflow control or distribution means having additional
    characteristics going beyond a mere inlet flow pipe.

    484+,   for spaced filter means, e.g., upper and lower shelf or grid
    supported material with gas inlet means in the space between shelves or
    compartments.


CLS 55/477
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which a filter media through which
    the gas is constrained to pass comprises bristle like or strand like
    members held so that at least one extremity of each such member is not
    secured to a holder or support, e.g., a knot or tuft held by a ferrule.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278,    for shelf or edge type filter and see (1) Note to that subclass.

    329,    for a brush type filter combined with a serially arranged basically
    different separator.


CLS 55/478
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having (1) means apart from the flow
    line walls or (2) modifications, (e.g. openings) in the flow line walls
    which permit (a) admittance thereto, or (b) filter material or unit
    replacement without recourse to a separation of the flow line in the
    direction of normal gas flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    369+,   for closure means other than a coupler to a flow line for a filter
    bag or cover therefor.


CLS 55/479
TXT Apparatus under subclass 478 for filter material of the particulate type.

    (1)     Note.  Discrete filter particles form a flowable mass, the
    particles of which are not positively connected one to the other, as
    opposed to entangled material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    474,    for particulate solids having movement during use.

    512+,   for means securing or retaining discrete massed or particulate
    materials, and see (1) Note above.


CLS 55/480
TXT Apparatus under subclass 478 in which the means for gaining admittance to
    the flow path is also the means which supports or joins the filter unit in
    or to the flow path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    369+    and 373, for similar subject matter pertaining to flexible or
    collapsible bag type separators.


CLS 55/481
TXT Apparatus under subclass 478 in which the flow line is provided with an
    opening and associated guide way or tracks thereat such that the unit is
    removed or replaced by a sliding motion through the said opening in a
    direction across the flow path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    506,    for a flange or track on a flow line end for slidably coupling a
    filter thereto.


CLS 55/482
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising two or more operatively
    distinct filtering media in spaced or edge-to-edge relation, or comprised
    of two or more plies, at least two of said plies being functionally
    distinct.

    (1)     Note.  Operatively distinct separating means under this definition
    includes a separator comprised of one continuous separating surface
    supported in such a manner as to form two or more spaced surfaces through
    which the gas flows, either in series or in parallel.

    (2)     Note.  Although the title and definition are broad it is not
    intended that deflectors be cross referenced to this group of subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    342+,   for multiple separators each with discrete and longitudinally
    confined gas inlet or outlet flow path.


CLS 55/483
TXT Apparatus under subclass 482 having supporting or retaining means effective
    to maintain two or more media in end to end contiguous relation such that
    the region of greatest area or extent of the media is facially presented to
    the gasiform fluid.


CLS 55/484
TXT Apparatus under subclass 482 in which the plurality of media are spaced
    across a flow stream so that each acts independently of the other upon only
    a portion of the gas stream so that the several media act substantially
    upon the gas at one time.

    (1)     Note.  A single sheet type or running length separating media which
    is supported in such a manner as to result in a divided gas flow
    therethrough by virtue of the support means blocking gas flow is not proper
    subject matter under this definition, but is classified in subclass 500.


CLS 55/485
TXT Apparatus under subclass 482 comprising at least three media spaced from
    each other so that the gas passes through each in turn.


CLS 55/486
TXT Apparatus under subclass 482 in which the media comprises facially
    contiguous elements or members of unlike material, mesh, screen and the
    like characteristics to define thereby functionally distinct members, or
    comprises like material differently oriented.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    522,    for media comprised of facially contiguous elements of like
    characteristics and orientation.


CLS 55/487
TXT Apparatus under subclass 486 in which the unlike characteristics relates to
    the size of flow passages in the members.


CLS 55/488
TXT Apparatus under subclass 486 in which the unlike characteristic pertains to
    the configuration, outline or dimension of the members.


CLS 55/489
TXT Apparatus under subclass 486 in which contiguous similar members are placed
    one with respect to the other so that one said member is turned about some
    axis or shifted relative to the other to thereby (1) define a different
    flow relation to the said other, or (2) together define a modified or a
    different separating media.


CLS 55/490
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising (1) a media placed in a
    flow line by being previously distorted out of its normal or natural shape
    or size and retained within the flow line by its contact with the wall
    thereof and its tendency to regain its normal shape or (2) means distinct
    from the media itself to maintain or contain said media in a stable or
    sustained altitude either in or out of a flow line as by binding, framing,
    stitching, to support the media against gravity as to maintain it as a
    cohesive entity by means not including bonding of the media upon itself.

    (1)     Note.  Arrangements of deflectors should not be crossed referenced
    to this subclass nor to subclasses below this point in the schedule.


CLS 55/491
TXT Apparatus under subclass 490 wherein the filter media is secured or
    attached to its retainer, frame, flow line or the like by a joining means
    or part which penetrates or pierces the media by a sharp or impaling means,
    or makes its own way through the media.


CLS 55/492
TXT Apparatus under subclass 490 in which the media is maintained or secured by
    imbedding a holding or reinforcing means within the media so that the
    imbedded means is substantially surrounded by the media.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    379,    for collapsible filter bag securing or supporting means internally
    of the bag.


CLS 55/493
TXT Apparatus under subclass 490 in which the flow line itself or a means fixed
    (1) within a flow line, or (2) to a frame or support means for the filter,
    has a hinged or pivoted connection therebetween and some other part of the
    flow line, backing member or frame for retaining or securing the media.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    422,    for similarly supported media non- detachably adjustable to various
    positions of use or to nonuse with respect to the gas mixture acted upon.


CLS 55/494
TXT Apparatus under subclass 490 in which the supporting means comprises either
    a slatted framework or a solid member with very shallow vertical walls upon
    which the media rests, without any further support or retaining means being
    disclosed in contact with the media.

    (1)     Note.  Most of the patents in this subclass relate to powered or
    pulverulent material, such as lime, supported on a grid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    515,    for a filter in a foraminous container.

    516+,   for particulate separating media held between open work members.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 346.01 for grids or supports, per se, which may
    be disclosed for maintaining a powered or pulverulent gas separating media.


CLS 55/495
TXT Apparatus under subclass 490 comprising a separating media which is either
    of self-sustaining form, encased or form maintained, or of coherent sheet
    form (not loose and particulate), said separating media being either
    retained in a flow line or retained in a peripheral support.

    (1)     Note.  A unit is considered to be any media of rigid form
    maintaining configuration which maintains its rigidity without a frame, or
    because of a frame.

            A media of cohesive sheet-like material is one that is flexible
    rather than self supporting and is unitary in the sense that it is coherent
    and has tensile strength.  (Sheet-like as contrasted with a pad or mass of
    fibres and cohesive as contrasted with loose material).


CLS 55/496
TXT Apparatus under subclass 495 having means whereby (1) the retaining or
    securing means admits of adjustment to accommodate different sizes of media
    or different use positions either to satisfy the unit assembly or the flow
    line relation, or (2) the overall unit size may be changed by reason of a
    modified frame arrangement or the like.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    422,    for separation media adjustable to various positions of use or
    nonuse without separation from the flow line.

    475,    for means adjustable to control compactness of filter material.


CLS 55/497
TXT Apparatus under subclass 495 comprising means engaging the sheet form
    filter substantially at the running edge to maintain the said sheet in
    other than planar configuration or to support the nonplanar sheet in a flow
    line, any facial engagement being proximate the said edge.


CLS 55/498
TXT Apparatus under subclass 497 in which the resulting shape of the media
    takes the form of a cylinder or spiral.


CLS 55/499
TXT Apparatus under subclass 497 provided with one or more members which are in
    facial contact with the sheet media and thus serve as upstream, or
    downstream supports regarding the flow of gas.


CLS 55/500
TXT Apparatus under subclass 495 having means to retain cohesive sheet-like
    material in a nonplanar configuration either in a frame or in a flow line.


CLS 55/501
TXT Apparatus under subclass 495 having an auxiliary supporting or retaining
    means for the media which is (1) positioned within the frame and removable
    therefrom or (2) adjacent the media in the flow line and not directly
    secured thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    516+,   for massed or particulate material held between open work.


CLS 55/502
TXT Apparatus under subclass 495 having a packing or pliant material used in
    the joining or coupling of the media to the frame or flow line or in
    maintaining the unit in a flow line to effect a gas-tight or cushioned seal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    507     and 509, for resilient means securing or attaching the media in use
    position.


CLS 55/503
TXT Apparatus under subclass 495 in which the media or unit is maintained in a
    flow line which is provided with features of separability for ready access
    to the media upon separating the flow line sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    478+,   for access means off-set to the gas flow path and not a part
    thereof requiring separability of the flow line sections.


CLS 55/504
TXT Apparatus under subclass 495 having means for joining a filter unit to a
    flow line or to the framework defining the extremity of a flow conductor
    and comprising a stop or flange against which the unit is abutted and a
    removable or movable clamping means which engages the unit to hold the said
    unit against the stop or flange, the stop, filter and clamp being aligned
    in the general direction of air flow through the said flow line or
    framework.


CLS 55/505
TXT Apparatus under subclass 495 in which the media is attached or secured to a
    flow line ingress or egress means from without the flow line such that the
    said media is outside of or substantially at an upstream or downstream
    boundary of the flow conduit.


CLS 55/506
TXT Apparatus under subclass 505 having a track, groove or flange-like means as
    part of the conduit in which the media is slidably engaged or retained.


CLS 55/507
TXT Apparatus under subclass 505 in which the securing means has elastic
    properties or is not readily permanently deformed under normal use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    377,    for a bag type filter having a flow line coupling with a resilient
    part.


CLS 55/508
TXT Apparatus under subclass 495 in which the means supporting or securing the
    media in or to the flow line is either in tension or shear.

    (1)     Note.  The total disclosed support must not include a support
    portion extending vertically between the media and a conduit, apparatus
    part or the ground beneath the media.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    373,    for filter bags suspended from a housing closure.


CLS 55/509
TXT Apparatus under subclass 495 in which the securing means has elastic
    properties under normal use or wherein the unit is held in place by its
    inherent resilience.


CLS 55/510
TXT Apparatus under subclass 495 in which a filter unit of annular form, e.g.,
    a hollow cylinder or doughnut, is held between a pair of substantially
    solid members applied axially (i.e., across the open ends) of the unit
    whereby gas flow is through the filter and through an opening in at least
    one of said members.


CLS 55/511
TXT Apparatus under subclass 495 in which the securing or retaining means is
    disclosed as engaging the media along or substantially proximate the
    peripheral edge only, the remaining portions thereof being unsupported.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    497+,   for nonplanar sheet form media, edge supported.


CLS 55/512
TXT Apparatus under subclass 490 for containing, securing in a flow line, or
    maintaining as a cohesive mass a filter media comprised of numerous
    individual entangled or unconnected elements.

    (1)     Note.  For apparatus for positioning a filter unit, the filter
    media, per se, being comprised of entangled or unconnected elements, in a
    flow line see subclass 495 and (1) Note thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    478,    for a filter of discrete particles in a flow line with separate
    access means to the flow line or with passage means for the filter media
    off-set to the gas flow path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 274+ for processes of gas
    separation by filtering through a mass of particulate solids.


CLS 55/513
TXT Apparatus under subclass 512 in which at least some portion of the filter
    media retaining means has elastic properties.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    377,    for a bag type filter having a flow line coupling with a resilient
    part.

    507,    for a filter unit maintained at the end of a flow line by a
    resilient attaching means.


CLS 55/514
TXT Apparatus under subclass 512 wherein the media is joined to a securing,
    sustaining, or handling means by heat or by adhesion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for adhesively bonding particulate material to a
    backing member.


CLS 55/515
TXT Apparatus under subclass 512 in which the containing, securing or
    maintaining means comprises a receptacle, all faces or surfaces of which
    are porous or skeletal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    516+,   for a filter media held between open work.


CLS 55/516
TXT Apparatus under subclass 512 comprising at least two members which serve to
    confine or retain the filter media therebetween said members permitting gas
    to flow therethrough.

    (1)     Note. A "member" under this definition may be no more than a series
    of parallel wires.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    494,    for a grid for bottom support only of a separating media.

    515,    for a foraminous receptacle for holding a particulate or fibrous
    massed filter media.


CLS 55/517
TXT Apparatus under subclass 516 in which the confining or retaining means is
    comprised of two members, one member partially or completely within the
    other member, or at least one member being of irregular or curved
    configuration.


CLS 55/518
TXT Apparatus under subclass 516 in which the filter media is retained between
    continuous surfaces, each having at least one aperture formed therethrough.


CLS 55/519
TXT Apparatus under subclass 516 in which the filter media is retained between
    at least two retainers each comprised of intersecting elongated elements
    arranged to form at least one opening, or interstice, bounded on all sides
    by said elongated elements.


CLS 55/520
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a filter element which is
    rolled or wound either in face-to-face or spaced relation to form one or
    more spiral convolutions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    498,    for filter sheet(s) edge supported in spiral form and subclass 484
    for a spiral arrangement of spaced convolutions providing parallel flow for
    gas.

    527,    for a strand which is indiscriminately wound around itself, but not
    in a spiral.


CLS 55/521
TXT Apparatus under the class definition of cohesive filter material maintained
    in a configuration imposed upon it either by bonding upon itself or
    impregnants, or by inherent characteristic, the configuration taking a
    zigzag, corrugated or conical form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    497     and 500, for cohesive sheet-like media in a flow line or frame and
    in zigzag form.


CLS 55/522
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which (1) the stock, fiber, metal,
    weave, fabric or a modification thereof or (2) an added ingredient to bond,
    coat or impregnate stock material is specifically recited in a claim.

    (1)     Note. Special shapes or arrangements of filter material, or filter
    media retained or secured by means other than by bonding upon itself, are
    provided for in the subclasses beginning with subclass 474, or in subclass
    529.

    (2)     Note. Under this definition, naming "Monel metal" or "copper", for
    example in a claim is a specific recitation of stock, "metal" or "fabric"
    is not a specific recitation.A named coating, for example, "tricresyl
    phosphate" is specific; a "viscous" coating is not.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    435,    for deflectors with anti-erosion means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 98+ and 221+
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet and having some defined structured (e.g., aperture, nonplanar
    arrangement, specific size of fibers or particles).


CLS 55/523
TXT Apparatus under subclass 522 in which the media is a porous body made of a
    fired earth or by heating a powdered metal to form a coherent mass without
    thoroughly melting.


CLS 55/524
TXT Apparatus under subclass 522 provided with (1) a material, fluid or
    discrete, which penetrates the separating media and is retained therein or
    thereon, either in its original form or physically combined therewith, or
    (2) an initially fluent film or layer of material either lying on or
    adhered to the surface of the separating media or by which component parts
    of a media are secured one to the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    514     and 521, for filter media and bonding agents there classified.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 343 for a smoke separator comprising plural
    diverse elements one of which is a plasticizer, adhesive, coating or
    impregnant, the separator disclosed for use in a tobacco user's appliance
    or article.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses, for adhesive bonding and miscellaneous chemical
    manufactures of sheet material.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, for an
    antiseptic or disinfecting composition which may be used for coating a
    filter.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for a single or plural layer stock material product provided for in that
    class.


CLS 55/525
TXT Apparatus under subclass 522 in which the media is comprised of (1) a
    woven, substantially regularly looped or linked metal of strand or ribbon
    form or (2) sheet material which has been more or less regularly provided
    with discontinuous slits or cuts and thereafter subjected to tension forces
    to open up the slits or cuts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 131 for a single
    or plural layer stock material product embodying an apertured component and
    subclasses 175+, 190, 193, and 196+ for such a product having a component
    embodying mechanically interengaged strands or strand-portions, subclass
    596 for metallic stock which is apertured, and subclass 613 for such stock
    or article which is porous.

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 181+ and 304+ for a woven or knit fabric.


CLS 55/526
TXT Apparatus under subclass 525 in which the mesh or expanded sheet has been
    gathered or pressed together to a more compact and solid form.


CLS 55/527
TXT Apparatus under subclass 522 in which the media is threaded like or of
    comparatively extensive length as contrasted with its diameter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    520,    for a continuous strand which is wound or coiled on itself or in
    spaced relation so as to form at least one spiral convolution.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product embodying a fiber layer, subclasses 292.1+ for
    a fiber-containing web or sheet, and subclasses 357+ for a mass of fibers
    or filaments which are coated or structurally defined.


CLS 55/528
TXT Apparatus under subclass 527 in which the fiber or strand is derived from
    matter which is or has been living (e.g., hair, cellulose, coal) or is
    produced by organic chemical synthesis (e.g., nylon, polyethylene).


CLS 55/529
TXT Apparatus under the class definition not otherwise provided for above.


CLS 56/
TTL HARVESTERS

CLS 56/
TXT This class includes means for severing crops which grow above the surface
    of the ground, without disturbing the soil, and means for gathering the
    same from the field after they are severed.  Subject matter relating to
    cutting crop material lying on the ground without disturbing the soil is
    also included.

    Cutting implements carried in the hand or by the body and capable of
    general application are classified in Class 30, Cutlery.

    The raking devices in this class are limited to the type that are designed
    to gather hay, straw, grass, leaves, or the like.  Intermittent loaders,
    which may travel over the ground and which have forks which gather a load
    and then swing upwardly to lift the same and dump it, are classified in
    Class 414, Material or Article Handling.

    Beet crop harvesters, such as beet harvesters, potato-diggers, and the
    like, and means for uprooting and recovering stalks or weeds are classified
    in Class 171, Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects.

    Stone gatherers which gather stones by impelling the above ground portions
    of partially buried stones are found in Class 171, Unearthing Plants or
    Buried Objects, subclasses 63+.  See the Notes to this subclass for other
    types of gatherers.

    Machines for scooping up manure are classified in Class 37, Excavating,
    subclasses 118+.

    (1)     Note.  See (19) Note of the class definition of Class 30, Cutlery.

    (2)     Note.  See (5) Note of the class definition of Class 294, Handling:
     Hand and Hoist-Line Implements.


CLS 56/1
TXT Inventions falling within the main class definition and not classifiable
    elsewhere.


CLS 56/2
TXT Machines which by removing, interchanging, or shifting certain parts may be
    converted from one type of harvester into another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400.04+, for convertible hand rakes.


CLS 56/3
TXT Having means to cut grain and convey it away from the point where it falls,
    but capable of being converted into a mower by detachment of the conveying
    means.


CLS 56/4
TXT The conveying means comprising a rake oscillating or revolving about a
    vertical axis.


CLS 56/5
TXT Having means to cut grain and catch it as it falls, but capable of being
    converted into a mower by the detachment of the catcher.


CLS 56/6
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising two or more similar cutting
    units each comprising a cutter and frame or mounting means, which units are
    connected together and operated as a single machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13.6+,  for a harvester having plural, motor- driven cutter-units.

    234+,   for hedge or plant row trimmers having a plurality of cutters.

    238,    for cutting devices which make successive cuts at different heights.

    251,    for rotating cutting reels having an auxiliary cutter.


CLS 56/7
TXT Each of the constituent machines having cutting-knives carried on the
    periphery of a rotating reel, generally adapted for mowing lawns.


CLS 56/8
TXT Devices used for cutting or removing marine-plant growth.


CLS 56/9
TXT Having a conveyor to convey the growth to the desired point.


CLS 56/10.1
TXT Machine under the class definition wherein a harvester or an operating
    assemblage thereof derives all or part of its motive power from a motor or
    engine, or from a vehicle that is driven by a motor or engine.

    (1)     Note.  For this and indented subclasses, the terms "motor" and
    "vehicle" may be considered in their broadest aspects.  Among terms
    acceptable for, or equivalent to, "motor" are: "power take-off", "engine",
    "hydraulic ram", "drive means" (i.e., where the specification discloses a
    motor), these being only examples of such terms.  Among terms acceptable
    for, or equivalent to, "vehicle" are such exemplary term as:
    "self-propelled machine", "engine- driven wheeled frame", "tractor",
    "mobile frame" (i.e., where the specification discloses that the mobility
    of the frame is derived from a motor).

    (2)     Note.  The term "operating assemblage" refers to that portion of a
    harvester that causes a change in the condition or the location of the
    material operated upon.  Such material may be vegetation (i.e., that which
    is growing from the ground) or crop (i.e., that which has been separated
    from the ground by a harvester unit).  The change in condition may be
    effected by such exemplary assemblages as a cutting unit, a (corn) snapping
    unit, a (cotton) picking unit, a (wheat) threshing unit, and the change in
    location may be effected by such exemplary assemblages as a gathering unit
    (i.e., that which directs vegetation to a cutter or picker) or a conveyor
    unit (i.e., that which moves crop from one location to another).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    328,    for a motor-operated fruit and nut gatherer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 180, 206, 210, 216, and 264 for motor operated
    cutlery.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 35+, for an earth working tool driven by
    a motor.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, appropriate subclass for subject matter
    directed to driving or impacting a tool, and particularly subclasses 184+
    for tool driving or impacting means mounted on a vehicle.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 14.1+ for a train of two or more
    vehicles, at least one of them being a motor vehicle; and subclasses 53.1+
    for a motor vehicle provided with means for facilitating the use of its
    motor for supplying power to drive another machine (e.g., power take-off).


CLS 56/10.2
TXT Machine under subclass 10.1 wherein the harvester includes means for: (a)
    sensing a characteristic of the harvester or a characteristic that is
    external to the harvester but related to its use, and (b) performing an
    action by at least one of the operating assemblages thereof, which action
    is a direct result of such sensing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    901,    Robots, subcollection 9 for a sensor on the end of a robot arm for
    controlling arm movement and subcollection 32 for sensor operated gripping
    jaws on a robot arm.


CLS 56/10.3
TXT Machine under subclass 10.2 wherein the action results from a load
    requirement that is greater than the motor can safely deliver, and the
    action is effected by permitting the motor to operate without transmitting
    its power to the load.

    (1)     Note.  The action may be effected by use of a frangible connection
    in the drive train between the motor and the load or by a disconnectable or
    slippable clutch in such drive train.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10.8+,  for a harvester wherein a clutch or other equivalent means in the
    drive train is controlled at the will of an operator.

    12.7,   for a harvester wherein the cutting blade thereof is resiliently or
    pivotally mounted on its drive shaft.


CLS 56/10.4
TXT Machine under subclass 10.2 wherein the action results from the sensing of
    an obstacle in the path of movement of a cutting assemblage on the
    harvester, and the action is effected by a means for withdrawing said
    assemblage from its normal cutting position in said path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15.3,   for a harvester having a drive train that permits a harvester to be
    repositioned in a breakaway action.

    15.7,   for a harvester having a joint between a tractor and a cutting
    assemblage that permits the assemblage to breakaway.


CLS 56/10.5
TXT Machine under subclass 10.1 wherein the operation of the motor or engine is
    regulated by the occurrence of an action that cannot be predicted.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for a lawn mower having an electric
    motor and a switch whereby current to the motor is turned on or off at the
    will of the operator, or having a gasoline motor and an auxiliary starter
    or a switch to cut off the ignition current of the engine at the will of
    the operator.


CLS 56/10.6
TXT Machine under subclass 10.1 provided with two or more motors, engines or
    other sources of energy.

    (1)     Note.  For this and indented subclasses, the power is that which is
    applied to any mechanism of the harvester.  Therefore, although in this
    subclass (10.6) plural cutting assemblages are disclosed, each assemblage
    driven by its own motor, the indented subclass (10.7) provides for a
    harvester wherein an operating assemblage is powered by one motor, and
    operating assemblage is repositioned relative to the harvester by a second
    motor, and the harvester is moved over the ground by a third motor (or any
    combination of such motor-moved devices), even though all such motors are
    supplied with energy from a common source of energy.


CLS 56/10.7
TXT Machine under subclass 10.6 wherein one of the motors drives one mechanism
    of the harvester and another of the motors drives a mechanism having a
    purpose different from that of the first-mentioned portion.

    (1)     Note.  For examples of types of mechanism found in this subclass,
    see (1) Note to subclass 10.6.


CLS 56/10.8
TXT Machine under subclass 10.1 provided with means for connecting or
    disconnecting or regulating the action of one or more mechanisms of the
    harvester or the vehicle relative to its motor, at the will of an operator.

    (1)     Note.  The term "mechanism" includes (a) those parts of an
    operating assemblage that move relative to one another or to their
    supporting structure for the purpose of performing a harvesting function,
    (b) those parts of a harvester-supporting structure that move relative to
    the harvester or its vehicle for the purpose of adjusting the structure
    relative to the harvester or its vehicle, and (c) those parts of a vehicle
    that move relative to the vehicle or the ground for the purpose of
    transiting the vehicle over the ground.

    (2)     Note.  In this and indented subclasses a foot-actuated pedal is
    considered to be as "manual" as a hand-actuated lever.


CLS 56/10.9
TXT Machine under subclass 10.8 wherein the motor is actuated by force applied
    via a liquid or gaseous medium, and wherein the motor action is regulated
    by a device that directs the flow of said medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11.9,   for a harvester provided with a fluid-pressure motor and a
    conventional or not significant valve therefor.


CLS 56/11.1
TXT Machine under subclass 10.8 wherein the means causes a change in the
    proportion of motor movement relative to mechanism movement.


CLS 56/11.2
TXT Machine under subclass 10.8 wherein the means causes a change in the
    direction of movement of the mechanism from one direction to an opposite
    direction.


CLS 56/11.3
TXT Machine under subclass 10.8 wherein the means includes a device for
    stopping motion of the motor or the mechanism and a device for connecting
    the motor to, and disconnecting it from, the mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 12+ for a clutch and
    brake subcombination, per se.


CLS 56/11.4
TXT Machine under subclass 10.8 wherein the means includes two or more
    mechanisms and a corresponding number of series of connected parts through
    which motion is transmitted from a motor to said mechanisms, each of which
    series is provided with a device for connecting the motor to and
    disconnecting it from the mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses provide for a harvester
    wherein, for example, it is desired to disconnect the cutter unit thereof
    while continuing drive to the transit wheels thereof from the motor.


CLS 56/11.5
TXT Machine under subclass 11.4 wherein each series includes a
    clutch-assemblage.

    (1)     Note.  A clutch-assemblage comprises all the parts that cooperate
    together to (a) connect a rotating "input" shaft (or a pulley, drum,
    flywheel, gear or other equivalent torque-transmitting member) to a
    rotatable "output" shaft (or hub, pulley, gear or other equivalent
    torque-transmitting member) that is coaxial with and driven by the input
    shaft, or (b) disconnect said shafts from rotational relationship, either
    action being performed at the will of the user of the clutch-assemblage.


CLS 56/11.6
TXT Machine under subclass 10.8 wherein the means includes an endless band
    trained around pulleys on the motor and the mechanism, and wherein the
    connection is made by tightening the band into close engagement with the
    pulleys.


CLS 56/11.7
TXT Machine under subclass 10.8 wherein the means includes a clutch-assemblage.

    (1)     Note.  The term "clutch-assemblage" is defined in (1) Note to the
    definition of subclass 11.5 above.


CLS 56/11.8
TXT Machine under subclass 11.7 wherein the clutch-assemblage connects and
    disconnects either the cutting unit or the driven ground-engaging wheels of
    the vehicle relative to the motor or engine.


CLS 56/11.9
TXT Machine under subclass 10.1 wherein the motor is actuated by force applied
    via a liquid or gaseous medium, or wherein the motor is actuated by a
    source of potential power.

    (1)     Note.  The most common source of stored-energy in a harvester of
    this subclass is an electric battery carried on the harvester to operate
    the electric motor thereof.  However, a spring-operated or a
    weight-operated motor would also be proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10.9,   for a harvester provided with a fluid-pressure motor and a valve to
    control the operation thereof.


CLS 56/12.1
TXT Machine under subclass 10.1 provided with means for restoring a cutting
    blade or a vegetation-gathering member to its original or operative state
    of being.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provided for a harvester having means for
    sharpening a cutting blade or cleaning a cutting blade or picker member
    (e.g., a cotton-gathering spindle), or moistening such a picker member to
    remove the wisps of cotton not picked up by a cotton "doffer".  The
    cleaning means is in addition to that means which strips the bulk of the
    cotton, or other crop, from the gathering members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250,    for a cutting-reel and a sharpening means.


CLS 56/12.2
TXT Machine under subclass 10.1 wherein the power source emits thermal
    radiation or gaseous by-products therefrom, and provided with means for
    utilizing such emissions during the harvesting operation.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for a lawn mower wherein the exhaust
    gas is used to set up the grass to be cut evenly, or to help discharge the
    cut crop, or for a harvester wherein heat from the engine helps dry the
    crop.


CLS 56/12.3
TXT Machine under subclass 10.1 provided with a series of connected parts
    through which motion is transmitted from the motor to the mechanism, and
    further provided with means for applying a friction-reducing fluid to said
    series.

    (1)     Note.  The term "mechanism" is defined in (1) Note to the
    definition of subclass 10.8.


CLS 56/12.4
TXT Machine under subclass 10.1 provided with prong members that engage and
    handle vegetation or crop and further provided with means for causing said
    members to move with more than one degree of movement.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for a harvester wherein there is a
    cylinder having projecting fingers, and the fingers move generally radially
    in and out of the cylinder as the cylinder rotates, or for a harvester
    wherein prongs of a hay rake revolve with their supporting carriage and an
    axis parallel to the ground but maintain their orientation so their free
    ends point constantly toward the ground.


CLS 56/12.5
TXT Machine under subclass 12.4, each of said prong members having an axis that
    extends along its length, and the members all lying in substantially a
    common plane, wherein each member rotates on its own axis and all the
    members move in an endless path lying in said plane.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for a harvester for picking cotton
    wherein the picking fingers rotate to wind the cotton boll onto the
    fingers, and are carried on an endless chain that brings the fingers to a
    position whereat the cotton is stripped from the fingers.


CLS 56/12.6
TXT Machine under subclass 10.1 provided with a series of connected parts
    through which motion is transmitted from the motor to the mechanism,
    wherein said series is mounted so as to be detachable, one part from
    another, or is mounted so as to prevent high-frequency impulses from being
    transmitted from one part of the machine to another part thereof.

    (1)     Note.  It is inherent in any series of connected parts that certain
    of the parts may be disconnected therefrom and reconnected thereto.
    Therefore, there should be clearly disclosed the features implicit in the
    title and definition of the subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10.3,   for a harvester having a connection between a motor and a mechanism
    driven thereby, which connection is capable of slipping under a condition
    of overload and is, therefore, inherently capable of absorbing vibrations
    that would otherwise be transmitted from one part of a machine to another
    part thereof.

    10.8+,  for a harvester having a clutch or other separable connection
    between a motor and a mechanism driven thereby, which connection is
    intended for manual control of the drive train rather than for detachment
    thereof.


CLS 56/12.7
TXT Machine under subclass 10.1 provided with a cutting blade that is supported
    on a driving shaft by a resilient or pivotal connection.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for a harvester wherein the cutting
    blade thereof is mounted so that it will move or "give" relative to its
    driving shaft, thereby reducing the possibility of the blade breaking, or
    producing a flailing action on the vegetation or crop.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10.3,   for a harvester wherein a drive train includes a frangible or
    slippable connection therein.


CLS 56/12.8
TXT Machine under subclass 10.1 provided with an operating assemblage
    comprising means for moving air under pressure or suction, whereby
    vegetation or crop is moved relative to the harvester under the influence
    of the moving air.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the air-blower cools the motor or engine or
    provides a force for lifting the harvester out of contact with the ground.


CLS 56/12.9
TXT Machine under subclass 12.8 wherein the air-moving assemblage sucks or
    directs vegetation (i.e., that which is growing from the ground) to the
    harvester.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30+,    for a pneumatic cotton-picker.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, for a pneumatic conveyor, per se.


CLS 56/13.1
TXT Machine under subclass 12.9 provided with an air duct between the
    vegetation and the air-moving assemblage, wherein that end of the air duct
    opposite the air-moving assemblage is applied to vegetation so as to draw
    vegetation to the harvester.


CLS 56/13.2
TXT Machine under subclass 13.1 further provided with means mounted on a
    driving shaft located in the air duct near the vegetation end thereof,
    which means imparts multitudinous impulses to the vegetation adjacent the
    air duct whereby to agitate the vegetation and separate one portion from
    another.

    (1)     Note.  The impulse means usually comprises a rotating shaft having
    bristles or loosely-mounted flail elements thereon, but may include any
    other means that beats the vegetation.


CLS 56/13.3
TXT Machine under subclass 12.8 wherein the air-moving assemblage directs crop
    (i.e., that which has been separated from the ground by a harvester unit)
    within or away from the harvester.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, for a pneumatic conveyor, per se.


CLS 56/13.4
TXT Machine under subclass 13.3 provided with a cutting knife actuated by a
    motor-driven shaft, and wherein a fan of the air-blower assemblage is
    supported on the same shaft that actuates the knife.


CLS 56/13.5
TXT Machine under subclass 10.1 provided with at least two operating
    assemblages driven by a motor or engine.

    (1)     Note.  A distinction is made between the driving of harvester
    components for the purpose of treating or handling vegetation or crop and
    the driving of harvester components for the purpose of adjusting them
    relative to one another. For example, a harvester wherein cutting blades
    are driven and a crop conveyor is driven, or a harvester wherein snapping
    rolls are driven and husking rolls are driven would be found in this or
    indented subclasses because in the named instances both units are operating
    assemblages.  However, a harvester wherein cutting blades are driven and a
    structure that supports those cutting blades or a structure that supports
    another operating assemblage is repositioned by motor means, or a harvester
    wherein snapping rolls are driven and the transit wheels that move the
    harvester over the ground are driven by motor means will be found, for
    example, in subclasses 14.7+, particularly 15.1+, because the supporting
    structure and the transit wheels are not considered to be operating
    assemblages.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11.4+,  for a harvester wherein drive trains to plural operating
    assemblages are controlled by an operator.


CLS 56/13.6
TXT Machine under subclass 13.5 wherein the operating assemblages are cutting
    assemblages that act to cut vegetation or crop either in different places
    or ways or at different times from one another.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for a harvester wherein one cutting
    assemblage cuts one swath of vegetation and a second cutting assemblage
    cuts a second, different swath of vegetation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6+,     for a gang harvester.

    60+,    for a harvester having a cutter and a stalk chopper.

    234+    and 251, for a harvester having plural cutter-units.


CLS 56/13.7
TXT Machine under subclass 13.6 wherein the cutting assemblages act to cut
    vegetation or crop in different ways or at different times from one another.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for a harvester wherein one cutting
    assemblage cuts tall grass with a reciprocating sickle cutter and another
    cutting assemblage cuts short grass with a rotating disk type cutter, or a
    harvester wherein one cutting assemblage is disconnected from the driving
    train and the other cutting assemblage connected into the driving train for
    alternative operation of such cutting assemblages.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, subclasses 123+, for stripping and
    topping mechanism, per se.


CLS 56/13.8
TXT Machine under subclass 13.7 wherein the cutting assemblages are spaced
    apart and positioned relative to one another such that the product of
    (i.e., the material cut by) one assemblage is work for (i.e, the material
    to be cut by) a succeeding assemblage.


CLS 56/13.9
TXT Machine under subclass 13.8 provided with means located in the space
    separating two cutting assemblages for moving the product of one assemblage
    to the succeeding assemblage to be work therefor.


CLS 56/14.1
TXT Machine under subclass 13.5 wherein each of at least two of the operating
    assemblages comprises two generally cylindrical members rotating in
    opposite angular directions on generally parallel axes and spaced apart a
    distance sufficient to admit vegetation or crop between the cylindrical
    peripheries of said members.

    (1)     Note. The roller-couple described above is called a "snapping unit"
    if it pulls vegetation (usually corn) from the stalk and called a "husking
    unit" if it removes the outer husk from an ear of corn.

    (2)     Note.  In some harvesters one axis is common to one roller of a
    snapping unit and one roller of a husking unit, and another parallel axis
    is common to the other roller of said snapping unit and the other roller of
    said husking unit. However, each unit functions without regard to the
    other, therefore the structure is proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, subclasses 25+ for husking mechanism,
    per se.


CLS 56/14.2
TXT Machine under subclass 14.1 further provided with an operating assemblage
    comprising two devices spaced from one another and having elements thereon
    for engaging vegetation lying between the devices, the elements of the
    respective devices moving orbitally in opposite angular directions such
    that when the elements of the respective devices are closest together they
    are moving toward one of the roller-couple operating assemblages, thereby
    to direct the vegetation engaged between the devices to the action of said
    roller-couple.


CLS 56/14.3
TXT Machine under subclass 13.5 wherein one of the operating assemblages
    comprises first means for engaging and actively directing vegetation to the
    action of the harvester and another of the operating assemblages comprises
    second means for cutting the vegetation directed thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17.3,   for a lawn mower wherein passive means directs vegetation to a
    cutting assemblage.

    94,     for a harvester including a gatherer and a cutter.


CLS 56/14.4
TXT Machine under subclass 14.3 wherein the first means comprises a device
    rotatable about an axis that is generally parallel to the ground and having
    vegetation-engaging elements rotatable therewith about said axis, which
    device is rotated in an angular direction such that when the elements are
    closest to the ground they are moving toward the harvester.


CLS 56/14.5
TXT Machine under subclass 13.5 wherein one of the operating units comprises
    first means for cutting vegetation or crop and another of the operating
    units comprises second means for moving crop to or from the first means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153+,   for a harvester including a cutter and a conveyor.


CLS 56/14.6
TXT Machine under subclass 14.5 provided with a third means for dividing one
    portion of the crop from another portion of the crop.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the term "thresher" is considered as
    equivalent to a crop-separating unit, and a harvester including a cutter, a
    conveyor and a thresher is found herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, appropriate subclasses, for a
    threshing mechanism, per se.


CLS 56/14.7
TXT Machine under subclass 10.1 provided with a carriage or conveyance that
    derives its motive power for travelling over the ground from a motor or
    engine, to which carriage is connected an operating assemblage of a
    harvester to effect travel of said assemblage over the ground.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for a self-propelled lawn mower that
    is guided by a walking attendant or a self-propelled lawn mower that is
    steered by a riding attendant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16.7+,  for a lawn mower that is driven for cutting by a motor, but is
    propelled and guided by a walking attendant.


CLS 56/14.8
TXT Machine under subclass 14.7 wherein the carriage has at least one wheel
    that is rotated solely by reason of its engagement with the ground as the
    carriage travels over the ground, and provided with a series of connected
    parts through which motion is transmitted to the operating assemblage
    solely from said wheel.


CLS 56/14.9
TXT Machine under subclass 14.7 provided with a structure for supporting the
    operating assemblage and means for attaching said structure to the
    carriage, which means allows said structure to be relocated with respect to
    said carriage.


CLS 56/15.1
TXT Machine under subclass 14.9 further provided with a series of connected
    parts for transmitting motion from the motor or engine to said structure
    for the purpose of re-locating said structure with respect to the carriage.


CLS 56/15.2
TXT Machine under subclass 15.1 wherein the structure that is relocated is that
    which supports the cutting assemblage.


CLS 56/15.3
TXT Machine under subclass 14.9 further provided with a series of connected
    parts for transmitting motion from the motor or engine to an operating
    assemblage on said structure, wherein the series of parts may be bent or
    reoriented relative to one another to maintain the motion-transmitting
    connection between the motor and the assemblage despite the relocation of
    the structure.


CLS 56/15.4
TXT Machine under subclass 14.9 wherein the structure is provided with one or
    more ground-engaging wheels that may be turned about a substantially
    vertical axis.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for a harvester wherein its
    propelling vehicle (e.g., tractor) has a set of steering wheels for the
    tractor and the operating assemblage is supported in a structure that has
    its own set of steering wheels separate from those of the vehicle.


CLS 56/15.5
TXT Machine under subclass 14.9 wherein the structure is relocated relative to
    the carriage in a direction that is transverse to the direction of movement
    of the carriage and parallel to the ground.


CLS 56/15.6
TXT Machine under subclass 14.9 wherein the means may be manipulated by an
    operator to cause the structure to be detached from the carriage and
    reattached easily.

    (1)     Note.  It is inherent in any structure that is attached to a
    machine that the structure may be detached therefrom and reattached
    thereto.  Therefore, there should be clearly disclosed the features
    implicit in the title and definition of the subclass.


CLS 56/15.7
TXT Machine under subclass 14.9 wherein the means includes a yieldable portion
    or includes an attachment permitting movement of the structure in plural
    directions simultaneously.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for a harvester wherein vibrations
    that may be generated in one mechanism of a harvester will be damped so as
    not to be transmitted to another mechanism of the harvester, or for a
    harvester wherein an operating assemblage may be pivoted in a vertical
    plane extending laterally and may also be pivoted in a horizontal plane
    (e.g., in a "breakaway" cutter).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10.4,   for a harvester having "breakaway" mechanism, wherein retraction of
    a cutter assemblage is a direct result of the cutter assemblage meeting an
    obstruction to its movement, and such retraction is permitted by a
    universal-action hitch.


CLS 56/15.8
TXT Machine under subclass 15.7 wherein the structure is supported by the
    ground over which it travels, and follows the contours of the ground
    regardless of irregularities therein.


CLS 56/15.9
TXT Machine under subclass 14.9 wherein the means includes an axle or shaft
    that is generally parallel to the ground and serves as a hinge on which the
    structure swivels.


CLS 56/16.1
TXT Machine under subclass 15.9 wherein the operating assemblage includes
    elongated fingers extending generally in the direction of travel of the
    harvester, and wherein the attaching means includes an axle or shaft
    extending generally across said direction of travels, whereby the structure
    supporting said fingers may swivel in a vertical plane about a lateral axis.

    (1)     Note.  In use, the harvester of this subclass is driven over ground
    on which crop (i.e., vegetation that has been cut) is lying while the tines
    are disposed close to the ground.  When a mass of crop has accumulated on
    the tines, the structure is lifted and the crop transported to another
    location in the field.


CLS 56/16.2
TXT Machine under subclass 15.9 wherein the axle or shaft lies along the
    direction of travel of the harvester.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for a harvester wherein a cutting
    assemblage extends laterally out from the side of the harvester and folds
    up about the longitudinal pivot to reduce the lateral dimension of the
    harvester and facilitate travel thereof along a roadway.


CLS 56/16.3
TXT Machine under subclass 15.9 wherein the means includes a bar operating
    about a fulcrum and connected to the structure for swiveling said structure
    about its hinge shaft, which bar has a detent or lock for maintaining the
    bar and the structure in a desired position.


CLS 56/16.4
TXT Machine under subclass 10.1 wherein the operating assemblage changes the
    location or the condition of crop (i.e., that which has been separated from
    the ground by a harvester assemblage).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 1+, for binder applying methods and apparatus,
    not otherwise classifiable, and not involving gathering of material from
    the ground, and especially subclass 6 for such apparatus including means to
    cut or rupture the material into parts.


CLS 56/16.5
TXT Machine under subclass 16.4 wherein the operating assemblage divides one
    portion of crop from another portion thereof, or divides unwanted material
    (e.g., debris or trash) from wanted crop.


CLS 56/16.6
TXT Machine under subclass 16.4 provided with a container into which the
    operating assemblage disposes of the crop.


CLS 56/16.7
TXT Machine under subclass 10.1 provided with a carriage or conveyance having
    one or more wheels or skids engaging the ground, on which carriage is
    mounted an operating assemblage of a harvester and a motor or engine for
    operating said assemblage.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses provide for a harvester,
    usually termed "lawn mower", that is propelled over the ground by a person,
    but derives its motive power for cutting from a motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11.6,   for a lawn mower similar to that found in this (16.7) and indented
    subclasses, in which lawn mower the drive to a cutter and/or transit wheel
    is controlled by regulating the tautness of an endless belt trained over
    driving and driven pulleys.

    14.7,   for a lawn mower similar to that found in this (16.7) and indented
    subclasses, in which lawn mower a motor drives both the cutter and the
    vehicle that supports the cutter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 42+, for a motor-driven earth working
    implement guided by a walking attendant.


CLS 56/16.8
TXT Machine under subclass 16.7 provided with means for discharging flowable
    matter therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for a lawn mower having means to
    spread fertilizer or weed-killer, for example, in addition to its
    grass-cutting means.


CLS 56/16.9
TXT Machine under subclass 16.7 wherein the motor or engine may drive two or
    more mechanisms, or may be utilized to drive one mechanism for two or more
    different purposes.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for a lawn mower wherein the motor
    may drive a cutter or a sweeper, or one wherein the motor may drive the
    cutter as a grass cutter or as a mulcher, these being only exemplary of
    machines found therein.


CLS 56/17.1
TXT Machine under subclass 16.7 wherein the assemblage is a cutting assemblage,
    and provided with means for changing the location of said assemblage with
    respect to the ground over which the harvester travels.


CLS 56/17.2
TXT Machine under subclass 17.1 wherein the ground-engaging portion (e.g.,
    wheel or skid) of the carriage is relocated with respect to its carriage,
    thereby relocating the cutting assemblage with respect to the ground.


CLS 56/17.3
TXT Machine under subclass 16.7 provided with a passive element mounted on the
    carriage and located so as to deflect or direct vegetation (i.e., that
    which is to be cut) to the action of a cutting assemblage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14.3+,  for a harvester wherein moving means directs vegetation to the
    harvester assemblage.


CLS 56/17.4
TXT Machine under subclass 16.7 provided with means for preventing injury to
    either the machine or the operator thereof.


CLS 56/17.5
TXT Machine under subclass 16.7 wherein the motor or engine includes an element
    that is turned thereby about an axis, and the operating assemblage includes
    a cutting knife mounted on said element for turning therewith.


CLS 56/17.6
TXT Machine under subclass 16.7 wherein the operating assemblage includes a
    cutting knife that moves to-and-fro in a straight line or an arcuate path,
    and provided with a series of connected parts that connects the motor or
    engine to said knife whereby the motor causes the knife to move.


CLS 56/27.5
TXT Devices used in harvesting tobacco and not elsewhere classified.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 26 for devices for stringing
    tobacco upon hangers or unstringing it therefrom.


CLS 56/28
TXT Devices used in harvesting cotton not elsewhere classifiable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses 80+, for cotton-cleaning
    mechanism, per se.

    280,    Land Vehicles, for vehicles to receive cotton as it is picked.

    383,    Flexible Bags, for bags of general utility.


CLS 56/29
TXT Having means for beating the cotton from the plant and gathering it when it
    falls.


CLS 56/30
TXT Having means for detaching the cotton from the plant and conveying it to a
    receptacle, including a pneumatic device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.9+,  for a motor-driven pneumatic harvester.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, for pneumatic conveying means, per se.


CLS 56/31
TXT Manually directed to each boll individually.


CLS 56/32
TXT The invention being limited to a nozzle having means peculiarly adapted to
    detach the cotton from the boll.


CLS 56/33
TXT Having means for stripping the bolls from the plant.

    Search This Class, Subclass:

    126     and 330.


CLS 56/34
TXT Including a comb, between the teeth of which the stalks are drawn, while
    the teeth strip off the bolls.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    115, 127, 128, 129, and 130.


CLS 56/35
TXT The comb having motion other than the forward travel of the machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    130 and 330.


CLS 56/36
TXT Having means to pick the lint from the boll, leaving the hull on the cotton
    plant.


CLS 56/37
TXT Manually directed to each boll individually.


CLS 56/38
TXT Having the picking mechanism mounted on an endless belt.


CLS 56/39
TXT The entire operating mechanism driven by manual power.


CLS 56/40
TXT Including a rotary picking member.


CLS 56/41
TXT Comprising long slender members rotating on their longitudinal axes and
    provided with means to engage the cotton lint and remove it from the plants.


CLS 56/42
TXT Having the spindle mounted on an endless belt, by which they are carried to
    and from a position to engage the cotton on the plants.


CLS 56/43
TXT Having a track or guide which engages a cam connected with the spindles in
    order to guide the spindles into a proper position to engage the cotton on
    the plants.


CLS 56/44
TXT The rotary spindles mounted on a rotating drum or the like, by which they
    are carried bodily to and from a position to engage the cotton on the
    plants.


CLS 56/45
TXT The spindle being flexible, so that the projecting ends of the same will
    bend downwardly by their own weight.


CLS 56/46
TXT The spindle reciprocating longitudinally at the same time that it is being
    rotated on its longitudinal axis and being carried around bodily on the
    rotary carrier.


CLS 56/47
TXT Having a track or guide which engages a cam connected with the spindles in
    order to guide the spindles into a proper position to engage the cotton on
    the plants.


CLS 56/48
TXT Comprising a drum, cylinder, or the like rotating or oscillating on its
    axis and having means to engage and remove the cotton lint from the plants.


CLS 56/49
TXT The picking means carried by an endless belt.


CLS 56/50
TXT Elements of long slender form having lint- engaging means and usually
    rotated on their longitudinal axes to engage the lint in the  boll.


CLS 56/51
TXT Devices for harvesting Indian corn or similar growth not classifiable
    elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 300+ for a conveyor carried by
    a ground vehicle, subclasses 604 and 626.1+ for opposed, load-gripping
    endless belt conveyors, and subclasses 506+ for a conveyor specialized for
    collecting a load from the ground.


CLS 56/52
TXT Comprising means for breaking the standing stalks.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes machines for performing the operation
    on broomcorn known as tabling--i.e., breaking down the head and leaving it
    to hang top downward to dry.


CLS 56/53
TXT Including means for cutting standing cornstalks or other stalks of similar
    nature, regardless of the ultimate disposition of the cut stalks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, for hand implements for cutting corn, particularly
    subclasses 297 and 309.


CLS 56/54
TXT Having in combination with the stalk- cutting means, mechanism for trimming
    or cleaning broom-corn.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, subclasses 123+ for trimming or
    cleaning mechanism, per se.


CLS 56/55
TXT Having a rotating reel for gathering the standing stalks and directing them
    to the cutter.


CLS 56/56
TXT The cutters being so located as to sever the standing stalk close to the
    top and means for catching the top after it is cut off.

    (1)     Note. These machines are more especially adapted for harvesting
    such crops as Kafir corn, milo maize, and feterita.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 537 for a machine for
    cutting off the top from stalks which have previously been cut and
    subclasses 635 and 643 for cutting means that removes the tops from food.


CLS 56/57
TXT Having a rotating reel for gathering the standing stalks and directing them
    to the cutter.


CLS 56/58
TXT The reel rotating about a horizontal axis.


CLS 56/59
TXT Having endless chains for gathering the standing stalks and directing them
    to the cutter.


CLS 56/60
TXT Having means for cutting the stalks up into short lengths.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13.7+,  for a harvester having motorized plural cutter-units.


CLS 56/61
TXT Having means for catching the short lengths of stalks after they are cut,
    the stalks so cut being generally used as silage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, or the comminution or
    cutting of material of that class (241) type which may include the cutting
    of silage.


CLS 56/62
TXT Having means for stripping off the leaves and removing the tops from the
    stalks as they are severed, being generally used in harvesting sugar-cane.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, subclasses 123+ for cane strippers,
    per se.


CLS 56/63
TXT Having means for removing the tops from the stalks as they are severed.


CLS 56/64
TXT Having, in connection with stalk-cutting mechanism, means for removing the
    ears from the stalks, with or without means for removing the husks from the
    ears.


CLS 56/65
TXT Having a rotating reel for gathering the standing stalks and directing them
    to the cutter.


CLS 56/66
TXT Having endless chains for gathering the standing stalks and directing them
    to the cutter.


CLS 56/67
TXT Having automatic binding mechanism to bind the stalks into bundles after
    they are cut.


CLS 56/68
TXT The stalks being bound into bundles while standing in upright position.


CLS 56/69
TXT Having endless chains for gathering the standing stalks and directing them
    to the cutter.


CLS 56/70
TXT Having means for adjusting the binding mechanism bodily, so that the stalks
    will be bound at any desired distance from, their ends.


CLS 56/71
TXT Having mechanism for effecting the discharge of the cut stalks from the
    machine.


CLS 56/72
TXT The discharging means comprising a crane or similar means for lifting the
    bundle of stalks bodily from the harvester and lowering it to the ground.

    (1)     Note.  Search this class, subclass 426 for bundle forming and
    discharging means of this type if the invention does not include gathering
    or cutting.

    (2)     Note.  Search Class 212, Traversing Hoists, appropriate subclasses
    for cranes, per se.


CLS 56/73
TXT Having means for gathering the standing stalks and directing them to the
    cutter.


CLS 56/74
TXT The gathering means including a rotating reel.


CLS 56/75
TXT The gathering means including endless sprocket-chains.


CLS 56/76
TXT The discharging means including an endless apron, which receives the cut
    stalks and discharges them onto the ground or into a vehicle traveling
    alongside the harvester.


CLS 56/77
TXT Having a rotating reel for gathering the standing stalks and directing them
    to the cutter.


CLS 56/78
TXT Having endless chains for gathering the standing stalks and directing them
    to the cutter.


CLS 56/79
TXT The stalk receptacle or platform being moved horizontally and tilted to
    discharge the collected stalks.


CLS 56/80
TXT Having means for gathering the standing stalks and directing them to the
    cutter.


CLS 56/81
TXT The gathering means including a rotating reel.


CLS 56/82
TXT The gathering means including endless sprocket-chains.


CLS 56/83
TXT The stalk receptacle or platform being tilted to discharge the collected
    stalks.


CLS 56/84
TXT Having means for gathering the standing stalks and directing them to the
    cutter.


CLS 56/85
TXT The gathering means including a rotating spiral.


CLS 56/86
TXT The gathering means including a rotating reel.


CLS 56/87
TXT The reel rotating about a horizontal axis.


CLS 56/88
TXT The gathering means including endless sprocket chains.


CLS 56/89
TXT The gathering means being fixed relatively to the frame of the machine.


CLS 56/90
TXT The platform or bottom of the stalk- receptacle being retracted to permit
    the discharge of the accumulated stalks.


CLS 56/91
TXT Having a rotating reel for gathering the standing stalks and directing them
    to the cutter.


CLS 56/92
TXT Having a rotating reel for gathering the the standing stalks and directing
    them to the cutter.


CLS 56/93
TXT Having endless chains for gathering the standing stalks and directing them
    to the cutter.


CLS 56/94
TXT Having means for gathering the standing stalks and directing them to the
    cutter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14.3+,  for a harvester having a motorized gatherer and cutter.


CLS 56/95
TXT The gathering means including a rotating spiral.


CLS 56/96
TXT The gathering means including a rotating reel.


CLS 56/97
TXT The reel rotating about a horizontal axis.


CLS 56/98
TXT The gathering means including endless sprocket-chains.


CLS 56/99
TXT The gathering means being fixed relatively to the frame of the machine.


CLS 56/100
TXT The cutting means consisting of one or more knives which are fixed with
    respect to the frame of the machine.


CLS 56/101
TXT The cutting means consisting of one or more knives which are fixed with
    respect to the frame of the machine.


CLS 56/102
TXT Limited to the cutting element and those driven elements which are directly
    connected therewith.


CLS 56/103
TXT Having means for detaching the ears from the standing stalks, with or
    without means for subsequently removing the husks which may be left on the
    ears.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, subclasses 25+ for husking mechanism,
    per se.


CLS 56/104
TXT Comprising a pair of rotating rollers which pinch or snap the ear from the
    stalk.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, subclasses 25+ for snapping or
    husking rollers, per se.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the notes thereunder.


CLS 56/105
TXT Having a plurality of pairs of rollers each acting on a separate row of
    corn.


CLS 56/106
TXT Having endless chains only to gather the standing stalks and direct them to
    the stripping-rollers.


CLS 56/107
TXT Having means acting directly on the ear to assist the rollers in detaching
    the same from the stalk.


CLS 56/108
TXT Having endless chains only to gather the standing stalks and direct them to
    the stripping-rollers.


CLS 56/109
TXT Having movable means to gather the standing stalks and direct them to the
    stripping- rollers.


CLS 56/110
TXT The movable gathering means comprising a rotating spiral.


CLS 56/111
TXT The movable gathering means consisting of endless chains only.


CLS 56/112
TXT Having means to adjust the position of the frame which carries the rollers
    with respect to the rest of the harvester-frame.


CLS 56/113
TXT Having a fixed member on the frame, which engages the ears and detaches
    them from the stalks as the latter are drawn through the machine.


CLS 56/114
TXT The snapping member consisting of a fixed bar with teeth in the form of a
    comb.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     34, 127, 128, 129, and 330.


CLS 56/115
TXT Having a fixed knife on or near the comb, which assists in severing the
    stem of the ear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113.


CLS 56/116
TXT Comprising a comb which has a movement relative to the machine to engage
    the ears and strip them from the stalks, the distance between the teeth
    permitting the stalks to pass between, but not the ears.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130     and 330.


CLS 56/117
TXT Comprising a relatively movable knife which severs the ear from the stalk.


CLS 56/118
TXT The knife carried on a traveling endless chain.


CLS 56/119
TXT Limited to the means for gathering the stalks and directing them to the
    cutter or ear-detaching means or for guiding the stalks from the cutter to
    the stalk-bundling mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14.2,   for a harvester having a motorized gatherer and snapping
    roller-couple.


CLS 56/120
TXT Comprising means attached to a corn-harvesting machine peculiarly adapted
    to receive bundles of corn-stalks after they are cut and bound and to load
    the same onto a vehicle traveling alongside.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76,     77 and 78.


CLS 56/121
TXT Comprising means attached to a corn-harvesting machine for receiving and
    carrying bundles of corn-stalks after they are cut and bound until a
    desired number have been accumulated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    474     through 480, for sheaf-carriers for small grain.


CLS 56/121.4
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a carriage or mount having
    cutting means and having gauging means adapted to contact the crop to
    control the height of the cutting means.

    (1)     Note.  The cutter generally functions to cut off the crown and
    foliage of root crops, such as beets, generally arranged in rows.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 635+, for end cutters
    working on crops after removal from the ground, and subclass 491, for a
    cutter that is positioned by the food to be cut.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclasses 32, 33 and 34+ for
    gage controlled cutter means for detachment of plant parts combined with
    apparatus for unearthing such plants.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 5+ for earth working apparatus with an
    automatic power control having a plant sensing means.


CLS 56/121.41
TXT Apparatus under subclass 121.4 where the gauging and cutting means are
    freely supported by a carriage or the like for sidewise movement relative
    thereto so that the gauging and cutting means may follow the irregularities
    of the individual plants in the row.


CLS 56/121.42
TXT Apparatus under subclass 121.4 having means to lift and arrange the foliage
    or to otherwise manipulate the foliage so as to present it to the gauging
    and cutting mechanism in an orderly predetermined fashion.


CLS 56/121.43
TXT Apparatus under subclass 121.4 having cutting means in addition to the
    topping cutter which may either (1) cut at a different height or (2) make a
    slitting cut on the top or crown of the beet so as to divide the top into
    segments.


CLS 56/121.44
TXT Apparatus under subclass 121.4 having means acting to move the cut tops out
    of the path traversed by the gauging and topping mechanism.


CLS 56/121.45
TXT Apparatus under subclass 121.44 where the means moving the cut tops has
    motion relative to the carriage.

    (1)     Note.  The clearing or moving means may itself be attached to or
    integral with a moving cutting device, and may be disclosed merely as
    operating to clear the cutting device.


CLS 56/121.46
TXT Apparatus under subclass 121.4 wherein the gauging means is movable with
    respect to the cutter for regulating the depth of the cut responsive to the
    height and/or diameter of the crown to thereby control the thickness of the
    severed crown; i.e., the higher the crown the deeper the cut.


CLS 56/122
TXT Having means for cutting standing grain, means for threshing the same, and
    means for conveying the cut grain from the cutter to the thresher.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, appropriate subclasses, for threshing
    mechanism, per se.


CLS 56/123
TXT The cutting mechanism comprising a knife which has a reciprocating motion
    transversely of the path of the machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20.


CLS 56/124
TXT The axes of each set of supporting-wheels being in alinement and the cutter
    centrally located with respect to the path of the machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21.


CLS 56/125
TXT The cutter-frame hinged to swing vertically with respect to the main frame
    of the machine about a longitudinal axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20


CLS 56/126
TXT Machines for gathering seed or grain from standing stalks or from the
    ground, including those which thresh from the standing stalks, sometimes
    having a grain separator in combination therewith.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and those indented thereunder may include
    machines having a knife which merely assists the stripping action.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, appropriate subclasses, for grain
    separating mechanism, per se, or for threshing mechanism which threshes the
    stalks after they are cut.


CLS 56/127
TXT Comprising a fixed comb, between the teeth of which the stalks are drawn to
    strip the seed or grain therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     114, 115, and 330.


CLS 56/128
TXT Having a rotary member which beats the heads to assist the comb in removing
    the seed or grain therefrom.


CLS 56/129
TXT The axes of each set of wheels being in alinement and the comb centrally
    located with respect to the path of the machine.


CLS 56/130
TXT Comprising a moving comb which moves through the grain and strips the seed
    or grain from the stalks the latter passing through between the teeth of
    the comb.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     116 and 330.


CLS 56/131
TXT Machines having means to cut grain or the like, a platform upon which the
    grain falls as it is cut, means for binding the grain into sheaves, and
    means for conveying the grain from the platform to the binder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for machines of this type having a motor for driving all or some
    portion of the mechanism; 432 et seq., for inventions limited to the
    binding mechanism, per se, and 153 and the subclasses indented thereunder
    for inventions relating to cutting and conveying not limited to machines
    which bind the grain into sheaves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 6 for binder applying apparatus, not otherwise
    provided for, and not involving gathering of material from the ground, and
    including some means to cut or rupture the material into parts.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses, for conveyors
    which are of general application.


CLS 56/132
TXT Wherein the band is of wire or similar material, the ends being twisted
    together to secure the band around the sheaf.


CLS 56/133
TXT Wherein the band is of straw or similar material and is secured about the
    sheaf by twisting the ends together and tucking them into the sheaf or
    under some portion of the band.


CLS 56/134
TXT Wherein the cutter and platform on which the grain falls may be folded to
    facilitate transportation from one field to another.


CLS 56/135
TXT Wherein the binder is located on the stubble-ward side of the main or bull
    wheel, the grain being conveyed from the platform where it falls over the
    main wheel to the binder.


CLS 56/136
TXT The binder mechanism capable of being folded bodily on the rest of the
    machine for convenience in transporting the same.


CLS 56/137
TXT The binder adjustable longitudinally, so that the band may be tined around
    the sheaf at the desired distance from the end, whatever the length of the
    cut stalks.


CLS 56/138
TXT The invention including specific knot-tying mechanism.


CLS 56/139
TXT The invention including specific knot-tying mechanism.


CLS 56/140
TXT The binding mechanism acting on the grain while the stalks are in upright
    position.

    Search this class, subclass:

    68,     69, and 70.


CLS 56/141
TXT Wherein the sheaf, after being bound, is discharged from the binder in the
    direction of its length.


CLS 56/142
TXT The invention including specific knot-tying mechanism.


CLS 56/143
TXT Wherein the grain is bound and discharged from the machine without being
    raised as high as the upper rim of the main or bull wheel.


CLS 56/144
TXT Therein the grain in passing from the platform, where it falls to the
    binder, is carried in a curved path.


CLS 56/145
TXT The invention including specific knot-tying mechanism.


CLS 56/146
TXT The sheaf being discharged onto the ground or a sheaf-carrier inside of the
    main or bull wheel of the machine.


CLS 56/147
TXT The invention including specific knot-tying mechanism.


CLS 56/148
TXT The sheaf being discharged onto the ground or a sheaf-carrier outside of
    the main or bull wheel of the machine.


CLS 56/149
TXT Wherein the grain passes through the main or bull wheel to the point of
    discharge.


CLS 56/150
TXT The invention including specific knot-tying mechanism.


CLS 56/151
TXT The invention including specific knot-tying mechanism.


CLS 56/152
TXT The invention including specific knot-tying mechanism.


CLS 56/153
TXT Machines having means to cut grain or the like, a platform upon which the
    grain falls as it is cut, and means for moving the grain from the platform
    to a point of discharge.

    (1)     Note.  Search this class, subclass 14.5, for a harvester having a
    motorized cutter and conveyor, and 192, for cutting-machines provided with
    a chute or the like for directing the cut material into a window.

    (2)     Note.  Search Class 198, Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate
    subclasses, for conveyors which are of general application.


CLS 56/154
TXT Wherein the cutting elements travel on an endless chain or belt.


CLS 56/155
TXT Wherein the cutting elements oscillate about pivots coacting with each
    other or with a fixed ledger-plate to effect a shearing action.


CLS 56/156
TXT The cutter comprising knives mounted on the periphery of a rotating reel
    and coacting with a fixed ledger-plate.


CLS 56/157
TXT The cutter comprising a disk having a serrated or sharpened edge and
    rotating on an axis perpendicular to the plane of the disk.


CLS 56/158
TXT Therein the platform is adapted to support a reciprocating cutter.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass and those indented thereunder the cutter
    may not be claimed or even specifically shown, but the invention is
    peculiarly adapted to this type of harvester--i.e., something more than a
    mere conveyor of general application.


CLS 56/159
TXT Wherein the cutter and platform on which the grain falls may be folded to
    facilitate transportation from one field to another.


CLS 56/160
TXT Having a platform on which one or more persons may stand to bind the grain
    manually as it is carried thither by the conveyor.


CLS 56/161
TXT The conveying means comprising a rake automatically operated to rake the
    grain from the cutter-platform to the binder's platform.


CLS 56/162
TXT The rake carried by a traveling endless belt.


CLS 56/163
TXT The conveying means comprising a rake manually operated to rake the grain
    from the cutter-platform to the point of discharge.


CLS 56/164
TXT The conveying means comprising a rake automatically operated to rake the
    grain from the cutter-platform to the point of discharge.


CLS 56/165
TXT Having tongs of grappling-arms which hold the material, after it is raked
    into a gravel, until it can be bound manually into a sheaf.


CLS 56/166
TXT Having means to receive the grain as it is raked from the platform, which
    may be dumped to discharge the collected material.


CLS 56/167
TXT Apparatus under subclass 164 wherein the rake is of the rotating type.
    Included are devices wherein a standing-grain gathering reel also coacts
    with the platform to move the fallen grain therefrom after it has been cut.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219+,   for gathering devices acting on the standing grain only.


CLS 56/168
TXT The head of the rake reciprocating to and from its axis as it rotates.


CLS 56/169
TXT The rake rotating about a vertical axis, usually having also an irregular
    vertical movement to cause it to engage the grain at the proper point in
    its course and to rise out of the way of the operator after leaving the
    grain at its point of discharge.


CLS 56/170
TXT Having a switch to control the vertical movement of the rake to cause it to
    rake the grain from the platform only when desired.


CLS 56/171
TXT Wherein the switch is automatically operated at some predetermined time.


CLS 56/172
TXT Having manually-controlled means to cause the switch to be operated sooner
    or later than it would be operated by the automatic means alone.


CLS 56/173
TXT Wherein the rake is moved rectilinearly to rake the grain from the platform
    and is returned over the same course, the rake usually having some
    additional movement on its return course to enable it to pass over the
    grain then lying on the platform.


CLS 56/174
TXT The movement of the rake controlled by a traveling endless belt or chain.


CLS 56/175
TXT The belt itself having a reciprocating movement.


CLS 56/176
TXT Wherein the rake travels in a vertical circuit--that is, a given point on
    the rake travels substantially in a vertical plane.


CLS 56/177
TXT The rake being mounted on and carried by belts or chains, frequently
    traveling beneath the platform, with the teeth extending up through the
    same to rake the grain therefrom.


CLS 56/178
TXT Wherein the rake travels in a horizontal circuit--that is, a given point on
    the rake travels substantially in a horizontal plane.


CLS 56/179
TXT The rake being mounted on and carried by belts or chains.


CLS 56/180
TXT Raking elements peculiarly adapted for use in mechanism for raking grain
    from a harvester platform.


CLS 56/181
TXT Wherein an endless carrier moving over the platform receives the grain as
    it is cut and either by itself or in connection with other endless carriers
    supports the grain while it is conveyed to the point of discharge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177,    for machines having endless belts carrying teeth which rake the
    grain from the platform to the point of discharge.


CLS 56/182
TXT The grain in its travel being deflected forwardly or rearwardly or the
    direction of the stalks changed.


CLS 56/183
TXT The endless carrier moving intermittently.


CLS 56/184
TXT The endless carrier delivering the grain into a receptacle, which is
    discharged at intervals.


CLS 56/185
TXT The invention including means for elevating the grain above the level of
    the platform to enable it to pass over the bull-wheel or onto an elevated
    deck.


CLS 56/186
TXT Having coaxial wheels and the cutter mounted centrally of the path of the
    machine.


CLS 56/187
TXT Wherein the platform may be tilted to raise or lower the cutter.


CLS 56/188
TXT The tongue, which may be either behind or in front of the platform, having
    a pivotal connection therewith.


CLS 56/189
TXT Attachments of the nature of a chute which is so disposed as to receive the
    material from the conveyor and deliver the same to the ground in a swath.


CLS 56/190
TXT Devices attached to a machine to prevent the wind from disarranging the
    position of the material as it is cut and conveyed to the binder-deck or to
    a point of discharge.


CLS 56/191
TXT Platforms attached to the machine on which one or more persons may stand to
    bind the grain manually as it is delivered from the conveyor.


CLS 56/192
TXT Machines under the class definition having means for cutting growing crops
    and means for catching the material as it is cut and discharging it in a
    windrow.  Included here are windrowing attachments for the cutter-bar of a
    harvester.


CLS 56/193
TXT Machines having means for cutting growing crops and means for raking up the
    cut material after it falls on the ground.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400.05+, for hand rakes combined with cutters.


CLS 56/194
TXT Machines having means for cutting growing crops and means for catching the
    cut material as it falls.


CLS 56/195
TXT Wherein the cutter projects to one side of the machine beyond the path of
    the supporting wheels.


CLS 56/196
TXT The cutter located behind a line drawn transversely through the supporting
    wheels.


CLS 56/197
TXT The cutter located in front of a line drawn transversely through the
    supporting wheels.


CLS 56/198
TXT The cutter comprising a rotating reel with knives located on the periphery
    thereof.


CLS 56/199
TXT The invention limited to the catcher element, with, means peculiarly
    adapted for attaching it to a machine of the rotary-cutting reel type.


CLS 56/200
TXT Having means for discharging the catcher without detaching the same or
    inverting the machine.


CLS 56/201
TXT Having a handle or other means adapting it to manual propulsion.


CLS 56/202
TXT The invention limited to the catcher element and means for attaching it to
    a cutter-bar.


CLS 56/203
TXT Having means for discharging the catcher directly.


CLS 56/204
TXT The catcher making a complete revolution as it is moved to discharge the
    load and is returned to receiving position.


CLS 56/205
TXT The catcher having a gate at its rear side, which may be swung upwardly to
    allow the contents of the catcher to be discharged.


CLS 56/206
TXT The rear wall of the catcher comprising a member which may be swung
    backwardly and downwardly to discharge the contents of the catcher.


CLS 56/207
TXT Devices peculiarly adapted to be attached to some portion of a harvester in
    such a position as to catch grain which is shelled out during the operation
    of harvesting and which would otherwise be lost.


CLS 56/208
TXT Devices for adjusting the position with relation to the ground of the
    platform on which the grain falls as it is cut.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 663+ and the subclasses there noted for
    earth working apparatus with actuators for making various adjustments.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 6+ for vehicles having body leveling
    devices, and subclasses 43+ for vehicles having vertically adjustable
    wheels.


CLS 56/209
TXT Comprising means for leveling the platform when the harvester is operating
    on a sidehill.


CLS 56/210
TXT Wherein the platform is rigidly connected with the main frame of the
    machine and the whole is adjusted as a unit on the wheel-frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218,    for tongue adjustments which on a one or two wheel machine produce,
    in effect, a change in the position of the main frame.


CLS 56/211
TXT Wherein the adjustment is effected by power derived from the
    traction-wheels while the machine is moving over the ground.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 402, 403+ and 407+ for earth working
    implements in which a wheel is adjusted vertically with respect to a frame
    by power derived from its rolling movement over the ground.


CLS 56/212
TXT Having means to adjust the frame vertically and also means to tilt the
    frame about a transverse axis.


CLS 56/213
TXT Wherein the means for vertically adjusting both sides of the frame are
    connected to the same operating mechanism and may be operated
    simultaneously.


CLS 56/214
TXT Having means to adjust the frame vertically.


CLS 56/215
TXT Wherein the wheel-frame is pivoted to the main frame and carries a pinion,
    which meshes with a segment-rack on the main frame, the curvature of the
    segment-rack being concentric with the pivot of the wheel-frame and the
    pinion being rotated to raise or lower the main frame.


CLS 56/216
TXT Wherein the means for adjusting both sides of the frame are connected to
    the same operating mechanism and may be operated simultaneously.


CLS 56/217
TXT Wherein the means for adjusting both sides of the frame are connected to
    the same operating mechanism and may be operated simultaneously.


CLS 56/218
TXT Means peculiarly adapted to adjust or support the tongue of a harvester.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 324+ for an actuator on a trailing ground
    supported frame for moving a tongue means laterally or vertically.

    278,    Land Vehicles: Animal Draft Appliances, subclasses 86+ for tongue
    supports for vehicles in general.


CLS 56/219
TXT Devices for gathering the standing grain, directing it to the cutting
    mechanism, and guiding it in its fall when it is cut.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164+,   for gathering devices which also rake the grain from the platform.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 604 and 626.1+ for opposed,
    load- gripping endless belt conveyors, and subclasses 506+ for a conveyor
    specialized for collecting a load from the ground.


CLS 56/220
TXT Comprising a reel which rotates on a horizontal axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167     and 168.


CLS 56/221
TXT Comprising means for adjusting the reel vertically or longitudinally to
    adapt it to cutters of different height or to grain of different length.


CLS 56/222
TXT Wherein the means for rotating the reel are disclosed.


CLS 56/223
TXT Wherein the reel is driven by angular gearing, which may slide on the
    driving-shaft to permit the adjustment of the reel.


CLS 56/224
TXT Wherein the reel is driven by an endless belt or chain, the tension of
    which may be adjusted to compensate for the adjustment of the position of
    the reel.


CLS 56/225
TXT Wherein each end of the reel axis is mounted at the end of a swinging arm
    or a series of such arms and the driving connections of the reel are
    mounted concentrically with said arms.


CLS 56/226
TXT Wherein the reel-bats have a supplementary movement in addition to the
    rotation of the reel.


CLS 56/227
TXT Wherein the position of the bats on the reel may be adjusted, including
    adjustments for the purpose of transportation.


CLS 56/228
TXT Devices peculiarly adapted for attachment to harvesters to facilitate
    transportation thereof from one field to another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 240+ for an earth working implement with
    a ground support means engageable with the ground for transport only.


CLS 56/229
TXT Means supported on the ground and specialized to the cutting or mowing of
    small grain, grass and the like.


CLS 56/230
TXT Wherein the cutting mechanism is mounted on a railroad vehicle and is
    adapted to trim the grass and weeds growing alongside the track.


CLS 56/231
TXT Wherein knives carried on the periphery of a rotating reel coact with a
    fixed ledger plate to sever the standing vegetation.


CLS 56/232
TXT Wherein the knife reciprocates transversely to the path of advance to sever
    the standing vegetation.


CLS 56/233
TXT Devices peculiarly adapted for use in trimming the top or sides of a hedge
    or row of plant growth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 196+ for hand manipulated hedge trimmers.  See
    (19) Note after the definition of Class 30.


CLS 56/234
TXT Having several cutters operating in planes at an angle to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13.6+,  for a motorized harvester having plural cutter-units.


CLS 56/235
TXT Wherein each cutter comprises a rotary disk with a sharpened or serrated
    edge.


CLS 56/236
TXT Wherein each cutter comprises a reciprocating knife.


CLS 56/237
TXT Having a single cutter which may be so adjusted as to trim either the top
    or side of a hedge or the like.


CLS 56/238
TXT Wherein one cutter cuts off the top of the vegetation and a following
    cutter cuts it closer to the ground.


CLS 56/239
TXT Wherein the cutter is operated by hand power directly.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, appropriate subclasses, where no means is provided for
    guiding the cutter a definite distance from the ground.  See (19) Note
    after the definition of Class 30.


CLS 56/240
TXT Wherein the cutting elements oscillate about pivots coacting with each
    other or with a fixed ledger plate to effect a shearing action.


CLS 56/241
TXT Having only two cutting edges, which coact like a pair of shears.


CLS 56/242
TXT Wherein the cutting element reciprocates within a finger-bar.


CLS 56/243
TXT Wherein the power for driving the cutter is applied through a hand-crank.


CLS 56/244
TXT Wherein the cutting elements travel on an endless chain or belt.


CLS 56/245
TXT Wherein the cutting mechanism projects to one side of the machine beyond
    the path of the supporting wheels.


CLS 56/246
TXT Wherein the cutting elements oscillate about pivots coacting with each
    other or with a fixed ledger plate to effect a shearing action.


CLS 56/247
TXT The cutters operating in a vertical plane.


CLS 56/248
TXT The cutting mechanism projecting to one side of the machine beyond the path
    of the supporting wheels.


CLS 56/249
TXT The cutter comprising knives mounted on the periphery of a rotating reel
    and coacting with a fixed ledger plate.


CLS 56/249.5
TXT Cutting machines under subclass 249 which have means permitting the ready
    interchange of reel or reel and cutter bar units.

    (1)     Note.  The ready interchange is limited to those in which the frame
    and/or wheels of the machine need not be disassembled.

    (2)     Note.  Reels or reels and cutter bar units of different type or
    design which may be used interchangeably are included here.


CLS 56/250
TXT Wherein the invention comprises a change in the organization of the machine
    to facilitate the sharpening of the knives.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.1,   for a motorized cutter and sharpening means therefor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclass 82 for mere sharpening
    devices, which may include means for attachment to or adjustment on a mower.

    451,    Abrading, for a method of or apparatus for sharpening a harvester
    blade.


CLS 56/251
TXT Having another cutter in addition to the main rotating cutting-reel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      13.6+, 231, 234, and 238.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 13+ for lawn edgers which make a groove
    in the earth.


CLS 56/252
TXT Wherein the cutter extends in front of the wheel-tread, so as to cut the
    grass or the like before the wheel passes over the same.


CLS 56/253
TXT Having two wheels which are coaxial and the cutter disposed centrally of
    the path of the machine.


CLS 56/254
TXT Having a pinion on the cutting-reel axis meshing directly with an internal
    gear on one of the ground-wheels.


CLS 56/255
TXT The cutter comprising a disk having a serrated or sharpened edge and
    rotating on an axis perpendicular to the plane of the disk, the disk
    cooperating with another or with a fixed ledger-blade.


CLS 56/256
TXT The cutting-disk operating in a vertical plane.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 5 for vegetation
    cutters mounted in vertical planes.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 518+ for rolling earth working tools
    including disks operating in a vertical plane.


CLS 56/257
TXT Comprising a cutter which reciprocates in a fingerbar transversely to the
    direction of travel and which is located centrally of the path of the
    machine.


CLS 56/258
TXT Having two supporting-wheels whose axes are in alinement.


CLS 56/259
TXT The cutter comprising two sets of knives reciprocating in the same
    finger-bar in opposite directions.


CLS 56/260
TXT Wherein the driving mechanism includes a pitman.


CLS 56/261
TXT Having a lever interposed between the pitman and cutter.


CLS 56/262
TXT Wherein the driving mechanism includes a rotating cam.


CLS 56/263
TXT Having a lever interposed between the cam and cutter.


CLS 56/264
TXT Comprising a cutter reciprocating within a fingerbar which projects to one
    side of the path of the wheels.


CLS 56/265
TXT Wherein the mechanism for driving the cutter passes through one of the
    ground-wheels.


CLS 56/266
TXT Having means whereby the machine may cut when traveling in either direction.


CLS 56/267
TXT Wherein for the purpose of transportation the cutter may be folded into a
    horizontal longitudinal position close to the side of the machine.


CLS 56/268
TXT The cutter located behind a line drawn transversely through the supporting
    wheel or wheels.


CLS 56/269
TXT Having two supporting-wheels whose axes are in alinement.


CLS 56/270
TXT Wherein the mechanism for reciprocating the cutter includes a cam or lever
    and not merely a crank and pitman.


CLS 56/271
TXT The cutter located in front of a line drawn transversely through the
    supporting wheel or wheels.


CLS 56/272
TXT Having two supporting-wheels whose axes are in alinement.


CLS 56/273
TXT Wherein the finger-bar is lifted by traction or motor power.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 452+ for apparatus comprising an actuator
    adapted to lift an earth working tool for transport on a wheeled frame.


CLS 56/274
TXT Means for automatically shipping the clutch when the cutter-bar is raised
    beyond a certain point.


CLS 56/275
TXT The cutter comprising two sets of knives reciprocating in the same
    finger-bar in opposite directions.


CLS 56/276
TXT Having means for raising the cutter-bar and means for rocking it, so as to
    raise or lower the points of the guard-fingers.


CLS 56/277
TXT Having a foot-lever which may be used in adjusting the position of the
    cutter-bar.


CLS 56/278
TXT The lifting means including a lever of the first class, which impinges upon
    the inner end of the cutter-bar, inside its pivot, to raise the outer end
    of the same or to maintain it at the desired elevation.


CLS 56/279
TXT Wherein the invention comprises only the mountings for the cutter-bar and
    not the gearing.


CLS 56/280
TXT Wherein the invention comprises only the mountings for the cutter-bar and
    not the gearing.


CLS 56/281
TXT The lifting means including a lever of the first class, which impinges upon
    the inner end of the cutter-bar, inside its pivot, to raise the outer end
    of the same or to maintain it at the desired elevation.


CLS 56/282
TXT Wherein the invention comprises only the mountings for the cutter-bar and
    not the gearing.


CLS 56/283
TXT Having means for raising the cutter-bar.


CLS 56/284
TXT Wherein the invention comprises only the mountings for the cutter-bar and
    not the gearing.


CLS 56/285
TXT Having a foot-lever which may be used in raising the cutter-bar.


CLS 56/286
TXT The lifting means including a lever of the first class, which impinges upon
    the inner end of the cutter-bar, inside the pivot, to raise the outer end
    of the same or to maintain it at the desired elevation.


CLS 56/287
TXT Wherein the invention comprises only the mountings for the cutter-bar and
    not the gearing.


CLS 56/288
TXT Wherein the invention is limited to means for adjusting the outer end of
    the cutter-bar forwardly or backwardly to bring it into proper alinement
    with the pitman.


CLS 56/289
TXT The knives and their mountings and parts directly attached thereto
    including means for adjusting the relation of knives to each other, but not
    for regulating the height of cut.


CLS 56/290
TXT Wherein the knives are carried by an endless chain or belt.


CLS 56/291
TXT Wherein the path of the chain or belt which carries the knives is in a
    horizontal plane.


CLS 56/292
TXT Having means for adjusting the tension of the cutter-chain.


CLS 56/293
TXT Comprising knives which oscillate about pivots coacting with each other or
    with a fixed ledger-plate to effect a shearing action.


CLS 56/294
TXT Comprising knives mounted on the periphery of a rotating reel and coacting
    with a fixed ledger-plate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249+,   for harvester type combinations including a rotating cutting reel.


CLS 56/295
TXT Comprising a disk having a serrated or sharpened edge and rotating on an
    axis perpendicular to the plane of the disk.


CLS 56/296
TXT Comprising knives which have a reciprocating motion within or on a
    supporting member.


CLS 56/297
TXT Having two sets of knives reciprocating in opposite directions.


CLS 56/298
TXT Comprising improvement in both the sickle and the member within which it
    reciprocates or in the combination of the two.


CLS 56/299
TXT Wherein the invention is limited to the knives and the bar to which they
    are attached.

    (1)     Note.  If the improvement is in the knifehead; that is, the part to
    which the pitman is connected, it is classified in subclass 303.


CLS 56/300
TXT Wherein the knife-sections have detachable connection with the bar on which
    they are mounted.


CLS 56/301
TXT Wherein the knife-sections can be removed only by passing them in turn over
    the end of the bar.


CLS 56/302
TXT Wherein an auxiliary bar is employed to lock the knife-sections in place on
    the knife-bar.


CLS 56/303
TXT Wherein the invention is limited to the knife-head, which is connected
    directly to the pitman or driving-lever, and that portion of the finger-bar
    within which the knife-head is guided.


CLS 56/304
TXT Comprising means for reducing the friction between the cutter and the
    member in which it reciprocates.


CLS 56/305
TXT Comprising clips or arms for guiding the knife-bar and maintaining it in
    close contact with the member on which it reciprocates.


CLS 56/306
TXT Comprising means for reducing the shock at the end of the reciprocating
    stroke of the knife-bar.


CLS 56/307
TXT Wherein the invention is limited to the member on or within which the
    knives and knife-bar reciprocates.


CLS 56/308
TXT Wherein the invention includes a modification of the guard-finger.


CLS 56/309
TXT The guard-finger having a ledger-plate inserted therein which co-operates
    with the reciprocating cutter.


CLS 56/310
TXT Wherein the invention is wholly in the guard-fingers.


CLS 56/311
TXT The guard-finger having a ledger-plate inserted therein which co-operates
    with the reciprocating cutter.


CLS 56/312
TXT Supplemental fingers attached to the finger-bar or guard-fingers to raise
    tangled or lodged vegetation above the reciprocating cutter.


CLS 56/313
TXT Having a socket to fit over the point of the guard-finger to hold the
    supplemental finger in place.


CLS 56/314
TXT Means for dividing the growth to be cut from the rest of the growth and for
    directing the same after it is cut away from the sides of the swath toward
    the center.


CLS 56/315
TXT Comprising a cutter operating in a vertical plane at the end of the main
    cutter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8       and 9, for devices for cutting vegetation on the bottom and sides
    of a channel.


CLS 56/316
TXT The vertical cutter being of the reciprocating type.


CLS 56/317
TXT Including driving means for imparting movement to the track-clearer as the
    machine moves over the ground.


CLS 56/318
TXT Having a socket to fit over the point of the shoe to hold the clearer or
    divider in place.


CLS 56/319
TXT Wherein the clearer or divider is so mounted that it may be folded to
    facilitate transportation.


CLS 56/320
TXT Having a supplemental clearer attached to the main divider or clearer or in
    front of the master-wheel.


CLS 56/320.1
TXT Device under subclass 229 comprising structure to support or enclose the
    cutting blade of a harvester as the blade moves to perform its function.


CLS 56/320.2
TXT Housing under subclass 320.1 having a passageway therein to permit crop to
    emerge from the housing.


CLS 56/321
TXT Devices for overcoming or lessening the tendency of the harvester to swing
    sidewise owing to the resistance or drag of the cutter projecting to one
    side of the main supporting wheel or wheels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    278,    Land Vehicles: Animal Draft Appliances, subclasses 3 to 20,
    indented under Draft Equalizers, for similar devices of general application.


CLS 56/322
TXT Inventions which include a wheel, which supports one end of the cutter-bar,
    in combination with other parts essential to a harvester.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 92.


CLS 56/323
TXT Inventions which include a seat in combination with some part of the
    harvesting mechanism, usually such as to throw the cutter out of operation
    when the driver leaves his seat.


CLS 56/324
TXT Hand implements including a cutter, a handle for the same, and a series of
    fingers which constitute a cradle for catching a quantity of grain as it is
    cut, so that it may be laid evenly in a swath.

    Search this class, subclass:
    324.5.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 309, for sickles and scythes.


CLS 56/324.5
TXT Couplings peculiarly adapted for fastening the type of scythe used in
    grain-cradles to the snathes.


CLS 56/327.1
TXT VEGETABLE GATHERER:

    Device under the class definition for gathering a vegetable, such as a
    cabbage, cucumber, onion, and the like.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, appropriate subclasses for
    devices for recovering vegetables from the earth by pulling, combing
    through the earth, digging and separating and severing below the earth's
    crust; and see particularly subclass 63 for devices for gathering stones
    from a field or the like.


CLS 56/327.2
TXT Asparagus harvester:

    Device under subclass 327.1 in which the vegetable has a stalk upon which
    the vegetable grows, and the device includes means for holding the stalk
    and means for cutting the vegetable form the stalk while the latter is
    being held.


CLS 56/328.1
TXT FRUIT GATHERER:

    Device under the class definition especially adapted for use in gathering a
    fruit or nut.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, subclass 2; 220,
    Receptacles, appropriate subclasses and 224, Package and Article Carriers,
    appropriate subclasses for receptacles which may be used by fruit-pickers.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclasses 63+ for devices for
    gathering stones from a field or the like

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses for conveyors, per
    se, which may be used for conveying fruit from the tree to the ground.


CLS 56/329
TXT Comprising means to be placed under a tree or bush to catch fruit as it
    falls.


CLS 56/330
TXT Comprising means for stripping cranberries, blueberries, gooseberries, and
    the like from the bushes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114     and 127.


CLS 56/331
TXT Comprising means for cutting the stems of grapes, cherries, strawberries,
    and the like, in combination with means for catching them as they are
    severed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, appropriate subclasses for the cutter, per se; and see
    Note (19) after the definition of Class 30.


CLS 56/332
TXT Having means on the end of a pole for detaching fruit which cannot be
    readily reached by the hand, in combination with means for catching the
    fruit as it becomes detached to prevent it from falling to the ground and
    becoming bruised.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, appropriate subclasses, for the cutter, per se, and see
    Note (19) after the definition of Class 30.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 19.1+, for
    pole structures adapted for handling articles at a distance and see the
    search there noted.


CLS 56/333
TXT Comprising two coacting jaws, one of which is pivoted to close over the
    fruit and detach the same.


CLS 56/334
TXT Having a chute leading from the jaws to the ground or to the operator.


CLS 56/335
TXT Comprising a pivoted knife which is operated to sever the stem of the fruit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, appropriate subclasses for the cutter, per se, and see
    Note (19) after the definition of Class 30.


CLS 56/336
TXT Having a chute which guides the fruit to the ground or to the operator
    after the stem is severed.


CLS 56/337
TXT Comprising two jaws, one of which is mounted to slide toward the other and
    detach the fruit which is between them.


CLS 56/338
TXT Comprising a knife which is mounted to slide back and forth to sever the
    stem of the fruit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, appropriate subclasses, for the cutter, per se, and see
    Note (19) after the definition of Class 30.


CLS 56/339
TXT Comprising a member fixed with relation to the pole, which is moved against
    the fruit or the stem to detach the fruit.


CLS 56/340
TXT Having a chute which guides the fruit to ground or to the operator after
    the stem is severed.


CLS 56/340.1
TXT Tree Shaker:

    Device under subclass 328.1 in which the fruit or nut grows on a tree, and
    the device includes means for grasping and shaking the tree to remove the
    fruit or nut.


CLS 56/341
TXT Devices for raking hay, straw, and the like and securing it in a bundle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    346,    and the subclasses indented thereunder for machines which rake the
    material and form it into a cock without otherwise securing it.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 1+ for binder applying methods and apparatus,
    not otherwise classifiable and not involving raking of material from the
    ground.


CLS 56/342
TXT Wherein the device is drawn over the field and operated by hand-power.


CLS 56/343
TXT Wherein the bundle is secured by a cord tied around it.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    289,    Knots and Knot Tying, appropriate subclasses, for the knotter
    mechanism, per se.


CLS 56/344
TXT Machines especially adapted to travel over the ground and continuously
    gather hay, straw, or the like therefrom and deliver it into a receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  For hand rakes provided with means to receive the raked
    material, see this class, subclasses 400.11+.

    (2)     Note.  Machines having a fork or set of fingers which gather a load
    and are then raised to lift the load and dump it are classified in Class
    414, Material or Article Handling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 517 for a reciprocating pusher
    conveyor for feeding a load from the ground to another conveyor, and
    subclasses 308.1 and 522 for tines feeding a load to a conveyor.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 158 and 159 for flume
    screen cleaners.


CLS 56/345
TXT Having an endless carrier for elevating the material and delivering it to
    the receptacle.

    (1)     Note. For hand rakes having an endless raking member for delivering
    material into a receiver, see this class, subclasses 400.02 and 400.03.


CLS 56/346
TXT Wherein the receptacle may be intermittently operated to deposit the
    material on the ground, frequently having special structure for forming it
    into a symmetrical cock.


CLS 56/347
TXT Having means which are moved to carry the material within reach of the
    endless carrier.


CLS 56/348
TXT Having relatively stationary teeth which rake up the material as the
    machine advances and assist in directing it to the endless carrier.


CLS 56/349
TXT Having relatively stationary teeth which rake up the material as the
    machine advances and direct it to the endless carrier.


CLS 56/350
TXT Wherein the endless carrier delivers the material rearwardly into the
    receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    346.


CLS 56/351
TXT Having means which are moved to carry the material within reach of the
    endless carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    347.


CLS 56/352
TXT Having relatively stationary teeth which rake up the material as the
    machine advances and assist in directing it to the endless carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    348.


CLS 56/353
TXT Having relatively stationary teeth which rake up the material as the
    machine advances and direct it to the endless carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    349.


CLS 56/354
TXT Wherein the endless carrier delivers the material into a receptacle
    laterally of the machine.


CLS 56/355
TXT Having means which are moved to carry the material within reach of the
    endless carrier.


CLS 56/356
TXT Having relatively stationary teeth which rake up the material as the
    machine advances and assist in directing it to the endless carrier.


CLS 56/357
TXT Having relatively stationary rake-teeth which rake up the material as the
    machine advances and direct it to the endless carrier.


CLS 56/358
TXT Having means which are moved to carry the material within reach of the
    endless carrier.


CLS 56/359
TXT Having relatively stationary rake-teeth which rake up the material as the
    machine advances and assist in directing it to the endless carrier.


CLS 56/360
TXT Having relatively stationary rake-teeth which rake up the material as the
    machine advances and direct it to the endless carrier.


CLS 56/361
TXT Wherein the receptacle may be intermittently operated to deposit the
    material on the ground, frequently having special structure for forming it
    into a symmetrical cock.


CLS 56/362
TXT Wherein the material is elevated by mechanism comprising a series of bars,
    each bar having a series of teeth which have a pawing movement and
    successively engage the material and elevate it into the receptacle.


CLS 56/363
TXT Having an auxiliary rake which rakes the material from the ground into
    position to be engaged by the elevating-teeth.


CLS 56/364
TXT Comprising a series of bars revolving about a common axis parallel thereto,
    said bars having rake-teeth thereon which are usually retracted when near
    the highest point in their orbit.


CLS 56/365
TXT Machines which may be used either to rake hay or to kick it up or scatter
    it, so as to facilitate drying.


CLS 56/366
TXT Wherein the machine when used as a rake delivers the hay to one side of the
    path of the rake.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes machines having two rakes spaced
    apart, which deliver the hay in a windrow between them.


CLS 56/367
TXT Wherein when the machine is used as a rake a series of teeth gather the hay
    and revolve about a transverse axis to dump it.


CLS 56/368
TXT Wherein the rake is dumped by the same power which propels the machine.


CLS 56/369
TXT Wherein the teeth which scatter the hay are journaled on a crank-shaft
    which extends transversely of the machine and rotates to impart a kicking
    movement to the teeth.


CLS 56/370
TXT Machines for scattering hay to facilitate its drying, of for turning
    windrows of curing hay or analogous material.


CLS 56/371
TXT Wherein the tedder is attached to a mower, so as to ted the grass as it is
    cut.


CLS 56/372
TXT Machines under subclass 370 in which the teeth or other scattering or
    turning means rotate around an axis which extends transversely or
    diagonally of the machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    366     and 367, for similar machines convertible to rakes.


CLS 56/373
TXT Wherein the teeth are journaled on a crank- shaft which extends
    transversely of the machine and rotates to impart a kicking movement to the
    teeth.

    Search this class, subclass:

    369.


CLS 56/374
TXT Hay engaging elements especially adapted for use in tedders.


CLS 56/375
TXT Rakes which are propelled over the field by draft-animals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400.01+, for hand rakes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 19 for rakes which
    are combined with an unearthing device for the purpose of gathering the
    objects recovered by said unearthing device, and subclasses 84+ for soil
    working rakes which comb through a mass of earthy material and separate
    therefrom the desired objects contained therein.


CLS 56/376
TXT Wherein the raked material is delivered to one side of the path of the rake.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes machines having two rakes spaced
    apart, which deliver the material in a windrow between them.


CLS 56/377
TXT Comprising a rotating member having rake- teeth on its periphery and
    mounted on an oblique axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 540+ for rolling or rotating earth
    working tools with tines or teeth.


CLS 56/378
TXT Wherein the raked material is delivered to the rear of the machine.


CLS 56/379
TXT Wherein the rake swings upwardly to discharge the raked material and moves
    in the same direction about its axis to return to its original position.

    (1)     Note.  There are usually two or more sets of rake-teeth which are
    successively thrown into raking position.  While one set of teeth is in
    raking position the other remains inoperative.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 237 and the subclasses there noted, for an
    earth working tool swung around an axis intermittently due to draft force.


CLS 56/380
TXT Wherein the rake is supported by ground- wheels.


CLS 56/381
TXT The rake revolving of an axis which remains in a fixed position on the
    machine-frame.


CLS 56/382
TXT Having a stop which engages a tooth of one set while another set of teeth
    is in raking position.


CLS 56/383
TXT Having a stop which engages a tooth of one set while another set of teeth
    is in raking position.


CLS 56/384
TXT Wherein the rake is supported by ground- wheels.


CLS 56/385
TXT Having means for reducing the width of the rake.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 456 for contractible implement structure to
    facilitate its transport from one place to another.


CLS 56/386
TXT Wherein power from the draft-animals may be used to dump or to assist in
    dumping the rake.


CLS 56/387
TXT Wherein the draft-power is directly applied to dumping the rake, that is,
    without the medium of the supporting-wheels.


CLS 56/388
TXT Wherein the power for dumping the rake is applied through a frictional
    connection with the supporting-wheels.


CLS 56/389
TXT Comprising spur gear-wheels which are brought into mesh to lock the rake to
    the supporting-wheels to dump it.


CLS 56/390
TXT Comprising a sliding member which locks the rake to the supporting-wheels
    to dump it.


CLS 56/391
TXT Comprising a pawl and ratchet which are engaged to lock the rake to the
    supporting- wheels to dump it.


CLS 56/392
TXT The pawl being fixed to or integral with a transverse rod which is rocked
    to cause the pawl to engage the ratchet.


CLS 56/393
TXT Wherein a backward pull on a hand-lever raises the rake-teeth to dump the
    load.


CLS 56/394
TXT Wherein a hand-lever is mounted to swing forwardly on the same axis as the
    rake-head to dump the load.


CLS 56/395
TXT Having mechanism for clearing the hay or straw from the teeth.

    (1)     Note.  For hand rakes provided with clearing means, see this class,
    subclasses 400.08+.


CLS 56/396
TXT Wherein the rake is supported by ground- wheels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400.09, 400.13, 400.14, and 400.15, for hand rakes provided with ground
    wheels.


CLS 56/397
TXT Having means for lifting the loaded rake clear of the ground, so that the
    load may be more easily transported.


CLS 56/398
TXT Wherein power from the draft-animals is used for lifting the loaded rake.


CLS 56/399
TXT Attachments for horse-rakes for preventing escape of the material from the
    sides of the rake or to prevent it from becoming entangled with the
    operating mechanism.


CLS 56/400
TXT Structure of the teeth, per se, or of the means for fastening them to the
    rake-head.

    (1)     Note.  For structure of the teeth, per se, of hand rakes, see this
    class, subclass 400.21.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 705+ for a spring biased or formed earth
    working tool, and subclass 713 for an earth working tooth.


CLS 56/400.01
TXT Rakes designed to be manipulated by hand.

    (1)     Note.  Compare with this class, subclasses 163 and 180.

    (2)     Note.  For horse-type rakes, see this class, subclasses 375+.

    (3)     Note.  For blanks and processes for making rakes, see Class 76,
    Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclass 111.

    (4)     Note.  For rake handle connections, per se, Class 403, Joints and
    Connections, appropriate subclasses.

    (5)     Note.  For hand held earth working tools see Class 172, Earth
    Working, subclasses 371+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 55.5 for hand
    forks, and subclasses 120+ for hay forks and see the searches there noted.


CLS 56/400.02
TXT Rakes under subclass 400.01 wherein the tines or teeth are mounted upon a
    rotary or endless member.

    (1)     Note.  For rotary horse type rakes, see this class, subclasses 377
    and 379+.

    (2)     Note.  For brushes with analogous mountings, etc., see Class 15,
    Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 78+.

    (3)     Note.  For endless conveyors provided with tines, see Class 198,
    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 520, 692, and 725+.


CLS 56/400.03
TXT Rakes under subclass 400.02 wherein the teeth are peculiarly adapted to
    impale leaves and the like in their movement. These devices usually are
    provided with a material receiver and a means to clear the impaled material
    from the teeth into the receiver.


CLS 56/400.04
TXT Rakes under subclass 400.01 convertible into tools for other purposes or
    combined with other tools and not provided for elsewhere.  Attachments
    specifically adapted for connection to a rake are also here included where
    not provided for elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  For hand forks combined with rakes, see Class 294, Handling:
     Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 52.


CLS 56/400.05
TXT Combinations under subclass 400.04 of rake and cutter, scraper or spreader.
     The cutting edge may be formed integral with one or more of the rake tines.

    (1)     Note.  Compare with this class, subclass 193.


CLS 56/400.06
TXT Combinations under subclass 400.05 wherein the cutter and rake are so
    mounted upon a common handle that their working edges are directed
    substantially in opposite directions.


CLS 56/400.07
TXT Combinations under subclass 400.05 wherein the cutter and rake are mounted
    with their working edges extending in the same general direction so that
    they may perform work simultaneously during a stroke of the tool.


CLS 56/400.08
TXT Combinations under subclass 400.04 of rake and means operable to remove
    material from the rake teeth.

    (1)     Note.  For horse type rakes with clearers, see this class, subclass
    395.

    (2)     Note. For impaling type rakes with cleaners, see this class,
    subclass 400.03.

    (3)     Note.  For forks with ejectors or strippers, see Class 30, Cutlery,
    subclass 129.

    (4)     Note.  For hand forks equipped with clearing means, see Class 294,
    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 50.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    132,    Toilet, subclass 119 for toilet comb attached to comb cleaners, and
    subclass 27 for other toilet comb cleaners involving structure other than a
    brush.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclasses 12, 52, 89, and 90
    for moving soil working and buried object recovering rakes provided with
    intercepting rake teeth stripper-type cleaners.


CLS 56/400.09
TXT Combinations under subclass 400.08 provided with means to support the rake
    upon the ground for movement thereover. The ground support may be carried
    by the cleaner.

    (1)     Note.  For other ground supported hand rakes, see this class,
    subclasses 400.13, 400.14 and 400.15.


CLS 56/400.1
TXT Combinations under subclass 400.08 having means operable by hand or foot
    for actuating the rake cleaning means.

    (1)     Note.  Mere inertia operators which function by turning the rake
    over or striking it upon the ground are in this class, subclasses 400.08
    and 400.09.

    (2)     Note.  For pivoted heads or tines, see this class, subclasses
    400.19 and 400.2.


CLS 56/400.11
TXT Combinations under subclass 400.04 of rake and means (1) to receive the
    raked material or (2) to prevent or guard against spillage of material from
    the rake.

    (1)     Note.  Additional braces provided between the handle and head of a
    rake have been considered as guards for purposes of this classification.

    (2)     Note.  Search this class, subclasses 400.02 and 400.03 for rotary
    or endless rakes combined with material receivers.

    (3)     Note.  For cleaners and actuating means therefor which may
    incidentally form guards or receivers, see this class, subclasses 400.08+.

    (4)     Note.  Compare with this class, subclass 400.16.

    (5)     Note.  For fork or rake type scoops, see Class 37, Excavating,
    subclasses 316 and 405.


CLS 56/400.12
TXT Combinations under subclass 400.11 wherein the guard or receiver comprises
    means which coact with the tines or teeth to grip the raked material.

    (1)     Note.  For grapples in general, see Class 294, Handling:  Hand and
    Hoist-Line Implements, appropriate subclasses.


CLS 56/400.13
TXT Rake combinations under subclass 400.11 provided with means to support the
    rake upon the ground for movement thereover.

    (1)     Note.  For other hand rakes having ground supports, search this
    class, subclasses 400.09, 400.14 and 400.15


CLS 56/400.14
TXT Combinations under subclass 400.04 of rake and means to support the rake
    upon the ground for movement thereover.

    (1)     Note.  Search also this class, subclasses 400.09 and 400.13.

    (2)     Note.  For ground supported rakes of the rotary or endless type,
    see this class, subclasses 400.02 and 400.03.

    (3)     Note.  For wheel supported horse type rakes, see this class,
    subclasses 380, 384, and 396 and their indented subclasses.


CLS 56/400.15
TXT Combinations under subclass 400.14 wherein the ground support is of the
    skid or runner type.


CLS 56/400.16
TXT Rakes under subclass 400.01 provided with more than one set of tines which
    may be used simultaneously or alternatively.

    (1)     Note.  For rakes with sectional heads mounted so as to be movable
    with respect to each other, see this class, subclasses 400.19 and 400.2.


CLS 56/400.17
TXT Rakes under subclass 400.01 peculiarly adapted to be used in the manner of
    a broom.  The handle and time fastenings for this type of rake are also
    classified here.

    (1)     Note.  Compare with this class, subclasses 400.11+.

    (2)     Note.  For brooms in general, see Class 15, Brushing, Scrubbing,
    and General Cleaning, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses
    159.1+.


CLS 56/400.18
TXT Broom type rakes under subclass 400.17 having means whereby the parts are
    adjusted, usually to fan out or vary the spacing of the tines.

    (1)     Note.  For adjustable or folding rakes of other types, see this
    class, subclass 400.19.

    (2)     Note.  For adjustable fork or shovel heads, see Class 294,
    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 53.5 and the search
    Notes appended thereto.


CLS 56/400.19
TXT Rakes under subclass 400.01 so constructed that (1) they may be collapsed
    or folded or (2) the parts may be adjusted with respect to each other.

    (1)     Note.  For hand rakes provided with ground supports and means to
    adjust the distance between the teeth and the ground, see this class,
    subclasses 400.09, 400.13, 400.14, and 400.15.

    (2)     Note.  For adjustable broom type rakes, see this class, subclass
    400.18.

    (3)     Note.  For rakes having means adjustable with respect thereto to
    grapple the raked material, see this class, subclass 400.12.

    (4)     Note.  For rakes having means adjustable to clean the rake teeth,
    see this class, subclasses 400.08+.


CLS 56/400.2
TXT Rakes under subclass 400.19 wherein the head or tines are pivotally mounted
    to yield in one direction against the action of a biasing means.  This
    construction is usually for the purpose of assisting cleaning or to avoid
    breakage.


CLS 56/400.21
TXT Improvements under subclass 400.01 in the rake tines or teeth, per se.

    (1)     Note.  For teeth of the type which provide plural sets of tines,
    see this class, subclass 400.16.

    (2)     Note.  For tines or teeth for horse type rakes, see this class,
    subclass 400.

    (3)     Note.  For teeth for broom type hand rakes, see this class,
    subclasses 400.17 and 400.18.


CLS 56/401
TXT Devices for forming sheaves, gavels, or loose stalks into large bundles or
    shocks, with the butts all pointing in the same direction, and positioning
    the same in upright position, with the butts on the ground.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 1+ for compressing and binding material, and
    appropriate subclasses for compressing, not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 56/402
TXT Having means for receiving sheaves or gavels directly from the harvesting
    mechanism and transferring to the shock-former without manual assistance.


CLS 56/403
TXT Having means for automatically binding the sheaves or gavels together in
    the shock.


CLS 56/404
TXT Wherein the sheaves or gavels stand on their butts in substantially
    vertical position while being formed into a shock.


CLS 56/405
TXT Wherein the shock binding and delivery mechanism is normally tripped
    without assistance.


CLS 56/406
TXT Having an oscillating member which receives sheaves as they are discharged
    from the sheaf-binding mechanism and delivers them to the shock-former.


CLS 56/407
TXT Wherein each sheaf in passing from the sheaf-binder to the shocker is
    turned end for end, so that the butts point toward the rear.


CLS 56/408
TXT Wherein the shock is tilted forwardly from a reclining position to an
    upright position on the ground.


CLS 56/409
TXT Wherein the shock binding and delivery mechanism is normally tripped
    without manual assistance.


CLS 56/410
TXT Wherein the sheaves or gavels stand on their butts in substantially
    vertical position while being formed into a shock.


CLS 56/411
TXT Wherein the shock is rotated on its vertical axis as sheaves are
    successively placed thereon.


CLS 56/412
TXT Wherein the shock-delivery mechanism is normally tripped without manual
    assistance.


CLS 56/413
TXT Having an oscillating member which receives sheaves as they are discharged
    from the binding mechanism and delivers them to the shock-former.


CLS 56/414
TXT Wherein the shock-delivery mechanism is normally tripped without manual
    assistance.


CLS 56/415
TXT Having a sheaf-delivery member which receives sheaves as they are
    discharged from the binder and delivers them alternately to either side of
    the shock-former, the latter usually having a central partition.


CLS 56/416
TXT Having a sheaf-delivery member which receives sheaves as they are
    discharged from the binder and delivers them alternately to either side of
    the shock-former, the latter usually having a central partition.


CLS 56/417
TXT Wherein each sheaf in passing from the sheaf-binder to the shocker is
    turned end for end, so that the butts point toward the rear.


CLS 56/418
TXT Wherein the shock-delivery mechanism is normally tripped without manual
    assistance.


CLS 56/419
TXT Wherein the shock is tilted forwardly from a reclining position to an
    upright position on the ground.


CLS 56/420
TXT Wherein the shock-delivery mechanism is normally tripped without manual
    assistance.


CLS 56/421
TXT Wherein the shock-delivery mechanism is normally tripped when a
    predetermined number of sheaves has been delivered to the shock-former.


CLS 56/422
TXT Wherein the feeding of sheaves to the shocker is automatically discontinued
    while the shock is being discharged.


CLS 56/423
TXT Wherein after the shock-former is swung to upright position to set the
    shock on the ground the rear side opens to allow the machine to pass on
    without disturbing the shock.


CLS 56/424
TXT Wherein after the shock is formed it is turned end for end, so as to bring
    the butts to the rear before it is discharged from the machine.


CLS 56/425
TXT Wherein the stalks stand on their butts in substantially vertical position
    while being formed into a shock.


CLS 56/426
TXT Wherein the shock is rotated on its vertical axis as sheaves or gavels are
    successively placed thereon.


CLS 56/427
TXT Wherein when the shock is formed it is allowed to drop directly to the
    ground.


CLS 56/428
TXT Having means in the shock-former to divide the butts of the stalks, leaving
    an air-space through the central part of the base of the shock.


CLS 56/429
TXT Having means for automatically binding the sheaves or gavels together in
    the shock, no feed mechanism being shown.


CLS 56/430
TXT Having means for pressing the stalks or sheaves together into a compact
    shock, in combination with means for setting the shock on the ground.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 1+ for compressing and binding material, and
    appropriate subclasses for compressing, not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 56/431
TXT Means against which the stalks or sheaves rest while a shock is being
    formed directly on the ground.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 211, Supports:  Racks, subclass 29 for racks which
    support shocks of grain ordinarily in the field.


CLS 56/432
TXT Means mounted on a harvester and operatively connected therewith for
    forming compact bundles of stalks and binding them as the harvester travels
    through the field.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 1+ for binder applying methods and apparatus,
    not elsewhere classifiable.


CLS 56/433
TXT Wherein a band is passed around the bundle and the ends of the band knotted
    together.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    289,    Knots and Knot Tying, appropriate subclasses, for inventions in the
    knotting mechanism, per se.


CLS 56/434
TXT Comprising means for adjusting the binding mechanism longitudinally to
    adapt it to grain of different lengths.


CLS 56/435
TXT Wherein the invention includes details of the knotter, in combination with
    means for forming the bundle.


CLS 56/436
TXT Wherein the pressure of the grain trips the mechanism which carries the
    cord around the bundle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 4 for binder applying apparatus, not otherwise
    provided for, and including automatic or material triggered control.


CLS 56/437
TXT Wherein the trip is actuated through the medium of an abutting arm which
    projects up through the deck and against which the grain is packed.


CLS 56/438
TXT Wherein the invention includes the means for packing the grain preparatory
    to the binding operation.


CLS 56/439
TXT Wherein the invention includes details of the knotter, in combination with
    means for forming the bundle.


CLS 56/440
TXT Wherein the invention includes the means for packing the grain preparatory
    to the binding operation.


CLS 56/441
TXT Wherein the invention includes details of the knotter, in combination with
    means for forming the bundle.


CLS 56/442
TXT Wherein the invention includes details of the knotter, in combination with
    means for forming the bundle.


CLS 56/443
TXT Wherein the invention includes the means for packing the grain preparatory
    to the binding operation.


CLS 56/444
TXT Wherein the invention includes details of the knotter, in combination with
    means for forming the bundle.


CLS 56/445
TXT Wherein the invention includes details of the knotter, in combination with
    means for forming the bundle.


CLS 56/446
TXT The invention residing wholly in the means for packing the grain into a
    bundle preparatory to passing the cord around it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185     and 471.


CLS 56/447
TXT Having means for tripping the binding mechanism into action manually in
    addition to automatic tripping means.


CLS 56/448
TXT Devices for cleaning straw from the needle or binder-arm or for preventing
    the straw from becoming entangled with it.


CLS 56/449
TXT Devices for facilitating the discharge of the bound bundle from the binding
    mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass l7 for binder applying apparatus, not otherwise
    provided for, and including material depositing or discharging means.


CLS 56/450
TXT Devices, in combination with the bundle forming or binding mechanism, for
    tensioning the cord with which the bundle is bound or for taking up the
    slack in the cord.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 32 for apparatus, not otherwise provided for, by
    which a binder which is encircling material is tensioned to increase its
    tightness about the material.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 410+, for tension or
    take-up devices of general application.


CLS 56/451
TXT Wherein the bundle is encircled by wire or the like and the ends of the
    wire twisted together.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 31 for apparatus, not otherwise provided for, for
    tensioning a binder about material by intertwisting the local spaced
    portions of the binder, such twisting being employed for joining the binder
    portions together.

    140,    Wireworking, subclass 93.


CLS 56/452
TXT Wherein only one wire is used.


CLS 56/453
TXT Wherein a curved arm carries the wire around the bundle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 19+ for binder applying apparatus, not
    otherwise provided for, and including threader means crossing a path along
    which material moves for carrying the binder around the material.


CLS 56/454
TXT Wherein the binder-arm is mounted to one side of the path of the grain
    which is being delivered to the bundle-forming mechanism.


CLS 56/455
TXT Wherein the binder-arm has a forked end, which carries the wire into the
    binder-head.


CLS 56/456
TXT Wherein the twister element is carried on the end of the binder-arm.


CLS 56/457
TXT Wherein the invention is limited to the twisting element, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    140,    Wireworking, subclass 115.


CLS 56/458
TXT Wherein the ends of the band which encircles the bundle are twisted
    together and subsequently tucked into the bundle or under the band to
    prevent them from slipping apart.


CLS 56/459
TXT Wherein the band is of straw.


CLS 56/460
TXT Comprising means for forming the band from straw in combination with means
    for applying the band to the bundle.


CLS 56/461
TXT Wherein the bundle is rotated while the band is placed in position around
    the same.


CLS 56/462
TXT Wherein the invention resides in the band- forming mechanism, per se.

    (1)     Note.  For machines and processes for forming twisted or spirally
    wrapped strands of hair, grass and the like, see Class 57, Textiles:
    Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 4, 28, 29, 30, and 362+.


CLS 56/463
TXT Wherein a band previously prepared and cut is used to bind the bundle.


CLS 56/464
TXT Wherein a cord band is used, the ends of which are clamped together by a
    clip.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 505+ for a process including deformably
    applying a band around work, and subclasses 33.5+ and 243.57+ for means for
    doing the same.

    100,    Presses, subclass 30 for apparatus, not otherwise provided for, by
    which a binder is tightened around material and portions of the binder
    secured together by the deformation of a sleeve or clamp element.

    140,    Wireworking, subclass 93.


CLS 56/465
TXT Wherein the band is formed from a strip of flat metal.


CLS 56/466
TXT Devices for adjusting and maintaining the stalks in parallel relation, with
    even butts, preparatory to binding them into a bundle.


CLS 56/467
TXT Wherein the adjusting mechanism acts on the grain as it is passing down the
    deck, where it is bound.


CLS 56/468
TXT Wherein the adjuster acts directly against the heads or butts of the grain
    to even them.


CLS 56/469
TXT Comprising an oscillating member with a flat surface, which strikes against
    the ends of the stalks as the member oscillates.


CLS 56/470
TXT Comprising an endless apron which travels in the same general direction as
    the grain, while its flat surface bears against the ends of the stalks.


CLS 56/471
TXT Comprising devices for urging the grain toward the binder and arranging it
    with the stalks perpendicular to the plane of the binder-arm.


CLS 56/472
TXT Comprising devices for retarding the grain and preventing one end of the
    stalks from sliding down the deck ahead of the other.


CLS 56/473
TXT Comprising a finger which moves longitudinally of the stalks to comb or
    straighten out any grain which may be in tangled condition.


CLS 56/473.5
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising a storage type receiver
    mounted on a harvesting machine or partially supported at the side of such
    machine by a mobile support in proper position for receiving harvested crop
    from the harvester as it travels over the ground.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is directed primarily to a specific
    subcombination of a harvesting machine and should include the harvester by
    name only. Patents claiming structural features of the harvester are
    classified on the basis of such structural features.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202+,   for catchers attached to a cutter bar.

    344+,   for catchers combined with continuously gathering means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 400+ for articulated vehicles in which a
    drawn vehicle may track at the side or rear of a drawing vehicle.  Trailing
    vehicles in the vehicle subclasses are, for the most part, adaptable for
    use with any drawing vehicle, and are not designed for use with a specific
    type machine.  See particularly subclasses 411.1+ for multiple
    tractor-towed vehicles which by disclosure may be a harvester and receiver
    or wagon.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 334+ for a moving,
    wheeled, load-transporting type vehicle and a loading or unloading device
    therefor, which device is supported at least in part independently of the
    vehicle and travels with the vehicle during the transfer of a load from the
    device to the vehicle or vice versa.


CLS 56/474
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising means attached to a binder or
    baler traveling over a field for receiving a sheaf, bundle or bale from
    said binder or baler and handling the sheaf, bundle or bale to deposit it
    on the field.

    (1)     Note.  A single sheaf, bundle or bale may be deposited on the field
    at one time or a group of sheaves, bundles or bales may be collected for
    depositing on the field at the same time.

    (2)     Note.  The handling device attached to the binder or baler may be
    of a trailing vehicle type.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass comprises an art collection.  The binder or
    baler should be claimed by name only or without any detail of the binding
    or baling mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67+,    for corn stalk cutters with means for binding cut stalks.

    120,    for devices attached to corn harvesters for loading corn stalks
    bundles onto a vehicle.

    121,    for devices attached to corn harvesters for carrying bundles of
    corn stalks.

    131+,   for devices for cutting, conveying and binding grain or the like.

    341+,   for devices for raking and bundling hay or straw.

    401+,   for shocking devices. 432+, for devices mounted on a harvester for
    binding stalks. 473.5, for storage type receivers attached to a harvester
    for receiving crops from the harvester.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses for binder or baler structure
    combined with means for depositing sheaves, bundles or bales on the ground.

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 4+ for sheaf, bundle or bale depositing devices
    comprising no more than a mere trough chute or guideway for depositing
    sheaves, bundles or bales on the ground.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, for power-driven devices for moving
    sheaves, bales or bundles along a path; see subclasses 717+ for a conveyor
    having means for changing the attitude of the conveyed load relative to the
    conveying direction.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 789.7 for discharging from a
    vehicle- carried bale accumulator, subclass 111 for a vehicle-carried bale
    accumulator, and subclasses 334+ as explained in subclass 473.5 for this
    class (56).


CLS 56/475
TXT Devices under subclass 474 having means to trip automatically the mechanism
    for discharging the sheaf, bundle or bale.


CLS 56/476
TXT Devices under subclass 475 wherein the carrier swings about a fixed
    horizontal axis to discharge the sheaf, bundle or bale.


CLS 56/477
TXT Devices under subclass 474 wherein the sheaf, bundle or bale rests on an
    endless carrier which is normally motionless, but may be thrown into gear
    to discharge the sheaf, bundle or bale.


CLS 56/478
TXT Devices under subclass 474 having a series of tines which normally project
    transversely to the line of travel, but may be folded about approximately
    vertical axes to discharge the sheaf, bundle or bale.


CLS 56/479
TXT Devices under subclass 474 having a receptacle with a bottom which is
    opened to discharge the sheaf, bundle or bale.


CLS 56/480
TXT Device under subclass 474 wherein the carrier swings about a fixed
    horizontal axis to discharge the sheaf, bundle or bale.


CLS 56/500
TXT Devices under the class definition in which a means is provided for cutting
    dead crop material into a plurality of small pieces.

    (1)     Note.  This definition includes devices for chopping up leaves,
    brush, plant stalks and stubble.  While the stalks are generally broken
    down or already severed from their roots and lying on the ground, they may
    be stalks which are still standing but from which the ears or the like have
    been picked.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, especially subclasses 35+ and 518+ for stalk
    choppers which chop the stalks into small pieces by shearing the same
    between a cutting member and the earth's surface. Generally the cutting
    member is a blade on a drum which rolls or is driven along the ground in
    such fashion that the ground acts as a back up means against which the
    cutter member bears as it shears through the stalks, the ground surface
    being at the same time either intentionally or merely incidentally stirred
    or agitated.


CLS 56/501
TXT Devices under subclass 500 in which there are means for causing a current
    of air to gather or feed crop material to the means for cutting the same
    into a plurality of small pieces.


CLS 56/502
TXT Devices under subclass 500 in which a separate gatherer is provided for
    picking up the crop material which is to be cut into a plurality of small
    pieces by the crop cutting means and said gatherer is driven so as to have
    a regular cyclical motion with respect to its mounting frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for devices for picking up hay and chopping the same into small
    pieces for subsequent delivery to a truck, storage bin or like receptacle.


CLS 56/503
TXT Devices under subclass 500 in which the crop cutting means rotates about an
    axis which is perpendicularly disposed relative to the ground.


CLS 56/504
TXT Devices under subclass 500 in which the crop cutting means rotates about an
    axis which is perpendicular to the line of draft and which lies in a plane
    which is parallel to the ground.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    501     and 502, for the combination of air current or driven stalk
    gathering or pick up means with stalk chopping means, which latter means is
    generally disposed to rotate about a horizontal transverse axis.


CLS 56/505
TXT Devices under subclass 504 in which a fixed, elongated, transversely
    disposed blade or plate is so associated with the rotary crop cutting means
    that during rotation of the latter the crop material will be sheared off
    between the blade or plate and a cooperating shearing surface or element of
    the rotary cutting means.


CLS 57/
TTL TEXTILES:  SPINNING, TWISTING,  AND TWINING

CLS 57/
TXT This class includes processes and apparatus for:



    1.      Producing strands of indefinite length by means of a twisting,
    twining and/or untwisting operation.

    2.      Twisting filamentary and/or fibrous material into yarns, threads,
    cords, ropes, wire ropes, cables, etc.

    3.      Other operations such as attenuating, drafting or drawing fibrous
    material, when combined with twisting or twining, and not elsewhere
    classified.

    4.      Covering cores of indefinite length when including or followed by a
    twisting or twining operation.The products of the above are also included
    where not elsewhere classified.

    (1)     Note.  Spinning, as it is known in the art with reference to the
    production of yarns, etc., from cotton, wool and/or other fibrous
    materials, includes the attenuating, drawing or drafting of the fibrous
    material, together with the twisting and winding thereof.  Such devices are
    in subclasses 315+. Subcombinations of spinning devices (except drawing,
    which is found in Class 19, Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses 236+)
    are found elsewhere in this class.

    Since continuous filamentary material ordinarily cannot be drafted, the
    term "spinning" as employed in this class cannot be applied to the twisting
    of silk in filamentary form, continuous artificial filaments, wires, etc.
    Consequently, search for devices for operating on such material should not
    be made in subclass 315.

    It is noted that "silk throwing" is sometimes spoken of as "spinning".  The
    term is considered properly applied only when operating on short fiber silk
    or short lengths of artificial filaments or waste of such, and in the same
    manner as cotton, wool and other fibrous materials are spun.

    The term "spinning" is sometimes applied to the production of artificial
    filaments by extrusion of material through a spinneret.  Apparatus for such
    production of the filaments with or without subsequent twist thereof is in
    Class 425, Plastic Articles or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 66 and 67+.

    Processes for production of artificial filaments by extrusion through a
    spinneret with or without subsequent twisting thereof are in Class 264,
    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    particularly subclasses 103, 145+, 164, and 165+.

    (2)     Note.  The term "twisting couple" as employed in this class defines
    that part of a spinning or twisting machine comprising a strand receiver
    and an element cooperating therewith to twist and wind the strand material.
     One element of the couple by its rotation or revolution twists the strand.
     The relative rotation between one element and the other causes the winding
    when the elements are concentric or coaxial.

    (3)     Note.  For drawing, carding and other fiber preparation involving
    no twisting, see Class 19, Textiles:  Fiber Preparation.

    (4)     Note. For the process of making a spinning machine forging die by
    metal deforming operation, see Class 72, Metal Deforming, subclasses 343+.

    (4.5)   Note. For the process of making a weaver implement or iron by means
    of a forging die, see Class 72, Metal Deforming, subclasses 462+.

    (5)     Note.  For braiding, netting and lace making, see Class 87,
    Textiles: Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making.

    (6)     Note.  Compare Class 140, Wireworking, subclass 149, and Class 72,
    Metal Deforming, subclasses 64+.

    (7)     Note.  The line between this class and Class 174, Electricity:
    Conductors and Insulators, is as follows:  Patents claiming only conductor
    structure are found in Class 174.  Patents claiming strand structure of
    twisted or twined form and not limited to conductors are found in this
    class (57), subclasses 200+.

    (8)     Note.  Class 242, Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, includes winding
    or unwinding operations wherein no spinning, twisting or twining is
    involved.

    (9)     Note.  The line between this class (57) and Class 29, Metal
    Working, is as follows:  Original patents claiming method of, or means for
    twisting a plurality of elongated filamentary materials together to form a
    solid cable or "wire rope" are found:  (a) in this class (57) if the
    material is nonmetal or if the material is metal that is clearly not
    stressed beyond its elastic limit; or (b) in Class 29 if the material is
    metal that is operated upon as by tension, stress beyond elastic limit, or
    equivalent deformation, to produce a "permanent" set in the material.
    Within Class 29, subclasses 428+ is the locus of method claims, and
    subclasses 700+ the locus of apparatus claims, directed to the subject
    matter set forth above.


CLS 57/1
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising apparatus for
    spinning, twisting, or twining, processes involving the use of such
    apparatus not classified elsewhere, or processes for spinning, twisting, or
    twining not limited to the use of such apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of these subclasses indented hereunder,
    which subject matter is defined in apparatus terms, should be understood to
    encompass the apparatus as defined and processes involving the use of such
    apparatus.


CLS 57/2
TXT Apparatus for both stapilizing and twisting continuous filament yarns or
    bundles to produce spun or simulated spun yarn.

    (1)     Note.  The stapilizing operation may be performed upon individual
    continuous filaments, a tow or slightly twisted bundle of such filaments,
    or upon a yarn produced by twisting such filaments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91      and 317+, for means for producing yarn of irregular form by
    irregularity in the feeding of strand material to the twisting
    instrumentalities.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses .3+ for the combination of
    a significantly claimed stapilizing process or apparatus with a twisting
    method or means not claimed significantly, also for stapilizing processes
    and apparatus per se.


CLS 57/2.3
TXT Devices under subclass 1 for untwisting or untwining strand material and
    leading at least one of the former component strands away from the
    untwisting zone along a path distinct from that followed by the remainder
    of such component strands.


CLS 57/2.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 2.3 including means for winding into a package at
    least one of the separated component strands.


CLS 57/3
TXT Apparatus for winding one or more strands spirally about a core to form a
    strand of indefinite length.

    (1)     Note.  For apparatus for forming endless bands by winding strands
    about a core, see this class, subclass 21.

    (2)     Note.  For apparatus for splicing strands which may also include
    covering or wrapping operations, see this class, subclasses 22 and 23.

    (3)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 24.

    (5)     Note.  For apparatus for winding a thread spirally around a warp
    chain, see Class 28, Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclass 176.

    (7)     Note.  For apparatus for covering wire by an operation other than
    spiral winding, such as, for example, by folding, see Class 29, Metal
    Working, subclass 202.5.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 202.5 for a cable wrapping device which
    "sets" the wrapping material by means other than the mere application, and
    see (1) Note thereunder.

    53,     Package Making, appropriate subclasses for methods of and apparatus
    for encompassing or encasing goods or materials with a separate cover or
    band which serves as means for identifying, protecting or unit handling the
    goods or materials, especially subclasses 203+ and subclasses 204 and 210+
    indented thereunder for apparatus to wrap a contents to form a package.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for laminating processes and apparatus and
    especially subclasses 51+ for covering electrical conductors of indefinite
    length, subclasses 169+ for processes of winding strands about a core, and
    subclasses 184+ for processes of winding a sheet or web about a core.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 434+ for ring winding
    and subclasses 430+ for forming an article by winding material onto a core.


CLS 57/3.5
TXT Devices under subclass 3 including means for opening a twisted or twined
    strand having a core, removing the core, inserting a new core, and closing
    the remaining strands about such new core.

    (1)     Note.  The strand structure is usually untwisted for removal of the
    old core and retwisted after insertion of the new core, in a continuous
    operation, in which case the total twisting operation consists of the
    imposition of a temporary or false twist.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    328+,   for false twisters combined with drawing apparatus.

    332+,   for false twist devices per se.


CLS 57/4
TXT Devices under subclass 3 for feeding and wrapping horsehair, grass,
    quillstock, and the like with one or more strands. Quillstock is prepared
    from quills of feathers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclass 4.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 27.


CLS 57/5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 3 for applying loosely associated, untwisted or
    substantially untwisted fibers spirally about a core.  Compacting the
    fibers about the core is included, when in combination with the applying
    means.

    (1)     Note.  Compare with Class 19, Textiles: Fiber Preparation,
    subclasses 145 and 150+.


CLS 57/6
TXT Devices under subclass 3 combined with apparatus for performing operations
    other than twisting, covering or wrapping, and not elsewhere classified.

    (1)     Note.  With the exception of coating or impregnating, the other
    operations are usually precedent or concomitant with the twisting
    operation.  Twisting operations combined with subsequent operations are
    usually classified with the final operation.  For example, combinations of
    covering a core by twisting followed by braiding, are found in Class 87,
    Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    51+ for processes for covering indefinite length endless conductors.


CLS 57/7
TXT Devices under subclass 6 including means to apply a fluid or plastic
    material to the wrapping, the core, and/or to the completed article.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 32 and 295+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for coating apparatus,
    per se, and see section V of the class definition for the line between
    Class 118 and the textile classes.


CLS 57/8
TXT Devices under subclass 6 having means for incorporating pulverulent
    material into the twisted strand.  For example, this subclass includes
    incorporation of gunpowder as in fuse making.

    (1)     Note.  For fuse-making in general, see Class 86, Ammunition and
    Explosive-Charge Making, subclass 1.


CLS 57/9
TXT Devices under subclass 6 provided with means to preform or shape the wire
    or strand before the covering or wrapping operation.  This operation is
    usually for the purpose of preventing backtwist or to cause even laying of
    the strands about the core.

    (1)     Note.  For twisting devices other than for covering or wrapping,
    combined with strand preforming or shaping, see this class, subclass 311.


CLS 57/10
TXT Apparatus under subclass 3 wherein the supply of covering strands is
    revolved about the core and moved longitudinally thereof during the
    covering operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 439+ for forming a
    composite article by winding material from an orbital material supply onto
    a core.


CLS 57/11
TXT Apparatus under subclass 3 wherein the core is rotated bodily to wind the
    covering strand thereon.  Either the supply for the covering strand may be
    moved longitudinally of the core or the core may have an additional
    longitudinal movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 443+ for forming a
    composite article by winding material onto a rotating core.


CLS 57/12
TXT Apparatus under subclass 3 wherein means is provided in addition to the
    covering or wrapping means to twist the core concomitantly with the
    covering thereof, or to twist the completed strand, including the core,
    following or simultaneously with the application of the covering.

    (1)     Note.  For twisting couples, per se, see also this class,
    subclasses 60, 61, and 66+.


CLS 57/13
TXT Apparatus under subclass 3 for wrapping a plurality of strands about a core.


CLS 57/14
TXT Apparatus under subclass 13 provided with means for cabling or doubling the
    wrapped strands.

    (1)     Note.  Compare Class 242, Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclass
    42.


CLS 57/15
TXT Apparatus under subclass 13 wherein the strands are applied to the core in
    successive layers.


CLS 57/16
TXT Apparatus under subclass 15 wherein the wrapping material is fed from
    supply reels or bobbins which are mounted for rotation coaxially of the
    core.


CLS 57/17
TXT Apparatus under subclass 13 where in the wrapping material is fed from
    supply reels or bobbins which are mounted for rotation coaxially of the
    core.

    (1)     Note.  Search also this class, subclass 16.


CLS 57/18
TXT Apparatus under subclass 3 wherein the wrapping material is fed from supply
    reels or bobbins which are mounted for rotation coaxially of the core.

    (1)     Note.  Search also this class, subclasses 16 and 17.


CLS 57/19
TXT Apparatus under subclass 3 provided with mechanism for starting or
    stopping, either automatically or manually controlled.

    (1)     Note.  Stop mechanisms generally applicable to this class will be
    found in subclasses 78+.


CLS 57/20
TXT Means for making waxed ends for sewing, limited for the most part to
    expedients for tapering the ends.


CLS 57/21
TXT Means for forming endless bands, grommets and the like by a twisting or
    twining operation.

    (2)     Note.  Compare Classes 140, Wireworking, subclass 88; and 242,
    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 434+.


CLS 57/22
TXT Devices for joining or uniting threads, cords, ropes, etc., by a twisting
    or twining operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    49 for splicing of indefinite length conductors.


CLS 57/23
TXT Implements used in connection with splicing, such as those used to separate
    the strands of a rope or cable to facilitate the splicing operation.

    (1)     Note.  For needles of general application, see Class 223, Apparel
    Apparatus, subclasses 102+.

    (2)     Note.  For hand implements employed in knot tying operations, see
    Class 289, Knots and Knot Tying, subclass 17.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, subclass 103 for patents to a device for holding
    cable about a thimble (rigger's vise).

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 206+ for a joint of general
    application involving a curved or bent rod, subclass 275 for a joint
    involving a stranded rod wherein the rod is deformed by an element inserted
    between the strands and subclass 291 for a joint involving a flexible
    member in general.


CLS 57/24
TXT Means for forming strands, usually ornamental, by twisting two or more
    strands or filaments together to bind in numerous short transverse threads
    or filaments.


CLS 57/25
TXT Apparatus for twisting determinate lengths of strands by rotating one or
    both ends.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 20 for apparatus for making waxed
    ends.

    (2)     Note.  Compare Class 140, Wireworking, subclass 149.


CLS 57/26
TXT Devices under subclass 25 having means for doubling the strands after the
    initial twist is made to permit the reverse twist.


CLS 57/27
TXT Devices under subclass 26 having also devices inserted between the doubled
    strands to hold back the reverse twist as it is made and insure an even
    laying thereof.


CLS 57/28
TXT Apparatus for twisting hair, grass, and the like to form yarn or cordage
    therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  For apparatus for feeding and wrapping such materials, see
    this class, subclass 4.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 56, Harvesters, subclasses 460, 461 and 462 for
    straw band forming devices combined with harvester mechanisms.

    (3)     Note.  For sewing machines for making straw braid, see Class 112,
    Sewing, subclass 23.


CLS 57/29
TXT Apparatus under subclass 28 having means to insert additional hard twist to
    cause the strand to curl or coil about its longitudinal axis.


CLS 57/30
TXT Apparatus under subclass 28 having means for feeding individual hairs,
    stalks of straw or the like successively to a machine for forming them into
    a yarn.

    (1)     Note.  For feeding mechanisms generally applicable to twisting
    devices within this class, see this class, subclasses 90+.


CLS 57/31
TXT Devices for twisting paper or paper-like material, such as synthetic tape,
    asbestos paper, etc., in ribbon form with or without the addition of
    fibrous material to form yarns or cords therefrom.


CLS 57/32
TXT Devices under subclass 31 having additional means for applying fluid or
    plastic material to the paper or paper-like material, concomitantly with
    the twisting operation.

    (1)     Note.  For machines for twisting or twining materials in general,
    combined with coating or impregnating, see this class, subclasses 295+.


CLS 57/33
TXT Apparatus for forming hollow ropes or strands by twisting or twining
    operations. These machines usually involve twisting or twining of strands
    upon a hollow mandrel.


CLS 57/58.3
TXT Means under subclass 1 for twining or twisting together two or more
    strands, in which strands from a plurality of sources of supply extend to a
    closing point with the strand from at least one such source being revolved
    (as by a flyer) about at least one other such supply source before being
    intertwisted or intertwined with the remaining strand or strands.

    (1)     Note.  In a typical structure of this type, most of the strand
    supply sources are mounted substantially co-axially within an elongated
    cradle, tube, cage, or flyer, and the strands are led to points away from
    the axis of such structure (to clear other supply sources) and thence along
    the structure toward a closing point which is beyond the confines of the
    flyer but located on the axis thereof.  The revolution, about the remaining
    packages, of the strand(s) to be twisted is like the revolution of the rope
    about the jumper in rope skipping.

    (2)     Note.  The component strands are laid together in adjacent helical
    convolutions, with or without twisting of the individual strands forming
    such convolutions.  Such individual component twisting depends upon the
    revolution of the individual supply source, from which the component strand
    emanates, about an axis substantially parallel to that of the unwinding
    strand.

    (3)     Note.  The devices of this subclass are distinguished from those of
    subclass 58.49 in that here a strand does not necessarily pass in a loop
    about its own supply.  Multiple twisters, however, may be found as
    subcombinations of the apparatus of this and indented subclasses.


CLS 57/58.32
TXT Devices under subclass 58.3 for maintaining a desired rate of rotation of
    the supply source carrier or cradle relative to a fixed point (such as the
    machine frame).


CLS 57/58.34
TXT Means under subclass 58.3 including a support for a spool-carrying cradle
    which comprises a part of the joint structure for assembling two sections
    of a built-up tube or flyer, or which comprises a tube or flyer supporting
    and/or driving disc.


CLS 57/58.36
TXT Apparatus under subclass 58.3 wherein means are provided for guiding
    strands along the strand revolving structure (e.g., tube or flyer) in the
    direction of the closing point.

    (1)     Note.  The guiding means herein classified are exclusive of the
    means for guiding the strands from the tube frame or flyer to the closing
    point for which see this class, subclass 361.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    353+,   for strand guiding means of more general utility in twisting
    apparatus.


CLS 57/58.38
TXT Devices under subclass 58.36 including means for rotating the guiding means
    about its own axis, which axis is substantially parallel to the axis of the
    strand revolving structure.

    (1)     Note.  Such guides usually function to control torsion in the
    strands to be intertwined while they are being led toward the closing point.


CLS 57/58.49
TXT Devices under subclass 1 in which a loop or balloon of strand material
    being twisted is revolved about its own supply or take-up package.

    (1)     Note.  Two twists are produced for each revolution of a single loop
    about its package.  Further twist may be added (or subtracted) by the
    introduction of an additional loop of the strand revolving about its
    package in the sense opposite to (or the same as) that of the first loop.
    For patents disclosing such plural co-axial loops, see subclass 58.61
    indented hereunder.

    (2)     Note.  These devices differ from the devices in subclass 58.3 in
    that the latter must include at least one strand loop revolving about the
    package of another strand.  Unitary multiple twist devices, of the type
    found in this and indented subclasses, may constitute a subcombination of a
    skip type strander; see, for example patent 2,499,245 to Harmon, in
    subclass 58.32 above.

    (3)     Note.  Either the supply package or the take-up package, or both,
    may be rotated or revolved to produce an additional or subtractive twist.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60+,    for means for imparting both a delivery twist and a receiving twist
    to a strand or strands.


CLS 57/58.52
TXT Apparatus under subclass 58.49 comprising a multiple twist device which is
    additionally effective to strand, ply, or intertwine two or more strands,
    or the combination of a multiple twist device with stranding, plying, or
    intertwining means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     63 and 64, for intertwining or intertwisting means not necessarily
    associated with a unitary multiple twist device.


CLS 57/58.54
TXT Means under subclass 58.52 provided with two or more complete unitary
    multiple twist units operating on strands to be stranded or laid together.

    (1)     Note.  A multiple twist unit is composed of a strand package and
    means to revolve at least one loop of the strand about such package.


CLS 57/58.55
TXT Devices under subclass 58.54 in which strands supplied by a plurality of
    multiple twist units are stranded or laid by a succeeding multiple twist
    unit.


CLS 57/58.57
TXT Apparatus under subclass 58.52 comprising a multiple twist device which is
    additionally effective to impart false twist to a strand being twisted, or
    the combination of a multiple twist device with associated false twisting
    means.

    (1)     Note.  Means to prevent twist occurring at the normal or usual
    twisting point, and causing it to appear later, are properly classified in
    this subclass; see, for example, patent 1,907,551 to Kraft, which appears
    as a cross reference in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58.59,  for multiple twisters combined with false twisters and not
    associated with stranding or laying means; and see the Notes thereto.


CLS 57/58.59
TXT Devices under subclass 58.4 comprising a multiple twist device which is
    additionally effective to impart false twist to a strand being twisted, or
    the combination of a multiple twist device with associated false twisting
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58.57,  for false twisters combined with stranding, doubling or
    intertwining unitary multiple twist apparatus.

    328+,   for false twisters combined with drafting means.

    332+,   for false twist devices, per se.


CLS 57/58.61
TXT Devices under subclass 58.49 in which two or more loops or balloons of the
    same strand are revolved coaxially about the strand package.


CLS 57/58.63
TXT Means under subclass 58.49 including synchronously rotated loop-forming
    flyer members whose centers of rotation are located, one on either side of
    the strand package, at axially spaced points on the path of travel of the
    strand.

    (1)     Note.  For inclusion in this subclass, the invention must relate to
    plural flyers individually driven.  Patents directed to plural connected
    flyers, only one of which is driven, are classified according to
    characteristics other than the multi-part nature of the strand revolving
    means.


CLS 57/58.65
TXT Apparatus under subclass 58.49 in which the package about which the loop is
    revolved, is the take-up package.


CLS 57/58.67
TXT Means under subclass 58.65 in which the strand winding guide is revolved
    about the package, or the package is reciprocated to provide relative
    traverse of the strand in winding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 158+ for
    strand-traversing take-up means, per se.


CLS 57/58.68
TXT Apparatus under subclass 58.65 in which the winding bobbin or reel is
    driven, through slippable means, by the flyer drive, thus incorporating a
    flexible drive which is responsive to the varying load demands of the
    package and strand.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 54.1+ for torque
    responsive clutches, per se.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, subclasses 30+ for slip couplings, per se.


CLS 57/58.7
TXT Devices under subclass 58.49 having means for positively feeding the
    strands to, through, or from the multiple twist device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90+,    for strand feeding means combined with twisting means generally;
    and see the Notes thereto.


CLS 57/58.72
TXT Apparatus under subclass 58.49 having means for controlling motion of the
    package, carrier or support.

    (1)     Note.  The control may be exerted, for instance, to keep the
    package stationary or to revolve or rotate it for additional twisting.


CLS 57/58.74
TXT Means under subclass 58.72 in which the control over the package is
    exercised to prevent or reduce vibration of the package or its support.

    (1)     Note.  Control means which operate only to diminish the amplitude
    of oscillation of the package holder about its mounting axis are not
    considered to be vibration dampers for this subclass.


CLS 57/58.76
TXT Devices under subclass 58.72 in which at least one magnetic field of force
    extends between the package or package carrier structure and another part
    of the device and operates to control the motion of the package.


CLS 57/58.78
TXT Apparatus under subclass 58.72 wherein a train of gearing extends from the
    package or package carrier structure to another part of the device and
    operates to control motion of such package.

    (1)     Note.  The gearing often is of the planetary type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 640+ for mechanical
    movements based on gearing.


CLS 57/58.79
TXT Means under subclass 58.78 in which the gearing is of the friction type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    476,    Friction Gear Transmission Systems or Components, for frictional
    gear transmissions.


CLS 57/58.81
TXT Devices under subclass 58.72 in which the package or package carrier is
    provided with means which, being acted upon by gravity, operates to
    maintain the carrier stationary; or in which the package or its carrier is
    so configurated or so inclined that the weight thereof tends to prevent
    motion of the carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58.74,  for package control means effective to prevent vibration of the
    package other than that represented by oscillation about its mounting axis.


CLS 57/58.83
TXT Apparatus under subclass 58.49 provided with means for guiding, guarding,
    or controlling a strand in its passage to, through, or from the multiple
    twist device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    for flyer elements (which, of necessity, must include some strand
    guiding means).

    352+,   for strand guiding or guarding means not associated with a multiple
    twist device.


CLS 57/58.84
TXT Means under subclass 58.83 in which the strand is controlled by winding on
    a drum or pulley co-axial with the flyer.

    (1)     Note.  The strand winds and unwinds in response to variations in
    tension in the loop, thus providing "storage in transit" for a variable
    amount of running strand material.


CLS 57/58.86
TXT Apparatus under subclass 58.83 provided with means to control the tension
    on the strands being operated upon.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the tension devices found in this subclass are
    adapted to function additionally as twist controllers or barriers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    328+,   for twist controlling means combined with drafting and false
    twisting devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 410+ and 147+ for a
    tension control or brake with winding, unwinding, or in general use.


CLS 57/59
TXT Devices in which a strand or strands are twisted by rotation of the source
    of supply of material to be twisted relative to the axis of the strand
    being formed.

    (1)     Note. For delivery twist devices employed in covering or wrapping
    strands spirally about a core, see this class, subclasses 3+.


CLS 57/60
TXT Devices under subclass 59 combined with a twisting couple for giving
    additional twist and winding the finished product.

    (1)     Note.  These are strictly multiple twist devices, but it is to be
    noted that in subclasses 58.49+ the twisting device is unitary and the one
    twisting couple inserts the plural twist.

    (2)     Note.  Combinations of receiving twist and delivery twist are
    included here even though the delivery twist is only for the purpose of
    taking out the twist of unwinding.

    (3)     Note.  For twisting couples combined with covering or wrapping
    apparatus, see this class, subclass 12.

    (4)     Note.  For twisting couples, see also this class, subclasses 66+.


CLS 57/61
TXT Devices under subclass 60 including means automatically or manually
    operated for stopping or starting both the supply and twisting couple.

    (1)     Note.  For devices for stopping or starting covering or wrapping
    apparatus, see this class, subclass 19.

    (2)     Note.  For devices for stopping or starting the supply alone or the
    couple alone, see this class, subclasses 78+.


CLS 57/62
TXT Devices under subclass 59 including a winding mechanism for winding the
    twisted material.

    (1)     Note.  Search also this class, subclasses 60 and 61.


CLS 57/63
TXT Devices under subclass 62 having means for twisting individual groups of
    two or more strand elements and concomitantly, by continued operation of
    the machine, twisting said groups together and winding them upon a receiver.

    (1)     Note.  Compare with this class, subclass 14.


CLS 57/64
TXT Devices under subclass 59 having means for twisting individual groups of
    two or more strand elements and concomitantly, by continued operation of
    the machine twisting said groups together.

    (1)     Note.  Search also this class, subclass 63.

    (2)     Note.  Compare with this class, subclass 14.


CLS 57/65
TXT Devices under subclass 59 wherein the strand supplying devices in addition
    to being revolved about the axis of the twisted structure, have a rotation
    relative to the strands fed therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  Search also this class, subclasses 14, 63 and 64.


CLS 57/66
TXT Devices in which the winding or receiving element for the strand or
    filamentary material is rotated or revolved to accomplish the twisting and
    winding. Twisting couples are classified here and in the subclasses
    indented hereunder.

    (1)     Note.  For twisting couples combined with covering or wrapping
    apparatus, see this class, subclass 12.

    (2)     Note.  For multiple receiving twist devices, see this class,
    subclasses 58.49+.

    (3)     Note.  For twisting couples combined with delivery twist devices,
    see this class, subclasses 60 and 61.


CLS 57/66.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 66 in which the twist is imparted to the strand by
    the rotation of a cradle carrying the strand receiving package.


CLS 57/67
TXT Receiving twist devices under subclass 66 having thread guiding means
    mounted for rotation about an axis usually coincident with the axis of a
    strand receiver or holder.

    (1)     Note.  For unitary devices of this type for producing a multiple
    twist with each rotation, see this class, subclasses 58.49+.


CLS 57/68
TXT Devices under subclass 67 wherein the twisting and winding means includes a
    windlass to feed the twisted material.


CLS 57/70
TXT Devices under subclass 67 wherein the strand receiver is rotated by the
    pull of the material being twisted and wound. Usually some friction means
    is provided to retard and govern the rotation of the receiver.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 72.


CLS 57/71
TXT Coaxially arranged twisting couples under subclass 67 having means for
    traversing either a guide for the twisted strand or the receiver upon which
    the twisted strand is being wound.

    (1)     Note.  Search also this class, subclasses 68, 69 and 70.

    (2)     Note.  See this class, subclass 99, for traversing of driven
    elements.

    (3)     Note.  Traversing of ring rails or bobbin rails is in Class 242,
    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 26.1+.

    (4)     Note.  Traversing mechanism per se of general application is in
    Class 242, Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 158+.


CLS 57/72
TXT Devices under subclass 66 wherein the strand receiver is rotated by the
    pull of the material being twisted and wound. Usually some friction means
    is provided to retard and govern and rotation of the receiver.

    (1)     Note.  Search also this class, subclass 70.


CLS 57/73
TXT Twisting couples under subclass 66 in which the tip of the bobbin or
    spindle is constructed to assist in the twisting operation.


CLS 57/74
TXT Receiving twist type apparatus under subclass 66 having a stationary strand
    twisting and laying device cooperating with the strand receiver.  The
    stationary device is usually cup-shaped and is provided with a bearing or
    raceway for the strand portion which slips around the receiver.

    (1)     Note.  For caps, per se, see this class, subclass 127.


CLS 57/75
TXT Twisting couples under subclass 66 in which one element of the couple
    comprises a ring and its traveler.

    (1)     Note.  For rings and travelers as elemental subcombinations see
    this class, subclasses 119+.


CLS 57/76
TXT Receiving twist devices comprising buckets, pots, etc., known in the trade
    as "spinning pots" or "spinning buckets," usually employed for collecting
    freshly formed artificial filaments.  This subclass includes also the
    funnels or guides for depositing or guiding the filaments to the interior
    of the pot.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 67+ for the combination of a filament forming means and a
    "spinning pot".


CLS 57/77
TXT Devices under subclass 76 provided with means for rotating the pots.  This
    subclass includes electric drives especially designed for rotating the pot,
    and also means to reciprocate the guide and/or the pot.  Couplings when
    embodied as a part of or a modification of the drive and the pot are also
    included.

    (1)     Note.  Other drives are in this class, subclasses 92+.

    (3)     Note.  Couplings, per se, are in Class 403, Joints and Connections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 360.1+ for
    centrifugal extractors, some of which have driving mechanisms.


CLS 57/78
TXT Spinning or twisting machines provided with means either manually or
    automatically operated to facilitate the stopping and/or starting thereof.

    (1)     Note.  For covering or wrapping machines combined with stopping or
    starting devices, see this class, subclass 19.

    (2)     Note.  For starting and stopping devices for mule type spinning
    machines, see this class, subclasses 320+.

    (3)     Note.  For delivery twist devices combined with twisting couples
    and provided with means to stop or start both the supply and the twisting
    couple, see this class, subclass 61.

    (4)     Note.  For other textile machines equipped with starting and
    stopping means or for starting and stopping means of general application.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses .2+.

    28,     Textiles: Manufacturing, subclasses 186+.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclasses 157+.

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, subclasses 18+.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 336+.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 125+.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 22, 28+ and 36+.


CLS 57/79
TXT Devices under subclass 78 wherein the traverse or movement of an element of
    a twisting couple during winding of strand material controls the stopping,
    under predetermined conditions, usually when sufficient material is wound
    on the receiver.  Such devices may be associated with the ring rail, the
    bobbin rail, or the builder motion, or an element moving synchronously
    therewith.

    (1)     Note.  For traversing driving mechanism without stopping and
    starting, see this class, subclass 99.


CLS 57/80
TXT Devices under subclass 78 wherein the condition of the strand or material
    being operated on controls the stopping, as by failure, exhaustions, too
    much or too little tension, undue accumulations, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Search also Class 66, Textiles: Knitting, subclasses 158+.


CLS 57/81
TXT Devices under subclass 80 in which electrical energy is utilized to operate
    the stop mechanism, the strand detector or responsive device usually
    operating to close or open an electric control circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclass 161 and the classes referred to in
    the notes thereto.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.13+ for
    electrical switches which are controlled by threads or strands; see
    subclass 61.14 where the switch is controlled by a knot or change in
    diameter of the thread or strand, and subclass 61.18 where the switch is
    controlled by the slack, breakage, run-out or failure to travel along its
    intended path.


CLS 57/82
TXT Devices under subclass 80 which stop an individual twisting couple,
    together with its associated feeding means.

    (1)     Note.  Search also this class, subclass 61.


CLS 57/83
TXT Devices under subclass 80 wherein the feeding means only is rendered
    inoperative or ineffective.

    (1)     Note.  Search also this class, subclasses 82 and 326.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 10+ for
    material-responsive control of web or strand feed means.


CLS 57/84
TXT Devices under subclass 83 in which one feed roll of a pair is separated
    from its driving roll to render the feeding action inoperative.


CLS 57/85
TXT Devices under subclass 83 wherein the strand or strands being fed are
    laterally moved with respect to the bite of the feeding rolls to effect
    stopping and starting.


CLS 57/86
TXT Devices under subclass 83 acting upon failure of one or more strands to
    sever or part the unbroken strands to thereby stop the feed.

    (1)     Note.  Search also Classes 66, Textiles: Knitting, subclass 159,
    and 242, Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclass 19.


CLS 57/87
TXT Devices under subclass 86 in which the strands are gripped in advance of
    the feed means to cause them to be parted by the continued operation of the
    feed.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 353.


CLS 57/88
TXT Devices under subclass 78 having means to facilitate the stopping of a
    single spindle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61.


CLS 57/89
TXT Devices under subclass 88 provided with means to move a spindle laterally
    toward and away from its driving means to effect stopping and starting.


CLS 57/90
TXT Rotary devices or means for positively moving or conducting strand or
    filamentary material to or through a twisting or spinning machine.

    (1)     Note.  For means for feeding hair, grass or the like to twisting
    machines, see this class, subclass 30.

    (2)     Note.  Feeding devices in the form of capstans mounted within
    twisting fliers are in this class, subclass 68.

    (3)     Note.  For feeding means stopping, see this class, subclasses 78+,
    particularly subclasses 83+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.


CLS 57/91
TXT Devices under subclass 90 having means to feed a strand or one or more of a
    plurality of strands variably or intermittently to produce slubs, nubs or
    other variations in the twisted product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    317+.


CLS 57/92
TXT Means for driving, spinning, twisting or twining machines or parts thereof,
    not elsewhere classifiable.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and those indented hereunder do not include
    driving means for spinning mules, for which see this class, subclasses 320+.

    (2)     Note.  For driving means for spinning, twisting or twining machine
    wherein the novelty resides in stopping or starting mechanism, see this
    class, subclasses 19, 61 and 78+.

    (3)     Note.  For centrifugal spinning pots equipped with driving
    connections, see this class, subclass 77.

    (4)     Note.  Compare Class 242, Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding,
    subclasses 46.2+.


CLS 57/93
TXT Driving devices under subclass 92 provided with means to adjust or vary the
    speed at which the machines or parts thereof operate.

    (1)     Note.  For strand feeding means having speed variation for
    irregular feeding, see this class, subclass 91.


CLS 57/94
TXT Driving devices under subclass 93 wherein the speed of the machine or part
    thereof is constantly and continuously varied during one complete cycle of
    its operation.

    (1)     Note.  The driving device may provide a short interval wherein the
    speed is at a constant maximum.

    (2)     Note.  For strand feeding means having cyclical speed variation for
    irregular feeding, see this class, subclass 91.


CLS 57/95
TXT Driving devices under subclass 94 having means providing for additional
    variation of the speed of the machine or part thereof during each traverse
    of a traversing element of the twisting couple.  These devices may be
    operated from the builder motion.

    (1)     Note.  For driving means having traverse controlled speed variation
    not superposed upon a constant variation, see this class, subclass 98.


CLS 57/96
TXT Driving devices under subclass 94 of the fly or roving frame type having
    means to control or regulate the relative speed of the fliers and
    cooperating spools or other receivers, both fliers and receivers being
    positively driven.


CLS 57/97
TXT Driving devices under subclass 93 having means to vary the speed of one or
    more pairs of drawing rollers to control the twist and keep it uniform.


CLS 57/98
TXT Driving devices under subclass 93 provided with means for positively
    varying the speed during each cycle of operation of the traversing element
    of the twisting couple. This operation may be effected by the builder
    motion.

    (1)     Note.  For traverse-controlled devices for controlling the slippage
    of a belt or of friction surfaces, see this class, subclass 92.

    (2)     Note.  For similar speed adjustment superposed upon a constant
    speed variation, see this class, subclass 95.

    (3)     Note.  Compare with Class 242, Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding,
    subclasses 26.1+.


CLS 57/99
TXT Driving devices under subclass 92 arranged to drive the traversing
    mechanism or to facilitate traversing movement of a driving element for a
    twisting couple to cause proper distribution of the strand material on a
    receiver.  This must be more than a mere splined shaft device.

    (1)     Note.  Compare with Class 242, Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding,
    subclasses 26.1+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71      and 75.


CLS 57/100
TXT Driving devices under subclass 92 including an electric motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for electric motors driving centrifugal pots or spinning buckets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, appropriate subclasses for
    electrical motor structure.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses, for
    electric motor control systems.


CLS 57/101
TXT Driving devices under subclass 92 including a rotary fluid-impact or
    reaction type motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, appropriate subclasses for a
    rotary fluid-impact or reaction type motor, per se.


CLS 57/102
TXT Driving devices under subclass 92 including gear wheels or arrangements
    thereof.

    (1)     Note.  For gearing, per se, see Class 74, Machine Element or
    Mechanism, 475, Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components,
    appropriate subclasses.


CLS 57/103
TXT Driving devices under subclass 102 in which friction gear wheels are used.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    476,    Friction Gear Transmission Systems or Components, for friction
    gearing, per se.


CLS 57/104
TXT Driving devices under subclass 92 wherein endless bands or belts are used
    for the transmission of power.

    (1)     Note.  For belt drives, per se, see Class 474, Endless Belt Power
    Transmission Systems or Components.


CLS 57/105
TXT Driving devices under subclass 104 provided with means automatically to
    tension the driving bands.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 101+ for means for adjusting belt tension in an endless belt
    power transmission.


CLS 57/112
TXT Devices forming parts of spinning or twisting machines, not otherwise
    classifiable.


CLS 57/113
TXT Devices under subclass 112 provided with friction or other devices to
    control the speed of a nondriven element of a twisting couple.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70      and 72.


CLS 57/114
TXT Devices to engage or grip the strands to limit the distance that the twist
    may extend back from the twisting couple.  These devices are usually shown
    and claimed in combination with condensing or polishing heads.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30.


CLS 57/115
TXT Strand twisting or laying devices under subclass 112 having thread guiding
    means and mounted for rotation about an axis usually coincident with the
    axis of the strand, bobbin or spool.

    (1)     Note.  For fliers provided with means to facilitate doffing or
    donning, see this class, subclasses 276+.

    (2)     Note.  Fliers of the rope machine type, sometimes called "rotating
    cradles", will be found in this class, subclasses 60, 61 and 66-75.  Fliers
    in combination are also found in these subclasses.


CLS 57/116
TXT Fliers under subclass 115 usually associated with delivery twist bobbins,
    in machines such as silk throwing machines, to facilitate the unwinding and
    twisting operations.

    (1)     Note.  Devices of this type not associated with twisting devices
    will be found in Class 242, Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclass 128.


CLS 57/117
TXT Fliers under subclass 115 having means urged against the wound mass for
    compacting and assisting in the even laying of the strand.


CLS 57/118
TXT Fliers under subclass 115 comprising a ring or annulus mounted for rotation
    in a raceway and carrying a fixed strand guide.

    (1)     Note.  For elements similarly arranged but carrying no thread
    guides, see this class, subclass 112.

    (2)     Note.  For similar elements employed as part of a drag device, see
    this class, subclass 113.

    (3)     Note.  For rotating rings for travelers, see this class, subclass
    124.


CLS 57/119
TXT Devices under subclass 112 comprising stationary annular raceways for a
    sliding guide used in twisting strand material. The sliding guide or
    traveler is moved along the raceway or ring by the pull of the strand being
    twisted and wound. Travelers in combination with the rings are included.

    (1)     Note.  For receiving twist spinning organizations of ring and
    traveler type, see this class, subclass 75.


CLS 57/120
TXT Devices under subclass 119 provided with means to supply lubricant to the
    ring and/or the traveler.  This subclass does not include patents
    disclosing the conventional lubrication wherein lubricant is manually
    smeared on the traveler contacting surface of the ring at intervals, but
    does include means which are inherently self lubricating.

    (1)     Note.  Lubrication systems for ring groups are in Class 184,
    Lubrication, subclass 6 and indented subclasses.


CLS 57/121
TXT Rings and travelers under subclass 119 provided with devices to guide or
    protect the strand or the traveler in its motion.

    (1)     Note.  For separators of general application in twisting machines,
    see this class, subclasses 354+.


CLS 57/122
TXT Rings and travelers under subclass 119 provided with means to support,
    retain or adjust the ring.


CLS 57/123
TXT Rings and travelers under subclass 122 wherein the traveler is of the bar
    type, that is, the traveler comprises a bar which is positioned as a chord
    with respect to the ring with which it cooperates.

    (1)     Note.  For bar type travelers, per se, see this class, subclass 126.


CLS 57/124
TXT Devices under subclass 122 wherein the ring is mounted for rotation about
    the axis of the strand receiver.

    (1)     Note.  For ring and raceway fliers, see this class, subclass 118.


CLS 57/125
TXT The sliding guides per se used in ring spinning or twisting and adapted to
    be used on spinning or twisting rings to twist and lay a strand on a cop
    tube, spool, or other strand receiver.

    (1)     Note.  Where the sliding guide, per se, is recited solely in terms
    of the composition or stock that makes up the article, the sliding guide is
    classifiable in the appropriate composition or stock class.  Sliding guides
    defined solely by plastic compositions are classified in Class 106,
    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclass, except if the
    composition includes a synthetic resin or a natural rubber in which case
    the article will be classified in Class 520, Synthetic Resins or Natural
    Rubbers.  If the sliding guide is recited solely in terms of stock
    material, it will be classified in Class 428, Stock Material or
    Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 544+ for stock material which is all
    metal or has adjacent metal components.


CLS 57/126
TXT Travelers under subclass 125 comprising a bar which is normally arranged as
    a chord with respect to the ring with which it cooperates.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123,    for combinations of ring and bar type traveler.


CLS 57/127
TXT Stationary strand twisting and laying devices usually cup-shaped and
    cooperating with a strand receiver having a bearing or raceway for the
    strand upon which it slips around the receiver.

    (1)     Note.  For receiving twist type organizations of cap type, see this
    class, subclass 74.


CLS 57/127.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 112 for mounting supply packages in position for
    delivering strand material therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  Such devices may comprise a bobbin or spool supporting
    cradle of the type employed in stranding machines.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for bobbin or spool supports embodied in receiving twist fliers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 130+ and 134+ for
    bobbin or spool supports, per se.


CLS 57/127.7
TXT Means under subclass 127.5 for supporting a bobbin or spool and adjustable
    to compensate for strand packages of different sizes or for wear of the
    contacting parts or to facilitate assembly.


CLS 57/129
TXT Elements especially adapted to cooperate with strand twisting and laying
    devices to receive the thread in the form of a cop or thread package.
    These elements include spindles, bobbins, etc., and combinations thereof
    not elsewhere provided for.

    (1)     Note.  For centrifugal spinning pots, per se, see this class,
    subclasses 76 and 77.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     61 and 66, and indented subclasses, for combinations including
    receiving elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 35 and 118 and indented
    subclasses for spindles and bobbins of general application.

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 227+ for plain bearing structure and 603 for
    antifriction bearing structure for spinning spindles.


CLS 57/130
TXT Elements under subclass 129 combined with a driving pulley.  This pulley is
    known under many names, as whirl, whorle, wharle, wharve, etc.

    (1)     Note.  For spindle tip type whirl driven receiving elements, see
    this class, subclass 73.


CLS 57/131
TXT Elements under subclass 130 adapted to engage and hold the strand during
    doffing, starting or other operations.  These devices are primarily
    intended to insure proper starting of the strand on its receiver.

    (1)     Note.  For other means for facilitating doffing or donning, see
    this class, subclasses 276+.


CLS 57/132
TXT Elements under subclass 130 provided with means to prevent accidental
    removal of a spindle from its socket during removal of a bobbin or spool
    therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  Compare with this class, subclass 131.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80      and 89.


CLS 57/133
TXT Elements under subclass 130 provided with means for applying or conducting
    lubricant to the bearings of a spindle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, subclass 241 for lubricating a bearing structure for a
    spindle.


CLS 57/134
TXT Elements under subclass 133 in which the spindle rotates within a bearing
    usually of the type known as a bolster.

    (1)     Note.  For live spindle receiving elements without lubricating
    features, see this class, subclass 135.


CLS 57/135
TXT Elements under subclass 130 in which the spindle rotates in a bearing
    usually called a bolster.

    (1)     Note.  For live spindle receiving elements with lubrication
    features, see this class, subclass 134.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, subclass 239 for a bolster type bearing for a spindle.


CLS 57/136
TXT Horizontal bars, constituting parts of spinning or twisting machines,
    adapted to support a plurality of twisting couples or elements thereof.
    Bushings, centering and adjusting means for the rails are here included.


CLS 57/137
TXT Rails under subclass 136 especially adapted to support the ring and
    traveler twisting elements, including mountings, bushings, centering and/or
    adjusting means for the rails.

    (1)     Note.  Supports for individual rings are in this class, subclasses
    122+.


CLS 57/138
TXT Elements usually forming parts of cordage, rope or cable machines for
    compressing, guiding, and shaping strands during laying into a cord, rope
    or cable.

    (1)     Note.  For dies and mandrels combined with nippers, see this class,
    subclass 114.

    (2)     Note.  For other strand guiding and guarding devices, see this
    class, subclasses 352+.

    (3)     Note.  For metal bending mandrels, see Class 72, Metal Deforming,
    various subclasses, and particularly subclasses 64+, 66, 127+, and 476+.

    (4)     Note.  For metal drawing dies and mandrels, see Class 72, Metal
    Deforming, subclasses 274+ and 462+.

    (5)     Note.  For burnishing wire, cord, and other strands, see Class 29,
    Metal Working, subclasses 90.01+ and 90.5.


CLS 57/200
TXT STRAND STRUCTURE:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising indefinite length
    twisted structures made by the machines or process falling within this
    class and not elsewhere provided for.

    (1)     Note.  To be placed in this subclass, there must be a claimed
    twisted or twined constituent in the strand. Certain terms, such as plied,
    doubled, twined, roving, spun staple fiber yarn, etc., are accepted as
    denoting a twisted strand, and if used in a claim, classification in Class
    57 is indicated, provided all other requirements therefore are met and
    provided that the disclosure of the patent does not clearly define the
    product as one devoid of strand structure (e.g., twisted, covered, and/or
    wrapped) as provided by this class.

    (2)     Note.  A web or sheet product, distinguished only by the twisted,
    covered, and/or wrapped strand employed in its manufacture, is included in
    this subclass and the indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    Appropriate subclasses for processes and apparatus for making twisted
    strand structures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    14,     Bridges, subclass 22 for suspension bridge cables.

    28,     Textiles: Manufacturing, appropriate subclasses for processes and
    apparatus for treating textile strand structures.

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, subclasses 1 through
    13 for braided strand structures.

    104,    Railways, subclass 240 for railway traction cable construction.

    128,    Surgery, subclass 335.5 for strand structures used as sutures or
    ligatures.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 420+ for materials peculiarly
    adapted for weaving textiles.

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclass 451 for  cord reinforcement
    material used in pneumatic tires in areas other than belt, breaker or
    carcass; subclasses 556, 557 and 558+ for arrangement of carcass
    reinforcing cords; and subclass 562 for cords used in beads.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 68.1+ for
    conductor strand structures.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 189+ for a single
    strand peculiarly adapted for use as a fire escape device.

    256,    Fences, subclass 46 for a fence strand structure.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclass 537 for a dynamic, circumferential contact seal for other
    than a piston contained or compressed by a gland in a packing box having
    braided, woven, or twisted material or construction.

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclasses for processes of coating
    strand structures.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 98+ and 221+
    for web or sheet product including some defined structure other than or in
    addition to the structure of the constituent strands, per se; and
    subclasses 364+ for coated or structurally defined fiber, strand, or
    filament.  See the main definition of Class 428, section VI, C (2, a) for
    the line between Class 428 and Class 57.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 325 for coated, impregnated layered, coupled,
    or reinforced burner wick.


CLS 57/201
TXT Endless bands:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the twisted structure is formed
    into an endless band and is usually used as a driving band.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for process and apparatus for making endless bands.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclasses 539+ for tire beads.

    245,    Wire Fabrics and Structure, subclass 1.5 for tire bead grommets.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission in Systems or Components,
    particularly subclasses 237+ for a friction drive belt for a power
    transmission.


CLS 57/202
TXT Splices:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein two ends are joined together to
    form a splice solely by a twisting or twining operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22+,    for processes and apparatus for making a splice.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 275 and 291 for a joint
    involving a stranded rod or a flexible member in general.


CLS 57/203
TXT Chenille:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 comprising ornamental strands formed by
    twisting two or more strands together to bind in numerous transverse
    threads or thread filaments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for process and apparatus for making a chenille strand.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles: Manufacturing, subclass 144 for chenille fabrication or
    treatment.

    139,    Textiles: Weaving, subclass 395 for woven chenille strands.


CLS 57/204
TXT Alternately twisted:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein succeeding portions of the strand
    unit in the longitudinal direction are oppositely twisted; these are also
    known as S-Z twisted strands.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    293,    for process and apparatus for making alternately twisted strands.


CLS 57/205
TXT Crimped or bulked type:

    Subject matter under subclass 204 wherein the alternately twisted strand is
    comprised of filamentary or fibrous material, each filament or fiber of
    which has been transversely deformed or distended into a nonlinear
    configuration of coils, loops, crinkles, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208,    226, 227, 239, 245, 246, and 254, for other twisted strand
    structures having crimped or bulked components therein.

    282+,   for manufacturing twist crimped yarns.

    351,    for other types of crimping or texturing combined with a twisting
    operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclasses 247+ for crimping or texturing
    strands by operations other than twist crimping.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 168 for extrusion of filaments combined with crimping.  428, Stock
    Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 369+ and 373+ for crimped
    fibers and filaments.


CLS 57/206
TXT Longitudinal variation:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the diameter of the strand is
    nonuniform along the longitudinal axis of the strand.

    (1)     Note.  These strands are commonly known as novelty yarns, effect
    yarns, thick and thin yarns, slub yarns, etc., and are deliberately
    produced for a special effect.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     for feeding strands to a twisting operation at a variable rate.

    317,    for producing longitudinal variations in strands by means of a
    variable drafting operation combined with a twisting operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses 237+ for drafting at
    longitudinally varying rates.

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclass 243 for producing variable
    denier in strands in a stretching operation.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 167 for imparting longitudinal irregularities to filaments during
    extrusion.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 399 for fibers
    and filaments with longitudinal varying cross sections.


CLS 57/207
TXT Covered or wrapped type:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 wherein the longitudinal variation is
    effected by a discontinuous or irregular covering or wrapping about a core.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3+,     for making covered or wrapped strands.

    210+,   for strand structures having a spirally wrapped or covered core
    component.


CLS 57/208
TXT Crimped or bulked type:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 wherein the longitudinal variation is
    effected by a discontinuous varying, or irregular amount of crimp,
    bulkiness, loopiness, etc., along the longitudinal axis of the strand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205,    226, 227+, 239, 245+, and 254, for other twisted strand structures
    having crimped or bulked components therein.

    282+,   for manufacturing twist crimped yarns.

    351,    for other types of crimping or texturing combined with a twisting
    operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclasses 247+ for crimping or texturing
    strands by operations other than twist crimping; and subclasses 252+ for
    producing discontinuous or irregular crimps.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 168 for extrusion of filaments combined with crimping.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 369+ and 373+
    for crimped fibers and filaments.


CLS 57/209
TXT Slub type:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 wherein the longitudinal variation is
    effected by the presence of additional fibrous material introduced
    intermittently along the length of the strand and in the form of knots,
    beads, lumps, etc.


CLS 57/210
TXT Covered or wrapped:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the strand structure is formed by
    winding fibrous, filamentous, or strand material spirally about a core.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3+,     for processes and apparatus for making covered or wrapped strands.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclass 92 for wrapped or
    twisted chain links.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 68.1+ and 137+
    for twisted strands having elements imparting conductive or insulative
    qualities to the strand.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, subclasses 51+ for a flexible coupling or a shaft which may
    include twisted strands.


CLS 57/211
TXT Plied:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein two or more covered or wrapped
    strands are twisted together or about each other to form a plied twisted
    structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236+,   for other plied strand structures.


CLS 57/212
TXT Wire wrapped:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein wire strands are wrapped about a
    core.


CLS 57/213
TXT Plural wire wrapped layers:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 wherein there is a plurality of
    successive wire wrapped layers about the core.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    for covering or wrapping operations for making strands with plural
    wrapped layers.

    230,    for other covered or wrapped strands having a plurality of wrapped
    layers.


CLS 57/214
TXT Stranded layers:

    Subject matter under subclass 213 wherein the individual component of each
    layer is a stranded structure made of a plurality of elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13+,    for covering or wrapping operations for making strands with a
    stranded wrapping layer.

    218+    and 231, for other covered or wrapped strands having a stranded
    wrapping layer.


CLS 57/215
TXT Including nonround cross sections:

    Subject matter under subclass 213 wherein the individual components of the
    covered or wrapped strand structure or the strand structure as a whole have
    a cross section other than round.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201,    248, and 253, for other strand structures with components having
    particular cross sections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 177 for extrusion of filaments having particular cross section.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 397+ for
    fibers or filaments of particular cross sections.


CLS 57/216
TXT With core other than wire:

    Subject matter under subclass 213 wherein strands other than wire are used
    to form the core.


CLS 57/217
TXT Coated or impregnated:

    Subject matter under subclass 213 wherein the covered or wrapped strands
    are coated or impregnated with a liquid or plastic material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      32, 286, 292, and 295+, for coating or impregnating combined with a
    twisting or covering or wrapping operation.

    221,    223, 232+, 241+, 250+, 257, and 258+, for other twisted, covered,
    or wrapped strands having a coating applied thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 361 and 375+
    for fiber or filaments having a coating thereon.


CLS 57/218
TXT Stranded wire-wrapped layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 wherein the wire is wrapped as a layer
    about the core and each component of the layer is a stranded structure made
    of a plurality of wire elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13+,    for processes and apparatus for making strands with a stranded
    wrapping layer.

    214     and 231, for other covered or wrapped strands having a stranded
    wrapping layer.


CLS 57/219
TXT Including nonround cross section:

    Subject matter under subclass 218 wherein the individual components of the
    covered or wrapped strand structure or the strand structure as a whole have
    a cross section other than round.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215,    248 and 253, for other strand structures having components with
    particular cross sections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 177 for extrusion of filaments having a particular cross section.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 397+ for
    fibers or filaments of a particular cross section.


CLS 57/220
TXT With core other than wire:

    Subject matter under subclass 218 wherein strands other than wire are used
    to form the core.


CLS 57/221
TXT Coated or impregnated:

    Subject matter under subclass 218 wherein the covered or wrapped strands
    are coated or impregnated with a liquid or plastic material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      32, 286, 292, and 295+, for coating or impregnating combined with a
    twisting or covering or wrapping operation.

    217,    223, 232+, 241+, 250+, 257, and 258+, for other twisted, covered,
    or wrapped strands having a coating applied thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 361 and 375+
    for fibers or filaments having a coating thereon.


CLS 57/222
TXT With core other than wire:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 wherein strands other than wire are used
    to form the core.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      32, 286, 292, and 295+, for coating or   impregnating combined with
    a twisting or covering or wrapping operation.

    217,    221, 232+, 241+, 250+, 257, and 258, for other twisted, covered, or
    wrapped strands having a coating applied thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 361 and 375+
    for fibers or filaments having a coating thereon.


CLS 57/223
TXT Coated or impregnated:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 wherein the covered or wrapped strands
    are coated or impregnated with a liquid or plastic material.


CLS 57/224
TXT Discrete fiber wrap:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein individual, loosely associated,
    untwisted, or substantially untwisted fibers form the spiral wrap for the
    core.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for processes and apparatus for applying loose fibers spirally
    about a core.


CLS 57/225
TXT Elastomeric material core:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein the core is composed of
    elastomeric material such as rubber or spandex.


CLS 57/226
TXT With crimped or bulked material:

    Subject matter under subclass 225 wherein the covered or wrapped strand
    having a core of elastomeric material includes filamentous or fibrous
    material which has been transversely deformed or distended into a nonlinear
    configuration of coils, crinkles, loops, crimps, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205,    208, 227+, 239, 245, 246+, and 254, for other twisted strand
    structures having crimped or bulked components therein.

    282+,   for processes and apparatus for manufacturing twist crimped yarns.

    351,    for other types of crimping or texturing combined with a twisting
    operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclasses 247+ for crimping or texturing
    operations other than twist crimping.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 168 for extrusion of filaments combined with crimping.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 369+ and 373+
    for crimped fibers and filaments.


CLS 57/227
TXT Including crimped or bulked material:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein the covered or wrapped strand
    includes filamentous or fibrous material which has been transversely
    deformed or distended into a nonlinear configuration of coils, crinkles,
    loops, crimps, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205,    208, 226, 239, 245, 246+, and 254, for other twisted strand
    structures having crimped or bulked components therein.

    282,    for processes and apparatus for manufacturing twist crimped yarns.

    351,    for other types of crimping or texturing combined with a twisting
    operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclasses 247+ for crimping or texturing
    operations other than twist crimping.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 168 for extrusion of filaments combined with crimping.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 369+ and 373+
    for crimped fibers and filaments.


CLS 57/228
TXT Crimped or bulked core:

    Subject matter under subclass 227 wherein the core is composed of
    filamentous or fibrous material which has been transversely deformed or
    distended into a nonlinear configuration of coils, crinkles, loops, crimps,
    etc.


CLS 57/229
TXT Including glass material:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein the covered or wrapped strand
    contains filamentous or fibrous material composed of glass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240     and 249, for other twisted strand structures including glass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 376+ for processes of manufacturing
    glass fibers, filaments, or preforms, especially subclass 444 for glass
    wrapping or covering.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 364+ for
    structurally defined glass fiber or filament.

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 180, 262, 266, 331, 348, 355, and 367 for fabric-containing
    glass components.


CLS 57/230
TXT Plural wrapped layers:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein there is a plurality of
    successive wrapped layers about the core.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS

    15+,    for processes and apparatus for making strands with a plurality of
    wrapped layers.

    213+,   for other covered or wrapped strands having a plurality of wrapped
    layers.


CLS 57/231
TXT Stranded layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein each component of the spirally
    wrapped layer is a stranded structure made of a plurality of strand
    elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13+,    for covering or wrapping operations for making strands with a
    stranded wrapping layer.

    214     and 218+, for other covered or wrapped strands having a stranded
    wrapping layer.


CLS 57/232
TXT Coated or impregnated:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein the covered or wrapped strand is
    coated or impregnated with a liquid or plastic material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      32, 286, 292, and 295+, for coating or impregnating combined with a
    twisting or covering or wrapping operation.

    217,    221, 223, 241, 250, 257, and 258+, for other twisted, covered, or
    wrapped strands having a coating applied thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 361 and 375+
    for fibers or filaments having a coating thereon.


CLS 57/233
TXT Web material:

    Subject matter under subclass 232 wherein the covered or wrapped strand is
    made wholly or in part of natural or synthetic paperlike or tapelike
    material in ribbon form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31+,    for process and apparatus for making twisted strands from web
    material.

    235,    259, and 260, for other twisted strands having web material
    components therein.


CLS 57/234
TXT Adhesively bonded:

    Subject matter under subclass 232 wherein the covered or wrapped strand is
    coated or impregnated with a material such that the strand material bonds
    or adheres together in a unitary structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242     and 251, for other adhesively bonded twisted strand

    297,    for process and apparatus for forming adhesively bonded strands
    combined with a twisting operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    51+ for making a conductor of indefinite length combined with adhesive
    bonding; and subclasses 148+ for adhesive bonding with a broadly recited
    textile operation.


CLS 57/235
TXT Web material:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein the covered or wrapped strand is
    made wholly or in part of natural or synthetic paperlike or tapelike
    material in ribbon form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31+,    for process and apparatus for making twisted strands from web
    material.

    233,    259 and 260, for other twisted strands having web material
    components therein.


CLS 57/236
TXT Plied:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 composed of two or more individual strand
    units twisted about each other.

    (1)     Note.  The individual strand unit may be a yarn or other strand
    structure which is usually itself twisted prior to being plied and the
    structure thereof can be discerned in the plied structure.  However, a
    multifilament strand which is twisted would not be considered a plied
    strand for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211,    for plied strands in which the plied components are covered or
    wrapped strands.


CLS 57/237
TXT Cabled or cord type (i.e., plied plies):

    Subject matter under subclass 236 composed of two or more plied yarns
    twisted about each other.


CLS 57/238
TXT Composite:

    Subject matter under subclass 236 wherein the plied strand is composed of
    two or more different materials.


CLS 57/239
TXT Crimped or bulked:

    Subject matter under subclass 238 wherein at least one of the components of
    the plied strand structure includes filamentous or fibrous material which
    has been transversely deformed or distended into a nonlinear configuration
    of coils, crinkles, loops, crimps, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205,    208, 226, 227+, 245, 246, and 254, for other twisted strand
    structures having crimped or bulked components therein.

    282+,   for making twist crimped yarns. 351, for other type crimping or
    texturing combined with a twisting device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclasses 247+ for crimping or texturing
    strands by operations other than twist crimping.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 168 for extrusion of filaments combined with crimping.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 369+ and 373+
    for crimped fibers or filaments.


CLS 57/240
TXT Glass material:

    Subject matter under subclass 236 wherein the plied strand structure
    includes glass material in filamentous or fibrous form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229     and 249, for other twisted strand structures including glass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 376+ for processes of manufacturing
    glass fibers, filaments, or preforms, especially subclass 438 for producing
    twisted or textured glass fibers.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 364+ for
    structurally defined glass fiber or filament.

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 180, 262, 266, 331, 348, 355, and 367 for fabric-containing
    glass components.


CLS 57/241
TXT Coated or impregnated:

    Subject matter under subclass 236 wherein the plied strand is coated or
    impregnated with a liquid or plastic material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      32, 286, 292, and 295+, for coating or impregnating combined with a
    twisting or covering or wrapping operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 361 and 375+
    for fibers or filaments having a coating thereon.


CLS 57/242
TXT Adhesively bonded:

    Subject matter under subclass 241 wherein the plied strand is coated or
    impregnated with a material such that the strand material bonds or adheres
    together in a unitary structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    234     and 251, for other adhesively bonded twisted strands.

    297,    for process and apparatus for forming adhesively bonded strands
    combined with a twisting operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    51+ for making a conductor of indefinite length combined with adhesive
    bonding; and subclasses 148+ for adhesive bonding with a broadly recited
    textile operation.


CLS 57/243
TXT Multifilament yarns:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the strand is composed of a
    plurality of continuous filaments twisted together.


CLS 57/244
TXT Composite:

    Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein the multifilament yarn is
    composed of two or more different materials.


CLS 57/245
TXT Crimped or bulked:

    Subject matter under subclass 244 wherein the composite multifilament yarn
    includes filamentous or fibrous material which has been transversely
    deformed or distended into a nonlinear configuration of coils, crinkles,
    loops, crimps, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205,    208, 226, 227, 239, 246+, and 254, for other twisted strand
    structures having crimped or bulked components therein.

    282+,   for processes and apparatus for manufacturing  twist crimped yarns.

    351,    for other types of crimping or texturing combined with a twisting
    operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclasses 247+ for crimping or texturing
    operations other than twist crimping.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 168 for extrusion of filaments combined with crimping.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 369+ and 373+
    for crimped fibers and filaments.


CLS 57/246
TXT Crimped or bulked:

    Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein the multifilament yarn includes
    filamentous or fibrous material which has been transversely deformed or
    distended into a nonlinear configuration of coils, crinkles, loops, crimps,
    etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205,    208, 226, 227, 239, 245, and 254, for other twisted strand
    structures having crimped or bulked components therein.

    282+,   for processes and apparatus for manufacturing twist crimped yarns.

    351,    for other types of crimping or texturing combined with a twisting
    operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles: Manufacturing, subclasses 247+ for crimping or texturing
    operations other than twist crimping.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 168 for extrusion of filaments combined with crimping.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 369+ and 373+
    for crimped fibers and filaments.


CLS 57/247
TXT Twist crimped type:

    Subject matter under subclass 246 wherein the crimp is the type which was
    effected by a twisting and setting operation, e.g., a false twist crimping
    operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282+,   for processes and apparatus for manufacturing twist crimped yarns.


CLS 57/248
TXT Particular cross section:

    Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein the multifilament yarn includes
    filamentous or fibrous material which is of a cross section other than
    solid round, such as elliptical, multilobal, hollow, cruciform, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215,    219, and 253, for other strand structures having components with
    particular cross sections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 177 for extrusion of filaments having a particular cross section.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 397+ for
    fibers or filaments of a particular cross section.


CLS 57/249
TXT Glass material:

    Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein the multifilament yarn includes
    glass material in filamentous form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229     and 240, for other twisted strand structures including glass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 376+ for processes of manufacturing
    glass fibers, filaments, or preforms, especially subclass 438 for producing
    twisted glass fibers.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 364+ for
    structurally defined glass fiber or filament.

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 180, 262, 266, 331, 348, 355, and 367 for fabric-containing
    glass components.


CLS 57/250
TXT Coated or impregnated:

    Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein the multifilament yarn is coated
    or impregnated with a liquid or plastic material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      32, 286, 292, and 295, for coating or impregnating combined with a
    twisting or covering or wrapping operation.

    217,    221, 223, 232+, 241+, 257, and 258+, for other twisted, covered, or
    wrapped strands having a coating applied thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 361 and 375+
    for fibers or filaments having a coating thereon.


CLS 57/251
TXT Adhesively bonded:

    Subject matter under subclass 250 wherein multifilament yarn is coated or
    impregnated with a material such that the yarn is bonded or adhered
    together in a unitary structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    234     and 242, for other adhesively bonded twisted strands.

    297,    for process and apparatus for forming adhesively bonded strands
    combined with a twisting operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    51+ for making a conductor of indefinite length combined with adhesive
    bonding; and subclasses 148+ for adhesive bonding with a broadly recited
    textile operation.


CLS 57/252
TXT Staple fiber blends:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the twisted strand is formed of
    staple length fibers of two or more different materials distributed
    throughout the length of the strand.

    (1)     Note.  The fibers of the different materials are usually
    distributed homogeneously throughout the strand in any proportion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for process and apparatus for stapilizing filaments combined with a
    twisting operation.

    238+    and 244, for other yarn structures made from more than one material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses .3+ for process and
    apparatus for stapilizing continuous filaments.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 359+ for
    staple fibers or masses thereof.


CLS 57/253
TXT Particular cross sections:

    Subject matter under subclass 252 wherein at least one of the fibers in the
    strand is of a cross section other than solid round, such as elliptical,
    multilobal, hollow, cruciform, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215,    219 and 248, for other strand structures having components with
    particular cross sections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 177.1+ for extrusion of filaments having a particular cross
    section.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 397+ for
    fibers or filaments of a particular cross section.


CLS 57/254
TXT Crimped or bulked fibers:

    Subject matter under subclass 252 wherein at least one of the fibers in the
    strand is transversely deformed or distended into a nonlinear configuration
    of coils, crinkles, loops, crimps, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205,    208, 226, 227, 239, 245, and 246+, for other twisted strand
    structures having crimped or bulked components therein.

    282+,   for processes and apparatus for manufacturing twist crimped yarns.

    351,    for other types of crimping or texturing combined with a twisting
    operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclasses 247+ for crimping or texturing
    operations other than twist crimping.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 168 for extrusion of filaments combined with crimping.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 369+ and 373+
    for crimped fibers and filaments.


CLS 57/255
TXT Synthetic material:

    Subject matter under subclass 252 wherein the strand includes staple fibers
    made of synthetic materials, such as nylon, polyester, etc.


CLS 57/256
TXT With natural fibers:

    Subject matter under subclass 255 wherein the strand includes staple fibers
    of both synthetic and natural materials.


CLS 57/257
TXT Coated:

    Subject matter under subclass 252 wherein the strand is coated or
    impregnated with a liquid or plastic material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      32, 286, 292, and 295+, for coating or impregnating combined with a
    twisting or covering or wrapping operation.

    217,    221, 223, 232, 241+, 250+, and 258+, for other twisted, covered, or
    wrapped strands having a coating applied thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 361 and 375+
    for fibers or filaments having a coating thereon.


CLS 57/258
TXT Coated or impregnated:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the strand is coated or
    impregnated with a liquid or plastic material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      32, 286, 292, and 295+, for coating or impregnating combined with a
    twisting or covering or wrapping operation.

    217,    221, 223, 232+, 241+, 250+, and 257, for other twisted, covered, or
    wrapped strands having a coating applied thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 361 and 375+
    for fibers or filaments having a coating thereon.


CLS 57/259
TXT Web material:

    Subject matter under subclass 258 wherein the strand is made wholly or in
    part of natural or synthetic paperlike or tapelike material in ribbon form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31+,    for process and apparatus for making twisted strands from web
    material.

    233,    235 and 260, for other twisted strands having web material
    components therein.


CLS 57/260
TXT Web material:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the strand is made wholly or in
    part of natural or synthetic paperlike or tapelike material in ribbon form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31+,    for process and apparatus for making twisted strands from web
    material.

    233,    235 and 259, for other twisted strands having web material
    components therein.


CLS 57/261
TXT Piecing up:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein strand ends which have become
    broken, separated, or severed during the twisting operation are joined
    together on the twisting device so that the twisting operation may be
    resumed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     for spinning or twisting machines provided with means to facilitate
    the stopping and/or starting thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclass 452 for forming predetermined or
    reserve weft lengths on a loom in a weaving operation.


CLS 57/262
TXT With traveler threading:

    Subject matter under subclass 261 wherein the piecing up includes
    manipulating the strand through the guide or traveler element in a ring and
    traveler type twister.


CLS 57/263
TXT On open-end machine:

    Subject matter under subclass 261 wherein the piecing up is effected in a
    twister of the type wherein a strand is rotated about its axis while the
    free-end or "tail" is in contact with, or in proximity to, a source of
    supply of loose fiberlike material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58.89+, for free-end or open-end type spinning machines, per se.


CLS 57/264
TXT Monitor and control:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the functions of the twisting
    operations are continuously or periodically checked or surveyed and are
    compensated or changed in response to variations detected during such check
    or survey to maintain the twisting operation within pre-established or
    acceptable ranges or norms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92+,    for means for driving spinning, twisting, or twining machines or
    parts thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 10+ for
    material responsive control means.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 259 for systems automatically
    responsive to conditions of a web, sheet, or work feed.


CLS 57/265
TXT Monitor and record:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the functions of the twisting
    operation are continuously or periodically checked or surveyed and
    variations of the twisting functions from pre-established or acceptable
    ranges or norms are noted or indicated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 159+ for measuring properties of
    yarns or filaments.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 658+ and 691+ to
    determine nonelectrical property of a material by means of its capacitance,
    resistance, or conductivity.


CLS 57/266
TXT Doffing or donning:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein filled or partly filled packages or
    bobbins of yarn or strand are positively removed and/or replaced with empty
    ones at the work station.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 35.5 and 41 for winding
    machines provided with package doffing means.


CLS 57/267
TXT On cap or roving frame:

    Subject matter under subclass 266 wherein the doffing and/or donning is
    effected on a cap-type or flier-type twister.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67+     and 74, for roving or cap twisting devices, per se.


CLS 57/268
TXT Carriage:

    Subject matter under subclass 266 including doffing or donning mechanism
    having means adapted to move along the machine frame and to manipulate the
    bobbins or packages individually or as a group.


CLS 57/269
TXT With strand manipulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 268 wherein the yarn or strand at the
    twisting station being doffed or donned is subjectd to preliminary or
    subsequent handling or manipulation other than or in addition to the
    doffing or donning operation.


CLS 57/270
TXT Bobbin or package manipulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 268 wherein the bobbin or package being
    doffed or donned is subjected to preliminary or subsequent handling or
    manipulation other than or in addition to the doffing or donning operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281,    for moving or transferring strand packages between, to, or from
    twisting stations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for manipulation of
    articles in a dispensing operation.


CLS 57/271
TXT Successive and individual type:

    Subject matter under subclass 268 wherein the carriage usually moves
    continuously along the frame and the package or bobbins are doffed or
    donned one at a time.


CLS 57/272
TXT Ejector type:

    Subject matter under subclass 271 including means to doff the bobbin or
    package by a sudden and relatively large force to propel the bobbin or
    package from its receiver, usually in a vertical direction.


CLS 57/273
TXT Bottom lifting:

    Subject matter under subclass 266 wherein the doffing operation is effected
    by engaging the package to be doffed beneath the lower end of the bobbin
    and lifting or sliding the package vertically off the work station (e.g.,
    spindle).


CLS 57/274
TXT Over end of bobbin:

    Subject matter under subclass 266 wherein the doffing operation is effected
    by engaging the package from above the upper end of the bobbin and lifting
    or sliding the package vertically off the work station (e.g., spindle).


CLS 57/275
TXT Bobbin graspers:

    Subject matter under subclass 266 including means to engage the filled or
    empty bobbin to grip, grasp, or hold it during the doffing or donning
    operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 86.4+ for
    article grippers, per se.


CLS 57/276
TXT With preparation for doffing- or donning- type operation:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including an operation which is performed
    prior to doffing or donning for the purpose of facilitating the removal of
    filled bobbins or packages and/or the replacement thereof with empty ones.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131,    for whorl driven receiving elements combined with yarn holding
    means to facilitate doffing.

    360,    for lifting devices for raising thread boards away from the spindle
    tips to facilitate doffing.


CLS 57/277
TXT Rail positioning:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 wherein the preparation includes locating
    the traversing rail, usually the ring rail, in such a position that doffing
    or donning can be effected.

    (1)     Note.  The line between this subclass and Class 242 for this
    subject matter is as follows:  If the traverse or builder motion is claimed
    or if the resetting of the rail is claimed, then the original patent is
    placed in Class 242.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 26.1+ for manipulation
    of the ring rail during a winding operation.


CLS 57/278
TXT Strand manipulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 wherein the preparation includes engaging
    or manipulating the strand at the twisting station being doffed or donned
    so that the doffing or donning operation can be effected.


CLS 57/279
TXT Threading up:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the strand to be twisted is
    directed or guided to or through the twisting station during or prior to
    the initial start-up of the twisting operation or in preparation for the
    initiation of the twisting operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclass 268 for threading of a stuffer
    box texturing device; and subclass 272 for threading or stringing up a
    fluid jet texturing device.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, may include a nominal
    recitation of a supply or take-up coil (e.g., less than a support for such
    a coil or a cooperative relationship between a tension or exhaust detector
    and reel driving or reel stopping means, etc.), subclass 7 for a process of
    and subclasses 97.1+ for apparatus using fluid current to advance the
    material.


CLS 57/280
TXT On false twist type machines:

    Subject matter under subclass 279 wherein the threading up is effected on a
    twisting machine employing a false twister.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284+,   for false twist type crimping operations.

    328+,   for drafting operations employing false twist devices.

    332+,   for false twist devices, per se.


CLS 57/281
TXT Package handling:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including the moving or transferring of
    strand material in package form between, to, or from spinning stations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90+,    for positively moving or conducting strand material to or through a
    twisting operation.

    270+,   for bobbin or package manipulation during a doffing or donning
    operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclass 159 for handling slivers in
    coiling cans.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, appropriate subclasses for systems of
    moving or handling articles in general.


CLS 57/282
TXT Twist setting:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the strand, while it is in a
    twisted state, is subjected to a treatment, the purpose of which is to
    impart a relatively permanent torque to the strand so that the strand will
    assume and maintain a creped, textured, or crimped configuration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205,    208, 226, 227+, 239, 246+, and 254, for twisted strands having a
    crimp therein.

    308,    for twisting operations wherein the temperature, humidity,
    ventilation, etc., of the atmosphere or environment around the twisting
    operation is controlled.

    309,    for twisting operations wherein the strand is subjected to a post
    or after treatment to develop or enhance the final product.

    351,    for twisting operations combined with other types of crimping
    operations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclasses 247+ for other types of
    crimping or texturing operations.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 168 for extrusion of filaments combined with crimping.


CLS 57/283
TXT With twist variation:

    Subject matter under subclass 282 wherein the twist is imparted or set in a
    nonuniform manner so that the degree of crepe, texture, or crimp will vary
    longitudinally of the strand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     for irregular feeding of a strand in a twisting operation.

    205,    for alternately twisted strands having a crimp therein.

    208,    for twisted strands having a crimp therein and also having a
    longitudinal variation along the axis thereof.

    317+,   for imparting a variable draft combined with a twisting operation
    to a strand.


CLS 57/284
TXT False twist crimp:

    Subject matter under subclass 282 wherein the twist that is set is imparted
    to the strand by a false twist operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280,    for threading up of false twist type operations.

    328+,   for drafting combined with false twist operations.

    332+,   for false twisters, per se.


CLS 57/285
TXT Intertwine type:

    Subject matter under subclass 284 wherein the false twist is effected by
    two or more running strand portions twisting about one another over a
    confined length and the twist is set in this configuration.


CLS 57/286
TXT With coating or impregnation:

    Apparatus or process under subclass 284 including the application of a
    liquid or plastic treatment to the strand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      32 and 295+, for coating or impregnating combined with other
    twisting or covering or wrapping operations.

    292,    for coating or impregnating used in a twist-setting operation.


CLS 57/287
TXT With stretching:

    Subject matter under subclass 284 including elongating the strand before,
    during, or after the false twist crimping operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310,    for other twisting operations combined with stretching.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclasses 240+ for modifying a running
    strand length by means of a stretching apparatus.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 288.4+ for processes of stretching a strand length.


CLS 57/288
TXT Simultaneous type:

    Subject matter under subclass 287 wherein the strand is elongated while it
    is in the false twist crimping zone.


CLS 57/289
TXT Fluid jet type:

    Subject matter under subclass 284 comprising a fluid jet stream which
    impinges the strand to impart the false twist to the strand or to treat the
    strand in addition to the false twist crimping.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333,    for fluid jet twisters used as false twisters.

    350,    for twisting operations combined with fluid jets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclasses 271+ for texturing by means of
    fluid jets.


CLS 57/290
TXT Plural twisting or heating:

    Subject matter under subclass 284 wherein the strand is subjected to more
    than one false twisting or heating operation.


CLS 57/291
TXT Operator accommodating frame arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 284 comprising false twist crimping apparatus
    wherein the framework is so arranged as to provide a passageway for
    operating personnel.


CLS 57/292
TXT With coating or impregnating:

    Subject matter under subclass 282 including the application of a liquid or
    plastic treatment to the strand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      32 and 295+, for coating or impregnating combined with other
    twisting or covering or wrapping operations.

    286,    for coating or impregnating used in a false twist crimping
    operation.


CLS 57/293
TXT Alternate twist:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the direction of twist imparted to
    a portion of a strand is opposite to the direction of twist imparted to an
    adjacent portion of the strand and is the same as the direction of twist
    imparted to an alternate portion of the strand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204+,   for alternately twisted strand structures.


CLS 57/294
TXT Accumulator type:

    Subject matter under subclass 293 including a strand storage and/or
    advancing device wherein the length of strand material contained therein
    changes periodically or continuously.


CLS 57/295
TXT With coating or impregnating:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a fluid or plastic treatment is
    applied to the fibers being spun or to the strand being twisted, usually
    concomitantly with the spinning or twisting operation.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this class, the term "coating or
    impregnating" is construed to include the situation wherein a strand is
    subjected to an operation wherein it softens or melts to such an extent
    that it becomes tacky and adheres or fuses to adjacent strand material.

    (2)     Note.  The following Search Class references are directed to fluid
    treatment of textile strands involving no twisting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      32, 286, and 292, for covering or wrapping or twist crimping
    combined with a coating or impregnation operation.

    217,    221, 223, 232+, 241+, 250+, 257, and 258+, for twisted strand
    structures which are coated or impregnated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing: Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, appropriate subclasses.

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses 66+.

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclasses 167+ and 178+.

    101,    Printing, subclass 172. 118, Coating Apparatus, appropriate
    subclasses, and see section V of the class definition for the line between
    Class 118 and the textile classes.

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclasses.


CLS 57/296
TXT On twist device:

    Subject matter under subclass 295 wherein the coating or impregnation is
    effected directly on or at the twisting device.


CLS 57/297
TXT Strand bonding or adhesion:

    Subject matter under subclass 295 wherein the coating or impregnation is
    such as to cause the strand material being treated to adhere together in a
    unitary structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    51+ for making a conductor of indefinite length combined with adhesive
    bonding; and subclasses 148+ for adhesive bonding with a broadly recited
    textile operation.


CLS 57/298
TXT Wet drafting:

    Subject matter under subclass 295 wherein coated or impregnated fibrous
    material such as sliver or roving, is subjected to a drawing or attenuating
    operation while in a wet moist state.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315+,   for twisting combined with drafting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses 236+ for drafting
    structures, per se.


CLS 57/299
TXT Transfer tail:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a length of strand material is
    wound, usually during the initial winding of the strand material on the
    bobbin and below the normal package windings for the purpose of connecting
    the length of strand material to other lengths of strand material on other
    bobbin packages during subsequent winding or unwinding operations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    303,    for winding strand lengths in a clearing operation.  The winding
    may be at the base of the bobbin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclass 18 for end winding and
    preliminary winding of strand lengths.


CLS 57/300
TXT Clearing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein lint, waste, foreign matter, or
    strand material which has become superfluous during the operation of the
    machine is removed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, appropriate subclasses
    for cleaning systems for removing lint and dust from textile machines.

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses 262+ for clearing rolls in
    drafting frames.

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclasses 222+ and 292+ for clearing
    threads and removing waste strand material from bobbins.

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 252.1 for a dust conveyor.


CLS 57/301
TXT On open-end machine:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein the clearing is effected in an
    open-end-type twister.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58.89+, for open-end spinning operations, per se.


CLS 57/302
TXT Rotor:

    Subject matter under subclass 301 wherein the clearing is effected in the
    rotor of an open-end twister.


CLS 57/303
TXT Strand winding:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein excess or superfluous strand
    material is accumulated by a winding operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    299,    for strand winding in forming transfer tails.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclass 18 for end winding and
    preliminary winding of strand lengths.


CLS 57/304
TXT Pneumatic:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein the clearing is effected by means
    of a stream of air.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 301+ for air
    blast and/or suction devices for removing waste and lint from textile
    machines; and see (2) Note to subclass 301 for a statement of the line.


CLS 57/305
TXT Strand type:

    Subject matter under subclass 304 wherein lengths of material in strand
    form are removed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261,    for finding loose ends to be pieced up.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclass 35.6 for end finders in
    reserve thread uniting.


CLS 57/306
TXT Strand accumulating or scavenging:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein waste or superfluous strand
    material is collected, accumulated, or scavenged.


CLS 57/307
TXT Of traveler:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein lint, fluff, etc., is removed
    from a traveler while the twisting apparatus is in operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25+,    for travelers, per se.


CLS 57/308
TXT Atmospheric conditioning:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the temperature, humidity,
    ventilation, etc., of a spinning or twisting station is controlled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses
    for drying strands and gas or vapor treatment of textile apparatus.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, appropriate
    subclasses controlling atmospheric conditions in particular areas.


CLS 57/309
TXT Strand finishing or developing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the twisted strand is subjected to
    a post treatment, such as polishing, drying, heat treating, etc., to
    develop or enhance the final product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290,    for false twist crimping operations with additional heating to
    develop or modify the crimp.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, appropriate subclasses for treating
    fabrics to present them in finished or marketable condition.

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclasses 246, 265+, and 281 for
    treating crimped or textured strands to enhance, shrink, or develop them;
    and subclass 285 for thermal treatment of strands on a bobbin or cop.


CLS 57/310
TXT With stretching:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the strand being twisted is
    stretched or elongated concomitantly with or subsequent to the twisting
    operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    287+,   for false twist crimping combined with a stretching operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles: Manufacturing, subclasses 240+ for apparatus for
    stretching running strand lengths.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 288.4 for processes for stretching a strand length.


CLS 57/311
TXT With wire or strand preforming or shaping:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein wires or strands are formed into
    substantially the shape they are to have in the final twisted structure.

    (1)     Note.  The preforming or shaping is usually for the purpose of
    preventing backtwist or to facilitate even laying of the strands in a rope
    or cable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for operation to preform or shape the wire or strand prior to a
    covering or wrapping operation.

    138,    for elements forming parts of stranding machines for compressing,
    guiding, or shaping the strand.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 221+ and 274+ for wire shaping by
    rolling and drawing respectively.

    140,    Wireworking, appropriate subclasses for wire manipulating
    operations.


CLS 57/312
TXT With strand or package manipulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 76 including guiding or handling the strand
    or package, usually after the centrifugal pot is filled and the strand
    therein is to be rewound onto another support.

    (1)     Note.  Centrifugal spinning pot operations including restarting,
    rewinding, package or cheese changing, or strand threading should be placed
    as originals in this subclass rather than in subclasses 261, 266+, or 279+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261,    for piecing up operations.

    266+,   for doffing or donning operations.

    279,    for threading up operations.


CLS 57/313
TXT With rewinding:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a twisted strand wound on a package
    is rewound onto another package with or without other strands or other
    twisting operations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    Appropriate subclass for particular twisting operation employed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, appropriate subclass for
    particular winding operation employed.


CLS 57/314
TXT Stranding:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a plurality of wires or strands are
    formed into a twisted structure by twisting or laying-up at a point between
    the strand supply and the take-up of the twisted structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      58.3+, 58.52+, 59+, 66+, and 293+, for stranding involving a
    covering or wrapping operation, an alternating twist operation, a ship-type
    strander, a multiple twist type stander, a delivery twist type strander,
    and a receiving twist type strander.


CLS 57/315
TXT With drafting:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein fibrous material, usually in
    substantially untwisted condition, as in a sliver or roving, is subjected
    to an attenuating or drawing operation combined with a twisting or twining
    operation so that the attenuation results in a reduced cross section in the
    sliver or roving due to relative longitudinal displacement of the
    individual fibers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97,     for driving of drafting rolls with speed adjustment.

    310,    for twisting combined with stretching concomitantly with, or
    subsequent to twisting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclass 236+ for drafting structure,
    per se.


CLS 57/316
TXT Domestic:

    Subject matter under subclass 315 comprising manual twisting operations, as
    with spinning wheels and the like, usually with no means for feeding the
    strands to be spun and producing a single strand.

    (1)     Note.  The drafting is usually accomplished manually during the
    twisting.


CLS 57/317
TXT Variable draft:

    Subject matter under subclass 315 wherein the drafting operation includes
    cyclical or random variations or flucuations.

    (1)     Note.  Such devices may function by changing the relative linear
    speeds of feed and delivery means, by changing the distance between drawing
    and holding means, or by imparting an intermittent or transitory motion to
    the work strand by means additional to the normal drafting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses 237+ for variable drafting
    means, per se.


CLS 57/318
TXT False twist type:

    Subject matter under subclass 317 in which at least one of the twisting
    operations includes imparting only a false twist to the strand material
    being drafted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    328+,   for false twisting combined with nonvariable drafting operations.

    332+,   for false twisters, per se.


CLS 57/319
TXT Intermittent:

    Subject matter under subclass 315 wherein the strand material is
    successively drafted, twisted, and wound in a cyclic operation.


CLS 57/320
TXT Mule type:

    Subject matter under subclass 319 comprising spindles mounted to move
    toward and away from a feeding mechanism during the twisting and winding
    operation, and the drafting is accomplished by the movement of the spindles
    away from the source of supply.


CLS 57/321
TXT Spindle drive control:

    Subject matter under subclass 320 including means for driving and
    regulating the speed of the spindles.


CLS 57/322
TXT Quadrant:

    Subject matter under subclass 321 wherein the speed-regulating mechanism
    includes a sector known as the quadrant.


CLS 57/323
TXT Faller controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 322 comprising means to regulate the speed of
    the spindles according to the tension of the yarn through a connection with
    the elements which guide and properly lay the yarn upon the bobbin or other
    core.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 324 and 325.


CLS 57/324
TXT Faller control:

    Subject matter under subclass 320 having means for controlling the motion
    of elements (e.g., fallers) which guide and tension the yarn during the
    twisting and winding operation.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 323.


CLS 57/325
TXT Copping rail:

    Subject matter under subclass 324 comprising a fixed or adjustable guide
    bar having the function of a cam which determines the faller movement.


CLS 57/326
TXT Feed control:

    Subject matter under subclass 320 including means for driving and
    regulating the speed of rollers or other devices which feed the fibrous
    material to be drafted and twisted.


CLS 57/327
TXT With carding:

    Subject matter under subclass 315 wherein the fibers are worked and made
    substantially parallel by passing between relatively moving surfaces which
    are almost in contact and have points or teeth thereon prior to drafting
    and twisting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, for carding, feeding, or drafting
    structure, particularly subclasses 98+.


CLS 57/328
TXT False twist type:

    Subject matter under subclass 315 in which at least one of the twisting
    operations includes imparting only a false twist to the strand material
    being drafted.

    (1)     Note.  A false twist is one that is counterbalanced by a
    simultaneously produced, equal and opposite twist, as set forth in the
    definition of subclass 332.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    318,    for false twist devices combined with means to produce a variable
    drafting effect.

    332+,   for false twisters, per se.


CLS 57/329
TXT Interstage:

    Subject matter under subclass 328 comprising a false twister interposed
    between two stages of a drafting operation.

    (1)     Note.  To be classified in this subclass, at least one false
    twister must be located in a zone in which no drafting occurs.


CLS 57/330
TXT With self-contained drawing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 328 wherein an element of the drafting
    mechanism is part of, or mounted on, the false twister.

    (1)     Note.  Such means commonly comprise a twister in which the twisting
    and untwisting rotation is imparted to the strand by means of a pair of
    revolvable and rotatable rolls and further characterized by the fact that
    such rolls are rotated at a speed differing from that of another
    cooperating pair of drafting rolls mounted independently of the twister.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    335+,   for twisters of the revolvable roll pair type in which the
    twister-rollers do not perform any drafting function.


CLS 57/331
TXT Friction type:

    Subject matter under subclass 328 having means wherein the false twist and
    the resultant rotation of the strand material about its axis is effected by
    a frictional force or forces applied substantially tangentially to the
    periphery of the strand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334+,   for friction-type false twist devices not combined with drafting
    means.


CLS 57/332
TXT False twist device:

    Apparatus under subclass 1 which produces a twist of filaments or fibers in
    one portion of a strand that is equal, and of opposite hand, to that
    simultaneously produced in an adjacent portion of the strand.

    (1)     Note.  Since the algebraic sum of the twistings in the strand
    effected by machines of this subclass is zero, the operation is frequently
    termed a "false twist".

    (2)     Note.  Machines of this subclass usually comprise devices which
    rotate a portion of a strand about its axis, intermediate its ends, without
    rotation of either end of the strand relative to the other, to produce
    opposite twists in the strand.

    (3)     Note.  The devices of this subclass include electrostatic charging
    means, devices supported by the yarn being twisted, and twist devices which
    are an extension of an electric motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    318,    for false twist devices combined with means to produce a variable
    drafting effect.

    328+,   for false twist devices combined with drafting mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 44 for false twist devices combined
    with means to coat a strand (yarn, roving, sliver, etc.) while it is under
    the influence of the false twister.


CLS 57/333
TXT Having fluid jet twisting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 332 wherein the false twist is produced by an
    inlet in the false twist device through which a jet stream of fluid matter
    is introduced tangentially into the twisting zone of the device, thus
    creating a false twist in the strand.


CLS 57/334
TXT Friction type:

    Subject matter under subclass 332 in which the rotation of the strand
    material about its axis is caused by a frictional force or forces applied
    substantially tangentially to the periphery of the strand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331,    for friction-type false twisters combined with drafting means.


CLS 57/335
TXT Revolving roll-pair type:

    Apparatus under subclass 334 including at least one pair of rollers through
    whose bight the strand passes, and which are revolvable jointly about an
    axis which is substantially coincident with the path of travel of the
    strand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    330,    for false twisters of the revolvable rollers type in which the
    rollers comprise one element of a fiber drafting stage.


CLS 57/336
TXT Having a frictional belt:

    Subject matter under subclass 334 wherein the frictional force for twisting
    the strand is created by a portion of a moving belt which rubs against
    another portion of the same belt, the strand being twisted in the rubbing
    portion of the belt.


CLS 57/337
TXT Having a frictional disc:

    Subject matter under subclass 334 wherein the frictional force applied to
    the yarn strand is created by a surface of a rotating wheellike device
    which contacts the strand to produce the false twist.

    (1)     Note.  The yarn strand is not intended to go through any aperture
    which may be in the disc.

    (2)     Note.  The disc of this subclass is generally thin in thickness
    relative to its diameter.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass includes plural discs.


CLS 57/338
TXT On plural axes:

    Subject matter under subclass 337 wherein at least one of the plural discs
    rotates about an axis which is not common to the axis or axes of the other
    disc or discs.

    (1)     Note.  One or more discs may be on the same axis.

    (2)     Note.  The axes of this subclass are generally parallel to one
    another.

    (3)     Note.  The yarn being twisted usually follows a tortuous or zigzag
    path.


CLS 57/339
TXT With discs overlapping:

    Subject matter under subclass 338 wherein at least one of the discs on one
    of the axes overlaps at least one of the discs on at least one other axis.

    (1)     Note.  The terminology "overlap" may be synonomous with "intermesh"
    in the event more than two discs overlap.


CLS 57/340
TXT With nonperipheral surface of discs substantially abutting:

    Subject matter under subclass 339 wherein at least a portion of at least
    one of the two sides of at least one of the rotating discs makes contact
    with another disc side or is so closely spaced from the other disc side so
    as to permit a given size yarn strand to be twisted therebetween.


CLS 57/341
TXT Having a frictional tube, or a twisting head therefor, through which yarn
    passes:

    Subject matter under subclass 334 wherein the frictional force applied to
    the yarn strand is created by the peripheral surface surrounding an
    aperture or opening which is formed in a tubelike structure.

    (1)     Note.  Twisting heads or inserts which are generally used for
    replacing a worn-out end of a twist tube which has a removable head or
    insert are also in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The yarn strand has to pass through the aperture to receive
    the false twist.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    344+,   for similar twist devices, but having a yarn-gripping means for
    holding the yarn strand to permit the twisting thereof.


CLS 57/342
TXT Plural twist tubes:

    Subject matter under subclass 341 wherein plural tubes are utilized in the
    twist device.


CLS 57/343
TXT Including mounting, support, or housing:

    Subject matter under subclass 341 including means to mount, support,
    shield, or enclose the twist tube.


CLS 57/344
TXT Having a tube, or a twisting head therefor, through which yarn passes, with
    a yarn gripper:

    Subject matter under subclass 332 wherein the yarn strand passes through a
    longitudinally apertured tubelike device having a means for gripping or
    holding the strand against rotation at a point on the strand, but not
    against the movement of the strand in its path of movement through the
    device.

    (1)     Note.  Twisting head or inserts having a strand gripping or holding
    means which are generally used for replacing a worn-out end of a  twist
    tube which has a removable head or insert are also in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    341+,   for similar twist devices, but without the yarn strand gripping or
    holding means.


CLS 57/345
TXT Plural tubes:

    Subject matter under subclass 344 wherein plural tubes are utilized in the
    twist device.


CLS 57/346
TXT Including mounting, support, or housing:

    Subject matter under subclass 344 including means to mount, support,
    shield, or enclose the device which produces the false twist.


CLS 57/347
TXT Magnetic support:

    Subject matter under subclass 346 wherein the means to mount or support the
    device is magnetic.


CLS 57/348
TXT Including mounting, support, or housing:

    Subject matter under subclass 332 including means to mount, support,
    shield, or enclose the device which produces the false twist.


CLS 57/349
TXT Magnetic support:

    Subject matter under subclass 348 wherein the means to mount or support the
    device is magnetic.


CLS 57/350
TXT With fluid jet:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising a fluid jet stream which
    impinges the strand being twisted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    289,    for false twist crimpling employing a fluid jet.

    333,    for a fluid jet false twister, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclasses 254+ and 271+ for texturing by
    means of a fluid jet.


CLS 57/351
TXT With other type crimping or texturing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the strand is subjected to a
    crimping or texturing operation other than twist crimping, usually before
    or concomitantly with the twisting operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclasses 247+ for crimping or texturing
    by other than a twisting operation.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    subclass 168 for extrusion of filaments combined with crimping.


CLS 57/352
TXT Strand guiding or guarding:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including a spinning or twisting device or
    parts thereof having means to guide or direct the strands to the device for
    imposing suitable tension on the strands and/or having means for preventing
    entanglement of the strands during the twisting operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80+,    for strand guides equipped with starting or stopping initiating
    mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 157+ for strand guides,
    per se.


CLS 57/353
TXT Catching or holding:

    Subject matter under subclass 352 including a guiding device provided with
    means to catch and hold strands to prevent entangling when they leave the
    normal path of travel or become broken, kinked, or knotted during the
    twisting operation.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 86 and 87.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 91+ for a
    threading device for a web or strand feeder.


CLS 57/354
TXT Separator or balloon limiter:

    Subject matter under subclass 352 including a device which surrounds,
    partially surrounds, or is located between two twisting devices in such a
    manner so that adjacent strands are kept separated during the twisting
    operation.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes balloon control devices which are
    inherently a separator.

    (2)     Note.  The separator or balloon control device may be located along
    one or more sides of one twisting device or along one or more sides of a
    row of twisting devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121,    for rings and travelers provided with guards or protectors.


CLS 57/355
TXT Having antifriction coating or material:

    Subject matter under subclass 354 wherein the separator is either made from
    a material having a low frictional resistance or is coated with a material
    having a low frictional resistance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 44 for false twist devices combined
    with means to coat a strand (yarn, roving, sliver, etc.) while it is under
    the influence of the twister.


CLS 57/356
TXT Readily removable or adjustable:

    Subject matter under subclass 354 wherein the separator is mounted so that
    it may be either adjusted properly between spindles and/or twisters or may
    be easily removable to allow rethreading, cleaning, etc.


CLS 57/357
TXT Having threading slot:

    Subject matter under subclass 354 wherein the separator is constructed so
    as to allow a strand to be readily passed through it for rethreading a
    spindle.


CLS 57/358
TXT Threadboard:

    Subject matter under subclass 352 including a rail or support which may
    comprise either a single piece or a plurality of pieces on which one or
    more strand guides are mounted on each piece.

    (1)     Note.  This device relates only to spinning or throwing machines,
    and not to rope or cordage machines generally.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    353,    for a thread guide having catching or holding means for broken yarn
    strand ends.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 157+ for guides, per se.


CLS 57/359
TXT Traversing:

    Subject matter under subclass 358 in which the threadboard partakes of part
    or all of the movement of the traversing element of the twisting device;
    the board may at the same time move to or from the strand receiver.


CLS 57/360
TXT With lifting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 358 in which the threadboard is provided with
    means to move it from proximity to the spindle tip usually to facilitate
    doffing.


CLS 57/361
TXT Lay head:

    Subject matter under subclass 352 including apparatus for guiding strands
    to a closing point at which the so guided strands will be twined together.


CLS 57/362
TXT Processes:

    Processes under subclass 1 falling within the main class definitions and
    not provided for in any subclass above.

    (1)     Note.  Only those patents which contain method claims which are
    susceptible to being practiced by a plurality of different devices or which
    are drawn to functions not provided for above should be placed herein,
    either on an original or cross-reference basis.  Those patents containing
    method claims which are limited to the operation of a single above provided
    for apparatus will be found in the appropriate subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    Any appropriate subclass above, for a process patent having apparatus or
    other limitations sufficient to warrant placement therein.


CLS 57/400
TXT Open end spinning:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a strand is rotated about its axis
    while the free end or "tail" thereof is in contact with, or in proximity
    to, a source of supply of loose, discrete fibers or fiberlike material
    which is thus twisted into the strand.

    (1)     Note.  This operation is also commonly referred to as free end
    spinning or break spinning and requires the use of a seed yarn to engage
    the supply of loose fibers in order to initiate the operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for covering or wrapping operations in which discrete fibers are
    helically wrapped about a core strand.

    263,    for piecing up open-end machines.

    301,    for clearing open-end machines.


CLS 57/401
TXT Friction:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein the rotation of the strand about
    its axis is caused by a frictional force or effort applied substantially
    tangentially to the periphery of the strand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331,    for friction type false twisters combined with drafting means.

    334+,   for friction type false twisters, per se.


CLS 57/402
TXT Electrostatic:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein the supply of discrete fibers is
    passed through an electrostatic field to align the fibers prior to being
    twisted.


CLS 57/403
TXT Fluid:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein the twist is produced by
    subjecting both the free end of the strand and the supply of discrete
    fibers to the action of a fluid vortex.

    (1)     Note.  Devices found herein are also referred to as "Gotzfried"
    type devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    289,    for false twist crimping employing a fluid jet.

    333,    for fluid jet false twisters, per se. 350, for other twisting
    operations combinedwith fluid jets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclasses  254+ and 271+ for texturing
    by means of a fluid jet.


CLS 57/404
TXT Rotating chamber type:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein the fibers are urged by
    centrifugal force against a wall portion of a rotating hollow body and
    advanced axially thereof to be twisted into the free end of the rotating
    strand.

    (1)     Note.  These devices are usually frustoconical in shape and the
    fibers slide along the walls of the chamber while advancing from smaller
    diameter portions toward larger diameter portions.


CLS 57/405
TXT With strand controlled stopping:

    Subject matter under subclass 404 wherein the twisting operation is stopped
    in response to a condition of the strand or material being operated on, as
    by failure, exhaustion, too much or too little tension, undue accumulation,
    etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for stopping, covering, or wrapping operations.

    78+,    for stopping or starting other twisting operations.

    263,    for piecing up open-end machines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses 0.2+ for similar subject
    matter associated with fiber preparation apparatus and methods.

    28,     Textiles: Manufacturing, subclasses 186+ for similar subject matter
    associated with the manufacture of textiles.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclasses 158+ for similar subject matter
    associated with knitting processes or apparatus.


CLS 57/406
TXT With housing for drive or support:

    Subject matter under subclass 404 combined with an enclosure (e.g.,
    housing, frame, or casing) having means therein for driving, supporting, or
    mounting the rotating chamber or for driving, supporting, or mounting other
    components (such as fiber separating or feed devices) which cooperate with
    the rotating chamber.

    (1)     Note.  To be placed in this subclass, the means for driving,
    supporting, or mounting should include sufficient structural details to
    provide more than a nominal recitation thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92+,    for drive systems for spinning or twisting machines.

    129+,   for mounting receiving elements such as spindles in spinning or
    twisting machines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses for drive
    systems.

    384,    Bearings, appropriate subclasses for mounting and supporting
    spindle shafts in bearings.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, for planetary
    gear drives.


CLS 57/407
TXT Having operator access:

    Subject matter under subclass 406 wherein the housing, frame, or casing is
    constructed or arranged to provide quick or easy access to the means or
    components housed therein.

    (1)     Note.  Devices such as hinged covers or sliding panels are commonly
    used to provide the access to the components within the housing.


CLS 57/408
TXT With fiber separating and/or feeding:

    Subject matter under subclass 404 combined with a device or means which
    operates on a supply of fibrous material to disintegrate it into discrete
    fiber form and/or feeds the discrete fibers to the rotating chamber.

    (1)     Note.  These devices may be referred to as opening rolls, combing
    rolls, or carding rolls.  They also may comprise conventional drafting
    rolls.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327,    for carding devices combined with drafting in spinning machines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses 80+, 98+, 115+, and 236+
    for picking, carding, combing, and drafting fibers.


CLS 57/409
TXT Plural or variable feed:

    Subject matter under subclass 408 wherein the supply of discrete fibers is
    fed to a single twisting zone from more than one source, or the supply of
    discrete fibers is fed to a twisting zone at a variable or pulsating rate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90+,    for feeding or irregular feeding of strand material in spinning or
    twisting operation.


CLS 57/410
TXT Coaxial roll:

    Subject matter under subclass 408 wherein the device or means which
    operates on the supply of fibrous material is a roll which rotates about an
    axis coaxial with the axis of rotation of the rotating chamber.


CLS 57/411
TXT With fluid flow controlling or directing:

    Subject matter under subclass 408 wherein the fiber separating and/or
    feeding means utilizes a current of fluid and includes means for directing
    or controlling the current of fluid or for providing an additional or
    supplemental fluid flow in the separating and/or feeding zones other than
    for or in addition to the purpose of merely transporting the discrete
    fibers to the rotating chamber.

    (1)     Note.  The fluid flow referred to herein is other than the
    conventional fluid flow which exists in open-end systems as a result of the
    use of an under pressure to assist in transporting the fibers to the
    rotating chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301+    and 304+, for the use of pneumatic systems in clearing twisting
    devices.


CLS 57/412
TXT With specific feed device for opening roll:

    Subject matter under subclass 408 wherein the fiber separating and/or
    feeding means utilizes an opening, combining, or carding type roller and
    wherein structural details of a feed device positioned to cooperate with
    the opening roller for feeding fibrous material to the opening roller to be
    distintegrated into discrete fibers are recited.

    (1)     Note.  To be placed in this subclass, the feed device should
    include sufficient structural details to provide more than a nominal
    recitation thereof.

    (2)     Note.  Feed rolls, silver guides, and condensers are commonly used
    as the feed device for the opening roller.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses 105, 246, and 288+ for
    feeding and guiding devices for carding machines or drafting frames.


CLS 57/413
TXT With specific rotor feed channel:

    Subject matter under subclass 408 including structural details of a guide
    passageway or channel for directing the discrete fibers from the fiber
    separating and/or feeding means to the rotating chamber.

    (1)     Note.  To be placed in this subclass, the feed channel should
    include sufficient structural details to provide more than a nominal
    recitation thereof.


CLS 57/414
TXT Rotor with fiber accreting portion:

    Subject matter under subclass 404 wherein the discrete fibers accumulate in
    a groove or section of greatest diameter in the rotating chamber and in
    which groove or section the free end of the rotating strand engages the
    discrete fibers to twist the fibers into the strand.


CLS 57/415
TXT With fluid flow controlling or directing:

    Subject matter under subclass 414 wherein the rotor utilizes a current of
    fluid and includes means for directing or controlling the current of fluid
    or for providing an additional or supplemental fluid flow within the rotor
    other than for or in addition to the purpose of merely transporting the
    discrete fibers within the rotor.

    (1)     Note.  The fluid flow referred to herein is other than the
    conventional fluid flow which exists in open-end systems as a result of the
    use of an underpressure to assist in transporting the fibers to the
    rotating chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301+    and 304+, for the use of pneumatic systems in clearing twisting
    devices.


CLS 57/416
TXT Specific wall configuration:

    Subject matter under subclass 414 including structural details of the walls
    of the rotor with respect to angular positioning, size, or structure, for
    example.


CLS 57/417
TXT With specific yarn guiding device:

    Subject matter under subclass 414 including structural details of a guide
    device for directing the twisted strand passing out of the rotor.

    (1)     Note.  To be placed in this subclass, the guide device should
    include sufficient structural details to provide more than a nominal
    recitation thereof.

    (2)     Note.  Tube elements are commonly used as the guide in these
    devices and are frequently referred to as "withdrawal tubes".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    352+,   for strand guiding in spinning or twisting machines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 157+ for yarn guides,
    per se.

               CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS

    The following subclasses are collections of published disclosures
    pertaining to various specified aspects of the twisted strand structure art
    which aspects do not form appropriate bases for subclasses in the foregoing
    classification wherein original copies of patents are placed on the basis
    of the structure or composition of a strand.  These subclasses assist a
    search based on remote function or physical characteristic of the twisted
    strand structure and may be of further assistance to the searcher, either
    as a starting point in searching this class or as an indication of further
    related fields of search inside or outside the class.

    (1)     Note.  Disclosures are placed in these subclasses for their value
    as references and as leads to appropriate main or secondary fields of
    search without regard to their original classification or their claimed
    subject matter.

    (2)     Note.  The disclosures found in the following subclasses are
    examples only of the indicated subject matter, and in no instance do they
    represent the entire extent of the prior art.


CLS 57/901
TXT ANTISTATIC:

    Twisted strand structures which reduce or dissipate static electricity due
    to the particular structural components of the strand or because of some
    treatment to which the strand has been subjected.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 212+ for
    discharging static electricity.


CLS 57/902
TXT REINFORCING OR TIRE CORDS:

    Twisted strand structures which are used in such devices as drive belts,
    conveyor belts, automobile tires, etc., in order to strengthen or increase
    the wear resistance of the device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclasses 556, 557 and 558+ for tire
    carcass reinforcement cords.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 237+ for a friction drive belt for a power transmission.


CLS 57/903
TXT SEWING THREADS:

    Twisted strand structures having particular structural features or
    properties which are useful when the strand is used as a sewing thread.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 400+ for sewn pro-ducts.


CLS 57/904
TXT FLAME RETARDANT:

    Twisted strand structures used primarily in clothing and made so as to
    afford defense against fire.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 5, 7, and 8 for a heat resistant head covering
    for a person.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 2+ for a composition which may be used to
    extinguish fires or as a coating or impregnation to act as a defense
    against fire or flame.


CLS 57/905
TXT BICOMPONENT MATERIAL:

    Twisted strand structures in which the individual fibers or filaments from
    which the strand is made are formed of at least two different compositions
    such that, in a cross section of an individual fiber or filament, the
    different compositions are side by side with a connecting web therebetween
    or one composition is substantially enclosed in the other (sheath-core
    type).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    Digest 26 for extruding composite fibers made of two or more materials.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 370, 373, and
    374 for multicomponent fibers or filaments.


CLS 57/906
TXT LINE APPLIANCES:

    Helically preformed twisted wire elements, usually of a finite length,
    adapted to fit over an existing line, cable, or conductor for the purpose
    of enabling such line, cable, or conductor to be suspended from a support,
    or to otherwise provide a clamp, support, tie-down, or armor for the line,
    cable, or conductor.  The wire elements are usually independent, finite
    lengths and a plurality of them are usually applied simultaneously to the
    line by a twisting action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9       and 311, for preforming and shaping wire elements used in strands.

    212,    for strands having spirally wrapped wires.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 115+ for cord and rope
    holders.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 79 for cables and
    conductors with supporting means.

    248,    Supports, subclass 63 for cable suspension clamps.


CLS 57/907
TXT FOAMED AND/OR FIBRILLATED:

    Twisted strand structures made from filamentary material which is porous or
    has cellular voids therein or from material which has been made filamentous
    usually by subjecting synthetic film, tape, or ribbon material to a
    treatment to split or break up the film, tape, or ribbon into a filamentous
    form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31+,    for making twisted strands from web material.

    235,    259 and 260, for twisted strands made from web material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    Digests 8 and 47 for splitting or fibrillating synthetic material.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 304.4+ for
    webs or sheets made from foamed material.


CLS 57/908
TXT JET INTERLACED OR INTERMINGLED:

    Twisted strand material made from multifilaments which have been subjected
    to the treatment of a fluid jet to cause the filaments to interlace and
    intermingle with each other to produce a unitary structure. The jet
    treatment is usually such that no loops, whorls, or bulkiness is imparted
    to the filaments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    289     and 350, for twisting operations using an air jet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles: Manufacturing, subclasses 274+ for air jet treatments to
    interlace multifilaments.


CLS 59/
TTL CHAIN, STAPLE, AND HORSESHOE  MAKING

CLS 59/
TXT This class includes generally chain, staple, horseshoe, and ox-shoe making,
    swivel making being included under Chain making.

    Also the article subclasses of Chains, including general purpose and
    ornamental chains and swivels.

    For further explanation in regard to what may be included in the above art
    and article subclasses, see the definitions, particularly those given under
    the head of each of the arts.

    (1)     Note.  Rolling machines or rolls designed especially for the
    manufacture of chains, chain-links, horseshoes, horseshoe bars or calks,
    and staples in which there is invention in the construction or operation of
    the means or parts which give the form to the blank or article produced are
    included in this class; otherwise in Class 72, Metal Deforming.

    (2)     Note.  If the invention resides simply in the manner of attaching
    the dies to the rolls, the patents will be found in Class 72, Metal
    Deforming.

    (3)     Note.  This class is closely related to Classes 29, Metal Working;
    72, Metal Deforming; 83, Cutting; and 140, Wireworking, which classes
    should be kept in mind in completing a search in this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses for presses not elsewhere provided
    for.

    Chain Making.  Relates to the broad art of chain making and includes all
    patents for machines, apparatus, blanks and processes relating to the
    manufacture of chains or links, except such as shall be referred to
    hereinafter.  Includes patents relating to the manufacture of swivels which
    are found in subclass 9.

    (1)     Note.  The manufacture of simple links for car-couplings will be
    found in appropriate subclasses under this head.

    (2)     Note.  Electric heating and welding machines and processes
    comprising any invention in the means of applying or process of application
    are classified in the appropriate metal heating and working subclasses in
    Class 219, Electric Heating.  If however, the use of electricity is
    incidental and the claims embrace no novel features relating thereto, the
    patents will be classified herein.

    (3)     Note.  Machines which coil the wire or rod into a helix or which
    coil the helix and cut-off coils or sections to form links are found in
    Class 72, Metal Deforming, subclasses 135+.  If the machine, in addition to
    coiling and cutting, gives link form to the part cut off or assembles such
    parts into a chain, it will be classified in this class.


CLS 59/1
TXT Miscellaneous inventions in chain making not included in the subclasses
    under this head.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 57 for molds for forming chain and other
    ring-like products.


CLS 59/2
TXT Devices for forming metallic bead chains, said chains usually consisting of
    hollow balls or beads joined to one another by connecting links.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 343+ for disclosure of hollow ball
    making by push-drawing.


CLS 59/3
TXT Apparatus for making chains formed or oval or elongated links bent into
    substantially U shape, the link being passed through the previously-formed
    link or links before being bent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13      and 15.


CLS 59/4
TXT Devices for forming or uniting the parts or units of a roller-chain.


CLS 59/5
TXT Miscellaneous machines and devices employed in the manufacture of sprocket
    chains.


CLS 59/6
TXT Machines for forming sprocket chains or links out of sheet metal.


CLS 59/7
TXT Machines for assembling or disassembling the finished sprocket-links to
    form a chain.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 700+ for means for assembling or
    disassembling in general.


CLS 59/8
TXT Blanks and processes used in making sprocket-chains.


CLS 59/9
TXT Apparatus employed in the manufacture of swivels used as connecting means
    between chains, cables, or similar articles.


CLS 59/10
TXT Machines for forming chains with solid links from a continuous bar or blank
    by rolling, swaging, or cutting and without bending, winding, or welding.
    This type of machine usually forms the chain from a bar cruciform in
    cross-section.

    (1)     Note.  To distinguish between rolling- machines and machines for
    making weldless chains by rolling, see note under general class definition.


CLS 59/11
TXT Machines which separate or cut apart links formed in the manufacture of
    weldless chains from a continuous bar or rod.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10.


CLS 59/12
TXT Blanks and processes used in the manufacture of weldless chains.


CLS 59/13
TXT Miscellaneous machines and apparatus for making links or chains from sheet
    metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses for machines for crimping,
    corrugating, beading, bending and embossing sheet metal.


CLS 59/14
TXT Apparatus for making chains from sheet metal having links formed from sheet
    metal with prongs or projections and corresponding apertures or notches,
    whereby the links may be connected with one another.  Chains of this
    character are usually designed for ornamental purposes.


CLS 59/15
TXT Machines which stamp or cut the link from sheet metal, thread it through
    the previously formed link, and bend it back upon itself.


CLS 59/16
TXT Miscellaneous combined machines not otherwise classifiable.

    Search this class, combined machine subclasses under Horseshoe-Making and
    Staple-Making.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, for residual metal working machines, and Class 29,
    Metal Working, subclasses 33+ for the same additionally involving assembly
    and see the notes thereunder.

    100,    Presses, subclass 102 for presses combined with other features and
    not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 59/17
TXT Machines for forming wire-curb-chains by coiling the wire into a helix,
    cutting it into sections, bending it into link form, the links being
    assembled to form the chains, and giving to the links a curbed or twisted
    form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for chain-curbing machines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 66 and 129+ for a coiling and cutting
    machine.


CLS 59/18
TXT Machines for performing the above operations in chain making.  Specific
    feeding means are not shown and described in every case.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 13+ for corresponding apparatus
    not limited to chain making.


CLS 59/19
TXT Machines which feed a continuous wire or rod to a cutting mechanism,
    passing it through the previously formed link, and then bend it into link
    form, wrapping or twisting the ends of the wire around other portions of
    the link in order to securely fasten said ends, and so dispense with
    welding.  In some cases no specific feeding or cutting means are shown.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    140,    Wireworking, subclasses 72, 88, 102, and 104.


CLS 59/20
TXT Machines for forming chains from a continuous rod or wire by coiling such
    rod or wire into a helix, cutting off sections to form links, and
    assembling and uniting the links to form a completed chain.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 66 and 129+ for a coiling and cutting
    machine.

    140,    Wireworking, subclasses indented under Article Making or Forming.


CLS 59/21
TXT Machines for bending link-blanks into U- shaped links and forming eyes at
    the ends of the links, the blank generally being thrust through the eyes of
    the previously formed link before being bent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 3.


CLS 59/22
TXT Combined machines and devices for bending the links into form and welding
    the ends together.  In some of the machines of this type the links are
    automatically assembled before welding.  These machines may also include
    means for completing the act of welding by shaping the links.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27      and 31.


CLS 59/23
TXT Combined machines for cutting from a bar, rod, or wire sufficient for a
    link and then bending it into the general or completed form of a link.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27      for bending devices for chain-links.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 5.

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate "withcutting" subclasses.

    140,    Wireworking, subclass 88.


CLS 59/24
TXT Combined machines for cutting and bending having automatic means for
    feeding the rod or wire to the cutting mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     18, 19, 37, 38+, 49+, 66, and 71+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material or Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 62+ for
    means for cutting in the manner of that class, combined with work-infeed
    means.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, appropriate subclasses, except as provided for in Class 408.


CLS 59/25
TXT Combined machines for cutting and bending having an automatic feed and in
    which the links are assembled into a completed chain.


CLS 59/26
TXT Combined machines for making chains by winding several convolutions of the
    stock or wire into link form and welding the same into an integral link.
    These machines are usually constructed so that the convolutions of the link
    being wound shall pass through the previously formed link.  Also machines
    which simply perform the operation of winding without welding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 15+ for similar apparatus not
    limited to chain making.


CLS 59/27
TXT Machines and devices for bending links into complete form in the finished
    chain or preparatory to the operation of welding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
    Subclasses indented under Combined machines which include the operation of
    bending; also in the appropriate subclasses under Horseshoe-making and
    Staple-making.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, appropriate subclasses under 33+ and 700+ for
    assembly apparatus, and subclasses 428+ for an assembly method,
    particularly subclasses 432+ for piercing of one workpiece by another,
    e.g., a staple, and subclasses 505+ for deforming one element about
    another, e.g., clenching a clip.

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses.

    140,    Wireworking, appropriate subclasses.


CLS 59/28
TXT Devices for imparting a curb form to chains.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16      and 17.


CLS 59/29
TXT Machines and apparatus for trimming, straightening, stretching, or
    otherwise imparting uniform dimensions to chain-links after they have
    received their general form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     30, 31, and 33.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 8.

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses "with cutting".


CLS 59/30
TXT Machines or devices for giving form to the link by swaging or the like.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     22 and 29, for machines for trimming the links to give them equal
    dimensions after they have received their general form, and 33.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 9 and 34.

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses.

    101,    Printing, subclasses 4+ for impressing ornamental forms into a link.


CLS 59/31
TXT Apparatus particularly adapted for use in welding chain-links.  All
    machines in which there is invention in the form of die are included in
    this group.  Includes machines having, in addition to the welding means,
    means for completing the weld by sizing or shaping the link.

    (1)     Note.  Welding-machines in which the invention resides entirely in
    the means for operating the power hammer or press are included in Class
    228, Metal Fusion Bonding, as are also those machines adapted for general
    welding and having no construction peculiar to chain welding machines.  For
    distinction between Class 59 and Class 219, Electric Heating, see note
    under definition of Chain making.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     and appropriate subclasses indented thereunder; also subclass 35
    for processes.


CLS 59/32
TXT Machines which rotate the links during the act of welding.  In some cases
    the act of rotation threads the link to be welded into the previously
    welded link.


CLS 59/33
TXT Inventions in the welding dies, per se.  It includes also such patents as
    show or claim finishing or sizing dies in addition to the welding dies.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22.


CLS 59/34
TXT Devices for holding a link or previously formed part of a chain in a
    convenient position or for manipulating it during the operation of welding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses.  Class 269 is the residual
    locus for patents to a device for clamping, supporting and/or holding an
    article (or articles) in position to be operated on or treated.  See notes
    thereunder for other related loci.


CLS 59/35.1
TXT Blanks and processes:

    Blanks under subclass 1 for use in chain making or processes thereunder
    employed in chain making or link formation.

    (1)     Note.  Patents having claims both to the chain or link as an
    article and also to the blank or process will be found in the appropriate
    subclasses (59/78) under the head of CHAINS.

    (2)     Note.  Blanks and processes relating to the manufacture of sprocket
    chains are classified in subclass 8, and those relating to the manufacture
    of weldless chains in subclass 12 of this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 592+ for miscellaneous processes of
    mechanical manufacture not elsewhere provided for, and including assembly
    by mechanical jointure.

    72,     Metal Deforming, any appropriate subclass preceding subclass 362
    for a process there provided for, and subclasses 362+ for a residual
    process.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 101+ for metallurgical bonding in
    general and subclass 192 for bonding in the manufacture of a chain link.


CLS 59/36
TXT Miscellaneous horseshoe making inventions not included in the subclasses
    indented hereunder.


CLS 59/37
TXT Machines performing two or more functions or operations in the manufacture
    of horseshoes which are not classified in the more specific subclasses.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is largely made up of machines which form
    calks or clips in addition to the other operations of bending, swaging, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, for plastic metal working processes or apparatus,
    with or without cutting.

    100,    Presses, subclass 102 for presses combined with other features and
    not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 59/38
TXT Miscellaneous combined machines for performing the above operations.
    Machines of this type may or may not have means for feeding forward the
    blank for operation upon by the machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     56, 57, and 58.


CLS 59/39
TXT Machines which in addition to cutting, bending, shaping, punching, and
    creasing perform one or more operations relating to the bending or forming
    of calks or clips.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37      and 65.


CLS 59/40
TXT Machines in which a reciprocating motion is imparted to the die-block
    around which the blank is bent or to the jaws which bend the blank around
    the die-block.


CLS 59/41
TXT Machines of this type which have in addition to the reciprocating jaw or
    die-block a reciprocating means for punching and creasing the shoe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for reciprocating punches and creasers.


CLS 59/42
TXT Machines having a rotary die-block or former around which the blank is bent.


CLS 59/43
TXT Machines having in addition to the rotary die-block or former around which
    the blank is bent a rotary means for punching and creasing the blank or
    shoe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for rotary punches and creasers.


CLS 59/44
TXT Miscellaneous combined machines for performing the operations above
    enumerated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     57 and 58.


CLS 59/45
TXT Machines in which reciprocating motion is communicated to the die-block
    around which the blank is bent or to jaws which bend the blank around the
    die-block.


CLS 59/46
TXT Combined machines which have reciprocating means for punching and creasing
    the shoe in addition to the reciprocating jaws or die- block for bending
    and shaping the blank.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for reciprocating punches and creasers.


CLS 59/47
TXT Combined machines performing the above operations which have a rotary
    die-block around which the blank is bent.


CLS 59/48
TXT Combined bending, shaping, punching, and creasing, rotary die-block
    machines having in addition to the rotary die-block rotary means for
    punching and creasing the shoe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for rotary punches and creasers.


CLS 59/49
TXT Miscellaneous combined machines performing the above operations.  Machines
    of this type may or may not have means for feeding forward the blanks to
    the cutting apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     56 and 58.


CLS 59/50
TXT Combined cutting, bending, and shaping horseshoe-making machines having a
    reciprocating die-block or former around which the blank is bent.


CLS 59/51
TXT Combined cutting, bending and shaping horseshoe-making machines
    characterized by a rotary die-block or former around which the blank is
    bent in the formation of the shoe.


CLS 59/52
TXT Miscellaneous machines for bending the blank into the form of a horseshoe
    and at the same time or subsequently giving shape to the shoe by swaging or
    other means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56      and 58.


CLS 59/53
TXT Machines having a reciprocating die-block or former around which the blank
    is bent.


CLS 59/54
TXT Machines having a rotary die-block or former around which the blank is bent.


CLS 59/55
TXT Combined machines for shaping the shoe and also punching or creasing, or
    both.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     for shaping and punching and creasing before the blank is bent; 57,
    and 58.


CLS 59/56
TXT Machines or devices particularly designed for bending the bar or blank into
    the general form or shape of a shoe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
    Appropriate subclasses under the heads of Chain-Making and Staple-Making;
    and subclasses 52+ for machines which thicken the heels in addition to
    bending.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, appropriate subclasses.

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses.


CLS 59/57
TXT Machines and apparatus for performing either one or both the above
    operations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37+,    60 and 63.


CLS 59/58
TXT Machines and devices for swaging, rolling, or in any manner shaping or
    giving form to the shoe.  May include means for thickening up heels or ends
    of shoes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37      and appropriate subclasses indented thereunder; 60 and 63.


CLS 59/59
TXT Machines and devices for trimming horseshoe or for removing the burs raised
    in the operations of punching and creasing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, appropriate subclasses.


CLS 59/60
TXT Dies designed to be used in forming or making horseshoes; also tools for
    use in making or shaping calks and horseshoes and not adapted for general
    purposes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61      and 65, also subclass 66 for dies for forming calks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    168,    Farriery, for such tools as operate on the shoe when it is on the
    horse's foot.


CLS 59/61
TXT The title indicates the contents of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for processes for rolling blanks or bars.

    68,     for processes for making calks.


CLS 59/62
TXT Blanks and bars designed especially for use in the manufacture of
    horseshoes; also machines and apparatus for producing blanks and bars which
    are not classified in the subclasses under this head.

    (1)     Note.  Patents having claims both to the blank or bar and to the
    shoe are classified in Class 168, Farriery.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    168,    Farriery, subclasses 4 and 24.


CLS 59/63
TXT Rolling-machines and rolls for forming blanks or bars particularly designed
    for horseshoes.  One or more of the operations of beveling, punching, and
    creasing or calk-forming may be performed during the rolling of the blank.
    Does not include machines which bend the blank into the general form of
    horseshoe or which operate on the blank after it has been so bent.

    (1)     Note.  To distinguish between the machines of this group and those
    found in Class 72, Metal Deforming, see note under the general definition
    of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for machines with rolls which simply punch and crease the blank;
    66, 67 and 68 for rolling-machines for forming calks.


CLS 59/64
TXT Processes or methods for producing blanks and bars for horseshoes by
    rolling.


CLS 59/65
TXT Machines and devices which perform one or more of the above operations such
    as show means for forming the calk or clip from the horseshoe-blank or
    operating upon the calk in connection with the shoe.

    (1)     Note.  The thickening of the heels may be included in the operation
    of shaping in subclass 58 or in any of the subclasses under Combined
    machines which include shaping.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     39 and 66+, for machines which form the calks apart from the shoe.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 460 for metal shaping anvil vises.

    168,    Farriery, for machines for sharpening calks when the shoe is on the
    horse's foot.

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses, for workholders residually.


CLS 59/66
TXT Apparatus for making horseshoe-calks.

    (1)     Note.  For distinction between this subclass and subclass 65, see
    Note under the definition of that subclass.


CLS 59/67
TXT Blanks and bars designed for use in the manufacture of horseshoe-calks or
    from which the calks are cut.


CLS 59/68
TXT Processes or methods for making or treating calks or the blanks or bars
    from which the calks are made.


CLS 59/69
TXT Includes calks which are not removable and in which there is invention in
    the means for attaching them to the shoes.

    (1)     Note.  For calks not included in the subclass, see Class 168,
    Farriery.


CLS 59/70
TXT Miscellaneous machines, apparatus, blanks, and processes particularly
    designed for use in the manufacture of ox-shoes.

    (1)     Note.  This art is analogous to that of horseshoe-making, and in
    most cases the search should be completed by reference to the appropriate
    subclasses under Horseshoe-Making.


CLS 59/71
TXT Machines, apparatus, blanks, and processes for making or forming staples of
    general U-shape having legs substantially equal in length and adapted to be
    driven into wood or other material, including staples for general purposes
    and such as are made by machines which cannot be classified in the specific
    art classes and subclasses.

    (1)     Note.  For the distinctions between this class and Class 72, Metal
    Deforming, see the notes under the general definition of this class.

    (2)     Note.  For machines for forming staples for fastening buttons to
    shoes, see Class 29, Metal Working, subclass 4.

    (3)     Note.  For machines for making staples for paper-fasteners, see
    Class 29, Metal Working, subclass 13.

    (6)     Note.  For forming clips from wire, see Class 140, Wireworking.

    (7)     Note.  For tools for bending wire into U-shape, see Class 81, Tools.

    (8)     Note.  For bending devices, search should be made in Class 72,
    Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses; also in this class in the
    subclasses of Bending under Chain-Making and Horseshoe-making.

    (9)     Note.  For pointing devices, search should be made in Class 470,
    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and Apparatus,
    subclasses 134 and 160 for pointing devices for nail making machines.

    (10)    Note.  For pointing and barbing, search Class 470, Threaded, Headed
    Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and Apparatus, subclass 195 for wire
    nail barb and pointing machines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 3 and 5.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclasses 82+ for combined
    apparatus for forming a member, e.g., staple, and driving it into work.


CLS 59/72
TXT Machines for making staples from sheet- metal strips or plates.


CLS 59/73
TXT Combined machines which perform the operations of cutting, bending, and
    barbing or corrugating.  This type of machine may or may not have an
    automatic feeding mechanism for feeding the wire to the cutting apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  See Notes under general head of Staple Making.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclass.

    140,    Wireworking, subclass 105.


CLS 59/74
TXT Machines which perform the above operations, the point-forming operation
    being distinct and separate from the operation of cutting the wire or rod
    into lengths.

    (1)     Note.  See Notes under general head of Staple Making.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71.


CLS 59/75
TXT Machines for cutting the wire into lengths and bending into staple form.
    These machines may or may not have an automatic feeding mechanism, and the
    cutting mechanism may also operate to point the staples.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
    Appropriate subclasses under Chain Making and Horseshoe-Making.


CLS 59/76
TXT Machines for cutting and bending having a rotary former or die-block around
    which the staple is bent or rotary jaws or lugs for bending it around a
    stationary die-block.


CLS 59/77
TXT Processes of manufacture and blanks or bars designed to be used in staple
    making.

    (1)     Note.  The line between this class (59) and Class 206, Special
    Receptacle or Package, and Class 411, Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed,
    Tool-Deformed, or Lock-Threaded Fastener, is as follows:  In this class
    (59), this subclass (77), the blank may have the appearance of a mass of
    partially-shaped, nonsevered, staple-like elements; however, significant
    additional shaping, plus severing, is required to convert the blank into a
    plurality of staples.  In Class 206, subclasses 340+, the package may be
    one of severably-connected staples.  In Class 411, subclasses 442+, a
    plurality of fasteners of the class are secured one to another (e.g., a
    strip fo staples).

    (2)     Note.  A claim, even though stated to be a "blank", which is
    readable upon a completed article for Class 411, Expanded, Threaded,
    Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, Locked-Threaded Fastener, subclasses 442 and
    457 is classified therein, for such a claim is generic to both the blank
    and the article, and therefore is considered to be best classified with the
    article.

    (3)     Note.  Patents having claims to both the article and process or
    method are found in Class 411, Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed,
    Tool-Deformed, or Locked-Threaded Fastener, subclasses 457+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 206 for a fastener package
    including an ancillary content contacting medium and subclasses 338+ for a
    fastener package.  See (1) Note, above.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, subclasses 442+ and 457+, and see Notes (1) to
    (3) above.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 571+ for
    metallic stock having a weakened portion for severing, and subclass 587 for
    a metallic workpiece mimicking the cross section of finished stock.


CLS 59/78
TXT This is the generic locus of concatenated elements known as "chains" and
    includes both general-purpose and ornamental chains and swivel link
    mechanisms.

    (1)     Note.  Patents showing bars, beads, links or rings strung upon or
    attached to parallel flexible elements; or lugs or projections attached to
    continuous flexible elements as belts or cables; will be found in 474,
    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, or in Class 63,
    Jewelry, depending upon whether they are designed as machine elements or
    for jewelry or personal wear.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    63,     Jewelry, and see (1) Note, above.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 9+ for a motor vehicle adapted to travel
    upon at least one track carried by the vehicle, which track ordinarily
    comprises an assembly of concatenated elements.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 119.14 for isolated supports with
    flexible linked supporting means joining the supports.

    305,    Wheel Substitutes for Land Vehicles, subclass 185 for endless
    flexible tracks for land vehicles.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 202+ for a positive drive power transmission belt; and
    subclasses 237+ for a friction drive power transmission belt.

    D8,     Tools and Hardware, subclass 499 for ornamental forms of chain.


CLS 59/78.1
TXT Chains, generally used for supporting chandeliers or the like, in which the
    links are provided with grooves, openings, or passageways for receiving
    electric conductors or for providing a conduit for gas or other fluid.  The
    chain may be provided with end fittings such as nipples, hooks, eyes, etc.,
    for attaching the chain to a fixed object or for attaching an article to
    the chain.  The mere recital, broadly, in the claims of electric conductors
    does not operate to exclude a patent which would otherwise be classified
    herein.

    (1)     Note.  For sectional conduits made up of sections which do not
    constitute "chain" links, see Class 138, Pipes and Tubular Conduits,
    subclass 120 for a pipe made up of jointed sections which do not constitute
    "chain" links.

    (2)     Note.  For chandelier supports in general, see Class 248, Supports,
    subclasses 317+ and Notes thereto.


CLS 59/79.1
TXT Elastic:

    Chains under subclass 78 which upon the application of tension will be
    extended and will automatically resume their normal length when the tension
    is removed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclasses 213+ for extensible springs used to prevent
    tension or strain from rupturing yielding parts of a ship.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 69+ for elastic extension devices which
    are extensible upon application of tension and recover when the tension is
    removed; and subclasses 80+ for a panel of interlinked
    extensible/recoverable spring-influenced members (e.g., bed spring panel).


CLS 59/79.2
TXT Coil spring:

    Chains under subclass 79.1 comprising expansible chain linkages which are
    biased to retract by a continous coil spring passing through a plurality of
    links.


CLS 59/79.3
TXT Sliding link:

    Chains under subclass 79.1 comprising expansible chain linkages in which
    links are slidable upon each other to expanded and contracted positions.


CLS 59/80
TXT Chains ornamental in appearance designed for jewelry or personal wear, and
    includes chains having alternate or different links composed of different
    materials, or the links joined in a manner to render the chain ornamental
    in appearance, or the individual links composed of different metals or
    materials which render them ornamental in appearance, or having parts or
    features rendering the chains ornamental in appearance, but which parts or
    features would possess no particular utility in a general purpose chain.
    Metallic bead chains are included in this subclass.

    (1)     Note.  Where the invention resides in the structure of an
    ornamental fabric, per se, and does not include features characteristic of
    chains, it will be classified in Class 63, Jewelry, appropriate subclasses
    or Class 245, Wire Fabrics and Structure, appropriate subclasses.

    This subclass does not include wire curb-chains or chains made up of
    twisted-wire links.  Such chains are found in this class, subclass 83.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    D11,    Jewelry, Symbolic Insignia, and Ornaments, subclass 13 for
    ornamental chain designs.


CLS 59/81
TXT Chains composed of two or more parallel rows or strands or roller links or
    beads having means extending transversely of the chain for connecting them.


CLS 59/82
TXT Inventions limited to the construction of the link.


CLS 59/83
TXT Chains composed of wire links or elements. If the invention be limited to
    the link structure, the patents will be classified in the appropriate
    subclass under the head of Links.

    (1)     Note.  As to what wire chains should be included under ornamental
    chains, see definition of subclass 80, herein.  Elastic wire chains will be
    found in subclass 79 herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    245,    Wire Fabrics and Structure, subclass 4.


CLS 59/84
TXT Miscellaneous inventions in the construction of the link.  This subclass
    includes links made up of two or more parts or composed of different
    materials.

    (1)     Note.  Plain oval or elongated car- coupling links will be found in
    this subclass and also in subclass 90.

    (2)     Note.  For links intended for use for anti-skid purposes, see Class
    152, Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclasses 243-245.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     for ornamental Links.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 184 and 207 for
    insulator terminals in the form of links or clevises.


CLS 59/85
TXT Links or coupling devices of the general form of a chain-link which are
    designed to replace broken links or connect chains or parts of chains
    without heating or welding. These links should be capable of receiving two
    chain-links and furnishing bearings for the same, one at each end of the
    detachable link.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include hooks or coupling members or
    devices which are especially designed for other purposes and are
    classifiable elsewhere, as whiffletree-connectors, clevises, etc.  Lap
    links or rings designed for general use and which answer the above
    requirements will be included in this subclass.  For links for connecting
    sprocket-chains, see Class 474, Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or
    Components, particularly subclasses 202+ for positive drive power
    transmission belts and links used in such belts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 598.2+ for a ring shaped
    projection member of a separable-fastener, subclasses 598.4+ for a hook
    with a gate for closing its access throat, and subclasses 698.1+ for a hook
    shaped projection member of a separable-fastener.

    54,     Harness, subclasses 30 and 53.

    70,     Locks, subclass 456.

    114,    Ships, subclasses 113 and 114.

    278,    Land Vehicles:  Animal Draft Appliances, subclasses 90+.

    403,    Joints and Connections,  appropriate subclasses for connections in
    general.


CLS 59/86
TXT Couplings for chains or parts of chains comprising U or link shaped members
    pivoted together by a removable pin and having means for normally retaining
    the pin in position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 573+ for a three part
    separable-fastener.

    70,     Locks, subclass 18 for shackles embodying lock mechanism.

    114,    Ships, subclass 114.

    278,    Land Vehicles:  Animal Draft   Appliances, subclasses 96+.


CLS 59/87
TXT Links comprising two main members, usually constituting the sides of the
    links, which members overlap each other at and for some distance adjacent
    their extremities.  The members may or may not have interlocking lugs and
    recesses.


CLS 59/88
TXT Double-lap links which are pivoted together or have means for maintaining
    them in pivotal relation.


CLS 59/89
TXT Links having pivoted closures which may or may not have locking means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses, subclass 598.2 for a
    ring shaped projection member of a separable-fastener.

    70,     Locks, subclass 456.


CLS 59/90
TXT Such links as are formed of a single piece of metal or other material.

    (1)     Note.  Composite links made up of different metals will be found in
    this class, subclass 84.


CLS 59/91
TXT The title is self-explanatory.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80      and 82.


CLS 59/92
TXT Links usually formed from wire having their ends wrapped or twisted about
    other portions of the links, thereby securely fastening said ends and
    dispensing with welding.


CLS 59/93
TXT Various devices not otherwise classifiable, such as hooks, bars, and rings
    to be attached at or intermediate the ends of the chain and becoming a part
    of and being used in connection with the chain.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, for hand grips or handles applied to chain
    ends.

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 114.5, 116 and 123.

    54,     Harness, subclasses 30 and 53.

    63,     Jewelry, subclass 9.

    278,    Land Vehicles:  Animal Draft     Appliances, subclasses 90+.


CLS 59/95
TXT Includes all devices in which the invention resides in the swivel, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 905 for swiveling devices
    shown with snap hooks for attaching a watch to a chain.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 43.1+ and see
    the reference to this class (59) in the definition of subclass 43.1.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 272+ for a swivelled pipe
    coupling.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 164+ for a swivel connection in
    general.

    482,    Exercise Devices, particularly subclasses 87+ for a
    multidirectionally movable bag or pad which may be supported by a swivel.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 59/900
TXT PLASTIC:

    Links which are made of plastic or contain significant plastic portions.


CLS 59/901
TXT CROSS PIN:

    Links characterized by some particular significance in the cross pin use at
    the pivot point with another link.


CLS 60/
TTL POWER PLANTS

CLS 60/
TXT This is the residual class concerned with the driving of a load by the
    conversion of heat, pressure, radiant, or gravitational energy into
    mechanical motion.  It includes a motor in combination with its energy
    supply or its exhaust treatment.  It also includes the motors, per se,
    combinations of motors, and elements specialized for use in such energy
    conversion that are not specifically provided for elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  The mere nominal inclusion with the motor of and element or
    machine driven by the motor is not generally considered sufficient to
    exclude the patent from the class.

    (2)     Note.  Unless specifically provided for elsewhere, a combination of
    plural motors of types that would, per se, be classified in different
    classes is classified in Class 60.

    (3)     Note.  Combustion products generators in which steam or water are
    added to the combustion zone are classified in Class 60, Power Plants,
    where it is the sole disclosure that the products of combustion are to be
    used to produce useful work.  See Class 110, Furnaces, and Class 431,
    Combustion, for combustion products generators of general utility where
    steam or water is supplied to the combustion zone.  Combustion products
    generators, per se, using solid fuel, having high pressure generator
    structure peculiar to the generation of high pressure fluid for motive
    power, are classified herein.  Combustion chamber structure of general
    utility, and structure for fuel preparation and fuel feeding to a
    conventional combustion chamber not provided for in other fuel preparation
    classes, as Class 241, Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, are
    classified in Class 110, Furnaces.

    (4)     Note.  Combustion product generators in which hazardous or toxic
    waste is used as the fuel to produce useful work.  See Class 588 for the
    processes of destruction or containment of hazardous or toxic waste.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclass for a measuring and
    testing device in which the measuring or testing means uses pressurized
    motive fluid that drives an indicator.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 16 for power tables or
    strands comprising portable power units.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclass for a fluid
    motor or a combination of such motors that has no more than a nominal
    pressure fluid source or nominal exhaust means.  See (4) Note of the class
    definition of Class 91 for the line between Class 60 and Class 91.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclass for an expansible
    chamber device or plural expansible chamber devices.  See (4) Note of the
    class definition of Class 92 for the line between Classes 60 and 92.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, for a liquid heater or vaporizer
    that generates hot fluid.  The minimal inclusion of a motor as the source
    or utilizer of the treated fluid does not prevent classification in Class
    122.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, appropriate subclass, for an internal
    combustion engine, per se.  A combination of internal combustion engines or
    an internal combustion engine with an exhaust treating or handling means is
    in Class 60.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, appropriate subclass for subject matter
    directed to driving or impacting a tool when such subject matter includes
    combined features peculiar to tool driving, but which does not include
    features limiting the subject matter to a specific tool art, such as
    specific shape of the work contacting portion of a tool, related tools, or
    an opposed work support.  A combination of plural motors of the same or
    different types, one of which causes or controls tool advance and the other
    drives or impacts a tool is classified in Class 173.

    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, or Animal Powered, appropriate subclass
    for a spring, weight or animal powered motor and for plural or composite
    motor combinations consisting solely of arrangements of such motors.  See
    the notes in the class definition of Class 185 for a statement of the line
    between Classes 60 and 185.

    237,    Heating Systems, appropriate subclass for a power plant combined
    with a heating system.

    252,    Compositions, appropriate subclasses particularly subclasses 67+
    and 71+ for power transmission compositions. Patents are placed in Class
    252, Compositions, (1) claiming admixtures of ingredients, or claiming an
    old compound, limited to use as a hydraulic or other type power
    transmission fluid, (2) processes of power generation claimed broadly and
    distinguished solely by the composition or compound used, and (3) power
    plant apparatus distinguished by the composition of compound therein, i.e.,
    where characteristics of apparatus structure are not claimed.  The
    preceding are placed in Class 252, Compositions, even though freezing or
    boiling points, temperatures of use, or amount of power transmitted are
    specified.

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants, appropriate subclass for the combination
    of a motor and an electric generator in which is included (1) any detail of
    the generator; (2) any relationship between a generator part and a motor;
    and (3) any control of the motor by part of the electricity produced by the
    generator.  A motor electric generator combination in combination in which
    the electric generator is merely a nominal load driven by the motor is not
    precluded from Class 60.

    303,    Fluid-Pressure and Analogous Brake Systems, appropriate subclass,
    for the distribution of fluid to brake motors.  See the notes to the
    definition of subclass 533 of Class 60 for a detailed statement of the line
    between Classes 60 and 303.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, appropriate subclass for
    an electric motor, per se.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclass for a
    system of electrical supply or control for one or more electrical motors.
    A residual system comprising an electrical and a nonelectrical motor is in
    Class 60.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 187+ for temperature
    measurement in which the expansion or contraction of a sensing material
    drives an indicator.

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, appropriate subclass for (1)
    a rotary kinetic energy motor, per se, or one with a merely nominal load,
    motive fluid supply, or exhaust structure; (2) for a plurality of such
    motors.  See the detailed statement of the line between Classes 60 and 415
    in the class definition of Class 415, particularly the search class notes
    to Class 60 in section IV.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), appropriate subclass for
    a motor comprising an unconfined impeller driven by a flowing working
    fluid, e.g., windmill etc.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclass for an
    expansible chamber fluid motor or a combination of such motors.  See (4)
    Note of the class definition of Class 91, for a statement of the line
    between Classes 60 and 91, the same line being maintained between Classes
    60 and 418.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the use of a hazardous or toxic waste as a fuel for power
    production combined with the destruction of the waste.


CLS 60/39.01
TXT Plants or processes under the class definition having means to generate
    combustion products, either continuously or intermittently, whereby said
    products are usable, at least in part, to perform useful work.

    (1)     Note.  Combustion products generator a device including essentially
    a chamber in which a suitable fuel and an oxidizer are burned or exploded
    to produce hot products of combustion, together with accessory means to mix
    water, fuel and oxidizer, to spray or feed water, fuel, or oxidizer, to
    ignite the fuel charge, to periodically operate the inlet and exhaust
    valves, or other means accessory to such chamber.

    Continuous combustion type this refers to the operation of a combustion
    products generator, without cyclically actuated inlet or outlet valves, in
    which the fuel and oxidizer are supplied to permit combustion to proceed in
    an unbroken or uninterrupted manner to produce a steady stream of
    combustion products.  This type is also known as a "constant pressure" type.

    Intermittent combustion type - this refers to the operation of a combustion
    products generator, usually having inlet or outlet valves, or both, or
    their equivalents, in which a fuel charge is periodically exploded or
    burned to discharge a pulsating stream of combustion products.  This type
    is also known as an "explosion" or "constant volume" type.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass and the indented subclasses include
    subcombinations peculiarly adapted for power production or solely disclosed
    for such purpose, unless classification is provided therefor in some other
    existing class and subclass.

    (3)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for line between Class
    60 and Classes 110 and 431.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272+,   for internal-combustion engines which discharge exhaust gases under
    pressure suitable for use in a motor, in combination with means to act upon
    the exhaust gases, such as means to store or to conduct such gases, or to
    add a fluid thereto, or to burn fuel in said exhaust gases.

    597+,   for plants in which the combustion products are generated by
    burning a fuel in the expansible working chamber of an internal combustion
    engine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclass 202 for means for igniting a
    missile propellant.


CLS 60/39.02
TXT Processes under subclass 39.01 for producing motive fluids composed of
    products of combustion or for operating plants utilizing such motive fluids.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclass 212 for processes wherein
    oil and air are injected into a heated retort.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 372+ for processes of making gaseous
    compositions involving combustion.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 30 for processes of furnace lining formation or repair and see the
    notes thereto.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 2+ for a residual process of combustion or
    burner operation of general application.


CLS 60/39.03
TXT Processes under subclass 39.02 involving the variation of the quantity or
    temperature of the motive fluid composed of products of combustion, or the
    available energy of a plant utilizing such motive fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.2+,  for apparatus involving regulation of power output in a combustion
    products power plant.


CLS 60/39.04
TXT Processes under subclass 39.02 involving the generation of motive fluid
    composed of products of combustion used in, or the use of such motive fluid
    in, plants having multiple expansion motors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.16+, for apparatus involving reexpansion of the combustion products in
    multiple motor plants, and see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 60/39.05
TXT Processes under subclass 39.02 involving the addition of steam and/or water
    to the ingredients utilized to generate the motive fluid, or to the motive
    fluid, prior to its discharge from the motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.53+, for apparatus involving the addition of steam and/or water to the
    motive fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclass 215 for processes wherein
    oil, steam and air are injected into a highly heated retort.


CLS 60/39.06
TXT Processes under subclass 39.02 involving the initiation of the combustion
    of the fuel charge and/or the injection of the fuel within a combustion
    products generator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.14,  for starting devices.

    39.74,  for fuel injection apparatus for combustion products generators.

    39.82,  for ignition devices for combustion products generators.


CLS 60/39.07
TXT Plants under subclass 39.01 in combination with means whereby the device,
    in addition to providing useful power for external use, also serves as a
    source of heat or pressure fluid, such as steam, combustion products, or
    compressed air, for use in another art device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.13,  39.14, 39.15+, and 39.19, for plants in which the supplemental
    pressure fluid, as defined above, is used in another motor.


CLS 60/39.08
TXT Plants under subclass 39.01 in combination with means to supply a lubricant
    to movable parts thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 196 for lubrication means for
    internal-combustion engines.

    184,    Lubrication, appropriate subclass, for lubrication in general.


CLS 60/39.091
TXT With safety device:

    Plants under subclass 39.01 in combination with a safety device in the form
    of means to prevent the creation of dangerous or objectionable operating
    conditions, or to sense and to relieve such conditions.

    (1)     Note.  The conditions referred to do not ordinarily occur during
    normal operation of the power plants.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.03,  for processes of regulation of the rate of power output.

    39.13,  for plants wherein the operation of the generator is stopped and
    started in response to pressure changes in an accumulator receiving
    products of combustion.

    39.2+,  for apparatus for the regulation of the rate of power output.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 198 for safety devices
    designed for use with internal-combustion engines.


CLS 60/39.092
TXT Debris anti-ingestion preventer:

    Plants under subclass 39.091 wherein the safety device comprises structure
    designed to prevent the inflow of foreign material into the air intake or
    other sensitive structure of the power plant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclass 306 for debris anti-ingestion means for
    use on aircraft engine inlets not combined with significant engine
    structure.


CLS 60/39.093
TXT Ice preventer or deicer:

    Plants under subclass 39.091 wherein the safety device comprises structure
    designed to either prevent the formation or eliminate the accumulation of
    frozen water on components of the power plant.


CLS 60/39.094
TXT Fuel flusher or drainer:

    Plants under subclass 39.091 wherein the safety device comprises structure
    designed to either purge a portion of the fuel system of the power plant or
    to remove areas of abnormally accumulated fuel in the power plant.


CLS 60/39.1
TXT Plants under subclass 39.09 in which the safety means senses an excess
    pressure in the system, and relieves such excess pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 455+ for valves which respond to changes
    in line condition.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 89.1-89.4 for frangible or fusible
    diaphragms which burst or melt to relieve excess pressure.


CLS 60/39.11
TXT Plants under subclass 39.09 in which the safety means includes screens or
    equivalent means to prevent the flash-back of the flame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclass 192 for safety devices for
    preventing, localizing and confining explosions in a gas distributing
    system.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 434 for safety devices used
    in connection with charge-forming devices of internal-combustion engines.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 88.1+ for flame guards for receptacles.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 189.01 for flame guards for dispensers.


CLS 60/39.12
TXT Plants under subclass 39.01 in combination with means, distinct from and
    independent of the combustion products generator, to generate a combustible
    gas that is delivered to the combustion products generator to be burned.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.69,  for combinations wherein the generator of the combustible gas is
    not distinct from the combustion products generator, but functions merely
    as a pre-combustion chamber.

    39.71,  for means to vaporize a liquid fuel by heat incidental to the
    operation of the combustion products generator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, appropriate subclasses for
    combustible gas generators, per se.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 3 for combinations of an
    internal-combustion engine and a combustible gas generator.


CLS 60/39.13
TXT Plants under subclass 39.01 including means to start and stop the operation
    of the combustion products generator in response to pressure change in a
    storage vessel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.141, for starting devices.

    39.24+, for plants in which the operation of the combustion products
    generator is varied, but not stopped, in response to pressure fluctuations
    in the combustion products accumulator.

    281,    for combinations of internal-combustion engines and exhaust gas
    accumulators.


CLS 60/39.141
TXT With starting device:

    Plants under subclass 39.01 in combination with means to initially place
    the plant in operation, or to condition the plant or to modify the normal
    operating cycle, in order to facilitate the initial operation thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.13,  for plants which automatically start and stop the operation of a
    combustion products generator in response to the pressure in an accumulator
    for combustion products.

    39.33,  for means to convert the cycle of operation from one type to
    another, or to operate on different fluids, selectively, for normal power
    delivery.

    39.821+, for ignition devices which may or may not be used only during
    starting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 179.1+ for starting devices
    for internal-combustion engines.


CLS 60/39.142
TXT Separate starting device or motive fluid source:

    Plants under subclass 39.141 having either (1) a motor distinct from a
    plant wherein the motor is used to place the plant in operation, or (2) a
    separate source of working fluid distinct from a main source of working
    fluid normally used to drive the plant wherein this separate source of
    fluid is used to place the plant in operation.


CLS 60/39.15
TXT Plants under subclass 39.01 having a plurality of distinct motors, at least
    two of which are operated by a fluid under pressure.

    (1)     Note.  Distinct motors include (1) two or more turbine rotors on a
    common shaft receiving combustion products, in parallel, from a common
    combustion products generator, or each rotor being supplied by a separate
    combustion products generator; (2) two or more expansible chamber cylinders
    supplied, in parallel, from a common combustion products generator where
    the cylinders are more than mere duplicates of each other; (3) a plurality
    of motors, on separate shafts, which may or may not deliver power to a
    common output shaft; (4) a plurality of turbine stages in a common housing,
    or in separate housings, wherein the combustion products pass through the
    stages in series, involving some treatment of the combustion products
    between stages; and (5) two or more turbines with means whereby the
    turbines are selectively operable to rotate power output shaft in either
    direction.  The means whereby the turbines are selectively operable may
    include one or more clutches or equivalent means to connect the turbines to
    the power output shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.141, for starting motors used with plants operated by products of
    combustion.

    39.22,  for plants in which an auxiliary motor controls the cycle frequency
    of an intermittent combustion type of combustion products generator.

    698+,   for motors having several modes of operation, each classifiable in
    different motor classes, or for multiple motors of the same class other
    than combustion products types.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, appropriate subclasses for
    plural or multiple-stage gas turbines, per se, that does not involve
    combustion products generation means.


CLS 60/39.161
TXT Re-expansion:

    Plants under subclass 39.15 in which the motive fluid passes through two or
    more motors in series.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 8 and 152 for multiple
    expansion type expansible chamber motors.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 5 for multistage rotary
    expansible chamber device.


CLS 60/39.162
TXT Counter-rotatable:

    Plants under subclass 39.161 in which two motors rotate in different
    directions.


CLS 60/39.163
TXT Selectively connectable:

    Plants under subclass 39.161 having at least two motors which may be
    selectively interconnected to provide a common power output.


CLS 60/39.17
TXT Plants under subclass 39.16 including means to treat the combustion
    products between successive stages of expansion, as, for example, by
    heating, cooling, or by the addition of fuel air, water, steam or more
    combustion products.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    643+    and 662, for multiple stage motor plants using mixed fluids other
    than products of combustion, having means for admitting fluid between
    expansion stages from some source other than the next preceding stage while
    fluid is being admitted from the preceding stage.

    648,    677, 679, and 684, for multiple stage motors using motive fluid
    other than products of combustion, including means affecting the motive
    fluid between stages, as, for example, (1) tapping fluid for external use,
    (2) reheating, or (3) separation of condensate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 8+ for multiple
    expansion type expansible chamber motors having means for permitting a
    subsequent pressure stage to receive motive fluid other than that
    discharged from the immediately prior stage, said prior stage also
    receiving motive fluid and at least ultimately discharging it into said
    subsequent stage.


CLS 60/39.181
TXT Different fluids:

    Plants under subclass 39.15 in which unlike motive fluids are utilized in
    the several motors, at least one of such motive fluids being composed of
    combustion products.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.14,  for starting motors using a motive fluid other than combustion
    products.


CLS 60/39.182
TXT Steam and combustion products:

    Plants under subclass 39.181 having at least one motor operating on steam
    and one motor operating on combustion products.


CLS 60/39.183
TXT Air and combustion products:

    Plants under subclass 39.181 having at least one motor operating on air and
    one motor operating on combustion products.


CLS 60/39.19
TXT Plants under subclass 39.01 having a single motor in which two or more
    unlike motive fluids are simultaneously employed without being mixed in the
    motor, at least one of the motive fluids being composed of combustion
    products.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    486     and 674, for power plants simultaneously using two or more
    different motive fluids in a single motor, the motive fluids being other
    than combustion products.


CLS 60/39.2
TXT Plants under subclass 39.01 in combination with means to vary the rate of
    power output, as by varying the speed of the power output motor, or by
    controlling the temperature and/or quantity of the motive fluid, or by
    varying the duration of the events, during each cycle, of an intermittent
    combustion type generator.

    (1)     Note.  In order to be classified in this subclass the patent should
    claim the control means more specifically than merely as a "valve", "valved
    pipe", "controlling means", "throttle valve", or similar broad terms.  This
    exclusion note applies only to this subclass, and not to the indented
    subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.03,  for processes of regulation of power output.

    39.13,  for regulation involving the starting and stopping of the
    combustion products generator in response to pressure changes in a storage
    vessel receiving such products.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 101+ for devices for feeding solid fuel to
    furnaces.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 319+ for speed regulators
    for internal-combustion engines.


CLS 60/39.21
TXT Combinations under subclass 39.2 in which the quantity of the motive fluid
    is regulated by varying the number of combustion products generators in
    operation, viz., by cutting in and out one or more, but not all, of a
    plurality of combustion products generators.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.09,  for combinations in which the operation of all combustion products
    generators is discontinued upon the creation of, or to prevent the creation
    of, dangerous operating conditions.

    39.14,  for starting arrangements of plants having a number of combustion
    products generators, wherein a fewer number than all of the generators are
    placed in operation during the starting cycle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 52 for systems for disabling
    some of the cylinders of an internal-combustion engine in order to vary the
    power output.


CLS 60/39.22
TXT Combinations under subclass 39.2 in which the quantity of the motive fluid
    is regulated by varying the cycle frequency of operation of an intermittent
    combustion type generator relative to the speed of the prime mover, i.e.,
    the power output motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.13,  for an independent motor for feeding a combustion products
    generator, the motor being started and stopped in response to the pressure
    in an accumulator receiving the combustion products.


CLS 60/39.23
TXT With variable oxidizer control:

    Plants under subclass 39.01 having means to vary the rate of flow of
    oxidizer to the combustor, either for regulating the combustion process or
    for regulation of the engine power output.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.29,  for automatic or condition responsive control of oxidizer.


CLS 60/39.24
TXT Combinations under subclass 39.2 including means to sense a change in
    condition of power plant operation, wherein the means to vary the rate of
    power output is under the control of such sensing means.

    (1)     Note.  Control means responsive to (1) pressure and/or temperature
    of air or combustion products at any point between entrance into the
    compressor and discharge from the power plant; or (2) rate of flow or
    quantity of (a) air passing through the compressor to the combustion
    products generator or (b) products of combustion has been regarded as
    responsive to a change in condition of power plant operation.

    The following has not been deemed significant power plant structure;
    control means responsive to (1) power plant speed; (2) carburetor or
    compressor inlet pressure; (3) air inlet temperature to carburetor or
    compressor; (4) pump speed; (5) fuel inlet or discharge pressure, velocity
    or volume; (6) altitude.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.09,  for combinations of power plants with means to discontinue the
    supply of oxidizer, fuel, water, or motive fluid in response to some
    undesired or dangerous condition of operation.

    233+,   for a means controlling the thrust of a thrust producing device
    responsive to a motor condition such as speed, thrust, acceleration, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 16+ for a residual prime mover control
    system.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 14 and
    15, for automatic furnace control.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 18+ for a residual automatically controlled
    device specialized to combustion and disclosed for use for purposes other
    than for external power.

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclasses 99 and 100 for indication or control of power plants,
    particularly gas turbine compressors.


CLS 60/39.25
TXT Combinations under subclass 39.24 wherein the means to vary the rate of
    power output regulates the rate of flow of motive fluid to the prime mover,
    i.e., external power output motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.15+, for plants having a plurality of distinct motors wherein means are
    provided to vary the rate of flow of motive fluid to one or more motors.


CLS 60/39.26
TXT Combinations under subclass 39.24 wherein the means to vary the rate of
    power output regulates the quantity of oxidizer, fuel and water or steam,
    comprising the ingredients to produce the motive fluid.


CLS 60/39.27
TXT Combinations under subclass 39.24 wherein the means to vary the rate of
    power output regulates the quantity of oxidizer and fuel, separately or as
    a fuel-oxidizer mixture, comprising the ingredients to produce the motive
    fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 319+ for speed regulators
    for internal combustion engines.


CLS 60/39.281
TXT Fuel:

    Combinations under subclass 39.24 wherein the means to vary the rate of
    power output regulates the quantity of fuel comprising an ingredient to
    produce the motive fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 350+ and 378+ for
    regulation of fuel to internal combustion engines.


CLS 60/39.282
TXT Torque sensor:

    Combinations under subclass 39.281 wherein the means to sense a change in
    condition of power plant operation is specially designed to sense the
    turning moment or turning force of a component of the power plant.


CLS 60/39.29
TXT Combinations under subclass 39.24 wherein the means to vary the rate of
    power output regulates the quantity of oxidizer comprising an ingredient to
    produce the motive fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.23,  for means to vary the oxidizer flow without a condition responsive
    control thereof.


CLS 60/39.3
TXT Combinations under subclass 39.24 wherein the means to vary the rate of
    power output regulates the quantity of water or steam comprising an
    ingredient to produce the motive fluid.


CLS 60/39.31
TXT Devices under subclass 39.01 wherein means are provided for fixing or
    holding said device relative to some frame of reference.

    (1)     Note.  Means for securing parts or elements of the device to each
    other are not considered supporting or mounting means for classification in
    this subclass.  A bed plate, per se, is not considered to be a support
    under this definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 16 for power tables or
    stands comprising portable power units.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 54 for the support in combination with the
    structure of the airplane.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 637+ for machinery supports.

    440,    Marine Propulsion, subclasses 53+ for the support in combination
    with the structure of the boat as such or the propelling means.


CLS 60/39.32
TXT Devices under subclass 39.01 wherein means are provided to permit relative
    movement between parts to compensate for expansion and contraction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclass 187 for a coupling with means to
    compensate for expansion and contraction, and subclasses 223+, 261+, 266+,
    and 302 for pipe joints or couplings which permit relative movement.  See
    the Search Notes thereunder.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 34+ for two members connected by
    a flexible diaphragm or bellows, subclasses 52+ for articulated members and
    subclass 220 for two members connected by flexible means.


CLS 60/39.33
TXT Plants under subclass 39.01 including means whereby the plant may be
    selectively or automatically modified to operate on a different motive
    fluid or different cycle, or the function of the motor may be changed.
    Also, plants under subclass 39.01 in combination with features other than
    combustion products generators and motors, and not provided for in the
    preceding subclasses.

    (1)     Note.  Combustion products generators and motors include means to
    supply fuel, steam and/or water, compressors, accumulators, cooling
    structure, and exhaust treatment devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.14,  for plants operated by combustion products wherein the operation is
    changed for starting.

    39.64,  for plants operated by combustion products wherein the operation is
    automatically converted in a definite periodic cycle.

    424,    for plants using a motive fluid other than products of combustion
    having means for changing from series flow to parallel flow, or vice versa,
    in a multiple stage motor.

    596     and 625+, for plants which are convertible from internal-combustion
    to fluid pressure motor operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 11 for motors of the
    expansible chamber type connected for series flow of motive fluid, with
    means whereby the motors may be converted to operate with parallel flow of
    motive fluid.


CLS 60/39.34
TXT Plants under subclass 39.01 including one or more rotating combustion
    products generators and a turbine.  The combustion products generator or
    generators may be an integral part of the turbine, or may form a separate
    member rotatable in the same or opposite direction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclasses 20+ for
    combustion products generators    carried by propeller blades, the rotation
    being effected by the discharge of the products of combustion through
    reaction nozzles.


CLS 60/39.35
TXT Plants under subclass 39.34 in which the combustion within the combustion
    products generator or generators proceeds in an uninterrupted or continuous
    manner.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note under subclass 39.01 for definition of
    "continuous combustion type".


CLS 60/39.36
TXT Plants under subclass 39.01 comprising a turbine and a single combustion
    products generator, the axis of the combustion products generator being
    coaxial with the turbine shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.34+, for rotating combustion products generator and turbine, in which
    the generator axis may be coaxial with the turbine shaft.

    200+,   for combinations wherein coaxial combustion products generator and
    turbine deliver exhaust gases to a jet reaction nozzle.


CLS 60/39.37
TXT Plants under subclass 39.01 in which a turbine is fed with combustion
    products from a plurality of combustion products generators lying in a ring
    whose axis is coaxial with the turbine shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35.6,   for combinations wherein plural combustion products generators in a
    ring coaxial with a turbine deliver exhaust gases to a jet reaction nozzle.

    39.34+, for rotating combustion products generators and turbine.


CLS 60/39.38
TXT Plants under subclass 39.37 in which the combustion products generators
    operate in a cyclic manner to intermittently produce and discharge
    combustion products.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note under subclass 39.01 for definitions of
    "intermittent combustion type".


CLS 60/39.39
TXT Plants under subclass 39.38 in which the inlet and/or discharge ports of
    the combustion products generators are opened and closed by a common rotary
    valve member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.38,  for plants in which the turbine or compressor rotor is provided
    with one or more solid portions which cooperate with ports in the
    combustion products generators to perform valving function.


CLS 60/39.4
TXT Plants under subclass 39.38 in which the inlet and/or discharge valves of
    the combustion products generators are actuated by a common cam member.


CLS 60/39.41
TXT Plants under subclass 39.01 including a movable pumping means connected
    with the combustion products generator to withdraw all or a part of the
    combustion products. This pump may deliver the combustion products at an
    increased pressure to a receiver or prime mover, or may serve to scavenge
    the combustion products generator or to draw in a new fuel charge or air.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.56+, for jet pumps for mixing steam and combustion products.

    39.7,   for jet pumps wherein the combustion products from one generator
    scavenge the combustion products from a cooperating generator or draws a
    new fuel charge or air into said cooperating generator.


CLS 60/39.42
TXT Plants under subclass 39.01 having a single turbine rotor with blade
    structure and flow passages whereby the turbine rotor may be selectively
    operable in either direction, usually by providing separate forward and
    reverse blading on the rotor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, appropriate subclasses for
    gas operated reversing turbines, per se.


CLS 60/39.43
TXT Plants under subclass 39.01 wherein the turbine rotor, in addition to its
    usual function as a power producing element, also serves, at the same time,
    to compress an oxidizer, fuel, or a fuel charge, for use in the power cycle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.33,  for turbines which may be selectively or automatically converted to
    operate as compressors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, subclasses 175+ and 177+ for
    turbines carrying fan blades for the circulation of a cooling medium.


CLS 60/39.44
TXT Plants under subclass 39.01 including a turbine of the so-called "closed
    pocket" type.  The motive fluid, introduced into these pockets, is trapped
    therein, and while so trapped is incapable of exerting any useful energy
    release by expansion, impulse, or reaction.  Turbines of this type are
    considered to be inoperative to produce useful power.

    (1)     Note.  To be classified herein, the patent, in addition to
    disclosing a closed pocket turbine, should claim the turbine more
    specifically than merely as a "turbine" or "rotor", or similar broad
    language.


CLS 60/39.45
TXT Plants under subclass 39.01 including a compressor utilizing interengaging
    impellers, a liquid or gas under pressure which directly contacts a gas to
    be compressed, or a rotating helix or screw, to compress the air, fuel, or
    fuel charge used in the plant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, appropriate subclasses for
    rotary pumps and compressors, per se, and see the search note to Class 60,
    under section III of the Class 415 Class Definition for a statement of the
    line.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 64 for a gas pressure pump using a rotary
    cellular conveyer; and 65+ for pumps of the type having one fluid pumped by
    another.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 166+ for a rotary
    expansible chamber device of the moving cylinder type having intermeshing
    peripheral surfaces and subclasses 191+ for rotary expansible chamber
    devices of the interengaging rotating member type.


CLS 60/39.461
TXT Using special fuel or oxidizer:

    Plants under subclass 39.01 using other oxidizer or fuel than air, oil or
    gasoline, in which parts of the plant are modified to utilize such other
    oxidizer or fuel.

    (1)     Note.  See Search Note (6) in the Class Definition as to line with
    Class 110.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions,  subclasses 300+ for liquid fuels
    for various uses.

    110,    Furnaces, see (1) Note above.


CLS 60/39.462
TXT Monofuel type:

    Plants under subclass 39.461 using a single component fuel which is
    decomposed into its constituents to form a high pressure working fluid.


CLS 60/39.463
TXT Plural distinct fuels:

    Plants under subclass 39.461 which use two or more different fuels.


CLS 60/39.464
TXT Solid, slurry, emulsive or suspensive type fuel:

    Plants under subclass 39.461 which use a fuel that is either:  (a) a
    substance or material having a definite volume and shape, i.e., a solid;
    (b) a relatively dense mixture of a particulate solid and liquid, i.e., a
    slurry; (c) a mixture of liquids in which the liquids are indissolvable in
    each other, i.e., an emulsion; or (d) a mixture of a particulate solid
    dispersed in a liquid and in which the solid is indissolvable in the
    liquid, i.e., suspension.


CLS 60/39.465
TXT Gaseous fuel at standard temperature and pressure:

    Plants under 39.461 which use a fuel that is a gas at standard temperature
    and pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.12,  for plants which include means to generate a gaseous fuel.


CLS 60/39.47
TXT Plants under subclass 39.46 in which the motive fluids or products of
    combustion are produced by the combustion of a solid fuel which carries
    sufficient oxidizer incorporated therein to provide at least the major
    portion necessary to burn the fuel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    632,    for one shot explosion actuated expansible chamber type motors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 530+ for pressure gas
    generating cartridges.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, appropriate
    subclasses for thermic or explosive compositions, per se.


CLS 60/39.48
TXT Plants under subclass 39.01 including means to apply fluid pressure against
    oxidizer, fuel, or water, in a receiver, either directly or through a
    separating member, to forcibly feed a combustion products generator.

    (1)     Note.  By "separating member" is meant a flexible diaphragm or
    piston follower which functions to transmit the pressure of a fluid to the
    oxidizer, fuel or water.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 394+ for fluid pressure discharge in
    dispensing devices.


CLS 60/39.49
TXT Plants under subclass 39.01 in which air is delivered to the combustion
    products generator through a jet type pump, the motivating fluid for the
    jet type pump being fuel or steam vaporized by the heat in the system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.12,  for plants in which air is fed into the system by combustible gas
    generated in a combustible gas generator distinct from and independent of
    the combustion products generator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 398+ for a discharge distributor including means to
    mix a plurality of fluids, even though the distributor is disclosed as
    burner.

    417,    Pumps, subclass 158 for jet pumps in combination with means to
    generate motive fluid therefor, the motive fluid generator, in many cases,
    comprising means to vaporize a liquid.


CLS 60/39.50
TXT Plants under subclass 39.01 including means to act upon or re-use the
    motive fluid after its discharge from the power elements, as, for example,
    by cooling, compressing, mixing with another fluid, or recirculating it in
    the power cycle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272,    for exhaust treating devices in combination with
    internal-combustion engines.

    654,    672, 681, 683, and 685+, for exhaust treatment of steam driven
    motors.


CLS 60/39.511
TXT Regenerator:

    Plants under subclass 39.5 in which means are provided to transfer heat
    from the exhausted motive fluid to the air prior to the delivery thereof to
    the combustion products generator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     for air cooling of the exhaust from a steam driven motor.

    320+,   for air cooling of the exhaust gases from an internal-combustion
    engine.


CLS 60/39.512
TXT Rotary heat exchanger:

    Plants under subclass 39.511 including rotable heat exchange structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 8 for rotary heat exchangers in general.


CLS 60/39.52
TXT Plants under subclass 39.5 in which some or all of the exhaust gases are
    returned to the circuit to form a portion of the motive fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39      and 40, for combinations in which a portion of the exhaust is
    mingled with live motive fluid between the generator and motor, no
    combustion products fluid being involved.

    39.43,  in which a portion of the combustion products or exhaust gases is
    recycled incidental to the dual function of the turbine.

    654,    672, 681, 683, and 691, for combinations of a motor with means for
    returning the exhausted motive fluid, without dissipation of the heat
    content remaining therein, to the place where energy was originally
    imparted thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 568+ for devices to mix a
    portion of the exhaust gases with the fuel charge.


CLS 60/39.53
TXT Plants under subclass 39.01 including means to add water and/or steam to
    the motive fluid before its discharge from the prime mover, or to the
    oxidizer or fuel delivered to the combustion products generator, which fuel
    and oxidizer are burned to form the motive fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.04,  for processes involving the addition of water and/or steam to the
    fuel or oxidizer, or to the combustion products prior to the discharge from
    the motor.

    39.3,   for plants including means to automatically regulate the water
    and/or steam.


CLS 60/39.54
TXT Plants under subclass 39.53 in which the steam and/or water is added to the
    motive fluid within the working space of the turbine or expansible chamber
    motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.17,  for multiple expansion motors in which steam and/or water is added
    to the products of combustion between successive expansion stages.

    39.58,  for plants in which the steam and/or water is added in the turbine
    nozzle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 25 for internal-combustion
    engines with means to supply water or steam to the working cylinder to mix
    with the products of combustion therein.


CLS 60/39.55
TXT Plants under subclass 39.53 in which the steam and/or the water is added to
    the products of combustion within the combustion chamber of the combustion
    products generator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.49,  for injectors utilizing steam to feed air into a combustion
    products generator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 199+, 296 and 297+ for feeding steam and/or
    water to furnaces.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses
    for a fluid discharge distributor system even though disclosed as a burner,
    especially subclasses 128+ for means to heat the fluid or the system, and
    subclasses 398+ for means to mix a plurality of fluids prior to, at or
    subsequent to discharge.

    431,    Combustion, appropriate subclasses for combustion apparatus not
    disclosed solely for utilization in a prime mover in which water or water
    vapor is fed to interact with fuel and oxidizer.


CLS 60/39.56
TXT Plants under subclass 39.53 in which the union of steam and/or water with
    products of combustion takes place in a zone above a standing body of
    water, the water being heated by the products of combustion.


CLS 60/39.57
TXT Plants under subclass 39.56 in which the products of combustion are
    discharged below the surface of the water in order that they may bubble
    through the water to the mixing zone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 360, 367 and 368, for water heaters
    employing submerged heating means or stoves.


CLS 60/39.58
TXT Plants under subclass 39.53 in which the steam and/or water is united with
    the products of combustion in a mixing nozzle between the combustion
    products generator and motor or place of utilization, or is united in a
    turbine nozzle.


CLS 60/39.59
TXT Plants under subclass 39.53 in which the combustion products and steam
    and/or water are united in a receiver distinct from the boiler or
    combustion chamber of the combustion products generator.

    (1)     Note.  The "boiler", as used above, refers to a receiver for a
    standing body of water in which the steam is generated, and having a space
    above the water for the collection of the steam.


CLS 60/39.6
TXT Plants under subclass 39.01 including a prime mover comprising a motor of
    the expansible chamber type, the motor being in communication with an
    external-combustion products generator by means of a periodically opened
    transfer valve or equivalent means, to admit products of combustion into
    the working space on the power stroke of the motor piston.  In an
    intermittently fired combustion products generator, ignition must be
    initiated prior to the opening of the transfer valve or equivalent means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    632+,   for one shot explosion actuated expansible chamber type motors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, appropriate subclasses, for prime
    movers of the expansible chamber type having a combustion chamber separated
    from the working space by a periodically opened transfer valve or
    equivalent means, the transfer valve or equivalent means being open at the
    instant of ignition.  Note subclasses 253+.


CLS 60/39.62
TXT Plants under subclass 39.6 in which a power cylinder receives combustion
    products alternately from two or more consecutively fired intermittent type
    combustion products generators.


CLS 60/39.63
TXT Plants under subclass 39.6 in which the combustion within the combustion
    products generator proceeds in an uninterrupted or continuous manner.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note under subclass 39.01 as to definition of
    "continuous combustion type".


CLS 60/39.64
TXT Plants under subclass 39.01 in which an intermittently actuated motive
    fluid generator discharges combustion products, and alternately therewith,
    in a regular cyclic manner, also discharges distinct volumes of a different
    motive fluid, such as heated air or steam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.18+, for internal-combustion engines having separate fluid pressure
    expansion strokes.

    39.33,  for plants in which the discharge of combustion products and a
    different motive fluid is selective.


CLS 60/39.75
TXT Devices under subclass 722, comprising a generator of combustion products
    and a turbine receiving and driven by such products.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.34+, for rotating combustion products generator and turbine.

    39.36,  for coaxial combustion products generator and turbine.

    39.37+, for plural combustion products generators arranged in a ring
    coaxial with turbine.

    39.42,  for combustion products generator with reversible turbine.

    39.43,  for combustion products generator with dual function turbine.

    39.44,  for combustion products generator with closed pocket turbine.

    39.73,  for combustion products generator located in turbine nozzle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, appropriate subclasses, for
    gas operated turbines, per se.


CLS 60/39.76
TXT Combustion devices under subclass 722, having valves or equivalent means
    operating in a cyclic manner to intermittently produce and discharge
    combustion products.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note under subclass 39.01 for definition of
    "intermittent combustion type."

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.38+, for plants including a plurality of intermittent combustion type
    generators arranged in a ring coaxial with a turbine shaft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 657 for combustion chambers
    for internal-combustion engines.


CLS 60/39.77
TXT Combustion devices under subclass 39.76 in which a resonating or pulsating
    condition within the combustion products generator, due to the cyclic
    combustion of a fuel charge, is utilized to effect the exhaust of the
    products of combustion and the suction and compression of air or a fuel
    charge.


CLS 60/39.78
TXT Combustion devices under subclass 39.76 in which rotating, revolving,
    reciprocating, or oscillating combustion device cooperates with ports in a
    stationary or relatively movable valve member to control the cyclic events
    of the intermittent combustion cycle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.34+, for rotating combustion products generator and turbine.


CLS 60/39.79
TXT Combustion devices under subclass 39.76 in which the combustion air, fuel
    charge, fuel feeding or exhaust valve is cyclically actuated by a fluid
    under pressure the application of such fluid under pressure being
    periodically controlled by a valve or similar means.


CLS 60/39.80
TXT Combustion devices under subclass 39.76 in which the combustion air or fuel
    charge inlet valve, or the combustion products outlet valve, is cyclically
    actuated by the pressure at which the air, fuel charge or combustion
    products are delivered to or discharged from the combustion products
    generator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.7,   for combustion products generators in which the valves in one
    generator are operated by pressure fluctuations in another generator.

    39.77,  for pressure actuated valves in resonating combustion products
    generators.


CLS 60/39.81
TXT Combustion devices under subclass 39.76 in which the fuel or fuel charge
    inlet valve is provided with means to cyclically feed a measured supply of
    fuel or fuel charge into the combustion device when actuated.


CLS 60/39.821
TXT With ignition device:

    Combustion devices under subclass 39.69 in combination with an ignition
    device in the form of means to provide a source of heat to initiate
    combustion of a fuel charge or to maintain combustion within a combustion
    products generator.

    SEARCH THIS SUBCLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.06,  for processes of ignition. 39.14, for igniters combined with
    starting devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 143+ for igniters for
    internal-combustion engines.

    431,    Combustion, appropriate subclass for a residual fuel burner having
    an ignition means.


CLS 60/39.822
TXT Catalytic type:

    Combustion devices under 39.821 wherein the ignition device comprises
    structure in the form of a substance that increases the rate of chemical
    reaction of reactants brought into physical contact with the structure.


CLS 60/39.823
TXT Pyrotechnic squib or charge type:
    Combustion devices under subclass 39.821 wherein the ignition device
    comprises structure composed of explosive-type materials but which has been
    modified or designed to burn rather than to explode.

    (1)     Note.  The devices of this subclass are very similar to common
    fireworks and in particular firecrackers which have been ruptured or
    otherwise modified to cause the device to burn rather than to explode as in
    normal operation.


CLS 60/39.824
TXT Hypergolic type:

    Combustion devices under subclass 39.821 wherein the ignition device
    comprises structure designed to bring into contact fuel components which
    ignite spontaneously upon contact with each other.


CLS 60/39.825
TXT Single shot liquid type:

    Combustion devices under subclass 39.821 wherein the ignition device
    comprises structure specially designed to deliver a discrete quantity of
    liquid fuel in to a combustion chamber during a specified time period.


CLS 60/39.826
TXT Pilot or torch type:

    Combustion devices under subclass 39.821 wherein the ignition device
    comprises a small jet designed to continously supply gaseous fuel which
    either remains constantly burning or is otherwise ignited when desired.


CLS 60/39.827
TXT Spark type:

    Combustion devices under subclass 39.821 wherein the ignition device
    comprises structure designed to produce an electrical discharge through
    normally insulative material, e.g., through air or similar atmospheric
    substances.


CLS 60/39.828
TXT Incandescent type:

    Combustion devices under subclass 39.821 wherein the ignition device
    comprises structure which either, (a) is capable of being made incandescent
    prior to and to produce initial combustion operation of the combustion
    device, or (b) is capable of being raised to and maintained for a sustained
    period of time in an incandescent state wherein the ignition device is
    raised to this state during an uninterrupted period of combustion of the
    combustion device.

    (1)     Note.  A typical example of the type of ignition device provided
    for in (a) above would be an electrical filament through which an
    electrical current is passed causing the filament to become heated and
    incandescent.  Similarly, a typical example of the type of ignition device
    provided for in (b) above would be a ceramic structure which upon being
    heated by combustion heat retains this heat for a very long time and
    therefore can be used to re-ignite a combustion device in which combustion
    has ceased.


CLS 60/39.83
TXT Cooling of auxiliary components:

    Plants under subclass 39.01 having means to cool engine components other
    than those specifically provided for in preceding subclasses.

    (1)     Note.  Patents classified herein include cooling of the engine
    casing, auxiliaries (e.g., starter motor, fuel pump, generator), and
    bearings not specifically disclosed or claimed as integral components of
    the compressor or turbine element.

    (2)     Note.  An engine shaft is considered an element of either the
    compressor or motor, and coiling therefor is classified under the
    appropriate compressor or motor classification. However, cooling of a shaft
    bearing would be included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.5,   for cooling of the exhaust structure.

    39.75,  for cooling of the turbine and associated shaft.

    39.82,  for cooling of the igniter.

    726+,   for cooling of the oxidizer compressor and associated shaft.

    740+,   for cooling of the fuel injector.

    752+,   for cooling of the combustor liner.


CLS 60/200.1
TXT REACTION MOTOR (E.G., MOTIVE FLUID GENERATOR AND REACTION NOZZLE, ETC.):

    Apparatus or process under the class definition for producing a useful
    thrust in one direction by the expulsion of a motive fluid therefrom in a
    opposite direction comprising a means for or step of producing said motive
    fluid and a means for or step of ejecting said motive fluid.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note in subclass 205 for a glossary of terms used in
    the titles and definitions of subclass 200.1 and indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  This definition includes electronic propulsion devices
    commonly known as "ion motors" wherein a thrust is obtained in one
    direction by the ejection in the opposite direction of ions accelerated
    electronically or by other means and expelled into the ambient.

    (3)     Note.  The "means for or step of producing said motive fluid" in
    the definition may be, for example, any means for imparting energy to the
    motive fluid such as a heating means, an ion accelerating means, a
    combustion chamber, a source of such motive fluid such as a tank or merely
    a pump, and the "means for ejecting said motive fluid" may be merely a
    pipe, though it is usually a nozzle.

    (4)     Note.  Apparatus under this definition is usually used to cause
    motion of a vehicle to which it is attached but it may be used to cause
    merely a thrust without producing movement.  Many apparatuses inherently
    cause a thrust while accomplishing some other function and comprise a
    pressure fluid producing means and a fluid ejecting means.  Such
    apparatuses are not classified under this definition but in appropriate
    other classes based on the disclosed function, e.g., Class 239, Fluid
    Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, would be the locus for a system
    comprising a pump connected to a nozzle used primarily to spray water and
    not to produce a thrust.  On the other hand, a device comprising merely a
    pump and an output pipe which would normally be classified in Class 417,
    Pumps, or Class 418, Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, is classifiable
    under this definition if the disclosure is limited  to the use of a device
    as a reaction motor, e.g., to drive a boat.  An exception to the above
    described use classification is made in the case of those power plants
    classifiable in Class 60, subclasses 39.01.  Even if the sole disclosure of
    such a power plant is to produce a thrust it is not classifiable under this
    definition unless the nozzle is specifically described in the claim.

    (5)     Note.  This class provides for the combination of a reaction
    propulsion device and a vehicular device wherein no more structure of the
    vehicular device is claimed than is necessary to mount the propulsion
    device.  Any additional significantly claimed vehicle structure will
    require classification in the proper vehicle class.



    (A)     In the following instances, the structure of the vehicle was
    considered not to be significantly claimed:

    (a)     The ve hicle is included in the combination by name only (e.g., the
    vehicle is not modified, other than that required to accomodate the
    reaction motor, or identified as to any designation of the general class to
    which the vehicle belongs.

    (b)     The location of the reaction motor or any part thereof, on the
    vehicle is defined merely by stating a relationship between the vehicle, as
    a unit, and the reaction motor (e.g., the motor is located at the front,
    rear, right, left, top, bottom, within or outside the vehicle, bow, stern,
    at the water line, center of gravity, or center line.



    (B)     In the following instances, the structure of the vehicle was
    considered to be significantly claimed:

    (a)     The location of the reactionmotor or motors or any part or parts
    thereof on the vehicle is defined by stating a plurality of relationships,
    anyone of which alone would be considered insignificant (e.g., one reaction
    motor on each side, or a reaction motor mounted within  the vehicle
    rearwardly of the center of gravity).

    (b)     The location of the reaction motor or any part thereof, on the
    vehicle is defined by stating a relationship between a specific part of the
    vehicle and the motor (e.g., motor located on the wing, keel or rudder of a
    ship).

    (c)     The structure of the vehicle is modified to an extent greater than
    that required to position or support the reaction motor or its parts (e.g.,
    claiming the shape of the hull of a ship).

    (d)     The vehicle is provided with means for guiding, deflecting, or
    reacting with the propulsion fluid subsequent to its discharge from the
    nozzle of the reaction motor (e.g., the motor is located in an open channel
    or adjacent a rudder of a ship).

    (6)     Note.  A component part of an apparatus under this definition
    necessary for its operation often is a motor, which, for example, may drive
    a compressor furnishing air to a combustion products generator which
    supplies motive fluid to a means (nozzle) for ejecting the fluid.  Such
    motor may have a shaft output for an external load and the load on the
    shaft, e.g., a propeller, may even be nominally claimed and the apparatus
    will still be classified under this definition.  However, if an apparatus
    under this definition has combined therewith an added motor used only for
    an external load, the whole apparatus is considered a combined reaction
    motor and other type motor for classification in subclasses 200.1+.

    (7)     Note.  Under this definition the motive fluid generating means, as
    claimed, may itself be a motor having a transmission means and a nominal
    load.

    (8)     Note.  Dual Use Disclosure Patents which claim an apparatus having
    means to pressurize a fluent and a means through which the pressurized
    fluent may be ejected and which disclose a dual use for said apparatus, one
    of the uses being to produce a thrust, (e.g., pump a fluid and produce a
    thrust) are classified as follows:  If the apparatus, in addition to the
    thrust producing use, is disclosed as used as an electrical energy
    discharge device, classification is in Class 60. Otherwise, patents are
    placed in Class 60 only if the sole disclosed use of the apparatus claimed
    is to produce a thrust or wherein combustion products are generated for use
    as motive power. Classification of apparatus, for example, which may be
    used to produce a thrust and also used as a pump is in Classes 415, 416,
    417, or 418, or if also used to produce hot gas by a means which burns a
    fuel in Class 431, or if also used to distribute a hot gas is in Class 239.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.01+, for power plants employing combustion products as the motive fluid
    and disclosed as being used with a reaction nozzle means to produce a
    thrust but not specifically claiming the nozzle means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, appropriate subclasses for a solid
    or liquid fuel composition including petroleum fuels, such as gasoline,
    admixed with other materials.  The lines between Class 44 and this class
    are:



    (1)     A patent containing a fuel composition claim and a claim to broadly
    creating propulsion by burning the fuel is classified in Class 44 and
    cross-referenced to this class.

    (2)     A patent containing only process claims even if they merely recite
    burning a definite fuel to broadly produce thrust is classified in this
    class.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 116+ for motor and engine testing
    and subclass 147 for wind tunnel; aerodynamic wing and propeller study.

    86,     Ammunition and Explosive-Charge Making, subclasses 1 and 20 for
    apparatuses and processes for filling or loading a casing with propellant.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, for devices disclosed as explodable
    projectiles having an explosive or explosive carrying compartment and
    having a propelling charge.  See in particular subclasses 347+ for
    skyrockets having explosive charges to give visual effects, flight control
    means, ground support illuminating means, etc., subclasses 374+ for
    projectiles having jet reaction propulsion means, subclasses 334 and 366+
    for shells adapted to emit an incendiary or smoky substance during flight,
    subclasses 200+ for fuses, primers and igniting devices, subclass 458 for
    tracer shells and subclasses 283+ for the shape or structure of powder
    grains, sticks or bars of an explosive substance arranged for the purpose
    of modifying the rate or manner of burning or exploding.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 26 for jet propelled rail vehicles.

    110,    Furnaces, for a combustion chamber structure of general utility or
    a method of operating the same with means to burn a solid fuel or solid
    fuel with auxiliary gas or liquid fuel and with or without means to feed
    said fuel to the burner means.  These furnaces may also convert from a
    solid fuel burner to a gas or liquid fuel burner.

    114,    Ships, subclasses 20+ for self-propelled torpedoes, and subclasses
    150+ for ships having steering means involving fluid pressure and jet means.

    137,    Fluid Handling, for fluid distribution systems for control of a
    motor means. Control of a reaction motor disclosed as the type classified
    in Class 60 would be classified in Class 60 if the reaction motor is
    claimed specifically or broadly.  To claim, for example, merely a housing
    or chamber for a reaction motor would not preclude classification from
    Class 137. However, patents claiming specific motor structure and fuel
    control means for said motor, structural means interconnecting a motor and
    fuel control means, or a fuel control means broadly or specifically
    responsive to a motor condition are classified in Class 60.  See subclasses
    15.1+ for jet engine intake means, per se, having means to handle fluid
    therein.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, for tubular members of definite or
    indefinite length and especially subclasses 40+ for pipes having variable
    or nonvariable means (e.g., reaction motor diffusors) to restrict the flow
    of fluid therethrough, subclasses 89+ for a pipe with a closure and
    subclasses 111+ for plural ducting in a single pipe.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, appropriate
    subclasses for propellant compositions containing a fuel and an oxidizer.
    The lines between Class 149 and this class are:



    (1)     A patent containing a propellant composition claim and a claim
    broadly creating propulsion by burning the propellant is classified in
    Class 149 and cross-referenced to this class.

    (2)     A patent containing only process claims even if they merely recite
    burning a definite propellant to broadly produce thrust are classified in
    this class.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 51+ for heat exchangers associated with
    an engine.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 11+ and in particular
    subclass 14 for devices for boring earth in situ employing a combustion
    product generator and a nozzle means to accelerate said products.  Also see
    Note V of the class definition of Class 175 particularly as it refers to
    Class 125, Stone Working.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 7 for a motor vehicle having a special
    device (e.g., a reaction motor for propelling it; and subclasses 116+ for a
    motor vehicle having means for maintaining a working fluid mass between a
    surface of the vehicle and a reaction supporting surface.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 581+ for a high-pressure-gas tank, subclass
    13 for receptacles having water jackets and subclasses 265+ for containers
    having frangible type closures.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 251+ for means to dispense material with
    discharge assistant means (e.g., impeller, pump, etc.)

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, for means to cause engagement
    between an elongated member and another member.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclass for
    a terminal flow modifying means, e.g., nozzle for a fluid, especially
    subclasses 127.1+ and 265.11+ for a reaction motor discharge nozzle, per
    se, or such nozzle claimed in combination with a mere combustion chamber or
    other means imparting energy to a fluid in the absence of specific details
    of the energy imparting means or a specific relationship between the means
    and the terminal means.  Devices claiming specific means by which
    combustion products are produced in a combustion chamber to be used solely
    in a motor or thrust device (e.g., fuel injector, solid fuel and, etc.), or
    specific means by which a pressure is maintained on a stored fluid (e.g.,
    contractible chamber) together with a nozzle for the production of a thrust
    are, however, classified in Class 60. Condition responsive means
    controlling flow through a nozzle is classified in Class 239 regardless of
    the parameter sensed.

    244,    Aeronautics, for machines adapted to be sustained by air or
    propelled through air, and devices such as air foils which react with the
    atmosphere for controlling or sustaining flight. See in particular subclass
    1 for space craft, subclasses 3.1+ for an aerial missile (including a
    projectile) with means to stabilize or affect the trajectory or course of
    the missile, subclasses 7, 12.1+, 14, 15, and 23 for aircraft using jet
    reaction devices principally to assist in vertical lift, subclass 52 for
    aircraft having jet reaction devices for steering and propulsion,
    subclasses 73 and 74 for aircraft having jet reaction propulsion means,
    subclass 78 for aircraft controlled by jet reaction devices, and subclass
    113 for aircraft provided with jet reaction means to retard motion.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 637+ for machinery supports.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses, for the
    oxidizer and fuel mixing subcombinations of reaction motors.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclass 14 for
    processes involving the use of a fluid unconfined jet stream to comminute
    hard material (e.g., rock) in situ.

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, subclasses 80+ for a motor
    runner having a reaction type jet discharge for causing rotation about an
    axis.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), for vehicular propulsion
    devices having significantly claimed propeller structure and broadly
    recited reaction nozzle means distinct from the propeller for the
    production of a reaction thrust.  On the other hand, the combination of a
    nominally claimed propeller and a reaction motor is classifiable under this
    definition. When the propeller and a reaction motor are significantly
    claimed and the reaction motor produces a thrust which does not drive the
    propeller, the device is considered a combined type power plant for Class
    60, subclasses 6+  However, where the propeller and jet reaction device
    form a unitary structure or are otherwise structurally related so that
    substantially all of the output of the reaction device directly or
    indirectly rotates the propeller, classification is in Class 416, see in
    particular subclasses 20+.

    417,    Pumps, for pump details, and particularly subclasses 73+ for pumps
    of the type in which fluid is pumped by the combustion of a motivating
    fluid in contact with the pumped fluid, and subclasses 321+ for motor
    driven pumps, including those in which the pump output is disclosed but not
    claimed as being delivered to the drive motor (e.g., supercharger) and
    those wherein the compressor output is claimed as being delivered to the
    motor and is tapped for use externally of the motor-pump combination, and
    also pumps having an output which is disclosed as being discharged for a
    purpose other than that of producing thrust.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, for rotary expansible chamber
    devices, per se.

    431,    Combustion, for combustion products generators not disclosed for
    any particular use or disclosed for use other than for external power
    purposes. A claimed means controlling a Combustion products generator which
    is responsive to a combustion products actuated motor condition such as
    speed, thrust, acceleration, etc., is considered to be tantamount to
    claiming the motor and causes classification in Class 60 rather than in
    Class 431.  See also (8) Note under this subclass concerning dual use
    disclosures.

    440,    Marine Propulsion, subclasses 38+ for a boat or ship propelled or
    steered by a reaction motor.


CLS 60/201
TXT Apparatus or process under subclass 200.1 arranged so as to turn about an
    axis or having any kind of cyclic movement while producing a coaxial thrust
    component when in operation.

    (1)     Note.  The motors included in this subclass are usually intended to
    turn or spin continuously about an axis at constant or variable rates in
    the nature of that necessary to obtain stabilization in flight or for other
    reasons.  Motors having thrust direction modification means which
    momentarily causes the motor to rotate or turn about an axis, but which is
    not intended to impart continuous rotation is found below, for example, in
    subclasses 228+.

    (2)     Note:  Motors in this subclass may be provided with motive fluid
    ejecting means to produce rotation thereof. However, motors having means
    such as an air foil which causes the motor to rotate solely as a result of
    reaction with ambient air are classified elsewhere, as for example in Class
    244, Aeronautics, subclass 3.23.  See also Class 102, subclass 350 for
    pyrotechnic rockets having means to cause rotation of the rocket by gas
    discharge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.01+, especially subclass 39.34 for a power plant in which the motor
    rotates about an axis without producing an axial thrust.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, subclasses 80+ for a motor
    runner having a reaction type jet discharge for causing rotation about an
    axis.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclasses 20+ for an
    impeller driven by a fluid reaction jet on the working member.


CLS 60/202
TXT Apparatus or process under subclass 200.1 in which charged particles are
    ejected by application of an electrical force, e.g., an electromagnetic
    force.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 121.36+ for means for heating a
    workpiece by directing to said workpiece ionized particles which had been
    created by an electrical arc drawn between two electrodes.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 281+ for mass spectroscopy methods and
    apparatus which ionize the particles through an electro-static or magnetic
    field for separation of certain of the particles, subclass 396 for electron
    or ion beam deflection of focussing methods or apparatus and subclasses
    423+ for ion generation methods and apparatus.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 11, for
    dynamo-electric machinery employing a plasma to exert a mechanical force.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 62 for electrical
    space discharge devices provided with magnetic means for confining the path
    of the particles discharged and accelerating said particles; subclasses
    359.1+ for discharge devices provided with means for generating and
    accelerating positive ions; subclasses 153+ particularly subclass 161, for
    space discharge devices having a magnetic field designed to influence a
    space discharge; subclasses 231.01+ for discharge devices having fluent
    material supply or flow directing means.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclasses 111.01+
    for a discharge device having means to supply a fluent material to a
    discharge area between discharge electrodes.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 48 for plasma
    generating means.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 300+ for means by
    which a substance may be ionized and the ionized particles moved through a
    magnetic field for observation so that the substance may be identified.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclasses 100+ for processes and devices that utilize a gaseous or light
    element fuel material, the particles of which are electrically charged or
    excited to the point where they become highly ionized and the forces of
    repulsion of like nuclei are overcome to the end that thermonuclear fusion
    of such like nuclei is obtained or sought to be obtained.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 48+ for electrical (e.g., ionic) or getter type
    pumps.


CLS 60/203.1
TXT Electric, nuclear, or radiated energy fluid heating means:

    Apparatus or process under subclass 200 in which the motive fluid is heated
    directly or indirectly, through a heat transfer medium, by electrical
    energy, by radioactive decay, or by radiated energy (e.g., solar radiated
    energy, radio wave energy, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 628+ and 772 for transferring heat to
    a fluent material by an inductively and capacitive dielectric heated member.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclasses 317+ for propulsion systems or processes powered directly or
    indirectly by induced nuclear reactions.


CLS 60/204
TXT Processes under subclass 200.1.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter under this definition includes methods for
    maintaining reaction motors in operative condition.

    (2)     Note.  Methods of making reaction motors are classifiable in
    appropriate process classes.  A patent having a claim to a reaction motor
    as an apparatus and also a claim to a method of making said motor is
    classifiable as an original in the appropriate subclass for the apparatus
    and cross-referenced to the appropriate process class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 15+ for a
    petroleum fuel, such as gasoline, subclasses 22+ for an asphalt tar, pitch
    or resin mineral oil composition and subclass 39 for making, treating and
    recovery of asphalt, tar, pitch or resin.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, appropriate subclass for a catalyst composition or a process of
    making or regenerating such composition.


CLS 60/205
TXT Processes under subclass 204 directed to producing thrust in a reaction
    motor by ejecting the products of chemical reaction of propellant material.

    (1)     Note.  GLOSSARY OF TERMS: Terms or phases used in titles or
    definitions are set forth below with the meaning each is to have in this
    group of subclasses (205+).

    Bipropellant - A reaction motor propellant consisting of two separate
    substances (usually liquid) fed into the reaction zone separately.  One of
    the substances is a fuel (e.g., hydrazine); while the other is an oxidizer
    (e.g., fluorine).

    Chemical Reaction - The transformation of the molecules of one or more
    substances into other kinds of molecules.

    Fuel - A single substance or a mixture of substances which react with
    another substance (called the oxidizer) to form at least one new substance
    in which at least a portion of the fuel forms at least a portion of the
    more positive (electron donor) portion of the new substance.  e.g.

    H2  +  Cl2 ! 2HCl

    Hydrogen is considered the fuel.

    CH4    2O2 ! CO2  +  2H2O

    Methane is the fuel and oxygen in the oxidizer.

    BE  +  F2 ! BeF2

    Beryllium is the fuel and fluorine in the oxidizer.

    Hypergole - A substance (fuel or oxidizer) which ignites spontaneously on
    contact with the other member of a hypergolic mixture.  For example:
    aniline is hypergolic with nitric acid.

    Injecting - Forcing into the reaction zone one or more streams of material
    which enter into the action which produces thrust.  Extruding a solid or
    semi-solid into the reaction zone, spraying a stream of finely divided
    particles into the reaction zone and jetting a liquid or gas into the
    reaction zone are illustrative but nonlimiting examples of the scope of the
    term.

    Metal - The term includes a free metallic element (e.g., lithium), an alloy
    of two or more metals (e.g., 25% Na 75% K), and intermetallic compound
    (e.g., A1Ni) or a mere mixture of particles of two or more metals.

    Monopropellant - A material which contains within itself all of the
    components which enter into the chemical change which occurs in producing
    thrust in a chemical reaction motor.  A monopropellant may be a pure
    compound, such as hydrazine, or a mixture of two or more substances which
    react under the conditions of the reaction chamber.

    "Motive fluid" as used in this definition is a stream of moving particles,
    either gaseous or liquid, as it exists in the area in the motor where it is
    accelerated, pressurized or otherwise caused to become unstable up to and
    including the point where it exits the end of the ejecting means, e.g.,
    nozzle, through which it is ejected into the ambient to cause thrust.

    Oxidizer - A substance (element or compound) which reacts with another
    substance to produce at least one new substance in which at least a portion
    of the oxidizer furnishes at least part of the more negative (electron
    acceptor) portion of the new substances. e.g.

    BH3  +  NH3 ! BN  +  3H2

    ammonia is considered the oxidizer

    2LiH  +  F2 ! 2LiF  +  2HF

    fluorine is considered the oxidizer

    CH4  +  2O2  !  CO2  +  2H2O

    oxygen is the oxidizer

    "Propellant" is the generic term for any or all of the components of the
    supply of materials which may be converted (by expansion, combustion or
    other means) into motive fluid.

    Reaction Zone - The space in which the propellant material undergoes
    chemical change to produce new substances and heat which heat raises the
    temperature of the new substances.  The ejection of these heated substances
    from the reaction motor produces thrust or propulsive force.

    (2)     Note.  This and indented subclasses take (1) processes involving
    injecting propellant material into the reaction zone in one or more
    streams, reacting the material and expelling the reaction products to
    produce thrust; (2) processes involving reacting propellant material in the
    reaction chamber and expelling the reaction products to produce thrust.

    (3)     Note.  The lines between this and indented subclasses and Class 44,
    Fuel and Related Compositions, Class 149, Explosive and Thermic
    Compositions or Charges, Class 208, Mineral Oils: Processes and Products,
    Class 260, Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, and Class 423, Chemistry of
    Inorganic Compounds and Class 585, Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, are
    as follows:



    (1)     A patent containing a propellant material claim and a claim to
    broadly creating propulsion by merely broadly reacting the propellant
    material are classified in the appropriate material class and
    cross-referenced to this and indented subclasses.

    (2)     A patent containing only process claims which merely recite
    reacting a definite propellant material to broadly produce thrust are
    classified in this and indented subclasses.

    (4)     Note.  The processes of this and indented subclass include
    operating the reaction motor in such media as water, air and vacuum.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, appropriate subclasses for a solid
    or liquid fuel composition.  The lines between Class 44 and this class are:



    (1)     A patent, containing a fuel composition claim and a claim to
    broadly creating propulsion by burning the fuel is classified in Class 44
    and cross-referenced to this class.

    (2)     A patent containing only process claims even if they merely recite
    burning a definite fuel to broadly produce thrust are classified in this
    class.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 530+ for sky-rockets,
    subclasses 374+ for a projectile having a charge which discharges to propel
    the projectile after leaving the gun, subclasses 334 and 366+ for shells
    adapted to emit an incendiary or smoky substance during flight, subclass
    458 for tracer shells and subclasses 283+ for inventions in the shape or
    structure of powder grains, sticks or bars of an explosive substance
    usually arranged for the purpose of modifying the rate or manner of burning
    or exploding.

    114,    Ships, subclasses 20.1+ for fish or automobile torpedoes, the power
    or propulsion being self-contained.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, appropriate
    subclasses for propellant compositions containing a fuel and an oxidizer.
    The lines between Class 149 and this class are: in particular, see subclass
    109.2 for a collection of gas generation and propulsion methods using
    compositions not provided for elsewhere in the class, subclass 109.4 for a
    collection of monopropellant compounds, subclass 119 for a collection of
    oxidizer compounds and subclasses 120+ for a collection of high energy fuel
    compounds.

    (1)     A patent containing a propellant composition claim and a claim to
    broadly creating propulsion by burning the propellant is classified in
    Class 149 and cross-referenced to this class.

    (2)     A patent containing only process claims even if they merely recite
    burning a definite propellant to broadly produce thrust are classified in
    this class.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 15+ for a
    petroleum fuel, such as gasoline, subclasses 22+ for an asphalt tar, pitch
    or resin mineral oil composition and subclass 39 for making, treating and
    recovery of asphalt, tar, pitch or resin.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 186+ for oxidizing compositions.

    440,    Marine Propulsion, subclass 45 for devices causing explosive jets
    of the nature of those used in air and gas engines used for propelling a
    vessel.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, appropriate subclass for a catalyst composition or a process of
    making or regenerating it.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, for certain fuel compositions
    containing only hydro-carbons and processes for making them.


CLS 60/206
TXT Process under subclass 205 directed to utilizing indirect heat exchange
    within the system.

    (1)     Note.  To come within the purview of this subclass the patent must
    specifically claim transferring heat within the system from one fluid to
    another through a solid material, such as using the incoming fuel to cool
    the discharge nozzle.  The latter is being heated by the products of
    chemical reaction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 71+ for a composition designed for use in
    heat exchange.


CLS 60/207
TXT Process under subclass 205 directed to utilizing a plurality of chemical
    reaction zones in the system.

    (1)     Note.  Such diverse processes as utilizing a main reaction zone and
    an afterburner zone and utilizing a plurality of reaction zone in parallel
    within the same system are within the purview of this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  A process for hydrogenating the fuel and then oxidizing the
    is within the purview of this subclass.


CLS 60/208
TXT Process under subclass 205 directed to injecting atmospheric air into the
    reaction zone of the reaction motor.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses are limited to operating air
    breathing reaction motors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211+,   for a process in which liquid oxygen or liquid ozone is injected
    into the reaction zone as an oxidizer component and subclass 220 for a
    process in which a modifying fluid is injected into a reaction zone
    containing solid propellant material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclasses 300+ for a liquid fuel
    mixture which may be used in air breathing reaction motors.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 15+ for liquid
    hydrocarbon mixtures such as: gasoline or kerosene.


CLS 60/209
TXT Process under subclass 208 directed to using an additive material other
    than air and fuel.

    (1)     Note.  To be classed as an additive the material must be used in a
    minor amount with respect to the fuel or the air.

    (2)     Note.  Such substances as:  (1) a catalyst, (2) a substance
    hypergolic with air or the fuel, (3) a substance which forms with the fuel
    and air a multicomponent hypergolic mixture are within the scope of this
    and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212,    for utilizing an igniter aid with separately injected fuel stream
    and oxidizer stream.


CLS 60/210
TXT Process under subclass 209 directed to injecting the additive material into
    the reaction zone as a separate stream.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213,    for a process of injecting an igniter aid into the reaction zone in
    a separate stream.


CLS 60/211
TXT Process under subclass 205 directed to injecting into the reaction zone
    separate streams of fuel and oxidizer.

    (1)     Note.  The injection of separate streams of at least two different
    substances which react to produce products which are useful to generate
    thrust is considered injecting separate streams of fuel and oxidizer.  The
    two substances may ignite on contact (hypergolic reaction) or they may be
    caused to react by various means, such as; a catalyst, an electrical
    discharge, heat, a substance which is hypergolic with either reactant or
    the reactant mixture.

    (2)     Note.  For purposes of this and indented subclasses red fuming
    nitric acid, white fuming nitric acid, fuming sulfuric acid and aqueous
    hydrogen peroxide are arbitrarily considered pure substances.

    (3)     Note.  For purpose of this and indented subclasses a solution of an
    amine base in an oxidizing acid is considered a pure substance regardless
    of the ratio of amine to acid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, especially subclass
    1 for a propellant composition including a normally gaseous material which
    is in the liquid state, subclass 36, for a propellant composition
    containing hydrazine and subclass 74, for a propellant composition
    containing oxides of nitrogen or nitric acid.


CLS 60/212
TXT Process under subclass 211 directed to utilizing an extraneous material to
    aid the ignition of the fuel and oxidizer mixture in the reaction zone.

    (1)     Note.  The igniter aid includes (1) a coating in the reaction zone
    which catalyzes the reaction between the fuel and oxidizer, (2) a hypergole
    added to the oxidizer or the fuel for starting or (3) a material separately
    injected into the reaction zone.

    (2)     Note.  A patent which claims a material as a pure fuel and as a
    part of a fuel mixture even if it improves the ignition characteristics of
    the main fuel is classified in subclass 211 and cross-referenced to
    subclass 215.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209,    for a process of utilizing an additive material in an air breathing
    reaction motor.


CLS 60/213
TXT Process under subclass 212 directed to injecting the igniter aid into the
    reaction zone as a separate stream.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210,    for a process of injecting a separate stream of an additive into
    the reaction zone of an air breathing reaction motor.


CLS 60/214
TXT Process under subclass 211 directed to injecting into the reaction zone a
    plurality of oxidizing substances in the form of a mixture.

    (1)     Note.  See Notes under subclass 211 for oxidizers which are
    arbitrarily classified as a pure compound instead of a mixture.


CLS 60/215
TXT Process under subclass 211 directed to utilizing a fuel which is composed
    of a plurality of materials.

    (1)     Note.  Gasoline, kerosene and the like are mixtures of numerous
    hydrocarbons and are considered fuel mixtures for this and indented
    subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclasses 300+ for liquid fuels
    composed of a plurality of materials.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 15+ for mineral
    oil fuels.


CLS 60/216
TXT Process under subclass 215 in which the fuel contains a free metal.

    (1)     Note.  The term "metal" includes free metal (e.g., calcium), an
    alloy of two or more metals (e.g., 90% Al,10% Mg), an intermetallic
    compound (e.g., AlNi) or a mixture of particles of two or more metals
    (e.g., mixture of Mg shot, Fe powder and Al turnings).

    (2)     Note.  Processes within the scope of subclasses 205+, utilizing
    fuel slurries which are classified elsewhere should be cross-referenced to
    this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, subclass 22 for an
    explosive composition containing elemental boron, subclasses 37+ for an
    explosive composition containing a metal and an inorganic oxide, and
    subclass 87 for an explosive in which the fuel component contains free
    metal and a hydrocarbon or halohydrocarbon.


CLS 60/217
TXT Process under subclass 205 directed to injecting into the reaction zone a
    stream composed of the fuel and the oxidizer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208+,   for a process in which a mixture of fuel and air is injected into
    the reaction zone.

    219+,   for a process in which solid propellant material is contained in
    the reaction zone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, appropriate
    subclasses for a specific propellant composition.


CLS 60/218
TXT Process under subclass 205 directed to decomposing a single compound in the
    reaction zone.

    (1)     Note.  To come within the scope of this subclass a single compound
    must be broken down or rearranged to produce products which will have
    additional reaction effect.  For example, decomposing hydrogen peroxide to
    produce steam and oxygen gas.  For patents claiming the apparatus for
    producing a motive fluid which is principally steam see subclass 227.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses, for
    inorganic compounds, per se.  Note especially subclasses 289+ for binary
    boron compounds, 407+ for hydrazkine and 584+ for hydrogen peroxide.

    568,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 943+ for a nitroalkyl compound.


CLS 60/219
TXT Process under subclass 205 directed to reacting solid material in the
    reaction zone.

    (1)     Note.  Producing thrust (1) by burning a cast monopropellant in the
    reaction zone, (2) by jetting a fuel onto solid oxidizer in the reaction
    zone, (3) regulating reaction rate of the solid propellant material in the
    reaction zone by injecting a fluid to change the pressure in the reaction
    zone are nonlimiting examples of processes within the scope of this and
    indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217,    for a process in which a solid propellant material is extruded into
    the reaction zone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, appropriate subclasses for specific
    fuel compositions, especially subclasses 265+ for a solidified liquid fuel.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 283+ for powder forms of
    specific size or shape.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, subclasses 3+ for an
    explosive or thermic composition having a specific structure or arrangement
    of a component or the product.


CLS 60/220
TXT Process under subclass 219 directed to injecting a modifying fluid into the
    reaction zone.

    (3)     Note.  Injecting a modifying fluid into the reaction zone (1) to
    change the fluid pressure therein to control the reaction rate of the solid
    propellant material and (2) to react with the solid propellant therein are
    nonlimiting examples of the scope of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208+,   for a process in which air is injected into the reaction zone and
    subclasses 211+, for a process in which solid material and a fluid are
    injected into the reaction zone in separate streams.


CLS 60/221
TXT Apparatus under subclass 200.1 wherein the motive fluid, as it leaves the
    ejecting means, substantially consists of a liquid.

    (1)     Note.  The fluid leaving the ejecting means is considered to come
    under this definition if a substantial and important thrust component
    thereof is a liquid.  A fluid not coming under the definition, for example,
    would be a gas containing a liquid mist.  For such a fluid see subclass 264
    for motive fluid treated with liquid, and subclass 227 for motive fluid
    which is principally steam.

    (2)     Note.  The devices classified under this definition are usually
    boat propulsion devices in which the motive fluid leaving its ejecting
    means is disclosed as acting against an ambient liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclass 315 for reaction motor devices adapted to operate
    under water having means adapted to be secured to a human for the
    propulsion thereof through the water.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, for a device having an
    impeller for moving a fluid and an outlet through which the fluid may be
    discharged wherein the function of the discharged fluid relates to
    sprinkling, spraying, etc.

    417,    Pumps, for devices not otherwise classified operable to move a
    liquid, however, devices claiming liquid pumping means having a disclosed
    use as a reaction motor is classified in Class 60.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, for rotary expansible chamber
    devices, per se.  However, devices claiming liquid pumping means having a
    disclosed use as a reaction motor is classified in Class 60.

    440,    Marine Propulsion, subclass 38 for reaction motors which propel or
    propel and steer a ship, and see in particular the note (5) in the
    definition of subclass 200.


CLS 60/222
TXT Apparatus under subclass 221 having more than one means through which
    motive fluid from a common source may be ejected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229,    for motors having a plurality of selectively usable motive fluid
    outlets for discharging a fluid for the purpose of modifying the thrust
    direction.

    263,    for motors having plural outlets for discharging fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 265.25+ for
    reaction motor nozzles, per se, comprising plural controlled fluid
    discharge outlets.


CLS 60/223
TXT Apparatus under subclass 200.1 having means sensing an abnormal condition
    which might destroy the apparatus and functioning to take corrective action
    against the destructive condition.

    (1)     Note.  This definition does not include a device which senses a
    normal variation in conditions to effect a control function, even though
    such device might be capable of sensing a suddenly presented abnormal
    condition. For example, a fuel control device responsive to motive fluid
    temperature to maintain a predetermined power output would not be
    classifiable under this definition but would be classified in subclasses
    233+.  However, a fuel control device designed to function only when the
    motive fluid temperature reaches a temperature above which it would be
    destructive to the apparatus would be classifiable under this definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 89.1-89.4 for containers having frangible
    or fusible pressure responsive blow out devices.


CLS 60/224
TXT A plurality of apparatuses, each as defined in subclass 200.1, interrelated
    (1) by a single means to which two or more responds, or (2) by a means or
    condition in one of the apparatuses upon which another apparatus is
    dependent for its operation.

    (1)     Note.  A plurality of apparatuses under this definition must each
    include an individual means for placing its motive fluid under pressure and
    an individual means for ejecting said fluid. However, a device, e.g., a fan
    jet, having a unitary device employed to pressurize fluid for two or more
    ejecting means comes within this definition provided the fluids for each
    said ejecting means are distinguishable and not intermixed as they are
    being pressurized or before entering said ejecting means.

    (2)     Note.  Concentric nozzles are not considered plural individual
    means for ejecting fluid if fluid from one nozzle is discharged within the
    confines and upstream of the discharging extremity of another of the
    nozzles.

    (3)     Note.  This definition includes one reaction motor which is
    controlled in response to the output of another reaction motor.

    (4)     Note.  This definition includes devices in which a component of one
    reaction motor is effective to operate a component (e.g., compressor) of
    another reaction motor.

    (5)     Note.  A reaction motor having means by which ambient air is
    conducted to cool a motor part (e.g., air conducted to cool a combustion
    chamber, and thereafter discharged to the ambient through a nozzle, and
    wherein there is no disclosed indication that the coolant air may produce a
    thrust) is not subject matter for this subclass. Such devices may be found
    below particularly in subclass 266.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229,    for reaction motors wherein motive fluid from a common source may
    be ejected selectively through one or more of several ejecting means.

    244,    for devices having a single exhaust nozzle for sequentially
    ejecting motive fluid produced by diverse motive fluid producing means.

    262,    for a device having plural means each forming a compressed gas
    stream, e.g., a fan-jet, wherein at least two of the streams are combined
    before being discharged through a common ejecting means.

    263,    for devices in which the fluid from a single motive fluid
    pressurizing means is separated into several paths of fluid, wherein two or
    more of said paths are each ejected through separate ejecting means.


CLS 60/225
TXT Apparatus under subclass 224 wherein one of the apparatuses is started
    after another one of the apparatuses.

    (1)     Note.  This definition includes devices wherein one apparatus is a
    ram jet which is considered inoperable (i.e., incapable of producing
    thrust) when static, and therefore may be started only after having been
    given motion by another motor.  These devices may be arranged serially
    (e.g., rocket and ram jet) having distinctive motive fluid ejecting means
    for each.  The motive fluid ejecting means may be in the form of concentric
    nozzles arranged so that one may be detached from the other when one motive
    fluid producing means, e.g., for the rocket, is terminated to provide a new
    nozzle configuration for the ejection of the motive fluid from the next
    motive fluid producing means to be activated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246,    for reaction motors having diverse means arranged to sequentially
    produce a motive fluid to be discharged through a single nozzle.


CLS 60/226.1
TXT Air and diverse fluid discharge from separate discharge outlets (e.g., fan
    jet, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 224 wherein at least one of the motive fluids is
    air.


CLS 60/226.2
TXT Having thrust reverser:

    Apparatus under subclass 226.1 in which the air discharge outlet is
    supplied pressurized airflow from an fan, and in which a device or
    mechanism is provided for at least partially reversing the flow direction
    of the fan airflow to thereby reduce or reverse the thrust of the apparatus.


CLS 60/226.3
TXT Having means to effect a variable bypass ratio:

    Apparatus under subclass 226.1 in which the air discharge outlet is
    supplied pressurized airflow from a fan, and wherein a device or mechanism
    is provided to change the relative flow ratio between the air discharge
    outlet and the diverse fluid discharge outlet.


CLS 60/227
TXT Apparatus under subclass 200.1 including means for producing a motive fluid
    which substantially consists of steam to be ejected from the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes steam generators of the type having
    catalytically decomposed hydrogen peroxide (H2O2) and a nozzle wherein the
    resulting products discharged through the nozzle being predominently steam
    (i.e., H2O+O). For patents claiming the process of decomposing a compound
    in the reaction zone see subclass 218.


CLS 60/228
TXT Apparatus under subclass 200.1 having means which may so direct all or a
    portion of the motive fluid that the direction of thrust produced by the
    motor is altered.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter under this definition includes plural
    reaction motors having means for controlling them so as to cause a change
    in the direction of their resultant thrust.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 265.19+ for
    reaction motor discharge nozzles with means to control the direction of the
    discharge stream.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 12.1, 23 and 29 for aircraft sustained by
    the thrust of a reaction motor and subclasses 15, 52 and 73+ for aircraft
    propelled or steered by reaction motors.


CLS 60/229
TXT Apparatus under subclass 228 having means whereby motive fluid from a
    common source may be selectively exhausted through one or more of several
    ejecting means so that a variation in the direction of the resultant thrust
    component may be effected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222,    for motors in which the motive fluid is principally liquid and
    which have a plurality of ejecting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 265.25+ for
    reaction motor nozzle means in which the discharge stream is directed by
    means of plural controlled outlets.


CLS 60/230
TXT Apparatus under subclass 228 having a means which causes the motive fluid
    to change direction of flow relative to the ejecting means thereby to cause
    a change in direction in the resultant thrust of the motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 37+ for means within a pipe
    for changing the direction of flow of the fluid and subclass 109 for pipe
    shaped at the end portion to control the direction of flow of fluid before
    it is discharged.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 52 for aircraft spoilers in combination with
    jet motor discharge fluid.


CLS 60/231
TXT Apparatus under subclass 230 having means whereby a fluid is injected into
    the motive fluid stream to change the direction of flow of said motive
    fluid.

    (1)     Note.  Normally devices under this subclass have a secondary fluid
    injected into the motive fluid at a point upstream of the nozzle outlet.
    However, the subclass may also include patents disclosing means to inject
    secondary fluid into the motive fluid downstream of the nozzle outlet if
    the disclosure states that the deflected motive fluid is effective to alter
    the direction of thrust.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 803+ for means to divert or vary the
    flow of one stream relative to a steam receiver (1) direct contact with at
    least one other stream or (2) by application of an energy field directly to
    a stream. Devices known in the art as "fluid amplifiers" and which act to
    control or vary high energy flows by relatively low energy flow or fields
    are here included.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 265.23 for
    reaction motor discharge nozzles in which the main discharge stream is
    deflected by a redirected portion of said stream, and subclass 127.3 for
    mixing a secondary fluid in the main stream.


CLS 60/232
TXT Apparatus under subclass 228 having means whereby the motive fluid ejecting
    means, per se, may be moved to modify the direction of the entire discharge
    stream which passes through the ejecting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 265.35 for a
    reaction motor nozzle in which the discharge stream is directed by
    adjustably aiming the nozzle.


CLS 60/233
TXT Apparatus under subclass 200.1 in which the thrust of the apparatus during
    operation may be varied by means which senses a change in (1) the static
    condition of the ambient or in the relationship between the apparatus and
    an ambient condition, or (2) a condition of an apparatus part, motive fluid
    or propellant of the apparatus being controlled, or (3) a condition of a
    motor other than a reaction motor the output of which is itself controlled
    responsive to a sensed change in the condition of the ambient or an
    internal condition.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus providing means which does no more than to permit
    the flow of fuel to a combustion chamber for starting after a certain
    condition has been attained, such as a certain fuel pressure or motive
    fluid temperature or pressure has been established, so that the motor
    thereafter may be fully operational, is not classified in this or indented
    subclasses.  Such apparatus is classified below.  This and indented
    subclasses include starting devices, however, if they further control the
    flow of fuel in accordance with the definition.

    (2)     Note.  Means (i.e., for controlling fuel flow, nozzle area, etc.)
    controlled positively in response to a manually actuated device through a
    mechanical fluid linkage are not included under this definition.  For
    example, a nozzle control responsive to fuel pressure which is controlled
    by manual means only is not considered to be condition responsive.  Devices
    with such controls are classified on other features.  See subclass 261.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.24+, for plants having combustion products generators having automatic
    means controlling the fuel or oxidizer flow thereto.

    224+,   for interrelated reaction motors wherein the control of one
    reaction motor may be responsive to the condition of another reaction motor.

    244,    for a reaction motor having diverse means for the production of
    combustion products wherein one is activated only as a result of a sensed
    condition of another or of a sensed ambient condition where the diverse
    combustion products producing means are not employed specifically to obtain
    a variation in thrust.

    245,    for reaction motors having diverse means for the production of
    combustion products wherein one means is activated as a result  of the
    depletion of the fuel supplied to another means.

    250,    for reaction motors having discrete fuel supplies one of which is
    activated upon the depletion of another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 18+ for the control of a residual combustion
    device responsive to burner or ambient parameters.  However, if fuel or
    oxidizer, as claimed, is controlled responsive to a condition of a
    disclosed but not claimed motive fluid ejecting means classification is in
    Class 60, Power Plants, on the basis that the structure claimed is
    incomplete and an ejecting means is required to complete it.


CLS 60/234
TXT Apparatus under subclass 233 having a solid propellant and means to
    initiate or terminate the consumption thereof responsive to the condition
    sensing means.


CLS 60/235
TXT Apparatus under subclass 233 in which the condition sensing means controls
    both the rate of fuel flow to combustion chamber means in the apparatus and
    the cross sectional area of a motive fluid ejecting means.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are apparatuses having a fuel
    control means and a nozzle area control means each responsive to different
    sensed conditions, or both responsive to the same sensed condition.


CLS 60/236
TXT Apparatus under subclass 235 having more than one unit each of which
    consists of a rotary compressor means for pressurizing the motive fluid,
    turbine means actuated by the motive fluid and shaft means by which the
    turbine means may drive the compressor means, wherein the shaft means for
    at least two of the units are concentrically arranged.


CLS 60/237
TXT Apparatus under subclass 235 having means to sense the area of the motive
    fluid ejecting means, and in response thereto, control the fuel or oxidizer
    flow rate for the motor.


CLS 60/238
TXT Apparatus under subclass 235 in which either the fuel flow to combustion
    chamber means in the apparatus, or the area of the motive fluid ejecting
    means, or both of these together, are varied in response to a sensed change
    in the motive fluid temperature.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note under subclass 205 for the definition of "fuel".


CLS 60/239
TXT Apparatus under subclass 235 in which the apparatus includes a combustion
    chamber, a turbine and a compressor driven thereby and either the fuel flow
    to the combustion chamber, or the area of the motive fluid ejecting means,
    or both of these together, are varied as a result of a sensed change in the
    compressor or turbine speed.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 205, (1) Note, for the meaning of "fuel".


CLS 60/240
TXT Apparatus under subclass 233 in which the condition sensing means
    characteristic of the apparatus including means, responsive to a sensed
    condition change, to control both the flow of a fuel and a combustion
    supporting oxidizer (e.g., air).

    (1)     Note.  Means to alter the flow of oxidizer include, e.g., air inlet
    control as by a diffusor having a variable opening, variable flow retarding
    baffles, air bleed means, liquid oxidizer valve means or pump control
    means, or compressor vane setting control means.  Means which controls fuel
    flow or an exhaust nozzle opening, resulting in a change in compressor
    speed and thus a change in oxidizer flow is not included in this
    definition.  For condition responsive fuel flow and exhaust nozzle area
    control see subclasses 235+, 241 and 243.

    (2)     Note.  See (1) Note subclass 205 for meaning of fuel and oxidizer.


CLS 60/241
TXT Apparatus under subclass 233 having more than one fuel burning means
    arranged in the motive fluid stream so that one of the fuel burning means
    reheats the motive fluid stream issuing from another of the means and the
    fuel flow to a plurality of said burning means is controlled in response to
    a sensed condition.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note subclass 205 for the meaning of fuel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243,    for a disclosure of burners in series but wherein the fuel flow to
    one of the burners only is controlled in response to a sensed condition.


CLS 60/242
TXT Apparatus under subclass 233 having means to vary the thrust characteristic
    of the apparatus during operation by varying the area of the opening
    through which the motive fluid may be ejected in response to a sensed
    condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235+,   for motive fluid ejecting means with condition responsive means to
    vary the area thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses
    for fluid ejecting nozzles, per se, having means controlling the nozzle
    area for control of volumetric flow and pattern of flow.


CLS 60/243
TXT Apparatus under subclass 233 in which the condition sensing means acts to
    vary the thrust of the apparatus by controlling the fuel flow.


CLS 60/244
TXT Apparatus under subclass 200.1 (A) which by relative rearrangement or
    adjustment of its parts or by the addition or omission of a part is so
    changed as to become (1) basic subject matter of this class as defined in
    subclass 200.1 of a different character or having a different mode of
    operation or (2) basic subject matter of another class, or (B) in which the
    apparatus as defined in subclass 200.1 is combined with means, which means
    if claimed, per se, would be classified in another class and which is not
    merely a part or subcombination of the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass, for example, are apparatus having means by
    which motive fluid may be produced by two or more diverse producing means
    and ejected through a single ejecting means, and having means by which
    motive fluid from any one of the diverse producing means may be ejected
    through the ejecting means to the exclusion of the motive fluid produced by
    another diverse motive fluid producing means.

    (2)     Note.  A mere fuel or ignition control means by which one motive
    fluid producing means may function to the exclusion of another diverse
    fluid producing means is not included in this definition.  These apparatus
    may be found in subclasses 224, 250, 261.

    (3)     Note.  The following are examples of diverse motive fluid producing
    means: ram air fed combustion products generator (athodyd), mechanically
    compressed air fed combustion products generator, resonating combustion
    chamber, pulsating valve controlled combustion products generator;
    mechanically compressed air, non-air breathing combustion chamber, ion
    acceleration, electrical or wave energy heating means, sublimation, etc.

    (4)     Note.  Motors having plural means for the production of a motion
    fluid for ejection through a single nozzle wherein one means may not
    function to the exclusion of another of the means are found elsewhere.
    See, in particular, subclass 262 for combustion products generators with
    ambient air bypass means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224+,   for devices considered to be interrelated motors which may comprise
    a single casing housing diverse motive fluid producing means but employing
    distinct exhaust nozzle configurations for the motive fluid issuing from
    each motive fluid producer.

    261,    for motors having an after burner (i.e., a nonpropellant combustor)
    which may be diverse from a primary combustion products generator, but
    wherein the primary combustion products generator and afterburner are
    operated exclusively only through fuel or ignition control of either.


CLS 60/245
TXT Apparatus under subclass 244 having means to initiate the production of
    motive fluid by one means after the propellant supply usable by a diverse
    motive fluid producing means has been reduced to a predetermined level.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250,    for a motor having a plurality of sequentially combustible fuels
    which does not change its principle of operation as one or the other fuel
    is burned.


CLS 60/246
TXT Apparatus under subclass 200.1 in which the means placing the motive fluid
    under pressure comprises a compressor driven by a turbine which is driven
    by combustion products egressing from a non-air breathing combustion
    chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 4, for reaction motors having human body
    attaching means.


CLS 60/247
TXT Apparatus under subclass 200.1 in which the means for producing the motive
    fluid comprises an intermittently operating combustion chamber having means
    permitting unidirectional flow of oxidizer or fuel to said chamber.

    (1)     Note.  Under this definition the fuel may be caused to burn
    intermittently either by control of the fuel flow itself or the ignition
    thereof, or by intermittently admitting into the combustion chamber the air
    or other oxidizer which supports combustion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 657 for combustion chambers
    for internal combustion engines.


CLS 60/248
TXT Apparatus under subclass 247 having conduit means by which ambient air may
    flow exteriorly of and from a point before to a point after the combustion
    chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224+,   for interrelated motors wherein air being supplied to one motor may
    first flow around the combustion chamber for another motor.

    262,    for motors having means to flow air exteriorly of and from a point
    before to a point after its combustion chamber forming means.

    264,    for motors having means to introduce air into the exhaust gas
    stream.

    266,    for motors which may be cooled by an air stream.


CLS 60/249
TXT Apparatus under subclass 247 in which the unidirectional flow permitting
    means comprises a passage means which prevents flow of combustion products
    therethrough from said chamber in a reverse direction due to its designed
    configuration and without a physical valve.

    (1)     Note.  The unidirectional flow permitting means which offers
    minimum resistance to flow of fuel or oxidizers into the combustion chamber
    but substantially prevents reverse flow therefrom is normally a fixed
    orifice type restriction which presents a tortuous path to fluid attempting
    to leave the combustion chamber.  Motors having this type of unidirectional
    flow permitting means are known in the art as "Valveless pulse jets".


CLS 60/250
TXT Apparatus under subclass 200.1 having two or more separately contained
    propellants or two or more solid propellant charges having the same or
    distinct burning characteristics arranged so that one of said propellants
    may be partially or completely consumed prior to another during the
    operation of the reaction apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  A solid propellant rocket having an igniter which inherently
    produces some thrust during ignition, is not included under this
    definition.  See subclass 256 for devices used to ignite solid propellant
    charges.

    (2)     Note.  Under this definition a plurality of solid propellant
    charges having the same burning characteristics would include an
    arrangement of individually formed masses of propellant either in physical
    contact with each other or separated from one another.

    (3)     Note.  See (1) Note subclass 205 for the meaning of "propellant".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225,    for a plurality of reaction motors which are interrelated and which
    may be operated sequentially.

    245+,   for reaction motors changeable to operate by one principle of
    operation from another.


CLS 60/251
TXT Apparatus under subclass 200.1 in which the motive fluid is produced by the
    combustion of a solid propellant and a fluid propellant.

    (1)     Note.  A gelatinous propellant is considered to be a solid and to
    come within this definition.


CLS 60/252
TXT Apparatus under subclass 200.1 wherein the propellant from which the motive
    fluid is produced is a gelatinous precipitate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclasses 265+ for fuel which is
    normally liquid but rendered solid or semi-solid for better handling and
    transporting.


CLS 60/253
TXT Apparatus under subclass 200.1 in which the propellant from which the
    motive fluid is produced is a solid.


CLS 60/254
TXT Apparatus under subclass 253 having means to control the consumption of the
    propellant.

    (1)     Note.  This definition does not include rockets wherein the fuels
    are packed in a particular manner or inserted with combustion enhancing or
    inhibiting means to produce a particular burning rate or characteristic.
    These apparatus are found in subclass 253.

    (2)     Note.  This definition does not include reaction motors employing a
    plurality of charges which may be sequentially ignited.  These devices are
    found above in subclass 250.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224,    and in particular subclass 225 for interrelated reaction motors one
    of which may employ a solid propellant.

    234,    for motors having condition responsive means to regulate the
    consumption of a solid propellant.

    244+,   for motors having a means to change its principle of operation and
    which, at one time, may employ a solid propellant.

    250+,   for motors having plural propellants which burn sequentially one or
    more of which may be a solid.

    251,    for motors having diverse reactants one of which is a solid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 283+ for shapes or mechanical
    structures of grains, sticks, or bars of explosive material arranged to
    modify the manner of burning.


CLS 60/255
TXT Apparatus under subclass 253 having means to position, hold or support the
    propellant.

    (1)     Note.  A mere wall or casing without any special modification for
    positioning, holding or supporting the propellant is not included.  See
    Class 239, Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 302.


CLS 60/256
TXT Apparatus under subclass 253 having means to initiate propellant combustion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclass 202 for means for igniting a
    missile propellant.


CLS 60/257
TXT Apparatus under subclass 200.1 in which thrust is produced by the
    combustion of (1) a monopropellant or (2) an oxidizer and a fuel, the
    oxidizer being supplied to the combustion zone in a liquid state.

    (1)     Note.  This definition is intended to provide an art collection of
    nonair breathing motors (i.e., rockets) employing an oxidant supplied to
    the motor in a liquid state.  However, no special structure need be claimed
    for classification in this subclass. Patents whose disclosure or claims
    relate to the described art group are considered to come under this
    definition.

    (2)     Note.  A broad disclosure that liquid oxidizer, two or more liquid
    propellants or liquid monopropellant are used in the motor or that the
    motor is of the "liquid propellant or liquid reactant" nonair breathing
    type is classifiable under this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240,    for motors having oxidizers stored as a liquid with sensed
    condition responsive means for controlling oxidizer flow.


CLS 60/258
TXT Apparatus under subclass 257 having means to inject the oxidizer into the
    combustion zone where it is to be consumed during the combustion process.


CLS 60/259
TXT Apparatus under subclass 257 having means to increase the pressure of the
    oxidizer or monopropellant so that it may be introduced into the motive
    fluid producing area (e.g., burner).


CLS 60/260
TXT Apparatus under subclass 257 having means by which a liquid oxidizer or
    monopropellant may be heated before it is introduced into the motive fluid
    producing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    267,    for motors having a means to exchange heat between a solid body and
    a liquid.


CLS 60/261
TXT Apparatus under subclass 200.1 having means to oxidize fuel in an
    atmosphere of motive fluid comprising previously formed combustion products.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241,    for after burners in series with other burners two or more of which
    may be controlled in response to a sensed condition.

    243,    for a disclosure of burners in series but wherein the fuel flow to
    only one of the burners is controlled in response to a sensed condition.

    264,    for pressurized motive fluid treating means which includes the
    addition of fluid or other substances thereto other than the fuel to be
    oxidized.


CLS 60/262
TXT Apparatus under subclass 200.1 in which an air stream is compressed and led
    into a combustion chamber in which motive fluid is produced, comprising a
    passage for causing a portion of the air, after it has been compressed, to
    avoid entry into the combustion chamber and be led back into the stream of
    motive fluid from the combustion chamber before it is ejected into the
    ambient.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224,    for devices having means to cause a portion of a compressed gas
    stream to bypass a combustion chamber or other component acting upon the
    stream together with separate ejecting means for each of two or more of the
    streams formed.

    246,    for a device having a compressed air stream bypassing a nonair
    breathing combustion chamber.

    248,    for a device having an air passage which bypasses an intermittent
    combustion chamber.


CLS 60/263
TXT Apparatus under subclass 200.1 having (1) two or more motive fluid
    producing means, means to combine the motive fluid issuing from said
    producing means, and either single or plural ejecting means through which
    said combined motive fluid may pass or (2) two or more motive fluid
    ejecting means receiving motive fluid from a single motive fluid producing
    means.

    (1)     Note.  Concentric nozzles are not considered plural if fluid from
    one nozzle is discharged within the confines and upstream of the
    discharging extremity of another of the nozzles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201,    for reaction motors arranged to turn about an axis when in
    operation and having a plurality of motive fluid ejecting means.

    224+,   for a plurality of reaction motors which are interrelated either
    because one is responsive to a condition of another or two or more reaction
    motors are responsive to a single means.

    229,    for motors having plural selectively usable motive fluid ejecting
    means to vary the thrust magnitude.

    262,    for motors having plural combustion chambers but wherein passage
    means is provided for the ambient air supply for one combustion chamber
    which extends from a point before to a point after another combustion
    chamber.


CLS 60/264
TXT Apparatus under subclass 200.1 having means whereby a physical
    characteristic of a stream of pressurized motive fluid may be changed by
    the introduction of a substance into said stream to react or mix therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231,    for motors having thrust direction modifying means employing a
    means to inject a fluid into the motive fluid ejecting means.

    246,    for motors having means to mix pressurized air from the effluent
    from a nonair breathing combustion chamber.

    248,    for reaction motors having means to bypass air around an
    intermittent combustion chamber and to mix said air with combustion
    products issuing from said combustion chamber.

    261,    for a motor having means to add oxidizer or fuel to an atmosphere
    of previously formed combustion products to promote further burning.

    265,    for motors having means to flow a film of fluid on a motor
    component surface between said surface and the motive fluid to cool the
    component, and means whereby the fluid may ultimately combine with the
    motive fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 127.3 for means
    to mix a cooling fluid with the main discharge stream in a nozzle of a
    reaction motor, and subclass 265.17 for a means to add a secondary fluid to
    the main stream upstream of the nozzle outlet.


CLS 60/265
TXT Apparatus under subclass 200.1 having means by which a fluid film, other
    than air, may be caused to sweep a surface of the apparatus between said
    surface and the motive fluid presented to said surface.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this definition is a fluid film formed by
    ablatable material on a motive fluid engageable surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257+,   particularly subclasses 258 and 261 for reaction motors wherein
    liquid oxidizer or fuel are sprayed onto or otherwise caused to flow on the
    walls of a combustion chamber prior to combustion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 265.15 for
    reaction motor nozzles having an erodible, frangible or fusible part.


CLS 60/266
TXT Apparatus under subclass 200.1 having means to enhance the transfer of heat
    between a solid body and a fluid flowing in contact therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246,    for turborockets having means to bypass air around a nonair
    breathing combustion chamber.

    248,    for an intermittent combustion motor in which bypassed air may be
    used as a coolant.

    262,    for motors in which a part of the compressed gas may be bypassed
    around a motor part to cool said part.

    264,    for motors having a substance to be mixed with the motive fluid but
    which may also be used to cool a part of said motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 232 for a structural
    component having chemically reactable layers or components which may change
    physically or chemically with variations in ambient conditions such as heat
    or moisture.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 467+ for apparatus comprising means to
    cause a cooling effect by producing a change in the condition or state of a
    material.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 127.1 for
    reaction motor discharge nozzles having cooling jackets.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 117 for aircraft having an ablatable surface.


CLS 60/267
TXT Apparatus under subclass 266 wherein said fluid is a liquid.


CLS 60/268
TXT Apparatus under subclass 200.1 having a plurality of rotary means two or
    more of which rotate in opposite directions, each rotary means having a
    means to compress a propellant and a means driving said rotary means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236,    for reaction motors having counter rotating turbine rotors with
    condition responsive means which may control the fuel supply and motive
    fluid ejecting means opening.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, subclasses 60+ for counter
    rotating rotors in a device of the type there classified.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclasses 128+ for
    oppositely rotating impellers, per se.


CLS 60/269
TXT Apparatus under subclass 200.1 wherein the pressure of air is increased by
    mechanical means or by means of a pressurized fluid, said air being used as
    a propellant or as the motive fluid.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this definition are reaction motors which
    include an impeller for moving a fluid and having an outlet for discharging
    said fluid having a sole disclosed function to produce a thrust.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221+,   for reaction motors having shrouded impellers wherein water is the
    medium moved.

    268,    for motors having counter rotating turbine rotors driving plural
    compressor elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 265.11 for a
    device having an impeller for moving a fluid and an outlet through which
    the fluid may be discharged wherein a function of the discharged fluid
    relates to spraying, sprinkling, etc.


CLS 60/270.1
TXT Air supplied by ram effect:

    Apparatus under subclass 200.1 in which the means for producing motive
    fluid includes a combustion or heating chamber and air is supplied to said
    chamber due only to the forward motion of the apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 53 for ram jet engines with particular inlet
    means (e.g., inflatable cowling and   pressure responsive spike) combined
    with significant aircraft structure.


CLS 60/271
TXT Apparatus under subclass 200.1 having a specifically claimed opening by
    means of which motive fluid is ejected from the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this definition are reaction motor ejection
    means having an opening which may be varied in cross sectional area.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 40+ for pipes having
    variable or nonvariable means (e.g., nozzle like devices) to restrict the
    flow of fluid therethrough.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 265.11+ for
    reaction nozzles, per se, especially subclass 265.19 for reaction motor
    discharge nozzles having means controlling the amount and shape of the
    stream discharged.


CLS 60/272
TXT Subject matter under the class definition having an engine in which fuel is
    burned in an expansible chamber to produce work and in which at least some
    of the combusted material going to discharge is handled or treated after it
    reaches a point where the handling or treatment is more than that necessary
    to remove the material from the chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.5+,  for the treatment of combustion products making up the exhaust of a
    gas turbine; subclasses 64+ for the treatment of the exhaust of an engine
    driven by a single fluid; and subclasses 200+ for a power plant comprising
    a combustion products generator and a combustion products directing
    reaction nozzle.

    228+,   for a reaction motor with thrust modifying means;

    595,    for a free piston type internal combustion engine, the exhaust of
    which drives a motor; and

    597+,   for a fluid motor driven by the exhaust or waste heat of an
    internal combustion engine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 568+, for an internal
    combustion engine having a charge forming device that may be heated by
    exhaust gas; or in which exhaust gas is mixed with the engine fuel;
    subclass 142.5 for an internal combustion engine in which various parts of
    the engine exchange heat; and appropriate subclass for a residual internal
    combustion engine with the exhaust handled or treated as necessary to
    evacuate the combustion chamber or to modify operation of the engine.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 296 for a motor vehicle having a specific
    motor-to-body-frame relationship and wherein the vehicle includes means on
    the motor or body frame for handling exhaust from the motor; subclass 309
    for a motor vehicle which includes means for handling exhaust from its
    motor; and subclass 89.2 for a body for a motor vehicle, which body
    includes means for handling the exhaust of a motor.

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 213+ for a muffler, per se.


CLS 60/273
TXT Processes under subclass 272 of treating or handling the materials
    discharging to atmosphere or to an external device from the combustion
    chamber of an internal combustion engine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 212+ for a process of
    purifying a gas that is nominally the exhaust from an internal combustion
    engine.


CLS 60/274
TXT Processes under subclass 273 in which the handling or treatment serves to
    remove or destroy harmful materials in the exhaust gas.


CLS 60/275
TXT Apparatus under subclass 272 in which the exhaust gas is treated by a sonic
    or super-sonic vibration generator, an electrical field device,
    electrolysis, or by an electrical discharge.

    (1)     Note.  An electrical igniter is not regarded as an electrical field
    or discharge type gas treater.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation: Processes, subclasses 57+ for processes of gas
    separation involving an electric or electrostatic field.

    96,     Gas Separation: Apparatus, subclasses 15+ for apparatus for gas
    separation involving an electric or electrostatic field.


CLS 60/276
TXT Apparatus under subclass 272 including structure analyzing the chemical
    composition of the exhaust gas and exerting a control responsive to the
    determined value or giving an indication of the determined value.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 23+ for a gas analyzer, per se.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 61.03 for a
    smoke responsive switch.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclass for
    apparatus testing the electrical properties of gases.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 83 for gas analyzers.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 76 for a fuel burner controlled by a means
    analyzing the composition of its combustion products.


CLS 60/277
TXT Apparatus under subclass 272, with means (1) that prevents operation if a
    necessary state or condition is not sensed or indicated (2) that stops
    operation if a malfunction or dangerous condition is sensed (3) that takes
    protective action to protect a system element responsive to a sensed
    malfunction or dangerous condition (4) or that acts to inform the operator
    of a dangerous state or malfunction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+ for electrical
    automatic condition responsive indicating systems.


CLS 60/278
TXT Apparatus under subclass 272 having (1) structure by which a part of the
    gas discharged from the combustion chamber is returned to become a
    constituent of the engine feed and another part is handled or treated as it
    is discharged as exhaust gas or (2) structure by which the combustion
    chamber discharge gas is cooled, purified or separated; and a part of the
    cooled, purified or separated engine discharge is returned as engine feed
    and another part is discharged as exhaust gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 568 for an internal
    combustion engine having means to return a part of the exhaust gas
    switching, therefrom back to the engine intake and wherein no means are
    provided to treat said gas.


CLS 60/279
TXT Apparatus under subclass 278 in which the combustion chamber discharge is
    separated into two streams, one richer in reactive material than the other,
    the enriched part of the separated combustion chamber discharge being
    returned to the engine and the stream reduced in reactive components being
    discharged as exhaust gas.


CLS 60/280
TXT Apparatus under subclass 272 including a mechanism or structure driven by
    the flow of the engine exhaust gas serving to perfect the operation of the
    engine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    597+,   for an internal combustion engine having a motor driven by exhaust
    from the internal combustion engine.


CLS 60/281
TXT Apparatus under subclass 272 in which the handling means includes a
    collection and storage reservoir, or a flow line maintaining the exhaust
    pressure and connected to a point using exhaust gases as a pressurized
    motive fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    613,    for an internal combustion engine having a motor driven by its
    exhaust gases and having means to temporarily store the gases prior to
    their entry into the motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 129, for a
    system using exhaust gas to heat and spray an external material.


CLS 60/282
TXT Apparatus under subclass 272 having means for chemically reacting at least
    one of the constituent materials of the combustion products to produce a
    substance less harmful to living organisms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 168+ for a chemical or catalytic
    reactor for treating exhaust gas.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 212+ for a process of
    purifying a mixture that is nominally the exhaust of an internal combustion
    engine.


CLS 60/283
TXT Apparatus under subclass 282 with structure by which the fumes from the
    crankcase of the engine, or fuel vapors from the carburetor or fuel tank
    are handled or treated in conduction with the engine exhaust gas.


CLS 60/284
TXT Apparatus under subclass 282 in which there is a sequence by which the
    engine is brought into full operation after start initiation without manual
    intervention; the sequence including a purge period or operation on the
    reactor, or a special operation to bring the reactor to an effective
    reacting temperature.


CLS 60/285
TXT Apparatus under subclass 282 including a means that senses a condition of
    the reactor and actuates a device controlling the feed to, or ignition of
    the engine.


CLS 60/286
TXT Apparatus under subclass 282 including a condition responsive device
    controlling a means heating the reactor, a means igniting the exhaust gas
    in the reactor, a means cooling the reactor, or a means supplying fuel to
    the reactor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284,    for an automatic purge or heat-up of an exhaust gas treating
    reactor in an engine starting sequence.


CLS 60/287
TXT Apparatus under subclass 282 including a means sensing a condition of the
    apparatus and exerting a control on a means feeding a fluid to the reactor,
    of the pressure of the reactor, or on a means by-passing the reactor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    285,    for apparatus in which the engine feed or ignition is controlled by
    a means sensing a condition of the reactor.


CLS 60/288
TXT Apparatus under subclass 287 in which the condition responsive means
    control structure selectively directing exhaust from the engine through the
    reaction device or a device by which oxidizer is entrained for reaction; or
    through a branch or bypass avoiding such device.


CLS 60/289
TXT Apparatus under subclass 287 controlling the delivery of reactive air to
    the reactor.


CLS 60/290
TXT Apparatus under subclass 289 in which the feed of reactive is controlled by
    a means responsive to the speed of the engine or to the pressure in the
    intake manifold of the engine.


CLS 60/291
TXT Apparatus under subclass 287 in which there is (1) a means controlling the
    pressure in the reactor or in the exhaust gas being fed to the reactor; or
    (2) a means sensing the pressure in the reactor or of the exhaust gas being
    fed to the reactor and controlling an element of the apparatus.


CLS 60/292
TXT Apparatus under subclass 291 in which a valve controlling the discharge
    from the reactor to the atmosphere is actuated by a means sensing the
    pressure in the reactor.


CLS 60/293
TXT Apparatus under subclass 291 in which a valve responsive to the difference
    in pressure between that of the reactor and the atmosphere open to feed
    reactive air to the reactor when the pressure in the reactor is below
    atmospheric pressure.


CLS 60/294
TXT Apparatus under subclass 282 in which a control means that affects
    operation of the reactor is mechanically connected to the throttle of the
    engine or to a cyclically controlled element of the engine to be moved
    along with the throttle or element.


CLS 60/295
TXT Apparatus under subclass 282 with structure for cleaning, regenerating,
    replacing or otherwise restoring used, contaminated, or consumed catalytic
    material or other solid or liquid treating agent or reactant.


CLS 60/296
TXT Apparatus under subclass 295 in which cleaning or regenerating is
    accomplished by reversing the flow of fluid through the agent, reactant or
    catalytic material.


CLS 60/297
TXT Apparatus under subclass 282 having, in addition to the reactor, means to
    mechanically remove, solid or liquid particles from the exhaust gas; to
    wash the exhaust gas; or to absorb or adsorb material from the exhaust gas.


CLS 60/298
TXT Apparatus under subclass 282 having structure by which heat is removed from
    the reactor or from the feed to the reactor, generally to prevent
    overheating of the reactor.


CLS 60/299
TXT Apparatus under subclass 282 in which the exhaust gas is passed over or
    through catalytic material to produce the reaction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 168 for a chemical or catalytic
    reactor for treating exhaust gas.


CLS 60/300
TXT Apparatus under subclass 299 with an external means for supplying heat to
    the catalyst to raise it to an operative temperature.


CLS 60/301
TXT Apparatus under subclass 299 in which the reaction assisted by the catalyst
    is of the reduction type, i.e., the removal of oxygen from the substance
    being treated.


CLS 60/302
TXT Apparatus under subclass 299 in which the catalyst is positioned directly
    in the exhaust manifold or between the manifold and the combustion chamber
    of the engine.


CLS 60/303
TXT Apparatus under subclass 282 in which the reaction of the exhaust gas is
    initiated or maintained by a heater, an igniter, or a supplemental feed of
    fuel.


CLS 60/304
TXT Apparatus under subclass 282 including structure by which air is fed to the
    exhaust gas at a region immediately associated with an engine exhaust valve
    or port, whereby the high temperature produced by combustion in the engine
    produces the reaction.


CLS 60/305
TXT Apparatus under subclass 304 in which oxidizer from a common supply
    structure is fed separately to the exhaust valves or ports of spaced engine
    combustion chambers.


CLS 60/306
TXT Apparatus under subclass 304 in which oxidizer is fed both to a region of
    reaction adjacent the combustion chamber and to a reactor downstream of and
    spaced from the port region.


CLS 60/307
TXT Apparatus under subclass 282 having a pump or other fluid impelling
    structure feeding air into the combustion products from the engine to react
    chemically therewith.


CLS 60/308
TXT Apparatus under subclass 307 in which the air is caused to flow by an
    aspirating effect of the exhaust gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 41.64 for an internal
    combustion engine in which cooling air is aspirated across the engine by a
    jet pump generally powered by exhaust gas.


CLS 60/309
TXT Apparatus under subclass 272 with structure for receiving or handling
    liquid condensed from the exhaust gases.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 236+, for a cyclically
    operable expansible chamber motor having plural exhaust passages, for
    example, separate air and condensate discharge passages.


CLS 60/310
TXT Apparatus under subclass 272 in which the exhaust gas is treated by being
    washed by liquid, or is handled by structure within which it comes into
    contact with liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclass 235, for a muffler having an underwater
    discharge; and subclasses 221 and 260+, for a muffler into which liquid is
    fed to assist in muffling the sound.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclass for gas and
    liquid contact apparatus not specialized to handling the exhaust of an
    internal combustion engine.


CLS 60/311
TXT Apparatus under subclass 272 treating the exhaust gases by absorbing or
    adsorbing one of the liquid or gaseous components; or by separating a
    liquid or solid component by a filter, a centrifugal device, or a
    gravitational device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    299+,   for apparatus in which exhaust gas is passed into or through a
    catalytic bed that may also filter the gas or sorb one of its components.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, appropriate subclass, for a gas separator of
    general utility.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, for gas separation apparatus, per se.


CLS 60/312
TXT Apparatus under subclass 272 correlating, or correlated with the pressure
    waves or pulses produced by the regular, intermittent discharge from an
    engine's exhaust port or ports.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 277+, for a muffler, per se, tuned to silence
    or muffle pressure pulses.


CLS 60/313
TXT Apparatus under subclass 312 receiving pressure pulses from successively
    firing cylinders.


CLS 60/314
TXT Apparatus under subclass 312 in which the waves or pulses aid in the
    scavenging or charging of a combustion chamber of a two-cycle engine.


CLS 60/315
TXT Apparatus under subclass 272 receiving exhaust gas from the engine and
    forcibly moving it toward discharge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281,    for an exhaust system that collects exhaust gas or uses it as a
    pressure fluid source.


CLS 60/316
TXT Apparatus under subclass 315, in which exhaust gases are moved toward
    discharge entrainment in a separately supplied rapidly moving fluid stream.


CLS 60/317
TXT Apparatus under subclass 272 having structure in which the engine discharge
    is mixed with a second fluid prior to emission into the atmosphere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282+,   for a system in which engine discharge is mingled with a fluid with
    which it reacts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 219 and 259+ for a muffler in which gas is
    mingled with another gas to muffle the sound by diluting the moving fluid.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 129, for a
    system in which exhaust gas is the carrier for a material to be diffused.


CLS 60/318
TXT Apparatus under subclass 317, in which the material mixed with the exhaust
    gas is water in the vaporous state.


CLS 60/319
TXT Apparatus under subclass 317 in which exhaust gas flowing in the structure
    entrains and carries along the external fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 41.64 for an air cooled
    internal combustion engine in which the cooling air is caused to move by a
    jet pump actuated by exhaust gas.


CLS 60/320
TXT Apparatus under subclass 272 having structure for the transfer of heat to
    or from exhaust gas or to or from exhaust gas handling structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 41.01+, for the cooling of
    the parts of an internal combustion engine other than the exhaust system;
    subclasses 434+ for a charge-forming system having means for heating the
    charge or for a device vaporizing oil to form a charge, for a device
    vaporizing oil to form a charge; and subclass 142.5 for an internal
    combustion engine having means using heat from one part to heat another
    part by exchanging heat between the parts.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 19.5 for a stove, oven or heating
    vessel heated by exhaust gas.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 52, for a heat exchange means for
    transferring heat from exhaust gas to engine feed structure.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclass 12.3 for an automobile heated by the
    exhaust of an engine.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclass 145 for a gas-liquid
    contact engine supply device heated by exhaust gas.


CLS 60/321
TXT Apparatus under subclass 320 in which an element collecting exhaust gas
    from a plurality of cylinders is cooled.


CLS 60/322
TXT Apparatus under subclass 272 with provision for dimension variation
    produced by temperature change or having means absorbing, preventing, or
    limiting the transmission of vibration.


CLS 60/323
TXT Apparatus under subclass 272 comprising a chamber or flow line fed by
    branch inlets from a plurality of distinct combustion chambers.


CLS 60/324
TXT Apparatus under subclass 272 having distinct structure dividing,
    modulating, or providing for nonturbulent flow of exhaust gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 37 for a tubular conduit
    having a flow regulator or baffle.


CLS 60/325
TXT Apparatus under class definition having a means or source capable of
    flowing or pressurizing a liquid or gaseous motive fluid, and motor means
    responsive to the pressure of the flow or of the fluid to convert such
    pressure or flow to useful mechanical work, said motive fluid being capable
    of transmitting energy from said source to said motor.

    (1)     Note-Definitions

    I.      Motive fluid includes expansible or nonexpansible fluids, entrained
    in a system including a pump and motor, or fluents whose characteristics
    permit a transmission of energy or flow between a pump and motor which is
    not inconsistent with that of the fluents.

    II.     Motive fluid responsive means  comprises means actuated by the flow
    or pressure of the fluid or by the absence of such flow or pressure between
    the pump and the motor.

    III.    Working member position responsive means comprises means positively
    actuated by the motor working member when it attains a given predetermined
    position in the working chamber.  Such position includes a position of the
    working member attained after a predetermined number of strokes or
    revolutions of the working member.

    IV.     A variable displacement pump or motor includes an expansible
    chamber and means to vary the volume of fluid admitted to or discharged
    from the chamber.  The means which varies the volume of fluid will be
    generally either (1) means which physically displaces either the piston or
    working member or the cylinder or housing of the expansible chamber to vary
    the effective stroke of the piston or working member, or (2) means which
    alters the timing of the inlet or exhaust valve with respect to the piston
    or working member timing to vary the effective stroke of the piston or
    working member.

    (2)     Note.  Except as noted below, this and indented subclasses include
    those pump-motor combinations in which the pump creates a pressurized
    motive fluid to be transmitted to the motor to output useful work because
    of the pressure differential of the working fluid between the fluid inlet
    to and outlet from the motor.

    (3)     Note.  Expansible chamber motors having a nominal pressure source
    and an exhaust treating means are classified in Class 60 subclasses 654,
    681, and 685+, dealing with motors combined with exhaust treating means, on
    the theory that the device would be classified in Class 91, Motors:
    Expansible Chamber Type, or some other motor class, except for the claimed
    exhaust treatment feature and would not be classified on the grounds of a
    motor with a nominal pump combination.

    (4)     Note.  The combination of an internal combustion engine and means
    to induce or create flow of exhaust gases or to treat exhaust gases from
    the combustion chamber of the internal combustion engine is not considered
    to define a motor having a working member actuated by motive fluid.  Such a
    combination is regarded rather as directed to exhaust treatment classified
    in subclasses 272+.

    (5)     Note.  A fluid motor in which the exhaust thereof passes through a
    heat exchanger or condenser arranged to induce additional flow in the
    motive fluid is excluded from this subclass and will be found under
    subclasses 685+, exhaust treatment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.01+, for a system in which a combination device is a pressure fluid
    source feeding combustion products to the motor;

    595,    for a system in which a free piston type of internal combustion
    engine is a pressure fluid source for a motor;

    597+,   for a system in which an internal combustion engine is a pressure
    fluid source for a motor;

    643+,   for a system in which indirectly applied heat energize motive fluid
    for a motor.

    (6)     Note.  This and indented subclasses include patents claiming motive
    fluid pressurizing means combined with means to convert the pressurized
    motive fluid to useful work.

    Output Transmission.  In general gearing or linkage may be included as part
    of the power output means or transmission of the claimed motor means.
    However, when the transmission includes some part which does not always,
    partake of a given motion in accordance with the motion of the motor
    working member, such as a selectively engageable clutch, this no longer
    constitutes subject matter for this class.  See Class 74, Machine Element
    or Mechanism Class 188, Brakes, Class 192, Clutches and Power Stop Control,
    475, Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components.

    Motive Fluid Source



    (1)     Pumps

    The inclusion in a claim of a pump broadly which provides motive fluid for
    utilization by fluid motor does not preclude classification in a fluid
    motor class, i.e.

    Class 91,       Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type

    Class 92,       Expansible Chamber Devices

    Class 415,      Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps

    Class 416,      Fluid Reaction Surfaces

    Class 418,   Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices.

    The following examples of terminolgy have been considered to be nominal
    inclusion of a pump and if so claimed would not preclude classification in
    a fluid motor class:

    (a) a pump

    (b) a rotary pump

    (c) a motor driven pump

    (d) a motor driven rotary pump

    (e) an internal combustion engine

           having an intake manifold (as a source of         vacuum)

    (f)  a plurality of pumps arranged in parallel

    (g)  a circuit comprising a pump, pumps, and        motor

    The following examples have been considered to be significant inclusion of
    a pump and if so claimed would cause classification in Class 60 if
    otherwise appropriate:

    (a)     a pump which is characterized as to type, e.g., centrigugal,
    eduction, constant displacement, variable displacement, pulsator, etc.,
    (however, see (b) in preceeding paragraph)

    (b)     a motor driven pump in which the motor is characterized as to type
    e.g., turbine, electric motor, internal combustion engine (however, see (e)
    in preceding paragraph).

    (c)     a pump which has any detail thereof recited as, for example a
    "piston"

    (d)     a plurality of pumps in series

    (e)     a particular physical relation between a nominal pump, and (1) a
    motor supplied thereby, or (2) with a pump, reservoir or tank forming part
    of the circuit supplying the pump.  For example, this particular physical
    relation may include their relation in space or mechanical interconnection
    means.

    Accumulators  A motor having its working chamber in consant communication
    with an accumulator for pressurized motive fluid is not precluded from a
    motor class regardless of the specificity with which the accumulator is
    recited, the accumulator in this case being considered to be merely a part
    of the expansible chamber.

    However, unless the accumulator is claimed so broadly as to amount to a
    mere conduit, these subclasses of Class 60 take an accumulator combined
    with a fluid motor in which a control valve is interposed between the
    accumulator and the motor, if otherwise appropriate.

    Also Class 91 subclass 5 takes an expansible chamber type motor having as a
    part thereof a storage chamber that holds only a sufficient quantity of
    motive fluid for one stroke and that must be recharged for each succeeding
    stroke.

    (7)     Note.  When the pump-motor combination is claimed so broadly so
    that the recitations applicable to either the pump or the motor can not
    form the basis for classification in a pump or a motor class, then
    classification is in this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.01+, for fluid pressure generator-motor combinations wherein the fluid
    pressure generator is a means for bringing together fluids from different
    sources or of different qualities and using them in a motor.  The motor may
    be a turbine or an expansible chamber type.

    597+,   for fluid pressure generator-motor combinations wherein the exhaust
    from an internal combustion engine means is in fact the motive fluid which
    is convertible to useful work by the motor means which may be a turbine or
    an expansible chamber type motor.


CLS 60/326
TXT Apparatus under subclass 325 in which the fluid medium used to transmit
    energy from the pump to the motor means is (1) composed of two or more
    substances which do not dissolve one in the other or otherwise chemically
    react with each other but which together flow as a fluid, e.g., oil and
    air, oil and iron particles, etc., or (2) a liquid having a normally high
    degree of viscosity or electro-conductivity such as mercury.


CLS 60/327
TXT Methods under subclass 325.


CLS 60/328
TXT Apparatus under subclass 325 having (1) signals, indicator, registers,
    recorders, or gauges for indicating a condition or the position of a motor
    or pump part such as a piston, control member, valve etc., such devices
    consisting of a relatively movable, changeable or audible information
    giving parts, or (2) transparent viewing means whereby the motor or pump
    operation or the condition of some part thereof may be observed.

    (1)     Note.  For classification under part (1) of this definition there
    must be either an indicia or an audible or visual signal.  Relative to
    indicia, there must be graduation or markings in the disclosure as claimed.
     Where it is indicated that the mere position of a motor part is indicative
    of a condition of the motor (e.g., valve handle position corresponds to
    motor or pump position) classification under this definition does not
    result unless some cooperating indicia are included.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 232+ for expansible chamber type
    volume or rate of flow meters and see section III of the class definition
    of Class 91, Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, for a general statement of
    the line between Class 91 and Class 73.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 1 for fluid motors,
    signals and indicators, and see Search Class 73 note above.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 5 for signals, indicators or
    inspection windows for expansible chamber devices.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+ for electrical
    automatic condition responsive indicating systems.


CLS 60/329
TXT Apparatus under subclass 325 having means by which the motive fluid or the
    apparatus may be controlled or adjusted responsive to a change in the
    compressibility, temperature or viscosity of said motive fluid to maintain
    a desired output work rate or to avoid apparatus failure.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus or motive fluid control means responsive to motive
    fluid pressure variations, per se, are not included in this subclass even
    though it may be argued that pressure variations are the result of
    compressibility, temperature or viscosity variations of the motive fluid.


CLS 60/330
TXT Apparatus under subclass 325 comprising means for transmitting torque from
    a first rotating shaft to a second coaxial rotatable shaft, to which shafts
    are secured shroud elements, each of which is generally concave (e.g.,
    hemispherical or hemitoroidal) and provided with generally radial vanes
    secured within the concavity, the elements being capable of forming a
    spheroidal toroidal enclosure for a mass of liquid material, in which
    device rotation of the first shaft (and of the vanes carried thereby, i.e.,
    impeller) causes particles of the liquid mass or working fluid to circulate
    in a small circle that lies in a plane coincident with (or parallel to) the
    axis of rotation of the shafts and simultaneously circulate in a larger
    circle that lies in a plane at right angles to said axis, which circulation
    of the mass causes rotation of the second shaft and the vanes i.e., turbine
    carried thereby are moved by the fluid.

    (1)     Note.  The devices herein provided for are known in the art under
    various names including "vortex flow drive", "fluid drive", "fluid
    coupling", "fly wheel", "torque convertor", "hydrokinetic torque
    transformer". Such devices generally fall into one of two categories.  In
    one of these (e.g., "fluid coupling") the angular velocity of the driven
    shroud element referred to in the definition for this subclass cannot be
    greater than that of the driving element (and is usually less due to
    slippage); thus the torque is not increased.  In the other category (e.g.,
    "torque converter") an additional radially-vaned element is interposed in
    the flow of fluid to modify, direction of movement and velocity in the
    fluid and thereby change the torque transmitted from the first shaft to the
    second shaft.

    (2)     Note.  Frequently the devices classified in this and indented
    subclasses (e.g., fluid couplings, torque converters, etc.) are combined
    with clutches and/or gearing and/or brakes among other mechanisms.



    (A)     The line between Class 192, Clutches and Power-Stop Controls, and
    this class (Class 60) is not intended to be changed as a result of the
    establishment of this subclasses (330+).  Class 60 (subclasses 330+) is
    intended to be the locus of patents to a vortex-flow drive, per se, and may
    include a brake means which may be applied to an element interposed in the
    path of fluid in the vortex flow to prevent rotation of said element
    relative to the input member, output member or a stationary member.  The
    brake means in this situation is of the type found, per se, in Class 188,
    Brakes.  For the combination of a vortex-flow drive and a clutch to connect
    either element to its associated input or output shaft see Class 192,
    subclasses 3.21+.  Where the clutch is used to connect one of the elements
    to a stationary member to prevent rotation of said element see Class 192
    subclasses 3.34+, but see (B) below.

    (B)     Class 188, Brakes, (particularly subclass 296) is the locus of
    patents to a "fluid brake", wherein the structure is superficially similar
    to a vortex flow drive as described in the definition of this subclass
    above.  However, in the disclosures found in Class 188 subclass 296, one of
    the elements is fixed to its supporting structure to retard rotation of the
    other element.  But see (A) above.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, is the locus of patents claiming a
    fluid drive in combination with nonplanetary gearing; and Class 475,
    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, is the locus of patents
    claiming a fluid drive in combination with planetary gearing.



    645- prime mover and control for driving fluid drive and gearing.

    655- fluid drive is included as part of internal mechanism of a single
    gearing unit.

    677- where the fluid drive either divides or combines the plural power
    paths to or from a planetary gearing system.



    687+,   for devices in which a fluid coupling is included in one of plural
    power paths to or from a planetary gearing.

    710,    for fluid drives which either divide or combine alternate plural
    paths to or from a nonplanetary gearing.

    720,    where a fluid coupling is included in one of plural power paths to
    or from a nonplanetary gearing.

    730+,   fluid drive combined with gearing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327,    for methods of operating fluid couplings of the type which are
    classified in this subclass.

    329,    for coaxial impeller and turbine units having means to control the
    unit or the motive fluid in response to changes in compressibility,
    temperature or viscosity of the motive fluid.

    435+,   and notes therewith for nonvortex flow transmission units having
    associated brakes or clutches.


CLS 60/331
TXT Apparatus under subclass 330 wherein turbine means is provided with means
    by which it may be rotated so that the driven member may be rotated in
    either clockwise or counter-clockwise direction with respect to the
    direction of rotation of the driving member.


CLS 60/332
TXT Apparatus under subclass 331 wherein rotational direction of the turbine
    means may be controlled because of the ability to change the pitch of the
    vanes associated with either or all of the impeller means, turbine means or
    guide means in the motive fluid circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    342,    for units having means to change the pitch of a flow directing
    guide in combination with a means to brake said guide against relative
    rotation with one of the parts of the unit.

    354+,   for hydrokinetic units having means to change the pitch of flow
    directing guide means in order to vary the power output of the unit.


CLS 60/333
TXT Apparatus under subclass 331 wherein rotational direction of a turbine
    means may be altered by either releasing for free rotation or braking or
    otherwise securing against rotation certain vane means which may rotate
    about the axis of the unit and which is effective in the motive fluid path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    341+,   for means to brake a rotating part of a hydrokinetic unit to
    control the speed of rotation thereof.


CLS 60/334
TXT Apparatus under subclass 331 having vane means which may be inserted into
    or removed from the motive fluid circuit to effectively change the
    direction of the motive fluid flow and thus the rotational direction of the
    turbine means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    353,    for a hydrokinetic unit having motive fluid guide vane means
    transferable axially of said unit into or out of the motive fluid flow path
    to control flow of said fluid other than to cause the driven member to
    reverse rotational direction.


CLS 60/335
TXT Apparatus under subclass 331 having plural hydrokinetic units with means
    whereby one or another of the units may be activated and thus establish the
    rotational direction of the driven member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    363,    for plural impeller-turbine units.


CLS 60/336
TXT Apparatus under subclass 330 having means by which air or other foreign
    matter may be removed from the working fluid.


CLS 60/337
TXT Apparatus under subclass 330 including means whereby the temperature of any
    of the components of the apparatus may be changed other than as a result of
    the normal functioning of any of said components.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329,    for hydrokinetic transmission units having means to vary the
    temperature of the working fluid responsive to the sensed temperature of
    said working fluid either by adding or withdrawing working fluid to or from
    the system or otherwise exchanging heat with said working fluid.


CLS 60/338
TXT Apparatus under subclass 330 having means to dampen, attenuate or otherwise
    control any shock surge or vibration which may develop in the transmission
    unit or its supporting means as a result of starting, stopping or
    continuous operation.


CLS 60/339
TXT Apparatus under subclass 330 having means by which any part of said
    transmission unit may be lubricated.


CLS 60/340
TXT Apparatus under subclass 330 wherein a plurality of turbines are provided
    in a system which may comprise a plurality of separate or separable motive
    fluid circuits, and wherein the turbines of each of the units are adapted
    to be connected to separate output members, which members may be driven at
    different speeds.


CLS 60/341
TXT Apparatus under subclass 330 having guide vane means, other than the
    impeller or turbine vane means, located in the circulatory flow path of the
    fluid to give a certain direction of flow to said fluid, being axially
    rotatable with and independently of the impeller and or turbine, and having
    brake or clutch means whereby said guide vane means may be held against
    relative rotation with respect to the turbine, impeller or a stationery
    member.

    (1)     Note.  The brake or clutch found in this subclass may be of the
    type which are found, per se, in Class 188, Brakes, and in Class 192,
    Clutches and Power-Stop Control.  For the line between this subclass and
    Classes 188 and 192 see the notes to subclass 330 above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333,    for hydrokinetic units having means to brake or retard rotation of
    one of the vane means located in the motive fluid flow path whereby the
    direction of rotation of the turbine means may be reversed.


CLS 60/342
TXT Apparatus under subclass 341 having additional means to vary the pitch or
    otherwise vary the exposure of one or more of the members to flow of the
    motive fluid in its flow path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332,    for fluid couplings having means to control the pitch of the vanes
    of any of the impeller, flow guide or turbine units to reverse turbine
    rotation.


CLS 60/343
TXT Apparatus under subclass 341 having a condition responsive or manual means
    operable to adjust the clutch or brake means.


CLS 60/344
TXT Apparatus under subclass 343 in which at least part of the casing, which
    houses the members in the motive fluid flow path or which is integral with
    one or more of said members, may be held against rotation in order to alter
    a characteristic of the flow of the motive fluid.


CLS 60/345
TXT Apparatus under subclass 341 having a clutch means which permits relative
    rotation in one direction only between any two or more of the rotatable
    members which are in the operative path of the motive fluid.


CLS 60/346
TXT Apparatus under subclass 341 having a plurality of rotatable guide members
    in the operative path or the motive fluid and which are not impeller or
    turbine members, and having clutch means to permit rotation thereof in one
    direction only relative to the casing or frame means.


CLS 60/347
TXT Apparatus under subclass 330 having manual means or means actuated in
    response to a condition to actively regulate or control the output of the
    unit.


CLS 60/348
TXT Apparatus under subclass 347 in which a plurality of hydrokinetic units are
    axially spaced from each other, wherein the rotating members of the units
    rotate about the same axis and have means to selectively control the flow
    of motive fluid to the units.


CLS 60/349
TXT Apparatus under subclass 347 wherein the output of the unit is controlled
    by adjusting the turbine or impeller means or both relative to one another
    in a direction parallel to or coaxial with the axis of rotation of the
    turbine.


CLS 60/350
TXT Apparatus under subclass 349 wherein the output of the unit is controlled
    by moving the turbine and/or impeller unit relative to one another in a
    direction of the axis of rotation to thereby vary the axial spacing between
    the turbine and the impeller members.


CLS 60/351
TXT Apparatus under subclass 347 having means which may be moved into or out of
    contact with the working fluid through which means the quantity of said
    working fluid circulating in the unit between the impeller and turbine
    members may be varied.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    357+,   for additional means whereby the quantity of working fluid in the
    transmission unit may be varied.


CLS 60/352
TXT Apparatus under subclass 347 wherein the output of the unit is controlled
    or regulated by means placed in the motive fluid circuit to alter the flow,
    either in rate or direction, which said motive fluid would otherwise assume.


CLS 60/353
TXT Apparatus under subclass 352 wherein at least one guide vane designed to
    act upon the motive fluid to change its normal direction of flow in the
    motive fluid circuit may be moved axially of the impeller and turbine units
    to a position wherein the effectiveness of said guide vane on said motive
    fluid is reduced or eliminated.

    (1)     Note.  The rotating members include the impeller, turbine and guide
    or reaction members positioned between the impeller and turbine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331,    for a reversible driven turbine with adjustable flow diverting
    means.

    349,    wherein the turbine or impeller may be axially adjusted.


CLS 60/354
TXT Apparatus under subclass 347 wherein the pitch of any or all of the vanes
    associated with the impeller, guide or turbine means of the transmission
    unit may be changed to alter the angle of incidence between said fluid and
    said vanes to vary the power output of said unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332,    for units having means to vary the pitch of the flow guide or
    reaction blade means to the point where the rotational direction of turbine
    component may be reversed.


CLS 60/355
TXT Apparatus under subclass 354 having means which will, in response to sensed
    speed of a component of the transmission unit, set the pitch of said vane
    means.


CLS 60/356
TXT Apparatus under subclass 354 having means which will, in response to sensed
    pressure of said motive fluid of the transmission unit, set the pitch of
    said vane means.


CLS 60/357
TXT Apparatus under subclass 347 having means whereby the quantity of motive
    fluid employed in quantity the fluid transmission may be varied.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    351,    for transmission units having a scoop means insertable into the
    working fluid through which a quantity of said working fluid may be removed
    from said unit.


CLS 60/358
TXT Apparatus under subclass 357 including a pump means which is in continuous
    operation to pressurize a fluid, not for the purpose of transmitting power
    to the work output member, but instead to pressurize said fluid to the
    point where it may be added to or subtracted from the fluid employed as the
    motive fluid in a fluid transmission unit and thereby control the power
    transferred through said unit.


CLS 60/359
TXT Apparatus under subclass 357 having valve means whereby a quantity of
    motive fluid may be extracted from the transmission to reduce the quantity
    employed thereby and thus reduce the power output from the transmission.


CLS 60/360
TXT Apparatus under subclass 359 having means to control the valve means in
    response to a sensed fluid pressure.


CLS 60/361
TXT Apparatus under subclass 330 having other vane or vane like means located
    in the circulatory flow path of the motive fluid to give a certain
    direction of flow to said fluid, and wherein said other vane means is
    disassociated from said impeller and or turbine and act independently
    therefrom.


CLS 60/362
TXT Apparatus under subclass 361 wherein said other vane means may rotate
    independently of said impeller or turbine but coaxially therewith.


CLS 60/363
TXT Apparatus under subclass 330 having plural distinct fluid transmission
    units interconnected to output torque to a single output shaft.

    (1)     Note.  A fluid passage may interconnect the working fluid of the
    various units to equalize levels in the units.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    335,    for plural impeller-turbine units with means to activate one or
    another of them in order to change the rotational direction of the driven
    member.


CLS 60/364
TXT Apparatus under subclass 330 wherein either the turbine or the impeller
    component of the fluid transmission unit is an integral part of the housing
    enclosing the components which react within the motive fluid circulatory
    path.


CLS 60/365
TXT Apparatus under subclass 364 having means associated with any component of
    the unit and being designed to react in a special way with the motive fluid
    to give it a distinct flow direction.


CLS 60/366
TXT Apparatus under subclass 364 wherein the impeller and turbine components of
    the fluid transmission unit are shaped so that the motive fluid will assume
    a toroidal flow path in its operation.


CLS 60/367
TXT Apparatus under subclass 366 wherein both the turbine and impeller
    components are provided with motive fluid flow confining means cooperating
    at the interface of the two components which creates a core or void in the
    circulating path of said fluid which lies in a plane at right angles to the
    axis of rotation of the transmission unit.


CLS 60/368
TXT Apparatus under subclass 325 including means separate from the motor or
    pump to cause or permit the pump or motor to operate or not to operate for
    a period of time and then act to start, stop or change the mode of
    operation of the motor or pump; or, cause the motor or pump to operate
    through a given cycle of operation, the operation of said means being
    independent of and not controlled by the operation of the motor or pump or
    a pressure or flow condition of the motive fluid supplied to or exhausted
    from the motor or pump and not requiring the intervention of a human
    operator.

    (1)     Note.  The means is not considered to be independent of the motor
    or pump and is not included under this definition if its operation is
    initiated by the motor or pump.

    (2)     Note.  The means separate from the motor or pump may not be another
    motor or pump which produces power for external use such as the first stage
    of a multiple expansion engine or pump.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 494 for
    the application of power generation or distribution which includes turbine
    or generator control.  Note, where significant power plants structure is
    recited, classification is in the appropriate art device class.


CLS 60/369
TXT Apparatus under subclass 325 having a pump or other means, not otherwise
    provided for, to place a gaseous or liquid motive fluid in a condition so
    that subsequently it may be expanded or contracted or otherwise cause the
    activation of a transducer or motor means having (1) a cyclically operable
    oscillatable or linearly reciprocable work output member and (2) means to
    control the flow of said motive fluid to cause said work output member to
    do work cyclically.


CLS 60/370
TXT Apparatus under subclass 369 wherein a gaseous working fluid is employed
    for at least a portion of the cyclic movement of the motor means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 5, for a self-cycling
    expansible chamber motor having as a part thereof a storage chamber that
    holds only a sufficient quantity of motive fluid for one stroke and that
    must be recharged in the cycle for each succeeding stroke.


CLS 60/371
TXT Apparatus under subclass 369 comprising means to store some of the energy
    available to activate or output from the motor means during part of the
    time while the motor working member is in motion whereby said stored energy
    may be released to motivate the working member during another part of the
    time when it is in motion.


CLS 60/372
TXT Apparatus under subclass 371 wherein the energy resulting from the
    gravitational force on the load is stored during a part of the cycle of
    operation of the motor means for release to aid in the activation of the
    working member during another part of the cycle of operation of the motor.


CLS 60/373
TXT Apparatus under subclass 369 having means controlling a pump and/or a motor
    means whereby the stroke of a motor working member is caused to change in
    length from one stroke to another.


CLS 60/374
TXT Apparatus under subclass 369 having a plurality of fluid motor output means
    wherein the cyclic movement of one is coordinated with the cyclic movement
    of another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 170+, for fluid motors
    having relatively movable working members with one having motive fluid
    controlled by, movably interconnected with or moved by another.


CLS 60/375
TXT Apparatus under subclass 369 having a plurality of motive fluid
    pressurizing means operable in concert or individually to motivate the
    output means of a fluid motor.


CLS 60/376
TXT Apparatus under subclass 369 having means to cause the speed of the working
    member of the output motor means to cyclically vary in its cycle of
    operation either before or after it has begun to do work but subsequent to
    the activation of the means provided to initiate operation of the apparatus
    in the first instance.


CLS 60/377
TXT Apparatus under subclass 376 wherein the output motor delay is caused to
    occur at that point in the cycle of its operation between the point where
    the work stroke of the motor working members has been completed and the
    return stroke of the working member is begun.


CLS 60/378
TXT Apparatus under subclass 369 having means accommodating the motive fluid
    required for efficient operation of the apparatus such as, means to purge
    the motive fluid of excess fluid air or other ingredients, means to
    attenuate shocks or surges in the motive fluid, or means to manage from the
    motive fluid system of motive fluid in system.


CLS 60/379
TXT Apparatus under subclass 369 wherein control of the motive fluid may be
    usurped from the motive fluid control means which causes the motor means to
    operate cyclically by a means either responsive to a predetermined
    condition being sensed or by means for manual take-over of the cyclic or
    other motive fluid control means to actively control the motor actuation.

    (1)     Note.  Manual means to merely activate or stop the motor means,
    even if means are provided to return the motor means to a retracted or some
    other predetermined position when a manual stop means is activated, is not
    included under this definition.


CLS 60/380
TXT Apparatus under subclass 369 in which a working member of the motor means
    operates from a given position through a forward stroke and a return stroke
    to the starting position, the motor having control means which when
    operated causes the working member to move through the forward and return
    stroke and then stop even though the control means is maintained in the
    operated position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    368,    for devices which control motor operation upon sensing a
    predetermined number of output strokes of the motor.


CLS 60/381
TXT Apparatus under subclass 369 wherein the motive fluid is pressurized by a
    variable displacement pump means which is controlled in response to a
    sensed condition of the motive fluid or to the position of the motor means
    activated by said motive fluid.


CLS 60/382
TXT Apparatus under subclass 381 wherein the pump displacement is controlled
    through a cam or gear means actuated by the end directly and responsive to
    the position of the motor means.


CLS 60/383
TXT Apparatus under subclass 369 having means either in the form of pump
    control means, motive fluid flow control means to the motor, motor exhaust
    control or other means to cause the output speed of the motor to be varied
    during its normal cyclic operation.

    (1)     Note.  Means provided to cause a reciprocating motor to gradually
    decelerate and/or accelerate at the end of the stroke are included in this
    subclass.


CLS 60/384
TXT Apparatus under subclass 325 including a source of pressurized motive fluid
    for driving an output motor and having a distinct expansible chamber
    device: (1) in series with the output motor actuating a control terminating
    the flow of motive fluid when it has passed a selected volume of fluid; (2)
    in series with the output motor establishing the rate of flow through the
    motor by externally operating the displacement device to pass fluid at a
    selected rate; or (3) connected to be driven by the output motor to measure
    the movement of the motor, the displaced liquid actuating a means
    controlling operation of the motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 388, for an expansible
    chamber motor having a fluid operated feedback to the motive fluid
    controller responsive to the working member position.


CLS 60/385
TXT Apparatus under subclass 325 including a source of motive fluid, an output
    motor, a reversible servo-motor controlling the flow of motive fluid to the
    output motor and a reversible manually operated pump that supplies
    actuating fluid to drive the servo-motor.


CLS 60/386
TXT Apparatus under subclass 385 in which the output of the manually operated
    pump is supplied to and drives the output motor in the absence of input
    from the source of motive fluid.


CLS 60/387
TXT Apparatus under subclass 325 having means whereby the motive fluid may be
    pressurized or transmitted to or admitted to the motor means in
    volumetrically definable charges which may be varied in magnitude at will
    to produce a predetermined increment of movement of the motor output member.


CLS 60/388
TXT Apparatus under subclass 325 having output motor; an externally operated
    manipulator means movable over a range for causing the motor to position an
    output member in a corresponding position along a selected path or in a
    selected area; and an electrical or mechanical connection between the
    output member and the manipulator correcting any discrepancy between the
    position assigned by the manipulator and that attained by the output.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    384,    for a system in which a fluid means measures the movement of the
    output and gives a feedback to the motor controller.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 358+, for a motor
    having working member position feedback to the motive fluid controller.

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 465, for an earth working tool having a
    tool lifting motor with follow-up controls.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 132+ for a motor vehicle provided with
    steering gear of the fluid power assist type, which may involve feedback.


CLS 60/389
TXT Apparatus under subclass 388 in which the manipulated output motor is an
    auxiliary that positions a displacement adjustor of a main pump or motor.


CLS 60/390
TXT Apparatus under subclass 388 in which electrical means are used in the
    discrepancy sensing linkage.


CLS 60/391
TXT Apparatus under subclass 388 in which movement of the manipulator initiates
    the delivery of motive fluid to the output motor from a variable
    displacement pump by changing the displacement from zero, the linkage from
    the output member returning the displacement to zero upon the attainment of
    the selected position.


CLS 60/392
TXT Apparatus under subclass 388 in which movement of the manipulator moves one
    surface of a valving means to initiate flow of motive fluid to the output
    motor, the movement of the output motor to its selected position moving or
    carrying the other surface of the valving means to a position stopping the
    flow of motive fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 374+, for a motor
    having working member feedback to motive fluid control having plural
    movable valve parts.


CLS 60/393
TXT Apparatus under subclass 325 including an attendant actuated controller
    biased in one direction and having structure by which a force indicative of
    a motor condition or motor pressure reacts on the controller usually to
    give the operator a feel of the load on the apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 385+, for a motor
    having a working member position feedback to motive fluid control having a
    bias type of input and feedback signal means.


CLS 60/394
TXT Apparatus under subclass 325 whereby the time in which, or length of time
    taken to perform an operation is controlled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    376,    for a self-cycling reciprocating output system having a timer or
    time delay means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 35+, for a motor
    controlled by a timer, delay, pattern or cyclic control.

    417,    Pumps, subclass 12, for the control of a pump motor by a timer or
    delay means.


CLS 60/395
TXT Apparatus under subclass 325 in which the difference between (A) criteria
    or condition of a motor, pump, motor-pump system, or another
    self-sufficient device, a condition of a motive fluid in said motor, pump
    or motor-pump system, or a means driven by said motor, and (B) the criteria
    or condition of a comparable functional counterpart of a separate motor,
    pump, motor-pump system or separate self-sufficient device, its output or
    motive fluid, is continuously or intermittently detected whereby a means
    responsive to the detected difference acts to control the motor, pump,
    etc., in a sense or direction to decrease the difference.


CLS 60/396
TXT Apparatus under subclass 325 having an internal combustion engine as a part
    of the pressure fluid source and which uses in its operation the lubricant,
    cooling fluid, or combustion air of the engine or which drives the system
    pump by the starter motor of the engine.


CLS 60/397
TXT Apparatus under subclass 396 in which air is withdrawn from the output
    motor by the suction of the intake manifold of the engine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclass, in which
    the motive fluid is moved through the motor by a nominal "internal
    combustion engine having an intake manifold."  See (4) Note, B, (1) e of
    the class definition of Class 92.


CLS 60/398
TXT Apparatus under subclass 327 physically related to some feature of the
    earth or in which pressure or kinetic energy of nature energizes motive
    fluid.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes devices providing a head of liquid
    that furnishes pressurized motive fluid to a motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    495+,   for a motor driven by a buoyant working member;

    639+,   for a motor actuated by accumulating and dumping liquid or fluent
    material;

    641,    for a device in which natural heat energizes motive fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, subclasses 2.1+, for a rotary
    kinetic fluid motor* or pump* with means for controlling casing* or flow
    guiding means in response to natural fluid current force or direction.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclass 6, for an
    impeller driven by waves or impulses and subclasses 9+, for an unencased
    impeller adjustable in a fluid current.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 330+, for a pump driven by a tide or wave motor;
    334+, for a pump driven by a fluid current motor; and 337, for a pump
    driven by a buoyant motor.


CLS 60/399
TXT Apparatus under subclass 325 in which a precedent condition must be sensed
    or indicated as satisfied to permit the operator to change the operative
    state of the system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    368,    for a system controlled by a programmer to provide a series of
    operations in a desired order.


CLS 60/400
TXT Apparatus under subclass 325 having a manual energy input and a nonmanual
    energy input.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    428,    for a system having an automatic control means and a plurality of
    separately operable pumps or other pressure fluid sources.

    486,    for a residual system having plural energy input means.


CLS 60/401
TXT Apparatus under subclass 400 having structure by which the manual energy
    means may be mechanically linked to the output member to move it by direct
    mechanical action.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 391, for a motor having
    means for alternative manual manipulation of the load.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 269.01+, for a reciprocating press having fluid
    pressure actuation combined with mechanical actuation.


CLS 60/402
TXT Apparatus under subclass 400 in which the output means is moved by a motor
    supplied with motive fluid from a manually driven pump and from a separate
    power driven pump.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    386,    for a system in which a manual pump driving a control actuating
    servo-motor furnishes the motive fluid to drive the main motor when the
    main pump is inactive.


CLS 60/403
TXT Apparatus under subclass 325 with (1) means that reacts to a condition of
    the system produced by breakage, plugging, or mechanical failure of an
    element; or to power failure, and exerts a control that tends to lessen an
    undesirable effect of the malfunction or power failure; or (2) distinct,
    normally inactive means operable to lessen harmful effects of malfunction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    399,    for a system in which unsafeness, unreadiness, or disarray prevents
    a manual change of the operative state of the system.

    400+,   for a system operable selectively by power or manual energy inputs.

    459+,   for a system having a safety valve relieving excessive pressure.


CLS 60/404
TXT Apparatus under subclass 403 including structure holding a standby reserve
    of energy that is released upon sensed malfunction of the normal energy
    supply means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    408+,   for a pneumatic system in which expansible fluid is alternately
    compressed into a storage reservoir and expanded from the reservoir to run
    a motor.

    413+,   for a system having structure controlling the release of stored
    work driving energy.


CLS 60/405
TXT Apparatus under subclass 403 comprising (1) an output motor, (2) one source
    of motive fluid for normally driving the motor, (3) a second source of
    motive fluid; and (4) a means responsive to a failure of the first source
    of motive fluid feeding motive fluid from the second source to the motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    386,    for a system in which a manual pump driving a control actuating
    servo-motor furnishes the power to drive the main motor when the main
    motive fluid pump is inactive.


CLS 60/406
TXT Apparatus under subclass 403 in which an output means is locked, braked,
    released or moved to and retained in a desired position responsive to power
    failure, or loss of motive fluid supply or pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    460,    for a system having a holding or braking valve in the exhaust line
    effective upon discontinuance of motor feed pressure to lock the motor in
    position.


CLS 60/407
TXT Apparatus under subclass 325 in which a gas is the motive fluid driving the
    motor and in which the gas is supplied to or removed from the motor by a
    pump or some other structure that is more than a mere feed or discharge
    line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370,    for an air driven self-cycling stroke device.

    397,    for a motor driven by the air being drawn into the intake of an
    internal combustion engine.


CLS 60/408
TXT Apparatus under subclass 407 having a storage vessel serving as the gas
    supply or removal device and a unit usable as either a motor or as a pump,
    the unit at one time serving to charge the vessel and, at another time
    being driven as a motor by gas from the charged storage vessel.


CLS 60/409
TXT Apparatus under subclass 407 with structure sensing an external condition
    or a condition of the apparatus and controlling the apparatus.


CLS 60/410
TXT Apparatus under subclass 409 in which an element of the apparatus is
    actuated responsive to a change in a condition in or of a vessel in which a
    store of gas under pressure or vacuum is selectively accumulated or
    released.


CLS 60/411
TXT Apparatus under subclass 409 in which the suction on one side of a motor
    element having atmospheric pressure on the other is controlled in response
    to a sensed condition.


CLS 60/412
TXT Apparatus under subclass 407 in which the gas supply or removal device is a
    pump.


CLS 60/413
TXT Apparatus under subclass 325 including structure that stores energy to be
    used to move the load and a manual or condition responsive means (1)
    controlling the input of energy to the storage means or (2) controlling the
    discharge of energy from the storage structure to the output motor of the
    apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404,    for a system having a stand-by stored energy means activated
    responsive to malfunction or power failure.

    469,    for structure accommodating pressure or volume surges that does not
    have means controlling the input or discharge from the structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 5, for an expansible
    chamber motor having as a part thereof a storage chamber that holds only a
    sufficient quantity of motive fluid for one stroke and that must be
    recharged for each succeeding stroke and subclasses 361+, for an expansible
    chamber motor having an electrical working member position feedback to
    motive fluid control.


CLS 60/414
TXT Apparatus under subclass 413 so arranged that energy taken from the output
    in reducing its speed, lowering its load or resisting over-run is
    controllably stored for future use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    408,    for a system using air as the motive fluid and having a convertible
    motor-pump device selectively charging or being driven by gas from a
    storage vessel.


CLS 60/415
TXT Apparatus under subclass 413 in which a store of compressed gas is produced
    by a pump acting on the gas or in which the storage vessel is charged with
    compressed gas from an external source.


CLS 60/416
TXT Apparatus under subclass 413 having more than one accumulator.


CLS 60/417
TXT Apparatus under subclass 413 including a storage vessel for compressed gas
    and a motive liquid pump both arranged to deliver motive liquid to an
    output motor; and a manual or automatic controller that selects the
    energizer or combination of energizers to produce both a rapid and a slow
    movement in a stroke operation such as a slow press and rapid retraction or
    a rapid advance to contact the work and a slow press.


CLS 60/418
TXT Apparatus under subclass 413 including a means sensing a condition of an
    accumulator or of a fluid in the accumulator and exerting a control.


CLS 60/419
TXT Apparatus under subclass 325 in which a pump that furnishes pressurized
    fluid to an output motor is driven at least in part by a motor operated by
    pressurized fluid of the system.


CLS 60/420
TXT Apparatus under subclass 325 having a plurality of separately operable
    motors, motor pistons, motor rotors or means delivering energy externally
    of the apparatus and including a control for the apparatus responsive to a
    condition of the system or  to an external condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    340,    for a coaxial impeller and turbine system in which plural turbines
    drive relatively movable output members.

    374,    for a self-cycling system having a plurality of correlated
    independently movable output members.


CLS 60/421
TXT Apparatus under subclass 420 including plural motive fluid generating pumps
    and plural output motors and in which an externally operated multiway valve
    or a valve network controlling motive fluid flow provides for different
    interconnections of the pumps and motors.


CLS 60/422
TXT Apparatus under subclass 420 with selectively operable motors and including
    means responsive to a condition of the apparatus that insures that the
    demand for motive fluid of a favored one of or group of motors of the
    plurality of motors is satisfied before any of the motive fluid from the
    generator is fed to any less favored motor.


CLS 60/423
TXT Apparatus under subclass 420 including manually or automatically operable
    structure for controlling or providing for the reversing operation of a
    motor driving a power input pump.


CLS 60/424
TXT Apparatus under subclass 420 in which motor means are connected in series
    in one condition of operation and in which the control means is effective
    to open a by-pass around one of the motor means or to cause one of the
    motors to be connected in parallel with another to serve as a by-pass for
    the other.


CLS 60/425
TXT Apparatus under subclass 420 having an output member, a plurality of motors
    or motor sections and a condition responsive means that in response to the
    sensed condition, makes all or less than all of the motor or motor sections
    effective in driving the output member.


CLS 60/426
TXT Apparatus under subclass 420 in which one motor or motor section is
    modulated or actuated separately from a second motor or motor section by a
    means sensing the speed, pressure in, or position of the second motor or
    motor section, or the relative condition of the sections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 511+, for plural
    motors the motive fluid for one working member being controlled responsive
    to a condition relating to another.


CLS 60/427
TXT Apparatus under subclass 420 including an external control means for
    selecting or controlling one or several of the plurality of motors
    separately from others of the plurality.


CLS 60/428
TXT Apparatus under subclass 325 including plural motive fluid pressurizing
    structures or pressure fluid sources including one, the delivery or output
    of which may be varied relative to that of another; the apparatus including
    a means responsive to a condition of the apparatus or to an external
    condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    375,    for plural correlated pumps in a system including a self-cycling
    reciprocating output device.

    402,    for a system in which separate manual and motor driven pumps supply
    motive fluid to the output motor.

    405,    for a system in which a standby motive fluid supply means takes the
    load responsive to the failure of the main supply means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, appropriate subclass for the condition responsive control of
    a pump system.


CLS 60/429
TXT Apparatus under subclass 428 including a multiway valve that is externally
    manipulated to provide different operative relationships of the
    pressurizing means or pressure sources.


CLS 60/430
TXT Apparatus under subclass 428 in which the relationship of the plural pump
    or source means to each other is changed by a means sensing a change in
    pressure or volume in a part of the apparatus.


CLS 60/431
TXT Apparatus under subclass 325 including a prime mover driving a motive fluid
    pump, there being a control in the apparatus (1) responding to a change in
    a condition of energization of, or of the feed to the prime mover; or (2)
    effecting a control of the feed to or energization of the prime mover.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    405,    for a safety system in which a second motive fluid supply means
    takes the load responsive to the failure of the first.

    423,    for a system of plural motors with an automatic control including
    means for controlling a drive of the motive fluid pump.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 1+, for a pump having a condition responsive
    control of the pump drive motor.


CLS 60/432
TXT Apparatus under subclass 431 in which energy input to a motive fluid
    energizing pump is initiated by an externally operated means and terminated
    by a means sensing that the stroke device has reached a selected position
    in its stroke.


CLS 60/433
TXT Apparatus under subclass 325 including means for pressurizing motive fluid
    the arrangement having structure interlinking or correlating the actuation
    of a motive fluid flow control element and a controller of the pressurizing
    means.


CLS 60/434
TXT Apparatus under subclass 433 in which the control means for a motor driving
    a motive fluid generating pump is connected for actuation along with a
    motive fluid flow controller that positions a stroke device.


CLS 60/435
TXT Apparatus under subclass 325 including a releasable device for mechanically
    securing together or resisting relative movement of two parts of the power
    train of the apparatus or for mechanically connecting an output member to
    an input member for direct drive of the output.

    (1)     Note.  A brake or clutch that is operated by the output member of
    the pressure fluid source motor system is reqarded as merely a nominal load
    for the system and does not make the organization classifiable in this
    subclass.

    (2)     Note.  A clutch connecting a prime mover to a motive fluid pump has
    been treated as part of a means controlling input to the pump.  See
    subclasses 423, 431, 433+, etc.

    (3)     Note.  In the absence of a significant pump or other pressure fluid
    source the combination of a fluid motor and a clutch or brake device is
    classifiable in Class 91 or 192 in accordance with the line established
    between these classes by the search notes in Class 91, subclass 41.  It is
    noted that a pump and turbine making up a vortex flow device combined with
    a brake or clutch, is classified as indicated in the search notes to
    subclass 330.


CLS 60/436
TXT Apparatus under subclass 435 including structure by which an actuator
    controlling the device and structure controlling motive fluid flow are
    caused to move together or in a fixed relationship.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 41+, for a motor with
    correlated control of motive fluid and locking means.


CLS 60/437
TXT Apparatus under subclass 435 in which the device includes means by which an
    input drive member may be directly connected to mechanically drive the
    output structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401,    for a system having selecting or simultaneous fluid motor and
    direct manual drive of the output.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 391, for a motor with
    alternative actuation of the load.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 3.32, for a vortex-flow
    drive and clutch providing alternative fluid and direct drive of the output.


CLS 60/438
TXT Apparatus under subclass 437 in which the direct connection is made
    responsive to a condition of operation without manual intervention.


CLS 60/439
TXT Apparatus under subclass 435 including a motive fluid control member in the
    assembly that can rotate independently of the pump or motor of the system
    and its rotation being controlled by a clutch or brake device attached to
    the frame to permit or prevent rotation, the release or immobilization of
    the member being effective to change the speed ratio of the pump to the
    motor or to reverse the direction of the motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    341+,   for a coaxial impeller turbine unit having a brake or clutch
    controlling movement of a flow guide located in the impeller turbine flow
    path.


CLS 60/440
TXT Apparatus under subclass 439 in which the device controlling the rotation
    of the independently rotatable member is controlled by a condition sensor
    or comprises a one way brake or clutch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    343+,   for a condition responsive brake controlling the movement of an
    intermediate flow guide in a coaxial impeller turbine unit.


CLS 60/441
TXT Apparatus under subclass 435 in which the device is actuated by structure
    responsive to an external condition, a condition of the system or a
    position of an element of the system.


CLS 60/442
TXT Apparatus under subclass 435 in which the device secures an output device
    against movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    406,    for a system that locks the output means responsive to breakage,
    plugging, mechanical failure or power failure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 41+, for a motor with
    correlated control of motive fluid and mechanical locking means.


CLS 60/443
TXT Apparatus under subclass 325 in which the displacement of the input pump or
    output motor of a pressure fluid source-motor system is adjusted by an
    externally operated servo-motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    389,    for a displacement controlling servo-motor having feedback linkage
    to the manipulating lever.


CLS 60/444
TXT Apparatus under subclass 443 in which the servo-motor has an external
    source of operating fluid or an auxiliary pump so that it is independent of
    the operation of the controlled pump or motor.


CLS 60/445
TXT Apparatus under subclass 325 having means by which the amount of motive
    fluid displaced for each stroke or revolution of a pump or motor device can
    be adjusted and having structure sensing a condition or position
    controlling the adjusting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    423,    for a system in which variable delivery to a motor is produced by
    automatically combining in different ways the outputs of plural pumps or
    pump sections.


CLS 60/446
TXT Apparatus under subclass 445 in which the displacement adjusted is that of
    the pump and the adjustment means is responsive to the position of a motor
    element or of an output member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    381,    for a condition or position responsive control of pump displacement
    in a self-cycling reciprocating output device.

    391,    for a system in which the displacement controller of a pump is
    moved a selected distance from "no delivery" to start a stroke of selected
    length and moved back to "no delivery" by a linkage to the motor or output
    when the selected stroke has been completed.


CLS 60/447
TXT Apparatus under subclass 445 in which the displacement controller of the
    motive fluid pump or motor is driven by an adjunctive fluid motor receiving
    its pressurized fluid from an adjunctive constant displacement pump, the
    output of which is directly proportional to its speed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    444,    for a system in which the displacement is adjusted by a manually
    controlled servo-motor.


CLS 60/448
TXT Apparatus under subclass 445 in which the controlling structure is actuated
    by a sensor measuring the rotary speed of a rotary output motor.


CLS 60/449
TXT Apparatus under subclass 445 in which the controlling structure is actuated
    by a senser measuring the rotary speed of a rotary input pump or of an
    input prime mover driving the input pump.


CLS 60/450
TXT Apparatus under subclass 445 in which a pressure actuated displacement
    controller responds to a pressure directly established by a means
    restricting the flow of motive fluid in a motor feed or discharge line.


CLS 60/451
TXT Apparatus under subclass 445 in which the displacement varying structure
    responds to changes in the twisting force of the motor or to pressure of
    motive fluid being removed from the motor.


CLS 60/452
TXT Apparatus under subclass 445 including a variable displacement pump the
    displacement of which is controlled by structure responsive to the pump
    discharge pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 212+ for a pump having a condition responsive
    displacement adjusting means.


CLS 60/453
TXT Apparatus under subclass 325 including structure for the separation or
    absorption of entrained impurities from the motive fluid; for discharging
    such impurities from the system; or for cleaning a part of the system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    336,    for a coaxial impeller and turbine unit having filtering,
    deaerating, cleaning or bleeding structure; and

    378,    for a cyclically operating reciprocating stroke device having
    purging structure.


CLS 60/454
TXT Apparatus under subclass 453 in which the structure separates a solid
    impurity from a motive liquid.


CLS 60/455
TXT Apparatus under subclass 325 including structure for collecting motive
    fluid leaking or escaping through a seal or passing through an intended
    fluid retaining part of the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    378,    for a cyclically operating reciprocating output device having a
    leakage collector.


CLS 60/456
TXT Apparatus under subclass 325 with (1) distinct structure for lubricating a
    part of the apparatus; or (2) distinct structure for cooling motive fluid
    or a part of the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329,    for a system having a condition responsive control of the
    temperature of the motive fluid;

    337,    for a coaxial impeller and turbine unit having heating or cooling
    means;

    339,    for a coaxial impeller and turbine unit having lubricating means;
    and

    396,    for a system using a part of the lubricant or cooling fluid of an
    internal combustion engine as motive fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclass, for a heat exchanger, per se.

    184,    Lubrication, appropriate subclass, for a lubricating system, per se.

    417,    Pumps, subclass 228 for the condition responsive control of the
    lubricant or coolant of a pump, per se.


CLS 60/457
TXT Apparatus under subclass 325 that is foldable to a collapsed position and
    having valving means in the joints used in folding the device that are
    closed by the folding to hold the motive liquid in place in the collapsed
    apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 58.1 for a knockdown
    expansible chamber device.


CLS 60/458
TXT Apparatus under subclass 325 having means designed to facilitate the
    removal, replacement or repair of a part of the apparatus.


CLS 60/459
TXT Apparatus under subclass 325 having structure sensing a condition of the
    apparatus or an external condition and effecting a control of a flow or
    condition of the motive fluid of the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    369,    in which motive fluid is controlled to produce an oscillating or
    reciprocating cycle of a stroke device;

    403+,   for a system with means responsive to breakage, plugging,
    mechanical failure or power failure;

    420+,   for a condition responsive control in a system having plural motors;

    428+,   for a condition responsive control in a system having plural pumps;
    and

    431+,   for the joint control of motive fluid flow and of the input to a
    motor driving the pump.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 392+ for a motor with
    a working member responsive motive fluid control means; and 418, for a
    motor having a motive fluid control valve.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 279+ for a pump with condition responsive pumped
    fluid control.


CLS 60/460
TXT Apparatus under subclass 459 that controls a valve restricting or
    preventing exhaust from a motor and said valve being responsive to the
    pressure of motive fluid being fed to the motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 404+ for a motor
    having an exhaust valve controlled responsive to the working member
    position.


CLS 60/461
TXT Apparatus under subclass 459 including a flow directing or modulating means
    controlling the flow of motive fluid being removed from an expansible
    chamber of a stroke device during its contraction; said means being
    responsive to a condition of the apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 420 for a motor in which
    the exhaust valve of the contracting chamber is controlled by the expanding
    chamber pressure or flow.


CLS 60/462
TXT Apparatus under subclass 459 including a stroke type motor having an
    externally operated multiway valve for manipulating the device, and a
    device controlling flow of motive fluid in the apparatus responsive to a
    condition of the apparatus resulting from an external adjustment of the
    valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    392,    for a system in which a follow up linkage from the output motor or
    member closes an externally opened valve.


CLS 60/463
TXT Apparatus under subclass 462 in which the externally operated multiway
    valve is actuated by a means sensing a condition of a substance or
    structure that is not a part of the means supplying motive fluid of the
    motor, or of the interconnecting lines.


CLS 60/464
TXT Apparatus under subclass 459 in which condition responsive structure
    controls the supply of motive fluid to or its discharge from a
    recirculating system made up of a pump, a motor and interconnecting flow
    lines; the transferred motive fluid being taken from or supplied to a
    reservoir out of the recirculating path.


CLS 60/465
TXT Apparatus under subclass 459 in which the displacement of a variable
    displacement pump or motor is set by external means and flow of motive
    fluid in the apparatus is controlled by a means sensing a condition of the
    apparatus resulting from the external adjustment of the displacement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    389,    for a displacement controller positioned by a servo-motor having
    follow-up linkage assuming full range correspondence of the displacement
    adjuster and the manually set actuator;

    443+,   for a servo-motor setting a displacement controller;

    445+,   for a condition responsive displacement adjuster; and

    487,    for a system with no automatic control having a manual displacement
    adjuster.


CLS 60/466
TXT Apparatus under subclass 459 having a means sensing the pressure or rate of
    flow of motive fluid in a motor discharge line and effective to shut-off or
    restrict the discharge of the fluid from the motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    460,    for a holding or braking valve in a motor exhaust line controlled
    by the pressure in the motive feed line;

    461,    for a system in which the discharge from the contracting cylinder
    of a double acting motor is controlled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 47 for a motor having
    constantly applied motive fluid with controlled venting; and 404+ for a
    motor having a working member position exhaust control.

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 293+ for a brake driven in which the braked
    element drives a pump forcing brake fluid through a restriction.


CLS 60/467
TXT Apparatus under subclass 459 including a motor moving an output device
    along a path, there being structure that diverts the motive fluid driving
    the motor back to a container from which the motive fluid pressurizer is
    supplied upon the output device reaching a selected point in its path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 400+ for a motor in
    which the expanding chamber is vented responsive to the position of the
    working member of the motor or of the output.


CLS 60/468
TXT Apparatus under subclass 459 in which the flow of motive fluid through a
    passage by-passing a motor, pump or restriction in a motor feed or
    discharge line is controlled by a condition responsive means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    424,    for serially connected motors one of which has an automatically
    controlled bypass; and

    456,    for a bypass arrangement including cooling structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 399, 400+, and 407 for
    motors having bypasses responsive to the position of the working member.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 108+ for a self controlled branched flow
    system.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 307+ for a pump having a pressure responsive
    relief or by pass valve.


CLS 60/469
TXT Apparatus under subclass 325 with a structure (1) ameliorating or
    suppressing the efforts of shock or vibration, (2) preventing sudden
    movement or release of pressure or load or (3) controlling noise or
    sticking.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    338,    for a coaxial impeller and turbine unit having shock, vibration or
    surge control structure;

    371,    for a resilient means storing and releasing energy in the cycled
    reciprocation of a stroke device;

    413,    for a structure for controllably storing and subsequently releasing
    of energy; and

    461,    for automatic means controlling the discharge from the contracting
    cylinder often to prevent chattering, jumping or shock.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 399, for a double acting
    motor cushioned at the end of a stroke by the opening of a bypass between
    the expanding and contracting chamber; subclasses 405+, for a working
    member position responsive cushioning valve in a motor exhaust; and
    subclasses 429 and 430, for a motor having an anti-sticking motive fluid
    control valve.

    417,    Pumps, subclass 312, for a pump with a muffler acting on the pump
    fluid.


CLS 60/470
TXT Apparatus under subclass 325 including structure controlling flow of motive
    fluid between a pressure fluid source and an output device to move the
    output member between plural positions, the structure comprising a multiway
    valve or a system of valves mechanically or electrically interlinked for
    correlated action under the control of an operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    388,    for a motor positioning manipulator with a feedback linkage
    providing full range correspondence of the position of the manipulating
    handle and the output.

    393,    for a system having structure to impress a feel of the load or
    pressure in the motor on the manipulating handle to give a feel of the load.

    429,    for an automatic system having a multiway valve changing the
    relationship of separately operable input pumps.

    434,    for a system in which a pump drive controller is connected for
    joint operation with the valve manipulating handle.

    462,    for a stroke device controlled by an externally operated multiway
    valve and that has condition responsive structure.

    463,    for a system in which a multiway valve manipulating a stroke device
    is responsive to an external condition.


CLS 60/471
TXT Apparatus under subclass 470 including (1) two outputs one of which may
    operate separately from the other or in a diverse manner; or (2) two
    distinctly identifiable outputs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    421,    for a system having automatic control means in which a manually
    operated multiway valve selects various combinations of plural pumps or
    motive fluid sources.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 508+ for a motor
    system having plural working members and a single member that selectively
    controls the motive fluid for each working member.


CLS 60/472
TXT Apparatus under subclass 470 in which the output member is carried by two
    opposed expansible chamber devices mechanically connected thereto; the
    connection being such that an increase in pressure in one chamber moves the
    output member in the opposite direction from that caused by an increase of
    pressure in the other chamber and the control structure acting to select
    the chamber to which pressure fluid is supplied.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 462+ for a double
    acting motor with a motive fluid control valve arrangement.


CLS 60/473
TXT Apparatus under subclass 325 including a single to and fro output member
    driven by opposed expansible chambers and a pump for transferring motive
    fluid from one chamber to the other, to drive the output.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    369,    for a reciprocating output driven in a repeating cycle by opposed
    expansible chambers.


CLS 60/474
TXT Apparatus under subclass 437 in which the pump moves the piston in one
    direction only, its return being produced by gravity or stored energy and
    controlled by a valve or restriction means adjusting the rate of flow of
    motive fluid between the chambers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    461,    for a double acting motor having a condition responsive valve
    controlling the discharge from the exhausting expansible chamber.


CLS 60/475
TXT Apparatus under subclass 437 in which fluid is moved between two cylinders,
    one of which is increased in size while the other is decreased in the to
    and fro operation of an output member, the system having a structure that
    compensates for the difference in volume of the two cylinders or which
    corrects for any unbalance caused by leakage between parts of the system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 463 for a double acting
    motor with means to provide unequal flow rates to or from opposed working
    chambers.


CLS 60/476
TXT Apparatus under subclass 437 with means by which the pump or its delivery
    may be reversed to reverse the direction of movement of the to and fro
    device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    472,    for a double acting motor manipulated by a multiway valve means or
    by interconnected control elements that control the flow between the
    opposed chambers.


CLS 60/477
TXT Apparatus under subclass 325 comprising an output motor of the
    piston-cylinder type, the motor being caused to produce a pull or thrust by
    pumping motive liquid from a reservoir into or from the cylinder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    369,    for a cyclically operated reciprocating ram.

    387,    for a ram with distinct structure metering and dispensing a stroke
    length determining volume of motive fluid.

    432,    for a ram device in which the motor driving the motive fluid pump
    is deactivated responsive to the position of the ram.

    437,    for a ram device in which one side of the piston is the reservoir
    from which motive fluid is pumped to the power cylinder.

    462,    for a ram having coordinated manual and automatic controls.

    467,    for a ram cylinder opened to exhaust or reaching the end of its
    stroke.

    470,    for a ram controlled by an externally operated multiway valve or
    interconnected control elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 93 for a pushing or pulling implement including a ram driven by
    fluid pressure.


CLS 60/478
TXT Apparatus under subclass 477 having structure by which motive liquid in the
    reservoir is kept at a pressure above or below atmosphere or has distinct
    structure providing for the flow of air into or out of the reservoir as the
    volume of liquid in the reservoir varies.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    464,    for an arrangement in which a compressed gas accumulator supplies
    energy to the body of motive fluid driving the motor.


CLS 60/479
TXT Apparatus under subclass 477 with structure by which the amount of motive
    fluid discharged from a pump means toward the ram for each revolution of
    the pump or for each equal length stroke of a pump handle may be selected
    or adjusted.


CLS 60/480
TXT Apparatus under subclass 477 in which the ram is made up of concentric
    cylinders that move axially relative to each other under the pressure of
    the pumped fluid.


CLS 60/481
TXT Apparatus under subclass 477 in which the fluid pump into the ram is
    retained therein by structure that must be released or by-passed manually
    for retraction of the ram.


CLS 60/482
TXT Apparatus under subclass 481 having a common handle for actuating the pump
    and the ram release structure.


CLS 60/483
TXT Apparatus under subclass 325 in which a plurality of motors, motive
    sections or motor cylinders are arranged to rotate a common shaft, and
    having manually operable means to modify the relative operation of the
    motors, motive sections, or motor cylinders relative to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    425,    for a condition responsive means establishing the number of motors
    or motor sections driving a common output.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 476+ for a rotary
    output device driven by three or nine cylinders with separate motive fluid
    control of the delivery of motive fluid from a nominal source to each
    working chamber.


CLS 60/484
TXT Apparatus under subclass 325 which the energy put into apparatus from the
    pressure fluid source is discharged from the system by more than one means;
    e.g., plural motors, a motor and a pressure line, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    374,    for correlated independently movable output member in a cyclically
    operable stroke cycle.

    419,    for a system including an output motor and a motor driven by the
    motive fluid driving a pump raising the pressure of the motive fluid in a
    branch line.

    420,    for a system of distinct or separately operable outputs or drive
    units including a condition responsive control.

    471,    for a system of plural motors including a ram device manipulated by
    a multiway valve or interconnected control elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 508+ for a system of
    plural expansible chamber motors with a merely nominal source of motive
    fluid.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 96.2 for railway rolling stock
    having a fluid transmission driving a wheel or axle.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 308 for a motor vehicle which includes a
    traction motor of the kind driven by a noncompressible fluid received under
    pressure from a pump and wherein each surface-engaging member which is
    powered for driving the vehicle is provided with such a motor.


CLS 60/485
TXT Apparatus under subclass 484 having a pump as the pressure fluid source and
    two rotary motors, the motors being coaxial and the pump and two motors
    being in the form of a compact unitary assembly.


CLS 60/486
TXT Apparatus under subclass 325 in which (1) there are plural pressure
    sources, (2) in which the pressure source includes separately operable pump
    means; or (3) a pump means driven by separately operable energy input
    devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    375,    for correlated power input pumps and/or pressurized fluid
    cyclically operated in driving a reciprocating stroke device.

    386,    for a power boosted manual pump system.

    397,    for a motor operated by the intake manifold of an internal
    combustion engine with a means for furnishing extra energy to the motor.

    400,    for a system having selective or simultaneous manual or power
    energy inputs.

    405,    for a safety system in which a second motive fluid supply means
    takes the load responsive to the failure of a first supply means.

    413,    for a system with means for controllable feeding stored energy to
    the motor.

    419,    for a system in which motive fluid in the system is pressurized by
    a pump driven by the motive fluid of the system.

    421,    for a system with an automatic control including plural motors and
    plural pumps or motive fluid sources with relationships selected by a
    multiway valve.

    428,    for a system of separately operable power input pumps, pump
    cylinders or pressure fluid sources that has automatic control means.

    444,    for a system including a nonpower pump supplying control pressure
    to a displacement adjusting servo-motor.

    447,    for a system including a run-power pump supplying pressure
    proportional to spread to a servo-motor controlling the displacement of a
    power pump or output motor.

    464,    for an automatically controlled motive fluid replenishing
    arrangement for a recirculating power pump and motor loop.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 199+, for an assembly of diverse pumps; subclass
    374, for motor driven pump having a manual or diverse drive; and subclasses
    426+, for plural pumps with individual or relative control.


CLS 60/487
TXT Apparatus under subclass 325 comprising a pump feeding a rotary motor,
    either the pump or motor including externally settable internal structure
    by which the amount of motive fluid moved therethrough on each cycle or
    revolution may be selected or by which the direction of flow therethrough
    may be reversed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    389,    for a system in which a displacement adjuster is positioned by a
    servo-motor having a feed-back linkage.

    443,    for a system in which a displacement adjuster is positioned by a
    manually controlled servo-motor.

    445,    for a system in which a displacement adjuster is positioned by a
    condition responsive means.

    465,    for a system having a manual displacement adjuster in combination
    with a condition responsive motive fluid flow controller.


CLS 60/488
TXT Apparatus under subclass 487 having an additional pump that delivers motive
    fluid from a reservoir to replenish or augment the motive fluid being
    circulated between the energy imput pump and the motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    455,    for a system including structure for collecting leakage.

    464,    for the automatic control of motive fluid transfer between a
    reservoir and the recirculation path of a pump-motor loop.


CLS 60/489
TXT Apparatus under subclass 487 having in addition to the displacement varying
    structure an adjustable flow controlling means in a flow line of the
    circuit including the rotary pump and motor.


CLS 60/490
TXT Apparatus under subclass 487 in which the displacements of both the motor
    and pump are variable.


CLS 60/491
TXT Apparatus under subclass 490 including a mechanism that simultaneously or
    in a desired sequence adjusts the displacements of both the pump and the
    motor.


CLS 60/492
TXT Apparatus under subclass 491 in which both the pump and motor are of the
    swash plate type.


CLS 60/493
TXT Apparatus under subclass 325 including a pump supplying motive fluid to a
    rotary motor and having valve structure between the pump and motor to
    change the direction of flow through the motor to reverse its direction of
    rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    369,    for a cyclically reversed to-and-fro stroke device.

    472,    for a valve means reversing the flow to and fro a stroke type motor.


CLS 60/494
TXT Apparatus under subclass 325 with structure by which the flow of motive
    fluid may be adjustably retarded or be apportioned between branches.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    459+,   for the condition responsive control of fluid flow.

    470,    for a multiway valve or interconnected control elements reversing
    flow to, stopping and starting or by passing a stroke type motor.

    493,    for a valve reversing flow from a pump to a reversible rotary motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 418+ for an expansible
    chamber motor with a motive fluid valve.


CLS 60/495
TXT Apparatus under class definition having a working member which may be made
    buoyant or which is buoyant in a fluid and which may be caused to be moved
    by the fluid, because of the difference in specific gravity between the
    member and the fluid, to have a vertical component of motion and thereby
    adapted to do work, through a mechanical output means, either (1) because
    of a means which may make said buoyant member more or less buoyant so that
    it may be moved either against or by the pull of gravity in said fluid, or
    (2) though its specific gravity remains constant, the buoyant member may be
    given a vertical component of motion as a result of the rise and fall of
    the surface of said fluid.

    (1)     Note.  The rise and fall of the surface of the buoying fluid may be
    the result of a natural phenomenon or under the control of other means.

    (2)     Note.  The buoying fluid may exist in nature as a stream or ocean,
    or it may be confined wholly within a container wherein the flow to or from
    the container from any source of supply may be controlled, or it may be
    partially confined in a means which permits constant or controlled
    communication with a naturally existing body of fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    398,    for devices employing tide or wave actuated devices which elevate
    or pressurize a fluid so that it may be usable as a motive fluid to actuate
    a fluid motor.

    495+,   for tide or wave motors combined with a spring or weight motor to
    wind or supplement said spring or weight motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, or Animal Powered, subclasses 27+ for
    motors in which kinetic energy is derived from the movement of a mass by
    virtue of the effects of gravity.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 11, for fluid flow regulators
    actuated by energy from a variation in buoyancy of a body.

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants, subclass 53 for dynamos including a tide
    or wave motor.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, for devices for and methods of
    controlling water in open channels or reservoirs, and subclasses 75+ for
    means to modify fluid directing channel means for the utilization of the
    water flowing therethrough to operate some form of motor.

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, subclass 7 for means
    buoyantly sustaining rotatable runner means in a confined stream of liquid.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces, i.e., Impellers, subclasses 84, 85+ for
    impellers which float and which operate by the impact resulting from the
    horizontal waves or flow of an unconfined stream of water.

    417,    Pumps, subclass 100 for liquid piston pumps operated by tides or
    waves and 330+ for fluid pumps actuated by tide or wave motors.


CLS 60/496
TXT Apparatus under subclass 495 wherein the working member may be actuated in
    a buoying fluid by either adding to or withdrawing a substance from the
    confines of said working member to change its specific gravity relative to
    the fluid.


CLS 60/497
TXT Apparatus under subclass 495 having a buoyant working member which is
    actuated by the vertical rise and fall of the surface of a body of fluid.


CLS 60/498
TXT Apparatus under subclass 497 operable in a body of fluid whose surface
    rises and falls both in cycles of short periods, e.g., ocean waves, and in
    cycles of long periods, e.g., oceanic tides, said device having separate
    means responsive to each of said cyclic movements to cause said working
    member to move.


CLS 60/499
TXT Apparatus under subclass 497 having means whereby mechanical work also may
    be produced from the lateral movement of a flowing fluid or the lateral
    movement of a wave on the surface of a body of fluid.


CLS 60/500
TXT Apparatus under subclass 497 having at least two buoyant working members
    adapted to be moved relative to one another by the vertical movement of the
    surface of a body of fluid and said members being pivotally interconnected
    to each other whereby mechanical work may be performed as a result of the
    relative movement of said members only.

    (1)     Note.  Classification in this subclass includes only those
    relatively movable interconnected buoyant members which produce work
    because of their relative movement, per se.  For devices having relatively
    movable working members wherein work is produced as a result of relative
    movement between one or more of the working members and a stationary means
    secured to or supported by the earth see subclass 504 or 505.


CLS 60/501
TXT Apparatus under subclass 497 having a unitary buoyant member having means
    actuated in response to the relative movement between said member and a
    means supported entirely by said member.

    (1)     Note.  The device may be in the form of a free hanging weight
    carried within the buoyant member, or it may be a means in the form of a
    sea anchor, or other means, which is suspended from the member outside the
    member or in the fluid (not in engagement with the earth) to dampen the
    movement of the means given it by the member so that work may be produced
    as a result of the relative movement between the member and the means when
    the member is caused to change its vertical position responsive to the
    vertical movement of the free surface of the fluid.


CLS 60/502
TXT Apparatus under subclass 497 together with at least one surface means which
    is designed to (1) restrain, direct, or control the flow of a body of fluid
    or a portion thereof or restrain or direct the movement of waves traveling
    on the surface of said body of fluid, or (2) confine a portion or all of a
    body of fluid so that the surface of said fluid may change its vertical
    position.


CLS 60/503
TXT Apparatus under subclass 502 having means whereby the fluid flow, the
    surface wave movement or amplitude, or the volume of confined fluid may be
    variably controlled.


CLS 60/504
TXT Apparatus under subclass 497 having a flexible means which engages or is
    engaged by the buoyant member to transmit motion of said member.


CLS 60/505
TXT Apparatus under subclass 497 having a means supporting a plurality of
    buoyant working members so that they may move relative to each other and to
    the supporting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500,    for articulated buoyant working members.

    504,    for motors having a plurality of relatively moving buoyant working
    members having flexible means to transmit the motion of members.


CLS 60/506
TXT Apparatus under subclass 497 wherein the buoyant working member is
    supported to pivot about an axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    507,    for other buoyant motors having one way clutch type devices as part
    of the power transmission means.


CLS 60/507
TXT Apparatus under subclass 497 having means to transmit movement of the
    buoyant working member as it moves in one vertical direction and permit the
    member to move free of the transmitting means as it moves in another
    direction.


CLS 60/508
TXT Apparatus under class definition comprising a motor having a working
    chamber and a working member therein with means affecting the temperature
    and thus the pressure of fluid after being supplied to and isolated within
    the working chamber to actuate the working member.

    (1)     Note.  The motor working chamber and member includes a cylinder and
    piston or its equivalent.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 92, Schedule, section II for a definition of a
    working chamber and member for an expansible chamber type motor.

    (3)     Note.  See Class 415 for a definition of a Rotary kinetic fluid
    motor.

    (4)     Note.  An indeterminate motor (Black box) having internal
    generation not classified elsewhere is classified under this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    516+,   for motors activated by expanding and contracting a confined mass
    by means changing the temperature of said mass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal Combustion Engines, for motors wherein unburned
    hydrocarbons are cyclically introduced into an expansible chamber device,
    isolated therein and then ignited to increase the pressure of said isolated
    material. See Class 123 subclass 22 for motors which may operate as an
    internal combustion engine or a hot air motor, of the type herein
    classified, alternating between the two modes of operation either
    selectively or as the result of a predetermined cyclic operation.


CLS 60/509
TXT Apparatus under subclass 508 of a motor whose working member is actuated
    after the introduction of unburned vapors, of liquids other than water,
    into the working chamber and the change in temperature and therefore
    pressure of said vapors caused by vapor heating or cooling means within
    said chamber.


CLS 60/510
TXT Apparatus under subclass 508 of a motor in which air and burning gases are
    admitted into the working chamber wherein the combustible components of the
    air are consumed or the hot products of combustion cooled so that a vacuum
    is produced within the working chamber by the resultant rarefied gases and
    the working member is actuated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    515,    for a cooling jacket disposed about a cylinder with means to
    control fluid flow through the jacket.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, for motors wherein, cyclically,
    unburned hydrocarbons are introduced into an expansible chamber device
    isolated therein and then ignited to increase the pressure of the isolated
    material.


CLS 60/511
TXT Apparatus under subclass 508 of a motor comprising a working member and a
    working chamber having a first fluid therein and means to introduce a
    second fluid into said first fluid to produce a change in pressure of said
    first fluid whereby the change in pressure actuates the working member.

    (1)     Note.  Usually water is injected into the working chamber to
    condense steam therein and the resultant reduced pressure actuates the
    working member due to a higher pressure on the opposite side of the working
    member, usually atmospheric pressure.

    (2)     Note.  A fluid such as hot water or hot air may be introduced into
    the working chamber to superheat the motive fluid therein and the change in
    pressure actuates the working member.


CLS 60/512
TXT Apparatus under subclass 508 of a motor with means located within the
    working chamber to change the temperature of the working fluid subsequent
    to isolation therein to affect the pressure of the fluid therein so that
    the change in pressure produced thereby is utilized to actuate the working
    member.


CLS 60/513
TXT Apparatus under subclass 512 wherein the means within the working chamber
    is a resistance element heated by the passage of an electric current
    therethrough to heat the working fluid therein and thus increase the
    pressure of the working fluid.

    (1)     Note.  The fluid within the working chamber may be air or steam
    which is to be heated or superheated or the motive fluid may be a liquid as
    water which is introduced into the working chamber and instantaneously
    flashes into steam upon contact with the electric coil or plate.


CLS 60/514
TXT Apparatus under subclass 508 of a motor comprising a working member and a
    working chamber having liquid supplied thereto with means to vaporize the
    liquid concurrently with its introduction into the working chamber whereby
    the pressure produced actuates the working member.

    (1)     Note.  Two or more fluids may be introduced into a preheated
    working chamber so long as at least one fluid is a liquid to be vaporized
    (e.g., air and water, water vaporized; oil and water, both vaporized).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    511,    for motors wherein a second fluid is injected into a working
    chamber having a first fluid therein to result in a change in pressure in
    said chamber.

    512,    for means within the working chamber to affect the pressure of the
    fluid therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, for motors in which a combustible
    material is burned with a chamber and the pressure produced thereby is
    converted into work, and subclass 22 for internal combustion engines having
    working chamber into which air, per se, may be introduced and expanded to
    do work as a result of its contact with the hot walls of the chamber either
    as a step in the cycle of the internal combustion engine chamber or during
    a time when the chamber is converted to act as a hot air engine from
    internal combustion engine operation.


CLS 60/515
TXT Apparatus under subclass 508 of a working chamber having means exterior of
    working chamber heat exchange therebetween and means to control the rate of
    BTU transfer to the chamber.

    (1)     Note.  The means disposed exteriorly the working chamber may
    include a jacket spaced from the working chamber or a coil which may be an
    electrical resistance element or a pipe having fluid flow therethrough for
    the purposes or heating or cooling.

    (2)     Note.  The control means includes a valve which controls the flow
    of fluid through the jacket or coil or an electrical control for the
    resistance.

    (3)     Note.  A working chamber disposed within the furnace chamber is
    properly classified under 515 where a control for the furnace is disclosed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 144 for an expansible chamber
    type motor in which the working chamber is jacketed for heat transfer
    therebetween but where there is no control valve for either the motor or
    the jacket fluid.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 41, 72+ and 195 for a
    jacketed cylinder or end closure therefor for receiving circulating heat
    exchange liquid to cool the operating parts of an internal combustion
    engine. A specific disclosure that a jacketed cylinder or end closure
    therefor is to form a part of an internal combustion engine is sufficient
    for classification in Class 123.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for a heat exchange modifying
    space or jacket of general utility.  Class 165 takes a nominally claimed
    cylinder or working chamber forming member of an expansible chamber device,
    where the claim is otherwise directed to a surrounding space or jacket
    designed to modify the heat exchange properties of the cylinder or member.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 415+ for a spaced wall or jacketed type
    container.


CLS 60/516
TXT Apparatus under class definition having means which may heat, cool or
    otherwise cause a defined unit of matter as a working medium in the gaseous
    liquid, or solid state to expand and contract cyclically to do useful work.

    (1)     Note.  The confined matter may change state during expansion or
    contraction thereof.

    (2)     Note.  The distinction between the plants in this subclass and the
    plants in subclasses 508+, where a motive fluid is introduced into an
    expansible chamber and heated or cooled therein to expand or contract said
    chamber, is that in the latter a definable mass is not isolated as a motive
    fluid which is subject to heating and cooling and thus expansion and
    contraction for more than one cycle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 6 for "Stirling" cycle refrigeration
    producers, and subclasses 498+ for compressor-condenser-evaporator circuits
    for refrigerator producers.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 68, for
    temperature regulators which include a thermal expansion and contraction
    device whose operation is effected by a heater set into operation by a heat
    responsive initiator.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 11, for heat motor actuated
    valves.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 100+, for thermometers,
    especially subclasses 187+ where an ambient temperature is measured using a
    solid or fluid having known properties of expansion or contraction in
    response to given changes in temperature.


CLS 60/517
TXT Apparatus under subclass 516 in which the unit or working medium is a gas
    which is confined to circulation between two communicating expansible
    chambers, one of said expansible chambers is a working chamber wherein said
    gas expands or contracts to energize a working member to do useful work,
    and the other of the expansible chambers acts as a displacer or
    transmitting means for said working medium.

    (1)     Note.  Engines which operate by the principle set forth herein have
    been known variously as:



    Air Engine

    Caloric Engine

    Compressor Engine

    Compressed Air Engine

    Hot Air (Gas) Engine

    Stirling Cycle Engine

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 6, for "Stirling Cycle" refrigeration
    producers.


CLS 60/518
TXT Apparatus under subclass 517 having means to change the cyclic phase
    relationship between the power or working member and the displacer
    mechanism.


CLS 60/519
TXT Apparatus under subclass 517 in which at least one of said expansible
    chambers is provided with a member which either rotates or oscillates about
    an axis so that said chamber either expands or contracts as a result of
    motion of said member.


CLS 60/520
TXT Apparatus under subclass 517 wherein at least one of said expansible
    chambers is provided with a piston which is freely movable therein, and
    without connection to any other means, having the function to cause the
    working medium to flow from that chamber to another of the expansible
    chambers.


CLS 60/521
TXT Apparatus under subclass 516 having a particular means whereby gas may be
    added to or withdrawn from the unit of gas employed as the working medium.


CLS 60/522
TXT Apparatus under subclass 517 provided with means adapted to control the
    rate of flow of said gas from one to another of the expansible chambers.


CLS 60/523
TXT Apparatus under subclass 517 wherein heat is supplied to one of said
    expansible chambers as a result of the conversion of electric current to
    heat.


CLS 60/524
TXT Apparatus under subclass 517 having condition responsive or manually
    controlled means to vary the temperature of a chamber in which the working
    gas is heated or cooled.


CLS 60/525
TXT Apparatus under subclass 517 having more than one chamber in which
    expansion or contraction of said gas is converted into useful work.


CLS 60/526
TXT Apparatus under subclass 517 having means in the path of flow of said
    working gas as it passes back and forth from a cooling chamber to a heating
    chamber whereby heat is removed from said gas as it passes therethrough in
    one direction and then returns said heat to said gas as it passes back
    through said means in the opposite direction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 115+ for processes for compressing,
    condensing and evaporating a refrigerant.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 4+ for regeneration, per se.


CLS 60/527
TXT Apparatus under subclass 516 which the unit of matter is a solid.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes patents which employ a mass which is
    in a solid state during at least a portion of a cycle of its operation.
    During other portions of the cycle of its operation, a given mass (e.g.,
    wax) may change to a liquid state, or another mass (e.g., metallic hydride)
    may change to a gaseous state.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 26 for
    magnetostrictive motors wherein a magnetic field is employed to cause a
    material to expand and contract to do work.

    337,    Electricity: Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclasses 333+ and 382+ for switches actuated by the expansion or
    contraction of bimetallic or other metallic members.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 187 for temperature
    measurement in which the expansion or contraction of a sensing material
    drives an indicator.


CLS 60/528
TXT Apparatus under subclass 527 wherein the solid is arranged to conduct an
    electrical current whereby said solid may be made to expand or contract in
    proportion to the current flow therethrough.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 117 for a motor
    comprising a member that undergoes a substantial change of shape when
    heated and means for heating it electrically.


CLS 60/529
TXT Apparatus under subclass 527 in which the mass consists of at least two
    interrelated pieces of material each characterized by a different
    coefficient of expansion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    528,    for devices having bi-metallic members through which an electrical
    current is passed which either expands or contracts because of the
    resistance to the flow of current therethrough.


CLS 60/530
TXT Apparatus under subclass 516 in which the working medium is a liquid during
    at least a portion of a complete cycle of the operation of the motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    527,    for apparatus employing a mass which is in a solid state during a
    portion of its cyclic operation and which may or may not change to a liquid
    state during another part of its cyclic operation (e.g., wax).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    337,    Electricity: Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclasses 306+ for switches actuated by thermally expanded or vaporized
    fluid.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 201+ for temperature
    measurement in which an expanding or contracting fluid drives an indicator.


CLS 60/531
TXT Apparatus under subclass 530 having means whereby said unit of matter is a
    fluid which is vaporized so that through the device, work may be
    accomplished.


CLS 60/532
TXT Subject matter under subclass 325 in which the input energy is transmitted
    to an output through a mass of fluid in the form of a compressional wave or
    a series of such waves moving at the speed of sound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 137+ for a residual mechanical
    sonic or supersonic generator for wave transmission through media.

    366,    Agitating, appropriate subclass for a stirring or agitating device
    utilizing a sonic or super sonic vibrator.


CLS 60/533
TXT Apparatus under subclass 325 comprising (1) a system including structure to
    trap a definite volume of motive fluid between two expansible chamber
    devices for movement back and forth, one expansible chamber device
    functioning as a transmitter or master to pressurize the fluid and the
    other as a receiver or slave actuatable in response to the pressurization
    of such fluid, wherein any movement of a working member of one device
    results in movement of the working member of the second device and the
    systems provides (a) at least two different cross-sectional areas through
    which the pressurized fluid must pass or (b) the volumetric displacement of
    the master and slave are unequal; or (2) subcombinations specialized to
    such system not specifically classified elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  The output of the pulsator must be the final output of the
    organization claimed and not merely an intermediate link, or ancillary to a
    larger organization.

    (2)     Note.  Definition of terms: Master:  An expansible chamber device
    which provides a contracting volume to expel fluid from the chamber or to
    place the fluid therein under pressure.  All valve means or chamber means
    associated with the expansible chamber device are included under this
    definition.

    Master cylinder:  An art term applied to a unitary assembly of a master and
    its associated holder of a reserve supply of make-up fluid.

    Motive fluid:  Fluid that acts to drive a motor.  The term is generic to
    "pulse" fluid and "power" fluid.

    Output member:  An element of the system by which driving or loading force
    is delivered for utilization by means other than the system itself.

    Power fluid:  An externally energized fluid that powers a pulsator
    system.Pulsator circuit:  The combination of elements in which the pulse
    fluid is trapped.

    Pulsator system:  An organization of which a pulsator circuit is merely a
    part.

    Pulse fluid:  The definite volume of fluid trapped in the pulsator.

    Slave:  An expansible chamber device which provides an expanding volume to
    receive pressurized fluid or a pressure transmitted through a passage
    connecting the slave to the master transmitter.

    The slave includes all valve means or chamber means associated therewith.

    (3)     Note.  The following are examples of specialized subcombinations of
    pulsators classified in Class 60.



    a.      An expansible chamber type motor device for which the claimed
    nominal load is an expansible chamber solely disclosed as the master of a
    pulsator.

    b.      An expansible chamber device having an associated holder for a
    reserve supply of liquid and solely disclosed as the master of a pulsator,
    i.e., master cylinder.

    c.      A piston or diaphragm device disclosed in a pulsator line acting to
    limit the travel of fluid between the master and slave to a back and forth
    movement equal to the displacement of the diaphragm or piston.

    d.      A pressure responsive unit disclosed in a flow line between a
    master and slave that first passes fluid from the master toward the slave
    and then, responsive to pressure, acts as a master driven by the first
    master to drive fluid toward the slave.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 583 for a residual machine
    element for transmitting motion by push and pull movement including a
    trapped body of fluid.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 280 for a motor having a
    pulsator cyclically distributing motive fluid to the motor; subclass 384
    for a pulsator feeding back a working member's position to a motive fluid
    controller; subclass 460 for a motor having a pulsator controlled valve;
    and appropriate subclass for a valved expansible chamber motor per se, or
    driving a merely nominal load.  However if a claimed nominal load is solely
    disclosed as the master of a pulsator the combination is classifiable in
    Class 60 subclasses 533+.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 61+ for a system of plural
    expansible chamber devices of the Class 92 type not in a master-slave
    relationship.  (See Paragraph A of (4) Note of the Class 92 definition for
    a statement of the line); and appropriate subclass for a master or slave
    device, per se.  See (3) Note, above for exceptions to this line between
    Classes 60 and 92 (e.g., relating to a master cylinder etc.)

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 151+ for a specific motion stopping or retarding
    means operated by a fluid pressure system and subclasses 266+ for an
    internal resistance motion retarder (e.g., hydraulic shock absorber, dash
    pot etc.).

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 57 for a valve actuated by a
    fluid link or column (e.g., pulsator, etc.).

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 118+ for a fluid type spring device.
    Class 267 takes a device comprising a chamber provided with a movable wall
    (e.g., piston and cylinder) and adapted to contain a fluid designed to
    contact and exert a force against said movable wall, or an element of such
    device (e.g., piston) when there is a disclosure that such device is used
    as a spring device.

    303,    Fluid-Pressure and Analogous Brake Systems, appropriate subclass
    for a system specialized to the distribution of fluid in a brake system.
    The line between Class 303 and subclasses 533+ of Class 60 as to pulsator
    structure in a brake system is as follows:

    (1)     A pulsator with structure specializing it for use in braking; or in
    which the output of the pulsator includes more than nominal brake structure
    is in Class 303. The following are examples of features in a pulsator
    device specializing the pulsator for use as a brake system for Class 303.

    a.      A valve controlled by the inertia of an element braked.

    b.      A structure responsive to the load on the vehicle to modify the
    brake action.

    c.      A distributor not itself a master, that apportions fluid between
    differently loaded brake cylinders.

    d.      A device responsive to the disconnection of a trailer from a
    tractor for actuating the trailer brakes.

    (2)     A complete pulsator comprising a master and slave not specialized
    as in 1 above; or in which the slave drives merely a nominal brake is in
    Class 60 subclasses 533+.  The following terms are examples of brake
    recitations which are considered to be nominal and will not preclude
    classification in subclasses 533+.

    a. Wheel cylinder

    b. Brake means

    c. Brake cylinders

    d. Hydraulic vehicle brakes

    e. Vehicle brakes

    f. Disc brakes

    g. Brakes

    h. Front and/or rear wheel brakes

    i. Dual brakes.

    (3)     Class 60 subclasses 533+ will take a master subcombination of a
    pulsator that is of the type specified in (3) Note above and in the search
    class references to Classes 92 and 417 even though disclosed as a part of a
    brake system.

    (4)     Class 303 takes fluid brake systems or subcombinations thereof not
    classifiable elsewhere; e.g., an air brake system or a specialized
    distributing valve, per se, etc.  See the reference to Class 137 in the
    class definition of Class 303 for the line between classes 137 and 303.



    417,    Pumps, subclasses 321+ for a residual motor driven pump not solely
    disclosed as a master and subclasses 383+ for a pump that is more than a
    mere nominal load driven by a pulsator.


CLS 60/534
TXT Apparatus under subclass 533 including (1) as indicating, registering,
    signalling or claim means for conveying information about a condition of
    the apparatus or (2) means that permits an inspection of normally hidden
    parts or operating fluid of the apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 227 for a nonelectrical liquid
    level indicator of general utility.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 82 for a fluid
    pressure switch actuated by a piston.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 450+, 451+ for an
    electrical system indicating the condition of a fluid.


CLS 60/535
TXT Apparatus under subclass 534 including a signal or alarm responsive to
    means sensing a loss or insufficiency of pulse fluid.


CLS 60/536
TXT Apparatus under subclass 533 in which a plurality of noncommunicating
    master-slave units have their input members interconnected to be driven by
    a common rotating device and their outputs interconnected to drive a common
    rotary device, the arrangement being such that both devices are capable of
    continuous rotation in one direction.


CLS 60/537
TXT Apparatus under subclass 533 including means (1) to cause the apparatus to
    operate through a given cycle of diverse operations repetitiously;  (2)
    operative upon initiation to perform a series of diverse operations and
    return to a starting position;  or (3) continuously oscillate an output
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    532,    for a pulsator transmitting energy by shock or resonant waves; and
    subclass 545 for an apparatus including a pulsator driven or controlled by
    electrical means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 269.01+ for a reciprocating press having fluid
    pressure actuation.


CLS 60/538
TXT Apparatus under subclass 537 in which the apparatus or its control has an
    electrically operated element.


CLS 60/539
TXT Apparatus under subclass 537 in which a plurality of pulsator pumps are
    operated in a program or cycle by cam means.


CLS 60/540
TXT Apparatus under subclass 537 in which a step in the cycle is controlled by
    a period establishing device or a time of day clock.


CLS 60/541
TXT Apparatus under subclass 537 including structure effective to bring the
    apparatus to rest at a fixed standby position upon a shutdown of operation
    of termination of the cycle.


CLS 60/542
TXT Apparatus under subclass 537 in which the pulsator fluid is air and having
    structure by which air is fed to or removed from the system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclass 116 for an impacting device
    driven by a pulsator.


CLS 60/543
TXT Apparatus under subclass 537 including structure by which fluid is
    transferred automatically during the cycling of the apparatus into or out
    of a master-slave unit or between two master-slave units.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 385+ for a pump driven by a pulsator, the
    pulsator having structure by which it is supplied with pulse fluid or
    vented.


CLS 60/544
TXT Apparatus under subclass 537 including a continuously reciprocating master
    pump connected to feed a slave unit, there being (1) a manually settable
    means to inactivate the slave while the pump continues to reciprocate;  or
    (2) a settable valve in the pulsator fluid to control the output of the
    slave.


CLS 60/545
TXT Apparatus under subclass 533 utilizing an electrical or magnetic element as
    a part of the apparatus, as a part of the power source driving the
    apparatus, or as a part of a circuit controlling the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    538,    for a programmed, self cycled, or self pulsed pulsator system
    having an electrically operated element.


CLS 60/546
TXT Apparatus under subclass 533 having two distinct output members each having
    an expansible chamber driving or being driven by its output member, the two
    chambers being connected to form a pulsator that serves to enforce a
    definite relative movement of the two outputs.


CLS 60/547.1
TXT With control of or by a separate power fluid, etc.:

    Apparatus under subclass 533 in which a motor driving the working member of
    a master is operated by a power fluid separate from the pulse fluid, the
    apparatus including structure controlling flow of the power fluid or
    responsive to a condition of the power fluid.

    (1)     Note.  A power circuit and a pulse circuit that are replenished
    from the same supply and regarded as separate of the fluids of the two
    circuits remain operatively separate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclass for an
    expansible chamber motor per se or driving a nominal load.  However, the
    combination of a expansible motor and its driven expansible chamber device
    disclosed solely as a master is in Class 60, subclasses 547+.

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 355+, for a power operated fluid pressure system
    actuating a specific motion retarding device.


CLS 60/547.2
TXT By pressure responsive valve dividing flow between motor and an auxiliary
    load:

    Apparatus under subclass 547.1 in which the structure controlling flow of
    the power fluid or responsive to a power fluid condition includes a valve
    having a face exposed to fluid pressure, the valve being movable in
    response to pressure variation for dividing power fluid flow between motor
    driving the working member and a separate motor driving an auxiliary load
    (e.g., power steering, etc.).


CLS 60/547.3
TXT By manually operated valve dividing flow between motor and an auxiliary
    load:

    Apparatus under subclass 547.1 in which the structure controlling flow of
    the power fluid or responsive to a power fluid condition comprises a valve
    which is manually moved for dividing power fluid flow between the motor
    driving the working member and a separate motor driving an auxiliary load
    (e.g., power steering, etc.).


CLS 60/548
TXT Apparatus under subclass 547 in which fluid in the power circuit is
    constantly moved during standby through a closed recirculating system and
    the master is driven by the diversion or restriction of the circulating
    fluid.


CLS 60/549
TXT Apparatus under subclass 547 in which the system is provided with structure
    providing for pressurization of distinct output circuits such that (1)
    there are periods when only one of the circuits is being pressurized or (2)
    the pressures in the distinct circuits vary in relative magnitude.


CLS 60/550
TXT Apparatus under subclass 547, including structure effective upon a sensed
    failure of the power driven motor or of the motor energy supply to increase
    the leverage of the operator driven means, to lengthen the stroke of such
    means, to disconnect the motor, or in some other manner reduce the effort
    required in the use of the manual operating member.


CLS 60/551
TXT Apparatus under subclass 547 in which the manual and power energy input
    means are controlled or actuated by a single lever; there being separate
    mechanical connections from the lever to a manually driven pulsator pump
    and to a power energy controller.


CLS 60/552
TXT Apparatus under subclass 547 with a manual controller for the feed of power
    fluid to the motor there being structure moved or carried by the working
    member of the master to discontinue the feed of power fluid upon a movement
    of the working member proportional to the movement of the manual controller.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    388+,   for a nonpulsator pressure fluid source and motor having a full
    range correspondence of the position of an external manipulator and a motor
    positioned member effected by feedback linkage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 358+, for motor, per
    se, or with a merely nominal output having a working member position feed
    back to motive fluid control.


CLS 60/553
TXT Apparatus under subclass 552 including a piston or diaphragm structure by
    which the pressure produced in the pulsator fluid by the actuation of the
    motor is directly imposed on a means opposing movement of the motor
    controller in a pressure increasing direction; whereby a "feel" of the
    condition of the pulsator liquid is conveyed to the operator of the device.


CLS 60/554
TXT Apparatus under subclass 552 including a load deformable means transmitting
    the thrust of the motor to the piston of the master, the deformation of the
    means under load serving to modify a bias means opposing the loading motion
    of the manual actuator whereby an indication of the load on the master is
    given to the operator of the device.


CLS 60/555
TXT Apparatus under subclass 547 including a manual actuator that moves either
    a power master or a separate master and in which the increase in pressure
    produced by such movement controls the supply of power fluid to the power
    driven master.


CLS 60/556
TXT Apparatus under subclass 555 with a separate manual master and including a
    piston or diaphragm by which pressure from the power master is imposed on
    the manual master whereby a "feel" of the condition of the power pulse
    fluid is conveyed to the operator of the device.


CLS 60/557
TXT Apparatus under subclass 555 including a manually operated master and a
    separate downstream motor driven master, the arrangement being such that
    fluid delivered from the manual master charges the pulsator with motive
    fluid, takes up slack and starts the motor of the motor driven master.


CLS 60/558
TXT Apparatus under subclass 557 in which the pressurized fluid from the manual
    master flows longitudinally through the working member of the motor
    operated master.


CLS 60/559
TXT Apparatus under subclass 558 wherein the pressurized fluid from the manual
    master flows longitudinally through the motor piston, traversing the motor
    cylinder and passing into the expansible chamber of the motor driven master.


CLS 60/560
TXT Apparatus under subclass 547 including a distinct expansible chamber motor
    means arranged to drive the output driven by the slave, the external power
    fluid being admitted directly into the chamber of said motor.


CLS 60/561
TXT Apparatus under subclass 533 including two pulsators having means by which
    they are simultaneously pressurized and having a diaphragm or floating
    piston acted upon on one side by the fluid of a first pulsator and, upon
    the other side, by the fluid of a second pulsator, the piston or diaphragm
    acting to establish a relationship between the pressures of the two
    pulsators.


CLS 60/562
TXT Apparatus under subclass 533 in which two separately movable pistons
    pressurize fluid diversely for independent delivery to separate output
    slaves, one of the pistons being driven by the second piston mechanically
    through a resilient or lost motion connection or by the fluid pressure
    generated by the second piston.


CLS 60/563
TXT Apparatus under subclass 533 including an expansible chamber motor and
    means by which pressure fluid from a source is at one time fed directly
    into the expansible chamber and at another time into the motor of a master
    fluid drives the expansible chamber motor as its slave.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 6 for an expansible
    chamber motor provided with motive fluid at different times through supply
    paths that are different under different operating conditions.  See the
    search notes to subclass 6 of Class 91 for the line between the two classes
    as to this subject matter.


CLS 60/564
TXT Apparatus under subclass 563 in which the master includes a piston or
    diaphragm means forming an expansible chamber motor and expansible chamber
    pump, and in which the effective area of the pump working member is larger
    than that of the motor.


CLS 60/565
TXT Apparatus under subclass 533 providing for the driving of an output or
    outputs by a pulsator and also in some other way.

    (1)     Note.  The return to its biased position of an output advanced
    against bias is not regarded as a diversely driven movement of the output.
    However, the controlled release of pressure fluid from an accumulator in
    driving the output is proper subject matter for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    560,    for an output driven by a pulsator driven by an external power
    fluid and by a separate expansible chamber fed by the power fluid.

    563,    for an output driven directly by motive fluid and indirectly as the
    slave of a master driven by the motive fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 270+ for a reciprocating press having fluid
    press actuation combined with mechanical actuation.


CLS 60/566
TXT Apparatus under subclass 565 in which a single output member is driven at
    one time by a motor serving as a slave of a manually operated master and at
    another time by the same motor supplied from another source of pressurized
    fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    550,    for a power driven master that is manually driven on power failure;

    551,    for a slave driven by a power driven master and a manual master
    having a common actuating lever;

    555+,   for a system in which the pressure produced in a slave by a manual
    master controls the power supply to a power master feeding the slave.


CLS 60/567
TXT Apparatus under subclass 533 in which pulse fluid fed to a slave is
    supplied from separately operable masters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    547,    for a pulsator system having both manual and motor energy input
    means.


CLS 60/568
TXT Apparatus under subclass 533 including (1) means for mechanically securing
    a movable element of the system against movement or (2) a distinct valve
    sealing pulse fluid in an element to prevent its movement.


CLS 60/569
TXT Apparatus under subclass 568 in which the securing means is a separate
    externally operable valve that prevents flow into or out of the slave.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 598 for a hydraulic brake line with a
    valve to trap a column of liquid in the line having no structure
    specializing the system to brakes.

    188,    Brakes, subclass 353 for a fluid pressure brake for a vehicle
    having means to trap fluid in the brake system to hold the brakes applied.

    303,    Fluid-Pressure and Analogous Brake Systems, subclasses 75+ for a
    fluid brake system having a valve for preventing release of the brakes and
    subclass 89 for a fluid brake system including a lock for maintaining parts
    in position of application or release.


CLS 60/570
TXT Apparatus under subclass 568 including a mechanical means that engages and
    prevents movement of a pulsator element.


CLS 60/571
TXT Apparatus under subclass 533 including (1) a motor piston in a cylinder and
    a first master feeding pressure fluid to one side and a second master
    feeding pressure fluid to the other side of the piston, the piston moving a
    single device; or (2) two separate expansible chamber slave motors driven
    by separate master units, the separate system being so interconnected that
    one expansible chamber expands and the other contracts in positioning a
    common device.


CLS 60/572
TXT Apparatus under subclass 571 including structure (1) by which the apparatus
    may be adjusted to obtain a desired pressure or quantity of fluid in a part
    of the pulsator system; or (2) by which a compensation for a change in
    volume or quantity of pulsator fluid in a part of the system is made.


CLS 60/573
TXT Apparatus under subclass 572 in which the pulsator fluid in the opposed
    pulsators is automatically adjusted between the two during the operation of
    the device to cause the driving and driven members of the apparatus to stay
    in phase, such adjustment being accomplished by means associated with the
    driving or driven member that is effective as the means passes a center
    position or reaches the end of its stroke.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    543,    for a programmed or self cycled pulsator having a self operated
    pulse fluid purge or quantity adjustment structure.


CLS 60/574
TXT Apparatus under subclass 533 comprising structure of the master or slave
    that, responsive to the position of an element or condition of the fluid
    provides a shift in the rate of movement of the actuator driving the master
    or of the output member of the slave relative to the rate of displacement
    of pulse fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    557+,   for a system in which pressurizing fluid from a manual master
    provides the initial drive of a slave and starts a power driven master for
    subsequent drive of the slave;

    563+,   for a system in which motive fluid first drives a motor directly
    and subsequently drives a master that drives the slave;

    565+,   for an output driven successively by a master and nonmaster means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclass 347 for a fluid brake for a road vehicle operated
    by a pulsator having a quick slack take-up operation followed by a slower
    high pressure actuation.


CLS 60/575
TXT Apparatus under subclass 574 in which for one stage of operation a body of
    liquid is trapped back of a master piston feeding the output slave, the
    trapped body of liquid forming with the piston an ancillary pulsator of
    which the piston is the slave.


CLS 60/576
TXT Apparatus under subclass 574 in which relative movement of two pistons or
    fluid displacers that deliver fluid toward a slave produce the staged
    pressure generation.


CLS 60/577
TXT Apparatus under subclass 576 including a central piston and a second
    displacer unit in the form of a sleeve about the piston, the sleeve being
    moved by the piston through a resilient load responsive connecting means.


CLS 60/578
TXT Apparatus under subclass 574 in which a single movable element forms a
    piston means that displaces fluid from two chambers toward the slave
    initially and later displaced it toward the slave from only one of the
    chambers.


CLS 60/579
TXT Apparatus under subclass 533 including a piston or diaphragm, fluid from a
    master pump acting on one side of the piston or diaphragm to move it to
    pressurize a separate body of pulsator fluid on the other side.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    562,    for a system in which the master piston of one pulsator circuit
    drives the master piston of a paralleled circuit through a resilient,
    fluid, or lost motion connection.

    563+,   for a structure in which initially communicating bodies of fluid on
    opposite sides of a diaphragm or piston are separated responsive to an
    increase in pressure, the diaphragm or piston then acting to pressurize the
    separated body of pulsator fluid.

    575,    for a system in which a temporary pulsator formed in a master
    structure by the closing of a condition or position responsive valve means
    drives a master piston.


CLS 60/580
TXT Apparatus under subclass 579 including parallel diaphragms or pistons
    receiving pressure fluid from a common master and supplying pressure toward
    distinct slave units.


CLS 60/581
TXT Apparatus under subclass 533 comprising interrelated master-slave systems
    or a plurality of interconnected master cylinder devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    536,    for plural correlated pulsators transmitting unlimited rotary input
    to unlimited rotary output;

    539,    for the programmed cam drive of plural masters;

    549,    for distinct pulsator circuits operated by external power fluid;

    561,    for a pressure balancing free piston between parallel pulsators;

    562,    for a tandem master;

    571+,   for a double acting slave or opposed slaves having a single output.


    576+,   for plural separately movable pistonsproviding plural stage
    pressure generation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclass 345 for multiple master cylinders operating a
    specific motion retarding structure.


CLS 60/582
TXT Apparatus under subclass 533 comprising normally inactive means that
    becomes effective upon the occurrence of a malfunction of a pulsator to
    ameliorate the effect of the malfunction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    550,    for a combined manual and power operated system having means that
    eases manual operation responsive to malfunction of the motor;

    552,    for a combined manual and power system in which the manual system
    becomes operative upon malfunction of the power system.

    568,    for a pulsator with distinct means for holding a pulsator element
    in a set position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 456+ for a fluid system having a safety
    cut-off valve requiring reset.


CLS 60/583
TXT Apparatus under subclass 533 in which a master device and a slave device
    are incorporated in a unitary structure.


CLS 60/584
TXT Apparatus under subclass 533 with distinct separately and externally
    operated structure used in preparing, adjusting or maintaining the
    apparatus, such structure charging the pulsator with fluid;  purging the
    pulsator; or removing fluid from the pulsator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    572+,   for a double acting slave or opposed slaves having a single output
    and having pulse fluid pressure or quantity compensating or adjusting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclass 352 for a fluid pressure brake for a vehicle
    having a filling or bleeding device.


CLS 60/585
TXT Apparatus under subclass 533 comprising a piston cylinder liquid
    pressurizing device having communicating with its inlet a means holding a
    reserve supply of motive liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    543,    for a programmed self cycled or self pulsed device having self
    operated pulse fluid quantity adjustment structure;

    572+,   for a system including double acting or opposed slave units that
    drive a single output having pulse fluid pressure or quantity adjustment
    means;

    581+,   for plural master cylinder piston devices of plural pulsators fed
    by a common reservoir;

    584,    for a pulsator having separately and externally operated structure
    for charging, discharging or bleeding it;

    592,    for a pulsator having a fluid supply means, or means compensating
    for fluid expansion, contraction or leakage.


CLS 60/586
TXT Apparatus under subclass 585 in which the master cylinder device or the
    reserve liquid holder includes a valve, diaphragm or piston by which
    pressure of the liquid in the line to the slave is kept at a pressure above
    atmospheric even while the pressurizing structure is in its nonoperating or
    stand-by position whereby slack in the slave device is taken up and leakage
    of air into the pulsator is prevented.


CLS 60/587
TXT Apparatus under subclass 586 in which the above atmospheric pressure is
    maintained at least up to the passage by which the liquid from the
    reservoir is fed to the master cylinder.


CLS 60/588
TXT Apparatus under subclass 585 in which on inlet to the pulse volume of
    liquid from the reserve liquid holder is a part in the cylinder wall that
    connects the reserve liquid and the pulse liquid when the piston of the
    master is in its nonpressurizing position and which is traversed by the
    piston during its initial advance so that the port is on one side of the
    piston and the pulse liquid on the other during pressurization.


CLS 60/589
TXT Apparatus under subclass 585 with a cut-off valve controlling flow between
    the reserve supply holder and the cylinder of the master that is
    mechanically opened or closed by the movement of the working member of the
    master or by a connection to the means driving the working member.


CLS 60/590
TXT Apparatus under subclass 533 including structure between the master and
    slave that (1) stops flow from slave toward the master after a measured
    quantity has been forced from the slave by the bias or (2) stops flow from
    the slave when the discharge pressure produced by the bias has dropped to a
    predetermined value.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    586+,   for means associated with a master reservoir assembly establishing
    a standby pressure in the pulsator fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 493 for a bi-directional line condition
    responsive valve of general utility and subclass 598 for a valve, per se,
    disclosed as in a brake line.

    188,    Brakes, subclass 351 for a fluid pressure operated brake having a
    hydraulic automatic slack adjustor.

    303,    Fluid-Pressure and Analogous Brake Systems, subclasses 81+ for a
    system distributing fluid to brakes having means controlling the release of
    pressure.


CLS 60/591
TXT Apparatus under subclass 533 with distinct valve or restrictor structure in
    the flow path between the master and slave controlling the rate of flow of
    the pulse fluid or controlling flow between passages in the flow path to
    establish a rate of movement of the slave or to control or relieve pressure
    in the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    569,    for a pulsator having a valve in the flow line for maintaining the
    position of a slave by sealing pulse fluid in the slave.

    590,    for a device limiting the return flow of pulse fluid from a spring
    biased slave.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 455+ for a line condition responsive
    valve, per se; and subclass 561 for a fluid handling system of general
    utility.

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 297+, for an internal resistance motion retarder
    comprising a resistance means retarding flow between two chambers to dampen
    motion (e.g., shock absorber, dashpot, etc.).

    303,    Fluid-Pressure and Analogous Brake Systems, appropriate subclass
    for a valve, per se, or in combination with a nominal slave specialized for
    use in distributing fluid between branches in a brake system.


CLS 60/592
TXT Apparatus under subclass 533 (1) with structure by which a change in volume
    of the pulsator fluid is accommodated by addition of fluid, by relieving or
    absorbing expansion, by means following contraction; (2) with a reservoir
    for receiving fluid from or supplying it to a pulsator; or (3) having a
    fluid supply structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    542,    for pneumatic self cycled pulsator having pulse air bleed or supply
    means.

    543,    for a self cycled pulsator with a self operated pulse fluid purge
    or quantity adjustment structure.

    572+,   for a double acting output motor or opposed motor units having
    pulse fluid pressure or quantity adjusting means.

    584,    for a pulsator having separately and externally operated structure
    for charging, discharging or bleeding it.

    585+,   for a master device combined with a liquid reservoir feeding liquid
    to the master.


CLS 60/593
TXT Apparatus under subclass 533 wherein a master cylinder working member is
    actuated by a rotary motor or an expansible chamber driven by a fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    537+,   for a self-cycled or self pulsed device.

    545,    for a pulsator having electrically operated structure (e.g.,
    electrical motor, etc.).

    547+,   for a master powered by a motor driven by an external fluid and
    having manual or automatic means controlling the external fluid.

    579+,   for a system in which the master of one pulsator is driven by the
    slave of a second pulsator.


CLS 60/594
TXT Apparatus under subclass 533 in which the piston of a master cylinder is
    driven through a mechanical linkage or lever system, or by a cam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    539,    for a self cycling system having a cam drive of plural masters.

    550,    for a power control lever that drives a master on power failure and
    having means adjusting the lever throw or pump resistance responsive to
    power failure.


CLS 60/595
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising an internal combustion free
    piston device that produces pressurized fluid and a fluid motor operated by
    the pressurized fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 46 for a free piston internal
    combustion device, per se.


CLS 60/596
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a device operable as a free
    piston internal combustion device having provision by which it may be
    driven by compressed elastic fluid for starting it in operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    595,    for a free piston device the exhaust of which drives a motor.


CLS 60/597
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising the combustion of (1) an
    internal combustion engine of the type where fuel is burned in an
    expansible working chamber means, said engine may or may not do work other
    than to produce combustion products; and (2) a fluid actuated motor means
    actuated in whole or in part by (a) motive fluid comprising said combustion
    products, or (b) motive fluid generated by said combustion products or by
    other energy which is unused to do work but which is exhausted or otherwise
    lost by said engine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.01+, for expansible or nonexpansible chamber type combustion products
    generators, per se, and in combination with fluid motors activated by the
    products of combustion generated in the combustion products generator.

    200+,   for the combination of nonexpansible chamber and expansible chamber
    combustion products generators and reaction motors (jet).

    595,    for fluid motor supplied with  motive fluid by an internal
    combustion type piston device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, for piston free internal combustion
    engines, per se.

    188,    Brakes, subclass 154, for fluid pressure operated brakes in which
    the operating fluid is obtained from the exhaust of an internal combustion
    or other vapor engine.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 236+, for fluid motors which may be converted to
    pumps and which may be motivated by energy of the exhaust combustion
    products of an internal combustion engine.


CLS 60/598
TXT Apparatus under subclass 597, having means to pressurize the oxidant charge
    for the internal combustion engine prior to its introduction into the
    combustion chamber of said engine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal Combustion Engines, subclasses 568+, for internal
    combustion engines having superchargers driven directly through mechanical
    means by the output shaft of the internal combustion engine or by any means
    other than the exhaust gases after they have left the internal combustion
    engine.


CLS 60/599
TXT Apparatus under subclass 598, having heat exchange structure or control
    means therefor to vary the temperature of the pressurizing oxidant supply
    for the internal combustion engine.


CLS 60/600
TXT Apparatus under subclass 598, wherein the internal combustion engine
    oxidant pressurizing means is driven by a fluid motor activated by the
    exhaust from an internal combustion engine, and wherein condition
    responsive valve means are provided to control both the exhaust flow from
    the internal combustion engine and the pressurized oxidant flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    606,    for apparatus having means to introduce other fluids into the ICE
    exhaust stream.


CLS 60/601
TXT Apparatus under subclass 600, wherein a fuel control means other than the
    cyclic control means for the internal combustion engine is coordinated with
    the means to control the oxidant flow and/or the internal combustion engine
    exhaust flow.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are devices having means to vary
    supercharger speed resulting in a change in intake manifold pressure which
    in turn determines fuel flow.


CLS 60/602
TXT Apparatus under subclass 598, having condition responsive valve control
    means to control the flow of exhaust combustion products between the
    internal combustion engine means and the fluid motor.

    (1)     Note.  A cyclic internal combustion engine exhaust valve is
    considered a control valve for this subclass if condition responsive means
    are provided to vary the timing of the cyclic operation of said valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    615,    for a nonsupercharged internal combustion engines in combination
    with an exhaust gas driven fluid motor having condition responsive means to
    control the exhaust gas from the combustion engine.


CLS 60/603
TXT Apparatus under subclass 602, with condition responsive means for noncyclic
    control of the fuel flow for the internal combustion engine.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are devices having means to vary
    supercharger speed resulting in a change in intake manifold pressure which
    in turn determines fuel flow.


CLS 60/604
TXT Apparatus under subclass 598, wherein a motive fluid, not the engine
    exhaust, that drives the supercharger is generated in a device employing
    the heat energy of the exhaust from engine as its source of energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    616,    for a motor of general utility driven by a motive fluid generated
    by the heat energy of the exhaust from an ICE.


CLS 60/605.1
TXT Supercharging means driven by engine exhaust actuated motor:

    Apparatus under subclass 598 wherein the means pressurizing the oxidant for
    the internal combustion engine is driven at least in part by a motor which
    employs, as motive fluid, the exhaust from the internal combustion engine.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes devices having means to increase the
    energy in the ICE exhaust products, e.g., by introducing fuel in said
    exhaust to be burned therein.


CLS 60/605.2
TXT With exhaust gas recirculation:

    Apparatus under subclass 605.1 in which part of the combustion products
    exhausted from the engine are returned to the engine combustion chamber for
    subsequent reburning.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 568+ for nonsupercharged
    internal combustion engines having exhaust gas recirculation.


CLS 60/605.3
TXT With motor bearing lubrication or cooling:

    Apparatus under subclass 605.1 in which a cooling or lubricating fluid is
    supplied to the motor bearings.


CLS 60/606
TXT Apparatus under subclass 605, in which a nonexhaust fluid is supplied
    separately or mixed with the exhaust products to a motor driving a
    supercharger.


CLS 60/607
TXT Apparatus under subclass 605, in which a single unitary oxidant
    pressurizing pump is driven by a motor of one type operated by the exhaust
    of the engine and by (1) a second motor of another type; (2) a second motor
    of the same type operated by a different fluid or energy or energy source;
    or (3) by a mechanical drive from the engine.


CLS 60/608
TXT Apparatus under subclass 607, wherein the internal combustion engine
    exhaust driven fluid motor may assume a larger proportion of the load of
    the means pressurizing said oxidant than the diverse drive means actuating
    the oxidant pressurizing means in response to a second condition.

    (1)     Note.  This load assumption may be produced by an over riding
    clutch which in effect senses the relative speed of the ICE vs. the
    auxilary drive means for the supercharger or the load may be assumed or
    dropped responsive to a particular ICE temperature or pressure, etc.


CLS 60/609
TXT Apparatus under subclass 605, having one oxidant pressuring means driven
    mechanically or directly by the internal combustion engine being supplied
    the pressurized oxidant, and another oxidant pressurizing means actuated by
    a fluid motor motivated by the exhaust from said internal combustion engine.


CLS 60/610
TXT Apparatus under subclass 609, wherein at least two of the plural
    pressurizing means are arranged either in series or in parallel one with
    the other and have means whereby they may be rearranged from their original
    relationship to cooperate in another of said arrangements.


CLS 60/611
TXT Apparatus under subclass 605, having means to control the quantative flow
    of the pressurized oxidant in response to a sensed condition.

    (1)     Note.  Internal combustion engine cyclic or fuel control means are
    included herein when the operation of said control means is varied in
    response to a sensed variable condition.

    (2)     Note.  Flow of the supercharged flow may be by means of controlled
    valving or by means bleeding off a portion thereof after leaving the
    compressor or by controlling the inflow to the compressor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    608,    for condition responsive means to control one of a plurality of
    means to drive a supercharger to create a desired supercharge flow rate.


CLS 60/612
TXT Apparatus under subclass 605, wherein more than a single unitary means is
    provided to pressurize the oxidant charge for the internal combustion
    engine, at least one of said means being motivated by exhaust energy from
    the internal combustion engine.


CLS 60/613
TXT Apparatus under subclass 597, wherein an a accumulator is utilized to
    temporarily store the combustion products discharged from the internal
    combustion engine, before said products enter said motor means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281,    for an internal combustion engine with structure that collects and
    stores exhaust gas or uses it as a pressure fluid source.


CLS 60/614
TXT Apparatus under subclass 597, with structure by which motive fluid for the
    motor is generated, cleaned, mixed, separated, heated, cooled, controlled
    or electrically treated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272,    for an internal combustion engine with treatment or handling of the
    exhaust gas but not having a fluid motor driven by energy of the exhaust.


CLS 60/615
TXT Apparatus under subclass 614 wherein the flow rate, pressure, temperature
    or composition of the motive fluid for the fluid motor means is changed in
    response to some sensed condition.


CLS 60/616
TXT Apparatus under subclass 614, wherein the motive fluid for the fluid motor
    is generated, heated, or cooled in a heat exchange which employs, as its
    source of energy, the exhaust energy from the associated internal
    combustion engine or other waste heat from the engine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    604,    for a fluid motor in which heat from the exhaust of an internal
    combustion engine generates the motive fluid, the motor driving a pump
    supercharging the engine.


CLS 60/617
TXT Apparatus under subclass 616, having additional means by which a gas,
    liquid or vaporized liquid is added to the motive fluid for the fluid motor
    prior to its admission into the fluid motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    619,    for fluid motors motivated by the exhaust combustion products of an
    internal combustion engine having means to introduce a diverse fluid to the
    products.


CLS 60/618
TXT Apparatus under subclass 616, wherein the motive fluid for the fluid motor
    is a vapor from a liquid.


CLS 60/619
TXT Apparatus under subclass 614, having means by which a fluid which is unlike
    the combustion products is mixed with the combustion products prior to
    entry into the fluid motor, said fluid, where mixed, not acting as fuel or
    oxidizer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    617,    for fluid motors having means to transfer the heat of the
    combustion products exhausted from an internal combustion engine to the
    motive fluid for said motor as well as means to introduce a diverse fluid
    into said motive fluid.


CLS 60/620
TXT Apparatus under subclass 597, wherein the internal combustion engine, and
    the other of said motor means each has at least one working member and the
    working members of the diverse motors are mechanically interconnected.


CLS 60/621
TXT Apparatus under subclass 620, in which the mechanically interconnected
    working members comprise rigidly interconnected pistons or diaphragms.


CLS 60/622
TXT Apparatus under subclass 620, wherein the pressurized fluid actuated motor
    is charged with pressurized combustion products successively from a
    plurality of internal combustion engines, combustion chambers, (e.g.), the
    exhaust from each cylinder of an ICE is fed directly to the fluid motor.


CLS 60/623
TXT Apparatus under subclass 620, wherein the fluid actuated motor is of the
    rotary expansible chamber type.


CLS 60/624
TXT Apparatus under subclass 597, in which the fluid motor is an impulse type
    motor actuated by the impact of the motive fluid against a working member
    which is mechanically interconnected with the output means of the internal
    combustion engine.


CLS 60/625
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising an internal combustion
    engine with ancillary structure for supplying pressure fluid other than the
    combustible charge to the expansible chamber of the engine to bring the
    engine from rest to a speed at which it operates as an internal combustion
    engine or with an ancillary fluid motor that functions to bring the engine
    from rest up to operating speed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    712,    for a motor operating on a cycle combining internal combustion and
    pressure fluid source energization or that is convertible to be either an
    internal combustion engine or a fluid motor driven by motive fluid from a
    pressure fluid source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 53, for a disengageable
    fluid motor for turning or starting the rotary shaft of a no more than
    nominally recited engine.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 179.1+, for an internal
    combustion engine with means for starting it from rest mechanically or by
    modified internal combustion.

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants, subclasses 31+, for a prime-mover dynamo
    plant including a dynamo electric machine which acts as a motor for
    starting the prime mover and as a generator; subclasses 36+, for a
    prime-mover plant having a separate generator and an electric starting
    motor; and subclass 48, for a plant comprising an internal combustion
    engine and having an electrical starting motor.

    417,    Pumps, subclass 323, for a pump system in which the pump is started
    by a motor driven by pump fluid.


CLS 60/626
TXT Apparatus under subclass 625, including a motive fluid compressor,
    generator, or storage vessel.


CLS 60/627
TXT Apparatus under subclass 626, in which structure by which fluid for use in
    the motor is energized or collected, the condition sensor controlling the
    storage or energization means.


CLS 60/628
TXT Apparatus under subclass 626, including a vessel for receiving and storing
    motive fluid from an internal combustion engine cylinder converted to act
    as a pump.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclass 237, for an internal combustion engine one cylinder
    of which is convertible to be a pump.


CLS 60/629
TXT Apparatus under subclass 626, including an internal combustion device and a
    separate expansible chamber device by which it can be set to operate as an
    expansible chamber motor to drive the output of the apparatus or as a
    compressor driven by the internal combustion elements of the apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclass 324, for a pump operated as a motor to start a
    nominal recited prime mover.


CLS 60/630
TXT Apparatus under subclass 625, having manually settable valve means for the
    control of the flow of either the fuel and/or pressurized fluid to the
    working chamber means for the rotation of the working member means.


CLS 60/631
TXT Apparatus under subclass 630, in which the valve means can be selectively
    set to provide for clockwise or counterclockwise rotation of the motor
    shaft.


CLS 60/632
TXT Noncyclic motor under the class definition in which pressure fluid
    resulting from an explosion of a fuel charge within or in direct
    communication with the working chamber of an expansible chamber type motor
    during the explosion produces a single power stroke of the output member of
    the motor.

    (1)     Note.  To be considered a motor under this definition, the member
    moved by the explosion produced pressure fluid must, at least by
    disclosure, remain after being so moved, as a part of the motor.  Devices
    in which the member moved by the pressure fluid is ejected or projected
    from the rest of the device, so as to become detached therefrom are not
    included as motors under this definition.  (See such classes as Class 42,
    Firearms, and Class 89, Ordnance).

    (2)     Note.  To be considered in direct communication with the motor
    working chamber, the explosion must occur within an enclosed space or
    chamber having, at the instant of explosion, an open fluid flow path to the
    motor working chamber so that the explosion produced pressure fluid may act
    immediately on the motor working member.  The fluid flow path between
    explosion chamber and motor working chamber may include a transfer valve,
    providing such valve is opened at the instant of explosion or prior thereto.

    (3)     Note.  Motors under this definition are limited to motors of the
    type specified, alone, or in combination with their pressure fluid
    producing means, which are incapable of causing a repetition of the
    pressure fluid producing explosion, or cyclic operation of the motor,
    without an intervening operation of some part of the motor or some part of
    the pressure fluid producing means by a nonperiodic force which is neither
    produced nor controlled by the explosion or by operation of the motor.
    Such motors or combinations may include means for holding plural fuel
    charges and/or means to place the motor and/or fluid producing means in
    condition for a subsequent operation.

    (4)     Note.  Power plants of more comprehensive nature than specified in
    (3) Note above, and which include as a subcombination thereof a motor of
    the type included under this definition, will be classified in other
    appropriate subclasses of this class on the basis of the features of the
    more comprehensive power plant.

    (5)     Note.  Combinations in which explosive actuated motors of the type
    included under this definition act as the power means for operating
    particular art devices are classified with the various art devices, if any
    significant features of the art device are claimed. Generally, a load
    device for the motor, claimed by name only, will not exclude a patent from
    classification under this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    253,    for a reaction motor driven by a charge of solid propellant,
    subclass 39.47,  for a motor using combustion products from a solid charge
    or motive fluid; and subclass 415, for a pressure accumulator energized by
    a gas pump or external gas supply.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 254+, for explosion operated pullers or
    pushers in assembling or disassembling apparatus.

    42,     Firearms, appropriate subclass for a device in which the member
    moved by the pressure fluid is projected so as to become detached therefrom.

    89,     Ordnance, subclasses 1.51+, for a device for discharging a bomb,
    plane, or signal device from an aircraft; and subclass 1.818, for a rocket
    launcher using an auxiliary rocket launching charge.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 530+, for blank cartridges
    for generating a gas.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 24, for a cycling engine
    using an explosive solid substance; and subclass 183, for a starting device
    for an internal combustion engine in which gases resulting from a gum
    powder explosion act upon the working piston of the apparatus to provide a
    starting force for the engine.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, appropriate subclass
    for explosive compositions, per se.

    166,    Wells, subclass 63, and the search there noted for explosive
    devices in wells.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 2+, for devices or
    methods of boring by below ground explosions and including a device for
    firing a bullet or exploding a shaped charge in an inaccessible bore to
    penetrate the earth formation or to perforate or cut a tubular casing or
    other wall member in the bore.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclasses 8 and 9+, for
    apparatus for driving a member, e.g., stud, by fluid pressure generated by
    an explosion.


CLS 60/633
TXT Apparatus under subclass 632, with structure by which fluid to form the
    explosive charge is fed to a combustion chamber of the apparatus.


CLS 60/634
TXT Apparatus under subclass 632, including means to hold plural separately
    explodable fuel charges in exploding positions, or which includes means to
    hold plural unit fuel charges and to move them successively into exploding
    position.


CLS 60/635
TXT Apparatus under subclass 632, having structure with which the working
    member of the motor becomes engaged when it reaches its fired position and
    which holds the working member in its fired position.


CLS 60/636
TXT Apparatus under subclass 632, with means positively preventing movement of
    the working member of the motor or of the firing mechanism, the member
    being movable only after the deformation or rupture of a destructable
    element, the release of a latch or the deactivation of a safety device.


CLS 60/637
TXT Apparatus under subclass 632, in which the charge burns in a zone separated
    from the expansible chamber of the motor, the combustion products flowing
    through a restricted conduit or orifice from the zone to the chamber.


CLS 60/638
TXT Apparatus under subclass 632, with a structure (1) ameliorating or
    suppressing the effects of shock or vibration (2) damping the movement of
    the working member or (3) providing a cushioned slowdown of the working
    member.


CLS 60/639
TXT Apparatus under the class definition wherein the motor comprises movable
    means for accumulating and discharging a quantity of fluent material or a
    volume of liquid material from a flowing stream of the material which means
    moves under the influence of gravity in response to a predetermined
    accumulation of material from a first accumulating position to a second
    discharge position to provide power and in which a surface of such
    accumulation is open to the atmosphere during movement of the movable means.

    (1)     Note.  The subcombination in a metering device of accumulating
    means of the type noted above is included in this subclass if the meter is
    not claimed but merely disclosed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, or Animal Powered, subclasses 27+ for a
    motor in which kinetic energy is derived from the movement of a mass by
    virtue of the effect of gravity.


CLS 60/640
TXT Apparatus under subclass 639, in which the movable means comprises a
    pivoted member supporting a pair of accumulating means spaced on opposite
    sides of the point about which the member pivots and each such means is
    supplied with the material independently of the other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclasses 94+, for an automatic weighing scale in
    which an oscillating structure carries weight chambers that alternately
    accumulate and dumps fluid or liquid material.


CLS 60/641.1
TXT UTILIZING NATURAL HEAT:

    Subject matter under the class definition operating by means of heat
    evolved from natural sources, such as from the sun, air, water, earth, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    398,    for a power system including a pressure fluid source and motor
    utilizing natural energy other than heat.

    495,    for a motor having a buoyant working member, a tide or wave motor,
    for example.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 561+, 569+, and 714 for a solar
    heater, per se.

    136,    Batteries: Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclass 206 for a
    solar energy type of electrical generator.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 45 for a heat exchanger related to the
    earth or sun.


CLS 60/641.11
TXT With elevated structure:

    Apparatus under subclass 641.8 in which the motor or power plant operates
    at least in part by energy derived either from a substance confined or
    constrained to move in a desired path by a significant vertically extending
    man-made structure (e.g., house, chimney, etc.) or from a solar heat
    receptor mounted on such structure.


CLS 60/641.12
TXT Air is working fluid:

    Apparatus under subclass 641.11 wherein the substance is air.


CLS 60/641.13
TXT With single state working substance:

    Apparatus under subclass 641.8 wherein the heat heats a substance (solid or
    liquid) for producing work, the substance remaining in its solid or fluid
    state at all times.


CLS 60/641.14
TXT Gaseous:

    Apparatus under subclass 641.13 wherein the substance is either air or gas.


CLS 60/641.15
TXT With solar concentration:

    Apparatus under subclass 641.8 provided with significant solar ray focusing
    means.


CLS 60/641.2
TXT Geothermal:

    Apparatus under subclass 641.1 wherein the heat is evolved from the earth's
    interior.


CLS 60/641.3
TXT With direct fluid contact:

    Apparatus under subclass 641.2 wherein the heat of geothermal fluid is
    transferred to a working fluid by the physical contact of the two fluids
    (e.g., direct contact heat exchange).


CLS 60/641.4
TXT With deep well turbopump:

    Apparatus under subclass 641.2 wherein the heat is delivered to the earth's
    surface by a subsurface turbine-driven pumping unit.


CLS 60/641.5
TXT With fluid flashing:

    Apparatus under subclass 641.2 in which a controlled, pressurized fluid
    having heat is at least partially vaporized (flashed) upon a controlled
    reduction of pressure at the earth's surface.


CLS 60/641.6
TXT With natural temperature differential:

    Apparatus under subclass 641.1 in which power is generated as a result of a
    variance in temperature occurring naturally from two distinct geographical
    locations.

    (1)     Note.  Devices such as "drinking birds" are here classified.


CLS 60/641.7
TXT Ocean thermal energy conversion (OTEC):

    Apparatus under subclass 641.6 wherein the geographical location is a large
    (e.g., sea, ocean) body of water.


CLS 60/641.8
TXT Solar:

    Apparatus under subclass 641.1 wherein the source of heat is the sun.


CLS 60/641.9
TXT With distillation:

    Apparatus under subclass 641.8 wherein solar heat is used to heat a mixture
    for separating a more volatile part from at least one other part.


CLS 60/642
TXT Subject matter under the class definition operated by steam from a
    receptacle charged with hot water under pressure, as distinguished from
    those in which pressure is generated within a boiler by the application of
    heat.

    (1)     Note.  The charge of this subclass must come from an external
    supply and not be that collected in storage vessel or accumulator
    permanently a part of a heat operated plant to accommodate fluctuations in
    demand.  For this subject matter see subclasses 652 and 659.


CLS 60/643
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising (1) apparatus having
    (a) means to cause motive fluid to be increased in energy by the indirect
    addition of heat thereto and (b) a motor which is actuated by said motive
    fluid; and (2) a method of operating such apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    616+,   for a fluid motor the motive fluid for which has been energized by
    the heat of the exhaust of an internal combustion engine; subclasses 39.18
    and 39.19, for multiple fluid operated motors, one operated by combustion
    products and another one operated by a different fluid generally energized
    by heat exchange with the combustion products in the first motor; subclass
    641, for a heat operated power system where the source of energy is natural
    heat; subclasses 516+, for a motor operated by the expansion and/or
    contraction of a unit of mass of motivating medium; and subclasses 508+,
    for a motor operated by the heating or cooling of a fluid within an
    expansible chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    136,    Batteries: Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclasses 200+, for
    the direct development of electrical power from indirectly applied heat.


CLS 60/644.1
TXT Heating motive fluid by nuclear energy:

    Subject matter under subclass 643 in which externally applied heat is
    obtained from a radioactive decay or indirectly from a nuclear reactor.

    (1)     Note.  Class 376 provides for all patents involving a nuclear
    reactor which is more than nominally recited, e.g., by reciting details of
    the reactor core or by reciting a coolant as flowing through the nuclear
    reactor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203.1,  for a reaction motor energized by electric, radioactive decay, or
    radiated energy fluid heating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclasses 317+ for a nuclear reactor wherein steam is conducted exterior
    of the reactor and used in a heat exchanger or power-producing means.


CLS 60/645
TXT Process under subclass 643, involving steps performed in operating a power
    plant having motive fluid energized by indirectly applied heat.


CLS 60/646
TXT Process under subclass 645, including a manipulation that (1) puts a
    nonoperating power producer into operation; (2) that takes an operating
    power producer out of operation; (3) maintains a power producer in a
    nonoperating state but in condition for a rapid start; (4) protects the
    apparatus from damage; or (5) maintains it in operating condition as by
    cleaning or purging.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    656,    for apparatus energized by externally applied heat having ancillary
    structure for starting; and subclasses 657+, for a heat operated apparatus
    having cleaning, sealing, lubricating, purging, standby or protecting
    feature.


CLS 60/647
TXT Process under subclass 645, in which motive fluid in the course of power
    production reaches a pressure at or above that at which its vapor and
    liquid have the same density (i.e., critical pressure).


CLS 60/648
TXT Process under subclass 645, including a step of withdrawing steam or other
    product for delivery out of the plant to external use or preparing it for
    such use.


CLS 60/649
TXT Process under subclass 645, in which the motive fluid material of the plant
    comprises two materials of different chemical composition that are brought
    together or separated in the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.01,  for a system in which mixed materials are combusted outside of a
    motor and the combustion products used directly as motive fluid in a motor;
    and subclasses 682+, for a power system energized by externally applied
    heat using a single state motive fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, appropriate subclass for a motor in
    which mixed materials are burned within an expansible chamber and directly
    expanded to drive the motor.


CLS 60/650
TXT Process under subclass 645, in which a liquid or gas has its pressure or
    volume increased by the addition of heat and reduced by the removal of
    heat, the pressure or volume increment being used to produce mechanical
    work and the gas or liquid remaining as such throughout the procedure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    517+,   for a motor operated by the expansion and contraction of a unit
    mass of gas; subclass 530, for a motor operated by the expansion and
    contraction of a unit mass of liquid; and subclasses 682+, for a power
    apparatus actuated by externally applied heat using a single state motive
    fluid.


CLS 60/651
TXT Process under subclass 645, in which a motive fluid other than water or
    steam is changed from a liquid to a vapor in the power producing operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    671+,   for a power apparatus energized by indirectly applied heat using a
    motive fluid that is or includes a material other than steam or water.


CLS 60/652
TXT Process under subclass 645, including a procedure (1) by which the system
    may be temporarily made to produce power at a rate above its normal
    capacity; (2) by which a temporary excess of energy is stored for
    subsequent release; or (3) by which the operation of the system is varied
    as the load fluctuates to accommodate it to the load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    659,    for a heat operated power system having structure for the temporary
    storage of energy in the form of heat, steam or compressed gas; and
    subclasses 660+, for the automatic control of a heat operated power system.


CLS 60/653
TXT Process under subclass 645, in which heat is added to or removed from
    motive fluid after it has been generated or partially expanded to condition
    it for feed to a motor or motor stage.


CLS 60/654
TXT Process under subclass 645, including a power producing procedure in which
    the motive vapor exhausting from a motor is mingled with a stream of water
    being advanced toward the vapor generator.


CLS 60/655
TXT Apparatus under subclass 643, in which one motor is supplied with motive
    fluid energized by a second hot motive fluid driving a second motor, the
    motive fluids of the two motors being held separate at all times.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    616+,   for an internal combustion engine heating motive fluid motor; and
    subclass 39.18, for a power plant in which combustion products operate one
    motor and a different fluid heated by the combustion products operates a
    second motor.


CLS 60/656
TXT Apparatus under subclass 643, having structure the sole function of which
    is to start operation of the system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    646,    for a heat operated power plant having a particular startup,
    shutdown, protective or maintainance procedure.


CLS 60/657
TXT Apparatus under subclass 643, having as perfecting features structure by
    which (1) the apparatus is cleaned, (2) unwanted fluids are discharged from
    the system (3) the system is lubricated (4) the apparatus is held on
    standby for ease of restarting; or (5) the apparatus is protected from
    damage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    645+,   for a process of operating a heat energized power plant including a
    startup, shutdown, cleaning, protective or maintenance procedure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 379+, for a boiler with
    cleaning structure; and subclasses 504+, for a boiler having safety devices.

    184,    Lubrication, appropriate subclass for a lubrication system, per se.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 21, for a
    safety cutout for a closed fluid heater.

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, subclasses 110+, for a
    turbine having a lubricating, sealing, packing or bearing means with an
    internal working fluid connection.


CLS 60/658
TXT Apparatus under subclass 657, in which damage to an element exposed to a
    high temperature heat source is prevented by condition responsive means
    that insures a sufficient flow of heat removing fluid through the element.


CLS 60/659
TXT Apparatus under subclass 643, having structure by which motive fluid heat
    to be supplied to the motive fluid, or compressed gas is temporarily
    collected and stored for later use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    652,    for a heat operated power producing process with provision for the
    accommodation of fluctuating or peak loads.


CLS 60/660
TXT Apparatus under subclass 643, including a means sensing an external
    condition or a condition of the system and controlling the system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    658,    for apparatus in which damage to a heat receiving element is
    prevented by automatic means maintaining at least a minimum rate of flow.


CLS 60/661
TXT Apparatus under subclass 660, in which the control is by a means (1)
    sensing the condition of the fluid by which heat is removed from the
    system, (2) of a means controlling the flow of the fluid or (3) of a
    by-pass modifying the amount of heat transferred to the fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    686,    for a motor having an exhaust treating means with a condition
    responsive control of the exhaust structure or the exhaust condition.


CLS 60/662
TXT Apparatus under subclass 660, including two motors or motor stages and in
    which motive fluid is fed from the same source or separate sources of
    energized fluid separately to the two motors or motor stages.


CLS 60/663
TXT Apparatus under subclass 661, including a means treating fluid discharged
    from one motor and flowing to another; the control being of a reheater the
    heat condition of or of the addition of a quantity of fluid to the stream
    of motive fluid discharged from a first motor flowing toward a second motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    667,    for an automatically controlled boiler feed heater that may be
    heated by steam extracted between motor stages.


CLS 60/664
TXT Apparatus under subclass 660, in which (1) a control element of the heat
    input is actuated by response to a change of a sensed condition, (2) the
    condition of a heat source material is controlled or (3) a means sensing a
    condition of the heat source or heat source material controls the apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 18+, for the automatic control of combustion
    apparatus, per se.


CLS 60/665
TXT Apparatus under subclass 664, including means varying or modifying the
    action of heat supply structure and also means regulating the supply of
    motive liquid to or quantity of liquid and vaporizing structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 448.1, and 449, for the
    automatic regulation of boiler fuel and feed.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 14, for the
    automatic temperature regulation of the condition of a boiler and a
    combustion chamber heating it.


CLS 60/666
TXT Apparatus under subclass 660, in which the condition responsive control is
    of a flow of vapor through a passage by passing a heat exchanger in which
    the temperature of previously generated vapor is raised or lowered.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    653,    for a power plant process including superheating, desuperheating or
    reheating motive fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 479.1, for the automatic
    control of a superheater.


CLS 60/667
TXT Apparatus under subclass 660, in which the condition or flow of liquid
    being fed to the boiler or the quantity or condition of the liquid in the
    boiler is controlled by a condition responsive means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    665,    for the automatic control of both the fuel and the liquid feed to
    the boiler.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 451.1, for the automatic
    control of the feed to a boiler.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 20+, for
    the automatic control of the pressure or temperature of a boiler.


CLS 60/668
TXT Apparatus under subclass 643, in which the power plant with means
    generating hot motive fluid includes means dependent on vehicle motion, a
    vehicle traction feature or vehicle body structure not classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 37+, for a steam locomotive.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 36+ for a motor vehicle of a kind which
    is adapted to pull, rather than to support, a load and which is provided
    with a motor of the steam type and a boiler therefor; subclasses 291+ for a
    motor vehicle wherein a specific motor-to-body-frame relationship is
    established; and subclasses 303+ for a motor vehicle which includes a
    traction motor of a type driven by expansible gas received from a source
    external of the motor and wherein the gas is produced by the treatment of a
    volatile fluid.  In general, the nominal combination of a vehicle and a
    motor therefor is not beyond the scope of this class (60); however,
    classification in Class 180 is proper when such elements, members, or
    mechanisms as the frame, the change-speed gearing, the shafting, and
    connections for transferring power to one or more ground-engaging elements
    (e.g., wheels), and so forth, are included.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclass 12.8 for a combined steam heating and
    power plant for a car.


CLS 60/669
TXT Apparatus under subclass 643, in which a structure in which motive fluid is
    generated serves as a support or mount for a motor driven by the motive
    fluid, e.g., unitary motor-boiler assembly etc.


CLS 60/670
TXT Apparatus under subclass 643, in which vapor is generated from a liquid and
    utilized as motive fluid to actuate a motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227,    for a reaction motor in which the motive fluid is principally
    steam; subclass 531, for a motor operated by the vaporization and
    condensation of a confined mass; and subclass 514, for a motor in which
    liquid is supplied to and vaporized in an expansible chamber.


CLS 60/671
TXT Apparatus under subclass 670, in which a claim includes a recitation of (1)
    the material which comprises the fluid which is energized to motivate the
    motor means; or (2) a material, other than fuel or substance which is
    burned to give off heat, which is mixed with a motive fluid for
    energization thereof to motivate a motor means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    649,    for a heat operated power producing procedure that includes mixing
    or separating materials of different chemical composition in a motive fluid
    flow path.


CLS 60/672
TXT Apparatus under subclass 671, in which the fluid motivating the motor is a
    reactive material that is fed to a combustion device after its expansion in
    the motor.


CLS 60/673
TXT Apparatus under subclass 671, in which two distinct fluids come in contact
    with each other in the apparatus for reaction or absorption.


CLS 60/674
TXT Apparatus under subclass 671, including structure by which air and steam or
    water are intermingled.


CLS 60/675
TXT Apparatus under subclass 670, in which generated vapor is condensed and
    collected at an elevated location and a work output is obtained from the
    movement of the condensate collector, downwardly under the influence of
    gravity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    639+,   for a motor actuated by accumulating and dumping liquid or fluent
    material from a flouring stream of the material.


CLS 60/676
TXT Apparatus under subclass 670, (1) in which a second vapor generator or an
    external source of vapor furnishes a supplemental quantity of motive fluid
    to a power system including a first vapor generator or (2) having more than
    one distinct means supplying heat to the apparatus.


CLS 60/677
TXT Apparatus under subclass 670, in which the vapor is fed to serially
    connected motors or stages and a branch stream of vapor is fed to or
    withdrawn from the interstage flow.


CLS 60/678
TXT Apparatus under subclass 677, in which the vapor withdrawn from between the
    motor stages is passed in indirect heat exchange with liquid supplied to
    the vapor generator.


CLS 60/679
TXT Apparatus under subclass 670, comprising a first motor exhausting fluid
    from a working chamber with means to heat the exhausted fluid indirectly
    the heated exhaust fluid being then supplied as motive fluid to actuate a
    second motor or motor stage.

    (1)     Note.  Exhaust fluid is fluid which is discharged from a motor
    working chamber after having done some work therein.

    (2)     Note.  Mere re-expansion between motors as between turbine stages
    does not preclude classification in the proper motor class.  This subclass
    requires the combination of a specific energizer (reheater) for the
    exhausted fluid wherein the energizer is defined in detail or where the
    energizer bears a significant relationship to the motor or generator.  An
    energizer (reheater) recited by name only as being connected between stages
    of a turbine would not preclude classification in Class 415 (or Class 91,
    in the case of an expansible chamber motor).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    614,    for plants wherein the exhaust from an ICE is heated prior to its
    being used as motive fluid for a fluid motor.

    698+,   for diverse motors wherein the exhaust from a motor operated by one
    principal is the motive fluid for a second motor which is operated by
    another principal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 152, for multiple
    expansible chambers where the kinetic energy of the exhaust fluid of one
    motor chamber is not materially affected (increased) before entry into
    another of the working chambers.

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, for turbine comprising:
    plural rotors where the expanded fluid (exhaust) of one rotor supplies the
    motive fluid for a subsequent rotor where (1) the rotors may each have a
    separate output shaft or (2) the rotors may be connected in series all
    attached to a single output shaft.


CLS 60/680
TXT Apparatus under subclass 679, with fluid passage means branching from a
    motor supply conduit and conducting hot motive fluid to reheat the motor
    exhaust.


CLS 60/681
TXT Apparatus under subclass 670, in which the vapor generator is heated by a
    burner and the exhaust of the burner is mixed with the exhaust of a motor
    driven by the vapor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    672,    for a power system involving a change of state using a motive fluid
    that is other than or additional to steam and that is used in the
    combustion zone, for example, combustible motive fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 203+, for a solid fuel burner in which exhaust
    steam is fed to the combustion zone.


CLS 60/682
TXT Apparatus under subclass 643, in which a heat energized motive fluid used
    in a device producing mechanical output does not change state during the
    operation of the system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    517+,   for a motor operated by expansion and contraction of a confined
    body of fluid (e.g., Stirling cycle); and subclasses 508+, for a motor
    operated by heating or cooling a fluid while within an expansible chamber.


CLS 60/683
TXT Apparatus under subclass 682, in which the motive fluid after discharge
    from a motor is discharged into a combustion zone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    672,    for a power system involving a change of state in which the motor
    exhaust is used in the combustion zone.


CLS 60/684
TXT Apparatus under subclass 682, including serially connected motors or motor
    stages and in which motive fluid passing between the motors or stages is
    indirectly heated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.17,  for a system using combustion products as motive fluid having an
    interstage cooler or heater.

    653,    for the condition responsive control of an interstage heater or
    mixer.

    679,    for a heat operated power system involving a change of state having
    a motive fluid reheater between serially connected motors or motor stages.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, subclass 179, for a rotary
    kinetic fluid motor or pump having a heat exchanger intermediate two sets
    of blades serving to transfer heat to or from the working fluid as it
    passes from one set to the next succeeding set.  See paragraph (1) of the
    Search Class reference to Class 60 in the class definition of Class 415,
    for the line as to this subject matter.


CLS 60/685
TXT Apparatus under class definition of a motor and exhaust system with means
    affecting the fluid after its exhaust from the motor.

    (1)     Note.  Exhaust fluid is considered to be the fluid that has left
    the final means that could extract power from the fluid and that has
    reached a point where its affect cannot affect operation of the power
    extraction means.  For an elaboration of this line see the statement in (4)
    Note, section B, paragraph (5) of the class definition of Class 91, and
    paragraph (7) of the Search Class note to Class 60, in the definition of
    Class 415.

    (2)     Note.  Fluid flowing between serially connected motors or motor
    stages is not considered to be exhaust fluids.  See subclass 684, of this
    class and the search notes to its definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.5,   for the treatment of the exhaust of a motor in which externally
    generated combustion products are used as motive fluid.

    200+,   for a power plant, the exhaust of which is the jet of a reaction
    motor.

    272,    for an internal combustion engine with means treating or handling
    exhaust gas.

    325+,   for a power system including a pressure fluid source and motor in
    which the motor exhaust is generally pressurized by a pump to be
    redelivered to the motor.

    595,    for a motor driven by the exhaust of a free piston type of internal
    combustion engine.

    597+,   for a motor driven by the waste heat or exhaust energy from an
    internal combustion engine.

    642+,   for a power plant energized by externally applied heat in which the
    motor exhaust is condensed or cooled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, appropriate subclasses for the utilization of motor
    exhaust steam in a furnace, particularly subclasses 203+, for using exhaust
    steam to promote combustion in the firebox and subclasses 119+ and 147+ for
    using exhaust fluid as a means to produce a draft in the smokebox of the
    furnace.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, particularly subclasses 412+, for
    boiler feed water heated by exhaust fluid.

    181,    Acoustics, subclass 213 for jet engine type mufflers, per se, and
    subclass 220 for ground based fluid treatment of jet engine exhaust.

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, subclasses 182.1+, for rotary
    kinetic fluid motors having motive fluid exhaust passages provided with
    means to simply guide, by means of vanes or conduits, the flow of motive
    fluid immediately after being discharged from the runner and within the
    area where the fluid could affect the operation of the motor (e.g., by
    affecting back pressure on the runner).


CLS 60/686
TXT Apparatus under subclass 685 having (1) control structure responding to a
    condition of the exhaust or (2) a condition responsive structure
    controlling flow or, or a condition of the exhaust.


CLS 60/687
TXT Apparatus under subclass 685, with means to take up or absorb stresses in
    the exhaust system which arise due to the difference of expansion and
    contraction of the components of the exhaust system.


CLS 60/688
TXT Apparatus under subclass 685, in which fluid exhausted from a steam engine
    is mingled with external water or separated condensate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    654,    for a steam power process in which exhaust steam is mingled with
    boiler feed water.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclass for a
    gas-liquid contact device, per se, for example a barometric or jet type
    condenser.


CLS 60/689
TXT Apparatus under subclass 685, in which motor exhaust fluid is mingled with
    a fluid supplied from a source different from the source of motive fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    672     and 683, for a heated power system in which the motor exhaust is
    fed into the combustion zone of the heater of the system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 203+, for a solid fuel burner in which exhaust
    steam from a motor is fed into the combustion zone.


CLS 60/690
TXT Apparatus under subclass 685, including means for passing the exhaust fluid
    through a heat exchanger in which it is cooled indirectly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    320+,   for an internal combustion engine having an exhaust system element
    that is heated, cooled, or used as a heat source.

    661,    for the automatic control of condenser cooling water.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclass for a condenser, per se.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 12.1+, for installations in which all
    or part of the exhaust steam is used for heating building, vehicles, or
    other inclosed structures.


CLS 60/691
TXT Apparatus under subclass 690, in which the heat exchange is between motor
    exhaust steam and water being prepared for introduction into a boiler that
    feeds steam to the motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    678,    for a boiler motor assembly in which boiler feed water is heated in
    stages by steam withdrawn between motor sections of serially connected
    motor sections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 412+, for a boiler feed
    heater combination.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclass for a heat exchanger, per se.


CLS 60/692
TXT Apparatus under subclass 690, in which the heat exchanger is a condenser
    and has a pump for removing liquid condensate from in the condenser.


CLS 60/693
TXT Apparatus under subclass 690, including plural physically distinct surface
    type heat exchangers.


CLS 60/694
TXT Apparatus under subclass 685, including a manually settable means in a
    structure receiving a stream of exhaust fluid from a motor and dividing the
    stream or directing its flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324,    for a divider, collector, valve means, or boundary layer device
    controlling exhaust gas flow from an internal combustion engine.


CLS 60/695
TXT Apparatus under subclass 694, which directs the discharge of a pneumatic
    motor into the surrounding air.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370,    for cyclically operable reciprocating pneumatic motor;

    407,    for a pneumatic motor with a gas supply or removal device.


CLS 60/696
TXT Apparatus under subclass 694, forming the flow path carrying the liquid
    away from a water driven motor.


CLS 60/697
TXT Apparatus under subclass 694, including flow directing structure steering
    fluid discharged from the rotor of a turbine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, subclasses 208.1+, for a vane
    or deflector directing the discharge from a rotary kinetic motor that is
    close enough to the rotor to affect the operation of the motor.


CLS 60/698
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including (1) a device having a
    mechanical output operable selectively or simultaneously from diverse
    inputs; (2) a device or assembly including plural motors at least one of
    which may be separately supplied with motive fluid or may be operated while
    another is not producing power; or (3) methods of operating such devices.

    (1)     Note.  This group of subclasses takes plural internal combustion
    engines of the type classifiable, per se, in Class 123.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.15+, for multiple fluid operated motors at least one of which is driven
    by externally generated combustion products.

    39.19,  for a single motor driven by diverse motive fluids that do not mix
    in the motor, one of the fluids being combustion products.

    224+,   for interrelated reaction motors.

    244+,   for a reaction motor driven by motive fluid from alternate diverse
    generators.

    420+,   for a condition responsive control in a pressure fluid source
    plural motor system.

    471,    for interconnected control elements operating plural distinct
    motors in a pressure fluid source motor system.

    539,    for a programmed, self cycled or self pulsed pulsator system having
    a cam type drive of plural masters actuating plural motors.

    581,    for plural structurally related master pistons, cylinders or
    pulsator circuits.

    597+,   for a fluid motor driven by the waste heat or exhaust energy from
    an internal combustion engine.

    625+,   for an internal combustion engine with a fluid motor, for rotating
    it for starting or convertible to a fluid motor for initiating rotation.

    642+,   a system including a motive fluid supplier energized by externally
    applied heat.  See, particularly subclasses 655, 663, 676, 677-680, and 684.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 661, for gearing for
    connecting plural prime movers either individually or unitarily to the same
    load.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 170+, for plural
    intercontrolled expansible chamber motors; and subclass 441, for a system
    of expansible chamber motions having plural working members.  See (4) Note
    of the class definition of Class 91, for a statement of the line.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 48+, for an earthworking machine having
    plural driven tools.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass .098, for the
    interrelated control of motors and clutches in a system having plural
    motors.

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants, subclass 4, for a prime mover dynamo
    plant having plural prime movers; and subclass 48, for the combination of
    an internal combustion engine and its electrical starting motor.

    303,    Fluid-Pressure and Analogous Brake Systems, subclasses 6.01+, for
    the distribution of pressure fluid to multiple motors, one of which is a
    brake motor.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 34+, for plural
    diverse or diversely controlled electric motors; and appropriate subclass
    for a residual system of plural electric motors.

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, subclasses 60+, for plural
    runners supported for relative movement or separate shafts in a rotary
    kinetic fluid motor system; subclass 144, for plural runner stages on a
    common shaft with a working fluid branch or bypass; and subclasses 198.1+,
    for plural blade sets rigidly mounted on a common shaft.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces, (i.e., Impellers), subclasses 120+, for a
    system of plural impellers that may drive or be driven by an unconfined
    fluid.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclass for a
    plurality of rotary expansible chamber motors and see (4) Note of the class
    definition of Class 91, for a statement of the line between those classes,
    the same line being maintained between Classes 60 and 418.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses 1+,
    for planetary gearing connecting plural prime movers to a load device.


CLS 60/699
TXT Apparatus under subclass 698, including a spring type motor combined with
    an internal combustion engine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, or Animal Powered, subclasses 2+, for
    composite or plural motors each of which is classifiable in Class 185.  See
    the notes in the class definition of Class 185, for the line between
    Classes 60 and 185, as to plural and diverse motors.


CLS 60/700
TXT Apparatus under subclass 698, wherein the relative rotational speed or
    angular position of the output shafts of a plurality of independently
    operable motors or devices is continually or intermittently sensed, said
    sensed differential effecting a control to maintain a predetermined
    operating relationship of the motors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 171, for plural
    expansible chamber motors synchronized in response to a sensed difference
    in position.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power System, subclasses 68+, for the control
    of the relative speed of plural electrical motors; and subclass 85, for the
    synchronizing or phasing control of plural electrical motors.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclass 34, for plural
    distinct impellers having a synchronizing control.


CLS 60/701
TXT Apparatus under subclass 700, in which the intercontrol system includes
    hydraulically or pneumatically operated control elements.


CLS 60/702
TXT Apparatus under subclass 700, including electrical elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 41+, for plural
    electric motors having electrical synchronizing interconnections; and
    subclasses 70+, for plural electrical motors with means controlling the
    relative speed using an electrical type detector.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 243 for an
    electrical speed controlled system for synchronizing plural shafts.


CLS 60/703
TXT Apparatus under subclass 698, in which at least one motor is controlled (1)
    by a punch card, template or tape; or (2) by an externally actuated
    standard means such as an oscillator or a motor not effected by the
    operation of the controlled device and that has no external output but
    merely sets a speed standard.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    395,    for a pressure fluid source driving a motor relative to an
    independently driven speed standard or pacer device.


CLS 60/704
TXT Apparatus under subclass 698, controlled (1) by a time measuring or period
    establishing device or (2) by a device providing a sequence of events set
    to occur at predetermined intervals or terminating a single operation in a
    fixed position to restart an additional cycle, which cycle is more complex
    than a mere starting or stopping of a single device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 35+, for expansible
    chamber motors having independently operated timer, delay pattern or cyclic
    control means.


CLS 60/705
TXT Apparatus under subclass 698, including structure signalling or giving an
    indication of a condition of operation of the plural motor apparatus or
    providing for inspection of a part of the apparatus.


CLS 60/706
TXT Apparatus under subclass 698, including structure sensing a condition of
    the apparatus or an external condition and effecting a control of the
    plural motors.


CLS 60/707
TXT Apparatus under subclass 706, including two expansible chamber motors
    having flow lines interconnecting them so that under one condition of
    operation at least some of the fluid passes first through one and then
    through another motor; the condition responsive control effecting an
    addition to or removal of motive fluid from the fluid stream of the two
    motors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    663,    for a boiler-motor system having an automatic control of branched
    feed to, condition of or heating means for motive fluid between serially
    connected motors or motor stages; and subclass 424, for a system including
    a pressure fluid source supplying serially connected motors, the system
    being automatically controlled to establish parallel operation or to
    by-pass a motor means of the series.


CLS 60/708
TXT Apparatus under subclass 706, in which the condition sensor effects a
    control of a cooling ventilating or braking element of the apparatus.


CLS 60/709
TXT Apparatus under subclass 706, in which the condition sensor actuates a
    means connecting or disconnecting one of the plural motors to an output
    device or to another motor.


CLS 60/710
TXT Apparatus under subclass 706, in which the condition sensed is the
    difference between the fuel or manifold conditions of a pair of internal
    combustion engines, and one of the engines is controlled in response to the
    sensed difference.


CLS 60/711
TXT Apparatus under subclass 706, in which the control (1) determines the
    amount of the common output load carried by each motor responsive to a
    condition of the load; or (2) the input to one of two motors driving a
    common load by a means sensing a condition of the other motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    426,    for a pressure fluid source-plural motor system in which the speed
    of or pressure in one motor controls another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 98+, for the
    distribution of load between plural electrical motors. See the search notes
    in the definition of this subclass for other pertinent subclasses in 318.


CLS 60/712
TXT Apparatus under subclass 698, having structure by which the motor apparatus
    can be energized both by the internal combustion of fuel and by the
    expansion of pressurized motive fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    625+,   for an internal combustion engine started by a separate motive
    fluid motor or being driven to start by the admission of motive fluid into
    the combustion chamber prior to the admission of fuel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 22, for a combined hot air
    and material combustion engine.


CLS 60/713
TXT Apparatus under subclass 698, with additional adjustable or positionable
    structure provided to act in opposition to one of the motors to inhibit or
    prevent motion of the motor or of its output.


CLS 60/714
TXT Apparatus under subclass 698, having means handling a fluid that cools,
    lubricates or flushes an element of the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    657,    for a system in which motive fluid is generated by externally
    applied heat that has a cleaning, purging or lubricating feature.


CLS 60/715
TXT Apparatus under subclass 698, wherein the exhaust for one of the motor
    means is the motive fluid for a second motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    597,    for a fluid motor actuated by the exhaust energy of an internal
    combustion engine.

    663,    for the automatic control of branched feed to, condition of or
    heating means for fluid between motor stages in a system having a steam
    generator.

    677+,   for serially connected motors in system including means generating
    motive fluid by externally applied heat.


CLS 60/716
TXT Apparatus under subclass 698, having means by which the motors are
    interconnected to drive one output means.


CLS 60/717
TXT Apparatus under subclass 716, including a means by which power is delivered
    by an output member separate from the common output.


CLS 60/718
TXT Apparatus under subclass 716, wherein a motor means is selectively
    engageable with the output means so that the motor may actuate the output
    individually or in concert.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass .098 for nominal or
    specific motors and adjustable clutch or gears means wherein there is a
    specific control for the clutch, per se, or an interrelated motor and
    clutch or gear control means.


CLS 60/719
TXT Apparatus under subclass 698, with manual control means for the apparatus
    including (1) structure by which the operations of the individual control
    means for the separate motors or outputs are interlocked or correlated; or
    (2) separate controllers grouped at a single point for selective operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    471,    for a system including a pressure fluid source and plural ram type
    motors controlled by an externally operated multiway valve or
    interconnected control elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass .098 for interrelated
    clutch and motor controls for a system including multiple motors.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 85 for a pilot operated hydraulic aircraft
    control system.

    303,    Fluid-Pressure and Analogous Brake Systems, for a fluid pressure
    brake system having a plurality of control means.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 34+ for plural,
    diversely controlled electrical motors.


CLS 60/720
TXT Apparatus under subclass 698, in which plural motors are mounted on a
    common supporting structure.


CLS 60/721
TXT Subject matter under the class definition not provided for in other
    subclasses.


CLS 60/722
TXT Combustion products generator:

    Plants under subclass 39.01 having a combustion device for producing
    products of combustion and associated parts such as valves, outlet nozzles,
    inlet diffusers, air compressors, air receivers, fuel pumps, fuel
    vaporizer, fuel injectors, igniting devices, or expansible or other
    chambers wherein a fuel and an oxidizer are burned in a combustion zone,
    and wherein the resulting products of combustion are disclosed solely for
    utilization in a prime mover for furnishing useful external power.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.23,  for combustion products generator in combination with means to vary
    the air flow.

    39.34+, for rotating combustion products generator and turbine.

    39.36,  for coaxial combustion products generator and turbine.

    39.37+, for plural combustion products generators in a ring, coaxial with a
    turbine shaft.

    39.46+, for combustion products generators which are modified to use
    oxidizer or fuel other than air, oil, or gasoline, and those which use a
    solid fuel carrying oxidizer.

    39.55,  for combustion products generator having means to inject water or
    steam therein.

    39.6+,  for combustion products generator in combination with a motor of
    the expansible chamber type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclass 107 for combined retorts
    for gasifying oil and means for introducing air or oxygen.

    110,    Furnaces, appropriate subclasses for furnace structure and
    accessories for solid fuel.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 281 for apparatus for generating a
    gas, which may involve combustion.

    431,    Combustion, appropriate subclasses for combustion apparatus of
    general utility.


CLS 60/723
TXT Having catalyst in combustion zone:

    Device under subclass 722 having a zone wherein fuel is burned and having a
    catalyst in said zone to directly affect the burning reaction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.46,  for dissociation of a fuel or oxidizer by use of a catalyst prior
    to a combustion reaction.

    299+,   for catalytic treatment of the exhaust gases from a reciprocating
    piston-type internal combustion engine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, for catalytic apparatus for producing a
    chemical reaction in a gas for general utility.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 7 for catalytic combustors of general utility.


CLS 60/724
TXT Plural with intercycling by pressure fluctuations:

    Device under subclass 722 wherein at least two of the devices are of the
    intermittent combustion type and are related by interconnecting means so
    that cyclic events such as fuel or oxidizer inlet, fuel injection
    scavenging, ignition, or exhaust in one combustion device are influenced
    directly by pressure changes due to cyclic events in the other combustion
    device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.77+, for combustion products generators of the intermittent combustion
    type.

    247+,   for reaction motors utilizing intermittent combustion (e.g., pulse
    jets).


CLS 60/725
TXT Having noise reduction means:

    Device under subclass 722 having means to reduce or suppress acoustic
    propagations from or within the combustion device.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are means to suppress resonance of gases
    within the combustion device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, appropriate subclass for acoustic treatment means.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 114 for combustion devices of general utility
    having sound or pulsation attenuating means.


CLS 60/726
TXT With means to pressurize oxidizer for combustion or other purposes:

    Device under subclass 722 having specific means to place under pressure
    either (a) the oxidizer to be employed in the combustion process, or (b) an
    oxidizer to be used as a pressurized fluid for a noncombustion supportive
    purpose.

    (1)     Note.  Among other means for compressing a fluent material this
    subclass includes:  (a) means to bleed pressurized oxidizer intermediate
    stages of a compressor for delivery of pressurized oxidizer to a combustion
    or for cooling a combustion device, or, (b) compressor means, auxiliary to
    that used to compress the combustion supporting oxidizer, for compressing
    what may be a combustion oxidizer but which is used solely for another
    purpose such as for cooling the combustion device.


CLS 60/727
TXT With oxidizer accumulator:

    Device under subclass 726 having means located within the oxidizer flow
    path between a compressor and the combustion zone of the combustion device
    for storing a mass of said oxidizer for subsequent use.


CLS 60/728
TXT Having oxidizer cooling means:

    Device under subclass 726 having a means to cool at least a portion of the
    oxidizer prior to its use in the combustion zone or prior to its use for
    some other purpose in the combustion device.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes means to inject a vaporized coolant,
    such as water or fuel, into a combustion supporting air flow to effect
    cooling thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257+,   for reaction motors employing means to cool or liquefy air for
    subsequent use in the formation of a propellant for said motor.


CLS 60/729
TXT Reciprocating positive displacement type:

    Device under subclass 726 wherein the means placing the oxidizer under
    pressure comprises a contractable chamber formed by the reciprocation of a
    portion of said chamber relative to another portion of said chamber.


CLS 60/730
TXT With liquid heat exchanger:

    Device under subclass 722 having means to transfer heat to a coolant
    supplied for such purpose in the liquid state.

    (1)     Note.  The liquid coolant may vaporize while in the process of
    absorbing heat from the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.18,  for plants where the heat absorbing fluid is subsequently utilized
    to drive a motor after absorbing heat and thereby cooling the device.

    39.53+, for plants wherein water is added to the combustion products to
    cool the same at some point prior to the discharge thereof from the prime
    mover which uses said products.

    267,    for heat exchanger means using liquid to cool reaction motors.

    736,    for plants having means to use fuel as a liquid coolant and to
    subsequently use said coolant as fuel in a combustion device.


CLS 60/731
TXT With combustion products accumulator:

    Device under subclass 722 and one or more storage vessel means for
    receiving all or a portion of the products of combustion from one or more
    combustion devices for subsequent use by a prime mover.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.13,  for accumulators including means to stop and start the operation of
    the combustion products generator in response to pressure fluctuations in
    the accumulator.

    39.56+, wherein the water accumulator or boiler serves as a mixing chamber
    for combustion products and steam.

    39.59,  for mixing chambers for combustion products and steam.

    281,    for combinations of internal-combustion engines and exhaust gas
    accumulators.

    632+,   for one shot explosion actuated expansible chamber type motors.


CLS 60/732
TXT Having initial fuel-rich combustion zone:

    Device under subclass 722 having a plurality of combustion zones
    distinguished by the fuel-oxidizer ratio supplied to each zone for
    combustion therein, and wherein an amount of fuel in excess of that
    required for stoichiometric combustion is supplied to a first fuel-rich
    zone for combustion, and to the product of that combustion, and downstream
    of the first zone, additional fuel or air is added for combustion at one or
    more locations in what is considered an additional zone or zones whereby
    the total combustion process of the device is staged.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are those devices provided with
    a separate fuel-rich combustion zone which serves only as an igniter or
    initiator such as a pilot flame; see this class (60), subclass 39.82.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.06,  for methods of fuel injection.

    739,    for manifold means supplying a plurality of separate injectors as
    least two of which inject fuel into separate combustion zones.

    746+,   for plural, distinct, spaced injectors for plural distinct
    combustion zones.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    431,    Combustion, subclass 10 for means to add an oxidizer to a region of
    incomplete combustion.


CLS 60/733
TXT Separate fuel injectors for plural zones: Device under subclass 732 having
    fuel injector means for the fuel-rich zone and additional fuel injector
    means disposed downstream of said fuel-rich zone to supply fuel to the
    combustion products discharged from the fuel-rich zone.

    (1)     Note.  The additional injector means may supply both oxidizer and
    fuel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    746,    for separate fuel injectors for separate zone having the same
    fuel-oxidizer mixture.


CLS 60/734
TXT Having fuel supply system:

    Device under subclass 722 having means to supply fuel to the device or to
    inject fuel into the zone therein where the fuel is combusted.


CLS 60/735
TXT Fuel injected into turbine:

    Device under subclass 734 in combination with a turbine having an impeller
    element and including means to inject fuel into said element.

    (1)     Note.  Fuel may either be injected by an injector located
    structurally within the turbine, or fuel may be injected just upstream of
    the turbine to flow thereinto.  The fuel may or may not combust within the
    turbine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, subclass 115 for a turbine
    having passage means in a vane, shaft, or rotary distributor through which
    a fluid may be supplied to the turbine; and subclass 116 for means to
    supply diverse fluids to a turbine.


CLS 60/736
TXT Fuel preheated upstream of injector:

    Device under subclass 734 having means to heat the fuel prior to the point
    where it exits the injector and enters the combustion zone.

    (1)     Note.  Preheating a mixture of fuel and air downstream of the fuel
    injector is excluded from this subclass.  See subclass 738.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 161+ for combustion devices of general
    utility wherein fuel for the device is heated by heat generated by the
    device; and subclasses 207+ for combustion devices of general utility
    having a flame holder and means to heat fuel supplied to the flame holder.


CLS 60/737
TXT Fuel and air premixed prior to combustion:

    Device under subclass 734 having means whereby fuel and air may be mixed
    prior to the point where combustion occurs.

    (1)     Note.  A separate means may be provided which permits the air fuel
    mixing to be completed prior to combustion by prohibiting flame flashback
    from the combustion zone to the mixing zone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 419+ for
    injector means capable of mixing separately supplied fluid at or beyond its
    outlet.


CLS 60/738
TXT Premix tube within combustion zone:

    Device under subclass 737 wherein at least a portion of the air and fuel
    are mixed downstream of the injector, and prior to combustion, within a
    conduit means which is itself within the combustion zone whereby the fluids
    being mixed may be heated but not caused to combust by the gases in the
    combustion zone.


CLS 60/739
TXT With fuel supply manifold for separate injectors:

    Device under subclass 734 having conduit means for delivering fuel from a
    source to a plurality of separate and spaced fuel injectors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.37,  for gas turbines having a plurality of combustion devices arranged
    in a ring whose axis is coaxial with the turbine shaft and having manifold
    means whereby fuel may be supplied to the combustion devices.

    261,    for fuel manifolds for supplying fuel to a plurality of reaction
    motor afterburners.

    270,    for fuel manifolds used in ramjet engines.

    742,    for unitary injectors having plural fuel flow paths and manifold or
    flow dividing means supplying said paths from a source.


CLS 60/740
TXT With fuel injector:

    Combustion devices under subclass 734 in combination with means to inject
    fuel into the combustion device wherein significance is attributed to (a)
    the injector structure, (b) the relationship of the injector in the
    combustion device, (c) the modification of the structure of the combustion
    device to accommodate or to cooperate with the injector, or (d) the
    modification of the operation of the injector in view of its environment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.06,  for processes involving fuel injection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 86, 87, 88+,
    95, 96, 132, 398+, and 583+ for terminal outlet members per se of the type
    usually provided to inject fuel into a combustion chamber or for other
    fluid distributors even though disclosed as burners.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 159+ for a means injecting fuel into a
    heating furnace; and subclasses 350+ for a fuel feed device having flame
    enclosing or stabilizing structure.


CLS 60/741
TXT Fuel control valve integral with injector:

    Device under subclass 740 having a valve means disposed as a part of the
    injector structure to control the flow of fuel therethrough.

    (1)     Note.  The valve means may be a line condition responsive means
    such as a check valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 407+ for
    fluid injectors of general utility having valve means therein.


CLS 60/742
TXT Unitary injector having plural fuel flow paths:

    Device under subclass 740 having a plurality of structurally interconnected
    fuel injectors or discharge means, forming a unitary structure, from which
    fuel may flow in a plurality of paths to be injected as such into a
    combustion zone.

    (1)     Note.  The plural injectors may be fed by either (a) separate and
    distinct fuel sources, or (b) a single fuel source with a fuel divider or
    manifold means to supply separate streams of fuel to the plurality of
    injectors.

    (2)     Note.  A unitary injector having a single flow path but having a
    nozzle provided with a plurality of terminal orifices is not considered
    subject matter for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    746,    for plural injectors spaced apart or feeding distinct combustion
    zones.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 400 for
    injectors of general utility combining three or more fluid streams; and
    subclass 422 for injectors combining three or more fluid streams at or
    beyond the injector outlet.


CLS 60/743
TXT Surface film injector:

    Device under subclass 740 including a surface means onto which fuel is
    deposited to become a thin film thereon so that it may be burned, mixed
    with other fluent material, or vaporized for subsequent burning.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are means to generate a surface
    film of fuel that is to be sheared by an air blast for atomization thereof.


CLS 60/744
TXT Rotary fuel injector:

    Device under subclass 740 wherein the injector is provided with a rotating
    fuel impelling means.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are those injectors having no
    rotating fuel directing parts even though other means may be provided to
    rotate the fuel stream.  See subclasses 734+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    431,    Combustion, subclass 168 for a rotary fuel dispenser employed in a
    combustion device of general utility.


CLS 60/745
TXT Slinger type:

    Device under subclass 744 wherein the injector is connected to or forms a
    part of a rotable shaft of a work producing motor means, said injector
    having a fuel dispensing opening spaced radially from the axis of said
    shaft, so that when the shaft is rotated, fuel is forced out of said
    opening by centrifugal force.

    (1)     Note.  Fuel may be conducted to the injector through a conduit in
    the rotatable shaft.


CLS 60/746
TXT Plural distinct injectors:

    Device under subclass 740 wherein a plurality of injector units, each
    physically spaced from the other, are provided in a combustion device.

    (1)     Note.  Mere duplicate circumferentially spaced combustion device
    each having a single injector is not considered subject matter for this
    subclass. Classification there is based upon the structure of one of the
    devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.5,   for plural distinct injectors feeding each of a plurality of
    combustion devices wherein the devices are separated by a motor means
    (i.e., a turbine with a combustion products generator upstream and an
    afterburner downstream).

    742,    for a plurality of injectors combined in a unitary structure.


CLS 60/747
TXT Injectors in distinct radially spaced parallel flow combustion products
    generators arranged to combine discharge:

    Device under subclass 746 having at least one injector in each of a
    plurality of combustion devices, that are at least in part physically
    separated along a radial line from the center of a grouping, so that their
    flow paths are parallel and the discharge of each of the combustion devices
    is combined to form a single path discharge of combustion products.


CLS 60/748
TXT With attendant coaxial air swirler:

    Device under subclass 740 having a means to discharge air so that it swirls
    in a coaxial relationship with the fuel discharged by the injector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 399+ for
    injectors of general utility having means to whirl the discharge.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 183+ for combustion devices of general
    utility having stationary blades coaxial with a fuel dispenser to whirl air.


CLS 60/749
TXT Having bluff flame stabilization means:

    Device under subclass 734 having means positioned to stabilize the flame as
    it flows in a combustion zone by creating therein a zone of decreased
    linear flow velocity, said means being (a) aerodynamically designed to
    cause the formation of eddys, vortices, etc., or (b) aerodynamically smooth
    with means for selective modification thereof to create a stabilization
    zone as by the use of fluid injected into the surrounding flow to create
    flow separation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261,    for flame holders employed in afterburners for jet engines.

    270,    for flame holders employed in ramjet engines.

    752+,   for flame stabilization effected solely by the manner in which air
    is supplied to a burner creating flow patterns therein to stabilize the
    flame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 322+ for baffles and heat retainers for
    furnaces.


CLS 60/750
TXT Having means to recycle combustion products internally of the combustion
    zone:

    Device under subclass 722 having means to recirculate the combustion
    products from a downstream zone or the downstream portion of a single zone
    back to an upstream zone or the upstream portion of a single zone.

    (1)     Note.  The recirculating means may comprise a jet pump or other
    means to draw the combustion products back to be reintroduced into an
    upstream combustion area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.52,  for recirculation of combustion products from a point downstream of
    a motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 115+ for combustors of general utility
    employing combustion products return structure.


CLS 60/751
TXT Having diffuser for air inlet:

    Device under subclass 722 having means upstream of the combustion zone
    adapted to increase the static pressure of the incoming air for combustion
    by reducing its kinetic energy.


CLS 60/752
TXT Combustor liner:

    Device under subclass 722 having specific means directly engaging and
    enclosing the flame in the combustion zone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 350+ for combustion devices of general
    utility having a flame enclosing liner.


CLS 60/753
TXT Ceramic:

    Device under subclass 752 wherein at least a portion of the flame enclosing
    means is formed of a nonmetallic mineral.


CLS 60/754
TXT Porous:

    Device under subclass 752 wherein the flame enclosing means is formed at
    least in part with minute regular or irregular openings for the passage of
    air.

    (1)     Note.  The porous portion of the flame enclosing means may be made
    from sintered material, small mesh screen, punched sheet material having a
    high density of openings per unit area, etc.


CLS 60/755
TXT Having means to direct flow along inner surface of liner:

    Device under subclass 752 having means to direct incoming air so that it
    has a flow component parallel with a wall of the flame enclosing means.


CLS 60/756
TXT Air directed to flow along inner surface or liner dome:

    Device under subclass 755 wherein the flame enclosing means is provided
    with means enclosing the upstream end thereof and is provided with means to
    cause all or a position of the incoming air to flow tangentially with said
    end enclosing means.


CLS 60/757
TXT In an axial direction:

    Device under subclass 755 wherein the flame enclosing means has an axis
    which extends fore and aft thereof or in an upstream-downstream direction,
    and the incoming air is directed along a surface of said enclosing means
    substantially parallel with said axis.


CLS 60/758
TXT Air introduced into liner counter to flow of combustion products:

    Device under subclass 752 having means to inject air into the flame
    enclosing means with a flow component at the point of injection in a
    direction opposite the flow of combustion products therein to promote fluid
    mixing or flame stabilization.


CLS 60/759
TXT Air scoop extends into air flowing outside liner:

    Device under subclass 752 wherein the exterior of the flame enclosing means
    is provided with means to capture air flowing exteriorly of and directing
    it through openings in said enclosing means, said capturing means thereby
    altering either the speed or direction of the captured air.


CLS 60/760
TXT Air outside liner flows counter to combustion products flow within liner:

    Device under 752 wherein the incoming air is caused to flow exteriorly of
    the flame enclosing means at least in part in a direction counter the
    direction of flow of the combustion products within the enclosing means.

    (1)     Note.  The combustion devices classified herein are commonly
    referred to as "reverse flow" or "counter flow" combustors.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 60/900
TXT EXCESS AIR TO INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE TO ASSIST EXHAUST TREATMENT:

    A cross-reference collection based on a manner of operating an engine to
    control pollution by adjustably setting the air feed to the engine.  Much
    of the art is from Class 123, Internal-Combustion Engines; subclasses 568+,
    charge-forming devices.  See also subclass 285 of Class 60 for the control
    of the air, fuel, or ignition of an engine, responsive to the condition of
    an exhaust treating reactor.


CLS 60/901
TXT EXHAUST TREATMENT SPECIAL TO ROTARY INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE:

    Cross-reference collection disclosing a treatment or handling of exhaust
    from a rotary internal combustion engine.


CLS 60/902
TXT ROTARY REACTOR SEPARATOR, OR TREATER OF EXHAUST OF AN INTERNAL COMBUSTION
    ENGINE:

    Cross-reference collection disclosing a rotary device in the exhaust gas.


CLS 60/903
TXT CLOSURE OPERATORS:

    Systems that are disclosed as operating doors, windows, gates etc.


CLS 60/904
TXT PROPELLER OR AIRPLANE SYSTEM:

    Systems that are disclosed as controlling the pitch of a propeller or as
    operating an element of an airplane.


CLS 60/905
TXT WINDING AND REELING:

    Systems disclosed as operating a reel or winding a rope or strand.


CLS 60/906
TXT ENGINE SPEED RESPONSIVE THROTTLE CONTROL SYSTEM:

    Systems disclosed as receiving a signal indicative of the speed of an
    engine and controlling the throttle of the engine.


CLS 60/907
TXT WORKING MEMBER POSITIONED AGAINST COUNTERFORCE BY CONSTANTLY APPLIED MOTIVE
    FLUID:

    System in which a constantly maintained, though variable, pressure
    positions a member against bias or maintains substantially constant pull or
    thrust.


CLS 60/908
TXT WASHING MACHINE SYSTEM:

    Systems disclosed as operating a clothes washing machine.


CLS 60/909
TXT REACTION MOTOR OR COMPONENT COMPOSED OF SPECIFIC MATERIAL:

    Cross-reference collection of art disclosing reaction motors or components
    thereof which are composed of specific materials.


CLS 60/910
TXT FREE PISTON:

    Cross-reference collection of art disclosing free piston arrangements in
    power plants.


CLS 60/911
TXT FLUID MOTOR SYSTEM INCORPORATING ELECTRICAL SYSTEM:

    Cross-reference collection of art disclosing fluid motor systems provided
    with or incorporating an electrical system.


CLS 60/912
TXT COOLING MEANS:

    Cross-reference collection of art disclosing power plants provided with
    special cooling devices or structures.


CLS 60/913
TXT COLLECTION OF REGGIO PATENTS:

    Cross-reference collection of art drawn to those patents granted to Reggio
    and related to turbo or super-charging devices.


CLS 60/914
TXT EXPLOSIVE:

    Cross-reference collection of art disclosing power plants utilizing
    explosives.


CLS 60/915
TXT COLLECTION OF GODDARD PATENTS:

    Cross-reference collection of art drawn to patents granted to Robert
    Goddard and related to early developments in liquid fuel rocketry.


CLS 60/916
TXT UNITARY CONSTRUCTION:

    Cross-reference collection of art disclosing power plants or their
    components constructed a single member or structure.


CLS 60/917
TXT SOLID FUEL RAMJET USING PULVERIZED FUEL:

    Cross-reference collection of art disclosing power plants for producing a
    useful thrust in one direction in an opposite direction comprising a means
    for or step of producing said motive fluid and a means for or step of
    ejecting said motive fluid in which the means for producing motive fluid
    includes a combustion or heating chamber and air is supplied to said
    chamber due only to the forward motion of the apparatus and further wherein
    the fuel to produce the motive fluid is pulverized fuel.


CLS 62/
TTL REFRIGERATION

CLS 62/
TXT This class includes (1) processes and apparatus peculiar to removing heat
    from a substance, usually by a change of phase of a coolant or refrigerant,
    as by evaporation, melting or sublimation, (2) the resultant product of
    part (1), e.g., ice, liquefied or solidified gases, and (3) processes and
    apparatus peculiar to handling the latter as a stored product, not
    elsewhere provided for.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, subclasses 295+ for processes
    crystallizing inorganic compounds or non-metal elements not including a
    refrigeration step, and when there is an intent to make a single-crystal,
    see Class 117 whether or not including a refrigeration step.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, for processes and
    apparatus for drying by operations other than refrigeration, combined with
    cooling by refrigeration, particularly subclasses  62+, 284+, 302+, and
    391+ and also for processes and apparatus for cooling only by gas or vapor
    contact involving no characteristics of refrigeration; see particularly
    subclasses 428+ and the Notes thereunder.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses for the
    structure, per se, of an enclosure which may be defined as forming a
    refrigerated space, particularly subclasses 380+, 404.1+ and 479+.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, for processes involving steps resulting
    in separation of a gas from a fluid mixture comprising (i) a gas and solid
    or liquid particles entrained therein, (ii) a liquid and gas entrained
    therein, or (iii) a plurality of gases wherein the steps are of a physical
    or material handling nature, involve contacting of materials, or exchange
    properties through electrical or nonreactive chemical treatment.  Class 95
    takes gas separation of the type noted above including cooling of the
    sorbent or cooling of the fluid mixture, but not including evaporative
    cooling after sorption of the type noted in (c) below.  Class 95 takes the
    cold wall-hot wall thermal diffusion type of separation, regardless of any
    refrigeration claimed.  Class 95 also takes expansion through an orifice of
    a liquid and gas entrained therein where the gas is evolved through the
    lowering of the pressure and the cooling effect which inherently results
    from such pressure reduction is not transferred through a wall to another
    material.  If such heat transfer occurs, classification in Class 62 is
    proper.  Class 62 takes (a) eparation of a constituent from a plurality of
    gases by a significantly claimed refrigeration step or apparatus; (b)
    condensation of moisture from the atmosphere as a result of a refrigeration
    operation; (c) gas drying by sorption followed by contacting the dried gas
    with a liquid to produce cooling by evaporation; (d) a refrigerated
    enclosure combined with sorption means; (e) refrigeration producing
    processes and apparatus combined with steps or means for drying the
    refrigerant; and (f) extracting a constituent from a plurality of gases by
    liquefaction and separation (e.g., fractionation or distillation, etc.).

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, for gas separation apparatus
    corresponding to the processes of Class 95.  The line for apparatus between
    Class 96 and Class 62 is the same as the line above for processes between
    Class 95 and Class 62.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 455, 470 and 517 for
    apparatus including cooling means.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 92+ for a press with means to cool the material
    compacted by the press, especially subclasses 310, 312, and 314 for a
    conveyor-type press having means to cool the article or press.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclass 63.5 for a
    closure with means to render the closure lock ineffective, e.g., a
    refrigerator with safety features to prevent persons from being locked
    therein.

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes and non-coating apparatus for
    growing therein-defined single-crystal of all types of materials, including
    inorganic or organic, including those having refrigeration steps or means.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 273.5 and 375 for an insulated
    receptacle with a member therein intended to be heated.

    137,    Fluid Handling, appropriate subclass for processes and apparatus
    for fluid handling of general utility.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 100-178, especially subclass
    149 for insulation on pipe.

    165,    Heat Exchange, particularly subclasses 58+ for apparatus adapted
    for interchangeably, convertibly or alternately heating and cooling.  See
    the reference to Class 62 in the definition of subclass 58 of Class 165.

    166,    Wells, subclass 57 for well apparatus including refrigeration
    means, subclasses 265+ for well processes in which fluid may be separated
    by refrigeration, and subclass 302 for well processes including cooling.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, appropriate subclass for a
    process of thermolytic distillation of a solid carbonaceous material.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, appropriate subclass, for apparatus for
    distillation of general utility.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, appropriate subclass for a
    process of separatory distillation of general utility and see Class 203
    class definitions for the line between separatory distillation and this
    class.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclass for
    processes and apparatus which may involve cooling. The following subclasses
    are particularly noted: subclass 773 for processes involving conversion of
    solids to liquids before separation, subclass 774 for processes involving
    heating or cooling and separation, subclass 149 for separating apparatus
    having means responsive to a thermal condition, and subclasses 175+ for a
    separator with a heater or heat exchanger.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, appropriate subclass for a bottle or jar of
    general utility.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, appropriate subclass for a crate or shipping
    vessel of general utility.

    220,    Receptacles, appropriate subclass for a tank or receptacle having
    compartments made mostly of metal, or a tank or container having a mere
    jacket in which a cooling or heating fluid may be admitted when there is no
    directing means for circulating the fluid in the jacket.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclass for mechanism having a
    specific article dispensing feature in combination with a feature too
    general for classification in Class 62.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclass for a receptacle having a specific
    dispensing feature with a feature too general for classification in Class
    62.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, appropriate subclass
    for a control of general utility.  A refrigerant controlling or expansion
    valve is of general utility unless features resulting in refrigeration
    production are included.

    237,    Heating Systems, appropriate subclass for a heating system which
    may use the heat rejecting portion of a refrigeration system with
    additional heating means.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate subclass
    for processes and apparatus for comminuting solid refrigerants and also
    comminuting processes and apparatus provided with cooling means.  See
    section 6 of the class definition of that class (241) for the line.

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 69+ for ice cube trays including means to
    release ice cubes from a tray, and subclasses 129+ for ice cube trays, per
    se, for forming plural cubes.

    252,    Compositions, particularly subclasses 67+ for (1) admixtures of
    ingredients, or an old compound limited to use as a refrigerant, (2)
    processes of refrigeration comprising any known cycle and distinguished
    solely by the composition or compound therein, when apparatus structure is
    not included. The preceding are placed in Class 252 even though the
    freezing or boiling point or temperature of use is specific.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, including the related classes for
    processes of treating or modifying non-hydrocarbon organic compounds:  by
    crystallization wherein the crystallization is not brought about by
    refrigeration; wherein crystallization, by any means including
    refrigeration, is combined with synthesis or modification of said compounds
    by chemical means; or wherein the separation of carbon compounds is
    accomplished exclusively by physical means other than refrigeration.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclass, for a gas
    and liquid contact device     having no means specialized to cooling a
    material out of contact with the contacting fluids.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes, for
    molding processes, per se, for materials within the class definition,
    noting particularly subclass 28 for processes including freezing or cooling
    to a temperature of zero oC.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, appropriate
    subclass for a process or apparatus for recovering or working naturally
    occurring ice in situ and particularly subclasses 24+ for an ice working
    machine or cutter.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, particularly subclasses 31, 31.01,
    36, 116, 213, 236, 253, and  400+ of that class (312) and see the Notes
    thereto, for cabinet structure including an insulated wall cabinet of
    general utility.

    366,    Agitating, appropriate subclasses for agitating process or
    apparatus of general utility; also, for agitating apparatus involving a
    cooling means where that means is only a container or a container with
    means for effecting agitation therein, and in either case there is no
    modification of either the container or the agitating means restricting the
    use of the apparatus to refrigeration.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 1+ for processes of preserving by
    operations other than refrigeration not provided for elsewhere; subclasses
    245.1+ for non-coating crystallization apparatus not including chemical
    reaction means, not including refrigeration means, and not provided for
    elsewhere; and subclasses 129+ for non-coating crystallization apparatus
    including means for chemical reaction, which may or may not include
    refrigeration means, and not provided for elsewhere.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    appropriate subclasses for molding apparatus, per se, for merely shaping
    particulate ice (water or carbon dioxide) into a desired configuration;
    subclasses 117+ for a specific refrigeration apparatus and mold means to
    form a composite product from a fluent material and a preform.  Class 62
    provides for the combination of plastic material shaping or reshaping
    apparatus combined with refrigeration apparatus for the material shaped.

    426,    Food Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    appropriate subclasses for frozen food products and food working processes
    combined with freezing.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet, and especially subclasses 304.4+ for a composite web or sheet
    including a porous or cellular layer.

    454,    Ventilation, for means and related processes for ventilation of an
    enclosure not specialized to refrigeration.  The mere inclusion of a cooler
    for the air or means subjecting the air to air-liquid contact is not
    considered a means specialized to refrigeration.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, for processes including a step
    of refrigeration which treats or modifies only hydrocarbon compounds
    (claimed or disclosed).  Such processes disclosing any non-Class 585 (i.e.,
    non-hydrocarbon) organic compound are placed according to the class line
    with Class 260 and related classes.  Especially see subclass 15 for
    treating or modifying a crystalline hydrocarbon hydrate and subclasses 812+
    for a purification or separation process for recovery of a hydrocarbon.


CLS 62/1
TXT A congealed or frozen article constituting the product produced by
    processes or apparatus under the class definition which is intended to be
    used only once, e.g., a frozen or chilled unit or mixture of ice and liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    371,    for a portable commodity container, i.e., a shipping or handling
    wrapper or container, or a refillable container for refrigerant using a
    product of refrigeration.

    530,    for a sealed, flexible, handled or attachable device containing a
    coolant usable to cool a substance, space or body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 67+, 70 and 71+ for a thermal compositions
    provided for, and see the reference to Class 252 in the class definition of
    this class (62).

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 70+ for frozen food products.


CLS 62/3.1
TXT USING ELECTRICAL OR MAGNETIC EFFECT:

    Process or apparatus under the class definition in which cooling is
    produced by the influence of an electrical current or the field surrounding
    it upon a conductive or magnetic material.


CLS 62/3.2
TXT Thermoelectric; e.g., Peltier effect:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 3.1 in which cooling is produced by
    either the conversion of heat into electricity or that of electricity into
    heat; e.g., the Peltier effect.

    (1)     Note.  The following classes and subclasses are noted as involving
    a thermocouple or a thermoelectric device:  Class 136, Batteries:
    Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclasses 203+; Class 236, Automatic
    Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 69+; Class 310, Electrical
    Generator or Motor Structure subclass 306; Class 318, Electricity:  Motive
    Power System, subclass 317; Class 322, Electricity:  Single Generator
    Systems, subclass 2; Class 324, Electricity:  Measuring and Testing,
    subclasses 451 and 452+; Class 361, Electricity:  Electrical Systems and
    Devices, subclasses 161+; and Class 374, Thermal Measuring and Testing,
    subclasses 179+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclasses 203+ for
    Peltier type batter devices, per se.  The battery elements are classified
    in Class 136 even though they are disclosed as used to produce hot and cold
    junctions by applying a current to them.


CLS 62/3.3
TXT Heat pump, selective heating and cooling:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 3.2 wherein the thermoelectric unit
    moves thermal energy from one location to another, and can be used
    alternatively to either heat or cool an object.

    (1)     Note.  The change in function is usually accomplished by reversing
    the flow of electricity within the unit.


CLS 62/3.4
TXT Including dehumidifying and condensate handling:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 3.2 wherein the thermoelectric unit is
    arranged in a system used to remove ambient humidity as condensate, and
    which includes means to manipulate the removed condensate.


CLS 62/3.5
TXT Made with flexible heat exchanger material; e.g., blanket, wearing apparel,
    etc.:

    Process of apparatus under subclass 3.2 wherein the thermoelectric unit
    consists of pliant material (e.g., fabric) and can be used in an article of
    clothing, a blanket, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259.3,  for a structurally installed applicator for the effect of
    refrigeration.

    261,    for a flexible heat exchanger adapted to be used with a specific
    article of furniture; e.g., a bed cover or canopy, etc.


CLS 62/3.6
TXT Interior of enclosure cooled; e.g., refrigerator:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 3.2 wherein the thermoelectric unit is
    used to lower the temperature of a confined space.

    (1)     Note.  Room coolers are not included in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 58+ for room coolers.


CLS 62/3.61
TXT Having vehicle feature; e.g., cooling cart, car, truck, boat, etc.:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 3.6 wherein the cooled enclosure has
    some vehicular feature, such as wheels, casters, skids, pontoons, etc.,
    adapting it for transporting people or cargo.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239+,   for other types of refrigerators with vehicle features.


CLS 62/3.62
TXT Portable, having transporting feature; e.g., handle:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 3.6 wherein the cooled enclosure is
    intended to be transported and includes means by which a person may carry
    or grip the unit or has means for attaching it to a person or vehicle;
    e.g., a picnic basket, lunch box, insulin cooler, bottle cooler, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    457.1+, for other types of portable refrigeration apparatus.


CLS 62/3.63
TXT Icemaker:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 3.6 wherein the enclosure is
    specifically adapted for converting water into its solid phase.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    340+,   for other types of icemakers.


CLS 62/3.64
TXT Beverage dispenser:

    Process or apparatus under subclass .36 wherein the enclosure is designed
    to hold a consumable liquid (water, beer, soda, etc.), and means is
    provided for discharging the liquid from the enclosure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    389+,   for other types of cooled beverage dispensers.


CLS 62/3.7
TXT Including specific circuitry or heat exchanger material:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 3.2 wherein significance is attributed
    to either electric circuitry associated with the cooling unit or to a
    material from which the cooling unit is constructed.


CLS 62/4
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which a refrigeration effect
    is produced by (1) a chemical reaction or (2) the dissolving of a solid in
    a liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76,     for processes involving preliminary manufacturing of a refrigerant,
    e.g., forming a brine, cooling and utilizing it.

    330,    for apparatus for manufacturing a refrigerant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 263.01+ for a chemical reaction
    heater and see the Notes thereto.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 219+ for a combination
    package including a rupturable partition.


CLS 62/5
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which a compressible fluid is
    caused to flow along a stationary curvilinear path under pressure,
    producing a refrigeration effect.


CLS 62/6
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which the refrigeration cycle
    comprises (1) confining a constant mass of a gas in a chamber whose volume
    varies from a maximum to a minimum, (2) compressing it, (3) cooling it, and
    (4) expanding it; the gas remaining as such throughout the cycle; the
    action of stages (2), and (3)  being alternate with heat storage and return
    (regeneration) between these stages.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 516+ for a structurally similar heat
    operated motor.


CLS 62/7
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which the refrigerant is used
    as a refrigeration producer and consumed as a fuel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45.1+,  for processes and apparatus for handling stored liquefied or
    solidified gas, particularly subclasses 48.1+ for vapor dispensing from a
    liquefied gas dispenser.


CLS 62/45.1
TXT STORAGE OF SOLIDIFIED OR LIQUIFIED GAS (E.G., CRYOGEN):

    Process or apparatus under the class definition for storing a product of
    refrigeration comprising a substance in solid or liquid phase, which
    substance boils at or below standard atmospheric temperature when under
    standard atmospheric pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for liquified or solidified gas used as a fuel.

    600+,   for liquified or solidified gas product manufacturing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, appropriate subclass for a process,
    apparatus, or composition for the manufacture of gas for heating or
    illumination, and see the notes in the class definition of that class.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 317+ for means to tap a tank under
    pressure, and subclasses 334+ for heat exchange ancillary to a fluid
    handling system.

    142,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 20 for a means of filling an aerosol, and subclasses 311+ for a
    filling means with a receiver or receiver coacting means, particularly
    subclass 330 for a puncturing connecting means mounted on a receiver.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, subclasses 5+ for a fluid system in fire
    extinguishing apparatus using liquified or solidified gas.

    206,    Special Receptacles and Packages, subclasses .6+ for a specialized
    receptacle for storing gas, and see the notes in that class.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 415+ for an insulated or jacketed tank, per
    se.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclass for a liquid dispenser of general
    utility, particularly subclasses 3+ for gas dispensing apparatus not
    limited to liquified gas, and subclasses 173+ for a dispenser with a casing
    or support.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 548+ and 589+
    for spraying nozzles of general utility.


CLS 62/46.1
TXT With sorbing or mixing:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 45.1 in which the product of
    refrigeration is either (a) taken into and held by a sorptive material, (b)
    acted upon by a solvent, or (c) otherwise mixed with a diverse fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114+,   for refrigeration processes including sorption of a liquified
    gas-type refrigerant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclass 195 for means for charging
    heating and illuminating gas with an odorous substance.


CLS 62/46.2
TXT Mixing of substance with hydrogen:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 46.1 wherein the product of
    refrigeration is combined with hydrogen.

    (1)     Note.  The resulting compound is either a hydride or a hydrate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 402 for
    processes involving contact of a material with hydrogen under pressure.


CLS 62/46.3
TXT Sorbing into capillary material:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 46.1 wherein the product of
    refrigeration is absorbed into a porous material.


CLS 62/47.1
TXT With conservation of cryogen by reduction of vapor to liquid within storage
    receptacle:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 45.1 wherein vapor pressure within the
    receptacle is limited by reducing the vapor to its liquid phase while in
    the receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  The result is that vaporization of the product of
    refrigeration is minimized.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48.2,   for a process or an apparatus wherein vapor is removed from the
    receptacle and subsequently returned to its liquid phase.


CLS 62/48.1
TXT With vapor discharged from storage receptacle:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 45.1 wherein vapor within the
    receptacle is removed from the receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal Combustion Engines, subclasses 434+ for a charge forming
    device related to an internal combustion engine.


CLS 62/48.2
TXT And subsequently restored to receptacle as liquid:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 48.1 wherein the removed vapor is
    condensed and then returned to the receptacle as a liquid.


CLS 62/48.3
TXT And subsequently used to cool receptacle:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 48.1 wherein the removed vapor is used
    to cool either the receptacle's walls or an external component of the
    receptacle (e.g., a radiation shield, the receptacle's, foundation).


CLS 62/48.4
TXT Discharge caused by ignition of combustible gas:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 48.1 wherein combustion of a gas
    results in vaporization and discharge of stored liquid.


CLS 62/49.1
TXT With measuring:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 45.1 wherein a characteristic of the
    product of refrigeration is measured.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 290+ for liquid level testing,
    subclasses 700+ for fluid pressure testing, and subclasses 861+ for volume
    or flow rate measuring.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 339+ for temperature
    measuring.


CLS 62/49.2
TXT Of liquid level:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 49.1 wherein the height of the stored
    product within the receptacle is measured.


CLS 62/50.1
TXT Liquified gas transferred as liquid:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 45.1 wherein the product of
    refrigeration is removed from the receptacle as a liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 209+ for apparatus using gas pressure to
    discharge a liquid from a fluid system containing diverse fluids, and
    particularly subclass 210 for such apparatus with means to generate the gas
    pressure from the liquid.


CLS 62/50.2
TXT With vaporizing of liquified gas downstream of storage:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 50.1 wherein the liquid becomes a vapor
    subsequent to removal from the receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  Potential energy is released when the liquid is converted to
    vapor.


CLS 62/50.3
TXT Energy converted to work (e.g., used to drive prime mover):

    Process or apparatus under subclass 50.2 wherein the potential released by
    vaporization is transformed into applied power; e.g., used to drive a
    turbine or motor.


CLS 62/50.4
TXT Operates valve which controls flow of liquid:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 50.2 wherein the potential adjusts a
    valve used to regulate the liquid being removed from the receptacle.


CLS 62/50.5
TXT In phase separator:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 50.2 wherein the moved liquid enters a
    chamber which allows partial vaporization, from which the remaining liquid
    and the vapor are discharged separately.


CLS 62/50.6
TXT Specific pump structure:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 50.1 wherein significance is attributed
    to a means for generating flow of the liquid; i.e., a pump.


CLS 62/50.7
TXT Specific conduit, valve, or coupling structure:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 50.1 wherein significance is attributed
    to a component adapted to constrain or control flow of the liquid.


CLS 62/51.1
TXT Including cryostat:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 45.1 wherein the cryogen is contained
    by a portable vessel and cools a device contained by the vessel (e.g., an
    infrared detector).


CLS 62/51.2
TXT Joule-Thompson liquefier:

    Subject matter under subclass 608 wherein the liquefaction of helium is
    effected bypassage from a high pressure to a low pressure through an
    adjustable orifice and the exiting liquid precools the incoming gas by
    indirect heat exchange.


CLS 62/52.1
TXT Spraying of cryogen:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 45.1 including discharge of the product
    of refrigeration as a stream of droplets, or means for producing such a
    stream (e.g., a nozzle).


CLS 62/53.1
TXT Underground or underwater storage:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 45.1 wherein the product of
    refrigeration is stored in a subterranean or subaqueous receptacle (e.g., a
    tank, a void, etc.) adapted to hold a cryogen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 53+ for underground
    fluid storage for general applications; and subclasses 195.1+ for
    underwater fluid storage for general applications.


CLS 62/53.2
TXT Storage in modified vehicle (e.g., ship, truck, etc.):

    Process or apparatus under subclass 45.1 wherein the product of
    refrigeration is stored in a conveyance adapted to carry a cryogen.


CLS 62/54.1
TXT Cryogen stored in both phases (e.g., as slush or gel):

    Process or apparatus under subclass 45.1 wherein the product of
    refrigeration is stored as a mixture of substances having diverse phase
    characteristics; e.g., a slush, a slurry, a colloidal suspension, etc.

    (1)     Note.  The substances may have the same chemical composition,
    differing only in phase (e.g., both solid and liquid).


CLS 62/54.2
TXT Controlled conversion of solidified gas to another phase:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 45.1 wherein a product of refrigeration
    in solid phase is transformed at a regulated rate into either a liquid or
    gaseous phase.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165+,   for a refrigeration producer having automatic control using
    solidified gas.

    384+,   for a cooler utilizing solidified gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 60 for holders
    for solid matter to be converted to gas by sublimation; e.g., moth balls or
    crystals.


CLS 62/54.3
TXT Storing solidified gas:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 45.1 wherein the product of
    refrigeration is stored in solid phase.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for a refrigeration process including packaging.

    371+,   for a package cooled by solid refrigerant.

    529+,   for a refrigerant or coolant storer or handler.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclass 440 for processes of package making with
    contents treated by cooling; and subclass 127 for package making apparatus
    with cooling means.


CLS 62/55.5
TXT Processes and apparatus under the class definition involving a condensing
    device which in use operates substantially below 0o C and substantially
    below atmospheric pressure to condense a material which exists as a gas in
    the feed line to the condensing device by condensing and retaining the
    material as a liquid or solid on a heat exchange surface which is kept
    sufficiently cold by means which is usually a liquefied or solidified gas
    or mixture thereof to cause the desired condensation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8+,     for processes and apparatus for manufacturing a liquefied or
    solidified gas mercantile product from a normally gaseous material.

    272,    for refrigeration with means for preventing or handling atmospheric
    condensate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 73+, 284+,
    402, and 468, for processes and apparatus for drying which if operated at
    sufficiently low pressure may use a "cold trap".

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 267+ for gas separation there provided
    for, provided with heating or cooling means for the gas.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 171+ for fluid separating traps or vents
    in a fluid distribution system of more general application.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 110+ for a heat exchanger of more general
    application in which a body or stream of fluid of one density is in
    communication with a fluid of a second density, one of which is condensed.

    202,    Distillation, subclasses 185+ for a still and a condenser.


CLS 62/56
TXT Processes of refrigeration under the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    600+    for gas liquefying or solidifying processes.


CLS 62/57
TXT Processes under subclass 56 wherein particles are suspended by an upwardly
    directed fluid current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 359 for a gas
    or vapor contact with solids process with fluid current conveying or
    suspension of treated materials.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 616 and 661 for
    processes of liquid treatment utilizing a static suspended bed and see (1)
    Note for other classes having art involving fluidized bed solid and fluid
    contacting.


CLS 62/59
TXT Processes under subclass 56 including making a solid refrigerating medium
    in situ by a refrigeration cycle, to be used to cool during high
    refrigeration demand or failure of the cycle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139,    for automatic control of accumulation of ice on a freezing surface.

    434+,   for apparatus using a fluid or an isolated nonliquid holdover.

    529+,   for a refrigerant or coolant storer or handler, e.g., a container
    for a freezable material.


CLS 62/60
TXT Processes under subclass 56 including enclosing a refrigerated material in
    a closed or closable receptacle to form a completed transportable unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    371+,   for a refrigerated portable commodity container.

    530,    for an envelope type container for a freezable material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, particularly subclass 127 for packaging not
    specialized to refrigeration and see the reference to Class 62 in that
    subclass (127).

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 82 for the subject matter of that class combined with cooling not
    specialized to refrigeration.

    426,    Food or Edible Material: Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclass 393 for process involving the packaging and freezing food.


CLS 62/61
TXT Processes under subclass 56 including utilizing the motion of a carrier to
    effect the refrigeration process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    for automatic control of related apparatus.

    241+,   for related apparatus.


CLS 62/62
TXT Processes under subclass 56 in which material to be cooled or refrigerated
    is an article comprising a physical entity identifiable as such before
    congelation and having a fixed boundary surface including particulate
    material, a removable container enclosing a liquid or a living thing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66+,    for processes involving treating of a flowable material, e.g.,
    congelation or ice making.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 447 for process of assembly involving
    prestressing, e.g., chilling a part.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 428 for
    processes of cooling an article by gas contact not specialized to
    refrigeration.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclass 125 for processes involving refrigerating
    metal or metal articles in order to alter the internal characteristics or
    the properties of the metal.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    for processes of refrigerating and treating edible material.


CLS 62/63
TXT Processes under subclass 62 wherein the article is moved through a cooling
    zone or past cooling means while the cooling is effective on the article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68+,    for processes involving agitation of a flowable material undergoing
    congelation.

    71+,    for means removing an initially liquid product from a freezing
    surface.

    378+,   for related apparatus.


CLS 62/64
TXT Processes under subclass 62 in which the cooling is effected by contacting
    the article with a coolant liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for cooling by contact with a solidified refrigerant even though
    there be incidental use of the ice melt.

    373+,   for related apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 1-42 for
    processes of contacting an article with a liquid not limited to cooling of
    the article.


CLS 62/65
TXT Processes under subclass 62 wherein a material is sequentially subjected to
    diverse temperatures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     for processes wherein an article is moving during cooling.


CLS 62/66
TXT Processes under subclass 56 for congealing material initially in a flowable
    condition, e.g., ice cream or ice making or condensing fluid to solid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59,     for holdover solid coolant accumulating processes which hold-over
    is intended for use without removal.

    60,     for processes involving packaging.

    62,     for processes of cooling an article which is initially an
    identifiable fixed entity.

    80+,    for defrosting processes.

    151+,   for automatic control apparatus.

    272+,   for condensate handling.

    340+,   for shaped or modified congealed product producing apparatus.

    532+,   for fractionally solidifying and separating processes.

    601+,   for solidified gas producing processes and apparatus there provided
    for.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 454+ for processes of manufacturing
    glass fibers or filaments from molten or flowable material, especially
    subclass 482 for cooling of molten material at forming area; and subclasses
    19+ for processes of otherwise utilizing molten or plastic slag.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 5 for methods of forming solid particulate matter directly from a
    molten or liquid mass, e.g., liquid comminuting.


CLS 62/67
TXT Processes under subclass 66 including filtration or gravitational
    separation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85,     for other processes involving separating of undesirables from a
    coolant or cooled material.

    318+,   for related apparatus.

    532+,   for fractional crystallization of at least one constituent of a
    mixture of constituents of different kinds.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 767+ for processes
    and subclasses 175+ for apparatus functioning for a more general purpose.


CLS 62/68
TXT Processes under subclass 66 including agitation of a confined body of
    material during freezing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for processes involving spraying or dripping into a space.

    342+,   for related apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    366,    Agitating, appropriate subclass, for apparatus and related
    processes of agitation of general utility.


CLS 62/69
TXT Processes under subclass 68 wherein air or gas is introduced in a material
    being frozen.

    (1)     Note.  Processes of freezing and incorporating a gas into the
    material being frozen is proper for Class 62; however any additional food
    working step would cause the patent to be classified in Class 426.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 83+ for such apparatus
    utilizing rotating means.


CLS 62/70
TXT Processes under subclass 69 wherein the gas is injected into the agitated
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS SUBCLASS:

    304+,   particularly 306, for means feeding gas into a pressurized receiver.

    307+,   for a submerged gas inlet.


CLS 62/71
TXT Processes under subclass 66 including removal of frozen material from a
    mold or cooling surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    353+,   for a heat absorber with a product remover.


CLS 62/72
TXT Processes under subclass 71 wherein a frozen material is removed by flexing
    a supporting surface, e.g., endless belt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    345,    for apparatus utilizing a moving freezing surface.


CLS 62/73
TXT Processes under subclass 71 including application of heat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    349+,   for congealing apparatus with thawing means.


CLS 62/74
TXT Processes under subclass 66 wherein a material is sprayed or dripped into a
    zone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64+,    for processes involving contact of an article with a liquid.

    347,    for related apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclasses 48.1+ for process of
    concentrating a liquid involving spraying by application of vacuum.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping of Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 5 for processes of forming solid particulate matter directly from
    a molten or liquid mass, e.g., liquid comminuting.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 6+ for a means to manufacture particulate material directly from
    a molten material generally by comminuting the material in a means
    providing a zone below the freezing point of the material.


CLS 62/75
TXT Processes under subclass 66 wherein a step of freezing or cooling is
    followed by another step of freezing, or a prefrozen material is added to
    another material which is then frozen into a composite solid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65,     for processes of treating an article involving use of diverse
    sequential temperatures.


CLS 62/76
TXT Processes under subclass 56 which includes producing a refrigerant and
    introducing it into a refrigerating system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for processes and apparatus utilizing the endothermic action of a
    chemical reaction or the dissolving of a solid.

    114,    for processes employing diverse materials or a particular
    refrigerant in a refrigeration operation.

    330,    for related apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 67+, 70 and 71 for compositions and
    related processes of making them.


CLS 62/77
TXT Processes under subclass 56 which include assembling parts of a
    refrigeration apparatus, installing the refrigeration apparatus in its
    position of use, charging the apparatus with a fluid (usually refrigerant
    or lubricant) or repairing some part of the apparatus which has been
    damaged.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    292,    for charging apparatus.

    298+,   for assembly apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 890.03+ particularly subclass 890.035 for
    processes of mechanical manufacture of an element, and subclasses 428+ for
    processes of assembling elements of a refrigeration device.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 15 for processes, 237+ for cleaning, and
    315 for repairing, in a fluid handling system of general application.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 101+ for the process of assembling
    and fusion bonding of the elements of a refrigeration device.


CLS 62/78
TXT Processes under subclass 56 which include deodorizing, antisepticizing or
    germiciding the material which is subjected to refrigeration or providing a
    special atmosphere in a cooled space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for processes of cooling involving subjecting to a melting or
    subliming refrigerant.

    91+,    for processes involving humidifying.

    93+,    for dehumidifying air.

    121,    for gas-liquid contacting processes.

    264,    for apparatus including illuminating or radiant energy means, e.g.,
    ultraviolet.

    388,    for apparatus wherein a sublimed gas enters a cooled enclosure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 516+ for
    drying processes involving special atmosphere.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 1+ for subject matter of more
    general utility.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclass for an antiseptic composition and subclasses 76.1+ for a
    deodorizing composition.


CLS 62/79
TXT Processes under subclass 56 in which (1) heat is exchanged with a disparate
    (nonrefrigeration) system, or (2) refrigeration is produced by plural
    separate systems, there being a heat transfer relationship between the
    systems.

    (1)     Note.  Evaporation and condensation are considered to be
    refrigeration production.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81+,    for processes of defrosting utilizing a fluid which may include the
    use of heat to vaporize a heat transfer fluid which is condensed in the
    vicinity of the heat absorber.

    96      and 99, for processes involving nonchange of state by indirect
    transfer fluid operations.

    175,    for automatic control of related systems.

    238,    for refrigeration apparatus exchanging heat with disparate means.

    332+,   for diverse refrigeration systems.

    335,    for a refrigeration system with plural  paired elements.


CLS 62/80
TXT Processes under subclass 56 which include inhibiting deposition of, or
    removing frozen atmospheric condensate from, a heat absorbing surface of
    refrigeration apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150+,   for automatic control of related apparatus.

    272+,   for related apparatus.


CLS 62/81
TXT Processes under subclass 80 accomplished by utilizing a fluid used in the
    refrigeration process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277+,   for related apparatus.


CLS 62/82
TXT Processes under subclass 80 wherein a fluid, which is unnecessary to the
    refrigeration process is utilized.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282,    for related apparatus.


CLS 62/83
TXT Processes under subclass 56 in which a liquid is prevented from entering
    the suction inlet to the compressor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     for other processes involving lubrication of a refrigeration system.

    113,    for processes involving transferring heat between diverse function
    portions of a refrigeration cycle for other purposes.

    174,    for automatic control of trapping and discharging refrigerant
    batches.

    503,    509, 512, and 513, for refrigeration apparatus with features which
    may prevent slugging.


CLS 62/84
TXT Processes under subclass 56 which involves handling a liquid lubricant
    within a circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83,     for processes of preventing slugging.

    85,     for processes involving separating impurities from refrigerant and
    see the Notes, thereto.

    192+,   for automatic control of refrigeration producer lubrication.

    468+,   for related apparatus.


CLS 62/85
TXT Processes under subclass 56 which include the separating or prevention of
    the formation of undesirables in a refrigerant, on the internal surface of
    a refrigerant container or from a material being cooled, e.g., internal
    freeze inhibition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for processes involving charging a refrigeration producing system
    which may also remove undesirable matter.

    78,     for processes involving deodorizing, antisepticizing or providing a
    special atmosphere.

    80,     for processes involving defrosting.

    83,     for processes involving prevention of refrigerant slugging.

    84,     for lubricant handling processes.

    93+,    for processes involving gas dehumidification.

    317,    for apparatus for clarifying or separating materials from an
    external cooled gas.

    468+,   for a refrigeration producer and lubricant handler.

    474,    for a refrigeration producer with a refrigerant treater.


CLS 62/86
TXT Processes under subclass 56 in which a gas is expanded to such a degree
    that a discernible drop in the temperature thereof is produced thereby, the
    gas remaining as such during the cooling operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    613+,   621+, 645+, and 649+, for processes and apparatus for liquefying or
    solidifying a gas.

    115,    for processes involving compressing, condensing and evaporating a
    fluid.

    401+,   for related apparatus.


CLS 62/87
TXT Processes under subclass 86 in which a portion of the energy of expansion
    is converted to usable mechanical movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38+,    for operation with an expansion engine.

    402+,   for related apparatus.


CLS 62/88
TXT Processes under subclass 87 in which the gas stream is reheated subsequent
    to expansion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90,     for processes involving cooling and reheating of a gas.


CLS 62/89
TXT Processes under subclass 56 in which a gas external of a refrigeration
    producer is caused to circulate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86+,    for processes involving reducing pressure on a compressed gas.

    404+,   for related apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 428 for a
    process of cooling solids by mere contact with a gas, and see notes in the
    definition of this subclass.


CLS 62/90
TXT Processes under subclass 89 in which the gas is heated following the
    cooling operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for processes of reheating cooled fluid of a refrigeration cycle by
    internal exchange.

    173,    for an automatically controlled apparatus having a similar function.

    272,    particularly subclasses 275+, for a cooler with a condensate
    remover which may include air reheating.

    428,    for an air cooler with means directing air over a heat rejector
    which may include air cooling and reheating by a refrigeration producer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 223 for a reheating means automatically
    controlled by a humidistat, subclass 263 for reheating means controlled by
    temperature, and subclass 65 for a heater and cooler serially arranged in a
    flow path.


CLS 62/91
TXT Processes under subclass 89 in which moisture is added to the gas being
    cooled.


CLS 62/92
TXT Processes under subclass 91 in which moisture is removed from the gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80+,    for processes of defrosting or frost inhibiting.

    85,     for removal of undesirables other than moisture.


CLS 62/93
TXT Processes under subclass 89 in which moisture is removed from the gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92,     for moisture removing processes combined with moisture addition.


CLS 62/94
TXT Processes under subclass 93 by passing the gas in contact with a sorbent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    271,    for related apparatus and see the Notes thereto.


CLS 62/95
TXT Processes under subclass 89 in which gas is subjected to the cooling action
    of plural heat absorbing operations or of separate and distinct operations
    of a heat absorption.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65,     for plural temperature treatment of an article.

    75,     for sequential treatment of a congealing flowable material.


CLS 62/96
TXT Processes under subclass 89 in which heat from the circulating gas being
    cooled is transferred to a heat absorber by indirect heat exchange through
    an intermediate fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    406,    for related apparatus.


CLS 62/97
TXT Processes under subclass 89 in which two streams of gas having diverse
    temperatures are combined into a single stream.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    for other refrigeration processes involving combining of fluid
    having diverse temperature.


CLS 62/98
TXT Processes under subclass 56 in which refrigeration is used to absorb heat
    from a fluid (usually a liquid) which is isolated from the working fluid of
    a refrigeration cycle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89+,    particularly subclass 96 for processes wherein the fluid cooled is
    air.


CLS 62/99
TXT Processes under subclass 98 in which the heat removed from the external
    cooled fluid is transferred to a heat absorber by indirect heat exchange
    through an intermediate fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    396+,   for a liquid in heat exchange with a coolant.

    430+,   for related apparatus.


CLS 62/100
TXT Processes under subclass 56 in which a subatmospheric pressure is created
    in a chamber by removing a gas or vapor from it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    268+,   for related apparatus and see the Notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 402+ for
    related processes of drying solids.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclasses 47.1+ for related processes
    of evaporating and concentrating liquids.


CLS 62/101
TXT Processes under subclass 56 in which a liquid is evaporated to produce
    cooling and the vapor is sorbed by a sorbent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    for vacuumizing an open outlet chamber which may include the use of
    a sorbent.

    141+,   for automatic control of a sorbent system.

    476+,   for a sorbent type refrigeration producer.


CLS 62/102
TXT Processes under subclass 101 in which plural refrigerants are evaporated in
    presence of each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for other processes of refrigeration production utilizing plural
    refrigerants.


CLS 62/103
TXT Processes under subclass 101 in which a fluid is circulated at varying
    rates.


CLS 62/104
TXT Processes under subclass 103 in which fluid circulation is altered by
    varying the heat input or the heat rejected by the system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148,    for automatic control of the heating means of a sorption system.

    183,    for automatic control of a fluid for a heat rejecter.


CLS 62/105
TXT Processes under subclass 103 in which the flow of a nonrefrigerant fluid,
    e.g., inert gas or a noncondensible gas is varied.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for related processes in which the fluid flow may be modulated by
    varying the heat input or the heat rejection.

    490+,   for a sorption system utilizing an inert gas.


CLS 62/106
TXT Processes under subclass 101 in which generation of refrigerant vapor
    alternates with absorption.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143+,   for automatic control of such a unit.

    477+,   for related apparatus.


CLS 62/107
TXT Processes under subclass 101 wherein the sorption liquid is transferred
    between the generator and sorber due to pressures of fluids generated
    within the system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    487+,   for related apparatus.


CLS 62/108
TXT Processes under subclass 101 including the transferral of liquid
    refrigerant to and through the evaporator against gravity.


CLS 62/109
TXT Processes under subclass 101 wherein the cooling is effected by
    vaporization of refrigerant from a sorption solution.


CLS 62/110
TXT Processes under subclass 101 wherein an inert gas is admitted into or
    overlies a body of liquid refrigerant, the liquid refrigerant diffusing
    into the inert gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    490+,   for related apparatus.


CLS 62/111
TXT Processes under subclass 110 in which the fluid is caused to circulate
    between the evaporator and sorber due to the creation of conditions other
    than those which allow the fluid to circulate due to differences in density.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109,    for processes involving cooling by evaporation from a sorbent
    solution.


CLS 62/112
TXT Processes under subclass 101 in which a specific refrigerant and/or sorbent
    is used.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for more general processes utilizing diverse materials or
    particular refrigerants.

    502,    for apparatus utilizing diverse refrigerants.


CLS 62/113
TXT Processes under subclass 56 in which one portion of a refrigeration system
    having a first function is in heat exchange relation with another portion
    having another function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    513,    for related apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclasses 21+ for a
    separatory distillation process directed to recovering heat from a material
    in the system by indirect heat exchange with a second material.  The source
    of heat may be a distillate or a residue and the transfer of heat may take
    place at any point in the system.


CLS 62/114
TXT Processes under subclass 56 employing diverse refrigerants or a particular
    material as a refrigerant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85,     for processes of preventing formation of undesirables.

    86+,    for processes involving air as a refrigerant.

    112,    for sorption type refrigeration processes utilizing particular
    refrigerant and/or sorbent materials.

    490+,   for sorbent type refrigeration apparatus including inert gas means.

    502,    for a compressor-condenser-evaporator apparatus using diverse
    fluids.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 67+ for refrigerant compositions, per se.


CLS 62/115
TXT Processes under subclass 56 which include compressing, condensing and
    evaporating a refrigerant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86,     for processes involving pressure reduction on a fluid which is a
    gas at all stages of the process.

    498+,   for related apparatus.


CLS 62/116
TXT Processes under subclass 115 in which the motive energy of a fluid is
    employed to compress the fluid in the refrigeration cycle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500,    for jet powered apparatus.

    501,    for a fluid energized compressor.


CLS 62/117
TXT Processes under subclass 115 in which the refrigerant in at least one
    portion of its flow path is divided into two or more flow paths.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196+,   for automatic control of by-pass means.

    504,    for a compressor-condenser-evaporator circuit with means to
    apportion flow to its evaporator.

    525,    for an evaporator with a particular flow distributor to sections
    thereof.


CLS 62/118
TXT Processes under subclass 56 wherein a fluid is pumped in a closed circuit,
    absorbing and rejecting heat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86+,    in which pressure is reduced on a gas, the gas remaining as such
    during the cooling operation.

    89+     and 98+, for processes involving circulation of an external fluid.

    115+,   for processes involving compressing, condensing and evaporating.

    430+,   particularly subclass 435 for apparatus utilizing an intermediate
    heat transfer fluid.


CLS 62/119
TXT Processes under subclass 56 comprising heat absorption in one area and heat
    dissipation in another area, and utilization of a fluid heat transfer
    medium moving between said area which medium changes state in each of said
    absorption and dissipation steps.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51.1+,  for apparatus comprising only a connected liquid receiver
    (condenser) and evaporator a cryostat.

    115+,   for processes involving compression, condensation and evaporation.


CLS 62/120
TXT Processes under subclass 56 in which the operations are physically or
    temporarily spaced.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65,     for diverse temperature treating of an article.

    95,     for plural steps of cooling air.


CLS 62/121
TXT Processes under subclass 56 in which cooling is effected by reasons of
    mutually contacting a gas and a liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304+,   for related apparatus.


CLS 62/122
TXT Processes under subclass 56 in which streams of fluids having diverse
    temperatures are combined.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97,     for similar processes wherein the streams are air streams.


CLS 62/123
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means to separate a constituent
    of a liquid mixture by cooling it, e.g., congealing the constituent, and
    means to remove the congealed constituent from the liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    317+,   for means separating a constituent or portion from a fluid by
    filtration or gravitational separation.

    532+,   for related processes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes and non-coating apparatus for
    growing therein-defined single-crystal of all types of materials, including
    inorganic or organic,  including those having refrigeration steps or means.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclass 45 for evaporating apparatus
    for graining and separating crystals.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 245.1+ for non-coating
    crystallization apparatus not including chemical reaction means, not
    including refrigeration means, and not provided for elsewhere, and
    subclasses 129+ for non-coating crystallization apparatus which include
    means for a chemical reaction, which may or may not include refrigeration
    means, and which are not provided for elsewhere.


CLS 62/124
TXT Apparatus under subclass 123 including means for heating a liquid mixture
    container.


CLS 62/125
TXT Apparatus under class definition provided with an indicator or testing
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246+,   for apparatus which merely displays a commodity within a cooled
    compartment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 551+ for a fluid system of general
    application with an indicator or tester.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 585 for electrical indicating
    systems automatically responsive to the thermal condition of refrigerated
    storage.


CLS 62/126
TXT Apparatus under subclass 125 in which there is operative correlation
    between indicating and automatic refrigeration control means.


CLS 62/127
TXT Apparatus under subclass 125 comprising a plurality of different function
    indicating or testing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 521+ for electrical
    automatic indicating systems responsive to plural diverse conditions.


CLS 62/128
TXT Apparatus under subclass 125 in which the presence of atmospheric
    condensate is indicated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 580 for electrical automatic
    indicating systems responsive to ice formation.


CLS 62/129
TXT Apparatus under subclass 125 which automatically responds to a variable
    condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    for a gauge glass which enables movement of a refrigerant to be
    observed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+ for electrical
    automatic condition responsive indicating systems.


CLS 62/130
TXT Apparatus under subclass 129 in which the condition is material being
    cooled.


CLS 62/131
TXT Apparatus under subclass 125 in which the position or extent of motion of a
    movable element is indicated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 686+ for electrical
    automatic indicating systems responsive to position.


CLS 62/132
TXT Apparatus under class definition comprising means to sense an operating
    condition or change of operating condition and exert a control on cooling
    means or means handling material cooled or to be cooled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126,    for an indicator or tester correlated with automatic control.

    231+,   for a time or program actuator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, appropriate subclass for automatic control of fluid
    handling of general application, particularly subclasses 59+ for freeze
    responsive safety means and subclasses 78+ for atmospheric condition change
    responsive control.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 200 for automatic control of a heat
    exchanger not specialized by structure to refrigeration.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, appropriate subclass
    for an automatic temperature regulation system.


CLS 62/133
TXT Apparatus under subclass 132 responsive to any phase of motion of a vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215,    226+ and 228, for refrigerator-compressor drive control or response
    even though the drive is a vehicle motor.


CLS 62/134
TXT Apparatus under subclass 133 including an electrical motor-generator.


CLS 62/135
TXT Apparatus under subclass 132 comprising means responsive to a change of
    condition of a consumable product undergoing congelation.


CLS 62/136
TXT Apparatus under subclass 135 in which the condition is a change of
    consistency.


CLS 62/137
TXT Apparatus under subclass 135 in which the sensing means responds to an
    accumulation of the congealed product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139+,   for condition sensing control by other accumulation, e.g., frost on
    a freezing surface, i.e., apparatus not having mechanical means to remove
    the accumulation.


CLS 62/138
TXT Apparatus under subclass 137 wherein the accumulation is on a cooled
    surface.


CLS 62/139
TXT Apparatus under subclass 132 responsive to the accumulation of congealed
    material on a freezing surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135,    for a similar control related to means manufacturing and removing
    or working a congealed consumable product.


CLS 62/140
TXT Apparatus under subclass 139 in which the condition sensed is the
    accumulation of frozen atmospheric condensate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151+,   for other automatic handling of frost.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 215 for photocell control with a specific
    art device there provided for.


CLS 62/141
TXT Apparatus under subclass 132 controlling a refrigeration producer utilizing
    a sorbent for the refrigerant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101+,   for processes of refrigeration utilizing a sorbent.


CLS 62/142
TXT Apparatus under subclass 141 in which a refrigerant or sorbent containing
    element is caused to be intermittently and repeatedly subjected to
    generating-condensing pressure and absorbing-evaporating pressure.


CLS 62/143
TXT Apparatus under subclass 142 wherein the sorbent container serves at one
    time as a still and at another time as a sorber.


CLS 62/144
TXT Apparatus under subclass 143 comprising at least two sorbent containing
    units controlled for alternate or sequential generation or sorption.


CLS 62/145
TXT Apparatus under subclass 144 in which the units are serially interconnected
    for refrigerant or absorbent flow from one to another.


CLS 62/146
TXT Apparatus under subclass 143 wherein flow of cooling medium for a unit is
    controlled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    481,    for absorber-generator cooling structure, per se.


CLS 62/147
TXT Apparatus under subclass 146 in which sorbent or refrigerant flow is also
    controlled.


CLS 62/148
TXT Apparatus under subclass 141 including means to control the supply of heat
    to a sorbent regenerator.


CLS 62/149
TXT Apparatus under subclass 132 which controls or responds to means adding or
    withdrawing refrigerant to or from a closed circuit type refrigeration
    system, relative to a source external of the system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174,    for means collecting and discharging refrigerant batches within the
    system.


CLS 62/150
TXT Apparatus under subclass 132 which is responsive to or controls means which
    prevents, removes or handles atmospheric condensate.


CLS 62/151
TXT Apparatus under subclass 150 which relates to removal of frozen atmospheric
    condensate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140,    for condition sensing control measuring frost accumulation.

    162,    for a control which resumes its function after manual initiation,
    e.g., manual initiation of defrosting means then the sensing control causes
    the refrigeration producer to resume operation.

    234,    for time or program actuated defrosting means.


CLS 62/152
TXT Apparatus under subclass 151 in which the defrosting control acts to
    defrost a limited area of the space cooled or one section of a cooling
    means in preference to another, e.g., defrosting controls for two zone
    refrigerators.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    197+,   for an evaporation by-pass control which may be similar in
    operation.


CLS 62/153
TXT Apparatus under subclass 151 which responds to actuation of a storage
    compartment closure, e.g., a door.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162,    for means to manually initiate the operation of the sensing means.

    267,    for interlocked diverse function elements, e.g., door and
    refrigeration producer.


CLS 62/154
TXT Apparatus under subclass 151 responsive to operation of the power input
    means of a refrigeration producer, e.g., motor or compressor.


CLS 62/155
TXT Apparatus under subclass 151 with a timing or programming device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    234,    for a time or program actuated system.


CLS 62/156
TXT Apparatus under subclass 151 including thermally responsive means.


CLS 62/157
TXT Apparatus under subclass 132 with a time or program actuator.


CLS 62/158
TXT Apparatus under subclass 157 in which there is means delaying the normal
    operation of the automatic control.


CLS 62/159
TXT Apparatus under subclass 132 controlling, or responsive to, means
    selectively heating or cooling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324+,   for a reversible heat pump and see the Notes thereto.


CLS 62/160
TXT Apparatus under subclass 159 comprising means to reverse flow through a
    refrigeration producing cycle so as to reverse the function of the heat
    absorbing or rejecting means of the cycle.


CLS 62/161
TXT Apparatus under subclass 132 so related to (1) manually operated means, or
    (2) other means external of the refrigeration producer, as to modify the
    manner of operation of the automatic control.

    (1)     Note.  The term "manually actuated means" does not include starting
    or stopping means such as a line switch or means for adjusting a control
    point of a sensing means, e.g., adjustable thermostat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    267,    for interlocked diverse function elements, per se.


CLS 62/162
TXT Apparatus under subclass 161 in which an operative control cycle is
    initiated manually and is terminated automatically.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153,    for means determining a number of door operations to control
    defrosting.


CLS 62/163
TXT Apparatus under subclass 161 in which operation is under selective control,
    e.g., either by manual or automatic control.


CLS 62/164
TXT Apparatus under subclass 161 in which a manual operator resets a condition
    sensing means and also sets or resets another control element.


CLS 62/165
TXT Apparatus under subclass 132 controlling, or responsive to, means involving
    the use of a solidified gas (CO2).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    384+,   for a material or space cooler using a solidified gas.


CLS 62/166
TXT Apparatus under subclass 165 having different control or response means.


CLS 62/167
TXT Apparatus under subclass 165 in which (1) a heater, or (2) means varying
    heat transmission, is controlled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    383,    for refrigeration means utilizing variable thermal means.


CLS 62/168
TXT Apparatus under subclass 165 which is temperature responsive, e.g., venting
    of the gas is thermostatically controlled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    for thermostatic control of a heater, heat transmitter or secondary
    heat exchanging fluid.


CLS 62/169
TXT Apparatus under subclass 132 which controls, or is responsive to, means
    having a chamber containing a liquid, or a wetted solid, e.g., lettuce.

    (1)     Note.  The vapor may be condensed, heated and vaporized to supply
    the evacuating pump.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    for processes involving vacuumizing an open outlet chamber.

    191,    for automatic control of a closed cycle refrigeration producer
    having a jet-type compressor.

    268+,   for vacuumized open outlet chamber refrigeration apparatus.


CLS 62/170
TXT Apparatus under subclass 169 in which the sensing means controls, or
    responds to, the operation of the evacuating means.


CLS 62/171
TXT Apparatus under subclass 132 controlling, or responding to, the flow of the
    gas or liquid of a gas-liquid contacting cooler.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    271,    for an atmosphere and sorbent contacting cooler which may include a
    liquid sorbent.

    304,    for material cooling means, utilizing gas-liquid contact means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, particularly subclasses 121+ for
    a gas-liquid contactor having no features for refrigeration.


CLS 62/172
TXT Apparatus under subclass 132 controlling or responding to the operation of
    an air compressor-cooler-expander type refrigerant producer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401+,   for an air-compressor-cooler expander machine.


CLS 62/173
TXT Apparatus under subclass 132 in which the means controlled utilizes some or
    all of the heat of a heat rejecting portion of the same or another
    refrigeration producer for reheating an external fluid which has been
    cooled, e.g., air.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90,     for processes of air cooling and reheating.

    159+,   for control of a selective heating or cooling refrigeration
    producer.

    428,    for an air cooler with means for heating air over a heat rejector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 223 for a refrigeration producer having a
    reheating means, other than a heat rejection portion of a refrigeration
    producer, that is controlled by a humidistat; and subclass 263 for such
    reheat means controlled by temperature.


CLS 62/174
TXT Apparatus under subclass 132 controlling, or responsive to, means trapping
    and retaining a quantity of liquefied refrigerant and which trapping means
    is actuated to intermittently discharge said refrigerant in batches.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83,     for processes of preventing refrigerant slugging.

    84,     for processes involving lubricant handling.

    503,    for a liquid trap in a refrigerant line.

    509,    for a condensed refrigerant receiver.

    512,    for a vapor-liquid separator and liquid recycle means.


CLS 62/175
TXT Apparatus under subclass 132 controlling, or responsive to (1) a
    refrigeration producing system having diverse refrigeration producing
    means, (2) a refrigeration producing system in which the same refrigerant
    flows through two pairs of elements in circuits which are interconnected
    for fluid flow between them, or (3) a refrigeration system having circuits
    isolating the fluid in one from the other and having at least two similar
    elements in each circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332+,   for an ice and mechanical system.

    335,    for refrigeration producing elements in cascade.


CLS 62/176.1
TXT Humidity sensor:

    Apparatus under subclass 132 which senses moisture in the air to be
    refrigerated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 29.02+ for an hygrometer.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 44 for a
    humidity control of general utility.


CLS 62/176.2
TXT Having defrost control related to humidity:

    Apparatus under subclass 176.1 in which the sensed humidity of the cooled
    space exerts at least a partial control of some phase of a defrosting
    operation.

    (1)     Note.  In a nominally time controlled defroster, the intervals of
    defrosting are directly proportional to the humidity level.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151+,   for automatic control of defrosting.


CLS 62/176.3
TXT Controlling variable compressor capacity:

    Apparatus under subclass 176.1 in which the output of a compressor is
    varied in response to the sensed humidity, e.g., unloading variable speed,
    compressor staging, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    510,    for plural compressors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 1 for
    automatic control of refrigeration systems by multistage controls.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnecting Systems, subclass 39 for
    condition responsive plural load circuits.


CLS 62/176.4
TXT Controlling gas-liquid contactor for air:

    Apparatus under subclass 176.1 which there is an air-liquid contactor
    controlled at least in part by an air humidity sensor, e.g., evaporative
    type cooler.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 226 for control of a gas-liquid fluid
    control by humidity sensor.


CLS 62/176.5
TXT Control of air heater, e.g., reheat pump:

    Apparatus under subclass 176.1 in which there is provided a means to
    regulate an air heater, e.g., reheat, to control the humidity in the
    ambient air.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90,     for methods involving reheating.

    173,    for automatic control of reheating.


CLS 62/176.6
TXT Plus air temperature sensor exerting a control:

    Apparatus under subclass 176.1 in which an air temperature sensor acts in
    conjunction with the air humidity sensor to exert a control; the air
    temperature sensor could be alternative to or modifying the air humidity
    sensor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 44 for
    systems in which the temperature and humidity are controlled.


CLS 62/177
TXT Apparatus under subclass 132 controlling a fluid other than a refrigerant,
    a cooled product or a product to be cooled.


CLS 62/178
TXT Apparatus under subclass 177, (1) controlling a plurality of means, at
    least one handling a fluid or product, or (2) diverse function sensing
    means controlling an external fluid or means.


CLS 62/179
TXT Apparatus under subclass 178 in which the plurality of controlled means are
    external of the refrigeration producer.


CLS 62/180
TXT Apparatus under subclass 178 controlling fluid external of cooling means
    and a refrigeration producer or operative element thereof.


CLS 62/181
TXT Apparatus under subclass 180 controlling flow of a condenser cooling fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183+,   for other automatic control of or by cooling fluid for a heat
    rejector.


CLS 62/182
TXT Apparatus under subclass 180 in which the controls are arranged so that
    they operate in a determined sequence.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181,    for diverse control or response related to condenser cooling.


CLS 62/183
TXT Apparatus under subclass 177 controlling the fluid which cools a heat
    rejective element of a refrigeration producer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181,    for condenser cooling fluid control and refrigeration producer
    control or response and see the Notes thereto.


CLS 62/184
TXT Apparatus under subclass 183 responsive to a condition of a refrigerant
    within a refrigeration producer, e.g., temperature or pressure.


CLS 62/185
TXT Apparatus under subclass 177 responsive to, or controlling, flow of an
    indirect heat transferring coolant, e.g., brine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    430+,   for a cooling system using an intermediate fluid or holdover.


CLS 62/186
TXT Apparatus under subclass 177 controlling, or responsive to, means forcing,
    directing or allowing flow of air.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404+,   for cooling means having a controller or director, per se.


CLS 62/187
TXT Apparatus under subclass 186 in which the movement of an air circulation
    controlling damper between compartments is controlled.


CLS 62/188
TXT Apparatus under subclass 177 controlled by fluid level, e.g., a valve is
    controlled by a float.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 386+, particularly subclasses 410+ for a
    float controlled valve.


CLS 62/189
TXT Apparatus under subclass 177 responsive to, or controlling, the flow of the
    external fluid, e.g., a check valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 511+ for a check valve.


CLS 62/190
TXT Apparatus under subclass 132 responsive to or controlling, a refrigeration
    producer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    467+,   for a refrigeration producer.


CLS 62/191
TXT Apparatus under subclass 190 in which the sensing means controls or
    responds to a closed type refrigeration producer employing a jet type
    compressor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170,    for automatic control of means evacuating an open outlet chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 182+ for jet pump regulation.


CLS 62/192
TXT Apparatus under subclass 190 controlling, or responsive to, a condition of
    a lubricating means or the lubricant.


CLS 62/193
TXT Apparatus under subclass 192 in which the sensing means responds to or
    controls a refrigerant compressor.


CLS 62/194
TXT Apparatus under subclass 192 in which there is a liquid chamber enclosing a
    liquid level operated fluid flow controller, e.g., valve, which chamber
    includes a refrigerant vapor outlet means and also means to cause lubricant
    to be entrained with the vapor passing through said outlet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218+,   for a similar float operated liquid control.


CLS 62/195
TXT Apparatus under subclass 190 controlling, or responsive to, means removing
    an undesired constituent, e.g., gas, from a refrigerant producer.


CLS 62/196.1
TXT Bypass, e.g., compressor unloading:

    Apparatus under subclass 190 controlling or responsive to, means allowing
    flow around either a refrigerant condenser, evaporator, compressor or a
    part of either, e.g., compressor unloading, or directing refrigerant flow
    to either of two or more evaporators or condensers arranged in parallel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for processes involving dividing refrigerant flow.

    174,    for control of trapping and discharging refrigerant batches.  These
    devices often trap liquid from the evaporator outlet and feed it to the
    receiver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 279+ for condition responsive control of the
    fluid handled by a pump or compressor.


CLS 62/196.2
TXT For plural compressor cylinders:

    Apparatus under subclass 196.1 in which there is control of either a
    compressor unit or system comprising more than one compression chamber,
    e.g., multistage, multicylinder, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    510,    for plural compressors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 1 for
    refrigeration systems controlled multistage control.


CLS 62/196.3
TXT Direct bypass of compressor:

    Apparatus under subclass 196.1 in which the gas discharged from the
    compressor goes directly to the compressor suction, e.g., compressor
    unloading.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 297+ for compressor unloading.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 14 for rotary
    expansible chamber compressor unloading.


CLS 62/196.4
TXT Condenser bypass:

    Apparatus under subclass 196.1 in which refrigerant is caused to bypass
    part or all of a condenser.

    (1)     Note.  The condenser may be part of a condenser system having
    plural condensers.


CLS 62/197
TXT Apparatus under subclass 196 in which the refrigerant fluid bypasses a
    restrictor, evaporator or the suction line returning to a compressor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216+,   for evaporation zone control or response, per se.


CLS 62/198
TXT Apparatus under subclass 197 in which evaporators are arranged for serial
    flow and the refrigerant fluid bypasses at least one of them.


CLS 62/199
TXT Apparatus under subclass 197 in which the bypass for refrigerant fluid
    around the evaporator is to another evaporator, i.e., the evaporators are
    in parallel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    504,    for means to apportion flow to evaporators.

    525+,   for an evaporator with plural distinct zones or sections.


CLS 62/200
TXT Apparatus under subclass 199 in which the control means acts to cause flow
    through one or more of a plurality of evaporators in a selected order so
    that refrigerant is caused to flow to at least one evaporator in preference
    to another.


CLS 62/201
TXT Apparatus under subclass 190 responsive to a condition, usually
    temperature, of an external liquid, e.g., withdrawable or heat transfer,
    (brine) or of a holdover.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    430+,   for secondary liquid and holdover combinations, per se.


CLS 62/202
TXT Apparatus under subclass 190 including thermal means not a part of the
    refrigeration producer or the means cooled by it so related to a sensor
    that it modifies its action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209+,   for other plural sensors and single refrigeration producing
    elements with compensating or control features.

    214+,   for a single sensor mounted or formed to respond to plural
    conditions, e.g., compensated sensors.


CLS 62/203
TXT Apparatus under subclass 190 comprising a refrigeration producing system
    having plural operative elements and plural condition sensing means each
    responding to or controlling at least two of said elements.


CLS 62/204
TXT Apparatus under subclass 203 in which at least one of the operative
    elements is an expansion or variable restrictor controlling the flow of the
    refrigerant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216+,   for control of or by an evaporation zone in which there is a single
    control or single valve controlled.


CLS 62/205
TXT Apparatus under subclass 204 controlling a plurality of expansion valves or
    variable restrictors for a refrigerant.


CLS 62/206
TXT Apparatus under subclass 205 in which both the high (expansion valve) and
    low side, (back pressure) restrictor or valve are controlled.


CLS 62/207
TXT Apparatus under subclass 190 in which operative elements of a refrigeration
    producer having diverse functions are controlled by single sensing means.


CLS 62/208
TXT Apparatus under subclass 190 having plural sensing means which coact to
    control a single operative element of a refrigeration producer.


CLS 62/209
TXT Apparatus under subclass 208 in which the plural sensing means act together
    to modify or compensate the action of one another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202,    for external thermal source modifying sensor action.

    214+,   for a single sensor mounted or formed to respond to plural
    conditions, e.g., a compensated sensor.


CLS 62/210
TXT Apparatus under subclass 209 controlling a variable refrigerant flow valve
    or restrictor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222+,   for an expansion valve or flow restrictor controlled by a single
    sensor.


CLS 62/211
TXT Apparatus under subclass 210 in which at least one of the sensing elements
    responds to a condition external of the refrigeration producer.


CLS 62/212
TXT Apparatus under subclass 210 in which the plural sensing elements each
    respond to a condition between expansion means and a suction source.


CLS 62/213
TXT Apparatus under subclass 208 in which any one of the plurality of sensing
    means can alternatively or selectively control the element controlled.


CLS 62/214
TXT Apparatus under subclass 190 in which a single sensing means is positioned
    or formed so as to be responsive to plural conditions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209+,   for plural sensors modifying or compensating each other and
    controlling a single refrigeration producer.


CLS 62/215
TXT Apparatus under subclass 214 in which the sensing means controls an element
    in the compressor or its drive, e.g., its torque or speed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228+,   for other sensing control of a compressor or its drive.


CLS 62/216
TXT Apparatus under subclass 190 controlling or responding to the condition of
    an element between or at the outlet of a liquefied refrigerant source,
    e.g., condenser or receiver, and to the means withdrawing a vapor, e.g.,
    compressor.


CLS 62/217
TXT Apparatus under subclass 216 in which the fluid condition in the evaporator
    is regulated by a variable restrictor between the evaporator outlet and the
    inlet (suction side) of the compressor.


CLS 62/218
TXT Apparatus under subclass 216 in which a valve or variable flow restrictor
    is controlled by refrigerant liquid level.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194,    for float means controlling an evaporator and means entraining
    lubricant in refrigerant vapors.


CLS 62/219
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 wherein there is a float which responds to a
    liquid level in a chamber in which the pressure is that between expansion
    means and a source of suction (compressor).


CLS 62/220
TXT Apparatus under subclass 219 in which the suction line opens directly into
    the float chamber.


CLS 62/221
TXT Apparatus under subclass 220 in which the flow controlling valve is in a
    chamber separated by an isolating partition from the chamber containing the
    float.


CLS 62/222
TXT Apparatus under subclass 216 in which the device controlled is a valve or
    variable restrictor of an expansion device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194,    197+, 204+, and 218, for other sensing control of expansion means
    with a variable restrictor.

    528,    for an evaporator with an adjustable flow controller.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, appropriate
    subclass, particularly subclasses 67+ for a thermostatically controlled
    valve of more general application.


CLS 62/223
TXT Apparatus under subclass 222 responsive to a condition external of the
    refrigeration producing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177+,   for means controlling an external fluid or means, particularly
    subclasses 180+ for such means combined with a refrigeration producer
    control.


CLS 62/224
TXT Apparatus under subclass 222 responsive to a condition on the low side,
    i.e., between expansion means and a source of suction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206,    for high and low side response.

    212,    for plural sensors on the low side.


CLS 62/225
TXT Apparatus under subclass 224 in which the condition is the one prevailing
    at or beyond an evaporator outlet, i.e., the condition of the vapor after
    evaporation is complete.


CLS 62/226
TXT Apparatus under subclass 216 in which the compressor or its drive is
    controlled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228+,   for other control of a compressor of or by sensing means.


CLS 62/227
TXT Apparatus under subclass 226 in which a temperature sensing means is in
    heat conducting relationship to an evaporator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 141+, particularly
    subclass 147 for means mounting a temperature measuring device on a support.


CLS 62/228.1
TXT Compressor or its drive controlled:
    Apparatus under subclass 190 relating to a compressor or its drive.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172,    for control of or by an air compressing type refrigeration producer.

    187+,   particularly subclass 180, for diverse control or response
    involving control of an external fluid or means.

    191,    for control of or by a jet type compressor.

    193+,   for control of or by lubricating means.

    196+,   for control of or by a by-pass, e.g., compressor unloading.

    215,    for a single sensor responsive to plural conditions and controlling
    a compressor.

    236+,   for control of a compressor of or by evaporation zone condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 1+ for condition responsive control of a pump or
    compressor drive motor, subclasses 212+ for condition responsive control of
    a pump or compressor drive transmission or displacement; subclasses 274+
    for condition responsive control of the volumetric capacity of a pump or
    compressor; and subclasses 279+ for condition responsive control of the
    fluid handled by a pump or compressor.


CLS 62/228.2
TXT For ice or ice cream maker:

    Apparatus under subclass 228.1 in which the controlled compressor provides
    the refrigeration effect for a liquid under-going partial or full
    congelation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135,    for automatic control of the congealed product condition.


CLS 62/228.3
TXT By refrigerant pressure:

    Apparatus under subclass 228.1 in which the compressor is controlled by a
    sensed condition of refrigerant pressure.

    (1)     Note.  The sensed condition here may merely control the compressor
    in an on-off manner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclass 38 for control of a pump by a liquid pressure
    sensor.


CLS 62/228.4
TXT By variable speed motor or pulley type mechanism:

    Apparatus under subclass 228.1 in which movement of the compressor working
    member is varied as a function of a sensed drive condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215,    for a compressor controlled by a single sensor responding to plural
    conditions.


CLS 62/228.5
TXT By variable compressor output (e.g., unloading, staging, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 228.1 in which the output of a single compressor
    or the combined output of a plurality of compressors is varied as a
    function of a sensed compressor operating condition, e.g., compressor
    unloading, compressor staging.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176.3,  for control of plural compressors controlled by humidity.

    510,    for plural compressors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 1 for
    refrigeration system staging.


CLS 62/229
TXT Apparatus under subclass 228 responsive to a condition of an external
    cooled ambient gas.


CLS 62/230
TXT Apparatus under subclass 228 responsive to a condition of the compressor
    power source or drive.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133+,   for a control responsive to vehicle motion or traction feature, the
    traction feature generally being the prime mover for the refrigeration
    producer.


CLS 62/231
TXT Apparatus under the class definition whereby (1) the time in which or
    length of time taken to perform an operation is controlled, (2) there is
    either a fixed continuous sequential or fixed repetitive operation of means
    performing a treating operation, or (3) there is means terminating a single
    operation in a fixed position to restart an additional cycle, which cycle
    is more complex than a mere starting or stopping of a single device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155+    and 157+, for automatic control combined with time or program
    control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 624.11+ for fluid handling of a more
    general utility with a program or time actuator.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 19+ for a
    periodic switch, subclasses 33+ for a switch with an actuation retarder.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclasses 301+ for thermally actuated switches which are continuously
    driven or time controlled.


CLS 62/232
TXT Apparatus under subclass 231 relating to operation of a closed sorption
    type refrigeration producer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141+,   for automatic control of a sorbent type refrigeration producer.


CLS 62/233
TXT Apparatus under subclass 231 relating to operation of congelation apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135+,   for control of a congelation product maker by product condition.

    340+,   for a congelation product maker, per se.


CLS 62/234
TXT Apparatus under subclass 231 relating to a defrosting operation of a
    refrigeration producer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140     and 151, for automatic control of defrosting.


CLS 62/235
TXT Apparatus under the class definition designed for ice skating purposes.


CLS 62/235.1
TXT UTILIZING SOLAR ENERGY:

    Subject matter under the class definition subjecting a material to the heat
    energy of the sun.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 93 for a
    solar-heated drier.

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 641.1+ for a power plant operated by the
    sun.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 569+ and 714 for a solar heater.


CLS 62/236
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having two energy sources actuating a
    refrigeration producer which sources are alternately usable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    for means responsive to vehicle body motion or traction and
    including an electrical generator.

    237,    a separable ambulant cooled enclosure and a power source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 64+
    for substitute or emergency source electrical transmission or
    interconnecting systems.


CLS 62/237
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising an ambulant enclosure,
    e.g., vehicle, which is cooled by connecting or placing it into
    juxtaposition with a cooling means or a power source for operating cooling
    means, e.g., for precooling of an enclosure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65,     for sequential stage processes.

    236,    for alternatively usable energy sources.

    298+,   for repair, assembly or disassembly means.

    448+,   for a cooled enclosure with a contained movable unit of a
    refrigeration producing assembly.


CLS 62/238.1
TXT DISPARATE APPARATUS UTILIZED AS HEAT SOURCE OR ABSORBER:

    Apparatus under the class definition in which (a) the heat of a disparate
    apparatus as an energy source for a refrigeration producer, or (b) the
    rejected heat of a refrigeration producer is used to heat a disparate
    apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  A disparate apparatus herein is a nonrefrigerating or
    cooling means having a function other than merely serving as an energy
    source for the refrigeration producer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for apparatus and processes wherein a refrigerant is used as a fuel.

    38+,    for liquefied gas producing involving an expansion engine.

    61,     133+ and 241+, for operation involving motion of a vehicle.

    79,     for related processes or for processes involving exchanging heat
    between plural systems.

    87      and 401+, for operations involving expanding a gas through an
    engine.

    235.1,  for means utilizing solar energy.

    259.1+, particularly subclass 260 for a refrigerating system installed in
    or acting to cool a structure having a function other than merely enclosing
    a space or handling material.

    277+,   for means utilizing rejected heat to remove atmospheric condensate.

    322,    for disparate serially arranged product treating means.

    323.1+, for another internal-combustion engine and refrigeration producing
    combination.

    324.1+, for a reversible cycle machine.

    501,    for apparatus using an external fluid as a power source and as a
    heat exchanging fluid.

    532+    and 123+, for processes and apparatus for solidifying a liquid
    fraction which may include using waste heat to thaw a frozen constituent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 41.19 for an
    internal-combustion engine cooled by a refrigeration cycle.


CLS 62/238.2
TXT With vortex tube, thermoelectric, stirling or air cycle:

    Apparatus under subclass 238.1 in which there is refrigeration produced by
    a vortex tube, thermoelectric cycle, Stirling cycle or an air cycle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for refrigeration devices comprising a vortex tube.

    6,      for refrigeration devices comprising a Stirling cycle.

    86+     and 401+, for refrigeration system including an internal-combustion
    engine and not using a compressor.

    235.1,  for refrigeration devices comprising a thermoelectric cycle
    utilizing solar energy.

    324.2,  for a diverse reversible refrigeration system.


CLS 62/238.3
TXT With sorption:

    Apparatus under subclass 238.1 wherein refrigeration is produced by
    utilizing a sorbent for a refrigeration fluid.

    (1)     Note.  The sorbent being usually a fluid but may be a solid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101+,   for processes of sorption.

    235.1,  for refrigerant systems utilizing solar energy.

    476+,   for sorption apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 62 and 63 for heating and cooling with
    sorption systems.


CLS 62/238.4
TXT With power vapor generator:

    Apparatus under subclass 238.1 wherein the energy for driving the
    refrigeration system is derived at least in part by the making of vapor,
    e.g., Rankine cycle, jet pump.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500,    for jet pumps powered by refrigerant circuit fluid.

    501,    for an external fluid actuating a compressor and exchanging heat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 643+ for motive fluid energized by
    external heating means.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 76+ for details of jet pumps.


CLS 62/238.5
TXT With distillation, ice maker, or freeze separation:

    Apparatus under subclass 238.1 comprising (a) separating a more volatile
    part from a less volatile part of a substance by heating, (b) congelation
    of a liquid product, or (c) separation of a constituent of a liquid mixture
    by congelation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123+    and 532+, for freeze separation.

    66+     and 340+, for ice making.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for distillation
    apparatus.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, appropriate subclasses for
    distillation processes.


CLS 62/238.6
TXT With vapor compression system:

    Apparatus under subclass 238.1 in which either a heated disparate apparatus
    or a disparate heating device is associated with a reverse Carnot cycle
    refrigeration system.

    (1)     Note.  The evaporator is usually the receiver of the disparate heat
    and the condenser is usually the heat source for heating the disparate
    apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235.1,  for a solar energy heat source.

    324.5,  for a reversible refrigeration system either with disparate heating
    or with a disparate heat source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    237,    Heating Systems, subclass 2 for heating systems using the rejected
    heat of a refrigeration system as a heat source.


CLS 62/238.7
TXT Reversible, i.e., heat pump:

    Apparatus under subclass 238.6 in which parts of a refrigeration system may
    either (a) receive heat from, or (b) give heat to a separate device.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the evaporator is the receiver of the disparate heat
    and the condenser is the heat source for heating a disparate apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235.1,  for solar energy as a heat source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    237,    Heating Systems, subclass 2 for heating systems using the rejected
    heat of a refrigeration system as a heat source.


CLS 62/239
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having (1) means dependent on vehicle
    motion, (2) a defined vehicle traction feature, or (3) a defined vehicle
    body feature other than that merely forming the structure enclosing a space
    to be cooled or supporting a cooling means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323,    for an internal combustion engine in a refrigeration system.

    378+,   for a refrigerator with a conveyor or transporter for articles.

    407+    and 440+, for structural relationships with enclosures of more
    general utility.


CLS 62/240
TXT Apparatus under subclass 239 relating to a ship.


CLS 62/241
TXT Apparatus under subclass 239 utilizing vehicle motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for related processes.

    133+,   for automatic control responsive to vehicle motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclass 231 for a vehicle operated pump or compressor.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 69+ for a vehicle ventilating system.


CLS 62/242
TXT Apparatus under subclass 241 relating to an axle of the vehicle.


CLS 62/243
TXT Apparatus under subclass 239 in which there is a common power supply for
    the vehicle and a refrigeration apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for processes and apparatus utilizing refrigerant as a fuel.


CLS 62/244
TXT Apparatus under subclass 239 having features peculiar to a passenger or
    features accommodating the vehicle operator, e.g., seats, instrument
    panels, dashboards, luggage compartments, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 69+ for vehicle ventilation.


CLS 62/245
TXT Apparatus under subclass 239 having means to control the drip, splash, or
    disposal of the melt from a solid refrigerant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312+,   422+ and 459+, for other ice melt handling.


CLS 62/246
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having structure forming a cooled
    compartment and including a feature, as a transparent panel, stepped
    shelves, or an air current across an opening which enhances the display of
    articles within the compartment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    407+,   for an enclosure with a gas circulating feature.

    440+,   for a cooled enclosure, particularly subclass 457, for a portable
    receptacle cooler, and subclass 458 for an open access cooled surface.


CLS 62/247
TXT Apparatus under subclass 246 having means to disperse or evaporate a liquid
    into the atmosphere of the display device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304+,   for another gas-liquid contact material cooling structure.


CLS 62/248
TXT Apparatus under subclass 246 having means to prevent or remove condensation
    of moisture in the ambient atmosphere on a transparent panel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272+,   for condensation prevention or removal from another heat absorbing
    surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 171.3+ for a
    transparent panel with treating means, e.g., a condensation preventer, and
    see notes.


CLS 62/249
TXT Apparatus under subclass 246 in which the refrigerated display structure is
    combined with a device or structure having other functions, e.g., mirror,
    counter, waste collector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264,    for a refrigerator with illuminating or radiant energy means.


CLS 62/250
TXT Apparatus under subclass 246 having means to move an article.


CLS 62/251
TXT Apparatus under subclass 246 having article support means or shelves
    arranged in superimposed offset relationship.


CLS 62/252
TXT Apparatus under subclass 246 having walls or partitions forming
    compartments for the cooling or storage or articles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    417,    for a plural compartment cooled enclosure having a gas controller.

    441+,   for the structure of a plural compartment cooled enclosure.


CLS 62/253
TXT Apparatus under subclass 252 in which the walls are hollow, imperforate and
    cooled.


CLS 62/254
TXT Apparatus under subclass 252 comprising a nondisplay compartment for
    holding articles.


CLS 62/255
TXT Apparatus under subclass 246 including means for forcing, directing or
    controlling the flow of air within or relative to a cooled display
    compartment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    265+,   for an enclosure access with air blocking means.

    407+,   for an enclosure with cooled air or gas controlling or directing
    means.


CLS 62/256
TXT Apparatus under subclass 255 having means forming an elongated air inlet
    and outlet both of which extend substantially the length of a cabinet
    dimension so that a curtain stream of air is formed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    413+,   for an enclosure having verging streams.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 188+ for an air curtain of more general
    application.


CLS 62/257
TXT Apparatus under subclass 246 having cooling means cooling the floor of the
    display compartment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    458,    for an open access cooled surface.


CLS 62/258
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means forming a noncooled work
    surface, e.g., table, side board, cutting block.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    458,    for a cooled open access article supporting surface.


CLS 62/259.1
TXT STRUCTURAL INSTALLATION:

    Apparatus under the class definition with (a) means performing an operation
    external to the subject matter of this class, (b) a static construction
    installation, (c) a particular geographic feature, wherein there is
    included only so much structure foreign to Class 62 as to associate it with
    the apparatus of Class 62.

    (1)     Note.  The following classes and subclasses are noted as including
    electrical devices and means for cooling them:  Class 373, Industrial
    Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 76, 113, 158, and 165; Class 174,
    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 15.1+; Class 219,
    Electric Heating, subclasses 10.491+ and 120; Class 250, Radiant Energy,
    appropriate subclasses, especially subclass 238; Class 310, Electrical
    Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 52+; Class 313, Electric Lamp and
    Discharge Devices, subclasses 11+ and 231.01; Class 314, Electric Lamp
    Discharge Devices:  Consumable Electrodes, subclass 26; Class 315, Electric
    Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclasses 112+; Class 361,
    Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 676+ and 688; Class 336, Inductor Devices, subclasses
    55+; and Class 338, Electrical Resistor, subclasses 53+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235,    for skating rink.

    235.1,  for a system utilizing solar energy.

    238.1+, for disparate apparatus utilized as a heat source or absorber and
    see the notes thereto.

    239,    for cooling means with a vehicle body or traction feature.

    258,    for apparatus with a noncooled work surface.

    440+,   for refrigeration means having a relationship to a cooled enclosure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclass 284 for a heating and cooling device combined with
    bed structure.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 343+ for a fluid handling system of
    general application installed in extraneous structure.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 47+ for structural installation of a heat
    exchanger not specialized to refrigeration.

    184,    Lubrication, subclasses 104.1+ for a lubricator with heating or
    cooling means.

    454,    Ventilation, appropriate subclasses for ventilation of a building.


CLS 62/259.2
TXT With electrical component cooling:

    Apparatus under subclass 259.1 in which an electrical apparatus is cooled
    by refrigeration means.

    (1)     Note.  Cooling of a specific electrical means should be searched in
    the class where the means as such would be classified, e.g., Class 362, for
    illumination.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    418,    for component cooling by utilizing a foraminous air distributor.

    505,    for motor cooling.

    514,    for Joule Thompson effect coolers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 152+ for
    cooling and/or fluid feeding.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 688+ for
    cooling means for electronic systems and devices.


CLS 62/259.3
TXT With body applicator:

    Apparatus under subclass 259.1 in which there is provided a refrigeration
    means for cooling a living body or part thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    293,    for a hand-manipulable tool for applying cooling to a body, e.g.,
    branding iron.

    530,    for an envelope type refrigerant cooler.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 46 for a flexible envelope body conforming
    heat exchanger.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses
    96+ for  thermal applicators; and dig. 27 for cryogenic devices applicable
    to the body or body part.


CLS 62/259.4
TXT With evaporative type cooler:

    Apparatus under subclass 259.1 in which cooling of air or an object takes
    place by the evaporation of water into air in an open system, e.g., roof
    coolers.

    (1)     Note.  An open system is one which is not sealed from the
    atmosphere for operation at or substantially at atmospheric pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121,    for related processes.

    304+,   for material cooling means including a gas-liquid contactor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    gas-liquid contact apparatus.


CLS 62/260
TXT Apparatus under subclass 259 in which a part is arranged relative to the
    earth, e.g., subterranean.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324+,   for a reversible heat pump organization.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 363+ for ground supported fluid handling
    means.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 45 for a heat exchanger not specialized to
    refrigeration having a geographical feature.


CLS 62/261
TXT Apparatus under subclass 259 in which the cooling means is structurally
    related to an article of furniture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 284 and 423 for a bed or a mattress which may
    include heat exchange means.

    454,    Ventilation, subclass 197 for a window ventilated bed or couch.


CLS 62/262
TXT Apparatus under subclass 259 including mounting or connecting means related
    to a wall aperture, e.g., a window.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    297,    for an external support for a refrigerator housing.

    426+,   for a cooler unit with gas forcing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 208+ for a window mounted or attached bracket,
    per se.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 201+ for a nominally recited window mounted
    air conditioner type air pump.


CLS 62/263
TXT Apparatus under subclass 259 mounting a cooling unit on a vertical wall or
    partition of a building which wall has functions other than merely forming
    the enclosure to be cooled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 242 and 245+ for a cabinet
    mounted in or on a vertical wall.


CLS 62/264
TXT Apparatus under the class definition with means to illuminate it or subject
    it to a particular radiant energy means other than mere heating or cooling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249,    for a display cabinet with features extraneous to the cabinet or
    cooler.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 223.5 for an illuminated
    cabinet of general utility.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 127+ for a light and furniture combination
    of general application.


CLS 62/265
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a cooled compartment with an
    access and means blocking air flow or means resulting in disabling of air
    blocking means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255,    for a display cabinet with air controlling or directing means.

    267,    for interlocked diverse function elements.


CLS 62/266
TXT Apparatus under subclass 265 with an article handling means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    378+,   for an article conveyor or transporter in general.


CLS 62/267
TXT Apparatus under class definition having diverse functions which are
    correlated for conjoint control in such a manner that the action of one
    means is prerequisite to the action of another in a desired sequence or the
    action of one precludes the action of another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231,    for a timed or programmed actuator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclass 63.5 for an
    enclosure with means for rendering its closure lock ineffective, e.g.,
    safety means allowing exit of a person with the enclosure.


CLS 62/268
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which a chamber is placed under a
    subatmospheric temperature by removing of vapor of a liquid within the
    chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    for related processes.

    123,    for means separating a solidified constituent of a liquid mixture.

    169+,   for similar apparatus with automatic control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 75, 92, and
    402+ for similar apparatus and related processes where the primary function
    is that of drying.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclasses 22+ for a closed chamber type
    evaporator.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 151+ for jet type pump, per se.


CLS 62/269
TXT Apparatus under subclass 268 in which a hydroscopic agent is used to aid in
    creating the vacuum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94,     for processes of circulating external gas with removal of gas.

    271,    for atmosphere and sorbent contact.


CLS 62/270
TXT Apparatus under subclass 268 comprising elements having different functions
    in producing a vacuum with or without fluid handling.


CLS 62/271
TXT Apparatus under the class definition supporting or handling a sorbent and
    means to cause contact of the atmosphere, the sorbent acting to remove a
    constituent, usually moisture, from the atmosphere therewith.

    (1)     Note.  If the sorbent is a liquid, means to regenerate is included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93+,    for related processes.

    269,    for a vacuumized chamber with asorbent.

    304+,   for means contacting a liquid with atmosphere even though the
    liquid be a brine.

    317,    for an external fluid clarifier.

    474,    for a refrigerant purifier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 220+ for apparatus for gas separation
    with liquid contacting means.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 108+ for solid sorbent
    apparatus, per se.


CLS 62/272
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means to remove or prevent the
    deposition of moisture condensed from the atmosphere on the surface of a
    heat absorbing surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92      and 93, for processes involving removal of moisture from a
    circulating gas.

    312+,   for an ice melt-gas contactor.

    324+,   for a reversible cycle heat pump.

    353+,   for a heat absorbing member with means to remove a congealed
    product therefrom.

    401+,   for an air compressing, cooling and expanding system which may
    remove condensate from the compressed, heated air.

    432     and 441+, for a refrigerator with plural compartments which may be
    insulated from each other in which the insulation may act to prevent
    condensation on a compartment wall.

    460+,   for a device which removes ice melt together with atmospheric
    condensate deposited on the ice.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 171.3+ for a
    transparent panel with treating means, e.g., a condensation preventer and
    see notes.


CLS 62/273
TXT Apparatus under subclass 272 which operates to prevent condensation within,
    or to remove condensation from, the interior of an insulated wall or
    partition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    385,    for means directing sublimed refrigerant gas into insulation or a
    hollow wall.


CLS 62/274
TXT Apparatus under subclass 272 in which there is means supplying a cooled
    space with moisture from outside the space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91+,    for processes of circulating an external gas.

    171,    for automatic control of a gas-liquid contact cooler.

    176,    for a humidity sensor.


CLS 62/275
TXT Apparatus under subclass 272 aided by heating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    349+,   for similar apparatus used to release a congealed product from a
    heating absorbing element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 538 for electrical heaters, per se, some
    of which may be used for defrosting.


CLS 62/276
TXT Apparatus under subclass 275 in which the heater is positioned so as to
    contact, or to be adjacent to, the surface of a principal heat absorber of
    the refrigeration apparatus, e.g., evaporator.


CLS 62/277
TXT Apparatus under subclass 272 which includes a portion of a refrigeration
    apparatus which develops heat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     for related processes.

    238,    for means utilizing rejected heat in a disparate apparatus.

    352,    for similar structure designed to release a congealed product from
    a heat absorbing surface.


CLS 62/278
TXT Apparatus under subclass 277 in which means is provided for by-passing
    certain of the elements, or reversing flow of internal fluid through the
    refrigeration producing apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159+,   for automatic control of selective heating or cooling means.

    196+,   for automatic control of evaporator or condenser by-pass.

    513,    for heat exchange means between diverse function elements.

    525,    for serially arranged evaporators, one of which may be a
    re-evaporating coil.


CLS 62/279
TXT Apparatus under subclass 277 for conducting atmospheric condensate from the
    heat absorbing portion of a refrigeration producer to a position wherein it
    absorbs heat from a heat liberating portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305,    for a gas-liquid contactor utilized to cool a heat rejector of a
    refrigeration producer.


CLS 62/280
TXT Apparatus under subclass 279 including a pump or means throwing the
    condensate, e.g., slingers.


CLS 62/281
TXT Apparatus under subclass 272 comprising a member, e.g., a wick, positioned
    to receive atmospheric condensate and diffuse it into the atmosphere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315     and 316, for a porous wall or porous cover member gas-liquid
    contact material cooler.


CLS 62/282
TXT Apparatus under subclass 272 with means for applying a fluid, e.g., air or
    brine, to the surface of the heat absorber, so as to inhibit the formation
    of or remove condensate from said heat absorber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     for related processes.


CLS 62/283
TXT Apparatus under subclass 272 in which means separate and distinct from the
    principal heat absorber is so arranged that atmospheric condensate tends to
    collect upon said means in lieu of on the principal heat absorber.

    (1)     Note.  Such means may be the heat absorbing portion of a
    refrigeration producing apparatus wherein its primary function is to cause
    atmospheric condensation, the primary cooling function being left to other
    heat absorbing apparatus.


CLS 62/284
TXT Apparatus under subclass 272 in which there is a device so constructed that
    upon movement relative to the heat absorber of a refrigeration apparatus,
    atmospheric condensate upon the heat absorber is removed therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    303,    for cleaning means for refrigeration apparatus.

    345+,   347 and 354, for means scraping a congealed product from a heat
    absorbing element.


CLS 62/285
TXT Apparatus under subclass 272 in which means is provided for retaining all
    or part of the atmospheric condensate after removal thereof from the heat
    absorbing surface, or for directing flow of such condensate.


CLS 62/286
TXT Apparatus under subclass 285 adjustable with respect to other parts of the
    apparatus or positioned with respect to another retainer or flow director
    in such a manner that it may be removed from the apparatus, the other
    retainer or flow director then accommodating the atmospheric condensate.


CLS 62/287
TXT Apparatus under subclass 285 in which the flow directing means includes an
    inner surface of a wall defining the space being refrigerated.

    (1)     Note.  The atmospheric condensate is usually caused to flow along
    said wall in order that a portion thereof may evaporate within said space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312,    for an ice holder and ice melt-gas contacting means.

    451,    for a cooled wall type refrigerator cabinet.


CLS 62/288
TXT Apparatus under subclass 285 directing condensate into means accumulating
    the condensate.


CLS 62/289
TXT Apparatus under subclass 288 in which the accumulating means is located
    outside of the space being refrigerated.


CLS 62/290
TXT Apparatus under subclass 285 in which plural distinct flow directors for
    atmospheric condensate act in parallel.


CLS 62/291
TXT Apparatus under subclass 285 in which means, e.g., pan or tray, is provided
    for accumulating at least some part of the atmospheric condensate after its
    removal from the heat absorbing surface.


CLS 62/292
TXT Apparatus under the class definition with means for introducing a material,
    usually a refrigerating fluid, into a closed circuit from a source external
    of the circuit, means to provide the refrigerant, to replace a lost portion
    or to replace one component with another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for related processes.

    149,    for automatically adding or withdrawing refrigerant relative to a
    closed system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    appropriate subclass for means for transferring a fluid to a receiver of
    general utility.


CLS 62/293
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a portable cooling device
    having means for manually manipulating it for contact with a material to be
    cooled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    530,    for an envelope type refrigerant or coolant handling device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 35 for portable pipe thawing
    apparatus, and subclasses 97+ for pipe repair means including freezing
    means.


CLS 62/294
TXT Apparatus under class definition including a fluid reservoir having fluid
    liberating means of the cutter or punch type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for processes and apparatus involving cooling by chemical reaction
    or dissolving wherein a container may be punctured.

    293,    for hand manipulable cooling tools.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 317+ for fluid handling of general
    application involving tapping a pipe, keg or tank.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 80+ for a dispenser with a cutter or punch.


CLS 62/295
TXT Apparatus under class definition having resilient supporting means for a
    power input means and/or heat rejecting element of a refrigeration
    producing system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    466,    for a resilient support for an element inside of a cooled enclosure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 560+ for a resilient support in general.

    417,    Pumps, subclass 363 for a resiliently mounted motor driven pump.


CLS 62/296
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a device for attenuating
    sound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    295,    for a resiliently mounted power or heat rejector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 212+ for a muffler or sound deadener, per se.

    417,    Pumps, subclass 312 for a pump or compressor combined with a
    muffler acting on the fluid handled by the pump.


CLS 62/297
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a device external of and
    supporting a refrigerator housing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239+,   for refrigerating means with vehicle body structure or traction
    feature.

    295,    for a resiliently supported power or heat rejecting element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 127+ for a stand support, per se.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 249.1+ and 351.1+ for a
    cabinet with an external support.


CLS 62/298
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means for repairing,
    removing, replacing or aiding in assembling or removing an element of a
    refrigeration assembly other than the parts making up the refrigeration
    assembly which could be removed by merely disconnecting a part, e.g., pipe
    joints, including means to break loose and remove a product (ice) mold from
    its support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for related processes, and see the Notes thereto.

    326+,   for convertible structure which may be disassembled for conversion
    to another structure or for storage of the disassembled structure.

    340+,   for means for removing a product from product forming means.


CLS 62/299
TXT Apparatus under subclass 298 including a pipe coupling and valve means
    controlling flow through the coupling.


CLS 62/300
TXT Apparatus under subclass 298 having means coacting between a mold and its
    support for releasing the mold from the support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    349+,   for a mold with a heater for removing the product from the mold.


CLS 62/301
TXT Apparatus under subclass 300 including means for releasing a grid or molded
    congealed product (ice) from a tray.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359+,   particularly subclasses 362 and 364, for ice trays with cube
    release means.


CLS 62/302
TXT Apparatus under subclass 298 including means on which the element to be
    removed slides or rolls.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    382,    for a drawer, tray or track guided type of receptacle in cooling
    compartment.


CLS 62/303
TXT Apparatus under class definition having means for cleaning or facilitating
    the cleaning of a part of a cooling apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272+,   for atmospheric condensate removal means, particularly subclass 284
    for a wiper for atmospheric condensate.

    298+,   for repair, assembly or disassembly means.

    317+,   for a separating clarifier for nonrefrigerant fluids.

    322,    for disparate serially arranged apparatus, and other means treating
    a product, e.g., cleaning and cooling a product.

    340+,   for a cooler with congealed product removal means.

    474+,   for a refrigerant producer having refrigerant purifying means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 238+ for a fluid handling system
    combined with cleaning means.


CLS 62/304
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including (1) means for directing,
    confining, supporting or handling a material to be cooled combined with
    means promoting contact of a liquid with, or evaporating the liquid into,
    an atmosphere (usually air), or (2) means for contacting or injecting a gas
    into a confined body of liquid combined with means for cooling the liquid
    and gas in contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91+     and 121, for related processes.

    171,    for a gas-liquid contact cooler with automatic control.

    247,    for display type with gas and liquid contacting means.

    271,    for sorbent and atmosphere contacting type cooling apparatus.

    274,    279 or 281, for atmospheric condensate removal which may involve
    gas and liquid contact.

    476+,   particularly subclass 490, for a sorbent type refrigeration
    producer which may use an inert gas contacting the refrigerant or sorber.

    502,    for a compressor-condenser-evaporator refrigeration producer
    utilizing diverse fluids.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 127+ for a gas and
    liquid contactor and heat exchanger wherein all of the gas and liquid
    mingle.


CLS 62/305
TXT Apparatus under subclass 304 dispersing or evaporating liquid into air to
    cool a heat rejecting part of the system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    279+,   where the liquid is atmospheric condensate.

    314     through 316 for gas-liquid contacting means indirectly cooling a
    fluid confining means.

    428+,   for an air cooler with means for cooling a heat rejector, and see
    the Note thereto.


CLS 62/306
TXT Apparatus under subclass 304 including means to feed a gas into a tank or
    flow line containing a liquid which is pressurized by the gas, e.g.,
    carbonating means or means to displace liquid by a gas under pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 154+ for a diverse fluid containing
    pressure system of a more general application.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclass 140 for a refrigerated
    contact device, and subclass 153 for a heated or cooled gas exposed body of
    liquid.


CLS 62/307
TXT Apparatus under subclass 304 including a gas inlet submerged in a body of
    liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 121+ for such device
    wherein a gas is injected into a body of liquid but having no means for
    cooling the liquid container or features peculiar to the manufacture of a
    congealed product (ice), and subclass 153 for a heated or cooled container
    for a gas exposed liquid body.


CLS 62/308
TXT Apparatus under subclass 307 wherein the gas inlet is a pipe suspended
    through an open top of a receptacle containing the liquid.


CLS 62/309
TXT Apparatus under subclass 304 comprising means forcing or directing gas
    relative to the contactor and a related enclosure in such a manner that at
    least a portion of the gas is recirculated.


CLS 62/310
TXT Apparatus under subclass 304 having means for recirculating a contacting
    fluid, usually the liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    309,    for an apparatus in which the gas is recirculated relative to the
    enclosure.


CLS 62/311
TXT Apparatus under subclass 304 with means for treating the material being
    cooled or for treating the contacting gas or liquid, usually a second
    cooling means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    309     and 310, for a system in which the gas or liquid is recirculated
    relative to a cooled enclosure and treated by a gas-liquid contactor and
    heat exchanger (cooler).

    332+,   for other diverse refrigeration producers.


CLS 62/312
TXT Apparatus under subclass 311 comprising an ice holder and means for
    dispersing ice melt or drip into contact with the atmosphere internally or
    externally of a cooled enclosure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    421+,   for an air cooler including a foraminous wall ice container wherein
    there may be incidental contact of air with ice melt escaping through the
    for amina.


CLS 62/313
TXT Apparatus under subclass 312 in which there is means forming a flue
    extending in a substantially vertical direction through which both air and
    ice-melt pass while in contact with each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    420+,   wherein such passages may be present but there is no means
    enhancing gas-melt contact.


CLS 62/314
TXT Apparatus under subclass 304 having gas forcing means for directing the gas
    in a desired flow path relative to the gas-liquid contacting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305,    for similar structure forcing or directing gas over a heat rejector
    of a refrigeration producer.

    309,    for similar structure including recirculation of the gas.


CLS 62/315
TXT Apparatus under subclass 304 having a porous wall liquid confining
    container or flow line, e.g., ollas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 31+ for a container
    wherein the evaporated vapor contacts material within the container.


CLS 62/316
TXT Apparatus under subclass 304 comprising a porous cover member for an
    impervious wall of a container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315,    for a porous wall liquid container or flow line.


CLS 62/317
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having a filter or gravitational
    separator for fluid cooled by refrigeration means, e.g., a filter for
    brine, ice-melt, or cooled fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123+,   for means separating a constituent from a mixture of two or more
    substances by cooling.

    271,    for means contacting atmosphere with sorbent means.

    304+,   for a separation-clarifier and gas-liquid contact type cooling
    means.

    474+,   for a purifier for refrigerant flowing in a refrigeration producer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 544+ for fluid handling of general
    application with separating means.


CLS 62/318
TXT Apparatus under subclass 317 wherein the fluid is a liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     for congelation processes involving filtering or gravitational
    separation.

    272+,   for atmospheric condensate handling means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclass, for
    processes and apparatus for separating liquids of more general utility.


CLS 62/319
TXT Apparatus under subclass 318 in which the liquid is prevented from
    contacting the coolant or from contacting a material (e.g., ice melt) which
    has served as a coolant.


CLS 62/320
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means dividing a solid
    congealed mass into a number of smaller solid pieces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    340+,   particularly subclasses 345+ and 353 for a congealed product maker
    with a product remover, which remover may incidentally cause disintegration
    of the removed product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 136+ and 140 for hand manipulable means to form
    ice cubes from an ice block, and subclasses 164.5+ for an ice pick.

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 18.1+ for means to score a
    block of ice, especially subclass 45 for a machine with plural scrubbing
    means.

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclass, especially subclasses 879+ for
    scoring and 170 for a heated cutting tool and saws of general utility.

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclasses for an electric heater
    which may be used to sever ice blocks.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate subclass
    for a comminutor of more general application and see the reference to Class
    62 under SEARCH CLASS in section 5 of the class definition of Class 241.


CLS 62/321
TXT Apparatus under subclass 320 including means for utilizing the subdivided
    product, e.g., in an ice cream freezer or railway car.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate subclass,
    particularly subclass 100 for a comminutor and receiver of general utility.


CLS 62/322
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which in addition to cooling or
    refrigeration apparatus and means auxiliary to its operation, e.g.,
    agitator, conveyor, or coolant circulator, there is other distinct
    apparatus for performing a nonrefrigeration treating operation on the
    product cooled or product to be cooled, e.g., crushing, wrapping,
    compressing, which cooling and other apparatus is arranged for sequential
    operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for cooling processes involving packaging.

    62,     for article treating processes.

    123+    and 532+, for subject matter involving cooling and thawing a frozen
    constituent.

    317+,   for separating-clarifying means for treating an internal fluid
    combined with cooling apparatus.


CLS 62/323.1
TXT WITH INTERNAL-COMBUSTION ENGINE:

    Apparatus under the class definition including an internal-combustion
    engine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for subject matter wherein a refrigerant is utilized as a fuel.

    239+,   for vehicle feature combinations and see the notes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 41.19 for an
    internal-combustion engine cooled by a refrigeration cycle.


CLS 62/323.2
TXT With cooling apparatus other than gas compressor:

    Apparatus under subclass 323.1 in which there is provided a refrigeration
    system having a working fluid cycle not requiring the use of a gas
    compressor.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are sorption and thermoelectric systems, but
    not included are Stirling cycle, jet pump, and air cycle systems.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101+,   238.3 and 476+, for sorption systems.

    235.1,  for a thermoelectric cycle in which solar energy is used.

    324.2,  for similar systems having a reversing mode or operation.


CLS 62/323.3
TXT With electric motor drive:

    Apparatus under subclass 323.1 in which at least one refrigerant compressor
    is driven at least part of the time by an electrically energized motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228.2,  for automatic control of compressor drive motors.

    236,    for alternate compressor drives.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    specific motor controls.


CLS 62/323.4
TXT With clutch or variable speed transmission controlling compressor drive:

    Apparatus under subclass 323.1 in which drive means to operate a
    refrigerant compressor comprises either (a) a drive engaging or disengaging
    means, or (b) a drive speed varying means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    for automatic control responsive to vehicle body motion, e.g., the
    compressor is declutched at low engine speeds.

    228.2,  for automatic speed control of a compressor drive.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, for clutch details.

    417,    Pumps, appropriate subclasses for pumps of general utility, and
    especially subclass 364 for pumps driven by an internal combustion motor.


CLS 62/324.1
TXT REVERSIBLE, I.E., HEAT PUMP:

    Apparatus under the class definition in which there is means to reverse
    flow through a refrigeration cycle or parts thereof so as to reverse the
    functions of the heat absorbing or rejecting means, or there is means to
    change the flow direction of an external fluid (air) so that it may be
    selectively heated or cooled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80+,    for processes of defrosting.

    154,    for automatic control of defrosting.

    160,    for reversible heat pump with automatic control.

    238.1+, for related combinations wherein the rejected heat may be utilized
    in a disparate apparatus, e.g., hot water producer.

    260,    for a refrigerator including subterranean features.

    278,    for reversible heat pump acting to remove atmosphere condensate,
    e.g., defrost.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 62 for combined heating and cooling by a
    modifiable refrigerating system.


CLS 62/324.2
TXT With cooling apparatus other than gas compressor:

    Apparatus under subclass 324.1 in which there is provided a refrigeration
    system having a working fluid cycle not requiring the use of a gas
    compressor.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are sorption and thermoelectric systems, but
    not included are Stirling cycle, jet pump, and air cycle systems.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101+,   238.3 and 476+, for sorption systems.

    235.1,  for a thermoelectric cycle in which solar energy is used.

    323.2,  for similar systems associated with an internal-combustion engine.


CLS 62/324.3
TXT With product treatment:

    Apparatus under subclass 324.1 in which a solid or liquid product is
    subjected to heating and/or cooling by a refrigeration system, e.g.,
    drying, freeze separation, congelation, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66+     and 340+, for congelation.

    123+,   for apparatus of freeze separation.

    532+,   for processes of freeze separation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses.


CLS 62/324.4
TXT With refrigerant collection and intermittent discharge:

    Apparatus under subclass 324.1 in which means is provided for temporarily
    capturing part of the refrigerating fluid and subsequently releasing of it
    at recurring intervals discrete portions back into the refrigeration system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174,    for automatic control of trapping and of discharging refrigerant
    batches.


CLS 62/324.5
TXT With atmospheric condensate removal or prevention:

    Apparatus under subclass 324.1 in which there is provided structure to
    either eradicate or prohibit the deposition of moisture condensed from the
    atmosphere on a heat absorbing surface of a refrigeration system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272+,   for details of atmospheric condensate preventing or handling.


CLS 62/324.6
TXT With flow control or compressor details:

    Apparatus under subclass 324.1 wherein significance is attributable to
    particular fluid regulation or compressor structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    511,    for fluid restrictors.

    528,    for adjustable controllers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 625.43 for reversing valve details.

    417,    Pumps, appropriate subclasses for compressor details.


CLS 62/325
TXT Apparatus under subclass 324 in which the direction of flow of an external
    fluid can be reversed relative to the heat absorbing and rejecting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    428,    for a refrigeration producer means circulating gas over the heat
    rejector.


CLS 62/326
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means whereby mode or
    condition of operation or use can be changed by shifting or rearranging all
    or some of the parts in a different relationship to each other or by
    addition or omission of a part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286,    for an adjustable position or selectively usable retainer or a flow
    director for atmospheric condensate.

    298+,   for apparatus having means aiding in assembling, or disassembling.

    324+,   for a reversible cycle machine.


CLS 62/327
TXT Apparatus under subclass 326 in which the ice storage capacity of an ice
    bunker can be readily increased or decreased.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 369 for a freight car with a load
    support, subclass 375 for floor structure, or subclass 376 for removable
    partitions.


CLS 62/328
TXT Apparatus under subclass 327 in which an ice bunker wall is movable to a
    stored position against the end wall, side wall or ceiling of the cooled
    enclosure.


CLS 62/329
TXT Apparatus under subclass 326 in which a cooled enclosure is provided with a
    partition so mounted that it may be removed, relocated, or shifted to a
    nonplural compartment forming position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327,    for a storable or variable capacity ice bunker.

    465+,   for a particular internal element support, e.g., and adjustable
    foraminous shelf.


CLS 62/330
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means to manufacture a
    refrigerant or coolant as a removable and disposable product and including
    means utilizing the manufactured disposable product as a refrigerant or
    coolant, e.g., brine and ice mixture making and space cooler.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76,     for related processes.

    321,    for an ice maker and comminutor and means utilizing the product.

    340+,   for ice making apparatus, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 261+ for solution making apparatus,
    e.g., brine, etc.


CLS 62/331
TXT Apparatus under the class definition not provided for above comprising a
    device in addition to or combined with refrigerator structure, having a
    function other than refrigeration or serving to perfect such apparatus for
    its intended primary purpose.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, appropriate subclass for a heat covering with treatment
    means there provided for.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 58 for a combined heating and cooling
    system. See the statement under Search Class 62 in the definition of
    subclass 58 of Class 165 for a statement of the line between Classes 62 and
    165 as to this subject matter.


CLS 62/332
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having (1) two or more change of
    material phase producing closed circuits each having a different manner of
    operation, e.g., a primary compressor-condenser-expander circuit combined
    with a secondary condenser-evaporator circuit; a still-condenser-expander
    circuit combined with a compressor-condenser-expander-circuit, (2) change
    of phase closed circuits cooling one treating zone combined with cooling
    means using a solid or liquid which by change of phase cools another
    treating zone, or  (3) apparatus having confining means each supporting or
    confining refrigerants or coolants of different kinds, e.g., water, ice and
    dry ice.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     for processes involving exchange of heat between plural systems.

    175,    for automatic control of diverse, cascade or compound systems.

    311+,   for gas and liquid contact cooling means combined with other
    cooling means.

    335,    for a plural paired system and see the Notes thereto.


CLS 62/333
TXT Apparatus under subclass 332 having a primary (energy source circuit)
    refrigeration producing means which includes a flow line for a phase
    changing refrigerant and a secondary refrigeration producing means
    confining a phase changing refrigerant, said secondary system including
    only heat rejecting and absorbing parts and/or a restrictor, said primary
    and secondary means being isolated from and having at least one part of
    each in heat exchanging relationship with another.


CLS 62/334
TXT Apparatus under subclass 333 in which the evaporator of the secondary
    dependent circuit is in heat exchange relationship with the inner liner of
    a storage compartment, e.g., those which form a so-called two zone cold
    wall type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    395,    for an evaporator between insulation and a cooled liquid container.

    438,    for an intermediate fluid container forming a cooled storage
    compartment.

    451,    for a cooled compartment in which the coolant holding or guiding
    means is within a hollow wall.


CLS 62/335
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which there are multiples of two or
    more diverse function elements of a refrigeration producing system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     for processes involving exchange of heat between plural systems.

    144+,   for duplicate automatically controlled intermittently and
    alternately operation sorption systems.

    332+,   for diverse refrigeration systems and see the Notes thereto.

    337+,   for a heat exchanger between a space cooler and an isolated
    material handler.

    467+,   particularly subclasses 504 or 513, for a refrigeration system
    which may include two or more similar function elements, e.g., plural
    evaporators.


CLS 62/336
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which there are material handlers
    of diverse types.


CLS 62/337
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means forming a first cooling
    compartment for material combined with a second cooling compartment for
    second material, said second compartment being isolated from said first
    compartment and having (1) means for treating the second material other
    than by cooling, or (2) means removing the second material from its
    compartment.

    (1)     Note.  The heating or moving means may be an agitator, a dispenser,
    blower, pump or conveyor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    336,    for material handling means of diverse types.


CLS 62/338
TXT Apparatus under subclass 337 in which the material handling means is a
    liquid container or flow line within the article cooling compartment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    389+,   for a withdrawable liquid cooler.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 146 for a dispenser with heating or cooling
    means of general application, and subclasses 173+ for fluid dispensing
    means with a casing or support.


CLS 62/339
TXT Apparatus under subclass 338 in which the cooled liquid container has an
    inlet flow line connected to an external source, e.g., city water supply.


CLS 62/340
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means to shape or retain
    the shape of material being congealed, congealing means with means to
    release material congealed thereon, or means to modify the consistency of
    material being congealed by the working thereof (e.g., whipping) during
    congelation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66+,    for related processes.

    123+,   for a separator for a solidified constituent of a liquid mixture.

    135+,   for product responsive means to produce a congealed product.

    307,    for means to inject a gas combined with an ice or ice cream maker.

    317+,   for a separator-clarifier combined with a congealed product maker.

    320+,   for a comminutor combined with a congealed product maker.

    322,    for a disparate treater serially arranged with product cooling
    means.

    324+,   for a reversible heat pump which may thaw a product mold.

    373+,   for liquid contacting a distinct removable receptacle, e.g., ice
    can.

    440+,   for means for cooling a mere container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 140 for hand manipulable cutting means to form
    ice cubes from an ice block, and subclass 164.5 for an ice pick.

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses for devices for cutting ice blocks
    through thicknesswise.

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 69+ and 129+ for ice cube trays not
    combined with means to congeal the fluent material to form the ice cube.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 24+
    for a device for working naturally occurring ice in situ, and including
    machines and cutters to form blocks of ice for recovery.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    appropriate subclasses for frozen food products and processes of preparing
    same.


CLS 62/341
TXT Apparatus under subclass 340 including means compressing an article, e.g.,
    food package, during the freezing thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for processes involving packaging.

    75,     for sequential stage congelation   processes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclass for pressing processes and apparatus
    of general application.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    80 for laminating processes involving a step of refrigeration or freezing
    and subclass 498 for laminating devices with article cooling means.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    for shaping or molding processes within the class definition which may
    include the mere compacting of ice.  Subclass 28 therein includes the step
    of cooling and/or freezing to a temperature of zero oC and subclasses 109+
    pertains to forming of articles by uniting of discrete bulk assembled
    particles.  Subclasses 237 and 348 include cooling steps.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    appropriate subclasses for molding apparatus, per se, for shaping
    particulate ice or dry ice.


CLS 62/342
TXT Apparatus under subclass 340 including means to modify the consistency of a
    material being frozen, e.g., beater.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8+,     for a solidified gas producer or former.

    66+,    for related processes.

    135+,   for control means responsive to congelation product condition.

    136,    for change of consistency sensing.

    307+,   for freezing means combined with a submerged gas inlet.

    337,    for a freezer and agitator combined with a storage compartment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 94 for a heat exchanger of general
    application having a scraper removing a product and subclass 109.1 for one
    having a stirrer or agitator.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 69+ and 241+ for a beater type agitator.


CLS 62/343
TXT Apparatus under subclass 342 including blades having diverse structure,
    e.g., beater and scraper.


CLS 62/344
TXT Apparatus under subclass 340 including product receiving and storing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     for processes involving packaging.

    379,    for solid refrigerant handling.

    529,    for refrigerant handling or storing, per se.


CLS 62/345
TXT Apparatus under subclass 340 including means for movably supporting a
    freezing surface during freezing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    341,    for a press type moving freezing surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 256.5 for a
    moving surface scraper wiper or brush where the surface means is of general
    application.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 86+ for a movable heat exchange surface
    not specialized by structure to refrigeration.


CLS 62/346
TXT Apparatus under subclass 345 wherein the freezing surface is a rotating
    drum.


CLS 62/347
TXT Apparatus under subclass 340 including means to project, e.g., spray, raw
    material onto a freezing surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for related processes.

    268+,   for a vacuumized chamber type cooler in which the material cooled
    may be sprayed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclasses 3+ for a spray type
    concentrating evaporator.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses
    for spraying means, per se.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 6+ particulate material maker comprising a liquid comminutor
    (e.g., spray, etc.) and means providing a congealing area.


CLS 62/348
TXT Apparatus under subclass 340 including means to cool the raw material prior
    to feeding it to the congelation product producer or means to remove the
    material being treated and return it back to the congelation means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for related processes.


CLS 62/349
TXT Apparatus under subclass 340 including means to release the product by
    heating an adhering surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73,     for related processes.

    275+,   for preventing atmospheric condensate by an external heater.

    277+,   for preventing or removing atmospheric condensate by a
    refrigeration producer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 421 for a rotary cradle for
    dumping an ice block from an ice can, the cradle usually being provided
    with means to heat the can for releasing the ice block therefrom.


CLS 62/350
TXT Apparatus under subclass 349 attached to a hand manipulable mold, e.g.,
    tray and grid ice cube former.


CLS 62/351
TXT Apparatus under subclass 349 including an electrical heating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclasses for an electrical heater
    of more general utility.


CLS 62/352
TXT Apparatus under subclass 349 including means utilizing a refrigerant as a
    heating means by-passing a condenser between the compressor and evaporator
    or comprising a heated coolant circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277+,   for similar structure utilized to prevent or remove atmospheric
    condensate from a heat absorbing surface.

    324,    for a reversible cycle heat.


CLS 62/353
TXT Apparatus under subclass 340 including means absorbing heat from a surface
    with means for removing a congealed product from said surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    345+,   for moving surface congealing means often provided with a product
    remover, and see the Notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 94 for a heat exchanger of general
    application provided with a scraper.


CLS 62/354
TXT Apparatus under subclass 353 wherein the product is removed by blade means
    moving adjacent the freezing surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284,    for similar apparatus for preventing or removing atmospheric
    condensate from a heat absorbing member.


CLS 62/356
TXT Apparatus under subclass 340 provided with means for cooling the mold,
    e.g., an ice cream mold in a cold brine tank.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300+,   for assembly and disassembly means releasing a mold from its
    support.

    307+,   for a cooled tank with means to inject air.

    440+,   for a cooled enclosure of more general application.


CLS 62/371
TXT Apparatus under the class definition which forms a unit and comprises a
    portable container completely enclosing a commodity and/or coolant, the
    arrangement being such that the commodity must be removed to place or
    remove the coolant or vice versa or the unit must be destroyed as such when
    opened.

    (1)     Note.  The commodity may be a coolant as in the case of packaged
    dry ice.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for a product of refrigeration.

    60,     for processes including forming a package.

    440+,   particularly subclass 457, for a refrigerator forming an enclosure
    even though portable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 56+ for a
    cooled minnow bucket.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, especially subclasses 7+ and 36+ for a
    compartmented crate of general utility.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 415+ for a spaced wall or jacketed
    container.


CLS 62/372
TXT Apparatus under subclass 371 in which the commodity is cooled by a solid
    coolant and the commodity and coolant or their containers serve to position
    each other.


CLS 62/373
TXT Apparatus under the class definition for directing, controlling or handling
    a liquid coolant so as to cause it to contact a discrete freely removable
    commodity the bottom of which merely rests on support means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for related processes.

    304+,   for a material cooler having means promoting contact of liquid with
    the atmosphere.

    430+,   for an enclosure in which there is a tank provided with means
    circulating an intermediate fluid into contact with the exterior of the
    tank.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclass, for
    apparatus contacting a liquid of general application.  Class 62 takes
    cooling processes and apparatus specialized to refrigeration, e.g.,
    particular refrigeration producing means or specific heat transfer
    structure.


CLS 62/374
TXT Apparatus under subclass 373 including means to transport or convey the
    article through a refrigeration zone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    336,    337, 340+, 377, and 378+, for other article handling combinations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclass,
    particularly subclasses 61+ and 124+ for an article and liquid contact
    device with an article conveyor of more general application.


CLS 62/375
TXT Apparatus under subclass 374 in which the liquid coolant is recirculated in
    a determined path.


CLS 62/376
TXT Apparatus under subclass 373 in which the liquid coolant is recirculated in
    a determined path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310,    for a gas-liquid contacting cooler with liquid recirculating means.

    375,    for article conveying or transporting with liquid recirculating
    means.


CLS 62/377
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including an article holder mounted on
    a pivoted closure or a partition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266,    for similar structure wherein there is air blocking means.


CLS 62/378
TXT Apparatus under the class definition provided with means for guiding a
    freely supported discrete article to be cooled or a solid coolant with
    respect to treating zone, e.g., conveyor, dispenser, rack, track, guideway,
    or chute.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250,    for a display cabinet with an article handler.

    266,    for means providing access to a compartment and blocking air flow.

    298,    for assembling and disassembling means.

    340+,   for a congealed product maker which may include a product conveyor.

    374+,   for a similar organization with liquid contacting the article.

    440+,   for a refrigerated enclosure provided with an article support,
    e.g., shelf.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclass 388 for package seam coolers.

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    appropriate subclass for elevator structure.

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, appropriate subclass for conveyor
    structure.

    214,    Material or Article Handling, appropriate subclass, particularly
    subclass 16, for material handling of more general application.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 150 for article dispensing apparatus
    with cooling or heating, of more general application.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 294+ for a cabinet with a
    movable component, e.g., drawer, tray or pivoted shelf.


CLS 62/379
TXT Apparatus under subclass 378 in which the article guided or conveyed is a
    solidified refrigerant, e.g., CO2 or water ice.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    529+,   for a refrigerant cooler or container.


CLS 62/380
TXT Apparatus under subclass 378 provided with a continuous conveyor, e.g.,
    belt or chain.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    345+,   for endless conveyor means associated with means producing a shaped
    congealed product.


CLS 62/381
TXT Apparatus under subclass 378 mounted in such a manner that it is rotatable
    about a fixed axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    346,    for a rotary drum material congealer.


CLS 62/382
TXT Apparatus under subclass 378 including a drawer, tray or other component
    movable in a horizontal direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302,    for repair or assembly means sliding or rolling on guide means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 330.1+ for a cabinet with
    a horizontally movable component, e.g., drawer.


CLS 62/383
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including (1) a heat transmitting
    means, e.g., plate, (2) insulation means, or (3) heat absorbing means;
    which means are movable to vary the heat transmission between a cooling
    source and a cooled space, or (4) means to vary the flow of a fluid past a
    heat transmitting panel mounted in a contact with insulation means so as to
    vary heat transmission through the panel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    283,    for removable moisture condensing means distinct from a principal
    heat absorber.


CLS 62/384
TXT Apparatus under the class definition specific to the use of solidified gas,
     e.g., CO2, for cooling an enclosed space or having means to use the
    cooling effect in the treatment of fluid or solid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165+,   for automatic control of means utilizing solidified gas.

    601+,   for manufacturing of solidified gas.


CLS 62/385
TXT Apparatus under subclass 384 including means for either (1) discharging
    sublimed  CO2 into insulation or (2) circulating said gas within a hollow
    wall structure which is sealed except for a sublimed gas inlet and outlet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273,    for a similar arrangement serving to prevent condensation upon
    insulation.


CLS 62/386
TXT Apparatus under subclass 384 including means for guiding in a path a liquid
    being cooled for external use, the liquid remaining as such during the
    cooling operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98+,    for related processes.

    389+,   for an otherwise cooled withdrawable liquid cooler.


CLS 62/387
TXT Apparatus under subclass 384 comprising means for regulating, directing,
    forcing or controlling the flow of an external gas in a predetermined flow
    path relative to a cooling means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404+,   for any otherwise cooled gas circulating or directing means.


CLS 62/388
TXT Apparatus under subclass 384 constructed and arranged to disperse into a
    storage enclosure sublimed gas from a solid gas compartment or holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     for processes including providing a special atmosphere for a
    refrigerator.


CLS 62/389
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means for guiding in a path
    a liquid being cooled for external use, the liquid remaining as such during
    the cooling operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98+,    for related processes.

    177+,   for automatic control of external fluid.

    294,    for a sealed container having a cutter or punch to release the
    container contents.

    304+,   particularly subclass 306 for a liquid dispenser with gas-liquid
    contact means.

    318+,   for a separating-clarifier for cooled withdrawable liquid.

    336,    for material handlers of diverse types.

    337+,   particularly subclass 338 for a liquid container or flow line
    within a storage enclosure.

    373+,   for a liquid contacting distinct article type of cooler.

    386,    for a withdrawable liquid cooler specific to use of solidified gas.

    430,    for a cooler which may use a flowing liquid as an intermediate heat
    exchanging medium.

    457.1+, for a portable receptacle type cooler of general and specific
    utility.

    530,    for an envelope type container for a liquid which may be refrozen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclass, particularly subclass 146 for
    dispensing means of more general application.


CLS 62/390
TXT Apparatus under subclass 389 in which there are plural liquid outlets or
    sources, e.g., dispensing faucets or barrels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 561+ particularly subclasses 594+ and
    602+, for a fluid distribution system of general application.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 129+ for plural source dispensers of general
    application.


CLS 62/391
TXT Apparatus under subclass 389 in which there is a receiver for withdrawn
    liquid, e.g., flows in heat exchange relationship with the incoming liquid
    or the waste liquid or the waste liquid is collected in an open container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 312+ for fluid handling of general
    utility with a drip or waste receiver.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 108+ for a dispenser with a drip or a waste
    receiver.


CLS 62/392
TXT Apparatus under subclass 389 including an agitator for the liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    342+,   for means for working (agitating) congealing material.

    434     and 435, for means agitating an intermediate heat exchanging liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 109.1 for a heat exchanger of general
    application with an agitator.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 144+ for an agitating device with cooling
    means.


CLS 62/393
TXT Apparatus under subclass 389 including (1) means confining the withdrawable
    liquid, (2) means confining a coolant, and (3) means confining a fluid
    which acts to transfer heat between means (1) and (2).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    430+,   for intermediate fluid heat exchanging combinations.


CLS 62/394
TXT Apparatus under subclass 389 in which a refrigerant evaporator is in heat
    exchange relationship with a liquid flow line, liquid container, or other
    liquid storage means.


CLS 62/395
TXT Apparatus under subclass 394 in which the refrigerant evaporator is located
    between the cooled liquid container or flow line and insulation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    451,    for a coolant container-enclosure relationship.


CLS 62/396
TXT Apparatus under subclass 389 in which the flow path is in indirect heat
    exchange relationship with a coolant, e.g., ice or liquid.


CLS 62/397
TXT Apparatus under subclass 396 in which the container for the liquid to be
    cooled is of the barometric feed type, i.e., a container in which
    atmospheric pressure is utilized for maintaining a liquid within the
    container against its hydrostatic head.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 453 for a barometric feed device of
    general application and see the Notes thereto.


CLS 62/398
TXT Apparatus under subclass 396 in which means forming the flow path is
    arranged to support solid coolant material.


CLS 62/399
TXT Apparatus under subclass 396 comprising a helical or spiral coil.


CLS 62/400
TXT Apparatus under subclass 396 in which the flow path is in nested concentric
    relationship with an ice holder.


CLS 62/401
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which there are means for
    compressing, cooling, and expanding gas which remains throughout in a
    gaseous state.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86+,    for related processes.

    172,    for automatic control of related apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 121+ for a heat exchanging and air pump
    combination of general application.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 83+ for rotary
    expansible chamber devices having heat exchange means.


CLS 62/402
TXT Apparatus under subclass 401 in which the expanding air actuates a motor to
    produce work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38+,    for related liquefied gas product producing apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, appropriate subclass for a
    turbine of general utility.


CLS 62/403
TXT Apparatus under subclass 402 in which the motor includes a reciprocating
    element, e.g., piston.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for a "Stirling" cycle machine.


CLS 62/404
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means for forcing or
    directing gas in a desired flow path relative to cooling means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89+,    for processes involving circulation of cooled gas.

    186+,   for automatic control of air circulation.

    255+,   for a cooled display device having air controlling or directing
    means.

    304+,   particularly subclass 314 for a gas-liquid contact material cooler
    often involving air circulation.

    336,    for a cooled material handler of diverse types in which one of the
    materials may be air.

    337,    for a cooled article compartment and an isolated material (air)
    handler.

    387,    for a cooler peculiar to solidified gas (CO2) and having an
    external gas circulator or director.


CLS 62/405
TXT Apparatus under subclass 404 including a storage compartment in indirect
    heat transfer relationship with the cooled gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246+,   particularly subclass 253 for a hollow jacket display cabinet.

    406,    for indirect liquid or holdover means cooling a gas.

    417,    for a cabinet with air circulating means and plural cooled storage
    compartment separated by an imperforate wall.


CLS 62/406
TXT Apparatus under subclass 404 including an enclosure sealed off from both
    the primary cooling means and from the gas to be cooled, such enclosure
    containing a secondary heat transfer medium and in which there is structure
    directing the gas over or through the secondary means enclosing the heat
    transfer medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    393,    for a withdrawable liquid with intermediate heat transfer.


CLS 62/407
TXT Apparatus under subclass 404 including means for directing the cooled gas
    relative to the interior of an enclosure to be cooled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 104.18 and 104.22+ for a heat exchanger
    with an impeller circulating an intermediate enclosed body of fluid.

    454,    Ventilation, appropriate subclasses for a ventilated enclosure of
    general application.


CLS 62/408
TXT Apparatus under subclass 407 including adjustable means for varying the
    flow of gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    187,    for automatic control of a damper between compartment.

    265+,   for compartment access closure means operating a gas flow
    controller.


CLS 62/409
TXT Apparatus under subclass 408 controlling an opening to the exterior of the
    enclosure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    454,    Ventilation, particularly subclasses 322+ and 333+ for building
    ventilating of general application including an adjustable valve on an air
    inlet.


CLS 62/410
TXT Apparatus under subclass 407 including a port for the gas being cooled
    opening to the ambient atmosphere exteriorly of the enclosure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    409,    for similar structure with a variable flow controller for the gas.


CLS 62/411
TXT Apparatus under subclass 410 including additional means for causing gas
    flow, e.g., blower, air scoop or heating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    414,    419 and 426+, for other combinations including gas forcing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    454,    Ventilation, appropriate subclasses for a building having a
    ventilation air pump of general application.


CLS 62/412
TXT Apparatus under subclass 410 including an inlet and an outlet port for the
    atmosphere exteriorly of the cooled enclosure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 237+ for building ventilation of general
    application including an inlet and outlet.


CLS 62/413
TXT Apparatus under subclass 407 including combining and dividing separate
    circulating gas streams at a common verging area.

    (1)     Note.  Many of these patents are for freight cars with air cooling
    ice bunkers at opposed ends.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255+,   for a display cabinet which may include means causing verging air
    flow.


CLS 62/414
TXT Apparatus under subclass 413 including powered means causing flow of a gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    411,    for similar structure with an exterior port.


CLS 62/415
TXT Apparatus under subclass 413 including a cooler unit in each of a plurality
    of the separate gas streams.


CLS 62/416
TXT Apparatus under subclass 415 placed above a storage space and adjacent
    opposed walls of a cooled enclosure.


CLS 62/417
TXT Apparatus under subclass 407 including a dividing wall or partition having
    substantial imperforate areas forming a plurality of cooled compartments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    441+,   for a cooled enclosure with plural compartments of more general
    utility.


CLS 62/418
TXT Apparatus under subclass 407 including passage means connecting the cooling
    means and a gas distributing or plenum chamber at least one wall of which
    is foraminous.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    421+,   for an enclosure with gas circulating means and a foraminous ice
    container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 296+ for an air distributor including a
    foraminous wall.


CLS 62/419
TXT Apparatus under subclass 407 including a mechanical gas forcing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    314+,   for similar structure including a gas liquid contactor.

    411,    for gas flow forcing means relative to a ventilating port.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 121+ for a fan forcing air through a heat
    exchanger not specialized to refrigeration.


CLS 62/420
TXT Apparatus under subclass 407, wherein the gas is directed in heat exchange
    relationship with container means holding ice.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327+,   for an ice bunker wall movable to convert to an uncooled storage
    space, e.g., iced car to ordinary freight car.


CLS 62/421
TXT Apparatus under subclass 420, wherein the ice holding means includes a
    foraminous wall or bottom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    418,    for a foraminous gas flow distributor connected by passage means to
    cooling means.


CLS 62/422
TXT Apparatus under subclass 421, including ice-melt collecting means over a
    dry storage chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    459+,   for a mere cooled enclosure involving ice melt collection,
    distribution or use.


CLS 62/423
TXT Apparatus under subclass 422, having a dry storage chamber in side by side
    relationship with the ice holding means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    415+,   for similar structure having at least two spaced cooling units,
    e.g., ice bunkers.


CLS 62/424
TXT Apparatus under subclass 420, including means forming a gas flow passage
    beneath the ice holding means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    421+,   for a melt collector providing a gas flow passage beneath a
    foraminous wall container.


CLS 62/425
TXT Apparatus under subclass 404, in which the gas passes in direct contact
    with the cooling means (ice) in its compartment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    387,    for means having features specific to the use of solidified gas.


CLS 62/426
TXT Apparatus under subclass 404, including gas forcing means structurally
    related to the cooling means for moving the air thereover, e.g.,
    self-contained air circulating and cooling units.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272+,   particularly subclass 277 for a similar unit having atmospheric
    condensate handling means.

    314,    for similar structure including a gas liquid contactor.

    411,    for a blower related to a ventilation part of a cooled enclosure.

    414,    for similar structure relative to verging streams and a cooled
    enclosure.

    419,    for gas forcing means relative to a cooled enclosure.


CLS 62/427
TXT Apparatus under subclass 426 including an inlet for a stream of gas to be
    cooled and an inlet for adding an additional stream to the former stream,
    e.g., an air conditioning unit mixing a cooled stream of air with a stream
    of air from the cooled enclosure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    for related processes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 237+ for a related ventilation device of
    general utility.


CLS 62/428
TXT Apparatus under subclass 426 wherein the gas is directed over a heat
    rejecting element of a refrigeration system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90,     for processes of circulating external gas with reheating.

    173,    for automatic control of external fluid reheating.

    272+,   for the handling of atmospheric condensate on a heat absorber.

    305,    for gas-liquid contact means cooling a heat rejecter.

    427,    for similar structure arranged for admitting fresh and recirculated
    air.

    505     and 506, for a refrigeration producer with a heat rejecting element
    cooling feature.


CLS 62/429
TXT Apparatus under subclass 428, including a plurality of blowers driven by
    common driving means.


CLS 62/430
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including (1) a solid heat holdover
    member or (2) means forming a compartment which contains a substance acting
    as an indirect heat transferring medium or reserve coolant, mounted on or
    forming part of a refrigeration producer or forming part of the structure
    of a cooled enclosure, e.g., storage compartment wall, and acting to
    transfer heat to a heat absorber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59,     for processes of accumulating holdover ice in situ.

    99,     for processes of cooling a fluid using indirect heat transfer fluid.

    185,    for automatic control of an intermediate heat transfer medium.

    356,    for mold means with an intermediate heat transfer medium.

    393,    for means for cooling withdrawable liquid including an intermediate
    heat transfer medium.

    406,    for an air cooler with an air passage over or through an indirect
    heat transfer container or holdover.

    457.1,  for a portable receptacle confining a coolant.

    530,    for an envelope confining a coolant.


CLS 62/431
TXT Apparatus under subclass 430 including means forming a plurality of
    side-by-side or superimposed storage compartments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    340+,   for means having congealed product making features.

    441+,   for cooled enclosure with plural compartments.


CLS 62/432
TXT Apparatus under subclass 431, including features arranged to maintain
    different temperatures in the various storage compartments, e.g., by (1)
    varying the flow of indirect fluid surrounding the compartments, (2)
    varying the quantities of indirect fluid surrounding the compartments or,
    (3) a disparate arrangement of the primary coolant elements in the indirect
    fluid or holdover.


CLS 62/433
TXT Apparatus under subclass 431 including a top access opening for each
    compartment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    458,    for an enclosure having an open access cooled surface.


CLS 62/434
TXT Apparatus under subclass 430 including flow line connection to a heat
    exchanger in or forming the compartment to be cooled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    435,    for an enclosure wherein the indirect fluid surrounding a
    compartment is agitated.


CLS 62/435
TXT Apparatus under subclass 430 including a pump or agitator means for the
    indirect fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    342+,   for congealed product making and agitating.

    392+,   for a withdrawable liquid cooler and agitator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 104.18 and 104.22+ for a heat exchanger
    of general application having an intermediate exchanger fluid circulated by
    a mechanical impeller.

    366,    Agitating, appropriate subclass for an agitator of more general
    utility.


CLS 62/436
TXT Apparatus under subclass 430 including distinct sections or casings which
    are connected to each other by a flow line for either the coolant or the
    indirect fluid.


CLS 62/437
TXT Apparatus under subclass 430 including a normally nonliquid heat
    accumulator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 400 for a heat accumulator there
    provided for and see the Notes thereto.


CLS 62/438
TXT Apparatus under subclass 430 including a shaped, cooled storage compartment
    formed by an intermediate heat transferring fluid container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    516+,   for a shaped evaporator, per se.


CLS 62/439
TXT Apparatus under subclass 430 including a unitary coolant confining flow
    line and jacket means surrounding it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    394+,   for a withdrawable liquid cooler having an evaporator surrounding
    or within a container.


CLS 62/440
TXT Apparatus under the class definition supported relative to means forming an
    enclosure.

    (1)     Note.  The cooled enclosure may be open to the atmosphere and
    include only means forming a boundary for a cooled surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239+,   for a vehicle feature.

    246+,   for an enclosure with a display feature.

    259+,   for a structural installation.

    265+,   for a compartment access closure combined with air blocking means.

    272+,   for an enclosure with means preventing or handling atmospheric
    condensate.

    297+,   for a cooled enclosure with an external support.

    309,    for gas-liquid contact material cooling means and means circulating
    gas relative to a cooled enclosure.

    371+,   for a portable, commodity-containing receptacle.

    407+,   for enclosures with means directing cooled gas relative to it.

    430+,   for a cooled enclosure with indirect heat transfer or holder means.

    516+,   for an evaporator which in itself forms a cooled enclosure.

    529+,   for a refrigerant or coolant storer or handler, e.g., ice storing
    enclosure specialized to such use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses for the
    structure, per se, which may be defined as forming a refrigerated space,
    particularly subclasses 380+, 404.1+, 408+, and 479+.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 415+ for a spaced wall metallic container.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclasses 31+ for a cabinet with gas or vapor treatment, subclass 116 for
    a refrigerated show case, and subclass 236 for a cabinet with heat exchange
    means and see the Note thereto.


CLS 62/441
TXT Apparatus under subclass 440 including means dividing the enclosure into
    plural compartments, each of which is cooled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252+,   for plural display compartments.

    337+,   for a cooled storage compartment and material handler.

    417,    for plural compartments with a gas director.


CLS 62/442
TXT Apparatus under subclass 441 including a separate heat absorber or remover
    for each of the compartments, said heat absorbers operating in parallel.


CLS 62/443
TXT Apparatus under subclass 441 having the heat absorbing or removing element
    either serving as a partition separating plural cooled compartments or
    secured to a partition in such a manner as to lie adjacent thereto and be a
    part thereof.


CLS 62/444
TXT Apparatus under subclass 443 in which the heat absorbing element or section
    forms an integral part of an exterior wall of the cooled enclosure.


CLS 62/445
TXT Apparatus under subclass 443 including a distinct heat absorbing element or
    section spaced from the heat absorbing partition.


CLS 62/446
TXT Apparatus under subclass 443 in which the heat absorbing partition is so
    shaped as to form plural sides of a compartment, e.g., freezing and cooled
    compartments.


CLS 62/447
TXT Apparatus under subclass 441 including a separating partition having
    insulating properties.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329,    for means including a movable shelf or partition constructed for
    converting the mode of operation or use.

    383,    for an adjustable thermal member varying heat transmission, e.g.,
    movable insulating means.


CLS 62/448
TXT Apparatus under subclass 440 in which a refrigeration producer or part
    thereof is movable relative to the cooled enclosure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237,    for an ambulant cooled enclosure and separable power or cooling
    source.

    298+,   for apparatus having means for repairing, assembling or
    disassembling it.

    465+,   for particular supporting means with an enclosure, e.g., resilient
    support for shelf.


CLS 62/449
TXT Apparatus under subclass 448 in which a portion of the enclosure wall moves
    with the movable refrigeration producing part.


CLS 62/450
TXT Apparatus under subclass 449 in which the movable part has a fan for forced
    circulation of air over the condenser of the refrigeration producer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    506+,   for a compressor-condenser-evaporator refrigeration producer with
    means causing cooling fluid contact with a rejector and see the Notes
    thereto.


CLS 62/451
TXT Apparatus under subclass 440 in which the heat absorbing element is covered
    by insulating material or contained within a hollow wall forming at least
    part of a cooled enclosure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    395,    for a withdrawable liquid cooler including an evaporator between it
    and insulation.

    405,    for a jacketed enclosure with means for circulating a gas through
    it.


CLS 62/452
TXT Apparatus under subclass 440 including features rejecting or aiding in the
    rejection of heat from at least one element of a flowing refrigerant type
    refrigeration producer and/or means forming an enclosure for such elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    506,    for compressor-condenser-evaporator refrigeration producer with
    means causing cooling fluid contact with a heat rejector and see the Notes
    thereto.


CLS 62/453
TXT Apparatus under subclass 452 in which the heat rejecting element contacts
    and is supported in heat conducting relationship with a wall forming the
    exterior of the enclosure.


CLS 62/454
TXT Apparatus under subclass 452 including means to circulate air over the
    rejecting element or vent air from the heat rejecting element enclosure.


CLS 62/455
TXT Apparatus under subclass 454 including means to force air over the heat
    rejecting element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305,    for similar structure including a gas    liquid contactor.


CLS 62/456
TXT Apparatus under subclass 454 in which the heat rejecting element enclosure
    is a compartment below the cooled enclosure and there is a distinct
    vertical flue communicating with and extending upwardly therefrom.


CLS 62/457.1
TXT Portable receptacle:

    Apparatus under subclass 440, including means associated with (e.g.,
    supported by, supporting, or surrounding), or integral with, a
    transportable container (e.g., a bottle, a carrier, etc.), which means has
    feature peculiar to refrigeration or cooling the container's contents;
    e.g., a sealed nonrefillable coolant containing compartment, ice melt
    handling means, ice support means, means supported by ice, or a particular
    refrigerant, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    293,    for a hand manipulable tool which may include a coolant container
    with means for manipulating it for use as a cooling means.

    297,    for a refrigerator with external support means.

    371+,   for a portable commodity containing type package or another type of
    container.

    389+,   particularly subclasses 397 and 400 for a withdrawable liquid type
    cooler which may include a cooled liquid supplying container.

    530,    for a portable envelope type coolant container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, appropriate subclass, for glass or ceramic
    portable receptacles, particularly subclasses 12.1+ for a spaced wall and
    jacket receptacle even if the space is merely a coolant compartment.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 415+ for a container with spaced wall and
    jacket even if the jacket is merely adapted to contain a coolant.


CLS 62/457.2
TXT With holdover material:

    Apparatus under subclass 457.1 including a substance acting as an indirect
    heat transferring medium or reserve coolant, wherein the substance is
    carried by (mounted on or forming part of the structure of) the container
    (e.g., a storage compartment wall) and adapted to transfer heat to a heat
    absorber.

    (1)     Note.  "Blue ice", gel, and saline solutions are types of materials
    used as holdover materials.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    371+,   for a portable commodity containing type refrigerator, particularly
    subclass 372 for such apparatus including means to support both the
    commodity and a solid refrigerant.

    430+,   for a refrigerator having an intermediate fluid container adapted
    to transfer heat to the holdover material.

    529+,   for a portable refrigerant container, particularly subclass 530 for
    an envelope type container.


CLS 62/457.3
TXT Drinking container:

    Apparatus under subclass 457.2 including a beverage receptacle adapted for
    contact with a user's mouth; e.g., a mug, etc.


CLS 62/457.4
TXT For beverage receptacle:

    Apparatus under subclass 457.2 adapted to cool a beverage container; e.g.,
    a can of beer or soda, etc.


CLS 62/457.5
TXT For multiple receptacles:

    Apparatus under subclass 457.4 adapted to cool a unitary plurality of
    beverage containers; e.g., a six pack cooler.


CLS 62/457.6
TXT Cooled serving dish:

    Apparatus under subclass 457.1 adapted for use as a container or platter
    for serving edible products which are normally served cold, e.g., butter,
    raw shrimp, etc.


CLS 62/457.7
TXT Picnic/lunch box type cooler:

    Apparatus under subclass 457.1 wherein the container is adapted to carry
    edibles (e.g., an assortment of foods and drinks) and maintain them in a
    cold state.

    (1)     Note.  Picnic coolers and lunch boxes with cooling means are
    intended for this subclass.


CLS 62/457.8
TXT Wine server/cooler:

    Apparatus under subclass 457.1 adapted to either accommodate a container of
    wine (e.g., a bottle or a carafe) or itself hold the wine.


CLS 62/457.9
TXT Cooled by means other than ice (e.g., mechanical, electrical, absorption,
    cryogenic, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 457.1 including a refrigerating system independent
    of frozen water for cooling the container.


CLS 62/458
TXT Apparatus under subclass 440 including an open access surface and cooling
    means therefor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235,    for a rink.

    246+,   particularly subclasses 256 and 257 for an open access display
    cabinet.

    258,    for a noncooled work surface.

    373+,   for cooling apparatus contacting an article with a liquid.

    515+,   for an evaporator, per se, which may serve to support an article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 168+ for a plate type heat exchanger of
    general application.


CLS 62/459
TXT Apparatus under subclass 440 including means for supporting ice.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132,    for automatic control of ice melting or ice melt handling.

    241+,   for means retarding sloshing of ice melt due to vehicle motion.

    285+,   for an atmospheric condensate retainer or director.

    312+,   for ice holder and ice drip-gas contactor.

    318+,   for an ice-melt purifier.

    321,    for means utilizing and comminuting ice.

    371,    for a portable commodity containing type which commonly utilizes
    ice.

    379,    for means handling a solid refrigerant as an article.

    384+,   for a cooler utilizing a solidified gas.

    398,    399 and 400, for a withdrawable liquid cooler utilizing ice.

    420+,   for means for directing gas flow relative to an ice compartment.

    425,    for gas flow in contact with ice.

    529,    for ice holding or supporting means, per se.


CLS 62/460
TXT Apparatus under subclass 459 including means to direct ice meltage or drip
    in heat exchanging relationship with the space within the enclosure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312+,   for refrigeration in which the ice meltage contacts gas.


CLS 62/461
TXT Apparatus under subclass 460 including means distributing the ice melt
    laterally of the ice holding chamber.


CLS 62/462
TXT Apparatus under subclass 459 including a valve or a trap in a flow line for
    the ice melt.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 147+ for liquid valves or liquid trap
    seals of general application.


CLS 62/463
TXT Apparatus under subclass 459 including a container at least partially
    surrounding the cooled enclosure.


CLS 62/464
TXT Apparatus under subclass 459 including an ice support located within an
    enclosure with means providing access to said support for loading or
    unloading the ice through the top or roof of the enclosure.


CLS 62/465
TXT Apparatus under subclass 440 including a particular support means for an
    element within the cooled enclosure or means having a particular
    cooperative supporting relationship between the enclosure and an element
    within it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    326+,   for means supporting an element to change the size or function of a
    compartment.

    382,    for a cooled compartment with defined means for supporting a
    drawer, tray or other track guided means.


CLS 62/466
TXT Apparatus under subclass 465 including resilient means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    295,    for a resiliently supported power element.


CLS 62/467
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means to cause a cooling
    effect by producing a change in the condition of a material, e.g., change
    of phase of a material or applying and releasing a stress on a material.

    (1)     Note.  The change of condition must be that due to causes other
    than mere heat exchange or transfer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332+,   for a diverse system.

    335,    for plural paired element refrigeration producing systems.


CLS 62/468
TXT Apparatus under subclass 467 including means handling a lubricant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     for related processes.

    192+,   for automatic control of lubrication.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    184,    Lubrication, appropriate subclasses for lubrication in general.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 83+, for rotary
    expansible chamber devices having nonworking fluid lubrication or seal
    means.


CLS 62/469
TXT Apparatus under subclass 468 comprising a compressor and its motor which
    form a unit located within a common refrigerant and lubricant containing
    casing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclass 372, for interrelated or common lubricating means
    for a pump or compressor and the drive motor therefor, and subclass 902,
    for a hermetically sealed motor and pump or compressor unit.


CLS 62/470
TXT Apparatus under subclass 468 including means for separating the lubricant
    from the refrigerant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 168+ for a separator
    installed in a closed cycle lubrication system of general application.


CLS 62/471
TXT Apparatus under subclass 470 in which the lubricant separator is at the
    evaporator or in its suction line.


CLS 62/472
TXT Apparatus under subclass 471 including means heating separated lubricant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    275,    for a device in which the lubricant and refrigerant may be heated
    for defrosting purposes.


CLS 62/473
TXT Apparatus under subclass 470, including a condenser or similar receiver
    having means to separate the lubricant from the liquid refrigerant therein.


CLS 62/474
TXT Apparatus under subclass 467 including means acting to keep the refrigerant
    in a normal operating condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85,     for related processes.

    195,    for automatic control of or by impurity removing means.

    292,    for means for charging a closed refrigeration producer.

    303,    for means cleaning external parts of refrigeration apparatus.

    317+,   for means for purifying an external fluid or ice melt.

    401+,   for air compressing-cooling-expanding type refrigeration produce
    which may include means for purifying the air used as a refrigerant.

    470+,   for a lubricant separator.

    476+,   particularly subclasses 490+, 495+ and 497 for means for separating
    substances necessarily present in a sorbent type refrigeration producer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, appropriate subclasses, for gas or vapor
    purification in general.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, for gas separation apparatus, per se.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclass for liquid
    purification in general.


CLS 62/475
TXT Apparatus under subclass 474 including means for discharging an impurity
    from the refrigeration producer.


CLS 62/476
TXT Apparatus under subclass 467 including means utilizing a sorbent for a
    refrigerant fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101+,   for related processes.

    141+,   for automatic control of a sorbent type refrigeration producer.

    232,    for a time or program actuated sorbent type refrigeration producer.

    269,    for a refrigerating system with an open gas or vapor outlet
    utilizing a hygroscopic agent.

    271,    for atmosphere and sorbent contact apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, appropriate subclass for a liquid
    vaporizer, per se, even though disclosed as a sorbent-generator.


CLS 62/477
TXT Apparatus under subclass 476 in which the refrigeration producing unit acts
    alternately and intermittently, as a sorber and as a still (generator).


CLS 62/478
TXT Apparatus under subclass 477 connected to another unit acting alternately
    as a condenser and then as an evaporator.

    (1)     Note.  This type of unit is commonly known as "icy-balls".


CLS 62/479
TXT Apparatus under subclass 477 including means returning a sorbent liquid
    from the evaporator back to the sorber-generator.


CLS 62/480
TXT Apparatus under subclass 477 including means utilizing a solid sorbent.


CLS 62/481
TXT Apparatus under subclass 477 including means acting to cool the
    sorber-generator during sorption.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146,    for automatic control of cooling fluid.


CLS 62/482
TXT Apparatus under subclass 481 including a cooled liquid flow line connected
    to the sorber-generator unit.


CLS 62/483
TXT Apparatus under subclass 476 including pump means forcing a gas or vapor to
    or from the sorption unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51.1+,  for a refrigerator using a liquid condenser and expander only,
    e.g., wherein the condenser and vaporizer are the same unit or wherein the
    atmosphere serves as a heating medium.


CLS 62/484
TXT Apparatus under subclass 476 comprising a generator, a sorbent liquid
    container commonly termed a reabsorber and an evaporator connected by flow
    lines in a closed cycle relationship so that vapor driven off by the
    generator contacts the liquid in the reabsorber to form a mixture rich in
    refrigerant which liquid mixture flows to the evaporator.


CLS 62/485
TXT Apparatus under subclass 476 including means causing contact of a cooling
    fluid with the sorber and/or a condenser.


CLS 62/486
TXT Apparatus under subclass 476 including means cooling the liquid refrigerant
    flow line to an evaporator.


CLS 62/487
TXT Apparatus under subclass 476 including means by which the internally
    generated pressures of the system or internal capillary means causes or
    aids in the circulation of absorption fluid between a generator and sorber.


CLS 62/488
TXT Apparatus under subclass 487 including a closed vessel which accumulates
    sorption liquor, which vessel acts to intermittently return sorption liquor
    to the generator.


CLS 62/489
TXT Apparatus under subclass 476 including features to heat or cool a flow line
    directly connecting the sorber and generator.


CLS 62/490
TXT Apparatus under subclass 476 including means whereby a refrigerant is
    contacted with a gas which is chemically inert to the refrigerant or
    sorbent.

    (1)     Note.  This system operates under a uniform total pressure with the
    pressure in the evaporator being the sum of the partial pressures of the
    inert gas and the pressure of the refrigerant vapor, i.e., it operates
    according to Dalton's law of partial pressures and is commonly operated by
    heating means for household refrigerator use.


CLS 62/491
TXT Apparatus under subclass 490 including a gas-liquid contacting structure
    within a flow confining element of that part of the circuit utilizing the
    inert gas.


CLS 62/492
TXT Apparatus under subclass 491 in which the gas-liquid contacting structure
    is within the evaporator.


CLS 62/493
TXT Apparatus under subclass 490 in which there is means to cool the flow line
    for inert gas connecting the sorber to the evaporator.


CLS 62/494
TXT Apparatus under subclass 476 including structure within the sorber having
    particular gas-liquid contact features.


CLS 62/495
TXT Apparatus under subclass 476 including means located between the generator
    and condenser acting to remove the sorbent vapor from the refrigerant-vapor
    mixture.

    (1)     Note.  Such means is termed "rectifier".


CLS 62/496
TXT Apparatus under subclass 495 in which the sorbent vapor separator includes
    means holding a body of liquid which is contacted by the vapor and enters
    below the upper face of the body of liquid.


CLS 62/497
TXT Apparatus under subclass 476, including means within the generator
    enhancing the separation of the refrigerant and sorbent.


CLS 62/498
TXT Apparatus under subclass 467, including means arranged in a closed circuit
    to compress, condense and evaporate a fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115+,   for related processes.

    401,    for an air compressor-cooler-expander type refrigeration producer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, appropriate subclasses, and see especially subclass 902 for
    gas pumps, per se.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclasses, for
    rotary expansible chamber compressors, per se.


CLS 62/499
TXT Apparatus under subclass 498 having a plurality of refrigeration producing
    units connected to move in fixed relationship to each other.


CLS 62/500
TXT Apparatus under subclass 498 in which the compressor is jet type powered by
    a fluid of a circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191,    for a similar system with automatic control.

    268+,   for an open outlet vacuumized chamber in which the pump may be a
    jet pump.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 151+ for jet type pumps, per se.


CLS 62/501
TXT Apparatus under subclass 498 in which a fluid external of the circuit is
    utilized as a motive fluid for the compressor which fluid passes in heat
    exchange relationship with a portion of the circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238,    for means using heat of disparate apparatus to operate a
    refrigerating system.


CLS 62/502
TXT Apparatus under subclass 498 in which there are different kinds of fluids
    in the circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for related processes.

    468+,   where the auxiliary medium performs only a lubricating function.

    476+,   particularly subclasses 490+ for a sorbent type refrigerant
    producer utilizing diverse fluids.

    500,    for a jet powered system which may use one kind of fluid as a
    pumping medium and another as a refrigerant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 67+ for a refrigerant composition.


CLS 62/503
TXT Apparatus under subclass 498 including means for trapping or dispersing
    liquid refrigerant between the evaporator outlet and the compressor inlet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83,     for processes of preventing slugging to the compressor.

    174,    for automatic control of trapping and discharging refrigerant
    batches.

    471+,   for similar structure wherein the liquid is a lubricant or
    lubricant mixed with a refrigerant.

    512,    for a liquid-vapor separator and separated liquid recycle.


CLS 62/504
TXT Apparatus under subclass 498 including means to apportion the liquid
    refrigerant to distinct regions of an evaporator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199+,   for automatic control for by-passing an evaporator through another
    evaporator.

    335,    for plural paired different function refrigeration producing
    elements.

    525,    for plural distinct evaporators, per se, with particular flow
    distributors.


CLS 62/505
TXT Apparatus under subclass 498 including means using the refrigerant being
    circulated for cooling either the compressor or a motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    513,    for heat exchange between diverse function elements of a
    refrigeration producer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 366+ for a pump drive motor which is cooled by
    pump fluid.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 83+ for rotary
    expansible chamber devices having heat exchange means.


CLS 62/506
TXT Apparatus under subclass 498 including means causing flow of a cooling
    fluid outside of the refrigeration producer to cool a heat rejecting
    portion of it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90,     for processes of circulating and heating an external gas.

    113,    for processes involving circulating a cooled gas and reheating it.

    146+,   for automatic control of cooling fluid in a sorbent system.

    173,    for automatic control of reheating.

    183+,   for automatic control of cooling fluid for a heat rejecter.

    238,    for disparate apparatus utilized as a heat absorber or rejecter.

    277+,   particularly subclass 279 for means using rejected heat in handling
    or preventing atmospheric condensate.

    305+,   for gas-liquid contact means cooling a heat rejecter.

    324+,   for a reversible heat pump.

    332+,   for diverse systems, one of which may reject heat to another.

    353,    for means using rejected heat to thaw a congealed product mold.

    391,    for means receiving withdrawn cooled liquid which may direct it to
    a heat rejecter.

    428,    for gas forcing means and means directing a gas over a heat
    rejecter.

    452+,   for a cooled enclosure with an enclosure or feature for cooling a
    heat rejecter.

    476+,   for a sorbent type refrigerator producer.

    501,    for a compressor actuating means which also cools a heat rejecter.


CLS 62/507
TXT Apparatus under subclass 506 including means utilizing the ambient
    atmosphere as a cooling means.


CLS 62/508
TXT Apparatus under subclass 507 in which the compressor and its driving motor
    are located within a common refrigerant containing casing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    469,    for similar structure in which the casing also contains lubricant.


CLS 62/509
TXT Apparatus under subclass 498 including a receiver between the condenser and
    evaporator, e.g., surge tank.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83,     for processes of preventing slugging to a compressor.

    117,    for processes of compressing, condensing and evaporating involving
    division of the refrigerant flow in separate paths.

    474,    for a receiver of this type wherein the refrigerant is purified.

    503,    for a trap in the suction line, and see the Notes thereto.


CLS 62/510
TXT Apparatus under subclass 498 comprising more than one compressor or a
    compressor that is equipped to simultaneously produce more than one suction
    pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332+,   for diverse systems.

    335,    for plural paired diverse function refrigeration producing systems.


CLS 62/511
TXT Apparatus under subclass 498 including a fixed area flow restricting
    passage arrangement such as an orifice, porous plug or capillary tube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    527+,   for an evaporator with a flow controller or boiling expediter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 40+ for a flow restrictor of
    general application.


CLS 62/512
TXT Apparatus under subclass 467 including a distinct separator acting to
    separate, other than by evaporation, the refrigerant into gas and liquid
    fractions combined with means to return the separate liquid fraction to the
    evaporator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    503,    for a trap in the suction line, and see the Notes thereto.


CLS 62/513
TXT Apparatus under subclass 467 having means to interchange heat between
    diverse function elements of the refrigerator producer, e.g., exchanging
    heat between the evaporator and condenser or hot liquid flow line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277+,   particularly subclasses 279+ for means utilizing heat developed by
    a refrigeration producer for preventing or removing atmospheric condensate.

    476+,   for a sorbent type refrigerant producing system often involving
    heat exchanging within the system.

    501,    for means using a fluid as source of power and as a heat exchanger.

    505,    for means involving a motor or compressor by refrigerant of the
    circuit.


CLS 62/515
TXT Apparatus under subclass 467 including means specialized to expanding or
    evaporating a refrigerant.


CLS 62/516
TXT Apparatus under subclass 515 forming a cooled enclosure.

    (1)     Note.  The enclosure may be open to the atmosphere, e.g., U-shaped.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    440+,   particularly subclass 451 for an evaporator mounted within a
    surrounding enclosure, or an insulated evaporator.


CLS 62/517
TXT Apparatus under subclass 516 wherein the enclosure is provided with means
    for closing an opening.


CLS 62/518
TXT Apparatus under subclass 516 in which the evaporator means surrounds
    distinct inner enclosure forming means.


CLS 62/519
TXT Apparatus under subclass 516 comprising (1) distinct section forming
    multiple compartments or each differing in some structural characteristic,
    (2) portions contacting a wall of a chamber and distinct sections extending
    outwardly from and spaced from the chamber wall, (3) having distinct heat
    exchanging surfaces, e.g., fins, having different structural or heat
    exchanging characteristics, or (4) distinct flow line connected evaporators.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    441+,   for a cooled enclosure with plural compartments and see the Notes
    thereto.


CLS 62/520
TXT Apparatus under subclass 519 wherein the distinct sections or zones are
    formed by a shelf which is itself an evaporator.


CLS 62/521
TXT Apparatus under subclass 516 having a shelf or a support for a receptacle
    or shelf.


CLS 62/522
TXT Apparatus under subclass 521 in which the shelf is integral with or
    permanently attached to a wall of the evaporator.


CLS 62/523
TXT Apparatus under subclass 516 in which a wall of the evaporator is
    corrugated or embossed.


CLS 62/524
TXT Apparatus under subclass 515 including distinct fluid distributing sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    519,    for plural distinct section evaporators forming an enclosure.


CLS 62/525
TXT Apparatus under subclass 524 in which a particular flow distributor, other
    than a mere header, is provided to distribute refrigerant to the sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    504,    for a compressor-condenser-evaporator circuit having means to
    apportion refrigerant to the evaporator.


CLS 62/526
TXT Apparatus under subclass 524 in which at least two of the distinct sections
    are serially connected.


CLS 62/527
TXT Apparatus under subclass 515 including means located within a refrigerant
    flow path, which (1) controls or changes the manner of flow of the
    refrigerant, or (2) expedites boiling of the refrigerant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    511,    for a fixed restrictor for a compressor-condenser-evaporator
    circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 40+ for a restrictor, per se.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, appropriate subclass for a valve having
    general utility.


CLS 62/528
TXT Apparatus under subclass 527 which is adjustable.


CLS 62/529
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means to handle and/or hold a
    refrigerant or coolant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45.1+,  for processes and apparatus for handling liquefied or solidified
    gas as a product.  See the Search Notes thereunder.

    459+,   for ice support means within an enclosure.


CLS 62/530
TXT Device under subclass 529 including (1) a portable or hand manipulable
    flexible wall container, e.g., ice bag, (2) a sealed hand manipulable
    container, (3) a small portable container with attaching means, e.g., body
    member treater, or (4) a refillable container having a closure for filling
    or emptying, which device is filled with a material to be chilled and which
    is used to cool material external of it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for a refrigerated product.

    293,    for a hand manipulable tool.

    371+,   for a portable commodity containing receptacle, e.g., mercantile
    package.

    430+,   for refrigerator and a hold-over.

    457,    for a cooled portable receptacle cooler.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 204+ for structure specialized to
    warming the body.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 46 for a heat exchanger of general
    application of the flexible bag or cover type.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 901 for a bag for holding hot water or ice
    which is intended to be removed after use (e.g., standard ice bag).  Class
    62, provides for devices for containing a refrigerant or coolant which is
    intended to be reused without removing the heat exchange medium (e.g., a
    permanently sealed bag or a bag holding a medium intended to be re-frozen
    or re-chilled).


CLS 62/531
TXT Apparatus under the class definition not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 62/532
TXT Processes under subclass 56 wherein a solution or mixture of constituents
    is cooled sufficiently to solidify a constituent which is then removed from
    the mixture.

    (1)     Note.  The solid, liquid or gaseous state for purposes of this and
    the indented subclasses is determined at the point immediately before the
    refrigerant and solution or mixture are first brought into contact, i.e.,
    before any change of state of the refrigerant.

    (2)     Note.  The formation of a hydrate or clathrate is considered for
    purposes of this and the indented subclasses as direct contact
    refrigeration with classification dependent upon the state of the hydrate
    former upon addition and its state upon removal.

    (3)     Note.  In the absence of a clear disclosure to the contrary the
    dissolution of CO2 in a solution with subsequent evaporation from the
    solution is to be considered direct contact refrigeration with a gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66+,    particularly subclass 67 for separating a congealed fraction of a
    single liquid, e.g., ice from water.

    123+,   for apparatus for separating a solidified constituent by
    refrigeration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, subclasses 295+ for processes
    crystallizing inorganic compounds or non-metal elements not including a
    refrigeration step, and when there is an intent to make a single-crystal,
    see Class 117 whether or not including a refrigeration step.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, for processes for
    drying by operations other than refrigeration combined with cooling by
    refrigeration particularly subclasses 284+ for processes wherein a frozen
    mixture is dried by sublimating a constituent while the mixture remains
    frozen.

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes and noncoating apparatus for
    growing therein-defined single-crystal of all types of materials, including
    inorganic or organic, including those having refrigeration steps or means.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 28+ for similar
    processes combined with additional treatment of a mineral oil or a
    constituent thereof.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, for processes which may involve
    cooling including treatment of a liquid mixture for purification by
    destruction or conversion of a constituent or treatment of sewage and waste
    by a living organism or gravitational separation with preliminary
    conversion of a solid to at least partially to a liquid.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, including the related classes  for
    processes of treating or modifying non-hydrocarbon organic compounds:  by
    crystallization wherein the crystallization is not brought about by
    refrigeration; wherein crystallization, by any means including
    refrigeration, is combined with synthesis or modification of said compounds
    by chemical means; or wherein the separation of carbon compounds is
    accomplished exclusively by physical means other than refrigeration.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 245.1+ for non-coating
    crystallization apparatus not including chemical reaction means, not
    including refrigeration means, and not  provided for elsewhere, and
    subclasses 129+ for non-coating crystallization apparatus which include
    means for a chemical reaction, which may or may not include refrigeration
    means, and which are not provided for elsewhere.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, for processes involving hydrate
    formation as a step in the purification of Class 423 compounds.

    426,    Food or Edible Material: Processes, Compositions, and Products, for
    processes of refrigeration of food (1) combined with an additional food
    working operation or (2) wherein the refrigerating agent becomes a part of
    the food (e.g., sugar refrigerant also sweetens the food).

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, for processes including a step
    of refrigeration which treats or modifies only hydrocarbon compounds
    (claimed or disclosed).  Such processes disclosing any non-Class 585 (i.e.,
    non-hydrocarbon) organic compound are placed according to the class line
    with Class 260 and related classes.  Especially see subclass 15 for
    treating or modifying a crystalline hydrocarbon hydrate and subclasses 812+
    for a purification or separation process for recovery of a hydrocarbon.


CLS 62/533
TXT Processes under subclass 532 wherein a solution or mixture of constituents
    is cooled sufficiently to solidify a constituent which is then removed from
    the mixture wherein the cooling of the solution or mixture is accomplished
    by direct contact with an added solid, liquid or gaseous material which is
    at a lower temperature.

    (1)     Note.  Solid refrigerant is not intended to refer to cooling by a
    heat exchanger such as a regenerator but is intended to encompass a cooling
    process wherein a cooled solid such as shot is added to the solution or
    mixture to be cooled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    532,    for refrigeration by indirect heat exchange with a refrigerant.

    537,    for refrigeration accomplished by evaporation of a portion of the
    feed mixture or solution.

    543,    for refrigeration accompanied by pulsation of the solution or
    mixture.


CLS 62/534
TXT Processes under subclass 533 wherein a refrigerant liquid is converted in
    whole or part to the vapor state while cooling a solution or mixture in
    direct contact therewith.


CLS 62/535
TXT Processes under subclass 534 wherein the liquid refrigerant which has
    vaporized in cooling the solution or mixture is brought into direct
    physical contact with solidified product or liquid product separated from
    the solution or mixture to melt the solid product or rewarm the liquid
    product.

    (1)     Note.  Typically the processes of this subclass utilize multiple
    similar vessels with the refrigerant vaporized in one and utilized after
    recompression to melt solid in a second vessel.


CLS 62/536
TXT Processes under subclass 533 wherein the liquid refrigerant performs its
    cooling function without change of state.


CLS 62/537
TXT Processes under subclass 532 wherein a solution or mixture of constituents
    is cooled sufficiently to solidify a constituent which is then removed from
    the mixture wherein refrigeration of the mixture or solution is
    accomplished by vaporizing a component of the mixture or solution and
    without the addition of refrigerant to the mixture.

    (1)     Note.  Refrigeration herein is usually accomplished by creating
    reduced pressure over the mixture or solution and in absence of contrary
    disclosure a process wherein a vacuum is drawn over the body of mixture of
    solution is to be presumed to result in refrigeration of the type included
    in this subclass.


CLS 62/538
TXT Processes under subclass 532 wherein a solution or mixture of constituents
    is cooled sufficiently to solidify a constituent which is then removed from
    the mixture wherein the zone in which solidification or purification of the
    solid occurs is subjected to a regular or rhythmical increase and decrease
    in pressure or to vibration in the sonic range.

    (1)     Note.  The pulsation of the processes of this subclass are
    typically produced by a reciprocating piston in a line to or from a vessel
    or in some cases forming all or part of a wall of a vessel.


CLS 62/539
TXT Processes under subclass 538 wherein control of some process variable of
    the pulsed column is effected responsive to measurement of that or another
    process variable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    540,    for control of processes of refrigeration of a mixture or solution
    to solidify a constituent in the absence of pulsation.


CLS 62/540
TXT Processes under subclass 532 wherein control of some processes variable is
    effected responsive to measurement of the same or another variable.

    (1)     Note.  Mere liquid level control is excluded from this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    539,    for a process in which the parameters of a pulsed column are
    controlled.


CLS 62/541
TXT Processes under subclass 532 wherein a portion of the solidified
    constituent or the solution remaining when the solidified constituent has
    been removed is recycled as a solid or slurry or liquid to a point upstream
    in the process from the point of removal.


CLS 62/542
TXT Processes under subclass 532 wherein a portion of the solidified
    constituent is melted and utilized as a wash liquid to remove the solution
    or mixture which remains on the surface of the solidified component.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is intended to include processes wherein the
    solid is moved to a region of higher temperature where it melts and flows
    back over the solid entering the region of higher temperature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    538+,   for processes wherein the solidified constituent is remelted and
    returned as a liquid through the solidified constituent and the washing
    action is facilitated by pulsations of the liquid-solid mass.


CLS 62/543
TXT Processes under subclass 532 wherein the solidified constituent is
    subjected to increased pressure by physical means.

    (1)     Note.  The pressure applied is such as to remove occluded liquid or
    cause some minor surface melting to remove surface impurities from the
    solidified constituent.

    (2)     Note.  A process including centrifugation is excluded from this
    subclass unless the force exerted on the solid in the centrifuge is claimed
    as either a specific force exerted on the solid or specific RPM of the
    centrifuge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, particularly subclasses 104+ for pressing apparatus with
    means to drain expressed liquid.


CLS 62/544
TXT Processes under subclass 532 wherein the zone in which solidification
    occurs is subjected to some action or designed in such a manner that the
    body of mixture or solution is turbulent or in such a way that the buildup
    of solid is prevented.

    (1)     Note.  A screw conveyor is presumed to act in a manner consonant
    with the definition of this subclass in the absence of specific disclosure
    to the contrary.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123+,   for apparatus for separating a solidified constituent by
    refrigeration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    259,    Agitating, for particular agitation apparatus.


CLS 62/545
TXT Processes under subclass 544 wherein solidified component is removed from
    the external surface of a drum on which solidification occurs or the
    agitator or scraper is in the form of a helix or screw.


CLS 62/600
TXT CRYOGENIC TREATMENT OF GAS OR GAS MIXTURE:

    Subject matter under the class definition for manufacturing a solidified or
    liquified gas having a boiling point below 32_ F. from a gas or gas mixture
    at atmospheric pressure as a mercantile product by change of physical state
    by manipulation of temperature or pressure, and which may include apparatus
    converting liquified gas to a solid even though the conversion of a gas to
    a liquid is not included.

    (1)     Note.  This may include apparatus converting liquified gas to a
    solid even though the conversion of a gas to a liquid is not included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55.5,   for a cold trap for condensing undesirable gas or vapor in a vacuum
    line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, subclass 1 for
    compositions of that class containing liquified gaseous fuel or oxygen.


CLS 62/601
TXT Solidification:

    Subject matter under subclass 600 wherein the gas or gas mixture is formed
    into a solid.


CLS 62/602
TXT Carbon dioxide:

    Subject matter under subclass 601 wherein the gas being solidified is
    carbon dioxide(i.e. CO2.)


CLS 62/603
TXT Snow:

    Subject matter under subclass 602 wherein the carbon dioxide is formed into
    crystalline flakes.


CLS 62/604
TXT Pressed block:

    Subject matter under subclass 603 wherein the crystalline flakes are shaped
    into a solid rectangle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    340+,   for means for producing a shaped or modified congealed product
    from a liquid or semisolid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 16+ for a press type molding device of general
    application.


CLS 62/605
TXT Extruded pellets:

    Subject matter under subclass 603 wherein the crystalline flakes are forced
    through small openings and formed into small solids.


CLS 62/606
TXT Liquefaction:

    Subject matter subclass 600 wherein the gas or gas mixture is made liquid.


CLS 62/607
TXT Hydrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 606 wherein the gas being liquified is
    hydrogen.


CLS 62/608
TXT Helium:

    Subject matter under subclass 606 wherein the gas being liquified is helium.


CLS 62/610
TXT He3/He4 dilution refrigerator(i.e.superfluid):

    Subject matter under subclass 608 wherein each isotope of helium(i.e.,He3
    or He4) is liquified and is heat exchanged by direct contact with each
    other resulting in a superfluid condition below the Lambda Point (l) which
    is 2.17_ K.


CLS 62/611
TXT Natural gas:

    Subject matter under subclass 606 wherein at least one of the constituents
    of the gas mixture is a hydrocarbon compound (hydrocarbon is separated from
    sulfur, CO2, etc.) or a hydrocarbon gas that is separated into its
    constituents(methane, butane, etc.).


CLS 62/612
TXT Multicomponent cascade refrigeration:

    Subject matter under subclass 611 wherein the gas or gas mixture is
    liquified against a refrigeration cycle wherein the gas or gas mixture is a
    mixture having components that condense out at different temperatures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    335,    for multiple of two or more diverse function elements of a
    refrigeration producing system.


CLS 62/613
TXT Compression, expansion, and condensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 611 wherein the gas or gas mixture is
    pressurized, depressurized, and then liquified.


CLS 62/614
TXT Heat exchange with liquid cryogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 611 wherein the gas or gas mixture is
    directed into a heat exchange operation wherein it is liquified by
    condensation as a result of contact of the gas or gas mixture with an
    evaporating cryogen.


CLS 62/615
TXT Air:

    Subject matter under subclass 606 wherein the gas mixture being liquified
    is air.


CLS 62/616
TXT Heat exchange with liquid cryogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 606 wherein the gas or gas mixture is
    directed into a heat exchange operation wherein it liquified by
    condensation as a result of contact of the gas or gas mixture with an
    evaporating cryogen.


CLS 62/617
TXT Separation of gas mixture:

    Subject matter under subclass 600 wherein a constituent of a gas mixture is
    extracted(e.g. by liquefaction or solidification).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 267+ for apparatus in which a gas may be
    liquified, but not involving a refrigeration operation or apparatus.

    95,     Gas Separation: Processes, subclasses 39+, 149+, 257, and 290 for
    processes of gas separation in which a gas may be liquified, but not
    involving a refrigeration operation.

    203,    Distillation: Processes, Separatory, appropriate subclass for a
    separatory distillation process where the product produced by condensation
    is normally a liquid.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 210+ for processes of
    purifying or separating components of normally gaseous mixtures involving a
    chemical reaction.


CLS 62/618
TXT Natural gas:

    Subject matter under subclass 617 wherein at least one of the constituents
    of the gas mixture is a hydrocarbon compound(hydrocarbon is separated from
    sulfur, CO2, etc.)or a hydrocarbon gas that is separated into its
    constituents(methane, butane, etc.).


CLS 62/619
TXT Compression, expansion, and condensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 618 wherein the gas mixture is pressurized
    and depressurized in order to separate out a constituent of the mixture and
    the constituent is liquified or solidified.


CLS 62/620
TXT Distillation:

    Subject matter under subclass 618 wherein the gas mixture is directed to a
    mass transfer column and volatized or evaporated and a constituent is
    extracted by condensation.


CLS 62/621
TXT Flowline expansion engine:

    Subject matter under subclass 620 wherein the refreigeration circuit
    comprises a flow line having means to convert the energy of expansion into
    mechanical energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, appropriate subclass for a
    turbine not specialized for refrigeration.


CLS 62/622
TXT Downstream of column:

    Subject matter under subclass 621 wherein the expansion operation  occurs
    downstream of the column.


CLS 62/623
TXT External refrigeration circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 620 wherein the gas or gas mixture or the
    products of separation are operated upon by an outside source of
    refrigeration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    912,    for external refrigeration systems not specific to hydrocarbon
    separation.


CLS 62/624
TXT Membrane:

    Subject matter under subclass 620 wherein the gas or gas mixture or product
    of separation undergoes a further separation step using a gas   permeable
    barrier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation: Processes, subclasses 43+ for specific membrane
    structure.


CLS 62/625
TXT Liquid contact:

    Subject matter under subclass 620 wherein the gas or gas mixture or product
    of separation undergoes a further  separation step using a liquid wash.


CLS 62/626
TXT Solid sorption:

    Subject matter under subclass 620 wherein a constituent is extracted    by
    adsorption or absorption by a solid substance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation: Processes, subclasses 90+ for processes of gas
    separation by solid sorption, per se.


CLS 62/627
TXT Dephlemation:

    Subject matter under subclass 620 wherein the gas or gas mixture undergoes
    an operation in which the distilland enters into indirect heat exchange
    with the distillate(i.e. a dephlemating heat exchanger).


CLS 62/628
TXT Automatic control:

    Subject matter under subclass 620 wherein the separation operation changed
    in response to a sensed condition without the intervention by an operator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 501 for
    computerized control of distillation columns.


CLS 62/629
TXT Solidification:

    Subject matter under subclass 620 wherein the gas or gas mixture or
    products of separation are separated by being formed into solids.


CLS 62/630
TXT Plural columns:

    Subject matter under subclass 620 wherein a product of separation from a
    first distillation column undergoes a further separation in a second
    distillation column.


CLS 62/631
TXT Recycle:

    Subject matter under subclass 630 wherein a product of separation from one
    of the columns is returned to the other column.


CLS 62/632
TXT Liquid contact:

    Subject matter under subclass 618 wherein a constituent of the gas mixture
    is separated by direct contact with a treating liquid.


CLS 62/633
TXT Dehydrating:

    Subject matter under subclass 632 wherein the treating liquid removes water
    from the gas or gas mixture.


CLS 62/634
TXT Expansion:

    Subject matter under subclass 632 wherein the gas or gas mixture or a
    product of separation undergoes a volumetric increase.


CLS 62/635
TXT Plural contact columns:

    Subject matter under subclass 632 wherein the products of separation from
    the liquid contact step undergo another separation with an additional
    liquid contacting the gas or gas mixture.


CLS 62/636
TXT Sorption:

    Subject matter under subclass 618 wherein a constituent of the gas mixture
    is extracted by absorption or adsorption.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation: Processes, subclass 90+ for processes of gas
    separation by solid sorption, per se.


CLS 62/637
TXT Solidification:

    Subject matter under subclass 618 wherein a constituent of a gas mixture is
    extracted by being formed into solids.


CLS 62/638
TXT Regenerating heat exchanger:

    Subject matter under subclass 637 wherein a constituent is solidified on
    the surface of a heat exchanger and is later removed by reverse heat
    exchange operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    641,    for a process including flow reversing to a cold accumulator.

    909,    for specific regenerator structure or materials for use in
    aregenerator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 4+ and 900 for regenerating heat
    exchangers, per se.


CLS 62/639
TXT Helium:

    Subject matter under subclass 617 wherein one of the constituents being
    separated is helium.


CLS 62/640
TXT Air:

    Subject matter under subclass 617 wherein the gas mixture is ambient air.


CLS 62/641
TXT Regenerating heat exchanger:

    Subject matter under subclass 640 wherein a constituent is solidified on
    the surface of a heat exchanger and later removed by reverse heat exchange
    operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    638,    for a process including flow reversing to a cold accumulator.

    909,    for specific regenerator structure or materials for use in a
    regenerator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 4+ and 900 for regenerating heat
    exchangers, per se.


CLS 62/642
TXT Filtration:

    Subject matter under subclass 640 wherein the a constituent is extracted by
    passing through a porous medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, appropriate subclasses beginning with 434 for
    apparatus, for gas-solid separation by deflection or filtration of general
    application.

    95,     Gas Separation: Processes, subclasses 273+ for processes of gas
    separation by filtering, per se.


CLS 62/643
TXT Distillation:

    Subject matter under subclass 640 wherein the constituents of air are
    extracted by a combination of temperature and pressure control in a mass
    transfer column.


CLS 62/644
TXT Upstream operation:

    Subject matter under subclass 643 wherein the feed air stream is operated
    on by some process prior to entering a distillation column.


CLS 62/645
TXT Flowline expansion engine:

    Subject matter under subclass 644 wherein the refrigeration circuit
    comprises a flow line with a means to convert the energy of expansion into
    mechanical energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, appropriate subclass for a
    turbine not specialized for refrigeration.


CLS 62/646
TXT Spaced initial charging:

    Subject matter under subclass 645 wherein the feed stream is supplied   in
    a plurality of separate streams and directed to vertically spaced points in
    the column.


CLS 62/647
TXT Spaced initial charging:

    Subject matter under subclass 644 wherein the feed stream is supplied in a
    plurality of separate streams and directed to vertically spaced points in
    the column.


CLS 62/648
TXT Downstream operation:

    Subject matter under subclass 643 wherein a separated constituent is
       acted upon by some process which enhances its characteristics after
     leaving the distillation column.


CLS 62/649
TXT Flowline expansion engine:

    Subject matter under subclass 648 wherein the refrigeration circuit
    comprises a flow line with a means to convert the energy of expansion into
    mechanical energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, appropriate subclass for a
    turbine not specialized for refrigeration.


CLS 62/650
TXT High pressure nitrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 649 wherein the extracted constituent is
    nitrogen from the high pressure section of the column.


CLS 62/651
TXT Low pressure nitrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 649 wherein the extracted constituent is
    nitrogen extracted from the low pressure section of the column.


CLS 62/652
TXT Oxygen:

    Subject matter under subclass 649 wherein the extracted constituent is
    oxygen.


CLS 62/653
TXT Flowline pump:

    Subject matter under subclass 648 wherein the separated constituent is
    operated on by a pressurizing device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50.6,   for liquid handling of liquified gas for a specific pump designed
    to pump liquified gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclass 901 for cryogen pumps.


CLS 62/654
TXT Liquid oxygen:

    Subject matter under subclass 653 wherein the extracted constituent is
     liquid oxygen.


CLS 62/655
TXT Membrane:

    Subject matter under subclass 643 wherein the operation is the passage
    through a gas permeable barrier for further separation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation: Processes, subclasses 43+ for specific membrane
    structure.


CLS 62/656
TXT Automatic control:

    Subject matter under subclass 643 wherein the operation is changed in
      response to a sensed condition without the intervention of an operator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 501 for
    computerized control of distillation columns.


CLS 62/657
TXT Automatic control:

    Subject matter under subclass 600 wherein the operation is changed in
    response to a sensed condition without the intervention of an operator.

               CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 62/900
TXT Triple column:

    Subject matter concerned with the separation of air in a distillation
    column wherein the column has three distillation stages (high, medium, and
    low pressure stages).


CLS 62/901
TXT Single column:

    Subject matter concerned with the separation of air in a distillation
    column wherein only one distillation stage is present.


CLS 62/902
TXT Apparatus:

    Subject matter concerned with specific details of cryogenic treatment of
    gas mixture apparatus not provided for below.


CLS 62/903
TXT Heat exchange structure:

    Subject matter under 902 with specific heat exchangers positioned within
    the distillation column (example: condenser/reboilers).


CLS 62/904
TXT Coiled heat exchanger:

    Subject matter under 903 with specific heat exchanger for gas separation
    wherein the heat exchanger is helical shaped.


CLS 62/905
TXT Column:

    Subject matter under 902 with specific details of a distillation column
    (example: riser tubes, tray positioning, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  See Class 196, subclass 100 and Class 202, subclass 158.


CLS 62/906
TXT Packing:

    Subject matter under 905 with specific details to the mass transfer means
    within the distillation column (e.g. structured or random packing; specific
    materials).


CLS 62/907
TXT Insulation:

    Subject matter under 905 with specific details for means to reduce heat
    transfer to or from the distillation column (e.g. specific materials,
    arrangement).


CLS 62/908
TXT Filter or absorber:

    Subject matter under 902 with specific details for means to remove or sorb
    impurities from the cryogenic treatment system (e.g. specific materials,
    placement)which can be liquid or solid.


CLS 62/909
TXT Regeneration:

    Subject matter under 902 with specific details to valve configuration or
    material used in the reversing heat exchangers as found in this class,
    subclasses 638 and 641.


CLS 62/910
TXT Expander:

    Subject matter under 902 with specific details to structure wherein the gas
    or gas mixture undergoes expansion in the cryogenic treatment system (e.g.
    Pelton wheels, Laval nozzles, vortex tubes, ejectors, or devices where
    separation occurs by centrifugal force).


CLS 62/911
TXT Portable:

    Subject matter under 902 with specific details of cryogenic separation or
    liquefaction devices which can be readily moved from place to place.


CLS 62/912
TXT External refrigeration system:

    Subject matter with specific details of systems to provide refrigeration to
    the distillation column which are separate therefrom.


CLS 62/913
TXT Liquified gas:

    Subject matter under 912 wherein the external refrigeration system is a
    tank of liquified gas (e.g. liquified nitrogen, oxygen, argon, etc.).


CLS 62/914
TXT Magnetic or electric field:

    Subject matter with specific details to a cryogenic gas separation system
    wherein a magnetic or electric field is used.


CLS 62/915
TXT Combustion:

    Subject matter with details showing products of separation used in a system
    wherein burning occurs (e.g. oxygen from an air separation plant is
    directed to a blast furnace).


CLS 62/916
TXT Explosion reduction:

    Subject matter that adds an inert gas to the cryogenic distillation system
    which reduces the chances of uncontrollable burning (e.g. addition of
    nitrogen gas to methane).


CLS 62/917
TXT Mercury:

    Subject matter with gas mixtures having mercury as a constituent.


CLS 62/918
TXT Halocarbon:

    Subject matter specific to the separation of halocarbons into its
    constituent or the separation of one halocarbon from another.


CLS 62/919
TXT Isotope:

    Subject matter specific to the separation of one isotope from another (e.g.
    hydrogen from deuterium).

    (1)     Note. Documents concerned with He3/He4 dilution refrigerators
    should not be crossed here but crossed  into this class, subclass 610.


CLS 62/920
TXT Carbon monoxide:

    Subject matter specific to the recovery of carbon monoxide from a gas
    mixture.


CLS 62/921
TXT Chlorine:

    Subject matter specific to the separation, purification, and liquefaction
    of chlorine and its compounds.


CLS 62/922
TXT Sulfur:

    Subject matter specific to the separation or purification of sulphur or it
    compounds.


CLS 62/923
TXT Inert gas:

    Subject matter specific to the separation of nonreactive gases not provided
    for below.


CLS 62/924
TXT Argon:

    Subject matter under 923 specific to the recovery of argon.


CLS 62/925
TXT Xenon or krypton:

    Subject matter under 923 specific to the recovery of xenon or krypton.


CLS 62/926
TXT Gasoline:

    Subject matter specific to the recovery of gasoline.


CLS 62/927
TXT Natural gas from nitrogen:

    Subject matter specific to the cryogenic separation of nitrogen from
    natural gas.


CLS 62/928
TXT Recovery of carbon dioxide:

    Subject matter specific to the recovery of carbon dioxide from a gas
    mixture not provided for below.


CLS 62/929
TXT From natural gas:

    Subject matter under 928 specific to the recovery of carbon dioxide from
    natural gas.


CLS 62/930
TXT From nitrogen:

    Subject matter under 928 specific to the recovery of carbon dioxide from
    nitrogen.


CLS 62/931
TXT Recovery of hydrogen:

    Subject matter specific to the recovery of hydrogen gas from a gas mixture
    not provided for below.


CLS 62/932
TXT From natural gas:

    Subject matter under 931 specific to the separation of hydrogen from
    natural gas.


CLS 62/933
TXT From helium:

    Subject matter under 931 specific to the separation of hydrogen from helium.


CLS 62/934
TXT From nitrogen:

    Subject matter under 931 specific to the separation of hydrogen from
    nitrogen, including the separation of ammonia and the separation of N2/H2
    wherein N2 is used as a liquid wash for H2 impurities.


CLS 62/935
TXT Olefin:

    Subject matter specific to the recovery of products of separation having
    the formula CNH2N (e.g. ethylene, propylene,etc.).


CLS 62/936
TXT Erickson:

    A collection of patents issued to Donald C. Erickson.


CLS 62/937
TXT Cheng:

    A collection of patents issued to Chen-Yen Cheng.


CLS 62/938
TXT Mehra:

    A collection of patents issued to Yuv R. Mehra.


CLS 62/939
TXT Partial feed stream expansion(air):

    Subject matter specific to air separation wherein the compressed feed
    stream is partially heat exchanged against products of separation and
    flowline expanded prior to entering a distillation column.


CLS 62/940
TXT High pressure column:

    Subject matter under 939 specific to expanded streams which enter a high
    pressure column.


CLS 63/
TTL JEWELRY

CLS 63/
TXT This class includes articles generally composed of precious metals and
    stones and of an analogous nature, which are composed of other materials,
    not otherwise classified or imitations of the same, which are intended to
    be worn upon the person as ornaments.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes and non-coating apparatus for
    growing therein-defined single-crystal of all types of materials, including
    those intended as jewelry.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 67 for an
    article in which an element is embedded or inlaid in a substrate similar to
    a setting for a jewel, and subclass 669 for composite metallic stock which
    has a precious metal base component.


CLS 63/1.11
TXT COMBINATION ORNAMENT:

    Construction under the class definition in which there is combined one or
    more diverse devices and at least one ornament that falls within the main
    definition of this class.


CLS 63/1.12
TXT With tool, e.g., knife, pen, lens, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.11 in which the ornament is combined with
    an implement which could assist one in doing useful work.


CLS 63/1.13
TXT With indicator or alarm, e.g., gage, whistle, clock, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.11 in which the ornament is combined with a
    device that can impart information regarding some aspect of the
    surroundings or is able to apprehend the attention of others due to its
    ability to produce noise, light, etc.


CLS 63/1.14
TXT With compartment:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.11 in which the ornament defines a space
    which is useful for containing something other than a portion of the
    ornament.


CLS 63/1.15
TXT Scent diffuser:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.14 in which the compartment is used to
    contain a material that is designed to emanate an odor.


CLS 63/1.16
TXT Composite ornament:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.11 in which the item of jewelry is
    comprised of a plurality of lesser items which are usable separately.

    (1)     Note. A composite piece may include a backing structure that is
    used to combine the various lesser items; in other words, a sort of
    backbone or armature. An example would be a pair of earrings assembled on a
    backing having a clothing piercing member so that the whole could be worn
    as a pin.


CLS 63/1.17
TXT Having conversion member:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.16 in which the item of jewelry is
    comprised of a plurality of lesser items which are held together by one or
    more backing members which allows the appearance of the ornament to be
    altered.


CLS 63/1.18
TXT With retainer:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.11 in which the item of jewelry is
    comprised of an additional means to prevent separation of the ornament from
    the wearer.


CLS 63/3
TXT BODY MEMBER ENCIRCLING ORNAMENT:

    An ornament under the class definition that is connected to the wearer by
    being draped around a particular body member (e.g., arm, ankle, wrist,
    neck, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, appropriate subclasses for napkin
    holders comprising mere tubular wall structure.

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses, for napkin holders with
    additional supporting structure such as stands, brackets or supporting
    bases.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 608 for metallic
    stock which embodies fibers which are interengaged or between layers.

    D11,    Jewelry, Symbolic Insignia, and Ornaments, subclasses 3+ for
    bracelet designs.


CLS 63/3.1
TXT Having securement detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 3 in which the item of jewelry is comprised
    of a means to prevent separation of the ornament where it is joined to make
    its encircling form.


CLS 63/3.2
TXT Having length adjustment:

    Subject matter under subclass 3.1 in which the securement detail includes
    means for changing the length of the body member encircling ornament
    without adding to or subtracting from the number of ornament elements.


CLS 63/4
TXT Bracelets under subclass 3 composed of a series of links or units, which
    are joined together by nonexpanding connections, an attaching means being
    employed for uniting the ends of the chain.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 311+ particularly subclasses 321 and 322, and
    subclasses 338 and 339 for ornamental body- encircling garment supporters.

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclasses 80+ for various
    types of ornamental chains.


CLS 63/5.1
TXT Expansible:

    Bracelets under subclass 3 which are endless and may be expanded to slip
    over the hands.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 311+, particularly subclasses 321 and 322, and
    subclasses 338 and 339 for ornamental body- encircling garment supporters.

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclasses 79.1+ for other
    elastic chains.


CLS 63/5.2
TXT Continuous coil spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 5.1 which includes a plurality of links
    connected for expansion, and a spiral resilient member extending through
    the links.


CLS 63/6
TXT Expansible bracelets under subclass 5.1 composed of two sections only.


CLS 63/7
TXT Bracelets under subclass 3 formed with two sections hinged at one point, or
    hinge structure, per se, specialized to this art.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., particularly subclasses 572+ for
    bracelet fasteners, per se.

    70,     Locks, subclass 18 for portable shackles.


CLS 63/8
TXT Devices under subclass 7 having spring means which operates to hold the
    sections in desired position or positions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 277+ for spring hinges.


CLS 63/9
TXT Bracelets under subclass 3 hinged at a plurality of points.


CLS 63/10
TXT Bracelets under subclass 3, the sections of which are connected by one or
    more swivel joints.


CLS 63/11
TXT Bracelets under subclass 3 composed of material with sufficient spring to
    permit the bracelets to open for the insertion of the hand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for similar structure in finger rings.


CLS 63/12
TXT HAVING DIRECT BODY ATTACHMENT:

    An ornament under the class definition that is retained on the wearer by a
    direct coupling to body tissue (e.g., by piercing, clamping, embedding, or
    adhesively, etc.).

    (1)     Note. Ornaments such as necklaces, bracelets, rings, etc. that are
    merely draped around a body member are considered to be connected to the
    wearer, but not attached.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 705 for pierced earring
    fastener.

    D11,    Jewelry, Symbolic Insignia, and Ornaments, subclasses 40+ for
    earring designs.


CLS 63/13
TXT Earring ornaments under subclass 12 suspended and free to swing.


CLS 63/14.1
TXT Nonpiercing:

    Earrings under subclass 12 in which the attaching member is clamped or
    secured upon the lobe of the ear without piercing the same.


CLS 63/14.2
TXT Having guard:

    Subject matter under subclass 14.1 which further includes means for
    preventing an ornament from being dislodged from the ear after the ornament
    is attached to the ear.


CLS 63/14.3
TXT Having clamp pad:

    Subject matter under subclass 14.1 in which further includes means for
    protecting the lobe of the ear from excessive pressure from the attaching
    member.


CLS 63/14.4
TXT Pivoted arm clamp:

    Subject matter under subclass 14.1 in which the attaching member comprises
    a clamp having two parts and means for pivotally connecting the parts
    together to form a jaw.


CLS 63/14.5
TXT Spring actuated:

    Subject matter under subclass 14.4 including resilient means for blasting
    the jaw into at least one position.


CLS 63/14.6
TXT Screw-type clamp:

    Subject matter under subclass 14.1 in which the attaching member comprises
    a clamp forming a jaw and a fastener member threadably mounted and movable
    in the jaw so that the fastener member can be moved toward and away from
    the ear when the jaw is placed over the lobe of the ear by rotation of the
    fastener member.


CLS 63/14.7
TXT Slide clamp:

    Subject matter under subclass 14.1 in which the attaching member comprises
    a clamp having two parts and means for slidably connecting the parts for
    movement toward and away from each other.


CLS 63/14.8
TXT One-piece clamp:

    Subject matter under subclass 14.1 in which the attaching member comprises
    a unitary member shaped to form a jaw which can be placed over the lobe of
    the ear.


CLS 63/14.9
TXT Adhesive attachment:

    Subject matter under subclass 14.1 in which the ornament is secured to the
    body by means of a tacky, sticky substance generally referred to as
    adhesive.


CLS 63/15
TXT Ring:

    Ornamental devices under subclass 3 for encircling the fingers.

    (1)     Note.  The term "finger ring" denotes a functional categorization
    which may include identical structure provided for elsewhere on either a
    functional or structural basis.  See, for example, bracelets in subclasses
    3+ of this class, and chain links in subclasses 84+ of Class 59, Chain,
    Staple, and Horseshoe Making.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3+,     see (1) Note above.

    26+,    for rings having interchangeable     initial-mountings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 108+ for miscellaneous ferrules,
    rings, and thimbles.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 639 for rings having
    means for conveying information.

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclasses 84+, see (1) Note
    above.

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 57 for molding apparatus for forming a
    ring-like product.

    D11,    Jewelry, Symbolic Insignia, and Ornaments, subclasses 26+ for
    finger ring designs.


CLS 63/15.1
TXT Devices under subclass 15 comprising two or more discrete and/or detachable
    annular members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for rings constructed from a plurality of nonseparable annular
    members.


CLS 63/15.2
TXT Devices under subclass 15 including a discrete and distinct member for
    detachably holding two or more annular members together.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is the connector means, per se.


CLS 63/15.3
TXT Devices under subclass 15.2 including means forming a portion or portions
    of one or more annular members which means serve to detachably hold said
    annular members together.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are plural rings modified to provide an
    interlacing or meshing of portions thereof, which while worn on the finger,
    precludes relative axial movement of the several rings.


CLS 63/15.4
TXT Devices under subclass 15.3 wherein at least one separate annular member is
    encompassed, embraced or enveloped along substantially its entire periphery
    by at least one other separate annular member.


CLS 63/15.45
TXT Devices under subclass 15 having at least one joint, the two parts of which
    are resiliently urged toward one another to cause the ring to assume a
    minimum diameter.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are rings with a split or open annulus to
    enable circumferential size adjustments by deformation within the elastic
    limit of the ring material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.1+,   for contractible bracelets.

    15.5,   for rings wherein the circumferential size may be varied by
    deformation beyond the elastic limit of the ring material.


CLS 63/15.5
TXT Devices under subclass 15 having means to permit change in the diameter of
    the finger contacting periphery.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this and indented subclasses are finger ring
    size varying attachments, per se.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein are rings with a split or open annulus to
    enable circumferential size adjustments by deformation beyond the elastic
    limit of the ring material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15.45,  for contractible rings relying upon the resilience of the ring
    material.


CLS 63/15.6
TXT Devices under subclass 15.5 wherein part of the finger contacting periphery
    of the ring is reoriented, or a separate piece or element is mounted upon
    the contacting periphery.

    (1)     Note.  The element or abutment serves to adapt the ring for a
    smaller finger or inhibit its removal.


CLS 63/15.65
TXT Devices under subclass 15.5 made of two or more segmented parts, at least
    two parts of which are operable to vary the internal size.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are size varying means utilizing a segmental
    sector of the ring annulus wherein both ends of said sector are adjustable
    relative to the respective adjacent ends of the ring annulus.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein is a ring annulus provided with a turnbuckle
    insert to vary circumferential size.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15.7,   for rings including two or more segmental sectors together to form
    an annular member or members of fixed size.


CLS 63/15.7
TXT Devices under subclass 15 comprising a series of circumferential generally
    arcuate parts secured together to form an annular member or members of
    fixed size.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15.5+,  for similar structure to enable changing the ring size.


CLS 63/15.8
TXT Devices under subclass 15 including means which cover and/or encase the
    ring or portions thereof.

    (1)     Note.  This indented subclass does not include devices which merely
    prevent loss without covering or encasing the ring; for such devices see
    subclass 15 and the other pertinent indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein is the shield means, per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for mere guarding means which prevent loss of a ring and which are
    not structurally provided for in the indented subclasses, and see (1) Note,
    above.


CLS 63/15.9
TXT Toe:

    Subject matter under subclass 15 in which the ornament is secured about one
    or more of the terminal digits extending from a wearer's foot; i.e., toes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for ornaments used to adorn a toenail.


CLS 63/18
TXT LOCKET:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to ornaments having a
    concealed recess adapted to receive a picture and so constructed that the
    picture may be disclosed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 1.5, 1.6 and 642.02+
    for somewhat similar devices, but which are intended for displaying
    information rather than for ornaments.

    D11,    Jewelry, Symbolic Insignia, and Ornaments, subclass 80 for locket
    designs.


CLS 63/19
TXT Lockets under subclass 18 having the recess concealed by a cover opening at
    an angle to the plane of its seat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 790+ for other
    picture retainers.

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, appropriate subclasses for closures
    of the type provided for and see the notes in section IV of Class 49 for
    the loci of closures in other classes.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 276+ and
    313 for watch cases and hinges.


CLS 63/20
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to ornaments secured to
    the clothing by means of a pin attachment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for pins having a vibrating jewel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 6, 13, 103, and 706+ for
    pin attached fasteners.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 1.5+ for badges.

    132,    Toilet, subclass 278 for clasp or barrette type hair fasteners.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 3, 4+, 12, 21
    through 26, 29+, 32, and 67 for ornamental articles which may be applied to
    clothing or to a person.

    D11,    Jewelry, Symbolic Insignia, and Ornaments, subclasses 40+ for
    brooch and pin designs.


CLS 63/21
TXT WATCH OR CHAIN ATTACHMENT:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to ornamental and safety
    attachments for watches and for ornamental chains.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclasses 78+ for chain
    structure, per se.

    D11,    Jewelry, Symbolic Insignia, and Ornaments, subclass 13 for
    ornamental chain designs; and subclass 86 for designs for watch chains and
    attachments.


CLS 63/22
TXT Devices under subclass 21 comprising means to be passed through a
    buttonhole to secure the chain to the clothing.


CLS 63/23
TXT Devices under subclass 21 comprising pendants, such as are usually attached
    to a watch-chain.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 1.5+ for articles of
    inferior material whose main function is to display certain information.


CLS 63/24
TXT Devices under subclass 21 designed to prevent the loss of the watch from
    the pocket.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 249 and 250 for devices not detached from the
    pocket upon the withdrawal of the watch.

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, subclasses 102 and 134 for
    pocket book and billfold safety attachments, respectively.


CLS 63/25
TXT Safety watch-guards under subclass 24 carrying means which is automatically
    thrown to engaging position by a pull on the chain.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 155+ for earth
    anchors which may be actuated to expand subterraneously.

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 276+ for similar structure in hair fasteners,
    and 57.1+, for hat fasteners.


CLS 63/26
TXT Jewelry under the class definition having means for holding gems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 10.

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclass 114 for electrolytic methods of
    setting or mounting gems.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 614 for metallic
    stock having a component which is embedded in another component.

    D11,    Jewelry, Symbolic Insignia, and Ornaments, subclass 91 for gem
    holder designs.


CLS 63/27
TXT Devices under subclass 26 comprising open settings which hold the gem by
    means of a circular series of prongs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12+,    for similar structure in earrings.


CLS 63/28
TXT Jewelry gem settings under subclass 26, such as cluster-settings and jewel
    bars for holding a plurality of gems closely assembled.


CLS 63/29.1
TXT Detachable:

    Jewelry gem settings under subclass 26 in which the gem or the gem and its
    holder may be detached from the article in order that another mounting may
    be substituted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for similar structure in watch charms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 113 for button and
    fastener covers.


CLS 63/29.2
TXT Magnetic:

    Subject matter under subclass 29.1 which includes means for magnetically
    holding the gem or the gem and its setting to the article.


CLS 63/30
TXT Devices under subclass 30 for temporarily holding a gem for display
    purposes.


CLS 63/31
TXT Gem-settings under subclass 26 which are mounted on a spring, so that it
    may vibrate or is so connected with mechanism that a positive motion may be
    imparted to it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for suspended gems in pendants.


CLS 63/32
TXT GEM:

    Devices under the class definition relating to the stones or gems, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes and non-coating apparatus for
    growing therein-defined single-crystal of all types of materials, including
    those intended as jewelry.


CLS 63/33
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    An ornament under the class definition that is not provided for in any of
    the superior subclasses of this class.


CLS 63/34
TXT Plated or covered with a noble metal or substance:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 in which the item of jewelry is protected
    by a layer of a noble metal or some other substance that will provide
    protection or enhance appearance.


CLS 63/35
TXT Findings, i.e., an incomplete ornament:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 which is used to form, at least in part,
    an item of jewelry.


CLS 63/36
TXT Naturally occurring substance:

    Subject matter under subclass 35 in which the finding is derived from
    naturally occurring animal, vegetable, or mineral matter.


CLS 63/37
TXT Mesh fabric, e.g., metallic fabric, bead work:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 in which the ornamental item is composed
    of a multitude of individual elements and has the general appearance of
    chainmail.


CLS 63/38
TXT Chain link or bead:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 which focuses on an individual element of
    an item of jewelry composed of a multitude of such individual elements that
    are linked, connected, or otherwise attached to one another to form at
    least one strand.


CLS 63/39
TXT Stringless bead, e.g., "pop" beads:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 in which the bead does not require a
    string, wire, etc. to be connectible one to another.


CLS 63/40
TXT Changeable ornamental element, e.g., for color coordination, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 in which the ornament has an element which
    may be exchanged for another element in order to alter the appearance of
    the ornament.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29.1,   for a detachable gem.


CLS 63/41
TXT Convertible in size:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 in which the ornament may be changed from
    fitting one body portion to fitting another.

    (1)     Note. A couple of examples are a ring which can be reconfigured to
    fit on a wrist or a necklace which can also be worn as a bracelet.


CLS 63/42
TXT Fingernail or toenail:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 in which the ornament is used to adorn the
    unguinal tissue which naturally occurs on the dorsal distal tips of ones
    digits.


CLS 63/43
TXT Barrette:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 in which the ornament is used to adorn one
    or more locks of hair.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTION


CLS 63/900
TXT MAGNETIC CONNECTOR:

    Subject matter from diverse areas which have a common feature of a
    connecting device which uses one or more magnets to effect the connection.

    FOREIGN ART COLLECTIONS

    The definitions for FOR 100-FOR 101 below correspond to the definitions of
    the abolished subclasses under Class 63 from which these collections were
    formed. See the Foreign Art Collection schedule for specific
    correspondences. [Note: The titles and definitions for indented art
    collections include all the details of the one(s) that are hierarchically
    superior.]


CLS 63/FOR100
TXT COMBINATION ARTICLES:

    Foreign art collections including constructions under the class definition
    in which are combined two or more articles having different functions, at
    least one of the articles falling within the definition of this class.


CLS 63/FOR101
TXT MISCELLANEOUS

    Foreign art collections including subject matter under the definition of
    this class, but not within that of any other subclass.


CLS 65/
TTL GLASS MANUFACTURING

CLS 65/
TXT CONTENTS



    I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    II.     GLOSSARY

    III.    GENERAL LINES WITH OTHER CLASSES

    A.      Classification lines in subclasses of Class 65.

    B.      Other class lines.

    IV.     MISCELLANEOUS SEARCH NOTES

    A.      Process and apparatus

    B.      Products

    I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    This class provides for (1) processes and/or apparatus for making stock or
    articles of those ceramic masses, which generally include a "glass former"
    or an oxide which approaches glass forming properties, in their composition
    and which are formed by fusion of raw materials (generally mixtures, most
    of which are of an earthy nature - as distinguished from metallic, organic,
    etc., - silicon, silica, and slag are included) at ordinary high furnace
    temperatures, by working (molding, shaping, etc.) of the mass after being
    melted or changed to a plastic or softened state by heating; and (2)
    processes and/or apparatus for treating stock or articles made by (1) above
    unless otherwise provided for as shown in Section III below.

    The use of hazardous or toxic waste to make a glass material a useful
    product is provided for herein, however, vitrification of hazardous waste
    for purposes of containment is excluded, see "SEARCH CLASS" below.

    I.      Included within the scope of the class definition are:

    1.      Glass fiber or filament and mineral wool making.

    2.      Manufacturing processes and/or apparatus including a step of, or
    means for adhesively bonding glass directly to another part by welding with
    or without use of an intermediate ceramic or vitreous material.

    3.      Manufacturing processes and/or apparatus including a step of, or
    means for forming a glass article from molten or softened glass.

    4.      Processes and/or apparatus including a step of, or means for
    treating glass while in a molten or solid state.

    5.      Processes and/or apparatus including a step of, or means for
    treating a glass preform to change a physical or chemical property thereof.

    6.      Processes and/or apparatus for repairing or cleaning glass working
    or treating apparatus.

    II.     GLOSSARY

    ANNEAL

    See subclass 117.

    BAIT

    See subclass 352.

    BATCH

    A properly proportioned mixture of raw materials to be delivered to a
    melting apparatus.

    BATCH CHARGER

    Mechanical means for introducing a batch to a melting apparatus.

    BEAD

    (1) A small piece of glass fused onto an electrical conductor, (2) an
    enlarged rounded portion on an edge of an article or stock material, (3)
    small discrete particles of glass.

    BLOWING

    Shaping or forming an undefined mass of glass in a soft state by
    introducing gas within a confined opening within the mass, i.e., by
    inflating.

    BRIDGE (-WALL)

    A hollow wall generally having an air space between refractory blocks from
    which it is formed and providing an opening or throat adjacent its bottom
    used in a tank furnace to separate a working end from a fining or melting
    zone.

    CASTING

    Forming a glass preform by flowing molten glass in the form of a stream
    into or onto molds, rolls or tables.  (Teeming is synonymous to casting).

    COATING

    See subclass 60.1.

    CORRUGATING

    Shaping a layer throughout its thickness into a row of wavelike folds.

    CRACKLED

    Glassware having a surface which was intentionally cracked by water
    immersion and partially healed by reheating.

    CULLET

    Waste or broken glass.

    DEBITEUSE

    A slotted floating, refractory block through which glass issues in the
    formation of a glass sheet during a drawing operation.

    DEPUTER

    See debiteuse.

    DEVITRIFY

    The changing of glass in the amorphous state to crystalline state generally
    by holding a glass melt at a temperature which favors crystal growth.

    DOGHOUSE

    A boxlike wing on a glass furnace through which a batch or floaters, etc.,
    are introduced into the furnace.

    DRAWING

    Forming stock, generally sheet or tube, by utilizing the self-cohesiveness
    of glass in a plastic condition to effect an operation similar to a
    "taffy-pull".

    DRAW RING

    A refractory device placed in a supply of molten glass to define an area
    for drawing.

    DRAW SHIELD

    Baffle means isolating stock being drawn from the hot atmosphere existing
    above a supply of molten glass.

    EMBOSSING

    Altering a surface configuration only of glass by raising a boss or
    protuberance thereon or causing surface portions to be depressed below the
    plane of the glass surface.

    FIBER

    See subclasses 376+.

    FILAMENT

    See subclasses 376+.

    FINING

    See subclasses 134.1+.

    FIRE-POLISHING

    heating of the outer surface of hard glass to a temperature where that
    surface only melts and surface tension causes smoothing thereof, the
    heating usually being by fire or flame contact of the glass surface.

    FLASHING

    Applying a thin layer of opaque or colored glass to the surface of clear
    glass, or vice versa.

    FLOATERS

    Refractory blocks floating on molten glass in a tank furnace to prevent
    gall or scum from entering the working end.

    FUSION BONDING

    Welding by bringing glass, while molten or softened by heating, into
    intimate contact with another part with subsequent cooling to solid phase
    whereby uniting is effected.

    GATHERER

    Means used to remove discrete charges of molten glass from a supply.

    GLASS

    For the purpose of this class is

    A.      An inorganic product

    1.      The constituents of which generally include a "glass former" (e.g.,
    As2O3, B2O3 GeO2, P2O5, SiO2, V2O5) which has an essential characteristic
    of creating or maintaining, singly, or in a mixture, that type of
    structural disorder characteristic of a glassy condition, other oxides
    which approach glass forming     properties (e.g., A12O3, BeO, PbO, Sb2O3
    TiO2, ZnO and ZrO2) as well as oxides that are practically devoid of glass
    forming tendencies (e.g., BaO, CaO, K2O, Li2O, MgO, Na2O and SrO); however,
    pure and modified silica, silicon and slag are also included,

    2.      formed by fusion and cooled to a rigid condition generally without
    crystallization,

    3.      having no definite melting point (whereby the mass has the
    characteristic of passing through a plastic state before reaching a liquid
    state when heated),

    4.      incapable in the solid state of permanent deformation,

    5.      and which fractures when subject to deformation tension.

    GLASS TREATING

    Effecting a change in a physical or chemical property of glass, generally
    involving specific heating followed by controlled cooling.

    GLASS WORKING

    Molding, shaping, severing of uniting of glass while in a plastic state.

    GOB

    A discrete portion of molten glass (a) delivered by a feeder or (b)
    gathered on a punty or blow pipe.

    HOMOGENIZE

    See subclasses 134.1+.

    MARVERING

    Rolling a gather of glass on a flat plate whereby it is shaped and cooled.

    MOIL

    Surplus or waste glass which must be removed from the apparatus or a
    product after a glass working operation.

    NECK RING

    That portion of a segmented mold used to form a neck portion of a hollow
    article.

    ORBITING

    Causing movement in a regular, generally a circular or elliptical path
    around a fixed point.

    PARISON

    A partially shaped article of manufacture requiring further significant
    shaping to arrive at the form of a completed useful article.

    PARTING LAYER

    See subclass 24 for definition.

    PASTE MOLD

    A mold with an inner lining of a paste (generally made from resins and
    linseed oil, soap, etc.) which is brushed into a hot mold and kept wet so
    that glass within the mold rides on a steam cushion while being formed.

    PONTILE

    A dipstick used to gather charges of molten glass, punty, puntil, pontee,
    and ponto are local variants.

    PREFORM

    Stock material that has been given a shape (the term preform is used
    interchangeably with article, product, parison and blank).

    PRESS MOLDING

    See subclass 305.

    PURIFY

    See subclasses 134.1+.

    PUNTY

    See Pontile

    RESHAPING


    A.      Changing the gross overall configuration of a glass preform by

    (1)     confining a glass preform within a configured mold and effecting
    significant flow of the glass to cause it to assume the configuration of
    the mold or

    (2)     distorting a glass preform by bodily moving a portion of it
    throughout its entire thickness relative to a second portion during which
    the thickness of the work piece remains substantially the same and no
    significant flow of the glass occurs, i.e., bending.

    B.      Changing at least one dimension of a glass preform throughout its
    perimeter without any appreciable change in the original configuration
    thereof, e.g., stretching and shrinking.

    SINTERING

    The coalescence of particles into one solid mass through heating, generally
    with melting limited to a surface layer only of each particle.

    SLAG

    See subclass 19.

    SLINGER

    See subclass 154.

    SMOOTHING

    Removing surface irregularities or imperfections.

    SOFTENED GLASS

    Glass that has been heated to a temperature at which it is pliable or
    liquid.

    SOFTENING POINT

    The temperature at which a uniform fiber, 0.5 to 1.0 mm. in diameter,
    elongates under its own weight at a rate of 1 mm. per minute when the upper
    10 cm. of its length is heated in a prescribed furnace * at the rate of
    approximately 5oC. per minute.  (*See "A Method for Measuring The Softening
    Temperature of Glass", J.T. Littleton, J. Am. Ceramic Soc., 10(4), 259
    (1927).

    SURFACE DEFORMATION

    A reshaping operation involving only the surface of the glass preform and
    only partially through the thickness and wherein the overall shape of the
    preform throughout its breadth and width is unaltered.

    TEMPER

    See subclass 114.

    III.    GENERAL LINES WITH OTHER CLASSES

    A.      Classification lines in subclasses of Class 65

    Class   Class 65 Subclass
    8       60.1+
    29      36, 430+, 443+
    83      112, 133, 174
    106     33.1+
    134     168
    156     23, 31, 36, 37, 42, 376+
    241     21
    250     111
    366     134.1+, 178
    427,    30.1, 31, 50, 60.1

    408     166
    451     61



    B.      Other Class Lines


    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, subclasses 295+ for processes
    directed to crystallizing an inorganic compound or non-metallic element.
    Although silicon and silicon dioxide are arbitrarily considered to be glass
    materials for Class 65, a process of growing these polycrystalline
    materials is proper for Class 23, even though a rod is used as a bait,
    unless the shape formed is not a result of crystallization or deposition on
    the rod.  If crystallization is combined with specific glassworking and/or
    treating of silicon or silicon dioxide, the process is proper for Class 65,
    but see Class 438 for semiconductor device manufacture.  Processes of
    growing single-crystal of all types of materials, including silicon or
    silicon dioxide, are proper for Class 117.  The proper placement of the
    original of a patent claiming a Class 23 and/or Class 117 species of
    crystallization and a Class 65 species, or having multiple disclosure with
    only generic claims, is Class 117 first, then Class 23, then Class 65.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 400.1+ and 33+ for a process or
    apparatus, respectively, directed to glass working or treating combined
    with a metal working operation or means.

    53,     Package Making, particularly subclasses 403+, 79+, and 266.1+ for
    methods or apparatus, respectively for filling and/or evacuating glass
    receptacles and sealing same by a glass working operation.  See the
    references to Class 65 in the notes to the definition of subclasses 403+ of
    Class 53; and subclasses 111+ and 428+ for a process of, or apparatus for
    sealing-off, per se, of a filled glass container by a glass working
    operation under conditions which protect or affect the contents of the
    container except where the glass working operation inherently results in
    protecting or affecting the contents in which case the process and
    apparatus are classified in Class 65.

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes and non-coating apparatus for
    growing therein-defined single-crystal of all types of materials, including
    inorganic or organic,  including silicon or silica (silicon dioxide).

    164,    Metal Founding, appropriate subclasses for processes and apparatus
    for metal casting.  A patent disclosing working of named materials for
    Class 164 and Class 65 is classified in Class 164 unless the only species
    claimed or the only specific example is glass in which case the patent is
    classified in Class 65.  Combined operations including metal casting and
    glass working and/or treating are classified in Class 164. See Class 164,
    subclasses 91+ for processes of casting metal on a glass preform.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for
    distillation of glass while in the liquid state.  The inclusion of the step
    of melting solid glass to the liquid state does not exclude the patent from
    Class 202.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, appropriate subclasses, for a
    process of distilling high melting mixtures.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclasses for
    applying electrical or wave energy to molten or preformed glass to bring
    about a chemical change (e.g., color change, etc.) of at least one
    constituent of the glass; follow the general guidelines for placement of an
    operation involving the combination of at least one Class 204 step in
    sequence with a separate Class 65 step as explained at the beginning of the
    Class 204 definition under I, (4) and (5) Notes.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 687+ for electrolytic material
    treatment, especially subclass 769 for electrolytic treatment of solid
    glass, silica, quartz, or optical material.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, for a process of, or
    means for advancing material of indeterminate length; see Note V under the
    class definition of Class 226 for its line with material - modifying
    classes which include feeding of intermediate length work.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    for processes of working or treating plastic materials not otherwise
    provided for.  A patent disclosing working or treating of named materials
    for Class 264 and Class 65 is classified in Class 264 unless the only
    species claimed is glass or the only specific example relates to glass in
    which case the patent is classified in Class 65.  A patent claiming a
    combined process for Class 65 and Class 264 is classified in Class 65.
    Class 264 takes processes directed to (1) shaping a mass of green siliceous
    material and subsequently firing or curing the material to set the material
    or (2) placing discrete siliceous particles, other than glass fibers or
    mineral wool, onto a mold surface which particles are heated on or
    subsequent to contact with the surface to fuse the particles to each other.
     A process directed to (1) heating a material within the scope of Class 65
    to the molten state and forming a shaped preform therefrom or (2) bulk
    depositing glass fibers into a mold surface and thereafter fusing the
    fibers to each other is classified in Class 65.  A combined Class 65 and
    264 operation is classified in Class 65.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 245.1+ for apparatus directed to
    crystallizing a material within the class definition of Class 23.  Although
    silicon and silicon dioxide are arbitrarily considered to be glass for
    Class 65, a process of, or apparatus for, growing crystals of these
    materials is placed in Class 23 (for a process exception, see (5) Note in
    Class 148, subclasses 1.5+) even though a rod is used as a bait unless the
    shape formed is not a result of crystallization or deposition on the rod.
    A combination of crystallization and specific glassworking and/or treating
    silicon or silicon dioxide is placed in Class 65.  A patent claiming a
    Class 23 species of crystallization and a Class 65 species or having a
    multiple disclosure with generic claims only is classified in Class 23.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, for process of manufacturing
    inorganic compounds, per se.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus, for
    apparatus for shaping or reshaping plastic materials or sizing and/or
    vulcanizing rubber preforms not otherwise provided for.  The original copy
    of a patent disclosing named materials for Class 65 and Class 425 is
    classified in Class 425, unless the only species claimed is glass or the
    only specific example relates to glass, in which case the document is
    classified in Class 65.  A document claiming the combination of Class 65
    and Class 425 apparatus is classified in Class 65.  Apparatus for shaping
    powdered glass with means to heat subsequently to obtain fusion bonding is
    classified in Class 425; however, apparatus shaping glass wool or mineral
    wool with subsequent fusion bonding is classified in Class 65.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, for the combination of
    Class 437 unit coating operation or Class 437 unit etching operation with
    glass melting, shaping or forming, joining, or heat treating.  Moreover,
    Class 438 also takes the heat treating, per se, of Class 438 semiconductor
    material if for purposes of modifying the electrical properties thereof.
    Additionally, various classes take mounting or packaging operations of
    semiconductor devices when glass melting, glass shaping, glass forming, or
    glass heat treating is combined with any coating, adhesive bonding, metal
    casting, metal working/deforming, metal fusion bonding, or other chemical
    or mechanical manufacturing operation. See notes therein for a detailed
    explanation of the relevant lines.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing
    appropriate subclasses, for processes of, or apparatus for the manufacture,
    repair or salvage of electric lamps and electric lamp space discharge
    devices. Combined processes and apparatus including a glass working and/or
    treating operation and a lamp making operation are classified in Class 445.
    The inclusion of the step of exhausting or providing a special atmosphere
    in the envelope is considered a lamp making operation for Class 445.  For
    other lamp making operations provided for in Class 445, see the class
    definitions of Class 445.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, subclasses 2+ for processes of
    crystallizing devitrified glass-ceramic compositions; subclasses 11+ for
    preparing glass compositions; subclass 39 for forming pores or open cells
    within glass compositions; and subclasses 40, 41+, and 53+ for particular
    composition components.  The combination of preparing, crystallizing, or
    pore-forming of glass compositions with specific glass working and/or
    treating is classified in Class 65; however, (a) a step of melting with
    heating to a specific temperature, or (b) the recitation of a forming step
    by name only (e.g., drawing, working, blowing, pressing, etc.), or (c)
    refining molten glass by name only is not enough to prevent placement in
    Class 50l.  A Class 501 operation combined with specific glass treating is
    placed in Class 65; however, mere recitation of "treating the glass",
    "annealing", or "tempering" by these words only is not enough to prevent
    placement in Class 501.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    251+ for treating solids to prevent gas emissions and appropriate
    subclasses for vitrification of waste for purposes of containment.

    IV.     MISCELLANEOUS SEARCH NOTES

    A.      Processes and Apparatus

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, appropriate subclasses, for processes
    and/or apparatus involving mechanical interengaging of fibers or strands
    not otherwise provided for not combined with a glass working or treating
    operation.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, appropriate subclasses,
    for processes and/or apparatus for spinning, twisting or twining of glass
    fibers or filaments not combined with a glass working or treating operation.

    79,     Button Making, subclass 2, for a process of and/or apparatus for
    making buttons or parts thereof, and assembling the same except such as are
    formed of plastic material (e.g., glass) which are formed in molds or are
    molded upon a shank.

    148,    Metal Treatment, particularly subclasses 240+ for processes of
    reactive coating of metal as defined thereunder. The combination of
    reactive coating of metal with a glass working or treating operation is
    proper for Class 65. However, the combination of a significant heat
    treatment to modify or maintain the internal physical property (i.e.,
    microstructure) or chemical property of the metal with a glass working or
    glass heat treating operation is proper in Class 148.

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses, for conveyors,
    carriers and forwarders to move glass articles from one place to another
    irrespective of the particular physical condition of the article, per se.
    The positive recitation of a glass working station in a claim, as


            such, does not constitute glass working means for Class 65.

    249,    Static Molds, for female molds, per se, for shaping molten glass
    not combined with means to displace the glass by application of external
    force.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, appropriate subclasses, for apparatus
    peculiarly adapted for the treatment of metals and metalliferous materials.

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses, for work holders.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, appropriate subclasses,
    for manual means for handling or manipulating glassware not combined with
    glass working or treating means.

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclass 177
    for methods of making ophthalmic lenses which usually involve some
    combination of grinding, glass manufacturing, and adhesive bonding; and
    subclass 178 for methods of securing an eyeglass lens in its support, or of
    assembling such lenses in spectacle frames.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    900 for a cross reference art collection of optical methods.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, for radiation imagery process not combined with a glass working
    step; and subclass 13 for a glass block having an image therein.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 300+ for processes of producing high temperature (Tc greater
    than 30 K) superconductors; particularly subclass 420 for glass working,
    forming, or treating operations combined with superconductor manufacture.

    B.      PRODUCTS

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), for static building structure
    and related elements having a glass component, e.g., a pane, particularly
    subclasses 171.3+, 204.52, 204.591+, 306+, 761+, and 788+.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclass 202 for a knitted glass textile
    fabric or article.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 420+ for woven glass textile fabric
    or article.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, appropriate subclasses, for glass bottles, jars
    and receptacles.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 2.1+ for an envelope for an electric lamp
    or similar device, e.g., cathode-ray tubes (made wholly or partly of glass)
    not limited to use with any specific electric device or not limited by
    claimed structure to electrical use, and subclasses 377+, 602 and 662+ for
    a receptacle provided with a glass portion.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses, for
    electric lamp and electric space discharge device structures, such as
    cathode-ray tubes, especially subclasses 461+ for screens and 477+ for
    envelopes employed in cathode-ray tubes.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements,
    appropriate subclasses for glass structures having particular optical
    properties.

    362,    Illumination, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 326+
    and 341+ for glass reflectors and refractors, respectively.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 265+ for miscellaneous bonded
    joints which may comprise metal to metal and to glass, the metal and glass
    joint being disclosed as being formed by a glass working operation.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 34 for
    hermetically sealed spaced glass sheets (e.g., double glazed window),
    subclass 38 for a light transmitting layer with a frame or border
    therearound (e.g., stained glass), and subclasses 426+ for a layer of
    quartz or glass next to a layer of another material.


CLS 65/17.1
TXT PROCESSES:

    Processes under the class definition of working or treating glass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the solidification or vitrification of waste for purposes of
    containment and for the treatment of slag to prevent the emission of
    hazardous or toxic gases.


CLS 65/17.2
TXT Sol-gel or liquid phase route utilized:

    Processes under subclass 17.1 wherein a sol-gel route or liquid phase route
    procedure is used during any stage of working or treating glass.


CLS 65/17.3
TXT With shaping of particulate material and subsequent fusing of particles:

    Processes under subclass 17.1 combined with a step of associating a mass of
    individual discrete particulate material and shaping said mass and either
    during or subsequent to the shaping operation, heating the material to
    effect fusing of the particles one to another.

    (1)     Note.  Processes claiming depositing particulate material into a
    mold cavity which its intended function is not to shape the mass of
    particles prior to fusing them but intended to shape a molten or plastic
    mass formed by heating the particles are classified in subclass 65 of this
    class (65).

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, patents claiming a step
    of shaping a mass of glass particles which are fused together in a manner
    to preserve the shape of the mass of glass particles combined with a
    subsequent glassworking or treating operation (e.g., pore forming or
    annealing, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68+,    for processes of forming an article from molten glass and see (1)
    Note above.

    114,    for glassworking apparatus combined with means to shape an article
    from particulate material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    62.2+ for laminating processes under the class definition, which includes a
    step of forming a lamina or laminae by bulk deposition of discrete
    particles to form a self-sustaining article (e.g., fiber batt, etc.).

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 43+ and 603+ for processes within the class definition for
    vitrification, sintering, or firing of inorganic materials, which may
    include shaping of clay or glass particles prior to firing to form a
    self-supporting article. See the class definitions of Class 65,
    particularly section III, B, and the notes to Classes 264 and 425. See also
    subclass 6 for processes under the class definition for forming solid
    particulate material directly from a molten or liquid mass (other than
    glass) with subsequent uniting of the formed particles; and subclass 125
    for processes directed to a uniting step not otherwise provided for.


CLS 65/17.4
TXT Including flame or gas contact:

    Processes under subclass 17.3 in which the particulate material is formed
    in a flame or particulate or fused material is contacted by a flame or gas
    to effect treatment thereof.


CLS 65/17.5
TXT Employing nonoxide additive:

    Processes under subclass 17.3 in which a nonoxide material which is
    generally not an ingredient of a glass composition is incorporated with the
    particulate material prior to fusing.


CLS 65/17.6
TXT With treatment subsequent to fusing:

    Processes under subclass 17.3 including an additional step of treating the
    fused glass particles (e.g., shaping, heat treatment, coating, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Mere cooling of fused material is not considered proper for
    classification here.

    (2)     Note.  Subsequent melting of shaped and fused particulate material
    is properly classified here.


CLS 65/19
TXT Processes under subclass 17.1 directed to working and/or treating of slag
    usually formed by corrosion or fluxing of refractories, or formed as a
    by-product in metallurgical processes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    376+,   for a process of forming fibers or filaments from slag.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, 501, Compositions:  Ceramic,
    subclass 28 for glass compositions having slag; subclass 767  for the use
    of slag as raw material in making Portland type cement; and subclasses 624,
    679, 714, 782, 789  for other inorganic ingredient containing compositions
    including slag.  For the line between Class 106 and Class 65, see the
    reference to Class 106 in the definitions of Class 65.


CLS 65/20
TXT Processes under subclass 19 which include the step of contacting molten
    slag with a gaseous material thereby forming voids in the slag.

    (1)     Note.  Generally the gaseous material is formed in situ by
    contacting the molten slag with water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for processes of glass working and/or treating glass combined with
    the step of producing pores in situ of a glass composition to form a
    cellular glass product and see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 65/21.1
TXT Self-supporting particle making (e.g., bead, ball, granule, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 17.1 for a process directed to forming
    individually distinct separate particulate material, particles of which are
    self-supporting at least in one stage of manufacture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19+,    for processes in which slag is utilized as the starting material.

    141,    for apparatus for melt comminuting by shock cooling melt by
    enhancing surface contact with a cooling fluid.

    142+,   for particulate bead or ball making apparatus.

    376+,   for a process of making a fiber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 23 and 65+
    for processes and apparatus for comminuting hard glass combined with
    heating and/or cooling of the glass where the temperature modification does
    not effect a change in a physical or chemical property of the glass (e.g.,
    removing water of hydration, annealing).

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 222 for a tumbling type agglomerating means for particulate
    material; and subclasses 332+ for means rolling a discrete charge of stock
    to form a ball; see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 65/21.2
TXT By molten glass comminuting:

    Processes under subclass 21.1 wherein glass in molten state is comminuted
    to form discrete particles and is solidified in its comminuted form.

    (1)     Note.  To be classified in this subclass the material must be
    subdivided from an original liquid mass and then the subdivided particles
    solidified with no substantial change in shape and size.

    (2)     Note.  Particles formed by a molten glass stream entering a liquid
    quenching both are not proper for this subclass since no distinct liquid
    particles are formed which are subsequently solidified.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    subclasses 5+ for processes under the class definition of liquid
    comminuting to form discrete particles and note references to other
    pertinent classes listed thereunder.


CLS 65/21.3
TXT Spheroidizing or rounding of solid glass particles:

    Processes under subclass 21.1 directed to the reshaping of solid,
    irregular, or nonspherical particulate glass material wherein said
    irregularities are diminished or the particles are caused to become more
    spherical or rounded in shape without loss of material therefrom and by
    means other than use of a mold or shaping surface therefor and in which the
    individual and separate identities of the particles is maintained.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass are generally directed to those
    processes in which heat is employed to soften the particles so as to permit
    the internal cohesive forces of the particles to effect said reshaping as
    defined.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    subclass 15 for processes under the class definition of spheroidizing
    particulate matter.


CLS 65/21.4
TXT Hollow or porous particle:

    Processes under subclass 21.1 including the step of forming hollow spheres
    or forming pores or voids in particulate material.


CLS 65/21.5
TXT With mechanical shaping or subdividing:

    Processes under subclass 21.1 including mechanical shaping of molten glass
    into desired particulate form.

    (1)     Note.  Bead shaping or rotating wire or spindle included hereunder
    as well as comminuting solids by ultrasonic vibration.


CLS 65/22
TXT Processes under subclass 17.1 combined with the step of forming pores or
    open cells in situ within a glass composition by a gas forming agent during
    or subsequent to the formation of a glass product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for processes of foaming slag in situ to form a cellular product.

    141,    for melt disintegrating or puffing means including fluid-melt
    contacting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    77+ for a process of bonding lamina including the step of forming pores in
    situ within a lamina.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    subclasses 41+ for processes under the class definition, which include a
    pore forming in situ step.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, subclass 39 for processes of forming pores
    or open cells with a glass melt not combined with specific glass working
    and/or treating.  The line between this class (501) and Class 65 on patents
    claiming the combination or pore-forming and broad glass working and/or
    treating is stated in the class definitions of Class 65.

    521,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 50+ for processes
    directed to the production of porous or cellular resinous bodies.


CLS 65/23
TXT Processes under subclass 17.1 which include the step of either (1)
    adhesively adhering a separate part or material, or (2) associating a
    destructible separate part or material with a glass part, then performing a
    glass working or treating operation, and subsequently discarding the
    separate part or material by either (1) stripping the part or material from
    the glass part, or (2) destroying the separate part or material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 423+ for a mechanical manufacturing
    process including a step of utilizing transitory attached or associated
    separate material.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    89 and 540+ for processes and apparatus for direct contact transfer of
    ceramic material on a substrate to another substrate combined with
    vitrification or firing of the ceramic material. Processes and apparatus
    directed to a direct transfer of ceramic material to soft glass are
    classified in Class 65; and see this class (156), subclass 155 for adhesive
    bonding including a step involving destruction of a transitory material.


CLS 65/24
TXT Processes under subclass 17.1 which include the step of applying to the
    glass or the apparatus a separate and distinct layer which functions to
    either (1) lubricate the glass apparatus, or (2) prevent adhesion during a
    glass working or treating operation of the glass to another glass or to the
    apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60.1+,  for a process of coating glass with a coating material not intended
    to function as a parting or lubricating layer and see the Search Notes
    thereunder.

    169     and 170, for glass working apparatus combined with means providing
    a parting or lubricating means, respectively.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Composition:  Coating or Plastic, subclass 2 for coating or plastic
    compositions specially designed for use in the prevention of adherence of a
    coating material to a surface.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    289 for a process of laminating including use of a parting or release layer.


CLS 65/25.1
TXT Providing a gaseous layer between glass and apparatus:

    Processes under subclass 24 in which the parting or lubricating layer is a
    gaseous fluid between the glass and the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  The gaseous fluid may be formed by vaporization of a liquid
    between the glass stock, and see the search notes thereunder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182,    for apparatus including a fluid support for the glass stock, and
    see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 65/25.2
TXT Sheet:

    Processes under subclass 25.1 in which the glass is in sheet form.


CLS 65/25.3
TXT Formed from molten glass:

    Processes under subclass 25.2 which include the step of forming a glass
    sheet from a molten glass composition.


CLS 65/25.4
TXT Reshaping:

    Processes under subclass 25.2 which include the step of reshaping a glass
    sheet.


CLS 65/26
TXT Processes under subclass 24 directed to applying the parting or lubricating
    layer on a glass working or treating apparatus by a coating operation.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes applying a coating of water to
    apparatus to prevent sticking of the glass thereto.


CLS 65/27
TXT Processes under subclass 17.1 which include (1) the step of repairing of
    the apparatus; and/or (2) the cleaning of the apparatus; and/or (3) the
    step of preventing the formation of dust from a glass batch or controlling
    batch dust.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168,    for glass working or treating apparatus combined with positive
    apparatus cleaning means.

    171+,   for glass working and/or treating apparatus combined with repair,
    assembly or disassembly means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses,
    for processes and apparatus for cleaning, not otherwise provided for.  See
    the Search Notes under the class definition.


CLS 65/28
TXT Processes under subclass 17.1 including the step of (1) using surplus or
    discarded material from a glass working or treating operation in a process
    of glass manufacture; or (2) mending otherwise unusable parts or material
    by a glass working operation for reuse; or (3) preventing spreading of
    checks or cracks in a glass part during the formation of the glass part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165,    for apparatus with a reject catcher, deflector or holder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 402.01+, for a process of restoring,
    renewing, or repairing articles for reuse; and subclasses 403.1+ for a
    process of scrap recovery or utilization.


CLS 65/29.1
TXT With program, time, or cyclic control:

    Processes under subclass 17.1 including the use of a (a) clocked, (b) set
    of coded instructions, or (c) sequentially repeated operation during any
    stage of forming or treating the glass.


CLS 65/29.11
TXT Electric computer or data processing system utilized:

    Processes under subclass 29.1 including the use of a data processor or an
    electrical computer during any stage of forming or treating the glass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 550+
    for the application of a computer or data processor, per se. This class
    (65) is proper for placement of documents claiming the use of a computer or
    data processor along with a glassworking or treating step.


CLS 65/29.12
TXT With measuring, sensing, inspecting, indicating, or testing:

    Processes under subclass 17.1 including  a step of visually, chemically, or
    physically determining or evaluating some chemical or physical property or
    characteristic of glass.

    (1)     Note.  Equivalent terms include examining, diagnosing, analyzing,
    observing, viewing, evaluating, and monitoring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158,    for apparatus used for measuring and testing combined with a
    signal, indicator, inspection means, register, or recorder for glass,
    exclusive of fibers, filaments, waveguides, or preforms thereof.

    377,    for processes of measuring, controlling, analyzing, inspecting, or
    testing the manufacture of glass fibers, waveguides, filaments, or preforms.

    483,    for apparatus used for measuring, controlling, analyzing,
    inspecting, or testing glass fibers, waveguides, filaments, or preforms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for testing or
    measuring of general application; see the search notes under the class
    definition of Class 73.


CLS 65/29.13
TXT Combustion chamber atmosphere:

    Processes under subclass 29.12 wherein the environment inside a combustion
    chamber is measured, analyzed, tested, inspected, or controlled.

    (1)     Note.  Processes involving controlling or regulating pressure
    inside a furnace or combustion chamber is considered proper for
    classification in this subclass.


CLS 65/29.14
TXT Diameter, width, or thickness of formed article:

    Processes under subclass 29.12 directed to measuring, analyzing, testing,
    inspecting, or controlling the diameter, width, or thickness of a formed
    article.


CLS 65/29.15
TXT Fluid pressure:

    Processes under subclass 29.12 directed to measuring, analyzing, testing,
    inspecting, or controlling any associated fluid pressure during the
    manufacture or the treatment of glass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29.13,  for processes of measuring, analyzing, testing, inspecting, or
    controlling fluid pressure inside of a furnace or combustion chamber.


CLS 65/29.16
TXT Batch or feed material:

    Processes under subclass 29.12 directed to measuring, testing, analyzing,
    inspecting, or controlling raw material or stock feed used to form the
    glass (e.g., article or preform, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Processes involving controlling or measuring the weight of
    the glass forming feed material are found here.


CLS 65/29.17
TXT Level or flow of molten material:

    Processes under subclass 29.12 directed to measuring, analyzing, testing,
    inspecting, or controlling the elevation, viscosity, or flow rate of the
    melt or molten material.


CLS 65/29.18
TXT Magnetic, electromagnetic, or wave energy utilized (e.g., light, infrared,
    ultrasonic, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 29.12 combined with the use of magnetic,
    electromagnetic radiation, wave, sonic, or ultrasonic energy during any
    stage of forming or treating the glass.

    (1)     Note.  Electromagnetic radiation includes:

    a.      Gamma rays

    b.      X-rays

    c.      Atomic particles (i.e., alpha rays, beta rays, electrons)

    d.      Ultraviolet rays

    e.      Visible rays

    f.      Infrared rays

    g.      Actinic

    h.      Laser

    i.      Microwave

    j.      Radio wave

            This list is not intended to be exhaustive and is not limited to
    the above examples.


CLS 65/29.19
TXT Temperature:

    Processes under subclass 29.12 directed to measuring, controlling,
    inspecting, analyzing, or testing a change in sensible heat during any
    stage of forming or treating the glass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing,  appropriate subclasses for
    processes of determining either (a) a characteristic or a condition of
    glass or (b) a system utilizing heating or cooling as a significant part of
    the test, wherein no glass working or treating is involved.


CLS 65/29.21
TXT Of molten glass:

    Processes under subclass 29.19 wherein the glass is in a softened or molten
    state.


CLS 65/30.1
TXT With chemically reactive treatment of glass preform:

    Processes under subclass 17.1 combined with a treatment of a glass preform
    by a material which chemically reacts therewith.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes patents claiming the step of coating
    a glass substrate and reacting the coating with a constituent of the glass
    substrate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20      and 22, for processes including a foaming step which may involve a
    chemical reaction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 399+ for processes of coating, per
    se, wherein a substrate other than glass supplies at least a portion of the
    coating.


CLS 65/30.11
TXT To enhance the ability to darken or change color  in response to radiation
    exposure (e.g., photochromic):

    Processes under subclass 30.1 wherein the chemically reactive treatment is
    for the purpose of enhancing the photochromic property of the glass or to
    render the glass photochromic.

    (1)     Note.  "Photochromic" refers to the ability of a glass to
    reversibly change color, darken, and fade on exposure to the presence and
    removal of electromagnetic radiation.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein are processes which effect parallel
    alignment of crystallites of a colorant substance, but in which there is
    insufficient crystal formation to actually effect a coloration or darkening
    without the further step of exposure to electromagnetic radiation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30.13,  for processes of imparting color to glass by an ion exchange
    process.

    33.1,   for processes of devitrifying glass or vitrifying crystallized
    glass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclass 13, for products comprising an image contained within a
    transparent base, which may have been partially prepared by a process
    classified in Class 65, Glass Manufacturing, subclass 30.11; subclass 351
    for thermographic processes of preparing a colored image involving applying
    heat to develop the image, following the imaging step; and subclasses 353+
    for thermographic processes of developing an image involving applying heat
    to develop the image during dry development thereof, following the imaging
    step.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, subclasses 2+ for devitrified glass-ceramic
    compositions and processes of making them; and subclass 13 for photochromic
    glass compositions and processes for their manufacture.


CLS 65/30.12
TXT To hydrate the glass:

    Processes under subclass 30.1 which comprise the incorporation of water in
    the glass.


CLS 65/30.13
TXT With metal ion penetrating into glass (i.e., ion exchange):

    Processes under subclass 30.1 including the step of exchanging selected
    metal ions of the outer layers of the glass for other ions.

    (1)     Note.  The ion exchange process may be for the purpose, e.g., of
    imparting a color to the glass or to alter its refractive index.


CLS 65/30.14
TXT To temper or strengthen the glass:

    Processes under subclass 30.13 wherein the ion exchange process is for the
    purpose of altering the temper or strength of the glass.

    (1)     Note.  Such processes are sometimes referred to as chemical
    tempering.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for tempering in a bath of liquid or solids with no specific
    disclosure of ion exchange occurring.


CLS 65/31
TXT Processes under subclass 30 in which the chemical treatment includes use of
    a chemical reagent to remove a portion or constituent of the glass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, for etching of glass materials by
    either chemical etching or physical solvation wherein a glass manufacturing
    step is not employed.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 299+ for processes of coating
    combined with a pretreatment of the base.


CLS 65/32.1
TXT Operating under inert or reducing conditions:

    Processes under subclass 17.1 including an operation carried under
    controlled conditions which provide an inert or reducing area therefore to
    prevent oxidation or to cause chemical reduction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157,    for glass working treating means including means providing special
    gaseous atmosphere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, particularly subclasses 240+ for processes of
    reactive coating of metal as defined thereunder.  The combination of
    reactive coating of metal with a glass working or treating operation is
    proper for Class 65.  However, the combination of a significant heat
    treatment to modify or maintain the internal physical property (i.e.,
    microstructure) or chemical property of the metal with a glass working or
    glass treating operation is proper in Class 148.


CLS 65/32.2
TXT With bonding or sealing:

    Processes under subclass 32.1 including a step of bonding glass to another
    material or part or sealing a glass material or part to or into another
    material or part.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are process of e.g., melt bonding two glass
    parts together or sealing a metal terminal in a glass bulb by heat
    softening the glass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17.3    for a process of sintering glass particles not performed under
    inert or reducing conditions.


CLS 65/32.3
TXT With crystallization or photochromism or phase separation:

    Processes under subclass 32.1 which comprises:  (a) partial or complete
    crystallization of a glass composition; (b) a color change occurring
    response to radiation impinging on glass; or (c) separation of phases of a
    glass composition.


CLS 65/32.4
TXT With coating:

    Processes under subclass 32.1 comprising a coating step.

    (1)     Note.  A glass composition may provide either the substrate or the
    coating composition, or both of them.


CLS 65/32.5
TXT With forming glass from molten state with treatment of molten glass, or
    with drawing of glass in softened state:

    Processes under subclass 32.1 comprising shaping or treating glass which
    has been melted or draw glass which is in a softened but not melted state.


CLS 65/33.1
TXT Devitrifying glass or vitrifying crystalline glass (e.g., starting with or
    forming crystalline glass, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 17.1 which include the step of converting glass
    (a) from a vitreous state to a crystalline state, or (b) from a crystalline
    state to a vitreous state.

    (1)     Note.  The intent to vitrify or to devitrify must be stipulated for
    classification in this and indented subclasses.


CLS 65/33.2
TXT Electromagnetic radiation or resulting heat utilized (e.g., gamma rays,
    X-rays, atomic particles, UV, visible, IR, actinic, laser, microwave or
    radio wave, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 33.1 wherein during any stage of an operation
    electromagnetic radiation or resulting heat of radiation is used.

    (1)     Note.  Electromagnetic radiation includes:

    a.      Gamma rays

    b.      X-rays

    c.      Atomic particles (i.e., alpha rays, beta rays, electrons)

    d.      Ultraviolet rays

    e.      Visible

    f.      Infrared

    g.      Actinic

    h.      Laser

    i.      Microwave

    j.      Radio wave

            This list is not intended to be exhaustive and is not limited to
    the above examples.


CLS 65/33.3
TXT Halogen containing phase (e.g., crystalline or noncrystalline, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 33.1 wherein the composition of the glass includes
    halogen material during some phase of the vitrifying or devitrifying
    operation.

    (1)     Note.  The halogens are:

    Fluorine (F)

    Chlorine (Cl)

    Bromine (Br)

    Iodine (I)

    Astatine (At)


CLS 65/33.4
TXT With coating:

    Processes under subclass 33.1 wherein a coating which may be vitrified or
    devitrified is applied to a substrate which may be vitrified or devitrified
    glass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33.5,   for processes wherein the applied material is used to bond glass to
    a formed part.


CLS 65/33.5
TXT With fusion bonding glass to a formed part (e.g., devitrified seals, glass
    to metal, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 33.1 directed to fusion bonding of a glass part to
    another part of the same or different preform by adherence or coherence at
    the interface of the parts, wherein at least one of the parts is
    self-supporting prior to the bonding operation.

    (1)     Note.  The coherence is usually effected by heat, externally
    applied or by the residual heat retained by the glass part from a previous
    operation, which renders the adherent face of the vitrified or devitrified
    glass part soft, thereby permitting fusion bonding directly to the adherent
    face of the other part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 428+ and 700+ for a process or apparatus,
    respectively, for mechanical joining of parts.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for processes and apparatus for adhesive securing of
    parts other than by glass fusion or metal fusion, see especially subclass
    89 for a process of laminating comprising decal-type transfer of a lamina
    of ceramic material to a base with subsequent firing thereof to bond the
    lamina to the base, and subclasses 99+ for optically transparent glass
    sandwich making including a Class 156 bonding combined with a Class 65
    reshaping (e.g., bending) operation. A process reciting a Class 156 bonding
    step and a Class 65 bonding step is classified in Class 65.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, for bonding of glass to metal by metal solder.


CLS 65/33.6
TXT Glass applied in powdered form (i.e., frit):

    Processes under subclass 33.5 wherein the glass used to form the bond is in
    the form of small particles or dust.


CLS 65/33.7
TXT Alumino-silicate containing phase:

    Processes under subclass 33.1 wherein an inorganic aluminum-silicon
    material is present in the composition of the glass during some phase of
    the vitrifying or devitrifying operation.


CLS 65/33.8
TXT Containing at least 3 percent lithium or lithium oxide (e.g., spodumene,
    eucryptite, petalite, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 33.7 wherein the aluminum-silicon material also
    contains at least 3 percent lithium or lithium oxide.

    (1)     Note.  Some of the most common lithium-alumino-silicate containing
    materials found in this subclass are:

    a.      spodumene

    b.      eucryptite

    c.      petalite

            This list is not intended to be exhaustive and is not limited to
    the above examples.


CLS 65/33.9
TXT Forming product or preform from molten glass:

    Processes under subclass 33.1 wherein a vitrified or devitrified glass
    product or preform produced is formed directly from molten glass.


CLS 65/34
TXT Processes under subclass 17.1 which include the step of closing an opening
    of a glass receptacle, which opening was used to exhaust a gas from the
    receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270,    for glassworking apparatus with glass envelope tipping off means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, appropriate subclasses especially subclasses 403+,
    for sealing of receptacles combined with a filling step.  See the reference
    to Class 53 in the class definitions of Class 65 for the lines between
    these classes and see the class definitions of Class 53 for related fields
    of search.


CLS 65/35
TXT Processes under subclass 17.1 which include the step of moving a glass
    preform up and down or to and fro or a combination of such motions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    178+,   for means to agitate molten glass in combination with glass working
    or treating means.

    302,    for article forming means utilizing mold motion in forming.


CLS 65/36
TXT Processes under subclass 17.1 directed to fusion bonding of a glass part to
    another part of the same or different preform by adherence or coherence at
    the interface of the parts at least one of the parts being self-supporting
    prior to the bonding operation.

    (1)     Note.  The coherence is usually effected by heat, externally
    applied or by the residual heat retained by the glass part from a previous
    operation, which renders the adherent face of the glass part soft thereby
    permitting fusion bonding of the glass part directly to the adherent face
    of the other part.

    (2)     Note.  Processes of forming a glass part from molten glass in situ
    on another part are within the scope of this and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102+,   for a process of collapsing or sealing off of a glass preform with
    bonding or fusion thereof.

    146,    for laminating apparatus including means to feed diverse material
    thereto and subclasses 152+ for fusion bonding means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 428+ and 700+, for a process or
    apparatus, respectively, for mechanical joining of parts.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses, for processes and apparatus for adhesive securing
    of parts other than by glass fusion or metal fusion, see especially
    subclass 89 for a process of laminating comprising decal-type transfer of a
    lamina of ceramic material to a base with subsequent firing thereof to bond
    the lamina to the base, and subclasses 99+ for optically transparent glass
    sandwich making including a Class 156 bonding combined with a Class 65
    reshaping (e.g., bending) operation.  A process reciting a Class 65 bonding
    step and a Class 156 bonding step is classified in Class 65.  For other
    lines with Class 156, see the notes in subclasses 23, 31, 37+, and 42  in
    Class 65.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 122.1+ for bonding of glass to
    metal by metal solder.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, particularly
    subclasses 107+ and 455+ for methods for joining plural semiconductor
    substrates. While Class 65 considers silicon and silicon dioxide glass, and
    hence takes the melting, shaping, or fusion bonding of the same (as well as
    combined operations whether preparatory or subsequent to the melting,
    shaping, or fusion bonding step), if the structure formed is identified as
    having utility for semiconductor electrical devices, placement is proper in
    Class 438; see the search notes therein.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing.


CLS 65/37
TXT Processes under subclass 36 directed to the formation of an optical lens by
    a bonding operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    99+ and 443+ for processes and apparatus for making optically transparent
    sandwiches by a laminating operation provided for in Class 156 combined
    with a glass bending operation.

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclass 177
    for methods of making ophthalmic lenses which usually involve some
    combination of grinding, glass manufacturing and adhesive bonding.


CLS 65/38
TXT Processes under subclass 37 which include the step of bonding at least
    three preformed parts to each other in the fabrication of a lens.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for bonding of a subassembly with subsequent assembly and bonding
    of preformed parts only.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    182 for processes of bonding of at least two bonded subassemblies and see
    the "Search Notes" thereunder.


CLS 65/39
TXT Processes under subclass 37 which include the step of (1) shaping, during
    bonding, of molten glass to assume the shape of a configured glass lens
    part; and/or (2) reshaping during bonding of a separate preformed glass
    part to assume the shape of a configured glass lens part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48+,    for forming of a glass part from molten glass and bonding thereof
    to another formed part not involving lens making, and see the "Search
    Notes" thereunder.


CLS 65/40
TXT Processes under subclass 36 which include the step of heating of the work
    by (1) subjecting the work to a changing electric field thereby
    transforming the electric energy into heat due to the resistance of the
    work to passage of current therethrough, or (2) passage of an electric
    current directly through the work which constitutes a part of an electrical
    circuit.

    (1)     Note.  The electrical energy must act directly on the work and not,
    for example, by convection or conduction of heat from an element not
    constituting a part of the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    272+ for processes of adhesive bonding including heating by dielectric loss
    or by passing current through work which is capable of conducting an
    electrical current therethrough, and see the reference to other classes
    under "Search Class" in subclass 272 of Class 156 for related fields of
    search.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 600+ for inductive heating, subclasses
    678+ for microwave heating, and subclasses 764+ for capacitive dielectric
    heating.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 27+ for a glass
    furnace reciting specific electrical structure or characteristics, and for
    a process including manipulation of an electrical glass furnace; see the
    "Search Notes" thereunder; and see the class line note in Class 65,
    subclass 134.


CLS 65/41
TXT Processes under subclass 36 which include the step of (1) annealing, or (2)
    tempering glass.


CLS 65/42
TXT Processes under subclass 36 directed to fusion bonding of at least two
    self-supporting parts and thereafter bringing together in a separate
    operation an additional self-supporting part with the bonded subassembly
    and then bonding the additional part to the subassembly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for processes of bonding at least three formed parts in the
    fabrication of a lens.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 469 for processes of joining subassemblies.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    182 for a process of bonding subassemblies. The combination of serially
    bonding individually handled parts together by a Class 65 operation in one
    stage and by a Class 156 operation in another stage is provided for in
    Class 65, in this subclass (42).


CLS 65/43
TXT Processes under subclass 36 directed to coating of the adherent face of at
    least one part prior to the bonding operation.

    (1)     Note.  Processes of bonding a previously coated part with another
    part are included herein.

    (2)     Note.  Melting of a self-supporting glass part to the molten state
    to form a glass coating on the joint interface of one of the parts is
    considered a coating operation for the purposes of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60.1+,  for a process of coating glass in general combined with a glass
    working or treating operation and see the notes thereunder for the scope of
    the term "coating" and related fields of search.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 240+ for a process for producing a
    reactive coating on solid metal.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, particularly
    subclasses 107+ and 455+ for methods for joining plural semiconductor
    substrates. While Class 65 considers silicon and silicon dioxide glass, and
    hence takes the melting, shaping or fusion bonding of the same (as well as
    combined operations whether preparatory or subsequent to the melting,
    shaping, or fusion bonding step), if the structure formed is identified as
    having utility for semiconductor electrical devices, placement is proper in
    Class 438;  see the search notes therein.


CLS 65/44
TXT Processes under subclass 36 directed to (1) altering the surface
    configuration only of the work by raising bosses or protuberances thereon
    or causing surface portions to be depressed below the plane surface of the
    work, or (2) forming or shaping the work into alternate ridges and grooves
    in wavelike shape.

    (1)     Note.  The embossing or corrugating may occur simultaneously with
    the bonding step.

    (2)     Note.  Transitory embossing or corrugating is within the scope of
    this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93,     for a process of forming a sheet including the step of corrugating,
    embossing or surface deforming the sheet.

    106,    for a process of corrugating or forming depressions in a glass
    sheet.

    151,    for embedding means on a roll which may function to emboss or
    corrugate glass in its soft state.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclasses 3.1+ for process and apparatus for embossing,
    per se.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 205+ for a process of
    corrugating and subclasses 209 and 219+ for embossing processes combined
    with a laminating operation, and subclasses 342+ for corrugating processes,
    per se, and see and "Search Notes" under these subclasses for related
    searches.


CLS 65/45
TXT Processes under subclass 36 combined with a step of fabricating a glass
    part from glass while in the molten or soft state by a molding or casting
    operation.

    (1)     Note.  The step of simultaneously forming the glass part and
    bonding the glass part to a self-supporting part is included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66+,    for processes for fabricating glass articles from glass while in
    the molten state.

    139+,   for apparatus for making electronic envelope header, terminals or
    stems including forming and fusion bonding means.

    146+,   for forming and fusion bonding apparatus including means to feed
    nonglass material thereto.

    152+,   for forming and fusion bonding apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 47+ for processes of metal casting, and
    see the reference to this class (164) in the class definitions of Class 65
    for the lines between these classes.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 110+ for means to manufacture a composite article including
    fluent or bulk stock shaping means and means to feed or support a preform
    to or on the shaping means; see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 65/46
TXT Processes under subclass 45 which include the step of applying gas pressure
    to shape the glass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66+,    for a process of forming an open cavity in a glass charge by
    differential gas pressure in a process of forming a glass article from
    molten glass while on a blow pipe and subclasses 68+, for blowing glass
    confined in a mold cavity, and see the "Search Notes" in these subclasses
    for related searches.

    87,     for a process of utilizing differential gas pressure to reshape
    hollow stock combined with the step of forming the hollow stock by a
    drawing operation.

    110,    for a process of reshaping tubular stock utilizing gaseous pressure.


CLS 65/47
TXT Processes under subclass 45 wherein the fabricating is conducted in a mold
    cavity, and see (1) Note of this subclass for the scope of the term "mold
    cavity".

    (1)     Note.  A recess in a part which constitutes an element of a
    composite product or a space between preformed elements to be joined and
    which receives a glass composition therein for simultaneous solidification
    and bonding to the part is considered a mold cavity for the purposes of
    this and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68+,    for processes of forming hollow glass articles in a mold cavity in
    general.


CLS 65/48
TXT Processes under subclass 47 wherein the step of bonding is conducted while
    the fabricated part remains in the mold cavity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 91+ for processes of forming composite
    products by casting molten metal onto a preform.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 117+ for means bonding a preform to plastic material in a
    plastic material shaping cavity.


CLS 65/49
TXT Processes under subclass 48 in which the part to which the molten glass is
    bonded is metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59,     for a process in general for bonding a glass preform to a metal
    preform.


CLS 65/50
TXT Processes under subclass 45 directed to forming a sheet from molten glass
    and fusion bonding a metal part to the glass prior to, during or subsequent
    to formation of the sheet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for a process of simultaneously forming a glass part in a mold
    cavity and bonding it to a metal part.

    59.1+,  for a process of bonding glass to metal in general.

    147+,   for apparatus including wire feed means to form and bond glass
    sheet to wire, to form wire reinforced glass.

    154,    for metal to glass fusion bonding apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclasses for processes of coating
    a substrate with molten glass.


CLS 65/51
TXT Processes under subclass 50 directed to associating a metal part with
    molten glass and then forming a sheet from the molten glass while in
    contact with the metal part.


CLS 65/52
TXT Processes under subclass 51 which includes the step of forming an
    additional glass sheet from molten glass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for a process of forming plural sheets or sheet-like streams from a
    common source of melt combined with glass to glass fusion bonding.

    98,     for a process of simultaneously forming at least two separate and
    distinct glass sheets.


CLS 65/53
TXT Processes under subclass 45 which include the step of forming at least two
    separate and distinct glass sheets or sheet-like streams from a single
    reservoir.

    (1)     Note.  The glass streams need not be cooled or solidified for the
    purposes of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     for a process of forming plural glass sheets combined with bonding
    to a metal part.

    98,     for a process of simultaneously forming plural glass sheets.

    195,    for sheet drawing apparatus including means dividing and
    recombining metal in a draw chamber.


CLS 65/54
TXT Processes under subclass 36 combined with the step of reshaping a glass
    preform either (1) prior to associating the glass preform with another
    formed part, or (2) subsequent to bonding of the glass preform to another
    formed part; see the glossary for the definition of the term "reshaping".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for a process of reshaping a glass preform of general application,
    and see the "Search Notes" thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    196+, particularly subclasses 221+ for a combined process or reshaping and
    bonding by a Class 156 operation; see the reference to Class 156 in
    subclass 37.


CLS 65/55
TXT Processes under subclass 54 in which the step of reshaping of the glass
    part occurs prior to associating the glass part with another part.


CLS 65/56
TXT Processes under subclass 36 combined with the step of (1) cutting, or (2)
    perforating, or (3) breaking of hard or soft glass; see subclass 112 for
    the definitions of these terms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    for preform treating combined with severing, perforating, or
    breaking.

    133,    for a process of severing a molten glass stream, per se.


CLS 65/57
TXT Processes under subclass 36 directed to producing relative rotation of a
    heat source and the glass part during the bonding operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for a process of flame treating a glass preform which may include
    relative movement between the source of heat and the preform.

    271,    for reshaping apparatus combined with heating means that moves
    relative to work during a shaping operation.


CLS 65/58
TXT Processes under subclass 36 in which as least one of the parts provides
    spacing ribs or flanges so that facing portions of the parts are maintained
    out of contact during and subsequent to the bonding operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    292 for other methods for bonding laminae having opposed facing areas out
    of contact.


CLS 65/59.1
TXT Of glass to metal part:

    Processes under subclass 36 in which at least one part is metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for processes directed to coating of the adherent face of at least
    one part prior to the bonding operation, and see the notes to the
    definition of that subclass.

    49,     for a process of forming glass in a mold cavity combined with
    uniting a metal piece thereto, in situ.

    50+,    for a process of forming and bonding a glass sheet to a metal part.

    138+,   for electronic envelope header, terminal or stem-making apparatus
    which includes bonding means.

    147+,   for glass-working apparatus with wire-laminating means.

    154,    for glass atom metal fusion bonding means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 101+ for processes of fusion
    bonding of glass to metal which involve metal working.


CLS 65/59.2
TXT Maintaining cavity in glass:

    Processes under subclass 59.1 in which the process performed produces an
    object in which the fusion bond is part of a space-enclosing cavity.

    (1)     Note.  Typical products produced herein are cathode-ray tubes and
    electric lamps.


CLS 65/59.21
TXT Glass applied in powdered (i.e., frit) form:

    Processes under subclass 59.2 which include the application of the glass in
    the form of a powder (i.e., a frit).


CLS 65/59.22
TXT Named fusible bonding material employed:

    Processes under subclass 59.2 which employ an additional fusible material
    to adhere to both the glass and metal parts sought to be adhered.

    (1)     Note.  The additional fusible material may comprise a glass of a
    composition specifically different from that of the glass sought to be
    adhered to the metal part or a different fusible metallic material.


CLS 65/59.23
TXT With firing in vacuum, in inert atmosphere, or in pumped in gas:


    Processes under subclass 59.2 which the fusion step performed to adhere the
    glass and metal parts takes place in a vacuum, in an inert atmosphere, or
    in the presence of a gaseous medium at super atmospheric pressure.


CLS 65/59.24
TXT Metal part outside of glass part:

    Processes under subclass 59.2 in which the metal part is at least in part
    exterior to the glass part as a result of the fusion.

    (1)     Note.  The term "exterior" as used herein means that more of the
    metal part lies outside the glass than merely minor length of a filament
    lead-in wire of an electric lamp which remains on the outside when a glass
    tube forming a support for the filament has the filament wire fused to same
    prior to being fused into the main lamp envelope.


CLS 65/59.25
TXT Metal part inserted through hole or into groove in glass part:

    Processes under subclass 59.2 in which the glass part, while in the solid
    state, has a hole through which the metal part is threaded or a groove into
    which the metal part is inserted so as to fix their relative positions
    prior to the fusion step.


CLS 65/59.26
TXT Metal part forced through or into softened glass part (e.g., pinch sealing,
    etc.):

    Processes under subclass 59.2 in which the glass part is softened by heat
    and the metal part is forced through or into it to fix their relative
    positions.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass included those processes sometimes referred to
    as pinch sealing in which the heat-softened glass is squeezed down around
    the metal part until the glass fuses with itself.


CLS 65/59.27
TXT Metal part coaxial with and inside of glass part:

    Processes under subclass 59.2 in which the glass and metal parts are both
    relatively elongated, the glass part being outside of the metal part, and
    the two being arranged to be coaxial.

    (1)     Note.  Such a process may produce, e.g., a cylindrical metal pipe
    or tube fused to a surrounding glass pipe or tube of similar shape.


CLS 65/59.28
TXT Relative movement or manipulation of parts during or immediately preceding
    fusion:

    Processes under subclass 59.2 which include moving the glass and metal
    parts relative to each other during the actual fusion step, or during the
    heating immediately preceding the actual movement of fusion.


CLS 65/59.3
TXT More than two parts in overlaying series (noncavity):

    Processes under subclass 59.1 in which the final product has more than two
    glass and metal parts in an overlaying series without becoming part of a
    space-enclosing cavity.

    (1)     Note.  A metal sheet sandwiched between two glass sheets is an
    example of a product produced by such a process.


CLS 65/59.31
TXT Metal part inserted through hole or into groove in glass part:

    Processes under subclass 59.3 in which the glass part, while in the solid
    state, has a hole through which the metal part is threaded or a groove into
    which the metal part is inserted so as to fix their relative position prior
    to the fusion step.


CLS 65/59.32
TXT Metal part forced through or into softened glass part (e.g., pinch sealing,
    etc.):

    Processes under subclass 59.3 in which the glass part is softened by heat
    and the metal part is forced through or into it to fix their relative
    positions.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass included those processes referred to as pinch
    sealing, in which the heat-softened glass is squeezed down around the metal
    part until the glass fuses with itself.


CLS 65/59.33
TXT Relative movement or manipulation of parts during or immediately preceding
    fusion:

    Processes under subclass 59.3 which include moving the glass and metal
    parts relative to each other during the actual fusion step, or during the
    heating immediately preceding the actual movement of fusion.


CLS 65/59.34
TXT Metal part outside of glass part:

    Processes under subclass 59.3 in which the metal part is at least in part
    exterior to the glass part as a result of the fusion.

    (1)     Note.  The term "exterior to" as used herein means that more of the
    metal part lies outside the glass than merely the minor length of a
    filament lead-in wire of an electric lamp which remains on the outside when
    a glass tube forming a support for the filament has the filament wire fused
    to same prior to being fused into the main lamp envelope.

    (2)     Note.  An example of metal parts exterior to a glass part would be
    the case of two metal sheets with a glass sheet sandwiched between them by
    fusion bonding.


CLS 65/59.35
TXT Metal part coaxial with and inside of glass part:

    Processes under subclass 59.3 in which the glass and metal parts are both
    relatively elongated, the glass part being outside of the metal part and
    the two being arranged to be coaxial.

    (1)     Note.  Such a process may produce, e.g., a metal or rods inserted
    into a closely surrounding glass tube all fusion bonded together.


CLS 65/59.4
TXT Metal part outside of glass part:

    Processes under subclass 59.1 in which the metal part is at least in part
    exterior to the glass part as a result of the fusion.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of "exterior to", see the definition of
    subclass 59.24, supra.


CLS 65/59.5
TXT Glass applied in powdered (i.e., frit) form:

    Processes under subclass 59.1 which include the application of the glass in
    the form of a powder, i.e., a frit.


CLS 65/59.6
TXT Metal part coaxial with and inside of glass part:

    Processes under subclass 59.1 in which the glass and metal parts are both
    relatively elongated, the glass part being outside of the metal part and
    the two being arranged to be coaxial.

    (1)     Note.  Such a process may produce, e.g., a metal rod inside of a
    closely fitting glass tube, to which it is fusion bonded.


CLS 65/59.7
TXT Metal part forced through or into softened glass part (e.g., pinch sealing,
    etc.):

    Processes under subclass 59.1 in which the glass part is softened by heat
    and the metal part is forced through or into it to fix their relative
    positions.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes processes referred to as pinch
    sealing, in which the heat-softened glass is squeezed down around the metal
    part until the glass fuses with itself.


CLS 65/60.1
TXT With coating:

    Processes under subclass 17.1 combined with the step of applying a surface
    coating material to a glass preform (the coating material usually being an
    emulsion, dispersion, solution), which is clearly disclosed as leaving a
    residual film, layer or continuous deposit on the preform.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for a glassworking or treating process combined with destruction or
    delamination of transitory attached or associated separate material.

    24+,    for processes of applying a parting or lubricating layer.

    30.1+,  for process of applying a coating involving a chemical reaction
    with a glass substrate.

    40,     for a process of coating a part with a conductive coating for Joule
    effect heating of the work.

    43,     for a process of bonding including coating a formed part at the
    joint interface prior to bonding.

    443+,   for a process of forming a glass fiber or filament combined with a
    step of coating the fiber or filament during or subsequent to its formation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclass 523 for processes of dyeing a siliceous body,
    and see the search notes thereunder.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses for
    coating compositions, per se.

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclasses for a coating process
    including the step of forming a substrate by a glassworking operation by
    name only, unless the coating is applied to the substrate while hot from
    the heat of formation, in which case the process is in Class 65.  When a
    preparatory treatment for coating is disclosed as additionally changing the
    physical characteristics of the glass, the patent is classified in Class 65.


CLS 65/60.2
TXT Plural diverse layers:

    Processes under subclass 60.1 which result in the glass preform having more
    than one coating layer, each layer comprising a different substance.


CLS 65/60.3
TXT Organic coating:

    Processes under subclass 60.1 which result in the glass preform being
    covered with an organic substance.

    (1)     Note.  To be classified herein, the organic coating must remain a
    part of the final product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60.52,  for similar processes using an organic compound containing a metal
    followed by the step of converting the organic compound to a metallic oxide.


CLS 65/60.4
TXT Free metal coating:

    Processes under subclass 60.1 which result in the preform being covered at
    least in part by free metal.


CLS 65/60.5
TXT Oxide coating:

    Processes under subclass 60.1 which result in the glass preform being
    covered by an inorganic oxide.


CLS 65/60.51
TXT From inorganic metal salt:

    Processes under subclass 60.5 wherein the glass preform is first coated
    with an inorganic metal salt, and the salt is then chemically reacted to
    convert it into an oxide of that metal.


CLS 65/60.52
TXT From organic metal compound:

    Processes under subclass 60.5 wherein the glass preform is first coated
    with an organic metal compound, and that compound is chemically treated to
    convert it into an oxide of that metal.


CLS 65/60.53
TXT From inorganic oxides or hydroxides:

    Processes under subclass 60.5 wherein the glass preform is first coated
    with an inorganic oxide or hydroxide compound, and that compound is
    chemically reacted to convert it into a metal oxide or a different metal
    oxide.


CLS 65/60.6
TXT Free carbon containing coating:

    Processes under subclass 60.1 in which the glass preform is coated with a
    material which comprises elemental carbon.

    (1)     Note.  The coating may comprise, e.g., charcoal particles.


CLS 65/60.7
TXT Inorganic metal salt containing coating:

    Processes under subclass 60.1 in which the glass preform is coated with a
    material which comprises an inorganic metal salt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60.51,  for similar processes including the further step of chemically
    reacting the salt to form convert it into a metal oxide coating.


CLS 65/60.8
TXT Silicon containing coating:

    Processes under subclass 60.1 in which the glass preform is coated with a
    material which comprises silicon.

    (1)     Note.  The coating may comprise, e.g., silica (SiO2), a glass of a
    different composition than that of the glass preform, etc.


CLS 65/61
TXT Processes under subclass 17.1 combined with a step of wearing away glass by
    rubbing with an abrasive to smooth, polish or remove material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37+,    for a process of lens-making involving both grinding and bonding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, for grinding generally, particularly subclasses 41+ for a
    process of grinding glass or stone.


CLS 65/62
TXT Processes under subclass 17.1 which include (1) a perfecting step or (2) a
    working step or (3) a treating step other than a glass working or glass
    treating step.

    (1)     Note. Combined processes including severing of a hard or soft glass
    preform are classified below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112+,   for glass preform treating combined with a severing or perforating;
    see the "Search Notes" thereunder.


CLS 65/63
TXT Processes under subclass 17.1 including separate and distinct steps of:
    (1) forming a preform from molten glass, (2) reheating the preform, and (3)
    reworking the reheated preform.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102+,   for a process of reshaping a glass preform.

    227+,   for diverse glass working apparatus, especially subclass 230 for
    press and blow means having reheating means therebetween.

    244,    for plural distinct glass working apparatus having spaced preform
    reheating and reshaping means.


CLS 65/64
TXT Processes under subclass 63 comprising reworking to reshape.


CLS 65/65
TXT Processes under subclass 17.1 comprising (1) the step of forming a product
    utilizing glass in the molten or plastic state as the starting material,
    and (2) fire-polishing the product formed; see the glossary for the
    definition of fire-polishing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for a process of grinding to polish.

    120,    for a process of fire-polishing a glass preform by use of a flame,
    per se; and see the "Search Notes" thereunder.

    227+,   for diverse glass working apparatus including fire-polishing means.

    252,    for plural distinct glass working apparatus comprising
    fire-polishing means.


CLS 65/66
TXT Processes under subclass 17.1 which include a step of (1) forming a glass
    product or preform from a molten glass composition, and/or (2) reshaping of
    the preform (e.g., a parison) while still soft from its residual heat of
    formation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102+,   for a process of reshaping of a glass preform which requires a
    reheating prior to reshaping.

    300+,   for apparatus for blowing a glass charge not confined by mold means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 253.1+ for extrusion of metal through
    an orifice.


CLS 65/67
TXT Processes under subclass 66 which include the step of (1) transforming a
    sheet which still retains its heat of formation into a hollow article, or
    (2) transforming a hollow article which still retains its heat of formation
    into a sheet.


CLS 65/68
TXT Processes under subclass 66 in which (1) the forming initially occurs in a
    mold cavity, and (2) the product or preform is hollow.

    (1)     Note.  For the scope of the term "mold cavity" see (1) Note
    subclass 47 of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261+,   for a blow means with blow mold.

    305+,   for a press molding machine.


CLS 65/69
TXT Processes under subclass 68 which include the step of annealing or
    tempering the product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for a process of bonding glass which includes a step of annealing
    or tempering glass.

    95+,    for a process of forming a sheet combined with an annealing or
    tempering step.

    104,    for a process of reshaping a glass preform combined with a
    tempering or annealing step.

    114+,   for a process of tempering glass, per se.

    117+,   for a process of annealing glass, per se.

    262,    for blow molding apparatus combined with annealing or tempering
    means.

    306,    for a press molding machine combined with product treating means.


CLS 65/70
TXT Processes under subclass 68 which include a step of cutting, severing or
    perforating of a hard or soft glass product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     for a process of severing a hollow glass product in a process of
    forming sheets from the hollow glass product.

    105,    for a process of reshaping a glass preform which include the step
    of preform severing or perforating.

    122+,   for processes of charging molten glass into a mold cavity by
    gravity and subsequently severing the charge and which processes do not
    include a glass shaping step.


CLS 65/71
TXT Processes under subclass 68 which include the step of spreading the molten
    glass within a mold by causing a rotatory movement of the molten glass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266,    for blowing means with a blow mold rotary about its own axis.

    302,    for article forming means utilizing mold motion, e.g., centrifugal
    casting.


CLS 65/72
TXT Processes under subclass 68 which include the step of introducing a charge
    of molten glass into the mold cavity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122+,   for a process of charging molten glass into a mold cavity not
    including a step of shaping the charge therein.

    207+,   for gob charging and shape imparting receptacle means.


CLS 65/73
TXT Processes under subclass 72 comprising charging by creating a reduced air
    pressure within the mold cavity while the mold is in contact with the upper
    surface of a supply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124,    for a process of suction gathering molten glass from an upper
    surface of a glass pool into a mold cavity not including a positive shaping
    step.

    125,    for a process including suction gathering in which the suction is
    usually applied within a suction gatherer which functions to transfer the
    charge therein to a mold cavity.

    210+,   for gob charging and shape imparting receptacle means which include
    a suction gatherer movably mounted above a supply of molten glass.


CLS 65/74
TXT Processes under subclass 73 which include a subsequent step of inflating
    the charge in the cavity utilizing differential gas pressure.


CLS 65/75
TXT Processes under subclass 72 in which charging of the mold cavity occurs by
    discharging molten glass through the bottom wall of a dispenser.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126+,   for a process of dispensing glass by discharging downwardly through
    an orifice, per se; see the "Search Notes" thereunder.

    221+,   for shape imparting receptacle means and means for charging a gob
    with the receptacle means by delivery of a gob from a tank feeder.


CLS 65/76
TXT Processes under subclass 72 which include at least two different and
    distinct shaping steps.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78+,    for diverse glass shaping steps not including a charging step.

    207+,   for gob charging means combined with plural glass working apparatus
    especially subclasses 217+ and 224.

    227+,   for diverse distinct glass working apparatus.


CLS 65/77
TXT Processes under subclass 68 which includes a distinct and separate step of
    forming the product or preform; and see the glossary for a definition of
    "preform".

    (1)     Note.  Using two separate and distinct blowing pressures, or
    blowing at separate areas of the parison are considered plural separate and
    distinct glass working operations for this and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     for a process of sequentially forming a glass product, reheating
    and reworking the product.

    243+,   for plural distinct glass working apparatus.


CLS 65/78
TXT Processes under subclass 77 comprising different steps of forming.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227+,   for diverse distinct glassworking apparatus.


CLS 65/79
TXT Processes under subclass 78 in which the unlike steps are pressing and
    blowing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229+,   for press and blow glassworking apparatus.


CLS 65/80
TXT Processes under subclass 79 wherein the blowing or pressing steps occur in
    separate and distinct lines by transferring the glass from one zone to
    another.


CLS 65/81
TXT Processes under subclass 68 in which the forming step utilizes vacuum
    and/or gas pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263+,   for apparatus for blowing a glass charge in a mold in combination
    with means to reduce gas pressure exteriorly of the charge.


CLS 65/82
TXT Processes under subclass 66 directed to reshaping a parison in a mold
    cavity while still soft from its original heat of formation.


CLS 65/83
TXT Processes under subclass 66 directed to the dynamic cooling of the molten
    glass in a pool or the formed product at the portion of the glass pool at
    which the product forming operation occurs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111+,   for a glass preform treating process which includes a step of
    cooling the preform.

    204,    for sheet drawing means combined with cooling means in the drawing
    chamber.


CLS 65/84
TXT Process under subclass 83 wherein the cooling comprises contacting the
    glass with a gaseous material of lower temperature than the glass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for a process involving injecting gas internally of a hollow
    cylinder during drawing thereof to prevent collapse of the hollow cylinder.

    119,    for a process of annealing glass involving heating or cooling the
    glass by direct contact with flowing gas.


CLS 65/85
TXT Process under subclass 83 directed to positive cooling of a glass product.


CLS 65/86
TXT Processes under subclass 66 for a process of drawing molten glass into
    hollow stock, usually glass cylinders, the shape of which being initially
    defined by the shape of a bait, and see the glossary for a definition of
    "drawing".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    187+,   for means for drawing a tube from a molten bath.


CLS 65/87
TXT Processes under subclass 86 including an additional step of shaping,
    severing or perforating of hard or soft glass.

    (1)     Note.  The step of altering the shape of the hollow stock initially
    formed at the forming area only and while in contact with the molten glass
    to form a bait which functions to draw a hollow product of such shape is
    not considered a reshaping step as the initially drawn portion is
    considered transitory.

    (2)     Note.  The step of stretching a hot tubular stock by exerting
    tension on the opposed ends thereof to cause separation of the stock into
    two parts is within the scope of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112+,   for a process of treating a glass preform combined with severing or
    perforating hard or soft glass; see the "Search Notes" thereunder.


CLS 65/88
TXT Processes under subclass 86 in which the drawing is vertically upwardly
    with simultaneously injecting fluid internally of the stock.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188+,   for means drawing a tube vertically upward.


CLS 65/89
TXT Processes under subclass 66 in which a hollow product is formed by applying
    a film of molten glass onto a shaping surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184+,   for a means charging a continuous film or strip to a separate and
    distinct forming means.

    302,    for an article forming means utilizing mold motion, e.g.,
    centrifugal casting means.


CLS 65/90
TXT Processes under subclass 66 in which the product is sheet stock.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193+,   for apparatus for drawing sheet stock from a bath.

    253+,   for sheet or strip rolling apparatus.

    258+,   for sheet casting and receiving means.


CLS 65/91
TXT Processes under subclass 90 which include the step of applying, in a
    lateral direction, a force or pull to the lateral edges of a sheet during
    movement thereof to usually (1) maintain constant sheet width, or (2) to
    prevent formation of surface irregularities.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199+,   for a sheet drawing apparatus with width maintaining and/or lateral
    stretching means.


CLS 65/92
TXT Processes under subclass 90 which include the step of smoothing the formed
    sheet, generally for removal of surface irregularities.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     for a process including the steps of forming a sheet, reheating the
    formed sheet and then smoothing the heated sheet.

    91,     for a process of applying tension laterally of a sheet during
    formation to prevent surface irregularities.


CLS 65/93
TXT Processes under subclass 90 including (1) changing the gross overall
    configuration, or (2) embossing; see the glossary for definitions of these
    terms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    for a process of curving a glass preform which may involve
    corrugating or reshaping.

    255,    for sheet or strip rolling means combined with means to corrugate
    or emboss the surface.


CLS 65/94
TXT Processes under subclass 93 in which the reshaping or surface deformation
    occurs subsequent to sheet formation.


CLS 65/95
TXT Processes under subclass 90 combined with a step of annealing or tempering.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114+,   for a process of tempering; see the "Search Notes" thereunder.

    117+,   for a process of annealing.

    194,    for sheet drawing apparatus combined with an annealing or tempering
    means.

    254,    for sheet rolling means combined with annealing or tempering means.

    348+,   for product cooling means, e.g., tempering means, per se,
    especially 349+ for annealing means, per se.


CLS 65/96
TXT Processes under subclass 95 directed to forming the sheet at one rate of
    speed and thereafter conveying the formed sheet through an annealing or
    tempering zone at a different rate.


CLS 65/97
TXT Processes under subclass 90 including a severing or perforating step of
    hard or soft glass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    for a process of treating a preform including severing or
    perforating of soft or hard glass; and the scope of the terms "severing"
    and "perforating"; and see the "Search Notes" thereunder.


CLS 65/98
TXT Processes under subclass 90 which involves formation at the same time of at
    least two separate and distinct glass sheets from the same or different
    sources.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     for a process of bonding glass to metal which includes a forming of
    at least two glass sheets which may be formed from the same or different
    source.

    53,     for a process of forming plural sheets from the same source and
    bonding the formed sheets to each other or to another formed part.


CLS 65/99.1
TXT By or with pouring molten glass onto forming surface:

    Processes under subclass 90 directed to forming a sheet by casting or
    rolling molten glass onto a support; see the Glossary for a definition of
    "casting".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89,     for a process of film forming hollow stock on a surface.

    253+,   for sheet or strip forming by rolling means.

    258+,   for sheet casting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 298 for processes of casting plastic material on a liquid surface,
    and subclasses 299+ for processes for shaping plastic material against a
    forming surface.


CLS 65/99.2
TXT Utilizing molten metal forming surface:

    Processes under subclass 99.1 in which the forming surface is composed of
    molten metal or alloy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182.3   through 182.5, for molten metal forming means.


CLS 65/99.3
TXT Maintaining molten metal temperature:

    Processes under subclass 99.2 in which temperature distribution is kept in
    a desired state.

    (1)     Note.  Temperature uniformity through heat exchange, circulating or
    induced circulating currents included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99.4    through 99.5+, for removing impurities from molten metal or
    modifying glass sheet dimension or property employing circulation.


CLS 65/99.4
TXT Treating or removing impurities in molten metal or glass:

    Processes under subclass 99.2 in which the molten metal, or glass, or glass
    sheet are treated to remove, or prevent impurities, or modify glass sheet
    properties.

    (1)     Note.  Includes reaction with additive removal, or prevention of
    gas bubbles, special atmosphere etc.


CLS 65/99.5
TXT Maintaining or adjusting sheet width or thickness:

    Processes under subclass 99.2 in which glass sheet width, or thickness is
    maintained, or adjusted by application of mechanical force to the sheet, or
    by special glass flow restricting means in flow path.


CLS 65/99.6
TXT By nonmechanical means:

    Processes under subclass 99.5 in which glass sheet width, or thickness is
    maintained, or adjusted by nonmechanical means, e.g., fluid pressure etc.


CLS 65/100
TXT Processes under subclass 99 including a step of simultaneously moving the
    support which comprises a roll or platen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193+,   for sheet drawing apparatus provided with roll means located at the
    sheet source and in contact therewith.

    257,    for sheet forming by rolling apparatus which includes a
    reciprocating planar platen.


CLS 65/101
TXT Processes under subclass 100 wherein the support comprises rolls mounted to
    provide a pass for the glass therebetween.


CLS 65/102
TXT Processes under subclass 17.1 for a process of reshaping or surface
    deforming a glass preform which has been softened by a disclosed or claimed
    reheating step, and see the glossary for a definition of "reshaping" and
    "surface deforming".

    (1)     Note.  Processes of flattening curved glass preforms are provided
    for in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54+,    for a bonding process including a step of reshaping a glass preform
    prior to assembly or subsequent to bonding.

    63+,    for a process of sequentially forming, reheating and reworking of
    glass.

    66+,    for a process of forming a product from molten glass including a
    subsequent reworking operation without an intervening reheating step.

    67,     for a process of forming a sheet and converting the sheet to a
    hollow article or the process of forming a hollow article and converting it
    to a sheet.

    269+,   for reshaping apparatus combined with reheating means.

    286+,   for reshaping apparatus, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 343+ and 379 for a process or apparatus
    for "drawing" metal sheet material.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 602+, for metal working utilizing
    inductive electric heating and see the "Search Notes" thereunder.


CLS 65/103
TXT Processes under subclass 102 which include the step of utilizing or
    employing means to absorb, dissipate, distribute or shield heat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    288,    for preform reshaping means including a heat shield or sink.


CLS 65/104
TXT Processes under subclass 102 which include a step of (1) tempering, or (2)
    annealing, and/or (3) fire polishing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111+,   for glass preform treating and see the "Search Notes" thereunder.

    268,    for preform reshaping apparatus combined with annealing or
    tempering means.

    284,    for fire-polishing means, and see the "Search Notes" thereunder.


CLS 65/105
TXT Processes under subclass 102 including severing or perforating of hard or
    soft glass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    for a process of treating including severing or perforating a soft
    or hard glass preform and see the "Search Notes" thereunder.

    166,    for apparatus for perforating a glass preform; see the "Search
    Notes" thereunder.

    174+,   for a mechanical cutter, scorer, or scriber for use on a glass
    preform or article; see the "Search Notes" thereunder.


CLS 65/106
TXT Processes under subclass 102 directed to reshaping of a planar sheet by a
    bending or curving operation, and see the glossary for a definition of
    "bending" under "reshaping".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for a process of simultaneously reshaping a plurality of sheets
    separated by a parting layer.

    67,     for a process of forming a sheet and converting the formed sheet to
    a hollow product.

    93+,    for a process of forming a sheet from molten glass with a step of
    reshaping the sheet.

    102,    for a process of making planar sheet by flattening half-cylinders.

    287+,   for sheet reshaping apparatus utilizing a bending mold; see the
    "Search Notes" thereunder.


CLS 65/107
TXT Processes under subclass 106 wherein curving involves heating the glass
    until it droops under its own weight and conforms to the shape of the mold
    or form on which it rests.


CLS 65/108
TXT Processes under subclass 102 comprising reshaping a tubular-shaped preform
    in such a manner that its hollow characteristic is retained.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     for a process of forming a hollow product and converting it to a
    sheet.

    93+,    for a process of forming a sheet and reshaping the formed sheet.

    276+,   for means for reshaping hollow stock by or/with reheating means.

    292+,   for cylindrical stock reshaping means.


CLS 65/109
TXT Processes under subclass 108 with simultaneous relative rotation of the
    stock and apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    271,    for apparatus providing relative movement between a heating means
    and the work during glassworking.

    296+,   for rotary means for reshaping cylindrical stock.


CLS 65/110
TXT Processes under subclass 108 utilizing vacuum or gas pressure during
    reshaping.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    292+,   for preform reshaping apparatus including means utilizing
    differential gas pressure.


CLS 65/111
TXT Processes under subclass 17.1 directed to treating a glass preform, and see
    the glossary for definitions of "glass treating" and "preform".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for a combined process including pore forming in situ to form a
    cellular glass body.

    30+,    for a process of treating involving a chemical reaction; see the
    "Search Notes" thereunder.

    33.1,   for a process of devitrifying or vitrifying crystalline glass.

    41,     for a process of bonding glass to a formed part including annealing
    or tempering of the glass.

    60.1+,  for a combined process including coating glass and see the "Search
    Notes" thereunder.

    61,     for a combined process including grinding of the glass.

    69,     for a process of forming a hollow product in a mold cavity from
    molten glass including annealing or tempering of the product.

    85,     for a process of forming a glass product from molten glass
    including positive cooling of the product.

    95+,    for a process of forming a sheet from molten glass including
    annealing or tempering of the sheet.

    104,    for a process of reshaping or surface deforming a glass preform
    including annealing or tempering of the preform.

    348+,   for annealing or tempering apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses
    for a process or apparatus of general application for contacting solids
    with gas or vapor.

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclasses for
    applying electrical or wave energy to molten or preformed glass to bring
    about a chemical change (e.g., color change, etc.) of at least one
    constituent of the glass; follow the general guidelines for placement of an
    operation involving the combination of at least one Class 204 step in
    sequence with a separate Class 65 step as explained at the beginning of the
    Class 204 definition under I, (4) and (5) Notes.

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 687+ for electrolytic material
    treatment, especially subclass 769 for electrolytic treatment of solid
    glass, silica, quartz, or optical material.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 324 for methods and apparatus for corona
    irradiation of materials including glass, subclass 327.1 for methods and
    apparatus for irradiating detectors which may be of the glass type,
    subclass 472.1 for methods to detect radiation by non-electric detectors
    which include glass type.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 27+ for apparatus
    and processes directed to electric heating of glass.  The line between
    Class 65 and 373 is stated in subclass 134 of Class 65.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 9+, for a process of general utility of
    applying heat to an article.  Processes involving application of the heat
    to a glass substrate in a particular manner, e.g., nonuniformly, or to
    change a physical on chemical property of the glass are classified in Class
    65.


CLS 65/112
TXT Processes under subclass 111 in which the treating step includes heating
    the glass to a temperature sufficient to render it plastic, but
    insufficient to produce a significant plastic flow that would cause
    alteration of physical shape and size, combined with a step of (1)
    penetrating the plastic glass to effect at least a partial separation of
    the glass without reshaping flow of the glass, or (2) moving one part of
    the plastic glass relative to the other to cause failure by tension at the
    point of separation, usually by stretching or (3) penetrating the plastic
    glass to form a closed perimeter opening extending completely through the
    glass, or (4) cutting or perforating of hard glass combined with glass
    treating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for a process of bonding glass to a formed part including severing,
    perforating or breaking of hard or soft glass.

    63,     for a process of sequentially forming, reheating and severing,
    perforating or breaking of hard or soft glass.

    70,     for a process of forming an article from molten glass combined with
    the step of severing soft or hard glass.

    87,     for a process of drawing and simultaneously forming hollow stock
    from molten glass including severing or perforating of hard or soft glass.

    97,     for a process of forming a sheet combined with the step of severing
    or perforating of the hard or soft sheet.

    105,    for a process of reshaping or surface deforming a glass preform
    combined with severing or perforating of hard or soft glass.

    166,    for apparatus under the class definition comprising a perforator
    for an article or preform.

    174+,   for apparatus under the class definition combined with a mechanical
    cutter, scorer or scriber for an article or preform.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 879+ for a scoring process or apparatus, per
    se; see the collection of "Search Notes" thereunder for mechanically
    cutting, scoring or scribing hard or soft glass.


CLS 65/113
TXT Processes under subclass 112 in which a flame facilitates the severing or
    perforating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for a process of merely applying a flame to a glass preform, and
    see the "Search Notes" thereto.

    269+,   for flame severing apparatus.


CLS 65/114
TXT Processes under subclass 111 involving heating a glass preform to near the
    softening point under rigorous control and rapidly cooling the glass from
    such point to set up compressive stresses in the glass surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111,    for Search Notes relating to tempering.

    348+,   for tempering apparatus; see the "Search Notes" thereunder.


CLS 65/115
TXT Processes under subclass 114 including a step of tempering an isolated
    portion of an article or preform or distinct steps of tempering separate
    portions thereof, usually by steps unequal or different degrees of
    tempering restricted portions even though an end product of uniform temper
    is produced.


CLS 65/116
TXT Processes under subclass 114 in which the tempering is effected by
    contacting a heated preform with a liquid medium, e.g., immersing in a
    shower or bath.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 27+ for compositions for treating
    (e.g., quench hardening) heated solid metal.


CLS 65/117
TXT Processes under subclass 111 involving heating a preform or article to a
    suitable temperature followed by controlling the rate of cooling to prevent
    or to remove stresses or strains therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111,    for Search Notes relating to annealing of glass.


CLS 65/118
TXT Processes under subclass 117 including a simultaneous step of moving the
    article or preform.


CLS 65/119
TXT Processes under subclass 118 wherein a gaseous heat exchange medium
    contacts the article or preform to heat or cool the same; flame contact
    being included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for flame treating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    432,    Heating, subclass 11 for a residual process of treating an article
    by moving it through a heating zone or through heating and cooling zones.


CLS 65/120
TXT Processes under subclass 111 comprising contacting a glass preform with a
    flame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for a bonding process in which one of the parts may be heated by
    flame contact.

    65,     for a process of forming a glass product combined with
    fire-polishing.

    104,    for a process of reshaping including fire-polishing.

    113,    for severing a glass preform by use of a flame.

    284,    for fire-polishing apparatus; see the "Search Notes" thereunder.

    285,    for apparatus to reshape a preform by use of flame pressure.


CLS 65/121
TXT Processes under subclass 17.1 which include the step of mixing or flowing
    together of distinct streams of molten glass of identical or diverse
    compositions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for a bonding process including the step of forming at least two
    sheet like streams from the same source and uniting such streams.

    145,    for glass working apparatus combined with means feeding diverse
    glass melts to a common forming means.


CLS 65/122
TXT Processes under subclass 17.1 comprising a step of depositing molten glass
    into a mold cavity without a significant shaping (i.e. shaping contributing
    to final configuration) by the mold cavity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72+,    for a process of charging a mold cavity which includes a distinct
    step of forming hollow article in the mold cavity.

    207+,   for an apparatus including gob charging and shape imparting
    receptacle means.


CLS 65/123
TXT Processes under subclass 122 directed to charging the molten glass by
    gravity into a mold cavity and, while the molten glass communicates with
    both the supply of molten glass and the mold cavity, severing the molten
    glass from communication with supply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334,    for molten glass charge cutting or scraping apparatus.


CLS 65/124
TXT Processes under subclass 122 comprising sucking a glass charge into a mold
    by removing part of the air therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73+,    for a process of charging a mold cavity by suction and forming a
    hollow product in the cavity.

    125,    for a process of suction gathering molten glass from the upper
    surface of a glass pool into a receptacle which is not intended to function
    as a mold cavity.

    210+,   for gob charging and shape imparting apparatus including a suction
    gatherer mounted above a supply.


CLS 65/125
TXT Processes under subclass 17.1 comprising isolating and removing a discrete
    portion of glass from an upper layer of a supply of molten glass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324+,   for apparatus for dispensing molten glass; see the "Search Notes"
    thereunder.


CLS 65/126
TXT Processes under subclass 17.1 of delivering molten glass downwardly through
    an orifice of a reservoir of molten glass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for a process of forming a hollow product in a mold cavity combined
    with charging by dispensing through an orifice in a bottom wall of a feeder.

    325+,   for apparatus for dispensing molten glass through an orifice
    located below a melt level.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, for processes and apparatus for dispensing material not
    elsewhere classified.  See class definitions of Class 222 for dispensing
    processes and apparatus elsewhere classified.


CLS 65/127
TXT Processes under subclass 126 comprising treating, smoothing or shaping a
    gob of molten glass subsequent to discharge through the orifice but prior
    to delivery to a mold cavity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207,    for gob charging and shape imparting receptacle means.

    303,    for gob shaping or treating means downstream of gob severing means.

    304,    for glass working or treating apparatus including gob handling
    means.


CLS 65/128
TXT Processes under subclass 126 in which the glass is heated or cooled at or
    adjacent the orifice.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327,    for molten glass dispensing apparatus having auxiliary heating or
    cooling means at an orifice below the melt level.


CLS 65/129
TXT Processes under subclass 126 which include the step of (1) regulating the
    rate of flow of, or (2) stopping the flow of, the molten glass through an
    orifice.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183,    for a glass working or treating apparatus which includes an
    extrusion die former with an upstream discharge assistant.

    330+,   for a molten glass dispensing apparatus including a reciprocating
    plunger-type discharge assistant.


CLS 65/130
TXT Processes under subclass 129 in which the rate of or the arrest of flow of
    molten glass through an orifice is affected by varying the pressure of a
    gas on the molten glass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329,    for apparatus for applying a differential gas pressure to glass to
    assist its flow through an orifice below the melt level.


CLS 65/131
TXT Processes under subclass 130 which include the step of separating or
    isolating from the main body of the glass, prior to discharge through the
    orifice, a portion of the glass, and discharging the separated or isolated
    portion of the glass through the orifice.


CLS 65/132
TXT Processes under subclass 129 which include the step of separating or
    isolating from the main body of the glass prior to discharge through the
    orifice of a portion of the glass and discharging the separated or isolated
    portion through the orifice.


CLS 65/133
TXT Processes under subclass 17.1 directed to cutting or dividing a stream of
    molten glass, usually to form a "gob".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334,    for charge cutting or scraping means; see the "Search Notes"
    thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses, for gob shearing apparatus,
    especially subclass 600 for gob shears having simple oscillating motion
    only with means to move cooperating cutter member and subclass 623 for gob
    shears having simple rectilinear reciprocating motion only with means to
    move cooperating cutting member.


CLS 65/134.1
TXT Fining or homogenizing molten glass:

    Processes under subclass 17.1 directed to (a) heating molten or batch glass
    to a high temperature to decrease its viscosity thereby permitting
    occluded, entrapped, or undissolved gases formed during the chemical
    reaction of the batch material to rise more readily and escape from the
    molten glass, (b) removing undissolved batch material, or (c) making a melt
    uniform in physical characteristics or in composition throughout.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    178+,   for glass working apparatus combined with an agitator for molten or
    soft glass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the solidification or vitrification of waste for purposes of
    containment and for the treatment of slag to prevent the emission of
    hazardous or toxic gases.


CLS 65/134.2
TXT Subatmospheric pressure or vacuum utilized:

    Processes under subclass 134.1 wherein vacuum or pressure below that of the
    atmosphere is used during any stage of the purifying or homogenizing
    operation.


CLS 65/134.3
TXT Melt accelerator or color modifier utilized (e.g., fining agent, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 134.1 wherein a material is added to softened
    glass or a glass charge to (a) speed up melting or (b) alter color.


CLS 65/134.4
TXT Oxygen enriched or nitrogen reduced gas utilized (i.e., modified air):

    Processes under subclass 134.1 wherein atmospheric gas (air) has additional
    oxygen added or nitrogen partially or completely removed is used in fining
    or homogenizing the molten glass.


CLS 65/134.5
TXT By injecting gas below surface of molten glass:

    Processes under subclass 134.1 wherein fining or homogenizing occurs when a
    gas is introduced below the surface of molten glass.


CLS 65/134.6
TXT Exhaust or top gas treated or recycled:

    Processes under subclass 134.1 wherein an exhaust or top gas is reused or
    treated prior to releasing into the atmosphere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation: Processes, subclasses 241+ for a process of general
    application for separating gases by physical methods.


CLS 65/134.7
TXT Rotating furnace or chamber utilized (e.g., crucible, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 134.1 wherein the movement of a furnace or chamber
    is in a circle or circular arc centered on its own axis.


CLS 65/134.8
TXT By melting toxic or waste material:

    Processes under 134.1 wherein undesired or toxic material is dissolved.


CLS 65/134.9
TXT By eliminating gaseous inclusions (e.g., bubbles, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 134.1 wherein gaseous bubbles or inclusions are
    removed.


CLS 65/135.1
TXT Glass conditioning channel section utilized:

    Processes under subclass 134.1 utilizing a molten glass flow restricting
    area wherein the purity or homogeneity of the molten glass is adjusted.

    (1)     Note.  Processes wherein ebullition or circulating currents of
    molten glass occur in a glass conditioning channel, generally caused by
    temperature differences within a pool of molten glass, are proper for this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    346,    for apparatus with glass conditioning channel section.


CLS 65/135.2
TXT By agitating:

    Processes under subclass 134.1 wherein the molten or softened glass is
    mixed or stirred.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    178+,   for glassworking apparatus combined with agitating means for molten
    or soft glass.

    302,    for article forming  means utilizing mold motion to distribute
    molten glass therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    366,    Agitating, appropriate subclasses for apparatus directed to
    agitating molten glass, per se. Patents defining apparatus for agitating
    molten glass which includes means for discharging the molten glass to a
    glassworking zone or in combination with a refining or treating zone of a
    glass furnace are classified here in Class 65.


CLS 65/135.3
TXT Mechanical stirrers utilized:

    Processes under subclass 135.2 wherein the agitation is performed by the
    use of mechanical stirrers.


CLS 65/135.4
TXT Spiral:

    Processes under subclass 135.3 wherein the mechanical stirrer is spirally
    configured.


CLS 65/135.6
TXT Electric furnace utilized (e.g., induction or radiant heat from electric
    source, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 134.1 wherein glass is melted or maintained in a
    molten condition (a) by passing an electric current between two electrodes,
    or (b) by using heat energy resulting directly from electrically induced
    radiation or induction.

    (1)     Note.  Processes of using an electrical furnace which is not the
    primary heat source or using an electrical furnace in combination with
    other heating means are proper for this and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 27+ for apparatus
    and processes, respectively, directed to electric furnaces for melting
    glass batch material or heating molten glass. Patents claiming apparatus or
    a process for purifying or homogenizing molten glass in an electric furnace
    and defining in the claim specific electrical structure (e.g., electrodes)
    or specific electrical characteristics or the electrical energy (e.g., at
    least two different types of electrical energy or defining the magnitude)
    are classified in Class 373 otherwise the process is classified here in
    Class 65. The recitation of a glass ``working," ``treating," or ``handling"
    operation by these words only is insufficient to exclude a patent from
    Class 373 unless a glass article is formed thereby (e.g., a filament), in
    which case classification is in Class 65.


CLS 65/135.7
TXT With submerged electrodes:

    Processes under subclass 135.6 wherein heating electrodes are located below
    the level of molten glass.


CLS 65/135.8
TXT Melting in separate zone of glass furnace:

    Processes under subclass 135.7 wherein glass is melted in a distinct
    chamber or area apart from where the purifying or homogenizing operation is
    performed.

    (1)     Note.  Processes of melting glass utilizing a multichambered
    electric furnace are properly classified here.


CLS 65/135.9
TXT By charging batch material:

    Processes under subclass 134.1 wherein a glass supply material to be
    liquified is delivered to a furnace (e.g., melter).


CLS 65/136.1
TXT Preheating batch material:

    Processes under subclass 135.9 wherein the batch material is heated before
    being delivered to a furnace (e.g., melter).


CLS 65/136.2
TXT Directing batch feed to float on molten glass surface:

    Processes under subclass 135.9 wherein the batch feed material is guided to
    a surface of molten glass and made to float thereon.


CLS 65/136.3
TXT Burner directed towards batch or melt:

    Processes under subclass 135.9 wherein a torch or burner is pointed
    directly at a batch or melt feed material.


CLS 65/136.4
TXT By cooling molten glass:

    Processes under subclass 134.1 wherein the temperature of the molten glass
    is reduced.


CLS 65/137
TXT Processes under subclass 17.1 which include the step of lowering the
    temperature of molten glass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    326+,   for means to cool glass in combination with molten glass dispensing
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclasses, for processes and apparatus
    for cooling, per se.  See notes to Class 62 definition for other pertinent
    fields of search.


CLS 65/138
TXT Apparatus under the class definition for making a glass closure of tube,
    disc or bead configuration having one or more electrical conductors bonded
    thereto and passing therethrough for use in manufacturing electric lamps or
    electronic tubes or space discharge devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for processes of bonding glass to a formed part, and the "SEARCH
    CLASS" reference to Class 29 for the line between this class (65) and Class
    29.

    59.1,   for a process of bonding glass to metal.

    142,    for apparatus of general application for bonding beads of glass to
    wire, e.g. pin-heading means.

    152+,   for apparatus for joining a preform to a glass part by means
    involving fusion, especially subclass 154 for glass to metal bonding means.

    270,    for apparatus for tipping off an electronic envelope with or
    without exhausting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclass 434 for light responsive active solid- state devices with housing
    or encapsulation means, including a window (e.g., of glass).

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Manufacturing,
    subclass 65 for similar subject matter in combination with other
    manufacturing operations or means (e.g., filament shaping) and see the
    search notes thereto.


CLS 65/139
TXT Apparatus under subclass 138 including mechanical means for inserting the
    conductors into the glass.


CLS 65/140
TXT Apparatus under subclass 138 including a press mold.


CLS 65/141
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising melt puffing means or
    comminuting means comprising means shock cooling a melt by enhancing
    surface contact therewith by a cooling fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for a process of foaming slag to make cellular bodies.

    181,    for hard glass comminuting means combined with Class 65 subject
    matter.

    483+,   for mineral wool making apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, for a comminutor or cutter combined with a
    refrigeration producer.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses,
    for a fluid-solid contacting apparatus of general application.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 38+ for
    comminution apparatus for solids combined with means applying fluid to the
    material.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    gas-liquid contacting apparatus of general application.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 7 for means making particulate material and means providing a
    solidifying zone for particles of the comminuted melt.


CLS 65/142
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means working soft or molten
    glass into small discrete particulate bodies, e.g. spheres, or means to
    form and to bond by fusion, a glass particle onto rod shaped stock, e.g.
    wire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21.1+,  for a process of making self-supporting particle.

    141,    for ball making apparatus including fluid-melt contacting means.

    207+,   for means for forming glass melt into a gob-type charge combined
    with glass working means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    163,    Needle and Pin Making, subclasses 6+ for pin making.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 110 for composite article manufacturing apparatus comprising means
    to shape fluent or bulk stock and unite the same with a preform while in a
    molding area, subclasses 332+ for means to roll a discrete change into a
    ball, and subclass 801 for button makers.


CLS 65/143
TXT Apparatus under subclass 142 wherein the glass working means comprises
    rolling means.


CLS 65/144
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means to shape an article
    from a mass of particulate material (e.g. quartz) combined with means to
    fuse the mass into a preform or article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17.3+,  for a process under the class definition combined with shaping of
    particulate material into a preform with subsequent firing.

    33.1,   for a process of melting quartz with subsequent shaping into a
    preform.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 353 for apparatus to
    shape and to cook food products.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    appropriate subclasses for apparatus to shape particulate material (e.g.,
    powders, etc.) and downstream firing (e.g., kiln, etc.) means, especially
    see subclass 404 for a shaping means and downstream product treating means
    (see the search notes thereunder).

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, subclass 86 for processes of making
    synthetic precious stones from ceramic compositions.


CLS 65/145
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means feeding diverse glass
    melts, generally of different color, to a common forming means, e.g.
    laminating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121,    for a process of blending of separate molten glass streams.


CLS 65/146
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means supplying nonglass
    material to soft or molten glass being worked to form a composite stock or
    article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36+,    for a process of bonding glass to a formed part, especially
    subclasses 49, 50 and 59 for bonding of glass to nonglass.

    142+,   for means forming a glass bead on a pin.

    154,    for means uniting glass to metal parts without means feeding the
    metal parts.

    172,    for means to add parting material to glass working apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for means individually
    dispensing an article, e.g., electric wire, from a source of supply of a
    plurality of articles, per se.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 101+ especially subclasses 122.1+,
    188 and 903 for the process of uniting glass to metal by a metallurgical
    bond and see the "SEARCH NOTES", thereunder.


CLS 65/147
TXT Apparatus under subclass 146 wherein the means feeds wire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50+,    for a process of forming a glass sheet combined with a step of
    fusion bonding thereto of a nonglass part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 404+ for immersion type coating
    apparatus including means for wiping off excess coating from a coated base.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses, especially subclass 433 for laminating apparatus,
    of general application including surface bonding means combined with
    assembly means for running lengths of sheet or strand.


CLS 65/148
TXT Apparatus under subclass 147 including rolling means for forming sheet
    glass.


CLS 65/149
TXT Apparatus under subclass 148 comprising means feeding wire between plural
    means feeding glass to the glass forming roll means.


CLS 65/150
TXT Apparatus under subclass 148 wherein the rolling means cooperates with a
    flat pressure plate.


CLS 65/151
TXT Apparatus under subclass 150 including means protruding from the surface of
    the rolling means which forces the wire into the surface of soft glass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for a process of embossing or corrugating while bonding.


CLS 65/152
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means to effect a bonding by
    a glass working operation, i.e., involving fusion, between: (a) parts, at
    least one of which is an article or preform, or (b) different parts of the
    same preform.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36+,    for a process of bonding glass to a formed part.

    145,    for a forming means charged by a feed of diverse glass.

    146+,   for analogous subject matter combined with means to feed a nonglass
    material thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 25.35 for piezoelectric device making,
    subclasses 25.41+ for electric condenser making, 592.1+ for other electric
    device making, and subclasses 428+ for a process of assembly and/or joining
    not otherwise provided for.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for coating apparatus of
    general application.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for bonding and/or assembly means utilizing adhesive
    bonding.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 603+ for fusion bonding means in metal
    working apparatus.

    269,    Work Holders, for work holders, per se, especially subclasses 37+
    for plural holders to hold work pieces relative to each other.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclass 423 for nonmetallic pipe joints
    or coupling means.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, particularly
    subclasses 107+ and 455+ for methods for joining plural semiconductor
    substrates; see the search notes therein.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    especially subclass 22 for a method under the class definition including
    shaping of the lamp or device envelope.


CLS 65/153
TXT Apparatus under subclass 152 including means to hold or assemble parts
    (e.g., of a vacuum bottle) to be united in a concentric relation.


CLS 65/154
TXT Apparatus under subclass 152 in which one of the parts is metallic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142,    for pin heading apparatus comprising means to apply a glass bead to
    a wire.


CLS 65/155
TXT Apparatus under subclass 152 wherein the parts are elements of an
    electronic device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for a process of sealing off of an exhaust opening.

    138+,   for apparatus for making a header, terminal or stem for an
    electronic device.

    146,    for similar subject matter combined with means to feed terminals to
    the joining apparatus.

    153,    for similar subject matter including means to hold or assemble the
    parts in concentric relation.

    154,    for similar subject matter where one part is metallic.

    270,    for electronic envelope tipping off apparatus, per se.


CLS 65/156
TXT Apparatus under subclass 152 including a female mold for performing a glass
    shaping operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47+,    for a process of bonding glass to a formed part combined with a
    step of molding of an article in a cavity.

    140,    for a press mold in electronic header, terminal or stem making
    apparatus.


CLS 65/157
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means providing an
    atmosphere other than air in which a glass is worked or treated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for chemical treatment of glass involving a reaction.

    32.1+,  for a process utilizing a reducing or inert atmosphere.


CLS 65/158
TXT Apparatus under the class definition combined with a signal, indicator,
    inspection means, register or recorder means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29.1+   and 29.12+, for a process which includes the step of testing or
    inspecting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses, for processes and
    apparatus for making a measurement or test of any kind on glass, per se.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclasses, for signalling and
    indicating devices, per se.

    177,    Weighing Scales, appropriate subclasses for weighing scales, per se.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus relating to measuring and/or testing (or sensing) of electrical
    properties. See the "SEARCH NOTES" under the class definition.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+ for electrical
    automatic condition responsive indicating systems.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 32+ for glass strain
    analysis including the polarized light examination of sheet glass,
    subclasses 364+ for polarized light testing of glass articles for flaws
    generally; subclass 371 for flatness testing generally; and subclasses 429+
    for monitoring of webs or thread, for optical properties or flaws and
    subclasses 239+ for inspection of transparent or translucent articles for
    flaws or imperfections.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for measuring
    a thermal parameter or characteristic of glass, per se.


CLS 65/159
TXT Apparatus under the class definition combined with means to prevent damage
    of apparatus in event of malfunctioning of a portion thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181,    for a means to protect or to improve comfort of an attendant
    combined with apparatus under the class definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 129+ for safety stop
    mechanisms of general application.


CLS 65/160
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means responsive to variations
    in an operating or "stock" condition and control means responsive thereto
    to effect an operation or change.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for condition sensing
    means, per se, and see the "Search Notes" in Class 73.


CLS 65/161
TXT Apparatus under subclass 160 in which the means controlled includes
    regulating means for the delivery of a glass working fluid or glass
    treating fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, appropriate subclasses for fluid control means
    responsive to conditioning sensing means, per se.


CLS 65/162
TXT Apparatus under subclass 160 in which the means controlled consists of
    temperature regulating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, appropriate
    subclasses for automatic temperature control means, per se, see the "Search
    Notes" under the class definition.


CLS 65/163
TXT Apparatus under subclass 160 in which the means controlled includes a speed
    regulating means for the apparatus or a portion thereof.


CLS 65/164
TXT Apparatus under subclass 160 in which the means controlled is a molten
    glass dispenser or gatherer.


CLS 65/165
TXT Apparatus under the class definition combined with means to catch, divert
    or otherwise dispose of rejected material (e.g., broken hard glass or
    rejected gobs) to prevent contamination of stock or apparatus or to prevent
    injury of apparatus, or to conserve stock or heat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for a process which includes reclaiming, renewing or repairing or
    crack run interruption of glass.

    269,    for means to handle a "moil" after severance from a product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses, for methods and apparatus for rejecting defective glass
    articles, per se.


CLS 65/166
TXT Apparatus under the class definition for making a hole through preshaped
    glass when in a soft stage, or the combination of glass working means
    combined with mechanical drilling or boring means for hard glass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for a process of bonding glass to a preformed part combined with
    the step of cutting, perforating or breaking of glass.

    105,    for a process of reshaping a glass preform combined with cutting,
    severing or perforating.

    112,    for a process of severing or perforating a glass preform by a glass
    working operation.

    315,    for a press molding means with a core withdrawing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, appropriate
    subclasses for a single operation of that class on hard glass, and see the
    "Search Notes" under the class definition.


CLS 65/167
TXT Apparatus under the class definition to perform a distinct operation but
    being convertible to perform a different operation either by reassembling
    of all or some of its parts in a different relationship to each other or by
    the addition or omission of a part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231,    for diverse distinct glass working apparatus including a blank mold
    removably encaseable in a blow mold.


CLS 65/168
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including positive means to remove
    undesirable material from a glass working or treating apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for process of cleaning glass working or treating apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses for
    a process of, or apparatus for cleaning of general application.  See the
    "Search Notes" in the class definition of Class 134.


CLS 65/169
TXT Apparatus under the class definition combined with means to apply a
    material to a work contacting surface of apparatus, which material prevents
    adhesion of glass being worked or treated.

    (1)     Note.  The parting material may be a preformed layer or a fluent
    coating material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24+,    for a process which includes the step of utilizing a parting or
    lubricating layer.

    170,    for glass working apparatus having means to lubricate moving parts
    thereof.


CLS 65/170
TXT Apparatus under the class definition combined with means to apply a
    lubricant to moving parts of glass working or treating apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169,    for apparatus having means to apply a parting material to the work
    contacting surface of glass working or treating apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    184,    Lubrication, appropriate subclasses, for devices employed to
    lubricate bearing parts in a machine where such lubricating device forms no
    part of the machine structure.


CLS 65/171
TXT Apparatus under the class definition combined with means (1) to repair the
    apparatus, or (2) to assemble the apparatus or portions thereof, or (3) to
    disassemble the apparatus or portions thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27+,    for a glass working process combined with the step of repairing or
    cleaning of the apparatus, or batch dust prevention or control.

    167,    for means permitting the substitution of parts so as to permit
    change in kind or product size.

    310,    for means to supply detachable independent dies to an actuating
    common piston rod.

    323,    for product centering means, or mold and/or core aligning means.

    355,    for means heating or cooling glass working or treating apparatus.

    361,    for support means for a mold.


CLS 65/172
TXT Apparatus under subclass 171 having means to aid repair of worn, or
    damaged, or destroyed parts by removal of said damaged or worn parts and
    substitution therefor of spare or usable parts.


CLS 65/173
TXT Apparatus under subclass 171 including means mounting identical parts
    permitting use of one and then the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168,    for a similar arrangement combined with positive cleaning means.

    217+,   for suction charging means combined with diverse molds mounted to
    travel in concentric orbits.

    221+,   for a mold charging feeds of the tank feeder type combined with
    means movably mounting plural molds for travel.

    229+,   for diverse distinct glass working apparatus including press and
    blow means, especially subclass 240 for plural traveling mold carriers.

    264,    for a blow mold machine including means mounting a mold for travel.

    308+,   for a press mold machine including a plunger coating with
    successively presented molds.


CLS 65/174
TXT Apparatus under the class definition combined with mechanical means to cut,
    score, or aid in describing lines on shaped stock (i.e., articles or
    incomplete articles of manufacture).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for a process of bonding glass to a formed part combined with
    cutting, perforating or breaking of glass.

    97,     for a process of forming sheet from molten glass combined with
    severing or perforating.

    105,    for a process of reshaping a glass preform combined with severing
    or perforating.

    112,    for a process of severing or perforating a glass preform by a glass
    working operation.

    207+,   for gob charging means including means to sever a stream of glass
    into increments, combined with shape imparting receptacle means.

    303,    for gob shaping or treating means downstream of gob severing means.

    334,    for charge cutting or scraping means coating with a mold or dip
    stick to remove material therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 879+ for scoring apparatus, per se; see the
    collection of search notes thereunder for mechanically cutting, scoring or
    scribing hard or soft glass.


CLS 65/175
TXT Apparatus under subclass 174 in combination with annealing means.


CLS 65/176
TXT Apparatus under subclass 174 wherein the glass working or treating
    apparatus supplies material in continuously moving lengths to the cutter,
    scorer or scriber.


CLS 65/177
TXT Apparatus under subclass 174 wherein the cutter, scorer, or scriber is
    mounted adjacent to or on an article mold or preform mold.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334,    for a dynamic cutting means coating with a surface of a mold or
    charge confining means to sever a charge (gob) being fed thereto.


CLS 65/178
TXT Apparatus under the class definition combined with means to agitate molten
    glass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     for a process of vibrating, oscillating or agitating a preform
    combined with glass working or treating.

    132.2+  and 134+, for a process of purifying or homogenizing molten glass
    which may include agitation of the molten glass.

    302,    for article forming means utilizing mold motion to distribute
    molten glass therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    366,    Agitating, appropriate subclasses, for apparatus directed to
    agitating molten glass, per se.  Patents defining apparatus for agitating
    molten glass which includes means for discharging the molten glass to a
    glass working zone or in combination with a refining and/or treating zone
    of a glass furnace are classified in Class 65.


CLS 65/179
TXT Apparatus under subclass 178 in which the agitator is associated with a
    delivery area, e.g., gathering pool or feeding boot.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    330+,   for glass feeder means including a plunger type discharge assistant
    means which may inherently agitate.


CLS 65/180
TXT Apparatus under subclass 179 in which the agitator is located adjacent a
    delivery orifice.


CLS 65/181
TXT Apparatus under the class definition which comprises means in addition to
    or combined with glass working apparatus (1) having working or treating
    functions other than glass working or treating, or (2) which serve to
    perfect the apparatus for its intended purpose.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for a glass working process with a nonglass working operation.

    335,    for batch charging means combined with a glass furnace.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 79+ for means sealing-off glass
    receptacles by glass working combined with receptacle filling means.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 47+ for coating means involving
    carbonizing, flame contact or burning off of a coating ingredient (e.g., a
    carrier for glass enamel or fit); and subclasses 58+ for means for drying
    or means providing a noncoating treatment by gas or vapor.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    497 and 499 for means for applying and firing or fusing a ceramic decal to
    a glass substrate.


CLS 65/182.1
TXT WITH FLUID SUPPORT FOR ARTICLE OR PREFORM:

    Apparatus under the class definition including means for supporting, e.g.,
    floating, the glass on a fluid current or fluid surface, e.g., molten metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25.1+,  for a process which includes the injection of a gaseous fluid layer
    (acting as a parting material) between glass and the apparatus.

    99.2+,  for a process of forming a sheet glass by pouring molten glass onto
    a molten metal forming surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 97.1+ for
    apparatus for advancing material of indeterminate length utilizing fluid
    current support means.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 615.11+ a residual
    locus for a material fluid suspension guide or guard.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, appropriate subclasses for fluid current
    conveyors, per se.


CLS 65/182.2
TXT Gaseous support:

    Apparatus under subclass 182.1 in which the fluid support is gaseous.


CLS 65/182.3
TXT Means for treating or maintaining molten metal:

    Apparatus under subclass 182.1 including means for treating or maintaining
    the molten metal support.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are means to maintain better temperature
    distribution in the metal bath, means to limit contact with atmospheric
    gas, and means to free or prevent undesirable material from accumulating in
    the metal bath, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Also included is molten metal effecting treatment of upper
    surface of glass advanced on molten metal bath.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182.5,  for differences in liner thickness or arrangement to cause desired
    heat transfer conditions along molten metal bath.


CLS 65/182.4
TXT Including preform width maintaining or stretching means:

    Apparatus under subclass 182.1 including means adjacent a sheet source to
    exert opposed lateral forces thereto to overcome the natural tendency of
    the sheet to narrow, or to adjust or maintain the sheet width.


CLS 65/182.5
TXT Structure or composition of lining material or arrangement with shell:

    Apparatus under subclass 182.1 in which the refractory lining is (a) made
    up or associated with specific material or has special structure, (b)
    specially arranged or associated with the outer shell.


CLS 65/183
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a molding orifice for
    shaping soft glass extruded therethrough by force applying means upstream
    thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    495+,   for an extrusion bushing in a filament or fiber making apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 253.1+ for extrusion of metal through
    an orifice.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 376.1+ for shaping by die expressing apparatus of other
    nonmetallic material.


CLS 65/184
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including separate and distinct means
    for charging a claimed glass forming means with a continuous web of
    preliminary shaped sheet or ribbon of glass while in a workable condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89,     for a process of forming a film on a surface.


CLS 65/185
TXT Apparatus under subclass 184 wherein a sheet rolling means is the forming
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147+,   for a similar combination combined with means for feeding and
    incorporating a wire layer.

    245,    for plural sheet rolling means.


CLS 65/186
TXT Apparatus under subclass 185 including means for heating or cooling the
    charge prior to rolling.


CLS 65/187
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means utilizing inherent
    tackiness of molten glass for pulling glass into tube or rod form from a
    supply of molten glass - the initial form being defined, generally, by a
    bait.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86+,    for a process of drawing and simultaneously forming hollow stock.

    89,     for a process of film forming of hollow stock onto a surface.

    183,    for tube forming means comprising an extrusion die with discharge
    assistant means.

    184,    for tube formers including means charging a glass film on a mandrel.


CLS 65/188
TXT Apparatus under subclass 187 wherein the pulling means is located
    vertically above the molten supply.


CLS 65/189
TXT Apparatus under subclass 188 combined with means for subsequently handling
    a tubular or rod-shaped product thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 24 for glass cylinder
    take-down means, per se.


CLS 65/190
TXT Apparatus under subclass 188 including means correlating an internal air
    supply means for the tube being drawn with movement of a bait.


CLS 65/191
TXT Apparatus under subclass 188 including means located within a tube being
    drawn to control the shape of, or the surface of the internal wall of the
    tube, or means to center the tube during drawing.


CLS 65/192
TXT Apparatus under subclass 188 wherein an internal air supply means for a
    tube being formed passes through the molten glass source into the lower
    portion of the tube.


CLS 65/193
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means utilizing inherent
    tackiness of molten glass for pulling glass in sheet form from a molten
    mass - the initial form generally being defined by bait means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90+,    for a process of forming sheet from molten glass.

    188+,   for a means drawing a cylinder which subsequently may be cut and/or
    reshaped into panes.

    253+,   for sheet rolling means including means feeding a glass melt
    thereto.

    258+,   for a sheet casting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, for means handling
    indeterminate lengths of sheet, per se.


CLS 65/194
TXT Apparatus under subclass 193 combined with means for annealing or tempering
    the formed sheet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95+,    for a process of forming a sheet including a step of annealing or
    tempering of the sheet.


CLS 65/195
TXT Apparatus under subclass 193 including means to separate a flow of molten
    glass into plural streams or films, usually two, and reuniting the streams
    to form the sheet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for a process of forming plural sheets or sheet-like streams from a
    common source in combination with a step of bonding; see the "Search Notes"
    thereunder.


CLS 65/196
TXT Apparatus under subclass 193 including means for continuously drawing a
    sheet vertically upwardly combined with means to change the direction of
    flow to the horizontal.


CLS 65/197
TXT Apparatus under subclass 196 combined with moving endless support means for
    drawing and/or flattening the sheet.


CLS 65/198
TXT Apparatus under subclass 196 including roller means positioned above, but
    in contact with the molten glass, and which determine the area of draw of
    sheet from the bath.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185+,   for sheet rolling means downstream of means forming and charging a
    sheet or strip of soft glass thereto.


CLS 65/199
TXT Apparatus under subclass 193 combined with means adjacent a sheet source or
    meniscus to exert opposed lateral forces thereto to overcome the natural
    tendency of the sheet to narrow during drawing or to increase the sheet
    width.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     for a process of forming a sheet including a step of applying
    internal tension to the sheet.


CLS 65/200
TXT Apparatus under subclass 199 wherein the means applies sufficient forces
    transverse to the direction of draw to stretch the sheet laterally.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92,     for a process of forming a sheet including a step of smoothing the
    sheet subsequent to sheet formation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    26,     Textiles: Cloth Finishing, subclasses 71+ for cloth finishing
    apparatus comprising stretching or spreading means.


CLS 65/201
TXT Apparatus under subclass 199 including means for positional adjustment of
    the width maintaining means.


CLS 65/202
TXT Apparatus under subclass 193 including pivoted closure means which
    substantially isolate the atmosphere of a drawing chamber from that of the
    remainder of a glass furnace.


CLS 65/203
TXT Apparatus under subclass 193 including auxiliary means to heat glass in the
    draw pot or drawing chamber.


CLS 65/204
TXT Apparatus under subclass 193 including means in a drawing chamber to
    facilate cooling of the sheet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83,     for a process of forming a glass article from molten glass
    including a step of cooling the glass at the forming area only.


CLS 65/205
TXT Apparatus under subclass 193 including means in the drawing chamber or pot
    adjacent the sheet source for reflecting radiant energy.


CLS 65/206
TXT Apparatus under subclass 193 comprising means to skim the surface of the
    molten glass.


CLS 65/207
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means dispensing discrete
    charges or portions of molten or soft glass combined with a receiving
    container means for preliminary shaping the charge and/or mold means for
    making a parison or product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for a process of forming a hollow article in mold cavity with step
    of charging mold cavity.

    122,    for a process of charging molten glass into mold cavity.

    164,    for a gatherer with control means responsive to a condition sensing
    means.

    184+,   for means charging soft sheet or strip glass to a glass forming
    means.

    187+,   for means for drawing a tubular preform.

    193+,   for means for continuous drawing tube or sheet, respectively.

    258+,   for sheet casting means including ladling or pot pouring means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coating Means,
    appropriate subclasses for a process of, or apparatus of general
    application for dispensing fluent material including a receiver or receiver
    coaction.

    249,    Static Molds, appropriate subclasses, for shape imparting
    receptacle means, per se, for shaping glass.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 256+ for a female mold and means to feed measured charges of
    fluent material thereto.


CLS 65/208
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 including means to anneal, temper, or
    otherwise treat the product formed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30+,    for a process of chemically treating glass, and see the "Search
    Note" therein.

    33.1+,  for a process of devitrifying or vitrifying a crystalline glass
    preform.

    303,    for a gob shaping or treating means, per se, downstream of gob
    severing means.


CLS 65/209
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 including means utilizing differential fluid
    pressure to assist or cause feeding of a charge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183,    for extrusion die forming means having a positive discharge
    assistant means.


CLS 65/210
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 wherein a suction utilizing dispensing means
    is movably mounted above a pool of glass and cooperates therewith to gather
    a charge of glass therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73,     for a process of forming a hollow article combined with a step of
    charging a mold cavity by suction from upper surface of pool.

    124,    for a process of charging molten glass in a mold by utilizing
    suction.

    125,    for a process of gathering from an upper surface of a glass pool.


CLS 65/211
TXT Apparatus under subclass 210 wherein a pool closure means has operating
    means correlated with means positioning the dispensing means.


CLS 65/212
TXT Apparatus under subclass 210 including means mounting the gatherer for
    movement radially into, and out-of an orbit defined by traveling molds.


CLS 65/213
TXT Apparatus under subclass 210 wherein the dispensing means is structurally
    shaped to form an article or preform in situ.


CLS 65/214
TXT Apparatus under subclass 213 wherein the dispensing means is a mold for
    forming a hollow blank or preform.


CLS 65/215
TXT Apparatus under subclass 214 including a reciprocating part coating with
    the mold to force glass into contours of the mold, or which forms the
    initial cavity for a subsequent blowing.


CLS 65/216
TXT Apparatus under subclass 215 including a sequentially used separate and
    distinct blow mold.


CLS 65/217
TXT Apparatus under subclass 216 including blank molds mounted to travel in an
    orbit concentric to orbiting molds of diverse type.


CLS 65/218
TXT Apparatus under subclass 217 including means pivotally mounting a finish
    mold below the orbit of the blank mold.


CLS 65/219
TXT Apparatus under subclass 214 including means to form the initial opening in
    the glass charge by gas pressure.


CLS 65/220
TXT Apparatus under subclass 219 wherein the glass is formed in sequentially
    used distinct molds.


CLS 65/221
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 wherein dispensing is through orifice means
    below the level of molten glass in a glass delivery zone.


CLS 65/222
TXT Apparatus under subclass 221 including means distributing the charges to
    sets of molds carried by mold supporting means arranged in parallel.


CLS 65/223
TXT Apparatus under subclass 221 including plunger means coating with the mold
    means.


CLS 65/224
TXT Apparatus under subclass 223 combined with diverse molding means.


CLS 65/225
TXT Apparatus under subclass 221 with means to guide the gob to a shape
    imparting receptacle means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222,    for a charge distributor combined with a tank feeder and mold means.


CLS 65/226
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 wherein the shaping means includes press
    molding means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215,    for similar structure combined with a suction gathering means
    having a dual function of forming a parison.


CLS 65/227
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having glass working means
    identifiable as separate units each doing a complete operation of a
    different kind, e.g. glass pressing means and glass blowing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78+,    for a process including diverse glass working steps for making a
    hollow product in a mold cavity.

    140,    for press mold means combined with uniting means in electronic
    envelope header, terminal or stem making apparatus.

    156,    for fusion bonding means combined with article molding means.

    166+,   for a perforator combined with other glass working means.

    174+,   for cutting, scoring or scribing means combined with a glass
    working or treating means.

    184+,   for means charging a strip or sheet to a separate and distinct
    forming means.

    207+,   for diverse glass working means combined with means to charge soft
    glass thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 324+ for diverse distinct shaping means; see the search notes
    thereunder.


CLS 65/228
TXT Apparatus under subclass 227 including plate on which a gather of glass is
    rolled, shaped and cooled combined with means to blow glass.


CLS 65/229
TXT Apparatus under subclass 227 comprising press forming means combined with
    means to shape by inflating a charge or preform.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79+,    for a process of forming a hollow article including steps of
    pressing and blowing.

    215+,   for press and blow means combined with a suction gatherer.

    224,    for press forming means combined with diverse molding means and gob
    feeding means.


CLS 65/230
TXT Apparatus under subclass 229 in combination with means located between the
    press-forming means and the blowing means to reheat the material being
    shaped.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     for a process of forming a glass part from molten glass, reheating
    and reworking the same.


CLS 65/231
TXT Apparatus under subclass 229 comprising a blank mold nested within a blow
    mold during a parison forming operation with means withdrawing the blank
    mold to permit subsequent blowing of the parison mold in the blow mold.


CLS 65/232
TXT Apparatus under subclass 229 including a mold with mounting means for
    turning the mold upside down or vice versa.


CLS 65/233
TXT Apparatus under subclass 232 including means for creating a pressure
    differential between a charging opening of a mold and another passage
    whereby a charge is forced into contact with the mold.


CLS 65/234
TXT Apparatus under subclass 233 comprising means for applying
    super-atmospheric pressure through the charge opening.


CLS 65/235
TXT Apparatus under subclass 232 wherein the mold is a neck mold.


CLS 65/236
TXT Apparatus under subclass 235 wherein a parison mold also is inverted.


CLS 65/237
TXT Apparatus under subclass 229 including a group of press forming molds and a
    group of blow molds with movable carrier means therefor, the carrier means
    transporting one group in an orbit concentric to an orbit over which the
    other group is moved.


CLS 65/238
TXT Apparatus under subclass 237 wherein molds of one group are mounted for
    diverse movement other than for mere opening or closing of a segmented mold.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218,    for gob charging and shape imparting receptacle means having
    diverse molds traveling concentric orbits including a finish mold pivotally
    mounted below a parison mold's orbit.


CLS 65/239
TXT Apparatus under subclass 237 in combination with means to transfer work
    from a mold of one group to a mold in the other group.


CLS 65/240
TXT Apparatus under subclass 229 combined with movable carrier means for press
    mold means and movable carrier means for blow mold means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237+,   for diverse molds mounted to travel concentric orbits.


CLS 65/241
TXT Apparatus under subclass 240 in combination with work transfer means for
    transferring work from the press mold means to the blow mold means.


CLS 65/242
TXT Apparatus under subclass 229 including a mold having a bottom portion
    mounted to reciprocate with respect to side walls thereof between a first
    and second position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231,    for a parison mold encaseable in a finish mold.


CLS 65/243
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising two or more glass working
    means, identifiable as separate units, of the same kind, e.g. plural
    pressing apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  Plural preform reshaping apparatus which cooperate to
    produce a unitary result are excluded from this subclass and are located in
    subclasses 275 and 286.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for a process of forming a hollow article involving plural distinct
    shaping steps.

    227+,   for plural blow means combined with press means (generally the
    press means being limited to the formation of the initial cavity in a
    charge with simultaneous neck forming of the article).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 334 for sets of preform convoluting or twisting means, subclasses
    335+ for sets of shaping means comprising an endless surface, subclasses
    340+ for plural preform reshaping means, and subclasses 346+ for plural
    sets of male-female shaping couples.


CLS 65/244
TXT Apparatus under subclass 243 comprising at least two work stations each
    including reheating and reshaping means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for a process of forming apart from molten glass, reheating and
    grossly reshaping same.


CLS 65/245
TXT Apparatus under subclass 243 comprising plural rolling means arranged to
    provide plural distinct rolling operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98,     for a process of simultaneously forming plural separate sheets.

    185+,   for means charging sheet or strip to separate and distinct glass
    forming rolls.


CLS 65/246
TXT Apparatus under subclass 243 comprising plural male-die means and plural
    molds, each die-mold couple providing a separate shaping of soft glass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227+,   for diverse distinct glass working apparatus.

    305+,   for a press molding machine having a single plunger and plural
    molds or having plural plungers and a single mold.


CLS 65/247
TXT Apparatus under subclass 246 including plural plunger means mounted and
    actuated to cooperate sequentially with the same mold.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305+,   for a press molding machine and especially subclasses 308+ for a
    single plunger coating with successively presented molds; see the "Search
    Notes" under subclass 305.


CLS 65/248
TXT Apparatus under subclass 246 including means to cause relative rotation
    between the plunger and mold during the extraction of the plunger from a
    molded article.


CLS 65/249
TXT Apparatus under subclass 248 wherein plungers are mounted to coact through
    opposite walls of a mold.


CLS 65/250
TXT Apparatus under subclass 246 wherein plungers are mounted to coact through
    opposite walls of a mold.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258,    for a press plunger combined with movable core means.


CLS 65/251
TXT Apparatus under subclass 246 including means orbiting the plungers above
    orbiting molds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237+,   for a similar relationship in a press and blow machine including
    molds traveling concentric orbits.

    240+,   for a similar relationship in a press and blow machine including
    traveling mold carriers.


CLS 65/252
TXT Apparatus under subclass 243 comprising distinct fire-polishing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284,    for fire-polishing means, per se, and see the "Search Notes"
    thereunder.


CLS 65/253
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a pass defined by a roll,
    and a coating surface between which a feed of soft glass is formed into a
    sheet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90+,    for a process of forming sheet from molten glass, especially
    subclasses 99+ for sheet rolling.

    143+,   for ball rolling apparatus; see the "Search Notes" thereunder.

    148+,   for glass to wire laminating means including means to feed the wire
    thereto.

    154,    for glass to wire laminating means.

    185+,   for means charging a continuous strip or film to sheet rolling
    means.

    193+,   for forming rolls combined with sheet drawing means.

    245,    for plural distinct rolling means.

    370.1,  for roller means for glassworking, tempering, or annealing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, appropriate subclasses,  for combined metal working
    and diverse mechanical or miscellaneous manufacturing devices which include
    rollers.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 199+ and 365.2 for a process or
    apparatus for rolling metal.

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses, for presses having rolls.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 428 for continuous metal casting apparatus
    including cooperating rolls.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 89+ for heated or cooled rolls, per se.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 122+, for road
    and pavement smoothing devices.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 363+ for a press forming means, press reshaping means or
    vulcanizing means comprising an endless surface and coating means; see the
    search notes thereunder.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere classified.


CLS 65/254
TXT Apparatus under subclass 253 combined with glass treating means.


CLS 65/255
TXT Apparatus under subclass 253 including (1) a means for impressing a design
    or particular configuration in the surface of the sheet, or (2) means for
    corrugating the sheet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93,     for a process of sheet forming with step of corrugating, embossing
    or surface deformation of sheet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 3.1+ for
    embossing apparatus, per se.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for laminating combined with surface deformation;
    note especially subclasses 183+ for sheet deforming means, per se.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 152 for a glass
    sheet which may have a rugose or other textured surface, subclasses 156+
    for stock material including a layer of varying thickness, subclasses 182+
    for a stock material product having corrugations, and subclasses 194+ for a
    glass article having a differential or discontinuous coating thereon (e.g.,
    print, design).


CLS 65/256
TXT Apparatus under subclass 253 in which the coating surface comprises a flat
    plate.


CLS 65/257
TXT Apparatus under subclass 256 including means to reciprocate the plate with
    respect to the roll.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    for a process of forming a sheet including the step of pouring
    molten glass onto a moving surface.


CLS 65/258
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising molten glass pouring means
    combined with a receiving means providing a flat surface in which the
    molten glass spreads by force of gravity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99.2+,  for a process of forming sheet glass by pouring molten glass onto a
    forming surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    500 for casting means combined with adhesive bonding apparatus.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 396 for means casting on an endless surface with cooperating
    harvesting means, and subclass 224 for a fluent stock casting means
    operably associated with a shaping surface to form an indefinite length
    product.


CLS 65/259
TXT Apparatus under subclass 258 wherein the pouring means comprises a melting
    pot combined with means for handling and pouring from the pot.


CLS 65/260
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including mold means combined with
    means mounted to remove the product from an upper side of the mold.

    (1)     Note.  Since product ejectors working through the bottom of the
    mold are widely used, no collection of art has been made; thus, a search
    for such ejectors includes all of subclasses 261+ and 305+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239     and 241, for transfer means in a press-blow machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, appropriate subclasses for article
    transfer means, per se.


CLS 65/261
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means utilizing
    differential gas pressure inflating a glass charge having a preliminary
    cavity therein in a female mold thereby imparting a shape thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     for a process of forming a hollow product in a mold cavity
    utilizing differential gas pressure.

    207+,   for glass blowing apparatus combined with means charging a gob
    thereto.

    227+,   for glass blowing apparatus combined with diverse glass working
    means.

    243+,   for apparatus including plural distinct glass blowing units.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 297 for the combination of means shaping a parison from bulk
    material with downstream blow shaping means and severing means
    therebetween; subclass 326 for extrusion shaping apparatus with downstream
    blow shaping means and subclasses 387+ for a preform reshaping means
    utilizing work contacting fluid pressure.


CLS 65/262
TXT Apparatus under subclass 261 in combination with means to treat a product
    being formed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for a process of forming a hollow article in a mold cavity combined
    with annealing or tempering.


CLS 65/263
TXT Apparatus under subclass 261 in combination with means to reduce the
    pressure exteriorly of the charge to less than atmospheric.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233+,   for a press and blow machine utilizing vacuum means to compact a
    charge in a mold.


CLS 65/264
TXT Apparatus under subclass 261 including moving mold support means mounting a
    mold for travel from one position to another.

    (1)     Note.  Opening and closing means for segmented molds are classified
    below in subclasses 357+.


CLS 65/265
TXT Apparatus under subclass 264 in combination with apparatus heating or
    cooling means.


CLS 65/266
TXT Apparatus under subclass 261 in combination with means to rotate the mold
    about its own axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for a process of forming a hollow article in a mold cavity combined
    with a step of spreading the glass by rotation of the mold.


CLS 65/267
TXT Apparatus under subclass 261 in combination with apparatus heating or
    cooling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    265,    for a blow mold machine including a traveling mold and apparatus
    heating or cooling means.


CLS 65/268
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising preform reshaping means
    combined with distinct treating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for a process of reshaping a glass preform combined with annealing,
    tempering or fire-polishing.

    227+,   for diverse distinct glass working apparatus including
    fire-polishing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclass 11.5 for combined working and heat
    treatment of metals; see the "Search Notes" thereunder.


CLS 65/269
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising preform supporting means
    combined with heating means for accomplishing a glass working operation.

    (1)     Note.  Heating of a preform so that the outer surface becomes
    molten and is shaped by surface tension and/or gravity is considered a
    glass working operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102+,   for a process of reshaping a glass preform.

    152+,   for fusion bonding means including work holders and heating means;
    see the "Search Notes" thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclass 9 for a process of cutting metal by heat.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 122+, for a residual heating device having
    means manipulating or orienting an article.


CLS 65/270
TXT Apparatus under subclass 269 for tipping off a glass envelope (e.g., of an
    electronic device) with or without means to exhaust gas therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for a process of sealing off a gas evacuating opening.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 79+ for apparatus including means for
    gas filling and/or evacuating of a receptacle and closing means.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coating Means,
    subclass 65 for evacuation means in fluent material handling apparatus
    having receiver or receiver coating means.


CLS 65/271
TXT Apparatus under subclass 269 in which the heating means is movable relative
    to the stock during a reshaping operation.

    (1)     Note.  Means merely positioning a burner are classified in the
    remaining subclasses under subclass 269.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for a process of bonding which includes relative rotation of work
    and heating means.


CLS 65/272
TXT Apparatus under subclass 269 wherein the heating means is a burner having
    control means therefore mechanically connected for correlation with the
    movement of a preform, a work holder, or tool.


CLS 65/273
TXT Apparatus under subclass 269 including means for converting sheet stock to
    or from planar sheet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for a process of reshaping a preform utilizing a heat sink or
    shield.

    106,    for a process of bending or curving sheet stock.

    197,    for means drawing sheet vertically combined with means to
    flattening the sheet after directional change to the horizontal.

    268,    for sheet flattening means combined with annealing means.

    287+,   for sheet bending molds, per se.


CLS 65/274
TXT Apparatus under subclass 269 including preheating means spaced from the
    reheating and/or reshaping means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244,    for plural distinct glass working apparatus including spaced
    preform reheating and reshaping means.


CLS 65/275
TXT Apparatus under subclass 269 in combination with mechanical means for
    performing a shaping or finishing operation on a softened preform.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for a process of forming a glass part from molten glass, reheating
    and grossly reshaping it.

    140,    for press mold means used to reshape preforms in electronic
    envelope header making apparatus.

    244+,   for preform heating means combined with spaced reshaping means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses, for apparatus for bending
    or otherwise shaping metal while in self-sustaining condition.


CLS 65/276
TXT Apparatus under subclass 275 wherein the preform is of tubular shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108+,   for a process of reshaping a tubular preform, with retention of
    internal cavity.


CLS 65/277
TXT Apparatus under subclass 276 including means internally of the stock to
    shape the bore thereof to an accurate cross-section (generally utilizing
    differential air pressure to force the softened glass to conform to the
    contour of the internal means).


CLS 65/278
TXT Apparatus under subclass 276 including means movably supporting the stock
    for travel in a circular or elliptical path.


CLS 65/279
TXT Apparatus under subclass 278 in which the stock is supported horizontally.


CLS 65/280
TXT Apparatus under subclass 278 in which the stock is supported vertically.


CLS 65/281
TXT Apparatus under subclass 276 comprising means to curve stock, or to
    straighten curved stock.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273,    for means for converting sheet stock to or from planar sheet.


CLS 65/282
TXT Apparatus under subclass 276 comprising means for reshaping an internal
    surface of the stock.


CLS 65/283
TXT Apparatus under subclass 276 including means to elongate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270,    for glass envelope tipping off by stretching means.

    278,    for hollow stock stretching means including orbiting stock
    supporting means.


CLS 65/284
TXT Apparatus under subclass 269 including means to heat a surface layer of a
    preform to a molten condition whereby surface tension and/or gravity
    eliminates defects thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65,     for a process of forming an article from molten glass followed by
    fire-polishing.

    104,    for a process of reshaping combined with fire-polishing a preform.

    120,    for a process of treating a preform by flame only.

    227+,   for diverse glass working including fire-polishing.

    252,    for plural distinct fire-polishing means in a single apparatus.


CLS 65/285
TXT Apparatus under subclass 269 wherein a preform supporting means holds a
    heat softened preform in a manner permitting reshaping by gravity or
    pressure of a flame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for a treating process including perforating or severing by flame.

    166,    for perforating apparatus including flame means.

    273,    for apparatus for reshaping sheet stock including sagging on a
    bending mold.


CLS 65/286
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means for performing a
    shaping operation on a previously formed blank while in a soft state.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102+,   for a process of reshaping of a glass preform.

    275+,   for glass preform reshaping apparatus combined with reheating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 383+ for a preform reshaping or resizing means, or means to
    vulcanize a preform on a conforming support; see the search notes
    thereunder.


CLS 65/287
TXT Apparatus under subclass 286 for bending sheet glass which apparatus
    includes a mold surface having a desired configuration onto which a sheet
    in a soft state settles freely into conformity with the shaping surface.

    (1)     Note.  Also included within the scope of this and indented
    subclasses are patents claiming means to assist in the bending operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106+,   for a process of reshaping a glass sheet.

    197,    for flattening tables combined with glass drawing means.

    273,    for apparatus to reshape planar stock combined with reheating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses, for a process or an
    apparatus for bending or otherwise shaping metal plastically.

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses for work holders of general
    application.


CLS 65/288
TXT Apparatus under subclass 287 having (1) means thereon capable of absorbing
    large quantities of heat and used as a heat absorber or reservoir, or (2)
    barrier means preventing heat from reaching a portion of an apparatus or
    stock.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for a process reshaping a glass preform utilizing a heat shield or
    sink.

    104,    for a process of reshaping a glass preform which includes a step of
    fire polishing, tempering or annealing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 400 for a heat accumulator, per se.


CLS 65/289
TXT Apparatus under subclass 287 wherein additional movable sheet supporting or
    sheet guide means are provided to aid in the glass bending operation.


CLS 65/290
TXT Apparatus under subclass 289 wherein the mold has a movable section.


CLS 65/291
TXT Apparatus under subclass 287 wherein the mold has a movable section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    368+,   for a segmented forming mold having a cavity.


CLS 65/292
TXT Apparatus under subclass 286 in which the preformed blank is cylindrical in
    cross-section, e.g. bottle necks.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108+,   for a process of reshaping a hollow glass preform.

    276+,   for hollow stock reshaping apparatus combined with reheating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 274+ for a process or apparatus for
    "drawing" metal through an orifice.


CLS 65/293
TXT Apparatus under subclass 292 in which the reshaping means includes means to
    form threads.


CLS 65/294
TXT Apparatus under subclass 292 in which the reshaping means includes an
    internal forming spindle having means to increase its effective diameter.


CLS 65/295
TXT Apparatus under subclass 292 in which the reshaping means includes crimping
    means.


CLS 65/296
TXT Apparatus under subclass 292 wherein the reshaping means includes separate
    means for simultaneously reshaping internal and external surfaces of
    cylindrical stock.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282,    for similar apparatus combined with reheating means.


CLS 65/297
TXT Apparatus under subclass 296 in which both forming means are caused to
    rotate by driving means.


CLS 65/298
TXT Apparatus under subclass 296 in which the internal forming means is caused
    to rotate while the external forming means remains stationary.


CLS 65/299
TXT Apparatus under subclass 292 in which the shaping means consists of means
    to spread or flare the end portion of cylindrical stock.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    295,    for flaring means combined with crimping means.


CLS 65/300
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means subjecting a discrete
    portion of soft glass, having a cavity therein, to a differential gas
    pressure to cause ballooning thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for a process for reshaping hollow shaped preform utilizing vacuum
    or gas pressure.

    187+,   for tube drawing means including means for introducing air in the
    tube simultaneously.

    243+,   for plural blowing means.

    261+,   for a glass blowing machine utilizing a blow mold.

    276+,   for hollow glass preform reshaping means including inflating means
    combined with reheating means.

    292+,   for apparatus for reshaping cylindrical stock including inflating
    means.

    353+,   for a drawing bait with air supply means.


CLS 65/301
TXT Apparatus under subclass 300 in combination with means to selectively
    control the ballooning.


CLS 65/302
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising forming means including a
    mold, and means imparting motion to the mold to cause or enhance shaping of
    a charge of soft glass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for a process of forming a hollow article in a mold cavity combined
    with the step of spreading the glass by rotating the mold.

    266,    for blow molding apparatus including means to rotate a mold about
    its axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 286+ for centrifugal metal casting
    apparatus and subclass 114 for corresponding methods.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 425+ for means utilizing mold motion to distribute or compact
    stock therein.


CLS 65/303
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means to shape, modify, or
    treat a gob prior to its entry into a mold, with a severing means located
    upstream therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for a process of gob shaping or treating subsequent to the
    discharge of the gob through an orifice.


CLS 65/304
TXT Apparatus under the class definition combined with means for conveying
    and/or delaying a glass charge from a feeding means to its point of use, e.
    g. a mold.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225,    for the combination of a gob feeder, conveyor, or guide means and
    shape imparting receptacle means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, appropriate subclasses,
    for chute type apparatus for handling glass charges, per se.


CLS 65/305
TXT Article forming means under the class definition comprising a dynamic male
    member co-acting with a cavity in a female mold.

    (1)     Note.  If a neck-ring, baffle, or plunger follower contacts the
    female mold prior to, or simultaneous with a pressing operation on a
    charge, the patent is placed here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140,    for electronic envelope header, terminal or stem making apparatus
    including press mold means.

    156,    for article forming means combined with uniting means.

    166,    for perforating means combined with glass press molding means.

    177,    for mechanical cutting scoring or scribing means combined with mold
    means.

    207+,   for press means combined with means to charge a mold, especially
    subclasses 215+, 223 and 226.

    227+,   for a press molding machine combined with diverse glass working
    means.

    246+,   for a combination of plural press machines.

    247+,   for press molding apparatus wherein a neck-ring, baffle, or plunger
    follower preliminarily shapes a charge with subsequent and final shaping
    accomplished by a dynamic plunger.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses, for residual processes and
    apparatus for subjecting material to compressive forces.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 406+ for a press forming apparatus having opposed press members;
    see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 65/306
TXT Apparatus under subclass 305 combined with product treating (e.g.
    annealing) means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for a process of forming a hollow article in a mold cavity with the
    step of annealing or tempering.


CLS 65/307
TXT Apparatus under subclass 305 including mold closure means or mold rings
    mounted by a lateral support for movement to or from engagement with a mold
    body.


CLS 65/308
TXT Apparatus under subclass 305 comprising a single plunger co-acting with
    individual molds of a group successively presented by movable mold support
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251+,   for orbiting plungers cooperating with orbiting molds in a press
    molding machine.


CLS 65/309
TXT Apparatus under subclass 308 including means providing relative rotation
    between a plunger and a mold traveling in an orbit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248+,   for similar structure in a multiple press.


CLS 65/310
TXT Apparatus under subclass 309 comprising a plurality of male shaping members
    detachably carried and independently inserted into a mold by a single,
    commonly used reciprocating shaft.


CLS 65/311
TXT Apparatus under subclass 308 including means to cause movement (other than
    mere opening and closing in situ) of an orbiting mold, as a unit, into and
    out of a path defined by the orbit of the mold.


CLS 65/312
TXT Apparatus under subclass 308 wherein a mold while orbiting defines a
    vertical layer having a horizontal axis.


CLS 65/313
TXT Apparatus under subclass 308 including an orbiting mold divided
    perpendicularly with respect to a horizontal plane.


CLS 65/314
TXT Apparatus under subclass 305 including plural motors arranged coaxially
    with a plunger.


CLS 65/315
TXT Apparatus under subclass 305 in combination with means to withdraw a core
    from a mold cavity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 63+ for mold with core and having means to
    remove core.


CLS 65/316
TXT Apparatus under subclass 305 including means to provide relative rotation
    between a plunger and a mold during separation thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248+,   for a similar relationship in apparatus providing plural molds and
    plural co-acting plungers.

    309+,   for a similar relationship of plunger and mold in apparatus
    providing plural orbiting molds with a single co-acting plunger.


CLS 65/317
TXT Apparatus under subclass 305 including means movably mounting a female mold
    for oscillatory or reciprocatory movement, generally to provide engagement
    with a substantially stationary male member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232+,   for mold inverting means in a press and blow machine.


CLS 65/318
TXT Apparatus under subclass 305 including means to vary the pressure applied
    to a plunger during pressing.


CLS 65/319
TXT Apparatus under subclass 305 combined with means to heat or cool the
    apparatus.


CLS 65/320
TXT Apparatus under subclass 305 comprising plural plungers with means to
    selectively present and individually operate them at a single station -
    generally to a manually presented female mold.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    308+,   for apparatus including a single plunger co-acting with a single
    mold of a group with movable mold supporting means successively presenting
    a mold to the plunger.


CLS 65/321
TXT Apparatus under subclass 305 comprising a plunger reciprocating from a
    position below a mold table into a pressing position through the table.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232,    for a press and blow machine including mold inverting means,
    especially subclasses 235+ for a plunger operating from below.


CLS 65/322
TXT Apparatus under subclass 305 including means to adjust the travel of the
    plunger.


CLS 65/323
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means for (1) orientating a
    product with respect to a glass working or handling means prior to
    co-action therewith, or (2) product hold-down means for retaining a
    product's position upon opening of a mold or shaping means, or (3) means
    for aligning parts of a mold or a mold and its core during or upon
    completion of translation thereof.


CLS 65/324
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means (with or without
    severing means) to supply increments of molten glass to a shaping tool or
    machine by slug feeding means, gathering means or ladling means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    for a process of gathering from an upper surface of a glass pool.

    207+,   for the combination of molding apparatus and means to charge the
    apparatus.

    336,    for a gathering pool-type glass furnace.

    347+,   for residual glass furnaces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclasses 336+ for non motor powered traversing
    hoists.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses, for article dispensing
    of general utility.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses, for processes and apparatus of
    general application for dispensing of materials which may be in any
    physical state, e.g. liquid, gas, etc.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 447+ for a shaping surface and means to feed fluent stock
    thereto; see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 65/325
TXT Apparatus under subclass 324 wherein the glass is discharged through an
    orifice or weir located below the level of the melt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126+,   for a process of discharging molten glass downwardly through an
    orifice.

    221+,   for similarly apparatus combined with shape imparting receiving
    means.


CLS 65/326
TXT Apparatus under subclass 325 with additional heating or cooling means for
    conditioning the glass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    337+,   for supplemental heating or cooling means associated with the pool
    of a glass furnace.


CLS 65/327
TXT Apparatus under subclass 326 wherein the heating or cooling means is
    located at, or immediately adjacent to the discharge orifice.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128,    for a process of discharging molten glass downwardly through an
    orifice with the step of varying the temperature of the glass at or
    adjacent the orifice.


CLS 65/328
TXT Apparatus under subclass 325 having:  (1) A plurality of plungers which act
    as discharge assistants, or (2) a plurality of orifices through which glass
    is discharged.


CLS 65/329
TXT Apparatus under subclass 325 in which the molten glass is caused to be
    discharged through the orifice by (1) fluid means under pressure and in
    direct contact with the glass, or (2) vacuum means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124,    for a process of charging a mold with molten glass by suction.

    130+,   for a process of controlling flow through a delivery orifice by use
    of differential gas pressure.

    209,    for gob charging means utilizing fluid pressure discharge assistant
    means in combination with shape imparting receiving means.


CLS 65/330
TXT Apparatus under subclass 325 including means reciprocally plunging within
    the molten glass substantially co-axial with the orifice whereby the volume
    is controlled or varied.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129,    for a process of discharging molten glass downwardly through an
    orifice with means permitting flow control or arresting of flow through the
    orifice.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 282+ for dispensing means having volume
    varying means, and subclass 340 for reciprocating impeller volume varying
    means.


CLS 65/331
TXT Apparatus under subclass 330 wherein the plunger has motion in addition to
    reciprocating.


CLS 65/332
TXT Apparatus under subclass 330 combined with means to sever the dispensed
    glass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221+,   for similar structure combined with molding apparatus.


CLS 65/333
TXT Apparatus under subclass 324 comprising a pulsating means creating wave
    like motion in the glass causing discrete portions of glass to break over a
    weir-type discharge opening.


CLS 65/334
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including (1) molten glass severing or
    scraping means, per se, constructed to co-act with a surface of a charge
    confining means (e.g. a surface of a mold), or (2) such means claimed in
    combination with a fragment of glass working apparatus, or (3) gob shears,
    per se, not elsewhere classified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    for a process comprising severing a stream of molten glass; see the
    "Search Notes" thereunder.

    207+,   for combination apparatus comprising gob charging means and shape
    imparting receptacle means with or without molten glass severing means.

    303,    for a gob shaping or treating means located downstream of a gob
    severing means.

    324,    for molten glass dispensing means with or without molten glass
    severing means, especially subclass 332 for a tank feeder with a
    plunger-type discharge assistant and a severing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 600 and 623
    for gob shears, per se.


CLS 65/335
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means to feed raw materials
    combined with a melting furnace including structurally defined refining or
    delivery zones.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146,    for means to feed coloring additives to a glass melt.

    347,    for glass furnaces, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 147+ for a chamber of a
    type utilized for a heating function and means for charging or discharging
    the chamber, and see particularly subclasses 165+ of that area.

    432,    Heating, appropriate subclasses for glass heating apparatus
    combined with a glass batch feeder to form molten glass and not including
    structural features peculiar to working or treating of the molten glass.
    The claiming of means to convey the molten glass to a working zone does not
    exclude the patent from Class 432 unless the zone is structurally defined.


CLS 65/336
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising furnaces having a
    structurally defined area, permitting removal (e.g., by drawing, ladling,
    etc.) of molten glass from a pool by means located there above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    for a process of gathering from an upper surface of a glass pool.

    324+,   for glass furnaces including means to dispense glass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    432,    Heating, appropriate subclasses, for glass heating apparatus
    including means to heat molten glass in a receptacle from which molten
    glass is gathered or drawn therefrom to form a glass product; however,
    structure peculiar to gathering, or drawing will cause placement in Class
    65.


CLS 65/337
TXT Apparatus under subclass 336 including heating or cooling means located
    within or immediately adjacent the pool area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203,    for sheet drawing means in combination with heating means in the
    drawing area.

    204,    for sheet drawing means in combination with cooling means in the
    drawing area.


CLS 65/338
TXT Apparatus under subclass 337 including (1) means in molten glass defining a
    source of draw and/or (2) means shielding an area of draw.


CLS 65/339
TXT Apparatus under subclass 336 including means isolating the pool area from a
    refining and/or melting area.


CLS 65/340
TXT Apparatus under subclass 339 comprising support means movably mounting
    structure defining a pool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173,    for identical pool structures mounted for alternate use.


CLS 65/341
TXT Apparatus under subclass 339 including a connection between two pools
    arranged in a step wise or cascading fashion wherein the glass residing in
    the upper pool flows into the lower level in a falling stream.


CLS 65/342
TXT Apparatus under subclass 339 wherein the isolating means is a wall retained
    bridge-type barrier providing for molten glass passage thereunder.


CLS 65/343
TXT Apparatus under subclass 342 wherein a bridge floats in the molten glass
    and is restrained to vertical movement by guide means in a furnace wall.

    (1)     Note.  A floating bridge, per se, is placed here.


CLS 65/344
TXT Apparatus under subclass 339 including (1) means in a pool of molten glass
    defining a source of draw and/or (2) means shielding an area of draw.

    (1)     Note.  A deputer, per se, is placed in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    338,    for a similar combination combined with a heater or heat exchange
    means for the deputer, draw ring, or draw shield.


CLS 65/345
TXT Apparatus under subclass 339 including baffle means suspended downward from
    above the molten glass into or adjacent the glass for controlling the flow
    of heater gasses above the glass.


CLS 65/346
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means defining a flow
    confining channel between furnace sections with means in the channel to
    adjust the consistency of molten glass therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324+,   for a glass furnace combination including molten glass dispensing
    means especially subclass 326 for auxiliary heating or cooling means in a
    dispensing zone.

    337+,   for supplemental heating or heat exchange means in a gathering pool
    type furnace.


CLS 65/347
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a furnace or melting pot
    including (1) a melting zone and a structural defined refining zone and/or
    (2) a structurally defined delivery zone without requiring a dispensing
    means or structure defining a gathering pool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134.1+, for a process of purifying glass subsequent to flowing from a
    melting zone.

    178+,   for a glass furnace combined with means for agitating molten glass.

    324+,   for a glass furnace combined with molten glass dispensing means.

    335+,   for a combination of furnace charging means and a glass furnace.

    336+,   for a glass furnace of the gathering or drawing pool type.

    346+,   for a channel section including means to place a glass melt into
    working condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclasses, especially 772 for a
    capacitive dielectric heater peculiar to fluent material.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 27+ for glass
    furnaces having electrical heating means and for processes of manipulating
    an electric glass furnace.  See subclass 134 in Class 65 for the lines
    between Class 65 and Class 373.

    432,    Heating, appropriate subclasses for furnaces or melting pots of
    general application including glass melting furnaces or pots without
    structurally defined fining or delivery zones.


CLS 65/348
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including positive means to cool a
    glass product, e.g. air blast tempering means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for a process of forming a hollow article in mold cavity with the
    step of annealing or tempering.

    114+,   for a process of tempering.

    161,    for similar apparatus including automatic control means.

    194,    for sheet drawing means combined with annealing or tempering means.

    204,    for sheet drawing means combined with sheet cooling means.

    262,    for glass blowing apparatus combined with treating means.

    268,    for the combination of preform reshaping means and treating means.

    303,    for gob treating means downstream of gob shearing means.

    306,    for a press molding machine combined with treating means.

    507+    and 510+, for means to heat or cool a formed glass fiber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses
    for a process or apparatus for gas-solid contacting not elsewhere provided
    for.

    148,    Metal Treatment, appropriate subclasses for a metal treating
    process.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for process or apparatus of
    general application for exchanging heat, especially subclasses 58+ for
    combined heating and cooling.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 388 for electrical heating means
    combined with an article conveyor.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses
    for spray nozzle arrangements and nozzle detail.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 249+ for solid metal treating
    apparatus.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 445+ for means treating a product of apparatus of this class not
    otherwise provided for; see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 65/349
TXT Apparatus under subclass 348 combined with means to heat the product prior
    to exposure to positive cooling means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 65 for a heater and cooler successively
    traversed by material moving through a heat exchanger of general utility.

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclasses for an electric heater.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, appropriate subclasses for an
    electric furnace.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 77+, for a residual heater combined with work
    cool down means.


CLS 65/350
TXT Apparatus under subclass 349 wherein means to heat comprise spaced distinct
    heating means.


CLS 65/351
TXT Apparatus under subclass 349 including spaced cooling means providing
    distinct cooling zones downstream of the heating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    for a process of differential or localized tempering.


CLS 65/352
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means for starting and
    defining the shape of a draw of glass from a source  molten glass.


CLS 65/353
TXT Apparatus under subclass 352 including means to supply air internally of
    the glass being drawn.


CLS 65/354
TXT Apparatus under subclass 353 including heating or cooling means.


CLS 65/355
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means to heat or cool the
    apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169,    for positive means for cleaning apparatus some of which inherently
    heat or cool.

    265,    for apparatus heating or cooling means in a glass blowing machine
    having traveling molds.

    267,    for similar structure combined with blowing apparatus.

    319,    for a press molding machine including apparatus heating or cooling
    means.

    326+,   for molten glass dispensing means with auxiliary heating or cooling
    means.

    337+,   for supplemental heating or heat exchange means in a gathering pool
    of a furnace.

    354,    for a bait having heating or cooling means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for residual heat exchange
    apparatus of general application.

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclasses for electrical heating
    means, per se.

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 79+ for molds including heating means and
    subclass 111 for molds including a solid heat conductor, i.e., chill or
    insulator.

    431,    Combustion, appropriate subclasses for liquid or gaseous fuel
    burners, per se.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 233+, for a residual heating apparatus element
    having protective cooling structure.


CLS 65/356
TXT Apparatus under subclass 355 in which the heating or cooling means is (1)
    encased by parts of the apparatus, or (2) involves internal structure
    thereof.


CLS 65/357
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including (1) a mold and means which
    acts to separate the mold into two or more distinct portions, or (2) a mold
    combined with mold clamping means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 455+ for clamps of
    general utility; see the "Search Notes" thereunder.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses, for
    mechanical movements, per se.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, appropriate subclasses for closure fasteners of
    general application.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 450+ for a segmented female mold and mold opening and closing or
    clamping means.


CLS 65/358
TXT Apparatus under subclass 357 in which the separating action includes or
    consists of drawing a core from the mold.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219+,   for a combination of gob charging and blow molding means including
    movable core means.

    250,    for a plunger oppositely disposed from a movable core means.

    315,    for a press molding machine including core withdrawing means.


CLS 65/359
TXT Apparatus under subclass 357 in combination with means to support or carry
    the mold or portions thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    361,    for molds with supporting means, per se; see the "Search Notes"
    thereunder.


CLS 65/360
TXT Apparatus under subclass 359 in which portions of the mold pivot about an
    axis during separation.


CLS 65/361
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising molds supporting means
    combined with only those details of a mold required to cooperate therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207+,   for mold support means combined with gob charge and shape imparting
    means.

    232+,   for mold inverting means in a press and blow machine.

    237+,   for mold support means movably mounting diverse molds for travel in
    concentric paths in a press and blow machine.

    240+,   for plural mold carriers supporting diverse molds in a press and
    blow machine.

    246+,   for a plural press machine including mold support means.

    264+,   for a blow mold machine including movable support means for a mold.

    266,    for mold support means mounted on a mold for rotation about its own
    axis in a blow machine.

    302,    for article forming utilizing mold motion.

    308+,   for means successively presenting molds in a press mold machine.

    317,    for mold support means reciprocating or oscillating a mold in a
    press machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 453+ for the combination of a dynamic carrier or a dynamic
    support and a female mold; see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 65/362
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising (1) a male forming element
    constructed to cooperate with a female mold, or (2) a plunger-type
    discharge assistant for a molten glass feeder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305+,   for a press molding machine including a plunger, especially
    subclass 317 for a reciprocating female mold member co-acting with a
    stationary male die; see the "Search Notes" thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 457 for a dynamic male shaping means including mechanical movement
    or power means and subclass 469 for a shaping plunger, per se.


CLS 65/370.1
TXT ROLLER MEANS FOR GLASSWORKING, TEMPERING, OR ANNEALING:

    Apparatus under the class definition having a generally cylindrical work
    contacting surface, which surface revolves about the longitudinal axis of
    the cylinder with rolling motion relative to the surface (a) of molten or
    hot semisolid glass during glassworking or (b) of solid or semisolid glass
    during heat treatment to effect tempering or annealing thereof or during
    other treatment to effect physical or chemical changes thereof.

    (1)     Note.  A patent to a roller, per se, disclosed solely for use in a
    glassworking apparatus is not classified in Class 65 if the roller is
    solely for conveying or feeding to a work treating station or between work
    treating stations provided that the roller is not synchronized with or
    controlled by means associated with the operation of a work treating
    station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    253+,   for a rolling means to form sheet or strip.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 86+ for a roller with heating or cooling
    surfaces under the class definition.

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, subclass 37 for a
    nonpowered conveying

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 780+ for a powered conveying
    roller.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 244 for an electric heating device
    combined with a rotatable pressure application means.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 190+ for a
    roll under the class definition.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclasses 264+ for a sheet feeding
    roller.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 239+ for a work feeding, agitating or conveying
    roller within a furnace.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roller, per se, not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 65/374.1
TXT APPARATUS MADE OF SPECIAL MATERIAL:

    Apparatus under the class definition characterized in part by the material
    of which it is made.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 38.2+ for
    compositions, per se, formulated for use in making or coating molds.

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 114+ for a mold having a specific coating
    or adherent layer; and subclasses 134+ for a mold made of a specific
    composition.


CLS 65/374.11
TXT Metal-nonmetal composite:

    Apparatus under subclass 374.1 in which at least one layer or portion is
    made of a specified metal or alloy and at least one other layer or portion
    is made of a nonmetallic material.


CLS 65/374.12
TXT Metallic:

    Apparatus under subclass 374.1 made of a specified metal or alloy.

    (1)     Note.  There may be one or more defined metal layers in the
    apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    374.11, for apparatus comprising a metal layer or portion together with a
    nonmetal layer or portion.


CLS 65/374.13
TXT Ceramic material:

    Apparatus under subclass 374.1 comprising a ceramic material.

    (1)     Note.  For the purpose of this classification, a ceramic material
    is an inorganic composition which may be either thermoplastic, such as a
    glass, or thermosetting, such as a refractory composition, frequently,
    although not necessarily, made of a mixture of metallic oxides and/or
    silicates, or baked clay-like substances.  All substance defined in Class
    501, Compositions:  Ceramic, as being ceramic are herein contemplated.
    Thus, e.g., apparatus made of a composition comprising primarily carbides
    or nitrites would be included herein.


CLS 65/374.14
TXT Asbestos containing:

    Apparatus under subclass 374.1 which is made, at least in part, of asbestos.


CLS 65/374.15
TXT Elemental carbon containing (e.g., graphite, charcoal, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 374.1 wherein at least part of the apparatus is
    made of a substance containing elemental carbon.

    (1)     Note.  The elemental carbon may be disclosed as, e.g., graphite,
    charcoal, etc.


CLS 65/375
TXT Subject matter under the class definition not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 65/376
TXT PROCESSES OF MANUFACTURING FIBERS, FILAMENTS, OR PREFORMS:

    Processes under the class definition directed to producing (a) rodlike
    stock of sufficiently small diameter, either as (i) continuous filaments of
    indefinite length, or (ii) short discrete pieces, or (b) stock material
    intended to be used in fiber and filament making.

    (1)     Note.  For the purposes of this class ``mineral wool" is wool
    formed from slag.

    (2)     Note.  Fiber and filament treating combined with a step of making
    stock material intended to be used in fiber and filament making are
    included herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclasses 103, 172.1, 178, 190, 217, and
    247 for processes and apparatus involving mechanical interengaging of
    fibers or strands not combined with a glassworking or glass treating
    operation.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 159 for measuring and testing of a
    fiber, per se.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    62.4 for processes for adhesively laminating plural preforms which include
    the step of liberating or forming glass fibers with bulk deposition thereof
    to form at least one of the preforms. See subclasses 167 and 433+ for a
    process or apparatus for forming glass filaments combined with the steps of
    applying an adhesive to the filaments and assembling them to form a strand
    (a patent which discloses but does not claim the assembly operation above
    is classified in Class 65 even though the sole disclosure relates to the
    formation of a strand composed of bonded filaments). A patent claiming the
    steps of applying a coating material to glass filaments and assembling the
    coated filaments and having a specification disclosing several coating
    materials one of which is not an adhesive is classified in Class 65 unless
    a claim recites an adhesive coating material, in which case the patent is
    classified in Class 156; and see subclasses 2+ and 345 for etching of glass
    fibers or filaments, per se.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 3 and 100+ for chemical liberation of fibers and
    felting in paper manufacturing.

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 192.29 for forming
    a transparent optical conductor by sputtering; follow the general
    guidelines for placement of an operation involving the combination of at
    least one Class 204 step in sequence with a separate Class 65 step as
    explained at the beginning of the Class 204 definition under I, (4) and (5)
    Notes.

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 687+ for electrolytic material
    treatment, especially subclass 769 for electrolytic treatment of solid
    glass, silica, quartz, or optical material.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses for comminution of solid materials of general application.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes, for
    shaping, molding, or casting of nonmetallic materials other than glass,
    especially subclasses 1.24+ for shaping, treating, or extruding optical
    fibers, subclasses 5+ for processes, within the class definition, of liquid
    comminuting and solidifying of general application, and subclasses 165+ for
    processes of forming indefinite-length fibers or filaments from materials
    which may be disclosed to be siliceous materials in solution or suspension
    by precipitation in a reactive or solvent extractive bath or by evaporation
    of the solvent.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Processes, for
    molding, casting, or shaping plastic, ceramic, or nonmetallic material
    (excluding glass, Class 65), subclasses 6+ for liquid comminuting means
    forming particulate material (e.g., granules, fibers, etc.) directly from
    molten material including means providing a solidifying zone, subclass 66
    for filament forming means combined with product advancing means,
    subclasses 67+ for apparatus comprising a filament shaping orifice
    discharging into a liquid bath or shower, subclasses 80.1+ for molding
    apparatus including air-felting means for forming self-sustaining bodies
    from particulate material, and for processes directed to the formation of
    filaments from siliceous materials in solution (e.g., silicates by
    precipitation from said solution or evaporation of solvent therefrom, etc.).


CLS 65/377
TXT With measuring, controlling, sensing, programming, timing, indicating, or
    testing:

    Processes under subclass 376 including measuring, controlling, programming,
    sensing, timing, indicating, or testing fibers, filaments, or preforms
    during any stage of their manufacture or treatment.

    (1)     Note.  Patents directed to measuring, controlling, sensing,
    inspecting, indicating, or testing the contour, shape, coating, internal
    molecular arrangement, or specific composition of fibers, filaments, or
    preforms are included in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Process controls responsive to sensed conditions including
    program, cyclic, time, or automatic controls are proper for this and
    indented subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  Equivalent terms include examining, diagnosing, analyzing,
    eval- uating, and monitoring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29.12,  for processes of measuring, controlling, sensing, indicating, or
    testing glass during any stage of manufacture or treatment excluding
    fibers, filaments, or preforms thereof.

    158,    for apparatus for measuring, sensing, indicating, or testing glass
    manufacture or treatment excluding fibers, filaments, and preforms thereof.

    484,    for apparatus for measuring, controlling, sensing, programming,
    timing, indicating, or testing glass fibers, filaments, or preforms during
    any stage of manufacture or treatment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 293 for liquid level/depth gauge
    with illumination, subclasses 488+ for speed/acceleration testing that may
    use optical waveguides, subclass 653 for optical indication of vibration,
    subclass 705 for an optical fluid pressure gauge, subclass 800 for optical
    stress or strain testing, and subclass 861.08 for optical measurement of
    volume or rate of flow.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 202 for visual light signal
    indicators.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 73.1 for optical fiber or
    waveguide inspection, subclass 241 for inspection borescopes in general,
    subclass 350 for ring laser gyros including optical waveguides, and
    subclass 352 for Fabry-Perot cavities.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, appropriate
    subclasses, especially subclasses 73+ for testing for the presence of
    metals or metal compounds, 83 for testing for the presence of synthetic or
    natural resin, 106+ for testing for the presence of nitrogen, and 124+ for
    testing for the presence of halogen involving a chemical reaction.


CLS 65/378
TXT Optical property:

    Processes under subclass 377 combined with measuring, controlling,
    programming, sensing, timing, indicating, or testing the properties of
    light or visual characteristics associated with the fibers, filaments, or
    preforms during manufacture or treatment thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Class 65 patents directed to measuring, controlling,
    sensing, indicating, inspecting, or testing divergence, convergence,
    transmittance, or internal reflection of light rays passing through optical
    fibers, filaments, or preforms are proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    485,    for apparatus having means for measuring, controlling, sensing,
    indicating, or testing visual characteristics or light properties
    associated with the fibers, filaments, or preforms during manufacture or
    treatment thereof.


CLS 65/379
TXT Fluid pressure:

    Processes under subclass 377 including measuring, controlling, sensing,
    programming, timing, indicating, or testing a force per unit area of fluid
    associated with the fibers, filaments, or preforms during manufacture or
    treatment thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Patents directed to measuring, controlling, sensing,
    programming, timing, indicating, or testing vacuum, atmospheric pressure,
    or flow rates are proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    489,    for apparatus having means for measuring, controlling, sensing,
    programming, timing, indicating, or testing a force per unit area of a
    fluid associated with the manufacture or treatment of fibers, filaments, or
    preforms.


CLS 65/380
TXT Molten material level:

    Processes under subclass 377 directed to measuring, controlling, sensing,
    programming, timing, indicating, or testing any height variance of the
    surface of a molten pool of glass used during manufacture or treatment of
    the fibers, filaments, or preforms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    490,    for apparatus having means for measuring, controlling, sensing,
    programming, timing, indicating, or testing any variance of the height of a
    pool of molten glass.


CLS 65/381
TXT Winder or puller movement:

    Processes under subclass 377 directed to measuring, controlling, sensing,
    programming, timing, indicating, or testing (a) fiber tautness, (b)
    rotational speed, or (c) position of a winder or puller during any stage of
    manufacture or treatment of the fibers, filaments, or preforms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    486,    for apparatus having means to measure, control, sense, program,
    time, indicate, or test (a) fiber tautness, (b) rotational speed, or (c)
    position of a winder or puller during any stage of manufacture or treatment
    of the fibers, filaments, or preforms.


CLS 65/382
TXT Diameter or coating thickness:

    Processes under subclass 377 directed to measuring, controlling, sensing,
    programming, indicating, or testing a (a) thickness of an applied coating
    or (b) diameter of the formed fiber, filament, or preform.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    491,    for apparatus having means to measure, control, sense, program,
    time, indicate, or test a (a) thickness of an applied coating or (b)
    diameter of the formed fiber, filament, or preform.


CLS 65/384
TXT Temperature:

    Processes under subclass 377 directed to measuring, controlling, sensing,
    programming, indicating, or testing a change in sensible heat during any
    stage of manufacturing or treating the fibers, filaments, or preforms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    488,    for apparatus having means to measure, control, sense, program,
    time, indicate, or test a change in sensible heat during any stage or
    manufacturing or treating the fibers, filaments, or preforms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, for processes of determining either
    (a) a characteristic or a condition of glass fibers, filaments, preforms or
    (b) a system utilizing heating or cooling as a significant part of the
    test, wherein no glass working or treating is involved.


CLS 65/385
TXT Process of manufacturing optical fibers, waveguides, or preforms thereof:

    Processes under subclass 376 directed to producing (a) fibers having light
    transmitting regions, (b) waveguides which transmit radiation (light) in
    the visible and near-visible portions of the spectrum, or (c) stock
    materials intended to be used in optical fiber or waveguide making.

    (1)     Note.  Optical fibers are considered to be light transmitting
    waveguides, formed in a generally cylindrical form, often of extremely
    small diameter and of great length, which confine transmitted radiation
    therewithin by means of the principle of total reflection. Optical fibers
    are usually comprised of a central light transmitting core of relatively
    high refractive index, surrounded by a concentric cladding of relatively
    low refractive index.

    (2)     Note.  An optical waveguide is considered to be a thin dielectric
    guide film of high refractive index formed adjacent to a substrate or
    support region of lower refractive index. The thin-film relies upon modal
    transmission to transmit light along its length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    436     and below, for processes of manufacturing glass fibers, filaments,
    or preforms which are not optical.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements,
    appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 227+ for elements controlling
    light movement through or in a path, 237+ for optical elements which vary
    the characteristics of a traversing optical light beam in proportion to an
    applied time varying signal.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, appropriate subclasses for optical fibers and
    optical waveguides, especially subclasses 15+ for optical waveguides in
    combination with interface elements which enable efficient transfer of
    light.


CLS 65/386
TXT Planar waveguides:

    Processes under subclass 385 wherein the material which transmits light has
    a surface that is flat.

    (1)     Note.  Processes of forming multiple layered optical planar
    waveguides are properly classified here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    385,    Optical Waveguides, subclass 129 for planar optical waveguides, per
    se.


CLS 65/387
TXT Forming lens integral with optical fiber:

    Processes under subclass 385 directed to producing an optical product
    having an optical component which focuses transmitting light waves joined
    directly to an optical fiber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    60+ for processes of adhesively securing parts utilizing nonmetallic
    cementing media.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    642+ for a lens element, per se.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, subclass 15 for optical waveguides combined
    with an interface element which enables efficient transfer of light between
    the waveguide and a point external to the interface element.


CLS 65/388
TXT Nonoxygen halide glass (e.g., metal halide, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 385 wherein a major component of the optical
    fiber, waveguide, or preform glass composition is a halide, fluorine,
    chlorine, bromine, iodine, or astatine devoid of oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  Halide glass for optical fibers, waveguides, or preforms
    which contain minuscule or trace amounts of oxygen, wherein the expressed
    intent is to exclude oxygen, is found in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The most commonly occurring nonoxygen halides are metal
    halides.


CLS 65/389
TXT Nonoxygen chalcogenide glass containing:

    Processes under subclass 385 wherein a major component of the optical
    fiber, waveguide, or preform glass composition is a chalcogen containing
    compound (i.e., compounds of sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) devoid of
    oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  Placement of nonoxygen chalcogenide documents containing a
    mere presence of oxygen wherein that oxygen inclusion is considered
    accidental or unintentional are found in this subclass.


CLS 65/390
TXT Scandium (Sc), yttrium (Y), or rare earth doped core or preform (i.e.,
    atomic numbers 21, 39, 57-72):

    Processes under subclass 385 directed to treating the optical fiber,
    waveguide, or preform with property altering constituents consisting of
    scandium, yttrium, or rare earth material.

    (1)     Note.  The rare earths are:

    Lanthanum (La)

    Cerium (Ce)

    Praseodymium (Pr)

    Neodymium (Nd)

    Promethium (Pm)

    Samarium (Sm)

    Europium (Eu)

    Gadolinium (Gd)

    Terbium (Tb)

    Dysprosium (Dy)

    Holmium (Ho)

    Erbium (Er)

    Thulium (Tm)

    Ytterbium (Yb)

    Lutetium (Lu)

    (2)     Note.  Scandium, yttrium, or rare earth material doping changes the
    refractive properties of the optical fiber, waveguide, or fiber preform.


CLS 65/391
TXT Plasma utilized:

    Processes under subclass 385 wherein a plasma is used during any stage of
    manufacturing or treating the optical fiber, waveguide, or preform.

    (1)     Note.  A plasma is generally considered to be (a) a gaseous flame
    or (b) a highly ionized gas composed of ions, electrons, and neutral
    particles in which the positive ions and negative electrons are roughly
    equal in number.

    (2)     Note.  Processes wherein a plasma torch or a plasma electric arc is
    used to form or treat an optical fiber, waveguide, or preform are properly
    classified in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 121.36+ for methods and apparatus for
    fusing (splicing) optical fibers, per se.


CLS 65/392
TXT Laser utilized:

    Processes under subclass 385 wherein a laser is used during any stage of
    manufacturing or treating the optical fiber, waveguide, or preform.

    (1)     Note.  A laser is generally considered to be a narrow beam of
    coherent light (light amplification by stimulated emissions of radiation).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    441,    for  processes of using a laser to form or treat glass fibers or
    filaments, which are not optical.


CLS 65/393
TXT Hollow optical fibers or waveguides:

    Processes under subclass 385 wherein the optical fiber or waveguide
    produced has an empty space or cavity.

    (1)     Note.  Only processes for making hollow optical fibers and
    waveguides which are the final product and not preforms are classified here.


CLS 65/394
TXT Ion implantation:

    Processes under subclass 385 wherein ion implantation is utilized during
    any stage of manufacturing or treating the optical fiber, waveguide, or
    fiber preform.

    (1)     Note.  Ion implantation generally involves a process wherein an
    accelerated stream of energetic (charged) ions is introduced into or
    penetrates the near-surface region of a core or clad of the optical fiber,
    waveguide, or preform.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 492.1+ for irradiation treatment, per
    se, of an optical fiber, waveguide, or preform without any glassworking
    step (e.g., melting, shaping, etc.).


CLS 65/395
TXT Sol-gel or liquid phase route utilized:

    Processes under subclass 385 wherein a sol-gel route or liquid phase route
    procedure is used during any stage of manufacturing or treating the optical
    fiber, waveguide, or preform.

    (1)     Note. These processes generally include compositions which have
    been prepared by a method other than melting, including at least one step
    in which the glass forming ingredients are in a gel or sol state or
    involves the use of liquids such as water at relatively low temperatures.


CLS 65/396
TXT Sonic or ultrasonic energy utilized (e.g., homogenizing, dispersing, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 395 wherein the vibratory energy used during any
    stage of the sol-gel or liquid phase route procedure is sonic or ultrasonic.

    (1)     Note. Ultrasonic waves vibrate at frequencies beyond the hearing
    power of human beings (above 20,000 Hz). Sonic frequencies are vibrations
    which can be heard by the human ear (from about 15 Hz to approximately
    20,000 Hz).


CLS 65/397
TXT Fluorine doping:

    Processes under subclass 385 wherein the property altering material used to
    treat the optical fiber, waveguide, or preform consists of fluorine.

    (1)     Note.  Doping in this art is most commonly used to alter the
    refractive index of an optical fiber, waveguide, or preform.


CLS 65/398
TXT Germanium or boron containing:

    Processes under subclass 397 wherein the fluorine doped optical fiber,
    waveguide, or preform additionally contains germanium or boron.

    (1)     Note.  The germanium or boron material in the core or clad of the
    optical fiber, waveguide, or preform may be in the form of a compound or
    composition.


CLS 65/399
TXT Incorporating dopant into porous body:

    Processes under subclass 385 directed to a step of diffusing a small
    quantity of material into a porous material used during any stage of
    manufacturing the optical fiber, waveguide, or preform.

    (1)     Note.  A dopant material in this art is generally used to alter the
    refractive index of an optical fiber, waveguide, or preform.


CLS 65/400
TXT Ion exchange utilized:

    Processes under subclass 385 which include a step of exchanging selected
    ions of the optical fiber, waveguide, or preform at any stage during
    manufacture or treatment.

    (1)     Note.  In this art processes using ion exchange are generally for
    the purpose of altering the refractive index of an optical fiber,
    waveguide, or preform.


CLS 65/401
TXT Extruding:

    Processes under subclass 385 of forming an optical fiber, waveguide, or
    preform including a step wherein a positive force or pressure is used to
    push glass through a die.


CLS 65/402
TXT Producing bent, crimped, twisted, textured, or curled optical fibers or
    waveguides:

    Processes under subclass 385 wherein the longitudinal axis of the optical
    fiber or waveguide follows a curvilinear or multidirectional path (e.g.,
    nonlinear, perturbated, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    385,    Optical Waveguides, subclass 146 for noncylindrical or nonplanar
    shaped waveguides, per se.


CLS 65/403
TXT Producing noncircular optical fibers or waveguides (e.g., particular cross
    section, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 385 wherein a cross section of the optical fiber
    or waveguide produced is not circular (e.g., elliptical, star, hexagonal,
    etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    386,    for processes of forming planar optical waveguides.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    385,    Optical Waveguides, subclass 146 for noncylindrical or nonplanar
    shaped waveguides, per se.


CLS 65/404
TXT With step of casting or forming nonfiber workpiece (e.g., molding liquid
    preform, shaping molten glass against a forming surface, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 385 including a step of molding or casting at
    least some portion of the optical fiber, waveguide, preform, or associated
    nonfiber workpiece.

     (1)    Note.  Casting is generally considered a process of flowing molten
    glass in the form of a stream into or onto molds, rolls, or tables.


CLS 65/405
TXT Utilizing multiple crucibles or multiple feed streams of molten glass:

    Processes under subclass 385 wherein molten glass is drawn into a fiber and
    a coating layer applied thereto from at least two containers or feed
    streams to form a contiguous optical fiber, waveguide, or preform.

    (1)     Note.  Both containers may contain molten glass, in which case the
    resultant product is a glass coated glass optical fiber.

    (2)     Note.  Containers may contain glasses of different refractive
    properties allowing the formation of gradient optical fibers.

    (3)     Note.  Processes involving simultaneous drawing and coating forming
    a single fiber are proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    444,    for processes of making nonoptical glass coated glass fibers not
    involving simultaneous fiber forming and coating, and subclass 121 for
    other processes of blending separate streams of molten glass.


CLS 65/406
TXT Joining or bonding optical fibers, waveguides, or preforms (e.g., coupling,
    etc.):

    Processes under subclass 385 which involve assembling at least two
    individually distinct optical fibers, waveguides, or preforms directly to
    each other.

    (1)     Note.  Processes of joining optical fibers, waveguides, or preforms
    in a ``T" or ``Y" coupled arrangement are properly classified in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    62.4+ for processes for adhesively laminating plural preforms which include
    the step of liberating or forming fibers with bulk deposition thereof to
    form at least one of the preforms.


CLS 65/407
TXT End to end (i.e., butt end joining):

    Processes under subclass 406 wherein a terminal end of the optical fiber,
    waveguide, or preform is connected or fused to a terminal end of another
    optical fiber, waveguide, or preform.


CLS 65/408
TXT Side to side:

    Processes under subclass 406 wherein the optical fiber, waveguide or
    preform is connected or fused adjacent to another optical fiber, waveguide,
    or preform.


CLS 65/409
TXT Having plural adjacent fibers or rods sheathed (i.e., bundle) in tube or
    enclosure:

    Processes under subclass 408 wherein at least two optical fibers,
    waveguides, or preforms, parallel to one another, are inserted into or
    encompassed by an outer elongated hollow sheathing structure (e.g., clad).


CLS 65/410
TXT By fusing preformed fibers without attenuating stock material:

    Processes under subclass 408 wherein at least two of the previously formed
    optical fibers or waveguides are fused adjacent to one another without
    prior stretching of the stock material.


CLS 65/411
TXT With stretching or drawing:

    Processes under subclass 408 involving an operation of pulling,
    lengthening, or attenuating the joined optical fibers, waveguides, or
    preforms.


CLS 65/412
TXT Rod placed inside of tube:

    Processes under subclass 406 including a step of placing a single solid
    elongated optical core material inside of a hollow elongated sheathing
    structure.


CLS 65/413
TXT With step of vapor deposition:

    Processes under subclass 385 wherein the optical fiber, waveguide, or
    preform is manufactured or treated depositing a material utilizing a gas,
    mist, or smoke.

    (1)     Note.  Processes commonly called ``chemical vapor deposition,"
    ``physical vapor deposition," and ``soot processes" are properly classified
    here and below.

    (2)     Note.  Soot as used in this art generally refers to particulate
    material buildup resulting from a gas phase reaction.


CLS 65/414
TXT Forming optical fiber or fiber preform by soot buildup (i.e., vapor axial
    deposition, VAD):

    Processes under subclass 413 including a step whereby the vaporized
    material is deposited at a starting point or on a starting material and is
    tiered or grown in a straight line about which a line or curve is conceived
    to revolve.

    (1)     Note.  Lacking an indication to the contrary, growth of the fiber
    or preform by buildup of deposited soot in a vertical direction in respect
    to an initiating collecting substrate is proper for this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Processes commonly called ``vertical axial deposition" and
    ``horizontal axial deposition" are properly classified here.


CLS 65/415
TXT Forming glass layers with graded or radially varying refractive index:

    Processes under subclass 414 wherein the
    refractive index of (a) each layer of glass formed varies or (b) the
    preform varies radially outward.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    385,    Optical Waveguides, subclass 124 for graded index core or cladding,
    per se.


CLS 65/416
TXT Consolidation in situ (e.g., sintering, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 414 including a step of densifying the porous
    preform into a solid rod in place.


CLS 65/417
TXT Inside of tube or hollow form by soot buildup:

    Processes under subclass 413 wherein the vaporized soot material is
    deposited onto an inner surface of an elongated hollow structure or cavity.

    (1)     Note.  Processes commonly called ``mod-ified chemical vapor
    deposition" or ``inside chemical vapor deposition" are properly classified
    here.


CLS 65/418
TXT Elongated material feed means within tube (e.g., reactant feed means placed
    inside of tube, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 417 wherein an elongated vapor material delivery
    means is inserted into the tube to coat the inner surface of said tube.


CLS 65/419
TXT With step of collapsing tube:

    Processes under subclass 417 including a step of reducing or shrinking the
    tube.


CLS 65/420
TXT Maintaining isotropic conditions inside of tube:

    Processes under subclass 417 wherein an environment is sustained that
    causes the vaporized material to be deposited evenly on the inner surface
    of the tube.


CLS 65/421
TXT Outside of tube or rod by soot buildup:

    Processes under subclass 413 wherein the vaporized soot material is
    deposited generally perpendicular to the outermost surface of a rod or tube.

    (1)     Note.  Processes commonly called ``outside chemical vapor
    deposition" are properly classified here and below.


CLS 65/422
TXT With dehydration (e.g., OH removal, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 421 wherein moisture or hydroxyl radicles are
    eliminated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, for drying processes,
    per se. Combinations of glassworking and drying operations are proper for
    Class 65.


CLS 65/423
TXT Inorganic carbon, metal oxide, or inorganic nitrogen containing material
    deposited (e.g., elemental carbon, carbides, nitrides, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 413 wherein the vaporized material deposited
    contains inorganic carbon, metal oxides, or inorganic nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  Attention is directed to the definition of Class 260,
    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for the distinction between the terms
    ``organic" and ``inorganic."

    (2)     Note.  Metal compounds excluding steel, containing more than 1.7
    percent of inorganic carbon are properly classified in this subclass.


CLS 65/424
TXT Inert, nonoxidizing, or reducing environment:

    Processes under subclass 385 wherein the reactive conditions or atmosphere
    (a) is inactive, (b) does not support oxidation, or (c) does support
    reduction.


CLS 65/425
TXT Electromagnetic, magnetic, wave, or particulate energy utilized:

    Processes under subclass 385 wherein electrical, magnetic, particulate, or
    electromagnetic wave energy is used during any stage of manufacturing or
    treating the optical fiber, waveguide, or preform.

    (1)     Note.  The wave energy applied may be light, sonic, supersonic,
    ultrasonic, gamma rays, infrared rays, X-rays, etc. Particulate energy
    includes charged particles and atomic emissions, such as alpha rays, beta
    rays, and neutrons.

    (2)     Note.  Patent documents claiming the use of electrostatic charge,
    field, or force to form an optical fiber, waveguide, or preform are
    properly classified herein.

    (3)     Note.  Patent documents claiming the use of electric arc heating to
    form a glass fiber are properly classified herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    441,    for processes wherein the electrical, magnetic, wave, or
    particulate energy is used to form nonoptical glass fibers, filaments, or
    preforms.

    509,    for apparatus utilizing electric or electromagnetic wave energy as
    heat to manufacture or treat fibers, waveguides, or preforms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses
    492.1+ for irradiation treatment, per se, of an optical fiber, waveguide,
    or preform without any glassworking step (e.g., melting, shaping, etc.).


CLS 65/426
TXT Drying, dehydration, OH removal or prevention:

    Processes under subclass 385 wherein moisture or hydroxyl radicles are
    eliminated or prevented from forming on the optical fiber, waveguide, or
    preform.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 266+, 418+,
    and 420+ for processes utilizing radiant energy to dry, per se.
    Combinations of glass working and drying operations are proper for Class 65.


CLS 65/427
TXT Consolidating preform (e.g., sintering, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 385 wherein a porous preform is densified.

    (1)     Note.  Processes wherein porous or tubular preforms are
    consolidated into solid rods which are used to make optical fibers or
    waveguides are found in this and indented subclasses.


CLS 65/428
TXT Collapsing tube:

    Processes under subclass 427 including a step causing an innermost surface
    of a tube to cave in upon itself.


CLS 65/429
TXT With etching or leaching:

    Processes under subclass 385 wherein a chemical reagent is used to remove
    only a portion or constituent of the optical fiber, waveguide, preform, or
    coating thereon.

    (1)     Note.  The chemical material or reagent usually referred to in this
    art is an etching material or etchant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for processes in which a chemical reagent is used to remove a
    portion or constituent of glass other than fibers, filaments, waveguides,
    or preforms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    216,    Etching a Substrate: Processes, for methods of etching glass, per
    se.  See the SEARCH CLASS notes thereunder.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 299+ for processes of coating
    combined with a pretreatment of a base.


CLS 65/430
TXT With significant coating step:

    Processes under subclass 385 including a recitation of a specific step used
    to apply a coating to the optical fiber, waveguide, or preform.

    (1)     Note.  A specific recitation of how a coating is applied (e.g.,
    brushing, dipping, spraying, immersion, etc.) is considered significant,
    and is properly classified here.

    (2)     Note.  In this and indented subclasses coatings or clads are
    generally applied to protect a newly formed optical fiber or waveguide.


CLS 65/431
TXT Free metal or metal alloy containing coating:

    Processes under subclass 430 wherein the applied cladding or coating
    material is or contains an elemental metal or metal alloy.


CLS 65/432
TXT Synthetic or natural resin containing coating:

    Processes under subclass 430 wherein the applied coating material is a
    natural or synthetic resin.

    (1)     Note.  Attention is directed to the definitions of Class 106,
    Compositions: Coating or Plastic, and Classes 524 and 525, Synthetic Resins
    or Natural Rubbers, for the distinction between natural and synthetic
    resins.


CLS 65/433
TXT With cutting or severing:

    Processes under subclass 385 wherein the optical fiber, waveguide, or
    preform forming operation is combined with a process step of breaking,
    cutting, or severing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     70, 87, and 174+, for glass cutting operations excluding fibers,
    waveguides, and preforms thereof.


CLS 65/434
TXT With quench cooling (e.g., forced air or cryogenic immersion, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 385 combined with a step of rapidly lowering the
    temperature of the optical fiber, waveguide, or preform.


CLS 65/435
TXT With fiber stretching, drawing, or pulling (e.g., from rod, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 385 including a step of elongating the optical
    fiber, waveguide, or preform by imposing a strain or tension thereto.


CLS 65/436
TXT Plasma utilized:

    Processes under subclass 376 wherein plasma is used during any stage of
    manufacturing or treating the glass fiber, filament, or fiber preform.

    (1)     Note.  Utilizing a plasma torch or plasma electric arc to form a
    glass fiber is properly classified in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  A plasma is considered to be (a) a gaseous flame or (b) a
    highly ionized gas composed of ions, electrons, and neutral particles in
    which the positive ions and negative electrons are roughly equal in number.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 121.36+ for methods and apparatus for
    fusing (splicing) glass fibers, per se.


CLS 65/437
TXT Producing noncircular fibers (e.g., particular cross section, flat,
    elliptical, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 376 wherein the cross section of the glass fiber
    or filament produced is not circular.


CLS 65/438
TXT Producing crimped, twisted, or curled fibers (e.g., textured, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 376 wherein the longitudinal axis of the glass
    fiber or filament follows a curvilinear or multidirectional path (e.g.,
    nonlinear, perturbated, etc.).


CLS 65/439
TXT Producing hollow fibers or tubular preforms:

    Processes under subclass 376 wherein the glass fiber or tubular preform
    produced has a hollow core or an empty cavity.


CLS 65/440
TXT Sol-gel route or ion exchange utilized:

    Processes under subclass 376 wherein (a) a sol-gel route or (b) an
    exchanging of selected ions is used during any stage of manufacturing or
    treating the glass fiber, filament or preform.

    (1)     Note.  The sol-gel route process generally includes compositions
    which have been prepared by a method other than melting having at least one
    step in which the glass forming ingredients are in a gel or sol state.


CLS 65/441
TXT Electromagnetic, magnetic, wave, or particulate energy utilized:

    Processes under subclass 376 involving the use of electrical, magnetic,
    particulate, or electromagnetic wave energy during any stage of forming or
    treating the glass fiber, filament, or preform.

    (1)     Note.  The wave energy applied may be light, sonic, supersonic,
    ultrasonic, gamma rays, infrared rays, X-rays etc. Particulate energy
    includes charged particles and atomic emissions, such as alpha rays, beta
    rays, and neutrons.

    (2)     Note.  Patent documents claiming the use of electrostatic charge,
    field, or force to form or treat a glass fiber, filament, or preform are
    properly classified herein.

    (3)     Note.  Patent documents claiming the use of electric arc heating to
    form a glass fiber are properly classified herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    425,    for processes wherein the electrical, magnetic, wave, or
    particulate energy is used to form an optical fiber, waveguide, or preform.

    509,    for fiber making apparatus utilizing electric or electromagnetic
    wave energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses
    492.1+ for irradiation treatment, per se, of a glass fiber, filament or
    preform without any glassworking step (e.g., melting, shaping, etc.).


CLS 65/442
TXT Composite fiber matrix (e.g., carbon or metal fiber with glass matrix or
    vice versa, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 376 including a step of surrounding or encasing
    the fiber or filament by a different material (e.g., binder, etc.).


CLS 65/443
TXT With coating (e.g., lubricant, sizing, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 376 including a step of applying a coating
    material to the fibers, filaments, or preforms which clings thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43      and 60.1+, for processes of coating nonfilamentary glass combined
    with glassworking or treating, and see the SEARCH CLASS notes thereunder.


CLS 65/444
TXT Glass (i.e., nonoptical fiber, metal oxide):

    Processes under subclass 443 wherein the coating material for the glass
    fibers, filaments, or fiber preforms is itself a glass composition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    405,    for multiple crucible methods of making glass coated optical fibers.


CLS 65/445
TXT Free metal or alloy containing:

    Processes under subclass 443 wherein the coating material contains
    elemental metal or metal alloy.


CLS 65/446
TXT Vapor deposition of free metal or free metal containing material:

    Processes under subclass 445 wherein the free metal or metal alloy
    containing material is deposited from a gas, mist, or smoke.


CLS 65/447
TXT Synthetic resin, natural resin, or asphalt coating:

    Processes under subclass 443 wherein the coating material comprises a
    natural or synthetic resin, rubber, asphalt, or a bitumen.


CLS 65/448
TXT Organic silicon containing (e.g., coupling agent, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 447 wherein the coating material includes an
    organic silicon material.

    (1)     Note.  The coating may comprise a silane, siloxane, silicone
    polymeric material, or another polymer with a silicon containing linking or
    coupling agent.


CLS 65/449
TXT Asphalt:

    Processes under subclass 447 wherein the coating material includes bitumen
    or asphalt.


CLS 65/450
TXT Thermosetting or thermoplastic resin:

    Processes under subclass 447 wherein the coating material includes a
    thermosetting or thermoplastic resin.


CLS 65/451
TXT Nitrogen or phenol containing:

    Processes under subclass 450 wherein the thermosetting or thermoplastic
    coating material contains nitrogen or phenol.


CLS 65/452
TXT With severing:

    Processes under subclass 443 including a step of dividing the coated
    fibers, filaments, or preforms by a severing operation (e.g., cutting,
    breaking, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     70, 87, and 174+, for glass cutting operations.


CLS 65/453
TXT With advancing, gathering, or winding continuous fiber or filament:

    Processes under subclass 443 including a step of moving forward,
    collecting, or convolving the coated continuous fibers or filaments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    535,    for continuous fiber or filament advancing apparatus.

    539,    for continuous fiber or filament winding apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, appropriate subclasses for means
    for winding elongated material.


CLS 65/454
TXT Formation of fiber or preform utilizing fluid blast (e.g., from molten
    glass, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 376 wherein a forcible stream of an extraneous
    fluid is directed against (a) a molten glass stream, or (b) a rod or
    filament in a plastic state to subdivide the stream rod or filament into
    discrete fibers or fiber preforms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    524,    for fluid blast apparatus utilized in fiber formation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 5+ for processes directed to fluid blast comminuting of plastic
    materials not provided for elsewhere.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 7 for apparatus for making particulate material directly from
    molten material including a fluid jet or blast type comminuting means.


CLS 65/455
TXT During slinging or rotary-centrifugal fiber distribution:

    Processes under subclass 454 including a step of (a) throwing or flinging
    the newly formed discrete fibers or (b) forming the discrete fibers by
    projecting them from a rotating source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    518,    for analogous apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 214+ for
    delivering fluid material from a supply source by slinger or centrifugal
    distributing means.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    subclass 9 for apparatus for spinning a candy floss from a melt.


CLS 65/456
TXT Depositing molten glass on periphery of rotating fiberizing means (e.g.,
    disc, rotor, wheel, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 455 including a step of depositing molten glass on
    an outermost edge of a rotating disc or wheel.


CLS 65/457
TXT Specified composition of slinger or rotary-centrifugal fiber distributor:

    Processes under subclass 455 wherein the material comprising the  slinger
    or rotary-centrifugal fiber distributor is identified.


CLS 65/458
TXT Fluid blast guide, baffle, or deflector:

    Processes under subclass 455 combined with means to turn, divert, or
    redirect the fluid blast path.


CLS 65/459
TXT Centrifuge with fiberizing holes:

    Processes under subclass 455 wherein the rotary-centrifugal fiber
    distributor is a centrifuge having fiber forming holes.


CLS 65/460
TXT Adjacent combustion chamber, burner, or blower utilized:

    Processes under subclass 459 including use of a combustion chamber, blower,
    or burner adjacent to the centrifuge.


CLS 65/461
TXT Having at least two concentric burners or blowers:

    Processes under subclass 460 wherein more than one burner or blower sharing
    a common center is used.


CLS 65/462
TXT Solid fibers comminuted by fluid blast:

    Processes under subclass 454 which include a step of subjecting a rod or
    filament while in a plastic condition to the fluid blast to subdivide said
    filament or rod into discrete solid fibers.


CLS 65/463
TXT Specified nozzle opening or configuration (e.g., opening size, cross
    section, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 454 which include a recitation identifying a size
    or geometrical cross section of a nozzle opening.


CLS 65/464
TXT Fluid discharge skirt or shield utilized:

    Processes under subclass 454 wherein a baffle or screen is used to confine,
    aim, or redirect the fluid blast.


CLS 65/465
TXT Attenuation by fluid blast contacting glass:

    Processes under subclass 454 wherein the fluid blast is used to draw or
    extend the fiber.


CLS 65/466
TXT Plural fluid blasts or jets contacting single glass stream:

    Processes under subclass 465 wherein more than one fluid blast or fluid jet
    is directed toward a single glass stream.


CLS 65/467
TXT Fluid blast penetrated transversely by jet (e.g., toration, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 466 wherein the fluid blast, usually of high
    temperature, is pierced transversely by a fluid jet, usually of high
    velocity.


CLS 65/468
TXT Flame or combustible fluid blast utilized:

    Processes under subclass 454 wherein the fluid blast used is a flame or the
    result of combusted flammable material.


CLS 65/469
TXT By slinging or rotary-centrifugal fiber distribution (i.e., without fluid
    blast):

    Processes under subclass 376 wherein the fibers are formed by (a) throwing
    or flinging molten glass or (b) subjecting a melt to a rotary projecting
    movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS;

    455,    for a process for forming fibers or filaments including
    rotary-centrifugal distribution combined with a fluid blast.

    516+,   for apparatus having slinger means for forming fibers or filaments
    from molten glass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 214+ for
    slinger, splasher, or rotary-centrifugal fluid distributors.


CLS 65/470
TXT Centrifuge with fiberizing holes:

    Processes under subclass 469 wherein the rotary-centrifugal fiber
    distributor or slinger is a centrifuge with fiber forming holes.


CLS 65/471
TXT With bushing flood prevention, removal, or breakout prevention:

    Processes under subclass 376 including a step of (a) removing or avoiding
    flooding at a bushing opening or (b) avoiding fiber breakout.


CLS 65/472
TXT With chemical etching or leaching:

    Processes under subclass 376 wherein a chemical reagent is used to remove a
    portion or constituent of the fiber, filament, or fiber preform.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for processes in which a chemical reagent is used to remove a
    portion or constituent of glass exclusive of fibers, filaments, or fiber
    preforms.

    429,    for processes in which a chemical reagent is used to remove a
    portion or constituent of an optical fiber, waveguide, or preform.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    216,    Etching a Substrate: Processes, for methods of etching glass, per
    se.  See the SEARCH CLASS notes thereunder.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 299+ for processes of coating
    combined with a pretreatment of a base.


CLS 65/473
TXT With removal of coating (e.g., desizing, oxidizing coating, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 376 wherein at least a portion of a size, coating,
    or clad is removed from the fiber or filament.

    (1)     Note.  Processes involving a step of oxidation to remove a coating
    are proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 14 and 22.1+ for cleaning and liquid contact with
    coiled or hollow fibers and filaments.


CLS 65/474
TXT With purifying or homogenizing molten glass (e.g., removing bubbles, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 376 including a step of treating molten stock
    material by (a) removing foreign or objectionable material or (b) making a
    melt uniform in physical characteristics or in composition throughout.

    (1)     Note.  Processes of removing undissolved  batch materials or
    gaseous impurities are properly classified here.


CLS 65/475
TXT With fiber drawing or pulling (e.g., attenuating, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 376 including an operation of placing a tension on
    the forming fiber, filament, or preform.

    (1)     Note.  The processes of drawing or pulling of glass into fibers or
    filaments are similar to a ``taffy pull" operation.


CLS 65/476
TXT By modifying fluid pressure (e.g., vacuum, reduced or superatmospheric
    pressure, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 475 including a step of changing or varying an
    existing pressure to perfect the drawing operation.


CLS 65/477
TXT Drawing fiber from rod:

    Processes under subclass 475 wherein the forming fiber or filament is from
    rod stock.


CLS 65/478
TXT Fluid assisted attenuation or directing of fiber or filament:

    Processes under subclass 475 wherein a fluid is used (a) to assist the
    stretching or drawing operation or (b) to steer or guide a drawn or
    stretched fiber or filament.


CLS 65/479
TXT Reeling or winding:

    Processes under subclass 475 including a step of reeling or winding
    combined with the drawing or pulling operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, appropriate subclasses for means
    for winding or reeling elongated material.


CLS 65/480
TXT Cutting or severing:

    Processes under subclass 475 including a step of dividing the drawn fiber
    or filament by a severing or cutting operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     70, 87, and 174+, for glass cutting operations exclusive of fibers,
    filaments, or preforms thereof.

    433,    for cutting or severing of optical fibers, waveguides, or preforms
    thereof.


CLS 65/481
TXT Cooling of molten glass at forming area (e.g., cooling fins, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 475 which include a step of reducing the
    temperature of molten glass in an area where the fiber is formed.


CLS 65/482
TXT With charging or pretreatment of batch material (e.g., gas heating,
    crushing, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 376 including the step of (a) feeding raw material
    or stock to a melting area or (b) treating said raw material or stock prior
    to melting.


CLS 65/483
TXT FIBER MAKING APPARATUS:

    Apparatus under the class definition directed to producing (a) rodlike
    stock of sufficiently small diameter, either (i) as continuous filaments of
    indefinite length, or (ii) short discrete pieces, or (b) stock material
    intended to be used in fiber and filament making.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses, for comminution of solid materials of general application.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 5+ for processes, within the class definition, of liquid
    comminuting and solidifying of general application and subclasses 165+ for
    processes of forming indefinite-length fibers or filaments from materials
    which may be disclosed to be siliceous materials in solution or suspension
    by precipitation in a reactive or solvent extractive bath or by evaporation
    of the solvent.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 6+ for liquid comminuting means forming particulate material
    (e.g., granules, fibers, etc.) directly from molten material including
    means providing a solidifying zone, subclass 66 for filament forming means
    combined with product advancing means, subclasses 67+ for apparatus
    comprising a liquid bath or shower, and subclasses 80+ for molding
    apparatus including air-felting means for forming self-sustaining bodies
    from particulate material.


CLS 65/484
TXT With measuring, controlling, sensing, timing, inspecting, indicating, or
    testing means:

    Apparatus under subclass 483 having means (a) for sensing a condition and
    in response thereto actuate a signalling, regulating, or indicating device,
    (b) for regulating an operation in response to a set of coded instructions
    or the sequence of operational steps preformed, (c) for determining the
    time an operation occurs or the length of time taken to perform such
    operation, (d) for performing a test upon, permitting observation of, or
    performing a measuring operation upon the fiber, filament, or preform
    thereof.

    (1)     Note. Equivalent terms include examining, diagnosing, analyzing,
    observing, viewing, evaluating, and monitoring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29.12,  for processes of testing, inspecting, sensing, or indicating the
    treatment or formation of glass excluding fibers, filaments, or preforms
    thereof.

    158,    for apparatus for measuring, sensing, indicating, or testing the
    treatment or formation of glass excluding fibers, filaments, and preforms
    thereof.

    377,    for processes of measuring, sensing, inspecting, indicating, or
    testing the formation or treatment of fibers, filaments, or preforms
    thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for testing or
    measuring of general application; see the search notes under the class
    definition of Class 73, especially subclass 293 for liquid level/depth
    gauge with illumination, subclasses 488+ for speed/acceleration testing
    that may use optical waveguides, subclass 653 for optical indication of
    vibration, subclass 705 for an optical fluid pressure gauge, subclass 800
    for optical stress or strain testing, and subclass 861.08 for optical
    measurement of volume or rate of flow.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 202 for visual light signal
    indicators.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 73.1, for optical fiber or
    waveguide inspection, subclass 241 for inspection borescopes in general,
    subclass 350 for ring laser gyros including optical waveguides, and
    subclass 352 for Fabry-Perot cavities.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, appropriate
    subclasses, especially subclasses 73+ for testing for the presence of
    metals or metal compounds, 83 for testing for the presence of synthetic or
    natural resin, 106+ for testing for the presence of nitrogen, and 124+ for
    testing for the presence of halogen involving a chemical reaction.


CLS 65/485
TXT By optical means or of optical property:

    Apparatus under subclass 484 having means for measuring, controlling,
    analyzing, inspecting, or testing visual characteristics or properties of
    light used to produce the fibers, filaments, or preforms.

    (1)     Note.  Patents directed to means for measuring, controlling,
    analyzing, inspecting, or testing divergence, convergence, or internal
    reflection of light rays passing through fibers or fiber preforms are
    included in this subclass.


CLS 65/486
TXT Winder or puller movement (e.g., drawing sensor, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 484 including means to wind or pull the fiber,
    filament, or preform.


CLS 65/487
TXT Having fiber breakout detection, compensation, or prevention means:

    Apparatus under subclass 484 provided with means to (a) recognize breaks,
    (b) adjust or vary tension, or (c) avoid breaks of the fibers, filaments,
    or preforms thereof.


CLS 65/488
TXT Temperature:

    Apparatus under subclass 484 having means to sense, measure, analyze,
    indicate, control, or test a change in sensible heat associated with
    producing the fiber, filament, or preform.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, for processes of determining either
    (a) a characteristic or a condition of glass fibers, filaments, preforms,
    or (b) a system utilizing heating or cooling as a significant part of the
    test, wherein no glass working or treating is involved.


CLS 65/489
TXT Fluid pressure:

    Apparatus under subclass 484 having means for measuring, controlling,
    analyzing, indicating, or testing any change in force per unit area
    associated with producing the fibers, filaments, or preforms.


CLS 65/490
TXT Molten glass level (e.g., sensor, check valve, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 484 including the means to measure, control,
    recognize, indicate, or test any variance in height of a level of the
    molten glass.


CLS 65/491
TXT Diameter or coating thickness:

    Apparatus under subclass 484 including the means to measure, control, or
    indicate a diameter or coating thickness of the fiber, filament, or preform.


CLS 65/492
TXT With designated composition of dies, bushings, or nozzles:

    Apparatus under subclass 483 wherein the dies, bushings, or nozzle means
    utilized are comprised of specified material.


CLS 65/493
TXT Platinum group metal containing (i.e., ruthenium (Ru), rhodium (Rh), osmium
    (Os),  iridium (Ir), palladium (Pd), platinum (Pt)):

    Apparatus under subclass 492 wherein the specified composition of  the
    nozzles, bushings, or dies includes a platinum group metal.

    (1)     Note.  The platinum group metals are:

    Iridium (Ir)

    Osmium (Os)

    Ruthenium (Ru)

    Rhodium (Rh)

    Palladium (Pd)

    Platinum (Pt)


CLS 65/494
TXT With means to form hollow fiber or preform:

    Apparatus under subclass 483 having means to produce a fiber or preform
    with an empty core or cavity.


CLS 65/495
TXT With specified bushing, tip, or feeder structure:

    Apparatus under subclass 483 wherein the structure of a molten glass
    feeder, tip, or bushing is defined.


CLS 65/496
TXT Tipless:

    Apparatus under subclass 495 wherein the bushing has no projection tip
    structure at its opening.


CLS 65/497
TXT Noncircular tip opening (e.g., elliptical, polygonal, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 495 wherein the bushing tip opening is not
    circular.

    (1)     Note.  Elliptical, square, and polygonal configured bushing
    openings are found in this subclass.


CLS 65/498
TXT With cooling means for bushing (e.g., orifice plate cooling, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 495 provided with means to reduce the temperature
    of the bushing.

    (1)     Note.  Bushings having pipes installed therein to facilitate the
    circulation of cooling fluid will be considered proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    510,    for apparatus used to cool the formed fiber, filament, or fiber
    preform, per se.


CLS 65/499
TXT With heating means for bushing:

    Apparatus under subclass 495 provided with means to increase the
    temperature of the bushing.


CLS 65/500
TXT With means to align preform with drawing apparatus or form multifilament
    fibers (e.g., gathering shoe, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 483 having means to (a) arrange in line a preform
    and a drawing means or (b) form a fiber made with more than one filament.


CLS 65/501
TXT With fiber splicing or coupling means (e.g., fusion splicing, end to end,
    side to side, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 483 including means to join or fuse discrete
    fibers or filaments one to another.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes apparatus used to connect optical
    fibers, optical fiber bundles, waveguides, or preforms thereof, providing a
    stable region of light transfer.

    (2)     Note.  The connecting or coupling means may be mechanical or
    physical (i.e., permanent or disengageable).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    385,    Optical Waveguides, subclasses 15 and 53 for optical fiber or
    waveguide couplers or connectors, per se.


CLS 65/502
TXT With multiple crucible or multichamber system:

    Apparatus under subclass 483 having (a) at least two melting containers or
    (b) a melting container with at least two chambers.


CLS 65/503
TXT With cleaning means:

    Apparatus under subclass 483 provided with means to remove extraneous
    materials.


CLS 65/504
TXT With crimping or curling means:

    Apparatus under subclass 483 including means to bow, warp, or twist the
    fibers, filaments, or fiber preforms.


CLS 65/505
TXT With means to distribute fibers across collecting surface (e.g., blower,
    mechanical distribution means, reciprocating, oscillating, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 483 including a fiber depositing means which moves
    the fibers in a desired pattern over a collecting surface.


CLS 65/506
TXT With assorting means:

    Apparatus under subclass 483 comprising means to separate shots, slugs,
    beads, etc. from the formed fibers or filaments.


CLS 65/507
TXT With means for heating newly formed filament, fiber, or preform:

    Apparatus under subclass 483 having means to raise the temperature of the
    newly formed or forming fiber, filament, or preform.

    (1)     Note.  The heating for this subclass is in addition to the heat
    used to form the fiber, filament, or preform.


CLS 65/508
TXT Having means to shape or modify:

    Apparatus under subclass 507 including means to mold or fashion the newly
    formed or forming fiber, filament, or preform.


CLS 65/509
TXT Electric or electromagnetic heating utilized (e.g., induction heat, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 507 wherein electric or electromagnetic energy is
    used to create or cause the heat.


CLS 65/510
TXT With means for cooling newly formed fiber, filament, or preform (e.g.,
    nascent fiber, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 483 including means to lower the temperature of
    the newly formed or forming fiber, filament, or preform.


CLS 65/511
TXT With cooling surfaces or fins:

    Apparatus under subclass 510 wherein the cooling means are surface areas or
    fins used to exchange heat.


CLS 65/512
TXT Fluid cooling agent circulated:

    Apparatus under subclass 511 having means to pass a temperature lowering
    fluid through, around, or over the cooling surface or fins.


CLS 65/513
TXT Gas column (e.g., generally upward gas stream, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 510 including means to forcibly cause a slender
    stream of gas to contact the forming fiber, filament, or preform.


CLS 65/514
TXT Liquid stream or spray:

    Apparatus under subclass 510 including means to atomize or project a
    cooling liquid.


CLS 65/515
TXT Specified composition of slinger or rotary-centrifugal fiber forming means:

    Apparatus under subclass 483 wherein the formulation of material comprising
    the slinger or centrifugal fiber producing means is stipulated.


CLS 65/516
TXT Rotary-centrifugal fiber forming means (e.g., slinger, rotary disc, no
    fiberizing holes, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 483 including means devoid of fiberizing holes
    which (a) throws or flings into a space or (b) projects by rotary movement
    the forming fibers.


CLS 65/517
TXT Having fluid blast means for contacting glass:

    Apparatus under subclass 516 including the use of a forcible stream of
    extraneous fluid to directly contact a molten glass stream.


CLS 65/518
TXT With fluid blast guide, baffle, or deflector:

    Apparatus under subclass 517 including means to turn, divert, or direct the
    fluid blast path.


CLS 65/519
TXT Having means to pass cooling fluid through apparatus:

    Apparatus under subclass 483 including means to pass a cooling fluid within
    the apparatus.


CLS 65/520
TXT Depositing glass on periphery of rotating fiber forming means (e.g., disc,
    rotor, wheel, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 516 including means to deposit molten glass on an
    outermost edge of the rotating member.


CLS 65/521
TXT Centrifuge with fiberizing holes (e.g., rotor, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 483 wherein the rotary distribution means is a
    centrifuge having fiber forming apertures.


CLS 65/522
TXT Having adjacent combustion chamber, burner, or blower utilized:

    Apparatus under subclass 521 including use of a combustion chamber, blower,
    or burner adjacent to the centrifuge.


CLS 65/523
TXT With at least two concentric blowers or burners:

    Apparatus under subclass 522 wherein more than one burner or blower sharing
    a common center is used.


CLS 65/524
TXT With fluid blast means:

    Apparatus under subclass 483 comprising means for forming or attenuating
    the fiber, filament, or preform by using a fluid blast.


CLS 65/525
TXT Having specified nozzle opening size or nozzle cross section:

    Apparatus under subclass 524 having a fluid blast nozzle size opening or
    cross section stipulated (e.g., elliptical, flat, etc.).


CLS 65/526
TXT Having fluid discharge skirt or deflector:

    Apparatus under subclass 524 comprising means to turn, divert, or direct
    the fluid blast path.


CLS 65/527
TXT Toration means utilized:

    Apparatus under subclass 526 comprising means which directs a gaseous jet
    transversely into the gaseous fluid blast thereby attenuating the delivered
    fiber material.


CLS 65/528
TXT Combustion or flame attenuation:

    Apparatus under subclass 524 including means wherein a flame or combustion
    product discharged from a burner is used to attenuate the fibers or
    filaments.


CLS 65/529
TXT Having coating or treating means:

    Apparatus under subclass 483 combined with means for treating or applying a
    coating material to a fiber, filament, or preform.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus used to coat optical fibers, waveguides, or
    preforms thereof is properly classified here and below.


CLS 65/530
TXT Having gas feeding or withdrawal means:

    Apparatus under subclass 529 comprising a means for (a) directing a gas to
    or (b) removing a gas from an area surrounding the fiber, filament, or
    fiber preform.


CLS 65/531
TXT Having soot forming flame hydrolysis burner (e.g., flame oxidation, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 530 comprising means for forming soot (i.e.,
    coating material) by using a hydrolyzing flame burner.


CLS 65/532
TXT With means for recovery, recirculation, or elimination of excess gas feed
    or coating material:

    Apparatus under subclass 530 comprising means for returning, reusing, or
    destroying excess gas feed or coating material.


CLS 65/533
TXT With drawing means:

    Apparatus under subclass 483 including means for imposing a predetermined
    strain or tension on the fiber, filament, or preform.


CLS 65/534
TXT Movable furnace or bushing (e.g., rotatable, reciprocating, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 533 including a mounting means which enables a
    furnace or bushing to be mobile.


CLS 65/535
TXT Pulling wheels or rolls:

    Apparatus under subclass 533 wherein the drawing means consists of a wheel
    or roll.


CLS 65/536
TXT With severing:

    Apparatus under subclass 535 including means to divide a fiber, filament,
    or fiber preform by a severing operation (e.g., cutting, breaking, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     70, 87, and 174+,  for glass cutting operations other than fibers
    or filaments.


CLS 65/537
TXT From rod stock:

    Apparatus under subclass 533 utilizing glass rods as stock material from
    which the filament or fiber is formed.


CLS 65/538
TXT With fluid assisting means:

    Apparatus under subclass 533 utilizing a fluid to aid the drawing means.


CLS 65/539
TXT With winding means:

    Apparatus under subclass 483 having means to convolve the filament or fiber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, appropriate subclasses for means
    for winding elongated material.


CLS 65/540
TXT With furnace charging means:

    Apparatus under subclass 483 including means to feed raw materials to a
    melting furnace.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 65/900
TXT DRYING, DEHYDRATION, MINIMIZING OH GROUPS:

    Art collection involving the formation of glass without going through the
    melt stage, usually via a sintering or consolidating step.  Included herein
    are converting silicon and metal alkoxides (and like precursors) into
    oxides in the formation of oxide glass product and the "gel route"
    formation of glass.


CLS 65/901
TXT LIQUID PHASE REACTION PROCESS:

    Art collection involving the provision of precursors for oxides with
    ultimate consolidation to provide a glass product.


CLS 66/
TTL TEXTILES:  KNITTING

CLS 66/
TXT The manufacture of fabric structures from strands by forming loops and
    drawing the bights thereof through previously-formed loops.

    (1)     Note.  The class includes articles and products involving any
    significant step of knitting and articles peculiarly adapted to be produced
    by significant knitting steps even when the production of such articles
    includes or involves subsequent operations, as sewing or cutting, to
    complete them.

    (2)     Note.  For combined knitting and weaving, see Class 139, Textiles:
    Weaving, subclasses 1 and 383.

    (3)     Note.  Certain parts of knitting machines have been regarded as
    elements and have been placed after the "Machine" subclasses of this class.
    See the following subclasses, and indented subclasses; 90, 114, 116, 125,
    147, 157, 168, and  231+.


CLS 66/1
TXT Inventions coming within this class, but not especially provided for.


CLS 66/1.5
TXT Methods, machines and instruments for repairing holes or runs in knitted
    fabrics to restore the original interlooped condition of the threads whose
    distortion from loop form has caused the run.

    (1)     Note.  Needles used in reknitting are found in this class,
    subclasses 116+.

    (2)     Note.  See this class, subclass 2, for darning.

    (3)     Note.  See this class, subclass 2, and Class 223, Apparel
    Apparatus, subclass 100, for lasts.


CLS 66/2
TXT The repairing of holes in a fabric by means of instruments designed to draw
    strands initially through the fabric and thereafter to knit sufficient
    fabric to close the hole.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 112, Sewing, subclass 121.


CLS 66/3
TXT In place of the usual needles there is a bank of pins or hooks adapted to
    receive a strand, but not adapted to draw the new strand loop through the
    old, the loop drawing or casting being performed by other means.


CLS 66/4
TXT The new loop is cast over the old by a hand-carried implement.


CLS 66/5
TXT The needles are actuated to partake of their knitting movements as a unit
    bank, but are independently mounted so as to permit of ready and usually
    automatic addition to or removal from the bank of certain needles at
    desired times, or needles may knit independently in conjunction with united
    needle knitting.



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79      and 82, and indented subclasses.


CLS 66/6
TXT Some of the needles partake of their knitting movements as a unit, while
    other needles move independently and in succession.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7+.


CLS 66/7
TXT The needles are not secured together, but move in succession to draw the
    loops.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6.


CLS 66/8
TXT The knitting line is always a true circle.


CLS 66/9
TXT Material is combined with the knitting strand, which material is not knit
    into the fabric, but held thereto by the knitting strands, or material is
    knit in with the body fabric, but of a character and so incorporated as to
    be napped up or constitute loop piles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     80, 83, 91, 94, 190, 194, and any subclasses indented thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, appropriate subclasses for methods of and apparatus
    for encompassing or encasing goods or materials with a separate cover or
    band which serves as means for identifying, protecting or unit handling the
    goods or materials, particularly subclasses 582+ for apparatus to form a
    package by placing a band about the contents.


CLS 66/10
TXT Wherein the unknit material consists of overlapping but not interwoven
    longitudinal and transverse strands.

    (1)     Note.  Where interwoven, search Class 139, Textiles:  Weaving,
    subclass 1.


CLS 66/11
TXT Needles are moved in a direction at right angles to their knitting motion
    to avoid certain strands or the production of certain stitches.

    (1)     Note.  Does not include lateral displacement of needles for
    engagement with beard pressers, for which search this class, subclass 100.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     35, 66, 72, and any subclasses indented thereunder.


CLS 66/12
TXT A bank of needles includes needles of different types either to facilitate
    the throwing into or out of action of certain needles or to change the
    character of the knitting when different type needles are knitting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     38-49, 68, and 74.


CLS 66/13
TXT The independent movements of the needles are actuated by means other than
    cams having a plow action directly on the needle butts to cause
    reciprocation of the same in the needle grooves or on butts on members or
    jacks that move in the needle grooves and with the needles in the movements
    of the same.  Also includes machines having special means for operating
    other needles than the ordinary single-ended pivoted-latch or spring-beard
    needle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     63 and 120.


CLS 66/14
TXT The two ends of the needles are adapted to act at different times as loop
    drawing members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63.


CLS 66/15
TXT Where there are two needle beds of which one needle bed is flat with the
    needles radially arranged, while the other is cylindrical with the needles
    arranged to slide lengthwise of the same.  The strand-engaging ends of the
    needles of one bed are bent substantially at right angles to the shank or
    jack portions, and the jacks are mounted upon a pivot and constitute levers
    for carrying and actuating the needles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19+.


CLS 66/16
TXT The means for actuating the needles in their knitting movements is moved
    substantially in line with the movements of the needles, but is not carried
    in the needle grooves.


CLS 66/17
TXT A plurality of series of needles are employed which are adapted to
    cooperate in knitting at substantially the same place and usually designed
    to produce rib fabric.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64+.


CLS 66/18
TXT Conical needle beds are arranged one above or axially alined with the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34.


CLS 66/19
TXT One needle bed is flat with the needles radially arranged, while the other
    is cylindrical with the needles arranged to slide lengthwise of the same.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     31 and indented subclasses.


CLS 66/20
TXT A bank of needles includes needles of different types either to facilitate
    the throwing into or out of action of certain needles or to change the
    character of the knitting when different type needles are knitting,
    sometimes employing stitches other than plain or rib for producing
    ornamental or other effects, frequently tuck, drop, and other fancy
    stitches. Includes stitch-length variation when designed for special stitch
    work, but not when employed for fashioning.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     and 25, and see search notes thereunder.


CLS 66/21
TXT One bank of needles retains its stitches while the other bank knits a
    section of plain fabric, after which the first set of needles resumes
    knitting, thus connecting its loops with the loops on the other bank,
    whereby rib fabric may be knit, sometimes employing stitches other than
    plain or rib for producing ornamental or other effects, frequently tuck,
    drop, and other fancy stitches.  Includes stitch-length variation when
    designed for special stitch work, but not when employed for fashioning.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 25, and the search notes thereunder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     95, 172, and any subclasses indented thereunder.


CLS 66/22
TXT Each bank knits an independent web from separate yarn feed until completion
    of the welt, when one feed may be discontinued and rib fabric knit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173.


CLS 66/23
TXT Means is provided to cause the needles to draw loops of different lengths.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     54, 55, 71, and 77.


CLS 66/24
TXT The needle banks so cooperate as to change from plain to rib fabric or vice
    versa or to change from one type of rib to another at will.  (For
    definition of "rib" see subclass 200).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29      and 199.


CLS 66/25
TXT Embodying stitches other than plain or rib for producing ornamental or
    other effects, frequently tuck, drop, and other fancy stitches.  Includes
    stitch-length variation when designed for the same purposes, but not when
    employed for fashioning.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     21, 36, 40,  69, 75.1+, 103, 135, 172, 180, 198, 215+, and any
    subclasses indented thereunder.


CLS 66/26
TXT Change in the character of stitch is produced by a relative circumferential
    shifting of the needle beds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69.


CLS 66/27
TXT Means is provided to cause the needles to draw loops of different lengths.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     and see search notes thereunder.


CLS 66/28
TXT Means is provided designed to prevent one of the beds turning relatively to
    the other during continuous circular knitting.


CLS 66/29
TXT The needle banks so cooperated as to change from plain to rib fabric or
    vice versa or to change from one type of rib to another at will.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     and 199.


CLS 66/30
TXT Wherein the fabric is enlarged or diminished by the addition or dropping of
    wales.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     37, 39, 46, 51, 67, 70, 73, 76, 89, 183, 189, and any subclasses
    indented thereunder.


CLS 66/31
TXT Limited to a flat circular needle bed with the needles radially disposed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15      and 19, and indented subclasses.


CLS 66/32
TXT Wherein the fabric is enlarged or diminished by the addition or dropping of
    wales.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     and see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 66/33
TXT The insertion or removal of wales results from the sidewise displacement of
    the fashioning needles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     and see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 66/34
TXT The needle bed is a truncated cone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18.


CLS 66/35
TXT Needles are moved in a direction at right angles to their knitting motion
    to avoid certain strands or the production of certain stitches.

    (1)     Note.  Does not include lateral displacement of needles for
    engagement with beard pressers, for which search this class, subclass 100.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     and see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 66/36
TXT Employing stitches other than plain for producing ornamental or other
    effects, frequently tuck, drop, and other fancy stitches.  Includes
    stitch-length variation when designed for the same purposes, but not when
    employed for fashioning.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     and see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 66/37
TXT Wherein the fabric is enlarged or diminished by the addition or dropping of
    wales.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     and see the search notes thereunder.

    12,     and see search notes thereunder.


    Independent-Needle Machines, Circular, Varied Needle.  A bank of needles
    includes needles of different types either to facilitate the throwing into
    or out of action of certain needles or to change the character of the
    knitting when different type needles are knitting.


CLS 66/38
TXT There are a plurality of complete sets of cams at different levels each
    specially designed for controlling its particular set of needles.


CLS 66/39
TXT Wherein the fabric is enlarged or diminished by the addition or dropping of
    wales.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     and see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 66/40
TXT Employing stitches other than plain for producing ornamental or other
    effects, frequently tuck, drop, and other fancy stitches.  Includes
    stitch-length variation when designed for the same purposes, but not when
    employed for fashioning.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     and see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 66/41
TXT Change in the character of stitch consists in varying the needle action to
    produce a circumferential bunching of the strand, wherein certain of the
    needles retain their loops, while the remaining needles knit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95,     172, and indented subclasses.


CLS 66/42
TXT A plurality of strands are fed from different stations with a
    needle-actuating means corresponding to each station.


CLS 66/43
TXT One section of the needles (usually half) takes a strand from one feed,
    while the other section of needles takes a strand from another, the
    resultant fabric sections being interlocked by the adjacent end needles of
    two sections taking strands from both feeds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179.


CLS 66/44
TXT The variation in the character of stitch is due to certain of the needle
    latches being longer than the others.


CLS 66/45
TXT Peculiarly adapted to produce gloves or mittens.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65      and 174.


CLS 66/46
TXT Wherein the fabric is enlarged or diminished by the addition or dropping of
    wales.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     and see search notes thereunder.


CLS 66/47
TXT Includes elements which are adapted to move end needles of a series into or
    out of action, the movements of the elements being initiated by contact of
    the relatively advancing end needle therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52      and 53.


CLS 66/48
TXT The needle carrier by its rotation moves the needles along the cam path.


CLS 66/49
TXT An additional strand is knit in with the main strand for reenforcing
    purposes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182.


CLS 66/51
TXT Wherein the fabric is enlarged or diminished by the addition or dropping of
    wales.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     and see search notes thereunder.


CLS 66/52
TXT Includes elements which are adapted to move end needles of a series into or
    out of action, the movements of the elements being initiated by contact of
    the relatively advancing end needle therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47      and 48.


CLS 66/53
TXT Limited to pickers and picker control.


CLS 66/54
TXT Means is provided to cause the needles to draw loops of different lengths.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     and see search notes thereunder.


CLS 66/55
TXT By moving the needle or cam cylinders in an axial direction.  Includes
    adjustments of conical needle beds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59.


CLS 66/56
TXT Devices for changing from continuous rotating to oscillating motion.
    Change-speed mechanisms and the like.


CLS 66/57
TXT The structure of the needle-actuating cams, per se, other than
    modifications of the cam structure designed to produce special work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78.


CLS 66/58
TXT Means designed to arrange or operate the needles and other parts of the
    knitting machine to receive the loops of a previously knit web or to
    arrange or operate the needles so that the stitches of the knit web may be
    readily removed and applied to another machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148.


CLS 66/59
TXT By moving the needle or cam cylinders in an axial direction.  Includes
    adjustments of conical needle beds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55.


CLS 66/60
TXT The knitting line is always straight.


CLS 66/61
TXT Material is combined with the knitting strand, which material is not knit
    into the fabric, but held thereto by the knitting strands, or material is
    knit in with the body fabric, but of such a character and so incorporated
    as to be napped up or constitute pile loops.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      and see search notes thereunder.


CLS 66/62
TXT The independent movements of the needles are actuated by means other than
    cams having a plow action directly on the needle butts to cause
    reciprocation of the same in the needle grooves or on butts on members or
    jacks that move in the needle grooves and with the needles in the movements
    of the same.  Also includes machines having special means for operating
    other needles than the ordinary single-ended pivoted- latch or spring-beard
    needles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13      and 120.


CLS 66/63
TXT The two ends of the needles are adapted to act at different times as
    loop-drawing members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14.


CLS 66/64
TXT A plurality of series of needles are employed which are adapted to
    cooperate in knitting at substantially the same place and usually designed
    to produce rib fabric.


CLS 66/65
TXT Peculiarly adapted to produce gloves or mittens.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45      and 174.


CLS 66/66
TXT Needles are moved in a direction at right angles to their knitting motion
    to avoid certain strands or the production of certain stitches.

    (1)     Note.  Does not include lateral displacement of needles for
    engagement with beard pressers, for which search this class, subclass 100.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     and see search notes thereunder.


CLS 66/67
TXT Wherein the fabric is enlarged or diminished by the addition or dropping of
    wales.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     and see search notes thereunder.


CLS 66/68
TXT A bank of needles includes needles of different types either to facilitate
    the throwing into or out of action of certain needles or to change the
    character of the knitting when different type needles are knitting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     and see search notes thereunder.


CLS 66/69
TXT Change in the character of the stitch is produced by a relative shifting of
    the needle beds parallel to the knitting line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26.


CLS 66/70
TXT Wherein the fabric is enlarged or diminished by the addition or dropping of
    wales.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     and see search notes thereunder.


CLS 66/71
TXT Means is provided to cause the needles to draw loops of different lengths.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     and see search notes thereunder.


CLS 66/72
TXT Needles are moved in a direction at right angles to their knitting motion
    to avoid certain strands or the production of certain stitches.

    (1)     Note.  Does not include lateral displacement of needles for
    engagement with beard pressers, for which search this class, subclass 100.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     and see search notes thereunder.


CLS 66/73
TXT Wherein the fabric is enlarged or diminished by the addition or dropping of
    wales.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     and see search notes thereunder.


CLS 66/74
TXT A bank of needles includes needles of different types either to facilitate
    the throwing into or out of action of certain needles or to change the
    character of the knitting when different type needles are knitting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     and see search notes thereunder.


CLS 66/75.1
TXT Device under subclass 60 wherein a regulating means is provided for
    controlling the movement of knitting instrumetalities to produce an
    ornamental or other special pattern fabric.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of the type of operations controlled by the
    regulating means of this subclass are variations in stitch length to
    produce an ornamental or special effect and not merely to effect fashioning
    of a garment, manipulations of a knitting instrumentality, or produce a
    tuck, drop or other fancy stitch, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for circular knitting machines having means enabling then to make
    special stitches, and see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 66/75.2
TXT Device under subclass 75.1 wherein the regulating means includes (a)
    hydraulic or pneumatic means, (b) means responsive to variations in
    electrical impulses, or (c) means responsive to variations in magnetic
    lines of flux.


CLS 66/76
TXT Wherein the fabric is enlarged or diminished by the addition or dropping of
    wales.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     and see search notes thereunder.


CLS 66/77
TXT Means is provided to cause the needles to draw loops of different lengths.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     and see search notes thereunder.


CLS 66/78
TXT The structure of the needle-actuating cams, per se, other than
    modifications of the cam structure designed to produce special work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57.


    United-Needle Machines.  The needles are secured together and have no
    independent strand-taking and loop-drawing movements.


CLS 66/79
TXT The needles are secured together and have no independent strand-taking and
    loop-drawing movements.  The knitting line is always a true circle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5       and 6.


CLS 66/80
TXT Material is combined with the knitting strand, which material is not knit
    into the fabric, but held thereto by the knitting strands, or material is
    knit in with the body fabric, but of a character and so incorporated as to
    be napped up or constitute pile loops.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      and see search notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, appropriate subclasses for methods of and apparatus
    for encompassing or encasing goods or materials with a separate cover or
    band which serves as means for identifying, protecting or unit handling the
    goods or materials, particularly subclasses 582+ for apparatus to form a
    package by placing a band about the contents.


CLS 66/81
TXT Usually there are as many strands as needles and each needle knits from a
    separate strand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     85, 87,192, 193, and 195.


CLS 66/82
TXT The needles are secured together and have no independent strand-taking and
    loop-drawing movements.  The knitting line is always straight.


CLS 66/83
TXT Material is combined with the knitting strand, which material is not knit
    into the fabric, but held thereto by the knitting strands, or material is
    knit in with the body fabric, but of a character and so incorporated as to
    be napped up or constitute pile loops.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      and see search notes thereunder.


CLS 66/84
TXT Usually there are as many knitting strands as needles and each needle knits
    from a separate strand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     and see search notes thereunder.


CLS 66/85
TXT Each needle knits continually from the same strand, the several resultant
    chain stitches being connected together by the other material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193.


CLS 66/87
TXT A plurality of series of needles are employed which are adapted to
    cooperate in knitting at substantially the same place.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88.


CLS 66/88
TXT A plurality of series of needles are employedwhich are adapted to cooperate
    in knitting at substantially the same place.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87.


CLS 66/89
TXT Wherein the fabric is enlarged or diminished by the addition or dropping of
    wales, frequently by devices constructed and designed to remove stitches
    from certain needles and place them on others.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     96 and 198, and see search notes thereunder.


CLS 66/90
TXT Devices designed to assist the needles in forming knit fabric and located
    adjacent the knitting point.

    (1)     Note.  Does not include feeding, for which see subclass 125.


CLS 66/91
TXT For causing strand structure to stand out from the base of the fabric in
    the form of loops.


CLS 66/92
TXT For use with machines having one needle bed which is flat with the needles
    radially arranged while the other is cylindrical with the needles arranged
    to slide lengthwise of the same.


CLS 66/93
TXT Moving in straight lines substantially perpendicular to the axis of the
    cylinder.


CLS 66/94
TXT Devices coming under subclass 90 and arranged at the periphery of a
    rotatable wheel for combining a strand, adapted to be napped, with the main
    strand without causing loops to stand up from the fabric.


CLS 66/95
TXT Devices constructed and designed to remove stitches from certain needles
    and place them on other needles or devices constructed to hold loops while
    the needles are knitting a series of courses as in forming a welt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for transferring means (including modified needles) combined with
    dial and cylinder structure.

    89,     for united needle straight knitting machines including narrowing
    and widening means.

    123,    for needles modified to permit their functioning as loop or stitch
    transferring means.

    189,    for fashioned knitted garments.

    198+,   for knitted fabrics in which occur loops displaced from wale to
    wale or from one course to another in the same wale.


CLS 66/96
TXT Used in connection with machines in which the knitting line is always
    straight.


CLS 66/97
TXT Arranged at the periphery of a rotatable wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    105 and 113.


CLS 66/98
TXT Devices arranged to close the beards of spring-beard needles.


CLS 66/99
TXT For throwing the beard pressers out of operation to avoid the casting off
    of the fabric from the needles.


CLS 66/100
TXT Adapted to move the upper or bearded ends of the needles against the beard
    pressers.


CLS 66/101
TXT Adapted to be separately movable to and from the beards to close the same.


CLS 66/102
TXT Movable in substantially a straight line.


CLS 66/103
TXT Arranged at the periphery of a rotatable wheel so constructed that the
    beards of all the needles are not pressed in every course, thus producing
    special stitch work in the fabric.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97,     and see search notes thereunder.


CLS 66/104
TXT Arranged to act on the strand or web to maintain the same under proper
    tension and assist in the casting off of the new loops.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 149, and indented subclasses, for
    web holders not located at the knitting point.


CLS 66/105
TXT Arranged at the periphery of a rotatable wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97,     and see search notes thereunder.


CLS 66/106
TXT Arranged to swing to or from operative position in the arc of a circle.


CLS 66/107
TXT Moving in straight lines substantially perpendicular to the axis of the
    cylinder.


CLS 66/108
TXT Portions of cams for imparting movement to the sinkers are movable with
    respect to the cam carrier to vary the movement of the sinkers.


CLS 66/109
TXT Arranged to cooperate with machines in which the knitting line is always
    straight.


CLS 66/110
TXT Arranged to move in straight lines substantially perpendicular to the
    needles.


CLS 66/111
TXT Limited to means adapted to open or close the latches of pivoted-latch
    needles or to maintain them open or closed.


CLS 66/112
TXT Constructions arranged to close or maintain closed a gap formed in a ring
    arranged around the needles outside the latches.


CLS 66/113
TXT Arranged at the periphery of a rotatable wheel.  Includes many cast-off
    wheels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97,     and see search notes thereunder.


CLS 66/114
TXT Construction of cylinders and other supports for machine needles and
    devices arranged to cooperate therewith to maintain the needles in the bed.


CLS 66/115
TXT Arranged to support needles for independent actuation.


CLS 66/116
TXT The primary knitting elements, frequently hooked in machine type, for
    engaging the strand to form the new loops and pull them through the old
    ones.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    163,    Needle and Pin Making, subclasses 2+.


CLS 66/117
TXT Adapted to be held in the hand.


CLS 66/118
TXT Designed for the production of a chain of loops in which each loop is drawn
    through the preceding one.


CLS 66/119
TXT Having resilient hooked ends adapted to be flexed to close the hooks for
    the casting off of loops.


CLS 66/120
TXT Having hooked ends and bars each movable substantially in a straight line
    for closing the hooks.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13      and 62.


CLS 66/121
TXT Having hooked ends and bars each swinging about a point for closing the
    hooks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    163,    Needle and Pin Making, subclass 3.


CLS 66/122
TXT Limited to the construction of the pivot for the latch.


CLS 66/123
TXT The construction of machine needles other than the portion which contacts
    with the yarn.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95,     for needles modified to permit them to act as means for
    transferring stitches to other needles.


CLS 66/124
TXT The shanks are constructed to frictionally engage the walls of the needle
    bed to maintain the needles in any given position.


CLS 66/125
TXT Means for conducting strands into the field of action of the needles or the
    needle-cooperating elements and operating devices for such means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.


CLS 66/126
TXT Guides arranged to move to-and-fro along a straight knitting line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 158+ for traversing
    guides for winding machines.


CLS 66/127
TXT Guides are thrown into and out of feeding position to the needles with
    peculiar intercontrol, whereby the incoming guide replaces the guide thrown
    out of action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138+.


CLS 66/128
TXT The traversing movement of the guides is at times less than the maximum
    traverse requisite to feed the strand to all the needles.


CLS 66/129
TXT Additional means is provided to feed reenforcing or other strands as well
    as the main strand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    142, and indented subclasses.


CLS 66/130
TXT Means for gradually decreasing the speed of the guide carrying means at the
    ends of the traverse.


CLS 66/131
TXT Means specialized for bringing the strand into close engagement with the
    needles and not falling in the group under subclass 90.


CLS 66/132
TXT Means other than the knitting elements for engaging the strands and
    advancing them.


CLS 66/133
TXT Means for feeding a reenforcing or separate strand to the needles
    consisting of a guide carrying such strand and adapted to be moved to or
    from feeding position at will.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129,    142 and any subclasses indented thereunder.


CLS 66/134
TXT Includes means for gripping and holding the idle strand or a rupturing edge
    for severing the strand that is thrown out of action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140,    142, 145 and any subclasses indented thereunder.


CLS 66/135
TXT Guides are caused to move to feed the strand between the needles as well as
    along the line of knitting, thereby causing the strand to pass entirely or
    partially around one or more needles.


CLS 66/136
TXT Guides are constructed and controlled so that the desired one of a
    plurality of strands shall be the surface strand in the fabric.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201.


CLS 66/137
TXT With means for changing the strand from one face of the fabric to the other.


CLS 66/138
TXT Guides are thrown into and out of feeding position to the needles with
    peculiar intercontrol, whereby the incoming guide replaces the guide thrown
    out of action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127.


CLS 66/139
TXT Guides move in a straight line to and from feeding position.


CLS 66/140
TXT Includes means for gripping and holding the idle strand or a rupturing edge
    for severing the strand that is thrown out of action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    and see search notes thereunder.


CLS 66/141
TXT Guides not adapted or intended to be readily and automatically thrown into
    and out of action during knitting, although the guide may be thrown out of
    action at the conclusion of knitting.  Also excludes guides specifically
    provided for in subclasses 136 and 137.


CLS 66/142
TXT Includes means for gripping and holding the idle strand or a rupturing edge
    for severing the strand that is thrown out of action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    and see search notes thereunder.


CLS 66/143
TXT An additional or substituted strand is initially engaged by the knitting
    strand and drawn by the same into position to be engaged by the needles.


CLS 66/144
TXT There is means for joining the additional or substituted strand to the
    knitting strand other than by mere friction, as by tying or wrapping.


CLS 66/145
TXT Includes means for gripping and holding the idle strand or a rupturing edge
    for severing the strand that is thrown out of action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    and see search notes thereunder.


CLS 66/146
TXT Means for maintaining a suitable tension on the knitting strand, but does
    not include slack producers used in connection with the devices found in
    subclasses 143 and 144.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclass 195 for feed
    tensioners, per se.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 410+ and 147+ for
    tensioning a running material.


CLS 66/147
TXT Means arranged to act on the knit fabric either to take it up or to assist
    the knitting elements to perform the knitting operation or to do special
    operations on the completed fabric and not provided for in subclasses under
    subclass 104.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclass 291.


CLS 66/148
TXT Means adapted to engage the loops of a fabric to be removed from the
    needles of a knitting machine or to apply the loops already engaged to the
    needles of a knitting machine.

    (1)     Note.  Devices specially constructed to permit the looping
    operation to be performed with the loops thereon are found in Class 112,
    Sewing, subclass 127.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58      and 59.


CLS 66/149
TXT Means located at a distance from the knitting point and designed to
    maintain a proper tension on the web and remove the fabric.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, subclass 31.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 304+.


CLS 66/150
TXT Means peculiarly adapted for taking up work of nonuniform dimensions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclass 305.


CLS 66/151
TXT Means for winding the knit fabric wherein the fabric is knit in a machine
    in which the needles are caused to travel in a circular course past the
    knitting point.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 520+ for convolute
    winding which includes fabrics.


CLS 66/152
TXT The knit fabric is not wound on a reel, but is taken up by means adapted to
    act on an indefinite length of fabric and frequently consists of two rolls.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.


CLS 66/153
TXT Wherein the fabric is knit in a machine in which the needles are caused to
    travel in a circular course past the knitting point.


CLS 66/157
TXT Limited to means for throwing off the power from the driven parts of the
    knitting mechanism.  Includes stop signals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 116.5+, with their
    search notes.


CLS 66/158
TXT By abnormal condition of the strand.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses .25+.

    28,     Textiles: Manufacturing, subclasses 186+ for stopping means
    associated with warp preparing apparatus.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 80+.

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, subclasses 18+.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclass 349.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclass 10 for
    material responsive control means that actuate means to advance material of
    indefinite length.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 29, 37+ and 49.


CLS 66/159
TXT The strand is parted at a distance from the needles, permitting the machine
    to stop before the fabric is cast off.


CLS 66/160
TXT When stopping is called for by increased tension, a slack length of strand
    is provided to prevent undesirable breaking of the same.


CLS 66/161
TXT Means causing the stopping of the machine is controlled by an electric
    circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles: Fiber Preparation, subclasses .2+.

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclass 187, for electric stopping means
    associated with a warp preparing apparatus.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclass 81.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 353+.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.13+ for
    electrical switches which are controlled by threads or strands; see
    subclass 61.14 where the switch is controlled by a knot or change in
    diameter of the thread or strand, and subclass 61.18 where the switch is
    controlled by the slack, breakage, run-out or failure to travel along its
    intended path.


CLS 66/162
TXT Power from a moving part of the machine is applied to stop-motion
    connections by means of a normally ineffective connection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164.


CLS 66/163
TXT Means causing the stopping of the machine is controlled by an electric
    circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161,    and see search notes thereunder.


CLS 66/164
TXT Power from a moving part of the machine is applied to stop-motion
    connections by means of a normally ineffective connection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162.


CLS 66/165
TXT Abnormal condition or movement of a needle- cooperating element, such as a
    sinker or other element provided for under subclass 90, causes the stopping
    of the machine.


CLS 66/166
TXT Abnormal condition of the fabric, such as holes therein or the dropping of
    the fabric from the needles, results in the stopping of the machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclass 348.


CLS 66/167
TXT Means are actuated to stop the machine at a desired length of fabric,
    either at the conclusion of knitting or at an intermediate stage, as when
    the character of knitting is to be changed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclass 340.


CLS 66/168
TXT Means for cleaning the needles and elements of a knitting machine from
    dirt, lint, etc.


CLS 66/169
TXT The products of operations falling within the scope of the class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product which may include a knitted component.

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 59+ for a knit fabric which is coated or impregnated and
    subclasses 304+ for a knit fabric which may be bonded to a second component.


CLS 66/170
TXT Objects not in the nature of webs or tubes of indefinite length.  The
    objects may be connected together, so as to form string work.  Includes
    inventions peculiarly adapted to be produced by knitting even when the
    production of such articles involves subsequent cutting or sewing to
    complete them.


CLS 66/171
TXT Articles of wearing apparel.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 2, Apparel.


CLS 66/172
TXT Construction of the cuff or other edges and adjacent portions or
    constructions tending to prevent raveling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.


CLS 66/173
TXT The border portion is knit as a pocket, as by doubling in knitting the edge
    of the fabric or joining two simultaneously-knit fabrics at the edge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     95, and indented subclasses.


CLS 66/174
TXT Limited to constructions peculiarly adapted to serve as gloves or mittens.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45      and 65.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 158-170, indented under Hand or arm coverings.


CLS 66/175
TXT Garments adapted to clothe the legs and trunk.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 69+.


CLS 66/176
TXT Garments adapted to clothe the trunk.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175,    and see search notes thereunder.


CLS 66/177
TXT Garments adapted to clothe the body from the waist down.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175,    and see search notes thereunder.


CLS 66/178
TXT Garments not adapted to clothe the body higher than the legs and usually
    provided with coverings for the feet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 239+.


CLS 66/179
TXT Hosiery provided with sections knit from separate strands and connected
    along a line by interlocking or overlapping loops, except where the
    interlocking is the result of heel or toe narrowing and widening, in which
    case the patents will be found in subclasses 184, 186 and 187.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43.


CLS 66/180
TXT Hosiery knit with a character of stitch designed to enhance the appearance
    of the same.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     and see search notes thereunder.


CLS 66/181
TXT Provided with a knitted seam imitation not essential to the process of
    manufacture.


CLS 66/182
TXT Provided with an additional strand incorporated with the main strand over a
    substantial area or with a single heavier strand and intended to increase
    the strength or wearing qualities of the hose.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     129, 133, 142, and any subclasses indented thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 241.


CLS 66/183
TXT The upper portion of the hose is shaped to fit the leg by variations in the
    stitch length or in the number of wales, and the portion from the ankle
    down is knit in a manner not conventional.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185+    and 189.


CLS 66/184
TXT The heel or toe portions are knit in a manner not conventional.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186     and 187.


CLS 66/185
TXT The portion from the ankle down is knit in a manner not conventional.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183     and 184.


CLS 66/186
TXT There is novelty in the knitting of the heel or toe portions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184.


CLS 66/187
TXT Limited to construction of the heel or toe portions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184.


CLS 66/188
TXT The leg and foot portions are ribbed or provided with ribbed sections.

    (1)     Note.  Rib-top construction will be found in this class, subclasses
    172 and 173.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     29, and 199.


CLS 66/189
TXT The garment is shaped by variations in the number of wales or in the length
    of stitch, frequently by stitches or portions thereof moved from one wale
    to another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     30 and 198, and see search notes thereunder.


CLS 66/190
TXT Includes material held by the loops of the main fabric, but not formed into
    any knitted loops.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      and see search notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, appropriate subclasses for methods of and apparatus
    for encompassing or encasing goods or materials with a separate cover or
    band which serves as means for identifying, protecting or unit handling the
    goods or materials, particularly subclasses 582+ for apparatus to form a
    package by placing a band about the contents.


CLS 66/191
TXT The unknit material is of a character or so incorporated as to be readily
    napped up or to constitute pile loops.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194.


CLS 66/192
TXT The unknit material is incorporated in warp fabric--that is, fabric knit of
    separate strands, each strand passing from one wale in one course to an
    adjacent or other wale in a succeeding course or each strand forming a
    chain of interknit loops.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     and see search notes thereunder.


CLS 66/193
TXT Incorporated with warp fabric wherein certain strands are not interknit,
    but each strand forms an interknit chain, the chains being united together
    by other strands.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85.


CLS 66/194
TXT Including strands of a character or so knit as to be readily napped up or
    constitute pile loops.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 410+ for a web or sheet with a tufted or looped
    surface formed by a sewing operation.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 391+ for a woven pile fabric.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 85+ for a
    stock material product with a pile or nap-type surface and not provided for
    in any other class.


CLS 66/195
TXT Fabric formed of separate strands, each strand passing from one wale in one
    course to an adjacent or other wale in a succeeding course or each strand
    forming a chain of interknit loops.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     and see search notes thereunder.


CLS 66/196
TXT Fabric formed of two interknitted webs, either web forming a substantially
    complete fabric.


CLS 66/197
TXT The interknitted webs are of fabric formed of loops drawn through preceding
    course loops, some in one direction and others in the other direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188,    199 and 200.


CLS 66/198
TXT The body of the fabric has accumulated loops of certain of the wales, the
    accumulation being of two adjacent or other loops in the same course or of
    loops of wales in different courses, or loops at certain wales are
    interknit with loops of other wales.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89,     95, 189, and 198, and indented subclasses.


CLS 66/199
TXT The courses of the fabric change from plain to rib or vice versa or from
    one type of rib to another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24      and 29.


CLS 66/200
TXT Fabric formed of loops drawn through preceding course loops, some in one
    direction and others in the other direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188,    197 and 199.


CLS 66/201
TXT The appearance of the fabric is altered by substituting or adding a strand
    or by reversing the surface or plated strands.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    133, 136, 138, and any indented subclasses.


CLS 66/202
TXT Involving selection of strands of a peculiar nature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 195.8 for a knitted head covering with an
    upturned brim where no significance is given to the particular arrangement
    of the loops and bights of the knitted fabric structure.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 420+.


CLS 66/203
TXT Device under subclass 82 wherein each of a multiplicity of needles in a
    knitting apparatus is usually supplied with its own thread which is fed
    thereto in a vertical or warp-wise fashion.


CLS 66/204
TXT Device under subclass 203 wherein means are provided to regulate the
    movement of the fabric-producing instrumentalities of a warp- knitting
    machine.


CLS 66/205
TXT Device under subclass 204 wherein the regulating means has an
    energy-converting means associated with one specific fabric-producing
    instrumentality which moves said instrumentality in controlled manner and
    independently of other instrumentalities.

    (1)     Note.  Example of structures to be found herein are guide bars
    moved by fluid motors and guide bars moved by stepping motors.


CLS 66/206
TXT Device under subclass 204 wherein the instrumentality controlled is a means
    to move the beard of a needle towards the needle's shank.


CLS 66/207
TXT Device under subclass 204 wherein the control means has means to regulate
    the motion of means for lapping, guiding or laying the warp-threads.


CLS 66/208
TXT Device under subclass 204 wherein the control means has means to regulate
    the motion of a bed of stitch-forming elements.


CLS 66/209
TXT Device under subclass 203 including means for advancing warp-threads to the
    fabric-producing instrumentalities of a warp-knitting machine.


CLS 66/210
TXT Device under subclass 209 having means to regulate the rate at which
    warp-threads are fed.


CLS 66/211
TXT Device under subclass 210 wherein the regulating means is controlled in
    response to variations in the strains imposed upon the fed thread.


CLS 66/212
TXT Device under subclass 210 wherein the regulating means is controlled by
    means sensing variations in the diameter of the thread-supplying means.


CLS 66/213
TXT Device under subclass 209 wherein means are provided to control the strain
    imposed upon threads being fed to the knitting instrumentalities.


CLS 66/214
TXT Device under subclass 203 wherein means are provided for controllably
    directing a warp- thread to its associated needle.


CLS 66/215
TXT Special stitch:

    Apparatus and method under subclass 8 wherein the machine operates to
    produce a configuration of yarn in at least one course and wale that
    provides an ornamental or other visual effect in the knitted fabric.

    (1)     Note.  Tuck, welt, plate, or other exotic knitting is generally
    found in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass also includes stitch length variation for
    other than strictly fashioning.


CLS 66/216
TXT Having butt selection means:

    Subject matter under subclass 215 wherein the knitting machine is provided
    with a plurality of butts dependent from needles or other elements in a bed
    and further provided with means designed to select and cause motion
    relative to the bed of either:  (a) one of the butts or (b) a needle or
    other element either of which is associated with and capable of causing one
    of the butts thereon to engage additional means for further moving the butt
    relative to the bed at the location wherein the special stitch is desired
    in a selected wale.

    (1)     Note.  The term "butt" refers to the projection or projectionlike
    structure on a needle jack, sinker, or other element residing in a knitting
    machine supporting structure.

    (2)     Note.  The selection means may also cause the formation of a
    special stitch by selectively not imparting motion to a butt, needle, or
    other element.


CLS 66/217
TXT Control of sinkers:

    Subject matter under subclass 216 wherein the butt structure occurs on
    either:  (a) a sinker, (b) a sinker-moving element in the bed upon which
    the sinker rests, or (c) a sinker-moving element on a structure fixed
    relative to a bed upon which the sinker rests.


CLS 66/218
TXT Electrical control type:

    Subject matter under subclass 216 wherein at least a portion of
    intelligence is transmitted to, from, or within the butt selection means in
    the form of electrical energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232,    for pattern systems, per se, of the electrical type.


CLS 66/219
TXT Magnetic:

    Subject matter under subclass 218 wherein the butt selection means utilizes
    magnetic energy.


CLS 66/220
TXT Butt translation:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 wherein at least a portion of the
    magnetic energy acts to attract or repel a butt or an element from which
    the butt depends.


CLS 66/221
TXT And pivoted butt-engaging member:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 including means that rotates about a
    pivot to contact and move the butt structure to provide selection thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The butt-engaging member may also execute a linear movement
    in addition to the pivotal motion.


CLS 66/222
TXT Simultaneous control of multiple butt levels:

    Subject matter under subclass 216 wherein the butt selection means is
    capable of either selectively: (a) simultaneously engaging butts at plural
    levels on a needle or other element to provide motion thereto relative to
    the supporting bed or (b) moving a needle or other element to cause a
    plurality of butts thereon at plural levels to simultaneously engage
    further means for additionally moving said plurality of butts relative to
    the supporting bed.

    (1)     Note.  The other elements reside either within the needle bed or
    other bed structure which is fixed relative thereto.


CLS 66/223
TXT Including permanent selection means:

    Subject matter under subclass 222 wherein the butt selection means consists
    of a profile structure that projects into the paths of, and thereby
    selectively engages, the butts moving relative thereto, the profile
    structure remaining in the butt paths unless removed manually or by means
    external to the knitting machine.


CLS 66/224
TXT Including drum having integral plural level pattern:

    Subject matter under subclass 222 wherein the butt selection means includes
    a cylinder structurally provided with components at plural levels directly
    controlling selective engagement of butts at plural levels.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are knitting machines with control
    drums provided with a flexible pattern tape which either:  (a) surrounds
    the drum and thereby constitutes an integral part of the drum or (b) causes
    the tape to selectively position the components thereby transferring the
    pattern thereto.

    (2)     Note.  The term "pattern" generally connotes a design array stored
    mechanically or electrically which is retrieved to control the formation of
    a fabric design.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233+,   for pattern systems of the flexible- member type.

    239+,   for a drum-type pattern storage device, per se.


CLS 66/225
TXT Selection by axial movement of element with multiple butt levels:

    Subject matter under subclass 224 wherein during selection of a butt a part
    engages the butt and thereby moves the needle or other element upon which
    the butt resides along its longitudinal axis.


CLS 66/226
TXT Drum contact with butts:

    Subject matter under subclass 224 wherein the components physically engage
    and move the butts.


CLS 66/227
TXT Having additional butt-engaging member control means:

    Subject matter under subclass 224 further provided with additional means
    distinct from and controlled independently of the pattern drum for engaging
    and regulating the operation of at least one of the butts.


CLS 66/228
TXT Having pattern at rotating member engaging butts at single level:

    Subject matter under subclass 216 wherein the butt selection means
    comprises a revolving device either integrally incorporating a storage
    array for direct physical engagement and selection of only one level of
    butts or for conveying a separate distinct storage array to only one level
    of butts for engagement and selection thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The selection means of this subclass is capable of selecting
    only one level of butts during initial engagement thereof but can disengage
    at plural levels.

    (2)     Note.  The jack or other structure upon which the butts reside may
    have butts at several levels although only one level can be engaged by the
    selection means of this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  See (2) Note of subclass 224 of this class for clarification
    of the term "pattern".


CLS 66/229
TXT Inclined rotating member with integral pattern:

    Subject matter under subclass 228 wherein the butt selection means is of
    the type integrally incorporating the storage array and further, wherein
    the axis of rotation of the means lies in a different plane from the planes
    that include the axis about which the supporting bed rotates.


CLS 66/230
TXT Having butt-engaging members limited to other than rotary motion about the
    periphery and longitudinal axis of the needle cylinder:

    Subject matter under subclass 216 wherein the butt selection means includes
    movable butt-engaging members that remain fixed circumferentially relative
    to both the circular support bed for the needles and its vertical axis
    during butt selection operations.


CLS 66/231
TXT PATTERN SYSTEM:

    Subject matter under the class definition drawn to an assemblage of devices
    or design arrays for storing information for use in a knitting machine with
    either advancement of a portion or all of the assemblage relative to an
    information retrieval device or retrieval of stored information.

    (1)     Note.  The pattern system can include means for subsequent
    processing or mere routing of any or all of the retrieved information.

    (2)     Note.  Apparatus specifically provided for in a prior subclass that
    is at least partially controlled by the retrieved, processed, or routed
    information is properly placed in such subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    Appropriate subclasses, for pattern systems combined with other control or
    operating mechanisms for use with knitting machines of this class.


CLS 66/232
TXT Electrical signal type:

    Subject matter under subclass 231 wherein at least a portion of the
    information is stored, retrieved, or transmitted in the form of electrical
    energy.

    (1)     Note.  The electrical stored, retrieved, or transmitted energy can
    control the rate or sequence of reading information which is mechanically
    stored, retrieved, or transmitted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218+,   for special stitch circular independent needle machines provided
    with an electrical-type butt selection control system.


CLS 66/233
TXT Flexible member type:

    Subject matter under subclass 231 wherein at least a portion of the
    information is stored in or on a movable pliable structure which conforms
    to the shape of and is driven by a motion-imparting means.


CLS 66/234
TXT Chain:

    Subject matter under subclass 233 wherein the flexible member consists of a
    series of pivotally-connected rigid links.


CLS 66/235
TXT Chain being horizontally fed to drive sprocket:

    Subject matter under subclass 234 wherein each link of the chain is
    horizontally disposed when at the point of approach engagement with a
    motion-imparting toothed wheel.


CLS 66/236
TXT Having coaxial pattern member:

    Subject matter under subclass 234 provided with an additional pattern
    device having a common axis with a rotary axis of the motion-imparting
    means.

    (1)     Note.  The pattern device may be mounted on the same shaft as the
    rotary axis of the motion-imparting means.


CLS 66/237
TXT Multiplier or divider:

    Subject matter under subclass 231 provided with means to either: (a) stop
    or reverse the normal unidirectional movement, or change the mode of
    reading, of a device or design array for storing information such that a
    discrete portion of the information is multiply retrieved or (b) increase
    the rate or range of the normal movement, or change the mode of reading, of
    a device or design array for storing information such that a division of a
    discrete portion of the information is retrieved.


CLS 66/238
TXT PATTERN STORAGE DEVICE:

    Subject matter under the class definition drawn to subcombination
    structures used in pattern control systems for storing retrievable
    information for use with a knitting machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    Appropriate subclasses, for pattern storage devices or arrays combined with
    knitting machines of this class.

    231+,   for pattern systems employing a plurality of devices or design
    arrays for storage.


CLS 66/239
TXT Drum type:

    Subject matter under subclass 238 wherein the subcombination structure is
    in the form of a cylindrical member structurally provided with components
    on or in its curvilinear surface and further, wherein said components occur
    at levels that are spaced apart axially of the member in an array that
    comprises information.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224+,   for special stitch circular knitting machines provided butt
    selection means employing a drum-type pattern storage device.


CLS 66/240
TXT Having removable pin:

    Subject matter under subclass 239 wherein the components are removable and
    consist of relatively thin rod members radially projecting from the drum.

    (1)     Note.  Generally within this subclass, every pin of any one drum
    will have the same longitudinal profile.


CLS 66/241
TXT Having jack:

    Subject matter under subclass 239 wherein a plurality of the components
    occur orthogonally to and spaced along the longitudinal axis of a shaftlike
    member having a square or rectangular cross section and further, wherein
    the member is removably disposed on the drum.

    (1)     Note.  The protrusions can be frangible thereby allowing for their
    removal.


CLS 66/242
TXT Flexible type:

    Subject matter under subclass 238 wherein the subcombination structure
    consists of a pliable structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224,    for special stitch circular knitting machines having butt selection
    means employing a drum and flexible pattern tape.

    233+,   for pattern systems including an information structure that is
    flexible.


CLS 68/
TTL TEXTILES:  FLUID TREATING  APPARATUS

CLS 68/
TXT

    I.      This class is the class of machines, implements and accessories for
    fluid treatment of textile fabrics, textile fibers, and pulp as for the
    purpose of carbonizing, bleaching, dyeing, moistening, mercerizing or
    mordanting the same or for the removal of dirt, grease, soil, and other
    like substances from them by the use of solvents, saponifiers or
    emulsifiers, unless specifically provided for elsewhere.

    II.     The machines of this class have been divided into the following
    types:

    1.      Gas, steam, or mist treating.  These are machines for subjecting a
    textile to a fluid in the form of a gas, steam, or mist.

    2.      Scrubbing.  These are machines for effecting treatment of textiles,
    while saturated with a liquid, by reason of a sliding action taking place
    between the textiles and a contacting element, during which action the
    textiles may be kneaded or brushed.  Scrubbing may be effected by the use
    of a pair of cooperating rolls if they rotate at different peripheral
    velocities or rotate in the same direction. Generally, scrubbers have a
    squeezing effect which is incidental to the scrubbing action.

    3.      Squeezing.  These are machines for effecting treatment of textiles,
    while saturated with a liquid, by reason of application and release of
    pressure on the textiles.

    4.      Impulsing.  These are machines for effecting treatment of textiles,
    while immersed in a liquid, by causing an intermittently movable element to
    impart repeated impulses to portions of the textiles as distinguished from
    the entire mass, such that the textile portions will travel a distance
    independently of the moving element.

    5.      Dragging.  These are machines for effecting treatment of discrete
    portions of the entire mass of textiles by causing them to be engaged by
    and dragged around the tub with a moving element, without the textile
    portions being clamped to the element, while the textiles are submerged in
    a liquid. Generally, the moving element is a pin or comprises fingers or
    narrow blades. Where the entire mass of textiles is moved within a tub or
    moved into and out of the tub in one continuous cycle, as by rakes or
    conveyors moving the entire mass, the patents are classified in the liquid
    flow subclasses.

    6.      Tumbling.  These are machines for effecting treatment of textiles
    by causing them to be tumbled about in a drum or cage which is mounted on a
    horizontal or inclined axis, said textiles being submerged in a liquid
    during at least a portion of the revolution of the drum or cage and being
    free to move in the cage.  The drum or cage must make at least a 360o
    revolution, and may or may not have vanes, buckets, or the like to cause a
    circulation of liquid within the tumbler and may or may not have vanes to
    cause a rubbing action within the tumbler.

    7.      Liquid flowing.  These are machines for effecting treatment of
    textiles by reason of the relative motion of a liquid and the textiles as
    by the forcing of a liquid by pumps, by centrifuging or the like through
    the textiles, or by the shifting bodily of the entire mass of textiles
    through the liquid with free access of the liquid thereto in
    contradistinction to moving discrete portions of the textiles, or by the
    agitation of the entire mass of both the liquid and the textiles submerged
    in the liquid.

    8.      Liquid applying.  These are machines for treating textiles with
    liquid in which the textiles are subjected to an application of liquid
    other than by being submerged in the liquid or by being subjected to a
    vapor, spray, or mist.

    NOTES



    (1)     PROCESSES:

    Where both process and apparatus (for this class 68) for its practice are
    claimed, the patent is classified in the class appropriate to the process
    claimed and is cross-referenced to this class for the apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, which is the generic class for processes of bleaching
    and dyeing materials of any kind, fluid treatment and chemical modification
    of textiles, fibers, hides, skins, and other animal tissues, and see the
    notes thereto for related art.

    101,    Printing, for application of coloring material to a textile by a
    printing operation, and see particularly subclass 172 for multicolor
    printing of yarn strands.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, which is the generic class
    for cleaning processes, and for processes for contacting solids with
    liquids and see the notes thereto for related art.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    for cleaning artificial silk threads combined with significant processes
    relating to the manufacture of said threads, see particularly subclass 165
    and indented subclasses.

    427,    Coating Processes, which is the generic class for processes of
    coating or impregnating in general.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, for process and composition for fluid treatment of sheet and web
    products therein provided.

    (2)     APPARATUS

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, see note (1).

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, for apparatus for
    operating on materials other then textiles and fibers by means of a draft
    or current of air, steam, or equivalent gaseous fluid, brushing, scraping,
    shaking, wiping, shotting, or the use of a squeegee, both with and without
    use of a liquid; also for cleaning spots by means of an implement provided
    with an applicator; also apparatus especially designed for cleaning floor
    coverings and upholstery while in normal serviceable position by such means
    whether with or without the use of a liquid.

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclass 66 for apparatus for liquid
    treatment of textile fibers combined with working of the fibers.

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclasses 19+ for fluid treatment of
    cloth for the purpose of fulling the same, and subclasses 81, 92, and 106
    for stretching combined with gaseous (e.g., steam) treatment for heating or
    drying.

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, appropriate subclasses for textile
    product fabrication combined with fluid treatment or for mechanical
    operations of thread finishing combined with fluid treatment.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, for both processes and
    apparatus for drying, including the drying of textiles.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclass 28 for apparatus for cleaning fur.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses for gearing
    for driving a part of a washing machine without claiming the element which
    in itself does the washing.  When the element which does the washing is
    claimed, no matter how broadly, the patents are classified in this class
    (68).

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for coating
    or impregnating textile materials other than the treatments set forth in
    section I of the class definition of Class 68.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, see note (1); this class
    also being the generic class cleaning apparatus and for apparatus for
    contacting solids with liquids for cleaning or other purposes.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 233+ for apparatus
    for digesting fibrous material in order to liberate the individual fibers
    (e.g., in the production of paper pulp).

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 689+ for electrolytic treatment of
    organic fibrous material.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 0.5 for bluing infusion
    packages.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 348+ for filtration,
    especially subclasses 360.1+ for centrifugal extractors, and subclasses
    513+ for gravitational separators.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 119.01+ for clotheslines of the type
    wherein isolated supports are joined by flexible strands on which clothes
    are hung. Other clotheslines, such as single supports with arms supporting
    flexible strands, and rack structures with rigid or flexible clothes
    supporting elements are in other appropriate subclasses of Class 211.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, for containers of general utility.

    220,    Receptacles, for containers of general utility, this class being
    the generic class for receptacle structure (of whatever material made) not
    otherwise provided for.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 23 for patents for cleaning hats.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclass 47.5 for a cordage
    storage device in which an elongated cord is stored on sheaves and
    subclasses 388+ for a reeling device for winding similar material.

    248,    Supports, subclass 27.5 for washboard supports, and appropriate
    subclasses for tub stands and supports.

    252,    Compositions, appropriate subclasses for processes of cleaning
    which are the mere uses of detergents, even though the material so treated
    is specified, and also for detergent compositions.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 8.5 and 23.5
    for clothes tongs and clothes sticks.

    366,    Agitating, for patents for effecting commingling of solids and
    liquids, with irregular motion of the material.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 6+ for clothespin bags.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 67+ for filament or film forming apparatus combined with liquid
    treating apparatus.

    427,    Coating Processes, see note (1).


CLS 68/1
TXT Apparatus for cleaning and conditioning used journal box lubricating waste
    or the like including mechanisms for extracting or separating the used oil
    from the waste, purifying the used oil, cleaning the waste, reconditioning
    the waste and reimpregnating the waste with pure lubricating oil, and
    combinations thereof, not otherwise provided for.


CLS 68/2
TXT Machines for the purpose of destroying a part of the textile material to
    clear the same from the remainder of the textiles by utilizing a fluid, the
    fluid being usually an acid either in the liquid or gaseous form.


CLS 68/3
TXT Textile fluid treating machines not otherwise classifiable below.


CLS 68/4
TXT Textile fluid treating machines with some additive, removable, or
    displaceable part, other than the drive mechanism, and which part may or
    may not be replaced by another part, to alter the function of the machine.

    (1)     Note. The new function may be another mode of fluid textile
    treatment.

    (2)     Note.  For machines in which the textile treating mechanism is
    transferable from one vat to another see this class, subclasses 10 and 11.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 103 for presses convertible to a nonpressing
    function, not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 68/5
TXT Machines of the kind specified in the class definition utilizing fluids
    other than liquids, such as a gas, steam, vapor or mist, for acting
    directly upon the textiles.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 34, Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids,
    for such apparatus not limited to the purposes of Class 68.

    (2)     Note.  See this class, subclass 2 for carbonizing apparatus using
    an acid in gaseous form.

    (3)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 43 and 183, for the use of air to
    cause a turbulence of the liquid.

    (4)     Note.  For machines for steaming formed articles of apparel, see
    Class 223, Apparel Apparatus, subclass 51.

    (5)     Note.  For machines for steaming and working a fabric to shrink the
    same, see Class 26, Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclass 18.5, and
    subclasses 81, 92, and 106, for apparatus combining steaming and stretching
    a running web of textile.

    (6)     Note.  For hand manipulable fluid mixing and spraying devices, see
    Class 239, Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, especially subclasses
    303+, 337+, 398+, and 525+.


CLS 68/6
TXT Machines or devices as defined in subclass 5 wherein there are no moving
    parts save a fluid controlling valve or pump.


CLS 68/7
TXT Machines or devices as defined in subclass 5 wherein there are no moving
    parts save a fluid controlling valve or pump and wherein the device
    includes a cylinder about which the textile is wrapped.


CLS 68/8
TXT Machines for treating textile material with fluids other than liquids while
    it is wrapped on a cylinder.

    (1)     Note.  For other wound packages, see this class, subclasses 189 and
    198.


CLS 68/9
TXT Machines wherein the textile is subjected to successive actions of
    different fluids in different tanks.

    (1)     Note.  For machines wherein the textile is subjected to successive
    immersions in the same tank see this class, subclasses 175+.


CLS 68/10
TXT Machines under subclass 9 in which a textile holder or holders may be moved
    relatively to a series of vats containing different liquids for progressive
    or selective immersion in the liquids.


CLS 68/11
TXT Machines in which there are a plurality of vats, each adapted to contain
    liquid and textiles and in which there is a textile-working device such as
    a squeezer, impeller or drag, which is transferable from one vat to another.


CLS 68/12.01
TXT Single tub and automatic sequential operation mechanism:
    Subject matter under subclass 3 wherein the textile fluid treating machine
    is a single tub controlled by a device which enables sequential treatment
    steps to be performed without intervention by a human being.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    190,    for means to automatically reverse a flow of liquid to effect a
    surging action of the liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, particularly subclasses
    56+, 58, and 95.1 for a process or a means for sequential or automatic
    operation of several steps of fluid treatment or liquid contact with
    nontextile articles.

    137,    Fluid Handling, particularly subclasses 387 and 625 for means for
    operating valves in sequence to feed quantities of fluid to a container, or
    to operate supply or drain valves in a sequence.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 138+ for means to stop
    the drive of a machine with the working element in a predetermined position.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 101 and 222 for means
    for separating a liquid from a solid.


CLS 68/12.02
TXT Sequence control means responsive to a sensed condition:
    Subject matter under subclass 12.01 wherein the control device utilizes
    means to sense a condition or a change in condition to initiate or
    terminate a treatment step.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.21+, for a textile treating apparatus of the single tub and automatic
    sequential operation mechanism-type with a liquid level or a temperature
    responsive control device which regulates liquid flow.


CLS 68/12.03
TXT Temperature of the load:
    Subject matter under subclass 12.02 wherein the condition which is sensed
    is the degree of hotness of the material being treated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.19+, for a temperature responsive control device which regulates liquid
    flow in a textile fluid treating apparatus of the single tub and automatic
    sequential operation mechanism-type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclass for temperature
    measuring, per se.


CLS 68/12.04
TXT Weight of the load:
    Subject matter under subclass 12.02 wherein the condition which is sensed
    is the heaviness of the material being treated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    177,    Weighing Scales, appropriate subclasses for a scale to determine
    the weight of an article or material.


CLS 68/12.05
TXT Liquid level:
    Subject matter under subclass 12.02 wherein the condition which is sensed
    is the height of the treating liquid in the tub.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLAS:

    12.21+, for a liquid level responsive control device which regulates liquid
    flow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 290+ for liquid level measuring,
    per se.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 387 for  liquid level control of the cycle
    of a nontextile cleaning machine.


CLS 68/12.06
TXT Unbalanced load:
    Subject matter under subclass 12.02 wherein the condition which is sensed
    is the center of gravity of the treated textile material in the tub.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 66+ for an apparatus or a process
    for determining the amount or  location of masses or forces  causing
    unbalance in a rotatable body.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 572+ for miscellaneous
    rotor structures including those having balancing means.


CLS 68/12.07
TXT Dyer:
    Subject matter under subclass 12.01 wherein the textile treating machine
    includes features peculiar to coloring the textile material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 400- 696 for a process of or a composition
    for dyeing material of any kind including specific treatment peculiarly
    related to dyeing, such as mordanting, color protecting, etc.


CLS 68/12.08
TXT Dry cleaner:
    Subject matter under subclass 12.01 wherein the textile treating machine
    includes means peculiar to cleansing textile material with a substantially
    nonaqueous or organic solvent (e.g., petroleum naphtha).


CLS 68/12.09
TXT With cooling means:
    Subject matter under subclass 12.08 combined with means for lowering the
    temperature of the textile material or the solvent being used.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclass for cooling means, per se.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclass for a heat exchange system, per
    se.


CLS 68/12.11
TXT Pneumatically actuated:
    Subject matter under subclass 12.01 including means which utilizes positive
    or negative air pressure to activate some part of the machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclass for devices
    for converting energy of a pressurized fluid into work.


CLS 68/12.12
TXT Special cycle specified (e.g., prewash cycle, permanent press cycle,
    etc.):Subject matter under subclass 12.01 wherein an interval of time is
    specified during which a particular treatment of the material takes place.


CLS 68/12.13
TXT With treating liquid filtering or reclaiming means:
    Subject matter under subclass 12.01 combined with means for removing or
    neutralizing undesirable matter or contaminants in the treating fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclass 109 for an
    apparatus having means for separating contaminants from the treating fluids
    in a nontextile fluid treatment or a liquid contact apparatus.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 348+ for filtration,
    per se.


CLS 68/12.14
TXT Dewatering detail:
    Subject matter under subclass 12.01 wherein significance is attributed to a
    means for extracting liquid or moisture from a textile material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate
    subclasses, particularly subclasses 266+, 312+, and 397+ for a process for
    drying material.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 348+ for filtration,
    per se, especially subclasses 360.1+ for gravitational separators.


CLS 68/12.15
TXT With heating means:
    Subject matter under subclass 12.14 combined with means for elevating the
    temperature of the textile material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate
    subclasses, particularly subclasses 266+, 312+, and 397+ for a process for
    drying material.

    110,    Furnaces, appropriate subclass for a solid fuel burner having a
    feature specialized to the burning of such fuel.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, appropriate subclass for an apparatus for
    applying heat which does not use electrical characteristics or structure.

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclass for a miscellaneous process
    or apparatus for application of electrical energy for heating.

    431,    Combustion, appropriate subclass for a gaseous or liquid fuel
    combustion apparatus.


CLS 68/12.16
TXT Motor control circuitry detail:
    Subject matter under subclass 12.01 wherein significance is attributed to a
     circuit arrangement or an element thereof for regulating the operation of
    an electric motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclass for an
    electric motor control circuit, per se.


CLS 68/12.17
TXT Relay:
    Subject matter under subclass 12.16 wherein the circuit includes an
    electromagnetic relay.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 2+ for an electromagnetic relay, per se.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 160 for a
    control circuit for a relay.


CLS 68/12.18
TXT With additive dispensing:
    Subject matter under subclass 12.01 combined with means to introduce an
    additive to the tub.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an additive is a detergent, fabric conditioner
    or bleach which is generally added to the washing liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.07,  for a fluid treating apparatus of the single tub automatic
    seqential operation mechanism-type having a dyer combined with a dispenser.

    13      and 17+, for another fluid treating apparatus for textiles combined
    with dispensing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclass 93 for a liquid
    contact with solid apparatus combined with solid treating agent supplying
    means.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 240 for fluid handling systems combined
    with means to add material to the fluid and subclass 268 for a fluid
    handling system combined with means for holding solid material to be
    dissolved or entrained in the fluid.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for dispensing, per se.


CLS 68/12.19
TXT Liquid handling:
    Subject matter under subclass 12.01 including means to confine, direct or
    control the flow of the treating fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.05,  for the control of the sequential liquid treatment steps in a
    single tub in response to the height of the treating liquid in the tub.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, appropriate subclasses for a mere valved pipe;
    subclasses 59+, 107, 302+, 312+, 427, 562, 570, 577+, and 596 for an
    overflow and drain of general utility; subclass 268 for a fluid handling
    system including means for holding solid material which is to be dissolved
    or entrained in fluid; appropriate subclass for means to valve soap to the
    machine; and subclass 387 for a liquid level responsive or maintaining
    system for controlling the operation of a washing machine.


CLS 68/12.21
TXT Level or temperature responsive:
    Subject matter under subclass 12.19 including means responsive to the
    height of or the hotness of the treating liquid for controlling the flow of
    the treating liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.02+  for a liquid level or temperature responsive control device which
    initiates or terminates a textile liquid treatment step.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 240 for addition of separate material in
    an additional cleaning system, subclass 268 for the addition of nonfluid
    material to a flow system, subclasses 331+ for cyclic or program type
    actuation of valves and subclass 387 for fluid level control of a machine
    for treating nontextile-type material.


CLS 68/12.22
TXT With temperature modification:
    Subject matter under subclass 12.21 combined with means for elevating or
    lowering the temperature of the treating liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 245+ for an
    apparatus for applying electrical or radiant energy to work and subclasses
    266+ for a process involving applying electrical or radiant energy to work.

    110,    Furnaces, appropriate subclass for a solid fuel burner having a
    feature specialized to the burning of such fuel.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, appropriate subclasses for a nonelectrical
    apparatus for applying heat.

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclass for a miscellaneous process
    or apparatus for application of electrical energy for heating.

    431,    Combustion, appropriate subclass for a gaseous or liquid fuel
    combustion apparatus.


CLS 68/12.23
TXT Sequence controller detail:
    Subject matter under subclass 12.01 wherein significance is attributed to
    the means controlling the sequential  treatment steps of the textile
    treating machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, particularly subclasses 341+ for
    independently operated timer, delay, pattern or cyclic control.


CLS 68/12.24
TXT Clutch detail or transmission detail:
    Subject matter under subclass 12.01  including means to selectively connect
    the driving and the driven parts of the machine (i.e., clutch) or an
    assembly of mechanical power transmitting elements, (i.e., tranmission) and
    significance is attributed to the clutch or transmission.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses for power
    transmitting elements, per se.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 30+ for a clutch, per
    se.


CLS 68/12.25
TXT With delay detail:
    Subject matter under subclass 12.24 wherein particular significance is
    attributed to a means for temporarily stopping, detaining or hindering some
    part of the clutch or transmission.


CLS 68/12.26
TXT Door safety latch detail:
    Subject matter under subclass 12.01 wherein significance is attributed to a
    means for securing the door of the machine in a closed position during
    liquid treatment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, appropriate subclasses for a lock, per se.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 315+ for a closure of general utility
    combined with a fastening device.

     292,   Closure Fasteners, appropriate subclasses for a fastener, per se.


CLS 68/12.27
TXT Indicator or sensor detail:
    Subject matter under subclass 12.01 wherein significance is attributed to
    either (1) a means for mechanically or electrically giving a humanly
    preceptible signal or (2) a means which responds to a physical stimulus and
    transmits a resulting impulse.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 866.5 fora sensor, per se.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclasses for nonelectrical
    means for giving a humanly preceptible signal, per se.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, appropriate subclasses for electric
    means for giving a humanly perceptible indication or signal.


CLS 68/13
TXT Machines of this class combined with other means in which or by which
    similar or other functions may be performed.

    (1)     Note.  For convertible washing machines, see this class, subclass 4.

    (2)     Note.  For multiple washing machines, see this class, subclass 27.


CLS 68/14
TXT Machines with scrub boards wherein the scrub board may be utilized
    independently of the remainder of the machine.

    (1)     Note.  For machines wherein textiles are subjected to a scrubbing
    action simultaneously with some other cleansing or like treatment, see this
    class, subclasses 28+.


CLS 68/15
TXT Machines combined with means for applying heat to the tub to heat the
    liquid therein or for applying heat to liquid within the tub.

    (1)     Note.  Liquid heaters are placed in other classes, mainly Classes
    122, Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, and 126, Stoves and Furnaces, when no
    significant structure for fluid treatment of textiles is claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147+,   for machines provided with heating means in a fluid circulatory
    system, particularly subclasses 191+ where the flow of liquid or pumping
    action is induced by heat.

    207,    for devices for preheating the fluid while feeding the same to a
    washing machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, (see (1) Note).

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 344+ (see (1) Note).


CLS 68/16
TXT Machines under subclass 15 of the tumbler type combined with means for
    applying heat to the tub to heat the liquid therein or for applying heat to
    liquid within the tub.


CLS 68/17
TXT Machines combined with means to supply soap or a concentrated soap solution
    to the tub.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 71+ for presses not elsewhere provided for,
    having means to add materials to each other.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclass 93 for apparatus
    there provided for combined with solid treating agent supplying means.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 268 for fluid handling systems including
    means for holding solid material to be dissolved or entrained in the fluid,
    and appropriate subclass for means to valve soap to the machine.

    222,    Dispensing, for means to meter quantities of soap or soap solutions
    and to dispense the same.


CLS 68/18
TXT Machines combined with means to reclaim and reuse a solvent.

    (1)     Note.  The combined means is usually in a fluid circulating system
    including the machine and is a filter, centrifuge, still, dirt coagulator,
    or the like.

    (2)     Note.  See this class, subclass 1.

    (3)     Note.  See also Class 196, Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclasses 46+
    for apparatus for purifying used oils, and Class 208, Mineral Oils:
    Processes and Products, subclass 179 for processes of purifying used oils.

    (4)     Note.  See also Class 202, Distillation:  Apparatus, for
    distillation apparatus, in general.

    (5)     Note.  See also Class 34, Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With
    Solids, subclasses 72+, and Class 55, Gas Separation.

    (6)     Note.  See also Class 203, Distillation:  Processes, Separatory,
    appropriate subclasses, for distillation processes in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 90+ for presses not elsewhere provided for,
    combined with means for separating various materials from one another.


CLS 68/19
TXT Machine under subclass 13 comprising means for removing liquid from the
    textile.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, for the liquid
    removing subcombination, and see the notes to that class.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 104+ for a press not elsewhere provided for,
    having drain means for liquid expressed from the material by the expressing
    operation.


CLS 68/19.1
TXT Machine under subclass 19 having two or more liquid removal means of
    different kinds.


CLS 68/19.2
TXT Machine under subclass 19.1 wherein the liquid removal means includes (1)
    means for rotating the textile rapidly about an axis to effect outward
    radial movement of the liquid therefrom while restraining the textile
    against such movement, and (2) means for supplying a gaseous medium to the
    textile.

    (1)     Note.  The gaseous medium may be heated before or during contact
    with the textile.


CLS 68/20
TXT Machines combined with means to facilitate drying of the textiles by means
    of the passage of a gaseous medium through the textiles or by withdrawing
    vapor from the textiles.

    (1)     Note.  For oxidizing machines to oxidize or age dyes in textiles,
    see this class, subclasses 5+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 92+ for presses not elsewhere provided for
    combined with means for heating, cooling or drying the material pressed.


CLS 68/21
TXT Machines combined with squeezing means to extract liquid from the textiles
    subsequent to the liquid treatment.


CLS 68/22
TXT Machines combined with squeezing means of the roller type to extract liquid
    from textiles subsequent to the liquid treatment.

    (1)     Note.  For a textile fluid treating machine convertible into a
    wringing machine see this class, subclass 4.

    (2)     Note.  For textile fluid treating machines combined with wringer
    supports, see this class, subclass 13.

    (3)     Note.  For tubs combined with wringer supports, see this class,
    subclass 234.

    (4)     Note.  For wringers, per se, see this class, subclasses 241+.

    (5)     Note.  For tubs combined with wringers, see this class, subclass
    245.

    (6)     Note.  For gearing for driving a combined washer and wringer, see
    Class 74, Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 17.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 155+ for roller- type concurrent pressing and
    conveying presses not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 68/23
TXT Machine under subclass 19 wherein the liquid removal means includes means
    for rotating the textile rapidly about an axis to effect outward radial
    movement of the liquid therefrom, while restraining the textile against
    such movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 360.1+ for a
    centrifugal extractor of that class.

    494,    Imperforate Bowl:  Centrifugal Separators, appropriate subclasses
    for apparatus for breaking up a mixture of fluids or fluent substances into
    two or more components by centrifuging within a generally solid-walled,
    receptacle-like member.  If utilized for treating textiles, however, an
    imperforate bowl, centrifugal extractor, per se, is not in Class 494, but,
    rather, is in this class (68), inasmuch as the treating of textiles is not
    within the scope of that class (494), if on the other hand, the centrifugal
    extractor is perforate in nature, it may be proper for Class 210, noted
    above.


CLS 68/23.1
TXT Machine under subclass 23 wherein the centrifuge is provided with means
    effective to either (1) reduce or eliminate vibratory forces caused by an
    unbalanced condition of a textile load within the centrifuge, or (2) reduce
    the conduction of such forces to any structure supporting the centrifuge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 144 for vibration or
    unbalance responsive control means for a similar centrifuge extractor, and
    see the notes to that subclass.


CLS 68/23.2
TXT Machine under subclass 23.1 including means for applying forces to the
    centrifuge, during its rotation, to position the center of gravity of the
    centrifuge and its load on the geometric axis of rotation.


CLS 68/23.3
TXT Machine under subclass 23.1 wherein the axis of rotation of the centrifuge
    is vertical.


CLS 68/23.4
TXT Machine under subclass 23 including means for regulating fluid flow either
    to or from the centrifuge, in addition to the basic extraction, which means
    operates in response to the direction or speed of rotation of the
    centrifuge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207     and 208, for a textile treating machine, per se, provided with
    fluid handling means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 145+ for rotation
    responsive control means for a similar centrifugal extractor.


CLS 68/23.5
TXT Machine under subclass 23 including means to deliver a fluid to the
    centrifuge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181+,   for a textile treating machine, per se, provided with means for
    supplying fluid to a fixed receptacle, and see notes to that subclass.


CLS 68/23.6
TXT Machine under subclass 23 including an impeller movable within and relative
    to the centrifuge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131+,   for a machine of this class having similar impulsing means, and see
    the notes to that subclass.


CLS 68/23.7
TXT Machine under subclass 23.6 wherein the impeller moves accurately to and
    fro.


CLS 68/24
TXT Machine under subclass 23 wherein both the liquid treatment of the textile
    and the centrifugal extraction are effected by means including a generally
    cylindrical receptacle mounted for rotation about a horizontal or
    nonvertical axis.


CLS 68/25
TXT Machines of the type set forth in subclass 23 wherein the liquid treatment
    is effected on an axis other than vertical while the centrifuging is done
    on a vertical axis. Generally the receptacle or the whole machine is tilted
    from an inclined or horizontal axis to a vertical axis, but the subclass
    also includes means whereby the material-containing receptacle may be
    rotated on two axes without shifting the axis of the receptacle.


CLS 68/26
TXT Machines of the type set forth in subclass 23 wherein the liquid treatment
    of a textile is effected in one receptacle and the centrifuging is effected
    in another receptacle to which the textile has been transferred.


CLS 68/27
TXT Multiple connected textile liquid treatment machines; also single
    receptacles provided with partition walls nonmovable with respect to the
    receptacles to maintain batches of textiles being treated separated from
    one another, with means in each compartment movable with respect to the
    textiles in that compartment to effect an operation on the textiles; also
    machines provided with a movable textile-engaging element, the exterior
    surface of which forms part of a liquid treatment means for operation upon
    one batch of articles and having within the element a receptacle wherein a
    second batch of textiles may be treated.

    (1)     Note.  The compartments may or may not have fluid communication
    with each other and the means for effecting the treatment may be a tumbling
    cylinder in a compartment, or one or both machines may be of the liquid
    flow-type.

    (2)     Note.  Where a textile-engaging element is transferred from one tub
    to another, see subclass 11, of this class.

    (3)     Note.  Compartmented tumbling cylinders, will be found in this
    class, subclasses 143 and 145.


CLS 68/28
TXT Machines with means to effect liquid treat- ment of textiles by a
    combination of opera- tions, not specifically provided for below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 102 for presses combined with other features, and
    not elsewhere provided for.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 427 for immersion coating devices
    having opposed relatively movable means acting on the immersed work.


CLS 68/29
TXT Wherein squeezing and scrubbing of textile materials is effected by one or
    more elements freely movable in the liquid within a receptacle, there being
    still another mode of textile liquid treatment provided.

    (1)     Note.  The "another mode of textile liquid treatment" may be of the
    liquid flow-types as where a tub is moved bodily to cause the textiles and
    liquid in the tub to move relative to one another, or as where the textiles
    are fastened to a carrier to be moved thereby through the liquid.

    (2)     Note.  For other free elements see this class, subclass 30.


CLS 68/30
TXT Machines wherein there is a tumbler and means within the tumbler to effect
    both a scrubbing and squeezing action on textiles within the tumbler.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the independent devices are loose corrugated or
    smooth weights or they are flails pivoted to the tumbler and provided with
    corrugated surfaces.


CLS 68/31
TXT Machines with means to effect treatment of textiles solely by scrubbing and
    squeezing the same.

    (1)     Note.  Sets of movable elements to effect scrubbing and squeezing
    of textiles are included in this subclass.


CLS 68/32
TXT Machines of the type set forth in subclass 31 wherein the treatment is
    effected by a squeezing action between a roll and another element,
    generally another roll, and in which either the roll or the other element
    reciprocates longitudinally of the roll axis to effect a scrubbing action.


CLS 68/33
TXT Machines to squeeze and scrub textiles wherein there are at least two
    cooperating elements and both of which are positively moved to effect the
    treatment.

    (1)     Note.  Structures wherein one of the elements is merely resiliently
    supported are excluded from this class.

    (2)     Note.  One of the elements may be a scrub board movable beneath or
    above the textiles to scrub the same and the other may be a roller or
    rollers movable along the scrub board to squeeze the opposite face of the
    textiles.  One of the elements may have a combined squeezing and scrubbing
    action.


CLS 68/34
TXT Machines to squeeze and scrub textiles wherein there are at least two
    cooperating elements, both of which are movable to effect the treatment and
    wherein one of the movable elements moves with the tub.


CLS 68/35
TXT Machines to squeeze and scrub textiles wherein there are at least two
    cooperating elements, one of which is movable to effect the two operations.

    (1)     Note.  Usually one of the elements has a compound motion to effect
    the two operations and one of the other elements has a scrubbing surface.


CLS 68/36
TXT Machines of the character set forth in subclass 35 wherein the movable
    element has a pivotable motion only.

    (1)     Note.  The two actions are usually a scrubbing action between a
    corrugated face on the swinging element and a cooperating corrugated face
    in the tub, and a squeezing action between the same swinging element and
    some faces in the tub which serve as abutments for textiles in the tub.
    Another mode of accomplishing the two actions is by causing a swinging
    member having both rollers and a corrugated face to sweep across a
    corrugated bed.  Still another mode is by having the pivotally mounted
    member force a cooperating scrub member to swing about a pivot eccentric to
    the pivot of the first member.


CLS 68/37
TXT Machines of the character set forth in subclass 35 wherein the movable
    member has a rectilinear motion only.


CLS 68/38
TXT Machines provided with means to scrub a textile combined with means to
    effect relative motion between the textile and the liquid.

    (1)     Note.  The scrubbers may be widely separated elements in a
    receptacle and the textiles may be freely movable in an oscillatory or
    rectilinearly reciprocable receptacle.

    (2)     Note.  The motion of the liquid must be caused by something other
    than the movement of the scrubber itself.

    (3)     Note.  Structures wherein the scrubber is on the walls of a
    reciprocatory, oscillating or rotary receptacle are excluded from this
    subclass and will be found in the tumbler and liquid flow subclasses of
    this class.

    (4)     Note.  Machines for scrubbing a floor or a rug on the floor with
    the use of fluids are in Class 15, Brushing, Scrubbing, and General
    Cleaning, subclass 40.


CLS 68/39
TXT Combined scrubber and liquid flow machines provided with a bed and an
    endless apron carrying the textiles beneath a liquid wherein the scrubbing
    action takes place between these elements by reason of their relative
    motion with respect to one another.

    (1)     Note.  The bed may be a platen or a plurality of rollers.


CLS 68/40
TXT Machines as defined in subclass 39 wherein the scrubber has a reciprocating
    motion longitudinally of the apron.


CLS 68/41
TXT Combined scrubbing and liquid flow wherein a movable scrubbing element
    pivoted on a horizontal axis has means to clamp the textile thereto to
    carry the textile beneath the liquid and against the cooperating scrubbing
    element.


CLS 68/42
TXT Combined scrubbers and liquid flow machines of the roll and platen type
    wherein the roll has means to facilitate the wrapping thereabout or
    otherwise carrying of the textile to be treated.


CLS 68/43
TXT Machines provided with means to squeeze a textile, combined with means to
    effect relative motion between the textile and a liquid.

    (1)     Note.  Liquid flow or turbulence may be generated by forcing air
    through the liquid.

    (2)     Note.  The means to effect a movement of the textile may be an
    oscillation of the tub.

    (3)     Note.  The motion of the liquid must be created by means other than
    the mere movement of the squeezer itself.

    (4)     Note.  For squeezers, per se, with built-in air pumps see this
    class, subclass 130; and for the similar squeezer implement, see subclass
    217.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 73+ for presses having means to treat the
    material with liquid or steam, and not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 68/44
TXT Squeezing machines in which the squeezing of the textile is effected by the
    coaction of a plurality of endless belts carrying the textile in or beneath
    a liquid and a squeezer.

    (1)     Note.  Generally a pair of belts is employed between which the
    textile is placed, and the whole is passed between rolls or beneath a
    pounder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 151+ for endless conveyor type presses, not
    elsewhere provided for, of the concurrent pressing and conveying-type.


CLS 68/45
TXT Combined squeezing and liquid flow machines in which the squeezing of the
    textile is effected between an endless belt carrying the textile in or
    beneath a liquid and a squeezer.

    (1)     Note.  Generally the machine comprises an apron on which the
    textile is placed, which apron passes beneath the surface of a liquid and a
    roller or bank of rollers or the machine comprises a belt to which the
    textile is secured and which is dragged by the belt through the liquid and
    a pair of cooperating squeezers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 153 for endless conveyor type concurrent pressing
    and conveying presses, not elsewhere provided for, in which a roll co-acts
    with the endless conveyor to effect the pressing operation.


CLS 68/46
TXT Combined squeezing and liquid flow machines in which there is a roll about
    which the textile is wrapped and which carries the textile through the
    liquid and beneath another roll.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 76+ for presses not elsewhere provided for
    which, additionally, treat the material by winding or folding a sheet, web
    or strand.


CLS 68/47
TXT Combined squeezing and liquid flow machines wherein there is a roll about
    which a textile is wrapped and which carries the textile through the liquid
    and beneath a roller bed.


CLS 68/48
TXT Machines of the squeezing and liquid flow-type wherein the tub, cage or
    tray itself moves.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 111 for machines where there is a
    displacement of the tub merely to position a new portion of the batch of
    textiles beneath the squeezer.


CLS 68/49
TXT Machines of the type set forth in subclass 48 wherein the squeezing is
    effected by means of a free moving weight which shifts back and forth in a
    predetermined path in the tub as the tub oscillates or reciprocates.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 121 for similar devices where a
    squeezer moves rectilinearly back and forth but in which the tub does not
    move.


CLS 68/50
TXT Machines of the type set forth in subclass 48 wherein the squeezing and
    liquid flow are effected, at least in part, by the vertical movement of a
    tub, a tray or a cage.


CLS 68/51
TXT Machines of the type set forth in subclass 43 wherein pumping means of the
    mechanical- type is employed to effect flow of liquid in a definite
    direction or directions through the textiles being treated.

    (1)     Note.  The pump may be incorporated with the squeezer element (as a
    valved pounder), or be a pump structure operating coordinately with the
    movements of the squeezer element or be a pump driven by a separate motor
    means; and the pump may be of the valved type to produce a flow of liquid
    in one direction only or of the surge-type to produce currents in
    alternately  opposite directions.  Pounders, however are not regarded as
    pumps unless they are valved or operate in pump cylinders.


CLS 68/52
TXT Machines provided with means to squeeze a textile combined with means to
    drag the textile through the liquid.


CLS 68/53
TXT Machines provided with means to impel a textile through a liquid combined
    with means other than vanes on the receptacle to effect a flow of liquid
    through the textile.

    (1)     Note.  The said other means may be either a liquid pump or a gas
    pump to pump air through the liquid in the tub and through the textile.


CLS 68/54
TXT Machines provided with means to impel a textile through a liquid combined
    with means to scrub the textile.

    (1)     Note.  The scrubbing means may be a corrugated surface on the
    impeller or on the inner wall of the tub, or it may be an element movable
    independently of the impeller.


CLS 68/55
TXT Machines provided with means to drag a textile through the liquid combined
    with other means to effect a flow of liquid through the textile.


CLS 68/56
TXT Machines provided with means to drag a textile through a liquid combined
    with means to effect a scrubbing of textile.


CLS 68/57
TXT Machines as set forth in subclass 56 wherein the drag means is mounted to
    rotate or oscillate on a vertical axis.


CLS 68/58
TXT Machines provided with tumblers and with means to effect a flow of liquid
    through the tumbler either by moving the tumbler bodily through the liquid
    or by passing a liquid through the tumbler by means other than elements
    rigidly or pivotally attached to the tumbler.


CLS 68/59
TXT Machines of the type set forth in subclass 58 wherein the liquid flow is
    effected by means of heat applied to the tub and a resultant mixture of
    steam and hot liquid is forced through nozzles into the tub or tumbler.


CLS 68/60
TXT Machines wherein there is a tumbler for textiles and there is either a
    nonmovable device within the tumbler, or a device mounted for movement
    independently of the tumbler, for scrubbing the textiles.

    (1)     Note.  The scrubbing device is usually a rotatable drum or a scrub
    board hung loosely on a shaft within the tumbler. Where the scrub elements
    are mounted for movement with the tumbler, see this class, subclass 139,
    and indented subclasses.


CLS 68/61
TXT Machines where there is a tumbler and a device within the tumbler for
    effecting a squeezing action on textiles within the tumbler.


CLS 68/62
TXT Machines wherein there is a means for immersing the textile in a vat and a
    means for applying liquid to the textile by means of an applicator.


CLS 68/63
TXT Machines provided with scrubbers only and not otherwise classifiable below.

    (1)     Note.  See definition of scrubbing in main class definition of this
    class.

    (2)     Note.  A machine with a scrubber above a fixed roller bed, or with
    a fixed roller cooperating with a fixed corrugated bed, or with a roller
    and bed which move so as to create a sliding action there-between, or with
    brushes whether or not the brushes be on rollers, is a scrubber.  A machine
    with a fixed axis roller cooperating with a fixed roller bed, or with a
    roller traversing a corrugated bed, or with a corrugated bed transversing a
    fixed axis roller, is a squeezer.  A machine with a scrubber and a
    reciprocable roller bed is a combined scrubber and squeezer.  A machine
    with a roller pressing the textile against an endless carrier apron or belt
    or between carrier belts is a combined squeezer and liquid flow device.


CLS 68/64
TXT Machines provided with scrubbing elements between which a textile is
    scrubbed and at least one of which has a motion of reciprocation.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this group are sets of cooperating plate
    scrubbers which scrubbers may rotate in horizontal or vertical planes.


CLS 68/65
TXT Scrubbers of the type set forth in subclass 64 wherein one of the elements
    is a roll and another is a bed reciprocable about the roll periphery.


CLS 68/66
TXT Machines under subclass 64 provided with scrubbing elements between which a
    textile is scrubbed wherein both cooperating elements move to effect the
    scrubbing operation and at least one of them has a motion of reciprocation.


CLS 68/67
TXT Scrubbers of the type set forth in subclass 66 wherein both cooperating
    elements are pivotally mounted on a horizontal axis.

    (1)     Note.  Generally the elements are each a scrubber arcuate in form
    and oscillating in opposite directions, the opposed faces of the elements
    being corrugated.  One of the scrubbers may oscillate with the tub.  In all
    instances, the scrubbers are so close together as not to permit of swishing
    of the textiles through the liquid.


CLS 68/68
TXT Machines of the type set forth in subclass 66 wherein both cooperating
    elements are vertical and are pivotally mounted on a horizontal axis or
    horizontal axes.

    (1)     Note.  The scrub elements are usually parallel plates.


CLS 68/69
TXT Machines of the type set forth in subclass 67 wherein both the tub and
    scrubbing bed move together.

    (1)     Note.  Machines of this type have the work elements too close
    together to consider them as belonging to the liquid flow class.


CLS 68/70
TXT Machines provided with cooperating scrubbers both of which are oscillatable
    about a vertical axis.


CLS 68/71
TXT Machines of the type set forth in subclass 70 wherein one of the scrubbers
    is fixed to and moves with the tub.

    (1)     Note.  See note to subclass 69 of this class.


CLS 68/72
TXT Machines with cooperating scrubbers both of which are movable rectilinearly.


CLS 68/73
TXT Machines with cooperating scrubbers both of which are movable rectilinearly
    with the scrubbers lying in a vertical plane.

    (1)     Note.  The scrubbers may move in any direction parallel to the
    planes of the scrubbers.


CLS 68/74
TXT Machines provided with cooperating scrubbers only one of which is movable,
    that element being other than the bed.


CLS 68/75
TXT Machines wherein the movable scrubber is pivoted on a horizontal axis.

    (1)     Note.  The bed with which the scrubber cooperates may comprise a
    series of rollers, but the scrubber must comprise elements fixed to the
    moving element.


CLS 68/76
TXT Machines as in subclass 75 wherein the scrubber is a plate oscillatable in
    a vertical plane and mounted perpendicularly to the horizontal axis.


CLS 68/77
TXT Machines wherein there are a plurality of movable scrubbers mounted on one
    or more horizontal axes.


CLS 68/78
TXT Machines in which there are a plurality of scrubbers or fingers mounted on
    parallel horizontal axes cooperating with a single or plural number of beds.

    (1)     Note.  The multiplicity of fingers distinguishes the machine as a
    scrubber rather than as a drag.


CLS 68/79
TXT Machines provided with cooperating scrubbing elements, only one of which is
    movable, the movement being about a vertical axis.


CLS 68/80
TXT Machines as set forth in subclass 79 wherein the scrubbing face of the
    movable element is directed downwardly.


CLS 68/81
TXT Machines provided with cooperating scrubbing elements, only one of which is
    movable, the movement being one of reciprocation in a rectilinear direction.


CLS 68/82
TXT Machines provided with cooperating scrubbers, only the bed being movable.


CLS 68/83
TXT Machines as in subclass 82 wherein the bed oscillates on vertical axis.


CLS 68/84
TXT Scrubbers involving a scrubbing element which is rotated.

    (1)     Note.  A scrubber is regarded as having an oscillatory motion
    rather than a rotary motion when the construction is such as to inhibit
    rotation of the scrubber through more than 360o, or the construction is
    such as to make it awkward to manipulate the scrubber through an angle of
    more than 360o.


CLS 68/85
TXT Scrubbers of the rotary-type wherein one element is a brush roller and the
    other is a roller which may or may not be a brush between which the textile
    passes.


CLS 68/86
TXT Scrubbers of the rotary-type wherein one element is a roll and the other is
    a platen.

    (1)     Note.  The platen may be plane or concaved and may or may not be
    corrugated.

    (2)     Note.  If the cooperating element with which the roll coacts
    comprises a roller or series of rollers, rotating or free to rotate at the
    same peripheral speed as the roll, see the squeezer subclasses of this
    class.


CLS 68/87
TXT Scrubbers of the type set forth in subclass 86 wherein either the roll or
    platen is a brush or both elements include brushes.


CLS 68/88
TXT Scrubbers of the roll and platen-type wherein the platen is resiliently
    mounted.


CLS 68/89
TXT Rotary scrubbers wherein a scrub element is mounted to rotate on a vertical
    axis.


CLS 68/90
TXT Rotary scrubbers wherein a scrub element is mounted to rotate on a
    horizontal axis.


CLS 68/91
TXT Machines wherein there is a pair of fixed cooperating scrub elements with a
    carrier element therebetween, said carrier element having textiles draped
    thereabout or clamped thereto, and by means of which the textiles are
    transported between the scrub elements.


CLS 68/92
TXT Scrubber structure, per se.


CLS 68/93
TXT The scrubber bed or scrubber cage, per se, with which the scrubber
    cooperates.


CLS 68/94
TXT Machines in which a textile is squeezed while subjected to a liquid.

    (1)     Note.  See definition of squeezing in main class definition of this
    class.

    (2)     Note.  For the distinction between a squeezer and a scrubber, see
    the notes following the definition of subclass 63.

    (3)     Note.  A machine wherein a squeezer cooperates with an endless belt
    carrying the textile in or beneath a liquid is a combined squeezer and
    liquid flow device.

    (4)     Note.  A beater or device having a flail action is regarded as a
    squeezer.

    (5)     Note.  For agitating devices for purposes other than washing, see
    appropriate subclasses in Class 366, Agitating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 75 for presses, not elsewhere provided for,
    including means for adding liquid or steam interstaged between presses.


CLS 68/95
TXT Squeezing machines in which a nonmovable apron or flexible cover rests on
    the textiles and pressure is effected by squeezing on the apron or cover.


CLS 68/96
TXT Squeezers wherein a receptacle is deformable to effect a squeezing action
    on the textiles.

    (1)     Note.  For receptacles with a perforate bottom movable to effect a
    displacement of the entire body of textiles, see this class, subclass 147.

    (2)     Note.  For similar machines to express liquids from textiles, see
    this class, subclass 242.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 211 for presses not elsewhere provided for having
    a flexible or spring pressure surface.


CLS 68/97
TXT Squeezing machines embodying a roll which rolls over a textile, or
    squeezing machines wherein the textiles are carried by said roll into and
    between the roll and a cooperating squeezing element.

    (1)     Note.  For distinction between a squeezer and a scrubber, see the
    second note under subclass 63 of this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 155+ for roller type presses of the concurrent
    conveying and pressing type not elsewhere provided for.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a wringing or squeezing roll, per se, not
    elsewhere provided for, and see         the notes thereunder.


CLS 68/98
TXT Machines wherein a roll or drum has a planetary motion by reason of which a
    textile is squeezed between the roll or drum and a cooperating surface.

    (1)     Note.  The roll or drum may be mounted eccentrically on a vertical
    axis and roll over the textiles which are positioned between it and the
    wall of the receptacle or the roll or drum may rotate about an axis itself
    rotating in an orbital path about a parallel axis outside of the roll or
    drum.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 157 for roller-type concurrent and conveying
    presses having external and internal rolls and not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 68/99
TXT Squeezing machines wherein the squeezing action is effected by passing the
    textiles between a pair of rolls.

    (1)     Note.  For wringers of the roller-type, see this class, subclasses
    244+.


CLS 68/100
TXT Squeezing machines wherein the squeezing action is effected between a roll
    and a bed made up of rollers.


CLS 68/101
TXT Squeezing machines of the type set forth in subclass 100 wherein the bed of
    the machine is resiliently mounted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 169+ for concurrent pressing and conveying
    presses of the roll-type having yieldable roll adjustment, not elsewhere
    provided for.


CLS 68/102
TXT Squeezing machines of the roll-type wherein the roll translates
    rectilinearly and cooperates with a bed.

    (1)     Note. The bed as well as the cooperating roll or rolls may have a
    motion of translation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 210 for roll and platen presses not elsewhere
    provided for.


CLS 68/103
TXT Machines of the type set forth in subclass 102 wherein the bed is fixed and
    the roll or rolls reciprocate rectilinearly over the bed.


CLS 68/104
TXT Squeezing machines of the roll-type wherein the bed is fixed and there is
    but a single roll which reciprocates rectilinearly over the bed.


CLS 68/105
TXT Squeezing machines of the roll-type wherein the roll rotates on a fixed
    axis and the bed is translated rectilinearly or oscillatable about an axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 156 for roller-type concurrent, conveying and
    pressing presses, not elsewhere provided for, in which the roll coacts with
    a nonrotary press surface.


CLS 68/106
TXT Squeezing machines of the roll-type wherein rollers are mounted on the end
    of a pivoted arm to roll over a bed.


CLS 68/107
TXT Squeezing machines of the roll-type wherein a single roll is mounted on the
    end of a pivoted arm to roll over a bed.


CLS 68/108
TXT Squeezing machines provided with a roll or wheel and a bed mounted to
    rotate on a vertical axis, in which the roll or wheel axis is radial or
    substantially so to the vertical axis, with the roll or wheel located
    wholly to one side of the vertical axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 158 for presses of the concurrent pressing and
    conveying- type in which rolls are mounted on intersecting or inclined
    axes, not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 68/109
TXT Machines as set forth in subclass 108 in which the bed is nonrotatable and
    the wheel or roll sweeps over the bed in an orbital path.


CLS 68/110
TXT Squeezing machines not provided for above wherein both the squeezer and bed
    move, and between which the textile is positioned to be treated.


CLS 68/111
TXT Squeezing machines wherein there is a tub which is displaceable about a
    vertical axis to position successive portions of a batch of textiles
    beneath a vertically reciprocable squeezer.

    (1)     Note.  For squeezers in combination with means for moving
    receptacle to create a liquid flow within the receptacle, see this class,
    subclass 48.  In subclass 111 the receptacle is generally moved
    intermittently or through a small angle for each operation of the squeezer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 223 for reciprocating platen presses, not
    elsewhere provided for, having plural or indexing material supports or
    receptacles mounted for rotation.


CLS 68/112
TXT Squeezers provided with a pair of elements both of which are movable toward
    and from each other to effect the squeezing of the textiles.

    (1)     Note.  The elements may be pivoted to swing toward each other or
    may move in rectilinear paths.Where a bed, tray or cage moves broadside to
    the liquid, where there is also a squeezing action, see this class,
    subclasses 48+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 264 for reciprocating platen presses, not
    elsewhere provided for, in which there are opposed platens both of which
    are actuated.


CLS 68/113
TXT Squeezing machines in which the squeezer element only of a pair of members,
    between which pressure is effected, is moved.

    (1)     Note.  This group includes machines wherein an upper element only
    moves. Where only the lower element or bed moves, see this class, subclass
    94.

    (2)     Note.For similar devices used in churns and other mechanisms, see
    Class 366, Agitating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 214+ for reciprocating platen presses not
    elsewhere provided for.


CLS 68/114
TXT Machines of the type set forth in subclass 113 wherein the squeezer rocks
    over the bed.


CLS 68/115
TXT Machines of the type set forth in subclass 113 wherein a plurality of
    squeezers are mounted on a horizontal axis or horizontal axes and they
    cooperate with a wall of the tub.


CLS 68/116
TXT Machines of the type set forth in subclass 113 wherein a plurality of
    squeezers mounted on a horizontal axis or axes are provided with opposed
    squeezing faces cooperating with two opposite walls of the tub.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 209 for plural presses of the same type which are
    concurrently actuated and which alternately compress, not elsewhere
    provided for.


CLS 68/117
TXT Machines of the type set forth in subclass 113 wherein a single squeezer is
    mounted on a horizontal axis and cooperates with a bed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 233+ for reciprocating platen presses of the
    oscillatory or hinged platen-type, not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 68/118
TXT Machines of the type set forth in subclass 113 wherein a single squeezer
    mounted on a horizontal axis is provided with opposed squeezer faces and
    cooperates with opposed beds.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 209 for plural presses of the same type which are
    concurrently actuated and which alternately compress, not elsewhere
    provided for.


CLS 68/119
TXT Machines of the type set forth in subclass 113 wherein a single squeezer
    mounted on a horizontal axis comprises a plate which is generally
    horizontal in its squeezing position and is pivoted either along one edge
    of the plate or by arms which are pivoted on an axis in the plane of the
    plate.


CLS 68/120
TXT Squeezing machines of the type set forth in subclass 113 in which the
    squeezer has a substantially rectilinear motion.


CLS 68/121
TXT Squeezing machines with a squeezer having a substantially rectilinear
    motion, the squeezer being provided with opposed squeezer faces cooperating
    with opposed beds or walls of a tub.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 209 for plural presses of the same type which are
    concurrently actuated and which alternately compress, and not elsewhere
    provided for.


CLS 68/122
TXT Squeezing machines of the type set forth in subclass 113 in which the
    squeezer has a substantially rectilinear vertical motion.


CLS 68/123
TXT Squeezing machines of the type set forth in subclass 113 in which the
    squeezer has a substantially rectilinear vertical motion and in which the
    squeezer is displaced, or in which means are provided to facilitate
    displacement of the squeezer, while out of pressure engagement with the
    textiles, to cause the succeeding squeezing actions to be at different
    positions in the tub.

    (1)     Note.  The squeezer may be rotated slightly or laterally displaced.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 221+ for reciprocating platen presses, not
    elsewhere provided for, having plural or indexing material supports or
    receptacles.


CLS 68/124
TXT Squeezing machines in which the squeezers are of the vertically
    rectilinearly reciprocating type and in which there are a plurality of
    squeezers acting successively on a batch of textiles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 237 for reciprocating platen presses, not
    elsewhere provided for, in which there are plural movable platens moving
    parallel to one another and opposed to a single platen or box.


CLS 68/125
TXT Means for squeezing machines adjacent to, on, or in a tub.


CLS 68/126
TXT Mounting means as set forth in subclass 125 for squeezing machines of the
    roller-type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclass 194 for roll
    support, per se.


CLS 68/128
TXT Means for stripping textiles from squeeze rolls to prevent the winding
    thereabout of the textiles.

    (1)     Note.  For strippers for use with wringer rolls, see this class,
    subclass 270.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 174 for concurrent pressing and conveying presses
    of the roll-type not elsewhere provided for, and having means to strip the
    material from the rolls.


CLS 68/129
TXT The structure of nonrotary squeezers, per se, that is, of the squeezing
    elements which cooperate with the bed.

    (1)     Note.  For pounder implements, see this class, subclasses 215+.

    (2)     Note.  For similar devices used in churns and other mechanism, see
    Class 366, Agitating.

    (3)     Note.  Search Class 100, Presses, subclasses 195+ for platens or
    pressure surfaces, not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 68/130
TXT The structure of nonrotary squeezers, per se, which are equipped with
    plungers or valves.

    (1)     Note.  For pounder implements combined with plungers or valves, see
    this class, subclasses 216 and 217.


CLS 68/131
TXT Machines for impelling textiles while submerged in a liquid.

    (1)     Note.  See definition of impulsing in main class definition of this
    class.

    (2)     Note.  Impulsers using impellers are distinguished from machines
    using drags or dollies by function and structure.  The function of an
    impeller is to impart a force to the textile so as to cause it to move a
    distance independently of the impeller; the function of a drag or dolly is
    to move the textile with the drag in its movement or movements.In
    structure, the impeller, used is an impulser, is generally a broad flat
    surface which may or may not be perforate, and which has an intermittent
    movement.  The drag or dolly generally consists of a pin or plurality of
    pins or an open grille work to cause textiles to move with the drag or
    dolly, said drag or dolly having either a continuous rotary movement or a
    reciprocating movement. Impulsers and drags are distinguished from
    squeezing machines in that there is no surface cooperating with the
    impeller or drag between which surface and the impeller or drag the
    textiles may be compresses.

    (3)     Note.  For similar structure in agitators of general utility, see
    Class 366, Agitating, particularly subclasses 241+.


CLS 68/132
TXT Machines under subclass 131 in which the impeller is mounted to oscillate
    or rotate about a vertical axis.


CLS 68/133
TXT Machines of the type set forth in subclass 132 in which the impeller is
    mounted on a vertical axis and is driven from below the impeller.


CLS 68/134
TXT The structure of the impeller, per se.


CLS 68/135
TXT Machines for dragging textile materials through a liquid.

    (1)     Note.  See definition of dragging in main class definition of this
    class.

    (2)     Note.  For features which distinguish a drag or dolly from an
    impeller and from a squeezer, see the note following the definition of
    subclass 131 of this class.

    (3)     Note.  For similar structure in agitators of general utility, see
    Class 366, Agitating, particularly subclasses 241+.


CLS 68/136
TXT Machines of the type set forth in subclass 135 in which the drag is mounted
    to oscillate or rotate on a vertical axis.


CLS 68/137
TXT Machines for effecting treatment of textiles by dragging them through a
    liquid and in which the drag element is mounted on a vertical axis and is
    driven from above.


CLS 68/138
TXT The structure of the dolly, or drag, per se.


CLS 68/139
TXT Tumblers which revolve or oscillate, through at least 360o, in an outer

    casing.

    (1)     Note.  See definition of tumbling in main class definition of this
    class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclass 30 for tumbling drums used in
    treating hides, skins, or leather.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, and 220, Receptacles, appropriate subclasses
    for receptacle structure of general utility and for door constructions on
    washing machine casings and tumblers or the like.


CLS 68/140
TXT Supports, bearings or the drive mechanism for perforate tumblers of the
    type set forth in subclass 139.


CLS 68/141
TXT Tumblers of the cage-type mounted so that one wall of the tumbler is
    inclined to the axis of rotation and is not at right angles thereto.


CLS 68/142
TXT The construction of the cage which adapts it to perform a textile treating
    operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157,    for a cage constructed to prevent textile tumbling into the liquid
    from a height and having the textile secured thereto.


CLS 68/143
TXT Cages of the compartmented-type.


CLS 68/144
TXT Tumblers which are imperforate.


CLS 68/145
TXT Imperforate compartmented tumblers.


CLS 68/146
TXT Imperforate tumblers which are mounted on an inclined axis.


CLS 68/147
TXT Textile treating machines wherein the treatment is effect solely by reason
    of relative movement between the textiles being treated and a liquid.

    (1)     Note.  See definition of liquid flowing in the main class
    definition of this class.

    (2)     Note.  The textile may be repeatedly dipped in a bath or passed
    therethrough in a continuous process of feeding the textile into a bath,
    treating it in the bath and removing the textile from the bath, or there
    may be a movement of the textile in a liquid bath, the movement being
    created by gaseous currents. There may be elements affixed to the interior
    of the textile-carrying receptacle to effect a scrubbing action on the
    textile material as it is sloshed about.

    (3)     Note.  Patents wherein the treatment of textiles is effected by
    reason of the textiles falling from height and impacting against an
    abutment, as within a tumbler, are excluded from this subclass and the
    indented subclasses, and will be found for the most part in subclasses
    139+, and in the combined operations subclasses.


CLS 68/148
TXT Machines of the type set forth in subclass 147 wherein in addition to the
    movement of a perforate cage or a perforate carrier in or through a liquid,
    means are provided for effecting a movement of the body of liquid.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and the indented subclasses take patents in
    which the textiles are centrifuged to cause flow of liquids relative
    thereto.


CLS 68/149
TXT Machines of the liquid flow-type in which a liquid is positively displaced
    by a pump or the like and there is a rotatable skein-supporting stick.


CLS 68/150
TXT Machines of the type set forth in subclass 147 wherein a cage or carrier is
    moved through a liquid and the textile is wound in package form about a
    longitudinal axis, the liquid being forced axially out of the wound
    packages.

    (1)     Note.  For other wound packages, see this class, subclasses 189 and
    198.


CLS 68/151
TXT Machines of the type set forth in subclass 147 in which a cage or carrier
    is mounted on a vertical axis and a portion of the cage or carrier or a
    portion moving therewith serves as a pump to enforce circulation of liquid
    through the cage or carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139+,   for tumblers with means on the periphery of the tumbler to pump
    liquid as it revolves.


CLS 68/152
TXT Machines of the type set forth in subclass 147 wherein the textiles are
    supported on a tray or placed in a cage which tray or cage is movable in
    the liquid.

    (1)     Note.  The cage or tray may be supported by links or may be mounted
    to rotate on an axis or may rotate about a vertical axis and have other
    movement besides.


CLS 68/153
TXT Machines of the type set forth in subclass 147 wherein the textiles are
    supported on a tray or placed in a cage which tray or cage is oscillated
    through less than 360o on a horizontal axis.

    (1)     Note.  For cages oscillating through 360o or more see this class,
    subclasses 139+.


CLS 68/154
TXT Machines of the type set forth in subclass 147 wherein the textiles are
    supported on a tray or placed in a cage which tray or cage is oscillatable
    on a vertical axis.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes cages with vanes mounted on the inner
    walls of the cage.


CLS 68/155
TXT Machines of the liquid flow type wherein the textiles are supported on a
    tray or placed in a cage which tray or cage is rectilinearly reciprocated.

    (1)     Note.  The tray or cage may have rubbing elements affixed thereto.


CLS 68/156
TXT Machines of the type set forth in subclass 155 wherein the cage or tray is
    reciprocated vertically.


CLS 68/157
TXT Machines wherein the treatment of textiles is effected solely by reason of
    the movement of a textile carrier through a liquid, the carrier not being
    in the form of a cage or tray, the textile being draped over, resting on or
    being secured to or within the carrier.


CLS 68/158
TXT Machines of the character set forth in subclass 147 in which the textile
    material is fed into a bath, conveyed therethrough by a conveyor in the
    vat, and discharged from the bath, all in one continuous operation.

    (1)     Note.  For other feeding and delivery devices used in conjunction
    with fluid textile treating machines, see this class, subclass 210.


CLS 68/159
TXT Machines of the type set forth in subclass 157 wherein a skein stick or
    support for a skein or a frame for mounting several skeins is provided, the
    skein being supported for movement within a liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 104+ for
    festooner, per se.


CLS 68/160
TXT Liquid flow machines wherein there is provided a rotatable skein stick
    which causes the skein to be linearly moved through a liquid.


CLS 68/161
TXT Liquid flow machines under subclass 157 wherein there is provided a
    rotatable skein stick which causes the skein to be linearly moved through a
    liquid and wherein a skein stretching means is provided.


CLS 68/162
TXT Liquid flow machines under subclass 157 wherein there is a rotatable
    carrier for skein sticks or for skein frames causing the skeins to travel
    through a liquid.


CLS 68/163
TXT Machines as set forth in subclass 162 wherein the skein stick rotates.


CLS 68/164
TXT Machines as set forth in subclass 162 wherein the skein stick rotates and
    skein stretching means are provided.


CLS 68/165
TXT Liquid flow machines under subclass 157 wherein there is a reciprocable
    carrier for skein sticks or for skein frames causing the skeins to travel
    through a liquid.


CLS 68/166
TXT Machines as set forth in subclass 165 wherein the skein stick rotates.


CLS 68/167
TXT Liquid flow machines under subclass 157 wherein there is a skein stick
    which traverses the liquid.


CLS 68/168
TXT Machines as set forth in subclass 167 wherein the sticks are carried by an
    endless belt.


CLS 68/169
TXT Liquid flow machines wherein there is a stick mounted on an endless belt,
    which stick is adapted to carry a skein through a liquid, and in which
    means are provided for stretching the skein.


CLS 68/170
TXT Machines of the type set forth in subclass 157 in which the carrier has
    essentially a vertical reciprocable movement.


CLS 68/171
TXT Machines of the type set forth in subclass 147 wherein the receptacle is
    imperforate and is movable, the liquid flow being caused solely by the
    movement of the receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  The patents in this subclass include receptacles which are
    reciprocable rectilinearly.


CLS 68/172
TXT Machines of the type set forth in subclass 147 wherein an imperforate
    receptacle is rocked or oscillated to effect sloshing about of textiles
    within the receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  The receptacle may have rubbing elements or fins on its
    inner walls.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes cradled receptacles.


CLS 68/173
TXT Machines of the type set forth in subclass 147 wherein an imperforate
    receptacle is oscillatable on a fixed axis to effect sloshing about of
    textiles within the receptacle.


CLS 68/174
TXT Machines of the type set forth in subclass 147 wherein an imperforate
    receptacle is oscillatable on a vertical axis.


CLS 68/175
TXT Machines under subclass 147 in which there is a liquid containing
    receptacle, said receptacle being fixed and especially designed to effect
    the treatment of textiles by subjecting them to the liquid within the
    receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  For steam washboiler see this class, subclass 5.

    (2)     Note.  For metallic receptacles of general utility, see Class 220,
    Receptacles.


CLS 68/176
TXT Machines as set forth in subclass 175 in which a textile in thread or rope
    form is helically passed about a pair of rollers or the like.


CLS 68/177
TXT Machines of the fixed liquid receptacle type provided with mechanism to
    cause a web in flat or rope form to be laid in pleats or the like within a
    receptacle.


CLS 68/178
TXT Machines under subclass 177 and in which the receptacle has a long neck
    portion forming a chute for the introduction of textile material into the
    receptacle and wherein means are provided for laying the textile material
    in pleats or folds as it is fed into the receptacle, the receptacle usually
    being of J-shape and the material being removed at the lower end ofthe J.


CLS 68/179
TXT Machines under subclass 175 of the fixed liquid receptacle-type in which
    the receptacle has a long neck portion forming a chute for the introduction
    of the textile-material into the receptacle, the textile usually being a
    web in either flat or rope form and the receptacle usually being of
    J-shape, the material being progressively fed into the receptacle through
    the chute and removed at the lower end of the J.


CLS 68/180
TXT Machines of the fixed liquid receptacle type wherein the textile material
    is wound back and forth from one of a pair of rollers to the other, the
    material intermediate the rolls passing through the liquid within the
    receptacle.


CLS 68/181
TXT Machines of the type set forth in subclass 175 wherein there is a constant
    flow of liquid into the receptacle with a constant efflux of liquid
    therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  Where the only liquid supply and efflux is due to a closed
    circulating system, it is not in this and the indented subclass, but in
    subclass 175 or other appropriate indented subclasses, particularly
    subclasses 184+ for pump circulating systems, subclass 190 for surgers, and
    subclasses 191-193 for systems where circulation is induced by heat.


CLS 68/182
TXT Machines of the liquid flow-type in which there is a constant flow of
    liquid into a vat, the liquid flowing through a revolving strainer and
    thence out of the vat, the textile in the vat thereby being treated with a
    constantly fresh supply of liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 348+ for filters for separating solids in general
    from liquids.


CLS 68/183
TXT Machines of the fixed receptacle liquid flow- type in which a gas is
    supplied to the liquid.

    (1)     Note.  The gas is generally forced through the liquid in order to
    agitate the same.  In some instances, the gas causes the liquid to surge
    back and forth.

    (2)     Note.  Where a gas is applied directly to the textiles to oxidize a
    dye, see this class, subclass 5.

    (3)     Note.  See this class, subclass 207.

    (4)     Note.  Where gas is forced through a textile in order to dry the
    same, see this class, subclass 20, and Class 34, Drying and Gas or Vapor
    Contact With Solids.


CLS 68/184
TXT Machines of the liquid flow-type wherein the receptacle is fixed and the
    means for effecting a treatment of the textiles is a pumping of liquid.

    (1)     Note.  The flow of liquid is usually a circulation induced by a
    mechanical pump either within the body of liquid but isolated from the
    textiles or in a conduit connected at both ends to the receptacle, the
    liquid but not the textiles passing through the conduit, or a pumping
    induced by application of heat to the liquid, or a pumping caused by
    intermittently applied air or steam pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for similar machines used with filters.

    51,     for combined liquid pumping and squeezing machines.

    131+,   for machines using agitators of the impulsing-type.

    207,    for machines for effecting a flow of liquid due to the injection
    into the tank of a vapor or liquid.


CLS 68/185
TXT Machines under subclass 184 of the liquid flow- type wherein, in addition
    to the flow of liquid through a mass of textiles in a receptacle, the
    liquid flows through a sample batch of textiles.

    (1)     Note.  The sample is usually in a liquid circuit parallel with the
    main liquid circuit but may be arranged in series with the main batch of
    textiles.


CLS 68/186
TXT Machines of the type set forth in subclass 185 wherein there is provided a
    means to prevent looseness of the mass of textiles within the receptacle.


CLS 68/187
TXT Machines of the type set forth in subclass 184 wherein there is provided a
    means to prevent undue looseness of the mass of textiles within the
    receptacles.


CLS 68/188
TXT Machines of the type set forth in subclass 184 wherein sticks are provided
    for supporting skeins.


CLS 68/189
TXT Machine of the type set forth in subclass 184 wherein the textile is wound
    into package form about a longitudinal axis and in which machines the
    liquid is pumped axially into or sucked axially out of the wound package.

    (1)     Note.  For wound packages of the type set forth in this subclass,
    which are displaceable, see this class, subclass 150.  For wound package
    holders, see subclass 198.


CLS 68/190
TXT Machines of the liquid flow-type wherein the liquid within a fixed
    receptacle has a periodic surging action (i.e., a periodic to and fro
    motion) automatically controlled.

    (1)     Note.  The pumping action may be caused by intermittently applied
    air or steam pressure.

    (2)     Note.  See subclass 184 or other appropriate indented subclass
    where the mechanism periodically delivers the liquid in pulses primarily in
    the same direction, the mechanism not functioning to deliver a
    corresponding pulse in the opposite direction, and also for machines with
    nonautomatic (e.g., manual) means for causing reverse liquid pulses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for surgers combined with squeezers, and see the note to this
    subclass.

    184,    See note (2) 192, for thermal surgers.


CLS 68/191
TXT Machines wherein the receptacle is fixed and the flow of liquid or pumping
    action is induced by heat adapted to be applied externally and directly to
    the receptacle or to a conduit leading at its ends to different levels in
    the receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes cages which fit within the receptacle
    and between which cages and walls of the receptacle there is an upward flow
    of liquid.

    (2)     Note. For machines combined with heaters, see this class, subclass
    15.


CLS 68/192
TXT Machines of the type set forth in subclass 191 wherein the liquid moves
    alternately in opposite directions.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 190 for surgers where the operation
    is due to a pump, intermittent air pressure or intermittent steam pressure.


CLS 68/193
TXT Machines of the type set forth in subclass 191 wherein the liquid flows, at
    least in part of its path, through tubes.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 207, for machines with tubes to
    distribute the liquid within a receptacle where the flow is effected by the
    introduction of liquid or steam into a tube, as by an injector, to impart
    velocity to the liquid in the tube.


CLS 68/194
TXT Means within fixed receptacles of the type set forth in subclass 175 to
    prevent the textiles from rising above a given height.


CLS 68/195
TXT False bottoms for fixed receptacles of the type set forth in subclass 175.


CLS 68/196
TXT Covers for fixed receptacles of the type set forth in subclass 175, the
    covers being especially adapted to machines which treat textiles with
    liquid.

    (1)     Note.  See Classes 217, Wooden Receptacles, and 220, Receptacles,
    for receptacle covers in general.


CLS 68/197
TXT Machines of the liquid flow-type provided with an elevatable textile
    support to facilitate draining of the textiles prior to removal thereof
    from the machine or to facilitate removal of the textiles from the support.

    (1)     Note.  For machines in which the textiles may be unloaded, see this
    class, subclass 210.

    (2)     Note.  For wooden receptacles with followers, see Class 217, Wooden
    Receptacles, subclass 64.


CLS 68/198
TXT Holders for wound packages, the holder being so constructed that liquid can
    flow readily axially along the holder.

    (1)     Note.  For other wound packages, see this class, subclass 189.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclass 536 for convolute winding
    of separated layers, subclasses 602+ for a spool for storing elongated
    material with spaced apart coils or layers.


CLS 68/199
TXT Carriers to hold textiles in such condition as to facilitate the liquid
    flow through the textiles.


CLS 68/200
TXT Machines wherein the textile is not immersed in a liquid but is otherwise
    subjected to a liquid.

    (1)     Note.  See definition of liquid applying in main class definition
    of this class.

    (2)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 148+ for centrifuges to cause
    flow of liquid relative to the textiles even though the liquid is supplied
    other than by immersion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclass 172 for multicolor printing of yarn strands.


CLS 68/201
TXT Machines with means for injecting a liquid into a textile by means of a
    needle.


CLS 68/202
TXT Machines wherein liquid is applied to a textile by means of a roller having
    a metallic or fabric surface which has been wetted.


CLS 68/203
TXT Machines as set forth in subclass 202 in which means are provided for
    effecting an intermittent application of liquid to the textiles.


CLS 68/204
TXT Machines wherein liquid is applied to a textile by means of a wetted
    endless belt or cord contacting the textile.

    (1)     Note.  Where a textile is moistened by means of vapor from a wetted
    belt, see this class, subclass 5.


CLS 68/205
TXT Machines for applying liquid to a textile by means of a pipe conducting a
    trickle or sprinkle of liquid thereto at a point where the textile is not
    immersed in a liquid.


CLS 68/206
TXT Machines of the type set forth in subclass 205 in which a stick is provided
    for supporting a skein.


CLS 68/207
TXT Textile treating machines with means to supply liquid or vapor directly to
    the liquid within the machine.

    (1)     Note.  Where vapor is supplied to a chamber to vapor treat a
    textile, see this class, subclasses 5+.

    (2)     Note.  Where liquid is supplied to textiles directly see this
    class, subclasses 200+.

    (3)     Note.  Where there is an efflux of liquid during textile treatment
    as well as an influx, see this class, subclass 181.

    (4)     Note.  See this class, subclass 183.

    (5)     Note.  Where the liquid supply means are merely valved pipes, see
    Class 137, Fluid Handling, and 236, Automatic Temperature and Humidity
    Regulation, subclasses 12.1+.


CLS 68/208
TXT Drains, drip catchers, sediment chambers and overflows especially adapted
    for use with textile treating machines.

    (1)     Note.  For overflows in combination with means to constantly supply
    liquid in a textile treating machine, see this class, subclass 181.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 137, Fluid Handling, appropriate subclass,
    particularly subclasses 59+, 107, 302+, 312+, 427, 562, 570, 577+, and 596
    for overflows and drains of general utility.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 532.1+ for heavier
    constituent chambers in gravitational separators.


CLS 68/209
TXT Textile treating machines modified so as to prevent an explosion of fire
    occurring and also machines with means to remove fumes therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  For venting devices which merely carry off an excess of
    liquid, see this class, subclass 208.

    (2)     Note.  For fume removers in the form of a hood above a machine, see
    Class 454, Ventilation, subclasses 49+.

    (3)     Note.  For metallic receptacles with explosion preventing doors,
    see Class 220, Receptacles, subclasses 88.1- 89.4.


CLS 68/210
TXT Textile treating machines modified to facilitate loading of textiles in a
    vat or cage, unloading the textiles or dumping the same.

    (1)     Note.  For web or rope pleating in a tank or chute, see this class,
    subclasses 177 and 178.

    (2)     Note.  For feeding and delivery devices used in conjunction with
    means to convey a textile through a bath, see this class, subclass 158.

    (3)     Note.  For a tray or the like in liquid flow machines elevatable
    from the receptacle to drain textiles or to facilitate their removal from
    the tray, see this class, subclass 197.


CLS 68/211
TXT Clamping means especially adapted to enable the application of fluid to
    restricted areas on a textile.


CLS 68/212
TXT Elements of a textile fluid-treating machine not otherwise provided for in
    previous subclasses.


CLS 68/213
TXT Implements not otherwise classifiable for treating textiles with fluids or
    while subjected to fluids.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 118, Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    coating devices for coating a base with fluid materials.

    (3)     Note.  See Class 239, Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing,
    appropriate subclasses, for distributing or discharging devices for
    dampening fabrics, especially subclass 374 for the shaker-type and
    subclasses 376+ for the upending or tilting discharge-type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, appropriate subclasses for
    a coating implement used in a cleaning operation.


CLS 68/214
TXT Implements as set forth in subclass 213 for performing one function
    combined with another implement for performing another function.


CLS 68/215
TXT Implements as set forth in subclass 213 for squeezing textile fabrics.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the fabrics are placed within a tub filled with
    liquid and the implement is given an up-and-down motion to alternately
    squeeze the fabrics and release them from pressure, although a cradling
    motion may be given to the squeezer.


CLS 68/216
TXT Squeezing implements in which there is an element slidable within the
    squeezer operable either to cause water surges or to give a squeezing
    action on the fabrics independently of the outer squeezer.


CLS 68/217
TXT Implements as set forth in subclass 216 in which there is a valve element
    cooperating with the plunger to effect circulation of fluid in one
    direction through the squeezer and through the fabrics in the tub.


CLS 68/218
TXT Squeezing implements which are provided with valves to effect a circulation
    of fluid through the squeezing implement and through the fabrics.


CLS 68/219
TXT Squeezing implements with receptacles therein to store materials to
    gradually go into solution in the body of liquid which the implement
    operates.


CLS 68/220
TXT Implements as set forth in subclass 213 provided with scrub surfaces.

    (1)     Note.  These implements may be used in conjunction with a washboard
    or other corrugated surfaces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 16+ for a guard or protector for the hand and
    subclasses 158 and 159+ for a hand covering in general.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, for cleaning implements
    of general application.

    128,    Surgery, for massaging implements with corrugated surfaces.


CLS 68/222
TXT Implements for applying steam to a textile.

    (2)     Note.  For similar structure see Class 126, Stoves and Furnaces,
    subclass 348.


CLS 68/223
TXT Washboards not otherwise classifiable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, for clamps for washboards.

    248,    Supports, subclass 27.5 for supports, for washboards.


CLS 68/224
TXT Washboards with special brandboard structure or washboards with means to
    support soap or supply soap to the scrubbing surface.

    (1)     Note.  A brandboard is that board at the top of a washboard which
    bears the manufacture's trademark or which serves the purpose of supporting
    a soap cake.


CLS 68/225
TXT Means permanently secured to a washboard to prevent splashing or to support
    part of the weight of the body of the user.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237,    for attachments to wash tubs or wash boilers to serve the same
    purposes.


CLS 68/226
TXT Washboards with special scrubbing surfaces.


CLS 68/227
TXT Washboards wherein the scrubbing surface includes a brush.


CLS 68/228
TXT Washboards wherein the scrubbing surface is of a single sheet or slab of
    material.


CLS 68/229
TXT Washboards as set forth in subclass 228 wherein the sheet or slab has a
    special surface design or elevation.


CLS 68/230
TXT Washboards wherein the scrubbing surface is made up of a series of bars,
    slats or tubes.


CLS 68/231
TXT Washboards wherein the scrubbing surface is made up of a series of rollers.


CLS 68/232
TXT Tubs especially designed to enable the fluid treatment of textiles therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), for an in situ erected type
    structure forming an enclosure, particularly subclasses 192+ for such
    structure acting as a container with a material port, e.g., a grain bin,
    subclasses 245+ for an enclosure having a curvilinear wall, subclasses 262+
    for an enclosure supported by vertical structures, and subclasses 264+ for
    an enclosure resting on a floor.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, for wooden receptacles.

    220,    Receptacles, for metallic receptacles.


CLS 68/233
TXT Washtubs with scrubbing surfaces therein.


CLS 68/235
TXT Devices which in themselves perform no textile treating operation but which
    are used in conjunction with textile treating machines or implements to
    facilitate their use.

    (1)     Note.  For similar devices which form a combination with a textile
    treating machine, see the appropriate machine subclasses of this class.


CLS 68/236
TXT Devices as set forth in subclass 235 which function to support both a tub
    and wringer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 146+ for stands, in general, for receptacles.


CLS 68/237
TXT Attachments for washtubs or washboilers.


CLS 68/238
TXT Attachments for washtubs or washboilers especially adapted to support a
    wringer.


CLS 68/239
TXT Devices especially adapted to support a wringer and which are not supported
    on a washtub or washboiler.


CLS 68/240
TXT Boards on which a selected portion of a fabric may be treated to remove
    stains or the like, in spots.


CLS 68/241
TXT Devices under the class definition, commonly called wringers, comprising
    mechanical means for pressing or otherwise removing liquid from treated
    material, especially as an adjunct to apparatus of this class.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is the generic place for stripping liquid from
    a strand by drawing it past a corner or edge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 102 for wiping
    machines for nontextile sheets, bars and plates; subclasses 236.01+ for
    miscellaneous hand scrapers; subclass 256.6 for scraper, wiper or brush
    attachments for cleaning a moving strand, the device being attached to a
    structure of which the moving strand is a part; and subclasses 260+ for
    wringer devices adapted to be attached to a pail to wring out mops.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, for drying by heat
    and/or gas or vapor contact, and especially subclasses 397+ for processes
    for removal of liquids from solids mechanically; subclasses 69+ for
    apparatus for drying having diverse types of drying means, including one
    mechanical means, especially subclass 70 for devices in which the
    mechanical means is a wringer; and subclasses 618+ for drying mechanism for
    flexible strands.

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses for presses not elsewhere provided
    for, particularly subclasses 73+ for presses having means to add liquid or
    steam to the material, subclasses 104+ for presses equipped with drain
    means for expressed liquid, and subclass 153 for presses in which an
    endless conveyor coacts with a roll element, and subclasses 155+ for roller
    type concurrent conveying compressors.

    118,    Coating apparatus, subclasses 100+ for apparatus having solid
    members acting on the coated work, and especially subclasses 114+ where the
    solid members are opposed rollers.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 548+, 566+, 615+, and
    157+ for a guide associated with winding, unwinding or in general use for
    an elongated, running material.


CLS 68/242
TXT Wringers which effect removal of liquid from textiles by pressure applied
    to a diaphragm which presses against the textiles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 211 for presses not elsewhere classified, having
    a flexible or deformable pressure surface.


CLS 68/243
TXT Wringers which effect removal of liquid from textiles by imparting a twist
    to the fabrics.

    (1)     Note.  For mop wringers of the twister type, see Class 15,
    Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 263.


CLS 68/244
TXT Wringers of the roller type not otherwise classifiable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 262 for mop
    wringers of the roll type.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 70.

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses for compressing and expressing
    rolls.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a wringing or squeezing roll, per se, not
    elsewhere provided for, and see         the notes thereunder.


CLS 68/245
TXT Wringers of the roller type combined with other instrumentalities.

    (1)     Note.  Wringers combined with textiles treating machines will be
    found in this class, subclass 22.


CLS 68/247
TXT Wringers of the roller type with means to enable enclosing of the wringer,
    as by placing covers about the wringer or shifting the wringer into a
    cabinet.


CLS 68/248
TXT Wringers of the roller type wherein the rolls are arranged in a horizontal
    plane.


CLS 68/249
TXT Wringers in which one functional unit, as a roll pressure applying or
    releasing mechanism, a shiftable drainboard, a roll driving mechanism, a
    feedboard, a wringer clamping device, a material guideboard or the like, is
    interconnected with another or others of the functional units to effect a
    simultaneous adjustment in the units as one unit is adjusted.


CLS 68/250
TXT Wringers of the type set forth in subclass 249 in which the functional
    units involved are a guide, the roll pressure applying or releasing
    mechanism, and the means for clamping a wringer to a support.


CLS 68/251
TXT Wringers of the type set forth in subclass 249 in which the functional
    units involved are the roll pressure applying or release mechanism and the
    means for clamping a wringer to a support.


CLS 68/252
TXT Wringers of the type set forth in subclass 249 in which the functional
    units involved are the means for guiding a fabric toward or from the bite
    of the rolls and the means for clamping the wringer to a support.


CLS 68/253
TXT Wringers of the type set forth in subclass 249 in which the functional
    units involved are the roll pressure applying or release mechanism and the
    means for driving the rolls.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also includes patents wherein roll separation
    effects a change in the drive mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 47 for roll type presses having automatic or
    material triggered control of roll separation or speed and not elsewhere
    provided for.


CLS 68/254
TXT Wringers of the type set forth in subclass 249 in which the interconnected
    functional units are the roll driving means and the means for draining off
    the liquid from the wringer.


CLS 68/255
TXT Wringers of the type set forth in subclass 249 in which the interconnected
    functional units are the roll driving means and the means for controlling
    rotation of the wringer around its supported standard.

    (1)     Note.  The wringer frame or its parts need not be claimed.


CLS 68/256
TXT Means to apply or release pressure between the wringer rolls and not
    otherwise provided for in the indented subclasses.

    (1)     Note.  For emergency operated means to release closure fasteners,
    see Class 292, Closure Fasteners, subclasses 92+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 168 for roll type presses not elsewhere
    classified, having means to adjust the spacing between rolls.


CLS 68/257
TXT Means to release the pressure of one roll on another by bodily shifting one
    roll away from the other against the action of means constantly tending to
    press the rolls together.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 169+ for concurrent conveying and pressing
    presses of the roller type, not elsewhere provided for, and having
    yieldable rolls.


CLS 68/258
TXT Means to apply or release pressure between the rolls wherein power means is
    employed to effect the result.


CLS 68/259
TXT Means to release the pressure between the rolls effected through abnormal
    separation of the rolls.


CLS 68/260
TXT Wringers provided with a plurality of pedals, handles, knobs, knurled nuts
    or like means, wherein pressure between the rolls may be applied or
    released, at will, by manual operation and without the use of any tools.


CLS 68/261
TXT Wringers of the type set forth in subclass 260 and in which additional
    means are provided to effect a release of pressure between the rolls.

    (1)     Note.  The additional means may be capable of resetting the
    pressure on the rolls without manipulation of the pedals, handles, knobs,
    knurled nuts, or the like, otherwise usable to apply or release the
    pressure on the rolls.


CLS 68/262
TXT Wringers provided with single frame, pedal, handle, knob, knurled nut or
    like means, wherein pressure between the rolls at both ends thereof may be
    applied or released, at will, by hand or foot operation of the single means
    and without the use of any tools.


CLS 68/263
TXT Wringers of the type set forth in subclass 262 and in which additional
    means are provided to effect a release of pressure between the rolls.

    (1)     Note.  The additional means may be capable of resetting the
    pressure without manipulation of the frame, pedal, handle, etc., otherwise
    usable to apply or release the roll pressure.


CLS 68/264
TXT Wringers provided with guard means between a roller and bearing, or with
    guard means either in advance of the roll bite or about the rolls to hinder
    access of the hands of an operator to the bite of the rolls, or wringers
    provided with means to direct or carry fabrics to or from the bite of the
    rolls.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 173+ for roll type concurrent pressing and
    conveying presses not elsewhere provided for, and having material handling
    or guiding means.


CLS 68/265
TXT Wringers provided with a movable means to direct or carry textiles to or
    from the rolls.


CLS 68/266
TXT Wringers as set forth in subclass 265 in which the movable means is either
    an idler or a live roll.


CLS 68/267
TXT Wringers of the type set forth in subclass 265 in which textile is carried
    through the wringer by means of an apron or belt passing through the bite
    of the rolls.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 69, Leather Manufactures, subclass 41 for similar
    structure for use in treating hides, skins, or leather.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 153 for concurrent pressing and conveying presses
    of the endless conveyor type in which a roll acts with a conveyor, and not
    elsewhere provided for.


CLS 68/268
TXT Wringers as set forth in subclass 265 in which an apron moves the textile
    up to the rolls or carries the textiles from the rolls, but itself does not
    pass between the rolls.


CLS 68/269
TXT Wringers with special gearing to drive the same or wringers with special
    bearing structure.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 74, Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 387 for
    pivotally supported bevel gearing especially adaptable to wringer drive
    mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 172 for roll drives for presses of the roll type
    not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 68/270
TXT Devices for stripping textiles from wringer rolls to prevent their winding
    about the rolls.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 174 for roll strippers for roll type concurrent
    pressing and conveying presses not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 68/271
TXT The structure of the means to conduct the water from beneath the wringer to
    a place of disposal.


CLS 68/272
TXT The means for mounting a wringer when forming part of the wringer structure.

    (1)     Note.  For wringer supports, per se, see this class, subclasses 238
    and 239.


CLS 68/273
TXT Wringers which are mounted to swing on a horizontal axis.


CLS 68/274
TXT Wringers which are mounted to move about a vertical axis.


CLS 68/275
TXT Wringers which are displaceable along a track lying in a horizontal plane.


CLS 68/276
TXT Wringers with clamps thereon to enable the securing of the wringer to a
    support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 95+ for patents to a work holder with
    means to fasten to a support.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS

    This following subclasses are a collection of cross-references of published
    disclosures pertaining to various specified aspects of fluid treating
    apparatus for textiles which aspects do not necessarily form appropriate
    bases for subclasses in the foregoing classification (i.e., subclasses
    superior hereto in the schedule).  These subclasses may be of further
    assistance to the searcher as a starting point in further related fields of
    search either inside or outside the class.  Thus, there is here provided a
    second access for retrieval of a limited number of types of disclosures.

    (1)     Note.  Disclosures are placed in these subclasses for their values
    as references and as leads to appropriate main or appropriate secondary
    fields or search without regard to their original classification.

    (2)     Note.  The disclosures cross-referenced into the following
    subclasses are examples only of the indicated subject matter and in no
    instance do they represent the entire extent of the prior art.


CLS 68/900
TXT FOAM TREATMENT:

    Apparatus under the class definition including means to treat the material
    with foam.


CLS 68/901
TXT HIGH FREQUENCY TREATMENT:

    Apparatus under the class definition including means to treat the material
    with high frequency vibrations and radiation.


CLS 68/902
TXT DEVICES FOR STORAGE AND REUSE OF SOAP SUDS:

    Apparatus under the class definition wherein means is provided to store
    used soap suds and to return the soap suds to a washing machine for reuse
    therein.


CLS 68/903
TXT PERFORATED DRUM AND CONTINUOUS TEXTILE FEED AND DISCHARGE:

    Apparatus under the class definition having a perforated drum subjected to
    either suction or pressure over which the textile material is continuously
    passed.


CLS 69/
TTL LEATHER MANUFACTURES

CLS 69/
TXT This class includes:  (1) leather working apparatus and processes, (2)
    apparatus and processes for production of leather from hides, skins, etc.,
    (3) apparatus and processes for treating fur.

    The class does not include boots, shoes, gloves, trunks, baggage,
    pocket-books, or other leather receptacles or their manufacture, except
    such apparatus as is clearly general in its capability of operation.

    It does not include leather cutting (except skiving or splitting),
    punching, or sewing.  The apparatus for the manufacture of harness is here
    included; but the articles of harness are elsewhere classified.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 94.1+ for methods of treating hides and
    skins with fluids including tanning processes, and subclass 112 for
    carroting of fur.

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclass 2 for mechanical processes
    of removing the hair or fur from hides and skins for the purpose of
    recovering the fibers for subsequent use in a textile process.

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclasses 15+ for the finishing of fur
    by shearing.

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, for apparatus for smoothing and
    ironing textiles.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, appropriate subclasses, for
    apparatus for making paper of leather fibers and see especially subclasses
    2, 144 and 151 for processes for producing paper from leather and the
    products produced thereby.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, for processes and
    apparatus for comminuting leather.  See section 12 of the class definition
    of that class (241) for the line.

    451,    Abrading, for abrading of a hide, skin, or leather, generally.


CLS 69/1
TXT Miscellaneous leather-working machines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses for presses not elsewhere provided
    for.


CLS 69/1.5
TXT Various machines for putting leather, canvas, or other belting under
    tension to take out the initial stretch or to bring the belting to uniform
    shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19.1+,  for a skin or hide stretcher.


CLS 69/2
TXT Machines for cutting or trimming leather and at the same time creasing or
    otherwise impressing it for ornamental purposes or which simply crease or
    impress without cutting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 94+ for presses which additionally treat the
    material by cutting, breaking, piercing or comminuting, not elsewhere
    provided for.


CLS 69/3
TXT Apparatus upon which horse-collars are shaped or given proper contour.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for apparatus for molding leather articles.


CLS 69/4
TXT Apparatus for stuffing the padding material into horse-collars.


CLS 69/6
TXT Machines which by drawing or passing a string or strip therethrough will
    cut or roll the same to circular or semicircular shape, usually for
    harness-reins, fillings, or whip-lashes.


CLS 69/6.5
TXT Machines under subclass 1 for treating leather or leather articles by
    cutting or rasping to produce an uneven surface for cementing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 76.1+ for filing devices generally.

    157,    Wheelwright Machines, subclass 13 for apparatus and processes for
    treating the outer periphery of a rubber tire casing by a slitting or
    machine operation which art (in the absence of this subclass) would
    ordinarily be classified in accord with the particular operation.  (The
    treating of a rubber casing by abrading is classified in Class 451,
    Abrading).

    451,    Abrading, for roughening leather with natural abrasive material
    (e.g., sandpaper, emery cloth, etc.).


CLS 69/7
TXT Machines for pressing, rubbing, or rolling down leather seams.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclass 57.1 for combined upper turning and
    seam pressing.

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, for ironing and smoothing fabrics
    in general.

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses for presses not elsewhere provided
    for.


CLS 69/7.3
TXT Machines under subclass 1 for treating leather or leather articles to
    compress them by a hammering action.


CLS 69/7.5
TXT Machines for searing leather.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes machines which sear leather for the
    purpose of causing the edge of the leather to shrink and curl to produce a
    finished edge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, for electric heaters.

    263,    Heating, for miscellaneous heating apparatus and methods in general.


CLS 69/7.7
TXT Machines under subclass 1 for working upon the perimeter of leather stock
    or articles by burnishing, molding, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for belt finishing machines.


CLS 69/8
TXT Machines under subclass 1 for forming and shaping leather articles by
    molding, clamping and/or compressing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for horse collar shaping machines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses for presses not elsewhere provided
    for.


CLS 69/9
TXT Machines under subclass 1 for beveling leather or leather articles, or
    cutting them parallel to their upper and lower edges.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclass 16.5 for devices for splitting a
    flap portion of nonuniform thickness from a shoe sole to form a breast flap
    covering, 31.5, for devices for forming the heel seat portion of a sole by
    a splitting or skiving operation, 46, for devices for forming a seat
    portion on a heel, 46.5, for devices for cutting a sloping surface on the
    front edge of a spring heel, 58, for devices for skiving the edges of
    uppers, and 62, for devices for skiving or beveling the edges of toe or
    heel stiffener blanks.

    30,     Cutlery, appropriate subclasses for hand cutting tools adapted for
    use in leather manufacture but of more general application.


CLS 69/9.1
TXT Machines under subclass 9 provided with means to determine the smallest
    thickness of the leather being treated and then shaving the leather to this
    thickness.


CLS 69/9.3
TXT Machines under subclass 9 for (1) a skiving and/or splitting together with
    another operation, or (2) a plurality of different skiving and/or splitting
    operations on the leather part being treated.


CLS 69/9.5
TXT Machines under subclass 9 which are provided with a revolving pipe-like
    cutter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    79,     Button Making, subclass 16.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 861+ for edge trimming, skiving, or scoring
    devices generally subclasses 425+ for a cutting device including means to
    move the work against a fixedly located tool, and subclasses 663+ for a
    rotatable type of cutting tool.


CLS 69/10
TXT Machines under subclass 9 which are provided with a traveling band cutter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 201 for cutting devices having endless flexible
    band knives, and subclass 661 for band knives, per se.


CLS 69/11
TXT Machines under subclass 9 which are provided with a stationary cutter
    against which the work is drawn or fed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 425+ for cutting devices wherein work is moved
    against a fixed tool.


CLS 69/12
TXT Machines under subclass 11 which are provided with means which engage the
    work to move it against the fixed knife and then return to a normal work
    feeding position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 259+, 276+, 294, 319, 352, and 401+ for cutting
    machines with reciprocating or oscillating work pushers or grippers.

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 175.


CLS 69/13
TXT Machines under subclass 11 which are provided with positively driven
    rollers which engage and move the work to the fixed knife.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 861+ for edge trimming, skiving, grooving or
    scoring devices generally, and subclasses 401+, particularly subclasses
    425+ for cutting devices wherein work is advanced against a tool.

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 175.


CLS 69/15
TXT Machines under subclass 9 in which the knife is translated back and forth.

    (1)     Note.  The work may either be stationary or movable.


CLS 69/16
TXT Machines under subclass 9 in which the knife is in the form of generally
    flat planar member of circular configuration which is sharpened upon its
    periphery and which rotates about the axis perpendicular to the plane.


CLS 69/17
TXT Machines for rubbing, blacking, polishing, creasing, burnishing, and
    otherwise finishing leather straps.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.7,    for other machines for working the edges of leather pieces.


CLS 69/19
TXT Apparatus under the class definition for (1) applying tension to hide, skin
    or leather or (2) holding or supporting such work during the treatment or
    manufacture of the same or (3) maintaining such work taut during relaxation
    or drying of the same.

    (1)     Note.  In this and indented subclasses are placed, e.g., a "setting
    out" board for supporting leather while it dries a leather or skin
    stretching device and a "stitching horse" for saddlers or harness makers.

    (2)     Note.  Work supports which are parts of a leather working machine
    are classified with the complete machines of which they are parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses. Class 269 is the residual
    locus for patents to a device for clamping, supporting and/or holding an
    article (or articles) in position to be operated on or treated.  See notes
    thereunder for other related loci.


CLS 69/19.1
TXT Device under subclass 19 including means for applying or maintaining
    tension in one or more directions to or within the hide, skin or leather.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.5,    for a belt stretching machine.

    33,     for treating a hide, skin or leather by folding, flexing,
    crumpling, suppling or similar action for stretching, softening and
    rendering the same more flexible.

    46,     for a machine which stretches leather by rubbing action of a member
    over the surface thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 5 for a combined carpet fastener
    and stretcher.

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclasses 51+ for a cloth stretching
    apparatus involving a cloth finishing operation; and subclasses 71+ for the
    apparatus, per se, for expanding (e.g., stretching, spreading) a running
    length cloth web.

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclasses 149+ for a frame upon which
    threads are to be stretched and held while being fabricated into a
    structure by some textile operation.

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 91.5 for an upholstery making apparatus for
    drawing or pressing an outer fabric layer into or about a stuffed or padded
    furniture component.

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclasses 102.1+ for a cloth
    stretcher frame (e.g., curtain stretcher frame).

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 222 for a building
    panel having a tensioned or flexed sheet facing.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 371+
    for a fabric filled or covered frame or a frame for such use; especially
    subclasses 372+ for a device wherein the fabric may be stretched by
    adjusting the frame size and subclass 378 for a frame type device including
    means for applying tension to the fabric therein.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 61+ for a device for stretching
    apparel on forms.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 200+ for a tensioner for use in forcing a carpet or like
    covering into place in laying it, when including means for affording
    mechanical advantage.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 8.6 for a
    stretcher for use in forcing a carpet or like covering into place in laying
    it, when not including means for affording mechanical advantage.


CLS 69/19.2
TXT Device under subclass 19.1 for stretching hides or skins that are taken
    whole from an animal in the form of a sleeve, said device being of such
    geometry and/or structure as to be fitted into such sleeve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclasses 114+ for a device for interiorly
    stretching assembled shoes.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 63 for a frame or the like to be placed
    inside the sleeve or leg of an item of wearing apparel and expanded to
    stretch and/or crease the same, and subclass 65 for a similar device for
    stretching a tie.


CLS 69/19.3
TXT Device under subclass 19.1 including means to selectively vary the tension
    applied to the hide, skin or leather.


CLS 69/20
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising hand manipulable devices for
    use by leather workers in the working or manufacturing of leather or
    leather articles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 236.01+ for
    scrapers of general cleaning utility, and see the Notes thereto for
    miscellaneous scrapers of more specialized application.

    30,     Cutlery, appropriate subclasses, for hand awls.

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses for cutting, scoring, punching or
    pricking devices in general.


CLS 69/21
TXT Processes of treating hides, skins or leather not otherwise provided for,
    and combinations of such processes with the fluid treatment of hides,
    skins, or leather.

    (1)     Note.  Products of leather or fur will be found in appropriate
    subclasses in Class 112, Sewing, if sewn only, and in appropriate
    subclasses in Class 428, Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, if not
    provided for elsewhere.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes processes involivng laminating
    leather where the process also includes steps not ancillary to the
    laminating process. For processes of laminating leather including steps
    ancillary to the laminating process, see Class 156, Adhesive Bonding and
    Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, appropriate subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 94.1+ and the notes thereto, for a process
    of treating a hide, skin or leather with chemicals and fluids, particularly
    see subclasses 94.16+ for a method of removing hair from a hide by the use
    of a chemical.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 90.01+ for processes for condensing,
    compacting, smoothing or polishing the surface of metallic or nonmetallic
    articles.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 35+ for methods of pressing not elsewhere
    provided for.

    112,    Sewing, appropriate subclasses for sewn leather or fur stock
    material.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, and see
    (2) Note above.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclass 692 for electrolytic treatment of
    hides or skins.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, apporpriate subclasses,
    particularly subclasses 102+ for stock material which may be of leather and
    which includes stitching and a discrete fastener, coating or adhesive bond,
    subclass 473 for a plural layer product including a layer of animal
    membrane (e.g., leather), and subclass 904 (a cross-reference art
    collection) for artificial leather product or stock material.


CLS 69/21.5
TXT Processes under subclass 21 which are directed to, or include, a step of
    beveling or splitting the hide skin or leather article as defined in
    subclass 9 above.


CLS 69/22
TXT Processes under subclass 21 directed to the specialized treatment of skins
    provided with hair, because of the presence of the hair.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 65 and 66 for fur garments.

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 94.14 and 404, for the dyeing of fur and
    the treatment of a fur with a fluid.

    112,    Sewing, subclass 401 for a patent for a plurality of fur sections
    joined in edge-to-edge relation by sewing, and subclasses 475.01+ for a
    method of sewing fur.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 85+ for stock
    material comprising animal skin with the fur attached, and including
    structure other than or in addition to stitching.


CLS 69/23
TXT Apparatus under subclass 1 for the specialized treatment of skins provided
    with hair, because of the presence of the hair.

    (1)     Note.  For apparatus for the treatment of hides or skins having
    hair thereon but not modified to particularly treat them because of the
    presence of the hair thereon, see other appropriate subclasses of this
    class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclass 2 for the removal of fur
    fibers from the hide in which the said fibers are recovered in a condition
    suitable for use in textile processes.

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclasses 15+ for the finishing of fur
    by shearing the fur fibers to a uniform length or to produce a decorative
    effect.

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 16+ for sewing machines specialized for use on
    furs.


CLS 69/24
TXT Apparatus under subclass 23 for removal of the coarse or "water" hairs from
    a skin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 227+.


CLS 69/25
TXT Apparatus under subclass 24 for removing the coarse or "water" hairs from a
    skin by clipping the hairs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclasses 15+.

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclasses 222+ for methods and apparatus
    for clearing threads of unwanted fibrils or other protruding matter.

    30,     Cutlery.


CLS 69/26
TXT Apparatus under subclass 24 for removing the coarse or "water" hairs from a
    skin by plucking them therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    452,    Butchering, subclasses 82+ for gripping-type epidermal outgrowth
    removers.


CLS 69/27
TXT Apparatus under subclass 23 for the smoothing, combing, carding, or
    otherwise orienting the hairs on the skin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, for brushing machines,
    brushes, wipers, et cetera of general utility.

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses 98+ and subclasses 115+
    for combing and carding machines used in preparing fibrous materials for
    use in textile processes.

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, appropriate subclass, for
    apparatus for smoothing or ironing textile fabrics.

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 219+ for combs designed to be used by inserting
    the teeth into the hair of a person.


CLS 69/28
TXT Apparatus under subclass 23, for the treatment of the skin with a fluid.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the patents in this subclass are directed to
    apparatus for dyeing or carroting of the hair while on the skin.

    (2)     Note.  The tanning or other fluid treatment of hides, skins, or
    leather even though provided with hairs, are not included in this subclass,
    for which see this class, subclasses 29+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29+,    (see note 2).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 404+ for processes of coloring fur or hair,
    subclass 94.14, for the fluid treatment of fur not otherwise provided for
    and subclass 112 for processes of carroting furs.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate
    subclasses, for processes and apparatus within that class definition; this
    subclass including such subject matter when combined with other treatments
    of fur not provided for in Class 34.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, appropriate subclass, for
    apparatus, for treating textiles with fluid.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for coating
    hides, skins or leather, and see section V of the class definition of Class
    118 for the line between Class 69 and Class 118.


CLS 69/29
TXT Apparatus for the treatment of hides, skins and leather with a fluid not
    more specifically provided for elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the patents in this subclass and indented
    subclasses, are directed to apparatus for tanning hides or skins.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes the fluid treatment, of hides, skins
    or leather even though the hair remains thereon, unless there is also some
    treatment of the hair; for the latter, see this class, subclass 23, or
    indented subclasses, especially subclass 28.

    (3)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses take patents defining more
    than mere vat or tank structure.  Such structures, per se, are in the
    appropriate structure class, particularly Class 52, Static Structures
    (e.g., Buildings), Class 217, Wooden Receptacles, and Class 220,
    Receptacles, noted below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 94.1+ for processes of treating hides,
    skins or leather with a fluid.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclass,
    for processes and apparatus within the definition of that class:  this
    subclass and indented subclasses including such subject matter when
    combined with other treatments of hides, skins or leather not provided for
    in class 34.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), particularly subclasses 192+
    and 264+.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, for apparatus, for the fluid
    treatment of textiles.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, and see the notes thereto
    for other apparatus for treating solid materials other than hides, skins,
    and leather with liquids.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, particularly subclass 4.

    220,    Receptacles, appropriate subclasses.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 265 for
    apparatus for treating hides, skins, et cetera, by processes which involve
    fermentation.


CLS 69/30
TXT Apparatus under subclass 29, in which the hides are enclosed in a rotating
    drum during the fluid treatment.

    (1)     Note.  The drum may be perforate, or imperforate; and the hides may
    be attached to the drum, the hides, skins, or leather must be at least
    partially enclosed in the drum.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 108, 109,
    126-142, and see the notes to subclass 108.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 139+.


CLS 69/31
TXT Apparatus under subclass 29 including means to agitate the fluid with which
    the hides, skins, or leather is treated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    366,    Agitating, for agitators of general application, but agitators
    especially designed for use in the fluid treating of hides, skins, or
    leather are here.


CLS 69/32
TXT Apparatus under subclass 29, including means, for moving the hide, skin, or
    leather through the fluid with which the same is treated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for rotating drums containing the hide, skin, or leather; however,
    rotating drums or frames with hides, skins, or leather attached to the
    outside thereof are in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 148 to 170 for
    textile fluid treating apparatus in which the textiles are moved through
    the treating fluid.


CLS 69/33
TXT Apparatus for treating hides, skins, or leather by folding, flexing,
    crumpling, suppling, or similar action for stretching, softening and
    rendering the same more flexible.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for machines which stretch leather by rubbing action of a member
    over the surface of the hide or leather.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 127+ for working successive portions of
    a metal workpiece by deflecting it from a path of movement with respect to
    a deforming tool.


CLS 69/34
TXT Apparatus under subclass 33 in which the hide, skin or leather is passed
    over a sharp edge so that the hide, skin or leather is flexed or folded
    over the sharp edge.


CLS 69/35
TXT Apparatus under subclass 33 in which the hide, skin or leather is folded
    upon itself, grain side inward, the fold is then passed over the hide, skin
    or leather.

    (1)     Note.  In most of the patents, pressure is applied to the leather
    at the fold, the purpose being to alter the appearance of the grain side of
    the leather commonly known as "boarding".

    (2)     Note.  The distinction between the subject matter of this subclass
    and that of subclass 34 is that the apparatus of subclass 34 includes a
    sharp edge over which the hide, skin or leather is folded, whereas in this
    subclass the hide, skin or leather is folded upon itself.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for "fulling" mills in which a hide, skin or leather is wound upon
    a mandrel within a cage like member, the direction of rotation of the
    mandrel being reversed so as to cause the leather to double back upon
    itself.


CLS 69/36
TXT Apparatus for the treatment of hides, skins, or leather with a band type
    knife, and not more specifically provided for elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for band type knife machines for skiving or splitting leather.


CLS 69/37
TXT Apparatus for the treatment of hides, skins or leather by the use of a tool
    which is positively rotated about its own axis during contact with the
    hide, skin or leather worked upon.

    (1)     Note.  The tool may be of any configuration such as a scraper,
    roll, brush roll, smooth roll, et cetera.

    (2)     Note.  Machines having tools which are rotated solely by contact
    with the hide, skin, or leather being worked upon are not in this subclass,
    or indented subclasses, for which see the appropriate subclass below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 90.01+ for machines or processes for
    condensing, compacting, smoothing, or polishing the surface of metallic or
    nonmetallic articles, usually by rubbing with a smooth surface of greater
    hardness than that of the article being operated upon.

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, particularly subclasses 44+, and
    subclasses 100 and 101 for ironing and smoothing apparatus for use on
    textiles.


CLS 69/38
TXT Apparatus under subclass 37 which includes means for grinding or cleaning
    the rotary tool during the operation of the machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 246+ for
    cleaning devices within that class which are attached to the article or
    machine upon which they are to operate, and combinations of such articles
    or machines with the attachments when the article or machine is set forth
    in only insufficient detail to provide a setting for the attached cleaning
    device.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 415+, particularly subclasses 419+ for an
    attachment for grinding part of a machine to which it is attached, and to
    the combination of a machine with such attachment when the structure of the
    machine to which it is attached is not significantly claimed.


CLS 69/39
TXT Apparatus under subclass 37 in which the tool rotates about a vertical axis
    and the hide, skin or leather is placed on a horizontal work support, the
    working surface of the tool being the radial surface thereof.


CLS 69/40
TXT Apparatus under subclass 37 in which the rotating tool has additional
    motion other than rotation, during its operation upon a hide, skin or
    leather.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45      and 46, for tools which have nonrotary motion, and also rotation
    about the axis of the tool, the rotation being due solely to contact with
    the hide, skin or leather worked upon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, appropriate
    subclasses, for drilling machines which feed the work or tool or both
    relative to one another along the axis of relative rotation of tool and
    work; and, see the Notes thereto for other machines with means to feed a
    rotating tool relative to work.


CLS 69/41
TXT Apparatus under subclass 37 in which the hide, skin or leather, during
    treatment with the rotating tool, is supported by a flexible belt or apron.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the patents in this subclass are drawn to machines
    having an endless belt work support which carries the hide, skin or leather
    past the tool.  Also the belt may itself be supported at a point opposite
    the tool by a roll or other means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 153 for concurrent conveying and pressing presses
    of the endless conveyor type, not elsewhere provided for, and having a roll
    element co-acting with the endless conveyor to effect the compressing.


CLS 69/42
TXT Apparatus under subclass 37 in which the hide, skin or leather, during
    treatment with the rotating tool, is supported by a cylindrical roll.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 155+ for roller type concurrent pressing and
    conveying presses, not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 69/43
TXT Apparatus under subclass 42 in which the only rotating tool is a roll which
    does not have blades theron or any other irregular surface configuration.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the patents in this subclass are for leather
    wringers and for roller presses for leather.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclasses 44+ for similar
    apparatus for ironing or smoothing of textiles.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating, Apparatus, subclasses 244+ for similar
    apparatus for wringing textiles.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the notes thereunder.


CLS 69/44
TXT Apparatus under subclass 37 in which the hide, skin or leather is placed on
    a work support which is in motion during the treatment of the hide, skin or
    leather.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for machines having moving belt type work supports.

    42      and 43, for machines having cylindrical work supports.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 156 for roller type concurrent conveying and
    pressing presses, not elsewhere provided for, in which the roller co-acts
    with a nonrotary surface.


CLS 69/45
TXT Apparatus for the treatment of hides, skins or leather by the use of a tool
    which is pivoted about a point external from the tool and the tool turns
    about the pivot during treatment of the hide, skin or leather.

    (1)     Note.  The tool may be of any configuratin such as a scraper brush,
    burnishing tool, free turning roll, et cetera.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 210 for roll and platen presses, not elsewhere
    provided for.


CLS 69/46
TXT Apparatus for the treatment of hides, skins or leather having a tool which
    has a translatory motion while in contact with the hide, skin or leather.

    (1)     Note.  The tool may be of any configuration such as a scraper
    brush, burnishing tool, free turning roll, et cetera.


CLS 69/47
TXT Apparatus for the treatment of hides, skins or leather in which the hide,
    skin or leather is placed on a support which is in motion during the
    treatment of the hide, skin or leather.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41      through 44, for machines having rotating tools and work supports
    which are in motion during the treatment of the hide, skin or leather.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 144+ for concurrent type pressing and conveying
    presses not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 69/48
TXT Apparatus for treating leather in which opposing forces are brought to bear
    upon the leather which tend to compress the leather, not otherwise provided
    for.

    (1)     Note.  Machines which exert a pressing action on leather in which a
    member moves over the surface of the leather are classified above on the
    basis of the structure of the machine, see particularly subclass 43 for
    opposing roller type press.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for roller presses.  (See note 1).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclasses 25 to 43, 71 and 72 for
    presses having two press platens for use in smoothing or ironing-textiles.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 241 and 242 for
    platen presses used in expressing liquid from textiles.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 214+ for reciprocating platen presses not
    elsewhere provided for.


CLS 70/
TTL LOCKS

CLS 70/
TXT For purposes of this classification, a lock is defined as a securing device
    or a plurality of devices including mechanism requiring means unknown or
    inaccessible to or beyond the control of the public, or secret means, or
    secret knowledge, or a combination of such means and knowledge for
    successful normal operation to a releasing condition.  Generally, these
    devices embody fixed or movable blocking elements or impediments hindering
    or precluding unauthorized or suppertitious manipulation except by the
    means above noted, or secret knowledge, usually a special, prearranged or
    predetermined key or combination of movements.

    This class is essentially an element class but includes:

    (a)     Certain special securing contrivances of general utility for
    application or securement to some conventional structure to prevent normal
    manipulation of the structure such as hasps and portable securing
    mechanisms, as fetters, padlocks, etc.

    (b)     Certain special applications of locks to other conventional
    structures modified only sufficiently to provide a location therefor.

    (c)     Certain systemic arrangements of locks wherein the initial, basic
    or ultimate control is a lock, although portions of the arrangement may be
    controllable by other alternative means.

    (d)     Certain specially contrived devices, mechanisms and adjuncts
    associated with, part of, or ancillary or auxiliary to locks or their
    operating features.

    In its elemental aspects, this class includes the constituent construction
    of the lock, which may include structure responsive to other operating
    agents wherein initiation of operation is controllable by the lock either
    solely or alternatively, but constitutes a securing mechanism as an entity.
     The features of the elemental structure, both as an assembled entity and
    in its essential elements, as when combined with features designed to
    defeat surreptitious or unauthorized manipulation by external force, are
    also found in this class.

    DEFINITIONS OF TERMS USED

    BOLT

    A securing element mounted on one part and having a portion or portions
    movable to cooperative engagement with a keeper on another part to prevent
    relative movement between said parts.

    DEAD-BOLT

    An unbiased bolt normally at rest, whether or not so held, and movable only
    by a positively initiated external force.

    LATCH-OR LATCHING-BOLT

    One normally yieldably biased or urged by some form of constantly present
    potential force to seek one position and operable to another position
    against such force, but automatically returnable to its original position
    unless restrained.

    KEEPER

    A part to receive the movable portion of a bolt usually a socket, pocket,
    opening, ledge, abutment, seat, shoulder, etc.

    DOG

    A movable blocking element, other than a tumbler, in the form of a pawl or
    catch, adapted to releasably detain a movable part.

    COMBINATION

    The prearranged or predetermined secret or nonpublic succession or order of
    movement of blocking elements, or the peculiar arrangement or scheme of
    fixed or movable elements designed to secure against public operation or
    control.

    KEY

    A specially contrived implement for controlling or operating a lock and (1)
    having portions designed to pass fixed obstructions or to arrange movable
    impediments to allow operation of a securing device, or (2) embodying an
    unconventional design of predetermined secret or nonpublic origin.

    MASTER-KEY

    One designed for control of all of a plurality or series of lock operating
    mechanisms, each of which has its individually distinct operating means or
    implement.

    SUB-MASTER-KEY

    One designed for control of all of a limited number of a plurality or
    series of lock operating mechanisms and subordinate to a master key.

    CHANGE-KEY

    That key designed for operation of an individually distinct lock operating
    mechanism embodying a specific combination or design.

    PERMUTATION

    Variation or change of a combination to produce a different combination.

    WARD

    A fixed impediment in the path of movement of a key in its normal capacity
    as a lock operator.

    TUMBLER

    A movable impediment to the movement of a bolt or other movable element
    which may respond to an  operating element of corresponding complemental
    combination, or to a combination of movements to be so disposed as to
    provide an unimpeded path of movement of the bolt or other movable element.

    SEAL

    A device or mechanism designed to so interfere with the normal operation or
    manipulation of a securing arrangement as to show by rupture, visible
    external injury, or other disfigurement from its original condition, any
    unauthorized or surreptitious tampering, attack or manipulation.Included
    also in exception to the above definition are:

    NIPPERS

    Manually controlled portable devices for grasping, clamping, gripping or
    grappling an extremity of the human anatomy and by the application of
    suitable force and consequent imposition of pain placing the individual to
    whom the device is applied under the influence and control of another, as
    in the case of an arrested individual.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 460 for changeable
    exhibitors operated by the latching mechanism of doors, and subclass 330
    for keys merely carrying indicia.

    81,     Tools, subclass 15.9 for a tool specially adapted to manipulate a
    lock or portion thereof.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclasses 59+ for
    locks of special application to safes, and other bank protection devices,
    especially subclass 61, for devices for safes and vaults commonly known as
    pressure mechanisms (such mechanism operating to cam the closure tight in
    its jamb and usually serving to crack the door to an ajar position) in
    combination with lock mechanism.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 383+ for fluid handling apparatus
    combined with a lock or seal.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 153.01+ for locks combined with dispensing
    devices.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, appropriate subclasses, for bolts, seals and
    keepers, per se.


CLS 70/1
TXT Locks within the above definition not otherwise classified.


CLS 70/1.5
TXT Devices under the class definition applied to locks, or locked structures,
    which upon attack by an unauthorized force impose one or more additional
    impediments to the operation of the lock, or the device or devices
    controlled by the lock.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333+    and 416+, for devices which prevent or defeat attack and which are
    not actuated by the attack.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclass 30, for safes
    combined with auxiliary locks.


CLS 70/1.7
TXT Devices under subclass 1.5 wherein there is provided an additional
    positively actuated mechanism to release the impediment to allow authorized
    actuation of the lock. The mechanism is either a delayed actuating
    mechanism or has an operator which is under the control of an authorized
    person.


CLS 70/2
TXT Locks under the class definition of the strap or plate fastener type of
    general application for securing contiguously disposed parts, usually
    pivotally or hingedly connected to one part and releasably locked to a
    keeper on the other part, or releasably connected to the other part and
    locked to prevent relative release of the parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72      through 75, for trunk hasp locks.

    93,     for links to limit opening of doors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclasses 281+ for nonlocking hasps.


CLS 70/3
TXT Hasp locks under subclass 2 embodying a combination lock as the securing
    medium.


CLS 70/4
TXT Devices under subclass 3 wherein the lock is carried by the hasp.


CLS 70/5
TXT Devices under subclass 3 wherein the lock is carried by the cooperating
    keeper.


CLS 70/6
TXT Hasp locks under subclass 2 embodying a key operated lock as the securing
    medium.


CLS 70/7
TXT Devices under subclass 6 wherein the lock is carried by the hasp.


CLS 70/8
TXT Devices under subclass 7 wherein the keeper is encased by a suitable
    housing provided on the hasp.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102+,   for similarly arranged door locks.

    178,    for valve locks.

    232,    for knob locks.


CLS 70/9
TXT Devices under subclass 8 including a dead-bolt as the securing medium.


CLS 70/10
TXT Devices under subclass 8 including a latching bolt as the securing medium.


CLS 70/11
TXT Devices under subclass 7 wherein a dead-bolt is the securing medium.


CLS 70/12
TXT Devices under subclass 7 wherein a latching bolt is the securing medium.


CLS 70/13
TXT Devices under subclass 6 wherein the lock is carried by the keeper.


CLS 70/14
TXT Lock devices under the class definition for locking attachment to some
    conventional structure provided with means for detachably receiving such
    devices, or attachable without modificaiton of the receiving structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    371,    for cylinder locks employed in this capacity.

    424,    426 and 428, for portable key-hole guards.

    430,    for portable key securers, fasteners or retainers.


CLS 70/15
TXT Portable lock devices under subclass 14 embodying some mechanical medium
    for securing an article to prevent its removal from its locked location,
    generally comprising some flexible medium which may be suitably attached
    to, passed through, or may embrace the article or part of the article to be
    secured and is adapted for anchoring to some other object or part to
    prevent separation of the two.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 712+ for a device for controlling,
    restricting, or handling an animal, especially subclasses 769+ for hitching
    or tethering, subclass 811 for a flexible band or strand to prevent tail
    switching, and subclasses 814+ for an animal-carried restraint.


CLS 70/16
TXT Devices under subclass 15 adapted to the human anatomy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 816+, especially subclass 819 for a
    hopple of the shackle type specially adapted to domestic livestock.


CLS 70/17
TXT Devices under subclass 16 which by the application of suitable force and
    consequent imposition of pain places an individual under the influence and
    control of another, as in the case of an arrested individual.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 64+ for similarly operated clamping mechanisms.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 801+ for a catching and holding tool.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 86.4+ for
    grapples.


CLS 70/18
TXT Devices under subclass 15 in the form generally of rings or of continuous
    configuration when locked.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    260,    for shackles employed as spare tire locks for automobiles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclass 86 for shackles for
    securing chains.

    114,    Ships, subclass 114 for shackles employed for securing sails and
    rigging.

    278,    Land Vehicles:  Animal Draft Appliances, subclasses 96+ for
    shackles employed in securing draw straps to whiffle-trees.


CLS 70/19
TXT Portable securing devices under subclass 14 of the jaw type embodying two
    or more jaws which may be drawn together by applied external force and
    impose a force through the jaws upon the article to which applied, having
    suitable lock mechanism to prevent unclamping.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 318+ and 487 for jaw fixing means.


CLS 70/20
TXT Portable locking units or entities under subclass 14 comprising a body
    containing lock mechanism, such body having a shackle, link or bolt adapted
    for releasable securement to the conventional structure, one poriton of the
    shackle, link or bolt cooperating with the lock to prevent unauthorized or
    surreptitious removal or separation of one or more parts of the shackle,
    link or bolt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57+,    for special applications of padlocks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclasses 328, 329 and 330, for seals embodying
    characteristic padlock configurations or features.


CLS 70/21
TXT Padlocks under subclass 20 embodying either combination or key controlled
    securing mechanism, or both of said mechanisms, either one or both of which
    may effect release.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284+,   for the association of the two types of operating mechanisms in
    their specific aspects.


CLS 70/22
TXT Padlocks under subclass 20 embodying only combination control for the
    locking mechanism to effect release.


CLS 70/23
TXT Devices under subclass 22 wherein there is no distinctive shackle, but in
    which one part of the lock or contiguous parts may be employed as a shackle.


CLS 70/24
TXT Devices under subclass 22 wherein the shackle is rigid.


CLS 70/25
TXT Devices under subclass 24 in which the shackle has sliding cooperation with
    the body of the padlock and is not bodily removable from the body.


CLS 70/26
TXT Devices under subclass 25 wherein the shackle is completely removable from
    the body of the pad-lock.


CLS 70/27
TXT Devices under subclass 24 wherein the shackle has one end or portion
    thereof pivoted to the lock body and no significant securing detent
    provided for hereafter.


CLS 70/28
TXT Devices under subclass 27 secured in the body by a sliding detent.


CLS 70/29
TXT Devices under subclass 27 secured in the body by a swinging detent.


CLS 70/30
TXT Devices under subclass 22 wherein the shackle is flexible in the form of a
    chain, woven wire, cable, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    for fetters.

    49+,    for similar structure, key controlled.

    93,     for door shackles.

    259+,   for portable devices of similar characteristics, employed as
    automobile spare wheel and tire locks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 167, for buckle locks.


CLS 70/31
TXT Padlocks under subclass 20 embodying key controlled mechanism as the
    securing medium.


CLS 70/32
TXT Devices under subclass 31 wherein there is no distinctive shackle but a
    portion or portions of the body may be so brought together as to provide a
    part which may take the place of the shackle.


CLS 70/33
TXT Devices under subclass 32 in which the housing or body of the padlock has
    an extension with which a suitable bolt or detent cooperates.


CLS 70/34
TXT Devices under subclass 32, wherein when the parts are assembled in locked
    condition a single stem or shank is presented.


CLS 70/35
TXT Devices under subclass 31 wherein the shackle is rigid.


CLS 70/36
TXT Devices under subclass 35 divided into two parts which when brought
    together in the locked condition will present a continuous shackle.


CLS 70/37
TXT Devices under subclass 36 wherein rigid extensions are provided on the lock
    body in such a manner as to permit of opening and closing as a pair of jaws.


CLS 70/38
TXT Devices under subclass 35 which slide with respect to the lock body.


CLS 70/39
TXT Devices under subclass 38 completely removable from the lock body.


CLS 70/40
TXT Devices under subclass 38 movable in an arcuate path in its locking and
    unlocking movements.


CLS 70/41
TXT Devices under subclass 35 pivotally connected to the lock body.


CLS 70/42
TXT Devices under subclass 41 secured in the lock body by a sliding detent.


CLS 70/43
TXT Devices under subclass 42 which engage only the free or freely movable
    portion of the shackle.


CLS 70/44
TXT Devices under subclass 42 which engage only the pivoted or hinged end of
    the shackle.


CLS 70/45
TXT Devices under subclass 41 secured within the lock body by a swinging detent.


CLS 70/46
TXT Devices under subclass 45 wherein the free or freely movable end only of
    the shackle is engaged.


CLS 70/47
TXT Devices under subclass 45 wherein the pivoted or hinged end only of the
    shackle is engaged.


CLS 70/48
TXT Devices under subclass 41 movable in an arcuate path, with respect to the
    lock body.


CLS 70/49
TXT Devices under subclass 31 wherein the shackle is flexible in the form of a
    chain, woven wire, cable, etc.


CLS 70/50
TXT Padlocks under subclass 20 wherein a sealing mechanism is so arranged as to
    provide for detection of unauthorized or surreptitious tampering.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclasses 307-331, for seals, per se.


CLS 70/51
TXT Subject matter under subclass 20 relating to parts, accessories,
    attachments, and adjuncts.


CLS 70/52
TXT Devices under subclass 51 comprising padlock housings, casings or bodies of
    particular construction wherein the locking mechanism is not an essential
    feature of the construction.


CLS 70/53
TXT Subject matter under subclass 51 comprising that portion of a padlock which
    constitutes the movable part adapted for association with some structure
    having suitable provision for the reception thereof and which when
    associated in locked condition with its padlock housing, casing, or body,
    provides a substantially enclosing, encircling or embracing part, such as
    to present a continuous unopened or unbroken structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 814 for means to clamp together a plurality
    of skis with or without poles for storage or other nonuse purposes, there
    being no locking means claimed for the clamp.


CLS 70/54
TXT Devices under subclass 51 intended for the protection of padlocks from
    injury or to prevent padlocks from injuring parts to which they are
    attached.


CLS 70/55
TXT Devices under subclass 54 in the forms of sheaths or envelopes which are
    constructed to practically completely embrace the padlock.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    455,    for key hole covers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, subclasses 154+ for a
    flaccid protective cover which is configured for and supported by the
    article it protects.


CLS 70/56
TXT Devices under subclass 54 comprising shielding devices in the forms of
    roofs or open covers or canopies to protect a padlock generally from the
    elements.


CLS 70/57
TXT Locks under the class definition which are specially applied to some part
    or object which has provision for the accomodation of the lock and wherein
    modification is only of a character to accommodate the lock.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 2 for book locks and
    subclasses 166+ for buckle locks.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 15 for license plate
    locks.

    200,    Electricity, Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 42+ for locks
    for circuit makers and breakers, and subclasses 61.64+ for lock actuated
    circuit makers and breakers.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclass 207 for locks, for bottles and jar caps.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclass 108, for bung locks.

    235,    Registers, subclass 27, for locks peculiarly adapted to render a
    cash register transaction key inoperative.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 176, for locks for securing whips in a
    socket.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclass 445 for a telephone lock.

    402,    Binder Device Releasably Engaging Aperture or Notch of Sheet,
    subclass 2 for a device of Class 402 in combination with a locking means
    which means requires some secret knowledge or key for release.


CLS 70/57.1
TXT For antitheft signaling device on protected article:

    Locks under subclass 57 for securing to an article a detectable device
    which is intended to hinder or discourage unauthorized removal of the
    article from an area.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 704+ for a readily
    interlocking, two-part fastener which utilizes a nonspecialized tool to
    disengage the components of the fastener from each other.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 572 for a lock claimed in
    combination with a detail of a detectable device on a protected article.


CLS 70/58
TXT Locks under subclass 57 specifically provided for securing a portable
    article to prevent its unauthorized or surreptitious removal, or combined
    with the article to prevent movement of a portion thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 4+, for article locking racks when the
    nature and structure of the support are significant.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 551+ for a support comprising antitheft means.


CLS 70/59
TXT Devices under subclass 58 which secure canes, umbrellas, apparel and other
    similar things.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 551+ for a support comprising antitheft means.


CLS 70/60
TXT Devices under subclass 58 which are intended to secure a portable robe,
    such as a lap robe.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 6 and 7, for robe rail locks, and
    subclasses 8 and 9, for robe rail clamp locks.


CLS 70/61
TXT Devices under subclass 58 to accommodate portable tools such as hammers and
    other headed tools, wherein the tools may be so received and locked
    together as to prevent their use, operation or removal.


CLS 70/62
TXT Subject matter under subclass 58 wherein the articles are adapted to be
    retained in a stand.


CLS 70/63
TXT Devices under subclass 58 in which the articles are in the form of
    receptacles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclass 52, for safes
    combined with means to lock them to supports.


CLS 70/64
TXT Devices under subclass 63 in the form of a bag or sheath.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    383,    Flexible Bags, appropriate subclasses for a lock combined with a
    bag having significant bag structure beyond that necessary to accommodate
    the lock.


CLS 70/65
TXT Devices under subclass 64 wherein the bag has a flexible throat which may
    be collapsed in such a manner as to obstruct or occlude entrance to the
    receptacle when the locking construction is in locked condition.


CLS 70/66
TXT Devices under subclass 64 wherein there is provided a mouth in the form of
    rigid jaws suitably pivoted together in such a manner as to be placed in
    contiguous relation to prevent access to the interior of the receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclass 120 for an article of
    hand luggage having means to prevent unauthorized opening, which means may
    be a lock combined with luggage structure beyond that is necessary to
    accommodate the lock.


CLS 70/67
TXT Devices under subclass 64 in the form of attache or brief-cases,
    portfolios, and receptacles of similar character.


CLS 70/68
TXT Devices under subclass 67, wherein the fastening elements are of the
    interengageable slide fastener type, and the operator or fastening elements
    therefor are locked.


CLS 70/69
TXT Devices under subclass 63 of the trunk and suitcase type.


CLS 70/70
TXT Devices under subclass 69 wherein one portion of the locking construction
    comprises a keeper in the form of a projecting fixed or movable lug.


CLS 70/71
TXT Devices under subclass 69 embodying bolt elements as the securing device.


CLS 70/72
TXT Devices under subclass 71 effected by operation of a hasp.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for hasp locks.


CLS 70/73
TXT Devices under subclass 69 wherein a link and lever or link and hasp
    comprise the securing element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for hasp locks, per se, of definite characteristics.


CLS 70/74
TXT Devices under subclass 69 including an element in the form of a hasp.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for specific locking constructions applicable to hasps of general
    use.


CLS 70/75
TXT Devices under subclass 74 wherein the locking mechanism is carried by the
    hasp.


CLS 70/76
TXT Devices under subclass 69 embodying a loop element as the securing medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93,     for similar loop types employed upon doors.


CLS 70/77
TXT Devices under subclass 57 applied to closures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240+,   for locks for hoods of automobiles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclass 35 for a key controlled
    movable closure, and subclass 503 for a closure panel modified to
    accommodate a lock within or upon it.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclasses 59+, for
    locks for special application to safes, bank protection and related devices
    not considered of general application.


CLS 70/78
TXT Devices under subclass 77 for securing the closures of cabinets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 107.5, 216 and 217+, for
    cabinet closures with gang-bar type locking or latching means, subclass 215
    for cabinet closures with lock or latch selector-operators and subclass 333
    for cabinet drawers with locks or latches.


CLS 70/79
TXT Devices under subclass 78 wherein the keeper is in the form of a projecting
    lug and is received in a suitable opening and so secured, mainly, locking
    devices wherein the locking elements are disposed within the housing of the
    locking mechanism or within the projecting lug.


CLS 70/80
TXT Devices under subclass 79 secured by engagement from the exterior of the
    lug.


CLS 70/81
TXT Devices under subclass 78 including a projectable bolt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100     and 112+, for similar devices on doors.


CLS 70/82
TXT Devices under subclass 81 embodying plural bolts.


CLS 70/83
TXT Devices under subclass 81 which have two or more directions of movement.


CLS 70/84
TXT Devices under subclass 81 which swing and also has a hooked end adapted to
    provide engagement between the bolt and keeper.


CLS 70/85
TXT Devices under subclass 77 applied to drawers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 107.5, 216 and 217+, for
    drawers with gang bar type locking or latching means, subclass 215 for
    drawers with lock or latch selector operators and subclass 333 for drawers
    with locks or latches.


CLS 70/86
TXT Devices under subclass 85 wherein the securing element is a dead-bolt.


CLS 70/87
TXT Devices under subclass 85 which are employed particularly in trade
    counters, and embodying quickly and readily manipulable locking elements.


CLS 70/88
TXT Devices under subclass 87 controlled by a combination lock or combination
    of movements.


CLS 70/89
TXT Devices under subclass 77 applied to window structures.


CLS 70/90
TXT Devices under subclass 89 applied to sliding sashes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95+,    for similar structure in sliding doors.


CLS 70/91
TXT Devices under subclass 77 applied to doors, generally of substantial
    construction, such as are normally used in houses, buildings, and vehicular
    constructions of fairly large proportions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78+,    for cabinet door locks.


CLS 70/92
TXT Devices under subclass 91, for doors in which the locking construction is
    capable of preventing ingress except by proper key or combination control
    but wherein the securing mechanism may be readily released from the inside
    of the building.


CLS 70/93
TXT Devices under subclass 91 which provide for a limited opening or positive
    securement in closed or partly closed condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89+,    for similar locks applied to windows.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclass 60, for
    devices to lock the door ajar.


CLS 70/94
TXT Devices under subclass 91 including bars or rods which may be suitably
    associated with a door and so arranged generally, in an inclined position,
    as to take into a suitable keeper or to wedgingly engage a floor or part of
    the door frame to substantially brace the door against opening, and embody
    lock control operation for releasing condition from the exterior of the
    door.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclasses 338+, for nonlocking braces.


CLS 70/95
TXT Devices under subclass 91 having sliding movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90,     for similarly operating locking mechanisms for windows.


CLS 70/96
TXT Devices under subclass 95 wherein the keeper element is always extended for
    association with the locking construction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for similar structure in trunks.

    79+,    for similar structure in cabinet closures.


CLS 70/97
TXT Subject matter under subclass 96 wherein the extending keeper is rigid.


CLS 70/98
TXT Subject matter under subclass 96 wherein the keeper may be normally
    retained in a non-extending position but may be extended for cooperative
    engagement with the locking structure.


CLS 70/99
TXT Subject matter under subclass 95 including a projecting or extending bolt
    which may be received by a keeper.


CLS 70/100
TXT Subject matter under subclass 95 wherein the securing element comprises a
    bolt which may be projected to its operative or extended position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81+,    for similar constructions employed in cabinets.


CLS 70/101
TXT Devices under subclass 91, for association with swinging doors.


CLS 70/102
TXT Subject matter under subclass 101, wherein the lock housing and the keeper
    have cooperating parts which are adapted to interfit in a manner to prevent
    relative movement.


CLS 70/103
TXT Devices under subclass 102 having plural dead-bolts.


CLS 70/104
TXT Devices under subclass 102 having a single sliding dead-bolt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for similar structure in keylock hasps.


CLS 70/105
TXT Devices under subclass 102 having a swinging dead-bolt.


CLS 70/106
TXT Devices under subclass 102 having a locking latch or latching-bolt.


CLS 70/107
TXT Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein there are incorporated within the
    same housing both a latching-bolt and a dead-bolt, either independently
    operable or having cooperative association.


CLS 70/108
TXT Devices under subclass 107 having more than one dead-bolt.


CLS 70/109
TXT Devices under subclass 107 having more than one latching-bolt.


CLS 70/110
TXT Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein the dead-bolt in its operative
    position will dog and thereby prevent movement of the latching-bolt.


CLS 70/111
TXT Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein the latching-bolt may have a
    manually controllable dogging device.


CLS 70/113
TXT Devices under subclass 101 having more than one dead-bolt.


CLS 70/114
TXT Devices under subclass 113 wherein one or more of the bolts have either
    sliding or swinging movement or movement of a character having both sliding
    and swinging movements embodying lock operation with or without manual
    operation.


CLS 70/115
TXT Subject matter under subclass 114 wherein the mechanism is controllable or
    operable only by a combination device or combination of movements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286+,   for combination operating mechanism characteristic structure.


CLS 70/116
TXT Subject matter under subclass 114 wherein the operation and control is
    effected by a key operable mechanism only.


CLS 70/117
TXT Subject matter under subclass 113 wherein one or more of the bolts having a
    sliding and rotary movement to their securing condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclass 4, for similarly operable plural bolts
    employed for fastening closures with no significant locking structure.


CLS 70/118
TXT Devices under subclass 113 including such mechanisms as have alternative
    manual operation and control.


CLS 70/119
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118, wherein the operation or control is
    effected by a combination mechanism only.


CLS 70/120
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118, wherein the operation or control is
    effected by a key lock only.


CLS 70/121
TXT Devices under subclass 113 having swinging or pivotal movement and may be
    alternative manual control.


CLS 70/122
TXT Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the operation and control is
    effected by a combination mechanism only.


CLS 70/123
TXT Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the operation and control is
    effected by key operation only.


CLS 70/124
TXT Devices under subclass 101 having a single dead-bolt.


CLS 70/125
TXT Devices under subclass 124 having both a sliding and swinging movement, and
    may have alternative manual control.


CLS 70/126
TXT Subject matter under subclass 125 wherein the bolt is operable or
    controllable by a combination mechanism only.


CLS 70/127
TXT Subject matter under subclass 125, wherein the bolt is operable or
    controllable by key controlled mechanism only.


CLS 70/128
TXT Devices under subclass 124 having both a sliding and rotary movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140,    for locking mechanism having threading engagement with the keeper.


CLS 70/129
TXT Devices under subclass 124 having a sliding dead-bolt and also includes
    such mechanisms as may have alternative manual operation and control.


CLS 70/130
TXT Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein the bolt is displaceable in more
    than one direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83,     for similarly moving bolts in cabinet structure locks.


CLS 70/131
TXT Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein there is provided an auxiliary
    mechanism to cooperate with the keeper to provide an effective interlock
    between the bolt and keeper, whether the auxiliary securing means is
    incorporated in the bolt or keeper.


CLS 70/132
TXT Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein the bolt is curved and
    consequently moves in a curved path in accomplishing its securing function.


CLS 70/133
TXT Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein the operation of the bolt is
    effected by a combination mechanism only.


CLS 70/134
TXT Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein the operation is effected by key
    lock operation only.


CLS 70/135
TXT Subject matter under subclass 124 having a swinging dead-bolt including
    structures having alternative manual operation and control.


CLS 70/136
TXT Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein the operation of the effective
    portion of the bolt is such as to provide an interlock between the keeper
    and lock housing.


CLS 70/137
TXT Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein the bolt is provided with a
    hooked end which attains the securing function with the keeper.


CLS 70/138
TXT Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein the operation of the bolt is
    effected by a combination mechanism only.


CLS 70/139
TXT Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein the operation is effected by key
    lock operation only.


CLS 70/140
TXT Subject matter under subclass 124 wherein the securing function is
    accomplished by an element which is threaded or has threaded engagement
    with the keeper.


CLS 70/141
TXT Devices under subclass 101 having latch-bolts.


CLS 70/142
TXT Subject matter under subclass 141 including auxiliary mechanism for
    securing an interlocking relationship between the effective end of the
    latching-bolt and its keeper.


CLS 70/143
TXT Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the bolt may be projected beyond
    its normal biased position to become, in effect, a dead-bolt, thereby
    requiring an additional manipulation beyond its usual extreme latching
    condition to assume locked condition and accordingly requiring an
    additional manipulation to return it to its normal extreme latching
    condition.


CLS 70/144
TXT Devices under subclass 141 normally biased to latching condition by means
    of a spring.


CLS 70/145
TXT Subject matter under subclass 144 wherein there is provided an alternative
    manual operator or manipulator, whereby the device may be used as an
    ordinary latching construction.


CLS 70/149
TXT Devices under subclass 145 having a manual operator on the exterior side of
    the door.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218+,   for locking constructions which accomplish a similar effect upon a
    handle, hand-wheel, or knob, and not specifically associated with locking
    mechanism of this character.


CLS 70/150
TXT Subject matter under subclass 145 having mechanisms to dog the bolt or its
    operating connections with the manipulator to prevent retraction of the
    bolt unless controlled by manual means from the interior side of the door
    or locking control from the exterior.


CLS 70/151
TXT Subject matter under subclass 150 wherein the dogging function is obtained
    automatically by the tripping engagement of some control in the closing
    movement of the door.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148,    for similar structure associated with a dogged external manipulator.


CLS 70/152
TXT Subject matter under subclass 150 wherein the dogging function is obtained
    by the operation of some manipulator or other manual control.


CLS 70/153
TXT Subject matter under subclass 150 wherein the dogging function is effective
    only upon the operating connections between the manipulator and the bolt.


CLS 70/154
TXT Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the bolt is projected by the
    effect of gravity, and may have alternative manual control.


CLS 70/155
TXT Devices under subclass 154 having the projecting mechanism controlled by a
    lock.


CLS 70/156
TXT Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the locking mechanism may be a
    combination or key controlled device, either alternatively or concurrently.


CLS 70/157
TXT Subject matter under subclass 156 wherein the bolt is released by tripping
    detents, pawls or catches which cooperate with the bolt, the door or the
    door jamb.


CLS 70/158
TXT Devices under subclass 77, for covers, lids, caps, or encasing shields,
    adapted normally to prevent access to the interior of some receptacle, to
    encase some other device, etc., other than trunk and suitcase covers,
    cabinet closures, windows, doors, and automobile hoods, wherein there is
    only sufficient modification of the cover, lid, etc. as to accommodate the
    lock devices or construction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    178,    for valve encasing cover locks.

    232,    for knob encasing cover locks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and jars, subclass 207, for locks for bottle caps.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 55+, 86.1+, and 315+ for metallic closures
    having structure beyond that necessary to mount or position a lockable
    closure or to cooperate with a lock.


CLS 70/159
TXT Subject matter under subclass 158, in which the cover is pivoted.


CLS 70/160
TXT Subject matter under subclass 159, wherein the lock is carried by the cover.


CLS 70/161
TXT Devices under subclass 160 enbodying deadbolts.


CLS 70/162
TXT Devices under subclass 160 enbodying latching bolts.


CLS 70/163
TXT Subject matter under subclass 158, wherein the cover is removable from its
    seat.


CLS 70/164
TXT Subject matter under subclass 163 wherein the locking mechanism is located
    outside of the cover.


CLS 70/165
TXT Subject matter under subclass 163 wherein the cover when freely movable is
    seated and locked.


CLS 70/166
TXT Subject matter under subclass 163 in which the cover is set directly upon
    its seat.


CLS 70/167
TXT Subject matter under subclass 166 wherein the lock is carried by the cover.


CLS 70/168
TXT Devices under subclass 167 including deadbolts.


CLS 70/169
TXT Devices under subclass 167 including latchbolts.


CLS 70/170
TXT Subject matter under subclass 163 wherein the cover prior to its final
    disposal upon its seat is moved to a predetermined subsequent engagement.


CLS 70/171
TXT Subject matter under subclass 170 wherein the lock is carried by the cover.


CLS 70/172
TXT Devices under subclass 171 including deadbolts.


CLS 70/173
TXT Devices under subclass 171 including latchbolts.


CLS 70/174
TXT Subject matter under subclass 57 associated with or carried by control and
    machine elements, wherein the control or machine element is only
    sufficiently modified to accommodate the locking construction.


CLS 70/175
TXT Subject matter under subclass 174 relating to valve construction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 384.2+, for locking mechanism, which
    provides a handle or manipulator for the valve in unlocked condition, the
    moving of the lock manipulator simultaneously operates the valve or there
    is specific, significant valve structure.


CLS 70/176
TXT Subject matter under subclass 175 wherein the valve is secured in
    stationary position when locked.


CLS 70/177
TXT Devices under subclass 176 comprising an external device brought into
    suitable engagement with a part of the valve.


CLS 70/178
TXT Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein there is an encasing cover or
    part which prevents movement of the valve and access to an operating
    portion thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158+,   for encasing locking shields.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 42, for encasing mechanisms which
    prevent operation of gas stove burner valves.


CLS 70/179
TXT Devices under subclass 176 having the locking mechanism carried by the
    valve housing.


CLS 70/180
TXT Devices under subclass 176 having a padlock.


CLS 70/181
TXT Devices under subclass 174 for securing shiftable or reciprocatory rods.


CLS 70/182
TXT Devices under subclass 174 applied to a rotary shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252,    for shaft locks applied to automotive vehicles and which include a
    switch as an additional feature.


CLS 70/183
TXT Devices under subclass 182 which secure the shaft in stationary condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176,    for similarly operating devices in valve locks.

    210,    for such structure in knob-locks.


CLS 70/184
TXT Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein the locking mechanism is carried
    by a casing, housing or bearing for the shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179,    for similar structure in valve locks.


CLS 70/185
TXT Subject matter under subclass 184 having dead-bolts.


CLS 70/186
TXT Subject matter under subclass 184 having latch bolts.


CLS 70/187
TXT Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein the locking mechanism is carried
    by the shaft itself.


CLS 70/188
TXT Subject matter under subclass 182 wherein the prime mover portion of the
    shaft will move freely when locked without transmitting force to the
    effective portion.


CLS 70/189
TXT Subject matter under subclass 188 wherein there is a clutching mechanism
    for connecting and disconnecting the two portions of the shaft and the
    clutching mechanism is carried by the shaft.


CLS 70/190
TXT Devices under subclass 174 relating to associatin with gear mechanism.


CLS 70/191
TXT Subject matter under subclass 190 wherein the gear is of planetary type.


CLS 70/192
TXT Devices under subclass 174 relating to levers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207+,   for levers which are operating connection for a handle or other
    similar manipulator and the ultimate effect is to prevent manipulation of
    the handle, etc.


CLS 70/193
TXT Devices under subclass 192 in which there is a guide for the lever.


CLS 70/194
TXT Devices under subclass 193 in the form of a quadrant or of arcuate
    configuration.


CLS 70/195
TXT Subject matter under subclass 194 wherein the locking device is carried by
    the lever.


CLS 70/196
TXT Devices under subclass 193 having a fixed keeper to which or in which the
    lever is received.


CLS 70/197
TXT Subject matter under subclass 196 wherein the locking device is carried by
    the lever.


CLS 70/198
TXT Subject matter under subclass 192 wherein the locking mechanism secures
    more than one lever concurrently.


CLS 70/199
TXT Subject matter under subclass 198 wherein the locking mechanism is
    externally supported with respect to the levers.


CLS 70/200
TXT Devices under subclass 199 including a padlock.


CLS 70/201
TXT Devices under subclass 192 for a single lever.


CLS 70/202
TXT Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the device is externally disposed
    with respect to the lever.


CLS 70/203
TXT Devices under subclass 202 including a padlock.


CLS 70/204
TXT Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the lever comprises
    disconnectible, lock retained portions.


CLS 70/205
TXT Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the lever comprises foldable lock
    retained sections.


CLS 70/206
TXT Devices under subclass 201 universally mounted, lock fixed or resisted.


CLS 70/207
TXT Devices under subclass 174 of the character of handles, handwheels or knobs.


CLS 70/208
TXT Devices under subclass 207, lock seated in a concavity or disposed in such
    position against a body with which it is associated, it may not be grasped
    by a hand for manipulation.


CLS 70/209
TXT Subject matter under subclass 207 wherein the controlling function is
    accomplished by rotation or swinging.


CLS 70/210
TXT Devices under subclass 209 secured in stationary condition.


CLS 70/211
TXT Devices under subclass 210 in which the securing mechanism is external to
    the manipulator.


CLS 70/212
TXT Devices under subclass 211 including a padlock.


CLS 70/213
TXT Devices under subclass 210 in which the control mechanism is a combination
    lock.


CLS 70/214
TXT Devices under subclass 213 including a plurality of selectively operable
    push pins.


CLS 70/215
TXT Devices under subclass 210 wherein the locking mechanism comprises a key
    controlled lock carried by the manipulator.


CLS 70/216
TXT Devices under subclass 215 having the key lock coaxially mounted with
    respect to the manipulator.


CLS 70/217
TXT Devices under subclass 216 in which the securing medium comprises an
    axially movable bolt.


CLS 70/218
TXT Devices under subclass 209 wherein the manipulator when locked will freely
    move so as to have no effect upon the portion normally associated with it
    for the transmission of force or power.


CLS 70/219
TXT Devices under subclass 218 including a combination controlled lock.


CLS 70/220
TXT Devices under subclass 219 employing a plurality of push pins or buttons.


CLS 70/221
TXT Devices under subclass 218 in which the locking mechanism comprises a key
    lock which is supported in the manipulator.


CLS 70/222
TXT Devices under subclass 221 including a coaxially disposed clutching
    connection between two relatively movable portions of the securing
    mechanism.


CLS 70/223
TXT Devices under subclass 222 being axially shiftable.


CLS 70/224
TXT Devices under subclass 207 which involve the particular association of the
    lock control with the manipulator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    367+,   for arrangements for securing cylinder locks in removable
    association.


CLS 70/225
TXT Devices under subclass 174 associated with a load supporting or ground
    traversing wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for portable wheel locking devices, usually identified as "chocks",
    which may hamper the normal free rotative movement or travel of a wheel.


CLS 70/226
TXT Devices under subclass 225 to prevent the free rotation of the wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for fetters.

    20+,    for padlocks which may be applied to a wheel to prevent its
    rotation.

    30,     for padlocked flexible shackles.

    49,     for key controlled flexible shackles.

    58+,    for similar devices for other portable articles.

    234,    for cycle anchors.

    259+,   for spar tire or wheel locks.


CLS 70/227
TXT Devices under subclass 226 to traverse the gap between the spokes of a
    wheel.


CLS 70/228
TXT Devices under subclass 226 of the brake type.


CLS 70/229
TXT Devices under subclass 174 specifically designed for association with a
    bolt, nut, stud, or stud-cap employed to fasten two parts together.


CLS 70/230
TXT Devices under subclass 229 having a fixed or interlocked relationship
    between the two parts.


CLS 70/231
TXT Devices under subclass 229 wherein when the locking function is
    accomplished there is free relative movement between the parts sought to be
    secured.


CLS 70/232
TXT Devices under subclass 229 incased to preclude access thereto in locked
    condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158+    and 178+, for similarly functioning constructions.


CLS 70/233
TXT Devices under subclass 57 applicable to ground traversing cycles of the
    character of bicycles, tricycles, etc., wherein locomotion is prevented.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182+,   for locking mechanisms for steering posts of cycles which are in
    effect rotary shafts.

    207+,   for locking mechanisms designed to prevent the free operation of
    the usual steering handle or to provide for free relative movement between
    the handle and the shaft to prevent controllable steering of the cycle.


CLS 70/234
TXT Devices under subclass 233 including fixation anchors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for fetters.

    58+,    for similar portable article securing devices.

    225+,   for securing the wheel of a cycle.


CLS 70/235
TXT Devices under subclass 233 associated with locking stands, usually carried
    by the cycle to maintain it in a locked position on the stand.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 297, for particular props or steadying
    devices combined with locking means.


CLS 70/236
TXT Devices under subclass 233 securing portions of the usual driving mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    190,    for locking means for gears.


CLS 70/237
TXT Devices under subclass 57 which secure some part or parts of self-motivated
    vehicles of the character of automobiles, motor boats, air vehicles,
    submerged vehicles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174+,   for parts of the automotive vehicle which may take the form of a
    machine or control element of general application in other relationships.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 395, for safety securing mechanisms
    for railway cars.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 287+ for a motor vehicle provided with a
    safety-promoting means which is for the purpose of preventing unauthorized
    or unintended access to or use of the vehicle, and note that in indented
    subclass 289 the means comprises a device, mechanism, or system which may
    operate a locking means for a movable or removable closure member of the
    vehicle.


CLS 70/238
TXT Devices under subclass 237 to secure two or more moving parts.


CLS 70/239
TXT Devices under subclass 238 including an electric switch.


CLS 70/240
TXT Devices under subclass 237 preventing opening of an encasing member, such
    as a hood.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158+,   for locking means employed in or with covers and encasing shields.


CLS 70/241
TXT Devices under subclass 240 including an electric switch.


CLS 70/242
TXT Devices under subclass 237 including a valve controlling transmission of
    the fuel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175     through 180, for similar locking devices.


CLS 70/243
TXT Devices under subclass 242 including an electric switch.


CLS 70/244
TXT Devices under subclass 242 includes securing mechanism for a cap or cover
    of the filling or inlet port of a fuel container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158+,   for cover locks which may be applied to covers of fuel tanks.


CLS 70/245
TXT Devices under subclass 237 applied to a movable part of a transmission.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    192+,   for devices applied to the shifting lever.


CLS 70/246
TXT Devices under subclass 245 which secure the cover of the transmission to
    the body thereof.


CLS 70/247
TXT Devices under subclass 245 wherein the transmission is of the selective
    type embodying shift rods, forks or blocks.


CLS 70/248
TXT Devices under subclass 247 including an electric switch.


CLS 70/249
TXT Subject matter under subclass 245 relating to transmissions of the
    planetary type.


CLS 70/250
TXT Devices under subclass 249 including an electric switch.


CLS 70/251
TXT Devices under subclass 245 including an electric switch.


CLS 70/252
TXT Devices under subclass 237 includes steering gear, or steering arm, and a
    circuit maker and breaker for controlling an electrical circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182+,   for steering shaft locking mechanism.


CLS 70/253
TXT Subject matter under subclass 237 relating to the pilot wheel or its
    control linkage from force applied to the steering gear, the securement
    being effected upon a part beyond the steering arm.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14+,    for portable securing devices which may be so applied.


CLS 70/254
TXT Subject matter under subclass 237 relating to control levers with which
    there may be associated an electric switch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    192+,   for locking mechanism for levers.


CLS 70/255
TXT Devices under subclass 237 for controlling in addition to an electric
    switch, some element other than those hereinbefore provided for.


CLS 70/256
TXT Devices under subclass 237 for remote control elements.


CLS 70/257
TXT Devices under subclass 256 including an electric switch.


CLS 70/258
TXT Devices under subclass 237 for accessories.


CLS 70/259
TXT Devices under subclass 258 applicable to the spare or mounted wheel or tire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14+,    for portable devices as fetters, shackles, and clamps.

    158+,   for cover locks.

    225+,   for wheel locks.

    234,    for cycle anchors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclasses 400+, for disclosures
    involving fender wells.


CLS 70/260
TXT Devices under subclass 259 relating to the spare or mounted tire or rim
    only.


CLS 70/261
TXT Devices under subclass 57 for seats to prevent the use thereof as seats.


CLS 70/262
TXT Systems of locking mechanisms under the class definition wherein the
    ultimate control is a locking mechanism although intermediate controls may
    be by manual or locking means or wherein a plurality of locking mechanisms
    may be controlled in a certain predetermined specified order, where the
    individual locking construction is not of the essence.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    337+,   for arrangements which involve a plurality of operating implements
    such as keys which may have primary and/or subsidiary controlling effects.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 15+ for lock systems for
    jail type closures.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 289 for a motor vehicle provided with a
    safety-promoting means which is for the purpose of preventing unauthorized
    or unintended access to or use of the vehicle and wherein the means
    comprises a device, mechanism, or system which may operate a locking means
    for a movable or removable closure member of the vehicle.


CLS 70/263
TXT Subject matter under subclass 262 arranged in such relationship as to
    involve the operation and control.


CLS 70/264
TXT Subject matter under subclass 263 wherein one or more of a plurality of
    locking devices or subsidiary devices are operable from a central locking
    control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 215 for cabinets with a
    plurality of locked or latched components which can be unlatched or
    unlocked from a central location.


CLS 70/265
TXT Devices under subclass 263 which require successive or serial operation and
    control.


CLS 70/266
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to the operating
    elements in cooperative combination.


CLS 70/267
TXT Devices under subclass 266 including mechanism providing for operation
    after a predetermined time interval has elapsed, the locking mechanism
    being primarily under the control of the time mechanism.


CLS 70/268
TXT Subject matter under subclass 267 wherein the delay interval is positively
    initiated by some movement or control of the locking mechanism or in
    response to the completion of the operation of the locking mechanism.


CLS 70/269
TXT Subject matter under subclass 268 in which the ultimate locking mechanism
    release is effected at the end of a predetermined time interval.


CLS 70/270
TXT Subject matter under subclass 268 in which the releasing interval is
    automatically repeated permitting of release of the locking mechanism at
    predetermined repeating intervals.


CLS 70/271
TXT Subject matter under subclass 267 in which the motivating means comprises
    some electrical means.


CLS 70/272
TXT Subject matter under subclass 267 wherein the control elements are
    essentially of clockwork construction.


CLS 70/273
TXT Devices under subclass 272 which operate continuously once initiated.


CLS 70/274
TXT Devices under subclass 273 embodying emergency releasing mechanisms in the
    event of failure of the clockwork control.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    465,    for similar releasing mechanisms provided in the event of
    emergencies.


CLS 70/275
TXT Devices under subclass 266 including a motor.


CLS 70/276
TXT Devices under subclass 275 embodying a permanent magnet.


CLS 70/277
TXT Devices under subclass 275 embodying electricity as the motivating energy.
    Includes the embodiment of a conducting medium as a required operator,
    such, for example, as a key.


CLS 70/278
TXT Devices under subclass 277 having a plurality of circuits which must be
    controlled in a special order.


CLS 70/279
TXT Devices under subclass 277 alternatively mechanically operated.


CLS 70/280
TXT Devices under subclass 277 which both project and retract the securing
    element or bolt.


CLS 70/281
TXT Subject matter under subclass 277 wherein the securing element is only
    electrically projected.


CLS 70/282
TXT Subject matter under subclass 277 wherein the securing element is only
    electrically retracted.


CLS 70/283
TXT Subject matter under subclass 277 wherein the ultimate effect in locking
    condition is to prevent the movement of a manually controlled operator or
    manipulator, by means of a detent of the pawl or catch type.


CLS 70/284
TXT Devices under subclass 266 having both a combination of movements and a key
    or keys.


CLS 70/285
TXT Devices under subclass 266 having either combination of movements or a key
    or keys, but wherein both are present.


CLS 70/286
TXT Devices under subclass 266 having a combination of movements to effect
    release.


CLS 70/287
TXT Devices under subclass 286 having individual blocking elements.


CLS 70/288
TXT Subject matter under subclass 287 wherein the elements must be selectively
    operated in a predetermined order.


CLS 70/289
TXT Devices under subclass 286 involving complex movements, or of the puzzle
    type normally inaccessible to the public or beyond the knowledge of the
    public.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 1.5, for special
    receptacles combined with puzzle type fastenings for their closures.


CLS 70/290
TXT Subject matter under subclass 289 wherein complex movement or puzzle effect
    is obtained by the employment of a labyrinthian passage.


CLS 70/291
TXT Subject matter under subclass 286 wherein tumblers are employed as the
    immediate impeding elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323+,   for specific tumbler structure.


CLS 70/292
TXT Devices under subclass 291 having plural sets of tumblers having
    interdependent function.


CLS 70/293
TXT Devices under subclass 291 having a plurality of sets of tumblers, each
    independently operable.


CLS 70/294
TXT Devices under subclass 291 having a single tumbler set.


CLS 70/295
TXT Devices under subclass 294 with ball or roller means as primary or
    auxiliary blocking or impeding elements.


CLS 70/296
TXT Subject matter under subclass 294 wherein the tumblers are sliding and
    include transmission of motion from one tumbler to the other.


CLS 70/297
TXT Subject matter under subclass 294 embodying a single sliding tumbler set
    each of the tumblers being individually set to its releasing condition.


CLS 70/298
TXT Subject matter under subclass 297 wherein the tumblers are so disposed that
    they are readily accessible and are set by manual operation.


CLS 70/299
TXT Devices under subclass 297 including movable mechanism or devices for
    imparting motion to the individual tumblers. Includes movable or shiftable
    selectors as well as permanently associated individual operators.


CLS 70/300
TXT Subject matter under subclass 299 wherein the mechanism or device is
    removable.


CLS 70/301
TXT Subject matter under subclass 294 embodying a single tumbler set each of
    the tumblers being rotated or swung to its releasing condition.


CLS 70/302
TXT Devices under subclass 301 in which setting movement is transmitted from
    one tumbler to the other.


CLS 70/303
TXT Subject matter under subclass 302 wherein in the ultimate releasing
    setting, the tumblers are released or dropped off to a position of rest.


CLS 70/304
TXT Devices under subclass 301 in which each of the tumblers may be
    individually set.


CLS 70/305
TXT Devices under subclass 304 having a selecting mechanism outside of the
    tumbler set associated with a selected tumbler for transmitting motion
    thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    299,    for similar operators of the selector type employed with sliding
    tumblers.


CLS 70/306
TXT Devices under subclass 304 having a movable operator external to the
    tumbler set.


CLS 70/307
TXT Devices under subclass 306 in which the operator is removable.


CLS 70/308
TXT Devices under subclass 306 embodying as movement transmitting means a pin
    or rod and slot connection.


CLS 70/309
TXT Subject matter under subclass 306 wherein the tumblers are disposed upon a
    spindle which in its rotary movements is the means for setting each of the
    individual tumblers.


CLS 70/310
TXT Devices under subclass 309, the spindles being arranged in concentric
    relation.


CLS 70/311
TXT Devices under subclass 309 wherein the spindle is axially shiftable to
    select a particular tumbler.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305,    for similar construction wherein the selecting medium is outside of
    the tumbler set.


CLS 70/312
TXT Devices under subclass 304, the tumblers being individually manually
    operable.


CLS 70/313
TXT Subject matter under subclass 286 wherein the releasing operation is
    effected by a predetermined succession of operating movements embodying
    successive impacts or shifting of the operating mechanism.


CLS 70/314
TXT Devices under subclass 286 in which there is embodied structure for
    upsetting the normal releasing combination either upon release of the
    mechanism or immediately subsequently thereto.


CLS 70/315
TXT Subject matter under subclass 286 wherein there is provision for changing
    of the combination without undue disassembling of the locking mechanism.


CLS 70/316
TXT Subject matter under subclass 315 wherein the changing of the combination
    is effected by relative movement of portions of tumblers formed of more
    than one part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 838+ for securing means for saw tooth fastening.


CLS 70/317
TXT Devices under subclass 316 in which some fastener or holder means is
    provided to maintain the relatively disposable portions in rigid or fixed
    relation.


CLS 70/318
TXT Devices under subclass 316 in which there is a pin or stud and socket
    provision for uniting the relatively movable parts.


CLS 70/319
TXT Devices under subclass 315 including a removable change element.


CLS 70/320
TXT Subject matter under subclass 286 relating to the operating elements.


CLS 70/321
TXT Subject matter under subclass 320 which normally blocks movement of a
    securing mechanism and embodies an extension which is normally maintained
    separate from the tumbler mechanism and for which provision is made in the
    tumblers to be received therein to:  (1) effect release of the mechanism
    secured; or (2) to transmit releasing movement from the tumblers to the
    securing element to effect release of the lock.


CLS 70/322
TXT Devices under subclass 321 supported by the lock housing or the bolt.


CLS 70/323
TXT Subject matter under subclass 320 relating to tumbler structure and
    position.


CLS 70/324
TXT Devices under subclass 323 nested within each other so as to provide for
    compactness.


CLS 70/325
TXT Subject matter under subclass 323 wherein a plurality of tumblers have
    variant diameters so as to provide for readier individual accessibility or
    compact disposition.


CLS 70/326
TXT Subject matter under subclass 323 relating to mounting means for the
    reception of tumblers of locks, or the support or mounting of the tumblers.


CLS 70/327
TXT Subject matter under subclass 323 relating to mechanism for restraining the
    motion of a tumbler so as to maintain it in a position of rest while other
    tumblers are manipulated.


CLS 70/328
TXT Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein the restraint is effected by
    friction.


CLS 70/329
TXT Subject matter under subclass 320 relating to operating spindles for
    controlling the movements of tumblers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclass 358, for latch spindles which may have
    similar structural characteristics.


CLS 70/330
TXT Devices under subclass 320 comprising visible or audible indicators to aid
    in accomplishing the combination of movements necessary in the setting of a
    combination lock to effect release thereof.


CLS 70/331
TXT Devices under subclass 330 in the form of a portable guide, either visual
    or contactual.


CLS 70/332
TXT Devices under subclass 330 comprising visible dials.


CLS 70/333
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 286 to prevent tampering with the operating
    mechanism or any static means designed to prevent an attack by an
    unauthorized force or by destructive heat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.5+,   for devices which upon attack by an unauthorized force impose an
    additional impediment to the operation of a lock.

    416+,   for similar devices intended for association with key locks.


CLS 70/334
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 333 producing audible sounds to confuse and to
    prevent possible determination of the combination by audible sounds
    emitting from the conventional structure in its normal operation.


CLS 70/336
TXT Subject matter under subclass 266 wherein the impeding structure is
    overcome or operated by internal mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    393+,   for a key, which is the operating implement.


CLS 70/337
TXT Subject matter under subclass 336 requiring a plurality of keys for
    successful operation of the operating mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262+,   for systems of locking mechanisms designed for cooperative utility.


CLS 70/338
TXT Subject matter udner subclass 337 wherein operation by one key may
    selectively shut out or prevent successful subsequent operation by another
    key.


CLS 70/339
TXT Devices under subclass 337 in which the concurrent or simultaneous
    employment of two or more keys to effect release is necessary.


CLS 70/340
TXT Devices under subclass 337 one of which keys is capable of releasing any
    other of a series of similar operating mechanisms effected by individual
    keys specifically fitted to each individual operating mechanism.


CLS 70/341
TXT Subject matter under subclass 340 wherein there is provision for the
    shutting out of the change-key under the control of the master-key.


CLS 70/342
TXT Devices under subclass 340 in which a sub-master-key may be provided for
    each of one or more groups of locking operating mechanisms of a series and
    for which a master-key may be provided for operating the entire series.


CLS 70/343
TXT Subject matter under subclass 342 wherein the change-key may be effectively
    shut out by control of the operating mechanism by either the particular
    group sub-master- or the entire series master-key.


CLS 70/344
TXT Subject matter under subclass 336 wherein a single key is employed to
    effect release of the operating mechanism.


CLS 70/345
TXT Subject matter under subclass 344 wherein the blocking or impeding means
    are key guide ways and in which the releasing effect is accomplished by a
    simple push or pull of the key.


CLS 70/346
TXT Devices under subclass 344 including projections or blocking impediments
    integrally formed or rigidly associated with some portion of the lock
    mechanism and which must be passed by corresponding complementary spaces
    provided upon the key before release of the securing element may be
    effected.


CLS 70/347
TXT Devices under subclass 344 having both tumblers and wards as impediments to
    release the mechanism.


CLS 70/348
TXT Deivces under subclass 344 having a plurality of movable tumblers.


CLS 70/349
TXT Devices under subclass 348 which are both sliding and rotary or sliding and
    swinging.


CLS 70/350
TXT Devices under subclass 348 which are movable in sliding relation.


CLS 70/351
TXT Devices under subclass 350 movable longitudinally of the bolt to effect
    release or securement of the bolt or securing element.


CLS 70/352
TXT Devices under subclass 350 movably transversely of the bolt to effect
    release or securement of the bolt or securing element.


CLS 70/353
TXT Subject matter under subclass 348 wherein the tumblers are rotary or
    swinging.


CLS 70/354
TXT Subject matter under subclass 353 wherein the tumblers are in a single set,
    indirectly actuated by key and dog mechanisms which restrain movement of
    the tumblers released by the same sweep of the key.


CLS 70/355
TXT Subject matter under subclass 354 wherein the tumblers are directly engaged
    by the bit of the key.


CLS 70/356
TXT Subject matter under subclass 348 wherein the impeding structure comprises
    a cylindric unit structure adapted to receive the key and with which may be
    associated externally of such unit, auxiliary tumblers and/or wards.


CLS 70/357
TXT Subject matter under subclass 348 wherein the impeding structure is
    incorporated in a cylindric unit adapted for association with other
    structures commonly called "yale type".


CLS 70/358
TXT Subject matter under subclass 357 wherein the cylinder is provided with a
    plurality of tumbler sets which must be concurrently set to effect release
    of the movable portion of the cylinder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    337+,   for cylinder lock mechanism requiring more than one key for
    operation.


CLS 70/359
TXT Subject matter under subclass 357 wherein the tumblers are concentrically
    disposed.


CLS 70/360
TXT Subject matter under subclass 357 wherein the cylinder includes a plug
    which has both sliding and rotary movement with respect to the cylinder.


CLS 70/361
TXT Subject matter under subclass 357 wherein the movable part comprises a
    sliding plug.


CLS 70/365
TXT Devices under subclass 362 in which swinging tumblers are employed as the
    impeding elements to prevent rotation between the plug and cylinder.


CLS 70/366
TXT Devices under subclass 365 in which the tumblers are movable transversely
    of the plug.


CLS 70/367
TXT Subject matter under subclass 357 wherein there is a special provision made
    for separable ready assembly of the plug with the cylinder.


CLS 70/368
TXT Devices under subclass 367 in which release and consequent removal of the
    plug from the cylinder is effected by both a key and a tool.


CLS 70/369
TXT Subject matter under subclass 367 wherein release and consequent removal of
    the plug from the cylinder is effected by a key only.


CLS 70/370
TXT Subject matter under subclass 357 wherein special provision is made for
    attaching or mounting the cylinder for association with some other
    structure controlled by the cylinder mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224,    for special cylinder mounting arrangements applicable to
    manipulators such as knobs, handles, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 27.1+, for devices for holding an instrument
    in a panel board opening, including those patents in which the instrument
    casing is modified solely for mounting means.


CLS 70/371
TXT Subject matter under subclass 357 wherein the entire cylinder constitutes a
    detachable or removable unit.


CLS 70/372
TXT Subject matter under subclass 357 comprising operating elements, parts and
    adjuncts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    406,    for cylinder lock keys of special construction.


CLS 70/373
TXT Subject matter under subclass 372 wherein the salient feature resides in
    the cylinder structure, per se.


CLS 70/374
TXT Subject matter under subclass 373 wherein the cylinder is formed of
    relatively adjustable portions.


CLS 70/375
TXT Subject matter under subclass 372 relating to specially constructed plugs
    or plug parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 38 for apparatus for making plugs.

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses, for a process of shaping a
    one piece blank by deforming it, with or without cutting it.


CLS 70/376
TXT Devices under subclass 372 in the form of movable parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 445 for processes of sizing tumblers in
    situ in the lock.


CLS 70/377
TXT Devices under subclass 376 comprising a plate or plates.


CLS 70/378
TXT Devices under subclass 376 of pin or rod material.


CLS 70/379
TXT Devices under subclass 372 comprising connections whereby force or power
    may be suitably transmitted to an associated securing device.


CLS 70/380
TXT Devices under subclass 379 comprising a cam or cam type of rigid or movable
    element.


CLS 70/381
TXT Devices under subclass 372 comprising rings spacing the flange of the
    exterior part of the cylinder from its supporting structure and at the same
    time acting as trimming in the form of an escutcheon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    452,    for other escutcheons for key operated locking mechanisms.


CLS 70/382
TXT Subject matter under subclass 336 wherein there is embodied mechanism
    permitting of a variation or change of the predetermined combination
    required to accomplish release of the lock mechanism.


CLS 70/383
TXT Subject matter under subclass 382 wherein the changing or varying mechanism
    is automatically responsive to the combination of bitting of the key.


CLS 70/384
TXT Subject matter under subclass 382 the variation or change is accomplished
    by relative adjustments of portions of the tumblers which may be suitably
    retained in adjusted condition.


CLS 70/385
TXT Subject matter under subclass 384 wherein there is employed a removable
    combination change implement.


CLS 70/386
TXT Subject matter under subclass 336 wherein a ball or roller is employed as
    an impeding element, or as an ancillary impeding element.


CLS 70/387
TXT Devices under subclass 336 in which the ultimate releasing effect is
    accomplished by a simple push or pull of the key.


CLS 70/388
TXT Devices under subclass 336 including a mechanism which forcibly ejects the
    key upon completion of the function of the key.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    414,    for keys embodying ejecting features.


CLS 70/389
TXT Devices under subclass 336 including a mechanism designed to restrain
    removal of the key until a predetermined primary manipulation is effected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    441,    for key removal prevention designed to direct the attention of the
    user to a condition which is not desired.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    194,    Check-Actuated Control Mechanisms, subclasses 51, 59 and 65, for
    coin or check controlled devices of this character.


CLS 70/390
TXT Devices under subclass 336 including mechanism to positively retain or trap
    a false or picking key or implement which may be inserted in the usual
    guide way or passage provided for the key.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    439,    for devices which do not positively retain or trap the key but
    which will immediately indicate to the user of the proper key, tampering
    with the lock.


CLS 70/391
TXT Subject matter under subclass 336 relating to operating elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    372,    for operating elements employed in cylinder type lock operating
    mechanism.


CLS 70/392
TXT Subject matter under subclass 391 relating to tumblers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    376+,   for cylinder lock operating mechanism tumblers.


CLS 70/393
TXT Devices under subclass 391 embodying keys.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277,    for keys provided with electricity conducting and nonconducting
    portions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, subclass 170, for key combined with tools.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 330, for keys merely
    carrying indicia.

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclass 110, for key blanks.

    81,     Tools, subclass 122, for watch and clock winding keys.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 466.1 for keys or attachment therefor
    having luminous fluorescent or phosphorescent material, and subclasses
    483.1+ for fluorescent or phosphorescent devices generally.


CLS 70/394
TXT Devices under subclass 393 embodying provision effecting authorized release
    of a conventional lock structure or lock operating mechanism by insertion
    and manipulation in the usual key way, in the absence of the usual proper
    key.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 39+ for gauges for determining
    tumbler combinations.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 435+ for similar mechanisms used in
    forging.

    81,     Tools, subclass 15.9 for picking tools other than keys.


CLS 70/395
TXT Devices under subclass 393 embodying formation of more than one part.


CLS 70/396
TXT Devices under subclass 395 in which the shank or stem is foldable to
    provide a more compact structure in nonuse.


CLS 70/397
TXT Subject matter under subclass 395 wherein the shank or stem has relatively
    movable parts to provide for extensibility for use and collapsiblility in
    nonuse.


CLS 70/398
TXT Subject matter under subclass 395 wherein the bit or effective release or
    operating portion is slidable with respect to the shank or stem.


CLS 70/399
TXT Subject matter under subclass 395 wherein the bit or releasing or operating
    portion is pivoted or swings with respect to the shank or stem.


CLS 70/400
TXT Subject matter under subclass 395 wherein one key is nested within the
    other, both of which constitute a single or unit operative implement.


CLS 70/401
TXT Devices under subclass 393 having plural shanks, plural stems or plural bit
    wings.


CLS 70/402
TXT Devices under subclass 393 of single shank or stem construction.  Includes
    keys of flexible construction.


CLS 70/403
TXT Subject matter under subclass 402 wherein the shank or stem is round and
    rigid.


CLS 70/404
TXT Devices under subclass 403 of round, tubular cross-sectional configuration.


CLS 70/405
TXT Subject matter under subclass 402 wherein said shank or stem is flat and
    rigid.


CLS 70/406
TXT Devices under subclass 405 for employment with cylinder lock operating
    mechanism.


CLS 70/407
TXT Devices under subclass 402 of irregular nonplanar or undulated
    configuration, generally helical, bent or twisted.


CLS 70/408
TXT Subject matter under subclass 393 relating to bow or head portions of keys.


CLS 70/409
TXT Subject matter under subclass 393 relating to that portion of the key which
    actually effects setting of tumblers or passage of the effective releasing
    portion of the key past wards.


CLS 70/410
TXT Devices under subclass 409 having frangible parts whereby the resulting
    combination may be effected by simply breaking away the frangible parts.


CLS 70/411
TXT Devices under subclass 409 including variable or changeable parts to change
    the effective combination of the key.


CLS 70/412
TXT Subject matter under subclass 409 wherein the bit portion is threaded.


CLS 70/413
TXT Subject matter under subclass 393 relating to either permanent or
    electrical magnetic features.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    276,    for keys for lock operating mechanism of the motor type where a
    permanent magnet is employed as the releasing instrumentality.


CLS 70/414
TXT Devices under subclass 393 having mechanism which will forcibly eject the
    key from the associated operating mechanism when the key has completed its
    normal function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    388,    for lock operating mechanism embracing ejecting features.


CLS 70/416
TXT Devices under subclass 336 including mechanisms to prevent tampering with
    the operating mechanism of a key lock or any static means designed to
    prevent an attack by an unauthorized force or by destructive heat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.5+,   for devices which upon attack by an unauthorized force impose an
    additional impediment to the operation of a lock.

    333+,   for similar devices associated with combination locks.

    417,    for static armor construction for key locks which prevent
    transmission of unauthorized force upon the exterior of the lock to disable
    the lock.


CLS 70/417
TXT Devices under subclass 416 including armor or armoring insertions or
    additions to prevent attack of drilling, boring, or application of punches,
    chisels, etc.


CLS 70/418
TXT Devices under subclass 416 opposing attack concentrated upon a portion of
    the locking mechanism not specifically designed to accomplish normal
    operation of the lock operating mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151,    for devices associated with locking latch-bolts which dog the
    latch-bolt in projected position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclass 346, for devices preventing knife blade
    insertions at the latch and keeper engaging locality to prevent forcing
    back of a bolt into its housing.


CLS 70/419
TXT Devices under subclass 416 which render difficult the normal operation of
    the impeding elements or the passage of fixed impediments by means or
    implements other than the usual key, by entry through the usual key passage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333,    for devices designed to prevent forcible operation by external
    force.


CLS 70/420
TXT Devices under subclass 419 including fixed means which is usally in the
    form of an additional unconventional impediment to the operation of the
    locking mechanism.


CLS 70/421
TXT Devices under subclass 419 including means which is usually in the form of
    an unconventional movable impediment in addition to the usual tumbler
    mechanism.


CLS 70/422
TXT Devices under subclass 416 including such connections as will readily yield
    or be broken or ruptured in the application of excessive force, but which
    in response to the proper implement will function normally.


CLS 70/423
TXT Devices under subclass 416 which prevent or hinder free access to the usual
    key-hole, usually a portion of the lock operating mechanism or associated
    therewith in the same housing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    371,    for similarly usable devices.

    440,    for seals covering key-holes.


CLS 70/424
TXT Devices under subclass 423 disconnectible from the operating mechanism
    housing or key-hole containing part and of a portable character.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14+,    for portable securing devices.


CLS 70/425
TXT Devices under subclass 423 which are secured or their operation effected by
    means of a combination locking device.


CLS 70/426
TXT Devices under subclass 425 which are portable and may be readily attached
    or detached.


CLS 70/427
TXT Devices under subclass 423 which are secured or their operation effected by
    means of a key control mechanism.


CLS 70/428
TXT Devices under subclass 427 of a portable character and readily attachable
    and detachable.


CLS 70/429
TXT Devices under subclass 416 retaining the key in association with the lock
    to prevent manipulation thereof, by unauthorized or surreptitious means, or
    to prevent the forcible ejection of the key from the key-hole.


CLS 70/430
TXT Devices under subclass 429 of portable readily attachable and detachable
    character.


CLS 70/431
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to structures as may
    comprise portions of or may be auxiliary to, in the forms of attachments,
    accessories or adjuncts for, locking mechanisms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    320+,   for operating elements for combination operating mechanisms.

    372+,   for operating elements, parts, and/or adjuncts of cylinder type
    locking mechanisms.

    391+,   for operating elements applicable to key operating mechanism other
    than cylinder locks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, cross-reference art collection 935
    for a carrier attached to a cycle to support a lock when the lock is not
    being used.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclass 2, for specific details of bolt
    structure, and subclass 340, for specific keeper structures.


CLS 70/432
TXT Devices under subclass 431 which indicate the condition of the locking
    mechanism by means of visual or other similar readily accessible indication.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 460 for changeable
    exhibitors operated by the latching mechanism of doors.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 500+ for electrical
    automatic condition responsive indicating systems.


CLS 70/433
TXT Devices under subclass 432 including devices specifically applied to a lock
    operating mechanism which provide a printed record of such condition.


CLS 70/434
TXT Devices under subclass 433 in which the operating mechanism is electrically
    motivated.


CLS 70/435
TXT Devices under subclass 433 incorporated in a portable lock of the padlock
    type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20+,    for padlock construction, per se.


CLS 70/436
TXT Devices under subclass 432 having some visible, changeable mechanism which
    usually indicates the condition of the lock operating mechanism by denoting
    the number of times a lock was operated prior to the next operation, by
    identifying the last implement which may have operated the locking
    mechanism, etc.


CLS 70/437
TXT Devices under subclass 436 devised for association or incorporation in a
    padlock structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20+,    for padlock construction, per se.


CLS 70/438
TXT Devices under subclass 432 readily accessible from the exterior of the lock
    operating mechanism and controlled thereby so that upon contacting of the
    device by the hand or finger it is possible to immediately determine the
    condition of the lock operating mechanism.


CLS 70/439
TXT Devices under subclass 432 which transmit to the operator information other
    than visible information that the operating mechanism has been previously
    tampered with.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 542+ for electrical
    automatic lock condition responsive indicating systems.


CLS 70/440
TXT Devices under subclass 439 comprising a seal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     for similar devices incorporated in padlocks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclasses 307+, for seals of this nature of
    general application.


CLS 70/441
TXT Devices under subclass 432 which will direct the attention of the user to a
    condition which requires attention prior to the execution of whatever
    operation is intended by the user, or which imposes upon the user the
    required steps necessary to provide ultimate proper securing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 542+ for electrical
    automatic lock condition responsive indicating systems.


CLS 70/442
TXT Subject matter under subclass 431 relating to combination operated
    mechanism.


CLS 70/443
TXT Subject matter under subclass 442 relating to the formation, assembly or
    structure of the housing itself.


CLS 70/444
TXT Subject matter under subclass 442 relating to operating attachments, other
    than knobs; hand-grips, etc.


CLS 70/445
TXT Subject matter under subclass 442 relating to the manipulative portion as
    the knob, hand-grip, handle, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 553, for knobs having dials
    and vernier adjustments.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 200+, for knobs having indicator
    features.


CLS 70/446
TXT Devices under subclass 442 for assisting in the determination of the
    combination required for operation of the mechanism by an authorized
    individual.


CLS 70/447
TXT Devices under subclass 431 for key operating mechanism.


CLS 70/448
TXT Subject matter under subclass 447 relating to the assembly or construction
    of the housing or casing, which provides a container or support for the
    lock operating mechanism.


CLS 70/449
TXT Devices under subclass 448 of a cylindrical character which are readily
    accommodated in cylindric portions or openings provided for mounting
    purposes.


CLS 70/450
TXT Subject matter under subclass 448 directed to that portion of the housing
    through which the bolt projects.


CLS 70/451
TXT Subject matter under subclass 448 relating to the accommodation or
    reception of key operated lock mechanism as a unit for purposes of
    temporary or permanent association with a structure to which the lock
    mechanism is applied.


CLS 70/452
TXT Devices under subclass 447 comprising plates, rings, etc., which distinctly
    designate the key-receiving opening or for purposes of spacing and
    finishing in the form of trim that portion of the key operating lock
    mechanism which may be readily visible to the public, to provide for neat
    appearance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    381,    for cylinder rings associated with cylinder lock mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 466.1 for luminous fluorescent
    phosphorescent covers, keys and attachments therefor and subclasses 483.1+
    for fluorescent and phosphorescent devices generally.


CLS 70/453
TXT Subject matter under subclass 447 which acts as a track or guide for the
    reception of the operating portion of a key and which usually is a part of
    the interior construction of the lock operating mechanism.


CLS 70/454
TXT Devices under subclass 447 usually associated with the exterior of a lock
    operating mechanism providing guiding means to aid in the ready insertion
    of the key into the lock operating mechanism at times when the key-hole may
    not be visible.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 466.1 for luminous fluorescent or
    phosphorescent covers, keys, and attachments therefor, and subclasses
    483.1+ for fluorescent and phosphorescent devices generally.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 100 for illuminated keyholes.


CLS 70/455
TXT Devices under subclass 447 comprising cover means to close the usual
    key-hole from the exterior to protect such opening from reception of water,
    dirt, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for padlock sheaths.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, subclasses 154+ for a
    flaccid protective cover which is configured for and supported by the
    article it protects.


CLS 70/456
TXT Devices under subclass 447 for receiving and retaining keys in a readily
    accessible group and relates only to that aspect thereof as is directed to
    the key receiving and retaining features alone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, subclasses 167, 168 and 170, for key-holders
    combined with other articles or tools.

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., for means for attachment to the
    dress or other object and subclasses 572+ for separable fasteners and
    598.4+ for snap hooks.

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclasses 85+ for detachable
    chain links.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 38+ for a pocket or
    personal use receptacle particularly constructed to retain a key as well as
    some other article or material.

    220,    Receptacles, appropriate subclasses, for metal receptacles.


CLS 70/457
TXT Devices under subclass 456 having flexible member for holding the keys.


CLS 70/458
TXT Devices under subclass 456 formed of one piece of sheet metal, wire, or
    other material.


CLS 70/459
TXT Devices under subclass 456 in which the openings through which the keys are
    introduced are closed by means of releasable catches which form a part of
    the key-holder and may include a threaded closure for travel upon one end
    of the ring are included in this subclass.


CLS 70/460
TXT Subject matter under subclass 447 directed to means incorporated in the
    lock operating construction for identifying the combination of the key
    bitting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 330, for keys merely
    carrying indicia.


CLS 70/461
TXT Devices under subclass 431 directed to ready adjustment of features of the
    lock operating mechanism for accommodation to varying conditions of
    support, housing, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclass 1.5 for adjustable backset and
    subclasses 341.18+ for keepers with means to adjust the position thereof.


CLS 70/462
TXT Subject matter under subclass 431 relating to reversibility, as changing
    the structure to accommodate itself for either right-or left hand
    association.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclasses 244+ for reversible bolt structures
    not involving lock operating mechanism, and subclass 341.18, for keepers
    with means to adjust the position thereof.


CLS 70/463
TXT Devices under subclass 431 which silence or muffle any unusual or excessive
    noise made by the interengagement of the lock operating mechanism parts or
    to adequately muffle the movements of the parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclasses 341.12+ for keepers with anit-rattle
    or silencing means.


CLS 70/464
TXT Subject matter under subclass 431 wherein provision is made for reducing
    friction between moving parts thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclass 341.11 for keepers with anti-friction
    means.


CLS 70/465
TXT Devices under subclass 431 which provide for immediate release of the lock
    operating mechanism or its movement to unlocked condition by special access
    to the lock operating mechanism through provisions not known by the public
    or usually inaccessible to the public, or incorporating non-public
    yieldable or frangible connections or supports for release in an emergency.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    274,    for emergency releasing mechanisms specifically designed for
    association with clockwork control for lock operating mechanism.

    340+,   for emergency releasing arrangements providing for access through
    the usual implement guideway or receptor.

    394,    for implements providing for authorized ready release of a key
    operating mechanism in the event of loss or inaccessibilty of the proper
    key.


CLS 70/466
TXT Subject matter under subclass 431 providing a ready templet, guide, aid or
    assistor for suitably correctly mounting the lock operating mechanism or
    its associated housing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 197 for mortise gauges.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 75+ for mortising apparatus.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 72+ for
    jigs for guiding drills.


CLS 70/467
TXT Apparatus under subclass 145 having a manually operated manipulator located
    exterior of the space to which the door leads, and which is utilized as
    input means for retracting the latch bolt, in combination with releasable
    means (including tumblers) to selectively dog the manipulator by engagement
    therewith or with some part rigidly fixed thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150+,   for similar subject matter wherein the external bolt manipulator is
    effectively dogged by dogging the latch bolt or the connecting means
    between the manipulator and the latch bolt; and subclasses 210+ for the
    subcombination of a manual bolt manipulator and means to directly dog it.


CLS 70/468
TXT Apparatus under subclass 467 and having related therewith manually operated
    manipulator located interior of the space to which the door leads.


CLS 70/469
TXT Apparatus under subclass 467 having dog means for the dog for the exterior
    manual bolt manipulator.


CLS 70/470
TXT Apparatus under subclass 467 having a dog for the latch bolt which may be
    movable upon movement of the dog for the manual manipulator.


CLS 70/471
TXT Apparatus under subclass 467 in which the dog for the exterior manual bolt
    manipulator has an actuator which is continuously connected with said dog.


CLS 70/472
TXT Apparatus under subclass 467 having means whereby the exterior latch bolt
    manipulator and the latch bolt are not operatively interconnected when the
    exterior manipulator is dogged.


CLS 70/473
TXT Apparatus under subclass 467 in which the exterior bolt manipulator and the
    controller for its dog are rotatable about an axis common to both.


CLS 70/474
TXT Apparatus under subclass 473 in which the rollback for the latch bolt is
    movable to a position in which it acts as a dog for the external
    manipulator for the latch bolt.


CLS 70/475
TXT Apparatus under subclass 473 in which the dog for the exterior manipulator
    may also be actuated by key means to dog or undog the said manipulator.


CLS 70/476
TXT Apparatus under subclass 473 in which the means controlling the manipulator
    dog is translatable on and rotatable about the same axis.


CLS 70/477
TXT Apparatus under subclass 473 in which the means is rotatable which is
    manipulatable to actuate the dog for said bolt manipulator.


CLS 70/478
TXT Apparatus under subclass 473 having key actuated means to release the
    manipulator dog from its dogging position.


CLS 70/479
TXT Apparatus under subclass 478 in which manipulation of the manual bolt
    manipulator releases the dog.


CLS 70/480
TXT Apparatus under subclass 473 in which manipulation of the manual bolt
    manipulator releases the dog.


CLS 70/481
TXT Apparatus under subclass 467 in which the dog for the exterior latch bolt
    manipulator is controlled by the interior latch bolt manipulator.


CLS 70/482
TXT Apparatus under subclass 481 in which the interior latch bolt manipulator
    is operable to cause the exterior latch bolt manipulator to be dogged and
    undogged.


CLS 70/483
TXT Apparatus under subclass 467 having a manually actuatable means to control
    the dog means for the exterior manual latch bolt manipulator.


CLS 70/484
TXT Apparatus under subclass 483 having additional lock means to control the
    dog for the external latch bolt manipulator.


CLS 70/485
TXT Apparatus under subclass 484 in which the additional lock means for
    controlling said manipulator dog may both dog and undog said manipulator
    dog.


CLS 70/486
TXT Apparatus under subclass 483 in which the manually engageable means for
    controlling the latch bolt manipulator dog is located at an edge of its
    associated door.


CLS 70/487
TXT Apparatus under subclass 483 in which the manually actuatable means to
    control the dog is mounted for planar movement only.


CLS 70/488
TXT Apparatus under subclass 467 in which the manually actuated exterior
    manipulator for the latch bolt is mounted for planar movement only.


CLS 70/489
TXT Apparatus under subclass 467 in which the manually actuated exterior
    manipulator for the latch bolt is a pivotally mounted lever.


CLS 70/490
TXT Rotary plug:

    Device under subclass 357 wherein the movable part comprises a rotary plug.


CLS 70/491
TXT Sliding tumblers:

    Device under subclass 490 wherein the movable impediments to relative
    rotation between the plug and the cylinder (i.e., the tumblers) move in a
    slidable fashion.


CLS 70/492
TXT Transverse of plug:

    Device under subclass 491 wherein the impediments move in a direction which
    is crosswise of the plug.


CLS 70/493
TXT Pin tumblers:

    Device under subclass 492 wherein the impediments are cylindrical in
    configuration.


CLS 70/494
TXT Rotatable pins (e.g., medeco lock):

    Device under subclass 493 wherein at least one of the impediments turns
    about its longitudinal axis.

    (1)     Note.  The tumblers of this subclass are found, principally, in
    locks made by Medeco Security Locks, Inc.


CLS 70/495
TXT Including slidebar:

    Device under subclass 492 wherein structure, frequently in the nature of a
    shaft-like element, is included, and wherein the structure serves as an
    additional impediment to rotation of the plug relative to the cylinder by
    extending across, at one or more locations, the circular line of
    demarcation (i.e., the shear line) along which the plug turns relative to
    the cylinder.

    (1)     Note.  The movement of the sidebar to a nonblocking position
    requires the repositioning of the tumblers to a location where a means
    (e.g., a recess) thereon can receive a portion of the sidebar, thus
    enabling the latter to move clear of the shear line.

    (2)     Note.  In some instances, the tumblers do not move in such a manner
    as to block the shear line; therefore, the sidebar is not, in those
    instances, an additional impediment.


CLS 70/496
TXT Including sidebar:

    Device under subclass 491 wherein structure, frequently in the nature of a
    shaft-like element, is included, and wherein the structure serves as an
    additional impediment to rotation of the plug relative to the cylinder by
    extending across, at one or more locations, the circular line of
    demarcation (i.e., the shear line) along which the plug turns relative to
    the cylinder.

    (1)     Note.  See (2) Note of subclass 495 above, which Note is equally
    applicable here.


CLS 71/
TTL CHEMISTRY:  FERTILIZERS

CLS 71/
TXT This class is directed to methods of production and manufacture of
    substances having a nutrient action on plant growth.  It also includes the
    products of such methods and compositions or mixtures having these
    characteristics, and forms of chemical compounds or mixtures peculiarly
    adapted and designed to make them more available for use and distribution
    as a fertilizer.

    (1)     Note.  Fertilizers admixed with preserving agents are in Class 71.
    See the class definitions of appropriate compound and composition classes
    for the classification of preservative additives.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 422, Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting,
    Deodorizing, Preserving, or Sterilizing, for apparatus for making
    fertilizers not specifically provided for in other classes.

    (3)     Note.  See Class 34, Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids,
    for drying processes, per se, and for processes for contacting solids with
    gases or vapors not restricted to fertilizer manufacture.

    (4)     Note.  This class includes, in subclasses 5+ and below processes of
    applying a specific fertilizer composition to plants or soil.  Those
    processes which do not involve the application of a specific composition
    are classified in the appropriate class of which Class 47 is the generic
    class; see the definition and notes of that class for the line with the
    other classes.  Processes which include some manipulation of the soil are
    classified in Classes 47, 111, or 172 in accordance with the line between
    those classes.  Plant pots or molds made of fertilizer material and
    mulching sheets which are made of or compose a fertilizer ingredient are in
    Class 47.  Compositions of seeds and fertilizer are in Class 71.

    (5)     Note.  Search Class 426, Food or Edible Material:  Processes,
    Compositions, and Products, appropriate subclasses for animal foods.  If a
    composition (product) is usable either as an animal food or a plant food,
    it is classifiable in Class 426 and cross referenced to Class 71.

    (6)     Note.  Search Class 504, Plant Protecting and Regulating
    Compositions, for compositions and compounds for treating living
    terrestrial and aquatic plants or their habitats for the purpose of
    stimulating, inhibiting or retarding growth, defoliating, or killing said
    plants, and the processes of using such compositions or compounds for such
    purposes which are not more than their mere application to the plant or
    habitat.  Compositions disclosed as having unequivocal fertilizer value in
    addition to biocidal or deodorant value are in Class 504 and
    cross-referenced to Class 424 or 514.  Class 504 specifically provides for
    algicidal compositions in subclasses 150+, stunting and dwarfing
    compositions in subclasses 174+, and sucker control compositions in
    subclasses 184+.

            Only those compositions which alter the plant through a chemical
    modification of the plant metabolism such as auxins are included in Class
    504.  The line between a chemical which causes  a plant metabolism response
    and a fertilizer or plant food is somewhat difficult, but for purposes of
    this class the following applies: (1) compositions having only a
    fertilizing affect and (2) compositions which are disclosed as having both
    a stimulating and fertilizing action and wherein the composition taken as a
    whole merely exhibits its stimulating affect as a response to the
    fertilizing action and wherein no disclosure is made as to the specific
    response, except for general statements as to "stimulating and fertilizing
    affects", are not in Class 504, but may be found in the appropriate
    fertilizer subclass in Class 71.  Compositions which include a plant
    stimulant as well as a fertilizer or biocide (insecticide, fungicide, etc.)
    are classified in Class 504.

            Compositions which are added to prevent or cure mineral or plant
    food deficiencies are excluded from Class 504.  For example, the addition
    of iron chelates to cure or prevent iron        chlorosis are found in the
    appropriate subclass of Class 71.

    (7)     Note.  See Class 210, Liquid Purification or Separation,
    appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 601+ for processes for the
    treatment of sewage to separate solids and liquids and purify or dry the
    same.  If other treatment, beyond separation, purifying or drying, is
    included, which is directed to improving the character as a fertilizer, see
    this class (71).

    (8)     Flotation processes of concentrating mineral, such as crude
    phosphate, to give an improved fertilizer, are in Class 209, Classifying,
    Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate subclasses.

    (9)     Search Class 435, Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology,
    for making, separating, or purifying substances by processes that include
    fermentations; for processes of making or treating living organisms,
    enzymes, or ferments; and for compositions or apparatus for use in such
    processes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    935,    Genetic Engineering:  Recombinant DNA Technology, Hybrid or Fused
    Cell Technology, and Related Manipulations of Nucleic Acids, which provides
    a search collection for processes of altering the genetic structure of
    microorganisms; genes and methods of modifying genes and their expression;
    vectors and methods of modifying vectors; methods of introducing DNA into a
    cell; microorganisms, per se, which have had their genetic sequence altered
    by recombinant DNA techniques or by cell fusion or by uptake of DNA;
    testing; separation techniques; apparatus; and methods of use of vectors or
    of the genetically engineered microorganisms; methods of gene therapy or
    genetic modification of living organisms.

    (10)    Note.  For electrical or wave energy methods involving chemical
    reactions which are caused by more than the mere thermal effects of the
    electrical or wave energy for the preparation of compounds or elements
    useful for fertilizer compositions, see Class 204, Chemistry:  Electrical
    and Wave Energy.

    (11)    Note.  See Class 100, Presses, subclasses 35+ for methods of
    pressing not elsewhere provided for.

    (12)    Note.  See Class 423, Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses
    265+ for inorganic compounds with additives and see the notes thereto for
    the general line between Class 423 and composition classes.

    (13)    Note.  See Class 520, Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers,
    appropriate subclasses, particularly Class 523, subclass 122 for a
    composition containing a synthetic resin or natural rubber and an
    ingredient which prevents the commencement of biocidal deterioration from
    fungi, bacteria, or other organisms of the resin and which does not include
    a fertilizer; subclasses 124+ for a composition containing a synthetic
    resin or natural rubber which is claimed or solely disclosed as having
    enhanced degradability by exposure to an environmental stimulus; and
    subclasses 132+ for a composition containing a synthetic resin having
    utility in situ as a soil conditioner or stabilizer or to processes of
    preparing said composition.

    (14)    Note. A list of superiority of some composition classes appears in
    the main class definition of Class 252, Compositions (5) Note.  This note
    in Class 252 explains classification of a generic composition with several
    disclosed uses.


CLS 71/1
TXT All processes and products within the scope of the class definition which
    are not provided for in the following subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, appropriate subclasses for fertilizer producing
    apparatus not specifically provided for in other classes.


CLS 71/5
TXT Products of special value in the cultivation of fungi, such as mushrooms,
    and processes of making them.

    (1)     Note.  If the claims include the mycellium or spawn, the patent is
    classified in Class 47, Plant Husbandry, and cross-referenced here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, particularly
    subclasses 254.1 through 256.8 for subject matter directed to a composition
    having utility as a fungal culture medium (i.e., media for maintenance,
    growth, production, etc.) or a technique for preparing or using the same.


CLS 71/6
TXT This subclass and those indented hereunder include fertilizer products and
    the methods of making them, which involve the use and action of enzymes or
    bacteria.


CLS 71/7
TXT Methods and compositions under subclass 6 where nitrogen fixing or
    nitrifying bacteria is utilized.


CLS 71/8
TXT Processes under subclass 6 directed to autogenous fermentation or
    decomposition and the products of such processes.


CLS 71/9
TXT Processes and compositions under subclass 8 where the fermentation is
    aerobic.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 601+, especially 604,
    605, 615+, and 620+ for aerobic treatment of sewage.


CLS 71/10
TXT Processes and compositions under subclass 8 where the fermentation is
    anaerobic.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 601+ especially 605
    and 630 for anaerobic treatment of sewage.


CLS 71/11
TXT Methods of making organic containing fertilizers and corresponding
    products.  In this subclass inorganic values may or may not be included.


CLS 71/12
TXT Processes of preparing fertilizer from sewage or night soil, and the
    corresponding products.

    (1)     Note.  If other organic fertilizer materials are included, see this
    Class, subclass 13.


CLS 71/13
TXT Patents under subclass 12 in which other organic substances of fertilizer
    value are included.  If such added organic values are hereinbelow listed,
    they are cross-referenced below.


CLS 71/14
TXT Processes of preparing fertilizer from garbage and corresponding products.
    If other organic values, such as those listed below, are present, they are
    cross-referenced below.


CLS 71/15
TXT Processes for preparing fertilizer and corresponding products, not
    hereinabove classified, which include animal matter not listed among any of
    the indented types below or which include a plurality of the said indented
    types.

    (1)     Note.  If including organic fertilizer other than animal matter,
    see this class, subclass 22.


CLS 71/16
TXT Inventions under subclass 15 in which the marine animal matter is the only
    type of animal matter present.  Other organic fertilizer values, except
    other animal derivatives, such as are classified below, may also be
    included.


CLS 71/17
TXT Animal matter from blood is the only type of animal matter present.  Other
    organic fertilizer values, except other animal derivatives such as are
    classified below may also be included.


CLS 71/18
TXT Under subclass 15 and including animal matter derived from horn, hair,
    feathers, wool, leather, etc.  Other organic fertilizer values except other
    animal derivatives such as are classified below, may also be included.


CLS 71/19
TXT Under subclass 15 and including animal matter derived from bone as the only
    type of animal matter present.


CLS 71/20
TXT Processes and products under subclass 19 which include other organic
    fertilizer values except other animal derivatives such as are classified
    below.


CLS 71/21
TXT Under subclass 15 and including guano and animal excretions, generally, as
    the only types of animal matter present.  Other organic fertilizer values,
    except animal matter such as classified below, may also be present.


CLS 71/22
TXT Processes and products under subclass 15 which include other organic values
    such as are classified hereinbelow.

    (1)     Note.  See also this class, subclasses 13 and 20.


CLS 71/23
TXT Processes and products under subclass 11, of preparing fertilizers from
    vegetable material.  Other organic values such as classified hereinbelow
    may also be present.


CLS 71/24
TXT Processes and products under subclass 23 which include humus material,
    peat, lignite, coal and carbon.  Other organic fertilizer values
    classifiable below may also be present.


CLS 71/25
TXT Processes and products under subclass 11 which include industrial wastes.
    Industrial wastes, within the meaning of this subclass, include ashes,
    cinders, paper, flue dust, waste liquors from paper manufacture, tanning
    liquors, corn steep liquors, gas liquor, etc.; in brief, any substance of
    organic origin ordinarily considered a waste material resulting from an
    industrial process and not provided for above.  Other organic fertilizer
    values, such as classified hereinbelow, may also be present.

    (1)     Note.  For gas liquors used in alkaline treatment or neutralization
    of phosphates, see subclasses 42 and 43 of this class.


CLS 71/26
TXT Processes and products under subclass 25 in which the industrial waste is
    from sugar manufacture or distillery wastes.  The use of sugar is also
    included.  Other organic fertilizer values, such as classified hereinbelow
    or not otherwise provided for, may also be included.


CLS 71/27
TXT Processes under subclass 11 which include preparing synthetic organic
    fertilizers and the corresponding products.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, for electrical or wave
    energy methods involving chemical reactions which are caused by more than
    the mere thermal effects of the electrical or wave energy for synthetic
    preparation of compounds or elements useful for fertilizer compositions.

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 334+ for electrolytic synthesis of
    compounds or elements useful for fertilizer compositions.


CLS 71/28
TXT Processes under subclass 27 in which the organic fertilizer contains urea
    or one of its derivatives, and corresponding products.


CLS 71/29
TXT Processes and products as defined in subclass 28 which include inorganic P
    containing substances, such as phosphates.


CLS 71/30
TXT Processes or products as defined in subclass 28 which include inorganic N
    containing substances, other than NH4, such as nitrates.  Thus, fertilizers
    containing urea admixed with a nitrate and urea nitrate both belong in this
    subclass.


CLS 71/31
TXT Methods of making fertilizer containing only inorganic materials and the
    corresponding products, when not provided for in any of the indented
    subclasses.


CLS 71/32
TXT Methods and products under subclass 31 in which the fertilizer contains P.


CLS 71/33
TXT Methods under subclass 32 directed to the preparation of inorganic
    fertilizers containing phosphates.

    (1)     Note.  Subclasses 33-47 are primarily process subclasses but
    include products corresponding thereto when such are claimed along with the
    processes, in which case the products are cross-referenced to subclass 48
    and indented subclasses.


CLS 71/34
TXT Methods under subclass 33 directed to the preparation of inorganic
    fertilizers containing alkali metal or ammonium phosphates as the only
    phosphates present.


CLS 71/35
TXT Processes, as defined in subclass 34, which also include inorganic N
    containing values, other than NH4.


CLS 71/36
TXT Processes, as defined in subclass 34, which include an added inorganic
    alkali metal or ammonium compound.


CLS 71/37
TXT Methods of preparing phosphatic fertilizers where the starting materials
    are treated with an acid or a mixture of acids.

    (1)     Note.  Methods employing mixtures of acids which are separately
    provided for hereunder are included in this subclass, e.g., a mixture of
    sulfuric and phosphoric acids.


CLS 71/38
TXT Processes as defined in subclass 37 wherein the acid is supplied in the
    gaseous state.


CLS 71/39
TXT Processes as defined in subclass 37 wherein the acid supplied is HNO3 or
    HCl mixed in the liquid state.

    (1)     Note.  For HNO3 or HCl mixed with another acid, see this class,
    subclass 37.


CLS 71/40
TXT Processes as defined in subclass 37 wherein the acid used in H2SO4.
    Treatment with sulphuric acid anhydride belongs in subclass 38.

    (1)     Note.  For H2SO4 mixed with another acid, see this class, subclass
    37.


CLS 71/41
TXT Processes as defined in subclass 37 wherein the acid used is an acid of
    phosphorus.

    (1)     Note.  For an acid of phosphorus mixed with another acid, see this
    class, subclass 37.


CLS 71/42
TXT Methods under subclass 33 of preparing phosphate containing fertilizers
    wherein the starting materials are treated with a distinctly alkaline
    substance such as the alkali metal oxides, hydroxides and carbonates or the
    alkaline earth metal oxides or hydroxides.

    (1)     Note.  For mere neutralization of an acid fertilizer, see this
    class, subclass 43.

    (2)     Note.  For distinctively high temperature treatments, see this
    class, subclasses 44+.


CLS 71/43
TXT Methods under subclass 33 directed to the neutralization of an acidic or
    basic material by treatment with a reagent which will accomplish the
    neutralization.


CLS 71/44
TXT Methods under subclass 33 of preparing phosphate containing fertilizers
    wherein the raw materials are subjected to a heat treatment, usually a high
    temperature heat treatment which is the essential or dominating feature of
    the process.  Thus, the heat treatment of phosphate rock alone or in the
    presence of an inorganic substance at white, red or fusion heat
    temperatures, belongs here, irrespective of whether or not the substance is
    distinctly alkaline.


CLS 71/45
TXT Processes as defined in subclass 44 wherein both alkali metal and silicon
    values are present at some stage of the process; other inorganic compounds
    may also be present. The preponderance of patents in this subclass apply
    the heat treatment in the presence of the alkali metal and silicon values.


CLS 71/46
TXT Processes as defined in subclass 45 wherein Si values are not present.


CLS 71/47
TXT Processes as defined in subclass 44 wherein carbonates, oxides, sulphates,
    halides or silicon values, one or more, are present at some stage of the
    process.  As in the preceding heat treatment subclasses, the added values
    are ordinarily present during the heat treatment.


CLS 71/48
TXT This subclass includes all patents directed to a phosphate containing
    fertilizer.


CLS 71/49
TXT Products as defined in subclass 48 which contain also inorganic N values,
    other than or in addition to NH4.

    (1)     Note.  For products wherein the only inorganic N value is NH4, see
    subclass 51.


CLS 71/50
TXT Products as defined in subclass 42 which contain also inorganic nitrates.

    (1)     Note.  Search may also include subclasses 33, 37-47 of this class,
    for processes.


CLS 71/51
TXT Products as defined in subclass 48 which contain also inorganic alkali
    metal or ammonium compounds.

    (1)     Note.  Search also this class, subclasses 45 and 46.


CLS 71/52
TXT Products as defined in subclass 48 which contain also inorganic silicon
    values.

    (1)     Note.  Search should include subclasses 45 and 47 of this class.


CLS 71/53
TXT Products as defined in subclass 48 which contain also inorganic carbonates,
    oxides, sulphates, or halides, not hereinabove provided for.

    (1)     Note.  Search should include subclass 47 of this class.


CLS 71/54
TXT Methods under subclass 31 directed to the preparation of inorganic
    fertilizers containing N values other than or in addition to NH4 and
    products corresponding to these methods.


CLS 71/55
TXT Methods and products under subclass 54 in which the N value is a cyanamide
    or a derivative thereof.


CLS 71/56
TXT Methods and products as defined in subclass 55 which include in addition to
    cyanamide another inorganic N value (except NH4 values only), such as
    nitrates.


CLS 71/57
TXT Methods and products as defined in subclass 55 which include in addition to
    cyanamide, inorganic alkali metal or ammonium values.


CLS 71/58
TXT Processes under subclass 54 directed to the preparation of an inorganic
    fertilizer containing nitrates and corresponding products.


CLS 71/59
TXT Processes and products as defined in subclass 58 which include,
    additionally, alkali metal or ammonium values.


CLS 71/60
TXT Processes and products as defined in subclass 58 which include,
    additionally, carbonates, oxides, sulphates or halides, one or more.


CLS 71/61
TXT Processes and products under subclass 31 directed to the preparation of
    inorganic fertilizers containing alkali metal or ammonium values.


CLS 71/62
TXT Processes and products under subclass 31 directed to the preparation of
    inorganic fertilizers containing Si values.  Slags not provided for above
    are herein classified.


CLS 71/63
TXT Processes and products under subclass 31 directed to the preparation of
    inorganic fertilizers containing carbonates, oxides, sulphates or halides.
    Shells, such as oyster shells, are herein classified.


CLS 71/64.01
TXT Forms or conditioning:

    Processes under subclass 1 not hereinabove provided for, directed to the
    preparation of fertilizers in commercial forms.

    (1)     Note.  The fertilizer forms, as articles of manufacture, also
    belong here.  Methods directed to the conditioning of fertilizer values,
    such as obviating hygroscopicity, granulating, or rendering a fertilizer
    friable (as by quenching) are also classified herein.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 47, Plant Husbandry for structures formed of or
    containing fertilizers, such as flower pots, stakes and mulching sheets,
    utilized in plant husbandry, and fertilizing cartridges adapted to be
    buried in the earth.

    (3)     Note.  Processes of comminuting or granulating a liquid or molten
    substance are classified in Class 264, Plastic and Nonmetallic Article
    Shaping or Treating:  Processes, subclasses 5+, even though the granulated
    substance is claimed as a fertilizer.  Processes of granulating a mixture
    of reagents to give a fertilizer composition are in this class (71), in the
    subclass determinative of the composition.

    (4)     Note.  See Class 206, Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses
    524.1+ for a container with specified material for content or receptacle,
    particularly subclass 524.5 for a container with caustic content.


CLS 71/64.02
TXT Coating and granulating:

    Subject matter under subclass 64.01 including the steps of covering and
    making the material finer or vice versa.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64.03+, for granulating processes.

    64.07,  for coating processes.

    64.11   and 64.12, for coated products.


CLS 71/64.03
TXT Granulating:

    Subject matter under subclass 64.01 for forming the material into granules
    or grains.


CLS 71/64.04
TXT By comminuting:

    Subject matter under subclass 64.03 wherein the material is broken into
    small pieces.


CLS 71/64.05
TXT By agglomerating:

    Subject matter under subclass 64.03 wherein the material is collected or
    gathered into a mass, e.g., formed into increasing larger balls as by
    rolling, etc.


CLS 71/64.06
TXT By fluid contact:

    Subject matter under subclass 64.03 wherein the material is formed into
    particles upon being contacted by a gas or liquid.


CLS 71/64.07
TXT Coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 64.01 wherein the material is covered with a
    material.


CLS 71/64.08
TXT Slurry or suspension:

    Subject matter under subclass 64.01 wherein the material is in the form of
    a slurry, i.e., a thin watery mixture of a fine insoluble material or a
    suspension or a condition of a substance whose particles are dispersed
    through a fluid but not disolved in it.


CLS 71/64.09
TXT Gel:

    Subject matter under subclass 64.01 wherein the material is in the form of
    a gel, i.e., a jellylike substance formed by coagulation of a colloidal
    solution into a solid phase.


CLS 71/64.1
TXT Liquid:

    Subject matter under subclass 64.01 wherein the material is in the form of
    a nongaseous fluid.


CLS 71/64.11
TXT Controlled release:

    Subject matter under subclass 64.01 wherein the material is released to the
    environment in which it is placed in a regulated manner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64.07,  for the process of coating material of this kind.


CLS 71/64.12
TXT Anticaking:

    Subject matter under subclass 64.01 wherein the material is treated to
    prevent it from clumping, sticking together, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64.07,  for the process of coating materials of this kind.


CLS 71/64.13
TXT Forms having structure, e.g., particle size, dimensions, etc:

    Subject matter under subclass 64.01 which has structure (apparatus) or
    includes particle size, dimensions, etc., of the material.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 71/900
TXT FOAMS:

    Art collection involving the material in the form of a foamlike matter.


CLS 71/901
TXT REFUSE CONDITIONING:

    Art collection involving the treatment of waste material to enhance its
    fertilizer value.


CLS 71/902
TXT NITRIFICATION INHIBITION:

    Art collection involving the prevention of the nitrification or
    denitrification activity of growth media bacteria.


CLS 71/903
TXT SOIL CONDITIONER:

    Art collection involving material having values which treat the soil other
    than providing nutriments for plants.  See Class 405, subclass 263 for
    chemical earth treatment or control.


CLS 71/904
TXT CARRIER:

    Art collection involving material which serves as a substrate for the plant
    nutriments.


CLS 72/
TTL METAL DEFORMING

CLS 72/
TXT

    I.      INTRODUCTORY NOTES

    This is a restricted class for the art of metal deforming as defined in
    section II of this class.

    For original placement of a patent in this class, its claimed disclosure
    should meet the minimum requirements of the class definition and should not
    exceed beyond the boundaries indicated in section IV, Scope of the Class,
    and  discussed in sections V-VIII (Relationships to Other Classes.

    Users of this class are urged to consult the above-noted sections as an aid
    in placing patents or in locating patented art involving metal deformation,
    whether in Class 72 or in related classes.

    Section XI, Art Term Index to Class 72, affords additional entries to the
    class by listing many well-known art terms and their most nearly
    corresponding subclasses in the Metal Deforming schedule.

    Section XII, Criteria for Placement of Documents in this class, contains
    useful information for the searcher with regard to location of original
    patents, cross-references, and nonpatent literature in Class 72.

    Terms followed by an asterisk (*) will be found to be defined in section
    III, Glossary. Certain very frequently appearing terms, such as Work,
    Product, and Tool, are accompanied by the asterisk only where the exact
    meaning of the term is deemed particularly important.

    The diagrams appearing in connection with certain defined terms in section
    III and certain subclass definitions are intended as aids in distinguishing
    among separately classified concepts, and are not to be considered as
    limitations on the structural embodiments of the defined subject matter.
    The following reference characters have uniform meanings where they appear
    in the diagrams.

    C       Work-gripping clamp*

    C-D     Closed die*

    P       Product*

    R       Ram or Roller* (as will be evident from the diagram)

    T       Actuated tool* (may be a die)

    T1, T2  Tool couple* (at least one actuated tool)

    T1, T2, T3      Tool complex* (at least two actuated tools)

    W       Work* or Blank*

    (arrow) Motion of work, tool, etc.



    II.     CLASS DEFINITION

    Class 72 is the residual locus for patents directed to a process or
    apparatus for the mechanical treatment of metal work (elemental metal or
    mixture of metals) in a self-shape-sustaining state, to change the shape or
    size of such work, without removal of material therefrom, (a) by the direct
    application of mechanical force or pressure to the work, or (b) by the
    application of energy to induce the generation of mechanical stress within
    the work, which force, pressure, or stress produces a permanent change of
    shape in some portion of the work (i.e., exceeds the elastic limit of the
    work).

    III.    GLOSSARY

    ANVIL

    An undriven tool which, as disclosed, is designed and intended to react
    against work with sufficient force to enable an operation of the class type
    to be effected in some portion of the work.

    (1)     Note.  An undriven flat-faced tool is regarded as an "Anvil", even
    though work of a specific shape may be deformed into flatness against it.

    ASSEMBLY

    The act or operation of bringing into juxtaposition or contact a plurality
    of preforms (self-shape-sustaining objects) and/or joining said preforms,
    i.e., so treating one or more of them as to restrict their relative
    mobility.

    (1)     Note.  The mere ordering, stacking, or piling of workpieces prior
    to a metal-deforming operation thereupon, or the similar handling of
    products, is not regarded as "Assembly" for the purposes of this class.

    AXIS-OF-BEND

    That imaginary line used as a center about which the bending of moving work
    occurs.

    For convenience in illustrating the application of the term to the
    deformation of planiform work, three such axes may be considered, all being
    related to the direction of work movement and to the disposition of a
    planar nonthickness surface (see Figure III-1).  The three axes are defined
    as follows:



    (A)     X-Axis is a line both parallel to the direction of movement of the
    work and parallel to a nonthickness surface thereof.

    (B)     Y-Axis is a line both perpendicular to the direction of movement of
    the work (i.e., length) and perpendicular to a nonthickness surface thereof.

    (C)     Z-Axis is a line both perpendicular to the direction of movement of
    the work and parallel to a nonthickness surface thereof.

    In the case of strand or rodlike work (i.e., wherein a cross section taken
    transverse to its length shows substantially equal width and thickness),
    corresponding or analogous axes are used for convenience.

    Figure III-2 shows the product partially bent around a Z-Axis to form a
    transverse bend or the first convolution of a spiral coil.



    Figure 111-3 shows the product bent around a Z-Axis and additionally
    deflected along the Z-Axis-of-Bend, to form a helical-coil from rod.



    Figure III-4 shows the operation termed "levelling" wherein each successive
    work portion is deflected in alternation about a plurality or parallel
    Z-Axes, whereby each portion travels through an undulating path.



    Figure III-5 shows the side margins of the work bent around the X-Axis to
    form a trough. Further bending of the side margins obviously form a tube.



    BLANK

    A discrete piece of material which is intended to be subjected to an
    operation of the class type.

    BLANK HOLDER

    A mechanism, incorporated in a metal-deforming device, intended to grip a
    blank prior to and during deformation thereof. (Often arranged to permit a
    desired amount of slippage of said blank in response to the application of
    deforming force thereto, thereby modifying the effect of the
    metal-deforming tools).  See "Clamp".

    CAVITY

    (DIE CAVITY) A passageway closed at one end; a chamber or blind hole having
    at least one work-shape-imposing portion of closed perimeter definable in a
    plane normal to the direction of relative motion of a co-acting tool or
    work forcer, or of the disclosed flow of work. See "Orifice" and
    "Passageway".

    CLAMP

    (See "Work-Gripping Clamp" and compare "Blank Holder").

    CLEAN

    To loosen, separate, or remove from the surface of metal a spot or layer of
    any substance generally distinguishable from the work material without
    intended redimensioning of said material.

    CLOSED DIE

    A tool* which comprises a work-shape-imposing orifice*, cavity*, or
    passageway*.  (See diagrams under subclasses 276, 327, 350, and 360 for
    examples of "Closed Die").

    COIL

    The product of an operation in which work is bent so that it surrounds an
    Axis-Of-Bend* through more than 360 degrees of revolution. As used in this
    class, the operation involves moving the work and progressively deflecting
    successive portions thereof in the same general direction which is arcuate
    with respect to the direction of movement of the work.

    (1)     Note.  To produce a SPIRAL-COIL, the work is bent by deflection and
    wound, one convolution on a successive convolution, to form a scroll of
    gradually increasing diameter.

    (2)     Note. To produce a HELICAL-COIL, the work if deflected as described
    above, but an additional deflection or diversion is imposed on successive
    convolutions.  The additional deflection is directed along the
    Axis-Of-Bend*.  The additional component of bend is measured in terms of
    pitch, which term is used here in the same sense as applied to a screw or
    helix.

    CONTROL

    To start, or to modify the operating condition of, any portion of a
    work-treating or handling device

    (1)     Note.  "Stopping" is ordinarily regarded as an aspect of "Control",
    but is separately treated in this class in accordance with the class
    schedule.  See subclasses 1+.

    CUT

    To separate any portion of a workpiece from any other portion of the same
    workpiece by a step of machining (e.g., grinding, drilling, boring,
    milling, planing), severing (e.g., breaking, sawing, slicing, shearing), or
    by intrusion of a sharp-edged or pointed tool without removal of material
    (e.g., stabbing, splitting, intrusive punching).  See "Sever" and "Pierce".

    DEFLECTOR

    An element of instrumentality which engages successively presented portions
    of moving work and forces said portions from a first path of motion into a
    second and different path of motion.

    (1)     Note.  The "Deflector" may comprise a single deflecting surface
    forcing all portions of work in a single direction, or a plurality of
    elements acting differently upon different portions of work.

    DIE

    A metal-deforming tool* which, as disclosed, has a shaping or reshaping
    function with regard to the portion(s) of work engaged by it.

    (1)     Note.  For the purposes of this class, a "Die" may be regarded as a
    tool which leaves or impresses its characteristic mark on the engaged face
    portion of work.  The mark may be a three-dimensional imprint of the die
    face (see "Tool Face"), or may simply be the trace or track left by passage
    of the "Die" while in forcible engagement with the work, with or without
    accompanying deformation in other portions of the work.  If the
    tool-engaged face of the work remains unaltered in shape or position, the
    tool is regarded as an anvil*; if altered in position only, the tool in
    question is a work-forcer*.  See "Anvil", "Closed Die". "Tool", and "Work-
    Forcer".

    FLYING TOOL

    A tool*, other than a roller, having a tool face which, as disclosed,
    engages and acts upon bodily moving work while itself moving substantially
    in the same direction and at the same speed as such work.

    HOLLOW WORK

    Material or article of indeterminate length having exterior and interior
    surfaces extending in the length dimension; each surface, as viewed in a
    cross section normal to the length dimension, showing an unbroken
    periphery; the interior surface of which is intended to be treated by a
    metal-deforming tool of limited length.

    METAL

    The material subjected to an operation of the class type; an elemental
    metal or alloy of mixture thereof in self-shape-sustaining state (i.e., not
    molten, gaseous, or powdered); metal as the term is employed in Class 29,
    Metal Working, and Class 148, Metal Treatment.

    ORIFICE

    A closed perimeter opening or aperture extending directly through the
    thickness of a plate or wall and constituting (1) the mouth of a chamber,
    or (2) an interconnection between the regions of space at either side of a
    plate or wall of substantial lateral extent.  A passageway* of such short
    length that it has only one effective work-shape-imposing portion.

    PASSAGEWAY

    A conduit or path (especially for guiding and restraining the plastic flow
    of metal), having at least one shape-imposing portion of closed perimeter
    definable in a plane normal to the axis of the conduit.

    (1)     Note.  A passageway is usually open at each end; the term may,
    however be applied to a blind hole which, by disclosure, does not become
    completely and forcibly filled with work during an operation of the class
    type.

    (2)     Note.  A passageway is capable of imposing more than one shape on
    work; it may be regarded as a sequence of orifices, e.g., for drawing or
    extruding a twisted product of noncircular cross section.

    PIERCE

    To stab or penetrate by a pointed, conical, or wedgelike tool, as
    distinguished from punching (shearing) by coacting-edged tools.

    PLURAL TOOL SET

    Three or more relatively movable tools* which are effective in any
    combination to perform operations of the class type on one or more discrete
    pieces of work, of which tools less than the total number are in actual
    contact with the same piece of work at the same time.  For example:  (1)
    tool couples* located at spaced tool stations in a plural tool station
    machine, if they act on distinct workpieces, or noncurrently on portions of
    integrally connected work material, and (2) two movable tools alternately
    engaging a workpiece resting upon an anvil, each tool retracting before the
    other tool touches the work.

    PRODUCT

    The object or material after an operation of the class type has been
    performed thereon.

    (1)     Note.  The "Product" of one operation is properly denoted as "Work"
    for a subsequent operation.

    ROLLER

    A deforming instrumentality having a work- engaging, work-deforming
    peripheral surface which is generated by a line revolving about an axis,
    said instrumentality being disclosed as revolving about said axis so that
    successive peripheral portions thereof cyclically move into and out of
    contact with a work surface during deformation of the work, relative
    movement occurring, during deformation, between said axis and the work
    surface along a direction parallel to the work surface, thereby producing a
    relative rolling motion between the roller surface and the work surface as
    contrasted with sliding motion (i.e., the surfaces move in the same
    direction at substantially the same linear speed).

    (1)     Note.  The generating line of the peripheral surface may have any
    continuous profile (e.g., straight, curved, or irregular), and the line may
    have any desired inclination, other than at right angles, relative to the
    axis. Thus, to be considered a "Roller", any and all cross sections taken
    at right angles to the axis must show a circular work-engaging periphery.

    (2)     Note.  A hollow member wherein the interior surface is generated
    and used as described is also considered to be a "Roller".

    (3)     Note.  A plurality of tools rotatable about the same axis in the
    same direction and at the same rotational speed is considered to be a
    single "Roller" in the environment described herein.

    ROLLER CLUSTER

    A group of three or more rollers* disposed relatively to one another and to
    the work* such that the work passes between the rollers with a peripheral
    surface portion of each roller engaging a surface portion of the work, the
    engaged surface portions being substantially coextensive in the direction
    of movement of the work, and the rollers simultaneously deforming the work.

    ROLLER COUPLE

    A group of two coacting rollers* disposed opposite one another such that
    work passes therebetween, the adjacent peripheral surfaces of both rollers
    simultaneously engaging opposite sides, or opposed surfaces portions, of
    the work passing between the rollers and thus deforming that work.

    ROLLER-LIKE TOOL

    A deforming instrumentality having a work- engaging, work-deforming tool
    surface with some, but not all, of the characteristics of a roller*.

    (1)     Note.  Usually (a) the surface is generated by a line revolving
    about an axis (thus the tool looks like a roller), but the relative
    movement of the axis and work produces a sliding motion of tool surface
    relative to work surface; or (b) the relative movement of the tool axis and
    the work produces a rolling motion of tool surface on work surface (thus
    the tool acts like a roller), but the surface is not formed as a roller
    (e.g., the tool surface is rough, or gearlike, or recessed).

    SEVER

    To forcibly part or separate a discrete portion from a body of material.
    See "Cut".

    STOCK

    A piece or an indeterminate length of material from which a plurality of
    blanks* or products* may be made (usually in linear sequence).

    TOOL

    A tangible instrumentality having a surface portion which is designed and
    intended to engage or react against work with sufficient force to effect an
    operation of the class type.

    (1)     Note.  A core, mandrel, anvil, or the like, which may be "passive"
    in the sense of supplying only reaction force is included in this
    definition.  The tool may be either transitory or enduring; it may be
    destroyed in a single use.

    TOOL CARRIER

    A device for holding a tool* (a) against the force of gravity, and/or (b)
    in cooperative relationship with another tool(s) or the work, and wherein
    the tool moves with respect to the device.  For example, a stationary axle
    on which a roller* rotates is a "Tool Carrier" because of the relative
    movement; however, a shaft to which a roller is keyed so that both rotate
    together is not a carrier, whereas the bearing in which the shaft rotates
    is a "Tool Carrier" in this instance.

    TOOL COMPLEX

    Three or more relatively movable tools* which are in simultaneous contact
    with the same work at some instant during a metal-deforming operation.

    (1)     Note.  Typically, either all active tools are concurrently
    actuated, or a tool couple deforms work and remains in contact therewith
    while a third, fourth, etc., tool advances into deforming contact with the
    thus restrained work.

    (2)     Note. The deformation effected by a "Tool Complex" is generally
    greater in degree and/or more elaborate in detail than can be accomplished
    by repeated operations of a tool couple*, or the successive strokes of a
    plural tool set*.

    (3)     Note.  A "Tool Complex" may accomplish two or more seemingly
    distinct operations (e.g., simultaneously flanging opposite edges of a
    sheet).  In many such instances, some advantage is gained over the use of
    plural tool sets (e.g., balanced forces on work may permit the use of
    lighter clamping structure or the elimination of a work-holding device, and
    the simultaneous tool actions may enable closer control of dimensions).

    TOOL COUPLE

    Two tools which are so related in position and relative motion that when
    both are engaged with the same work they cooperate to effect an operation
    of the class type.  See "Tool Complex".

    TOOL FACE

    The surface portion(s) of a tool body which actually engage work at some
    time during an operation of the class type.

    (1)     Note.  "Tool Face" is distinguishable from supporting,
    interconnecting, spacing, or surrounding surface portions which do not
    engage work during normal or disclosed operation.  Disclosure of the tool
    operation is thus necessary for identification of the "Tool Face" proper,
    as is consideration for placement in subclasses 380+ (offset tool faces) or
    subclasses 392+ (relatively receding tool faces).  (See diagram under
    subclass 386 for example of a "Tool Face".)

    TOOL HOLDER

    A Device rigidly attached to a tool and effective to support and/or to
    transmit actuating force thereto.  See "Tool Carrier".

    TUBE

    A pipe, hollow cylinder, or hollow rodlike member consisting of a wall
    shaped in the form of a simple closed curve and extending axially,
    providing a conduit throughout its length.  The wall may vary along its
    axial length in transverse dimensions and/or shape.

    WORK

    The object or material which is intended to be subjected to an operation of
    the class type.  See "Blank".

    WORK-FORCER

    A driven tool which, as disclosed, has the function of forcibly moving work
    against the resistance of another tool.

    (1)     Note.  If the tool also directly deforms the engaged face of the
    work, it is specifically a die*.

    WORK-GRIPPING CLAMP

    An instrumentality having a plurality of opposed solid jaws or surface
    elements which are made effective, by movement of one or more of said jaws
    or surface elements, to grip a portion of work frictionally and to hold it
    fixedly.

    (1)     Note.  Some form of clamp-actuating means is required; a so-called
    "self-gripping" clamp, which closes upon work in response to initial
    movement of work, is included.

    (2)     Note.  Blank holders or "clamps", which are intended to allow
    controlled slippage of work during an operation, are excluded, as
    constituting "Tools".  See "Blank Holder".

    WORK TREATMENT

    Altering or actively maintaining some property, characteristic, or
    condition of work.  (Orientation or location of work, or juxtaposition of
    plural pieces, is not considered to be a property, characteristic, or
    condition for the purpose of this definition in this class).

    IV.     SCOPE OF THE CLASS

    Class 72 is intended to be the locus for patents directed to a process or
    apparatus for the deformation of metal work by the direct, or indirect,
    application of mechanical stress thereto while the work is in a
    self-sustaining state (i.e., not powdered or melted).

    Since metal deformation is typically one of a number of differentiated
    steps in the manufacture of specific commercial products, the preponderance
    of art discloses metal-deformation methods, or means in combination with
    other methods, or means of extraneous or nonclass type.  It has,
    accordingly, been found necessary to admit some such combinations while
    otherwise maintaining Class 72 as a generally restricted class. The sole
    positive requirement for placement of a patent, as an original copy, in
    Class 72 is its claimed disclosure of a metal-deforming process or
    apparatus.  A patent claiming metal deformation may, however, be excluded
    from the class because of claimed extraneous subject matter not expressly
    covered in the subclass titles and definitions.  Claimed subject matter
    which bars a patent from original placement in Class 72 may be summarized
    as follows ( see sections V-VIII of this class for more detailed
    discussion):

    A.      Separately claimed product of manufacture. Class 428, Stock
    Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 544+ provide for stock
    material, e.g., of indefinite length, which are all metal or have adjacent
    metal components; in particular, subclasses 577+ provide for metallic
    blanks and other intermediate articles.

    B.      The presence, either alone or in combination with metal deforming,
    of a recognized treatment of metal provided for in another existing class
    and not appearing in a subclass title in this class (e.g., anodizing,
    assembling of preforms, casting, cathode-sputtering, chemical-machining,
    electron beam, or laser-machining, use of adhesive, specific heating
    treatment, melting, welding, etc.).

    C.      The combination with a recognized treatment provided for in another
    existing class and not performed under the conditions, or with the
    limitations specifically stated in a subclass definition in this class
    (e.g., coating a final product of metal deformation, cutting solely of a
    nonmetal, or a nonsystematic cutting of metal).

    D.      The combination with other treatment(s) not excluded as such from
    Class 72, but the combination being directed to the manufacture of a
    special product which has been recognized in certain other existing classes
    (e.g., bolt- or nut-making, needle- or pin-making, manufacture of barrier
    layer devices, etc.).  (See section V below.)

    E.      Deformation of metal wire, as such, and in particular the formation
    of certain products therefrom (e.g., hairpins), remains subject matter for
    Class 140, Wireworking.  (See section V.)

    SUMMARY



    Specific questions involving the above-listed exclusory lines may be
    decided by reference to the following sections V-VIII of this class.
    Certain features ancillary to metal deforming are provided for in this
    class (e.g., work or product handling, heating or cooling, descalling,
    lubrication, automatic control, etc.), but other treatment elsewhere
    classified (e.g., assembly, welding) are always a bar to original placement
    in Class 72.

    V.      RELATIONSHIP TO OTHER CLASSES PERTAINING TO METAL DEFORMING, PER SE

    The following enumeration and discussion of classes does not purport to be
    exhaustive, but includes loci of patents relating to, per se, metal
    deforming wholly or in part.

    A.      Classes of Article Making:

    A recitation, in a process or apparatus claim, of the article being made
    will result in original placement of the patent containing such claim in
    the appropriate article-making class, except that a claim which recites
    only a step of, or use of an instrumentality for, performing a single
    metal-deforming operation will be placed in this class (72).

    Among such classes (or portions of classes) directed to the manufacture of
    particular products are the following:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 284 through 25.42, inclusive; and
    subclasses 592+ particularly 592.1 through 899.1, inclusive.

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making.

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making.

    79,     Button Making, subclass 3.

    140,    Wireworking, subclasses 71 through 92.2, inclusive; and subclasses
    3 through 57, inclusive.

     163,   Needle and Pin Making.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for methods and machines for making bolt,
    screws, nuts, nails, rivets, and washers.

    B.      The Class of Wireworking:

    The class of reference (140, Wireworking) includes patents for certain
    wire-deforming operations (e.g., Barbing, Knotting, Crimping) named in
    subclass titles of the class.  The lines that existed between Class 140 and
    other metal-deforming classes will (e.g., Metal Bearding, Metal Forging,
    etc.) continue to be observed, and this class (72) will serve as the
    repository of patents not provided for in Class 140.

    C.      The Classes of Measuring and Testing:

    Class 73 includes patents for structures that deform metal by "stress or
    strain of material of structure" (see Class 73, subclasses 788+).  Class
    374 including determining the thermal response of deformation (Class 374,
    subclasses 46+), and resistance to a thermally induced deformation.  The
    question of patent placement will usually be resolved by the
    specification's disclosing, on one hand, deformation to effective
    destruction (for Classes 73 or 374), or, on the other hand, deformation to
    form a product (for Class 72).

    VI.     RELATIONSHIP TO COMBINATION CLASSES

    A patent claim directed to a combination of a metal-deforming step or
    apparatus with other treatment or apparatus, not specifically provided for
    in Class 72, is excluded from this class and is generally placeable as
    noted in the following paragraphs.

    A.      With Assembling:

    1.      "Assembling" denotes the juxtaposing or joining of two or more
    "preforms" (discrete objects, as distinguished from material applied as
    coating, filling, or added as alloy, etc.).

    2.      Methods of, and means for, assembling preforms are provided for in
    other classes, and residually in Class 29, Metal Working.  More
    specifically, if a patent claim recites a step of (or apparatus for) metal
    deformation which, as disclosed, recognizes or requires the presence of two
    or more discrete members, at least one ofwhich is the subject of the
    metal-deforming operation, and the deforming operation results in securing
    at least two of the members together, the claim is excluded from Class 72
    and must be placed in another class, such as Class 29.  For example, a
    claim directed to the step of riveting or staking two metal objects
    together is proper subject matter for Class 29, Metal Working, subclasses
    428+ (Assembly and/or Joining).

    3.      The following two operations are distinguishable from the
    above-noted assembling of preforms and are proper subject matter for Class
    72:

    (a)     Method of, or apparatus for, joining spaced portions of the same
    workpiece solely by metal deformation (e.g., lock-seaming a tube).

    (b)     Method of, or apparatus for, extruding a metallic sheath on a core.

    4.      The following list of classes, while not exhaustive, illustrates
    the location of patented art involving metal deformation in combination
    with assembly of plural members.

    7,      Compound Tools.

    29,     Metal Working (and see reference to other classes in (5) Note), and
    under "SEARCH CLASS" under subclass 700 of Class 29.

    57,     Textiles: Spinning, Twisting, and Twining (subclasses 9 and 311
    involving preforming of wire strands).

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making.

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making.

    157,    Wheelwright Machines

    219,    Electric Heating (for combination of metal deforming and electric
    welding).

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for methods and machines for making bolt,
    screws, nuts, nails, rivets, and washers.

    B.      With Cutting

    1.      Class 72 is the locus for patents directed to the combination of
    metal deforming and cutting* (method or apparatus), provided that the same
    material is treated, and in a systematic manner.  In other words, the
    combination of metal deforming and cutting is proper subject matter for
    this class, with only two exceptions:

    (a)     Disclosure that cutting and metal deforming are performed only on
    different work.  For example:

    (1)     Device to forge a metal part and to punch an attached or associated
    record card (Class 29).

    (2)     Combined plier-type insulation stripper and wire end bender (Class
    7).

    (3)     Method of embedding a metal core in plastic material, bending to a
    desired shape, and trimming off excess plastic (Class 264).

    (b)     Disclosure fails to teach a systematic, i.e., simultaneous or
    predetermined, orderly sequential operation of cutter and metal-deforming
    means on the same work.  For example:

    (1)     Hand punch with a turret of manually selectable cutting and
    embossing dies (Class 7).

    (2)     Punch press with interchangeable cutting and bending dies or die
    inserts (Class 29).

    (3)     Set of hand tools for severing, incising, and stamping metal (Class
    7).

    (4)     Wire-crimping pliers with separately accessible side-cutting dies
    (Class 7).

    (5)     Press structure having spaced cutting and forging tool stations; no
    work feed means (Class 29).

    2.      In summary, it is further noted that:

    (a)     A patent otherwise barred from Class 72 will not be originally
    placed herein because of the inclusion of cutting.

    (b)     Patents to cutting tools or apparatus, per se, are excluded from
    Class 72.

    (c)     "Convertible" cutting and metal-deforming apparatus, i.e.,
    requiring the intervention of an operative to effect the conversion, is
    generally excluded from the subject matter of this class.

    (d)     "Combined" apparatus, in the sense of mere side-by-side or jointly
    driven cutting and metal-deforming devices, independently or alternatively
    usable at the will of an operative, is generally excluded.

    (e)     Combinations excluded from Class 72 under the foregoing discussion
    are generally placeable in Class 7 or Class 29, as illustrated in examples
    under section VI, B, 1, (b), above.

    C.      With Heat Treatment:

    1.      "Heat Treatment" refers to the establishment or maintenance of a
    given, relatively permanent, physical or chemical condition in work by
    heating or cooling it in a prescribed manner.

    2.      A patent directed to the combination of metal deformation and heat
    treatment of work will be placed as follows:

    (a)     In Class 219, Electric Heating, when electric heating (e.g.,
    resistance, induction) is involved.

    (b)     In Class 72, when the patent is not otherwise excluded, when the
    heat treatment is effected by other than electrical means, and the heat
    treatment is:

    (1)     unspecified (heating or cooling broadly claimed);

    (2)     for conditioning work to a suitable temperature for a
    metal-deforming operation;

    (3)     process annealing, i.e., for relieving stress due to a prior
    working or preparatory to a following operation; or

    (4)     for returning work or product to a desired ambient or handling
    temperature.



    (1)     Note. The term "quenching" is sometimes inaccurately used to denote
    mere cooling to a convenient temperature.  Such usage will not bar
    placement of a patent in Class 72.

    (c)     In Class 148, Metal Treatment, if there is significant heat
    treatment to modify or maintain the internal physical structure (i.e.,
    microstructure) or chemical property of metal combined with a metal
    deforming operation of Class 72, see section III, A, of the Class 148
    definition.  Significant heat treatment occurs when the temperature or
    heating or cooling rate is provided in a nonworking related step or when
    microstructure description is utilized in the claim to describe the heating
    or cooling treatment of the metal.  Working at a specified temperature
    without mention of microstructure is not significant heat treatment for
    Class 148.  The mere use of the term "ageing" or "tempering" is considered
    significant heat treatment for Class 148.  Except for "Work-Hardening"
    which is proper in Class 72, the use of the term "hardening" will be
    considered significant heat treatment for Class 148.  "Quenching" will be
    considered significant heat treatment lacking an indication that it means
    simply returning to a convenient working temperature (which belongs in
    Class 72 as stated above).  "Stress-relief-annealing" will remain in Class
    72, if combined with a metal deforming operation.  Working metal in the
    "superplastic" state or during "dynamic recrystallization" remains in Class
    72 unless a temperature is provided in the working step.  If temperature is
    provided for the superplastic working step, classification will go to Class
    148.  When combined with metal deforming, "annealing", per se, goes in
    Class 72.  However, annealing at a specified temperature goes in Class 148.
     Merely heating or cooling a metal to a working temperature is not
    significant heat treatment for Class 148.  The presence of reactive coating
    in any step of a metal treating process goes to Class 148.  Combinations of
    chemical-heat removing (i.e., flame-cutting) or burning with metal working
    go to Class 148.

            In Class 266, Metallurgical Apparatus, if the apparatus is for
    heat-treating solid metal and see the definitions therein for the line to
    Class 72.

    D.      With Cleaning, Coating, or Other Treatment:

    The following remarks apply both to apparatus and to process claims.

    1.      The combination of metal deforming with cleaning, descaling, or
    application of lubricating material to the work material before, during or
    after metal deformation is provided for in Class 72.

    2.      The combination of metal deforming with exposure of the work,
    before or during deformation, to gas, vapor, mist, or modified atmosphere,
    is provided for in Class 72.  Examples of this combination are:  the
    deformation or work in an evacuated chamber, or in the presence of an inert
    gas, or the spraying or sputtering of material on work before deformation.
    For the classification of metal deforming followed by coating, see Class
    29, Metal Working, subclasses 527.1+ and associated search notes.

    3.      The combination of metal deformation with the prior or simultaneous
    application of fluent material to an existing workpiece, by any such
    technique as casting, coating, or molding, is provided for in Class 72. The
    only exception involves electric arc deposition of metal, which combination
    is placeable in Class 219, Electric Heating.Any claimed casting, coating,
    or molding of material upon a product subsequent to a final step of metal
    deforming is proper subject matter for Class 29 as the residual locus, or
    for Classes 427 and 264 for specific methods, or Class 118 for apparatus.

    4.      The combination of initially making a metallic workpiece by casting
    or molding, followed by deformation thereof, is excluded from this class,
    and is generally proper subject matter for Class 29, Metal Working. Certain
    perfecting treatments of cast metal while in the mold are classifiable in
    Class 164, Metal Founding.  An apparent exception is the charging of an
    extrusion container with molten metal; in this instance, the pouring of
    molten metal is regarded as a convenient technique of handling work for
    later extrusion, rather than a casting for Class 164, Metal Founding, or a
    combination  involving casting for Class 29. Subclasses 253.1 of this class
    (72) provide for this combination of charging metal into a container and
    extruding it therefrom.

    E.      With Bodily Transferring of Tool to or from Tool Support or Storage
    Means:

    The following remarks apply to either a process or apparatus claim.

    1.      Metal deforming combined with bodily transfer or exchange of a
    deforming tool to or from a tool support (i.e., tool driver) or a storage
    means is proper for Class 483, Tool Changing, with the exception of
    deforming limited to roller couple tools with means to introduce or remove
    at least one roller with respect to the couple which is provided for in
    Class 72, subclasses 238 and subclasses indented thereunder.

    VII.    RELATIONSHIP TO SUBCOMBINATION CLASSES

    A.      The Work-Handling or Product-Handling Classes:

    The placement of patents claiming method of, or apparatus for, the handling
    of work for, or the product of, a deforming operation and also claiming the
    deforming method or means will be in this class unless the deforming method
    or means is not recited significantly.

    In this connection, a step of deforming (in a method claim) is considered
    significant even if it only indicates the type of deformation, e.g.,
    "rolling", "bending", "spinning".  On the other hand, a claimed step of
    handling to a named type of deforming instrumentality, e.g., "rolling
    mill", "bending brake", "spinning station", is not deemed to set forth a
    significant deforming step and thus is proper for a handling class.  If
    however, such instrumentality is further identified in terms of deforming
    function such as "three-high rolling mill", "hot metal bending brake",
    "pattern-controlled spinning station", such claimed terminology will import
    a significant deforming step and warrant placement of a patent in Class 72.

    In a claim directed to apparatus, examples of broadly recited and not
    significant deforming means, which would permit original placement of a
    patent in an appropriate handling class, include "rolling mill", "working
    station", "forging press", and similar terms; however, a significant
    relationship of work-handling and deforming means would be proper for class
    (72), such as "means to insert the billet into the upper pass of a
    three-high rolling mill".  The quoted phrases should be considered as
    exemplary, not as all-inclusive.

    Among the classes directed to work-handling or product-handling are the
    following:

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes,  Skids, Guides, and Ways, except that a chute or
    other gravity conveyor combined with a power-driven conveyor is found in
    Class 198, Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 311, 359+, 523+, and others.

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, particularly subclasses 373+ for a
    conveyor having means for changing the attitude of the conveyor load
    relative to the conveying direction.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, (also see section VIII, B,
    hereinafter).

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering.

    294,    Handling: Hand and Hoist-Line Implements.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, in particular subclasses 754+ where
    billet turnover devices can be found and compare with those devices in
    Class 198, Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 373+.

    B.      The Classes Relating to Tool Driving:

    1.      This class (72) provides for patents claiming means for driving a
    tool that is restricted, as disclosed, by its shape or its tool-face or its
    composition to its function of deforming metal.

    2.      Patents claiming a means for driving a tool which tool is recited
    by name only (both in the claim(s) and in the specification), will be
    placed in a class appropriate to the power source, transmission, or the
    machine as disclosed.

    3.      Among the classes directed to such latter driving means are the
    following:

    60,     Power Plants.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 214+ having disclosures of reciprocating press
    construction wherein the tool is a platen.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, having disclosures of a motion
    converting means and/or hammer for driving a general-purpose tool.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 232+ having disclosures
    of pile-driver means.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components.

    C.      Classes (or Portions of Classes) providing for a tool or toolface,
    per se: Among the classes directed to such subject matter are the following:

    29,     Metal Working, especially subclasses 270+ providing for
    hand-manipulatable tool means.

    81,     Tools, especially subclasses 300+ providing for plier-type tool
    structure.

    83,     Cutting, especially subclasses 651+ providing for cutting tool or
    tool-support structure.



    VIII.   OTHER CLASS RELATIONSHIPS

    A.      Classes Including Deforming of Nonmetals:

    1.      Class 72 is the residual locus for the plastic deformation of
    metallic work, (a) as simple metal stock or blanks, (b) in combination with
    nonmetal, as in the case of metal and paper laminates, or (c) as
    unspecified or unidentified material which appears by disclosure to be
    metal (e.g., referred to as "ingot", "rail", "axle blank").  The additional
    deformation of nonmetallic material (e.g., in a laminate or other composite
    work) will not bar placement of a patent in this class.

    2.      A claimed disclosure of deformation of a nonmetal only is subject
    matter for another class, of which the following are typical:

    29,     Metal Working (e.g., residual for fibrous material).

    144,    Woodworking.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web.

    B.      Class 242, Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding

    1.      With respect to winding, Classes 72 and 242 contain patents wherein
    work is disclosed as being held to a mandrel or core and wound thereon due
    to interaction of (a) a force rotating the core and (b) a force restraining
    the work to movement along a course substantially tangent to the surface of
    the core or the wound product.

    Patents disclosing such forces applied to metal and claiming use of a
    deflector closely adjacent the core will be placed originally in Class 72
    unless the specification clearly teaches that the metal is not deformed or
    stressed beyond its elastic limit.

    Patents disclosing such forces applied to metal, wherein the restraining
    force is claimed in terms of means, or the use of means, remote from the
    core for retarding movement of the work will be placed originally in Class
    72 only if the disclosure positively teaches deformation or the metal.

    2.      With respect to unwinding, a patent wherein metal is unwound from a
    coil will be placed in Class 72 only if a claimed disclosure teaches
    deformation or stress beyond the elastic limit, as by use of a deflector*
    or tensioning means.

    C.      Classes Including Compacting of Particulate Material:

    The deformation of compacted particulate metal is not excluded from Class
    72, if the work material is in self-shape-sustaining state.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, appropriate subclasses for processes
    of forming articles from particulate material including metal particles
    with or without use of heat.

    IX.     List of classes referred to in the class defintion (previous
    Sections) and in the subclass definitions (Section XIII which follows) in
    this Bulletin

    Class   Section Subclass(es)
            (of this Bulletin)      (in this Bulletin)
    7       VI A4; VI Bla & b
    15              40
    24              409.15
    29      V A; VI A2 & 4; 31.01, 40, 46, 53,
                    409.01
            VI Bla & b; VI B2e;     54, 66, 118, 120,
            VI D3 & 4; VI C;        125, 278, 324,
            VIII A2 & C     325, 362
    30              324
    53              409.02
    57      VI A4
    59      V A; VI A4
    60      VII B3
    65              253.1
    66              7.1, 14.8
    73      V C     31.01
    74      VII B3
    75      VIII C
    76      V A; VI A4      362
    77              324
    79      V A
    81      VII C   409.01
    82              324
    83      VII C   1,6.1, 7.1, 7.2, 7.4,                   8.1, 8.3,
    11.1,         14.2, 14.8, 14.9,                 15.3, 16.1,
    16.2,               17.3, 21.2, 31.01,          37, 55, 184,
    278,               304, 312, 313,               324, 328,
    351,          361, 418, 419,            422, 426, 429,          430, 431,
    432,          435, 442, 444,            446, 449,
    452.1,                453.01, 454, 455,         456

    99              253.1
    100     VII B3; VIII C  63, 253.1, 292
    116             31.01
    118     VI B3; VIII C   39, 46
    134             39
    139             7.1, 14.8
    140     IV E; V A & B
    144     VII A2
    148     VI C2c
    156     VII B3  253.1, 268
    157     VI A4
    163     V A
    164     VI D4   253.1
    168             31.01
    173     VII B3  432
    184             43
    192             1
    193     VII A   270
    198     VII A
    204             47
    209     VII A
    219     VII A4 & C2 & D3        46, 253.1
    221             270
    225             324
    226     VII A   6.1, 6.2, 7.1, 7.4,
                    8.3, 8.6, 11.1,
                    11.4, 12.3, 14.8,
                    16.2, 16.6, 17.3,
                    18.4, 19.2, 287
    227     VI A4   324,409.02,
                    409.05
    228     VI A4   6.2, 28.2, 30.2, 48,
                    176
    234             1
    235             31.04
    242     VII A; VIII B
    264     VI B1a & D3;    253.1
            VIII A2 & C
    266     VI C2c
    269             291, 293, 296,
                    322, 390.6
    271     VII A
    294     VII A
    310     VII B3
    340             31.01
    405     VIII B3
    409             324
    414     VII A   287
    419             253.1
    425     VIII A. 2,C     6.1, 6.2, 28.2, 30.2
                    41, 46, 99,
                    254, 324, 343, 467
    427,    VI D 3  399
    451             40, 53, 324
    470     V A; VI A 4     324
    474             409.15
    475,    VII B3
    483     VI, E, 1        238, 446
    493     VIII A2
    606             409.02, 409.05
    901             405.01


    X.      STRUCTURE OF THE CLASS

    The Class 72 schedule affords eight basic fields of search, as follows:

    A.      Subclasses 1-47 and 324-342.96 (Method or apparatus) including:

    1.      All claimed combinations of metal deforming with selected
    extraneous treatments (e.g., descaling, cutting) which are not, per se,
    excluded from the class.

    2.      Metal deforming with selected perfecting features (e.g., indicator,
    random control of stopping), which featured are deemed generally pertinent
    to any type of metal deforming.

    B.      Subclasses 48-323 and 343-361

    Method or apparatus involving selected types of metal-deforming
    instrumentalities (e.g., by pressurized fluent medium, by plural relatively
    movable work-gripping clamps).

    (1)     Note.  This group includes some newly defined concepts in the basic
    subject matter of the class for which there is no presently accepted
    terminology. See section XI, Art Term Index to the class, for additional
    entries to the schedule.

    C.      Subclasses 362-379.6

    Residual metal-deforming processes (e.g., coiling or twisting) including
    purely manipulative steps or steps involving apparatus not provided for in
    preceding subclasses.

    D.      Subclasses 380-416

    Essentially complete basic apparatus of the class type.  Recitation of
    tools or tool faces, tool-moving or guiding means, and disclosure of
    specific work treatment by the tools, is required for original placement in
    this group.

    (1)     Note.  A basic flat-platen press or flat-faced power hammer and
    anvil is excluded from this group unless the claimed combination
    specifically fits a subclass definition (e.g., a simple flat-platen press
    claimed only as a bender or straightener for specifically-shaped work may
    possibly qualify as offset-tool-face apparatus for subclasses 380+;
    otherwise it would be found in following group).

    E.      Subclass 417-461

    Apparatus subcombinations, such as tool drivers or workhandling means, of
    insufficient scope to constitute complete metal-deforming devices; also,
    the flat-faced power hammers and presses noted in section D, above.

    F.      Subclasses 462-482.94

    Tools and/or tool holders.

    (1)     Note.  Some tools, such as a bridge-type extrusion die, are
    classified in preceding groups, as subcombinations peculiar to specific
    metal-deforming apparatus.

    G.      Subclass 483

    Miscellaneous apparatus or nontool element not provided for in preceding
    subclasses.

    H.      Cross-Reference Art Collection 700-715:

    Cross-referenced material relating to six concepts or commonly used terms
    which have not been defined for Class 72.  For instance, subclasses 700 and
    705 relate to particular kinds of workpieces.  For these and other
    undefined terms, see the "Art Term Index to Class 72" in section XI.

    XI.     ART TERM INDEX TO CLASS 72

    The following index is provided for convenience in locating certain types
    of metal-deforming methods or apparatus according to key words in common
    usage.

    Some keywords (e.g., Rolling) resemble defined terms, section III, but are
    here used in their popular or broader (often ambiguous) sense.

    Certain of the keywords represent subject matter formerly included in
    abolished classes, but excluded from Class 72; a pertinent class is
    indicated for such subject matter (e.g., Presses, Class 100).



    Keyword Subclass

    Alloy           700
    Anvil           462+
    Assembling      (Class 29)
    Automatic control (combined)    6.1+,28.1+
    Beading         84+,102+,
                            367.1
    Bending (see Coiling,
            Corrugating, Leveller)
            Brake   298, 310,
                            319+
    Sweep-arm       217
    Billet piercing 256, 325+
    Bimetallic work 258, 700
    Blankholder     82+, 293+
                            350, 417
    Blanking (see Cutting)  336, 337
    Coiling         66
            Helical 135+
            Spiral  146+
    Coining         359
            Cold squirting
            (impact extrusion)      267

    Composite (with cutting) tool   186, 325+,
                            464
    Core, deformable, etc.  57+, 150,
                            465.1+
    Core tube, extrusion    264+

    Corrugating     59, 176+
                            184+,                                   370.19+,
                                           385,                    415
    Crimping        196,
    402,                    712     Cutting (combined)      293+
    and                        Notes                   there underDescaling
    (combined)      39+Die-expressing
    (extrusion)   31.13,                  253.1+Distortion
    prevention       701, 702Drawing, die Bench     274+    Deep- or
    Shell- 347+    Push-   284, 343 Wire- or Tube-  274+Drop
    forging        360, 412+                        437+Edgewise
    bender     411Electrohydraulic forming  56Electromagnetic
    forming       56Emboss                358+, 414Explosive
    forming        56Explosively actuated tool      430Feed, work
    (combined)        419+    Filler (see Core)Flaring, Tube        115+,
    317,                      370.11, 393Flying tool        184+Forging (see
    specific
    terms) 377Hammer       462+    Drive   429+    Drop    435+Handling
    (combined)  419+Heading     318, 357High-energy-rate forming    (see
    Explosive       Forming, etc.)Impact
    Extrusion  267Knurling     703Levelling    160+Mandrel,
    extrusion       264+,                   462+Offsetting  301, 386+Pening
    (Peining)       76, 377, 395    Shot            53Piercing              97,
    256+,                       325+Pilfering
    mill  189Press                (Class
    100)       Extrusion       253.1+  Metal-drawing   347     Triple-action
    312+,                   350+,
    417Rare Metal   700Reducing (see specific terms)        377Riveting (see
    Upsetting)      (Class
    29)Rolling               199+,                   365.2+By walking-form  220
        Concave-and-roll    91+     Die-            184+    Four-high
    mill  241.2+  Platen- 88+     Thread- 88+, 104  Three-high mill 223,
    232Shot-peening    53Shrinker, tire     292,
    303,                       402Skelping          51+, 176+Snarling
    (Stippling)   76, 377, 465.1Spinning    82+Spring
    coiler        135+Straightening
            Frame   705     Shaft   389.1+  Stretching      274+,
       302+378Stretch-forming  151,
    295+,                      305Swaging (see specific
    terms)      377Tube         76, 367.1+,
                                    402Thread-rolling       88+, 104Through
    die     467+Trimming (see Cutting)      334, 340Tube
    Working    367.1+  Corrugating     59, 62       Flaring 115+,
    317,                      393Swaging              76,
    402Twisting               64+, 299,                     371Upsetting
     302+,                                  370.03,
    318,                    322+,                   352+
    377,                       407+,                   416Walking-form
    220Welding              (Class 228)Wipe-forming      149Wrap-forming 296+



    XII.    CRITERIA FOR PLACEMENT OF DOCUMENTS IN THIS CLASS

    A.      The schedule of Class 72 was developed with strict adherence to
    schedule superiority.

    Original placement of U. S. patents is determined by their claimed
    disclosure, with the following exception.  Patents granted prior to 1910
    are generally, but not necessarily, placed by claimed disclosure.  The
    presence of significant unclaimed subject matter in such an older patent,
    if of higher schedule superiority than the claimed invention, may determine
    its original placement in the higher subclass, with such cross-referencing
    downward as appears helpful and in accordance with established procedure.

    B.      Cross-referencing, of U. S. patents only, is intended to account
    for significant, but unclaimed, disclosure, as well as subordinate, but
    distinct, inventions related to basic subject matter of the class.

    C.      Foreign patents and nonpatent literature are placed solely on the
    basis of "useful disclosure" without strict regard to schedule superiority
    or to specific limitations in subclass definitions.

    D.      "Claimed disclosure" is defined as the combination of elements
    recited in the controlling claim of a patent, together with such features
    of the recited elements as must be imputed from the disclosure to render
    the claimed combination complete and operative for the functions referred
    to in the claim. For example, if alternative dies are disclosed in the
    specification of a machine, but not identifiably recited in the claim, the
    term "die" is construed broadly for the purpose of original placement.  If
    the claim refers to a die bore, that die which is disclosed as having a
    bore will be read into the claim.  Other features of the so-identified die
    (e.g., a vent hole) will not be deemed part of the claimed disclosure
    unless some reference thereto appears in the claim.

    E.      "Useful disclosure", for the purpose of this schedule, may be the
    total disclosure of a document, or in the case of multiple disclosures or
    of a broad combination, it may be that portion of the total disclosure
    which, in the opinion of the classifier, is most significantly related to
    the basic subject of Class 72.

    F.      Examples of Placement of U. S. Patents:

    1.      A claim to a motor-driven press includes claimed complementary dies
    to form a faceted reflector unit from sheet tungsten, with automatic
    angular indexing of work between press strokes and automatic stopping upon
    completion of 360 degrees of indexing.

    Original copy is placed in subclass 30.1, cross-references in subclasses
    414 and 422; additional cross-reference in art collection subclass 700 is
    desirable.

    2.      A claim recites the steps of cutting a predetermined length of
    steel strip from a coil, mechanically gripping the ends of the cut blank,
    heating the central portion thereof, and wrapping the blank under tension
    about a contoured forming block.

    Original copy is placed in subclass 294, cross-referenced in subclasses 296
    and 342.1+. (Additional cross-references in subclass 339, severing a blank
    from stock; in subclass 364, process, temperature modification; and in
    subclass 372, process using claimed apparatus; also may be desirable,
    depending upon apparent novelty in these details.)

    3.      A claim recites only a pair of dies with configured faces, one die
    having a replaceable face portion to alter a dimension of the product:

    Original copy is placed in subclass 473.  No upward cross-reference is
    necessary because press features such as drive, guides, etc., are presumed
    to be conventional.

    XIII.   Subclass Definitions


CLS 72/1
TXT WITH RANDOMLY ACTUATED STOPPING:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising apparatus including,
    or method employing, means capable of bringing to a halt any or all of the
    moving parts of a metal-deforming instrumentality, such means acting in
    response to a condition or signal or impulse whose time of occurrence
    cannot be predicted.

    (1)     Note.  Disclosure of a machine capable of stopping will not be
    placed here as an original unless a claim particularly recites such
    stopping as a result of an unplanned or unpredictable occurrence.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14.3    and 21.3, for a disclosure wherein a machine, or a part thereof,
    stops in response to a tool sensor.

    30.1+,  for a disclosure wherein a machine, or a part thereof, stops when
    an intended operation has been completed, and see (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 58 for stopping means in a cutting machine,
    wherein the stopping means, per se, is similar to those of this and
    indented subclasses.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, for stopping means in general; and
    subclass 134 for stopping of a machine responsive to part of an operative's
    body.

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), subclass 30 for selective
    cutting means provided with randomly actuated stopping means.


CLS 72/2
TXT Manually controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the halting of instrumentality
    operation is the direct result of a willful act of an operative.

    (1)     Note.  The term "manual" includes the use of any part of the body
    of the operative.


CLS 72/3
TXT Responsive to condition of work or product:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the halting of instrumentality
    operation results from the sensing of a property or state of the work* or
    product*.

    (1)     Note.  The term "property or state" includes shape, size of
    presentation such as feed, presence, absence, or attitude of the work or
    product.


CLS 72/4
TXT Work feed or faulty work:

    Subject matter under subclass 3 wherein the sensed property or state is an
    abnormality in the work itself or in the presentation of work to the
    machine, or an exhaustion in the supply of work.


CLS 72/5
TXT Termination or tangle of running length work:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 wherein the work moves along a direction
    coinciding with its dimension of greatest magnitude, and wherein the sensed
    property or state is either (a) an interruption in work movement (caused by
    breakage or exhaustion thereof), or (b) a snarl or kink in the work.


CLS 72/6.1
TXT WITH USE OF CONTROL MEANS ENERGIZED IN RESPONSE TO ACTIVATOR  STIMULATED BY
    CONDITION SENSOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means, or a step of
    using means, for (a) detecting any of the following characteristics:  a
    state or property, a change in a state or property, or the occurrence of a
    predetermined event, in any of the following:  the work*, the product of a
    machine, the machine itself, any part of the machine, or the environment of
    the machine affecting the operation thereof, (b) initiating (as a direct
    result of such detection) a force or impulse other than that generated or
    transmitted by the detecting means, and (c) regulating or modifying (as a
    direct result of such initiation) the operation of said machine.

    (1)     Note.  This definition requires a patent to claim at least four
    instrumentalities (or the use thereof) for original placement herein.  One
    of these must be a metal-deforming machine or a device (e.g., work feeder,
    work heater, product handler) necessary to the proximate function of
    deforming metal.  The other three are (a) a sensor (e.g., photocell system,
    trip lever, pressure diaphragm) to detect a condition as stated in (a) of
    the definition, (b) an activator (e.g., an element to make or break an
    electric circuit, a clutch, a valve) to cause a release of energy more
    than, or different from, that accounted for by mere change in condition
    (e.g., position or movement) of the sensor while it is functioning, and (c)
    a controller (e.g., a motor or driver for said machine or device) to change
    or cause the operation of said machine or device.  Therefore, a cam
    follower (or sensor) directly linked to a controller, whereby follower
    movement directly effects controller movement, is not proper subject matter
    for this subclass due to lack of an  activator as defined.  On the other
    hand, disclosure of a cam follower that makes and breaks an electrical
    circuit that energizes a motor, may be placed herein.

    (2)     Note.  A voluntary act of the person operating the machine is not
    proper subject matter for this subclass.  For example, disclosure of an
    on/off switch on a metal-deforming machine manipulated by an operative to
    start and/or stop the machine (even though the switch initiates a release
    of energy), should be considered for subclass 1, but is not classified
    herein.

    (3)     Note.  The machine that is regulated by the control means is not
    limited to a work deforming machine of this class.  It can be another
    machine associated with the work deformer if the claim reciting the other
    machine and work deformer is acceptable for original placement into Class
    72.

    (4)     Note.  The control system disclosed in the patents of this and
    indented subclasses are similar in concept to control systems of other
    classes, particularly Class 226, Advancing Material of Indeterminate
    Length, and Class 83, Cutting.  The total operations and the claimed
    combinations are, of course, different, but the control systems, per se,
    found in Classes 226 and 83 are usually analogous to those herein, and may
    be applicable to the machines of Class 72.  In the "SEARCH CLASS" notes for
    the subclasses indented hereunder, reference to this (4) Note indicated
    that the other class and subclass should be considered because the control
    system, per se, of a patent in the other class may be similar to a control
    system, per se, of Class 72.  The notes to Class 83, subclass 399 (which
    see), summarize all the subclasses in Class 83 pertaining to "control"
    subclasses therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for metal deforming with randomly actuating stopping, and see (2)
    Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 72+ for a cutting machine with means to monitor
    and control that machine.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, and see (4) Note above.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 135+ for apparatus to shape or reshape nonmetals combined with
    control means responsive to, or actuated by, means sensing or detecting a
    condition; see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 72/6.2
TXT Metal deforming by use of roller or roller-like tool element:

    Subject matter under subclass 6.1 comprising a machine including, or method
    employing, a roller* tool or a roller-like tool* to deform work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28.2+   and 30.2, for other deforming by a roller or roller-like tool
    including control of the tool.

    67+,    for deforming by relative rotation between a workpiece and a tool,
    particularly subclass 75 for a spherical tool, subclasses 91+ for deforming
    by a roller or roller-like tool cooperating with an opposing concave
    surface, subclasses 110+ for a roller cluster, and subclass 124 for a
    roller cooperating with a work-spaced tool.

    127+,   for deflecting to deform metal which may include use of a roller or
    roller-like tool, particularly subclasses 162+ for "levelling" by use of
    relatively-inclined successive rollers, subclasses 178+ for "troughing" by
    use of a roller cluster, subclasses 179+ and 182 for use of a roller couple.

    184+,   for deforming by a "flying tool" that may comprise a roller or
    roller-like tool.

    199+,   for deforming by a roller or roller-like tool, generally.

    366.2,  for a method of deforming by a disclosed (but not claimed) roller.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclass 158 for rolling of metal parts
    combined with independent fusion bonding of the parts; and subclass 243 for
    simultaneous rolling and fusion bonding of the parts.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    subclasses 363+ for a press forming or press reshaping means for nonmetal
    including an endless (e.g., roll, etc.) forming surface.


CLS 72/7.1
TXT Including use of sensor responsive to information carried by removable
    auxiliary record (e.g., recording disk, tape, or card):

    Subject matter under subclass 6.2 including using a separate device
    inserted into, attached to, or applied to, the machine, and detecting
    physical characteristics of the device to control the operation of the
    machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14.8+,  for a sensor which regulates a removable auxiliary record to
    responsively regulate a deforming machine other than one which deforms by a
    roller or roller-like tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    66,     Textiles: Knitting, subclasses 215+ for knitting by use of a
    pattern-responsive control means which may be removable from a knitting
    device.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 76.1+, for cutting with use of a control means
    responsive to a replaceable information program.  Also, see (4) Note under
    the  definition of Class 72, subclass 6.1.

    139,    Textiles: Weaving, subclasses 317+ for pattern-responsive control
    means.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclass 9, and see (4)
    Note under the definition of Class 72, subclass 6.1.


CLS 72/7.2
TXT Including plural sensors or sensor responsive to comparison between plural
    conditions:

    Subject matter under subclass 7.1 including using (a) multiple detecting
    means to discern a corresponding number of characteristics, or (b) a single
    detecting means to discern multiple characteristics; in either case, then
    comparing the characteristics and generating a resultant impulse
    representing the similarities or differences between the detected
    characteristics, whereby the regulating means governs the machine in
    accordance with the resultant impulse to correct incipient errors in the
    machine or to maintain operation of the machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8.1+,   14.9+ and 16.1+, for other metal deforming including multiple
    sensing with comparison of impulses from the sensors.

    11.2+,  13.2, 13.7, 14.1, 18.1+, 20.4, and 21.1, for metal deforming
    including multiple sensing but without comparison of impulses from the
    sensors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 72+ for  "self-regulating" or "feedback"
    control means, and see (4) Note under the definition of Class 72, subclass
    6.1.


CLS 72/7.3
TXT Sensing "pattern":

    Subject matter under subclass 7.2 including using a contoured guide engaged
    by a traversing follower connected to a metal deforming tool such that the
    tool follows a path identical to the contours of the guide as the tool
    engages the work for deformation thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The term "pattern" (in the title) refers to a model or
    prototype insertable into and removable from the machine and having a shape
    or configuration exactly similar or proportional to the shape or
    configuration of the desired product.  A cam or eccentric or other object
    which is distorted with respect to the desired product is not considered to
    be a pattern, and disclosures of such objects may be found in other
    subclasses appropriate to the deformer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15.1,   for a removable pattern to be used in a condition responsive
    control means of metal deforming means, generally.

    82,     for deforming of a rotating workpiece by use of a "pattern" that
    causes tool movement without  a control means energized in response of an
    activator.


CLS 72/7.4
TXT Sensing work or product (e.g., by X-ray):

    Subject matter under subclass 7.2 including detecting a characteristic of
    the work* for, or the product* of, the machine.

    (1)     Note.  Sensing a "Blank Holder"* or a work* holder is included
    herein.

    (2)     Note.  A deforming tool* is not considered to be a "detector";
    therefore, detecting a tool* in direct engagement with the work is not
    considered to be detecting the "work or product" for placement in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8.3+,   11.1+, 15.1+, 16.2+, and 17.3+, for other control by sensing of
    work or product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 79+, 211, 286+, 358+, and 360+ for a control
    system responsive to work for, or product of, a cutting machine, and see
    (4) Note under the definition of Class 72, subclass 6.1.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 10+ for a
    control system responsive to work for feeding the work, and see (4) Note
    under the definition of Class 72, subclass 6.1.


CLS 72/7.5
TXT Sensing lead end or tail end:

    Subject matter under subclass 7.4 including detecting the forward edge or
    the trailing edge of moving work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8.8,    11.5, 12.5, 15.4, 16.7, 18.5, and 19.4, for other sensing of the
    lead end or tail end of work or product.


CLS 72/7.6
TXT Sensing cross sectional dimension:

    Subject matter under subclass 7.4 including moving the work in a given
    direction, and detecting the extent of the work at right angles to such
    direction.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes patents disclosing the measurement of
    work thickness by electrostatic, magnetic, or radiant energy (e.g.,
    "X-ray") detecting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8.9+,   11.6+, 12.7+, 15.5, 16.8+, 18.6+, and 19.6+, for other sensing of
    cross sectional dimension of work or product.


CLS 72/8.1
TXT Including plural sensors or sensor responsive to comparison between plural
    conditions:

    Subject matter under subclass 6.2 including using (a) multiple detecting
    means to discern a corresponding number of characteristics, or (b) a single
    detecting means to discern multiple characteristics; in either case, then
    comparing the characteristics and generating a resultant impulse
    representing the similarities or differences between the detected
    characteristics, whereby the regulating means governs the machine in
    accordance with the resultant impulse to correct incipient errors in the
    machine or to maintain operation of the machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.2+,   14.9+ and 16.1+, for other metal deforming including multiple
    sensing with comparison of impulses from the sensors.

    11.2+,  13.2, 13.7, 14.1, 18.1+, 20.4, and 21.1, for metal deforming
    including multiple sensing but without comparison of impulses from the
    sensors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting,  subclasses 72+ for  "self-regulating" or "feedback"
    control means, and see (4) Note under the definition of Class 72, subclass
    6.1.


CLS 72/8.2
TXT Sensing "memory" stored on tool or tool-linked part:

    Subject matter under subclass 8.1 including use of structure having an
    impressible media capable of holding data which is part of the
    instrumentality for engaging the work for deforming, or is fixedly attached
    thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15.1+,  for sensing "memory" stored on a tool or tool-linked part to
    regulate a metal deforming machine that does not use a roller or
    roller-like tool.


CLS 72/8.3
TXT Sensing work or product (e.g., by X-ray):

    Subject matter under subclass 8.1 including detecting a characteristic of
    the work* for, or the product* of, the machine.

    (1)     Note.  Sensing a "Blank Holder"* or a work* holder is included
    herein.

    (2)     Note.  A deforming tool* is not considered to be a "detector";
    therefore, detecting a tool* in direct engagement with the work is not
    considered to be detecting the "work or product" for placement in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.4+,   11.1+, 15.3+, 16.2+, and 17.3+, for other control by sensing of
    work or product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 79+, 211, 286+, 358+, and 360+ for a control
    system responsive to work for, or product of, a cutting machine, and see
    (4) Note under the definition of Class 72, subclass 6.1.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 10+ for a
    control system responsive to work for feeding the work, and see (4) Note
    under the definition of Class 72, subclass 6.1.


CLS 72/8.4
TXT Work and product:

    Subject matter under subclass 8.3 including detecting a characteristic of
    the work* for the machine and detecting a characteristic of the product* of
    the same machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16.4    and 18.2, for other sensing of both work and product.


CLS 72/8.5
TXT Sensing temperature:

    Subject matter under subclass 8.3 including detecting the degree of heat
    content in the work* or the product*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11.3,   12.2, 16.5, 18.3, and 19.1, for other sensing of temperature.


CLS 72/8.6
TXT Sensing slack or tension (e.g., by use of dancer):

    Subject matter under subclass 8.3 including (a) detecting the lateral
    movement of a flexible portion of an elongated workpiece or (b) detecting
    the degree of tautness in an elongated workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  A typical disclosure found in this subclass comprises a
    system including two rolling mills through which the work passes
    sequentially.  In the space between the rolling mills, the work is engaged
    by a detecting means urged against the work along a line substantially at
    right angles to the direction of work movement.  The position of said means
    along that line indicates the tautness of the work passing between the
    mills, and this position is used to control the tautness.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11.4,   12.3, 16.6, 18.4, and 19.2, for other sensing of slack or tension
    in work or product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclass 44 for a
    "dancer " controlling feed of material, and see (4) Note under the
    definition of Class 72, subclass 6.1.


CLS 72/8.7
TXT Measuring tension distribution across width of work:

    Subject matter under subclass 8.6 including detecting the degree of
    tautness in an elongated workpiece at different lateral locations
    perpendicular to the length of the workpiece.


CLS 72/8.8
TXT Sensing lead end or tail end:

    Subject matter under subclass 8.3 including detecting the forward edge or
    the trailing edge of moving work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.5,    11.5, 12.5, 15.4, 16.7, 18.5, and 19.4, for other sensing of the
    lead end or tail end of work or product.


CLS 72/8.9
TXT Sensing cross sectional dimension:

    Subject matter under subclass 8.3 including moving the work in a given
    direction, and detecting the extent of the work at right angles to such
    direction.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes patents disclosing the measurement of
    work thickness by electrostatic, magnetic, or radiant energy (e.g.,
    "X-ray") detecting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.6+,   11.6+, 12.7+, 15.5, 16.8+, 18.6+, and 19.6+, for other sensing of
    cross sectional dimension of work or product.


CLS 72/9.1
TXT Sensing flatness (e.g., crown):

    Subject matter under subclass 8.9 wherein the work includes a greater and a
    lesser lateral dimension and wherein the detecting  discerns the planar
    characteristic of one of the greater surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11.7    and 18.7, for other sensing of flatness, used to regulate the
    operation of a metal deforming machine.


CLS 72/9.2
TXT Sensing thickness:

    Subject matter under subclass 8.9 wherein the work includes a greater and a
    lesser lateral dimension and wherein the detecting  discerns the extent of
    the lesser dimension.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11.8+,  16.9 and 18.8, for other sensing of work thickness to control a
    metal deforming machine.


CLS 72/9.3
TXT Of edge of work or product:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.2 including detecting to discern the extent
    of the lesser dimension near the lateral margin of the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11.9,   for other sensing of the edge of a workpiece.


CLS 72/9.4
TXT Sensor utilizes radiation to detect thickness (e.g., by X-ray):

    Subject matter under subclass 9.2 including use of a source of radiation
    and a detector responsive to that radiation to determines the extent of the
    lesser dimension by the amount of radiation reaching the detector.


CLS 72/9.5
TXT Sensing tool or tool-linked part:

    Subject matter under subclass 8.3 including detecting a condition of a
    tool* or of a machine element connected to the tool for movement therewith.

    (1)     Note.  Original placement of a patent in this subclass requires
    that the machine element partakes of tool movement, either directly or
    proportionately, whether the element is fixed to the tool or connected
    thereto by a linkage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10.1+,  12.1, 13.4+, 17.1, 17.2, 18.9, and 20.1+, for other sensing of a
    tool or tool-linked part.


CLS 72/10.1
TXT Sensing tool or tool-linked part:

    Subject matter under subclass 8.1 including detecting a condition of a
    tool* or of a machine element connected to the tool for movement therewith.

    (1)     Note.  Original placement of a patent in this or a subclass
    indented hereunder requires that the machine element partakes of tool
    movement, either directly or proportionately, whether the element is fixed
    to the tool or connected thereto by a linkage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9.5,    12.1, 13.4+, 17.1, 17.2, 18.9, and 20.1+, for other sensing of a
    tool or tool-linked part.


CLS 72/10.2
TXT Sensing torque:

    Subject matter under subclass 10.1 including used of detecting means which
    discerns rotational force applied to the tool or tool-linked part.


CLS 72/10.3
TXT Sensing roll rotation (e.g., speed or distance):

    Subject matter under subclass 10.1 including detecting movement of the roll
    about its axis.


CLS 72/10.4
TXT Sensing force:

    Subject matter under subclass 10.1 including detecting the pressure applied
    to the tool or tool-linked part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14.4+   and 21.4+, for other sensing of force.


CLS 72/10.5
TXT By sensor along roll surface and another sensor along roll axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 10.4 including use of a first detecting means
    responsive to a condition of a work engaging portion of the rolling tool
    and including use of a second detecting means along the rotational axis of
    the rolling tool.

    (1)     Note.  The second detecting means of this subclass may also be
    responsive to a work engaging portion of the roll or may be responsive to
    condition at one of the roll chocks (bearings).


CLS 72/10.6
TXT By sensing hydraulic pressure applied to roll:

    Subject matter under subclass 10.4 wherein force is effected on the rolling
    tool by hydraulic pressure, and wherein the sensor is responsive to that
    hydraulic pressure.


CLS 72/10.7
TXT Sensing roll gap:

    Subject matter under subclass 10.1 including detecting the location of the
    tool with respect to the cooperating tool, to thereby establish the size of
    the work passage between the tools.


CLS 72/10.8
TXT Requiring operative intervention (e.g., for safety):

    Subject matter under subclass 6.2 in which action by a person necessary for
    the subject matter to operate.


CLS 72/10.9
TXT With pause awaiting input from operative:

    Subject matter under subclass 10.8 including terminating a portion of the
    operation until a stimulation is made by a person operating the subject
    matter.


CLS 72/11.1
TXT Sensing work or product (e.g., by X-ray):

    Subject matter under subclass 6.2 including detecting a characteristic of
    the work* for, or the product* of, the machine.

    (1)     Note.  Sensing a "Blank Holder"* or a work* holder is included
    herein.

    (2)     Note.  A deforming tool* is not considered to be a "detector";
    therefore, detecting a tool* in direct engagement with the work is not
    considered to be detecting the "work or product" for placement in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.4+,   8.3+, 15.3+, 16.2+, and 17.3+, for other control by sensing of work
    or product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 79+, 211, 286+, 358+, and 360+ for a control
    system responsive to work for, or product of, a cutting machine, and see
    (4) Note under the definition of Class 72, subclass 6.1.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 10+ for a
    control system responsive to work for feeding the work, and see (4) Note
    under the definition of Class 72, subclass 6.1.


CLS 72/11.2
TXT Including plural sensors or sensor responsive to plural conditions:

    Subject matter under subclass 11.1 including using (a) multiple detecting
    means to discern a corresponding number of characteristics, or (b) a single
    detecting means to discern multiple  characteristics.

    (1)     Note.  The detecting means fitting part (a) of this definition
    differ from those of subclass 8.1 in that those of this subclass are not
    necessarily related, nor is a comparison made between the impulses
    generated thereby. The detecting means fitting part (b) of this definition
    may, for example, detect the leading and the trailing edges of a workplace,
    or detect the presence of, and the temperature of, a workplace.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.2+,   8.1+, 14.9+, and 16.1+, for metal deforming including multiple
    detecting but with comparing of the impulses received.  See (1) Note, above.

    13.2,   13.7, 14.1, 18.1+, 20.4, and 21.1, for metal deforming including
    multiple sensing without comparison of impulses from the sensors.


CLS 72/11.3
TXT Sensing temperature:

    Subject matter under subclass 11.2 including detecting the degree of heat
    content in the work* or the product*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8.5,    12.2, 16.5, 18.3, and 19.1, for other sensing of temperature.


CLS 72/11.4
TXT Sensing slack or tension (e.g., by use of dancer):

    Subject matter under subclass 11.2 including (a) detecting the lateral
    movement of a flexible portion of an elongated workpiece or (b) detecting
    the degree of tautness in an elongated workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  A typical disclosure found in this subclass comprises a
    system including two rolling mills through which the work passes
    sequentially.  In the space between the rolling mills, the work is engaged
    by a detecting means urged against the work along a line substantially at
    right angles to the direction of work movement.  The position of said means
    along that line indicates the tautness of the work passing between the
    mills, and this position is used to control the tautness.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8.6+,   12.3, 16.6, 18.4, and 19.2, for other sensing of slack or tension
    in work or product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclass 44 for a
    "dancer" controlling feed of material, and see (4) Note under the
    definition of Class 72, subclass 6.1.


CLS 72/11.5
TXT Sensing lead end or tail end:

    Subject matter under subclass 11.2 including detecting the forward edge or
    the trailing edge of moving work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.5,    8.8, 12.5, 15.4, 16.7, 18.5, and 19.4, for other sensing of the
    lead end or tail end of work or product.


CLS 72/11.6
TXT Sensing cross sectional dimension:

    Subject matter under subclass 11.2 including moving the work in a given
    direction, and detecting the extent of the work at right angles to such
    direction.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes patents disclosing the measurement of
    work thickness by electrostatic, magnetic, or radiant energy (e.g.,
    "X-ray") detecting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.6+,   8.9+, 12.7+, 15.5, 16.8+, 18.6+, and 19.6+, for other sensing of
    cross sectional dimension of work or product.


CLS 72/11.7
TXT Sensing flatness (e.g., crown):

    Subject matter under subclass 11.6 wherein the work includes a greater and
    a lesser lateral dimension and wherein the detecting  discerns the planar
    characteristic of one of the greater surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9.1     and 18.7, for other sensing of flatness, used to regulate the
    operation of a metal deforming machine.


CLS 72/11.8
TXT Sensing thickness:

    Subject matter under subclass 11.6 wherein the work includes a greater and
    a lesser lateral dimension and wherein the detecting means discerns the
    extent of the lesser dimension.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9.2+,   16.9, and 18.8, for other sensing of work thickness to control a
    metal deforming machine.


CLS 72/11.9
TXT Of edge of work or product:

    Subject matter under subclass 11.8 including detecting to discern the
    extent of the lesser dimension near the lateral margin of the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9.3,    for other sensing of the edge of a workpiece.


CLS 72/12.1
TXT Sensing tool or tool-linked part:

    Subject matter under subclass 11.2 including detecting a condition of a
    tool* or of a machine element connected to the tool for movement therewith.

    (1)     Note.  Original placement of a patent in this or a subclass
    indented hereunder requires that the machine element partakes of tool
    movement, either directly or proportionately, whether the element is fixed
    to the tool or connected thereto by a linkage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9.5,    10.1+, 13.4+, 17.1, 17.2, 18.9, and 20.1+, for other sensing of a
    tool or tool-linked part.


CLS 72/12.2
TXT Sensing temperature:

    Subject matter under subclass 11.1 including detecting the degree of heat
    content in the work* or the product*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8.5,    11.3, 16.5, 18.3, and 19.1, for other sensing of temperature.


CLS 72/12.3
TXT Sensing slack or tension (e.g., by use of dancer):

    Subject matter under subclass 11.1 including (a) detecting the lateral
    movement of a flexible portion of an elongated workpiece or (b) detecting
    the degree of tautness in an elongated workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  A typical disclosure found in this subclass comprises a
    system including two rolling mills through which the work passes
    sequentially.  In the space between the rolling mills, the work is engaged
    by a detecting means urged against the work along a line substantially at
    right angles to the direction of work movement.  The position of said means
    along that line indicates the tautness of the work passing between the
    mills, and this position is used to control the tautness.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8.6+,   11.4, 16.6, 18.4, and 19.2, for other sensing of slack or tension
    in work or product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclass 44 for a
    "dancer" controlling feed of material, and see (4) Note under the
    definition of Class 72, subclass 6.1.


CLS 72/12.4
TXT With deforming of work by sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 12.3 wherein the detector engages the work
    with sufficient force to stress the work beyond its elastic limit.


CLS 72/12.5
TXT Sensing lead end or tail end:

    Subject matter under subclass 11.1 including detecting the forward edge or
    the trailing edge of moving work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.5,    8.8, 11.5, 15.4, 16.7, 18.5, and 19.4, for other sensing of the
    lead end or tail end of work or product.


CLS 72/12.6
TXT Including sensor responsive to infeeder or outpuller:

    Subject matter under subclass 11.1 including sensing the device for causing
    material to move into or away from the metal deforming device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19.5,   for metal deforming responsive to an infeeder or outpuller,
    generally.


CLS 72/12.7
TXT Sensing cross sectional dimension:

    Subject matter under subclass 11.1 including moving the work in a given
    direction, and detecting the extent of the work at right angles to such
    direction.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes patents disclosing the measurement of
    work thickness by electrostatic, magnetic, or radiant energy (e.g.,
    "X-ray") detecting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.6+,   8.9+, 11.6+, 15.5, 16.8+, 18.6+, and 19.6+, for other sensing of
    cross sectional dimension of work or product.


CLS 72/12.8
TXT To control operation of deformer directly by sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 12.7 including use of a detector means, an
    initiator, and a regulator which governs or causes the operation of the
    metal deforming device as the immediate result of detecting the lateral
    extent of the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19.7,   for a metal deforming machine, generally, controlling the cross
    sectional dimension of the work or product directly by the sensor.


CLS 72/13.1
TXT Including use of sensor responsive to energy input to tool or tool driver:

    Subject matter under subclass 6.2 including detecting a variation in the
    power required to drive a deforming tool*.

    (1)     Note.  Compare the subject matter of this subclass with that of
    subclasses 28.1+.  A patent for these subclasses discloses a detecting
    means (e.g., a solenoid in this subclass or a pressure-responsive diaphragm
    in the indented subclass 20) that discerns an overload or change in load of
    electrical or hydraulic pressure, whereas a patent for subclasses 28.1+
    lacks a clearly evident detecting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19.8+,  for a metal deforming machine, generally, including use of a sensor
    responsive to energy input to the tool or tool driver.

    28.1+,  for a metal deforming machine, generally, and a self regulating
    control system utilizing electrical or hydraulic energy.  See (1) Note
    above.


CLS 72/13.2
TXT Including plural sensors or sensor responsive to plural conditions:

    Subject matter under subclass 13.1 including using (a) multiple detecting
    means to discern a corresponding number of characteristics, or (b) a single
    detecting means to discern multiple  characteristics.

    (1)     Note.  The detecting means fitting part (a) of this definition
    differ from those of subclass 8.1 in that those of this subclass are not
    necessarily related, nor is a comparison made between the impulses
    generated thereby. The detecting means fitting part (b) of this definition
    may, for example, detect the leading and the trailing edges of a workplace,
    or detect the presence of, and the temperature of, a workplace.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.2+,   8.1+, 14.9+, and 16.1+, for metal deforming including multiple
    detecting but with comparing of the impulses received.

    11.2+,  13.7, 14.1, 18.1+, 20.4, and 21.1, for metal deforming including
    multiple sensing without comparison of impulses from the sensors.


CLS 72/13.3
TXT Sensing pressure of tool actuating fluid:

    Subject matter under subclass 13.1 wherein the tool is driven by a
    pneumatic or hydraulic system including detecting the force per unit of
    area in that system.

    (1)     Note.  Compare the subject matter of this subclass with that of
    subclasses 28.2+.  A patent for these subclasses discloses a detecting
    means (e.g., a solenoid in this subclass or a pressure-responsive diaphragm
    in the indented subclass 20) that discerns an overload or change in load of
    electrical or hydraulic pressure, whereas a patent for subclasses 28.1+
    lacks a clearly evident detecting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28.2+   for a metal deforming machine that uses a roller or roller-like
    tool and a self regulating control system utilizing electrical or hydraulic
    energy.  See (1) Note above.


CLS 72/13.4
TXT Sensing tool or tool-linked part:

    Subject matter under subclass 6.2 including detecting a condition of a
    tool* or of a machine element connected to the tool for movement therewith.

    (1)     Note.  Original placement of a patent in this or a subclass
    indented hereunder requires that the machine element partakes of tool
    movement, either directly or proportionately, whether the element is fixed
    to the tool or connected thereto by a linkage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9.5,    10.1+, 12.1, 17.1, 17.2, 18.9, and 20.1+, for other sensing of a
    tool or tool-linked part.


CLS 72/13.5
TXT To control predetermined sequence of operating movements (e.g., of one tool
    operating on work):

    Subject matter under subclass 13.4 including regulating the succession of
    function or movement of one or more operating assemblages.

    (1)     Note.  The term "operating assemblage", is intended to include a
    tool, or any element or group of elements, acting together, which performs
    an action or produces an effect upon the work or product; or which causes a
    tool movement necessary to deformation of the work; or which is ancillary
    to a deforming instrumentality.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is the locus of patents disclosing control of
    a sequence of operations or movements of a single operating assemblage. For
    example, a disclosure wherein a tool advances toward and retracts from the
    work, under control of switches positioned at the limits of travel of the
    tool, would be placed herein.  See subclasses below for control of
    different mechanisms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20.2+,  for sensing a tool or tool-linked part to control a predetermined
    sequence of operating movements in metal deforming, generally.


CLS 72/13.6
TXT Of different operating assemblages:

    Subject matter under subclass 13.5 including regulating the functioning of
    at least two disparate operating assemblages.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note under subclass 13.5 for an explanation of
    "operating assemblage".

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is the locus of patents disclosing control of
    a sequence of operations performed by different operating assemblages
    responsive to a tool.  For example, a device wherein a metal-deforming tool
    strikes a limit switch causing a cutter to cut the product of the tool,
    and/or causing a handler to discharge the product from the machine, would
    be found in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14.6+,  for deforming by rolling wherein the operation of a plurality of
    operating assemblages is responsive to a device other than a deforming tool.

    20.3+,  for sequential control of different operational assemblages in a
    metal deforming machine, generally.


CLS 72/13.7
TXT Including plural sensors or sensor responsive to plural conditions:

    Subject matter under subclass 13.6 including using (a) multiple detecting
    means to discern a corresponding number of characteristics, or (b) a single
    detecting means to discern multiple  characteristics.

    (1)     Note.  The detecting means fitting part (a) of this definition
    differ from those of subclass 8.1 in that those of this subclass are not
    necessarily related, nor is a comparison made between the impulses
    generated thereby. The detecting means fitting part (b) of this definition
    may, for example, detect the leading and the trailing edges of a workplace,
    or detect the presence of, and the temperature of, a workplace.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.2+,   8.1+, 14.9+, and 16.1+, for metal deforming including multiple
    detecting but with comparing of the impulses received.

    11.2+,  13.2, 13.7, 14.1, 18.1+, 20.4, and 21.1, for metal deforming
    including multiple sensing without comparison of impulses from the sensors.


CLS 72/13.8
TXT Including work handling or product handling:

    Subject matter under subclass 13.6 including regulating an operating
    assemblage which moves, guides, or affects the motion of work* or product*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20.5,   for a metal deforming machine, generally, with sensing of a tool or
    tool-linked part of different operating assemblages including work or
    product handling.


CLS 72/14.1
TXT Including plural sensors or sensor responsive to plural conditions:

    Subject matter under subclass 13.4 including using (a) multiple detecting
    means to discern a corresponding number of characteristics, or (b) a single
    detecting means to discern multiple  characteristics.

    (1)     Note.  The detecting means fitting part (a) of this definition
    differ from those of subclass 8.1 in that those of this subclass are not
    necessarily related, nor is a comparison made between the impulses
    generated thereby. The detecting means fitting part (b) of this definition
    may, for example, detect the leading and the trailing edges of a workplace,
    or detect the presence of, and the temperature of, a workplace.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.2+,   8.1+, 14.9+, and 16.1+, for metal deforming including multiple
    detecting but with comparing of the impulses received.

    11.2+,  13.2, 13.7, 18.1+, 20.4, and 21.1, for metal deforming including
    multiple sensing without comparison of impulses from the sensors.


CLS 72/14.2
TXT To control operation of interlock:

    Subject matter under subclass 13.4 provided with a mechanism to prevent
    movement of an element or a portion of a machine, and further provided with
    a device for disabling the movement-preventing mechanism, comprising
    regulating the disabling device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21.2,   for a metal deforming machine, generally, with sensing of a tool or
    tool-linked part to control operation of an interlock.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 366 for interlock means in a cutting machine, and
    see (4) Note under the definition of Class 72, subclass 6.1.


CLS 72/14.3
TXT To stop machine:

    Subject matter under subclass 13.4 comprising terminating or tending to
    terminate the operation in response to a predetermined position of a tool.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass (is not intended to include, for original
    placement, a patent claiming an operation wherein a cam surface (on or
    linked to a tool) directly causes movement of a clutch element to disengage
    a tool  from its drive.  Such patent lacks the teaching of an initiating
    means, and will be placed on the basis of the deforming structure and found
    in this subclass (26) only as a cross-reference.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for a machine, or a part thereof, stops in response to a random
    signal or impulse.

    21.3,   for a metal deforming machine, generally, with sensing of a tool or
    tool-linked part to stop the operation of the machine.

    30.2+,  for a deforming by a roller wherein a machine, or a part thereof,
    stops when an intended operation has been completed.


CLS 72/14.4
TXT Sensing force on tool:

    Subject matter under subclass 13.4 including detecting the pressure applied
    to the tool or tool-linked part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10.4+   and 21.4+, for other sensing of force.


CLS 72/14.5
TXT By sensing hydraulic pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 14.4 including detecting the pressure on the
    tool by use of a detector responsive to liquid head.


CLS 72/14.6
TXT To control different operating assemblages:

    Subject matter under subclass 6.2 including regulating the functioning of
    at least two disparate operating assemblages.

    (1)     Note.  The term "operating assemblage", is intended to include a
    tool, or any element or group of elements, acting together, which performs
    an action or produces an effect upon the work or product; or which causes a
    tool movement necessary to deformation of the work; or which is ancillary
    to a deforming instrumentality.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is the locus of rolling to deform including
    control of a sequence of operations performed by different operating
    assemblages except those responsive to tool movement (for which see
    subclasses 13.6+).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13.6+,  for rolling to deform metal including control of a sequence of
    operations performed by different operating assemblages including those
    responsive to tool movement; and see (2) Note above.

    21.6,   for a metal deforming machine, generally, with control of
    different operating assemblages.


CLS 72/14.7
TXT Controlling deflector:

    Subject matter under subclass 6.2 including regulating the member that
    deforms work by diverting a portion thereof as it passes by.


CLS 72/14.8
TXT Including use of sensor responsive to information carried by removable
    auxiliary record (e.g., recording disk, tape, or card):

    Subject matter under subclass 6.1 including using a separate device
    inserted into, attached to, or applied to, the machine, and detecting
    physical characteristics of the device to control the operation of the
    machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.1+,   for a sensor which detects a removable auxiliary record to
    responsively regulate a roller or roller-like metal deforming machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    66,     Textiles: Knitting, subclasses 215+ for knitting by use of a
    pattern-responsive control means which may be removable from a knitting
    device.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 76.1+ for cutting with use of a control means
    responsive to a replaceable information program.  Also, see (4) Note under
    the  definition of Class 72, subclass 6.1.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 317+ for pattern-responsive control
    means.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclass 9, and see (4)
    Note under the definition of Class 72, subclass 6.1.


CLS 72/14.9
TXT Including plural sensors or sensor responsive to comparison between plural
    conditions:

    Subject matter under subclass 14.8 including using (a) multiple detecting
    means to discern a corresponding number of characteristics, or (b) a single
    detecting means to discern multiple characteristics; in either case, then
    comparing the characteristics and generating a resultant impulse
    representing the similarities or differences between the detected
    characteristics, whereby the regulating means governs the machine in
    accordance with the resultant impulse to correct incipient errors in the
    machine or to maintain operation of the machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.2+,   8.1+, and 16.1+, for other metal deforming including multiple
    sensing with comparison of impulses from the sensors.

    11.2+,  13.2, 13.7, 14.1, 18.1+, 20.4, and 21.1, for metal deforming
    including multiple sensing but without comparison of impulses from the
    sensors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 72+ for  "self-regulating" or "feedback"
    control means, and see (4) Note under the definition of Class 72, subclass
    6.1.


CLS 72/15.1
TXT Sensing "memory" stored on tool or tool-linked part:

    Subject matter under subclass 14.9 including use of structure having an
    impressible media capable of holding data which is part of the
    instrumentality for engaging the work for deforming, or is fixedly attached
    thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8.2+,   for sensing "memory" stored on a tool or tool-linked to regulate a
    metal deforming machine, generally.


CLS 72/15.2
TXT Sensing "pattern":

    Subject matter under subclass 14.9 including using a contoured guide
    engaged by a traversing follower connected to a metal deforming tool such
    that the tool follows a path identical to the contours of the guide as the
    tool engages the work for deformation thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The term "pattern" (in the title) refers to a model or
    prototype insertable into and removable from the machine and having a shape
    or configuration exactly similar or proportional to the shape or
    configuration of the desired product.  A cam or eccentric or other object
    which is distorted with respect to the desired product is not considered to
    be a pattern, and control disclosures of such objects may be found in other
    subclasses appropriate to the deformer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.3,    for a removable pattern to be used in a condition responsive
    control means of a roller or roller-like metal deforming means.

    82,     for deforming of a rotating workpiece by use of a "pattern" that
    causes tool movement without  a control means energized in response of an
    activator.


CLS 72/15.3
TXT Sensing work or product (e.g., by X-ray):

    Subject matter under subclass 14.9 including detecting a characteristic of
    the work* for, or the product* of, the machine.

    (1)     Note.  Sensing a "Blank Holder"* or a work* holder is included
    herein.

    (2)     Note.  A deforming tool* is not considered to be a "detector";
    therefore, detecting a tool* in direct engagement with the work is not
    considered to be detecting the "work or product" for placement in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.4+,   8.3+, 11.1+, 16.2+, and 17.3+, for other control by sensing of work
    or product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 79+, 211, 286+, 358+, and 360+ for a control
    system responsive to work for, or product of, a cutting machine, and see
    (4) Note under the definition of Class 72, subclass 6.1.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 10+ for a
    control system responsive to work for feeding the work, and see (4) Note
    under the definition of Class 72, subclass 6.1.


CLS 72/15.4
TXT Sensing lead end or tail end:

    Subject matter under subclass 15.3 including detecting the forward edge or
    the trailing edge of moving work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.5,    8.8, 11.5, 12.5, 16.7, 18.5, and 19.4, for other sensing of the
    lead end or tail end of work or product.


CLS 72/15.5
TXT Sensing cross sectional dimension:

    Subject matter under subclass 15.3 including moving the work in a given
    direction, and detecting the extent of the work at right angles to such
    direction.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes patents disclosing the measurement of
    work thickness by electrostatic, magnetic, or radiant energy (e.g.,
    "X-ray") detecting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.6+,   8.9+, 11.6+, 12.7+, 16.8+, 18.6+, and 19.6+, for other sensing of
    cross sectional dimension of work or product.


CLS 72/16.1
TXT Including plural sensors or sensor responsive to comparison between plural
    conditions:

    Subject matter under subclass 6.1 including using (a) multiple detecting
    means to discern a corresponding number of characteristics, or (b) a single
    detecting means to discern multiple characteristics; in either case, then
    comparing the characteristics and generating a resultant impulse
    representing the similarities or differences between the detected
    characteristics, whereby the regulating means governs the machine in
    accordance with the resultant impulse to correct incipient errors in the
    machine or to maintain operation of the machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.2+,   8.1+, and 14.9+, for metal deforming including multiple sensing
    with comparison of impulses from the sensors.

    11.2+,  13.2, 13.7, 14.1, 18.1+, 20.4, and 21.1, for metal deforming
    including multiple sensing but without comparison of impulses from the
    sensors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 72+ for  "self-regulating" or "feedback"
    control means, and see (4) Note under the definition of Class 72, subclass
    6.1.


CLS 72/16.2
TXT Sensing work or product (e.g., by X-ray):

    Subject matter under subclass 16.1 including detecting a characteristic of
    the work* for, or the product* of, the machine.

    (1)     Note.  Sensing a "Blank Holder"* or a work* holder is included
    herein.

    (2)     Note.  A deforming tool* is not considered to be a "detector";
    therefore, detecting a tool* in direct engagement with the work is not
    considered to be detecting the "work or product" for placement in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.4+,   8.3+, 11.1+, 15.3+, and 17.3+, for other control by sensing of work
    or product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 79+, 211, 286+, 358+, and 360+ for a control
    system responsive to work for, or product of, a cutting machine, and see
    (4) Note under the definition of Class 72, subclass 6.1.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 10+ for a
    control system responsive to work for feeding the work, and see (4) Note
    under the definition of Class 72, subclass 6.1.


CLS 72/16.3
TXT Sensing performance of work or product:

    Subject matter under subclass 16.2 comprising use of detecting means
    responsive to the capability of the work* or product* when subjected to its
    intended use.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a deforming device for shaping an
    aircraft wing wherein air is passed over the wing to determine turbulence
    generated thereby, and wherein the deforming device is modified accordingly.


CLS 72/16.4
TXT Work and product:

    Subject matter under subclass 16.2 including detecting a characteristic of
    the work* for the machine and detecting a characteristic of the product* of
    the same machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8.4     and 18.2, for other sensing of both work and product.


CLS 72/16.5
TXT Sensing temperature:

    Subject matter under subclass 16.2 including detecting the degree of heat
    content in the work* or the product*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8.5,    11.3, 12.2, 18.3, and 19.1, for other sensing of temperature.


CLS 72/16.6
TXT Sensing slack or tension (e.g., by use of dancer):

    Subject matter under subclass 16.2 including (a) detecting the lateral
    movement of a flexible portion of an elongated workpiece or (b) detecting
    the degree of tautness in an elongated workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  A typical disclosure found in this subclass comprises a
    system including two rolling mills through which the work passes
    sequentially.  In the space between the rolling mills, the work is engaged
    by a detecting means urged against the work along a line substantially at
    right angles to the direction of work movement.  The position of said means
    along that line indicates the tautness of the work passing between the
    mills, and this position is used to control the tautness.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8.6+,   11.4, 12.3, 18.4, and 19.2, for other sensing of slack or tension
    in work or product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclass 44 for a
    "dancer " controlling feed of material, and see (4) Note under the
    definition of Class 72, subclass 6.1.


CLS 72/16.7
TXT Sensing lead end or tail end:

    Subject matter under subclass 16.2 including detecting the forward edge or
    the trailing edge of moving work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.5,    8.8, 11.5, 12.5, 15.4, 18.5, and 19.4, for other sensing of the
    lead end or tail end of work or product.


CLS 72/16.8
TXT Sensing cross sectional dimension:

    Subject matter under subclass 16.2 including moving the work in a given
    direction, and detecting the extent of the work at right angles to such
    direction.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes patents disclosing the measurement of
    work thickness by electrostatic, magnetic, or radiant energy (e.g.,
    "X-ray") detecting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.6+,   8.9+, 11.6+, 12.7+, 15.5, 18.6+, and 19.6+, for other sensing of
    cross sectional dimension of work or product.


CLS 72/16.9
TXT Sensing thickness:

    Subject matter under subclass 16.8 wherein the work includes a greater and
    a lesser lateral dimension and wherein the detecting  discerns the extent
    of the lesser dimension.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9.2+,   11.8+ and 18.8, for other sensing of work thickness to control a
    metal deforming machine.


CLS 72/17.1
TXT Sensing tool or tool-linked part:

    Subject matter under subclass 16.2 including detecting a condition of a
    tool* or of a machine element connected to the tool for movement therewith.

    (1)     Note.  Original placement of a patent in this or a subclass
    indented hereunder requires that the machine element partakes of tool
    movement, either directly or proportionately, whether the element is fixed
    to the tool or connected thereto by a linkage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9.5,    10.1+, 12.1, 13.4+, 17.2, 18.9, and 20.1+, for other sensing of a
    tool or tool-linked part.


CLS 72/17.2
TXT Sensing tool or tool-linked part:

    Subject matter under subclass 16.1 including detecting a condition of a
    tool* or of a machine element connected to the tool for movement therewith.

    (1)     Note.  Original placement of a patent in this or a subclass
    indented hereunder requires that the machine element partakes of tool
    movement, either directly or proportionately, whether the element is fixed
    to the tool or connected thereto by a linkage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9.5,    10.1+, 12.1, 13.4+, 17.1, 18.9, and 20.1+, for other sensing of a
    tool or tool-linked part.


CLS 72/17.3
TXT Sensing work or product (e.g., by X-ray):

    Subject matter under subclass 6.1 including detecting a characteristic of
    the work* for, or the product* of, the machine.

    (1)     Note.  Sensing a "Blank Holder"* or a work* holder is included
    herein.

    (2)     Note.  A deforming tool* is not considered to be a "detector";
    therefore, detecting a tool* in direct engagement with the work is not
    considered to be detecting the "work or product" for placement in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.4+,   8.3+, 11.1+, 15.3+, and 16.2+, for other control by sensing of work
    or product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 79+, 211, 286+, 358+, and 360+ for a control
    system responsive to work for, or product of, a cutting machine, and see
    (4) Note under the definition of Class 72, subclass 6.1.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 10+ for a
    control system responsive to work for feeding the work, and see (4) Note
    under the definition of Class 72, subclass 6.1.


CLS 72/18.1
TXT Including plural sensors or sensor responsive to plural conditions:

    Subject matter under subclass 17.3 including using (a) multiple detecting
    means to discern a corresponding number of characteristics, or (b) a single
    detecting means to discern multiple  characteristics.

    (1)     Note.  The detecting means fitting part (a) of this definition
    differ from those of subclass 8.1 in that those of this subclass are not
    necessarily related, nor is a comparison made between the impulses
    generated thereby. The detecting means fitting part (b) of this definition
    may, for example, detect the leading and the trailing edges of a workplace,
    or detect the presence of, and the temperature of, a workplace.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.2+,   8.1+, 14.9+, and 16.1+, for metal deforming including multiple
    detecting but with comparing of the impulses received.

    11.2+,  13.2, 13.7, 14.1, 20.4, and 21.1, for metal deforming including
    multiple sensing without comparison of impulses from the sensors.


CLS 72/18.2
TXT Work and product:

    Subject matter under subclass 18.1 including detecting a characteristic of
    the work* for the machine and detecting a characteristic of the product* of
    the same machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8.4     and 16.4, for other sensing of both work and product.


CLS 72/18.3
TXT Sensing temperature:

    Subject matter under subclass 18.1 including detecting the degree of heat
    content in the work* or the product*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8.5,    11.3, 12.2, 16.5, and 19.1, for other sensing of temperature.


CLS 72/18.4
TXT Sensing slack or tension (e.g., by use of dancer):

    Subject matter under subclass 18.1 including (a) detecting the lateral
    movement of a flexible portion of an elongated workpiece or (b) detecting
    the degree of tautness in an elongated workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  A typical disclosure found in this subclass comprises a
    system including two deforming mills through which the work passes
    sequentially.  In the space between the mills, the work is engaged by a
    detecting means urged against the work along a line substantially at right
    angles to the direction of work movement.  The position of said means along
    that line indicates the tautness of the work passing between the mills, and
    this position is used to control the tautness.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8.6+,   11.4, 12.3, 16.6, and 19.2, for other sensing of slack or tension
    in work or product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclass 44 for a
    "dancer" controlling feed of material, and see (4) Note under the
    definition of Class 72, subclass 6.1.


CLS 72/18.5
TXT Sensing lead end or tail end:

    Subject matter under subclass 18.1 including detecting the forward edge or
    the trailing edge of moving work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.5,    8.8, 11.5, 12.5, 15.4, 16.7, and 19.4, for other sensing of the
    lead end or tail end of work or product.


CLS 72/18.6
TXT Sensing cross sectional dimension:

    Subject matter under subclass 18.1 including moving the work in a given
    direction, and detecting the extent of the work at right angles to such
    direction.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes patents disclosing the measurement of
    work thickness by electrostatic, magnetic, or radiant energy (e.g.,
    "X-ray") detecting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.6+,   8.9+, 11.6+, 12.7+, 15.5, 16.8+, and 19.6+, for other sensing of
    cross sectional dimension of work or product.


CLS 72/18.7
TXT Sensing flatness (e.g., crown):

    Subject matter under subclass 18.6 wherein the work includes a greater and
    a lesser lateral dimension and wherein the detecting  discerns the planar
    characteristic of one of the greater surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9.1     and 11.7, for other sensing of flatness, used to regulate the
    operation of a metal deforming machine.


CLS 72/18.8
TXT Sensing thickness:

    Subject matter under subclass 18.6 wherein the work includes a greater and
    a lesser lateral dimension and wherein the detecting  discerns the extent
    of the lesser dimension.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9.2+,   11.8+ and 16.9, for other sensing of work thickness to control a
    metal deforming machine.


CLS 72/18.9
TXT Sensing tool or tool-linked part:

    Subject matter under subclass 18.1 including detecting a condition of a
    tool* or of a machine element connected to the tool for movement therewith.

    (1)     Note.  Original placement of a patent in this or a subclass
    indented hereunder requires that the machine element partakes of tool
    movement, either directly or proportionately, whether the element is fixed
    to the tool or connected thereto by a linkage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9.5,    10.1+, 12.1, 13.4+, 17.1, 17.2, and 20.1+, for other sensing of a
    tool or tool-linked part.


CLS 72/19.1
TXT Sensing temperature:

    Subject matter under subclass 17.3 including detecting the degree of heat
    content in the work* or the product*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8.5,    11.3, 12.2, 16.5, and 18.3, for other sensing of temperature.


CLS 72/19.2
TXT Sensing slack or tension (e.g., by use of dancer):

    Subject matter under subclass 17.3 including (a) detecting the lateral
    movement of a flexible portion of an elongated workpiece or (b) detecting
    the degree of tautness in an elongated workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  A typical disclosure found in this subclass comprises a
    system including two deforming mills through which the work passes
    sequentially.  In the space between the mills, the work is engaged by a
    detecting means urged against the work along a line substantially at right
    angles to the direction of work movement.  The position of said means along
    that line indicates the tautness of the work passing between the mills, and
    this position is used to control the tautness.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8.6+,   11.4, 12.3, 16.6, and 18.4, for other sensing of slack or tension
    in work or product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclass 44 for a
    "dancer" controlling feed of material, and see (4) Note under the
    definition of Class 72, subclass 6.1.


CLS 72/19.3
TXT With deforming of work by sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 19.2 wherein the detector engages the work
    with sufficient force to stress the work beyond its elastic limit.


CLS 72/19.4
TXT Sensing lead end or tail end:

    Subject matter under subclass 17.3 including detecting the forward edge or
    the trailing edge of moving work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.5,    8.8, 11.5, 12.5, 15.4, 16.7, and 18.5, for other sensing of the
    lead end or tail end of work or product.


CLS 72/19.5
TXT Including sensor responsive to infeeder or outpuller:

    Subject matter under subclass 17.3 wherein the detector senses the device
    for causing material to move into or away from the metal deforming device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.6,   for metal deforming responsive to an infeeder or outpuller, for use
    a roller or roller-type tool.


CLS 72/19.6
TXT Sensing cross sectional dimension:

    Subject matter under subclass 17.3 including moving the work in a given
    direction, and detecting the extent of the work at right angles to such
    direction.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes patents disclosing the measurement of
    work thickness by electrostatic, magnetic, or radiant energy (e.g.,
    "X-ray") detecting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.6+,   8.9+, 11.6+, 12.7+, 15.5, 16.8+, and 18.6+, for other sensing of
    cross sectional dimension of work or product.


CLS 72/19.7
TXT To control operation of deformer directly by sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 19.6 including use of a detector means, an
    initiator, and a regulator which governs or causes the operation of the
    metal deforming device as the immediate result of detecting the lateral
    extent of the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.8,   for a metal deforming machine that uses a roller or roller-like
    tool, controlling the cross sectional dimension of the work or product
    directly by the sensor.


CLS 72/19.8
TXT Including use of sensor responsive to energy input to tool or tool driver:

    Subject matter under subclass 6.1 including detecting a variation in the
    power required to drive a deforming tool*.

    (1)     Note.  Compare the subject matter of this subclass with that of
    subclasses 28.1+.  A patent for these subclasses discloses a detecting
    means (e.g., a solenoid in this subclass or a pressure-responsive diaphragm
    in the indented subclass 20) that discerns an overload or change in load of
    electrical or hydraulic pressure, whereas a patent for subclasses 28+ lacks
    a clearly evident detecting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13.1+,  for a metal deforming machine, which uses a roller or roller-like
    tool, including use of a sensor responsive to energy input to the tool or
    tool driver.


CLS 72/19.9
TXT Sensing pressure of tool actuating fluid:

    Subject matter under subclass 19.8 wherein the tool is driven by a
    pneumatic or hydraulic system including detecting the force per unit of
    area in that system.

    (1)     Note.  Compare the subject matter of this subclass with that of
    subclasses 28.1+.  A patent for these subclasses discloses a detecting
    means (e.g., a solenoid in this subclass or a pressure-responsive diaphragm
    in the indented subclass 20) that discerns an overload or change in load of
    electrical or hydraulic pressure, whereas a patent for subclasses 28.1+
    lacks a clearly evident detecting means.


CLS 72/20.1
TXT Sensing tool or tool-linked part:

    Subject matter under subclass 6.1 including detecting a condition of a
    tool* or of a machine element connected to the tool for movement

    (1)     Note.  Original placement of a patent in this or a subclass
    indented hereunder requires that the machine element partakes of tool
    movement, either directly or proportionately, whether the element is fixed
    to the tool or connected thereto by a linkage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9.5,    10.1+, 12.1, 13.4+, 17.1, 17.2, and 18.9, for other sensing of a
    tool or tool-linked part.


CLS 72/20.2
TXT To control predetermined sequence of operating movements (e.g., of one tool
    operating on work):

    Subject matter under subclass 20.1 including regulating the succession of
    function or movement of one or more operating assemblages.

    (1)     Note.  The term "operating assemblage", is intended to include a
    tool, or any element or group of elements, acting together, which performs
    an action or produces an effect upon the work or product; or which causes a
    tool movement necessary to deformation of the work; or which is ancillary
    to a deforming instrumentality.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is the locus of patents disclosing control of
    a sequence of operations or movements of a single operating assemblage. For
    example, a disclosure wherein a tool advances toward and retracts from the
    work, under control of switches positioned at the limits of travel of the
    tool, would be placed herein.  See subclasses below for control of
    different mechanisms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13.5+,  for sensing a tool or tool-linked part to control a predetermined
    sequence of operating movements in metal deforming by use of a roller or
    roller-like tool.


CLS 72/20.3
TXT Of different operating assemblages:

    Subject matter under subclass 20.2 including regulating the functioning of
    at least two disparate operating assemblages.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note under subclass 20.2 for an explanation of
    "operating assemblage".

     (2)    Note.  This subclass is the locus of patents disclosing control of
    a sequence of operations performed by different operating assemblages
    responsive to a tool.  For example, a device wherein a metal-deforming tool
    strikes a limit switch causing a cutter to cut the product of the tool,
    and/or causing a handler to discharge the product from the machine, would
    be found in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13.6+,  for sequential control of different operational assemblages in a
    metal deforming machine that uses a roller or roller-like tool.

    21.6,   for deforming generally wherein the operation of a plurality of
    operating assemblages is responsive to a device other than a deforming tool.


CLS 72/20.4
TXT Including plural sensors or sensor responsive to plural conditions:

    Subject matter under subclass 20.3 including using (a) multiple detecting
    means to discern a corresponding number of characteristics, or (b) a single
    detecting means to discern multiple  characteristics.

    (1)     Note.  The detecting means fitting part (a) of this definition
    differ from those of subclass 8.1 in that those of this subclass are not
    necessarily related, nor is a comparison made between the impulses
    generated thereby. The detecting means fitting part (b) of this definition
    may, for example, detect the leading and the trailing edges of a workplace,
    or detect the presence of, and the temperature of, a workplace.

    (2)     Note.  The detecting means fitting part (a) of this definition
    differ from those of subclass 16.1 in that those of this subclass are not
    necessarily related, nor is a comparison made between the impulses
    generated thereby. The detecting means fitting part (b) of this definition
    may, for example, detect the leading and the trailing edges of a workplace,
    or detect the presence of, and the temperature of, a workplace.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.2+,   8.1+, 14.9+, and 16.1+, for metal deforming including multiple
    detecting but with comparing of the impulses received, and see (1) Note
    above.

    11.2+,  13.2, 13.7, 14.1, 18.1+, 20.4, and 21.1, for metal deforming
    including multiple sensing without comparison of impulses from the sensors.


CLS 72/20.5
TXT Including work handling or product handling:

    Subject matter under subclass 20.3 including regulating an operating
    assemblage which moves, guides, or affects the motion of work* or product*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13.8,   for a metal deforming machine, which uses a roller or roller-like
    tool, with sensing of a tool or tool-linked part of different operating
    assemblages including work or product handling.


CLS 72/21.1
TXT Including plural sensors or sensor responsive to plural conditions:

    Subject matter under subclass 20.1 including using (a) multiple detecting
    means to discern a corresponding number of characteristics, or (b) a single
    detecting means to discern multiple  characteristics.

    (1)     Note.  The detecting means fitting part (a) of this definition
    differ from those of subclass 8.1 in that those of this subclass are not
    necessarily related, nor is a comparison made between the impulses
    generated thereby. The detecting means fitting part (b) of this definition
    may, for example, detect the leading and the trailing edges of a workplace,
    or detect the presence of, and the temperature of, a workplace.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.2+,   8.1+, 14.9+, and 16.1+, for metal deforming including multiple
    detecting but with comparing of the impulses received.

    11.2+,  13.2, 13.7, 14.1, 18.1+, 20.4, and 21.1, for metal deforming
    including multiple sensing without comparison of impulses from the sensors.


CLS 72/21.2
TXT To control operation of interlock:

    Subject matter under subclass 20.1 provided with a mechanism to prevent
    movement of an element or a portion of a machine, and further provided with
    a device for disabling the movement-preventing mechanism, comprising
    regulating the disabling device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14.2,   for a metal deforming machine having a roller or roller-like tool,
    with sensing of a tool or tool-linked part to control operation of an
    interlock.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 366 for interlock means in a cutting machine, and
    see (4) Note under the definition of Class 72, subclass 6.1.


CLS 72/21.3
TXT To stop machine:

    Subject matter under subclass 20.1 comprising terminating or tending to
    terminate the operation in response to a predetermined position of a tool.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass (is not intended to include, for original
    placement, a patent claiming an operation wherein a cam surface (on or
    linked to a tool) directly causes movement of a clutch element to disengage
    a tool  from its drive.  Such patent lacks the teaching of an initiating
    means, and will be placed on the basis of the deforming structure and found
    in this subclass (26) only as a cross-reference.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for a machine, or a part thereof, stops in response to a random
    signal or impulse.

    14.3,   for a metal deforming machine having a roller or roller-like tool,
    with sensing of a tool or tool-linked part to stop the operation of the
    machine.

    30.1,   for a deforming generally wherein a machine, or a part thereof,
    stops when an intended operation has been completed.


CLS 72/21.4
TXT Sensing force on tool:

    Subject matter under subclass 20.1 including detecting the pressure applied
    to the tool or tool-linked part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10.4+   and 14.4+, for other sensing of force.


CLS 72/21.5
TXT By sensing hydraulic pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 21.4 including detecting the pressure on the
    tool by a detector responsive to liquid head.


CLS 72/21.6
TXT To control different operating assemblages:

    Subject matter under subclass 6.1 provided with a plurality of diverse
    operating assemblages wherein the regulating means governs the functioning
    of the various operating assemblages.

    (1)     Note.  The term "operating assemblage", is intended to include a
    tool, or any element or group of elements, acting together, which performs
    an action or produces an effect upon the work or product; or which causes a
    tool movement necessary to deformation of the work; or which is ancillary
    to a deforming instrumentality.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is the locus of deforming including control of
    a sequence of operations performed by different operating assemblages
    except those responsive to tool movement (for which see subclass 20.3).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14.6,   for a metal deforming machine having a roller or roller-like tool,
    with control of different operating assemblages.

    20.3,   for metal deforming including control of a sequence of operations
    performed by different operating assemblages including those responsive to
    tool movement; and see (2) Note above.


CLS 72/28.1
TXT WITH USE OF SELF REGULATING CONTROL SYSTEM UTILIZING ELECTRICAL OR
    HYDRAULIC ENERGY:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising apparatus including,
    or method employing, at least two devices that deform work, each device
    being driven or governed by a motor powered either by fluid under pressure
    or by electricity, but in either case from a source of power common to all
    the motors, wherein the operation of one such motor is regulated or
    modified by a change (including an incipient change) in the power demand or
    operating condition of another such motor, thereby changing (or tending to
    change) the ratio of power supplied to each motor.

    (1)     Note.  Compare the subject matter of this and the indented
    subclasses (28.1+) with that  of subclasses 13.1+ and 19.8+.  In a device
    of this subclass, back pressure (in a hydraulic motor) or back
    electromotive force (in an electrical motor) as the agency to govern the
    operation of another such motor, whereas a device or  subclasses 13.1+ and
    19.8+, clearly teaches use of a detecting means to sense a condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13.1+   and 19.8+, and see (1) Note above.


CLS 72/28.2
TXT Metal deforming by use of roller or roller-like tool element:

    Subject matter under subclass 28.1 comprising apparatus including, or
    method employing, a roller* tool or a roller-like tool* to deform work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6.2+    and 30.2, for other deforming by a roller or roller-like tool
    including control of the tool.

    67+,    for deforming by relative rotation between a workpiece and a tool,
    particularly subclass 75 for a spherical tool, subclasses 91+ for deforming
    by a roller or roller-like tool cooperating with an opposing concave
    surface, subclasses 110+ for a roller cluster, and subclass 124 for a
    roller cooperating with a work-spaced tool.

    127+,   for deflecting to deform metal which may include use of a roller or
    roller-like tool, particularly subclasses 162+ for "levelling" by use of
    relatively-inclined successive rollers, subclasses 178+ for "troughing" by
    use of a roller cluster,  subclasses 179+ and 182 for use of a roller
    couple.

    184+,   for deforming by a "flying tool" that may comprise a roller or
    roller-like tool.

    199+,   for deforming by a roller or roller-like tool, generally.

    366.2,  for a method of deforming by a disclosed (but not claimed) rollers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclass 158 for rolling of metal parts
    combined with independent fusion bonding of the parts; and subclass 243 for
    simultaneous rolling and fusion bonding of the parts.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 363+ for a press forming or press reshaping means for nonmetal
    including an endless (e.g., roll, etc.) forming surface.


CLS 72/29.1
TXT Utilizing electrical energy:

    Subject matter under subclass 28.2 wherein the motive power for a driving
    motor thereof is electricity.


CLS 72/29.2
TXT Utilizing electrical energy:

    Subject matter under subclass 28.1 wherein the motive power for a driving
    motor thereof is electricity.


CLS 72/30.1
TXT WITH STOPPING UPON COMPLETION OF PRESCRIBED OPERATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising apparatus including,
    or method employing, one or more parts of a machine that are brought to a
    halt after the machine or the part has finished its intended action.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is not intended as the repository for all
    devices that include cessation of machine operation. Only a patent
    including a claim which clearly indicates machine stoppage after the
    completion of an intended operation is included herein as an "original".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for a machine, or a part thereof, which stops in response to a
    random signal or impulse.

    14.3    and 21.3, for a machine, or a part thereof, which stops in response
    to a tool sensor.


CLS 72/30.2
TXT Metal deforming by use of roller or roller-like tool element:

    Subject matter under subclass 30.1 comprising apparatus including, or
    method employing, a roller* tool or a roller-like tool* to deform work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6.2+    and 28.2+, for other deforming by a roller or roller-like tool
    including control of the tool.

    67+,    for deforming by relative rotation between a workpiece and a tool,
    particularly subclass 75 for a spherical tool, subclasses 91+ for deforming
    by a roller or roller-like tool cooperating with an opposing concave
    surface, subclasses 110+ for a roller cluster, and subclass 124 for a
    roller cooperating with a work-spaced tool.

    127+,   for deflecting to deform metal which may include use of a roller or
    roller-like tool, particularly subclasses 162+ for "levelling" by use of
    relatively-inclined successive rollers, subclasses 178+ for  "troughing" by
    use of a roller cluster, subclasses 179+ and  182 for use of a roller
    couple.

    184+,   for deforming by a "flying tool" that may comprise a roller or
    roller-like tool.

    199+,   for deforming by a roller or roller-like tool, generally.

    366.2,  for a method of deforming by a disclosed (but not claimed) rollers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclass 158 for rolling of metal parts
    combined with independent fusion bonding of the parts; and subclass 243 for
    simultaneous rolling and fusion bonding of the parts.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 363+ for a press forming or press reshaping means for nonmetal
    including an endless (e.g., roll, etc.) forming surface.


CLS 72/31.01
TXT WITH INDICATION OF CONDITION OR POSITION OF WORK, PRODUCT, OR MACHINE
    ELEMENT (E.G., BROKEN TOOL ALARM, ETC.):

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a step of, or means
    for visibly, audibly, or tacitly signaling information related to a
    physical state or location of the work, a product, or component of a
    manufacturing means of this class.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass (31.01) is the locus of patents directed to
    means for or method of signaling the occurrence of a give condition (e.g.,
    absent or misaligned work, etc.) associated with a device or operation of
    the class type. The signal is generally of the off or on type; if
    measurement or counting is involved, the combination should be placed in
    the subclasses indented hereunder.

    (2)     Note.  The provision of a gauge, mark, or scale on a machine table,
    against which the work is to be laid for direct measurement, comparison, or
    placement for an operation of the class type, is not deemed an "indicator"
    for this subclass; similarly, the step of visual inspection (for length,
    straightness, etc.) is not deemed detection or indication for this
    subclass.  A patent claiming any of the above-noted features would be
    placed on the basis of its other claimed subject matter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for an indicator associated with randomly actuated stopping means
    in metal-deforming apparatus.

    6+,     for an indicator associated with automatic control means in
    metal-deforming apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 407 for the step of testing or indicating
    in a process of mechanical manufacture.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for quantitative
    indicator, meter, or guage assosiated with measuring or testing apparatus.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 522.11+ for a signal, scale, or indicator
    associated with cutting apparatus.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, for such a device, per se.

    168,    Farriery, subclasses 45+ for hand tools related to the installation
    and maintenance of horse shoes.

    235,    Registers, subclass 128 for alarm mechanism applicable to devices
    such as metal-deforming apparatus.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+ for an indicator in an
    electrical signaling system applicable to metal-deforming apparatus.


CLS 72/31.02
TXT Trueness (e.g., devices for repairing, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 31.01 wherein the information relates to a
    deviation of deformation of the work from its intended deformation by an
    operation of this class.


CLS 72/31.03
TXT Elongate member straightening:

    Subject matter under subclass 31.02 wherein the work comprises a member
    having two ends separated by a distance substantially longer than the girth
    thereof and the intended deflection between said two ends is zero.


CLS 72/31.04
TXT Tube or rod bending:

    Subject matter under subclass 31.01 wherein the work comprises a hollow or
    solid elongate cylinder having a longitudinal axis and the information
    relates to the deflection of said cylinder perpendicular to said axis.


CLS 72/31.05
TXT Deflection angle:

    Subject matter under subclass 31.04 wherein the information relates to the
    degree of deflection of said cylinder.

    (1)     Note.  Conduit benders and offsetters are collected herein.


CLS 72/31.06
TXT Tube diameter resizing:

    Subject matter under subclass 31.01 wherein the work comprises a hollow
    elongate cylinder having a cross section perpendicular to the length
    thereof and the information relates to a change in girth of the cross
    section without substantially altering the shape thereof.


CLS 72/31.07
TXT Including deformation by roller or roller-like tool:

    Subject matter under subclass 31.01 including a tool having a generally
    circular cross section which defines a peripheral edge which acts upon the
    work while simultaneously rotating about an axis passing through the cross
    section.


CLS 72/31.08
TXT Distance between tools of tool couple:

    Subject matter under subclass 31.07 including a pair of peripheral edge
    acting tools which simultaneously act in opposite directions upon the work
    and wherein the information relates to the relative degree of separation
    between the tools.


CLS 72/31.09
TXT Work guide position:

    Subject matter under subclass 31.07 including means for orienting or
    locating the work move

    able in relation thereto with respect to the tool and wherein the
    information relates to the location or orientation of the work with respect
    to the tool.


CLS 72/31.1
TXT Including deformation by simple bending:

    Subject matter under subclass 31.01 including means for creasing or folding
    the work about an axis without substantially altering dimensions of the
    work in a direction normal to the axis of the crease or fold.

    (1)     Note.  Simple bending may include the application of plural creases
    about plural distinct axes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31.01,  for a metal deforming means with a indicator wherein the work is
    twisted about an axis.


CLS 72/31.11
TXT Tool or tool driver travel:

    Subject matter under subclass 31.10 wherein the means for creasing or
    folding the work is moveable in a direction normal to the surface of the
    work simultaneous with the creasing or folding operation and wherein the
    information relates to the distance the creasing or folding means is
    moveable.


CLS 72/31.12
TXT Work stop position:

    Subject matter under subclass 31.10 including means for abutting an edge of
    the work to locate the work with respect to the creasing or folding means
    and wherein the information relates to the location or orientation of the
    abutting means with respect to the tool.

    (1)     Note.  The abutting means of this subclass positively engages the
    work for fixing the position at which the tool will act thereon.


CLS 72/31.13
TXT Work drawn or extruded through die:

    Subject matter under subclass 31.01 wherein the work is pulled or pushed
    through a closed die*.


CLS 72/37
TXT WITH USE OF OPTICAL OR TRANSPARENT (E.G., VIEWING) MEANS:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising the step of, or means
    for, utilizing the production, transmission, reflection, or refraction of
    visible light rays in combination with a step of, or means for, deforming
    metal.

    (1)     Note.  A mere opening or recess in a machine housing to permit
    visual inspection of work or tool condition is not deemed "optical means"
    within the scope of the subclass definition; a transparent window material,
    or a lamp, mirror, lens, etc., is regarded as "optical means" for the
    purposes of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31.01+, for the use of optical means in signals, gauges, indicators, etc.,
    in metal-deforming devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 520 for illuminating or viewing means for work in
    cutting apparatus.


CLS 72/38
TXT WITH EXPOSURE OF WORK TO GAS, VAPOR, MIST, OR MODIFIED ATMOSPHERE:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a step of, or means
    for, the subjecting of work to the action of a gas or gaseous suspension of
    material, including air under other than ordinary ambient or atmospheric
    conditions, or the removal or exclusion of air from contact with work,
    prior to or during an operation of the class type.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is the locus of patents directed to (a)
    passive means, such as air locks, seals, etc., for preventing contact of
    work with air before or during a metal-deforming operation, or (b) active
    means such as suction pump, etc., for evacuating a work-containing chamber,
    or (c) nozzles, ducts, etc., for supplying any gaseous element, mixture, or
    suspension (including hot, cold, or compressed air).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for applying water or any liquid to work material for cleaning or
    lubricating.

    40,     for sand-blasting to clean or descale work material in combination
    with metal deformation.

    46,     for applying water or any liquid to work, for coating or
    unspecified purpose.

    69,     128, 200, 271, 286, 342, and 364, for a disclosure of temperature
    maintenance or modification which may involve gas or vapor contact.


CLS 72/39
TXT WITH CLEANING, DESCALING, OR LUBRICATION OF WORK OR PRODUCT:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a step of, or means
    for, performing one or more of the following operations upon the material
    which is the subject of metal deformation (i.e., the work material),
    before, during, or after the deforming operation:  (a) separation or
    removal from the surface of work material of any or all substances which
    may be present thereon as a spot or film of undesired material generally
    distinguishable from the work material per se, or (b) application of a
    substance to work material or to an element of a metal-deforming device,
    which substance is claimed or disclosed as an agent for reducing friction
    between forcibly engaged surfaces of work material and said device.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter involving the application of gas, vapor,
    mist, or modified atmosphere to work, prior to or during deformation, is
    placed in preceding subclass 38, regardless of specific effects thereof
    such as cleaning, lubrication, descaling, etc.

    (2)     Note.  The grinding or machining of scale or oxide from work
    material is regarded as cleaning or descaling for this subclass, if there
    is no claimed redimensioning of the work material by the removal of metal.

    (3)     Note.  The term "lubrication" is limited for the purposes of this
    subclass to the application of a lubricating substance; other arrangements
    which may be claimed for reducing friction or tool wear (e.g., by joggings,
    ultrasonic vibration, etc.) are treated as perfecting features of the
    specific type of deforming process or apparatus concerned.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for exposure of work to gas, vapor, mist, or modified atmosphere
    for various purposes including cleaning or lubrication, and see (1) Note
    above.

    46+,    for "coating" of work (i.e., before or during deformation) which
    may involve disclosure of cleaning, pickling, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 72+ for apparatus for cleaning and
    coating of metal.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, for a process of cleaning
    metal, including pickling.

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, subclass 6 for the formation of a
    capacitor using etching in the process.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 299 for processes of pretreating a
    base, followed by coating.


CLS 72/40
TXT Mechanical cleaning:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 comprising a step of, or means for,
    effecting engagement of work material with solid substance with sufficient
    force to remove or facilitate removal of scale, dirt, or other undesired
    substance from the surface of the work material.

    (1)     Note.  The solid substance may be a specific cleaning tool, such as
    a scraper or brush, or it may be an abrasive medium as in sandblasting, or
    contact with other work as in tumbling, or a metal deforming tool (and see
    (2) Note below).

    (2)     Note.  The claimed removal of scale by deflection or deformation of
    work material, as in stretching, hammering, or edge rolling, is subject
    matter for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for shot-blasting of metal work to deform same.

    253.1+, for dross removal associated with method or apparatus for extrusion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, for brushing, scrubbing,
    and general cleaning apparatus.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 81.01+, for a scale remover or preventer.

    451,    Abrading, for cleaning by use of an abradant.


CLS 72/41
TXT Lubricating:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 comprising a step of, or means for, the
    application to work material of a substance which is claimed or disclosed
    as an agent for reducing friction or tool wear (i.e., a lubricant).

    (1)     Note.  For placement in this subclass, a patent must be directed to
    lubrication of work material; this may be accomplished by applying
    lubricant to a tool before or during its engagement with work.  Lubrication
    of machine parts generally is excluded from this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  In the absence of more definitive terms, the reference to
    "oil", or to the reduction of friction or wear, is regarded as defining a
    lubricant for this subclass.  The application of water or an aqueous
    solution, with no reference to lubrication, is proper subject matter for
    subclass 39 above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for exposure of work to gas, vapor, mist, or modified atmosphere.

    46+,    for coating of work (possible value as a lubricant).

    69,     for lubrication of tool or machine in rotating- or gyrating-tool
    machine.

    236,    for lubrication of a roller or roller-like tool-element or the
    associated machine.

    463,    for a tool having passageway usable for lubrication.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 90+ for apparatus to shape or reshape non-metals combined with a
    means to apply a coating (e.g., parting, etc.) material to the work or work
    contact means.


CLS 72/42
TXT With particular lubricant:

    Subject matter under subclass 41 wherein the lubricating substance is
    particularly specified, as by chemical formulation or by recitation of a
    name which identifies a single chemical organization, such as "water" or
    "caustic potash".

    (1)     Note.  Generic terms such as "oil, glass, metal, fluid", etc., are
    not included here, but a descriptive species thereof is (e.g., "palm oil").
     The term "soap" is arbitrarily considered to be specific, and when used as
    lubricant is classified here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    508,    Solid Anti-Friction Devices, Materials Therefor, Lubricant or
    Separant Compositions for Moving Solid Surfaces, and Miscellaneous Mineral
    Oil Compositions, for a lubricating composition, per se.


CLS 72/43
TXT With means to apply lubricant:

    Apparatus under subclass 41 including structural means for causing or
    allowing the lubricant to contact the work or tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    184,    Lubrication, for lubricating apparatus in general.


CLS 72/44
TXT With means to transfer lubricant:

    Device under subclass 43 comprising structure effective to cause movement
    or flow of the lubricating medium (e.g., wick, roller).


CLS 72/45
TXT Force feed:

    Device under subclass 44 comprising means to develop pressure in the
    lubricant prior to its contact with the work or tool.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains all systems for lubricating work
    material where a force, other than that acting on the work or tool, is
    required to transfer the lubricant.

    (2)     Note.  The term "force" for the purposes of this subclass excludes
    the force of gravity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for structure utilizing gravity feed of lubricant in a
    metal-deforming device.


CLS 72/46
TXT WITH "COATING" OF WORK:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a step of, or means
    for, the application of plastic or liquid material to work as a coherent
    film, cover, or spot, prior to or during an operation of the class type,
    which material or residue thereof is disclosed as remaining on the surface
    of the work, at least until said operation has been completed.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is the locus of patents directed to metal
    deformation preceded by the application of molten, plastic, or liquid
    substance to all or a portion of the surface of work, provided that the
    substance or a residual part thereof remains on the work as a
    distinguishable layer, at least throughout the deforming operation, or as a
    more or less durable coating. Water may thus constitute a "coating" for
    this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The coating may be applied by brushing, spraying, casting,
    molding, etc., or by any technique other than attachment of a preform (a
    self-supporting shape), which latter constitutes "assembly" for Class 29,
    Metal Working.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39+,    for cleaning or descaling in connection with metal deforming.

    41+,    for application of material claimed or disclosed as a lubricant.

    271,    286, 342, and 364, for a disclosure of temperature maintenance or
    modification of work material which may involve application of fluent
    material as a heating or cooling agent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, appropriate subclasses for process or apparatus for
    assembly of objects (preforms) not elsewhere classified, particularly
    subclasses 527.1+ for (a) process of casting and deforming a metal
    workpiece, (b) a process involving deforming and coating plus additional
    treatments excluded from this class, and (c) process involving casting or
    coating subsequent to deformation.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 75 for combined coating and noncoating
    apparatus, generally.

    219,    Electric Heating, for electric arc deposition of one metal on
    another followed by metal deformation.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 90+ for apparatus to shape or reshape nonmetals combined with
    means to apply a coating to the work or work-contacting surfaces.


CLS 72/47
TXT Metal coating:

    Patents under subclass 46 in which the applied coating is metal*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264+,   for extruding a metallic sheath on a cable or other core.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 192.12+ for glow
    discharge sputter deposition (e.g., cathode sputtering to deposit a metal
    coating, etc.), subclasses 194+ for electrolytic apparatus (e.g., used for
    electroplating, etc.), and subclasses 298.02+ for sputter coating apparatus
    (e.g.,  used to deposit a metal coating, etc.).

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 80+ for electrolytic coating (e.g.,
    electroplating, etc.).


CLS 72/48
TXT BY TOOL COUPLE PRESSING TOGETHER ADJACENT SURFACE PORTIONS OF SAME WORK
    (E.G., TUBE SEAMER):

    Subject matter under the class definition including a tool couple* for, or
    a step of using a tool couple for, joining (i.e., securing one to another)
    two or more juxtaposed margins, parts of the face, or edges of a single
    piece of work.

    (1)     Note.  A claimed tool couple will be identified with particularity
    sufficient to meet the requirements of this subclass if a claim recites any
    of the following:  (a) the nature of the workpiece or the product (e.g.,
    two margins or portions of a workpiece are locked or pressed together, or
    the product formed is a tube or pipe), the characteristics of which product
    indicate that a tool couple formed the product; or (b) the function of a
    machine (e.g., seaming rollers, operating as a tool couple, to unite a tube
    seam by pressure); or (c) the structure of the parts of a tool couple whose
    sole disclosed use is the uniting of two margins of a single workpiece.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not accept patents claiming apparatus for
    assembling or for welding; see section VI, A of this class for the locus of
    patents claiming such operations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 15.1+ for tube-seaming apparatus
    involving welding; and subclasses 144+ for a process of forming a tube from
    a one-piece blank and welding the seam.


CLS 72/49
TXT To form helically seamed tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 48 wherein a tool couple joins together the
    margins of a piece of work that has been deformed into a helical coil
    having adjacent side margins, whereby the product formed is a conduit or
    pipe having a helical joint.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the helical coil is deflected by structure which,
    per se, is found in subclasses 135+ (which see) and an additional
    deformation is imposed on the work (either before, during, or after
    coiling) to change the cross-sectional shape thereof so that the adjacent
    margins will associate intimately to form a helical seam.  The
    illustrations below (in the Figure accompanying this note) exemplify only a
    few of the various forms of seam disclosed in the art.



CLS 72/50
TXT Using roller conforming to seam contour:

    Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein the tool couple includes one or
    more rollers* to form the joint, and wherein a cross section of the joint
    at the zone of formation complements (i.e., fits into) the cross-section of
    the roller(s) at that zone.


CLS 72/51
TXT To form longitudinally seamed tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 48 wherein a tool couple joins together the
    margins of a piece of work that has been made by deforming metal having
    thickness, width, and length dimensions, the length being appreciably
    greater than the thickness of the width, so that side margins parallel to
    the length contact one another, whereby the product formed is a conduit or
    pipe having a joint parallel to the length.


CLS 72/52
TXT During longitudinal movement of work:

    Subject matter under subclass 51 wherein the work is moved along its length
    dimensions as the joint is deformed.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the work is a web and is deformed by structure
    which, per se, is found in subclasses 176+ and an additional deformation is
    imposed on the adjacent margins, after the troughing or skelping of the
    work, to form the seam.


CLS 72/53
TXT BY SHOTBLASTING:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a step of, or means
    for, the forcible propulsion of discrete particles against a surface
    portion of work with random timing and trajectories.

    (1)     Note.  The particles may be propelled by any means, including air
    or water jets.

    (2)     Note.  The operation is usually termed "shotblasting" or more
    properly "shot peening", but is sometimes named for the desired effect in a
    particular case, e.g., hardening, sizing, upsetting, enlarging, etc.  Any
    such teaching of metal deformation, whether or not accompanied by abrasion,
    is proper subject matter for this subclass. Process or apparatus for
    burnishing a work surface, by shotblasting or other means, is classifiable
    in Class 29 as indicated below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for metal deformation combined with mechanical cleaning, descaling,
    or scouring, which may involve the application of sand or shot.

    54+,    for metal deformation by pressure transmitted through a coherent
    mass of fluent material (e.g., sand or shot), as distinguished from
    shotblasting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 90.01+ for burnishing a surface by
    shotblasting and see (2) Note, above.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 38+ for a process of sandblasting and
    subclasses 75+ for a machine for sandblasting.


CLS 72/54
TXT BY APPLICATION OF FLUENT MEDIUM OR ENERGY FIELD:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a step of, or means
    for, effecting mechanical treatment of metal work by (a) the conduction of
    pressurized fluent material in gaseous, liquid, plastic, or random
    particulate form into engagement with a portion of the surface or work
    and/or the development of pressure in fluent material while it is engaged
    with work, or (b) the direction of electric, magnetic, or radiant energy
    toward work in such manner as to induce mechanical accelerating force
    therein.

    (1)     Note.  Fluid or "fluent material" within the scope of the subclass
    definition comprises compressed air or gas, any liquid, any readily
    deformable plastic substance (which may be a soft metal), any granular or
    particulate material which is handled as a fluid during the deforming
    operation (i.e., is confined and subjected to pressure without regard to
    the position or motion of any specific particle thereof).  A configured
    tool, on the other hand, such as a roller faced with soft rubber, is
    regarded as a flexible tool for subclass 465.1+.  (Operations with such a
    tool may be found in subclasses 166+).

    (2)     Note.  The fluent material may be confined in or by a diaphragm or
    bag of deformable material, or within a hollow workpiece.

    (3)     Note.  The subclass definition, part (b) is intended to embrace the
    process of, or apparatus for, deforming metal by the application of heat
    thereto while the workpiece is held under suitable restraint.  (Melting or
    specific heat treatment, is excluded from this class, (72).)

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for deformation of metal by shock wave or pulsations of fluid, or
    by energy field.

    57+,    for deformation of metal by an actuated tool, the operation being
    modified, supplemented, or assisted by pressurized fluid (e.g., as a
    plastic core within hollow work).

    465.1+, for a flexible or yieldable tool, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 421.1+ for a process of shaping by direct
    application of fluid pressure (e.g., expanding a liner in a pipe).

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 586 for
    workpieces deformable by the application of a fluent medium, e.g., which
    embody stop-weld material.


CLS 72/55
TXT With cutting:

    Subject matter under subclass 54 including a step of, or means for,
    cutting* the material which is the subject of deformation.

    (1)     Note.  See section VI, B, of this class for a discussion of
    included and excluded deforming and cutting combinations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324+,   for cutting or cutter associated with metal-deforming method or
    apparatus not specifically provided for in preceding subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 177, for cutting (punching, etc.) by fluid blast
    or suction.


CLS 72/56
TXT By kinetic energy or fluid or field:

    Subject matter under subclass 54 utilizing (a) a pressure surge or repeated
    pulsations of pressure in the fluent material to develop a localized,
    transient, or traveling force sufficient to deform work, or (b) an
    electric, magnetic, or radiant energy field effective to accelerate work
    sufficiently to accomplish deformation thereof.

    (1)     Note.  For placement in this subclass, the combination must include
    means for, or method of, generating and/or releasing the energy required to
    produce deformation.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is the locus for placement of patents directed
    to the use of explosives or pulsating devices to energize work-contacting
    fluid, or the use of a transient, high-intensity electromagnetic field for
    inducing accelerating currents in work; or to the application of heat for
    buckling or bending suitably restrained work, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    430,    for explosive means to drive a tool.

    453.01+, for fluid pressure means to drive a tool.


CLS 72/57
TXT With actuated tool-engaging work:

    Subject matter under subclass 54 wherein a rigid instrumentality is moved
    against the work with deforming force.

    (1)     Note.  For placement in this subclass, a patent must relate to the
    deformation of metal by means of a driven rigid tool or work-mover, which
    operation is modified by, supplemented by, or is in addition to, metal
    deformation by direct engagement of work with fluent material.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of combinations for this or indented subclasses are:

    (a)     An actuated die forces work against a thick, soft, rubber cushion.

    (b)     A bending press deforms pipe which has been filled or packed with
    sand or plastic material to prevent collapse of the pipe wall.

    (c)     A multi-tool-station machine has fluent tool means at one station.

    (d)     Plural method steps comprise at least one deformation of work by
    actuated tool and one by fluent material.

    (e)     A punch-and-die set includes one tool face having a rubber insert
    engageable with the work and yieldable with respect to adjacent tool face
    portions.


CLS 72/58
TXT Expanding hollow work:

    Subject matter under subclass 57 comprising a step of, or means for, the
    forcible engagement of pressurized fluent material with the interior
    surface of work, at least a portion of which has a closed periphery
    cross-section so that upon deformation of the work the interior area of
    said cross-section is enlarged.

    (1)     Note.  In many instances, the actuated tool engages an end of a
    tubular workpiece to upset to work while simultaneously trapping and
    imparting pressure to fluid within the work.  See Fig. B in appended
    diagram.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for constricting or collapsing hollow work by fluid pressure on the
    exterior thereof.


CLS 72/59
TXT Corrugating tubular work:

    Subject matter under subclass 58 comprising a step of, or means for, the
    formation of two or more axially spaced, substantially identical, annular
    enlargements in cylindrical work.

    (1)     Note.  For placement in this subclass, a patent should be directed
    to the combination of actuated tool means and internal fluid pressure means
    so disposed as to produce a series of substantially similar annular ridges
    and grooves in tubular work; at least two spaced enlargements of similar
    form and size distinguishes "corrugating" from the more general inflating
    or expanding operations of the preceding subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61+,    for expanding hollow work against an external die by fluid pressure
    within the work.


CLS 72/60
TXT Using fixed die:

    Subject matter under subclass 54 comprising a step of, or means for,
    limiting or restraining the movement of work subjected to deforming force
    by passive or stationary work-shape-imposing structure.

    (1)     Note.  Compare Die* in the Glossary (section III); for this
    subclass the die should be undriven and should have a definite shaping or
    reshaping effect on the engaged work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57+,    for an actuated tool or die in combination with fluid pressure
    acting on work.


CLS 72/61
TXT Expanding hollow work:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 wherein pressurized fluent material
    engages the interior surface of work at least a portion of which has a
    closed periphery cross-section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58+,    for expanding hollow work by a combination of fluent pressure and
    actuated rigid tool(s).


CLS 72/62
TXT In circular section die:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein the passive or stationary
    work-shape-imposing structure has an interior wall surface which
    corresponds throughout its extent to a surface of revolution.

    (1)     Note.  A die for this subclass may be skeletonized or made up of
    spaced segments, but its interior wall surface, wherever present, should
    conform to the subclass definition.  See Fig. A in diagram appended to
    subclass 58.

    (2)     Note.  Some examples of tube corrugating are found here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for an actuated tool or die in combination with fluid pressure
    internally of the work.


CLS 72/63
TXT Utilizing diaphragm between fluid and work:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 comprising a step of, or means for,
    utilizing a membrane or wall of solid, yieldable material, one surface
    thereof being intended to engage work and to transmit thereto force which
    is developed by fluent material under pressure engaging the opposite
    surface thereof during an operation of the class type.

    (1)     Note.  The usual purpose of such a diaphragm is to retain the
    fluent material in the device for reuse, and/or to facilitate rapid
    repetition of operations.

    (2)     Note.  For placement in this subclass, the flexible wall or sealing
    layer should be distinguishable from the pressurized fluent material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 211 for a press, not elsewhere classified, having
    a yieldable or bendable jaw surface.


CLS 72/64
TXT By twisting axially moving work:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising steps of, or means
    for, (a) advancing work* in its entirety in a longitudinal direction so as
    to pass longitudinally consecutive cross sections of work (the cross
    sections being taken at right angles to the longitudinal direction) through
    a metal-deforming zone, and (b) turning each consecutive cross section in
    its entirety, with respect to other cross sections, about a line parallel
    to, or coincident with, the longitudinal direction, whereby the angular
    orientation of successive cross sections are modified with respect to each
    other.

    (1)     Note.  Although the title of this subclass refers to moving work,
    this and the indented subclasses will accept cross-reference patents
    disclosing a tool moving along a stationary workpiece and having the
    work-twisting action described above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    299,    for a disclosure wherein a workpiece is clamped at two zones spaced
    along the work by clamps which are then rotated to twist the work lying
    between the clamps.


CLS 72/65
TXT With adjustment of machine or variation in effect of tool on product:

    Subject matter under subclass 64 wherein the turning is accomplished by a
    metal deforming instrumentality or a tool therein, or the degree of twist
    in the product* can be changed or modified.


CLS 72/66
TXT COILING BY WORK GUIDE MEMBER ORBITING ABOUT LONGITUDINAL CENTERLINE OR
    FORMED COIL:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a step of, or means
    for, wrapping work* about an axis-of-bend* through more than 360o of wrap
    by an element that engages the work with sliding contact and revolves
    about, and is radially spaced from said axis-of-bend.

    (1)     Note.  Any point of the work traces an involute curve as the work
    is wrapped about the axis-of-bend.  The operation usually includes movement
    of the wrapped work relatively along the axis-of-bend simultaneously with
    the wrapping thereof.  By this relative movement, the product formed is a
    helical-coil rather than a spiral-coil.  The pitch of the formed
    helical-coil depends on the speed of the relative axial movement during the
    period of time needed for one convolution of 360o of wrap.  (See the
    definition of coil* in section III of this class for discussion and
    illustrations of the terms used).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 728 for apparatus similar to that of this
    subclass for making of armored cable; and subclass 435, for a process
    similar to that described herein, but assembling two (or more) workpieces.


CLS 72/67
TXT BY USE OF TOOL ACTING DURING RELATIVE ROTATION BETWEEN TOOL AND WORK ABOUT
    INTERNAL CENTER (E.G., GYRATING OR ROTATING TOOL):

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a tool, or a step of
    using a tool, that turns with respect to work, or with respect to which
    tool the work turns, about an axis (or effective axis) that extends through
    the work, which tool engages the work for deformation while the turning
    occurs.

    (1)     Note.  For the purposes of this and indented subclasses, the
    following movements are defined:

    (a)     "Gyration" is turning of each point on the surface of a body about
    an axis specific to each point while the body as a whole remains oriented
    in the same compass direction.  Since all the axes are parallel to each
    other, they form effectively the equivalent of one axis to fit the
    definition of the subclass.  The movement can be illustrated by the
    movement of a pencil during the formation of the letter "O".  Many of the
    patents in this subclass (67) disclose the use of a gyrating tool.

    (b)     "Rotation" is turning of each point on the surface of a body about
    a single axis common to all such points.  In general usage, rotation is the
    term often used to describe movement of the moon around the earth or of the
    earth around the sun, as well as movement of the earth about its own axis;
    however, in the subclasses indented below, the term "orbit" (and its
    variants) has been used to describe the former two types of movement, and
    the term "rotation" has been used to describe turning of a body about its
    own axis.

    (c)     "Oscillation" is swinging to-and-fro of each point on the surface
    of a body about a single axis common to all such points. Disclosure of such
    movement, occurring during deformation of work, is particularly provided
    for in subclasses 73 and 74.

    (2)     Note.  The term "turns" is intended to include only that movement
    wherein all the work turns, or wherein the tool-face turns relatively to
    all of the work. Disclosures wherein a portion of the work turns and
    another portion does not turn will be found in other subclasses of this
    schedule.  An exemplary locus of such disclosures is subclasses 64+.

    (3)     Note.  The phrase "relative rotation" is intended to include a
    clear disclosure of turning about an axis wherein the axis passes through,
    or extends within, the confines of work as the work exists before
    deformation.  It is not intended that this group of subclasses be the locus
    of disclosures wherein a product* rotates about a centerline unless the
    product centerline is also the work centerline.  Thus, a device which
    deforms metal about a centerline or axis-of-bend*, wherein either the tool
    rotates about the centerline of the product (not the work centerline), or
    the product rotates about its centerline (not the work centerline), will be
    found in other subclasses of Class 72. Exemplary loci of such disclosures
    include subclasses 135+, 146+, and 212+.


CLS 72/68
TXT With metal deformation of different type:

    Subject matter under subclass 67 including use of at least two separate
    instrumentalities to deform work, and wherein one such instrumentality
    deforms the work in a manner other than that peculiar to subclasses 67+.


CLS 72/69
TXT With modification or control of temperature of work, tool, or machine, or
    with lubrication thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 67 wherein a friction-reducing medium is
    applied to the tool or another portion of the deforming structure, or
    wherein thermal characteristics of the work, the tool, or any part of the
    deforming structure in which the tool functions are changed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for exposure of work to gas, vapor, mist, or modified atmosphere
    while the work is being deformed.

    39+,    for cleaning, descaling, or lubrication of work for, or product of,
    a deforming operation.

    46+,    for coating of work prior to deformation thereof.


CLS 72/70
TXT With cutting of work or product:

    Subject matter under subclass 67 wherein the tool is combined with a cutter.

    (1)     Note.  Patents disclosing cutting placed originally in this
    subclass are limited to that cutting acceptable into this class (72) in
    accordance  with section VI, B, of this class.


CLS 72/71
TXT By composite cutting, deforming tool:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 wherein a deforming tool and a cutter are
    rigidly connected together such that movement of the tool is always
    accompanied by movement of the cutter and the operation of the cutter and
    of the tool result from the same movement.

    (1)     Note.  See search notes under subclass 464 for listing of other
    subclasses providing for composite-deforming cutting tools.


CLS 72/72
TXT With actuation of cutter in timed relation to movement of deformer or work:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 wherein the cutter operates in synchronism
    with the tool or with the rotating work.


CLS 72/73
TXT With oscillation of work about work axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 67 wherein the work moves to-and-fro about an
    axis within the confines thereof during deformation of the work.

    (1)     Note.  For a discussion of basic types of movement for the purposes
    of this group of subclasses, see (1) Note under the definition of subclass
    67.


CLS 72/74
TXT With oscillation of work-engaging tool surface about work surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 67 wherein the tool moves bodily to-and-fro
    about an axis within the confines of the work.

    (1)     Note.  For a discussion of basic types of movement for the purposes
    of this group of subclasses, see (1) Note under the definition of subclass
    67.


CLS 72/75
TXT Spherical tool:

    Subject matter under subclass 67 wherein the tool is an element that is
    circular in all cross sections.

    (1)     Note.  Many disclosures in this subclass show a ball (or a
    plurality of balls) forced along the inside of a tube.


CLS 72/76
TXT Work-hammering tool:

    Subject matter under subclass 67 wherein a tool engages the work with a
    sudden blow or impact.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the disclosures in this subclass show a plurality of
    tools surrounding (or surrounded by) work and delivering a quick succession
    of impacts to the work during the relative rotation of the tool and work.
    For similar structure wherein relative rotation does not occur, see
    subclass 402, wherein the tools surround the work, and subclass 393,
    wherein the work surrounds the tools.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    393,    for similar structure including a tool that is surrounded by the
    work but does not involve relative rotation between the tool and work.

    402,    for similar structure including a tool that surrounds the work but
    does not involve relative rotation between the tool and work.


CLS 72/77
TXT With tool surface orbiting around axis parallel to direction of travel of
    longitudinally moving work:

    Subject matter under subclass 67 wherein the work moves in the direction of
    its greatest dimension (i.e., lengthwise), and the tool* turns about a
    center of rotation that is parallel to the direction of work movement,
    whereby any specific portion of the tool face* travels helically relative
    to the surface of the work.


CLS 72/78
TXT Including orbiting roller mounted on rotating carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 77 wherein the tool is a roller* turning on
    an internal axis and is supported in a tool carrier* such that the roller
    axis revolves about said center of rotation.


CLS 72/79
TXT Including deflectors arranged to provide undulating path for work:

    Subject matter under subclass 77 wherein the tool comprises a plurality of
    deflectors* positioned along the path of moving work in offset
    relationship, each of which deflectors forces each successively presented
    portion of the work from one direction into another direction in an arc
    extending partially around an axis-of-bend* that is disposed transversely
    of the path of work movement.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) and (2) Notes under the definition of subclass 160
    for discussion of an undulating path "leveller".


CLS 72/80
TXT During rotation of work:

    Subject matter under subclass 67 wherein the work* clearly turns about its
    axis while deformation occurs.

    (1)     Note.  The expression "while deformation occurs" is intended to
    restrict this subclasses (80+) to disclosures wherein the work rotates at
    the time that deformation takes place.  It is not intended to include
    disclosures wherein the work is rotated before or after deformation (e.g.,
    indexing), which disclosures have been placed elsewhere, based on tool or
    work-handling structure.


CLS 72/81
TXT With "pattern" causing movement of presser member:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein a contoured guide member (e.g.,
    "templet") is engaged by a traversing follower connected to a tool such
    that the tool follows a path identical with the contours of the guide
    member as the tool engages the work for deformation thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note under the definition of subclass 7.3 for
    further discussion of the term "pattern".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.3,    for disclosure of a "pattern" that stimulates an activator to
    energize a control means.


CLS 72/82
TXT Caused by work-holding, shape-imparting form (e.g., for "spinning"):

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein a member turns about an axis
    concentric (i.e., coincidental) with the work axis, which member has a
    profile, taken in cross section through the axis, corresponding to a
    cross-sectional profile of the product to be made, and the work* is
    disclosed as fixed to the member by a positively acting clamp to turn
    therewith at the same velocity, so that a tool can engage the work and
    deform successively presented portions thereof into contact with the
    profile of the member during turning of the work.

    (1)     Note.  The operation described is generally known in the art as
    "spinning".  See the Figure accompanying this note for an illustration of
    the operation.  However, the term "spinning" in a patent is not sufficient
    basis for placing such a patent in this subclass (82).



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    for a disclosure wherein the member is stationary and cooperates
    with an orbiting or rotating tool.


CLS 72/83
TXT With means causing cooperating presser member to traverse form surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 82 wherein the tool co-acts at any particular
    instant of time with a portion of the face of the turnable member and said
    tool is moved (a) relative to a point on the axis of said member and (b)
    along the face of the member.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass (83) and subclass (85) below are the loci of
    patents disclosing generally similar concepts, but specifically different
    structure. In both subclasses a workpiece rotates together with a form or
    member, and a cooperating presser or tool deforms a continuous succession
    of circumferential portions of the work.  As the tool traverses the work,
    it deforms a different succession of work portions during each 360o
    rotation of the work. However, in this subclass (83) the claimed disclosure
    includes means for, or a step of, holding of the work to the form, whereas
    in subclass 85 the traversing of the tool is emphasized.


CLS 72/84
TXT Using tool having rotating surface moving along its axis of rotation during
    deformation:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein a tool rotates on its axis of
    symmetry and simultaneously travels in a direction parallel to its axis.


CLS 72/85
TXT And means causing tool to traverse surface of cooperating rotatable member:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 having a turnable member in addition to
    the tool, wherein the tool co-acts at any particular instant of time with a
    portion of the face of the turnable member and said tool is moved (a)
    relative to a point on the axis of said member and (b) along the face of
    the member.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note under the definition of subclass 83 for a
    statement of the similarities and differences between this subclass (85)
    and subclass 83 structure.


CLS 72/86
TXT Using angularly related roller couple acting parallel to axis of work
    rotation:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 including a roller couple* wherein the
    axes of the rollers of the roller couple are not parallel to each other,
    and wherein the roller couple is particularly adapted to opposingly engage
    the radial surfaces of a rotating disklike workpiece such that during metal
    deformation, the deforming forces of the rollers on the work are opposed to
    each other and are parallel to the work axis.

    (1)     Note.  The term "disklike" used in this definition is intended to
    include an annular workpiece having radial surfaces opposingly engaged by
    the roller-couple. The product formed is usually the wheel of a railroad
    car, the wheel having a relatively thick, flanged rim connected to a hub by
    a relatively thin disc.


CLS 72/87
TXT And additional work-engaging tool, circumferentially spaced about axis of
    work rotation:

    Subject matter under subclass 86 including at least one additional tool
    engaging the work for deformation thereof at an area angularly spaced about
    the work-axis from the area engaged (at any one instant) by the rollers of
    the roller-couple.


CLS 72/88
TXT Caused by tools (e.g., "platens") relatively moving parallel to their
    surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the work lies between two tools,
    each of which tools has a generally planar work-engaging surface, and
    wherein the work is rotated and deformed by moving one of the tools
    relative to the other so that the work-engaging surface of each tool moves
    relative to the other tool in a plane that is substantially equidistant
    from the generally planar work-engaging surface of the other tool during
    operation.

    (1)     Note.  The term "generally planar" is intended to describe a tool
    comprising a plate having a plurality of ribs and grooves therein, the tops
    of the ribs and the bottom of the grooves lying within or between
    substantially parallel planes.


CLS 72/89
TXT Including rotating tool (e.g., "disk-platen"):

    Subject matter under subclass 88 wherein at least one of the tools rotates
    about an axis perpendicular to its planar surfaces.


CLS 72/90
TXT Including stationary tool:

    Subject matter under subclass 88 wherein one of the tools is fixed against
    movement during metal deformation.


CLS 72/91
TXT Causes by rotating tool and opposing concave surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the work lies between two tools, a
    first of which is a roller-like tool*, and a second of which tools has a
    non-planar work-engaging face that is curved about one or more centerlines
    adjacent and parallel to the axis of the first tool, so as to form a space
    of varying magnitude between the two tools.


CLS 72/92
TXT Nonrotating concave surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 wherein the work-engaging face of the
    second tool is fixed against arcuate movement during deformation.


CLS 72/93
TXT With means to adjust concave surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 92 including use of means to alter the
    position of the second tool relative to the roller-like tool.


CLS 72/94
TXT And movement of work laterally of rotational axis during deformation:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the work moves bodily in a
    direction substantially at right angles to the axis of rotation of work
    during its rotation and deformation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88+,    for two tools relatively moving parallel to their surfaces that may
    move work laterally of its rotational axis during deformation.

    91+,    for rotating tool and opposing concave surface that may move work
    laterally during deformation.


CLS 72/95
TXT And longitudinal movement of work:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the work rotates about an axis,
    and travels along said axis, which axis coincides with the direction of the
    greatest dimension of the work during its rotation and deformation.

    (1)     Note.  In the operation of forming a screw-threaded element, the
    element may move along its length as a result of its rotation about its
    length dimension. Such lengthwise movements, caused solely by the element
    being screwed into a deformer, is specifically excluded from the
    limitations of these subclasses (95+). Disclosure of such movement may be
    found in subclasses 88+, 91+, and 103+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77+,    for disclosure of a tool orbiting about longitudinally moving work.


CLS 72/96
TXT Using external rotating tool and internal core:

    Subject matter under subclass 95 including a first tool adapted to engage
    the inside of hollow material being deformed while substantially filling a
    cross-section of the cavity within such material, and also including at
    least one other tool adapted to turn about its axis and engage the outside
    of the material.

    (1)     Note.  The term "hollow material" used in the definition of this
    subclass is intended to include work that is made hollow during the
    deforming operation.


CLS 72/97
TXT Including work-piercing or work-expanding plug:

    Subject matter under subclass 96 wherein the first tool is provided with a
    portion that is, according to the total disclosure, particularly adapted to
    create an opening in the material (i.e., make the material hollow) or to
    enlarge an existing opening in the material during operation.


CLS 72/98
TXT Using tool surfaces spaced along axis of work rotation:

    Subject matter under subclass 95 including a plurality of tools placed at
    intervals along the direction of work travel.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the devices described in the patents of this
    subclass function to "straighten" rod-like work.


CLS 72/99
TXT Using hyperboloidal roller:

    Subject matter under subclass 95 including a roller*, the work-engaging
    surface of which describes a symmetric concave curve approximating a
    hyberbola when the roller is viewed as a cross-section taken along the axis
    of the roller.

    (1)     Note.  An arc of a circle or ellipse, a parabola, or a similar
    symmetrical curved line is considered to approximate a hyperbola.  The
    Figure accompanying this note illustrates a typical hyperboloidal roller.



CLS 72/100
TXT Using tool cluster:

    Subject matter under subclass 95 involving a group of three or more tools
    disposed relative to the work and to each other in such manner that the
    tools engage the work in substantially a common plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    110, 178, 194, and 224+, for other disclosures involving a
    roller-cluster or other-tool cluster.


CLS 72/101
TXT Using rotating tool couple relatively adjustable about pivot normal to tool
    axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 including a tool-couple* comprising two
    tools, each of which turns on its axis, and a tool-carrier* for supporting
    one of the tools, which tool-carrier is mounted to pivot about an axis
    extending in a direction substantially perpendicular to the axis of the
    tool supported thereby to position one tool relative to the other.

    (1)     Note.  The function of the structure described is usually (a) to
    permit work to be placed within the "bite" of the tool-couple prior to
    deformation, or (b) to vary the effect of the tool couple on the work
    during deformation thereof.


CLS 72/102
TXT Using noncylindrical rotating tool:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 including a tool mounted to turn about an
    axis during metal deformation, the work-engaging surface of said tool being
    of a configuration that is other than a right circular cylinder.

    (1)     Note.  For the purpose of this definition, a right circular
    cylinder is formed by rotating a straight line about an axis that is
    parallel to the line.  For placement in this or indented subclasses, a
    patent must claim a rotating tool having a surface that is significantly
    not a right circular cylinder.  Examples of such configuration include:  a
    cone, a helical (i.e., screwlike) groove, a barrel, and an hour-glass,
    among others.


CLS 72/103
TXT Having helical groove:

    Subject matter under subclass 102 wherein the work-engaging surface of the
    tool is provided with a receding irregularity that could be traced by a
    point that runs continuously round and round the tool axis while constantly
    moving in one direction along the axis.


CLS 72/104
TXT With cooperating tool rotating in same direction:

    Subject matter under subclass 103 wherein a plurality of tools*, at least
    one of which is helically grooved, coact to deform the same work, and
    wherein either (a) all the tools turn clockwise, or (b) all the tools turn
    counterclockwise.

    (1)     Note.  As disclosed in the patents of this subclass, the tools
    surround the work and, as a result of the tools' rotation, cause the work
    to rotate in an opposite direction to that of the tools.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for a similar arrangement of tools, but wherein the tools are
    shaped differently from those found herein.


CLS 72/105
TXT And cooperating, complementary tool:

    Subject matter under subclass 102 including a second tool having surface
    portions that interfit with, or tend to interfit with, surface portions of
    the noncylindrical rotating tool, and wherein the tools coact on the same
    work.


CLS 72/106
TXT And circumferentially spaced, work-engaging elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 105 including an additional member touching
    the work at a point on the work periphery that is angularly spaced about
    the work-axis from the cooperating tools, which additional member deforms
    or supports the work.


CLS 72/107
TXT Included in roller cluster:

    Subject matter under subclass 102 wherein the tool is a roller*, including
    at least two additional rollers that cooperate with the first to form a
    roller-cluster*.

    (1)     Note.  See the search note under the definition of subclass 100 for
    the loci of other disclosures that include use of a roller-cluster or a
    tool-cluster.


CLS 72/108
TXT With cooperating tool rotating in same direction:

    Subject matter under subclass 102 wherein a plurality of tools* coact to
    deform the same work, and wherein either (a) all the tools turn clockwise,
    or (b) all the tools turn counterclockwise.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for a similar arrangement of tools, and see (1) Note under the
    definition of subclass 104.


CLS 72/109
TXT Including in tool couple:

    Subject matter under subclass 102 including a second tool cooperating with
    the first to form a tool-couple*.


CLS 72/110
TXT Using roller cluster:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 including a roller-cluster*.

    (1)     Note.  See the search note under the definition of subclass 100 for
    the loci of disclosures involving use of a roller cluster or a tool cluster.


CLS 72/111
TXT Using tool couple:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 including a tool couple*.


CLS 72/112
TXT Tool orbiting or rotating about an axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 67 including (a) a tool* that turns about an
    axis internal to both itself and the work, or (b) a tool that turns about a
    first axis internal to itself, and is mounted on a tool-carrier*, which
    tool-carrier turns about a second axis extending through the work.

    (1)     Note.  The notes to subclass 67 define various movements disclosed
    in the patents of these subclasses (67+). Disclosure of a rotating tool
    (defined in (a) above) or an orbiting tool (defined in (b) above) will be
    placed in subclasses 112+.  Disclosure of a gyrating tool (defined in
    subclass 67, (1) Note) will be placed in subclass 67.


CLS 72/113
TXT Comprising transverse axis roller inside hollow work:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein the tool is a roller* rotatable
    about its axis and is brought into engagement with the interior surface of
    hollow work* during deformation of the work, and wherein the roller axis
    lies across the length dimension of the hollow work.

    (1)     Note.  Patents placed herein disclose the work to be, for example,
    a tube or pipe and the deforming tool to be a roller therein, the roller
    and the work being moved relative to each other in a direction having a
    component simultaneously parallel to the centerline of the work and
    perpendicular to the roller axis.  The deforming action is similar to that
    found in subclasses 199+, below, but the patents are placed here because
    the axis of rotation of the roller passes through the work.


CLS 72/114
TXT Helically grooved tool threadedly engaging work:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein the tool turns about an axis
    extending through the work, which tool is provided with an irregularity
    that could be traced by a point that runs continuously round and round the
    axis extending through the work while constantly moving along that axis,
    and which tool is adapted to slidably engage a portion of the work to
    rotate and move axially relative to that portion of the work.

    (1)     Note.  Most of the disclosures of this subclass show a device for
    applying a "blind rivet", that is, a fastener applied to an object from
    only one side, the operation not requiring a pressure device applied to the
    opposite side of the object or the fastener.


CLS 72/115
TXT Comprising movable tool cooperating with fixes, work-spaced tool:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 including a stationary member about which
    the tool orbits or rotates to cooperate with the member in such manner that
    only work is located between the tool in motion and the stationary member
    during operation.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are patents disclosing a fixed
    tool which supports the work and imparts all or part of its shape to the
    work as it coacts with the rotating or orbiting tool.

    (2)     Note.  The disclosures herein are similar to those in subclass 82
    above with the difference that the movements of the parts are reversed,
    that is, whereas the work rotates in subclass 82 as it is "spun", in this
    subclass (115) the tool orbits around stationary work.

    (3)     Note.  The phrase "only work is located between" is intended to
    include disclosures wherein directly opposite surface portions of work are
    engaged by the tools.  Thus, a disclosure wherein one tool engages an
    interior surface portion of a tube and the other tool engages the opposing
    exterior surface portion of that tube, would be placed herein.  On the
    other hand, a disclosure wherein the tools contact chordally or
    diametrically opposite exterior surface portions of a tube would not fit
    this definition, since in the zone of deformation, a body of air occupies
    the space between the interior surface portions of the tube.  This
    disclosure would be found in other subclasses, based upon the structure of
    the tools.


CLS 72/116
TXT Plural, selectively usable fixed tools:

    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein the stationary tool is one of a
    multiplicity of such tools alternately usable to cooperate with the tool
    that is in motion.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are patents disclosing a plurality
    of stationary tools of various sizes or shapes to accommodate variously
    sized or shaped workpieces and/or to produce products of varied size or
    shape.

    (2)     Note.  Usually the work is a tube which is to be flared or flanged
    at an end by diametrically outward pressure of an orbiting or rotating tool
    inserted into the tube end.  The stationary tool coacts with the rotating
    or orbiting tool by clamping the tube around the exterior circumference,
    thereof, in generally opposed relation to the interiorly positioned
    orbiting or rotating tool, whereby at least a part of the shape of the
    stationary tool is imparted to the flared or flanged tube end.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    317,    for similar apparatus wherein the inserted tool does not rotate.


CLS 72/117
TXT Outwardly acting movable tool:

    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein the tool in motion is at least
    partially encompassed by the work so that the movable tool acts on work
    tending to force a portion of the work radially outwardly from the axis of
    tool rotation extending through the work.


CLS 72/118
TXT Including tool surface spaced along orbital axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 including a rotating tool (or tools)
    having a plurality of faces engaging the work for deformation thereof,
    wherein the work-engaging faces are separated by an interval measured
    parallel to the orbital or rotational axis.

    (1)     Note.  Included, for example, in this and indented subclasses are
    patents disclosing a first tool face which exerts an outward pressure on a
    portion of the interior surface of a tube to produce a circumferentially
    expanded area (i.e., rib or bead), and a second tool face which forms a
    flange or flared area at the end of the tube.  In most cases, the two tool
    faces are mounted at different positions on a rotating tool carrier*, which
    positions are longitudinally separated with respect to the orbit axis.  The
    first and second faces may be longitudinally separated portions of the same
    tool.

    (2)     Note.  In many of the patents in this and the indented subclass, a
    pipe is disclosed as being joined to an apertured plate by passing the pipe
    through the plate aperture and the deformations described in (1) Note are
    positioned on opposite surfaces of the plate whereby the pipe is prevented
    from shifting axially relative to the plate.  However, patents wherein the
    most comprehensive claim recites structure that, by disclosure, recognizes
    the pipe and structure that, by disclosure, recognizes the plate (i.e.,
    "assembly") will be found in Class 29, subclasses 243.517+ and 726.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 243.517+ and 726, and see (2) Note above.


CLS 72/119
TXT Including plural tools rotating on angularly related axes:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 including a plurality of rotating tools
    turning about separate nonparallel axes.


CLS 72/120
TXT With actuation of tool radially:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein the tool is moved toward or away
    from the axis of turning during deformation.

    (1)     Note.  The phrase "during deformation" is intended to include
    disclosures wherein a means to actuate the tool is operative at the same
    time that the tool is deforming the work. Disclosures wherein a tool moving
    means is operative before or after the deformation (e.g., adjusting means)
    would not fit this definition and would be found in other subclasses based
    upon the structure of the tools.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 726, and see (2) Note under the definition
    of subclass 118 above.


CLS 72/121
TXT Wherein tool is actuated inwardly:

    Subject matter under subclass 120 wherein the tool is pressed toward the
    axis during deformation.

    (1)     Note.  The term "pressed" is intended to include structure for
    forcing the tool against the work, towards the axis, even though the tool
    may itself move away from the axis to conform to the shape of the desired
    product.


CLS 72/122
TXT Including rotating tool mounted on rotating carriers:

    Subject matter under subclass 120 wherein the tool* turns about its own
    rotational axis in a tool carrier*, which tool carrier turns about a second
    axis extending through the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126,    for disclosure similar to that herein (122), but not provided with
    means for moving the tool radially of the second (i.e., "orbital") axis
    during deformation.


CLS 72/123
TXT Including roller having noncylindrical work-engaging surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 122 wherein the work-engaging face of the
    rotating tool* is a peripheral surface generated by a line revolving about
    an axis wherein the line is either not straight or not parallel to the axis.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is the locus of patents disclosing a roller
    tool which is not a right circular cylinder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for disclosure of similarly shaped tool structure in which
    disclosure the work rotates.


CLS 72/124
TXT Comprising roller cooperating with work- spaced tool:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein the orbiting or rotating tool is
    a roller* and including a second tool* cooperating with the roller such
    that only work is located between the tools during deformation.

    (1)     Note.  See (3) Note under the definition of subclass 115 for
    discussion of the phrase "only work is located between".


CLS 72/125
TXT With work or tool locator or work clamp:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 including means for positioning the work
    relative to the tool* and/or for holding the work relative to the tool.

    (1)     Note.  See "Work-Gripping Clamp" in the Glossary of Terms.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein are patents disclosing a means to measure
    (i.e., gage) the positions of the tool and the work with respect to each
    other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 281.1+ for structure wherein the device
    positions one part of a subassembly relative to another part prior to, or
    during, the securing of the parts by deformation.


CLS 72/126
TXT Tool both orbits and rotates:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein the tool turns about an internal
    axis and said axis revolves about a second axis that extends through the
    work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    for a disclosure wherein the tool is moved toward or away from the
    second (i.e., "orbital") axis during deformation.


CLS 72/127
TXT BY DEFLECTING SUCCESSIVELY PRESENTED PORTIONS OF WORK DURING BODILY
    MOVEMENT THEREOF (E.G., FOR COILING, LEVELLING, CURVING, OR TROUGHING
    MATERIAL IN MOVEMENT):

    Subject matter under the class definition including an instrumentality, or
    step of using an instrumentality, into which work is serially introduced in
    an original direction along a path, and which instrumentality functions to
    divert the work away from such path in conformance to either of the
    following limitations:

    (a)     longitudinally consecutive quanta of work are totally diverted from
    the original path to a new path about an axis-of-bend* transversely
    disposed with respect to the original direction; or

    (b)     longitudinally consecutive cross sections of work (the cross
    sections being taken at right angles to the original direction and each
    cross section having width and breadth dimensions) pass through the
    instrumentality, and one of the dimensions of the consecutive cross
    sections is diverted about at least one longitudinally extending
    axis-of-bend with substantially no change in the magnitude of either
    dimension.

    (1)     Note.  The "original direction" is established by considering the
    movement of the work portions that are at the entrance to the
    work-deforming instrumentality.  Having established an "original direction"
    with respect to the work at the entrance, the longitudinal dimension of
    work is deemed to be that which is moving in such direction regardless of
    the extent of that dimension or of the course of movement of any portion of
    undeformed material (i.e., work portions moving in that direction are
    "longitudinally consecutive").  Thus, if a piece of work having a short
    width and a long length moves into the instrumentality along its width
    dimension "longitudinally consecutive" portions of that workpiece extend
    along the width dimension.  As another example, if the metal is coiled or
    curved and successive portions thereof move in a spiral or helical path
    into a straightening device, the "original direction" (established at the
    device) extends spirally or helically upstream of the device and the
    portions are deflected from the spiral or helical path into a straight path.

    (2)     Note.  The definition of axis-of-bend in section III of this class
    is accompanied by drawings, Figures III-1 to III-5, illustrating the
    products of the devices discussed in (3) Note which follows.  The term
    "quanta of work" (used in part (a) of the definition) refers to portions or
    masses of work, each portion having dimensions that are (a) infinitesimal
    in the longitudinal direction, (b) equal to work thickness, and (c) equal
    to or less than work width.

    (3)     Note.  The following types of patent disclosures are exemplary of
    those placed as original copies in this and indented subclasses (all
    patents have in common a disclosure that work is moved along an original
    course of movement):

      (a)   a device for deflecting a strand (or strip) entirely around an
    axis-of-bend to form; a helical tube (illustrated in the Figure
    accompanying (1) Note in subclass 49), or a helical coil (illustrated in
    Figure III-3 in the definition of axis-of-bend*), or a spiral coil
    (illustrated in Figure III-2 in the definition of axis-of-bend), the
    product retaining the shape imparted thereto by the deflector;

      (b)   a device for "levelling" (i.e., straightening) work by moving it
    along a general course but deflecting each successive portion first in one
    direction (partially around a first axis-of-bend) and then in another
    direction (partially around another axis-of-bend) through an undulating or
    tortuous path along the general course (illustrated in Figure III-4 in the
    definition of axis-of-bend), wherein the work moves in its entirety past a
    group of deflectors and each successive work portion moves in the same
    undulating path;

      (c)   a device wherein the cross-sectional configuration of the work is
    reshaped by bending about a longitudinal axis-of-bend so as to form a
    trough (illustrated in Figure III-5, see the definition of axis-of-bend*)
    or a longitudinally corrugated product (illustrated in Figure 2
    accompanying (1) Note of subclass 180); or

      (d)   a device wherein a coil is rotated about its central axis and the
    convolutions thereof are unwound and straightened by deflecting successive
    work portions partially around an axis-of-bend that is parallel to the coil
    axis and outside the coil (this operation being the converse of the coiling
    described in paragraph (a) herein above).

    (4)     Note.  A full discussion of the differences between the structure
    and function of patents for this class (72) and the patents for Class 242,
    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding will be found in section VIII, B, of this
    class.

    (5)     Note.  With respect to paragraph (b) of the definition of this
    subclass (127), the term "deflecting" is limited to bending without change
    in the cross-sectional area of the material as the work is deformed.  If
    the product of a deforming operation has a cross-sectional area greater
    than or less than that of the work entering the deforming instrumentality,
    the deformation is not considered to be a deflecting operation.  Such
    deformation may be found in subclasses pertaining to the reduction of size,
    as for example, subclasses 199+ wherein a roller-couple reduces the
    cross-sectional area of the work; subclasses 274+ wherein the area of work
    is reduced by "drawing" through a die, and subclasses 343+ wherein a sheet
    is "drawn" into a shell or cup.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 603 for metallic
    stock of nonplanar uniform thickness or nonlinear uniform diameter.


CLS 72/128
TXT With modification or control of temperature or work, tool or machine:

    Subject matter under subclass 127 including a step of, or means for,
    changing or regulating the degree of heat content of the work*, the
    deflector* or any part of the deforming instrumentality wherein the
    deflector functions.

    (1)     Note.  Included within the concept of "regulating" is preventing
    the temperature from changing.  For example, a cooled bearing in the
    machine, or a heated deflector operating on hot work, will warrant original
    placement of a metal deflecting patent having such claimed structure into
    this subclass (128).

    (2)     Note.  The schedule of this class (72) contains other subclasses
    pertaining to temperature modification or control in other deforming
    operations.


CLS 72/129
TXT With cutting of work or product:

    Subject matter under subclass 127 including a step of, or means for cutting
    the work* for, or product* of, or deflecting operation.

    (1)     Note.  Patents disclosing cutting placed originally in this
    subclass (129) and indented subclasses are limited to that cutting
    described in section VI, B of this class.

    (2)     Note.  The schedule of this class (72) contains other subclasses
    pertaining to cutting with other types of deforming operations.


CLS 72/130
TXT And deforming of work or product (other than by deflecting):

    Subject matter under subclass 129 including a step of, or means for,
    additionally deforming metal in some manner differentiated from deflecting.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass will take a disclosure of deflecting plus
    cutting plus deforming wherein the deforming is, per se, classified below
    subclass 184.


CLS 72/131
TXT And stopping of work movement during cutting:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein the cutting of the work is done
    only while the work is stationary.


CLS 72/132
TXT And actuation of cutter in timed relation to deflector or work movement:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein the cutting is done in
    synchronism with the deflecting or feeding of the work.

    (1)     Note.  Included within the concept of the term "in synchronism" is
    a device wherein the cutter is driven from the same power source that also
    drives the deflector or the work feeder such that the operation of the
    elements is clearly interrelated.


CLS 72/133
TXT With feeding of discrete articles or orienting of work relative to
    deflector (other than by deflector):

    Subject matter relative to deflector under subclass 127 including means for
    presenting work having a determinate length to a deflector*, or for
    positioning work laterally with respect to the deflector, which means does
    not itself work.

    (1)     Note.  An instrumentality of the type which characterizes the
    patents of subclasses 127+ is usually "self-feeding", that is, it pulls the
    work through or within the deforming instrumentality as it deforms the
    work. A patent disclosing or claiming a self-feeding deflector will not be
    placed as original in this subclass (133) but will be placed in accordance
    with the deflector structure.


CLS 72/134
TXT With use of means to remove product from deflector:

    Subject matter under subclass 127 including use of means for positively
    moving product* away from a deforming instrumentality.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169,    for structure which may be removed or partially disassembled to
    permit product removal from deflecting instrumentality.

    250,    257, 328, 361, and 426+, for other product handling.


CLS 72/135
TXT To form helical coil or tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein the instrumentality accomplishes,
    or is provided with additional means that accomplishes, a further diversion
    of the successively presented portions along the transversely disposed
    axis-of-bend*, thereby adding a helical pitch to the produced coil*.

    (1)     Note.  It will be noted that the "transversely disposed
    axis-of-bend" is referred to in paragraph (a) of the definition of subclass
    127.

    (2)     Note.  The diversion of the work around the axis-of-bend, and the
    diversion along said axis can be accomplished by separate devices or by a
    single mechanism that combines the functions of both devices.

    (3)     Note.  For illustrations of a tube and a coil, see the Figure
    accompanying (1) Note of subclass 49, and Figure III-3 (in the definition
    of axis-of-bend*), respectively.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for the manufacture of a helically- seamed tube.

    371,    for a method of coiling not involving the use of any particular
    structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 592 for a
    metallic stock which is helical or has a helical component.


CLS 72/136
TXT Including thinning of helical portion of work section:

    Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein the instrumentality comprises two
    elements:

    (a)  having work-engaging surfaces extending transversely across the
    direction of movement of the work, and

    (b)  engaging opposite faces of the work, and in which as claimed or
    disclosed, the distance between the work-engaging surfaces is less at one
    side margin of the work than at the other side margin thereof, and also
    less than the original work thickness.

    (1)     Note.  Usually a deflector* of this class (72) includes a member
    inclined to the direction of travel of moving work, which member engages a
    side to divert the work into a coil.  In this subclass (136) the coiling is
    the result of the work being squeezed between two pressure surfaces (e.g.,
    rollers, hammers, etc.), between which the work passes.  The squeezing of
    one side margin elongates the squeezed margin with respect to the other
    margin, thereby effectively causing a deflection out of the course of work
    movement.  See the Figure accompanying this note for illustration of
    pressure surfaces comprising rollers*.



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    for similar structure wherein the work is merely curved as
    distinguished from coiled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 592 for metallic
    stock which is helical or has a helical component.


CLS 72/137
TXT With deforming of work or product (other than by coiler):

    Subject matter under subclass 135 further provided with means for deforming
    work, which means functions in a manner different from the instrumentality
    defined in subclass 135.


CLS 72/138
TXT By use of means acting by and during machine operation to form coil of
    irregular pitch and/or diameter:

    Subject matter under subclass 135 including use of means to produce a coil
    that is not uniform as to its helix angle (i.e., pitch) or its radius of
    arc (i.e., diameter) or both, which means is driven from the same power
    source that causes deflection of the work into a coil, and operates while
    the deformation occurs.

    (1)     Note.  The structure defined facilitates the production of a
    helical coil in other than regular cylindrical form.  The coil shown in the
    Figure accompanying this note is the result of changing the radius of
    bending during manufacture.



    Also placed in this or indented subclasses would be a disclosure of a
    machine for producing a coil of nonuniform pitch or nonuniform diameter
    (e.g., an "hour-glass" configured bed spring), or a machine for varying the
    radius of the coil convolutions as the coil is being produced.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140     and 143, for means for adjusting an instrumentality to produce
    coils of different pitch and/or diameter.


CLS 72/139
TXT Including noncyclindrical core:

    Subject matter under subclass 138 wherein the coil-changing means includes
    an arbor that has a configuration other than that of a right circular
    cylinder.

    (1)     Note.  Patents placed herein include those disclosing a mandrel
    having (for example) a conical shape or a noncircular cross section onto
    which the work is deflected, and from which the coil acquires its shape
    during deformation of the work into a coil.

    (2)     Note.  For a discussion of "right circular cylinder", and examples
    of structure that is not a right circular cylinder, see (1) Note under the
    definition of subclass 102.


CLS 72/140
TXT By interchangeable or selectable tool portion:

    Subject matter under subclass 135 including means on or within the
    instrumentality permitting (a) substitution of another diverting means
    therein, or (b) use of another work-engaging portion of the diverting means.


CLS 72/141
TXT By multiconvolutional tool:

    Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein the instrumentality that engages
    and diverts successively presented portions of the moving work continues to
    engage and guide the produced coil through more than 360o of movement of
    said portions around the axis-of-bend*.

    (1)     Note.  Patents placed in this subclass disclose a deflector,
    pitch-adder tool having a helically-shaped path that confines the produced
    coil to movement within that path.


CLS 72/142
TXT By work guide and rotatable work-holding core:

    Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein the instrumentality comprises:



    (a)     an arbor having claimed or disclosed means thereon, or cooperating
    therewith, for temporarily securing the work relatively thereto; and

    (b)     means adjacent to, and cooperating with, the arbor and directing
    the work to or towards the peripheral surface of the arbor in which the
    arbor turns about its central axis.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this and indented subclasses disclose the pitch
    adder as an arrangement wherein the core (i.e., the arbor of (a) above) and
    the work-guide (i.e., the work-directing means of (b) above) are relatively
    movable. Pitch is added to the product by moving the core along its axis or
    by traversing the work-guide along a line parallel to the axis; see
    subclass 144 indented hereunder for the traversable work-guide.


CLS 72/143
TXT Add means to change pitch of coil:

    Subject matter under subclass 142 including means for altering the effect
    of the pitch adder on the successive work portions, whereby the pitch of
    the produced coil is altered.

    (1)     Note.  For discussion of "pitch" see the definition of coil* in
    section III of this class.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass are patents disclosing means for
    moving the core and/or the work guide relatively along, or parallel to, the
    core axis, and means for changing the relative movement.  The change is
    made while the instrumentality is not operating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    for a disclosure of adjustment of pitch and/or diameter during
    machine operation, and see (2) Note above.


CLS 72/144
TXT And means to traverse work guide:

    Subject matter under subclass 142 including mechanism for moving the work
    guide uniformly along a line parallel to the core axis.

    (1)     Note.  The work guide and the core are discussed in (b) and (a)
    respectively, in the definition of subclass 142, above.


CLS 72/145
TXT By movable periphery tool external of coil:

    Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein the instrumentality includes a
    work-engaging surface (or group of surfaces) facing the axis-of-bend*,
    wherein the surface(s) moves relatively to said axis and also moves with
    the deflected product portions during coiling.

    (1)     Note.  The surface may be driven, or may be moved solely by
    frictional contact with the moving work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49+,    for disclosure of tube-seaming apparatus showing use of one or more
    rollers outside of the tube that is being produced.


CLS 72/146
TXT To form spiral coil:

    Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein the instrumentality diverts work
    around a transverse axis-of-bend* to produce a coil* having a plurality of
    radially superimposed convolutions or whorls.

    (1)     Note.  See section VIII, B of this class (72) for the differences
    between the subject matter of this subclass (146) and the subject matter of
    Class 242.


CLS 72/147
TXT With interposes of space adjacent coil convolutions:

    Subject matter under subclass 146 wherein a member (or plurality of
    members) is (or are) moved with the work or product into contact with a
    whorl of deflected product to separate each whorl from the previously
    deflected whorl and the next deflected whorl.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass (147) will serve as a locus of cross-reference
    patents disclosing the making of a metal open spiral coil (i.e., a coil,
    similar to a balance spring, having spiral convolutions wherein successive
    convolutions do not contact one another.


CLS 72/148
TXT With core inside coil:

    Subject matter under subclass 146 wherein the work is deflected onto an
    arbor to form the convolutions of the coil.

    (1)     Note.  The Figures below illustrate two exemplary forms of "blocker
    and core" used to start the winding of a strip around a core or arbor.  In
    one form a belt (backed by rollers) surrounds the core; in the other,
    rollers (without the belt) urge the first convolutions of a strip around
    the core.





CLS 72/149
TXT By use of work-contacting wiper and moving, work-holding form:

    Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein the instrumentality comprises:

    A.      a first member adjacent the work and engaging a surface thereof, to
    confine the work to movement along its original direction, and cooperating
    with

    B.      a second member movable in an arc about an axis-of-bend*, which
    axis-of-bend is disposed transversely of the direction of work movement,
    said second member having:



      (a)   a peripheral surface tangent to said course and along which surface
    the work is to be laid thus imparting the shape of the surface to the
    product, and

    (b)     means for temporarily securing a portion of said work to said
    surface so that the secured portion partakes of all movement of said second
    member, while trailing portions are constrained by the first member and the
    work is deformed by and between the two members.

    (1)     Note.  The first (i.e., work-engaging) member is usually referred
    to in the art, and will hereinafter be referred to in these definitions, as
    a "wiper". The second (i.e., work-holding) member is usually referred to in
    the art, and will hereafter be referred to in these definitions, as a
    "former".

    (2)     Note.  In operation, the work is held to the form tangent to the
    surface thereof and the form is rotated, usually through less than 360o.
    In the absence of a wiper the work would revolve around the form with its
    lead end tangent thereto; however, the wiper is used to confine the
    underformed work portions to their original direction of movement.  The
    work-gripping form thus pulls the work with the form surface as the form
    rotates, deflecting the gripped work portion and successive portions away
    from the course and partially around the axis-of-bend, and the wiper acts
    on successively presented work portions to urge the work into contact with
    successive portions of the form surface.


CLS 72/150
TXT With core inside hollow workpiece:

    Subject matter under subclass 149 including a member that substantially
    contacts all of the interior periphery of that section of hollow work* that
    is engaged by the deforming instrumentality.

    (1)     Note.  The core disclosed in the patents in this subclass usually
    functions to prevent undesired distortions in tubular work during the
    bending thereof.


CLS 72/151
TXT With tensioning or work:

    Subject matter under subclass 149 including use of means for applying a
    tensile stress to the work during the deflecting thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The tensioning is usually by a structure, additional to the
    wiper and former, that would tend to pull the work rearwardly except for
    the greater effect of the former that pulls the work to itself.  However,
    this subclass (151) is also a locus of patents disclosing a wiper and
    former plus a "drag" or "brake" on the work that tends to retard work
    movement, thereby applying a tension to the work.

    (2)     Note.  As work is bent by deflection, that side of the material
    facing the axis-of-bend* is placed under compression whereas the opposite
    side is placed under tension.  The "tension" described in this (2) Note is
    not sufficient to warrant placement of a patent into this subclass.


CLS 72/152
TXT With deforming or work or product (other than by wiper and former):

    Subject matter under subclass 149 further including a deforming means other
    than that peculiar to subclass 149.


CLS 72/153
TXT And means to impart compound motion to form:

    Subject matter under subclass 149 including means for moving the form
    simultaneously (a) in its rotation about the axis-of-bend*, and (b) in its
    translation in a direction at right angles to said axis.


CLS 72/154
TXT Including back-up travelling wiper (e.g., follow bar):

    Subject matter under subclass 149 wherein the wiper comprises a first
    element engaging the surface of the work and moving therewith either along
    or parallel to the course of movement thereof, and a second element
    applying force at right angles to both the course and the axis-of-bend*,
    the second element thereby urging the first element into engagement with
    the workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  The purpose of this structure is to prevent sliding contact
    between the wiper and the work.  Since the travelling wiper moves with the
    work, the surface of the work is thus not marred by the wiper.


CLS 72/155
TXT And means to urge wiper toward form surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 149 including means for biasing the wiper
    toward the form.

    (1)     Note.  The terms "wiper" and "form" are defined in the definition
    and notes of subclass 149.

    (2)     Note.  A patent disclosing a wiper, the position of which is
    adjusted before deflection, but unchanged during deflection, will not be
    placed in this or indented subclasses.  See subclass 158 for such
    adjustable wiper.

    (3)     Note.  Included in this subclass (155) are patents disclosing, for
    example, lever means, hydraulic means, or spring means as the blasting
    force.


CLS 72/156
TXT And interrelated means to move form and gripper element thereon:

    Subject matter under subclass 149 wherein (a) the work-holding means and
    the form includes a part movable with respect to the form, for securing the
    work to the form, and includes mechanism to move the part, and (b) there is
    also included a mechanism for moving the form, and wherein the part moving
    mechanism and the form-moving mechanism are connected together or are moved
    in synchronous relationship one to the other.

    (1)     Note.  In usual operation the mechanisms are actuated by a drive
    means common to both, such that first the work is gripped and then the form
    is moved.


CLS 72/157
TXT Including interchangeable or adjustable wiper or form:

    Subject matter under subclass 149 including means permitting either:  (a)
    by substitution of another wiper or another form, or a portion of either
    member, or (b) by variation in the position of the wiper relative to the
    form of the work.


CLS 72/158
TXT Comprising adjustable wiper:

    Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the position of the wiper is
    alterable at will.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass (158) are patents wherein the
    wiper is adjusted closer or further from the form to accommodate work of
    different size, or wherein the wiper is repositioned to change the
    direction of bending of the work.


CLS 72/159
TXT And work-complementing gripper faces (e.g., contoured):

    Subject matter under subclass 149 including work-holding elements on the
    form, said element having surfaces which are nonplanar and match or fit
    corresponding surfaces of the gripped portion of the workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  The "work-holding elements" were described in the definition
    of subclass 149 in part (B) section (b) as means for temporarily securing
    the work to the form.  In this subclass (159) are found disclosures of
    gripper elements for gripping threaded pipe, flared tubing, I-beams, or
    other objects having a contoured cross section.


CLS 72/160
TXT By use of deflected arranged to provide longitudinally undulating path for
    work (e.g., "levelling"):

    Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein the instrumentality includes a
    plurality of deflectors* positioned along the path of moving work in offset
    relationship, each of which deflectors forces each successively presented
    portion of work from one direction into another direction

    in an arc extending partially around an axis-of-bend* that is disposed
    transversely of the path of work movement.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this and indented subclasses are patents
    disclosing operations known in the art as "straightening" and "levelling".
    These patents have a plurality of deflectors located adjacent a course of
    work movement along a straight line from entrance end to exit end of the
    instrumentality.  At least one of the deflectors is intruded into the line
    from one side and another deflector is adjacent to, or intruded into, the
    line from another side.

    As the work passes along the successive deflectors, any specific work
    portion will move along the course, be deflected in one direction by a
    first deflector, and that specific portion will be deflected in another
    direction by another deflector.  The work within the instrumentality is
    engaged by a plurality of deflectors simultaneously, so that at any instant
    of time the work has formed therein a plurality of deflected portions
    similar in shape to a "roller coaster" track extended into a single compass
    direction.  However, each specific portion passes through a sinuous path.
    In many disclosures it is clear that the amplitude of the deflections is
    greatest at the entrance end of the device and least (or zero) at the exit
    end thereof, so that at the exit end the product is straight or planiform.
    An illustration of a typical "leveller"  appears in Figure III-4 under the
    definition of axis-of-bend* in section III of this class.

    (2)     Note.  Patents placed originally in this and indented subclasses
    disclose an operation wherein a stress is applied to work because of, and
    during, its passage through an undulant path. See the disclosures of
    subclass 205 for an undulant path "tension bridle" as a retarding means in
    a roller couple system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205+,   and see (2) Note above.


CLS 72/161
TXT With deforming of work or product (other  than levelling):

    Subject matter under subclass 160, further provided with means for
    deforming work, which means functions in a manner different from the
    instrumentality defined in subclass 160.


CLS 72/162
TXT Including relatively inclined successively rollers:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 including a first-acting roller* and a
    second-acting roller positioned so that, even viewed along the direction of
    work movement, the axes of the rollers overlie in crossing relationship
    (i.e., their projections intersect on a plane perpendicular to the line of
    sight).

    (1)     Note.  Some patents in this subclass (162) disclosure rollers
    arranged in two (or more) groups including a first group having rollers on
    vertical axes and another group having rollers on horizontal axes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235,    for similar structure including successive roller couples angularly
    related, but not providing an undulant path.


CLS 72/163
TXT And back-up means for roller deflector:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein the instrumentality has a
    plurality of rollers* for deflecting work, and the rollers are supported
    against movement at right angles to the axes thereof by means located
    between the ends of the work-engaging surfaces of the rollers and in
    contact therewith.

    (1)     Note.  The deflecting rollers engage the work and are between the
    work and the back-up means.  The pressure exerted by the work in resisting
    deformation is transmitted through the rollers to the back-up means, rather
    than being absorbed by the rollers along.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241.2+, for disclosure of similar back-up means in a roller couple carrier
    and not providing or causing an undulant path.


CLS 72/164
TXT And adjustable carrier for deflector:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein one or more of the deflector (s)*
    is (are) supported in a tool carrier* and the tool carrier is mounted so
    that its position within the instrumentality may be altered.


CLS 72/165
TXT Including tier or roller deflectors on carriers:

    Subject matter under subclass 164 wherein a tool carrier* is located on one
    side of the course of work movement and supports a plurality of rollers*
    therein.


CLS 72/166
TXT By use of deflectors arranged to bend work longitudinally of direction of
    work movement:

    Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein the instrumentality diverts
    successively presented work portions from their original direction into an
    arcuate second direction at least partially about an axis-of-bend* that is
    disposed transversely of said original direction.


CLS 72/167
TXT Including thinning portion of work section:

    Subject matter under subclass 166 wherein the instrumentality comprises
    elements (a) having work-engaging surfaces extending transversely across
    the direction of movement of the work, and (b) engaging opposite faces of
    the work, and in which, as claimed or disclosed, the distance between the
    work-engaging surfaces is less at one side margin of the work than at the
    other side margin thereof, and also less than the original work thickness.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 136 and the Figure accompanying (1) Note
    therein for further discussion of the apparatus and an illustration of an
    exemplary form thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136,    for similar structure plus a pitch adder wherein a helical coil is
    formed, and see (1) Note above.


CLS 72/168
TXT With deforming of work or product (other than bending longitudinally):

    Subject matter under subclass 166 further provided with means for deforming
    work, which means functions in a manner different from the instrumentality
    defined in subclass 166.


CLS 72/169
TXT With handling of curved product:

    Subject matter under subclass 166 including means, additional to the
    instrumentality, for manipulating the product* within the instrumentality;
    or including means disclosed as permitting the product to be manipulated
    within, or removed from, the instrumentality.

    (1)     Note.  In many patents, there is a teaching that the product is
    wrapped around a core which is supported at both ends and is mounted so
    that the instrumentality may be partially disassembled to permit removal of
    the product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    for means to remove the product from the instrumentality.


CLS 72/170
TXT Including three concurrently acting delta-arranged deflector elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 166 wherein the instrumentality comprises an
    integrated assemblage of three (or more) members acting at the same time on
    the moving work, wherein two members are located so as to be spaced along
    one side of the course of work movement and a third member is located on
    another side of said course.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this and indented subclasses are patents
    disclosing such exemplary roller arrangements as those known in the art as
    "pyramid" rollers, illustrated in Figure 1 accompanying the note,



    and those known in the art as "pinch" rollers, illustrated in Figure 2
    accompanying this note,



    The difference between the two exemplary arrangements is, as illustrated,
    the spacing between rollers.  In view of the fact that few patents claim
    this different spacing no subclasses based upon this difference have been
    established.

    In either of these arrangements the "downstream" roller may be replaced by
    a plate, block, or other similar member which the work engages and on which
    it slides, as illustrated in Figure 3 accompany this note.  Patents
    disclosing structure similar to this illustration (Figure 3) will be found
    in subclass 172 below.



CLS 72/171
TXT And additional work-deflecting or working- constraining element:

    Subject matter under subclass 170 including use of a member additional to
    such three members (defined in and required by subclass 170) which
    additional member engages the work and guides, or deflects, or supports the
    work as it is acted upon by the three members.

    (1)     Note.  Include herein subclass (171) are patents disclosing the
    fourth member as constraining the work by preventing its re-entry into
    contact with the three members.


CLS 72/172
TXT Comprising two rollers and guide:

    Subject matter under subclass 170 wherein the three members consist of two
    rollers* and a third, passive member, which is not a roller, engaging and
    acting on the work, while remaining stationary.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are patents disclosing the third
    member to be a roller* rotatable about its axis. Such patents will be found
    elsewhere, for example, in subclass 170.

    (2)     Note.  For an illustration of the type of structure found in this
    subclass, see Figure 3 accompanying (1) Note of subclass 170.


CLS 72/173
TXT Including adjustable element:

    Subject matter under subclass 170 wherein the position of at least one of
    the members relative to the other member(s) may be altered.

    (1)     Note.  The deflecting member is usually held in an adjustable tool
    carrier*.


CLS 72/174
TXT And interrelated means to adjust plural elements simultaneously:

    Subject matter under subclass 173 including two or more adjustable members,
    and further including means for altering the position of all of the
    adjustable members by a drive means common to all.

    (1)     Note.  In accordance with the definitions of subclass 173 and this
    subclass (174), a disclosure of a single adjustable tool carrier* holding
    two or more deflectors would be placed herein subclass (174) since all the
    deflectors are adjusted at the same time.


CLS 72/175
TXT Comprising rectilinearly reciprocable carrier for element:

    Subject matter under subclass 173 wherein the adjustable member is held in
    a tool carrier* which is movable to and from the work along a straight line.


CLS 72/176
TXT By use of deflector arranged to bend work transversely of direction of work
    movement (e.g., troughing):

    Subject matter under subclass 127 comprising an instrumentality which
    functions to divert work in conformance with the limitations expressed in
    paragraph (b) of the definition of subclass 127.

    (1)     Note.  See the definition of axis-of-bend, and Figure III-5
    therein, for further discussion and illustration of one of the products
    formed by the structure of this and indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  In accordance with (5) Note under the definition of subclass
    127, bending caused by, or accompanied by a reduction in the
    cross-sectional area of a workpiece is not to be found in this or indented
    subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclass 147 for a method of making a tube by
    skelping it and welding the tube seam.


CLS 72/177
TXT With deforming of work or product (other than bending transversely):

    Subject matter under subclass 176 further provided with means for deforming
    work, which means functions in a manner different from the instrumentality
    defined in subclass 176.


CLS 72/178
TXT Including roller cluster:

    Subject matter under subclass 176 wherein the instrumentality includes
    three or more cooperating rollers* that form a roller cluster*.

    (1)     Note.  See the search note under the definition of subclass 100 for
    the loci of disclosures involving use of a roller cluster or a tool cluster.


CLS 72/179
TXT Including complementary roller couple:

    Subject matter under subclass 176 wherein the instrumentality includes two
    noncylindrical rollers disposed so that their axes lie in a common plane
    and work passes through (intersects) said plane between work-engaging
    surfaces of the rollers, and wherein, at that plane, the surface of one
    roller interfits (or tends to interfit) with the surface of the other
    roller.

    (1)     Note.  The Figure accompanying this note illustrates one example of
    a complementary roller couple.



CLS 72/180
TXT Including plural axially spaced circumferential ribs and grooves:

    Subject matter under subclass 179 wherein the profile of each roller (i.e.,
    the outline of the roller's work-engaging surface at the plane) is an
    undulant line (i.e, is alternately convex and concave relative to the
    roller axis) and wherein the convexities and concavities of one roller
    profile interfit (or tend to interfit) with the concavities and convexities
    respectively of the other roller profile.

    (1)     Note.  Figure 1 accompanying this note illustrates one example of a
    ribbed and grooved complementary roller-couple. An example of the product
    of this roller-couple is illustrated in Figure 2 accompanying this note.





CLS 72/181
TXT Including plural successively acting roller couples:

    Subject matter under subclass 179 wherein two or more roller couples*, at
    least one of which is a complementary roller-couple, are positioned so that
    serially consecutive work portions are sequentially engaged by said
    roller-couples.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    234+,   for a similar arrangement of plural roller-couples.


CLS 72/182
TXT Including roller couple:

    Subject matter under subclass 176 wherein the deflector* includes two
    rollers that form a roller-couple.


CLS 72/183
TXT By tension applied to work or product (e.g., uncoiling):

    Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein the instrumentality comprises
    means for applying a tensile stress to the work during deformation.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes patents disclosing the straightening
    of coiled metal by pulling on the free end thereof with a force sufficient
    to uncoil and deform the metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205,    for a disclosure wherein metal passes through a roller-couple that
    reduces the thickness of the metal while it is under tension.

    274+,   for a disclosure wherein metal passes through a closed-periphery
    die that is smaller in area than the cross-sectional area of the metal
    while it is under tension.


CLS 72/184
TXT BY USE OF "FLYING TOOL" ENGAGING MOVING WORK:

    Subject matter under the class definition including apparatus, or method
    employing apparatus, wherein work* moves in its entirety along a
    predetermined path, both to said apparatus and during deformation by said
    apparatus, which apparatus comprises a tool face* having two components of
    movement, one being toward the work into deforming engagement therewith and
    the other being in the direction of work movement during deformation.

    (1)     Note.  A roller* that rotates about an axis, which axis is fixed
    relative to a deforming instrumentality or is movable only towards (but not
    with) the moving work, is not considered to be a flying tool for this and
    indented subclasses.  However, a roller mounted on an axis that moves with
    and parallel to the work surface during deformation is considered to be a
    flying tool, and a roller-like-tool* comprising a noncircular surface
    rotating about an axis is also considered to be a flying tool.

    (2)     Note.  The definition is intended to include a patent disclosing
    introduction of work into an apparatus along a predetermined compass
    direction and deformation of such work by a tool-face as the work and
    tool-face move along the opposite compass direction. Examples of such
    disclosure are found in subclass 189.  The definition is not intended to
    include a patent disclosing introduction of work into an apparatus along a
    first direction and deformation by a tool as the work and tool move along a
    direction substantially at right angles to the first direction. Examples of
    such disclosure are found in subclasses 343+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    343+,   for disclosure of "push-drawing" and see (2) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 284+ for disclosure of a "flying tool" wherein
    the tool is a cutter.


CLS 72/185
TXT With cutting:

    Subject matter under subclass 184 wherein the tool is combined with a
    cutter.

    (1)     Note.  Patents disclosing cutting means or method placed as
    originals in this subclass are limited to that cutting acceptable into this
    class (72) in accordance with section VI, B of this class.


CLS 72/186
TXT By composite cutting, deforming tool:

    Subject matter under subclass 185 wherein the deforming tool and the cutter
    are rigidly connected together such that movement of the tool is always
    accompanied by movement of the cutter, and the operation of the cutter and
    of the tool results from the same movement.

    (1)     Note.  See the search notes under subclass 464 for a listing of
    other subclasses providing for composite cutting, deforming tools.


CLS 72/187
TXT Included in plural deforming stations or passes:

    Subject matter under subclass 184 including at least two groups of
    cooperating tool-faces*, one of which groups comprises a flying tool
    operating upon work moving sequentially between the tool-faces of each
    group.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226+,   for disclosure of plural roller-couples successively used.


CLS 72/188
TXT Passes spaced along axis of rotating tool:

    Subject matter under subclass 187 wherein one of the tool faces of each of
    a plurality of such groups constitutes part of the same roller-like tool*,
    each tool-face being set apart from the other(s) at intervals occurring
    lengthwise of the axis of the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221+,   for disclosure of axially spaced passes in a roller-couple.


CLS 72/189
TXT Including accurately oscillating tool face:

    Subject matter under subclass 184 wherein the tool-face* moves in a curved
    path through less than 360o of movement during the deforming operation, and
    returns in the same curved path.

    (1)     Note.  The return motion of the tool face may be either an idle
    (nondeforming) movement or a deforming movement.

    (2)     Note.  See (2) Note under the definition of subclass 184.


CLS 72/190
TXT Including orbitally moving tool-face:

    Subject matter under subclass 184 wherein the tool face travels in a closed
    loop path.

    (1)     Note.  If a tool face travels along a path during deformation and
    returns along the same path during an "idle" (nondeforming) movement, the
    path is not a "loop" therefore a patent disclosing such an operation would
    be placed in another subclass within this group of subclasses.


CLS 72/191
TXT Moving in circular orbit:

    Subject matter under subclass 190 wherein all parts of the tool's face are
    fixed to each other and turn about a common center, whereby the closed loop
    path is a circle.


CLS 72/192
TXT With cooperating rectilinearly moving tool (e.g., "anvil"):

    Subject matter under subclass 191 whose tool-face* co-acts with a second
    tool having a tool-face that moves to and from in a straight line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207,    for disclosure of a rectilinearly moving tool cooperating with a
    roller.


CLS 72/193
TXT Comprising tool inside hollow work:

    Subject matter under subclass 192 wherein the second tool-face acts on the
    inside surface of hollow work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208+,   for disclosure of a tool inside hollow work cooperating with a
    roller.


CLS 72/194
TXT Included in tool cluster:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 including a group of three or more tools
    disposed relative to the work and to each other such that the tools
    simultaneously engage the work in substantially common plane.

    (1)     Note.  See the search note under the definition of subclass 100 for
    the loci of other disclosures involving use of a roller cluster or a tool
    cluster.


CLS 72/195
TXT Circumferentially adjustable relative to work-spaced cooperating surfaces:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 whose tool face* coacts with a second
    rotatable tool, and wherein the tool-face of one of the tools may be
    repositioned about its center relative to the cooperating tool-face.


CLS 72/196
TXT With cooperating complementary (e.g., conjugated) tool face:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 whose tool face* coacts with another
    tool-face, wherein one tool-face has a protuberance extending from said one
    tool toward the work, and the other tool-face has an indentation receding
    from the work into said other tool, and the protuberance of one tool
    interfits (or tends to interfit) with the indentation of the other tool.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the patents in this subclass disclose gear-like
    tools that transversely corrugate work passing therebetween, see Figures
    accompanying this note, in which Figure 1 illustrates such structure and
    Figure 2 illustrates a typical transversely-corrugated product.





CLS 72/197
TXT With cooperating roller:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 whose tool-face co-acts with a roller*.


CLS 72/198
TXT With cooperating allochiral tool-face:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 whose tool-face* coacts with another
    tool-face, wherein the tool-faces are reversely congruent (i.e., mirror
    image-like) in their entirety.


CLS 72/199
TXT BY USE OF ROLLER OR ROLLERLIKE TOOL ELEMENT:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising apparatus including,
    or method employing, a roller* tool or a roller-like tool* to deform work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclass 158 for rolling of metal parts
    combined with independent fusion bonding of the parts; and subclasses
    235.2+ for simultaneous rolling and fusion bonding of the parts.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 363+ for a press forming or press reshaping means for nonmetal
    including an endless (e.g., roll, etc.) forming surface.


CLS 72/200
TXT With modification or control of temperature of work, tool, or machine:

    Subject matter under subclass 199 including a step of, or means for,
    changing or regulating the degree of heat content of the work, the tool or
    any part of the deforming instrumentality wherein the tool functions.

    (1)     Note.  See Notes (1) and (2) under the definition of subclass 128.


CLS 72/201
TXT Including cooling:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the degree of heat content is
    lowered.


CLS 72/202
TXT By means (other than a tool) modifying temperature of work:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the changing or regulating of the
    degree heat content is performed by something that is not a deforming tool.


CLS 72/203
TXT With cutting of work or product:

    Subject matter under subclass 199 wherein the tool is combined with a
    cutter.

    (1)     Note.  Patents disclosing cutting placed as originals in this
    subclass are limited to that cutting acceptable into this class (72) in
    accordance with section VI B of this class.


CLS 72/204
TXT By composite cutting-deforming tool:

    Subject matter under subclass 203 wherein the deforming tool and the cutter
    are rigidly connected together such that movement of the tool is always
    accompanied by movement of the cutter.

    (1)     Note.  See search notes under subclass 464 of this class for
    listing of other subclasses providing for composite cutting-deforming tools.


CLS 72/205
TXT Including tautening of work during deformation (e.g., "tension bridle"):

    Subject matter under subclass 199 including means specifically disclosed as
    applying a force tending to elongate the work.

    (1)     Note.  To be included herein, a patent must specifically disclose
    that the work is placed under tension; for example, by pulling the work
    through a deforming station, or by retarding the movement of work to a
    deforming station, or by exerting force sufficient to stretch or elongate
    the work.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein are disclosures known as "bridling
    apparatus" or "tension bridle" means, wherein the work passes over one roll
    and under another roll in an undulant path similar to that found in the
    disclosures of subclasses 160+ and then passes to the bite of a roller
    couple. In this subclass, however, the metal is not stressed by such rolls
    acting alone; instead, the movement of the work is retarded by reason of
    the flexing produced thereby (and other factors), whereby that portion of
    the work lying between the bridle and a "downstream" roller-couple is
    tautened and deformed.


CLS 72/206
TXT With nonroller metal-deforming station:

    Subject matter under subclass 199 including at least two separate deforming
    instrumentalities, wherein one such instrumentality does not include a
    "roller*".


CLS 72/207
TXT Including rectilinearly moving tool cooperating with single roller:

    Subject matter under subclass 199 wherein the work is deformed by a first
    tool-face that moves to-and-fro in a straight line, and a second tool-face
    that is the surface of a roller*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    192,    for a similar arrangement of tools wherein the roller is replaced
    by a "flying tool".


CLS 72/208
TXT With tool inside hollow work:

    Subject matter under subclass 199 including an additional tool means that
    acts on an inside surface of hollow work*.


CLS 72/209
TXT Comprising plug acting on longitudinally moving work:

    Subject matter under subclass 208 wherein the work* moves in the direction
    of its major dimension (i.e., extending along the longitudinal centerline
    of the hollow work*) and wherein the tool comprises a core that
    substantially fills the interior of the hollow work.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass disclose structure similar to that
    of subclass 97 except that in this subclass (208) the work does not rotate
    about its centerline, nor does the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97,     and see (1) Note above.


CLS 72/210
TXT Mounted on travelling, work-supported carriage:

    Subject matter under subclass 199 wherein the tool element and all the
    structure on which the tool is mounted are held against gravity by, and
    guided for movement relative to, stationery work.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a disclosure of a device that deforms a
    rail as it rides along that rail.

    (2)     Note.  The disclosure of a patent placed in this subclass clearly
    indicates that the deforming instrumentality is supported by the work.


CLS 72/211
TXT Mounted on manually maneuverable carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 199 wherein the tool is supported by a tool
    carrier* that is adapted to be moved relative to the work by the hand of an
    operative.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is the locus of patents disclosing a
    "hand-tool" used for restoring the original curvature of an automobile body
    or fender by manipulating the tool over dents and irregularities of the
    automobile.


CLS 72/212
TXT With work forcer offset from, and relatively movable between, spaced
    rollers:

    Subject matter under subclass 199 including a group of two rollers
    separated from each other, and a third tool, between which group and tool
    the work is placed, and provided with means for moving the roller group
    and/or the third tool with respect to the other toward the work and into a
    position wherein the third tool lies in the space separating the rollers,
    thus deforming the work.

    (1)     Note.  The axes of the rollers of the device disclosed in this and
    the indented subclass are either fixed with respect to each other or they
    are so connected that movement of one roller axis causes a corresponding
    movement of the other roller axis so that a plane through the roller axes
    at any given time is parallel to or coincident with the original plane.

    (2)     Note.  The patents of this subclass (212) disclose the rollers
    moving toward the other tool and/or toward each other on both sides of the
    other tool.


CLS 72/213
TXT With use of means to move work forcer:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 including driver means to effect movement
    of the third tool toward and into the space separating the roller tools.


CLS 72/214
TXT Comprising tool movable relatively to stationary work portion during
    deformation:

    Subject matter under subclass 199 whose tool moves bodily (i.e., its axis
    moves) to deform one part of the work while another part thereof remains
    immobile as disclosed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    293+,   for disclosure of work-gripping clamp and work forcer wherein the
    work forcer is not a roller.


CLS 72/215
TXT Along a curved path:

    Subject matter under subclass 214 wherein the movement of the tool axis
    follows a continuously bending line.


CLS 72/216
TXT About a fixed pivot:

    Subject matter under subclass 215 wherein the path of the axis of the tool
    is confined to movement in an arc having a single center of curvature.


CLS 72/217
TXT Work between movable tool and pivot (e.g., sweep-arm bender):

    Subject matter under subclass 216 wherein the center of curvature is
    positioned so that work to be deformed is situated intermediate the center
    and the tool.

    (1)     Note.  The devices of this subclass are commonly referred to as
    "sweep-arm benders".


CLS 72/218
TXT With means to apply torque to movable tool:

    Subject matter under subclass 217 including means to turn the tool about
    its axis of rotation, wherein the turning force is exerted on the tool
    directly rather than through rolling engagement of the tool on the work.

    (1)     Note.  In the typical disclosure of this subclass a roller is
    mounted on a pivotable arm or lever, and torque is applied to the axle of
    the roller in addition to, or in substitution for, a force applied to the
    arm or lever.


CLS 72/219
TXT Including adjustable tool:

    Subject matter under subclass 217 wherein the distance from either the tool
    or the work to the center of curvature (i.e., center of the arc that the
    tool follows) may be modified.


CLS 72/220
TXT Along a straight path relative to stationary-cooperating tool:

    Subject matter under subclass 214 wherein the work is deformed by two
    coacting tools, one of which tools is immobile and serves as a support or
    back-up for the immobile part of the work, and the other of which tools
    moves in a rectilinear course during deformation.


CLS 72/221
TXT Plural passes spaced along axes of one roller of tool couple:

    Subject matter under subclass 199 including at least two groups of
    cooperating tool faces, each of which groups operates upon work moving
    sequentially between the tool-faces of each group, wherein one of the
    tool-faces of a plurality of such groups constitutes part of the same
    roller, each tool-face being apart from the other(s) lengthwise of the axis
    of the roller.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188,    for disclosure of axially spaced passes in a flying-tool-couple.


CLS 72/222
TXT With use of means to displace work laterally into next pass:

    Subject matter under subclass 221 including means for moving or guiding the
    work side wise of its direction of movement (i.e., parallel to the axis of
    said roller) after the work has been deformed by one group of tool-faces so
    that said work will then move between the tool-faces of a succeeding group.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227+,   for disclosure of structure wherein work is handled between
    successively acting plural roller-couples.


CLS 72/223
TXT Roller common to two tool couples:

    Subject matter under subclass 221 involving use of at least three tools*,
    forming at least two tool-couples, wherein one of the tools is a roller*
    which (a) cooperates with one of the other tools to comprise one tool
    couple*, or (b) cooperates with another of the other tools to form another
    tool-couple.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232+,   for disclosure of a similar "three-high" structure having generally
    cylindrical rollers.


CLS 72/224
TXT Included in roller cluster:

    Subject matter under subclass 199 including three or more cooperating
    rollers that form a roller-cluster*.

    (1)     Note.  See the search note under the definition of subclass 100 for
    a locus of disclosures involving use of a roller cluster or a tool cluster.


CLS 72/225
TXT Comprising diverse roller pairs:

    Subject matter under subclass 224 wherein the rollers are arranged in
    groups of two, each of the two rollers of a group being alike, with the
    rollers of one group being different from the rollers of the other
    group(s); and the axes of all the rollers lie in a common plane through
    which the work moves.

    (1)     Note.  The Figure accompanying this note illustrates a typical
    arrangement of rollers used in the disclosures of this subclass, and also
    shows a cross section of the shape produced thereby.



CLS 72/226
TXT Plural roller couples (e.g., successively or optionally usable):

    Subject matter under subclass 199 including more than one roller-couple* to
    deform work.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are disclosures wherein one roller
    couple is used to deform a particular workpiece and another roller couple
    is used, at the option of the operative, to deform the same workpiece again
    or to deform another workpiece. Subclasses indented hereunder, especially
    subclasses 234+, are the loci of disclosures wherein the same workpiece is
    deformed by two or more roller couples acting successively.

    (2)     Note.  A disclosure of a single roller couple used repeatedly on
    the same workpiece will not be placed in this subclass as an original
    patent, but will be placed on the basis of claimed structure.  For example,
    in some disclosures such repeated use is accompanied by a "screw down"
    adjustment between passes, for which adjustment subclass 248 is the locus.
    Other such disclosures may be accompanied by work-handling means, for which
    means subclasses 250+ is proper.

    (3)     Note.  In the definitions and notes of subclasses indented
    hereunder, the word "material" wherever used refers only to that metal
    which has emerged as product from a first-acting roller couple, and is to
    be entered as work into a second-acting roller couple.


CLS 72/227
TXT With material-handling between successive couples:

    Subject matter under subclass 226 wherein material is conveyed or guided
    from a first-acting roller couple to a second-acting roller couple.

    (1)     Note.  For a definition of the word "material", see (3) Note under
    the definition of subclass 226.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222,    for disclosure of structure wherein work is moved side wise of its
    original direction between passes.

    250+,   for disclosure of material-handling to or from a tool.


CLS 72/228
TXT Including optionally selectable work paths:

    Subject matter under subclass 227 wherein the material may be directed
    along one of a plurality of routes at the choice of a machine operative.

    (1)     Note.  For a definition of the word "material" see (3) Note under
    the definition of subclass 226.


CLS 72/229
TXT To reverse roll the workpiece:

    Subject matter under subclass 227 wherein during conveying or guiding, the
    material retains its original compass orientation but approaches the
    second-acting roller couple in a direction opposite to that in which it
    left the first-acting roller couple, whereby the trailing edge of product
    becomes the leading edge of work.

    (1)     Note.  For a definition of the word "material", see (3) Note under
    the definition of subclass 226.


CLS 72/230
TXT By curved guide (e.g., "loop return"):

    Subject matter under the subclass 227 including a passive means to limit or
    define the path of movement of the material to a route that is continuously
    bending without angles, whereby the direction of movement of the work into
    the second-acting roller couple is different from the direction of movement
    of the product of the first-acting roller couple.

    (1)     Note.  For a definition of the word "material", see (3) Note under
    the definition of subclass 226.

    (2)     Note.  In the disclosures of this subclass, the successive work
    portions usually travel through an arc of 180o extent, such that a
    workpiece of indeterminate length is looped, that is, one "upstream", work
    portion is moving in a first direction along a first path, while
    simultaneously another "downstream" work portion is moving in the opposite
    direction along a path parallel to the first path.


CLS 72/231
TXT Changing orientation or direction of work:

    Subject matter under subclass 227 wherein the part of the material which is
    first presented to the second-acting couple differs from that which was
    first presented to the first-acting couple, or the same portion is
    presented in a different manner (e.g., inverted), or any part of the path
    of the material between the roller couples is altered.

    (1)     Note.  For a definition of the word "material", see (3) Note under
    the definition of subclass 226.


CLS 72/232
TXT Including one roller, common to two roller couples (e.g., three-high mill):

    Subject matter under subclass 226 wherein a particular roller cooperates
    with one roller to comprise one roller couple and/or cooperates with
    another roller to comprise another roller couple.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are patents generally referred to
    as "three-high mills".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223,    for similar structure wherein a first-acting work-engaging area is
    axially spaced from a second-acting area along one of the roller.


CLS 72/233
TXT Including roller shiftable between successive passes of work:

    Subject matter under subclass 232 including means to move, or to permit
    movement of, said particular roller adjacent to the one roller or to the
    other roller to form first the one roller couple and then the other roller
    couple alternatively.

    (1)     Note.  A disclosure wherein the particular roller is shifted from
    one roller to the other roller at the election of the operative will fit
    the definition above since, regardless of the frequency or infrequency or
    shifting, each such shift forms first one and then another roller couple.


CLS 72/234
TXT Including successively acting roller couples:

    Subject matter under subclass 226 wherein a plurality of roller couples are
    positioned so that product emerges from the bite (i.e., between the
    rollers) of a first roller couple* and is entered as work into the bite of
    a second roller couple.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227,    for disclosure of structure for handling material between
    successive roller couples.


CLS 72/235
TXT Comprising relatively inclined successive couples:

    Subject matter under subclass 234 including a first-acting roller couple
    and a second-acting roller couple positioned so that, when viewed along the
    direction of work movement, the axes of the roller couples overlie in
    crossing relationship (i.e., their projections intersect on a plane
    perpendicular to the line of sight).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162,    for disclosure of similar structure used to deflect bodily moving
    work.


CLS 72/236
TXT With cleaning or conditioning of tool, or lubrication of tool or machine:

    Subject matter under subclass 199 including a step of, or means for,
    removing foreign matter from the tool*, or preparing (e.g., by changing or
    maintaining the characteristics of) the tool for deformation, or for
    applying a friction-reducing medium to the work-engaging surface of the
    tool or to an instrumentality in which the tool operates.


CLS 72/237
TXT With carrier for roller couple or tool couple:

    Subject matter under subclass 199 including means to hold the rollers* of a
    roller couple* or the roller-like tools* of a tool couple* in position to
    engage and deform work passing therebetween.

    (1)     Note.  A patent claiming merely a named housing for a named
    roller-couple, and also claiming a guide for handling work or product will
    be placed as an original in subclasses 250+.

    (2)     Note.  For the purpose of this and indented subclasses, the term
    "roller cluster" should be considered as equivalent to "roller couple".
    Thus, a carrier for, or roller of, a roller cluster should be understood to
    be proper for these subclasses on the same basis as similar structures of a
    roller couple.


CLS 72/238
TXT With replacement of tool:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 including structure clearly disclosed as
    being for the purpose of facilitating or accomplishing removal and/or
    introduction of one or both the tools of a tool couple.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    483,    Tool Changing, subclasses 30+ for a rotary spindle machine tool
    combined with a tool transfer means.


CLS 72/239
TXT By means to replace tool:

    Subject matter under subclass 238 wherein the structure performs the
    removal and/or introduction of a tool.


CLS 72/240
TXT With variation of bite of roller couple during deformation:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 including a roller-couple* and means to
    move the axis of one of the rollers with respect to the axis of the other
    roller to change the spacing between the rollers while work is being
    deformed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11.8,   for metal deforming by rolling, including sensing of work thickness
    and variation in roller couple spacing responsive to such sensing.


CLS 72/241.2
TXT Including back-up for roller:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 wherein at least one of the rollers of a
    roller-couple is supported against movement at right angles to the axis
    thereof by means located between the ends of the work-engaging surfaces of
    the rollers in contact therewith.

    (1)     Note.  The roller engages the work and lies between the work and
    the back-up means.  Pressure exerted by the work in resisting deformation
    is transmitted through the roller to the back-up means, rather than being
    wholly absorbed by the bearings of the roller.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163,    for disclosure of similar back-up means in deflecting roller
    structure.


CLS 72/241.4
TXT With means to relatively vary back-up force along roller axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 241.2 wherein the roller support between the
    ends of the roller includes provision to vary the force transmitted to the
    deforming roller.


CLS 72/241.6
TXT Hydraulic or pneumatic force appliers spaced along roller axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 241.4 wherein the provision of the back-up
    means to vary force transmitted thereby comprises a relatively movable
    cylinder and piston in which fluid or gas under pressure is placed.


CLS 72/241.8
TXT Means to apply bending moment to roller or back-up roll:

    Subject matter under subclass 241.4 wherein the back-up is also a roller,
    and including means to apply to either the deforming roller or the back-up
    roll or a torque about an axis intersecting that roller at a right angle.

    (1)     Note.  The purpose of torque application herein is generally to
    maintain the straightness of the deforming roller, rather than to stress
    the roller to which torque is applied.


CLS 72/242.2
TXT Load bearing, equal size pair of back-up rolls:

    Subject matter under subclass 241.2 wherein the back-up comprises first and
    second rollers of approximately the same diameter, positioned such that
    their axes are parallel to each other and to the axis of the deforming
    roller and such that they are close to, but not touching each other, so
    that the supported deforming roller fits between them and they receive
    equal shares of the reactive force of the deforming load.


CLS 72/242.4
TXT And second stage, equal size pair of back-up rolls:

    Subject matter under subclass 242.2 wherein at least one of the back-up
    rollers is in turn supported by first and second rollers of approximately
    the same diameter (which may be different from the diameter of the primary
    back-up rolls) positioned such that their axes are parallel to each other
    and to the axis of the deforming roller and such that they are close to but
    not touching each other, such that the supported back-up roll fits between
    them and they receive equal shares of the force of the supported back-up
    roll.

    (1)     Note.  One of the second stage back-up rolls may also serve to
    receive force from a second back-up roll.


CLS 72/243.2
TXT Including reaction roll:

    Subject matter under subclass 241.2 wherein the deforming roller supporting
    means includes a roller for engaging the deforming roller and preventing
    the deforming roller from moving in a direction normal to the roller axis
    and parallel to the surface of the workpiece being deformed thereby.


CLS 72/243.4
TXT Equal size pair of reaction rolls:

    Subject matter under subclass 243.2 including a first roller for engaging
    the deforming roller to prevent the roller from moving forwardly and a
    second roller for engaging the deforming roller to prevent the roller from
    moving rearwardly, wherein the first and second rollers are approximately
    equal in diameter.


CLS 72/243.6
TXT Irregular, convex, or hollow back-up roll:

    Subject matter under subclass 241.2 wherein the back-up comprises a roller
    wherein (1) the work engaging surface is of distinct, different diameters
    along its length, (2) the work engaging surface is of a first diameter at
    its axial center and gradually tapers to lesser diameters at its axial work
    engaging extents, or (3) wherein the interior thereof is void.


CLS 72/244
TXT With interposer (e.g., wedge or gag) between tool and pressure applier:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 including means urging the tools of a
    tool couple toward each other, wherein said means includes an element lying
    intermediate a portion on the axis of a rotating tool and a portion of the
    tool urging means, which element moves parallel to the tool axis or
    parallel to the direction of work movement to reposition one roller
    relative to the other.

    (1)     Note.  This definition is intended to exclude a "screw down"
    adjustment, per se, for which "screw down" subclass 248 is provided.

    (2)     Note.  The structure described permits a quick or a fine adjustment
    of the spacing between rollers.


CLS 72/245
TXT Including fluent-driven tool support:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 including means to reposition one of the
    tools of a tool couple with respect to the other, wherein said
    repositioning means is moved by a fluid motor.


CLS 72/246
TXT Including resiliently urged tool support:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 including means to reposition one of the
    tools of a tool couple with respect to the other, wherein said
    repositioning means is elastically biased.


CLS 72/247
TXT Including means to position tool along axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 including means to reposition one of the
    tools of a tool couple with respect to the other by moving it lengthwise of
    its axis of rotation.


CLS 72/248
TXT With "screw down" to adjust bite of tool couple:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 including means to reposition one of the
    tools of a tool couple with respect to the other, wherein the axes of
    rotation of the tools lie in substantially the same plane, and the means
    includes a threaded member rotatable about a line substantially
    perpendicular to the axis of at least one tool and lying in, or parallel
    to, said plane.


CLS 72/249
TXT With means to drive tool:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 which, as claimed, includes means to
    apply driving force (i.e., torque) to the roller(s) tending to turn the
    roller(s) about the axis (or axes) thereof.


CLS 72/250
TXT With handling of, or guiding of work or product relative to tool:

    Subject matter under subclass 199 including structure to move or position
    either (a) work to be presented to a tool couple* or (b) the product of a
    tool couple.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is disclosure of means for moving
    the same work repeatedly through the zone of operation of a tool couple.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227+,   for disclosure of work-handling between successive tool couples.


CLS 72/251
TXT By endless belt or conveyor roll:

    Subject matter under subclass 250 wherein the work-handling means includes
    a material-engaging surface that is on, or part of, either an integral or
    concatenated band which band moves in a closed loop about a plurality of
    separated, noncoaxial pulleys or sprockets, or wherein the work-handling
    means includes a work-engaging element of a configuration similar to that
    of a roller*, which element does not deform the work.


CLS 72/252
TXT By reciprocating or oscillating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 250 wherein the work-handling means moves
    to-and-fro along a single path, at least one of which movements occurs
    during handling of the work to cause a corresponding movement of work.

    (1)     Note.  Disclosures in this subclass are not limited to means for
    moving work directly into the bite of a roller couple, but also include
    means for lifting and/or lowering the work laterally of the direction of
    movement into the roller couple.


CLS 72/252.5
TXT Roller or roller-like tool-element of particular configuration:

    Subject matter under subclass 199 wherein the tool-element is of a
    specified or irregular physical shape.


CLS 72/253.1
TXT BY EXTRUDING THROUGH ORIFICE:

    Subject matter under class definition comprising means for, or a step of
    using means for, squeezing metal by applied pressure through and out of a
    continuous periphery shape-imparting orifice* in an otherwise closed
    chamber (generally called a "container"), or past the most constricted
    section of a constricted passageway* leading from the otherwise closed
    chamber.

    (1)     Note.  See section VI, A, of this class regarding assembly.  The
    present subject matter is, as there pointed out, an exception to the
    general rule that assembly is excluded from this class.  For instance,
    sheathing a cable by extruding metal around it is classified here, as in
    subclass 268.

    (2)     Note.  Extruding through an orifice, as here defined, is also known
    as "die expressing" or "spurting".

    (3)     Note.  Extrusion is one of the "closed die" operations (i.e., those
    employing a closed perimeter shape-imparting orifice, passageway, or closed
    cavity into and/or through which work is forced).  Wire-drawing through a
    closed die is found in subclasses 274+.  Residual closed die combinations
    such as "push-drawing", "shell-drawing", and "closed die forging" are in
    subclasses 343+.

    (4)     Note.  Tool structures which are unique to extruding are classified
    in this and indented subclasses, e.g., bridge-mandrel-die means in subclass
    269, containers in subclass 272, and rams in subclass 273.  On the other
    hand, dies and mandrels, which by their nature are considered to be usable
    otherwise in metal deforming practice, are found with the residual tools in
    subclasses 462+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54+,    for extrusion in which a fluent medium serves as the pressure tool
    means.

    274+    and 343+, for operations other than extruding for forcing metal
    through an orifice or into a passageway.

    467+,   for an extrusion die, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 183 for apparatus to shape molten
    glass by extruding.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 450.1 for apparatus for
    edible laminated product making, including an extrusion former and
    downstream laminating means.

    100,    Presses, for a press structure of general utility which is not
    provided for here or in some other class.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    47 for a residual method of making (including sheathing) an electrical
    conductor of indefinite length; and subclasses 244.11+ for a process of
    extruding combined with laminating downstream of the shaping zone.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 451+ and 459+ processes of continuously
    casting metal; and subclasses 418+ for corresponding apparatus.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 50+ and 602+ for electric heating of
    metal combined with its working.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 176.1+ for a process of extruding nonmetallic plastic material
    not otherwise provided for.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, especially subclass 41 for processes
    of forming articles from particulate material including metal particles,
    including forming a body of powder before sintering by extrusion followed
    by a heating step of effect sintering; and subclass 67 for similar
    processes where heat is not applied after the extrusion step.


CLS 72/254
TXT With cutting:

    Method or means under subclass 253.1 including a step of, or means for
    cutting* which is not excluded by section VI, B of this class.

    (1)     Note.  Splitting a workstream on a bridge mandrel or a
    multiapertured extrusion die is considered to be part of the extrusion
    process and not cutting, and is found in disclosures of subclasses below,
    particularly subclasses 261 and 269.

    (2)     Note.  If it is evident that a slug is punched out during a
    piercing operation the patent is placed here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256,    for extrusion combined with billet piercing by plastic deformation
    and without removal of material, when the piercing occurs as a distinct and
    separate metal deforming operation.

    264+,   for extrusion combined with billet piercing by plastic deformation
    and without removal of material when the piercing occurs as a distinct and
    separate metal deforming operation and when the piercing is accomplished by
    a mandrel as a part of or in connection with extrusion.

    324+,   for other types of metal deformation combined with cutting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 308 for extrusion apparatus for nonmetals combined with means to
    sever the product.


CLS 72/255
TXT Severing product from stock or residue:

    Method or means under subclass 254 including a step of, or means for,
    cutting which detaches a product of extrusion from a remaining coherent
    parent body of material left behind the said product by the extrusion
    operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324+,   and particularly subclasses 331, 334, and 338, for severing a
    product of another type of MD from stock or residue.


CLS 72/256
TXT With metal-deforming other than by extrusion:

    Method or means under subclass 253.1 for effecting a metal-deforming
    operation of a type other than and in addition to an extrusion operation.

    (1)     Note.  Forging to a particular shape, whether intentional or not,
    as the result of incomplete extrusion, is considered to be part of the
    extrusion process and not another metal-deforming operation.  Leaving
    unexpressed in the extrusion chamber a compacted residue having the shape
    of the occupied portion of the chamber (even when for the purpose of
    heading or bottoming extrusion product, for instance) is not a separate
    forging operation, and consequently is not considered proper subject matter
    for this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Search this class, any appropriate area above, e.g.,
    subclasses 68, 130, or 206, for the metal shaping operation provided for
    there, combined with extrusion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254+,   for billet piercing accomplished or accompanied by cutting, as by
    punching out a slug.

    264+,   for billet piercing accomplished by an extrusion mandrel as part of
    or in connection with extrusion.


CLS 72/257
TXT With product handling:

    Method or means under subclass 253.1 which comprehends stripping, ejecting,
    or otherwise transporting or receiving the die-formed product of the
    extrusion operation (not the stump or other residue) from the deforming
    apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    361,    for product handling associated with another type of closed die
    apparatus.

    419+,   for another type of metal-deforming apparatus combined with means
    to handle work or product, and see the notes thereunder for handling
    devices, per se.


CLS 72/258
TXT Expressing polymetallic-layered product:

    Method or means under subclass 253.1 for producing solely by the process of
    extrusion of an article or material consisting of layers composed of
    different elemental metals or alloys.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for coating of metal followed by metal deformation.


CLS 72/259
TXT By plural impellers operating into one extrusion chamber:

    Method or means under subclass 253.1 in which the squeezing means comprises
    a plurality of distinct force applying instrumentalities, (e.g., plungers)
    working cooperatively into a common work confining chamber for extrusion of
    material therefrom.


CLS 72/260
TXT Expressing nonuniform cross section or nonlinear product:

    Methods and means under subclass 253.1 for extruding a product which (a)
    varies longitudinally, with respect to its flow through the orifice, in
    cross-sectional size, shape, or axial orientation (without regard to a
    closed bottom on an otherwise tubular extruded article or a shaped head
    remaining as a residue in the chamber), or (b) is curved in its
    longitudinal extent, that is, the produce deviates from straight.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64+,    for twisting preformed axially moving work.

    259,    for a plural impeller device for extruding this type of product.


CLS 72/261
TXT Expressing plural products:

    Methods and means under subclass 253.1 utilizing or including (a) a
    plurality of coupled machines each capable of independently extruding at
    least one formed product, or (b) a single machine which is adapted to
    produce mutually distinct extruded products from a common work-confining
    chamber simultaneously through a multiorificed die.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262     and 268, for production of a multicored extrusion, e.g., a
    plurality of separate wires embodied within a single lead sheath.

    468,    for a multiorifice die arrangement, per se.


CLS 72/262
TXT By rotating impeller means:

    Method or means under subclass 253.1 wherein the work is forced toward an
    extrusion orifice by means which comprises work-contacting spirally (e.g.,
    helically) arranged ribs and/or grooves, rotatable relative to the
    container wall about the spiral's axis, or by an equivalent rotatably
    progressive surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    467+,   for a die, per se.


CLS 72/263
TXT Nonaxial movement of die, ram, mandrel, or container:

    Method or means under subclass 235.1 in which any one of an
    orifice-containing die*, a pres-sure-applying plunger, an internal-forming
    means (as defined in subclass 264), or a container, is movable in a
    transverse direction (relative to normal material flow), with regard to its
    static operative position or to its operative movement during normal
    material flow.

    (1)     Note.  The side movement may be for any operative purposed, e.g.,
    charging or loading the apparatus, stripping or ejecting the product, or
    assembling, adjusting, or lining up parts of the apparatus, such as the die
    and/or container.  See the search note below.

    (2)     Note.  The mere closing of split dies is not included; in the
    concept of nonaxial movement, the entire die assembly must be laterally
    movable. Also, mere rotation about a central axis is not included; however,
    eccentric rotation having a side wise component is.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257,    for a method or means including stripping or otherwise handling, a
    product, where such is positively claimed; this operation may frequently
    include use of a laterally movable element as here indicated.


CLS 72/264
TXT Utilizing internal-forming means (e.g., mandrel) or core tube (e.g., wire
    guide):

    Method or means under subclass 253.1 utilizing or including a member which
    projects axially into or adjacent to, but in either case is spaced from the
    wall of, the extrusion orifice or passageway and cooperates therewith to
    provide a cored annular orifice through which a generally tubular product
    may be extruded, the interior configuration of the product corresponding to
    the outer configuration of the member.

    (1)     Note.  The member is generally known in the extrusion art as a
    "mandrel".  If it constitutes a tubular core guide means, as defined under
    subclass 268 below, it is generally called a "core tube".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    462+,   for a mandrel structure, per se.


CLS 72/265
TXT Movable longitudinally in ram:

    Method or means under subclass 264 utilizing or including apparatus in
    which a plunger constitutes pressure-applying means and the
    internal-forming means is a mandrel, and both the plunger and mandrel point
    in the direction of the extrusion flow and in line therewith, the mandrel
    being slidable within and relative to the plunger during some portion of
    the operational cycle of the machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266,    for a mandrel which is merely longitudinally adjustable in the
    plunger, the relation between the two being otherwise fixed during
    operation.


CLS 72/266
TXT Integral with ram:

    Method or means under subclass 264 in which a plunger constitutes
    pressure-applying means and is integrally formed with or rigidly joined to
    the internal-forming means for simultaneous operational movement therewith.

    (1)     Note.  Patents involving longitudinal adjustment between the
    plunger and mandrel where the relation between the two is fixed during
    operation are included.



CLS 72/267
TXT Single element ("impact extrusion" type):

    Method or means under subclass 266 wherein the extrusion chamber comprises
    a cavity in a cuplike member, into which cavity a deforming element
    constituting a combined plunger and internal-forming means is movable, the
    cavitated member being closed to work material flow except for an annular
    orifice formed between the cavity wall and the element periphery when in
    operative position so that upon movement of said element further into said
    cavity the work flows backward around the element as a tubular product
    corresponding in shape to the internal configuration of the cavitated
    member and the external configuration of the element.

    (1)     Note.  The element (usually a plunger), the chamber means, the
    bottom, per se, of the chamber means, or any combination of these parts may
    move to perform the pressing operation.

    (2)     Note.  The operation here performed is known by several names,
    among which are: Impact extrusion, Backward extrusion, and Cold Squirting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257,    for a device of this type in combination with a stripper or ejector.

    362+,   for forging into a closed die which may result in backward flow but
    without extrusion.


CLS 72/268
TXT Core tube:

    Method or means under subclass 264 in which the member is a tubular guide
    means, other than the extrusion orifice or passageway, which extends from
    outside the closed chamber means into the chamber at a point remote from
    the orifice and then from the chamber axially into or adjacent the orifice
    or passageway and is adapted to allow an elongated core means, such as a
    wire, to be passed therethrough, around which a sheath like extruded
    product may be formed.

    (1)     Note.  An extrusion device including a core tube is found in many
    of the subclasses above indented under subclass 253.1, and see also
    subclass 270 below for a disclosure of the same when the claimed invention
    lies in a work supply feature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    51 for extruding a nonmetallic sheath around an electric conductor of
    indeterminate length.


CLS 72/269
TXT Bridge mandrel:

    Method or means under subclass 264 in which the member is a mandrel which
    is supported by bridge pieces extending from the mandrel across the rear
    (i.e., the chamber end) of the orifice or passageway.

    (1)     Note.  The bridges split the work stream, which is then reunited
    autogenously by pressure prior to extrusion through the orifice.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes a bridge mandrel die unit, per se.


CLS 72/270
TXT Work supplying:

    Method or means under subclass 253.1 which utilizes or includes means for
    storing work material and/or feeding or transporting work material to the
    deformation chamber.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes "charging" an extrusion container by
    pouring in molten metal which autogenously welds to an earlier residue and
    then solidifies in situ.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262,    for a rotatable impeller extruder with work supply.

    263,    for side wise movement of a specified portion of the apparatus,
    which movement may be for the purpose of permitting or facilitating
    charging.

    419+,   as well as appropriate other subclasses under the several types of
    metal deformation in this class or other work handling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, for conveyors, per se.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, for conveyors, per se.

    221,    Article Dispensing, for an article dispenser, per se.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, in particular subclasses 754+ where
    billet turnover devices can be found and compare with those devices in
    Class 198, Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 373+.


CLS 72/271
TXT Pressure or velocity conditioning:

    Method or means under subclass 253.1 wherein the extrusion through the
    orifice occurs under a particular absolute or relative pressure or velocity
    of, or for the apparatus, the work or the product during deformational
    operation.


CLS 72/272
TXT Container and/or support therefor:

    Apparatus under subclass 253.1 comprising closed chamber means, or cover or
    closure means therefor, or structure for supporting or axially moving the
    closed chamber means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263,    for the same plus a nonaxial component of container movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 469 for a spaced-wall metal receptacle not
    specially adapted to use in extrusion apparatus.


CLS 72/273
TXT Ram or ram element:

    Apparatus under subclass 253.1 comprising a reciprocatable plunger or
    equivalent structure for applying extrusion pressure directly on work
    located and confined within the container, or a detail or element of such
    structure (e.g., a dummy block).

    (1)     Note.  Because of the peculiar nature of extrusion, extrusion rams,
    and elements thereof are classified here. For metal-deforming tools
    generally, including plunger means otherwise usable, see subclasses 462+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 214+ for a reciprocating press construction;
    and subclasses 295+ as the residual locus for pressure surface elements.


CLS 72/273.5
TXT Indirect extrusions:

    Subject matter under subclass 253.1 in which the orifice or constricted
    passageway is formed through a member which, during and for the squeezing
    operation, extends within the container and is telescopically movable
    relative thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264+,   for a member provided with an extrusion orifice or restricted
    passageway and another member, generally a mandrel (or a core tube in
    indented subclasses 268) spaced from the wall of the first member to
    cooperate therewith to define an annular space through which tubular
    (generally) product may be extruded; and in which member may be
    telescopically movable within the container.


CLS 72/274
TXT BY PULLING WORKPIECE THROUGH CLOSED PERIPHERY DIE (E.G., ROD-, TUBE-, OR
    WIRE-DRAWING):

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising means including, or a
    step of using means including, an orifice* and/or passageway*, through
    which work is drawn by the application of external tensile force.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus of this subclass, and the indented subclasses, is
    usually intended to operate upon work having an initial dimension that is
    only slightly larger than the opening in the closed die to reduce the
    cross-sectional area of the work, with or without altering the basic
    cross-sectional shape thereof.

    (2)     Note.  In regard to the underlined portions of (1) Note,
    immediately above, note that subclasses 127+ provides for alteration of
    cross-sectional shape of travelling work (e.g., troughing subclasses 176+)
    which may also be accomplished by pulling through a closed die.

    (3)     Note.  For the purpose of patent placement in subclass 274, and the
    subclasses indented thereunder, a work gripping and/or moving means will be
    treated in accordance with the criteria set forth in (1) Note under the
    definition of subclass 276.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for subject matter in the "twisting" area which may also utilize a
    closed periphery die.

    127,    for "skelping", or longitudinally troughing, a bodily moving
    workpiece by using a closed periphery die without reducing the
    cross-sectional area of the strip or "skelp".

    293,    for metal deformation by a stationary nondeforming work-gripping
    claim and movable closed periphery die.

    343+,   for metal deformation by a closed die(s) moved along a stationary
    workpiece, and/or for push-drawing, i.e., altering the cross-sectional area
    of a rod or tube by pushing it through a closed die.


CLS 72/275
TXT With cutting:

    Subject matter under subclass 274 comprising a step of, or means for
    cutting which meets the requirements stated in the class definition.  (See
    section VI, B of this section).

    (1)     Note.  For inclusion in this class, the cutter in every instance
    must be associated with metal-deforming apparatus, and must cut (sever,
    incise, punch, shape, grind, etc.) material which is the subject of the
    metal-deforming operations performed by the associated apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324+,   for the combination of cutting and metal-deforming means associated
    with conventional apparatus or operations (e.g., punch press, bending,
    etc.).


CLS 72/276
TXT Producing a nonuniform product:

    Subject matter under subclass 274 which functions to form a relatively
    rigid elongated product* having at least one of the following
    characteristics:  (a) the central longitudinal axis of the product does not
    constitute a straight line; or (b) at two spaced points along the central
    longitudinal axis, the transverse cross sections of the product (whether
    solid or hollow) are not identical in one of the following respects: (i)
    size, (ii) shape, (iii) wall thickness, or (iv) orientation about the
    centerline.

    (1)     Note.  Many products are either (a) intentionally left "pitted",
    "scored", etc., for purposes such as esthetics effect or lubrication, or
    (b) intentionally, or unintentionally, partially deformed (usually at the
    leading end) when they are gripped, pulled, or otherwise handled.  If such
    deformations are claimed, then placement herein is proper, even though such
    deformation will later become "waste" if placement is otherwise appropriate
    for subclasses 274+.  If, however, such deformation is unintentional,
    and/or disclosed but not claimed, then such patents will be found in
    subclasses further indented under subclass 274.

    (2)     Note.  In the figures below, the tubular workpiece illustrates
    items (ii), (iii), and (iv) under part (B) of the definition of this
    subclass.



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59,     for a method of or means for corrugating tubular work utilizing
    fluent material as a "tool".

    136,    for deflecting to form a helical coil or tube including the
    thinning of a portion of the work.

    240,    for varying the bite of a roller couple during deformation.

    260,    for method or means for forming a non-uniform product by extruding.

    318,    for die-forging the end of indeterminate length work.


CLS 72/277
TXT With movement of discrete workpiece angularly, laterally, or in a reverse
    direction:

    Subject matter under subclass 274 including active means operative either
    before or after the work* has engaged the closed die element to direct said
    work (a) back through the same closed die, (b) to a second closed die, or,
    (c) to a metal-deforming tool that is not a closed die.

    (1)     Note.  The notes under the definition of subclass 419 contain a
    comprehensive listing of search areas related to work and/or product
    handling.


CLS 72/278
TXT Utilizing plural metal-deforming tools:

    Subject matter under subclass 274 comprising two or more metal-deforming
    instrumentalities, or the steps of using the same.

    (1)     Note.  The second or subsequent metal-deforming tool may, or may
    not, be of the type peculiar to subclass 274.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 33+, 592+, 650, and 700+ for method or
    apparatus appropriate to Class 29, which may include tension drawing as one
    of the steps or means in an assembling or similar operation.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 120, 213+, 255+, 301+, 357, 404+, 549+, 598+,
    and 618+ for a cutting device having plural cutting stations.


CLS 72/279
TXT Varying speed or continuous workpiece through successive tool stations:

    Subject matter under subclass 278 which functions to move one portion of a
    workpiece through one of the instrumentalities at a speed which is
    different from that at which another portion is moved through another of
    the instrumentalities.

    (1)     Note.  Typical patents in this subclass include wire-drawing
    disclosures which provide for successively smaller closed dies, with
    rotating drums therebetween, and drive means to pull the wire (by rotating
    the successive drums) at increasing speeds as the wire is reduced and
    elongated at each smaller closed die.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    288     and 289, for a metal-deforming devicehaving a single drum driven at
    a varying or uniform speed, respectively.


CLS 72/280
TXT Accumulating work between successive tool stations:

    Subject matter under subclass 278 including means providing slack in moving
    work, or temporarily storing work, after it has passed one instrumentality
    and before it is deformed by an additional instrumentality.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    288     and 289, for a metal-deforming device having a single drum driven
    at a varying or uniform speed, respectively.


CLS 72/281
TXT Including noncoaxial closed dies:

    Subject  matter under subclass 278 wherein the longitudinal axis of the
    orifice or passageway of one die is other than a straight-line continuation
    of the longitudinal axis of at least one other orifice or passageway.

    (1)     Note.  The provision of one closed die that is pivotally mounted
    with respect to a second closed die is sufficient for placement in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277,    for a metal-deforming device which may include closed dies.

    285,    for a metal-deforming device having a single closed die that may be
    pivoted with respect to other elements of the metal-deforming device.


CLS 72/282
TXT All closed dies coaxially aligned:

    Subject matter under subclass 278 wherein a line forming the longitudinal
    axis through one orifice or passageway is coincident with the line forming
    the longitudinal axis through each and every other claimed orifice or
    passageway.


CLS 72/283
TXT Including a mandrel inserted within a hollow workpiece:

    Subject matter under subclass 278 including an internal die (male die,
    punch, push-rod, etc.) which is positioned inside a generally-tubular
    workpiece, at least a portion of said internal die entering a portion of
    the orifice or passageway, so that said internal die determines at least
    some internal dimension of the tubular workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    253.1+  and 343+, for a combination including die and mandrel units in the
    extruding and in the residual closed die operations, respectively.


CLS 72/284
TXT And applying a "pushing" force:

    Subject matter under subclass 274 which functions to assist the "drawing"
    of the work by propelling the work, or the die, relative to the pulling
    means.

    (1)     Note.  The additional means of this subclass may (a) "push" the
    work into the closed die, or (b) move the closed die over the work (both of
    these operations being frequently described in the art as "threading" the
    die) before, during, or after the action of the pulling means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    343+    and 418, for a metal-deforming device which may include means to
    "push" work toward a closed die, or a cooperating tool, respectively.


CLS 72/285
TXT Movable die:

    Subject matter under subclass 274 including means to move or permit
    movement of the die with respect to a fixed point.

    (1)     Note.  The active or permissive movement of the closed die may
    occur continuously or intermittently during the drawing of the workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281,    for a metal-deforming device including plural closed dies, one of
    which may be movable, and see (1) Note thereunder.

    293,    for combination including nondeforming work gripper and a
    relatively movable die.


CLS 72/286
TXT With heating or cooling:

    Subject matter under subclass 274 including means which, directly or
    indirectly, raise or lower the temperature of all or part of the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    342.1+, for heating or cooling of other metal- deforming devices, and see
    the search notes under that subclasses (342.1+).


CLS 72/287
TXT Utilizing specific work-moving means:

    Subject matter under subclass 274 including a definitely described seizing
    and tensioning means which is effective to draw work through the die.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    419+,   and the search notes thereunder, for work or product handling means
    in a metal-deforming device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, in general, for
    work-handling or product-handling method or apparatus.

    414+,   Material or Article Handling, subclasses 14+ for stock pulling
    and/or pushing devices, and see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 72/288
TXT Varying speed of moving work:

    Subject matter under subclass 287 including means operative to increase or
    decrease the rate of movement of the workpiece, at will or cyclically,
    during drawing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    425,    for a metal-deforming device including means to vary the speed of
    either work or product.


CLS 72/289
TXT Rotating a drum, roll, sheave, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 287 including a driven rotating element which
    engages the workpiece and moves it by winding it around the rotating
    element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278+,   for plural metal-deforming tools, one of which may include a drum
    die combination.


CLS 72/290
TXT Interrelated work gripper and carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 287 including a movable member which supports
    either or both the work and a gripper (a nondeforming work-gripping clamp),
    and including additional means which interconnects and may move said
    movable member and said work or said gripper.

    (1)     Note.  Engagement of the gripper(s) with the work may start the
    additional means, movement of the carrier may cause the gripper to engage
    or disengage the work, cessation of movement of the carrier may cause the
    gripper to engage or disengage the work, or any combination of the above
    may characterize the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    422,    for a combination that does not claim the gripper and moving means
    in combination with a closed periphery die.


CLS 72/291
TXT Maintaining a "straight-line draw":

    Subject matter under subclass 287 including structure which prevents the
    work seizing and tensioning means, or the work itself, from canting,
    rotating, tilting, or otherwise moving out of the desired path of movement.

    (1)     Note.  The above described structure may be positioned on either
    side, or both sides, of a die; and, it may restrain the path of movement of
    the work, the gripper, the carrier, the elements of the motive means, or
    any combination of the above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    428,    for work-handling means including a work guide in combination with
    conventional apparatus (e.g., a metal-deforming press).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 35 and 256 for a workholder having
    interrelated parts which are restricted to "straight-line" movements.


CLS 72/292
TXT BY TIGHTENING FLEXIBLE BAND OR CHAIN ABOUT WORK:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising means, or a method of
    using means, which includes a cable, a strap, or series of articulated
    links which engages and surrounds the major portion of the so-engaged
    periphery of work and, when placed under tension, applies deforming force
    to the work.

    (1)     Note.  For placement in this subclass, the band or chain must
    encircle more than half the periphery of the workpiece (the remainder may
    be engaged by a fixed die or support); if the flexible tool means engages
    less than half the periphery of the work, it is regarded as a
    "yieldable-face" tool, for subclasses 396+, such tools requiring an opposed
    face coacting tool to effect compression or crushing of work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54+,    for a compression of work by surrounding fluent medium.

    396+,   for a tool having a flexible or yieldable face portion opposed by
    another tool, and see (1) Note above.

    402,    for a plurality of tools concurrently movable radially inwardly
    against work.

    465.1+, for a flexible or yieldable tool, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 1+ for process or apparatus for tautening a
    binder about material to compress it.


CLS 72/293
TXT BY USE OF NONDEFORMING WORK-GRIPPING CLAIM AND RELATIVELY MOVABLE CLAMP,
    TOOL OR WORK FORCER:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising means, or the step of
    using means, which includes a plurality of coacting distinct work-engaging
    instrumentalities, and means to move or guide at least one such
    instrumentality with respect to another such instrumentality along a
    predetermined path; one of said instrumentalities having a plurality of
    opposed solid jaws or surface elements which are made effective, by
    movement of one or more of said jaws or surface elements, to grip a portion
    of work fictionally and to hold it securely during an operation of the
    class type.

    (1)     Note.  The work-gripping clamp in subclasses 293+ may be an
    ordinary clamp; some form of actuating means is required to distinguish a
    clamp from a mere work-stop or work-supporting socket.  Self-gripping
    clamps are included, (i.e., those which close in response to slight and
    initial movement of the work).

    (2)     Note.  For placement in subclasses 293+, it must be clear that at
    least one work clamp has solely a clamping function (i.e., any disclosure
    of work deformation by closure of the clamp jaws, or of work slippage with
    respect to the jaws, or of work slippage with respect to the jaws during
    deformation, indicates that the "clamp" actually constitutes a tool couple
    or a tool element for original placement elsewhere in this schedule).  A
    nondeforming (per se) clamp may, however, be provided with deforming or die
    surface elements or portions distinct from the clamp jaws proper, such
    arrangements being found in subclasses 320+ and 322+ indented hereunder.
    For placement in subclasses 293+, the clamp must be claimed, but it need
    not be recited as a deforming instrumentality (e.g., it may have an
    auxiliary function as a steadying element).  If deformation is effected by
    relative motion between two or more clamps, placement is in subclasses
    295+; If a clamp moves work relative to a tool, placement is in subclasses
    308+; if the clamp holds work against the force of an actuated tool,
    placement is in subclasses 316+.

    (3)     Note.  For placement of a process patent in subclasses 293+, the
    claim should recite "clamping" of work or an equivalent expression (such as
    "holding", if based upon a disclosure of clamping or refer to clamped,
    etc., work in addition to reciting the operative deforming step.

    (4)     Note.  A work gripper or clamp may be found in many combinations
    placed in preceding subclasses, e.g., subclasses 274+ (wire-, rod-, or
    tube-drawing). These subclasses (293+) are the residual loci for a
    metal-deforming combination comprising, per se, nondeforming work clamp or
    gripping work mover.  Any work clamp or gripper found in claimed
    combinations below subclasses 293+ is not solely a clamp but has another
    function, such as crushing or otherwise directly deforming work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80+,    for a rotatable work-holding form which may comprise clamp
    structure.

    127+,   for a work gripper used to pull work through deflecting apparatus.

    274+,   for a work gripper used to pull work through a closed die.

    350+,   for a blank holder in deep-drawing apparatus (which generally
    allows controlled slippage of work).

    419+,   for a work or product handling device, generally.

    457+,   for a work constrainer in metal-deforming apparatus.

    459     and 460, for a work clamp without a co-acting metal-deforming tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses for a work holder of clamping
    type; and subclasses 87+ for the combination with a tool couple element
    (such as a tool guide).


CLS 72/294
TXT With cutting:

    Subject matter under subclass 293 comprising a step of, or means for, a
    systematic cutting* of the material which is the subject of metal
    deformation.

    (1)     Note.  See section VI, B of this class for the relationship between
    Class 72 and other classes involving cutting for a statement of the subject
    matter included in this class, and for examples of included and excluded
    combinations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for mechanical cleaning or descaling which may involve cutting
    (e.g., grindings, scrapping, machining).

    324+,   for cutting associated with residual metal-deforming operation or
    apparatus, and see the notes thereto for references to all pertinent
    cutting subclasses in the Class 72 schedule.


CLS 72/295
TXT By individually nondeforming clamps:

    Subject matter under subclass 293 wherein at least two of said relatively
    movable work-engaging instrumentalities each have a plurality of opposed
    solid jaws or surface elements which are made effective, by movement of one
    or more of said jaws or surface elements, to grip a portion of work
    frictionally and to hold it securely.

    (1)     Note.  The function of each individual clamp is to immobilize a
    portion of work; their relative motion, however, induces internal stresses
    of deforming magnitude in intervening portions of work, to effect bending,
    twisting, stretching, etc.  The relatively movable clamps are thus
    equivalent to a tool couple.  Such tool couples, because of their unique
    effect, are collected in this subclass area, ahead of "clamp and tool" and
    "clamp and work forcer" combinations.

    (2)     Note.  The combination of individually nondeforming, relatively
    movable work clamps and a tool of more conventional type (i.e., which
    deform work at its point of contact therewith) is found below in subclasses
    296+; the usual operation of such a combination is "stretch forming" (see
    also subclass 305).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305,    for plural relatively stationary work clamps and a relatively
    movable tool.

    308,    for a work clamp employed as an active tool (i.e., as a work
    forcer).


CLS 72/296
TXT With co-acting relatively movable tool:

    Subject matter under subclass 295 comprising a third instrumentality or the
    use of an instrumentality designed and intended to engage work with
    deforming force, and means effective to change the location of said third
    instrumentality with respect to two or more of said work-gripping
    instrumentalities, during an operation of the class type.

    (1)     Note.  The third instrumentality may consist of a more conventional
    tool, e.g., a die or forming block against which work is drawn or wrapped
    while being maintained under tension by the clamps.  Many such
    stretch-forming devices are included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305,    for spaced (e.g., fixed) clamps and relatively movable tool.

    309,    for a movable work clamp and coacting, relatively movable tool.

    323,    for a work clamp and plural coacting tools.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 87+, for a work clamp combined with a tool
    couple element (such as a tool guide).


CLS 72/297
TXT With means to actuate tool:

    Subject matter under subclass 296 utilizing a power-transmitting element
    effective to drive said further instrumentality during an operation of the
    class type.

    (1)     Note.  When the coacting tool is an actuated member, as in this
    subclass, the work-gripping clamps may be either driven or passive members,
    but in any case they must be capable of relative motion with respect to
    each other (e.g., they may be independently pivotally mounted).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305,    for spaced (e.g., fixed) work clamps and relatively movable tool.


CLS 72/298
TXT With means to rotate clamp about fixed axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 295 involving means for mounting one said
    instrumentality for bodily turning motion about a stationary pivotal
    bearing, and a power-transmitting element for forcibly turning said
    instrumentality during an operation of the class type.

    (1)     Note.  Similar devices, but lacking pivotal bearing structure, may
    be found in subclass 303, the turning effect is limited by a short curved
    or bowed trackway in most instances.



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80+,    for deformation of rotating work which may be held in a rotary
    clamp or chuck.

    303,    for a metal tire upsetter of the like, and see (1) Note above.

    310,    for deformation by the pivotal motion of a work clamp with respect
    to a passive tool.

    371,    for coiling or twisting procedure which may involve a disclosed
    rotary work clamp or gripper.


CLS 72/299
TXT About axis intersecting work-gripping regions of two clamps (e.g.,
    twisting):

    Subject matter under subclass 298 wherein said pivot line extends directly
    between the opposed jaws or surface elements of the work-gripping
    instrumentalities.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass generally relates to twisting a gripped rod or
    bar along its axis, for examples of "offset" twisting or "warping", see
    subclass 298 and subclass 295 above.  For similar operations involving
    axially moving work, see subclasses 64+ above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64+,    for twisting axially moving work.

    127+,   for deflecting bodily moving work.

    371,    for a coiling or twisting method.

    381+,   for an offset-face-tool complex capable of twisting work (e.g., a
    crankshaft).


CLS 72/300
TXT With interrelated clamp closer and clamp mover:

    Subject matter under subclass 295 utilizing means to move one or more of
    said clamp jaws or surface elements to effective (i.e., work-gripping)
    position, which means cooperates significantly with the means to move said
    movable instrumentality.

    (1)     Note.  For placement in this subclass, there must be structure to
    interrelate the clamp-closing and clamp-moving means; spring-biased or
    self-actuated clamps (responsive to initial movement of the work) do not
    meet this requirement.

    (2)     Note.  If metal deformation is accomplished by the closing of the
    clamp, the latter does not qualify as a "work-gripping clamp" for
    subclasses 293+ but constitutes instead an opposed-faced tool couple.

    (3)     Note.  If the clamp is so adjusted or controlled as to allow
    slippage of the work during metal deformation, it is regarded as a tool
    element or tool couple for placement elsewhere in the schedule.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312+,   for interrelated clamp closer and tool mover.

    417,    for interrelated tool mover and blank-holder mover.


CLS 72/301
TXT With bodily motion in fixed path:

    Subject matter under subclass 295 wherein the means to move or guide said
    movable instrumentality is effective to restrict the motion of said
    instrumentality to the same path whenever the motion occurs.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded, for example, would be a device wherein a work
    clamp is guided and moved solely by such manipulable means as a chain or a
    block and tackle, so that its path of motion is not positively restricted
    to a definite line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    295,    for metal deformation by two relatively movable work-gripping
    clamps one of which is freely manipulable, and see (1) Note above.

    306+    and 308+, for metal deformation by a bodily movable clamp and a
    coacting tool other than a clamp.


CLS 72/302
TXT Substantially direct approach or recession (e.g., stretching):

    Subject matter under subclass 301 wherein the restriction of the path of
    motion of said movable instrumentality is to a straight or slightly curved
    line which if extended would intersect another work-gripping
    instrumentality.


CLS 72/303
TXT Along curved path (e.g., tire upsetting):

    Subject matter under subclass 302 wherein the restriction of the path of
    motion is to a nonlinear or slightly curved line.

    (1)     Note.  A typical device of this subclass is a tire upsetter
    comprising clamps for gripping spaced portions of a metal tire and means
    for urging the clamps toward each other along a path corresponding
    generally to the curvature of an average tire.

    (2)     Note.  For apparatus affording truly pivotal motion of a clamp in
    metal deforming, see preceding subclasses 298+; in such devices, there need
    be no translatory motion of the clamp; the deformation is usually of a
    bending or twisting nature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    298+,   for metal deformation by rotation of a work-gripping clamp about a
    fixed axis with respect to a fixed clamp, and see (2) Note above.


CLS 72/304
TXT With work-distorting clamp:

    Subject matter under subclass 293 wherein the jaws of said work-gripping
    instrumentality are specifically modified for the purpose of temporarily
    deflecting or springing work from its initial shape while it is held in
    said jaws during an operation of the class type.

    (1)     Note.  This type of clamp is employed to counteract, forestall, or
    prevent possible undesired deformation of untreated portions of the work,
    such as may occur in flanging the periphery of a circular plate in a
    step-by-step manner.

    (2)     Note.  The deflection of distortion effected by the clamp is only
    temporary (i.e., within the elastic limit of the work material), see (2)
    Note under subclass 300 above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    701     and 702, for distortion prevention, generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 176 for means to distort work temporarily for a
    cutting operation.


CLS 72/305
TXT With plural-spaced clamps:

    Subject matter under subclass 293 wherein the work-gripping instrumentality
    cooperates with another work-gripping instrumentality cooperates with
    another work-gripping instrumentality located at a fixed distance therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  For original placement in this subclass, there must be
    structure to effect friction gripping engagement on significantly spaced
    portions of the same workpiece; e.g., adjacent two distinct edges of a
    sheet or at different points along the length of a rod, usually accompanied
    by a metal-deforming operation adjacent each clamped portion or between two
    clamped portions.  One clamp may, however, have merely a steadying or
    stabilizing function.

    (2)     Note.  Some "stretch formers" are found in this subclass; i.e.,
    those in which the work clamps are relatively fixed during metal
    deformation.



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    295+,   for method or machine employing plural relatively movable work
    clamps to deform work.


CLS 72/306
TXT Plural or complex apparatus (e.g., with plural operations):

    Apparatus under subclass 293 comprising (a) three or more relatively
    movable tools, or (b) additional metal-deforming apparatus of a type other
    than that of subclass 293 and which itself constitutes subject matter for
    this class (72).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is the locus for patents relating to a plural
    tool couple* or a tool complex* and involving a work clamp which is
    nondeforming, per se. Typically, the machine performs a plurality of
    distinct metal deforming operations on the clamped work.  Also included are
    all combinations of two or more metal-deforming machines not provided for
    above, wherein a work clamp is a claimed element of one machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    295+,   for a possible combination of two or more metal-deforming machines,
    wherein one machine effects deformation by relatively movable clamps.


CLS 72/307
TXT With means to advance elongated work (e.g., pipe elbow crimper):

    Device under subclass 306 comprising structure arranged to propel stock
    material or a relatively long blank in the direction of its length toward
    the zone of the metal-deforming operation.

    (1)     Note.  A typical device of this subclass crimps successive portions
    of an intermittently fed tubular blank to form a pipe elbow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    405.01+, for means to feed work between plural tool stations.

    419+,   for means to handle work or product.


CLS 72/308
TXT Clamp is active metal-deforming element:

    Subject matter under subclass 293 which accomplishes metal deformation, the
    forcible movement of said work-gripping instrumentality.

    (1)     Note.  In devices of this subclass, deformation is effected by the
    clamp's forcible movement of clamped work against one or more tool
    elements.  For a device involving a movable work clamp used merely to
    advance or index work between operations, see subclass 311.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80+,    for means to hold and rotate work during metal deforming by tool.

    149+,   for metal deforming by moving work holder form and work-contacting
    wiper.

    274+,   for moving work gripper in rod-, tube-, or wire-drawing.

    295+,   for a method or machine employing two or more relatively movable
    work clamps, any or all of which may constitute active metal-deforming
    element.

    311,    for clamp which is movable while holding work, and see (1) Note
    above.


CLS 72/309
TXT With coacting movable tool:

    Subject matter under subclass 308 wherein the coacting work-engaging
    instrumentality also moves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    381+    and 394+, for somewhat similar apparatus which lacks a nondeforming
    work-gripping clamp.


CLS 72/310
TXT Clamp rotatable about fixed axis (e.g., bending brake):

    Subject matter under subclass 308 wherein the movement of said
    work-gripping instrumentality consists of turning with respect to a
    stationary pivot line.

    (1)     Note.  Conventional sheet metal bending brakes employ relatively
    pivoted clamp and bending tool or apron.  The pivoted-clamp type is found
    in this subclass; for the fixed clamp type, see subclasses 316+ below.
    Bending brakes and other devices without work clamps will be found in
    subclasses 380+ and following subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    298+,   for metal deformation by two relatively rotatable work-clamps.

    303,    for metal deformation by the approach of two work clamps along an
    arcuate path.

    316+,   for metal deformation by a tool movable against work held in a
    fixed clamp, and see (1) Note above.


CLS 72/311
TXT Movable clamp:

    Subject matter under subclass 293 utilizing means to move or to guide the
    motion of said work-gripping instrumentality from one orientation or
    location to another while in effective work-gripping condition.

    (1)     Note.  For placement in this subclass, the combination must
    comprise a work clamp which is mounted for rotary or translatory movement
    during its actuated (closed) condition.  The clamp may be, for example, one
    of a plurality of clamps on the turret, dial, or other work conveyor of a
    multi-tool station press; and it is not in motion during deformation of the
    gripped work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    308+,   for metal deformation by movable clamp and coacting tool.

    405.01+, for means to move work between plural tool stations.

    419+,   for means to handle work or product.


CLS 72/312
TXT With interrelated clamp closer and tool mover:

    Subject matter under subclass 293 wherein means to move one or move of said
    clamp jaws or surface elements to effective (i.e., work-gripping)
    positions, cooperates significantly with the means to move said movable
    instrumentality.

    (1)     Note.  Self-actuated, or camming-type clamps have no "actuating
    means" other than the work itself, hence, are not placeable in this
    subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The cooperation characteristic of this subclass may be an
    interlock (e.g., to prevent release of work while a tool is in motion), or
    a timing effect, or actual joint, or interconnected drive means for clamp
    closer and tool mover.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300,    for interrelated clamp actuator and clamp mover.

    350+,   for interrelated tool mover and yielding blank-holder in a
    deep-drawing press.

    417,    for interrelated tool mover and blank-holder actuator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 374+ for interrelated work immobilizer (e.g.,
    clamp) and tool actuator in a cutting machine.


CLS 72/313
TXT Jaw actuator driven by tool or tool holder:

    Subject matter under subclass 312 wherein said movable instrumentality or
    means rigid therewith is arranged to transmit actuating force to move one
    or more clamp jaws or surface elements to effective (i.e., work-gripping)
    position.

    (1)     Note.  In a device of this type, the movable clamp jaw may be
    yieldably mounted on the tool holder or press ram and arranged to engage
    the work in advance of the moving tool.

    (2)     Note.  Metal drawing presses frequently employ a work clamp or
    "blank-  holder" which is actuated by the tool slide or press ram.  Such an
    arrangement is proper subject matter for this subclass, provided there is
    no disclosure of work slipping or deformation in the blank holder; cf., (2)
    and (3) Notes under subclass 300.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 385+ for clamp actuator driven by tool or tool
    holder in a cutting machine.


CLS 72/314
TXT Mechanical actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 312 involving the use of a lever, cam, gear,
    or other rigid force-modifying power-transmitting element to move a clamp
    jaw toward effective (i.e., closed) position.


CLS 72/315
TXT Cam or toggle:

    Subject matter under subclass 314 wherein said rigid power-transmitting
    element constitutes a portion of a cam or toggle as defined in Class 74,
    subclasses 567 and 520, respectively.


CLS 72/316
TXT Clamp structure constitutes sole initial metal-deforming force reaction
    means (i.e., is passive tool):

    Subject matter under subclass 293 wherein said opposed solid jaws or
    surface elements, together with any integral or rigid extensions thereof,
    are designed and intended to furnish the entire resistance to movement or
    deformation of work when the latter is subjected to forcible engagement by
    the coacting relatively movable instrumentality, at least during the
    earlier portion of an operation of the class type.

    (1)     Note.  A device of this subclass employs a work clamp as the
    passive element of a tool couple (i.e., the clamp functions as anvil or
    die); in some other types of metal-deforming devices a work clamp, if
    present, may contribute little or no reaction force and serve merely as a
    positioning means for work.  (See subclass 293 for disclosures of such
    devices).

    (2)     Note. Clamp structure within the meaning of the subclass definition
    may comprise, for example, an actuated work-gripping jaw cooperating with
    the press bed or anvil itself; the bed or anvil then constitutes an
    integral extension of clamp jaw proper.

    (3)     Note.  Other structure may be provided to assume more or less of
    the reaction force subsequent to initial displacement of work material; for
    auxiliary shape-imparting (die) structure rigid with the clamp, see
    subclasses 320+ and 322+.

    (4)     Note.  Many of the devices in the preceding subclasses employ
    clamps which meet the limitations of this subclass; a search on this
    feature will therefore involve most of subclasses 293+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67+,    for deformation of work held or clamped by various means and
    operated upon by a tool rotating or gyrating about a motion center within
    the confines of the work.


CLS 72/317
TXT With plural selectively usable clamps (e.g., tube flarer):

    Subject matter under subclass 316 comprising two or more instrumentalities
    each capable of gripping work, only one of which is employed at any given
    time to clamp work during an operation of the class type.

    (1)     Note.  Typical of this subclass is a tube-flaring tool having
    clamping jaws which include a plurality of semicircular mating recesses of
    varying sizes along the inner facing edges of the jaws, the selected pair
    of mating recesses constituting a clamp for accommodating a tube to be
    flared.

    (2)     Note.  Not all tube flarers employ nondeforming work clamps.  If
    work is deformed upon tightening of the jaws, the combination may be
    placeable in subclass 356 or 357 if a closed die is involved, otherwise in
    subclasses 394+ as an opposed face tool complex*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    for plural selectively usable fixed tools for cooperation with an
    orbiting or rotating tool.


CLS 72/318
TXT Deforming indeterminate-length work:

    Subject matter under subclass 316 utilizing structure adapted to hold or
    present to the action of a metal-deforming instrumentality a portion of a
    workpiece of unrestricted length.

    (1)     Note.  Typical apparatus of this subclass employs a reciprocatory
    heading punch to upset the projecting end of a rod or wire which is fed
    from the rear into a pair of opposed gripping jaws.  (A bolt or nail header
    also usually comprises cutoff means which, if claimed, would place the
    combination originally in preceding subclass 294).

    (2)     Note.  Any claimed deformation of work by the closing of the
    "gripping jaws" prior to or concurrently with the action of the heading
    punch, is evidence that the "jaws" are actually part of a tool complex*,
    for placement in subclasses 353.2+ or subclasses 394+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    293+,   for similar apparatus wherein the work-holding means constitutes a
    nondeforming clamp.

    353.2+, for deformation of work by a closed die tool complex* wherein two
    or more tools coact to grip partially deformed work for further treatment
    by a third tool.

    357,    for actuated split die and coacting closed die.


CLS 72/319
TXT With pivotal tool (e.g., sheet metal bender):

    Subject matter under subclass 316 wherein said co-acting relatively movable
    instrumentality is restrained to rotation about a fixed axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    298+,   for relatively pivoted nondeforming work-gripping clamps.

    310,    for pivoted work clamp (i.e., tool) and coacting fixed tool.

    387+,   for offset tool face couple comprising a pivoted tool element
    (e.g., a pipe or rod bender without claimed clamping means).


CLS 72/320
TXT With die surface extending from clamp jaw:

    Subject matter under subclass 319 utilizing an element integral with or
    rigidly attached to a jaw of said work-gripping instrumentality, said
    element having a work-shape-imparting surface which is designed and
    intended to be engaged by, and to restrain movement of, portions of work at
    some time during an operation of the class type, said surface being
    nonplanar and/or offset or inclined with respect to the work-engaging face
    of said jaw.

    (1)     Note.  A flat surface extending from a clamp jaw and initially
    contacted by work, so that it serves mainly or entirely as a support and
    has little or no shaping function, is not regarded as a "die surface" for
    this subclass; see DIE* in the Glossary.  A press bed on which work is held
    down by clamping fixtures would usually constitute a passive M.D. tool for
    subclass 316.

    (2)     Note.  A bevelled or rounded edge on a clamp jaw, unless it has a
    disclosed shaping function, is not regarded as a die surface.  Many clamps
    are cut away or bevelled merely for clearance purposes, in such devices as
    sheet metal bending brakes, pipe benders, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322+,   for a work clamp having die surface extension, combined with active
    metal- deforming tool having other than pivotal motion.

    462+,   for a metal-deforming tool of specific configuration.


CLS 72/321
TXT Curved die surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 320 wherein said work-shape-imparting surface
    comprises at least one arcuate or nonplanar portion.

    (1)     Note.  A device of this subclass may be employed to bend pipe about
    a fixed radius forming block, or to form a sheet metal cornice molding,
    where other than a simple sharp angle bend is desired.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains disclosures of some metal sheet
    folders which function to bend the sheet double about a thin wedge or plate
    extending from a clamp jaw.  It is presumed, in the absence of detailed
    disclosure, that the folding edge is rounded to some extent, to avoid
    cracking or cutting the work.



CLS 72/322
TXT With die surface extending from clamp jaw:

    Subject matter under subclass 316 utilizing an element integral with or
    rigidly attached to a jaw of said work-gripping instrumentality said
    element having a work-shape-imparting surface which is designed and
    intended to be engaged by, and to restrain movement of, portions of work at
    some time during an operation of the class type, said surface being
    nonplanar, and/or offset or inclined with respect to the work-engaging face
    of said jaw.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) and (2) Notes under subclass 320 for discussion of
    "die surface".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    320+,   for metal deformation by die surface extension of work clamp and a
    co-acting pivoted tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 87+ for a work clamp or vise with
    nominally recited tool couple element.


CLS 72/323
TXT Plural die surface portions and co-acting tools:

    Subject matter under subclass 322 utilizing two or more
    work-shape-imparting areas extending from clamp jaw structure, and a
    relatively movable tool associated with each area and effective to force
    work against its associated shape-imparting area at some time during an
    operation of the class type.

    (1)     Note.  A device of this type is commonly used to bend the two end
    portions of a centrally clamped rod or bar into U-shaped form against
    cheeks on the clamp jaws.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400+,   for a similar tool arrangement (opposed face tool complex*) but
    without a claimed clamp.


CLS 72/324
TXT WITH CUTTING:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising method of or means for
    systematic cutting* of the material which is the subject of metal
    deformation.

    (1)     Note.  See section VI, paragraph B, of this class for the relation
    of this class to other classes involving cutting, for a statement of the
    subject matter included in this class, and for examples of included and
    excluded combinations.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder are the
    locus for (a) combinations of metal-deforming machines (or subcombinations
    thereof), or metal-deforming implements or tools; with actuatable cutters
    or organized cutting devices; and for (b) methods involving metal
    deformation and cutting, if not excluded by the class definition or
    provided for in preceding subclasses relating to specialized methods or
    apparatus (e.g., rolling, extrusion, etc.).

    (3)     Note.  The presence of sharp points or edges on tools is not
    sufficient to identify the tools as "cutters" for any cutting subclass in
    Class 72, unless as disclosed (a) they effect complete penetration of the
    work (with or without severance or removal of material), or (b) they effect
    a claimed cutting, incising, piercing, splitting, breaking, etc., as
    distinguished from mere deformation of material.

    (4)     Note.  A claimed tool for cutting and deforming metal, but
    constituting less than an organized apparatus (e.g., lacking actuating
    means or coacting tool, etc., is subject matter for subclass 464.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for cutting (e.g., grinding or turning), in mechanical cleaning
    combined with metal deformation.

    55,     for cutting combined with metal deformation by pressurized fluent
    material.

    70+,    for cutting combined with metal deformation by a tool rotating
    relatively to work about a motion center within work.

    129+,   for cutting combined with metal deformation by deflecting bodily
    moving work.

    185+,   for cutting with metal deformation by a "flying" tool.

    203+,   for cutting with roller or similar operation.

    254+,   for cutting with extrusion.

    275,    for cutting with rod, wire, or tube drawing.

    294,    for cutting with metal deformation by use of work-gripping clamp
    and relatively movable clamp or tool.

    464,    for a combined or composite metal-deforming and cutting tool; and
    see (4) Note to this subclass above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 33+ for a "combined machine" excluded
    from this class (72) for reasons outlined in section VI, B of this class.

    30,     Cutlery, for a cutting implement or a work-supported cutter.

    82,     Turning, for cutting rotating work.

    83,     Cutting, for method or apparatus for cutting in general; see the
    class definition and notes for the locations of disclosures of various
    kinds of cutting and combinations with other operations.

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, for breaking or tearing apparatus.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for a
    disclosure of cutting and deforming apparatus associated with a
    nail-driving device.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, appropriate
    subclasses for cutting of that class type.  The combination of cutting in a
    Class 408 manner with metal deforming of this class (72) will be found in
    this class.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, for other machining process or
    apparatus.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 289+ for apparatus for shaping or reshaping nonmetals not
    otherwise provided for combined with preform severing means.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 38+ for a process of sandblasting and
    subclasses 75+ for a machine for sandblasting.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for metal deformation associated with
    cutting in the art of fastener making, except as provided for in Class 408.


CLS 72/325
TXT By composite tool (e.g., piercing):

    Subject matter under subclass 324 wherein cutting is effected by means
    comprising a pointed or edged element rigidly attached to or constituting a
    portion of a disclosed metal-deforming tool*, which element engages work at
    some time during the disclosed motion of said tool or during the disclosed
    motion of an associated metal-deforming tool forming therewith a tool
    couple*, during which disclosed motion an operation of the class type is
    also performed upon the same work or upon metal material integral therewith.

    (1)     Note.  A composite metal-deforming and cutting tool may be either
    an actuated or a fixed tool, or there may be co-acting cutting edges on
    both elements of a metal-deforming tool couple.

    (2)     Note.  The cutting may take place before, during, or after a
    claimed deforming operation by said tool upon the same workpiece or upon
    integrally connected material (such as stock, partially treated work,
    undetached product portion, etc.).  It must in all cases be regularly
    associated with a deforming operation, i.e., in the same tool stoke, and
    not as an optional or alternative use of the tool.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass is the residual locus for patents directed to
    process or apparatus involving a composite tool which cuts by sawing,
    drilling, tearing, nipping, incising, puncturing, or other nonsheering
    action.  See following diagram for an example of a composite tool; (other
    examples in subclasses 327 and 330).

    (4)     Note.  See search notes under subclasses 464 of this class for
    listing of other subclasses providing for composite cutting-deforming tools.



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204,    for a roller-type composite tool.

    324,    340 and 341, for a nonshearing cutting device combined with a
    metal-deforming device, or for method involving such cutting and metal
    deformation.

    464,    for a composite tool, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 566.1+ for a cutter with noncutting work
    modifying means.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 596 for
    apertured or slit metallic stock which may be the product of a piercing
    operation.


CLS 72/326
TXT Shear-type:

    Subject matter under subclass 325 wherein said edged element and a coacting
    element having a generally conforming edge are arranged to engage opposite
    sides of work and to approach each other, with the edge on one element
    moving past, and in close and overlapping relationship to, the edge of the
    coacting element.

    (1)     Note.  A cutting tool couple must cut completely through work in
    the direction of tool advance to be regarded as a shear-type cutter for
    this or indented subclasses; no material need be detached, e.g., slitting
    or fringing is frequently done by shearing cutters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332+,   for the general combination of a shearing tool couple with a
    metal-deforming device or for method involving such cutting and metal
    deformation.


CLS 72/327
TXT With endless cutting edges:

    Subject matter under subclass 326 wherein the shearing edge on each of said
    elements defines a closed curve in a plane normal to the direction of
    motion of the movable element(s).

    (1)     Note.  The cutting effected by an endless edge shearing couple is
    variously termed "punching", "die-cutting", "blanking", "stamping out",
    etc.  In all cases, a discrete piece of material is detached (e.g., a
    blank, product, or waste) by a cut which encircles the detached piece, as
    indicated in the accompanying diagram.



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333+,   for an endless edge shearing tool couple combined with a
    metal-deforming device, or for the corresponding method.


CLS 72/328
TXT Utilizing stripper or ejector:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 comprising means for, or the use of means
    for, engaging, and thereby detaching or assuring the detachment of, a
    product, piece, or portion from a cutter which has produced or penetrated
    it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    344+,   for a stripper or ejector in a closed die metal-deforming
    apparatus.


    427,    for an ejector associated with a metal-deforming tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses under subclasses 78+ for a stripper
    or ejector in a cutting machine.


CLS 72/329
TXT Blank detaching:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein the cutting edges are so arranged
    with respect to the deforming face of the metal-deforming tool that they
    are effective to separate a discrete piece (as from stock material or a
    rough blank) prior to deformation of said discrete piece by said tool face.

    (1)     Note.  Substantially simultaneous engagement of work by shearing
    edges and metal-deforming tool faces is regarded as "blank detaching" for
    this subclass, for the blank is severed before any substantial amount of
    deformation has been performed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    330     and 337, for blank detaching by cut-off shears.

    339,    for precutting by severing means other than shears.

    366.2,  for blank detaching by endless edge shearing cutters which do not
    form part of a composite tool.


CLS 72/330
TXT Blank detaching:

    Subject matter under subclass 326 wherein the cutting edges are so arranged
    with respect to the deforming face of the metal-deforming tool that they
    are effective to separate a discrete piece (as from stock material or a
    rough blank) prior to deformation of said discrete piece by said tool face.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass typically involves cutting off a length of a
    metal strip, rod, or wire for subsequent deformation by a tool face rigid
    with the cutter (See diagram).



    Composite tool device for subclass 330.  Blank is severed from stack prior
    to deformation in same tool stroke.

    (2)     Note.  Substantially simultaneous engagement of work by shearing
    edges and metal-deforming tool faces is regarded as "blank detaching" for
    this subclass, for the blank is severed before any substantial amount of
    deformation has been performed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    337,    for similar blanking by a shearing tool couple prior to metal
    deformation by another tool couple.


CLS 72/331
TXT Severing (e.g., subdividing):

    Subject matter under subclass 326, note provided for in preceding
    subclasses, comprising the detachment of a discrete piece of material from
    stock, work, or a product of metal deformation.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass accommodates shearing operations by composite
    tool in which metal deformation is accompanied by cutting for such purposes
    as (a) reduction of scrap, (b) subdividing a multiple product, (c)
    notching, (d) detaching product from end of stock, or (e) squaring or
    trimming a rough blank, etc., as distinguished from the blank detaching
    from stock in subclass 330 above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    338+,   for metal deformation with associated severing by means other than
    shears.


CLS 72/332
TXT By shearing tool couple:

    Subject matter under subclass 324 comprising cutting by a plurality of
    coacting edged tool elements which are arranged to engage opposite sides of
    work, and to approach each other with the edge on one tool element moving
    past, and in close overlapping relationship to, the edge of another tool.

    (1)     Note.  For original placement in this subclass, the shears must cut
    completely through the work in the direction of tool motion, but severing,
    i.e., detachment of material, is not required (fringing and slitting is
    frequently effected by shearing).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    326+,   for a composite shearing and metal-deforming tool.


CLS 72/333
TXT With endless cutting edges (e.g., for punching a hole):

    Subject matter under subclass 332 wherein the shearing edge on each of said
    elements defines a closed curve in a plane normal to the direction of
    motion of the movable element(s).

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note under subclass 327.


CLS 72/334
TXT After final metal-deforming operation:

    Subject matter under subclass 333 wherein the cutting tools are arranged to
    operate on a portion of a product subsequent to the last deforming
    operation thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    338+,   for severing a discrete piece from material (which may be a final
    product of metal deformation) by cutting means other than shears.

    340,    for machining after final deformation (e.g., grinding, drilling,
    turning, etc.).


CLS 72/335
TXT Precutting (i.e., before metal deforming):

    Subject matter under subclass 333 wherein the cutting operation precedes
    any metal-deforming operation (a) in a sequence of method steps, or (b) in
    the disclosed operation of a machine.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is intended to accommodate any cutting by a
    tool of the type proper to subclass 333 which occurs (a) prior to the
    initial metal-deforming treatment on a workpiece, (b) prior to any
    deforming operation in the same operating cycle of a machine, or (c)
    "upstream" of metal-deforming tool stations in a progressive punch press or
    the like.

    (2)     Note.  The cutting which characterizes this subclass is usually for
    the purpose of punching out slugs of waste material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324,    for machining (drilling, grinding, etc.), prior to metal
    deformation.

    339,    for precutting other than by disclosed shearing with severance of a
    discrete piece.


CLS 72/336
TXT Blank detaching:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein the cutting effects complete
    severance of a discrete workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329,    for blank detaching by composite tool with endless cutting edge.

    330     and 337, for blanking detaching by shearing tools in a different
    environment.

    339,    for severing by nonshearing means prior to metal deformation.


CLS 72/337
TXT Blank detaching:

    Subject matter under subclass 332 wherein the cutting effects complete
    severance of a discrete workpiece prior to any deforming operation thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329     and 330, for blank detaching by shear-type composite
    metal-deforming and cutting tool.


CLS 72/338
TXT Severing a discrete piece from stock, work, or product:

    Subject matter under subclass 324, not provided for in preceding
    subclasses, wherein the cutting effects separation of a coherent portion of
    material from a parent body (such as stock, work, or product).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass in intended to accommodate the combination of
    metal deforming with means for, or a step of, detaching a piece of
    significant size from the material which is the subject of metal
    deformation, by a nonshearing type of cutting, e.g., sawing, breaking,
    tearing, nipping, etc., or by undisclosed or incompletely disclosed means,
    where it is evident that the separated portion is not intended to be
    reduced to chips or fillings by the severing operation.

    (2)     Note.  The use of a saw or milling cutter for the disclosed purpose
    of subdividing, or separating a coherent piece from stock, etc., is
    regarded as "severing" for the purposes of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324,    340 and 341, for machining associated with metal deformation.


CLS 72/339
TXT Precutting:

    Subject matter under subclass 338 wherein the severing precedes any
    metal-deforming operation.

    (1)     Note.  In addition to "blanking", this subclass may include
    trimming or squaring of stock or of a rough blank, subdividing of a
    multiple blank, etc., by nonshearing or undisclosed means, where it is
    evident that the cut portions are not reduced to chips or shavings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329     and 330, for precutting (prior to metal-deforming) by a shear-type
    composite tool.

    335+,   for precutting by a shearing tool.


CLS 72/340
TXT Machining after final metal deforming (e.g., grinding to size):

    Subject matter under subclass 324, not provided for in preceding
    subclasses, and involving the conversion of a portion of product of metal
    deformation into chips, filings, etc., subsequent to the last deforming
    operation thereon.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note under subclass 338 above for severing by a
    machining operation.


CLS 72/341
TXT Machining between plural metal-deforming operations:

    Subject matter under subclass 324, not provided for in preceding
    subclasses, and involving the conversion of a portion of a product of metal
    deformation into chips, filings, etc., and followed by another deforming
    operation on the unconverted portion of said product.

    (1)     Note.  The term "product of metal deformation" denotes any piece,
    blank, or supply of coherent material upon which an operation of the class
    type has been performed; a product of metal deformation may thus constitute
    "work" for a succeeding deforming operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324,    for machining or miscellaneous nonshearing cutting operation prior
    to metal deformation.

    340,    for machining after final metal deformation.


CLS 72/342.1
TXT With temperature modification of tool or of specified portion of work:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising means for or a step of
    localized heating or cooling of a tool* of a metal deforming device and/or
    of a limited and particularly denoted part of the work.

    (1)     Note.  The general heating or cooling of a machine or of work
    material is excluded from this subclass, and a disclosure thereof is to be
    placed with the class type of deforming method or apparatus claimed.

    (2)     Note.  The schedule of this class (72) does not distinguish
    generally between "hot" and "cold" work in patent claims, for this feature
    is not consistently specified in the claims.  Subclasses in certain areas
    of the schedule recognize heating or cooling as significant (see subclass
    286, for example, in the wire or tube drawing art).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8.5,    12.2, 16.4, and 18.3, for metal deforming with use of control means
    energized in response to an activator stimulated by a sensor responsive to
    the temperature of work or product.

    69,     for metal deforming by use of a tool acting during relative
    rotation about an internal center with modification or control of
    temperature of work, tool, or machine; or with lubrication thereof.

    128,    for metal deforming by deflecting with modification or control of
    temperature of work, tool or machine.

    200,    for metal deforming by a roller with modification or control of
    temperature of work, tool or machine.

    286,    for metal deforming by pulling a workpiece through a closed
    periphery die with heating or cooling.


CLS 72/342.2
TXT Cooling:

    Subject matter under subclass 342.1 comprising means for, or a step of
    localized cooling (i.e., lowering the thermal energy of) a tool* of a
    metal-deforming device and/or of a limited and particularly denoted part of
    the work.


CLS 72/342.3
TXT Of tool:

    Subject matter under subclass 342.2 comprising means for or a step of
    localized cooling of a tool* of a metal deforming device.


CLS 72/342.4
TXT And heating of tool:

    Subject matter under subclass 342.3 also comprising localized heating
    (i.e., raising the energy level) of the tool.


CLS 72/342.5
TXT And heating of work:

    Subject matter under subclass 342.2 comprising heating (i.e., raising the
    thermal level of the material being deformed).


CLS 72/342.6
TXT Distinct temperature modifications at distinct locations of workpiece:

    Subject matter under subclass 342.5 comprising provision to establish a
    thermal level at one portion of the material being deformed and at a
    different thermal level at a different portion of the material.


CLS 72/342.7
TXT Of tool:

    Subject matter under subclass 342.1 comprising means for or a step of
    localized heating or cooling of a tool* of a metal-deforming device.


CLS 72/342.8
TXT Preheating:

    Subject matter under subclass 342.7 comprising heating or cooling of a tool
    before application of the tool to the metal deforming action to prepare
    that tool to function in the manner as if it had previously been in
    operation.


CLS 72/342.92
TXT By electrical resistance heater within tool:

    Subject matter under subclass 342.7 wherein the tool is heated by a device
    intended for that purpose which device utilize its resistance to the flow
    of electrical current to raise the thermal level of the tool.


CLS 72/342.94
TXT Distinct temperature modifications at distinct locations of workpiece:

    Subject matter under subclass 342.1 comprising provision to establish a
    thermal level at one portion of the material being deformed and at a
    different thermal level at a different portion of the material.


CLS 72/342.96
TXT By passing electric current through work:

    Subject matter under subclass 342.94 including provision to pass
    electricity through the workpiece, to utilize the electrical resistance of
    the work to effect heating.


CLS 72/343
TXT BY USE OF CLOSED DIE AND CO-ACTING WORK FORCER (E.G., PUSH-DRAWING):

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising the use of a movable
    member and means to move, or guide the motion of, said member during an
    operation of the class type, said movable member being effective to
    forcibly propel or press work (a) into and through a work shape-imparting
    orifice*, or (b) into or within a passageway* or die cavity* having a
    closed perimeter definable in a plane normal to the direction of motion of
    said member, the work being moved by said member to such an extent that at
    least a portion of the work has impressed therein or thereon a shape which
    is substantially congruent with the edge of said orifice or with some
    portion of said perimeter.

    (1)     Note.  The term "movable" is used in a relative sense.  Either, or
    both of, the work-forcer and the shape-imparting structure may be movable
    during the deforming operation, and the work forcer may also constitute a
    closed die*.

    (2)     Note.  These subclasses (343) are the loci for original placement
    of all closed die apparatus and method patents, except those including an
    accompanying feature (such as cleaning, or lubrication, or cutting)
    provided for in preceding subclasses, or certain specific apparatus or
    techniques (such a metal deformation by pressurized fluid, or by extrusion)
    which have been selected for collection ahead of general "closed die"
    operations.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass (343) is the residual locus for a method of,
    or apparatus for, metal deformation into and/or within an open-ended
    passageway, as distinguished from a closed bottom die cavity (e.g., pushing
    a rod or tube through a die to reduce its diameter, or die-forging an
    automobile valve head while providing an open-ended die passageway for the
    formation of a stem portion of unrestricted length).  Some operations
    inaccurately called extrusion are properly classified in this subclass,
    wherein metal is not actually forced outwardly away from the die or past
    the most constricted portion of a passageway.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61+,    for the expansion of hollow work by fluid pressure within a die.

    127+,   for metal deformation by deflecting (e.g., bending, coiling,
    "skelping", or longitudinally troughing) bodily moving work, by passing it
    through a tool station which may include a closed die.

    253.1+, for extrusion through an orifice.

    274+,   for rod-, tube-, or wire-drawing by pulling through a closed die.

    293+,   for metal deformation by use of a nondeforming clamp and relatively
    movable tool.

    317     and 318, for a disclosure of closed die apparatus.

    352+,   for apparatus employing a closed die of the die cavity, or closed
    bottom type, as distinguished from a through die usable in extruding or
    wire-drawing.

    467+,   for closed die structure, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 394+ for coacting shaping surfaces for reshaping nonmetallic
    preforms; and subclasses 406+ for press forming apparatus for nonmetallic
    fluent materials, see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 72/344
TXT With stripping or ejecting from tool:

    Subject matter under subclass 343 comprising an instrumentality, or the
    step of using an instrumentality, which is effective to cause or to assure
    such relative motion between a product of metal deformation and a tool as
    to detach and remove said product from said tool.

    (1)     Note.  The instrumentality may be active or passive, e.g., it may
    be a fixed projection against which an article clinging to a retracting
    tool is struck and dislodged from the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    169, 250, and 257, for product handling, stripping, or ejecting
    associated with some other type of metal-deforming apparatus.

    328,    for a stripper or ejector associated with a composite (deforming
    and cutting) tool.

    361,    for product handling associated with closed die apparatus.

    419,    for means to handle product in metal-deforming apparatus.

    427,    for an ejector associated with metal-deforming apparatus.


CLS 72/345
TXT Timed with tool motion:

    Subject matter under subclass 344 comprising means for, or the step of
    utilizing means for, moving said instrumentality in a definite temporal
    relationship to the movement of said tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    417,    for timed relationship between tool motion and blank holder motion.

    421,    for timed tool and work moving means.

    426+,   for product handling means, including ejector, associated with
    metal-deforming apparatus.


CLS 72/346
TXT With work feeding:

    Subject matter under subclass 345 comprising means for, or the step of
    utilizing means for, advancing or guiding work to the tool zone, prior to
    an operation of the class type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    361,    for holding, handling, or guiding of work in connection with metal
    deformation by closed die apparatus.

    419,    for means to handle work in metal-deforming apparatus.


CLS 72/347
TXT Cup or shell drawing (i.e., deep drawing):

    Subject matter under subclass 343 wherein said movable member comprises a
    head or shoulder designed and intended to abuttingly engage work, and which
    head or shoulder is movable, while engaged with a first portion of the
    work, into and past said orifice or into a substantially cylindrical or
    parallel-sided work shape-imposing section of said cavity or passageway, at
    least some other portion of work material being pulled by said first
    portion into such forcible engagement with the wall of the orifice, cavity,
    passageway, as to have impressed thereon a shape corresponding to said
    engaged wall.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus of this subclass is intended to operate on work of
    initial dimension larger than the work-shaping opening.  The product may be
    a discrete cup or shell having the dimension of the opening, and with or
    without a flange, rim, or undrawn material left attached localized drawn
    portion such as a flanged opening (see diagram under subclass 350).

    (2)     Note.  Although the typical product is cylindrical in form,
    apparatus of this subclass may be used to draw a tapered object, if
    sufficient clearance is provided between plunger and draw ring
    (closed-die); the product may also be of interrupted or segmental form as
    determined by the initial shape or size of the blank.

    (3)     Note.  If the plunger merely pushes material into a die cavity
    without itself entering the cavity, the operation is closed die forging for
    subclass 352; if the plunger (or male die) enters the die cavity but does
    not reach a cylindrical or parallel-sided portion thereof while pulling
    work therewith (i.e., subclasses 347+), see subclasses 358+.  Deep drawing
    may be accompanied by die forging, embossing, etc., for which see subclass
    348.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    348+,   for deep-drawing (means or method) combined with other metal
    deformation.


CLS 72/348
TXT With additional metal deforming:

    Subject matter under subclass 347 further comprising organized apparatus or
    a method step of a type which itself constitutes subject matter for this
    class.

    (1)     Note.  Any other claimed deforming operation, such as die forging,
    embossing, bending, etc., combined with an operation which qualifies as
    "deep drawing: is proper subject matter for this subclass.  (Often a
    portion of a tool couple effects deep drawing, while other portions operate
    in other ways upon the same work, as for flanging, bending, embossing,
    etc.).


CLS 72/349
TXT Plural deep drawing:

    Subject matter under subclass 348 wherein the additional apparatus or
    method step itself would constitute subject matter for subclasses 347+.

    (1)     Note.  A method comprising two or more steps of deep drawing, or
    apparatus for performing such steps, with or without additional metal
    deforming is proper subject matter for this subclass.


CLS 72/350
TXT With application of frictional restraining force to work during deformation:

    Subject matter under subclass 347 utilizing a nonpositive work gripper and
    actuating means for making said gripper effective to engage work, said
    actuating means or said gripper embodying adjustable or yieldable structure
    which is intended to be capable of so limiting or regulating the force of
    engagement of said gripper with the work as to permit movement (i.e.,
    slippage) of a portion of the gripped work in response to internal stresses
    developed therein by and during the motion of said movable member.

    (1)     Note.  Subclasses 350+ is loci for deep-drawing apparatus utilizing
    a "blank holder" or "clamp ring" which is so actuated that it permits work
    material to slip gradually into the bore of the draw ring or die during the
    drawing of a cup or shell.  The slippage of work under frictional restraint
    distinguishes the blank holder of this subclass from the nondeforming work
    gripping clamp which characterizes preceding subclasses 293 (see
    accompanying diagram).



    Deep-drawing with frictional restraint on work (subclass 350).

    (2)     Note.  The blank holder of this subclass has the effect of a
    metal-deforming tool or tool couple acting to modify the operation of the
    plunger and draw ring. Similar structure may be found in subclasses 312+,
    where, however, no yielding or slippage function is disclosed or desired.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    293+,   for a positively gripping blank-holding clamp and coacting
    metal-deforming tool.

    417,    for interrelated blank holder mover and tool mover.


CLS 72/351
TXT With yieldable actuation of work gripper (e.g., spring biased blank holder):

    Subject matter under subclass 350 wherein the means for actuating said
    gripper comprises a force responsive (e.g., deformable, resilient, or
    slipping) element forming part of the force-transmitting train, such
    element serving to limit the force exerted on and by said gripper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    382     and 396+, for yieldable face portion or auxiliary tool in a tool
    complex*; such yieldable element frequently has a work-holding function in
    addition to its deforming function.

    431+,   for yieldable connection in drive train to a movable tool.

    453.1+, for pneumatic- or fluid-actuated tool support.

    465.1+, for flexible or yieldable tool or tool support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 460 for a clamp driven by yieldable means in a
    cutting machine.


CLS 72/352
TXT Forcing work into closed die; e.g., forging:

    Subject matter under subclass 343 wherein the operation is disclosed as
    having been completed while the deformed work material remains in the
    interior of the closed die.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus of this and the indented subclasses typically
    embodies a closed bottom die, rather than the through die which
    characterizes extrusion or wire-drawing devices in preceding subclasses
    253.1+ and 274+. Deep drawing is sometimes effected in closed bottom dies
    of suitable configuration (i.e., with cylindrical wall section, see
    subclass 347).

    (2)     Note.  The product of this and the intended subclasses is usually
    formed in three dimensions as a discrete object, e.g., a drop-forged
    article, or as a localized deformation of stock material or of a larger
    object (e.g., a bolt head upset at the end of a rod) as distinguished from
    the continuous or indefinite length products of many through die operations.

    (3)     Note.  A complete search for closed bottom closed die apparatus or
    method will involve many of the preceding subclass areas in this schedule,
    particularly, deforming by fluid pressure (subclasses 54+), and by use of
    relatively movable clamp (subclasses 293+).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61+,    for metal deformation by use of fluid pressure and fixed die for
    expanding hollow work.

    293+,   for metal deformation by work clamp and relatively movable tool
    (which may constitute a closed die).

    462+,   for a metal-deforming tool, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, subclass 119 for a piston-type fluid spring device
    useful as a press cushion in a sheet metal deforming, die cavity press; and
    subclass 130 for a spring device, other than fluid spring type for such use.


CLS 72/353.2
TXT By two or more coacting tools movable relative to closed die; e.g., tool
    complex:

    Subject matter under subclass 352 including a first instrumentality for
    deforming the work in the closed die, or as it moves the work thereinto;
    and a second deforming instrumentality also for deforming the work in the
    closed die, or as it moves the work thereinto; wherein the first and second
    deforming instrumentalities move relative to each other and relative to the
    closed die during deformation of the work, in such manner that at some
    instant during the class type operation the closed die and both of the
    other deforming instrumentalities are in simultaneous contact with the same
    work.

    (1)     Note.  The first and second deforming instrumentalities may have
    any location or any type of stroke.  There must be relative motion between
    the instrumentalities and the closed die during deformation, but any one of
    the tools may be stationary.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass relates to a closed-die tool-complex*, as
    distinguished from "plural metal-deforming apparatus" which involves
    alternately or sequentially advanced and withdrawn tools (or concurrently
    actuated tools which treat distinct workpieces).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    356,    for plural (similar or diverse) metal-deforming apparatus,
    employing at least one closed-die device.

    381+,   for a tool-complex comprising an offset-face tool couple.

    394+,   for a tool-complex with opposed-face tools.

    471,    for a tool-couple with an intermediate tool.


CLS 72/353.4
TXT Symmetrically expanding tools:

    Subject matter under subclass 353.2 wherein the first and second deforming
    instrumentalities are actuated to move equally apart, toward the work, and
    with respect to the closed die during the deforming operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    392+,   for similar symmetrically expanding tools not in combination with a
    closed die.


CLS 72/353.6
TXT With tools converging to form annular surface; e.g., segments of closed die:

    Subject matter under subclass 353.4 wherein the closed die is comprised of
    a plurality of portions each covering an arc of the periphery thereof,
    which portions are movable radially with respect to each other, but not
    during metal deformation; or (2) including a closed die and including a
    plurality of components, each having a work engaging arcuate surface,
    wherein the components move simultaneously together to give the work a
    continuous circular surface.

    (1)     Note.  The "portions" of the closed die of clause (1) this subclass
    are not in motion during the deforming operation.  Commonly the purpose of
    being segmented is to allow removal thereof from the formed product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402,    for peripherally spaced tools that move radially inwardly to effect
    a metal deforming operation, even if the tools mutually form an annular
    shaping surface at their radially innermost position, but do not comprise a
    "closed die."


CLS 72/354.2
TXT With tools converging to form annular surface; e.g., segments of closed die:

    Subject matter under subclass 353.2 wherein the closed die is comprised of
    a plurality of portions each covering an arc of the periphery thereof,
    which portions are movable radially with respect to each other, but not
    during metal deformation; or (2) including a closed die and including a
    plurality of components, each having a work engaging arcuate surface,
    wherein the components move simultaneously together to give the work a
    continuous circular surface.

    (1)     Note.  The "portions" of the closed die of clause (1) of this
    subclass are not in motion during the deforming operation.  Commonly the
    purpose of being segmented is to allow removal thereof from the formed
    product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402,    for peripherally spaced tools that move radially inwardly to effect
    a metal deforming operation, even if the tools mutually form an annular
    shaping surface at their radially innermost position, but do not comprise a
    "closed die".


CLS 72/354.6
TXT One tool telescoping into closed die:

    Subject matter under subclass 353.2 wherein at least one of the deforming
    instrumentalities slidingly enters into a parallel sided portion of the
    closed die during the deforming operation.


CLS 72/354.8
TXT One yieldably connected to another:

    Subject matter under subclass 354.6 wherein force transmitted to one of the
    deforming instrumentalities is also transmitted to another deforming
    instrumentality by a yieldable medium such that even though both have a
    common drive or holding means, there is relative movement between those two
    instrumentalities during the deforming operation.


CLS 72/355.2
TXT Coaxial opposed tools:

    Subject matter under subclass 354.6 wherein the first and second deforming
    instrumentalities are spaced from each other along a line and move parallel
    to that line, toward each other, and with respect to the closed die to
    effect the deforming operation on a workpiece therebetween.

    (1)     Note.  An ejector rod (knockout rod) or similar element which may
    lie in contact with work during a deforming operation but which has no
    independent motion until it is actuated to expel a formed product from a
    tool after the operation is completed, should be distinguished from a
    "first" or "second" instrumentality.


CLS 72/355.4
TXT Passing through work; e.g., "punch":

    Subject matter under subclass 355.2 wherein at least one of the deforming
    instrumentalities penetrates either singularly or in conjunction with the
    coaxial instrumentality all the way through the workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  The workpiece may be cylindrical when introduced to the
    deforming instrumentalities, or may be a billet that is forged to a tubular
    shape.


CLS 72/355.6
TXT Both telescoping into closed die:

    Subject matter under subclass 355.2 wherein the coaxially opposed deforming
    instrumentality also slidingly enters into another cylindrical portion of a
    closed die during the shaping operation.


CLS 72/356
TXT With additional metal deforming:

    Subject matter under subclass 352 which comprises or utilizes a second set
    of organized instrumentalities capable of effecting an operation of the
    class type.

    (1)     Note.  A device classified in this subclass consists of apparatus
    of subclass 352 type, combined in any manner and to any degree with similar
    apparatus or with apparatus classifiable, per se, in a lower subclass but
    falling short of qualifying as a tool complex* for subclasses 353.2+ above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    348+,   for deep drawing with additional metal deformation.

    404+,   for plural metal-deforming apparatus of types not provided for in
    preceding subclasses.


CLS 72/357
TXT With actuation of split die:

    Subject matter under subclass 352 including utilization of a work-engaging
    member constructed in two or more relatively movable parts, separable to
    admit work and movable to closed position to confine work there between and
    to afford a shape-imposing surface or cavity adjacent to a portion of the
    work, said device further comprising a power-transmitting train for moving
    said parts to closed position.

    (1)     Note.  For this subclass, the multipart work-holding or
    work-confining member must also constitute a die (i.e., must comprise a
    work-shape-imposing, or limiting surface which at some time during the
    movement of the coacting tool or work forcer is engaged by work), but it
    must not constitute a die couple.  In other words, if parts of the work
    gripper deform work while closing into gripping engagement therewith, they
    constitute a tool couple; in combination with the relatively movable header
    or other tool they thus become a tool complex for subclasses 353.2+, 381+,
    or 394+.

    (2)     Note.  Usually, but not necessarily, the work gripper die surface
    defines a closed die cavity; however, the coacting tool may itself
    constitute the closed die and the gripper die surface may have any form,
    e.g., flat or segmental.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312+,   for interrelated work clamp actuator and tool mover.

    353.2+, for closed die tool complex wherein two or more tools coact to grip
    partially deformed work, and see (1) Note above.


CLS 72/358
TXT Tool portion enters cavity of closed die:

    Subject matter under subclass 352 wherein at some time during an operation
    of the class type at least a part of the work-engaging surface of the
    movable member intersects a plane normal to the direction of motion of said
    member and containing a closed perimeter portion of the die cavity or
    passageway.


CLS 72/359
TXT With telescoping engagement:

    Subject matter under subclass 358 wherein said movable member substantially
    fills the opening presented by said die cavity or passageway, or wherein a
    portion of said member engages a complementarily shaped portion of the side
    wall of said die cavity or passageway during the movement of said member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333+,   for some disclosures of telescoping metal-deforming tool and
    cutting tool.

    355.6,  for a closed die complex involving telescoping tools.

    391.8,  for a telescoping tool couple with offset tool faces.


CLS 72/360
TXT Co-acting closed dies:

    Subject matter under subclass 352 utilizing two opposed relatively movable
    closed die* structures.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is the locus for apparatus comprising a
    conventional drop-forging die couple, as indicated in the accompanying
    diagram.



            Metal deforming by coacting closed dies (subclass 360).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    348+    and 353.2+, for other disclosures of coacting closed dies.


CLS 72/361
TXT With holding, handling, or guiding of work or product:

    Subject matter under subclass 352 not specifically provided for in
    preceding subclasses and utilizing structure which is designed and intended
    to (a) maintain or retain material in fixed position relative to
    metal-deforming apparatus, or (b) direct the course of moving work or
    product and/or (c) cause the movement thereof relative to metal-deforming
    apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    344+,   for stripping or ejecting associated with closed die means or
    method.

    419+,   for work or product-handling means associated with metal-deforming
    apparatus, in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 78 for a cutting device with product-handling
    means; and appropriate subclasses for means to feed or guide work in
    specific types of cutting machines.


CLS 72/362
TXT PROCESS:

    Method, under the class definition, of deformation metal which is not
    classifiable in any of the subclasses hereinabove.

    (1)     Note.  Metal-deforming processes claimed in combination with other
    metal treatments not particularly provided for in this class are generally
    excluded from this class.  However, combinations which comprise a
    nonsignificant heat treatment and deforming of metal are placed here.  See
    section VI, C, 2 (c), of Class 72 definition and section III, A, the first
    paragraph of the Class 148 definition to determine what constitutes
    significant heat treatment for Class 148.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 592+ for a process for making a
    miscellaneous article, that is, one whose manufacture is not the subject of
    a specific subclass.  Except for subclasses 421.1+, these subclasses have
    not yet been screened and those which do not involve assembly (which are
    excluded from this Class 72) may contain subject matter similar to that
    found in this class.

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclasses 101.1+ for a process
    of making a tool or implement which may include a step of metal
    deformation, but which also includes another treatment, such as welding or
    assembly, which latter treatment (or which inclusion of extraneous subject
    matter) operates to exclude the combination from this class (72).

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 544+ for
    metallic stock, e.g., of indefinite length, which may be the product of
    metal deforming operation; and especially subclass 600 of such stock having
    a variation in thickness.


CLS 72/363
TXT Deforming stacked blanks:

    Process under subclass 362 which includes the simultaneous or immediately
    sequential deformation of an ordered assemblage of workpieces in a
    face-to-face arrangement, the workpieces being intended, according to the
    disclosure, to be separated subsequent to deformation.

    (1)     Note.  The limitation "face-to-face" includes blanks separated by
    thin material such as goldbeater's skin.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39+     and 46+, for deformation of stacked blanks preceded by coating for
    lubrication or other purposes.


CLS 72/364
TXT With temperature maintenance or modification:

    Process under subclass 362 including a step of evolving, maintaining, or
    modifying a thermal condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    342.1,  for temperature modification of a tool or a specified portion of
    work.


CLS 72/365.2
TXT "Rolling":

    Process under subclass 362 which is described by the verb "roll" or a
    participial derivation thereof, but which as claimed does not employ
    sufficient identifying structural matter to warrant placement in a
    preceding subclass.


CLS 72/366.2
TXT Between disclosed rollers:

    Process under subclass 365.2 which as disclosed is accomplished by passing
    the work between one or more pairs of rollers*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199+,   for a process of working metal by specific roller apparatus.

    379.2+, for a patent including a process of bending sheet metal by rollers
    or rolling, but in which rollers or rolling are not claimed.


CLS 72/367.1
TXT Tube making or reshaping:

    Process under subclass 362 relating to the manufacture or deformation of a
    tube*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,      6.1+, 28.1+, 31.01+, 37, 38, 39+, 48+, 53, 54+, 64+, 66, 67+,
    127+, 184+, 199+, 253.1+, 274+, 292, 293+, 324+, 342.1+, 343+, for
    processes of tube making or reshaping by the use of various named types of
    apparatus.


CLS 72/368
TXT Making:

    Process under subclass 367.1 which relates to the manufacture of a tube and
    in which the blank or material subjected to the deforming operation has a
    shape other than a tube immediately prior to such operation.


CLS 72/369
TXT Bending:

    Process under subclass 367.1 for changing the direction of the running
    length of a tube.


CLS 72/370.01
TXT Comprising use of internal tool:

    Process under subclass 367.1 including the use of an active or passive tool
    located within the interior of the work during the reshaping operation.

    (1)     Note. A passive or undriven tool is commonly termed an anvil, a
    core, or a mandrel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57+,    for a process involving the use of fluent material as a core or
    passive tool (e.g., liquid, sand, shot).

    96+,    113, 139, 142+, 148, 150, 193, 208+, 264+, 283, and 352+, for a
    process involving the use of an internal tool in a metal-deforming
    operation employing a specified type of apparatus.

    398,    for apparatus comprising a floating mandrel.


CLS 72/370.02
TXT End necked down:

    Process under subclass 370.01 which reduces the transverse dimension of an
    axial extremity of the tube*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85,     for a process of necking down using a rotating tool to traverse a
    rotating tube.

    370.1+, for a process of end forming without the use of an internal tool.


CLS 72/370.03
TXT End upset:

    Process under subclass 370.01 wherein an axially forced die causes an
    increase in wall thickness of an axial extremity of the tube*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3701+, for a process of end forming without the use of an internal tool.


CLS 72/370.04
TXT Laterally pressed die(s):

    Process under subclass 370.01 wherein at least one die* is transversely
    forced against the tube*.


CLS 72/370.05
TXT Collapsible mandrel:

    Process under subclass 370.04 in which the internal tool is undriven and
    breaks down for removal from the interior of the tube* after the
    deformation process.


CLS 72/370.06
TXT Expanding tube:

    Process under subclass 370.01 in which the transverse dimension of the
    tube* is increased.


CLS 72/370.07
TXT Sleeve expanded in passage:

    Process under subclass 370.06 in which a tube* is deformed outwardly to
    engage the inner wall of a hole.


CLS 72/370.08
TXT Expanding internal tool:

    Process under subclass 370.06 in which the tool in the interior of the
    tube* increases in size transversely thereby deforming the tube*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    393,    for a tool for tube expanding.


CLS 72/370.1
TXT End forming:

    Process under subclass 367.1 in which deformation is directed to an axial
    extremity of the tube*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370.01+, for a process of end forming using an internal tool.


CLS 72/370.11
TXT Flange forming:

    Process under subclass 370.1 in which an axial extremity of the tube* is
    flared outward making a projecting rim.


CLS 72/370.12
TXT End closing (e.g., crimping):

    Process under subclass 370.1 in which an axial extremity of the tube* is
    sealed off.


CLS 72/370.13
TXT Compression die (e.g., swaging):

    Process under subclass 370.1 in which an axial extremity of the tube* is
    shaped using a forced die*.


CLS 72/370.14
TXT Changing wall thickness:

    Process under subclass 367.1 in which the transverse dimension of the
    tube's* metal* is varied.


CLS 72/370.15
TXT Increasing wall thickness:

    Process under subclass 370.14 in which the transverse dimension of the
    tube's* metal* is enlarged.


CLS 72/370.16
TXT Fin or thread forming:

    Process under subclass 367.1 in which ribs are made on a surface of the
    tube*.


CLS 72/370.17
TXT Internal:

    Process under subclass 370.16 in which ribs are made on the tube's* inner
    surface.


CLS 72/370.18
TXT And external:

    Process under subclass 370.17 in which additional ribs are made on the
    tube's* outer surface.


CLS 72/370.19
TXT Corrugations forming:

    Process under subclass 367.1 in which the tube's* wall is bent making
    ridges and troughs.


CLS 72/370.2
TXT Axial:

    Process under subclass 370.19 in which the ridges and troughs are oriented
    parallel to the tube's* axis.


CLS 72/370.21
TXT Groove forming:

    Process under subclass 367.1 in which a channel is made on a surface of the
    tube*.


CLS 72/370.22
TXT Using pressurized fluid during deformation:

    Process under subclass 367.1 in which a liquid or a gas at a pressure other
    than the ambient pressure is used while shaping.


CLS 72/370.23
TXT Change in cross section:

    Process under subclass 367.1 in which the tube's profile is dimensionally
    modified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370.01+, for a process of changing the cross section using an internal tool.


CLS 72/370.24
TXT Change in circular tube diameter:

    Process under subclass 370.23 wherein the tube* has an annular profile
    which is modified by varying the transverse dimension of the annular
    profile.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370.06+, for a process of expanding a circular tube using an internal tool.


CLS 72/370.25
TXT Reduction in diameter:

    Process under subclass 370.24 in which the transverse dimension of the
    annular profile is decreased.


CLS 72/370.26
TXT Polygon cross section (e.g., rectangular):

    Process under subclass 370.23 in which the tube* is deformed to produce a
    profile having three or more straight conjoining sides.


CLS 72/370.27
TXT Forming holes in tube:

    Process under subclass 367.1 in which an opening is formed in the tube's*
    wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324+,   for a process of cutting a tube.


CLS 72/371
TXT Coiling and/or twisting:

    Process under subclass 362 including a step of convoluting work material
    through more than 360o into a self-sustaining spiral winding, e.g., an
    involute or a helix, and/or deforming the workpiece by changing the
    relative angular orientation of two next adjacent portions about an
    internal axis passing through both.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64+,    for twisting axially moving work.

    66+,    for coiling work by use of a work guide member which orbits about
    the longitudinal centerline of the formed coil.

    127+,   for coiling by deflecting successively presented portion of work
    during bodily movement thereof.

    299,    for twisting work by and between relatively pivoted clamps.


CLS 72/372
TXT Involving use of claimed apparatus:

    Process under subclass 362 which includes a step of using a claimed
    structural instrumentality or portion thereof (not classifiable in any
    subclass above 362) for engaging and/or applying force to work to deform it
    in carrying out the claimed process.

    (1)     Note.  The structural instrumentality may be named as a whole or
    defined by the recitation of sufficient parts or attributes thereof to
    enable its identification as metal-deforming apparatus.  Thus, claimed
    recitation of a tool couple, a single deforming tool, or a surface or shape
    which must necessarily be attributed to a tool will place a patent in this
    or an indented subclass.

    Process terms which express or imply specific apparatus, such as, for
    example, in the underlined expressions below, are appropriate for this
    subclass: die express, die shape, drop forge, hammer swage, force between
    surfaces.

    Examples of process terms which do not denote apparatus limitations for
    this subclass are:  Reduce, enlarge, shape, form, draw, forge, bend,
    stretch, upset, work, swage.  These are manipulative steps capable of
    accomplishment manually or by unspecified types of apparatus.

    Search any appropriate subclass above for a process for carrying out an
    operation classified in such subclass.


CLS 72/373
TXT Reciprocating tool:

    Process under subclass 372 using a work-engaging deforming or shaping tool
    which travels in a rectilinear operational path to and from the work.


CLS 72/374
TXT Opposed tool faces:

    Process under subclass 373 using apparatus in which the face of the
    reciprocating tool is directly opposed through the work and in the line of
    reciprocation by another tool means, i.e., the tools have confronting
    work-engaging deforming face areas which would collide if unrestrained.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    394+,   and any following subclass, for an opposed face tool couple device
    which may be utilized in a method of this subclass.


CLS 72/375
TXT Complementary:

    Process under subclass 374 using apparatus which includes opposed shaping
    tools whose work-engaging surfaces are generally of similar and mating or
    interdigitating form (allowing for the thickness of the work), so that a
    shape product corresponding to the tool shape and of generally uniform
    thickness results.

    (1)     Note.  The patents found here are mainly directed to shaping (e.g.,
    embossing) sheet metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    414+,   for apparatus comprising complementary tool faces.

    475,    for a complementary-faced tool couple, per se.


CLS 72/376
TXT Single tool pair:

    Process under subclass 374 in which work is deformed by a single opposed
    face tool couple* consisting simply of two relatively movable members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404+,   for metal-deforming mechanism comprising a plurality of single tool
    couples.

    407,    and appropriate subclasses therebelow, for apparatus in which the
    invention lies in metal-deforming mechanism which is limited to a single
    tool couple.


CLS 72/377
TXT With attenuation, thickening elongating shortening of work material:

    Process under subclass 362 including a step which causes a plastic flow of
    work material which in turn results in a reduction or an enlargement of any
    dimension of the work material not compensated for by a parallel and
    opposite flow.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass relates to substantially
    all metal-deforming operations except "bending".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    372.2+, for a metal-deforming process characterized by a bending step.


CLS 72/378
TXT By application of tensile forces:

    Process under subclass 377 in which work material is deformed by subjecting
    it to tension, as by stretching or drawing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    274+,   for stretching work by pulling it through a closed periphery die,
    e.g., wire-drawing.

    302+,   for stretching work by opposed relative translatory motion of
    plural work- gripping clamps.

    347+,   for stretching work by pushing a portion of it through a closed die
    (e.g., drawing).


CLS 72/379.2
TXT Deforming sheet metal:

    Process under subclass 362, not classifiable in any other subclass
    thereunder, for deforming work material which is substantially
    two-dimensional in nature, i.e., having length and width dimensions which
    are extremely large as compared to the general thickness of the material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is residual to sheet material deforming
    processes.  Search for a process of deforming sheet material must therefore
    be extended to any other subclass above in this schedule which may be
    appropriate to sheet metal deformation, e.g., subclasses 179, 196, or 375.


CLS 72/379.4
TXT Container making:

    Process under subclass 379.2 including a step of creating a vessel for
    holding material therein.


CLS 72/379.6
TXT Forming undulations:

    Process under subclass 379.2 including a step of creating a sinuous
    configuration in the surface(s) of the two dimensional material including
    creation of at least two "peaks" and at least two "valleys".


CLS 72/380
TXT BY RELATIVELY MOVABLE OFFSET TOOL FACES (E.G., FOR BENDING OR DRAWING):

    Device under the class definition comprising means to drive or guide one or
    more tools* in such relationship to a coacting tool that the tool faces of
    all said tools are movable freely past each other without interfering
    contact, to effect a disclosed deforming operation.

    (1)     Note.  Subclasses 380+ is intended to accommodate all disclosures
    of apparatus of the offset-tool-face type, not classifiable in preceding
    subclasses, and having two or more metal-deforming tools (e.g., hammer and
    anvil, die and work-pusher, coacting forming blocks or dies, etc.), which
    tools are disclosed as being relatively movable toward, or toward and past
    each other, with a noninterfering stroke (i.e., no interference between
    actual work-engaging tool portions, or tool-faces*), thereby accomplishing
    such operations as bending, flanging, drawing, and others which do not
    involve the direct compression of work between confronting tool-faces, and
    in whose operation there is always to be found an increase in some
    dimension of the work.

    (2)     Note.  The definition of this subclass excludes a tool couple
    having any face portions (i.e., work-engaging portions) in directly opposed
    relationship.  Such a device constitutes an opposed-face tool couple for
    placement in succeeding subclasses, e.g., subclasses 412+, for non-planar
    tool-face.

    (3)     Note.  The combination of devices having offset-face and
    opposed-face tool couples, or plural offset-face couples, is classifiable
    in subclass 384.  See (1) Note under subclass 384 for criteria applicable
    to plural or combined offset-face devices.

    (4)     Note.  The shape of the tools is not always an adequate criterion
    for placement of a disclosure in subclasses 380+; for example, a press with
    flat-faced ram and anvil block may actually be disclosed only for use in
    partially straightening a bent or V- or W-shaped workpiece, in which case
    the tool-faces* (only those portions of the flat surfaces of the ram and
    block which engage the work during the disclosed operation) may be "offset"
    for subclasses 380+; the same press, if claimed for flattening a crumpled
    plate, would be classified in a lower subclass, possibly in subclasses
    429+, for the reason that flat and opposed-face tool couples are of too
    general application for placement, as such, in any specific subclass in
    this schedule.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    293+,   and particularly subclasses 296+, 298+, 301, 305, and 319+ for
    relatively movable work-gripping clamps, or clamp and tool, many of which
    arrangements may constitute, in effect, offset face tool couples.

    347+,   for cup or shell-drawing apparatus comprising the combination of
    annular and circular offset tool faces.

    457+,   for a work-constrainer and/or manipulated work-forcer device, which
    may be usable for bending or other offset tool face operations.


CLS 72/381
TXT Embodying three or more co-acting relatively movable tools (i.e., tool
    complex):

    Device under subclass 380 which comprises a first and a second movable tool
    and a co-acting tool and means to move or guide said second movable tool
    into engagement with work along a different path and/or at a different time
    with respect to said first movable tool, in such manner that all said tools
    are in simultaneous contact with the same work at some instant during an
    operation of the class type.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates to a tool complex*, which is
    distinguishable from a tool couple* by the presence and coaction of a third
    tool, and is distinguishable from plural tool couples (subclasses 384, and
    404) by the condition that three or more tools are concurrently in contact
    with the same workpiece at some instant during the deforming operation.  A
    tool-complex generally effect more elaborate or more extensive deformation
    than could be accomplished by the sequential action of plural tool couples.

    (2)     Note.  The "second movable tool" of the above subclass definition
    may be (a) a distinct tool element, or (b) a yieldable or yieldably-mounted
    portion of the face of the first-named tool; in either case, the additional
    tool element or face portion must have motion relative to the first-named
    tool during the deforming operation.  (The additional tool need not act as
    an offset face tool).

    (3)     Note.  It is possible for a combination to meet the definition of
    this subclass even though the movable tools are located at different tool
    stations, (as in a progressive punch press), provided that they
    concurrently engage integrally connected portions of the same work material
    (e.g., prior to the severance of discrete blanks or products from a strip).

    (4)     Note.  Many combinations in preceding subclasses constitute tool
    complexes; a full search would therefore include subclasses 67+, Rotating
    or gyrating tool; 127+, Deflecting bodily moving work; 184+, Flying tool;
    199+, Rolling; 278+, Wire drawing with plural tools; 293+, Work-clamp and
    relatively movable clamp, tool, or work forcer; and 343+, Closed die
    apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67+,    127+, 184+, 199+, and 278+ (and particularly subclasses indented
    thereunder whose titles indicate the presence of three or more tools) for a
    tool complex arrangement is a specialized environment.

    293+,   particularly 296+ and 309 for tool complex wherein one or more of
    the tool elements has the form of a clamp.

    348+,   350+ and 353.2+, for closed-die apparatus involving three or more
    relatively movable tools.

    393,    for three or more relatively receding tools.

    394+,   for three or more relatively movable opposed-face tools.


CLS 72/382
TXT Comprising yieldable tool or face portion: Device under subclass 381
    wherein the face of one of said tools is so constructed, mounted, or
    connected to an actuating power train, that during a metal-deforming
    operation a portion of said face, while in contact with work, is deflected
    or bodily displaced with respect to another portion of said face.

    (1)     Note.  A device of this subclass typically comprises a tool couple,
    one element of which has resiliently constructed or resiliently mounted
    face portion (i.e., less than the entire tool face) which yields upon
    forcible contact with work during deformation by said face, thus moving
    with respect to another face portion of the same tool and so modifying the
    effect of a simple tool couple.

    (2)     Note.  A second included type device employs a "floating",
    yieldable, or shiftable mandrel, core, or the like interposed between two
    portions of work which are acted upon by a tool couple.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    396+,   for a yieldable face portion or auxiliary tool in
    opposed-face-complex

    465.1+, for a flexible or yieldable tool.


CLS 72/383
TXT With concurrent actuation of tools:

    Apparatus under subclass 381 comprising a force-transmitting power train
    connected to the moving means of each of the movable tools, effective to
    drive said movable tools generally simultaneously during an operation of
    the class type.

    (1)     Note.  The movable tools need not be actuated exactly in
    synchronism to meet the definition of this subclass; their cycles of
    actuation should at least overlap, to distinguish from the tools of
    subclass 381, which are sequentially driven of subclass 381, which are
    sequentially driven (or are intended to be manipulated one at a time and
    left in work-engaging position).





            Offset-face tool-complex concurrently actuated tools (subclass 383).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    353.2+, for concurrently actuated tools in closed die apparatus.

    399+,   for concurrently actuated tools in opposed-face relationship.


CLS 72/384
TXT Plural:

    Device under subclass 380 comprising additional organized apparatus which
    is capable of effecting an operation of the class type.

    (1)     Note.  The additional apparatus may be complete, per se; or, may be
    so combined with apparatus of the subclass 380 type as to constitute less
    than a tool-complex* for subclasses 381+, e.g., tools carried by the same
    movable ram arranged to perform successive operations upon blanks fed along
    the bed of a multi-tool station punch press.

    (2)     Note.  Some examples of offset-face tool-couple combined with other
    metal-deforming apparatus may be found in preceding subclass areas devoted
    to specific types of deforming.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404+,   for a plural-tool-couple*, in general.


CLS 72/385
TXT Multipoint tool couple (e.g., corrugator):

    Device under subclass 380 wherein each of said plurality of relatively
    movable tools comprises two or more distinct and spaced work-engaging face
    portions.

    (1)     Note.  A devise of this subclass type usually impresses two or more
    bends or twists in one operation on a workpiece; some shaft straighteners
    are included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    412+,   for metal-deforming apparatus embodying at least one nonplanar tool
    face.

    474+,   for a tool couple with nonsymetrical faces.


CLS 72/386
TXT With tool motion in fixed path:

    Device under subclass 380 wherein the means to move or guide said movable
    tool is effective to restrict the motion of said tool to the same path
    during all operations of the class type.

    (1)     Note.  A device employing a freely movable sling suspended and
    pulled by block and tackle (e.g., for bending a large pipe) would be
    excluded from this subclass, for the actual path of movement of the sling
    would vary in accordance with characteristics of the workpiece, pulling
    force, etc.  (See subclass 380 for a device of this kind).

    (2)     Note.  The accompanying diagram illustrates the essentials of a
    device for subclass 386.



    Offset-face tool-couple (actual tool-faces are indicated by shading)
    (subclass 386).


CLS 72/387
TXT Pivotal motion only:

    Device under subclass 386 wherein said moving or guiding means restrains
    tool motion to rotation about a fixed axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67+,    for metal-deforming apparatus employing a rotary or gyratory tool.

    216+,   for metal-deforming apparatus embodying one or more work-engaging
    rollers swingable about a fixed pivot.

    298+,   for metal deformation by two work-gripping clamps having relative
    pivotal motion.

    310     and 319+, for metal deformation by clamp and coacting tool with
    relative pivotal motion.


CLS 72/388
TXT Cantilever bender:

    Device under subclass 387 wherein the work- engaging face portion(s) of one
    relatively movable tool is disposed at a greater radial distance from said
    fixed axis than the work-engaging face portion(s) of the other tool.

    (1)     Note.  A typical device of this subclass bends the unsupported
    projecting end portion of a rod or pipe into arcuate shape by the travel of
    a sweep-arm-carried tool along the outer side of the work, while another
    portion of the work is restrained in a groove or socket, or by spaced face
    portions, of a fixed tool element.

    (2)     Note.  Similar apparatus may be found in subclasses 319+ where the
    work is held in a (per se) nondeforming clamp; and in subclass 310 where
    the work-clamp is pivoted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217+,   for a sweep-arm bender comprising a work-engaging roller instead of
    a sliding shoe as the pivoted bending tool.


CLS 72/389.1
TXT Between and co-planar with opposed tools:

    Device under subclass 386 including a first tool and an opposing second
    tool in which the first tool has a single tool-face* and the second tool
    has two contraposed tool-faces which lie in a plane which is parallel to
    the single tool-face, wherein the single tool-face passes between the
    contraposed tool faces to deform a workpiece thereon.

    (1)     Note. This and the following indented subclasses comprise the locus
    for placement of patents to shaft straighteners which embody an actuated
    ram, and adjustable positionable V-blacks or the like on fixed bed.


CLS 72/389.2
TXT For a small radius bend:

    Device under subclass 389.1 particularly adapted to deform a workpiece such
    that the radius of curvature on the inside surface of the workpiece
    approaches zero.


CLS 72/389.3
TXT Elongated knife edge die (i.e., press brake):

    Device under subclass 389.2 wherein the single tool face is comprised of an
    elongated ridge parallel to the plane of the contraposed tool-faces, such
    that, as measured along the ridge the members are much much longer than
    wide and cooperate to create a sharp straight bend in a planar or
    sheet-like workpiece.


CLS 72/389.4
TXT Adjustable tool face:

    Press brake under subclass 389.3 wherein the single tool-face or the two
    contraposed tool faces are specifically designed to be repositioned or
    reshaped with respect to their support structure.


CLS 72/389.5
TXT Opposed tools having adjustable crown (i.e., provision for die crowning):

    Press brake under subclass 389.4 wherein the two contraposed tool faces are
    reshaped to compensate for the deflection of the bending mechanism under
    the force of the single tool face.


CLS 72/389.6
TXT Fluid pressure actuated (i.e., hydraulically or pneumatically actuated):

    Device under subclass 389.1 including a mechanism driven by a gaseous or
    liquid medium to move one of the tools.


CLS 72/389.7
TXT Manually pumped (e.g., by use of a hydraulic jack):

    Device under subclass 389.6 including a mechanism for transmitting energy
    to the fluid pressure actuating device  directly from the user.


CLS 72/389.8
TXT Pivotable opposed tools:

    Device under subclass 389.6 wherein the two contraposed tool-faces turn
    about an axis as the workpiece is deformed.


CLS 72/389.9
TXT Rack and pinion actuated:

    Device under subclass 389.1 including a mechanism which converts rotary
    motion into linear motion using a gear and toothed bar to move one of the
    tools.


CLS 72/390.2
TXT Ratchet actuated:

    Device under subclass 389.1 including a  linearly movable rod which is
    engaged by a one way locking mechanism and a mechanism which indexably
    engages the rod for incremental movement to move one of the tools.


CLS 72/390.3
TXT Cam actuated:

    Device under subclass 389.1 including a contoured surface which moves along
    another surface to move one of the tools.


CLS 72/390.4
TXT Linkage actuated:

    Device under subclass 389.1 including two or more pivotally connected
    members (links) to move one of the tools.


CLS 72/390.5
TXT Lever actuated:

    Device under subclass 389.1 including  an elongated member rotatable about
    a fulcrum to move one of the tools.


CLS 72/390.6
TXT Screw actuated:

    Device under subclass 389.1 including a screw and nut mechanism to move one
    of the tools.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248,    for a screw down device in a roller carrier.

    293+,   for many examples of screw-actuated nondeforming work-clamps in
    metal-deforming apparatus.

    454,    for a screw-actuated tool support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 240+ for a screw-actuated vise jaw.


CLS 72/390.7
TXT Puller:

    Device under subclass 390.6 wherein the member connected to the single
    tool-face is under tension.


CLS 72/391.2
TXT Concentric or telescoped tools:

    Device under subclass 386 wherein the path of motion of said movable tool
    is a straight line, and the respective work-engaging surface portions
    (i.e., tool-faces*) of the elements are of substantially annular shape and
    are radially offset about a common axis aligned with said path of motion.

    (1)     Note.  A typical device of this subclass is an upsetter for hollow
    rivets, comprising a headed pulling tool surrounded by a tubular sleeve; a
    hollow rivet engaged by the head is upset against an annular anvil surface
    on the end of the sleeve.

    (2)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass differs from somewhat
    similar subject matter in subclass 392, in that the co-acting tool-faces in
    this subclass (391.2) are radially offset, i.e., they move in
    noninterfering paths, while the stretching tool-faces of subclass 392 move
    (in opposite directions) along the same path.  (see appended diagram)



    A.      Work engaged by radially offset tool-faces (subclasses 391.2+).

    B.      Work engaged by receding, in-line, tool-faces (subclass 392).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    274+,   for metal-deforming apparatus comprising a gripper capable of
    pulling elongated work through a die orifice.

    347+,   for deep drawing apparatus comprising radially offset concentric
    tool faces.


CLS 72/391.4
TXT Tool inside hollow fastener:

    Device under subclass 391.2 wherein a first tool engages an annular end
    surface of a tube-like workpiece, which surface generally faces the device,
    which tool includes a passageway coaxial with the tubular axis of the
    workpiece, and wherein a second tool extends through the passageway of the
    first tool and through at least a portion of the interior of the tube-like
    workpiece and engages the workpiece to deform the workpiece by movement
    relative to the first tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 243.518 for metal deforming by a tool
    inside a hollow workpiece to effect assembly by overedge bending wherein
    two workpieces are engaged (recognized) for relative movement or relative
    securement; and subclasses 243.519+ for a device including a tool that
    engages a tubular member and a member inside that tubular member to
    relatively move the members and effect repositioning and deformation
    thereof, particularly subclasses 243.521+ for a driver for a
    snap-off-mandrel fastener.


CLS 72/391.6
TXT With fastener loader or supply:

    Device under subclass 391.4 combined with (1) structure to place a new
    fastener for engagement by the tools or (2) with means to store plural
    fasteners.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 812.5 for a driver for snap-off-mandrel
    fastener having a fastener magazine.


CLS 72/391.8
TXT Helically ribbed tool:

    Device under subclass 391.4 wherein the tool passing at least through a
    portion of the workpiece is screw threaded along its axis and is intended
    to screw fit with a cooperating mating surface of the workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  The tool of this subclass is brought into engagement with
    the workpiece by relative rotation therewith, however deformation is
    effected by straight line movement of the tool with respect to the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for similar structure wherein deformation of the workpiece is
    effected by the action of the tool while turning about its axis with
    respect the workpiece.


CLS 72/392
TXT BY RELATIVELY RECEDING WORK-ENGAGING TOOL FACES (E.G., FOR STRETCHING):

    Device under the class definition comprising a plurality of distinct tools
    each having at least one tool-face* and means to move or to guide the
    motion of one of said tools relative to another tool along a predetermined
    path in such direction that the distance between the tool-faces generally
    increases from an initial minimum spacing throughout an operation of the
    class type.

    (1)     Note.  The tools may be pegs or lugs which engage in apertures in
    the work or in the interior of ring-shaped or U-shaped work, and which move
    apart to stretch the work, either locally or as a whole, usually involving
    a major change of shape of a specific workpiece.

    (2)     Note.  For tools which move generally toward and past each other
    without tool-face conflict, while deforming work, see subclasses 380+,
    above.

    (3)     Note.  For devices having concentric receding tool faces which
    stretch work (such as the mandrel of a "Huck" rivet), see subclasses
    391.2+; these tool faces are radially offset, rather than directly opposed
    in the direction of tool motion.  The distinction is illustrated in Figures
    A and B of the diagram accompanying subclasses 391.2+.

    (4)     Note.  This subclass includes disclosures of devices, such as a
    tire-stretcher, which comprise a split ring and means to expand it; the
    effect is substantially that of distinct receding tool-faces.


CLS 72/393
TXT Embodying three or more tools (e.g., tube expander):

    Device under subclass 392 wherein two or more of said tools are movable
    with respect to another said tool.

    (1)     Note.  For example, the device of this subclass may comprise three
    or more segmental tools expansible by means of a central wedge to flare the
    end portion of a tube or other hollow work.

    (2)     Note.  A similar arrangement of expansible tools, but acting within
    a closed-die, would be placed in subclasses 353.4+ if the outer die
    structure consisted of spaced tools, the combination would be placed in
    subclasses 400+ (opposed face tool-complex).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58+     and 61+, for expansion of hollow work by pressurized fluent
    material.

    120+,   for metal deformation by radial outward motion of the tool elements
    of a rotating tool assembly.

    355.2+, for a metal deformation by wedge- actuated, symmetrically expanding
    tools within a closed-die.

    370.01+, for a process of tube reshaping by the use of an internal tool.

    400+,   for metal-deforming apparatus comprising two or more radially
    movable tools with coacting fixed tool, and see (2) Note, above.


CLS 72/394
TXT BY THREE OR MORE COACTING RELATIVELY MOVABLE TOOLS (I.E., TOOL COMPLEX):

    Device under the class definition comprising a plurality of tools each
    having a face portion which is designed and intended to engage work with
    deforming force at some time during an operation of the class type, and
    means to move or to guide the motion of at least two of said tools (or
    distinct face portions of one flexible tool) into engagement with work
    along different paths and/or at different times or with different
    velocities with respect to each other and to another such tool, in such
    manner that all said tool face portions are in simultaneous contact with
    the same work at some instant during said operation.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates to a tool-complex*, which is
    distinguishable from a plural-tool-couple* by the condition that, in the
    operation of the former, all tools are concurrently in contact with the
    same workpiece at some instant during the operations.  (See (1) through (4)
    Notes under subclass 381, which apply as well to this subclass 394).

    (2)     Note.  The subclasses indented under subclass 394 generally involve
    concurrently movable tools; devices wherein tools are successively applied
    to work, as by a manipulative routine, are found in this subclass (394).

    (3)     Note.  To complete the field of search for tool-complex*, see the
    search notes under subclass 381.


CLS 72/395
TXT With paired coplanar tool faces for stretching flat work:

    Device under subclass 394 wherein at least two of said relatively movable
    tools have substantially flat work-engaging surfaces and said tool-moving
    or guiding means is effective to maintain said surfaces approximately in
    alignment with each other.

    (1)     Note.  Typical of this subclass is a device having two pairs of
    opposed-face tools arranged to pinch work therebetween usually with an
    impact blow, and to thereupon move toward or away from each other while
    holding work, to impart upsetting or stretching force to the region of work
    between the pinched portions.  See accompanying diagram.



    Tool-complex with paired, coplanar tool-faces, arranged to upset flat work
    (subclass 395).

    (2)     Note.  The tools generally have a hammering or peening effect which
    distinguishes them from the nondeforming work clamps of subclasses 293+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302+,   for means or method of deforming metal by utilizing spaced,
    relatively movable work-gripping clamps arranged to upset or to stretch
    intervening portions of work.

    392+,   for apparatus comprising directly receding tool-faces for
    stretching work.

    396+    and 399+, for similar apparatus not restricted to coplanar paired
    tool-faces.


CLS 72/396
TXT Yieldable face portion or auxiliary tool on tool couple element:

    Device under subclass 394 wherein said movable work-engaging face portions
    are constituted by relatively distortable or displaceable parts of the
    work-engaging surface portion of one of said tools, or by a distinct
    relatively displaceable work-engaging member carrier by or associated with
    one of said tools, such that during an operation of the class type said
    relatively distortable or displaceable part or member, while in engagement
    with work, is distorted or bodily displaced with respect to its associated
    tool.

    (1)     Note.  A device of this subclass typically comprises an
    opposed-face tool couple wherein one or both of the tools carriers a
    resilient mounted auxiliary tool, or has a differentially yieldable (e.g.,
    elastic) face portion, thus modifying the effect obtainable with a simple
    tool couple.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    382,    for metal-deforming apparatus comprising a yieldable tool or
    face-portion on a tool element of an offset-tool-couple.


CLS 72/397
TXT On actuated tool:

    Device under subclass 396 wherein said relatively distortable or
    displaceable part or said distinct member is attached to or mounted on a
    driven element of a tool couple.

    (1)     Note.  The yieldable tool or face portion is thus driven by or with
    the active tool of a tool couple (see Figure B of the diagram accompanying
    subclass 398).

    (2)     Note.  For an indirectly driven tool (i.e., moved against work by
    force derived from another portion of the work), see the floating mandrel
    combination in subclass 398, below.  A floating mandrel is an active tool,
    although indirectly driven.  Compare the passive indirectly driven tools of
    subclass 396 above.

    (3)     Note.  The yieldable tool or member may constitute a "blank-holder"
    for frictionally restraining movement of work during deformation by a tool
    couple.  Any disclosure of work slippage or flow relative to a blank-holder
    or restraining element bars the combination from placement in the
    nondeforming work-gripping clamp area, see subclasses 293+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    293+,   for a positively gripping, nondeforming clamp element associated
    with a driven tool.

    350+,   for a yieldable blank-holder associated with a cup- or
    shell-drawing device.

    465.1+, for flexible or yieldable tool structure


CLS 72/398
TXT Movable toward and against portion of work (e.g., floating mandrel):

    Device under subclass 396 wherein said relatively distortable or
    displaceable part or said distinct member is disposed and arranged to be
    driven into deforming contact with work by the reaction force derived from
    the displacement of another portion of work undergoing deformation.

    (1)     Note.  The yieldable tool in this subclass is thus both in active
    and a passive tool; it takes reaction force from a portion of work and
    transfers it to another portion of work.

    (2)     Note.  Typical of this subclass is a "floating mandrel" which lies
    within hollow work while the latter is being subjected to external
    hammering or pressing treatment by an opposed-face tool couple.  The
    mandrel may serve merely to maintain the interior dimension of the work or
    it may permit and limit a redimensioning of the interior.  (See Figure A of
    the appended diagram).


    Examples of tool complex devices:

    A.      Floating mandrel (subclass 398)

    B.      Yieldable auxiliary tool (T3) on actuated tool (T1) (subclass 397)

    (3)     Note.  This subclass also accommodates the combination of one or
    more tools (dies or mere platens) interposed between successive layers of
    stacked workpieces in a press.


CLS 72/399
TXT Concurrently actuated tools:

    Device under subclass 394 comprising means so interconnecting the
    tool-moving or -guiding means as to cause or assure simultaneous movement
    of the movable tools.

    (1)     Note.  The tools are not required to be moved in exact synchronism
    to meet the definition of this subclass; but their cycles of motion must
    overlap, to distinguish from the sequentially driven or manipulated tools
    of subclass 403.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     76, 88+, and 119, for metal deformation by concurrently actuated
    rotating or gyrating tools.

    187+,   for metal deformation by concurrent actuation of "flying" tools.

    199+,   for a closed-die tool-complex with concurrently actuated tools.

    353.2+, for a closed-die tool-complex with concurrently actuated tools.

    383,    for concurrently actuated tools in an offset-face tool-complex.

    393,    for concurrently actuated receding tools (e.g., for stretching or
    flaring work).


CLS 72/400
TXT With co-acting fixed tool:

    Device under subclass 399 comprising a passive (i.e., nondriven)
    work-engaging tool designed and intended to oppose displacement of work
    which is subjected to deforming force by said movable tools.

    (1)     Note.  The fixed tool may be, for example, a rigid mandrel for
    supporting the end of a pipe being swaged between opposing hammers.  For a
    yieldable mounted mandrel see subclass 398 above. For an anvil with a
    yieldable portion see subclass 396.

    (2)     Note.  This and indented subclasses are not limited to devices for
    treating hollow work; the fixed tool may be, for example, a forming block
    against which a bar or sheet is forged or bent by two or more concurrently
    actuated tools.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    398,    for a loose or yieldably-mounted mandrel between the tools or an
    opposed-face tool couple.


CLS 72/401
TXT Between generally opposed stroke tools:

    Device under subclass 400 wherein two or more of said movable tools are
    arranged to approach said passive tool simultaneously from substantially
    opposite directions.

    (1)     Note.  The term "substantially opposite directions" is intended to
    include directions which afford cancellation or balancing out of much of
    their resultant forces on the work and the fixed tool.

    Evidence of this effect may be found in disclosure of light-weight
    construction, ease of holding the work, rapidity of operation, etc.


CLS 72/402
TXT All tools moveable radially inward:

    Device under subclass 399 comprising means to guide all the actuated tools
    for motion in the direction of a common point of convergence while said
    tools are deforming work.

    (1)     Note.  A typical device for this subclass is a rod or tube swagger
    with multiple hammers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76,     for a multiple-hammer swaging device with rotatable work or tool
    assembly.

    121,    for a metal-deforming device having rotation and radially inwardly
    moving tools.

    404,    for a swaging device having sequentially actuated tool-couples.

    408,    for a swaging device having only two opposed hammers.


CLS 72/403
TXT With means to  actuate tools in sequence:

    Device under subclass 394, not provided for in preceding subclasses,
    comprising force-transmitting drive trains for the two or more movable
    tools, said drive trains being so interrelated that one tool after another
    is forcibly driven into engagement with work and caused or permitted to
    remain in such engagement during an operation of the class type.

    (1)     Note.  A device in which tools are to be successively applied to
    work by an operative following a manipulative routine may be found in
    subclass 394. For subclass 403, interrelated tool drive means is required.
    An interlock device for releasing tools only in a predetermined sequence
    would be regarded as constituting such interrelationship.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404+,   for plural tool-couples, actuated and retracted in sequence.


CLS 72/404
TXT BY PLURAL TOOL COUPLES:

    Apparatus under the class definition, not provided for in a preceding
    subclass, and comprising two or more tool-couples.

    (1)     Note.  The apparatus may constitute plural devices, each of which
    is complete, per se, (e.g., two machines side by side or in tandem), or the
    devices may have parts in common (e.g., the arrangement of two hammers
    alternately engaging work lying on an anvil), but in any case the
    combination should fall short of constituting a tool-complex* for
    subclasses 381 and 394.

    (2)     Note.  A patent to a multi-tool station or progressive punch press
    may be placeable as an original copy in this subclass, whether it treats
    discrete blanks or a continuous strip of stock material.  If integral work
    material extends under a plurality of tools which do not have identical
    motions but which engage the material simultaneously, the combination may
    be placeable as a tool-complex* in the above noted subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  This is the residual locus for the combination of two or
    more metal-deforming devices.  To complete the search on such combinations,
    see all preceding subclasses which refer to plural operations or to
    different types of metal deformation; in the preceding subclasses, one
    operation or type of apparatus will be of a specified description (e.g.,
    subclass 348, cup or shell drawing with additional metal deformation).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for the combination of rotating or gyrating tool apparatus with
    other metal-deforming apparatus.

    130,    137, 152, 161, 168, and 177, for a combined operation including
    metal deformation by deflecting bodily moving work.

    187,    221, 256, 278+, 306+, 348+, 356, and 384, for a combined operation
    including one specified type.  (See (3) Note Above.)


CLS 72/405.01
TXT With means to feed work between plural tool stations:

    Device under subclass 404 including a first tool-couple* for deforming
    work, including a second tool-couple for subsequently deforming the same
    work, wherein the first and second tool-couples are located in spaced
    relationship, combined with an actuatable instrumentality for advancing
    work away from the region of effectiveness of the first tool-couple and
    into the region of effectiveness of the second tool-couple.

    (1)     Note.  See section VII, A of this class for search references to
    other classes involving material handling.

    (2)     Note.  See the search notes under subclass 404 above for
    combinations of metal-deforming apparatus which are likely to include work
    feeding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324+,   for metal deforming combined with cutting and with a means to
    advance the work from one operation to the other.

    419+,   for a metal deforming means combined with means to handle work or
    product, generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    901,    Robots, subcollection 6+ for a robot for feeding work between
    plural tool stations.


CLS 72/405.02
TXT Belt or chain work carrier:

    Device under subclass 405.01 wherein the means to advance work between
    tool-couples comprises either a flexible elongated strap or a series of
    links journaled to one another.


CLS 72/405.03
TXT Rotary work carrier (e.g. Turret):

    Device under subclass 405.01 wherein the means to advance work includes an
    angularly displacable member which moves the work between angularly spaced
    tool-couples.


CLS 72/405.04
TXT Threaded rod work carrier:

    Device under subclass 405.01 wherein the means to advance work includes a
    helically grooved shaft which draws the work or work holder between the
    tool-couples.


CLS 72/405.05
TXT Sliding table work carrier:

    Device under subclass 405.01 wherein the means to advance work includes a
    work supporting platform which glides between the tool-couples.


CLS 72/405.06
TXT Continuous stock feed:

    Device under subclass 405.01 wherein the means to advance work between
    tool-couples consists of means for advancing long work without engaging
    more than one end of the work.


CLS 72/405.07
TXT Work pushed between tool stations:

    Device under subclass 405.01 wherein the means to advance work between
    tool-couples includes a mechanism to shove the work from tool-couple to
    another.


CLS 72/405.08
TXT Including means to store work:

    Device under subclass 405.01 wherein the means to advance work between tool
    couples includes structure for retaining the work  for an indefinite period
    of time.


CLS 72/405.09
TXT Work grasping:

    Device under subclass 405.01 including a mechanism which physically grips
    the work.


CLS 72/405.1
TXT Suction device (e.g., suction cup):

    Device under subclass 405.09 including structure to apply a vacuum to grip
    the work.


CLS 72/405.11
TXT Reciprocating work feeder:

    Device under subclass 405.09 wherein the means to advance work between tool
    couples moves back and forth between the tool couples.


CLS 72/405.12
TXT Having work grasping jaws:

    Device under subclass 405.11 including a pair of angularly movable pincers
    which grip the work.


CLS 72/405.13
TXT Adapted to grasp work laterally (e.g., by gripper rail or transfer fingers):

    Device under subclass 405.11 including means to grip the work
    perpendicularly to the direction of the work feed.


CLS 72/405.14
TXT Telescoping work gripper:

    Device under subclass 405.13 including a work gripper intended to move in
    and out of an internal passage.


CLS 72/405.15
TXT Rotational movement:

    Device under subclass 405.13 wherein the work gripper has an component of
    angular motion.


CLS 72/405.16
TXT Lifting movement:

    Device under subclass 405.13 wherein the work gripper is moved to lift the
    work against the force of gravity.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are patents to a device for applying a clip
    to the snout of a swine regardless of the clip structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 700+ for means to assemble or disassemble
    work pieces together which recognize more than one work piece.

    81,     Tools, subclasses 300+ for plier type tools, generally.


CLS 72/406
TXT WITH MEANS TO EFFECT COMPOUND MOTION OF TOOL (E.G., ROCKING):

    Device under the class definition comprising means to move or guide a tool*
    in a generally tortuous path (i.e., neither wholly rectilinear nor wholly
    rotary about a fixed point) during a deforming operation.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is the residual locus of any metal-deforming
    device or portion thereof, not provided for in preceding subclasses, which
    comprises a tool guided or driven toward its effective position in a
    nonsimple path; such path may be, for example, a succession of broken line
    segments or a smooth (but nonarcurate) curve such as a spiral or an ellipse.

    (2)     Note.  For placement in this subclass, the device must comprise
    means to cause the tool to depart from simple rectilinear or circular
    motion; e.g., if the tool is merely deflected from an otherwise simple path
    by the resistance of work, whether this be an intended or unintended
    condition of operation, the combination does not meet the terms of the
    subclass definition.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass accommodates a "rolling form" which picks up
    and bends or curls work as it travels thereover; the motion of the
    effective tool-face* is cycloidal, and the operation does not constitute
    "rolling" for subclass 199, because the tool-face remains in contact with
    the deformed work (see ROLLER* in section III of this class).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    293+,   for relatively movable work-clamp and tool.

    353.2+, 381+, 393, and 394+, for a tool-complex* which may involve
    nonsimple tool motion.

    429+,   for means to drive a metal-deforming tool, in general.


CLS 72/407
TXT WITH MEANS TO ACTUATE BOTH ELEMENTS OF TOOL COUPLE:

    Device under the class definition comprising two coacting tools* and
    power-transmitting linkage which is effective to move said tools in the
    performance of a deforming operation.

    (1)     Note.  The tool-couple found in this and indented subclasses is
    generally of the opposed-face type. Subclass 407 contains, for example,
    disclosures of fluid-pressure actuated riveting machines; and subclasses
    409.01+ contain plier-type devices.

    (2)     Note.  Many examples of a metal- deforming tool-couple with both
    tools actuated, will be found in preceding subclasses directed to specific
    types of apparatus.


CLS 72/408
TXT By continuously rotating shaft:

    Device under subclass 407 comprising a powered rotary element (e.g., a
    motor shaft), and means for connecting said power-transmitting linkage to
    said rotary element to actuate said tool-couple, without halting the motion
    of said rotary element.


CLS 72/409.01
TXT Handle actuated (e.g., plier type, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 407 comprising a graspable member
    mechanically coupled to said power transmitting linkage and adapted to
    transmit manual energy exerted by an operative to said tools.

    (1)     Note.  This is the residual locus for metal deforming devices of
    the handle actuated plier type.  Similarly actuated devices may be found in
    preceding subclasses providing for the specific type of operation performed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 700+ for means to assemble or disassemble
    work pieces together which recognize more than one work piece.

    81,     Tools, subclasses 300+ for plier type tools, generally.


CLS 72/409.02
TXT Hog ringer:

    Apparatus under subclass 409.01 having structure adapted to deform the end
    portions of a relatively thick clip (e.g., a staple, etc.) toward each
    other.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are patents to a device for applying a clip
    to the snout of a swine regardless of the clip structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    409.05, for a surgical clip applier intended to piercingly secure together
    adjacent edges of living tissue.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 138.2+ for clip or staple appliers
    intended to close a package.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclasses 175+ for surgical
    stapling apparatus having an anvil into which a staple is driven and
    thereby deformed.

    606,    Surgery, subclass 117 for a device to apply an identification tag
    directly to an animal and subclasses 142+ for a clip applier for
    application of a clip to tissue wherein the clip being applied does not
    pierce the tissue.


CLS 72/409.03
TXT With supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 409.02 including means to store plural clips.


CLS 72/409.04
TXT With work supply or feed:

    Subject matter under subclass 409.01 including means to store a plurality
    of work or means to advance the work from a storage position to a position
    where the work can be deformed by said tools.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    409.15, for apparatus for applying a plurality of belt fastening clips
    substantially simultaneously.


CLS 72/409.05
TXT Surgical clip:

    Subject matter under subclass 409.04 wherein the work is intended to
    piercingly retain plural edges of animal tissue in abutting relationship.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    409.02+,for apparatus to deform a clip through the snout of a swine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclasses 175+ for surgical
    stapling apparatus having an anvil into which a staple is driven and
    thereby deformed.

    606,    Surgery, subclass 117 for means to apply a marking clip to an
    animal which does not pierce the tissue and subclasses 142+ for surgical
    clip appliers for clips which do not pierce the tissue.


CLS 72/409.06
TXT Electrical connector:

    Subject matter under subclass 409.04 wherein the work comprises structure
    for conducting electrical current and which is crimpable onto a wire
    capable of conducting electrical current.


CLS 72/409.07
TXT Multiple stroke actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 409.01 having means for progressively
    operating said tools in response to plural manipulative cycles of the
    graspable member by the operative.


CLS 72/409.08
TXT Tool having constant angular orientation:

    Subject matter under subclass 409.01 wherein said tools are relatively
    translatable with respect to each other in fixed alignment.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this subclass the patent must disclose
    tools which do not rotate with respect to each other.


CLS 72/409.09
TXT Including cam:

    Subject matter under subclass 409.08 wherein said power transmitting
    linkage includes a member having a profiled surface (i.e., a cam) adapted
    for sliding or rolling contact with a follower member along said surface so
    as to relatively displace said follower member in a direction generally
    normal to said surface.


CLS 72/409.1
TXT Including cam:

    Subject matter under subclass 409.01 wherein said power transmitting
    linkage includes a member having a profiled surface (i.e., a cam) adapted
    for sliding or rolling contact with a follower member along said surface so
    as to relatively displace said follower member in a direction generally
    normal to said surface.


CLS 72/409.11
TXT Plural tools pivotal with respect to plural handles:

    Subject matter under subclass 409.01 including two graspable members and
    wherein each of said tools is angularly movable with respect to each
    graspable member through an articulatable linkage.


CLS 72/409.12
TXT Toggle:

    Subject matter under subclass 409.01 wherein said power transmitting
    linkage includes two elongate members and a pivotal joint connecting said
    elongate members together such that a force applied to said joint is
    converted to a force tending to change the angle of separation of said
    elongate members.

    (1)     Note.  As the angle of separation of the members moves toward 180
    degrees the overall dimension of the linkage approaches a maximum.  As the
    angle of separation between said members increases past 180 degrees the
    linkage is referred to as "locked".


CLS 72/409.13
TXT Including distinct work retaining or positioning means:

    Subject matter under subclass 409.01 including means separate from said
    tools for supporting or spatially orienting the work with respect to said
    tools.


CLS 72/409.14
TXT Electrical connector:

    Subject matter under subclass 409.13 wherein the work comprises structure
    for conducting electrical current and which is crimpable onto a wire
    capable of conducting electrical current.


CLS 72/409.15
TXT Belt clip:

    Subject matter under subclass 409.13 wherein the work comprises a plurality
    of fasteners arranged for piercingly attaching two longitudinal ends of a
    substantially flat flexible elongate member together to form an endless
    loop.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 31+ for belt fasteners,
    per se.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems and Components, for endless
    belts, per se.


CLS 72/409.16
TXT Including selectable or replaceable tool:

    Subject matter under subclass 409.01 including a plurality of said coacting
    tools alternatively choosable by an operative or means providing for the
    substitution of one of said tools for another.

    (1)     Note.  A device having an inherently replaceable tool without
    specific disclosure to a replaceable tool function is insufficient for
    classification in this subclass.


CLS 72/409.17
TXT Spreader:

    Subject matter under subclass 409.01 wherein said power transmitting
    linkage is configured to separate the tools with the energy applied by the
    operative.

    (1)     Note.  Many handle operated devices may inherently be used to
    separate tools under force.  For classification in this subclass the device
    must separate the tools using the energy of the operative as its normal
    disclosed function.


CLS 72/409.18
TXT Flanger or beader:

    Subject matter under subclass 409.01 wherein said tools are configured to
    create a lip in the work or to interlock plural edges of one or more
    articles of work together.


CLS 72/409.19
TXT Work comprises tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 409.01 wherein the work comprises a hollow
    elongate cylinder.

    Subject matter under subclass 409.01 including means separate from said
    tools for supporting or spatially orienting the work with respect to said
    tools.


CLS 72/411
TXT BY RELATIVELY MOVABLE TOOLS HAVING SLIDABLY ENGAGED WORK-CONFINING WALL
    MEANS (E.G., EDGEWISE SHEET METAL BENDER):

    Device under the class definition comprising means to move or guide one
    tool* with respect to another tool in a generally predetermined path, each
    said tool comprising a surface or wall portion extending forwardly of the
    tool-face* and in substantial alignment with the direction of relative
    motion between said tools, which surfaces or wall portions on coacting
    tools are laterally offset to accommodate work therebetween, and are each
    arranged to overlap and engage a lateral surface on the coacting tool
    during the approach of said tools for a deforming operation.

    (1)     Note.  A device of this type is frequently employed to perform a
    bending operation on sheet or thin plate material in the plane of this
    width, the added wall means on the dies serving to inhibit crumpling or
    buckling of the thin material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57+,    127+ and 359, for some examples of work confined but not deformed
    between slidably-engaged wall portions on tools while being deformed by the
    tool-faces.

    701,    for distortion preventing means which may comprise laterally spaced
    walls on tools.


CLS 72/412
TXT BY TOOL COUPLE EMBODYING NONPLANAR TOOL FACE:

    Device under the class definition comprising a tool-couple* and means to
    drive or guide one element of said couple in a predetermined path relative
    to the other element of said tool-couple to effect an operation of the
    class type, the tool-face* of at least one such element having a portion of
    three-dimensional configuration (e.g., grooved, concave, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Flat-face tool couples are excluded from this subclass
    because their functions are varied and nonspecialized.  Devices of the
    patents in this subclass are usually special-purpose machines (e.g., for
    die forging, for embossing sheet metal, for bending, etc.).

    (2)     Note.  Metal-deforming apparatus comprising relatively movable
    tools of specified shape, if not provided for in a preceding subclass, is
    generally placeable in the subclass or one of its indented subclasses; the
    tool-couple, per se, is classified in subclasses 470+ and a single tool
    element in subclasses 462+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    470+,   for a tool-couple, per se.


CLS 72/413
TXT With adjustable or replaceable section of tool face:

    Device under subclass 412 comprising structure which is designed and
    intended to facilitate alteration in size, shape, or position of one
    portion of the tool-face with respect to another portion thereof, or to
    facilitate removal of a tool-face portion and substitution of another.

    (1)     Note.  If a portion of a tool-face should yield or shift
    significantly during the deforming operation, the combination would
    constitute a tool-complex* for placement in subclasses 394+ above.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not relate to adjustable or removable
    mounting means for an entire tool as a unit, for which search subclasses
    462+ and appropriate subclasses directed to specified operations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93,     140, 157+, 173+, 195, 219, 238+, 260, and 276, for an adjustable or
    replaceable tool-face or section thereof in various specified
    metal-deforming devices.

    353.2+, 382 and 396+, for a yieldable face-portion of a tool.

    465.1+, for a flexible or yieldable tool or support.

    478,    for a tool having an adjustable or replaceable section.

    481.1+, for a holder for adjustable or removable tool-face.


CLS 72/414
TXT With complementary tool faces (e.g., for embossing):

    Device under subclass 412 wherein said tool-faces* have substantially equal
    areas and similar, but reversed, shapes or contours whereby they would be
    capable of substantially full surface contact (with allowance for the
    presence of uniform-thickness work therebetween), and including tool-faces
    which are complemental except for localized work-shape-conforming recesses
    or projections which have no disclosed deforming function.

    (1)     Note.  Mating tool faces are regarded as complementary for this
    subclass even though one or both faces have recesses to receive projections
    on work, such as rivet heads or ribs, providing there is no deformation of
    work in these recesses.

    (2)     Note.  The presence of mere work- positioning ribs, ledges, etc.,
    on otherwise complementary tool-faces does not bar placement in this
    subclass.

    (3)     Note.  Grooved pipe-bending dies, for example, are excluded from
    this subclass for it is evident that deformation takes place in the grooves
    (the work does not initially fit exactly in the grooves), and the grooves
    are not complementary.

    (4)     Note.  A small tool-face may be complementary to an opposed portion
    of a large tool, anvil, etc., but the combination is barred from this
    subclass because of their dissimilar areas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    343+,   for closed-die tool couple which may exhibit complementary faces.

    394+,   for opposed-face tool-complex which may exhibit complementary,
    sectional, tool-faces.

    475,    for a tool-couple with complementary faces.


CLS 72/415
TXT Constant profile (e.g., cylindrical segments):

    Device under subclass 414 wherein cross sections through the mating tool
    surfaces, taken in planes parallel to any given reference plane
    intersecting the surfaces, show identical contours.

    (1)     Note.  The tool face in this subclass have "singly curved"
    surfaces; they may comprise flat sections, dihedral angles, arcuate, or gee
    sections, etc., all aligned in the same direction.  Such tools effect
    "simple" angular or contour bending, i.e., without bulging, dishing, or
    warping of the work surface (see appended diagram).



    Product of a tool-couple having complementary faces of constant profile
    (subclass 415)

    (2)     Note.  Work-shape-conforming recesses may be present in the tool
    faces,

            with the same restrictions as expressed in the definition and notes
    of subclass 414.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    319+,   for the combination of a nondeforming work-clamp having a die
    surface extension, and a pivoted tool with complementary die face of
    constant profile.

    379.2+, for a process of deforming sheet material which may employ
    complementary die faces of constant profile.


CLS 72/416
TXT Similar tool faces:

    Device under subclass 412 wherein the tool-faces* have substantially
    identical shapes.


CLS 72/417
TXT INCLUDING INTERRELATED TOOL MOVER AND BLANK HOLDER MOVER:

    Device under the class definition including means to move and/or guide two
    or more relatively movable elements, a portion of the driving and/or
    guiding means of one movable element having a common connection with the
    driving and/or guiding means of another one of the movable elements, at
    least one of said elements being designed and intended to carry a
    work-engaging instrumentality which (when coupled with an opposing, but not
    claimed, instrumentality) will hold a portion of the work* during
    deformation thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The "movable elements", as used in the above definition, are
    frequently denoted as "slides" in patent disclosures.

    (2)     Note.  See the numerous subclass titles, in the schedule of this
    class, for expression such as: "clamps(s), "tool-complex", "frictional
    restraining force", "gripper(s)", "interrelated clamp and tool-mover",
    "means to hold", and "work-gripping", indicating subclasses which include
    interrelated relatively movable elements that operate in a manner similar
    to the device defined in this subclass.


CLS 72/418
TXT INCLUDING TOOL MEANS TO MOVE WORK TO OR AGAINST COOPERATING TOOL:

    Apparatus under the class definition provided with at least two tools
    acting together to deform work positioned therebetween, wherein one of the
    tools engages and impels the work bodily through space toward the other
    tool before the deformation occurs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 566+ for disclosure of similar structure
    wherein the tool is a cutter.


CLS 72/419
TXT WITH MEANS TO HANDLING WORK OR PRODUCTS:

    Apparatus under the class definition provided with means for moving or
    guiding or affecting the motion of work or product*.

    (1)     Note.  Various subclasses exist throughout the schedule of this
    class (72) to provide for a disclosure of a particular type of deformer and
    a work-handler or product-handler for use with that deformer.  The subclass
    titles will indicate such disclosed subject matter.

    (2)     Note.  For the lines between this subclass (and those indented
    hereunder) and classes relating to work handling, see section VII, A of
    this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, for conveyors, per se.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, for conveyors, per se.

    221,    Article Dispensing, for an article dispenser, per se.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, for handling, per se.


CLS 72/420
TXT Including means to permit maneuvering of work or product at tool zone:

    Apparatus under subclass 419 provided with means for enabling or
    facilitating the movement of work that is to be deformed or that is
    undergoing deformation, said movement being limited to the environment of
    the machine area in which deformation occurs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 249 and 445 for disclosure of similar structure
    in a cutting machine.

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 339.1+ for a conveyor having
    means for orienting the conveyed load at a work station; and subclasses
    373+ for a conveyor having means for changing the attitude of the conveyed
    load relative to the conveying direction.

    901,    Robots, subcollection 6+ for a robot maneuvering work or a product
    at a tool zone.


CLS 72/421
TXT With means to interrelate movement of tool and of work:

    Apparatus under subclass 420 wherein the tool is moved during deformation,
    which apparatus is provided with means ensuring that tool movements and
    work movements are synchronized or interdependent.

    (1)     Note.  In the disclosures of this subclass, a work-moving mechanism
    is driven by that power source which drives the tool-moving mechanism.


CLS 72/422
TXT By gripper and/or endless chain:

    Apparatus under subclass 419 including either a work-gripping clamp or a
    band that moves in a closed loop about a plurality of separated noncoaxial
    pulleys or sprockets.

    (1)     Note.  The phrase "work-gripping clamp" is defined in the
    definition and notes of subclass 293.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 151-155 for similar means for handling the
    product of a cutting operation.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses  468.2+, 470.1+ 803.3+, and
    803.8+ for a conveyor having load-gripping members, and appropriate
    subclasses for endless belt conveyors.

    901,    Robots, subcollection 31+ for a gripping device located on a robot.


CLS 72/423
TXT With drum carrier for gripper:

    Apparatus under subclass 422 wherein the work-gripping clamp is mounted on
    a generally cylindrical rotating member.


CLS 72/424
TXT With means to store workpieces (e.g., magazine):

    Apparatus under subclass 419 further provided with a receptacle that holds
    a supply of discrete articles of work to be deformed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 311, 359+, and 523+ for a
    power-driven conveyor combined with a hopper or chute.


CLS 72/425
TXT Including variable speed means:

    Apparatus under subclass 419 having means for changing the rate of movement
    of the work or the product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    279,    for disclosure of variable speed feed means and closed dies.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 577 for variable-speed conveyor
    drives.


CLS 72/426
TXT Including product handling means:

    Apparatus under subclass 419 wherein the product* is moved or guided.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    169 and 257, for disclosure of a deformer and a product-handler for
    that deformer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 78+ for product-handling means in a cutting
    machine.


CLS 72/427
TXT Ejector:

    Apparatus under subclass 426 comprising an element having a surface that is
    movable from a zone within the confines of a tool to a zone outside of the
    confines of said tool, whereby movement of the element positively displaces
    product from the tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 123+ for disclosure of an ejector within a
    cutting tool.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 476.1+ and 574 for a conveyor
    having a load ejector.


CLS 72/428
TXT Including work guide:

    Apparatus under subclass 419 wherein the handling is accomplished by
    passive means operating to define or limit the path of movement of moving
    work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230,    for disclosure of a "loop-return" guide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 599 and 633+ for passive means
    moving a load relative to a conveyor; and subclass 836.1 for a guide rail
    or other means retaining a load on an endless belt.


CLS 72/429
TXT WITH MEANS TO DRIVE TOOL:

    Apparatus under the class definition provided with means to move a movable
    tool toward work, or toward a cooperating tool, while deformation occurs as
    disclosed.

    (1)     Note.  For original placement of patents into this or indented
    subclasses, the following criteria should be applied: (a) "Drive" is tool
    movement toward the work for deformation of the work; (b) "Retraction"
    (i.e., tool movement away from the work) and other tool movements (e.g., to
    adjust the tool position relative to the work or another tool) are provided
    for only if tool drive is also claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    437+    and 445, for disclosure of particular tool-retracting means
    combined with tool-drive means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 523+, for disclosure of means to drive a
    cutter, which means may be similar to means in this class (72) to drive a
    deformer.


CLS 72/430
TXT Including magnet, solenoid, or explosive:

    Apparatus under subclass 429 wherein the tool moving means includes (a) a
    body capable of attracting ferrous material, or (b) a charge of chemically
    reactive material that rapidly expands upon actuation.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is not the locus of patents disclosing an
    electric motor (i.e., a stationary part and a continuously rotating part,
    the rotation occurring as the result of passing a current of electricity
    through one or both of the parts), which motor is the drive means for the
    tool.  This type of disclosure of a tool and an electric motor to drive the
    tool is located in other subclasses on the basis of the tool and its
    movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 575+ for disclosure of magnet or solenoid
    actuated cutting tool; and subclass 639.4 for explosive-actuated cutting
    tool.


CLS 72/431
TXT Including yieldable connection in drive train to movable tool:

    Apparatus under subclass 429 wherein the tool moving means includes
    mechanism for transmitting motion from a driving member to the tool, and
    said mechanism permits motion of the driving member (in a direction tending
    to urge the tool toward the work) even though motion of the tool has
    stopped.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this and indented subclasses is disclosure of a
    shock-absorber within the motion-transmitting mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 543 for disclosure of yieldable connection to
    drive a cutting tool.


CLS 72/432
TXT Including pneumatic or hydraulic connection:

    Apparatus under subclass 431 wherein the motion-transmitting mechanism
    includes a gaseous and/or fluid medium.

    (1)     Note.  A fluid medium, per se, is not necessarily yieldable or
    compressible. Therefore, a system comprising a generator of fluid pressure
    and a tool- moving motor using that pressure (the system having no
    pressure-relief device) is normally to be found in subclass 453.1.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    453.1,  and see (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 639.1+ for disclosure of
    fluid-pressure-actuated cutting tool.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, for disclosure of other hydraulic
    tool-drive means of general application.


CLS 72/433
TXT Including metallic spring connection:

    Apparatus under subclass 431 wherein the motion-transmitting mechanism
    includes an elastic body made of metal*.


CLS 72/434
TXT Coil spring:

    Apparatus under subclass 433 wherein the elastic body is in the form of a
    helical coil*.


CLS 72/435
TXT Mechanical potential energy drive means only:

    Apparatus under subclass 429 wherein the tool-moving means includes
    mechanism for converting latent power into developed power to drive the
    tool.

    (1)     Note.  Potential-energy resulting from gravitational attraction is
    the usual source of energy, but a spring interconnecting a tool with a
    tool-housing is also a source of energy in some disclosures of this
    subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 582+ for disclosure of constantly urged means
    for driving a cutting tool.


CLS 72/436
TXT With means to check energy for subsequent release:

    Apparatus under subclass 435 provided with means for maintaining the power
    in a latent condition, which means may be made temporarily inoperative,
    thereby liberating the latent power.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is the locus of patents disclosing a
    drop-hammer or trip-hammer wherein the drive means is held in a cocked
    position (i.e., energy is stored therein) until an operative triggers
    release of the energy.


CLS 72/437
TXT Wherein energy is stored by retraction of tool:

    Apparatus under subclass 435 wherein latent power is generated by moving
    the tool away from the work or away from a cooperating tool.


CLS 72/438
TXT With means to control force of blow:

    Apparatus under subclass 437 provided with means for regulating or
    adjusting the power (either latent or developed) available for deformation.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of disclosures include a spring-urged tool wherein
    the spring compression may be varied, a drop-hammer wherein the lift of the
    tool may be varied, and a lever-urged tool wherein the mechanical advantage
    of the lever may be varied.


CLS 72/439
TXT Wherein tool is retracted by pinch rolls acting on rectilinearly moving
    tool support:

    Apparatus under subclass 437 wherein the tool* retracting means includes an
    elongated member located between two counter-rotating rollers that engage
    the member.

    (1)     Note.  In use, the rollers are rotated so that their surface
    tangent to the member travel in a direction to retract the tool and
    pressure is exerted on the rollers tending to grip the member. The member,
    and the tool carried thereby, is lifted until the pressure is released,
    permitting the tool to drop.


CLS 72/440
TXT Wherein tool is retracted by flexible strap:

    Apparatus under subclass 437 wherein the tool retracting means is a pliant
    belt fastened at one end to the tool and at the other end to a device
    (e.g., crank, disk or the like) that moves cyclically.

    (1)     Note.  In use, as the device moves through part of its cyclic
    movement it lifts the tool and during the remainder of the movement of the
    device the tool is free to drop.


CLS 72/441
TXT With means to selectably control movement of tool:

    Apparatus under subclass 429 provided with means for regulating or
    adjusting the rate or length of travel of a tool, or for permitting a tool
    to move or be stationary, said means acting only at the option of an
    operative.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of disclosures included in this and indented
    subclasses are (a) means for starting a tool in its driving movement, (b)
    means for varying the speed or length of stroke of a tool, and (c) means
    for driving any of a plurality of tools by one or a plurality of drive
    means.


CLS 72/442
TXT By drive means common to optionally selectable tools:

    Apparatus under subclass 441 including a plurality of tools* and a single
    tool-moving means alternatively connected to one of said tools.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 549+ for disclosure of plural cutting tool
    selectably engageable with single drive; and subclasses 618+ for disclosure
    of plural cutting tools with same drive means.


CLS 72/443
TXT To control speed of tool:

    Apparatus under subclass 441 wherein the operative causes regulation of the
    rate of travel of the tool.


CLS 72/444
TXT By means to connect and/or disconnect tool from its drive:

    Apparatus under subclass 441 provided with a tool-moving means and a power
    source therefor, wherein the means can be joined to its power source or be
    separated therefrom while the tool is stationary, at the choice of the
    operative.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 571+ for disclosure of similar structure for
    driving a cutting tool.


CLS 72/445
TXT With stored energy means to retract tool:

    Apparatus under subclass 429 provided with means (additional to the
    tool-driver) for developing and accumulating latent power, which power
    moves the tool away from the work or away from a cooperating tool.

    (1)     Note.  In the disclosures of this subclass the energy is usually
    stored by or during movement of the tool toward the work, but the subclass
    is also intended as a locus of disclosures wherein energy is stored (e.g.,
    a spring is cocked) by an operative or a motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    435,    for disclosure of potential-energy means for driving a tool.


CLS 72/446
TXT With means to permit tool positioning:

    Apparatus under subclass 429 provided with means for changing, or
    facilitating the changing of, the location of a tool relative to the work
    or a cooperating tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 559+ and 561+ for disclosure of structure for
    positioning a cutting tool or tools.

    483,    Tool Changing, subclasses 28+ for a reciprocating tool machine tool
    combined with a tool transfer means.


CLS 72/447
TXT To reposition line-of-action of tool:

    Apparatus under subclass 446 wherein the movable tool moves toward the work
    along a particular direction or course, of tool movement and wherein said
    means changes, or permits change in, the direction or course of tool
    movement.

    (1)     Note.  Most patents in this subclass disclose tool repositioning at
    right angles to the direction of tool movement.


CLS 72/448
TXT To position stationary tool of tool pair:

    Apparatus under subclass 446 wherein the movable tool cooperates with a
    second relatively immovable tool, and wherein said means changes the
    location of said second tool relative to the work or the movable tool.


CLS 72/449
TXT Including gear-actuated tool support:

    Apparatus under subclass 429 wherein the tool is moved by a gear that is
    directly connected to the tool or to an element that carries the tool and
    partakes of all its movements.

    (1)     Note.  The word "gear" is defined in the definition of Class 74,
    subclass 640 and is used herein to describe the same structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 603 and 629 for a disclosure of gear-actuated
    cutting tool.


CLS 72/450
TXT Including link-actuated tool support:

    Apparatus under subclass 429 wherein the tool is moved by a pitman that is
    pivoted to a tool or to an element that carries the tool and partakes of
    all its movements.


CLS 72/451
TXT Toggle links:

    Apparatus under subclass 450 wherein the pitman is part of toggle joint.

    (1)     Note.  The phrase "toggle joint" is defined in the definition of
    subclass 300 of Class 81, and is used herein to describe the same structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 604 and 630 for disclosure of
    toggle-link-actuated cutting tool.


CLS 72/452.1
TXT Including cam-actuated support:

    Apparatus under subclass 429 wherein the tool is moved by a cam engaging
    the tool or an element that carries the tool and partakes of all its
    movement.

    (1)     Note.  The word "cam" is defined in the definition of Class 74,
    subclass 567 and is used herein to describe the same structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 602 and 628, for disclosure of cam-actuated
    cutting tool.


CLS 72/452.2
TXT Pivotal cam:

    Apparatus under subclass 452.1 wherein the cam is journaled to move
    angularly about an axis of rotation.


CLS 72/452.3
TXT Internal cam:

    Apparatus under subclass 452.2 wherein the cam includes radially inwardly
    facing camming surface.


CLS 72/452.4
TXT Rotary cam:

    Apparatus under subclass 452.2 wherein the cam continuously rotates about
    the axis of rotation.


CLS 72/452.5
TXT Eccentric circle (e.g., crank):

    Apparatus under subclass 452.4 wherein the camming surface is spaced
    equidistant from the cam's central axis and the axis of rotation is offset
    from the cam's central axis.


CLS 72/452.6
TXT Radial cam face:

    Apparatus under subclass 452.4 wherein the camming surface is oriented
    perpendicular to the axis of rotation.


CLS 72/452.7
TXT Axial cam face:

    Apparatus under subclass 452.4 wherein the camming surface is oriented
    parallel to the axis of rotation.


CLS 72/452.8
TXT Linear cam:

    Apparatus under subclass 452.1 wherein the cam moves along a straight path.


CLS 72/452.9
TXT Inclined cam (e.g., inclined plane):

    Apparatus under subclass 452.8 wherein the camming surface oriented at a
    constant angle to the line or plane of the actuating movement.


CLS 72/453.01
TXT Including pneumatic- or fluid-actuated tool support:

    Apparatus under subclass 429 including means to force the tool (or an
    element that carries the tool and partakes of all its movement) to move
    toward the work and perform a desired deforming operation by use of a
    fluent of liquid medium under pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54+,    for a pressurized-fluid means engaging and deforming work.

    432,    for fluid means in a yieldable connection.

    481.2,  for a pneumatic- or fluid- actuated means to reposition or retain a
    tool face with respect to the tool support or holder.

    481.3,  for a threaded means to move or hold a tool face with respect to
    its support or holder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 639.1+, for a fluid pressure-actuated driver
    for a cutting tool.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 269.01+ for a fluid pressure actuated
    reciprocating press construction


CLS 72/453.02
TXT Multiple or staged drive means:

    Apparatus under subclass 453.01 including an additional means to force the
    tool to move toward the work and perform the desired deforming operation.

    (1)     Note.  Means acting to move the tool in the direction away from the
    work, e.g., a biasing return spring, is not considered to be a tool drive
    means.

    (2)     Note.  Means serving to yieldably connect or cushion a tool
    relative to a tool drive means is not considered to be a tool drive means.


CLS 72/453.03
TXT With mechanical drive means:

    Apparatus under subclass 453.02 wherein the additional means forcing the
    tool toward the work includes a mechanical structure, e.g., a screw, cam,
    lever, or hammer.


CLS 72/453.04
TXT Fluid high pressure/mechanical low pressure:

    Apparatus under subclass 453.03 wherein the first means, the fluid means,
    forcing the tool toward the work serves to urge the tool with relatively
    high force and wherein the second means, the mechanical means, serves to
    urge the tool with relatively low force.


CLS 72/453.05
TXT Displacement additive:

    Apparatus under subclass 453.02 wherein one of the means forcing the tool
    toward the work tranmits movement to the other forcing means so that the
    amount of tool movement is dependent on the total movement of the two means.


CLS 72/453.06
TXT Pressure additive:

    Apparatus under subclass 453.02 wherein one of the means forcing the tool
    toward the work transmits force to the tool and wherein the other means
    forcing the tool toward the work transmits force to the tool so that the
    total force acting on the tool represents the sum of the forces of the two
    forcing means.


CLS 72/453.07
TXT Axially aligned pistons:

    Apparatus under subclass 453.06 wherein the first means and the second
    means forcing the tool toward the work are pneumatic or fluid actuated and
    wherein each includes piston means, the first and second piston means being
    connected together in alignment along the direction of movement of the tool.


CLS 72/453.08
TXT Independently actuated means:

    Apparatus under subclass 453.06 including means to supply liquid medium
    under pressure to one of the tool forcing means and means to supply liquid
    medium under pressure to the other of the tool forcing means wherein the
    first supply and the second supply are not entirely dependent one on the
    other.


CLS 72/453.09
TXT Pull-down press:

    Apparatus under subclass 453.06 including a tool supporting structure such
    that the tool is positioned above the floor that would be the general
    support means for the apparatus and wherein the tool-forcing means are
    positioned below the floor and act through connecting tie members to force
    the tool down toward the work and the floor in a deforming stroke.


CLS 72/453.1
TXT Utilizing stored energy:

    Apparatus under subclass 453.01 including provision to accumulate a tool
    moving force for subsequent release.


CLS 72/453.11
TXT Stored kinetic energy:

    Apparatus under subclass 453.1 wherein the force accumulation provision
    includes a member adapted to be put in motion so that the energy of motion
    of that member can be subsequently utilized to perform a deforming
    operation.

    (1)     Note.  The member in motion is other than parts normally in motion
    during approach of the tool toward the work; i.e., stored energy is
    intended to be subsequently utilized.


CLS 72/453.12
TXT Pull-down press:

    Apparatus under subclass 453.01 including a tool supporting structure such
    that would be the general support structure of the apparatus and wherein
    the tool forcing means is positioned below the floor and acts through
    connecting tie members to force the tool down toward the work and the floor
    in a deforming stroke.


CLS 72/453.13
TXT Including fluid cushion for die opposite to ram:

    Apparatus under subclass 453.01 including a tool couple wherein one tool
    includes a pneumatic- or fluid-actuated tool support and wherein the other
    tool is supported on a compressible fluid medium such that the other tool
    will move away from the driven tool under extreme pressure.


CLS 72/453.14
TXT With ram or tool support aligning means:

    Apparatus under subclass 453.01 including a tool couple and including means
    to adjust the support of one tool of the couple or means to adjust the
    guiding means of the driven tool of the couple to change the abutting
    relationship of the two tools.


CLS 72/453.15
TXT Randomly manipulated or work-supported tool:

    Apparatus under subclass 453.01 including provision to allow the apparatus
    to be moved at will relatively to the deforming station, (i.e., the
    apparatus is adapted to be brought to the work rather than have the work
    brought to the apparatus) or including provision to attach the apparatus to
    the work to be supported thereby during deformation of the work.


CLS 72/453.16
TXT With handle for manual manipulation:

    Apparatus under subclass 453.15 including a structure particularly adapted
    to be grasped by an operative to assist in moving the apparatus to the
    deforming station.


CLS 72/453.17
TXT Riveting tool:

    Apparatus under subclass 453.16 particularly adapted to deform a rodlike
    fastener to cause that fastener to be confined to not move through an
    aperture in another member.

    (1)     Note.  A "pop rivet" consisting of a tube and encased rod is
    considered to be a single work part; accordingly, a device for causing such
    a rivet to engage the walls of an opening in another member is proper for
    this subclass, provided that the device engages only parts of the rivet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 700+ for means to assemble a first work
    part which is tubular and a second work part which is rodlike.


CLS 72/453.18
TXT Having hydraulic or pneumatic return:

    Apparatus under subclass 453.01 wherein the tool is moved by a fluent or
    liquid medium toward the work and is also moved away from the work by a
    fluent or liquid medium.


CLS 72/453.19
TXT Riveting tool:

    Apparatus under subclass 453.18 particularly adapted to deform a rodlike
    fastener to cause that fastener to be confined to not move through an
    aperture in another member.

    (1)     Note.  A blind rivet consisting of a tube and an encased rod is
    considered to be a single work part; accordingly, a device for causing such
    a rivet to engage the walls of an opening in another member is proper for
    this subclass, provided that the device engages only parts of the rivet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 700+ for means to assemble a first work
    part which is tubular and a second work part which is rodlike.


CLS 72/454
TXT Including screw-actuated tool support:

    Apparatus under subclass 429 wherein the tool is directly moved by a
    helically threaded member threadedly connected to the tool or to an element
    that carries the tool and partakes of all its movements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248,    for disclosure of "screw-down" mechanism in a roller-couple.

    481.3+, for a threaded means to position or retain a tool face to a support
    or holder therefor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 631, for disclosure of screw-actuated cutting
    tool.


CLS 72/455
TXT WITH TOOL CARRIER (E.G., PRESS FRAME):

    Apparatus under the class definition provided with means for constraining
    the movement of a tool to a predetermined direction or course of movement.

    (1)     Note.  In a typical patent of this subclass the disclosure is clear
    as to metal deformation.  However, the claimed subject matter recites
    merely the environment of the tool or its support.  For example, a patent
    herein may claim the housing wherein the tool is located for movement, or
    guide wherein the tool support slides.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 701 for disclosure of a frame or housing for a
    cutting device.


CLS 72/456
TXT With guide for rectilinearly moving tool:

    Apparatus under subclass 455 provided with passive means limiting the path
    or movement of the tool to a straight line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 523 for disclosure of a guide for a movable
    cutter.


CLS 72/457
TXT BY OR WITH WORK CONSTRAINER AND/OR MANIPULATED WORK FORCER:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising means for (a) holding
    a work-portion against movement, or (b) causing movement of a work portion,
    or both (a) and (b) which means, as disclosed, facilitates or causes
    deformation by or during movement of one portion of a workpiece relative to
    another portion of said workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  The term "by or with", in the title, is intended to include
    structure wherein the deformation occurs as a result of the intended use of
    a claimed work-holder or work-forcer; or structure wherein deformation is
    caused by a disclosed (but not claimed) apparatus, which latter structure
    includes a claimed work-holder or work-forcer in addition to said apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211,    for disclosure of a carrier for a manipulated or
    maneuverable-roller couple.


CLS 72/458
TXT Comprising lever manipulated to force work:

    Implement under subclass 457 wherein movement of one work portion (relative
    to another) is caused by a device having means for holding the work portion
    fixedly thereto and an elongated extension, which device is disclosed as
    moved by an operative grasping the extension.

    (1)     Note.  It is not necessary for a work-holder to grip the work
    tightly.  An element in frictional engagement with the work, whereby
    relative movement therebetween is restrained will fit the concept of this
    subclass.


CLS 72/459
TXT With work-complementing tool face adjacent to work-gripping clamp:

    Implement under subclass 458 provided with a work-engaging deforming
    surface closely proximate the work-holding means, which surface, as
    disclosed, conforms to at least a part of the work.

    (1)     Note.  The device disclosed in this and the preceding subclass is
    sometimes known in the plumbing trade as a "pipe hickey".  In use, a hook
    on the device is applied to the work and force is applied to the lever in a
    direction tending to partially wrap the work around the tool-face defined,
    which tool face then mates with the inner curve of the work deformed
    thereby.


CLS 72/460
TXT Comprising nondeforming work-gripping clamp having adjacent tool face:

    Device under subclass 457 having a work-gripping clamp for holding a work
    portion, and provided with a work-engaging deforming surface closely
    proximate said clamp.

    (1)     Note.  The term "work-gripping clamp" has been defined in the
    definition of subclass 293 and is used herein to describe the same
    structure.


CLS 72/461
TXT Comprising work-stopping abutment:

    Device under subclass 457 having means which provides an obstacle to
    movement of a workpiece during deformation thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is disclosure of a work-gage or
    back stop, provided that the line-of-reaction of such device is along or
    parallel to the path of movement of the workpiece.


CLS 72/462
TXT TOOL AND/OR TOOL HOLDER:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising a tool*; or comprising a
    device connected to a tool* for mounting or supporting the tool against
    gravity, which device partakes of all the motion of the tool during
    deformation.

    (1)     Note.  With respect to the definition of tool-holder (i.e., the
    supporting device) an original patent claiming relative movement of a tool
    and it tool-holder for purposes of adjustment of one relative to the other
    may be placed in this or an indented subclass.

    (2)     Note.  This and indented subclasses are the residual loci of
    patents disclosing metal-deforming tools of general or unspecified use.
    Patents disclosing a specific tool, (e.g., fluent tool, roller-couple,
    closed-die) will be found in corresponding subclasses higher in the
    schedule than this one. Those patents claiming a tool particularly
    identified by disclosure as usable in a specific environment have been
    cross-referenced into the subclass pertaining to that environment.

    (3)     Note.  During the analysis of patents to be placed in this and
    indented subclasses, the names applied to tools, (e.g., "anvil", "die",
    "mandrel", etc.) and the functions attributed to such tools, (e.g.,
    "threading-die", "wedging block", etc.) were found to be arbitrary or not
    pertinent.  Art terminology was found to refer to essentially similar
    structures by different names or functions, or to apply the same names or
    functions to widely divergent structures.  For these reasons, the
    traditional names for the tools placed herein have been disregarded, and
    classification thereof has been based on structure without regard to
    function.


CLS 72/463
TXT With nondeforming passageway:

    Apparatus under subclass 462 having an orifice therein, which orifice
    facilitates the movement of material therethrough but does not deform work.

    (1)     Note.  The orifice permits the passage of such exemplary materials
    as lubricating oil, air, coolant, work or product, but the orifice itself
    has no deforming function on work or product pieces.


CLS 72/464
TXT Including deforming tool and cutting tool:

    Apparatus under subclass 462 having at least two members or portions of a
    member, wherein one of said members or portions is disclosed as a cutter
    and another of said members or portions is disclosed as a deforming tool*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     186, 204, and 325+, for disclosure of a composite cutting,
    deforming tool.


CLS 72/465.1
TXT Including flexible or yieldable tool or support:

    Apparatus under subclass 462 wherein the tool is pliant or resilient, or
    wherein the tool or its tool-holder is mounted on a pliant or resilient
    means.

    (1)     Note. This subclass provides the locus for patents disclosing a
    pressure resistant tool capable of moving to absorb part of the pressure
    required for deformation and of returning to its original position.


CLS 72/466
TXT Flexible or articulated backup:

    Apparatus under subclass 465.1 wherein the tool operates as a passive
    reaction member, and wherein the tool or its tool-holder comprises a pliant
    member or a plurality of elements jointly linked together to permit the
    elements to move relatively to each other.


CLS 72/466.2
TXT Bending mandrel:

    Apparatus under subclass 465.1 wherein a passive implement is received
    within a passage in the work* for the purpose of supporting the passage
    during a bending process.


CLS 72/466.3
TXT Overload release:

    Apparatus under subclass 465.1 adapted to breakaway upon occurrence of
    excessive force.


CLS 72/466.4
TXT Riveting tool:

    Apparatus under subclass 465.1 particularly adapted to deform a rodlike
    fastener to cause that fastener to be confined to not move through an
    aperture in another member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    453.17, 453.19, for a riveting tool which includes a pneumatic- or
    fluid-actuated tool support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 243.521 and 243.53+ for a riveting tool
    that recognizes the presence of a first and second work piece.


CLS 72/466.5
TXT Rivet bucker or dolly:

    Apparatus under subclass 466.4 wherein an implement passively engages the
    rodlike fastener during deformation.


CLS 72/466.6
TXT Handtool (e.g., hammer or dolly):

    Apparatus under subclass 465.1 wherein an implement is adapted to be
    manually driven or manipulated during use.


CLS 72/466.7
TXT Fluid pressure supported:

    Apparatus under subclass 465.1 wherein a gas or a liquid is confined in an
    enclosure which functions as an elastic member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    453.13, for a press using a fluid pressure support.


CLS 72/466.8
TXT Resilient material:

    Apparatus under subclass 465.1 wherein a tool* or tool holder*  consists in
    part or whole of a substance which yields under pressure and elastically
    rebounds upon relieving the pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54+,    for application of a fluent medium (e.g., an elastomeric tool face).

    350+,   for blank holders.


CLS 72/466.9
TXT Metal spring (e.g., coil or leaf):

    Apparatus under subclass 466.8 wherein the resilient material is a
    mechanically configured metal member which operates within the elastic
    limits of that metal.

    (1)     Note.  A metal member experiencing permanent deformation is
    excluded from this subclass.


CLS 72/467
TXT Tool comprising closed periphery deforming passageway:

    Apparatus under subclass 462 wherein the tool defines an orifice having an
    uninterrupted circumference, and the work-engaging boundary surface of the
    orifice is disclosed as deforming work that moves bodily therethrough.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 461+ for a means providing a shaping orifice for extrusion
    apparatus for nonmetals.


CLS 72/468
TXT Including adjustable size or multiple passageway:

    Apparatus under subclass 467 wherein the dimensions of the orifice may be
    altered or wherein a plurality of orifices is provided.


CLS 72/469
TXT Tool-comprising die plate having ribs and/or grooves:

    Apparatus under subclass 462 including a work-deforming surface having a
    plurality of extended, alternating hills and valleys bounded generally by
    two substantially parallel planes.

    (1)     Note.  The tool defined above is used in the disclosures placed in
    subclasses 88+.  For further description of such a tool and its action on
    the work especially when two such tools cooperate with each other, see the
    definitions and notes of subclasses 88+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88+,    180, 188, and 221+, for disclosures of a tool having ribs and/or
    grooves.


CLS 72/470
TXT Including tool couple or die couple (e.g., opposed die faces):

    Apparatus under subclass 462 comprising two tools disposed opposite one
    another such that work may be located therebetween.

    (1)     Note.  Patents placed in this and indented subclasses disclose a
    tool-couple wherein the tools may be fixed or movable relative to each
    other during use, but in either case it is clear from the disclosure that
    the tools cooperate with each other to form a tool-couple.


CLS 72/471
TXT With intermediate tool:

    Apparatus under subclass 470 provided with at least a third tool, which the
    third tool is located in the space between the work-engaging faces of the
    two tools.

    (1)     Note.  Exemplary patents in this subclass disclose a core
    supporting the interior of hollow-work* while two tools deform the exterior
    of the work into the shape of the core.


CLS 72/472
TXT Including plural tool couples:

    Apparatus under subclass 470 comprising at least two separate tool couples.

    (1)     Note.  For placement in this subclass, a patent should claim two
    (or more) tool-couples, each of the two having the limitations stated in
    the definition of subclass 470.  Exemplary patents herein disclose the tool
    couples operating sequentially or simultaneously.


CLS 72/473
TXT Having adjustable face:

    Apparatus under subclass 470 wherein at least one of the tools engages work
    with a surface having a shape or configuration that can be changed.


CLS 72/474
TXT Having nonsymmetrical face:

    Apparatus under subclass 470 wherein the work-engaging surface of one tool
    of a tool-couple has a nonplanar shape of configuration different from the
    work-engaging surface of the other tool of said tool-couple.

    (1)     Note.  For the purpose of this definition a tool-couple having
    mirror-image faces is considered to be symmetrical and a patent disclosing
    such tool faces will not be placed in this or indented subclasses, but will
    be found in subclass 470, or an appropriate subclass indented thereunder.


CLS 72/475
TXT Complementary faces:

    Apparatus under subclass 474 wherein the work-engaging surfaces of the
    tools conform to each other (with allowance for the presence of
    uniform-thickness work there-between).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     105, 179, 196, 375, 385, 414, and 469, for additional disclosure of
    tool-couple having complementary tool-faces.


CLS 72/476
TXT Having unitary tool face:

    Apparatus under subclass 462 comprising one tool having at least one
    work-engaging surface that acts (or reacts) as a single device during
    deformation.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses do not bar therefrom a
    disclosure of a tool having a surface with a plurality of work deforming
    faces, provided that only one face of such tool is used (at any one period
    of time) during one deformation, and another face is used during another
    deformation.  See the definitions and notes for subclasses 477 and 478 for
    such usages.


CLS 72/477
TXT Including optionally selectable faces:

    Apparatus under subclass 476 wherein the tool has at least two
    work-engaging surfaces, of which surfaces one or another is used, at the
    choice of the operative, during deformation.

    (1)     Note.  The disclosures of this subclass should not be confused with
    those of subclasses having the phrase "plural faces" (or equivalent
    expression) in their titles.  In this subclass (477) one face of a tool or
    another face (or another portion of the first-mentioned face) is used at
    the option of the operative, and this choice is clear from the claimed
    disclosure.  In the other (i.e., "plural faces") subclasses, the use of
    plural faces in succession or alternation (as well as simultaneously) is
    clear, or the specification falls short of clearly disclosing a choice of
    faces.


CLS 72/478
TXT Comprising plural sections fixed together in use (e.g., adjustable or
    collapsible):

    Apparatus under subclass 476 wherein the work-engaging surface is
    constructed from the surfaces of a plurality of elements, which elements
    are held rigidly with respect to each other during a deforming operation.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is a locus of patents disclosing a tool that
    can be collapsed for insertion into, or removal from, a workpiece.


CLS 72/479
TXT With elongated extension fixed to tool face in use (e.g., handle or shank):

    Apparatus under subclass 476 having a prolongation that performs a function
    other than deformation.

    (1)     Note.  The function stated is usually to facilitate the grasping of
    the tool by the hand of the operative, but the function may also be to
    serve as a means to connect the tool to a tool-driver.


CLS 72/480
TXT Adjustable relative to tool face before use:

    Apparatus under subclass 479 wherein the position of the prolongation with
    respect to the tool-face* may be changed prior to a deforming operation.


CLS 72/481.1
TXT With support or holder for adjustable or removable tool face:

    Apparatus under subclass 476 provided with a carrying member in which the
    tool is so mounted that it, or a portion of it, may be changed or
    positioned or extracted relative to the member.


CLS 72/481.2
TXT Pneumatic- or fluid-actuated means to move or hold tool face:

    Apparatus under subclass 481.1 including means utilizing a fluent or liquid
    medium under pressure to reposition or retain the tool face with respect to
    the support or holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54+,    for direct application of a fluent medium to engage and deform
    metal.

    453.01+, for a pneumatic- or fluid-actuated tool metal deforming tool.


CLS 72/481.3
TXT Threaded means to move or hold tool face:

    Apparatus under subclass 481.1 which a helically ridged surface
    interfittingly engages another member to reposition or retain the tool face
    with respect to the support or holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    454,    for a screw actuated tool support for metal deforming.


CLS 72/481.4
TXT To move by threaded member that travels along tool face:

    Apparatus under subclass 481.3 wherein the helically ridged member turns
    about an axis that is parallel to the plane of the tool face, so that it
    serves to reposition the tool parallel to that plane.


CLS 72/481.5
TXT Threaded means "telescopically" interfits with tool face:

    Apparatus under subclass 481.4 wherein the tool face includes a generally
    cylindrical opening for receiving and interfitting with the helical ridges
    of the helically ridged member.


CLS 72/481.6
TXT To hold by actuating a clamping mechanism:

    Apparatus under subclass 481.3 wherein the helically ridged member engages
    another member to cause that member to retainingly grasp the tool face with
    respect to the tool support or holder.


CLS 72/481.7
TXT Threaded means comprising "fastener":

    Apparatus under subclass 481.6 wherein the threaded means comprises a
    conventional, hardware store item; e.g., a screw or bolt.


CLS 72/481.8
TXT To hold by threaded means comprising "fastener":

    Apparatus under subclass 481.3 wherein the threaded means comprises a
    conventional, hardware store item; e.g., a screw or bolt, and serves to
    retain the tool face in position on the support or holder.


CLS 72/481.9
TXT To hold by binding tool face:

    Apparatus under subclass 481.3 wherein the end of the helically ridged
    member directly engages tool face to urge the tool face to forcibly
    interfit with the support or holder, thereby to retain the tool face in
    position with respect thereto.


CLS 72/482.1
TXT Cam to move or hold tool face:

    Apparatus under subclass 481.1 including a rotary member or a rectilinearly
    moving member having a contoured surface utilized to reposition or retain
    the tool face with respect to the support or holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    452,    for a cam-actuated metal deforming tool support.


CLS 72/482.2
TXT To hold by actuating a clamping mechanism:

    Apparatus under subclass 482.1 wherein the member having a contoured
    surface engages another member to cause that member to retainingly grasp
    the tool face with respect to the tool support or holder.


CLS 72/482.3
TXT Wedge shaped cam:

    Apparatus under subclass 482.1 including a rectilinearly moving member
    having a contoured surface utilized to reposition or retain the tool face
    with respect to the support or holder.


CLS 72/482.4
TXT To move tool face:

    Apparatus under subclass 482.3 adapted to reposition the tool face with
    respect to the support or holder.


CLS 72/482.5
TXT Engaging dovetail on tool face:

    Apparatus under subclass 482.3 cam is used between an inwardly tapered
    tenon on the tool face and a correspondingly shaped recess in the tool
    support or holder to retain the tool face in position on support or holder.


CLS 72/482.6
TXT Lever to move tool face:

    Apparatus under subclass 481.1 including a torque arm pivoted about a
    fulcrum to reposition the tool face with respect to the support or holder.


CLS 72/482.7
TXT Ratchet to move tool face:

    Apparatus under subclass 481.1 including a linearly movable rod engaged by
    a one way locking mechanism and a mechanism which indexably engages the rod
    to incrementally move the tool face with respect to the support or holder.


CLS 72/482.8
TXT Gear to move tool face:

    Apparatus under subclass 481.1 including a rotary toothed wheel adapted to
    interfit with cooperating surfaces of another rotary toothed wheel or a
    toothed bar to reposition the tool face with respect to the support or
    holder.


CLS 72/482.9
TXT Magnetic means to hold tool face:

    Apparatus under subclass 481.1 including a member which utilizes an
    electromagnetic field to retain the tool face with respect to the support
    or holder.


CLS 72/482.91
TXT Spring to hold tool face:

    Apparatus under subclass 481.1 including an elastic member to retain the
    tool face with respect to the support or holder.


CLS 72/482.92
TXT Pin to hold tool face:

    Apparatus under subclass 481.1 including a rod and a mating slot to retain
    the tool face with respect to the support or holder.


CLS 72/482.93
TXT Tool face held by friction fit to support:

    Apparatus under subclass 481.1 which utilizes an interference engagement
    between the tool face holder and the tool face to retain the tool face with
    respect to the support or holder.


CLS 72/482.94
TXT Tool face threaded directly to support:

    Apparatus under subclass 482.93 wherein the helically ridged surface is
    directly on or in tool face and is intended to interfit with a cooperating
    surface of the support or holder.


CLS 72/483
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Apparatus under the class definition that is not in conformance with the
    definition of any prior class in this schedule.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS

    The following subclasses are collections of published disclosures
    pertaining to various specified aspects of the metal-deforming art which
    aspects do not form appropriate bases for subclasses in the foregoing
    classification (i.e., subclasses superior hereto in the schedule), wherein
    original copies of patents are placed on the basis of proximate function of
    the apparatus.

    These subclasses assist a search based on remote function of the apparatus
    and may be of further assistance to the searcher, either as a starting
    point in searching this class or as an indication of further related fields
    of search inside or outside the class.  Thus, there is here provided a
    second access for retrieval of a limited number of types of disclosures.
    Disclosures are placed in these subclasses for their value as references
    and as leads to appropriate main or secondary fields of search, without
    regard to their original classification or their claimed subject matter.
    The disclosures found in the following subclasses are examples, only, of
    the indicated subject matter, and in no instance do they represent the
    entire extent of the prior art.


CLS 72/700
TXT DEFORMING SPECIFIED ALLOYS OR UNCOMMON METAL OR BIMETALLIC WORK:

    Disclosure of metal deformation, particularly emphasizing the composition
    of the metal, or specifying a rare metal as undergoing deformation (e.g.,
    tantalum, beryllium or other such metal not usually thought of in
    connection with deformation), or reciting two or more metals in laminar
    form.


CLS 72/701
TXT PREVENTING DISTORTION:

    Disclosure of metal deformation wherein unwanted deformation is precluded.

    (1)     Note.  The term "unwanted deformation" is meaningful only in
    accordance with the intent of applicant, patentee or author as expressed in
    the disclosure. To be placed herein a disclosure should clearly indicate a
    deliberate attempt to prevent a deformation clearly stated to be undesired.
     Examples of terms used to express undesired distortion include:
    "distortion", "lateral deflection", "buckling", "warping", "wind",
    "twisting", "masking", "collapsing", "crushing", "flattening", "crowding",
    "wrinkling" and "cobbling". It is obvious that some of the terms are also
    used to describe desired deformation, therefore some care should be taken
    to properly assess the disclosed intent.


CLS 72/702
TXT OVERBENDING TO COMPENSATE FOR SPRINGBACK:

    Disclosure of metal deformation wherein the metal is stressed to a position
    beyond that which is desired, in the expectation that when the stress is
    released, the resilience of the metal will restore it to the position
    desired.


CLS 72/703
TXT KNURLING:

    Disclosure of metal deformation that functions to produce a series of small
    ridges, usually parallel to each other, and also usually associated with a
    second such series angularly related to the first series.


CLS 72/704
TXT CHAMBER-ADJUSTING TOOL:

    Disclosure of metal deformation by a device particularly arranged and
    intended to change the relationship between the parts of a front-end or
    steering-linkage suspension on an automobile.


CLS 72/705
TXT VEHICLE BODY OR FRAME STRAIGHTENER:

    Disclosure of metal deformation by an apparatus or structure particularly
    adapted and intended to restore an automobile, railway car, or other
    transport carriage or its original shape.


CLS 72/706
TXT EXPLOSIVE:

    Disclosure of metal deformation produced by explosive forces.


CLS 72/707
TXT MAGNETISM:

    Disclosure of metal deformation produced by magnetic forces.


CLS 72/708
TXT REVERSE DRAWING:

    Disclosure of metal deformation using a reverse drawing step or apparatus.


CLS 72/709
TXT SUPERPLASTIC  MATERIAL:

    Disclosure of metal deformation of materials which have superplastic
    properties, i.e., those that can exceed their normal elastic limit when
    subjected to certain conditions such as elevated temperatures.


CLS 72/710
TXT VIBRATING:

    Disclosure of metal deformation including a vibration step or apparatus.


CLS 72/711
TXT HYDROSTATIC EXTRUSION:

    Disclosure of metal deformation produced by the extrusion of metal using
    hydrostatic forces.


CLS 72/712
TXT ELECTRICAL TERMINAL CRIMPER:

    A cross reference art collection of apparatus for attaching an electrical
    connector to an end of a wire intended to conduct electricity therethrough.


CLS 72/713
TXT METHOD OF MAKING VEHICLE POWER TRANSMITTING SHAFT:

    Disclosure of a process of metal deformation producing a member which
    passes on motion and torque for use on a transport carriage.


CLS 72/714
TXT METHOD OF MAKING UNIVERSAL JOINT SHELL:

    Disclosure of a process of metal deformation producing a particular
    coupling between two rotating shafts, specifically directed to the socket
    on the end of one shaft for receiving the end of the other shaft.


CLS 72/715
TXT METHOD OF MAKING CAN BODIES:

    Disclosure of a process of metal deformation producing a fluid holding
    vessel.

    FOREIGN ART COLLECTIONS

    The definitions for FOR 100 through FOR 102 below correspond to the
    definitions of the abolished subclasses under Class 72 from which these
    collections were formed.  See the Foreign Art Collections in the Class 72
    schedule for specific correspondences. [Note: The titles and definitions
    for indented art collections include all the details of the one(s) that are
    hierarchically superior.]


CLS 72/FOR100
TXT Tube making and/or reshaping:

    Foreign art collection relating to the manufacture and/or deformation of a
    tube*.


CLS 72/FOR101
TXT Comprising use of internal tool:

    Foreign art collection including the use of an active or passive tool
    located within the interior of the work during the reshaping operation.


CLS 72/FOR102
TXT Including flexible or yieldable tool or support:

    Foreign art collection wherein the tool is pliant or resilient, or wherein
    the tool or its tool-holder is mounted on a pliant or resilient means.


CLS 73/
TTL MEASURING AND TESTING

CLS 73/
TXT (1)     This is the generic class for processes and apparatus for making a
    measurement of any kind or for making a test of any kind, and takes all
    such subject matter not provided for in other classes.

    (2)     The term "test" includes inspection, processes and apparatus for
    determining qualities by inspection being included where not provided for
    in other classes.

    (3)     This class is the generic class for sampling and takes all sampling
    apparatus and processes not otherwise provided for; see subclasses 863+ and
    the notes thereto.

    NOTES

    (1)     Note.  Processes and apparatus for its practice are classified
    together.

    (2)     Note.  Substantially all apparatus classes have means to
    automatically control the operation of the apparatus. Such automatic
    controls usually involve some means to measure or test a condition or
    change of condition, the measuring or testing means then operating to
    control or regulate the apparatus in accordance with the results of the
    measurement or test. For such subject matter, the class appropriate to the
    type of apparatus controlled should be investigated.  No attempt has been
    made to search note automatic controls.

    (3)     Note.  Measuring and testing, per se, of the following types are in
    the places noted:



    A.      ACOUSTICAL:

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 101+, 123+ and 125 for devices analogous to
    "sonic" or acoustical testing apparatus of this (73) class.

    AA.     BIOLOGICAL

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses
    1.11+ for Class 424 compositions containing a radionuclide and subclasses
    9.1+ for compositions and methods for diagnosing or testing for a body
    condition or determining the potency of a medicine in a living being.



    B.      CHEMICAL:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, for processes of gas separation, per
    se.  Class 73 will take the combination of gas separation and significant
    gas analysis.  The combination of gas separation and a nominal step of
    "analyzing" or "detecting" without further detail of the analysis or
    detection is insufficient to cause a patent to be placed in Class 73; that
    patent will be placed in Class 95.  Also, if there is feedback from the
    analytical apparatus to control or effect a change in the gas separating
    operation, then classification is in Class 95.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, for apparatus for gas separation, per
    se.  Class 73 will take the combination of gas separation apparatus and
    significant gas analysis means.  The combination of gas separation
    apparatus and nominal means for "analyzing" or "detecting" without further
    detail of the analysis or detection means is insufficient to cause a patent
    to be placed in Class 73; that patent will be placed in Class 96.  Also, if
    there is feedback means from the analytical apparatus to control or effect
    a change in the gas separation, then classification is in Class 96.  For
    volume or rate of flow meters combined with gas and liquid separators, see
    subclass 200 in Class 73.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 128+ for process of heat treating metal
    in the solid state; and involving also a measuring, testing or sensing
    operation. The operation generally, is directed to control of the heat
    treatment.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclasses 1+ for a process
    of separatory distillation including a positive step of determining a
    specific characteristic for control purposes.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 400+ for
    apparatus for performing electrolytic analysis and testing.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 299.01 for liquid crystal compositions and
    subclass 408.1 for analytical, testing or indicating compositions involved
    in a physical test procedure.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclasses 153+ for detection of radiation by an induced nuclear reaction;
    subclasses 207+ for means to control a nuclear reaction; subclasses 207+
    for means to control a nuclear reactor which means may include measuring
    and testing means; and subclasses 245+ for measuring or testing means; and
    subclasses 245+ for measuring or testing a fission reactor condition.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses
    50+, 105+ and 129+ for analyzing apparatus involving means for causing,
    promoting, regulating, or controlling a chemical reaction.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 4+ for
    processes in which there is a direct or indirect qualitative or
    quantitative measurement or test of a material which contains an enzyme or
    microorganism as well as processes in which a material containing an enzyme
    or microorganism is used to perform a qualitative or quantitative
    measurement or test, and compositions therefor and the processes of making
    such compositions; and subclasses 287.1+ for an apparatus for performing
    the above processes.

    935,    Genetic Engineering: Recombinant DNA Technology, Hybrid or Fused
    Cell Technology, and Related Manipulations of Nucleic Acids, which provides
    a search collection for processes of altering the genetic structure of
    microorganisms; genes and methods of modifying genes and their expression;
    vectors and methods of modifying vectors; methods of introducing DNA into a
    cell; microorganisms, per se, which have had their genetic sequence altered
    by recombinant DNA techniques or by cell fusion or by uptake of DNA;
    testing; separation techniques; apparatus; and methods of use of vectors or
    of the genetically engineered microorganisms; methods of gene therapy or
    genetic modification of living organisms.



    C.      ELECTRICAL:

    250,    Radiant energy, subclasses 281+ for methods and apparatus for the
    ionic separation or analysis of ionic material by the mass to charge ratio
    of the ionic material (e.g., mass spectrometry).

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants, for electric generating means driven by
    a prime mover (a motor other than an electric motor) having prime-mover
    controls (e.g., throttle, fuel valve, etc.) which are characteristic of
    controls used on prime movers.  The line between Class 290 and Class 73 is
    as follows:

    Where the claimed subject matter is clearly limited to testing the prime
    mover, or where the generating means is designated specifically as a
    "dynamometer", or a generator having an absorption circuit (such as, for
    example, an induction disk, or a resistor across the armature circuit of
    the generator), original classification is in Class 73.

    Where the generating means is claimed merely as a "generator" or a
    "dynamo-electric machine" and the claim is not otherwise limited to
    testing, original classification is in Class 290, regardless of the
    specific disclosure.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, appropriate subclasses,
    for the structure of electrical generators.  The line between testing means
    which generate electricity in Class 73 and generating means in Class 310 is
    as follows:

    Where the claimed subject matter is limited to structural details only of a
    dynamoelectric machine or a generator of a dynamometer, original
    classification is in Class 310 regardless of the title or function assigned
    to the structure (for example, a "dynamometer" having detailed structure
    set forth which pertains only to the structure of the generating mechanism,
    per se, is classifiable in class (310).

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclasses 364+, for
    processes and apparatus for testing such devices.

    320,    Electricity:  Battery and Condenser Charging and Discharging,
    subclass 48.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, appropriate subclasses, for
    systems of control of electric generators of general application.

    The line between testing means which generate electricity in Class 73 and
    generating systems in Class 322 is as follows:

    Where the claimed subject matter is limited (either positively or by
    necessary inference) to a system which includes a "dynamometer" or to a
    dynamoelectric machine having an absorption circuit (such as for example a
    dynamoelectric machine or generator having an eddy current disk or an
    induction disk or having a resistor connected across the output circuit
    thereof), original classification is in Class 73. Where the claimed subject
    matter is limited merely to an electric "generator" or to a "dynamoelectric
    machine" in combination with control means therefor, original
    classification is in Class 322, regardless of the disclosure, except as
    noted herein above in the reference to Class 290.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, for testing to determine
    electrical properties by electrical means even though nonelectrical values
    are derived from the electrical values determined.  Note particularly
    subclasses 323+ for ore detection by determination of electrical
    properties, subclass 71.5 for the determination of nonelectric properties
    by measuring electric properties, and subclasses 76.11+ for the measurement
    of electricity, per se.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 2+ includes resistors of the
    strain gauge type together with the device which is subject to deformation
    when not otherwise classifiable or with structure securing the resistor to
    such a device.  When the meter, Wheatstone bridge connection, or other
    current measuring device is claimed with the resistor in the above
    combination, classification is in Class 73, especially subclasses 763+ and
    133+. Class 338, subclasses 13+, includes resistors, per se, responsive in
    resistance value to a change in condition, or resistors combined with a
    condition sensing actuator which modifies the resistance value of the
    resistor, such as indented subclasses 25+ for resistors responsive to
    ambient temperature, subclass 33 for resistors with a float actuator,
    subclasses 34+ for resistors with gas, vapor, or moisture absorbing or
    collecting, subclasses 36+ for  resistors which are fluid or gas pressure
    actuated, and subclass 47 for force actuated resistors.  The inclusion of a
    meter, Wheatstone bridge or other current measuring device in series with
    the resistor in this combination would be sufficient for classification in
    Class 73, especially subclass 29 for moisture content or vapor pressure
    analysis, subclasses 453 and 308 for float actuated resistors with
    indicators, subclasses 133+ for dynamometers, and subclasses 398+ for fluid
    pressure gauges of the current modifying type.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 870.01+ takes telemetric
    signaling means useful in transmitting a measured quantity, not limited to
    any particular measuring instrument provided for in other classes, while
    Class 73 takes such telemetric signaling means in combination with a
    particular measuring means of the type provided for in Class 73.

    Class 340, Communications:  Electrical also, in subclasses 500+ takes
    electrical devices permanently associated with the object or environment
    being monitored for giving a signal or indication of the presence or
    absence of a condition but  wherein no quantitative measurements may be
    made. Devices for making a quantitative measurement of the type provided
    for in Class 73 in which the instrument responds to a condition and a
    series of indications are given which follow or vary with the variations of
    the condition are in Class 73, even though employing electrical signaling
    means, such as lamps, to indicate visually the result. The general line is
    that Class 73 takes particular measuring or testing means, even though
    claimed in combination with electric signaling means, while Class 340 takes
    the signaling subcombination.

    346,    Recorders, appropriate subclass.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 556+
    for basic measurements which include data processing or electrical
    calculating techniques and nominal claim recitation to the quantity being
    measured or tested. Class 73 takes the combination of register claimed
    broadly or specifically in combination with significant measuring or
    testing of the type provided for in Class 73.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, for testing to determine a thermal
    condition or property of a specimen.



    D.      GEOMETRICAL INSTRUMENTS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, for measuring and testing involving only
    the determination of the characteristics and mutual relation of points,
    lines, angles, surfaces and solids and for mechanically guided means for
    describing lines. Class 73 has combinations of geometrical instruments with
    other measuring or testing means.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 6+ for determination of
    distance or position by measuring a thermal quantity related thereto.

    E.      INSPECTING:

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclass 70 for inspection and
    examination of cloth.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 88 for
    combinations having inspecting means as a part thereof.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 29.1+ and 29.12+ for glassworking
    or treating processes including programming, timing, cycle control,
    inspecting, measuring, or testing; subclasses 158+ and 160+ for
    glassworking and treating apparatus with inspection, programming, timing,
    cycle control, inspecting, measuring, or testing means.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 712+ for coating apparatus having
    measuring or testing features.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 702 for
    manual assorting involving inspecting means.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 155 for article dispensers not
    otherwise provided for, having transparent inspecting or viewing means so
    that the articles can be dispensed and may be inspected.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 154+, for inspecting devices combined with
    fluent material dispensers so that the material to be dispensed may be
    inspected.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 2, 138 and 139 for inspection lamps.



    F.      OPTICAL (See Radiant Energy):

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclasses
    200+ for optical eye examining and vision testing instruments such as
    optometers.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, for processes and apparatus which
    utilize visible light to measure the optical properties of substances, test
    visible light for optical properties and which use visible light to test
    for nonoptical properties not classified elsewhere particularly subclasses
    23+ for optical stroboscopes, subclasses 32+ for material strain analysis,
    subclasses 43+ for optical pyrometers, subclasses 124+ for lens or
    reflective image former testing, subclasses 213+ for photometers and
    subclasses 237+ for visual flaw inspection apparatus.



    G.      RADIANT ENERGY (See Optical):

    250,    Radiant Energy, for measuring and testing by radiant energy and
    measuring radiant energy. See particularly subclasses 250 for wavemeters
    for radiated electro-magnetic waves, 253+ for methods and apparatus to
    irradiate earth material above or below the ground and testing the
    radiation modified or emitted as a result or irradiation by the material or
    testing the radiation emitted by the material, 281+ for methods and
    apparatus for the ionic separation or analysis of materials, 306+ for
    methods and apparatus for the inspection of solids or liquids by charged
    particles, 336.1+ for methods and apparatus including invisible radiant
    energy responsive electric signalling having detectors sensitive to
    infrared, ultraviolet, X-ray, radio-active rays and neutron radiation or to
    a radiation source modified by a tested material:  and 472.1+ for methods
    of detecting invisible radiation by a nonelectrical detector or invisible
    radiation nonelectrical detectors, per se.

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 1-205 for miscellaneous apparatus and
    method which involve the use of a reflected and/or otherwise returned radio
    wave (radar) system for detecting an object, or to measure the distance,
    direction and/or velocity of an object, and subclasses 350+ for directional
    radio.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses for class defined in vivo test compositions and methods,
    particularly subclasses 1.11+ wherein a radionuclide or intended
    radionuclide is recited.

    435,    Chemistry: Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 35 for a
    test method which involves both an enzyme or microbial reaction and the use
    of a radioactive material and subclass 288.7 for an optical enzyme or
    microbial reaction measuring and testing device in combination.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical And Immunological Testing, subclasses 57+
    for a test method (which involves both a chemical reaction (e.g., ion
    exchange) and a measurement of radioactivity or isotope distribution.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 2, 67.1+, 115 and 226 for measuring
    and testing of modulated carrier wave communications.

    935,    Genetic Engineering: Recombinant DNA Technology, Hybrid or Fused
    Cell Technology, and Related Manipulations of Nucleic Acids, which provides
    a search collection for processes or altering the genetic structure of
    microorganisms; genes and methods of modifying genes and their expression;
    vectors and methods of modifying vectors; methods of introducing DNA into a
    cell; microorganisms, per se, which have had their genetic sequence altered
    by recombinant DNA techniques or by cell fusion or by uptake of DNA;
    testing; separation techniques; apparatus; and methods of use of vectors or
    of the genetically  engineered microorganisms; methods of gene therapy or
    genetic modification of living organisms.

    H.      SPEED MEASURING:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 336+ for speed responsive devices using
    an invisible radiation source and an electric signalling device and,
    subclasses 459+ for speed responsive stroboscopes using invisible radiation
    and a luminous screen.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 68+ for electrical
    speed measurement.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 670+ for electrical speed
    alarms.

    342,    Communications:  Directive, Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), appropriate subclasses, for those utilizing
    transmitted radio wave energy; see subclasses 1-205 for those utilizing
    reflected or otherwise returned radio wave (radar) energy.

    346,    Recorders, appropriate subclass.

    I.      SURGICAL:

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 630+ for methods and apparatus for diagnosing
    diseased or abnormal condition of the body.

    J.      TIME MEASURING:

    346,    Recorders, appropriate subclass.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, appropriate
    subclasses and the classes specified under "SEARCH CLASS" in the class and
    subclass definitions.

    K.      WEIGHING SCALES:

    Class 177, Weighing Scales, appropriate subclasses for a weigher, per se;
    especially subclasses 50+ for a weigher with features for making a test not
    specifically provided for in Class 73; and subclass 245 for a weigher in
    combination with another measuring device not provided for in Class 73.

    L.      MASS SPECTROMETRY:

    See the reference to Class 250, Radiant Energy, in (3) Note above.

    (4)     Note.  For elements, not combined with means to indicate the result
    of a measurement or test, and not combined with means to automatically
    control art devices, that respond to a condition or change of condition:

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32+,    for devices responsive to specific gravity of liquids.

    54+,    for devices responsive to viscosity of liquids.

    174,    for feelers for gauges.

    227+,   for straight line light ray type and 300+ for indicator of
    direction of force traversing natural media.

    279+,   for pressure responsive diaphragms for volume or rate of flow
    meters, per se.

    322.5,  for floats, per se.

    335+,   for humidity responsive elements.

    501+,   for feelers for gauges.

    514.01+,        for acceleration responsive elements.

    527+,   through 551, for speed responsive elements.

    649+,   for devices responsive to and for measuring vibrations of a body.

    741,    for Bourbon tubes, per se, for fluid pressure gauges.

    861.42+,        for devices responsive to differential pressures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 501, for feelers for gauges
    227+, for straight line light ray type and 300+, for indicator of direction
    of force traversing natural media.

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 527-531 for heat actuated mechanisms
    producing force or motion and having no specified motion utilizing structure

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 5+ for gyroscopes.

    84,     Music, subclass 409 for tuning forks.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclasses.  For the line
    between Class 73 and Class 92, see section III of the class definition of
    Class 92, under SEARCH CLASS 73.

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclass 89 for
    electro-optical batteries and subclass 200, for thermal sensitive batteries.

    181,    Acoustics, subclass .5 for miscellaneous mechanical detectors for
    sound waves.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 71 for fluorescent detectors of ray
    energy, subclasses 83+ for miscellaneous detectors of ray energy.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 408 for chemical indicating compositions.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 306 for
    pyromagnetic devices and subclass 311 for piezoelectric devices.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 2+ for strain gauge type resistors
    and subclasses 13+ for resistors whose value changes in response to a
    condition or conditions.  (See the reference to Class 338 under "C.
    ELECTRICAL" of (3) Note, above).

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 700+ for antennas.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 141+ for underwater vibration detectors and subclasses 178+ for
    geophysical vibration transducers.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 53+ for an
    indication or test of an information storage or retrieval device or element
    thereof.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 55+ for structured visual or optical
    indicator, per se, such as a litmus paper or other chemical test papers.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 616 for a
    bimetallic element, per se.

    (5)     Note.  ART APPARATUS OR PROCESS COMBINED WITH MEASURING OR TESTING
    and an index to preceding notes:

    Art apparatus or process significantly claimed, in combination with
    measuring or testing is classified in general in the class providing for
    the art apparatus or process.  The line stated for particular classes
    should be consulted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, see Notes 3B; 4.

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, see Note 3 E.

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclasses 226+ especially subclass 227
    for apparatus and processes of detecting knots, bunches, or slubs in
    threads.

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, see Notes 3 D; 4.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids (See also Note 3E),
    subclasses 88, 89 for such apparatus combined with inspecting, indicating
    or testing means.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 14 for apparatus and processes for
    ascertaining the life in seeds.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, see Note 4.

    84,     Music, see Note 4.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 285, 342+, for infusors
    and cooking devices combined with measuring and testing means.

    101,    Printing, subclasses 35+, for selective printing machines in which
    the control of the printing element selected is by a gauge measuring the
    article printed upon and the article is other than a rectangular sheet.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, for devices for giving a signal or
    indication other than electrical of the presence or absence of a condition,
    and in subclasses 200+ for nonelectrical indicating means, such as dial and
    pointer structure, not claimed in combination with any particular measuring
    or testing means provided for in Class 73.  Class 73 takes the combination
    of measuring or testing means significantly claimed combined with a signal
    or indicator, and devices that respond to a condition and give a series of
    indications which follow or vary with the variations of the condition
    wherein more than a mere named operator for the signal or indicator is
    included.

    128,    Surgery, see Note 3 I.

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, (see also Note
    4),subclass 182 for batteries combined with testing or indicating means.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 227+, 524 and 551+ for fluid handling
    means combined with an indicator register, recorder, alarm or inspection
    means.  (See also (4) Note).

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 90 for pipe plugs having
    either provision for introducing a fluid into the pipe or for the
    attachment of a gauge.

    148,    Metal Treatment, see Note 3B.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    64 and 378 for laminating processes and apparatus having measuring or
    testing features.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 49, 198 and 263 for
    measuring and testing in combination with fiber liberation or paper making.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 250+ for well processes including measuring and
    testing means, subclass 264 for processes of merely sampling a well fluid
    and appropriate subclasses for corresponding apparatus and subclasses 64,
    66 and 113 for well apparatus including measuring or testing means.

    177,    Weighing Scales, appropriate subclasses for a weigher, per se; for
    a weigher with features for making a test not specifically provided for in
    Class 73; and for a weigher in combination with another measuring device
    not provided for in Class 73.

    181,    Acoustics, see Notes 3A; 4.

    194,    Check-Actuated Control Mechanisms, for check controlled measuring
    and testing devices, and subclasses 302+ for fraud preventing coin-testing
    devices.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 502 for a conveyor combined with
    load measuring means, and subclasses 504+ for a conveyor combined with a
    load weighing means.

    200,    Electricity: Circuit Makers and Breakers, for the combination of a
    measuring instrument and a circuit controller when specific structure of
    the circuit controller is claimed.  Class 73 takes the combination of a
    class 73 measuring instrument and a circuit controller when the circuit
    controller is claimed broadly.  In connection with Class 200, the
    definitions of the subclasses of Class 73 which provide for measuring
    instruments combined with other structure are modified by this note.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, see Note 3B.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, (see also Note 3E),
    for testing and assorting of solids in accordance with physical
    characteristics, as by sifting materials to determine the proportion of
    each size in the whole; attention is called particularly to assorting in
    subclasses 509+ which includes means for testing or measuring objects and
    sorting them in accordance with their characteristics.

    222,    Dispensing, (see also Note 3E), for dispensers which involve volume
    measuring, and see section 6 of the main class definition of Class 222, for
    the line with volume or rate of flow meters.  The notes to Class 222 set
    forth the search field for apparatus for dispensing measured quantities of
    material.

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), subclasses 33+ for a selective
    cutting device provided with stopping means responsive to detection of
    improper treatment of work (e.g., failure to punch in every column, or to
    follow a 2 - 5 code).

    235,    Registers, subclass 61 for mechanical calculators and subclass 92
    for electrical counting techniques which may include testing or measuring.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, for solid comminution
    combined with measuring or testing of material.  See section 12 of the main
    class definition of that class for a statement of the line.

    248,    Supports, subclass 27 for means for supporting an instrument in a
    panel.

    250,    Radiant Energy, see Notes 3C, G, L; 4.

    252,    Compositions, see Notes 3B; 4.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclasses 307+ for miscellaneous seals and
    sealing devices, which may be employed in connection with measuring and
    testing devices.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, see Notes 3C; 4.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, see Note 3C.

    320,    Electricity:  Battery and Condenser Charging and Discharging, see
    Note 3C.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, see Notes (3) C and (3) H.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, see (4) Note, above.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, see (3) Note, C; (3) Note, H and (4)
    Note above.

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), see notes 3G, H and 4 above.

    346,    Recorders.

    362,    Illumination, (see also Note 3E), subclasses 23+ for measuring
    instrument dials combined with illuminating means.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 550
    wherein a data processing system or calculating computer is utilized to
    effect a measuring, testing, or monitoring operation on an external device
    or quantity, wherein the external device or quantity is only nominally
    claimed.  When significant structure to the measuring or testing device is
    claimed, classification is in Class 73.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, see Note 3 J.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, see Note 4.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, for the combination of a thermal
    test and a thermal test and a nonthermal test.

    494,    Imperforate Bowl:  Centrifugal Separators, subclass 10, for
    apparatus of that class provided with means for measuring or testing.


CLS 73/1.01
TXT INSTRUMENT PROVING OR CALIBRATING:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a process or an
    apparatus for (a) ascertaining (i.e., proving) the quality  of a measuring
    device, a testing device, or a condition responsive device by testing the
    respective device, or (b) checking, adjusting, or standardizing
    systematically (i.e., calibrating) the graduations of a quantitative
    measuring instrument or a condition responsive device (e.g., sensors,
    safety valves, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Where the proving or calibrating is by measuring means or
    testing  means of a kind provided for in another measuring or testing
    class, the subject matter is found in the other measuring or testing class.
     See such  measuring or testing class and the (3) Note to this class
    definition.

    (2)     Note.  Where more structure of a measuring device, a testing
    device, or a condition  responsive device is recited than that which is
    necessary to (a) prove or calibrate or (b) identify the measuring device,
    the testing device, or the condition responsive device, the subject matter
    goes with the analyzer or the condition responsive device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 455+ for a line condition change
    responsive valve.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses
    for mechanical  switches with adjustment means.

    250,    Radiant Energy, appropriate subclasses for measuring invisible
    light combined with calibration, particularly subclass 252.1 for (a) a
    method for establishing a reference indication of invisible radiation or
    (b) a method of error determination or correction using a reference
    indication of invisible radiation level; and subclass 363.09 for a method
    of invisible radiant energy responsive electrical signalling with a radiant
    energy source and with calibration.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclass 48 for test or calibration structure for an active solid-state
    device.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 74 for testing or
    calibrating electric meters by purely electrical means; subclass 130 for
    systems for measuring, testing, or sensing electricity, per se, with self
    calibration; subclass 202 for calibration of magnetic measuring or testing
    systems; and subclass 601 for calibration of impedance, admittance, or
    other electrically stimulated response measuring or testing systems.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 501 for an apparatus for
    providing a humanly perceptible signal in response to a predetermined
    condition (e.g., alarms) combined with calibration or compensation means
    and subclass 870.04 for a telemetry system combined with calibration means.

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 165+ for testing or calibrating of a
    radar system.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for an
    apparatus for measuring or testing by measuring visible light combined with
    proving or testing means, especially subclass 6 for testing or indicating
    the condition of a range finder with regards to its adjustment, alignment,
    or calibration by measuring visible light; subclass 46 for an electric
    light utilizing a lamp as a standard for photometry or optical pyrometry
    measuring; subclass 124 for lens or reflective image former testing in
    general; and subclass 243 for an apparatus for measuring or testing visible
    light including structure for a basis for comparison with a specimen or a
    portion thereof under test.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses
    571.01+ for the use of an electronic calculator to adjust a measurement
    device.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 1+ for calibration or
    testing of a thermally responsive device.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 29 for calibrating or testing an electrical
    counter.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclass 207 for a testing
    or calibration accessory of an X-ray or gamma ray system.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 967 for a
    cross-reference art collection of standards, controls, materials (e.g.,
    validation studies, buffer systems, etc.).


CLS 73/1.02
TXT Gas or liquid analyzer:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.01 wherein either (a) the apparatus for
    proving or calibrating  or (b) the device which is being proven or
    calibrated either (1) detects or measures the composition of, or some
    constituent or an identifying characteristic of a gas or  gaseous mixture
    or (2) detects or determines the composition of, a constituent of, or a
    property of a liquid or a liquid suspension of a solid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23.2+,  for a gas analyzer or sensor, per se, in particular subclasses
    23.21+ for a gas analyzer including means for making a correction for an
    undesirable variation in a condition within an apparatus or in a test
    result  due to such condition.

    53.01+, for liquid testing (e.g., liquid chromatography), per se.

    73+,    for detecting the moisture content of a material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 401 for fault
    testing of a sensor or a component of an electrolytic analysis and testing
    apparatus and subclass 408 for such an analysis or testing apparatus with
    means for temperature or pressure compensation.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 253+ for the detection of a gas either
    within or emanating from the earth by invisible radiation emanating from
    the gas naturally or as a result of irradiation by invisible radiation; and
    subclasses  336.1+ for testing of a gas by utilizing an electric signalling
    device  detecting radiation induced or emitted naturally or detecting
    infrared,  ultraviolet, X-ray, or gamma radiation or neutrons modified by
    the gas.

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for
    testing an electrical property of a gas, in particular subclasses 464+ for
    analyzing gas using ionization effects.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 34+ for a resistor, per se, which
    is  responsive to the condition of a gas wherein no quantitative
    measurements of  the gas are disclosed.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 632+ for an electrical
    indicator  providing a humanly perceptible signal representing a
    predetermined condition  of a gas.

    356,    Optics: Measuring and Testing, subclasses 402+ for gas analysis
    utilizing a colorimeter to determine the shade or color of the gas.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving,  or Sterilizing, subclasses 50+ for an apparatus utilizing a
    chemical reaction  to analyze gas.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclass 68 for a
     process which utilizes a chemical reaction to analyze gas.


CLS 73/1.03
TXT Reference standard:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.02 including  a means for providing a
    reference criterion and wherein  the apparatus for proving or calibrating
    uses the reference criterion for comparison purposes for  proving or
    calibrating the device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 427+ for an
    electrolytic gas sample sensor, per se, combined with a gas reference
    material; and subclass 435 for a standard reference electrode in an
    electrolytic analysis or testing apparatus.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 243 for an apparatus for
    measuring or testing visible light including structure forming a basis for
    comparison with a specimen or a portion thereof under test.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, particularly
    subclasses 8+ for a composition for standardization, calibration,
    simulation, or processes of use in preparation for chemical testing.


CLS 73/1.04
TXT Permeable outlet or flawed element:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.03 wherein the reference standard comprises
    (a) a barrier having interstices, pores, or micropores through which the
    liquid or gas diffuses or (b) a solid body having a known imperfection
    which is detected by the gas or liquid.


CLS 73/1.05
TXT Piston, sprayer, nozzle, or orifice:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.03 wherein the reference standard comprises
    either (a) a solid cylinder or disk that fits snugly into a large cylinder
    and moves back and forth under fluid pressure (i.e., a piston), (b) a means
    for  discharging a fine jet of liquid from a pressurized container (i.e., a
    sprayer), (c) a tube having a taper or constriction (i.e., a nozzle), or
    (d) an opening (i.e., an orifice).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.16+,  for either (a) proving or calibrating a flowmeter having a nozzle
    or (b) using a flowmeter having a nozzle to prove or calibrate a device.

    216,    for a Weir type flowmeter having a constriction in the form of a
    submerged orifice or discharge nozzle.

    294,    for a liquid level or depth gauge having a funnel or hose nozzle.

    861.61+, for a flowmeter having a pressure differential type (a) orifice or
    (b) flow  nozzle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses
    for a sprayer or a nozzle, per se.


CLS 73/1.06
TXT Gas:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.02 wherein either (a) the apparatus for
    proving or calibrating the device or (b) the device which is being proven
    or calibrated is an apparatus for detecting or measuring the composition of
    or some constituent of a gas or gaseous mixture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23.2+,  for a gas analyzer or sensor, per se, in particular subclasses
    23.21+ for a gas analyzer including means for making a correction for an
    undesirable variation in a condition within an apparatus or in a test
    result  due to such condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 400+ for an
    electrochemical gas sensor, per se.

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, particularly subclasses 464+
    for  analyzing gas using ionization effects and appropriate subclasses for
    testing  gas by measuring impedance, admittance, and related quantities.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving,  or Sterilizing, subclasses 50+ for an  apparatus utilizing a
    chemical reaction  to analyze a gas, particularly subclass 89 for gas
    chromatography.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, particularly
    subclass  68 for a process utilizing a chemical reaction for determining
    the gases in the  blood and subclasses 161+ for chromatography.


CLS 73/1.07
TXT Span or  zero:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.06 wherein the measuring, testing, or
    condition responsive device produces an output signal in response to a
    condition being sensed and wherein  the device is proven or calibrated  by
    setting a range of values or a base value for the output signal.


CLS 73/1.08
TXT Dynamometer:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.01 wherein either (a) the apparatus for
    proving or calibrating or (b) the device being proven or calibrated
    measures or determines force, torque, work, or mechanical power.

    (1)     Note. For purposes of this subclass, a dynamometer may either be
    employed to measure an applied load or to apply a measured load (e.g., for
    test  purposes).

    (2)     Note.  Definition of terms:

    FORCE:

    The strength or energy exerted upon or brought to bear or the cause of
    motion or change in motion or a state of rest.

    POWER:

    The rate at which work is done or the rate at which energy is transferred.

    TORQUE:

    A turning or twisting force or a force that produces or tends to produce
    rotation or torsion.

    WORK:

    The transference of energy that is produced by motion at the point of
    application of force which is measured by multiplying the force and the
    displacement of its point of application in the line of action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54.39,  for a viscometer measuring shearing torque between parallel
    surfaces wherein more structure of the force measuring device is recited
    than is necessary to describe the calibrating apparatus.

    862+,   for a dynamometer,  per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    177,    Weighing Scales, appropriate subclasses, in particular subclass 50
    for a weighing scale combined with testing wherein more structure of the
    force measuring device is recited than is necessary to describe the
    calibrating apparatus.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 338 for a force
    responsive piezoelectric sensor combined with mechanical energy coupling
    means.

    318,    Electricity: Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses for a
    dynamometer controlling a motor, in particular subclass 646 for a
    positional servo system with force or weight measuring.

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclass 727 for piezoelectric
    crystal testing.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 2 through 6 for strain gauges, per
    se, in particular subclass 5 for a dynamometer type strain gauge, and
    subclass 47 for a force actuated electrical resistor.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 665+ for an electrical
    indicating system providing a humanly perceptible signal in response to a
    predetermined force or stress.


CLS 73/1.09
TXT Torque:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.08 wherein either (a) the apparatus for
    proving or calibrating or (b)  the device being proven or calibrated  is
    responsive to a force couple or moment of force that induces or resists
    rotation of a body about a point or an axis (i.e., torque).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    862.041+, for dynamometers comprising means responsive to plural torques
    wherein more structure of the force measuring device is recited than is
    necessary to describe the calibrating apparatus.

    862.08+, for a device for measuring torque, work, or power comprising
    sensing means responsive to a force couple or moment of force that induces
    or resists rotation of a body about a point or axis combined with a
    calibrating apparatus wherein more structure of the force measuring device
    is recited than is necessary to describe the calibrating apparatus.


CLS 73/1.11
TXT Electrical:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.09 wherein either (a) the apparatus for
    proving or calibrating or (b) the device being proven or calibrated
    comprises means for having an effect resulting from the existence of
    stationary or moving electric charges.


CLS 73/1.12
TXT Wrench:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.09 wherein either (a) the apparatus for
    proving or calibrating or (b) the device being proven or calibrated is a
    hand or power tool with fixed or adjustable jaws for twisting or turning an
    object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    862.21+, for torque measuring wrench.


CLS 73/1.13
TXT Weight:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.08 wherein either (a) the apparatus for
    proving or calibrating or (b) the device being proven or calibrated
    measures, tests, or is responsive to a measure of the heaviness  of an
    object.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    177,    Weighing Scales, appropriate subclasses, in particular subclass 50
    for a weighing scale combined with testing wherein more structure of the
    force measuring device is recited than is necessary to describe the
    calibrating apparatus.


CLS 73/1.14
TXT Rotor unbalance or  a roller having a smooth surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.08 wherein either (a) the apparatus for
    proving or calibrating or (b) the device being proven or calibrated either
    (1) determines the amount of or the location of a mass or force causing
    unbalance in a rotatable body or (2) tests or measures a physical
    characteristic of or is responsive to a rotating cylindrical shaped body
    having a surface free of roughness, irregularities, or projections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66+,    for rotor unbalance measuring or testing, per se.


CLS 73/1.15
TXT Load cell (e.g., strain gauge or piezoelectric sensor):

    Subject matter under subclass 1.08 wherein either (a) the apparatus for
    proving or calibrating or (b) the device being proven or calibrated
    comprises a means which produces a signal in response to a force being
    applied thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    760,    for measuring a specimen stress or strain or for testing by stress
    or strain application.

    862+,   for dynamometers where strain in a part of the measuring apparatus
    itself is utilized as an index of power applied thereto or transmitted
    thereby.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded  Fastener, subclasses 8+  for fastener devices having means
    functioning to  facilitate measuring or to denote the attainment of a
    desired stress or strain in a fastener device in situ.


CLS 73/1.16
TXT Volume of flow, speed of flow, volume rate of flow, or mass rate of flow:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.01 wherein either (a) the apparatus for
    proving or calibrating or (b) the device being proven or calibrated
    determines (1) a size or extent of flow of a fluent material, (2) a rate of
     flow of a fluent material, (3) a rate of  motion of a specific dimensional
    amount of a fluent material, or (4) a response of a fluent material due to
    an acceleration other than in the normal direction of flow of the fluent
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170.01+, for fluid flow direction determination, in particular subclasses
    170.11+ for fluid flow velocity determination.

    861+,   for volume of flowmeters or rate of flowmeters and  combinations of
    which they are a part.


CLS 73/1.17
TXT Plug with leak detector:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.16  including a movable barrier for the
    introduction of a known flow volume combined with a means sensing an
    undesirable escape of a fluent material through an opening wherein the
    proving or the calibrating is performed by utilizing the movement of the
    barrier for the introduction of a known flow volume.


CLS 73/1.18
TXT Sphere:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.16 wherein  the movement of a
    three-dimensional surface, having all points of which are equidistant from
    a fixed point (e.g., a ball), is used for introducing a known flow volume.


CLS 73/1.19
TXT Piston:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.16 wherein the movement of a solid cylinder
    or disk that fits snugly into a large cylinder and moves back and forth
    under fluid pressure or displaces or compresses fluid is utilized for
    introducing a known flow volume.


CLS 73/1.21
TXT With plural pistons:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.19 wherein the movement of more than one
    piston in a cylinder is utilized for introducing a known flow volume.


CLS 73/1.22
TXT With magnetic or optical sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.19 including either (a) a body having
    properties of attracting materials, as iron, by virtue of a surrounding
    field of force created by motion of its atomic electrons and the alignment
    of its atoms which change in response to the movement of the piston or (b)
    a body whose response to light changes in response to the movement of the
    piston.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, for a photocell circuit generating positional
    information.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 200+ for measuring
    using a magnetic sensor, per se, especially subclasses 207.11+  for
    determination of a displacement using a magnetic sensor, per se.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 372+ for optical
    measuring and testing  by mensuration.


CLS 73/1.23
TXT With position sensing switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.19 including a means for opening or closing
    an electrical circuit or for diverting current from one conductor to
    another conductor  in response to a change in position of the piston.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity: Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.04+ for a
    liquid level responsive switch.


CLS 73/1.24
TXT Tracer:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.16 comprising either (a) an identification
    substance that can be followed through the course of a process, providing
    information on the pattern of  events in the process or on the
    redistribution of parts or elements involved  (i.e., a tracer substance)
    and a detector means wherein (1) the tracer substance is introduced into
    the fluid at a fixed rate and (2) the detector means is placed downstream
    of the fluid flow and  is responsive to a concentration of a tracer
    substance or (b) a fixed concentration of an identification substance that
    can be followed through the course of a process, providing information on
    the pattern of  events in the process or on the redistribution of parts or
    elements involved (i.e., a tracer substance) and a detector means wherein
    (1) the fixed concentration of the tracer substance is introduced into the
    fluid and (2) the detector means is placed downstream of the fluid flow and
    is responsive to the rate of introduction of the fixed concentration of the
    substance.

    (1)     Note.  For the purpose of this subclass, a body or substance that
    moves along with the fluid flow without impeding  the fluid flow is a
    tracer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170.04, for determining the direction of fluid flow by use of a tracer.

    861.05+, for determining a fluid flow rate by measuring the time required
    for a tracer placed in the fluid to travel from one position to another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, appropriate subclasses for an invisible radiation
    tracer for measuring fluent flow, especially  subclasses 259+ for the use
    of tracer material in a well to test for leakage into or out of a well,
    subclasses 302+ for flow metering using invisible radiation type tracer
    methods, subclasses 306+ for rate of flow testing using charge particles,
    subclass 356.2 for flow metering using a radioactive tracer, and subclass
    359.1 for use of invisible radio tracers for fluent material level tests.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclass 51 for X-ray
    devices which may include flow metering.


CLS 73/1.25
TXT Orifice or restriction:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.16 wherein either (a) the proving or
    calibrating apparatus   or (b) the device being proven or calibrated either
     comprises (1) an opening sending out a controlled amount of flow of the
    fluent material  or (2) a structure allowing a controlled amount of flow of
    the fluent material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    861.52+, for utilizing an apparatus for measuring a differential device
    having a restriction to make a volume or rate of flow determination,
    especially subclasses 861.61+ for utilizing an apparatus for measuring a
    differential device having a restriction or  orifice  to make a volume or
    rate of flow determination.


CLS 73/1.26
TXT Nozzle or venturi:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.25 wherein the proving or calibrating
    apparatus or the device being proven or calibrated comprises (a) a tube
    having a taper or a constriction through which the fluent material passes
    or (b) a means having flared ends connected by a constricted middle through
    which the fluent material passes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    861.62+, for utilizing an apparatus for measuring a differential device
    having a restriction and a flow nozzle to make a volume or rate of flow
    determination.


CLS 73/1.27
TXT Turbine, geared meter, pulse activated or counter:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.16 wherein either (a) the apparatus for
    proving or calibrating the device  or (b) the device being proven or
    calibrated comprises either (1) a motor operated by water, steam, or air
    directed against cups, blades, or vanes on the rim of a wheel  (i.e.,
    turbine), (2) an instrument that measures fluent material passing through
    it via the use of rotary driven indicating members (i.e., geared meter),
    (3) a means having a property which changes in response to regularly
    occurring stimuli (i.e., pulse activated), or (4) a meter for totaling a
    parameter related to flow (i.e., counter).


CLS 73/1.28
TXT Turbine or geared meter:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.27 wherein either (a) the apparatus for
    proving or calibrating or (b) the device being proven or calibrated
    includes either (1) a motor operated by water, steam, or air directed
    against cups, blades, or vanes on the rim of a wheel or (2) an instrument
    that measures fluent material passing through it via the use of rotary
    driven indicating members (i.e., geared meter).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    861.79+, for utilizing a turbine  to make a volume or rate of flow
    determination.


CLS 73/1.29
TXT Anemometer or pitot tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.16 wherein either (a) the apparatus for
    proving or calibrating the device or (b) the device being proven or
    calibrated includes either (1) a means for measuring speed of wind or (2) a
    means that includes a tube which is placed in a moving body of fluid and is
    used to measure a kinetic head.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    861.84, for utilizing anemometer to make a volume or rate of flow
    determination.


CLS 73/1.31
TXT With liquid level monitor or timer:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.16 including  (a) an apparatus for
    determining a predetermined  level or depth of a body of liquid or sensing
    a predetermined level or depth of body of liquid or (b) an apparatus for
    measuring the time for travel of a fluid from one point to another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.73+,  for calibrating liquid level measuring devices.

    290+,   for liquid level measuring, per se.


CLS 73/1.32
TXT Prover bell:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.31 which includes a bell-shaped object for
    introducing a known volume into (a) the apparatus for proving or
    calibrating or (b) the device being proven or calibrated.


CLS 73/1.33
TXT With floating element or weighing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.16 wherein (a) the apparatus for proving or
    calibrating the device or (b) the device being proven or calibrated
    includes either (1) an element which lies in a liquid without sinking or
    which is suspended in a gas or (2) an element for measuring the heaviness
    of the fluent material.


CLS 73/1.34
TXT With signal processing, span or set point adjustment (e.g., zero
    correction):


    Subject matter under subclass 1.16 wherein the apparatus for calibrating or
    proving comprises means for (a) performing a significant operation on an
    electrical signal in accordance with an algorithm or electronic circuitry,
    (b) performing an arithmetical or some limited logic operation to adjust a
    multiplier or scale, or (c) adjusting a base value (span) or an offset
    (e.g., zero correction).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.88,   for a proving or calibrating apparatus or a device being proven or
    calibrated other than a volume of flow, speed of flow, volume rate of flow,
    or mass rate of flow involving span or zero setting.

    861.01+, for a flowmeter with indirect temperature or density compensation.


CLS 73/1.35
TXT With pressure measurement or plural flowmeters:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.16 wherein either (a) the apparatus for
    proving or calibrating or (b) the device being proven or calibrated
    comprises (1) means for  determining a force per unit area exerted by the
    fluid or (2) more than one means for measuring a flow of a fluent material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.57+,  for a proving or calibrating apparatus or a device being proven or
    calibrated other than a volume of flow, speed of flow, volume rate of flow,
    or mass rate of flow type and utilizing fluent pressure measurement.

    700+,   for a fluid pressure gauge, per se.


CLS 73/1.36
TXT Metering dispenser:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.16 wherein either (a) the apparatus for
    proving or calibrating a device or (b) the device being proven or
    calibrated is a measuring means which issues out fluent material in
    portions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168,    for the testing of pumps or hydraulic equipment.


CLS 73/1.37
TXT Speed, velocity, or acceleration:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.01 wherein either (a) the apparatus for
    proving or calibrating or  (b) the device being proven or calibrated
    detects or determines either (1) a time rate of change of position of a
    body (i.e., speed), (2) or a time rate of change of position of a body in a
    given direction (i.e., or velocity), or (3) a time rate of change of speed
    or velocity of a body (i.e., acceleration).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121+,   for other than purely electrically or purely optically measuring
    speed, velocity, or acceleration in testing a  vehicle brake.

    167+,   for other than purely electrically or purely optically measuring
    speed, velocity, or acceleration in testing a projectile.

    178+,   for other than a purely electrically or a purely optically
    measuring  speed, velocity, or acceleration to  test navigational
    instrument.

    488+,   for utilizing an inertial element for mechanical speed, velocity,
    or acceleration measuring and electrical speed, velocity, or acceleration
    measuring other than a purely electrical or purely optical measuring type
    utilizing an inertial element; in particular, subclasses 514.01+ for an
    acceleration measuring apparatus utilizing an inertial element.

    507,    for comparing the speed of one device with another by measuring
    speed by means being other than purely electrical or purely optical.

    652+,   for apparatus for sensing vibrations by an inertial element.

    861+,   for fluid flow rate measuring other than by a purely electrical or
    a  purely optical measuring means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 231 and 232 for
    straight-line-light ray sighting instruments involving speed; subclasses
    300+  for direction sensing and indicating instruments which may involve
    speed measuring of a non-purely electrical or non-purely optical measuring
    type,  particularly subclasses 318+ wherein a gyroscope is utilized for
    controlling or  stabilizing purposes; and subclasses 391+ for pendulums
    which may respond to  and be calibrated in terms of acceleration.

    250,    Radiant Energy, appropriate subclasses for measuring invisible
    light to measure speed where no manual manipulation is involved.

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclasses 160+ for purely
    electrical speed measuring.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for
    measuring visible light  to determine speed.


CLS 73/1.38
TXT Accelerometer utilizing an inertial element:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.37 wherein the device being proven or
    calibrated comprises an inertial member having an intrinsic or relational
    property which changes in response to a time rate of change of speed or
    velocity of a body which can be used to measure acceleration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    491+,   for an acceleration measuring apparatus or method including means
    retaining a reading of maximum acceleration.

    503.3,  for determining speed by utilizing a gyroscope for combining
    acceleration and time.

    504.03, for using gyroscopic or Coriolis effect on an inertial element to
    determine both angular rate and linear acceleration.

    652+,   for an apparatus sensing vibrations by use of an inertial member.

    866.2,  for a process or an apparatus for measuring a time rate of change
    in a sensed condition not provided for elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 28+ for a mechanical indicator,
    per se, which provides a humanly perceptible signal in response to
    acceleration and includes no quantitative measuring means.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 329 for an
    inertia operated mechanical energy coupling means for a piezoelectric
    element or device.

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclass 162 for a purely
    electrical speed measuring means including an electrical accelerometer
    which senses acceleration by means other than an inertial element.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 669 for an electrical
    indicator or alarm which provides a humanly perceptible signal in response
    to a predetermined acceleration and provides no indication of a
    quantitative measurement.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, for an apparatus or a process for
    determining acceleration by measuring visible light and involving no
    mechanical manipulation.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 280+ for
    an acceleration responsive capacitor.


CLS 73/1.39
TXT Involving pendulum or impact:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.38 wherein either (a) the inertial member
    either comprises or is supported by an object suspended from a fixed
    support so that it is free to swing back and forth or (b) the device is
    responsive to a force resulting from collision of one body with another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    504.04, for a multi-sensor for determination of angular rate using
    gyroscopic or Coriolis effect combined with a determination of linear
    acceleration and including a vibratory inertial body.

    504.12+, for measuring angular velocity using gyroscopic or Coriolis effect
    on a vibratory inertial body.

    514.15, for acceleration measuring by means of a vibratory inertial mass.


    514.29, for measuring acceleration by means of a vibrating sensor.

    514.36, for acceleration measuring by means of a pendulum type inertial
    element wherein no rebalance is recited.

    570+,   for a vibrator, per se, used in testing or the testing of a
    vibrator.


CLS 73/1.41
TXT Optical or magnetic sensing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.37 comprising a sensing means whose
    characteristic changes in response to a light beam being modified in
    accordance with the change in the property of an inertial member due to the
    speed or velocity of the body or the sensing means comprising a body whose
    magnetic characteristic changes in response to the change in the property
    of the inertial member due to the speed or velocity of the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    653,    for an inertial type vibration sensing means having a light beam
    indicator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 227.14+ for a condition responsive light
    guide and subclasses 231.1+ for a light valve actuated by an external
    dynamic physical quantity.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, for a magnet or an electromagnet, per se.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 30 for an inductor device having an
    acceleration responsive inductance adjusting means.


CLS 73/1.42
TXT Timing apparatus (e.g., fuse, camera, or shutter):

    Subject matter under subclass 1.01 wherein the device being proven or
    calibrated measures passage of time.


CLS 73/1.43
TXT Chronometer (e.g., clock, watch, or watch unbalance):

    Subject matter under subclass 1.42 wherein the device being proven or
    calibrated includes means providing a humanly perceptible indication of  a
    passage of time.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, appropriate
    subclasses for a timer, per se.


CLS 73/1.44
TXT Using antenna or radio frequency (RF):

    Subject matter under subclass 1.43 wherein either (a) the apparatus for
    proving or calibrating the device or (b) the device being proven or
    calibrated either (1) includes a metallic device for transmitting or
    receiving electromagnetic waves (i.e., an antenna) or (2) utilizes a
    frequency lying in the range of frequencies, between about 3 kilohertz and
    300 gigahertz, over which electromagnetic radiation is used in radio
    transmission (i.e., radio frequency).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), appropriate subclasses for an antenna, per se.


CLS 73/1.45
TXT Using optical sensor or element:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.43 wherein either (a) the apparatus for
    proving or calibrating the chronometer or (b) the chronometer being proven
    or calibrated includes a means whose optical characteristic changes in
    response to a stimulus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, appropriate subclasses for an optical sensor, per
    se.


CLS 73/1.46
TXT With sound sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.45 wherein either (a) the apparatus for
    proving or calibrating the chronometer or (b) the chronometer being proven
    or calibrated includes a means whose characteristic changes in response to
    sound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    649+,   for a vibration or sound testing sensor.


CLS 73/1.47
TXT Resilient element:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.45 wherein either (a) the apparatus for
    proving or calibrating the chronometer or (b) the chronometer being proven
    or calibrated includes a means having the capacity of returning to an
    original form immediately upon the withdrawal of a force which causes
    compression or distortion.


CLS 73/1.48
TXT Using sound sensor or piezoelectric vibration sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.43 wherein either (a) the apparatus for
    proving or calibrating the chronometer or (b) the chronometer being proven
    or calibrated includes either (1) a means having a characteristic which
    changes in response to sound or (2) an element which produces electricity
    in response to pressure being applied thereto by a detection of vibration.

    (1)     Note.  A tick detector, unless otherwise set forth, is found here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    649+,   for a vibration or sound testing sensor.


CLS 73/1.49
TXT Plural watches or plural sensors:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.48 wherein the device being proven or
    calibrated includes at least two chronometers or transducers.


CLS 73/1.51
TXT Resilient element:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.48 wherein either (a) the apparatus for
    proving or calibrating the chronometer or (b) the chronometer being proven
    or calibrated includes a means having a capacity of returning to an
    original form immediately upon the withdrawal of a force which causes
    compression or distortion.


CLS 73/1.52
TXT Plural watches:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.43 wherein the devices being proven or
    calibrated  includes at least two chronometers.


CLS 73/1.53
TXT With resilient element:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.43 wherein either (a) the apparatus for
    proving or calibrating the chronometer or (b) the chronometer being proven
    or calibrated includes a means having a capacity of returning to an
    original form immediately upon the withdrawal of a force which causes
    compression or distortion.


CLS 73/1.54
TXT Coil spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.53 wherein the resilient element is a
    spirally wound elastic member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 166+ for coil springs, per se.


CLS 73/1.55
TXT Plural coil springs:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.54 wherein the resilient element comprises
    at least two spirally wound elastic members.


CLS 73/1.56
TXT Optical instrument (e.g., camera shutter) or optical sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.42 wherein the timer  being proven or
    calibrated is either (a) an instrument which is operated by light or (b) an
    element whose characteristic changes in response to light.


CLS 73/1.57
TXT Fluid pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.01 wherein the device being proven or
    calibrated either (a) measures fluid pressure or (b) is responsive to fluid
    pressure.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    700+,   for a fluid pressure gauge.


CLS 73/1.58
TXT Vacuum:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.57 wherein either (a) the apparatus for
    proving or calibrating the fluid pressure measuring device uses
    subatmospheric pressure or (b) the device being proven or calibrated is
    responsive to or measures a subatmospheric pressure.


CLS 73/1.59
TXT With signal correction or processing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.57 including either (a) a means for (1)
    performing an operation on an electrical signal to or from the fluid
    pressure measuring device in accordance with a set of rules which result in
    a significant change in the signal or (2) performing an arithmetical or
    some limited logic operation upon or with a signal to or from the fluid
    pressure responsive or measuring device in a systematic manner or (b) a
    means for adjusting an electrical signal either from the fluid pressure
    responsive device or the fluid pressure measuring device to a desired value.


CLS 73/1.61
TXT Span:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.59 wherein the pressure responsive device
    is tested or calibrated for accuracy at at least two pressures.


CLS 73/1.62
TXT Zero:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.59 wherein the pressure responsive device
    is adjusted or checked for accuracy by checking its response to a reference
    pressure.


CLS 73/1.63
TXT With reference source or attachment therefor:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.59 including (a) a means for providing a
    standard or a known pressure during the proving or calibration  of either
    the device which (1) measures fluid pressure or (2) is responsive to fluid
    pressure or (b) an element adapted to be affixed to a means for providing a
    standard or a known pressure during the proving or calibrating of the
    device which either (1) measures pressure or (2) is responsive to fluid
    pressure.


CLS 73/1.64
TXT Varying:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.63 wherein the provided standard or the
    known pressure varies during the proving or calibrating of the fluid
    pressure measuring or the fluid pressure responsive device.


CLS 73/1.65
TXT Dead weight type:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.57 including a reference pressure source
    comprising a known weight acting as a sole force or pressure on a known
    area.


CLS 73/1.66
TXT Varying:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.57 including means providing a standard or
    the known pressure which varies during the proving or calibrating of either
    the fluid pressure measuring device or the fluid pressure responsive device.


CLS 73/1.67
TXT Using or containing liquid:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.66 wherein either (a) the apparatus proving
    or calibrating the fluid pressure measuring device or the fluid pressure
    responsive device, (b) the pressure measuring means, or (c) the fluid
    pressure responsive means  uses or includes a liquid.


CLS 73/1.68
TXT With piston and cylinder:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.57 including a cylindrical solid element
    movable in and snugly fitted in a cylindrical housing and wherein either
    (a) the apparatus for proving or calibrating the fluid pressure measuring
    device or the fluid pressure responsive device, (b) the device for
    measuring the fluid pressure, or (c) the device responsive to the fluid
    pressure includes the solid element and the cylindrical housing.


CLS 73/1.69
TXT Using or containing liquid:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.57 wherein either (a) the apparatus proving
    or calibrating the fluid pressure measuring device or the fluid pressure
    responsive device, (b) the pressure measuring means, or (c) the fluid
    pressure responsive means  uses or includes a liquid.


CLS 73/1.71
TXT Pressure activated device:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.57 wherein the pressure responsive device
    which is being proven or calibrated performs a nonpressure function in
    response to pressure.


CLS 73/1.72
TXT Valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.71 wherein the pressure activated device
    comprises a body that regulates the flow of gases, liquids, or loose
    materials through structure, as a pipe, or through an aperture by opening,
    closing, or obstructing a port or a passageway or movable control element
    of such body.


CLS 73/1.73
TXT Liquid level or volume measuring apparatus:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.01 wherein either (a) the apparatus for
    proving or calibrating the device or (b) the device being proven or
    calibrated measures either (1) a height of liquid contained in a body or
    (2) an amount of material contained in a body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149,    for volume measuring, per se.

    290+,   for liquid level measuring or testing, per se.


CLS 73/1.74
TXT Volumetric dispenser (e.g., pipette):

    Subject matter under subclass 1.73 wherein either (a) the apparatus for
    proving or calibrating the device or (b) the device being proven or
    calibrated deals out a fixed amount of a content of a body in portions.


CLS 73/1.75
TXT Angle, direction, or inclination:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.01 wherein either (a) the apparatus for
    proving or calibrating the device or (b) the device being proven or
    calibrated (1) measures the figure formed by two lines diverging from a
    common point (i.e., angle), (2) a position to which motion or another
    position is referred (i.e., direction), or (3) a deviation from a
    horizontal or vertical reference point (i.e., inclination).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, appropriate subclasses for instruments for
    measuring an angle, a direction, or an inclination.


CLS 73/1.76
TXT Compass:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.75 wherein either (a) the apparatus for
    proving or calibrating the device or (b) the device being proven or
    calibrated indicates direction (north, south, east or west or combinations
    thereof).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, appropriate subclasses for instruments for
    measuring an angle, a direction, or an inclination.


CLS 73/1.77
TXT Gyroscope:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.75 including a spinning mass, usually a
    disk or wheel, the spin axis of which turns between two low friction
    supports and maintains its angular orientation with respect to inertial
    coordinates when not subjected to external torques wherein the spinning
    mass is either (a) a part of the apparatus for proving or calibrating the
    device or (b) the device being proven or calibrated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 5+ for special features of
    gyroscope, per se, and especially subclass 5.22 as the generic place for
    gyroscopes combined with other structure.


CLS 73/1.78
TXT Aircraft, inertial navigation, or attitude:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.75 wherein either (a) the apparatus for
    proving or calibrating the device includes an aircraft or (b) the device
    being proven or calibrated either (1) is used in  inertial navigation
    (e.g., monitoring aircraft angle, direction, or navigation), (2) is
    responsive to inertial navigation, or (3) is responsive to attitude.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    178+,   for  navigation testing.


CLS 73/1.79
TXT Displacement, motion, distance, or position:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.01 wherein the device being proven or
    calibrated measures a vector or magnitude of a vector, the act or process
    of changing location, the length of a line segment joining two points, or
    where an object is placed.


CLS 73/1.81
TXT Length, width, or height:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.79 wherein the device being proven or
    calibrated measures a spatial extent.


CLS 73/1.82
TXT Apparatus for measuring by use of vibration or apparatus for measuring
    vibration (e.g., acoustic or ultrasonic):

    Subject matter under subclass 1.01 wherein either (a) the apparatus being
    proven or calibrated undergoes a rapid linear motion about an equilibrium
    position or (b) the apparatus being proven or calibrated, tested, or
    adjusted measures a rapid linear motion of a body about an equilibrium
    position.


CLS 73/1.83
TXT Liquid:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.82 wherein either the (a) apparatus for
    proving or calibrating the device or (b) the device being proven or
    calibrated uses or includes a fluid exhibiting a readiness to flow, little
    or no tendency to disperse, or relatively high incompressibility.


CLS 73/1.84
TXT Rotary or rotor unbalance:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.82 wherein either the (a) apparatus for
    proving or calibrating the device or (b) the  device being proven or
    calibrated includes either (1) a device undergoing angular motion or (2) an
    apparatus for determining the amount and/or location of masses or force
    causing unbalance in rotatable bodies.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66+,    for measuring rotor unbalance, per se.

    455+,   for a propeller rotor unbalance test.


CLS 73/1.85
TXT Seismic (e.g., geophone) or with optical sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.82 wherein either (a) the apparatus for
    proving or calibrating the device or (b) the device being proven or
    calibrated includes either (1) a device relating to an earthquake or earth
    tremor or (2) a device whose optical characteristic changes in response to
    sensing vibration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    653,    for a sensing apparatus having an inertial element with a light
    beam indicator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclass 13  for testing, monitoring, or calibrating acoustic wave systems
    or devices used for electrical communications.


CLS 73/1.86
TXT Reference standard detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.82 including a means for providing
    reference criterion  which is used for or intended to be used for
    comparison purposes in order to prove, calibrate, test, or adjust the
    measuring, testing, or condition responsive device and wherein significance
    is attributed to the means for providing the reference criterion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 427+ for an
    electrolytic gas sample sensor, per se, combined with a gas reference
    material; and subclass 435 for a standard reference electrode in an
    electrolytic analysis or testing apparatus.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 243 for an apparatus for
    measuring or testing visible light including structure forming a basis for
    comparison with a specimen or a portion thereof under test.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, particularly
    subclasses 8+ for a composition for standardization, calibration,
    simulation, or processes of use in preparation for chemical testing.


CLS 73/1.87
TXT Centrifuge:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.01 wherein  the device being proven or
    calibrated includes a sample holding device designed to rapidly rotate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.02+,  for (a) an apparatus for proving or calibrating a device for
    measuring or testing a liquid or a liquid suspension of a solid by use of
    a centrifuge or (b) proving or calibrating a device using a centrifuge for
    measuring or testing a liquid or a liquid suspension of a solid.

    53.01+, for an analysis of a liquid or a liquid suspension of a solid by
    use of  a centrifuge.


CLS 73/1.88
TXT Span or set point adjustment (e.g., zero correction):

    Subject matter under subclass 1.01 wherein the device being proven or
    calibrated produces an output signal in response to a condition being
    sensed and wherein the proving, the calibrating, the testing, or the
    adjustment of the device is made by setting a range of values or a base
    value for the output.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.34,   for volume of flow, speed of flow, volume rate of flow, or mass
    rate of flow apparatus which proves or calibrates the device by
    establishing a span or a zero or  a volume of flow, speed of flow, volume
    rate of flow, or mass rate of flow  device being proven or calibrated has a
    span or a zero value.


CLS 73/1.89
TXT Roughness or hardness:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.01 wherein the device being proven or
    calibrated produces an output signal in response to a condition being
    sensed and wherein the proving, the calibrating, the testing or the
    adjustment of the device measures (a) the amount of unevenness of a surface
    or (b) the amount of resistance of a surface to penetration of an indentor
    into the surface or the amount of resistance of a surface to scratching.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84+,    for measuring or testing hardness, per se.


CLS 73/7
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which a measurement or test is
    made involving any one or any combination of the operations of abrasion,
    milling, rubbing, or scuffing, even though the test is employed as an index
    of another property, e.g., hardness.  These are, in general, "wear" tests.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9+,     for analogous testing or measuring of frictional resistance,
    coefficient or characteristic.

    862.12+, for torque absorption dynamometers      of the frictional drag
    type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclass 321 for a seal combined with means to indicate wear,
    proper seating, or presence.

    434,    Education, Demonstration, and Cryptography, for the demonstration
    of wear characteristics of materials not involving a measurement or a test
    feature.


CLS 73/8
TXT Subject matter under subclass 7 in which any one of the following is the
    device tested:  a wheel tread, tire, vehicle track or roadway.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146+,   for testing the same devices in other ways.


CLS 73/9
TXT Subject matter under the class definition for measuring or determining the
    frictional drag or resistance between solid bodies when moved relative to
    one another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7+,     for testing or measuring by abrasion, milling, rubbing, or
    scuffing, i.e., "wear" tests.

    862.11  through 862.18, for torque measuring dynamometers e.g., pony brakes.


CLS 73/10
TXT Subject matter under subclass 9 in which the effect of a lubricant upon the
    frictional drag between relatively movable solid bodies is determined,
    there being means for applying or maintaining the supply of lubricant.

    (1)     Note.  These tests are usually termed tests of the lubricant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7+,     for "wear" tests involving application of a lubricant.

    32+,    for determination of specific gravity or density of lubricants.

    53.01,  for determination of viscosity of lubricants and other
    miscellaneous tests of lubricants.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    434,    Education and Demonstration, and Cryptography, subclass 388, for
    lubricant demonstration devices not involving measuring or testing features.


CLS 73/11.01
TXT TESTING IMPACT DELIVERING DEVICE (E.G., A HAMMER):

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising an apparatus or method
    for testing a device which delivers an impact while in use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.08+,  for proving or calibrating a device responsive to force, torque,
    work, or mechanical power.

    12.01+, for testing by impact.

    112+,   for power plant or unit efficiency measuring.

    167,    for projectile testing, per se.

    488+,   for speed or acceleration measuring, per se.

    862.381+, for force measuring, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, subclasses 7 and 129 for a record tracer movement
    responsive to inertial or mass inclination.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 31+ for calorimetry, per
    se.


CLS 73/11.02
TXT Shot peener:

    Subject matter under subclass 11.01 wherein the device being tested is a
    means for providing an acceleration to a pellet for the purpose of
    impacting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7+,     for testing by abrasion, milling, rub-bing, or scuffing, per se.

    37.5,   for measuring dimension, size, and shape using fluid pressure.

    104,    for surface testing or measuring, per se.

    760+,   for testing for specimen stress or strain, or testing by stress or
    strain application.


CLS 73/11.03
TXT Pile driving hammer:

    Subject matter under subclass 11.01 wherein the device being tested
    comprises an impact hammer for driving a columnar structure into the earth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.01+, for testing by impact, per se.

    82,     for an impactor for testing hardness.

    84,     for testing soil hardness by driving a pile into soil.

    488+,   for speed and acceleration measuring, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 53 for metal deforming by shot blasting.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 232+ for a process or
    an apparatus for installing a pile.


CLS 73/11.04
TXT TESTING OF SHOCK ABSORBING DEVICE (E.G., AUTOMOBILE SHOCK ABSORBER, GUN
    RECOIL APPARATUS, ETC.):

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising an apparatus or method
    for testing a device whose function while it is in use is to absorb shock.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.01+, for testing by shock.

    79,     for testing for hardness by observing rebound.

    112+,   for a power plant or unit efficiency measurement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 392.5 for a shock absorber for a
    railway vehicle.

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 266+ for a fluid-type shock absorber for a
    railway vehicle.

    213,    Railway Draft Appliances, subclass 1 for a one-shot shock absorber
    and subclass 32 for a draft gear assembly, per se.

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclass for support-type shock absorbers.

    267,    Spring Devices, appropriate subclass for spring-type shock
    absorbers.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+ for an electrical
    indicator which produces a humanly perceptible signal in response to the
    attainment of a predetermined condition; particularly, subclass 665 for a
    predetermined mechanical force.


CLS 73/11.05
TXT Torsional vibration damper:

    Subject matter under subclass 11.04 wherein the device being tested is used
    to lessen or reduce the amplitude of torsional vibration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    574,    for using vibration for testing for mechanical impedance, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclass for subject
    matter of that class type combined with vibration dampers.

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 378+ for vibration dampers, per se.


CLS 73/11.06
TXT Railway draft gear:

    Subject matter under subclass 11.04 wherein the device being tested
    transmits pull from one railway car to another railway car.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    213,    Railway Draft Appliances, subclass 1 for a one-shot shock absorber
    and subclass 32 for a draft gear assembly, per se.


CLS 73/11.07
TXT In situ vehicle suspension:

    Subject matter under subclass 11.04 wherein the device being tested is a
    structure which suspends a vehicle body on its running gear.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 784 for a vehicle frame having an impact
    shock absorber.


CLS 73/11.08
TXT By applying reciprocating or oscillating motion:

    Subject matter under subclass 11.07 wherein the testing is done by applying
    a periodic motion to the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    570+,   for vibration testing, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 784 for a vehicle frame having an impact
    shock absorber.


CLS 73/11.09
TXT By applying reciprocating or oscillating motion:

    Subject matter under subclass 11.04 wherein the testing is done by applying
    a back-and-forth periodic motion to the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    570+,   for vibration testing, per se.


CLS 73/12.01
TXT TESTING BY IMPACT OR SHOCK:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising an apparatus or method
    for testing a specimen by subjecting it to one or more sudden blows.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11.01,  for testing an impact delivering device.

    11.04,  for the testing of a shock absorbing apparatus.

    35.14+, for testing a body by measuring the effect of an explosion on the
    body.

    78+,    for hardness testing.

    161,    for spring testing, per se.

    167,    for testing ordnance or projectile.

    570+,   for testing by vibration, per se.

    788+,   for loading a specimen to determine shear or strain.

    862+,   for measuring a force or a force component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 32 for a collision released
    identification tag, per se, and subclass 203 for a mechanical indicator,
    per se, which provides a humanly perceptible signal in response to the
    presence or absence of an impact.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, appropriate subclasses for an impacting
    device, per se.

    188,    Brakes, appropriate subclasses for an internal resistance motion
    retarder, per se.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, appropriate subclasses for a fluid
    actuated valve, per se.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 136+ for a resilient shock or vibration
    absorber, per se.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, for an electrical indicator or alarm
    which provides a humanly perceptible signal in response to a predeter-mined
    force.


CLS 73/12.02
TXT Resilient ball (e.g., golf ball, baseball, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 12.01 wherein the specimen being tested is an
    elastic spherical body usually used in games or sports.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     for hardness testing by measuring rebound.

    167,    for projectile testing, per se.

    865.3,  for the testing of a body by subjecting         it to motion, per
    se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, appropriate subclass for mechanical
    guns and projectors.


CLS 73/12.03
TXT Typewriting ribbon or carbon paper:

    Subject matter under subclass 12.01 wherein the specimen being tested is
    either a typewriter ribbon or carbon paper.

    (1)     Note.  Carbon paper is used in the popular sense of the word to
    mean that type of paper which transfers a surface coating when pressed
    against a surface, as by a typewriter key.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150,    for testing of a coating, per se.

    159,    for a filament testing, per se.


CLS 73/12.04
TXT Accelerated or decelerated specimen (e.g., propelled or dropped specimen
    support carriage):

    Subject matter under subclass 12.01 wherein either the specimen or the
    specimen and its support is subjected to a sudden change in velocity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    for projectile testing, per se.

    788,    for applying a load to a specimen in order to test for stress or
    strain.

    865.3,  for testing by imparting motion to a specimen.


CLS 73/12.05
TXT Particle or projectile specimen:

    Subject matter under subclass 12.04 wherein the specimen is either a
    particle or a projectile.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    for other types of testing of projectiles.

    570+,   for applying a load to a specimen in order to test for stress or
    strain.

    865.3,  for testing by imparting motion to a specimen.


CLS 73/12.06
TXT Dropped:

    Subject matter under subclass 12.04 wherein the change in velocity of the
    specimen is caused by dropping the specimen or the specimen and its support
    onto a fixed surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     for testing for hardness using rebound.

    760+,   for applying a load to a specimen in order to test for stress or
    strain.

    865.3,  for testing by imparting motion to a specimen.


CLS 73/12.07
TXT By hydraulic or pneumatic forces:

    Subject matter under subclass 12.04 wherein the change in velocity of the
    specimen is caused by either (a) liquid pressure or (b) air pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     for hydraulically driven impact-type hardness testing.

    167,    for other types of testing of projectiles.

    760+,   for applying a load to a specimen by hydraulic or pneumatic loading
    means in order to test for stress or strain.

    865.3,  for testing by imparting motion to a specimen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, subclass 73 for fluid pressure
    actuated guns and projectors.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, appropriate subclass for valve and
    fluid actuated valves, per se.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, appropriate subclass for a fluid current
    conveyor, per se.


CLS 73/12.08
TXT Specimen directly subjected to a fluid pressure pulse or wave:

    Subject matter under subclass 12.01 wherein the source of the blow to the
    specimen is a fluid pressure pulse or wave.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, appropriate subclass for a fluid current
    conveyor, per se.


CLS 73/12.09
TXT Specimen impactor detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 12.01 wherein significance is attributed to
    the device which subjects a specimen to a blow.


CLS 73/12.11
TXT Particle or projectile:

    Subject matter under subclass 12.09 wherein the impactor is either a
    particle or a projectile.


CLS 73/12.12
TXT Reciprocating or oscillating:

    Subject matter under subclass 12.09 wherein the impactor moves towards and
    away from the specimen in such a fashion so as to apply periodic blows to
    the specimen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    570+,   for vibration testing, per se.


CLS 73/12.13
TXT Dropped:

    Subject matter under subclass 12.09 wherein the impactor is released above
    the specimen and accelerated by gravity until it strikes the specimen.


CLS 73/12.14
TXT Pivoted:

    Subject matter under subclass 12.13 wherein the impactor swings about a
    fixed axis.


CLS 73/19.01
TXT GAS CONTENT OF A LIQUID OR A SOLID:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a process or an
    apparatus for determining the nature or amount of gas in a substance other
    than gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23.20+, for a process or apparatus for analyzing gas.

    73+,    for a process or apparatus for determining the moisture content of
    materials.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, for processes of gas separation, per se
    (i.e., not combined with analysis steps).

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, for apparatus for gas separation, per
    se (i.e., not combined with analysis means).

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 400+ for an
    apparatus which utilizes electrolytic action for analysis or testing.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 319+ for a process for resolution of a
    colloid.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 68+ for an apparatus which utilizes
    a chemical reaction to determine the gas content of a liquid or solid.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, for a process
    which utilizes a chemical reaction to determine the gas content of a liquid
    or a solid, particularly subclass 68 for determining the gas content of
    blood.


CLS 73/19.02
TXT By gas chromatography:

    Subject matter under subclass 19.01 wherein the effluent of a mixture of
    gases, which has contacted a solvent or sorbent which separates the mixture
    into fractional components, is successively tested to determine the
    quantity, quality or identity of a component of the effluent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23.35+, for gas analysis using gas chromatography, and particularly
    subclass 23.40 for a gas detector which uses gas chromatography to analyze
    gas.

    53.01+, for liquid testing, (e.g., liquid chromatography).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 82+ for processes of gas
    separation, per se (i.e., not combined with analysis steps), using
    chromatography.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 101+ for apparatus for gas
    separation, per se (i.e., not combined with analysis means), of the
    chromatographic type.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 400+ for
    electrochemical gas sensors, per se.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 660+ for a process of
    removing a constituent from a liquid by sorption, particularly subclasses
    656+ for selective sorptions (e.g., chromatography) subclasses 85+ for a
    liquid separator with recorder or register and subclasses 263+ for a liquid
    separator utilizing a bed of particulate material.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, particularly subclasses 464+
    for analyzing gas using ionization effects, and appropriate subclasses for
    testing gas by measuring impedance, admittance, and related quantities.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 50+ for an apparatus utilizing a
    chemical reaction to analyze a gas, particularly subclass 89 for gas
    chromatography.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, appropriate
    subclasses for a process of gas analysis which utilizes a chemical reaction
    to determine the gas content of a liquid or a solid, and particularly
    subclass 68 for determining the gas content of blood, and subclasses 161+
    for chromatography.


CLS 73/19.03
TXT By vibration:

    Subject matter under subclass 19.01 wherein the liquid or solid is
    subjected to vibratory forces to determine its gas content.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24.01+, for detection of gas, per se, by measuring the effect of the gas
    being tested on vibration.

    570+,   for testing, per se, using vibration.

    861.18, for measuring the volume or rate of flow of fluent material by
    sensing vibration.


CLS 73/19.04
TXT By rate of flow of the gas:

    Subject matter under subclass 19.01 wherein the gas content of the liquid
    or solid is determined by measuring the rate of flow of the gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.16+,  for calibration of flow meters.

    155,    for determining fluid flow in bore holes.

    170.07  and 170.11, for determining the rate of flow and direction of flow
    of fluid in meteorology and oceanology.

    181+,   for determining the speed of a craft with respect to a fluid.

    861+,   for measuring the flow of fluent material, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclasses 180.1+ for metering and
    mixing two gases where one is a fuel.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, for nonelectrical means for giving an alarm
    upon occurrence of fluid flow.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 98+ for a self-proportioning flow
    system; and subclasses 624.11+ for a programmed or timed valve which meters
    fluid merely by timing the interval between opening and closing of the
    valve.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 48 for measuring the rate
    of flow drilling fluid.

    222,    Dispensing, particularly subclasses 14+, 59+ and 71+ for volume or
    rate of flow-measuring means having dispensing features or which are used
    in dispensing combinations.

    250,    Radiant Energy, particularly subclasses 258, 259+, 302+, 356.1, and
    432+ for miscellaneous radiant energy responsive devices.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 306 for
    flow-measuring means responsive to nuclear induction.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 606+ for electric means for
    giving a humanly perceptible indication or signal in response to a
    predetermined condition, such as flow of a fluid.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 27+ for flow-measuring
    means employing lasers.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 555 for
    measuring, testing or monitoring means utilizing electrical computer detail
    or data processing system detail.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 21 for a system utilizing a pulse counter to
    measure fluid flow.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 300+ for flow-measuring means with structure
    particularly adapted for placement on or in a living body.


CLS 73/19.05
TXT By pressure of the gas:

    Subject matter under subclass 19.01 wherein the gas content of the liquid
    is determined by measuring the pressure of the gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24.04,  for measuring vapor pressure of gas by vibration.

    25.04,  for measuring vapor pressure of gas by measuring a thermal property
    of the gas.

    29.01+, for determining the vapor pressure of gas being tested.

    31.04,  for analyzing gas by pressure measurement, per se.

    37+,    for a testing apparatus or process for subjecting a specimen
    directly to fluid pressure (positive or negative) to determine a property
    of the specimen.

    78+,    for a device for measuring hardness as an index of fluid pressure,
    particularly subclass 80 for a tonometer and subclass 81 for a tire
    hardness gauge.

    115,    for a process or an apparatus which measures the pressure within an
    engine to determine its efficiency.

    299+,   for a hydrostatic pressure type of liquid level or depth gauge.

    384,    for a barometer.

    700+,   for measurement of the pressure of fluent material.

    861.42+, for a pressure differential measuring device for determining
    volume or rate of flow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 26+, for a device of that
    class type combined with pressure compensator.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 81+ for a
    fluid pressure operated switch.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 201+ for an expanding
    fluid type thermometer.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 485+ for a blood pressure measuring device.


CLS 73/19.06
TXT Of a beverage:

    Subject matter under subclass 19.05 wherein the gas content of a potable
    liquid (i.e., a liquid suitable for consumption by a human being) is
    determined.


CLS 73/19.07
TXT Of metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 19.01 wherein the substance whose gas content
    is being determined is a metal.


CLS 73/19.08
TXT Of concrete, mortar, or plastic while in a fluent state:

    Subject matter under subclass 19.01 wherein the substance whose gas content
    is being determined is concrete, mortar, or plastic while capable of
    flowing.


CLS 73/19.09
TXT Of mud:

    Subject matter under subclass 19.01 wherein the substance whose gas content
    is being determined is a mixture of soil with a liquid.


CLS 73/19.1
TXT Of a liquid:

    Subject matter under subclass 19.01 wherein the substance whose gas content
    is being determined is a substance which exhibits a characteristic
    readiness to flow, little or no tendency to disperse, and relatively high
    incompressibility.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19.06,  for determining the gas content of a beverage by measuring the
    pressure of the gas.

    53.01+, for testing of a liquid or liquid suspension of solids.


CLS 73/19.11
TXT Lubricant:

    Subject matter under subclass 19.1 wherein the liquid whose gas content is
    being determined is a substance capable of reducing friction, heat and wear
    when introduced as a film between solid surfaces.


CLS 73/19.12
TXT Particular separator:

    Subject matter under subclass 19.01 wherein significance is attributed to
    means for separating the gas from the liquid or solid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31.07,  for a particular separator used in gas analysis, per se.

    863.21+, for a sampler, per se, which separates constituents of the sample.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, for processes of gas separation, per se
    (i.e., not combined with analysis steps).

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, for apparatus for gas separation, per
    se (i.e., not combined with analysis means).


CLS 73/23.2
TXT GAS  ANALYSIS:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a process or an
    apparatus for detecting or measuring the composition of, or some
    constituent of, a gas or gaseous mixture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 253+ for the detection of a gas within
    or emanating from the earth by invisible radiation emanating from the gas
    naturally or as a result of irradiation by invisible radiation, subclasses
    336.1+ for testing of a gas by utilizing an electric signalling device
    detecting radiation induced or emitted naturally, or detecting infrared,
    ultraviolet, X-ray, or gamma radiation or neutrons modified by the gas.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for
    testing and electrical property of a gas.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 34+ for a resistor, per se, which
    is responsive to the condition of a gas wherein no quantitative
    measurements of the gas are disclosed.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 632+ for an electrical
    indicator providing a humanly perceptible signal representing a
    predetermined condition of a gas.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 402+ for gas analysis
    utilizing a colorimeter to determine the shade or color of the gas.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 50+ for an apparatus utilizing a
    chemical reaction to analyze gas.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclass 68 for a
    process which utilizes a chemical reaction to analyze gas.


CLS 73/23.21
TXT With compensation detail (for error or drift correction, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 23.2 including means for making a correction
    for an undesirable variation in a condition within an apparatus or in a
    test result due to such condition.


CLS 73/23.22
TXT For gas chromatography:

    Subject matter under subclass 23.21 in which the effluent of a mixture of
    gases, which has contacted a solvent or sorbent which separates the mixture
    into fractional components, is successively tested to determine the
    quantity, quality or identify of a component of the effluent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23.35   through 23.40, for a gas analysis detector, per se, which may be
    used in gas chromatography.

    53.01+, for liquid testing (e.g., liquid chromatography).

    863+,   for sample preparation or sampling, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 82+ for processes of gas
    separation, per se (i.e., not combined with analysis steps), using
    chromatography.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 101+ for apparatus for gas
    separation, per se (i.e., not combined with analysis means), of the
    chromatographic type.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and wave Energy, subclasses 400+ for an
    electrochemical gas sensor, per se.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 660+ for a process of
    removing a constituent from a liquid by sorption, particularly subclasses
    656+ for selective sorptions (e.g., chromatography), subclasses 85 for a
    liquid separator with recorder or register, and subclasses 263+ for a
    liquid separator utilizing a bed of particulate material.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring, and Testing, particularly subclasses 464+
    for analyzing gas using ionization effects, and appropriate subclasses for
    testing gas by measuring impedance, admittance, and related quantities.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 50+ for an  apparatus utilizing a
    chemical reaction to analyze a gas, particularly subclass 89 for gas
    chromatography.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, particularly
    subclass 68 for a process utilizing a chemical reaction for determining the
    gases in the blood, and subclasses 161+ for chromatography.


CLS 73/23.23
TXT Baseline drift correction circuitry:

    Subject matter under subclass 23.22 which includes circuitry for correcting
    a systematic shift in the spectra of the chromatogram.


CLS 73/23.24
TXT Rate of flow:

    Subject matter under subclass 23.22 wherein the condition being corrected
    or adjusted is the rate of flow of the gas being tested or of the carrier
    gas.


CLS 73/23.25
TXT Temperature:

    Subject matter under subclass 23.22 wherein the condition being corrected
    or adjusted is the temperature of the gas or the chromatography.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 100+ for temperature
    measurement, per se.


CLS 73/23.26
TXT Gradient:

    Subject matter under subclass 23.25 wherein the condition being corrected
    or adjusted is the temperature variations along the column or columns of
    the chromatography.


CLS 73/23.27
TXT Pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 23.22 wherein the condition being corrected
    or adjusted is the pressure of the gas effluent or of the carrier gas.


CLS 73/23.28
TXT For density or specific gravity:

    Subject matter under subclass 23.21 wherein the condition being corrected
    or adjusted affects the determination of the mass per unit volume of the
    gas or the ratio of the density of the gas to the density of some substance
    taken as a standard when both densities are obtained by weighing in air.


CLS 73/23.29
TXT Pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 23.28 wherein the condition being corrected
    or adjusted is the pressure of the gas being measured or tested, which
    pressure is used to determine the density or specific gravity of the gas.


CLS 73/23.3
TXT Breath analysis:

    Subject matter under subclass 23.2 wherein the gas being tested is exhaled
    by a human being or other animal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 632+ for a humanly
    perceptible indication of a predetermined condition of the breath.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 84+ for a breath analyzer utilizing
    a chemical change to analyze air exhaled from a human being or other animal.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, appropriate
    subclasses for a process of gas analysis which utilizes a chemical
    reaction, particularly subclass 132 for ethanol determination, and subclass
    900 for a cross-reference art collection of breath testing processes.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 530+ for breath analyzing inside the body.


CLS 73/23.31
TXT Gas of combustion:

    Subject matter under subclass 23.2 wherein the gas being tested is the
    product of a combustion process.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 632+ for a humanly
    perceptible indication of a predetermined condition of a gas of combustion.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 94+ for a detector, per se, of
    combustible gas.


CLS 73/23.32
TXT Air-fuel ratio:

    Subject matter under subclass 23.31 wherein the ratio of the amount of air
    to the amount of fuel in the gas of combustion is determined.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 434+ and particularly
    subclasses 672+ for measuring the composition of exhaust gas and utilizing
    the measurement to control the air-fuel ratio.


CLS 73/23.33
TXT Solid content:

    Subject matter under subclass 23.32 wherein the nature or amount of
    particulate matter in the gas of combustion is determined.


CLS 73/23.34
TXT Odor:

    Subject matter under subclass 23.2 wherein stimulation of the olfactory
    organ of an animal is used to detect or measure the gas.


CLS 73/23.35
TXT Gas chromatography:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 23.2 in which the effluent of a mixture
    of gases, which has contacted a solvent or sorbent which separates the
    mixture into fractional components, is successively tested to determine the
    quantity, quality or identity of a component of the effluent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19.02,  for a gas chromatography process or apparatus for determining the
    presence of, or the amount of, gas in a liquid or a solid.

    35.05+, for a gas detector, per se, which may be used in gas chromatography.

    53.01+, for liquid testing (e.g., liquid chromatography).

    863+,   for a sampling device, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 82+ for processes of gas
    separation, per se (i.e., not combined with analysis steps), using
    chromatography.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 101+ for apparatus for gas
    separation, per se (i.e., not combined with analysis means), of the
    chromatographic type.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 400+ for
    electrochemical gas sensors, per se.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 660+ for a process of
    removing a constituent from a liquid by sorption, particularly subclasses
    656+ for selective sorptions (e.g., chromatography), subclasses 85+ for a
    liquid separator with recorder or register and subclasses 263+ for a liquid
    separator utilizing a bed of particulate material.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, particularly subclasses 464+
    for gas analysis using ionization effects, and appropriate subclasses for
    testing gas by measuring impedance, admittance, and related quantities.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 50+ for an apparatus utilizing a
    chemical reaction to analyze a gas, particularly subclass 89 for gas
    chromatography.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, for a process of
    gas analysis which utilizes a chemical reaction, particularly subclasses
    161+ for chromatography.


CLS 73/23.36
TXT With electrical computer or data processor control:

    Subject matter under subclass 23.35 including a programmable electronic
    device which can store, retrieve and process data, which device controls
    the chromatography.


CLS 73/23.37
TXT With spectrometer:

    Subject matter under subclass 23.35 combined with an instrument used to
    measure the spectral characteristics of light.


CLS 73/23.38
TXT Petrochemical:

    Subject matter under subclass 23.35 in which the gas being tested is a
    derivative of petroleum.


CLS 73/23.39
TXT Column detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 23.35 comprising detail of a tubular
    structure which is either packed with a material having a known  absorption
    characteristic and/or is coated with a liquid of a high molecular weight
    and having known properties.


CLS 73/23.4
TXT Detector detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 23.35 wherein significance is attributed to
    the sensing means.


CLS 73/23.41
TXT Including sample preparation or sampling:

    Subject matter under subclass 23.35 wherein the sample is treated or
    modified before being tested, or a predetermined portion of a mass of
    material is obtained for testing, or a previously obtained sample
    transported or handled in preparation for analysis, or a previously
    obtained sample is introduced into an analyzer.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a liquid sample which is gasified prior to
    injection into the column.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    863+,   for sample preparation or sampling, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 89 for a sample undergoing a chemical
    reaction.


CLS 73/23.42
TXT Detail of gas handling means:

    Subject matter under subclass 23.35 wherein significance is attributed to
    the means for confining, directing, or controlling the flow of gaseous
    material.


CLS 73/24.01
TXT By vibration:

    Subject matter under subclass 23.2 in which the composition of a gas or a
    constituent of a gas is determined by detecting or measuring the
    transmission of vibration through the gas being tested.


CLS 73/24.02
TXT Produced by radiant energy:

    Subject matter under subclass 24.01 wherein the vibration is produced by
    energy in the form of electromagnetic waves or traveling subatomic, atomic
    or molecular particles.


CLS 73/24.03
TXT Solid content of gas:

    Subject matter under subclass 24.01 wherein the nature or amount of
    particulate matter in gas is determined.


CLS 73/24.04
TXT Moisture content or vapor pressure of gas:

    Subject matter under subclass 24.01 wherein the amount of moisture in the
    gas being analyzed or the pressure of the vapor in the gas is determined.


CLS 73/24.05
TXT Density or specific gravity of gas:

    Subject matter under subclass 24.01 for determining the mass per unit
    volume of the gas or the ratio of the density of the gas to the density of
    some substance taken as a standard when both densities are obtained by
    weighing in air.


CLS 73/24.06
TXT Detector detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 24.01 wherein significance is attributed to
    the means for sensing the vibration.


CLS 73/25.01
TXT By thermal property:

    Subject matter under subclass 23.2 in which the composition of a gas or a
    constituent of a gas is determined by detecting or measuring the heat
    transmitting or heat related properties of the gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29.02   for hygrometers utilizing temperature measuring.


CLS 73/25.02
TXT With magnetic property (e.g., paramagnetic gas):

    Subject matter under subclass 25.01 wherein the gas being analyzed produces
    a modification of the magnetic field of a measuring device.


CLS 73/25.03
TXT Thermoconductivity:

    Subject matter under subclass 25.01 wherein the heat transmitting property
    of a gas is determined.


CLS 73/25.04
TXT Moisture content or vapor pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 25.01 wherein the amount of moisture in the
    gas or the pressure of the vapor in the gas is measured or detected.


CLS 73/25.05
TXT Detector detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 25.01 wherein significance is attributed to
    the sensing means.


CLS 73/28.01
TXT Solid content of gas:

    Subject matter under subclass 23.2 wherein the nature or amount of
    particulate matter in gas is determined.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31.01,  for measuring other impurities in the air.

    170.25, for measuring solid particles originating in the outer space
    surrounding the Earth.

    863.21+, for sampling involving separation of constituents  where no
    testing device is claimed.


CLS 73/28.02
TXT Particle charging:

    Subject matter under subclass 28.01 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring a parameter related to electrically charged particles (e.g., the
    total electrical field produced by the particles being charged).


CLS 73/28.03
TXT Pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 28.01 wherein the force per unit area applied
    over a surface by the gas is measured in order to determine the solid
    content of the gas.


CLS 73/28.04
TXT Separator detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 28.01 wherein significance is attributed to
    the means separating the solid from the gas.


CLS 73/28.05
TXT Impactor:

    Subject matter under subclass 28.04 wherein separation is accomplished by
    directing a fluid current of gas containing solid particles toward a solid
    surface wherein the isolated particles remain on the surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    863.21+, for subject matter under the class definition for obtaining a
    predetermined portion of a mass of material being tested including
    isolation of individual components of the source or sample.


CLS 73/28.06
TXT Fractionalizing:

    Subject matter under subclass 28.05 wherein the particles are distributed
    on the surface according to size.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    863.22, for sampling, per se, including isolation of individual components
    of a source or sample by directing a fluid current containing particles
    toward a solid surface wherein the isolated particles remain on the surface.


CLS 73/29.01
TXT Moisture content or vapor pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 23.2 including means for determining the
    amount of liquid diffused in the gas or the pressure exerted by liquid
    diffused into the gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24.04,  for determining the moisture content or vapor pressure of a gas by
    measuring the transmission of vibration through the gas.

    25.04,  for determining the moisture content or vapor pressure of a gas by
    measuring a thermal property of the gas.


CLS 73/29.02
TXT Subject matter under subclass 29.01 wherein the amount of the liquid is the
    actual amount of water vapor in a unit volume of air (e.g., the absolute
    humidity) or the ratio of the amount of         water vapor in the air to
    the amount of water vapor which the air would hold if it were saturated at
    that temperature (e.g., the relative humidity).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29.01,  for other thermal testing of a gas.

    73+,    for humidity determining means combined with additional apparatus
    for testing or determining the moisture content of a substance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.06+ for
    humidity controlled electric switches.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, principally subclass
    44 for humidity responsive devices combined with regulating means.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for
    devices wherein the atmosphere or gas changes in electrical conductance, in
    response to humidity and such property, is taken as a measure of humidity.
    Where no electrical property of the material under test is measured, but an
    additional element is exposed to the material to have its electrical
    properties affected by a physical property of the separate element
    measured, the art is in Class 73, Measuring and Testing.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 35 for electrical resistors whose
    resistance value is responsive to humidity or changes in humidity.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 178 for
    relays controlled by humidity.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 109 for a measuring device
    providing a composite indication of temperature and humidity and subclass
    142 for the combination of a thermometer and another measuring device
    wherein the thermometer is not a subcombination of a hygrometer.  In the
    latter case when a thermometer is merely claimed as a subcombination of a
    hygrometer, the device would be classified in Class 73, Measuring and
    Testing.


CLS 73/29.03
TXT Pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 29.01 wherein the pressure of the gas is
    measured to determine the amount of vapor present in the gas.


CLS 73/29.04
TXT With visual indication:

    Subject matter under subclass 29.01 wherein the determination is made by
    directly observing the visible effect of a gas on a sensor.


CLS 73/29.05
TXT Detector detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 29.01 wherein significance is attributed to
    the sensing means.


CLS 73/30.01
TXT Density or specific gravity:

    Subject matter under subclass 23.2 including means for determining the mass
    per unit volume of the gas or the ratio of the density of the gas to the
    density of some substance taken as a standard when both densities are
    obtained by weighing in air.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for determining the density or specific gravity of a liquid or
    solid.

    152.05, for determining a characteristic of a formation in a borehole by
    measuring density.


CLS 73/30.02
TXT By pressure measurement:

    Subject matter under subclass 30.01 wherein pressure is measured in order
    to determine density or specific gravity of gas.


CLS 73/30.03
TXT By rate of flow:

    Subject matter under subclass 30.01 wherein the density of specific gravity
    of a gas is determined by measuring the rate of the flow of the gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118.2,  for the measuring of the air intake of an auxiliary unit of an
    engine or a motor.

    861+,   for a device determining the volume of flow, speed, volume rate of
    flow, or mass rate of flow of fluent material.


CLS 73/30.04
TXT Detector detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 30.01 wherein significance is attributed to
    the sensing means.


CLS 73/31.01
TXT Ambient air:

    Subject matter under subclass 23.2 wherein the gas being tested is the
    naturally occurring mixture of gases surrounding the earth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28.01+, for measuring the solid content of air not originating in the outer
    space surrounding the Earth.


CLS 73/31.02
TXT Impurity:

    Subject matter under subclass 31.01 wherein the mixture is being tested for
    undesirable content.


CLS 73/31.03
TXT Impurity:

    Subject matter under subclass 23.2 wherein the gas is being tested for
    undesirable content.


CLS 73/31.04
TXT Pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 23.2 wherein the force per unit area exerted
    by the gas on a surface is measured.


CLS 73/31.05
TXT Detector detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 23.2 wherein significance is attributed to
    the sensing means.


CLS 73/31.06
TXT Semiconductor:

    Subject matter under subclass 31.05 wherein the detector includes
    semiconductor material.


CLS 73/31.07
TXT Particular separator:

    Subject matter under subclass 23.2 wherein significance is attributed to
    the means for isolating a constituent of a gaseous mixture.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include chromatographic separation of
    gases, per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19.02,  for chromatographic separation of gases whose content in a solid or
    a liquid is being measured.

    19.12,  for a particular separator of a gas from a liquid or a solid.

    23.35,  for chromatographic separation of gases whose composition or
    constituent is being detected or measured.

    863+,   for gas sampling, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, for processes of gas separation, per se
    (i.e., not combined with analysis steps).

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, for apparatus for gas separation, per
    se (i.e., not combined with analysis means).

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 83+ for an apparatus for gas
    sampling involving the use of sorbents or chemicals wherein a chemical
    reaction is utilized to analyze the gas.


CLS 73/32
TXT Subject matter under the class definition for determining the density
    and/or specific gravity of liquids or solids.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is an apparatus for  measuring density of a
    liquid suspension of a solid, per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for determination of the density or specific gravity of gases.

    152.05, for determining a characteristic of a formation in a borehole by
    measuring density.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 558 for
    measuring the density of a substance which involves a computation and only
    nominal claimed structure to the measuring device.


CLS 73/35.01
TXT ENGINE DETONATION (E. G., KNOCK):

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a process or an
    apparatus for performing a test or measurement by determining or detecting
    abnormal rapid combustion in an internal combustion engine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116+,   for engine or motor testing, per se, including pressure measuring
    in an engine or a motor.

    570+,   for testing (a) by applying vibration to  a body or (b) by sensing
    vibration, per se.

    700+,   for a fluid pressure gage, per se.

    865.6,  for testing, per se, in a simulated environment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 425 for engine knock control
    of ignition timing and subclass 435 for knock control of a pressure
    responsive charge forming device.

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclasses 378+ for purely
    electrical testing of an internal combustion engine ignition system or
    device.

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclass 111 for determining engine knock by use of an electrical computer
    wherein no more than a nominally recited knock sensor is claimed.


CLS 73/35.02
TXT Fuel rating (e.g., octane rating):

    Subject matter under subclass 35.01 wherein a measurement of a quality of a
    test fuel is made by detecting an abnormal rapid combustion (e.g. knock) of
    the test fuel in the engine and comparing the knock of the test fuel with a
    knock value of a second fuel having a known fuel rating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53.01+, for liquid analysis, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 575+ for diverse fuel
    supply for an internal-combustion engine.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclass 36.2 for fluid
    distribution means in a carburetor.


CLS 73/35.03
TXT Combustion signal compared to reference signal varied by a condition of the
    engine:

    Subject matter under subclass 35.01 including a combustion signal produced
    by a sensing means whose characteristic changes in response to the
    combustion and which is compared with a reference signal responsive to a
    condition of the engine to determine detonation.

    (1)     Note. A reference signal is presumed to be varied by a condition of
    the engine unless otherwise stated as being fixed.

    (2)     Note. The reference signal may be derived from the combustion
    itself as, for example, by  integration.


CLS 73/35.04
TXT Including calculation means:

    Subject matter under subclass 35.03  comprising an element for performing a
    mathematical computation utilizing the reference signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclass 111 for application of an electrical computer or data processing
    to determine a vehicle engine knock wherein computer detail or data
    processing detail is recited and wherein no more than a nominally recited
    sensor is claimed.


CLS 73/35.05
TXT Automatic gain control or feedback control:

    Subject matter under subclass 35.03 including either (a) an amplifier
    having a gain controlled by some condition of the engine or (b) a circuit
    arrangement comprising several stages including an earlier stage and a
    later stage wherein the later stage produces an output signal which is fed
    to the earlier stage of the arrangement for control purposes.


CLS 73/35.06
TXT Combustion signal compared to a fixed reference signal or utilizing a
    threshold value:

    Subject matter under subclass 35.01 including a combustion signal produced
    by a sensing means whose characteristic changes in response to combustion
    and which is either (a) compared to a predetermined signal or (b) limited
    to that portion over a predetermined minimum value.


CLS 73/35.07
TXT Specific type of detonation sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 35.01 comprising a specified sensing means
    whose characteristic changes in response to detecting detonation and which
    is intended to produce a signal in response to the change in the
    characteristic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    866.5,  for a probe or a probe mounting, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclass for an
    electrochemical sensor, per se.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 216+ for a photocell, per se.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 328+ for a
    condition responsive piezoelectric sensor, per se.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appripriate subclass for a condition responsive
    inductive sensor, per se.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, appropriate subclass for a condition
    responsive resistor, per se.

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, appropriate
    subclass for an optical element, per se.

    361,    Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices, appropriate subclass
    for a condition responsive capacitor, per se.


CLS 73/35.08
TXT Ionization:

    Subject matter under subclass 35.07 wherein the sensing means comprises
    spaced electrodes between which electrical current passes in proportion to
    ionization of combustion gases in the engine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclasses 459+ for an
    ionization detector, per se.


CLS 73/35.09
TXT Vibration:

    Subject matter under subclass 35.07 wherein the sensing means detects a
    rapid periodic motion of a body about an equilibrium position, which rapid
    periodic motion of the body is caused by detonation.

    (1)     Note. An acoustic detector for knock sensing is included here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    570+,   for other testing by vibration.


CLS 73/35.11
TXT Piezoelectric:

    Subject matter under subclass 35.09 wherein the sensing means comprises a
    pressure responsive material which generates an electric signal in response
    to vibration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 329 for a
    vibration responsive piezoelectric detector, per se.


CLS 73/35.12
TXT Pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 35.07 wherein the sensing means detects a
    rapid fluctuation in pressure caused by detonation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    for measuring pressure in an engine.

    700+,   for a fluid pressure gage, per se.


CLS 73/35.13
TXT Piezoelectric:

    Subject matter under subclass 35.12 wherein the sensing means  comprises
    pressure responsive material which generates an electrical signal in
    response to the pressure fluctuation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 338 for a
    pressure responsive piezoelectric detector, per se.


CLS 73/35.14
TXT EXPLOSIVE:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a process or an
    apparatus for (a) determining a physical characteristic of a body or
    material by measuring a disruptive force or a disruptive pressure produced
    by an explosion of the body or material or (b) testing a body or material
    by applying a disruptive force or a disruptive pressure due to an
    explosion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.01+,for testing by impact or shock, per se.

    167,    for ordnance testing especially by measuring pressure in a gun
    barrel.

    700+,   for a pressure gage, per se.

    865.6,  for testing, per se, in a simulated environment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, for an explosive, per se.

    346,    Recorders, subclass 7 for an inertia recorder.


CLS 73/35.15
TXT By time measurement (e.g., burning rate, detonation velocity):

    Subject matter under subclass 35.14 wherein the explosion produces a
    traveling wavefront and the determination of a parameter of the explosion
    is made by measuring the time required for the wave front in the explosion
    to proceed from one point to another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclasses 160+ for electrical
    speed determining by measuring time between the occurrence of electrical
    pulses.

    368,    Horology: Time Measuring Systems or Devices, for a time measuring
    system and device and especially, subclasses 89+ for an interval timer, per
    se.


CLS 73/35.16
TXT Electric sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 35.14 comprising a sensing means for
    producing an electrical signal response to a disruptive force or a
    disruptive pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    866.5,  for a probe or a probe mounting, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy for a photocell, per se.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 311+ for a
    condition responsive piezoelectric sensor, per se.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for a condition responsive
    inductive sensor, per se.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 13+ for a condition responsive
    resistor, per se.

    356,    Optics: Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclass for condition
    responsive devices measuring visible light.

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, appropriate
    subclass for an optical element, per se.

    361,    Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 280+ for a
    condition responsive capacitor, per se.


CLS 73/35.17
TXT Safety feature or containment structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 35.14 including means for either (a)
    protecting a person from the effects of the explosive during testing or (b)
    restricting effects of the explosion to a predetermined space during
    testing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    571,    for a test chamber for vibration testing, per se.

    865.6,  for a test chamber, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclass 331 for a blasting charge case,
    per se.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection or a Related Device, appropriate subclasses
    for a safety structure, per se.

    220,    Receptacles, appropriate subclass for container structure, per se,
    and in particular subclasses 88.1+ for a fire  preventing attachment for a
    receptacle, per se.


CLS 73/36
TXT Subject matter under the class definition for testing illuminating fluids
    to determine flash point, vapor pressure and end point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35.02,  for measuring engine knock or detonation.

    35.14+  for testing  of an explosive.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 8 for flammability testing,
    and subclasses 16+ for transformation point determination, in general.


CLS 73/37
TXT Subject matter under the class definition for subjecting a specimen
    directly to fluid pressure (positive or negative) to determine properties
    of the specimen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.16+,  for proving or calibrating volume or rate of flow meters and
    elements thereof.

    1.57+,  for proving or calibrating pressure responsive devices and gauges.

    12.01+, for testing by impact or shock where the impact or shock is
    transmitted by a fluid.

    807     and 838+, for the use of fluids to determine the bursting strength
    of sheet material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 90 for test plug closures for
    conduits.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    for processes and apparatus for filling of receivers with gases, liquids,
    or fluent solids, or for evacuating receivers, particularly subclasses 4+
    and 65+ for gas filling or evacuating.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 558 for
    measuring the pressure of a fluid which involves a computation and only
    nominal claimed structure to the measuring device.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    for processes and apparatus for gas filling and/or evacuation of lamp and
    discharge device envelopes in connection with other manufacture or repair
    operations.


CLS 73/37.5
TXT Subject matter under subclass 37 for checking dimensions, shape or size of
    an object, or the spacing of selected portions thereof, having at least one
    unit for the direct application of fluid pressure thereto and utilizing the
    escape of fluid about the specimen as an index of its dimension, shape,
    size or spacing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 556+ and 700+ for processes and
    apparatus for determining size or dimension by means of a mechanical
    contact or feeler which in turn influences the fluid flow, pressure or
    volume of indicating means.


CLS 73/37.6
TXT Subject matter under subclass 37.5 in which the object is in motion during
    the test.


CLS 73/37.7
TXT Subject matter under subclass 37.6 in which the object under test is a
    sheet, cable or filament.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159,    and see the search notes thereto, for other sheet or filament tests.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 10+ for
    fluid actuated material detectors for control of means which advance
    material of indefinite length and subclass 22 for pneumatic detectors to
    sense the lateral position of material.


CLS 73/37.8
TXT Subject matter under subclass 37.5 for making measurements of each of two
    correlated objects or two portions of the same object.


CLS 73/37.9
TXT Subject matter under subclass 37.5 for measurement of size of bores and
    similar concave openings in specimens.


CLS 73/38
TXT Subject matter under subclass 37 for determining through the direct
    application of fluid under pressure the porosity (i.e., volume of
    interstices) of solids, the fineness of powdered materials, or action of
    filters; also, the determining of permeability (i.e., the passage or
    diffusibility of fluids through a specimen).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152.05, for determining a characteristic of a formation in a borehole by
    measuring permeability or porosity.


CLS 73/39
TXT Subject matter under subclass 37, for the testing of the operating or
    control mechanism of fluid pressure operated brakes (e.g., air or hydraulic
    types for motor vehicles, trains, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for testing the wear surfaces of brakes by abrasion, milling,
    rubbing or scuffing.

    121+,   for other types of brake testing.

    862.09+, particularly subclasses 862.09+ for dynamo-meters having brakes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, particularly subclasses 141 and 151+ for fluid pressure
    types.

    303,    Fluid-Pressure and Analogous Brake Systems.


CLS 73/40
TXT Subject matter under subclass 37 for testing or determining leakage of a
    specimen or body.

    (1)     Note.  The combination of means for testing specimens with means to
    reject those specimens which fail to pass the test is in Class 209,
    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 509+ except where
    the test is a leakage test.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclasses 193+ for detecting and
    preventing leakage from gas mains.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 90 for closure plugs useful in
    connection with leakage tests of pipes.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, see Note 1.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 4+, for leakage testing
    by measuring thermal parameters.


CLS 73/40.5
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 for testing fluid operative systems or
    fluid handling conduits while in their operative assembly or position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclass 193, for means associated
    with a gas main to detect or indicate leaks without positive means to
    create a condition whereby leakage is produced in a defective pipe or
    joint; and subclass 195 for the preparation of odorous material and/or the
    insertion thereof into a gas main.

    166,    Wells, subclass 179 and the subclasses here noted for packer or
    plug devices in wells which are inherently capable of use as fluid pressure
    leakage testers.


CLS 73/40.7
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 wherein a probe gas, smoke, vapor or
    powder is applied to a specimen and its escape or penetration is detected.


CLS 73/41
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 wherein the article under test (usually a
    can or other receptacle) is moved by a conveyor during or through the test
    operation.


CLS 73/41.2
TXT Subject matter under subclass 41 including immersing the article in a
    liquid.


CLS 73/41.3
TXT Subject matter under subclass 41.2 including means for segregating or
    discarding a defective article (e.g., the operator presses a button to
    reject a defective specimen).


CLS 73/41.4
TXT Subject matter under subclass 41.3 automatically responsive to a defective
    condition of the article.


CLS 73/45
TXT Subject matter under subclass 41 including means for segregating or
    discarding a defective article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.3,   for similar structure combined with immersion testing.


CLS 73/45.1
TXT Subject matter under subclass 45 responsive to a defective condition of the
    article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.4,   for similar structure combined with immersion testing.


CLS 73/45.2
TXT Subject matter under subclass 45.1 controlled or operated by electric or
    electromagnetic means.


CLS 73/45.3
TXT Subject matter under subclass 45.1 wherein the article is sustained against
    a test head by vacuum unless leakage of the article destroys the vacuum and
    permits the article to fall by gravity.


CLS 73/45.4
TXT Subject matter under subclass 45.1 relating to presealed containers.


CLS 73/45.5
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 including immersing the specimen in a
    liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.2+,  for immersion test with conveyor means for moving the specimen
    through the liquid.


CLS 73/45.6
TXT Subject matter under subclass 45.5 for testing a pneumatic inner tube,
    casing, or tubeless tire.


CLS 73/45.7
TXT Subject matter under subclass 45.6 relating to mesh structure for inclosing
    the tire to prevent it from bursting under pressure.


CLS 73/45.8
TXT Subject matter under subclass 45.5 relating to a radiator.


CLS 73/46
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 for testing or determining leakage between
    parts mechanically fitted together and capable of being separated without
    destruction (e.g., faucets, separable pipe joints having interfitted parts,
    etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37      and 40, for fluid pressure testing of rivets, welded seams, etc.,
    for various purposes including leakage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclass 320 for a seal combined with means to indicate fluid
    leakage.


CLS 73/47
TXT Subject matter under subclass 46 for leakage testing of engine heads, i.e.,
    any one or any combination of valve, piston or piston ring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119+,   for miscellaneous tests of engine parts.


CLS 73/48
TXT Subject matter under subclass 46 for leakage testing of tire valves.


CLS 73/49
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 for testing of pneumatic tubeless tires,
    inner tubes or casings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45.6,   for testing such articles by immersion.


CLS 73/49.1
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 for testing for leakage of a pipe section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for similar testing of a separable joint.

    49.5+,  for strength testing of pipe.


CLS 73/49.2
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 for testing a receptacle.


CLS 73/49.3
TXT Subject matter under subclass 49.2 the receptacle being a presealed
    container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45.4,   for testing for leakage of a sealed receptacle on a conveyor and
    with automatic discard means.

    52,     for other testing of a sealed receptacle.


CLS 73/49.4
TXT Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein a test liquid pressure is induced
    by a single stroke ram or plunger.


CLS 73/49.5
TXT Subject matter under subclass 37 for testing pipe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49.1,   for testing for leakage of a pipe section.


CLS 73/49.6
TXT Subject matter under subclass 49.5 including power operated means for
    closing or sealing the pipe ends.


CLS 73/49.7
TXT Subject matter under subclass 37 for testing of a motor auxiliary or part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118,    for other testing of auxiliary units.

    119,    for other testing of motor parts.


CLS 73/49.8
TXT Subject matter under subclass 37 relating to a clamp, plug or other sealing
    feature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49.6,   for power operated means for sealing ends of a pipe under test.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 90 for a test plug closure for
    a conduit.


CLS 73/52
TXT Subject matter under the class definition for testing of sealed receptacles
    (usually cans).  Test is usually for spoilage of contents, presence of
    foreign matter therein, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37+,    particularly subclasses 45.4 and 49.3, for testing of sealed
    receptacles with extraneously applied fluid pressure.

    824,    for testing of sealed receptacles by rotating squeezing elements.


CLS 73/53.01
TXT LIQUID ANALYSIS OR ANALYSIS OF THE SUSPENSION OF SOLIDS IN A LIQUID:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a process or an
    apparatus for detecting or determining the composition of, a constituent
    of, or a property of a liquid or a liquid suspension of a solid.

    (1)     Note.  Determining is considered to include measuring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for testing the effect of a lubricant on frictional resistance or
    coefficient.

    32,     for determining the specific gravity or the density of a liquid or
    a liquid suspension of a solid wherein the density measuring is not used to
    further determine some other property of the liquid or the liquid
    suspension.

    35.02,  for measuring engine knock or detonation in order to determine a
    fuel rating.

    152.42+, for determining a characteristic of a borehole, a casing, or a
    drill rigging by analyzing a fluid.

    169,    for determining the physical characteristic of dough.

    170.17+, for a rain gauge.

    290+,   for a liquid level gauge.

    592,    for liquid leakage or liquid location detection by using vibration.

    700+,   for a fluid pressure gauge.

    861+,   for measuring the volume or the rate of flow of a liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclasses for
    electrolytic sensor, per se.

    250,    Radiant Energy, appropriate subclasses for using invisible light to
    test liquids and, in particular, subclasses 301+ for methods of determining
    oil presence, contamination, or concentration using radiant energy;
    subclasses 306+ for inspection of liquids by charged particles, subclasses
    336.1+ for invisible radiant energy signalling of conditions of liquids and
    subclasses 573+ for optical or pre-optical systems having a liquid in the
    path there of wherein the modification of or the emission of radiant energy
    resulting from the irradiation of the liquid is tested.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 603+ for a humanly
    perceptible indication of a predetermined condition of a liquid.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclass for
    determining a property of a liquid  by measuring visible light.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, appropriate subclass for an apparatus for
    testing a liquid wherein a chemical reaction is involved.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 300+ for testing liquids wherein the test is
    conducted within a living body.


CLS 73/53.02
TXT Butter fat content:

    Subject matter under subclass 53.01 wherein the constituent is butter fat.


CLS 73/53.03
TXT Paper or wood suspension (e.g., paper or wood pulp):

    Subject matter under subclass 53.01 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring either the degree to which paper pulp or wood pulp relinquishes
    its water content or the percentage of water content relinquished.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29.02+, for determining the moisture content of a gas.

    73+,    for determining the moisture content of solid or the absorptive
    characteristic of material for a liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclass 258 for a device for
    regulating the ratio of liquid to fiber of pulp and subclass 263 for the
    combination of means for testing or permitting the examination of water in
    liquid laid fibrous product and a structure or mechanism for producing
    and/or treating water or liquid laid fibrous products.


CLS 73/53.04
TXT By measuring fluid flow characteristic (e.g., by volume or rate of flow or
    by change in fluid level):

    Subject matter under subclass 53.03 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring a parameter which is characteristic of the liquid being in motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.16+,  for proving or calibrating volume of flow, speed of flow, volume
    rate, or flow or mass rate of flow.

    1.73+,  for proving or calibrating a liquid level or volume measuring
    apparatus.

    54.13,  for determining viscosity by measuring a time interval of travel or
    flow rate using an orifice, nozzle, or extrusion means wherein there is
    disclosed detail of a means whose optical character changes due to a change
    in a physical phenomenon associated with the liquid whose viscosity is
    being measured.

    54.19,  for detail of a timing means in a device        wherein viscosity
    is determined by gravity movement of an object in a liquid.

    61.64+, for determining settling or filtering ability by measuring
    volumetric or flow or sedimentation rate.

    61.73,  for utilizing flow effect to measure settling or filtering ability.

    152.21+, for determining a characteristic of a borehole, a casing, or a
    drill rigging by measuring a flow of a fluid during drilling.

    170.11+, for determining the direction and rate of flow of a fluid in
    meteorology and oceanology.

    178+    for the speed of a craft with respect to        a fluid.

    861+,   for measuring the volume or the rate of flow of liquid, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclass for nonelectrical
    means for giving an alarm upon the occurrence of a predetermined condition
    of a fluid.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 98+ for a self-proportioning flow system
    and subclasses 624.11+ for a programmed or timed valve which meters fluid
    merely by timing the interval between opening and closing of the valve.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, appropriate subclass for measuring
    the rate of flow of drilling fluid combined with a device of that class
    type.

    222,    Dispensing, particularly subclasses 14, 59, and 71 for volume or
    rate of flow-measuring means having dispensing features or which are used
    in dispensing combinations.

    250,    Radiant Energy, particularly subclasses 258, 259+, 356.1, and 432
    for miscellaneous radiant energy responsive devices.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 306 for
    flow-measuring means responsive to nuclear induction.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 606+ for electrical means
    for giving a humanly perceptible indication or signal  in response to a
    predetermined condition, such as the flow of fluid.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 27+ for flow measuring
    means employing a laser.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 555 for
    measuring, testing, or monitoring means utilizing electrical computer
    detail or data processing techniques without detail of the sensing means.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 89+, for
    time interval measuring, per se.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 21 for a system utilizing a pulse counter to
    measure fluid flow.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 481+ for measuring blood flow in the body
    wherein there is disclosed structure for placement in a living body.


CLS 73/53.05
TXT Lubricant testing:

    Subject matter under subclass 53.01 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring the capability of a substance to reduce friction, heat, and wear
    when it is introduced as a film between two relatively movable solid
    surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS

    10,     for an apparatus or a process for determining the effect of a
    lubricant upon the frictional drag between two relatively movable solid
    surfaces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 301 for an apparatus or method for
    utilizing invisible radiant energy in testing for the presence of, the
    concentration of or contamination in oil.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 70 for determining the
    contamination of oil by measuring a characteristic of electromagnetic wave
    energy in the visible range.


CLS 73/53.06
TXT By analyzing a characteristic of a measuring surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 53.05 wherein determination is made by
    analyzing or observing the effect of the lubricant upon a surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS

    104,    for surface inspection or testing, per se.


CLS 73/53.07
TXT By solid content:

    Subject matter under subclass 53.05 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring an amount of particulate matter in the liquid.


CLS 73/54.01
TXT Viscosity:

    Subject under subclass 53.01  wherein the determination is of the
    resistance of the liquid to change in shape or a force within the liquid
    that opposes motion therein (e.g. flow, usually by internal force reaction
    or energy absorption).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    822,    for viscosity measurement in a solid by compressional testing.

    843,    for viscosity measurement in a solid by shear testing using a
    rotary element.

    862.08+, for torque measurement, per se.

    862.38+, for force measurement, per se.


CLS 73/54.02
TXT Combined with other measuring means:

    Subject matter under subclass 54.01 including another type of measuring
    process or apparatus.


CLS 73/54.03
TXT Of concrete (e.g., slump indicator):

    Subject matter  under subclass 54.01 wherein the liquid is a mixture of
    cement, sand and gravel.


CLS 73/54.04
TXT Friction tube (e.g., capillary):

    Subject matter under subclass 54.01 wherein the determination is made by
    using a small slender tubular conduit wherein the surface of the liquid in
    contact with the conduit forms an elevation or a depression due to either
    the molecular attraction of the molecules of the liquid to each other or
    the attraction of the molecules of the liquid to the molecules of the
    surface of the tube.


CLS 73/54.05
TXT Plural tubes:

    Subject matter under subclass 54.04 including more than one conduit.


CLS 73/54.06
TXT By pressure measuring:

    Subject matter under subclass 54.05 wherein the determination includes
    measuring the force, per unit area, of the fluid moving through the
    conduit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54.14,  for determining viscosity by measuring pressure of the liquid
    flowing through an orifice, nozzle, or extrusion means.

    61.47,  for measuring pressure in order to determine the liquid constituent
    of a liquid mixture.

    61.73,  for measuring pressure of a liquid in order to determine its solid
    content.

    61.78,  for measuring pressure to determine the content or effect of a
    constituent of a liquid mixture.

    64.46,  for measuring differential pressure to determine vapor pressure.

    64.51,  for measuring pressure to determine surface tension.

    700+,   for liquid pressure measurement, per se.


CLS 73/54.07
TXT By time interval of travel or flow rate measuring:

    Subject matter under subclass 54.04 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring the volume of or the mass rate of flow of the liquid or the time
    elapsed for the liquid to move a predetermined distance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.16+,  for proving or calibrating volume of flow, speed of flow, volume
    rate, or flow or mass rate of flow.

    53.04,  for utilizing flow characteristics to measure a property of a paper
    or pulp suspension.

    54.13,  for determining viscosity by measuring a time interval of travel or
    flow rate using an  orifice, nozzle, or extrusion means wherein there is
    disclosed detail of a means whose optical character changes due to a change
    in a physical phenomenon associated with the liquid whose viscosity is
    being measured.

    54.19,  for detail of a timing means in a device wherein viscosity is
    determined by gravity movement of an object in a liquid.

    61.64+, for the utilization of flow properties in order to determine
    settling or filtering ability.

    61.73,  for utilization of flow characteristic to measure the solid content
    of a liquid suspension.

    152.29+, for determining a characteristic of a borehole, a casing, or a
    drill rigging by measuring a rate of flow of a fluid, per se.

    170.11+, for determining the direction and rate of flow of a fluid in
    meteorology and oceanology.

    178+    for the speed of a craft with respect to a fluid.

    861+,   for measuring the volume or the rate of flow of liquid, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclass, for nonelectrical
    means for giving an alarm upon the occurrence of a predetermined condition
    of a fluid.

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 481+ for measuring blood flow in the body
    wherein there is disclosed structure for placement in a living body.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 98+ for a self-proportioning flow system
    and subclasses 624.11+ for a programmed or timed valve which meters fluid
    merely by timing the interval between opening and closing of the valve.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, appropriate subclass for measuring
    the rate of flow of drilling fluid combined with a device of that class
    type.

    222,    Dispensing, particularly subclasses 14, 59, and 71 for volume of
    rate of flow-measuring means having dispensing features or which are used
    in dispensing combinations.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 306 for
    flow-measuring means responsive to nuclear induction.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 606+ for electrical means
    for giving a humanly perceptible indication or signal  in response to a
    predetermined condition, such as the flow of fluid.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for flow
    measuring devices of the optical type including no manipulation other than
    that necessary for an optical test.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 510+
    for application of computer detail or data processor detail in fluid flow
    study.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 89+, for
    time interval measuring, per se.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 21 for a system utilizing a pulse counter to
    measure fluid flow.


CLS 73/54.08
TXT Including a photocell:

    Subject matter under subclass 54.07 including means having an electrical
    characteristic which changes in response to light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54.13,  for determining viscosity by measuring a time interval of travel or
    flow rate using an orifice, nozzle, or extrusion means wherein there is
    disclosed detail of a means whose optical character changes due to a change
    in a physical phenomenon associated with the liquid whose viscosity is
    being measured.

    866.5,  for a sensor, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for photocell detectors, per se.


CLS 73/54.09
TXT By pressure measuring:

    Subject matter under subclass 54.04 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring the force per unit area of the liquid moving through the conduit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54.06,  for measuring viscosity by pressure difference measuring using
    plural friction tubes.

    54.14,  for determining viscosity by measuring pressure of the liquid
    flowing through an orifice, nozzle, or extrusion means.

    61.47,  for measuring pressure in order to determine the liquid constituent
    of a liquid mixture.

    61.73,  for measuring pressure of a liquid in order to determine its solid
    content.

    61.78,  for measuring pressure to determine the content or effect of a
    constituent of a liquid mixture.

    64.46,  for measuring differential pressure to determine vapor pressure.

    64.51,  for measuring pressure to determine surface tension.

    700+,   for liquid pressure measurement, per se.


CLS 73/54.11
TXT Orifice, nozzle, or extrusion means:

    Subject matter under subclass 54.01 wherein the determination is made by
    utilizing the reaction of the liquid to flowing through an orifice, a
    nozzle, or an extrusion means.


CLS 73/54.12
TXT Plural fluids (e. g., comparison):

    Subject matter under subclass 54.11 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring reactions of plural liquids.


CLS 73/54.13
TXT By time interval of travel or flow rate measuring:

    Subject matter under subclass 54.11 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring the volume or the mass rate of flow or the time elapsed for the
    liquid to move a predetermined distance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.16+,  for proving or calibrating volume of flow, speed of flow, volume
    rate, or flow or mass rate of flow.

    53.04,  for utilizing flow characteristics to measure a property of a paper
    or pulp suspension.

    54.07,  for time interval of travel or rate of flow measuring using
    friction tubes to determine viscosity.

    54.19,  for detail of a timing means in a device wherein viscosity is
    determined by gravity movement of an object in a liquid.

    61.64+, for the utilization of flow properties in order to determine
    settling or filtering ability.

    61.73,  for utilization of flow characteristic to measure the solid content
    of a liquid suspension.

    152.21, for determining a characteristic of a borehole, a casing, or a
    drill rigging by measuring a rate of flow of a fluid during drilling.

    152.29, for determining a characteristic of a borehole, a casing, or a
    drill rigging by measuring a rate of flow of a fluid, per se.

    170.11+, for the determining the direction and rate of flow of a fluid in
    meteorology and oceanology.

    178+    for the speed of a craft with respect to a fluid.

    861+,   for measuring the volume or the rate of flow of liquid, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclass, for nonelectrical
    means for giving an alarm upon the occurrence of a predetermined condition
    of a fluid.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 98+ for a self-proportioning flow system
    and subclasses 624.11+ for a programmed or timed valve which meters fluid
    merely by timing the interval between opening and closing of the valve.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, appropriate subclass for a device
    for measuring the rate of flow of drilling fluid in combination with an art
    device of that class type.

    222,    Dispensing, particularly subclasses 14, 59, and 71 for volume of or
    rate of flow-measuring means having dispensing features or which are used
    in dispensing combinations.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 306 for
    flow-measuring means responsive to nuclear induction.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 606+ for electrical means
    for giving a humanly perceptible indication or signal  in response to a
    predetermined condition, such as the flow of fluid.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclass for an optical
    measuring of fluid flow utilizing visible light but having no other
    manipulation recited other than that for use in an optical measurement of
    that class.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 510+
    for computer detail or data processor detail to fluid flow study.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 89+ for
    time interval measuring, per se.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 21 for a system utilizing a pulse counter to
    measure fluid flow.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 481+ for measuring blood flow in the body
    wherein there is disclosed structure for placement in the living body.


CLS 73/54.14
TXT By force, pressure, or displacement measuring:

    Subject matter under subclass 54.11 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring either the force, pressure, or  displacement force used to move
    or extrude the liquid or the pressure of the liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61.47,  for measuring pressure in order to determine the liquid constituent
    of a liquid mixture.

    61.73,  for measuring pressure of a liquid in order to determine its solid
    content.

    61.78,  for measuring pressure to determine the content or effect of a
    constituent of a liquid mixture.

    64.46,  for measuring differential pressure to determine vapor pressure.

    64.51,  for measuring pressure to determine surface tension.

    700+,   for liquid pressure measurement, per se.

    862.08+, for torque measuring, per se.

    862.38+, for measuring force, per se.


CLS 73/54.15
TXT Gravity movement of an object in a liquid ( e. g., a bubble):

    Subject matter under subclass 54.01 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring rate at which an object rises (usually a bubble) or sinks in the
    liquid.


CLS 73/54.16
TXT With detail of temperature or pressure regulating or compensating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 54.15 wherein significance is attributed to
    means for controlling, regulating, or compensating for a thermal effect or
    pressure on the liquid.


CLS 73/54.17
TXT Using a reference fluid:

    Subject matter under subclass 54.15 wherein the determination is made by
    comparing the time of flight of an object through the liquid being tested
    with the time of flight of same or a second  identical object through a
    liquid of a known standard viscosity.


CLS 73/54.18
TXT With means for restoring an object to its initial starting position (e.g.,
    magnetic or fluid means):

    Subject matter under subclass 54.15 including means for returning the
    object to its original position after the completion of each test.


CLS 73/54.19
TXT Including detail of a timing detection circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 54.15 wherein significance is attributed to
    an electrical circuit for detecting the time of flight of the object in the
    liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54.13,  for determining viscosity by measuring a time interval of travel or
    flow rate using an orifice, nozzle, or extrusion means wherein there is
    disclosed detail of a means whose optical character changes due to a change
    in a physical phenomenon associated with the liquid whose viscosity is
    being measured.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 89+ for
    time interval measuring, per se.


CLS 73/54.21
TXT Including an object concentricity guide means:

    Subject matter under subclass 54.15 including means for maintaining a
    constant gap between the container for the liquid and the falling object.


CLS 73/54.22
TXT Adhesion between wetted surfaces:

    Subject matter under subclass 54.01 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring the molecular attraction of the liquid to closely adjacent wetted
    surfaces between which it is located.


CLS 73/54.23
TXT Force reactance to member driven therein:

    Subject matter under subclass 54.01 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring the force reaction of the liquid to a member (e.g., a disc, an
    impeller, a resonator, etc.) driven therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54.31+, for measuring the driving force of a rotationally driven member in
    order to determine viscosity.

    64.49,  for determining the surface tension by measuring force.

    862.08, for torque measuring, per se.

    862.38+, for force measuring, per se.


CLS 73/54.24
TXT By vibration:

    Subject matter under 54.23 wherein the determination is made by subjecting
    the member to mechanical vibration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19.03,  for measuring the gas content of a liquid by measuring the effect
    of the liquid on vibration.

    24.01,  for utilization of vibration to analyze gas.

    40.05+, for acoustic detection of liquid  leakage utilizing pressurized
    fluid.

    54.41,  for utilizing vibration to test the viscosity of a liquid.

    61.45,  for determining a multiphase liquid constituent of a liquid mixture
    measuring vibration.

    61.49,  for utilizing vibration to determine the liquid constituent of a
    liquid mixture.

    61.75,  for measuring the solid components of a liquid utilizing vibration.

    61.79,  for utilizing vibration to determine the effect of the content of a
    liquid.

    64.42,  for testing of a gelling or coagulation property of a liquid
    utilizing vibration.

    64.53,  for testing a liquid or a liquid suspension of a solid by utilizing
    vibration.

    592,    for detecting liquid leakage and location by utilizing vibration.


CLS 73/54.25
TXT Dampening effect (e.g., frequency, amplitude, speed, or power measurement):

    Subject matter under subclass 54.24 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring a power, force, or current required to maintain a predetermined
    vibrational frequency or amplitude or change in frequency or amplitude of a
    vibrator driven by a constant force.


CLS 73/54.26
TXT With detail of a drive means or a detecting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 54.25 wherein significance is attributed to a
    circuitry or other means used to vibrate the member or to the means which
    measure the vibrational effect of the member.


CLS 73/54.27
TXT With detail (e. g., circuitry) of a drive means or a detecting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 54.24 wherein significance is attributed to a
    circuitry or other means used to vibrate the member or to the means which
    measure the vibrational effect of the member.


CLS 73/54.28
TXT Rotationally driven member:

    Subject matter under subclass 54.23 wherein the member is subjected to
    rotational motion of more than 360 degrees.

    (1)     Note.  Oscillations of less than 360 degrees are considered
    vibrations.


CLS 73/54.29
TXT Comparator:

    Subject matter under subclass 54.28 wherein the determination is made by
    comparing measurements of a member rotating in a first liquid with the same
    or an identical member rotating in a second liquid.


CLS 73/54.31
TXT By measuring the driving force or the speed of the driven member:

    Subject matter under subclass 54.28 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring the drive current or voltage for maintaining the member rotating
    at a constant speed or by measuring a speed of the driven member when
    driven by a constant force.


CLS 73/54.32
TXT By measuring an opposed drag force:

    Subject matter under subclass 54.28 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring a force exerted on a secondary member due to a viscous drag force.


CLS 73/54.33
TXT By measuring angular displacement:

    Subject matter under subclass 54.32 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring the amount of movement imparted to the secondary member due to
    movement of the rotationally driven member.


CLS 73/54.34
TXT By measuring a counterbalance or restoring force:

    Subject matter under subclass 54.32  wherein the determination is made by
    measuring the force is which is necessary to maintain stationary a
    secondary member which is displaced by a viscous drag force caused by the
    rotation of the driven member.


CLS 73/54.35
TXT Including detail of a motor drive, a stator, or a housing structure of a
    motor:

    Subject matter under subclass 54.28 wherein significance is attributed to
    either a means for converting energy to a form which results in the
    movement of the driven member, a stationary part of such means or an
    enclosure for such means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, appropriate subclass for
    electric motor structure or housing, per se.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclass for a
    drive circuit for a motor or motor control, per se.


CLS 73/54.36
TXT Penetrometer:

    Subject matter under subclass 54.23 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring the depth of or the rate of penetration of a member driven into
    the liquid with a predetermined force or by measuring a characteristic of
    the predetermined force on a member driven therein.


CLS 73/54.37
TXT By movement or displacement between shearing surfaces:

    Subject matter under subclass 54.23 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring the relative movement between adjacent or parallel surfaces when
    subjected to a predetermined force for a predetermined time.


CLS 73/54.38
TXT Detector detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 54.23 wherein significance is attributed to a
    sensing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    862+,   for a force responsive sensors or a torque responsive sensor.

    866.5,  for a sensing means, per se.


CLS 73/54.39
TXT Shearing torque between parallel surfaces:

    Subject matter under subclass 54.01 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring the force which is necessary to shear a film of liquid disposed
    between closely adjacent relatively slidable surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54.24+, for similar subject matter wherein a reaction force is measured.


CLS 73/54.41
TXT Vibration:

    Subject matter under subclass 54.01 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring the effect of the liquid or the suspension being tested on
    vibration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19.03,  for measuring the gas content of a liquid by measuring the effect
    of the liquid on vibration.

    24.01,  for utilization of vibration to analyze gas.

    40.05+, for acoustic detection of liquid leakage utilizing pressurized
    fluid.

    54.24,  for determining viscosity of a liquid by measuring the force
    reactance to a member vibrated therein.

    61.45,  for determining a multiphase liquid constituent of a liquid mixture
    measuring vibration.

    61.49,  for utilizing vibration to determine the liquid constituent of a
    liquid mixture.

    61.75,  for measuring the solid components of a liquid utilizing vibration.

    61.79,  for utilizing vibration to determine the effect of the content of a
    liquid.

    64.42,  for testing of a gelling or coagulation property of a liquid
    utilizing vibration.

    64.53,  for testing a liquid or a liquid suspension of a solid by utilizing
    vibration.

    592,    for detecting liquid leakage and location by utilizing vibration.


CLS 73/54.42
TXT Thermal:

    Subject matter under subclass 54.01 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring a heat or a temperature related property.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61.46   and 61.76+, for determining content or the effect of the
    constituent of a liquid mixture by means of a thermal measurement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 43 for determining the
    inherent thermal properties, per se, of a liquid, subclass 54 for thermal
    measurement of liquid volume and subclass 139 for measuring the temperature
    of a liquid metal.


CLS 73/54.43
TXT With detail of a pressure or a temperature regulating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 54.01 wherein significance is attributed to a
    means for controlling temperature or pressure within the apparatus for
    analyzing the liquid or the liquid suspension.


CLS 73/60.11
TXT Cleaning or foaming ability:

    Subject matter under subclass  53.01 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring either the ability of the liquid or the liquid suspension to
    remove undesirable matter from a surface or the ability of liquid or the
    liquid suspension to foam bubbles.


CLS 73/61.41
TXT Content or effect of a constituent of a liquid mixture:

    Subject matter under subclass 53.01 wherein the determination is made by
    detecting or measuring the amount of or the presence of a constituent of a
    liquid mixture, the ratio of one constituent to at least another
    constituent, or the effect of a constituent of a liquid mixture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23.2+,  for similar processes and apparatus for gas analysis, particularly
    subclasses 23.35+ for gas chromatography and subclasses 28.01+ for
    determining the solid content of a gas.

    64.41+, for tests of gelling or coagulation even though this effect may be
    disclosed as being caused by the presence of some constituent.

    863.21, for samplers, per se, which isolate particulate matter from a
    liquid for latter analysis or inspection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 58 and 123+ for processes and apparatus,
    per se, for fractionally solidifying by freezing and separation.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses, for the
    separation of a solid from a liquid.


CLS 73/61.42
TXT Metallic particle constituent:

    Subject matter under subclass 61.41 wherein the determination being made is
    of a liquid containing metallic particles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing,subclass 204 for determining
    magnetic properties of a liquid or a liquid mixture.


CLS 73/61.43
TXT Liquid constituent of a liquid mixture:

    Subject matter under subclass 61.41 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring or detecting the amount, ratio, presence, or effect of one or
    more constituents of a mixture of liquids.


CLS 73/61.44
TXT Plural liquid constituent (e.g., multiphase liquid):

    Subject matter under subclass 61.43 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring or detecting the amount, ratio, presence, or effect of plural
    liquid constituents of a liquid mixture.


CLS 73/61.45
TXT By vibration:

    Subject matter under subclass 61.44 wherein the determination is made by
    detecting or measuring the effect of the liquid on vibration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19.03,  for measuring the gas content of a  liquid by measuring the effect
    of the liquid on vibration.

    24.01,  for utilization of vibration to analyze gas.

    40.05+, for acoustic detection of liquid leakage utilizing pressurized
    fluid.

    54.24,  for determining viscosity of a liquid by measuring the force
    reactance to a member vibrated therein.

    54.41,  for utilizing vibration to test the viscosity of a liquid.

    61.49,  for utilizing vibration to determine the liquid constituent of a
    liquid mixture.

    61.75,  for measuring the solid components of a liquid utilizing vibration.

    61.79,  for utilizing vibration to determine the effect of the content of a
    liquid.

    64.42,  for testing of a gelling or coagulation property of a liquid
    utilizing vibration.

    64.53,  for testing a liquid or a liquid suspension of a solid by utilizing
    vibration.

    592,    for detecting liquid leakage and location by utilizing vibration.


CLS 73/61.46
TXT By thermal measurement:

    Subject matter under subclass 61.43 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring a heat or a temperature related property.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54.42,  for a thermal measurement of the viscosity of a liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclass for thermal
    measuring and testing, per se, or temperature measuring, per se.


CLS 73/61.47
TXT By pressure measurement:

    Subject matter under subclass 61.43 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring the force per unit area of the liquid or the liquid mixture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54.14,  for determining viscosity of a liquid flowing through an orifice,
    nozzle, or extrusion means by measuring pressure.

    61.73,  for measuring pressure in order to determine the solid content of a
    liquid mixture.

    61.78,  for measuring pressure to determine the content or effect of a
    constituent of a liquid mixture.

    64.46,  for measuring differential pressure to determine vapor pressure.

    64.51,  for measuring pressure to determine surface tension.

    700+,   for liquid pressure measurement, per se.


CLS 73/61.48
TXT By optical irradiation:

    Subject matter under subclass 61.43 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring the effect of the sediment on visible light.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, appropriate subclasses for a photocell, per se, and
    for analyzing a liquid utilizing invisible light which is modified by
    transmission through or emission by the liquid being tested wherein the
    modified light is tested.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring  and Testing, appropriate subclass for an
    optical measuring of fluid using visible light and involving no
    manipulation other than that necessary to perform the optical test.


CLS 73/61.49
TXT By vibration:

    Subject matter under subclass 61.43 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring of detecting the effect of the liquid on vibration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19.03,  for measuring the gas content of a liquid by measuring the effect
    of the liquid on vibration.

    40.05+, for acoustic detection of liquid leakage utilizing pressurized
    fluid.

    54.24,  for determining the viscosity of a liquid by measuring the force
    reactance of the liquid to the member vibrated therein.

    54.41,  for utilizing vibration to test the viscosity of a liquid.

    61.45,  for determining a multiphase liquid constituent of a liquid mixture
    by utilizing vibration.

    61.75,  for utilizing vibration to measure the solid content of a liquid
    mixture.

    61.79,  for utilizing vibration to measure the content or the effect of a
    constituent of a liquid mixture.

    64.42,  for utilization of vibration for detecting gelling or coagulation
    characteristics of a liquid.

    64.49,  for determining surface tension by utilizing vibration.

    64.53,  for testing a liquid or a liquid suspen-sion of a solid by
    utilizing vibration.

    592,    for utilizing vibration to test for liquid leakage or a pipe  flaw.


CLS 73/61.51
TXT Buoyant detector:

    Subject matter under subclass 61.43 wherein the detector floats on the
    surface of the liquid.


CLS 73/61.52
TXT Chromatography:

    Subject matter under subclass 61.43 wherein the determination is made by
    successively testing the effluence of a mixture of liquids, which has
    contacted a solvent or sorbent which separates the mixture into fractional
    components in order to determine the quantity, quality or identity of a
    component of the effluent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19.1,   for a gas chromatographic process or apparatus for determining the
    presence of or the amount of gas in a liquid.

    23.35,  for the analysis of gas by chromatography.

    863+,   for liquid sampling, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 400+ for
    electrolytic analysis and testing apparatus.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 775+ for electrolytic analysis or
    testing processes.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 85+ for a liquid
    separator with a recorder, subclass 198.2 for a device for removing a
    constituent from a liquid by sorption combined with means to add treating
    material, subclasses 263+ for a liquid separator utilizing a bed of
    particulate material and subclasses 660+ for a process of removing a
    constituent from a liquid by sorption.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, particularly subclasses 459+
    for liquid analysis using ionization effects and appropriate subclasses for
    testing a liquid by measuring an electrical property of the liquid.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 409+ for a process of
    liquid chromatography wherein a liquid substance, a solute in a solvent, or
    a miscible liquid is examined by transmission of light to furnish a
    quantitative or qualitative determination with respect to a chemical
    composition of the liquid analyzed in the absence of a color development.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 70 for chromatographic analysis of a
    liquid utilizing a chemical reaction.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclass 161 for
    a process or composition in which the results of a chemical reaction is
    subjected to a chromatographic separation or analysis.


CLS 73/61.53
TXT Column detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 61.52 wherein significance is attributed to a
    tubular structure which is either packed with a material having a known
    absorption characteristic or is coated with a liquid of a high molecular
    weight and having known properties.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23.39,  for column detail of gas chromatography in gas analysis.


CLS 73/61.54
TXT Paper or thin layer type:

    Subject matter under subclass 61.52 wherein the sorbent is a paper or other
    thin layer material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 198.3 for liquid
    separation using the layer chromatography.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclass subclass
    162 for subject of that class type utilizing paper or thin layer plate
    chromatography.


CLS 73/61.55
TXT Including sampling, sample handling, or sample preparation:

    Subject matter under subclass 61.52 combined with means for obtaining a
    predetermined amount of a liquid to be tested, for treating a liquid sample
    in preparation for its analysis or for isolating individual components of a
    liquid prior to analysis thereof.

    (1)     Note.  "Sampling" includes:
    (a) Transporting or handling previously obtained samples of liquid in
    preparation for analysis. or(b) Introducing previously obtained liquid
    samples in preparation for analysis. or(c) The preparation of a liquid
    sample prior to the analysis thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23.41,  for a chromatographic gas analyzer including sample preparation or
    sampling.

    23.42,  for a chromatographic gas analysis including detail of gas handling.

    61.59,  for a liquid analyzer using chromatography and including detail of
    sampling, sample handling or sample preparation.

    155,    for the measurement of liquid flow characteristics in a well bore
    utilizing sampling.

    170.29+, for the measurement of an oceanographic phenomena combined with
    sampling the ocean.

    863+,   for liquid sampling, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, appropriate subclass for a
    urine sampler combined with toilet or means to attach the sampler to the
    toilet.

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, for a sampling process wherein a
    step of causing or promoting a chemical reaction, or regulating or
    controlling a chemical reaction are claimed.

    128,    Surgery, appropriate subclasses for body fluid samplers having
    means to contact the human body.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    appropriate subclass, in particularly subclasses 21+, 29+, 110, and 130 for
    a device or method of filling a receiver which is not part of a sampling
    system.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclass 30 for a combination of a
    concentrating vessel with means for withdrawing a quantity of liquid for
    examination.

    166,    Wells, in particularly subclasses 107+, 142+, 162+, and 264 for an
    apparatus or method for sampling well fluids.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 513+ for
    gravitational separators and especially subclasses 514+ for milk and cream
    separators.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclass for subject of that class type
    which may include an apparatus or process for obtaining a predetermined
    portion of material from a mass but not for testing purposes.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 288 for mass spectrometers with sample
    supply.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 36+ for subject matter
    of that class type including sample preparation and subclasses 244+ for
    sample holders.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 140 for a molten metal
    lance which may include a sample chamber and subclass 157 a thermometer
    combined with a sample cup.

    417,    Pumps, appropriate subclass for sampling pumps, per se.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, for a sampler wherein means for causing,
    promoting, regulating, or controlling a chemical reaction is claimed.

    435,    Chemistry: Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 309.1+
    for inoculators, streakers, or samplers adapted for use with microorganisms
    and enzymes; and subclass 288.6 for a microorganism or enzyme measuring and
    testing apparatus, including a column separation means.

    604,    Surgery, subclass 181 for syringes.


CLS 73/61.56
TXT Detail of fluid handling means (e.g., valve, control, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 61.52 wherein significance is attributed to
    the means for confining, directing, or controlling the flow of liquid
    material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    appropriate subclass, in particularly subclasses 21+, 29+, 110, and 130 for
    a device or method of filling a receiver which is not part of a sampling
    system.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclass 30 for a combination of a
    concentrating vessel with means for withdrawing a quantity of liquid for
    examination.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 513+ for
    gravitational separators and especially subclasses 514+ for milk and cream
    separators.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclass for subject of that class type
    which may include an apparatus or process for obtaining a predetermined
    portion of material from a mass but not for testing purposes.


CLS 73/61.57
TXT With detail of compensation or regulating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 61.52 wherein significance is attributed to
    means for controlling a condition within the apparatus or making a
    correction in a test result due to such condition.


CLS 73/61.58
TXT Detector detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 61.52 wherein significance is attributed to a
    sensing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61.61,  for a sensing means for detecting liquid constituents of a liquid
    mixture, per se.

    866.5,  for a sensing means, per se


CLS 73/61.59
TXT With detail of sampling, sample handling, or sample preparation:

    Subject matter under subclass 61.43 combined with sampling means wherein
    significance is attributed to means for obtaining a predetermined amount of
    a liquid to be tested, for treating a liquid sample in preparation for its
    analysis or for isolating individual components of a liquid prior to
    analysis thereof.

    (1)     Note.  "Sampling" includes:
    (a) Transporting or handling previously obtained samples of liquid in
    preparation for analysis. or(b) Introducing previously obtained liquid
    samples in preparation for analysis. or(c) The preparation of a liquid
    sample prior to the analysis thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152.23+, for determining a characteristic of a borehole, a casing, or a
    drill rigging by measuring a flow of a fluid, utilizing sampling.

    170.29+, for the measurement of an oceanographic phenomena combined with
    sampling the ocean.

    863+,   for liquid sampling, liquid sample handling, or liquid sample
    preparation, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, appropriate subclasses for a
    urine sampler, combined with toilet or means to attach the sampler to the
    toilet.

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, appropriate subclasses  for a
    sampling process wherein a step of causing or promoting a chemical
    reaction, or regulating or controlling a chemical reaction are claimed.

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 185+ for body fluid samplers having means to
    contact the human body.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    appropriate subclass, in particularly subclasses 21+, 29+, 110, and 130 for
    a device or method of filling a receiver which is not part of a sampling
    system.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclass 30 for a combination of a
    concentrating vessel with means for withdrawing a quantity of liquid for
    examination.

    166,    Wells, in particularly subclasses 107+, 142+, 162+, and 264 for an
    apparatus or method for sampling well fluids.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 513+ for
    gravitational separators and especially subclasses 514+ for milk and cream
    separators.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclass for subject of that class type
    which may include an apparatus or process for obtaining a predetermined
    portion of material from a mass but not for testing purposes.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 288 for mass spectrometers with sample
    supply.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 36+ for subject matter
    of that class type including sample preparation and subclasses 244+ for
    sample holders.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 140 for a molten metal
    lance which may include a sample chamber and subclass 157 a thermometer
    combined with a sample cup.

    417,    Pumps, for sampling pumps, per se.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, appropriate subclass for a sampler wherein
    means for causing, promoting, regulating or controlling a chemical reaction
    is claimed.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 309.1+
    for inoculators, streakers, or samplers adapted for use with microorganisms
    and enzymes.

    604,    Surgery, subclass 181 for syringes.


CLS 73/61.61
TXT Detector detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 61.52 wherein significance is attributed to a
    sensing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61.58,  for a sensing means for chromatographic determination of content or
    the effect of a constituent of a liquid mixture.

    866.5,  for a sensing means, per se.


CLS 73/61.62
TXT Depositing characteristic:

    Subject matter under subclass 61.41 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring the ability of the constituent of a liquid to form a deposit or a
    coating on a surface (e.g., slime or seal).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86,     for tests for treating a nonliquid specimen to determine the effect
    of a liquid on brittleness or erosion resistance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 175+ for scale inhibiting compositions.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 53 for corrosion testing apparatus.

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, for cleaning
    compositions, including detergents, for solid surfaces and subclasses 245+
    for scale removing compositions.


CLS 73/61.63
TXT Settling or filtering ability:

    Subject matter under subclass 61.41 wherein the determination is made by
    detecting or measuring a characteristic associated with the tendency of the
    sediment to settle at the bottom of the liquid or a characteristic
    associated with resistance offered by the mixture when passing through
    material.


CLS 73/61.64
TXT By volume or flow rate:

    Subject matter under subclass 61.63 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring the  volume of flow, the speed, the volume rate of flow or mass
    rate of flow of the liquid mixture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.16+,  for proving or calibrating volume of flow, speed of flow, volume
    rate, or flow or mass rate of flow.

    1.73+,  for proving or calibrating a liquid level or volume measuring
    apparatus.

    53.04,  for a property of a paper or wood suspension by measuring flow
    characteristic.

    54.13,  for determining viscosity by measuring a time interval of travel or
    flow rate using an orifice, nozzle, or extrusion means wherein there is
    disclosed detail of a means whose optical character changes due to a change
    in a physical phenomenon associated with the liquid whose viscosity is
    being measured.

    54.19,  for detail of a timing means in a device wherein viscosity is
    determined by gravity movement of an object in a liquid.

    61.73,  for utilizing flow effect to measure solid components of a liquid
    suspension.

    152.18+, for determining a characteristic of a borehole, a casing, or a
    drill rigging by measuring a flow of a fluid or by analyzing a fluid.

    170.11+, for determining the direction and rate of flow of a fluid in
    meteorology and oceanology.

    178+,   for determining the speed of a craft with respect to a fluid.

    861+,   for measuring the volume or the rate of flow of liquid, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclasses, for nonelectrical
    means for giving an alarm upon the occurrence of a predetermined condition
    of a fluid.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 98+ for a self-proportioning flow system
    and subclasses 624.11+ for a programmed or timed valve which meters fluid
    merely by timing the interval between opening and closing of the valve.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, appropriate subclasses for
    measuring the rate of flow of drilling fluid combined with a device of that
    class.

    222,    Dispensing, particularly subclasses 14, 59, and 71 for volume or
    rate of flow-measuring means having dispensing features or which are used
    in dispensing combinations.

    250,    Radiant Energy, particularly subclasses 258, 259+, 356.1, and 432
    for miscellaneous radiant energy responsive devices.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 306 for
    flow-measuring means responsive to nuclear induction.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 606+ for electrical means
    for giving a humanly perceptible indication or signal  in response to a
    predetermined condition, such as the flow of fluid.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclass for an optical
    measuring of fluid flow not involving nonoptical measuring or testing
    beyond that found in Class 356.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 510 for
    an application of computers or data processing in fluid flow studying.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 89+ for
    time interval measuring, per se.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 21 for a system utilizing a pulse counter to
    measure fluid flow.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 481+ for measuring blood flow in the body
    wherein there is disclosed structure for placement in the living body.


CLS 73/61.65
TXT Sedimentation rate:

    Subject matter under subclass 61.63 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring the rate at which the sediment settles to the bottom of the
    liquid.


CLS 73/61.66
TXT With means for accelerating solids (e.g., particles):

    Subject matter under subclass 61.65 including means for imparting an
    increase in the rate at which the sediment settles.


CLS 73/61.67
TXT By pressure measurement:

    Subject matter under subclass 61.65 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54.14,  for determining viscosity of a liquid flowing through an orifice,
    nozzle, or extrusion means by measuring pressure.

    61.47,  for measuring pressure in order to determine the liquid constituent
    of a liquid mixture.

    61.73,  for measuring pressure of a liquid in order to determine its solid
    content.

    61.78,  for measuring pressure to determine the content or effect of a
    constituent of a liquid mixture.

    64.46,  for measuring differential pressure to determine vapor pressure.

    64.51,  for measuring pressure to determine surface tension.

    700+,   for liquid pressure measurement, per se.


CLS 73/61.68
TXT Including detail of fluid handling means, sampling, sample handling, or
    sample preparation:

    Subject matter under subclass 61.65 combined with sampling means wherein
    significance is attributed to means for obtaining a predetermined amount of
    a liquid to be tested, for treating a liquid sample in preparation for its
    analysis or for isolating individual components of a liquid prior to
    analysis thereof and/or to means for confining, directing, or controlling
    the flow of liquid material.

    (1)     Note.  "Sampling" includes:
    (a) Transporting or handling previously obtained samples of liquid in
    preparation for analysis. or(b) Introducing previously obtained liquid
    samples in preparation for analysis. or(c) The preparation of a liquid
    sample prior to the analysis thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23.41,  for a chromatographic gas analyzer including sample preparation or
    sampling.

    23.42,  for a chromatographic gas analysis including detail of gas handling.

    61.59,  for a liquid analyzer using chromatography and including detail of
    sampling, sample handling, or sample preparation.

    152.18+, for determining a characteristic of a borehole, a casing, or a
    drill rigging by measuring a flow of a fluid, utilizing sampling.

    170.29+, for the measurement of an oceanographic phenomena combined with
    sampling the ocean.

    863+,   for sampling, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, appropriate subclass for a
    urine sampler, combined with toilet or means to attach the sampler to the
    toilet.

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, for a sampling process wherein a
    step of causing or promoting a chemical reaction, or regulating or
    controlling a chemical reaction are claimed.

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 185+ for body fluid samplers having means to
    contact the human body.

    137,    Fluid Handling, for valves, per se.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    appropriate subclasses, in particularly subclasses 21+, 29+, 110, and 130
    for a device or method of filling a receiver which is not part of a
    sampling system.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclass 30 for a combination of a
    concentrating vessel with means for withdrawing a quantity of liquid for
    examination.

    166,    Wells, in particularly subclasses 107+, 142+, 162+, and 264 for an
    apparatus or method for sampling well fluids.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 513+ for
    gravitational separators and especially subclasses 514+ for milk and cream
    separators.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for subject of that class type
    which may include an apparatus or process for obtaining a predetermined
    portion of material from a mass but not for testing purposes.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 288 for mass spectrometers with sample
    supply.

    356,    Optics: Measuring and Testing, subclasses 36+ for subject matter of
    that class type including sample preparation and subclasses 244+ for sample
    holders.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 140 for a molten metal
    lance which may include a sample chamber and subclass 157 a thermometer
    combined with a sample cup.

    417,    Pumps, appropriate subclasses for sampling pumps, per se.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, appropriate subclasses for a sampler wherein
    means for causing, promoting, regulating or controlling a chemical reaction
    is claimed.

    435,    Chemistry: Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 309.1+
    for inoculators, streakers, or samplers adapted for use with microorganisms
    and enzymes.

    604,    Surgery, subclass 181 for syringes.


CLS 73/61.69
TXT By optical measurement:

    Subject matter under subclass 61.65 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring the effect of the sediment on light.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, appropriate subclasses for a photocell, per se, and
    for analyzing a liquid utilizing invisible light which is modified by
    transmission through or emission by the liquid being tested wherein the
    modified light is tested.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring  and Testing, subclass 436 for measuring visible
    light transmission or absorption of a liquid wherein the test involves no
    manipulation other than that involved in optical testing.


CLS 73/61.71
TXT For measuring solid components (e.g., particles):

    Subject matter under subclass 61.41 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring or detecting the identity of, the amount of  or the effect of a
    solid constituent of the liquid mixture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    865.5,  for measuring particle size, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 335+ for determining
    particle size by measuring scattered visible light and subclass 544 for
    measuring visible light transmission to inspect or to study a suspension of
    particles in a liquid.


CLS 73/61.72
TXT By separation and subsequent measurement (e.g., by weighing, X-ray or
    microscope, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 61.71 including means for isolating the solid
    from the liquid and wherein the determination is made subsequent to the
    isolation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclass, for the
    separation of liquid components, per se.


CLS 73/61.73
TXT By flowing through barrier or restriction and measuring flow effect (e.g.,
    pressure, volume of or rate of flow):

    Subject matter under subclass 61.71 wherein the isolation is made by means
    of an element located in a flow path of the liquid and the determination is
    made by measuring the effect of the movement of the liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.16+,  for proving or calibrating volume of flow, speed of flow, volume
    rate, or flow or mass rate of flow.

    53.04,  for determining paper and wood suspension properties by measuring
    flow characteristic.

    54.13,  for determining viscosity by measuring a time interval of travel or
    flow rate using an  orifice, nozzle, or extrusion means wherein there is
    disclosed detail of a means whose optical character changes due a change in
    a physical phenomenon associated with the liquid whose viscosity is being
    measured.

    54.19,  for detail of a timing means in a device wherein viscosity is
    determined by gravity movement of an object in a liquid.

    61.64+, for determining settling or filtering ability by measuring volume
    or flow rate of the  liquid or the liquid mixture.

    152.18+, for determining a characteristic of a borehole, a casing, or a
    drill rigging by measuring a flow of a fluid or by analyzing a fluid.

    170.11+, for the determining the direction and rate of flow of a fluid in
    meteorology and oceanology.

    178+,   for the speed of a craft with respect to a fluid.

    861+,   for measuring the volume or the rate of flow of liquid, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclass, for nonelectrical
    means for giving an alarm upon the occurrence of a predetermined condition
    of a fluid.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 98+ for a self-proportioning flow system
    and subclasses 624.11+ for a programmed or timed valve which meters fluid
    merely by timing the interval between opening and closing of the valve.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, for measuring the rate of flow of
    drilling fluid combined with a device of that class type.

    222,    Dispensing, particularly subclasses 14, 59, and 71 for volume of
    rate of flow-measuring means having dispensing features or which are used
    in dispensing combinations.

    250,    Radiant Energy, particularly subclasses 258, 259+, 320+, 356.1, and
    432 for miscellaneous radiant energy responsive devices.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 306 for
    flow-measuring means responsive to nuclear induction.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 606+ for electrical means
    for giving a humanly perceptible indication or signal in response to a
    predetermined condition, such as the flow of fluid.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclass for an optical
    measuring of liquid flow not involving nonoptical measuring or testing.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 510+
    for application of computer detail or data processor detail for fluid flow
    study.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 89+, for
    time interval measuring, per se.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 21 for a system utilizing a pulse counter to
    measure fluid flow.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 481+ for measuring blood flow in the body
    wherein there is disclosed structure for placement in a living body.


CLS 73/61.74
TXT Thermal:

    Subject matter under subclass 61.73 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring a heat or a temperature related property.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54.42,  for determining viscosity by making thermal measurement.

    61.46   and 61.76+, for a thermal measurement of content or the effect of
    the constituent of a liquid mixture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 43 for determining the
    inherent thermal properties, per se, of a liquid, subclass 54 for thermal
    measurement of liquid volume and subclass 139 for measuring the temperature
    of a liquid metal.


CLS 73/61.75
TXT Vibration:

    Subject matter under subclass 61.71 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring the effect of the suspension being tested on vibration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19.03,  for measuring the gas content of a liquid by measuring the effect
    of the liquid on vibration.

    24.01,  for utilization of vibration to analyze gas.

    40.05+, for acoustic detection of liquid leakage utilizing pressurized
    fluid.

    54.24,  for determining viscosity of a liquid by measuring the force
    reactance to a member vibrated therein.

    54.41,  for determining viscosity by utilizing vibration.

    61.45,  for determining a multiphase liquid constituent of a liquid mixture
    measuring vibration.

    61.49,  for utilizing vibration to determine the liquid constituent of a
    liquid mixture.

    61.79,  for utilizing vibration to determine the effect of the content of a
    liquid.

    64.42,  for testing of a gelling or coagulation         property of a
    liquid utilizing vibration.

    592,    for detecting liquid leakage and location by utilizing vibration.


CLS 73/61.76
TXT By thermal measurement:

    Subject matter under subclass 61.41 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring a heat or temperature related property.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54.42,  for determining viscosity by measuring heat transmitting or heat
    related properties.

    61.46   and 61.74, for the thermal measurement of the liquid content of a
    liquid mixture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 54 for thermal measurement
    of a liquid volume and subclass 139 for measuring the temperature of molten
    metal.


CLS 73/61.77
TXT Vaporization (e.g., evaporation, distillation, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 61.76 wherein the property being tested is
    the rate at which a liquid turns into a vapor or the heat required to
    change a liquid into a vapor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for an end point test of hydrocarbons.

    61.46   and 61.74, for thermal measuring of the liquid content of a liquid
    mixture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 16+ for a test to
    determine a thermal characteristic of a specimen or the temperature at
    which the specimen changes its physical state.


CLS 73/61.78
TXT By pressure measurement:

    Subject matter under subclass 61.41 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring force per unit area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54.14,  for determining viscosity of a liquid flowing through an orifice, a
    nozzle or an extrusion means by measuring pressure.

    61.47,  for measuring pressure in order to determine the liquid constituent
    of a liquid mixture.

    61.73,  for measuring pressure of a liquid in order to determine its solid
    content.

    64.47,  For measuring differential pressure to determine vapor pressure.

    64.51,  for measuring pressure to determine surface tension.

    700+,   for liquid pressure measurement, per se.


CLS 73/61.79
TXT By vibration:

    Subject matter under subclass 61.41 wherein the determination is made by
    utilizing vibration in order to measure or detect the content of or the
    effect of a constituent of a liquid mixture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19.03,  for measuring the gas content of a liquid by measuring the effect
    of the liquid on vibration.

    24.01,  for utilization of vibration to analyze gas.

    40.05+, for acoustic detection of liquid leakage utilizing pressurized
    fluid.

    54.24,  for determining viscosity of a liquid by measuring the force
    reactance to a member vibrated therein.

    54.41,  for utilizing vibration to test the viscosity of a liquid.

    61.45,  for determining a multiphase liquid constituent of a liquid mixture
    measuring vibration.

    61.49,  for utilizing vibration to determine the liquid constituent of a
    liquid mixture.

    61.75,  for measuring the solid components of a liquid utilizing vibration.

    64.42,  for testing of a gelling or coagulation property of a liquid
    utilizing vibration.

    64.53,  for testing a liquid or a liquid suspension of a solid by utilizing
    vibration.

    592,    for detecting liquid leakage and location by utilizing vibration.


CLS 73/64.41
TXT Gelling or coagulation:

    Subject matter under subclass  53.01 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring or detecting the ability of the liquid to coagulate, to form a
    clot, or to form a stiffened or solid colloid-like mass.


CLS 73/64.42
TXT By vibration:

    Subject matter under subclass 64.41 wherein the property is being
    determined by the effect of the liquid upon vibration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19.03,  for measuring the gas content of a liquid by measuring the effect
    of the liquid on vibration.

    40.05+, for acoustic detection of liquid leakage utilizing pressurized
    fluid.

    64.53,  for testing a liquid or a liquid suspen-sion of a solid by
    utilizing vibration.

    54.41,  for the utilization of vibration to test the viscosity of a liquid.

    61.45,  for the utilization of vibration for determining a multiphase
    constituent of a liquid mixture.

    61.49,  for the utilization of vibration to determine the content or the
    effect of a constituent of a liquid mixture.

    61.75,  for the utilization of vibration to measure the solid content of a
    liquid mixture.

    61.79,  for the utilization of vibration to measure the content or the
    effect of a constituent of a liquid mixture.

    592,    for the utilization of vibration to test for liquid leakage or a
    pipe  flaw.


CLS 73/64.43
TXT By optical measurement:

    Subject matter under subclass 64.41 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring or detecting the effect of the liquid on light.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, appropriate subclass, for a photocell, per se, and
    subclasses 574+ for an optical or preoptical system having a liquid in the
    path thereof wherein the modification of or the emission of the radiant
    energy resulting from the irradiation of the liquid is tested.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring  and Testing, subclass 436 for measuring visible
    light transmission or absorption of a liquid wherein the test involves no
    manipulation other than that involved in optical testing.


CLS 73/64.44
TXT Vapor-liquid ratio:

    Subject matter under subclass 53.01 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring the ratio of the amount of vapor above a confined liquid to the
    volume of the confined liquid.


CLS 73/64.45
TXT Vapor pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 53.01 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring the pressure of the vapor of a liquid above a confined body of
    liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54.14,  for determining viscosity of the liquid flowing through an orifice,
    nozzle, or extrusion means by measuring pressure.

    61.47,  for measuring pressure in order to determine the liquid constituent
    of a liquid mixture.

    61.73,  for measuring pressure of a liquid in order to determine its solid
    content.

    61.78,  for measuring pressure to determine the content or effect of a
    constituent of a liquid mixture.

    64.46,  for measuring differential pressure to determine vapor pressure.

    64.51,  for measuring pressure to determine surface tension.

    700+,   for liquid pressure measurement, per se.


CLS 73/64.46
TXT Differential pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 64.45 wherein the determination is made by
    utilizing plural pressures.


CLS 73/64.47
TXT Osmotic pressure (e.g., diffusion characteristic):

    Subject matter under subclass 53.01  wherein the determination is made by
    measuring the pressure due to diffusion of the liquid through a material
    (e.g., through a member which is selective to one constituent of a liquid;
    the art term for the member being semi-permeable member).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54.14,  for determining viscosity by measuring pressure of the liquid
    flowing through an orifice, nozzle, or extrusion means.

    61.73,  for measuring pressure of a liquid in order to determine its solid
    content.

    61.78,  for measuring pressure to determine the content or effect of a
    constituent of a liquid mixture.

    64.51,  for measuring pressure to determine surface tension.

    700+,   for liquid pressure measurement, per se.


CLS 73/64.48
TXT Surface tension:

    Subject matter under subclass  53.01 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring the contractile strength of the elastic skin effect at the
    surface of a body of liquid.


CLS 73/64.49
TXT By force or torque:

    Subject matter under subclass 64.48 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring the force or the torque required to immerse the member into or to
    separate the member from the liquid surface or the force exerted upon a
    member by the liquid.


CLS 73/64.51
TXT By pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 64.48 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring a force per unit area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54.14,  for determining viscosity by measuring pressure of the liquid
    flowing through an orifice, nozzle or extrusion means.

    61.47,  for measuring pressure in order to determine the liquid constituent
    of a liquid mixture.

    61.73,  for measuring pressure of a liquid in order to determine its solid
    content.

    61.78,  for measuring pressure to determine the content or effect of a
    constituent of a liquid mixture.

    64.46,  for measuring differential pressure to determine vapor pressure.

    700+,   for liquid pressure measurement, per se.

    862+,   for a dynamometer responsive to force or torque.


CLS 73/64.52
TXT Liquid droplet:

    Subject matter under subclass 64.48 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring a characteristic of liquid drops produced by flowing a liquid
    through an orifice.


CLS 73/64.53
TXT By vibration:

    Subject matter under subclass 53.01 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring the effect of the liquid on vibration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19.03,  for measuring the gas content of a liquid by measuring the effect
    of the liquid on vibration.

    24.01,  for utilization of vibration to analyze gas.

    40.05+, for acoustic detection of liquid leakage utilizing pressurized
    fluid.

    54.24,  for determining viscosity of a liquid by measuring the force
    reactance to a member vibrated therein.

    54.41,  for utilizing vibration to test the viscosity of a liquid.

    61.45,  for determining a multiphase liquid constituent of a liquid mixture
    mea-suring vibration.

    61.49,  for utilizing vibration to determine the liquid constituent of a
    liquid mixture.

    61.75,  for measuring the solid components of a liquid utilizing vibration.

    61.79,  for utilizing vibration to determine the effect of the content of a
    liquid.

    64.42,  for testing of a gelling or coagulation property of a liquid
    utilizing vibration.

    592,    for detecting liquid leakage and location by utilizing vibration.


CLS 73/64.54
TXT Molecular weight:

    Subject matter under subclass 53.01 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring the sum of the atomic weight of a molecule's constituent atoms.


CLS 73/64.55
TXT Interface:

    Subject matter under subclass 53.01 wherein the determination is made by
    detecting or measuring a property of the section along a fluid flow where
    liquid of a first kind immediately followed by a liquid of a second kind
    meets.


CLS 73/64.56
TXT Sampler, constituent separation, sample handling, or sample preparation:

    Subject matter under subclass 53.01 combined with means for obtaining a
    predetermined amount of a liquid to be tested, for treating a liquid sample
    in preparation for its analysis or for isolating individual components of a
    liquid prior to analysis thereof.

    (1)     Note.  "Sampling" includes:
    (a) Transporting or handling previously obtained samples of Liquid in
    preparation for analysis, or(b) Introducing previously obtained liquid
    samples in preparation for analysis, or(c) The preparation of a liquid
    sample prior to the analysis thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23.41,  for a chromatographic gas analyzer including sample preparation or
    sampling.

    23.42,  for a chromatographic gas analysis including detail of gas handling.

    61.59,  for a liquid analyzer using chromatography and including detail of
    sampling, sample handling, or sample preparation.

    155,    for the measurement of liquid flow characteristics in a well bore
    utilizing sampling.

    170.29+, for the measurement of an oceanographic phenomena combined with
    sampling the ocean.

    863+,   for liquid sampling, liquid handling or liquid sample preparation,
    per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, appropriate subclasses for a
    urine sampler, combined with toilet or means to attach the sampler to the
    toilet.

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, appropriate subclasses for a
    sampling process wherein a step of causing or promoting a chemical
    reaction, or regulating or controlling a chemical reaction are claimed.

    128,    Surgery, appropriate subclasses 185+ for body fluid samplers having
    means to contact the human body.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    appropriate subclass, in particularly subclasses 21+, 29+, 110, and 130 for
    a device or method of filling a receiver which is not part of a sampling
    system.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclass 30 for a combination of a
    concentrating vessel with means for withdrawing a quantity of liquid for
    examination.

    166,    Wells, in particularly subclasses 107+, 142+, 162+, and 264 for an
    apparatus or method for sampling well fluids.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 513+ for
    gravitational separators and especially subclasses 514+ for milk and cream
    separators.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclass for subject of that class type
    which may include an apparatus or process for obtaining a predetermined
    portion of material from a mass but not for testing purposes.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 288 for mass spectrometers with sample
    supply.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 36+ for subject matter
    of that class type including sample preparation and subclasses 244+ for
    sample holders.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 140 for a molten metal
    lance which may include a sample chamber and subclass 157 a thermometer
    combined with a sample cup.

    417,    Pumps, appropriate subclasses for sampling pumps, per se.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, for a sampler wherein means for causing,
    promoting, regulating, or controlling a chemical reaction is claimed.

    435,    Chemistry: Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 309.1+
    for inoculators, streakers, or samplers adapted for use with
    micro-organisms and enzymes; and subclass 288.6 for a micro-organism or
    enzyme measuring and testing apparatus including a column separation means.

    604,    Surgery, subclass 181 for syringes.


CLS 73/65.01
TXT CENTER OF GRAVITY; TURNING MOMENT; METACENTRIC HEIGHT:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising an apparatus or method
    for determining (a) the point at which the entire weight of a body (e.g., a
    crank or a craft) may be considered as concentrated so that if supported at
    such a point the body would remain in equilibrium in any position, or (b)
    the ratio of the torque, applied to a rigid body free to rotate about a
    given axis, to the angular acceleration thus produced about that axis, or
    (c) the point of intersection of a vertical line through the center of
    buoyancy of a floating body with a vertical line through a new center of
    buoyancy when the body is displaced.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass covers determination of mass distribution and
    balance of all bodies save rotors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66+,    for rotor balancing.

    172,    for weight distribution on the human foot.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclass 124 for an electrical processing or data processing system used in
    the determination of weight distribution of a body where only the nominal
    structure of a sensor is recited.


CLS 73/65.02
TXT Spherical specimen:

    Subject matter under subclass 65.01 wherein the body is bounded by a
    surface, all points of which are at an equal distance from a point
    constituting its center.


CLS 73/65.03
TXT Ball driving sporting implement (e.g., golf club, baseball bat, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 65.01 wherein the body comprises a device for
    imparting motion to a spherical element used in recreation.


CLS 73/65.04
TXT Watercraft (e.g., metacentric height):

    Subject matter under subclass 65.01 wherein the body is a craft for water
    transport.


CLS 73/65.05
TXT Air or space vehicle:

    Subject matter under subclass 65.01 wherein the body is a structure for (a)
    navigation of the air or (b) orbiting the Earth or traveling beyond the
    Earth's atmosphere.


CLS 73/65.06
TXT Electric sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 65.05 including means whose electron flow or
    electron storage characteristic changes in response to the determination
    being made.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65.09,  for an electric sensor, per se, for determining the center of
    gravity, a turning moment, or a metacentric height.

    866.5,  for a probe or probe mounting, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, appropriate subclasses for a light responsive
    sensor, per se.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 311+ for a
    piezoelectric sensor, per se.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 2+ for a strain gauge, per se, and
    subclasses 13+ for a condition responsive resistor, per se.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 280+ for a
    capacitor-type sensor, per se.


CLS 73/65.07
TXT Dynamic:

    Subject matter under subclass 65.01 wherein the determination is made by
    providing motion to the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    570+,   for vibration testing, per se.


CLS 73/65.08
TXT Torsional oscillation:

    Subject matter under subclass 65.07 wherein one part of the body swings
    about a longitudinal axis while the other part of the body is held fast or
    turned in the opposite direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    570+,   for vibration testing, per se.


CLS 73/65.09
TXT Electric sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 65.01 including means whose electron flow or
    electron storage characteristic changes in response to the determination
    being made.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65.06,  for an electric sensor for determin-ing the center of gravity, a
    turning moment, or a metacentric height of an air or space vehicle.

    866.5,  for a probe or probe mounting, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, appropriate subclasses for a light responsive
    sensor, per se.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 311+ for a
    piezoelectric sensor, per se.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, appropriate subclasses 2+ for a strain gauge
    resistor, per se, and subclasses 13+ for a condition responsive resistor,
    per se.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 280+ for a
    capacitor-type sensor, per se.


CLS 73/66
TXT Subject matter under the class definition for determining the amount and/or
    location of masses or forces causing unbalance in rotatable bodies.  The
    combination of a balance testing device with means to correct for the
    unbalance is classified with the latter.  However, methods of testing for
    unbalance which broadly recite the additional step of adding or removing
    material in accordance with the indicated unbalance are found here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147,    for devices for testing the aerodynamic balance of propellers and
    helicopter rotor blades.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 572+ for miscellaneous
    rotor structures including those having balancing means.

    82,     Turning, for the combination of balancing by turning.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 192.1+, for compensating
    devices for engines, e.g., crank shafts.

    219,    Electric Heating, for combinations of balancing by electric welding.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclass 2 for
    balancing by drilling.

    451,    Abrading, for the combination of balancing by abrading.


CLS 73/73
TXT Subject matter under the class definition for the determination of either
    the moisture content of materials (e.g., paper, wood, grain, etc.) or the
    absorptive characteristics of materials for water or other liquids.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for determination of gas content of materials.

    29,     for determination of the moisture content of gases.

    61.41,  for determination of moisture or water content of liquids.

    335+,   for hygrometers and hygrostats.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for
    means and methods of moisture content determination by electrical apparatus
    which measures an electrical characteristic such as capacity or
    conductivity of the medium in which the moisture exists; note particularly
    subclasses 664+, 689 and 694+.


CLS 73/74
TXT Subject matter under subclass 73 for determination of moisture content by
    bringing the specimen (usually sand) up to the saturation point while
    measuring the required addition (residual capacity) as criterion.


CLS 73/75
TXT Subject matter under subclass 73 in which the heat conductivity of the
    specimen is the criterion for determining moisture content.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 43+.


CLS 73/76
TXT Subject matter under subclass 73 for determination of moisture content of
    materials wherein the moisture is extracted, collected, and measured as an
    index.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, and see the notes
    thereto for drying and extraction of liquids from solids in general.


CLS 73/77
TXT Subject matter under subclass 73 for determination of moisture content of
    materials wherein wet and dry bulb temperature readings are employed, as
    criteria.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    338+,   for wet and dry responsive element hygrometers and hygrostats, per
    se.


CLS 73/78
TXT Subject matter under the class definition for direct measurement of the
    hardness of materials.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      where abrasive or milling characteristic is employed as an index of
    hardness.

    12.01+, for other tests in which the specimen is subjected to one or more
    sudden blows.

    104,    for durability of cutting edges as an index of hardness.

    821,    for tests of the crushing point of material, sometimes erroneously
    designated as "hardness".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses for presses not elsewhere provided
    for.


CLS 73/79
TXT Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein hardness is measured or determined
    by either dropping an object on the specimen and observing rebound, or by
    dropping the specimen upon an anvil and observing rebound.


CLS 73/81
TXT Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein hardness is measured in terms of
    its resistance to a penetrator or to indentation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78+,    for resistance to drilling as index of hardness.

    700+,   for fluid pressure gauges, other than those which measure the
    hardness of the tire as an index of fluid pressure which are in this
    subclass (81).


CLS 73/82
TXT Subject matter under subclass 81 for measurement of hardness of materials
    wherein a penetrator or indentor is impelled against the specimen under a
    predetermined force.


CLS 73/83
TXT Subject matter under subclass 81 wherein a penetrator or indentor is urged
    into the specimen with successive minor (to penetrate the skin) and major
    loads. Usually the penetration measurement begins with the major load.


CLS 73/84
TXT Subject matter under subclass 81 for determining, through resistance to a
    penetrator, the load sustaining or bearing capacity of soil or foundations.


CLS 73/85
TXT Penetrator elements or points, per se, or holders therefor employed by the
    apparatus or processes of subclasses 81+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 189+.

    279,    Chucks or Sockets.


CLS 73/86
TXT Subject matter under the class definition for treating specimens with
    fluids to determine the effect of such fluids on the brittleness or the
    erosion resistant properties of such specimens.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87,     for determination of the instant brittleness rating of a specimen,
    as compared with embrittlement which is the aging of the material to
    brittleness.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 53 for corrosion testing apparatus.


CLS 73/87
TXT Subject matter under the class definition for determining the degree of
    brittleness or ductility of a specimen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    788+,   for mere determination of strength of materials, as compressive
    strength, tensile strength, flexing, bending or folding strength, bursting
    or rupture strength of sheet material, etc.


CLS 73/104
TXT Subject matter under the class definition for testing surfaces and cutting
    edges for defects.  The surface inspection includes such variations as soft
    spots, cracks, fissures and other flaws not elsewhere classified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40+,    for leakage tests.

    53.06,  for lubricant testing by analyzing characteristics of a measuring
    surface.

    64.48,  for measuring the surface tension of a liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 302+ for methods of using fluorescent
    and radioactive tracer material to detect flaws.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 213 and 216 for
    flaw detection by magnetic tests.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 2 for contour plotting,
    subclass 69 for cutting blade sharpness tests, and subclass 371 for
    flatness testing.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 4+ for detection of flaws
    or leaks by thermal effects.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 58+ for flaw
    analysis.


CLS 73/105
TXT Subject matter under subclass 104 for testing of surfaces for roughness.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, for the measurement of surface contour and
    depth of valleys.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 445+ for light
    reflection tests including glass and light diffusion tests.


CLS 73/112
TXT Subject matter under the class definition for determining the working
    efficiency (input vs. output) of power plants or units thereof, such as
    condensers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    862+,   for dynamometers.


CLS 73/113
TXT Subject matter under subclass 112 for measuring fuel consumption over
    selected period of operation or distance traveled.


CLS 73/114
TXT Subject matter under subclass 113 for indicating at any given instant or
    for an immediately elapsed period or distance the rate of fuel consumption
    per mile.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 61+ for "miles per gallon" calculators, where
    the characteristics of the devices which respond to engine or vehicle
    operation or to fuel feed are not claimed, though they may be included by
    name or type as operators of the calculator.


CLS 73/115
TXT Subject matter under subclass 112 utilizing the pressure within an engine
    as a factor of its performance or efficiency.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, appropriate subclass.


CLS 73/116
TXT Subject matter under the class definition for performing a test on a motor
    or engine to determine a distinguishing, operational characteristic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35.01+, for testing characteristics of motor fuels in engines.

    112+,   for power unit efficiency tests.

    570+,   for performing similar disparate test utilizing vibrational
    characteristics.

    700+,   for a gauge for checking compression in an engine.

    862+,   for horsepower tests, work, torque, or engine loading by a
    dynamometer.


CLS 73/117
TXT Subject matter under subclass 116 where the motor drives the vehicle wheels
    which, in turn, are supported upon rollers or a belt which comprise part of
    the test means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123+,   for other combinations including a roller or belt wheel support.


CLS 73/117.1
TXT Subject matter under subclass 116 including an enclosure or a tank which
    provides controlled simulated conditions.


CLS 73/117.2
TXT Subject matter under subclass 116 comprising plural means for performing
    diverse tests on a motor or an engine under operating conditions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for disparate tests while the vehicle wheel is supported on rollers
    or belt.


CLS 73/117.3
TXT Subject matter under subclass 117.2 where the tests are made without
    shutdown of the engine during actual operation or on a test stand.


CLS 73/117.4
TXT Subject matter under subclass 116 for obtaining a measurement of thrust as
    developed by a reaction or reciprocating engine during actual use or on a
    test stand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    862.381+, for direct push or pull thrust measurement only.


CLS 73/118.1
TXT Testing auxiliary unit:

    Subject matter under subclass 116 for the testing of auxiliary units of
    motors and power units, including carburetors, generators, starters,
    ignition parts, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Ignition testing where the sensing means is mechanical in
    nature or responsive to pressure is herein included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49.7,   for testing of an auxiliary unit with fluid pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 378+ for ignition
    system testing to determine electrical properties by electrical means, and
    subclasses 181+ where electrical timing is involved.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 113+ where
    electrical timing is involved.


CLS 73/118.2
TXT Intake air flow:

    Subject matter under subclass 118.1 wherein the auxiliary unit is the air
    intake passage of the engine and the measurement is the airflow rate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    861+,   for the measurement of volume or rate of flow, per se.


CLS 73/119
TXT Subject matter under subclass 116 for testing of parts of motors and power
    apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for leakage tests for pistons, rings, or valves.

    49.7,   for testing of a motor part with fluid pressure.


CLS 73/120
TXT Subject matter under subclass 119 in which a piston ring is the thing
    tested.


CLS 73/121
TXT Subject matter under the class definition for measuring or testing the
    action of vehicle brakes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7+,     for testing the wear qualities of brake surfaces.

    9+,     for determining friction qualities.

    39,     for use of fluid pressure to test fluid pressure brake units or
    systems.


CLS 73/122
TXT Subject matter under subclass 121 in which a vehicle wheel engages a
    yieldably slidable platform and the brake effect is interpreted by the
    reactive motion of the platform.


CLS 73/123
TXT Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein vehicle wheels are supported upon
    a belt or roller during the brake test operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for motor or engine testing involving a roller or belt type of
    vehicle wheel support.


CLS 73/124
TXT Subject matter under subclass 123 wherein the vehicle wheels are supported
    upon rollers or belt, characterized by the fact that the front and rear
    wheel supports are relatively shiftable.


CLS 73/125
TXT Subject matter under subclass 123 wherein the vehicle and wheels and/or an
    inertia member is set in motion to simulate the momentum of the vehicle and
    the brake test is to overcome the inertia effect.


CLS 73/126
TXT Subject matter under subclass 123 wherein the vehicle wheels under test
    while supported upon rollers or belts are driven against the action of the
    brakes and the driving effort employed is an index of brake condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    862+,   for dynamometers usable for determining driving effort of brake
    testers.


CLS 73/127
TXT Subject matter under subclass 126 comprising a portable roller or belt unit
    (for disposition under the vehicle wheels seriatim), equipped with means
    for measuring the driving effort.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130+,   for other forms of single wheel drive and torque measuring testers.


CLS 73/128
TXT Subject matter under subclass 121 comprising devices temporarily applied to
    vehicle in making road brake test.


CLS 73/129
TXT Subject matter under subclass 121, in which the brake testing arrangement
    is incorporated into the vehicle as a permanent part thereof.


CLS 73/130
TXT Subject matter under subclass 121 for rotating an individual vehicle wheel
    and measuring the required force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for roller or belt wheel support type.


CLS 73/131
TXT Subject matter under subclass 130 comprising a torque measuring lever or
    lever system, said lever having no ground support or reaction means, for
    measuring the force required to move a vehicle wheel when out of ground
    contact against the resistance of its applied brake.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    862.21+,  for similar torque measuring levers.


CLS 73/132
TXT Subject matter under subclass 121 comprising devices for depressing brake
    pedal with a measured force.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force, for
    such devices without measuring means.


CLS 73/146
TXT Subject matter under the class definition for testing of tires, treads or
    roadways. "Sperry cars" are here included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for tests of such devices by abrasion, milling, rubbing, or
    scuffing.


CLS 73/146.2
TXT Subject matter under subclass 146 for testing the degree of inflation of
    tires, inflation sensing means being installed on vehicle structure, wheel
    or tire, with indicator means disposed on or within the vehicle or wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78+,    for testing tire inflation by its hardness, or by its resistance to
    indentation.

    862.381+, for thrust measuring means, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 34, for mechanical apparatus to
    indicate merely over or under pressure in tires.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 227+ for tire stem inflation means,
    usually valves, with a gauge or indicator.

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclasses 415+ for a wheel or tire
    having tire inflating means, with or without pressure indicating or
    measuring means.


CLS 73/146.3
TXT Subject matter under subclass 146.2 including a direct fluid pressure
    sensing unit communicating with the interior of the tire, as through its
    valve stem.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    700+,   for fluid pressure gauges of more general utility.


CLS 73/146.4
TXT Subject matter under subclass 146.3 wherein the reading is transmitted to a
    distant point, usually to the instrument board of the vehicle.


CLS 73/146.5
TXT Subject matter under subclass 146.4 wherein the transmission is by electric
    means.


CLS 73/146.8
TXT Subject matter under subclass 146.3 wherein the gauge is mounted, or used,
    on the tire stem, usually as a replacement for a valve cap.


CLS 73/147
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in the form of wind tunnels; also
    means for studying the flow of fluid about plane wings, and the behavior of
    propellers both for air or water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    for motor and engine testing.


CLS 73/148
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in the form of basins and tanks
    for the testing of ship models or ships.


CLS 73/149
TXT Subject matter under the class definition for the measurement of the
    volumetric content of a selected space or zone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    426+,   for measuring vessels.


CLS 73/150
TXT Subject matter under the class definition for the testing of coating
    materials (coverage, drying time, aging, weathering, etc., inks, printing
    and pen; adhesives and plastics) as to all qualities not provided for in
    preceding subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 324+ for methods and apparatus for
    corona irradiation of materials, subclasses 432+ for the irradiation of
    contained, supported, or transported fluent material, subclasses 453.11+
    for the irradiation of supported objects and subclass 493.1 for the
    irradiation of objects or materials generally.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 7 for determining coating
    thickness by a thermal measurement.


CLS 73/152.01
TXT BOREHOLE OR DRILLING (E.G., DRILL LOADING FACTOR, DRILLING RATE, RATE OF
    FLUID FLOW):

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a process or an
    apparatus for determining a physical characteristic of a borehole, a
    casing, or a drill rigging.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19.01+, for gas content measuring, per se, especially subclass 19.09 for
    measuring the gas content of mud.

    23.2+,  for gas analysis, per se.

    32+,    for density measuring, per se.

    53.01+  for fluid analysis, per se.

    170.01, for fluid flow direction measuring, per se, in a naturally
    occurring body of water.

    861+,   for a rate of fluid flow measuring not in a borehole.

    863+,   for sampling, per se, of mud not in a well and of gas sampling from
    the soil by means sunk into the ground to a point not far from the surface
    of the ground, and especially subclass 864.52 for sampling devices
    comprising a receptacle with suction means.

    866,    for material analysis, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 304+ for a geometrical
    indicator for borehole study and especially for a borehole direction or
    inclination indicator.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 112+ for mechanical indicators
    of a predetermined fluid flow and subclasses 264+ for a mechanical
    indicator of the presence or the absence of fluid flow where no measuring
    transducer is recited.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 64, 66, and 113 for well structure combined with
    measuring and testing means wherein more structure than is necessary to
    perfect the testing is recited, subclass 250.02 for a comprehensive well
    process combined with permeability determining wherein more well detail
    than is necessary to determine permeability is recited, and subclass 264
    for a well process comprising merely sampling a well fluid.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 40+ for a process or
    means of measuring or testing combined with more than a nominal recitation
    of an earth boring process or apparatus.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 256+ for testing in a well bore by
    measuring radiant energy.

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclasses 323+ and 355+ for
    measuring an electrical property of a borehole, in particular subclasses
    366+ for well logging involving measuring an electrical property of
    borehole formation, and subclass 425 for measuring electrolyte properties,
    per se.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 853.1+ for well bore
    telemetry wherein information signals are transmitted to or from means
    located in a passageway in the earth.

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclass 22 for a radar system which is used in
    geophysical exploration, as for example, radar sets which are lowered down
    a borehole to determine the size of the borehole.

     346,   Recorders, appropriate subclasses for recorders for recording the
    operation of machines and especially subclasses 33+ for a recorder combined
    with external recorder operating means including a well logging device, and
    subclasses 112+ for a graph-type recorder.

    356,    Optics: Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclass for making
    borehole or drilling study by measuring visible light.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 506 for
    application of an electrical computer or data processing to testing of
    borehole or drilling when significant electrical computer or data
    processing detail combined with a nominally recited sensor are recited.

    367,    Communications, Electrical: Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 25+ for the communication of information or intelligence in the
    form of acoustic waves traveling through earth and detected by electric
    signal handling means passing through a well bore and providing information
    pertaining to a characteristic or a location of discontinuities within the
    earth, subclasses 81+ for the communication of information or intelligence
    in a well bore in the form of acoustic waves traveling in a medium in the
    well bore different from the surrounding earth and providing information
    pertaining to a characteristic or a location of discontinuities within the
    earth, and subclasses 86+ for the communication of information or
    intelligence in the form of acoustic waves traveling through earth detected
    by electric signal handling means passing through a well bore and providing
    information pertaining to a characteristic or a location of discontinuities
    within the earth for electroacoustic borehole testing and wherein the
    intelligence pertains to the walls of the borehole and is obtained from a
    device which travels through the passageway and emits acoustic waves into a
    medium contained within the borehole (e.g., water, air, etc.) which are
    reflected from the walls back to the device and are detected.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 136 for measuring a
    temperature at a single location in a well bore.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, appropriate subclass for testing involving a
    chemical reaction.

    435,    Chemistry: Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 9 for a
    process for quantitative or qualitative testing for mineral deposits by use
    of microorganisms which thrive in the presence of such minerals.

    436,    Chemistry: Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 25+ for
    a chemical analysis of a borehole.


CLS 73/152.02
TXT Formation logging (e.g., borehole studies of pressure derivatives or of
    pressure-temperature derivatives):

    Subject matter under subclass 152.01 wherein the determination of the
    physical characteristic of earth both below the surface of the earth and
    along a surface forming the periphery of the borehole is made by measuring
    a parameter at plural positions within the borehole.

    (1)     Note. This subclass generally contains subject matter drawn to the
    measurement of plural kinds of parameters of a formation in a borehole.
    However, the measurement of a single kind of parameter at plural positions
    within a borehole, not provided for elsewhere, is also found here. When two
    parameters of the formation are being measured and one of the parameters is
    the depth at which a second parameter is being measured, then the subject
    matter is found where the second parameter is found.

    (2)     Note.  Generally, the devices included here include a process or an
    apparatus for correlating the measurement of the physical characteristic of
    the earth with a measured depth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152.24, for a flow study involving taking a sample from a formation wall.

    152.44, for the identification of a formation from the relative ease with
    which a drill penetrates the formation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, appropriate subclasses for instruments,
    per se, for measuring a distance, an angle, or the like in a well, and in
    particular subclasses 302 and 304+ for borehole direction or inclination
    indicators.

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 102+ for well logging wherein acoustical
    waves are transmitted or received for the purpose of identifying geologic
    or subsurface structure.

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclasses 366+ for well
    logging involving measuring electrical properties of earth formations in a
    well bore.

    356,    Optics: Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for borehole
    study by measuring visible light.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 422+
    for an application of electrical computers and data processing to well
    logging wherein details of the computer or the data processing system
    combined with only a nominally recited sensor are recited.

    367,    Communications, Electrical: Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 25+ for utilizing traveling stresses in the earth which are
    detected or generated by electric signal handling means wherein the
    electric signal represents communicated information or intelligence
    regarding a characteristic or location of discontinuities in a formation in
    a borehole.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 136 for measuring
    temperature at a single location in a well bore.

    435,    Chemistry: Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 9 for a
    process for quantitative or qualitative testing for mineral deposits within
    a borehole formation by use of enzymes or microorganisms which thrive in
    the presence of such minerals.

    436,    Chemistry: Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 25+ for
    a chemical analysis of a borehole formation.


CLS 73/152.03
TXT During drilling:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.02 wherein the determination of the
    physical characteristic of the borehole is made by making a measurement of
    the physical condition of the borehole during the formation of or the
    enlargement of an elongated hole in the earth in situ by dislocating solid
    material of the earth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152.19+, for determining a physical characteristic of a borehole, a casing,
    or a drill rigging by measuring a fluid flow during drilling.

    152.43+, for making a determination of a physical characteristic of a
    borehole, a casing, or a drill rigging while drilling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 50 for a process or an
    apparatus for boring into the earth combined with a measuring or indicating
    feature and wherein more than a mere step of boring is claimed.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 254 for an apparatus or a method for
    making a geological test using radiant energy wherein drilling is involved.


    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclasses 324+ for a purely
    electrical measurement of a borehole fluid, subclass 356 for measuring an
    electrical property in a borehole while drilling, subclass 369 for well
    logging while drilling wherein an electrical property of an earth formation
    is measured, and subclass 694 for measuring  resistance or conductance in
    order to determine water content.

    356,    Optics: Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclass for an
    apparatus or a method for testing drilling mud by measuring visible light.


CLS 73/152.04
TXT By drill mud analysis:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.03 wherein mud is continuously circulated
    into and out of a borehole and a determination of the physical
    characteristic of the borehole is made by measuring a condition of, a
    constituent of, or a composition of the mud while the mud is being
    circulated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19.09,  for determining the amount of gas in mud, per se.

    61.41+, for the analysis of mud, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, for well mud sampling per se.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 253+ for an apparatus or a method of
    testing drilling mud by measuring invisible radiant energy.

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclasses 324+ for a purely
    electrical measurement of a borehole fluid,  subclass 356 for measuring an
    electrical property in a borehole while drilling, subclass 369 for well
    logging while drilling wherein an electrical property of an earth formation
    is measured, and subclass 694 for measuring  resistance or conductance in
    order to determine water content.

    356,    Optics: Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclass for drilling
    mud analysis by measuring visible light.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 509+
    for the application of an electrical computer or data processing for
    testing drilling mud wherein  computer apparatus detail or data processing
    combined with only a nominally recited sensor are recited.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, appropriate subclass for
    testing drilling mud by measuring a property of an X-ray or a gamma ray.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process  Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 68.1 for a chemical apparatus for
    analyzing a drilling mud involving a chemical reaction.

    435,    Chemistry: Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 9 for a
    process for quantitative or qualitative testing for mineral deposits by
    detecting microorganisms which thrive in the presence of such minerals.

    436,    Chemistry: Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 25+ for
    chemical testing of fluids within a borehole, especially subclasses 29+ for
    petroleum oils or carbonaceous minerals and subclass 30 for testing
    drilling mud.


CLS 73/152.05
TXT Density, porosity, or permeability:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.02 wherein the determination of the
    physical characteristic of the formation is made by measuring (a) a mass
    per unit volume of either a bulk formation of a borehole or of selected
    constituents of a formation of a borehole, (b) the ratio of a volume of
    interstices of either a bulk formation of a borehole or of selected
    constituents of a formation of a borehole to its volume, or (c) a quality
    of either a bulk formation of a borehole or of selected constituents of a
    formation of a borehole to be penetrated by a liquid or a gas passing
    through pores or openings therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30.01,  for measuring the density of a gas.

    32+,    for measuring the density of a solid or a liquid.

    38,     for measuring porosity or permeability by use of fluid pressure.

    73+,    for measuring the moisture content or absorption characteristic of
    a material.

    152.41, for determination of permeability by the injection of fluid into a
    formation of a borehole.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, appropriate  subclass for
    testing by measuring a property of X-rays or gamma rays and in particular
    for subclasses 54+ for determining density by measuring a property of
    X-rays or gamma rays.


CLS 73/152.06
TXT Including oil, gas, or water saturation:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.05 wherein the determination of the
    characteristic of the borehole includes measuring a maximum impregnation by
    oil, gas, or water of a bulk formation of a borehole or of selected
    constituents of a formation of a borehole.

    (1)     Note. Fluid saturation of the formation zone may be measured
    directly by radiation, electrical, acoustical, or other means or by
    comparison tests in which fluid originally occurring in a formation is
    replaced by fluid having a known makeup.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for measuring porosity or permeability by use of fluid pressure.

    73+,    for measuring the moisture content or absorption characteristic of
    a material.

    152.08+, for determination of a formation logging by measuring oil, gas, or
    water saturation.

    152.41, for determination of saturation by the injection of fluid into a
    formation of a borehole.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclasses 324+ for a purely
    electrical measurement of a borehole fluid, subclass 356 for measuring an
    electrical property in a borehole while drilling, and subclass 694 for
    measuring  resistance or conductance in order to determine water content.


CLS 73/152.07
TXT By a core sample analysis:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.05 including a sample in the form of an
    undisturbed portion removed from the formation and wherein the
    determination of the physical characteristic of the borehole is made by
    analysis of the portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152.09, for formation logging by measuring an oil, gas, or water saturation
    of a core sample.

    152.11, for formation logging by measuring a property of a core sample.

    864.44+, for sampling, per se, by use of a corer.

    866,    for the testing of solid material, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 58 for a process of
    obtaining a core sample from a borehole formation and subclass 403+ and the
    notes there noted for a bit for cutting an earth core.

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclasses 376+ for a purely
    electrical measurement of a property of a subsurface core sample.


CLS 73/152.08
TXT Oil, gas, or water saturation:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.02 wherein the determination of the
    physical characteristic of the borehole is made by measuring the maximum
    impregnation by gas, water, or oil of a bulk formation of a borehole or of
    selected constituents of a formation of a borehole.

    (1)     Note. Fluid saturation of the formation zone may be measured
    directly by radiation, electrical, acoustical, or other means or by
    comparison tests in which fluid originally occurring in a formation is
    replaced by fluid having a known makeup.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for measuring porosity or permeability by use of fluid pressure.

    73+,    for measuring a moisture content or absorption characteristic of a
    material.

    152.06, for a borehole formation logging by density, porosity, and
    permeability measuring and the measurement of oil, gas, or water
    saturation.

    152.41, for a determination of a borehole physical characteristic by
    measuring saturation by the injection of fluid into a formation of a
    borehole.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclasses 324+ for a purely
    electrical measurement of a borehole fluid, subclass 356 for measuring an
    electrical property in a borehole while drilling, and subclass 694 for
    measuring  resistance or conductance in order to determine water content.


CLS 73/152.09
TXT By a core sample analysis:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.08 including a sample in the form of an
    undisturbed portion removed from the formation and wherein the
    determination of the physical characteristic of the borehole is made by
    analyzing the portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152.07, for formation logging by determining the density, the porosity, or
    the permeability of a core sample.

    152.11, for formation logging by measuring a property of a core sample, per
    se.

    864.44+,for sampling, per se, by use of a corer.

    866,    for the testing of solid material, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 58 for a process of
    obtaining a core sample from a borehole formation and subclasses 403+ and
    the notes there noted for a bit for cutting an earth core.

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclasses 376+ for a purely
    electrical measurement of a property of a subsurface core sample.


CLS 73/152.11
TXT By a core sample analysis:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.02 including a sample in the form of an
    undisturbed portion removed from the formation and wherein the
    determination of the physical characteristic of the borehole is made by
    analysis of the portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152.07, for formation logging by determining the density, the porosity, or
    the permeability of a core sample.

    152.09, for formation logging by measuring a gas, a water, or an oil
    saturation of a core sample.

    864.44+, for obtaining a core sample, per se.

    866,    for the testing of solid material, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 58 for a process of
    obtaining a core sample from a borehole formation and subclasses 403+ and
    the notes there noted for a bit for cutting an earth core.

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclasses 376+ for a purely
    electrical measurement of a property of a subsurface core sample.


CLS 73/152.12
TXT Thermal:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.02 wherein the determination of the
    physical characteristic of the borehole is made by (a)  measuring
    temperature at plural positions within the borehole or (b) measuring
    temperature related parameters at plural positions within the borehole.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 10+ for temperature
    gradient measuring, per se; subclasses 29+ for heat flux measuring, per se;
    subclasses 45+ for thermal testing of a nonthermal property, per se; and
    subclass 136 for temperature measuring in a well bore wherein no more than
    one temperature measurement in a well bore is made and no other parameter
    of the strata or the well bore is measured.


CLS 73/152.13
TXT With heating or cooling:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.12 including means to alter a temperature
    and wherein (a) the temperature altering means changes a temperature of the
    apparatus for making the determination of the physical characteristic of
    the formation or (b) the apparatus for making the determination of the
    physical characteristic of the formation within the borehole alters the
    temperature of the borehole.


CLS 73/152.14
TXT With radioactivity measuring:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.02 including plural types of tests and
    wherein one of the tests makes a determination of a physical characteristic
    of the borehole, the casing, or the drill rigging by measuring naturally
    occurring radiation or radiation produced either (a) from a radiation
    source or (b) as a result of bombardment of elements of the formation by
    radiation of a different type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 256+ for a well testing apparatus and
    method measuring invisible light, subclass 257 for a well testing apparatus
    and method measuring invisible light and combined with detecting the
    location of a casing collar, and in particular, subclasses 260 and 269.1+
    for a well testing device utilizing detection of radioactivity and not
    combined with a test other than one measuring invisible light.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, appropriate subclass for the
    application of an X-ray or gamma ray system, per se, to testing.


CLS 73/152.15
TXT With vibration measuring:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.14 wherein one of the tests makes a
    determination of a physical characteristic of the borehole, the casing or
    the drill rigging by measuring the effect of the borehole, the casing, or
    the drill rigging on induced, reflected, or transmitted vibration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152.16, for a formation logging apparatus including plural types of tests,
    one of which includes measuring vibration.

    152.32, for determining a rate of fluid flow within a borehole by measuring
    the effect of the rate of fluid flow on vibration.

    152.47, for making a downhole measurement of a characteristic of a
    borehole, a casing or a drill rigging by measuring vibration during
    drilling.

    152.57, for determining a condition of a cementing in a borehole, per se,
    by measuring vibration.

    152.58, for determining a physical condition of a borehole, a casing, or a
    drill rigging by making a measurement of vibration by an instrument located
    within a borehole.

    570+,   for measuring and testing, per se, by use of vibration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 102+ for acoustic well logging.

    367,    Communications, Electrical: Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 25+ for the communication of information or intelligence in the
    form of acoustic waves traveling through earth and detected by electric
    signal handling means passing through a well bore and providing information
    pertaining to a characteristic or a location of discontinuities within the
    earth, subclasses 81+ for the communication of information or intelligence
    traveling through earth in a well bore in the form of acoustic waves
    traveling in a medium in the well bore different from the surrounding earth
    and providing information pertaining to a characteristic or a location of
    discontinuities within the earth, and subclasses 86+ for the communication
    of information or intelligence in the form of acoustic waves traveling
    through earth detected by electric signal handling means passing through a
    well bore and providing information pertaining to a characteristic of the
    borehole or a location of discontinuities within the earth for
    electroacoustic borehole testing and wherein the intelligence pertains to
    the walls of the borehole and is obtained from a device which travels
    through the passageway and emits acoustic waves into a medium contained
    within the borehole (e.g., water, air, etc.) which are reflected from the
    walls back to the device and are detected.


CLS 73/152.16
TXT With vibration measuring:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.02 including plural types of tests and
    wherein one of the tests makes a determination of a physical characteristic
    of the borehole, the casing, or the drill rigging by measuring an effect of
    the borehole, the casing, or the drill rigging on induced, reflected,  or
    transmitted vibration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152.15, for determining a formation logging by plural tests including
    measurements of radiation and vibration.

    152.32, for determining a rate of fluid flow within a borehole by measuring
    the effect of the rate of fluid flow on vibration.

    152.47, for making a downhole measurement of a characteristic of a
    borehole, a casing, or a drill rigging by measuring vibration during
    drilling.

    152.57, for determining a condition of a cementing in a borehole, per se,
    by measuring vibration.

    152.58, for determining a physical condition of a borehole, a casing, or a
    drill rigging by making a measurement of vibration by an instrument located
    within the borehole.

    570+,   for measuring and testing, per se, by use of vibration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 102+ for acoustic well logging.

    367,    Communications, Electrical: Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 25+ for the communication of information or intelligence in the
    form of acoustic waves traveling through earth and detected by electric
    signal handling means passing through a well bore and providing information
    pertaining to a characteristic or a location of discontinuities within the
    earth, subclasses 81+ for the communication of information or intelligence
    in a well bore in the form of acoustic waves traveling in a medium in the
    well bore different from the surrounding earth and providing information
    pertaining to a characteristic or a location of discontinuities within the
    earth, and subclasses 86+ for the communication of information or
    intelligence in the form of acoustic waves traveling through earth detected
    by electric signal handling means passing through a well bore and providing
    information pertaining to a characteristic of the well bore or a location
    of discontinuities within the earth for electroacoustic borehole testing
    and wherein the intelligence pertains to the walls of the borehole and is
    obtained from a device which travels through the passageway and emits
    acoustic waves into a medium contained within the borehole (e.g., water,
    air, etc.) which are reflected from the walls back to the device and are
    detected.


CLS 73/152.17
TXT With detail of a borehole wall engaging means:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.02 including a structure engaging a wall
    of the borehole either for positioning or for maintaining the positioning
    of the  apparatus while the test is being performed and wherein
    significance is attributed to the structure engaging the wall.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclass 241.5 for wall engaging means for well logging
    devices wherein more well structure is recited than is necessary for
    perfecting the test.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 286 for borehole wall engaging means for a
    well testing apparatus and method.


CLS 73/152.18
TXT Fluid flow measuring or fluid analysis:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.01 wherein the determination of the
    physical characteristic of the borehole, the casing, or the drill rigging
    is made by either (a) detecting the movement of or the presence of a fluid
    which has traveled either (1) from the formation into the borehole, (2)
    from the borehole into the formation, (3) from the outside of the borehole
    into the borehole, or (d) from inside the borehole to the outside of the
    borehole; (b) measuring a rate, a direction, or a magnitude of fluid flow
    either (1) from the formation into the borehole, (2) from the borehole into
    the formation, (3) from the outside of the borehole into the borehole, or
    (4) from inside the borehole to the outside of the borehole, or (c)
    detecting or measuring the presence of or an amount of a constituent of a
    fluid within the borehole, the ratio of one constituent of the fluid to
    another constituent of the fluid or the effect of a constituent of the
    fluid.

    (1)     Note. Production indices are included here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19.1+,  for measuring the gaseous content of a liquid.

    53.01+, for liquid analysis, per se.

    170.01+,for fluid flow direction determination not in a borehole or in a
    drilling study.

    861+,   for volume or rate of fluid flow determination, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 112+ for a mechanical alarm, per
    se, giving a humanly perceptible signal in response to a predetermined
    fluid flow and subclasses 264 for a mechanical indicator structure, per se,
    giving a humanly perceptible signal in response to the presence or absence
    of fluid flow.

    166,    Wells, appropriate subclass for the combination of a well structure
    and fluid flow measuring wherein more well structure is recited than that
    which is necessary for perfecting the measurement.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 48 for measurement of or
    an indication of drilling fluid flow combined with more than a mere boring
    step or detail of a boring apparatus.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 253+ for the testing of well fluid by
    measuring a property of invisible light and subclass 301 for a method of
    determining oil presence, contamination, or concentration.

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclass 306 for measuring a
    rate of fluid flow by subjecting the fluid to magnetic resonance.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 603+ for an electrical
    indicator or alarm providing a humanly perceptible signal in response to a
    predetermined fluid flow and providing no quantitative measurement.

    356,    Optics: Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclass for testing
    fluid by measuring a characteristic of visible light.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 422 for
    application of an electrical computer or data processing to borehole
    logging when significant electrical computer or data processing detail and
    nominal transducer detail is recited and subclass 510 for application of an
    electrical computer or data processing to the measurement of flow when
    significant electrical computer or data processing detail and only nominal
    sensor detail are recited.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, appropriate subclass for
    fluid analysis by measuring a property of X-rays or gamma rays.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 68.1+ for a chemical apparatus for
    analyzing a liquid.

    435,    Chemistry: Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 9 for the
    detection of the presence of fluids within  a borehole by sensing the
    presence of microorganisms in the vicinity of the fluid.

    436,    Chemistry: Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 25+ for
    chemical testing of fluids within a borehole, especially subclasses 29+ for
    petroleum oils or carbonaceous minerals, and subclass 30 for testing
    drilling mud.


CLS 73/152.19
TXT During drilling:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.18 wherein the determination of the
    characteristic of the borehole, the casing, or the drill rigging is made
    during the process of making or enlarging an elongated hole in the earth in
    situ by dislocating a solid material in the earth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152.03+,for formation logging during a drilling operation.

    152.21, for determining a physical characteristic of a borehole, a casing,
    or a drill rigging by measuring a fluid flow during drilling.

    152.43+,for determining a physical characteristic of a borehole, a casing,
    or a drill rigging during a drilling operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 40+ for a process or an
    apparatus for boring into the earth combined with a measuring  or
    indicating feature and wherein more than a mere step of boring is claimed.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 254 for an apparatus or a method for
    making a geological test using radiant energy wherein drilling is involved.


    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclasses 324+ for a purely
    electrical measurement of a borehole fluid, subclass 356 for measuring an
    electrical property in a borehole while drilling, subclass 369 for well
    logging while drilling wherein an electrical property of an earth formation
    is measured, and subclass 694 for measuring  resistance or conductance in
    order to determine water content.

    356,    Optics: Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclass for an
    apparatus or a method for testing drilling mud by measuring visible light.

    436,    Chemistry: Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 25+ for
    a chemical analyzer for conducting a test within the earth's crust.


CLS 73/152.21
TXT Rate of fluid flow:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.19 wherein the determination of the
    characteristic of the borehole, the casing, or the drill rigging is made by
    measuring a speed of flow, a volume rate of fluid flow, or a mass rate of
    fluid flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54.07   and 54.13, for determining viscosity by measuring a rate of fluid
    flow.

    61.64,  for measuring settling or filtering ability of a constituent of a
    liquid mixture by measuring a rate of fluid flow.

    61.73,  for measuring solid components by measuring a rate of fluid flow.

    152.29, for measuring a rate of flow of a fluid in a borehole.

    170.07  and 170.11+, for fluid flow direction determination not in a
    borehole or in a drilling study.

    861+,   for measuring a rate of fluid flow, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 112+ for a mechanical alarm, per
    se, producing a humanly perceptible signal in response to a rate of fluid
    flow within a borehole, a casing, or a drill rigging; and subclasses 264+
    for a mechanical indicator structure, per se, providing a humanly
    perceptible signal responsive to a rate of fluid flow within a borehole, a
    casing, or a drill rigging.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 48 for measurement or
    indication of drilling fluid rate of flow combined with more than a mere
    boring step or details of a boring apparatus.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 253+ for determining rate of a fluid
    flow within a borehole, a casing, or a drill rigging by measuring invisible
    light.


    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclass 306 for determining a
    rate of flow of a volume of fluid within a borehole, a casing, or a drill
    rigging by subjecting the fluid to magnetic resonance, and subclasses 324+
    for a determination of a rate of fluid flow within a borehole by making a
    purely electrical measurement.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 608+ for an   electrical
    indicator providing a humanly perceptible signal in response to a
    predetermined rate of flow of a fluid flowing within a borehole, a casing,
    or a drill rigging and not providing a quantitative measurement.

    356,    Optics: Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclass for determining
    a rate of flow of a fluid in a borehole, a casing, or a drill rigging by
    measuring visible light.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 420+
    for application of an electrical computer or data processing to a
    determination of a rate of fluid flow in a borehole, a casing, or a drill
    rigging when significant electrical computer or data processing detail and
    nominal transducer detail are recited, and subclass 510 for application of
    an electrical computer or data processing to a determination of rate of
    fluid flow, per se, when significant electrical computer or data processing
    detail and nominally recited sensor are claimed.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, appropriate subclass for
    determining the flow rate of a fluid in a borehole, a casing, or a drill
    rigging by measuring a property of an X-ray or a gamma ray.


CLS 73/152.22
TXT Pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.19 wherein the determination of the
    characteristic of the borehole, the casing, or the drill rigging is made by
    measuring pressure.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for performing a test by use of fluid pressure.

    152.27, for a determination of fluid flow by measuring pressure combined
    with sampling.

    152.51, for a determination of a physical condition of a borehole, a
    casing, or a drill rigging by measuring pressure.

    700,    for fluid pressure measuring, per se.

    760+,   for stress or strain measuring or testing by stress or strain.

    862+,   for force measuring, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 112+ for a pressure responsive
    mechanical alarm, per se, providing a humanly perceptible signal in
    response to a predetermined fluid flow, and subclasses 266+ for a pressure
    responsive mechanical indicator which provides a humanly perceptible signal
    in response to the presence or the absence of fluid flow.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 64, 66, and 113 for detail of a well combined
    with determination of fluid flow by measuring or detecting pressure wherein
    more structure than is necessary to perfect the testing is recited.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 48+ for a process or a
    means of determining fluid flow by measuring or detecting pressure combined
    with more than a nominal recitation of an earth boring process or
    apparatus.


    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 611 for an electrical
    indicator or an electrical alarm which provides a humanly perceptible
    signal in response to a predetermined fluid flow via monitoring pressure
    and subclass 626 for an electrical indicator or alarm which provides a
    humanly perceptible signal in response to the detection of a predetermined
    pressure.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 420+
    for the application of an electrical computer or data processing to the
    determination of fluid flow in a borehole by measuring pressure when
    significant electrical computer or data processing detail combined with no
    more than a nominally recited sensor are claimed.


CLS 73/152.23
TXT With sampling:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.18 including means for obtaining a
    predetermined portion of the  fluid to be tested.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23.41,  for sampling combined with a gas analyzer.

    61.55,  for sampling combined with an apparatus for measuring a content or
    an effect of a constituent of a liquid mixture.

    64.56,  for a sampling combined with a liquid analyzer.

    152.07, for formation logging by measuring density, porosity, or
    permeability of a core sample.

    152.09, for formation logging by measuring oil, gas, or water saturation of
    a core sample.

    152.11, for formation logging, per se, by a core sample analysis.

    863+,   for sampling, per se, of mud not in a well and of gas sampling from
    the soil by means sunk into the ground to a point not far from the surface
    of the ground and especially subclass 864.52 for sampling devices
    comprising a receptacle with suction means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, appropriate subclass, especially subclasses  107+, 142+, and
    162+ for the combination of a well structure and fluid flow measuring
    wherein more well structure is recited than that which is necessary for
    perfecting the measurement or subclass 264 for sampling well fluids
    (including gas), per se.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 48 for measuring or
    indicating drilling fluid flow combined with more than a mere boring step
    or detail of a boring apparatus and subclasses 232+, 244+, and 308+ for
    means to receive and retain a sample from an earth formation, including
    solid earth, in an earth boring tool.


CLS 73/152.24
TXT From formation wall:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.23 wherein the sample is taken of fluid
    flowing from the formation into the borehole.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152.02, for a borehole study by formation logging.


CLS 73/152.25
TXT With a filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.24 including a barrier having
    interstices, pores, or micropores through which at least part of the fluid
    flows but which traps some components of the fluid, usually particles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61.72,  for making a determination of solid components of a liquid by
    separation of the solid from the liquid and subsequent  measuring.

    863.23, for sampling, per se, combined with using a filter to separate
    constituents of a sample.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclass for a
    filter, per se.


CLS 73/152.26
TXT With sealing detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.24 including means between a sample
    induction means and the formation wall which prevents the contamination of
    formation samples with borehole fluids and wherein significance is
    attributed to the contamination  prevention means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclass 100 for a lateral probe or port sealed against a
    well wall.

    277,    Joint Packing, appropriate subclass for seals, per se.


CLS 73/152.27
TXT Pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.23 wherein the determination of the
    characteristic of the borehole is made by measuring pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for performing a test by use of fluid pressure.

    152.22, for determination of fluid flow during drilling by measuring
    pressure.

    152.51, for a determination of a physical condition of a borehole, a
    casing, or a drill rigging by measuring pressure.

    700,    for fluid pressure measuring, per se.

    760+,   for stress or strain measuring or testing by stress or strain.

    862+,   for force measuring, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 112+ for a pressure responsive
    mechanical alarm, per se, providing a humanly perceptible signal in
    response to a predetermined fluid flow, and subclass 266 for a pressure
    responsive mechanical indicator which provides a humanly perceptible signal
    in response to the presence or the absence of fluid flow, in a borehole, a
    casing, or a drill rigging.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 64, 66, and 113 for detail of a well combined
    with determination of fluid flow by measuring or detecting pressure in a
    borehole wherein more well detail than is necessary to perfect the testing
    is recited.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 40+ for a process or
    means of determining fluid flow by measuring or detecting pressure combined
    with more than a nominal recitation of an earth boring process or
    apparatus.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 611 for an electrical
    indicator or an electrical alarm which provides a humanly perceptible
    signal in response to a predetermined fluid flow via monitoring pressure in
    a borehole, a casing, or a drill rigging, and subclass 626 for an
    electrical indicator or alarm, per se, which provides a humanly perceptible
    signal in response to the detection of a predetermined pressure in a
    borehole, a casing, or a drill rigging.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 420+
    for the application of an electrical computer or data processing to the
    determination of fluid flow in a borehole, a casing, or a drill rigging by
    measuring pressure when significant electrical computer or data processing
    detail combined with a nominally recited sensor are claimed.


CLS 73/152.28
TXT Downhole:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.23 wherein the apparatus for the
    determination of a characteristic of the borehole, the casing, or the drill
    rigging is located within the borehole while  the measurement is being made.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152.02+,for a downhole formation logging instrument.

    152.18, for a downhole fluid flow instrument or a downhole fluid analysis
    instrument not combined with sampling means.

    152.46+,for making a nonfluid flow downhole measurement in a borehole while
    drilling.

    152.55, for making a downhole fluid test, per se, in a borehole.


CLS 73/152.29
TXT Rate of fluid flow:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.18 wherein the determination of the
    characteristic of the borehole, the casing, or the drill rigging is made by
    measuring a speed of flow, a volume rate of flow, or a mass rate of flow of
    a fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54.07   and 54.13, for determining viscosity by measuring the rate of fluid
    flow.

    61.64,  for measuring settling or filtering ability of a constituent of a
    liquid mixture by measuring the rate of fluid flow.

    61.73,  for making a determination of solid components of a liquid by
    measuring the rate of fluid flow.

    152.21, for measuring the rate of flow of a fluid in a borehole while
    drilling.

    170.07  and 170.11+, for fluid flow direction determination not in a
    borehole or in a drilling study.

    861+,   for measuring a rate of fluid flow  measuring, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 112+ for a mechanical alarm
    producing a humanly perceptible signal in response to a predetermined rate
    of fluid flow in a borehole, a casing, or a drill rigging and combined with
    no measuring means, and subclasses 264+ for a mechanical indicator
    structure, per se, of the presence or the absence of fluid flow in a
    borehole, a casing, or a drill rigging.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 48 for measurement of or
    indication of rate of flow of drilling fluid combined with more than a mere
    boring step or details of a boring apparatus.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 608+ for an   electrical
    indicator or alarm providing a humanly perceptible signal in response to a
    predetermined rate of fluid flow in a borehole, a casing, or a drill
    rigging and not providing a quantitative measurement.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 422 for
    application of an electrical computer or data processing to a determination
    of a rate of fluid flow in a borehole, a casing, or a drill rigging when
    significant electrical computer or data processing detail and no more than
    a nominal transducer detail are recited, and subclass 510 for application
    of an electrical computer or data processing to a determination of rate of
    fluid flow in a borehole, a casing, or a drill rigging, per se, when
    significant electrical computer or data processing detail and nominally
    recited sensor are claimed.


CLS 73/152.31
TXT Plural diverse measuring:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.29 combined with an apparatus or a
    process for making a test in addition to a test for the rate of fluid flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198+,   for fluid rate of flow measuring, per se, combined with other
    measuring not used in a well bore or drilling study.


CLS 73/152.32
TXT Vibration:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.29 wherein the determination of the
    physical characteristic of the borehole, the casing, or the drill rigging
    is made by measuring the effect of the rate of fluid flow on vibration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152.15, for determining a formation logging by plural types of tests
    including measuring radiation and vibration.

    152.16, for determining a formation logging by plural types of tests
    including measuring vibration.

    152.47, for making a downhole measurement of a characteristic of a
    borehole, a casing, or a drill rigging by measuring vibration during
    drilling.

    152.57, for a cementing or casing test within a borehole using vibration.

    152.58, for determining a physical condition of a borehole, a casing, or a
    drill rigging by making a measurement of vibration by an instrument located
    within the borehole.

    570+,   for measuring and testing, per se, by use of vibration.

    861.18+,for measuring a volume or rate of fluid flow, per se, by measuring
    vibration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    367,    Communications, Electrical: Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 25+ for the communication of information or intelligence in the
    form of acoustic waves traveling through earth and detected by electric
    signal handling means passing through a well bore and providing information
    pertaining to a characteristic or a location of discontinuities within the
    earth, subclasses 81+ for the communication of information or intelligence
    traveling in a well bore in the form of acoustic waves traveling in a
    medium in the well bore different from the surrounding earth and providing
    information pertaining to a characteristic or a location of discontinuities
    within the earth, and subclasses 86+ for the communication of information
    or intelligence in the form of acoustic waves traveling through earth
    detected by electric signal handling means passing through a well bore and
    providing information pertaining to a characteristic of a well bore or a
    location of discontinuities within the earth for electroacoustic borehole
    testing and wherein the intelligence pertains to the walls of the borehole
    and is obtained from a device which travels through the passageway and
    emits acoustic waves into a medium contained within the borehole (e.g.,
    water, air, etc.) which are reflected from the walls back to the device and
    are detected.


CLS 73/152.33
TXT Thermal:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.29 wherein the determination of the
    physical characteristic of the borehole, the casing, or the drill rigging
    is made by measuring an effect of the rate of flow fluid upon temperature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170.12, for thermal measurement of fluid flow direction or of fluid flow
    velocity.

    202.5,  for thermal sensing of a fluid flow in a proportional flow meter.

    204.11+, for a thermal measurement of fluid flow, per se.

    861.95, for fluid flow determination by measuring transit time of a thermal
    tracer or tag.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclass for measuring
    and testing the thermal effect, per se, of a fluid, particularly subclasses
    29+ for heat flow measurement and subclasses 43+ for heat coefficient
    measuring.


CLS 73/152.34
TXT Rotary:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.29 which includes an element  rotatable
    about an axis due to the flow of the fluid and the determination of the
    characteristic of the borehole, the casing, or the drill rigging is made by
    measuring the rate of rotation of the rotary element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    861.33, for a device wherein the rotation rate of an element rotated by a
    flow of a fluid is used to measure swirl rate of a fluid flow.

    861.77+,for a meter for measuring a rate of fluid flow including an element
    rotated by a flow of a fluid and having an electrical circuit and wherein
    specific details of the circuit are included.

    861.79+,for measuring rate of fluid flow, per se, by use of an element
    rotated by a flow of a fluid whose rate is being measured.


CLS 73/152.35
TXT Magnetic:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.34 wherein motion of the rotary element
    is detected by sensing magnetic properties or wherein the apparatus
    includes means having magnetic properties.


CLS 73/152.36
TXT Packer or deflector detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.29 including either (a) a means for
    constraining a stream of the fluid flow to or from a certain stratum and
    wherein significance is attributed to the constraining means or (b) means
    for constraining the fluid to flow within a certain flow path within the
    borehole and wherein significance is attributed to the constraining means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclasses 118+, 142+, and 179 for a packer for fluid
    handling in a well.


CLS 73/152.37
TXT Steady state fluid flow interruption:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.18 wherein the fluid usually flows at a
    constant rate and the determination of the characteristic of the borehole,
    the casing, or the drill rigging is made by interrupting the constant rate
    of flow of the fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 40+ for flow restrictors,
    per se.

    166,    Wells, subclass 91.1 for flow restrictors in an aboveground
    apparatus for a well and subclass 373 for a process of operating a valve,
    closure, or changeable restrictor in a well.


CLS 73/152.38
TXT Drawdown or shutin test:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.37 wherein a determination of the
    characteristic of the borehole, the casing, or the drill rigging is made by
    decreasing a liquid level or completely stopping the flow of the fluid as
    by the closing of a valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 40+ for flow restrictors,
    per se.

    166,    Wells, subclass 92.1 for well caps or heads, subclasses 95.1 and
    97.1 for valves in the well head, and subclasses 316+ and the notes
    thereunder for valves or restrictors, per se, for a well or well apparatus.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, appropriate subclass for a valve, per
    se.


CLS 73/152.39
TXT Fluid injection into formation:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.18 wherein the determination of the
    characteristic of the borehole, the casing, or the drill rigging is made by
    forcing the fluid into the formation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, appropriate subclass for fluid injection into a formation of
    a well and especially subclasses 252.1+ for well testing by the injection
    of fluids into the earth in order to produce other fluids.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 263+ for injection of
    chemicals into the earth.


CLS 73/152.41
TXT Determining permeability or saturation:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.39 wherein the determination of the
    characteristic of the borehole, the casing, or the drill rigging is made by
    measuring either (a) a quality of either a bulk formation of a borehole or
    of selected constituents of a formation of a borehole to be penetrated by a
    liquid or a gas passing through pores or openings therein or (b) the
    maximum impregnation by gas, water, or oil of a bulk formation of a
    borehole or of selected constituents of a formation.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for measuring permeability by use of fluid pressure.

    73+,    for measuring the moisture content or absorption characteristic of
    a material.

    152.05, for determination of a formation logging by measuring permeability.

    152.06,         for determination of a characteristic of a borehole by
    formation logging involving measuring permeability and oil, gas, or water
    saturation.


    152.08, for determination of a formation logging by measuring oil, gas, or
    water saturation.


CLS 73/152.42
TXT Determining relative proportion of fluid constituent:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.18 wherein the determination of the
    physical characteristic of the borehole, the casing, or the drill rigging
    is made by measuring the amount of a constituent of a fluid within the
    borehole or a ratio of one constituent of a fluid to another constituent of
    the fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19.09,  for measuring the gas content of drilling mud.

    61.43,  for liquid analysis for a liquid constituent of a liquid mixture.

    863.21+,for the separation of constituents of a liquid sample not in a
    well.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclass for the
    separation of liquid constituents of a mixture.


CLS 73/152.43
TXT During drilling:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.01 wherein the determination of the
    physical characteristic of the borehole, the casing, or the drill rigging
    is made during the formation of or the enlargement of an elongated hole in
    the earth in situ by dislocating a solid material of the earth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for wear testing, per se.

    104,    for surface testing, per se.

    152.03+,for formation logging during a drilling operation.

    152.19+,for a determination of fluid flow during drilling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 39 for bit wear signal
    generating, subclasses 40+ for a process or an apparatus for boring into
    the earth combined with a measuring  or an indicating feature wherein more
    than a mere step of boring is claimed.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 254 for an apparatus or a method for
    making a geological test using radiant energy wherein drilling is involved.


    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclasses 324+ for a purely
    electrical measurement of a borehole fluid, subclass 356 for measuring an
    electrical property in a borehole while drilling, subclass 369 for well
    logging while drilling wherein an electrical property of an earth formation
    is measured, and subclass 694 for measuring  resistance or conductance in
    order to determine water content.

    356,    Optics: Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclass for an
    apparatus or a method for testing drilling mud by measuring visible light.


CLS 73/152.44
TXT Drill depth rate:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.43 wherein the drill rigging includes a
    drill and the determination of the physical characteristic of the borehole,
    the casing, or the drill rigging is made by either (a) measuring the rate
    at which the drill cuts through the formation, or (b) periodically
    measuring the depth of the drill which is utilized to compute the rate at
    which the drill cuts through the formation.

    (1)     Note.  The identity of the formation can be readily ascertained
    from the relative ease with which the drill penetrates the formation.

    (2)     Note.  The measurement of the drill depth rate is usually recorded
    by automatic means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152.03, for formation logging while drilling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 700+ for distance measuring.
    Note particularly indented subclasses 713+ for sounding-type measuring
    devices.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 39 for measuring bit wear
    and subclass 50 for indicating testing or measuring a condition of a
    formation in the earth's surface while drilling when more than a mere step
    in boring is recited or drill structure is recited.

    346,    Recorders, appropriate subclasses for a recorder for recording the
    operation of machines and in particular subclasses 33+ for a recorder
    combined with external recorder operating means including a well logging
    device and subclasses 112+ for a graph-type recorder.

    368,    Horology: Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 89+ for
    time interval measuring, per se.


CLS 73/152.45
TXT Electronic processing or electronic recording:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.44 including either a device which works
    by the emission, the behavior, or the effect of electrons and wherein the
    device either (a) operates on data pertaining  to the determination of the
    characteristic of the borehole, the casing, or the drill rigging, or (b)
    makes a permanent record of the determination of the characteristic of the
    borehole, the casing, or the drill rigging.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152.53, for an apparatus for making a determination of a characteristic of
    a borehole, a casing, or a drill rigging by measuring pressure combined
    with means for recording the determination being made.

    152.62, for an apparatus for making a determination of a characteristic of
    a pump especially adapted for use of a borehole or a drill rigging and
    including a device for making a record of the determination of the
    characteristic of the pump.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, appropriate subclass for a recorder for recording the
    operation of machines and particularly subclasses 33+ for a recorder
    combined with external recorder operating means including a well logging
    means and subclasses 112+ for a graph-type recorder.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, appropriate
    subclass for  magnetic storage and retrieval of arbitrarily variable
    information which is retained in a storage medium by variation of a
    physical characteristic thereof and wherein relative movement between a
    storage element and a source of information, a transducer, or a receiver is
    required.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 422 for
    an application of electrical computers and data processing to well logging
    wherein detail of the computer or the data processing system combined with
    only nominally recited sensor are recited.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclass for
    a recording apparatus not requiring relative movement between a storage
    element and a source of information, a transducer, or a receiver.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, appropriate subclass for
    a process of or an apparatus for the storage and retrieval of arbitrarily
    variable information which is retained in a storage medium by variation of
    a physical characteristic thereof and wherein relative movement between a
    storage element and a source of information, a transducer, or a receiver is
    required.


CLS 73/152.46
TXT Downhole measurement:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.43 wherein the apparatus for the
    determination of the physical characteristic of the borehole, the casing,
    or the drill rigging is located within the borehole while the measurement
    is being made.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152.28, for downhole fluid flow measuring combined with sampling.

    152.54+,for downhole measuring in a borehole while no drilling is taking
    place.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 45 for a downhole
    measuring when more than a nominal recitation of a drilling process or
    structure is recited.


CLS 73/152.47
TXT Vibration:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.46 wherein the determination of the
    physical characteristic of the borehole, the casing, or the drill rigging
    is made by measuring vibration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    570+,   for measuring and testing, per se, by use of vibration.

    152.15, for determining a formation logging by plural tests including
    measurements of radiation and vibration.

    152.16, for determining a formation logging by plural tests including a
    measurement of vibration.

    152.32, for determining a rate of fluid flow within a borehole by measuring
    the effect of the rate of fluid flow on vibration.

    152.57, for a vibration test of cement or a casing within a borehole.

    152.58, for determining a characteristic of a borehole, a casing, or a
    drill rigging by measuring vibration by a device located inside a borehole.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 119+ for a seismic wave generation means
    coupled to a fluid.

    367,    Communications, Electrical: Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 25+ for the communication of information or intelligence in the
    form of acoustic waves traveling through earth and detected by electric
    signal handling means passing through a well bore and providing information
    pertaining to a characteristic or a location of discontinuities within the
    earth, subclasses 81+ for the communication of information or intelligence
    in the well bore in the form of acoustic waves traveling in a medium in the
    well bore different from the surrounding earth and providing information
    pertaining to a characteristic of the well bore or a location of
    discontinuities within the earth, and subclasses 86+ for the communication
    of information or intelligence in the form of acoustic waves traveling
    through earth and detected by electric signal handling means (a) passing
    through a well bore and (b) providing information pertaining to a
    characteristic of a borehole or a location of discontinuities within the
    earth for electroacoustic borehole testing and wherein the intelligence
    pertains to the walls of the borehole and is obtained from a device which
    travels through the passageway and emits acoustic waves into a medium
    contained within the borehole (e.g., water, air, etc.) which are reflected
    from the walls back to the device and are detected.


CLS 73/152.48
TXT Force:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.46 wherein the determination of the
    physical characteristic of the borehole, the casing, or the drill rigging
    is made by measuring an agency or an influence that if applied to a free
    body results chiefly in acceleration of the body and sometimes in elastic
    deformation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152.49, for a measurement of force to determine a physical condition of a
    borehole, a casing, or a drill rigging while drilling.

    152.59, for the downhole measurement of force to determine a physical
    condition of a borehole, a casing, or a drill rigging.

    760+,   for stress or strain measuring or testing by stress or strain.

    862+,   for force measuring, per se.


CLS 73/152.49
TXT Force:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.43 wherein the determination of the
    physical characteristic of the borehole, the casing, or the drill rigging
    is made by measuring an agency or an influence that if applied to a free
    body results chiefly in acceleration of the body and sometimes in elastic
    deformation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152.48, for a downhole measurement of force to determine a physical
    characteristic of a borehole, a casing, or a drill rigging during drilling.

    152.59, for the downhole measurement of force to determine a physical
    characteristic of a borehole, a casing, or a drill rigging.

    760+,   for stress or strain measuring or testing by stress or strain.

    862+,   for force measuring, per se.


CLS 73/152.51
TXT Pressure measurement:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.01 wherein the determination of the
    physical characteristic of the borehole, the casing, or the drill rigging
    is made by measuring pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for performing a test by use of fluid pressure.

    152.22, for determination of fluid flow during drilling by measuring
    pressure.

    152.27, for a determination of fluid flow by measuring pressure combined
    with sampling.

    152.55,         for a downhole fluid test.

    700+,   for fluid pressure measuring, per se.

    760+,   for stress or strain measuring or testing by stress or strain.

    862+,   for force measuring, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 112+ for a pressure responsive
    mechanical alarm, per se, providing a humanly perceptible signal in
    response to a predetermined fluid flow, and subclass 266 for a pressure
    responsive mechanical indicator which provides a humanly perceptible signal
    in response to the presence or the absence of fluid flow.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 64, 66, and 113 for detail of a well combined
    with determining fluid flow by measuring or detecting pressure wherein more
    structure than is necessary to perfect the test is recited.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 40+ for a process or
    means of determining fluid flow by measuring or detecting pressure combined
    with more than a nominal recitation of an earth boring process or
    apparatus.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 611 for an electrical
    indicator or an electrical alarm which provides a humanly perceptible
    signal in response to a predetermined fluid flow via monitoring pressure
    and subclass 626 for an electrical indicator or alarm, per se, which
    provides a humanly perceptible signal in response to the detection of a
    predetermined pressure.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 420+
    for the application of an electrical computer or data processing to the
    determination of fluid flow in a borehole by measuring pressure wherein
    significant electrical computer or data processing detail combined with
    only nominally recited sensor structure are claimed.


CLS 73/152.52
TXT Plural diverse measurements:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.51 including a process or an apparatus
    for determining  a characteristic of a borehole, a casing, or a drill
    rigging by measuring a property other than a pressure.


CLS 73/152.53
TXT With recorder:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.51 combined with a means for keeping a
    permanent record of the characteristic of the borehole, the casing, or the
    drill rigging.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152.45, for an apparatus for making a determination of a characteristic of
    a borehole, a casing, or a drill rigging combined with an electronic
    recording means for making a permanent record of the determination.

    152.62, for an apparatus for making a determination of a characteristic of
    a pump especially adapted for use in a borehole or a drill rigging and
    including means for making a record of the determination of the
    characteristic of the pump.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, appropriate subclasses for a recorder for recording the
    operation of machines, particularly subclasses 33+ for a recorder combined
    with external recorder operating means including well logging and
    subclasses 112+ for graph-type recorders.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, for  magnetic
    storage and retrieval of arbitrarily variable information which is retained
    in a storage medium by variation of a physical characteristic thereof and
    wherein relative movement between a storage element and a source of
    information, a transducer, or a receiver is required.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, for a recording apparatus
    not requiring relative movement between a storage element and a source of
    information, a transducer, or a receiver.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, appropriate subclass for
    a process of or an apparatus for the storage and retrieval of arbitrarily
    variable information which is retained in a storage medium by variation of
    a physical characteristic thereof and wherein relative movement between a
    storage element and a source of information, a transducer, or a receiver is
    required.


CLS 73/152.54
TXT Downhole test:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.01 wherein the apparatus for
    determination of the physical characteristic of the borehole, the casing,
    or the drill rigging is located within the borehole while the measurement
    is being made.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152.28, for sampling and downhole fluid flow measuring in a borehole while
    not drilling.

    152.46, for downhole measuring (a) involving no fluid flow measuring and
    (b) taking place while drilling is being done.


CLS 73/152.55
TXT Fluid test:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.54 wherein the determination of the
    physical characteristic of the borehole, the casing, or the drill rigging
    is made by measuring a property of a liquid, a gas, or a suspension of a
    solid in a liquid or a gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19.01+, for measuring the gas content of a liquid or a solid, per se.

    28.01,  for measuring the solid content of a gas, per se.

    73+,    for measuring the moisture content of a material, per se.

    152.28, for sampling and downhole fluid flow measuring in a borehole while
    drilling is not taking place.

    290+,   for measuring liquid level, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclass 204 for testing
    magnetic fluid material, subclasses 425+ for measuring electrolytic
    properties of a fluid, and subclasses 600+ for measuring a property of a
    fluid material by measuring an impedance or an impedance- related quantity.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 68.1+ for fluid analysis involving a
    chemical reaction.

    436,    Chemistry: Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 25+ for
    chemical testing of fluids within a borehole, especially subclasses 29+ for
    petroleum oils or carbonaceous minerals and subclass 30 for testing
    drilling mud.


CLS 73/152.56
TXT Free point or stuck point:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.54 wherein the determination of the
    physical characteristic of the borehole, the casing, or the drill rigging
    is made by measuring or detecting the point or points at which a drill
    pipe, casing, or tubing is stuck in a borehole traversing an earth
    formation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, appropriate subclass for a determination
    of positions in a well bore, per se, and subclasses 302 and 304+ for well
    bore configuration determining, per se.

    166,    Wells, subclass 255.1 for a comprehensive process wherein a
    determination of a position of  unintentional motionlessness of a drill
    pipe, casing, or tubing within a borehole wherein more well detail than is
    necessary for perfecting the test is claimed.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 854.2 for well bore telemetry
    wherein a location of a stuck tool is recorded.


CLS 73/152.57
TXT Casing or cementing:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.54 including (a) a pipe which lines all
    of or a portion of a wall of the borehole or (b) a cementing of a lining in
    the borehole and wherein the determination of the characteristic of the
    borehole is made by measuring a property of the lining or the cementing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152.15, for a formation logging apparatus or process for determining a
    characteristic of the borehole by measuring the effect of cement within a
    borehole on vibration combined with measuring radioactivity.

    152.16, for well logging including plural types of tests including making a
    determination of a characteristic of a casing by measuring an effect of the
    casing on vibration and not combined with radioactivity measuring.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclass 253.1 for a comprehensive process relating to wells
    which includes indicating the location, the presence, or the absence of
    cement wherein more well detail is recited than that which is necessary to
    perfect the test.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 257 for a well testing apparatus and
    method utilizing measurement of radioactivity combined with detection of a
    casing collar.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 854.5 for well bore telemetry
    wherein either downhole equipment or a transmission link is described to
    electrically conduct or process information signals which are transmitted
    through a casing of a borehole to a location above the borehole.

    367,    Communications, Electrical: Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 35+ for the communication of information or intelligence in the
    form of acoustic waves traveling in the earth  which are detected by means
    which travels through a borehole means generating an electric signal which
    represents the communicated information or intelligence and wherein the
    information or intelligence pertains to the borehole itself or to a lining
    of the borehole.


CLS 73/152.58
TXT Using vibration:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.54 wherein the determination of the
    characteristic of the borehole, the casing, or the drill rigging is made by
    measuring the effect of the borehole casing or the drill rigging on
    vibration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152.15, for determining a formation logging by plural tests including
    measurements of radioactivity and vibration.

    152.16, for determining a formation logging by plural tests including a
    measurement of vibration and no measurement of radioactivity.

    152.32, for determining a rate of fluid flow within a borehole by measuring
    the effect of the rate of fluid flow on vibration.

    152.47, for making a downhole measurement of a characteristic of a
    borehole, a casing, or a drill rigging by measuring vibration during
    drilling.

    152.57, for a downhole vibration test of cement or a casing within a
    borehole.

    570+,   for measuring and testing, per se, by use of vibration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, for acoustic exploration within a borehole.

    367,    Communications, Electrical: Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 25+ for the communication of information or intelligence in the
    form of acoustic waves traveling through earth and detected by electric
    signal handling means passing through a well bore and providing information
    pertaining to a characteristic or a location of discontinuities within the
    earth, subclasses 81+ for the communication of information or intelligence
    in a well bore in the form of acoustic waves traveling in a medium in the
    well bore different from the surrounding earth and providing information
    pertaining to a characteristic of the well bore or a location of
    discontinuities within the earth, and subclasses 86+ for the communication
    of information or intelligence in the form of acoustic waves traveling
    through earth and detected by electric signal handling means (a) passing
    through a well bore and (b) providing information pertaining to a
    characteristic of a borehole or a location of discontinuities within the
    earth for electroacoustic borehole testing and wherein the intelligence
    pertains to the walls of the borehole and is obtained from a device which
    travels through the passageway and emits acoustic waves into a medium
    contained within the borehole (e.g., water, air, etc.) which are reflected
    from the walls back to the device and are detected.


CLS 73/152.59
TXT By measurement of response due to force:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.54 wherein the determination of the
    physical characteristic of the borehole, the casing, or the drill rigging
    is made by measuring a response due to an agency or an influence that if
    applied to a free body results chiefly in acceleration of the body and
    sometimes in elastic deformation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152.48, for a measurement of force to determine a physical condition of a
    borehole, a casing, or a drill rigging by use of an apparatus located
    within a borehole and during the time that drilling is taking place.

    152.49, for a measurement of force to determine a physical condition of a
    borehole, a casing, or a drill rigging while drilling.

    862+,   for a force measuring apparatus, per se.


CLS 73/152.61
TXT Pump test:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.01 comprising an apparatus or a method
    for determining a physical characteristic of a pump used (a) for
    circulating a fluid in a borehole or (b) for circulating a fluid in a
    drilling operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168,    for a process or an apparatus for making a determination of a
    characteristic of a pump.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclass 54.1 for means separately pumping from plural
    sources within a well, subclasses 62, 68+, and 105+ for an eduction pump
    within a well, and subclass 101 for a pump for a well wherein the pump
    exerts an outward pressure.

    417,    Pumps, appropriate subclass for a pump inserted in a well, per se.




CLS 73/152.62
TXT With recorder:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.61 combined with a means for keeping a
    permanent record of the determination of the physical characteristic of the
    borehole, the casing, or a drill rigging.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152.45, for an apparatus for testing a borehole or drilling combined with
    means for making an electronic recording of a drill depth rate during
    drilling.

    152.53, for an apparatus for testing a borehole or drilling by measuring
    pressure combined with means for making a record of the test.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, appropriate subclasses, for a recorder for recording the
    operation of machines, particularly subclasses 33+ for recorders combined
    with external recorder operating means including a well logging apparatus
    and subclasses 112+ for graph-type recorders.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, for  magnetic
    storage and retrieval of arbitrarily variable information which is retained
    in a storage medium by variation of a physical characteristic thereof and
    wherein relative movement between a storage element and a source of
    information, a transducer, or a receiver is required.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, for a recording apparatus
    not requiring relative movement between a storage element and a source of
    information, a transducer, or a receiver.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, appropriate subclass for
    a process of or an apparatus for the storage and retrieval of arbitrarily
    variable information which is retained in a storage medium by variation of
    a physical characteristic thereof and wherein relative movement between a
    storage element and a source of information, a transducer, or a receiver is
    required.


CLS 73/156
TXT Subject matter under the class definition directed to the verification of
    statistical record data, either perforations or markings, against a master
    record or keyboard setting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37+,    for determination of the presence of perforations in sheet or other
    material without regard to location by using fluid under pressure (positive
    or negative).

    157,    for similar verification of sprocket apertures in picture films and
    record strips.

    159,    for sensing perforations in sheet material without regard to
    location therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), subclass 34 for a selective
    punching machine provided with verification means.

    235,    Registers, subclass 431, for calculators that compare two or more
    sets of data carried upon record cards, etc., and subclasses 439+ for
    mechanisms for sensing or analyzing data on a record, and see the search
    notes to such subclasses.


CLS 73/157
TXT Subject matter under the class definition for verifying the sprocket
    apertures of picture films and record strips.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156,    for verifying statistical card records and see the notes thereto.


CLS 73/158
TXT Subject matter under the class definition for the testing of hoisting
    cables and ropes, as for testing centers, twist counting, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    760+,   particularly subclasses 828+ for stress and strain tests.


CLS 73/159
TXT Subject matter under the class definition for testing or inspecting sheet
    material, woven fabric materials, and fibers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for "wear" tests.

    37+,    for tests using fluid under pressure (positive or negative) as in
    determining porosity.

    73+,    for moisture content or absorption characteristics tests.

    150,    for fade of dyes and other coating materials caused by fabrics,
    sheet material, etc.

    788+    for stress and strain test including tear flexing, bending,
    folding, bursting or rupture tests.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclass 70 for cloth inspecting.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 238 for the inspection of
    cloth for flaws.


CLS 73/160
TXT Subject matter under subclass 159 for testing or inspecting of filaments or
    strands, for defects, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    828+    for tensile testing of a strand.

    849,    for testing by bending, flexing, or folding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles: Manufacturing, subclasses 226+, for detecting knots or
    slubs in threads.


CLS 73/161
TXT Subject matter under the class definition involving special adoption to the
    testing of coil and leaf springs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    808+,   for fatigue tests.

    818+,   for compression tests.

    849+,   for flexure tests.


CLS 73/162
TXT Subject matter under the class definition directed to the testing of
    toothed gears of all sorts for noise, strength, wear, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 179.5 for gauges for determining
    the form of spur gearing, hobs or spur gear cutters.


CLS 73/163
TXT Subject matter under the class definition directed to the testing of coins.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclass 51 for a device for testing the size and
    weight of a coin.

    194,    Check-Actuated Control Mechanisms, subclasses 302+ for fraud
    preventing devices of the type associated with coin controlled apparatus
    which involve coin testing features, e.g., by testing for size, material or
    weight.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for
    testing electrical properties of articles including coins.

    453,    Coin Handling, subclasses 3+, for coin assorters that separate
    coins according to size.


CLS 73/164
TXT Subject matter under the class definition directed to the testing of
    miners' lamps.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for testing illuminating fluids.


CLS 73/167
TXT Subject matter under the class definition for testing of ordnance and
    projectiles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11.04+, for testing gun recoil apparatus.

    35.14+, for study of explosives and explosive pressures.

    78+,    for hardness tests.

    760+,   for stress and strain tests.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclass 404 for bullet traps combined
    with targets; and subclass 410, for bullet traps used with targets.


CLS 73/168
TXT Subject matter under the class definition for testing hydraulic equipment,
    blowers and pumps.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37+,    for testing by fluid pressure.

    112+    and 116+, for power plant or unit efficiency and motor or engine
    testing.

    147,    for propeller study.


CLS 73/169
TXT Subject matter under the class definition for determining the physical
    characteristics of dough, bread and flour.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, subclass 20 for determination of
    pressures evolved in fermentation of dough.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 231+ for process of food treating combined with testing or
    measuring.


CLS 73/170.01
TXT FLUID FLOW DIRECTION (E.G., WIND SOCK, WEATHER VANE, ETC.):

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising an apparatus or method
    for determining the direction of flow of fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170.16+, for meteorological measuring not combined with direction
    determining.

    170.29+, for oceanographic measuring not combined with direction
    determining.

    861+,   for the measurement of a rate of fluid flow, per se; especially,
    subclass 861.85 for an anemometer, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 412+, 422, 439+, and
    477+ for a device of that class operated by fluid.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 273+ for mechanical indicators
    of the presence or absence of fluid flow, as through a pipe, and subclasses
    173+ for flags.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 199+ for a fluid operated
    changing or moving figure or figure part.


CLS 73/170.02
TXT Relative to aircraft or watercraft:

    Subject matter under subclass 170.01 comprising a process or an apparatus
    for determining the direction of flow of fluid relative to an aircraft or
    watercraft.


CLS 73/170.03
TXT Sailboat (e.g., sailing aid):

    Subject matter under subclass 170.02 wherein the watercraft is a sailboat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 412+, 422, 439+, and
    477 for fluid operated display devices.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 273+ for mechanical indicator of
    the presence or absence of fluid flow, as through a pipe, and subclasses
    173+ for flags.


CLS 73/170.04
TXT Using a drifter or tracer (e.g., smoke):

    Subject matter under subclass 170.01 wherein the determination is made by
    detecting a body or a substance introduced into and carried by the fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    861.05  and 861.07, for using a tracer or a tag  for measuring the volume
    or rate of flow of a fluid, per se.


CLS 73/170.05
TXT Using a fluid actuated alignment device (e.g., wind sock, weather vane,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 170.01 comprising a means responsive to the
    fluid flow which aligns itself in the direction of flow of the fluid.


CLS 73/170.06
TXT With illumination means or an electro-optical indicator (e.g., beacon or
    signal lamp):

    Subject matter under subclass 170.05 combined with (a) means for
    illuminating the alignment device or (b) means responsive to electricity
    for indicating the fluid flow direction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, for an illumination device, per se.


CLS 73/170.07
TXT With velocity determination:

    Subject matter under subclass 170.05 combined with means for determining
    the rate of flow of the fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170.11, for fluid flow direction determination combined with velocity
    determination.

    861+,   for fluid flow determination, per se; especially, subclass 861.85
    for an anemometer for measuring wind velocity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 53+ and 119+ for a changing or
    moving figure or figure part used as a toy.


CLS 73/170.08
TXT Electric sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 170.07 including means whose electron flow or
    electron storage characteristic changes in response to the determination
    being made.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170.09, for fluid flow direction determination means not combined with
    velocity measuring but having an electric sensor which is responsive to
    fluid flow direction.

    866.5,  for a probe or probe mounting, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, appropriate sub-classes for a light responsive
    sensor, per se.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 311+ for a
    piezoelectric sensor, per se.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 2+ for a strain gauge resistor,
    per se, and subclasses 13+ for a condition responsive resistor, per se.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 280+ for a
    capacitor-type sensor, per se.


CLS 73/170.09
TXT Electric sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 170.05 including means whose electron flow or
    electron storage characteristic changes in response to the determination
    being made.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170.08, for a fluid flow device using a fluid actuated alignment means
    combined with velocity measuring and having an electric sensor.

    866.5,  for a probe or probe mounting, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, appropriate sub-classes for a light responsive
    sensor, per se.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 311+ for a
    piezoelectric sensor, per se.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 2+ for a strain gauge resistor,
    per se, and subclasses 13+ for a condition responsive resistor, per se.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 280+ for a
    capacitor-type sensor, per se.


CLS 73/170.11
TXT With velocity determination:

    Subject matter under subclass 170.01 including a process or an apparatus
    for determining the rate of flow of the fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170.07, for fluid flow direction determination using fluid actuated
    alignment combined with velocity determination means.

    861+,   for fluid flow determination, per se; especially, subclass 861.85
    for an anemometer for measuring wind velocity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices: Toys, subclasses 53+ and 119+ for a changing or
    moving figure or figure part which is a toy.


CLS 73/170.12
TXT Thermal:

    Subject matter under subclass 170.11 wherein the determination of the
    velocity or the direction of fluid flow is made by measuring or sensing a
    thermal effect caused by the flow of the fluid.

    (1)     Note.  Such measurement often includes determination of the cooling
    effect upon a heated element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118.2,  for measuring intake air flow in an internal combustion engine.

    198,    for fluid flow measuring combined with diverse subject matter.

    202.5,  for thermal sensing of flow including an auxiliary testing of a
    flow path.

    204.11+, for thermal sensing of flow rate.

    861.95, for measuring by use of a thermal tracer or tag.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for measuring
    and testing of a thermal effect, per se; particularly, subclasses 29+ for
    heat flow measurement and subclasses 43+ for heat flow coefficient
    measuring.


CLS 73/170.13
TXT Acoustic:

    Subject matter under subclass 170.11 wherein the determination of the
    velocity or the direction of fluid flow is made by measuring or sensing the
    effect of the fluid flow on a traveling compressional wave having a
    frequency within either the sonic or ultrasonic frequency range.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    645+,   for measuring acoustic parameters, per se.

    861.18+, for determining rate of flow, per se, by measuring vibration or
    acoustic energy.


CLS 73/170.14
TXT Fluid pressure differential:

    Subject matter under subclass 170.11 wherein the determination of the
    velocity or the direction of fluid flow is made by measuring or sensing a
    difference in fluid pressure resulting from the velocity of the fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    700+,   for fluid pressure measuring, per se.

    861.42, for determining a rate of flow, per se, by measuring differential
    pressure.


CLS 73/170.15
TXT Thrust or drag force:

    Subject matter under subclass 170.11 wherein  the determination of the
    velocity or the direction of fluid flow is made by measuring or sensing the
    magnitude of a force or a component thereof imparted by the fluid to an
    object placed in the flow path of the fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    862+,   for force measuring, per se.


CLS 73/170.16
TXT METEOROLOGY:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising an apparatus or method
    for determining an atmospheric phenomenon or a weather condition.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass generally contains subject matter drawn to the
    measurement of plural meteorological conditions.  However, the measurement
    of a single meteorological condition, not provided for elsewhere, is also
    found here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28.01,  for measuring solids in the atmosphere other than micrometeorites.

    29.02,  for a hygrometer, per se.

    31.02,  for testing for impurities of the air.

    170.01+, for a meteorological apparatus or process combined with wind
    direc-tion determining.

    384+,   for a barometer.

    861.79, for an anemometer, per se.

    863+,   for a sampler, per se, which may obtain a sample of the atmosphere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 69 for a mechanical alarm or
    indicator, per se, providing a humanly perceptible signal in response to a
    predetermined rain condition and subclasses 264+ for a mechanical indicator
    providing a humanly perceptible signal in response to the presence or
    absence of fluid flow.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 134 for the prevention of ice on aircraft
    structure.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 580+ for an electrical
    indicator which produces a humanly perceptible signal in response to the
    attainment of a predetermined icing condition.

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclass 26 for weather radar, per se.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Pro-cessing Systems, subclass 420 for
    an electrical computer data processing system applied to the weather.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclass for atmospheric
    temperature measuring, per se, subclass 109 for temperature combined with
    another atmospheric condition (e.g., discomfort index, windchill factor)
    and subclass 143 for significant temperature measuring combined with
    nonmeteorological pressure measuring.


CLS 73/170.17
TXT Precipitation (e.g., rain gauge):

    Subject matter under subclass 170.16 wherein the atmospheric phenomenon or
    weather condition to be determined is condensation, formed from a vapor in
    the atmosphere, which falls through the atmosphere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    863+,   for a sampler, per se, which may obtain a sample of the atmosphere.


CLS 73/170.18
TXT With recorder detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 170.17 combined with means for making a
    permanent record of the precipitation, wherein significance is attributed
    to the record making means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, appropriate subclasses for a recorder, per se.


CLS 73/170.19
TXT With heater or vaporizer:

    Subject matter under subclass 170.17 combined with a device for elevating
    the temperature of the condensation or for causing the condensation to
    vaporize.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclasses for an electric heater,
    per se.

    392,    Electric Resistance Heating Devices, appropriate subclasses for a
    heater employing an electric resistor.

    432,    Heating, for nonelectric heater, per se.


CLS 73/170.21
TXT Sensing accumulated amount (e.g., rain gauge):

    Subject matter under subclass 170.17 wherein the total amount of
    precipitation falling over a given period of time is determined.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149,    for volumetric content measuring, per se.

    290+,   for a liquid level or depth gauge, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 601+ for an electrical
    indicator which produces a humanly perceptible signal in response to the
    attainment of a predetermined meteorological condition.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Pro-cessing Systems, subclass 420 for
    an electrical computer or data processing system applied to the weather.


CLS 73/170.22
TXT Using a float:

    Subject matter under subclass 170.21 wherein the total amount of
    precipitation is indicated by a device which floats on or in the surface of
    collected precipitation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305+,   for a float-type liquid level gauge.


CLS 73/170.23
TXT Weight actuated (e.g., tipping bucket):

    Subject matter under subclass 170.21 wherein the total amount of
    precipitation is determined in response to the weight of the collected
    precipitation.


CLS 73/170.24
TXT Electric disturbance (e.g., lightning):

    Subject matter under subclass 170.16 wherein the atmospheric phenomenon or
    weather condition is due to the flow of electrons.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 72+ for measuring
    electrical potential due to lightning (e.g., a voltmeter in combination
    with a lightning rod).

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 601+ for an electrical
    indicator which produces a humanly perceptible signal in response to the
    attainment of a predetermined meteorological condition, including lightning.

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclass 26 for weather radar, per se.


CLS 73/170.25
TXT Micrometeorite:

    Subject matter under subclass 170.16 wherein a characteristic of a small
    solid body originating in outer space is determined.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28.01,  for measuring other solid content of air not originating in outer
    space.

    31.02,  for measuring impurity of the atmo-sphere.

    865.5,  for particle size measuring, per se.

    863.21, for sampling, per se, involving separation of constituents.


CLS 73/170.26
TXT Icing condition (e.g., accretion):

    Subject matter under subclass 170.16 wherein the atmospheric phenomenon or
    weather condition pertains to the formation of ice on a surface when it is
    exposed to the atmosphere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 134 for the prevention of ice on aircraft
    structure.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 580+ and 962 for an
    electrical indicator which produces a humanly perceptible signal in
    response to the attainment of a predetermined icing condition.


CLS 73/170.27
TXT Naturally occurring radiation (e.g., solar radiation):

    Subject matter under subclass 170.16 wherein the atmospheric phenomenon or
    weather condition is naturally occurring radiant energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 72+ for measuring
    electrical potential due to lightning (e.g., a voltmeter in combination
    with a lightning rod).

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 601+ for an electrical
    indicator which produces a humanly perceptible signal in response to the
    attainment of a predetermined meteorological condition.

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclass 26 for weather radar, per se.


CLS 73/170.28
TXT Using unmanned, self-controlled airborne instrumentation carrier (e.g.,
    radiosonde):

    Subject matter under subclass 170.16 wherein the determination is made by
    an apparatus having no human in it or controlling it during the time in
    which the determination is being made, and which is transported by air or
    is supported wholly by aerodynamic and aerostatic forces.


CLS 73/170.29
TXT OCEANOLOGY (E.G., OCEANS, RIVERS, OR LAKES):

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising an apparatus or method
    for determining a physical parameter or phenomenon associated with a
    naturally occurring body of water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53.01+,  for the analysis or testing of a liquid, per se.

    170.01+, for oceanology combined with fluid flow direction determining.

    861+,   for measuring the rate of fluid flow without direction measurement;
    especially, subclass 861.85 for anemometers, per se.

    863+,   for a sampler, per se, which may obtain a sample from a body of
    water.

    866.5,  for a probe or probe mounting, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 5 for marine platform
    drillng, per se.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 425+ for testing of
    electrolyte properties of a liquid, per se.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+ for an electrical
    indicator which produces a humanly perceptible signal in response to the
    attainment of a predetermined condition, particularly subclass 606 for a
    flow responsive electrical indicator and subclass 618 for a liquid level
    responsive electrical indicator, and subclasses 850+ for an underwater
    electrical communication system.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Pro-cessing Systems, subclasses 550+
    for a computer or a data processing system for measuring, per se.

    367,    Communications, Electrical: Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    appropriate subclass for an underwater communication employing acoustic
    waves.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 136 for underwater
    temperature measuring and subclass 143 for combined temperature and
    nonmeteorological pressure measuring.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, for a buoy, per se.


CLS 73/170.31
TXT Surface wave:

    Subject matter under subclass 170.29 wherein the physical parameter or
    phenomenon is a moving ridge or swell on the surface of the naturally
    occurring body of water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148,    for a model basin or testing tank, per se.

    290+,   for liquid level measuring, per se.

    861+,   for fluid flow rate measuring with direction determination.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 67+ for mechanical alarms
    providing a humanly perceptible signal in response to a predetermined
    oceanological condition; particularly, subclass 107 for a signalling device
    being placed upon a buoy wherein the signal is produced by a wave orcurrent.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 4 for a liquid actuated resistor,
    per se, and subclasses 35+ for a liquid responsive resistor, per se.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 284 for  a
    liquid level responsive capacitor, per se, and subclass 285 for a fluid
    flow responsive capacitor, per se.


CLS 73/170.32
TXT Bottom sediment or soil:

    Subject matter under subclass 170.29 wherein the physical parameter or
    phenomenon is either (a) matter that settles to the bottom of the naturally
    occurring body of water or (b) soil at the bottom of the naturally
    occurring body of water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61.71+, for the testing of sediment other than in a naturally occurring
    body of water.

    151+,   for borehole testing, per se.

    863+,   for a sampler, per se; particularly, subclasses 864.65+ for a
    sampler which collects a sample of bottom sediment or soil underneath a
    body of water.


CLS 73/170.33
TXT Towed probe:

    Subject matter under subclass 170.29 wherein a measuring device is pulled
    through a body of water by a moving craft.

    (1)     Note.  Usually a probe is connected to the moving craft by  means
    of a cable or a rope.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53.01+, for probes for use in liquid analysis, per se.

    866.5,  for measuring probes, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 311 for a
    piezo-electric device, per se, responsive to liquid flow or liquid level.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 4 for a pressure responsive resistor
    strain gauge, per se, and subclasses 38+ for other pressure responsive
    resistors, per se.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 284 for a
    liquid level responsive capacitor, per se, and subclass 285 for a liquid
    flow responsive capacitor, per se.


CLS 73/170.34
TXT Unattached, self-contained probe with buoyancy controlled level of descent:

    Subject matter under subclass 170.29 wherein the depth of travel of an
    independent probe is regulated by buoyancy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    866.5,  for a measuring probe or a probe mounting, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 5 for marine platform
    drilling, per se.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclass 33 for a buoy having
    means to release a sensor.


CLS 73/172
TXT Subject matter under the class definition directed to the measurement of
    the load distribution of an animate body or member thereof.


CLS 73/178
TXT Instruments under the class definition peculiarly adapted to use in
    conducting a craft on or through a fluid medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147,    for devices for determining the forces on objects such as aerofoils
    caused by relative motion with respect to fluids in wind tunnels.

    227+,   for straight-line-light-ray instruments useful in conducting a
    craft on or through a fluid medium.

    300+,   for direction indicating instruments responsive to gyroscopic
    forces or to terrestrial gravitation or magnetism and useful in conducting
    a craft on through a fluid medium.

    466+    and 467, for plotting devices.

    490,    for a device measuring distance by integrating a speed response and
    time.

    503,    for a device indicating velocity with respect to the earth by
    integrating time and acceleration.

    504.02+, for an instrument operated by the combined action of a gyroscope
    and a speed or acceleration sensor.

    504.03  and 514.01+, for means measuring change of orientation by
    acceleration responsive means.

    514.01+, for an accelerometer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 715 and 720 for line and lead
    type sounding devices.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 113 for shoal water alarms, and
    subclass 27 for nonelectrical submarine signaling devices.

    235,    Registers, subclass 61 and appropriate indented subclass,
    particularly subclass subclasses 401 and 402 for bombing calculators
    incorporating navigation systems.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 76+ for aircraft control apparatus
    employing measuring devices.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, and subclasses 29+ for other nautical
    signaling systems.

    346,    Recorders, appropriate subclass.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 247+ for fiducial
    instruments involving significant optics or a deflection of the line of
    sight by reflection or refraction principles.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 87+, for acoustic echo navigation systems; and subclasses 118+,
    for other acoustic navigation systems.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, for chronometers.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 6 for position
    determination by thermal measurement.

    396,    Photography, particularly subclasses 7+ for aerial cameras.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 111, 186, and 239+ for
    devices for teaching or training in the use of navigating instruments or
    for such devices when combined with devices for training in the operation
    of aircraft.

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclass 200 for calculations for use in navigation.


CLS 73/179
TXT Instruments under subclass 178 responsive to atmospheric pressure
    variations for determining rate of ascent or descent of a craft.  The
    change in pressure may be manifested by flow of fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    384+,   for altimeters of barometric pressure type.


CLS 73/180
TXT Instruments under subclass 178 responsive to relative movement of the craft
    and the fluid in which it is supported to indicate leeway, angle of
    incidence or side-slip.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 328+ for attitude indicators
    which are controlled or stabilized by a gyroscope.


CLS 73/181
TXT Apparatus under subclass 178 responsive to relative motion of a fluid
    medium and a craft for use in determining the speed of the craft with
    respect to the fluid medium on which it is supported or in which it is
    immersed.  The speed may be integrated with respect to time in order to
    obtain the distance traveled.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes analogous devices for measuring the
    relative speed of land vehicles with respect to the air.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    861+,   for mere flow meters which might be carried on a craft.


CLS 73/182
TXT Logs under subclass 181 wherein the relative velocity of the craft and the
    fluid in which it is navigated produces a pressure differential in a device
    such as a Venturi, flow nozzle, orifice plate, Pitot or like device, which
    pressure differential is a function of said relative velocity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    861.42+, for pressure differential flow meters of general application.


CLS 73/183
TXT Logs under subclass 182 wherein the pressure differential is integrated
    with respect to time to determine the total relative distance traveled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    861.43+, for pressure differential flow meters of general application
    having integrating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, particularly subclasses 61+ for integrating means, per
    se.


CLS 73/184
TXT Logs under subclass 181 comprising a drag device which is immersed in the
    fluid medium and is towed from the craft.  The speed is usually measured by
    determining the force exerted on the towing line or by the extent of
    rotation of a rotary device on the drag.


CLS 73/185
TXT Logs under subclass 184 of the type wherein the drag carries a rotary
    member which is rotated by the action of the fluid medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    861.79+, for turbine type meters of general application.


CLS 73/186
TXT Logs under subclass 181 wherein the speed is determined by measuring the
    movement of a pivoted or sliding flap or vane placed in and moved by the
    fluid medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184+,   for drag type logs.

    861.74+, for vane type flow meters of  general application.


CLS 73/187
TXT Logs under subclass 181 wherein a turbine or rotary motor member is rotated
    by the fluid medium and the number of rotations per unit of time is a
    measure of the speed of the craft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185,    for rotary drag type logs.


CLS 73/195
TXT Meter systems under subclass 861 employing two or more meters.  These
    systems are usually for measuring and comparing two or more flows or for
    selectively metering small or large flows in meters of different capacity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas: Heating and Illuminating, subclasses 180+ for the mixing of
    plural gases, one a fuel with means to meter each gas.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 98+ for self-proportioning flow systems.


CLS 73/196
TXT Systems under subclass 195 wherein two or more flows are constantly
    compared and their ratio indicated, or where comparison is made of the flow
    of the same stream at two or more points.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    357,    for flow comparing devices peculiarly adapted to measure
    temperature by change in flow characteristics of a fluid.


CLS 73/197
TXT Systems under subclass 195 wherein at least two meters are provided, one
    sensitive meter for small flows and one meter of large capacity for large
    flows through the same duct or ducts.  There is provided some means to
    divert the flow to the proper meter under various flow conditions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 512+, 608+ and 636+ for diverting
    valves, per se.


CLS 73/198
TXT Volume or rate of flow meters under subclass 861 combined with structures
    other than meters and not otherwise classifiable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181+,   for ships' logs comprising volume or rate of flow meters.

    215+,   for Weir meters combined with feed water heater structures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, particularly subclasses 98+, 459+, 486+, 494+, and
    460 for fluid handling apparatus which includes volume or rate of flow
    meters.

    152.31, for the use of a fluid flowmeter combined with other types of
    measuring in determining a characteristic of a borehole, a well casing, or
    a drill rigging.

    235,    Registers, subclass 61 for meters combined with speedometer means
    so as to make miles per gallon computations.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, appropriate subclasses for valves, per
    se.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 39+, for heat quantity
    measuring, devices comprising volume meters.


CLS 73/199
TXT Meters under subclass 198 having combined therewith means for regulating
    the pressure of the fluid to the inlet or the pressure drop across the
    meter; or means for indicating or limiting the demand (rate of flow,
    maximum or minimum) from the meter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    197,    for regulators combined with compound meter structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 494+ particularly subclasses 505+ for
    pressure regulators, per se, not structurally combined with meters.


CLS 73/200
TXT Meters under subclass 198 combined with liquid and gas separating means
    whereby gases entrained in a liquid to be metered may be separated
    therefrom before the liquid enters the meter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273+,   for gas meter casings having provision for collecting drip.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, for gas separators, per se, and subclass 270 for
    gas separators having certain testing or metering means included.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses for
    liquid separators, per se.


CLS 73/201
TXT Meters under subclass 198 combined with housing boxes or means for
    connecting the meter into a pipe line or meter box. Structure of the meter
    or meter box, other than a mere conventional statement, must be included.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 272+ for hydrants, and, subclasses 343+
    for other fluid handling apparatus including casings, supports or
    protectors.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 3.2+ for receptacles having provision for
    extending strands, rods, pipes, etc., through the receptacle wall or for
    coupling them to the wall.

    248,    Supports, subclass 317 for meter hanger supports, per se.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclass 30 for meter connections not
    limited as above indicated.


CLS 73/202
TXT Devices under subclass 861 for separating from a main flow a definite
    proportion thereof and metering such separated portion as a measure of the
    volume or rate of the main flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254,    for rotary piston and cylinder meters with a compensating by-pass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 98+ particularly subclass 101 for flow
    dividers, per se, which are self-proportioning, and subclasses 599+ and
    861+ for other flow dividers, per se.

    152.29+, for a flowmeter for determining a characteristic of a borehole, a
    casing, or a drill rigging.


CLS 73/202.5
TXT Thermal sensing of flow:

    Subject matter under subclass 202 in which the rate of flow of a fluid is
    determined in a separated flow path by a sensed thermal effect caused by
    such flow.

    (1)     Note.  Such measurement often includes determination of the cooling
    effect upon a heated element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152.33, for a flowmeter for determining a characteristic of a borehole, a
    well casing, or a drill rigging by measuring a rate of fluid flow
    responsive to a thermal property of a fluid.

    204.11+, for thermal fluid flow measuring, absent a separate flow path.


CLS 73/203
TXT Meters under subclass 202 wherein the means for proportionally separating
    the flow to be measured from the main flow comprises a proportioning valve
    or valves.


CLS 73/204.11
TXT Thermal type:

    Subject matter under subclass 861 in which the rate of flow of a fluid is
    determined by a sensed thermal effect caused by such flow.

    (1)     Note.  Such measurement often includes determination of the cooling
    effect upon a heated element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118.2,  for measurement intake air flow in an internal combustion engine.

    152.33, for a flowmeter for determining a characteristic of a borehole, a
    well casing, or a drill rigging by measuring a rate of fluid flow
    responsive to a thermal property of a fluid.

    198,    for fluid flow measuring combined with diverse subject matter.

    202.5,  for thermal sensing of flow including an auxiliary testing flow
    path.

    861.95, for flow measuring by use of a thermal tracer or tag.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for measuring
    and testing of a thermal effect, per se; particularly subclasses 29+ for
    heat flow measurement, and subclasses 43+ for heat flow coefficient
    measurement.


CLS 73/204.12
TXT With conduit extending between heat sinks:

    Subject matter under subclass 204.11 which measures the flow rate of a
    fluid flowing in a conduit extending between two bodies of fixed
    temperature.

    (1)     Note.  The conduit is itself often a conductive portion of either a
    heating or measuring circuit.


CLS 73/204.13
TXT With auxiliary fluid contacting or in heat exchange relation with flow path
    (e.g., thermodilution):

    Subject matter under subclass 204.11 in which an additional fluid is
    introduced into the flow path of, or heat exchange relation with, the fluid
    being measured, to assist in the measurement.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is measuring flow of a reference fluid the
    parameters of which are known and comparison with measurements of the
    mixture with the fluid being observed.

    (2)     Note.  Neither use of a fluid type thermal sensor, nor a probe
    cooling fluid, is of itself, basis for classification in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 49 for measuring flow mass of a liquified
    gas.

    600,    Surgery, subclass 504 for a thermodilution blood flow measuring
    device.


CLS 73/204.14
TXT Including digital or pulse measuring circuitry:

    Subject matter under subclass 204.11 which includes measuring circuitry
    which processes a portion of a measuring signal in the form of abrupt
    variations of an electrical signal level.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 155+ for an analog
    to digital encoder.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 170+ for a thermometer
    having digital signal processing.


CLS 73/204.15
TXT Including detail of feedback or rebalancing circuitry:

    Subject matter under 204.11 describing a particular feature of the
    measuring circuit in which a portion of the circuit output is either (a)
    fed back to its input, or (b) used to control a circuit or circuit
    adjusting element which balances a bridge measuring circuit.


CLS 73/204.16
TXT By control of a separate heating or cooling element:

    Subject matter under subclass 204.15 in which a portion of the measuring
    circuit output is used to control a temperature modifying element distinct
    from a thermal sensor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electrical Heating, subclasses 327+ for a temperature responsive
    electrical heater.


CLS 73/204.17
TXT With distinct heating circuitry for a self-heated sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 204.11 having circuitry distinct from
    measuring circuitry to pass heating current through a thermal sensor.


CLS 73/204.18
TXT Including response characteristic or condition compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 204.11 in which the measurement is modified
    so as to suppress the effect of a condition other than flow, or to produce
    a desired output characteristic.

    (1)     Note.  Circuit arrangements for output linearization are included
    in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    861.01+, for flowmeter temperature or density compensation by a distinct
    output signal


CLS 73/204.19
TXT For temperature:

    Subject matter under subclass 204.18 in which the effect of ambient
    temperature is suppressed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204.15, for temperature compensating bridge circuitry having a feedback or
    rebalancing feature.

    861.01+, for flowmeter temperature compensation by a distinct output signal.


CLS 73/204.21
TXT With fluid flow deflector or restrictor (e.g., baffle, constriction):

    Subject matter under subclass 204.11 having an element for modifying the
    direction, or the cross-section area, of a portion of the fluid flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202.5,  for a restrictor combined with a testing bypass or shunt.

    861.52+, for nonthermal flow measuring with a restrictor in the flow path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 40+ for a restrictor in a
    conduit.


CLS 73/204.22
TXT With sensor housing:

    Subject matter under subclass 204.11 including an enclosure which surrounds
    the sensor.

    (1)     Note.  A conduit for the flowing fluid being measured is not, of
    itself, a housing for this subclass.


CLS 73/204.23
TXT Having particular electrical heating, cooling, or thermal sensing element:

    Subject matter under subclass 204.11 having a designated electrical thermal
    modifying or responsive element.

    (1)     Note.  The structure of a sensing element, not designated as part
    of a measuring system, is classified with such elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for thermal
    measuring system not used for flow measurement.


CLS 73/204.24
TXT Thermoelectric junction:

    Subject matter under subclass 204.23 wherein the temperature sensing or
    modifying element is a current generating device having a junction of two
    conductors of different composition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclasses 200+ for
    structure of a thermoelectric element.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 179+ for a thermoelectric
    thermometer.


CLS 73/204.25
TXT Resistive element:

    Subject matter under subclass 204.23 wherein the sensor or heater is an
    electrical resistance element.


CLS 73/204.26
TXT With substrate carrier (e.g., thin film):

    Subject matter under subclass 204.25 in which the resistive element is
    formed as a thin layer which is mounted upon a side of a solid element.


CLS 73/204.27
TXT Wire type (e.g., hot wire):

    Subject matter under subclass 204.25 wherein a thin wire forms both a
    resistive temperature sensor and a resistance heater.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204.17, for detailed circuitry for passing a heating current through a
    sensor.


CLS 73/215
TXT Meters under subclass 861 having means for metering by determining the
    effect upon a flow in an open channel of a constriction, such as a weir.
    More than a mere graduated water gate must be included.  The term "open
    channel" is intended to include any flow channel wherein the surface of the
    liquid above and below the constriction is subjected to the same pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, appropriate subclasses for valves and
    their actuating means for closed conduits.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 87+ for weirs and water
    gates, per se, with or without adjusting means or graduations and including
    no meter structure, and subclasses 92+ for water gate structures with
    regulating means to cause a definite volume of water to pass through an
    open channel while the head varies.


CLS 73/216
TXT Meters under subclass 215 wherein the constriction comprises a submerged
    orifice or discharge nozzle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    861.61,         for pressure differential type orifice or flow nozzle.



    Volume or rate of flow meters, Tank type. Meters under subclass 861 wherein
    the volume of fluent material is measured by the continuous filling and
    discharging of one or more tanks, buckets or hoppers.  The filling and
    discharging is directly or indirectly controlled by the fluent material
    being metered.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 386+ for tanks provided with automatic
    control of filling and discharging in response to the liquid level therein
    wherein structure is claimed that is capable of general fluid feeding and
    not limited to use as a meter.

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclasses 18+ for a weigher of that class which
    also registers the number of fill and discharge cycles.


CLS 73/217
TXT Tank type meters under subclass 861 wherein the fluent material to be
    metered is deposited in a rotatable tank or in buckets carried by a drum or
    wheel which rotates from filling to discharging position in response to
    gravity or to a power drive when a definite volume has been placed in said
    tank or bucket.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclasses 83+ for a rotary tank responsive to
    weight.


CLS 73/218
TXT Meters under subclass 217 wherein power means is provided to rotate the
    tank or drum from filling to discharging position, such power means being
    caused to operate directly or indirectly by the metered fluid or fluent
    material when the tank is filled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclass 84 for a weigher having power driven
    rotary tank responsive to weight in the tank.


CLS 73/219
TXT Tank meters under subclass 861 wherein the volume is measured in more than
    one chamber.


CLS 73/220
TXT Meters under subclass 219 wherein the inlet and discharge valves of the
    measuring chambers are actuated by pressure of the fluid to be metered when
    a definite static head of the fluid is accumulated in the respective
    measuring chambers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249     and 271, for other fluid actuated valve combinations.


CLS 73/221
TXT Meters under subclass 219 wherein the inlet and discharge valves of the
    measuring chambers are controlled by a float or floats.  This subclass
    includes tank meters wherein the valves are operated by power means
    controlled by a float or floats.


CLS 73/222
TXT Meters under subclass 219 wherein the discharge from each measuring chamber
    is controlled by one or more siphons.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 123+ for siphons, per se.


CLS 73/223
TXT Tank meters under subclass 861 having only one measuring chamber.


CLS 73/224
TXT Tank meters under subclass 223 wherein the inlet and outlet valves of the
    measuring chamber are controlled by a float or floats.  Tank meters having
    valves actuated by power means controlled by a float or floats are included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221,    for float operated valves for plural measuring chamber type.


CLS 73/225
TXT Meters under subclass 224 wherein the valves of the measuring chamber are
    actuated by a force which is stored up and suddenly released through
    movement of a float or floats.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251     and 270, for trip gear in other combinations.


CLS 73/226
TXT Meters under subclass 223 wherein the discharge from the measuring chamber
    is controlled by a siphon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222,    for siphons with plural measuring chambers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 123+ for siphons, per se.


CLS 73/227
TXT Meters under subclass 861 not classifiable in any of the above subclasses
    wherein is provided a means responsive to area of cross section of the
    fluid flow to be metered, a means responsive to the velocity of said flow
    and a means for integrating both of said variables to obtain volume.


CLS 73/232
TXT Meters under subclass 861 wherein the fluid is measured in a continuously
    operable expansible chamber device.  The energy of the fluid is usually
    employed to expand the measuring chamber or chambers, such expansion being
    also utilized to drive suitable registering means for totalizing the number
    of expansions.

    (1)     Note.  In defining expansible chamber meters, the term "cylinder"
    is used to define an external member in the meter organization which
    surrounds an internal or piston member which constitutes a relatively
    moving wall for the expansible chamber, the other wall being formed in
    whole or in part by the cylinder and the cylinder including the abutment
    against which the fluid to be metered acts.  In meters having two or more
    internal members, both moved by the fluid to be metered and each external
    to the other and serving as mutual abutments, the internal members are each
    considered to be pistons, but where one internal member is movable inside
    of the other, the inner is considered to be a piston and the outer a moving
    cylinder.  Where the metered fluid acts on a cylinder or piston to rotate
    one relative to the other, the cylinder abutment is termed an "abutment"
    and the piston abutment is termed a "vane".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, and see the reference to Class 73
    in section III of the class definition of Class 91 for a statement of the
    line.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclasses, for an
    expansible chamber device.  For the line between Class 73 and Class 92, see
    section III of the class definition of Class 92, under SEARCH CLASS 73.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 377+, 602 and 662+ for a receptacle having
    a transparent sidewall or sidewall portion.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, for rotary expansible chamber
    devices, per se.


CLS 73/233
TXT Devices under subclass 232 wherein means is provided for manually or
    automatically varying the ratio of transmission of motion from the
    expansible chamber means to the indicating or registering means.  Such
    variation is usually for the purpose of correcting the indicated volume for
    temperature and pressure variations or to change the indication from one
    system of units to another, such as from U. S. gallons to Imperial gallons,
    etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227,    for area-velocity integrating type.

    861.81+, for turbine type with regulating adjustment.


CLS 73/234
TXT Meters under subclass 232 wherein the fluid to be metered is measured in an
    expansible chamber which is sealed off by a liquid continuously or at some
    part of the measuring cycle.  These subclasses are not limited to gas
    meters and include devices for metering liquids of less density than the
    liquid employed as a seal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclasses 176+ and 181+ for gas
    holders and feeders of similar structure.


CLS 73/235
TXT Meters under subclass 234 wherein a series of measuring chambers are
    carried by a drum mounted to rotate in a sealing liquid. During continuous
    rotation of said drum, definite volumes of the fluid to be metered are
    successively trapped in said compartments by the sealing liquid and then
    released thereby to an exhaust passage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217,    for the rotary tank or bucket types.


CLS 73/236
TXT Meters under subclass 234 wherein the bell or chambered drum is mounted in
    a sealing liquid for oscillation about a pivot.  The bell or drum in
    oscillating forms an expansible chamber or chambers with said sealing
    liquid wherein successive charges of fluid to be metered are measured.


CLS 73/237
TXT Meters under subclass 234 wherein the bell is mounted to rectilinearly
    reciprocate into and out of the sealing liquid to form therewith an
    expansible measuring chamber for the fluid to be metered.


CLS 73/238
TXT Meters under subclass 234 wherein a multi-chambered bell is so mounted in
    the sealing liquid that, when moved, its axis describes continuously the
    surface of a cone.  The compartments of the bell form with the sealing
    liquid a plurality of expansible measuring chambers for the fluid to be
    metered.


CLS 73/239
TXT Meters under subclass 232 employing one or more relatively rectilinearly
    reciprocating pistons and cylinders, said piston and cylinder structures
    cooperating to define one or more expansible measuring chambers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclasses for an
    expansible chamber device of the cylinder and piston type.


CLS 73/240
TXT Meters under subclass 239 wherein both cylinder and piston reciprocate
    rectilinearly, the motion of one being transverse to the motion of the
    other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 173.


CLS 73/241
TXT Meters under subclass 239 wherein the cylinder is supported for rocking
    movement, which movement is caused to operate the valves controlling
    reciprocation of the piston.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 176 and 210+.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 118+ for an expansible
    chamber device having an oscillating cylinder.


CLS 73/242
TXT Meters under subclass 239 wherein all events of the metering cycle of the
    expansible measuring chamber are controlled without the use of a valve
    distinct from the piston or the piston-rod and the cylinder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 232+.


CLS 73/243
TXT Meters under subclass 239 having at least two cylinders, each provided with
    a piston and a valve or valves for distributing the fluid to be metered to
    cause the pistons to reciprocate, the valve or valves for one cylinder
    being moved wholly or partially in consequence of movement of the piston in
    the other cylinder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264,    for duplex, multiple diaphragm type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 191+.


CLS 73/244
TXT Meters under subclass 239 wherein parallel cylinders are provided, each
    having a piston operating upon a common wobble plate or cam which controls
    the distributing valve or valves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 499+, for parallel
    cylinder type motors.


CLS 73/245
TXT Meters under subclass 239 wherein parallel cylinders are provided, each
    having a piston driving a common shaft extending transversely of the
    cylinders.  The shaft in rotating operates the distributing valves for all
    the cylinders and usually actuates the register mechanism.


CLS 73/246
TXT Meters under subclass 245 wherein the transverse shaft actuates a single
    valve, usually rotary, which controls the induction and eduction to all
    cylinders.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    265+,   for rotary valve multiple diaphragm meters.


CLS 73/247
TXT Meters under subclass 239 having two or more cylinders with their axes
    radially arranged.  Either the cylinders and/or the pistons may be movable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 491+ for radial
    cylinder type motors.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 148 for an expansible chamber
    device having a plurality of radially arranged cylinders.


CLS 73/248
TXT Meters under subclass 239 wherein the piston or piston-rod carries a
    relatively movable valve for controlling at least one of the admission or
    exhaust and serves as a seat for the valve or has formed therein some of
    the distributing passages.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 222+.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 523+ and 545+ for expansible chamber type pumps
    having a valved piston.


CLS 73/249
TXT Meters under subclass 239 wherein the distributing valve or valves are
    actuated by pressure of the fluid being metered, although they may be
    started by the piston in its movement through contact or by means of a
    pilot valve operated by the piston or rod.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220     and 271, for other fluid actuated valve combinations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 281+.


CLS 73/250
TXT Meters under subclass 239 having a distributing valve mechanism actuated by
    the piston, piston rod, or a part rigidly attached thereto.  This subclass
    includes piston meters wherein the distributing valves are actuated
    electrically or by other power means under control of the piston in its
    movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 218+.


CLS 73/251
TXT Meters under subclass 250 wherein the distributing valves are actuated by a
    force which is stored up and suddenly released through movement of the
    piston or piston rod.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225,    270, for other combinations with valve trip gear.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 97 and 100 for snap
    actions, per se.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 338.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 75 for valve actuation with
    snap action.


CLS 73/252
TXT Piston meters under subclass 232 in which the piston and cylinder
    relatively oscillate about a fixed center to expand the measuring chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 339+.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 120+ for an expansible
    chamber devices having an oscillating piston.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 481+ for an    expansible chamber type pump
    having an oscillating pumping member.


CLS 73/253
TXT Piston Meters under subclass 232 wherein the cylinder and piston relatively
    rotate about a fixed or movable axis to expand the metering chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, for rotary expansible chamber
    devices, per se.


CLS 73/254
TXT Meters under subclass 253 wherein a bypass, usually having a variable
    restriction, is placed across the metering chamber to compensate for losses
    caused by leakage, viscosity changes, etc.


CLS 73/255
TXT Meters under subclass 253 in which the piston rotates relatively to its
    axis while the axis moves in an orbit.  This subclass also includes meters
    wherein a point on the piston constantly faces the same direction while the
    axis rotates.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 54+ for rotary
    expansible chamber devices in which the working.


CLS 73/256
TXT Meters under subclass 255 having a plurality of stationary abutments for
    cooperation with the piston.


CLS 73/257
TXT Meters under subclass 255 having a single stationary abutment for
    cooperation with the piston.


CLS 73/258
TXT Meters under subclass 257 wherein the axis of the piston during the orbital
    movement describes a conical surface.  This subclass includes meters
    commonly termed "disk type".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 49+ for rotary
    expansible chamber devices having a mutating working member.


CLS 73/259
TXT Rotary piston meters under subclass 253 wherein the piston is provided with
    one or more vanes which slidably project from the piston to engage the
    cylinder wall.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 259+ for rotary
    expansible chamber devices having positively actuated vanes and subclass
    270 for similar devices having movable vanes.


CLS 73/260
TXT Rotary piston meters under subclass 253 wherein the piston is provided with
    one or more hinged vanes which are extended to engage the cylinder wall and
    may be collapsed against the piston in passing the cylinder abutment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 259+ for rotary
    expansible chamber devices having positively actuated vanes and subclass
    270 for similar devices having movable vanes.


CLS 73/261
TXT Rotary piston meters, under subclass 253 having at least two pistons
    mounted in a common cylinder and having interengaging portions so that each
    may act as an abutment for the other.  This subclass includes meters of the
    "Roots blower" or lobed impeller type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 166+ for rotary
    expansible chamber devices of the moving cylinder type having intermeshing
    peripheral surfaces; subclasses 172+, for such devices of the moving
    cylinder type having interengaging peripheral surfaces and subclasses 191+,
    for such devices having interengaging rotating members.


CLS 73/262
TXT Meters under subclass 232 wherein the expansible measuring chamber is
    defined in whole or in part by a diaphragm, bellows or similar type of
    collapsible wall which moves to provide the expansion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272+,   for elements such as casings, diaphragm mountings and diaphragms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 34+ for a bellows type
    expansible chamber device; subclasses 89+ for a collapsible chamber wall
    type expansible chamber device.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 472+, 474+, 478, 479, 480 for expansible chamber
    type pumps having a collapsible wall.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 45 for rotary
    expansible chamber devices having a collapsible wall.


CLS 73/263
TXT Diaphragm or collapsible wall meters under subclass 262 employing more than
    one diaphragm to define the expansible measuring chambers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 48+ for an expansible
    chamber device having a plurality of diaphragms.


CLS 73/264
TXT Meters under subclass 263 wherein the movable diaphragms define a plurality
    of measuring chambers for each of which a distributing valve or valves are
    provided. The distributing valves for one measuring chamber are moved
    wholly or partly in consequence of movement of the diaphragm in the other
    measuring chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243,    for duplex reciprocating piston or cylinder type.


CLS 73/265
TXT Meters under subclass 263 wherein a rotary valve or valves are provided to
    control the induction and eduction to all of the chambers defined by the
    diaphragms.  The term "rotary" is intended to include valves which have
    orbital movement wherein one point on the valve continuously faces in the
    same direction.


CLS 73/266
TXT Meters under subclass 265 wherein the rotary valve receives its motion from
    the diaphragms through the medium of cranks.


CLS 73/267
TXT Meters under subclass 266 wherein the motion is transmitted to the cranks
    from flag-wires or flag-rods operated by the diaphragms.


CLS 73/268
TXT Meters under subclass 263 wherein the induction and/or eduction to the
    measuring chambers are controlled by slide valves of the oscillating or
    reciprocating type.


CLS 73/269
TXT Diaphragm meters wherein the measuring chamber or chambers are defined by a
    single diaphragm or bellows.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 96+ for a diaphragm type
    expansible chamber device.


CLS 73/270
TXT Meters under subclass 269 wherein the valves controlling the induction and
    eduction of the measuring chambers are actuated by a force which is built
    up and then suddenly released by the movement of the diaphragm.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225     and 251, for other combinations with valve trip gear.


CLS 73/271
TXT Meters under subclass 269 wherein the valves controlling the induction and
    eduction of the measuring chambers are actuated by pressure of the metered
    fluid when a definite pressure builds up behind the diaphragm at the end of
    its stroke.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220     and 249, for other fluid operated valve combinations.


CLS 73/272
TXT Meter subcombinations or elements of the type meter provided for in
    subclass 861 and not above provided for.  Register connections including
    reduction gearing and packings are included here when claimed with meter
    structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, for reduction gearing, per se.

    235,    Registers, for registers, per se.

    346,    Recorders.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, for planetary
    gearing, per se.


CLS 73/273
TXT Elements under subclass 272 for improvements in the casing structure
    housing the metering mechanism and not limited to any particular type of
    meter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201,    for meter boxes.

    431,    for instrument casings of general    application.


CLS 73/274
TXT Meter casing structures under subclass 273 limited to use with diaphragm
    meters.


CLS 73/275
TXT Elements under subclass 272 comprising devices which cooperate with the
    meter to prevent reversing or running backward of the registering
    mechanism.  This subclass includes devices to protect the meter against
    breakage caused by reversing as well as to prevent fraud.


CLS 73/276
TXT Elements under subclass 275 wherein check valves are combined with meter
    structure to prevent reversing or running backward of the registering
    mechanism by preventing reverse flow through the meter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 511+ for check valves, per se.


CLS 73/277
TXT Elements under subclass 272 wherein provision is made to prevent freezing
    of the meter; or for expansion or yielding or for the fracture of some
    particular part to prevent injury to other portions of the meter in the
    event of freezing of the metered fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201,    for anti-freeze constructions of meter boxes of enclosing the meter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 26-35 for other types of
    frost constructions capable of general application and not tied up with
    meter structure.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 89.1+ and 265+ for frangible closures and
    attachments of general application in metallic receptacles.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclass 1, for fracturable or yieldable
    flanged joints between two parts of a meter casing wherein said parts are
    no more in effect than two pipe members.


CLS 73/278
TXT Elements under subclass 272 comprising a devices for mounting a diaphragm
    in a meter, usually so as to facilitate removal, repair and/or soldering.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 98+ for a diaphragm mounting
    for a diaphragm type expansible chamber device.


CLS 73/279
TXT Elements under subclass 272 comprising diaphragm or bellows structure, per
    se, limited to use in meters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 96+, for a diaphragm type
    expansible chamber device.


CLS 73/280
TXT Devices under subclass 279 having means for oiling the meter diaphragms to
    preserve and render them impermeable to avoid inaccuracies caused by
    porosity of the diaphragm walls.


CLS 73/281
TXT Tangent adjustment:

    Elements under subclass 272 comprising adjustments, per se, of the tangent
    arms and/or posts of diaphragm meters.


CLS 73/290
TXT Gauges under the class definition for determining the level or depth of
    bodies of liquid and not otherwise classifiable.  The gauges may be
    properly calibrated for use with certain containers so as to indicate
    volume as a function of liquid level.  The volume indicated in such
    instances may be the quantity of liquid remaining in the container or the
    quantity removed therefrom.  Devices for gauging the draft of ships are
    here included.

    (1)     Note.  Devices for determining depths, by sonic or electrical wave
    means are found in Classes 324, Electricity:  Measuring and Testing,
    subclasses 323+; Class 181, Acoustics, subclass 124 and Class 367,
    Communications, Electrical: Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices, subclasses
    87+.

    (2)     Note.  For nonquantitative liquid level alarms or indicators, see
    Class 116, Signals and Indicators, subclasses 109+ and subclasses 227+
    where nonelectrical and Class 340, Communications: electrical subclasses
    618+ where electrical.

    (3)     Note.  Although the patents classified in this and indented
    subclasses are principally for devices for determining the depth or level
    of bodies of liquid, devices which are similar in construction or operation
    to such devices have been classified herein even though disclosed solely
    for determining the level of dry fluent materials.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 257.073, for a
    supply container for loading the tool of an applicator, which container is
    provided with means for contacting the applicator for indicating or
    limiting the extent of penetration of the tool into the supply and
    including means which is adjustable to correspond to the drop in level of
    the supply.

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 713+ for sounding devices for
    determining the depth of bodies of fluent material or for measuring the
    distance from a datum to the surface of fluent material wherein only a
    measurement of distance is involved.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, see Note 2.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 386+, for fluid handling apparatus
    including means for controlling flow in response to or to maintain liquid
    level.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 151.3 for a metal casting apparatus
    including a melt level sensor.

    181,    Acoustics, see Note 1.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, see (1) Note above.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, see (1) Note and (2) Note above.


CLS 73/291
TXT Combinations under subclass 290 of liquid level gauges and other measuring
    instruments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for float gauges combined with hydrometers.

    198,    for flow meters combined with liquid level gauges.


CLS 73/292
TXT Liquid level or depth gauges as defined in subclass 291 combined with
    temperature measuring means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 142, for a thermometer
    combined with another measuring instrument.


CLS 73/293
TXT Liquid level or depth gauges as defined in subclass 290 provided with means
    for illuminating the gauge or its indicating portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    325+,   for liquid level gauges equipped with guards or casings but
    including no source of illumination.

    327,    for liquid level gauge glasses equipped with reflectors or
    magnifiers but including no source of illumination.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, particularly subclasses 23+, for illuminating means,
    per se, or combined with a gauge dial of general application.


CLS 73/294
TXT Combinations of liquid level gauges under subclass 290 with funnels or hose
    nozzles wherein no more of such funnel or nozzle is included than is
    necessary to provide for the gauge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 331+, for funnels, per se, and, subclasses 95+, for indicators
    combined with filling means responsive to level or pressure in the receiver.


CLS 73/295
TXT Gauges under subclass 290 wherein the liquid level or depth is determined
    by temperature responsive means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 151.4+ and 450.3 for a metal casting
    apparatus having a thermal sensor which may be used for sensing melt level.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 100+ for temperature
    measurement, per se.


CLS 73/296
TXT Gauges under subclass 290 wherein the liquid level or depth is determined
    by weighing a column representative of the depth of liquid in the reservoir.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    309,    for those operating by buoyant effort exerted on a float.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    177,    Weighing Scales, appropriate subclasses for a weighing device, per
    se.


CLS 73/297
TXT Gauges under subclass 290 wherein one or a plurality of test cocks are
    placed in communication with a reservoir or water column at various levels
    so that the liquid level may be determined by the issuance or nonissuance
    of liquid from the various levels.  This subclass also includes the
    structure of the water column.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 227+ for single test indicators.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, appropriate subclasses for valve
    structure, per se.


CLS 73/298
TXT Gauges under subclass 290 having a tube so mounted in the reservoir that
    one end is movable with respect to the liquid level and the other end is
    connected to the exterior of the reservoir.  Determination of liquid level
    is accomplished by adjustment of the tube to a position wherein "flow" or
    "no-flow" conditions through the exterior connection are produced by slight
    movement in either direction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 513+ for similar
    structure employed for decanting.


CLS 73/299
TXT Gauges under subclass 290 wherein variations in depth are determined by
    measuring variations in static head at some point normally below the
    surface of the liquid.  These devices usually comprise a pressure gauge
    with connections to said point below the surface of the liquid in the
    reservoir.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32+,    for gauges of this type combined with means for indicating the
    specific gravity of the liquid.

    323+,   for mere sight glasses.

    700+,   for pressure gauges, per se.


CLS 73/300
TXT Gauges under subclass 299 wherein the gauge mechanism as a whole or the
    pressure responsive portion thereof is peculiarly adapted to be lowered as
    a unit to the bottom of the liquid to take a reading of hydrostatic
    pressure as a function of depth.  An indicator at the surface may be
    suitably connected to the pressure responsive device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 715 and 720 for devices for
    sounding by the use of a line and weight.


CLS 73/301
TXT Gauges under subclass 299 having at least one indicator electrically
    controlled by means responsive to the hydrostatic pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 870.01+ for electric
    telemetering systems.


CLS 73/302
TXT Gauges under subclass 299 wherein means is provided for compressing or
    replenishing the fluid in the system between the reservoir and the pressure
    gauge, or means is provided for displacing or withdrawing fluid from the
    measuring system.  The displacing or replenishing means may be, for
    example, an adjustable plug, a pump, a means to entrain air by sloshing of
    liquid in the tank, a vacuum feed tank in an internal combustion engine
    fuel feeding system, or other source of pressure or suction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    439,    for similar devices for determining specific gravity.


CLS 73/303
TXT Gauges under subclass 302 wherein the displacement or replenishing means
    produces a pressure less than atmospheric or the action of a vacuum type
    fuel feeding tank is employed.  The suction may be employed to produce a
    pressure differential proportional to the head of liquid in the reservoir,
    or may cause directly or indirectly the entrainment of air to replenish the
    system.


CLS 73/304
TXT Gauges under subclass 290 having electrode means exposed to the liquid
    whereby said liquid may complete the circuit between said electrodes as it
    rises.  There may be a plurality of pairs of electrodes at different
    elevations or a linear resistance spaced from a conductor and bridged by
    the fluid to change the resistance by increments upon change of liquid
    level.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301,    for immersible electrode gauges employed in connection with
    pressure responsive liquid level gauges.

    313,    for other combinations with electric signals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 425+ for
    electrolytic testing and subclasses 600+ for the measuring of impedance.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 38 for a liquid resistance element
    or contact operated by a change in fluid or gas pressure.  See the
    reference to Class 338 under (3) Note, C, above.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 620, for a nonquantitative
    liquid level alarm having an electrode probe.


CLS 73/305
TXT Liquid gauges under subclass 290 wherein the liquid level or depth is
    indicated directly or indirectly by at least one float or buoyant body.
    The float may be fastened to a support insertable into the liquid or may be
    substantially permanently mounted in a container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 257.073 for a
    float atop a column of fluent coating material, which float is intended for
    contact with an applicator to indicate the desired extent of immersion of
    the tool of the applicator in the supply as the level of the supply drops.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 43.1+ for
    floats used on fishing lines functioning to control and support the line.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 386+ particularly subclasses 397, 398+
    and 409+ for float controlled valves.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 156.1 and 450.1 for a metal casting
    apparatus having an electrical or float level sensor.


CLS 73/306
TXT Float gauges under subclass 305 claimed significantly in combination with
    other devices.  Where more of an art device is claimed than is necessary to
    provide for the liquid level or depth measurement, the patents are placed
    with such art machine and cross-referenced here.  Since most gauges are
    situated in a container, the inclusion of any type of container, or closure
    therefor, broadly is not sufficient to place the patent here, and
    classification is made in the following subclasses according to the float
    gauge structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291+,   293, and 294, for combinations of float gauges with other measuring
    devices, with illuminating means, or with a funnel of hose nozzle.


CLS 73/307
TXT Combinations under subclass 306 of float gauges with signal or alarm means.
     The signal means is usually for the purpose of indicating extremes of high
    or low level.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 110, 111, 113, and 228+ for
    float-operated mechanical liquid level signaling means, per se.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 504.2 for boiler safety
    devices with alarms or indicators.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 558, for fluid handling apparatus
    including a liquid level responsive signal or indicator.


CLS 73/308
TXT Combinations under subclass 307 wherein the signal is electrically operated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 84 for float
    operated switches, per se.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 618+ for nonquantitative
    alarms responsive to liquid level.


CLS 73/309
TXT Gauges under subclass 305 wherein the level or depth is determined by
    measuring the buoyant effort exerted by the liquid upon a buoyant body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclass 207 for a weigher operated by the
    displacement of liquid.


CLS 73/310
TXT Gauges under subclass 305 having registering means to totalized the upward
    and/or downward movements of the float so as to obtain a total of the
    liquid added to and/or removed from a reservoir.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217,    through 226, for tank type meters wherein floats are employed to
    operate a register to obtain a total of the number of times the tank is
    filled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, for registering means, per se.


CLS 73/311
TXT Gauges under subclass 305 having more than one float.  These floats may
    operate on the same liquid, on liquids in different reservoirs or on
    liquids of different specific gravity in the same reservoir. One or several
    indicating means may be provided to indicate the level or levels of the
    liquid or liquids or their differences in level.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    861+,   for multiple float gauges employed to measure differences in head
    on flow meters; see the volume or rate of flow meters in this class,
    principally subclasses 861.42-861.69 and 227.


CLS 73/312
TXT Gauges under subclass 305 having means for making a permanent record of the
    float movements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders.


CLS 73/313
TXT Gauges under subclass 305 having an indicator which is operated by the
    float through the medium of electrical means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301     and 308, for other liquid level or depth gauges with electrical
    signals or indicators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 84 for float
    operated switches, per se.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 33 for a resistor having a float
    actuator responsive to a change in the level of a liquid.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 870.01+, for electric
    telemetric systems, per se.


CLS 73/314
TXT Gauges under subclass 305 having means operable to sense or feel the
    position of the float as distinguished from indicating means which are
    operatively connected with the float for continuous control thereby. The
    sensing means is usually manually operable.


CLS 73/315
TXT Gauges under subclass 305 wherein means is provided to lock the float
    against motion. Locking is usually maintained to prevent motion of the
    float during surging of the liquid, or to fix the float until a reading is
    completed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    314,    for float gauges wherein the float is locked during sensing of the
    float position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 44.87+ for
    floats used on fishing lines functioning to control and support the line
    and having means to permit selective free sliding or affixing of the float
    on the line.


CLS 73/316
TXT Gauges under subclass 305 wherein the movement of the float in response to
    changes in liquid level is transmitted to the indicator through the medium
    of a hydraulic or pneumatic transmission means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    299,    for hydrostatic pressure type gauges.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 325+ for fluid transmission means, per se.


CLS 73/317
TXT Gauges under subclass 305 wherein the float is mounted upon an arm which is
    in turn pivoted.


CLS 73/318
TXT Gauges under subclass 317 wherein the motion of the float is transmitted to
    the indicator through a flexible cable or Bowden wire transmission.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    321,    for flexible cables in another combination.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 500.5+ for flexible
    transmissions, per se.


CLS 73/319
TXT Gauges under subclass 305 wherein the float reciprocates vertically or
    substantially vertically in following the liquid level.


CLS 73/320
TXT Gauges under subclass 319 wherein the motion of the indicator is derived
    from a reciprocally guided float coacting with a spiral or similar cam
    surface.


CLS 73/321
TXT Gauges under subclass 319 wherein the motion of the float is transmitted to
    the indicator through a flexible cable or Bowden wire transmission.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    318,    for flexible cables in another combination.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 500.5+ for flexible
    transmissions, per se.


CLS 73/322
TXT Gauges under subclass 319 wherein the motion of the float is indicated by a
    stem attached to and bodily movable with said float and projecting usually
    upwardly or downwardly therefrom.


CLS 73/322.5
TXT Device under subclass 305 comprising the structure of the sensing means
    with or without its mounting or operating connection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 43.1+ for
    fishing float, per se.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclasses 1+ for marine buoys
    and floats.


CLS 73/323
TXT Gauges under subclass 290 whereby the liquid level may be directly viewed.
    The gauges may comprise either a transparent plate fastened over an opening
    in the reservoir wall or a tube transparent at least in part and so
    communicating with the reservoir that the liquid in the reservoir and tube
    may assume a common level.  The term "glass", as employed in these
    definition, is intended to include any transparent material.

    (1)     Note.  Similar devices employed for determining the level of dry
    fluent materials are here included.

    (2)     Note.  For structures similar to sight glasses, such as tubular
    ullage rods or sampling tubes, insertable into a liquid to determine depth
    or to take a sample, but not permanently attached to the reservoir, see
    Class 33, Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 717+ and this class (73)
    subclasses 864+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    299,    for hydrostatic pressure type gauges.

    747+,   for U-tube pressure gauges.

    864+,   see (2) Note.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, see Note 2.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, for glass tube structure, per se, not
    limited to use as a gauge glass.

    184,    Lubrication, subclasses 96+ for similar structures employed with
    sight feed lubricators.

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 82, and see the notes thereto, for structures
    wherein a transparent panel is mounted in a wall.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    894+ for transparent closures, in general.


CLS 73/324
TXT Glasses under subclass 323 having a cleaning apparatus or implement
    incorporated therewith for cleaning the sight glass, sight tube or its
    connecting passages.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 104.03+ for
    tube cleaning implements, per se.


CLS 73/325
TXT Sight glasses under subclass 323 provided with a guard or casing for
    protecting the glass or for catching the flying glass particles when the
    glass bursts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    293,    wherein are classified guards or casings having illuminating means
    incorporated therewith.

    330     and 334, for the transparent closure plate type of gauge glasses
    which are usually provided with clamping means which project outward from
    the glass and in a sense form a guard.


CLS 73/326
TXT Sight glasses with guards under subclass 325 wherein the gauge glass is of
    the type commonly employed in boiler installations and comprises a tubular
    conduit, transparent at least in part, connected at one end to the space
    above the liquid in the reservoir and at the other end to the reservoir
    below the normal liquid level so that the pressures on the liquid in the
    reservoir and gauge glass may be equalized.


CLS 73/327
TXT Sight glasses under subclass 323 having means for reflecting or magnifying
    the liquid in the glass.  The reflection or magnification may be
    accomplished by prismatic formations integral with the glass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    293,    for reflectors or magnifiers incorporated with illuminating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    642+  for lenses, per se, and  subclasses 838+ for mirrors, per se.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 191 for a reflecting or
    magnifying element combined with an indicating tube type thermometer, and
    subclass 193 for an indicating tube type thermometer in which the tube has
    a cross section causing it to act as an optical element.


CLS 73/328
TXT Glasses under subclass 323 of the type commonly employed in boiler
    installations and comprising a tubular conduit, transparent at least in
    part, connected at one end to the space above the liquid in the reservoir
    and at the other end to the reservoir below the normal liquid level so that
    the pressures on the liquid in the reservoir and gauge may be equalized.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    293     and 326, for boiler type glasses equipped with guards or casings.

    297,    for boiler glasses combined with water columns.

    299+,   for sight glass structure, in hydrostatic pressure gauges.

    747+,   for U-tube pressure gauges.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, principally subclasses 238+, for packed
    boiler glass joints, per se.


CLS 73/329
TXT Gauges under subclass 328 comprising a plurality of transparent portions
    connected either seriatim for use in determining levels at  different
    ranges, or in multiple so that they may be selectively employed to indicate
    over the same range.


CLS 73/330
TXT Boiler gauges under subclass 328 wherein the transparent portion is in the
    form of at least one closure mounted over an aperture in the tubular
    conduit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334,    for similar closures mounted directly upon the reservoir wall.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 377+, 602 and 662+ see the notes thereto,
    for structures wherein a transparent panel is mounted in a wall.


CLS 73/331
TXT Gauges under subclass 330 wherein the transparent closure means is in the
    form of one or more disks commonly called "bull's eyes".


CLS 73/332
TXT Boiler type glasses under subclass 328 wherein improvements are claimed in
    the manner in which the glasses are provided with valves.  The valves are
    usually manipulable so that the transparent portion may be cleaned by
    blowing off steam therethrough or whereby the transparent portion may be
    isolated from the reservoir to permit replacement of the transparent
    section.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 559 for sight glasses combined with valves
    or other fluid handling apparatus.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, appropriate subclasses for hand
    manipulable valves, per se.


CLS 73/333
TXT Boiler type glasses under subclass 332 having provision for automatically
    closing the valves to isolate the transparent section when breakage occurs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 329.1 and 329.2+ for automatic gauge
    valves, per se, and subclasses 455+ for valves which are responsive to
    change in line condition.


CLS 73/334
TXT Glasses under subclass 323 mounted directly over an opening in the wall of
    a container or reservoir.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    330,    for similar transparent closure plates mounted over apertures in
    tubes.

    427+,   for graduated measuring vessels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 377+, 602 and 662+ see the notes thereto,
    for structures wherein a transparent panel is mounted in a wall.


CLS 73/335.01
TXT With optical element:

    Subject matter under subclass 29.02 including a device which changes its
    optical property in response to  radiant energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54.13,  for determining viscosity by measuring a time interval of travel or
    flow rate using an  orifice, nozzle, or extrusion means wherein there is
    disclosed detail of a means whose optical character changes due to a change
    in a physical phenomenon associated with the liquid whose viscosity is
    being measured.

    866.5,  for a sensor means, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, appropriate subclasses for a photocell detector,
    per se, subclasses 564+ for circuits for evaluating a liquid by means of
    measuring invisible light which has been modified as a result of the
    irradiation of the liquid thereby and subclasses 573+ for an optical or
    pre-optical system having a liquid in the  path thereof wherein the
    modification of or the emission of radiant energy resulting from the
    irradiation of the liquid is tested.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 438+ for an apparatus or
    a process for determining the moisture content of a gas by measuring
    visible light transmission or absorption and involving no other
    manipulation other than that necessary for an optical test for Class 356.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Element, appropriate
    subclass, for an detector, per se.


CLS 73/335.02
TXT With electric circuitry or electric circuit component detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 29.02 wherein significance is attributed to
    an electric circuit arrangement or to an electric circuit component having
    a parameter which is varied due to the effect of the humidity thereon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for a
    device wherein the atmosphere or gas changes in electrical conductance in
    response to humidity and such property is taken as a measure of humidity.
    Where no electrical property of the material under test is measured but an
    additional element is exposed to the material to have its electrical
    properties affected by a physical property of the material and an
    electrical property of the additional element is measured, the art is in
    Class 73, Measuring and Testing.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 35 for electrical resistors whose
    resistance value is responsive to humidity or change in humidity.


CLS 73/335.03
TXT Impedance:

    Subject matter under subclass 335.02 wherein the parameter is the impedance
    of the circuit or the circuit component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 600+ for an
    apparatus or process for determining the moisture content of a material by
    measuring impedance, admittance or a related quantity of the material and
    particularly subclasses 664 and 689 for determining the moisture content of
    a material by measuring the resistance or the conductivity of a material in
    order to measure its moisture content.


CLS 73/335.04
TXT Capacitance:

    Subject matter under subclass 335.03 wherein the parameter is the
    capacitance of the circuit or of the component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 664 and 689 for
    determining the water content of a material by measuring the capacitance of
    the material.


CLS 73/335.05
TXT Resistance or conductivity:

    Subject matter under subclass 335.03 wherein the parameter is either
    resistance or conductivity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 691+ for an
    apparatus for determining the moisture content of a material by measuring
    the resistance or the conductivity of the material.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 35 for an electrical resistor whose
    resistance value is responsive to humidity or change in humidity.


CLS 73/335.06
TXT Wet and dry responsive elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 29.02 wherein determination is made by
    measuring the  difference in the temperature of aell detectors, per se,
    reduced by evaporation of a liquid and the temperature of a dry member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 28 for a dew point
    measuring, per se, subclass 109 for a temperature measurement involving a
    composite climate-temperature related measurement and subclasses 142+ for a
    combination of a hygrometer and temperature measuring device.


CLS 73/335.07
TXT With direct readout or calculator detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 335.06 wherein significance is attributed to
    either means for providing at an immediate glance a single observation of
    the difference in the temperature  of the wet responsive element and the
    dry responsive element or to means manipulated in such a manner as to
    provide at an immediate glance a single observation of the difference in
    the temperature of the wet responsive element and the temperature of the
    dry responsive element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, appropriate subclass for a register, per se, for
    detecting the relative humidity from a psychrometer reading or for a
    register combined with conventional nominally recited elements of
    hygrometer.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 509
    and 550+ for an electrical computer or a data processing system, per se,
    for a hygrometer or in combination with a conventional hygrometric element
    recited in name only.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counter, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclasses 9+ for a pulse counter, per se, for a
    hygrometer or the combination of a conventional hygrometric element recited
    in name only.


CLS 73/335.08
TXT Wet bulb detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 335.06 wherein significance is attributed to
    the member whose temperature is reduced by evaporation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 28 for a dew point
    hygrometer with a wet responsive member detail.


CLS 73/335.09
TXT Relative air motion creating means (e.g., sling psychrometer):

    Subject matter under subclass 335.08 including means which causes air or
    another type gas to pass over the wet responsive member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    454,    Ventilation, appropriate subclass for ventilation means, per se.


CLS 73/335.11
TXT Expanding-sorption element:

    Subject matter under subclass 29.02 wherein significance is attributed to a
    humidity responsive means which expands in response to absorbing moisture.


CLS 73/335.12
TXT Coiled or twisted:

    Subject matter under subclass 335.11 wherein the humidity responsive means
    comprises a hygroscopic material attached to a circular or spiral shaped
    member which winds or unwinds due to changed in dimensions in the
    hygroscopic material in response to absorption of humidity.


CLS 73/335.13
TXT Arcuate or elongated:

    Subject matter under subclass 335.11 wherein the humidity responsive means
    comprises a member which changes in shape from a straight form to either a
    spiral lying in a substantially single plane or to a convex or a concave
    form upon absorption of humidity.


CLS 73/335.14
TXT Tensioned:

    Subject matter under subclass 335.11 including means for stretching tightly
    the humidity responsive means.


CLS 73/379.01
TXT MUSCULAR FORCE (E.G., STRENGTH TESTING, EXERCISING OR TRAINING EFFORT,
    ETC.):

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising an apparatus or method
    for determining a force exerted by a living being.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    760+,   for stress or strain measuring, or measuring by using stress or
    strain.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclass for a mechanical alarm
    which produces a humanly perceptible signal in response to a predetermined
    force; especially, subclass 212 for a similar indicator which is responsive
    to the presence or absence of stress.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 573 for an electrical
    indicator which produces a humanly perceptible signal in response to the
    attainment  of a predetermined condition of a human being or an animal and
    subclass 665 for an electrical indicator which produces a humanly
    perceptible signal in response to the attainment of a predetermined
    mechanical force.

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, subclasses 131+ for a golf
    practice device having force-measuring means and subclasses 422+ for a
    practice or training device for a playing field or court game (e.g.,
    baseball, football, tennis, etc.) which may include a force-measuring means.

    482,    Exercise Devices, subclasses 92+ for means upon which muscular
    strength may be exerted, but not provided with indicators movable in
    proportion to the force exerted, and subclasses 114+ for a user manipulated
    force resisting mechanism or element.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 587+ for measuring a force exerted by a living
    being in order to determine a health condition of the living being.

    601,    Surgery:  Kinesitherapy, subclasses 23+ for exercising appliances.


CLS 73/379.02
TXT Jaw or hand (e.g., gripping, pinching, or biting):

    Subject matter under subclass 379.01 wherein the force is exerted by either
    a muscle controlling a jaw or by a muscle controlling a hand of the living
    being.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 68+ for means for recording or indicating jaw
    movement or position.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 587+ for a device for measuring a force exerted
    by a jaw or a hand for diagnosing a condition of the body.

    601,    Surgery:  Kinesitherapy, subclass 40 for an exercising appliance
    for a hand or a finger.


CLS 73/379.03
TXT Using a resilient force-resister:

    Subject matter under subclass 379.02 wherein the exerted force is applied
    to a movable component and an elastically deformable member is used to
    restrict or retard movement thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    862.621+, for measuring force by measuring elastic deformation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    482,    Exercise Devices, subclasses 92+ for a user manipulated
    force-resisting mechanism or element.


CLS 73/379.04
TXT Impact:

    Subject matter under subclass 379.01 wherein the force being determined is
    a sudden blow exerted by the living being.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.01,  for testing by impact, per se.

    862.381, for force measuring, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 203 for a device which indicates
    that an impact has occurred.


CLS 73/379.05
TXT Using a resilient force-resister:

    Subject matter under subclass 379.04 wherein the exerted force is applied
    to a movable component and an elastically deformable member is used to
    restrict or retard movement thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    862.621,         for measuring force by measuring elastic deformation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    482,    Exercise Devices, subclasses 92+ for an exercising device which
    includes a user manipulated force-resisting mechanism or element.


CLS 73/379.06
TXT Including a rotary element with a braking means (e.g., friction brake):

    Subject matter under subclass 379.01 wherein the exerted force drives a
    rotatable member and a brake is used to resist rotation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, appropriate subclass for a brake, per se.


CLS 73/379.07
TXT Pedal driven (e.g., cycle ergometer):

    Subject matter under subclass 379.06 wherein the rotatable member is driven
    by a pedal to which the exerted force is applied.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    482,    Exercise Devices, subclasses 57+ for a bicycle-type exercising
    device.


CLS 73/379.08
TXT Using a resilient force-resister:

    Subject matter under subclass 379.01 wherein the exerted force is applied
    to a movable component and an elastically deformable member is used to
    restrict or retard movement thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    862.621, for measuring force by measuring elastic deformation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    482,    Exercise Devices, subclasses 92+ for an exercising device which
    includes a user manipulated force-resisting mechanism or element.


CLS 73/379.09
TXT Using hydraulic or pneumatic force-resister:

    Subject matter under subclass 379.01 wherein the exerted force is applied
    to a movable component and a fluid is used to restrict or retard movement
    thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    862.581, for a force measuring device utilizing fluid pressure.


CLS 73/382
TXT Subject matter under the class definition for determining the force of
    gravity by direct measurement or by comparison or by determining
    acceleration caused by gravity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    434,    Education and Demonstration  subclasses 300+, for apparatus for
    demonstrating gravitational force but wherein no measurement is taken.


CLS 73/383
TXT Subject matter under subclass 382 in the form of torsion balances wherein
    masses mounted upon a beam transit a force to a wire supporting the beam to
    produce a torque in said wire proportional to the gravitational force.
    These are frequently called Eotvos type balances.


CLS 73/384
TXT Barometers under the class definition, i.e., devices for determining
    atmospheric pressure whether calibrated in units of barometric pressure or
    altitude.

    (1)     Note.  Altimeters (other than the barometric type) are classified
    in other classes in accordance with the means employed to make the distance
    measurement, see the notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    700+,   for other pressure gauges, and see the notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments.

    181,    Acoustics, subclass 124, for mechanical sound echo altimeters.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 99+ for sound echo altimeters.


CLS 73/385
TXT Barometers under subclass 384 in which a mercury column is displaced by
    changes in atmospheric pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    747+,   for U-tube, liquid column pressure gauges.


CLS 73/386
TXT Barometers under subclass 384 in which the pressure responsive element is
    in the form of an exhausted container having a wall or portion thereof
    movable with pressure changes.


CLS 73/387
TXT Barometers under subclass 386 having means for adjusting the setting of the
    indicator.

    (1)     Note.  These are frequently used on aircraft as altimeters, the
    zero point being set for the actual pressure existing at a landing field,
    without regard to altitude of the air field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    740,    for Bourbon type fluid pressure gauges having setting features.


CLS 73/426
TXT Devices under the class definition for receiving bulk material for the
    purpose of measurement of volume (e.g., measuring cups, measuring spoons,
    and similar devices).  The indication of the quantity of material may
    consist only in the measure being full or only a single mark or level
    indication may be provided.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 128, 141, 147, 149, 150, and 324 for spoons.

    222,    Dispensing, and see the notes thereto for means for discharging
    measured quantities from a supply and for measuring vessels provided with
    claimed features which have the disclosed function of performing a
    dispensing operation.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 55 for scoops.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 99+ for laboratory apparatus.



            An alternative electronic search of U.S. patents based upon a
    modification of the European Patent Office Classification (ECLA) System for
    certain subject matter in this subclass may also be found in Class 422
    Cross-Reference Art Collections 908 - 948. (There are no definitions
    associated with these Cross-Reference Art Collections. The most available
    disclosure as to the types of documents contained herein is given in any
    notes associated with the titles.)

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 238+ for shaping apparatus comprising a dough divider including
    a shaping chamber and subclasses 276+ for an ice cream scoop type of
    measuring and shaping means.


CLS 73/427
TXT Measuring vessels under subclass 426 provided with two or more calibrations
    or other means to indicate the quantity of material in the measure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 365+ for those having indicating means.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 154+ for those having means for permitting
    inspection of the amount of material within the dispenser, many having
    graduations.


CLS 73/428
TXT Measuring vessels under subclass 427 in which the indicating means is
    readily removable from the container in which the material to be measured
    is received.


CLS 73/429
TXT Measuring vessels under subclass 426 in which the vessel is provided with
    movable bottom or other means to alter the size of the vessel to adapt it
    when filled to measure material in units of volume depending upon the
    amount of adjustment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 4.01+ for sectional receptacles whose
    capacity may be adjusted.


CLS 73/430
TXT Subject matter under the class definition directed to the dampening of
    vibrations within the mechanisms of instruments to effect a steady
    indication.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    514.12+, for fluid or fluent material dampening of inertial element in an
    acceleration measuring apparatus.

    514.14, for vibration dampening in an inertial-type acceleration measuring
    apparatus.

    739,    for Bourdon tube fluid pressure gauges with dampening means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 297+ for a dashpot or shock absorber of general
    utility.


CLS 73/431
TXT Casing structures for instruments under the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201,    for meter boxes.

    273,    for volume or rate of flow meter    casings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 27.1+ support instruments in panels.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 276+ for
    clock and watch cases.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 208 for housings or
    supports, per se, which are peculiarly adapted for thermal measuring or
    testing instruments.


CLS 73/432.1
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition not provided for elsewhere.


CLS 73/433
TXT Devices under subclass 32 including a weighing feature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    177,    Weighing Scales, appropriate subclasses, for weighing structure of
    general utility.


CLS 73/434
TXT Devices under subclass 433 with means to continuously supply or circulate
    fluid under test.


CLS 73/435
TXT Devices under subclass 433 having plural supports for the specimen whereby
    different determinations are independently or successively made.


CLS 73/436
TXT Devices under subclass 435 in which the specimen holders are suspended
    vertically from a common support.


CLS 73/437
TXT Devices under subclass 433 involving the immersion of a solid in a liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    435,    for plural supports one of which provides for submersion of a solid
    in a liquid.


CLS 73/438
TXT Devices under subclass 32 operating on the principle of measurement of the
    hydrostatic pressure of a fixed head of test material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    299+,   for similar art where the density is constant and the hydrostatic
    pressure is an index of liquid level.


CLS 73/439
TXT Devices under subclass 438 having a submerged tube from which escape gas
    bubbles, the resistance to which is a measure of the specific gravity of
    the submerging liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302,    for similar devices for measuring liquid level.


CLS 73/440
TXT Devices under subclass 32 involving a plurality of floats of different
    densities for seriatim response.


CLS 73/441
TXT Devices under subclass 32 including a chamber of barrel, usually
    transparent, containing a free float, and hand manipulable means to draw
    the test fluid into the chamber.


CLS 73/442
TXT Devices under subclass 441 including a thermometer subjected to the fluid
    under test for use in correcting the float reading.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 156 for a float supported
    thermometer, in general.


CLS 73/443
TXT Devices under subclass 442 including calculator mechanism or chart means
    for computing corrected reading, for predicting freezing  temperature of
    the test liquid or amount of antifreeze required to protect to a certain
    temperature.


CLS 73/444
TXT Devices under subclass 32 comprising a vertically reciprocable float, with
    or without guides, the movement of which is uninhibited by spring, weight
    beam, indicator actuation or other load.

    (1)     Note.  In apparatus of this subclass the float usually has a
    co-axial indicator stem or reference indicium which is read relative to the
    surface of the liquid or other base point or the position of the float as a
    whole may be visually observed.


CLS 73/445
TXT Devices under subclass 444 wherein provision is made for the continuous
    supply or circulation of test fluid to the float unit.


CLS 73/446
TXT Devices under subclass 444 having means to draw test fluid into a chamber
    containing the float.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    441,    for portable syringe type devices.


CLS 73/447
TXT Devices under subclass 444 having liquid level responsive means to indicate
    liquid level or to adjust the hydrometer reading in accordance with varying
    liquid level.


CLS 73/448
TXT Devices under subclass 444 comprising a float unit, per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305+,   for a float for measurement of liquid level.

    322.5,  for float structure, per se.


CLS 73/449
TXT Devices under subclass 448 including thermometer or thermal compensation
    element carried by the float.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    442+,   for syringe type apparatus with thermometers.


CLS 73/450
TXT Devices under subclass 448 wherein the float includes means for attaching,
    carrying or receiving the specimen under test.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclass 207, for a weigher employing the lifting
    effect of a liquid on a displacing body.


CLS 73/451
TXT Devices under subclass 32 wherein a float operates or controls an indicator
    apart from the float itself.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305+,   for a float responsive to liquid level operating a separate
    indicator.


CLS 73/452
TXT Devices under subclass 451 with means to continuously supply or circulate
    fluid under test to the float.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    434     and 445, for similar supply means on other types of specific
    gravity testers.


CLS 73/453
TXT Devices under subclass 451 having electrical means associated with the
    float for indicating the specific gravity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 33, for electrical resistors with a
    float actuator.


CLS 73/454
TXT Devices under subclass 451 wherein the float is pivotally mounted.


CLS 73/455
TXT Subject matter under subclass 66 relating to propellers, impellers, and
    fluid couplings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147,    for a study of aerodynamic and hydrodynamic properties of
    propellers and impellers.


CLS 73/456
TXT Subject matter under subclass 455 in which the object under study consists
    of a single propeller blade.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65.01+, for analogous art pertaining to the determination of the center of
    gravity and turning moments of bodies.


CLS 73/457
TXT Subject matter under subclass 66 in which study of the rotor unbalance is
    made without removing the device from its normally operative position.


CLS 73/458
TXT Subject matter under subclass 457 wherein the rotor unbalance is determined
    by imposing known counterbalance effects thereon, neutralizing said rotor
    unbalance.


CLS 73/459
TXT Subject matter under subclass 66 combining successively static balancing
    (poising) and dynamic (spinning) operations.


CLS 73/460
TXT Subject matter under subclass 66 for determination of rotor unbalance by
    spinning the same and studying its vibratory effects.


CLS 73/461
TXT Subject matter under subclass 460 wherein the object is rotated to locate
    end points on the rotor where the axis of rotation and the axis of gyration
    of the rotor coincide.


CLS 73/462
TXT Subject matter under subclass 460 comprising electrical sensing and
    indicating means.


CLS 73/463
TXT Subject matter under subclass 462 including a wattmeter.


CLS 73/464
TXT Subject matter under subclass 462 including a rotatable switch or
    commutator means energized by vibration pick-up means.


CLS 73/465
TXT Subject matter under subclass 462 comprising a cathode ray oscilloscope.


CLS 73/466
TXT Subject matter under subclass 462 wherein there is included stroboscopic
    illuminating means.


CLS 73/467
TXT Subject matter under subclass 466 comprising a stroboscope for illuminating
    said indicator.


CLS 73/468
TXT Subject matter under subclass 460 wherein rotor unbalance is determined by
    application of known counterbalancing forces sufficient to neutralize the
    innate unbalance of the rotor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    458,    for similar unbalance determinations concerning rotors in situ.


CLS 73/469
TXT Subject matter under subclass 468 including a test counterbalance weight of
    known value adjustable radially of its axis of rotation.


CLS 73/470
TXT Subject matter under subclass 468 where a weight of known value is
    adjustable circumferentially of the rotor under test.


CLS 73/471
TXT Subject matter under subclass 460 comprising special vibratable features of
    the support in which the rotor is held while under test.


CLS 73/472
TXT Subject matter under subclass 471 wherein the mount supports the rotor with
    both ends of the rotor free to wabble under unbalance.


CLS 73/473
TXT Subject matter under subclass 472 wherein means is provided for mounting
    the test rotor on a horizontal axis.


CLS 73/474
TXT Subject matter under subclass 471 wherein there is means for mounting the
    rotor with one end of the rotor free to gyrate under unbalance, thus
    permitting the free end of the rotor to tilt universally.  The axis of
    rotation is usually vertical.


CLS 73/475
TXT Subject matter under subclass 471 wherein means is provided for mounting
    the test rotor on a horizontal axis, while usually permitting vibration in
    a single plane.


CLS 73/476
TXT Devices under subclass 475 which vibrate horizontally about a vertical
    fulcrum.


CLS 73/477
TXT Subject matter under subclass 476 wherein provision is made for mounting
    the test rotor to vibrate substantially in a single plane, with both ends
    of the rotor free to partake of vibration.


CLS 73/478
TXT Subject matter under subclass 477 including selective end locks for
    restriction of vibration of either end of the rotor as desired.


CLS 73/479
TXT Subject matter under subclass 475 wherein provision is made for permitting
    vibration thereof vertically about a horizontal fulcrum.


CLS 73/480
TXT Subject matter under subclass 66 wherein the rotor is mounted with its spin
    axis horizontal and any gravitational moment resulting from an unbalanced
    distribution of mass causes the rotor to turn about its normal rotational
    or spin axis.


CLS 73/481
TXT Subject matter under subclass 480 wherein the rotor mounting means are of
    the nature of ways, tracks or parallel knife edges.


CLS 73/482
TXT Subject matter under subclass 66 wherein the rotor is mounted with its spin
    axis vertical and any gravitational moment resulting from an unbalanced
    distribution of mass causes the rotor to tilt about an axis transverse to
    its rotational or spin axis.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the rotor is supported by horizontally spaced
    mounts, as knife edges, which restricts the direction of tilt to a single
    plane.


CLS 73/483
TXT Subject matter under subclass 482 wherein the rotor is so freely supported
    that the gravitational moment selects the axis about which the rotor tilts.


CLS 73/484
TXT Subject matter under subclass 483 including tapered or conical rotor
    centering means.


CLS 73/485
TXT Subject matter under subclass 483 including expansible or contractible
    rotor centering means.


CLS 73/486
TXT Subject matter under subclass 483 wherein the test rotor is pendently
    supported by a flexible element, gimbals or equivalent suspension means.


CLS 73/487
TXT Tools and adjuncts under subclass 66 used in the determination of rotor
    unbalance and not elsewhere classifiable.


CLS 73/488
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising a process or an
    apparatus for detecting or determining either (a) a time rate of change of
    position of a body (speed or velocity) or (b) a change in the time rate of
    change of speed or velocity of a body (acceleration).

    (1)     Note.  A process or an apparatus for  determining or measuring
    direction of motion not elsewhere classified is found here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.37+,  for proving or calibrating a device which determines speed,
    velocity, or acceleration.

    121+,   for vehicle brake testing.

    167+,   for testing of a projectile.

    178+,   for a navigational instrument.

    652+,   for apparatus for sensing vibrations by an inertial element.

    861+,   for means measuring rate of flow of a  fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 231 and 232, for
    straight-line-light ray sighting instruments involving speed; subclasses
    300+, for direction sensing and indicating instruments which may involve
    speed, particularly subclasses 318+ wherein a gyroscope is utilized for
    controlling or stabilizing purposes; and subclasses 391+ for pendulums
    which may respond to and be calibrated in terms of acceleration.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 3 for a speed controlled
    trip.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 435 and see the search
    there noted for expansible chamber motors involving speed control.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 37 for an indicator of vehicle
    speed and direction; subclass 57 for a vehicle speed limit indicator;
    subclass 74 for a speed limit alarm; and subclasses 200+ for a speed limit
    indicator.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 319+ for a speed regulator
    particularly associated with an internal combustion engine, and subclasses
    364+ and 441 for a governor controlled charge forming device.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 38+ for flow control by response to
    inertia of the system; and subclasses 47+ for a speed responsive valve.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 151.1 and 154.3 for an apparatus to cast
    metal in combination with a speed sensor.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 170+ for a motor vehicle having means
    which is responsive to its speed for regulating the vehicle's rate of
    travel.

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 180+ for a speed responsive brake.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass .02 for automatic control
    of a motor and clutch by speed, and subclass 103 for a speed responsive
    clutch.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.45+ for an
    inertia or tilt switch and subclass 80 for a centrifugal switch.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclass 182 for a railway speed
    control system.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling force,
    subclass 267 for a speed control particularly associated with a drum of a
    cable hoist.

    303,    Fluid-Pressure and Analogous Brake Systems, subclasses 121+ for
    speed responsive means particularly associated with a fluid-pressure brake
    system.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 66+ for running
    speed control of plural electric motors; subclasses 90+ for acceleration
    control of plural motors; subclasses 255+ for diverse motor controls
    including speed control; and subclasses 461+ for speed control and/or
    starting or stopping.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclasses 29+ for electric
    generator speed control means.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 160+ for electrical
    speed measuring.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 670+ for an electrical
    signal or alarm responsive to speed.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 27+ for velocity or
    velocity and height measuring devices, and subclass 29 for devices with a
    optical element or reticule which respond to the relative velocity of a
    remote object.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 236+ for
    an electrical speed responsive system.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 565,
    and 566, respectively, for determining speed and acceleration which involve
    a significant computation.

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, subclasses 800+ and 825+ for
    single motor running-speed control systems with, and without feedback,
    respectively.

    417,    Pumps, subclass 293 for a speed responsive device particularly
    associated with a pump.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 40+ for speed
    controlled rotary expansible chamber devices.


CLS 73/489
TXT Apparatus under subclass 488 wherein the interaction of two measured
    variables is recorded.


CLS 73/490
TXT Apparatus under subclass 488 including means for registering distance
    traveled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclass 95 for an odometer, per se.


CLS 73/491
TXT Apparatus under subclass 488 including means whereby indicia of the speed
    responsive device hold a reading.


CLS 73/492
TXT Apparatus under subclass 491 wherein the reading retained is that of
    maximum acceleration.


CLS 73/493
TXT Apparatus under subclass 488 in which a speed responsive device is
    installed in, or has means mounting it on, an element of a disparate
    function device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128     and 129, for means for attaching a brake testing device to a
    vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 435 and see the search
    there noted for expansible chamber motors with speed governors.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 319+ for a speed regulator
    installed on an internal combustion engine.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 170+ as explained in the reference
    thereto appearing in subclass 488 above.

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclasses 373+ for a speed controlled brake installed on an elevator.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 27.1+ for instrument mounting means of more
    general application.

    388,    Electricity:   Motor Control Systems, art collections 923+ for
    specific speed responsive feedback devices used with electric motors.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclasses 44+ for
    control means responsive to the rotation speed of an impeller.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, particularly subclasses 52+ for a flexible torque
    transmitting shaft and housing with means to couple said shaft and housing
    to an auxiliary housing.


CLS 73/494
TXT Apparatus under subclass 493 including a rotary element that is a
    functional part of both a speed responsive device and a disparate function
    device the speed of which is sensed.


CLS 73/495
TXT Apparatus under subclass 488 including indicators for different motion
    conditions, e.g., rate and direction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 37+ for speed controlled,
    vehicle motion and direction indicators.


CLS 73/496
TXT Apparatus under subclass 488 having means to minimize unsteadiness of the
    indicia which results from inertia, friction, elasticity, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    514.12, for fluid or fluent material dampening of an inertial element in an
    acceleration  measuring apparatus.

    514.14, for vibration dampening in an inertial-type acceleration measuring
    apparatus.

    739,    for vibration control means for pressure gauge indicia and subclass
    430 for miscellaneous instrument dampening means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 125 for means
    steadying the reading means of an electrical measuring and testing
    instrument.


CLS 73/497
TXT Speed sensitive device under subclass 488 which includes means to
    compensate for temperature change.


CLS 73/498
TXT Apparatus under subclass 488 including means by which an indicating element
    can be set or adjusted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    740,    for a dial or frame zeroizing adjustment for a pressure gauge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 198+ for adjustment of a
    mechanical temperature indicator.


CLS 73/499
TXT Apparatus under subclass 488 including means for illuminating an indicator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 23+ for a dial illumination.


CLS 73/500
TXT Apparatus under subclass 488 wherein a liquid surface actuates a speed
    condition reading means or itself indicates the speed value.


CLS 73/501
TXT Apparatus under subclass 500 wherein the indicating surface is that of a
    confined rotatable body of liquid.


CLS 73/502
TXT Apparatus under subclass 488 wherein pressure proportional to speed is
    communicated to a measuring device through a pipe external of the device.


CLS 73/503
TXT Apparatus under subclass 488 wherein speed valve is determined by means
    combining time and acceleration.


CLS 73/503.3
TXT Gyroscope:

    Subject matter under subclass 503 wherein the means for determining speed
    by integrating time and acceleration comprises a wheel or a disc mounted to
    spin rapidly about an axis of spin and also free to rotate about one or
    both of two axes perpendicular to each other and to the axis of spin so
    that a rotation of one of the two mutually perpendicular axes results from
    the application of torque to the other when the wheel is spinning.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    504.02+,for an angular velocity or acceleration measuring means using a
    gyroscopic effect.

    504.18  ,for speed and acceleration measuring means combined  with a
    gyroscope.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 5+ for a  gyroscope, per
    se, and especially subclass 5.43 for plural  gyroscopes, per se, subclasses
    5.37+ for a gyroscope control, and subclass 5.6 for a gyroscope, per se,
    having a pick off.


CLS 73/504.01
TXT Angular rate using wave or beam motion (e.g., Sagnac type):

    Subject matter under subclass 488 including means producing a wave or a
    beam and wherein the wave or beam is propagated about an axis of rotation
    and the  determination of the time rate of change in position of the body
    is made by measuring a parameter (e.g., phase) of the wave or beam.

    (1)     Note.  The waves of this subclass includes acoustic, electron,
    entropy, ionic, electromagnetic waves, or  microwaves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    514.28, for measuring acceleration of a body by  modifying a change in a
    characteristic of a surface acoustical wave in accordance with a change in
    a property of an inertial mass due to acceleration of the   body.

    570+,   for measuring or testing by vibration, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 350 for a ring laser
    gyroscope.


CLS 73/504.02
TXT Angular rate using gyroscopic or Coriolis effect:

    Subject matter under subclass 488 wherein the determination of the time
    rate of change in position of the body is made by (1) rotating or (2)
    linearly moving an inertial element with respect to the body and measuring
    reaction forces on the element produced by rotation of the body about an
    axis of rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    503.3,  for a gyroscope for determining speed by integrating time and
    acceleration.

    504.17  for measuring angular rate by use of a fluid vortex rate sensor.

    504.18, for a speed, velocity, or acceleration measuring means combined
    with gyroscopic means.

    514.39, for magnetic angular rate measuring apparatus not using a
    gyroscopic effect and wherein the magnetic means does not produce an
    electric signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 316+, for gyromagnetic compass
    and subclasses 318+ for gyroscopically controlled or stabilized geometrical
    instrument.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 5+ for a gyroscope, per se.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 79, for gyroscope actuated aircraft control,
    subclass 165 for a gyroscopic attitude control for a spacecraft.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 231.12 for photocell apparatus comprising
    a gyroscopic light valve.

    318,    Electricity: Motive Power Systems, subclasses 648+ for a gyroscope
    used in platform stabilization.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 671 for an electrical
    indicating system providing a humanly perceptible signal   in response to a
    predetermined angular velocity and including a gyroscope and wherein no
    quantitative indication of measurement is provided.

    356,    Optics: Measuring and Testing, subclass 350 for a ring laser
    gyroscope.


CLS 73/504.03
TXT Multisensor for both angular rate and linear acceleration:

    Subject matter under subclass 504.02 wherein the  inertial element also has
    an intrinsic or relational property which changes in response to
    acceleration of the body along a straight line and which can be used to
    measure the acceleration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    491,    for a mechanical speed or acceleration measuring apparatus or
    method including means retaining a reading of maximum acceleration.

    510,    for a separate motion sensor in a mechanical speed measuring
    apparatus.

    514.01, for an apparatus using an inertial element for determining
    acceleration, per se.

    652,    for an apparatus sensing vibrations by use of an inertial element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 28+ for a mechanical indicator
    means, per se, which provides a humanly perceptible signal in response to
    acceleration and has no quantitative measuring means.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 329 for an
    inertia operated mechanical energy coupling means for a piezoelectric
    element or device.

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclass 162 for electrical
    speed measuring means including an electrical  accelerometer which senses
    acceleration by means other than an inertial element.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 669 for an electrical
    indicator which provides a humanly perceptible signal  in response to a
    predetermined acceleration and wherein no indication of a quantitative
    measurement is provided.

    356,    Optics: Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclass for the
    determination of acceleration by measuring visible light.

    361,    Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 280+ for an
    acceleration responsive capacitor.


CLS 73/504.04
TXT Vibratory mass:

    Subject matter under subclass 504.03 wherein the inertial member is caused
    to rapidly reciprocate or oscillate about an axis of motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    504.12+, for measuring the angular velocity, per se, of a body by means of
    measuring gyroscopic or Coriolis effects on a vibratory inertial mass.

    514.15, for measuring acceleration by use of a vibratory inertial member.

    514.21+,for measuring acceleration by utilizing a pendulum-type inertia
    element combined with rebalance means.

    514.29  ,for measuring acceleration by use of a vibrating sensor.

    514.36+,for measuring acceleration by means of a pendulum-type inertia
    element having no rebalance means.

    570+,   for measuring or testing by vibration, per se.


CLS 73/504.05
TXT Fluid or fluent inertial mass (e.g., electrons, ions, plasma):

    Subject matter under subclass 504.02 wherein the inertial member comprises
    a liquid or a gaseous body or a plurality of particles exhibiting fluent
    characteristics.

    (1)     Note. Included here as a plurality of particles are electrons,
    ions, plasma, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    514.03, for a fluid or fluent inertial mass having a property which changes
    in response to an angular acceleration of a body and which can be used to
    measure acceleration.

    514.05+,for a fluid or fluent inertial member whose property changes in
    response to acceleration of a body and which  property change can be used
    to measure acceleration.


CLS 73/504.06
TXT Fluid jet:

    Subject matter under subclass 504.05 wherein the fluid inertial mass
    comprises a high velocity liquid or gaseous stream emitted through a narrow
     opening (e. g. nozzle).


CLS 73/504.07
TXT Rotary:

    Subject matter under 504.05 wherein the fluid inertial mass is caused to
    spin about an axis.


CLS 73/504.08
TXT Rotary gyroscope:

    Subject matter under subclass 504.02 wherein the inertial member is caused
    to spin about an axis so as to comprise the spinning element of a gyroscope.


CLS 73/504.09
TXT Gimbal support:

    Subject matter under subclass 504.08 comprising a ring element which
    supports the inertial member and permits the spin axis to precess about an
    axis perpendicular to the spin axis in response to angular rotation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, for a support, per se.


CLS 73/504.11
TXT Flexible rotor or flexibly mounted rotor:

    Subject matter under subclass 504.08 wherein the inertial member comprises
    a rotor which either (a) bends within its elastic limit or (b) is supported
    by structure which bends within its elastic limit.


CLS 73/504.12
TXT Vibratory mass:

    Subject matter under subclass 504.02 wherein the inertial member is caused
    to rapidly reciprocate or oscillate  about an axis of motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    504.04, for a multisensor using a vibratory inertial mass for determination
    of both angular rate and linear acceleration by use of a gyroscopic or
    Coriolis effect.

    514.15, for measuring acceleration by use of a vibratory inertial element.

    514.21, for measuring acceleration by use of a pendulum-type inertia
    element wherein rebalance is recited.

    514.29, for measuring acceleration by use of a vibratory sensor and
    utilizing an inertial mass.

    514.36, for measuring acceleration by use of a pendulum-type inertia
    element wherein no rebalance is recited.

    570+,   for testing by vibration, per se.


CLS 73/504.13
TXT Hollow circular-shaped inertial element:

    Subject matter under subclass 504.12 wherein the inertial member comprises
    an object having an annular-cross section.


CLS 73/504.14
TXT Elongated element with spaced supports:

    Subject matter under subclass 504.12 wherein the inertial member comprises
    an extended member supported at at least two points along its extent by
    means for bearing weight.


CLS 73/504.15
TXT Cantilever:

    Subject matter under subclass 504.12 wherein the inertial member comprises
    an elongated member having two ends and wherein only one of the ends is
    fixed.


CLS 73/504.16
TXT Tuning fork:

    Subject matter under subclass 504.15 wherein the inertial member comprises
    a pair of cantilevered members which are connected to each other so as to
    form a tuning-fork-shaped structure.


CLS 73/504.17
TXT Angular rate using a fluid vortex rate sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 488 wherein the determination of the rate of
    change of position of the body about an axis is made by measuring vortical
    motion of a liquid or gaseous mass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    861.22+,for determining a volume or rate of flow of a fluid or fluent
    material by measuring vibration produced by an  interaction of the material
    with a vortex shredder.


CLS 73/504.18
TXT With rotary gyroscope:

    Subject matter under subclass 488 including speed, velocity, or
    acceleration measuring combined with a wheel or a disc mounted to spin
    rapidly about an axis and also free to rotate about one or both of two axes
    perpendicular to each other and to the axis of spin.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    503.3,  for determining speed or velocity by utilizing a gyroscope
    integrating time and acceleration.

    504.02+,for measuring angular rate by use of a gyroscope.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 316+ for a gyromagnetic
    compass, subclasses 318+ for a gyroscopically  controlled or stabilized
    geometric instrument for indicating a direction of force traversing natural
    media, and subclass 329 for a gyroscope mounted lever indicator.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 5+ for a gyroscope, per
    se, and especially subclass 5.43 for plural gyroscopes, subclasses 5.37+
    for a gyroscope control, and subclass 5.6 for a gyroscope with a pick off.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 79, for gyroscopically actuated aircraft
    control, subclass 165 for a gyroscopic attitude control for a spacecraft.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 231.12 for photocell apparatus comprising
    a gyroscopic light valve and subclass 233 for  photocell circuit having a
    rotary light chopper-type light valve.

    318,    Electricity: Motive Power Systems, subclasses 648+ for a gyroscope
    used in platform stabilization.


CLS 73/506
TXT Apparatus under subclass 488 including means for producing a speed
    measurement from successive impulses from the speed source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    649+,   for vibration sensing apparatus.


CLS 73/507
TXT Apparatus under subclass 488 for comparing the speed of one device with
    that of another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.37,   for means proving or calibrating a speed, velocity, or acceleration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 68+ for the relative
    speed control of plural electric motors.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 161 for an electrical
    device for measuring speed by comparison to a reference.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 242+ for
    the synchronization of shafts by electrical means.

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, subclasses 800+ for single
    motor running-speed control systems with feedback.

    416,    Fluid Reacting Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclass 35 for
    electrical control means comparing and reducing error related to a preset
    datum.


CLS 73/508
TXT Apparatus under subclass 488 including means whereby the movement normally
    imparted by the speed responsive element is modified by a means responsive
    to the failure of the drive for the speed responsive element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 52 for a speed controlled valve responsive
    to governor drive failure.


CLS 73/509
TXT Apparatus under subclass 488 including a sensing device effected by a
    condition additional to speed or rate of change of speed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 26+ for a prime mover controlled speed
    and another condition and subclasses 51+ for a valve controlled by speed
    and another condition.


CLS 73/510
TXT Apparatus under subclass 488 having more than one speed condition sensor or
    means responding to more than one speed condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    504.03, for a multisensor for determination of angular rate using
    gyroscopic or Coriolis effect combined with a determination of linear
    acceleration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 27 for a prime mover and subclass 50 for a
    valve responsive to both speed change and excess speed.


CLS 73/511
TXT Apparatus under subclass 510 that responds to both speed and rate of change
    of speed.


CLS 73/512
TXT Apparatus under subclass 511 wherein the response of a speed sensor of the
    centrifugal weight type is modified by the action of a distinct inertial
    mass.


CLS 73/513
TXT Apparatus under subclass 488 providing for manual operation in certain
    speed ranges or substitution of manual for speed responsive operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    540+,   for centrifugal governors with adjusting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 319, per se, for an
    internal-combustion engine with selective manual or automatic speed control.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 18 for a prime mover with selective manual
    or automatic control and subclass 49 for a valve with selective manual or
    automatic speed control.


CLS 73/514.01
TXT Acceleration determination utilizing inertial element:

    Subject matter under subclass 488 comprising an inertial member having an
    intrinsic or relational property which changes in response to a rate of
    change of speed of a body and which can be used to measure acceleration.

    (1)     Note. An inertial sensor responsive to a rate of change in speed
    and not elsewhere classified is located here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    491,    for a speed, velocity, or acceleration measuring apparatus or
    method including means retaining a reading of maximum acceleration.

    503.3,  for determining velocity or speed by utilizing a gyroscope for
    integrating acceleration and time.

    504.03, for using gyroscopic or Coriolis effect on an inertial element to
    determine both angular rate and linear acceleration.

    652,    for an apparatus sensing vibrations by use of an inertial member.

    866.2,  for a process or an apparatus for measuring a time rate of change
    in a sensed condition not provided for elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 28+ for a mechanical indicator,
    per se, which provides a humanly perceptible  signal in response to
    acceleration and includes no quantitative measuring means.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 329 for an
    inertia operated mechanical energy coupling means for a piezoelectric
    element or device.

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclass 162 for electrical
    speed measuring means including an electrical  accelerometer which senses
    acceleration by means other than an inertial elements.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 669 for an electrical
    indicator or alarm providing a humanly perceptible signal   in response to
    a predetermined acceleration which provides no indication of a quantitative
    measurement is provided.

    356,    Optics: Measuring and Testing for an apparatus or a process for
    determining acceleration by measuring visible light.

    361,    Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 280+ for an
    acceleration responsive capacitor.


CLS 73/514.02
TXT Angular acceleration:

    Subject matter under subclass 514.01 wherein the relational or intrinsic
    property of the inertial element changes in response to time rate of change
    of direction, speed, or velocity of the body about an axis of rotation.


CLS 73/514.03
TXT Fluid or fluent inertial mass (e.g., electrons, ions, plasma):

    Subject matter under subclass 514.02 wherein the inertial member comprises
    a liquid or a gaseous body or a plurality of particles exhibiting fluent
    characteristics.

    (1)     Note. Included here as a plurality of particles are electrons,
    ions, plasma, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    504.05+,for the determination of angular rate of speed of a body by
    measuring a gyroscopic or Coriolis effect on a fluid or fluent inertial
    mass.

    514.05+,for utilizing an inertial element to determine linear acceleration
    including a fluid or fluent material and in particular subclass 514.09 for
    a fluid or fluent inertial mass whose property changes in response to
    linear acceleration of a body and can be used to measure acceleration.


CLS 73/514.04
TXT Inertial flywheel:

    Subject matter under subclass 514.02 wherein the inertial member whose
    property changes in response to acceleration comprises a wheel or disk
    rotatively mounted on a drive member and which is capable of angular
    displacement with respect to the drive member in order to measure angular
    acceleration of the drive member.


CLS 73/514.05
TXT Fluid or fluent material:

    Subject matter under subclass 514.01 including a liquid or a gaseous mass
    or a plurality of particles exhibiting fluent characteristics.


CLS 73/514.06
TXT Fluid or fluent material support of an inertial element:

    Subject matter under subclass 514.05 wherein the fluid or fluent material
    bears the weight of the  inertial member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 12 and 100+ for fluid bearings, per se.


CLS 73/514.07
TXT Gas:

    Subject matter under subclass 514.06 wherein the fluid or fluent support
    comprises a substance having a very low density and viscosity, a rather low
    expansion and contraction with changes in pressure and temperature, the
    ability to diffuse rapidly, and the spontaneous tendency to become
    distributed uniformly throughout a container.


CLS 73/514.08
TXT Magnetic fluid:

    Subject matter under subclass 514.06 wherein the fluid support comprises a
    liquid suspension of magnetic particles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 90.5 for a
    magnetic bearing, per se.


CLS 73/514.09
TXT Fluid or fluent inertial mass:

    Subject matter under subclass 514.05 wherein the inertial  member comprises
    the liquid or the gaseous mass or the plurality of particles exhibiting
    fluent characteristics.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    504.05+,for the determination of angular rate of speed of a body by
    measuring a gyroscopic or Coriolis effect of the angular rate of speed on a
    fluid or fluent inertial mass.

    514.03, for an inertial member whose property changes in response to an
    angular acceleration of a body and can be used  to measure acceleration.


CLS 73/514.11
TXT Detection by fluid pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 514.05  comprising sensing pressure of a
    fluid whose pressure varies in response to the change in the property of
    the inertial member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37+,    for other measuring means using pressurized fluid.

    700+,   for a fluid pressure gage, per se.


CLS 73/514.12
TXT Fluid or fluent material dampening of an inertial element:

    Subject matter under subclass 514.05 wherein the fluid or fluent material
    tends to diminish the movement of the inertial member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    430,    for miscellaneous instrument dampening means.

    496,    for vibration control or antistick means for a reading structure of
    a speed or an acceleration measuring means.

    514.14  for an acceleration determining device including a specific type of
    non-fluid type dampening means.

    522,    for fluid-type dampening in a nonelectrical or a nonmagnetic speed
    measuring device not combined with acceleration measuring.

    526,    for other speed measuring apparatus comprising a dampening means.


    739,    for dampening a mechanism in a pressure gage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 574, for rotor vibration
    dampening means of a more general application.

    181,    Acoustics, appropriate subclass, for dampening of acoustic waves,
    per se.

    188,    Brakes, subclass 322.5 for a fluid damper, per se, and subclasses
    371+, 378+, and 381+ for a vibration damper, per se.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 562+ for a vibration dampening support.

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclass 125 for dampening
    means for a display of an apparatus for measuring  and testing electricity.


CLS 73/514.13
TXT Gas:

    Subject matter under subclass 514.12 wherein the fluid dampener comprises a
    substance having a very low density and viscosity, a rather low expansion
    and contraction with changes in pressure and temperature, the ability to
    diffuse rapidly, and the spontaneous tendency to become distributed
    uniformly throughout a container.


CLS 73/514.14
TXT Specific type of dampener (e.g., eddy current dampener):

    Subject matter of subclass 514.01 comprising specified means for
    diminishing the movement of the inertial member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    430,    for miscellaneous instrument dampening means.

    496,    for vibration control or antistick means for a reading structure of
    a speed or an acceleration measuring means.

    514.12+,for an acceleration determining device including fluid or fluent
    material dampening of an inertial member.

    522,    for fluid-type dampening in a nonelectrical or a nonmagnetic speed
    measuring device.

    526,    for other speed measuring apparatus comprising a dampening means.


    739,    for dampening a mechanism in a pressure gage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 574 for rotor vibration
    dampening means of a more general application.

    181,    Acoustics, appropriate subclasses, for dampening of acoustic waves,
    per se.

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 378+ for vibration damper, per se.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 562+ for a vibration dampening support.

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclass 125 for dampening
    means for a display of an apparatus for measuring  and testing electricity.


CLS 73/514.15
TXT Spinning or vibrating accelerometer:

    Subject under subclass 514.01 comprising either (a) means for rotating the
    inertial member about a motion axis or (b) means for moving the inertial
    member in a periodic manner along or about a motion axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    504.04, for a multisensor for determination of angular rate using
    gyroscopic or Coriolis effect combined with a determination of linear
    acceleration and including a vibratory mass.

    504.12+,for measuring the angular velocity, per se, of a body by  means of
    measuring the gyroscopic or Coriolis effects on

               a vibratory inertial mass.

    514.21, for measuring acceleration by means of a pendulum type inertia
    element wherein rebalance is recited.

    514.29, for measuring acceleration by use of a vibrating sensor.

    514.36, for measuring acceleration by means of a pendulum-type inertia
    element wherein no rebalance is recited.

    570,    for testing by vibration, per se.


CLS 73/514.16
TXT Specific type of electric sensor or specific type of magnetic sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 514.01 comprising a specified sensing means
    whose electric or magnetic characteristic changes in response to the change
    in the property of the inertial member due to the acceleration of the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    514.39, for (a) magnetic speed measuring, per se, wherein the magnetic
    means does not produce an electric signal or (b) mechanical speed measuring
    means combined with ancillary magnetic or electric means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e. g., Transistors, Solid-State
    Diodes), subclasses 414+ for an acceleration responsive device having a
    significant semiconductor potential barrier.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, subclasses 50+ for
    methods of making an acceleration responsive semiconductor device.


CLS 73/514.17
TXT Rebalance:

    Subject matter under subclass 514.16 wherein (a) the electric or magnetic
    sensing means produces an output signal in response to displacement of the
    inertial member and (b) the output signal is used to restore the inertial
    member to a null position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity: Motive Power Systems, subclasses 648+ for the
    combination of a positional servo system using an inertial measuring system
    for error detection and, in particular subclass 651, for a positional servo
    system using an acceleration measuring instrument for error detection.


CLS 73/514.18
TXT Electrostatic restoring means:

    Subject matter under subclass 514.17 wherein the electrical output signal
    generates an electrostatic force which returns the inertial member to the
    null position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 225+ for an
    electrostatic device, per se.


CLS 73/514.19
TXT Radiant energy sensor (e.g., optical, charged, or radioactive  particle):

    Subject matter under subclass 514.17 wherein the output signal of the
    sensing means changes in response to detecting (a) light, (b) charged
    particles, or (c) an alpha, beta, or gamma particles due to the change in a
    property of the inertial member caused by an acceleration of the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    653,    for an inertial-type vibration sensing means having a  light beam
    indicator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 227.14+ for a condition responsive light
    guide, subclasses 231.1+ for a light valve  actuated by an external dynamic
    physical quantity, and subclasses 336.1+ and 493.1+ for radioactive
    particle sensing, per se.

    356,    Optics: Measuring and Testing, subclasses 335+ for measuring
    visible light to detect particle size and subclasses 337+ for measuring and
    testing by particle light scattering.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, appropriate subclass for an
    analysis by measuring an X-ray or gamma ray, per se.


CLS 73/514.21
TXT Pendulum or beam:

    Subject matter under subclass 514.17 wherein the inertial member either (A)
    comprises or (B) is supported by: either (a) an object suspended from a
    fixed support so that it is free to swing back and forth or (b) an
    elongated flexible member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    504.04, for a multisensor for determination of angular rate using
    gyroscopic or Coriolis effect combined with a determination of linear
    acceleration and including a vibratory inertial body.

    504.12+,for measuring angular velocity using gyroscopic or Coriolis effect
    on a vibratory inertial body.

    514.15, for acceleration measuring by means of a vibratory inertial mass.


    514.29, for measuring acceleration by means of a vibrating sensor.

    514.36, for acceleration measuring by means of a pendulum-type inertia
    element wherein no rebalance is recited.

    570+,   for a vibrator, per se, used in testing.


CLS 73/514.22
TXT Including a bearing support:

    Subject matter under subclass 514.21 comprising a bearing and wherein the
    pendulum is mounted for pendulous motion by means of the bearing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 12 and 100+ for fluid bearings, per se.


CLS 73/514.23
TXT Including a flexure support:

    Subject matter under subclass 514.21 comprising a pliable element which
    supports the pendulum for pendulous motion.


CLS 73/514.24
TXT Including an elastic support for an inertial element (e.g., spring):

    Subject matter under subclass 514.17 comprising an element which is capable
    of bearing weight and which tends to return to an initial state or form
    after deformation and wherein the inertial member is supported by the
    element for bearing weight.


CLS 73/514.25
TXT Charged particle or radioactive particle sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 514.16 wherein the  characteristic of the
    sensing means changes in response to detecting (a) a charged particle or
    (b) alpha, beta, or gamma rays.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 306+ for using charged particles for
    inspecting a solid or liquid and subclasses 336.1+ and subclasses 493.1+
    for  radioactive particle sensing, per se.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, appropriate subclass for
    analysis by measuring characteristics of X-rays or gamma rays.


CLS 73/514.26
TXT Optical sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 514.16 wherein the characteristic of the
    sensing means changes in response to a light beam being modified in
    accordance with the change in the property of the inertial member due to
    the acceleration of the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    653,    for an inertial-type vibration sensing means having a light beam
    indicator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 227.14+ for a condition responsive light
    guide and subclasses 231.1+ for a light valve actuated by an external
    dynamic physical quantity.


CLS 73/514.27
TXT Frequency or phase shift:

    Subject matter under subclass 514.26 wherein the modification of the light
    beam comprises a frequency or phase shift.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    657,    for an inertial-type vibration sensing means modifying a light by a
    shift in frequency or phase to provide an  indication or a measurement.


CLS 73/514.28
TXT Surface acoustical wave:

    Subject matter under subclass 514.16 wherein a change in a characteristic
    of an acoustical wave propagating along a surface is modified in accordance
    with the change in the property of the inertial member due the acceleration
    of the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    504.01, for measuring angular rate by use of a surface wave.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 313 for a surface
    acoustical wave device, per se.


CLS 73/514.29
TXT Having a vibrating element:

    Subject matter under subclass 514.16 wherein the sensing means includes an
    element whose frequency of vibration is modified in response to the change
    in the property of the inertial member due to acceleration of the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    504.04, for a multisensor for determination of angular rate using
    gyroscopic or Coriolis effect combined with a determination of linear
    acceleration and including a vibratory inertial member.

    504.12+,for measuring angular velocity using gyroscopic or Coriolis effect
    on a vibratory inertial body.

    514.15, for acceleration measuring by means of a vibratory inertial mass.

    514.21, for acceleration measuring by means of a pendulum-type inertia
    element wherein  rebalance is specified.

    514.36+,for acceleration measuring by means of a pendulum-type inertia
    element wherein no rebalance is recited.

     662+,  or a vibrator, per se, used in testing.


CLS 73/514.31
TXT Inductive or magnetic sensor (e.g., Hall effect sensor):

    Subject matter under subclass 514.16 wherein the sensing means comprises:
    (a) a magnetic body which produces an electromotive force in a circuit or a
    circuit element wherein the electromotive force is varied by the change in
    the property of the inertial member due to an acceleration of the body or
    (b) a body whose magnetic characteristic changes in response to the change
    in the property of the inertial member due to the acceleration of the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, appropriate subclass for a magnet or an electromagnet, per
    se.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 30 for an inductor device having an
    acceleration responsive inductance adjusting means.


CLS 73/514.32
TXT Capacitive sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 514.16 wherein the sensing means comprises
    spaced electrodes whose capacitance varies by the change in the property of
    the inertial member due to an acceleration of the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity: Electrical Systems And Devices, subclasses 280+ for an
    acceleration responsive capacitor.


CLS 73/514.33
TXT Resistive sensor:

    Apparatus under subclass 514.16 wherein the sensing means comprises an
    element whose electrical resistance is varied by the change in the property
    of the inertial member due to an acceleration of the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 2+ for a strain-gage-type resistor
    and subclasses 43+ for a gravity or inertia  responsive resistor.


CLS 73/514.34
TXT Piezoelectric sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 514.16 wherein the sensing means comprises a
    pressure sensitive material which generates an electrical signal which is
    varied by the change in the property of the inertial member due to an
    acceleration of the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 311+ for a
    piezoelectric element or device, per se and especially subclass 329 for an
    inertial responsive piezoelectric device.


CLS 73/514.35
TXT Electric:

    Subject matter under subclass 514.01 comprising means  generating an
    electrical signal which is varied by the change in the property of the
    inertial member due to an acceleration of the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    514.39, for a magnetic speed measuring wherein the magnetic means does not
    produce an electric signal or mechanical speed measuring apparatus
    including ancillary magnetic means or ancillary electric means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity: Measuring And Testing, subclasses 160+ for electrical
    speed measuring including an electrical accelerometer other than one
    sensing acceleration by means of an inertial element.


CLS 73/514.36
TXT Pendulum or beam:

    Apparatus under subclass 514.01 wherein the inertial member either (A)
    comprises or (B) is supported by: either (a) an object suspended from a
    fixed support so that it is free to swing back and forth or (b) an
    elongated flexible element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    504.04, for a multisensor for determination of angular rate using
    gyroscopic or Coriolis effect combined with a determination of linear
    acceleration and including a vibratory inertial member.

    504.12, for angular velocity measuring, per se, by means of a gyroscopic or
    Coriolis effect on a vibratory inertial mass.

    514.15, for measuring acceleration by means of a vibrating inertial mass.

    514.21, for measuring acceleration by means of a pendulum-type inertia
    sensor wherein rebalance is recited.

    514.29, for measuring acceleration by use of a vibrating sensor.

    570+,   for testing by vibration, per se.


CLS 73/514.37
TXT Including a pivot support:

    Apparatus under subclass 514.36 comprising a support which bears the weight
    of the pendulum and permits it to swing.


CLS 73/514.38
TXT Including an elastic support for an inertial element (e.g., spring):

    Subject matter under subclass 514.01 comprising an element which is capable
    of bearing weight and which tends to return to an initial state or form
    after deformation and wherein the inertial member is supported by means of
    the element for bearing weight.


CLS 73/514.39
TXT Magnetic speed measuring or mechanical speed measuring with ancillary
    magnetic means or with ancillary electrical means:

    A process or an apparatus under subclass 488 comprising: (a) a magnetic
    means used for detecting the rate of change in position of the body or (b)
    a mechanical speed measuring means responsive to the rate of change in
    position of the body combined with magnetic means or electrical means,
    wherein the magnetic means or the electrical means is subordinate to the
    mechanical speed measuring means.

    (1)     Note. The apparatus herein does not include magnetic means for
    producing an electrical signal representative of speed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    504.01, for measuring angular rate by using wave motion.

    504.02+,for measuring angular rate by gyroscopic or Coriolis effect.

    504.17, for measuring angular rate by means of a fluid vortex rate sensor.

    514.16+,for an acceleration measuring apparatus which senses acceleration
    by means of an inertial element and which has a specific type of electric
    or magnetic sensor and, in particular, subclass 514.31 for an acceleration
    measuring apparatus which senses acceleration by means of an inertial
    element that has a magnetic sensor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclasses 160+ for an
    electrical measuring speed device including an electrical accelerometer
    other than one which senses acceleration by means of an inertial element,
    in particular, subclasses 173+ for purely electric speed measuring using a
    magnetic sensor and subclass 207.25 for magnetically measuring rotary
    displacement.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 671+ for an electrical
    indicating system providing a humanly perceptible electrical signal in
    response to a  predetermined angular velocity wherein no indication of
    quantitative measurement is provided.

    356,    Optics: Measuring and Testing, subclasses 27+ for determining speed
    by measuring a characteristic of visible  light.


CLS 73/519.01
TXT Eddy current drag means (e. g., drag cup):

    Subject matter under subclass 514.39 wherein the magnetic means comprises a
    permanent magnet and a drag element and wherein (a) a magnetic coupling
    exists between the permanent magnet and the drag element and (b) due to the
    magnetic coupling, movement of the permanent magnet causes motion of the
    drag element.


CLS 73/520.01
TXT With a flux adjusting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 519.01 combined with means for varying the
    magnetic couplingbetween the drag element and the permanent magnet.


CLS 73/521
TXT Apparatus under subclass 488 in which a fluid is used.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 325+ for a device in which a hydraulic
    actuator is supplied by fluid directly by the operation of a pump or its
    equivalent.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 435 and see the search
    there noted for expansible chamber motors having speed responsive control.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 378+ for a speed controller
    of the pneumatic type for an internal-combustion engine.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 34 and 36 for a prime mover speed
    controller using fluid pressure; and subclass 58 for a valve controlled by
    a speed actuated servo-motor.


CLS 73/522
TXT Apparatus under subclass 521 wherein fluid serves to suppress vibration or
    dampen movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    514.12+, for fluid or fluent material dampening of an inertial element in
    an inertial-type acceleration measuring apparatus.

    514.14, for vibration dampening in an inertial-type acceleration measuring
    apparatus.


CLS 73/523
TXT Apparatus under subclass 521 including a fluid container comprising one or
    more walls which are movable with respect to others to vary the volume of
    the container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    502,    for devices in which the expansible chamber is part of an
    externally connected gauge.


CLS 73/524
TXT Apparatus under subclass 521 wherein an output member is moved against bias
    by the impact or drag of a fluid.


CLS 73/525
TXT Apparatus under subclass 521 wherein response is to the force required to
    drive a speeding element through fluid.


CLS 73/526
TXT Apparatus under subclass 488 having means to dampen the mechanism or
    protect it from shock.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    496,    for dampening means acting directly upon the reading structure.

    514.12+, for fluid or fluent material dampening of an inertial element in
    an acceleration measuring apparatus.

    514.14  for vibration dampening in an inertial-type acceleration measuring
    apparatus.

    522,    for dampening means using fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 574, for rotor vibration
    dampening means of more general application.


CLS 73/527
TXT Apparatus under subclass 488 including means for transmitting a speed
    signal to the speed measuring device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    493+,   for structurally installed speed responsive devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 12 for speedometer drive
    means, per se.


CLS 73/528
TXT Apparatus under subclass 527 including means for selecting one of several
    available ratios between the speed of the source and of the responsive
    device.


CLS 73/529
TXT Apparatus under subclass 527 including means for frictionally engaging a
    speed source.


CLS 73/530
TXT Apparatus under subclass 488 with immediately associated means for
    transmitting motion from the sensing means such as two or more relatively
    moving links or gearing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    493+,   for a structurally installed speed responsive device.


CLS 73/531
TXT Apparatus under subclass 530 including means by which the transmitting
    means can be adjusted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    498,    for adjustment means for indicator reading structure.


CLS 73/532
TXT Apparatus under subclass 530 wherein the mechanism includes gearing.


CLS 73/533
TXT Apparatus under subclass 532 in which the gearing includes a rectilinear
    rack.


CLS 73/534
TXT Apparatus under subclass 530 wherein the mechanism includes a surface and
    follower.


CLS 73/535
TXT Apparatus under subclass 488 wherein the speed responsive means comprises a
    rotating or revolving weight or weights, the position assumed by such
    weight or weights due to centrifugal force varying as a function of the
    speed at which they are rotated or revolved.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 364+, for a speed regulator
    of the centrifugal type particularly associated with an internal-combustion
    engine.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 33+ for prime mover motive fluid control
    by a centrifugal governor and subclasses 53+ for valve control by a
    centrifugal governor.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 172+ for a motor vehicle having means
    which is responsive to its speed for regulating the vehicle's rate of
    travel, and wherein the means includes a device which is responsive to
    centrifugal force.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 80 for a
    centrifugally actuated switch.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 462 for automatic
    starting or stopping of an electric motor by a centrifugal device.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 30 for a
    centrifugal governor particularly associated with an electrical generator
    driving means.

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, art collections 924+ for
    centrifugal speed responsive feedback devices used with electric motors.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclasses 50, 51 and
    52+ for a centrifugal weight governor operative responsive to impeller
    rotation.


CLS 73/536
TXT Apparatus under subclass 535 wherein the effective pivot arm length of a
    governor weight pivotally mounted on a rotating support has different
    values at different speeds.


CLS 73/537
TXT Apparatus under subclass 535 with means by which different biasing action
    is obtained at different speeds.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 366 for a speed
    responsive device controlling an expansible chamber motor that varies the
    bias of the device.


CLS 73/538
TXT Apparatus under subclass 537 with a snap action effect.


CLS 73/539
TXT Apparatus under subclass 535 wherein means is provided with which the
    centrifugal weight or its supporting structure comes into contact to arrest
    the radial motion of the weight, the means being in the nature of an
    abutment or stop.


CLS 73/540
TXT Apparatus under subclass 535 having elements provided for adjusting or
    varying the response of the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    513,    for a speed responsive device combined with a manual speed control
    arrangement.

    528,    for adjustment means for the drive of the speed sensor.

    531,    for adjustment means for the output mechanism of the speed sensor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 319, per se, for a speed
    controlled internal-combustion engine with manual control or adjustment
    structure.


CLS 73/541
TXT Apparatus under subclass 540 wherein there are two adjusting means having
    different functions or means that effects more than one type of adjustment
    of the device.


CLS 73/542
TXT Apparatus under subclass 540 wherein the adjustment is of the effect of a
    biasing weight.


CLS 73/543
TXT Apparatus under subclass 540 comprising a lever or gear device.


CLS 73/544
TXT Apparatus under subclass 540 wherein an adjusting means and a bias spring
    are both concentric to the axis of rotation of the centrifugal device.


CLS 73/545
TXT Apparatus under subclass 540 wherein a screw means adjusts the loading of a
    spring connected between two weights on opposite sides of the axis of
    rotation.


CLS 73/546
TXT Apparatus under subclass 535 wherein a leaf spring supports or biases the
    centrifugal weight.


CLS 73/547
TXT Apparatus under subclass 535 wherein the revolving weight acts at the
    junction of two pivotally joined bars.


CLS 73/548
TXT Apparatus under subclass 535 wherein the centrifugal mass is radially
    displaced for operation of an external device by contact.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 3 for a speed controlled
    trip.


CLS 73/549
TXT Apparatus under subclass 535 comprising rigidly connected body portions
    statically balanced about the axis of rotation, but inclined thereto, so
    that the extremities revolve in different planes, which approach each other
    under the action of centrifugal force.


CLS 73/550
TXT Apparatus under subclass 535 relating to a pivoted weight-lever assembly so
    arranged that radial movement of the weight causes axial output movement.


CLS 73/551
TXT Apparatus under subclass 535 including a surface and follower as a part of
    the centrifugal speed sensing device.


CLS 73/570
TXT VIBRATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition for (1) testing an article or
    mechanism by subjecting it to vibratory forces for determining qualities,
    characteristics or conditions thereof, or (2) sensing, study or analysis of
    vibrations otherwise generated in or existing in the article or mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  The "article or mechanism" will be hereinafter referred to
    as a "body" or "test body".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.43+,  for proving or calibrating a chronometer or watch unbalance.

    1.82+,  for proving or calibrating an apparatus by use of vibration or by
    measuring vibration.

    11.08   and 11.09, for testing an automobile shock absorber by oscillation.

    12.01+, for delivering a test impact to a body under study, although the
    result is to be listened to.

    12.12,  for impact testing using oscillation.

    35.01+, for determining engine knock or detonation by measuring abnormal
    vibration.

    66,     for determining the unbalance of rotors by the vibratory thrusts
    effects thereof.

    152.15, for determining the characteristic of a borehole by logging the
    results of measuring the effect of a borehole, a well casing, or a drill
    rigging on vibration combined with radioactivity measuring.

    152.16, for determining the characteristic of a borehole by logging the
    results of measuring the effect of a borehole, a well casing, or a drill
    rigging on vibration.

    152.32, for a flowmeter for determining a characteristic of a borehole, a
    well casing, or a drill rigging by measuring  vibration.

    152.47, for determining a characteristic of a borehole, a well casing, or a
    drill rigging by measuring vibration while an instrument is within a
    borehole while a drilling operation is taking place.

    152.58, for determining a characteristic of a borehole, a well casing, or a
    drill rigging by  measuring vibration while an instrument is within a
    borehole.

    861+,   for employment of vibration transmission in measuring fluid flow.


CLS 73/570.5
TXT Acoustic levitation:

    Subject matter under subclass 570 comprising a process or an apparatus for
    supporting an object in a fluid by means of acoustic waves.

    (1)     Note. The acoustic levitation process or apparatus found here
    includes measuring detail.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclass .5 for acoustic levitation devices, per se,
    with no measuring detail.

    406,    Conveyors: Fluid Current, appropriate subclass, for using fluid
    current to move solids from one position to another.


CLS 73/571
TXT Test chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 570 which provides specialized housing in
    which a test body is located for the application thereto of vibratory
    forces for making desired determinations, or for the sensing, study, or
    analysis of vibrations otherwise generated in, or existing in, the test
    body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    586,    for determination of sonic wave characteristics in an enclosed room
    or space.


CLS 73/572
TXT Loose object detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 570 wherein means are provided for detecting
    loose particles or parts.


CLS 73/573
TXT Hardness or compliance:

    Subject matter under subclass 570 wherein the test body is subjected to
    means, e.g., a resonating probe or by indirect oscillations, for deriving a
    measure of hardness or flexibility thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclass 414 for such devices used as chemical sensors, pressure sensors,
    etc.


CLS 73/574
TXT Mechanical impedance:

    Subject matter under subclass 570 for determining the mechanical impedance
    of the body to vibration, as by the damping action of the body, the ratio
    of energy input to amplitude, etc.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass may include a device used in making the
    determination which has one or more rotatable, unbalanced masses for
    creating vibration in the device and thus in the body to be tested.


CLS 73/575
TXT Of an elastomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 574 wherein the test body is made of an
    elastic material such as rubber.


CLS 73/576
TXT Device having an electromagnetic drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 574 wherein the body or body supporting unit
    is vibrated by direct application of electromagnetic action thereto.


CLS 73/577
TXT Fatigue study:

    Subject matter under subclass 570 wherein the body is subjected to
    prolonged or repeated vibration while sensing, measuring, or recording its
    change of condition, as by change in its temperature, amplitude, or
    resonance, energy input required to maintain vibration or timing or
    registering duration to failure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    808+,   for repeated stressing (e.g., flexing) of bodies to determine
    fatigue characteristics thereof.


CLS 73/578
TXT Electromagnetic drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 577 wherein the body or body supporting unit
    is vibrated by direct application of electromagnetic action thereto.


CLS 73/579
TXT Resonance, frequency, or amplitude study:

    Subject matter under subclass 570 wherein the body is caused to vibrate at
    its natural mechanical resonance and measurement of frequency and/or
    amplitude at resonance is made; a study of amplitude response over a
    frequency range is made; nodal points, wave lengths, and standing wave
    characteristics are measured under predetermined vibration conditions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    658+,   for electrical indicating means for sonic sensing apparatus.


CLS 73/580
TXT Including weight determination:

    Subject matter under subclass 579 wherein a device is utilized for
    determining the mass

    or the weight of a body or of a unit length of a body.


CLS 73/581
TXT Including axial force determination:

    Subject matter under subclass 579 wherein a device is utilized for
    measuring the axial force exerted on a body, e.g., a bolt, wire.


CLS 73/582
TXT Including structural bond evaluation:

    Subject matter under subclass 579 wherein means are provided for testing
    for structural defects in a bond, e.g., separation of rubber tire
    laminations, metallic or nonmetallic type welds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    588,    for other structural bond evaluation.


CLS 73/583
TXT Of aircraft or related structural element:

    Subject matter under subclass 579 wherein means are provided for detecting
    and analyzing vibrations in aircraft structural members, e.g., wing
    flutter, propeller.


CLS 73/584
TXT By mechanical waves:

    Subject matter under subclass 570 wherein (1) the vibratory forces applied
    or (2) the vibrations sensed are in the form of mechanical, sonic-type
    waves and the frequency of the waves and the frequency of the waves is
    either in the sonic or ultrasonic frequency range.

    (1)     Note.  The waves involve uniform motion of a part of a larger body,
    rather than motion of the whole body, in the form of particles of the body
    during travel of the waves in the body.

    (2)     Note.  The sonic waves include longitudinal or compressional,
    shear, Raleigh waves, etc.

    (3)     Note.  For the purposes of this section, the body being tested may
    include a fluid body such as air or water.

    (4)     Note.  This subclass and subclasses indented hereunder provide for
    measuring and testing, employing mechanical, sonic-type waves except as
    specifically provided for elsewhere. See the search notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.43+,  for proving or calibrating a chronometer or watch unbalance.

    1.82+,  for proving or calibrating an apparatus by use of vibration or by
    measuring vibration.

    12.01+, for delivering a test impact to a body under study although the
    result is to be listened to.

    19,     for determining the gas content of materials.

    24,     for gas analysis by sonic means.

    32,     for determining specific gravity or density by sonic means.

    35.09+, for determining engine knock or detonation by measuring abnormal
    vibration.

    40.5+,  for detecting leakage by listening devices.

    61.41,  for determining the content or effect of the constituent of a
    liquid mixture, as concentration of particles in the liquid, by sonic means.

    170.29+, for meteorology and oceanology.

    290+,   for liquid level determination by sonic means.

    339+,   for measurement of temperature by sonic means.

    432+,   for measurement of particle size by sonic means.

    645+,   for measuring an acoustic parameter.

    659,    for sensing apparatus with electrically controlled indicator for
    spectrum analysis.

    861+,   for measurement of fluid flow rate by sonic means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 101+ for geophysical or subsurface
    exploration involving mechanically transmitting or receiving sound waves,
    subclass 123 for mechanical sound echo systems in general and subclass 125
    for mechanical sound location means.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclass 87, subclasses 7+ for producing images of the body subclasses
    118+, for electrical systems using compressional waves to determine
    distance or direction and subclasses 14+, for electrical systems using
    compressional waves to investigate geologic or subsurface structure.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 400 and 493++ for medical diagnostic methods
    and apparatus utilizing ultrasonic mechanical wave energy.


CLS 73/585
TXT Including ear or hearing testing:

    Subject matter under subclass 584 wherein the sonic waves are used to
    measure the auditory response of a person.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 117+ for temperature.

    600,    Surgery, subclass 558 for methods and apparatus for diagnosing a
    condition of the ear.


CLS 73/586
TXT Reverberation:

    Subject matter under subclass 584 wherein sonic characteristics of the
    sonic waves in an enclosed room or space are determined.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are means for producing a sonic wave in a
    room and measuring the sonic decay characteristics of the room.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    571,    for special test chambers.


CLS 73/587
TXT Acoustic emission:

    Subject matter under subclass 584 for sensing mechanical sonic-type waves
    emitted by flaws and other anomalies which generally occur in the test body
    in the early stages of the flaw or other anomaly.

    (1)     Note.  An acoustic emission is a generally inaudible noise caused
    by minute changes in a material or object due to stresses imposed thereon.
    Thus, when a material undergoes a permanent  deformation, it will generate
    a sound which may be monitored by ultrasensitive means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    801,    for similar subject matter in combination with means for applying
    stress to the test object to induce strain and accompanying acoustic
    emission.


CLS 73/588
TXT Structural bond evaluation:

    Subject matter under subclass 584 wherein mechanical waves are utilized for
    testing for structural defects in a bond, e.g., separation of rubber tire
    laminations, metallic or nonmetallic-type welds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    582,    for other structural bond evaluation.


CLS 73/589
TXT Acoustical impedance:

    Subject matter under subclass 584 for determining the acoustical impedance
    of the body to vibration, as by the ratio of sound pressure to the volume
    velocity, the ratio of sound pressure to particle velocity, etc.


CLS 73/590
TXT In detection of a liquid reaction, a chemical reaction, or a nuclear
    reaction:

    Subject matter under subclass 584 wherein a determination is made of the
    quality, characteristic, or condition of a reaction which involves
    chemicals, nuclear materials, or other types of reactions, e.g., liquid
    cavitation in a boiler, detonation in an engine cylinder, etc., which are
    imminent or presently occurring.

    (1)     Note.  The reaction, whether desired or undesired, will manifest
    itself in the form of sonic vibrations from which the determination is made.

    (2)     Note.  The reaction may be or may not be taking place in an
    appropriate chamber or container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    592,    for detection of fluid, fluid leak, or pipe flaw.


CLS 73/591
TXT Listening or sound tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 584 wherein a device for detecting the
    mechanical waves utilized a tube through which one may listen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    649+,   for sensing or detecting apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclass 131 for stethoscopes, per se.


CLS 73/592
TXT Fluid, fluid leak, or pipe flaw detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 584 wherein determination is made of the
    location of a fluid leak in a fluid container, e.g., a flaw in a water
    pipe, or of the location of a fluid, e.g., underground water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40.5+,  for acoustic detectors for locating fluid leakage, the fluid being
    pressurized

    590,    for detection of liquid, chemical or nuclear reactions.


CLS 73/593
TXT Bearing, gear, or related moving mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 584 wherein the test body is a bearing, a
    bearing assembly, a gear, a gear assembly, or other parts related to a
    machine which includes moving parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    660,    for sensing or recording apparatus of rotating machinery and
    devices.


CLS 73/594
TXT Soil or building structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 584 wherein means are provided for
    determining the soundness of soil or building or support structure.


CLS 73/595
TXT Frangible:

    Subject matter under subclass 584 wherein means are provided for the
    detecting of flaws, such as cracks, in articles which may be subject to
    easy breakage.


CLS 73/596
TXT Beamed:

    Subject matter under subclass 584 wherein (1) the sonic waves are in the
    form of beamed or directed waves or (2) the beamed waves sensed emanate
    from within or reflect from the surface of the body.

    (1)     Note.  While the production of a beamed wave is not limited to the
    ultrasonic range, frequencies are generally in the ultrasonic range above
    25 kHz as in the detection of typically sized discontinuities or flaws.
    The beam pattern is a function of the ratio of wavelength employed to the
    distance across the face of the transducer.

    (2)     Note.  Where some means is provided for confining the wave, as a
    duct, the wave is considered to be a directed wave for the purposes of this
    subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 101+ for geophysical or subsurface
    exploration involving mechanically transmitting or receiving sound waves,
    subclass 123 for mechanical sound echo systems in general, and subclass 125
    for mechanical sound location means.

    348,    Television, subclass 163 for only receiving sonic or ultrasonic
    energy and producing an image of a scene or object that is representative
    of the image that would be produced by visible light.

    367,    Communications, Electrical: Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclass 87, subclasses 7+ for producing images of the body, subclasses
    118+ for electrical systems using compressional waves to determine distance
    or direction, and, subclasses 7 and 15.5 for electrical systems using
    compressional waves to investigate geological or subsurface structure.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 437+ for devices employing beamed, mechanical
    waves having means particularly adapted for usage on a living body to aid
    in the diagnosis of diseased or abnormal conditions of the body.


CLS 73/597
TXT Velocity or propagation time measurement:

    Subject matter under subclass 596 wherein velocity or propagation or
    transit time of sonic waves in the test body is measured to determine a
    physical characteristic such as density, Young's modulus, shear modulus,
    stress, microstructure, etc.


CLS 73/598
TXT For flaw or discontinuity detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 597 wherein the velocity or propagation time
    indicates the presence of a flaw or discontinuity.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter in this subclass may be distinguished
    from subclass 597 only on the basis of function, i.e., determination of the
    presence of a flaw or discontinuity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    596+,   for flaw or discontinuity location or thickness measurement by
    pulse echo timing, imaging, etc., except this subclass and subclass 600.


CLS 73/599
TXT Attenuation measurement:

    Subject matter under subclass 596 for measuring the attenuation of energy
    transmitted through the test body or the energy reflected from the surface
    of the body.

    (1)     Note.  The measurement indicates microstructure, paper pulp
    composition, surface reflection characteristics, etc.


CLS 73/600
TXT For flaw or discontinuity detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 599 wherein the attenuation indicates the
    presence of a flaw or discontinuity.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter in this subclass may be distinguished
    from subclass 599 only on the basis of function, i.e., determination of the
    presence of a flaw or discontinuity.

    (2)     Note.  Flaw or discontinuity location by pulse echo, imaging, flaw
    size, etc., is in appropriate subclasses indented under subclass 596 other
    than this subclass and subclass 598.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    596+,   for flaw or discontinuity location by pulse echo, imaging, flaw
    size, etc., except this subclass and subclass 598.


CLS 73/601
TXT Having plural, diverse forms of radiant energy:

    Subject matter under subclass 596 wherein plural forms of radiation, as
    ultrasonic, magnetic, X-ray, etc., are employed to test the body.


CLS 73/602
TXT With signal analyzing or mathematical processing:

    Subject matter under subclass 596 wherein electrical or electronic means
    are provided for spectrum analysis or to mathematically process electrical
    signals corresponding to the sonic waves, to determine flaw size, shape,
    orientation, to improve resolution, etc.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is not intended to include subject matter
    under subclass 596 wherein simple mathematical operations are performed,
    such as combining of signals, comparing signals, doubling signals, forming
    a ratio, etc.  This subclass includes oscilloscope frequency versus
    amplitude display, Fourier transformation of the signal for spectrum
    analysis, mathematical convolution involving the Laplace transformation of
    the signal for signal compression, filtering for spectrum analysis, etc.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass will include only mathematical processing or
    calculating if combined with significant measuring or testing of the type
    provided in subclasses 596+.  Nominal measuring or testing combined with
    significant data processing or calculating computers is in Class 364.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 506, for
    measuring or testing, subclass 507, for flaw or defect, subclass 508, for
    stress, strain, or vibration, subclass 550 for measuring, testing, or
    monitoring.


CLS 73/603
TXT Acoustic holography:

    Subject matter under subclass 596 wherein the test or measurement involves
    acoustic holography employing sonic (i.e., acoustic) waves from the test
    body in formation of the hologram.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are imaging of an interior portion of the
    body as a flaw or discontinuity, determining surface defects or surface
    quality, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    1+ for producing images of bodies by optical holography and subclass 901
    for a cross reference art collection relating to acoustic holography.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 7+, for producing images of underwater and underground bodies,
    respectively, by acoustic holography.


CLS 73/604
TXT Having means substituted for reference signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 603 wherein the hologram is formed without an
    electronic or acoustic reference signal as by temporal reference, optical
    heterodyne, or optical homodyne techniques.


CLS 73/605
TXT Liquid or deformable surface holography:

    Subject matter under subclass 603 wherein the hologram is formed on a
    liquid or deformable surface.


CLS 73/606
TXT Imaging of discontinuity with stationary sonic transmitter:

    Subject matter under subclass 596 wherein a test body or area portion
    thereof is subjected to a beam of waves from a nonscanned transmitter for
    producing an image of a discontinuity within the body covered by the beam.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes such imaging wherein the receiver is
    a liquid-containing cell having particles oriented by the action of the
    sonic waves, a sonic deformable liquid surface, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 7+ for similar electrical sound echo systems for producing
    external images of the body as opposed to imaging internal structure, as a
    discontinuity, of the body.


CLS 73/607
TXT By scan of a sonic receiver:

    Subject matter under subclass 606 wherein the beam from the test body is
    scanned by a sonic receiver, and the receiver is typically a transducer
    mosaic, the elements thereof being sequentially connected to image display
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    626,    wherein plural receivers or elements of a receiver are sequentially
    operated to respond to a scanned transmitted beam.


CLS 73/608
TXT By Bragg diffraction:

    Subject matter under subclass 606 wherein the image is obtained by Bragg
    diffraction.


CLS 73/609
TXT Measuring or testing system having threshold, gating, delay, or blocking
    means:

    Subject matter under subclass 596 having a threshold circuit, a gating
    circuit, delay means or blocking means to eliminate undesired signals form
    measuring or indicating means.

    (1)     Note.  A delay means may be part of the gating means or a
    mechanical delay line between a sonic transmitter or receiver and a test
    body.

    (2)     Note.  The blocking means includes an acoustic curtain between
    adjacent sonic transmitter and receiver means or a masking means to block
    off portions of an indication on a cathode-ray tube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    618+,   for plural gates for effecting scanning.


CLS 73/610
TXT Electronic gating:

    Subject matter under subclass 609 wherein electronic gating means controls
    the received signal portion which is to be indicated.


CLS 73/611
TXT Adjustably responsive to information signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 610 wherein the gating means is adjusted or
    controlled in accordance with an electrical information signal, as a signal
    corresponding to an echo signal from the test body, a signal corresponding
    to movement of the sonic transmitter or receiver, etc.


CLS 73/612
TXT Plural gating:

    Subject matter under subclass 610 wherein a plurality of gating means are
    provided for selecting signals from different depths of the test body or
    for selecting signals from a selected depth for a plurality of receivers.


CLS 73/613
TXT Of noise:

    Subject matter under subclass 610 wherein noise signals, which are
    generally random signals extraneous to the testing signals, are eliminated.


CLS 73/614
TXT Of signals to pass only echoes from within test body:

    Subject matter under subclass 610 wherein only echoes from within the test
    body are passed to indicating or measuring circuitry.


CLS 73/615
TXT Of signals to pass only echoes from front surface or flaw and from rear
    surface of test body:

    Subject matter under subclass 610 wherein only echoes from the front
    surface or flaw and from the rear surface of the test body are passed to
    indicating or measuring circuitry.


CLS 73/616
TXT Of signals to pass only echoes from rear surface of test body:

    Subject matter under subclass 610 wherein only echo signals from the rear
    surface of the test body are passed to indicating or measuring circuitry.


CLS 73/617
TXT Having mechanical delay or mechanical blocking:

    Subject matter under subclass 609 wherein the undesired signals or
    indication thereof are eliminated or blocked by mechanical means, as a
    solid delay line or masking means on a cathode-ray tube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    644,    for transducer-to-object coupling means which may serve as a
    mechanical delay line.


CLS 73/618
TXT Measuring or testing system having scanning means:

    Subject matter under subclass 596 wherein a sonic wave transmitter means is
    scanned relative to the test body, and the receiver is a separate and
    stationary transducer or the receiver is scanned relative to the test body
    and is the same as or a separate transducer from, the transmitting
    transducer and measuring or indicating circuitry is provided with or
    without the final display or indicating means.

    (1)     Note.  The scanning may be effected by switched plural transmitters
    or receivers.

    (2)     Note.  Scanning of the sonic receiver over an areal portion of the
    test body covered by the transmitted beam of a nonscanned sonic transmitter
    is in this class, subclass 607.

    (3)     Note.  The scanning must be more than nominal, be particularly
    adapted for scanning purposes or be a requirement for operation of the
    device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    633+,   for sonic wave transmitter or receiver means, per se, having means
    for effecting or providing for scanning of the transmitter or receiver
    relative to the test body.


CLS 73/619
TXT Programmed scan:

    Subject matter under subclass 618 wherein the scanning is automatically
    controlled in accordance with a previously recorded program.


CLS 73/620
TXT By reflected wave:

    Subject matter under subclass 618 wherein the wave transmitted to the test
    body is reflected from a surface within the test body and is received.


CLS 73/621
TXT Having compound scan:

    Subject matter under subclass 620 wherein the scan comprises a compound or
    combined motion of transmitting and receiving transducer means comprising a
    movement of the transducer in transducer supporting means and a movement of
    the transducer support, at least one of the movements being angular and
    wherein display means is coordinated with the combined movements of the
    transducer.


CLS 73/622
TXT Of tubing, vessel, or cylindrical object:

    Subject matter under subclass 620 wherein the scan is of a tubing, vessel,
    or cylindrical object.


CLS 73/623
TXT Scan from within object:

    Subject matter under subclass 622 wherein the scanning is within a pipe or
    cylindrical vessel.


CLS 73/624
TXT Having separate sonic transmitter and receiver:

    Subject matter under subclass 620 wherein separate transducers are used for
    transmitting and receiving.


CLS 73/625
TXT Having plural sonic type transmitter or receiver transducers:

    Subject matter under subclass 620 wherein more than one transmitter or
    receiver transducer is provided and wherein an additional transducer may
    serve function other than providing echoes from a discontinuity, such as a
    wave coupling test signal.


CLS 73/626
TXT Switched:

    Subject matter under subclass 625 wherein the plural transmitter or
    receivers are switched for sequential operation.

    (1)     Note.  The scanning may be due to the switching or the scanning may
    be performed by relative movement of the transducers and test body and the
    transducers are switched to perform respective different functions.

    (2)     Note.  A transducer wherein discrete portions are rendered
    sequentially operative is deemed to constitute plural, switched transducers
    for purposes of this definition.


CLS 73/627
TXT By reflected wave:

    Subject matter under subclass 596 wherein the wave energy is reflected from
    a reflecting surface of the test body and received, and the measurement of
    the reflected wave determines the location of flaws, thickness, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Detection of the presence or absence of a flaw by
    measurement of the time of propagation or the  attenuation of the waves in
    the body is in this class, subclasses 598 and 600, respectively.


CLS 73/628
TXT Having plural sonic type transmitters or receivers transducers:

    Subject matter under subclass 627 wherein more than one transmitter or
    receiver is provided.

    (1)     Note.  The additional transducer may function other than to obtain
    information from the test body, as to improve coupling by eliminating
    bubbles.


CLS 73/629
TXT Having unitary sonic type transmitter-receiver transducer:

    Subject matter under subclass 627 wherein a single transducer transmits the
    sonic wave and receives the reflected echo.


CLS 73/630
TXT Establishing resonance in a test body:

    Subject matter under subclass 629 wherein resonance frequency of the test
    body is measured.


CLS 73/631
TXT Having automatic gain control:

    Subject matter under subclass 629 wherein automatic gain control of the
    received signal is provided.


CLS 73/632
TXT Sonic wave transmitter or receiver transducer:

    Subject matter under subclass 596 directed to transducer means,
    particularly adapted for inducing sonic waves into a test body or for
    receiving sonic waves from the body for test purposes.

    (1)     Note.  The coupling means may serve as a delay means.

    (2)     Note.  A measuring combination under subclass 596 including
    coupling means producing a mechanical delay is in subclass 617.

    (3)     Note.  A measuring combination under subclass 596 including
    scanning is in subclasses 618+.

    (4)     Note.  A method of inducing waves in a body or receiving waves from
    a body is in this class, subclasses 632+, but a  method of testing under
    subclass 596 is classified in the appropriate subclass preceding subclasses
    632+.

    (5)     Note.  This subclass and subclasses indented hereunder include such
    noted transducer means with means for energizing the transducer, scanning
    the transducer, positioning the transducer, producing signals corresponding
    to transducer scan position, focusing or shaping the waves, and coupling
    the waves to the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 334+ for
    piezoelectric devices.


CLS 73/633
TXT Having transducer scanning means:

    Subject matter under subclass 632 wherein means is provided for effecting
    scanning or relative movement between transducer and test body or has some
    means for facilitating such scanning.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    618+,   for the combination of a measuring or testing system with scanning
    means.

    644,    for coupling means which may facilitate scanning.


CLS 73/634
TXT Automatic transducer positioning:

    Subject matter under subclass 633 wherein the transducer is automatically
    positioned as to distance from, or angle to, with respect to the test body
    generally under control of an electrical or mechanical probe which senses
    the position of the test body to produce a signal to operate transducer
    positioning means.

    (1)     Note.  The probe may sense the presence of the test body at a
    testing station and the transducer is then brought into contact with the
    test body.


CLS 73/635
TXT Rolling contact:

    Subject matter under subclass 633 wherein the relative movement involves
    rolling contact by wheel means between the transducer or transducer support
    and the test body.


CLS 73/636
TXT On railroad rails:

    Subject matter under subclass 635 wherein the transducer is moved along a
    railroad rail.


CLS 73/637
TXT Around cylindrical object:

    Subject matter under subclass 635 wherein relative movement of the
    transducer around a cylindrical test body is provided.

    (1)     Note.  Scanning around a cylindrical test body but without rolling
    contact is also in this class, subclass 640.


CLS 73/638
TXT Along cylindrical object:

    Subject matter under subclass 635 wherein relative movement of the
    transducer lengthwise of a cylindrical body is provided.


CLS 73/639
TXT Transducer forms wheel or is within a wheel:

    Subject matter under subclass 635 wherein the transducer is shaped in the
    form of a wheel or is mounted within a wheel but does not rotate with the
    wheel.


CLS 73/640
TXT Scanning curved surface in direction of curvature:

    Subject matter under subclass 633 wherein the transducer scans over a
    curved surface in the direction of the curvature.

    (1)     Note.  Scanning around a cylindrical object employing roller means
    engaging the test body is in this class, subclass 637.


CLS 73/641
TXT Plural sonic transmitters or receivers:

    Subject matter under subclass 633 wherein plural sonic transmitters or
    receivers are scanned relative to the test body.

    (1)     Note.  A transducer wherein discrete portions are rendered
    sequentially operative is deemed to constitute plural transducers for the
    purposes of this definition.


CLS 73/642
TXT Having wave shaping means:

    Subject matter under subclass 632 wherein means for modifying the shape of
    the beam is provided, as a sonic wave lens or curved reflector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 175+ for acoustic transducers combined with a
    sound modifier.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 335 for acoustic
    wave type generator or receiver with lens or reflector.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 140+ for acoustic transducers combined with a lens or reflector
    respectively.


CLS 73/643
TXT Nonvibrating transducer:

    Subject matter under subclass 632 wherein the transducer means does not
    mechanically vibrate but induces or receives mechanical vibrations, as by
    arc discharge, laser beam, electromagnetic means, etc.


CLS 73/644
TXT Having significant coupling means:

    Subject matter under subclass 632 having significant means between the
    transducer and test body of coupling the sonic waves to or from the test
    body, as a circulated liquid couplant, wear shoe, heat resistive shoe,
    delay block, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    617,    for delay or blocking means in a measuring or testing combination.


CLS 73/645
TXT Acoustic parameter:

    Subject matter under subclass 584 for determining sonic characteristics of
    the sonic waves in a medium.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are means for determining a frequency
    characteristic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    589,    for determining acoustical impedance.


CLS 73/646
TXT Amplitude, power, or intensity:

    Subject matter under subclass 645 wherein the characteristics include
    power, amplitude, intensity, energy, loudness or radiation pressure.


CLS 73/647
TXT Current generating or modifying:

    Subject matter under subclass 646 including electrical means which gives or
    uses an electrical signal which varies as a function of at least one of the
    acoustical characteristics.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    649+,   for subject matter comprising means for indicating or recording
    mechanical vibrations or analysis thereof.


CLS 73/648
TXT Frequency sensitive:

    Subject matter under subclass 647 wherein the current generating or
    modifying means produces a variable frequency signal as a function of the
    power, amplitude, etc., of the sonic waves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    645,    for determining the frequency of sonic waves not included in this
    subclass 648.


CLS 73/649
TXT Sensing apparatus:

    Subject matter under subclass 570 comprising means for rendering
    perceptible, indicating, or recording such vibrations or analysis thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    591,    for sound tubes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclass 131 for stethoscopes.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 334+ for
    piezoelectric devices.


CLS 73/650
TXT Torsional:

    Subject matter under subclass 649 relating to the sensing or measurement of
    torsional vibrations of a rotating member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134+,   for other apparatus for measuring torque by absorption.

    136+,   for other apparatus for measuring torque during transmission.

    660,    for other apparatus for sensing or measuring vibrations of rotating
    parts.


CLS 73/651
TXT Vibratable reed:

    Subject matter under subclass 649 including one or more vibratable reeds as
    the sensing elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, subclass 454 for reeds used in tuning musical instruments.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 76.49 for a tuned
    mechanical resonator (e.g., reed piezocrystal).


CLS 73/652
TXT With inertia element:

    Subject matter under subclass 649 in which the sensing apparatus includes a
    heavy mass which will remain relatively stationary.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    514.01+, for an acceleration responsive device.

    651,    for a mass located on a vibratable reed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, subclass 7 for recording accelerometers.


CLS 73/653
TXT With light beam indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 652 wherein there is an indicator in the form
    of a light beam movable over a scale on the interferometer principle,
    usually over photofilm.


CLS 73/654
TXT With electrically controlled indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 652 including an electrically controlled
    indicator.


CLS 73/655
TXT With light beam indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 649 wherein a light beam is employed which is
    modified in accordance with the vibrations in order to obtain an indication
    or measurement.

    (1)     Note.  Measurement of a modification in the direction or intensity
    of the light beam is included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    653,    for similar structure in combination with inertia type sensing
    apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 445+ for optical
    measuring and testing involving interferometry.


CLS 73/656
TXT By optical holography:

    Subject matter under subclass 655 wherein indication or measurement
    involves the formation of an optical hologram.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 345+, for optical
    measuring and testing involving interferometry.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    1+ for formation of an optical hologram.


CLS 73/657
TXT By frequency or phase shift:

    Subject matter under subclass 655 wherein the modification of the light is
    in the form of a frequency or phase shift which is indicated or measured.


CLS 73/658
TXT With electrically controlled indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 649 wherein the means for indicating is
    electrical.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    654,    for similar structure in combination with inertia type sensing
    apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 683 for machine vibration
    responsive alarms.


CLS 73/659
TXT Spectrum analysis:

    subject matter under subclass 658 relating to the analysis of vibrations by
    measuring the amplitudes of the frequency components of the vibrations.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a complete analysis would be the sensing and
    measuring of airplane vibrations over a wide range of engine speeds.


CLS 73/660
TXT Rotating machinery or device:

    Subject matter under subclass 658 relating to the sensing or measurement of
    the vibrations of a rotating member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134+,   for other apparatus for measuring torque by absorption.

    136+,   for other apparatus for measuring torque during transmission.

    593,    for measuring vibrations by mechanical waves of a bearing and other
    rotating parts.

    650,    for apparatus for measuring torsional vibrations of a rotating
    member.


CLS 73/661
TXT Having a probe:

    Subject matter under subclass 658 wherein the sensing apparatus includes a
    probe which would require physical contact with the object being sensed.


CLS 73/662
TXT Vibrator:

    Subject matter under subclass 570 particularly adapted for producing and
    applying vibratory forces for test purposes.


CLS 73/663
TXT Table, platform, or other support:

    Subject matter under subclass 662 wherein the vibrator includes a table,
    platform, or other support of the body under test.


CLS 73/664
TXT Circuitry:

    Subject matter under subclass 663 wherein various electrical circuits are
    designed for use with the table or platform for adjustments or equalization
    of, for example, noise frequencies which may occur in at least one of
    plurality of vibrational dimensions.


CLS 73/665
TXT Having fluid bearing or fluid pressure actuated:

    Subject matter under subclass 663 wherein the table or platform utilizes a
    fluid, e.g., an oil film, between the table (or platform) and its support
    for reducing bearing friction, and/or the table or platform is vibrated by
    a fluid pressure means.


CLS 73/666
TXT Having spring support:

    Subject matter under subclass 663 wherein the table or platform is
    supported by one

    or more springs for aiding the vibrating thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The spring may be an elastic material as well as a metal
    material.


CLS 73/667
TXT Eccentrically vibrated:

    Subject matter under subclass 663 wherein the table or platform is vibrated
    by an imbalanced rotating mass or by a cam mechanism.


CLS 73/668
TXT Electromagnetically vibrated:

    Subject matter under subclass 663 wherein the table or platform is vibrated
    by electromagnetic means.


CLS 73/669
TXT Vehicle shaker:

    Subject matter under subclass 662 for shaking of automotive vehicle for the
    purpose of testing or detection of squeaks.


CLS 73/670
TXT Treadmill:

    Subject matter under subclass 669 wherein at least one wheel of a vehicle
    furnishes rotating power directly to at least one rotatable vehicle
    support, e.g., a pulley, wheel, or belt, the support having means for
    vibrating itself, and thus the vehicle, or the rotatable vehicle support,
    is self-powered and thus vibrates the vehicle accordingly.

    (1)     Note.  Sometimes all of the vehicle wheels may be in contact with
    rotating belts, and at other times the vehicle wheels may be in contact
    with the vibrator support wheels.


CLS 73/671
TXT Having a fluid jet:

    Subject matter under subclass 662 wherein the vibrator is vibrated by a
    fluid jetted unevenly or pulsed, e.g., into the vanes of a rotor, to cause
    an imbalanced condition therein and thus vibration.


CLS 73/672
TXT Having a rotatable imbalanced mass:

    Subject matter under subclass 662 wherein the vibrator is vibrated by an
    imbalanced rotating mass.


CLS 73/700
TXT FLUID PRESSURE GAUGE:

    Subject matter under the class definition

    for the direct measurement of fluid pressures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37+,    for testing apparatus and processes in which fluids under pressure
    (positive or negative) are utilized to perform the test, and with which a
    fluid pressure gauge may be used.

    78+,    for devices for measuring hardness as an index of fluid pressure
    (e.g., tonometers, subclass 80, and tire hardness gauges, subclass 81).

    115,    for obtaining pressure derivatives within an engine cylinder.

    152.22, for determining a characteristic of a borehole, a casing, or a
    drill rigging during drilling by measuring a fluid flow or analyzing a
    fluid, either (a) by detecting or (b) combined with measuring pressure.

    152.27, for determining a characteristic of a borehole, a casing, or a
    drill rigging by sampling of a borehole formation and measuring a fluid
    flow or analyzing a fluid, either (a) by detecting pressure or (b) combined
    with measuring pressure.

    152.51+, for determining a characteristic of a borehole, a casing, or a
    drill rigging by measuring a fluid flow or analyzing a fluid either (a) by
    detecting or (b) combined with measuring pressure.

    299+,   for hydrostatic pressure type of liquid level or depth gauge.

    384+,   for barometers.

    861.42+, for pressure differential measuring devices for determining volume
    or rate of flow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 26+ for such devices
    combined with pressure compensators.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 154.8 and 155.3 for a metal casting
    apparatus having pressure sensing means.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers subclasses 81+ for fluid
    pressure-operated switches.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 201+ for an expanding
    fluid type thermometer.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 485+ for blood pressure measuring devices.


CLS 73/701
TXT Null balance type:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein the signal response of a pressure
    transducer to the pressure being measured is minimized or nullified by a
    counteracting force or signal, the magnitude of which is determined as an
    indication of the pressure.


CLS 73/702
TXT Vibration type:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein an element or body communicating
    with the pressure being measured is subjected to vibratory forces and
    determinations of frequency and/or amplitude characteristics are taken as a
    measure of pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    570+,   for testing an article by means of vibratory forces, e.g.,
    measurements of frequency and/or amplitude at resonance in subclass 67.2.


CLS 73/703
TXT Ultrasonic:

    Subject matter under subclass 702 wherein the element or body is subjected
    to a directed beam of mechanical wave energy which is sensed upon emanation
    from within or reflection from the surface of the element or body and
    transduced into perceptible indications of pressure.


CLS 73/704
TXT Vibrating strip or wire:

    Subject matter under subclass 702 wherein the element or body is in the
    form of a thin elongated piece of material.


CLS 73/705
TXT Photoelectric:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein the response of a transducer
    device due to applied pressure being measured is determined by a
    photodetector and light source which generate a signal indicative of such
    pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for photocells circuits and
    apparatus.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 15+ for photoconductive devices
    (e.g., light sensitive).


CLS 73/706
TXT With protective separator:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 that embody a material separator in a
    conduit connectable with the fluid pressure source to be measured to
    prevent foreign matter and corrosive material from reaching the measuring
    mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, for apparatus for gas separation, per
    se (i.e., not combined with analysis means).


CLS 73/707
TXT With fluid pulsation dampener:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 having means to suppress pulsations of
    the fluid under pressure to be gauged.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 40+, for flow restrictors,
    per se.


CLS 73/708
TXT With pressure and/or temperature compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 comprising means to countervail for the
    degree of hotness or coldness or ambient-type pressure changes.


CLS 73/709
TXT With excess or maximum registering:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 which embody a mechanical-type device for
    recording the highest or lowest pressure to which the device is subjected.


CLS 73/710
TXT With steam trap:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 which comprises means for holding liquid
    as converted into a vapor to prevent line vapors from reaching certain
    parts of the pressure measuring device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, for apparatus for gas separation, per
    se (i.e., not combined with analysis means).


CLS 73/711
TXT With variable drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 which comprises a mechanism whereby the
    sensitivity of indication is changeable over two or more ranges of
    indication, e.g., mechanism by means of which the indicator has greater
    motion per unit of pressure change over one range of pressure than over a
    second range.


CLS 73/712
TXT With recorder:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 with means to make a permanent
    chronological entry of the fluid pressure measured.


CLS 73/713
TXT With float:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein communicating liquid columns are
    subjected to pressure and the difference in levels of the columns is
    indicated with the aid of one or more devices that stays on the surface of
    the liquid.


CLS 73/714
TXT Combined:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 in combination significantly with other
    devices wherein only so much of such other device is included as to provide
    for the pressure measurement.

    (1)     Note.  Where other devices are claimed further than as indicated
    above and the pressure measuring instrument is merely incidental to the
    combination, the patents are placed with such devices and cross-referenced
    here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146.2+, for a pressure measuring instrument mounted on a vehicle wheel or
    tire stem.


CLS 73/715
TXT Diaphragm:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 comprising a flexible wall or plate as
    the pressure responsive element.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes devices in which fluid transmission
    means are provided to transmit changes in pressure from the pressure
    sensitive element to the indicator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 90+ for a flexible wall type
    expansible chamber device.


CLS 73/716
TXT Multiple and/or differential:

    Subject matter under subclass 715 having multiple unit flexible wall or
    plate devices subjected to single or plural pressures and single flexible
    wall or plate devices responsive to plural pressures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    763,    for multiple unit and/or differential Bourdon type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 112 for differential
    temperature measurement.


CLS 73/717
TXT With electrical readout:

    Subject matter under subclass 716 wherein the multiple unit devices and
    single devices generate or modify an electric current and the value of such
    current is indicative of the pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    336.5,  for current generating hygrometers or hygrostats.

    723,    for other devices with electrical readouts.

    733,    745 and 749, for Bourdon, piston or U-tube pressure gauges with
    electrical readout.

    753,    for electric pressure gauges.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 311+, for
    piezoelectric devices, especially subclass 338.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 188, for a thermometer with
    a mechanical sensor and an electrical indicator.


CLS 73/718
TXT Capacitive:

    Subject matter under subclass 717 wherein the devices effect a variation in
    capacitance to modify the electric current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    724,    for other devices involving capacitance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 280+, for
    capacitors automatically responsive or nonresponsive to condition.


CLS 73/719
TXT Resistive:

    Subject matter under subclass 717 wherein the device effect a variation in
    resistance to modify the electric current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    734,    746 and 750, for diaphragm, Bourdon, piston or U-type pressure
    gauges with resistors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 36+ for fluid or gas pressure
    actuated.


CLS 73/720
TXT Strain gauge:

    Subject matter under subclass 719 wherein the stress and/or strain in one
    or more elements varies the resistance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    726,    for diaphragm-type pressure gauges with strain gauges.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 4 for strain gauge type fluid or gas
    pressure actuated.


CLS 73/721
TXT Piezoresistive:

    Subject matter under subclass 720 wherein the element is made of a
    semiconductor material whose resistance to the flow of electrical current
    is varied by the application of pressure thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    727,    for diaphragm-type gauges involving semiconductors.

    754,    for electrical-type pressure gauges involving semiconductor devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 4 for strain gauge type fluid or gas
    pressure actuated.


CLS 73/722
TXT Electromagnetic:

    Subject matter under subclass 717 wherein the deflection of the flexible
    walls or plates effect a variation in inductance to modify the electric
    current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    728     and 735, for diaphragm or Bourdon tube-type pressure gauges with
    inductor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 30 for inductor devices with condition
    responsive inductance adjusting means (e.g., by electromagnet).


CLS 73/723
TXT With electrical readout:

    Subject matter under subclass 715 wherein the pressure being measured
    deflects the flexible wall or plate to generate or modify an electric
    current and the value of such current is indicative of the pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    336.5,  for current generating hygrometers or hygrostats.

    717,    733, 745, and 749, for multiple and/or differential diaphragm,
    Bourdon, piston or U-tube with electrical readout.

    753,    electric pressure gauge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 311+ for
    piezoelectric devices, especially subclass 338.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 188 for a thermometer with
    a mechanical sensor and an electrical indicator.


CLS 73/724
TXT Capacitive:

    Subject matter under subclass 723 wherein the deflection of the flexible
    wall or plate effects a variation in capacitance to modify the electric
    current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    718,    multiple and/or differential diaphragm pressure gauge involving
    capacitive reactance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 280+ for
    capacitors automatically responsive or nonresponsive to condition.


CLS 73/725
TXT Resistive:

    Subject matter under subclass 723 wherein the deflection of the flexible
    wall or plate effects a variation in resistance to modify the electric
    current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    734,    746 and 750, for Bourdon, piston or U-tube type pressure gauges
    involving resistance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 36+ for fluid or gas pressure
    actuated.


CLS 73/726
TXT Strain gauge:

    Subject matter under subclass 725 wherein the stress and/or strain in an
    element varies the resistance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 4 for  strain gauge type fluid or
    gas pressure actuated.


CLS 73/727
TXT Piezoresistive:

    Subject matter under subclass 726 wherein the element is made of a
    semiconductor material whose resistance to the flow of electrical current
    is varied by the application of pressure thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    754,    for electrical pressure gauges involving semiconductor devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 4 for strain gauge type fluid or gas
    pressure actuated.


CLS 73/728
TXT Electromagnetic:

    Subject matter under subclass 723 wherein the deflection of the flexible
    wall or plate effects a variation in inductance to modify the electric
    current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    735,    for Bourdon tube-type pressure gauges with inductor elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, with condition responsive inductance adjusting
    means (e.g., by electromagnet).


CLS 73/729.1
TXT Bellows:

    Subject matter under subclass 715 wherein the flexible wall or plate
    comprises a receptacle or container having a corrugated wall made up of
    plural diaphragms with edges sealed together.


CLS 73/729.2
TXT Capsule:

    Subject matter under subclass 715 wherein the flexible wall or plate
    comprises a disc-shaped receptacle or container made up of plural
    diaphragms with edges sealed together.


CLS 73/730
TXT Expansible conduit:

    Subject matter under subclass 715 wherein the pressure being measured
    deflects a flexible portion of a fluid-carrying pipe or tube section and a
    detection of the degree of deflection is taken as an indication of pressure.


CLS 73/731
TXT Sack:

    Subject matter under subclass 715 wherein the pressure responsive element
    is in the form of a flexible container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 91+ for a flexible sack-type
    expansible chamber device.


CLS 73/732
TXT Bourdon:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein the pressure sensitive element
    comprises a thin-walled hollow member of elastic material bent into a
    curved configuration or twisted wherein an increase or decrease of pressure
    inside the element tends to straighten it.


CLS 73/733
TXT With electrical readout:

    Subject matter under subclass 732 wherein the tubular pressure responsive
    element is deflected by the pressure to be measured to generate or modify
    an electric current and the value of such current is indicative of the
    pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117     and 723, for diaphragm gauges with electrical readout.

    335.02, for current generating hygrometers or hygrostats.

    717,    745 and 749, for Bourdon, piston or U-tube gauges with electrical
    readout.

    753,    for electric pressure gauges.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 311+, for
    piezoelectric devices, especially subclass 338.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 188 for a thermometer with
    a mechanical sensor and an electrical indicator.


CLS 73/734
TXT Resistive:

    Subject matter under subclass 733 wherein the deflection of the tubular
    pressure responsive element effects a variation in electrical resistance to
    modify the electric current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    719,    725, 746, and 750, for diaphragm, piston or U-tube type pressure
    gauges with resistors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 36+, for fluid or gas pressure
    actuated.


CLS 73/735
TXT Electromagnetic:

    Subject matter under subclass 733 wherein the deflection of the tubular
    pressure responsive element effects a variation in inductance to modify the
    electric current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    722     and 728, for diaphragm devices involving inductor devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 30 for inductor devices with condition
    responsive inductance adjusting means (e.g., by electromagnet).


CLS 73/736
TXT Multiple and/or differential:

    Subject matter under subclass 732 having multiple unit devices subjected to
    single or plural pressures, and single devices responsive to plural
    pressures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    716,    for multiple unit and/or differential diaphragm type.


CLS 73/737
TXT Intermediately supported:

    Subject matter under subclass 732 wherein the Bourdon tube is secured
    between its ends, usually at its approximate center for equal distribution
    of pressure, with each end of the tube being an active end.


CLS 73/738
TXT Safety pressure release casing:

    Subject matter under subclass 732 wherein the Bourdon tube has a casing
    enclosure which has a pressure release in the event the tube breaks.


CLS 73/739
TXT With mechanism dampening:

    Subject matter under subclass 732 wherein excessive and/or undesirable
    movements of the Bourdon tube and/or mechanical indicating system thereof
    are reduced by a means which oppose such movements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    430,    for miscellaneous instrument dampening means.

    514.12+, for fluid or fluent material dampening of an inertial element in
    an acceleration measuring apparatus.

    514.14, for vibration dampening in an inertial-type acceleration measuring
    apparatus.


CLS 73/740
TXT With zeroizing adjustment:

    Subject matter under subclass 732 having an adjustable feature whereby
    calibration can be effected to the extent that the pointer or indicator
    mechanism is caused to register with a datum on a scale.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    387,    for barometers having a similar feature.


CLS 73/741
TXT Bourdon tube and mounting:

    Subject matter under subclass 732 wherein a unique characteristic of the
    Bourdon tube structure or connection and support of the Bourdon tube for
    communication with a pressure source is featured.


CLS 73/742
TXT Helical Bourdon tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 741 wherein the tubular pressure responsive
    element is in the form of a helix.


CLS 73/743
TXT Spiral Bourdon tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 741 wherein the tubular pressure responsive
    element is in the form of a spiral.


CLS 73/744
TXT Piston:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein the pressure being measured
    displaces a movable wall.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, for a piston and cylinder-type
    expansible chamber device and particularly subclasses 172+ for piston, per
    se.


CLS 73/745
TXT With electrical readout:

    Subject matter under subclass 744 wherein the pressure being measured
    displaces a movable wall to generate or modify an electric current and the
    value of such current is indicative of the pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    335.02, for current generating hygrometers or hygrostats.

    717,    723, 733, and 749, for other pressure gauges with electrical
    readout.

    749,    for U-tube pressure gauges with electrical readout.

    753,    for electric pressure gauges.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 311+, for
    piezoelectric devices, especially subclass 338.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 188, for a thermometer with
    a mechanical sensor and an electrical indicator.


CLS 73/746
TXT Resistive:

    Subject matter under subclass 745 wherein the displacement of the movable
    wall effects a variation in resistance to modify the electric current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    719,    725, 734, and 750, for diaphragm, Bourdon or U-tube type pressure
    gauges with resistors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 36+, for fluid or gas pressure
    actuated electrical resistors.


CLS 73/747
TXT U-tube liquid column:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 comprising a column of liquid wherein the
    liquid is subjected to a pressure to be measured and the difference in the
    levels of the columns or the height of a column from a datum is read
    directly as an index of the pressure.


CLS 73/748
TXT Sphygmomanometer:

    Subject matter under subclass 747 for use in blood pressure measuring
    devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 485+, for blood pressure measuring apparatus
    involving more than the pressure gauge, per se.


CLS 73/749
TXT With electrical readout:

    Subject matter under subclass 747 wherein the displacement of the liquid
    within the U-shaped tube generates or modifies an electric current, and the
    value of such current is indicative of the pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    335.02, for current generating hygrometers or hygrostats.

    717,    723, 733, and 745, for gauges with electrical readout.

    753,    for electric pressure gauges.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 311+, for
    piezoelectric devices, especially subclass 338.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 188, for a thermometer with
    a mechanical sensor and an electrical indicator.


CLS 73/750
TXT Resistive:

    Subject matter under subclass 749 wherein the displacement of the liquid
    effects a variation in resistance to modify the electric current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    719,    725, 734, and 746, for other gauges involving resistance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 36+ for fluid or gas pressure
    actuated.


CLS 73/751
TXT Balance:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein a container or containers
    containing communicating liquid columns is displaced when the liquid
    columns are subjected to the pressures to be measured.


CLS 73/752
TXT McLeod type:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 comprising means for measuring the degree
    of vacuum wherein a definite volume of the medium subjected to vacuum
    conditions is compressed by a predetermined head and the amount of such
    compression is a measure of the degree of vacuum.


CLS 73/753
TXT Electrical:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein an electric current is generated
    or modified by direct application of the pressure to be measured to an
    electric circuit element and the value of such current is indicative of the
    pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    335.02, for current generating hygrometers or hygrostats.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 163+ for thermometers
    having electrical or magnetic sensors.


CLS 73/754
TXT Semiconductor:

    Subject matter under subclass 753 wherein the electric circuit element is a
    semiconductor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 414+, especially subclasses 415+ for sensors of physical
    deformation.


    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, subclasses 50+ for
    methods of making semiconductor electrical devices which are sensors of
    physical deformation.


CLS 73/755
TXT Pirani type:

    Subject matter under subclass 753 comprising a thermal conductivity of the
    medium (the pressure of which is to be measured) is measured as an index of
    such pressure.


CLS 73/756
TXT Mounting and connection:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein means are featured to either
    mount the gauge on or connect the gauge to the means containing the fluid
    whose pressure is to be measured.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 158+ for a pipe or
    rod-to-pipe-to-plate coupling means, and, subclasses 189+ for a
    pipe-to-plate joint, per se.


CLS 73/760
TXT SPECIMEN STRESS OR STRAIN, OR TESTING BY STRESS OR STRAIN APPLICATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition for (a) the measurement or study
    of stress (load) or strain (deformation) of a specimen of material or
    structure, or (b) the testing of a specimen of material or structure by
    application of a stress or strain thereto.

    (1)     Note.  Where a stress or strain determination is made as a part
    (i.e., subcombination) of a larger measuring or testing organization (e.g.,
    vane type fluid flow measurement, accelerometer) classification will be
    with the larger testing organization.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152.48, for a downhole apparatus for determining a characteristic of a
    borehole, a well casing, or a drill rigging by measuring force during
    drilling.

    152.49, for a nondownhole-type apparatus for determining a characteristic
    of a borehole, a well casing, or a drill rigging by measuring force during
    drilling.

    152.59, for a downhole-type apparatus for determining a characteristic of a
    borehole, a well casing, or a drill rigging by measuring a response due to
    force while drilling is not taking place.

    862+,   for dynamometers where strain in a part of the measuring apparatus
    itself is utilized as an index of power applied thereto or transmitted
    thereby.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 787+ for extensometers physical
    contact with the specimen.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, subclasses 8+ for fastener devices having means
    functioning to facilitate measuring or to denote the attainment of a
    desired stress or strain in a fastener device in situ.


CLS 73/761
TXT Threaded fastener stress:

    Subject matter under subclass 760 wherein the specimen is a fastener for
    holding together two solid elements or has a complementary fitting engaged
    by the threads (e.g., nut and bolt).

    (1)     Note.  Mere naming of a test specimen as a fastener (e.g., bolt) is
    not, of itself, sufficient for classification herein.


CLS 73/762
TXT Indicating coating or sheet providing direct visual indication (e.g.,
    cracking, color change):

    Subject matter under subclass 760 wherein an indicating element or coating
    on the specimen undergoes a directly visually perceptible change in
    response to specimen stress or strain.

    (1)     Note.  Such testing or measurement using optical elements (e.g.,
    lenses) or photo-responsive devices are not classifiable herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    799,    for testing of a crack in the specimen, rather than in an
    indicating element.

    800,    for testing using optical or photoresponsive elements with specimen
    loading.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 212 for indicators responsive to a
    given level of stress.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 32+ for stress testing
    using optical or photoresponsive elements absent specimen loading.


CLS 73/763
TXT Specified electrical sensor or system:

    Subject matter under subclass 760 wherein the stress or strain is sensed by
    an electrical transducer and (a) either succeeding circuitry or (b)
    specific transducer structure and identifiable load applying structure.

    (1)     Note.  Mere nominal recitation of a "strain gage" with other
    mechanical structure is not classified herein but rather in the appropriate
    subclass indented under 760.

    (2)     Note.  Recitation of specific transducer structure absent
    identifiable load applying structure is classifiable in the appropriate
    electrical transducer class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    781+,   for a specified load transmission device from the specimen to a
    nominal or an unspecified electrical sensor.

    855,    for a support, holder or housing for an unspecified electrical
    sensor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 65 for an oscillator system responsive to a
    mechanical input.


CLS 73/764
TXT Having level attainment counter:

    Subject matter under subclass 763 including means to determine the number
    of times one or more predetermined levels of stress or strain are reached
    or exceeded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    769+,   for other counters controlled by stress or strain responsive
    elements.

    787,    for time-related (e.g., time integral) stress or strain parameters,
    in general.


CLS 73/765
TXT Compensation (e.g., linearization):

    Subject matter under subclass 763 including means to provide a constant
    relationship between stress and strain or to eliminate measurement errors
    due to changes in the test environment.

    (1)     Note.  Linearizing circuits are included herein as nonlinearity
    compensating circuits.


CLS 73/766
TXT Temperature:

    Subject matter under subclass 765 wherein the compensating means operates
    to eliminate thermally caused measurement errors.


CLS 73/767
TXT Plural sensors at single location (e.g., diverse orientation, plural level):

    Subject matter under subclass 763 having a plurality of strain gages at
    substantially a single location on the specimen to provide a different
    response to distinct strain levels or types (e.g., bending, compression).

    (1)     Note.  The term "substantially" is intended to include sensors
    spaced from each other at distances small compared to the specimen
    dimensions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    771,    for a system having selector switch means for sensors at different
    locations.

    781,    for a load or strain transmitting element for an electrical sensor
    which is differently responsive to different load or strain orientations.


CLS 73/768
TXT Sensor embedded in specimen:

    Subject matter under subclass 763 wherein the sensor is completely
    surrounded or enclosed by the specimen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    781,    for other mechanical load or strain transmitting structure for an
    electrical sensor.


CLS 73/769
TXT Coupling circuit for specific additional purpose (e.g., noise suppression)
    or having specified structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 763 having circuitry (a) for a purpose
    additional to, or perfecting, the transmission of the signal between the
    sensor and indicator or (b) in which the details of such circuitry are
    particularly described.

    (1)     Note.  Mere naming of the circuit connection (e.g., conductor,
    bridge) is not, of itself, sufficient for classification herein.


CLS 73/770
TXT Peak indicating system:

    Subject matter under subclass 769 wherein the circuitry operates to provide
    an indication of maximum or minimum value measured during a specific time
    interval.


CLS 73/771
TXT Having selector switching means:

    Subject matter under subclass 769 wherein the coupling circuit includes
    plural, alternative circuit components and switching means selective as to
    which of these elements are connected into the circuit.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass include plural sensor devices at distinctly
    different locations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    767,    for systems having plural sensors at a single location.


CLS 73/772
TXT Plural sensed signal system:

    Subject matter under subclass 769 wherein more than one signal is sensed
    and in which means responsive to the plural signals are simultaneously
    operable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    771,    for devices alternatively responsive to plural signals.

    789+,   for devices simultaneously responsive to stress and strain signals,
    in general.

    794,    for plural stress-strain testing, in general.


CLS 73/773
TXT Specified signal transmitting link:

    Subject matter under subclass 769 wherein the details of structure or
    circuitry for transmitting the sensed signal between relatively movable
    parts, or over a distance which is large compared to the sensor dimensions
    is described.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of such structure are slip rings and details of
    cable connections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 177+ for details of
    electrical signal transmission means, in general.


CLS 73/774
TXT Specified sensor structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 763 wherein the stress or strain sensor
    structure is particularly described.

    (1)     Note.  Mere nominal recitation of a transducer or transducer type
    is insufficient for classification herein. Particular structural features
    of the sensor must be recited.

    (2)     Note.  Stress or strain sensors without either circuitry or
    mechanical means for coupling stress or strain related forces are not
    classified herein, but are classified in the appropriate electrical element
    class (e.g., resistor).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 311 for
    piezoelectric elements, per se.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 2+ for resistive strain gage
    elements, per se.


CLS 73/775
TXT Bonded to specimen:

    Subject matter under subclass 774 wherein an entire surface of the sensor
    is firmly adhered to a specimen surface so as to form an interface between
    the sensor and surface.


CLS 73/776
TXT Sensor comprises coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 775 wherein the sensor consists of a coating
    formed on the specimen.


CLS 73/777
TXT Semiconductor:

    Subject matter under subclass 774 wherein the sensor is composed of
    material having conductivity intermediate that of conductors and insulators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 414+, especially subclasses 417+ for stress/strain sensors.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, subclasses 50+ for
    methods of making semiconductor electrical devices which are sensors of
    physical deformation.


CLS 73/778
TXT Vibratory element:

    Subject matter under subclass 774 wherein the frequency of vibration of a
    sensing element stressed by the specimen provides the desired indication.


CLS 73/779
TXT Magnetic or inductive:

    Subject matter under subclass 774 wherein deformation or stress in the
    specimen is mechanically coupled to a sensor which causes a variation in
    the strength of magnetic flux intercepted thereby or a change in reluctance
    of a magnetic circuit including the sensor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 209 for stress
    measurement by a magnetic field in which a specimen directly interacts with
    the magnetic field.


CLS 73/780
TXT Capacitive:

    Subject matter under subclass 774 wherein the specimen deformation varies
    the spacing between or a dimension of the plates forming a capacitor or
    varies a characteristic of the dielectric thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 280+ for
    condition responsive capacitors, per se.


CLS 73/781
TXT Specified load or strain transmission device from specimen to electrical
    detector:

    Subject matter under subclass 760 wherein the specimen is coupled to an
    electrical sensor by means transmitting the stress or strain from the
    specimen to the sensor. The coupling means often differs in response to
    different orientations of specimen stress or strain.


CLS 73/782
TXT Strain multiplier:

    Subject matter under subclass 781 wherein the coupling means imparts a
    strain to the electrical sensor which is a multiple of the specimen strain.


CLS 73/783
TXT Deformation or change in stress after fracture, cutting, or boring:

    Subject matter under subclass 760 wherein the change in stress or strain
    after separation of or removal of material from the specimen is determined
    as a measure of stress, strain or an associated parameter (e.g., elastic
    modulus).


CLS 73/784
TXT Earth stresses:

    Subject matter under subclass 760 wherein the specimen is a subterranean
    volume of earth.


CLS 73/785
TXT Prestressed specimen:

    Subject matter under subclass 760 wherein the specimen being tested is
    subjected to a preexisting stress as a result of the structure or
    manufacture thereof.


CLS 73/786
TXT In static structures (e.g., buildings, bridges):

    Subject matter under subclass 760 wherein the specimen is a structure,
    permanently affixed to the earth or an element thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Foundations and pilings are considered elements of such a
    structure.


CLS 73/787
TXT Stress or strain history of a specimen without application of a load:

    Subject matter under subclass 760 wherein a time related parameter of the
    stress or strain of a specimen is sensed and in which no load is applied to
    the specimen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of such time related parameters include time
    integrals, fatigue and maximum values over an interval.

    (2)     Note.  Graphical representations as a function of time are
    classified herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    808+,   for fatigue testing by repetitive loading of a specimen.


CLS 73/788
TXT By loading of specimen (e.g., strength of material test):

    Subject matter under subclass 760 wherein

    the test is effected by intentionally applying a load to the specimen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses for metal deformation of
    general utility.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 46+ for thermal testing
    combined with loading of a specimen.


CLS 73/789
TXT Stress-strain relationship determination:

    Subject matter under subclass 788 wherein a determination of a function of
    or functional relationship between, the load upon and deformation of a
    specimen is obtained.

    (1)     Note.  A device separately measuring the load and deformation of a
    specimen without a functional relationship between, said measurement is not
    included herein.


CLS 73/790
TXT Compression:

    Subject matter under subclass 789 wherein the load is applied to the
    specimen in such manner as to tend to shorten the specimen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    818+,   for compressional testing in general.


CLS 73/791
TXT Graphical output:

    Subject matter under subclass 789 wherein the output is presented in the
    form of a multidimensional graph.

    (1)     Note.  A device providing a graphical output of a single parameter
    as a function of time is not classified herein, but in the appropriate
    parameter subclass.


CLS 73/792
TXT Moving chart:

    Subject matter under subclass 791 where graphical output medium is itself
    moved in response to variation of one of the measured parameters.


CLS 73/793
TXT Drum:

    Subject matter under subclass 792 where the graph is drawn on a medium
    formed in a cylindrical shape which is rotated about its axis.


CLS 73/794
TXT Plural diverse stress-strain tests or composite loads:

    Subject matter under subclass 788 combining at least two different types of
    stress-strain tests (e.g., tensile, bending, compressive, torsion, shear,
    etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Composite loads in a single test are classified herein.

    (2)     Note.  Plural tests or loads of the same type are classified by the
    particular test.


CLS 73/795
TXT Strain:

    Subject matter under subclass 794 where the deformation of a specimen is
    measured.


CLS 73/796
TXT Tension-compression:

    Subject matter under subclass 794 where the load applied may be either a
    push or pull.


CLS 73/797
TXT Alternating:

    Subject matter under subclass 796 where the specimen is cyclically
    subjected to alternate push-pull stresses of tension and compression.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    808+,   for repetitively applied load testing, in general.


CLS 73/798
TXT Hydraulic or pneumatic actuation:

    Subject matter under subclass 796 where the load is applied by means of a
    fluid operated device or system.


CLS 73/799
TXT Specimen cracking or crack propagation:

    Subject matter under subclass 788 wherein the loading causes formation of a
    narrow line splitting at least the surface of the specimen and where the
    splitting or progress thereof is ascertained.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    762,    for subject matter in which an indicating coating or sheet is
    cracked by specimen stress.

    835,    for tear testing of a specimen.


CLS 73/800
TXT Optical:

    Subject matter under subclass 788 wherein the stress or strain indication
    includes strain responsive visual or photoresponsive means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    762,    for a specimen sheet or coating providing a direct visual
    indication of stress or strain of a specimen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 32+, for optical strain
    analysis absent loading of the specimen.


CLS 73/801
TXT Acoustic emission:

    Subject matter under subclass 788 for detection of sonic-type waves emitted
    by the specimen as a result of the load induced strain.

    (1)     Note.  An acoustic emission is generally an inaudible noise caused
    by minute changes in a material or object due to stresses imposed thereon.
    Thus, when a material undergoes a permanent deformation, it will generate a
    sound which may be monitored by ultrasensitive means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    587,    for acoustic emission detection not accompanied by specimen loading.


CLS 73/802
TXT Aircraft structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 788 wherein the specimen forms a part of an
    aircraft body.


CLS 73/803
TXT Concrete:

    Subject matter under subclass 788 wherein the specimen is formed of
    concrete.


CLS 73/804
TXT Model of structure to determine structure properties:

    Subject matter under subclass 788 wherein the specimen comprises a model of
    a structure which is tested in order to ascertain properties of the
    structure.


CLS 73/805
TXT Varied in response to specimen condition other than failure:

    Subject matter under subclass 788 wherein the load applied to the specimen
    is controlled by a device responsive to a condition of the specimen other
    than failure.

    (1)     Note.  Devices which cease loading upon specimen failure are
    classified in the appropriate testing to failure subclass below.  However,
    a device responsive to either failure or another condition is classified
    herein and cross-referenced to the appropriate testing to failure subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    810,    for periodic load testing to failure.

    821,    for compressional load testing to failure.

    834,    for tensile testing to failure.

    838+,   for rupture or burst test of sheet material by transverse loading.

    845,    for shear testing to failure.

    848,    for torsion testing to failure.

    851,    for bending, flexing or folding to    failure.


CLS 73/806
TXT Varied according to predetermined pattern:

    Subject matter under subclass 788 wherein the load is automatically varied
    as a function of time upon operation of the loading device.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are devices characterized as varying the
    rate of change of the loading.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein are devices sequentially testing plural
    specimens.


CLS 73/807
TXT Applied directly by fluid pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 806 wherein the load is applied to the
    specimen by direct contact with a fluid under pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37+,    for testing by fluid pressure in general.


CLS 73/808
TXT Repetitive:

    Subject matter under subclass 806 wherein the variation in loading is
    repeated during a single operation of the device.

    (1)     Note.  Included hereunder are devices causing a repetitive load
    upon a traveling specimen by inducing differing loads thereon at particular
    locations passed by the specimen.


CLS 73/809
TXT Plural specimen:

    Subject matter under subclass 808 in which a plurality of specimens are
    simultaneously tested.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    806,    for a device which is repetitively actuated to load sequentially
    load distinct specimens.


CLS 73/810
TXT To failure:

    Subject matter under subclass 808 in which the application of stress is
    repeated until the specimen is permanently deformed, damaged or ruptured.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    799,    for detecting cracking of specimen undergoing such testing.


CLS 73/811
TXT Electric control circuit or particular loading device:

    Subject matter under subclass 808 having particular circuitry to control a
    specimen loading device or a particularly described electrical loading
    device.

    (1)     Note.  An electric motor recited by name only is not a particularly
    described electric loading device for purposes of this classification.


CLS 73/812
TXT Flexing, bending, or folding:

    Subject matter under subclass 808 wherein the specimen has a long axis and
    the repetitive load tends to deform the long axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    849+,   for testing by bending, flexing or folding, in general.


CLS 73/813
TXT Compressive:

    Subject matter under subclass 808 where the repetitive load tends to
    shorten the specimen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    818+,   for static compressional testing.


CLS 73/814
TXT Torsional:

    Subject matter under subclass 808 when the repetitive load tends to twist
    the specimen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    847+,   for torsion testing in general.


CLS 73/815
TXT Shear:

    Subject matter under subclass 808 where the repetitive load is either at
    right angles to the long axis of the specimen, or oppositely directed along
    parallel axes of the specimen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    841+,   for shear testing in general.


CLS 73/816
TXT Hydraulic or pneumatic actuation:

    Subject matter under subclass 806 wherein the load is applied to the
    specimen by a fluid actuated device.


CLS 73/817
TXT Motor driven actuating screw:

    Subject matter under subclass 806 wherein the load is applied to the
    specimen by a device driven by a motor-screw combination.


CLS 73/818
TXT Compressional:

    Subject matter under subclass 788 wherein the load is applied so as to
    squeeze the specimen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    790,    for a test of a relationship between a compressive load and its
    resultant deformation.

    813,    for repetitive application of a compressive load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses for presses of general utility.


CLS 73/819
TXT Plural specimen or multiaxial loading:

    Subject matter under subclass 818 wherein the compressive load is applied
    to plural specimens or along plural axes of a specimen.


CLS 73/820
TXT Fluid displacement provides indication:

    Subject matter under subclass 818 wherein the parameter to be indicated
    controls the position of a fluid volume which position is calibrated so as
    to provide the desired parameter indication.


CLS 73/821
TXT To fracture, crushing, or yield point:

    Subject matter under subclass 818 wherein the specimen compressively loaded
    until it is permanently ruptured, damaged, or deformed.


CLS 73/822
TXT Plastic flow or creep:

    Subject matter under subclass 818 wherein the specimen is capable of flow
    under the compressive load and in which such flow is determined.

    (1)     Note.  Determination of viscosity of plastic materials by a
    compressive test is included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54.01+, for determination of viscosity of liquids.


CLS 73/823
TXT Residual deformation (e.g., consolidation):

    Subject matter under subclass 818 wherein the amount of deformation
    remaining after release of the compressive load is measured.


CLS 73/824
TXT By rotating squeezing element:

    Subject matter under subclass 818 wherein the compressive load is applied
    by a rotating element, the periphery of which overlaps that of the specimen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 599, for
    item sorting means controlled by susceptibility of the item to deformation.


CLS 73/825
TXT With hydraulic or pneumatic actuation:

    Subject matter under subclass 818 wherein the compressive load is applied
    by a fluid operated device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    816,    for a similar device in which the compressive load is varied in
    accordance with a predetermined pattern.


CLS 73/826
TXT Tensile:

    Subject matter under subclass 788 in which the applied load is a pull
    tending to stretch the specimen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    796+,   for devices having both tensile and compressive loading.

    806+,   for tensile loading according to a predetermined pattern,
    particularly 808+ for repetitively effected tensile loading.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 302 for metal stretching, in general.


CLS 73/827
TXT Bond test:

    Subject matter under subclass 826 where the specimen includes an interface
    where two materials are joined together.


CLS 73/828
TXT Strand or chain test:

    Subject matter under subclass 826 where the specimen configuration is
    essentially one dimensional (e.g., chains, threads, yarns, etc.).


CLS 73/829
TXT By roller:

    Subject matter under subclass 828 where there is a roller, drum, or pulley
    over which the specimen passes.

    (1)     Note.  Supply and take up reels are not included as "rollers" in
    this subclass.


CLS 73/830
TXT To failure:

    Subject matter under subclass 828 where the specimen is stretched until it
    is permanently deformed, damaged, or ruptured.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    834,    for tensile failure testing in general.


CLS 73/831
TXT Having specified clamp:

    Subject matter under subclass 826 having a particularly described device
    for gripping or holding a specimen subjected to tension.

    (1)     Note.  Mere recitation of a clamp  by name only is insufficient for
    classification herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    828+,   for specified gripping or holding devices particularly adapted for
    strand or chain testing.

    856+,   for such clamping devices, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 455+ for clamps of a
    more general utility.


CLS 73/832
TXT Interior to specimen:

    Subject matter under subclass 831 wherein the clamp is totally within the
    specimen.


CLS 73/833
TXT Jaws:

    Subject matter under subclass 831 where the clamp includes two or more
    movable opposing parts that open and close for holding the specimen between
    them.


CLS 73/834
TXT To failure:

    Subject matter under subclass 826 where the specimen is stressed until it
    is permanently deformed, damaged, or ruptured.


CLS 73/835
TXT Tear:

    Subject matter under subclass 834 where tension is applied to a specimen to
    cause separation of parts of the specimen along a predetermined path of
    separation.

    (1)     Note.  The predetermined path is generally composed of scoring or
    perforations in the specimen.


CLS 73/836
TXT Pendulum dynamometer:

    Subject matter under subclass 826 which includes a weighted lever arm, the
    angular position of which indicates the load applied to the specimen.


CLS 73/837
TXT Hydraulic or pneumatic actuation:

    Subject matter under subclass 826 in which a fluid actuated device applies
    the load to the specimen.


CLS 73/838
TXT Rupture or burst strength of sheet material by transverse loading:

    Subject matter under subclass 788 wherein one axis of the specimen is very
    small compared to the other two and the specimen is stressed substantially
    along said axis until it fails or ruptures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    807,    for a similar device in which fluid pressure is applied directly to
    the material according to a predetermined time variation.


CLS 73/839
TXT Including cutting or piercing element:

    Subject matter under subclass 838 wherein the transverse loading is applied
    by an element which penetrates the specimen.


CLS 73/840
TXT Hydraulic or pneumatic actuation:

    Subject matter under subclass 838 wherein the loading is effected by a
    fluid operated device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    807,    for devices in which fluid is applied directly to the specimen with
    a predetermined pressure variation.


CLS 73/841
TXT Shear:

    Subject matter under subclass 788 wherein the loading is applied to a
    section of the specimen such that the loading or the deformation has a
    component tangential to the section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    815,    for such loading effected repetitively during the testing operation.


CLS 73/842
TXT Bond:

    Subject matter under subclass 841 wherein the specimen includes an
    interface where two materials are joined together.


CLS 73/843
TXT By rotary element:

    Subject matter under subclass 841 wherein the loading is applied by an
    element rotating about an axis therethrough.

    (1)     Note.  The load applying element is generally located within the
    outer bounds of the specimen.


CLS 73/844
TXT Impact (e.g., pendulum):

    Subject matter under subclass 841 wherein the shear load is applied to the
    specimen by sudden contact of a force applying element.

    (1)     Note.  The sudden contact may include movement of the specimen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.01+, for impact testing in general.


CLS 73/845
TXT To fracture or failure:

    Subject matter under subclass 841 wherein the load is applied to the
    specimen until it is permanently ruptured, damaged, or deformed.


CLS 73/846
TXT Opposing work holders including specimen:

    Subject matter under subclass 841 in which the load is applied to the
    specimen by plates on opposite sides of the specimen applying loads thereto
    in different directions.


CLS 73/847
TXT Torsion:

    Subject matter under subclass 788 where the specimen has an axis and the
    loading produces an angular deformation about said axis.

    (1)     Note.  Rotation of a plate or other force applying element on or
    within the specimen is considered a shear, rather than a torsional load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    814,    for such loading effected repetitively during the testing operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 299, for metal twisting of general
    utility.


CLS 73/848
TXT To failure:

    Subject matter under subclass 847 where the torsional load is applied until
    a permanent change of characteristic of the specimen occurs.


CLS 73/849
TXT Bending, flexing, or folding:

    Subject matter under subclass 788 where the specimen has at least one axis
    and the difference in angular orientation of the ends of the axis is varied
    by the applied load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    812,    for such subject matter where the angular variation is repetitively
    effected.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 127+, for metal bending by deflection
    of successive portions of moving workpiece; and subclasses 380+, for metal
    bending by relatively movable offset tool faces, both of general utility.


CLS 73/850
TXT Weld testing:

    Subject matter under subclass 849 wherein the specimen includes two
    portions joined by a fusion bond.


CLS 73/851
TXT To failure or fracture:

    Subject matter under subclass 849 wherein the specimen is loaded until a
    permanent change of characteristic or a fracture of the specimen occurs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    810,    for periodic stressing of a specimen to failure.

    812,    for periodic bending or flexing of a specimen.


CLS 73/852
TXT Loading means intermediate stationary end holders or supports:

    Subject matter under subclass 849 wherein the opposite ends of the specimen
    are mechanically supported and the load is applied to the specimen between
    the supported ends.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    motor control systems responsive to torque.


CLS 73/853
TXT Having opposite ends of specimen clamped:

    Subject matter under subclass 849 where each end of the specimen is rigidly
    fastened to a support during the test.

    (1)     Note.  Either support may be angularly movable.


CLS 73/854
TXT By angular displacement of opposite ends of specimen:

    Subject matter under subclass 849 where the stressing is effected by
    movement of one or both ends of the specimen along the arc of a circle.


CLS 73/855
TXT Support, holder, or housing for unspecified type electrical sensing element:

    Subject matter under subclass 760 for a device which at least partially
    surrounds an electrical strain gage which is only nominally described.

    (1)     Note.  The device is generally for support or protection.

    (2)     Note.  Such devices with a particular electrical sensor are
    classified with the sensor.


CLS 73/856
TXT Specimen clamp, holder, or support:

    Apparatus for or method of holding a specimen to be subjected to a test of
    the type classified in subclasses 760+.

    (1)     Note.  These holding devices or methods are subcombinations of the
    subject matter of subclasses 760+ and are peculiar to such testing.

    (2)     Note.  Single or plural gripping devices are classified herein,
    even if broadly correlated for testing; however, inclusion of additional
    structure for application or transmission of a test load will be classified
    in the appropriate subclass above.

    (3)     Note.  Gripping Means, in general, without structure peculiar to
    stress or strain testing, is classified in the appropriate class therefor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 455+ for clamps of a
    more general utility.


CLS 73/857
TXT With hydraulic or pneumatic actuation of grip:

    Subject matter under subclass 856 wherein the specimen support is operated
    by a fluid pressure system.


CLS 73/858
TXT Winding drum or roller type:

    Subject matter under subclass 856 wherein a portion of the specimen is
    wound about an element of the gripping apparatus.


CLS 73/859
TXT With wedging or camming elements contacting specimen:

    Subject matter under subclass 856 wherein the specimen gripping elements
    have either a wedge shape surface or are pivotable about an axis to allow
    the gripping elements to conform to the specimen surface to center the
    specimen.

    (1)     Note.  The wedge shaped surface of such elements is not necessarily
    the specimen contacting surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, subclass 217 for work holders of general utility
    having wedging or camming jaws.


CLS 73/860
TXT Opposed pair:

    Subject matter under subclass 856 including a pair of gripping devices at
    opposite ends of a specimen.


CLS 73/861
TXT VOLUME OR RATE OF FLOW:

    Devices under the class definition for determining the volume of flow,
    speed, volume rate of flow or mass rate of flow of fluent material.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass, fluent materials include
    liquids, gases, fluent solids, and fluent mixtures.

    (2)     Note.  Patents claiming only such motive part of volume meters as
    are capable of general use as a fluid motor are classified in Classes 91,
    Motors: Expansible Chamber Type and 415, Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or
    Pumps. See the reference to Class 73 in section III of the Class Definition
    of Class 91 for a further statement of this line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.16+,  for calibration of flow meters.

    155,    for determining fluid flow in bore holes.

    170.07  and 170.11, for determining fluid flow-rate and direction.

    181+,   for determining the speed of a craft with respect to a fluid.

    488+,   for mechanical speed, velocity, or acceleration measuring of
    nonfluent material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclasses 180+ for metering and
    mixing two gases where one is a fuel.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, see (3) Note above.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, for nonelectrical means for giving an alarm
    upon occurrence of fluid flow.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 98+ for a self-proportioning flow
    system; and subclasses 624.11+ for a programmed or timed valve which meters
    fluid merely by timing the interval between opening and closing of the
    valve.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 154.3 and 155.5 for a metal casting
    apparatus which may include a volumetric flow rate sensor.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 48, for measuring the
    rate of flow of drilling fluid.

    222,    Dispensing, particularly subclasses 14+, 59+ and 71+ for volume or
    rate of flow-measuring means having dispensing features or used in
    dispensing combinations.

    235,    Registers, subclass 92 for particle counting with display means.

    250,    Radiant Energy, particularly subclasses 258, 259+, 302+, 356.1, and
    432+ for miscellaneous radiant energy responsive devices.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 306, for
    flow-measuring means responsive to nuclear induction.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 606+ for electric means for
    giving a nonquantitative indication or signal in response to the condition,
    such as flow, of a fluid.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 27+ for flow-measuring
    means employing lasers.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 555 for
    particle count, distribution and size.

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, see (2) Note above.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, for rotary expansible chamber
    devices, per se.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 300+ for flow-measuring means with structure
    particularly adapted for placement on or in a living body.


CLS 73/861.01
TXT With indirect temperature or density compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 861 with means for combining the output from
    a flow transducer with the output from one or more transducer means
    responsive to a fluid parameter to effect temperature correction of the
    output from the flow transducer or to convert volumetric flow rate into
    mass flow rate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    861.04, for combining the output from a flow transducer with the output
    from one or more fluid condition responsive transducer means to determine
    the flow rate of a selected fluid component.


CLS 73/861.02
TXT Electrical:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.01 wherein the transducer outputs are
    combined electrically.


CLS 73/861.03
TXT Digital:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.02 wherein the output of each transducer
    is an electrical signal or is converted to an electrical signal before
    being combined, and wherein at least one of the signals being combined
    contains a characteristic which is recurrent (e.g., a pulse or waveform)
    over a period of time, and the information in the signal is contained in
    the number of recurrences of the characteristic during the period of time.


CLS 73/861.04
TXT Of selected fluid mixture component:

    Subject matter under subclass 861 for detecting one or more selected
    components of a multiphase (i.e., gas, liquid, or solid) fluid or fluid
    mixture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    861.01, for similar structure to effect compensation or correction of the
    output of a volumetric flow transducer or to convert volumetric flow rate
    into mass flow rate.


CLS 73/861.05
TXT By measuring transit time of tracer or tag:

    Subject matter under subclass 861 responsive to the time elapsed for a
    detectable property of the fluid or a detectable body or substance
    introduced into the fluid to travel a fixed distance.

    (1)     Note.  For the purposes of this subclass, a body or substance that
    divides the fluid into segments is a tracer if it does not impede the fluid
    flow.


CLS 73/861.06
TXT With autocorrelation or cross-correlation detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.05 with correlator means for solving for



    (autocorrelation); where f   (t) is one function,  (t) is a second
    function, t is time and is a delay quantity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 76.12+ for analysis
    of complex waves.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 604,
    728 and 819+, for correlators, per se.


CLS 73/861.07
TXT By measuring tracer concentration:

    Subject matter under subclass 861 wherein (a) a tracer substance is
    introduced into the fluid at a fixed rate and a downstream detector means
    is responsive to the tracer concentration or (b) a fixed concentration of
    tracer substance is introduced into the fluid and a downstream detector
    means is responsive to the rate of introduction of the tracer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 302+ and 356.1 for radiation tracer
    methods and flow metering of invisible radiation.


CLS 73/861.08
TXT By measuring electrical or magnetic properties:

    Subject matter under subclass 861 directly responsive to an electrical or
    magnetic property of the fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 306 for measuring
    electrical or magnetic property, per se, and for measuring flow rate by
    nuclear induction.


CLS 73/861.09
TXT Ionization type:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.08 wherein ions are produced in the fluid
    and the flow rate is determined by (a) the ion production rate, or (b) the
    rate of ion collection by ion collector means (e.g., electrodes).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    861.05, for detection of the transit time of an ionized tracer or tag.

    861.07, for detection of the concentration of an ionized substance or
    solution injected into the fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 306+, for inspection of solids or
    liquids by charged particles.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 460+, for the
    measurement of gas pressures by means of ionization gages.


CLS 73/861.11
TXT Electromagnetic induction (e.g., Faraday type):

    Subject matter under subclass 861.08 wherein the fluid traverses an applied
    magnetic field, and potential gradients, indicative of flow rate, are
    produced in the fluid by magnetic induction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 11 for
    dynamo-electric machinery in which the fluid may be conductive to
    electricity.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnetics, subclasses 209+ for magnet structure, per se.

    417,    Pumps, subclass 50 in which a pumped fluid is electrically
    conductive.


CLS 73/861.12
TXT With detecting electrodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.11 wherein electrodes are placed in
    contact with the fluid or are capacitively coupled therewith to detect a
    potential gradient produced in the fluid along a path through the fluid
    extending transverse to both the magnetic field and a component of the flow
    direction.


CLS 73/861.13
TXT Including permanent magnet or D.C. field:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.12 wherein the applied magnetic field is
    produced by a permanent magnet or by an electromagnet supplied with a
    constant and continuous field current.


CLS 73/861.14
TXT For dielectric fluids:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.12 for fluids which do not conduct direct
    electric current (e.g., petroleum products).


CLS 73/861.15
TXT Plural pairs of detecting electrodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.12 having means for detecting plural
    potential gradients along plural paths through the fluid.


CLS 73/861.16
TXT Including electrically interconnected or synchronized input and output
    circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.12 wherein the applied magnetic field is
    produced by an electromagnet and the detected potential gradient is applied
    to an electrical output circuit which also receives a signal responsive to
    or synchronized with the applied magnetic field or the power supply to the
    electromagnet.

    (1)     Note.  Usually, the signal is used to compensate for fluctuations
    in the power supply or to control means for rejecting spurious signals.


CLS 73/861.17
TXT Selective or periodic sampling:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.16 with switching or gating means for
    selective or periodic sampling of the potential gradient detected by
    electrodes (e.g., for sampling when the magnetic flux is in a steady state).


CLS 73/861.18
TXT By measuring vibrations or acoustic energy:

    Subject matter under subclass 861 responsive to (a) traveling compressional
    waves (e.g., acoustic waves) existing in the fluid or applied thereto, (b)
    mechanical oscillations or fluid vortices produced by the interaction of
    the fluid with passive structure (e.g., an obstacle) or (c) vibrations
    applied to the fluid by dynamic means vibrating in a plane parallel with
    the direction of flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152.32, for a flowmeter for determining a characteristic of a borehole, a
    well casing, or a drill rigging by measuring  vibration.

    861.34, for detection of the precessional motion of swirling fluid.

    861.355+, for applied vibrations which impart angular or lateral momentum
    to the fluid.


CLS 73/861.19
TXT Produced by fluidic oscillator:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.18 wherein the fluid is accelerated to
    form a fluid jet and including means to oscillate the jet (e.g., by
    negative feedback forces exerted thereon through control ports).


CLS 73/861.21
TXT Caused by fluid interaction with obstacle:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.18 wherein a body in the flow path either
    vibrates due to the dynamic effects of the fluid or imparts vibrations to
    the fluid.


CLS 73/861.22
TXT Vortex shedders:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.18 wherein an obstacle (e.g., bluff body)
    in the flow path generates Karman vortex streets.


CLS 73/861.23
TXT Acoustic:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.22 wherein an acoustic wave is
    transmitted through the fluid by transducer means.


CLS 73/861.24
TXT Movable sensor responsive to vortices:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.22 wherein the vortices cause an element
    to vibrate proportional to the vortex frequency.

    (1)     Note.  The element may be the vortex generator itself, a segment
    thereof, or separate element.


CLS 73/861.25
TXT Reflection or scattering of acoustic waves:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.18 wherein the rate of flow is determined
    by acoustic waves transmitted to and reflected or scattered by the fluid.


CLS 73/861.26
TXT Deflection of acoustic waves:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.18 responsive to the downstream
    deflection of acoustic waves transmitted through the fluid transverse to a
    component of the direction of flow.


CLS 73/861.27
TXT Transit time of acoustic waves:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.18 responsive to the transit time of
    acoustic waves transmitted through the fluid along a path extending between
    upstream and downstream locations.

    (1)     Note.  Usually, a comparison of upstream and downstream transit
    times is effected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    339     and 597, for measuring transit time of acoustic waves to determine
    other properties of a fluid (e.g., density, temperature, etc.).


CLS 73/861.28
TXT Transmitted along single path:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.27 wherein the acoustic waves are
    transmitted upstream and downstream along the same path.


CLS 73/861.29
TXT In both directions simultaneously:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.28 wherein the acoustic waves are
    simultaneously transmitted upstream and downstream along the same path.


CLS 73/861.31
TXT Transmitted along parallel paths:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.27 wherein the acoustic waves are
    transmitted along plural upstream-downstream paths which are substantially
    parallel.


CLS 73/861.32
TXT By measuring swirl rate imparted by static means:

    Subject matter under subclass 861 responsive to the angular velocity
    imparted to the fluid by fixed vanes, tangential inlet to a chamber, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    861.01+, for other devices which combine the output from a flow transducer
    with the output from one or more transducer means.

    861.351+, for devices which are responsive to a dynamic characteristic of
    the fluid.


CLS 73/861.33
TXT With turbine in a swirl chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.32 wherein a swirl chamber is included
    and the rate of swirl is measured by a turbine located in the swirl chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152.34, for a flowmeter for determining a characteristic of a borehole, a
    well casing, or a drill rigging by measuring  a rotation rate of an element
    about a rotation axis.


CLS 73/861.34
TXT Precess type:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.32 wherein the swirling motion of the
    fluid is transformed into precessional movement and the precessional
    movement is detected.

    (1)     Note.  Usually, an expansion or constriction of the flow path is
    employed to transform the swirling motion to precessional movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    861.22, for detection of Karman vortices.


CLS 73/861.351
TXT Mass flow by imparting angular or transverse momentum to the fluid:

    Subject matter under subclass 861 wherein a fluid is accelerated in a
    direction other than the normal direction of flow and a response related to
    the acceleration is determined to provide a direct measurement of mass
    flow.

    SEARCH THISCLASS, SUBCLASS:

    861.01  through 861.03, for a mass flow measurement in which the volume of
    flow is combined with another measurement to provide a measurement of mass
    flow.

    861.32, for a device responsive to the angular velocity imparted to a fluid


CLS 73/861.352
TXT Rotated resiliently coupled elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.351 wherein impellers or an impeller and
    drum are rotated at the same angular velocity by the fluid or drive means
    and connected by a biasing means, and the angular displacement between the
    members is a measure of mass flow.


CLS 73/861.353
TXT Reaction turbine or vane:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.351 wherein the angular momentum of the
    fluid is absorbed by (a) a turbine restrained against free rotation
    (normally spring biased) or (b) a fixed member.


CLS 73/861.354
TXT Coriolis or gyroscopic:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.351 wherein (a) a conduit or impeller is
    rotated or oscillated to impose a transverse velocity gradient on the fluid
    or (b) a conduit is formed as a loop to provide an effective spin axis, the
    loop is rotated or oscillated about a drive axis and a gyroscopic couple is
    produced.


CLS 73/861.355
TXT Vibrated conduit:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.354 wherein the conduit is subjected to
    oscillations.


CLS 73/861.356
TXT Signal processing or analysis details:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.355 including specific means or steps for
    evaluating the output for determination of mass flow or drive control.


CLS 73/861.357
TXT Drive and sensor element located on straight conduit portion:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.355 wherein the vibration means and
    sensing element are located on a straight section of the conduit.


CLS 73/861.39
TXT Using an applied fluid jet:

    Subject matter under subclass 861 having means responsive to the
    interaction of the fluid with a high velocity stream issued from a nozzle.


CLS 73/861.41
TXT By counting drops, bubbles, or particles:

    Subject matter under subclass 861 wherein the fluid consists of or is
    converted into discrete drops, bubbles or particles which are detected and
    counted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclass 10, for particle counting where no significant measuring or
    testing structure is claimed.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 555, for
    particle count, distribution and size.


CLS 73/861.42
TXT Using differential pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 861 wherein the velocity of the fluid to be
    metered creates a pressure differential or kinetic head across (a) a flow
    restriction such as a Venturi, flow nozzle or orifice plate, or (b) a Pitot
    or like device, which differential or head is substantially proportional to
    a function of the velocity of the fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215,    for Weir-type meters.

    716,    for differential pressure gauges including diaphragms and capable
    of general use.

    747+,   for U-type manometers capable of general use.

    861.01, wherein the output from the flow meter is combined with that of
    another transducer for temperature compensation or the measure of mass flow.

    861.39, wherein the pressure differential is created by the interaction of
    the fluid with a high velocity stream from a nozzle.

    861.71, wherein the restriction is varied by an object in its flow path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 40+, for flow restrictors,
    per se.


CLS 73/861.43
TXT With time integration:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.42 wherein means is provided for
    integrating the pressure differential or kinetic head with respect to time,
    so that a measure of the total flow over a period may be obtained.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183,    for differential pressure-type meters having integrating means and
    forming ships' log navigating devices.


CLS 73/861.44
TXT By electrical means:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.43 wherein the integration is performed
    electrically.


CLS 73/861.45
TXT By mechanical means:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.43 wherein the integration is performed
    mechanically.


CLS 73/861.46
TXT Including pressure applied to liquid column or reservoir:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.45 wherein a liquid column or reservoir
    is subjected to the pressure to be measured and the subsequent change in
    level is sensed and utilized as an input to the integration means.


CLS 73/861.47
TXT Pressure applied to movable member (e.g., a diaphragm):

    Subject matter under subclass 861.42 wherein a moveable member, such as a
    diaphragm, bellows, or piston, is subjected to the pressure to be measured.


CLS 73/861.48
TXT With linearization (e.g., square root extraction):

    Subject matter under subclass 861.47 wherein structure is included to
    produce an output which is linearly related to fluid velocity.


CLS 73/861.49
TXT Pressure applied to liquid column or reservoir:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.42 wherein a liquid column or reservoir
    is subjected to the pressure to be measured and the resultant change in
    level is a measure of the flow rate.


CLS 73/861.51
TXT With linearization:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.49 wherein structure is included to
    produce an output which is linearly related to fluid velocity.


CLS 73/861.52
TXT With restriction:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.42 wherein the differential pressure is
    created by a restriction located in the flow path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    861.47, wherein a pressure is applied to a movable member.

    861.49, wherein a pressure is applied to a liquid column or reservoir.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 40+, for flow restrictors,
    per se.


CLS 73/861.53
TXT Automatically variable restriction:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.52 wherein the effective area of the
    restriction is automatically varied by the differential pressure created.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    861.71, wherein a restriction is varied by the thrust forces on an object
    and the object is biased by gravity or a spring.


CLS 73/861.54
TXT Slotted piston or cylinder:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.53 wherein the effective area of the
    restriction is varied by relative movement of an apertured or slotted
    piston or cylinder.


CLS 73/861.55
TXT Cone and ball or disk:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.53 wherein the effective area of the
    restriction is varied by relative movement of a ball, disk or like member
    (e.g., float) with respect to a cone or tapered cylinder.


CLS 73/861.56
TXT With structure of coupling to indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.55 including details of the elements
    transmitting the relative motion to an indicator.


CLS 73/861.57
TXT With structure of float, float tube, or float guide:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.55 wherein a float is displaced and
    details of either the float, float tube, or a float guide are included.


CLS 73/861.58
TXT Orifice and tapered plug:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.53 wherein the effective area of the
    restriction is varied by relative movement of a tapered plug and an orifice
    member.


CLS 73/861.59
TXT Including recirculation pump:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.52 wherein a constant volumetric
    recirculating pump is used to add or subtract a given volumetric flow of
    fluid to the flow being measured.


CLS 73/861.61
TXT Orifice or flow nozzle:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.52 wherein the means producing the
    differential pressure is an opening (as a vent, mouth or hole) through
    which the fluid passes or a tube having a taper or constriction (e.g.,
    nozzle).


CLS 73/861.62
TXT Adjustable:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.61 wherein the effective area of the
    orifice or flow nozzle may be selectively varied.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    861.53, wherein the effective area is changed automatically in response to
    fluid pressure.


CLS 73/861.63
TXT Venturi:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.52 wherein the means producing the
    differential pressure has flaring ends connected by a constricted middle.


CLS 73/861.64
TXT Inlet or outlet structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.63 wherein specific details of the
    converging inlet or diverging outlet are included.


CLS 73/861.65
TXT Pitot:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.42 comprising a device that consists of a
    tube which is placed in a moving body of fluid and is used to measure a
    kinetic head.


CLS 73/861.66
TXT Sensing at plural transverse locations:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.65 wherein the total pressure or static
    pressure is sensed at a plurality of locations in a plane transverse to the
    flow direction.


CLS 73/861.67
TXT Adjustable:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.65 wherein the position of the Pitot tube
    relative to the fluid may be varied.


CLS 73/861.68
TXT With heating element:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.65 wherein the Pitot tube is provided
    with a heater (e.g., for de-icing).


CLS 73/861.69
TXT Centrifugal:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.42 wherein the fluid is caused to curve
    from a normally straight path so as to produce a centrifugal change of
    pressure which is taken as a measure of the rate of flow of the fluid.


CLS 73/861.71
TXT By measuring thrust or drag forces:

    Subject matter under subclass 861 responsive to the magnitude of forces
    imparted by the fluid to (a) an object placed in the flow path or (b) a
    conduit segment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    861.355,        for detection of reaction forces imparted to a conduit
    segment by dynamic means.


CLS 73/861.72
TXT By changing fluid direction:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.71 wherein the object or conduit segment
    changes the direction of the fluid and the forces imparted by the fluid are
    predominantly the reaction forces necessary to change the direction of the
    flow.


CLS 73/861.73
TXT Impact of particulate material:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.71 wherein the fluid is particulate
    material and the object is an impact plate.


CLS 73/861.74
TXT On a vane:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.71 wherein the object is a vane or
    pivoted flap valve and movement of the vane or flap valve is measured.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170.05+, for vane meters combined with wind vanes.

    186,    for vane meters combined with ships log.


CLS 73/861.75
TXT With rotation about a fixed axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.74 wherein the vane is mounted for
    rotation about a fixed axis and the angular displacement is a measure of
    the forces imparted.


CLS 73/861.76
TXT Spring biased:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.75 wherein the vane is biased against
    rotation by a spring.


CLS 73/861.77
TXT Using rotating member with particular electrical output or circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 861 wherein the fluid to be measured causes
    an element placed in the fluid path to be rotated and provides an
    electrical signal which is a measure of rotation of the element and
    including specific details of either the sensing means or the electrical
    circuit to process the output of the sensing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152.34, for a flowmeter for determining a characteristic of a borehole, a
    well casing, or a drill rigging by measuring  a rotation rate of an element
    about a rotation axis.

    861.02, wherein the electrical output is combined with the output from
    another transducer to effect temperature compensation or mass flow rate.


CLS 73/861.78
TXT With pick-up coil:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.77 wherein the electrical signal is
    generated by varying the magnetic flux between a pick-up coil and the
    element.


CLS 73/861.79
TXT Using turbine:

    Subject matter under subclass 861 wherein means rotatable about an axis by
    a flowing fluid provides an output indicative of flow rate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    861.01, for devices wherein the turbine output is combined with the output
    from one or more fluid condition responsive transducers.

    861.33, wherein a turbine is used to measure swirl rate.

    861.77+, wherein the output of the turbine is electrical and specific
    details of the circuit are included.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, wherein only those motive
    parts are claimed such as are capable of general use as a turbine meter or
    motor.


CLS 73/861.81
TXT With response modification:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.79 wherein the output is variable or
    adjustable.

    (1)     Note.  The modification may be attained by adjusting a drag brake,
    nozzle angle either manually or automatically in accordance with pressure
    or velocity, or by modifying the flow into or through the turbine, or by
    correcting the output.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    861.01, for modification of the meter response wherein the output of a
    second transducer is combined with the output from the turbine to effect
    temperature compensation or obtain mass flow rate.

    861.77+,wherein the output of the meter is electrical and an electrical
    processing circuit is included.


CLS 73/861.82
TXT Pressure responsive valve or restriction:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.81 wherein a valve or restriction
    responds to fluid pressure to control the flow through the meter.

    (1)     Note.  This includes altering the amount of fluid directed to a
    shunt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202+,   wherein a portion of the fluid is separated from the main flow and
    the meter is located in the separated portion.


CLS 73/861.83
TXT Axial supply and delivery:

    152.34, for a flowmeter for determining a characteristic of a borehole, a
    well casing, or a drill rigging by measuring  a rotation rate of an element
    about a rotation axis.Subject matter under subclass 861.81 wherein the
    supply to and delivery from the turbine chamber is at the ends thereof and
    substantially parallel to the axis of the turbine.


CLS 73/861.84
TXT Differentially responsive turbines:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.83 wherein at least two freely rotatable
    turbines with differentially pitched vanes respond to the same flow to
    provide different or opposite rotation rates.


CLS 73/861.85
TXT Anemometers:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.79 wherein wind speed is measured with a
    turbine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170.07  and 170.11, where both wind speed and direction are measured.


CLS 73/861.86
TXT With fluid directed radially outward:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.79 wherein the fluid enters at or near
    the axis of rotation of the turbine and is directed with a predominantly
    radial component against a member, (e.g., curved vanes or tubes) and the
    radial component of the fluid causes rotation of the member.


CLS 73/861.87
TXT With flow direction retained in a plane perpendicular to turbine axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.79 wherein the fluid is directed to and
    from the turbine with no initial, intermediate, or final direction having a
    component parallel to the turbine axis.


CLS 73/861.88
TXT Mechanical coupling to indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.87 wherein the turbine is directly
    coupled to an indicator by mechanical means.


CLS 73/861.89
TXT Axial supply and delivery:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.79 wherein the supply to and delivery
    from the turbine chamber is at the ends thereof and substantially parallel
    to the axis of the turbine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    861.83, for turbines of this type where the response is modified.


CLS 73/861.91
TXT With structure to reduce friction or wear:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.89 wherein structure, other than the
    bearings themselves, is provided to reduce friction or wear of the turbine
    bearings.

    (1)     Note.  Reduction of friction or wear may be attained by reducing
    axial thrust or lubricating the bearings.


CLS 73/861.92
TXT With structure of bearing or turbine support structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.89 wherein the turbine is combined with
    details of either the turbine bearings or the structure for mounting the
    turbine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 91+ for rotary bearing, per se.


CLS 73/861.93
TXT With mechanical coupling to indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.89 wherein the turbine is directly
    coupled to an indicator by mechanical means.


CLS 73/861.94
TXT With magnetic coupling drive assembly:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.89 wherein the turbine is coupled to an
    indicator by means of drive and driven magnets.


CLS 73/861.95
TXT Thermal tracer or tag:

    Subject matter under subclass 861.05 wherein the detectable flow indicating
    property is a localized thermal change in the fluid being measured.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152.33, for a flowmeter for determining a characteristic of a borehole, a
    well casing, or a drill rigging by measuring a rate of fluid flow
    responsive to a thermal property of a fluid.

    204.11+, for a flowmeter which measures the thermal effect of flow on a
    sensor.


CLS 73/862
TXT DYNAMOMETERS:

    Subject matter under the class definition for measuring or determining
    force, torque, work or mechanical power.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass, a dynamometer may either be
    employed to measure an applied load or to apply a measured load (e.g., for
    test purposes).

    (2)     Note.  Dynamometers included in this subclass and subclasses
    indented hereunder either have general utility or perform specific
    measurements or tests which are not elsewhere classifiable.  For example,
    dynamometers that measure certain physical properties or conditions (e.g.,
    weight, gravity, vibration, acceleration and fluid pressure) or test
    certain devices (e.g., brakes, springs and shock absorbers) are classified
    elsewhere according to use.

    (3)     Note.  Definition of Terms:

    FORCE:
    The strength or energy exerted upon or brought to bear or the cause of
    motion or change in motion or a state of rest.

            POWER:
    The rate at which work is done or the rate at which energy is transferred.

    TORQUE:
    A turning or twisting force or a force that produces or tend to produce
    rotation or torsion.

    WORK:
    The transference of energy that is produced by motion at the point of
    application of force which is measured by multiplying the force and the
    displacement of its point of application in the line of action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.08+,  for proving or calibrating dynamometers wherein only those details
    necessary for describing the calibrator is claimed.

    54.39,  for a viscometer measuring shearing torque between parallel
    surfaces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 52.4+ for tools that yield on predetermined
    overload, and subclass 52.5 for such tools combined with overload signals.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 176+ for power-operated tools
    comprising torque responsive control means and subclasses 20+ for tool
    driving or impacting combined with force indicating means when more tool
    structure is recited than is necessary to describe the measuring apparatus.

    177,    Weighing Scales, appropriate subclasses.

    188,    Brakes, for friction brakes, per se.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 93 for
    dynamoelectric brakes and subclasses 94 and 95 for automatic control of
    dynamoelectric brakes.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses for a
    dynamometer controlling a motor.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 76.77+ for phase
    measuring and indicating, per se.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 2-6, for strain gages, per se, and
    condition responsive means comprising strain gage resistors.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 665+ for indicating systems
    responsive to force or stress.

    346,    Recorders, appropriate subclasses for recorder structure.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses.


CLS 73/862.01
TXT For testing force-biased connections:

    Subject matter under subclass 862 comprising means for examining the load
    sustaining ability of devices for joining or fastening one member to
    another with a biasing force.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of force-biased joining or fastening devices are
    male-female frictional connectors, wire-wrapped electrical terminals, and
    spring-biased clamping means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150,    827 and 842, for examining the holding strength of bonding
    materials.

    161,    for measuring the biasing force of springs.

    761     and 862.21, for testing threaded connections.


CLS 73/862.02
TXT Ski bindings:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.01 wherein the device for joining or
    fastening comprises a safety type ski binding for holding a ski boot to a
    ski.


CLS 73/862.03
TXT For testing relative pulling power (e.g., for contests):

    Subject matter under subclass 862 comprising means for providing a measured
    or controlled tractive load to compare the pulling ability of mechanical
    tractive power means.

    (1)     Note.  The load is usually progressively increased to exceed the
    pulling capacity of the power means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    379.01, for testing the pulling ability of animals.

    862.57, for measuring the pulling power of a working draft animal or
    machine.


CLS 73/862.041
TXT Responsive to multiple loads or load components:

    Subject matter under subclass 862 wherein; (a) both force and torque, or
    (b) more than one force or more than one torque, or (c) more than one
    component of a single force or torque are determined.


CLS 73/862.042
TXT Along or about mutually orthogonal axes:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.041 wherein the forces, the force
    components, the torques or, the torque components are perpendicular to each
    other.


CLS 73/862.043
TXT Three dimensional (e.g., x, y, z axes):

    Subject matter under subclass 862.042 wherein three mutually perpendicular
    forces, force components, torques, or torque components are determined.


CLS 73/862.044
TXT Using a resistance strain gage:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.043 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring a change in electrical resistance of a sensing means comprising
    an electrical conductor or semiconductor that is stressed by the deflection
    or distortion of an elastic member.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass, a disclosure of strain
    detecting means affixed to a surface of the elastic member is presumed to
    be of the resistive type unless otherwise stated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    763+,   for determining stress or strain of a test specimen with a strain
    gage.

    862.045,        862.338+, 862.474, and 862.627+, for other force or torque
    measuring means having an elastically deformable member combined with a
    resistance strain gage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclass 211 for a weigher using a strain gage.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 2-6 for a strain gage, per se.


CLS 73/862.045
TXT Using a resistance strain gage:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.041 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring a change in electrical resistance of a sensing means comprising
    an electrical conductor or semiconductor that is stressed by the deflection
    or distortion of an elastic member.

    (1)     Note.  For the purpose of this subclass, a disclosure of strain
    detecting means affixed to a surface of the elastic member is presumed to
    be of the resistive type unless otherwise stated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    763+,   for determining stress or strain of a test specimen with a strain
    gage.

    862.044,        862.338+, 862.474, and 862.627+, for other torque and force
    measuring means having an elastically deformable member using a resistance
    strain gage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclass 211 for a weigher using a strain gage.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 2-6 for a strain gage, per se.


CLS 73/862.046
TXT Transducer array (e.g., columns and rows):

    Subject matter under subclass 862.041 wherein the determination is made by
    utilizing a sensing means comprising a plurality of transducers distributed
    over an area.


CLS 73/862.05
TXT Applied to guidance means:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.041 wherein the measuring means are
    responsive to manual force or torque applied to a guiding mechanism by an
    operator.


CLS 73/862.06
TXT On machine tools:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.041 wherein the measuring means are
    responsive to force or torque on a working tool effecting a machining
    function.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of machining functions are cutting, drilling and
    milling.


CLS 73/862.07
TXT To determine distribution of tensile stress:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.041 comprising individual force
    responsive means at different points spaced across the width of a web or
    strip to determine the longitudinal tension thereof at said points.


CLS 73/862.08
TXT Responsive to torque:

    Subject matter under subclass 862 for measuring torque, work or power
    comprising sensing means responsive to a force couple or moment of force
    that induces or resists rotation of a body about a point or axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    862.041+, for dynamometers comprising means responsive to plural torques.


CLS 73/862.09
TXT By absorption:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.08 comprising rotary power absorbing
    means for testing a source of rotary mechanical power by applying a
    measured or controlled power consuming load thereto.

    (1)     Note.  Dynamometers in this subclass must be capable of applying a
    sustained, nonstalling rotary load to the source.


CLS 73/862.11
TXT Having plural brake means:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.09 wherein the load is applied by more
    than one rotary power absorbing means.


CLS 73/862.12
TXT Having friction brake means:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.09 wherein the load is applied by an
    absorbing means using mechanical friction to consume the power.

    (1)     Note.  Prony brake dynamometers are classifiable in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes for friction brakes, per se.


CLS 73/862.13
TXT Automatic load control:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.12 comprising speed or torque responsive
    means to control the load applied by the absorbing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    862.16  and 862.18, for other automatic load control devices.


CLS 73/862.14
TXT Having fluid brake means:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.09 wherein the load is applied by an
    absorbing means using a working fluid to consume the power.

    (1)     Note.  Hydraulic pumps or motors adapted for use as absorption
    dynamometers are classifiable in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 290+ for fluid brakes, per se.


CLS 73/862.15
TXT Air brakes:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.14 wherein the working fluid is a gas or
    vapor.


CLS 73/862.16
TXT Automatic load control:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.14 comprising speed or torque responsive
    means to control the load applied by the absorbing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    862.13  and 862.18, for other automatic load control devices.


CLS 73/862.17
TXT Having magnetic or electromagnetic brake means:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.09 wherein the load is applied by an
    absorbing means using magnetic drag to consume the power.

    (1)     Note.  Eddy current dynamometers and motors or generators adapted
    for use as absorption dynamometers are classifiable in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 93, for
    dynamoelectric brakes.


CLS 73/862.18
TXT Automatic load control:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.17 comprising speed or torque responsive
    means to control the load applied by the absorbing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    862.13  and 862.16, for other automatic load control devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 94 and 95, for
    automatic control of dynamoelectric brakes.


CLS 73/862.191
TXT During transmission to an external load:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.08 wherein the torque, work or power is
    transmitted from a source to a load other than the dynamometer.

    (1)     Note.  The load may comprise either work or test structure.

    (2)     Note.  The sensing means has no appreciable loading affect on the
    source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    862.09, for similar subject matter wherein the load is the dynamometer.


CLS 73/862.192
TXT By measuring angular acceleration:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.191 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring a rate of change in the angular velocity of a torque transmitting
    component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    488+,   for determining angular velocity and angular acceleration, per se.


CLS 73/862.193
TXT By measuring an electrical or magnetic characteristic of a torque
    delivering electric motor:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.191 wherein the determination is made
    from a measured electrical or magnetic operating parameter of a torque
    delivering electric motor.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of a parameter are current, voltage or magnetic
    flux, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116+,   for testing a motor or an engine, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 158 for electrical
    testing of a motor or a generator.


CLS 73/862.194
TXT By measuring tension in a drive belt or chain:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.191 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring the tautness of a drive belt or chain.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    862.453, for testing for tension in a drive belt, per se.


CLS 73/862.195
TXT By converting transmitted torque into axial force:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.191 wherein the determination is made by
    converting a torque about an axis into an axial force along the axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    862.381, for measuring force, work or power by means of a sensing means
    responsive to a load or a reaction force applied along a particular axis.


CLS 73/862.21
TXT For making or breaking threaded connections (e.g., torque measuring
    wrenches):

    Subject matter under subclasses 862.191+ wherein the sensing means is
    incorporated in or combined with a tool for tightening or loosening
    threaded fasteners or couplings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    761,    for measuring the strain of a threaded fastener.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 176+ for power-operated tools
    comprising torque responsive control means.


CLS 73/862.22
TXT With variable capacity or sensitivity:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.21 wherein the measuring range or
    responsiveness of the sensing means is adjustable.


CLS 73/862.23
TXT With detection of specific torque value or condition (e.g., peak torque):

    Subject matter under subclass 862.21 comprising means for indicating (a)
    the maximum value of the transmitted torque or (b) when the transmitted
    torque attains a desired value or condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 52.4+ for tools which yield on predetermined
    overload; and subclass 52.5 for such tools combined with overload signals.


CLS 73/862.24
TXT Rate of change:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.23 comprising means for detecting a
    predetermined torque gradient.

    (1)     Note.  Torque gradient is the rate of change of torque with respect
    to rotation or time.


CLS 73/862.25
TXT Power tongs:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.21 wherein the tool comprises power means
    for screwing or unscrewing sections of a tubular assembly.

    (1)     Note.  Most tubular assemblies in this subclass comprise threaded
    sections of drill pipe, casing, tubing, and rods used in the drilling and
    operation of wells.


CLS 73/862.26
TXT Bending beam type:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.21 wherein the tool comprises an
    elongate, resilient member acting as a torque transmitting lever arm and
    the flexing of said member is indicative of the transmitted torque.


CLS 73/862.27
TXT With recording or totalizing means:

    Subject matter under subclasses 862.191+ comprising means for (a) making a
    permanent record of measured torque, work or power or (b) registering the
    total torque, work or power over a period of time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    862.51, for devices which are responsive to force with recording means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, appropriate subclasses for recorder structure.


CLS 73/862.28
TXT With electrical computation of horsepower:

    Subject matter under subclasses 862.191+ comprising electrical means for
    combining torque and speed signals to produce a signal indicative of
    horsepower.


CLS 73/862.29
TXT By measuring reaction forces of a prime mover:

    Subject matter under subclasses 862.191+ wherein the sensing means senses
    reaction forces exerted by a torque delivering motor or engine on its
    mounts or support means, which forces are indicative of the delivered
    torque.


CLS 73/862.31
TXT By measuring reaction forces of transmission gearing:

    Subject matter under subclasses 862.191+ wherein the sensing means senses
    reaction forces experienced by a torque transmitting gear or gear train,
    which forces are indicative of the transmitted torque.


CLS 73/862.321
TXT By measuring elastic deformation of a torque transmitting member:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.191 wherein the determination is made by
    sensing the deflection or distortion of an elastic member that transmits a
    torque from the source to the load.

    (1)     Note.  The elastic member usually comprises a spring element or a
    torsionally flexible shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    862.471+,       for measuring elastic deformation to determine tension on a
    stretched flexible member.

    862.621+,       for measuring force, work or power by measuring an elastic
    deformation responsive to force.


CLS 73/862.322
TXT With rotary to linear conversion:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.321 including means for converting a
    change in relative angular displacement into linear motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses, for a rotary
    to linear conversion means, per se.


CLS 73/862.323
TXT Using a flowing fluid (e.g., using a shaft mounted nozzle and baffle):

    Subject matter under subclass 862.321 wherein the deflection or distortion
    is sensed by detecting a change in a characteristic of a fluid in motion.


CLS 73/862.324
TXT Using a light sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.321 wherein the deflection or distortion
    is sensed by detecting a change in a characteristic of a radiated ray or
    reflected beam of light.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, appropriate subclasses for a measuring device using
    invisible light which produces light modified by a force being applied and
    wherein the modified light is further measured.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for testing
    using visible light and involving no other manipulations other than those
    necessary for an optical test.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements,
    appropriate subclasses for an optical device, per se.


CLS 73/862.325
TXT Using an electrical sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.321 including a sensing means for
    converting the deflection or distortion of the elastic member into an
    electrical current or voltage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    862.324, for determining a reaction force by measuring elastic deformation
    by use of photoelectric sensing means.


CLS 73/862.326
TXT Phase angle detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.325 wherein a time relationship of
    electrical signals which is indicative of the angular position of spaced
    sections of the elastic member is sensed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 83+, for phase
    measuring and indicating, per se.


CLS 73/862.327
TXT Vernier type:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.326 wherein the electrical signals have
    slightly different frequencies and the number of full cycles of one signal
    between a time reference point and a phase coincidence with the other
    signal is sensed.


CLS 73/862.328
TXT By plural toothed or notched sensing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.326 wherein the sensing means comprises a
    pair of rotating elements having regular projections or indentations on the
    circumference thereof.


CLS 73/862.329
TXT Interlaced teeth:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.328 wherein the teeth of one rotating
    element extend between the teeth of the other rotating element.


CLS 73/862.331
TXT Inductance or reluctance sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.325 wherein the sensing means is
    responsive to either (a) the change of a property of an electrical circuit
    by which an electromotive force is induced in it by a variation of current
    either in the circuit itself or in a neighboring circuit, or (b) the change
    in a property of an electric nonconductor that permits the storage of
    energy as a result of the displacement when opposite surfaces of the
    nonconductor is maintained at a different potential.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    779,    for measuring strain using inductance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 280+ for a
    pressure responsive capacitor, per se.


CLS 73/862.332
TXT Variable air gap in a magnetic core:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.331 wherein the change is caused by a
    variation in a spacing between relatively movable parts of a magnetic core.


CLS 73/862.333
TXT Detecting magnetostrictive or magnetoelastic property:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.331 wherein the sensing means senses a
    change in a magnetic property of; (a) the elastic member, or (b) a layer on
    the elastic member, or (c) an element encircling and rigidly attached to
    the torque transmitting member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    779,    for measuring stress in a specimen which causes a variation in the
    strength of magnetic flux intercepted by a sensor or a change in reluctance
    of a magnetic circuit including a sensor and wherein the specimen is
    mechanically coupled to the sensor.

    862.69, for a force measuring device sensing a magnetic property of a
    stressed member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 209 for stress
    measurement by a magnetic field in which a specimen directly interacts with
    the magnetic field.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 20 for a magnetostrictive device, per se.


CLS 73/862.334
TXT Grooved or slotted torsion shaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.333 wherein the torque transmitting
    member is a torsion shaft having a groove or a slot on the surface thereof.


CLS 73/862.335
TXT Magnetic sleeve or layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.333 wherein the sensing means detects a
    change in the magnetic property of the layer or the rigidly attached
    element.


CLS 73/862.336
TXT Particular constituent:

    Subject matter under 862.335 wherein at least one constituent of a material
    comprising the layer or the rigidly attached element is specified.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 62.51 for a magnetic composition, per se.


CLS 73/862.337
TXT Capacitance sensor:

    Subject matter under 862.325 wherein the sensing means is responsive to a
    change in a property of an electric nonconductor that permits the storage
    of energy as a result of the displacement when opposite surfaces of the
    nonconductor are maintained at a different potential.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    780,    for using a capacitor for measuring stress, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 280+ for a
    pressure responsive capacitor, per se.


CLS 73/862.338
TXT Resistance strain gage:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.325 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring a change in electrical resistance of a sensing means comprising
    an electrical conductor or semiconductor that is stressed by the deflection
    or distortion of the torque transmitting member.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass, a disclosure of strain
    detecting means affixed to a surface of the elastic member is presumed to
    be of the resistive type unless otherwise stated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    763+,   for determining stress or strain of a test specimen with a strain
    gage.

    862.044,        862.045, 862.474, and 862.627+, for torque or force
    responsive devices having elastically deformable members using resistance
    strain gages.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclass 211 for a weigher using a strain gage.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 2-6 for a resistance strain gage,
    per se.


CLS 73/862.339
TXT With noncontact coupling (e.g., rotary transformer):

    Subject matter under subclass 862.338 comprising a stationary electrical
    circuit nonmechanically connected to the sensing means.


CLS 73/862.37
TXT By measuring the fluid pressure of a hydraulic coupling:

    Subject matter under subclasses 862.191+ wherein the sensing means senses
    the fluid pressure of a fluid coupling that transmits the torque to the
    load.


CLS 73/862.381
TXT Responsive to force:

    Subject matter under subclass 862 for measuring or determining force, work
    or power comprising sensing means responsive to a load or reaction force
    applied along a particular axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117.4,  for measurement of engine thrust.

    152.48, for a downhole apparatus for determining a characteristic of a
    borehole, a well casing, or a drill rigging by measuring force during
    drilling.

    152.49, for a nondownhole-type apparatus for determining a characteristic
    of a borehole, a well casing, or a drill rigging by measuring force during
    drilling.

    152.59, for a downhole-type apparatus for determining a characteristic of a
    borehole, a well casing, or a drill rigging by measuring a response due to
    force while drilling is not taking place.

    172,    for orthopedic pressure distribution.

    379,    for measuring a force exerted by animals.

    862.041+, for dynamometers comprising means responsive to plural forces.

    865.4,  for investigating forces or motion involved in a specific bodily
    activity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    177,    Weighing Scales, appropriate subclasses, for a force responsive
    measuring device having a claimed platform.


CLS 73/862.382
TXT With detail of overload protection:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.381 wherein significance is attributed to
    a means for guarding against damage to the measuring means once the applied
    load exceeds a safe load for which the measuring means has been rated.


CLS 73/862.391
TXT To determine tension on a flexible element:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.381 wherein the  determination of the
    force is indicative of the tautness of a line, belt, web or the like
    flexible element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    862.07  for measuring tension at plural, laterally spaced points.


CLS 73/862.392
TXT By measuring axial force or stretch:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.391 wherein the tension is determined by
    measuring the longitudinal force along or the elongation of the flexible
    element.


CLS 73/862.393
TXT Pulling force on an anchoring device:

    Subject matter under 862.392 wherein the tension is determined by measuring
    a force which is exerted on means used to firmly hold one end of the
    flexible element.


CLS 73/862.41
TXT By measuring vibrations (e.g., resonant frequency):

    Subject matter under subclasses 862.391+ wherein the flexible element is
    vibrated and the sensing means senses the amplitude or frequency of the
    vibrations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    517,    581, 704, 778, and 862.59, for other measuring devices comprising
    vibratory flexible elements.


CLS 73/862.42
TXT By applying a measured tensioning force:

    Subject matter under subclasses 862.391+ comprising tensioning means for
    applying a stretching force to the flexible element which is sensed by the
    sensing means.


CLS 73/862.43
TXT Racket stringing:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.42 used for tensioning the strings of
    sporting rackets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, subclass 534 for a tennis racket
    having adjustable string-tensioning means and subclasses 556 and 557 for an
    accessory device used for stringing a tennis racket or for an accessory
    device for stretching the strings of a tennis racket.


CLS 73/862.44
TXT With winding or reeling means:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.42 wherein the tensioning means comprises
    a rotatable drum or spool and the flexible element is wrapped therearound.


CLS 73/862.451
TXT By measuring deflection or a deflecting force:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.391 wherein the sensing means detects
    either (a) the deflection of the element  produced by a predetermined
    deflecting force, or (b) a deflecting force required to produce a
    predetermined deflection.

    (1)     Note.  For the purposes of this subclass, pulleys, rollers, and the
    like means for guiding a traveling flexible element comprise deflecting
    means that produce a predetermined deflection.


CLS 73/862.452
TXT For testing racket stringing:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.451 wherein the element comprises strings
    of a racket.


CLS 73/862.453
TXT For testing a drive belt:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.451 wherein the element comprises the
    belt of a mechanical drive.


CLS 73/862.454
TXT Using a fluid for deflection or force measuring:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.451 wherein a liquid or gas material is
    used to either deflect the element or to measure the deflection of the
    element.


CLS 73/862.46
TXT With angular deflection:

    Subject matter under subclasses 862.451+ wherein the deflecting means
    applies a force-couple to opposite sides of the flexible element to
    angularly deflect a longitudinal segment thereof about a transverse axis.


CLS 73/862.471
TXT Using an elastically deformable force measuring means:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.451 wherein the sensing means detects the
    deflection or distortion of an elastic member which is stressed by the
    deflecting force.


CLS 73/862.472
TXT With pivoted deflecting member between spaced guides or supports:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.471 wherein the deflecting force is
    produced by a deflecting means rotatable about an axis and located between
    spaced members which contact the element.


CLS 73/862.473
TXT Electrical sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.471 wherein the deflection or distortion
    of the elastic member is converted into an electrical current or voltage by
    the sensing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    862.325+, for measuring torque by use of an elastically deformable member
    having electrical sensing means.

    862.625+, for determining force by measuring elastic deformation by use of
    an electrical sensor.


CLS 73/862.474
TXT Resistance strain gage:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.473 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring a change in electrical resistance of a sensing means comprising
    an electrical conductor or semiconductor that is stressed by the deflection
    or the distortion of the elastic member.

    (1)     Note.  For the purposes of this subclass, a disclosure of strain
    detecting means affixed to a surface of the elastic member is presumed to
    be of the resistive type unless otherwise stated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    763+,   for determining stress or strain of a test specimen with a strain
    gage.

    862.044,        862.045, 862.338+, and 862.627+, for other torque or force
    measuring devices using an elastically deformable member combined with a
    resistive strain gage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclass 211 for a weigher using a strain gage.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 2-6 for a strain gage, per se.


CLS 73/862.49
TXT To determine axial thrust on a rotating machine element:

    Subject matter under subclasses 862.381+ for measuring the force acting
    along the axis of rotation of a rotating machine component.

    (1)     Note.  The sensing means usually coacts with a thrust bearing for
    the rotating component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    862.31, for measuring torque by sensing the axial thrust on transmission
    gears.


CLS 73/862.51
TXT With recording means:

    Subject matter under subclasses 862.381+ comprising means for making a
    permanent record of the measured force, power or work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, appropriate subclasses for recorder structure.


CLS 73/862.52
TXT With variable capacity or sensitivity:

    Subject matter under subclasses 862.381+ wherein the measuring range or
    responsiveness of the sensing means is adjustable.


CLS 73/862.53
TXT With detection of specific force value or condition (e.g., peak force):

    Subject matter under subclasses 862.381+ comprising means for indicating
    (a) the maximum value of the applied force, or (b) when the applied force
    attains a desired value or condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    862.01, for indicating the force required to release a force biased
    connection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 665+ for indicating systems
    responsive to force or stress.


CLS 73/862.541
TXT Combined:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.381 combined with structure of a device
    classifiable elsewhere, per se, but wherein only so much of said device is
    included as is necessary to define the force, work, or power to be measured
    or determined.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    862.49, for dynamometers combined with rotating machine elements or thrust
    bearings.

    862.391+, for dynamometers combined with structure for tensioning or
    deflecting a flexible element.


CLS 73/862.542
TXT With jack or press:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.541 wherein the device is a jack or a
    press.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 99 for a press whose details are disclosed beyond
    that which is necessary to define the force, work, or power to be measured
    in combination with a testing means.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    appropriate subclasses for a jack, per se.


CLS 73/862.543
TXT With pumping unit:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.541 wherein the device is a pump.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, appropriate subclasses for a pump including more detail than
    that necessary to describe a force measurement being made.


CLS 73/862.55
TXT With pressure applying roller (e.g., mill roll):

    Subject matter under subclasses 862.541+ wherein the device comprises at
    least one rotatable cylinder and the sensing means senses the compressive
    force between the cylinder and an opposing surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    862.451+, for rotatable rolls for deflecting a travelling flexible element.


CLS 73/862.56
TXT With hoisting means:

    Subject matter under subclasses 862.541+ wherein the device comprises means
    for applying a vertical lifting force to a suspended load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    862.391+, for determining the tension of hoisting ropes or cables.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclass 147, for weighers with hoists.

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclass 283 for hoists with weighers.


CLS 73/862.57
TXT With towing means:

    Subject matter under subclasses 862.541+ wherein the device comprises means
    for applying a tractive force to a mobile load.


CLS 73/862.581
TXT By measuring a fluid pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.381 wherein the determination is made by
    sensing hydraulic or pneumatic pressure which is indicative of the applied
    load or force.

    (1)     Note.  The force is represented by the fluid pressure sensed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    700+,   for fluid pressure gages, per se.


CLS 73/862.582
TXT Using a load responsive valve or restrictor:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.581 wherein the load or force changes the
    opening of a valve or a restrictor which in turn changes the fluid pressure
    being sensed.


CLS 73/862.583
TXT Pneumatic:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.582 wherein the fluid is a gas.


CLS 73/862.584
TXT Using a piston:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.581 wherein the fluid pressure being
    sensed affects or is effected by the movement of a piston.


CLS 73/862.59
TXT By measuring vibrations (e.g., resonant frequency):

    Subject matter under subclasses 862.381+ wherein the sensing means
    comprises a stressed vibratory member that produces a mechanical
    oscillation having a frequency or amplitude that is indicative of the
    applied force.

    (1)     Note.  Usually, the applied force changes the resonant frequency of
    the member and the frequency is measured electrically.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    514.29, for an accelerometer having an inertia mass and including a sensor
    having a vibrating element.

    651,    704, 778, and 862.41, for other measuring devices having a stressed
    vibratory member.


CLS 73/862.61
TXT By measuring a counterbalancing or restoring force:

    Subject matter under subclasses 862.381+ comprising a member that is
    displaceable by the applied force and wherein the sensing means inhibits
    displacement of the member by exerting an equal and opposite force thereon,
    whereby the magnitude of the force exerted by the sensing means in
    indicative of the applied force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    514.17+,for a null balance accelerometer including a specific type of
    electric or magnetic sensor.

    701,    for null balance pressure gages.

    862.581+, for null balance dynamometers that employ a fluid pressure
    readout.


CLS 73/862.621
TXT By measuring elastic deformation:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.381 wherein the sensing means detects the
    deflection or the distortion of an elastic member which is stressed by the
    applied force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    862.321,         for means measuring torque, work or power comprising
    elastically deformable force measuring means.

    862.391+ and 862.471, for tension measuring dynamometers comprising
    elastically deformable force measuring means.

    862.581+, for fluid pressure means used to measure elastic deformation.

    862.59, for vibratory means used to measure elastic deformation.

    862.636,        for details of an elastic member whose distortion or
    deflection due to stress applied by a force is sensed by the sensing means.


CLS 73/862.622
TXT With compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.621 including means for offsetting an
    undesirable influence on or in the means for making the determination.


CLS 73/862.623
TXT Temperature:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.622 wherein the influence which is being
    offset is temperature.


CLS 73/862.624
TXT Using a light sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.621 wherein the sensing means detects a
    change in a characteristic of a radiating or reflected beam of light in
    order to determine elastic deformation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, appropriate subclasses for a measuring device using
    invisible light which produces light modified by a force being applied and
    wherein the modified light is further measured.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for testing
    using visible light and involving no other manipulations other than those
    necessary for an optical test.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements appropriate
    subclasses for an optical device, per se


CLS 73/862.625
TXT Using a specific type of electrical sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.621 wherein the sensing means is
    responsive to a change in a particular electrical parameter.

    (1)     Note.  Electromagnetic and photoelectric sensing means are included
    in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    862.325, for other elastically deformable members having electrical sensing
    means.

    866.5,  for a probe or probe mounting, per se.


CLS 73/862.626
TXT Inductance or capacitance sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.625 wherein the sensing means is
    responsive to either (a) the change of a property of an electrical circuit
    by which an electromotive force is induced in it by a variation of current
    either in the circuit itself or in a neighboring circuit, or (b) the change
    in a property of an electric nonconductor that permits the storage of
    energy as a result of the displacement when opposite surfaces of the
    nonconductor is maintained at a different potential.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    779,    for measuring strain using inductance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 30 for a condition responsive inductor,
    per se.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 280+ for a
    pressure responsive capacitor, per se.


CLS 73/862.627
TXT Resistance strain gage:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.625 wherein the determination is made by
    measuring a change in electrical resistance of a sensing means comprising
    an electrical conductor or semiconductor that is stressed by the deflection
    or distortion of the elastic member.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass, a disclosure of strain
    detecting means affixed to a surface of the elastic member is presumed to
    be of the resistive type unless otherwise stated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    763+,   for determining stress or strain of a test specimen with a strain
    gage.

    862.044,        862.045, 862.338+, and 862.474, for other torque or force
    measuring devices using a resistance strain gage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclass 211 for a weigher using a strain gage.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 2-6 for a strain gage, per se.


CLS 73/862.628
TXT Including a specific type of electrical circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.627 wherein an arrangement of electrical
    elements connected to the sensing means is specified.


CLS 73/862.629
TXT Specific type of elastic member:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.627 wherein a shape of or a physical
    property of the elastic member is specified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    862.636, for a specific type of elastic member for measuring applied force
    and which is not combined with a specific electrical sensor.


CLS 73/862.631
TXT Axle or pivot pin:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.629 wherein the force being determined is
    applied to the elastic member by an element rotatively or pivotally mounted
    thereon.


CLS 73/862.632
TXT Flexible element (e.g., beam, plate, or web):

    Subject matter under subclass 862.629 wherein the elastic member comprises
    an element whose flexing or bending due to the applied force causes the
    stress in the conductor or semiconductor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    862.629, for an elastic element which undergoes torsion or twisting.


CLS 73/862.633
TXT Parallel:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.632 wherein the flexible element
    comprises two members each having a main longitudinal axis extending
    parallel to the longitudinal axis of the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    862.638, for a parallel beam, plate or web type flexible element whose
    deformation is a measure of an applied force and which is not combined with
    a resistance strain gage.


CLS 73/862.634
TXT Cantilever:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.632 wherein the flexible element
    comprises a projecting portion having only one end thereof fixedly attached
    to a support therefor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    862.639, for detail of a cantilever type flexible element whose flexing or
    bending is a measure of the applied force and which is not combined with a
    resistance strain gage.


CLS 73/862.635
TXT Closed loop (e.g., ring or tube):

    Subject matter under subclass 862.629 wherein the flexible element is a
    hollow symmetrically shaped body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    862.642, for detail of a closed loop flexible element whose flexing or
    bending is a measure of the applied force and which is not combined with
    resistance strain gage.


CLS 73/862.636
TXT Specific type of elastic member:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.621 wherein the shape or the physical
    property of the elastic member is specified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    862.629, for a specific type of elastic member whose deformation is
    measured by a resistance strain gage.


CLS 73/862.637
TXT Flexible element (e.g., beam, plate, or web):

    Subject matter under subclass 862.636 wherein the elastic member flexes or
    bends due the applied force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    862.632, for an elastic element combined with a resistance strain gage for
    measuring applied force.

    862.636, for an element which undergoes torsion or twisting.


CLS 73/862.638
TXT Parallel:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.637 wherein the flexible element
    comprises two portions each having a main longitudinal axis extending
    parallel to the longitudinal axis of the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    862.633, for other parallel flexible elements whose deformation is measured
    by a resistance strain gage in order to indicate the applied force.


CLS 73/862.639
TXT Cantilever:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.637 wherein the flexible element
    comprises a projecting portion having only one end thereof fixedly attached
    to a support therefor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    862.634, for detail of a cantilever type flexible element whose flexing or
    bending is sensed by a resistance strain gage in order to indicate the
    applied force.


CLS 73/862.641
TXT Helical or spiral:

    Subject matter under subclass 862.636 wherein the elastic member is of a
    helical or spiral shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    862.629, for a specific type of elastic member combined with a resistance
    strain gage to measure applied force.


CLS 73/862.642
TXT Closed loop (e.g., ring or tube):

    Subject matter under subclass 862.636 wherein the elastic member is a
    hollow symmetrically shaped body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    862.635, for a closed loop type of flexible element combined with a
    resistance strain gage for measuring an applied force.


CLS 73/862.68
TXT By measuring electrical properties:

    Subject matter under subclasses 862.381+ wherein the sensing means senses
    an electrical property of a member that is stressed by the applied force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    862.59, for sensing vibrations electrically.

    862.625+, for sensing elastic deformation electrically.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 600+ for measuring
    electrical properties.


CLS 73/862.69
TXT By measuring magnetic properties:

    Subject matter under subclasses 862.381+ wherein the sensing means senses a
    magnetic property of a member that is stressed by the applied force.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 200+ for measuring
    magnetic properties.


CLS 73/863
TXT SAMPLER, SAMPLE HANDLING, ETC.:

    Subject matter under the class definition for obtaining a predetermined
    portion of a mass of material to be tested.

    (1)     Note.  The portion of a mass of material of this subclass type may
    be predetermined by volume, volumetric ratio of the portion to the total
    mass, composition or condition of the mass.

    (2)     Note.  This is the generic locus for sampling, and, as such,
    includes the following subject matter not provided for elsewhere:



    a.      treatment of samples in preparation for analysis;

    b.      transporting or handling previously obtained samples in preparation
    for analysis; and

    c.      introducing previously obtained samples into analyzers.

    (3)     Note.  Subject matter similar to subject matter of this subclass
    type in proximate function (i.e., obtaining a predetermined portion of a
    mass of material) but differing in ultimate function (i.e., to be tested)
    is classified herein if not classifiable elsewhere, e.g., "tollers".

    (4)     Note.  A sampler combined with a test apparatus or art device is
    classified with the test apparatus or art device.

    (5)     Note.  Definition of Terms:



    SOURCE

    The material or bulk from which the sample is removed.

    SAMPLE

    A portion of material which is physically separated from the source.

    RESIDUE

    The portion of the source that remains after the sample is removed.

    CAPTURE ELEMENT

    That structure which physically contacts the source to separate it into
    sample and residue portions.

    SAMPLING SYSTEM

    A complete sampling system includes a capture device, a transport or
    handling means, and a receiver.

    (6)     Note.  Patents issued before 1940 have been placed hereunder by
    total disclosure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for a gas analysis combined with isolation of particles from a gas.

    61.55,  for a chromatographic liquid analyzer combined with sampling,
    sample handling, or sample preparation.

    61.59,  for a liquid analyzer determining the content or the effect of a
    constituent of a liquid mixture combined with detail of sampling, sample
    handling, or sample preparation.

    61.68,  for a liquid analyzer for determining sedimentation rate of a
    liquid suspension and including detail of sampling, sample handling, or
    sample preparation.

    64.56,  for a liquid or liquid suspension analyzer including a sampler,
    constituent separation, sample handling, or sample preparation.

    152.07, for a borehole formation logging being made by measuring density,
    porosity, or permeability by core sample analysis.

    152.09, for a borehole formation logging being made by measuring oil, gas,
    or water saturation by core sample analysis.

    152.11, for a borehole formation logging being made by measuring a
    characteristic of a core sample.

    152.23+, for determining a characteristic of a borehole, a casing, or a
    drill rigging by sampling combined with (a) measuring a flow rate of fluid
    or (b) analyzing a fluid.

    170.01+, for measurement of atmospheric or oceanographic phenomena combined
    with sampling the atmosphere or ocean.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Bath, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, for a urine or feces sampler
    combined with a toilet or means to attach the sampler to the toilet.

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, for a sampling process wherein a
    step of causing or promoting a chemical reaction, or regulating or
    controlling a chemical reaction, are claimed.

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 174 for coring-type cutting tools having plural
    cooperating blades.

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 126.4 for distance measuring
    devices of the sounding type having sampling means.

    55,     Gas Separation, subclass 270 for subject matter of that class type
    combined with sampling means.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 185+ for subject
    matter of that class type combined with sampling means.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 14.01+ for milking machines.

    137,    Fluid Handling, generally and especially subclasses 561+ for other
    fluid-handling systems.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    for a device or method of filling a receiver which is not part of a
    sampling system.  Note in particular subclasses 21+, 29, 110, and 130.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclass 30, for a combination of a
    concentrating evaporator vessel with means for withdrawing a quantity of
    liquid for examination.

    166,    Wells, for an apparatus or method for sampling well fluids
    (including gas), particularly subclasses 107+, 142+, 162+, and 264.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 232+, 244+ and 308+ for
    means to receive and retain a sample from the formation, including solid
    earth, in an earth-boring tool.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 513+ for
    gravitational separators; especially subclasses 514+ for milk and cream
    separators.

    222,    Dispensing, for subject matter of that class type which may include
    an apparatus or process for obtaining a predetermined portion of material
    from a mass but not for testing purposes. See also the note to Class 222 in
    this class (73), subclass 864.01, Pipettes.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 288 for mass spectrometers with sample
    supply.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 317+ for a seal combined with an indicator, sampler, or
    inspection feature.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 36+ for subject matter
    of that class type including sample preparation; and subclasses 244+ for
    sample holders.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 157 for a thermometer
    combined with a sample cup; and subclass 140 for a molten metal lance which
    may include a sample chamber.

    417,    Pumps, for sample pumps, per se.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, for a sampler wherein means for causing,
    promoting, regulating or controlling a chemical reaction are claimed.

    435,    Chemistry: Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 309.1+
    for inoculators, streakers, or samplers adapted for use with microorganisms
    and enzymes; and subclass 288.6 for a microorganism or enzyme measuring and
    testing apparatus including a column separation means.

    600,    Surgery, subclass 562 for body fluid samplers having means to
    contact the living body.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 181+ for syringes.


CLS 73/863.01
TXT Automatic control:

    Subject matter under subclass 863 combined with a sensing element for
    sensing a condition of the source or sample, and means to modify the
    operation of the sampler in response thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 87+ for self-proportioning or
    correlating fluid-handling systems.


CLS 73/863.02
TXT Quantity or rate of flow responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 863.01 wherein the condition sensed is either
    the source flow volume or source speed relative to the sampler.

    (1)     Note.  The sensor is frequently a pressure or level-responsive
    element.


CLS 73/863.03
TXT Rate of sample flow continuously controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 863.02 including means to constantly control
    the rate of movement of the sample.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    863.02, for quantity or rate of flow-responsive samplers with means
    controlling the frequency of sample-taking events.


CLS 73/863.11
TXT With heating or cooling:

    Subject matter under subclass 863 including means to actively change or
    maintain the temperature of the source or sample.

    (1)     Note.  The use of heat insulation alone is insufficient basis for
    classification in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  A sampler which changes or maintains the temperature of a
    sample due to eutectic or latent heat (phase change) is included here, but
    a device utilizing solely the thermal capacity of thick-walled molds are
    found in subclasses 864.53+.


CLS 73/863.12
TXT And separation:

    Subject matter under subclass 863.11 further including isolation of
    individual components of the source or sample.

    (1)     Note.  The separation may or may not be enhanced by the heating or
    cooling, as by a change of state of one or more of the components; for
    example, condensation, vaporization, freezing, etc.


CLS 73/863.21
TXT With constituent separation:

    Subject matter under subclass 863 including isolation of individual
    components of the source or sample.

    (1)     Note.  The isolating means can, in itself, be a capture element or
    merely be a means to further refine the source or sample.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, subclass 232 for a process of gas
    sampling involving the use of sorbents or chemical treatment.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 83+ for an apparatus for gas
    sampling involving use of sorbents or chemical treatment.


CLS 73/863.22
TXT Particle impact:

    Subject matter under subclass 863.21 wherein separation is accomplished by
    directing a fluid current containing particles toward a solid surface, the
    isolated particles remaining on the surface.


CLS 73/863.23
TXT Sieve, filter, or semipermeable membrane:

    Subject matter under subclass 863.21 including a barrier having
    interstices, pores or micropores through which at least part of the source
    or sample flows but which trap some components of the flow, usually
    particulate.


CLS 73/863.24
TXT Cleaning:

    Subject matter under subclass 863.23 having means to remove particulate
    matter from the barrier.


CLS 73/863.25
TXT Changing feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 863.23 having means to facilitate replacement
    of the barrier.


CLS 73/863.31
TXT Plural parallel systems:

    Subject matter under subclass 863 including more than one sampling system.

    (1)     Note.  A multiplicity of at least two components is required; for
    example, plural capture elements feeding separate transport or handling
    means leading to a receiver is included here, while a single tube
    (transport means) having a plurality of sidewall openings (capture
    elements) is not included.

    (2)     Note.  Plural systems in series, that is, a system for taking a
    primary sample and subsequently taking a secondary sample from the primary
    sample, are not included here.


CLS 73/863.32
TXT Pipette:

    Subject matter under subclass 863.31 wherein the plural capture elements
    are tubes sufficiently small to retain liquid against the pull of gravity
    by surface tension.


CLS 73/863.33
TXT Plural capture, single receiver:

    Subject matter under subclass 863.31 wherein the separately captured
    samples are fed to a common receiver.


CLS 73/863.41
TXT Flow divider, deflector, or interceptor:

    Subject matter under subclass 863 wherein a capture element separates a
    sample from a moving source by utilizing the kinetic energy of the source.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type includes a capture
    element which deflects the residue and allows the sample to continue
    undisturbed.

    (2)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type does not include a
    capture device which would not function without a moving source.


CLS 73/863.42
TXT Attached to mouth of dumpable receptacle:

    Subject matter under subclass 863.41 wherein a capture element is mounted
    adjacent an opening of a source container, the capture element sampling
    material issuing from the opening as the receptacle is inverted.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type includes a sampler
    attached to railroad car dumping mechanisms.


CLS 73/863.43
TXT Having precapture flow guide or homogenizer:

    Subject matter under subclass 863.41 including means for contacting the
    moving source material upstream from the capture element, the contacting
    means either rendering the flow pattern more uniform or changing the flow
    direction with respect to the capture element.

    (1)     Note.  The contacting means can be a fluid current (e.g.,
    compressed air).

    (2)     Note.  Mere contact with a conduit or flow confining means through
    which the source flows in an undisturbed manner is not sufficient for
    classification herein.


CLS 73/863.44
TXT Oscillating or reciprocating:

    Subject matter under subclass 863.43 wherein the contacting means is
    mounted for back and forth movement.


CLS 73/863.45
TXT Rotary:

    Subject matter under subclass 863.43 wherein the contacting means is
    mounted to pivot about an axis for at least one revolution.


CLS 73/863.51
TXT Having an upstream-facing-opening-type capture element:

    Subject matter under subclass 863.41 wherein the capture element or
    elements define an aperture or slot facing the direction of origin of
    source flow at the time a sample is taken.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    863.41, for a single blade movable capture element which deflects a sample
    to one side of a flowing source and the residue to the other side.


CLS 73/863.52
TXT With receptacle:

    Subject matter under subclass 863.51 wherein the opening is an entrance to
    a container which receives the sample.

    (1)     Note.  Means may be provided for emptying the container immediately
    upon filling.


CLS 73/863.53
TXT Mounted for flow zone traverse:

    Subject matter under subclass 863.52 having means for mounting the
    receptacle for movement in a path entirely across a stream of flowing
    material.


CLS 73/863.54
TXT Mounted for reciprocation:

    Subject matter under subclass 863.51 having means for mounting the capture
    element for back and forth movement in a linear path into or across the
    stream of flowing source material.


CLS 73/863.55
TXT Oscillating:

    Subject matter under subclass 863.51 having means for mounting the capture
    element for back and forth movement in a substantially arcuate path into or
    across the stream of source material.


CLS 73/863.56
TXT Rotary:

    Subject matter under subclass 863.51 wherein the capture element is mounted
    to pivot about an axis for at least one revolution.


CLS 73/863.57
TXT With blocking means:

    Subject matter under subclass 863.51 having movable means adjacent the
    capture element which selectively obstructs or permits capture.


CLS 73/863.58
TXT Pitot tube type:

    Subject matter under subclass 863.51 wherein the capture element is in the
    form of the end of a conduit facing substantially upstream toward the
    direction of origin of the source.

    (1)     Note.  The sample enters the conduit and the residue flows past its
    exterior.


CLS 73/863.61
TXT Branched conduit:

    Subject matter under subclass 863.41 comprising a flow-confining means
    which splits into at least two paths, the sample flowing into one and the
    residue flowing into another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    864,    for a conduit having a three-way valve for intermittently diverting
    the full flow of the source to an alternative conduit.


CLS 73/863.71
TXT Conduit or passageway section capture chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 863 comprising means to isolate a fluid
    sample within a finite length of flow channel and means to withdraw the
    isolated sample from the length of flow channel.

    (1)     Note.  Source fluid normally flows through the flow channel, and
    isolation means are frequently in the form of valves at both ends of a
    section of the flow channel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    863.81+, for a capture chamber movable through a conduit wall.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, for fluid flow confining systems not specialized to
    sampling.


CLS 73/863.72
TXT Single valve unit:

    Subject matter under subclass 863.71 wherein the isolation means is a
    single movable valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, for a valve, per se.


CLS 73/863.73
TXT Capture chamber within valve unit:

    Subject matter under subclass 863.72 wherein the isolatable section of flow
    channel is located within the single movable valve element.


CLS 73/863.81
TXT Withdrawing through conduit or receptacle wall:

    Subject matter under subclass 863 comprising a capture device mounted in
    contact with source-confining structure to capture and transport a sample
    through a wall of the confining structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    864.01+, particularly 864.23, 864.24+ and 864.85 for pipette devices, many
    of which have means for piercing a portable receptacle closure made of
    elastomeric material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclass 30 for a sampler combined with
    a closed evaporating chamber.


CLS 73/863.82
TXT Capture element movable to plural loci:

    Subject matter under subclass 863.81 including a capture element which is
    movable to plural locations within the source receptacle or conduit to
    obtain samples at each location.


CLS 73/863.83
TXT With metering means or pump:

    Subject matter under subclass 863.81 comprising a positive displacement
    means moving or permitting movement of a sample at a controlled rate or
    frequency from a capture element within the source receptacle or conduit to
    an external receiver.

    (1)     Note.  The positive displacement means can be inter alia, an auger,
    expansible chamber or trap chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    863.02, for a sample metering means or pump responsive to a flow sensor.

    864.34, for a sample metering means or pump, per se.


CLS 73/863.84
TXT Expansible chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 863.83 wherein the positive displacement
    means is a compartment including means to change its volume.


CLS 73/863.85
TXT Lock or seal for sampler insertion or removal:

    Subject matter under subclass 863.81 including means to prevent loss of
    source fluid when the capture device moves through the source-confining
    wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86,     for means to insert a test piece into a closed system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 315+ for a fluid-handling systems with
    repair or tapping means.


CLS 73/863.86
TXT Valve or restriction:

    Subject matter under subclass 863.81 having a conduit in communication with
    the source side of the wall and means to selectively close off or to
    restrain the sample flow to a receiver.

    (1)     Note.  Remote valve actuators combined with a sampling cup are
    included here.


CLS 73/863.91
TXT Conveyor coacting:

    Subject matter under subclass 863 combined with a movable source-advancing
    apparatus and including a capture element for removing a sample as the
    source is advanced.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    863.41+, for a sampler which obtains a sample after the source has been
    discharged from a conveyor or chute.

    863.51, for samplers comprising an opening in a conveyor belt through which
    the sample passes as the source is loaded onto the belt.

    863.81+, for a sampler for withdrawing a sample through a source-confining
    wall.

    864.32, for a sampler having a scoop mounted to cyclically sample a source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, for subject matter of that class type,
    particularly subclass 339 for conveyors with inspection means.


CLS 73/863.92
TXT Integral with conveyor structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 863.91 wherein the capture element is built
    into the conveyor, functioning in cooperation with or in some cases in
    place of the source-advancing means.


CLS 73/864
TXT Capture device:

    Subject matter under subclass 863 comprising a capture element for
    separating a sample from its source and one other element to either
    transport or receive a sample therefrom.


CLS 73/864.01
TXT Pipette or cannula:

    Subject matter under subclass 864 wherein the capture device is a tube of
    sufficiently small dimension to retain liquid therein by surface tension.

    (1)     Note.  A pipette of general utility is included here.

    (2)     Note.  A pipette having a point designed to penetrate a sample
    container or test apparatus is included here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, for a process of using a pipette
    wherein a step of causing, promoting, regulating or controlling a chemical
    reaction is claimed.

    128,    Surgery, for similar subject matter (e.g., hypodermic needles)
    designed to be used with a living body.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 22+ and 29 for a pipette combined with a supply container.

    222,    Dispensing, for similar subject matter of that class type not
    involving sampling; particularly subclass 420 for drop formers.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, for a pipette wherein means to cause, promote,
    regulate, or control a chemical reaction is claimed.


CLS 73/864.02
TXT Self-filling or self-limiting:

    Subject matter under subclass 864.01 comprising a tube of such size or
    material that liquid will be drawn thereinto without application of a
    suction thereto or which tends to stop filling at a predetermined point.

    (1)     Note.  The disclosure of such a relationship will be sufficient for
    placement here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    864.72, for a capture element comprising a body having pores in interstices
    into which liquid is drawn or held by capillary attraction.


CLS 73/864.03
TXT With user mouth protection:

    Subject matter under subclass 864.01 wherein the tube includes a mouthpiece
    comprising means to prevent movement of liquid to the mouthpiece when an
    operator applies suction to the tube.

    (1)     Note.  The disclosure of such a function will be sufficient for
    placement here.


CLS 73/864.11
TXT With suction applying and liquid discharge means:

    Subject matter under subclass 864.01 having means for controlling the
    pressure within the pipette to a first reduced pressure for loading the
    pipette and a second higher pressure to unload the pipette.

    (1)     Note.  The higher pressure need not be greater than atmospheric
    pressure.


CLS 73/864.12
TXT With separate diluent supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 864.11 comprising means to supply a secondary
    liquid, usually a diluent, to the interior of the proximal end of the tube
    for delivery through the distal end after the sample is unloaded therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, for apparatus for mixing reagents for analysis.


CLS 73/864.13
TXT Piston within pipette:

    Subject matter under subclass 864.11 wherein the pressure-controlling means
    is a plunger contacting the interior walls of the tube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    864.16, for similar subject matter wherein the piston is within a cylinder
    which is separate from the pipette.


CLS 73/864.14
TXT With particular connection or release means:

    Subject matter under subclass 864.11 including a connector between the
    pipette and the suction pressure applying means which either includes a
    particular sealing feature or a means for disconnecting the two parts.


CLS 73/864.15
TXT With valve for connection to external pressure source:

    Subject matter under subclass 864.11 wherein the pressure-controlling means
    includes a means to open or close communication to a pressure source or
    ambient air.

    (1)     Note.  An opening intended to be closed by an operator's finger is
    included here.


CLS 73/864.16
TXT Piston and cylinder:

    Subject matter under subclass 864.11 wherein the suction applying and
    liquid discharge means is a sliding piece closely fitting within a tubular
    vessel to form an expansible chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    864.13, for similar subject matter wherein the cylinder is a pipette.


CLS 73/864.17
TXT Plural:

    Subject matter under subclass 864.16 including more than one piston and
    cylinder expansible chamber.


CLS 73/864.18
TXT Plural or adjustable limit stops:

    Subject matter under subclass 864.16 including means for changing the
    stroke of the piston with respect to the cylinder so that the change of
    size of the expansible chamber can be varied.


CLS 73/864.21
TXT With sample supply to analyzer:

    Subject matter under subclass 864.01 including means to introduce or inject
    the sample captured by the pipette to or into an analyzer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    864.81, for a device, per se, which supplies or injects a sample to or into
    an analyzer.


CLS 73/864.22
TXT With pipette contacting second fluid supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 864.01 having means either integral with or
    embracing the pipette for providing a fluid other than the sample.

    (1)     Note.  The second fluid is usually for cleaning or rinsing the
    tube, or diluting or dividing the sample into segments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    864.12, for pipettes with interior diluent supply means.

    864.25, for sampling devices wherein the tube is mounted for both
    longitudinal movement and transverse movement, the transverse movement
    being to a position to pick up a secondary fluid.


CLS 73/864.23
TXT Pipette fixed; source movable:

    Subject matter under subclass 864.01 having a nonmovable pipette, and a
    receptacle containing a source mounted for movement relative to the pipette.


CLS 73/864.24
TXT Pipette longitudinally movable:

    Subject matter under subclass 864.01 wherein the pipette is mounted for
    movement substantially lengthwise.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 130 for an apparatus which fills successive receivers from a
    continuously flowing source.


CLS 73/864.25
TXT And transversely movable:

    Subject matter under subclass 864.24 wherein the pipette is additionally
    mounted for movement substantially transverse to its longitudinal axis.


CLS 73/864.31
TXT With capture device transporter:

    Subject matter under subclass 864 including means for mounting the capture
    device for movement alternately between a position to contact and capture a
    sample from source to a remote delivery location (receiver).

    (1)     Note.  A mere handle, line or lead to be grasped by an operator is
    not included here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    863.81+, for structure for moving a capture device through a containment
    wall.


CLS 73/864.32
TXT Cyclically operated scoop:

    Subject matter under subclass 864.31 wherein the capture device is an
    opentopped receptacle mounted for repetitive travel from the sample capture
    location to the sample delivery location (receiver).


CLS 73/864.33
TXT Capture by fluid current:

    Subject matter under subclass 864 comprising means for directing a fluid
    current toward a source material so that the sample is captured and
    entrained therein for transport to a receiver.


CLS 73/864.34
TXT Sample meter or pump:

    Subject matter under subclass 864 including a device comprising a positive
    displacement means moving or permitting movement of the sample at a
    controlled rate or frequency from a capture element to a receiver.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of displacement devices are a screw conveyor, an
    expansible chamber, trap chamber, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    863.02, for meters or pumps driven by flow-responsive means.

    863.83, for sample metering or pumping devices combined with a source
    containment means.


CLS 73/864.35
TXT Chamber with alternate pressure or vacuum applier:

    Subject matter under subclass 864.34 having a chamber and means to
    sequentially apply at least two different pressures to the chamber.

    (1)     Note.  Usually during the application of the lower pressure or
    vacuum the sample flows into the chamber and during the application of the
    higher pressure the sample flows out of the chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 118+ for pumps, per se.


CLS 73/864.41
TXT Cutter, tearer, or scraper:

    Subject matter under subclass 864 wherein the capture element is a means to
    cut, tear, or scrape a sample from its source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 919 for a cross-reference art collection of
    sample-taking by cutting.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, for samplers of the earth.


CLS 73/864.42
TXT Jaw:

    Subject matter under subclass 864.41 wherein the cutting or tearing element
    is opposable members that sever material.


CLS 73/864.43
TXT Auger or drill:

    Subject matter under subclass 864.41 wherein the cutting or tearing element
    is a cutting edge usually at the end of a helical blade rotatable about an
    axis which cuts across the full cross section of the sample as it advances
    into the source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, for augers, drills,
    etc., per se.


CLS 73/864.44
TXT Corer:

    Subject matter under subclass 864.41 wherein the cutting or tearing element
    cuts only the periphery of the sample as it is advanced into the source
    material, leaving a sample in the form of an undisturbed, central portion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 403+ and the search
    there noted for a bit for cutting an earth core.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 204+ for
    other corer.


CLS 73/864.45
TXT With corer advancing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 864.44 including means to move the corer
    along its length.


CLS 73/864.51
TXT Receptacle type:

    Subject matter under subclass 864 comprising a container which is either
    integral with a capture element or acts in itself as a capture element.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this and indented subclasses usually
    captures a sample in a single event.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    864.31, for a capture receptacle combined with a transport means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 110 for ladles.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 162+ and the subclasses there noted for a
    receptacle for sampling well fluid; and subclass 264 for a process of
    sampling well fluid.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 308+ for an
    earth-boring tool combined with a receptacle to catch the earth cuttings.


CLS 73/864.52
TXT Preevacuated:

    Subject matter under subclass 864.51 wherein the receptacle is a chamber
    which has been evacuated prior to its use as a sampler.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclass 163, for receptacles with separate air chambers for
    sucking in well fluid.


CLS 73/864.53
TXT Mold:

    Subject matter under subclass 864.51 wherein the receptacle is in the form
    of a cavity for receiving a liquid sample which solidifies therein to form
    a solid sample.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    863.11, for a sampler having a cooling means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, for molds of general utility.


CLS 73/864.54
TXT With suction applier:

    Subject matter under subclass 864.53 having means for applying a reduced
    pressure to the mold.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    864.11, for a pipette sampler having a separate suction-applying means.

    864.52, for a sampler wherein the receiving chamber is preevacuated.


CLS 73/864.55
TXT With diminutive fill passageway:

    Subject matter under subclass 864.53 wherein the mold cavity has an opening
    or conduit of reduced cross section through which liquid flows before
    solidifying in the cavity.


CLS 73/864.56
TXT Mating sections:

    Subject matter under subclass 864.55 wherein the mold is formed by plural
    separable elements each of which has a recess which together form a mold
    cavity.


CLS 73/864.57
TXT Labyrinth:

    Subject matter under subclass 864.56 wherein the mold includes additional
    chambers or passageways to form a complex sample structure.


CLS 73/864.58
TXT With sample conditioner:

    Subject matter under subclass 864.53 having means for altering the
    condition of the sample before, after or during its flow into the mold
    chamber.


CLS 73/864.59
TXT With holder or connector:

    Subject matter under subclass 864.33 having means to hold the mold or
    connect it to a manipulative handle.


CLS 73/864.61
TXT Fluid displacement:

    Subject matter under subclass 864.51 wherein the receptacle contains a
    fluid immiscible with the sample, and the sample is caused to enter the
    container by controlled removal of the fluid (can be air) from the
    receptacle.


CLS 73/864.62
TXT Expansible chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 864.51 wherein the receptacle includes means
    to change its volume.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclasses 107+ for receptacles with pump or plunger means
    for sampling well fluid.


CLS 73/864.63
TXT With valve or closure:

    Subject matter under subclass 864.51 wherein the receptacle is combined
    with means to close an opening in the receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 200+ for a receptacle closure, per se.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, for valves, per se.


CLS 73/864.64
TXT Side opening:

    Subject matter under subclass 864.63 wherein the receptacle comprises a
    tubular element and the valve includes a side opening in the tubular
    element.

    (1)     Note.  Concentric tubes having alignable openings are included here.


CLS 73/864.65
TXT Contact actuated:

    Subject matter under subclass 864.63 wherein the receptacle valve is
    actuated by means responsive to impinging upon an object.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are fluid samplers which capture a sample
    upon hitting the bottom of an ocean, lake, river, tank, etc.


CLS 73/864.66
TXT Support force or inertia actuated:

    Subject matter under subclass 864.63 wherein the receptacle valve is
    actuated by means responsive to the tension or change in tension of the
    receptacle support structure.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the valve is actuated by a jerk on a string.


CLS 73/864.67
TXT Messenger actuated:

    Subject matter under subclass 864.63 wherein the receptacle valve is
    actuated by a separate element released by an operator.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a weight slidable upon a support cable.
    which travels from the operator to the sampler.


CLS 73/864.71
TXT Material for particulate adhesion:

    Subject matter under subclass 864 wherein the capture element contains a
    material to which sample dust sticks.


CLS 73/864.72
TXT Capillary attraction retention:

    Subject matter under subclass 864 wherein the capture element is a body
    having pores or interstices into which liquid is drawn and held by
    capillary attraction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    864.02, for a pipette which utilizes capillary attraction.


CLS 73/864.73
TXT Conduit:

    Subject matter under subclass 864 wherein the capture devices comprises a
    tube through which a sample is drawn to a receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    863.58, for Pitot tube type flow deflectors.

    864.33, for similar devices for entraining sample material in a fluid
    current.

    864.44, for a cylindrical coring device having a cutting edge.

    864.61, for pipettes.


CLS 73/864.74
TXT With penetrating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 864.73 wherein the end of the conduit is
    provided with means to penetrate a substantially solid material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    863.85, for sampling from a containment means through a septum seal by
    means of a pointed cannula.


CLS 73/864.81
TXT Analyzer supplier:

    Subject matter under subclass 863 comprising means to introduce a
    previously obtained sample into a testing apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    864.21, for a pipette-type capture device combined with means to inject the
    sample into a analyzer.


CLS 73/864.82
TXT Having sample capsule support:

    Subject matter under subclass 864.81 wherein the means to introduce
    includes means for supporting a sample capsule and means to penetrate or
    fracture the capsule to release the sample to the analyzer.


CLS 73/864.83
TXT Having sample confining chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 864.81 wherein the means to introduce
    includes a sample isolating compartment and valve means to release the
    sample from the compartment to the analyzer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    863.71, for samplers in which a conduit section is isolated to capture a
    sample, many of which introduce the captured sample into an analyzer.


CLS 73/864.84
TXT Connector for separable holder:

    Subject matter under subclass 864.83 having means to connect a separate
    sample holder to the chamber so that the sample to be analyzed can be
    transferred from the sample holder to the chamber.

    (1)     Note.  A pipette or tube which merely dips into a receptacle
    containing a sample is not included here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    864.85+, for means to connect a separate sample holder directly to an
    analyzer.


CLS 73/864.85
TXT Connector for separable holder:

    Subject matter under subclass 864.81 having means to connect a separate
    sample holder directly to an analyzer input.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    864.84, for means to connect a separate sample holder to a sample confining
    chamber.


CLS 73/864.86
TXT Septum structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 864.85 wherein the means to connect the
    separate holder is a continuous membrane intended to be pierced by a hollow
    needle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    863.85, for sampling from containment means through a septum.

    864.84  and 864.87, for a sample supply device which may include a septum
    as part of a connector.


CLS 73/864.87
TXT Syringe with connector:

    Subject matter under subclass 864.85 wherein the sample holder includes a
    contractible section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    864.21, for a pipette-type capture device combined with means to inject the
    sample into an analyzer.


CLS 73/864.91
TXT Sample holder:

    Subject matter under subclass 863 comprising means for receiving and
    storing a sample.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    864.51+, for a sample holder operatively associated with a capture device,
    or which in itself acts as a capture device.

    864.62, for an expansible chamber capture device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 244 for a holder or
    support for a sample undergoing an optical test.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 102 for a container specifically
    designed for use in a laboratory.


CLS 73/865
TXT MASS:

    Subject matter under the class definition for making a quantative
    determination of the amount of matter in a body of material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for testing dimension, shape or size by the application of  fluid
    pressure.

    156,    for verification of statistical records such as holes in cards.

    157,    for verification of apertures in picture film or record strips.

    163,    for testing coins, which may involve testing of size or weight.

    861.5+, for a device for measuring the rate of flow of a moss of fluent
    material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, for devices or processes for making
    geometrical measurements.

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclass 51, for coin weighers which also measure
    dimensions.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 509, for
    classifying and assorting special items.

    453,    Coin Handling, for coin sokrters.


CLS 73/865.1
TXT HUMAN STRESS LIMIT (E.G., DECOMPRESSION GAUGE FOR DIVERS):

    Subject matter under the class definition responsive to parameters to which
    humans may be subjected for indicating the approach of theoretical limits
    which they can withstand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for gas analysis.

    299,    for bathometer type of hydrostatic level gauge.

    384+,   for altimeters.

    700+,   for pressure gauges, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 102, for
    time temperature relationship measuring; and subclass 109 for climate
    related measuring.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 102, for time temperature
    relationship measuring; and subclass 109 for climate related measuring.


CLS 73/865.2
TXT HYDRAULIC ALTIMETER:

    Subject matter under the class definition for measuring the difference
    between a reference elevation and an unknown elevation by  means of a
    pressure developed by a liquid.

    (1)     Note.  The liquid is usually contained within a conduit extending
    from the higher to the lower elevation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 377, for liquid type horizontal
    or level determining devices.


CLS 73/865.3
TXT TESTING BY IMPARTING MOTION:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which a specimen as a whole is
    subjected to a predetermined movement or acceleration.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are devices for simulating zero gravity or
    high G conditions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.75+,  for proving or calibrating a device which measures an angle,
    direction, or inclination.

    1.79+,  for proving or calibrating a device which measures displacement,
    movement, distance, or position.

    12.01,  for testing by impact or shock.

    570+,   for vibration testing, and particularly, subclasses 662+ for
    vibrating a specimen.


CLS 73/865.4
TXT ANALYZING BODILY MOVEMENT (E.G., SKILLS OR KINETICS OF HANDWRITING):

    Subject matter under the class definition investigation the forces or
    motion involved in a specific bodily activity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172,    for orthopedic pressure distribution.

    379.01, for muscular strength measuring.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, for a practice or training device
    combined with means for analyzing bodily movement which is used by a player
    of a projectile game to improve or perfect his or her skills in playing the
    game (e.g., a swing training device used by a player to practice for, or
    train in, swinging a baseball bat, golf club, or tennis racket, etc.).

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 587+, for diagnostic for measuring the force
    exerted by the body.


CLS 73/865.5
TXT PARTICLE SIZE:

    Subject matter under the class definition for measuring diameter of small
    pieces of material such as found in powder of granular of other finely
    divided material.  The determination may be of the average, or the
    proportion of the total of each of a plurality of sizes distributed through
    a range.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for determining the solid material contained in a liquid.

    61.4,   for measuring the setting or filtering ability of a liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 71.4 for counting
    particles in a liquid using electrical means.


CLS 73/865.6
TXT SIMULATED ENVIRONMENT (E.G., TEST CHAMBERS):

    Subject matter under the class definition for testing by surrounding a
    specimen with conditions which memic or exaggerated normal conditions which
    surrounds the object which the specimen represents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for testing by abrasion, milling, rubbing or scuffing.

    35.01+, for measuring engine knock or detonation.

    35.14+, for testing of an explosive.

    35.17,  for a safety feature or a containment structure detail for use
    while testing an explosive.

    37,     for testing by application of fluid pressure.

    147,    for wind tunnels.

    148,    for model basins.

    150,    for tests of a coating material, ink, adhesive or plastic, some of
    which simulate an environment.

    159,    for tests of sheet material, or fabric, some of which simulate an
    environment.

    570,    for testing by applying a vibration to a specimen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, for test involving thermal
    simulation of conditions surrounding the object being tested.


CLS 73/865.7
TXT TOUCH OR TASTE:

    Subject matter under the class definition for testing of materials or
    objects to determine their properties utilizing either the tactual sense or
    those associated with oral contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for the analysis of gases utilizing the sense of smell.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 300+ and appropriate indented subclasses for
    diagnostic testing of the various senses.


CLS 73/865.8
TXT INSPECTING:

    Subject matter under the class definition not provided for elsewhere
    including apparatus or processes for sensing and signaling or indicating
    physical conditions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 317+ for a seal combined with an indicator, sampler, or
    inspection feature.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 200 for magnetic
    sensing; subclasses 323+ for sensing the presence or location of small
    objects of a geophysical surface or subsurface in site; subclasses 51+ for
    electrical fault sensing and location; and subclasses 76.11+ for sensing
    electricity, per se.


CLS 73/865.9
TXT TESTING OF APPARATUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition for investigating a tool or
    machine to determine its proper functioning.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is apparatus for simulation of the normal
    actuation of the apparatus or simulation of the object or material upon
    which the apparatus works.

    (2)     Note.  Included here are monitoring devices for machines not
    otherwise classified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11.04,  for test of shock absorbing apparatus.

    52,     for test of sealed receptacle.

    66+,    for test of rotor unbalance.

    112+,   for power plant or unit efficiency.

    116+,   for motor or engine testing.

    121+,   for brake testing.

    146,    for tire tread or roadway testing.

    156,    for statistical record verifying.

    157,    for record strip sprocket hole.

    158,    for testing hoisting cable.

    161,    for spring testing.

    162,    for toothed gear testing.

    163,    for coin tests.

    164,    for miner's lamp testing.

    167,    for ordnance or projectile testing.

    168,    for blower pump or hydraulic equipment testing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, for a nonelectrical signalling means or
    indicating means, per se.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, for electrical signal of indicators
    responsive to a condition of and apparatus.


CLS 73/866
TXT TESTING OF MATERIAL:

    Subject matter under the class definition not provided for elsewhere for
    investigating a substance to determine its properties.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for testing a material for its gas content.

    23,     for gas analysis.

    32+,    for specific gravity or density determination.

    36,     for illuminating fluid testing.

    53+,    for liquid or liquid suspension of solid measuring and testing.

    73+,    for moisture content or absorption characteristic determining.

    78+,    for hardness testing.

    86,     for embrittlement or erosion testing.

    87,     for ductility or brittleness testing.

    104+,   for surface and cutting edge testing.

    150,    for testing of ink, adhesive or plastic coating material.

    159+,   for stress or strain testing.

    169,    for flour, dough or bread testing.

    760+,   for stress or strain testing.

    865.5,  for determining particle size.


CLS 73/866.1
TXT INSTRUMENT MECHANISM OR TRANSMISSION:

    Subject matter under the class definition for transmitting or modifying a
    signal or movement produced by a condition sensing element and for applying
    it to an indicator or read out device.

    (1)     Note.  The signal may be mechanical, electrical or optical.

    (2)     Note.  The particular sensing element is either not specified, not
    otherwise provided for in Class 73, or there are plural sensing elements
    which include or do not include a sensor provided for in Class 73.

    (3)     Note.  Included here are perfecting devices for measuring
    instruments such as means for reducing the effects of friction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    430,    for instrument mechanism dampening.

    496,    497, 498, and 530+, for speed or acceleration measuring devices
    with particular transmission structure.

    861.01+, 861.43+ and 861.48, for volume or rate of flow meters with
    particular transmission structure.


CLS 73/866.2
TXT Rate of change:

    Subject matter under subclass 866.1 for modifying a signal produced by a
    sensing element to indicate a variation of the sensed condition during a
    unit of time.

    (1)     Note.  The particular sensing element is either not claimed, not
    otherwise provided for in this class, or there are plural sensing elements,
    some of which are provided for in this class.

    (2)     Note.  Included here are electrical, mechanical, or pneumatic
    mechanisms.

    (3)     Note.  Included here are devices which have two sensing elements,
    one of which responds to changes in the sensed condition quickly and one of
    which responds to the sensed condition slowly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179,    for rate of climb meters.

    514.01+, for a device for utilizing an inertia element for measuring the
    rate of change in speed.

    861+,   for volume or rate of flow meters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 335 for circuits having an output proportional to a rate
    of change of voltage input.


CLS 73/866.3
TXT DISPLAY OR DISPLAY DEVICE DETAILS:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means which indicate a
    quantity of measurement or aids in the observation thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    178,    for navigation devices many of which indicate a plurality of
    conditions.

    291,    for liquid level gauges combined with other measuring devices.

    336,    for hygrometers combined with other measuring devices.

    714,    for pressure gauges combined with other measuring devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 280, for deverse indicators, per
    se.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, for electrical indicators, per se.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 142+ for the thermometers
    combined with other measuring devices.


CLS 73/866.4
TXT SPECIMEN MODEL OR ANALOG:

    Subject matter under the class definition not provided for elsewhere
    comprising an object having a special shape or form of or being a
    representation of a testpiece or simulation of the response of an object
    being investigated indirectly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147,    for models of aircrafts to be tested in wind tunnels.

    148,    for models of ships to be tested in model basins.


CLS 73/866.5
TXT PROBE OR PROBE MOUNTING:

    Subject matter under the class definition which includes structure of a
    measuring probe or a mounting for a measuring probe.

    (1)     Note. The particular sensing element is either not specified, not
    otherwise provided for in this class, or there are plural sensing elements,
    none of which are provided for in this class.

    (2)     Note.  The mounting may be either stationary or movable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65.06   and 65.09, for sensors for determining center of gravity, turning
    moment, or metacentric height.

    86,     for means for mounting an erosion or embrittlement sensing probe.

    147,    for means for mounting a model in a wind tunnel.

    159,    for means for mounting a sheet material sensing element.

    618+    and 633, for means for mounting a vibration transducer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 140, 155, and 208, for
    temperature sensing probes and mounting therefor.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS

    The following subclasses are a collection of cross-references of published
    disclosures pertaining to various specified aspects of the measuring and
    testing of or by vibrations with beamed waves which aspects do not
    necessarily form appropriate bases for subclasses in the foregoing
    classification (i.e., subclasses superior hereto in the schedule).  These
    subclasses may be of further assistance to the searcher as a starting point
    in further related fields of search either inside or outside the class.
    Thus, there is here provided a second access for retrieval of a limited
    number of types of disclosures.

    (1)     Note.  Disclosures are placed in these subclasses for their value
    as references and as leads to appropriate main or appropriate main or
    secondary fields of search without regard to their original classification.

    (2)     Note.  The disclosures cross-referenced into the following
    subclasses are examples only of the indicated subject matter and in no
    instance do they represent the entire extent of the prior art.


CLS 73/900
TXT AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL:

    Subject matter pertaining to vibration measuring or testing with beamed
    waves wherein an automatic gain control is provided to vary the gain in the
    receiving means to compensate for loss of received signal due to
    conditions, as attenuation by the test body, other than that which is to be
    measured or indicated.

    (1)     Note.  The gain may also be controlled in effect by varying the
    power of the transmitted signal.


CLS 73/901
TXT DIGITAL READOUT:

    Subject matter pertaining to vibration measuring or testing with beamed
    waves wherein the measurement is in the form of a digital readout.

    FOREIGN ART COLLECTIONS

    The definitions for FOR 100 - FOR 105 below correspond to the definitions
    of the abolished subclasses under Class 73 from which these collections
    were formed.  See the Foreign Art Collection schedule for specific
    correspondences.  [Note:  The titles and definitions for indented art
    collections include all the details of the one(s) that are hierarchically
    superior.]


CLS 73/FOR100
TXT Foreign art collection for investigating physical
    conditions of well bores, casings and drill rigging, such as misalignments,
    stuck pipe sections, drill loading factors, determination of the proper
    placement of liners, determining the rate at which drilling is proceeding,
    etc.


CLS 73/FOR101
TXT Foreign art collection for measuring the rate at which the
    drill cuts through the formations, or for periodically determining the
    depth of the cutting tool, so that said rate could be computed.


CLS 73/FOR102
TXT Foreign art collection for strata identification, as by
    bore hole studies of pressure derivatives or of pressure-temperature
    derivatives, etc.


CLS 73/FOR103
TXT Foreign art collection for correlating depth with
    occurrence of representative sample obtained from the formation, with
    conventional means or procedure for inspecting or analyzing the sample for
    its oil-gas-water content or ratio.


CLS 73/FOR104
TXT Foreign art collection for evaluating possible production
    potentials from different strata, or for identifying the geologic structure
    of encountered strata, by measuring the thermal responses opposite those
    strata, either by direct measurement of formation temperatures or by
    measuring the temperature modification by drill mud lying opposite
    different strata.


CLS 73/FOR105
TXT Foreign art collection for ascertaining rates, directions
    and magnitudes of fluid flow, either from the formation into the bore hole
    or from the bore hole into the formation, under natural or controlled
    pressure and/or temperature conditions.  Production indices are here
    included.


CLS 74/
TTL MACHINE ELEMENT OR  MECHANISM

CLS 74/
TXT Mechanical combinations, contrivances, or devices constituting portions of
    machines, instruments and apparatus and consisting of two or more fixed and
    movable parts so combined that the motion of one compels a completely
    controlled or constrained motion of the other according to a law of
    operation inherent in and depending on the nature of the combination, and
    also the elemental parts of such machines not provided for in other machine
    element classes.

    (1)     Note.  This class is intended as a generic class for mechanism and
    machine parts not otherwise classified.  Other machine element classes
    subgeneric hereto are Class 384, Bearings; Class 464, Rotary Shafts,
    Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for Rotary Shafts.

    (2)     Note.  This class does not include machines and instruments or
    apparatus claimed as such, for which see the appropriate art classes.  It
    does not include the special tools, instruments, and subcombinations
    peculiar to the special arts and provided for in the classification of the
    art classes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, appropriate subclasses and particularly subclasses 174+, for
    machine elements combined with locks wherein the element or its associated
    structure is modified solely to accommodate the lock, or where the device
    is modified for the reception of a locking device, whether or not claimed.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 488+ for a speed responsive
    device, per se.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices.  For the line between Class 74 and
    Class 92, see section III of the class definition of Class 92 under SEARCH
    CLASS 74.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 90.1+ and 188.1+, for valve
    operating mechanism.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, appropriate subclass for subject matter
    directed to driving or impacting a tool, when such subject matter includes
    combined features peculiar to tool driving, but which does not include
    features limiting the subject matter to a specific tool art, such as
    specific shape of the work contacting portion of the tool, related tools,
    or an opposed work support.  See section IV of the Class 173 class
    definition for a statement of the line with Class 74.

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    appropriate subclasses.

    188,    Brakes, appropriate subclasses and especially subclasses 105-108
    for brake operators.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, appropriate subclasses and
    especially subclasses 82+, for clutch operators.

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, appropriate subclasses.

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, appropriate subclasses.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 213+ for mechanical movement
    valve actuators.

    267,    Spring Devices, appropriate subclasses.

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, appropriate subclasses.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, various subclasses for bodies and
    tops having movable components which may be actuated by mechanical means.

    384,    Bearing, appropriate subclasses, and see (1) Note above.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, see (1) Note supra.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, appropriate
    subclasses, and see particularly (5) Note under section II in the class
    definition of Class 474.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, for planetary
    gear transmissions.

    476,    Friction Gear Transmission Systems or Components, for friction gear
    transmissions.

    477,    Interrelated Power Delivery Controls, Including Engine Control, for
    interrelated control between an engine and a transmission.


CLS 74/1
TXT Miscellaneous mechanisms under the class definition and not provided for
    below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 754 and 757+ for
    directive antennas with scanning, sweeping or orienting of the beam, and
    including mechanisms for imparting spiral, rotary or rotary oscillatory
    motion to the antenna.


CLS 74/1.5
TXT Mechanisms under the class definition comprising devices in which a
    unidirectionally biased power member, during at least a portion of its
    movement, imparts motion to an element which, as a result of such movement,
    alternately locks and releases the biased member for intermittent operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    526,    for lever stops.

    565,    for controller checks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, or Animal Powered, subclass 5, for
    composite weight motors which are escapement controlled and see the search
    notes thereunder for related search fields.


CLS 74/2
TXT Mechanisms under the class definition for releasing or tripping portions of
    machines to cause other portions to automatically operate due to the
    expenditure of the potential energy possessed by such parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    584+,   for automatically released yieldable pitmans and connecting rods.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 521, for obstacle trip
    actuated changeable exhibitors.

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 401+, for delivery trip shockers, and 432+,
    for tripped compressors and binders.

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclasses 15 for trip actuated
    file cutters, and subclasses 62 and 67 for trip actuated saw setters.

    89,     Ordnance, subclasses 1.5+, for trip devices associated with bomb,
    flare, and signal dropping devices.

    111,    Planting, subclasses 14+, for check wire tripped drillers.

    114,    Ships, subclass 210, for anchor trips.

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, subclasses 31+, for trigger
    mechanism.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 237+ and the subclasses there noted for trip
    devices in wells.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, appropriate subclasses.

    188,    Brakes, subclass 111, for trip operated vehicle brakes.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses.

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclass 116 for cable load suspension trips.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclasses 76 and 201+, for track
    trips, 171+, for derailment contact trips and 359+, for train energy
    actuated trips.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclasses 332+ for trip actuated closure
    fasteners.

    293,    Vehicle Fenders, subclasses 33, 35 and 37, for trip actuated
    fenders.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 75+ for machine operations of an
    electrophotography device and subclasses 107+ for particular structure of
    the device, specifically subclasses 110+ for modular or displaceable
    components.


CLS 74/3
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 2 wherein the releasing or tripping is initiated
    by a speed responsive device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 535+ for a speed sensor of the
    centrifugal weight type.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 140 for speed
    responsive limit stops and subclass 147 for speed response clutch releases
    combined with brakes.


CLS 74/3.2
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 3 wherein a flow controlling valve is the
    released or tripped device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for other automatically-operated valve gear trips not speed
    responsive nor otherwise classifiable in subclasses below.


CLS 74/3.5
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 2 preset to cause the releasing or tripping at a
    particular time of day or at the termination of a particular time interval
    following the setting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 51.14+ for feeding devices including
    timer controlled trips.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 624.19 and 624.22 for valves including
    timer controlled trips.

    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, or Animal Powered, subclasses 27+ for a
    retarded trip releasing a weight motor and subclasses 37+ for a retarded
    trip releasing a spring motor.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 39+ for an
    electrical circuit switch controlled by a retarded latch trip.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 243+ for
    an horological device controlling the tripping of a sounding device, and in
    the definition of subclass 152 see the "Note"


CLS 74/3.52
TXT Mechanism under subclass 3.5 preset to cause sequential tripping of a
    single part or tripping of several parts in sequence.


CLS 74/3.54
TXT Mechanism under subclass 3.5 including a clock, a clock train or similar
    gearing.


CLS 74/3.56
TXT Mechanism under subclass 3.54 wherein the trip includes the winding knob of
    a spring powered clock train or the winding knob of a spring powered
    operator (e.g., alarm mechanism) under the control of the clock train.


CLS 74/4
TXT Mechanism under subclass 2 wherein the releasing or tripping is
    intermittent and the mechanism is intended to insure a uniform speed output.


CLS 74/5
TXT Devices under the class definition defined in (1) Note, below and known as
    gyroscopes.

    (1)     Note.  A conventional gyroscope is a mechanism comprising a rotor
    journaled to spin about one axis, the journals of the rotor being mounted
    in an inner gimbal or ring, the inner gimbal being journaled for
    oscillation in an outer gimbal which in turn is journaled for oscillation
    relative to a support.  The outer gimbal or ring is mounted so as to pivot
    about an axis in its own plane determined by the support.  Hence the outer
    gimbal possesses one degree of rotational freedom and its axis possesses
    none.  The inner gimbal is mounted in the outer gimbal so as to pivot about
    an axis in its own plane which axis is always normal to the pivotal axis of
    the outer gimbal. Hence the inner gimbal possesses two degrees of
    rotational freedom and its axis possesses one.  The rotor is journaled to
    spin about an axis which is always normal to the axis of the inner gimbal.
    Hence the rotor possesses three degrees of rotational freedom and its axis
    possesses two. The center of gravity of the rotor is thus in a fixed
    position.  The rotor simultaneously spins about one axis and is capable of
    oscillating about the two other axes, and thus except for its inherent
    resistance due to rotor spin, it is free to turn in any direction about the
    fixed point.

    Some gyroscopes have mechanical equivalents substituted for one or more of
    the elements, e.g., the spinning rotor may be suspended in a fluid, instead
    of being pivotally mounted in gimbals.  In some special cases, the outer
    gimbal (or its equivalent) may be omitted so that the rotor has only two
    degrees of freedom.  In other cases, the center of gravity of the rotor may
    be offset from the axis of oscillation, and thus the center of gravity of
    the rotor and the center of suspension of the rotor may not coincide.

    (2)     Note.  This is the generic locus for gyroscopes.  Every rotating
    body has gyroscopic action, but such devices are not placed here unless at
    least one axis of oscillation is present.

    (3)     Note.  For combinations of gyroscopes with other devices see
    indented subclass 5.22 and the notes thereto appended.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.22,   and the notes thereto and see (2) Note supra.

    572+,   for rotors, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 182.1 for gimbals, per se.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 233+ for gyroscopic toys,
    including gyroscopic tops.


CLS 74/5.1
TXT Gyroscopes under subclass 5 combined with mechanism to hold the rotor axis
    fixed, when the rotor is not spinning, or if spinning, when it is desired
    to take the gyroscope out of useful operation.

    (1)     Note.  The rotor axis may be positively held with respect to the
    gyroscope support, or it may be heavily weighed to hold the rotor axis
    fixed with respect to the earth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.44,   where the force of gravitation, acting upon a weight, and reacting
    against the rotor axis erects an operative gyroscope.


CLS 74/5.12
TXT Devices under subclass 5.1 having a mechanism to impart spin to a rotor and
    a further means to release the holding means after the rotor is up to speed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.7,    for rotor drives.


CLS 74/5.14
TXT Devices under subclass 5.1 wherein further means is provided to adjust or
    vary the position held.  This may be done by having the means which holds
    the rotor axis adjustable to vary the position held, or by having the first
    means restrain movement in one plane and a second means to position the
    rotor axis in that plane.


CLS 74/5.2
TXT Gyroscopes under subclass 5 wherein means is provided to prevent alignment
    of the rotor axis with a gimbal axis.


CLS 74/5.22
TXT Gyroscopes under subclass 5 combined with structure other than the
    gyroscope, except means to control and/or drive the mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  The large majority of patents found here are of the
    stabilizing type and recite the device stabilized by name only.  Where
    structure of the device over and above that necessary to mount the device
    is claimed, or where a particular relationship to the device is claimed,
    the patents have been classified with the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.4+,   for gyroscope control.

    5.37,   for drives for plural gyroscopes.

    5.7,    for drives for single gyroscopes.

    64,     for inertia or centrifugally controlled rotary transmitters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 230, 236, and 275, for
    straight-line-light-ray instruments utilizing a gyroscope and subclasses
    316+ and 318+, for direction sensing and indicating instruments utilizing a
    gyroscope.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 504.2+, for a gyroscope combined
    with a speed responsive device.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 141+, for monorail type railway
    rolling stock combined with gyroscopes and subclasses 150+, for suspended
    monorail type rolling stock combined with gyroscopes.

    114,    Ships, subclasses 21.1 and 24, for gyroscopically controlled
    torpedo steering mechanism; subclass 122, for gyroscopic anti-rolling
    stabilizers combined with ships; and subclass 144, for gyroscopic
    controlled steering.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 79, for gyroscope actuated automatic aircraft
    control.

    396,    Photography, subclass 13 for an aerial camera which is
    gyroscopically stabilized.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 233+ for gyroscopic toys, and
    subclass 462 for wheeled toys having inertia-operated driving means.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, for
    gyroscopically controlled planetary gearing.


CLS 74/5.34
TXT Gyroscopes under subclass 5 comprising two or more gyroscopes.


CLS 74/5.37
TXT Devices under subclass 5.34 having means for driving the gyroscopes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.7,    for drives for single gyroscopes.


CLS 74/5.4
TXT Gyroscopes under subclass 5 having means to apply one or more forces to the
    rotor axis to control the movement of the rotor axis about its center of
    suspension.


CLS 74/5.41
TXT Devices under subclass 5.4 wherein one or more forces act to move the rotor
    axis to a given position, usually to a vertical position.

    (1)     Note.  Where the force of the surrounding atmosphere against a
    plurality of vanes is used for erection, the patent will be found in this
    subclass.


CLS 74/5.42
TXT Devices under subclass 5.41 where at least two diverse forces are used for
    erection.

    (1)     Note.  Pendulous gyroscopes having an additional means to erect
    them are here when both means are claimed, an cross-referenced to the
    subclasses indented hereunder for the separate means.


CLS 74/5.43
TXT Devices under subclass 5.41 wherein the force of a fluid jet is used for
    erection.


CLS 74/5.44
TXT Devices under subclass 5.41 wherein the gravitational force upon a weight
    is utilized for erection.

    (1)     Note.  Pendulous gyroscopes with no other erecting controls are
    here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.1,    for weight actuated parking or caging devices.

    5.42,   for pendulous gyroscopes having an additional force utilized for
    erection.


CLS 74/5.45
TXT Devices under subclass 5.41 wherein the application of a frictional force
    is utilized for erection.

    (1)     Note.  Where the force of the surrounding atmosphere against a
    plurality of vanes is used for erection, the patents will be found in
    subclass 5.41.


CLS 74/5.46
TXT Devices under subclass 5.41 wherein the force of a magnetic field is
    utilized for erection.


CLS 74/5.47
TXT Devices under subclass 5.41 where the torque of a prime mover constitutes
    the force used for erection.


CLS 74/5.5
TXT Devices under subclass 5.4 having means to dampen the oscillation of the
    gimbals, or of the rotor axis.


CLS 74/5.6
TXT Gyroscopes under subclass 5 having a means to sense the relative position
    or change of position of the rotor axis, and/or its gimbals.

    (1)     Note.  The sensing means normally actuates or controls a signal,
    indicator or a control for another device.


CLS 74/5.7
TXT Gyroscopes under subclass 5 having means to drive the rotor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.12,   for rotor spin mechanism combined with cage release mechanisms.


CLS 74/5.8
TXT Gyroscopes under subclass 5 peculiarly constructed for operating with the
    spin axis in a vertical position only.


CLS 74/5.9
TXT Gyroscopes under subclass 5 peculiarly constructed for operating with the
    spin axis in a horizontal position only.


CLS 74/6
TXT Mechanical movements and/or gearing, combined as a unit, under the class
    definition for initiating the starting of a machine, in which operative
    engagement with the machine to be started is initiated and controlled and
    power is applied to the gearing by some conventional means.

    (1)     Note.  See the Index, under "Starter" and "Starting".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139+,   for intermittent unidirectional motion type engine starters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, sub- classes 179.1+ for other starting
    devices for internal combustion engines.

    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, or Animal Powered, subclasses 6+, 10+, 32,
    and 39, for structure for winding motors of the weight and spring types.

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants, subclasses 10, 22-38, 46-68, for
    dynamo-electric starter-generator structure.


CLS 74/7
TXT Starters under subclass 6 in which the operative engagement with the
    machine to be started is automatic.


CLS 74/8
TXT Starters under subclass 6 in which meshing of the gears with the machine to
    be started takes place in a radial direction.


CLS 74/9
TXT Starters under subclass 6 in which meshing of the gearing with the machine
    to be started is accomplished by a cam device other than a screw.


CLS 74/10
TXT Assemblies under the class definition particularly adapted for mechanically
    rotating one or more shafts of electronic tuning devices into desired
    angular positions.

    (1)     Note.  The art is directed to the positioning of radio tuning
    shafts having indicating means and/or variable condensers associated
    therewith for adjustment.

    (2)     Note.  Electrically actuated dial operators are not here, even
    though claimed in combination with mechanical operators for these
    subclasses.  They will be found in Class 192, Clutches and Power-Stop
    Control, subclasses 138+, and in Class 318, Electricity:  Motive Power
    Systems, appropriate subclasses (including particularly subclasses 560+,
    which has the follow-up type motor controls).  The line between these two
    classes is stated in the class definition of Class 318 at IE 6c, and under
    the reference to Class 192 under "SEARCH CLASSES" at the end of the class
    (318) definition.

    (3)     Note.  These subclasses will take the recitation of a condenser,
    inductance, transformer or a radio tuner by name only when claimed in
    combination with shaft positioning means.  Whenever significant structure
    of the condenser, inductance, transformer, or tuner are recited, the
    devices will be classified in Class 455, Telecommunications, particularly
    subclasses 150.1+ where radio tuner structure is recited. Class 334,
    Tuners, appropriate subclasses for radio tuner structure, per se, or Class
    336, Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses where variable transformer or
    inductance structure is recited.  Where the operator is merely a screw
    gearing and the tuner is recited by name only, the search should be
    continued in this class (74), subclass 424.8.

    (4)     Note.  These subclasses will take the shaft positioning means with
    respect to its support in combination with indicating means to indicate the
    position, adjustment or movement of the shaft.


            Class 116, Signals and Indicators, subclasses 200+, provides for
    indicators attached to, or associated with some movable device to indicate
    the movement, adjustment or position of such device.  Indented subclasses
    241+, provides for radio tuner position indicators.  Class 116 will take
    shaft positioning means with respect to its support (even though in the
    form of a mechanical movement) in combination with the indicating means
    when only the part of the shaft positioning means with respect to its
    support necessary to operate the indicator is claimed, i.e., where no
    structure for positioning the shaft is recited which does not operate the
    position indicator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20      through 110 inclusive, for nonintermittent type mechanical
    movements.

    111+,   for intermittent grip type mechanical movements.

    424.8,  for screw gearing, and see (3) Note supra.

    469+,   for control lever and linkage systems.

    526,    for stops for levers.

    553,    for knob or dial operators.

    640,    for gearing.

    813+,   for assemblies of general utility, including turret mechanisms for
    metal working machines having means to index rotary members, and see the
    Notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 200+, and particularly
    subclasses 241+, and see (4) Note supra.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 138+, for power-stop
    limit controls and see (2) Note, supra.

    235,    Registers, appropriate subclasses for related operating devices for
    registers and particularly subclasses 12+, for those which are key board
    operated.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    controlled electric motor operators, particularly subclasses 560+, for
    servo controlled operators and see (2) Note, supra.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for variable transformer
    or inductance structure combined with shaft positioning means, and see (3)
    Note, above.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 271+ for
    specific variable condenser structure.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 230+ for joints between the end
    of a shaft and a plate-like member.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 150.1+ for radio receivers with
    tuners, see (3) Note.


CLS 74/10.1
TXT Devices under subclass 10 having interengaging means by which the rotation
    of the shaft may be halted at a plurality of predetermined angular
    positions.


CLS 74/10.15
TXT Devices under subclass 10.1 having means interposed between a single
    initiator and the shaft for rotating the shaft through a series of
    successive predetermined positions, the rotation of the shaft being halted
    at each such successive position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126+,   for mechanical movements for changing reciprocating motion to
    intermittent unidirectional motion, and particularly subclass 142 for lever
    actuators.


CLS 74/10.2
TXT Devices under subclass 10.1 having a rotatable stop element for halting
    shaft movement and a movable abutment for the stop element, and means for
    moving the abutment into a position in which the stop element may contact
    the abutment.

    (1)     Note.  Electric motor control of the rotatable stop elements and/or
    the movable abutments will be found in Class 192, Clutches and Power-Stop
    Control, subclasses 138+, and particularly subclass 142; and the
    appropriate subclass of Class 318, Electricity:  Motive Power Systems,
    subclasses 560+, for position servo control systems particularly subclass
    614, friction braking at balance; see (2) Note to this class (74), subclass
    10.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 138+, for power-stop
    limit controls and see (1) Note.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    electric motor control, and particularly subclasses 560+, for position
    servo control type particularly subclass 614, for friction braking at
    balance; and see (1) Note.


CLS 74/10.22
TXT Devices under subclass 10.1 in which the shaft operator is a dial and is
    provided with a series of single finger-receiving openings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 11, for dial
    operated switches.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclass 363 for a telephone dial
    mechanism.


CLS 74/10.27
TXT Devices under subclass 10.1 having more than one operator for controlling
    the shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10.54,  for separate operators for each of a plurality of speed drives of
    the nonselective type dial operators.

    479,    for plural input single output lever and linkage systems.

    625+,   for alternate manual and power operators.

    665+,   for plural input single output gearing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, appropriate subclasses for related operating devices for
    registers and particularly subclasses 12+, for those which are keyboard
    operated.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses 1+
    for plural power sources for driving planetary gearing.


CLS 74/10.29
TXT Devices under subclass 10.27 wherein a cam and follower is interposed
    between the operator and the shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10.6,   for nonselective cam and follower type dial operators.

    567+,   for cam and/or follower structure, per se.


CLS 74/10.31
TXT Devices under subclass 10.29 wherein the cam is adjustable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    568,    for adjustable cams, per se.


CLS 74/10.33
TXT Devices under subclass 10.31 where the cam is carried by a sliding operator.


CLS 74/10.35
TXT Devices under subclass 10.29 wherein the follower is adjustable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    569,    for followers, per se.


CLS 74/10.37
TXT Devices under subclass 10.35 where the cam is carried by a sliding operator.


CLS 74/10.39
TXT Devices under subclass 10.27 wherein a rack and pinion gearing is
    interposed between at least one of the operators and the shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    422,    for rack and pinion gearing, per se.


CLS 74/10.41
TXT Devices under subclass 10.1 in which a detent or click device tends to hold
    the shaft in the predetermined positions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    527+,   for detents, per se.


CLS 74/10.45
TXT Devices under subclass 10 in which a plurality of shafts are rotated by a
    single operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    471+,   for single input plural output lever and linkage systems.

    665+,   for single input plural output gearing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, for plural
    outputs from planetary gearing.


CLS 74/10.5
TXT Devices under subclass 10 in which the shaft may be rotated at a plurality
    of speeds.

    (1)     Note.  In most cases, a fast speed is used for coarse rotational
    adjustment and a slow speed for fine adjustment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    325+,   for interchangeably locked nonplanetary gearing.


CLS 74/10.52
TXT Devices under subclass 10.5 wherein a planetary gearing is interposed
    between the operator and the shaft.

    SEARCH  CLASS:

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, for planetary
    gearing, per se.


CLS 74/10.54
TXT Devices under subclass 10.5 having separate operators for each speed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10.52,  for separate operators for planetary gearing.

    665+,   for plural input single output nonplanetary type gearing.


CLS 74/10.6
TXT Devices under subclass 10 wherein a cam and follower is interposed between
    the operator and the shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10.29+, for selective type cam and follower dial operators.

    567+,   for cam and/or follower structure, per se.


CLS 74/10.7
TXT Devices under subclass 10 wherein the operator includes a flexible strand
    operating in tension only, usually in the nature of a belt and pulley
    drive, although the strand may be anchored to one of the pulleys.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, appropriate
    subclasses for a belt and pulley drive in a power transmission.


CLS 74/10.8
TXT Devices under subclass 10 wherein gearing is interposed between the
    operator and the shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    640+,   for gearing, per se.


CLS 74/10.85
TXT Devices under subclass 10.8 where the gearing is of the worm or screw type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    424.8,  for screw type gearing, per se.

    425,    for worm type gearing, per se.


CLS 74/10.9
TXT Devices under subclass 10 wherein a lever and linkage system is interposed
    between the operator and the shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    469+,   for lever and linkage systems, per se.


CLS 74/11
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising a subordinate power
    transmitting assembly, additional to and driven by one of the elements of a
    main power line, or by the prime mover therefor.

    (1)     Note.  Power take offs from a prime mover for this class (74) are
    here unless they are made from a shaft extension of a prime mover, in which
    case, see this class, subclass 15.63. Take offs for engine accessory drives
    will be found in Class 123, Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 198; take
    offs involving vehicle structure are found in Class 180, Motor Vehicles,
    subclasses 53.1+; and take offs for vehicle driven pumps are in Class 417,
    Pumps, subclasses 231+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15.63,  and see (1) Note, supra.

    16,     plural driven devices actuated from a power table or stand.

    640+,   for gearing, per se.

    665+,   for plural driven devices of general application.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 198, for take offs for engine
    accessories (and see (1) Note, supra).

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 35+ for an earth working implement
    comprising an earth working tool driven by a power take-off, and subclasses
    492+ and the subclasses there noted for an earth working implement adjusted
    by a power take-off.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 53.1+, for power take offs involving
    vehicle structure (and see (1) Note, supra).

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 124+,
    for drilling machines in which the feeding movement between tool and work
    is effected by means actuated by the rotation of the tool spindle.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, for gearing
    driving plural load devices.


CLS 74/12
TXT Assemblies under subclass 11, in which the auxiliary driven element is a
    speedometer.


CLS 74/13
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 11, in which the power is taken directly from or
    transmitted directly to, the wheels of a vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 166.3+ and 388+, for portable power saws.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 53.1+, for power take-offs combined with
    vehicle structure.

    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, or Animal Powered, subclasses 15+, for
    animal powered motors.


CLS 74/14
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 13, in which the mechanisms are provided with
    power transmitting or receiving elements which contact with and support at
    least one wheel of the vehicle.


CLS 74/15
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 13, in which power is delivered from or to a
    vehicle wheel through a device attached thereto, the wheel being out of
    peripheral contact with any other object.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, appropriate
    subclasses for pulley structure and for pulleys used in endless belt power
    transmissions.


CLS 74/15.2
TXT Devices under subclass 11 having a plurality of power take-off shafts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for plural driven devices actuated from a power table or stand.

    665+,   for plural driven devices of general application.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 48.1+ for plural
    clutch-assemblages, and especially subclasses 48.8+ for such assemblages
    associated with three or more shafts, one of which may be a power take-off
    shaft.


CLS 74/15.4
TXT Devices under subclass 11 in which independent gearing means are provided
    to effect a change in output speed of, and/or a forward or reverse drive
    for, the take-off.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    325+,   for nonplanetary change speed gearing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, for planetary
    change speed gearing.


CLS 74/15.6
TXT Devices under subclass 11 in which either a prime mover shaft, a main power
    line shaft, or an auxiliary driven shaft is extended to constitute a power
    take-off.

    (1)     Note.  The so-called "power take-off shaft" to be found on some
    type of tractors is considered to be an auxiliary driven shaft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for shaft couplings
    of a nonflexible type.

    464,    Rotary  Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, appropriate subclasses for a flexible coupling between a
    torque transmitting shaft and a driven member.


CLS 74/15.63
TXT Devices under subclass 15.6 in which a shaft in a prime mover for the power
    line (e.g., a crank shaft or a cam shaft) is extended to constitute a
    take-off.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for other take-offs from prime movers, and see (1) Note to that
    definition for the line between these two subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 185.1+, for engine
    crankshaft extensions employed for engine starting and subclass 198 for
    engine accessories driven by a shaft extension.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 231+, for vehicle engine driven power take-offs
    for pumps.


CLS 74/15.66
TXT Devices under subclass 15.6 in which a shaft in a change speed transmission
    is extended to constitute the take-off.


CLS 74/15.69
TXT Devices under subclass 15.6 in which the propeller shaft of a vehicle is
    extended to constitute a take-off.

    (1)     Note.  The power take-off is normally at the differential.


CLS 74/15.80
TXT Devices under subclass 11 which are driven by a connection in the main
    power transmitting line and intermediate its driving and driven ends.

    (1)     Note.  A power transmitting line is a power path comprising, e.g.,
    one or more clutches and/or gearing and/or brakes, having a prime mover at
    one end and a load at the other.


CLS 74/15.82
TXT Devices under subclass 15.8 in which the power transmitting line is used
    for vehicle propulsion.


CLS 74/15.84
TXT Devices under subclass 15.82 in which the connection to the transmitting
    line is located between the prime mover output shaft and the transmission.


CLS 74/15.86
TXT Devices under subclass 15.82 in which the driving connection comprises a
    gear in mesh with a second gear, which second gear is part of the
    transmission gearing.


CLS 74/15.88
TXT Devices under subclass 15.82 in which the driving connection to the
    transmitting line is located between the driven shaft of the transmission
    and the propeller shaft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 48.1+ for plural
    clutch-assemblages, and especially subclasses 48.8+ for such assemblages
    associated with three or more shafts, one of which may be a power take-off
    shaft.


CLS 74/16
TXT Portable assemblies under the class definition designed to drive one or
    more auxiliary attachments.

    (2)     Note.  For stands, per se, see Class 312, Supports:  Cabinet
    Structure, subclasses 21+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 49.1+ for a
    machine having a brush as its sole type of cleaning instrument, and  that
    is especially adapted for cleaning a floor, wall, or ceiling.

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 20+ for a power
    driven horizontally supported surface of general utility.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 637+ for machinery supports.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 47 and 50 for
    portable or hand held electric motors.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, (see (2) Note).

    366,    Agitating, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 197+ and
    208+.

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 103+ for dental engines.


CLS 74/17
TXT Assemblies under the class definition particularly adapted for the
    operation of a washing and wringing machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    378+,   for interchangeably locked, single clutch shaft, single forward and
    reverse gearing.

    385+,   for interchangeably locked, pivotally supported bevel gearing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 21+, for textile
    fluid treating apparatus combined with fluid extraction of the squeezing
    type.


CLS 74/17.5
TXT Devices under the class definition for compelling a reciprocating part to
    be actuated to its full extent before it can be returned.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclass 313 for pliers and plural-handle wrenches with
    jaw-movement completion means.


CLS 74/17.8
TXT Devices under the class definition having an imperforate member functioning
    as a seal for an aperture in a partition or for a passageway, the member
    being flexible at least in part to permit movement with respect to the
    partition and being fixed to the partition or walls of the passageway,
    there being means contacting one side of the seal member to receive or
    transfer motion from or to the member, and there being relative motion
    between the seal member and the means at the point of contact.

    (1)     Note.  The seal member may include bearing surfaces or the like to
    minimize the effect of the relative motion on the seal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18+,    for flexible seals pierced by a rod, which seal is fixed to its
    support and to the rod.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 148 for electric lamp
    and discharge devices provided with means to transmit motion to an
    electrode through a movable envelope wall portion.


CLS 74/18
TXT Devices under the class definition in which motion is transmitted through a
    sealed casing by means of a flexible sealing material attached to the
    casing and to a moving rod which passes through the sealing material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    566,    for slot closers for levers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 34+ for a bellows type
    expansible chamber device and subclasses 96+ for a diaphragm type
    expansible chamber device.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 90.6 for guards for pedals and gear shift
    levers.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 634+ for a static contact seal for other than an
    internal combustion engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable that is a flexible
    sleeve, boot, or diaphragm.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 146+, for
    electronic tubes and electric lamps having a sealed envelope and provided
    with means for transmitting force from the outside of the envelope to the
    interior of the envelope for the purpose of moving an electrode within the
    envelope.

    403,    Joints and Connections appropriate subclasses for a mere connection
    comprising a flexible diaphragm or bellows joining a plate or wall and a
    rod passing through an aperture therein.

    464,    Rotary  Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, subclasses 52+ for a flexible shaft combined with a housing;
    and subclasses 170+ for a housing for a rotary shaft.


CLS 74/18.1
TXT Devices under subclass 18 in which the rod pivots or nutates.


CLS 74/18.2
TXT Devices under subclass 18 in which the rod reciprocates longitudinally.

    Mechanical Movements.  Devices under the class definition other than
    gearing for imparting motion to one body from the motion of another body,
    wherein the two motions, or some intermediate motion, are of different
    form, type or degree.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    469+,   for control lever and linkage systems.

    640+,   for gearing.

    828+,   for mechanical movement having "on the fly" adjustment of the
    driven member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.


CLS 74/20
TXT Mechanical Movements for converting oscillating motion to the compound
    motion of reciprocation and alternating rotary motion.


CLS 74/21
TXT Mechanical Movements for converting oscillating motion to the compound
    motion of reciprocation and intermittent rotary motion.


CLS 74/22
TXT Mechanical Movements for converting rotary motion to the combined motion of
    reciprocation and rotary motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 205, for
    apparatus using this mechanical movement.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 241 and 242 for drive
    mechanisms in fishing reels that convert rotary input into both
    reciprocation and rotation of an output.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 431+ for apparatus for
    advancing and rotating an elongated article not intended to remain
    associated with the apparatus (e.g., a tube to be worked on) by means
    adapted to engage the article between its ends.


CLS 74/23
TXT Mechanical Movements for converting rotary motion to the compound motion of
    reciprocation and alternating rotary motion.


CLS 74/24
TXT Mechanical Movements for converting rotary motion to the compound motion of
    reciprocation and intermittent rotary motion.


CLS 74/25
TXT Mechanical Movements for converting rotary motion to or from reciprocating
    or oscillating motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 215+, for rotary power driven multiple shearing
    position shears.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 262+, for
    apparatus using this mechanical movement.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 158+, 241+, 271+, and
    447.1+ for drive mechanisms that convert a rotary input motion into
    reciprocation or oscillation of a line guide.

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 118+ for reciprocating or oscillating dental
    instruments receiving rotary power.


CLS 74/26
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 25, especially adapted for shaking screens in
    which the screen is not claimed as a positive element and excepting those
    driven by unbalanced weights.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for screens driven by unbalanced weights.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 750.1+, for reciprocating
    conveyors using this mechanical movement.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, for driving
    mechanisms in combination with the screen.


CLS 74/27
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 25 for converting rotary motion to or from
    reciprocating or oscillating motion of a carriage in which the driven
    member is driven by different types of mechanism during different parts of
    its stroke.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclasses 292+, for web type presses and subclasses
    316+, for other type presses having reciprocating beds for bed and platen
    machines.


CLS 74/28
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 27, especially adapted for moving the tone arm of
    a phonograph across the record.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 215+ for such
    subject matter combined with tone arm structure.


CLS 74/29
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 25, in which the mechanism involved is a rack and
    pinion and cannot be classified in any of the subclasses under this
    subclass.


CLS 74/30
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 29, in which the rack moves in and out of
    engagement with the pinion.


CLS 74/31
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 29, in which the pinion moves in and out of
    engagement with the rack.


CLS 74/32
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 29, in which the teeth on the pinion cover less
    than 360 degrees of the circumference of the pinion.


CLS 74/33
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 29, in which the pinion is always in mesh with
    the rack but its direction of rotation is alternated.


CLS 74/34
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 29, in which the pinion or pinions are constantly
    in mesh with the rack but are clutched and declutched to the shaft by which
    they are carried.


CLS 74/35
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 34, in which the pinion or pinions are constantly
    in mesh with the rack but are clutched and declutched to the shaft by which
    they are carried, the pinions being of the bevel type.


CLS 74/36
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 25, in which the mechanisms involved either
    prevents the device from stopping on dead center or has some auxiliary
    mechanism for throwing the device off of dead center.


CLS 74/37
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 25, which change the motion by means of a chain
    or belt.


CLS 74/38
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 25, including a crank, lever, toggle, and slide.


CLS 74/39
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 25, including a crank, lazy-tong, and slide.


CLS 74/40
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 25, including a crank, pitman, lever, and slide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 78, for variable clearance,
    four cycle engines.


CLS 74/41
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 40, including a crank, pitman, lever and slide of
    the pump jack type.


CLS 74/42
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 25, including a crank, pitman, and lever.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 217, for multiple shearing position shears using
    this mechanical movement.


CLS 74/43
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 42, including a crank, pitman, and a plurality of
    levers.


CLS 74/44
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 25, including a crank, pitman, and slide.


CLS 74/45
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 25, including a crank, lever, and slide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 218, for multiple shearing position shears using
    this mechanical movement.


CLS 74/46
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 45, including a crank, lever, and slide and the
    connection between part of the members including a rack.


CLS 74/47
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 25, including a crank and lever.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 219, for multiple shearing position shears using
    this mechanical movement.


CLS 74/48
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 47, including a crank and lever with a slidable
    connection between the crank and lever.


CLS 74/49
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 25, including a crank and slide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 220, for multiple shearing position shears using
    this mechanical movement.


CLS 74/50
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 49, including a crank and slide with a slidable
    connection between the crank and slide.


CLS 74/51
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 25, including a crank and more than one pitman.


CLS 74/52
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 25, including planetary gearing and a slide.


CLS 74/53
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 25, including a cam, lever, and slide.


CLS 74/54
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 25, including a cam and lever.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 219, for multiple shearing position shears using
    this mechanical movement.


CLS 74/55
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 25, including a cam and slide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    838,    for a cam and slide adjusting a stroke "on the fly".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 220, for multiple shearing position shears using
    this mechanical movement.


CLS 74/56
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 55, including a cam and slide, the cam being of
    the axial type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    839,    for axial type cams adjusting a stroke "on the fly".


CLS 74/57
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 56, including a cam and slide, the cam being of
    the axial type and the cam surface being in the form of a groove in the cam
    surface.


CLS 74/58
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 57, including two axially grooved cams or screws
    rotating in opposite directions, one of which drives or is driven by the
    reciprocated or oscillated member or slide in one direction and the other
    in the opposite direction.


CLS 74/59
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 57, including an axially grooved cam connected to
    a slide, the cam being alternately rotated as the slide alternately changes
    its direction.


CLS 74/60
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 55, including an axial cam and slide, the cam
    being of the wabbler type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123,    for intermittent wabbler gearing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 499+ for expansible
    chamber motors utilizing wabbler type, axial cams and slides.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 56.2+ for an
    internal-combustion engine which utilizes a rotary output shaft, parallel
    to the engine cylinders which is driven by a cam on the rotary output shaft.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses 163+
    for planetary wabbler gearing.


CLS 74/61
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 25, in which the mechanism involved makes use of
    unbalanced weights to produce the reciprocating or oscillating motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 367, for
    apparatus utilizing this mechanical movement.


CLS 74/62
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 25, in which the mechanism involved includes a
    cam having a plurality of intersecting slots, in which slide projections on
    a beam or connecting rod.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 30.1+, for ellipsographs.


CLS 74/63
TXT Mechanical movements for changing rotary motion to rotary motion.


CLS 74/64
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 63, in which the motion is changed by means of
    inertia or centrifugal means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 93.5+ for a tool impacting
    device which comprises a connection adapted to rotate a tool in low torque
    condition and yield in overload to deliver torsional impact.


CLS 74/65
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 63 in which the motion is changed by means of a
    crank, pitman, lever, and crank.


CLS 74/66
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 63, in which the motion is changed by means of a
    crank, lever, and crank.


CLS 74/67
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 63, in which the motion is changed by means of a
    crank, pitman, and crank.


CLS 74/68
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 63, in which the motion is changed by means of
    cranks which are connected together by links.


CLS 74/69
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 63, in which the motion is changed by cranks
    which are slidably connected together.


CLS 74/70
TXT Mechanical Movements for converting rotary motion to alternating rotary
    motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    318     through 324, for alternating rotary gearing.


CLS 74/71
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 70, in which the motion is changed by means of a
    mangle and gearing and the driving member is the shiftable member.

    (1)     Note.  By mangle is meant a rack, wheel, or any other movable
    member having teeth on opposite sides, engaged by a pinion which meshes
    with the opposite sides alternately, to convert the continuous rotary
    motion of the pinion to an oscillating or reciprocating motion of the
    mangle rack, or wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    318     through 324, for converting rotary to alternating rotary motion by
    gearing not of the mangle type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses, for
    apparatus using this mechanical movement.


CLS 74/72
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 71, in which the motion is changed by means of a
    mangle and gearing and the driven member is the shiftable member.


CLS 74/73
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 72, the driven gear being shiftable and the teeth
    on the mangle being located along the center line of the mangle.


CLS 74/74
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 71, in which the motion is changed by means of a
    mangle and gearing and the gearing is mutilated.


CLS 74/75
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 70, in which the motion is changed by means of a
    crank, pitman, and lever.


CLS 74/76
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 70, in which the motion is changed by means of a
    reciprocating rack.


CLS 74/77
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 76, in which the motion is changed by means of a
    reciprocating rack driven by a crank and pitman.


CLS 74/78
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 76, in which the motion is changed by means of a
    reciprocating rack driven directly by the crank.


CLS 74/79
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 70, in which the motion is changed by means of an
    oscillating rack.


CLS 74/80
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 79, in which the rack is mangle actuated.


CLS 74/81
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 79, in which the rack is driven by a crank and
    pitman.


CLS 74/82
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 70, in which the motion is changed by means of a
    flexible member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95,     for other mechanical movements using flexible connectors.


CLS 74/83
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 70, in which the motion is changed by inertia
    devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92+,    for other mechanical movements utilizing inertia devices.


CLS 74/84
TXT Mechanical Movements for changing rotary motion to intermittent
    unidirectional motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111+,   for mechanical movements of the intermittent grip type which change
    rotary motion to intermittent unidirectional motion.

    415,    for pin tooth gearing.

    436,    for Geneva gears.


CLS 74/86
TXT Mechanical Movements for converting rotary motion to gyratory motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 207+, for
    comminutors utilizing this mechanical movement.


CLS 74/87
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 86, in which the motion is changed by means of
    unbalanced weights.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 366+, for
    apparatus using unbalanced weights.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 210, for
    comminutors utilizing this mechanical movement.


CLS 74/88
TXT Mechanical Movements for converting reciprocating or oscillating motion to
    intermittent unidirectional motion.


CLS 74/89
TXT Mechanical movement for converting oscillating or reciprocating motion to
    or from alternating rotary motion, all such motions as defined herein below:



    Rotary motion - The turning of a rigid body about an internal axis such
    that a point on the body travels through an arcuate path, about the axis,
    having an extent of 360 degrees or more.



    Alternating motion - The intermittent movement along a path, first in one
    direction and then in the opposite along such path.



    Reciprocating motion - Alternating motion along a straight-line path.



    Oscillating motion - Alternating motion of less than 360 degrees along an
    arcuate path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    424.8,  for screw and nut devices, per se.


CLS 74/89.1
TXT Mechanical movement under subclass 89 comprising movable input and output
    elements, movable means drivingly interconnecting said elements and a
    movable member having substantial mass joined to either of said elements or
    said means by a force-transmitting connection which is effective to vary
    the speed of the movable member at some time during its operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83,     for other mechanical movement including inertia device.


CLS 74/89.11
TXT Mechanical movement under subclasses 89.1 including a straight or curved
    member having a series of teeth or recesses to mesh with a gear, such
    series having determinate effective length.

    (1)     Note.  A gear with minor mutilation taught as being nevertheless
    continuously usable, without reversal, is not considered to be a rack.


CLS 74/89.12
TXT Mechanical movement under subclass 89.11 wherein the rack teeth or recesses
    lie in a straight line.


CLS 74/89.13
TXT Mechanical movement under subclass 89 comprising at least one pair of
    toothed elements, rotatable about nonparallel axes, having meshing toothed
    surfaces which are inclined to said axes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    423+,   for other mechanism containing bevel gearing.


CLS 74/89.14
TXT Mechanical movement under subclass 89 comprising a rotatable screw member
    for meshing with a complementary toothed gear or rack.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    425+,   for other mechanism containing worm gearing.


CLS 74/89.15
TXT Mechanical movement under subclass 89 comprising a rotary element having
    spiral threads or grooves disposed concentrically about its axis of
    rotation and a second element enmeshed therewith for relative movement
    along said axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    424.8,  for other mechanism containing screw and nut elements.


CLS 74/89.16
TXT Mechanical movement under subclass 89 comprising a wheel having radially
    projecting teeth located parallel to the axis of said wheel for meshing
    with another toothed member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    421,    for other mechanism containing spur gearing.


CLS 74/89.17
TXT Mechanical movement under subclass 89.16 including a straight or curved
    member having a series of teeth or recesses to mesh with a gear, such
    series having determinate effective length.


CLS 74/89.18
TXT Mechanical movement under subclass 89.17 wherein the teeth or recesses lie
    in a curved line.


CLS 74/89.19
TXT Mechanical movement under subclass 89.18 comprising yieldable means which
    assists the motion of the movement in one direction or the other (e.g.,
    spring, counter weight, etc.).


CLS 74/89.20
TXT Mechanical movement under subclass 89 including a yieldable transmission
    member engaged with the periphery of a pulley, or of a sprocket or other
    type wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 266+ for a apparatus for hauling or hoisting a load which
    includes a driven drum for pulling on or traveling along a cable, and
    wherein either the drum or the cable is attached to the load.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, Appropriate
    subclasses for power transmission via an endless belt.


CLS 74/89.21
TXT Mechanical movement under subclass 89.2 including a member with peripheral
    cogs or teeth for engaging the flexible drive connector.


CLS 74/89.22
TXT Mechanical movement under subclass 89.2 including a sheave or wheel with a
    grooved rim for receiving and frictionally cooperating with the flexible
    drive connector in driving or driven relationship.


CLS 74/96
TXT Mechanical movements for converting oscillating motion to oscillating
    motion.


CLS 74/97.1
TXT Snap action:
    Mechanism under subclass 96 wherein the energy of the driving member is
    stored during the beginning of the stroke and is imparted to the driven
    member during the latter part of the stroke to impart a rapid motion to the
    driven member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 402+ for a
    switch of that class having a movable contact and an actuator, and wherein
    the contact is quickly or abruptly moved independently of the actuator
    during actuation, which movement frequently is accomplished by a spring
    connection between the contact and the actuator.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 48 for a
    temperature control valve whose operating force is stored until such time
    as the valve can be moved suddenly through its total range.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 75 for a valve having an
    actuator which imparts to the valve an accelerated motion during a
    particular portion of its movement.


CLS 74/97.2
TXT Plate spring:
    Mechanism under subclass 97.1 wherein the driving member is a thin,
    resilient element which is in a distorted condition in either one of the
    two positions which it customarily occupies, and which, when moved by an
    external force away from one position in the direction of the other
    position, undergoes a reversal of distortion, resulting in a rapid movement
    between the two positions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 89.29 for a clutch which
    is operated by a quick-throw spring.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclass 159 for a device of that class in the
    nature of a snap spring.


CLS 74/98
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 96, in which the motion is changed by means of
    gears.


CLS 74/99
TXT Mechanical movements for converting reciprocating motion to or from
    oscillating motion.


CLS 74/100.1
TXT Snap action:
    Mechanism under subclass 99 wherein the energy of the driving member is
    stored during the beginning of the stroke and is imparted to the driven
    member during the latter part of the stroke to impart a rapid motion to the
    driven member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 402+ for a
    switch of that class having a movable contact and an actuator, and wherein
    the contact is quickly or abruptly moved independently of the actuator
    during actuation, which movement frequently is accomplished by a spring
    connection between the contact and the actuator.

    236,    Automatic  Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 48 for a
    temperature control valve whose operating force is stored until such time
    as the valve can be moved suddenly through its total range.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 75 for a valve having an
    actuator which imparts to the valve an accelerated motion during a
    particular portion of its movement.


CLS 74/100.2
TXT Plate spring:
    Mechanism under subclass 100.1 wherein the driving member is a thin,
    resilient element which is in a distorted condition in either one of the
    two positions which it customarily occupies, and which, when moved by an
    external force away from one position in the direction of the other
    position, undergoes a reversal of distortion, resulting in a rapid movement
    between the two positions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 89.29 for a clutch which
    is operated by a quick-throw spring.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclass 159 for a device of that class in the
    nature of a snap spring.


CLS 74/101
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 99, in which the motion is changed by means of a
    compound lever and slide.


CLS 74/102
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 99, in which the motion is changed by means of a
    lever and slide.


CLS 74/103
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 102, in which the motion is changed by means of a
    lever and slide and the path of the reciprocating member is a straight line.


CLS 74/104
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 102 in which the motion is changed by means of a
    lever and slide and the connection between the lever and slide is slidable.


CLS 74/105
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 102, in which the motion is changed by means of a
    lever and slide which are connected together by a link.


CLS 74/106
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 102, in which the motion is changed by means of a
    lever and slide which are connected together by a toggle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 363 and 367+ for toggle-actuated pliers.


CLS 74/107
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 102, in which the motion is changed by means of a
    lever and slide which are connected together by cams.


CLS 74/108
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 102, in which the motion is changed by means of a
    lever and slide which are connected together by a flexible member.


CLS 74/109
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 99, in which the motion is changed by means of a
    rack and pinion.


CLS 74/110
TXT Mechanical movements for changing reciprocating motion to reciprocating
    motion.


CLS 74/111
TXT Mechanisms under the class definition, provided with parts adapted to
    impart step-by-step motion to a unidirectionally driven member.

    (1)     Note.  For intermittent grip devices, of special application, see
    the arts to which they are applied.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     435, and 436, for specialized forms of intermittent grip mechanisms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 422 + for machines for feeding metal
    stock having intermittently reciprocated gripping mechanisms which grasp
    the bar of stock, advance to feed the same to a chuck, then release the
    stock, and return to their first position.

    81,     Tools, subclass 314 for pliers with incremental jaw movement.

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 82.1+, for brakes applied to elements rotating
    relative to stationary elements to prevent retrograde rotation while
    allowing forward rotation.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclass 75, for
    electric clocks having an intermittent striking signal.


CLS 74/112
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 111 having a rotary driving member and provided
    with parts adapted to impart step-by-step motion to a unidirectionally
    driven member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     for nonintermittent grip type movements for changing rotary and
    intermittent unidirectional movement.

    435,    for mutilated rotary gear bodies. 436, for Geneva gears.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 187+ and 191+ for intermittent
    feed mechanisms for motion picture apparatus.


CLS 74/113
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 112 in which the transmission ratio is controlled
    automatically.


CLS 74/114
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 113 in which the transmission ratio is controlled
    automatically by speed responsive elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    601,    for automatically adjustable cranks and wrist pins.


CLS 74/116
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 112 having a rotary crank or eccentric driving
    member and provided with parts adapted to impart step-by-step motion to a
    unidirectionally driven member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118,    120, and 510, for eccentric features.

    595+,   for crank features.


CLS 74/117
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 116, having an adjustable driving member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121,    for other adjustable throw cranks and eccentrics.

    571,    for adjustable eccentrics.

    600,    for adjustable cranks.


CLS 74/118
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 116 in which the parts include an intermediate
    lever pivoted to some supporting structure.


CLS 74/119
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 118, in which the parts include an intermediate
    lever of adjustable ratio pivoted to some supporting structure.


CLS 74/120
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 116, in which the parts include rack and pinion
    transmitting elements.


CLS 74/121
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 120, in which the parts include rack and pinion
    transmitting elements, and means are provided for varying the extent of
    effective movement of those elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for adjustments other than by changing the throw for this
    mechanical movement.


CLS 74/122
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 116, having a rotary cam driving member and
    provided with parts adapted to impart step-by-step motion to a
    unidirectionally driven member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    567+,   for cams, per se.


CLS 74/123
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 122, in which the extent of movement of the
    transmitting parts may be varied.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for wabble type mechanical movements.

    568,    for adjustable cams.


CLS 74/124
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 123 and having a radial cam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    for other radial cam actuators.

    568,    for adjustable cams.


CLS 74/125
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 122 and having a radial cam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    567+,   for cams.


CLS 74/125.5
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 112 in which the parts include periodically
    engageable clutch elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322     through 324, for alternatively rotary gearing involving clutchable
    gears.


CLS 74/126
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 111 and having either an oscillating or
    reciprocating driving member and provided with parts adapted to impart
    step-by-step motion to a unidirectionally driven member.


CLS 74/127
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 126, in which the parts include relatively
    movable screw and nut elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57+,    for nonintermittent grip type movements involving axially grooved
    cams, and slides.


CLS 74/128
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 126, in which the driving member is in the form
    of a slidable actuator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160+,   for slide gripper mountings.


CLS 74/129
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 128, in which a slidable actuator is adapted to
    impart motion to the driven member in both directions of its movement or in
    which a plurality of slidable actuators are adapted to impart motion to the
    driven member in sequence.


CLS 74/130
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 126, in which the driving member is provided with
    rack teeth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclass 66, for a pencil,
    or the like, including a rack and pawl mechanism for advancing a piece of
    lead step-by-step to compensate for attrition.


CLS 74/131
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 130, in which a single driving member having rack
    teeth is capable of imparting motion to the driven member in both
    directions of its movement or in which a plurality of driving members
    having rack teeth are adapted to impart motion to the driven member in
    sequence.


CLS 74/132
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 131, in which the driving member is provided with
    inwardly facing rack teeth and is effective in both directions of its
    movement to impart motion to the driven member.


CLS 74/133
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 130, in which the rack is oscillatable.


CLS 74/134
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 133, in which the oscillatable rack is adapted to
    impart motion to the driven member in both directions of its movement or in
    which a plurality of oscillatable racks are adapted to impart motion to the
    driven member in sequence.


CLS 74/135
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 134, in which the rack is provided with inwardly
    facing teeth and is effective in both directions of its movement.


CLS 74/136
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 126, in which a single driving member in the form
    of a strap, chain, belt, etc., is adapted to impart motion to the driven
    member in both directions of its movement or in which a plurality of straps
    are adapted to impart motion to the driven member in sequence.


CLS 74/137
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 136, in which a spring or weight moves the strap
    in one direction.


CLS 74/138
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 126, in which the driving member is in the form
    of a strap, chain, or belt and is effective in only one direction of
    movement to impart motion to the driven member.


CLS 74/139
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 138 in which the entire device is particularly
    designed for uses as an engine starter but is adapted for other uses.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes only the intermittent grip type of
    engine starters capable of general use.

    (2)     Note.  If the use is limited to engine starting, see the
    appropriate starter classes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6+,     for engine starters and see (1) Note supra.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 185.1+, for mechanical
    starters, and see (1) Note supra.


CLS 74/140
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 139, in which a spring or weight is adapted to
    return the strap to its initial position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal Combustion Engines, subclasses 185.1+, for mechanical
    starters, and see (1) Note supra.


CLS 74/141
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 138, in which a spring or weight is adapted to
    return the strap to its initial position.


CLS 74/141.5
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 126 in which the driving member is a lever
    effective in its oscillation to impart motion to the driven member.

    (1)     Note.  It should be noted that the movement of the lever and driven
    element is relative.  Hence, if the "driven" element is held or fixed, and
    the support or pivot of the lever is compelled to move in the required
    manner by the oscillation or reciprocation of the lever, such structure
    will satisfy the terms of this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156+,   for lever gripper mountings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 31, 105+, 206+, 210, 237+, and 245 for similar mechanisms for
    imparting a step-by-step movement to a traveling bar or rack.


CLS 74/142
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 141.5 in which the intermittently driven member
    revolves around a relatively fixed axis.


CLS 74/143
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 142 in which a single driving member in the form
    of a lever, is adapted to impart motion to the driven member in both
    directions of oscillation of the lever or in which a plurality of levers
    are adapted to impart motion to the driven member in sequence.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158+,   for multiple acting lever gripping mountings.


CLS 74/144
TXT Devices under subclass 111, adapted to form parts of more complex
    intermittent grip mechanisms and to impart step-by-step motion directly to
    a unidirectionally driven member.

    (1)     Note.  The line between these subclasses and Class 192, Clutches
    and Power-Stop Control, subclass 41, with respect to one way clutches and
    clutch operators is as follows:

    Class 192, will take the clutch, per se, with or without the clutch
    operator.  The inclusion of additional elements; e.g., a holding pawl for
    the part driven by the clutch, will cause classification in this class (74).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    505,    for hand operated gear, drum and cable controllers.

    575,    for pawls and ratchets, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 58+, for clutched head wrenches or screwdrivers,
    and subclasses 28+ for a ratchet bit stock.

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 82.1+, for brakes applied to elements rotating
    relative to stationary elements to prevent retrograde rotation while
    allowing forward rotation.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, for one way clutches and
    actuators, and see (1) Note supra.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 108+, 206+, and 237+ for pawl operated step-by-step traveling
    bar type implements or apparatus.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 59+ for
    secondary electric clock mechanism.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 65+, for a
    pencil or the like, including a chuck for advancing a piece of lead
    step-by-step to compensate for attrition.


CLS 74/145
TXT Devices under subclass 144, including a handle capable of movement in a
    plurality of planes.


CLS 74/146
TXT Devices under subclass 145, including a handle capable of movement in a
    plurality of planes and adapted to impart either forward or reverse motion
    to the driven member.


CLS 74/147
TXT Devices under subclass 145, in which the handle is swingable about an axis
    transverse to the axis of rotation of the driven member.


CLS 74/148
TXT Devices under subclass 144, in which means are provided for releasing a
    gripper from the driven member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    679,    for gearing having this mechanical movement in one of a plurality
    of power paths to or from the gearing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclass 82.3, for one-way brakes which include means to
    render them inoperative to prevent retrograde motion of a rotating member.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclass 217 for
    disc and wheel type gearing in one of plural power paths to planetary
    gearing.


CLS 74/149
TXT Devices under subclass 148, in which the pawl disengaged is the driving or
    power transmitting pawl.


CLS 74/150
TXT Devices under subclass 149, in which means are provided for automatically
    disengaging a power transmitting pawl from the driven member.


CLS 74/151
TXT Devices under subclass 150, in which means are provided for automatically
    disengaging a power transmitting pawl from the driven member during the
    idle or return movement of the pawl.


CLS 74/152
TXT Devices under subclass 151, in which a holding pawl is adapted to prevent
    retrograde movement of the driven member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclass 131, for overthrow preventers.


CLS 74/153
TXT Devices under subclass 150, in which means are provided for automatically
    disengaging a power transmitting pawl from the driven member during the
    power or working movement of the pawl.


CLS 74/154
TXT Devices under subclass 149, in which means are provided for disengaging a
    power pawl from the driven member and an auxiliary holding pawl is adapted
    to prevent retrograde movement of the driven member.


CLS 74/155
TXT Devices under subclass 148, provided with a holding pawl for preventing
    retrograde movement of the driven member, the said holding pawl being
    disengaged from the driven member by the movement of some part of the
    device.


CLS 74/156
TXT Devices under subclass 144, in which the element which engages the driven
    member is mounted on a lever actuator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118+    and 142+, for lever actuated intermittent grip type devices.


CLS 74/157
TXT Devices under subclass 156, in which the element which engages the driven
    member may be shifted to impart either forward or reverse motion to the
    driven member.


CLS 74/158
TXT Devices under subclass 156, in which a plurality of elements are adapted to
    engage one or more driven members and are mounted on one or more lever
    actuators.


CLS 74/159
TXT Devices under subclass 158, in which the driven member is in the form of a
    single ratchet or clutch to provide only one set of teeth for cooperation
    with the plurality of elements.


CLS 74/160
TXT Devices under subclass 144, having the element adapted to engage the driven
    member mounted on a slidable actuator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128,    for other slide actuators.


CLS 74/161
TXT Devices under subclass 160, in which a plurality of elements are adapted to
    engage one or more driven members and are mounted on one or more slide
    actuators.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129,    for other multiple acting slide actuators.


CLS 74/162
TXT Devices under subclass 144, limited to the combination of the details of
    the power imparting element, per se, and the driven member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    575+,   for pawls and ratchets, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 58+, for clutched head wrenches or screwdrivers,
    and subclasses 28+ for a ratchet bit stock.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 41+, for automatic one
    way engaging clutches.


CLS 74/163
TXT Devices under subclass 162, in which the power imparting element is in the
    form of a band surrounding the driven member.


CLS 74/164
TXT Devices under subclass 163, in which the power imparting element is in the
    form of a band surrounding the driven member and which actuates the driven
    member intermittently by being clamped thereto and unclamped therefrom.


CLS 74/165
TXT Devices under subclass 162, in which the driven member is in the form of an
    endless band, such as a chain or belt.


CLS 74/166
TXT Devices under subclass 165, provided with means to prevent slippage between
    the power imparting elements and the driven member.


CLS 74/167
TXT Devices under subclass 162, in which the power imparting element is in the
    form of a ratchet bar or rack.


CLS 74/168
TXT Devices under subclass 167, in which a plurality of power imparting
    elements in the form of ratchet bars or racks actuate the driven member.


CLS 74/169
TXT Devices under subclass 162, in which the power imparting element is in the
    form of a pawl adapted to cooperate with the teeth of a ratchet bar which
    comprises the driven member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 108+, 206+, and 237+ for pawl operated step-by-step traveling
    bar type implements or apparatus.



    Gearing Frictional.  Gearing under subclass 640, comprising rotary elements
    having substantially smooth surfaces in contact with each other, or in line
    or point contact with an interposed member, to produce a relative rolling
    motion between them due to contact of surfaces.


CLS 74/216.3
TXT Gearing under subclass 640 which includes a guide tube in the form of a
    closed path, a plurality of free running independent bodies (e.g., balls)
    within and substantially filling said tube, and one or more notched rotary
    elements tangentially engaging the bodies axially of the run thereof to
    thereby transmit and/or receive power axially of the run by the compressive
    action of the bodies upon each other in the forward run of the path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    458+,   for worm and helical gearing in which power is transmitted through
    the medium of balls received in pockets formed by the grooves of the
    meshing gears and in which the balls serve as antifriction elements.

    499     and 500, for the gearing there classified and including the use of
    balls as antifriction elements between the meshing grooves of the gears.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 326, for a motor driven by a recirculated
    motive fluid comprising a mixture, suspension or semi-solid.


CLS 74/318
TXT Gearing combinations under subclass 640 comprising one or more trains of
    gears for converting the continuous rotation of a driving gear to an
    alternating rotation of a driven element and in which additional elements
    may be provided for continuing the rotation of the driven element in one
    direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70+,    for rotary to alternating rotary mechanical movements.


CLS 74/319
TXT Gearing combinations under subclass 640 comprising one or more trains of
    gears for converting the continuous rotation of a driving element to an
    alternating rotation of a driven element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70+,    for rotary to alternating rotary mechanical movements.


CLS 74/320
TXT Gearing under subclass 319, in which the driven element is rotated a
    greater amount in one direction than in the other.


CLS 74/321
TXT Gearing under subclass 319, embodying shiftable and/or slidable gears for
    effecting an alternating rotation of the driven member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    355,    for interchangeably locked, single forward and reverse speed
    gearing.


CLS 74/322
TXT Gearing under subclass 319, embodying engageable and disengageable clutches
    for effecting an alternating rotation of the driven members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125.5,  for clutch operated mechanical movements of the rotary to
    intermittent unidirectional type.

    361     and 376+, for forward and reverse interchangeably locked gearing
    involving clutches.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 1+ for a control for reversing the direction of rotation of an
    output shaft in a belt and pulley drive system.


CLS 74/323
TXT Alternating rotary gearing under subclass 322, in which the clutches are
    all mounted on the alternating driven member.


CLS 74/324
TXT Alternating rotary gearing under subclass 322, in which the clutches are
    all mounted on the continuously rotating driving member.


CLS 74/325
TXT Transmissions under subclass 640 in which a plurality of speeds are
    transmitted from one shaft to another by optionally engaging or meshing
    selected gears or clutches or gears and clutches, to their supporting
    shafts.

    (1)     Note.  These transmissions include those which provide speed
    changes (1) by means of interchanging meshed gears on their shafts or (2)
    by replacing such gears with gears of different sizes.

    (2)     Note.  Such gearing is found in various arts, for example, Class
    29, Metal Working, subclasses 27+; Class 82, Turning, subclass 29; Class
    408, Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 124+. Class
    409, Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 64+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 27+, for lathes of the combined machine
    type and (see Note 2).

    82,     Turning, subclass 29, for change speed gear for headstocks.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 124+,
    for drilling machines having miscellaneous drives.  (See Note 2).

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 64+, for milling
    machines. (See (2) Note).


CLS 74/329
TXT Transmissions under subclass 325 involving change of speed in which the
    counter shaft is disconnected from the drive shaft when the drive is not
    through the counter shaft.


CLS 74/330
TXT Transmissions under subclass 325 either (1) wherein the drive from the
    prime mover to the transmission is through a manually selected one of a
    plurality of concentric drive shafts, each of which has a clutch for
    engagement with the engine clutch; or (2) wherein the drive from the
    transmission to the propeller shaft is by means of a manually selected one
    of a plurality of concentric driven shafts each of which has a clutch for
    engagement with a clutch on the propeller shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    336+,   for automatic speed responsive interchangeably locked gearing.

    363+,   for spur gear type, progressive multiple key, single clutch shaft
    interchangeably locked gearing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 48.1+ for plural
    clutch-assemblages, 52.1+ for a progressive engagement clutch, and 103+ for
    a speed-responsive clutch.


CLS 74/331
TXT Transmission under subclass 325 in which the change of speed from the drive
    shaft to the driven shaft may be through a selected one of a plurality of
    counter shafts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333,    for combined gear and clutch type interchangeably locked gearing.

    343,    for selective, longitudinally slidable direct clutch and drive type
    interchangeably locked gearing.

    359,    for selective, multiple clutch shaft, interchangeably locked
    gearing.

    373+,   for selective, single clutch shaft, interchangeably locked gearing.


CLS 74/332
TXT Transmissions under subclass 325 wherein the transmission of power from the
    drive shaft to the driven shaft is by means of internal-external gears in
    conjunction with shiftable gears, or shiftable clutches, with constantly
    meshed gears, or both, in a single unit.


CLS 74/333
TXT Transmissions under subclass 325 composed of shiftable gears, and shiftable
    clutches, or shiftable gears provided with clutch elements, all in one
    gearing combination, wherein selected gears or clutches are manually
    shifted into or out of mesh with cooperating gears or clutches.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 20, for combined clutches
    and gears, where the gearing controls the clutch.


CLS 74/334
TXT Transmissions under subclass 333, wherein the selected gears or clutches
    are manually shifted into or out of mesh with cooperating gears or clutches
    by operation of a clutch pedal after a separate preselective change speed
    device has been set.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    474,    for pedal-operated devices.


CLS 74/335
TXT Transmissions under subclass 325 composed of shiftable gears, or shiftable
    clutches with constantly meshed gears, or shiftable gears and shiftable
    clutches, wherein the shifting is accomplished by mechanical power driven
    means.


CLS 74/336
TXT Transmissions under subclass 335, wherein the shifting is accomplished
    either by means responsive to the speed of some part of the transmission or
    by means responsive to both speed and torque conditions of the transmission.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 103+, for speed
    responsive clutches.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses 254+
    for condition responsive control of planetary gearing.


CLS 74/336.5
TXT Transmissions under subclass 336, wherein the shifting is accomplished by a
    governor responsive to the speed of some part of the transmission.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404.5,  for governor controlled reverse gearing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 488+ for a speed responsive
    device, per se.


CLS 74/337
TXT Transmissions under subclass 335, wherein the shifting is automatically
    accomplished by means operated in response to either the torque of the
    engine or of the driven shaft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 54.1+, for torque
    responsive clutches.


CLS 74/337.5
TXT Transmissions under subclass 335, wherein the shifting is accomplished by
    means of a manually operable cam which is connected to the shiftable member
    so that operation of the cam produces progressive changes in gear ratios.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 93, for cam operators for
    clutches.


CLS 74/339
TXT Transmissions under subclass 325, wherein a means is provided for
    synchronizing the speed of the member which is being shifted with the speed
    of the member to be engaged by the shiftable member prior to engagement
    thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 53.1+.


CLS 74/340
TXT Transmissions under subclass 339, having a clutch at each end thereof,
    which are simultaneously engaged or disengaged to simultaneously engage the
    transmission as a unit with or disengage it from the engine and the
    propeller shaft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 48.1+ for plural
    clutch-assemblages and synchromesh mechanism associated therewith.



    Interchangeably locked, Longitudinally slidable. Transmissions under
    subclass 325 wherein one or more gears may be moved along the axis of
    rotation into mesh with cooperating gears.


CLS 74/341
TXT Transmissions under Longitudinally slidable composed of multiple spur gears
    on a tumbler carrier for cooperating with different sized driving and
    driven gears.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    348+,   for longitudinally slidable bevel gears in cone form mounted on a
    tumbler carrier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    82,     Turning, subclasses 140, 143 and 905, for change speed gearing used
    in lathes.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 124+,
    for drilling machines including drive structure.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 64+ for a milling
    machine including drive structure.


CLS 74/342
TXT Transmissions under Longitudinally slidable composed of selective,
    multiple, sliding spur gears on a plurality of shafts.


CLS 74/343
TXT Transmissions under subclass 342, but having means to directly clutch the
    drive and driven shafts together.


CLS 74/344
TXT Transmissions under Longitudinally slidable composed of multiple sliding
    spur gears on a plurality of shafts, which gears may be shifted manually to
    provide a progressive plurality of speeds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    337.5,  for cam operated controls for interchangeably locked gearing.


CLS 74/345
TXT Transmissions under subclass 344, but which have means to directly clutch
    together the drive and driven shafts.


CLS 74/346
TXT Transmissions under Longitudinally slidable containing a plurality of
    slidable spur gears which are adapted to be shifted into and out of
    engagement by fluid pressure means under manual control.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334,    for preselected combined clutch and gear, interchangeably locked
    gearing.

    336+,   for automatic speed responsive interchangeably locked gearing.


CLS 74/347
TXT Transmissions under Longitudinally slidable composed of a plurality of
    slidable bevel gears which may mesh with a disk or with other bevel gears.


CLS 74/348
TXT Transmissions under Longitudinally slidable comprising a plurality of spur
    gears of varying diameters arranged on a single shaft in cone form, and a
    single slidable spur tumbler gear adapted to be progressively slid into
    mesh with the gears of the cone whereby either the tumbler, or any one of
    the cone gears, may be driven by the other in mesh therewith.

    (1)     Note.  The teeth on the cone gears may be radially or spirally
    disposed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    341,    for tumbler type spur gears longitudable slidable.


CLS 74/349
TXT Transmissions under subclass 348 in which a plurality of cone type gears
    are used and the single slidable tumbler gear is interposed between the
    cone type gears and acts to transmit power from one to the other.


CLS 74/350
TXT Transmissions under Longitudinally slidable in which there is a single
    slidable bevel gear in mesh with a toothed disk, or one of a plurality of
    bevel gears for changing the speed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    347,    for multiple bevel gears which are longitudinally slidable.


CLS 74/351
TXT Transmissions under Longitudinally slidable in which pin or crown gears,
    either single or multiple, are shifted to provide a change of speed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    415,    for the construction of the pin gear, per se.


CLS 74/352
TXT Transmissions under subclass 325 wherein the gears are supported by a
    shiftable carrier whereby the gears may be moved laterally with respect to
    the longitudinal axis of the transmission into mesh with cooperating gears.


CLS 74/353
TXT Transmissions under subclass 352 wherein the gears are supported by a
    rotary carrier and are adapted to be moved laterally into mesh with
    cooperating gears.


CLS 74/354
TXT Transmissions under subclass 352 wherein the gears are supported by a
    swingable carrier and are adapted to be moved laterally into mesh with
    cooperating gears.


CLS 74/355
TXT Transmissions under subclass 325 wherein a single forward or a single
    reverse speed is obtained by means of slidable toothed gears of any type.


CLS 74/356
TXT Transmissions under subclass 325 composed of a single shiftable driving
    shaft which can be progressively or selectively clutched to any one of a
    plurality of intermediate shafts or counter shafts, which in turn are
    connected by constant mesh gearing to a final driven shaft, the drive shaft
    and the intermediate shafts or counter shafts being provided with
    cooperating clutch faces.


CLS 74/357
TXT Transmissions under subclass 325 wherein there are a plurality of slidable
    keys or clutches splined to a plurality of shafts which are connected to
    each other by constant mesh gears revoluble on the shafts, and provided
    with clutch elements adapted to be engaged by the slidable clutches or
    keys, the keys or clutches being manually shifted in a manner to provide a
    progressive change in gear ratio.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    337.5,  for cam operated controls for interchangeable locked gearing.

    363,    for progressive transmissions utilizing a single clutch shaft.


CLS 74/358
TXT Transmissions under subclass 357, wherein the slidable keys or clutches are
    manually operated simultaneously to provide progressive changes in gear
    ratios.


CLS 74/359
TXT Transmissions under subclass 325 wherein there are a plurality of slidable
    keys or clutches splined to a plurality of shafts which are connected to
    each other by constant mesh gears revoluble on the shafts, and provided
    with clutch elements adapted to be engaged by the slidable clutches or
    keys, the slidable keys or clutches being manually shifted to provide
    selected changes in gear ratios.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    373+,   for selective, single clutch shaft, interchangeably locked gearing.


CLS 74/360
TXT Transmissions under subclass 325 wherein there are a plurality of manually
    operable slidable keys or clutches splined to a plurality of shafts which
    are connected to each other by constant mesh gears revoluble on the shafts,
    the gears being provided with clutch elements adapted to be engaged by the
    slidable clutches or keys to provide a plurality of selective forward
    speeds and a plurality of reverse speeds.


CLS 74/361
TXT Transmissions under subclass 325 wherein there are a plurality of manually
    operable slidable keys or clutches splined to a plurality of shafts which
    are connected to each other by constant mesh gears, revoluble on the
    shafts, the gears being provided with clutch elements adapted to be engaged
    by the slidable clutches or keys to provide a single forward speed and a
    single reverse speed.


CLS 74/362
TXT Transmissions under subclass 325 where there are a plurality of manually
    operable slidable keys or clutches splined to a single clutch shaft, the
    clutch shaft being connected to the other shafts of the transmission by
    constant mesh gears revoluble on the shafts, which shafts have clutch
    elements adapted to be engaged by the slidable keys or clutches to provide
    progressive change in gear ratios.


CLS 74/363
TXT Transmissions under subclass 362, in which the rotatable constantly meshed
    gears are of the spur type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    336+,   for automatically controlled interchangeably locked gearing.

    337,    for torque responsive interchangeably locked gearing.


CLS 74/364
TXT Transmissions under subclass 363, in which the clutches or keys are shifted
    by manually controlled fluid operated means, or the clutches are of the
    fluid type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334,    for preselector type combined clutch and gear, interchangeably
    locked gearing.

    346,    for fluid operated longitudinally slidable interchangeably locked
    gearing.

    730,    and see (1) Note thereto for the distinction between a fluid clutch
    and a fluid drive.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 85+, for fluid pressure
    operators for clutches.


CLS 74/365
TXT Transmissions under subclass 363, where the clutches or keys are shifted by
    manually controlled electrically operated means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334,    for preselector type combined clutch and gear, interchangeably
    locked gearing.

    336.5,  for governor controlled interchangeably locked gearing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 40 and 84.1+, for
    electrically controlled clutches.


CLS 74/366
TXT Transmissions under subclass 325 wherein there are constant mesh gears,
    some of which are rotatably mounted on a shaft and adapted to be clutched
    to the shaft by a single clutch or key which is manually shifted to provide
    progressive changes in gear ratio.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    337.5,  for cam operated controls for interchangeably locked gears.


CLS 74/368
TXT Transmissions under subclass 366 comprising a gear train connecting driving
    and driven shafts and a manually operable positive clutch for directly
    connecting the shafts, together with a one-way clutch in the gear train
    which acts like a ratchet mechanism which permits the gear train to overrun
    when the shafts are directly coupled together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    336+,   for automatically controlled interchangeably locked gears.

    337,    for torque responsive interchangeably locked gears.


CLS 74/369
TXT Transmissions under subclass 366, wherein the gears of the transmission are
    spur gears.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    363,    for progressive transmissions utilizing a single clutch shaft.


CLS 74/370
TXT Transmissions, under subclass 369 providing two speeds only, wherein
    constant mesh spur gears connect the drive and driven shafts, the gears
    being loosely mounted on the shafts and being adapted to be connected to
    their respective shafts by a single manually operable slidable key or
    clutch intermediate the loosely mounted gears.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    368,    for clutch and ratchet, and single key, single clutch shaft,
    progressive interchangeably locked gearing.

    377,    for spur type, single forward and reverse, single clutch shaft,
    interchangeably locked gearing.


CLS 74/371
TXT Transmissions under subclass 369 comprising a plurality of spur gears
    loosely mounted on a hollow shaft, the gears meshing with cooperating spur
    gears fixed to a second shaft, and also comprising a member slidably
    mounted in the hollow shaft, which member carries a single clutch element,
    the latter of which is manually shiftable to progressively and successively
    clutch the loose gears to the shaft on which they are mounted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    336+,   for automatically controlled interchangeably locked gearing.

    336.5,  for governor controlled interchangeably locked gears.

    372,    for spur gear, sliding clutch operator, single key, single clutch
    shaft progressive interchangeably locked gearing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 52.1+, for progressive
    engaging clutches and subclasses 65 and 66.1+ for axially engaging clutches.


CLS 74/372
TXT Transmissions under subclass 369 comprising a plurality of spur gears
    loosely mounted on a hollow shaft, the gears meshing with cooperating spur
    gears fixed to a second shaft, and also comprising a member slidably
    mounted in the hollow shaft, the gears carrying clutches and the slidable
    member carrying means for operating the clutches to progressively connect
    any one of the gears to its shaft.


CLS 74/373
TXT Transmissions under subclass 325 wherein there are a plurality of manually
    operable slidable keys or clutches splined to a single shaft which are
    connected to each other by constant mesh gears, revoluble on the shafts,
    the gears being provided with a single key to selectively connect certain
    of the gears to their respective shafts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359,    for selective, multiple clutch shaft, slidable key or clutch type
    interchangeably locked gearing.

    366+,   for single key, single clutch shaft, slidable key or clutch type
    interchangeably locked gearing.


CLS 74/374
TXT Transmissions under subclass 373, but provided with constantly meshed
    gears, some of which are loosely mounted on the same shaft and wherein
    manually operable keys are provided for connecting a selected one of the
    gears to its shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    362,    for progressive, multiple key, single clutch shaft, slidable key or
    clutch type interchangeably locked gearing.


CLS 74/375
TXT Transmissions under subclass 374 wherein the gears of the transmission are
    spur gears.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359,    for selective, multiple clutch shaft, slidable key or clutch type
    interchangeably locked gearing.

    363,    for progressive transmissions utilizing a single clutch shaft.

    369+,   for spur gear type, single key, single clutch shaft progressive,
    slidable clutch or key, interchangeably locked gearing.


CLS 74/376
TXT Miscellaneous transmissions under subclass 325 comprising combinations of
    spur gears with either pulleys and belts or chains and sprockets and
    provided with manually operable slidable clutches mounted on a single shaft
    for clutching either the pulleys, the sprockets, or the gears thereto in
    order to provide either a single forward or a single reverse speed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 21, for reversing, gear
    controlled clutches.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, appropriate
    subclasses for a belt and pulley drive system.


CLS 74/377
TXT Transmissions under subclass 376 having spur gears in constant mesh,
    certain of which are rotatable on a shaft and are adapted to be connected
    to the shaft by manually operated shiftable clutches.


CLS 74/378
TXT Transmissions under subclass 376 wherein a bevel driving gear is in
    constant mesh with a plurality of driven bevel gears, loosely mounted on
    the driven shaft with a manually operated slidable clutch for connecting
    either of the loosely mounted gears to its shaft and wherein the drive
    shaft is at an angle to the driven shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for washer and wringer mechanisms.

    385+,   for pivotally supported bevel gearing.


CLS 74/379
TXT Transmissions under subclass 376 wherein a bevel driving gear is in
    constant mesh with a plurality of driven bevel gears, loosely mounted on
    the driven shaft with a manually operated slidable clutch for connecting
    either of the loosely mounted gears to its shaft and wherein the drive and
    driven shafts are in alignment, and the common bevel gear, which is in mesh
    with both loose gears, acts as an idler to reverse the drive.


CLS 74/380
TXT Gearing under subclass 640 mounted on a pivotal support to permit the
    driving and driven gears of a gear train to be pivotally moved relative to
    each other in a single plane without permitting a change of speed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for washer and wringer mechanisms.

    353     and 354, for pivoted carriage type interchangeably locked gearing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    464,    Rotary  Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, appropriate subclasses for a coupling between a shaft and a
    driven member which facilitates relative movement of the shaft with respect
    to the member.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 58+ for a belt and pulley drive system wherein an output pulley
    is selectively shiftable to different power output locations relative to an
    input pulley.


CLS 74/381
TXT Gearing under subclass 380 of the windmill type.


CLS 74/383
TXT Screw gearing, under subclass 380.


CLS 74/384
TXT Spur gearing under subclass 380.


CLS 74/385
TXT Bevel gearing under subclass 380.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for washer and wringer mechanisms.

    378     and 379, for other bevel gearing of the interchangeably locked type.


CLS 74/386
TXT Bevel gearing under subclass 385 associated with the wheels of a vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 260+ for a motor vehicle having at least
    one wheel which is both driven and steerable and wherein the steerable
    wheel is of the stub-axle type and further wherein is included a flexible,
    axially rotatable means having one portion fixed to the vehicle and another
    portion pivotable with the steerable wheel for transmitting drive to the
    wheel, and additionally wherein the pivotable portion of the means includes
    a gear element of an intermeshing gear type universal joint, which joint
    may include gears of the bevel type.


CLS 74/387
TXT Bevel gearing under subclass 385 associated with the wringer of a washing
    machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for washer and wringer mechanisms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 269, for gearing for
    wringers.


CLS 74/388
TXT Gearing under subclass 640 provided with means whereby in response to
    actuation of one of its elements the movement of such element is continued
    or augmented by some other means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclasses for the
    combination of an expansible chamber motor operating gearing which is
    included as part of the power output means of the motor, particularly
    subclasses 358+ for feedback control mechanisms, many of which include
    gearing interconnecting the motor control and power output means.  For a
    statement of the line between Classes 74 and 91, see section III of the
    Class 91 definition.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 6.2+, for gearing organizations enabling
    steering by driving.


CLS 74/390
TXT Gearing under subclass 640 usually for driving a motor vehicle wheel, which
    is mounted adjacent a wheel and in which the driving shaft is offset with
    respect to the driven shaft or axle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 337+, for transmission mechanism
    combined with vehicle structure.


CLS 74/391
TXT Gearing under subclass 640 usually for driving a motor vehicle wheel, which
    is mounted adjacent a wheel and in which the driving shaft is centrally
    disposed with respect to the vehicle axle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 70+, for transmission mechanism combined
    with vehicle structure.


CLS 74/392
TXT Gearing under subclass 640 in which the gears are carried by parallel
    shafts which are movable from or toward each other to such a limited extent
    that the gears always remain in engagement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, for front gage rotary conveyors.


CLS 74/393
TXT Gearing under subclass 640 in which the speed of the driven element is
    varied during each revolution.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses 14+
    for cyclical or intermittent drive in planetary gearing.


CLS 74/395
TXT Gearing under subclass 640 in which one of the elements is adjustable
    relatively to bring it into adjusted relationship with another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 507, for a differential speed
    responsive device.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 646+, for adjustable supports, for motors,
    engines, etc., even though disclosed as adjustable for the purpose of
    engaging two gears.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 41+, for electrical
    synchronizing systems.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 12+ for synchronization of
    sound and picture in motion picture apparatus; subclass 33 for adjustable
    mechanical drive between a phonograph and a motion picture device to permit
    relative position adjustment between the two devices; and subclasses 160+
    for adjustable drive connection between the shutter and feed of a motion
    picture device.

    355,    Photocopying, subclasses 103 and 108+, for continuous contact film
    printing.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 75+ for machine operations of an
    electrophotography device and subclasses 107+ for particular structure of
    the device, specifically subclasses 110+ for modular or displaceable
    components.


CLS 74/396
TXT Gearing under subclass 395, in which either gear or shaft is adapted to be
    moved for the purpose of adjustment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 646+, for adjustable machine supports, per se.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 101+ for structure wherein a shaft carrying a pulley or guide
    roll is shiftable such as for increasing belt tension.

    476,    Friction Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclass 64 for a
    friction gear on the shaft of a movably mounted motor.


CLS 74/397
TXT Gearing under subclass 396, in which the gear shafts are parallel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 252+ for a plain bearing with an adjustable
    support.


CLS 74/398
TXT Gearing under subclass 396 in which the gears or gear shafts are adjustable
    by automatic means.


CLS 74/399
TXT Gearing under subclass 398, the gears or gear shafts being parallel to each
    other.


CLS 74/400
TXT Gearing under subclass 395, in which one of the elements is adapted to be
    moved manually in the direction along its axis for the purpose of
    adjustment.


CLS 74/401
TXT Gearing under subclass 400, the gear shafts being parallel to each other.


CLS 74/402
TXT Gearing under subclass 400, gear shafts being adjusted by automatic means.


CLS 74/403
TXT Gearing under subclass 402, the gear shafts being parallel to each other.


CLS 74/404
TXT Miscellaneous gearing under subclass 640 in which the direction of rotation
    of the driven shaft is reversible and in which there is no change of speed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    360     and 361, for forward and reverse, multiple clutch shaft slidable
    key or clutch type interchangeably locked gearing.

    376+,   for forward and reverse, single clutch shaft, slidable key or
    clutch type interchangeably locked gearing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclass 336 for a planer
    reversing mechanism.


CLS 74/404.5
TXT Gearing under subclass 404, in which there is no change of speed, in which
    the direction of rotation of the driven shaft is reversible, and in which
    the change of direction is controlled by a governor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    336.5,  for governor-controlled change-speed gearing.


CLS 74/405
TXT Miscellaneous gearing under subclass 640 provided with means for
    disconnecting the gear train.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    325+,   for mechanisms for connecting and disconnecting gears for use in
    connection with change-speed interchangeably locked transmission gearing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, appropriate subclasses for
    clutches, per se.


CLS 74/406
TXT Gearing under subclass 640 in which one of the elements moves linearly or
    angularly about a center other than the axis of rotation of the gear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27+,    for reciprocating carriage motions.

    31      through 35, for displaceable elements in rack and pinion gearing.

    424.6,  for spiral gear driven rack or shaft type gearing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 252+ and 283+ for agitators with a gear
    driven rotatable stirrer.


CLS 74/409
TXT Gear trains under subclass 640 provided with means to eliminate backlash in
    some element of the combination.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    440+,   for backlash takeup for sectional rotary bodies used in gearing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclass 146 for a device for
    removing backlash or wear from a screw feeding mechanism in a gear cutting
    machine.


CLS 74/410
TXT Gear trains under subclass 640 provided with means by which the pressure of
    the teeth of one unit is compensated for by that of another unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    427,    for pressure distributing means for worm gearing.


CLS 74/411
TXT Gearing under subclass 640 having one element provided with a yielding
    means through which torque is transmitted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    464,    Rotary Shafts Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for Rotary
    Shafts, subclasses 51+ for a rotary shaft coupled to driven member via a
    flexible element.


CLS 74/411.5
TXT Gearing under subclass 640 in which means are provided to selectively stop
    or prevent rotation of a gearing element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, appropriate subclasses for brake means, per se.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 4+ for combinations of
    joint operation and control of transmission and braking mechanisms.


CLS 74/412
TXT Gearing under subclass 640 consisting of two meshed gears mounted on shafts.

    (1)     Note.  The mountings and housings for the gears may be included in
    the claims.


CLS 74/413
TXT Gearing under subclass 412, wherein the gear axes or shafts are parallel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332,    for internal-external interchangeably locked gearing.

    390,    for eccentric driving shaft and axle gearing.


CLS 74/414
TXT Gearing under subclass 413, in which all of the gears have external teeth.


CLS 74/415
TXT Gearing under subclass 414, in which one of the gears has pin teeth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     for rotary to intermittent unidirectional mechanical movements.

    351,    for interchangeably locked gearing having longitudinally slidable
    pin gears.

    436,    for Geneva gears.


CLS 74/416
TXT Gearing under subclass 412 not otherwise classified, consisting of two
    gears in combination with a particular form of mounting, the axes thereof
    intersecting each other.


CLS 74/417
TXT Gearing under subclass 416, the gears being of the bevel type.


CLS 74/420
TXT Gearing under subclass 412 consisting of a combination of spur and of bevel
    gears.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for power table and stands.


CLS 74/421
TXT Gearing under subclass 412, consisting of gears of the spur type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    384,    for pivotally supported, spur type, interchangeably locked gearing.

    391,    for central driving shaft in axle type gearing.

    410,    for pressure distributing gearing.


CLS 74/422
TXT Gearing under subclass 412, the gearing embodying racks and pinions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27+,    for reciprocating carriage motions.

    31      through 35, for displaceable elements in rack and pinion gearing.

    406,    for displaceable gearing.

    424.5,  for spiral gearing.

    842,    for rack and pinion mechanisms changing the position of a driven
    means "on the fly".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 95+, 205, and 230, for rack and pinion drives for the pushing or
    pulling implements or apparatus.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclass 332 for a rack drive
    for a planer.


CLS 74/423
TXT Gearing under subclass 412 of the bevel type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    347,    for interchangeably locked, longitudinally slidable, multiple,
    bevel type gearing.

    378     and 379, for interchangeably locked, slidable clutch, single clutch
    shaft, single speed forward and reverse, bevel type gearing.

    385+,   for pivotally supported bevel type gearing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, for bevel gears
    of planetary type.


CLS 74/424
TXT Gearing under subclass 423, in which the bevel gearing drives the
    differential and rear axle shafts of a motor vehicle.

    SEARCH  CLASS:

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses
    220+for planetary  gear differentials.


CLS 74/424.5
TXT Gearings under subclass 412 of the spiral type.


CLS 74/424.6
TXT Spiral gearing under subclass 424.5, in which the driven element is a rack
    or chain.


CLS 74/424.7
TXT Gearing under subclass 424.5, the two gears being spiral and
    nonintersecting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    425+,   for worm gearing.

    458,    for worm teeth.


CLS 74/424.8
TXT Gearing under subclass 424.5 of the screw and nut type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89+,    for mechanical movements of the reciprocation or oscillating to or
    from alternately rotary type.

    499,    for screw and nut type, hand operated control lever and linkage
    systems.

    841,    for screw and nut mechanisms changing the position of a driven
    means "on the fly".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 390, for screw actuated follower mechanism.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclass 52 for means
    for advancingly engaging helixes in material.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 98+, 204, and 231+, for screw and nut drive operated implement
    or apparatus.


CLS 74/425
TXT Gearing under subclass 424.5 of the worm type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    383,    424.7, 424.8, 458+, and 500, for other screw or worm gearing.

    396,    for gearing having relatively movable axes.

    411,    for yieldability in gear trains.

    497,    for cam type motion translating steering posts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 56.1+, for torque
    responsive clutches which release on overload.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 220, 229, 296, and 343 for worm and worm wheel gearing operated
    implements or apparatus.


CLS 74/425.5
TXT Gearing under subclass 425, the worm gearing being of a structure to impart
    a variable speed to the driven member.


CLS 74/426
TXT Gearing under subclass 425, the worm gearing being of a structure to impart
    an intermittent motion to the driven element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     for rotary to intermittent unidirectional mechanical movements.

    436,    for Geneva gears.


CLS 74/427
TXT Gearing under subclass 425, the pressure of the teeth of one of the
    elements being compensated for by that of another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    410,    for pressure distributing gearing in general.


CLS 74/431
TXT Gearing under subclass 640 comprising a combination of a gear with a rotary
    body or bodies, not a gear, fixed thereto and mounted upon a common shaft.


CLS 74/432
TXT Gearing under subclass 431, the rotary elements being laterally spaced.


CLS 74/433
TXT Gearing under subclass 431, the rotary elements being spaced radially.


CLS 74/434
TXT Gearing under subclass 640 comprising structure and details of rotary
    bodies, per se, constituting gearing elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 550 for
    composite stock material containing metal particles which has porous
    component, subclass 579 for a metallic intermediate article in the form of
    a disk.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 152+ for a positive drive pulley; and subclasses 166+ for a
    friction drive pulley.


CLS 74/435
TXT Inventions under subclass 434, having teeth which extend only partially
    around the periphery, producing upon rotation an intermittent drive.


CLS 74/436
TXT Gearing under subclass 434, of the star-wheel type adapted to give
    intermittent rotation to a driven element during each revolution thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     for rotary to intermittent unidirectional mechanical movements.

    415,    for pin toothed external type gearing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 189 for motion picture sprockets
    intermittently driven by a star gear.


CLS 74/437
TXT Devices under subclass 434, having peripheries of noncircular form or
    irregularly shaped teeth, or both.


CLS 74/438
TXT Devices under subclass 434, provided with teeth both on the inner and outer
    periphery.


CLS 74/439
TXT Gears under subclass 434, which are made up of a plurality of sections.


CLS 74/440
TXT Devices under subclass 439, provided with means for the elimination of
    backlash.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    409,    for backlash takeup for gearing in general.


CLS 74/441
TXT Devices under subclass 440, the gears being of the screw and nut type.


CLS 74/443
TXT Gears under subclass 439 including means for deadening sound in operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    445,    for multiple disk rotary bodies.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    464,    Rotary  Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, subclasses 51+ for a flexible connection between a shaft and
    a member driven by the shaft.


CLS 74/444
TXT Gears under subclass 439 mounted upon a single shaft and connected thereto
    by means which permits of a differential action between them.

    SEARCH  CLASS:

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses 220+
    for planetary gear differentials.


CLS 74/445
TXT Devices under subclass 439, made up of laminations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for laminating processes for making gears.


CLS 74/446
TXT Bodies under subclass 439, having separate rims and webs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    448,    for bodies having segmental rims.


CLS 74/447
TXT Bodies under subclass 446, having the rim secured to the web by means
    permitting the detachment of the rim.


CLS 74/448
TXT Bodies under subclass 439, having rims made up of a plurality of segments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    446+,   for bodies having separable rims.


CLS 74/449
TXT Bodies under subclass 439, fabricated wholly or in part of sheet metal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclasses 5.1+, for wheels.


CLS 74/450
TXT Gears under subclass 439, in which the line of division between the
    sections occurs along a diameter.


CLS 74/451
TXT Gears under subclass 439, provided with removable inserts whereby the
    shafts may be removed laterally through the opening occurred by the inserts.


CLS 74/457
TXT Subcombinations under subclass 640 comprising the gear teeth of meshing
    gears.


CLS 74/458
TXT Devices under subclass 457 directed to the structure and details of worm
    and helical gear teeth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    424.7,  425+ and 500, for other screw and worm gearing.

    497,    for cam type motion transmitting steering gear.


CLS 74/459
TXT Devices under subclass 458 in the shape, structure, and details of nuts for
    screw and nut gearing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    424.8,  for cooperating screw and nut gearing.

    499,    for screw and nut type motion transmitting steering gear.


CLS 74/459.5
TXT Devices under subclass 457 comprising bevel teeth.


CLS 74/460
TXT Devices under subclass 457 comprising spur teeth.


CLS 74/461
TXT Devices under subclass 460 wherein the spur teeth are combined with
    yieldable elements.


CLS 74/462
TXT Devices under subclass 460 wherein the spur teeth are of a modified tooth
    form.


CLS 74/464
TXT Devices under subclass 462, in which the teeth embody antifriction means.


CLS 74/465
TXT Devices under subclass 464, in which the teeth are provided with or operate
    against rollers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    497,    for cam type, motion transmitting steering gear.

    500,    for worm type, motion transmitting steering gear.


CLS 74/466
TXT Devices under subclass 462, in which the teeth are twisted.


CLS 74/467
TXT Gears under subclass 640 specifically modified for purposes of lubrication.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    184,    Lubrication, subclasses 6+, for lubricating systems and
    particularly subclasses 11.1+ for splash systems.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses 159+
    for lubrication associated with planetary gear transmission.


CLS 74/468
TXT Gearing under subclass 467 having teeth specifically modified for purposes
    of lubrication.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      3, and 4, for automatic operation of control.


CLS 74/469
TXT Mechanisms under class definition which are made up of (1) such links as
    cranks, levers and rods, with turning and sliding pairs, and (2) links
    consisting of bodies which have two or more rigid elements, which links may
    be connected to other bodies for the purpose of transmitting force or
    motion, not otherwise classified.

    (1)     Note.  By pairs is meant two rigid bodies movably connected
    together so that the relative motion between them is of a definite
    character.

    (2)     Note.  Such linkages are normally manually operated and used for
    controlling some device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20      through 169, for mechanical movements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    901,    Robots, subcollections 27+ for lever and linkage systems which make
    up a robot arm.


CLS 74/470
TXT Systems under subclass 469 which have a resilient member as one of the
    elements.


CLS 74/471
TXT Systems under subclass 469 in which there is a single control element which
    selectively operates a plurality of controlled elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    480,    for interconnected multiple controlling systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    477,    Interrelated Power Delivery Controls, Including Engine Control, for
    an element to control both a transmission and an engine.


CLS 74/473
TXT Systems under subclass 471 for manually controlling transmissions.

    (1)     Note.  When the control system is claimed in combination with the
    transmission, the patent is classified with the transmission.  See the
    appropriate transmission class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334,    346, and 364, for fluid operated transmission control systems.

    337.5,  for cam-operated transmission controls.

    365,    for electrical transmission control systems.

    470,    for resilient joints in lever systems.

    525     and 544, for lever extensions.

    599,    for yieldable crank and wrist pins.


CLS 74/474
TXT Systems under subclass 473 for manually controlling transmissions in which
    the control member is foot operated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334,    for preselector type manually controlled transmissions.


CLS 74/475
TXT Systems under subclass 473 in which there are stop or checking devices used
    in conjunction with a member of the transmission control system to hold
    that member in a predetermined position until moved therefrom by an
    application of force transmitted to the member from the control system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    527+,   for detents.


CLS 74/476
TXT Systems under subclass 473 in which there are stops which prevent
    accidental or unintentional shifting into reverse.


CLS 74/477
TXT Systems under subclass 473 in which there are devices which are operated by
    elements of the system for preventing simultaneous movement of the shift
    rods.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    483,    for interlocking devices in transmission systems which are
    controlled by some means outside of the system as, for example, a clutch
    pedal, and for interlocks, per se.


CLS 74/478
TXT Systems under subclass 471 in which there are foot operated controls which
    selectively operates a plurality of controlled members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    474,    for foot operated transmission controls.

    480,    for interconnected multiple control elements.

    523,    for hand control levers.


CLS 74/478.5
TXT Devices under subclass 478 wherein there are at least two foot operated
    controllers for separate systems, and one of the controllers has either an
    extension or a remote operator attached or connected thereto and so
    positioned with respect to at least one other of the controllers that a
    single foot may be manipulated to effect operation of at least two of the
    controllers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    480,    for devices wherein there are a plurality of systems respectively
    having controllers, which controllers are provided with a mechanical
    interconnection.


CLS 74/479.01
TXT Multiple controlling elements for single controlled element:

    Systems under subclass 469 in which there are a

    plurality of controlling elements providing input to control a single
    element output.


CLS 74/480
TXT Systems under subclass 479 in which there are a plurality of independently
    operable systems which may be connected and operated by a single
    controlling member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    474,    for foot operated transmission controls.

    494,    for combined steering posts with auxiliary operators thereon.

    562+,   for pedals having additional foot engaging portions.


CLS 74/481
TXT Systems under subclass 480, when one control is a foot operated member and
    the other a hand operated member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclass 106, for brakes which are operated by both hand
    and foot controls.


CLS 74/482
TXT Systems under subclass 481, for controlling a carburetor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    513,    for foot operated accelerators, per se.


CLS 74/483
TXT Systems under subclass 479 located between and cooperating with elements of
    a plurality of control lever and linkage systems which prevent the
    simultaneous operation of the control systems, and permit the operation of
    only one control system at a time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    477,    for interlocked multiple controlled elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclasses 131+, for interlocking
    switches and signals.


CLS 74/484
TXT Systems under subclass 479 where the controlling elements are grouped
    around a steering post.


CLS 74/485
TXT Systems under subclass 484 in which the control members are rotary shafts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    504,    for manually operated rotatable rod, shaft or post type controls.


CLS 74/486
TXT Systems under subclass 484 in which the controlling elements have a part
    reciprocating in a line parallel to the steering post axis.


CLS 74/487
TXT Systems under subclass 486 in which the reciprocating member is flexible.


CLS 74/488
TXT Systems under subclass 486 in which the rotary shafts are grouped about a
    handle bar and in which one of the shafts reciprocates.


CLS 74/489
TXT Systems under subclass 488 in which one element of the controls is a
    flexible member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    501+,   for Bowden wires.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    464,    Rotary  Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, subclasses 51+ for a flexible shaft; and subclasses 173+ for
    a flexible housing for a shaft or Bowden cable.


CLS 74/490
TXT Systems under subclass 479 in which a plurality of controlling elements are
    grouped about each other, and a device is interposed between the
    controlling elements to prevent rattling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    238,    Railways:  Surface Track, subclass 382, for noise deadening surface
    track.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 556, 557, 560+, and 638 for vibration damping
    supports.

    278,    Land Vehicles: Animals Draft Appliances, subclasses 61+, for
    anti-rattling thill couplings.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 138, for anti-rattlers for swinging axle
    connections.


CLS 74/490.01
TXT Robotic arm:

    Systems under subclass 479.01 in which the controlled element is a member
    of a robotic linkage system which may include a base and its associated
    supporting structure.

    (1)     Note.  The definitions for various terms relating to ``robots" in
    this subclass definition and in the definitions for those subclasses which
    are either coordinate or subordinate to this subclass are as set forth in
    the glossary of Class 901, Robots.

    (2)     Note.  Robotic linkage systems having a claimed specific end
    effector and details thereof are not provided for in this class (74); see
    search notes below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, appropriate subclasses for robot
    linkage systems having a positively claimed end effector which can
    manipulate or move an article or a quantity of material.

    901,    Robots, for cross reference art collections regarding various
    robotic features.


CLS 74/490.02
TXT Including power cable or connector:

    Subject matter under subclass 490.01 in which the controlled member has
    associated therewith an electrical cable, a pneumatic tube, a hydraulic
    conduit, or a connector which will handle either single or plural energy
    paths.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, appropriate subclasses for
    various cable structures and for various insulators or isolators.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses, for connectors
    between electrical conductors.


CLS 74/490.03
TXT Including electric motor:

    Subject matter under subclass 490.01 in which one or more electric motors
    are used to move a robotic linkage system to a desired location within the
    range of motion of the linkage.

    (1)     Note.  The electric motors in this subclass are used to move the
    links of a robotic linkage system only; they are not intended to be used in
    translating a base member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, appropriate subclasses for
    various motor structure.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 415+ for automatic
    motor controls.

    901,    Robots, subclasses 23 and 24 for electric motor drive systems for
    arms with end effectors.


CLS 74/490.04
TXT Including flaccid drive element:

    Subject matter under subclass 490.01 in which the robotic linkage system is
    moveable to a desired location by drive inputs from one or more nonrigid
    flexible elements.

    (1)     Note.  Flaccid drive elements include, but are not limited to
    belts, chains, cables, or solid strands (e.g., bowden wire).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89.2+,  for reciprocating or oscillating to or from alternating rotary
    including flexible drive connector (e.g., belt, chain, strand).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    901,    Robots, subclass 21 for a robot arm with a flaccid drive element.


CLS 74/490.05
TXT Joint between elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 490.01 in which the controlled member is a
    drive path connection between two or more members of a robot linkage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, subclasses 57+ for arm components and connections
    therebetween.

    901,    Robots, subclass 28 for joints in robot linkages.


CLS 74/490.06
TXT Wrist:

    Subject matter under subclass 490.05 in which the joint, typically between
    the robot linkage and the end effector mount member, permits rotation about
    a plurality of orthogonal axes.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 901 glossary for a definition of ``wrist".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, subclasses 61+ for artificial wrists.

    901,    Robots, subclass 29 for robot wrists.


CLS 74/490.07
TXT Power elements as controlling elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 479.01 in which the controlling elements
    include power devices which include, but are not limited to electric
    motors, fluid motors, spring motors, heat engines (e.g., thermostatic
    actuator), electromagnetic devices (e.g., solenoids), etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, appropriate subclasses for related prime movers.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclasses for fluid
    motor detail.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclasses for fluid
    actuators.


    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, or Animal Powered, appropriate subclasses
    for spring escapements or spring motors.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, appropriate subclasses for
    various motor structures and subclasses 311+ for piezoelectric devices.

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, appropriate subclasses for electromagnetic devices.


CLS 74/490.08
TXT Planar surface with orthogonal movement and rotation:

    Subject matter under subclass 490.07 in which the power elements control
    both linear movement of a planar surface member (constrained to move along
    at least one of the three orthogonal spacial axes) and its rotary movement
    about at least one axis.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides a locus for rotary tables which have
    power inputs to control both translation and rotation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 1M, for x-y motion.

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 20, 137, and 143
    for horizontally adjustable planar surfaces.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 184, 657, and 661 for adjustable supports.

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 71 and 73 for work holders with adjustment
    means to shift the workpiece location on a machine tool.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    393 for microscope stage or slide carrier with plural transverse movement.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 749 for horizontal linear
    movement.


CLS 74/490.09
TXT Planar surface with orthogonal movement only:

    Subject matter under subclass 490.07 in which the power elements control
    linear movement of a planar surface member that is constrained to move
    along at least one of the three orthogonal spacial axes.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides a locus for x-y tables which have
    power inputs to control translation only.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 1M, for x-y motion.

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 20, 137, and 143
    for horizontally adjustable planar surfaces.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 184, 657, and 661 for adjustable supports.

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 71 and 73 for work holders with adjustment
    means to shift the workpiece location on a machine tool.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    393 for microscope stage or slide carrier with plural transverse movement.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 749 for horizontal linear
    movement.


CLS 74/490.1
TXT Pair of power elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 490.07 in which there are only two power
    elements in the linkage system.


CLS 74/490.11
TXT Power and manual controlling elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 479.01 in which there is a combination of at
    least one power driven element and at least one manually operated element
    which together control the system's single output element.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass, and in coordinate and subordinate
    subclasses, the terms ``manual" and ``hand operated" also include using leg
    or foot power.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    625,    for devices having alternate manual or power operators to control
    an output.


CLS 74/490.12
TXT Manual controlling elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 479.01 in which there is a plurality of
    exclusively hand or exclusively foot operated devices which together
    provide inputs to control the system's single output element.



    (1)     Note.  In this subclass, manual elements include, but are not
    limited to such devices as push buttons, levers, handwheels, foot pedals,
    etc.

    (2)     Note.  In this subclass, and in coordinate and subordinate
    subclasses, the terms ``manual" and ``hand operated" also includes using
    leg or foot power.


CLS 74/490.13
TXT Planar surface with orthogonal movement or rotation:

    Subject matter under subclass 490.12 in which hand operated elements
    control both linear movement of a planar surface member (constrained to
    move along at least one of the three orthogonal spacial axes) or its rotary
    movement about at least one axis.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides a locus for rotary tables which have
    only manual inputs to control translation or rotation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 1M, for x-y motion.

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 20, 137, and 143
    for horizontally adjustable planar surfaces.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 184, 657, and 661 for adjustable supports.

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 71 and 73 for work holders with adjustment
    means to shift the workpiece location on a machine tool.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    393 for microscope stage or slide carrier with plural transverse movement.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 749 for horizontal linear
    movement.


CLS 74/490.14
TXT Levers:

    Subject matter under subclass 490.12 in which the manual controlling
    elements are a plurality of first, second, or third degree levers which are
    either operated by hand or by foot.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass, levers include, but are not limited to
    such devices as handwheels, foot pedals, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    481,    for the combination of a hand operated lever and a foot operated
    pedal.


CLS 74/490.15
TXT Pair of levers:

    Subject matter under subclass 490.14 in which there are only two control
    elements in the linkage system that are exclusively either hand or foot
    operated.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass, levers include, but are not limited to
    such devices as handwheels, foot pedals, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    481,    for the combination of a hand operated lever and a foot operated
    pedal.


CLS 74/491
TXT Systems under subclass 469 which are hand operated.


CLS 74/492
TXT Hand operated steering posts under subclass 491.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 78 and 400+ for steering posts combined
    with vehicle structure.


CLS 74/493
TXT Hand operated steering posts under subclass 492 which are angularly or
    axially adjustable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    485,    for steering posts, per se.


CLS 74/494
TXT Auxiliary devices under subclass 492 to be used alternately with the
    conventional steering wheel or arm for operating steering posts.


CLS 74/495
TXT Devices under subclass 492 acting on a steering post or wheel to position
    it in a selected position.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the steering post is positioned, as
    distinguished from being positively locked, which latter feature is covered
    by the locks in Class 70, Locks, subclasses 182+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclasses 182+ for a lock for a rotary shaft (e.g., a
    steering post); subclasses 207+ for a lock for a handle, a handwheel (e.g.,
    a steering wheel), or a knob; and subclass 252 for a lock for an automobile
    steering mechanism, and wherein the mechanism includes a switch.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 8, for drive release
    locking clutches.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 90, for fluid positioning devices.


CLS 74/496
TXT Devices under subclass 492 for transferring power from steering posts to
    steering linkage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 400+, for power-operated steering
    mechanisms.


CLS 74/497
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 496 in which cams are used for transferring power
    from the steering posts to the steering linkage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56+,    for mechanical movements of the rotary to or from reciprocating or
    oscillating type having an axial cam and slide.

    74,     for mechanical movements of the rotary to alternating rotary type
    having mutilated gearing connections.


CLS 74/498
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 496 in which gears are used for transferring
    power from steering posts to steering linkages.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    485,    for combined steering and control assemblies.

    640+,   for gearing, per se.


CLS 74/499
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 498 in which screw and nut gearing is used.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    424.8,  for screw and nut gearing, per se.


CLS 74/500
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 498 in which worm gearing is used.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    425+,   for worm gearing, per se.


CLS 74/500.5
TXT Flexible transmitter (e.g., bowden cable):

    Mechanism under subclass 491 including an elongated element for
    transmitting force or motion from a hand to operate a device, wherein the
    element is formed of a flexible or pilant material or a series of pivoted
    links, such that the force or motion may be transmitted along a curved path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclass 412 for a flexible
    linkage actuator for a float-type flush valve.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 318 and 321 for flexible
    transmission elements combined with liquid level gauges and uses to
    transmit motion from a float to a gauge.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 267 and 278+ for presses which employ a
    flexible element actuator.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 118+ for a flexible pipe.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 344+
    for cable-operators for curtains or drapes.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 414, 502 and 829 for earth working
    apparatus which employs a flexible cable actuator (e.g., for raising or
    lowering a bulldozer blade).

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclasses 239-241 and 262-263 for cable
    actuated crane booms.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 232 for a pilot operated cable and linkage
    control system.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 294 for a flexible cable valve
    actuator.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying a Pushing or Pulling Force,
    particularly subclasses 264+ for cable actuators for load hauling or
    hoisting devices.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 31+ for tethered toy aircraft
    having cable operated mechanisms.

    464,    Rotary  Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, subclasses 51+ for a flexible torque transmitting element.


CLS 74/501.5
TXT Devices under subclass 500.5 comprising means for maintaining an
    established static stretch or pull in the flexible elements, effective upon
    change in said stretch or pull, for concurrently restoring the same to the
    established value.

    (1)     Note.  Many of these devices correct the change in tension
    resulting from a change in elongation of either the flexible element and/or
    the system mounting, due to variations in temperature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    586,    for longitudinally adjustable piston rods.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclasses 152+, for constant tension
    sustaining mechanism disclosed for use in interlocking, manually actuated,
    mechanically locking, railway switches and signals.

    267,    Spring Devices, appropriate subclasses, for spring devices, per se.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 101+ for a belt tightener.


CLS 74/501.6
TXT And hand operator:

    Mechanism under subclass 500.5 including a particular input portion which
    is directly contacted and manipulated by the hand.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 31+ for a (cable) control
    handle for a tethered toy aircraft.


CLS 74/502
TXT Device under subclass 501.6 wherein the particular input portion which is
    directly contacted and manipulated by the hand comprises a reciprocating
    rod slidably engaged in fixed support structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    487,    for hand operators for reciprocating flexible elements combined
    with post structure.


CLS 74/502.1
TXT For moving a mirror:

    Mechanism under subclass 501.6 wherein the elongated flexible element is
    connected to a device having a polished or smoothed surface that forms an
    image by reflection, and is intended to transmit motion from a hand to the
    device.


CLS 74/502.2
TXT Single rotatable lever (e.g., for bicycle brake or deraileur):

    Mechanism under subclass 501.6 wherein the particular input portion
    comprises a pivoted link or bar having a first section adapted to be
    contacted and moved by the hand, and a second portion connected directly to
    the flexible element or an intermediate fastener.

    (1)     Note.  Mechanism which employ serially connected levers at the
    input to the flexible element are excluded.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 243+ for a hand lever for tensioning flexible material (e.g.,
    cable).


CLS 74/502.3
TXT Including rolling antifriction elements:

    Mechanism under subclass 500.5 including a plurality of discrete rotatable
    elements located between and contacting the flexible element and its
    surrounding or supporting structure, to eliminate frictional contact
    between the two.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 346
    and 347 for cable antifriction means employed with drape or curtain
    operators.


CLS 74/502.4
TXT And sheath support, connector, or anchor:

    Mechanism under subclass 500.5 including a flexible tubular housing
    covering a substantial length of the flexible element and which allows
    axial movement of the element therein, wherein one of the following is
    provided:  (a) means to hold up or provide a foundation for the flexible
    housing or (b) means to fasten an end of the flexible housing either to
    another section of flexible housing or to a structure which is fixed with
    respect to the flexible element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 65+ for a sheath support bracket, per se.


CLS 74/502.5
TXT Specific cable or sheath structure:

    Mechanism under subclass 500.5 wherein significance is attributed to the
    particular composition or form of either the elongated flexible element or
    a flexible tubular housing which covers a substantial length of the
    flexible element and allows axial movement of the element therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Article, subclass 36 for conduit or
    tube type stock material and subclass 377 for a sheath having a wound or
    wrapped core or coating.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, subclass 173 for flexible shaft housings.


CLS 74/502.6
TXT Specific cable connector or guide:

    Mechanism under subclass 500.5 wherein particular significance is
    attributed to either (a) a device or structure for fastening an end of the
    flexible element to something, or (b) a rigid element which defines a path
    through which the flexible element moves and which limits lateral movement
    of the flexible element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons and Clasps, etc., subclasses 115+ for means to
    fasten a cable or cord to something other than a cable or cord.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying a Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 389 for cable guides.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for a cable
    connector, per se.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for devices adapted
    to electrically connect two wires.


CLS 74/503
TXT Devices under subclass 491 comprising hand operated, rigid, control members
    which operate by sliding movement in the direction of their longitudinal
    axes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    502,    for slidable operators for flexible transmitters.


CLS 74/504
TXT Devices under subclass 491, comprising miscellaneous hand operated controls
    which consist of a rigid rotatable member.


CLS 74/505
TXT Systems under subclass 504 in which the control member is a rotatable rod,
    shaft, or post which transmits motion through a gear to a drum and cable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    492+,   for steering posts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 82.1+, for brakes applied to elements rotated
    relative to stationary elements to prevent retrograde rotation while
    allowing forward rotation.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 266+ for apparatus for hauling or hoisting a load which includes
    a driven drum for pulling on or traveling along a cable, and wherein either
    the drum or the cable is attached to the load.


CLS 74/506
TXT Devices under subclass 504 directly connected to a drum and cable.


CLS 74/507
TXT Devices under subclass 504 connected to gearing for operating it.


CLS 74/508
TXT Devices under subclass 507 which translate the forces applied thereto with
    varying ratios.

    (1)     Note.  The device may be either automatic, or be changed manually.


CLS 74/509
TXT Devices under subclass 507 in the form of screw and nut gearing used for
    transmitting force and motion from the rotatable control member to the
    controlled linkage.


CLS 74/510
TXT Devices under subclass 504 consisting of rigid rotatable control members
    which are collapsible when not in use and adjustable either axially or
    transversely.


CLS 74/511
TXT Devices under subclass 504 for supporting and mounting hand operated
    rotatable rods, shafts, or posts, and their motion translating mechanisms.


CLS 74/512
TXT Systems under subclass 469 which are operated by foot controlled members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    482,    for interconnected hand and foot operators.

    564,    for foot rests.


CLS 74/513
TXT Systems under subclass 512 in which the foot operated member operates a
    linkage system which controls a carburetor.


CLS 74/514
TXT Systems under subclass 512 in which the foot operated member operates a
    linkage system which controls a signal.


CLS 74/515
TXT Systems under subclass 469 operated by a knee controlled member.


CLS 74/516
TXT Systems under subclass 469 having a mechanical unit which automatically
    varies the out-put force during the operation.


CLS 74/517
TXT Systems under subclass 516 wherein one element of the mechanical force
    varying unit is flexible.


CLS 74/518
TXT Systems under subclass 516 which have an additional device for varying the
    leverage of a control element so as to vary the input force.


CLS 74/519
TXT Elements under subclass 469 consisting of rigid structures which turn
    freely on a fixed pivot and impart pressure or motion from a source of
    power.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 90.39+, for a lever element
    in a poppet valve operating mechanism.


CLS 74/520
TXT Elements under subclass 519 hinged together and employed to transmit a
    varying force by lateral pressure on the hinge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclass 81 for drop leaf
    extension surfaces having a toggle type diagonal brace.


CLS 74/521
TXT Devices under subclass 520 consisting of a series of diagonal levers
    pivoted together in the middle and at the ends by which arrangement the
    device can be extended.

    (1)     Note.  When claimed in combination with a control mechanism, see
    the appropriate control subclass above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 277.1, for lazy tong brackets.


CLS 74/522
TXT Levers under subclass 519 in which the relationship of parts may be varied
    as by varying the length of the lever or work arms or by varying the point
    of application of force or the position of the fulcrum.


CLS 74/522.5
TXT Devices under subclass 519 which have one end fulcrumed on a fixed base and
    pivotally supporting at or adjacent the opposite end a reciprocating motion
    transmitting member.


CLS 74/523
TXT Levers under subclass 519 specially designed for operation by hand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    473,    for transmission control systems.

    545,    for hand cranks.


CLS 74/524
TXT Levers under subclass 523 which are formed of a plurality of parts which
    are jointed together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    522,    for adjustable levers.


CLS 74/525
TXT Levers under subclass 523 provided with means for adjusting their length or
    their arms with respect to each other.


CLS 74/526
TXT Devices under subclass 519 positioned in the path of movement of levers to
    limit their movements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    565,    for controller checks.


CLS 74/527
TXT Elements under subclass 469 used in connection with fixed and movable
    members and especially adapted to check or arrest motion.

    (1)     Note.  Complete the search for this subject matter in Class 70,
    Locks, subclasses 192+, wherein the detent is, is operated, or is
    controlled by a lock.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    475,    for detents for transmission controls.

    495,    for position controllers for steering posts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclasses 192+ and see (1) Note, supra.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 237+ and the subclasses there noted for detents
    in wells.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, appropriate subclasses, especially those titled
    with catch or detent.


CLS 74/528
TXT Detents under subclass 527 cooperating with hand cranks to prevent
    accidental movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    473,    for transmission controls.


CLS 74/529
TXT Devices under subclass 527 in which a detent acts on one element of the
    system to hold it in a predetermined position, the detent being connected
    to a second member of the system, and in order to release the element, the
    second member must first be operated to release the detent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    478,    for multiple foot operated control systems.

    479+,   for systems having multiple controlling elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 13, for interconnected
    clutch and brake.


CLS 74/530
TXT Detents under subclass 527 which consist of a body with a plurality of
    teeth which cooperate with similar teeth on the positioned member.


CLS 74/531
TXT Detents under subclass 527 which have friction surfaces engaging the
    positioned member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    502     and 503, for systems having slidable members.

    539,    for lever carried racks for cooperation with detents.


CLS 74/532
TXT Detents under subclass 527 consisting of hooks or struts which are engaged
    by a lever when it moves to a predetermined position.


CLS 74/533
TXT Detents under subclass 527 consisting of a toothed rack member with which a
    lever is adapted to be moved into engagement, the engaged tooth of the rack
    acting as a detent.


CLS 74/534
TXT Devices under subclass 533 wherein the toothed rack member is pivoted.


CLS 74/535
TXT Detents under subclass 533 consisting of devices pivoted on a lever and
    adapted to fall into notches or teeth in a fixed member to restrain the
    lever from back motion.


CLS 74/536
TXT Devices under subclass 533 in which the detent is released by a handle
    carried by the lever.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    479,    for multiple controlling elements for link and leverage systems.


CLS 74/537
TXT Devices under subclass 533 in which the detent is released by a lever which
    is so positioned on the control lever that it can be actuated by the
    fingers at the time of operation of the control lever.


CLS 74/538
TXT Devices under subclass 537 wherein finger levers are connected to the
    detent by a member slidably mounted on the control lever.


CLS 74/539
TXT Detents under subclass 533 which are controlled by a pedal connected to the
    pawl.


CLS 74/540
TXT Detents under subclass 527 which consist of a fixed member which cooperates
    with the teeth of a rack which is carried by a lever.


CLS 74/541
TXT Devices under subclass 540 in which the rack is pivoted to the lever.


CLS 74/542
TXT Devices under subclass 540 in which the racks are connected to a pedal
    which controls their position and effects their release from an operative
    position.


CLS 74/543
TXT Elements under subclass 469 adapted to be grasped by the hand in lifting or
    using when claimed in combination with essential mechanical movement
    structure or which is definitely limited in use or application to the
    mechanical movement art.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    557,    for handles for hand wheels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 110+, when handle structure only
    is claimed without special art limitations.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 283+ for specific
    handles incorporated in fishing reels.


CLS 74/544
TXT Devices under subclass 543 which are adapted to be detachably secured to
    handles to facilitate their control from a remote point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    546,    for extensible hand cranks.

    562+,   for extension pedals.


CLS 74/545
TXT Devices under subclass 543 for causing rotation about an axis, consisting
    of a member extending at right angles to the axis and a hand grip attached
    to the free end of the member.


CLS 74/546
TXT Devices under subclass 545 in which the length of the crank arm is
    adjustable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    544,    for extension handles.


CLS 74/547
TXT Devices under subclass 545 in which the handle or crank arm may be folded
    or otherwise collapsed when not in use.


CLS 74/548
TXT Devices under subclass 543 for connecting a handle to a shaft in which the
    connections between the shaft and handle are either controlled by the
    handle itself or by a mechanism mounted on the handle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclasses 348+, for analogous joints between
    door knobs and latch spindles.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 230+ for joints of general
    application between a rod and a base, plate or head.


CLS 74/550
TXT Devices under subclass 548 between an engine crank shaft and the hand crank
    where there is no back-fire protective device incorporated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 185.1+, for engine hand
    starter connections combined with a back-fire protective device.


CLS 74/551
TXT Devices under subclass 550 for holding an engine starter crank in a
    predetermined position when not in use.


CLS 74/551.1
TXT Devices under subclass 543 in the form of a handle bar for a bicycle or
    like device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for mere joints
    including joints for securing a bar to a steering post.  The mere naming of
    the elements will not exclude joint subject matter from Class 403.


CLS 74/551.2
TXT Devices under subclass 551.1 in which the bar is spring biased or supported
    for shock absorbing purposes.


CLS 74/551.3
TXT Devices under subclass 551.1 in which the bar is foldable or adjustable
    relative to the post.


CLS 74/551.4
TXT Devices under subclass 551.3 in which the bar is made up of separate
    sections.


CLS 74/551.5
TXT Devices under subclass 551.4 in which the sections are constrained to move
    simultaneously.


CLS 74/551.6
TXT Devices under subclass 551.3 in which the bar is continuous from end to end.


CLS 74/551.7
TXT Devices under subclass 551.6 in which the bar is locked in adjusted
    position by means of a latch operable from hand grip of the bar.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 321+ for joint structure having
    a manipulable latch.


CLS 74/551.8
TXT Attachments and accessories under subclass 551.1 specially designed for use
    with handle bars.


CLS 74/551.9
TXT Handholds and grips under subclass 551.1 for handle bars.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    558.5,  and see the notes thereto for covers and protectors for the
    operating end of a lever or a handle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 110+, for handles in general.


CLS 74/552
TXT Devices under subclass 543 comprising hand operated control wheels, e.g.,
    steering wheels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 894+, for the method of making wheels.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses for molding or shaping processes within the class
    definition which may include molding of a wheel.


CLS 74/553
TXT Devices under subclass 552 comprising hand operated rounded or wheel-shaped
    members adapted for attachment to a rotary shaft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 121, for knobs.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses for molding or shaping processes within the class
    definition which may include molding and uniting.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclass 347, for door knobs.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 230+ for a rod connected
    transversely to a plate.


CLS 74/554
TXT Hand wheels under subclass 552 having connections with rotary shafts which
    permit the hand wheel to be slid to inoperative positions relative to the
    shafts when not is use.


CLS 74/555
TXT Hand wheels under subclass 552 which are pivoted to a rotary shaft, the
    pivoted connection permitting movement of the hand wheel to an inoperative
    position by rotary motion about the pivotal axis.


CLS 74/556
TXT Pivoted hand wheels under subclass 555 with locking means for holding the
    hand wheel in a predetermined position relative to its pivotal axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclasses 207-224, for the locking means, per se.


CLS 74/557
TXT Handles under subclass 552 adapted to be grasped by the hand which are
    attached to a hand wheel to facilitate its operation.


CLS 74/558
TXT Devices under subclass 552 attached to the wheel rim to facilitate gripping
    of the wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    558.5,  for covers and protectors for the operating end of a lever or a
    handle.


CLS 74/558.5
TXT Devices under subclass 543 for covering or cushioning a hand engaging
    portion of an existing handle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    551.9,  for handholds and grips for handle bars.

    558,    for rim grips and covers for handwheels.

    563,    for pads and covers for pedals.


CLS 74/559
TXT Elements under subclass 469 comprising crank arms fixedly attached to
    oscillatable shafts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    543+,   for handles.

    595,    for cranks and wrist pins.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 230+ for a rod connected
    transversely to a plate.


CLS 74/560
TXT Elements under subclass 469 comprising foot engaging levers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    481,    for interconnected hand and foot operators for systems.

    512+,   for foot operated systems.

    539     and 542, for pedal controlled detents for levers.

    594.1,  for cranks and pedals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 62, for bicycle pedal actuated
    bells.

    192,    Clutches and Power Control, subclass 5, for bicycle coaster brakes.


CLS 74/561
TXT Levers under subclass 560 designed to impart motion to a mechanism through
    a connecting rod and crank.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 93, for treadle operated trackman's
    car drives.

    451,    Abrading, subclass 341 for a double treadle frame or mount for
    abrading.


CLS 74/562
TXT Devices under subclass 560 having means connected to or contacting the
    pedal which constitutes an additional foot engaging portion.

    (1)     Note.  Many of these devices in this subclass are mounted directly
    on the foot engaging portion of the pedal and either (1) enable operation
    from a remote point or (2) constitute a lengthening adjustment for the
    pedal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    480,    for devices in which there are a plurality of independently
    operable control systems which may be connected and operated by a single
    controlling member.

    544,    for extension handles.

    546,    for extensible hand cranks.


CLS 74/562.5
TXT Devices under subclass 562 wherein the additional foot engaging mechanism
    is so mounted that its zone of operation is to one side of the zone of
    operation of the pedal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    478.5,  for pedal extensions so positioned that a single foot may operate
    an additional pedal or controller concurrently with the pedal provided with
    the extension.


CLS 74/563
TXT Devices under subclass 560 comprising coverings for the foot engaging
    portions of pedals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    558.5,  and see the notes thereto for covers and protectors for the
    operating end of a lever or a handle.


CLS 74/564
TXT Elements under subclass 469 located adjacent pedals to support a portion of
    the foot during the pedal operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, subclass 232, for foot rests for piano pedals.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclass 75, for foot rests for
    passengers.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 423.1+, for a leg-, knee-, or footrest
    for a seated person particularly subclass 423.17 for laterally bearing leg
    rest to relieve a leg from strain in operative position of the foot with
    respect to a pedal for a control lever and linkage system.


CLS 74/565
TXT Elements under subclass 469 placed in the path of controllers to limit
    their speed of operation to a predetermined maximum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    526,    for lever stops.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 266+, for an internal resistance brake of
    general utility.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 543+, for motor
    controllers.

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, subclasses 800+ and 825+ for
    single motor running-speed control systems with, and without, feedback,
    respectively.


CLS 74/566
TXT Elements under subclass 469 which are (1) attached to levers to close slots
    in which such levers move so as to prevent the passage of dust and oil; (2)
    movable in front of operating members to prevent their accidental operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 90.6, for slot closers attached to control
    levers of an automobile.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 144+ for a chain guard.


CLS 74/567
TXT Elements under the class definition comprising a rotatable, oscillatable,
    or reciprocable machine element (usually a plate or a cylinder) having a
    surface or a groove formed therein of predetermined contour which will
    impart a prescribed motion of reciprocation or oscillation such as
    generally cannot be obtained by gear wheels or link motion, to a follower
    slidably contacting with such surface or groove.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 90.48 through 90.6, for a
    cam or a follower in a poppet valve operating mechanism.


CLS 74/568
TXT Devices under subclass 567 comprising a cam or a part thereof adjustable
    longitudinally or transversely of its axis of rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    838+,   for adjustable cam changing a stroke "on the fly".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 218+, for condition responsive control of an
    adjustable cam type pump drive.


CLS 74/569
TXT Devices under subclass 567 comprising an element adapted to slidably
    contact with and to be moved by a cam.


CLS 74/570
TXT Elements under the class definition comprising a disk or wheel
    eccentrically mounted on a shaft and rotatable within a ring, called the
    eccentric strap, and adapted to be connected by a rod to an object to be
    reciprocated on rotation or oscillation of said disk or wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116+,   for eccentric drives for rotary to intermittent unidirectional
    movement.


CLS 74/571
TXT Devices under subclass 570 wherein the position of the geometric center of
    the disk or wheel is adjustable to and from, or about, the axis of its
    carrying shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for adjustable eccentric drives for rotary to intermittent
    unidirectional movement.

    835+,   for adjustable eccentric and strap changing a stroke "on the fly".


CLS 74/572
TXT Elements under the class definition comprising wheels and other rotors
    where the improvements claimed pertain to inertia or momentum
    characteristics.

    (1)     Note.  Where additional characteristics are claimed which limit the
    wheel or other rotor to particular arts (as gears, vehicle wheels,
    centrifugal separators, turbines, dynamos, etc.), the patent will be placed
    with the appropriate art and cross referenced here, but the mere
    designation of the device by name will not exclude the same from this
    subclass or the indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for gyroscopes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 185.1+, for mechanical
    starting devices.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 74 for rotary
    dynamo-electric devices having a flywheel, subclass 153 for magnetos built
    into a fly-wheel.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses particularly
    subclasses 230+ for joints between a rod and a plate.

    464,    Rotary  Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, appropriate subclasses for flexible shaft couplings.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the notes thereunder.


CLS 74/573
TXT Structures under subclass 572 having either (1) means forming a part of the
    rotor, or (2) means operating with the rotor, or (3) both to balance the
    same.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 403 and 404, for other weights
    with or without their supporting means.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 6.01 and 888.08, for process and
    apparatus for balancing crankshafts.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 66+, for balance testing machines
    having fly-wheels with adjustable masses.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 330, and 333 for balancing means
    on indicators or pointers.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 51 for electrical
    generators or motors having means for suppression of vibration or noise.

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 199+ for shafts balancing means with bearing.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 151, for weight
    balanced rotating working members.

    451,    Abrading, subclass 343 for a grindstone with a balancing means.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, subclass 127 for a flexible coupling with balancing means;
    and subclass 180, for shafts balancing involving modification of the shafts
    structure.


CLS 74/574
TXT Structures under subclass 572 having means capable of movement relative to
    the rotor or its rotary shaft for damping torsional vibrations and/or
    smoothing out oscillations or speed variations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    589+,   for counterbalanced pitmans and connecting rods.

    594.5,  for counterbalanced pedals for cranks.

    603+,   for counterbalanced cranks and wrist pins.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 514.12+, 514.14, 522, and 526 for
    dampening means peculiarly associated with a responsive mechanism.

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 266+, for a fluid-resistance brake or shock
    absorber of general utility.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 93, for
    electromagnetic devices for damping the angular oscillations of a rotary
    shaft.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, subclasses 51+ for a flexible coupling between a shaft and
    another member; and subclass 180 for shaft balancing or vibration damping
    involving modification of the shaft structure.


CLS 74/575
TXT Elements under the class definition limited to the structural details of a
    pawl or ratchet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144+,   for grip units for intermittent grip type mechanical movements,
    especially subclasses 149+, for power pawl lifters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 61+, for pivoted pawl type ratchet wrenches or
    screwdriver heads.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 296,
    297 and 300+, for ratchet mechanisms, for spring rollers.

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 30, 61 and 82.1+, for one way brakes.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 41+, for one way
    clutches and 51, for multiple reversing clutches.

    235,    Registers, subclass 131, for overthrow preventers.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 124+, for
    electric clock escapements.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 120+,
    for a tool of that class caused to rotate by a ratchet.


CLS 74/576
TXT Devices under subclass 575 comprising pawls held out of engagement with the
    ratchet wheel during rotation of the latter in one direction and moved into
    engagement with said ratchet wheel on the reverse rotation of the latter.


CLS 74/577
TXT Devices under subclass 575 comprising pawls mounted for oscillation on a
    pivot.


CLS 74/578
TXT Devices under subclass 575 comprising pawls mounted for sliding movement.


CLS 74/579
TXT Elements under the class definition comprising an intermediate connector
    having a bearing at each end for transmitting motion by a push and pull
    movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    597     and 598, for sectional cranks and wrist pins.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 428+ for processes of assembling bearings
    in the ends of rods, and subclasses 888.4+ for methods of making poppet
    valves.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 84, for locomotive connecting rods.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 90.61+, for a rod element
    in a poppet valve operating mechanism.

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 276+ for sleeves, or liners.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 52+ for articulated members in
    general.


CLS 74/580
TXT Devices under subclass 579 comprising two or more connecting rods
    operatively connected to the same crank pin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 491+, for expansible
    chamber type motors having a plurality of radially arranged cylinders.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 148 for an expansible chamber
    device having a plurality of rigidly interconnected radially arranged
    cylinders.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 44 and 54.2+ for an engine
    of that class type which uses a radial pitman or connecting rod.


CLS 74/581
TXT Devices under subclass 579 comprising connecting rods having yieldable
    means embodied therein for allowing limited relative movement between the
    ends thereof.


CLS 74/582
TXT Devices under subclass 581 comprising yieldable means consisting of coil
    springs, the axes of which extend coincident with or parallel to the
    longitudinal axis of the connecting rod, giving only linear yieldability.


CLS 74/583
TXT Devices under subclass 581 comprising yieldable means consisting of fluid
    means.


CLS 74/584
TXT Devices under subclass 581 wherein the yieldable means yields only after
    predetermined pressure has been applied to ends of the link.

    (1)     Note.  The device may include a frangible connection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, for safety devices for bolt and rivet making machines.


CLS 74/585
TXT Devices under subclass 584 wherein the yieldable means consists of a toggle
    mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  The toggle mechanism as a complete unit must be a part of
    and movable with the rod.  If part of the toggle mechanism is pivoted to
    any part of the machine the said device is classified with the machine.


CLS 74/586
TXT Devices under the subclass 579 comprising connecting rods having an
    adjusting means embodied therein for regulating the length thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    501.5,  for constant tension sustaining devices for flexible cable
    operators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 257 for reciprocating platen presses, not
    elsewhere provided for, having means to adjust the range of movement of the
    platens.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 48 for adjustable combustion
    chambers.

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 196+ for slack position adjusters.


CLS 74/587
TXT Devices under subclass 579 comprising connecting rods having a hollow shank
    or an oil conduit incorporated therewith, between the opposite bearing
    ends, whereby lubricant can be supplied to said ends.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    184,    Lubrication, subclass 6, for systems and subclass 24, for swab
    piston-rod lubricators.


CLS 74/588
TXT Devices under subclass 579 comprising connecting rods fabricated from sheet
    metal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 888.09+, for methods of making and
    assembling pistons and pitmans.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles; subclasses 544+ for stock
    material, e.g., of indefinite length, which is all metal or has adjacent
    metal components.


CLS 74/589
TXT Devices under subclass 579 comprising connecting rods having counterweights
    directly attached thereto for balancing the same about a bearing end.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    572+,   for flywheels and rotors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 113+, for hydropneumatic
    counter-balances, per se.


CLS 74/590
TXT Weight devices under subclass 589 for assisting connecting rods to move a
    load connected thereto.


CLS 74/591
TXT Weight devices under subclass 590 attached to a rotating arm for assisting
    the connecting rod to move a load connected thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    573,    for counterbalanced flywheels and rotors.

    603,    for counterbalanced cranks and wrist-pins.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 403 and 404, and see the notes
    thereto, for weights, per se.


CLS 74/592
TXT Spring devices under subclass 589 for assisting the connecting rod to move
    a load connected thereto.


CLS 74/593
TXT Devices under subclass 579 in which the rod comprises a pair of sections,
    each section sliding on a portion of the other, and having a means thereon
    for coupling and uncoupling said sections whereby one section will move
    simultaneously with or relatively to the other for transmitting or
    interrupting the flow of power from one bearing end to the other.


CLS 74/594
TXT Devices under subclass 579 comprising connecting rods having the end
    bearings thereof adjustable relative to the shank of the rod.


CLS 74/594.1
TXT Elements under the class definition comprising a unit consisting of an arm
    rotating about an axis and a crank pin projecting transversely from said
    arm for the attachment of a foot pedal, the first mentioned axis and the
    axis of the pin being substantially parallel to each other.

    (1)     Note.  The crank bearing and hanger and the pedal may be included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    560+,   for foot levers.

    595+,   for cranks and wrist pins.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclass 2.5, for combinations of
    a wheel, axle and pedal crank.

    384,    Bearings, subclass 431 for a pedal type crank bearing with support
    means.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses, especially
    subclasses 230+ for a joint between a rod and a plate.


CLS 74/594.2
TXT Units under subclass 594.1 which have a gear attached thereto.


CLS 74/594.3
TXT Units under subclass 594.1 having incorporated therewith a self-actuated
    means for adjusting the axis of the pin relative to the axis of rotation of
    the arm continuously throughout the complete revolution of the arm.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    602,    for variable cranks and wrist pins.


CLS 74/594.4
TXT Foot engaging units and their attachment to the crank arm under subclass
    594.1.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    560+,   for pedals, per se.


CLS 74/594.5
TXT Pedals under subclass 594.4 which have means to counterbalance them so that
    the foot engaging portion always remains up.


CLS 74/594.6
TXT Pedals under subclass 594.4 having some means to hold the toe of a shoe on
    the pedal.


CLS 74/594.7
TXT Pedals under subclass 594.4 which are adjustable for various width shoes or
    are adapted to be folded against the crank arm.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 294, for pedals with foldable attachments
    to be used as props.


CLS 74/595
TXT Elements under the class definition comprising a unit consisting of an arm
    rotating or oscillating about an axis and a crank pin projecting
    transversely from said arm for the attachment of a connecting rod, the
    first mentioned axis and the axis of the pin being substantially parallel
    to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25+,    for mechanical movements of the rotary to and/or from reciprocating
    or oscillating type.

    63+,    for mechanical movements of the rotary to rotary type.

    110,    for mechanical movements of the reciprocating to reciprocating type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 6.01 and 888.08, for methods and
    apparatus for making crankshafts.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 52+ for articulated rod members
    in general.


CLS 74/596
TXT Units under subclass 595 integrally united, the axes of rotation of the
    arms of each unit being coaxial with each other.


CLS 74/597
TXT Units under subclass 596 made in sections and subsequently united by
    bolting, riveting, or welding.


CLS 74/598
TXT Units under subclass 595 made in sections and subsequently united by
    bolting, riveting, or welding.


CLS 74/599
TXT Units under subclass 595 having a yieldable joint between the ends of the
    crank arm whereby said ends are capable of angular movement relative to
    each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    470,    for control linkage and leverage systems having resilient
    connections.


CLS 74/600
TXT Units under subclass 595 having incorporated therewith a means for
    adjusting the axis of the pin relative to the axis of rotation of the arm
    to adjust the throw of the crank.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for having adjustable rotary crank drives for intermittent grip
    type mechanical movements.

    837,    for adjustable cranks and wrist pins changing a stroke "on the fly".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 48, for adjustable combustion
    chambers.


CLS 74/601
TXT Units under subclass 600 having incorporated therewith means for
    automatically adjusting the axis of the pin relative to the axis of
    rotation of the arm according to the speed of rotation of said arm to
    automatically adjust the throw of the crank.


CLS 74/602
TXT Units under subclass 595 having incorporated therewith a self-actuated
    means for adjusting the axis of the pin relative to the axis of rotation of
    the arm continuously throughout the complete revolution of the arm.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 48, for adjustable
    combustion chambers and 78, for variable clearance for cycle engines.


CLS 74/603
TXT Units under subclass 595 having means attached to the arm thereof for
    counter-acting the centrifugal force exerted by the unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    591,    for weights attached to crank arms for assisting a connecting rod
    to move a load.


CLS 74/604
TXT Units under subclass 603 having a device connected thereto for damping
    vibrations created in/by the unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    574,    for vibration damping means for flywheels and rotors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 192.1+, for compensating
    devices.


CLS 74/605
TXT Units under subclass 595 having the arm and/or the pin thereof modified for
    lubricating the peripheral surfaces of the pin.


CLS 74/606
TXT Elements under the class definition for inclosing and supporting gearing in
    assembled relationship.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and the ones hereunder are limited to the
    casing structure, per se.  If the novelty resides completely or partially
    in the inclosed gearing, classification is with the particular type of
    gearing. If the casing is intended for use with a particular element or
    apparatus, classification is with the element or the apparatus,
    respectively.

    (2)     Note.  See Index to Classification of Patents under "Casings".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    612+,   for casing structure movable with respect to its inclosed elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 440.2, 544+, 814, and 860, for guards for
    cutting machines.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 147+ for a plurality of
    unitarily mounted cylinders combined with a casing or support for a rotary
    shaft, subclass 161 for a support or frame for an expansible chamber
    device, and subclass 261 for a crankshaft housing (e.g., crankcase), per
    se.  For a statement of the line between Class 74 and Class 92, see section
    III of this class definition of Class 92 under SEARCH CLASS 74.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 251.1+ for a cutter guard for a tool of
    that Class.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and flexible couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, subclasses 170+ for a housing for a rotary shaft.


CLS 74/607
TXT Housings under subclass 606 for inclosing and holding automotive
    differential gearing in assembled relationship.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 581 for a
    metallic intermediate article in the form of a symmetrical panel.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses 200+
    for planetary gear differentials.


CLS 74/608
TXT Housings under the class definition for merely inclosing gearing for the
    express purpose of preventing injury to/by said gearing.

    (1)     Note.  If the structure is adapted to be used with a particular
    machine, classification is with the machine. However, this subclass and the
    indented subclasses are limited to structures not otherwise classified and
    for which no subclass is provided in the art classes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    566,    for lever guards.


CLS 74/609
TXT Housings under subclass 608, the portion of the gearing inclosed is a wheel
    member thereof.

    (1)     Note.  For supporting mountings for gear shafts claimed in
    combination with particular types of gearing, search appropriate gearing
    subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 144+ for a guard or housing for a belt and pulley power
    transmission.


CLS 74/612
TXT Elements under the class definition for preventing injury to an operator of
    a machine during the operation thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    608+,   for guards stationary relative to the guarded element.


CLS 74/613
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 612 comprising guards actuated into protective
    position by some part of the machines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 133-137, for stop
    mechanisms.


CLS 74/614
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 613 wherein a part of the machine is an
    oscillating member.


CLS 74/615
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 613 wherein a part of the machine is a
    reciprocating member.


CLS 74/616
TXT Means under subclass 612 actuated by the operator simultaneously with the
    starting device of a machine for preventing injury to the operator of such
    a machine during operating thereof.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include those mechanisms which
    prevent starting of the machine until the guarding element has been shifted
    to its proper guarding position, for which see Class 192, Clutches and
    Power-Stop Control, subclasses 133+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 133+ and see (1) Note,
    supra.


CLS 74/617
TXT Devices under subclass 612 for shielding the heads of set screws against
    injury thereto and/or to persons.


CLS 74/625
TXT Devices under the class definition having provision for operation of a
    single driven device alternately by either manual or power means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    665+,   for plural concurrent gearing drives.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 203, for shears which may either be hand or power
    operated.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 485+ for an earth working implement
    adapted to be lifted for transport by a power actuator and/or a manual
    actuator.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, particularly subclasses 14 and 130 for
    valve actuation involving alternate manual and power actuation.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 2, for combined
    controlled electric motors and manual operators for actuating one or more
    common load devices.

    417,    Pumps, subclass 374, for pumps having both manual and motor drive
    means therefor.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses 1+
    for input from independent power sources to a planetary gear transmissions.


CLS 74/640
TXT Mechanism under the class definition comprising relatively rotatable bodies
    or combinations of such bodies provided with teeth or interengaging
    elements, chains and sprockets, belts, and pulleys or other means not
    otherwise classified, whereby a rotatable body will impart to or receive
    motion or power from some other member by rolling contact.

    EXPLANATORY NOTE:

    In 1988 a new class (Class 475) was formed by taking all subclasses
    relating to planetary gearing from Class 74 which appeared below subclass
    640 in the Class 74 schedule. However, subclasses appearing above Class 640
    in the Class 74 schedule were not screened for arrangements that might
    include planetary gearing, and so such higher appearing subclasses should
    be given consideration for a complete search on planetary gearing
    combinations.

    (1)     Note.  For guide pulleys and rollers, see Class 474, Endless Belt
    Power Transmission Systems or Components, appropriate subclasses.  Class
    193, Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, appropriate subclasses;
    and 384, Bearing, appropriate subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  The rack of a rack and pinion is here included on the theory
    that a rack is a portion of the contacting surface of a gear of infinite
    radius.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, appropriate subclasses
    (and see (1) Note, supra).

    352,    Optics: Motion Pictures, subclasses 166+ for gearing specifically
    adapted for motion picture apparatus.

    384,    Bearings, appropriate subclasses and see (1) Note, supra.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 124+,
    for drilling machines including drive structure; and see the notes in that
    class definition.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, subclasses 51+ for a flexible connection between a shaft and
    a member driven by the shaft.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, and see (1)
    Note, supra.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, for planetary
    gears and planetary gear transmission.


CLS 74/650
TXT Gearing under subclass 640, not of the planetary type, wherein a
    differential action is obtained through some mechanisms other than a
    planetary gearing, such as e.g., overrunning clutches acting between a
    driving member and a plurality of driven members, a fluid drive involving
    plural power paths combined with other gearing, etc.  Such structures are
    commonly designated "gearless" differentials.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 485, for rotary type hydraulic differentials.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 41+, for one way
    clutches, per se, and see especially subclass 50 for plural clutches
    associated with parallel vehicle wheels permitting either wheel to overrun.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses 220+,
    for planetary gear differentials.


CLS 74/655
TXT Gearing units under subclass 640 wherein a fluid drive mechanism is
    included as a part of the intermediate internal mechanism of a single
    gearing unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    730.1+, and see the notes thereto, for combined gearing and fluid drives.


CLS 74/661
TXT Gearing under subclass 640 in which means are provided to connect plural
    prime motors either individually or unitarily to the same load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 698+ for a residual system of plural
    motors.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses 1+,
    for plural power inputs to planetary gearing.


CLS 74/664
TXT Gearing under subclass 640 wherein a single prime mover drives plural power
    paths, at least one path involving a gearing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    661,    for plural prime movers selectively coupled to common output.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 6.2+ for a motor vehicle which is
    steered by creating a difference between the driving effort developed by
    one or more traction elements located on one side of the vehicle and the
    driving effort developed by one or more traction elements located on the
    other side thereof, which may involve the control of plural power paths
    emanating from a prime mover.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, for plural power
    paths to or from planetary gearing.


CLS 74/665
TXT Gearing under subclass 640 in which a plurality of power paths constitute
    either the input or the output of the gearing.

    (1)     Note.  For the most part, the gearing serves either to divide a
    single input into a plurality of outputs, or combine a plurality of inputs
    into a single output.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11+,    for power take offs.

    625+,   for alternate manual and power operators in general.

    661,    for plural prime movers selectively coupled to common output.

    810.1+, for nonplanetary gearing wherein reverse torque changes power
    transmission to an alternate path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 6.2+ as explained in the reference
    thereto appearing in subclass 664 above.

    188,    Brakes, appropriate subclasses, for brakes mounted on motor
    vehicles, not structurally related to a gearing (which is not specifically
    claimed) for controlling the gearing; i.e., brakes on the rear axle which
    are independently operable and hence incidentally control the relative
    output of the differential.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, the un-numbered title
    "Interrelated power delivery controls" and see the notes thereto for
    interrelated control of one or more of prime movers, clutches, gearing,
    brakes and loads by name only.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 31+, for
    the combination of plural tools of that class type combined with drive
    means utilizing plural power path gearing.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, for plural power
    paths to or from planetary gearing.


CLS 74/670
TXT Gearing under subclass 665 in which a separable operating crank may be
    applied at any one of a plurality of points to actuate the driven shaft
    directly or through gearing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    625+,   for alternate manual and power operators.


CLS 74/718
TXT Gearing under subclass 665 wherein a fluid drive either divides or combines
    alternate plural power paths to and/or from the gearing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    730.1+, and see the notes thereto, for combined gearing and fluid drives.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses 31+,
    for fluid drive combined with planetary gearing.


CLS 74/720
TXT Gearing under subclass 665 wherein a fluid drive is included in one of the
    plural paths.


CLS 74/721
TXT Gearing under subclass 665 in which the gearing is of the friction type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    476,    Friction Gear Transmission Systems or Components, for friction gear
    transmissions, per se.


CLS 74/724
TXT Gearing under subclass 665 wherein the gearing unit is of worm gear type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    425,    for worm type gearing, per se.


CLS 74/730.1
TXT With fluid drive:
    Subject matter under subclass 640 wherein gearing is combined with a fluid
    force torque transmitting device to form a drive train.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 325+ for the various pumpmotor drives, per
    se.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 3.21+ for a fluid drive
    of the impeller-turbine type combined with a clutch and 3.34 for the
    combination with a brake.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses 22+
    for fluid drives used for steering by driving and 31+ for other
    arrangements of fluid drives with planetary gearing.

    477,    Interrelated Power Delivery Controls, Including Engine Control, for
    fluid drives used in combination with interrelated transmission and engine
    control.


CLS 74/731.1
TXT Condition responsive control:
    Subject matter under subclasses 730.1 wherein means are provided to sense a
    condition or change of condition in the drive train and in response to such
    sensing effect a control function on the drive train.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the control function is a change in the speed ratio.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    336+    and 337, for automatic ratio change nonplanetary gearing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses 19,
    42, 43, 48+, 51, 60+, 76+, 94+, 118+, 125+, 153, 186, 199, 208, and 254+
    for various planetary transmission with condition responsive control.


CLS 74/732.1
TXT With one or more controllers for gearing, fluid drive, or clutch:Subject
    matter under subclass 730.1 wherein means is provided to regulate the
    operation of the gearing or fluid drive; or to regulate the operation of a
    clutch.


CLS 74/733.1
TXT With interrelated controls:
    Subject matter under subclass 732.1 wherein two of the regulating means are
    either controlled by a single actuator or are otherwise related such that
    the operation of one affects the operation of the other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 3.51+ and 4+ for other
    interrelated power delivery controls.

    477,    Interrelated Power Delivery Controls, Including Engine Control, for
    interrelated controls including a control for an engine.


CLS 74/745
TXT Gearing under subclass 640 comprising a plurality of interchangeably locked
    nonplanetary gearing units arranged in series.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    625+,   650 and 665+, for other plural gearing units.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses 207+
    for nonplanetary transmission combined with a planetary transmission.


CLS 74/810.1
TXT Reversal of direction of power flow changes power transmission to alternate
    path:Subject matter under subclass 640 having two alternately usable
    parallel power transmitting paths between a single input and a single
    output so arranged that (1) the interchange of the input and output
    relationship or (2) the change of direction of rotation of the input,
    changes the path through which the power is transmitted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      and see the notes thereto for mechanical movements or gearing for
    initiating the starting of a machine.

    352+,   for change speed gearing including gears movable laterally with
    respect to the longitudinal axis of the transmission into mesh with a
    cooperating gear.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses 12+
    for planetary gearing utilized to perform this function.


CLS 74/810.2
TXT Input and output exchange functions:
    Subject matter under subclass 810.1 wherein in response to the interchange
    of roles between the transmission input member and the transmission output
    member the path through which power is transmitted is changed.

    (1)     Note.  To be placed herein the transmission must have a useful load
    at each of its input and output ends. Most of the patents herein disclose
    either motor-generators or motor-pumps used to start an engine which in
    turn drives the generator or pump.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants, subclass 38 for gearing of this type
    combined with significant generator structure.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclass 13 for
    this combination utilizing planetary gearing.


CLS 74/813
TXT Assemblies under the class definition having (1) means for applying torque
    to a shaft or other rotatably mounted device to turn the shaft or other
    device about its axis to one or more selected loci, and (2) means to
    prevent or hold against rotation in at least one direction at such loci.



    EXPLANATORY NOTE:

    This and indented subclasses represents an initial step toward gathering
    together the "indexing" or "turret" art hitherto distributed on the basis
    of the disclosed associated operations.  Pertinent subclasses from Classes
    29 and 90 have been screened to provide the necessary art for initial
    classification.  Integration with the preceding subclasses (10+) of this
    class (74), now limited to electronic tuning shafts, is contemplated in the
    future. Similarly, as other appropriate bodies of art are screened, such
    art as meets the above definition will be classified here and so noted
    below as well as in the Notes to said bodies of art.

    (1)     Note.  The Notes under subclass 10 of this class (74) must be
    studied for both the line with other classes and for fields of search
    inasmuch as they apply with equal force to this and indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  Where, in addition to means for applying torque and means
    for preventing rotation, the turret structure to hold either work or tool
    is recited in the claims the art is deemed to go beyond the scope of this
    and indented subclasses (813+).

    The term "turret", per se, is considered equivalent to "rotatably mounted
    device". Included in this and indented subclasses (813+) are assemblies
    wherein a rotatably mounted device or "turret" is recited as a named load
    on a shaft.  The inclusion of tool or work holding means on said load is
    sufficient to bar classification here (813+) and such combinations are
    classified on the basis of associated operations.  For example; "a tool
    holding turret" is properly classified here, while "a turret with tool
    holding means" or "a turret with screw means to hold a work piece is not.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10+,    for assemblies particularly adapted for mechanically rotating one
    or more shafts of electronic tuning devices into desired angular positions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 35.5+, inclusive, for turrets including
    means to hold either the work or tool, and see (2) Note above.

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 19 for means for scribbing scale
    divisions on dials and the like, and subclasses 568+ for gages used to
    establish desired angular position.  Devices including mere indicia means
    rather than means to prevent or hold against rotation are classified in
    Class 33 as are indicia devices which do not include means for applying
    torque.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 112, and various
    subclasses under subclass 446 for clutch take-up devices.

    100,    Presses, subclass 223 for reciprocating presses including rotary
    indexing material supports and see the search notes thereunder.

    188,    Brakes, subclass 68 for combined friction and positive locks,
    subclass 69 for positive locks, per se, and subclasses 70-79.5 for friction
    locks.

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, subclass 5 for angularly adjustable or indexing
    devices of the chuck or socket type.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclass 35, for a
    multiple drill spindle turret, and subclasses 71 and 89+, for indexing work
    positioners used in conjunction with drilling and boring machines.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 221+ for a position
    index device including means to hold the work or tool, and see (2) Note
    above.

    451,    Abrading, especially subclasses 149, 247+, and 292 for a
    turret-type work positioner.


CLS 74/814
TXT Devices under subclass 813 including mechanism which prevents the assembly
    from improper functioning and/or responds to some imperfection, deficiency
    or fault in the functioning of the assembly to prevent further functioning.


CLS 74/815
TXT Devices under subclass 813 having one member on one part and another member
    on the other part which, by contact together, constitute a means for
    determining the angular position of the shaft, and in which at least one
    member is provided with means to change its position on the part and/or its
    point of contact with the other member.


CLS 74/816
TXT Devices under subclass 813 having means to interrupt and stop rotation of
    the shaft at a physically predestined position.

    (1)     Note.  The interruption of rotation responsive to a determination
    on the part of a human operator is not considered to be physically
    predestined.


CLS 74/817
TXT Devices under subclass 816 having a single initiator or source of power for
    rotating the shaft or load and having means to halt the shaft or load at
    each of a series of successive, predetermined positions.


CLS 74/818
TXT Devices under subclass 817 having means to cause the load or shaft to pass
    one or more preselected positions without stopping thereat.


CLS 74/819
TXT Devices under subclass 817 having means to generate a rotating force to
    provide the angular repositioning of the shaft or load and using all or
    part of that force to hold the body against a position stop.

    (1)     Note.  This is usually accomplished by means of allowing the motor
    to stall without deenergization.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 436 for nonrunning
    energized electric motors.


CLS 74/820
TXT Devices under subclass 817 having either a mutilated or a Geneva type
    gearing as defined in this class, subclasses 435 and 436, respectively.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    435     and 436, for mutilated and Geneva gearing, respectively.


CLS 74/821
TXT Devices under subclass 817 having additional means to vary the speed of
    rotation of the shaft or load as a predetermined position is approached.

    (1)     Note.  The speed is usually decelerated as it approaches the
    position.


CLS 74/822
TXT Devices under subclass 817 wherein a common initiator or common source of
    power both turns the shaft or load and either permits rotation or prevents
    further rotation - the operation of turning is a condition precedent or
    subsequent to the operation of permitting or preventing rotation.


CLS 74/823
TXT Devices under subclass 822 wherein the means permitting or preventing
    rotation comprises at least two distinct types of holding means, e.g.,
    friction brake and positive brake.


CLS 74/824
TXT Devices under subclass 823 wherein the operation of one of the holding
    means is effected by relative movement between radial face brake surfaces
    along the axis of the shaft or load.


CLS 74/825
TXT Devices under subclass 813 having at least two means for applying torque to
    the shaft or rotatably mounted device.


CLS 74/826
TXT Devices under subclass 813 wherein the means to prevent or hold against
    shaft or load rotation includes a means to effect relative movement between
    radial surfaces along the axis of the shaft or load.


CLS 74/827
TXT Devices under subclass 813 wherein a rotary input, in multiples of 360o
    rotation, provides a turning of the shaft or rotatably mounted device, one
    increment of predestined angular rotation per multiple.


CLS 74/828
TXT Mechanism under the class definition comprising a reciprocating or
    oscillating-motion driven device provided with means to adjust the length
    and/or position of the stroke of the driven device while the mechanism
    continues in operation.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses were established (1963) on
    the basis of patents originating in the art of expansible chamber motors.
    Similar organizations of mechanical movements or gearing may be found in
    this class in subclasses below providing for some aspect of the total
    organization provided for in this group of subclasses.  No attempt has been
    made to screen the subclasses below to remove such art.

    (2)     Note.  This and indented subclasses may include either gearing or
    mechanical movement mechanisms or combination gearing and mechanical
    movement mechanisms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20+,    for parts having a mechanical movement but including a total
    organization as provided for in this group of subclasses, see (1) Note.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses 14+,
    for planetary gearing used to provide a cyclical or intermittent drive.


CLS 74/829
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 828 wherein the driven device has a stroke of
    nonvariable length with means for changing the position of the stroke
    relative to a stationary part of the mechanism.


CLS 74/830
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 829 wherein changing of the position of the
    stroke is caused mechanically by the alternating-motion imparted to the
    driven device.


CLS 74/831
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 828 wherein the stroke can be diminished to the
    point of no motion and/or be caused to act in a direction cyclically
    opposite to that in which it has been operating.


CLS 74/832
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 831 having two or more driving motions for
    simultaneously or commonly driving the alternating motion driven device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    665+,   for plural driving means without adjusting means and see (1) Note
    to subclass 828.


CLS 74/833
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 831 having an oscillating link driving the
    alternating-motion driven device from chosen positions along the link.


CLS 74/834
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 831 wherein the means to diminish or reverse the
    stroke includes a lever having a driving input connection, a driven output
    connection, and a pivot connection for the lever which is adjustable along
    the lever to vary the movement arm thereof.


CLS 74/835
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 831 wherein the means to diminish or reverse the
    stroke includes an eccentric and strap drive with the position of the
    eccentric being adjustable relative to a stationary part of the machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    571,    for features of the adjustable eccentric and strap, per se, and see
    (1) Note to subclass 828.


CLS 74/836
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 835 having means to vary the amount of
    eccentricity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    571,    for features of the adjustable eccentric and strap, per se, and see
    (1) Note to subclass 828.


CLS 74/837
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 831 having an off-center pin drive with the
    position of the pin being adjustable to diminish or reverse the stroke.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    600+,   for features of adjustable cranks and wrist pins, per se, and see
    (1) Note to subclass 828.


CLS 74/838
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 831 having a cam-driven follower causing movement
    of the driven device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    568,    for adjustable cams, per se, and see (1) Note to subclass 828.


CLS 74/839
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 838 having a rotating or oscillating cam which
    causes movement of its follower substantially parallel to the cam axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    568,    for adjustable cams, per se, and see (1) Note to subclass 828.


CLS 74/840
TXT Mechanisms under the class definition comprising means to drive a load
    device in a circular or orbital path about a fixed axis lying either within
    or outside the confines of the device and having means operable while the
    mechanism is in motion to change the location of the device relative to
    supporting structure which does not partake of all motions of the device.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses were established (1963) on
    the basis of patents originating in the arts of expansible chamber motors
    and boring or penetrating the earth.  Similar organizations of mechanical
    movements or gearing may be found in this class in subclasses below
    providing for some aspect of the total organization provided for in this
    group of subclasses.  No attempt has been made to screen the subclasses
    below to remove such art.

    (2)     Note.  This and indented subclasses may include either gearing or
    mechanical movement mechanisms or combination gearing and mechanical
    movement mechanisms.


CLS 74/841
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 840 wherein the location changing means include a
    screw and nut mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    424.8,  for screw and nut mechanisms, per se, and see (1) Note to subclass
    840.


CLS 74/842
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 840 wherein the location changing means includes
    a rack and pinion mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    422,    for rack and pinion mechanisms, per se, and see (1) Note to
    subclass 840.


CLS 75/
TTL SPECIALIZED METALLURGICAL PROCESSES, COMPOSITIONS FOR USE THEREIN,
    CONSOLIDATED  METAL POWDER COMPOSITIONS,  AND LOOSE METAL PARTICULATE
    MIXTURES

CLS 75/
TXT I.      Statement of Class Subject Matter

    II.     Glossary

    III.    Classification Lines and Search Notes to Other Classes

    IV.     Index to Classes Noted in the Class Definition and the Subclasses
    of this Class

    V.      Subclass Definitions

    I.      Statement of Class Subject Matter

    This is the generic class for specialized metallurgical processes for
    producing or recovering metals from metal compounds, ores, or scrap metal
    and for refining liquid metal and for compositions used in these
    specialized metallurgical processes, consolidated metal powder
    compositions, and loose metal particulate mixtures.

    Included in this class are patents drawn to:

    A.      Processes for the production of solid, particulate free metal
    directly from liquid metal.

    B.      Processes for the production or purification of free metal powder
    or the production or purification of alloys in powder form.

    C.      Processes for the production or refining of free metal or alloys
    that use the electrothermal effects of electricity or electromagnetic wave
    energy or that use magnetism or electrostatics.

    D.      Processes for the production of free metal by smelting, roasting,
    or furnace methods (a.k.a., pyrometallurgy) or by using a nonmetallic
    material which is liquid under standard conditions (a.k.a.,
    hydrometallurgy).

    E.      Processes for the treatment of liquid metal or melting metal.

    F.      Processes for consolidating metalliferous charges or treating
    agents that are used in other processes of this class by agglomerating,
    compacting, indurating, or sintering.

    G.      Compositions, not elsewhere provided for, disclosed as useful in
    metallurgical processes (e.g., reactive furnace linings, charges or solid
    treating compositions for producing free metal or alloys from metalliferous
    materials, gaseous or liquid compositions used in the production of free
    metal or alloys or used in the treatment of liquid metal) and processes of
    manufacturing compositions useful in metallurgical processes.

    H.      Consolidated metal powder compositions having a continuous free
    metal phase, such as those produced by a Class 419 process.

    I.      Loose metal particulate mixtures.

    II.     Glossary

    (Asterisked * terms are employed in section C, Chemistry and Metallurgy of
    the International Patent Classification (IPC) and have the same meaning
    herein.)

    Actinide*

    A metal of the group Actinium(Ac), Thorium(Th), Protactinium(Pa),
    Uranium(U), Neptunium(Np), Plutonium(Pu), Americium(Am), Curium(Cm),
    Berkelium(Bk), Californium(Cf), Einsteinium(Es), Fermium(Fm),
    Mendelevium(Md), Nobelium(No), and Lawrencium(Lr).

    Alkali Metal*

    A metal of the group Lithium(Li), Sodium(Na), Potassium(K), Rubidium(Rb),
    Cesium(Cs), and Francium(Fr).

    Alkaline Earth Metal*

    A metal of the group Calcium(Ca), Strontium(Sr), Barium(Ba), and Radium(Ra).

    Alloy

    A union, possessing metallic properties of two or more metallic elements or
    of nonmetallic element(s) and metallic elements(s) which are not pure
    compounds and which are miscible with each other, which at least to a
    certain extent when molten forms a more or less homogeneous liquid having a
    metallic matrix and which does not separate into distinct layers when
    solid. Such combinations when solidified from a melt may consist of
    mechanical mixtures, entectics, entectoids, solid solutions, or in part of
    chemical compounds one or more of which may exist at the same time.
    Intermetallic compounds are considered alloys for purposes of
    classification.

    Note:   The term "alloy" when used in the various definitions of Class 75
    is considered to include a "metallic composition" (q.v) of the type that is
    found in Class 420.

    Amalgamation

    The use of a liquid metal to collect, to alloy, or to adhere a desired free
    metal without melting the desired free metal with heat.

    Base

    A metal which is present in an amount of over 50% by weight in an alloy.

    Bessemer Converter

    A device having passages in its bottom (i.e., tuyeres) through which a gas
    containing gaseous Oxygen (e.g., air, etc.) is passed upwardly through
    molten metal or molten metalliferous material (e.g., matte, etc.) to treat
    the metal or material.

    Blast Furnace

    A type of shaft furnace specifically designed to reduce metal compounds
    (e.g., ore, etc.) to elemental metal using a combustible solid reductant
    (e.g., coke, etc.). The furnace is designed to operate continuously for a
    long period of time, with solid reductant, metal compound, and any other
    desired solid additive (e.g., flux, etc.) being continuously or
    periodically added at the top of the furnace and the resulting molten metal
    and by-product slag being continuously or periodically tapped from the
    bottom of the furnace. A gas containing gaseous Oxygen (e.g., air, etc.) is
    preheated (usually by the exhaust gas) and is injected into the furnace
    through tuyeres above the molten metal and slag level.

    Cementation

    A process of recovering a free metal from solution wherein a more
    electropositive free metal displaces a less electropositive metal from
    solution as a free metal while the more electropositive metal goes into
    solution in ionic form.

    Consolidate

    To form into a compact mass.

    Crucible Furnace

    A furnace in which the material to be heated is placed in a refractory
    container, the container is covered with a lid, and the covered container
    is heated in a furnace. The material is heated solely by heat conducted
    through the walls of the crucible.

    Cupola

    A shaft furnace primarily designed to melt metal by use of a solid fuel
    charged with the metal. A gas containing gaseous Oxygen (e.g., air) is
    blown into the bottom of the furnace to burn the fuel and cause the metal
    to melt from the heat of combustion.

    Displacement reaction for metals

    In the reaction A + BC = AC + B, the metal A, being more positive than the
    metal B, is oxidized. The displacement series or electromotive series for
    metals in decreasing order of their negative potentials is: (negative)
    Vanadium(V), Tungsten(W), Molybdenum(Mo), Gold(Au), Osmium(Os),
    Platinum(Pt), Iridium(Ir), Tantalum(Ta), Palladium(Pd), Ruthenium(Ru),
    Antimony(Sb), Bismuth(Bi), Arsenic(As), Mercury(Hg), Silver(Ag),
    Copper(Cu), Titanium(Ti), Tin(Sn), Lead(Pb), Germanium(Ge), Zirconium(Zr),
    Cerium(Ce), Nickel(Ni), Cobalt(Co), Thallium(Tl), Niobium(Nb), Cadmium(Cd),
    Iron(Fe), Chromium(Cr), Zinc(Zn), Manganese(Mn), Uranium(U),
    Gadolinium(Gd), Indium(In), Gallium(Ga), Aluminum(Al), Rare Earth Metals,
    Beryllium(Be), Scandium(Sc), Yttrium(Y), Magnesium(Mg), Lithium(Li),
    Calcium(Ca), Strontium(Sr), Barium(Ba), Sodium(Na), Potassium(K),
    Rubidium(Rb), Cesium(Cs) (positive).

    Fluidized Bed

    A bed of solid particles with gas flowing upward through the particles with
    sufficient velocity to keep the particles suspended and in motion in the
    gas without blowing them bodily out of the top of the bed. The suspended
    particles act much like a fluid.

    Gaseous Suspension

    The suspension of solid in gas. This may be in a fluidized bed (q.v.) or in
    any other system (such as a conduit) where solids are suspended in a gas.

    Halogen*

    An element of the group Fluorine(F), Chlorine(Cl), Bromine(Br), Iodine(I),
    and Astatine(At).

    Heavy Metal*

    A metal other than a light metal (q.v.).

    Hydrometallurgy

    A somewhat inexact term for processes involving solution in water or other
    liquid in which metalliferous material or metal is treated to prepare free
    metal, to purify, or to refine free metal, or to prepare intermediate
    materials more suitable for use in preparing free metal (e.g., extracting,
    leaching, beneficiating, etc.).

    Iron Group

    An element of the group Iron(Fe), Cobalt(Co), and Nickel(Ni).

    Lanthanide*

    A metal of the group Lanthanum(La), Cerium(Ce), Praseodymium(Pr),
    Neodymium(Nd), Promethium(Pm), Samarium(Sm), Europium(Eu), Gadolinium(Gd),
    Terbium(Tb), Dysprosium(Dy), Holmium(Ho), Erbium(Er), Thulium(Th),
    Ytterbium(Yb), and Lutetium(Lu).

    Light Metal*

    A metal of the group Lithium(Li), Sodium(Na), Potassium(K), Rubidium(Rb),
    Cesium(Cs), Francium(Fr), Calcium(Ca), Strontium(Sr), Barium(Ba),
    Radium(Ra), Beryllium(Be), Magnesium(Mg), and Aluminum(Al).

    Metal*

    Element other than nonmetal (q.v.).

    Metallic Composition

    A composition which contains a continuous phase of metal and no continuous
    phase of nonmetal.

    Muffle Furnace

    A furnace in which the material to be heated is placed in an enclosed
    section (the muffle), which protects the material from the combustion
    products of the furnace. The material is heated by heat conducted through
    the walls of the muffle.

    Noble Gas*

    An element of the group Helium(He), Neon(Ne), Argon(Ar), Krypton(Kr),
    Xenon(X), and Radon(Rn).

    Noble Metal*

    A metal of the group Ruthenium(Ru), Rhodium(Rd), Palladium(Pd), Osmium(Os),
    Iridium(Ir), Platinum(Pt), Silver(Ag), and Gold(Au).

    Nonmetal*

    An element of the group Hydrogen(H), Boron(B), Carbon(C), Silicon(Si),
    Nitrogen(N), Phosphorus(P), Oxygen(O), Sulfur(S), Selenium(Se),
    Tellurium(Te), Fluorine(F), Chlorine(Cl), Bromine(Br), Iodine(I),
    Astatine(At), Helium(He), Neon(Ne), Argon(Ar), Krypton(Kr), Xenon(Xe), and
    Radon(Rd).

    (1)     Note.  For subclasses 228+ Silicon is considered to be a metal.

    Platinum Group*

    An element of the group Osmium(Os), Iridium(Ir), Platinum(Pt),
    Ruthenium(Ru), Rhodium(Rh), Palladium(Pd).

    Precious Metal

    Synonym for Noble Metal (q.v.).

    Pyrometallurgy

    A somewhat inexact term for processes carried out at relatively high
    temperatures, usually in furnaces, in which metalliferous material or metal
    is treated to prepare free metal, to purify or to refine free metal, or to
    prepare intermediate materials more suitable for use in preparing free
    metal (e.g., smelting, bessemerizing, roasting of ores, etc.).

    Radioactive Element

    An element of the group Technetium(Tc), Promethium(Pm), Polonium(Po),
    Astatine (At), Radon(Rn), Francium(Fr), Radium(Ra), Actinium(Ac),
    Thorium(Th), Protactinium(Pa), Uranium(U), Neptunium(Np), Plutonium(Pu),
    Americium(Am), Curium(Cm), Berkelium(Bk), Californium(Cf), Einsteinium(Es),
    Fermium(Fm), Mendelevium(Md), Nobelium(No), Lawrencium(Lr),
    Unnilquadium(Unq), Unnipentium(Unp), and Unnilhexium(Unh).

    Rare Earth Metal*

    An element of the group Scandium(Sc), Yttrium(Y), Lanthanum(La),
    Cerium(Ce), Praseodymium(Pr), Neodymium(Nd), Promethium(Pm), Samarium(Sm),
    Europium(Eu), Gadolinium(Gd), Terbium(Tb), Dysprosium(Dy), Holmium(Ho),
    Erbium(Er), Thulium(Tm), Ytterbium(Yb), and Lutetium(Lu).

    Refractory Metal*

    A metal of the group Titanium(Ti), Zirconium(Zr), Hafnium(Hf), Vanadium(V),
    Niobium(Nb) or Columbium(Cb), Tantalum(Ta), Chromium(Cr), Molybdenum(Mo),
    and Tungsten(W).

    Reverberatory Furnace

    An enclosed furnace in which the material to be heated is placed in the
    bottom of the furnace and gaseous fuel is burned over the top of the
    material or the flame or combustion products from burning solid fuel
    separately from the material to be heated are reflected by the top of the
    furnace and passed over the material. Types of reverberatory furnace are
    the Siemen-Martin furnace, the open hearth furnace, and the puddling
    furnace.

    Rotary Kiln

    An approximately cylindrical apparatus which rotates on its axis in
    operation. The axis is horizontal or inclined less than 45 degrees from
    horizontal. Usually, the axis is slightly inclined from horizontal. In
    operation the kiln rotates substantially continuously in one direction.

    Scrap

    Discarded waste metal suitable for reprocessing.

    Shaft Furnace

    A vertical approximately cylindrical apparatus in which material to be
    treated is passed downwardly through the shaft while it is heated in any
    manner. In this class the material treated in the furnace is usually either
    reduced to free metal or melted or both.

    Synonyms of names of metal elements used in this class (mostly obsolete)

    Synonym                                 Names used herein

    Aldebaranium    Ytterbium(Yb)
    Argentum        Silver(Ag)
    Aurum   Gold(Au)
    Ausonium        Neptunium(Np)
    Austrium        Gallium(Ga)
    Cassiopeium     Lutetium(Lu)
    Celtium Lutetium(Lu)
    Columbium       Niobium(Nb)
    Demonium        Dysprosium(Dy)
    Didymium        Neodymium(Nd) and
                    Praseodymium(Pr)
    Dwimanganese    Rhenium(Re)
    Eka - aluminum  Gallium(Ga)
    Ekaboron        Scandium(Sc)
    Ekacesium       Francium(Fr)
    Ekamanganese    Technetium(Tc)
    Ekasilicon      Germanium(Ge)
    Ekatantalum     Protactinium(Pa)
    Erythronium     Vanadium(V)
    Ferrum  Iron(Fe)
    Florentium      Promethium(Pm)
    Glucinum        Beryllium(Be)
    Hydrargyrum     Mercury(Hg)
    Illinium        Promethium(Pm)
    Kalium  Potassium(K)
    Lutecium        Lutetium(Lu)
    Masurium        Technetium(Tc)
    Natrium Sodium(Na)
    Neoytterbium    Ytterbium(Yb)
    Plumbum Lead(Pb)
    Stannum Tin(Sn)
    Stibnium        Antimony(Sb)
    Virginium       Francium(Fr)
    Wolfram Tungsten(W)

    Transition Metal*

    A metal of the group Scandium(Sc), Titanium(Ti), Vanadium(V), Chromium(Cr),
    Manganese(Mn), Iron(Fe), Cobalt(Co), Nickel(Ni), Copper(Cu), Zinc(Zn),
    Yttrium(Y), Zirconium(Zr), Niobium(Nb) or Columbium(Cb), Molybdenum(Mo),
    Technetium(Tc), Ruthenium(Ru), Rhodium(Rh), Palladium(Pd), Silver(Ag),
    Cadmium(Cd), Lanthanum(La), Cerium(Ce), Praseodymium(Pr), Neodymium(Nd),
    Promethium(Pm), Samarium(Sm), Europium(Eu), Gadolinium(Gd), Terbium(Tb),
    Dysprosium(Dy), Holmium(Ho), Erbium(Er), Thulium(Tm), Ytterbium(Yb),
    Lutetium(Lu), Hafnium(Hf), Tantalum(Ta), Tungsten(W), Rhenium(Re),
    Osmium(Os), Iridium(Ir), Platinum(Pt), Gold(Au), Mercury(Hg), Actinium(Ac),
    Thorium(Th), Protactinium(Pd), Uranium(U), Neptunium(Np), Plutonium(Pu),
    Americium(Am), Curium(Cm), Berkelium(Bk), Californium(Cf),
    Einesteinium(Es), Fermium(Fm), Mendelevium(Md), Nobelium(No),
    Lawrencium(Lr), Unnilquadium(Unq), Unnilpentium(Unp), and Unnilhexium(Unh).

    Vertical Retort

    A vertical, generally cylindrical, vessel closed at the bottom and heated
    externally so that the contents are heated only by heat conduced through
    the retort walls. Often a product is volatilized from the retort and
    collected in another container.

    III.    Classification Lines and Search Notes to Other Classes

    The order of superiority among various metal, alloy, and metal stock areas
    and methods of manufacture involving them is as follows:

    1.      Class 419, Powder Metallurgy Processes.

    2.      Class 148, Metal Treatment, subclasses 22+, compositions for
    treatment of solid metal.

    3.      Class 75, Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use
    therein, Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal
    Particulate Mixtures, subclasses 300,301, and 303+, gaseous, liquid, or
    solid treating compositions for liquid metal or charges, and subclass 302,
    welding rod defined by composition.

    4.      Class 75, Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use
    therein, Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal
    Particulate Mixtures, subclasses 228+, consolidated metal powder
    compositions and subclasses 255+, loose metal particulate mixtures.

    5.      Class 420, Alloys or Metallic Compositions, claimed as products.

    6.      Class 148, Metal Treatment, subclasses 95-122, 194-287, and
    500-714, in class schedule order, providing for certain processes of
    treating solid or semi-solid metal by  modifying or maintaining internal
    physical structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical properties of metal,
    processes of reactive coating of metal or processes of chemical-heat
    removing (e.g., flame-cutting etc.) or burning of metal.  However, if metal
    casting, fusion bonding, machining, or working is involved, there is a
    requirement of significant heat treatment as described in section III, A,
    of the Class 148 definition.

    7.      Class 148, Metal Treatment, subclasses 33+, barrier layer stock
    material and subclasses 400+, stock.

    8.      Class 75, Specialized Metallurigical Processes, Compositions for
    Use therein, Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal
    Particulate Mixtures, subclasses 331+, processes of making solid
    particulate alloys directly from liquid metal and subclasses 343+,
    processes of producing or purifying alloys in powder form.

    9.      Class 75, Specialized Metallurigical Processes, Compositions for
    Use therein, Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal
    Particulate Mixtures, subclasses 10.1+ and 10.67, processes of making
    alloys by electrothermic, electromagnetic, or electrostatic processes.

    10.     Class 420, Alloys or Metallic Compositions, processes of
    manufacture.

    11.     Class 75, Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use
    therein, Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal
    Particulate Mixtures, subclasses 330+, processes of making metal and
    processes or treating liquid metals and liquid alloys and consolidating
    metalliferous material.

    12.     Class 204, Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, processes.

    13.     Class 164, Metal Founding, subclasses 1+, processes.

    14.     Class 266, Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 44+, processes of
    operating metallurgical apparatus.

    15.     Class 216, Etching a Substrate:  Processes.

    This list is not complete and may be added to as the proper relationship of
    other areas is determined.

    A.      Classes of chemical compounds and compositions used in
    metallurgical processes

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 22+ for compositions employed in the
    treatment of solid metal (e.g., masking compositions, welding compositions,
    soldering fluxes, compositions for treating heated solid metal, etc.).

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, for exothermic
    compositions for treating metalliferous materials. See subclasses 5+, 20+,
    30+, or 37+ for compositions which (1) contain at least one free metal or
    metalloid and at least one Oxygen(O) supplying material and (2) are capable
    of reacting to yield heat and reaction by-products. The line between Class
    149 and Class 75 is difficult due to the similarity of ingredients in the
    compositions. If there is a positive recitation of exothermic utility, the
    original goes to Class 149 even if the composition is used in a Class 75
    process. If the composition is used in a Class 75 process and there is no
    positive recitation of exothermic utility, it goes to Class 75 as an
    original. Patents having claims to both a Class 75 process and a Class 149
    composition go to Class 75 as original and are crossed to Class 149.

    252,    Compositions, for physical separation agents, barrier layer device
    compositions, magnetic compositions having a nonmetal matrix, etching or
    brightening compositions, descaling agents, detergents, getters,
    electrically conductive compositions, having a nonmetal matrix, radioactive
    compositions, chemical agents, solids with solution or dispersion aids,
    solvents, gaseous compositions, and preservative agents. Gaseous
    compositions and liquid compositions used in metallurgical processes will
    be found in Class 75, subclass 300. Solid treating compositions for molten
    metal or charges will be found in Class 75, subclasses 303+.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, for inorganic compounds and
    nonmetallic elements, including metal compounds useful in metallurgical
    processes of obtaining free metals. Solid treating compositions for molten
    metal or charges for producing metal or treating molten metal, including
    compositions for or from consolidating, will be found in Class 75.

    507,    Earth Boring, Well Treating, and Oil Field Chemistry, for earth
    boring and well treating compositions.

    508,    Solid Anti-Friction Devices, Materials Therefor, Lubricant or
    Separant Compositions for Moving Solid Surfaces, and Miscellanous Mineral
    oil Compositions, for lubricant compositions.



    B.      Classes of free metal products

    148,    Metal Treatment, for elemental metal or alloys which (a) are the
    product of a Class 148 process (e.g., heat treated, age hardened); (b) are
    claimed in terms of specific magnetic properties or as having particular
    internal structure which affects the magnetic properties; (c) are
    amorphous; (d) possess the property of shape memory; (e) are the product of
    a significant Class 164, Metal Founding, step (e.g., chill cast,
    directionally solidified), or (f) are the product of the dispersion of
    particulate matter in molten metal which particulate matter retains its
    identity in the final product (e.g., dispersion strengthened etc.).

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, for alloys or metallic
    compositions. An alloy or metallic composition made by consolidating base
    metal particles or a mixture of metal and nonmetal particles is proper for
    Class 75, subclasses 303+ or subclasses 228+ unless (a) all the components
    are melted or dissolved or (b) a part of the components is melted and the
    mass is treated as a fluent liquid (e.g., stirring, pouring, etc.) in which
    instances the product is proper for Class 420. Cases of doubt will be
    resolved in favor of placement in Class 75, subclasses 303+ or subclasses
    228+. Class 75, subclasses 303+ or subclasses 255+ provide for compositions
    containing loose metal particles not elsewhere provided for. Class 420
    provides for a free metal or a single alloy or metallic composition in
    particulate form. However, a blend of free metal particles or alloy or
    metallic composition particles with other particles whether another free
    metal, another alloy or metallic composition, or a nonmetal is proper for
    Class 75, subclasses 303+ or subclasses 255+. Class 420 also provides for
    patents claiming an article by name only without any positive structural
    limitation and reciting the metal or alloy or metallic composition of which
    the article is made.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, for material or articles
    having some structure. In general, when claims mention the article by name
    only and define it in terms of composition, the original goes to the
    composition class.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor: Product or Process of
    Making, for compositions that are used as catalysts, solid sorbents, and
    their supports even if they are made of metal or metal compounds.



    C.      Process classes

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 19+ for processes of treating
    (e.g., quenching, etc.), recovering, or manufacturing products from slag
    where no making of elemental metal is claimed, and subclass 141 for
    apparatus for treating slag with a liquid. Class 65 will take processes
    where the slag is identified as being obtained from a metal manufacturing
    process (e.g., blast furnace slag, etc.), as long as no positive step of
    making metal is claimed.

    148,    Metal Treatment, appropriate subclasses for certain processes of
    treating solid or semi-solid metal by modifying or maintaining the
    internal physical structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical properties
    of metal, processes of reactive coating of metal or processes of
    chemical-heat removing (e.g., flame-cutting etc.) or burning of metal.

    164,    Metal Founding, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses
    55.1+, for an alloying or refining step when performed during casting which
    includes treating while teeming or while in the mold. Class 75 provides for
    a process of refining combined with a Class 164 process (significant or
    nominal). The refining for Class 75 is done outside of a mold.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclasses for
    the preparation of metals, alloys, and products of utility only as
    intermediary products in a metallurgical process by electrical or wave
    energy methods including chemical reactions which are caused by more than
    the mere thermal effects of the electrical or wave energy. Lacking positive
    indication of more than a thermal effect, processes producing metals,
    treating metals, producing alloys or treating alloys go to Class 75.
    Branching processes wherein one branch comprises a process falling within
    the definition of Class 204 and wherein at least one branch comprises a
    process falling within the definition of Class 75 are classified in Class
    75. Combinations of metallurgical process steps falling within the
    definition of Class 75 and electrical or wave energy process steps falling
    under the definition of Class 204, are classified in Class 204 when the
    metallurgical process steps are preparatory to the electrical or wave
    energy process steps and are classified in Class 75 when the elelctrical or
    wave energy process steps are preparatory to the metallurgical process
    steps. The foregoing applies even though such preparatory steps result in a
    desired by-product.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, for concentration
    processes which involve the separation of ore or metalliferous materials by
    nonchemical means (e.g., flotation, screening, amalgamation, etc.).
    Preparatory chemical  processes for producing an intermediate for
    amalgamation, preparatory chemical processes followed by amalgamation, and
    chemical or physiochemical processes of breaking the amalgam to liberate
    the desired free metal will be found in Class 75, subclasses 388+. A
    combination of classifying, separating, or assorting metalliferous material
    that is to be used in a Class 75 process with consolidation will be found
    in Class 75.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses, for processes of comminuting or disintegrating solid metal,
    ore, or metalliferous material for the purpose of reducing their particle
    size and operations perfecting the same which do not involve a chemical
    treatment. A combination of comminution or disintegration with a step
    provided for in Class 75 will be found in Class 75.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    subclasses 5+ for processes of forming solid particulate material directly
    from molten or liquid mass wherein a material other than metal is
    comminuted (see Class 75, subclass 331 for an amplification of the line),
    subclass 15 for spheroidizing or rounding of solid, nonmetallic particles
    (see Class 75 subclass 342 for an amplification of the line), and
    appropriate subclasses, particularly 109+, for uniting of bulk assembly
    particulate materials and for methods of compacting and briquetting
    nonmetallic particles intended for uses other than Class 75 or Class 420
    refining or alloying.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 44+, for processes of operating
    metallurgical apparatus which are solely directed to those steps of
    operating such an apparatus which do not effect a chemical or physical
    change in the work being treated.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, appropriate subclasses, for processes
    of producing metals, alloys, or metal containing compositions in a solid or
    compact state from powdered or particulate material with or without heating.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, for processes of making alloys or
    metallic compositions. However, processes of making solid particulate
    alloys or metallic compositions directly from liquid metal will be found in
    Class 75, subclasses 331+ and processes of producing alloys or metallic
    compositions in powder form will be found in Class 75, subclasses 343+. In
    the instances in which the above mentioned processes are claimed and a
    process of making an alloy is claimed in generalized terms the patent will
    go as an original to Class 75 and a cross reference will be placed in Class
    420. Processes of making an alloy by electrothermic, electromagnetic, or
    electrostatic steps will be found in Class 75, subclasses 10.1+ or subclass
    10.67. In the instances in which the electrothermic, electromagnetic, or
    electrostatic steps are claimed and a process of making an alloy is claimed
    in generalized terms the patent will go as an original to Class 75 and a
    cross-reference will be placed in Class 420. In the instances in which the
    electrothermic, electromagnetic, or electrostatic steps are claimed and an
    alloy or metallic composition is claimed as a product, the patent will go
    as an original to Class 420 and a cross reference will be placed in Class
    75. The line between Class 75 and Class 420 is necessarily a difficult one
    since the metals produced by the processes of Class 75 are often impure and
    the Class 420 alloys are sometimes made from ores. Therefor, the following
    lines will be observed. A process of making an alloy of desired composition
    for an end use will be classified in Class 420 even if made by reducing
    compounds or ore. A method of reduction or smelting to yield metal without
    intent to obtain a particular alloy or metallic composition will be
    classified in Class 75 even if it is recognized that the product is impure.
    Furthermore, methods of melting, refining, or removing a component from an
    existing alloy (e.g., purifying, etc.) will be found in Class 75. Melting
    of two or more metals or alloys together to produce an alloy will be found
    in Class 420. In the production of a ferroalloy, if the percentages of
    metals are specified the original will go to Class 420.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses, for
    processes for chemically modifying metalliferous material (e.g., ore,
    scrap, etc.) to form products which comprise inorganic compounds even if
    intended for subsequent reduction to free metals. Processes recovering
    metal values go to Class 423 unless it can be determined conclusively that
    free metal (i.e., zero valent) is the metal value obtained, in which case
    the patent is placed as an original in Class 75. A smelting process is
    assumed to produce a free metal unless otherwise stated. Class 423,
    subclasses 1+ provide for processes of beneficiating a metalliferous ore
    where no free metal is obtained and the product is not consolidated.
    Beneficiation processes are classified in the first subclass under subclass
    1 providing for the metal value recovered. Processes which simply remove an
    impurity from an ore without identifying any specific metal present (e.g.,
    roasting, desulfurizing, dephosphorizing, or dearsenizing ore, etc.) are
    placed in subclass 1. Class 75, subclasses 746+ provide for consolidating
    metalliferous material (e.g., ore, tailings, flue dust, fluxes, etc.) by
    agglomerating, compacting or heat treating; preparatory process therefore;
    or treating consolidated material therefrom even though the production of a
    free metal is not claimed. Processes resulting in the production or
    separation of undesired metal (e.g., impurities, etc.) during the
    maufacture of Class 423 compounds are classified in Class 423. However, if
    the metal removed is recovered as a desired product, the patent is
    classified in Class 75. Recovery of the metal is assumed to be a process to
    produce a desired product for an end use unless otherwise stated. Patents
    including claims classifiable in Class 423 and equally comprehensive claims
    classifiable in Class 75 are classified in Class 75 and cross-referenced to
    Class 423.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor: Product or Process of
    Making, for processes of producing or rehabilitating metals or
    metalliferous products intended for use as a catalyst, sorbent, or support
    therefor.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 300+, for metallurgical operation similar to Class 75 operations
    that involve material superconducting above 30 degrees Kelvin.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the use of metals (molten or otherwise) in the destruction
    or containment of hazardous or toxic waste.

    IV.     Index to Classes Noted in the Class Definition and the subclasses
    of this class.

    After each class listed below, the notation "See --" refers to the sections
    of the class definition and the subclasses of Class 75 in which there are
    references to the class involved.

    29,     Metal Working. See subclass 403.1.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids. See subclass 746.

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions. See subclass 300.

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating. See subclass 300.

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition.  See
    subclasses 230 and 231.

    60,     Power Plants. See subclass 10.37.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing. See subclass 746.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives. See subclass 228.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic. See subclasses 228, 231, 235,
    252, 255, 300, and 746.

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor. See subclasses 10.11, 331, 343, 952, and
    954.

    125,    Stone Working. See subclass 237.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids. See subclasses 401, 711,
    715, and 746.

    148,    Metal Treatment. See sections III, IIIA, IIIB, IIIC, and sublcasses
    228, 230, 252, 300, 342, 343, 348, 392, 433, and 507.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges. See section IIIA and
    subclasses 228, 230, 252, and 300.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture. See
    subclass 715.

    164,    Metal Founding. See sections III and III C and subclasses 10.23,
    305, and 404.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators. See subclass 228.

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles. See subclass 228.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control. See subclass 231.

    201,    Distillation: Processes, Thermolytic. See subclass 746.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy. See sections III and IIIC
    and subclasses 10.1, 241, 388, 711, 724, and 746.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids. See section IIIC and
    subclasses 388 and 746.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation. See subclasses 711 and 746.

    219,    Electric Heating. See subclass 300.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding. See subclasses 228, 252, 255, and 300.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration. See section IIIC and
    subclasses 354 and 746.

    252,    Compositions. See section IIIA and subclasses 228, 231, 235, 236,
    245, 246, 247, 248, 255, 300, 715, and 746.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds. See subclasses 228 and 722.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes. See
    section IIIC and subclasses 228, 235, 236, 331, 342, and 746.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus. See sections III and IIIC.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings. See subclass 228.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material. See subclass 712.

    338,    Electrical Resistors. See subclasses 228 and 237.

    417,    Pumps. See subclass 255.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes. See section III and IIIC and
    subclasses 228, 230, 238, 300, 343, and 746.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions. See sections III, IIIB, and IIIC
    and subclasses 245, 246, 247, 248, 300, 302, 313, 351, 393, 433, 507, 585,
    746, and 752.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds. See section IIIC and subclasses
    10.5, 228, 388, 400, 401, 711, and 746.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus. See
    subclasses 228 and 425.

    427,    Coating Processes. See subclasses 255, 332, 343, 711, and 746.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles. See section IIIB and
    subclasses 228, 229, 230, 231, 252, 255, 300, 415, and 572.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof. See subclasses 417 and 713.

    501,    Compositions: Ceramic. See subclasses 235, 236, 243, 300, and 746.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making. See sections IIIB and IIIC and subclasses 300, 711, and 746.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process.  See
    section IIIC.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers. See subclass 228.

    521,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers. See subclasses 401 and 715.

    556,    Organic Compounds. See subclass 722.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment.  See section
    IIIC.


CLS 75/10.1
TXT Electrothermic processes (e.g., microwave, induction, resistance, electric
    arc, plasma, etc.):

    Process under subclass 330 for producing or treating free metal or alloys
    that involve production of thermal energy from electricity,
    electromagnetic, or wave energy at any stage in the process.

    (1)     Note.  The use of electrothermal energy may occur at any stage in
    the process. Thus, melting of slag, ore or metal in an electric furnace and
    subsequent transfer to another converter and treating therein is to be
    considered an electrothermic process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10.67,  for the use of electromagnetic energy for stirring or transporting
    without production of thermal energy therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, for chemical processes
    using electrical and wave energy to produce or treat free metal by means
    other than production of heat.

     (1)    Note.  Problems arise between Class 75 and Class 204 when an energy
    form is given without indication of the mechanism of its utilization. If
    the mechanism involves only conversion of the energy form to heat or if the
    utilization of the energy is preparatory to a Class 75 operation, the
    original goes to Class 75. When the mechanism is not clear from the
    specification and not preparatory to a Class 75 operation the following
    line is followed for purposes of classification. Placement goes to Class 75
    if reactants (e.g., reducing agents, etc.) other than the starting material
    (e.g., ore, etc.) are present which would normally react in the presence of
    heat to produce the desired product (e.g., Iron, etc.). Otherwise,
    placement goes as original to Class 204.  See section III, CLASSIFICATION
    LINES AND SEARCH NOTES TO OTHER CLASSES, of the Class 204 definition for an
    expansion of the class line between Class 75 and Class 204, including a
    superiority listing of classes providing for various metals, alloys, and
    metal stocks and methods of manufacturing them.


CLS 75/10.11
TXT With zone melting or fractional crystallization:

    Processes under subclass 10.1 wherein solid metal is traversed by a melt
    zone causing migration of impurities within the metal resulting in
    purfication of the metal (i.e., zone melting) or processes of refining
    molten metal or metal alloys by selective crystallization and separation of
    the crystalline phase from the melt to effect purification (i.e.,
    fractional crystallization).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes and non-coating apparatus for
    growing therein-defined single-crystal of all types of materials, including
    metal; e.g., by zone melt processing.  References disclosing processes
    which form Class 117 defined single-crystal material and also form an
    amorphous material and/or a polycrystalline material should be placed
    according to the following guidelines:  placement should be determined
    first by the most comprehensive claim; if that is not determinative
    placement should be determined as follows:  (a) references having only
    generic claims should have the  original placed in Class 117 with
    appropriate cross-reference, (b) references having all species claims
    placeable in one class should have the original placed in that class with
    appropriate cross-reference, or (c) references having equally comprehensive
    species claims should have the original placed in Class 117 with
    appropriate cross-reference.


CLS 75/10.12
TXT Controlling process through sensed condition:

    Processes under subclass 10.1 in which include regulating the
    electrothermic process through a detected condition.


CLS 75/10.13
TXT Electromagnetic wave energy (e.g., microwave, laser, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 10.1 in which thermal energy is produced by
    electromagnetic wave irradiation (e.g., microwave, laser, etc.).


CLS 75/10.14
TXT Electrical induction:

    Processes under subclass 10.1 wherein an electric current is induced in the
    material being treated to provide thermal energy.


CLS 75/10.15
TXT Producing or treating Iron(Fe) or Iron alloy:

    Process under subclass 10.14 wherein Iron(Fe) or an alloy containing Iron
    in any amount is produced or treated.


CLS 75/10.16
TXT With induced magnetic stirring:

    Process under subclass 10.15 wherein the material is mixed using induced
    magnetic energy.


CLS 75/10.17
TXT With gaseous treating agent:

    Process under subclass 10.15 which also involves the use of a gaseous
    material.


CLS 75/10.18
TXT Producing or treating Aluminum(Al), Beryllium(Be), Cobalt(Co),
    Chromium(Cr), Magnesium(Mg), Nickel(Ni), Titanium(Ti), or alloy thereof:

    Process under subclass 10.14 wherein elemental Aluminum(Al), Beryllium(Be),
    Cobalt(Co), Chromium(Cr), Magnesium(Mg), Nickel(Ni), Titanium(Ti), or alloy
    thereof is produced or treated.  The alloy produced or treated can contain
    the above mentioned metals in any amount.


CLS 75/10.19
TXT Plasma:

    Processes under subclass 10.1 wherein a wholly or partially charged mixture
    of gaseous ions and electrons (i.e., plasma is the source of thermal energy.


CLS 75/10.2
TXT Influenced by magnetic field:

    Process under subclass 10.19 wherein the plasma is influenced by a magnetic
    field.


CLS 75/10.21
TXT Producing or treating Aluminum(Al) or Aluminum alloy:

    Process under subclass 10.19 wherein elemental Aluminum(Al) or an alloy
    containing Aluminum in any amount is produced or treated.


CLS 75/10.22
TXT Producing or treating Iron(Fe) or Iron alloy:

    Process under subclass 10.19 wherein Iron(Fe) or an alloy containing Iron
    in any amount is produced or treated.


CLS 75/10.23
TXT Consumable metal-containing electrode:

    Processes under subclass 10.1 wherein an electrode containing a metal,
    metal compound or alloy is used up or melted by electrothermic energy and
    the metal therefrom incorporated in a molten substrate.

    (1)     Note.  A consumable "carbon electrode" having no metal, metal
    compound or alloy present is excluded from this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The consumable electrode may contain solid treating agent or
    flux.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 48+ for electrothermic processes
    involving consumable electrodes that occur in the mold.


CLS 75/10.24
TXT Electroslag remelting:

    Process under subclass 10.23 wherein the electrode is in electrical contact
    with a slag and the electrical current therebetween melts the electrode
    causing the molten metal therefrom to be refined by passing through the
    slag.


CLS 75/10.25
TXT Producing or treating Chromium(Cr), Cobalt(Co), Copper(Cu), Iron(Fe),
    Manganese(Mn), Nickel(Ni), Titanium(Ti), or alloy thereof:

    Process under subclass 10.24 wherein elemental Chromium(Cr), Cobalt(Co),
    Copper(Cu), Iron(Fe), Manganese(Mn), Nickel(Ni), Titanium(Ti), or alloy
    thereof is produced or treated by electroslag remelting.  The alloy
    produced or treated can contain the above mentioned metals in any amount.


CLS 75/10.26
TXT Producing or treating Titanium(Ti) or Zirconium(Zr) or alloy thereof:

    Process under subclass 10.23 wherein elemental Titanium (Ti) or
    Zirconium(Zr) or alloy thereof, is produced or treated using a consumable
    electrode.  The alloy produced or treated can contain the above mentioned
    metals in any amount.


CLS 75/10.27
TXT Carbothermic reduction of Aluminum(Al) compound:

    Processes under subclass 10.1 wherein an Aluminum(Al) compound is reduced
    in the presence of a carbonaceous material, carbon or carbide.


CLS 75/10.28
TXT With volatilization of metal halide:

    Process under subclass 10.1 that involves the gasification or formation and
    gasification of a metal halide.


CLS 75/10.29
TXT Distillation or volatilization of refined metal or compound thereof:

    Process under subclass 10.1 wherein refined metal or metal compound is
    condensed or gasified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10.28,  for volatilization of metal halides or subclass 10.27 for that
    carbothermic reduction of Aluminum(Al) compound involves volatilization of
    aluminum.


CLS 75/10.3
TXT Producing Zinc(Zn):

    Process under subclass 10.29 wherein the volatilized metal is Zinc (Zn).


CLS 75/10.31
TXT From consolidated material (e.g., briquette, pellet, etc.):

    Process under subclass 10.3 wherein the Zinc(Zn) containing material is
    charged or utilized in consolidated form (e.g., briquette, pellet, etc.).


CLS 75/10.32
TXT With electric arc:

    Process under subclass 10.3 wherein an electric arc is used.


CLS 75/10.33
TXT Producing Magnesium(Mg):

    Process under subclass 10.29 wherein the volatilized metal is Magnesium(Mg).


CLS 75/10.34
TXT Rotating chamber:

    Process under subclass 10.1 wherein a chamber or converter that rotates 360
    degrees is used.


CLS 75/10.35
TXT Reducing or smelting slag or dross as starting material:

    Process under subclass 10.1 in which a slag or dross is the starting
    material that is reduced or smelted.


CLS 75/10.36
TXT Exhaust or top gas reused or treated:

    Process under subclass 10.1 wherein an exhaust or top gas from any process
    stage is reused or treated.


CLS 75/10.37
TXT With production of electrical energy:

    Process under subclass 10.36 wherein all or a portion of the exhaust or top
    gas is used to generate electrical energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, for residual processes of converting exhaust to
    mechanical energy and generation of electrical energy.


CLS 75/10.38
TXT Producing or treating Iron(Fe) or Iron alloy:

    Process under succlass 10.36 wherein Iron(Fe) or Iron containing alloy is
    produced or treated.


CLS 75/10.39
TXT Adding gaseous treating agent:

    Process under subclass 10.1 wherein a gaseous treating agent is injected
    into or onto, or  through  the charge or melt.


CLS 75/10.4
TXT Gas contains gaseous Oxygen:

    Process under subclass 10.39 wherein Oxygen gas or an Oxygen gas containing
    gaseous composition (e.g., air) is the treating agent.


CLS 75/10.41
TXT Producing or treating Iron(Fe) or Iron alloy:

    Process under subclass 10.4  wherein Iron(Fe) or Iron containing alloy is
    produced.


CLS 75/10.42
TXT With charge melting by electrothermal energy:

    Process under subclass 10.41 wherein the charge is melted by electrothermal
    energy (e.g., in an electric furnace, etc.).


CLS 75/10.43
TXT Hydrogen or Water vapor:

    Process under subclass 10.39 wherein hydrogen or water vapor is the
    treating agent.


CLS 75/10.44
TXT Carbon monoxide or Carbon dioxide:

    Process under subclass 10.39 wherein Carbon monoxide or Carbon dioxide is
    the treating agent.


CLS 75/10.45
TXT Noble gas, Nitrogen, or inert gas not otherwise identified:

    Process under subclass 10.39 wherein Argon(Ar), Helium(He), Krypton(Kr),
    Neon(Ne), Radon(Rn), Xenon(Xe), Nitrogen(N), or an inert gas not otherwise
    identified is the treating agent.


CLS 75/10.46
TXT Adding solid treating agent, slag, or flux:

    Process under subclass 10.1 wherein a solid treating agent, separately
    prepared slag, or flux is added to the charge or melt.


CLS 75/10.47
TXT Magnesium(Mg) or compound thereof:

    Process under subclass 10.46 wherein Magnesium(Mg) or a Magnesium compound
    (e.g., Magnesia, etc.) is present in the treating agent, separately
    prepared slag, or flux.


CLS 75/10.48
TXT Aluminum(Al) or compound thereof:

    Process under subclass 10.46 wherein Aluminum(Al); or an Aluminum compound
    (e.g., Alumina, etc.) is present in the treating agent, separately prepared
    slag, or flux.


CLS 75/10.49
TXT Boron(B) or compound thereof:

    Process under subclass 10.46 wherein Boron(B) or Boron compound (e.g.,
    borax, Boron carbide, etc.) is present in the treating agent, separately
    prepared slag, or flux.


CLS 75/10.5
TXT Silicon(Si) or compound thereof:

    Process under subclass 10.46 wherein Silicon (Si) or a Silicon compound
    (e.g., Silica, etc.) is present in the treating agent, separately prepared
    slag, or flux.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 324+ for production of
    Silicon or a Silicon compound, per se. However, electrothermic processes
    for forming metal-silicon alloys are proper for Class 75, subclasses 10.1+.


CLS 75/10.51
TXT Ferrosilicon alloy:

    Process under subclass 10.5 wherein a Ferrosilicon alloy is present in the
    treating agent, separately prepared slag, or flux.


CLS 75/10.52
TXT Silicon carbide:

    Process under subclass 10.5 wherein Silicon carbide is present in the
    treating agent, separately prepared slag, or flux.


CLS 75/10.53
TXT With lime present:

    Process under subclass 10.5 wherein Calcium oxide (i.e., lime) is present
    with the Silicon(Si) or Silicon compound.


CLS 75/10.54
TXT Alkali metal, Alkaline earth metal, or compound thereof:

    Process under subclass 10.46 wherein an Alkali metal, Alkaline earth metal,
    or compound thereof is present in the treating agent, separately prepared
    slag, or flux.


CLS 75/10.55
TXT Calcium fluoride (e.g., Fluorspar, Fluorite, etc.):

    Process under subclass 10.54 wherein Calcium fluoride (e.g., Fluorspar,
    Fluorite, etc.) is the Alkaline earth metal compound.


CLS 75/10.56
TXT Calcium carbide:

    Process under subclass 10.54 wherein a Calcium carbide is the Alkaline
    earth metal compound.


CLS 75/10.57
TXT Calcium carbonate (e.g., limestone, etc.):

    Process under subclass 10.54 wherein Calcium carbonate is the Alkaline
    earth metal compound.


CLS 75/10.58
TXT Calcium oxide (e.g., lime, calx, etc.):

    Process under subclass 10.54 wherein a Calcium oxide (e.g., lime, calx,
    etc.) is the Alkaline earth metal compound.


CLS 75/10.59
TXT Carbon(C) containing material (e.g., Carbon, carbonaceous material,
    Carbide, etc.):

    Process under subclass 10.46 wherein a Carbon(C) containing material (e.g.,
    Carbon, carbonaceous material, Carbide, etc.) is present in the treating
    agent, separately prepared slag, or flux.


CLS 75/10.6
TXT Producing or treating Iron(Fe) or Iron alloy:

    Process under subclass 10.59 wherein Iron(Fe) or Iron containing alloy is
    produced  or treated.


CLS 75/10.61
TXT With electric arc:

    Process under subclass 10.6 wherein an electric arc is used.


CLS 75/10.62
TXT Reducing or smelting:

    Process under subclass 10.1 wherein there is a reducing or smelting
    operation and which are not classifiable in the subclasses herein above
    provided.


CLS 75/10.63
TXT Producing or treating Iron(Fe) or Iron alloy:

    Process under subclass 10.62 wherein Iron(Fe) or Iron containing alloy is
    produced or treated.


CLS 75/10.64
TXT Vacuum purifying or degassing:

    Process under subclass 10.1 wherein reduced pressure is used to purify or
    degas the molten metal.


CLS 75/10.65
TXT Melting or holding melt:

    Process under subclass 10.1 wherein there is a melting step or a step of
    holding the material in a molten state.


CLS 75/10.66
TXT Producing or treating Iron(Fe) or Iron alloy:

    Process under subclass 10.65 wherein Iron(Fe) or Iron containing alloy is
    produced or treated.


CLS 75/10.67
TXT Magnetic (e.g., electromagnetic, etc.) or electrostatic processes:

    Process under subclass 330 wherein magnetic (e.g., electromagnetic etc.) or
    electrostatic energy is used for purposes other than production of heat
    (e.g., stirring transporting, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10.1+,  for electrothermic processes for the intentional production of heat.


CLS 75/228
TXT Consolidated metal powder compositions:

    Composition under subclass 300 comprising free-metal containing powder or
    particles which have been united to form a self-sustaining mass.

    (1)     Note.  "Powder" is defined as a mass of particles, that is,
    portions of matter so small that they are not ordinarily handled as
    individual units.  According to Metals Handbook, 8th Edition, 1961, Volume
    1, page 28, metallic powders then used in powder metallurgy had a particle
    size within the range of 0.1 to 1,000 microns in their largest dimension,
    as determined by screens or other suitable instruments.  Powder particles
    generally are distinguished from filamentary particles in that their shape
    and length-to-diameter ratio are such that in the dry state the particles
    will not hold together as a coherent article without the application of
    pressure and or heat, that is, will not become entangled.

    (2)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses include compositions made
    without any melting or fusion of the particles, as well as those made by
    sintering, that is, a process in which a portion of metal particle is
    alloyed, bonded, brazed, coalesced, partly fused or welded to a portion of
    an adjacent metal particle due to the application of heat, or heat and
    pressure. Reference:  Everhart, J. L., et al., "Mechanical Properties of
    Metals and Alloys", Circular of the National Bureau of Standards, C 447,
    1943, page 16.

    (3)     Note.  The composition may contain nonmetal material, but for
    classification in this subclass, the claimed product must have a metallic
    matrix, that is, must have a continuous metal phase in which the
    nonmetallic material is dispersed as a discontinuous phase.  In the absence
    of a more explicit description, such a situation may be assumed when (a)
    the composition contains more than 40% metal; (b) the composition is
    prepared by a process which would inherently unite the metal particles
    without uniting the nonmetal component; or (c) the composition is described
    as nonmetal particles "cemented" with a metal.

    (4)     Note.  Where a patent contains a claim to a consolidated metal
    powder composition and, in addition, one or more claims to (a) a process
    for making the composition and/or (b) an ingredient or unconsolidated
    mixture for use in the process, the patent is classified in this or the
    indented subclasses (228+) and cross-referenced to the other subclass, even
    though such other subclass may precede this in the schedule of this class
    (75).

    (5)     Note.  Those patents are placed in this subclass (228) which claim
    all metal compositions wherein the base metal may be (a) either a
    transition or nontransition metal, or (b) a nontransition metal not
    provided for below, that is, the Alkali metals (i.e., Lithium(Li),
    Sodium(Na), Potassium(K), Rubidium(Rb), Cesium(Cs), and Francium(Fr)); the
    Alkaline earth metals (i.e., Calcium(Ca), Strontium(Sr), Barium(Ba), and
    Radium(Rd)); Gallium(Ga), Indium(In); Thallium(Tl); Silicon(Si), which is
    considered a metal in this and its indented subclasses; Germanium(Ge);
    Tin(Sn); Lead(Pb); Arsenic(As); Antimony(Sb); and Bismuth(Bi).

    (6)     Note.  In this and the indented subclasses a "metal silicide" is
    considered to be an intermetallic compound or alloy.

    (7)     Note.  The order of superiority among various alloy, metallic
    composition and metal stock areas and methods of manufacture involving them
    is given in the class definition under section III, Classification Lines
    and Search Notes to Other Classes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251,    for unconsolidated mixtures of metal powder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 283+ for a solid propellant
    form defined in such terms as "a generally perforated propellant mass," "a
    configured mass, i.e., sheet," with at least one dimension specified, or a
    porous mass in combination with an ancillary perforation extending
    therethrough.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 403+, for pigments,
    fillers, and aggregates containing metal powder.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclass 126.1 for processes involving heat
    treatment of metal powders, or nonconsolidated metal powder compositions.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, especially
    subclasses 37+ for articulate metals in combination with an oxidant
    component.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 118 for a device
    of that class insulated with powdered or granular compositions, and
    subclass 137 for insulator devices, per se.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclass 19 for an apparatus of that class
    with a means to compact applied flux.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 62.51 for magnetic compositions having a
    nonmetal matrix; subclasses 181.1+ for "getter" compositions; and
    subclasses 500+ for electrically conductive compositions having a nonmetal
    matrix.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 109+, particularly subclasses 111, for processes directed to
    forming of articles by uniting of discrete, bulk assembled particles.  See
    the search notes to Class 264 in Class 29, subclass 602, and see the
    definitions in Class 264 and pertinent subclasses as cited herein for the
    line between these classes.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclass 422 for such articles made of
    particular metal compositions.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 223+ for a granular or powdered
    resistor element.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, subclasses 1+ for powder metallurgy
    processes which include use of heat.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, appropriate subclasses for
    metallic compositions made by fusing (melting) the metals.  A composition
    made by consolidating loose metal particles with heat and/or pressure is
    proper for subclass 228 unless either (a) all the components are melted or
    dissolved, or (b) a part of the components are melted and the mass is
    treated as a fluent liquid, e.g., by stirring, pouring, etc.  Cases of
    doubt will be resolved in favor of placement in subclass 228.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 1+ for processes of
    treating mixtures such as alloys to obtain a metal compound therefrom.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 78 for apparatus for forming products by uniting associated
    particles of metallic elements, or alloys, or amalgams.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 539.5, 545 and
    546+ for material or articles of that class containing consolidated metal
    powder, subclass 570 for a composite metallic powder, and subclass 613 for
    porous, nonparticulate metallic stock material.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, appropriate subclasses for ceramic
    compositions having metal powder, but lacking a continuous metal matrix.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, particularly Class 523,
    subclasses 1+ for a synthetic resin or natural rubber containing an
    ingredient which may be metallic.


CLS 75/229
TXT Flake or fibrous constituent or fibrous grain structure:

    Composition under subclass 228 which (1) contains a particle component
    which has a thickness which is diminutive in comparison with its length and
    width, or (2) has a component originally contained in the starting material
    or produced during the uniting of the particles or subsequent processing,
    which is characterized by a width and thickness which is diminutive
    compared to its length, e.g., fibrous, circular, needle-like, whiskerish,
    etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, subclasses 45 and 59.1 for
    collectors of that class.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, especially subclasses
    292+, 549 and 567 for such material involving fibers.


CLS 75/230
TXT With nonmetal constituent -  Silicon (Si) considered a metal (e.g., cermet,
    etc.):

    Composition under subclass 228 containing one of the following, in free or
    combined form:  a noble gas, a halogen, a chalcogen (oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium), nitrogen, phosphorus, carbon or boron.

    (1)     Note.  Free silicon is considered to be a metal; a metal silicide
    is considered to be an intermetallic compound or alloy.

    (2)     Note.  In this and the indented subclasses the presence or absence
    of hydrogen is ignored.

    (3)     Note.  The recitation as part of the total composition of a
    material known to, or generally considered to, contain carbon, such as
    "steel" or "cast iron", puts the composition in this or an indented
    subclass.

    (4)     Note.  See the notes to subclass 228, especially (3) Note, and to
    subclass 231 for the distinction between compositions for this class and
    compositions for Class 106.

    (5)     Note.  See the notes to subclass 231 for the distinction between
    compositions for this class and compositions for Class 51 and Class 252.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, subclasses
    307+ for an abrasive tool making process or inorganic material to be used
    therein.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclass 24 for flux compositions containing metal
    and a nonmetal binder or slurrying agent to be used in the treatment of
    solid metal.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, subclass 108.2 for a
    free metal-containing composition of that class.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, subclasses 10+ for powder metallurgy
    processes including a nonmetal and involving sintering.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 539.5 for stock
    material having interengaged metal and nonmetal continuous phase;
    subclasses 564 and 565 for metallic composites having metal particles and
    nonmetal particles; and subclasses 639+ for composite metallic stock in
    which a component contains oxygen, sulfur, or an organic compound.


CLS 75/231
TXT Molybdenum sulfide or functional constituent, (e.g., lubricant, abrasive,
    etc.):

    Composition under subclass 230 in which the nonmetal is a molybdenum
    sulfide or in which a solid, nonmetal component is claimed in functional
    terms, such as a lubricant, an abrasive, a frictional component, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Where the functional component is restricted to a specific
    material other than MoSx, the patent is classified in the "nonfunctional"
    subclass below, appropriate to the material, e.g., diamond as the sole
    permissible abrasive or graphite as the sole permissible lubricant, are
    provided for in subclass 243, etc., and is cross-referenced here (subclass
    231) if appropriate.

    (2)     Note.  Where the description of the functional component is of
    hybrid character, the patent is classified in this subclass only when the
    component is not specifically provided for below, e.g., an "abrasive oxide"
    is provided for in subclasses 232+, but a "lubricating sulfide" indicates
    classification in this subclass (231).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, subclass
    309 for metal-containing compositions which are consolidated products
    having a metal continuous phase.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclass 36 for compositions of
    that class specially designed for the production of a tractive or friction
    surface.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 107+ for elements of
    such devices having modified engaging surfaces.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 564 for brake
    shoe type composite materials; subclass 687 for metallic stock having a
    rough surface; and subclass 932 for such stock having an abrasive or
    cutting feature.

    508,    Solid Anti-Friction Devices, Materials Therefor, Lubricant or
    Separant Compositions for Moving Solid Surfaces, and Miscellaneous Mineral
    Oil Compositions, for lubricating compositions, especially subclasses 100+
    for rigid lubricants and bearings containing fluid lubricants.


CLS 75/232
TXT Oxide containing:

    Composition under subclass 230 containing oxygen in chemically combined
    form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    951,    for a collection of patented disclosures having to do with
    consolidated metal powder compositions having greater than 95 percent
    theoretical density and containing an oxide.


CLS 75/233
TXT With another nonmetal:

    Composition under subclass 232 containing another nonmetal besides oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  See the definition of subclass 230, (1) Note, for a list of
    elements considered to be nonmetals in this classification schedule.

    (2)     Note.  Nonmetal materials such as borates, carbonates, nitrates,
    sulfates, etc., are classified herein.


CLS 75/234
TXT Oxygen(O) associated with more than one metal:

    Composition under subclass 232 containing oxides of more than one metal, or
    containing the oxide of plural metals, e.g., a metal silicate, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Where all of the metals with which Oxygen(O) is associated
    are selected from Aluminum(Al), Beryllium(Be), Magnesium(Mg), Alkaline
    earth metal, Scandium(Sc), Yttrium(Y), Lanthanide metal, Actinide metal,
    Titanium(Ti), Zirconium(Zr), or Hafnium(Hf) placement of the patent is in
    subclass 235.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein are those nonmetal additives such as clay,
    slag, or spinels, which are a combination of divalent metal oxide and a
    trivalent metal oxide having the formulaMO.M'2O3 or MM'2O4, not provided
    for in subclass 235.


CLS 75/235
TXT Oxide of Aluminum(Al), Beryllium(Be), Magnesium(Mg), Alkaline earth metal,
    Scandium(Sc), Yttrium(Y), Lanthanide metal, Actinide Metal, Titanium(Ti),
    Zirconium(Zr), or Hafnium(Hf):

    Composition under subclass 232 in which the oxide is restricted to one or
    more of alumina, beryllia, magnesia, lime, strontia, baria, titania,
    zirconia, hafnia, or an oxide of radium, scandium, yttrium, a lanthanide
    metal or an actinide metal, including thoria and uranium oxide.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are those oxides having a free energy of
    formation (  F) at 1,000 C. of greater than 80 kilocalories per gram atom
    of oxygen. The following table, taken from U.S. Patent 3,377,143, is
    presented as a guide:

    Oxide   F       Oxide   F       Oxide   F
    Y2O3125 Hfo     105     TiO     95
    CaO122  CeO2    105     TiO2    85
    La2O3   121     Al2O3   104     SiO2    78
    BeO120  ZrO2    100     Ta2O5   75
    ThO2119 BaO     97      V2O3    74
    MgO112  ZrSiO4  95      NbO2    70
    UO2105  Cr2OO3  62

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 85+ for inorganic
    settable compositions.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 625+ for radioactive compositions in
    general.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 0.5 for shaping or treating radioactive material.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, subclasses 94+ for a refractory ceramic
    composition having a matrix of one or more of the above oxides.


CLS 75/236
TXT Carbide containing:

    Composition under subclass 230 in which the nonmetal is carbon in the form
    of a carbide.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass (236) is the locus for a composition under
    subclass 230 which has a single metal carbide as its sole nonmetal
    component, which carbide is of a metal other than Vanadium(V), Niobium(Nb)
    or Columbium(Cb), Tantalum(Ta), Chromium(Cr), Molybdenum(Mo), or
    Tungsten(W).

    (2)     Note.  The mere designation of a composition or a component of a
    composition as a "carburized" metal, alloy, or other metal product, is not
    sufficient for placement of a patent in this subclass; rather, such patent
    is placed in a subclass providing for elemental carbon, e.g., subclass 243.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233,    for consolidated metal powder compositions containing an oxide as
    well as a carbide.  Where the oxide is a necessary component of the
    composition, a patent for such composition is not cross-referenced to this
    subclass or its indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 62.3 for a barrier layer device composition
    containing a binary alloy or carbide, and subclass 516 for an electrically
    conductive or emissive composition containing a carbide.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 603+ for vitrifying or sintering a refractory preform.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, subclasses 87+ for ceramic compositions
    which have a nonmetal matrix and contain a carbide.


CLS 75/237
TXT With another nonmetal:

    Composition under subclass 236 containing another nonmetal, other than
    carbide.

    (1)     Note.  See the definition of subclass 230, (1) Note, for a list of
    elements considered to be nonmetals in this classification schedule.

    (2)     Note.  Free carbon is considered to be "another nonmetal" for this
    subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    125,    Stone Working, subclass 11 for dressing of grinding wheels.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 330 for an electric resistance
    element integral with a terminal.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 470 for a shaping or casting surface of that class.


CLS 75/238
TXT Nonmetal is Boron(B) or Nitrogen(N):

    Composition under subclass 237 in which the nonmetal other than carbon is
    restricted to boron and/or nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  This definition is meant to include boron carbide as the
    sole nonmetal component, as well as metal-carbide compositions containing
    boron nitride as the only additional nonmetal component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244     for a consolidated metal powder composition containing B or N
    without carbide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, subclass 12 for powder metallurgy
    processes with sintering which include a boride compound; and subclass 13
    for similar processes which include a nitride compound.


CLS 75/239
TXT Carbide only of Vanadium(V), Niobium(Nb) or Columbium(Cb), or Tantalum(Ta):

    Subject matter under subclass 236 restricted to the carbides of vanadium,
    niobium (columbium) and/or tantalum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236,    for similar compositions in which the carbide of a metal other than
    a Group VB metal may be used alternatively to the carbide of a Group VB
    metal.

    241,    for a composition in which a Group VB metal carbide is used in
    addition to the carbide of a metal other than a Group VB metal.


CLS 75/240
TXT Carbide only of Chromium(Cr), Molybdenum(Mo), or Tungsten(W):

    Subject matter under subclass 236 restricted to the carbides of chromium,
    molybdenum and/or tungsten.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236,    for a similar composition in which the carbide of a metal other
    than Chromium(Cr), Molybdenum(Mo), or Tungsten(W) may be used alternatively
    to the carbide of Chromium(Cr), Molybdenum(Mo), or Tungsten(W).

    241,    for a composition in which Chromium(Cr), Molybdenum(Mo), or
    Tungsten(W) carbide is used in addition to the carbide of a metal other
    than Chromium(Cr), Molybdenum(Mo), or Tungsten(W).


CLS 75/241
TXT Carbon(C) associated with more than one metal:

    Composition under subclass 236 containing the carbides of more than one
    metal or containing a carbide of plural metals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239,    for consolidated metal powder compositions containing carbon
    associated with two metals, both selected from Vanadium(V), Niobium (Nb) or
    Columbium (Cb), and Tantalum(Ta) exclusively.

    240,    for consolidated metal powder compositions containing carbon
    associated with two metals, both selected from Chromium(Cr),
    Molybdenum(Mo), and Tungsten(W) exclusively.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 294 for a
    carbon-containing electrolytic electrode composition.


CLS 75/242
TXT Free metal is Iron(Fe), Cobalt(Co), or Nickel(Ni) only:

    Composition under subclass 241 in which the only permissible free (e.g.,
    "cementing") metal is one or more of iron, cobalt and nickel.

    (1)     Note.  Where other free metals are permitted in the composition,
    the patent is classified in subclass 241 and is not cross-referenced to
    this subclass (242).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241,    for compositions in which the binder may contain other metals in
    addition to, or alternatively to, Iron (Fe), Cobalt(Co) and Nickel(Ni).


CLS 75/243
TXT Nonmetal is elemental Carbon(C) only:

    Composition under subclass 230 in which the only permissible nonmetal
    component is carbon, and wherein the carbon is not claimed as being part of
    a chemical compound.

    (1)     Note.  The claiming of a component of the composition as "steel,"
    "cast iron" or other metal product known to contain carbon as an essential
    component, e.g., a "carburized" metal or alloy, is sufficient for placement
    in this subclass (243).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230,    for a composition containing elemental carbon plus a nonmetal other
    than oxide, carbide, boron or nitrogen.

    231,    for a composition wherein elemental carbon (e.g., graphite,
    diamond) is not claimed as such, but only designated as a lubricant,
    abrasive, etc.

    233,    for a composition containing elemental carbon in addition to an
    oxide.

    237,    for a composition containing elemental carbon in addition to a
    carbide.

    244,    for a composition containing elemental carbon in addition to
    nitrogen or boron.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, subclasses 99+ for refractory ceramic
    compositions containing elemental carbon.


CLS 75/244
TXT Containing Boron(B) or Nitrogen(N):

    Compositions under subclass 230 in which the nonmetal component is boron
    and/or nitrogen, including boron nitride.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233,    for consolidated metal powder compositions containing borax.

    238,    for a consolidated metal powder composition containing boron or
    nitrogen as a carbide or in addition to a metal carbide, or in which the
    composition has been carbonitrided.

    254,    for a loose powder composition containing metal particles and
    particles which contain boron.


CLS 75/245
TXT Base metal one or more of transition metal:

    Composition under subclass 228 in which half or more of the composition, by
    weight, comprises one or more, exclusively, of transition elements (i.e.,
    Scandium(Sc), Titanium(Ti), Vanadium(V), Chromium(Cr), Manganese(Mn),
    Iron(Fe), Cobalt(Co), Nickel(Ni), Copper(Cu), Zinc(Zn), Yttrium(Y),
    Zirconium(Zr), Niobium(Nb) or Columbium(Cb), Molybdenum(Mo),
    Technetium(Tc), Ruthenium(Ru), Rhodium(Rh), Palladium(Pd), Silver(Ag),
    Cadmium(Cd), Lanthanum(La), Cerium(Ce), Praseodymium(Pr), Neodymium(Nd),
    Promethium(Pm), Samarium(Sm), Europium(Eu), Gadolinium(Gd), Terbium(Tb),
    Dysprosium(Dy), Holmium(Ho), Erbium(Er), Thulium(Tm), Ytterbium(Yb),
    Lutetium(Lu), Hafnium(Hf), Tantalum(Ta), Tungsten(W), Rhenium(Re),
    Osmium(Os), Iridium(Ir), Platinum(Pt), Gold(Au), Mercury(Hg), Actinium(Ac),
    Thorium(Th), Protactinium(Pa), Uranium(U), Neptunium(Np), Plutonium(Pu),
    Americium(Am), Curium(Cm), Berkelium(Bk), Californium(Cf), Einsteinium(Es),
    Fermium(Fm), Mendelevium(Md), Nobelium(No), Lawrencium(Lr),
    Unnilquadium(Unq), Unnilpentium(Unp), and Unnilhexium(Unh).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 62.3+ for barrier-layer device
    compositions, and subclass 301.4 for a fluorescent or phosporescent
    composition containing a transition metal.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, for the following alloys made by
    melting (fusion) techniques; subclasses 417+ for a zirconium base alloy;
    subclasses 425+ for a niobium (columbium) base alloy; and subclass 427 for
    a tantalum base alloy.


CLS 75/246
TXT Base metal one or more of Iron group, Copper(Cu), or Noble metal:

    Composition under subclass 245 in which half or more of the composition, by
    weight, comprises one or more metals selected exclusively from the Iron
    Group (i.e., Iron(Fe), Cobalt(Co), Nickel(Ni)), Copper(Cu), or Noble metal
    (i.e., Silver (Ag), Gold(Au), Osmium(Os), Iridium(Ir), Platinum(Pt),
    Ruthenium(Ru), Rhodium(Rh), and Palladium(Pd)).

    (1)     Note.  Compositions containing steel, cast iron, etc., are
    considered to be nonmetal containing, and are classified in subclasses
    230+.  See the definition of subclass 230.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28+,    for pyrometallurgy of iron and steel.

    123+,   for ferrous alloys.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 513 for an electrically conductive or
    emissive composition containing a free metal from the iron group; and
    subclass 514 for such a composition containing a free noble metal.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, for the following alloys made by
    melting (fusion) techniques; subclasses 435+ for a cobalt base alloy; and
    subclasses 441+ for a nickel base alloy.


CLS 75/247
TXT Base metal one or more of Copper(Cu) or Noble metal:

    Composition under subclass 246 in which half or more of the composition, by
    weight, comprises one or more, exclusively, of Copper(Cu) or Noble metal
    (i.e., Silver(Ag), Gold(Au), Osmium(Os), Iridium(Ir), Platinum(Pt),
    Ruthenium(Ru), Rhodium(Rh), and Palladium(Pd)).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    245,    for a consolidated metal powder composition which may have a base
    of a transition metal, other than iron, nickel or cobalt alternative to a
    copper or noble-metal base.

    246,    for such composition which may have a base of iron, nickel or
    cobalt alternative to a copper or noble-metal base.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 514 for an electrically conductive or
    emissive composition containing a noble metal.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, for the following alloys made by
    melting (fusion) techniques; subclasses 466+ for a platinum base alloy;
    subclasses 501+ for a silver base alloy; and subclasses 507+ for a gold
    base alloy.


CLS 75/248
TXT Base metal confined to Tungsten(W):

    Composition under subclass 245 requiring half or more of the composition,
    by weight, to be tungsten.

    (1)     Note.  Where Tungsten(W) is an alternative base metal to another
    transition metal, e.g., where the claims allow the base metal to be
    selected from Tungsten (W) and Molybdenum(Mo), the patent is placed in
    subclass 245 and is not cross-referenced to this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    245,    to complete a search for consolidated metal powder compositions
    having a tungsten base.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 301.5 for a fluorescent or phosphorescent
    composition containing tungsten, and subclass 515 for an electrically
    conductive or emissive composition containing free tungsten.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, subclasses 430+ for a tungsten
    base alloy made by complete melting (fusion) techniques.


CLS 75/249
TXT Base metal one or more of Beryllium(Be), Magnesium(Mg), or Aluminum(Al):

    Composition under subclass 228 in which half or more of the composition, by
    weight, comprises one or more of aluminum, beryllium, and magnesium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228,    for a consolidated metal powder composition having, as base metal,
    (1) a nontransition metal other than Al, Be or Mg, (2) Al, Be or Mg only in
    admixture with another metal, or (3) Al, Be or Mg as an alternative to
    another metal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, for the following alloys made by
    melting (fusion) techniques; subclass 401 for a beryllium base alloy;
    subclasses 402+ for a magnesium base alloy; and subclass 528 for an
    aluminum base alloy.


CLS 75/250
TXT Base metal is Beryllium(Be) only:

    Subject matter under subclass 249 in which the base metal is confined to
    beryllium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249,    to complete a search for consolidated metal particle compositions
    which are half or more Be.


CLS 75/252
TXT Mixture contains particles of nonmetal:

    Subject matter under subclass 251 containing, in loose, particulate form,
    (a) a metal, that is, a pure metal, an alloy, an intermetallic compound or
    an agglomerate which is more than half free metal, and (b) a nonmetal, that
    is, a material which is more than half by weight of a nonmetal element or
    compound of such element.

    (1)     Note.  A patent drawn to a mixture having a component provided for
    in the title of subclasses indented hereunder are placed in the indented
    subclasses and are not cross-referenced to this subclass, even though the
    mixture may have components not provided for in the title of the indented
    subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The search notes below indicate that the line between this
    subclass, on the one hand, and Class 106 metal depositing compositions and
    Class 148 fluxes, on the other hand, depends upon the presence of a
    nonmetal vehicle in the composition.  Such vehicle need not be claimed for
    original placement of a patent in these other classes where the composition
    is disclosed as usable only in combination with the vehicle.  Such a patent
    should be cross-referenced here (subclasses 252+).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230+,   for products resulting from the consolidation of particle mixtures
    of this subclass, and the definition of subclass 230 for a list of nonmetal
    elements.

    256,    for consolidated compositions having metal particles distributed in
    a nonmetal continuous phase, such compositions being designed for use as
    charges to a metallurgical furnace.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclasses 252+ for a mixture of a
    particulate metal with a nonmetal which can react exothermically with it by
    activation with water.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclass 1.05, for
    metal-depositing coating compositions which contain metal particles and a
    nonmetal vehicle which makes a coherent composition, whether liquid, solid,
    plastic, pasty, etc., and which facilitates application to a surface to be
    metallized at ordinary temperatures.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclass 24 for compositions containing metal
    particles, a fluxing component, and a nonmetal vehicle which makes a
    coherent composition, whether liquid, solid, plastic, pasty, etc., and
    which facilitates application to a solid metal at ordinary temperatures.
    Subclass 24 also includes methods for fluxing which comprise the mere use
    of compositions classifiable herein (subclasses 252+).

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, especially
    subclasses 37+, 87 and 108.2 for a mixture of a particulate metal with a
    nonmetal which can react exothermically with it.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclass 224 for a process of surface bonding
    a metal to another metal or a nonmetal where a powdered filler material,
    mixed with a flux, is employed.  Where a patent claims both the bonding
    process and an unconsolidated metal particle composition used in the
    bonding, the patent is placed in Class 228 and cross-referenced here.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 558 and 560+
    for solid welding rods coated with or containing particulate mixtures of
    the type classified here, or in Class 106, subclass 1.05, or Class 148,
    subclass 24.


CLS 75/253
TXT Halogen containing particles:

    Subject matter under subclass 252 in which the nonmetal is a halogen (i.e.,
    Fluorine(F), Chlorine(Cl), Bromine(Br), Iodine(I), and Astatine(At))
    compound.

    (1)     Note.  Where the particle mixture contains boron, in free or
    combined form, as well as a halogen, it is classified in this subclass and
    not cross-referenced to subclass 254.


CLS 75/254
TXT Boron(B) containing particles:

    Subject matter under subclass 252 in which the nonmetal is boron or a boron
    compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    253,    for such compositions containing a halogen compound, as well as
    boron or a boron compound.


CLS 75/255
TXT Loose particulate mixture (i.e., composition) containing metal particles:

    Composition under subclass 300 which comprises loose particles of a metal
    or alloy mixed with loose particles of a different metal or alloy or with
    loose particles of a nonmetal.

    (1)     Note.  Where a patent claims both the powder metallurgy process and
    the unconsolidated starting material, it is classified as an original in
    Class 419 and is cross-referenced here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228+,   for such compositions consolidated to a coherent (self-sustaining)
    shape or form, without total loss of the particulate nature of the
    unconsolidated mass, that is, without total fusion of all components of the
    mass. Patents contained in these subclasses (228+) often contain
    disclosures of loose metal particles and mixtures of the same.

    331+,   for processes of producing solid particulate free metal directly
    from liquid metal.

    343+,   for processes of producing or purifying free metal powder or
    producing or purifying alloys in powder form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclass 403+ for metal particle
    mixtures to be used as a pigment or filler for such compositions.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclass 248 for a process of surface bonding
    a metal to another metal or a nonmetal where a powdered filler material is
    employed. Where a patent claims both the bonding process and an
    unconsolidated metal particle composition used in the bonding as a filler,
    the patent is placed in Class 228 and is cross-referenced here.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 181.1+ for "getter" compositions, which
    may contain metal particles.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 48+ for a getter-type pump.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, subclasses 1+ for powder metallurgy
    processes including sintering.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, for a free metal or a single alloy
    or metallic composition in particulate form.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 458+ for applying metal particles
    utilizing an electrostatic charge; subclasses 446+ for plasma spraying
    processes; subclasses 180+ for other particulate metal coating processes;
    and subclasses 446+ for flame-spray coating processes.  Where a patent
    claims both the coating process and an unconsolidated metal particle
    composition used in the process, the patent is classified in Class 427 and
    cross-referenced here.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 403+ for a
    metal particle coated with a nonmetal, and subclass 570 for composite metal
    particles (e.g., a powder having one metal coated upon a different metal,
    etc.).


CLS 75/300
TXT COMPOSITIONS:

    Compositions under the class definition that are:

    (A)     reactive furnace linings;

    (B)     charges or solid treating compositions, not elsewhere provided, for
    producing free metal or alloys from metalliferous materials or for treating
    liquid metal;

    (C)     gaseous and liquid compositions, not elsewhere provided, used in
    the production of free metal or alloys or used in the treatment of liquid
    metal;

    (D)     consolidated metal powder compositions having a continuous free
    metal phase, such as produced by a Class 419 process;

    (E)     loose particulate mixtures (i.e., compositions) containing (a)
    particles of one free metal mixed with particles of another free metal or
    alloy; (b) particles of one alloy mixed with particles of another alloy or
    (c) particles of free metal or alloy mixed with nonfree metal containing
    particles and not elsewhere provided.

    (1)     Note.  Processes of making the compositions of the type mentioned
    in A, B, or C will be found elsewhere in this class.  See "SEARCH THIS
    CLASS, SUBCLASS" below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    330,    for processes of making a metallurgical treating agent which
    process does not involve consolidation.

    746,    for processes of making a metallurgical treating agent which
    process involves consolidation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, for fuel compositions intended to
    provide only heat for a Class 75 or Class 420 operation.

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, for gas compositions intended to
    provide only heat for a Class 75 or Class 420 operation.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, for metal depositing
    compositions, coating repellent, polishes, corrosion inhibiting coatings,
    molding compositions, sodium silicate or hydrosetting compositions,
    bituminous compositions used for coating metalliferous materials or for
    agglomerates in general.

    148,    Metal Treatment, for compositions for treating solid metals (e.g.,
    soldering flux, galvanizing flux, welding composition, surface treating
    compositions, etc.) and subclasses 240+ for reactive coating compositions
    that react with a metal base to form a coating thereon.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, for exothermic
    compositions for treating metalliferous materials.  Particularly, see
    subclasses 5+, 20+, 30+ or 37+ for compositions which (1) contain at least
    one free metal or metalloid and at least one Oxygen (O) supplying material
    and (2) are capable of reacting to yield heat and reaction by-products.



    (1)     Note.  The line between Class 149 and Class 75 is difficult due to
    the similarity of ingredients in the compositions.  If there is a positive
    recitation of exothermic utility, the original goes to Class 149 even if
    the composition is used in a Class 75 process.  If the composition is used
    in a Class 75 process and there is no positive recitation of exothermic
    utility, it goes to Class 75 as an original.



    (2)     Note.  Patents having claims to both a Class 75 process and a Class
    149 composition go to Class 75 as original and are crossed to Class 149.



    219,    Electric Heating, for electric heating devices, particularly
    subclasses 145.1+ for welding rod or electrode having significant structure
    and defined by composition.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, for metal fusion bonding means, particularly
    subclass 56.3 for solder having significant structure or subclass 50 for
    seam backup means having significant structure.

    252,    Compositions, for physical separation, etching or brightening,
    descaling, detergents, getters, chemical agents, solids with solution or
    dispersion aids, solvents, gaseous compositions, preservation agents.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, for alloys or metallic
    compositions having a continuous metal phase.



    (1)     Note.  Class 420 alloys go as original to Class 420 even if used as
    treating agents.  If a Class 420 material is combined with another
    ingredient to provide a solid treating composition for liquid metal, the
    original goes to Class 75, if not provided for elsewhere.

    (2)     Note.  Consolidated metal powder compositions produced by a Class
    419 process go as original to Class 75 and are not provided for in Class
    420 even though a continuous metal phase may be present.



    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, for material or articles
    having some structure.  See section 5 for the relationship between Class
    428 and the composition classes.  In general, when claims mention the
    article by name only and define it in terms of composition, the original
    goes to the composition class.



    (1)     Note.  Welding rods or welding electrodes defined only in terms of
    composition are placed in Class 75 subclass 302.  Flux defined by
    composition in wire form or in a container go as original to Class 75
    subclass 304 unless there is significant structural description.



    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, for glass and refractory compositions
    containing metalliferous materials.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, for catalysts or solid sorbents that contain metalliferous
    materials.


CLS 75/301
TXT Reactive furnace lining:

    Furnace lining composition under subclass 300 that is used for intentional
    reactivity with metalliferous materials in the furnace to produce
    beneficiated or refined ore, charge or free metal.


CLS 75/302
TXT Welding rod or electrode defined by composition:

    A welding rod or electrode defined by composition under subclass 300 and
    without significant structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 146.1+ for welding rod compositions.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, if the welding rod without
    significant structure contains only elemental metal and no other
    ingredients (e.g., flux, etc.).

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 385+ for metal
    substrate with weld modifying coating.


CLS 75/303
TXT Solid treating composition for liquid metal (e.g., flux, slagging agent,
    casting agent, etc.) or charge:

    Composition under subclass 300 which is a solid treating composition for
    liquid metal or a charge for producing metal or treating liquid metal.

    (1)     Note.  The composition herein does not encompass ore, per se, or
    alloy, per se.  Another ingredient utilized in producing or refining of
    metal must be present with the ore or alloy to be acceptable to this
    composition subclass.


CLS 75/304
TXT In wire, container, or article with surface feature:

    Composition under subclass 303 that is in a wire, in a container, or in an
    article defined by surface feature (e.g., groove, openings, etc.) which
    aids in the utilization or dispersement of the charge or treating agent.

    (1)     Note.  The recitation of a shape other than wire or article with
    surface feature is insufficient for classification in this subclass.  Thus,
    pellet, briquette, cube, etc., are placed elsewhere under subclass 303.


CLS 75/305
TXT For casting or teeming operation:

    Composition under subclass 303 for treating molten metal in the mold or
    while being poured in the mold.

    (1)     Note.  Patents having claims to both a Class 164 process and a
    Class 75 composition go to Class 164 as original and are crossed to Class
    75.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, for processes of treating molten metal in a teeming
    or casting operation.


CLS 75/306
TXT For electrothermic operation (e.g., electroslag remelting, etc.):

    Composition under subclass 303 for use in electrothermic processes (e.g.,
    electroslag remelting, etc.).


CLS 75/307
TXT Containing Boron (B) compound:

    Composition under subclass 303 containing a Boron (B) compound (e.g.,
    Borax, Boron halide, Boron carbide, etc.).


CLS 75/308
TXT Containing Halide:

    Composition under subclass 303 containing a binary compound of a metal and
    a Halogen.


CLS 75/309
TXT Containing Fluoride:

    Composition under subclass 308 wherein the Halogen is Fluorine (F) (e.g.,
    Fluorspar, Fluorite, etc.).


CLS 75/310
TXT And consolidated:

    Composition under subclass 309 wherein the Fluoride is in consolidated form
    produced by agglomerating, calcinating, compacting, indurating, sintering,
    or solidifying from a molten mass.


CLS 75/311
TXT And consolidated:

    Composition under subclass 308 wherein the Halide is in consolidated form
    produced by agglomerating, calcinating, compacting, indurating, sintering,
    or solidifying from a molten mass.


CLS 75/312
TXT Containing Carbide:

    Composition under subclass 303 containing a Carbide (e.g., Calcium carbide,
    Silicon carbide, etc.).


CLS 75/313
TXT Composition for or from consolidating by agglomerating, calcinating,
    compacting, indurating, roasting, sintering, or solidifying from molten
    mass:

    Composition under subclass 303 which is:  (1) intended for consolidation by
    agglomerating, calcinating, indurating, sintering, or solidifying from
    molten mass; (2) consolidated composition produced by agglomerating,
    calcinating, compacting, indurating, sintering, or solidifying from a
    molten mass, or (3) composition derived from materials which were
    consolidated by agglomerating, calcinating, compacting, indurating,
    sintering, or solidifying from a molten mass.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes as original consolidated metalliferous
    compositions amenable to Class 75 or Class 420 refining or alloying
    operation unless an intended use divergent from a Class 75 or Class 420
    refining or alloying operation is the expressed use.

    (2)     Note.  The consolidated composition may be a coated composition or
    may contain more than one layer.  However, coated compositions produced by
    processes not involving agglomerating, calcinating, compacting, indurating,
    sintering or solidifying from molten mass go elsewhere under subclass 303
    if they are coated charges, or coated solid treating compositions for
    molten metal.


CLS 75/314
TXT Containing free metal:

    Consolidated composition under subclass 313 that contains metal in the zero
    valent or free metal state.


CLS 75/315
TXT Aluminum(Al) or Magnesium(Mg) as free metal:

    Composition under subclass 314 wherein Aluminum(Al) or Magnesium(Mg) is the
    free metal.


CLS 75/316
TXT Iron(Fe), Iron scrap, or Iron alloy as free metal:

    Composition under subclass 314 containing Iron(Fe), Iron scrap, or Iron
    alloy wherein Iron is the free metal.


CLS 75/317
TXT And coal, coke, pitch, asphalt, or tar:

    Composition under subclass 316 which contains coal, coke, pitch, asphalt,
    or tar.


CLS 75/318
TXT And clay (e.g., bentonite, montmorillonite, etc.), cement, or Alkali metal
    silicate:

    Composition under subclass 316 which contains clay (e.g., bentonite,
    montmorillonite, etc.), cement, or Alkali metal silicate.


CLS 75/319
TXT Containing Iron(Fe) compound:

    Composition under subclass 313 containing an Iron compound.


CLS 75/320
TXT And coal, coke, pitch, asphalt, or tar:

    Composition under subclass 319 which contains coal, coke, pitch, asphalt,
    or tar.


CLS 75/321
TXT And synthetic polymer, natural polymer, or carbohydrate:

    Composition under subclass 319 which contains synthetic polymer, natural
    polymer, or carbohydrate.


CLS 75/322
TXT And clay (e.g.,  bentonite, montmorillonite, etc.), cement, or Alkali metal
    silicate:

    Composition under subclass 319 which contains clay (e.g., bentonite,
    montmorillonite, etc.), cement, or Alkali metal silicate.


CLS 75/323
TXT And Alkaline earth metal compound or Aluminum(Al) compound:

    Composition under subclass 319 containing an Alkaline earth metal compound
    or Aluminum(Al) compound.


CLS 75/324
TXT Containing Zinc(Zn) compound:

    Composition under subclass 313 containing a Zinc(Zn) compound.


CLS 75/325
TXT Containing coal, coke, pitch, asphalt, or tar:

    Composition under subclass 313 which contains coal, coke, pitch, asphalt,
    or tar.


CLS 75/326
TXT Containing clay (e.g., bentonite, montmorillonite, etc.), cement, or Alkali
    metal silicate:

    Composition under subclass 313 which contains clay (e.g., bentonite,
    montmorillonite, etc.), cement, or Alkali metal silicate.


CLS 75/327
TXT Containing Alkaline earth metal compound or Aluminum(Al) compound:

    Composition under subclass 313 containing an Alkaline earth metal compound
    or Aluminum(Al) compound.


CLS 75/328
TXT Containing free metal:

    Composition under subclass 303 that contains metal in the zero valent or
    free metal state.


CLS 75/329
TXT Containing Alkaline earth metal compound or Aluminum(Al) compound:

    Composition under subclass 303 containing an Alkaline earth metal compound
    or Aluminum(Al) compound.


CLS 75/330
TXT PROCESSES:

    Processes under the class definition not otherwise provided for.

    (1)     Note.  This class has no miscellaneous subclass as such, thus this
    subclass serves as the miscellaneous process subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Among others, some patents may be found in this subclass
    which claim only a process of making a metallurgical treating agent which
    process does not involve consolidation.


CLS 75/331
TXT Producing solid particulate free metal directly from liquid metal (e.g.,
    liquid comminuting, etc.):

    Process under subclass 330 in which liquid free metal is comminuted to form
    discrete particles and solidified in its comminuted form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    355,    for processes of comminuting a liquid solution or dispersion to
    obtain a discrete powder form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, especially subclasses 75, 87, 205, and 921,
    for processes and non-coating apparatus for growing therein-defined
    single-crystal of all types of materials, including metals, which are in
    the form of whiskers.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 5+ for processes of forming solid


            particulate material directly from molten or liquid mass wherein a
    material other than metal is comminuted or for processes in which the
    claims are broad or nondefinitive as to material and the disclosure states
    that materials other than metal are processed by the invention.  Patents
    having claims to forming solid particulate metal and claims to forming
    solid particulate nonmetal or patents having generic claims with a
    disclosure to forming solid particulate metal and to forming solid
    particulate nonmetal will go as originals to Class 264 and a
    cross-reference will be placed in Class 75.


CLS 75/332
TXT With subsequent coating of the particles:

    Process under subclass 331 in which the solidified particles are coated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 212+ for processes of coating
    particles, flakes, or granules.


CLS 75/333
TXT Utilizing centrifugal force or rotating forming zone to comminute liquid
    metal:

    Process under subclass 331 in which the liquid metal is comminuted by use
    of centrifugal force or by use of a revolving or rotating surface.


CLS 75/334
TXT Including directing liquid metal onto rotating disc:

    Process under subclass 333 in which liquid metal is directed against a
    rotating thin, flat, circular plate.


CLS 75/335
TXT By vibrating or agitating:

    Process under subclass 331 in which the particles are formed by agitation
    or vibration of the liquid metal to fling or shake off the particles.


CLS 75/336
TXT Utilizing electrothermic energy to comminute:

    Process under subclass 331 in which electrothermic energy is employed to
    comminute the liquid metal into particles.


CLS 75/337
TXT By impinging plural liquid streams:

    Process under subclass 331 in which the particles are formed by causing
    plural liquid streams to collide forcibly.

    (1)     Note.  The liquid streams may be of the particle forming metal only
    or of both particle forming metal and nonparticle forming material.


CLS 75/338
TXT By impinging or atomizing with gaseous jet or blast:

    Process under subclass 331 in which the particles are formed by impinging
    with or directing a jet or blast of a gas into contact with the liquid
    metal.


CLS 75/339
TXT Gas used is air:

    Process under subclass 338 in which the gas used is air.


CLS 75/340
TXT By extrusion spraying or gravity fall through orifice:

    Process under subclass 331 in which the particles are formed by flowing or
    allowing the liquid metal to fall through an orifice.


CLS 75/341
TXT Into moving fluid:

    Process under subclass 340 in which the formed particles pass into or
    through  moving fluid medium.


CLS 75/342
TXT Spheroidizing or rounding of existing solid metal particles:

    Process under subclass 330 in which solid, irregular, or nonspherical
    particulate metal is reshaped wherein the irregularities are diminished or
    the particles are caused to become more spherical or rounded in shape
    without loss of metal therefrom and by means other than use of a mold or
    shaping surface therefore and in which the individual and separate
    identities of the particles are maintained.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass are generally directed to those
    processes in which heat is employed to soften the particles so as to permit
    the internal cohesive forces of the particles to effect the reshaping as
    defined.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, particularly subclass 513 for processes of
    treating loose metal particles to modify or maintain internal physical
    structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical properties thereof.  In this
    context, it is important to note that spheroidizing, in terms of
    microstructure, is a Class 148 operation and that spheroidizing of Class 75
    refers to the macrostructure.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 15 for spheroidizing or rounding of solid, nonmetallic particles.
    Patents having claims to spheroidizing or rounding of solid metal particles
    and claims to spheroidizing or rounding of solid, nonmetal particles or
    patents having generic claims with a disclosure to spheroidizing or
    rounding of solid, metal particles and to spheroidizing or rounding of
    solid, nonmetallic particles will go as originals to Class 264 and a
    cross-reference will be placed in Class 75.


CLS 75/343
TXT Producing or purifying free metal powder or producing or purifying alloys
    in powder form (i.e., named or of size up to 1000 microns in its largest
    dimension):

    Process under subclass 330 in which a free metal powder is produced or
    purified or in which alloys in powder form are produced or purified.

    (1)     Note.  In order for a patent to be classified in this subclass, or
    the subclasses hereunder indented, the claims or disclosure must
    specifically state that a powder is produced or is purified.  A
    "precipitate" is not considered to be a "powder" for purposes of
    classification in these subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  "Powder" is defined as a mass of particles, that is,
    portions of matter so small that they are not ordinarily handled as
    individual units.  According to Metals Handbook, 8th Edition, 1961, Volume
    I, page 28, metallic powders then used in powder metallurgy had a particle
    size up to 1,000 microns in their largest dimension, as determined by
    screens or other suitable instruments.  Powder particles generally are
    distinguished from filamentary particles in that their shape and
    length-to-diameter ratio are such that in the dry state the particles will
    not hold together as a coherent article without the application of pressure
    or heat, that is, will not become entangled.

    (3)     Note.  If a patent states that a "powder" is produced or purified,
    the patent is to be placed here regardless of any designation of the size
    of the "powder".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    711,    for processes in which nonmetallic material which is liquid under
    standard conditions is used to form a precipitate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, especially subclasses 75, 87, 205, and 921,
    for processes and non-coating apparatus for growing therein-defined
    single-crystal of all types of materials, including metals, which are in
    the form of whiskers.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 240+ for processes in which a reactive
    coating is produced on solid metal.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclass 11.5 for processes in which a powder
    metal or powder alloy is subjected to working and heat treatment.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclass 126.1 for processes in which a
    particulate metal or particulate alloy is subjected to heat treatment.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, subclasses 30+ for processes which
    include preliminary significant treatment, preparation, or manufacture of
    the powder, prior to any compacting or sintering.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 212+, for processes in which a
    particulate metal or particulate alloy is coated.


CLS 75/344
TXT Radioactive:

    Process under Subclass 343 in which the free metal or alloy or metallic
    composition is radioactive.


CLS 75/345
TXT Utilizing electrothermic, magnetic, or wave energy:

    Process under subclass 343 in which electrothermic, magnetic, or wave
    energy is used.


CLS 75/346
TXT Utilizing plasma:

    Process under subclass 345 in which a wholly or partially charged mixture
    of gaseous ions and electrons (i.e., plasma) is the source of energy.


CLS 75/347
TXT Utilizing magnetism:

    Process under subclass 345 in which magnetism is used.


CLS 75/348
TXT Producing or purifying named magnetic material:

    Process under subclass 343 in which a named magnetic material (i.e., the
    magnetic properties are specified) is purified without modifying or
    altering the magnetic properties or is produced.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclass 105 for processes in which the material
    is in particulate form at the time its magnetic properties are altered, as
    well as at the end of the process.


CLS 75/349
TXT Using Phosphorus(P), Boron(B), or Silicon(Si) or compound thereof:

    Process under subclass 348 in which Phosphorus(P), Boron(B) or Silicon(Si)
    or compound thereof is used.


CLS 75/350
TXT Using Alkaline earth metal or compound thereof:

    Process under subclass 348 in which an Alkaline earth metal (i.e.,
    Calcium(Ca), Strontium(Sr), Barium(Ba)) or compound thereof is used.


CLS 75/351
TXT Producing alloy:

    Process under subclass 343 in which an alloy is produced in powder form.

    (1)     Note.  Patents which claim both a process of making an alloy and a
    process of making a powder alloy are classified as originals in Class 75
    and a cross-reference will be placed in Class 420.


CLS 75/352
TXT Including comminution:

    Process under subclass 351 in which comminution is used in the production
    of the powder form.


CLS 75/353
TXT Utilizing scrap material:

    Process under subclass 343 in which scrap material is used as a starting
    material.


CLS 75/354
TXT Including comminution:

    Process under subclass 343 in which a liquid mass or solid is comminuted to
    obtain a discrete powder form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331+,   for processes of producing solid particulate free metal directly
    from liquid metal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 1+ for
    processes of comminuting a solid without a metallurgical step.


CLS 75/355
TXT Directly from liquid mass (e.g., by atomizing, etc.):

    Process under subclass 354 in which a liquid solution or dispersion is
    comminuted to form discrete powder and is solidified in its comminuted
    form.  A reduction of a metal compound to free metal can occur at any stage
    of the process.


CLS 75/356
TXT And shaping or sintering prior to comminution:

    Process under subclass 354 in which the solid is shaped or sintered prior
    to comminution.


CLS 75/357
TXT With step at 300 degrees C or greater:

    Process under subclass 354 in which at least one process step is performed
    at a temperature of 300 degrees C or greater.


CLS 75/358
TXT Use of salt bath:

    Process under subclass 357 in which a salt melt is used.


CLS 75/359
TXT Reduction:

    Process under subclass 357 in which a metal compound is reduced to free
    metal.


CLS 75/360
TXT Use of gas:

    Process under subclass 357 in which gas is used.


CLS 75/361
TXT Using nonmetallic material which is liquid under standard conditions:

    Process under subclass 354 in which at least one process step is performed
    using a nonmetallic material which is liquid under standard conditions.


CLS 75/362
TXT Decomposition of organo-compound containing metal or metal carbonyl:

    Process under subclass 343 in which an organo-compound containing metal or
    a metal carbonyl is reduced to form a free metal powder.


CLS 75/363
TXT At 300 degrees C or greater:

    Process under subclass 343 in which at least one process step is performed
    at a temperature of 300 degrees C or greater.


CLS 75/364
TXT Combined with step at less than 300 degrees C using nonmetallic material
    which is liquid under standard conditions:

    Process under subclass 363 in which at least one step is performed at less
    than 300 degrees C using a nonmetallic material which is liquid under
    standard conditions.


CLS 75/365
TXT Step at 300 degrees C or greater after step at less than 300  degrees C
    using nonmetallic material which is liquid under standard conditions:

    Process under subclass 364 in which at least two distinct process steps are
    performed. The process step at less than 300 degrees C using a nonmetallic
    material which is liquid under standard conditions precedes the process
    step in which the temperature is 300 degrees C or greater.


CLS 75/366
TXT Utilizing a fluidized bed:

    Process under subclass 363 in which a material undergoing treatment is in a
    highly dispersed state in a gaseous medium.


CLS 75/367
TXT Vaporizing or condensing free metal:

    Process under subclass 363 in which the metal or alloy or metallic
    composition is vaporized or condensed.


CLS 75/368
TXT Settling of powder in molten metal or salt bath:

    Process under subclass 363 in which a free metal settles as a powder from a
    molten metal or salt bath.


CLS 75/369
TXT Purifying powdered metal or reducing powdered metal compound to free metal:

    Process under subclass 363 in which powdered metal is purified or a
    powdered metal compound is reduced.


CLS 75/370
TXT Using nonmetallic material which is liquid under standard conditions:

    Process under subclass 343 in which a nonmetallic material which is liquid
    under standard conditions is used.


CLS 75/371
TXT And settling of free metal from solution:

    Process under subclass 370 in which a free metal settles as a powder from a
    solution.


CLS 75/372
TXT Displacing by another metal (i.e., electromotive series):

    Process under subclass 371 in which the settling of free metal powder
    occurs by displacement of a first metal in a compound by a second metal
    which is more positive in the electromotive series than the first metal.


CLS 75/373
TXT Copper(Cu) recovered:

    Process under subclass 371 in which the metal that is recovered by
    displacement is Copper (Cu).


CLS 75/374
TXT Nickel(Ni) or Cobalt(Co) recovered:

    Process under subclass 371 in which the metal that is recovered by
    displacement is Nickel(Ni) or Cobalt(Co).


CLS 75/375
TXT Process control responsive to sensed condition:

    Process under subclass 330 in which the operation is regulated by
    perceiving a characteristic or a change in a characteristic of the material
    or the apparatus and implementing an action in the process based upon the
    measured characteristic.


CLS 75/376
TXT Removing material from process to sense condition:

    Process under subclass 375 in which a sample is taken from the process to
    determine a characteristic or a change in a characteristic of the material
    in order to regulate the process.


CLS 75/377
TXT Material removed is molten metal:

    Process under subclass 376 in which the sample taken from the process is
    molten metal.


CLS 75/378
TXT Pressure sensed:

    Process under subclass 375 in which the pressure of the material is
    determined.


CLS 75/379
TXT Of feed gas:

    Process under subclass 378 in which the pressure of a gas being fed to the
    process is determined.


CLS 75/380
TXT Temperature sensed:

    Process under subclass 375 in which the temperature of the material is
    determined.


CLS 75/381
TXT Of waste gas:

    Process under subclass 380 in which the temperature of the waste gas is
    determined.


CLS 75/382
TXT Of molten metal:

    Process under subclass 380 in which the temperature of the molten metal is
    determined.


CLS 75/383
TXT Of sintered material:

    Process under subclass 380 in which the temperature of the sintered
    material is determined.


CLS 75/384
TXT Composition sensed:

    Process under subclass 375 in which the composition of the material is
    determined.


CLS 75/385
TXT Of waste gas:

    Process under subclass 384 in which the composition of the off-gas is
    determined.


CLS 75/386
TXT Characteristic of treated material sensed (e.g., density, etc.):

    Process under subclass 375 in which a physical or mechanical characteristic
    of the treated material is determined.


CLS 75/387
TXT Flow rate sensed:

    Process under subclass 375 in which the flow rate of the material is
    determined.


CLS 75/388
TXT Preparing for amalgamation, preparing and amalgamating or breaking amalgam
    to produce free metal:

    Process under subclass 330 which is a (1) preparatory chemical process for
    producing an intermediate for amalgamation, (2) preparatory chemical
    process followed by amalgamation or (3) chemical or physiochemical process
    of breaking the amalgam thus formed to liberate the desired free metal
    (e.g., sublimation of mercury, dissolution or displacement of the metal
    from the amalgam, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  The term amalgamation under this subclass and subclasses
    indented hereunder is restricted to a species of amalgamation which
    requires the use of liquid metal (e.g., mercury, lead, zinc, alloy, etc.)
    to collect, to alloy or to adhere to a desired free metal without
    heat-melting the desired free metal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, appropriate subclasses for electrolytic
    treatment of noble metal containing material or solutions thereof.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, for the "so called"
    amalgamation processes for separation, per se, of metals (e.g., noble
    metal, etc.) from metal containing materials (e.g., ore, etc.).

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, for chemical processes of
    treating noble metal containing materials and including treating amalgam or
    amalgamation steps that result in a metal compound as a product and without
    a free metal product.


CLS 75/389
TXT And displacing with a metal other than Mercury(Hg):

    Process under subclass 388 wherein a more electropositive free metal
    displaces a less electropositive metal from solution in a free metal form,
    while the more electropositive metal is not Mercury(Hg).

    (1)     Note.  See the definitions of the class for displacement and the
    electromotive series, per se.


CLS 75/390
TXT Utilizing a Halogen containing agent:

    Process under subclass 388 wherein a Halogen containing agent (e.g.,
    Chlorine, Hydrochloric acid, Sodium iodide, etc.) is used at any stage in
    the process.


CLS 75/391
TXT Utilizing a Nitrogen(N) containing agent:

    Process under subclass 388 wherein a Nitrogen(N) containing agent (e.g.,
    salt peter, Nitric acid, Ammonium sulfate, Nitrogen dioxide, etc.) is used
    at any stage in the process.


CLS 75/392
TXT Producing or treating free metal:

    Process under subclass 330 wherein elemental metal is produced from metal
    compounds, such as ore, or wherein elemental metal is treated by a process
    not provided for elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses provide for a process of
    removing a component from a pre-existing alloy (e.g., purification, etc.).

    (2)     Note.  Processes in which metal is treated in the molten state are
    specifically included hereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, appropriate subclasses for processes of treating
    solid or semi-solid metal to modify or maintain the internal physical
    structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical properties of metal.  However,
    if metal casting, welding, machining, or working is involved, there is a
    requirement of significant heat treatment as described in section III, A,
    of the Class 148 definition.


CLS 75/393
TXT Utilizing Radioactive material, producing or treating Radioactive metal:

    Process under subclass 392 in which a Radioactive material is used to
    produce or to treat a free metal, in which a Radioactive metal (i.e.,
    Technetium(Tc), Promethium(Pm), Polonium(Po), Francium(Fr), Radium(Ra),
    Actinium(Ac), Thorium(Th), Protactinium(Pa), Uranium(U), Neptunium(Np),
    Plutonium(Pu), Americium(Am), Curium(Cm), Berkelium(Bk), Californium(Cf),
    Einsteinium(Es), Fermium(Fm), Mendelevium(Md), Nobelium(No),
    Lawrencium(Lr), Unnilquadium(Unq), Unnilpentium(Unp), Unnilhexium(Unh)) is
    produced, or in which a metal that contains a Radioactive metal is treated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, for processes for making a
    Radioactive alloy.


CLS 75/394
TXT Thorium(Th):

    Process under subclass 393 in which Thorium (Th) is produced, a metal that
    contains Thorium is treated, or a material that contains Thorium is used to
    produce or to treat a free metal.


CLS 75/395
TXT Reduction:

    Process under subclass 394 in which a Thorium(Th) compound is reduced to
    metal.


CLS 75/396
TXT Plutonium(Pu):

    Process under subclass 393 in which Plutonium(Pu) is produced, a metal that
    contains Plutonium is used to produce or to treat a free metal.


CLS 75/397
TXT Reduction:

    Process under subclass 396 in which a Plutonium(Pu) compound is reduced to
    metal.


CLS 75/398
TXT Uranium(U):

    Process under subclass 393 in which Uranium(U) is produced, a metal that
    contains Uranium is treated, or a material that contains Uranium is used to
    produce or to treat a free metal.


CLS 75/399
TXT Reduction:

    Process under subclass 398 in which a Uranium(U) compound is reduced to
    metal.


CLS 75/400
TXT Free metal production from sea nodules:

    Process under subclass 392 wherein elemental metal is produced from
    metalliferous lumps found on the bed of the sea.  These lumps are usually
    high in manganese.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 49+, for a process of
    obtaining a manganese compound or manganese values from sea nodules without
    reduction to elemental metal.


CLS 75/401
TXT Treating multi-component metal-containing scrap having an integral
    substrate to separate metal therefrom by temperature modification or
    chemical process at 300 degrees C or greater wherein at least one metal
    remains solid during separation:

    Process under subclass 392 in which a multi-component metal-containing
    scrap having an integral substrate is separated to recover metal.  During
    the separation at least one metal remains solid.  The separation is
    performed by changing the temperature of the scrap or by chemically
    processing the scrap at 300 degrees C or greater.

    (1)     Note.  The following criteria will be used to define the word
    "scrap":

    (A)     If a patent refers to a material as scrap, then the material will
    be assumed to be scrap.

    (B)     If a patent does not refer to a material as scrap (e.g., metal
    borings, tin cans, etc.); but it can be inferred from the patent that
    metal, not a specific article, is recovered, then the material will be
    assumed to be scrap.

    (C)     If it is unclear as to the nature of the material being treated
    (e.g., tin plate, etc.), the material will be assumed to be scrap.

    (D)     If there is a positive statement indicating that an "article" is
    recovered, then the "article" is not "scrap" and the patent is classified
    elsewhere (e.g., removing metal compounds from engine parts, removing tin
    from a can to reuse the can, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    711+,   for processes of recovering metal from multi-component
    metal-containing scrap having an integral substrate in which a nonmetallic
    material which is liquid under standard conditions is used.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 403.1+, for separation of materials one
    from another in which the separation is done to salvage a portion of a
    specific article for reuse.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, for processes of
    separating metal from metal or metal from nonmetal to clean a specific
    article for reuse (e.g., the cleaning of gun bores by the removal of metal
    fouling the same, etc.).  If a base is cleaned and the removed metal is
    recovered, the original will go to Class 75 and a cross-reference will be
    placed in Class 134.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 90+, for detinning in
    which a Tin(Sn) compound is produced.

    521,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 40+, for processes
    of treating scrap or waste product containing solid organic polymer to
    recover a solid polymer therefrom.


CLS 75/402
TXT Utilizing molten salt bath:

    Process under subclass 401 in which a molten salt bath is used in the
    separation.


CLS 75/403
TXT Removing nonmetal from metal:

    Process under subclass 401 in which a material other than free metal is
    removed from metal.


CLS 75/404
TXT Separating liquid metal by centrifuging:

    Process under subclass 392 in which an apparatus consisting essentially of
    a compartment spun about a central axis is used to separate liquid metal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 114+, for use of centrifugal force when
    shaping liquid metal against a forming surface.


CLS 75/405
TXT Removing gas from liquid metal by use of gas permeable membrane:

    Process under subclass 392 in which  the liquid metal containing a gas is
    contacted with one side of a gas permeable membrane to selectively permeate
    the gas through the membrane to remove the gas from the liquid metal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclass 16, for processes of removing a gas from a
    liquid by use of a gas permeable membrane.


CLS 75/406
TXT Adsorbing impurity from vaporous or liquid metal:

    Process under subclass 392 in which a contaminant is removed from vaporous
    or liquid metal by contacting the metal with a material that has an
    affinity for the contaminant such that the contaminant adheres to the
    reactive surfaces of the material.


CLS 75/407
TXT Filtering vaporous or liquid metal:

    Process under subclass 392 in which vaporous or liquid metal passes through
    a filter.


CLS 75/408
TXT Alkali metal, singly or in combination:

    Process under subclass 407 in which the vaporous or liquid metal contains
    over 50 percent by weight of an Alkali metal (i.e., Lithium(Li),
    Sodium(Na), Potassium(K), Rubidium(Rb), Cesium(Cs)), singly or in
    combination.


CLS 75/409
TXT Magnesium(Mg):

    Process under subclass 407 in which the vaporous or liquid metal contains
    over 50 percent by weight Magnesium(Mg).


CLS 75/410
TXT Noble metal, singly or in combination:

    Process under subclass 407 in which the vaporous or liquid contains over 50
    percent by weight of a Noble metal (i.e., Ruthenium(Ru), Rhodium(Rd),
    Palladium(Pd), Osmium(Os), Iridium(Ir), Platinum(Pt), Silver(Ag),
    Gold(Au)), singly or in combination.


CLS 75/411
TXT Copper(Cu):

    Process under subclass 407 in which the vaporous or liquid metal contains
    over 50 percent by weight Copper(Cu).


CLS 75/412
TXT Aluminum(Al):

    Process under subclass 407 in which the vaporous or liquid metal contains
    over 50 percent by weight Aluminum(Al).


CLS 75/413
TXT From metal carbonyl or Carbon monoxide complex:

    Process under subclass 392 in which free metal is obtained from a metal
    carbonyl or a Carbon monoxide complex.


CLS 75/414
TXT At 300 degrees C or greater (e.g., pyrometallurgy, etc.):

    Process under subclass 392 of producing or treating free metal wherein at
    least one step of the process takes place at a temperature of over 300
    degrees C.

    (1)     Note. This and indented subclasses contain subject matter often
    referred to in the art as pyrometallurgy.


CLS 75/415
TXT Foam:

    Process under subclass 414 which produces a metal product which has a mass
    of pores.

    (1)     Note.  The pores may either be interconnected or closed cells.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 613 for porous
    or foamed metallic stock material.


CLS 75/416
TXT Combined with step at less than 300 degrees C using nonmetallic material
    which is liquid under standard conditions (e.g., hydrometallurgy, etc.):

    Process under subclass 414 wherein a step at over 300 degrees C is combined
    with a step at less than 300 degrees C the latter step employing a
    nonmetallic material which is a liquid under standard conditions.  The
    steps may take place in any order.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass generally provides for a step of
    pyrometallurgy combined with a step of hydrometallurgy.


CLS 75/417
TXT Obtaining metal from photographic waste:

    Process under subclass 416 wherein the source of metal is photographic
    waste.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of photographic waste are scrap film and spent
    photographic solutions.  The metal recovered is usually silver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, for a process which includes a photographic step or which prepares
    a composition for that class combined with a step of recovering metal.  An
    example of a process for Class 430 is a process of recovering silver from a
    photographic developing solution to regenerate the solution for further use.


CLS 75/418
TXT Obtaining metal from electrolytic slime:

    Process under subclass 416 wherein the source of metal is the slime that
    accumulates on the bottom of electrolytic cells during electrolysis.


CLS 75/419
TXT Step at less than 300 degrees C using nonmetallic material which is liquid
    under standard conditions after a step at 300 degrees C or greater:

    Process under subclass 416 wherein a step at less than 300 degrees C using
    nonmetallic material which is liquid under standard conditions occurs after
    a step at 300 degrees C or greater.


CLS 75/420
TXT Step at less than 300 degrees C using nonmetallic material which is liquid
    under standard conditions is reduction to free metal:

    Process under subclass 419 wherein reduction to free metal occurs in a step
    at less than 300 degrees C using nonmetallic material which is liquid under
    standard conditions, which step is after a step at over 300 degrees C.


CLS 75/421
TXT Noble metal:

    Process under subclass 420 wherein the free metal produced is a Noble metal.


CLS 75/422
TXT Silver(Ag):

    Process under subclass 421 wherein the Noble metal produced is Silver(Ag).


CLS 75/423
TXT Gold(Au):

    Process under subclass 421 wherein the Noble metal produced is Gold(Au).


CLS 75/424
TXT Copper(Cu):

    Process under subclass 420 wherein the free metal produced is Copper(Cu).


CLS 75/425
TXT Iron(Fe), Cobalt(Co), or Nickel(Ni):

    Process under subclass 420 wherein the free metal produced is Iron(Fe),
    Cobalt(Co), or Nickel(Ni).


CLS 75/426
TXT Noble metal obtained:

    Process under subclass 416 wherein the metal obtained is a Noble metal.


CLS 75/427
TXT Silver(Ag):

    Process under subclass 426 wherein the metal obtained is Silver(Ag).


CLS 75/428
TXT Gold(Au):

    Process under subclass 426 wherein the metal obtained is Gold(Au).


CLS 75/429
TXT Copper(Cu) obtained:

    Process under subclass 416 wherein the metal obtained is Copper(Cu).


CLS 75/430
TXT Iron(Fe), Cobalt(Co), or Nickel(Ni) obtained:

    Process under subclass 416 wherein the metal obtained is Iron(Fe),
    Cobalt(Co), or Nickel(Ni).


CLS 75/431
TXT Zinc(Zn), Cadmium(Cd), or Mercury(Hg) obtained:

    Process under subclass 416 wherein the metal obtained is Zinc(Zn),
    Cadmium(Cd), or Mercury(Hg).


CLS 75/432
TXT Tin(Sn) or Lead(Pb) obtained:

    Process under subclass 416 wherein the metal obtained is Tin(Sn) or
    Lead(Pb).


CLS 75/433
TXT Iron(Fe):

    Process under subclass 414 in which Iron(Fe) is produced or a metal that
    contains over 50 percent by weight Iron is treated.

    (1)     Note.  The term "reducing" as used below in indented subclasses
    means that over 50 percent of the metallic Iron produced in the process
    must be obtained by reduction of an Iron compound (e.g., ore, etc.).

    (2)     Note.  This and indented subclasses provide for treating a metal
    that contains over 50 percent by weight Iron in the molten state and
    melting a metal that contains over 50 percent by weight Iron.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass contains patents drawn to processes of
    preheating ferrous scrap for subsequent metallurgical processing without
    actual melting.

    (4)     Note.  Production of a ferroalloy, such as ferromanganese,
    ferrochromium, or nickeliferous pig Iron, where the percentage of the
    metals is unspecified will go as originals to the nonferrous metal subclass
    regardless of the fact that Iron(Fe) may be produced in the production of
    the ferroalloy.  If the percentages of metals are specified the original
    will go to Class 420, Alloys or Metallic Compositions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, appropriate subclasses for processes of treating
    solid or semi-solid metal to modify or maintain the internal physical
    structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical properties of metal.  See
    Class 148, subclass 512, for processes including surface melting of the
    solid or semi-solid metal.  However, if casting, welding, machining, or
    working is involved, there is a requirement of significant heat treatment
    as described in section III, A, of the Class 148 definition.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, subclass 88 for process of
    preparing ferrophosphorus whether or not any proportions are specified.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, subclass 117 for processes of
    preparing ferrosilicon containing over 50 percent Iron or wherein no
    relative proportions of Iron and Silicon are disclosed.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, subclass 121 for processes of
    preparing ferroboron containing over 50 percent Iron or wherein no relative
    proportions of Iron and Boron are specified.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, subclass 578 for processes of
    preparing ferrosilicon containing over 50 percent Silicon.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, subclass 591 for processes of
    preparing ferroboron containing over 50 percent Boron.


CLS 75/434
TXT With concurrent production of hydraulic cement:

    Process under subclass 433 wherein an inorganic material intended to harden
    by addition of water is produced concurrently with Iron(Fe).


CLS 75/435
TXT With concurrent production of Titanium dioxide:

    Process under subclass 433 wherein Titanium dioxide (TiO2) is produced
    concurrently with Iron(Fe).


CLS 75/436
TXT With consolidation (e.g., pelletizing, etc.) of solid metallic Iron(Fe)
    product after reduction:

    Process under subclass 433 wherein a solid elemental Iron(Fe) containing
    product is consolidated (e.g., pelletized, briquetted, etc.) after being
    reduced.  This is usually done to decrease surface area and thus inhibit
    oxidation.


CLS 75/437
TXT Reducing Iron(Fe) halide:

    Process under subclass 433 wherein a compound of Iron(Fe) and Halogen
    (e.g., Iron halide, etc.) is reduced to yield metallic Iron.


CLS 75/438
TXT Making wrought Iron(Fe):

    Process under subclass 433 for making the commercial product called
    "wrought Iron(Fe)" which is a very low Carbon(C) (less than 0.1%) Iron
    intimately admixed with a slag.  The conventional process heats molten pig
    Iron in a reverberatory furnace.  The Carbon is burned out causing the Iron
    to become pasty, at which point it is rolled into balls and  worked to
    remove excess slag.


CLS 75/439
TXT Pouring molten Iron(Fe) into molten slag (i.e., aston process):

    Process under subclass 438 wherein molten low Carbon(C) Iron(Fe) is poured
    into molten slag.  The Iron becomes intimately mixed with the slag and then
    settles, carrying with it some slag.  Liquid slag is poured off and the
    pasty Iron-slag mixture is worked to yield wrought Iron.


CLS 75/440
TXT Utilizing moving hearth:

    Process under subclass 438 wherein the Iron(Fe) is treated on a moving
    hearth (e.g., rocking, etc.).


CLS 75/441
TXT Directly from Iron(Fe) compound only (no metallic Iron):

    Process under subclass 438 wherein over 50 percent of the Iron(Fe) in the
    final wrought Iron product is added to the process as an Iron compound,
    such as ore, instead of in the metallic state.


CLS 75/442
TXT In moving furnace:

    Process under subclass 441 in which the wrought Iron(Fe) is prepared in a
    furnace which moves during the process (e.g., rocking, rotating, etc.).


CLS 75/443
TXT Reducing in gaseous suspension:

    Process under subclass 433 wherein an Iron(Fe) compound, generally in
    particulate form, is reduced to elemental Iron while suspended in a gas.


CLS 75/444
TXT Fluidized bed:

    Process under subclass 443 wherein particulate Iron(Fe) compound (e.g.,
    ore, etc.) is kept in motion and suspended by the upward flow of gas, the
    suspension acting much like a fluid.


CLS 75/445
TXT With melting of Iron(Fe):

    Process under subclass 444 which includes melting of the metallic Iron(Fe)
    produced.


CLS 75/446
TXT Outside the fluidized bed:

    Process under subclass 445 wherein the metallic Iron(Fe) produced in the
    fluidized bed is melted outside the fluidized bed.


CLS 75/447
TXT With solid in fluidized bed in addition to reducible Iron(Fe) compound:

    Process under subclass 444 wherein the fluidized bed contains a solid
    material in addition to the reducible Iron(Fe) compound.


CLS 75/448
TXT Carbon(C):

    Process under subclass 447 wherein the solid is Carbon(C).


CLS 75/449
TXT Generated in situ:

    Process under subclass 448 wherein the Carbon(C) is not added in solid
    form, but solid Carbon is generated in the fluidized bed by chemical
    reaction.

    (1)     Note.  The Carbon may be generated by cracking natural gas.

    (2)     Note.  To be placed in this subclass there must be a specific claim
    that solid Carbon is generated in the fluidized bed.  Cases of doubt will
    be resolved in favor of placement in another subclass under 444.


CLS 75/450
TXT Using plural fluidized bed furnaces:

    Process under subclass 444 in which the solid material passes from one
    fluidized bed furnace to another.


CLS 75/451
TXT Using plural fluidized bed zones within a furnace:

    Process under subclass 444 which employs two or more separate fluidized bed
    zones within a single outer shell.


CLS 75/452
TXT Solid product produced (without melting):

    Process under subclass 443 in which solid elemental Iron(Fe) is produced
    without melting.


CLS 75/453
TXT Cyclone apparatus used:

    Process under subclass 443 wherein gas containing a suspension of Iron
    compound or reduced Iron compound is introduced into an apparatus
    tangentially so as to create a swirl.  This apparatus may be used to effect
    reduction or to separate the Iron(Fe) produced from the gas.


CLS 75/454
TXT Using same inlet to feed solid and gas:

    Process under subclass 443 wherein the solid to be reduced and a reducing
    gas are fed into the apparatus, where reduction occurs, through the same
    inlet.


CLS 75/455
TXT Inlet is a burner:

    Process under subclass 454 wherein the gas is combustible and is ignited
    immediately upon leaving the inlet.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclass include so called "flash
    smelting".


CLS 75/456
TXT Burner is horizontal:

    Process under subclass 455 wherein the inlet projects the solid-gas mixture
    into the apparatus horizontally.


CLS 75/457
TXT Inlet feeds upwardly:

    Process under subclass 454 wherein the gas and solid are fed to the
    reducing apparatus in an upward direction.


CLS 75/458
TXT Blast furnace reduction to produce molten Iron(Fe):

    Process under subclass 433 wherein an Iron(Fe) compound is reduced in a
    shaft furnace with solid reductant, normally coke, with a preheated forced
    blast of gas containing gaseous Oxygen, normally air.  A blast furnace is
    operated in a continuous manner, with additional burden (i.e, solid Iron
    compound, reductant, and flux) being added at the top of the furnace as the
    burden is consumed.  Preheated gas containing gaseous Oxygen (the "blast")
    is added under pressure through tuyeres just above the level of molten Iron
    and slag produced by the reduction.


CLS 75/459
TXT Using additive to the blast:

    Process under subclass 458 wherein an additional substance other than
    ambient air is intentionally added to the blast forced under pressure
    through the tuyeres.


CLS 75/460
TXT Carbonaceous:

    Process under subclass 459 wherein the added substance contains Carbon(C)
    in any form (free or combined).


CLS 75/461
TXT Slurry of solid in liquid:

    Process under subclass 460 wherein the carbonaceous additive is a solid
    suspended in a liquid, one or both of the solid and liquid containing
    Carbon(C) in any form (free or combined).


CLS 75/462
TXT Liquid:

    Process under subclass 460 wherein the carbonaceous additive is a liquid at
    ordinary room temperature.


CLS 75/463
TXT Gaseous:

    Process under subclass 460 in which the carbonaceous additive is a gas at
    ordinary temperature and pressure.


CLS 75/464
TXT Recycled off gas:

    Process under subclass 463 wherein the carbonaceous gas is taken from the
    top of the blast furnace and recycled to the tuyeres.


CLS 75/465
TXT Water:

    Process under subclass 459 wherein water is added to the blast.

    (1)     Note.  The water may be added as a liquid or a vapor.


CLS 75/466
TXT Oxygen enrichment:

    Process under subclass 459 wherein the blast contains more gaseous oxygen
    than the ambient air.


CLS 75/467
TXT Tapping molten product:

    Process under subclass 458 including a step of tapping a molten product
    from the blast furnace (e.g., molten Iron, slag, etc.).


CLS 75/468
TXT Top gas recovery:

    Process under subclass 458 which includes a step of handling, treating, or
    using the gas which comes off the top of the blast furnace after passing
    through the burden (e.g., by recovering a byproduct, removing pollutants,
    or recovering heat, etc.).


CLS 75/469
TXT Specified method of charging burden:

    Process under subclass 458 in which the charging of solid material at the
    top of the furnace is recited in more detail than a single step of nominal
    charging.


CLS 75/470
TXT Defined composition of slag:

    Process under subclass 458 wherein the composition of the molten slag
    produced in the process is of a defined composition other than nominal
    "slag."


CLS 75/471
TXT Defined composition of reductant:

    Process under subclass 458 wherein the composition of the reductant of the
    Iron(Fe) compound is defined as other than nominal coke.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    460,    for a process of adding carbonaceous material through the tuyeres
    with the oxygen containing blast, which material may be a reductant.


CLS 75/472
TXT Defined composition of Iron(Fe) source:

    Process under subclass 458 wherein the composition of the Iron(Fe) source
    is specified.

    (1)     Note.  Mere nominal "ore" is excluded.


CLS 75/473
TXT Reduction in closed retort (e.g., Hoganas process, etc.):

    Process under subclass 433 wherein no substance is added to the batch
    during the reduction (e.g., heating a closed mixture of ore and Carbon(C),
    etc.).

    (1)     Note.  The closed retort may be a container, as in the Hoganas
    process.


CLS 75/474
TXT Reduction in rotary kiln:

    Process under subclass 433 wherein a reducible Iron(Fe) compound is reduced
    to metallic Iron in an approximately cylindrical vessel rotating on its
    axis.  The axis is horizontal or inclined less than 45 degrees from
    horizontal.  The vessel rotates in only one direction through an angle of
    over 360 degrees during the reduction and rotates substantially
    continuously.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    484,    for reduction in an apparatus which does not rotate over 360
    degrees or  oscillates back and forth during the reduction.


CLS 75/475
TXT With melting of Iron(Fe) product:

    Process under subclass 474 wherein the metallic Iron(Fe) product is melted.


CLS 75/476
TXT Iron(Fe) product melted within rotary kiln:

    Process under subclass 475 wherein the Iron(Fe) product is melted within
    the rotary kiln.


CLS 75/477
TXT Introducing solid reductant into rotary kiln:

    Process under subclass 474 wherein a solid substance which reduces an
    Iron(Fe) compound to metallic Iron is introduced into the rotary kiln.

    (1)     Note.  The solid reductant may be charged by itself or in admixture
    with other ingredients.


CLS 75/478
TXT Solid reductant is recycled:

    Process under subclass 477 wherein solid reductant discharged from the
    rotary kiln is recycled back into the rotary kiln.

    (1)     Note.  The solid reductant is usually discharged from the kiln with
    Iron(Fe), separated from the Iron(Fe), and then recycled.


CLS 75/479
TXT Any part of the charge is consolidated by agglomerating, compacting,
    indurating, or sintering (e.g., pelletized ore, flux, or reductant, etc.):

    Process under subclass 477 wherein any or all components of the material
    charged into the rotary kiln are consolidated by agglomerating, compacting,
    indurating, or sintering.

    (1)     Note.  The components such as ore, flux, or reductant may be
    separately consolidated or several ingredients may be combined and
    consolidated together (e.g., pellets of combined ore and coke, etc.).


CLS 75/480
TXT Reducible Iron(Fe) compound and solid reductant fed through same end of
    rotary kiln:

    Process under subclass 477 wherein solid reductant and reducible Iron(Fe)
    compound are fed into the rotary kiln from the same end of the kiln.


CLS 75/481
TXT Mixed prior to charging:

    Process under subclass 480 in which reducible Iron(Fe) compound and solid
    reductant are mixed together prior to charging and the mixture is then
    charged.


CLS 75/482
TXT With generation of gaseous reductant outside rotary kiln:

    Process under subclass 474 employing a gaseous reductant which is generated
    outside the rotary kiln in a separate device (e.g., coal gasifier, etc.).


CLS 75/483
TXT Superposed multiple hearth reduction:

    Process under Subclass 433 in which a reducible Iron(Fe) compound is passed
    downwardly from one hearth to another hearth located immediately below
    during its reduction to metallic Iron.  Usually there are three or more
    superposed hearths with the reducible Iron compound passing downward from
    hearth to hearth during the process.


CLS 75/484
TXT Moving furnace or hearth (e.g., moving belt, etc.):

    Process under subclass 433 which employs a furnace wherein the part
    containing or supporting the reducible Iron(Fe) compound moves during the
    reduction.  The movement need not be continuous, but may be intermittent
    only.

    (1)     Note.  The furnace or hearth must move during the reduction.
    Movement merely to charge or discharge the contents is not enough for this
    subclass and is placed below on another basis.

    (2)     Note.  If the part of the furnace which supports the reducible
    Iron(Fe) compound moves during the reduction, classification is proper
    thereunder even if the heating apparatus is stationary (e.g., charge on
    moving belt in furnace, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    473,    for batch reduction system wherein closed containers of reductant
    and reducible Iron compound are pushed through a kiln.


CLS 75/485
TXT Reduction in molten state:

    Process under subclass 484 wherein some material is molten during the
    reduction (e.g., slag, Iron, etc.) and ingredients for carrying out the
    reduction are added to the melt.


CLS 75/486
TXT Heating reduction zone by heat conducted through walls of zone:

    Process under subclass 433 wherein a reducible Iron(Fe) compound is reduced
    in a zone in which at least part of the heat required for the reduction is
    supplied by conduction through the walls of the zone (e.g., external
    heating of apparatus, etc.).


CLS 75/487
TXT Shaft furnace:

    Process under subclass 486 wherein the apparatus whose exterior is heated
    is a shaft furnace.


CLS 75/488
TXT Reduction to metallic Iron(Fe) within shaft furnace:

    Process under subclass 433 wherein an Iron(Fe) compound is reduced in a
    shaft furnace.


CLS 75/489
TXT Externally supplied gas reductant:

    Process under subclass 488 wherein a gaseous reductant is introduced into
    the shaft furnace from outside the furnace.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses do not exclude the presence of
    solid reductant in the shaft furnace as long as a gaseous reductant is also
    supplied to the furnace from outside.


CLS 75/490
TXT Solid Iron(Fe) produced within shaft furnace:

    Process under subclass 489 wherein an Iron(Fe) compound is reduced to solid
    metallic Iron within the shaft furnace without melting the so produced Iron.

    (1)     Note.  The processes in this and indented subclasses are sometimes
    referred to as "direct reduction".


CLS 75/491
TXT With melting Iron(Fe) product outside shaft furnace:

    Process under subclass 490 wherein the solid Iron(Fe) produced in the shaft
    furnace is melted outside the shaft furnace.


CLS 75/492
TXT With gasification of solid carbonaceous material in melt (e.g., coal, etc.):

    Process under subclass 491 wherein coal is added to the molten Iron(Fe) and
    a gas (usually Oxygen or air) is passed through the melt to convert the
    coal in the melt to a reducing gas which is then employed in the shaft
    furnace reduction.


CLS 75/493
TXT Using solid Carbon(C) to generate gas in separate furnace (e.g., Wiberg
    process, etc.):

    Process under subclass 490 wherein the gaseous reductant is manufactured
    from solid Carbon(C) in a furnace separate from the shaft furnace in which
    reduction to metallic Iron(Fe) takes place.


CLS 75/494
TXT Solid Carbon(C) is coal:

    Process under subclass 493 in which the solid Carbon(C) employed to
    generate reducing gas is coal.


CLS 75/495
TXT Direct addition of gas containing gaseous Oxygen or water to shaft furnace
    (e.g., continuous HyL process, etc.):

    Process under subclass 490 wherein a gas containing gaseous Oxygen or Water
    is added directly to the shaft furnace without being admixed with or
    reacted with another material before the addition.


CLS 75/496
TXT With reformation of reducing gas in separate furnace (e.g., Midrex process,
    etc.):

    Process under subclass 490 in which a reducing gas is reacted in a separate
    furnace to change its chemical composition prior to being introduced into
    the shaft furnace.

    (1)     Note.  As an example, Methane is reacted with Carbon dioxide to
    yield Carbon monoxide and Hydrogen.


CLS 75/497
TXT With plural reformers (e.g., Purofer process, etc.):

    Process under subclass 496 wherein two or more reforming furnaces are
    employed.


CLS 75/498
TXT With addition of steam to reformer (e.g., Armco process, etc.):

    Process under subclass 496 wherein steam is added to the reformer as a
    reactant.


CLS 75/499
TXT Molten Iron(Fe) produced in shaft furnace:

    Process under subclass 488 wherein the Iron(Fe) produced in the shaft
    furnace is melted in the shaft furnace.


CLS 75/500
TXT Reduction in molten state:

    Process under subclass 433 wherein some material is molten during the
    reduction (e.g., slag, Iron, etc.), and ingredients for carrying out the
    reaction are added to the melt.


CLS 75/501
TXT Gas injection below surface of melt:

    Process under subclass 500 wherein a gas is injected below the surface of
    the melt wherein reduction is taking place.


CLS 75/502
TXT Gas injection over surface of melt (e.g., as in reverberatory furnace,
    etc.):

    Process under subclass 500 wherein gas is passed over the surface of the
    melt.

    (1)     Note.  This gas may be a reducing flame as in a reverberatory
    furnace.


CLS 75/503
TXT Reduction in presence of solid Carbon(C) containing material (e.g., coke,
    coal, carbides, etc.):

    Process under subclass 433 wherein an Iron(Fe) compound is reduced to
    metallic Iron in the presence of a solid containing Carbon.  The Carbon may
    be either in elemental (e.g., coke, coal, etc.) or combined (e.g., carbide,
    etc.) form.


CLS 75/504
TXT Including consolidation of solid Carbon(C) containing material with
    reducible Iron(Fe) compound:

    Process under subclass 503 wherein the solid Carbon(C) containing material
    and a reducible Iron(Fe) compound are consolidated together before or
    during the reduction of the Iron compound.

    (1)     Note.  In some instances the Iron compound is only partially
    reduced and the resulting partially reduced consolidated product is
    intended to be used in the charge of a further reduction system (e.g., a
    blast furnace, etc.).


CLS 75/505
TXT Reduction with externally applied gas (e.g., batch HyL process, etc.):

    Process under subclass 433 wherein an Iron(Fe) compound is reduced to
    metallic Iron by a gas which is added to the Iron compound from outside the
    apparatus in which the Iron compound is reduced.

    (1)     Note.  Gas generated by in situ reactions within the apparatus
    containing the Iron compound is not "externally applied" for purposes of
    this class.


CLS 75/506
TXT Reduction in the presence of liquid carbonaceous reductant (e.g.,
    petroleum, pitch, etc.):

    Process under subclass 433 wherein an Iron(Fe) compound is reduced in the
    presence of a carbonaceous substance added in a liquid state to the
    apparatus containing the Iron compound.


CLS 75/507
TXT Melting Iron(Fe) or treating molten Iron:

    Process under subclass 433 wherein a metal that contains over 50 percent by
    weight Iron(Fe) is melted or is treated in the molten state (e.g., to
    purify it or to improve its properties, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  The solid Iron which is melted or the molten Iron which is
    treated is predominately (over 50 percent) in the elemental state at the
    start of the process.  The "reduction" subclasses above take processes
    wherein a charge which is predominately an Iron compound is reduced to the
    metallic state.  This and indented subclasses, however, will take a process
    of melting or treating a charge which is predominately metallic Iron even
    though some incidental reduction of an Iron compound takes place (e.g.,
    melting rusty scrap with reduction of the rust, treating pig Iron of high
    Carbon content with Iron oxide whereby the Iron oxide oxidizes the Carbon
    and is reduced to metallic Iron, etc.) as long as less than 50 percent of
    the Iron in the final product is produced by the incidental reduction.

    (2)     Note.  This and indented subclasses will take a process of removing
    a component from an Iron alloy to make another alloy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    433,    for a process of preheating Iron (e.g., preheating scrap for later
    melting, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, appropriate subclasses for processes of treating
    solid or semi-solid metal to modify or maintain the internal physical
    structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical properties of metal.  See
    Class 148, subclass 512, for processes of surface melting of the solid or
    semi-solid metal.  However, if metal casting, metal fusion, machining or
    working is involved, there is a requirement of significant heat treatment
    as described in section III, A, of the Class 148 definition.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, for a process of making an alloy
    by melting the ingredients together.


CLS 75/508
TXT Vacuum treatment of molten Iron(Fe):

    Process under subclass 507 wherein a molten metal that contains over 50
    percent by weight Iron(Fe) is treated in a gas pressure significantly less
    than one atmosphere pressure.

    (1)     Note.  The low pressure must be intentional in order to treat the
    molten metal.  Merely melting metal where atmospheric pressure is low will
    not cause a patent to be placed hereunder, unless the low pressure is
    intentionally employed to treat the molten metal.


CLS 75/509
TXT Free falling stream or spray of molten Iron(Fe):

    Process under subclass 508 wherein an unconfined stream or spray of a
    molten metal that contains over 50 percent by weight Iron(Fe) is treated in
    a vacuum.

    (1)     Note.  In a process for this subclass the stream or spray remains
    molten during treatment and then coalesces after treatment to form a pool
    of molten metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331+,   for a process wherein a spray of molten metal is solidified while
    falling and is recovered as solid particles of metal.


CLS 75/510
TXT Vacuum lift:

    Process under subclass 508 in which a vacuum causes a molten metal that
    contains over 50 percent by weight Iron(Fe) to be lifted above the level of
    the container in which it is held.

    (1)     Note.  A common arrangement is as shown:


CLS 75/511
TXT With addition of gas:

    Process under subclass 510 wherein a gas is intentionally added to the
    molten metal that contains over 50 percent by weight Iron(Fe) while it is
    being treated by lifting under a vacuum.

    (1)     Note.  The gas must be added intentionally, mere accidental leakage
    is ignored.  The amount of gas added is restricted so that the pressure of
    gas over the molten metal remains significantly under one atmosphere.


CLS 75/512
TXT With addition of gas:

    Process under subclass 508 wherein a gas is intentionally added to the
    molten metal that contains over 50 percent by weight Iron(Fe) while it is
    being treated under vacuum.

    (1)     Note.  The gas must be added intentionally, mere accidental leakage
    is ignored.  The amount of gas added is restricted so that the pressure of
    gas over the molten metal remains significantly under one atmosphere.


CLS 75/513
TXT In reverberatory furnace (e.g., open-hearth, Siemens-Martin, puddling,
    etc.):

    Process under subclass 507 which is carried out in a reverberatory furnace.
     A reverberatory furnace is one in which solid fuel is not burned in
    contact with the liquid or solid metal that contains over 50 percent by
    weight Iron(Fe).  There is a roof over the hearth in which the metal is
    melted or the molten metal is treated, and either solid fuel is burned next
    to the hearth, but under the roof, by which means heat is reflected onto
    the metal by the roof, or in which gaseous fuel is burned over the metal in
    the hearth and heat is reflected down onto the hearth by the roof.

    (1)     Note.  Common names of furnaces which are reverberatory are for
    example, open-hearth, Siemens-Martin and puddling.


CLS 75/514
TXT With treating of molten Iron(Fe) with gas outside reverberatory furnace
    (e.g., in Bessemer converter, etc.):

    Process under subclass 513 including a step wherein a gas is injected into,
    onto, or through molten metal that contains over 50 percent by weight
    Iron(Fe) or a slag layer thereon while the molten metal is outside the
    reverberatory furnace.  This step may take place prior to or subsequently
    to treatment of the metal in a reverberatory furnace.

    (1)     Note.  Commonly, patents in this subclass employ a combination of
    treatment in an open hearth furnace with treatment in a Bessemer converter.


CLS 75/515
TXT With melting Iron(Fe) in shaft furnace:

    Process under subclass 513 in which the melting of solid metal that
    contains over 50 percent by weight Iron in a shaft furnace is combined with
    a process step taking place in a reverberatory furnace.

    (1)     Note.  Most patents in this subclass are drawn to a process of
    melting metal in a shaft furnace (e.g., cupola, etc.), and passing the
    molten metal to a reverberatory furnace for treatment.


CLS 75/516
TXT Using gaseous Oxygen in a higher concentration than in ambient air:

    Process under subclass 513 which employs a gas which has a higher
    concentration of Oxygen than that of ambient air for any purpose.

    (1)     Note.  The higher concentration of Oxygen may be employed to burn
    fuel in the furnace or it may be injected separately onto molten metal that
    contains over 50 percent by weight Iron(Fe) by a lance extending through
    the roof of the reverberatory furnace.


CLS 75/517
TXT With addition of solid elemental Carbon(C) or employing elemental Carbon
    furnace lining:

    Process under subclass 513 in which solid elemental Carbon(C) is present in
    the reverberatory furnace at any time during the melting of metal that
    contains over 50 percent by weight Iron(Fe) or treatment of molten metal
    that contains over 50 percent by weight Iron, or in which the reverberatory
    furnace employs a lining which includes elemental Carbon.


CLS 75/518
TXT With compound containing Alkali metal and Oxygen (e.g., Sodium nitrate,
    Sodium carbonate, etc.):

    Process under subclass 513 wherein a compound containing Alkali metal and
    Oxygen (e.g. Sodium nitrate, Sodium carbonate, etc.) is present in the
    reverberatory furnace at any time during the process.


CLS 75/519
TXT With Halogen or Halogen containing compound (e.g., Sodium chloride,
    Fluorspar, etc.):

    Process under subclass 513 wherein elemental Halogen or a Halogen compound
    is present in the reverberatory furnace at any time during the process.


CLS 75/520
TXT With Alkaline earth metal or Magnesium(Mg) containing compound:

    Process under subclass 513 wherein an Alkaline earth metal compound or a
    Magnesium(Mg) compound is present in the reverberatory furnace at any time
    during the process.

    (1)     Note.  The presence of an Alkaline furnace lining (e.g., magnesia
    brick, etc.) will be disregarded for purposes of this subclass.


CLS 75/521
TXT With Transition metal compound:

    Process under subclass 513 wherein a compound of a Transition metal (i.e.,
    Scandium(Sc), Titanium(Ti), Vanadium(V), Chromium(Cr), Manganese(Mn),
    Iron(Fe), Cobalt(Co), NIckel(Ni), Copper(Cu), Zinc(Zn), Yttrium(Y),
    Zirconium(Zr), Niobium(Nb) or Columbium(Cb), Molybdenum(Mo), Ruthenium(Ru),
    Rhodium(Rh), Palladium(Pd), Silver(Ag), Cadmium(Cd), Lanthanum(La),
    Cerium(Ce), Praseodymium(Pr), Neodymium(Nd), Samarium(Sm), Europium(Eu),
    Gadolinium(Gd), Terbium(Tb), Dysprosium(Dy), Holmium(Ho), Erbium(Er),
    Thulium(Tm), Ytterbium(Yb), Lutetium(Lu), Hafnium(Hf), Tantalum(Ta),
    Tungsten(W), Rhenium(Re), Osmium(Os), Iridium(Ir), Platinum(Pt), Gold(Au),
    and Mercury(Hg)) is present in the reverberatory furnace at any time during
    the process.

    (1)     Note.  The presence of a Transition metal compound in the furnace
    lining will be disregarded for purposes of this subclass unless there is a
    specific disclosure that it interacts in some way with the charge of
    Iron(Fe).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    393+,   for a process which employs a Radioactive material whether or not
    the Radioactive material becomes part of the final product.


CLS 75/522
TXT Iron oxide:

    Process under subclass 521 wherein the Transition metal compound contains
    only Iron(Fe) and Oxygen(O).


CLS 75/523
TXT Melting solid Iron(Fe):

    Process under subclass 513 wherein solid metal that contains over 50
    percent by weight Iron(Fe) is melted in the reverberatory furnace.


CLS 75/524
TXT Sequential treatment of molten Iron(Fe) in plural apparatus with different
    linings (e.g., acid Bessemer followed by basic Bessemer, etc.):

    Process under subclass 507 wherein premelted metal that contains over 50
    percent by weight Iron(Fe) is treated in one apparatus and then transferred
    to another apparatus and treated wherein there is an intentional, claimed
    difference in the linings between the different apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  Any recited intentional difference will be enough to render
    the linings different (e.g., one lining "acidic" and the other "basic",
    etc.).


CLS 75/525
TXT Impinging free falling molten metal stream or spray with a gas or solid
    agent or spraying (e.g., atomizing, etc.) of molten metal:

    Process under subclass 507 wherein a free falling molten metal stream or
    spray is impinged during free fall with a gas or solid agent or wherein a
    molten metal is sprayed (e.g., atomized, etc.) to treat the molten metal.

    (1)     Note.  If a molten metal stream or spray is directed onto solid
    treating agent in a container or through a slag layer or used to mix
    separately added solid treating agent into molten metal, placement goes
    elsewhere under subclass 507.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    509,    for treating a free falling stream of molten metal that contains
    over 50 percent by weight Iron(Fe) in a vacuum.


CLS 75/526
TXT Adding solid treating agent in form of wire, rod, or article with surface
    feature or in container or by plunging means:

    Process under subclass 507 wherein the solid treating agent is added in the
    form of a wire, rod, or article with a surface feature or in a container or
    a process wherein the solid treating agent is added to the molten metal
    that contains over 50 percent by weight Iron(Fe) by an apparatus or device
    that mechanically plunges the solid treating agent into the molten metal.


CLS 75/527
TXT In rotary kiln (e.g., Kaldo process, etc.):

    Process under subclass 507 wherein a gas or solid treating agent is
    injected into premelted metal that contains over 50 percent by weight
    Iron(Fe) or slag thereon and wherein the premelted metal is agitated at any
    molten process stage by a chamber or converter that rotates 360 degrees.


CLS 75/528
TXT Injecting gas or nonmetalliferous liquid which gasifies into, onto, or
    through premelted Iron(Fe) or slag layer thereon:

    Process under subclass 507 wherein a gas or nonmetalliferous liquid that
    gasifies (e.g., oil, Water, etc.) under the operating conditions is
    injected into, onto, or through the premelted metal that contains over 50
    percent by weight Iron(Fe) or slag layer thereon.

    (1)     Note.  The injection of gas before or during the melting is not
    considered part of the subject matter under this subclass or the indented
    subclasses hereinbelow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    571,    for a process wherein gas is used to melt or is injected during the
    melting of a metal that contains over 50 percent by weight Iron(Fe).


CLS 75/529
TXT With hydrocarbon liquid or gas present:

    Process under subclass 528 wherein a liquid or gaseous compound consisting
    only of Carbon(C) and Hydrogen(H) (e.g., Propane, Butane, petroleum, etc.)
    is present during the treatment of the premelted metal that contains over
    50 percent by weight Iron(Fe).

    (1)     Note.  The hydrocarbon must be involved in direct or indirect
    treatment of the molten metal or slag layer thereon and must be present
    after the melting stage.  Use of hydrocarbon liquid or gas for melting is
    not sufficient for this subclass.


CLS 75/530
TXT And hydrocarbon in surrounding relationship to gaseous Oxygen (e.g.,
    hydrocarbon in outer concentric tube, etc.):

    Process under subclass 529 wherein a liquid or gaseous hydrocarbon is in a
    surrounding relationship to oxygen gas or an oxygen gas containing gas
    composition (e.g., hydrocarbon in outer concentric tube, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Hydrocarbon used as a shielding or protective gas
    surrounding Oxygen gas or air is included in this subclass.


CLS 75/531
TXT And adding solid agent, slag, or flux to premelted Iron(Fe) or slag layer
    thereon:

    Process under subclass 528 wherein premelted metal that contains over 50
    percent by weight Iron(Fe) or slag layer thereon is contacted with a solid
    treating agent, a separately prepared slag, or flux.

    (1)     Note.  Classification is based on the agent, slag, or flux added to
    the molten metal or slag layer thereon and not on the composition of the in
    situ generated slag or solid agents initially present before melting or
    added during melting.

    (2)     Note.  The addition of molten metal to a solid agent, slag, or flux
    is acceptable in this subclass.


CLS 75/532
TXT Loose elemental Carbon(C), coal, or coke (e.g., carburizing, etc.):

    Process under subclass 531 wherein the solid agent added to the molten
    metal that contains over 50 percent by weight Iron(Fe) or slag layer
    thereon is loose elemental Carbon(C), coal, or coke.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass will take the use of loose Carbon, coal, or
    coke for carburizing, but is not limited to carburizing.

    (2)     Note.  If the Carbon, coal, or coke is part of a consolidated
    composition containing other treating agents, classification goes elsewhere
    under subclass 531.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    536,    537, 542, 543, 566, or 567, for the use of a metal carbide or a
    high carbon metal as a carburizing or treating agent.

    561,    for the use of elemental Carbon(C), coal, or coke in treating
    molten metal or slag layer thereon in absence of a gas or liquid treating
    agent.


CLS 75/533
TXT With solid entrained in gas or injected by gas pressure:

    Process under subclass 531 wherein a solid agent is entrained in or
    injected by gas pressure.

    (1)     Note.  In this and the herein below indented subclasses,
    classification is based on the solid treating agent, slag, or flux added to
    the premelted metal or slag layer whether or not the solid is the entrained
    solid.


CLS 75/534
TXT Boron(B) or compound thereof used in process:

    Process under subclass 533 wherein Boron(B) or compound thereof is present
    in the solid agent, separately prepared slag, or flux used for treating at
    any process stage.


CLS 75/535
TXT Metal halide used in process:

    Process under subclass 533 wherein a metal halide (e.g., Sodium chloride,
    Fluorspar, etc.) is present in the solid agent, separately prepared slag,
    or flux used for treating at any process stage.


CLS 75/536
TXT Carbide used in process:

    Process under subclass 533 wherein a binary Carbon(C) compound of a metal
    (i.e., Carbide) is present in the solid agent, separately prepared slag, or
    flux used for treating at any process stage.


CLS 75/537
TXT Elemental metal or elemental Silicon(Si) used in process:

    Process under subclass 533 wherein elemental metal (e.g., scrap, Iron(Fe),
    Magnesium(Mg), Aluminum(Al), etc.) or elemental Silicon(Si) is present in
    the solid agent, separately prepared slag, or flux used for treating at any
    process stage.


CLS 75/538
TXT Iron(Fe) containing compound used in process:

    Process under subclass 533 wherein an Iron(Fe) containing compound (e.g.,
    ore, scale, Iron oxide, etc.) is present in the solid agent, separately
    prepared slag, or flux used for treating at any process stage.


CLS 75/539
TXT Alkali metal compound or Alkaline earth metal compound used in process:

    Process under subclass 533 wherein an Alkali metal compound (e.g., Sodium
    hydroxide, Sodium carbonate, etc.) or an Alkaline earth metal compound
    (e.g., Calcium oxide, Calcium carbonate, etc.) is present in the solid
    agent, separately prepared slag, or flux used for treating at any process
    stage.


CLS 75/540
TXT Gas contains gaseous Oxygen:

    Process under subclass 531 wherein Oxygen gas or Oxygen gas containing
    composition (e.g., air, etc.) is the injected gas.


CLS 75/541
TXT Metal halide:

    Process under subclass 540 wherein a metal halide (e.g., Sodium chloride,
    Fluorspar, etc.) is present in the solid agent, separately prepared slag,
    or flux.


CLS 75/542
TXT Carbide:

    Process under subclass 540 wherein a binary Carbon(C) compound of a metal
    (i.e., Carbide) is present in the solid agent, separately prepared slag, or
    flux.


CLS 75/543
TXT Elemental metal or elemental Silicon(Si):

    Process under subclass 540 wherein elemental metal (e.g., scrap, Iron(Fe),
    Magnesium(Mg), Aluminum(Al), etc.) or elemental Silicon(Si) is present in
    the solid agent, separately prepared slag, or flux.


CLS 75/544
TXT Iron(Fe) containing compound:

    Process under subclass 540 wherein an Iron(Fe) containing compound (e.g.,
    ore, scale, Iron oxide, etc.) is present in the solid agent, separately
    prepared slag, or flux.


CLS 75/545
TXT Alkali metal compound or Alkaline earth metal compound:

    Process under subclass 540 wherein an Alkali metal compound (e.g., Sodium
    hydroxide, Sodium carbonate, etc.) or an Alkaline earth metal compound
    (e.g., Calcium oxide, Calcium Carbonate, etc.) is present in the solid
    agent, separately prepared slag, or flux.


CLS 75/546
TXT Noble gas or inert gas not otherwise identified:

    Process under subclass 531 wherein a Noble gas (i.e., Helium(He), Neon(Ne),
    Argon(Ar), Krypton(Kr), or Xenon(Xe) or an inert gas not otherwise
    identified is the injected gas.

    (1)     Note.  If the injected gas is named (e.g., Carbon dioxide, etc.),
    it is classified by the named gas even if the specification calls the gas
    inert.


CLS 75/547
TXT Gas compound containing Oxygen (e.g., Carbon monoxide, Carbon dioxide,
    Water, etc.):

    Process under subclass 531 wherein the injected gas is a compound
    containing Oxygen (e.g., Carbon monoxide, Carbon dioxide, Water, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    540+    or 548+, for gaseous compositions containing Oxygen gas such as air
    or Oxygen gas enriched gas compositions.


CLS 75/548
TXT Gas contains gaseous Oxygen:

    Process under subclass 528 wherein Oxygen gas or an Oxygen gas containing
    composition (e.g., air, etc.) is the injected gas.


CLS 75/549
TXT With treatment of exhaust gas:

    Process under subclass 548 wherein the exhaust or waste gas from the
    process is treated separately from the molten metal that contains over 50
    percent by weight Iron(Fe).


CLS 75/550
TXT And adding gaseous Oxygen or inert gas to exhaust gas:

    Process under subclass 549 wherein gaseous Oxygen is added with the exhaust
    gas or wherein an inert gas is added to the exhaust gas.

    (1)     Note.  If the added gaseous Oxygen reacts with the exhaust gas
    leaving no Oxygen in the altered exhaust gas, proper classification remains
    with this subclass.


CLS 75/551
TXT Injecting from above and below melt surface:

    Process under subclass 548 wherein the Oxygen gas or Oxygen gas containing
    gas composition is injected from both above and below the melt surface at
    the same time or at different times in the processing.

    (1)     Note.  Injection into the slag or slag-melt interface is considered
    to be from above the melt surface for the purposes of classification in
    this subclass.


CLS 75/552
TXT Including other gas from below:

    Process under subclass 551 wherein a gas other than Oxygen gas or an Oxygen
    gas containing gas composition is injected from below the melt surface at
    the same time or at a different time in the processing.


CLS 75/553
TXT Injecting only from above melt surface:

    Process under subclass 548 wherein the Oxygen gas or the Oxygen gas
    containing gas composition is injected only from above the melt surface.

    (1)     Note.  Injection into the slag or slag-melt interface is considered
    to be from above the melt surface for purposes of classification in this
    subclass.


CLS 75/554
TXT Including other gas from above:

    Process under subclass 553 wherein a gas other than Oxygen gas or an Oxygen
    gas containing gas composition is injected from above the melt surface at
    the same time or at a different time in the processing.


CLS 75/555
TXT Including other gas from below:

    Process under subclass 553 wherein a gas other than Oxygen gas or an Oxygen
    gas containing gas composition is injected from below the melt surface at
    the same time or at a different time during the processing.


CLS 75/556
TXT Injecting only from below melt surface:

    Process under subclass 548 wherein the Oxygen gas or Oxygen gas containing
    gas composition is injected only from below the melt surface.


CLS 75/557
TXT Including other gas from below:

    Process under subclass 556 wherein a gas other than Oxygen gas or an Oxygen
    gas containing gas composition is injected from below the melt surface at
    the same time or at a different time during the processing.


CLS 75/558
TXT Noble gas or inert gas not otherwise identified:

    Process under subclass 528 wherein a Noble gas (i.e., Helium(He), Neon(Ne),
    Argon(Ar), Krypton(Kr), or Xenon(Xe)) or an inert gas not otherwise
    identified is the injected gas.

    (1)     Note.  If the injected gas is named (i.e., Carbon dioxide), it is
    classified by the named gas even if the specification calls the gas inert.


CLS 75/559
TXT Gas compound containing Oxygen (e.g., Carbon monoxide, Carbon dioxide,
    Water, etc.):

    Process under subclass 528 wherein the injected gas is a compound
    containing Oxygen (e.g., Carbon monoxide, Carbon dioxide, Water, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    540     or 548, for processes using gaseous compositions containing Oxygen
    gas such as air or Oxygen gas enriched gas compositions.


CLS 75/560
TXT Treating premelted Iron(Fe) or slag layer thereon by adding solid agent,
    slag, or flux:

    Process under subclass 507 wherein premelted metal that contains over 50
    percent by weight Iron(Fe) or slag layer thereon is contacted with a solid
    treating agent, a separately prepared slag, or flux.

    (1)     Note.  Classification is based on the agent, slag, or flux added to
    the molten metal or slag layer thereon and not on the composition of the in
    situ generated slag or solid agents initially present before melting or
    added during melting.

    (2)     Note.  The addition of molten metal to a solid agent, slag, or flux
    is acceptable to this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    571,    for a process wherein a solid agent is utilized during the melting
    of a metal that contains over 50 percent by weight Iron(Fe).


CLS 75/561
TXT Loose elemental Carbon(C), coal, or coke (e.g., carburizing, etc.):

    Process under subclass 560 wherein the solid agent added to the molten
    metal that contains over 50 percent by weight Iron(Fe) or slag layer
    thereon is loose elemental Carbon(C), coal, or coke.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass will take the use of loose Carbon, coal, or
    coke for carburizing but is not limited to carburizing.

    (2)     Note.  If the Carbon, coal, or coke is part of a consolidated
    composition containing other treating agents, classification goes elsewhere
    under subclass 560.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    532,    for the use of elemental Carbon, coal, or coke in treating molten
    metal that contains over 50 percent by weight Iron or slag layer thereon in
    a process also utilizing a gas or liquid which gasifies.

    536,    537, 542, 543, 566, or 567, for the use of a metal carbide or a
    high Carbon metal as a carburizing or treating agent.


CLS 75/562
TXT Sulfur(S) or compound thereof:

    Process under subclass 560 wherein Sulfur(S) or a compound thereof is
    present in the solid agent, separately prepared slag, or flux.


CLS 75/563
TXT Nitrate, Chlorate, Permanganate, or Peroxide:

    Process under subclass 560 wherein a Nitrate, Chlorate, Permanganate, or
    Peroxide is present in the solid agent, separately prepared slag, or flux.


CLS 75/564
TXT Boron(B) or compound thereof:

    Process under subclass 560 wherein Boron(B) or a compound thereof is
    present in the solid agent, separately prepared slag, or flux.


CLS 75/565
TXT Metal halide:

    Process under subclass 560 wherein a metal halide (e.g., Sodium chloride,
    Fluorspar, etc.) is present in the solid agent, separately prepared slag,
    or flux.


CLS 75/566
TXT Carbide:

    Process under subclass 560 wherein a binary Carbon(C) compound of a metal
    (i.e., Carbide) is present in the solid agent, separately prepared slag, or
    flux.


CLS 75/567
TXT Elemental metal or elemental Silicon(Si):

    Process under subclass 560 wherein elemental metal (e.g., scrap, Iron(Fe),
    Magnesium(Mg), Aluminum(A1), etc.) or elemental Silicon(Si) is present in
    the solid agent, separately prepared slag, or flux.


CLS 75/568
TXT Aluminum(Al) or Magnesium(Mg):

    Process under subclass 567 wherein Aluminum(Al) or Magnesium(Mg) is the
    elemental metal.


CLS 75/569
TXT Iron(Fe) containing compound:

    Process under subclass 560 wherein an Iron(Fe) containing compound (e.g.,
    ore, scale, Iron oxide, etc.) is present in the solid agent, separately
    prepared slag, or flux.


CLS 75/570
TXT Alkali metal compound or Alkaline earth metal compound:

    Process under subclass 560 wherein an Alkali metal compound (e.g., Sodium
    hydroxide, Sodium carbonate, etc.) or an Alkaline earth metal compound
    (e.g., Calcium Oxide, Calcium carbonate, etc.) is present in the solid
    agent, separately prepared slag, or flux.


CLS 75/571
TXT Melting solid Iron(Fe):

    Process under subclass 507 wherein solid Iron(Fe) is employed in a process
    which includes the melting of the Iron.


CLS 75/572
TXT Melting packaged Iron(Fe) or Iron of specified structure to facilitate
    melting (e.g., shaped bale of scrap, etc.):

    Process under subclass 571 wherein the solid Iron(Fe) which is melted is
    enclosed in or held together in a package (e.g., steel can, wooden box,
    etc.) or in which the solid Iron is recited to have a particular shape or
    structure to facilitate melting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 576 for a
    metallic article of particular shape to facilitate melting (e.g., package,
    etc.).


CLS 75/573
TXT In shaft furnace (e.g., cupola, etc.):

    Process under subclass 571 wherein solid Iron(Fe) is melted in a vertical
    tubular furnace.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the charge is predominantly (i.e., over 50
    percent) Iron in the metallic state.  While there may be some reduction of
    Iron compound (e.g., rust or ore, etc.) taking place, the majority of the
    molten Iron produced exists in the metallic state when added to the furnace.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    488,    for a process of reduction of an Iron compound in a shaft furnace.
    In this subclass over 50 percent of the Iron product is obtained by
    reduction of an Iron compound.


CLS 75/574
TXT Without the use of solid, carbonaceous material (e.g., without coke, etc.):

    Process under subclass 573 wherein no solid, carbonaceous material (e.g.,
    coke, etc.) is present in the shaft furnace during the melting process.

    (1)     Note.  Usually in this subclass the heat required to melt the
    Iron(Fe) is obtained by injecting a gaseous fuel with air through tuyeres
    on the bottom of the shaft furnace.


CLS 75/575
TXT Using Oxygen in a higher concentration than ambient air:

    Process under subclass 573 wherein a gas that has a higher concentration of
    molecular Oxygen than ambient air is added to the shaft furnace at any
    place.


CLS 75/576
TXT Using both a solid carbonaceous fuel (e.g., coke, etc.) and a fluid fuel
    (e.g., natural gas, etc):

    Process under subclass 573 which employs a solid carbonaceous fuel (e.g.,
    coke, etc.) and a fluid fuel (e.g., natural gas, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  The solid carbonaceous fuel is usually charged to the
    furnace along with the metal to be melted and the fluid fuel is injected
    through the tuyeres along with the combustion air.


CLS 75/577
TXT Defined composition of solid fuel other than nominal "coke":

    Process under subclass 573 wherein the shaft furnace employs a solid fuel
    of defined composition other than nominal "coke".

    (1)     Note.  Any definition of the solid, carbonaceous fuel beyond mere
    nominal "coke" will be sufficient to classify a patent herein, such as
    defined particle size, strength of coke, anthracite coal, etc.


CLS 75/578
TXT With Calcium carbide:

    Process under subclass 573 wherein Calcium carbide is present in the shaft
    furnace with the Iron(Fe) being melted.


CLS 75/579
TXT With Alkali metal compound:

    Process under subclass 573 wherein an Alkali metal compound is present in
    the shaft furnace with the Iron(Fe) being melted.


CLS 75/580
TXT In closed vessel with heat conducted through walls only (e.g., crucible
    melting, etc.):

    Process under subclass 571 in which the Iron(Fe) to be melted is placed in
    a vessel which is then closed with a lid so that no external materials such
    as combustion gasses can contact the Iron.  The vessel is placed in a hot
    environment and the Iron is melted solely by heat conducted through the
    walls of the vessel.

    (1)     Note.  This is often called the crucible process.


CLS 75/581
TXT Melting scrap:

    Process under subclass 571 wherein the solid Iron(Fe) melted is the waste
    from manufacturing or is obtained from articles which are no longer useful
    as such.

    (1)     Note.  The term "scrap" in a patent will make placement in this
    subclass proper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    433,    for a process of preheating scrap Iron to facilitate later melting
    without actually melting the scrap Iron.


CLS 75/582
TXT Separating slag from molten Iron(Fe):

    Process under subclass 507 for separating slag from molten Iron(Fe) (e.g.,
    by skimming, etc.).


CLS 75/583
TXT Stirring or agitating molten Iron(Fe):

    Process under subclass 507 wherein molten Iron(Fe) is stirred either by
    contacting with a mechanical device (e.g., a stirring impeller, etc.) or
    without a separate mechanical device contacting the molten Iron (e.g., by
    shaking the container holding the molten Iron, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10.67   for a method of agitating molten Iron with a magnetic field.

    528+,   for a method of agitating molten Iron by injecting a gas.


CLS 75/584
TXT Pouring or tapping molten Iron(Fe):

    Process under subclass 507 wherein molten Iron(Fe) is either poured or
    allowed to run from a vessel in which it is contained.


CLS 75/585
TXT Nonferrous:

    Process under subclass 414 in which a metal other than Iron(Fe) is produced
    or a metal that contains over 50 percent by weight Nonferrous metal, singly
    or in combination, is treated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, for processes for making a
    Nonferrous alloy.


CLS 75/586
TXT Concurrent production of Nonferrous metal and other desired nonmetallic
    product (e.g., cement, etc.):

    Process under subclass 585 in which a material is reduced to Nonferrous
    metal with simultaneous production of another product other than usual
    by-products (e.g., cement, etc.).


CLS 75/587
TXT Countercurrent liquid-liquid extraction of molten Nonferrous metal:

    Process under subclass 585 in which a molten metal is introduced into a
    separating column and is flowed countercurrent to a contaminated metal that
    contains over 50 percent by weight Nonferrous metal to purify the
    contaminated metal.


CLS 75/588
TXT Fractionation of molten Nonferrous metal (e.g., with reflux, etc.):

    Process under subclass 585 in which the molten metal that contains over 50
    percent by weight Nonferrous metal is separated by separately collecting
    the distillates evaporating at certain temperatures.


CLS 75/589
TXT Alkali metal, singly or in combination:

    Process under subclass 585 in which an Alkali metal (i.e., Lithium(Li),
    Sodium(Na), Potassium(K), Rubidium(Rb), Cesium(Cs)) is produced or a metal
    that contains over 50 percent by weight Alkali metal, singly or in
    combination, is treated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    745,    for a process of producing an Alkali metal or treating a metal that
    contains over 50 percent by weight Alkali metal, singly or in combination,
    below 300 degrees C.


CLS 75/590
TXT Vaporizing or condensing:

    Process under subclass 589 in which the Alkali metal is vaporized or
    condensed.  The vaporization can occur during the reduction of an Alkali
    metal compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    752,    for a process in which a metal impurity is vaporized in a process
    including consolidation of a metalliferous material.


CLS 75/591
TXT Cesium(Cs):

    Process under subclass 590 in which Cesium(Cs) is vaporized or condensed.


CLS 75/592
TXT Precipitating impurities from molten Alkali metal:

    Process under subclass 589 in which the contaminants are settled out of a
    molten metal that contains over 50 percent by weight Alkali metal, singly
    or in combination.


CLS 75/593
TXT Beryllium(Be):

    Process under subclass 585 in which Beryllium(Be) is produced or a metal
    that contains over 50 percent by weight Beryllium is treated.


CLS 75/594
TXT Magnesium(Mg):

    Process under subclass 585 in which Magnesium(Mg) is produced or a metal
    that contains over 50 percent by weight Magnesium is treated.


CLS 75/595
TXT Vaporizing or condensing:

    Process under subclass 594 in which Magnesium(Mg) is vaporized or condensed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    752,    for a process in which a metal impurity is vaporized in a process
    including consolidation of a metalliferous material.


CLS 75/596
TXT Reduction:

    Process under subclass 595 in which a Magnesium(Mg) compound is reduced to
    metal.


CLS 75/597
TXT Using metal or metal compound reductant:

    Process under subclass 596 in which a Magnesium(Mg) compound is reduced by
    using a metal or a metal compound.


CLS 75/598
TXT And Carbon(C):

    Process under subclass 597 in which Carbon(C) is also used.


CLS 75/599
TXT Using Carbon(C):

    Process under subclass 596 in which a Magnesium(Mg) compound is reduced by
    using Carbon(C).


CLS 75/600
TXT Treating molten Magnesium(Mg):

    Process under subclass 594 in which a molten metal that contains over 50
    percent by weight Magnesium(Mg) is treated.


CLS 75/601
TXT Precipitating impurities from molten Magnesium(Mg):

    Process under subclass 600 in which the contaminants are settled out of a
    molten metal that contains over 50 percent by weight Magnesium(Mg).


CLS 75/602
TXT Adding gas:

    Process under subclass 600 in which a gas is added to molten metal that
    contains over 50 percent by weight Magnesium(Mg).


CLS 75/603
TXT And solid:

    Process under subclass 602 in which a solid is added to molten metal that
    contains over 50 percent by weight Magnesium(Mg).


CLS 75/604
TXT Adding solid:

    Process under subclass 600 in which a solid is added to molten metal that
    contains over 50 percent by weight Magnesium(Mg).


CLS 75/605
TXT Alkaline earth metal, singly or in combination:

    Process under subclass 585 in which an Alkaline earth metal (i.e.,
    Calcium(Ca), Strontium(Sr), Barium(Ba)) is produced or a metal that
    contains over 50 percent by weight Alkaline earth metal, singly or in
    combination, is treated.


CLS 75/606
TXT Reducing halide:

    Process under subclass 605 in which an Alkaline earth metal halide is
    reduced to metal.


CLS 75/607
TXT Vaporizing or condensing:

    Process under subclass 605 in which an Alkaline earth metal is vaporized or
    condensed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    752,    for a process in which a metal impurity is vaporized in a process
    including consolidation of a metalliferous material.


CLS 75/608
TXT Reduction:

    Process under subclass 607 in which an Alkaline earth metal compound is
    reduced  metal.


CLS 75/609
TXT Treating molten Alkaline earth metal:

    Process under subclass 605 in which a molten metal that contains over 50
    percent by weight Alkaline earth metal, singly or in combination, is
    treated.


CLS 75/610
TXT Rare earth metal, singly or in combination:

    Process under subclass 585 in which a Rare earth metal (i.e., Scandium(Sc),
    Yttrium(Y), Lanthanum(La), Cerium(Ce), Praseodymium(Pr), Neodymium(Nd),
    Samarium(Sm), Europium(Eu), Gadolinium(Gd), Terbium(Tb), Dysprosium(Dy),
    Holmium(Ho), Erbium(Er), Thulium(Tm), Ytterbium(Yb), Lutetium(Lu)) is
    produced or a metal that contains over 50 percent by weight Rare earth
    metal, singly or in combination, is treated.


CLS 75/611
TXT Refractory metal, singly or in combination:

    Process under subclass 585 in which a Refractory metal (i.e., Titanium(Ti),
    Zirconium(Zr), Hafnium(Hf), Vanadium(V), Niobium(Nb) or Columbium(Cb),
    Tantalum(Ta), Chromium(Cr), Molybdenum(Mo), or Tungsten(W)) is produced or
    a metal that contains over 50 percent by weight Refractory metal, singly or
    in combination, is treated.


CLS 75/612
TXT Titanium(Ti), Zirconium(Zr), or Hafnium(Hf), singly or in combination:

    Process under subclass 611 in which Titanium(Ti), Zirconium(Zr), or
    Hafnium(Hf) is produced or a metal that contains over 50 percent by weight
    Titanium, Zirconium, or Hafnium, singly or in combination, is treated.


CLS 75/613
TXT Reduction:

    Process under subclass 612 in which a Titanium(Ti), Zirconium(Zr), or
    Hafnium(Hf) compound is reduced to metal.


CLS 75/614
TXT Using free metal or alloy reductant:

    Process under subclass 613 in which the compound is reduced by using a free
    metal or alloy.


CLS 75/615
TXT Of Titanium(Ti), Zirconium(Zr), or Hafnium(Hf) compound containing Halogen:

    Process under subclass 614 in which the Titanium(Ti), Zirconium(Zr), or
    Hafnium(Hf) compound that is reduced contains Halogen.


CLS 75/616
TXT Of binary halide - MX(4):

    Process under subclass 615 in which the compound that is reduced is a
    binary halide - MX(4).


CLS 75/617
TXT Of chloride - MCl(4):

    Process under subclass 616 in which the compound that is reduced is a
    binary chloride - MCl(4).


CLS 75/618
TXT Free metal or alloy reductant contains Magnesium(Mg):

    Process under subclass 617 in which the compound is reduced by using a free
    metal or alloy reductant that contains Magnesium(Mg).


CLS 75/619
TXT Metal produced is Titanium(Ti):

    Process under subclass 618 in which the metal that is produced is
    Titanium(Ti).


CLS 75/620
TXT Of Titanium(Ti), Zirconium(Zr), or Hafnium(Hf) compound containing Halogen:

    Process under subclass 613 in which the Titanium(Ti), Zirconium(Zr), or
    Hafnium(Hf) compound that is reduced contains Halogen.


CLS 75/621
TXT Treating molten Titanium(Ti), Zirconium(Zr), or Hafnium(Hf):

    Process under subclass 612 in which a molten metal that contains over 50
    percent by weight Titanium(Ti), Zirconium(Zr), or Hafnium(Hf), singly or in
    combination, is treated.


CLS 75/622
TXT Vanadium(V), Niobium(Nb) or Columbium(Cb), or Tantalum(Ta), singly or in
    combination:

    Process under subclass 611 in which Vanadium(V), Niobium(Nb) or
    Columbium(Cb), or Tantalum(Ta) is produced or a metal that contains over 50
    percent by weight Titanium, Niobium or Columbium, or Tantalum, singly or in
    combination, is treated.


CLS 75/623
TXT Chromium(Cr), Molybdenum(Mo), or Tungsten(W), singly or in combination:

    Process under subclass 611 in which Chromium(Cr), Molybdenum(Mo), or
    Tungsten(W) is produced or a metal that contains over 50 percent by weight
    Chromium, Molybdenum, or Tungsten, singly or in combination, is treated.


CLS 75/624
TXT Manganese(Mn):

    Process under subclass 585 in which Manganese(Mn) is produced or a metal
    that contains over 50 percent by weight Manganese is treated.


CLS 75/625
TXT Reduction:

    Process under subclass 624 in which a Manganese(Mn) compound is reduced to
    metal.


CLS 75/626
TXT Cobalt(Co):

    Process under subclass 585 in which Cobalt(Co) is produced or a metal that
    contains over 50 percent by weight Cobalt is treated.


CLS 75/627
TXT Reduction:

    Process under subclass 626 in which a Cobalt(Co) compound is reduced to
    metal.


CLS 75/628
TXT Nickel(Ni):

    Process under subclass 585 in which Nickel(Ni) is produced or a metal that
    contains over 50 percent by weight Nickel is treated.


CLS 75/629
TXT Reduction:

    Process under subclass 628 in which a Nickel(Ni) compound is reduced to
    metal.


CLS 75/630
TXT Segregation process:

    Process under subclass 629 in which a Nickel(Ni) compound is reduced to
    metal by reacting the compound with a mixture of a carbonaceous reductant
    and a chloridizing agent.


CLS 75/631
TXT Noble metal, singly or in combination:

    Process under subclass 585 in which a Noble metal (i.e., Ruthenium(Ru),
    Rhodium(Rh), Palladium(Pd), Osmium(Os), Iridium(Ir), Platinum(Pt),
    Silver(Ag), Gold(Au)) is produced or a metal that contains over 50 percent
    by weight Noble metal, singly or in combination, is treated.


CLS 75/632
TXT Palladium(Pd):

    Process under subclass 631 in which Palladium(Pd) is produced or a metal
    that contains over 50 percent by weight Palladium is treated.


CLS 75/633
TXT Platinum(Pt):

    Process under subclass 631 in which Platinum(Pt) is produced or a metal
    that contains over 50 percent by weight Platinum is treated.


CLS 75/634
TXT Silver(Ag):

    Process under subclass 631 in which Silver(Ag) is produced or a metal that
    contains over 50 percent by weight Silver is treated.


CLS 75/635
TXT Recovering Silver(Ag) from photographic material:

    Process under subclass 634 in which Silver(Ag) is obtained from
    photographic material.


CLS 75/636
TXT Reduction:

    Process under subclass 634 in which a Silver(Ag) compound is reduced to
    metal.


CLS 75/637
TXT Gold(Au):

    Process under subclass 631 in which Gold(Au) is produced or a metal that
    contains over 50 percent by weight Gold is treated.


CLS 75/638
TXT Copper(Cu):

    Process under subclass 585 in which Copper(Cu) is produced or a metal that
    contains over 50 percent by weight Copper is treated.


CLS 75/639
TXT Treating material in gaseous suspension:

    Process under subclass 638 in which a material undergoing treatment is in a
    highly dispersed state in a gaseous medium.


CLS 75/640
TXT Treating slag or dross:

    Process under subclass 638 in which a slag or dross is treated to produce
    Copper(Cu).


CLS 75/641
TXT Reduction:

    Process under subclass 638 in which a Copper(Cu) compound is reduced to
    metal.


CLS 75/642
TXT Segregation process:

    Process under subclass 641 in which a Copper(Cu) compound is reduced to
    metal by reacting the compound with a mixture of a carbonaceous reductant
    and a chloridizing agent.


CLS 75/643
TXT Treating matte or sulfide:

    Process under subclass 641 in which a Copper(Cu) matte or sulfide is
    treated to produce Copper.


CLS 75/644
TXT Treating waste gas:

    Process under subclass 643 in which the exhaust gas is treated.


CLS 75/645
TXT With prior production of matte or sulfide:

    Process under subclass 643 in which the Copper(Cu) matte or sulfide is
    formed before the matte or sulfide is treated to produce Copper.


CLS 75/646
TXT Treating molten Copper(Cu):

    Process under subclass 638 in which a molten metal that contains over 50
    percent by weight Copper(Cu) is treated.


CLS 75/647
TXT By vacuum:

    Process under subclass 646 in which molten metal that contains over 50
    percent by weight Copper(Cu) is subjected to sub-atmospheric pressures.


CLS 75/648
TXT Adding gas:

    Process under subclass 646 in which a gas is added to molten metal that
    contains over 50 percent by weight Copper(Cu).


CLS 75/649
TXT Containing gaseous Oxygen:

    Process under subclass 648 in which the gas contains gaseous oxygen.


CLS 75/650
TXT And adding solid:

    Process under subclass 649 in which a solid is added to molten metal that
    contains over 50 percent by weight Copper(Cu).


CLS 75/651
TXT And solid:

    Process under subclass 648 in which a solid is added to molten metal that
    contains over 50 percent by weight Copper(Cu).


CLS 75/652
TXT Adding solid:

    Process under subclass 646 in which a solid is added to molten metal that
    contains over 50 percent by weight Copper(Cu).


CLS 75/653
TXT Melting Copper(Cu) in shaft furnace:

    Process under subclass 638 in which metal that contains over 50 percent by
    weight Copper(Cu) is melted in a shaft furnace.


CLS 75/654
TXT Zinc(Zn):

    Process under subclass 585 in which Zinc(Zn) is produced or a metal that
    contains over 50 percent by weight Zinc is treated.


CLS 75/655
TXT Treating slag or dross:

    Process under subclass 654 in which a slag or dross is treated to produce
    Zinc(Zn).


CLS 75/656
TXT Reduction:

    Process under subclass 654 in which a Zinc(Zn) compound is reduced to metal.


CLS 75/657
TXT Using Halogen containing material:

    Process under subclass 656 in which a Zinc(Zn) compound is reduced by using
    a material containing Halogen.


CLS 75/658
TXT Vaporizing or condensing:

    Process under subclass 656 in which Zinc(Zn) is vaporized or condensed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    752,    for a process in which a metal impurity is vaporized in a process
    including consolidation of a metalliferous material.


CLS 75/659
TXT Treating material in gaseous suspension:

    Process under subclass 658 in which a material undergoing treatment is in a
    highly dispersed state in a gaseous medium.


CLS 75/660
TXT Treating material in blast furnace or cupola:

    Process under subclass 658 in which a blast furnace or cupola is used.


CLS 75/661
TXT Treating material in vertical retort:

    Process under subclass 658 in which a vertical retort is used.


CLS 75/662
TXT Treating material in rotary kiln:

    Process under subclass 658 in which a Zinc(Zn) compound is reduced in an
    approximately cylindrical vessel rotating on its cylindrical axis.  The
    axis is horizontal or inclined less than 45 degrees from horizontal.  The
    vessel rotates in only one direction through an angle of over 360 degrees
    during the reduction and rotates substantially continuously.


CLS 75/663
TXT Treating molten or vaporous Zinc(Zn):

    Process under subclass 654 in which a molten or vaporous metal that
    contains over 50 percent by weight Zinc(Zn) is treated.


CLS 75/664
TXT Using Halogen containing material:

    Process under subclass 663 in which a material that contains Halogen is
    used.


CLS 75/665
TXT Vaporizing or condensing:

    Process under subclass 663 in which Zinc(Zn) is vaporized or condensed.


CLS 75/666
TXT Condensing with Lead(Pb) coolant:

    Process under subclass 665 in which Lead(Pb) coolant is used to condense
    the vaporous Zinc(Zn).


CLS 75/667
TXT Condensing with use of molten metal slinger:

    Process under subclass 665 in which a device for centrifugally throwing
    liquid is used to hurl molten metal into vaporous Zinc(Zn) in order to
    condense the vaporous Zinc.


CLS 75/668
TXT Cadmium(Cd):

    Process under subclass 585 in which Cadmium(Cd) is produced or a metal that
    contains over 50 percent by weight Cadmium is treated.


CLS 75/669
TXT Vaporizing or condensing:

    Process under subclass 668 in which Cadmium(Cd) is vaporized or condensed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    752,    for a process in which a metal impurity is vaporized in a process
    including consolidation of a metalliferous material.


CLS 75/670
TXT Mercury(Hg):

    Process under subclass 585 in which Mercury(Hg) is produced or a metal that
    contains over 50 percent by weight Mercury is treated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    388+,   for a process in which an amalgam is broken to produce free metal.


CLS 75/671
TXT Aluminum(Al):

    Process under subclass 585 in which Aluminum(Al) is produced or a metal
    that contains over 50 percent by weight Aluminum is treated.


CLS 75/672
TXT Treating slag or dross:

    Process under subclass 671 in which a slag or dross is treated to produce
    Aluminum(Al).


CLS 75/673
TXT Reduction:

    Process under subclass 671 in which an Aluminum(Al) compound is reduced to
    metal.


CLS 75/674
TXT Carbothermic:

    Process under subclass 673 in which an Aluminum(Al) compound is reduced in
    the presence of a carbonaceous material, Carbon(C) or carbide.


CLS 75/675
TXT Decomposition of organo-compound containing Aluminum(Al):

    Process under subclass 673 in which an organo-compound containing
    Aluminum(Al) is reduced.


CLS 75/676
TXT Of Aluminum(Al) halide:

    Process under subclass 673 in which an Aluminum(Al) compound containing
    Halogen is reduced.


CLS 75/677
TXT Of subhalide:

    Process under subclass 676 in which the compound is an Aluminum(Al)
    monohalide.


CLS 75/678
TXT Treating molten Aluminum(Al):

    Process under subclass 671 in which a molten metal that contains over 50
    percent by weight Aluminum(Al) is treated.


CLS 75/679
TXT Fractional crystallization:

    Process under subclass 678 in which molten metal that contains over 50
    percent by weight Aluminum(Al) is preferentially crystallized in order to
    obtain purified metal.  The impurities are excluded from the purified
    crystals that form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    600+ for processes directed to the formation of a single crystal.


CLS 75/680
TXT Adding gas:

    Process under subclass 678 in which a gas is added to molten metal that
    contains over 50 percent by weight Aluminum(Al).


CLS 75/681
TXT Containing Halogen atom:

    Process under subclass 680 in which the gas contains Halogen.


CLS 75/682
TXT And adding solid:

    Process under subclass 681 in which a solid is added to molten metal that
    contains over 50 percent by weight Aluminum(Al).


CLS 75/683
TXT And solid:

    Process under subclass 680 in which a solid is added to molten metal that
    contains over 50 percent by weight Aluminum(Al).


CLS 75/684
TXT Adding solid:

    Process under subclass 678 in which a solid is added to molten metal that
    contains over 50 percent by weight Aluminum(Al).


CLS 75/685
TXT Containing Halogen:

    Process under subclass 684 in which the solid contains Halogen.


CLS 75/686
TXT Melting Aluminum(Al):

    Process under subclass 671 in which metal that contains over 50 percent by
    weight Aluminum(Al) is melted.


CLS 75/687
TXT Scrap:

    Process under subclass 686 in which metal scrap that contains over 50
    percent by weight Aluminum(Al) is melted.


CLS 75/688
TXT Gallium(Ga) or Indium(In):

    Process under subclass 585 in which Gallium(Ga) or Indium(In) is produced
    or a metal that contains over 50 percent by weight Gallium or over 50
    percent by weight Indium is treated.


CLS 75/689
TXT Germanium(Ge):

    Process under subclass 585 in which Germanium(Ge) is produced or a metal
    that contains over 50 percent by weight Germanium is treated.


CLS 75/690
TXT Tin(Sn):

    Process under subclass 585 in which Tin(Sn) is produced or a metal that
    contains over 50 percent by weight Tin is treated.


CLS 75/691
TXT Reduction:

    Process under subclass 690 in which a Tin(Sn) compound is reduced to metal.


CLS 75/692
TXT Of Halogen containing material:

    Process under subclass 691 in which a Tin(Sn) compound containing a Halogen
    is reduced.


CLS 75/693
TXT Lead(Pb):

    Process under subclass 585 in which Lead(Pb) is produced or a metal that
    contains over 50 percent by weight Lead is treated.


CLS 75/694
TXT Treating material in gaseous suspension or gaseous state:

    Process under subclass 693 in which a material undergoing treatment is in a
    highly dispersed state in a gaseous medium or is in a gaseous state.


CLS 75/695
TXT Reduction:

    Process under subclass 693 in which a Lead(Pb) compound is reduced to metal.


CLS 75/696
TXT Of Lead-Sulfur compound:

    Process under subclass 695 in which the Lead(Pb) compound contains
    Sulfur(S).


CLS 75/697
TXT Treating molten Lead(Pb):

    Process under subclass 693 in which a molten metal that contains over 50
    percent by weight Lead(Pb) is treated.


CLS 75/698
TXT By vacuum:

    Process under subclass 697 in which molten metal that contains over 50
    percent by weight Lead(Pb) is subjected to sub-atmospheric pressures.


CLS 75/699
TXT Adding gas:

    Process under subclass 697 in which a gas is added to molten metal that
    contains over 50 percent by weight Lead(Pb).


CLS 75/700
TXT Containing Halogen atom:

    Process under subclass 699 in which the gas contains Halogen.


CLS 75/701
TXT Adding solid:

    Process under subclass 697 in which a solid is added to molten metal that
    contains over 50 percent by weight Lead(Pb).


CLS 75/702
TXT Containing free metal:

    Process under subclass 701 in which the solid contains a free metal.


CLS 75/703
TXT Antimony(Sb):

    Process under subclass 585 in which Antimony(Sb) is produced or a metal
    that contains over 50 percent by weight Antimony is treated.


CLS 75/704
TXT Reduction:

    Process under subclass 703 in which an Antimony(Sb) compound is reduced to
    metal.


CLS 75/705
TXT Bismuth(Bi):

    Process under subclass 585 in which Bismuth is produced or a metal that
    contains over 50 percent by weight Bismuth is treated.


CLS 75/706
TXT Arsenic(As):

    Process under subclass 585 in which Arsenic(As) is produced or a metal that
    contains over 50 percent by weight Arsenic is treated.


CLS 75/707
TXT Reducing or smelting unnamed ore:

    Process under subclass 414 wherein an unnamed ore is reduced or smelted.


CLS 75/708
TXT Stirring or agitating of molten material:

    Process under subclass 414 wherein molten material is subjected to an
    outside force to cause stirring or agitating of the material.  This force
    may be applied by a mechanical stirrer, introduction of a gas, or movement
    of the vessel in which the material is held.

    (1)     Note.  The stirring or agitating caused by material being poured
    into or out of a container will not be sufficient for placement hereunder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10.67,  for processes of stirring with a magnetic field.


CLS 75/709
TXT Covering the surface of molten metal:

    Process under subclass 414 wherein the surface of molten metal is covered
    by a material to prevent contact with the ambient atmosphere.

    (1)     Note.  A container in which the metal is held will be ignored as
    far as placement hereunder is concerned.


CLS 75/710
TXT Below 300 degrees C:

    Process under subclass 392 in which all stages of the process operate at a
    temperature below 300 degrees C (i.e., 572 degrees F).

    (1)     Note.  If a nonmetallic material which is liquid under standard
    conditions is used in a step of the process, the step will be assumed to
    occur at a temperature below 300 degrees C unless otherwise stated.


CLS 75/711
TXT Using nonmetallic material which is liquid under standard conditions (e.g.,
    hydrometallurgy, etc.):

    Process under subclass 710 wherein a nonmetallic material which is a liquid
    under standard conditions is used at any stage in the production of free
    metal.

    (1)     Note.  The use of a microorganism during the production of free
    metal is proper for Class 75.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    343+,   for processes utilizing a nonmetallic liquid to produce or to treat
    free metal in powder form.

    416+,   for processes at 300 degrees C or greater combined with a step
    utilizing a nonmetallic liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, for cleaning and liquid
    contact of metalliferous materials, per se.

    (1)     Note.  Any process recovering free metal from the contacting liquid
    or from the metal substrate by chemical reduction belongs in Class 75 even
    though cleaning is involved.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, for electrical and wave
    energy processes and apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  Patents including a claim or claims classifiable in Class
    204 and equally classifiable in Class 75 are classified as originals in
    Class 75 and cross-referenced to Class 204.

    (2)     Note.  In a claim containing both Class 204 and Class 75 operation,
    the patent is placed as an original in Class 75 if, in a branch of the
    process, it is essential to perform the Class 204 operation before the
    Class 75 free metal separation.  If, however, in a branch of the process,
    it is essential to perform the Class 75 free metal separation before the
    Class 204 operation, the original is placed in Class 204 and crossed to
    Class 75.

    (3)     Note.  The measurement of electrical potential (i.e., millivolts)
    is not sufficient to take a Class 75 process to Class 204 as an original.

    (4)     Note.  See section III, CLASSIFICATION LINES AND SEARCH NOTES TO
    OTHER CLASSES, of the Class 204 definition for an expansion of the class
    line between Class 75 and Class 204, including a superiority listing of
    classes providing for various metals, alloys, and metal stocks and methods
    of manufacturing them.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, appropriate subclasses for electrolytic
    treatment, especially subclasses 334+ for electrolytic synthesis in
    general, subclasses 557+ for electrolytic preparation of a metal alloy, and
    subclasses 560+ for electrolytic preparation of free metal.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, for processes of removing metal
    ions from solution to purify the liquid.  However, processes that produce a
    free metal go to Class 75 as original and are crossed to Class 210 if
    purification of a liquid is involved.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, for chemical processes of
    treating metalliferous material to obtain a metal containing compound,
    processes that involve production of metal compounds or extracting,
    leaching or dissolving processes utilizing chemical treatment which do not
    produce free metal.

    (1)     Note.  Patents including claims classifiable in Class 423 and
    equally comprehensive claims classifiable in Class 75 are classified as
    original in Class 75 and cross-referenced to Class 423.

    (2)     Note. Hydrometallurgical processes recovering metal values go to
    Class 423.  However, if it can be determined conclusively that free (i.e.,
    zero valent) metal is the metal value obtained, the patent is placed in
    Class 75.

    427,    Coating Processes, for processes of coating metal onto metallic
    substrates wherein the intention is to manufacture a coated product per se.
     However, if the intention is recovery of free metal by electromotive
    displacement wherein the metallic substrate dissolves as the free metal
    precipitates onto the substrate, proper classification goes to Class 75
    even if a coated product is involved.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, for processes
    employing a microorganism that do not involve the production of free metal.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, for processes of making or regenerating a metal catalyst such as
    by utilizing a liquid wherein the metal is specifically structured to
    catalyze a reaction or sorb a component (e.g., Raney nickel, etc.).


CLS 75/712
TXT Involving mining or in situ operation:

    Process under subclass 711 which involves operations at a mine or in situ
    location of the metalliferous material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, for processes
    involving mining or in situ operation that do not utilize chemical
    reduction to the free metal state.


CLS 75/713
TXT From photography material:

    Process under subclass 711 wherein the free metal is recovered from
    photography materials or developing solutions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, particularly subclasses 398+, for processes of regenerating
    processing compositions.  If a regenerated processing composition is the
    intended result, the original goes to Class 430 with a mandatory cross to
    Class 75 if free metal (e.g., Silver(Ag), etc.) is also recovered.


CLS 75/714
TXT From electrolytic or cementation slime:

    Process under subclass 711 that produces free metal from a starting
    material which is a residue or mixture of metalliferous materials from an
    electrolytic or displacement operation.


CLS 75/715
TXT Removing coating to recover free metal from substrate or coating:

    Process under subclass 711 wherein a coating is removed from a substrate
    and free metal is recovered from either the substrate or coating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, for cleaning of metallic
    materials, per se.  If a free metal is recovered from a cleaning solution,
    the original goes  to Class 75 with a mandatory cross to Class 134 for
    cleaning.  If the scrap or waste product is treated to recover a free metal
    substrate, the original goes to Class 75.

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, for etching processes.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 79.1-79.5 for etching or brightening
    compositions or subclass 364 for solvent compositions useful for leaching
    or dissolving metal substrates.

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses for compositions designed to clean specialized metallic articles
    or bare metal substrates, per se.

    521,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, for processes of treating
    scrap or waste to recover a solid polymer therefrom.  If free metal is
    recovered, the original goes to Class 75 with a mandatory cross to Class
    521 if the solid polymer is also recovered.


CLS 75/716
TXT From Tin(Sn) scrap or Tin plate:

    Process under subclass 715 wherein the coating is removed from Tin(Sn)
    scrap or Tin plate.

    (1)     Note.  A "detinning" process recovering and identifying a free
    metal substrate or recovering Tin as the free metal is placed in Class 75
    as an original.  However, if there is no identification of recovered free
    metal substrate and a tin compound is produced or recovered without
    recovery of tin as a free metal, placement goes to Class 423 as original.


CLS 75/717
TXT Reducing to free metal with gas:

    Process under subclass 711 wherein a gas (e.g., Hydrogen, Sulfur dioxide,
    Carbon monoxide, hydrocarbon, etc.) is used to reduce a metalliferous
    material to free metal.

    (1)     Note.  Partial reduction with a reducing gas from one ionic form to
    another is not sufficient for placement here.  Free metal must be formed as
    a result of the gaseous treatment for this subclass.


CLS 75/718
TXT Copper(Cu) recovered as free metal:

    Process under subclass 717 wherein the free metal produced is Copper(Cu).


CLS 75/719
TXT Using Sulfur dioxide:

    Process under subclass 718 wherein Sulfur dioxide is the gas.


CLS 75/720
TXT Noble metal recovered as free metal:

    Process under subclass 717 wherein the free metal recovered is a Noble
    metal (i.e., Ruthenium(Ru), Rhodium(Rh), Palladium(Pd), Osmium(Os),
    Iridium(Ir), Platinum(Pt), Silver(Ag), Gold(Au)).


CLS 75/721
TXT Utilizing organic reducing agent:

    Process under subclass 711 wherein an organic compound is used as a
    reducing agent for producing free metal.


CLS 75/722
TXT Involving organic compound containing metal or organic agent for
    agglomerating metal:

    Process under subclass 711 wherein an organic compound containing a metal
    (e.g., complex, solvent, resin, etc.) is involved at any stage in the
    process or process wherein an organic agent for agglomerating free metal
    (e.g., collecting agent, flocculation agent, flotation agent, etc.) is
    involved.

    (1)     Note.  Processes treating metalliferous materials and producing or
    recovering organo-metallic complexes without free metal production should
    be placed in the appropriate Organic Chemistry Class.  However, if a free
    metal is produced, proper classification is in Class 75.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    413,    for production of free metal from metal carbonyls or Carbon
    monoxide metallic complexes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    534,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 10+ for organic compounds containing
    radioactive metals and processes of producing same and subclasses 15+ for
    organic compounds containing rare earth metals and processes of producing
    same.

    556,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 1+ for organic compounds containing
    heavy metals and processes of producing same.


CLS 75/723
TXT Natural or synthetic polymer:

    Process under subclass 722 wherein the organic compound is a natural or
    synthetic polymer (e.g., resin, protein, etc.).


CLS 75/724
TXT Displacing by another metal (i.e., electromotive series):

    Process under subclass 711 wherein a more electropositive free metal
    displaces a less electropositive metal from solution in a free metal form,
    while the more electropositive metal goes into solution in ionic form.

    (1)     Note.  This process is sometimes referred to as cementation.

    (2)     Note.  Electrowinning will be considered to mean separation of
    metals by electrolysis proper for Class 205 unless otherwise indicated.  A
    few patents use the term electrowinning to refer to displacement and when
    indicated proper classification is in Class 75.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 334+ or 687+, as appropriate, for
    electrowinning or separation of metals by electrolysis.


CLS 75/725
TXT Lead(Pb) or Zinc(Zn) recovered as free metal:

    Process under subclass 724 wherein the free metal recovered by displacement
    is Lead(Pb) or Zinc(Zn).


CLS 75/726
TXT Copper(Cu) recovered as free metal:

    Process under subclass 724 wherein the free metal recovered by displacement
    is Copper(Cu).


CLS 75/727
TXT And flotation:

    Process under subclass 726 wherein flotation in liquid is involved as a
    means of separating solid material from other solid material or from the
    liquid and free copper metal is produced at any stage of the process.


CLS 75/728
TXT And injecting or pressurizing with air or Oxygen:

    Process under subclass 726 wherein air or Oxygen is injected into the
    liquid or process wherein the liquid is subjected to treatment with air or
    Oxygen at pressures exceeding atmospheric pressure.


CLS 75/729
TXT From Cyanide solution:

    Process under subclass 726 wherein the Copper(Cu) free metal is
    precipitated from a Cyanide containing solution thereof.


CLS 75/730
TXT With agitating or abrading:

    Process under subclass 726 wherein an agitating or abrading action is
    performed with the liquid or on the solid metalliferous material.


CLS 75/731
TXT Utilizing leaching agent containing Sulfur(S):

    Process under subclass 726 which utilizes a Sulfur(S) containing chemical
    agent to leach the metalliferous material.


CLS 75/732
TXT Noble metal recovered as free metal:

    Process under subclass 724 wherein the free metal recovered by displacement
    is a Noble metal (i.e., Ruthenium(Ru), Rhodium(Rh), Palladium(Pd),
    Osmium(Os), Iridium(Ir), Platinum(Pt), Silver(Ag), Gold(Au)).


CLS 75/733
TXT Silver(Ag) recovered as free metal:

    Process under subclass 732 wherein the free metal recovered by displacement
    is Silver(Ag).


CLS 75/734
TXT And injecting or pressurizing with air or Oxygen:

    Process under subclass 733 wherein air or Oxygen is injected into the
    liquid or process wherein the liquid is subjected to treatment with air or
    Oxygen at pressures exceeding atmospheric pressure.


CLS 75/735
TXT From Cyanide solution:

    Process under subclass 733 wherein the Silver(Ag) free metal is
    precipitated from a Cyanide containing solution thereof.


CLS 75/736
TXT Gold(Au) recovered as free metal:

    Process under subclass 732 wherein the free metal recovered by displacement
    is Gold(Au).


CLS 75/737
TXT From Cyanide solution:

    Process under subclass 736 wherein the Gold(Au) free metal is precipitated
    from a Cyanide containing solution thereof.


CLS 75/738
TXT Nickel(Ni) or Cobalt(Co) recovered as free metal:

    Process under subclass 724 wherein the free metal recovered by displacement
    is Nickel(Ni) or Cobalt(Co).


CLS 75/739
TXT Utilizing chemical agent to precipitate free metal:

    Process under subclass 711 wherein precipitation of free metal occurs when
    a chemical agent is added to the metalliferous material.


CLS 75/740
TXT Copper(Cu) recovered as free metal:

    Process under subclass 739 wherein the free metal recovered is Copper(Cu).


CLS 75/741
TXT Noble metal recovered as free metal:

    Process under subclass 739 wherein the free metal recovered is a Noble
    metal (i.e., Ruthenium(Ru), Rhodium(Rh), Palladium(Pd), Osmium(Os),
    Iridium(Ir), Platinum(Pt), Silver(Ag), Gold(Au)).


CLS 75/742
TXT Cleaning, leaching or dissolving of Mercury(Hg):

    Process under subclass 711 wherein Mercury (Hg) is subjected to cleaning,
    leaching or dissolving to provide a refined Mercury.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    388,    for preparing for amalgamation, preparing and amalgamating, or
    breaking an amalgam to produce free metal (e.g., Mercury).


CLS 75/743
TXT With leaching or dissolving:

    Process under subclass 711 wherein treatment of metalliferous material
    involves a leaching or dissolving operation at any stage in the production
    of free metal.


CLS 75/744
TXT Noble metal recovered as free metal:

    Process under subclass 743 wherein the free metal recovered is a Noble
    metal (i.e., Ruthenium(Ru), Rhodium(Rh), Palladium(Pd), Osmium(Os),
    Iridium(Ir), Platinum(Pt), Silver(Ag), Gold(Au)).


CLS 75/745
TXT Alkali metal, singly or in combination:

    Process under subclass 710 in which an Alkali metal (i.e., Lithium(Li),
    Sodium(Na), Potassium(K), Rubidium(Rb), Cesium(Cs)) is produced or a metal
    that contains over 50 percent by weight Alkali metal, singly or in
    combination, is treated.


CLS 75/746
TXT Consolidating metalliferous material (e.g., ore, tailings, flue dust,
    fluxes, etc.) by agglomerating, compacting, or heat treating; preparatory
    process therefor; or treating consolidated material therefrom:

    Process under subclass 330 for consolidating a metalliferous material
    (e.g., ore, tailings, flue dust, fluxes, etc.) to concentrate a desired
    metalliferous component or to perfect the metalliferous material for a
    metallurgical operation by compacting, agglomerating, or heat treatment;
    preparatory process therefor; or treatment of consolidated metalliferous
    material prepared thereby - wherein (1) there is no chemical production of
    free metal that remains in the product and (2) the product is amenable to a
    Class 75 or Class 420 refining or alloying operation.

    (1)     Note.  Consolidating of metalliferous material which is an ore may
    involve beneficiation.  Beneficiation processes not involving consolidation
    of metalliferous materials will be found in other classes indicated in the
    following search notes if no free metal is in the product or elsewhere in
    this class if free metal is produced and present in the product.

    (2)     Note.  These subclasses 746+ will be considered the residual
    location taking combination of processes involving such consolidation and
    other process classes even when further Class 75 or 420 metallurgical
    operation is not expressed in the specification.

    (3)     Note.  If the product of the process contains a free metal
    chemically produced by the process, classification goes to the above
    process subclasses even if consolidation is involved or even if only small
    amounts of free metal are produced that remain in the final product.

    (4)     Note.  However, if undesirable materials are removed as free metal
    during the aforedescribed consolidation process, classification remains in
    this section of Class 75.

    (5)     Note.  If consolidation of the type hereinabove set forth without
    free metal production takes place at any stage of the process,
    classification remains in this section of Class 75 even if the final
    product is not a consolidated product. However, the final product must be
    in intermediate form amenable to Class 75 or 420 refining or alloying.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    303+,   for charge or solid treating compositions for treating molten metal
    and particularly subclasses 310, 311 and 313+ for consolidated compositions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, subclass 313 for agglomerating
    finely divided nonmetallic elements or inorganic compounds by treatments
    which cause coalescence of the particles and which involve only physical
    processes not specifically provided for in some other class.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, for processes of
    drying ore or metalliferous material.  However, if consolidation of the
    type hereinabove set forth is combined with drying and gas or vapor contact
    with solids, proper classification goes to Class 75.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, for processes of making glass by fusing
    metalliferous materials.

    106,    Compositions:  Coatings or Plastics, for processes of preparing
    molding, hydrosetting, filler, aggregate or pigment compositions containing
    metalliferous materials.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, for cleaning and liquid
    contact of metalliferous materials, per se.  However, cleaning or liquid
    contact involving consolidated metalliferous material as hereinabove set
    forth is proper for Class 75 if a chemical step is involved.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, for thermolytic processes,
    not elsewhere provided, for treating carbonaceous material to produce coke
    or when it is uncertain that the process involves consolidation or treating
    of a consolidated metalliferous material as hereinabove set forth.  If
    coking of a consolidated metalliferous composition is involved, it goes to
    this section of Class 75, unless it can be determined that free metal is
    produced.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, for electrolytic processes of treating
    metalliferous material. Combinations of electrolysis and consolidation as
    hereinabove described are placed as original in Class 75 and crossed to
    Class 205.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, for concentration
    processes which involve the separation of ore or metalliferous materials by
    nonchemical means (e.g., flotation, screening, amalgamation).  However, if
    consolidation of the type set forth hereinabove is combined with the
    classifying, separating and assorting of solids, proper classification goes
    to Class 75.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, for processes of separating a
    component from a liquid.  If consolidation of metalliferous material of the
    type hereinabove set forth is involved at any stage of the process, proper
    classification goes to Class 75 even if liquid purification is involved and
    a cross-reference is placed in Class 210.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, for processes of
    disintegrating ore or metalliferous material for the purpose of reducing
    particle size.  Particularly see subclasses 3+ in Class 241.  Combination
    of comminution or disintegration and Class 209 separation go to Class 241.
    Combination of comminution or disintegration with consolidation as
    hereinabove set forth go to Class 75 whether or not Class 209 separation is
    involved unless an intended use divergent from a Class 75 or 420 refining
    or alloying operation is expressed.

    252,    Compositions, for processes, not elsewhere provided, of making
    magnetic or chemical treating compositions containing metalliferous
    materials.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    particularly subclasses 109+ for uniting of bulk assembly particulate
    materials and for methods of compacting and briquetting nonmetallic
    particles intended for uses other than Class 75 or Class 420 refining or
    alloying.  However, processes preparing consolidated metalliferous charges
    or metalliferous treating agents amenable to Class 75 or Class 420 refining
    or alloying operation go as original to this section of Class 75.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, for producing metals, alloys or metal
    containing compositions in a solid or compact state from powdered or
    particulate material with or without heating.  If a consolidated
    metalliferous composition is intended for Class 75 or 420 refining or
    alloying operation, proper classification of the process of consolidation
    goes to Class 75.  The consolidation of free metal containing flue dust or
    inclusion of a free metal reactant (i.e., powdered aluminum) in a compacted
    metalliferous product intended for Class 75 or 420 refining or alloying
    goes to this section of Class 75.  Here the line is strictly one of intent.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, for chemical processes of
    beneficiating ore or metalliferous material that provide intermediate
    products even if intended for a Class 75 or Class 420 operation.  However,
    if the chemical process includes a step of consolidation of the type
    hereinbefore set forth, classification goes to Class 75.

    (1)     Note.  Patents including claims classifiable in Class 423 and
    equally comprehensive claims classifiable in Class 75 are classified in
    Class 75 and cross-referenced to Class 423.

    (2)     Note.  If a free metal is produced, classification goes to Class 75
    or if an alloy is produced to Class 420 even when chemical steps are
    involved.  If the free metal produced by the chemical process ends up in
    the product as a free metal, proper classification is in the above free
    metal section of Class 75 and not in this consolidation section of Class 75.

    (3)     Note.  Processes of roasting or treating iron oxide ores to change
    oxidation state without free metal production go to Class 423.  However, if
    consolidation is also involved as set forth hereinabove, classification
    goes to this section of Class 75.

    (4)     Note.  Hydrometallurgical processes not producing free metal go to
    Class 423.  However, if consolidation of the type hereinabove set forth is
    involved, proper classification goes to Class 75.

    (5)     Note.  Processes of removing an impurity from an ore (e.g.,
    roasting, desulfurizing, dephosphorizing, or dearsenizing, etc.) are
    classified in Class 423, subclasses 1+ based upon the metal values
    recovered.  If no particular resulting metal value is disclosed
    classification is in Class 423 subclass 1.  However, if consolidation as
    hereinbefore set forth is involved, classification is in Class 75.

    427,    Coating Processes, for processes of coating ore or metalliferous
    material.  However, if consolidation of the type hereinabove set forth is
    present, classification goes to Class 75, even if a coated product is
    produced.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, for processes of producing ceramic, glass,
    or refractory compositions that contain fused or sintered metalliferous
    materials.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, for processes of producing metalliferous products intended for
    use as a catalyst or sorbent.  If the consolidated metalliferous material
    as hereinabove set forth is intended for use as a catalyst or sorbent, the
    original goes to Class 502.

    507,    Earth Boring, Well Treating, and Oil Field Chemistry, for well
    treating compositions containing metalliferous materials.


CLS 75/747
TXT Noble metal containing metalliferous material:

    Process under subclass 746 involving consolidation of Noble metal
    containing metalliferous material without chemical production of free Noble
    metal that remains in the product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    388,    for amalgamation processes.

    631+,   for processes of chemically reducing Noble metal containing
    metalliferous materials to the zero valent state.


CLS 75/748
TXT With vaporization of impurity as metal halide:

    Process under subclass 746 wherein an undesirable component is removed by
    reacting the ore or metalliferous material with a halogenating agent (e.g.,
    Sodium chloride, Hydrochloric acid, Chlorine, Fluorine, etc.) and the
    resulting metal halide is vaporized.


CLS 75/749
TXT With physical separation or classification of solids:

    Combined process under subclass 746 that involves separating solid
    materials and assorting or segregating them into grades or classes
    according to physical characteristics (e.g., flotation, screening,
    flocculation, etc.) of solids.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    746,    for the line between Class 209 and Class 75 and for combined
    operations acceptable to Class 75.


CLS 75/750
TXT By sifting:

    Process under subclass 749 that includes a sifting (e.g., screening, etc.)
    operation to separate or classify solid material.


CLS 75/751
TXT With heat treatment  (e.g., calcinating, fusing, indurating, roasting,
    sintering, vaporizing, etc.):

    Process under subclass 746 which includes heat treatment (e.g.,
    calcinating, fusing, indurating, roasting, sintering, vaporizing, etc.)
    that may occur before, after, or during consolidation.


CLS 75/752
TXT Vaporizing metalliferous impurity:

    Process under subclass 751 involving the removal of undesirable
    metalliferous material by vaporization thereof.

    (1)     Note.  If the vaporization of elemental or free metal is involved,
    the subject matter is placed here only if the metal is considered an
    impurity.  Otherwise, the subject matter is classified in the above
    refining, or purifying subclasses for free metal production or Class 420
    for alloy production.

    (2)     Note.  Following precedent, Arsenic(As) is considered a metal for
    purposes of classification in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    748,    for vaporization of impurity as a metal halide.


CLS 75/753
TXT With leaching, dissolving, or washing:

    Process under subclass 751 wherein the consolidated metalliferous material
    or the material undergoing consolidation is subjected to a leaching,
    dissolving, or washing treatment.


CLS 75/754
TXT By suspension (e.g., fluid bed, cyclone, etc.):

    Process under subclass 751 wherein the consolidated metalliferous material
    or the material undergoing consolidation is heat treated in the suspended
    state (e.g., fluid bed, cyclone, etc.).


CLS 75/755
TXT On moving grate, moving pallet, or endless belt:

    Process under subclass 751 wherein the consolidated metalliferous material
    or the material undergoing consolidation is heat treated on a moving grate,
    moving pallet, or endless belt (e.g., Dwight-Loyd, Greenawalt apparatus,
    etc.).


CLS 75/756
TXT Using multi-layers:

    Process under subclass 755 wherein the material undergoing heat treatment
    is placed on the grate, pallet, or belt in more than one layer defined by
    particle characteristics or interspersed with a layer of diverse material
    (e.g., fuel, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  The multi-layers do not refer to coatings on a pellet,
    briquette, or consolidated material but refer solely to the layering of
    materials undergoing treatment on the moving apparatus.


CLS 75/757
TXT With gas recycling for reusing:

    Process under subclass 755 wherein gas used or produced in the heat
    treatment is recycled or reused in the same heat treatment process or in a
    diverse operation.


CLS 75/758
TXT Sintering:

    Process under subclass 755 wherein the consolidated metalliferous material
    or the material undergoing consolidation is sintered by the heat treatment.


CLS 75/759
TXT Of consolidated starting material:

    Process under subclass 758 wherein the metalliferous material is
    consolidated (e.g., agglomerated, compacted, indurated, or presintered,
    etc.) prior to the instant sintering.


CLS 75/760
TXT In shaft furnace or multi-hearth furnace:

    Process under subclass 751 wherein the  consolidated metalliferous material
    or the material undergoing consolidation is heat treated in an upright
    cylindrical furnace known as a shaft furnace or in any furnace containing
    multiple hearths.


CLS 75/761
TXT Sintering:

    Process under subclass 760 wherein the consolidated metalliferous material
    or the material undergoing consolidation is sintered by the heat treatment.


CLS 75/762
TXT In rotary kiln:

    Process under subclass 751 wherein the consolidated metalliferous material
    of the material undergoing consolidation is heat treated and agitated at
    any process stage by a chamber or converter that rotates 360 degrees.


CLS 75/763
TXT Sintering:

    Process under subclass 762 wherein the consolidated metalliferous material
    or the material undergoing consolidation is sintered by the heat treatment.


CLS 75/764
TXT Coking of binder or additive:

    Process under subclass 751 wherein a carbonaceous binder or additive is
    subjected to an in situ destructive distillation producing a consolidated
    metalliferous material containing or coated with coke.


CLS 75/765
TXT Sintering or with agglomerating or compacting:

    Process under subclass 751 wherein sintering or heat treatment of
    agglomerated or compacted metalliferous material is involved.


CLS 75/766
TXT With coal, coke, pitch, asphalt, or tar:

    Process under subclass 765 wherein coal, coke, pitch, asphalt, or tar is
    incorporated in or coated on the consolidated material or utilized as a
    fuel with the material undergoing consolidation.


CLS 75/767
TXT With synthetic polymer, natural polymer, or carbohydrate:

    Process under subclass 765 wherein a synthetic polymer, natural polymer, or
    carbohydrate is incorporated in or coated on the consolidated material or
    utilized as a fuel with the material undergoing consolidation.


CLS 75/768
TXT With Alkaline earth metal compound, clay, or hydrosetting agent:

    Process under subclass 765 wherein an Alkaline earth metal compound, clay,
    or hydrosetting agent (e.g., cement, etc.) is incorporated in or coated on
    the consolidated material.


CLS 75/769
TXT Sintering:

    Process under subclass 765 wherein the metalliferous material is sintered.


CLS 75/770
TXT Agglomerating or compacting:

    Process under subclass 746 wherein agglomerating or compacting or treatment
    of agglomerated or compacted metalliferous material is involved.


CLS 75/771
TXT With coal, coke, pitch, asphalt, or tar:

    Process under subclass 770 wherein coal, coke, pitch, asphalt, or tar is
    incorporated in or coated on the consolidated material.


CLS 75/772
TXT With synthetic polymer, natural polymer, or carbohydrate:

    Process under subclass 770 wherein synthetic polymer, natural polymer, or
    carbohydrate is incorporated in or coated on the consolidated material.


CLS 75/773
TXT With Alkaline earth metal compound, clay, or hydrosetting agent:

    Process under subclass 770 wherein an Alkaline earth metal compound, clay,
    or hydrosetting agent (e.g., cement, etc.) is incorporated in or coated on
    the consolidated material.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 75/950
TXT CONSOLIDATED METAL POWDER COMPOSITIONS OF95% THEORETICAL DENSITY (E.G.,
    WROUGHT, ETC.):

    This and the indented subclass(es) are collections of published disclosures
    pertaining to consolidated metal powder compositions having such a small
    amount of enclosed voids that they approach, in their properties, the
    properties of compositions made by more conventional alloying or fusion
    techniques.  These collections should not be considered complete.

    (1)     Note.  Except for patents classified in subclass 248, subject
    matter cross- referenced to this subclass should be considered a candidate
    for cross-referencing to subclasses 122.1+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 11.5+ for processes which combine
    working and heat treatment of solid metal.


CLS 75/951
TXT Oxide containing (e.g., dispersion strengthened, etc.):

    Disclosures under subclass 950 in which the composition contains a compound
    of oxygen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 400+ for metals or alloys strengthened
    by the dispersion of oxides which have been prepared by melting (fusion)
    techniques.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 639+ for a
    metallic composite in which a metal component contains oxygen.


CLS 75/952
TXT PRODUCING FIBERS, FILAMENTS, OR WHISKERS:

    Art collection under the class definition of patents drawn to producing
    powders or particles that are referred to as being "fibers", filaments", or
    "whiskers."

    SEARCH CLASS:

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and  Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, especially subclasses 75, 87, 205, and 921,
    for processes and non-coating apparatus for growing therein-defined
    single-crystal of all types of materials, including metals, which are in
    the form of whiskers.


CLS 75/953
TXT PRODUCING SPHERES:

    Art collection under the class definition of patents drawn to producing
    powders or particles that are referred to as being "spheres."


CLS 75/954
TXT PRODUCING FLAKES OR CRYSTALS:

    Art collection under the class definition of patents drawn to producing
    powders or particles that are referred to as being "flakes" or crystals".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, especially subclasses 75, 87, 205, and 921,
    for processes and non-coating apparatus for growing therein-defined
    single-crystal of all types of materials, including metals, which are in
    the form of whiskers.


CLS 75/955
TXT PRODUCING DENTAL PRODUCT:

    Art collection under the class definition of patents drawn to producing
    powders or particles that are useful as a dental product.


CLS 75/956
TXT PRODUCING PARTICLES CONTAINING A DISPERSED PHRASE:

    Art collection under the class definition of patents drawn to producing
    powders or particles that contain a dispersion.


CLS 75/957
TXT CONTINUOUS REFINING OF MOLTEN IRON(FE):

    Art collection of processes under the class definition in which molten
    Iron(Fe) is treated to improve its properties by a process in which
    untreated molten Iron is added to an apparatus either continuously or
    intermittently and treated molten Iron is correspondingly removed from the
    apparatus.  The apparatus remains substantially full of molten Iron being
    treated at all times.  The process can be carried out for an indefinite
    period as long as more untreated Iron is added.

    (1)     Note.  The use of the term  "continuous" in a patent is prima facia
    evidence that a cross reference is proper in this subclass in the absence
    of a positive indication that the process is carried out in a discontinuous
    manner, as by emptying an apparatus of treated Iron and refilling it with
    Iron to be treated.


CLS 75/958
TXT WITH CONCURRENT PRODUCTION OF IRON(FE) AND OTHER DESIRED NONMETALLIC
    PRODUCT (E.G., ENERGY, FERTILIZER, ETC.):

    Art collection of patents in which other products are intentionally
    produced along with Iron(Fe).  Excluded are the normal by-products such as
    flue gas and slag.  However, if the Iron(Fe) making process is
    intentionally modified so that the by-products have special utility a
    cross-reference is placed here.  As an example, if slag is specifically
    made to be high in phosphorus so that it is a good fertilizer a copy of the
    patent should be placed here.


CLS 75/959
TXT THERMIT-TYPE REACTION OF SOLID MATERIALS ONLY TO YIELD MOLTEN METAL:

    Art collection of patents in which a mixture of solid materials including a
    reducible metal compound and a solid reducing agent are reacted so that the
    heat of reaction is sufficient to yield the reduced metal in molten
    condition.

    (1)     Note.  A common example is the reaction of Iron oxide and
    Aluminum(A1) powder which proceeds with sufficient vigor to produce Iron in
    molten form.

    (2)     Note.  Excluded herefrom are patents which treat molten metal with
    compositions which have ingredients which interact exothermically.  For
    such patents see the appropriate subclass above relating to the treatment
    of the particular molten metal involved.


CLS 75/960
TXT IN ZERO GRAVITY ENVIRONMENT:

    Art collection of patents in which any step takes place in an environment
    free of significant gravity (e.g., in outer space).


CLS 75/961
TXT TREATING FLUE DUST TO OBTAIN METAL (OTHER THAN BY CONSOLIDATION):

    Art collection under the class definition of patents drawn to obtaining
    metal from the flue dust that issues from metallurgical furnaces such as
    blast furnaces.  Excluded are processes which merely consolidate the flue
    dust.


CLS 75/962
TXT TREATING OR USING MILL SCALE:

    Art collection under the class definition drawn to patents which treat mill
    scale to obtain metal, or which use mill scale in metallurgical processes
    other than in the open hearth manufacture of steel.

    (1)     Note.  Mill scale is the oxide which results when hot metal is
    rolled or forged in the air.  It is usually Iron oxide.


CLS 76/
TTL METAL TOOLS AND IMPLEMENTS, MAKING

CLS 76/
TXT This class comprises special machines, processes, blanks, and dies for
    making tools, many of which are designated by the subclass titles, while
    the remainder are to be found in the proper miscellaneous subclasses.

    The class includes mechanisms for sharpening various cutting-tools by the
    removal of the stock adjacent to the edge of the same by a cutting or
    filing action as distinguished from an abrading action.  Mechanism for
    sharpening harrow-disks, etc., are included in this class under subclass
    85, because of their analogy to the other types of cutting sharpeners.

    This class also includes machines and processes for making dies, whether to
    be used as hand-operated implements or in forging or other machines.

    General operation machines, though adapted by the substitution of special
    tool-forming dies to form tools, are classified in the general operation
    classes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses for a process or an
    apparatus for shaping metal by merely deforming it, e.g., twisting a drill
    bit or rolling a saw blank, or the same including cutting; and subclasses
    462+ for a tool, e.g., a die, per se.

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses, for presses not elsewhere provided
    for.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclass 905 for cutting a peephole in a box blank.


CLS 76/1
TXT Machines for making tools and implements not classifiable elsewhere.


CLS 76/2
TXT Machines specially adapted to form augers.

    (1)     Note.  A machine for cutting a spiral groove in an auger is
    classified in Class 409, Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 65+.

    (2)     Note.  Machines for twisting augers are classified in Class 72,
    Metal Deforming, subclasses 64+ and 298+.


CLS 76/3
TXT Machines for cutting away the material of the auger-bit adjacent to the
    cutting edge to give clearance to the blade and also machines for forming
    the cutting-lips of the bit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, for grinding, generally.


CLS 76/4
TXT Machines specially adapted to form dies to be used in metal shaping or
    forging machines or in punching-machines.

    (1)     Note.  For a machine adapted to cut a a die, see Classes 82,
    Turning, and 409, Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses for presses not elsewhere provided
    for.


CLS 76/5.1
TXT Drill forming or sharpening:
    Machine under the class definition  specifically adapted to change a member
    having some of the physical characteristics of a drill (i.e., a drill
    blank) to a member having the physical characteristics of a drill; or (2)
    to make the cutting of a drill of better shape for cutting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 64+ and 298+ for twisting metal to form
    a twist-drill blank.

    409,    Gear  Cutting, Milling or Planing, subclasses 65+ for milling a
    groove in a member to form a drill blank.

    451,    Abrading, for sharpening a drill by grinding with an abrasive
    material.


CLS 76/5.4
TXT Forging:
    Machine under subclass 5.1 comprising changing a drill blank to a drill by
    the action of a pair of dies having opposite shape to that of the desired
    drill, that move toward each other to effect shaping.


CLS 76/5.6
TXT Punching:
    Machine under subclass 5.1 comprising changing a drill blank to a drill by
    the action of a fixed tool and a movable tool that moves toward the fixed
    tool to shape the blank therebetween.


CLS 76/6
TXT Machines for forging tool-heads which are provided with eyes in which the
    handle is to be secured, also machines for piercing the eyes, and machines
    for making hammers, picks, mattocks, and hoes having eyes for the handles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses and particularly subclasses
    343+.


CLS 76/7
TXT Machines specially adapted to forge and shape ax-polls and hatchet-heads.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6.


CLS 76/8
TXT Machines having plungers or dies adapted to be adjusted in such a manner
    that ax-heads having different weights may be forged in the same dies.


CLS 76/9
TXT Machines adapted to forge and shape various tool-heads having
    handle-sockets (not eyes), straps, or tangs, including hoes, shovels,
    rakes, pitchforks, etc.


CLS 76/10
TXT Machines specially adapted to forge and shape the parts of wrenches.


CLS 76/11
TXT Machines for splitting tool-blanks, usually for the purpose of forming the
    "straps" to which the handle is secured.  Also machines for splitting
    ax-polls for the insertion of the steel bit.


CLS 76/12
TXT Miscellaneous machines for forming the cutting ribs or teeth of files and
    rasps.

    (1)     Note.  For electrolytic sharpening or resharpening files, see Class
    204, Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, in the appropriate apparatus
    subclasses; and for electrolytic processes for sharpening or resharpening
    files, see Class 204, subclass 129.55.

    (2)     Note. For electrolytic apparatus used to sharpen or resharpen
    files, see Class 204, Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses
    194+.

    (3)     Note. For electrolytic processes for sharpening or resharpening
    files, see Class 205, Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein,
    and Methods of Preparing the Compositions, subclass 664.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for machines which form saw teeth by forcing a chisel into the edge
    of a blank to cut and swage up the teeth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 77 for machines and processes for preparing
    file-blanks by filing the surfaces of the rough blanks.

    72,     Metal Deforming, for forging and swaging apparatus peculiarly
    adapted for forging toothed articles such as milling cutters, tapping
    tools, etc.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 194+ for an
    electrolytic apparatus used to sharpen or resharpen a file or rasp.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclass 664 for electrolytic sharpening or
    resharpening of a file or rasp.

    451,    Abrading, for a process of or machine for cleaning or resharpening
    a file by means of a blast of sand or other abrading material.


CLS 76/13
TXT Machines specially adapted to form rasping-teeth upon file-blanks, usually
    by swaging up the teeth from the surface of the blank by means of punches.
    These machines are usually characterized by mechanism adapted to shift the
    bed or the tool in such a manner as to form the teeth in staggered rows.


CLS 76/14
TXT Machines which force up the file-ribs by means of a cutter or punch which
    is actuated by pressure as distinguished from a blow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 184+ for "roller" grooving of work, and
    other appropriate subclasses for metal deforming by other means.


CLS 76/15
TXT Machines in which the cutter is raised against a spring or weight by means
    of a trip-cam or other device, which upon release causes the cutter to
    strike a blow upon the file-blank.


CLS 76/16
TXT Machines in which the cutter is raised against a spring or weight by means
    of a trip-cam, which upon release causes the cutter to strike a blow upon
    the file-blank and which is provided with means, usually automatic, for
    increasing or decreasing the force of the blow in conformity to the width
    or thickness of the file-blank as it is fed beneath the cutter.


CLS 76/17
TXT Machines in which the cutter is supported over the blank, usually by a
    spring, and is struck by a hammer, generally power-operated.


CLS 76/18
TXT Machines in which the cutter is supported over the blank, usually by a
    spring, and is struck by a power-operated hammer, the force of the blow
    being increased or diminished, usually automatically in conformity to the
    width or thickness of the file-blank as it is fed beneath the cutter.


CLS 76/19
TXT Pressers for holding the file-blank upon the bed of the file-cutting
    machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses for presses not elsewhere provided
    for.


CLS 76/20
TXT Beds for supporting the file-blanks, also the clamps for securing said
    blanks to the beds.

    (1)     Note.  The beds in this class are mostly of the oscillating type.


CLS 76/21
TXT Cutter-heads and holders for the cutting-tool or punch of file or rasp
    making machines.


CLS 76/22
TXT Miscellaneous devices for feeding the blanks to the file cutting or
    punching mechanisms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.


CLS 76/23
TXT Mechanisms for feeding the blanks to the file cutting or punching devices,
    comprising a screw-feed for advancing the blank carriage or clamp.


CLS 76/24.1
TXT Process:
    Method under subclass 12 of forming cutting ribs or teeth on the surface of
    a file or rasp.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 194+ for an
    electrolytic apparatus used to sharpen or resharpen a file or rasp.

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclass 664 for electrolytic sharpening or
    resharpening of a file or rasp.


CLS 76/24.5
TXT Chemically sharpening:
    Method under subclass 24.1 of restoring previously sharpened cutting edges
    of a file or rasp to sharp condition by application of a chemical that
    modifies the surface characteristics thereof.


CLS 76/25.1
TXT SAW-MAKING OR FURBISHING DEVICE OR MACHINE:
    Miscellaneous apparatus under the class definition for changing a saw blank
    into a toothed saw blade or for treating a saw blade to make it more
    suitable for sawing.

    (1)     Note.  A "saw blank" normally comprises a metallic sheet having two
    generally parallel planar surfaces and a perimeter; a "saw blade" is
    similar in structure but has formed along at least a portion of the
    perimeter a series of aligned cutting teeth intended to follow each other
    in a cutting action.

    (2)     Note.  The apparatus of this subclass may ba a randomly manipulated
    hand tool, i.e., a "device" or it may be a base mounted structure, i.e., a
    "machine".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    for method of changing a saw blank into a toothed saw blade, and
    for a saw blank, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, for grinding to shape, generally, including sharpening a
    drill or other tool, other than a saw.  Note that abrading to sharpen a
    saw, contrary to the general line between Class 76 and Class 451, is
    included in Class 76.


CLS 76/26
TXT Machines for stretching and straightening saw-blades or sections thereof
    for the purpose of reducing "buckled" portions by means of a hammering
    action; also devices for supporting saws upon anvils, thus adapting them to
    be stretched by a manually-operated tool.


CLS 76/27
TXT Machines for stretching and straightening saw-blades, comprising a pair of
    rollers or a roller and bed, between which the saw-blade is passed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the notes thereunder.


CLS 76/28
TXT Machines in which saw-teeth are formed upon a blank by means of a chisel,
    which, being forced into the edge of the blank cuts and swages up the
    saw-teeth, also machines having chisel-cutters adapted to shave the tooth,
    the line of movement of the cutter being in the plane of the disk.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 325+ for a composite metal deforming
    and cutting tool.


CLS 76/29
TXT Machines for notching the blank to form saw-teeth by means of a cutting-die
    or punch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses for cutting devices generally, and
    particularly subclass 917 for notching devices.


CLS 76/30
TXT Machines which remove the metal at the bases of saw-teeth to lengthen the
    teeth by means of a die-cutter or punch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses and particularly subclass 917
    (notching).


CLS 76/31
TXT Machines for sharpening saws in which a file or sharpening tool is
    positively guided in its reciprocation across the saw. The patents in this
    subclass are mainly hand-operated devices.


CLS 76/32
TXT Machines provided with reciprocating sharpening tools especially adapted to
    sharpen gin-saws.  These machines are usually characterized by crossed
    files.

    (1)     Note.  Machines for sharpening gin-saws by means of a rotary file
    or grinder are classified in this class, subclass 37 and indented
    subclasses.


CLS 76/33
TXT Machines for sharpening the teeth of saws by means of a reciprocating file
    or tool in which the carriage supporting the filing mechanism is
    automatically moved forward as the successive teeth are sharpened.

    (1)     Note.  Machines in which the carriage is fed forward by hand are
    classified in this class, subclass 31.


CLS 76/34
TXT Machines in which the saw-teeth are sharpened by a reciprocating file or
    tool and which are provided with automatic means for feeding the saw-clamp
    forward as the successive teeth are sharpened.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76,     for clamp-feeding mechanism.


CLS 76/35
TXT Machines in which the saw-teeth are sharpened by a reciprocating file or
    tooth and which are provided with means for engaging the teeth of the saw
    and feeding it forward as the successive teeth are sharpened.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 52+ for
    means to engage modifications in material to advance the material.


CLS 76/36
TXT File-holders having guides or indicators attached to and carried by the
    file in its movement which show to the operator the angle at which the file
    is being held.

    (1)     Note.  Guides supported by the saw-clamp are classified in this
    class, subclass 31.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    407,    Cutters, for Shaping, subclass 29.15 for a file or rasp holder, per
    se.


CLS 76/37
TXT Miscellaneous machines which sharpen the teeth of saws by means of a rotary
    file, milling-tool, or abrading-tool, not classifiable in the following
    subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, appropriate
    subclasses, for drilling machines which feed the work or tool or both
    relative to one another along the axis of rotation of the tool; and see the
    Notes thereto for other machines in which a rotating tool is fed relative
    to work.


CLS 76/38
TXT Machines which sharpen the teeth of saws by means of a helical or spiral
    file, cutter, or abrading devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 1+ for gear cutting,
    generally.


CLS 76/39
TXT Machines which sharpen saws by means of a rotary file or abrading-disk
    having oblique or helical ribs adapted to engage the teeth of the saw for
    the purpose of feeding the saw forward.  The disks or cutters in this class
    of machines usually have a section broken away to permit the feeding of the
    saw.


CLS 76/40
TXT Machines for sharpening the teeth of saws in which a rotary file or
    abrading-tool carried by a pivoted gate or bracet is adapted to be swung
    toward and from the saw-blade.


CLS 76/41
TXT Machines for sharpening the teeth of saws in which a rotary file or
    abrading-tool supported upon a sliding gate is adapted to be reciprocated
    toward and from the saw-blade.


CLS 76/42
TXT Machines for sharpening the teeth of saws by means of a rotating file,
    cutter, or abrading-tool in which the saw is supported upon a pivoted
    carriage and adapted to be swung against the rotating tool.


CLS 76/43
TXT Machines for sharpening saws by means of a rotating file, cutter or
    abrading-tool in which the saw is supported upon a sliding carriage and is
    adapted to be reciprocated into contact with the rotating tool.


CLS 76/44
TXT Machines which remove the metal at the bases of saw-teeth to lengthen the
    teeth by means of milling-cutters.  This subclass also includes machines
    having annular cutters.


CLS 76/45
TXT Filing, grinding, or other disks or cutters especially adapted for
    sharpening and gumming saw-teeth.  This subclass includes spiral files.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 174+ for tool sharpeners for cutting devices.

    407,    Cutters, for Shaping, subclasses 30+ for a rotary cutter which may
    be the product of the device of this subclass.


CLS 76/46
TXT Machines and implements in which devices for truing, the teeth of saws by
    side-dressing or making the teeth of uniform length are combined with a
    gage which is adapted to determine the relative length of the teeth or the
    amount of set of the teeth.


CLS 76/47.1
TXT Dressing or jointing:
    Furbishing apparatus under subclass 25.1 for (1) making the side surface of
    aligned teeth of the saw blade touch a common plane parallel with the plane
    of a planar surface of the blade; or (2) making the teeth of a desired
    common height.


CLS 76/48
TXT Devices specially adapted to true the teeth of circular saws in such a
    manner that the points of all the teeth will lie in the circumference of a
    circle; also devices for truing the sides of the teeth of saws.


CLS 76/49
TXT Machines and implements for shaping and truing the points and sides of the
    teeth of saws by swaging.  These machines are generally adapted to be used
    on circular saws.


CLS 76/50
TXT Machines having rotary cutting or abrading devices for truing the points
    and sides of the teeth of saws.


CLS 76/50.2
TXT Band saw dressing:
    Furbishing under subclass 47.1 for making the side surface of aligned teeth
    of a saw blade touch a common plane parallel with the plane of a planar
    surface of the blade; wherein the blade comprises a flexible, endless
    ribbon.


CLS 76/50.4
TXT Jointing:
    Furbishing apparatus under subclass 47,1 for making the teeth of a desired
    common height.


CLS 76/51
TXT Miscellaneous implements, machines, and processes for widening the points
    of the teeth of saws, not classifiable in the following subclasses.  This
    subclass also includes devices for "knocking down" the points of the teeth
    of saws.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, for metal swaging or forging apparatus generally.


CLS 76/52
TXT Machines in which the swaging-tool is pivotally supported and is forced
    forward to swage the tooth by means of a lever or system of levers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63.


CLS 76/53
TXT Machines in which the swage is slidably mounted and is adapted to be forced
    forward to swage the tooth by means of a lever or a system of levers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68.


CLS 76/54
TXT Machines for widening the points of the teeth of saws by means of camfaced
    swages, the swages being in many instances provided with rollers.  These
    machines are used for sharpening or renewing the teeth of saws. This
    subclass also includes cam-swaging machines for "knocking down" the points
    of teeth and for swaging the raker-teeth of crosscut-saws.


CLS 76/55
TXT Machines for swaging the teeth of saws in which the tooth is supported upon
    an anvil and a punch normally supported in proper position over the anvil,
    usually by a spring, is adapted to be struck by a hammer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65      and 70.


CLS 76/56
TXT Implements for swaging the teeth of saws, usually "punches", having
    properly formed swaging-faces adapted to be held in the hand and struck by
    a hammer; also tools for "knocking down" the points of the saw-teeth.


CLS 76/57
TXT Specially-formed anvils upon which the saw tooth is held by means of clamps
    or otherwise and the tooth swaged by being struck with a hammer or a punch
    held in the hand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 457+ and 476+ for a metal working
    anvil, per se, not otherwise provided for.


CLS 76/58
TXT Miscellaneous machines, implements, and processes for bending the teeth of
    saws laterally in order to give proper clearance in the cut or kerf made by
    the saw.


CLS 76/59
TXT Machines in which the teeth of the saw are given set by means of a rotary
    set--as, for example, toothed or corrugated rolls or disks.


CLS 76/60
TXT Machines in which the tooth-setting devices are forced into engagement with
    the teeth by means of a screw.


CLS 76/61
TXT Instruments having pivotally-mounted sets adapted to act upon a plurality
    of teeth simultaneously.  They are usually for simultaneously bending
    adjacent teeth in opposite directions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66.


CLS 76/62
TXT Machines in which the set or punch is carried by a pivoted arm, usually
    spring-actuated, and adapted to be operated by a trip dog or cam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15      and 67.


CLS 76/63
TXT Machines in which the set or punch is carried by a lever-operated pivoted
    arm and is adapted to bend the tooth against a properly formed anvil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52      and 68.


CLS 76/64
TXT Hand implements in the form of pliers in which the set or punch is carried
    by a pivoted arm which is actuated by one of the plier-handles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69.


CLS 76/65
TXT Machines in which a set or punch carried upon a pivoted arm is adapted to
    be struck by a hammer to give set to a tooth held upon a properly formed
    anvil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55      and 70.


CLS 76/66
TXT Machines and implements having slidably-mounted sets adapted to act upon a
    plurality of teeth simultaneously.  These devices are usually for
    simultaneously bending adjacent teeth in opposite directions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61.


CLS 76/67
TXT Machines in which a slidably mounted set, usually spring-actuated, is
    operated by a trip dog or cam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62.


CLS 76/68
TXT Machines in which a set slidably supported is operated by a lever or a
    cam-lever to bend the tooth against a suitably formed anvil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63.


CLS 76/69
TXT Hand implements in the form of pliers in which a slidably-mounted set is
    actuated by one of the pivoted handles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64.


CLS 76/70
TXT Machines in which a set slidably supported, usually by means of a spring,
    is adapted to be struck by a hammer to give set to a tooth held upon a
    suitably formed anvil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55      and 65.


CLS 76/71
TXT Machines and implements having means for engaging or embracing the tooth,
    the lateral (or oscillating) movement of the device serving to bend the
    tooth to the proper set without the cooperation of an anvil.


CLS 76/72
TXT Machines and implements in which the tooth is bent by means of a
    wedge-shaped punch or swaging device.


CLS 76/73
TXT Bevel-faced anvils upon which the saw is laid and the teeth bent to conform
    to the beveled face of the anvil by being struck by a manually-operated
    hammer.

    Search This Class, Subclass:
    57.


CLS 76/74
TXT Devices adapted to support and guide saws to sharpening, dressing, or
    setting mechanisms.  These guides are usually used to support band saws.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 719+ for tool guides.

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses. Class 269 is the residual
    locus for patents to a device for clamping, supporting and/or holding an
    article (or articles) in position to be operated on or treated.  See notes
    thereunder for other related loci.


CLS 76/75
TXT Mechanisms adapted to feed the saw-blank or saw to mechanisms for operating
    upon the same, not classifiable in the following subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.


CLS 76/76
TXT Mechanisms for feeding a clamp which holds the saw or saw-blank to the
    devices which operate upon the saw blade or teeth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22      and 34.


CLS 76/77
TXT Mechanisms for feeding the saw to the devices which operate upon the saw
    handle or teeth, which comprise a reciprocating pawl or other means for
    engaging successive teeth of the saw to feed the saw forward.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35.


CLS 76/78.1
TXT Clamp:
    Apparatus under subclass 25.1 comprising structure for gripping a saw blank
    or blade.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 273.1+, for a miscellaneous clamp or
    clamping device used in woodworking.

    269,    Work Holders, for a device of general utility to clamp or otherwise
    immobilize a workpiece being modified or treated.


CLS 76/79
TXT Clamps and vises for holding circular saws during their manufacture or
    while being sharpened.  Includes, mainly, clamps applied to the center of
    the saw, but also includes other forms of clamps having special attachments
    for centering the saw.


CLS 76/79.5
TXT Vice:
    Apparatus under subclass 78.1 including a structure for immobilizing a saw
    blank or blade.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 423+ for a process of assembling,
    generally: particularly subclass 559 for a method of holding work not
    provided for elsewhere.

    269,    Work Holders, for a device for holding a workpiece being modified,
    generally.  Class 269 is the residual locus of device for holding material
    while that material is modified.


CLS 76/80
TXT Tools especially adapted for inserting and extracting saw-teeth.


CLS 76/80.5
TXT Chain saw sharpener:
    Apparatus under subclass 25.1 for making the cutting edge of a tooth
    element of a better shape for cutting, wherein the tooth is one of a series
    pivotally connected together to follow one another in cutting.


CLS 76/81
TXT Miscellaneous devices and machines having a fibrous (i.e., leather, cloth,
    wood, etc.) working surface for sharpening razor blades and similar cutlery
    by application of the work thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 35+ when razor features, such as means for
    securing the blade in operative relation to a gauge or guard that protects
    the skin from cuts, are claimed.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 473 for a plural
    layer web or sheet including a leather layer and adapted for use as a
    strop, and subclass 904 (a cross-reference art collection) for an
    artificial leather product or stock material.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 169, 316, and 318 for a stropping machine;
    subclasses 461+ and 526+ for a sharpener having a stropping surface and an
    abrading surface; subclass 459 for a strop renewing device; and subclasses
    490+ for an abrasive surface adapted to sharpen a tool.


CLS 76/81.1
TXT Device under subclass 81 provided with means for putting the working
    surface under the proper or desired tautness.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 490+ for an abrasive sheet holder with means
    to tension the sheet thereon.


CLS 76/81.2
TXT Device under subclass 81.1 wherein the tensioning means includes a helical
    screw operator.


CLS 76/81.3
TXT Device under subclass 81 wherein the sharpening device is wound, folded or
    otherwise reduced in overall dimension for storage purposes and/or stored
    in a receptacle provided therefor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 292 for toiletry kits including a strop.


CLS 76/81.4
TXT Device under subclass 81.3 wherein storage is caused by a means which urges
    the strop to its position of confinement within the receptacle, such as a
    spring-actuated reel or a counter-weight.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 371+ for a spring power
    reeling device and subclasses 390+ for other motor powered reeling devices
    used to wind and unwind elongated material.


CLS 76/81.5
TXT Device under subclass 81 wherein the sharpening device is provided with
    means on one extreme for the purpose of suspension (i.e., hook, eye, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 317+ and more specifically 339+.


CLS 76/81.6
TXT Device under subclass 81.5 wherein the suspension means constitutes or
    comprises a swivel connection.


CLS 76/81.7
TXT Device under subclass 81 wherein said working surface is disclosed as
    following an arcuate or closed curved path during the sharpening operation.


CLS 76/81.8
TXT Device under subclass 81 wherein the working surface of the sharpening
    device is maintained in a condition other than flat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81.1    through 81.7, for other stropping devices having a nonplanar
    working surface.


CLS 76/82
TXT Miscellaneous devices and machines for sharpening cutters by removing the
    material of the cutter adjacent to the edge by cutting, filing, or
    chipping, as distinguished from abrading or swaging. There are a few
    patents for scissors-sharpeners, the action of which is somewhat analogous
    to swaging sharpeners.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 82.2.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 76.1+ for machines and processes for
    filing metal, which may be defined as cutting metal by a hard instrument
    having its surface or surfaces sharply ridged.

    451,    Abrading, for a method of or apparatus for sharpening a cutter by
    grinding.


CLS 76/82.1
TXT Devices coming under the definition of subclass 82 especially adapted to
    sharpen lawn mowers.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 56, Harvesters, subclass 250 for rotating cutting
    reel mower organizations modified to facilitate sharpening.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 419+ for an abrading device adapted to be
    attached to a cutting machine, such as a lawn mower, to sharpen the blade
    thereof.


CLS 76/82.2
TXT Devices under subclass 82 especially adapted to sharpen scissors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, especially subclass 45 for a method of abrading to
    sharpening scissors.


CLS 76/83
TXT Devices especially adapted to sharpen skates.


CLS 76/84
TXT The title is self-explanatory.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, subclass
    309 for making an abrasive tool of metal.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 684 for a
    metallic composite in which a component has a steel base.

    451,    Abrading, subclass 553 for an abrading tool comprising a metal
    rotary cylinder that turns about a stationary axis.


CLS 76/85
TXT Disk-sharpening devices, including cutting or filing tools adapted to be
    rotated about the disk or against which the disk is rotated.  This subclass
    comprises, mainly, devices for sharpening harrow disks.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 89.2 for devices for sharpening
    harrow disks, etc., by swaging by rolls or otherwise.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 437 for earth working apparatus comprising
    the combination of an earth working disk and means to sharpen it.

    451,    Abrading, especially subclasses 321+ for a device for sharpening a
    disc by grinding.


CLS 76/86
TXT Devices comprising a plurality of converging cutting or filing blades, the
    article to be sharpened being passed between them, thereby having stock
    removed from both sides of the blade adjacent to the edge thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 490+ for a tool support for a flexible-member
    abrading tool.


CLS 76/87
TXT Devices comprising a plurality of cutting disks or files, such disks being
    arranged in such a manner that the circumferences of the disks are tangent
    to the same line or overlap one another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 364+ for a work holder for use with abrading
    device.


CLS 76/88
TXT Devices for sharpening cutters comprising an edged blade or a file against
    which the article to be sharpened is directed by means of a guide usually
    angularly disposed relative to the blade.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 82.2.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 364+ for a work holder for use with abrading
    device.


CLS 76/89
TXT Devices for sharpening cutters in which the article to be sharpened is
    directed against a disk cutter or file by means of a guide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 364+ for a work holder for use with abrading
    device.


CLS 76/89.1
TXT Machines, devices and processes for serrating the metal adjacent to the
    edges of cutters, the serrations extending in most instances across the
    beveled portion of the blade and obliquely to the edge.


CLS 76/89.2
TXT Machines and devices for sharpening metal tools by forging or rolling the
    metal adjacent to the edge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the notes thereunder.


CLS 76/101.1
TXT BLANK OR PROCESS:
    Invention under the class definition comprising stock material having some
    of the physical characteristics of a desired tool; or comprising a method
    of modifying such stock material to make it into a desired tool.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a blank for, or process of making a work
    holder, if not provided for elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 428+ for a process of assembling and
    joining, generally; particularly subclass 559 for a method of holding work
    not provided for elsewhere.

    72,     Metal Deforming, for shaping metal, generally (which may be
    combined with cutting).  The operation of Class 72 may prepare a tool
    blank, but is not restricted an operation of converting such a blank into a
    tool.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    1+ for a process of making a product by laminating, not restricted to tool
    making.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 101+ for a process generally,
    which may include tool making, including only such step or steps as is
    necessary for the formation of a single joint by soldering, brazing, or
    welding.

    269,    Work Holders, for a device for holding a workpiece being modified,
    generally. Class 269 is the residual locus of a device for holding material
    while that material is modified.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling or Planing, subclasses 66+ for process of
    milling a thread or helix into a workpiece (as in forming a drill bit
    blank, a thread cutting tap, or a thread cutting die).

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, for a method of making a blank of
    general utility from metal or alloy powders by sintering, especially
    subclasses 10+ for such a method performed upon a composition which is
    particularly suited for use as a die, drill, or cutting tool, in general.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 544+ for stock
    material, generally, e.g., for indefinite length stock material of metal or
    having a metallic component; especially subclass  599 for metallic stock
    having both thickness and nonthickness surfaces of defined configuration,
    and subclass 602 for metallic stock material whose symmetrical shape varies
    in thickness longitudinally.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 28+ for a method of finishing a tool by
    abrading.


CLS 76/102
TXT Processes for forming auger bits, also blanks especially adapted to be made
    into augers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 374+ and 425+ for an
    earth boring tool made of a specific material.


CLS 76/103
TXT Processes for making the heads of axes, adzes, hammers, and hatchets
    (mainly wood-working-tools), also blanks specially adapted to be made into
    such tools.


CLS 76/104.1
TXT Cutlery:
    Blank or process under subclass 101.1 comprising stock material for, or a
    method of making an article commonly known as "cutlery".

    (1)     Note.  "Cutlery" includes a knife, scissors, hand shears, a fork or
    a spoon.


CLS 76/105
TXT Processes for making metallic table forks and spoons, also patents upon
    blanks specially adapted to be made into such articles.

    (1)     Note.  Processes for making metallic forks for heavy work are
    classified in this class, subclass 111.


CLS 76/106
TXT Processes for making hollow handles of articles of cutlery, also making
    articles of cutlery having hollow handles, also blanks specially adapted to
    be formed into such articles.


CLS 76/106.5
TXT Hand shears:
    Blank or process under subclass 104.1 comprising stock material for, or a
    method of, making a cutting device intended to be manually supported during
    operation, which device includes a pair of cutting blades that move
    adjacent to and past each other to sever a workpiece therebetween by a
    shearing action.

    (1)     Note.  A pair of scissors is included in this subclass.


CLS 76/107.1
TXT Die:
    Blank or process under subclass 101.1 comprising stock material for, or
    method of, making an instrumentality for engaging a workpiece and directly
    performing work thereon.

    (1)     Note.  "Die" includes a tool of a metal-forging machine, a metal
    shaping machine, stencil punching machine, metal shaping machine, stencil
    punching machine, metal-ornamenting machine, etc.


CLS 76/107.4
TXT Drawing die:
    Blank or process under subclass 107.1 comprising stock material for, or
    method of, making a tool having an aperture through which work is pulled to
    treat that work.


CLS 76/107.6
TXT Spinnerette:
    Blank or process under subclass 107.1 comprising stock material for, or
    method of, making a tool having relatively small, apertures through which
    flowable material is extruded to form strands of product.


CLS 76/107.8
TXT Steel rule die:
    Blank or process under subclass 107.1 comprising stock material for, or
    method of, making a tool having a cutting edge extending along a first
    plane and having a force receiving edge extending along a second plane that
    is parallel with the first plane, said tool being made of a strip of sheet
    metal with the cutting edge at one edge, the force receiving edge at an
    opposing edge wherein the sheet like dimension of the tool extends normally
    to the first and second plane.

    (1)     Note.  The die made from the blank of this subclass or by the
    method of this subclass may be used in a "clicker die" press and is similar
    in structure to some cookie cutters.


CLS 76/108.1
TXT Drill:
    Invention under subclass 107.1 comprising stock material for, or method of,
    making a tool intended to turn about an axis and cut a workpiece by
    relative rotation and relative axial movement therewith.

    (1)     Note.  Including herein the making of a metal cutting, wood
    cutting, or stone cutting drill.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 374+ and 425+ for an
    earth boring bit made of specific material.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling or Planing, subclass 66, for a process of
    milling a thread or helix on a workpiece, such as in making a drill bit,
    wherein the operation is not restricted to making of a tool.

    451,    Abrading, subclass 48 for a process of abrading a drill, including
    forming a drill bit by abrading only.


CLS 76/108.2
TXT Rock drill:
    Invention under subclass 108.1 comprising stock material for, or a method
    of, making a drill capable of cutting stone.


CLS 76/108.4
TXT Well drill:
    Invention under subclass 108.1 comprising a stock material for, or method
    of making a drill intended to penetrate the earth to access fluid therein.


CLS 76/108.6
TXT Twist drill:
    Invention under subclass 108.1 comprising stock material for, or a method
    of, making a drill having a solid center and a helically spiralled marginal
    extent revolved thereabout, and having a radially extending web that
    continuously connect the solid center and the helically spiraled marginal
    extent.


CLS 76/109
TXT Processes for making hoes, mattock, grub-hoes, or other hand-digging tools
    adapted to strike blows.


CLS 76/110
TXT Processes for making hand-operated lock keys, also patents upon blanks for
    making keys.

    (1)     Note.  It does not include processes for making watch keys, which
    are to be found in this class, subclass 114, nor does it include processes
    for making keys for holding pinions on shafts, etc.


CLS 76/111
TXT Processes for making metallic tools having teeth or tines to be used for
    heavy work, comprising pitchforks, manure-forks, garden-rakes,
    potato-rakes, etc., also blanks specially adapted to be made into such
    articles.


CLS 76/112
TXT Processes for making saws, including forming saw-teeth, sharpening,
    gumming, stretching, and setting and patching saws etc., also blanks for
    saw-blades, patches for cracked blades, etc.


CLS 76/113
TXT Processes for making shovels, spades, scoops, etc., also blanks specially
    adapted to be made into such articles.


CLS 76/114
TXT Processes for making wrenches, including watch and clock keys, also blanks
    specially adapted to be made into such articles.


CLS 76/115
TXT Rotary cutter:
    Invention under subclass 101.1 comprising stock material for, or a method
    of, making a work engaging member having a sharp cutting edge, which member
    is of generally circular configuration about a center axis, and is intended
    to turn about that axis to cut a workpiece.


CLS 76/116
TXT Cutter of sheet metal:
    Invention under subclass 101.1 comprising stock material for, or a method
    of, making a work cutting member of relatively thin metallic material.


CLS 76/117
TXT Involving use of tap or die:
    Invention under subclass 101.1 including utilization of a threaded member
    to cut or impress a helical shape on the outer surface of a rod-like blank,
    or on the inner surface of a pipe-like blank.


CLS 76/118
TXT Scythe:
    Invention under subclass 101.1 comprising stock material for, or a method
    of, making a tool having a sharp cutting blade intended to be manually
    supported in the hands of an operative and manipulated to swing just above
    the ground with the cutting edge generally parallel to the ground to sever
    grass or other small stem plants growing therefrom.


CLS 76/119
TXT Hand tool:
    Invention under subclass 101.1 comprising stock material for, or a method
    of, making a tool intended, when in use, to be supported by hand or hands
    of an operative.


CLS 79/
TTL BUTTON MAKING

CLS 79/
TXT Class 162, Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, this class includes machines
    and processes for making buttons or the parts thereof and assembling the
    same, including metallic, composition, pearl, etc., except such buttons as
    are formed of plastic material, including molten glass, which are formed in
    molds or are molded upon the shanks of the buttons, these being classified
    in Class 65, Glass Manufacturing or appropriate subclasses or Class 264,
    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes, or Class
    425, Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    subclasses 117+, and except metallic buttons formed by casting, including
    casting upon shanks, classified in Class 164, Metal Founding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for article dispensers
    (feeders) including button blank feeders, particularly subclasses 156+ for
    dispensers including orienting of articles, and subclasses 175+ for
    dispensers including stack forming.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, appropriate
    subclasses for cutting of that class type to make a button.

    451,    Abrading, subclass 345 for a button cleaner of that class.


CLS 79/1
TXT Machines and processes for making buttons or the parts thereof and
    assembling such parts not otherwise classifiable.


CLS 79/2
TXT Machines and processes for making shank- buttons from sheet metal, leather,
    and compositions, including glass, papiermache, etc., which form the
    button-head and also form and secure a shank or eye to the button-head.

    (1)     Note.  Machines for forming the shank merely are also classified in
    this subclass, inasmuch as they are usually, but fragments of the
    button-making machines.

    (2)     Note.  Machines that merely mold buttons are classified in the
    appropriate molding or casting according to the material used.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses
    47+ for a process of forming glass in a mold cavity combined with fusion
    bonding to a preform, subclasses 152+ for glass molding or shaping
    apparatus combined with fusion bonding means, and subclass 166 for
    glassworking apparatus including a perforator.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    subclasses 117+ for means molding plastic button-heads upon preformed backs
    or shanks and subclass 801 for a cross-reference digest on button makers.


CLS 79/3
TXT Miscellaneous machines for making metallic buttons, usually by cutting the
    blank from a sheet of metal and bending, die-shaping, or spinning the blank
    into the form of a button.

    (1)     Note.  Machines for merely cupping or die-shaping button-blanks are
    classified in Class 72, Metal Deforming, subclasses 343+.


CLS 79/4
TXT Machines for uniting the front, filling-blank, and back metallic buttons,
    including buttons having celluloid fronts, photographic buttons, etc.


CLS 79/5
TXT Machines for forming and assembling cloth-covered buttons.  These machines
    include devices for cutting the cloth.


CLS 79/6
TXT Combined machines for surfacing and drilling pearl or composition buttons.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 14.


CLS 79/7
TXT Machines and processes for turning, grinding, buffing, or polishing buttons
    in the process of their manufacture not classifiable in the following
    subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, for a process of or device for polishing a button
    attached to a garment.


CLS 79/8
TXT Machines having tool-sharpening mechanism in combination with turning or
    surfacing mechanism.


CLS 79/9
TXT Machines for turning, grinding, or polishing the face of a button, which
    are provided with a plurality of chucks for clamping the button-blank.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6.


CLS 79/10
TXT Machines and processes for smoothing and trimming the periphery of buttons
    or button-blanks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 30 and 205.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, subclass 86 for bolt pointing machines.


CLS 79/11
TXT Machines for drilling buttons in which the button-blank is held in a clamp
    between axially aligned drills or pairs of drills which cut toward each
    other from opposite sides of the work.


CLS 79/14
TXT Button-drilling machines having but a single drill-spindle and a single
    chuck for holding the button.


CLS 79/15
TXT Machines for cutting and sizing buttons-blanks by means of a saw.  These
    machines are mainly for producing buttons of equal thickness.  This
    subclass does not include tubular saws.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 20 for disk cutting and boring, subclasses
    21+ for disk cutting.


CLS 79/16
TXT Machines for cutting button-blanks from the stock by means of a tubular saw.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 20 for disk cutting and boring, subclass 23
    for disk cutting by a rotary tubular cutter.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 204+ or
    a tubular saw of general use.


CLS 79/18
TXT Clamps for supporting the button-blank while it is being operated upon by
    the surfacing or drilling mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include chucks carried by either the
    headstock or the tailstock of the lathe.


CLS 81/
TTL TOOLS

CLS 81/
TXT

    I.      In this class are tools which are not structurally limited to any
    classified art.

    II.     This class is limited to hand tools, except in the following
    subclasses:  3.1-3.33 inclusive, 9.1, 9.51, 15.2, 17+, 52.3+, 52.4+, 54+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 700+ for a hand tool for assembling or
    disassembling parts and meeting the criteria specified in the subclass 700
    definition.

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 92+ for pipe and rod cutters.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 409+ for a plier-type bending tool, and
    subclasses 462+ for a metal deforming tool, per se, not elsewhere
    classifiable.  If assembly is involved, as in crimping a sleeve on a wire,
    see Class 29, Metal Working, subclass 700.

    140,    Wireworking, subclasses 93.2+ for a tool for tightening a wire or
    band around a stack of items and applying or forming a fastener or seal to
    a wire or band.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 55+ for apparatus for cutting and perforating
    well tubing in situ.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, appropriate subclass for subject matter
    directed to driving or impacting a tool, when such subject matter includes
    combined features peculiar to tool driving, but which does not include
    features limiting the subject matter to a specific tool art, such as
    specific shape of the work contacting portion of a tool, related tools, or
    an opposed work support.  Only subclasses 52.3+ of Class 81 has been
    cleared as to subject.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    appropriate subclasses for a tool which includes a force multiplier or
    energy transducer to apply the pushing or pulling force.  Pliers, clamps,
    or other hand grippers by which force is applied directly by the hand are
    classified in Class 81.

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 3+ for patents to an operator supported
    work holder.  Class 269 is the residual locus for patents to a device for
    clamping, supporting and/or holding an article (or articles) in position to
    be operated on or treated.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, appropriate subclasses
    for a hand-held holder for the transportation or mere handling of an
    article.


CLS 81/2
TXT Wrenches combined with pumps or oilers or with both.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, for dispensers, per se.


CLS 81/3.05
TXT Devices for extracting a shell, projectile or wad from a gun barrel.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 3.1 to 3.49, inclusive, and
    subclass 302 for other tools capable of similar work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 700+ for pin inserters and removers.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 86.4+.


CLS 81/3.07
TXT RECEPTACLE CLOSURE REMOVER:

    Tools under the class definition for removing closures from receptacles,
    and adjunct to such removers not provided for elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 700+ for pin inserters and removers; and
    see subclass 808 for pinpoint extractors and inserters.

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 1.5 for a necked receptacle seal cutter; and
    subclasses 2 and 400+ for a carton or can opener.

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 381.1+ for a packaging apparatus having
    a receptacle opener or flap manipulator.

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclasses 101.1+ for blanks
    and processes for making receptacle closure remover.

    86,     Ammunition and Explosive-Charge Making, subclasses 37 and 38 for
    devices for removing primers from cartridges.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 213+ for apparatus including pattern
    removing  means and subclasses 401+ for strippers or ejectors.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 81+ for dispensing devices, including cutter
    or punch type receptacle opening means.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    appropriate subclasses for pulling and prying devices of general
    application.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, particularly subclasses
    12, 27, 61, and 86+.


CLS 81/3.08
TXT Having discrete retainer or receptacle for removed closure:

    Receptacle closure remover under subclass 3.07 wherein a container or other
    means is provided which is distinct from the closure engaging and removing
    portion and which is adapted to receive and retain the closure after it has
    been removed from the receptacle.


CLS 81/3.09
TXT Combined or plural:

    Tool under subclass 3.07 comprising either (1) a receptacle closure remover
    combined with some other device which is used independently of the remover,
    the combination of which is not provided for in another class, or (2) a
    plurality of receptacle closure removers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, subclasses 151+ for a receptacle closure remover
    combined with another type tool.

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 287+ for apparatus to apply closures to
    filled receptacles, and subclasses 381.1+ for receptacle opening, and see
    the Notes thereto for the line.

    86,     Ammunition and Explosive-Charge Making, subclasses 28 and 37+ for
    similar devices used in ammunition loading.


CLS 81/3.15
TXT Attached to receptacle or closure:

    Receptacle closure remover under subclass 3.09 which is connected to or
    combined with the receptacle or the closure.

    (1)     Note.  The receptacle classes (see Search Notes below) take the
    claimed combination of a receptacle or receptacle closure with a means for
    removing a closure from that receptacle.  This class take receptacle
    closure removers, per se, capable of repeated use and particularly in this
    subclass, combinations of a first receptacle with closure removal structure
    mounted thereon and operative only for removing closures from other
    receptacles where no more structure of the first receptacle is recited than
    is required to constitute or mount the closure remover.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 225 and 295+ for a bottle or jar
    closure having means to remove or facilitate removal of that closure or
    another closure on the same bottle or jar.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 260+ for closures which include opening
    arrangements.


CLS 81/3.2
TXT Receptacle closure removers which are (1) power-driven or (2) actuated by
    vacuum or fluid pressure means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclass 381 for machines which position closed
    receptacles and remove or shift the receptacle closure.


CLS 81/3.25
TXT Wall or surface mounted or supported:

    Receptacle closure remover under subclass 3.07 which is mounted upon a wall
    or other supporting surface.

    (1)     Note.  Receptacle closure removers peculiarly designed so as to
    require mounting for proper operation have been placed in this subclass or
    indented subclasses even though not claimed as wall or surface mounted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.1,    for wall mounted devices including means to receive the receptacle
    closure.

    3.2,    for power driven and/or vacuum or fluid pressure actuated
    receptacle removers.


CLS 81/3.27
TXT Lever or prying type:

    Receptacle closure remover under subclass 3.25 comprising either (1) a
    rigid element which transmit a force applied at a first point along its
    length to a second point along its length by pivoting about a third point,
    whereby the closure or its fastener is forced away from the receptacle, or
    (2) a portion adapted to engage a closure or its fastener and force it away
    from the receptacle by a twisting or prying action.


CLS 81/3.29
TXT For engaging receptacle about closure (e.g., socket type):

    Remover under subclass 3.36 wherein the receptacle engaging means is
    applied over the closure to engage the receptacle circumferentially about
    the closure.


CLS 81/3.31
TXT Removers under subclass 3.25 combined with means to support and/or grasp
    the receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  Removers having structure which engages the receptacle
    during removal of the closure but does not support or grasp the receptacle
    are excluded.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass and the indented subclass include receptacle
    holding or grasping means, per se, as well as in combination with closure
    engaging means.

    (3)     Note.  For can openers having receptacle supports, see Class 30,
    Cutlery, subclasses 436, 447 and 448.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses. Class 269 is the residual
    locus for patents to a device for clamping, supporting and/or holding an
    article (or articles) in position to be operated on or treated.  See notes
    thereunder for other related loci.


CLS 81/3.32
TXT Removers under subclass 3.31 having supporting means extending under the
    receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  The means may include the surface upon which the closure
    remover is mounted.

    (2)     Note.  For hand manipulated closure removers having receptacle
    bottom supports, see this class, subclass 3.39.

    (3)     Note.  For receptacle supports in general, see Class 248, Supports,
    particularly subclasses 154, 310 and 311.2.


CLS 81/3.33
TXT Removers under subclass 3.25 including a rotary device for engaging the
    closure, such as a cork-screw, and mechanism comprising a gear or lever to
    actuate the rotary device, either to rotate it or translate it, or both.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.31    and 3.32, for similar devices having in addition means to grasp or
    support the receptacle.


CLS 81/3.35
TXT Removers under subclass 3.25 in which the element which engages the closure
    can be moved into a handle or over the handle, i.e., can be folded,
    collapsed or placed into close engagement with the handle.

    (1)     Note.  For sheathed cutlery, see Class 30, Cutlery, subclasses 151+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, subclass 118 for combinations of closure remover
    and pocket knife.


CLS 81/3.36
TXT Removers under subclass 3.25 in which in addition to the closure engaging
    part there is means engaging the receptacle to aid in the closure removing
    operation.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and the indented subclasses, particularly
    subclass 3.39, include receptacle engaging means, per se, as well as in
    combination with closure engaging means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.31    and 3.32, for wall or surface mounted closure removers having
    receptacle supporting or grasping means.


CLS 81/3.37
TXT Removers under subclass 3.36 in which the closure engaging part is given a
    translating, i.e., a linear or substantially linear motion by means
    including a gear or lever element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.31,   3.32 and 3.33, for wall mounted closure removers having a lever or
    gear translated closure remover.


CLS 81/3.39
TXT Removers under subclass 3.36 in which the additional receptacle engaging
    means extends under the receptacle to support it.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes devices, per se, intended to grasp or
    hold the receptacle as well as the combination thereof with means to engage
    the closure to remove it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.32,   for wall mounted closure removers having bottom supports for
    receptacles.


CLS 81/3.4
TXT Removers under subclass 3.25 not provided for in the subclasses indented
    hereunder, (1) having means to grasp the closure, or (2) comprising means
    to grasp the receptacle to hold it during the removal of the closure.

    (1)     Note.  For pliers or tongs of general application see this class,
    subclasses 300+.

    (2)     Note.  For grapples in general, see Class 294, Handling:  Hand and
    Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 27.1+ and 86.4+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.31    and 3.32, for wall mounted closure removers having receptacle
    grasping means, and subclass 3.39.

    3.46,   for tong or plier-like devices for prying off receptacle closures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 222+ for piston ring contractors for
    compressing piston rings around a piston and for contracting single piston
    rings and holding them contracted for the reception of a mandrel holder.


CLS 81/3.41
TXT Removers under subclass 3.4, comprising two or more finger-like members
    which grip the receptacle closure by expanding or contracting motion.

    (1)     Note.  For closure removers of similar nature wherein the members
    are joined at their ends to form loops, see this class, subclass 3.34.


CLS 81/3.42
TXT Removers under subclass 3.4 in which at least one closure engaging part
    reciprocates, i.e., has a linear motion, to engage and disengage the
    closure.

    (1)     Note.  Removers in which the closure engaging parts move about a
    pivot in engaging and disengaging the closure, but can be adjusted to
    various sizes by linear motion, are classified in this class, subclass 3.44.


CLS 81/3.43
TXT Removers under subclass 3.4 comprising a deformable strip-like member which
    is caused to engage tightly about the closure or receptacle by a means
    which tightens or shortens the strip.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 3.4 for removers having a
    strip-like member which is tightened about the closure or receptacle by
    manually gripping portions thereof; subclass 3.44, for removers having
    rigid members which move about a pivot to engage the receptacle or closure,
    and subclasses 64+ for flexible wrenches of general application.

    (2)     Note.  For similar grapples of general application, see Class 294,
    Handling: Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 33, 99.1 and 100.


CLS 81/3.44
TXT Removers under subclass 3.4 having two or more receptacle engaging portions
    which are pivotally connected so that they move about said pivot to engage
    and disengage the receptacle or closure.

    (1)     Note.  For pivoted jaw grapples of general application, see Class
    294, Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 28, 97, 104, and
    106 and their indented subclasses.


CLS 81/3.45
TXT Removers under subclass 3.07 including a screw member which pierces the
    closure.

    (1)     Note.  For wire working processes of making corkscrews, see Class
    140, Wireworking, subclass 86.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.09,   3.33, 3.35, 3.37, and 3.38, for the organizations there provided
    for, including screw type removers.


CLS 81/3.47
TXT Removers under subclass 3.46 having a portion which impales the closure or
    is inserted in an opening therein or in a bale or equivalent part on the
    closure.

    (1)     Note.  For impaling or inserting type removers having no levering
    means, see this class, subclasses 3.48 and 3.49.


CLS 81/3.48
TXT Removers under subclass 3.07 including a portion which impales the closure
    or is inserted in an opening therein or in a bale or equivalent part on the
    closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.47,   for similar closure removers having a levering means combined
    therewith.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 164.5+ for ice picks.

    128,    Surgery, subclass 329 for surgical puncturing means.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 61 for spears
    of general use.


CLS 81/3.49
TXT Removers under subclass 3.48 having a part or parts projecting from the
    side of the impaling or inserting member or including an abutment or
    indentation in the side of said member, which abutment, indentation, part
    or parts act against the receptacle closure to assist removal.


CLS 81/3.5
TXT Special tools for assembling and operating on spectacle frames and lenses.


CLS 81/3.55
TXT Levering or prying type:

    Remover under subclass 3.07 comprising either (1) a rigid element which
    transmits a force applied at a first point along it length to a second
    point along it length by pivoting about a third point, whereby the closure
    or its fastener is forced away from the receptacle or (2) a portion adapted
    to engage a closure or its fastener and force it away from the receptacle
    by a twisting or prying action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.27,   for a wall or surface mounted or supported remover of the levering
    or prying type.


CLS 81/3.56
TXT Having discrete relatively movable portions:

    Remover under subclass 3.55 including one part which is movably mounted
    with respect to another part of the remover for adjustment or actuation of
    the remover.


CLS 81/3.57
TXT Having handle, intermediate hook, and end fulcrum:

    Remover under subclass 3.55 wherein the second point to which the force is
    transmitted to remove the closure is located on a reentrant portion located
    along the length of the remover between the first point at which the force
    is applied and the third point about which the remover pivots.


CLS 81/3.6
TXT Tools of the plier type coming under the preceding subclass.


CLS 81/3.7
TXT Special tools for spreading leaf springs.


CLS 81/3.8
TXT Special tools for removing or inserting fuses in fuse blocks.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 418+.

    (2)     Note.  See also Class 294, Handling: Hand and Hoist-Line
    Implements, subclass 19.1.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53.1,   for wrenches comprising pole like handle structures and peculiarly
    adapted to engage work at a distance.


CLS 81/4
TXT Devices for clamping articles while being engraved.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for devices for holding watch and clock parts.

    17,     for vises.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses, and see the Notes thereto for
    other work holders.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-line Implements, subclass 99.2 for
    tweezers.


CLS 81/6
TXT Tools having special construction limiting them to watchmakers' use.
    Devices for holding watch and clock parts are here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses and see the Notes thereto for
    other work holders.


CLS 81/7
TXT Tools of special construction for use in setting jewels.


CLS 81/7.5
TXT Devices under subclass 6, for (1) winding the mainspring of a watch or
    clock, in situ, or (2) winding and holding the mainspring and trans-ferring
    it into the mainspring-barrel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54+,    for motor driven wrenches.

    122+,   for watch keys.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, or Animal Powered, subclasses 39+ for
    spring motors combined with winding means therefor.


CLS 81/8
TXT Tools of special construction for use in setting ruby-pins or roller-jewels.


CLS 81/8.1
TXT Includes special tools for inserting, packing, and removing fibrous and
    similar packing material into or from a joint, usually fibrous material
    around a pipe or tube.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclass 224.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 87 for hand manipulable, plural dimension shaping implement having
    a material supply means.


CLS 81/9.2
TXT Tool under the class definition adapted to be drawn across the surface of a
    sheet of material to produce indicia (e.g., by an indenting or manifolding
    operation) on that surface or any underlying surface, without depositing
    any coating material on that surface and without cutting or scratching hat
    surface.

    (1)     Note.  The implement may be a stencilling tool; i.e., one which
    displaces lines of wax coating on a stencil.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 358+ for a perforating or indenting implement
    (e.g., scratch awl).

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 18+ for the combination of an
    awl or scriber with means to guide the tool along a predetermined path to
    form a line.

    101,    Printing, subclass 26 for a piercing and printing machine.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 208+ for an
    implement with material supply, the tool of which implement is a roller
    (e.g., ball in indented subclasses 209+) which deposits coating material
    onto the  surface to which is applied; and subclasses 258+ and 292 for a
    similar implement whose tool is a stylus or is stylus-like.


CLS 81/9.21
TXT Tool under the class definition having a work-contacting face portion
    capable of cutting a philatelic laminate or coating, and means, including a
    part movable in a direction other than that of the tool face portion, to
    impart arcuate scraping movement to said face portion to perform said
    cutting when positioned over said laminate or coating.

    (1)     Note.  Additional means to print cancellation indicia on the stamp
    will not bar placement of a patent to a stamp scarifier in this subclass.


CLS 81/9.22
TXT Tool under the class definition including means to puncture a surface and
    to discharge pigmentous liquid into the punctures, to perform a writing or
    designing operation.

    (1)     Note.  The discharge structure may be integral with, part of, or
    separate from the structure for puncturing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 358+, particularly subclasses 366+ for a
    pointed perforating tool; and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 81/9.24
TXT TAPPET ADJUSTER:

    Tool under the class definition specifically adapted to adjust the
    clearance between a tappet and an adjacent part is the valve train of an
    internal combustion engine.


CLS 81/9.26
TXT PLOWSHARE HOLDER:

    Tool under the class definition including means for gripping or
    accommodating the cutting blade of a plow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    487,    for a hand-held holder, or a tool having a clamp, and see the
    search notes thereunder for related loci.


CLS 81/9.3
TXT Implements usually of the plier type, for tightening and fastening wires,
    bands, straps, etc., around hose pipe.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    140,    Wireworking, subclasses 93.2+ for implements for tightening and
    securing binders around material.


CLS 81/9.4
TXT WIRE STRIPPER:

    Hand tool under the class definition for cutting, crushing, or otherwise
    removing wire coverings or sheaths.

    (1)     Note.  A mere hand cutter for wire of insulation is classified in
    Class 30 (see Search Note below). Those cutters classified here have
    additional means for removing the insulation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 564.4, 565 and 566+ for an assembly
    device (e.g., terminal applier) which includes means for stripping
    insulation from wire.

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 90.1+ for a hand manipulatable device for
    cutting an elongated strand-encircling sheath.  Those tools having
    additional means for removing the sheath are classified in Class 81.

    86,     Ammunition and Explosive-Charge Making, subclass 22 for similar
    structure for cutting and crimping fuse.


CLS 81/9.41
TXT Having relatively movable clamp and blade:

    Tool under subclass 9.4 including (1) means to cut the covering or sheath,
    (2) discrete means to grip the covering or sheath, and (3) means to move or
    to permit relative movement between the cutting and gripping means to
    remove the covering or sheath from the wire.


CLS 81/9.42
TXT Clamp and blade move relative to supporting structure:

    Tool under subclass 9.41 including structure on which both the cutting
    means and the gripping means are mounted for relative movement to remove
    the covering from the sheath.


CLS 81/9.43
TXT Blade moves relative to handle to remove insulation:

    Tool under subclass 9.41 wherein the cutting means is movably mounted on
    supporting which includes a hand engageable portion rigid therewith which
    is gripped by the hand while using the tool.


CLS 81/9.44
TXT Pivoted blade:

    Tool under subclass 9.4 including a first part having a cutting edge and
    which is swingably attached by a shaft, pin or equivalent structure to a
    second part having a cooperating cutting edge or a work back-up surface.


CLS 81/9.51
TXT Devices under subclass 9.4, which have a fixed base.

    (1)     Note.  Devices for stripping insulated or covered wire combined
    with means to further modify or treat the wire (e.g., intertwist strands or
    wind wire onto a terminal) in other than a manner characteristic of Class
    140, Wireworking, are classified in Class 29, Metal Working, subclasses 33+.


CLS 81/10
TXT Tools specially adapted for locking nuts and bolts together or for applying
    or removing nut or bolt locking devices.


CLS 81/13
TXT Devices for holding a bolt from movement while a nut is turned on or off.

    Search This Class, Subclass:

     55.


CLS 81/15.2
TXT This subclass and those indented hereunder are directed to portable tools
    having a construction adapting them to one or more of the operations
    necessary in repairing resilient vehicle tires.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 236.01+ for
    scrapers of general cleaning utility, and see the Notes thereto for
    miscellaneous scrapers of more specialized application.

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 221.5 for tools for assembling and/or
    removing valves for pneumatic tires or tubes with or from the wheel rim.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    95+ for processes for repairing toroidal articles, and search subclasses
    110+ and 394+ as the generic place for methods and apparatus for building
    tires.

    157,    Wheelwright Machines, subclasses 1.1+ and 11, for tire setters and
    removers.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 11+ for a molding or vulcanizing apparatus arranged to repair or
    restore an article.


CLS 81/15.3
TXT Devices under subclass 15.2 comprising means for holding tire casings in
    deformed position for inspection, repairs or other purposes.

    (1)     Note.  The devices classified herein are mere holders and are
    provided with no means adapting them to use in applying force to spread the
    tire beads, such spreaders being provided for in Class 254, Implements or
    Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force, subclasses 50.1+ or are
    referred to in the notes.

    (2)     Note.  The devices classified in this subclass are implements
    adapted to be supported by the casing and afford no support for the tire.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 50.1+, see (1) Note above.


CLS 81/15.4
TXT Tools for enabling the air to escape from pneumatic tires.  These are
    mostly tools to depress the inflation valve body.

    (1)     Note.  For combined valve caps and valve manipulating tools, see
    Class 152, Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclass 431.


CLS 81/15.5
TXT Tools adapted to apply puncture healing material and insert a patch.

    (1)     Note.  See definitions of indented subclasses of this class.


CLS 81/15.6
TXT The tire repair tool is for the purpose of applying puncture healing
    material in fluid form to the interior of a pneumatic tire through a
    puncture, blowout or aperture in the wall of the tire, or through the valve
    stem, whether by way of repair or originally.

    (1)     Note.  For similar dispensing devices, see Class 222, Dispensing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    appropriate subclasses, for machines for performing similar functions.


CLS 81/15.7
TXT The repair tool is for the purpose of inserting repair plugs or patches
    into a tire through a puncture, blowout, or other aperture in the wall of
    the tire.


CLS 81/15.8
TXT Tools for application to anti-skid devices to facilitate their mounting
    upon or removal from the tire.

    (1)     Note.  For such tools in combination with the anti-skid device, see
    Class 152, Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclass 213.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 199+ for detachable implements or apparatus for tensioning
    flexible material.


CLS 81/15.9
TXT FOR LOCK OR LATCH:

    Tool under the class definition specifically adapted for use on either a
    key aperated fastening device, or a fastening device comprising mating
    mechanical parts formed or attached to respective members to selectively
    fix the members in a particular relationship.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 804 for a tool for assembling or
    disassembling a tumbler lock.


CLS 81/16
TXT CHUCK KEY:

    Tool under the class definition which is specifically adapted to
    cooperatively engage a machine chuck or tool-holding socket and to be
    manipulated to cause the chuck or socket to grip or release a workpiece or
    tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, subclasses 147+ for corresponding chuck or
    socket structure.


CLS 81/19
TXT DEFORMABLE HEAD MALLET:

    Tool under the class definition including a head composed of deformable
    material having a plurality of impacting surfaces, and a lever arm having
    an end adapted to carry the head.

    (1)     Note.  The deformable material may be soft metal, leather, wood,
    etc.


CLS 81/20
TXT HAMMER:

    Tool under the class definition including a head having an impacting
    surface and a lever arm having an end adapted to carry the head.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for a similar tool having a pliable impacting surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, subclasses 143+ for a compound tool including a
    hammer.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 90+ and see the search notes
    therein for a device to impact a tool or the like.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 26 for nail extractor combined with a hammer.


CLS 81/21
TXT Having work protector surrounding face:

    Hammer under subclass 20 having a member encircling the impacting surface
    and either protruding axially from it or covering it.

    (1)     Note.  The member functions to prevent damage to a workpiece and is
    usually flexible or yieldable.


CLS 81/22
TXT Having shock absorbing means:

    Hammer under subclass 20 including means to dissipate the reactive force
    resulting from impact before it reaches a user.

    (1)     Note.  The means may be recited as being for the protection and
    comfort of the user, for assuring the effectiveness of a driving blow, or
    for the prevention of damage to a workpiece.


CLS 81/23
TXT Having nail placer:

    Hammer under subclass 20 including means adapted to hold a penetrating
    fastener in a position for starting it into a workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for a driven fastener holder, pusher or setter, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 213.1+ for a valve applier or remover.


CLS 81/24
TXT Magnetic:

    Hammer under subclass 23 wherein the holding means includes a member
    possessing a magnetic field.


CLS 81/25
TXT Having replaceable striking face:

    Hammer under subclass 20 wherein the impacting surface is on a member which
    can be removed from the head, and a substitute installed.


CLS 81/26
TXT Having plural striking faces:

    Hammer under subclass 20 having more than one impacting surfaces.


CLS 81/27
TXT Rod encircling type:

    Hammer under subclass 20 wherein the impacting surface includes a slot
    adapted to receive a tubular member.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes devices disclosed for driving a valve
    or draw off tube into a barrel.


CLS 81/28
TXT BIT STOCK HAVING MANUAL DRIVE MEANS (E.G., BRACE):

    Devices under the class definition including a member adapted to mount a
    bit shaft (usually a chuck) with the bit extending from the member, and a
    driving element projecting transversely from the member and adapted to
    receive force applied manually to rotate the bit.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and its indents include extension shanks for
    bits, and subcombinations disclosed with devices appropriate for inclusion
    herein.

    (2)     Note.  The driving element may comprise a lever arm to be engaged
    manually, or structure adapted to be engaged by another driven element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for a tool of this type either claimed with, or solely disclosed
    as, a wrench or screwdriver.


CLS 81/29
TXT Having ratchet mechanism:

    Device under subclass 28 including a toothed wheel intermediate the bit and
    the driving element, and a pawl adapted to engage and drive the wheel.

    (1)     Note.  The mechanism commonly permits the member to be driven in
    only one direction although the driving element can rotate in both
    directions.


CLS 81/30
TXT Straight crank arm:

    Device under subclass 29 wherein the driving element consists of a lever
    arm extending perpendicular to the bit.

    (1)     Note.  The lever may be pivoted to the member to be folded when not
    in use.


CLS 81/31
TXT Adjustable pawl:

    Device under subclass 29 including means to selectively change the position
    or orientation of the pawl relative to the ratcheting.

    (1)     Note.  The selective change effects a change in an operating
    characteristic of the tool, e.g., from left-hand to right-hand ratcheting.


CLS 81/32
TXT Pivoted pawl:

    Device under subclass 29 wherein the pawl is adapted to turn about an axis
    and swings into and out of engagement with the ratchet.


CLS 81/33
TXT Sliding pawl:

    Device under subclass 29 wherein the pawl is adapted to reciprocate along
    its longitudinal axis and slides into and out of engagement with the
    ratchet.


CLS 81/34
TXT Straight stock having side driving gear:

    Device under subclass 28 wherein the member extends linearly in axial
    alignment with the bit, and including a driving gear substantially
    perpendicular to, and member adapted to rotate the bit about its axis.


CLS 81/35
TXT Having U-shaped crank arm:

    Device under subclass 28 wherein the driving element includes a portion
    which is offset from the member forming a "U" shaped crank arm.


CLS 81/36
TXT Speeding gear:

    Device under subclass 35 including a gear train intermediate the crank arm
    and the bit, wherein one revolution of the U-crank will produce more than
    one revolution of the bit.


CLS 81/37
TXT Bit shaft inclined relative to crank:

    Device under subclass 35 wherein the bit is out of alignment with the
    driving elements axis or rotation.


CLS 81/44
TXT HOLDER, PUSHER, OR SETTER FOR DRIVEN-TYPE FASTENER:

    Device under the class definition adapted to contact a penetrating fastener
    having a head (e.g. a nail, tack, etc.) and to either (a) support the
    fastener relative to a workpiece before being driven into the workpiece;
    (b) hold the fastener, receive and transmit to the fastener, a manually
    applied force to drive the fastener into the workpiece; or (c) receive an
    impact to set the head of the fastener below the surface of the workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  For the purposes of this subclass, the penetrating fastener
    is considered to be the specific article worked upon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23+,    for the combination of a driving tool and a device formed in, or
    secured on, the tool for holding a penetrating fastener.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 275+ for a hand manipulable assembly tool
    adapted to be applied to a metal workpiece, and to receive an impact from
    an outside source and transmit the impact to the workpiece.


CLS 81/45
TXT SHINGLE TOOL:

    Device under the class definition adapted to apply or remove roof or wall
    shingles.


CLS 81/46
TXT WOODEN FLOORING TOOL:

    Device under the class definition adapted to either apply boards to, or
    remove boards from a floor.


CLS 81/52
TXT WRENCH, SCREWDRIVER, OR DRIVER THEREFOR:

    Tool under the class definition for engaging a work part and exerting or
    transmitting a twisting strain thereto, or means for imparting or
    transmitting an actuating force to such a tool.

    (1)     Note.  A hand tool for rotating a lever by merely pulling or
    pushing the tool along its length is excluded.  To be properly classified
    here, the work engaging portion of a hand tool must move other than
    rectilinearly.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is the residual locus for tools which impart a
    twisting strain to the work and are not provided for elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.07+,  for a tool for grasping and removing a receptacle closure.

    463+,   for impact delivering wrenches.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 120+ for
    a wrench particularly adapted to rotate a cutting tool of that class.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, subclass 61 for devices peculiarly adapted for rotating a tap,
    other than provided for in Class 408.


CLS 81/53.1
TXT Wrenches or screwdriver under subclass 52 comprising pole like handle
    structures peculiarly adapted for engaging work at a distance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.8,    for devices including a pole structure provided with means for
    inserting or removing a fuse in a fuse box.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclass 461 for a fixture on a
    window type closure adapted to be engaged by a pole.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 19.1+ for
    pole like structures adapted for handling articles at a distance.


CLS 81/53.11
TXT Globe manipulator:

    Wrenches under subclass 53.1 for placing or removing electric light bulbs.


CLS 81/53.12
TXT Rotatable grasper:

    Wrenches under subclass 53.11 having means, other than a mere torque
    applied manually to the handle, for rotating the object grasped.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are devices such as gear, belts, etc., which
    rotate the light bulb about its axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-line Implements, subclass 6 for plate
    turners and subclass 8 for pancake turners.


CLS 81/53.2
TXT Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 52, especially adapted to extract or
    drive headless stud bolts.


CLS 81/54
TXT Wrench or screwdriver having a casing or framework which carries moving
    mechanical elements, but does not itself move during the operation of the
    wrench or screwdriver.

    (1)     Note.  A tool which does not claim any machine structure in detail
    other than (a) the work-engaging and strain-exerting portion of the tool,
    or (b) structure which grips or guides the rotatable work when a turning or
    twisting strain is exerted on the work by the tool, is not considered a
    machine and is classified on details of the work-engaging and
    strain-exerting portion in other subclasses under Class 81, subclass 53.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, appropriate subclass for a means to
    drive or impact a tool, and particularly subclass 164 for a means to drive
    a tool about an axis including means to hold and relatively rotate sections
    of a tool shaft.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, appropriate
    subclasses especially subclasses 62+ and 129+ for drilling machines which
    feed the work or tool along the axis of the tool during operation.


CLS 81/55
TXT The wrench or screwdriver has a device or part which prevents the movement
    of the bolt while the nut is being turned on or off.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 240+ for means assembling parts by
    relative rotation.


CLS 81/56
TXT The bolt-holding wrench or screwdriver is operated by gearing.

    (1)     Note.  Where the novelty lies in the gearing, search should be made
    in this class, subclass 57.


CLS 81/57
TXT The wrench or screwdriver is operated by gearing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56.


CLS 81/57.11
TXT Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 57 provided with motor means designed
    to impart motion to the wrench or screwdriver.


CLS 81/57.12
TXT Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 57.11 having an angular relationship
    between the handle, or like drive means, and the work engaging means, said
    angle being either acute or obtuse.


CLS 81/57.13
TXT Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 57.11 having an angular relationship
    between the handle, or like drive means, and the work engaging means, said
    relationship being a right angle.


CLS 81/57.14
TXT Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 57.11 wherein the handle, or like
    drive means, is in a parallel relationship with respect to the work
    engaging means.


CLS 81/57.15
TXT Wrenches under subclass 57 wherein the jaws are specially adapted for
    grasping or clutching round work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for rigid jaws specially adapted for round work.


CLS 81/57.16
TXT Wrenches under subclass 57.15 combined with means to support or grasp the
    work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.31+,  for wall or surface mounted receptacle closure removers with means
    to support or grasp the receptacle.

    3.36+,  for hand manipulated receptacle closure removers with means to
    support or grasp the receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses for residual devices for
    clamping, supporting or holding an article in position to be operated on or
    treated.


CLS 81/57.17
TXT Wrenches under subclass 57.15 provided with a flexible gripping device to
    surround wholly or partly the work being manipulated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.43,   for flexible jaws specially adapted for removing receptacle
    closures.

    64+,    for other wrenches having flexible jaws.


CLS 81/57.18
TXT Wrenches under subclass 57.15 including camming means connected to at least
    one jaw to effect movement thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128,    for other wrenches having a cam operated sliding jaw.


CLS 81/57.19
TXT Wrenches under subclass 57.15 having a fluid force acting upon at least one
    jaw to effect movement thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301,    for plier type tool including hydraulic features.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclasses for
    expansible chamber type motors, per se.


CLS 81/57.2
TXT Wrenches under subclass 57.15 wherein at least one jaw is pivoted and
    swings or rocks to grip or engage the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90.1,   for other wrenches having multiple pivoted jaws.

    92,     for other wrenches having pivoted inner jaws.

    98+,    for other wrenches having pivoted outer jaws.

    111,    for other wrenches having pivoted side jaws.


CLS 81/57.21
TXT Wrenches under subclass 57.15 having at least one sliding jaw.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126+,   for other wrenches having sliding jaws.


CLS 81/57.22
TXT Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 57 comprising more than one drive
    means to actuate a single workpiece, a single drive means to actuate plural
    workpieces, or more than one drive means to actuate a plurality of
    workpieces.


CLS 81/57.23
TXT Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 57.22 comprising a magazine type
    holder for nuts or bolts.


CLS 81/57.24
TXT Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 57 provided with support means
    therefor.


CLS 81/57.25
TXT Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 57.24 wherein the support is a vehicle.


CLS 81/57.26
TXT Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 57 having means to change the angle
    between the handle or drive means and the work engaging part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177.8,  for angularly adjustable handles.


CLS 81/57.27
TXT Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 57.26 wherein the means to change the
    angles between the handle or drive means and the work engaging means is a
    flexible shaft.


CLS 81/57.28
TXT Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 57 having an angular relationship
    between the handle or drive means and the work engaging means, said angle
    being either acute or obtuse.


CLS 81/57.29
TXT Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 57 having an angular relationship
    between the handle or drive means, and the work engaging means said
    relationship being a right angle.


CLS 81/57.3
TXT Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 57 wherein the handle or drive means
    is in a parallel relationship with respect to the work engaging means.


CLS 81/57.31
TXT Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 57 wherein the drive means and the
    driven means are on a common axis.


CLS 81/57.32
TXT Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 54 comprising interrelated plural
    drives and plural work engaging means or a single drive having plural work
    engaging means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for double ended, simultaneous adjustable wrenches.


CLS 81/57.33
TXT Wrenches under subclass 54 wherein the jaws are specially adapted for
    grasping or clutching round work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57.15+, for gear operated wrenches specially adapted for round work.


CLS 81/57.34
TXT Wrenches under subclass 57.33 combined with ancillary means to support or
    grasp the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57.16,  for gear operated wrenches combined with ancillary means to support
    or grasp the work.


CLS 81/57.35
TXT Wrenches under subclass 57.33 provided with support means therefor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57.24,  for gear operated wrenches provided with support means.


CLS 81/57.36
TXT Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 54 provided with plural work engaging
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57.22,  for gear operated wrench or screwdriver having multiple work
    engaging means.


CLS 81/57.37
TXT Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 54 provided with either (a) means to
    feed pieces of work to the work-engaging and strain-exerting portion of the
    wrench or screwdriver, or (b) magazine means for holding and storing pieces
    of work which are to be fed to the work-engaging and strain-exerting
    portion of the wrench or screwdriver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57.23,  for gear operated wrenches having magazine means.


CLS 81/57.38
TXT Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 54 provided with means to apply a
    predetermined tension to the work.


CLS 81/57.39
TXT Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 54 comprising a clutching element so
    arranged that the movement of the wrench handle in one direction will drive
    the work engaging means while movement in the opposite direction permits
    relative movement between the handle and work engaging means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for ratchet wrench or screwdriver.


CLS 81/57.4
TXT Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 54 provided with support means
    therefor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57.24,  for gear operated wrench or screwdriver having support means.


CLS 81/57.41
TXT Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 57.4 wherein the support is a vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57.25,  for vehicle supported gear operated wrench or screwdriver.


CLS 81/57.42
TXT Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 54 wherein the work driving means is
    in a direct line with respect to the force applying means.


CLS 81/57.43
TXT Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 57.42 wherein the drive means is a
    flexible shaft.


CLS 81/57.44
TXT Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 57.42 wherein the drive means is
    motivated by a fluid force.


CLS 81/57.45
TXT Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 57.42 having an angular relationship
    between the handle or drive means and the work engaging means, said angle
    being either acute or obtuse.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57.28,  for gear operated wrench or screwdriver having an oblique angle.


CLS 81/57.46
TXT Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 57.42 wherein the drive means is in a
    tangential relationship relative to the work engaging means.


CLS 81/57.5
TXT Wrenches under subclass 52 having a plurality of alternately usable work
    engaging sockets of paired jaws movably mounted on an operating handle,
    with means to fasten a selected pair of jaws or sockets in operating
    position with respect to the handle.


CLS 81/58
TXT Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 52 wherein the head or driven part is
    rotatable through 360o or more with respect to the handle or driving part,
    there being inter-engaging means on the handle and head to permit
    intermittent or continuous driving engagement between the head and handle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29+,    for bit stocks provided with ratchet mechanism for driving the bit.

    177.7+, for wrenches wherein the handle is adjustable with respect to the
    head, the adjustment being less than 360o.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 126+ for oscillating to
    intermittent unidirectional intermittent grip type mechanical movements,
    and subclasses 144+ for grip units, per se.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 30+ for clutches, per
    se.


CLS 81/58.1
TXT Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 58 having means for imparting rotation
    to the head other than by a translating movement of the handle with respect
    to the work piece engaged by the head.

    (1)     Note.  The means for imparting rotation may consist merely of a
    modification of the head, as by an extended or enlarged or roughened
    portion adapted to be manually gripped and actuated, provided only that
    such actuation be specifically disclosed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for machine wrench or screwdriver wherein the casing constitutes a
    handle which does not itself move to provide a clutching engagement with
    the head.


CLS 81/58.2
TXT Wrenches under subclass 58 wherein the head has a slot extending from the
    center outwardly through the outer periphery to permit the use of the head
    as an "open end" wrench.

    (1)     Note.  There may be included means functioning to close the slot to
    complete the circular or other configuration of the head.


CLS 81/58.3
TXT Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 58 wherein the driving and driven
    parts themselves or elements associated therewith are mounted for relative
    movement parallel to the axis of rotation of the head or driven part and
    are provided with clutching means whereby such relative movement will
    engage and/or disengage the clutching means.


CLS 81/58.4
TXT Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 58 wherein the interengaging means
    when engaged rigidly connect the two parts to provide for positively
    driving the head in either or both directions of rotation.


CLS 81/58.5
TXT Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 58 wherein the handle extends
    generally radially from the axis of rotation of the head and is pivoted or
    mounted to rotate eccentrically thereof whereby motion of the handle in one
    direction about its pivot will cause clutching or driving engagement with
    the head, motion in the opposite direction releasing the engagement.

    (1)     Note.  In some instances movement of the handle to extreme
    positions in each direction will effect driving engagement in that
    direction there being a neutral position approximately midway between the
    extreme position wherein the driving engagement is disabled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for wrenches or screwdrivers having two handle portions, one being
    movable relative to the other, arranged to be gripped by the hand and
    squeezed together to thereby drivingly engage the head.


CLS 81/59.1
TXT Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 58 wherein the clutching elements
    include ball or roller devices arranged between two surfaces so shaped or
    otherwise related to each other as to wedge the ball or roller therebetween
    in one direction of movement of the handle with respect to the head to
    effect driving engagement between the handle and head.


CLS 81/60
TXT Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 58 wherein the clutching elements
    include a catch, dog, pawl or similar detent means, so arranged that
    movement of the handle in one direction will drive the head while movement
    in the opposite direction permits relative rotation of the head and handle.

    (1)     Note.  These wrenches or screwdrivers are commonly known as
    "ratchet" wrenches or screwdrivers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29+,    for a bit stock provided with ratchet mechanism for driving the bit.

    58.4,   for wrench or screwdriver wherein a detent-type clutch is
    positively engaged for driving in both directions of movement of the handle.

    59.1,   for wrench or screwdriver wherein a ball or roller is wedged
    between two surfaces to effect driving engagement between the handle and
    head.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 120+ for
    a ratchet wrench particularly adapted to drive a tool in that class manner.


CLS 81/61
TXT A pawl pivoted to the driving device engages the ratchet-teeth of the head.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 120+ for
    a ratchet wrench particularly adapted to drive a tool in that class manner.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, subclasses 183+ for a rachet wrench particularly adapted to
    drive a tool for cutting screw threads, except in the manner of cutting
    provided in Class 408.


CLS 81/62
TXT The direction of rotation of the ratchet-head is reversible.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 122 and
    123 for a ratchet wrench particularly adapted to drive a tool in that class
    manner, wherein the ratchet is reversible.


CLS 81/63
TXT A single pawl controls the direction of revolution.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 122 and
    123 for a ratchet wrench particularly adapted to drive a tool in that class
    manner, wherein the ratchet is reversible.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, subclasses 183+ for a rachet wrench particularly adapted to
    drive a tool for the cutting of screw threads, except in the manner
    provided for in Class 408.


CLS 81/63.1
TXT Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 60 provided with means whereby the
    direction of driving can be selectively reversed.


CLS 81/63.2
TXT Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 63.1 having a single pawl, the effect
    of which can be controlled to provide for selective reversing of the drive.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     for reversing one-way detent drive wrenches where the pawl is
    pivoted.


CLS 81/64
TXT The object turned is surrounded wholly or partly by a flexible gripping
    device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.4     and 3.43, see subclass 57.17 for gear operated machine wrenches
    with flexible gripping means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 120+ for
    a flexible gripping device used to transmit torque to a ratchet wrench
    particularly adapted to cut in that class manner.


CLS 81/65
TXT The flexible device is adjusted to the size of the work by a screw-threaded
    device.


CLS 81/65.2
TXT Link:

    Tool under subclass 64 wherein the flexible device includes more than two
    articulated rigid elements, pivotally connected together in end-to-end
    fashion to form a flexible chain of work-gripping elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90.3+,  for a tool having three end-to-end connected jaws which are
    pivotally connected to a handle-lever, but which collectively do not form a
    "flexible gripping device" as required for subclass 65.2.


CLS 81/65.4
TXT Toothed adjustment:

    Wrench under subclass 65.2 including a plurality of serially arranged
    projections and recesses which are adapted to be selectively engaged with
    cooperating structure to vary the effective length of the flexible gripping
    device.

    (1)     Note.  There must be provided either "Projections" or "recesses"
    which are in addition to the pivot pins and interstices normally provided
    in the chain links.


CLS 81/68
TXT A jaw on the handle engages the work.

    (1)     Note.  If a pivoted jaw is a link of a chain it is classified
    herein not in Flexible, link, handle-jaw, pivoted, this class.


CLS 81/69
TXT A pivoted jaw carried by the handle engages the work, the said jaw not
    being a link of the chain.

    (1)     Note.  If the jaw is a link of the chain it is classified in this
    class, subclass 68.


CLS 81/70
TXT The handle-jaw has two faces, either of which may engage the work according
    to the direction the chain is passed about it.


CLS 81/73
TXT The operating part has a U-shaped arm similar to the common bit-stock.


CLS 81/74
TXT Wrenches attached to and driven by wheels to turn nuts on or off from axles.


CLS 81/75
TXT The wrench grips the rim of the wheel-hub to rotate the wrench and wheel
    together.


CLS 81/76
TXT The wrench grips the interior of the hub-rim.


CLS 81/77
TXT The wrench has at each end jaws which are adjusted at the same time.


CLS 81/90.1
TXT Plural pivoted jaws and handle-lever:

    Wrench under subclass 53 including a plurality of discrete work-gripping
    elements which are swingable connected to a rigid elongated hand engageable
    portion, wherein the elements are caused to grip the work by a levering
    action through the hand engageable portion.


CLS 81/90.2
TXT Cam or gear operated:

    Wrench under subclass 90.1 wherein the handle-lever moves a jaw through
    intermediate structure which comprises either (1) and interdigitated
    surface to transmit motion from the handle-lever to the jaw, or (2) a
    eccentric surface or pin carried by the handle-lever or by a member caused
    to pivot by the handle-lever and which bears against a jaw carrying member.


CLS 81/90.3
TXT Jaws enclose work:

    Tool under subclass 90.1 wherein the work-gripping elements are serially
    connected to one another to form a closed loop around the periphery of the
    work.

    (1)     Note.  The "closed loop" may be defined by jaw supporting or
    actuating structure in addition to jaw structure, per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65.2+,  for wrench having a flexible work-gripping band comprised of a
    plurality of pivoted links.


CLS 81/90.4
TXT Including latch to connect jaw to handle-lever:

    Tool under subclass 90.3 wherein cooperating structure is provided on both
    the elongated hand engageable portion and the last of the series of
    work-gripping elements for releasably connecting them together to form the
    closed loop.


CLS 81/90.5
TXT At least three jaws enclose work:

    Tool under subclass 90.4 including three or more serially arranged
    work-gripping elements which form the closed loop.


CLS 81/90.6
TXT Including latch to connect pivoted jaws:

    Tool under subclass 90.3 wherein cooperating structure is provided on each
    of two adjacent work-gripping elements for releasably connecting the
    elements together to form the closed loop.


CLS 81/90.7
TXT At least three jaws enclose work:

    Tool under subclass 90.6 including three or more serially arranged
    work-gripping elements which form the closed loop.


CLS 81/90.8
TXT Two jaw pairs connected by latch:

    Tool under subclass 90.7 wherein the two work-gripping elements releasably
    connected together are each pivotally connected to third and fourth
    work-gripping elements, respectively, and the third and fourth elements are
    also pivotally connected to the handle-lever to complete the closed loop.


CLS 81/90.9
TXT Including means to adjust or to secure jaw in adjusted position:

    Tool under subclass 90.1 wherein means are provided which either moves or
    fixes one work-gripping element relative to the handle-lever or another
    work-engaging element whereby different size work may be accommodated.


CLS 81/91.1
TXT Slidable pivot:

    Tool under subclass 90.1 wherein the connecting structure which permits
    swinging movement of a work-gripping element additionally allows
    translational movement of the work-gripping element additionally allows
    translational movement or that work-gripping element with respect to either
    the handle-lever or another work-gripping element, whereby the pivotal axis
    may be shifted laterally.


CLS 81/91.2
TXT First jaw pivoted directly to handle and to second jaw:

    Tool under subclass 90.1 comprising two work-gripping elements, a first
    being connected directly to the elongated hand engageable portion for
    swinging movement about a first axis, the second work-gripping element
    being connected directly to the first work-gripping for swinging about an
    axis spaced from the first axis.


CLS 81/91.3
TXT Two jaws pivoted directly to intermediate member:

    Tool under subclass 90.1 including an additional discrete element which is
    connected to the hand engageable portion and to which each of two
    work-gripping elements is swingably connected.


CLS 81/92
TXT The inner jaw (the one nearest the hand) is pivoted and swings or rocks to
    grip or engage the work.


CLS 81/93
TXT The inner jaw rocks or swings upon a nut or screw as its fulcrum.


CLS 81/94
TXT The inner jaw has a pin as its fulcrum.


CLS 81/95
TXT The pin-fulcrumed inner jaw is a disk or roller.


CLS 81/96
TXT The roller or disk-shaped jaw is toothed and travels on a rack on the
    handle.


CLS 81/97
TXT The pin-fulcrumed inner jaw is pressed by a spring. Wrenches, pivoted outer
    jaw, the outer jaw (the one at the end of the handle or the one farthest
    from the hand) is pivoted or swings as on a pivot.  Wrenches, Pivoted outer
    jaw, fixed-fulcrum. The fulcrum on which the jaw swings does not travel
    relatively to either the fixed jaw or the parts which it connects.


CLS 81/98
TXT The outer jaw does not travel longitudinally or in a substantially right
    line to adjust itself to the size of the work.


CLS 81/99
TXT The outer jaw is pressed by a spring.


CLS 81/100
TXT The outer jaw travels longitudinally or in a substantially right line to
    adjust itself to different sizes of work.


CLS 81/101
TXT The outer jaw swings or rocks on the adjusting-nut as a fulcrum.


CLS 81/102
TXT The outer jaw is carried by a rocking sleeve.


CLS 81/103
TXT The rocking sleeve is spring-pressed.


CLS 81/104
TXT The sleeve is a washer on which the nut is seated and on which the outer
    jaw rocks.


CLS 81/105
TXT The sleeve wholly or partly incloses the adjusting-nut.


CLS 81/106
TXT The fulcrum-point of the outer jaw travels relatively to either the fixed
    jaw or the parts which it connects.


CLS 81/107
TXT The fulcrum is adjusted by a nut or screw working on a threaded handle-bar.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174.


CLS 81/108
TXT The fulcrum is adjusted by the axial rotation of a threaded handle-bar.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164.


CLS 81/109
TXT The fulcrum is adjustable in a slot in the shank of the fixed jaw.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    411+,   for jaw adjustment means including a slotted guide.


CLS 81/110
TXT The fulcrum of the outer jaw is a tooth which is adjustable along teeth or
    notches on the shank of the fixed jaw.


CLS 81/111
TXT One or both jaws swing sidewise of the handle to close upon the work, the
    meeting plane of the jaws, or the opening between the jaws when in their
    normal closed condition, lying on opposite sides of the central
    longitudinal line of the handle or of a line parallel thereto.


CLS 81/112
TXT The relative movement of the jaws and the handle-body or of the jaws and
    the jaw-actuating device is along lines neither parallel nor perpendicular
    to the axis of the handle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331+,   particularly subclass 333 for jaw locking means similar to
    structure classified herein (112).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, subclasses 36, 37, 47 to 54, inclusive, indented
    under subclasses 46.1+, 57, 58, and 69, to 75, inclusive, indented under
    Socket type, Radially reciprocating jaws, Moving-cam actuator.


CLS 81/113
TXT The jaws are drawn back into a beveled sleeve type socket or are thrust
    forward into a conical sleeve type cap by a axially-moving nut or screw.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, subclasses 60+ for socket type chucks or sockets
    having obliquely guided reciprocating jaws, and particularly subclass 63
    where the operating member is a threaded cone and the jaws have mating
    threads.


CLS 81/114
TXT Wrenches under subclass 113 in which the sleeve type socket is interiorly
    threaded to form the axially moving nut.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, generally.


CLS 81/115
TXT The jaws are closed by an unthreaded ring or collar, which embraces the
    jaws and cams them toward each other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, generally.


CLS 81/116
TXT One or both of the jaws are closed by a part which slides between the jaws
    or between the jaw and another part, producing a wedge-like action.


CLS 81/117
TXT One or both of the jaws are closed by means of links which cause one or
    both of the jaws to travel longitudinally and inwardly.


CLS 81/118
TXT The jaws are closed by a screw located transversely of the axis of the tool.


CLS 81/119
TXT The jaws or work-engaging parts have no relative movement.


CLS 81/120
TXT The jaws are specially adapted for grasping or clutching round work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57.15+, for gear operated machine wrenches specially adapted for round work.

    57.33+, for machine wrenches specially adapted for round work.


CLS 81/121.1
TXT Enclosed (e.g., socket):

    Tool under subclass 119 wherein the jaws comprise enclosing walls which
    form and opening adapted to receive a nut or the like.

    (1)     Note.  To be considered "enclosing wall" either of the following
    must apply:  (1) the walls of the wrench surround a nut or the like to the
    extent that the wrench cannot by withdrawn laterally, or (2) the walls of
    the wrench surround at least 180 degrees of the circumference of a nut or
    the like.


CLS 81/122
TXT Socketed tools for winding watches or clocks.


CLS 81/123
TXT The watch or clock keys have means for excluding dust from the sockets.


CLS 81/124.1
TXT Having devices for ejecting nuts from the enclosing socket.


CLS 81/124.2
TXT Slotted socket:

    Tool under subclass 121.1 wherein the enclosing walls are slit along the
    length thereof.

    (1)     Note.  A wrench is considered to be a "slotted socket" rather than
    an "open end" wrench (classifiable in subclass 119) if either of the
    following apply:  (1) the walls of the wrench surround a nut of the like to
    the extent that the wrench cannot be withdrawn laterally, or (2) the walls
    of the wrench surround at least 180 degrees of the circumference of a nut
    of the like, and also a substantial portion of an end face.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, subclasses 42, 43 and 43.1+ for a tool or
    work-holding socket of similar structure.


CLS 81/124.3
TXT Through socket and perpendicular handle:

    Tool under subclass 121.1 wherein the opening extends completely through
    the tool and an elongated hand engagable member is attached to the
    enclosing walls such that the axis of the hand engagable member and the
    axis of the opening are orthogonal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, subclasses 95+ for a bottomless chuck or socket,
    per se, for holding a tool bit or work part.


CLS 81/124.4
TXT Plural sockets:

    Tool under subclass 121.1 including a second discrete work engaging portion
    which comprises enclosing walls forming an opening adapted to receive a nut
    or the like.


CLS 81/124.5
TXT Slidably or pivotally connected to handle or to each other:

    Tool under subclass 124.4 wherein the two discrete work engaging portions
    are attached to a hand engagable portion or to each other by connecting
    structure which either (1) allows guided translational movement between the
    two attached portions or (2) allows relative swinging movement of the two
    attached portions.


CLS 81/124.6
TXT Having axial opening for removable handle:

    Tool under subclass 121.1 including a second opening, or a continuation of
    the nut receiving opening, which extends from the end opposite the nut
    receiving opening and along the same axis, and which is adapted to
    detachably receive a hand engagable member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177.85, for a handle or shank, per se, provided with socket mounting
    structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, subclasses 76+ for a tool or work-holding socket
    having a side detent.


CLS 81/124.7
TXT Having perpendicular handle:

    Tool under subclass 121.1 including an elongated hand engagable portion
    attached to the work engaging portion such that the longitudinal axis of
    the hand engagable portion and the axis through the nut receiving opening
    are orthogonal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for a bit stock having a perpendicular handle and ratchet
    mechanism, and which may be used to drive a socket type tool.


CLS 81/125
TXT The socket has means for holding a nut from dropping out.


CLS 81/125.1
TXT Wrenches under subclass 119 having rigid jaws at each end of the handle or
    like drive means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for double ended wrenches whereby the jaws at each end thereof are
    simultaneously adjustable.


CLS 81/126
TXT The actuation of a handle-lever causes a sliding jaw to grip the work.  A
    pull on the handle closes the jaws.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, subclasses 125+.


CLS 81/127
TXT The actuating-lever has a claw or tooth which claws or forces the sliding
    jaw to its work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359+,   for sliding jaw tools actuated by claw-lever and rack means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, subclasses 125+.


CLS 81/128
TXT A cam is actuated to operate a sliding jaw or cooperates with said jaw to
    produce a sliding movement thereon.

    Search this class, subclass:

    26.

    See subclass 57.18 for machine wrenches provided with cam operated jaws.


CLS 81/129
TXT Wrenches under subclass 52 having one or more sliding jaws.


CLS 81/129.5
TXT Rack:

    Tool under subclass 129 wherein a rack is provided for fixing or adjusting
    one jaw relative to another.


CLS 81/131
TXT The jaws are carried by handles which interlock.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    318,    for means to hold jaws of a plural-handle wrench in position.


CLS 81/132
TXT The jaws are locked by means of a set screw or nut which locks together the
    rack and its interlocking part.


CLS 81/133
TXT A pinion which travels on a rack on the shank is locked so as to prevent
    movement of the pinion carrier.


CLS 81/134
TXT A pivoted device or a device moving as if on a pivot interlocks with a rack.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30.


CLS 81/135
TXT The catch does not travel with the traveling-jaw.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30.


CLS 81/136
TXT The nontraveling catch has its pivot between its locking end and its
    operating part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30      and 140.


CLS 81/137
TXT The catch has its pivot or axis of movement lying longitudinally of the
    handle.  It swings transversely of the interlocked rack.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     159, 160, and 161.


CLS 81/138
TXT The catch is forced by a cam into locking engagement with the rack.


CLS 81/139
TXT The catch is operated by a part not rigidly attached thereto.


CLS 81/140
TXT The catch moves on a pivot located between its locking end and its
    operating part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136.


CLS 81/141
TXT A cam engages the shank and draws the rack and the teeth of its cooperating
    member together.


CLS 81/142
TXT A sliding catch interlocks with the rack of the sliding part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31.


CLS 81/143
TXT A cam holds the catch in engagement with the rack.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31.


CLS 81/144
TXT A screw or nut holds the catch in engagement with the rack.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31.


CLS 81/145
TXT A spring forces the catch into engagement with the rack.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31.


CLS 81/146
TXT A spring presses the teeth of a jaw carrying frame into engagement with
    teeth on the shank of the other jaw.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes only those jaw-frames whose teeth are
    not integral therewith.


CLS 81/147
TXT The frame and the teeth are integral.


CLS 81/148
TXT A wedge forces the teeth of one part into locking engagement with the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154.


CLS 81/149
TXT A special part not rigidly attached to the wedge moves the latter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154.


CLS 81/150
TXT The traveling jaw is locked to the shank by a gripping or clamping action.


CLS 81/151
TXT The traveling jaw moves sidewise of the shank, the plane of the meeting
    faces of the jaws lying on opposite sides of the longitudinal axis of the
    handle or of a line parallel thereto.


CLS 81/152
TXT A yoke or ring-like device has a portion which grips or bites the shank to
    lock the traveling jaw.


CLS 81/153
TXT The traveling jaw is locked by gripping or clutching action of a roller
    upon the shank.


CLS 81/154
TXT The traveling jaw is locked to the shank by one or more inclines.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148     and 149.


CLS 81/155
TXT The sliding part is adjusted by means of a threaded device.


CLS 81/156
TXT The nut is made of sections which move away from the screw or of a single
    section which partially surrounds the screw and moves away from the screw
    in order to make a quick adjustment.


CLS 81/157
TXT The nut or screw is separated bodily from its cooperating member to provide
    a quick adjustment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36      and 137.


CLS 81/158
TXT The screw is carried by the traveling jaw and is moved away from its
    cooperating member which is a rack on the shank, to provide a quick
    adjustment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36      and 176.


CLS 81/159
TXT A portion of the threads are removed from cooperating parts, so that by
    registering there-moved portion of one part with the full portion of the
    other a quick adjustment is provided.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37.


CLS 81/160
TXT An interiorly-threaded device is operated to lock and advance the jaw at
    the time of locking.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37      and 137.


CLS 81/161
TXT The nut is secured to the traveling jaw.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37      and 137.


CLS 81/162
TXT An externally-threaded device secured to the traveling jaw is operated in
    connection with rack-like threads on the shank of the fixed jaw.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37      and 176.


CLS 81/163
TXT The sliding part or parts are adjusted by the actuation of a device having
    right and left threads.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35.


CLS 81/164
TXT Wrenches under subclass 155 in which a rotatable handgrip is provided with
    or connected to an exteriorly threaded portion, which portion is threadedly
    connected to the sliding jaw whereby rotation of the handgrip causes the
    threads to advance or retract a jaw.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for wrenches provided with rotatable handgrips for adjusting a
    pivoted jaw.

    168+,   for handles provided with an interiorly threaded nut element which
    engages a threaded rod so that rotation of the handle causes the threads to
    advance or retract a sliding jaw.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 93+.


CLS 81/165
TXT The sliding jaw has a movement transverse of the shank supporting it.
    Wrenches, Sliding adjustments, Thread, Nontraveling rotatable nut.  An
    interiorly-threaded device having no travel is operated to adjust the
    sliding part.


CLS 81/166
TXT The actuating-nut is seated between the jaws and the end of the handle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168.


CLS 81/167
TXT The outer jaw is adjusted by the actuation of a nut between jaws and the
    end of the handle.

    (1)     Note.  Where the nut is used as the fulcrum of a swinging outer
    jaw, see this class, subclass 101.

    (2)     Note.  Where the nut is carried on a rocking washer, see this
    class, subclass 104.

    (3)     Note.  Where the nut is carried in a rocking sleeve which guides an
    outer jaw, see this class, subclass 105.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169.


CLS 81/168
TXT The actuating nut is seated at the end of the handle.

    (1)     Note.  Where the nut is used as the fulcrum of a swinging outer
    jaw, see this class, subclass 101.

    (2)     Note.  Where the nut is carried on a rocking washer, see this
    class, subclass 104.

    (3)     Note.  Where the nut is carried on a rocking sleeve which guides an
    outer jaw, see this class, subclass 105.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166.


CLS 81/169
TXT The outer jaw is adjusted by the actuation of a nut at the end of the
    handle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167.


CLS 81/170
TXT An exteriorly-threaded device having no longitudinal movement is actuated
    to adjust the sliding part.


CLS 81/171
TXT The screw has its bearing in or on a bracket, usually on or a part of the
    upper end of the handle proper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93,     where the screw is used as the fulcrum of an inner jaw.


CLS 81/172
TXT Wrenches under subclass 170, in which the exteriorly threaded member
    comprises a shaft portion having a spiral groove which is engaged by a
    projection on a slidable actuator, the actuator being manually reciprocated
    in a path parallel to the longitudinal axis of the handle to rotate said
    threaded member.

    (1)     Note.  The actuator may form the slidable jaw.


CLS 81/173
TXT An interiorly-threaded device carried by the sliding part is actuated to
    secure an adjustment.


CLS 81/174
TXT The actuating-nut cooperates with threads upon the handle-bar.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93,     where the nut is used as the fulcrum of an inner jaw.

    107,    and the notes thereto.


CLS 81/175
TXT An exteriorly-threaded device travels longitudinally to make an adjustment.


CLS 81/176
TXT The actuating screw travels with the sliding part and cooperates with
    rack-like threads upon the shank.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
    152     and 162.


CLS 81/176.1
TXT Spanner:

    Wrench under subclass 52 including two spaced work engaging portions, one
    of which comprises a projection or recess which is adapted to engage a
    cooperating recess or projection, respectively, on the peripheral or an end
    face of the work.

    (1)     Note.  The flats and corners of a common bolt head or nut are not
    considered to be "projections or recesses" as required by this definition.

    (2)     Note.  Tools provided with two spaced projections which are adapted
    to be inserted into corresponding recesses specifically provided in the end
    face of the work are provided for above in subclasses 461+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    461,    for a screwdriver or wrench having plural spaced projections
    provided on engagement with a corresponding recess provided in an end face
    of the work and for applying a torque thereto.


CLS 81/176.15
TXT Having means to engage work axially:

    Wrench under subclass 176.1 wherein the work engaging projection or recess
    extends along the axis about which the twisting strain is applied to the
    work.


CLS 81/176.2
TXT And means to engage peripheral face of work:

    Tool under subclass 176.15 wherein the other of the two spaced work
    engaging portions is adapted to engage the outer periphery of the work.


CLS 81/176.3
TXT Having relatively movable jaws:

    Tool under subclass 176.1 wherein the two spaced work engaging portions are
    connected to each other by structure which permits one to pivot or
    translate relative to the other.


CLS 81/177.1
TXT Handle or shank:

    Tool under subclass 52 wherein significance is attributed either to a
    portion adapted to be engaged by the hand or to an elongated portion which
    connects a handle to the work engaging portion of the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    489+,   the generic locus for tool handles which are not disclosed for use
    with a particular type of hand tool, and see the search notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 110+ for other miscellaneous
    handle structure.


CLS 81/177.2
TXT Extensible handle or handle extension:

    Tool under subclass 177.1 comprising either (1) a hand engageable portion
    which is elongatable or is slidably retractable, or (2) a selectively
    attachable auxiliary hand engageable portion.

    (1)     Note.  The tool must be usable when the handle is unextended (part
    1), or with the auxiliary portion unattached (part 2).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177.6,  for a handle which is collapsible or foldable to a nonuse
    configuration.


CLS 81/177.3
TXT Having finger opening:

    Tool under subclass 177.1 including structure which forms a passageway
    adapted to accommodate a finger of the user therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclass 217 for an article carrier
    attached to the finger.


CLS 81/177.4
TXT Having means to store parts:

    Tool under subclass 177.1 wherein either a compartment or other means is
    provided on the hand engageable portion or the elongated connecting portion
    to retain other parts of the tool in a position of nonuse.


CLS 81/177.5
TXT Having terminal cross arm:

    Tool under subclass 177.1 wherein the elongated hand engageable portion is
    connected transversely to the elongated connecting portion at the distal
    end of the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124.3   and 124.7, for a socket provided with a handle comprising a
    terminal cross arm.


CLS 81/177.6
TXT Foldable or flexible:

    Tool under subclass 177.1 wherein the handle or shank either (1) is
    comprised of swingably connected sections collapsible to a nonuse
    configuration, or (2) comprises an elastically deformably member whereby
    the handle or shank may be flexed in a direction transverse to its length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for a bit stock having a foldable handle.

    177.2,  for an extensible handle usable in both the extended and collapsed
    configuration.


CLS 81/177.7
TXT Having pivoted handle section:

    Tool under subclass 177.1 including a hand engageable portion which is
    swingably attached to an adjacent portion that includes or is adapted to
    mount the work engaging portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177.6,  for a handle or shank which is foldable to a nonuse configuration.

    450,    for a screwdriver or allen wrench adapted to pivot or swivel with
    respect to the longitudinal axis of the handle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 52+ for a pivotal connection
    between sections of a nominally claimed article.


CLS 81/177.75
TXT Universal joint:

    Tool under subclass 177.7 wherein the hand engageable portion is swingably
    attached to the adjacent portion by two serially connected pivotal movement
    about orthogonal axes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclass 57 for a universal joint
    connecting sections of a nominally claimed article.


CLS 81/177.8
TXT Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 177.1 having means for changing the
    angle between the handle and the work engaging part, the angular adjustment
    being less than 360o.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57.26,  for gear operated machine wrenches provided with angularly
    adjustable drive means.

    58+,    for clutched head wrenches having handle and head adjustments of
    360o or more.


CLS 81/177.85
TXT Including socket and boss type connecting means:

    Tool under subclass 177.1 including structure provided on the handle or
    shank for selective assembly or disassembly with another tool part having
    cooperating structure wherein the connecting structure comprises a recess
    or opening in one part which is adapted to receive a protrusion formed on
    the other part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124.6,  for a claimed socket wrench having an axial socket adapted to
    receive a boss on a handle as provided for in this subclass (177.85).


CLS 81/177.9
TXT Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 177.8 wherein a dog on one member is
    resiliently urged against one of a plurality of surfaces on the other
    member to permit adjustment in one direction of rotation of the handle
    relative to the head by the shifting of the dog to a different surface
    without manual actuation of the dog.


CLS 81/178
TXT The jaws are reversible to bring a new part into operative position.


CLS 81/179
TXT The jaw or jaws are provided with a sliding jaw-face which moves in some
    degree transversely of the shank.


CLS 81/180.1
TXT Attachment, or including adjunct or replaceable portion:

    Tool under subclass 52 including a part which is connected to the remainder
    of the tool by structure which permits its ready removal and replacement,
    or a portion which has been added to the wrench to perform a specific
    function but does not essentially form part of the wrench, or a
    subcombination in the form of a part selectively connectable to a wrench.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    for a wrench attachment which holds a nut to prevent it from
    dropping out of a wrench.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, subclasses 138+ for a wrench which is provided with
    a diverse tool.


CLS 81/181
TXT Attachments and adjuncts which are applied to wrenches to convert them into
    cutters and which are so combined with the wrench that the parts which
    operate the jaws of the wrench are employed for applying the necessary
    pressure to the cutters.

    (1)     Note.  Cutters of a general nature applied to various parts of the
    wrench, but not coming within the above definition, are found in Class 7,
    Compound Tools.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, appropriate subclasses, for cutters, per se.


CLS 81/182
TXT The cutters are rotary disks or the like.


CLS 81/183
TXT Rollers added to wrench-jaws and causing a clutch-grip on the work.


CLS 81/184
TXT The attachment is sleeved upon or partially embraces the shank of the
    wrench.


CLS 81/185
TXT Attachments for reducing the size of wrench-sockets.


CLS 81/185.1
TXT Removable jaw face:

    Tool under subclass 180.1 comprising a work-engaging portion which is
    selectively attachable to or detachable from the wrench.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    421+,   for a jaw attachment for pliers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 271+ for a jaw attachment for a work
    holder.


CLS 81/185.2
TXT Movably mounted:

    Tool under subclass 180.1 comprising an attachment or adjunct which is
    connected to the remainder of the wrench by means which permits pivotal or
    translational movement between the two parts.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are wrenches having a multifaced
    element which is moved or reoriented to one of a plurality of positions to
    present a selected jaw face.


CLS 81/186
TXT Inventions relating to the surface structure of the jaws.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for vise jaw attachments.

    421+,   for jaw attachments to pliers and  tongs.


CLS 81/300
TXT Tools under the class definition including at least two relatively movable
    work-engaging elements (constituting jaws), at least two relatively movable
    hand-gripped elements (constituting handles), and joint mechanism
    interconnecting said jaws and said handles whereby manipulative movement of
    the handles with respect to each other effects relative movement of the
    jaws.

    DEFINITION OF TERMS:



    For the purposes of this and the indented subclasses, the following terms
    are defined:

    ACTUATION:

    The manipulation of handles relative to each other, so as to move jaws to
    engage work, within the limits of a predetermined range of jaw movement.
    (See the definition of "RANGE" hereunder).

    ADJUSTMENT:

    The changing of structural relationships between members constituting the
    tool so as to vary the limits of jaw movement from one predetermined range
    to another.  (See the definition of "RANGE" hereunder).

    HANDLE-MEMBER:

    A member which is gripped by the hand of the operator to which member one
    of the jaws is fixedly attached at least during the actuation of the jaws.

    HANDLE-LEVER (OR GRIP-LEVER):

    A hand-gripped element connected to a handle-member and to a movable jaw as
    by pivot, link or motion-converting means, which hand-gripped element
    actuates the movable jaw.

    HANDLE:

    The generic term for either a handle-member or a handle-lever where no
    distinction between the two members is necessary.

    JAW:

    An element carrying at least one work engaging surface, two or more of such
    elements engaging and holding the workpiece.

    JOINT MECHANISM:

    First means connecting the jaws movably to each other, second means for
    connecting at least one of the jaws movably to the handles, and third means
    connecting the handles movably to each other; said first, second and third
    means (either singly or in combination with each other) converting handle
    manipulation into relative jaw motion.  The joint mechanism may consist,
    for example, of a common first, second and third means as for example in
    Patent No. 2,325,035; or a common second and third means as for example in
    a pair of cross-handled pliers.

    RANGE:

    The extent of movement of the jaws relative to each other, unobstructed by
    the work to be engaged or by contact of the jaw surfaces, which movement is
    effected by manipulation of the handles from one extreme position of the
    handles to the other extreme position of the handles relative to each
    other.  The range is predetermined by the structural relationships between
    the elements constituting the tool.  To illustrate:  assuming that the
    movement of the handles between extremes of handle positions effects a jaw
    movement of one inch, the one inch dimension equals the range, which range
    is the same even though the device may be adjusted so that in one instance
    the jaws move from a zero gap position (closed) to a one inch gap or in
    another instance from a one-half inch gap to an inch-and-one-half gap.  The
    shift described is defined as adjustment; the manipulation of the handles
    to effect the one inch of jaw movement is defined as actuation.

    TOGGLE JOINT OR TOGGLE:

    A linkage including at least two links, pitmans, bars or struts, and at
    least three pivots, the end of one link being connected to the end of the
    other link by a pivot common to both links, each of said links also having
    a pivot at the end remote from the common pivot, which common pivot or
    intermediate pivot is movable from a position not in a straight line with
    the other two pivots, to a position substantially in line by a force
    applied to the intermediate pivot in a direction substantially normal to
    one of the links thereby moving at least one of the two pivots away from
    the other.  At least one of said links is articulated at both ends and is
    not integral with either a jaw or a handle.  The intermediate pivot is on
    the handle-lever or is connected to the handle-lever by a linkage or lever
    system between said intermediate pivot and the handle-lever, so that force
    is applied to the intermediate pivot by manipulation of the handle-lever.

    NOTES

    (1)     Note.  Generally, the tools in this and indented subclasses are
    characterized and distinguished from the wrenches of subclasses 53+ in that
    said tools include at least two hand-gripped  members relatively
    manipulated to effect relative jaw positioning so as to engage work, while
    the wrenches of subclasses 53+ have but a single hand-gripped member
    manipulated to transmit such manipulation to work.  Once the plural handles
    of a tool, here classified, have been relatively manipulated to effect jaw
    engagement with work, said plural handles may be further manipulated
    together as a unit, similar to a wrench handle, to transmit such further
    manipulation to the work.

    (1.5)   Note.  Tools wherein relative jaw positioning is effected solely by
    longitudinal shifting of elongated hand-gripped members with respect to
    each other (as for example in Patent No. 585,412), are classified in
    appropriate subclasses under subclasses 53+.  Such tools, which also
    include additional means to further relatively position said jaws, which
    means are, per se, encompassed by the definition of subclass 300 (as for
    example Patent No. 1,195,321) are classified hereunder.  On the other hand,
    where the additional means to further relatively position the jaws are not
    encompassed by the above definition of subclass 300 (as for example Patent
    No. 864,659), classification is in subclasses 53+.

    (2)     Note.  Compound tools which include a tool of the type classified
    in this or indented subclasses plus a wrench of the type classified in
    subclasses 53+, would be classified in this or the indented subclasses and
    cross-referenced into the appropriate subclass in Wrenches, subclasses 53+.

    (3)     Note.  Included in this subclass are attachments for tools
    otherwise falling within the definition above, which attachments have means
    to substitute for or supplement hand action for handle manipulation of the
    handles relative to each other, (see Patent No. 1,412,205).

    (4)     Note.  Ordinarily the user of a tool herein classified uses the
    tool by adjusting the jaw(s) (if jaw adjustment means is provided) to the
    approximate size of the work, then brings the tool jaws into close
    proximity with the work and moves the hand-gripped members (usually toward
    each other, but not limited thereto)  so as to actuate the jaws to engage
    and grip the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3+,     for pliers and tongs specialized for handling particular articles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, subclasses 125+ for plier type tools.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 147.1+ for
    mop holders.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 700+, particularly subclasses 218, 221,
    223+, 232, 248, 268 for plier or tong type devices specially designed to
    engage work and to exert either a pull or a push to assist in assembling or
    disassembling.

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 92+ for pipe and rod cutters, subclass 120.2
    for nut crackers, subclasses 175+ for nippers and subclasses 194+ for
    shears.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 409.01+ for a plier-type metal
    deforming device.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 234+ and 243 for presses, not elsewhere
    classified, of the plier type.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 504 for opposed jaw work-holding
    devices.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 801+ for catching and holding tools
    provided with jaws or tong fingers.

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 319+ for crushers, subclasses 321+ for forceps
    having pivoted arms carrying contacting members for grasping parts of the
    human body or articles within the human body, and subclass 340 for plier
    type devices for grasping and manipulating a surgical needle in the
    application of a suture to a wound by means of the needle.

    140,    Wireworking, subclass 121 for plier type wire-joining tools,
    subclass 106 for crimping implements and subclass 123 for plier type
    implements.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclass 144 for apparatus for
    applying a member, e.g., staple, of the plier type.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 4 for tube compressors.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, appropriate subclasses,
    for jaw actuator means.  Specific search notes to subclasses under Class
    294 are to be found under appropriate subclasses hereunder.

    433,    Dentistry, subclass 4 for orthodontic pliers; and subclasses 159+
    for dental forceps and pliers.

    452,    Butchering, subclasses 13+ for bivalve openers and subclass 194 for
    fish dr4essing and holding tools.


CLS 81/301
TXT Tools under subclass 300 having a fluid force transmitting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclasses for
    expansible chamber type motors, per se.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, for rotary expansible chamber
    devices, per se.


CLS 81/302
TXT Tools under subclass 300 including at least two jaws, each of which has a
    work-engaging surface facing away, oppositely, from the other jaw, and in
    which the movement of the handles towards each other effects movement of
    the jaws away from each other whereby the jaw surfaces engage interior
    surfaces of the work.

    (1)     Note.  Jaws which have outwardly-facing work-engaging surfaces,
    which jaws move towards each other as the handles are moved together, are
    classified in other subclasses on the basis of features other than the
    facing of the work-engaging jaw portions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for specialized expanding devices, such as boiler tube spreaders,
    piston-ring removers and the like, and especially subclass 3.05 for shell,
    projectile and wad-extractors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 239 for tools for spreading parts.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 36 for expanding
    jaw traps.

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 303.11 and 341+ for a delating instrument.

    168,    Farriery, subclass 47 for hoof and shoe expanders.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 93+ for
    expanding jaw grapples.


CLS 81/303
TXT Tools under subclass 300 including three or more work-gripping jaws.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are those devices in which only two of the
    jaws may be actuated to grip the workpiece, those in which one jaw may be
    common to each of the other two, and those in which three or more handles
    may be provided to actuate any pair of jaws independently of the other
    jaw(s).

    (2)     Note.  Pairs of jaws, each jaw of which includes two or more tines
    or fingers, are not found herein.  See subclass 419 for this feature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    419,    and see (2) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 3+ and 87.1+
    for tools for grasping multiple objects.


CLS 81/304
TXT Tools under subclass 303 including two handles only, which handles are
    manipulated for movement with respect to each other to actuate the jaws.


CLS 81/305
TXT Tools under subclass 304 including two pairs of jaws on opposite sides of
    joint means common to both pairs of jaws, each pair facing away from said
    common joint, both jaw pairs actuated by the same handle pair.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are tools in which the handle pair
    may be positioned so as to be adjacent either one of the jaw pairs,
    extending to one side of the joint, the other jaw pair extending to the
    other side of the joint.


CLS 81/306
TXT Tools under subclass 305 in which at least one set of jaws (which set
    comprises one jaw from each pair, said jaws of the set secured to each
    other and extending away from the common joint) is secured to one of the
    handles.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are tools in which the two jaws of
    the secured set and the handle form a T-shape.


CLS 81/307
TXT Tools under subclass 304 including two spaced jaws each actuated by one of
    the handles and one or more auxiliary jaws, each having work-engaging
    surfaces on opposite faces of the said auxiliary jaw, each auxiliary jaw
    interposed in the space which separates said two spaced jaws.


CLS 81/308
TXT Tools under subclass 304 limited to three work-gripping jaw elements.


CLS 81/309
TXT Tools under subclass 308 including first joint mechanism converting handle
    manipulation into arcuate motion of two of the jaws and second joint
    mechanism converting said handle manipulation into substantially
    rectilinear movement of the third jaw relative to said first joint.


CLS 81/310
TXT Tools under subclass 308 including one or more joint mechanisms converting
    handle manipulation into arcuate movement of each of the jaws relative to
    the other two jaws.


CLS 81/311
TXT Tools under subclass 304 including at least four jaws arranged in plural
    sets of two coacting work-gripping surfaces in each set, each of said sets
    actuated by manipulation of the handles.

    (1)     Note.  The jaw pairs may be similar to grip two or more objects
    individually or simultaneously, or may be different one pair from the
    other, to grip different objects.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305,    for tools including two pairs of jaws extending away from each
    other.


CLS 81/312
TXT Tools under subclass 311 in which the sets of surfaces are generally
    parallel to each other and separated from each other along a line
    substantially normal to the surfaces.

    (1)     Note.  The jaws are simultaneously actuated for movement in a plane
    common to all the jaws.


CLS 81/313
TXT Tools under subclass 300 including means requiring a full predetermined
    extent of jaw motion prior to restoring the jaw(s) to an original position.

    (1)     Note.  The cycle of operation is such that manipulation of the
    handles relative to each other effects only unidirectional movement of the
    jaws (usually toward each other) and only after the limit of such
    unidirectional movement is reached can the direction of jaw movement be
    reversed.

    (2)     Note.  Included here are devices known in the art as full-stroke
    compelling mechanisms.

    (3)     Note.  See the definition of "RANGE" under subclass 300.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 17.5 for full stroke
    compelling mechanisms.


CLS 81/314
TXT Tools under subclass 300 including means which convert a plurality of
    handle manipulations, alternating to and fro relative to each other, into
    an intermittent and unidirectional series of jaw motions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses under 111+ for
    intermittent grip type actuators.


CLS 81/315
TXT Tools under subclass 300 including means for latching the handles against
    pivotal movement with respect to each other and means for moving the jaws
    with respect to each other while the handles are latched.

    (1)     Note.  Tools in this and indented subclasses are convertible to use
    as wrenches or as pliers, see (1) Note under subclass 325.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324,    for convertible tools in which the relative jaw position is fixed.


CLS 81/316
TXT Tools under subclass 315 including means for latching the handles in any
    one of a number of desired handle relationships.


CLS 81/317
TXT Tools under subclass 315 wherein one handle slips or slides parallel to its
    own length with respect to and parallel to the length of the other handle.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are tools in which the jaws are
    secured one to each handle whereby handle movement effects jaw adjustment.


CLS 81/318
TXT Tools under subclass 300 including means for holding the jaws against
    movement relative to each other despite continued application of force by
    the operator tending to urge the handles together or apart.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are tools which require continued
    application of said force urging the handles together or apart or urging a
    finger-pressed element to hold the jaws in the desired relationship.

    (2)     Note.  The subclasses indented hereunder provide for tools which do
    not require continued application of force by the operator to hold the jaws
    in the desired relationship.

    (3)     Note.  Tools which provide means for preventing pivotal movement of
    the handles with respect to each other, but do not prevent movement of the
    jaws while the handles are so held are not classified in this or indented
    subclasses.  For such tools see subclasses 315+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131,    for means locking the jaws of a wrench into a desired relationship.

    315+,   and see (3) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclass 19 for jaw type locks.

    128,    Surgery, subclass 322 for forceps for grasping parts of the person
    and which forceps are locked to prevent release of the hold.


CLS 81/319
TXT Tools under subclass 318 including means both for latching the jaws in a
    desired relationship and for disengaging the latch means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    368+,   for toggle release means.


CLS 81/320
TXT Tools under subclass 318 including means both for latching the jaws in a
    desired relationship and for holding the latch means out of operative or
    latching position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    372,    for means to prevent the locking of a toggle linkage.


CLS 81/321
TXT Tools under subclass 318 including a latch, one portion of the latch
    mounted on one handle, another portion of the latch mounted on the other
    handle, and resilient means biasing the handles towards or away from each
    other, whereby the bias maintains latch interengagement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    417     and 427, for spring-urged jaws and/or handles.


CLS 81/322
TXT Tools under subclass 321 including additional resilient means, separate and
    apart from the handle biasing means, for maintaining latch interengagement.


CLS 81/323
TXT Tools under subclass 318 including means for holding the jaws in the
    desired relationship and resilient means for biasing said holding means
    into jaw securing position.


CLS 81/324
TXT Tools under subclass 318 including means for latching the jaws rigidly into
    desired relationship.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are tools wherein the jaws are secured in a
    closed position for safe storage or transport.


CLS 81/325
TXT Tools under subclass 324 including means for latching the jaws in any one
    of a number of desired adjusted positions.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this and indented subclasses are tools which are
    convertible for use as a wrench (for which use the jaws are adjustable but
    are fixed or locked to each other during application of torque to the work
    by the tool), or for use as a pair of pliers (for which use the lock is
    disabled to permit a range of jaw movement).

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass are tools which include a toggle
    linkage for actuating the jaws plus means to secure or fix the linkage in
    latched position.

    (3)     Note.  See definition of "TOGGLE" and "ACTUATION" under subclass
    300.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315+,   for convertible tools in which the angular relative handle position
    is fixed.


CLS 81/326
TXT Tools under subclass 325 in which the latch means includes screw elements.


CLS 81/327
TXT Tools under subclass 326 including screw elements for adjusting the jaw
    position.

    (1)     Note.  The jaw adjusting means are in addition to the latch means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    388+,   and see notes thereunder for other threaded jaw-adjusting means.


CLS 81/328
TXT Tools under subclass 325 including toothed and indented members
    interengaging to prevent relative jaw movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    392,    for other interdigitated lock means.


CLS 81/329
TXT Tools under subclass 300 including means to restrain the jaws against
    movement away from the work engaged, which means does not restrict movement
    of the jaws towards the work.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this and indented subclasses are tools in which
    the jaws close to engage the work, which work alone limits further closing
    of the jaws, and the restraining means prevents the jaws from opening for
    so long as the operator desires the locked jaw condition.  For similar
    tools in which jaw closing is limited by means other than the work engaged,
    see this class, subclass 341.

    (2)     Note.   This subclass and indented subclasses specifically exclude
    toggle-link means for locking the jaws on the work; see (3) Note below.
    This and indented subclasses do not exclude toggle-link means to actuate
    the jaws for movement together with other means for locking the jaws.

    (3)     Note.   Since toggle linkages used for jaw actuation are inherently
    locked on the work by reason of the intermediate pivot passing through and
    beyond the straight line position of the links, all toggle actuated
    subclasses should be searched for this feature, including subclasses 363
    and 367+.

    (4)     Note.   See the definition of "TOGGLE" under subclass 300.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    319     and 320, for tools otherwise classified in this and indented
    subclasses, but provided with lock release means and lock disabling means
    respectively.

    341,    and see (1) Note above.

    363     and 367+, and see (3) Note above.


CLS 81/330
TXT Tools under subclass 329 in which the restraining means is effective in
    predetermined jaw positions chosen by the operator.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are tools which require a
    preliminary spacing of the jaws to a distance slightly greater than the
    span of the work, such that when the handles are manipulated to actuate the
    jaws, said jaws will lock on the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    385+,   for jaw adjustment means.


CLS 81/331
TXT Tools under subclass 329 including latch means, separate and apart from the
    handles or jaws, which latch is set by the operator to restrain the jaws.

    (1)     Note.  Tools classified in this and indented subclasses,
    particularly subclass 333, are those in which the movement of the jaws is
    effected by manipulation of the handles, and the jaw movement is prevented,
    at the will of the operator, by the latch means. For tools which are
    similar in structure to tools classified herein, but differ in that the jaw
    movement is effected by movement of the latch means, see this class,
    subclass 112.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    and see (1) Note above.


CLS 81/332
TXT Tools under subclass 331 including a loop or bight mounted on one handle to
    be swung over the other handle.


CLS 81/333
TXT Tools under subclass 331 including a collar, bight or loop element
    embracing both jaws or both handles, which element is moved longitudinally
    of the handles to firmly engage both jaws or both handles.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note under subclass 331.


CLS 81/334
TXT Tools under subclass 331 including internal and external screw elements one
    of which elements is manipulated into abutting relationship with a portion
    of a jaw or handle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    388+,   and see search notes thereunder.


CLS 81/335
TXT Tools under subclass 334 in which the manipulated element is internally
    threaded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    390,    for nut means adjusting a jaw.

    402+,   for nut means adjusting the jaw      and/or handle.


CLS 81/336
TXT Tools under subclass 331 including a cog or projection connected to one
    handle and a swinging member connected to the other handle, said swinging
    member having notches or indentations therein for engagement by said cog or
    projection.


CLS 81/337
TXT Tools under subclass 331 including indentations or notches connected to one
    handle and a swinging member connected to the other handle, said swinging
    member having a cog or projection thereon for engagement with said
    indentations or notches.


CLS 81/338
TXT Tools under subclass 329 including a cog or projection connected to one
    handle or jaw mating with indentations or notches connected to the other
    handle or jaw.

    (1)     Note.  The pawl or cog may be provided with one, two or three teeth
    which fit into the indentations of the rack member.  For tools in which
    substantial areas of contacting surface are roughened or serrated see this
    class, subclass 340.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    340,    and see (1) Note above.


CLS 81/339
TXT Tools under subclass 329 including two portions slidable relatively to each
    other in surface-to-surface contact, the surfaces approaching each other as
    the jaws are actuated by handle manipulation, and engaging firmly to resist
    retracting movement as the jaws engage the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323,    for other frictional latch means urged into latching position by a
    spring.


CLS 81/340
TXT Tools under subclass 339 including roughened contacting faces.

    (1)     Note.  Tools in this subclass rely on the increased frictional
    characteristics inherent in the roughened mating surfaces for locking the
    jaws on the work.For tools in which a cog fits into the indentations of a
    rack member to hold the jaws on the work, see this class, subclass 338.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    338,    and see (1) Note above.


CLS 81/341
TXT Tools under subclass 300 including means to changeably set or determine the
    extremes of jaw position.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are tools in which the jaws close to engage
    the work and said means limits the closing of the jaws.  For similar tools
    in which jaw opening is limited, see this class, subclasses 329+.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is differentiated from the jaw adjustment
    subclasses 385+, in that tools in this subclass are provided with means to
    restrict the range of movement of the jaws, whereas tools in subclasses
    385+ are provided with means to shift the range of movement of the jaws but
    leave the extent of such range unchanged.

    (3)     Note.  See the definition of "RANGE" under subclass 300.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329+,   and see (1) Note above.

    385+,   and see (2) Note above.

    418+    and 428, for jaw configuration or handle configuration which limit
    or restrict jaw or handle positions.


CLS 81/342
TXT Tools under subclass 300 characterized by joint mechanism which converts
    relative motion of the handles into a predetermined range of jaw movement.

    (1)     Note.  See definition of "ACTUATION" under subclass 300.

    (2)     Note.  First, second or third class levers are not here considered
    to be converting means.  For example, a nut-cracker or tweezer type of tool
    otherwise falling within the scope of the definition of subclass 300 is not
    here classified, but is to be found either in subclass 300 or in other
    subclasses below on the basis of other features.

    (3)     Note.  For jaw adjustment mechanisms, see subclasses 385+.

    (4)     Note.  See definition of "ADJUSTMENT" under subclass 300.

    (5)     Note.  See definition of "RANGE" under subclass 300.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    415,    for first class lever tools.


CLS 81/343
TXT Tools under subclass 342 including structure providing more than one ratio
    of relative handle movement to relative jaw movement (e.g., mechanical
    advantage or leverage to actuate the jaws for movement) and further
    including structure to select or predetermine one desired ratio out of the
    plurality of ratios available.

    (1)     Note. Though actuators which include cam means or toggle-link means
    may be considered as mechanisms for varying the leverage, so that in effect
    more than one ratio of handle movement to jaw movement throughout actuation
    is inherent in these exemplary structures, such means, per se, are not
    included in this or indented subclasses.  If, on the other hand, a cam
    actuator is provided with discrete cam surfaces or with separate means to
    choose a particular portion of a cam surface, whereby the user may select
    one of the surface or surface portions for the ratio desired, or a
    toggle-link actuator is provided with a separate means to vary inherent
    ratio of the toggle-linkage, whereby the user may change or preset the
    ratio to that desired, tools including such actuators are classified herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    361,    for sliding-jaw cam actuators.

    363     and 367+, for toggle-link actuators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 516+ for control linkages
    including variable output and input forces.


CLS 81/344
TXT Tools under subclass 343 including means providing a finite number of
    desired leverage ratios.


CLS 81/345
TXT Tools under subclass 342 in which the handles are fixed on parallel shafts
    longitudinally slidable relatively to one another, and said shafts are
    connected to the jaws whereby manipulation of the handles relative to each
    other effects movement of the jaws.


CLS 81/346
TXT Tools under subclass 342 including cranked or offset handles fixed at ends
    of parallel rods or shafts and jaws fixed at other ends of said rods,
    whereby relative arcuate movement of the handles causes pivotal movement of
    at least one of the rods about its longitudinal axis effecting similar
    relative arcuate movement of the jaws.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 30 for axially
    extending handles.


CLS 81/347
TXT Tools under subclass 342 in which each jaw is movable with respect to its
    handle by motion of the handle or handles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    421+,   for jaw attachments and/or inserts.

    424,    for tools in which only one jaw is  pivoted or articulated to its
    handle.


CLS 81/348
TXT Tools under subclass 347 in which the jaws are fulcrumed with respect to
    each other or a common member for pivotable movement to or from each other.


CLS 81/349
TXT Tools under subclass 348 including camming means connected to both movable
    jaws to effect jaw movement.

    (1)     Note.  The term "camming means" is inclusive of a rotary body
    having a continuous pressure surface of gradually varying radius, or of a
    movable body having diverging opposed pressure  surfaces, in which movement
    of the pressure surface(s) is caused by movement of the body transversely
    of a direction of body-compressing motion and between the pressure surface
    and an abutment.


CLS 81/350
TXT Tools under subclass 348 including two jaws and two handles, each handle
    comprising a lever, at one end of which lever is a portion including two
    separated points of articulation, at the other end of which lever is a
    hand-grip portion, in which the handles are pivoted together at one of said
    points of articulation, the jaws being pivoted, one jaw to one handle
    respectively, at the other of said points of articulation, and the jaws are
    connected together for angular movement relative to each other.


CLS 81/351
TXT Tools under subclass 350 in which the connection between the jaws comprises
    a pintle common to both jaws.


CLS 81/352
TXT Tools under subclass 347 including means to maintain the gripping faces of
    the jaws continuously normal to a line perpendicular to and intersecting
    the jaw faces during jaw actuation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    355+,   for tools in which one jaw is fixed to its handle and the other jaw
    is slidable with respect to said fixed jaw and handle.

    373,    for toggle linkage tools in which the jaw surfaces are continuously
    parallel to each other.


CLS 81/353
TXT Tools under subclass 352 in which jaw parallelism is maintained by means
    acting normal to the perpendicular intersecting line and along the extent
    of the jaws.


CLS 81/354
TXT Tools under subclass 352 in which jaw parallelism is maintained by means
    acting perpendicularly to the jaw surfaces.


CLS 81/355
TXT Tools under subclass 342 including a handle-lever and a handle-member and
    means to convert handle-lever manipulation into substantially rectilinear
    movement of its jaw normal to the gripping face of the fixed handle-member
    jaw.

    (1)     Note.  In this and indented subclasses the surfaces of the jaws
    remain parallel to each other during the jaw actuation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    352+,   for tools in which each jaw moves relative to each handle, and the
    jaw surfaces are continuously parallel to each other.

    373,    for toggle linkage tools in which the jaw surfaces are continuously
    parallel to each other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 34 and 119.1
    for sliding jaw grapples.


CLS 81/356
TXT Tools under subclass 355 including means to change the limits of sliding
    jaw movement from one predetermined range to another.

    (1)     Note.  See definition of "ADJUSTMENT" under subclass 300.

    (2)     Note.  In this subclass, as in subclasses 365, 382 and 384 the jaw
    adjustment mechanism and the jaw actuator mechanism are mounted on the same
    tool and each mechanism acts in its own way in the tool.  For the
    particular adjustment structure see the indicated adjustment subclasses
    below.


CLS 81/357
TXT Tools under subclass 356 including detent or dog means pivoted to the
    handle-lever for movement thereby, the free end of said means engaging any
    one of a plurality of notches in a member connected to either the movable
    jaw or the handle-member jaw.

    (1)     Note.  Tools in which the notched member is connected to the
    movable jaw permit adjustment of the type classified in subclass 391.
    Tools in which the notched member is connected to the handle-member permit
    handle adjustment of the type classified in subclass 410.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass are tools in which the dog means
    is spring urged toward the notched member.

    (3)     Note.  See the first sentence of (1) Note under subclass 338.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    313     and 314, for tools including step-by-step jaw actuators including
    pivoted dog means.


CLS 81/358
TXT Tools under subclass 355 in which manipulation of the handle-lever rotates
    a separate toothed gear or gear segment, which segment engages a
    complementary notched member connected to either jaw.

    (1)     Note.  A gear segment is here considered to have two or more teeth.


CLS 81/359
TXT Tools under subclass 355 including tooth or cog means integral with the
    handle-lever, which means engages an indented member connected to the
    movable jaw.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    314,    for means providing for step-by-step movement.

    364,    for claw-lever means actuating a pivoted jaw.


CLS 81/360
TXT Tools under subclass 359 in which the handle-lever has more than one cog.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    366,    for plural cog coaction with a rack connected to a pivoted jaw.


CLS 81/361
TXT Tools under subclass 355 including a camming means connected to the
    slidable jaw which means is operated in response to handle-lever
    manipulation.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note under subclass 349 for an exemplary definition
    of "camming means".


CLS 81/362
TXT Tools under subclass 355 including a pitman pivoted at one point to the
    handle-lever and at another point either to the slidable jaw or to the
    handle-member which pitman is operated by manipulation of the handle-lever.

    (1)     Note.  A socket joint is here considered a pivot joint.


CLS 81/363
TXT Tools under subclass 362 in which either the pitman or an extension of the
    handle-lever is part of a toggle linkages.

    (1)     Note. See the definition of "TOGGLE" under subclass 300.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    357,    for lever and pawl actuator means in which the pawl acts as the
    connecting rod of a toggle linkage.

    367+,   for toggle linkage which actuates in articulated or pivoted jaw.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 106 for toggle linkage.


CLS 81/364
TXT Tools under subclass 342 including a handle-lever and a handle-member and
    tooth or cog means integral with, or pivotally carried by, the
    handle-lever, which means engages an indented member connected to a movable
    jaw, whereby handle manipulation oscillates said movable jaw with respect
    to a fixed jaw.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    314,    for means providing for step-by-step jaw movement.

    359,    for claw-lever means actuating a sliding jaw.


CLS 81/365
TXT Tools under subclass 364 including means to change the limits of jaw
    movement from one predetermined range to another.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note under subclass 356.

    (2)     Note.  See definition of "ADJUSTMENT" under subclass 300.


CLS 81/366
TXT Tools under subclass 364 in which the handle-lever has more than one cog.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    360,    for plural cog coaction with a rack connected to a sliding jaw.


CLS 81/367
TXT Tools under subclass 342 including a handle-member, a handle-lever and an
    articulated jaw movable relative to the fixed, handle-member jaw, wherein
    the joint mechanism includes a toggle linkage.

    (1)     Note.  See definition of the term "TOGGLE" under subclass 300.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein and in the indented subclasses are those
    tools known in the art as vise-wrench, vise-grip, plier-wrench, locking
    plier or toggle-wrench type, wherein the jaws are clamped on the work after
    actuation without further effort by the operator. For other wrenches or
    pliers in which work is clamped between the jaws, see subclasses 318+ and
    329+.

    (3)     Note.  The toggle wrench mechanism in this and indented subclasses
    is replete with adjustment mechanisms, for which mechanism see subclasses
    385+ as appropriate.  The greatest number of these adjustments are to be
    found in subclasses 399+.

    (4)     Note.  Included in this subclass are double toggle linkages which
    include at least three links (two of which links are connecting rods) and
    four pivots (one of which pivots is an outer pivot relative to one toggle
    and an intermediate pivot relative to the other toggle).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    318+,   and see (2) Note above.

    329+,   and see (2) Note above.

    363,    for toggle linkage which actuates a sliding jaw.

    385+,   and see (3) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 106 for toggle linkages.


CLS 81/368
TXT Tools under subclass 367 in which a force is applied to the intermediate
    pivot for moving said pivot to or slightly beyond a straight line passing
    through the other or outer pivots, thus serving to stabilize the toggle
    linkage into a locked condition, and including means to alter the stable
    relationship of the pivots and/or links thus unlocking the toggle linkage.

    (1)     Note.  Tools in this and indented subclasses are usually of the
    type classified in this class, subclasses 378+, but include a toggle
    release means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    319,    for lock release means.

    378+,   and see (1) Note above.


CLS 81/369
TXT Tools under subclass 368 in which the alteration means includes means to
    apply a second force to the pintle which joins the two links, either
    directly or by link means, in a direction opposite to the first named force.


CLS 81/370
TXT Tools under subclass 369 in which the means for applying the second force
    is mounted on the handle-lever for movement with respect to said
    handle-lever and said pintle.


CLS 81/371
TXT Tools under subclass 370 in which the means for applying the second force
    is carried on the pintle which joins the links.


CLS 81/372
TXT Tools under subclass 367 including means to restrict travel of the pintle
    which joins the two links of the toggle.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are means to prevent locking of the tool on
    the work by preventing the movement of the intermediate pivot beyond a
    straight line passing through the outer pivots.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    320,    for other means to disable a lock means.


CLS 81/373
TXT Tools under subclass 367 including means to constrain the travel of the
    articulated jaw whereby the work-engaging surfaces of both jaws remain
    parallel to each other during such travel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    352+,   for parallel movement of two articulated jaws.

    355+,   for parallel movement of one jaw sliding relative to a second
    handle-member jaw.


CLS 81/374
TXT Tools under subclass 367 including two connecting-rods (one pivoted to the
    articulated jaw and the other pivoted to the handle-member) pivoted to each
    other at the intermediate pivot, and a link or lever-system pivoted at one
    end to the intermediate pivot and pivoted at the other end to the
    handle-lever, whereby manipulation of the handle-lever exerts force on the
    intermediate pivot.


CLS 81/375
TXT Tools under subclass 367 including an element movable relatively to the
    handle-member, on which element are pivoted the articulated jaw and the
    links constituting the toggle mechanism.


CLS 81/376
TXT Tools under subclass 367 in which one link of the toggle is an integral
    extension of the handle-lever and the other link is connected between the
    handle-lever and the articulated jaw.


CLS 81/377
TXT Tools under subclass 367 in which one link of the toggle is an integral
    extension of the handle-lever and the other link is connected between the
    handle-lever and the handle-member.


CLS 81/378
TXT Tools under subclass 377 including a pintle directly connecting the
    articulated jaw with the handle-member for actuation of said jaw about said
    pintle.

    (1)     Note.  For tools of the type classified in this and indented
    subclasses which include a toggle-release means, see subclasses 368+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    368+,   and see (1) Note above.


CLS 81/379
TXT Tools under subclass 378 including spring means urging the articulated jaw
    or the toggle linkage or both elements in a desired direction with respect
    to the fixed jaw or handle-member.


CLS 81/380
TXT Tools under subclass 379 in which the spring comprises a helically wound
    wire looped or hooked at each end, the spring being extensible under a
    stretching load applied to the ends, wherein one end is attached to the
    articulated jaw and the other end is attached to the handle-member.


CLS 81/381
TXT Tools under subclass 342 including a handle-lever and a handle-member, in
    which the handle-lever is pivoted to the movable jaw, both the movable jaw
    and the handle-lever being pivoted to the handle-member.

    (1)     Note.  The handle-lever may be connected to the handle-member by a
    toggle-link linkage wherein both links are integral with the respective jaw
    or handle-lever.

    (2)     Note.  A socket joint is considered as a pivot in this and indented
    subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  Included in this subclass are tools in which the movable jaw
    is directly pivoted to the handle-lever; for indirectly or linked pivoted
    jaws see subclass 383.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    347+,   for pliers in which each jaw is movable and pivoted to its
    handle-lever.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 119 for tandem
    lever grapples.


CLS 81/382
TXT Tools under subclass 381 including means to change the limits of jaw
    movement from one predetermined range to another.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note under subclass 356.


CLS 81/383
TXT Tools under subclass 381 including a pitman intermediate the handle-lever
    and the pivoted jaw.


CLS 81/383.5
TXT Tools under subclass 342 including a handle-member, a handle-lever and an
    articulated jaw, in which manipulation of the handle-lever effects movement
    of said jaw through a camming means.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note under subclass 349 for an exemplary definition
    of "camming means".


CLS 81/384
TXT Tools under subclass 342 including means to change the limits of jaw
    movement from one predetermined range to another.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note under subclass 356.


CLS 81/385
TXT Tools under subclass 300 characterized by joint mechanism for effecting a
    selection in the relative position of handles and/or jaws separate and
    apart from the actuating means for said jaws whereby the range of jaw
    actuation is shifted into one of a plurality of predetermined ranges.

    (1)     Note.  For jaw actuating mechanisms see subclasses 342+.

    (2)     Note.  See definition of "ACTUATION" under subclass 300.

    (3)     Note.  See the definition of "RANGE" under subclass 300.

    (4)     Note.  This subclass and indented subclasses are differentiated
    from the jaw movement limiting subclass 341 in that tools in this and
    indented subclasses are provided with means leaving the range of movement
    of the jaw(s) unchanged, but changing the placement of the range, whereas
    tools in subclass 341 are provided with means to change the extent of
    movement of the jaw(s).


CLS 81/386
TXT Tools under subclass 385 including means to change the position of at least
    one jaw with respect to its handle without changing either the position of
    the handles with respect to each other or the position of the joint
    connecting said handles.


CLS 81/387
TXT Tools under subclass 386 including means to change the position of each jaw
    with respect to its handle.


CLS 81/388
TXT Tools under subclass 386 in which the mechanism connecting the movable jaw
    to its handle includes screw elements, whereby manipulation of one of the
    elements effects adjustment of the jaw relative to its handle.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are mechanisms including a
    helically threaded worm member interdigitated with a complementary notched
    bar or rack wherein the worm is rotated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155+,   for other threaded adjustment means.

    327,    for other threaded jaw adjustment means.

    334,    for threaded jaw latch means.

    395+,   for other threaded jaw adjustment  means.


CLS 81/389
TXT Tools under subclass 388 in which the manipulated element is externally
    threaded and is rotated to effect movement of the jaw relative to its
    handle.


CLS 81/390
TXT Tools under subclass 388 in which the manipulated element is internally
    threaded, and is rotated to effect movement of the jaw relative to its
    handle.


CLS 81/391
TXT Tools under subclass 386 including a toothed member and a complementary
    notched bar whereby selection of the notch engaged by the tooth determines
    the adjustment of the movable jaw and holds said jaw in said adjustment
    during actuation of the jaw(s).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    357,    for lever and pawl actuator means in which the pawl is pivoted at
    one end to the handle-lever and engages at the other end with one of the
    notches in a notched, movable jaw.


CLS 81/392
TXT Tools under subclass 386 including complementary toothed interfitting means
    on the movable jaw and handle-lever respectively, and means to secure the
    toothed means against relative movement in desired position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    328,    for other interdigitated lock means.


CLS 81/393
TXT Tools under subclass 385 including a plural-sectioned handle with means to
    vary the in-line relationship of one section with respect to another
    without changing either the position of the jaws with respect to each other
    or the position of the joint connecting the handles to each other.


CLS 81/394
TXT Tools under subclass 385 including at least one aperture in one handle, a
    plurality of apertures in the other handle and a pintle connecting the
    handles seated in a selected aperture in each handle.

    (1)     Note.  Is is not necessary for the aperture(s) to extend entirely
    through the handle(s).


CLS 81/395
TXT Tools under subclass 385 including internal and external screw elements
    movably connecting the handles to each whereby rotary manipulation of one
    of the screw elements effects positioning of one handle and its jaw
    relative to the other handle and jaw.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155+,   for other threaded adjustment means.

    326+,   for threaded jaw lock means.

    334+,   for threaded jaw adjustment means.

    388+,   for threaded jaw adjustment means.


CLS 81/396
TXT Tools under subclass 395 including a helical externally threaded member
    interdigitated with a complementary notched bar whereby manipulation of
    said member effects jaw adjustment.


CLS 81/397
TXT Tools under subclass 395 including mating circumferential internal and
    external screw portions with each portion connected to or carried by a
    separate handle, one portion and its associated handle moved longitudinally
    of the other portion by rotation of said handles relative to each other.


CLS 81/398
TXT Tools under subclass 395 in which the manipulated internal or external
    screw is rotated and moves both handles.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are turnbuckle or similar adjusting means
    having right-hand and left-hand threads.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155,    161, 162, 173, and 175, for screw elements rotated to adjust wrench
    jaws.


CLS 81/399
TXT Tools under subclass 395 in which the manipulated element is externally
    threaded and is rotated to effect axial movement relative to its mating
    element.


CLS 81/400
TXT Tools under subclass 399 in which the externally threaded element is
    connected to the member(s) constituting the joint mechanism for positive
    movement of said member(s) in each direction.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 300 for definition of "JOINT MECHANISM".


CLS 81/401
TXT Tools under subclass 399 in which the internally threaded element is
    connected to the member(s) constituting the joint mechanism for positive
    movement of said member(s) in each direction.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 300 for definition of "JOINT MECHANISM".


CLS 81/402
TXT Tools under subclass 395 including a manipulated element internally
    threaded and rotated to effect axial movement relative to its mating
    element.


CLS 81/403
TXT Tools under subclass 402 in which the externally threaded element is
    connected to the member(s) constituting the joint mechanism for positive
    movement of said members in each direction.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 300 for definition of "JOINT MECHANISM".


CLS 81/404
TXT Tools under subclass 402 in which the internally threaded element is
    connected to the member(s) constituting the joint mechanism for positive
    movement of said members in each direction.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 300 for definition of "JOINT MECHANISM".


CLS 81/405
TXT Tools under subclass 385 wherein the joint mechanism includes a pintle
    fixed to an element, which element is engaged by the operator to move said
    element and pintle relative to at least one of the handles.

    (1)     Note.  The pintle is usually socketed in one handle and shiftable
    within a slot in the other handle.

    (2)     Note.  The term "engaged" includes direct manipulation of the
    element of indirect movement as by a slide or cam.


CLS 81/406
TXT Tools under subclass 405 in which the element is provided with two portions
    socketed one in each handle, one portion forming the pintle for handle
    manipulation, the other portion being transversely offset from said pintle
    portion, whereby shifting of said other portion within its socket effects
    an orbital shifting of the pintle portion thereby moving one handle
    orbitally with respect to the other.


CLS 81/407
TXT Tools under subclass 385 including means movably connecting the handles to
    each other, said means constraining the handles for slidable movement
    relative to each other thereby changing the position of a bearing portion
    at which one handle pivots with respect to the other.

    (1)     Note.  For adjustment of the jaws the operator grasps one handle in
    each hand and shifts the fulcrum of the handles by moving one handle
    substantially along its longitudinal axis.  In many cases the handles must
    be separated by pivoting at the joint prior to the shifting movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    318,    for jaw adjustment means including sliding handles, which handles
    are gripped by the hand of the operator to maintain the adjusted jaw
    position.


CLS 81/408
TXT Tools under subclass 407 wherein the bearing portion is carried by an
    element shiftable longitudinally along one handle, said bearing portion
    serving as a fulcrum or pivot for oscillation of one handle with respect to
    the other.


CLS 81/409
TXT Tools under subclass 408 including means to latch the element in desired
    adjustment position along the length of the handle.

    (1)     Note.  See subclasses 400, 401, 403, and 404 for pliers with
    mechanically manipulated joints in which the adjustment is positively held.


CLS 81/409.5
TXT With spring-urged lock for member:

    Tool under subclass 408 including resiliently biased means to secure the
    element in the desired adjustment position along the handle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    357,    for lever and pawl actuator means in which the pawl is pivoted at
    one end to the fulcrum-carrying member and engages at the free end with one
    of the notches in a notched handle-member.


CLS 81/411
TXT Tools under subclass 407 including a pintle on one handle selectively
    engageable with any of a plurality of indentations along an elongated
    aperture in the other handle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109,    for other slotted fulcrum guide structure.


CLS 81/412
TXT Tools under subclass 411 in which the pintle has a cross-sectioned bearing
    portion with both a maximum and a minimum dimension, the slot has a
    plurality of longitudinally spaced enlarged portions substantially equal in
    size to said maximum cross-sectional dimension, and the enlarged portions
    are joined to each other by slot portions substantially equal in size to
    said minimum cross-sectional dimension.

    (1)     Note.  Adjustment is effected by pivotal shift of the pintle so as
    to align the minimum pintle portion with the minimum slot portion and
    translational shift into the desired maximum slot portion.

    (2)     Note.  It is not necessary for the enlarged portions of the slot to
    extend entirely through the handle.


CLS 81/413
TXT Tools under subclass 407 including a dog(s), projection(s), pin(s) or
    cog(s) integral with one handle and selectively engageable with any of a
    plurality of indentations along the facing edge of the other handle.


CLS 81/414
TXT Tools under subclass 407 in which the joint includes a pintle on one handle
    engaging an elongated slot in the other handle, at least one arcuate ridge
    or groove on one handle facing and selectively engaging any one of a
    plurality of mating arcuate grooves or ridges--the arcuate elements mating
    along peripheral surfaces--the pintle serving as a common center to the
    mating arcuate elements in any given selected position.


CLS 81/415
TXT Tools under subclass 300 wherein the claimed structure includes two levers
    each with a hand grip portion at one end and a fixed jaw or work gripping
    portion at the other end, a pivot hole or socket in either or both levers
    intermediate of the ends, and a pin in the hole(s) joining the two levers
    together in crossed relationship for pivotal movement of one lever relative
    to the other.

    (1)     Note.  The pivot pin may be integral with one of the levers and
    socketed into the other lever.

    (2)     Note.  Jaw adjusting means are not provided for in this subclass,
    see the jaw adjusting subclasses (385 to 414) above.

    (3)     Note.  The term "fixed" is inclusive of jaw(s) integral with the
    lever(s) or detachable but immovable with respect to the lever(s) during
    use, as for example in subclasses 421+.

    (4)     Note.  The term "plier" is not equivalent to crossed handles, and
    such recitation alone would not preclude classification in the subclasses
    below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 28+ and 106+
    for pivoted grasping tools.


CLS 81/416
TXT Tools under subclass 415 including claimed structure specific to the means
    securing the levers together or to the bearing structure for said means.

    (1)     Note.  For pivots joining crossed handle pliers, which pivots
    include means for adjusting the jaw and/or handle relationship, see
    appropriate adjustment subclasses preceding.

    (2)     Note.  For other joint or pivot details a search is required in
    subclass 385 and indented subclasses.  Basically all these subclasses 385+
    relate to variations of joint mechanism.  The search can be limited
    somewhat by consideration of the limitations set out by the subclass titles
    and definitions.


CLS 81/417
TXT Tools under subclass 415 including means to bias one lever for pivotal
    movement in a desired direction with respect to the other lever.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    321+,   for spring-urged tools with lock means.

    427,    for other spring-urged tools.


CLS 81/418
TXT Tools under subclass 300 including specifically claimed jaw structure or
    conformation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186,    for jaw faces for wrenches.


CLS 81/419
TXT Tools under subclass 418 in which each jaw includes at least two fingers or
    fork elements.


CLS 81/420
TXT Tools under subclass 418 in which the jaws extend in a direction parallel
    to and beyond the joint of the assembled handles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    311,    for plural jaw pairs, at least one pair extending parallel to and
    beyond the joint.


CLS 81/421
TXT Tools under subclass 418 including a separate work-engaging element
    fastened or secured to at least one jaw.

    (1)     Note.  The fastening or securing is not limited to a rigid joint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180.1+, for jaw attachments for wrenches.


CLS 81/422
TXT Tools under subclass 421 including releasable or yielding fastening means
    providing for interchange of work-engaging jaw portions.


CLS 81/423
TXT Tools under subclass 422 including releasable fastening means providing for
    removal and replacement of work-engaging jaw elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for vise jaw attachments.

    388,    389 and 390, for adjustable jaws which are inherently capable of
    removal and replacement.


CLS 81/424
TXT Tools under subclass 421 including pivoted and/or swivelled fastening means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    347+,   for tools with plural articulated jaws.


CLS 81/424.5
TXT Nonplanar jaw face:

    Tool under subclass 418 in which the conformation of a work engaging jaw
    surface is specifically recited as not flat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    419,    for tined jaws.

    423,    for jaws detachable for surface changing purposes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 268+ for nonplanar jaw features.


CLS 81/426
TXT Tools under subclass 424.5 in which each of the work-engaging jaw surfaces
    is recited as different from the other work-engaging surface(s).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    422     and 423, for replaceable jaw inserts inherently provided with a
    surface different from the other jaw surface.


CLS 81/426.5
TXT Work conforming face:

    Tool under subclass 424.5 wherein the work-engaging jaw surface is formed
    in opposite contour to that of a specific type of work whereby mutual
    contact between the work and the jaw surface is achieved over the entire
    jaw face.

    SEARCH  CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 266 and 270 for work conforming jaw faces.


CLS 81/427
TXT Tools under subclass 300 including means to bias one handle and/or jaw for
    movement in a desired direction with respect to the other handle and/or jaw.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    357,    for lever and pawl actuating means in which either the lever or the
    pawl is resiliently urged.

    379+,   for toggle wrench pliers resiliently urged.

    417,    for cross handle pliers resiliently urged.


CLS 81/427.5
TXT Handle:

    Tool under subclass 300 including specifically recited structure of a hand
    gripped element or portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177.1+, for wrench or screwdriver handle structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 110+ for handle structure in
    general.


CLS 81/429
TXT Responsive to movement of work:

    Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 53 wherein the operation of the wrench
    or screwdriver is stopped or it signals when either the distance traveled
    by or the number of rotations of the work exceed a selected amount.


CLS 81/430
TXT Utilizing fluid to convey work:

    Feed means under subclass 57.37 in which a fluid current is utilized to
    push the pieces of work towards the work-engaging and strain-exerting
    portion of the wrench or screwdriver.


CLS 81/431
TXT Including chute having longitudinal axis collinear with rotational axis of
    work turning portion:

    Feed means under subclass 57.37 including an inclined or vertical gravity
    flow path having the longitudinal axis of at least its discharging end
    collinear with the rotational axis of the work-engaging and strain-exerting
    portion of the wrench or screwdriver.


CLS 81/432
TXT Including vibratory work supporting member:

    Feed means under subclass 57.37 including a work-supporting member which is
    vibrated (i.e., rapidly moved insignificant, minute distances) during a
    segment of the feeding operation to convey pieces of work to the
    work-engaging and strain-exerting portion of the wrench or screwdriver.


CLS 81/433
TXT Including revolvably driven work contacting member:

    Feed or storing means under subclass 57.37 including a work-contacting
    member which is revolved 360o around a central area when work pieces are
    conveyed to the work-engaging and strain-exerting portion of the wrench or
    screwdriver.


CLS 81/434
TXT Including driven, flexible, work supporting strip:

    Feed means under subclass 57.37 including a flexible belt-like member
    having several pieces of work spaced along the length of and supported by
    it, which, during feeding, the member is driven toward and conveys the
    pieces of work to the engaging and strain-exerting portion of the wrench or
    screwdriver.


CLS 81/435
TXT Including driven, reciprocating, conveying member:

    Feed means under subclass 57.37 including a driven member reciprocated
    between two spaced positions; the member contacting and pushing or carrying
    pieces of work towards the engaging and strain-exerting portion of the
    wrench or screwdriver when moving in one of its directions.


CLS 81/436
TXT Having work engaging and force exerting portion inserted into cavity (e.g.,
    allen wrench, screwdriver):

    Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 53 in which the work-engaging and
    strain-exerting portion is intended to be inserted into a cavity (e.g.,
    hole, aperture, etc.) in the surface of the rotatable work.

    (1)     Note.  The portion of the wrench or screwdriver inserted into the
    cavity is intended to be separable from the cavity of the rotatable work
    after the turning or twisting strain is applied and is never intended to
    remain with or become a component of the rotatable work wherein the axis of
    the cavity is collinear with the rotational axis of the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176+,   for a spanner having two spaced projections adapted to engage in
    spaced recesses in the work to exert a twisting strain thereto.


CLS 81/437
TXT Combined with or usable as diverse type wrench:

    Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 436 wherein the portion of the tool
    intended to be inserted into a cavity is either (a) connected to, or (b)
    may alternately be used as a diverse-type wrench (i.e., the diverse wrench
    portion is constructed to exert a turning or twisting strain on a rotatable
    workpiece without inserting a portion of its structure into a cavity in the
    surface of the work).


CLS 81/438
TXT Having structure adapting portion or tool for separation:

    Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 436 in which either the portion of the
    tool not intended to engage the cavity or the cavity-engaging and
    strain-exerting portion of the tool is constructed to facilitate the
    separation of the cavity-contacting and strain-exerting portion from the
    remainder of the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177.1+, for a wrench or screwdriver not limited to a specific type of
    force-exerting portion and having details of its handle structure claimed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, for chuck or socket structure in general.


CLS 81/439
TXT Including discrete, separately usable, inserted portions:

    Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 436 including at least two discrete,
    cavity-engaging and strain-exerting portions which are intended to be used
    during separate strain-exerting operations.

    (1)     Note.  The strain-exerting portions are in some instances intended
    to be capable of cooperating together in a single strain-exerting operation.


CLS 81/440
TXT Pivotally or rotatably mounted:

    Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 439 in which the cavity-engaging and
    strain-exerting portions are pivotally or rotatably attached for selective
    movement to or from a use to a nonuse position.


CLS 81/441
TXT Inserted portion cuts into or deforms cavity:

    Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 436 wherein the cavity-engaging and
    strain-exerting portion is constructed to either (a) form the cavity in the
    surface of the work which is to be rotated (e.g., drills hole into screw
    with broken head and then removes screw), (b) enlarge the cavity in the
    surface of the work (e.g., has sharp points which bite into surface of
    cavity), or (c) deform the shape of the cavity (e.g., bends vanes in cavity
    and interlocks therewith).


CLS 81/442
TXT Inserted portion having relatively movable components:

    Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 436 wherein the cavity-engaging and
    strain-exerting portion includes two or more relatively movable components
    which firmly engage the cavity when moved.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclass 117.7 for means anchored against rotation in one
    well conduit section for relatively rotating another section.


CLS 81/443
TXT Having camming or wedging element for moving components:

    Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 442 including either a rotatable
    camming or shiftable wedging element having a surface which slides against
    and moves a cooperating surface on or attached to at least one of the
    components when a rotating or shifting force is applied to the element, the
    relative orientation or contour of one of the contacting surfaces causing
    the movement transmitted to the component by the element to be in a
    direction other than that of the element.


CLS 81/444
TXT Axially shiftable element located between and wedging against components:

    Camming or wedging element under subclass 443 in which the element is
    shifted in its entirety along a line parallel to the axis about which the
    wrench or screwdriver turns or twists when exerting strain on the work, the
    element being located between the components and sliding against the
    cooperating surface of at least one component when shifted parallel to the
    axis.


CLS 81/445
TXT With threaded surface for cooperating with mating tool structure:

    Camming or wedging element under subclass 444 wherein at least a portion of
    the element is provided with a threaded surface which cooperates with
    mating threaded structure formed on the contacted surface of at least one
    of the inserted components or on another portion of the tool.


CLS 81/446
TXT Rotatable element located between and camming against components:

    Camming or wedging element under subclass 443 in which the element is
    rotated about an axis when the components are to be moved relative to each
    other, the element being located between the components and sliding against
    the cooperating surface of at least one component when rotated.


CLS 81/447
TXT Having cooperating threaded element type actuating means:

    Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 442 having means for moving the
    components relative to each other including a threaded, cylindrical rod
    which is either (a) rotated to shift a mating threaded rider attached to
    one of the components along its axis, or (b) is attached to one of the
    components and is shifted by and along the rotational axis of and relative
    to a mating threaded element which is being rotated.


CLS 81/448
TXT Having resilient or spring biased component:

    Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 442 in which at least one of the
    components is either (a) constructed to be resilient, (b) made from a
    resilient material, or (c) is attached to a spring which pulls it toward
    its initial position before relative movement.


CLS 81/449
TXT Biased component rotated about axis collinear to rotational axis of tool:

    Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 448 wherein the spring-biased
    component is rotated by the spring about an axis which is collinear to the
    axis about which the tool turns or twists when exerting strain on the work.


CLS 81/450
TXT Inserted portion mounted to pivot or swivel relative to longitudinal axis
    of handle:

    Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 436 including a handle to which the
    cavity-engaging and strain-exerting portion is pivotally or otherwise
    mounted for swinging movement between angularly spaced positions.


CLS 81/451
TXT With separate means for guiding or gripping work:

    Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 436 provided with means separate from
    its work-engaging and strain-exerting portion (i.e., the inserted and
    noninserted portion of the tool used to turn or twist the work) for
    contacting and guiding or gripping the work having strain exerted on it by
    the portion, in order to position the work relative to the portion during
    the straining operation.


CLS 81/452
TXT Having resilient, relatively movable, work gripping members:

    Gripping means under subclass 451 having two or more relatively movable
    members which grip the work between their work-contacting surfaces, at
    least one of the members being either constructed to be resilient or made
    from a resilient material.


CLS 81/453
TXT With camming or wedging element for moving members:

    Gripping means under subclass 452 including either a rotatable camming or a
    shiftable wedging element having a surface which slides against and moves a
    cooperating surface on or attached to at least one of the members when a
    rotating or shifting force is applied to the element, the relative
    orientation or contour of one of the surfaces causing the movement
    transmitted to the member by the element to be in a direction other than
    that of the element.


CLS 81/454
TXT Having pivoted, relatively movable, work gripping members:

    Gripping means under subclass 451 having two or more relatively movable
    members which grip the work between their work-contacting surfaces, at
    least one of the members being pivotally attached to the tool.


CLS 81/455
TXT With camming or wedging element for moving members:

    Gripping means under subclass 454 including either a rotatable camming or a
    shiftable wedging element having a surface which slides against and moves a
    cooperating surface on or attached to at least one of the members when a
    rotating or shifting force is applied to the element, the relative
    orientation or contour of one of the surfaces causing the movement
    transmitted to the member by the element to be in a direction other than
    that of the element.


CLS 81/456
TXT Having member with work underlying portion:

    Guiding means under subclass 451 having at least one member provided with a
    work-contacting portion which is intended to be located beneath a section
    of the work (e.g., screw head) during the strain-exerting operation.


CLS 81/457
TXT Member spring biased for axial movement:

    Guiding means under subclass 456 in which the member is attached to a
    spring and and shifts along a line parallel to the axis about which the
    wrench turns or twists when strain is exerted on the work, the spring
    returning the member to its initial position after the strain-exerting
    operation is concluded.


CLS 81/458
TXT Resilient member:

    Guiding means under subclass 456 in which the member is either constructed
    to be resilient or is made from a resilient material.


CLS 81/459
TXT Inserted portion having threaded periphery:

    Work-engaging and strain-exerting portions under subclass 436 having a
    threaded periphery which is intended to cooperate with the contour of the
    cavity.


CLS 81/460
TXT Inserted portion having plural, noncollinear blades (e.g., Phillips):

    Work-engaging and strain-exerting portions under subclass 436 having a
    periphery which includes two or more noncollinear blades (i.e., long, thin
    projections) which are intended to cooperate with the contour of the cavity.


CLS 81/461
TXT Inserted portion having plural, separate, work engaging projections:

    Work-engaging and strain-exerting portion under subclass 436 having a
    periphery which includes two or more separate (i.e., having no common
    bridging structure normally contacting the contour of the cavity during the
    straining operation) projections which are intended to cooperate with the
    contour of the cavity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176.1+, for a spanner having two spaced projections adapted to engage in
    spaced recesses in the work to exert a twisting strain thereto.


CLS 81/462
TXT Having stationary structure for supporting wrench or screwdriver:

    Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 53 having relatively stationary
    structure (i.e., structure which does not move while the work is having
    strain placed on it) for supporting the work-engaging and strain-exerting
    portion of the tool.


CLS 81/463
TXT INCLUDING TOOL DRIVING BY IMPACT DELIVERING COMPONENT OR COOPERATING ANVIL:

    Tools under the class definition provided with either (a) a movably
    attached component intended to forcibly strike against structure linked to
    or formed on a work-engaging portion of the tool, or (b) structure which is
    linked to or formed on the work-engaging portion of the tool and specially
    designed or constructed to receive an impact from a movably attached
    component of the tool.

    (1)     Note.  The mere claiming of one or more surfaces for receiving an
    impact from an integral component of the tool (e.g., pivot arm) is
    classified in this subclass. If, however, the surface claimed is intended
    to receive an impact from a distinct impacting tool (e.g., hammer)
    classification is elsewhere based on other features of the tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 104.04 and
    104.07 for impact tools for cleaning pipes and tubes.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 243.53+ for a riveting device not
    elsewhere classified, and subclass 254 for impact- operated apparatus
    having means for engaging two work parts to be assembled or disassembled.

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 164.6, 168, and 277 for impact-operated cutlery.

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses for a process or an
    apparatus for deforming metal by the use of an impact means, e.g., forging
    with a drop hammer, as in subclasses 435+, or "impact extrusion" as in
    subclass 267.

    83,     Cutting, subclass 616 for impact-driven reciprocable cutting or
    punching tools.

    104,    Railways, subclasses 10+ for tampers. 114, Ships, subclass 3 for
    warship-carried rams. 125, Stone Working, subclass 40 for impact-operated,
    stone-working, and analogous tools.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 193.1+ for an impact-operated splitter.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 169+ for mold-making apparatus including
    compaction means, and subclasses 260+ for metal-casting apparatus including
    a vibrator.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 90+ for an impacting device
    of general utility, and particularly subclasses 93+ for an impact device
    having an anvil arranged to deliver a torsional impact. An impact-type
    drive having a Class 81 type tool claimed by name only is classified in
    Class 173.

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, subclasses 93+ for metal-breaking
    devices which may include an impact-delivery means.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclass 51 for apparatus for
    heading a member (e.g., rivet).

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 270+ for
    stamp mills and analogous devices.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 19 for impact-type nail extractors.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 69+,
    and see the search there noted for a hard material disintegrating machine
    driving a percussive-type cutter.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 15+ for
    reciprocating electric motors.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclass 133 for tamping
    means.

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 118+ for motor-driven, impact-operated dental
    tools, and subclasses 150+ for hand-operated, impact-receiving or
    delivering dental tool.

    601,    Surgery:  Kinesitherapy, subclasses 97+ and 107+ for impact-type
    applicators.


CLS 81/464
TXT Motor or gear driven:

    Tools under subclass 463 in which the component is moved to its striking
    position by power either (a) derived from a motor, or (b) transmitted by
    relatively rotating gears.


CLS 81/465
TXT Structurally constrained to arcuate movement:

    Tools under subclass 463 in which the component is constrained, by either
    the structure attaching it to the tool or the guide structure supported by
    the tool (e.g., pivot pin, guide tracks), to movement along an arcuate path.


CLS 81/466
TXT About turning axis of work engaging portion:

    Tools under subclass 465 wherein the work-engaging portion of the tool
    turns about an axis which is collinear to the central axis of the arc about
    which the component moves.


CLS 81/467
TXT Responsive to torque on work:

    Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 53 wherein either (a) the operation of
    the wrench or screwdriver is stopped, or (b) the tool signals when a
    selected amount of turning or twisting force (i.e., torque) on the work is
    exceeded.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 862.21+ for wrenches combined
    with means to measure the load.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, subclasses 30+ for an overload release coupling; and
    subclass 25 for a fluid coupling for transmitting a limited pulsating
    torque.


CLS 81/468
TXT With marking mechanism:

    Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 467 provided with a mechanism intended
    to mark the work in a manner which is detectable by an observer when the
    selected torque is applied to the work.


CLS 81/469
TXT Means for regulating motor:

    Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 467 including means which is
    responsive to the amount of torque on the work and regulates the power
    output of a motor driving the work-contacting portion of the wrench or
    screwdriver.

    (1)     Note.  The means may be either distinct from the motor or an active
    component of the motor.


CLS 81/470
TXT Fluid motor:

    Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 469 in which the motor is operated by
    a fluid substance which does not alter in chemical composition while in the
    motor.


CLS 81/471
TXT Permanently deformable component:

    Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 467 having at least one
    force-transmitting component constructed from material which is permanently
    deformed if the work has more than the selected amount of torque applied
    thereto.


CLS 81/472
TXT Relatively movable work contacting components:

    Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 467 in which the work-contacting
    portion includes two or more components which move relative to each other
    and release the work from driving contact when the selected torque is
    exceeded.


CLS 81/473
TXT Rotatable, coaxial, clutching components:

    Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 467 in which a portion of the
    tool-transmitting force from an input source to the work-contacting portion
    includes at least two coacting rotatable components, one of the components
    either (a) impels the other component to rotate about the same axis of
    rotation with it when force is transmitted to the work below the selected
    value of torque, or (b) allows the other component to rotate relative to it
    preventing the transmittal of force from the source to the work when the
    selected torque is exceeded.


CLS 81/474
TXT Having intermediate, disparate, interlock element:

    Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 473 including an element (e.g., ball),
    structurally distinct from and located between the coacting surfaces of the
    components, which orbits about the same axis of rotation as the components
    and locks them together when the torque on the work is below the selected
    value.


CLS 81/475
TXT Having complementary formations:

    Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 473 wherein one of the rotating
    components has either projections or apertures located on its coacting
    surface for engaging corresponding apertures or projections formed on the
    coacting surface of the other component.


CLS 81/476
TXT Having friction type contact surfaces:

    Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 473 wherein the surface friction
    created by the contact of the coacting surface is solely relied upon for
    the transmitting of rotary motion from one component to the other.


CLS 81/477
TXT Work engaging portion attached to and turned by resilient member:

    Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 467 in which the work-engaging portion
    is attached to a resilient structural member, which either (a) remains
    rigid and transmits force from the source to the portion when the torque on
    the work is below the selected value, or (b) bends and prevents or signal
    the transmittal of excessive force when the torque on the work exceeds the
    selected value.


CLS 81/478
TXT Work engaging portion pivotally or rotatably connected to handle:

    Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 467 in which the work-engaging portion
    is pivotally or rotatably connected to a hand-powered structural member
    which transmits force to it, the portion pivoting or rotating relative to
    the member when the selected torque is exceeded.


CLS 81/479
TXT With electric signal device:

    Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 478 provided with an electrical device
    which is activated by the pivotal or rotational movement of the portion
    relative to the member and signals the operator when the selected torque is
    exceeded.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, for mechanical signals, per se.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 500+ for alarms which are
    automatically responsive to a condition. Note particularly indented
    subclasses 665 and 679+.


CLS 81/480
TXT Axis of connection coaxial to rotational axis of work:

    Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 478 in which the pivotal or rotational
    axis of the connection is coaxial with the axis about which the work turns.


CLS 81/481
TXT With arm extending from portion:

    Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 480 provided with either a rigidly
    attached or an integrally formed elongated element projecting from the
    work-engaging portion of the wrench.


CLS 81/482
TXT With pivoted locking pawl:

    Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 480 provided with a pawl structurally
    distinct from both the portion and the member and pivotally connected to
    one of them and releasably locking with the surface of the other to prevent
    relative angular movement below the selected torque.


CLS 81/483
TXT With arm extending from portion and through connection:

    Wrench or screwdriver under subclass 478 provided with either a rigidly
    attached or an integrally formed elongated element projecting from the
    work-engaging portion and through the pivotal axis of the connection.


CLS 81/484
TXT FOR ADJUSTING VARIABLE POSITIONED PARTS:

    Tool under the class definition peculiarly adapted to very the relative
    orientation or position of a plurality of connected parts which are
    specifically made to function in any of a plurality of relative
    orientations or positions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for watchmakers' tools.

    9.24,   for tappet adjusters.

    15.9,   for a tool adapted to adjust a lock or latch.

    53+,    for a tool which performs an adjustment by exerting a twisting
    strain to the part (e.g. a screwthreaded part).

    300+,   for an adjusting tool in the form of pliers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses for a tool for adjusting
    the relative position of two parts by bending one part relative to the
    other, particularly subclasses 409.01+ for a plier type bender, and
    subclasses 476+ for a bender having a unitary tool face.


CLS 81/485
TXT SPREADER:

    Tool under the class definition including means for simultaneously engaging
    two adjacent parts or portions of a part and forcing the parts or portions
    apart.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.7,    for a leaf spring spreader.

    9.3,    for a hose clamp applier having means to spread the ends of the
    clamp.

    302,    for a plier type tool having jaws which move apart as the handles
    approach.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 239 for an apparatus or implement which
    disassembles two parts by spreading them from face to face engagement.


CLS 81/486
TXT RESILIENT ARTICLE TENSIONER OR COMPRESSOR:

    Tool under the class definition comprising means to engage an elastically
    deformable member or an element in contact therewith, whereby a force may
    be applied to deform the member and place it under either tensile or
    compressive forces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.7,    for a leaf spring spreader.

    15.2,   for a resilient tire casing spreader.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 215 for engine valve spring compressors,
    subclasses 225+ for other spring appliers or removers, and subclass 235 for
    a tool for applying or removing a resilient article other than spring.


CLS 81/487
TXT HAND HELD HOLDER OF HAVING CLAMP:

    Tool under the class definition comprising either (1) a device adapted to
    be supported by hand having a work supporting portion or (2) two relatively
    movable work engaging surfaces for gripping the work of for holding
    portions of the work in relative position.

    (1)     Note.  Part (1) of the above definition was intended to provided
    for manipulating tools, i.e., those hand held holders other than mere
    handling devices provided for in Class 294 Handling: Hand and Hoist-Line
    Implements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for an engraver's clamp.

    9.26+   for a plowshare holder.

    43,     for tweezers.

    300,    for plier type tools, i.e., having clamping jaws positioned by
    relatively movable handles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 270+ for a hand manipulatable tool for
    assembling or disassembling parts.  See also the superior subclasses for
    special application tools.

    269,    Work Holders, subclass 3 for a hand held holder for a work part
    undergoing work treatment.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, appropriate subclasses
    for a hand held holder for the transportation or mere handling of an
    article.

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 141+ for a hand-held work holder used in
    dentistry, particularly subclasses 153+ for hand-held clamps, and subclass
    163 for other hand-held work carriers.


CLS 81/488
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Tool under the class definition which is not provided for under any of the
    preceding subclasses.


CLS 81/489
TXT HANDLE FOR TOOL:

    The hand engaged portion of a tool under the class definition and which is
    not provided for elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  A patent having a sole disclosure to a handle for torque
    applying tool is classified in subclasses 177.1+.

    (2)     Note.  "Tool handles" represent an extremely large body of art, and
    historically a claimed tool handle has been classified with the particular
    tool, regardless of whether or not the work engaging portion of a tool was
    claimed.  This subclass was created to collect only those patents claiming
    a tool handle, per se, and whose disclosure is not restricted to a specific
    type of tool.  Thus, a handle whose sole disclosed use is for a "saw or the
    like" will continue to be classified with the hand saws in Class 30,
    Cutlery.  On the other hand, a handle disclosed for use with a "hammer,
    golf club", etc., or simply for "a tool", is classified here.  Since cross
    referencing to this subclass has been kept to a minimum, a thorough
    investigation of related areas listed below is advised.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22+,    for a hammer handle.

    53+,    for a driver for a wrench or screwdriver socket or bit, especially
    subclasses 177.1+ for a wrench or screwdriver handle.

    427.5,  for a plier handle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, subclasses 167+ for a handle for plural diverse
    tools.  A tool having a compartment in which plural unattached (unclaimed)
    tools may be stored is classified in Class 81, subclass 490.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 22.1+, 79.1+,
    143.1+, 222, 327.1+, 329, 335, 344, 350+, 361, and 410+ for handles
    associated with brushing, scrubbing or cleaning devices.

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 110+ for a handle for a closure
    of receptacle, or a handle not provided for elsewhere.

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 80 for a razor handle, subclasses 329+ and 340+
    for a handle for a detachable blade, or a connection between a handle and
    blade, subclass 491 for a bench plane handle and subclasses 517+ for a saw
    handle.

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclasses 90+ for a handle for a
    flat iron.

    42,     Firearms, subclasses 7 and 71+ for a handle or grip for a firearm.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 23 for a fishing
    rod handle or butt.

    101,    Printing, subclasses 405+ for a printing stamp handle.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 633 for a currycomb handle.

    132,    Toilet, subclass 76.5 for a separable holder for an abrader, file
    or buffer.

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclasses 65+ for a cane or
    umbrella handle.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 329+ for an earth working tool having a
    handle.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 154, 175,
    375+, and 525+ for a fluid discharging device having a handle for
    manipulation thereof.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 57+ for a
    hand fork or shovel handle.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    882+ for a mirror of reflector having a handle.

    407,    Cutters, for Shaping, subclass 29.15 for a file or rasp handle.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 722+ for shovel handle
    structure.

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, subclasses 300+ for a golf grip,
    subclass 538 for a racket-type implement used to project a projectile in
    which a dimensional characteristic or parameter of the handle or grip
    portion thereof is specified by a number, numeric variable, or mathematical
    formula; subclasses 549+ for handle or grip structure for a racket, in
    general; and subclass 568 for a bat-type implement used to project a
    projectile in which significance is attributed to the grip portion thereof.


CLS 81/490
TXT Having storage compartment:

    Handle under subclass 489 provided with a cavity within the handle to
    accommodate a tool when not in use.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are handles having a cavity into
    which an attached tool is retracted to a nonuse position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177.4,  for a wrench or screwdriver handle having means to store parts.


CLS 81/491
TXT Having discrete relatively movable tool clamp:

    Handle under subclass 489 provided with an individually distinct element
    mounted for movement to exert a force on tool to retain the tool in the
    handle.


CLS 81/492
TXT Hav ing cap or reinforcing means:

    Handle under subclass 489 provided with either (1) an individually distinct
    element covering an end of the handle remote from the tool, or (2) an
    individually distinct rigid element for providing strength or rigidity to
    the remainder of the handle.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 81/900
TXT WRENCH OR SCREWDRIVER CON-STRUCTED FROM SPECIFIC MATERIAL:

    Tools for exerting a turning or twisting strain on a rotatable piece of
    work which are constructed from a specific material having properties not
    normally associated with common tool material.


CLS 81/901
TXT WRENCH OR SCREWDRIVER ADAPTED TO TURN EYE SCREW:

    Tools for exerting a turning or a twisting strain on a rotatable piece of
    work having features which peculiarly adapt them to contacting and turning
    eye screws.


CLS 82/
TTL TURNING

CLS 82/
TXT
    I.      This class includes inventions for producing articles of
    predetermined section, usually circular, by means of cutters brought into
    engagement with the exterior of a rotating work-piece or by means of
    cutters revolving circumferentially around and in engagement with that
    portion of the work-piece to be shaped.  It contains mainly metal-working
    machines, but is not confined thereto, including all such mechanisms of the
    above-named structure and function as are not specifically classified
    elsewhere.

    II.     This class is also the generic class for the subject matter of the
    following subclass: 170, Centerers.

    III.    This class includes severing or cutting (off and/or out) of work of
    predetermined section (and/or size) by cutting movement(s) of tool and work
    including (1) relative rotation of either or both about an axis passing
    through the work and (2) relative translation of either or both
    substantially normal or parallel to said axis during cutting.  (See (3)
    Note under subclass 46).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 2.1+ for bias cutting or tubular stock,
    subclass 20.1 for spiral cutting of flat stock.

    30,     Cutlery, appropriate subclasses for severing implements and hand
    tools.

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 21.1+ for means to scribe,
    score or scratch lines on curved surfaces.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclasses 9+ for skiving or splitting of
    leather.

    79,     Button Making, subclasses 7+.

    125,    Stone Working.

    142,    Wood Turning.

    157,    Wheelwright Machines, subclass 13 for apparatus and processes for
    treating the outer periphery of a rubber tire casing by a slitting or
    machine operation which art (in the absence of this subclass) would
    ordinarily be classified in accord with the particular operation.  (The
    treating of a rubber casing by abrading is classified in Class 451,
    Abrading.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, appropriate subclass for subject matter
    directed to driving or impacting a tool, when such subject matter includes
    combined features peculiar to tool driving, but which does not include
    features limiting the subject matter to a specific tool art, such as
    specific shape of the work contacting portion of a tool, related tools, or
    an opposed work support.  Class 82 has not been cleared as to subject
    matter in conflict with this line.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, for cutting of that
    class type.  The cutting of rotating work, including boring and drilling,
    is to be found in this class (Class 82).  The cutting of a rod or tube by a
    tool turning about an axis coextensive with the central axis of the rod or
    tube wherein the tool also moves radially during operation will also be
    found in this class.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, appropriate subclasses for
    cutting to shape in general; subclasses 1+ for forming teeth on a circular
    gear; and subclass 64 for milling a rotating workpiece, generally.

    451,    Abrading, for grinding, generally, including subdividing a
    workpiece by abrading, especially search subclasses 435+ for an abrading
    device intended to be attached to a lathe.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, subclasses 8+ and 57+ for methods and machines for the cutting
    of screw threads by a tool that moves in a way other than rotatably and
    axially relative to a workpiece during operation or by a tool acting on
    rotating work.

    483,    Tool Changing, subclasses 17+ for a work turning machine tool
    combined with a means to transfer a tool to or from a tool support or
    storage means.



CLS 82/1.11
TXT PROCESS OF TURNING:

    Subject matter under the class definition drawn to a method.


CLS 82/1.12
TXT TALKING MACHINE TABLET:

    Subject matter under the class  definition for smoothing talking machine
    tablets preparatory to impressing records thereon.


CLS 82/1.2
TXT Apparatus or process under the class definition including a rotating
    assemblage which is adapted to sever portions from the inside of a hole in
    material by a cutting means which is moving radially relative to the axis
    of rotation of the assemblage while simultaneously turning about that axis.


CLS 82/1.3
TXT Apparatus or process under subclass 1.2 for forming or finishing a
    noncircular (e.g., elliptical, square) hole.


CLS 82/1.4
TXT Apparatus or process under subclass 1.2 wherein the cutting means, while
    cutting, moves in the direction of the axis of rotation of the assemblage
    at the same time as the rotary, radial movement.


CLS 82/1.5
TXT Apparatus or process under subclass 1.4 wherein the cutting assemblage
    includes a tool-carrier to which a cutting means is so connected that the
    cutting means is adapted to turn about an axis relative to the carrier
    while cutting.


CLS 82/11
TXT Machines for producing articles of circular cross-section and of varying
    axial section other than cylindrical or conical forms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    142,    Wood Turning, subclasses 3+ for wood turning machines producing a
    pattern section.


CLS 82/11.1
TXT Having transverse tool and templet guide:

    Subject matter under subclass 11 wherein a machine having a transversely
    movable tool capable of producing with means in the form of a templet guide
    capable of following a model to control the movement of the tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 14.8+, and 81 for a "pattern" -
    controlled metal deforming machine, e.g., for "spinning" work.

    404,    Gear Cutting, Milling and Planing, subclasses 79+ for
    pattern-controlled milling machines, and subclasses 288+ for
    pattern-controlled planing machines.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 1+ for a pattern controlled abrading machine.


CLS 82/11.2
TXT With workpiece gauge:

    Subject matter under subclass 11.1 wherein the templet guide is provided
    with means for measuring a dimension of an article.


CLS 82/11.3
TXT Having electrical actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 11.1 having means in the form of an actuator
    capable of initiating action or motion of the templet guide wherein the
    actuator is powered by electricity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11.4,   for actuators of the combined electrical and hydraulic type.


CLS 82/11.4
TXT And hydraulic actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 11.3 further having a second actuator wherein
    the second actuator is operated by fluid pressure.


CLS 82/11.5
TXT Having hydraulic actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 11.1 having means in the form of an actuator
    capable of initiating action or motion of the templet guide wherein the
    actuator is powered by fluid pressure.


CLS 82/12
TXT Machines in which the axial outline is traced by a tool rotating about an
    axis at right angles to the axis of work.  It mainly comprises lathes for
    turning spheres, though in some cases the tool traces a curve convex toward
    the work-axis.


CLS 82/13
TXT Machines for producing articles the axial section of which is predetermined
    by that of a formed cutter or series of juxtaposed cutters.


CLS 82/15
TXT Machines in which the axis of the rotating work is at a slight angle to the
    line of feed, the tool or work having a simple straight-line feed only.


CLS 82/16
TXT Machines in which a conical surface is generated by giving the cutting-tool
    a compound feed, one parallel to the axis of the work and the other at
    right angles thereto, the latter feed being governed by a gear-train.


CLS 82/17
TXT Machines like the last preceding in which the transverse feed of the cutter
    is governed by a fixed templet and connections between said templet and
    cutter or cutter-support.


CLS 82/18
TXT Machines for producing articles of predetermined noncircular section,
    usually by giving the cutter a motion radial with respect to the rotating
    work in addition to its usual feed motion.


CLS 82/19
TXT Machines in which the radially-reciprocating motion of the cutter is
    governed by a cam.


CLS 82/46
TXT Apparatus and processes under section III of the class definition.

    (1)     Note.  At the time this and indented subclasses were established
    (1959) the bulk of art, was drawn from Class 164 (now Class 83, Cutting)
    concurrently undergoing reclassification.  No attempt is now made, with
    respect to art falling within the turning concept, to distinguish between
    severing and lathe structure, except by schedule superiority.

    (2)     Note.  Devices for "scoring" or "grooving", either disclosed as
    capable of use for severing or which score rather than sever because of
    work charateristics (distinguished from structural apparatus limitations),
    are also here classified if such devices otherwise fall within the class
    definition.

    (3)     Note.  Included here are devices wherein the initial engagement of
    tool and work, either implied or specifically claimed, effects a piercing
    or incising of said work so that claimed means for relative rotation
    subsequently effect the severing operation.

    (4)     Note.  Devices, otherwise falling within the above class
    definition, which utilize toothed rotary cutters to impart a shape or form,
    rather than length or size, to work are not classified here but are
    considered to be milling devices for Class 409, subclasses 64+.

    (5)     Note.  The term "rotation", as used in conjunction with severing
    apparatus, is taken to require at least 360o of unidirectional motion;
    which motion must be continuous.  A series of intermittent arcuate
    movements of work during severing, which may add up to 360o or more is not
    considered to constitute "rotation".  See Class 83 for devices with such
    characteristics.

    (6)     Note.  The relative movement of work and tool, or their resepective
    holding means, may be (1) the result of direct operator manipulation, (2)
    merely initiated by an operator, (3) fully automatic, or (4) any
    combination of these.

    (7)     Note.  Classification of patents in this and indented subclasses
    requires that, in addition to disclosure appropriate for turning, there be
    claimed disclosure of (1) means for effecting relating rotation of tool and
    work as recited above and/or (2) tool infeed means.

    (8)     Note.  Devices disclosed as capable of use as either an implement
    (or hand tool) for Class 30 or as a device for this class (82) and claimed
    generically are to be classified here (82) and cross referenced to Class 30.


CLS 82/47
TXT Processes under subclass 46.


CLS 82/48
TXT Devices under subclass 46 including means for sensing a desired or
    undesired condition with respect to either the work or tool and means which
    and as a result of this sensing (and without external intervention), bring
    about an alteration in the operation or control of the device.

    (1)     Note.  The alteration includes stopping or starting of all or part
    of the mechanism so as to correct, avoid damage from, or mitigate the
    effects of the sensed condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 67+ for cutting devices including means to
    monitor and control operation.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 116.5+ for power stop
    mechanisms and see the notes thereto for other loci of machine control
    means responsive to means for sensing work or tool conditions.


CLS 82/49
TXT Devices under subclass 46 including means to reshape the cutting edge or
    point of the severing instrumentality.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 419+ for a machine knife sharpening attachment
    and see other appropriate subclasses for sharpening means, per se, of the
    abrading type.


CLS 82/50
TXT Devices under subclass 46 including means to provide a liquid to tool
    and/or work during cutting.

    (1)     Note.  Liquid is for cooling, heating, lubrication, protective
    environment, etc.


CLS 82/51
TXT Devices under subclass 46 including means to raise or maintain the
    temperature of tool and/or work.


CLS 82/52
TXT Devices under subclass 46 including means to hold, remove and/or convey the
    fragments produced during the cutting operations.

    (1)     Note.  The term fragments is not intended to include portions which
    are handled in an article-like fashion, which handling is considered to be
    work or product handling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152+,   for lathe chip removal means.


CLS 82/53
TXT Devices under subclass 46 provided with means to further reduce the size of
    that portion of the cut product indentified as waste and to be discarded.


CLS 82/53.1
TXT Devices under subclass 46 wherein the cutting instrumentality has a
    component of motion, during cutting, in the direction of work movement
    along or parallel to the axis of relative rotation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 280+ for severing devices when cutting motion
    of tool has a component in the direction of moving work and see search
    notes thereunder for other loci of flying tool types.


CLS 82/54
TXT Devices under subclass 46 wherein the tool means includes at least two
    coacting elements straddling the work and effecting a shearing of work
    between said elements.

    (1)     Note.  An anvil against which a cutter bears is a coacting element
    for this subclass.


CLS 82/55
TXT Devices under subclass 54 wherein the cutting couple and the work are
    constrained to move with respect to each other during severing by means of
    a template, eccentric, interlocked linkage, etc., so as to produce an oval
    or irregular shaped product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 2.1+ for bias cutting of tubular stock,
    and subclass 20.1 for spiral cutting of flat stock.


CLS 82/56
TXT Devices under subclass 54 including at least one severing means other than
    a pair of coacting cutting elements straddling the work.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are mere duplications, at spaced locations, of
    cutting couples straddling work as well as additional single cutting means.

    (2)     Note.  When the additional cutting means is identified as serving
    to cut up scrap the patents are classified above in subclass 53.


CLS 82/57
TXT Devices under subclass 54 wherein the coacting tool elements are both
    rotated or rotatable cutting members, usually of disk-like configuration.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are devices wherein the axes of the tool
    element are substantially normal to the axis of work rotation; e.g., as in
    the cutting out of flat disks or the peripheral trimming of round work
    pieces.


CLS 82/58
TXT Devices under subclass 57 wherein the rotational axes of both tools and
    work are parallel to each other.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are devices to cut off cylindrical portions of
    hollow tubular work.


CLS 82/59
TXT Devices under subclass 46 including means to move a tool(s) around work
    during severing which means actuate, or are actuated by, means to move said
    tool(s) further into work toward the axis of rotation.


CLS 82/60
TXT Devices under subclass 59 wherein the reaction of the work against tool
    infeed is required to effect circumrotation.


CLS 82/61
TXT Devices under subclass 59 wherein the means to move a tool further into
    work includes a rotatable plate having a groove, slot or surface formed
    thereon of predetermined contour which contour imparts a prescribed motion
    to the tool or tool holder slidably following such groove or slot and said
    plate is caused to rotate by a gear train linking said plate and the tool
    head.


CLS 82/62
TXT Devices under subclass 61 wherein the motion between cam and follower
    effecting infeed of the tool are substantially parallel to the axis about
    which the tool head is rotating.


CLS 82/63
TXT Devices under subclass 61 providing means to counteract the tendency of the
    circumrotating tool to move radially outwardly which means utilize forces
    effecting the initial tendency.


CLS 82/64
TXT Devices under subclass 61 wherein the cam consists of one or more spiral
    grooves in the radial face of the rotatable plate.


CLS 82/65
TXT Devices under subclass 59 including operator actuated means to hold the
    infeed cam member against rotation while the tool head continues to revolve
    which relative movement effects the tool infeed.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 61 for "cam" concept.


CLS 82/66
TXT Devices under subclass 59 wherein a pinion or toothed member, whose
    rotation about its axis causes the tool to move radially, moving around the
    work is incrementally rotated by periodically engaging a pawl-like element
    positioned adjacent the path of said member.


CLS 82/67
TXT Devices under subclass 59 wherein the means to move a tool further into
    work and the means to move the tool around the work are actuated by the
    same gear train.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 61 for similar devices including a cam actuated
    infeed means.


CLS 82/68
TXT Devices under subclass 67 including means to change the relative speed or
    movement of one portion of the gear train with respect to another.


CLS 82/69
TXT Devices under subclass 67 including means to disable the gear train.


CLS 82/70
TXT Devices under subclass 59 including means to move work into or from
    position for treatment.


CLS 82/70.1
TXT Devices under subclass 46 including means to move a tool(s) into work, or
    further into work, toward the axis of rotation.


CLS 82/70.2
TXT Devices under subclass 70.1 including means to cause a tool to move around
    the work.

    (1)     Note.  The means to move a tool around or about the work must be
    more than a mere hand crank or lever, which means is to be found in
    subclass 70.1.


CLS 82/71
TXT Devices under subclass 70.2 including gaseous or liquid means to cause tool
    movement.


CLS 82/72
TXT Devices under subclass 70.2 including a gear train to effect the tool
    infeed.

    (1)     Note.  Included in the term "gear train" are chain and sprocket
    means as well as belt and pulley means.


CLS 82/73
TXT Devices under subclass 72 including cam means effective along a line
    generally parallel to the axis of tool circumrotation.


CLS 82/74
TXT Devices under subclass 73 including means which serve to show or evidence
    the relative position of the parts.


CLS 82/75
TXT Devices under subclass 70.2 wherein the means to cause infeed movement of
    the tool includes a lever arrangement of the first class with the fulcrum
    pivot being intermediate two angularly disposed force transmitting arms.


CLS 82/76
TXT Devices under subclass 70.2 wherein the tool is biased inwardly toward the
    axis of rotation by yielding or springlike means.


CLS 82/77
TXT Devices under subclass 76 including lever, handle or crank means to move
    the tool outwardly away from the axis of rotation.


CLS 82/78
TXT Devices under subclass 70.1 which effect infeed tool actuation by operator
    manipulation of a gear train.


CLS 82/79
TXT Devices under subclass 70.1 wherein a cam-like rotary element is caused to
    rotate about an axis, the contacting surface of said element being
    non-uniformly spaced from said axis, which element acutates the infeed of
    the tool.


CLS 82/80
TXT Devices under subclass 79 which include hydraulic or pneumatic drive means.


CLS 82/81
TXT Devices under subclass 79 for effecting the infeed of two or more severing
    instrumentalities.


CLS 82/82
TXT Devices under subclass 70.1 wherein the tool is operating internally of the
    work.


CLS 82/83
TXT Devices under subclass 70.1 including means to cause the tool(s) to revolve
    about an axis passing through said tool.

    (1)     Note.  The incremental shift of a tool about its axis to present a
    new portion of the cutting edge to the work (either between cutting strokes
    or during cutting strokes) is not considered tool rotation for this
    subclass.  See subclass 100 for tool adjustment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70.1,   for devices wherein the tool is caused to rotate by contact with
    the work.


CLS 82/84
TXT Devices under subclass 83 including a coacting cutter, either freely
    rotatable or driven, straddling the work and serving to both sever and
    support the work.


CLS 82/85
TXT Devices under subclass 83 wherein the work is internally supported by
    rotatable elements the axis of which also move in an orbit.


CLS 82/86
TXT Devices under subclass 83 wherein the tool is mounted on a swingable holder
    for arcuate movement during infeed.


CLS 82/87
TXT Devices under subclass 86 including means for selectively fixing the
    position of the work.


CLS 82/88
TXT Devices under subclass 83 including a tool rotatable with respect to an
    axis passing through said tool, the working edge of said tool having
    portions at varying distances from said axis.


CLS 82/89
TXT Devices under subclass 83 including means to move work in a direction
    parallel to the axis of relative work-tool rotation.


CLS 82/90
TXT Devices under subclass 83 including means to hold and move work
    transversely to the axis of relative work-tool rotation.


CLS 82/91
TXT Devices under subclass 83 wherein the elements upon which work rests during
    cutting includes a recess or channel providing clearance for the tool edge
    as it passes through the work.


CLS 82/92
TXT Devices under subclass 70.1 wherein a tool(s) mounted so as to be able to
    rotate about an axis passing through said tool is caused to rotate solely
    by engagement with work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83+,    for devices including drive means to rotate the tool(s).


CLS 82/93
TXT Devices under subclass 92 including tool holding means capable of shift in
    a line parallel to the axis of relative work-tool rotation.


CLS 82/94
TXT Devices under subclass 93 wherein the tool holding means are shifted solely
    by contact with the work.


CLS 82/95
TXT Devices under subclass 94 including at least one additional tool incapable
    of rotation.


CLS 82/96
TXT Devices under subclass 93 including means responsive to operation of the
    infeed means for initiating revolution of work.


CLS 82/97
TXT Devices under subclass 92 wherein the work, usually caused to revolve by
    resting on driven rolls, is biased by yieldable means toward said rolls.


CLS 82/98
TXT Devices under subclass 70.1 including several cutters each of which is
    provided individual means to effect its infeed action.


CLS 82/99.1
TXT Spring urged:

    Subject matter under subclass 70.1 wherein the tool is provided with
    yieldable biasing means capable of moving the tool center of relative
    work-tool rotation.


CLS 82/99.2
TXT Subject matter under subclass 99.1 wherein the tool is specifically
    structured for severing or cutting work in the form of a device mountable
    to and capable of covering or exposing a window.


CLS 82/100
TXT Devices under subclass 70.1 including means to vary the limits and/or path
    of tool actuation.


CLS 82/101
TXT Devices under subclass 70.1 including means to hold, maintain and/or
    revolve work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses. Class 269 is the residual
    locus for patents to a device for clamping, supporting and/or holding an
    article (or articles) in positin to be operated on or treated.  See notes
    thereunder for other related loci.


CLS 82/102
TXT Devices under subclass 70.1 including means to move work parallel to the
    axis of rotation.


CLS 82/103
TXT Lathe for pulley:

    Lathe under the class definition specially adapted for rotating and facing
    a structure in the form of a wheel designed to drive or be driven by a belt
    or rope.

    (1)     Note.  A lathe of this subclass generally include special driving
    means and means for crowning the pulley-face.


CLS 82/104
TXT Lathe for wheel or axle:

    Lathe under the class definition specially adapted for operating on an
    article in the form of either: (a) a solid disk or circular ring connected
    to a hub and designed to turn around an axle, i.e., a wheel; or (b) a
    supporting shaft or member upon which  a wheel revolves, i.e., an axle.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass typically provides for lathes used in making
    railway or railroad wheels or axles.


CLS 82/105
TXT In situ lathe for railroad wheel:

    Subject matter under subclass 104 wherein the article comprises a wheel
    movable over a railway and further wherein the lathe is located in close
    proximity to the vehicle upon which the wheel is mounted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128,    for portable lathes for turning articles of a general nature.


CLS 82/106
TXT LATHE FOR CRANK OR CRANK PIN:

    Lathe under the class definition specially adapted for producing an engine
    component structured to transmit rotary motion.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass generally provides for lathes used in turning
    various parts of an automative crankshaft or crank disk, e.g.,
    concentrically turning the main journal or eccentrically turning the crank
    pin portions.  This subclass similarly provides for lathes having off-set
    revolving tools allowing for the turning of stationary crank pins which are
    eccentric to the lathe center line.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass also includes only fully-organized
    power-driven machines whereas portable crankshaft pin turners are provided
    for in 107 below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 298 for twisting of crankshaft.


CLS 82/107
TXT Portable lathe for crank pin:

    Lathe under subclass 106 wherein a lathe specially adapted for rotating and
    cutting that bearing portion of a crankshaft designed to mount an engine
    connecting rod, i.e., a crank pin that is readily transportable or movable.


CLS 82/108
TXT Having work oscillator:

    Lathe under subclass 106 wherein the lathe is provided with means capable
    of moving the component back and forth.


CLS 82/109
TXT Having work driver:

    Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein the lathe is provided with means
    for transmitting the rotary motion of a spindle of the lathe to the
    component held between centers of the lathe.


CLS 82/110
TXT LATHE FOR SCREW CUTTING:

    Lathe under the class definition specially adapted for removing material
    from an externally threaded fastener.

    (1)     Note.  The lathes of this subclass are generally of the
    "engine-lathe" type having allowing the cutting of screws of various
    pitches.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 27+ and 57 for combined machines, adapted
    for thread chasing.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, for cutting of
    screw threads by a cutter that turns about an axis and moves along that
    axis toward a workpiece, with no additional motion, during operation.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclass for apparatus or
    processes for milling screw threads and helices.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, subclasses 80+ for lathe machines for screw threading except as
    provided for in Class 408.


CLS 82/111
TXT Having swinging feed nut and tool bar:

    Lathe under the subclass 110 provided with: (a) a lead-screw integral with
    the lathe headstock spindle or relatively mounted on a stud projecting from
    the lathe bed wherein the lead screw is geared to said spindle in such
    position as to be readily engaged by a sectional nut at an end of a first
    lever whose opposite end is attached to a rockable chaser-bar mechanism,
    usually located at the back of the lathe bed, and (b) a second lever
    carried at another point of the first lever upon which is mounted a
    threading-tool.


CLS 82/112
TXT PORTABLE LATHE FOR BRAKE, DRUM, DISC, OR  SHOE:

    Lathe under class definition which is readily transportable or movable and
    which is specially adapted for rotating and cutting a component of an
    automative braking system comprising either the metallic cylindrical
    component which is engaged by and whose motion is arrested by a braking
    mechanism, i.e., a brake drum or disc, or the metallic curved component
    carrying a brake disc pad which engages and arrests the motion of a brake
    drum, i.e., a brake shoe.


CLS 82/113
TXT PORTABLE LATHE FOR PIPE TURNING:

    Lathe under the class definition which readily transportable or movable and
    which is specially designed for rotating and cutting hollow cylindrical
    work is generally used for conveying fluids.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46+,    for similar apertures having severing or cutting steps.


CLS 82/114
TXT PORTABLE LATHE FOR PISTON GROOVING:

    Lathe under the class definition which is readily transportable or movable
    and which is specially designed for rotating and cutting a channel in the
    reciprocable solid cylinder tightly fit into and movable in surrounding
    housing of a reciprocating engine, pump or compressor.


CLS 82/115
TXT BENCH LATHE:

    Lathe under the class definition which is readily light in weight, lacks
    legs, and is adapted to be mounted on a bench.


CLS 82/116
TXT WATCHMAKER'S LATHE:

    Lathe under the class definition specially adapted for rotating and cutting
    a component of a timepiece.


CLS 82/117
TXT LATHE:

    Subject matter under the class definition drawn to either: (a) a structure
    for producing an article of regular cross section, usually circular,
    wherein the structure has a work support, a guided cutter, and a component
    for effecting relative rotation between the cutter and work, i.e., a lathe;
    or (b) to a detail of a component or subcombination of a lathe, e.g.,
    specific structure of a headstock, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 27+ for combined machines in which one of
    the operations is rotating the work while transversing a cutting tool
    therealong.

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses for machines adapted only to sever
    or cut off the work at predetermined lengths.  Cutting off or severing of a
    workpiece when included with other turning devices or operations found here
    or in the appropriate indented subclass.


CLS 82/118
TXT With program control:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 provided with additional means capable of
    regulating an operation  of a lathe according to a mechanism defining a
    prescribed pattern or sequence of instructions.


CLS 82/119
TXT And transmission:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 further provided with means to change the
    speed or direction of relative rotation of a component of the lathe.


CLS 82/120
TXT And tool turret:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 provided with a device comprising a
    rotatable  cylinder capable of housing and supporting plural guided cutters.


CLS 82/121
TXT With tool turret:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 provided with additional means comprising
    a rotatable cylinder capable of housing and supporting plural guided
    cutters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    483,    Tool Changing, subclasses 17+ for a work turning machine combined
    with a means to transfer a tool to or from a tool support or storage means.


CLS 82/122
TXT Vertical:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 wherein the relative rotation of the
    lathe is about an axis perpendicular to the horizon.


CLS 82/123
TXT Having facing tool fed transverse to work:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 provided with means to remove material
    from an end face of rotating work wherein the means is moved perpendicular
    to the work axis of rotation.


CLS 82/124
TXT With work feeder or remover:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 having a work feeder or remover in the
    form of means capable of delivering or removing work to or from a position
    of engagement with that portion of the lathe which supports work during a
    turning operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses for conveying
    mechanisms, per se.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for article dispensers
    (feeders) not otherwise provided for, and see the class definition of Class
    221 for a statement of the class lines and for the disposition of related
    disclosures of article and strip feeding processes and apparatus.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect the movement of the material.


CLS 82/125
TXT Magazine type:

    Subject matter under subclass 124 having storage means in which a plurality
    of pieces of work can be accumulated in an orderly arrangement and
    positioned such that the pieces may be engaged by the work feeder or
    remover.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    140,    Wireworking, subclasses 27 and 38, for wire fence-making machines
    provided with hoppers that supply slats for the manufacture of fences; and
    subclass 53 for machines having magazines for the supply of clips,
    lock-plates, and the like.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, subclasses 164+.


CLS 82/126
TXT Bar feeder:

    Subject matter under subclass 125 wherein the work comprises an elongated
    article having a generally rectangular cross-section and whose longitudinal
    dimension is much greater than its lateral dimensions, i.e., a bar, and
    further wherein the bar is capable of being sectioned into plural work
    products.


CLS 82/127
TXT Bar feeder:

    Subject matter under subclass 124 wherein the work comprises an elongated
    article having a generally rectangular cross-section whose longitudinal
    dimension is much greater than its lateral dimension, i.e, a bar, and
    further wherein the bar is capable of being sectioned into plural work
    products.


CLS 82/128
TXT Portable:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 wherein a lathe is readily transported
    and attached to an article to be turned.

    (1)     Note.  The lathes of this subclass are usually hand-driven and are
    designed to be mounted on the article to be turned, e.g., a commutator, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 104.011+ for
    devices for cleaning deposits from cylinders, pistons, and spark plugs.

    451,    Abrading, subclass 348 for a portable device for grinding a wheel,
    in situ; and subclasses 415+ for an abrading attachment for grinding the
    throws of a crankshaft, in situ.


CLS 82/129
TXT Multiple:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 wherein a lathe is provided with means
    capable of operating simultaneously on more than one piece of work.

    (1)     Note.  The operations performed by the lathes of this subclass are
    usually the same on each piece.


CLS 82/130
TXT Having hollow cutter head:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 provided with a cutter head in the form
    of means for supporting a rotatable or stationary guided cutter wherein the
    supporting means is specially adapted to allow work to pass longitudinally
    therethrough and further wherein the supporting means is capable of
    radially mounting a guided cutter such that its cutting edge faces toward
    the rotary axis of the work.

    (1)     Note.  The lathes of this subclass are typically used to scalp
    bars, or similar articles, being continuously fed from a manufacturing or
    forming machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128     and 157.


CLS 82/131
TXT Having revolvable cutter heads:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 provided with rotatable plural guided
    cutters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.2+,   for rotating and radially movable cutters adapted to sever material
    from the inside of a hole in work material.


CLS 82/132
TXT Carriage feed:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 of paragraph (b) wherein significance to
    a carriage feeder in the form of means capable of causing or limiting the
    guided cutter to move longitudinally or transversely relative to work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 62+ for
    drilling machines with work infeeding means; subclasses 99+ and 129+ for
    drilling machines with tool infeeding means.


CLS 82/133
TXT Control:

    Subject matter under subclass 132 wherein significance is attributed to a
    device adapted to regulate the operation of the feeder.


CLS 82/134
TXT Electrical type:

    Subject matter under subclass 133 wherein the devices use electricity to
    regulate the operation.


CLS 82/135
TXT Apron mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 132 wherein significance is attributed to an
    apron mechanism in the form of a protective shield means attached or
    covering the feeder.


CLS 82/136
TXT Feed-nut control:

    Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein significance is attributed to a
    device capable of closing a feednut upon a feedscrew or releasing it
    therefrom and for preventing the closing of the nut except in certain
    positions to insure "catching the thread" correctly with the tool in
    screw-threading.


CLS 82/137
TXT Slide rest:

    Subject matter under subclass 132 wherein significance is attributed to a
    slide rest on the form of a device adapted to support a guided cutter.

    (1)     Note.  The slide rest is usually mounted upon and longitudinally
    movable with the lathe carriage thereby allowing the tool an additional
    feed direction, ordinarily one transverse to the axis of the work.


CLS 82/138
TXT Multiple tool support:

    Subject matter under subclass 137 wherein the slide rest is capable of
    carrying a plurality of cutting-tools, usually located on opposite sides of
    the axis of the work.


CLS 82/139
TXT Tool relief:

    Subject matter under subclass 137 wherein significance is attributed to
    means capable of physically disengaging the guided cutter with work.


CLS 82/140
TXT Change gears:

    Subject matter under subclass 132 wherein significance is attributed to a
    set of gears and means for mounting and shifting them in order to change
    the speed of rotation of a feedscrew or other carriage-driving means, and
    consequently the rate of carriage-feed.


CLS 82/141
TXT Feedscrews and rods:

    Subject matter under subclass 132 wherein significance is attributed to a
    plurality of rotating screws or splined rods, for transmitting motion from
    a head-stock or change-gears to a carriage to effect the feeding of a
    guided cutter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclass 64 for
    drilling machines in which work infeed mechanism is screw and nut actuated;
    subclasses 100+ and 129+ for drilling machines in which tool infeed
    mechanism is screw and nut actuated.


CLS 82/142
TXT Headstock:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein significance is attributed to a
    headstock in the form of means for supporting one end of work for rotation
    thereof.


CLS 82/143
TXT Speed changing gears:

    Subject matter under subclass 142 wherein significance is attributed to a
    device for giving rotation to a chuck or faceplate for a given rotation of
    a cone-pulley.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes only such devices as are specifically
    designed for lathes, such as back-gears, and not for general application.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 64.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses indented under
    Gearing.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 124+ for
    machines for cutting in the manner of that class, including multiple speed
    drive means.


CLS 82/144
TXT Speed change gears for maintaining constant cutting speed:

    Subject matter under subclass 143 wherein the device is capable of
    controlling a work feed rate and a guided cutter feed rate to thereby
    provide for a constant rate of work material removal.


CLS 82/145
TXT Spindle reverser:

    Subject matter under subclass 142 wherein significance is attributed to a
    rotatable mechanism capable of imparting motion to a headstock, i.e., a
    spindle, and further wherein a device is provided to move the spindle in an
    opposite direction.


CLS 82/146
TXT Spindle or work angler:

    Subject matter under subclass 142 wherein significance is attributed to a
    rotatable device capable of imparting motion to a headstock, i.e., a
    spindle, and further wherein a mechanism is provided to change the relative
    angle between either the spindle or the rotary axis of work and the lathe
    rotary axis to thereby ensure proper angular orientation between the work
    and spindle.


CLS 82/147
TXT Spindle and bearings:

    Subject matter under subclass 142 wherein significance is attributed to a
    rotatable mechanism capable of imparting motion to a headstock, i.e., a
    spindle, and a plurality of elements adapted to minimize friction between
    contacting surfaces of a headstock, i.e., bearings.


CLS 82/148
TXT Tailstock:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 paragraph (b) wherein significance is
    attributed to means for securing and rotatably supporting an end of work
    remote from the headstock or driving end of a lathe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150+,   for centers to be secured in the tail stock to rotatably support
    the work.


CLS 82/149
TXT Bed:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 paragraph (b) wherein significance is
    attributed to a frame and ways of a lathe.


CLS 82/150
TXT Center:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 paragraph (b) wherein significance is
    attributed to two or more centers in the form of devices securable in a
    headstock or tailstock to rotatably support the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    142,    Wood Turning, subclass 53 for centers in wood lathes.


CLS 82/151
TXT Alignment adjusters:

    Subject matter under subclass 150 wherein significance is attributed to a
    mechanism capable of altering the angle between a center axis and a lathe
    rotary axis.


CLS 82/152
TXT Attachment:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 paragraph (b) wherein significance is
    attributed to a device or element securable to a lathe for enhancing its
    operations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 65 for similar devices and see the notes
    thereto for carriage stop devices.


CLS 82/153
TXT Stop (e.g., carriage, tool, work, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 152 wherein the device or element is capable
    of limiting the movement of a part of a lathe.


CLS 82/154
TXT Tool slide:

    Subject matter under subclass 153 wherein the part is a guided cutter.


CLS 82/155
TXT Collet or spindle:

    Subject matter under subclass 153 wherein the part comprises either: (1) a
    split coned sleeve designed to hold work or a guided cutter, i.e., a collet
    or (2) the rotatable portion of the headstock capable of imparting motion
    thereto, i.e., a spindle.


CLS 82/156
TXT Indexible (e.g., roll type, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 153 where the part is also capable of
    limiting the part motion at various locations of the part.


CLS 82/157
TXT Tool and work rest:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 wherein significance is attributed to
    means capable of simultaneously supporting both a guided cutter or for
    clamping the cutter and effecting its rectilinear vertical adjustment or
    angular adjustment in a vertical plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130,    for a hollow cutter head capable of simultaneously supporting a
    cutter as work passes through the lathe.


CLS 82/158
TXT Tool rest:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 wherein significance is attributed to
    means for supporting a hand held guided cutter or for clamping the cutter
    and effecting its rectilinear vertical adjustment or angular adjustment in
    a vertical plane.


CLS 82/159
TXT Turret type holder (e.g., multiple tools, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 158 wherein the means comprises a rotatable
    cylinder capable of housing plural guided cutters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    483,    Tool Changing, subclasses 66+ for an indexable tool storage means
    combined with a tool transfer means.


CLS 82/160
TXT Quick release tool or holder clamp:

    Subject matter under subclass 158 wherein the means comprising either: (1)
    a device provided with means to allow the guided tool to be unsecured with
    relative ease or, (2) a device capable of fastening, gripping or supporting
    a guided cutter to a lathe.


CLS 82/161
TXT Tool post:

    Subject matter under subclass 158 wherein the means is the form of a
    clamping mechanism directly contacting and securing the guided cutter of a
    lathe.

    (1)     Note.  The devices of this subclass include adjustment is effecting
    by unclamping the cutter itself.


CLS 82/162
TXT Work rest:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 wherein significance is attributed to
    means capable of supporting work in a lathe.

    (1)     Note.  The support devices of this and indented subclasses may
    either support the free end of work or the side opposite a guided cutter to
    thereby receive the thrust of the guided cutter or it may support the work
    for other purposes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses.  Class 269 is the residual
    locus for patents to a device for clamping, supporting and/or holding an
    article (or articles) in position to be operated on or treated.  See notes
    thereunder for other related loci.


CLS 82/163
TXT With noise or vibration dampener:

    Subject matter under subclass 162 including structure capable of reducing
    unexpected or undesired sound or back and forth movement.


CLS 82/164
TXT Center rest:

    Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein the means is secured to a bed or
    way of a lathe end provided with a bushing or with centering-jaws in axial
    alinement with the work supported between the centers, to prevent springing
    of the thrush of a guided cutter.


CLS 82/165
TXT WORK DRIVER:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein significance is
    attributed to means for transmitting the rotary motion of a spindle of a
    lathe to work held between centers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    142,    Wood Turning, subclass 16 for mechanisms for guiding work holding
    chucks in elliptical or oval paths.

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, generally for work driver, per se.


CLS 82/166
TXT Lathe dog:

    Subject matter under subclass 165 wherein the means is provided with a spur
    or other connection capable of loosely engaging a slot or other rotating
    portion of a face-plate or spindle of lathe.


CLS 82/167
TXT Cam grip:

    Subject matter under subclass 166 wherein the spur or other driving
    connection is further provided with a cam-surface engageable with the work
    such to increase its gripping force on the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    279,    Chuck or Sockets, subclasses 36, 37, 47-54 indented under
    subclasses 46.1+, 56, 57, 58, and 60-75 indented under Socket-type radially
    reciprocating jaws, Moving-cam actuator for cam grip devices, per se.


CLS 82/168
TXT Mandrel:

    Subject matter under subclass 165 wherein the means is provided with a
    device locatable between the lathe centers and capable of engaging the
    exterior surfaces of and thereby driving hollow work.


CLS 82/169
TXT Expansible:

    Subject matter under subclass 168 wherein the device is provided with a
    work engageable piece capable of radial adjustment to thereby center the
    work and secure driving contact therewith.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 571+ for an expandable
    mandrel for engaging an inner surface of a coil or core used in winding or
    unwinding.

    269,    Work Holders, subclass 2 for expansible mandrel used as a work
    holder.

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, subclasses 2.01+ for expanding chucks adapted to
    hold hollow articles by being inserted into the cavity thereof.

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclass 105 for expansible
    devices on land vehicles.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 463+ for an expansible abrading tool.


CLS 82/170
TXT Centerer:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein significance is
    attributed to means either for, (a) determining the centers of axis of work
    preparatory to or during the mounting thereof; or (b) bringing the axis of
    work into coincidence with the line joining the lathe-centers after work
    had been placed in a lathe.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 547+ for gauges to mark a
    center point.

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, appropriate subclass for centerers, per se.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 72+ for
    machines including structure for guiding a tool to operate in the center of
    circular workpiece.

    451,    Abrading, subclass 460 for a center in an abrading machine.


CLS 82/171
TXT DRILL PRESS ATTACHMENT FOR TURNING:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising means attachable to
    machines of this class wherein the means is capable of holding or
    supporting work for performing a drilling operation thereon.


CLS 82/172
TXT ATTACHMENT FOR CUTTING A VALVE:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising means attachable to
    machines of this class wherein the means is specially adapted for removing
    material from an article used to control fluid flow through an aperture or
    structure, i.e., for cutting a valve.


CLS 82/173
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under class definition provided for elsewhere.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS

    The following subclasses provide for concepts illogical to the preceding
    schedule but which contain frequently searched subject matter.  As these
    subclasses contain only discretionary cross-reference they are of limited
    search value and the search should refer to preceding subclasses for a
    complete search.


CLS 82/900
TXT LATHE THERMAL REGULATION:

    Cross-reference art collection relating to devices or processes of
    regulating the temperature of a lathe.


CLS 82/901
TXT CHIP REMOVAL:

    Cross-reference art collection relating to devices or processes of removing
    chips from machines of this class.


CLS 82/902
TXT OIL GROOVING DEVICE:

    Cross-reference art collection relating to devices for producing an oil
    groove in an article, e.g., in a piston, etc.


CLS 82/903
TXT BALANCING AND CENTERING:

    Cross-reference art collection relating to devices for balancing and
    centering either workpieces or components of a lathe.


CLS 82/904
TXT VIBRATION METHOD OR TOOL:

    Cross-reference art collection relating to processes or devices for
    inducing or inhibiting vibrational motion in a lathe.


CLS 82/905
TXT TRANSMISSION ACCESSORY OR CONTROL:

    Cross-reference art collection relating accessories or controls for
    transmission for machines of this class.


CLS 83/
TTL CUTTING

CLS 83/
TXT INDEX TO CLASS DEFINITIONS AND NOTES



    I       CLASS DEFINITION

    II      SCOPE OF THE CLASS

    III     RELATIONSHIP TO OTHER CLASSES INCLUDING, PER SE, CUTTING, SEVERING,
    OR INCISING

    IV      RELATIONSHIP TO OTHER TREATING CLASSES

    V       RELATIONSHIP TO MATERIAL HANDLING        CLASSES

    V-1     RELATIONSHIP TO THE CLASS OF TOOL DRIVING OR IMPACTING

    VI      RELATIONSHIP TO THE CLASS OF WORK HOLDERS

    VII     STRUCTURE OF THE CLASS

    VIII    DEFINITION OF TERMS

    IX      SHORT INDEX TO THE CLASS

    I       CLASS DEFINITION

    Class 83 is the residual locus of patents directed to methods and machines
    for penetrating material, without substantial reshaping flow of such
    material, by means of (1) a solid tool, or fluid current, either of which
    applies mechanical deforming force to the material by direct physical
    contact therewith, the fluid current forcing the material against a solid
    tool whose edge defines the line of cut; (2) a heated solid tool which
    directly engages the material (to effect penetration thereof by melting, or
    by transmission of mechanical energy, or both); or (3) opposed, controlled
    fluid currents.

    A.      Specifically (as well as impliedly) excluded, is a patent to
    apparatus or process for cutting by the transmission of heat to the work
    material from a hot gas, such as flame cutting (for the location of which,
    see paragraph H of section III of these notes, below, under  "RELATIONSHIP
    TO OTHER CLASSES INCLUDING, PER SE, CUTTING, SEVERING, OR INCISING").

    B.      While a disclosure of the production of a reshaping flow, in the
    operation of its apparatus or accomplishment of its method, will preclude
    original placement of a patent in this class, a disclosure of a flow of the
    material which is inherent in, or purely incidental to, the act of cutting
    will not operate as such a bar.  The following types of factual situation
    illustrate the rule:

    1.      A disclosure that the work material flows, due to melting, will not
    preclude placement herein of the patent so disclosing; but the further
    teach-that the flow accomplishes a significant or definable reshaping of
    the work beyond that inherent in the penetration there-of will bar such
    placement.  Exemplary of such reshaping is the formation of a rim or bead
    around a hole coincident with the penetration which forms the hole.

    2.      A patent to a cutting machine or process employing a tool which, as
    disclosed, creates a flow of the material while penetrating the material
    only partially (that is, it fails to reach the surface opposite the surface
    of entry) will be excluded from this class only if there is a teaching from
    which it can be fairly inferred that there is no severance of the surface
    fibres of the work, but rather that the material is compacted, creased,
    forged or otherwise plastic worked, thus indicating that the reshaping is
    not an incident of a cutting operation.  A disclosure that a "cutting" tool
    penetrates only partially through tacky, flowable, or green, plastic work
    material (such as soft synthetic "plastics", food dough, etc.) will be
    considered to supply such a teaching, unless (by the same disclosure) the
    work attains its flowable or soft condition by the action of the cutting
    tool (e.g., a hot tool).  If such tool is disclosed as softening or
    plasticizing the work, a patent directed to same would be proper for this
    class (83).

    II      SCOPE OF THE CLASS

    Class 83 is an elemental or basic class. That is, its subject matter is
    restricted (so far as possible) to means for, or steps of, accomplishing
    the following functions: cutting something (the "work"); or cutting, and
    handling the work to be cut; or cutting, and handling the product of the
    cutting operation.  As a result, the great preponderance of patents
    directed to cutting combined with some other work treatment will be found
    in the respective class of the other treatment or in some more general
    class of combined operations, such as Class 156 or Class 29 (particularly
    subclasses 33+ and 566+).  The few exceptions to this general statement are
    set forth explicitly under the heading "RELATIONSHIP TO OTHER TREATING
    CLASSES" (section IV, below).

    The class does not act as the sole repository for patents directed to
    cutting machines or even to cutting machines of the functional types
    signalized in the subclasses of the class.  Based upon past development of
    the system of patent classification, such patents are to be found in many
    classes, their disposition depending mainly upon the nature of the material
    disclosed as constituting work for the cutting operation.  A listing of
    such classes is included herein below, under the heading "RELATIONSHIP TO
    OTHER CLASSES INCLUDING, PER SE, CUTTING, SEVERING, OR INCISING" (section
    III, below).  With respect to such classes, Class 83 is residual.

    As an incident of such residual nature, this class will not receive for
    original placement a patent disclosing alternative embodiments (claimed
    generically, or with a specific claim to each), one of a type proper for
    this class and one of a type related to another cutting class or subclass.
    Nor will it so receive a patent disclosing two purposes for a claimed
    cutting machine, one general or related to the art of this class (as
    shearing metal) and another specific to another cutting class or subclass
    (as, for instance, cutting plastic block or earthenware; or nail making).
    In both such cases, the original patent will be placed in the other cutting
    class or subclass.

    III.    RELATIONSHIP TO OTHER CLASSES INCLUDING, PER SE, CUTTING, SEVERING,
    OR INCISING

    The following enumeration and discussion of such classes, although
    including the loci of patents relating to many and varied types of cutting,
    does not purport to be exhaustive:

    A.      The class of cutting implements, Class 30.

    Other than as governed by the exception set forth immediately following
    description 4 below, a patent is deemed to be directed to a cutting
    implement, and thus to be placeable originally in Class 30, if its claimed
    subject matter fits any one of following descriptions:

    1.      a cutting device which as an entirety is disclosed to be supported
    or held against the force of gravity by the operator during cutting.

    2.      a cutting device which as an entirety is disclosed as deriving from
    the work a substantial amount of its support against gravity (i.e.,
    work-supported) during cutting, including a cutting device which is
    disclosed as being guided and supported during cutting by a member which is
    itself supported on the work  (a) a cutting device which is disclosed as
    having a loose, work supported tool and powered means for driving the tool
    into the work, will be placed in Class 83; (b) a cutting device which
    includes means to affix, hold, or positively locate a portion of the device
    relative to the work, for support of the device against gravity, and means
    to guide movement of the cutter relative to the work-affixed orwork-located
    portion, will be placed in Class 83; (c) a cutting device which includes
    (1) means to position or positively locate a portion of the device relative
    to the work in such a manner that said portion remains in said relative
    position during cutting and (2) means to guide the cutter in predetermined
    path with respect to said portion, will be placed in Class 83.

    3.      a cutting device which is disclosed as being capable of movement in
    a random path instantaneously under the control of the operator during
    cutting, including a cutter suspended or supported near the work; e.g., a
    cutter mounted at one end of a flexible shaft whose other end is anchored
    to a table, or a cutter suspended from a trolley, or a cutter mounted on a
    steerable vehicle.

    4.      a cutting device of the type referred to in the preceding paragraph
    in combination with a work support or work holder wherein neither the
    cutting tool itself nor the tool support is modified or constructed to
    either constrain the motion of the cutter or to guide it in a predetermined
    path with respect to the work support or work holder.

    However, a patent drawn to a device including a cutting tool and means to
    support a reserve stock of the work in which the work supply is in the form
    of a web or strand wrapped upon itself and the supply is supported for
    rotation upon an axis will be placed originally in this class (83) even
    though it fits one or more of the above listed descriptions.

    A patent for the combination of a cutting device meeting any of the
    criteria set forth above and a work holder provided for in Class 269 will
    be placed originally in Class 30, although a patent for the work holder,
    per se, will be placed in Class 269.

    A patent which only claims a cutting tool nominally, that is, in which the
    claimed structure does not sufficiently define a cutting tool substantially
    in its ultimate use form, or elements, adjuncts, or materials structurally
    limited to such use, is regarded as proper subject matter for original
    placement in Class 428, Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles.

    B.      The class of severing by tearing or breaking.

    Class 225 includes patents for process or apparatus for severing
    determinate portions of work material by causing failure of the work under
    tension at the point or line of separation, effected by moving one part of
    the work relative to another part.  In such devices or processes, the
    tension is applied by stretching, bending, twisting, manually or
    mechanically grasping the work on one side of a fixed edge and forcing it
    against the edge, or moving a breaking or tearing tool and supported work
    material relative to each other.  Also included in the reference class are
    tearing or breaking devices combined with any other type of severing means.

    For a detailed statement of the distinction between Classes 83 and 225, see
    (1) Note and (2) Note under Part II of the definition of Class 225.

    C.      The class of comminuting.

    Class 241, Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, includes original
    patents for process or apparatus directed to the cutting or severing of
    solid material into a number of smaller solid masses, which smaller masses
    do not have imparted to them any desired or significant shape.  As between
    Classes 83 and 241, the provision of means for (or steps of) retaining an
    original dimension of the work in the cut up product will exclude a patent
    for the apparatus (or process) from Class 241.

    D.      The class of selective cutting.

    The art of selective cutting is collected in Class 234, Selective Cutting
    (e.g., Punching).  The distinction between a selective cutting device or a
    method of selective cutting (either of which is proper for Class 234) and a
    cutting means or method of this class (83) is set forth in the following
    statement:

    Class 234 is superior to Class 83, and takes or contains original patents
    directed to cutting devices as defined in Class 83 which are further
    distinguished by the claimed inclusion of a plurality of cutting tool pairs
    and an actuating power train for each pair (one power train may be common
    to all), so that power may be delivered to any or all pairs for any cutting
    cycle, and wherein each and all of the tool pairs assembled in the machine
    are constantly available to be chosen for cutting or noncutting (in any
    desired number, from one to the total number available) by (1) a pattern
    (2) combinational coding means [defined in section III.  Class Definitions
    of Class 234, Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching)], or (3) means not a part
    of the tool actuating power train and which does not partake of all the
    movements of either tool or the pair; which pattern or means conditions
    which pair so chosen to (a) enable, or (b) prevent, a cutting operation
    thereby when its driving power train is actuated.

    The distinction expressed above is intended to exclude from Class 234
    patents for devices wherein, for example, (a) there is no distinct
    conditioning means [see U.S. Patent No. 682,197 (subclass 225 of Class 83)
    to Hollerith:  each punch is selected and actuated by its individual
    key-connected linkage]; or (b) less than the whole number of tools is
    constantly available [see U.S. Patent No. 878,775 (subclass 552 of Class
    83) to Colbert:  a turret of tools]; or (c) the tool conditioning means
    move bodily with their associated tools [see U.S. Patent No. 746,625
    (subclass 559 of Class 83) to Allen:  manipulable locking pins are fixed to
    the tools]; and is intended to include, for example, devices wherein a
    tool-actuating power train common to all tools is tripped, manually or
    automatically, after operation of selected conditioning means [see U.S.
    Patent No. 1,110,261 (234/111) to Hollerith: initial depression of a key
    conditions one punch for actuation, and further depression of the key trips
    a common punch hammer or actuator], and devices wherein a plurality of
    combinations of less than the total number of tools are actuated or
    conditioned for actuation, by coding means (see U.S. Patent No. 422,728 to
    Clark: a turret of coded interposers is positionable to select groups of
    tools from an array thereof).

    E.      The class of mechanical manufacturing (metal working).

    The class of reference (29, Metal Working) includes patents for machines
    for bias cutting of tubular stock (subclasses 2.1+); shredding metal; e.g.,
    metal wool making (subclass 4.51+); spiral cutting of flat stock (subclass
    20.1); and filing (subclass 76.1). Patents for files and rasps are found in
    subclasses 78+.

    F.      The class of presses.

    The class of reference, (100, Presses) includes patents for reciprocating
    press structures, which (as both claimed and disclosed) may perform,
    alternatively, a cutting operation or some other forming operation (such as
    forging, drawing, bending), as well as patents containing such equivocal
    disclosures of forming devices that the type of forming operation such
    devices are intended to perform cannot be ascertained accurately.

    G.      The class of abrading.

    With few exceptions (such as those found in Class 132, Toilet), patents
    claiming a cutting means, or a step involving the use of a cutting means,
    which (as disclosed) is composed of crystalline material-removing
    particles, are placed originally in Class 451, Abrading.

    H.      Classes related to flame or other heat-cutting.

    In addition to the classes enumerated below, it will be noted that
    subclasses 18.1+ of Class 33, Geometrical Instruments, contained original
    patents for flame-cutting scribers, and that Class 65, Glass Manufacturing,
    subclass 113, provides for glass preform treating including flame severing,
    and subclasses 269+ provides for glassworking means including flame
    severing means.

    1.      The class of metal treatment.

    Subclasses 194+ of Class 148, Metal Treatment, includes original patents
    for methods of flame-cutting metals.

    2.      The class of metallurgical apparatus.

    Original patents for flame-cutting apparatus are collected in subclasses
    48+ of Class 266, Metallurgical Apparatus.  In addition, subclass 271 of
    Class 266 contains original patents for devices used for drilling or
    cutting taphole plugs of metallurgical furnaces.

    3.      The class of combustion.

    Class 431, Combustion, contains original patents for a torch comprising a
    fluid fuel distributor and a feature which specializes it for producing a
    flame; e.g., pilot burner etc., or which depends on the heat generated by
    the flame to perform its function; e.g., vaporize fuel.

    4.      The class of electric heating.

    Class 219, Electric Heating, includes original patents directed to methods
    or apparatus effective to sever, part, or burn or melt away, a portion of a
    workpiece without using a solid tool which engages and penetrates the work.
    Examples will be found in subclasses 68+.

    5.      The class of fluid sprinkling, spraying, and diffusing.

    Class 239, Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, includes original
    patents for fluid distributing nozzles or tips, per se, even though
    disclosed as burners.

    I.      Classes related to the cutting of metal.

    In addition to the classes enumerated herein, attention is invited to the
    discussion of patents directed to improvements in the flame- or
    heat-cutting arts, contained in paragraph H, above.

    1.      The class of nail making.

    Patents directed to apparatus for cutting nails to shape are found as
    originals in subclasses 157+ and 192+ of Class 470, Threaded, Headed
    Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and Apparatus.

    2.      The class of chain, staple, and horseshoe making.

    Cutting machines disclosed as being useful in making such products are the
    subject of patents in subclass 29 of Class 59, Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe
    Making.

    3.      The class of tool making.

    A patent for a cutting machine or process employed in the manufacture of a
    tool will be found, as an original copy, in Class 76, Metal Tools and
    Implements, Making, (e.g., in subclasses 12+, 28, 29, 30, 31+, 37+, 82+).

    4.      The class of wireworking.

    Patents for methods of, or means for, cutting wire will be found, as
    original copies, in many subclasses of Class 140, Wireworking, particularly
    subclasses 58+, 66, and 67.

    5.      The class of type casting.

    Original copies of patents for machines or processes for cutting cast type
    are included in subclass 59 of Class 199, Type Casting.

    6.      A patent directed to cutting metal (or other hard substance whose
    cutting is not the subject of a subclass is some other class) will be
    placed originally in one of the following classes, if not earlier placed on
    the basis of product (e.g., nails) according to the criteria expressed:

    a.      Class 408, Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, will
    take original patents to machines for making a hole, reducing the outside
    of a round workpiece, trepanning, screw threading either the outside or the
    inside of a tubular workpiece, as well as any other cutting operation by
    use of a tool turning about an axis and moving along that axis toward a
    workpiece; provided, there is no additional motion of the operating tool.
    Class 408 is intended to ultimately include all cutting in the manner
    provided in the definition of that class; however, not all classes have now
    been screened for art proper for Class 408. Included among the classes
    likely to include patents proper for Class 408 that have not been screened
    are Classes 82, 142, and 451.

    b.      Class 82, Turning.  Original patents for devices or processes for
    severing or cutting off work, wherein the cutting movements of tool and
    work relative to each other include (1) rotation of either or both about an
    axis passing through the work (except as provided for in Class 408). And
    (2) relative translation substantially normal to said axis, are in Class 82
    as meeting the general concepts of "turning".

    c.      Class 409, Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, includes original
    patents for a process and apparatus for shaping material, usually metal, by
    means of (1) a toothed rotary cutter to produce an article of desired
    configuration or (2) a nonrotary tool for making a series of comparatively
    light cuts or a series of such tools, between which tool(s) and the
    workpiece there is a relative reciprocatory movement in substantially a
    straight line. Generally, Class 409 is broad enough to take any patent for
    shaping by means of a toothed rotary cutter not provided for in Class 77 or
    Class 82. Included in Class 409, subclasses 288+, is a patent for a single
    edge cutter device which shapes work (e.g., grooving, shaving, slotting, or
    flash trimming) by means of relative movement between tool and work in one
    or more passes. See (1) Note under Class 409, subclass 288.

    J.      Classes related to the cutting of wood.

    1.      The class of coopering.

    Patents for machines adapted to cut barrels, or staves therefor, will be
    found as original copies in many subclasses of Class 147.

    2.      Other patents whose claimed method or apparatus is disclosed as
    being directed to the cutting of wood will be placed originally in the
    proper woodworking class; Class 142, Wood Turning; Class 144, Woodworking
    (including pencil sharpening in subclasses 28.1+); or Class 30, Cutlery
    (including pencil sharpening implements in subclasses 451+); except for
    patents directed to veneer-web or -sheet clippers (including those intended
    to cut a layer to be laminated) which are placed in this class (83).

    K.      Classes related (in whole or in part) to cutting the earth or the
    fruits thereof in situ, or well tubing imbedded in the earth.

    A patent directed to a machine or process for accomplishing any one of the
    above enumerated purposes will be placed in the appropriate earth exploring
    or exploiting, or agricultural, class.  A list (not intended as exhaustive)
    of such classes follows:  37, Excavating; 47, Plant Husbandry; 56,
    Harvesters; 111, Planting; 166, Wells; 171, Unearthing Plants or Buried
    Objects; 172, Earth Working (e.g., subclasses 13-22); 175, Boring or
    Penetrating the Earth; 299, Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard
    Material.

    L.      Classes related to the cutting of plastic material, stone, or hard
    glass.

    A patent directed to apparatus for cutting plastic, green ceramic or
    cementitious preformed material will be found as an original in Class 83
    unless shaping other than by cutting is involved.  See Class 65, Glass
    Manufacturing, appropriate subclasses for a process of, or apparatus for,
    cutting or scoring glass combined with glassworking or treating, and
    subclass 133 for a process of severing a stream of molten glass and also
    see the collection of search notes under subclasses 112 and 133; Class 125,
    Stone Working, for stone cutting; Class 264, Plastic and Nonmetallic
    Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes, particularly subclasses 138+ for a
    process of plastic shaping by or with cutting; and Class 425, Plastic
    Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus, for means shaping or
    reshaping of plastic material combined with cutting means.

    M.      Classes related to the treatment, care, or handling of living
    animal (including human) bodies.

    1.      The class of surgery.

    A patent directed to the cutting of a live animal body will be placed as an
    original copy in Class 128, Surgery.

    2.      The class of dentistry.

    Original patents for devices for trimming plaster bases of dental models
    will be found in subclass 38 of Class 433, Dentistry.

    3.      The class of toilet.

    Patents for cutting, scraping, or filing devices, disclosed as useful in
    manicure or pedicure operations, are placed originally in subclasses 75.4+
    and 75.8 of Class 132.

    4.      The class of farriery.

    The reference class (168), in subclass 48.1+, contains original patents to
    apparatus for sawing, milling, scraping, filing, or otherwise cutting
    animal hooves.

    5.      The class of fishing, trapping, and vermin destroying.

    In addition to the typical fish hook and tackle therefor, the class of
    reference (43) contains patents for such cutting devices as spears and
    harpoons subclass 6 and impaling traps subclasses 77+.

    N.      Classes related to the preparation of food.

    1.      The class of butchery.

    A patent directed to the cutting of the dead body of a previously living
    creature, preparatory to its use as food, will be found in Class 452,
    Butchering.  For instance, patents relating to fowl beheading, carcass
    splitting, or fish cutting are found, respectively, in subclasses 12, 23,
    or 53+ thereof.

    2.      Bakery and confectionery type foods.

    A manipulative process of shaping edibles combined with preform severing is
    provided for in Class 99, Foods and Beverages: Apparatus, subclasses 450.1+
    and 537+, whereas comparable apparatus is provided for in Class 425,
    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus, appropriate
    subclasses.  Cutting of edible preforms, per se, is provided for by Class
    83 whereas severing of same by tearing or breaking is provided for by Class
    225.

    3.      Other classes of food cutting.

    A patent directed to one of the following types of food cutting will be
    placed originally in the appropriate food preparation class:  a. Class 99,
    Foods and Beverages: Apparatus, for a cutting device which is adapted to a
    peculiar characteristic of the food, or wherein the cutting device
    separates distinguishable portions of the food, (e.g., leafy top portion,
    seeds, core, skin portion, eyes, etc.).

    O.      Classes related to the working of leather, skins, or hides.

    1.      The class of leather working.

    Class 69, Leather Manufactures, includes patents directed to means and
    processes for splitting, skiving, defleshing, whitening, or buffing of
    hides or leather, and for cutting, (per se), in the production of certain
    articles typical of the class (e.g., leather straps, the subject of patents
    in subclass 17 of Class 69).

    2.      The class of boot and shoe making.

    Patents for cutting means or methods specialized or peculiarly adapted to
    operation upon footgear are placed originally in Class 12, Boot and Shoe
    Making, particularly subclasses 27, 28, 40, 41.05, 41.7, 46, 47, 47.1,
    57.5+, 62, and 85+.

    P.      Textile classes.

    1.      The class of cloth finishing.

    Subclasses 7+ of Class 26, Textiles: Cloth Finishing, constitutes the locus
    of original patents limited to apparatus or process for severing threads or
    fibers projecting from textile fabrics.  Such patents may relate, for
    instance, to shearing or to the cutting of float threads, pile loops, or
    weft ends.

    2.      The class of fiber preparation.

    Patents for "tow-to-top" staplizing machines or methods are placed
    originally in Class 19, Textiles: Fiber Preparation.  The type of severance
    therein involved is that in which a bundle of filaments of indefinite
    length (termed "tow") is subjected to a treatment which reduces the
    individual filaments to staple length fibers without disrupting the
    continuity or integrity of the bundle (which, when emerging from the
    machine or processes, is known as "top").  In Class 83, on the other hand,
    are found patents for machines or processes for the reduction of isolated
    individual filaments to staple length fibers (for instance, Beria-type
    cutters) or for the disruptive reduction of filament bundles to such
    fibers, in both cases without further textile treatment.

    3.      The class of weaving.

    Original copies of patents for cutting devices mounted on loom parts (e.g.,
    temple mounted cutters) are found in subclasses 302+ of Class 139.

    4.      The class of sewing machines.

    Patents for cutting devices disclosed as attached to sewing machines will
    be found, as original copies, in subclasses 45 and 285-301 of Class 112.

    5.      The class of apparel apparatus.

    Means for trimming the bottoms of dresses or skirts, for trimming hat
    brims, or for cutting (e.g., clipping) the nap of hats comprise subject
    matter of patents in subclasses 1.1, 16, and 19 of Class 223.

    6.      The general class of textiles.

    Subclass 144 of the class of reference (28, Textiles) contains original
    patents for machines for making chenille yarn by cutting a woven fabric.

    Q.      Classes pertaining to the communications and information arts.

    1.      The class of typewriters.

    Subclasses 127+ and 135+ of Class 400, Typewriting Machines, includes
    original copies of patents drawn to keyboard operated means for cutting
    intelligence-bearing indicia, as, for instance, stencil cutting, and to
    processes utilizing such means.

    2.      The class of printing.

    Generally speaking, the recording of intelligence by cutting is proper
    subject matter for Class 101, Printing.  More particularly, individual
    cases of cutting machines or method may be tested for aptness to Class 101
    by reference to the following statements:

    a.      A patent for a machine or process for cutting on or adjacent the
    printed or written matter on a document to prevent unauthorized or
    fraudulent alteration of such matter due to the proximity of the cut
    surfaces to the printed or written matter (e.g., check protecting) will be
    placed originally in Class 101, subclasses 3.1+.

    b.      A patent for a machine or process for cutting work in the form of a
    character, a design, or a pattern which will impart information to an
    observer is proper for Class 101, subclasses 3.1+, if a cut is disclosed as
    extending only part way through the thickness of the work (e.g.,
    embossing). If all of the cuts forming such character, design, or pattern
    are disclosed as extending all the way through the thickness of the work,
    the patent will be found in Class 83.

    c.      If in addition to a cutting machine or process of this class (83)
    there is claimed a means or step peculiar to Class 101, (e.g., the
    application of ink to the cutting tool to additionally outline or mark an
    aperture made by the punch), such addition has been considered sufficient
    to place a patent directed to such combination in Class 101, subclasses
    3.1+.  This is in accordance with the general rule that a patent for a
    combination of cutting with another treatment of the work will be placed in
    the class of the other treatment.  (See section IV, below).

    d.      An original patent claiming both the process and apparatus for the
    manufacture of stencils by cutting, or only such process, will be found in
    Class 101, subclass 128.4.

    3.      The class of recorders.

    A process or apparatus which would be otherwise proper for Class 346,
    Recorders, will not be removed from the scope of that class merely by
    virtue of the fact that the recordation, as claimed, is accomplished by an
    incising or penetrating means or method step.

    4.      The class of registers.

    Original patents directed to means for cutting or punching a record medium,
    in response to the results of the operation of a calculating machine or
    register, will be found in Class 235, Registers, particularly subclasses
    58+ and 60.27+ (especially subclass 60.29).

    5.      The class of railway signaling.

    Patents for apparatus which cuts or punches a record medium, in response to
    the operation of a block-signal system or of a cab signal or train control
    device, are placed originally in subclasses 107 and 185 (respectively) of
    Class 246, Railway Switches and Signals.

    6.      The class of telegraphy.

    A patent for a cutting device which is actuated by means responsive to a
    telegraphically transmitted signal will be placed originally in Class 178,
    Telegraphy, those in subclass 92 being typical.

    7.      The class of binder devices releasably engaging aperture or notch
    of sheet.

    A sheet binder device of that class (402) (1) in combination with a
    discrete sheet aperture forming device, which device perforates a sheet
    prior to placing the same on the retainer, (2) including means to force a
    sheet upon the sheet retainer and (3) including a sheet retainer which
    penetrates and inserts a pliant strand through a sheet will be found in
    subclasses 1, 7, and 25, respectively, of Class 402.

    R.      Receptacle classes.

    1.      The class of deposit and collection receptacles.

    Patents claiming a ticket receiving and collection receptacle, with means
    to punch or cut tickets introduced into the receptacle, will be found
    placed originally in Class 232, Deposit and Collection Receptacles.

    2.      The class of special receptacles.

    Patents for cigar- or tobacco-containing receptacles having an attached
    cutter are placed originally in Class 206, Special Receptacle or Package,
    subclasses 238+.

    3.      The class of paper receptacles.

    Original patents for paper receptacles with attached means for opening a
    receptacle by cutting, tearing, or ripping will be found in subclasses
    87.05, 200+, and 307 of Class 229, Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard
    Boxes.

    4.      The class of metallic receptacles.

    Subclasses 265+ of Class 220, Receptacles, includes original patents for
    general-utility receptacles with attached openers which function to open
    the receptacle by cutting part thereof.

    S.      Certain other classes distinguished by the nature or identity of
    work or product.

    1.      The class of tobacco.

    Patents for machines which are disclosed as being specially adapted to the
    cutting of tobacco or cigars will be found, as original copies, in
    subclasses 248+ and 281 of Class 131. (Patents for tobacco cutting machines
    of more general utility are placed originally in appropriate subclasses of
    Classes 30 and 83).

    2.      The class of button making.

    Patented machines or processes for cutting button blanks are disclosed in
    subclasses 15 and 16 of Class 79.

    3.      The class of brush, broom, and mop making.

    The class of reference (300) includes a subclass (17) restricted to the,
    per se, trimming of articles of the class.  Most of the devices represented
    by patents therein operate to accomplish such trimming by cutting.

    4.      The class of wheelwright machines.

    Patents directed to machines and processes for lacerating or buffing the
    exterior surface of vehicle tires are collected in subclass 13 of Class
    157, Wheelwright Machines, except those claiming an abrading means or step,
    which latter are to be found in Class 451, Abrading.

    5.      The class of ships.

    Patents for ships carrying means to cut or break ice are placed originally
    in subclasses 40-42 of Class 114.

    6.      The class of chemical manufacture and adhesive bonding of articles.

    Class, 156, Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    provides in subclasses 625+ for severing a workpiece by the action of a
    reactive or solvent fluid.  It also provides for the combination of
    laminating and cutting in subclasses 250+ and 510+.

    T.      The class of geometrical instruments.

    Subclasses 18.1+ of Class 33, Geometrical Instruments, include original
    patents for means for scoring or indenting a reference point, respectively.

    Following is a numerical listing of classes referred to in the above
    paragraphs of this section (III):

    CLASS   PARAGRAPH
    12              O
    19              P
    26              P
    28              P
    29              E
    30              A, S
    32              M
    33              H, T
    37              K
    43              M
    47              K
    56              K
    59              I
    65              H, L
    69              O
    76              I
    79              S
    82              I
    99              N
    100     F
    101     Q
    111     K
    112     P
    114     S
    125     L
    128     M
    129     Q
    131     S
    132     G, M
    139     P
    140     I
    142     I, J
    144     J
    147     J
    148     H
    156     S
    157     S
    166     K
    168     M
    171     K
    172     K
    175     K
    178     Q
    199     I
    206     R
    219     H
    220     R
    223     P
    225     B
    229     R
    232     R
    234     D
    235     Q
    241     C
    246     Q
    266     H
    269     A
    299     K
    300     S
    346     Q
    408     I
    425     L
    431     H
    451     G, I, S
    452     N
    470     I



    IV.     RELATIONSHIP TO OTHER TREATING CLASSES

    A.      This class is an elementary class and generally does not include
    patents claiming the combination of a cutting method or means with a
    process or apparatus for other treatment(s). Certain specific exceptions to
    this general rule exist, as follows:

    1.      Heating or cooling work and cutting same; subject matter of
    subclasses 15+ and 170.

    2.      Cleaning work and cutting same; subject matter of subclass 168.

    B.      Means for, or steps of, performing certain other operations whose
    character as treating or nontreating operations, it is recognized, will
    vary with individual judgement also are  included in patents of this class
    in claimed combination with cutting instrumentalities or steps, as follows:

    1.      Weighing the cut product in subclass 77.

    2.      Separating or assorting product in subclasses 102+

    3.      Applying a transient, nonpropellant fluid (e.g., lubricant or
    coolant) to work in subclasses 22 and 169.

    4.      Temporarily deforming work; in subclasses 17+, 175, and 176.

    5.      Unwinding material from, or supporting material on, a spool, beam,
    bobbin, or the like, for presentation to a cutting device for operation
    thereon; note particularly subclasses 649+.  (The combination of a cutting
    machine and significantly claimed means for winding the product thereof is
    subject matter for Class 242, Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, as is the
    Combination of a winding machine and a means to cut the tail, extending
    from a package wound by such machine, from the source of material to be
    wound.  See Class 242, subclasses 19, 21, 48, 521, and 522+.

    C.      As to methods, the claimed recitation of a step         of
    performing a treatment other than cutting will exclude a patent from
    original placement in this class, regardless of whether such treating step
    is claimed in detail.

    D.      In interpreting a claimed combination of cutting and noncutting
    treating means, a purely nominal recitation of the other (noncutting)
    treating means will not exclude an original patent from this class if all
    of the following conditions are met:

    1.      No means or instrumentality is claimed as being synchronized with
    the other treating means.

    2.      A single material handling means presents work to both such
    treating means; or, the means which presents material (as work) to a second
    treating means in line is the means which removes it (as product) from a
    first treating means in line.

    3.      No support or guide means is claimed as orienting or redirecting
    the material (work or product) between treating means.

    V.      RELATIONSHIP TO MATERIAL HANDLING CLASSES

    A.      Product handling means.

    1.      This class (83) receives original patents claiming significantly
    both a cutting tool of the class and means to separate or assort portions
    of the product resulting from the cutting operation.  An original patent
    claiming such separating or assorting means in structural terms, and the
    cutting tool in nominal terms only, will be placed in Class 209,
    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids.

    2.      Original patents drawn to the combination of cutting means of this
    class and product weighing means which does not govern the operation of the
    cutting means will be placed in this class (83) without regard to the
    degree of specificity with which the cutting means is claimed therein.  If
    the weighing means is claimed as controlling a cutting device, which
    cutting device terminates feed or flow of material to the weighing means, a
    patent thereto is placed originally in Class 177, Weighing Scales.

    3.      As to other product handling devices (i.e., instrumentalities which
    effect or affect motion of the product of a cutting machine), the claimed
    combination of such device with a cutting machine constitutes subject
    matter for this class (83), regardless of the degree of specificity with
    which the cutting means is claimed.

    B.      Work handling means.

    1.      As between this class (83) and Classes 193, Conveyors, Chutes,
    Skids, Guides, and Ways; 198, Conveyors:  Power-Driven; 212, Traversing
    Hoists; 414, Material or Article Handling; 226, Advancing Material of
    Indeterminate Length; 406, Conveyors:  Fluid Current; and 271, Sheet
    Feeding or Delivering; the claimed recitation in purely nominal terms, of a
    cutting instrumentality with respect to which a work handling means may
    move or feed work will not of itself exclude placement of an original
    patent for such work handling means in the respective material handling
    class listed above.  However, when such instrumentality is set forth with
    structural specificity, the claimed congregation of elements is properly
    placed with the work modifying instrumentality (class 83).  For example:  A
    claim reciting a structurally defined work handling means (not claimed as
    synchronized with a work modifying means), and a "work station" (or "tool
    station", or "work modifying means", or "tool", or "cutter", or "punch", or
    "knife", etc.) in so many words, is properly placed on the basis of the
    work handling means.  A claim reciting a work handling means and, for
    instance, a work station including a "reciprocating tool element", or a
    "tapered tool", or a "round cutter", or a "rotary punch", is properly
    placed in the class of the specific tool set forth.  The true test for
    proper placement in this class (83) is whether or not the combination of a
    tool andwork-feed means is a significanttool-to-work-relationship.  For
    further notes on this relationship see (2) Note., under subclass 703 of
    this class (83) referring to Class 414.

    2.      Further, this class (83) receives original patents claiming a
    cutting tool (of the type provided for in the class) synchronized with or
    in power-transmitting driving relation with, a work handling means,
    regardless of whether such tool is claimed significantly or merely
    nominally.

    C.      Tool handling means.

            Class 483 provides for a Class 83 cutting process or apparatus
    combined with tool changing.

    V-1     RELATIONSHIP TO CLASS OF TOOL DRIV-
            ING OR IMPACTING

    Class 173, Tool Driving or Impacting, provides for subject matter directed
    to driving or impacting a tool, when such subject matter includes combined
    features peculiar to tool driving, but which does not include features
    limiting the subject matter to a specific tool art such as specific shape
    of the work contacting portion of a tool, related tools, or an opposed work
    support.  Class 83 has not been cleared as to subject matter in conflict
    with this line.

    VI.     RELATIONSHIP TO THE CLASS OF WORK HOLDERS

    This relationship is set forth in paragraph (II) of (2) Note to the class
    definition of Class 269.

    VII.    STRUCTURE OF THE CLASS

    A.      A perusal of the first line or skeleton schedule of the class will
    reveal that the class is composed of a relatively small number of major
    subclass groups. Generally, in order of superiority, these major subclass
    groups provide search fields for:

    1.      a method including a step of cutting (subclasses 13-56).

    2.      acyclic (that is, not cyclic) means to halt or prevent motion of a
    part or all of a cutting machine (subclasses 58-68).

    3.      means to monitor and control operation of a cutting machine
    (subclasses 72-76).

    4.      means to handle the product of a cutting operation (subclasses
    78-166).

    5.      means to cut hollow work from the inside (subclasses 178-195).

    6.      means to cut work while cyclically halted (subclasses 202-283).

    7.      a flying cutter (subclasses 284-349).

    8.      a cutter (of a type other than those previously enumerated)
    synchronized with work moving means (subclasses 350-357).

    9.      a cutting machine with an appurtenance such as a clamp, work stop
    or gauge, work guide; firstly, synchronized with the tool cycle (subclasses
    373-398), and secondly, not so synchronized (subclasses 438-468).

    10.     means to control the operation of a part (at least) of the machine
    in response to means to sense the work, product, or another part of the
    machine (subclasses 358-372, 399, 400).

    11.     a cutting machine having work moving means not claimed as
    synchronized with the tool cycle; providing for tool-station-type work
    moving means (subclasses 401 through 437.7).

    12.     a rotatable disc type cutting machine (subclasses 469-508).

    13.     means to produce or facilitate the cutting motion of a tool or
    tools (subclasses 513-519; 523-647).

    14.     a cutting tool, per se, or combined with its support (subclasses
    651-699.61).

    15.     a method of, or means for, cutting other than all the way through
    the work thickness-wise, providing for scoring, skiving, and related
    operations (subclasses 6-12).

    B.      In addition, a limited number of groupings have been established on
    secondary bases of classification, to facilitate state-of-the-art searches.
    These subclasses, which contain no original patents are numbered from 901.

    C.      A short index to the class will be found in section IX, below.

    VIII.   DEFINITIONS OF TERMS

    ANVIL

    a tool comprising a smooth-faced, imperforate member, the smooth face
    having the purpose of contacting the work and providing a reaction surface
    against which a relatively movable tool may abut in its work penetrating
    movement.

    DETECTOR

    a mechanism for sensing a physical property or characteristic of, or the
    presence or absence or passage of, the work or the product or a movable
    element of a machine; which mechanism effects a signal or impulse as a
    result of such sensing.  The signal or impulse is sent through a
    transmitter, (see definition of "transmitter" below) and effects or
    initiates the functioning of a machine part or assembly controlled by the
    detector.

    FLYING

    moving with the work material. The term "flying" means that the part so
    described has, at the time of cutting, a motion component in the direction
    of the work as it moves to and through the cutting station.

    GUIDE

    passive means to direct the movement of something (e.g., work, product,
    machine part) in a desired path.  (Note:  although a guide may be movable
    for the purpose of adjustment, yet it accomplishes its directing function
    by presenting an obstacle to movement in an undesired direction, rather
    than by causing the directed thing or part to move with it).

    NOTCHING

    the cutting of a discrete product from a workpiece through the thickness of
    the workpiece with the line of cut starting at an edge of the workpiece and
    returning to the same edge.  The edge of the workpiece may be either an
    exterior edge or an interior edge.  A cut which extends solely along a
    single straight line is not considered to be a notching cut.

    PRODUCT

    material which has been treated by the cutting tool; the result of a
    cutting operation.  (Note:  material which is "product" for one cutting
    operation may be "work" for an ensuing operation).

    PUNCHING

    the cutting of a discrete product out of the confines of a workpiece
    through the thickness of the workpiece so that the cut does not intersect
    any edge (exterior or interior) of the workpiece.

    SHEARING

    cutting effected by the relative motion of two cutting tools having edges
    which are initially on opposite sides of the work with the cutting taking
    place by one tool moving towards the other tool and the edge on the moving
    tool moving past and in close and overlapping relationship to the edge of
    the other tool.

    TOOL

    the instrumentality that contacts the work for effecting directly the
    operation of the class either by itself or by cooperation with another tool.

    TOOL CYCLE

    the elapsed time between, and all of the motion traced by the tool between,
    the time the tool leaves any particular datum point in its approach to (or
    recession from) the work until it again leaves that point in its next
    succeeding approach to (or recession from) the work, the location of such
    datum point for a series of recurring cycles being determined without
    giving significance to mere positioning movements of the tool with respect
    to the work (Note:  positioning movements of the tool are considered to be
    part of the cycle of motions constituting the tool cycle, and the time they
    occupy is part of the span of the cycle.  They are disregarded only for the
    purpose of establishing the datum point of one cycle with respect to that
    of a preceding or succeeding cycle).

    TOOL PAIR

    a plurality of tools, each having a work contacting portion, said portions
    being initially separated from each other and cooperating to effect cutting
    of the work when they have relative movement toward each other.

    TOOL STROKE

    the motion of the tool toward and into the work to effect a cut, and the
    motion of retraction of the tool from the product to its base position.

    TOOL SUPPORT

    an element connected to the tool for supporting it against gravity and that
    partakes of all of the movement of the tool and has no relative movement
    with respect to the tool except for purposes of adjustment.

    TRANSMITTER

    a system for sending the signal or impulse which has been effected by a
    detector (see definition of "detector" above) to a means for establishing
    (in response to receipt of such signal or impulse) a driving connection
    between a source of power and a machine part or assembly; or sending such
    signal or impulse to a mart or assembly directly (as by a linkage).

    WORK

    article, material, or stuff to be treated (cut).  (Compare "product").

    WORK-FEED MEANS

    an instrumentality for advancing work to the treating (cutting) zone.

    WORK THICKNESS

    in general, the least dimension along a substantially planar outer surface
    of work.  As to hollow workpieces, the thickness dimension at an annular
    section is taken as the wall thickness; at a solid section, it is the
    thickness of the entire workpiece as though it were not hollow.  The
    thickness dimension of a strand is defined as follows:  (a) as to those of
    circular, triangular or elliptical cross-section, by any line passing
    through the strand from surface point to surface point, (b) as to those of
    other polygonal cross-section, by any line passing through the strand from
    one outer surface to a nonintersecting outer surface.  As to spheres a line
    extending through the sphere from one point on the surface to another is
    deemed to define the thickness dimension.  As to all other shapes of work
    pieces, thickness is not considered significant for the purpose of this
    classification.

    Throughout the definitions of subclasses herein below, the appearance of an
    asterisk (*) will indicate a word or term which has been defined in this
    section.  However, the words "product", "tool", and "work", defined in this
    section, occur so frequently in the subclass definitions, that the use of
    the asterisk in reference thereto has been omitted.

    IX.     SHORT INDEX TO THE CLASS:

    The following index is provided for convenience in locating certain
    elements or types of cutting machines according to keywords generally of
    art terminology. This index is not intended to be exhaustive.

    Keyword Subclass

    Automation      72+
    Back gage       467.1, 391+,278, 401+
    Band saw        788+
    Beam dinker     562, 640
    Bed block       531+, 658+, 561
    Beria-type
    cutter  403
    Chain saw       788+
    Clamp   452+, 375+, 282,
            262, 206, 182,
            294, 319, 325, 409, 422
    Clicker die     531+, 652+
    Core lamina-
    tion making     32, 50, 42+
    Crop cut        288
    Draw cut        638, 643, 644
    Edge-cutter     425.2+
    Ejector 111+
    Flying cutter   284+
    Four-motion
    feed    218, 278
    Gag     572, 573
    Gage    (See Back gage)
    Gang punch      620+, 598
    Holddown        450 (also see Clamp
    and Stripper)
    Ice cutting     915.3
    Kerf spreading  102.1
    Leader pin      637
    Miscut  305
    Miter box       746+
    Nibble  237, 917, 916
    Oiler   169
    Pinkin  333, 918
    Presser foot    (see Clamp and Holddown)
    Progressive
    cutting 255, 256, 214, 213,
            611, 636, 622, 519
    Punch hammer    616
    Saw-mill dog    703+
    Saw-mill feed   401+
    Saw-teeth       830+, 835+
    Scrap cutter    923
    Sharpener
    (tool)  174+
    Spring storage
    (cutter, punch) 582+, 223+
    Stripper        111+
    Sub-press unit  637
    Table saw       477+, 483+
    Traveling
    cutter  353, 614, 483+


CLS 83/13
TXT Method under the class definition which includes a step of cutting.

    (1)     Note.  A step of cutting, as herein applied, consists in moving a
    tool and work into contact with and relative to each other such that the
    tool moves entirely through the thickness of the work.  Once the cut
    through the wall thickness has been achieved, then, an interruption of said
    relative movement, or of cutting contact extending throughout said wall
    thickness, shall be construed as a termination of said "step".

    (2)     Note.  A special exception to the limitations expressed in these
    definitions (i.e., the limitations which require a moving tool and/or an
    edge backup member) exists in the case of wherein sound waves (e.g.,
    supersonic sound) cause work to be cut through its thickness.  Such a step
    will be proper for this class and this subclass as a process of cutting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    701,    for the corresponding apparatus.

    861     and 866 through 880, for methods of cutting but generally not
    completely through work thickness.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 557 for process of shaping a one piece
    blank which includes a step of severing.

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), subclasses 1+ for a method of
    selective cutting.


CLS 83/14
TXT Process under subclass 13 which includes a step, either before or during
    the cutting step, of performing an operation (other than a cutting
    operation) which changes the shape or state of the work, which change of
    shape or state facilitates the cutting.

    (1)     Note.  The operation may either facilitate the operation of the
    tool upon the work or effect a necessary or desired change of shape of the
    work with respect to the tool.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass (14) are processes which recite a
    step of placing the work under tension or compression; however, applying
    such force for the purpose of merely immobilizing the work, as by clamping,
    has not been considered a treatment step to admit the patent to this
    subclass.  Such patents are classified below on other steps of their method.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 35 and 54+ for a process of abrading including
    ancillary treatment of work.


CLS 83/15
TXT Process under subclass 14 which includes a step of increasing or decreasing
    the temperature of the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170+,   for apparatus for modifying or controlling the temperature of the
    tool or work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 138+ for molding or shaping processes within the class
    definition when combined with a cutting or severing step.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 33 and 53 for a process of abrading including
    temperature modification or control of work or abradant.


CLS 83/16
TXT Process under subclass 15 in which the treatment is confined to a specific
    portion of the work, as by applying a heated tool on the line on which the
    separation is effected.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 260+ for a process of burning a hole
    by means of electrically generated heat, and subclasses 69.1+ for a process
    of cutting by means of an electric arc.


CLS 83/17
TXT Process under subclass 14 which includes a step of temporarily altering the
    shape or dimension of the work within the cutting zone and concurrently
    with the cutting operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175     and 176, for corresponding apparatus.


CLS 83/18
TXT Process under subclass 17 which includes a step of subjecting the work to
    forces which are directed away from each other (i.e., tensile forces) to
    elongate the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175,    for corresponding apparatus.


CLS 83/19
TXT Process under subclass 17 which includes a step of subjecting the work to
    forces directed toward each other, which forces density, reduces the
    volume, or reduces a dimension of the work.


CLS 83/20
TXT Process under subclass 17 which includes a step of bending the work by
    engaging the work with a tool so as to thereby distort or deform the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for a process of both stretching and flexing the work by contacting
    the work with a tool.

    19,     for a process of both compressing and flexing the work by
    contacting the work with a tool.


CLS 83/21
TXT Process under subclass 20 which includes a step of subjecting the work to
    bending forces which direct the work toward a tool so as to compel the work
    to assume the shape of the tool.


CLS 83/22
TXT Process under subclass 14 in which the treatment includes contacting the
    work with a fluid or gas.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes methods of applying a lubricant to
    the tool or work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    for process of heating or cooling by a fluid application.

    17+,    for process of distorting the work by fluid pressure before or
    during the cutting step.

    24,     for process of subsequently handling the produce by fluid
    application.

    53,     for process of cutting by the direct application of fluid pressure
    to the work.

    169,    for corresponding apparatus.

    402,    for apparatus to move work by fluid current.


CLS 83/23
TXT Process under subclass 13 which includes a step of manipulating a product
    resulting from the severing step.

    (1)     Note.  Moving cut work between claimed cutting steps has been
    considered work-feeding rather than subsequent handling of a product; and
    patents thereto have been placed below on the basis of other steps.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39+,    for a method including the feeding of work from one tool station to
    another; and see the Notes thereto.

    78+,    for corresponding apparatus.


CLS 83/24
TXT Process under subclass 23 in which the manipulation of the product is
    effected by contacting the product with a gas or liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98+,    for corresponding apparatus.

    402,    for apparatus to move work by fluid current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, may include a nominal
    recitation of a supply or take-up coil (e.g., less than a support for such
    a coil or a cooperative relationship between a tension or exhaust detector*
    and reel driving or reel stopping means, etc.), subclass 7 for a process of
    or subclasses 97.1+ for apparatus using fluid current to advance the
    material.


CLS 83/25
TXT Process under subclass 23 which includes a step of holding or replacing the
    product in the workpiece from which it was separated.

    (1)     Note.  The retention or reinsertion is usually for the purpose of
    conveying the product away from the cutting station by means of the
    workpiece.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass has been designated a collecting place for
    disclosures of methods of, and means for, retaining a product in position
    in a workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for apparatus for removing a reinserted product from cut work.

    108,    for apparatus for replacing a product in the workpiece from which
    it has been cut.


CLS 83/26
TXT Process under subclass 23 wherein the speed of product being delivered is
    increased with respect to that of the work being fed or with respect to the
    speed of an adjacent product piece.

    (1)     Note.  Such process usually accomplishes the purpose of conveying
    the product away from the following work, or out of the path of a tool, or
    moving one product with respect to another product while both are moving
    away from the cutting zone.


CLS 83/27
TXT Process under subclass 23 which includes a step of moving one of a
    plurality of products with respect to the other.

    (1)     Note.  The piece remaining in the cutting zone and unmoved after
    cutting has not been considered a product for purposes of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102+,   for corresponding apparatus.


CLS 83/28
TXT Process under subclass 23 in which the work has an adhesive on one surface,
    which surface is adhered to a work holder to which the product remains
    adhered subsequent to the cutting step, and which includes a step of
    manipulating the support with the product adhered thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, subclasses 23+, for means to move
    tacky work to a tool station.


CLS 83/29
TXT Process under subclass 13 which includes a step of assembling workpieces
    one upon another prior to the cutting step, and cutting the assembled
    workpieces.


CLS 83/30
TXT Process under subclass 13 which includes a step of shaping an opening in
    the work, as by a sharp, pointed tool, so that no substantial amount of
    material is removed from the work; i.e., there is only one product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    660,    for a pointed perforating tool.

    866+,   for a perforating device, or method, which does not produce, or
    result in, complete penetration of work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 596+ for
    metallic stock material having apertures; e.g., resulting from a puncturing
    operation.


CLS 83/31
TXT Process under subclass 13 which includes a step of positioning a wear
    preventing material between one tool of a tool pair and the work, and
    repositioning the material relative to both the tool and work between
    cutting steps.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    547+,   for corresponding apparatus.


CLS 83/32
TXT Process under subclass 13 which includes a step of severing a plurality of
    products from a workpiece, each of which products has an interfitting
    portion which lies within a recess of the other product, the product
    portions which define the cooperating interfitting portions constituting
    the parts of the whole of a common area of the workpiece, and at least part
    of the separation being effected along the lines of the interfitting
    portions.

    (1)     Note.  The mere longitudinal separation of a web of indefinite
    length into two or more ribbonlike products by means of an undulant cut, or
    the mere transverse separation of a product from a web of indefinite length
    by means of an undulant cut, is not considered sufficient to bring the
    patent within this subclass but will be found below in subclasses 48 and 56.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for process of transversely separating products from the leading
    edge of the work by means of an undulant cut, and see (1) Note above.

    56,     for process of separating the work longitudinally by means of an
    undulant line of cut, and see (1) Note above.


CLS 83/33
TXT Process under subclass 13 which includes the steps of effecting a cut upon
    the work and then utilizing that cut (as by engaging the edges thereof) or
    orient, locate, or feed the work with respect to a tool, for a subsequent
    cut.


CLS 83/34
TXT Process under subclass 13 which includes a step of shifting the tool
    intermediate successive cutting steps to rearrange or readjust the tool
    with respect to the work.

    (1)     Note.  The mere movement of the tool toward and from the work in
    its normal cutting cycle has not been considered reorienting.  The
    reorientation is superimposed upon the tool stroke, resulting in such
    additional movements as a change from the previously normal path of the
    tool during the tool feeding cycle, and inversion of the tool, or an
    indexing of the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35+,    for process which includes reorienting the work between cuts.

    215+,   for apparatus for imparting a plurality of motions to a tool during
    its cutting cycle.

    556+,   for tool positioning means synchronized with the cutting stroke.


CLS 83/35
TXT Process under subclass 13 which includes a step of shifting the work
    intermediate successive cutting steps to rearrange or readjust the work
    with respect to a tool or a cutting station.

    (1)     Note.  The mere advancement of the work into the cutting zone has
    been considered feeding rather than reorienting.  The reorientation is
    superimposed upon the work-feeding motion, resulting in such additional
    movements as:  a change in the path of an established direction of feed, an
    inversion of the work, or a turning end-for-end of the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for process which includes reorienting the tool between cuts.

    219+,   for apparatus for feeding the work in a plurality of directions.

    249,    for apparatus to facilitate a manual repositioning of the work
    between cuts.

    256,    for apparatus for changing the direction of work-feed between work
    stations.

    404+,   for means to move work from one tool station to another.


CLS 83/36
TXT Process under subclass 35 wherein the reorientation is effected with
    respect to the tool which has accomplished the earlier of the successive
    cutting steps.


CLS 83/37
TXT Process under subclass 13 which includes a step of cutting while the work
    is moving through a cutting zone, which step includes moving the tool, at
    the time of cutting, in the direction the work is moving.

    (1)     Note.  A method of slitting the work longitudinally of the
    direction of work movement by means of a rotatable disc tool has been
    excluded.  Patents thereto will be found in subclass 56 below; whereas
    patents for slitting apparatus will be found in subclasses 426+.

    (2)     Note.  Apparatus used to practice this process is usually called a
    flying cutter, patents to which will be found in subclasses 284+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42+,    for process of sequentially separating products from the leading
    edge of the work.

    56,     and see (1) Note above.

    284+,   for corresponding apparatus.

    426+,   and see (1) Note above.


CLS 83/38
TXT Process under subclass 37 which includes a step of changing either the
    speed of the tool during a portion of its cyclic travel, (i.e., toward,
    from, or concurrent with, the moving work) or the speed of the work as it
    traverses the cutting zone.

    (1)     Note.  Oscillating and reciprocating tools of necessity have a
    period of nonuniform rate of travel due to the reversals of direction.
    Since such tools inherently operate in this manner, patents for methods of
    operating them have not been included in this subclass and will be found in
    other subclasses indented under subclass 13.  However, all patents for
    methods of operating unidirectionally moving rotary tools which start their
    cycle of movement from a position of rest have been placed here because of
    the difficulty distinguishing between rotary tools which stop and those
    which merely slow down.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238+,   for means to feed work unequally in recurring series.

    313,    for a flying cutter with means for cyclically varying the work-feed
    speed.

    324,    for a flying cutter with means for cyclically varying the tool
    speed of an orbitally moving tool.

    617,    for a tool having means to vary the force or speed of the tool
    stroke.


CLS 83/39
TXT Process under subclass 13 which includes more than one cutting step as
    defined in (1) Note to subclass 13.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for process of reorienting a tool between cutting steps.

    35+,    for process of reorienting the work between cutting steps.

    213+,   for plural tools successively actuated at the same cutting station.

    255+,   for plural tool stations of a subclass 202 type.

    404+,   for means to move work between plural tool stations.


CLS 83/40
TXT Process under subclass 39 which includes a step of blanking, as defined in
    (1) Note to subclass 55, below; and further includes a step of making some
    other kind of cut.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for process of making a progressive cut by a series of blanking
    operations.

    50,     for process of repetitive blanking.


CLS 83/41
TXT Process under subclass 40 in which a series of blanking steps is
    accompanied by a cutting step which connects the blanked out areas.


CLS 83/42
TXT Process under subclass 39 which includes the steps of feeding the work to
    and through a cutting station and making serial cuts each of which
    separates a product(s) from the advancing edge of the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37+,    for a process of repetitive transverse severing from the leading
    edge of the work while the work is moving through the cutting station.

    202+,   for an apparatus for cutting the work during a dwell in the
    work-feed.

    284+,   for a flying cutter which may sever work transversely.

    350+,   for a cutter  synchronized with  moving work, which may sever work
     transversely.


CLS 83/43
TXT Process under subclass 42 in which a product is separated from a portion
    only of the transverse extent of such advancing edge of the work, and the
    remaining portion of the transverse extent is subsequently severed in the
    formation of one or more separate products.


CLS 83/44
TXT Process under subclass 42 which includes a step of cutting the work along a
    line generally parallel to the direction of work-feed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    408,    for apparatus to accomplish the same purpose.


CLS 83/45
TXT Process under subclass 44 in which the longitudinal severing is
    accomplished by a series of cutting steps.


CLS 83/46
TXT Process under subclass 44 in which the longitudinal severing is along a
    side-to-side or wavy line of separation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for process of cutting transversely of the work combined with
    longitudinal severing along a zigzag or wavy line where the cuts make
    interdigitating products.

    45,     for the combination of transverse and longitudinal severing in
    which a zigzag or wavy line of longitudinal separation is effected by
    plural cuts.

    48,     for process of nonrectilinear transverse cutting to sever a product
    from the leading edge of the work.

    56,     for process of making a zigzag or wavy line of separation.

    333,    for a rotatable tool having an undulant cutting edge.


CLS 83/47
TXT Process under subclass 44 wherein the step of longitudinal cutting is made
    before that of transverse cutting in the severance of each product piece
    from the advancing edge of the work.


CLS 83/48
TXT Process under subclass 42 wherein the line of cutting produced by the
    serial cuts does not define a straight line path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for process of cutting interdigitating products.

    46,     for process of making a nonrectilinear longitudinal cut and a
    transverse cut.

    56,     for process of making a continuing line of cut which may be
    undulant.

    410+,   for a work carrier guided in a nonrectilinear path, thus effecting
    a nonrectilinear cut.


CLS 83/49
TXT Process under subclass 39 which includes making a continuing line of cut by
    a series of cutting steps.

    (1)     Note.  The successive cuts may be effected by a single tool or by a
    plurality of tools mounted on a single carrier.

    (2)     Note.  A cutting step is defined in (1) Note to subclass 13.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     for process of effecting a progressive cut in increments during a
    single cutting step.

    56,     for process of making a continuing line of cut by a single step.

    332,    for apparatus including a segmented disc slitting or slotting tool
    effecting a progressive cut on moving work.


CLS 83/50
TXT Process under subclass 39 which includes a plurality of blanking steps as
    defined in (1) Note to the definition of subclass 55.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for process of cutting interdigitating products by repetitive
    blanking steps.

    34,     for process of repetitive blanking wherein the tool is reoriented
    between cuts.

    35+,    for process of repetitive blanking wherein the work is reoriented
    between cuts.

    40+,    for process of blanking and cutting.

    41,     for process of blanking out a plurality of holes in a workpiece and
    cutting to join the holes.

    45,     for process of progressive slotting which comprises a series of
    blanking operations.


CLS 83/51
TXT Process under subclass 13 in which plural cutting tools penetrate work
    disposed between them and meet in cutting engagement interiorly of the work.

    (1)     Note.  Included are patents for process of "nipping".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    566+,   600, and 623, for structure wherein each of two tools of a tool
    pair moves toward the other


CLS 83/52
TXT Process under subclass 13 which includes a step of making in a single
    cutting step, either (1) two or more cuts differing in kind (e.g., cut,
    slit, punch) or (2) similar cuts effected serially and overlapping in time.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note to subclass 13 for the definition of a cutting
    step.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40+,    for process of blanking and cutting in two or more steps.

    49,     for process of making a single continuous cut progressively through
    the work by a plurality of cutting steps.

    56,     for process of making a continuous cut by a single cutting step.

    513+,   for plural tools with individually actuated tool supports, and
    particularly subclass 519 for successively acting tools, and subclass 518
    for diverse tools.

    554+,   for means driving a tool through plural steps in cutting strokes.

    688,    for a punch having spaced, successively operating, portions.


CLS 83/53
TXT Process under subclass 13 which includes the step of cutting solely by
    contacting the work with a pressure medium which conforms to the
    configuration of a passive supporting tool, on or against which the work is
    supported.

    (1)     Note.  The pressure medium may be liquid, gaseous or of a readily
    yieldable material such as rubber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177,    for corresponding apparatus.

    431,    for means (which may be fluent means)  to force work upon tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 28+ for a process of severing by abrading.


CLS 83/54
TXT Process under subclass 13 which includes a step of severing a cup, tube or
    the like.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    178+,   for cutting apparatus which includes a tool within hollow work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    82,     Turning, subclass 47 for process of cutting hollow work while
    effecting relative rotary movement about an axis passing through the work,
    and subclass 82 for corresponding apparatus.


CLS 83/55
TXT Process under subclass 13 which includes a step of blanking.

    (1)     Note.  Blanking is defined as separating a product from within the
    confines of the work so that not more than one of the edges of the product
    is an edge of the workpiece, or so that less than 1/2 of the circumference
    of a curved product is a part of the circumference of initially curved
    work. Mere serration does not in itself comprise more than "one edge" of
    the workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40+,    for the combination of blanking and cutting steps.

    49,     for process of progressive slotting which comprises a series of
    blanking operations.

    50,     for process of repetitive blanking.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 577+ for
    metallic blanks not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 83/56
TXT Process under subclass 13 which includes a step of making a continuous cut
    which extends through the work thickness wise and which proceeds in a
    direction toward or from one edge of the work, which may be a leading or
    trailing edge.

    (1)     Note.  Included are processes of "drawcutting" and "slitting".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44+,    for process of progressively cutting longitudinally of the work
    combined with transverse severing from the leading edge of the work.

    49,     for process of making a progressive cut by a plurality of cutting
    steps.

    52,     for process of progressive cutting effected in increments during a
    single cutting step.

    341+,   for progressive transverse "flying" cutter.

    425+,   for means to move work past a
    fixed-type slitting cutter.

    483+,   for means to carry a rotatable
    disc-type tool across work.

    611,    for a progressively cutting oscillating cutter.

    614     and 636, for a progressively cutting reciprocating cutter.

    642+,   for "draw-cut" mechanism.

    689,    for a progressively cutting punch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, subclass 3 for process of breaking
    or tearing longitudinally of the direction of work-feed.


CLS 83/57
TXT Device under the class definition which comprises means, actuatable by
    force applied by and at the will of an operative, to override the normal
    cyclic functioning of a part(s) of the device, which part(s) returns to
    normal functioning when the application of the intervening force ceases.

    (1)     Note.  The disturbance referred to is temporary and exists only
    during the application of force by an operative. (Example:  A machine, set
    to cut products of a given size, is controlled by a pushbutton to cut small
    pieces for sampling purposes).

    (2)     Note.  The disturbance herein contemplated does not embrace
    stopping. For disclosures, of noncyclic stopping means, see subclasses 58+;
    and, for cyclic stopping means, see other appropriate subclasses whose
    titles include the work "stopping" or equivalent term (e.g., subclasses
    202+).

    (3)     Note.  Adjustment of a device establishes a new condition which
    persists indefinitely, and is thus distinguishable from a "disturbance"
    which permits the disturbed part to return to the previous condition upon
    withdrawal of the intervening force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for manually caused stopping of a machine or a part thereof.

    232+,   for tool actuating means adapted to be struck by a mechanical part,
    which means might be urged manually to cause tool operation at will.

    252,    for supplemental manual work-feed means.


CLS 83/58
TXT Device under the class definition provided with means capable of bringing
    any or all of the moving parts of the device to a halt, such means acting
    to accomplish its halting effect in response to a signal or impulse which
    cannot be predicted to occur during any particular one of a number of
    recurring cycles of operation (either of the machine as a whole, of the
    tool, or of any part of the machine which has a cyclic law of operation).

    (1)     Note.  Such means may comprise, for example, a device effective to
    disrupt the flow of power to a part or all of the machine, as by effecting
    the disconnection of the parts of a clutch.

    (2)     Note.  It is not a bar to original placement of a patent in this
    subclass, that the claimed power train disrupting, braking or other
    "stopping" means may be activated at a time when the part to be halted is,
    purely adventitiously, at a standstill due to its normal cyclic operation.

    (3)     Note.  If, however, the normal and intended operation of power
    disrupting, friction gripping, or other motion preventing means, is to
    forestall the impending start of movement or activation of a part of the
    device, then the motion preventing means is regarded as an interlock and
    its claimed combination with an instrumentality of a cutting machine is
    found in subclasses 399+, below.

    (4)     Note.  If the normal and intended operation of power disrupting
    means is to forestall or prevent future movement of a tool or tool support
    by disrupting its power-transmitting connection to an uninterruptedly
    moving tool-actuating mechanism, the claimed combination of
    thepower-disrupting means with the tool support and tool actuating
    mechanism is found in subclasses 572+, indented under subclass 571 in this
    schedule.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for manually caused disturbance (i.e., temporary change) of cyclic
    operation.

    69,     for stopping means effective on completion of a predetermined
    number of cutting cycles.

    70,     for delayed stopping after cessation of cyclic operation.

    571+,   for devices which disables a tool without bringing to a halt any
    moving part other than the tool or its support; see (4) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 1+, for a stopping feature in a
    metal-deforming machine.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, appropriate subclasses, for
    stopping means in general; and subclass 134 for a device applicable to a
    punch press which is peculiarly designed to stop machine operation in
    response to detection of the unauthorized presence of a part of an
    operative's body.

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), subclasses 30+ for a selective
    cutting device provided with randomly actuated stopping means.


CLS 83/59
TXT Device under subclass 58 provided with means which may be actuated manually
    to thereby cause at least a portion of the device to go through its normal
    cyclic motions after the stopping has been effectuated.


CLS 83/60
TXT Device under subclass 58 provided with means whereby the signal or impulse
    also brings into action means to bring the work into cutting engagement
    with another cutter or to cause such other cutter to engage and cut the
    work.


CLS 83/61
TXT Device under subclass 58 wherein the signal or impulse is generated by a
    detector* for either (1) a product of the cutting operation, or (2) means
    to accomplish direct, or otherwise affect movement of such product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73,     for means to otherwise control a machine by monitoring a product.

    78+,    for a product handling feature in a cutting machine environment.

    358+,   for the control of an operation by means responsive to product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses for different
    types of conveyors or systems of plural conveyors having operation control
    means responsive to a condition of a conveyor or to a condition of the
    conveyed load.


CLS 83/62
TXT Device under subclass 58 in which the signal or impulse is generated by a
    detector* which directly or indirectly senses a condition or location of
    the tool or of the work-moving means.

    (1)     Note.  The direct contact of the detector with the tool or
    work-moving means may be that which occurs in the normal, uninterrupted
    operation of the device, in which case the signal for stopping is generated
    by failure of the detector to make such direct contact.


CLS 83/62.1
TXT Device under subclass 62 in which the detector* senses a condition or a
    location of the tool*.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are broken tool alarms and safety
    devices.


CLS 83/63
TXT Device under subclass 58 in which the signal or impulse is generated by a
    detector* for the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     for product handling means initiated by means responsive to work.

    209+,   211+, 286+, for operation controlled by means responsive to work in
    cyclically operated cutting machines.

    360+,   for operation controlled by means responsive to work, in cutting
    machines in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclass 43 for
    material responsive control means for stopping the operation of feeding
    means.


CLS 83/64
TXT Device under subclass 63 in which the detector contacts a portion of the
    work moving in a bent or arcuate path.


CLS 83/65
TXT Device under subclass 64 in which a portion of the work normally moves in a
    predetermined bent or arcuate path, or in any one of a number of possible
    bent or arcuate paths in a zone whose limits are defined by two such paths,
    and the signal is generated upon departure of the work from the
    predetermined path or zone.


CLS 83/66
TXT Device under subclass 63 in which the detector is under the influence of
    gravity or any other force which tends to keep it constantly in contact
    with the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64+,    for a device in which the detector is supported on or urged into
    contact with buckled work.

    360+,   for specific types of work responsive means; and see the Notes
    thereto.


CLS 83/67
TXT Device under subclass 66 in which the detector is elastically urged into
    contact with the work.


CLS 83/68
TXT Device under subclass 58 wherein the impulse or signal which brings about
    or initiates the stoppage is entirely a product of the will of an operative.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass excludes means for halting a machine part
    solely by the application of braking force, or the interposition of
    blocking means, in a yieldable drive train.  Examples of such excluded
    subject matter may be found in the patents of subclass 593.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for manually actuated device which disturbs cyclic operation,
    rather than starts of stop a cyclic cutting operation.

    571,    for disconnecting means between tool and tool actuator, as for
    changing a machine set-up, and subclasses 572+, indented thereunder, for
    means capable of connecting or disconnecting a tool, or tool and its
    support, to or from an actuating element while the latter is in motion
    (i.e., "gag" or "gag block"), and see (4) Note under subclass 58, above.


CLS 83/69
TXT Device under the class definition including means to bring one or more
    parts to a halt after a tool has carried out a fixed (but not necessarily
    unalterable) plurality of tool cycles*.

    (1)     Note.  Where the part stopped is a cutter, the tool cycle of
    reference is the cycle of such cutter itself, not that of another cutter
    operating on a different cycle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for a device which includes means for stopping upon completion of
    formation of a stack of products of predetermined size.

    203+,   for a cutting machine in which the operative relationship between
    the work-feed means and tool actuating means thereof is interrupted, once
    for every cutting cycle, by the stoppage of a part or parts, so that the
    intervention of human will is necessary to restore such interrelationship
    and bring about another cutting cycle.

    524+,   for unicyclic cutting machines (other than subclass-203 type).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), subclass 21 for means to stop a
    selective cutting machine after a given number of operations.


CLS 83/70
TXT Device under the class definition which includes means effective to bring a
    part or all of the device to a halt upon the lapse of a certain limited
    period of time subsequent to the termination of feeding and cutting
    operations.

    (1)     Note.  Examples are the tape
    "run-out" devices on message-handling tape punches.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), subclasses 59+ for a
    pattern-controlled selective cutting machine.


CLS 83/72
TXT Apparatus under the class definition, each of whose parts has a desired
    operating condition according to a law of operation; such apparatus being
    provided with a detector for sensing a deviation of a part(s) (or all of
    the apparatus) from its or their desired operating condition; and including
    means to modify - in response to a signal or impulse transmitted by said
    detector -

    (1)     the cyclical operation of such part(s) (or the entire apparatus) to
    correct the deviated operating condition; and/or,

    (2)     the normal cyclical operation of another part(s) to compensate for
    the deviated condition;  whereby, in either event, the maintenance of a
    normal cyclical desired operating condition of the apparatus as a whole is
    achieved.

    (1)     Note.  The sensing or detecting may be direct; i.e., by determining
    the operation of a component of the device (as, for example, in U.S. Patent
    No. 2,175,828, wherein a driven feed roller is coupled to a roller-speed
    detector); or may be indirect, i.e., by determining the result of the
    operation of a component of the device (as, for example, in U.S. Patent No.
    1,961,538, wherein work is moved by feed rollers, indicia on the work are
    scanned stroboscopically to detect any variations in work speed imparted by
    the feed rollers, and such speed variations are eliminated by correcting
    the feed roller speed).

    (2)     Note.  Merely stopping or starting a cyclic component of the device
    to effect the functioning thereof is not considered to be modifying the
    operation of a component.  However, a regulating means, which accomplishes
    such modification of a cyclic operation, may itself be started or stopped
    (to effect the cyclic operation), in response to the detection of a
    deviation in the desired condition.  (See, for example, U.S. Patent No.
    2,023,243, wherein the leading edge of the work initiates the actuation of
    a regulating means, which means compares the position and speed of the
    entering work relative to the angular position and speed of a flying cutter
    and modifies the angular position of the cutter to compensate for the
    entrance timing of the work).

    (3)     Note.  The imposition of a change upon a component by an operator
    (e.g., physical relocation of a component) is not considered a deviation
    within the meaning of the definition above.  Thus, patents claiming means
    for detectingoperator-imposed changes, and means to vary the operation of
    the device in response to detection of such changes, will be found in other
    subclasses; e.g., subclasses 399+, below.

    (4)     Note.  Detection of an irregularity in the work, which irregularity
    is not the result of a deviation in the desired operation, but is a part of
    the work, is not considered a deviation detection within the meaning of the
    definition above.  Thus, devices claiming means to detect such
    irregularities and means to vary the operation of a cutting device in
    response to the detecting means, will be found in other subclasses; e.g.,
    subclasses 360+, below.

    (5)     Note.  For Search Note relating to other Control Functions, see the
    Notes in subclass 399, below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 10+ for
    means to sense material and control the operation of material feeding means.


CLS 83/73
TXT Device under subclass 72 in which a deviation in the operating condition of
    the device is indicated indirectly by the means to detect or sense the
    product.


CLS 83/74
TXT Device under subclass 72 in which the means to vary the cyclic operation
    effects a revision in the operating condition of the component whose
    deviation is detected or sensed.


CLS 83/75
TXT Device under subclass 74 in which the means to vary the cyclic operation
    also effects a revision in the operating condition of a component different
    from the component whose deviation is detected or sensed.


CLS 83/75.5
TXT Optimizing product from unique workpiece:

    Device under subclass 74 including means to compare the work, the desired
    product and the stored data to better utilize that particular piece of work
    to produce more or better product.


CLS 83/76
TXT Device under subclass 72 in which the detecting means senses the speed or
    position of the work and in which the means to vary the cyclic operation
    effects a revision in the speed of a cutting tool in response to the
    detected speed or position of the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses for different
    types of conveyors or systems of plural conveyors having operation control
    means responsive to a condition of a conveyor or to a condition of the
    conveyed load.


CLS 83/76.1
TXT WITH CONTROL MEANS RESPONSIVE TO REPLACEABLE OR SELECTABLE INFORMATION
    PROGRAM:

    Device under the class definition provided with memory means, i.e., a
    member in which digital or analog data can be impressed for subsequent
    recall, and including means to detect the data on the memory means and
    accordingly regulate the operation of the device.

    (1)     Note.  The "memory" means of this subclass may comprise permanently
    installed structure of the device or it may comprise a removable tape or
    card.

    (2)     Note.  A templet, per se, is not considered to be a replaceable
    information supply; however, a device including a templet from which
    information is retrieved and stored in the device is included in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    399,    for a cutting machine with a portion thereof controlled by a remote
    member and see the Search Notes thereunder for a comprehensive listing of
    subclasses in this class including "control" features.

    565,    for a cutting machine of this class type including means to drive
    or guide the tool with a templet surface following tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 7 for analogous "pattern" sensing means
    which controls a metal deforming device.

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), subclasses 59+ for a pattern
    controlled selective cutting machine.


CLS 83/76.2
TXT For cutting component of animal; e.g., hair clipper:

    Device under subclass 76.1 particularly adapted to severing a portion of an
    animal, either living or dead.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a hair clipping (or wool shearing)
    machine on which an animal is placed, having a control means responsive to
    replaceable or selectable information program which guides the cutter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13+,    for the method of cutting hair, or for the method of shearing a
    sheep.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 196+ for randomly manipulated hair clippers,
    generally.


CLS 83/76.3
TXT Removable element carries program:

    Device under subclass 76.1 wherein the member on which the replaceable data
    is impressed is physically detachable from the device.


CLS 83/76.4
TXT Indeterminate length, web or strand:

    Device under subclass 76.3 wherein the removable member on which
    replaceable data is stored is generally elongated and wherein the device
    either engages no end of the removable member or engages only the leading
    or trailing end thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The replaceable member may be endless, or it may be wound on
    a spool.


CLS 83/76.5
TXT Magnetic:

    Device under subclass 76.4 wherein the magnetic characteristics of the
    removable member are utilized in storing data thereon.


CLS 83/76.6
TXT Arithmetically determined program:

    Device under subclass 76.1 wherein the memory means can be impressed for
    subsequent recall only by digital data.


CLS 83/76.7
TXT With condition sensor:

    Device under subclass 76.6 including means to detect a characteristic other
    than that of the "memory".

    (1)     Note.  The condition sensor of this subclass may respond to work,
    product, a component of the device, or to the environment.


CLS 83/76.8
TXT Responsive to work:

    Device under subclass 76.7 including means to detect the material to be cut
    before the cutting action takes place.


CLS 83/76.9
TXT With operator input means:

    Device under subclass 76.6 also having means to alter the operation thereof
    (without changing the program) at the control of the person operating the
    device.


CLS 83/77
TXT Device under the class definition having means to determine the weight of a
    piece or portion of the cut product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    177,    Weighing Scales, appropriate subclasses for the combination of a
    cutting machine and a weighing scale which received material cut or to be
    cut by the cutting machine, characterized by means for actuating, or
    modifying the operation of, the cutting machine in response to
    determination of the weight of material accumulated on the weighing scale;
    and subclasses 60+ for weigh chamber responsive material control.

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 504+ for a conveyor having load
    weighing means.


CLS 83/78
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means to move, guide, or
    otherwise affect the motion of, the product of a cutting operation - other
    than by the mere provision of a receptacle or support into or onto which
    product may descend at random (i.e., without necessarily assuming any
    regular arrangement).

    (1)     Note.  A cutting machine including such receptacle or support for
    receiving product in random arrangement constitutes subject matter of
    subclass 167, below.

    (2)     Note.  The handling given recognition by this and indented
    subclasses is additional to that which inherently is accomplished by the
    tool(s) in the cutting operation.  A tool, qua tool, is therefore not to be
    considered a product handling means.  But a specific element fixed to, or a
    portion integral with, a tool will be recognized as a product handling
    means if there is a clear teaching, in the disclosure of the device, that
    the element or portion performs a product handling function.

    (3)     Note.  Inasmuch as many work moving means of the cutting arts also
    function to carry away the product of the cutting operation, a patent whose
    only claimed means capable of product handling is a device for moving,
    guiding, supporting, or stopping motion of, work will not be placed
    originally in this subclass unless such work handling device is claimed in
    terms of its specific product handling function. (Of course, a patent
    claiming work handling means in combination with additional means to give
    the work handling means a product handling effect - such as means to tilt a
    work table to effect product sliding - will be placed originally in this or
    an indented subclass).

    (4)     Note.  For the purpose of original placement in this
    classification, a means to handle the product of one of a claimed series of
    tool stations, while proceeding from such one station to a succeeding
    station, will be considered a work handling means for the succeeding
    station rather than a product handling means for the earlier station.
    (Disclosures of such means may be placed as cross-reference copies in this
    or indented subclasses, where deemed pertinent).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23+,    for method of cutting and subsequently handling the product.

    77,     for a device under the class definition combined with means to
    weigh the cut product.

    167,    for a device under the class definition combined with a receptacle
    or support for the cut product; and see (1) Note, above.

    404+,   for a device including means to move work between successive tool
    stations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclass 339.1 for a conveyor arranged to
    facilitate working on the conveyed load at a work station, and subclasses
    373+ for a conveyor having means for changing the attitude of the conveyed
    load relative to the conveying direction.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 19, 21, 48, and
    particularly subclasses 522+ and 911 for cutting a product which is
    subsequently wound classified along this line:  Patents which claim a
    device for cutting material and for winding are placed in Class 242 whereas
    patents which claim a device for cutting material supplied from a wound
    source, or in which disclosed structure for winding a cut product is not
    significantly claimed are placed in Class 83 or related Class 225 (Severing
    by Tearing or Breaking).

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclasses 278+ for a device for
    removing individual sheets to some determined position (where no means to
    treat the sheet is claimed specifically).

    414,    Material or Article Handling, appropriate subclasses, for an
    instrument or mechanism for placing or displacing articles in a particular
    manner, as in stacks or piles; also for a carrier or forwarding mechanism
    of general type combined with special means for placing the load on the
    carrier or removing it therefrom (where no means to treat the material is
    claimed specifically).


CLS 83/79
TXT Device under subclass 78 including a detector* for sensing product or work,
    a transmitter*, and means to effect or initiate product handling or
    delivery as a direct or indirect result of the receipt by said means of a
    detected and transmitted signal or impulse.

    (1)     Note.  As between Classes 83 and 209, patents claiming significant
    assorting of the work for, or the product of, a disclosed cutting device
    will be placed as an original copy in Class 209 unless the cutting device
    also is claimed significantly, in which latter case the original copy will
    be placed in this class (class 83).

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass are patents disclosing the sensing
    of product and the initiation of product handling responsive thereto,
    whereas subclass 80 (indented hereunder) is the repository for patents
    disclosing product handling responsive to work sensing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    360+,   for means to initiate an operation, other than product handling,
    controlled by product sensing orwork-sensing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses for different
    types of conveyors or systems of plural conveyors having operation control
    means responsive to a condition of a conveyor or to a condition of the
    conveyed load.


CLS 83/80
TXT Device under subclass 79 in which the detector senses work.


CLS 83/81
TXT Device under subclass 78 including a detector* for sensing the presence of
    a moving tool, or of an element partaking of all tool motions, at a
    predetermined point in the path of motion of said tool or element; and
    including a transmitter* and means to effect or initiate product handling
    or delivery as a direct or indirect result of the receipt by said means of
    a detected and transmitted signal or impulse.


CLS 83/82
TXT Device under subclass 81 in which the detector acts to sense the retraction
    of the tool from the work.


CLS 83/83
TXT Device under subclass 78 which comprises, as part at least of the product
    handling means, or is additionally provided with, means adapted to receive
    and support the cut product with the ends of the product depending
    downwardly on opposite sides of the support means.


CLS 83/84
TXT Device under subclass 78 which includes structure for placing or retaining
    product pieces in some regular order relative to, and in contact with, one
    another.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this group of subclasses are patents which
    disclose that elongated product pieces are arranged in substantial
    parallelism or that flat product pieces are arranged sequentially in
    face-to-face contact.

    (2)     Note.  As indicated by the subclass definition, a patent claiming a
    receptacle or support which is disclosed as serving to receive and retain
    the product pieces in an orderly arrangement will be included in this group
    of subclasses.  However, where there is no teaching that the product pieces
    are placed or held in the receptacle or on the support in some regular
    order the patent will be placed in subclass 167, below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 6+ for a device adapted to
    arrange articles in special relation to each other in a pile or stack.


CLS 83/85
TXT Device under subclass 84 which has means to place together, or retain, a
    plurality of similar nonplanar cut pieces in sequential interfitting order,
    with at least a portion of one piece located within, and in contact with, a
    mating hollow portion of the next adjacent piece.


CLS 83/86
TXT Device under subclass 84 which has means to place together, or to receive
    and retain, a multiplicity of substantially planar-faced cut pieces in
    sequential face-contacting relation, supported one on another or edgewise
    on a common base.

    (1)     Note.  A stack or pack is formed by superposition or juxtaposition
    of the pieces thicknesswise.  Herein, and in the indented subclasses, the
    term "stack" will be used to designate the concepts generally included in
    both the terms "stack" and "pack".

    (2)     Note.  Such stack need not be static but may be in motion, such as
    one which is continually diminished at one end and replenished at the other
    end.

    (3)     Note.  A patent disclosing a device which includes a mere
    product-conforming cavity in a hollow tool or in the tool and its support,
    though it inherently holds the pieces in stack formation, is not included
    in this group of subclasses (86+) but is placed on the basis of other
    features. However, a stack holding means which communicates with such tool
    or its support, or which is incorporated as an added element within the
    tool or its support, its proper subject matter for this group.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164,    for a hollow tool having a product diverting conduit within it or
    extending therefrom which does not include a stack holding means within the
    definition of subclass 86.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclasses 207+ for a sheet delivery
    device having means for receiving and retaining the sheets in stacked or
    packed relation.


CLS 83/87
TXT Device under subclass 86 including means to support product pieces,
    individually or in stacks, in spaced relationship in substantially parallel
    planes so that an edge of one such piece or stack is above the adjacent
    edge of the next or adjacent piece or stack, and including stacking means
    which moves along the support means for engaging the pieces or stacks
    sequentially and moving them into superposed stacked relation with each
    other.


CLS 83/88
TXT Device under subclass 86 including means to arrange a series of cut pieces
    on aproduct-moving support so that each piece of the series rests partly in
    contact with the support and partly on an adjacent piece.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are patents disclosing apparatus
    as above defined and further including means to place additional cut pieces
    on the overlapped series.


CLS 83/89
TXT Device under subclass 86 including means to move one or more product pieces
    from a stack, or to cause product pieces to proceed, or be directed to, a
    stack, and other product pieces to proceed or be guided in another
    direction (as, for instance, but not necessarily, to another stack).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102+,   for a device under the class definition which includes means to
    divert one portion of product from another, but without means to stack the
    product pieces.


CLS 83/90
TXT Device under subclass 86 which is effective in itself to move, or is
    provided with additional means for moving, a formed stack of product pieces
    as a unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89,     for a device including means to move a portion of a stack of
    product pieces from the stack.


CLS 83/91
TXT Device under subclass 90 in which the bodily movement of the stack is
    accomplished by moving the support on which the pieces are received to form
    the stack.


CLS 83/92
TXT Device under subclass 91 in which means is provided to move the support
    progressively broadside away from the source of product pieces as product
    pieces are added to the stack.

    (1)     Note.  A typical device of this kind operates to keep the product
    receiving end of the stack at all times in the same position with respect
    to the source of pieces for the stack.


CLS 83/92.1
TXT Device under subclass 92 including means to vary the progressive broadside
    movement of the product, which means is operatively linked to the mechanism
    which adjusts the extent that a work-feeding device moves between each
    cutting cycle.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are devices having means to vary
    the thickness of product pieces being cut, which means effects the
    adjustment of the movement of the product holder to compensate for such
    variance in thickness.


CLS 83/93
TXT Device under subclass 86 which includes means to oppose broadside movement
    of the stick away from the source of product pieces as product pieces are
    added to the stack.

    (1)     Note.  Devices including a receptacle telescoped over a stack
    holder or guide in which the receptacle is moved by the growing stack are
    typical of the art of this subclass.


CLS 83/94
TXT Device under subclass 86 including means to move or guide cut product
    pieces singly to a means for supporting a plurality of the pieces in
    stacked relation.


CLS 83/95
TXT Device under subclass 94 in which the stack holder is provided with a
    rod-like projection which is introduced into an aperture in each product
    piece so as to hold the pieces in stacked relation, the aperture being
    either preformed or formed by the projection upon placement of the piece
    thereon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    402,    Binder Device Releasably Engaging Aperture or Notch of Sheet,
    subclass 1, for a sheet binder device of that class which includes in
    combination, an impaling type sheet retainer and a discrete sheet aperture
    forming device, which device perforates a sheet prior to placing the same
    on the retainer; subclass 7 for such device including an impaling type
    sheet retainer which penetrates and inserts a pliant strand through a sheet
    surface, and subclass 25, for a sheet binder device including an impaling
    type sheet retainer including means to force a sheet upon the sheet
    retainer.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 1+ for a device having a
    projection engaged in the apertures of a series of articles for holding the
    articles in stacked relation.


CLS 83/96
TXT Device under subclass 94 which functions to engage a piece of cut work on
    its surface of greatest area and move it in a direction perpendicular to
    that surface into face-contacting relation with a previously cut piece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97+,    for means to hold a stack of product pieces which may be discharged
    broadside from within a hollow cutter but not by means to deliver
    individual pieces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclass 83 for oscillatory fly means
    to deliver a sheet to a stack.


CLS 83/97
TXT Device under subclass 86 in which the stack is formed by means which
    receives pieces, formed by a tool having a cavity or aperture and a
    continuous cutting edge bounding the open end of said cavity or aperture,
    after the pieces have left the confines of the tool.

    (1)     Note.  The stack former may be claimed in some general term such as
    "a chute"; but if, as disclosed, it actually forms a stack, a patent
    therefor is placed here regardless of the breadth commonly assigned to the
    name applied to such stack former.

    (2)     Note.  For the distinction between this subclass and subclass 164,
    below, see (3) Note under the definition of subclass 86 above.


CLS 83/98
TXT Device under subclass 78 which effects movement of product directly by
    means of one or more jets or streams of liquid or gaseous material.

    (1)     Note.  The pressure of the fluid current may be superatmospheric or
    subatmospheric.

    (2)     Note.  Fluid pressure means (blast or vacuum) which function merely
    to push or pull product into contact with a mechanical product-moving or
    product-braking means do not constitute subject matter for this subclass.
    Original patents claiming such fluid blast devices will be placed in the
    subclass based on the nature either of the mechanical product-moving means
    or the mechanical product-braking  means.

    (3)     Note.  The Notes under the definition of subclass 402, below,
    include a comprehensive listing of subclasses in this class and in other
    classes which deal with material handling by fluid current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    for a product-moving means with suction means for pressing product
    to the moving means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 428, 438, and 493 for a
    power-driven conveyor combined with means for impinging fluid on the
    conveyed load.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 97.1+ for
    means to advance material by fluid current.


CLS 83/99
TXT Device under subclass 98 comprising a number of fluid jets each of which
    impinges upon a separate, independent, unitary part of the product
    resulting from the completion of one cutting cycle.


CLS 83/100
TXT Device under subclass 98 including means to produce a zone of
    subatmospheric pressure so related spatially to the cutting zone or product
    path that the product will move under the influence of atmospheric pressure
    toward or through said zone of subatmospheric pressure.

    (1)     Note.  See (2) Note and the search subclass note under the
    definition of subclass 98 above.


CLS 83/101
TXT Device under subclass 78 in which movement of the product is effected by
    frictional engagement with bristles mounted on a backing having relative
    motion with respect to the product.


CLS 83/102
TXT Device under subclass 78 including means for accomplishing one of the
    following functions:

    (a)     causing contiguous (either touching or adjacent) products which
    have been traveling along parallel paths to now travel in diverging
    directions; or preventing their paths from merging or overlapping;

    (b)     causing, or permitting, product pieces which have been proceeding
    seriatim along a common path to now follow respective discrete and
    individual paths;

    (c)     causing, or permitting, one or more product pieces to follow a path
    away from the zone of separation while restraining one or more pieces from
    proceeding away from the zone of separation (i.e., holding one piece back
    while another moves away);

    (d)     dividing a moving group of products into smaller groups (or units)
    traveling in the same direction of general path as that before division; or

    (e)     positively moving products from the zone of separation in different
    directions.

    (1)     Note.  Such separation must be additional to that inherently
    accomplished by the tool(s) in the act of cutting.

    (2)     Note.  The removal (or facilitation of removal) of one product
    portion from the as-cut position, while leaving the portion from which it
    has been cut in the cutting zone to serve as work for a succeeding cut by
    the same tool, is not considered to be separation.

    (3)     Note.  The separation signalized by this subclass is distinct from
    that brought about by means for moving a product from contacting engagement
    with a tool (such as stripping or ejecting means).  So, the movement of
    product out of contact with a tool, even though it may involve a motion
    away from another product portion, is not considered a separation for the
    purpose of patent placement in this and indented subclasses.

    (4)     Note.  On the other hand, a product portion which has been
    subjected to the action of a stripper- or ejector-type means (as defined in
    subclass 111) is not considered (for the purpose of this classification) to
    be closely adjacent to other product portions from which the stripper or
    ejector has moved it apart, so that a further movement of the portions in
    different directions will not be deemed to be a separation. (A positive
    teaching that a stripper or ejector places a product portion in actual
    contact with another portion, however, will not be ignored).  For patents
    claiming means to strip or eject a product portion and thereafter convey it
    away, see subclass 112.

    (5)     Note.  The combination with cutting, of separation accomplished in
    response to a sensing of a physical characteristic of the pieces to be
    separated (such as quality separation), is provided for in subclass 79.

    (6)     Note.  Merely allowing pieces to fall freely from a common height
    or place of departure is not considered to permit them to travel in
    substantially different directions.  But diverting guides which cause
    certain of the so dropped pieces to travel in one path and others to follow
    a different path constitute separating means.

    (7)     Note.  Since this subclass is specific to that of produce, (i.e.,
    cut work) handling, which requires the operation of motion-affecting means
    additional to the work-feeding means, at least one of the separated product
    portions must be directed to its destination by means other than the work
    moving means.

    (8)     Note.  Although separation inherent in a cutting operation (e.g.,
    the removal of certain product pieces through a hollow cutter) is not
    sufficient to place here a patent disclosing such, a patent directed to
    product separating means carried by a cutter is proper for this and
    indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for a method of cutting including a step of product separation.

    79+,    for means to separate product portions responsive to detection of a
    product characteristic; and see (5) Note above.

    89,     for a cutter combined with means to divide a stack of pieces
    resulting from the cutting operation.

    98+,    for product separating means employing a fluid current.

    101,    for product separating means including a product-engaging brush.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 348+ for a system of plural
    conveyors having selectable plural sources or destinations for the conveyed
    load, subclasses 418+ for a system of plural conveyors having means for
    establishing and moving a group of items, and subclasses 434+ for a system
    of plural conveyors having means for arranging or rearranging a stream, or
    streams, of items.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses, for a product separating means, per se; and see (1) Note to
    subclass 79 above.


CLS 83/102.1
TXT Device under subclass 102 in which a kerf* entering means engages the
    contiguous sides of the work to prevent their paths from merging or
    overlapping.


CLS 83/103
TXT Device under subclass 102 wherein means are provided to dislodge a severed
    product from the surrounding material from which it has been cut but with
    which it is still in contact; or to dislodge from such material a severed
    product which has been cut, removed, and reinserted into its original
    position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for means to reinsert product in base material after severance
    therefrom.


CLS 83/104
TXT Device under subclass 102 in which means are provided to permit the earth's
    gravitational field to act selectively on a plurality of product portions;
    with the result that one portion or piece will move along a path have a
    downward component, under the gravitational impetus, while another portion
    or piece will move along some other path or will be restrained from moving
    away from the zone of separation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157,    for means for tilting or withdrawing a product support so that the
    product is left without support against gravity, such means not having a
    product separating function.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 311, 359+, and 523+ for
    apower-driven conveyor combined with a gravity conveyor.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses, for a gravity type separator, per se.


CLS 83/105
TXT Device under subclass 102 provided with passive means for guiding a product
    into a path diverging from that followed by another product.

    (1)     Note.  The deflecting guide of this subclass is effective to direct
    a moving product portion into a desired path, not to hold it from further
    movement.  Stationary means (catchers) which prevent a product portion from
    moving, while another portion continues in motion, will be found in
    subclass 102 and in subclass 104 indented thereunder.

    (2)     Note.  The divergence effected by a guide of this type may be
    either simultaneous with the passage of another product portion through the
    zone of separation or may be temporarily spaced therefrom.  That is, the
    guide may operate on one or more product portions traveling along parallel
    paths or moving seriatim along the same path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for means to hold back one product portion positively while another
    portion proceeds to travel past the area of such holding back, and indented
    subclass 104 for such means wherein the product portion not held back
    escapes from the zone of separation under the impetus of gravity; and see
    (1) Note, above.

    373,    for a work guide whose positioning movement is synchronized with
    tool actuation.

    438+,   for a guide for directing the travel of moving work, rather than
    product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 351+, 367, 442, 525+, 599, and
    633+ for passive means for guiding a load from one conveying path to
    another conveying path diverging therefrom.


CLS 83/106
TXT Device under subclass 105, provided with passive means for guiding a
    product portion into any one of a number of different paths, which means
    may be reoriented (either at will or cyclically) with respect to oncoming
    product so as to effect such selective guidance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for a gravity type product separator, including a tiltable or with
    drawable product support which functions to separate product portions.

    157,    for a product deflecting means in the form of a tiltable or with
    drawable support for the product, which means does not have a separating
    function.


CLS 83/107
TXT Device under subclass 102 which includes plural dynamic product moving
    means which function to effect separation by directly and positively moving
    one product from the zone of separation in a direction or path different
    from that in which another product is directly and positively moved.

    (1)     Note.  One of the product moving means may be a work moving means,
    which may be claimed as such.

    (2)     Note.  Means which move a product portion out of contact with a
    tool (e.g., stripper or ejector) are not considered product moving means
    for the purpose of this subclass, in accordance with (3) Note to subclass
    102.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 370.07 through 370.09, 370.1,
    370.11 through 370.13, 426+, 432, 433, 434+, 597+, and 601 for power-driven
    conveyor means for moving a load from one conveying path to another
    conveying path diverging therefrom.


CLS 83/108
TXT Device under subclass 78 wherein means is provided to re-engage the product
    piece with the surrounding material, from which it was severed, by
    inserting the piece into the aperture formed when the piece was produced.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for a corresponding method.

    103,    for means to remove such reinserted piece from the base material.


CLS 83/109
TXT Device under subclass 78 having active means to propel the product or
    passive means in the form of a guide* to define, limit or change (without
    terminating) the path of moving product; or means which allows or
    facilitates motion of unsupported product; or means, other than the cutter
    or work-feed means, to cause relative motion between the product and a
    member of the cutting pair.

    (1)     Note.  A mere support for product is not a guide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     for a brake or abutment stop for product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses for a power-driven
    conveyor or for such a conveyor combined with a gravity conveyor.


CLS 83/110
TXT Device under subclass 109 including means to move the product away from the
    cutting zone at a speed which is greater or less than the speed of the work
    as it moves toward the cutting zone.

    (1)     Note.  For a device which includes a brake or abutment for stopping
    the product completely, see subclass 78, above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78+,    and see (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 460.1+  and 579 for a conveyor
    feeding the conveyed load to another conveyor having a greater conveying
    speed.


CLS 83/111
TXT Device under subclass 109, provided with means for causing or assuring
    relative motion between a product piece or portion and a cutter which has
    produced for penetrated it so as to remove from contact with such cutter a
    product piece or portion which tends to cling thereto.

    (1)     Note.  A device of this type may be termed a "stripper" or
    "ejector".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 257, 328, 344+, and 427 for a
    press-type metal deforming device including a means to eject or strip a
    product from a forming die.


CLS 83/112
TXT Device under subclass 111 in which the means for removing the product from
    the cutter delivers the product to means for thereafter transporting such
    product away from the first product moving means, or to means for
    supporting the cut product as it continues to move under the influence of
    gravity.


CLS 83/113
TXT Device under subclass 111 which cooperates with a tool having a cutting
    edge located on the outer or arcuate periphery of a circular disc or
    cylinder turning unidirectionally about an internal axis.


CLS 83/114
TXT Device under subclass 113 which encompasses a substantial portion of the
    rotary tool axis and periphery.


CLS 83/115
TXT Device under subclass 113 in which the relative-motion-producing means is
    physically attached to, or otherwise supported by, the stripped tool or
    cooperating revolving tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136+,   for a stripper mounted on a moving tool (other than rotary) or tool
    support; and see the Notes thereto.


CLS 83/116
TXT Device under subclass 115 which is effective to produce the relative motion
    in a radial direction, from or towards the axis of rotation of the rotating
    tool.


CLS 83/117
TXT Device under subclass 116 including elastic or springlike means deformable
    to urge or move the relative-motion-producing means from one position to
    another.

    (1)     Note.  Springlike means may function to move a "stripper" or
    "ejector" to its normal position after movement to its operative position
    by a cam means, etc.

    (2)     Note.  A typical device of this type is a coil spring, which may
    directly contact the product or urge another device which directly contacts
    the product.


CLS 83/118
TXT Device under subclass 113 including elastic or springlike means deformable
    to urge or move the relative-motion-producing means from one position to
    another.

    (1)     Note.  The springlike means may be integral with the stripping or
    ejecting means.


CLS 83/119
TXT Device under subclass 113 including
    relative-motion-producing means which is mounted to permit limited
    oscillatory movement thereof about an axis while it is exerting force on
    the product.


CLS 83/120
TXT Device under subclass 119 including means which functions to move product
    relative to at least one of two cooperating tools which revolve about
    spaced parallel axes.


CLS 83/121
TXT Device under subclass 113 including a
    relative-motion-producing means located in a fixed position relative to
    immovable parts of the machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145     and 146, for a stationary stripper in combination with an
    oscillating or reciprocating tool.


CLS 83/122
TXT Device under subclass 121 including means which functions to move product
    relative to at least one of two cooperating tools which revolve about
    spaced parallel axes.


CLS 83/123
TXT Device under subclass 111 wherein the product lies within, and in contact
    with the walls of, a cavity in a tool which has produced it, said tool
    having a continuous cutting edge bounding said cavity, and in which the
    relative-motion-producing means removes the product from the cavity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97+,    for means to form a pack or stack of cut pieces delivered from a
    hollow cutter.

    98+,    for means to accomplish ejection from a hollow cutter by fluid
    blast or suction.

    116+,   for a device of this type mounted on a rotary tool support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 344+ for means to eject a formed
    article from a female die.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclass 68, for a
    hollow drill combined with means to eject the product therefrom.


CLS 83/124
TXT Device under subclass 123 wherein means is also provided to remove product
    from the outer surface of either the hollow tool, a cooperating tool, or a
    tool mounted on the hollow tool support.


CLS 83/125
TXT Device under subclass 123 wherein the actuation of the product-moving means
    is synchronized with movement of the hollow tool in its retraction from the
    work and cooperating cutter after said tool has made its cut.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     for product-moving means initiated by means directly responsive to
    return movement of the tool.


CLS 83/126
TXT Device under subclass 123 wherein the product-moving means is carried by
    the other tool which coacts with the hollow tool to form a tool pair*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136+,   and see the Notes thereto.


CLS 83/127
TXT Device under subclass 123 wherein the ejector slides back and forth within
    the tool cavity under the influence of a smooth surface, irregularly shaped
    member rotatable or slidable operating against the ejector or against a
    motion-transmitting means between said member and the ejector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115+,   for a device of this type wherein the hollow cutter is mounted on
    the periphery of a rotary member.


CLS 83/128
TXT Device under subclass 123 wherein the ejector slides back and forth within
    the tool cavity and includes, or is provided with, compressible or
    extensible elastic means for urging it in one of said directions when
    compressed or extended.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115+,   for a device of this type wherein the hollow cutter is mounted on
    the periphery of a rotary member.


CLS 83/129
TXT Means under subclass 111 including an instrumentality for moving the means
    (a stripper) which causes relative motion between the cutter and product,
    such instrumentality moving stripper in a definite temporal relationship
    with respect to the cutter's movement into and out of cutting engagement
    with the work.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses do not include patents for
    strippers or ejectors operating upon the product of circumferentially edged
    revolving tools, for which see subclasses 113+.

    (2)     Note.  For a holddown clamp (or other form of clamp) timed with
    tool stroke, see subclasses 375+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113+,   for a stripper or ejector for removing a product from a revolving
    cutter in timed relation with the tool's motion; and see (1) Note, above.

    123+,   for an ejector for removing a product from within a hollow cutter,
    and moved in time relation to a tool stroke.

    375+,   and see (2) Note, above.


CLS 83/130
TXT Device under subclass 129 in which the stripper may be removed from or
    placed inproduct-moving relation with the tool, to disable the stripper or
    enable it to perform its function, either at the will of the operator or by
    the machine itself during its operation.


CLS 83/131
TXT Device under subclass 129 in which means are provided to lock the stripper
    in product contacting position, and the movement of the tool out of cutting
    engagement with the work actuates a mechanism to release the lock after the
    tool is withdrawn from the product, so as to permit the stripper to
    withdraw.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    for a similar device operative with a hollow cutter.

    399,    for other interlock means in a cutting machine.


CLS 83/132
TXT Device under subclass 129 wherein more than one stripper is provided to
    strip a multiplicity of tools, and each stripper acts to remove the product
    from only one tool.


CLS 83/133
TXT Device under subclass 129 wherein one stripper is provided which acts to
    remove the product simultaneously from more than one tool.


CLS 83/134
TXT Device under subclass 129 in which the part of the stripper which contacts
    the product comprises, or is mounted on one end of, a thin flexible
    resilient element; and the other end of the element is fixedly attached to
    some part of the machine.


CLS 83/135
TXT Device under subclass 129 wherein the stripper-moving instrumentality
    comprises one or more levers which are pivoted to a part of the machine or
    to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for an ejector-actuating linkage which is actuated by a cam.

    131,    for a linkage which latches a stripper in position and which is
    released by the return movement of the tool.


CLS 83/136
TXT Device under subclass 129 in which the stripper is mounted on a moving tool
    or its support* and moves with respect to, and in timed relation with, said
    tool and support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115+,   for a stripper or ejector mounted on a rotary tool.

    126,    for an ejector carried by a cutter which cooperates with a hollow
    tool.

    218,    for a pilot or locating pin carried by a moving tool or tool
    support.

    294,    319, and 382, for a work gripper or clamp mounted on a moving tool
    or tool support.

    395,    for a work-stop abutment mounted on a moving tool or tool support.


CLS 83/137
TXT Device under subclass 136 in which the stripper is actuated by means
    applying a force to a gas or liquid, which gas or liquid applies a moving
    force (directly or indirectly) to the stripper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    390     and 461, for a cutting machine having a fluid pressure actuated
    clamp.

    639,    for fluid pressure tool actuating means.


CLS 83/138
TXT Device under subclass 136 in which (a) the stripper or its mounting
    includes an elastic, resilient and/or flexible element, which element is
    compressed or extended during the cycle of operation, and whose tendency to
    return to its normal state urges the product away from the tool; or in
    which (b) the stripper is mounted on the tool or tool support by means of a
    lost-motion connection (in which gravity acts on the stripper to urge the
    stripper into contact with the product as the tool is withdrawn).

    (1)     Note.  An original patent for an elastic, rubberlike, resilient
    mounting for a nonelastomeric stripper will be found in this subclass (138).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128,    for a resiliently biased stripper which ejects a product from
    within a hollow cutter.

    134,    for a tool-synchronized stripper which is carried on an end of a
    spring arm.

    142+,   for a tool-synchronized stripper not carried by the moving tool or
    its support and which is biased against the product.


CLS 83/139
TXT Device under subclass 138 in which that portion of the stripper which
    engages the product is made of an elastic, rubberlike, resilient material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138+,   for an elastic, rubberlike mounting for a nonelastomeric stripper.


CLS 83/140
TXT Device under subclass 138 in which the compressed or extended element is an
    elongated or coiled flexible and resilient metallic member (e.g., coil
    spring).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128,    for a spring-urged means to eject product from a hollow cutter.

    134,    for a device in which a tool-synchronized stripper is carried on an
    end of a spring arm.

    143,    for a similar device which is not carried by the moving tool or its
    support.


CLS 83/141
TXT Device under subclass 138 in which the mounting of the stripper on the tool
    or tool support* permits relative motion of the stripper with respect to
    such tool or support, and in which the force of gravity acts to urge the
    stripper against the product to separate the product from the tool.


CLS 83/142
TXT Device under subclass 129 in which (a) the stripper or its mounting
    includes an elastic resilient and/or flexible element, which element is
    compressed or extended during the cycle of operation, and whose tendency to
    return to its normal state urges the product away from the tool; or in
    which (b) the stripper is mounted on its support by means of a lost-motion
    connection in which gravity acts on the stripper to urge the product away
    from the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128,    for a resiliently biased means which ejects a product from within a
    hollow cutter.

    134,    for a tool-synchronized stripper which is carried on an end of a
    spring arm.

    138+,   for a stripper biased against the product, which stripper is
    carried by the moving cutting element or its support.


CLS 83/143
TXT Device under subclass 142 in which the compressed or extended element is an
    elongated or coiled flexible and resilient metallic member (e.g., coil
    spring).


CLS 83/144
TXT Device under subclass 111 wherein movement of the means (stripper) for
    causing relative motion between the cutter and product is effected by hand
    manipulation of the stripper itself or of a device which controls its
    movement.


CLS 83/145
TXT Device under subclass 111 in which the means (stripper) for causing
    relative motion between the cutter and product is fixed with respect to
    machine parts which do not have a cyclic motion.


CLS 83/146
TXT Device under subclass 145 wherein the stationary stripper substantially
    surrounds a tool during its cyclic motion.


CLS 83/147
TXT Device under subclass 109 which includes a housing having a product
    delivery opening, which opening is adapted to be selectively obstructed so
    as to prevent egress of the product (thus also preventing entry of
    undesired objects) therethrough.

    (1)     Note.  The instrumentality which effects the blocking may be a
    cutting tool.


CLS 83/148
TXT Device under subclass 109 in which a flexible element is located between
    the tool and the work such that, in cutting, the flexible member will take
    the shape of the tool, transmit the cutting force of the tool to the work,
    and then urge the product away from the tool which has produced it.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass is distinguished from
    that of subclasses 111+, in that a tool provided with a flexible element of
    the type of this subclass does not directly engage the work or product.


CLS 83/149
TXT Device under subclass 109 comprising a guideway, inclined to the horizontal
    and vertical planes and so disposed as to receive cut pieces for movement
    therealong, provided with means for engaging a cut piece to urge it along
    the guideway, or to brake it, while it is disposed on or within the
    confines of the guideway.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 534 for a power-driven conveyor
    combined with a chute having means to retard movement of the conveyed load.


CLS 83/150
TXT Device under subclass 109 including means for positively moving the
    product, said means being supported against gravity by a tool support*.


CLS 83/151
TXT Device under subclass 109 in which the means for propelling the product
    includes means to engage and firmly secure the product against movement
    relative to the propelling means at least during movement of the product
    away from the cutting zone.

    (1)     Note.  Included within the scope of the term "gripper means" are
    devices which engage and grasp two opposed surfaces of the product as well
    as devices which engage one surface and retain it against the propelling
    means (e.g., a magnet, clamp jaw, perforating pin, suction gripper, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 468.2+ and 470.1+ for a
    conveyor having load gripping members, subclasses 679 and 690 for a
    conveyor having magnetic load holders, and subclasses 692+ for a conveyor
    having load impalers.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclasses 204+ for sheet delivery
    apparatus including means to grip the sheet.


CLS 83/152
TXT Device under subclass 151 in which the securing means includes a perforated
    surface and means to draw air through the surface so as to cause the
    product to adhere to said surface under the influence of atmospheric
    pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 428, 438, 449+, and 689.1 for
    a conveyor having means for applying suction to the conveyed load.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclasses 194+ for sheet delivery
    apparatus including pneumatic means.


CLS 83/153
TXT Device under subclass 151 in which the propelling means moves to and from
    the cutting zone in a straight line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 468.2+ and 470.1+ for a
    reciprocating conveyor having load-gripping members.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclass 85 for sheet delivery
    apparatus including reciprocating sheet gripping means.


CLS 83/154
TXT Device under subclass 151 in which the propelling means moves in an arc of
    a circle, either in the same direction or to and from the cutting zone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 468.2+ and 470.1+ for an
    oscillating conveyor having load-gripping members.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclass 82 for rotary sheet delivery
    apparatus having gripper means.


CLS 83/155
TXT Device under subclass 109 which comprises a continuous web- or strand-like
    member (e.g., a belt or chain) which moves the product while the product is
    supported thereby.

    (1)     Note.  In the case wherein the product conveyor also is effective
    to move the work into cutting position, a patent directed to such device
    will be placed originally in this subclass only if the conveyor is claimed
    in terms of its specific product handling function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88      and 91+, for a conveyor operative to move a stack of product pieces.

    94+,    for a conveyor which functions to deliver product pieces to a stack
    holder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 804+ for an endless belt
    conveyor.

    271,    Sheets Feeding or Delivering, subclasses 67, 69 and 198+ for sheet
    delivery apparatus including endless conveyor means.


CLS 83/155.1
TXT Device under subclass 155 including means to remove the product from the
    endless conveyor.

    (1)     Note.  In many of the devices in this subclass, the same conveyor
    moves both work and product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    418+,   for a work conveyor means and additional means to engage the work
    and orient it relative to a tool station.

    732,    for means to position work transversely on a moving conveyor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 367+, 370.07 through 370.09,
    370.1, 370.11 through 370.13, 426+, 463.1+, 497, 597+, 599, 637, and others
    for means for moving an article or material off a conveyor.


CLS 83/156
TXT Device under subclass 109 which includes one or more cylindrical or
    spherical members, each rotatable about an axis transverse to the path of
    the product and supporting, guiding or moving the product in said path.

    (1)     Note.  Patents disclosing either idling or powered rollers, in
    train or in opposed pairs, are included in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, subclasses 35+ for
    rollerways.

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 385+, 387, 501, 604, 608, 611+,
    624, 779, and 780+ for rollers carrying a load, subclass 840 for rollers
    guiding a load supported on an endless belt conveyor, and subclasses 359+
    and 539 for a nonpowered roller coveyor combined with a power-driven
    conveyor.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclasses 71, 72 and 314+, for sheet
    delivery apparatus including rotary conveyor means.


CLS 83/157
TXT Device under subclass 109 which permits downward movement of the product by
    either pivotal movement of a means holding the product against gravity,
    thereby to provide an inclined surface down which the product may slide; or
    by complete removal of such means from beneath the product, thereby to
    permit free fall.

    (1)     Note.  The platform of this subclass must be moved after, or
    simultaneously with, the cutting stroke which produces the product to be
    handled by the platform.  If a platform is, for instance, tilted to an
    inclined position prior to the cutting stroke (so that the product, instead
    of being supported on a platform which may tilt to urge the product to
    slide, is allowed to drop onto an inclined plane), such platform is
    considered an adjustable or movable chute or plane, the search for which is
    in subclass 165.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165,    for a chute or inclined plane down which product may slide; and see
    (1) Note, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 535+ for a chute swingable
    between horizontal and inclined positions.


CLS 83/158
TXT Device under subclass 109 provided with means to engage a product piece and
    move it bodily in a straight line path in a direction which is opposite or
    transverse to the direction in which (1) the piece is moving as it leaves
    the tool or (2) the work is moving as it enters the cutting zone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclass 598 for an endless belt conveyor
    that shifts a load laterally of another conveyor.


CLS 83/159
TXT Device under subclass 158 in which the product moving means is pivoted and
    has a to-and-fro motion about said pivot.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 370.07 through 370.09, 370.1,
    370.11 through 370.13, 426+, 468.1+, 598 and others for a swingable
    conveyor that shifts a load laterally of another conveyor.


CLS 83/160
TXT Device under subclass 158 in which the product engaging portion of the
    product moving means has a translatory to-and-fro motion in a plane.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 370.07 through 370.09, 370.1,
    370.11 through 370.13, 429+, 597+, and others for a linearly reciprocating
    conveyor that shifts a load laterally of another conveyor.


CLS 83/161
TXT Device under subclass 109 in which the propelling means moves the product
    otherwise than in a straight line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150,    for such means mounted on a tool support.


CLS 83/162
TXT Device under subclass 109 including passive means which is operative to
    define, limit, or change the path of (without terminating), product
    movement (i.e., to direct, wholly or partially, the course of moving
    product).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105+,   for a guide which serves to separate moving product portions.

    438+,   for means to guide moving work; and see the Notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 351+, 367, 442, 525, 599, and
    633+ for passive means for changing the direction of movement of a conveyed
    load.


CLS 83/163
TXT Means under subclass 162 in which the product is moved by the work or by
    means that moves work to the tool station, and in which the passive means
    is so disposed as to present an obstacle or obstruction to the unimpeded
    passage of product being so moved; the result being initiation of, or a
    change in, relative directions of motion of the product and the work or
    work moving means.


CLS 83/164
TXT Device under subclass 162 in which the guide is a tubular cavity within a
    hollow tool or its support, or in a member rigid with the tool or its
    support, said tool having an aperture and a continuous cutting edge
    bounding the open end of said aperture and together with said tubular
    cavity forming a path for the product pieces, away from the cutting zone,
    which does not follow only a single straight line.

    (1)     Note.  A mere passage coextensive with the cutting edge opening and
    extending rectilinearly within the hollow tool is not considered a guide
    for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97,     for a device including means to form or hold product pieces in
    stacked relation upon emergence from a hollow cutter.


CLS 83/165
TXT Means under subclass 162 including a supporting surface or tubular body,
    disclosed as extending generally from an upper location at one end to a
    lower at the other (but not extending solely straight up and down
    vertically) and so positioned that product may travel therealong or
    therethrough.

    (1)     Note.  The traveling product on or in the chute, plane, or conduit
    may be moving under the influence of gravity. If, however, it is moved by
    claimed mechanical moving means, a patent claiming such guide and moving
    means will be placed originally in subclass 149 or another subclass devoted
    to product moving means, and may be cross-referenced in this subclass; if
    no product moving means is claimed, a patent disclosing such combination
    (and claiming only the cutter and guide) will be placed originally in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149,    for means which moves cut pieces along a chute or inclined plane.

    157,    for a device having a tiltable product support down which the
    product may slide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, appropriate subclass
    for a gravity type conveyor.

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 311, 359+, 523+, and others for
    a chute or other gravity conveyor combined with a power-driven conveyor.


CLS 83/166
TXT Means under subclass 162 comprising an obstacle so placed as to be struck
    by a product piece as the latter travels through space while unsupported
    against the force of gravity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165,    for devices in which the abutment is an inclined chute, plane or
    conduit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 599 for a guide that deflects a
    load after it moves off a conveyor.


CLS 83/167
TXT Device under the class definition provided with a container or platform to
    receive and retain the product piece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78+,    for a device having a receptacle or support provided with a clamp
    to stop and hold the product in the receptacle or on the support.

    84+,    for a receptacle or support which is taught as holding a pile
    (including stack) of product pieces; and see the Notes thereto.

    102+,   for means to direct product pieces selectively into any one of a
    plurality of receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    232,    Deposit and Collection Receptacles, subclass 8 for a fare box which
    receives a ticket and punches it as it is introduced into the device.


CLS 83/168
TXT Device under the class definition wherein means are provided to remove
    undesired foreign matter from the work or the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    22, and 24, for a method of handling work, or product, including
    application of fluid to same.

    98+,    for product handling device including fluid current application
    means which means may also be utilized to remove waste products of the
    cutting operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, appropriate subclasses,
    for cleaning means broadly; and see search Notes thereto.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 197+ for a tool driving or
    impacting means having a work cleansing feature.


CLS 83/169
TXT Device under the class definition that includes means to direct upon or to
    the tool or work a quantity of liquid, gaseous, or pulverulent material;
    which material is not intended to form a permanent coating on, and does not
    effect movement of, such tool or work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    17, 22, and 24, for method of handling work, or product, including
    application of fluid to same.

    53      and 177, for means and process, respectively, for cutting by direct
    application of fluent pressure.

    98+,    for product handling by fluid current means.

    168,    for means to clean work by fluid application.

    407,    for apparatus to move work by fluid current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 123.3+, for cutting implements having means to
    direct a fluid upon the tool or a guide in contact therewith.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 15 and 35+ for cutter combined with
    means to apply a substantially permanent coating.


CLS 83/170
TXT Device under the class definition which includes means to maintain or alter
    the temperature of the device or work.

     (1)    Note.  Heating or cooling of the work to the extent of changing its
    state (e.g., from solid to liquid), other than for the purpose of effecting
    a cut by means of a solid tool, has been considered a shaping or treating
    operation beyond the scope of this class (83).  Patents for such treating
    or shaping means combined with cutting means have been placed elsewhere;
    for example, on the basis of the type of material so shaped or treated.

    (2)     Note.  The patents of this and the indented subclass primarily
    differ from related devices in Class 219, Electric Heating, in that the
    tool herein disclosed maintains physical contact with, and bodily
    penetrates the workpiece during the cutting operation; even though melting
    of the workpiece is achieved during such tool penetration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    for corresponding process.

    169,    for apparatus for applying a transient, nonpropellant fluid to the
    tool or work, which liquid may heat, cool, or maintain the temperature of,
    the tool or work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 56+
    for methods and subclasses 320+ for apparatus, for cutting combined with
    freezing or combined with cooling of the type classified in that class (62).

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 68+ for cutting including electrically
    heating metallic work.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 138+ for processes of molding and shaping within the class
    definition, when combined with a cutting or severing step and see (1) Note
    above.


CLS 83/171
TXT Device under subclass 170 in which the temperature controlling means
    maintains or alters the temperature of the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for corresponding method.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 140 for a heated cutter including significant
    heating structure.

    101,    Printing, subclasses 8, 9+, 21, 25, 27, and 31 for an embossing or
    penetrating printer with heating means.

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 303.14+ for a heated surgical cutter.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 241 for means to electrically heat a
    cutter.


CLS 83/174
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means to dress the tool.

    (1)     Note.  The means to dress may operate on either the active or
    passive cutting element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, for a specifically recited tool of that class with a means
    to sharpen same.

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements Making, for a specifically recited tool
    of that class with a means to sharpen same.

    451,    Abrading, for sharpening by abrading, generally.


CLS 83/174.1
TXT Device under subclass 174 wherein the dressing means acts on a tool which
    is (a) immovable, or (b) rotatable or oscillatable in one plane about a
    single, immovable axis.

    (1)     Note.  A tool sharpener in combination with a tool which is
    rotatable about a movable axis or about two or more axes. (e.g., band saw)
    or movable into another plane, will be found in this class, subclass 174.


CLS 83/175
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means to subject the work
    within the cutting zone to tensile forces to effect elongation of same
    within its elastic limit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for a related process.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    140,    Wireworking, subclasses 139+ for means to stretch and cut wire.


CLS 83/176
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means to impart an
    impermanent change of shape (i.e., within the elastic limit) to work
    material located in the cutting zone - except apparatus in which such means
    comprises a rotatable cylindrical anvil about which work is trained and
    which cooperates with another cutter to produce substantially the same cut
    that would be produced if the work were presented rectilinearly to such
    other cutter.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes (but is not limited to) patents for
    devices which deform the work material, as above defined, and in whose
    operation such deformation is prerequisite to effect a predetermined line
    of cut; that is to say, the desired cut could not be effected in the
    absence of the deformation while operating the machine in the intended
    manner.

    (2)     Note.  Thus, a patent directed to means for compressing, or
    stretching, a resilient workpiece and subsequently cutting same to impart a
    dished product surface configuration upon release of the deforming forces
    would be properly placed in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17+,    for a corresponding method.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclass 88 for means
    to deform material of indeterminate length to facilitate feeding of the
    material.


CLS 83/177
TXT Apparatus under the class definition wherein one tool comprises a fluent
    pressurized medium which directly contacts the workpiece to effect a
    predetermined line of cut by displacing the portion of work so contacted
    past the cutting edge of a cooperating tool element or by coaction with a
    controlled directly opposed second fluent pressurized medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for a method of cutting by the direct application of fluent
    pressure to the work.

    402,    for fluid current apparatus for moving work past a stationary
    cutter in a continuing movement.


CLS 83/178
TXT Means under the class definition in which a tool is disposed within a
    generally tubular portion of a workpiece and, either alone or in
    cooperation with another tool, operates on the internal surface of the
    piece.

    (1)     Note.  The "generally tubular portion" comprises a wall which
    presents, in transverse cross-section, a substantially closed perimeter.

    (2)     Note.  The internal tool must be in position within the hollow work
    at initiation of cutting.

    (3)     Note.  Patents disclosing a tool oscillating about a fixed center
    during the cutting stroke and its retraction therefrom will be found in
    this subclass.  Patents disclosing other tool motions will be found in
    subclasses indented hereunder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196+,   for cutting work (which may be hollow) by the misalignment of
    aligned apertures.

    315+    and 597+, for an oscillating tool which does not cut from within a
    hollow workpiece.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    82,     Turning, subclass 82 for a turning device of the severing or cutoff
    type wherein the tool, or tools, lies within the work.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 55+ for apparatus for cutting a well conduit in
    situ and subclasses 297+ for processes of cutting a well conduit in situ.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 2+ for subject matter
    relating to a device for firing a bullet or exploding a shaped charge
    within an inaccessible bore to penetrate the earth formation or perforate
    or cut a casing or other wall member in the bore.


CLS 83/179
TXT Apparatus under subclass 178 wherein a tool (or tools) is inserted within a
    workpiece, prior to the introduction of the workpiece into the cutting
    zone, in such manner that the tool derives substantially all of its support
    either directly or indirectly from the workpiece itself.


CLS 83/180
TXT Apparatus under subclass 178 provided with a work support including means
    to enlarge a cross-sectional portion thereof, so that such support will
    frictionally engage the internal surface of the tubular work.

    (1)     Note.  The expanding mandrel may function to immobilize for work
    and/or to position the internal tool for cutting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    623,    for means to move a cooperating cutter member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, subclass 52 for an expanding mandrel which is not a
    chuck or socket.

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, subclasses 2.01+ for an expanding mandrel in the
    form of a chuck or socket.


CLS 83/181
TXT Apparatus under subclass 178 wherein means to move, or render active, means
    to maintain or retain work, or means to move, or render active means
    presenting an obstacle or bar to work movement; is identical with or
    cooperates significantly with means to move the tool in its cutting cycle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    374+,   for means as above defined but not related to a tool inside hollow
    work; and see search Notes thereto.


CLS 83/182
TXT Means under subclass 181 wherein a work immobilizing element cooperates
    with a work support to grip the work frictionally, to move the work into
    aligned relation with the tool, and to hold it in such position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206     and 465, for related clamp structure.

    418+,   with additional means to engage and orient work.


CLS 83/183
TXT Apparatus under subclass 178 including means to present work to the tool,
    which means operates in timed relation with means to impart movement to the
    tool during the cutting cycle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202+,   for tool engaging work during dwell of intermittent work-feed.

    284+,   for a tool whose cutting motion has component in direction of
    moving work.

    350,    for a tool timed with moving work, in general.


CLS 83/184
TXT Apparatus under subclass 178 provided with means to adjust and align tools
    relative to one another in preparation for cutting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248,    for means to position datum plane of tool.

    549+,   for plural tool selectively engageable.

    559+,   for tool pair adjustable as a unit.

    561,    for relatively adjustable tool with  flat surfaced cooperating
    member.


CLS 83/185
TXT Apparatus under subclass 178 wherein a cutting tool moves in a path which
    is neither solely rectilinear nor solely circular during the tool stroke*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    523,    for other forms of compound tool motion.

    644+,   for reciprocating tool motion combined with tilting in plane of
    tool stroke.

    646+,   for uniplanar compound tool motion.


CLS 83/186
TXT Apparatus under subclass 185 wherein the cutting means comprises at least
    one tool pair consisting of an internal edged tool and an external tool
    provided with a peripheral cutting edge substantially completely
    surrounding the work, each such tool having a surface lying in a plane
    common to both tools and along which surface the cutting edge is disposed,
    so that shearing of the work occurs in the common plane, and in which the
    peripheral cutting edge of the external tool substantially completely
    surrounds the tubular work.

    (1)     Note.  One or both of the tools may be active in the cutting
    operation and the conformation of either tool to the work surface may be
    modified; as, for instance, to provide relieved sections resulting a tab
    portions of such surface, or to result in a progressive cutting operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179,    for related cutting means wherein the tubular work is prepacked
    with an internal tool.

    189+,   for an annulus and disc type tool pair having rectilinear motion.


CLS 83/187
TXT Apparatus under subclass 178 wherein a cutting tool follows a closed
    circular path, in one direction only thereof, during the cutting stroke.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331+,   for a rotary flying cutter.

    469+,   for a rotatable disc tool and carrier therefor, or a rotatable disc
    tool pair.

    591+,   for revolving tool motion, generally.


CLS 83/188
TXT Apparatus under subclass 178 wherein the movement of a tool, during the
    tool stroke*, is confined to one or more straight line paths.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    613+,   for a rectilinearly reciprocating tool, in general.


CLS 83/189
TXT Apparatus under subclass 188 wherein the cutting means comprises at least
    one tool pair consisting of an internal edged tool and an external tool
    provided with a peripheral cutting edge substantially completely
    surrounding the work, each such tool having a surface lying in a plane
    common to both tools and along which surface the cutting edge is disposed,
    so that shearing of the work occurs in the common plane, and in which the
    peripheral cutting edge of the external tool substantially completely
    surrounds the tubular work.

    (1)     Note.  One or both of the tools may be active in the cutting
    operation and the conformation of either element to the work surface may be
    modified; as for instance, to provide relieved sections resulting in table
    portions of such surface, or to result in a progressive cutting operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179,    for related cutting means wherein tubular work is prepacked with an
    internal tool.

    186,    for annulus and disc type tool pair having compound motion.


CLS 83/190
TXT Means under subclass 189 wherein at least one member of the tool pair moves
    in a multiplicity of straight line paths during the tool stroke*.


CLS 83/191
TXT Means under subclass 188, wherein the tool inside the hollow work moves in
    effecting the cut.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179,    for means including internal tool(s) prepacked in work.

    186     and 189+, for annulus and disc type tool pair, of which the
    internal disc tool may be active.


CLS 83/192
TXT Means under subclass 188 wherein a plurality of tools is disposed around
    the outer periphery of the tubular work and each moves, in coaction with
    one or more internally disposed tools, to effect a cut.

    (1)     Note.  The external tools may be supported on a common carrier, as
    in a conventional multiple punch ram means; or on separate carriers,
    including structurally independent actuating means, and may each contribute
    to a single combined cut line or function to effect separated cuts on the
    common work piece.


CLS 83/193
TXT Means under subclass 192 wherein the active external tools move relatively
    toward one another during cutting and substantially normal to the axial
    extent of the tubular work.

    (1)     Note.  The tools may function either simultaneously or sequentially
    to produce a cut or cuts lying in a substantially common plane.


CLS 83/194
TXT Apparatus under subclass 193, wherein the means to move the tools to effect
    the cut comprises a plurality of cams which are mounted on a single carrier.

    (1)     Note. The common support for the multiple cams is generally a
    rotary or oscillating member.

    (2)     Note.  For definition of a cam, see the definition of Class 74,
    subclasses 567+.


CLS 83/195
TXT Apparatus under subclass 178, wherein means, responsive to an operative's
    volition, are provided to move the work relative to a tool and preparatory
    to initiation of the tool stroke*, or to cooperate with a significant
    feature of the work structure to restrain the moving piece from further
    movement.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes patents for cutting machines with
    means to accomplish the necessary locating of work within a cutting zone,
    in order that the work may be in proper alignment with the cutter operating
    thereon, as distinguished from means to feed the work to such zone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401+,   for means to move work relative to a tool station.

    451+,   for means to immobilize or stabilize work generally.


CLS 83/196
TXT Means under the class definition, in which two adjacent members are
    provided, each with an opening, through both of which openings a workpiece
    extends simultaneously, each adapted (as disclosed) to enclose a sufficient
    portion of the periphery of the workpiece extending therethrough to prevent
    sidewise escape of the workpiece therefrom, which device includes means to
    move one member relative to the other so that the workpiece caught between
    the moving members is severed by virtue of its being forced against the
    edge of an opening, or against the edge of a member-carried tool extending
    into such opening, or against both.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    178+,   particularly subclasses 179, 186, and 189+, for a device wherein a
    tool is located inside hollow work and cooperates with an outer, annular
    cutter.


CLS 83/197
TXT Means under subclass 196 having, in addition to the apertured tools, a
    cutting device of another kind which itself constitutes subject matter for
    this class (83).


CLS 83/198
TXT Means under subclass 196 in which one or both of the apertured members has
    a motion only in a straight line path during its tool stroke*.


CLS 83/199
TXT Means under subclass 196 in which one or both of the apertured members has
    a motion which is confined to rotation or oscillation about a single center.


CLS 83/200
TXT Means under subclass 199 in which one or both of the apertured members has
    more than one cutting opening.


CLS 83/200.1
TXT Device under the class definition wherein the cutting member is
    substantially one-dimensional; i.e., the dimensions of its cross-section
    are negligible relative to its length, and which member surrounds a portion
    of the work surface prior to cutting, thus defining a plane; and which
    device includes means to apply or increase stress in the cutting member so
    that the cutting member moves into the work in the plane initially defined.

    (1)     Note.  The cutting member may or may not completely encircle the
    work.  In the latter case, reaction to the cutting force will be provided
    by a work-stop abutment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    651.1+, for a wire-type tool or a wire-type tool and support which does not
    function in a work-inclosing manner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 292 for a device for deforming a metal
    workpiece by tightening a flexible chain or band around the work.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 1+ for a process or apparatus for tightening a
    binder about material to compress it.


CLS 83/202
TXT An apparatus under the class definition including means to sequentially
    stop and move, or stop and permit movement of, the work at the tool zone;
    and including tool actuating means which synchronously brings the tool into
    cutting contact with the work while the latter is at rest or simultaneously
    with the stopping of the work.

    (1)     Note.  The work may be brought to a halt by a device such as a
    clamp jaw or an abutment stop effective to halt that portion of the work in
    the tool zone while work-feed means continually urges another portion
    toward the tool with consequent buckling or slippage, (see subclass 262
    indented hereunder).

    (2)     Note.  The work may be moved simply by gravity, no work advancing
    mechanism being provided, (see subclass 268 indented hereunder).

    (3)     Note.  A portion of the work remote from the tool zone may be
    continuously in motion as, for example, work unwinding from a continuously
    rotating supply roll.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    350+,   for a device wherein the work is fed constantly to a tool zone
    where it is intermittently acted on by an actuated tool having no component
    of motion in the direction of work-feed, and where no provision is made for
    halting the work before it is engaged by the tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacture, subclasses 107+ for needle felting machines
    having cycle of intermittent work moving and needing.

    112,    Sewing, appropriate subclasses, for machines which advance work to
    sewing station and hold it stationary while it is being pierced by the
    needle.

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclass 339.1 for a conveyor that dwells
    at a work station, and subclasses 858+ for a conveyor having indexed or
    intermittent drive means.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material, particularly
    subclasses 120+ for structure for advancing material intermittently.

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), appropriate subclasses, for a
    selective cutting device (usually termed a card or tape punch) of the
    step-by-step type.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 70+, for
    means to cut in the manner of that class during the dwell of intermittent
    workfeed.


CLS 83/203
TXT Device under subclass 202 in which the synchronous relationship between
    work moving and tool moving means is disrupted during or after each tool
    cycle in such manner that the reestablishment of such relationship and
    initiation or continuation of a succeeding cycle requires the intervention
    of an external force or stimulus.

    (1)     Note.  Unicyclic operation is characterized by the requirement of
    two inputs:  one to supply actuating power and the other to intervene and
    supply an unlocking force without which the machine could not resume
    operation, as distinguished from the usual machine which operates whenever
    power is supplied to it.  Some type of "nonrepeat" mechanism is required as
    part of the invention.

    (2)     Note.  Many patents disclosing machines capable of unicyclic
    operation are to be found in following subclasses, where the means which
    confers such capability is not claimed.  See particularly the stamp or
    ticket dispensers in subclasses 208, 210, 224, 231+, 242+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for stopping means effective upon completion of predetermined
    number of tool cycles.

    252,    for supplemental manual feed required to complete the cutting cycle.

    283,    for one-revolution clutch in tool actuating means.

    484,    for unicyclically movable carrier for rotatable disc tool.

    524+,   for a device for moving a tool through one cutting stroke only.


CLS 83/204
TXT Device under subclass 203 which comprises means for changing the type of
    operation from unicyclic to continuous operation or from continuous to
    unicyclic.

    (1)     Note.  Device for changing from one type of operation to another
    type for which separate subclasses are provided, neither type being
    "unicyclic", will be found in subclasses directed to the specific types of
    operations concerned.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for a device to alter the cyclic operation of a cutting machine in
    some respect, but only as long as an intervening force is maintained.
    (Example:  a machine operator may hold a pushbutton depressed to obtain
    short products for sampling or testing purposes).

    240+,   for adjustment of tool position or stroke, work position, length
    ofwork-feed increment, etc.


CLS 83/205
TXT Machine under subclass 203 wherein the tool cycle is initiated and
    terminated solely by mechanical elements (to the exclusion of electrical,
    electronic, or chemical means).

    (1)     Note.  The mere presence of an electric driving motor an necessary
    manually or mechanically actuated switch does not exclude the combination
    thereof, with the mechanical initiating and terminating means, from this
    subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Hydraulic or pneumatic devices are considered "mechanical"
    for the purposes of this definition.


CLS 83/206
TXT Device under subclass 202 wherein a portion of a frictional work-gripping
    device as claimed exerts a centering, registering, or aligning effect on
    the workpiece at a tool station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182,    for a clamp which aligns hollow work with respect to a tool.

    262,    for a clamp used to cause a dwell in the work motion by clamping or
    blocking the moving work.

    282,    for a work clamp cyclically actuated in a cutting machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 343.1+ for a conveyor combined
    with means for clamping the conveyed load in position for working at a work
    station.


CLS 83/207
TXT Device under subclass 202 wherein the only work-moving means is a work stop
    which is cyclically moved against the work which has been presented thereto
    (by means not claimed), to position or register the work prior to the tool
    stroke.

    (1)     Note.  The "stop" in this subclass serves only to give the final
    location or positioning motion to work which has been presented to the
    machine, manually or by unclaimed work-moving means, and the stop is not
    claimed as a clamping or gripping means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206,    282+, and 452+, for an actuated abutment or jaw which cooperates
    with another abutment to frictionally grip the work.

    250+,   for such device combined with ordinary work-feed means.

    268+    and 391+, for abutment work stops which do not move the work.

    418+,   for work moving means and an additional work positioning means.


CLS 83/208
TXT Device under subclass 202 including a detector* which is moved by, and to
    an extent proportional to movement of the work; further including means to
    effect a signal or impulse only when the extent of detector movement
    reaches a predetermined amount; and further including a transmitter*
    connecting said detector means to a means to effect or initiate work
    deceleration, work stoppage and/or work cutting as a direct or indirect
    result of the receipt by said effective means of such detected and
    transmitted signal or impulse.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    369,    for similar structure in which only the work cutting is claimed.


CLS 83/209
TXT Device under subclass 202 including a detector* for work, a transmitter*,
    and means to stop the movement of the work, either directly, (as by
    engagement of said means with the work,) or indirectly, (as by stoppage of
    a work-moving means) as a result of the receipt by said means of such
    detected and transmitted signal or impulse.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     for means, responsive to work sensing means, to stop operation of a
    part or all of the machine in a random manner.

    367,    for similar structure for stopping work movement.

    370+,   for similar structure to actuate tool feed.

    399,    for means, responsive to condition or location of a machine part,
    for controlling operation of another part; and see the Notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses for different
    types of conveyors or systems of plural conveyors having operation control
    means responsive to a condition of a conveyor or to a condition of the
    conveyed load.


CLS 83/210
TXT Device under subclass 209 including means to effect actuation of a cutter
    through a tool cycle as a direct or indirect result of the receipt by said
    means of the detected and transmitted signal or impulse.


CLS 83/211
TXT Device under subclass 202 including a detector* for work, a transmitter,
    and means to effect actuation of a cutter through a tool cycle, as a direct
    or indirect result of the receipt by said means of such detected and
    transmitted signal or impulse.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370+,   for similar structure to effect tool movement against work in which
    work movement or stoppage is not recited.


CLS 83/212
TXT Device under subclass 211 in which the detector includes a projection in
    the path of movement of the moving work, which projection halts the work by
    engagement of the work with said projection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262     and 268+, for other means to effect work stoppage by an abutment.


CLS 83/212.1
TXT Device under subclass 202 wherein at least two tools act at a cutting zone,
    one of which tools is stationary and is at all times disposed to engage the
    work, and the other of which tools engages the work during the workfeed
    dwell and which has a cutting plane perpendicular to the direction of work
    movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404.1+, for a device having means to move work from one tool station to
    another, which tool stations are disposed at right angles to one another.

    425+,   for a device which includes means to move the work relative to a
    tool which engages the work in a continuous manner (i.e., the cutting plane
    of the tool is perpendicular to the direction of the work movement).


CLS 83/213
TXT Apparatus under subclass 202 in which more than one tool moves to operate
    on the work, in the same general cutting zone and including means for
    actuating one tool after another.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass excludes patents claiming plural tools at
    different tool stations (separated by a distance equal to at least the
    length of work-feed increment) for which see subclass 255.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes patents for machines wherein
    different tools are actuated in the same general cutting zone in successive
    dwell periods of the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255+,   for a succession of tools operating on the same workpiece or same
    general area of a continuous workpiece, during different dwell periods, and
    see (1) Note above.


CLS 83/214
TXT Apparatus under subclass 213 in which all of the plural tools operate on
    the stopped work before the work again moves.


CLS 83/215
TXT Device under subclass 202 in which the tool, in addition to its advance
    toward, and retraction from, the work in each tool cycle*, undergoes
    another motion (which may be for the purpose of relocating the tool,
    feeding the work, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  The tool may be in noncutting motion while work is being fed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284+,   for a tool which moves with the work during cutting (e.g., a flying
    cutter).


CLS 83/216
TXT Device under subclass 215, wherein the tool is given its additional motion
    during the period in which the work is stationary.

    (1)     Note.  The tool may merely be shifted to a different position
    during one dwell of the work; or may be repeatedly actuated to make a
    plurality of cutting strokes each effective on different positions of the
    work, patents claiming the latter being found in indented subclass 217.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215+,   for a device wherein some of the tool motions may occur during
    movement of the work.

    217,    and see (1) Note above.


CLS 83/217
TXT Device under subclass 216 including means to cause the tool to perform a
    number of cutting strokes while the work is at rest.

    (1)     Note.  Such device is frequently used to make a number of cuts
    across a wide strip of work, with only one tool or a relatively small
    number of tools.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219+,   for a device in which work is moved in different directions between
    successive tool strokes, whereby a plurality of cuts may be made across a
    strip of work during a dwell in the forward advance of the work.


CLS 83/218
TXT Device under subclass 215 including means to cause a tool to move the work
    through all or a part of the work-feed increment, by engagement of tool and
    work during the additional motion of the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226+,   where the tool itself does not engage work to feed it, but a
    work-feed means is actuated by the tool support during advancing or
    retracting movement of the latter.

    284+,   for a device wherein the tool may feed the work while cutting it
    (i.e., a flying cutter).


CLS 83/219
TXT Device under subclass 202 including means to effect successive increments
    of work-feed in different directions, (as when following a contour), in
    presenting work for successive operations by the same tool.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include devices where work can be
    manually shifted in position between cuts while a machine-driven work-feed
    means merely continues to move work in the same direction (as in an
    ordinary sewing machine); See subclass 249 for disclosures of such devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for control of machine functions generally by means responsive to
    indicia on tape or card (i.e., pattern control).

    249,    for feed means modified to facilitate shifting of work by external
    agency, and see (1) Note.

    356,    for periodic tool actuation timed with moving work, with periodic
    lateral shift of work (or tool).

    367,    for movement of work responsive to work-sensing means.


CLS 83/220
TXT Device under subclass 219 wherein there are means to provide a limited
    number of predetermined directions of work-feed and means to choose one of
    said number of directions for each advance of the work.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes devices having means for effecting
    mere reversal of work-feed direction at intervals, as well as machines with
    "zigzag" or "staggered" work-feeds.


CLS 83/221
TXT Device under subclass 202 including means, additional to those means which
    establish the cyclically timed relationship between the tool and work
    movements, which additional means is effective to block or otherwise
    prevent the normal cyclic operation of either tool or work moving means,
    unless the latter two means are located in a desired relationship.

    (1)     Note.  The interlock is an additional feature provided as a safety
    precaution rather than part of the work or tool feed drive.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222,    for a device wherein completion of work-feed motion serves to trip
    a tool actuating means into action, and completion of tool stroke serves to
    restart the work-feed.

    380,    for an interlock which prevents a tool from starting through its
    stroke unless a clamp is in actuated position.

    399+,   for an interlock between a plurality of elements, in general and
    see Notes to subclasses 399+ for other "interlock" subclasses.


CLS 83/222
TXT Device under subclass 202 having means so associated with tool and work
    moving means, that a tool upon reaching a predetermined point in its travel
    causes initiation of the work-feed means, which latter at a predetermined
    point in its travel will initiate the next tool stroke.

    (1)     Note.  The definition of this subclass requires successive
    interactions alternately between tool moving and work moving means (a chain
    reaction), as distinguished from subclass 221, which requires merely
    unilateral control of one such means by the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221,    for interlock between tool actuating means and work moving means.

    225+,   for work-feed controlled by means on tool or tool support.

    231+,   for tool actuation effected or initiated by work-feed element.

    399,    for interlock between any two elements of a machine, and see the
    Search Notes thereunder, for other pertinent subclasses.

    400,    for interlock between two elements plus means to initiate an
    operation upon release of interlock.


CLS 83/223
TXT Device under subclass 202 in which a mechanism, driven by movement of
    either the tool or the work-feed means, is caused to accumulate potential
    energy which is later released to actuate the other of the two means.

    (1)     Note.  This arrangement is found in many small hand-actuated
    machines, wherein, for example, a tool-retracting spring is stressed during
    the tool cutting stroke and part of its stored energy is utilized, during
    the return of the tool, to advance the work into position for the next cut.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229,    for work-feed means driven by tool or tool support on return
    movement of tool.

    582+,   for a constantly urged tool, especially subclasses 588+ for
    return-stroke-biased tools.


CLS 83/224
TXT Device under subclass 223 wherein the motion of some portion of the
    work-feed means is used to accumulate potential energy which is released
    later in the cycle to actuate the tool.

    (1)     Note.  The stored energy for the tool may be released by further
    motion of the work-feed means or by some other agency.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232+,   (tool actuator struck by an element of a work-feed means, during
    nonfeeding motion thereof) for some disclosures of energy storage.


CLS 83/225
TXT Device under subclass 202 including means mounted on the tool or its
    support and effective to initiate the establishment of a driving connection
    (1) from a power source to the work moving means, or (2) from work moving
    means to the work, and/or the disruption of said connection.

    (1)     Note.  The tool-mounted means may serve to drive and/or stop
    thework-feed means, or to control the transmission of power to such means
    from another source.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is distinguished from subclass 262 (which see)
    by the fact that in the latter subclass, the work is directly halted by
    clamping or blocking means (which may be mounted on tool or tool support)
    but thework-feed mechanism continues to move, ineffectively.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262,    and see (2) Note.


CLS 83/226
TXT Device under subclass 225 wherein the
    tool-mounted means provides the motive power for actuating the work-feed
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228,    for an auxiliary work-feed means mounted on a tool or tool support.

    230,    for a device wherein the motion of tool-carried means merely
    effects the halting of work-feed means.

    262,    for work-feed dwell effected by clamping or blocking the moving
    work, without stopping the motion of the feed means proper, and see (2)
    Note to subclass 225.


CLS 83/227
TXT Device under subclass 226 wherein the
    work-feeding means is itself mounted on the tool or tool support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218,    for a device wherein a tool feeds the work while still in contact
    therewith during a cutting stroke.

    228,    for supplemental work-feed means carried by a tool or tool support.


CLS 83/228
TXT Device under subclass 226 which includes a plurality of work moving means
    acting in succession, each such means being capable of moving the work
    through a portion of the required feed increment, one of said feed means
    itself mounted on or integral with the tool or tool support.

    (1)     Note.  Pilot pins which serve to correct the position of slightly
    misplaced work are included, if carried by the tool support.

    (2)     Note.  The supplemental work-feed means may be provided merely to
    correct slight misplacements of the work if an when they should occur.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218,    for a tool which has work-feeding motion (the tool feeds the work
    after engaging it with a cutting stroke).


CLS 83/229
TXT Device under subclass 226 wherein the
    tool-mounted means is brought into operation during the tool's motion away
    from the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223,    for work advanced by release of potential energy accumulated during
    and as a result of tool movement (such work advance may occur during return
    movement of tool).

    257,    for the general case of work advance during return stroke of tool.


CLS 83/230
TXT Device under subclass 225 in which the means mounted on tool or tool
    support is effective at some point in its travel to cause stopping of the
    work moving means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221,    for interlock means to prevent movement of work-feed means except
    in certain positions of tool.

    262,    for dwell caused by clamping or blocking the work, where work-feed
    means is continuously driven.

    268+,   for dwell caused by blocking the work by an abutment (which may be
    carried on or moved by the tool support).

    282,    for (broadly) clamping work during dwell.

    391+,   for interrelated actuation of tool and work-stopping abutment.


CLS 83/231
TXT Device under subclass 202 in which the work engaging and moving element, or
    a portion of the work-feed means driving train which is not common to the
    latter and to the tool driving train, and which moves without producing any
    corresponding motion of the work, is itself, or carries means which is,
    effective to drive, or to establish a power connection for driving, the
    tool feeding mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  Tool feed may be initiated substantially simultaneously with
    arrival of the work-feed mechanism at the end of its feed motion, where it
    appears that the tool is not intended to engage moving work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221,    for interlock between work-moving and tool-moving mechanisms.

    225+,   for work moving means controlled by means on tool or tool support.

    273+,   for intermittent drive type of gearing for work-feed means.

    399+,   for a device in which an element common to the control or actuation
    of work moving and tool actuating means is arranged to initiate or permit
    actuation of one means while preventing actuation of the other means.


CLS 83/232
TXT Device under subclass 231 in which the feeding element or driving portion
    delivers an impact to an element which causes a cutter to start its cutting
    stroke.

    (1)     Note.  Such organizations are common in machines for delivering
    tape, which often are used to feed and cut only a single length or strip of
    tape at each use, but may be used to deliver as many lengths at a time as
    desired.

    (2)     Note.  For machines having positive stop mechanisms requiring
    reinitiation of the mechanism after each cutting cycle, see subclass 203
    supra.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203,    and see (1) Note above.


CLS 83/233
TXT Device under subclass 232 in which the nonfeed motion is in a direction
    opposite to that in which the feeding element or driving portion moves when
    bringing about a feeding movement of the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    399+,   for interlocking relationship between work and tool movers, some of
    these devices permit tool actuation only upon reversal of position of a
    work-feed lever.


CLS 83/234
TXT Device under subclass 202 having means to permit a change in the number of
    stops and starts of the work-feed means between successive actuations of
    the tool actuating means, without necessitating the replacement of any
    machine part to bring about the change.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for manually actuated means to disturb cyclic operation.

    209+,   for work-sensing means to control work-moving or work-stopping
    means.

    232+,   for a manually operated to feed more than one increment of work for
    any one cutting cycle, at the discretion of the operator.

    238+,   for unequal work-feed increments in recurring series.

    241+,   for means to vary magnitude of
    work-feed increment.

    242+,   for multiple-length feed.

    250+,   for means to produce a plurality of work-feed increments per tool
    cycle.


CLS 83/235
TXT Device under subclass 202 wherein means is provided to bring a portion of
    the work adjacent a tool station alternately to a halt and to a condition
    of forward motion by imparting to that portion of the work a succession of
    alternate backward and forward movements while the remainder of the work is
    undergoing continuous forward movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236,    for uninterrupted advance of work from supply source.

    259+,   for a device wherein constantly moving feed elements (e.g.,
    rotating feed rolls) are not always in effective engagement with work.

    262,    for a device wherein work dwell is effected by clamping or blocking
    the movement of a portion of the work without any provision being made for
    halting the movement of other portions thereof.


CLS 83/236
TXT Device under subclass 202 wherein transport means moves work continuously
    into or toward the machine, means being provided to cause or permit
    temporary halting and/or storage of a portion of the work during the
    cutting cycle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205,    for work-feed dwell caused by clamping or blocking the work.

    235,    for work-feed dwell caused by imposing reverse motion on portion of
    flexible moving work.

    280,    for means to transport work to
    work-feed means.

    284+    and 350+, for tool engaging moving work.


CLS 83/237
TXT Device under subclass 202 wherein the tool or an array of tools which are
    actuated during one dwell period has such extent in the direction of
    work-feed that cuts made during successive dwell periods overlap or
    intermingle.

    (1)     Note.  Devices in this subclass are frequently used to shred or cut
    small pieces from a web by serrated cutters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213+,   for possible overlapping cuts made by successively actuated tools.

    249,    for a machine modified to facilitate manual reorientation of
    workpiece, as when cutting or punching along a curved line.

    255+,   for possible overlapping cuts made at plural tool stations.

    916,    for a nibbling machine.


CLS 83/238
TXT Apparatus under subclass 202 so organized that the amount of work fed
    differs from one feeding movement to another, the same amounts being fed in
    later feed movements and in the same order.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220+,   for means to feed work in certain different directions between tool
    strokes.

    250+,   for means to produce a plurality of work-feed increments per tool
    cycle (certain of said increments may be of different extent than others).

    393,    for work-stopping abutment made effective in different positions
    between successive tool strokes.


CLS 83/239
TXT Device under subclass 238 including a movable work support and an
    associated series of detents, to be engaged by cooperating means to stop
    the travel of the support in accordance with the location of such detents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241+,   for means to vary magnitude of
    work-feed increment generally.

    396,    for interrelated tool actuation and means to release work-mover
    stop.

    414,    for a device comprising indexing means to orient a work carrier
    relative to a tool station.


CLS 83/240
TXT Device under subclass 202 wherein means is provided for (1) adjusting the
    work-feed means to alter the amount fed in each increment, or (2) changing
    the position of the work relative to the work-feed means, or (3) changing
    the position of tool or work-feed means relative to the device as a whole,
    or (4) changing the location of one or both of the limits of travel of a
    tool in its cutting or retracting stroke, without necessitating replacement
    of any machine part to bring about such variation.

    (1)     Note.  This does not include
    pattern-controlled adjustments of tool or work-feed, for which see subclass
    71, supra.

    (2)     Note.  This does not include temporary disturbance of cycle by
    manual intervention, for which see subclass 57, supra.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     and see (2) Note, above.

    71,     and see (1) Note, above.

    209+    and 211+, for work-moving or
    work-stopping means controlled by work-sensing means in a machine of
    subclass 202 type.

    234,    for means to vary number of
    work-feed increments between cuts.

    249,    for means enabling the shift of work relative to a work-feed means
    by an operator.

    252,    for means capable of producing an additional work-feed increment by
    intervention of an operator.

    268+,   for work-feed increment limited or determined by work stop.

    657,    677, 696, 699.51+, for adjustable tool or tool support.


CLS 83/241
TXT Means under subclass 240 to vary the length or amount of work fed toward
    the tool at each one of the series of stops and starts of the work which
    characterize the operation of a device of the type of subclass 202, without
    necessitating the replacement of any machine part to bring about such
    variation.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes adjustment of work-feed by varying
    the effective length of a link or shape of a cam, where such link or cam is
    not part of the actual drive to the work-feed means, but is only a control
    element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for machine which stops after cutting a predetermined number of
    products.

    203+,   for unicyclic machine.

    208,    for work-length-determining means driven by the work (e.g.,
    measuring wheel).

    233,    for devices which inherently permit the selection of a length of
    stock to be cut (within a limit) by feeding the amount desired and then
    reversing the feed lever to cause cutting to occur.

    234,    for means to vary the number of
    work-feed increments between tool strokes.

    268,    for feed limited by work stop.

    399+,   for a work-feed actuator or controller which can be manipulated in
    a direction to lock the work-feed means and permit or cause actuation of a
    tool.


CLS 83/242
TXT Device under subclass 241 which functions so to vary the work-feed
    increments that all such increments are whole number multiples of a
    predetermined base length.

    (1)     Note.  Examples are ticket-issuing machines.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    234,    for feeding of variable multiple lengths in stepwise manner between
    successive tool strokes.

    250+,   for means to produce a plurality of work-feed increments between
    tool strokes.


CLS 83/243
TXT Device under subclass 242 wherein the actuation of a work-feed-length
    determining means serves either to drive the cutting device through its
    cycle or to establish a connection to power means which so drives the
    cutting device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203+,   for a unicyclic machine of this type.


CLS 83/244
TXT Device under subclass 241 wherein the length of a work-feed increment may
    be varied by altering the effective dimension of a crank, link, or lever
    arm in the drive train of the work-feed mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are adjustable lost-motion drive linkages.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241+,   for change of work-feed increment by change in length of a member
    of a control (not feed driving) linkage.


CLS 83/245
TXT Device under subclass 244 in which the crank, link or lever arm has a
    motion of revolution in one direction only.

    (1)     Note.  An oscillatory driving link of this type will be found in
    subclass 244.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244,    and see (1) Note above.


CLS 83/246
TXT Device under subclass 241 wherein the length of work-feed increment may be
    varied by altering the contour of that portion of a moving member which
    transmits or receives force to drive the work-feed mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  Typical examples of work-feed adjustments included in this
    subclass are (1) changing the number of teeth used in a mutilated drive
    gear, (2) removing part of the tooth of a worm gear, (3) two cam segments
    in  juxtaposition on a shaft may be made angularly adjustable relative to
    each other.

    (2)     Note.  The adjustable cam or gear must be in the work-feed drive
    train itself, not merely in a control linkage, for which see subclass 241,
    supra.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241+,   for changing magnitude of work-feed increment by altering the
    effective shape of a cam or the like in a timing or control mechanism (not
    transmitting force to drive the work-feed means), and see (2) Note, above.


CLS 83/247
TXT Device under subclass 241 wherein a change in amount of travel of the
    work-feed mechanism is effected by altering the position or location of a
    normally stationary abutment which cooperates with a movable member in the
    work-feed mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include devices having an adjustable
    positioned "stop" located on a moving element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241+,   for an adjustable "stop" carried by a moving element.

    244+,   for work-feed adjustment by shifting the location of the fulcrum
    point of a lever in the work-feed drive train.


CLS 83/248
TXT Device under subclass 240 wherein means is provided for varying the
    location (in the direction of tool travel) of one or both of the limits of
    travel of the tool in its cutting or retracting motion.

    (1)     Note.  Examples are machines which turn out ticket strips - a
    number of incompletely severed tickets in each strip.

    (2)     Note.  The variation may be cyclic or randomly controlled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74+,    for tool adjustment by a monitoring device.

    215+,   for tool which has additional motion (e.g., repositioning motion)
    during cycle.

    368,    for tool adjustment by work-responsive means.

    469+,   for adjustment of position or travel of carrier for rotatable disc
    tool.

    523+,   for tool stroke or positioning adjustments, in general.


CLS 83/249
TXT Device under subclass 202 which has certain parts modified especially to
    enable an operator to shift, reoriented or reposition the work relative to
    the work-feed means.

    (1)     Note.  Such machines may permit the angular repositioning of the
    work about the tool cutting stroke as a center, to enable for example a
    change in the direction of a row of perforations without introducing an
    irregularity in spacing where the change is made.

    (2)     Note.  Means to facilitate loading work into the work-feed means
    may be included (threading means) if it is disclosed as also usable to
    readjust the position of work while the machine is in operation.

    (3)     Note.  Many nibbling machines are found in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    373,    for interrelated tool actuating and work guide moving means.

    415,    for work carrier having additional work-locating means thereon,
    which may shift the work on the carrier.

    455,    for guide adapted to permit maneuvering of work at tool zone.

    916,    for nibbling machines.


CLS 83/250
TXT Device under subclass 202 in whose operation the work is caused to undergo
    more than one advancement and stoppage for each stroke of tool, or is
    advanced successively by different feed means during one tool cycle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111+,   for means to clear the freshly-cut edge of product (cut work) from
    a tool, by moving it relative to the tool, prior to the next work-feed
    increment, thereby in effect affording a plurality of increments between
    successive tool strokes.

    206,    for a work-moving clamp, which follows and supplements an
    approximate work-feed by hand or mechanical means.

    207,    for an actuated abutment which can move work to a final position
    after a preliminary feed of work against the abutment.

    219+,   for a machine wherein the work may be caused to move in different
    directions between successive tool strokes.

    228,    for supplemental work-feed means mounted on tool or tool support.

    234,    for means to vary the number of
    work-feed increments between strokes.

    280+,   for means to move work into the effective range of work-feed means
    proper, and see (4) Note under subclass 251 for the distinction between
    supplemental work-feed means and work transport means.


CLS 83/251
TXT Device under subclass 250 so constructed that work may be moved by more
    than one feed means acting at different times.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes lateral positioning means, for
    instance.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes
    work-feed means which may not be effective in every cycle, such as manually
    actuated means to correct the registry of the work, either by the provision
    of additional work-feed means or by provision of additional actuating means
    for the existing work-feed means.

    (3)     Note.  The search notes under subclass 250 should be reviewed in
    relation to this and indented subclasses.

    (4)     Note.  Supplemental work-feed means, in this and indented
    subclasses, is capable of and is normally utilized for the purpose of
    presenting work in correct amount and proper timed relation to the tool
    station, as distinguished from work transport means which merely forwards
    work to a work-feed means proper and which lacks the requisite timing or
    range of stroke to position the work for operation thereon by the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228,    for supplemental work-feed means mounted on tool or tool support.


CLS 83/252
TXT Device under subclass 251 wherein the supplemental feed means is actuated,
    or the conventional work-feed means is driven through additional motion, by
    the intervention of an operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203+,   for a unicyclic machine in which an operator must intervene to pull
    the work through a certain distance in order to initiate a cutting cycle.

    249,    for means to facilitate manual repositioning or realignment of work.


CLS 83/253
TXT Device under subclass 251 including a supplemental work-feed means which
    functions to move the work against a work-stop located for proper placement
    of the work.

    (1)     Note.  The supplemental feed increment may be in any direction, but
    is limited by engagement of the work by a stop.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207,    for work brought into position by an actuated abutment.

    239,    for unequally spaced ratchet stops associates with a work carrier
    to effect unequal work-feed increments in recurring series.

    268+,   for work-feed against a stop or guide for positioning thereof.


CLS 83/254
TXT Device under subclass 253 provided with means to cause two or more stops to
    become effective in serial relationship to position the work for successive
    tool cycles.

    (1)     Note.  The plurality of work stops are so disposed and/or moved
    that not all of such stops are brought intowork-abutting and stopping
    position for any one tool cycle and the identity of stops in such position
    varies cyclically.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238+,   for means to produce unequal
    work-feed increments in recurring series.

    278,    for some disclosures of work-moving pusher elements which are
    successively effective.

    393,    for work stopping abutment(s) with cyclic means to alter
    work-stopping position between tool strokes.


CLS 83/255
TXT Device under subclass 202 having two or more tools disposed along the path
    of feed movement of work at such locations that each tool operates, in
    sequence and during different dwell periods, upon the same piece of work or
    the same feed-wise segments of indefinite length work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213+,   for plural tools successively actuated in one general cutting zone
    during the same or different dwell periods.

    217,    for a tool arranged to engage the work a number of times during one
    dwell period.

    237,    for a machine whose work-feed increment is less than the dimension
    of a tool array indirection of work-feed, to produce overlapping,
    continuous, or intermingling cuts by the same tool or array of tools.

    272,    for plural work-feed paths in a cutting machine.

    404+,   for means to feed work from one tool station to another.

    620,    for plural tools mounted on and actuated from same support.


CLS 83/256
TXT Device under subclass 255 in which the work is fed in different directions
    to the various tools in succession.

    (1)     Note.  A "change in direction" may be a mere reversal of direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219+,   for a machine capable of feeding work in different directions
    between successive tool actuations.


CLS 83/257
TXT Device under subclass 202 wherein the
    work-feeding motion is timed to take place while the tool is being
    withdrawn from the work after its cutting function has been performed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218,    for a tool which has work-feeding motion in addition to its cutting
    and retraction motion.

    229,    for work-feed means driven by tool or tool support during return
    movement of the tool.


CLS 83/258
TXT Device under subclass 202 wherein the
    work-feed means is driven from a constantly rotating crankshaft through a
    Scotch yoke or connecting rod with no provision for work dwell other than
    the momentary halts that occur when the yoke or connecting rod passes
    through its extreme positions.

    (1)     Note.  The yoke or rod may drive work-feed rolls through a
    doublepawl-and-ratchet arrangement, whereby the feed is driven at each
    forward and each return stroke of the pitman (no half-revolution idle
    period as in a single-ratchet drive).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235,    for work-feed dwell caused by imposing reverse motion on a portion
    of flexible moving work, where all machine parts may be in motion during
    the dwell.


CLS 83/259
TXT Device under subclass 202 which functions to move work by gripping
    engagement between a surface of the work and a surface of a continuously
    rotating reciprocating or oscillating member, the dwell being caused by
    separation of the frictionally engaged surfaces.

    (1)     Note.  Subclass 260, indented hereunder, includes patents
    disclosing mutilated feed rolls to cause the intermittent feed.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes feed grippers which during their
    advancing motion, release the work to effect the dwell as the grippers
    continue to reciprocate or oscillate between advanced and retracted
    positions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259,    for dwell caused by directly clamping or blocking the work.

    260,    and see (1) Note above.

    269,    for slippage of feed means on work, after work has engaged a stop
    or abutment.


CLS 83/260
TXT Device under subclass 259 wherein the continuously driven feed member has a
    frictional work-engaging surface which has been modified, as by cutting
    away portions thereof, to cause intermittent drive of the work by repeated
    engagement and disengagement of such surface therewith.

    (1)     Note.  The dwell is caused by interruption of frictional driving
    engagement between feed element and work surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246,    for work-feed adjustment by changing the effective shape of a
    driving or driven element.

    275,    for a work-feed means whose dwell is produced by intermittent
    engagement of mutilated gearing.


CLS 83/261
TXT Device under subclass 259 wherein the frictional work engaging surface
    moves continuously in a circular or closed oval path.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes patents disclosing opposed
    continuously moving feed rollers or feed belts which are alternately moved
    toward and away from each other to advance and to release the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235,    262, and 269, for other continuously rotating work-feed means in a
    machine of the subclass 202 type.

    284+,   for continuously driven work-feed means in a machine of the flying
    cutter type.

    350+,   for continuously driven work-feed means in a machine wherein no
    provision is made to stop the work.

    436.1+, for a cutting device with a roller to convey work wherein the cut
    is parallel to and during work movement.

    436.3+, for a cutting device with a roller to convey work, generally.


CLS 83/262
TXT Device under subclass 202 wherein feed means continuously advances the work
    toward a position where it is acted on by a clamp or an abutment, which
    stops the movement of the portion of the work in the region of the cutting
    zone, or wherein the movement of such portion is stopped by the tool itself
    in its cutting stroke.

    (1)     Note.  The work usually buckles or compresses during the time the
    clamp or abutment stop is effective and the tool is actuated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207,    for work-stopping abutment which also moves the work to its correct
    position at the tool zone.

    212,    for a work-stopping abutment incorporated in a work-sensing means.

    230,    for clamp or work stop on tool or tool support.

    236,    for work continuously advanced to an intermittent work-feed means.

    253+,   for work-stopping abutment cooperating with a supplemental
    work-feed means.

    268,    for work driven against a locating stop, by work-feeding mechanism
    or by the action of gravity alone, in a machine of the subclass 202 type.

    269+,   for a work-stopping abutment which is effective to halt the work
    while it continues to be biased forwardly by feed means.

    350+,   for tool with stroke transversely of moving work and timed
    therewith, no provision being made for stopping the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 343 for a conveyor a portion of
    which dwells at a work station while the conveyor continues to move along
    other portions of its conveying path.


CLS 83/263
TXT Device under subclass 202 which incorporates means to assure, in connection
    with each starting or stopping of the work, the feeding or advancement of a
    predetermined length of work or the confinement of the rate of change of
    speed of the work to a desired range.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include adjustment of work-feed
    increment, as such, for which see subclasses 241+, supra.

    (2)     Note.  A work-feed means as defined in this subclass is commonly
    used, for example, to prevent undesired, accidental, or unauthorized
    advance of the work during a dwell period, or to assure the full extent of
    advance of the work at each cycle, or to avoid damage to or inaccurate
    advance of the work caused by sudden starts and stops of the work-feed
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    234,    241+, 250+, for feed adjustments.


CLS 83/264
TXT Device under subclass 263 wherein means is provided to prevent the
    overrunning of a work-feed means or its motion during any part of the cycle
    other than while it is being driven.

    (1)     Note.  These devices may be utilized to prevent advance of work by
    tampering or unauthorized use, as in ticket-issuing machines, or may be
    used to handle certain kinds of workpieces with greater precision, reduce
    wastage, etc.

    (2)     Note.  If overrunning is prevented by positive drive trains
    (double-acting cams, etc.), search the pertinent types of work-feeds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221,    399+, for an interlock including control of work-feed means.

    242+,   for a machine characterized by multiple-unit work-feed increments,
    which usually include means to prevent overrun or unauthorized work-feed
    operation.

    274,    for positive stop during dwell.

    416,    for a work conveyor and means to stop same.


CLS 83/265
TXT Device under subclass 263 including means to prevent reversal of direction
    of work-feed means before it has completed a predetermined travel.

    (1)     Note.  The full stroke mechanism is frequently interlocked with the
    tool actuating means to prevent premature tool actuation; patents claiming
    the interlocking feature are originally classified in subclass 221.

    (2)     Note.  In addition to its primary function of preventing underfeed
    of work, full stroke mechanism also prevents the advance of an excessive
    amount of work by repeated actuation of the work-feed means through partial
    strokes between successive tool strokes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209+,   211+, for specific operations similarly controlled in machines of
    the subclass 202 type.

    221,    for interlock between work-feed and tool actuation, and see (1)
    Note above.

    222,    for tool actuation tripped by completion of work-feed and vice
    versa.

    360+,   for operation controlled by means responsive to work.

    416,    for means to stop work-mover.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 17.5 for a full stroke
    compelling mechanism in general.

    81,     Tools, subclass 313 for a full stroke compelling mechanism in a
    plier-type tool.


CLS 83/266
TXT Device under subclass 202 wherein an element of the means which moves the
    work to the tool zone also supports a tool (i.e., functions as a tool
    support as defined in the Definitions of terms for the class).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218,    for tool having work-feeding motion.

    267,    for some patents disclosing a tool mounted on a rotary work carrier.

    322+,   for work-feeder mounted on support for flying cutter.

    566+,   for tool which moves work to and     against cooperating tool.


CLS 83/267
TXT Device under subclass 202 provided with means (e.g., an indexing member) to
    carry the work through at least a portion of a circular path while in
    engagement with holding means, the work being acted upon by a tool while
    held on said means.

    (1)     Note.  The presence of work-clamping means on the rotary member
    distinguishes it from a feed roll.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323,    for work-feed means carried by orbitally moving tool support, in a
    flying cutter.

    325,    for work gripper on endless belt work carrier in flying cutter
    machine.

    411+,   for work carrier guided about axis fixed relative to tool station.

    439,    for means to guide work for pivotal motion about a fixed axis in
    the vicinity of a tool.


CLS 83/268
TXT Device under subclass 202 provided with passive means which serve as an
    obstacle to limit movement of work in a given direction.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes machines wherein the feed means moves
    the work to an inclined track, where it slides down against a stop, or
    wherein the work merely drops against such stop after being brought into
    the vicinity by feed means, or wherein the feed means drives the work
    against the stop.

    (2)     Note.  In some cases, the work is caused or permitted to move back
    against an abutment which positions it for cutting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207,    for actuated abutment which positions work prior to tool stroke.

    253+,   for work moved against a stop by a supplemental work moving means.

    391+,   for a work-stopping abutment actuated in timed relation to tool
    stroke.

    396,    for work-mover stop actuated in timed relation to tool stroke.

    414,    for means to stop work-mover, in general.

    467+,   for a work-stopping abutment not claimed as functionally related to
    a tool.


CLS 83/269
TXT Device under subclass 268 wherein the feed means continues to move (and
    slips on the work), upon work contact with a stop element, the frictional
    driving engagement of the feed means with the work being overcome
    (interrupted) by the halting of the work in the feeding area.

    (1)     Note.  Devices found in this subclass provide for slippage of the
    feed means on the blocked work rather than slippage at some point in the
    drive train.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262,    for continuously driven feed means and work clamp or stop, with no
    provision for slippage (work must buckle up or distort).

    350+,   for continuously fed work acted upon by a transversely moving tool,
    with no provision for slippage (work must buckle up or distort) and work
    movement is checked only momentarily as an incidental effect of contact
    therewith of the tool.


CLS 83/270
TXT Device under subclass 202 wherein a work guideway and feed means are
    located both at one side of the work path, leaving the other side of the
    path unobstructed.

    (1)     Note.  Machines thus modified are capable of operating on a very
    wide object or strip, also can operate at or near the periphery of an
    irregularly shaped object, such as a shoe sole.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219+,   for variable direction of work-feed from cycle to cycle.

    249,    for machine modified to facilitate manual shift or repositioning of
    work.

    373,    for interrelated tool actuation and work guide movement.

    445,    for work guide adapted to permit manual shift of work relative to a
    tool station.

    914,    for flash trimmer.


CLS 83/271
TXT Device under subclass 202 wherein provision is made in the work-feed
    mechanism to keep it from interfering with or being touched by the moving
    tool.

    (1)     Note.  Conveyor belts with openings registering with the tool,
    belts with loop at the cutting station, etc., are included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266,    for tool supported on work-feed means.


CLS 83/272
TXT Device under subclass 202 including separate feed means for advancing two
    or more lines of web or stock material, or successions of workpieces along
    different routes to the same tool or to different tools.

    (1)     Note.  This does not include separate rolls or belts or
    sectionalized rolls on common shafts, which feed work in the same general
    plane or along converging or diverging paths.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256,    for work being fed in different directions to and between a
    plurality of tools for sequential operations by said tools on the same
    general areas of the work.


CLS 83/273
TXT Device under subclass 202 wherein step-by-step work-feed motion is obtained
    by means of modified rotary gearing which periodically interrupts the flow
    of power to the feed means during continued rotation of a portion of the
    gearing.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes only those devices wherein a rotary
    gear or element rigid therewith drives thework-feed means intermittently.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241+,   for disclosures of work-feed adjustment by altering an effective
    number of teeth in intermittent gearing which controls, but does not drive,
    awork- feed device.

    246,    for an interrupted gear drive wherein the effective number of
    driving gear teeth is adjustable to vary thework- feed increment.


CLS 83/274
TXT Device under subclass 273 in which the gearing has portions which interrupt
    the motion of a driven portion thereof and hold it at a standstill for
    predetermined intervals during the rotation of the driving gear.

    (1)     Note.  Examples are Geneva stop mechanism, and the "Drunken Worm".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264,    for means in general, to prevent random or excessive feed movement.


CLS 83/275
TXT Device under subclass 273 in which the increments of work-feed correspond
    to toothed portions of the periphery of a rotatable body which cooperates
    with another toothed rotatable body in the driving train for the work
    contacting feeding means, and the intervals of time during which the feed
    means is not driven correspond to untoothed portions of the first named
    rotatable body.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass, the gearing merely periodically interrupts
    the flows of power to work-feed means, but is not designed to lock the
    latter in position during the dwell intervals, for which see subclass 274.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241+,   for adjustable gearing which controls the timing of work-feed drive
    means but which does not itself drive said means.

    246,    for some disclosures of mutilated gearing in work-feed drives.

    274,    and see (1) Note above.


CLS 83/276
TXT Means under subclass 202 including a member which engages and advances
    bodily with the work towards the cutter.

    (1)     Note.  The work-feed means may reciprocate; i.e., travel along the
    same path on its return stroke as it traveled in its feeding stroke; or it
    may return from its feeding stroke along a different path (such as a "four
    motion" feed, or an endless belt conveyor).

    (2)     Note.  The work engaging member may undergo a return movement after
    each feed increment, or after a succession of work-feed increments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    267,    for means to move work step-by-step in an arcuate path said means
    having no distinct (e.g., reverse) return movement.

    409+,   for other rectilinear work-mover means including a
    work-constrainer.


    435.11+, for a cutting device having a rectilinearly moving work carriage
    and tool adapted to cut parallel to the direction of and during work
    movement.

    437.1+, for a cutting device having a rectilinearly moving work carriage
    and a tool, generally.

    730,    for a cutting device including a rectilinearly moving work carriage
    and includingmeans to cause the cutting device to make plural passes
    through a diminishing workpiece, including means to effect incremental
    movement toward the plane of cut.


CLS 83/277
TXT Device under subclass 276 including opposed solid members arranged to hold
    frictionally a portion of the work to draw the work with them and thus
    present the work to the tool.

    (1)     Note.  A gripper is a device comprising a plurality of opposed jaws
    or surface elements relatively movable to engage opposed surfaces of a
    workpiece and thereby apply sufficient force to enable advancement of the
    workpiece by said jaws or surfaces through their frictional engagement with
    said workpiece, i.e., in a direction substantially parallel to the surface
    elements or jaw faces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    267,    for rotary work carrier comprising work grippers or abutments.

    276+,   for rectilinear or oscillatory feed device which holds work by
    other than frictional gripping or positive abutting engagement (e.g.,
    suction or magnetic holders.

    294,    319, 323, 325, for work-feeding grippers in flying-cutting machines.

    409+,   for work-constraining means on workmover.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 468.2+ and 470.1+ for a
    conveyor having load-gripping members.


CLS 83/278
TXT Device under subclass 276 in which the
    work-feed means comprises a member which engages in an opening in the work
    or which positively pushes the work.

    (1)     Note.  Impaling points or fingers which form their own recesses or
    openings in the work are included here.

    (2)     Note.  Push bars and the like which directly engage and push the
    work are included here.  The "abutment surface" engaged by such pusher may
    be the rear edge of the work as well as any other salient portion.

    (3)     Note.  A feed member having a rough toothed, or corrugated surface
    to engage work, if opposed by another moving surface so as to clamp the
    work, would be classified in subclass 277, but if opposed only by a
    stationarywork-supporting surface or work guide, or by the mere weight of
    the work itself, would generally be regarded as imbedded in the work or
    abutting it within the scope of the definition of subclass 278.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277,    and see (1) Note above.

    423,    for projections on work mover (e.g., pinwheel).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 388 and 854+ for a conveyor
    having a holder that contacts the interior of the conveyed load, subclasses
    692+ for a conveyor having load impalers, and subclasses 717+ and others
    for a conveyor that pushes a load supported on a separate platform.


CLS 83/279
TXT Device under subclass 202 including active or passive means which move or
    exert control on the work (other than by merely supporting it against
    gravity) before it reaches themeans-to-feed it to the cutting zone.

    (1)     Note.  The first named means (guiding, positioning, or transport)
    is not adequate of itself to present the work properly to the tool zone.

    (2)     Note.  The first named means may merely orient or "square up" the
    work being presented to the work-feed means, or it may control the timing
    of work presentation to the latter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236,    for means to effect uninterrupted advance of work from supply
    source to work-feed means.

    250+,   for means to produce a plurality of work-feed increments per tool
    cycle.

    255+,   for means to feed work successively to plural tools.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses relating to plural
    conveyors which successively carry a load.


CLS 83/280
TXT Device under subclass 279 which comprises means to carry work from a source
    of supply and transfer it to the means effective to present the work to the
    cutter.

    (1)     Note.  The transport means serves to advance work to the work-feed
    means proper, but is not adequate in itself to move the work in correct
    amount and proper timed relationship to the tool station, and is thus
    distinguishable from a work-feed means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236,    for continuous advance of work to a feeding and cutting machine
    having work-feed dwell.

    250+,   for means to produce a plurality of work-feed increments in a tool
    cycle.


CLS 83/281
TXT Device under subclass 280 which includes mechanism to engage articles,
    usually one at a time, withdraw them from position in a magazine or stack
    holder, and present them successively to a work advancing means or to the
    work-feed means proper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    417,    for such work-picking means associated with other types of tool
    andwork-feeding means.


CLS 83/282
TXT Device under subclass 202 including opposed solid means to contact the
    halted work and maintain or retain the work frictionally in a fixed
    position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206,    for a machine of the subclass 202 type which employs a clamp to
    move the work into position.

    259+,   264, 277, for a disclosure of a device having a work clamping
    function in addition to its primary function of feeding work or controlling
    the feed of work.

    262,    for a machine whose work-feed dwell is caused by clamping the work.

    294,    319, 323, for a device to grip moving work in a flying cutter type
    of machine.

    375+,   for a work clamp actuated by or in timed relation to the motion of
    a tool or the tool feeding means.

    452+,   for a cutting device having a clamp associated therewith, in
    general.


CLS 83/283
TXT Device under subclass 202 wherein the tool is caused to start from rest in
    a retracted position and travel through its cutting cycle returning to its
    initial position and to stop there, by automatic clutching and declutching
    means while other machine parts continue in motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58+,    for randomly actuated stopping means, which includes many
    disclosures of a clutch in a tool actuating drive train, some of these
    disclosures including a clutch of the one-revolution type.

    203+,   for unicyclic operation of a cutting machine of the type wherein a
    tool engages the work during the dwell period of an intermittent work-feed.

    210,    211+, 369, 370+, for tool actuation controlled by work-sensing
    means.

    285+,   for an intermittently initiated flying cutter action.

    359,    for tool actuation controlled by means responsive to product.

    380,    for sequencing control of interrelated clamp and tool means.

    484     and 524+, for unicyclic tool actuation.


CLS 83/284
TXT Device under the class definition which includes means to move one or more
    tools into cutting engagement with the work while the work is being moved
    to and through a cutting zone to produce (1) spatially unconnected, or (2)
    undulant (e.g., zigzag) cuts, and in which the tool's movement includes, as
    a necessary factor, motion in the direction of such work movement.

    (1)     Note.  These devices are commonly known as "flying cutters".

    (2)     Note.  See the Definitions of Terms, section VIII of the Class
    Definition, for the definition of "flying".

    (3)     Note.  The direction of movement of the work, to and through the
    cutting zone; i.e., feed direction, is determined by the law of operation
    of the disclosed machine, even though the work-feed means is not claimed.
    Accordingly, this and the indented subclasses do not require that means to
    feed the work be claimed.  Thus, patents for means to cut manually fed work
    may be included here if the other requirements of the definition are met.

    (4)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses are limited to devices
    which engage the work so that cuts made by the same tool are spaced from
    each other or produce a nonrectilinear slot or slit. Patents for cutters
    which continuously engage the work, even though they have a component of
    motion in the direction of work-feed which has no affect on the resultant
    cut, such as band knives and rotary disc slitters, will be found in other
    areas of the schedule.  The test is whether the "flying" motion has any
    affect on the desired shape of cut.

    (5)     Note.  Since indented subclasses 321+ is limited to patents which
    disclose a tool having a cutting blade which moves in an orbital path, this
    subclass, (284) has been chosen as the residual repository for those
    patents which disclose an orbiting anvil and a cooperating nonorbiting
    bladed tool, and which do not disclose a feature set out in the schedule
    above subclass 321.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37+,    for corresponding methods of cutting.

    201,    for an endless flexible band knife; and see (4) Note above.

    350+,   for a device in which the tool has a stroke which is timed with
    respect to moving work, which stroke does not have a component in the
    direction of work-feed at the time of cut.

    469+,   for a rotary disc cutter; and see (4) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 70+, 129+, 185+, and 203+ for a "flying
    cutter" means in a moving work metal deforming apparatus.

    82,     Turning, subclass 53.1, for a cut-off means having a motion
    component in the direction of work-feed.

    101,    Printing, appropriate subclasses, for similar apparatus for
    treating moving work, as by printing or embossing rather than by cutting.

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), subclass 50, for a selective
    cutting device having flying cutting tools.


CLS 83/285
TXT Device under subclass 284 wherein there is provided a mechanism which
    periodically starts a tool from a position of rest, moves the tool to and
    through the work, and brings the tool to rest for a dwell period.


CLS 83/286
TXT Device under subclass 285 provided with a detector* for work, a
    transmitter*, and means to initiate or effect a tool action as a direct or
    indirect result of the receipt by said means of a detected and transmitted
    signal or impulse.

    (1)     Note.  For convenience in terminology, in this and indented
    subclasses, the compound movement of a flying tool will be referred to in
    terms of two components, one being the tool "flying movement" (defined in
    the definition of terms for the class), and the other being the tool "feed
    movement)" (defined as that component of motion directed only toward the
    work, i.e., toward the other tool of a tool pair). The distinction between
    the named components is not an arbitrary one; in the schedule, and in the
    placement of patents, components are significant as to those patents which
    disclose separate actuating means to give the tool its respective flying
    and feed movements.  Thus a patent to a rotary cutter of the "lawnmower"
    type (such as is found, per se, in subclasses 331+ below) and including
    work-responsive tool actuating means, will be found in a generic subclass
    such as 290 rather than in a subclass characterized by the type of feed or
    flying movement such as subclasses 291 or 292, respectively.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass (286) are patents disclosing tools
    revolving about a fixed axis (e.g., lawnmower type), which tools are
    actuated by a mechanically operating detector and transmitter.  For similar
    structure wherein the detector is a photocell, see subclass 289; and
    wherein it is otherwise part of an electrical circuit, see subclasses 290+,
    indented hereunder.

    (3)     Note.  For other subclasses providing for work-sensing mechanism
    and control means responsive thereto, see subclasses 399+ under the heading
    "Search This Class, Subclass".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    308+,   for patents in which the flying component of the tool's motion is
    derived entirely from the engagement of the tool with the moving work.


CLS 83/287
TXT Device under subclass 286 provided with means to alter the dimension of the
    product in the direction of work movement.

    (1)     Note.  For the purpose of this subclass, the length of a product is
    that dimension defined above regardless of the magnitude of that dimension
    relative to other dimensions; thus, as to this subclass, the length of a
    product may be smaller than the width thereof if short pieces are cut from
    relatively wide work.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of the means defined above are means to effect (1)
    variation of the position of the work sensor relative to the cutter and (2)
    variation of the time elapsed between the sensing of work and the
    initiation of the tool action in response to said sensing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    363,    for other product length changing apparatus responsive to
    work-sensing means.


CLS 83/288
TXT Device under subclass 287 provided with means to alter the longitudinal
    dimension of the first product cut from a workpiece with respect to the
    longitudinal dimension of the remaining products cut from the same
    workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  The work "crop" is an art term referring to that end portion
    of a workpiece which is so irregular in contour or composition as to be
    considered waste material.  To produce regular sheets from a rolled slab,
    for instance, waste or "crop" may be trimmed from the leading and/or
    trailing end of the slab, the intermediate cuts producing the usable
    products which are usually of longer dimension than the crop and of similar
    dimension as between successive usable products.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein are patents also disclosing means to change
    the length of intermediate products so that a short trailing "crop" end may
    be cut.


CLS 83/289
TXT Device under subclass 286 in which the detector includes a means responsive
    to light to energize an electrical circuit, and the detection of work is
    effected by a change in the quantity or quality of the light received by
    said means either directly (as by work's moving between said means and the
    source of said light), or indirectly (as by reflection from the work).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of the means referred to above are vacuum tubes and
    other light-sensitive detectors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72+,    for a photoelectric work sensor in a "self-regulating" device.

    365,    for other apparatus responsive to photoelectric work-sensing means
    and see Notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+, for photocell detector and circuit.


CLS 83/290
TXT Device under subclass 286 in which the transmitter includes an electrical
    circuit to initiate cutter action, and in which the detector includes a
    make-break portion in said circuit.

    (1)     Note.  Contact of the work with the trip switch may be either
    direct, or indirect, as by engagement of the work with a lever or linkage
    connected to the trip switch.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass (290) are patents disclosing
    rotary flying tools of the type classified in subclasses 331+, which tools
    are actuated by a trip switch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    372,    for other operating means responsive to trip switch work-sensing
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity: Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.13+,
    61.19+, 61.41, and 61.42+, for a detector switch, per se.


CLS 83/291
TXT Device under subclass 290 including a cutter having a means for
    accomplishing its feed movement, separate and distinct from a means for
    accomplishing its flying movement, whose feed movement (at least) is
    started by the work-responsive detector and transmitter.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note to subclass 286 for definition of the terms
    "feed movement" and "flying movement".


CLS 83/292
TXT Device under subclass 291 in which the actuation of both (1) the means for
    accomplishing flying movements, and (2) the means for accomplishing feed
    movement, is initiated by the same signal or impulse.


CLS 83/293
TXT Device under subclass 286 provided with a cutter having a means for
    accomplishing its flying movement, separate and distinct from a means for
    accomplishing its feed movement, whose flying movement (at least) is
    started by a work responsive detector and transmitter.


CLS 83/294
TXT Device under subclass 293 provided with means, connected to and traveling
    with the cutter and/or its support, to firmly secure the work to the
    support for the period during which the work is moving and the tool is
    cutting.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are patents disclosing devices wherein a
    work-responsive flying gripper is actuated to secure the flying support to
    the moving work, thus effecting flying movement of the cutter.  Also
    included herein are patents disclosing work-responsive mechanism to actuate
    concurrently a driving means for the flying movement of the tool and a work
    gripping means.


CLS 83/295
TXT Device under subclass 293 including means responsive to the speed of the
    work or of the work-moving means for regulating the speed of the means for
    accomplishing flying movement of the cutter.


CLS 83/296
TXT Device under subclass 285 provided with means for changing the number of
    occurrences of tool-action-starting with respect to either a given duration
    of time or to the passage of a given amount of work past the tool.

    (1)     Note.  Patents disclosing the adjustment defined above may disclose
    that this adjustment is for the purpose of changing the length of product
    cut from the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    287+,   for work-responsive means to vary length of product of a "flying"
    cutter.

    369,    for work-driven measuring means to cut different product lengths,
    in general.


CLS 83/297
TXT Device under subclass 296 in which the means to vary the frequency of the
    tool-action-starting mechanism includes at least two means, one of said
    means comprising an element which, when activated, effects the initiation
    of the tool action, the other of said means comprising a plurality of pin
    members moving in a closed path, one or more of which pin members along the
    closed path may be selectively positioned so as to describe a second closed
    path (parallel to the first named path) which intersects the location of
    such element at the selected position(s) along the first named path,
    whereby the positioned pin member(s) will intermittently or periodically
    engage and move, or otherwise activate, the element in the desired
    frequency of occurrences.

    (1)     Note.  The positionable pins may be mounted on a wheel or endless
    chain for movement in the first named closed path, and any selected pin may
    be shifted into the second closed path either manually or by mechanical
    means.


CLS 83/298
TXT Device under subclass 284 in which both the work-feed means and the means
    to move the tool through a cutting action or cycle are provided with
    independent power trains, each of which trains has a speed changing means
    which is adjustable to vary the speed of its driven element (tool or work
    respectively), and a common mechanism is provided to interdependently
    regulate the several speed changers so that an adjustment of one will be
    accompanied by an adjustment of the other.

    (1)     Note.  A mere common drive does not fall within the meaning of this
    subclass, and will be found below; e.g., in subclass 339.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    311,    for a device to regulate the tool speed of flying cutters.

    312+,   for a device to regulate the work-feed of flying cutters.

    339,    for interconnected work-feed and cutter drives, and see (1) Note
    above.


CLS 83/299
TXT Device under subclass 284 wherein means is provided to change the lapse of
    time between the initiation of one tool cycle and the initiation of a
    subsequent tool cycle and which at the same time maintains the flying speed
    of the tool the same as it was before the change was made.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    311,    for a device which merely regulates the tool speed of a flying
    cutter.

    324,    for means to vary the tool speed cyclically.


CLS 83/300
TXT Device under subclass 284 wherein more than one flying cutter is provided,
    and one of the cutters makes a cut in the work which is different from the
    cut made on the same work by the other cutter or cutters.

    (1)     Note.  The difference in tool structures is not merely one
    dimensional extent.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein, for example, are flying cutters which
    sequentially punch and cut off the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    303,    for plural separately mounted flying cutters which may make similar
    cuts in the work.


CLS 83/301
TXT Device under subclass 284 wherein there is provided both a cutter of the
    type defined in subclass 284 and a cutter of this class not falling within
    that definition.


CLS 83/302
TXT Device under subclass 301 wherein the other cutter makes a continuous cut
    in the work through its thickness in a direction which is substantially
    parallel to the direction of movement of the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    408,    for means to move the work between a slitting station and a
    transverse cutter station.

    425+,   for a slitter, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 525+ for longitudinal
    slitting of material being wound.


CLS 83/303
TXT Device under subclass 284 wherein more than one tool of the type defined in
    284 is provided and the tools are independently supported for separate
    operation in the device.

    (1)     Note.  Included, for example, are two rotary flying cutters, each
    rotated at a different speed, and each operating on a different portion of
    a web which has been slit into two portions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300,    for plural diverse flying cutters.


CLS 83/304
TXT Device under subclass 284 wherein the tool is cyclically operated, and
    wherein a means is provided to permit or prohibit cutting during the cycle.

    (1)     Note.  A tool pass (as applied in the title and definition of this
    and indented subclass) refers to a sweep of the tool along with the work
    and including both its flying motion and whatever feed motion is present.
    A pass may be rendered ineffective to cut the work by a change in tool
    motion (either in its flying or feed movements), or by a change of
    work-feed motion, or both.

    (2)     Note.  Patents disclosing operator actuated means to render a tool
    pass ineffective will be found here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for a device in which the cyclic operation of the cutter is stopped
    by an intervening force and is resumed upon release of the force.

    306+,   for a device in which the work is shifted laterally into the path
    of the cutter to effect a cut.


CLS 83/305
TXT Devices under subclass 304 wherein means is provided to cause a cutter to
    make a plurality of passes at the work in the direction ofwork-feed, and
    the said means causes the work to be cut in certain of the passes and not
    to be cut in other passes according to a predetermined pattern.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304+,   for a flying cutter having manually operated means to render a
    cutter pass ineffective.

    306+,   for a work shifter which deflects the work out of a noncutting feed
    path into the path of the tool.

    528,    for a device having means to move a tool away from the cutting
    plane while the tool continues to cycle.


CLS 83/306
TXT Device under subclass 284 wherein is provided a means at or near the cutter
    which bodily moves the work at an angle to the existing direction of
    work-feed, into and out of the path of the cutter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304,    for a flying cutter combined with means which are manually operated
    to render a cutter pass ineffective.


CLS 83/307
TXT Device under subclass 306 wherein sensing means responsive to advancing
    work causes the actuation of the work shifter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286+,   for a device to initiate the tool action in response to a sensing
    of the work.

    399+,   and the Notes thereunder for the loci of other patents disclosing a
    device actuated by a work sensor.


CLS 83/307.1
TXT Device under subclass 284 wherein the flying cutter is an elongated member
    having a diameter which is relatively insignificant as compared to its
    length, which member enters the work in a direction perpendicular to the
    axis of the member and produces a severance of the work without any
    appreciable flow of material.

    (1)     Note.  Because of the "planeless" nature of wire cutters, devices
    embodying such cutters have structural and operational features peculiar
    only to such devices.  Such features (e.g., wire guides, tool infeed means)
    will be found in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200.1,  for a cutting device which operates by increasing the tension on a
    work-enclosing wire.

    651.1+, for a wire, cutting tool, per se.


CLS 83/307.2
TXT Device under subclass 307.1 wherein the wire tool is mounted on a tool
    support, which support moves back and forth in a direction parallel to the
    direction of the moving work.


CLS 83/307.3
TXT Device under subclass 307.2 wherein the tool support, in addition to its
    reciprocating movement, also rotates the tool about an axis which is
    parallel to the direction of movement of the work.


CLS 83/308
TXT Device under subclass 284 wherein means is provided to move the tool or a
    member connected to the tool into contact with or in the path of the moving
    work, so that the tool or member is moved (e.g., dragged or pulled) along
    by the work at the same speed as the work, and this contact is the sole
    motive force which moves the tool in the direction of work-feed at the time
    of cutting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222,    for a tool of the type there classified in which the tool motion
    initiateswork-feed and vice versa.


CLS 83/309
TXT Device under subclass 308 wherein the tool is resilient, and wherein the
    tool gives or bends in the direction of work-feed when it contacts the work
    and springs back to a ready position when disengaged from the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    542,    for means to move or permit movement of tool through cutting cycle
    by deforming a resilient tool or tool support.


CLS 83/310
TXT Device under subclass 284 wherein there is provided adjacent the cutter a
    holding or confining element for the work, and this element moves
    coincidentally with the cutter in the direction of work-feed during the
    cutting cycle to carry the weight of the work or steady it.

    (1)     Note.  The flying supports classified in this subclass are often
    used when delicate or fragile material such as paper straw tubes are cut.

    (2)     Note.  The devices in this subclass are distinguished from the
    devices in subclasses 319, 322, and 325 below in that the latter not only
    guide or support the work against gravity, but also positively move the
    work in feed direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    319,    and see (2) Note above.

    322,    and see (2) Note above.

    325,    and see (2) Note above.

    373,    for other types of tools having interrelated tool feed and work
    guide moving means.


CLS 83/311
TXT Device under subclass 284 including means to vary the flying speed of the
    cutter.

    (1)     Note.  Devices which increase the flying speed of rotary cutters by
    increasing the effective radius of the cutters are not here but in
    subclasses 331+ below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for a method of cyclically varying the tool feed.

    295,    for means controlling flying speed dependent on work speed.

    298,    for interrelated control of work-feed and tool speed.

    312+,   for a device having work-feed speed regulation.

    331+,   and see (1) Note above.


CLS 83/312
TXT Device under subclass 284 wherein means is provided to vary the rate at
    which the work is advanced to the cutter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263+,   for means to control the magnitude or acceleration of work-feed to
    the type of tool there classified.

    298,    for a device having interrelated controls for varying both cutter
    and feed speed.

    429,    for means to effect difference between rate of work-feed and speed
    of a nonflying tool in continuing contact therewith.


CLS 83/313
TXT Device under subclass 312 wherein means is provided to change the rate at
    which the work is advanced during each cycle of the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for a method of cyclically varying the work-feed.

    324,    for means to cyclically vary the tool speed of an orbitally moving
    tool.


CLS 83/314
TXT Device under subclass 284 which includes a resilient or elastic element
    connected to the tool or its supporting structure to resist movement in a
    work-feed direction, and which element urges the tool back to its initial
    position after the work has been cut.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    582+,   for a constantly urged (e.g., spring biased) tool or tool support.


CLS 83/315
TXT Device under subclass 284 in which the tool or its support is mounted on a
    member which is pivoted to swing back and forth, along the path of work
    movement about such pivot as an axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258+,   for the type of cutter there classified wherein the feed means has
    an oscillatory motion.

    491+,   for a rotatable disc cutter on an oscillating standard.


CLS 83/316
TXT Device under subclass 315 in which two tools cooperate to produce a cut,
    and the tools are mounted on the same pivoted flying member so as to
    oscillate about the same point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    320,    for plural tools mounted on the same rectilinearly shuttling
    carrier.


CLS 83/317
TXT Device under subclass 316 in which one of the cooperating tools is
    pivotally mounted to move independently on the oscillating flying member on
    the backward movement of such member so as not to engage the work on the
    backward movement of the flying member.


CLS 83/318
TXT Device under subclass 284 which includes a means on which the tool or its
    support is mounted, and which means is caused to travel back and forth in a
    straight line path adjacent the path of the work-feed, and wherein the
    cutting tool is caused to move cyclically into and out of engagement with
    the work during its forward travel to cut the work.


CLS 83/319
TXT Device under subclass 318 in which there is means other than the tool to
    temporarily fasten the work to the carrier during the movement of the
    carrier in the work-feed direction.

    (1)     Note.  The clamping may be effected by a member which serves as an
    anvil in the cutting operation or by a part of a tool other than the
    cutting edge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186,    for means to secure hollow work to a movable tool support.

    308+,   for a flying cutter in which the flying motion of the tool is
    derived solely by its contact with the work.

    310,    for a flying work support or guide.


CLS 83/320
TXT Device under subclass 318 in which two tools cooperate to produce a cut and
    both are mounted on the same carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    316+,   for a device in which both tools are mounted upon an oscillating
    standard.


CLS 83/321
TXT Device under subclass 284 wherein the cutter blade travels in a closed loop.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201,    for an endless flexible band knife which travels in a closed loop
    and continuously engages work.

    331+,   for a cutter which travels in a circular path.


CLS 83/322
TXT Device under subclass 321 wherein the cutter support, or means mounted on
    the cutter support advances the work through the cutting zone or holds the
    work while it is being cut.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225+,   for work-feed controlled by means mounted on the tool or tool
    support where the tool engages the work during a dwell on intermittent
    work-feed.


CLS 83/323
TXT Device under subclass 322 in which the
    work-feeder includes means to grasp or hold the work immobile with respect
    to the feeder.


CLS 83/324
TXT Device under subclass 321 including means to change the peripheral speed of
    the cutter during a portion (only) of the tool cycle.

    (1)     Note.  This feature is ordinarily utilized to enable changes in the
    length of the workpiece to be cut off, without necessitating changes in
    speed of work-feed or other major adjustments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for methods of varying the tool and/or work-feed cyclically.

    313,    for means to vary the work speed cyclically.


CLS 83/325
TXT Device under subclass 321 in which a continuous belt includes or has
    cooperating therewith a means to grasp the work and advance it.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are devices having two feed belts
    clamping the work between themselves in order to advance the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322+,   for a tool carried work-feeding clamp.


CLS 83/326
TXT Device under subclass 321 in which the tool or its support is mounted on a
    flexible, continuous, closed loop structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    661,    for an endless band or belt-type tool, per se.

    788+,   for an endless flexible band knife machine.


CLS 83/327
TXT Device under subclass 321 wherein there is provided a mechanism which moves
    the cutting tool in a curved path immediately before, during and
    immediately after its work cutting operation and, at all times during this
    operation, maintains the tool in planes which are parallel to each other.


CLS 83/328
TXT Device under subclass 327 wherein a pair of tools coact with each other to
    cut the work.


CLS 83/329
TXT Device under subclass 321 wherein the tool is a relatively thin member of
    generally circular cross section mounted to rotate about an axis extending
    thickness-wise therethrough, and wherein means is provided to move the axis
    in an orbital path.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are tools having saw-toothed or
    serrated peripheral edges.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    425+,   for a rotary disc cutter in combination with means to move work
    thereto, and whose axis does not itself have an orbital motion.

    469+,   for a rotatable disc tool pair (or tool and carrier) whose axes (or
    axis) do not have an orbital motion during the cutting operation.


CLS 83/330
TXT Device under subclass 329 wherein the disc is journaled to rotate about its
    axis, but no power means is provided to effect such rotation; any rotation
    which does not take place is due solely to the engagement of the cutter
    with the work.


CLS 83/331
TXT Device under subclass 321 in which the cutter blade tool is mounted on an
    axis of rotation to travel in a circle about such axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315+,   for a cutter which oscillates back and forth in an arc of a circle.

    321+,   for a cutter which travels in a closed loop which is not a circle
    and see the Notes thereof for search references.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, particularly subclasses 205+, 240, 276, 292, 307, and 319
    for rotary cutters of the type there classified.


CLS 83/332
TXT Device under subclass 331 in which the tool has an annular cutting edge
    which extends around only a portion of the circumference of the tool
    support, and which edge extends in a plane parallel to the direction of
    work-feed.

    (1)     Note.  Rotary punches; i.e., tools having a plurality of punches
    mounted around the periphery of the tool support have not been considered
    as slitters or slotters for this subclass, but have been classified in
    other subclasses under 331 on the structure claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    425,    for a rotatable disc tool in combination with means to move work
    thereto, which tool cuts a continuous slit or slot in the work as the work
    is fed past the cutter.

    469+,   for a rotatable disc tool pair or tool and carrier.

    676,    for a rotatable disc tool, per se.


CLS 83/333
TXT Device under subclass 331 provided with a cutter including a cutting edge
    on the periphery of said cutter, in which a development (in the sense of
    the term as used in descriptive geometry) of the cutting edge from said
    periphery into a plane forms a zigzag or sinuous line.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are rotatable circular cutters known in the
    art as "pinkers", "pinking wheels" and "pinking machines".  The terms are
    so well known that the shape of the edge as defined above is rarely recited
    precisely; hence mere recitation in the claim (s) of such art terms or
    similar terms is considered sufficient for classification herein.

    (2)     Note.  Patents in which the cut is of the form known as "scalloped"
    will also be found herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    428,    for a device which produces an undulant cut by reciprocating a
    slitting blade laterally of the direction of work-feed.

    918,    for pinking digest.


CLS 83/334
TXT Device under subclass 331 in which means is provided to cause a cutter to
    start from a position of rest, rotate sufficiently to cause one cutting
    operation to take place, and then assume a position of rest.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203+,   for a unicyclic operation where a tool engages work during a dwell
    feed.

    285+,   for a device to intermittently cause a tool action of a flying
    cutter to be initiated.

    484,    for a unicyclic operation of a rotary disc slitter.

    524+,   for a unicyclic cutting machine in general.


CLS 83/335
TXT Device under subclass 334 wherein means is provided to cause the tool to
    rotate substantially 360 degrees during the single cutting operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for a device for stopping a cutting tool after a predetermined
    number of cutting cycles.

    283,    for a one revolution clutch drive mechanism in a device in which
    the tool engages the work during a feed dwell.


CLS 83/336
TXT Device under subclass 331 wherein means is provided to shift or flex the
    work in a direction generally normal to the direction in which it is fed to
    the cutter, said means acting on the work intermediate the supply source of
    the work and the cutting zone of the machine; e.g., so as to vary the
    amount of work fed to the cutter without changing the speed of the
    work-feed means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236,    for a loop former in the type of cutting apparatus there classified.

    350+,   for incidental buckling of work during cutting.


CLS 83/337
TXT Device under subclass 331 including means to effect a supplemental movement
    of the tool, other than that of rotation about its axis, during the cutting
    cycle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185+,   for a tool, inside hollow work, which tool or a second tool
    coacting therewith has compound motion.

    327+,   for a tool having compound motion, which motion keeps the tool
    constantly oriented in a plane maintained by the tool at all other times
    during the cutting operation.

    557,    for cooperating cutters having a cyclic movement into and out of
    operating position in addition to their tool stroke.


CLS 83/338
TXT Device under subclass 337 in which means is provided to move the cutter,
    during its rotation, back and forth in the direction of its axis of
    rotation.


CLS 83/339
TXT Device under subclass 331 wherein means is provided to feed the work to the
    cutting means, and said two means are connected to each other by a power
    train so that they both may be driven from a single power source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231+,   for a device in which the means to feed the tool during a dwell in
    thework-feed is controlled by thework-feed mechanism.

    298,    for interrelated control of tool and work-feed drives, and see (1)
    Note to that subclass (298).


CLS 83/340
TXT Device under subclass 331 in which the cutter is a spiral blade mounted on
    an axis of rotation, which axis extends in the direction ofwork-feed, so
    that the cut proceeds inwardly from the side of the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    342,    for a helically mounted cutter making a progressive transverse cut
    in which the axis of the cutter is transverse to the direction of work-feed.

    672,    for a helical cutter, per se.


CLS 83/341
TXT Device under subclass 331 wherein means is provided to begin the cut at one
    edge or point of the work and thereafter continues along the work in a
    straight line, in a direction which is not parallel to the direction of the
    work-feed, to a different edge or point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    595,    for means to effect a progressive cut of a revolving tool moving
    through a recess in a work holder or in a cooperating tool.

    596,    for means to effect a progressive cut of a revolving tool.


CLS 83/342
TXT Device under subclass 341 in which the cutter is mounted spirally around
    its axis of revolution.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    340,    for a helically bladed tool whose axis extends in the direction of
    work-feed.

    672,    for a rotatable helical tool, per se.


CLS 83/343
TXT Device under subclass 331 which includes a second edged cutting tool, or
    other coacting surface (e.g., anvil), mounted on an axis of rotation to
    travel in a circle, which axis is parallel to the axis of rotation of the
    first tool, and wherein the first tool and the second tool or other
    coacting surface together effect the cutting action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    505+,   for a tool pair comprising a rotatable disc tool and a cylindrical
    anvil.

    509+,   for a tool pair comprising a rotatable anvil and a fixed tool.

    659,    for a rotatable anvil tool, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, see section B, of the class definition, for the
    loci of other roll pairs with working surfaces.


CLS 83/344
TXT Device under subclass 343 having means to adjust, move or permit movement
    of the axes of rotation of the cooperating tools toward or away from each
    other in order to vary the distance between the tools.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    495+,   for a rotatable disc tool pair including means to adjust there
    between.

    663+,   particularly subclass 677 for a rotary tool adjustable with respect
    to their supports.


CLS 83/345
TXT Device under subclass 343 in which cutting members mounted on each of the
    two axis of rotation interdigitate with respect to each other.


CLS 83/346
TXT Device under subclass 343 in which the backup has a smooth faced surface
    that is engaged by the cutter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    659,    for a rotatable anvil, per se.


CLS 83/347
TXT Device under subclass 346 in which the facing of the backup is made of
    elastic or yieldable material.


CLS 83/348
TXT Device under subclass 343 in which means is provided to continually urge,
    as by a spring, one of the tools which may be a coacting surface with
    respect to its mounting, or to continually urge the mounting of such tool
    with respect to another tool mounting to effect cutting cooperation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    345,    for cooperating rotary cutters which overlap each other during the
    cutting operation.

    506,    for a disc blade and cylindrical anvil cutting couple resiliently
    urged together.


CLS 83/349
TXT Device under subclass 331 wherein the rotary cutter coacts with a cutter
    fixed in position to cut the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    355+,   for similar art where the rotary tool does not have a component of
    motion in the direction of work-feed during the cutting operation.

    509+,   for a tool pair comprising a rotary anvil and fixed type cutter.


CLS 83/350
TXT Device under the class definition including a tool which is actuated in
    synchronism with advancing work, to cut such work while the latter is
    passing through the tool station; the tool, during its passage through the
    work, following a path which is substantially perpendicular to the
    direction in which the work is moving.

    (1)     Note.  The portion of the work near the cutter may be blocked
    thereby during and incidental to the cut, causing a buckling or compression
    of the work. If, however, a patent contains a definite teaching that a
    dwell is caused in the work motion, such patent will be placed in
    subclasses 202+, particularly subclasses 262+.  Usually the tool stroke* is
    rapid, and the work springs or falls back to its normal condition between
    tool strokes.

    (2)     Note.  For a patent to be placed as an original copy in this and
    indented subclasses, it is not necessary that a work-feed means be claimed
    if it is evident (from the claimed subject matter) that work is in motion
    and that a definite timed relationship exists between the work motion and
    the tool actuation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202+,   for a device in which a tool engages work during the dwell period
    between successive increments of work-feed, and subclass 262, indented
    thereunder, for a device wherein work-feed means is operated continuously,
    but the work is halted during cutting by engagement therewith by a clamp,
    abutment, or the tool itself, and see (1) Note, above.

    284+,   for tool having motion component in direction of moving work, and
    in particular subclass 349, indented thereunder for rotary transverse
    cutter with axis offset from work-feed path.

    401+,   for a device to move work toward a tool station.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), subclass 49, for a selective
    cutting device which operates on moving work; and subclass 50 for such a
    device with flying cutters.


CLS 83/351
TXT Device under subclass 350 in which a
    work-feed means acts during the tool stroke upon a portion of the work
    spaced from the tool and in a direction not intersecting the cutting zone,
    whereby the work is caused to pivot about the portions thereof which are
    successively engaged by the tool, to effect a generally curved or irregular
    line of cut.

    (1)     Note.  The action is similar to that of an operator using a pair of
    scissors to cut  a curved piece out of tin or cardboard.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for a cutting machine controlled by a perforated record.

    215,    for a machine of intermittent
    work-feed type wherein a tool has motions additional to its cutting stroke.

    353,    for a tool traveling laterally across a moving web.

    411,    for means to guide a work carrier about a fixed axis relative to a
    tool station.

    439,    for a work guide which permits rotation of the work about a fixed
    axis.

    565,    for tool motion (usually other than rectilinear) controlled by a
    templet.


CLS 83/352
TXT Device under subclass 350 provided with
    work-carrying structure which is drivingly connected to tool-actuating
    means so that movement of the work-carrying structure transmits power from
    itself to a tool to cause the latter to cut the moving work.

    (1)     Note.  One tool is sometimes fixed to the work support, and a
    cooperating tool moved by linkage connected thereto.

    (2)     Note.  The concept of this subclass is distinguished from that of a
    "flying cutter" by the fact that here the work may be at rest in the
    cutting zone at the start of the operation.  Thus the actuated tool of this
    subclass may have a component of motion in the direction of the moving work.

    (3)     Note.  The work-carrying structure constitutes or is part of
    work-moving means, hence is distinguishable from a "work-responsive"
    detector or sensing means, for which see subclasses 360+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284+,   for a tool which has a component of motion during cutting in the
    direction in which the work enters the cutting zone.

    360+,   for operation controlled by means responsive to work.

    409+,   for other work-carrying structure.


CLS 83/353
TXT Device under subclass 350 wherein the tool is of small dimension relative
    to the dimension of the work in the direction of the tool stroke, and the
    tool progresses along the moving work in an edge-to-edge direction thereof.

    (1)     Note.  This type of movement usually produces a bevel or bias cut.

    (2)     Note.  The relatively narrow tool offers little resistance to
    feeding movement of the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    483+,   for a rotatable disc type of tool traveling from edge to edge of
    work.

    614,    for a reciprocating tool which travels from edge to edge of a sheet
    or web.


CLS 83/354
TXT Device under subclass 350 provided with means to change the time interval
    between any two successive cutting strokes with respect to the length of
    work fed during such interval, without the necessity of replacing any
    machine parts to effect such change.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240+,   for adjustable tool or work-feed in machines of the step-by-step
    intermittent feed type, and subclass 234 for varying the number of
    work-feed increments per tool stroke.

    287+,   296, 304, 305, and 313, for adjustment of work or tool feeding
    flying-cutting machines.


CLS 83/355
TXT Device under subclass 350 including means which constantly transmits power
    to actuate the tool continuously through repeated strokes during continued
    movement of the work.

    (1)     Note.  A cam-driven tool would satisfy the limitations of the
    definition of this subclass only if no dwell period occurs during the
    camming cycle.  (A dwell period implies interruption in the flow of power
    to the tool).

    (2)     Note.  Examples of tool actuation to be found in this subclass are
    (1) simple rotation, (2) tools driven with sample pendulum motion, (3)
    reciprocating tools driven in substantially simple harmonic motion, as by a
    Scotch yoke, an eccentric, or a conventional rotary crank and connecting
    rod.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315+,   318+, and 321+, for a tool which is actuated in an oscillatory
    manner so as to operate on moving work while periodically moving along with
    the work (flying cutter).

    331+,   for a rotary cutter arranged to travel with moving work during the
    cutting operation (flying cutter).

    591+,   for a tool having simple rotary motion throughout its stroke or
    cutting cycle.


CLS 83/356
TXT Device under subclass 355 in which either the tool or the work is shifted
    between cutting operations in a regularly recurring manner, and in a
    direction transverse both to the tool stroke and the main direction of
    work-feed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215+,   for a machine wherein a tool has motion additional to its tool
    stroke during a cutting cycle.

    220+,   for a machine in which the work may be advanced in different
    directions between successive operations of a tool.

    249,    for a machine having work-feed means arranged so as to facilitate
    manual shifting or reorientation of work between successive tool strokes.


CLS 83/356.1
TXT Device under subclass 355 including a plurality of tools, which tools act
    successively upon the moving work, and wherein each tool has its own
    support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    356.3,  for a similar device wherein a plurality of cutting tools share the
    same common support.

    404+,   for a cutting device which includes a plurality of tool stations
    and means to move the work from one station to another.


CLS 83/356.2
TXT Device under subclass 355 including means to to rectilinearly move the tool
    toward the work on one stroke and away from the work on the other stroke.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    613+,   for rectilinearly reciprocating tool driving means, per se.


CLS 83/356.3
TXT Device under subclass 355 including more than one individual tool on a tool
    support.

    (1)     Note.  The individual tools on the tool support may act
    simultaneously or successively or some simultaneously and some
    successively, depending, for example, on their relative positions on the
    tool support and the manner in which the tool support moves them to the
    cutting zone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    356.1,  for a similar device having a plurality of cutting tools, each tool
    being mounted upon a separate support.


CLS 83/357
TXT Device under subclass 350 which incorporates a plurality of actuated tools
    operable in succession upon the moving work at locations spaced
    longitudinally of the path of work-feed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39+,    for methods involving a plurality of cutting steps in general.

    255+,   for work fed intermittently to a succession of tools.

    301+,   for a flying cutter combined with other type cutter.

    404+,   for means to move work from one tool station to another.


CLS 83/358
TXT Device under the class definition provided with a detector* for the
    product, a transmitter* and means to effect the functioning of at least a
    part of the device as direct or indirect result of the receipt by said
    means of a detected and transmitted signal or impulse.

    (1)     Note.  In this and the indented subclass, that part of the device
    whose functioning is effected in response to the signal or impulse will be
    referred to as a "controlled apparatus".

    (2)     Note.  For patents in which the functioning of a controlled
    apparatus is affected (e.g., varying the speed of the work or cutter, or
    changing the working conditions of the device) in response to deviations of
    an operating condition of the device or a component thereof, as
    distinguished from response to product, see subclasses 72+.

    (3)     Note.  For patents in which the controlled apparatus is a means to
    handle the cut product, see subclass 79.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for stopping of device responsive to product sensing.

    71,     for control means responsive to indicia bearing tape or card.

    72+,    and see (2) Note above.

    79+,    and see (3) Note above.

    360+,   for similar structure responsive to work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclasses 60+ for the combination of a cutting
    machine and a weighing scale which receives material cut, or to be cut, by
    the cutting machine, characterized by means to actuate, or to modify the
    operation of, the cutting machine in response to determination of the
    weight of material accumulated on the weighting scale. *See Class
    Definition for definition of terms.


CLS 83/359
TXT Device under subclass 358 in which the controlled apparatus includes a
    tool* and/or a tool driving train and the function effected is the
    regulation of movement of said tool.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are devices in which the cutter
    moves through a cutting cycle, and devices in which the cutter is shifted
    or positioned relative to the work or product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    368,    for a cutter shifted relative to the work in response to work, and
    see (1) Note under subclass 368 for meaning of the word "shifted".

    369     and 370+, for a cutter actuated to cut responsive to the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), subclass 64, for a punched card
    reproducer operable as a gang punch (each newly punched card serves as a
    pattern to control selection of tools to punch the following card).


CLS 83/360
TXT Device under the class definition provided with a detector* for the work, a
    transmitter*, and means to effect the functioning of at least a part of the
    device as a direct or indirect result of the receipt by said means of a
    detected and transmitted signal or impulse.

    (1)     Note.  In this and the indented subclasses, that part of the device
    whose functioning is effected in response to the signal or impulse will be
    referred to as a "controlled apparatus".

    (2)     Note.  For patents in which the functioning of a controlled
    apparatus is affected (e.g., varying the speed of the work or cutter, or
    changing the working conditions of the device) in response to deviations of
    an operating condition of the device or a component thereof, as
    distinguished from response to work, see subclasses 72+.

    (3)     Note.  For patents in which the controlled apparatus is a means to
    handle the product, see subclass 80.

    (4)     Note.  For patents in which the controlled apparatus is a means to
    stop work movement and a means to initiate a cutting cycle, see subclasses
    208, 209+, and 211+.

    (5)     Note.  For patents in which the controlled apparatus is a "flying"
    cutter, see subclasses 286+ and 307.

    (6)     Note.  The combination of means to produce a mark on work and means
    to detect the mark, in response to which detection, an operation is
    effected, will be found in the appropriate mark-producing class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     and 63+, for stopping means responsive to work.

    71,     for control means responsive to indicia-bearing tape or card.

    72+,    and see (2) Note above.

    80,     and see (3) Note above.

    208,    209+, and 211+, and see (4) Note above.

    286+    and 307, and see (5) Note above.

    358+,   for similar structure responsive to product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 2+ for automatic control of a
    power operated tool driving or impacting means.

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), subclasses 25+, for
    work-responsive means which controls an auxiliary operation in a selective
    cutting machine; subclasses 63+ for control of tool selection by such means.


CLS 83/361
TXT Device under subclass 360 in which the detector* is provided with means to
    govern or regulate or adjust the action or position of said detector*, or
    the transmitter*, or the impulse receiving element.


CLS 83/362
TXT Device under subclass 361 in which the control or regulating means
    regulates the duration of time existing between the effectuation of the
    signal or impulse and the effectuation of the functioning of the apparatus.


CLS 83/363
TXT Device under subclass 361 in which the control means is effective to alter
    the extent of the cut product.

    (1)     Note.  The "extent" of a cut product is defined as that dimension
    parallel to the direction of work movement regardless of the size or extent
    of that dimension relative to other dimensions, (i.e., for the purpose of
    this subclass the length or extent of a product may be smaller than the
    width thereof if short pieces are cut from relatively wide work).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241+,   for other means to vary the product length in a subclass 202 type
    of cutting device.

    287+,   for other product-length changing apparatus using a "flying" cutter.

    354,    for means to vary the timing of the tool relative to moving work,
    responsive to a work characteristic.  *See Class Definition for definition
    of terms.


CLS 83/364
TXT Device under subclass 360 provided with more than one detector*.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are patents to device provided
    with plural work-sensors usable one at a time alternately or selectively;
    or provided with plural work-sensors usable together, in either cooperation
    or opposition, to control the same function or to control different
    functions in predetermined sequence.


CLS 83/365
TXT Device under subclass 360 in which the detector* includes a light-sensitive
    means responsive to light impinging on said means to energize an electrical
    circuit and the detection of work is effected by a change in the quantity
    or quality of the light received by said means either directly (as by
    work's moving between said means and the source of said light), or
    indirectly (as by reflection from the work).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of the means referred to above are vacuum tubes
    andlight-sensitive detectors.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein are patents in which a beam of light is
    reflected from the work or an index mark thereon to the
    light-sensitive-means, as well as patents in which the work covers and
    uncovers the light-sensitive means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72+,    for a photo-electric work-sensor in a "self-regulating" device.

    289,    for a photo-electric work-sensor in a "flying" cutter device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for photocell detector and circuit.


CLS 83/366
TXT Device under subclass 360 in which the controlled apparatus is a mechanism
    to prevent movement of a part or element of the device or to prevent
    movement of the work, said mechanism being provided with means to disable
    the movement-preventing mechanism and in which the function effected is
    activation of said disabling means by the work-responsive means, whereby a
    subsequent operation is permitted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    399+,   for interlock means controlled by other parts or elements of the
    device, and see the "Search This Class, Subclass" notes under subclasses
    399+ for other interlock subclasses.


CLS 83/367
TXT Device under subclass 360 in which the controlled apparatus includes means
    to move, guide, decelerate or stop the work, and the function effected is
    the actuation or modification of the operation of said means.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are patents provided with means to effect
    final registry of work with respect to its cutting position after initial
    work movement but prior to cutting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209+,   for means to control work movement in combination with means to
    initiate cutting cycle, both in response to a work-sensing mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 10+ for
    means to sense material and means to control the operation of material
    advancing means.


CLS 83/368
TXT Device under subclass 360 in which the controlled apparatus is a cutter
    movable in a direction other than in the work-cutting path and the function
    effected is the movement of said cutter in said other direction.

    (1)     Note.  The inclusion of the term "other" in the above definition is
    not intended to exclude patents having claimed means to impart a
    work-cutting movement.  Patents claiming such means (per se, classifiable
    in other subclasses in this schedule) and, in addition to such means,
    claiming means to impart a supplemental movement (such as for locating the
    cutter in, or shifting it to, a different position relative to the work or
    the machine; e.g., to cut a different part of the work, or place the cutter
    out of operative position) responsive to the work-sensing means, will be
    placed in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359,    for similar structure responsive to product.


CLS 83/369
TXT Device under subclass 360 including a detector* which is moved by, and to
    an extent proportional to, movement of the work; further including means to
    effect a signal or impulse only when the extent of such detector* movement
    reaches a predetermined amount; and in which the controlled apparatus is a
    cutter, the controlled function effected being the initiation of movement
    of said cutter through a cutter cycle.

    *See Class Definition for definition of terms.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are patents provided with means
    for changing the extent of work movement or detector movement required to
    initiate the cutting cycle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208,    for similar structure in which the work movement is claimed as
    stopped prior to cutting.


CLS 83/370
TXT Device under subclass 360 in which the controlled apparatus is a cutter
    and/or a cutter driving train and function effected is the initiation of
    movement of said cutter through a cutting cycle.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are patents in which the work
    itself is uniformly electrically conductive, and the work completes an
    electrical circuit in the detector*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210,    211+, 266+, and 369+, for other work-sensing means to initiate the
    cutting cycle of a cutter.

    359,    for similar structure responsive to product.


CLS 83/371
TXT Device under subclass 370 in which the detector* is operative to sense the
    presence of an index, or a protuberant or re-entrant portion, in or on the
    work, to initiate the cutting cycle.

    (1)     Note.  Included in the terms "index", "protuberant portion" and
    "re-entrant portion" are such indicia as a hole or notch in the work, a
    mark (e.g., printed) on the work surface, an electrically conductive area
    on the work which completes an electrical circuit in the detector and
    transmitter system, and bumps or projections on the work.  Also included
    within the scope of such terminology are articles, or spaces between
    articles, in work which comprises spaced articles connected together by a
    connected medium (e.g., tape, string, etc.), the connecting medium of which
    work is to be severed between adjacent articles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    365,    for devices in which a mark on the work is interposed in a light
    responsive (e.g., photocell) circuit.


CLS 83/372
TXT Device under subclass 370 in which the transmitter* includes an electrical
    circuit and the detector* includes a make-break portion in said circuit for
    completing or interrupting the circuit to initiate the cutting cycle.

    (1)     Note.  Contact of the work with the trip switch may be direct, or
    indirect as by engagement of the work with a lever or linkage connected to
    the trip switch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290+,   for other trip switch sensing means in a "flying" cutter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity: Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.13+,
    61.19+, 61.41, and 61.42+, for other detector switches.


CLS 83/373
TXT Device under the class definition wherein means to change the location or
    position of passive means to orient the moving work cooperates
    significantly with means to move a tool through a tool stroke* or a part of
    such stroke.

    (1)     Note.  The work guide functions merely in a passive manner to
    orient or influence the direction of motion of work which is moved by
    another means.

    (2)     Note.  The generally lateral displacement of work which may be
    incidentally caused by movement of work guide means is not considered
    work-feeding (work moving) within the definition of this term.  A work
    guide is thus distinguishable from work-feed means or supplemental
    work-feed means.

    (3)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass includes a work guide
    which is carried by or moved by the tool merely as a matter of convenience
    or compactness in design even though its movement has no effect on the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162+,   for means to guide a cut product.

    241+    270, 272, 276+, 279, and for many disclosures of a work guide in a
    machine of subclass 202 type.

    306+,   310, for interrelated work guide and flying cutter.

    410+,   412+, 418+, for work guide or
    work-mover guide related to the movement of work toward a tool.

    438+,   for means to guide moving work, generally.

    *See Class Definition for definition of terms.


CLS 83/374
TXT Device under the class definition in which means to move or render active
    means to maintain or retain work stationary, or means to move or render
    active means presenting an obstacle or bar to work movement, cooperates
    significantly with means to move a tool through a tool stroke* or a part of
    such stroke.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes a device in which the immobilizer is
    merely mounted on the tool or tool support, even though the motion of the
    immobilizer may have no useful effect on the work; e.g., the immobilizer is
    movably mounted merely as a convenience or to simplify the machine design.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes work immobilizers which restrain and
    hold work stationary by means of suction, magnetic attraction, impaling
    pins, or locating pins, as well as immobilizers which clamp work or provide
    stopping abutment therefor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181+,   for interrelated tool actuating means and means for immobilizing
    hollow work.

    202+,   for interrelated tool actuating and work moving means, with
    incidental showings of work immobilizers in many subclasses which relate to
    the stopping or holding of work.

    367,    for work movement controlled by means responsive to work in a
    cutting machine.

    373,    for interrelated tool actuating and work guide moving means.

    451+,   for work immobilizer generally associated with a cutting machine.

    454+,   for a work clamp interrelated to or combined with a tool guide.


CLS 83/375
TXT Device under subclass 374 in which the means cooperating with the tool
    moving means comprises a plurality of opposed solid jaws or surface
    elements which are made effective by movement of one or more of said jaws
    or surface elements to grip the work frictionally and hold it in desired
    position fixedly with respect to a tool station.

    (1)     Note.  Clamps which act to move the work, as well as hold it in
    fixed position after movement ceases, are not found in this subclass, but
    will be found in the appropriate subclass relating to work moving
    (including those directed to the work-moving, tool-moving relationship).

    (2)     Note.  In this subclass are found disclosures of a clamp driven in
    timed relationship to a tool as from a common drive shaft or power train or
    from a separate power source and related to the tool stroke only by timing
    control mechanism.

    (3)     Note.  For device actuated in timed relationship to a tool, and
    disclosed as being of utility as a "stripper" as well as a clamp or
    holddown, see appropriate subclasses indented under subclass 111.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282+,   for work clamping means effective during the dwell of
    intermittently effective work moving means which coincides with a tool
    stroke.

    452+,   for a cutting device including a separate, manually or randomly
    controlled or actuated clamp.

    453+,   for combined clamp and tool guide, wherein some clamps are actuated
    by or incidental to movement of tool.


CLS 83/376
TXT Device under subclass 375 in which the clamp is slidably mounted on the
    tool or tool support by means including a guide which, after the clamp has
    been halted by engagement with the work, causes a change of direction of
    the tool movement from that in which both it and the clamp have been moved
    by the tool driving force.

    (1)     Note.  Examples are found in
    draw-cutting machines, wherein inclined guide means between tool and clamp
    serve to force the tool away from its initial vertical downward motion
    after the clamp has settled firmly upon the work, thereby effecting a
    slicing or "draw cut".


CLS 83/377
TXT Device under subclass 376 including means which require that the clamp be
    urged against the work with a predetermined force before the guide becomes
    effective to deflect the tool.


CLS 83/378
TXT Device under subclass 375 including means to deliver incremental clamping
    force in proportion to incremental resistance exerted by the work against
    the tool, so that the clamping force (additional to a predetermined force;
    e.g., the weight of the clamp) is proportional to the resistance which the
    tool meets in its working stroke.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    376+,   for many disclosures wherein the clamp takes some of the reaction
    of the tool force, in order to deflect the tool into an oblique,
    draw-cutting direction.


CLS 83/379
TXT Device under subclass 375 wherein there are distinct phases of clamp drive,
    through different drive means acting in succession or in varying
    combinations.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass extends beyond a mere
    variable force drive for a clamp.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    376+,   for the special case of a clamp driven through the ultimate portion
    of its stroke by reaction of the tool as it is deflected from its initial
    direction of motion by guide means on the partially tightened clamp.

    385+    and 388+, for disclosure of a variable force clamp drive.


CLS 83/380
TXT Device under subclass 375 wherein proper timing of the tool stroke with
    respect to the clamp actuation is assured by provision of means responsive
    to a predetermined travel of a clamp jaw or to predetermined developed
    clamping force, which means generates a signal or impulse which causes or
    permits initiation of a tool stroke.

    (1)     Note.  The sequencing means, as defined in this subclass, is a
    specific application of an "interlock" (for which in general see subclasses
    399+).

    (2)     Note.  Mere timed actuation of clamp and tool in sequence, as by
    properly phased cranks or cams, does not meet the definition of "sequencing
    means".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221,    for interlock between work-feed and tool actuation in machines of
    the subclass 202 type.

    399+,   for sequencing features in general, and see (1) Note above.


CLS 83/381
TXT Device under subclass 375, including means to permit voluntary manipulation
    or actuation of the clamp, either in addition to or in place of the clamp
    movement derived from or timed with the tool driving means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for a cutting device having means for manually overriding a cyclic
    operation of a part (or parts) and means to bring the device back to normal
    cyclic operation when the manual impulse is removed.

    452+,   for manually or randomly controlled or actuated clamp associated
    with a cutting machine.


CLS 83/382
TXT Device under subclass 375 in which a tool is rigidly mounted on or made
    integral with a displaceable surface element of the work-gripping means.

    (1)     Note.  Both tools of the cutting pair are movable.  One tool
    engages the work to clamp it against a work support before the other tool
    engages the work in its cutting stroke.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes such devices as split die blocks
    which move together to clamp the work before the cutting tool engages it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266,    for a tool carried by work-feed means.

    319,    for means to secure work to rectilinearly movable tool carrier, in
    a machine of the flying cutter type.

    567,    for a tool with work clamped thereto and movable against another
    tool.


CLS 83/383
TXT Device under subclass 375, in which the actuated tool or its support, in
    some portion of its movement approaches and drivingly engages a movable
    clamp jaw or element rigid therewith, thus driving the clamp jaw in one
    direction only.

    (1)     Note.  The clamp is not mounted on the tool.

    (2)     Note.  The clamp is usually moved, by engagement with the tool,
    against the force of gravity or that of a pre-loaded spring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    456,    for tool or tool support rigid with movable clamp jaw, where tool
    stroke is not timed with or related to the clamp stroke.


CLS 83/384
TXT Device under subclass 383 wherein the clamp jaw is moved away from its
    applied or work-engaging position by direct engagement with cutter or
    element secured thereto.

    (1)     Note.  The clamp jaw is moved against the work by other means, such
    as gravity or preloaded spring, when the tool withdraws from contact with
    the jaw.


CLS 83/385
TXT Device under subclass 375, in which a tool or an element rigid therewith,
    during the tool stroke serves to impart motion to a cam, lever, linkage, or
    other force-transmitting means which drives the clamp.

    (1)     Note.  The force-transmitting means in the definition of this
    subclass comprehends any mechanical or fluid pressure mechanism operatively
    interposed between tool or tool support and movable clamp jaw, including
    for example a simple pivoted link connection, but excluding a direct
    driving abutment, for which see subclasses 383+.

    (2)     Note.  A clamp which is moved away from closed (actuated) position
    by linkage driven by tool or tool support, and which is biased or driven
    toward closed position by other means will not be found here, but in
    subclass 375 (or subclasses 388+ for yieldable drive).  Also see (2) Note,
    under subclass 388.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    375     and 388+, and see (2) Note above.

    383+,   for a clamp jaw driven in one of its two directions by direct
    impact of tool or tool support, and see (1) Note above.


CLS 83/386
TXT Device under subclass 385 in which the force transmitting means between
    tool and clamp comprises a resilient, deformable or slippable element.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note under subclass 387.

    (2)     Note.  The yieldable element may be included in the drive as a mere
    safety feature to prevent excessive overload strains, or it may yield
    during normal conditions of machine operation, within the purview of the
    definition of this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  A frangible element, such as a shear pin, constitutes a
    yieldable drive element for the purposes of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    388+,   for other examples of a clamp driven, in synchronism with a tool,
    through a resilient or slipping drive train.


CLS 83/387
TXT Device under subclass 386 in which the
    force-transmitting means comprises an elastic element (solid or fluid)
    which exhibits the characteristics of a spring throughout the expected
    range of forces applied thereto during normal operation of the machine.

    (1)     Note.  The definition of this subclass is restricted to drive means
    which function in a springlike manner during normal or expected conditions
    of operation of the machine.  Such means as a preloaded spring, interposed
    in a clamp drive train for the purpose of yielding only to relieve
    excessive strains during overload conditions, would not be classified here
    but in subclasses 386 or 388 as a yieldable drive element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    386     and 388, and see (1) Note above.

    389,    for other examples of a clamp driven in timed relation to a tool
    through a  resilient drive train.


CLS 83/388
TXT Device under subclass 375 wherein the
    clamp-actuating means comprises a force-responsive (i.e., resilient or
    slipping) element forming part of the force-transmitting train which moves
    the clamp toward its applied condition, such element serving to limit the
    force which can be exerted on and by the movable clamp jaw.

    (1)     Note.  The yieldable element may be a  mere overload responsive
    means, not   effective during normal conditions of  operation.  See (2)
    Note and (3) Note  under subclass 386, supra.

    (2)     Note.  A clamp which is continually   biased toward closed
    position, but is  raised cyclically by power-driven linkage will be found
    in this subclass, even though the linkage is moved by a tool or tool
    support.  But see subclasses 383 and 385+ for a clamp biased toward open
    position and driven toward actuated position, directly or through linkage,
    by the tool support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    383     and 385+, and see (2) Note above.

    386+,   for a clamp yieldably driven from a   tool or tool support.


CLS 83/389
TXT Device under subclass 388 wherein the
    force-responsive element (solid or fluid) has the characteristics of a
    spring or its equivalent throughout the expected range of forces applied
    thereto during normal operation of the machine.

    (1)     Note.  The presence of a relief valve in a fluid-pressure drive
    means indicates that the drive exhibits the characteristic of yield ability
    under certain conditions, hence is not wholly "resilient" (see (1) Note
    under subclass 390 and (1) Note under subclass 387).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    390,    for fluid-pressure yieldable drive means for a clamp.


CLS 83/390
TXT Device under subclass 388, in which the clamp is moved by piston and
    cylinder or equivalent device subjected to hydraulic or pneumatic force,
    and provided with relief valve or other output limiting means.

    (1)     Note.  The disclosure of a relief valve or other out-put limiting
    device in the fluid pressure drive system is evidence that the drive is
    "yieldable" rather than "positive" or "resilient".


CLS 83/391
TXT Device under subclass 374, in which the means cooperating with the tool
    moving means is an obstacle or bar to work movement across the path of the
    work which functions by resisting or reacting to the work's abutting it.

    (1)     Note.  Most of these stops are adjustable, and most of them are
    actuated to release or prevent interference with cutting operation and/or
    delivery of the product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    392,    for actuated work stops located at front and rear of work to
    "stabilize" it.

    467+,   for a separate, manually controlled or actuated workstop abutment.


CLS 83/392
TXT Device under subclass 391 wherein a plurality of stop means are effective
    to block the work against movement in two diametrically opposite directions.

    (1)     Note.  These devices do not serve as clamps, nor do they have any
    positioning function if the work is not correctly placed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207     and 228, for a work aligner including stops which are capable of
    correcting small misplacements of the work.


CLS 83/393
TXT Device under subclass 391 including mechanical means for positioning the
    stop to different positions or to cause another differently positioned stop
    to be actuated or made effective between tool strokes.

    (1)     Note.  The general purpose of the combination of this subclass is
    to effect different positions of work with respect to the tool in different
    cutting cycles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238+,   for unequal work-feed increments in recurring series, in a cutting
    machine of subclass 202 type.

    241+,   for means in general to change length of work-feed increment.

    254,    for plurality of work stops successively effective in association
    with supplemental work-feed means.

    268+,   for abutment to locate work at tool station, in a machine of
    subclass 202 type.


CLS 83/394
TXT Device under subclass 391 in which the stop moves in unison with the tool
    or tool support throughout at least a portion of the tool stroke.

    (1)     Note.  In order to move in unison with the tool or tool support,
    the stop must move in the same path as the tool (or parallel thereto) and
    at the same speed and simultaneously with the tool movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    383+,   for work clamp moved by direct impact of tool or tool support.


CLS 83/395
TXT Device under subclass 394 wherein the stop structure is fixed rigidly to
    the actuated tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    382,    for clamp jaw fixed to or integral with tool or tool support.


CLS 83/396
TXT Device under the class definition wherein means to move a tool through all
    or part of a tool stroke* cooperated significantly with means to make
    effective a member which serves to limit the extent of motion of a work
    pusher or work carriage.

    (1)     Note.  This device is frequently employed to determine the
    successive positions of a manually moved work pusher or "back gage".

    (2)     Note.  There may be a plurality of such members to effect stoppage
    of work in different locations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239,    for unequally spaced stops on work carriage in machine of subclass
    202 type.

    391+,   for interrelated tool moving means and means to actuate work-stop
    abutment.

    416,    for means in general to stop a work conveyor.


CLS 83/397
TXT Apparatus under the class definition wherein means are provided to change
    the location or position of a protective obstruction for the operator tool
    blade or work, which cooperates significantly with means to move a tool
    through a tool stroke* or a part of such stroke.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    544+,   for guard means which does not move in cooperation with the cutter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 613+ for a similar device
    for moving a guard into protective position by some part of the machine.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses
    144+ for a guard or housing for a belt and pulley drive system.


CLS 83/397.1
TXT Device under subclass 397 wherein the protective obstruction protects the
    work.


CLS 83/398
TXT Device under subclass 397 comprising means which is caused to cover the
    open guide slot below the moving tool and adjacent the work supporting
    table.


CLS 83/399
TXT Device under the class definition characterized by mechanism for detecting
    the presence or absence or passage of a portion of the device, or for
    detecting the characteristics of a pattern or templet, which mechanism
    effects a signal or impulse as a result of such detection and includes a
    component (disclosed or claimed) for transmitting such signal or impulse;
    further characterized by means to permit or effect the functioning of at
    least a portion of said device in response, directly or indirectly, to the
    receipt by said means of said signal or impulse; and further distinguished
    in that the portion sensed is other than said part or other than a part or
    sub-assembly in, or driven by, a direct drive train moving said part.

    (1)     Note.  In this and the indented subclasses, that part of the device
    whose functioning is effected is termed the "member" or "assembly" or
    "interlock" whose operation is controlled; the portion sensed is termed an
    "object" or "element"; and the meaning of the term "remote" (used in the
    title) will be elaborated on in (3) Note below.

    (2)     Note.  This and indented subclasses are the residual subclasses for
    the placement of patents claiming means for controlling the operation of a
    moving or movable member or assembly or interlock in response to the
    sensing of an object other than the controlled, moving member or assembly
    or interlock itself.  Subclasses 358+, 360+, and 71 to which these
    subclasses (399+) are analogous, provide for patents in which the sensed
    object is the product, the work, or indicia-bearing control means,
    respectively.

    (3)     Note.  Where the sensed object is an element integral with, or
    driven by, a direct drive train, which train moves the controlled assembly,
    with the result that movement of the assembly is always accompanied by
    movement of the sensed element, then the element is part of the controlled
    assembly itself, and thus the element is not "remote" therefrom as required
    by the title of subclasses 399+.  Patents disclosing and claiming such
    features will not be placed in these subclasses, (399+), but will be found
    in other subclasses of the schedule, often under the heading "unicyclic",
    or other equivalent term.

    (4)     Note.  This and indented subclasses do not include patents
    disclosing structure provided merely with a continuous train of mechanism
    inherently operative to perform a plurality of operations, according to a
    regular or uniform cycle.  For such patents, see other subclasses
    appropriate to the desired operations to be performed.

    (5)     Note.  As a repository of patents this subclass (399) includes
    patents disclosing and claiming structure in which the member or assembly
    includes mechanism (i.e., an interlock) to prevent movement of the member
    or assembly, said mechanism or interlock being provided with means to
    disable the movement preventing mechanism, and in which the sensed object
    effects the activation of the disabling means, whereby the mechanism or
    interlock is released and subsequent movement of the member or assembly is
    permitted.  For interlock release means controlled by the presence of the
    product, see subclasses 358+.  For interlock release means controlled by
    the presence of work, see subclass 366.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59      and 60, for random stopping of part of the device followed by a
    subsequent operation.

    61,     79+, and 358+, for sensing of product to effect: (a) random
    stopping (61), (b) handling of the product (79+), and (c) the operation of
    a part of the device (358+) (e.g., the tool), respectively.

    62,     81+, 221, 222, 225+, and 380, for sensing of tool-feed to effect:
    (a) random stopping (62), (b) handling of product (81+), (c) release
    ofwork-feed interlock (221), (d) initiation of work-feed (222), (e) control
    of work movement in a device wherein the tool cuts during work stoppage
    (225+), and (f) sequencing of tool and work clamp (380), respectively.

    62,     221, 231+, and 352, for sensing of work-feed means to effect: (a)
    random stopping (62), (b) release oftool-feed interlock (221), (c) control
    of tool-feed in a device wherein the tool cuts during work stoppage (231+),
    and (d)tool actuation in a device wherein the tool is timed with respect to
    moving work (352), respectively.

    63+,    80, 209+, 211+, 286+, 307, and 360+,  for sensing of work to
    effect: (a) random stopping (63+), (b) handling of the product (80), (c)
    control of work movement in a device wherein the tool cuts during work
    stoppage (209+) (d) initiation of tool feed in a device wherein the tool
    cuts during work stoppage (211+) (e) movement of "flying" cutter (286+),
    (f) shifting of work adjacent "flying"cutter (307), and (g) the operation
    of a part of the device (360+), respectively.

    71,     for a tape or card bearing indicia and means responsive to such
    indicia to control operation of the device.

    131,    for interlock between product stripper and tool-return means.

    203+,   484, and 591, for unicyclic operation of (a) a device wherein the
    tool cuts during work stoppage (203+), (b) a carrier for a rotatable disc
    tool (484), and (c) a carrier for a cyclically operating tool (591),
    respectively.

    380,    for sensing of work-clamping operation to effect tool-feed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 6+ for an analogous
    condition-responsive means controlling a metal-deforming means.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 116.5 for stop mechanism,
    particularly subclasses 129+, for safety device or interlock.


CLS 83/400
TXT Device under subclass 399 including mechanism to start the movement of that
    portion of the assembly whose operation is controlled by the sensed object.

    (1)     Note.  The difference between patents in this subclass (400) and
    patents in subclass 399 is that subclass 399 provides for structure wherein
    movement of the controlled member or assembly is permitted (e.g., by
    effecting release of an interlock), whereas this subclass (400) provides
    for structure wherein movement of the controlled member or assembly itself
    is started or accomplished as the direct result of the detection of the
    sensed object (i.e., element, pattern or other portion remote from the
    controlled member or assembly itself).


CLS 83/401
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including (a) dynamic means to effect
    movement of the work with respect to the zone of the claimed cutter, or (b)
    a device associated and moving with the work to hold or support the work
    and facilitate movement thereof with respect to such zone.

    (0.5)   Note.  An extension of a plane from the outer surface of a cutting
    edge of a cutter closest to the work will be referred to as a "plane of
    cut" or "cutting plane".

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses are the residual subclasses for
    the placement of a patent in which a work-conveying means is claimed or
    clearly inferred from the context of the claim and in which a cutter is
    claimed.  A patents in which work movement is effected by an operator
    grasping the work itself and pushing or pulling such work without
    correspondingly moving the work-associated device is excluded from this and
    the indented subclasses (401+).

    (2)     Note.  The work-moving means may comprise any structure by which
    the work is moved relative to a cutting zone even though the structure
    itself may be advanced manually.  Examples of such structure are a moving
    table, a pusher, a belt, an air-blast nozzle, etc.

    (3)     Note.  For the relationship of this group of subclasses to other
    work-handling classes, see section V of the Class Definition entitled
    "Relationship to Material Handling Classes".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202+,   for a cutting apparatus in which work is moved, stopped, and cut
    during the dwell in work movement.

    284+,   for a device which cuts  moving work by a transverse cutter moving
    with the work during cutting.

    350+,   for a cutting apparatus including a tool which approaches the work
    and recedes therefrom in a cutting stroke which is otherwise timed or
    synchronized with respect to work movement.

    469+    and 651+, as appropriate, for a patent in which a cutter is claimed
    and no work-moving means is claimed, even though it is apparent that the
    work must move to be cut.

    471+,   for a cutting apparatus including a relatively immovable
    work-supporting table, and a rotatable disc blade cutter.

    648+,   for a cutting apparatus in which work movement is effected by an
    operator grasping the work itself and pushing or pulling such work relative
    to a work support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, for a power driven conveyor in which no
    tool is claimed significantly, and see (3) Note above.  Search subclasses
    343.1+ and 375+ for a conveyor having means for orienting the conveyed load
    relative to the conveyor.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, for means to move work,
    generally, without recognition of both the leading and trailing ends
    thereof.

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses and see (2) Note, sections
    III,A and III,C, of that class for the line between this class and Class
    269.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, for means to move a relatively thin,
    flat workpiece of finite dimensions.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, for means to move an individually
    recognized workpiece, generally.


CLS 83/402
TXT Device under subclass 401 provided with means to force a gas or a liquid
    against the work itself, whereby the work is propelled by such gas or
    liquid in a desired direction of work movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for method of cutting including fluid application and an ancillary
    treatment.

    24,     for method of cutting including fluid application for product
    handling.

    53,     for method of cutting including fluid application for cutting.

    98+,    for product handling by fluid current.

    169,    for means to apply transient, nonpropellant fluid to work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclass 205 for a fiber preparing
    device including pneumatic means to carry fibers from one location to
    another.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, may include a nominal
    recitation of a supply or take-up coil (e.g., less than a support for such
    a coil or a cooperative relationship between a tension or exhaust detector*
    and reel driving or reel stopping means, etc.), subclasses 97.1+ for fluid
    current means to advance the material.


CLS 83/403
TXT Device under subclass 401 in which the work conveyor comprises a rotatable
    disc having a work passageway starting at the center of one of its faces
    and terminating in its periphery and in which the cutter has a cutting
    plane substantially perpendicular to the disc radius which defines the axis
    of the passageway at the moment of cutting.

    (1)     Note.  The patents included herein are commonly known as Beria-type
    fiber cutters after the name of the inventor of the device of U.S. Patent
    No. 1,723,998. In this and other patents of this type, filamentary material
    is led axially into the center of the disc wherein the material makes a
    right angled turn into a work passage, usually radial, and flows through
    the passage.  The rotation of the disc effects revolution of the radially
    extending portion of the filament in the plane of the rotating disc, and
    the centrifugal force imparted by the rotation simultaneously effects
    movement of the filament outwardly of the axis.


CLS 83/403.1
TXT Device under subclass 401 including means to vary or adjust the rate at
    which the work moving means advances the work toward the cutter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263+,   for means to vary the rate of speed of the moving work during a
    dwell of the work-feed means.

    298,    for means to interrelate the tool and the work-feed means.

    312+,   for means to regulate the work speed relative to a flying-cutter
    means.

    429,    for means to effect a different rate of speed between the work and
    the tool.


CLS 83/404
TXT Device under subclass 401 provided with a plurality of separated cutting
    zones, at each of which zones is located a cutter cutting in a plane acting
    on a distinct portion of the same material, and including means to effect
    movement of said material from a preceding cutting zone to a succeeding
    cutting zone in sequence.

    (0.5)   Note.  In this subclass, a plurality of punches or dies which act
    simultaneously in a single stroke or cycle of the tool actuator will be
    considered as a single cutting zone or tool station:  hence, means to feed
    to such zone will be found elsewhere in this group of subclasses (401+).
    If two punches or sets of punches are positioned at the same general
    location, but do not act simultaneously, then the two punches will be
    considered to define plural cutting zones and the device will be found here
    (404).

    (1)     Note.  The word "material" as used above is inclusive of that work
    which is to be cut at a first cutting zone, and of that product of the
    first cutting zone which is work to be cut at a second cutting zone.

    (2)     Note.  For further amplification of specific forms of "cutting
    zone", see (1) Note of subclass 405, (1) Note of subclass 406, and (2) Note
    of subclass 407.

    (3)     Note.  This and indented subclasses differ from subclasses 78+ in
    that these subclasses (404+) provide for machines distinguished by a second
    cutter which acts upon the product of a first cutter and, further, by
    structure for moving the material (i.e., the product of the first cutter)
    between the sequentially acting cutters; whereas subclasses 78+ provides
    for machines having means for removal of the final product.

    (4)     Note.  Included in this and indented subclasses are patents
    disclosing means for changing the direction of the material movement, or
    the path of the material, between the sequentially acting cutters or
    cutting zones.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for a method of severing including perforating and cutting to join
    the holes so perforated.

    78+,    for delivery means for the product of a cutter and see (1) Note
    above.

    213+    and 255+, for plural tool stations of the type provided for in
    subclass 202.

    300     and 301+, for a "flying" cutter and another type cutter operating
    sequentially.

    357,    for plural tool stations, in a device wherein a tool is
    synchronized with moving work.

    513+,   for plural, individually actuated tools.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, subclass 97 for plural breaking
    tools.


CLS 83/404.1
TXT Device under subclass 404 wherein a cutter in a preceding zone is
    positioned, or is capable of being positioned, in such a manner as to have
    a cutting plane that is not parallel to the cutting plane of a cutter in
    succeeding cutting zone, and wherein each said cutters make a cut that is
    parallel to the direction of work movement at the time it is being cut.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    471.3,  for a tool angularly adjustable relative to a work support.

    486.1,  for means to adjust a tool angularly relative to its previous
    position.


CLS 83/404.2
TXT Device under subclass 404.1 wherein the work moving means, in transporting
    the work from the preceding cutting zone to the succeeding one, shifts the
    work so that a different lateral edge will be cut at the succeeding zone
    than that which was cut at the preceding zone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    915.3,  for an art collection including an ice cutting machine which may
    include means to manipulate the work between respective tool stations.


CLS 83/404.3
TXT Device under subclass 404.1 wherein the cutting tool at one of the stations
    remains passive during its cutting operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    431,    for a stationary cutting tool, and means to press the work to that
    tool during the cutting operation.

    856+,   for a stationary cutter, per se.


CLS 83/404.4
TXT Device under subclass 404 wherein the cutting zones are arranged in a
    spaced, overlapping relationship such that their axis and their cutting
    planes are parallel, and not coincident to one another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    425.2+, for a device which includes a series of laterally spaced, axially
    aligned cutting tool stations.


CLS 83/405
TXT Device under subclass 404 in which at least one of the cutters comprises a
    tool for perforating a hole in the material or a tool for cutting a product
    from within the boundaries of the material or a tool for cutting a product
    from within the boundaries of the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40+,    for method of blanking and cutting.

    55,     for method of blanking.

    660,    for pointed perforator, per se.

    667     and 682, for punching plus nonpunching tool.

    684+    and 698.91+, for punching tool, per se.


CLS 83/406
TXT Device under subclass 404 in which at least one of the cutters comprises a
    tool having a nonlinear cutting edge acting upon the edge of the material
    to remove one or more products therefrom and leave portions of the original
    edge intact, or comprises a tool for severing the material into two
    products by a nonlinear repetitive pattern cut upon a portion of the
    material other than its edge.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note of subclass 405 except substitute "notching or
    pinking tools" for "punches or sets of punches".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333,    for rotating tool having an undulant cutting edge.

    668     and 683, for notching plus nonnotching tool.

    671     and 692, for notching tool, per se.

    917,    for notching "digest".

    918,    for pinking "digest".


CLS 83/406.1
TXT Device under subclass 404 wherein one tool defines two cutting zones
    separated along the length of the work-feed, which tool cooperates with a
    work-feed means to cut a slice from the work at each of the two cutting
    zones, as the work is moved first in one direction and then in the opposite
    direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    707+,   for a rectilinearly reciprocating means which passes the work
    through one cutting tool station.


CLS 83/407
TXT Device under subclass 404 in which at least one of the tools comprises one
    or more edged cutters located in the path of moving material and whose
    cutting plane (as disclosed) is substantially parallel to said path for
    constant cutting contact with the material thicknesswise thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See the definition and notes to subclass 425 for further
    amplification of what is considered to be a slitter.

    (2)     Note.  A plurality of slitters transversely spaced at the same
    longitudinal location, which slitters simultaneously cut moving material,
    (i.e., two or more slitters spaced across the material and perpendicular to
    the direction of material movement), will be considered as a single cutting
    zone or tool station, whereas slitters obliquely spaced (i.e., one slitter
    to the side and forward of another slitter) will be considered as plural
    cutting zones or tool stations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    469+,   for rotatable disc tool and carrier.

    676,    for disc-type tool, per se.


CLS 83/408
TXT Device under subclass 407 in which at least another of the cutting zones
    comprises a cutter of the type which cuts from side edge to side edge of
    the material across the direction of material movement at said other
    cutting zone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302,    for "flying" cutter combined with "slitting" cutter.


CLS 83/409
TXT Device under subclass 401 in which the
    work-moving means includes elements or mechanism (mounted on or integral
    with, and moving with, said means) for securing the work against both
    forward and rearward shifting of the work relative to the motion of
    saidwork-moving means, whereby the work partakes of all the feeding
    movements of the work mover.

    (1)     Note.  In this and indented subclasses, the combined work-mover
    andwork-constraining means will be referred to as a "work carrier".

    (2)     Note.  A feed drum with radial projections thereon (commonly known
    as a "pinwheel") is not considered as a work carrier as defined above if
    the work enters the pinwheel chorally or tangentially, contacts only part
    of the periphery of the pinwheel, and leaves the pinwheel chordally or
    tangentially.  For patents directed to such feed means, see subclass 423.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    276+,   for a cutting device including a reciprocating work-mover, wherein
    the tool engages the work during dwell of intermittent workfeed.

    423,    and see (2) Note above.

    435.11+, for a cutting device having a rectilinearly moving work carriage
    and tool adapted to cut parallel to the direction of and during work
    movement.

    437.1+, for a cutting device having a rectilinearly moving work carriage
    and a tool, generally.

    730,    for a cutting device including a rectilinearly moving work carriage
    and including means to cause the cutting device to make plural passes
    through a diminishing workpiece, including means to effect incremental
    movement toward the plane of cut.


CLS 83/409.1
TXT Device under subclass 409 including means to hold two or more pieces
    individually on the work conveyor for successive movement past a cutting
    zone.

    (1)     Note.  The work movement may be along a straight, tortuous or a
    circuitous path.


CLS 83/409.2
TXT Device under subclass 409.1 in which the work-moving means is provided with
    opening through which a portion of the work protrudes for engagement with
    the cutting means.


CLS 83/410
TXT Device under subclass 409 provided with a means to restrict the work
    carrier to travel in a predetermined tortuous or circuitous course.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note of subclass 409 for definition of "work
    carrier".

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass are patents provided with a
    pattern or templet, the pattern serving the dual function of (1) guiding
    the work carrier, and (2) orienting the work carrier, both with respect to
    the cutting zone.  For other patterns or templets which orient, but do not
    guide, the work carrier, see subclass 413.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    413,    and see (2) Note above.

    443,    for curved or deflecting means to guide the work directly.


CLS 83/410.7
TXT About axis fixed relative to tool station:

    Device under subclass 410 in which the work carrier is restricted to rotate
    or oscillate around an axis, which axis is stationary with respect to the
    cutting zone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    267,    for rotating work-feeder for a subclass 202 type of cutter.

    323,    for work-feed for flying cutter, the work-feeder carried by the
    tool support.

    439,    for pivotal work guide.


CLS 83/410.8
TXT Infeed:

    Device under subclass 410.7 wherein the work carrier moves with the work
    through the cutting zone to effect cutting.


CLS 83/410.9
TXT About vertical axis:

    Device under subclass 410.8 that is base mounted and wherein the work
    carrier is restricted to turn about a line extending toward the center of
    the earth.


CLS 83/411.1
TXT Cut normal to axis:

    Device under subclass 410.9 wherein the plane of action of the cutting
    instrumentality is such that that plane passes at a right angle through the
    line about which the work carrier turns.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    703+,   for means to convey a workpiece to and fro through a cutting zone
    to diminish the size of the workpiece.


CLS 83/411.2
TXT Work guide tube:

    Device under subclass 411.1 wherein the work is directed toward the cutting
    zone by passing through hollow passage and the work is then advanced
    through the cutting zone by movement of the hollow passage laterally of the
    extent of the hollow passage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    409.1+, for a cutting device including plural means on a single conveyor to
    constrain plural workpieces.


CLS 83/411.3
TXT Cut normal to axis:

    Device under subclass 410.8 wherein the plane of action of the cutting
    instrumentality is such that that plane passes at a right angle through the
    line about which the work carrier turns.


CLS 83/411.4
TXT Oscillating work carrier:

    Device under subclass 411.3 wherein the work carrier moves to and fro less
    than 360 degrees about the stationary line.


CLS 83/411.5
TXT Multiple cutters:

    Device under subclass 411.3 including more than one instrumentality to
    effect a cutting action of the class type.


CLS 83/411.6
TXT Coaxial rotary cutters:

    Device under subclass 411.5 including a first cutting instrumentality that
    cuts by turning more than 360 degrees about its central axis and including
    a second cutting instrumentality then cuts by turning more than 360 degrees
    about its central axis, wherein both central axes are coextensive.


CLS 83/411.7
TXT Work stationary during cut:

    Device under subclass 410.7 wherein the workpiece is guided into the
    cutting zone by a work carrier restricted to move about a fixed line, and
    wherein the workpiece is immobile during the cutting action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202+,   for means to intermittently (i.e., cyclically) cause work to
    advance at a tool station with provision to effect cutting during dwell of
    work advance; search especially subclass 261 for a device wherein the work
    is advanced about an axis and wherein advance is effected by an interrupted
    fictional surface.


CLS 83/412
TXT Device under subclass 409 provided with means to move the work carrier in a
    desired place or posture with respect to the cutting zone.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note of subclass 409 for definition of "work
    carrier".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    396,    for work-mover stop interrelated with tool-moving means.


CLS 83/413
TXT Device under subclass 412 in which the orienting means comprises a model,
    prototype, or design.

    (1)     Note.  Included within the terms "pattern" or "templet", are models
    which cause the path of movement of the work to be exactly similar or
    proportional to the outline or form of the model.  Cams, eccentrics, and
    other objects which orient the work carrier to cut a product to a form
    distorted with respect to the object are not considered as pattern or
    templet means.  Such objects, if they effect guidance of the work carrier,
    will be found in subclass 410.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    410,    and see (1) Note above.

    442,    for a guide cooperating with a template or straightedge secured to
    the work, but not serving to move the work.

    565,    for a tool which is guided by a pattern or template for
    tool-positioning movement relative to the work.


CLS 83/414
TXT Device under subclass 412 in which the orienting means includes at least
    two stop members, one of which members is fixed to a stationary part of the
    device and the other of which members is movable, its movement being
    directly or proportionally related to the work carrier movement, either or
    both stop members comprising a plurality of successive stopping abutments,
    whereby the work carrier means is halted successively by the
    interengagement of one stop member with the successive abutments of the
    other stop member.

    (1)     Note.  A notch or depression and a detent cooperating therewith is
    considered as indexing means for the purposes of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239,    for similar structure for producing work or work carriage movements
    in unequal increments between tool strokes.


CLS 83/415
TXT Device under subclass 409 provided with means supplemental to the work
    securing means and mounted on the work carrier, which supplemental means
    contacts and establishes the position of the work with respect to the work
    carrier.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note of subclass 409 for definition of "work
    carrier".

    (2)     Note.  Included herein are patents disclosing means to adjust the
    supplemental means with respect to the work carrier.

    (3)     Note.  As disclosed in the patents placed herein, work is located
    relative to the carrier and thus the work is also located relative to the
    tool.  For other patents claiming work conveying means and wherein, as
    disclosed, work is located relative to the tool, see subclasses 418+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    391+,   for work-stop abutment interrelated with tool-moving means.

    418+,   and see (3) Note above.

    467+,   for work-stop abutment.


CLS 83/416
TXT Device under subclass 401 provided with means to interrupt the movement of
    the work-moving means.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are patents disclosing structure in which
    work-mover stopping means regulates the extent of work movement to the
    cutter. The extent of work movement may be to that dimension which, when
    the work is cut through, produces a product of desired dimension, or may be
    to that distance which, when the work is perforated or notched, produces a
    product having holes or notches spaced apart by the desired distance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    396,    for interrelated tool moving means and work-mover stopping means.


CLS 83/417
TXT Devices under subclass 401 provided with means to collect temporarily a
    reserve supply of discrete workpieces, from which supply said discrete
    workpieces are to be separated and moved to a cutting zone.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are patents disclosing hoppers, work-storage
    magazines, and gravity feed chutes, serving to hold a reserve of work which
    is to be cut.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein are patents disclosing means to insure that
    only one workpiece at a time is moved from the supply of workpieces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281,    for means to pick an article from a pack or stack and present such
    an article to a subclass 202 type of tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for hoppers and means to
    dispense articles therefrom.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, appropriate subclasses, for hoppers
    and means to feed sheets therefrom.


CLS 83/418
TXT Device under subclass 401 including means supplemental to the work-moving
    means, which supplemental means contacts the work and positions said work
    with respect to the cutting zone.

    (1)     Note.  The supplemental means may include a passive guide fixed or
    adjustable with respect to the cutter and a roller inclined to the path of
    movement of the work-mover, the roller urging the work against the guide.
    For an adjustable guide, see subclass 421. The supplemental means may
    include a pair of rollers inclined to the path of movement to the work
    mover, the rollers being driven or nondriven, but in either case urging the
    work laterally of the direction of movement of the work.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein is a patent disclosing two members
    horizontally movable toward each other to clamp work therebetween, wherein
    inherently one of the members will engage a workpiece (the first-engaging
    member thus being a workmover) and move that workpiece toward the other
    member (the other member thus being the additional means); and in which it
    is claimed or clearly inferred from the content of a claim (e.g.,by
    recitation of "centering" or similar term) that the work is moved by one
    such member toward the other member.  See subclass 419 for structure
    wherein one of the members is fixed relative to the cutting tool. See
    subclass 452 for work-clamp means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    409+,   for a work carrier including means to orient the work carrier
    relative to the tool or to locate the work relative to the work carrier,
    but in either case providing means to orient the work relative to the tool.

    419     and 452, and see (2) Note above.

    421,    and see (1) Note above.

    443,    for curved or deflecting work guide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 343.1+  and 416+ and others for
    a conveyor combined with means for contacting the conveyed load to orient
    it relative to the conveyor or a tool station.


CLS 83/419
TXT Device under subclass 418 in which the supplemental means comprises a
    member in the path of movement of the work and fixed with respect to the
    cutting zone to interrupt the work movement at least until the work has
    been cut.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163     and 166, for a material-stopping abutment associated with product
    handling means.

    207,    253+, and 268+, for a work-stopping abutment in a subclass 202 type
    of cutting device.

    391+,   for work stopping abutment interrelated with a tool moving means.

    467+,   for work stopping abutment, per se.


CLS 83/420
TXT Device under subclass 418 in which the supplemental means comprises two
    members, one member located on one side of the path of work movement and
    the other member located on the other side of such path, both members
    contacting the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    448+,   for other plural guide elements.


CLS 83/421
TXT Device under subclass 418 including means to change the position of the
    supplemental means with respect to the cutting zone.

    (1)     Note.  Patents placed herein may disclose the function of the
    adjustment as effecting a variance of the distance between the uncut side
    edge of the work and the cut side edge of the product. For other patents in
    which the same function is achieved by shifting the tool means laterally,
    see subclasses 433, 498+ and 504.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    433,    498+ and 504, and see (1) Note above.


CLS 83/422
TXT Device under subclass 401 including means for urging the work toward the
    work-moving means.

    (1)     Note.  Where a patent discloses a pressing member cooperating in a
    feeding function (as, e.g., an idler roll of a feed couple), the patent (to
    be placed as an original herein) must claim the pressing member in terms of
    its pressing function (as by naming it "a presser roll") or claim
    additional structure effective to urge or permit urging of the presser
    toward the feeding means.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass are patents in which the pressure
    between the presser assembly and thework-moving means is adjustable.  Thus
    patents claiming a feed couple, or equivalent term, (characterized by
    structure including two rolls between which, and in tangential contact
    with, the work is moved by the rolls) and also claiming means to adjust the
    pressure between the rolls, will be included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    475+,   for similar structure in which a member presses work to a movable
    work-support, which work-support is not claimed as the work-mover.


CLS 83/423
TXT Device under subclass 401 in which the
    work-moving means includes projecting and re-entering portions (i.e., lugs
    or pins), mounted on or integral with said means.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are patents disclosing a pusher on a
    work-moving belt or table, said pusher engaging the trailing end of a work
    article.  Also included herein are patents disclosing a wheel having radial
    pins or projections engaging in perforations in the work wherein the work
    enters the pinwheel chordally or tangentially, contacts only a part of the
    periphery of the pinwheel, and leaves the pinwheel chordally or
    tangentially, such that the work does not partake of all the feeding
    movements of the work-mover.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278,    for other work-moving means for 202 type of tool.

    409,    for other work-moving means including work-constraining
    projections, but in which the work partakes of all the feeding movement of
    the work-mover.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 52+ for pin
    feeders, per se.


CLS 83/424
TXT Device under subclass 401 provided with at least two means to move the
    work, said means being separate in the direction of movement of the work,
    and in which the cutter is located interjacent said means.

    (1)     Note.  If the means located beyond the cutter facilitates pulling
    the work through the cutting zone, it is considered to be a work-moving
    means for this subclass.  For patents in which the means located beyond the
    cutter facilitates movement of the product away from the cutting zone, see
    subclasses 102+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102+,   and see (1) Note above.

    110     and 112+, for product-handling conveyor beyond the cutter.

    155,    for endless conveyor handling product.


CLS 83/425
TXT Device under subclass 401 in which a cutter is located at a cutting zone in
    the path of moving work and whose cutting plane (as disclosed) is
    substantially parallel to said path and to the direction of movement of the
    work for constant cutting contact with said work, and including claimed
    means for moving the work to and through said cutting zone for constant
    cutting of said work.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes tools known generally in the art as
    "slitters" as well as saws.

    (2)     Note.  The word "constant" as used above does not preclude the
    operation of means to reposition the cutter out of (and thus, also, back
    into) the cutting zone in the absence of work thereat.  The cutting is
    constant so long as (1) the cutter remains in its cutting position and (2)
    the work is moved toward and past it.  The following conclusions flow from
    consideration of this qualification:



    (A)     The cutter does not have a cycle of operation known as "tool
    feed"), in that it does not move to and through the work during cutting. If
    the cutter has a movement, its movement is limited to:

    (a)     a bodily movement of the cutter into a position wherein it will cut
    the work, or out of such cutting position, but in either such case while
    the work is absent from the cutting zone; or

    (b)     an internal movement such as will present a fresh cutting edge to
    the work; for example, as by rotation of a rotatable circular blade or by
    reciprocation of a blade, but in either case while the cutting edge remains
    in contact with the work.

    If the cutter is moved into the work while the work is at the cutting zone,
    such movement is part of a cutting cycle, and a patent claiming such
    structure is not found herein.  For such patent see subclasses 202+, 284+,
    and 350+.

    (B)     The work may be, for instance, a succession of relatively
    closely-spaced articles, each of which articles is to be cut or slit
    longitudinally of the direction of article movement from the leading end to
    the trailing end of each article regardless of the orientation of the
    article.  It also may be a web of indeterminate length, for instance, which
    is to be slit longitudinally of its length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202+,   284+,  and 350+, see (2) Note above.

    469+,   for a feature relating to a rotatable disc-blade cutter, alone or
    cooperating with a mating cutter.

    651+,   for a feature relating to fixed blade type of cutter, per se.

    788+,   for an endless band-knife cutter positioned for continuous
    engagement with moving work.


CLS 83/425.1
TXT Device under subclass 425 including an additional cutter which cuts through
    the work before or after (in time or space) the cutter having constant
    contact with the work.


CLS 83/425.2
TXT Device under subclass 425 provided with at least two distinct tools
    separated one from the other laterally across the path of moving work.

    (1)     Note.  The tools of this particular subclass are distinguished from
    tools of subclasses indented hereunder by the fact that each tool is
    separately mounted on its own independent shaft or carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    356.3,  for a cutting device having a single tool support for plural tools,
    wherein the support moves with uniformly timed strokes relative to the
    moving work.


CLS 83/425.3
TXT Device under subclass 425.2 wherein the tools are laterally spaced on a
    carrier or shaft which is common to all the tools.


CLS 83/425.4
TXT Device under subclass 425.3 wherein at least one of the tools is movable or
    adjustable along the axes of the shaft or the length of the carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    504,    for a rotatable disc tool pair wherein one of the discs of the tool
    pair is axially adjustable.


CLS 83/426
TXT Device under subclass 425 including means to move the edged cutter, and
    common mechanism to drive both the cutter-moving means and the work-moving
    means.

    (1)     Note.  The cutter movement referred to above is limited to a
    movement as restricted in paragraph A of (2) Note to subclass 425.
    Exemplary forms of such cutter movement are a reciprocation of the cutter
    (such as is produced in a "jigsaw" type of cutter) and a rotation of a disc
    blade type of cutter.


CLS 83/427
TXT Device under subclass 426 in which the movement of the cutter is to-and-fro
    (either rectilinear or oscillating) in the direction of work-thickness.


CLS 83/428
TXT Device under subclass 426 in which the cutter movement is in a direction
    which is simultaneously transverse to the path of the work, and
    substantially perpendicular to the cutting plane of said cutter, (i.e.,
    parallel to a surface of the work), and occurs while the work is moving
    through the cutting zone.

    (1)     Note.  Patents placed herein produce an undulant or zigzag line of
    separation of cutting.  For other patents producing a zigzag line, but
    without lateral movement of the tool, see subclass 333.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333,    and see (1) Note above.

    353,    for cutter traveling (e.g., laterally) with respect to moving work.

    356,    for cutter having periodic lateral feed with respect to moving work.

    498+    and 504, for other means to move a tool pair or tool laterally of
    the direction of movement of the work.


CLS 83/429
TXT Device under subclass 426 in which the cutter-moving means imparts to the
    cutter a component of velocity in the direction of movement of the work,
    and including means to cause the velocity of the cutter to be different in
    magnitude than the velocity of the work.

    (1)     Note.  Since a reciprocating cutter whose cutting edge is at an
    oblique angle to the direction of work movement inherently has a varying
    component of velocity in the direction of work movement as it accelerates
    and decelerates in its to-and-fro movement, this of itself is not
    considered a means to bring about a difference between the speed of the
    tool and the speed of the work.  However, if a means is provided to vary
    the speed of the motion converting mechanism (which effects the
    reciprocation of such a cutter) with relation to the speed of the work,
    such patents have been placed in this subclass (429).

    (2)     Note.  A patent claiming means to rotate the cutter in a negative
    direction; e.g., a direction opposed to the movement of the work, will be
    found herein.


CLS 83/430
TXT Device under subclass 426 in which the means to move work turns about an
    axis of rotation and engages work to move the work tangentially of said
    means, and in which the cutter is a circular disc-blade turning about the
    same axis of rotation.

    (1)     Note.  To be placed herein, a patent must include an edged cutter
    and a work-moving roller or disc coaxial with each other.  A tool which is
    recited in the claim as both a cutting means and a work-moving means is
    considered to be a coaxial cutter and work-mover if it otherwise fits the
    limitations of the definition.

    (2)     Note.  A roller serving both as
    work-moving means and as the backup anvil for an edged cutter not revolving
    about such axis is not itself considered to be an edged cutter.  For such
    structure, see subclass 434.  For similar structure wherein the roller does
    not function as a work-moving means, see subclasses 505+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    434     and 505+, and see (1) Note above.

    500+,   for a roller having a cutting edge at the end thereof, the
    periphery of which roller could function as a work-moving means.


CLS 83/431
TXT Device under subclass 425 including means additional to the work-mover or a
    cutter located adjacent the edged cutter and acting in a direction which is
    simultaneously parallel to the plane of said edged cutter and perpendicular
    to the direction of work movement to urge the work upon the edged cutter.


CLS 83/432
TXT Device under subclass 425 in which, as disclosed, the work mover acts to
    move planar work in a path parallel to the work-plane, and the cutting
    plane of the cutter is simultaneously parallel to the direction of said
    path and inclined to said work-plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3       and 4, for edge-trimming and skiving cutters.


CLS 83/433
TXT Device under subclass 425 in which the cutter is mounted for movement with
    relation to the means for moving the work.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are cutter mountings providing for
    adjustment of the cutter in cutting position as well as mountings providing
    for movement of the cutters into and out of a position wherein it will cut
    work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248,    for means to adjust a tool in a subclass 202 type of device.

    482,    for rotatable disc-blades movable into or out of cutting position.

    498+    and 504, for rotatable disc-blade cutters adjustable axially.

    699.51+,for adjustable mounting for
    fixed-type cutters.


CLS 83/434
TXT Device under subclass 425 in which the means for moving work includes a
    work-contacting face area, and in which the cutting edge of the cutter
    engages said face area during cutting.

    (1)     Note.  The structure of patents placed in this subclass is similar
    to that of subclasses 505+ and 509+ in that patents in this subclass may
    include a rotatable disc-blade (in subclasses 505+) or a fixed cutter (in
    subclasses 509+) engaging the periphery of a cylindrical anvil.  The
    difference is that in this subclass the cylindrical anvil is rotated by
    drive means and is claimed as a work-feed (or equivalent term) means,
    whereas the anvil of subclasses 505+ and 509+ is not claimed as moving the
    work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176+,   for devices wherein the work is claimed as deformed around an anvil
    for cutting the work.

    505+    and 509+, and see (1) Note above.


CLS 83/435
TXT Device under subclass 425 in which the means for moving work includes at
    least two such means cooperating to move the same work, but separated one
    from the other in a direction transverse to the direction of work movement,
    and the cutter is located interjacent said two means.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are grooved feed rolls and cutters located
    at the grooves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    430,    for similar structure wherein the cutter is coaxial with and moved
    by means common to the work-moving drive means.


CLS 83/435.11
TXT By rectilinearly moving work carriage:

    Device under subclass 425 wherein the work moving means is of rigid
    construction and is adapted to support the work against gravity and which
    support moves relative to the tool station along a fixed straight path.

    (1)     Note.  A miter gage having a portion that rides in a slot in a
    cutter table is considered to be a work carriage, under the definition of
    this and the indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    276+,   for reciprocating work-mover, wherein the tool engages the work
    during dwell of intermittent workfeed.

    409+,   for other rectilinear work-mover means including a
    work-constrainer.


    437.1+  for a cutting device having a rectilinearly moving work carriage
    and a tool, generally.

    730,    for a cutting device including a rectilinearly moving work carriage
    and including means to cause the cutting device to make plural passes
    through a diminishing workpiece, including means to effect incremental
    movement toward the plane of cut.


CLS 83/435.12
TXT Angularly adjustable:

    Device under subclass 435.11 including provision to allow the device to be
    repositioned about an axis.


CLS 83/435.13
TXT Having positive adjustment stop; e.g., link:

    Device under subclass 435.12 including a preset adjustment limiting
    abutment.


CLS 83/435.14
TXT Having position indicating means:

    Device under subclass 435.12 including digital provision to designate the
    location of the work.

    (1)     Note.  An indicator showing the position of a work support also
    shows the position of the work thereon, and is included herein.


CLS 83/435.15
TXT Pusher engaging rear surface of work:

    Device under subclass 435.11 comprising a member acting to engage a
    backward facing surface of the workpiece and shove it toward the cutter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    431,    for similar structure including means additional to the work-mover
    or a cutter located adjacent the edged cutter and acting in a direction
    which is simultaneously parallel to the plane of said edged cutter and
    perpendicular to the direction of work movement to urge the work upon the
    edged cutter.

    437.2+, for a tool opposing pusher that forces the work toward a cutter;
    wherein the cut is other than parallel to the direction of movement of the
    work.


CLS 83/435.16
TXT Having means to actuate pusher:

    Device under subclass 435.15 including a component intended to engage the
    shoving member to effect movement thereof.


CLS 83/435.17
TXT Hydraulically or pneumatically means:

    Device under subclass 435.16 wherein the component is adapted to utilize
    gas or liquid under pressure to effect movement.


CLS 83/435.18
TXT Gear or pulley actuated pusher:

    Device under subclass 435.16 wherein the movement is effected by the action
    the peripheral surface of a rotary, cylindrical member which may include
    teeth that interfit with cooperating teeth on the pusher or may include a
    smooth surface that frictionally engages the pusher.

    (1)     Note.  A gear that drives chain, or a pulley that drives a belt,
    which in turn, drives a pusher is included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    435.16, for similar structure including a worm or screw actuated pusher.


CLS 83/435.19
TXT Lever, cam, or link actuated pusher:

    Device under subclass 435.16 wherein the movement is effected by the action
    of a swinging arm, a sliding wedge-like member which may be rotary, or by a
    pivotal member attached at its end to the pusher.


CLS 83/435.2
TXT Device under subclass 425 which comprises a continuous web, strand, or
    series of articulated links which move the work while the work is supported
    thereby.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    435,    for a work moving means comprising two endless conveyors, laterally
    spaced, and wherein the cutting tool is disposed therebetween.


CLS 83/435.21
TXT Having means to actuate carriage:

    Device under subclass 435.11 including a component intended to engage the
    work moving means to effect movement thereof.


CLS 83/435.22
TXT Hydraulic or pneumatic means:

    Device under subclass 435.21 wherein the component is adapted to utilize
    gas or liquid under pressure to effect movement.


CLS 83/435.23
TXT Gear or pulley:

    Device under subclass 435.21 wherein the movement is effected by action of
    the peripheral surface of a rotary, cylindrical member which may include
    teeth that interfit with cooperating teeth on the work carriage or may
    include a smooth surface that frictionally engages the work carriage.

    (1)     Note. a gear that drives chain, or a pulley that drives a belt,
    which in turn, drives a pusher is included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    435.21, for similar structure including a worm or screw actuated pusher.


CLS 83/435.24
TXT Adapted to place tension on flaccid member:

    Device under subclass 435.23 wherein the cylindrical member effects tensile
    force on a flexible strand capable of transmitting only tensile force along
    its axis, to effect movement of the work carriage to which the strand is
    connected.


CLS 83/435.25
TXT Lever, cam, or link means:

    Device under subclass 435.21 wherein the movement of the work carriage is
    effected by the action of a swinging arm, a slidingwedge-like member which
    may be rotary, or by a pivotal member attached at its end to the carriage.


CLS 83/435.26
TXT On or attached to vehicle:

    Device under subclass 435.11 supported for movement over substantial
    distances, or adapted to be secured to a carriage which, in turn is movable
    over substantial distances.

    (1)     Note.  Casters under the frame of a cutting machine is not deemed
    to support the machine for movement over a substantial distance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    928,    a cross-reference art collection, for a vehicle mounted cutting
    tool, generally.


CLS 83/435.27
TXT Supported for movement at one side of tool only:

    Device under subclass 435.11 wherein the movable carriage is sustained
    against gravity entirely on one side of a line extending through the path
    of the cutter.

    (1)     Note.  A "Shingle cutter" including a horizontally cutting blade
    and a work carriage there-above wherein all guide structure for the work
    carriage is above the blade is included herein.


CLS 83/436.1
TXT By feed roller:

    Device under subclass 425 in which the
    work-moving means itself moves in the arc of a circle in peripheral
    engagement with the work, thereby moving the work in a straight path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261,    for a cutting device that engages a workpiece during dwell of
    intermittent workfeed with a rotary feed means.

    436.3+, for a cutting device with a roller to convey work, generally.


CLS 83/436.15
TXT Pinch rollers:

    Device under subclass 436.1 including another work engaging means of
    similar configuration to the work-moving means adapted to engage a
    diametrically opposite surface of the work from the work-moving means to
    grip the work and enhance the frictional contact of thework-moving means
    with the work.


CLS 83/436.2
TXT Unattached manual work pusher:

    Device under subclass 425 comprising an implement intended to be grasped
    directly by and randomly manipulated by an operative and used to shove work
    toward a cutter.


CLS 83/436.3
TXT Roller:

    Device under subclass 401 in which the
    work-moving means itself moves in the arc of a circle in peripheral
    engagement with the work, thereby moving the work in a straight path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261,    for a cutting device that engages a workpiece during dwell of
    intermittent workfeed with a rotary feed means.

    436.1+, for a cutting device with a roller to convey work wherein the cut
    is parallel to and during work movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power Driven, subclasses 780+ for a live roll used in a
    conveyor, generally.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se.


CLS 83/436.4
TXT Plural independent rollers for feed of plural distinct work:

    Device under subclass 436.3 including of a first roller for advancing a
    first workpiece and a second roller for advancing a second workpiece.


CLS 83/436.45
TXT Shaped to conform to work:

    Device under subclass 436.3 comprising a roller having a shape other than
    smooth such that it intefits with the intended material intended to be
    conveyed thereby.


CLS 83/436.5
TXT With work-supplying reel:

    Device under subclass 436.3 combined with a work supply including a storage
    spool.


CLS 83/436.55
TXT And provision for selecting feed length:

    Device under subclass 436.5 including provision to predetermine the extent
    of material to be advanced.


CLS 83/436.6
TXT Continuous conveying during cutting; e.g., straw cutting:

    Device under subclass 436.3 intended to continue conveying the work into
    the tool station as the cutter functions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262,    for a cutter and feeder wherein the feeder continues during
    cutting, but the work is clamped or blocked during cutting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, for a process or
    apparatus directed to the cutting or severing of solid material into a
    number of smaller solid masses, which smaller masses do not have imparted
    to them any desired or significant shape. As between Classes 83 and 241,
    the provision of means for (or steps of) retaining an original dimension of
    the work in the cut up product will exclude a patent for the apparatus (or
    process) from Class 241.


CLS 83/436.7
TXT Supporting work at cutting station:

    Device under subclass 436.3 wherein the roller sustains the work during
    cutting.

    (1)     Note.  Since the roller of this subclass supports the work during
    cutting, the work must be sufficiently rigid to span the distance from the
    roller to the tool station.


CLS 83/436.75
TXT Comprising part of cutting station:

    Device under subclass 436.7 wherein the roller is so close to the tool that
    it sustains the work against the action of the tool.


CLS 83/436.8
TXT Tool and feed roller actuated by common handle:

    Device under subclass 436.3 including a manually grasped portion intended
    to reposition the cutter and also intended to reposition the feed roller.


CLS 83/436.9
TXT Tool and roller on common movable support:

    Device under subclass 436.3 including a repositionable member for support
    of the cutter during its operation and including a feed roller also on that
    same repositionable member.


CLS 83/437.1
TXT Rectilinear movement only:

    Device under subclass 401 in which the
    work-moving means itself moves in a straight line while  engaged with the
    work.


    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a feeder that moves in an orbital path, a
    part of such path being rectilinear and lying in the plane of the work
    whereby the feeder engages and moves with the work in such rectilinear
    path, and a part of the feeder path being out of the work plane whereby the
    feeder retracts for are-engagement with a different part of the same work.
    Also included herein is a pusher member maintained in continuous engagement
    with the work throughout the feed stroke, and the pusher retracts to engage
    another workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    276+,   for a cutting device including a reciprocating work-mover, wherein
    the tool engages the work during dwell of intermittent workfeed.

    409+,   for other rectilinear work-mover means including a
    work-constrainer.


    435.11+, for a cutting device having a rectilinearly moving work carriage
    and tool adapted to cut parallel to the direction of and during work
    movement.


CLS 83/437.2
TXT Tool opposing pusher:

    Device under subclass 437.1 comprising a member acting to engage a
    workpiece and shove it toward the cutter.

    (1)     Note.  A "back gage" which pushes a stack of sheets of paper into
    final position for cutting is included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS SUBCLASS:

    431,    for similar structure including means additional to the work-mover
    or a cutter located adjacent the edged cutter and acting in a direction
    which is simultaneously parallel to the plane of said edged cutter and
    perpendicular to the direction of work movement to urge the work upon the
    edged cutter.

    435.15, for a tool opposing pusher that forces the work toward a cutter;
    wherein the cut is parallel to the direction of movement of the work.


CLS 83/437.3
TXT Hydraulically or pneumatically actuated:

    Device under subclass 437.2 including a motor powered by gas or liquid
    under pressure to effect movement of the conveyor.


CLS 83/437.4
TXT Screw actuated:

    Device under subclass 437.2 wherein the movement is effected by action of
    the peripheral surface of a rotary, cylindrical member which includes a
    helical ridge or groove that interfits with a mating portion of the
    conveyor to effect movement thereof.


CLS 83/437.5
TXT Gear or pulley actuated:

    Device under subclass 437.2 wherein the movement is effected by action of
    the peripheral surface of a rotary, cylindrical member which may include
    teeth that interfit with cooperating teeth on the conveyor or may include a
    smooth surface that frictionally engages the conveyor to effect movement
    thereof.

    (1)     Note. a gear that drives chain, or a pulley that drives a belt,
    which in turn, drives a pusher is included herein.


CLS 83/437.6
TXT Lever, cam or link actuated:

    Device under subclass 437.2 wherein the movement is effected by the action
    of a swinging arm, a sliding wedge-like member which may be rotary, or by a
    pivotal member attached at its end to the conveyor.


CLS 83/437.7
TXT Spring or gravity urged:

    Device under subclass 437.2 wherein pressure is applied to the conveyor by
    a resilient member or by the action of gravity.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a tool opposing pusher positioned
    vertically above the work so that gravity would advance the pusher, even
    though there is no specific disclosure of such.


CLS 83/438
TXT Apparatus under the class definition provided with passive means which is
    operative to define or limit the path of movement (i.e., to direct, wholly
    or partially, the course) or moving work, or to orient such work.

    (1)     Note.  The mere support or prevention of downward movement of work
    under the influence of gravity is not significant as a guiding function.
    An inclined plane or the like, (which is utilized not for mere support of
    the work, but to conduct it or facilitate its deflection to a different
    level) has guiding function.

    (2)     Note.  The "passive means", in this and indented subclasses,
    performs its function without the application of power thereto; it directs,
    deflects, orients, etc., the moving work without furnishing any propelling
    force in the general direction of work movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162+,   for passive means to guide the product of a cutting operation.

    270,    for a machine of subclass 202 type with work guideway unobstructed
    on one side to admit large workpieces.

    279+,   for machine of subclass 202 type with means to guide, position, or
    present work-to-work-feed means.

    310,    for flying support or guide for work in a cutter of the flying type.

    373,    for work guide moving means synchronized with tool stroke.

    418+,   for a work guide associated with a work-mover.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, appropriate subclasses,
    for a material guide of general utility.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, may include a nominal
    recitation of a supply or take-up coil (e.g., less than a support for such
    a coil or a cooperative relationship between a tension or exhaust detector*
    and reel driving or reel stopping means, etc.), subclass 196.1 for a
    passive guide* combined with a material feeder.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 157+ for a residual
    guide that directs a strand, subclasses 346+ for a particular guide or
    guard for an unwinding and rewinding coil to coil machine convertible
    information carrier (e.g., magnetic tape or photographic film, etc.)
    cartridge system, subclass 377 for a reeling device with a spring motor
    having a particular guide structure, subclass 548 for particular guide or
    guard for convolute winding of material; subclass 566 for an unwinding
    apparatus having a particular guide or guard, or subclasses 615+ for a
    residual guide or guard that directs elongated flexible material that may
    be combined with more than nominal winding structure.


CLS 83/439
TXT Device under subclass 438 wherein means is provided to constrain the work
    to movement about a fixed axis.

    (1)     Note.  For original placement in this subclass, a patent must claim
    structure which limits motion of the work to a pivotal or arcuate path by
    reaction directly on the work itself instead of on a work carrier.  The
    latter type of device will be found in patents placed in subclass 411.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    267,    for means to advance work step-by-step in an arcuate path in a
    cutting machine.

    351,    for work constrained to swing about a progressively cutting tool
    during tool stroke.

    410+,   for means to guide a work carrier in a nonrectilinear path.

    411+,   and see (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses, for a guide of the type found
    in this subclass and claimed, per se (i.e., not in combination with
    significant tool structure).


CLS 83/440
TXT Device under subclass 438 in which the work guide is constructed as a
    portion of a tool which does not move through a cutting stroke, or is
    rigidly attached thereto.

    (1)     Note.  Although the tool member referred to here does not have a
    cutting stroke, it may be adjustable or positionable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    373,    for guide means movable in timed relation to a tool stroke, as by
    being fixed to a moving tool.


CLS 83/440.1
TXT Device under subclass 440 wherein the stationary tool element is a member
    of a tool pair*.


CLS 83/440.2
TXT Apparatus under subclass 438 wherein the passive means either (a)
    additionally serves, or (b) has additional means associated therewith, to
    protect the operator or the tool from harm.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a guard which performs the dual function
    of guiding and guarding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    860,    for guard means attached to a machine frame, and see search notes
    thereto for additional guard devices.


CLS 83/441
TXT Device under subclass 438 wherein a work guide structure is fixed to, or
    connected so as to move upon movement of, an element which supports a tool
    for rotation or motion through a cutting stroke but which does not itself
    undergo such rotation or cutting stroke motion.

    (1)     Note.  The work guide is stationary throughout cutting operations.

    (2)     Note.  A common type of tool carrier is a support and bearing
    structure for mounting a rotary-disc cutter assembly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    373,    for interrelated tool actuating and work guide moving means.


CLS 83/441.1
TXT Device under subclass 438 wherein a work guide structure is fixed or linked
    to a tool guiding element, said element being operative, without
    application of power thereto, to engage the tool or tool support so as to
    define or limit the path of movement thereof.


CLS 83/442
TXT Device under subclass 438 which is arranged to exert a guiding function
    upon one or more faces or edges of a structure which is disclosed as being
    temporarily attached to and supported by the work.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include a guided work carrier or
    otherwork-holder, for which see subclasses 401+.  Here, the work holds the
    template or straightedge.  That is to say, the template is not a work
    holder or support; but is merely attached to the work to provide one or
    more edges for cooperation with guide means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401+,   especially subclasses 410+ and 412+, for means to guide or orient a
    work carrier relative to a tool station, and see (1) Note above.

    565,    for a tool which follows the surface of a template.


CLS 83/443
TXT Device under subclass 438 which facilitates or causes constraint of work
    movement to a curved path, or which changes the direction of work movement
    from one rectilinear direction to another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    410+,   for means to guide a work carrier in a nonrectilinear path.

    439,    for means to guide work in an arcuate path.

    445,    for a guide means which permits (but does not cause) angling or
    reorientation of work adjacent a cutting zone.


CLS 83/444
TXT Device under subclass 438 wherein sufficient guide structure is provided to
    prevent movement of the work out of a definite path.

    (1)     Note.  Three guide rails spaced apart may be sufficient to confine
    a rigid workpiece such as a rod or bar, whereas a soft material, such as
    cloth or fiber may require to be entirely enclosed, to meet the definition.


CLS 83/445
TXT Device under subclass 438 so constructed and arranged as to present a
    guiding element of limited extent at or adjacent to a tool zone, and
    disclosed as (1) enabling an operator to shift or rotate the work at will
    about the guide element as a fulcrum or instantaneous axis or (2)
    permitting a control mechanism to do so.

    (1)     Note. Examples are hand-fed machines for cutting along curved or
    irregular contours, or for punching decorative designs at a fixed distance
    from the edges of shoe uppers or other irregular shapes.


CLS 83/446
TXT Device under subclass 438 which incorporates either (1) an idler roller (or
    roller-carried band) engageable with passing work, or (2) a guide element
    which is biased toward a predetermined location by a counterweight or
    springlike means (either solid or fluid), so that the element may be pushed
    back by random lateral displacements of passing work but tends to return
    toward its initial position.

    (1)     Note.  There is usually, but not necessarily, another element, such
    as a guide or a work-supporting surface, opposed to the movable or
    yieldable guide element.  Such other element may, but need not, be movable
    or yieldable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    422,    for yieldable means to press work to a work-mover.


CLS 83/447
TXT Device under subclass 446 in which the movable or yieldable guide element
    tends to hold moving work in contact with a work-table or other supporting
    element or assemblage.

    (1)     Note.  The devices found here and in subclass 450 are frequently
    called "holddowns".  They differ from clamps in that they are not actuated
    manually or by power means, and in that they do not immobilize the work.

    (2)     Note.  A holddown which is claimed as of utility in freeing a tool
    from work after a cutting operation (i.e., from product) will be found in
    subclass 145.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145+,   for means to move product out of contact with a tool; and see (2)
    Note, above.

    450,    for a nonyieldable holddown.

    452+,   for work clamping means associated with a cutter.


CLS 83/448
TXT Device under subclass 438 wherein the guide structure presents two or more
    elements which as disclosed are effective to restrain movement of the work
    in different directions.

    (1)     Note.  Example:  An angle-iron may be disclosed as arranged to
    prevent deflection of the work in two directions; e.g., upward and to the
    right (or left).

    (2)     Note.  A U-shaped trough may be used to confine the work in all
    directions except one.

    (3)     Note.  The original copy of a patent directed to a cutter and a
    plurality of guide elements which are effective to restrain movement in the
    same direction will be placed in subclass 438.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    438,    and see (3) Note above.


CLS 83/449
TXT Device under subclass 448 wherein at least two of the guide elements are
    effective in contrary directions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    420,    for opposed guide means additional to work-moving means.


CLS 83/450
TXT Device under subclass 438 wherein a guide element is upwardly spaced from
    and cooperates with a work table or equivalent work support to prevent
    movement of the work upwardly off the support.

    (1)     Note.  Such devices are commonly called holddowns.  They may be
    adjusted to accommodate different thicknesses of work, but are not actuated
    so as to clamp the work and prevent its movement along the work support.
    See (1) Note under subclass 447, above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111,    and particularly 145, for means to move product of contact with a
    tool.

    447,    for yieldable or movable holddown.

    452+,   for a work clamp associated with a tool station.


CLS 83/451
TXT Apparatus under the class definition provided with a device to maintain or
    retain the work in fixed position relative to immovable parts of the
    apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass (451) includes original patents for cutting
    devices characterized by such immobilizers as holding pins, magnets,
    suction means, and similar devices which do not hold work by frictional
    force developed between opposed movable jaws.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    374+,   for a work immobilizer which is interrelated with tool actuating
    means.

    409,    for a work carrier, which may be provided with a gripper or
    otherwork-immobilizing means.

    446     and 447, for guide comprising jaws    with work-engaging rollers
    which permit movement of the work.


CLS 83/452
TXT Device under subclass 451 which comprises a plurality of opposed solid jaws
    or surface elements which are made effective, by movement of one or more of
    said jaws or surface elements, to grip the work frictionally and hold it in
    a desired position fixedly with respect to a tool station.

    (1)     Note.  To be classified in this subclass, a moving cutting tool
    must be claimed.  If only a work holder is claimed, or a work holder and
    stationary cutter in combination, the patent will be classified in Class
    269, Work Holders.

    (2)     Note.  A clamp must be actuatable by the application of energy
    either to open it or to close it.  (It is not a passive yielding guide or
    snubbing device).

    (3)     Note.  A device which is described as serving as a "stripper" as
    well as a clamp or hold down, will be found in subclasses 111+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111+,   and see (3) Note above.

    277,    for a feed gripper associated with a machine which cuts work during
    dwell of work-feed.

    375+,   for a work clamp which is interrelated with tool actuating means.

    435.11+, for a cutting device with means to convey work and with a work
    gripper, wherein the cut is made parallel to and during work movement.

    437.1+, for a cutting device with means to convey work and with a work
    gripper, generally.

    447     and 450, for a "holddown" opposed to a work-supporting table but
    not actuated positively to clamp the work.

    567,    for means to bind work against a work-moving tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses particularly subclasses 86+
    for a work holder provided with a clamp or clamps; and see (1) Note, above.


CLS 83/453
TXT Device under subclass 452 which (a) is actuated in timed relationship with
    another portion of the machine which has other than cutting or
    work-clamping function, or (b) affords to or receives from such other
    portion direct support (either vertical or lateral, continuous or
    transitory), or (c) is structurally related to such other portion, as by
    having parts in common therewith.

    (1)     Note.  A clamp combined with (i.e.,synchronized with) an actuated
    tool would be found in subclasses 375+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264,    for means to bind work against a moving tool while the latter moves
    the work against a cooperating tool.

    375+,   for interrelationship between clamp and a tool during its cutting
    stroke, and see (1) Note above.


CLS 83/454
TXT Device under subclass 453 wherein the other element constitutes passive
    means which engages a movable tool or tool support or bearing means mounted
    on either the tool or tool support, to direct, wholly or partially, the
    course of movement of such tool or tool support in its cutting stroke.


CLS 83/455
TXT Device under subclass 454 wherein the other element functions as a guide
    for a tool which moves substantially parallel to the length or width of the
    work and engages the entire thickness thereof simultaneously during at
    least the major portion of its cutting stroke.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    353     and 614, for a traveling cutter, generally.

    483+,   for traveling cutter of the rotary-disc type.


CLS 83/456
TXT Device under subclass 453 in which a movable clamp jaw, while in actuated
    or work-clamping position, serves also as a fixed tool* or tool support*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    383+,   for a clamp jaw of the type of this subclass but claimed as timed
    with the movement of a tool in its cutting stroke.


CLS 83/457
TXT Device under subclass 452 including means which necessarily results in, or
    whose disclosed purpose is to permit, successive applications of force,
    including gravitational, to the clamp in its clamping stroke.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are disclosures of clamps which
    are provided with separate actuating linkages or power trains, one of which
    is intended to be utilized initially for rapidly moving a clamp jaw to
    approximate position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    379,    for interrelated tool actuating means and means to provide plural
    steps in clamping stroke.


CLS 83/458
TXT Device under subclass 452 comprising, in addition to the actuating means,
    structure which either tends to promote and maintain parallelism or other
    definite angular relationship of the jaws, or which permits at least one
    jaw to adjust itself in position as it engages the work.

    (1)     Note.  The equalizer means must be distinct from the actuating
    means. Example:  A torsion rod with rack-and-pinion connections to both
    ends of the clamp bar.

    (2)     Note.  A mere pivotal mounting of a clamp jaw, if it is intended to
    permit self-alignment, is included.


CLS 83/459
TXT Device under subclass 452 wherein means is provided which tends to (a)
    maintain the jaws in, or to return them to, a definite position; or (b)
    enable the jaws to remain in their last position if not subjected to
    operating force or resistance of work.

    (1)     Note.  Includes a clamp with cantilever spring jaws or jaw-carrying
    arm.

    (2)     Note.  A biased or counterbalanced clamp, if actuated manually by
    direct hand pressure or through linkage, or by conventional power means,
    will be classified here rather than in "manual" or "power" actuation
    subclasses.


CLS 83/460
TXT Devices under subclass 452 including
    clamp-actuating means which comprises a force-responsive (i.e., resilient
    or slipping) portion forming part of the force-transmitting train which
    moves the clamp toward its applied condition, such portion serving to limit
    the force which can be exerted on and by the movable clamp jaw.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes disclosures of fluid actuated clamps
    which have yieldable drives. Example:  compressed air drive, or hydraulic
    with relief valve).  There must be force-limiting structure present.


CLS 83/461
TXT Device under subclass 452 wherein the clamp is driven by fluid pressure
    means, without specific provision for yieldability or force-limiting in the
    drive train, the fluid not being resilient or yieldable, per se.

    (1)     Note.  A plain hydraulic drive is included here.  A compressed air
    drive is inherently yieldable and so comprises subject matter of subclass
    460.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    460,    and see (1) Note above.


CLS 83/462
TXT Device under subclass 452 provided with structure (additional to that of
    the clamp's driving train) for the purpose of holding the clamp in a given
    location (usually, that in which it is closed on the work) when the
    actuating force is not present.

    (1)     Note.  A device of the type found in this subclass may comprise
    (for instance) pawl-and-ratchet means, a friction brake, or a chock,
    effective to retain the clamp jaw in an actuated position but not to move
    it there.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    459,    for clamp with biasing or counterbalancing means.

    463,    for clamp with self-binding drive (worm or wedge).


CLS 83/463
TXT Device under subclass 452 wherein the actuating transmission becomes
    frictionally held in position upon cessation of the actuating power, by the
    characteristics of the transmission proper.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are patents to clamps with worm
    gearing or screw-and-nut drives (sometimes called "irreversible" drives),
    and drives comprising an actuating cam or wedge if of comparably high
    mechanical advantage.

    (2)     Note.  A manually-operated wedge drive for a clamp would be
    classified here rather than in "manual actuation" if it is evident from the
    disclosure that it is intended to be self-binding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    462,    for a brake, latch or lock provided to hold a clamp in position.


CLS 83/464
TXT Device under subclass 452 whose clamp is actuated by  human power, applied
    to aforce-transmitting linkage from a handle, crank, or pedal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes manually actuated eccentric cams,
    toggles, wedges, etc., in clamp drives, wherein it is not taught to be a
    self-binding drive.  Manually actuated clamps also appear in most of the
    subclasses (of this group) collateral with and superior to this one.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    452+,   for a clamp actuated by direct hand pressure.

    459,    for some conventional manually-actuated clamps which are
    characterized by being biased or counterbalanced.


CLS 83/465
TXT Device under subclass 452 including claimed particular conformation of
    work-engaging portion.

    (1)     Note.  A clamp comprising a jaw with spaced segments, removable or
    adjustable segments, curved, inclined or cushioned face, etc., and with no
    specific actuating means is classified here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 418+ for particular conformation of plier-jaw
    faces.

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 257+, for patents to a jaw feature and/or
    a jaw attachment for a work holder.


CLS 83/466
TXT Device under subclass 452 which is associated with structure, or which
    comprises structure, enabling change or variation of the jaw motion or of
    the location of the clamp as a whole.


CLS 83/466.1
TXT Device under subclass 451 which comprises means to restrain the work
    against movement in at least two directions, one of which is vertical, and
    wherein said means has at least one elongated opening in the surface
    thereof disclosed as being for the reception of a cutting instrumentality.

    (1)     Note.  The opening may merely serve as a guide for the cutter or it
    may cooperate with the cutter to produce a shearing* cut.


CLS 83/467.1
TXT Work-stop abutment:

    Device under subclass 451 comprising a firm obstacle to block work movement
    and thereby position the work for cutting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163,    for a cutting machine with a product handling means comprising an
    abutment in the path of the product being moved by a work-feeding means.

    166,    for a cutting machine with a product handling means comprising an
    abutment interposed in the path of free fall or flight of the product.

    212,    for a cutting machine wherein the tool engages the work during
    dwell of intermittent work-feed, having a work sensing means to initiate
    tool feed including a work-stop abutment.

    253+,   for a cutting machine wherein the tool engages the work during
    dwell of intermittent work-feed including means to produce a plurality of
    work-feed increments per tool cycle and including supplemental work-feed
    means comprising an abutment adapted to be engaged by a surface on the work.

    268+,   for a cutting machine wherein the tool engages the work during
    dwell of intermittent work-feed including an abutment used to position the
    work being fed with respect to the cutter.

    391+,   for a cutting machine including a work-stop abutment actuated in
    timed relation to the tool stroke.

    419,    for a cutting machine including means to convey work relative to
    the tool station with a work-stop abutment to engage and orient the work
    relative to the tool station.


CLS 83/468
TXT Device under subclass 467 wherein means are included to determine
    accurately the work positioning by means of indentations, numerals, rule
    markings, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Normally said means are on or near the work support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    522,    for cutting device with signal, scale or indicator, in general.


CLS 83/468.1
TXT Normal to plane of cut:

    Device under subclass 467.1 wherein the cutting instrumentality cuts the
    workpiece to form a prescribed flat surface and the firm obstacle functions
    by engagement with a workpiece on a surface at a right angle to the flat
    surface, wherein the formed flat surface extends normally to the surface at
    right angles thereto.

    (1)     Note.  The "obstacle" of this subclass may extend along a line
    normal to the flat surface, or it may be of limited extent but engage a
    portion of the workpiece that extends along a line normal to the flat
    surface.

    (2)     Note.  Neither a hole punch nor a button hole cutter (that cuts a
    short slit) is included herein because the line of cut does not extend to
    the edge of the work being engaged by the work-stop abutment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

     468.8+ and 468.93+, for a cutting device having a work-stop abutment
    extending normally (1) to a tangent of a curved cutting edge, or (2) to one
    of the edges of a punch having a plurality of cutting edges.


CLS 83/468.2
TXT Adjustable:

    Device under subclass 468.1 including provision to change the position of
    the plane of cut with respect to the normal work-stop abutment, or with
    respect to another work-stop abutment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    468.8,  for a work-stop abutment that is adjustable with respect to a
    cutting tool, wherein the tool cuts an arcuate path through the work such
    that a tangent of that path is normal to the work-stop abutment.

    468.93, for a work-stop abutment combined with a cutting tool, wherein the
    tool cuts an arcuate path through the work, such that a tangent of that
    path is normal to the work-stop abutment.


CLS 83/468.3
TXT Angularly relative to plane of cut; e.g., miter:

    Device under subclass 468.2 including provision to change the angle of
    intersection of the plane of cut with respect to a work-stop abutment to
    something other than normal.

    (1)     Note.  In the device of this subclass, at least one work-stop
    abutment is normal to the plane of cut in at least one angular adjustment.


CLS 83/468.4
TXT With traversing cutter guide; e.g., cut-off saw:

    Device under subclass 468.1 provided with means to provide for transport of
    a cutting instrumentality and its driving means across the workpiece to
    effect the cutting action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    468.3,  for a traversing rotary cutter that is adjustable relative to the
    plane of cut.


CLS 83/468.5
TXT Collapsible:

    Device under subclass 467.1 wherein the
    work-stop abutment is constructed to disable under certain conditions of
    the device.

    (1)     Note.  The work-stop abutment may be disabled when a press descends
    to allow movement of the press against the workpiece, or it may be disabled
    by excessive force on the abutment, in order to prevent damage to the
    abutment or to the workpiece.


CLS 83/468.6
TXT Retractable:

    Device under subclass 467.1 wherein the
    work-stop abutment is constructed to be temporarily moved out of operative
    position at the will of the operative.

    (1)     Note.  The abutment of this subclass may comprise retractable
    indexing device.


CLS 83/468.7
TXT Adjustable:

    Device under subclass 467.1 wherein the
    work-stop abutment is constructed to be repositioned with respect to the
    plane of cut.


CLS 83/468.8
TXT Having curved cutting edge to make arcuate cut, plural nonaligned
    intersecting cutting edges, or spaced punches:

    Device under subclass 468.7 including on a single tool holder (1) a cutting
    edge that extends along an arcuate cutting plane when viewed normally to
    the work surface, (2) a first and a second cutting edge positioned on the
    same tool holder such that they cut the work along a continuous, but not
    straight path, or (3) spaced, generally aligned cutting edges that do not
    extend to the edge of the work.

    (1)     Note.  A device having a curved cutting edge extending in part
    normal to the work-stop abutment is included in this and the indented
    subclass, as is a device having a first and a second cutting edge that
    serve together to cut a notch in the workpiece, wherein one of the edges
    extends normal to the work-stop abutment.


CLS 83/468.9
TXT Spaced edges:

    Device under subclass 468.8 including a first cutting edge that engages the
    workpiece to effect a first cut and including a second cutting edge that
    engages the workpiece to effect a second cut, wherein the first cut and the
    second cut are not connected.


CLS 83/468.93
TXT Having curved cutting edge to make arcuate cut, plural nonaligned
    intersecting cutting edges, or spaced punches:

    Device under subclass 467.1 including on a single tool holder, (1) a
    cutting edge that extends along an arcuate cutting plane when viewed
    normally to the work surface, (2) a first and a second cutting edge
    positioned on the same tool holder such that they cut the work along a
    continuous, but not straight path, or (3) spaced, generally aligned cutting
    edges that do not extend to the edge of the work.

    (1)     Note.  A device having a curved cutting edge extending in part
    normal to the work-stop abutment is included in this and the indented
    subclass, as is a device having a first and a second cutting edge that
    serve together to cut a notch in the workpiece, wherein one of the edges
    extends normal to the work-stop abutment.


CLS 83/468.94
TXT Spaced edges:

    Device under subclass 468.93 including a first cutting edge that engages
    the workpiece to effect a first cut and including a second cutting edge
    that engages the workpiece to effect a second cut, wherein the first cut
    and the second cut are not connected.


CLS 83/469
TXT Device under the class definition provided with a cutter comprising a
    circular member mounted for rotation (unidirectional or oscillatory) about
    its central axis of rotation, having a work-cutting edge on or adjacent the
    periphery of said member, which edge cuts in a plane which is both
    substantially co-extensive with a radial face (or a radial plane) of said
    member and perpendicular to the axis of rotation of said member, and, as
    disclosed, cuts in a continuous line during the cutting operation of the
    cutter, and including (A) a holder for mounting or supporting said cutter
    for rotation, which holder does not partake of said rotation, or (B) a
    second cutter in close proximity to and in cooperative cutting relation
    with said circular cutter whereby work passed between the cutters in
    contact with the edge of the circular cutter and a mating edge or surface
    of the second cutter will be cut through thicknesswise in the plane of
    cutting.

    (1)     Note.  The individual patents directed to devices of the type
    described in part (A) of the above definition are collected or filed in
    this generic subclass (469).

    (2)     Note.  With respect to part (A) of the above definition, patents
    placed herein differ from the patents in Tools, subclasses 651+, especially
    disc type, subclass 676, in that the claims of the patents herein placed
    include the means about which the tool rotates, whereas tools in subclass
    676 include only the tool and parts partaking of all the tool movements.
    For example, if the claimed disclosure includes a shaft fixed against
    rotation, about which shaft a disc cutter rotates, the patent would be
    placed herein; but if the claimed disclosure includes a shaft, to which
    shaft a disc cutter is secured, whereby both elements may rotate, but no
    fixed or bearing support for the shaft is claimed, the patents would be
    placed in subclasses 651+, especially subclass 676.

    (3)     Note.  With respect to part (A) of the above definition, a holder
    for so mounting or supporting a rotatable circular member as defined in the
    main definition will, in the further description of this and indented
    subclasses, henceforth be termed a "Tool carrier".

    (4)     Note.  With respect to part (B) of the above definition two
    cooperating cutters forming one line of cutting, at least one of which
    cutters is a rotatable circular member as defined will, in the further
    description of this and indented subclasses, henceforth be termed a "Tool
    pair".

    (5)     Note.  With respect to part (B) of the above definition, the second
    cutter may be a disc-blade similar to the circular cutter defined, or may
    be a section of a circular cylinder (the disc-blade cooperating with the
    peripheral surface of the cylinder, see subclass 505 for example) or may be
    a flat anvil surface or ledger blade edge across which the disc-blade
    moves, (see subclasses 485+ for example), or may partake of nonrotary
    movements or no movement (see subclass 508 for example), or may be any
    other part with which the disc-blade as defined cooperates to cut work
    thicknesswise.

    (6)     Note.  With respect to part (B) of the above definition, (i.e.,
    Tool pair), the definitions of the subclasses indented hereunder are
    written in terms of one tool pair, that is, one disc-blade cutter
    cooperating with one backup element (anvil, cylinder, other-disc-blade,
    etc.) whereas as disclosed and claimed there may be a plurality of disc
    blades on a common axis (or, in the case of a cylindrical anvil of subclass
    505, a single anvil having a peripheral surface common to plural discs
    against which surface all of the disc-blades are in cooperative
    relationship).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284,    for a "flying" cutter and see (4) Note in subclass 284.

    425+,   for a device having a disc-blade tool combined with means to feed
    work to the tool.

    523+,   for a cutter having axially extending edges.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    407,    Cutters, for Shaping, for a milling cutter.


CLS 83/471
TXT Device under subclass 469 including means adjacent the defined cutter for
    sustaining the work against the force of gravity in the vicinity of the
    cutter or against a radial force exerted by the cutter action on the work.

    (1)     Note.  For a patent to be placed herein, the work-supporting
    function of a table or other element must be recited in the claim or be
    clearly inferred from the context of the claim. For patents in which a
    table is claimed as supporting a guide for a tool carrier, see subclasses
    485+.

    (2)     Note.  For other devices including a cutter and a related work
    table or work-support, see the subclasses indented under subclass 425.

    (3)     Note.  Included in the indented subclasses are patents in which the
    cutter comprises a radial face and afrusto-conical or cylindrical surface,
    in which the surface is claimed as a work-supporting surface.  A disc-blade
    and cylindrical backup anvil, combination, wherein the cylindrical surface
    is, in effect, a cutting element as well as a work-supporting surface, is
    not proper for this subclass; see subclasses 505+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    425+,   for other work-supports and see (1) Note above.

    484+,   and see (1) Note above.

    505+,   for tools including a cylindrical
    work-supporting surface; and see (2) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses, for work holders, per se.


CLS 83/471.1
TXT Device under subclass 471 provided with a plurality of cutters which are
    movably mounted in such a manner that each cutter moves into a cutting zone
    with respect to the work-support after another cutter has moved away from
    the same cutting zone.


CLS 83/471.2
TXT Device under subclass 471 in which the tool and tool carrier are movable
    relative to thework-support means during the cutting.


CLS 83/471.3
TXT Device under subclass 471.2 provided with means for adjusting the tool
    angularly relative to the work-support means.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes a device in which the tool and/or
    work-support means are angularly adjusted.  It is not necessary for the
    adjustment to result in the tool axis intersecting thework-support means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    473,    for a device in which the tool may be angularly adjusted relative
    to a previous position.

    477+,   for a rotary disc tool which is adjustable relative to the work
    support.

    486.1,  for a device in which the rotary tool carrier reciprocates
    rectilinearly and which the path of reciprocation can be adjusted
    angularly, relative to its previous path.


CLS 83/472
TXT Device under subclass 471 in which the relative positions of the cutter and
    the work-support means are fixed in a position, or capable of adjustment to
    a position, and that the axis of the cutter intersects the work-support
    means.


CLS 83/473
TXT Device under subclass 472 provided with means to change the angle between
    the work-support means and the axis of the cutter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    471.3,  for a device in which a rotary disc tool may be angularly adjusted
    relative to a previous position.

    477+,   for a support otherwise adjustable with respect to its cooperating
    tool.

    486.1,  for a device in which the rotary tool carrier reciprocates
    rectilinearly and in which the path of reciprocation can be adjusted
    angularly, relative to its previous path.


CLS 83/474
TXT Device under subclass 471 in which the means for sustaining the work is
    mounted for movement in a single direction only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    411+,   for rotatable work-holder associated with cutter.

    434,    for structure in which an anvil is driven to move work in contact
    with the anvil, and having a disc-blade in contact with the anvil to cut
    work.


CLS 83/475
TXT Device under subclass 474 provided with means other than the cutter to urge
    the work toward the work-support means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    422+,   for means to press work to work-mover.

    431,    for means to press work to cutter.


CLS 83/476
TXT Device under subclass 475 in which the means to urge the work toward the
    work-support means is mounted on an axis coincident with the cutter axis.


CLS 83/477
TXT Device under subclass 471 provided with means to change the positional
    relationship of the work-support means and the cutter, for example, either
    by varying the space between the work-sustaining means and the cutter axis,
    or by oscillating the table about an axis parallel to the cutter axis, or
    both.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    471.3,  for a device wherein the tool moves relative to the work-support
    during cutting and may be angularly adjusted relative to the work-support.

    473,    for adjustable angularity of support and tool.

    486.1,  for a device in which the tool may be angularly adjusted relative
    to a previous position.


CLS 83/477.1
TXT Device under subclass 477 provided with means for adjusting the tool
    relative to the work-support means.


CLS 83/477.2
TXT Device under subclass 471 in which the
    work-support means is provided with a slot or groove for the tool.


CLS 83/478
TXT Device under subclass 469 provided with a hood or casing or other
    protective member in close spaced association with a rotatable cutter to
    prevent harm to the tool operator or to prevent damage to the cutter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    398     and 544+, for other guards.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 609 for other guards for
    rotatable members.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses
    144+ for a guard or housing for a belt and pulley drive system.


CLS 83/479
TXT Device under subclass 469 provided with a plurality of tool pairs, and
    including (A) means to move one tool pair as a unit into cutting position
    with respect to work and simultaneously remove one other tool pair from
    cutting position; or (B) means to move at least one of the cutters of a
    tool pair, along its individual path, into cooperative cutting relation
    with respect to its coacting cutter and into cutting position with respect
    to work, and to remove simultaneously at least one cutter of another tool
    pair from cooperative cutting relation and cutting position.

    (1)     Note.  See (4) Note of subclass 469 for definition of "Tool pair".


CLS 83/480
TXT Devices under subclass 479 (especially part (B) of the definition) in which
    the movable cutter of each of plural tool pairs cooperates to cut with the
    same coacting cutter (e.g., anvil).


CLS 83/481
TXT Device under subclass 469 in which a carrier means, for mounting a cutter,
    is provided with structure claimed as capable of disassembly or removal,
    whereby the cutter may be inspected, removed, replaced or substituted.

    (1)     Note.  For a patent to be placed herein, the cutter removal
    function of the carrier must be recited in the claim or be clearly inferred
    from the content of the claim and supported by the disclosure.

    (2)     Note.  Since it is inherent in a device wherein the cutters of a
    tool pair are separable, as exemplified by the patents of subclass 482,
    that one cutter may be replaced while separated from the other cutter,
    further search should include subclass 482.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    482,    and see (2) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    483,    Tool Changing, subclasses 31+ for a rotary spindle machine tool
    combined with means to transfer a tool having specific mounting features.


CLS 83/482
TXT Device under subclass 469 provided with means to move at least one of the
    cutters of a tool pair into and out of cooperative cutting relation with
    respect to the other cutter of said tool pair.

    (1)     Note.  See (4) Note of subclass 469 for definition of "Tool pair".

    (2)     Note.  To be classified herein, a patent must include disclosure of
    a movement of one cutter away from and out of cutting relation with respect
    to the other cutter of the tool pair (this movement usually being for the
    purpose of permitting the work to be threaded through a cutting zone).  A
    mere adjustment of one cutter relative to another cutter while they remain
    in contact with or in cooperative cutting relationship with each other will
    not suffice for placement in this subclass, but will be found in subclasses
    503, 504 and 507 below.

    (3)     Note.  The separation of the cutters one from the other may also be
    for the purpose of inspecting, removing, replacing or substituting one or
    both of the cutters.  For other such devices, see subclass 481.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    481,    and see (2) Note above.

    503,    504 and 507, and see (1) Note above.


CLS 83/483
TXT Device under subclass 469 (especially part (A) of the definition) provided
    with means to permit movement of the tool carrier and the cutter mounted
    thereon while the cut is being made.

    (1)     Note.  See (3) Note of subclass 469 for the definition of "Tool
    carrier".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    471.2+, for a device provided with means to support work and means to
    permit movement of the tool carrier and cutter while the cut is being made.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 525.1 and 525.2 for a
    material slitter positionally related to a surface of a coil being wound
    and increasing in diameter as material is collected.


CLS 83/484
TXT Device under subclass 483 provided with means to prevent more than one
    cutting stroke of the cutter and requiring an external means to initiate
    another cutting stroke.

    (1)     Note.  Included within the meaning of the term "cutting stroke" is
    the retraction of the tool carrier through its noncutting movement to a
    position from which a subsequent cutting stroke is to be initiated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203+,   for a cutting device of the subclass 202 type wherein the drive is
    unicyclic.

    524+,   for unicyclic tool moving means.


CLS 83/485
TXT Device under subclass 483 in which the tool carrier is movable in a
    straight-line to-and-fro course of movement.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a tool carrier which is moved by being
    grasped by the tool operator directly.

    (2)     Note.  To fall into this subclass, the carrier must have a guide
    associated therewith for restricting its movement. For tools of similar
    nature, but capable of random, unrestricted movement over a work-table, see
    Class 30, subclass 263.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 263+ and see (2) Note above.


CLS 83/486
TXT Device under subclass 485 provided with means to change the course of
    movement of the tool carrier.


CLS 83/486.1
TXT Device under subclass 486 in which the course of movement can be changed to
    a position angularly related to the previous course of movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    471.3,  for a rotary-disc tool which may be angularly adjusted relative to
    a previous position.

    473,    for a rotary-disc tool in which the tool axis and the work
    supporting surface are angularly adjustable relative to each other.

    477+,   for a rotary-disc tool which is adjustable relative to the work
    support.


CLS 83/487
TXT Device under subclass 485 provided with means to cause the tool carrier to
    move to-and-fro in a straight line.

    (1)     Note.  A linkage for converting a motion of a limb of the tool
    operator into a rectilinear movement of the carrier would be classified
    here.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is inclusive of patents in which a cutter (or
    a plurality of cutters) moves in the direction of the thickness of the
    work, as well as patents in which a cutter moves broadside of the work,
    parallel to the surface of the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    428,    for means to move tool carrier during cutting.

    523+,   for other means to move a tool carrier during or for cutting.


CLS 83/488
TXT Device under subclass 487 also including means to effect rotation of the
    cutter in its tool carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    489,    for tool rotating means in which the carrier is moved manually, and
    see (2) Note under subclass 491.


CLS 83/489
TXT Device under subclass 485 provided with means to effect rotation of the
    cutter in its tool carrier.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are patents in which a limb of the tool
    operator directly effects carrier reciprocation, and that reciprocation
    effects cutter rotation through rack and pinion or other equivalent linkage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    488,    for tool rotating means where the carrier is mechanically moved,
    and see (2) Note under subclass 491.


CLS 83/490
TXT Device under subclass 483 in which the cutter holder moves (or is moved) in
    a path of movement which path is in the arc of a circle, either to-and-fro,
    or in the same direction through 360o.


CLS 83/491
TXT Device under subclass 469 provided with means to effect rotational movement
    of the cutter (either unidirectional or to-and-fro in the arc of a circle).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass excludes patents in which one cutter is
    frictionally rotated by mere contact of the cutting edge of the cutter with
    the cutting edge of another cutter.  For examples of this type of patent
    see subclasses 485+, 486+ and 487+.

    (2)     Note.  Other patents which include means to rotate the cutter are
    to be found in subclasses 426+ in which the cutter is driven by or with the
    work moving means, and in subclasses 488 and 489 in which the cutter is
    rotated by or with the carrier moving means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    426+,   488 and 489, and see (2) Note above.

    485,    486+ and 487+, and see (1) Note above.


CLS 83/492
TXT Device under subclass 491 provided with a tool pair, and including means to
    effect rotation of both cutters of the tool pair.

    (1)     Note.  See (4) Note of subclass 469 for the definition of a "Tool
    pair".


CLS 83/493
TXT Device under subclass 492 provided with means to effect a rate of rotation
    of one of the cutters unequal to the rate of rotation of the other cutter.


CLS 83/494
TXT Device under subclass 492 provided with means to alter the rate of rotation
    of one or both of the cutters.


CLS 83/495
TXT Device under subclass 469 (especially part (B) of the definition) in which
    each cutter of a tool pair is mounted for rotation about its axis.

    (1)     Note.  See (4) Note of subclass 469 for the definition of a "Tool
    pair".

    (2)     Note.  Included in this and indented subclasses are patents
    reciting carrier means for holding or mounting the cutters, for example, a
    separate carrier for each cutter or a carrier common to both cutters.


CLS 83/496
TXT Device under subclass 495 in which the axes of the cutters are not parallel.

    (1)     Note.  In the patents placed herein the angular relationship is
    rarely recited precisely as exemplified below, but this relationship
    usually falls into one or more of the following categories or types:

    (A)     the cutter axes lie in a common plane, but the axes are not
    parallel to each other, hence the axes converge to a common point;

    (B)     the cutter axes lie in planes which are separate, not in a common
    plane, but are in planes which are parallel to each other;

    (C)     the cutter axes lie in planes which are separate, not in a common
    plane and not parallel to each other.  A distinguishing feature of all the
    patents placed herein, or in the indented subclass, lies in the fact that
    the cutter axes, if projected (in the sense of the term as used in
    descriptive geometry) on to a common plane, will intersect.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    472+,   for structure in which the cutter axis is oblique relative to a
    work support.


CLS 83/497
TXT Device under subclass 496 provided with means to vary the angle between the
    axis of one cutter and the axis of the other cutter.


CLS 83/498
TXT Device under subclass 495 in which both cutters of a tool pair are
    adjustable along the axes of the cutters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    504,    for means to adjust one cutter axially relative to the other cutter
    of a tool pair.


CLS 83/499
TXT Device under subclass 498 provided with mechanism to effect the adjustment
    of both of the cutters of a tool pair simultaneously, or provided with
    mechanism to effect the adjustment of one of the cutters of a tool pair and
    with structure which permits the axial movement of the other cutter of the
    same tool pair.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    428,    for means moving tool carrier during cutting.


CLS 83/500
TXT Device under subclass 495 provided with two cutters, in which each of the
    cutters has a peripheral cutting edge defined by the junction of a radial
    plane and a circular cylinder, both the plane and the cylinder being
    generated about the axis of said cutter, in which the axes of said cutters
    are spaced apart a distance less than the sum of the radii of the
    respective cutting edges, and the radial planes of said cutters
    substantially coincide.

    (1)     Note.  A drum is equivalent to a disc if only the cutting edge at
    the end thereof is claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    430,    for structure otherwise similar but in which the periphery of a
    driven circular cylinder moves the work.


CLS 83/501
TXT Device under subclass 500 provided with means to urge one of the cutters
    towards the other cutter in a direction parallel to the axis of the cutters.


CLS 83/502
TXT Device under subclass 501 including means to adjust the urging means
    whereby the force between the cutters is varied.


CLS 83/503
TXT Device under subclass 500 provided with means to adjust the space between
    the axes of the cutters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    482+,   for other means to move the cutter axes apart or together.


CLS 83/504
TXT Device under subclass 495 in which one cutter of tool pair is movable or
    adjustable relative to the other along the axis of said adjustable cutter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    482+,   for means to separate the cutters axially.

    498+,   for means to adjust both cutters of a tool pair.

    501+,   for means to urge the cutter axially.


CLS 83/505
TXT Device under subclass 495 in which one of the tools is a rotatable
    disc-blade cutter as defined in the definition of subclass 469 and the
    cooperating tool is a rotatable circular cylinder, the peripheral surface
    of which cylinder is smooth.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are patents involving structure to urge the
    disc and the anvil toward one another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    434,    for structure in which an anvil is driven to move work in contact
    with the anvil, and having a disc-blade in contact with the anvil to cut
    work.

    509+,   for similar structure including a smooth or peripherally grooved
    anvil roll and an edged, nonrotatable, noncyclic blade, and see (2) Note to
    subclass 509.


CLS 83/506
TXT Device under subclass 505 provided with means tending to force the disc and
    the anvil one toward the other, and including means to change the force
    exerted between the disc and anvil.


CLS 83/507
TXT Device under subclass 495 provided with means to effect a change in the
    spacing between the cutters, particularly between the axis of the cutters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    482,    for means to separate the cutters; e.g., to permit threading of the
    work therebetween, and see (1) Note in subclass 482.

    503,    for means to adjust the spacing between cutter axes which cutters
    comprise contacting, overlapped discs. Where the cutters of a tool pair do
    not contact each other, even though they overlap, the patents will be found
    in this subclass (507).


CLS 83/508
TXT Device under subclass 469 in which a rotatable disc-blade cutter as defined
    therein cooperates with a stationary or movable backup tool.

    (1)     Note.  The backup tool may be a planar or grooved platen, or a
    straight or curved ledger-blade, either fixed or movable, so long as the
    movement of the tool is not in an arc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    485+,   for rotatable disc-blade cutter on a reciprocable tool carrier, the
    cutter cooperating with a fixed ledger blade.


CLS 83/508.1
TXT Device under subclass 469 wherein the cutter is mounted or supported in
    said holder in such manner that said cutter may be moved into or out of a
    cutting relationship or zone with respect to the path normally traversed by
    a work piece during cutting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    471.1,  for a rotatable disc cutter-type machine in which a plurality of
    cutters is mounted in such a manner that each cutter moves into a cutting
    zone after another one of said cutters has moved away from the same zone.


CLS 83/508.2
TXT Device under subclass 469 wherein means are provided to effect a change in
    the position of the tool relative to its tool holder, or means to effect a
    change in the position of the tool carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    482,    for means to separate the elements of a disc tool pair.

    498+,   for a rotatable tool pair which is axially shiftable.

    507,    for elements of a tool pair which are adjustably spaced.


CLS 83/508.3
TXT Device under subclass 508.2 wherein tools are spaced axially of one another
    along a common holder or axis, and means are provided to change the
    position of one or more tools relative to one another along said holder or
    axis.


CLS 83/509
TXT Device under the class definition provided with two cutter members in close
    proximity to, and in cooperative cutting relation with, each other, in
    which one member comprises a surface mounted for rotation about an axis
    and, as disclosed, forming a contacting or backup means positioned on one
    face of work and the other member comprises a blade having a work cutting
    edge positioned on the opposite face of work, which edge contacts said
    surface to cut work thickness-wise from face-to-face of work.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is similar to subclasses 505+ above, in that
    both subclasses provide for patents including a rotatable anvil and a
    fixed-type cutter.  In subclasses 505+ the anvil is a smooth cylinder and
    the cutter is a rotatable disc blade.  In this subclass (509) the anvil is
    a cylinder with either a smooth or a peripherally grooved surface, and the
    cutter is an edged, nonrotatable, noncyclic blade, the blade either
    contacting the periphery of a smooth cylinder or in close proximity to the
    grooves of a grooved cylinder.

    (2)     Note.  For similar structure wherein the anvil is claimed as a
    means to feed the work, see subclass 434.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    434,    and see (2) Note above.

    505+,   and see (1) Note above.


CLS 83/510
TXT Device under subclass 509 including means to move the axis of the rotatable
    surface.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this and indented subclasses are patents
    disclosing cigar wrapper cutters, in which a leaf of tobacco is placed upon
    a contoured blade having an upstanding edge and an anvil travels across the
    work, the anvil rotating about its axis as its axis moves in a plane
    parallel to the edge of the blade, thus forming the work upon the edge to
    cut the work.

    (2)     Note.  For patents in which the operation is reversed, that is, the
    anvil rotates about a fixed axis, and the work, held on a movable,
    contoured, edged blade, is moved with the blade past the rotatable anvil,
    see subclass 284.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284+,   and see (2) Note above.


CLS 83/511
TXT Device under subclass 510 in which the axis moves in the arc of a circle.


CLS 83/512
TXT Device under subclass 510 provided with at least two rotatable surfaces,
    each rotatable about a separate (i.e., noncoextensive) axis.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are patents disclosing structure
    in which one anvil cooperates with substantially one-half of a contoured
    blade, and the other anvil cooperates with substantially the other half of
    the contoured blade.


CLS 83/513
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having at least two tool pairs wherein
    for one tool of each pair there is an actuating mechanism or member which
    has a portion thereof in contact with or mechanically connected to that
    tool or its support and which may be caused to move with respect to that
    tool to cause motion of the tool with respect to its guide, the arrangement
    being such that the actuating mechanism for one tool is movable with
    respect to the actuating mechanism for another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    598+,   for plural tools having the same drive means and an oscillating
    motion.

    618+,   for plural tools having the same drive means and a rectilinear
    motion.


CLS 83/514
TXT Apparatus under subclass 513 wherein one tool of one cutting pair is moved
    by contact or connection with a relatively movable tool support of one tool
    of another pair.


CLS 83/515
TXT Apparatus under subclass 514 wherein at least one cutter is a closed
    aperture forming means and at least one other cutter is a blade or knife.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    667     and 682, for a tool (per se) which performs both a punching and a
    nonpunching operation.


CLS 83/516
TXT Apparatus under subclass 513 wherein the tool supports of one pair of tools
    are mounted for movement relative to those of a second tool pair so that
    the distance between the pairs of tools may be adjusted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    664,    for spacers interposed between shaft mounted rotary tools.


CLS 83/517
TXT Apparatus under subclass 516 wherein means are provided, between the
    members of an adjacent pair of tool supports, to hold up the work piece in
    cutting position or simultaneously hold it up and guide or clamp it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404+,   for means to move work between tool stations.


CLS 83/518
TXT Apparatus under subclass 513 wherein at least one cutter is a closed
    aperture forming means and at least one other cutter is a blade or knife.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    515,    for a punch and shear arrangement in which the tool support of one
    acts as driver for the others and see the Notes thereto.


CLS 83/519
TXT Apparatus under subclass 513 wherein the plurality of tools are so driven
    that in the cutting stroke one or more of the tools comes into cutting
    engagement with the work before another one or more tools.


CLS 83/520
TXT Device under the class definition including means to illuminate or to cast
    a shadow on a part (or all) of the device or of the work; or means to form
    a light image of a part (or all) of the device or of the work, whether by
    reflection or refraction.

    (1)     Note.  Generally speaking, a patent to the combination of a cutting
    machine and means for projecting an image of the work to be cut (e.g., a
    motion picture film) will be placed originally in this or indented
    subclass; while a patent to the combination of means to take a picture (as
    by exposure of photo-sensitive material to light) and a cutting machine
    will be placed originally in the proper class relating to the graphic art
    involved (e.g., photography).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 628+, for a geometrical
    instrument including a cutting or punching instrumentality and optical
    viewing means.


CLS 83/521
TXT Device under subclass 520 in which an image is formed by reflection or
    refraction.


CLS 83/522.11
TXT WITH SIGNAL, SCALE, OR INDICATOR:

    Device under the class definition including means to produce a perceptible
    (e.g., audible or visual) manifestation, of a condition of a part (or all)
    of the machine, or of a position or characteristic of the work or product.

    (1)     Note.  The means defined above may be calibrated quantitatively.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    360+,   for a cutting machine controlled by means responsive to the work.

    468,    for a cutting machine having a claimed work stop abutment provided
    with a scale or indicator.

    520+,   for a cutting machine combined with means to illuminate at least
    part of the machine and/or at least part of the work, or with means to form
    an optical image of the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 125+, for a gauge, generally,
    which may be used in cutting.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclasses, for a nonelectrical
    signal or indicator.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+, for an electrical
    automatic condition responsive indicating system, generally.


CLS 83/522.12
TXT Signal; e.g., alarm:

    Device under subclass 522.11 comprising means to produce a dynamic
    manifestation upon the occurrence of a predetermined desired or undesired
    condition.

    (1)     Note.  A "dynamic manifestation" is considered to be a discernible
    change, e.g., a lamp is illuminated, a bell sounds, or a flag swings from
    one position to another.


CLS 83/522.13
TXT Indicator comprising work or product:

    Device under subclass 522.11 wherein a change is made in the workpiece to
    display that a condition has been met.

    (1)     Note.  Means to cut an admission ticket to show that adult fare or
    child fare has been paid is included herein.


CLS 83/522.14
TXT Responsive to force:

    Device under subclass 522.11 wherein a perceptible manifestation is made in
    reaction to a physical load being applied to the device, or to a portion
    thereof.


CLS 83/522.15
TXT Indicates tool position:

    Device under subclass 522.11 wherein a perceptible manifestation is made in
    reaction to the location of an instrumentality intended to effect a cutting
    action.


CLS 83/522.16
TXT Relative to another element:

    Device under subclass 522.15 wherein a perceptible manifestation is made in
    reaction to the location of the cutting instrumentality with respect to
    another member of the device.


CLS 83/522.17
TXT To work-engaging member:

    Device under subclass 522.16 wherein a perceptible manifestation is made in
    reaction to the location of the cutting instrumentality with respect to a
    member intended to engage a specific portion of the material to be cut.


CLS 83/522.18
TXT Calibrated scale or indicator:

    Device under subclass 522.17 wherein the perceptible manifestation is
    digital.


CLS 83/522.19
TXT Indicates dimension of work being cut:

    Device under subclass 522.18 intended to subdivide a portion of the work
    wherein the perceptible manifestation shows the resultant length of the
    portion to be subdivided.


CLS 83/522.21
TXT Dynamic indicator:

    Device under subclass 522.19 wherein the means to produce a perceptible
    manifestation is physically relocated to make such manifestation.

    (1)     Note.  A repositionable indicator is not necessarily "dynamic".


CLS 83/522.22
TXT To another tool assembly:

    Device under subclass 522.16 including a grouping of components intended to
    effect a cutting action and including a second grouping of components
    intended to effect a second cutting action, wherein a perceptible
    manifestation is made in reaction to the location of the first cutting
    grouping with respect to the second grouping.


CLS 83/522.23
TXT To cooperating tool:

    Device under subclass 522.16 including a grouping of components intended to
    effect a cutting action, wherein the perceptible manifestation is made in
    reaction to the location of a cutting edge with respect to a second cutting
    edge reacting therewith.


CLS 83/522.24
TXT To another component of tool assembly:

    Device under subclass 522.16 including a cutting group having a cutting
    edge on a member movable relative to other portions of the group wherein
    the perceptible manifestation is made in reaction to the relative position
    of the cutting edge and another portion.


CLS 83/522.25
TXT Adjustable guide for traversing tool; e.g., radial saw guide or miter saw
    guide:

    Device under subclass 522.16 with means to provide a transport of a cutting
    instrumentality and its driving means across a workpiece to effect the
    cutting action, which means is repositionable with respect the material
    being cut, wherein the perceptible manifestation is made in reaction to the
    relative position of the transport means and the material being cut.


CLS 83/522.26
TXT Indicates work characteristic:

    Device under subclass 522.11 wherein the perceptible manifestation is made
    in reaction to a condition of the material being subjected to a cutting
    action.

    (1)     Note.  The material condition of this subclass may comprise a
    physical position or dimension.


CLS 83/522.27
TXT Indicates wear:

    Device under subclass 522.11 intended to give a manifestation of the
    gradual deterioration of the device.


CLS 83/522.28
TXT Bubble level:

    Device under subclass 522.11 wherein the means to manifest comprises a
    member filled with a fluids of distinct specific gravity such that the
    position of the device with respect to the earth is perceptible by
    observation of the member.


CLS 83/522.29
TXT Counter:

    Device under subclass 522.21 wherein the means to manifest comprises a
    member digitally recording the number of actions of the device.


CLS 83/523
TXT Device under the class definition including either a tool or tool pair and
    means to apply a force to either or both tools to effect at least a part of
    a cutting stroke or cycle or means to constrain a tool for motion in a path
    defining a cutting stroke or cycle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    651+,   for cutting tool claimed, per se, that is, without means to drive
    or constrain a tool to move in a cutting stroke.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 28.3+, for a pencil-sharpening machine
    (i.e., one including a cutter and a pointing-facilitating work holder or
    work guide) including means to drive or guide the cutter.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, appropriate subclass for a means to
    drive or impact a tool or the like.


CLS 83/524
TXT Apparatus under subclass 523 in which means are effective to disrupt the
    tool moving means to stop the tool during or after each tool cycle in such
    manner that the initiation or continuation of a succeeding cutting cycle
    requires the intervention of a randomly operating agency or stimulus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203+,   for apparatus of the unicyclic type where the tool engages the work
    during a dwell in the intermittent feed of the work.

    484,    for a rotatable disc tool carrier movable unicyclically.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclass 19 for a tool driving or
    impacting means moved through a self acting advance and retraction cycle.

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), subclass 51 for a nonrepeat
    means in the tool drive of a selective cutting device.


CLS 83/525
TXT Device under subclass 524, wherein means are provided to vary the position
    along the cutting path at which the tool is stopped.

    (1)     Note.  This construction permits stopping the tool closely adjacent
    the work in its movement toward the work to permit aligning the work and
    tool in a plane perpendicular to the tool path.


CLS 83/526
TXT Device under subclass 524 wherein tool motion is stopped, with or without
    interruption of power to the tool, by imposing frictional or positive
    retarding force on the tool or its drive train.


CLS 83/527
TXT Apparatus under subclass 523 wherein means is provided for varying the
    location of one or both of the limits of travel of the tool or a planar
    tool-moving member (e.g., the presser of a clicker die press) in its
    cutting or retraction motion.

    (1)     Note.  Where an adjustable drive has the disclosed purpose of
    varying the mechanical advantage, such device is classified in subclasses
    606 and 634 even though, in changing the mechanical advantage, the datum
    plane of the tool may also be varied.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248,    for means to change datum plane of tool in apparatus having a tool
    which engages work during dwell of intermittent work-feed.

    606,    see (1) Note above.

    634,    see (1) Note above.


CLS 83/528
TXT Apparatus under subclass 527 wherein the means to change the datum plane is
    effective during continued, uninterrupted cyclic operation of the cutter
    and results in moving the tool support into or out of work engaging range.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305,    for a miscut device for flying a cutter.

    563+,   for apparatus wherein a tool may be displaced to an inactive
    position (e.g., for work loading).

    572+,   for a device wherein a gag is provided for operatively engaging a
    cutter member with a continuously actuated driving means.


CLS 83/529
TXT Apparatus under subclass 527 wherein the limit of the tool travel is
    changed by the use of adjustably positionable obstacles.


CLS 83/530
TXT Apparatus under subclass 527 wherein the limit of the tool travel is varied
    by changing the length of travel of the tool in its cutting stroke.


CLS 83/531
TXT Device under subclass 523 which comprises a bed (usually horizontal) and an
    overlying or opposed presser head, one of these being movable toward and
    away from the other, for the disclosed purpose of applying a force to a
    free tool (i.e., a tool not secured to either the bed or presser head)
    which as taught by the disclosure has its cutting edge in contact with the
    surface of the work, the tool and work (again as disclosed) being disposed
    between the bed and head to thereby cause the tool to cut the work because
    of the applied force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    561+,   for a device wherein a tool and a flat surfaced cooperating member
    are relatively positionable.

    566+,   for a device wherein a tool is secured to a moving part and is
    actuated to carry work in contact therewith through space against a
    cooperating tool.

    652+,   for a tool, per se, of this free tool type.


CLS 83/532
TXT Apparatus under subclass 531 including a carrier or holder for the free
    tool.


CLS 83/533
TXT Device under subclass 531 wherein the presser head, in the force-applying
    stroke, has only rectilinear motion toward and from the bed.

    (1)     Note.  In addition, a lateral swinging or positioning motion of the
    presser head may be provided, usually to center the presser over the die in
    various positions of the latter on the work.


CLS 83/534
TXT Clicker die press under subclass 533 wherein the presser head is capable of
    movement transversely of its rectilinear path so as to permit the head to
    be located over any desired area of the bed.

    (1)     Note.  The presser head may also be moved to an inactive position
    out of registry with the bed, but where the head has only one operative
    position and may be moved only to an inactive position the patent is placed
    in subclass 533.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    533+,   and see (1) Note.

    561+,   for apparatus providing for relative movement between tool and
    anvil.

    563+,   for apparatus wherein a tool may be displaced to an inactive
    position (e.g., for work bonding).


CLS 83/535
TXT Device under subclass 534 wherein the transverse motion of the presser is
    limited to swinging about a fixed axis.


CLS 83/536
TXT Apparatus under subclass 535 including power means to swing the presser
    member laterally over the bed block; or including means to confine the
    swinging movement of the presser to a desired extent or to otherwise govern
    such movement.


CLS 83/537
TXT Apparatus under subclass 536 wherein the power applying means, or the
    limiting or controlling means, is coordinated or synchronized with the
    means to impart rectilinear movement to the presser head.


CLS 83/538
TXT Apparatus under subclass 535 wherein the presser member is turnably secured
    to a stationary or nonrotating post.

    (1)     Note.  The post is usually perpendicular to the bed and may or may
    not be connected to the head for driving it in rectilinear motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    533,    for a device wherein the post rotates.


CLS 83/539
TXT Apparatus under subclass 533 including means for positioning or relocating
    the normally stationary cooperating anvil or work holder.

    (1)     Note.  "Normally stationary" means that the bed block has no cyclic
    movement.


CLS 83/540
TXT Apparatus under subclass 533 wherein some provision is made to prevent,
    allow for, or overcome the bending or tilting of the presser member which
    is usually of cantilever construction.


CLS 83/541
TXT Means under subclass 533 including a device manipulable by the operator and
    having motion relative to the head for maneuvering the presser head into
    operative position over the bed and/or governing reciprocating movement of
    the head.


CLS 83/542
TXT Apparatus under subclass 523 including means to cause a normally stationary
    cutter mounted near the work to be deformed to cut the work.

    (1)     Note.  An example of the apparatus of this subclass might be a
    roller running along a taut wire, forcing successive portions of the wire
    through the work.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not include single use cutters such as
    package or box opening tear strips found in Class 229, Envelopes, Wrappers,
    and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 200+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 200+, and see
    (2) Note above.


CLS 83/543
TXT Device under subclass 523 wherein there is interposed in the drive train
    (between power source and tool) an element which is adapted to break,
    compress, slip or distort upon occurrence of excessive force.

    (1)     Note.  The term "yieldable transmission" does not include lost
    motion or impact means, for which see subclass 616.

    (2)     Note.  The device of this subclass is to be distinguished from a
    yieldable power source, such as a driving spring, for which see subclasses
    582+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    582,    and see (2) Note above.

    616,    and see (1) Note above.


CLS 83/544
TXT Apparatus under subclass 523 provided with a protective obstruction to
    prevent contact of an extraneous object (such as the hand of an operator)
    with a part of the machine (such as the cutting tool or blade, per se).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    397+,   for guard means which moves in coordination or synchronism with the
    movement of the tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 612+ for guards for
    machine elements.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 129+ for stop
    mechanisms.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses
    144+ for a guard or housing for a belt and pulley drive system.


CLS 83/545
TXT Apparatus under subclass 544 wherein the protective obstruction is secured
    to the machine frame in such a manner that it has no law of motion but
    serves only as a fixed obstruction.


CLS 83/546
TXT Apparatus under subclass 545 wherein the normally static guard may be
    repositioned.


CLS 83/547
TXT Apparatus under subclass 523 wherein a length or roll of protective
    material (such as paper) is so mounted for passage between a tool and its
    anvil that it is in position during the cutting stroke to prevent direct
    contact of the tool edge and the anvil.


CLS 83/548
TXT Apparatus under subclass 523 including a plurality of claimed means for
    actuating the tool support, which means may be used selectively or
    alternatively at the will of the operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    549+,   for apparatus having a single drive for selectively driving one of
    a plurality of tools.


CLS 83/549
TXT Apparatus under subclass 523 wherein a series or group of tools or tool
    pairs, on one hand, and a common means for transmitting power from a common
    source to the respective tools or tool supports, on the other hand, are
    movable with respect to each other in a noncutting direction so that
    different tools or tool pairs of the series or group are driven
    individually by the common transmission as desired.

    (1)     Note.  The common actuating train need not be immediately preceding
    or adjacent any of the tools but may be further back in the drive train of
    any or all thereof, so long as there is a common power train between the
    tools and the power source with respect to which the tools or tool pairs
    are relatively movable.

    (2)     Note.  The unselected tool(s) or tool pair(s) remains inactive in
    the machine and available for selection.

    (3)     Note.  For machine having plural cutting tools, each with its own
    drive train (or with a common drive train), which tools are always
    available for actuation in any number and in any cycle of machine
    operation, see Class 234, Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), and see
    definitive notes in section III, D. of the Class Definition of Class 83.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    561+,   for a device where a tool may be positioned over different areas of
    a single flat surfaced cooperating tool.

    571+,   for a device for connecting or disconnecting a tool and its drive.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 50+ for power paths to plural
    tools from a single drive.

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), (and see (3) Note above).


CLS 83/550
TXT Apparatus under subclass 549 so constructed that the tools (or tool pairs)
    must be relatively associated in driving relationship with the common power
    means in a fixed order of succession.


CLS 83/551
TXT Apparatus under subclass 550 wherein the tools are tool pairs.


CLS 83/552
TXT Apparatus under subclass 549 wherein the series or group of spaced tools
    (or tool pairs) are mounted for bodily simultaneous movement upon a
    revolvable drum or disk.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 39+ for turret mounted tools for
    performing plural diverse metal shaping operations.

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), subclasses 99+ and 113, for a
    turret of interposers (i.e., gag blocks to control the selection of a
    combination of tools for actuation in a given cycle).

    483,    Tool Changing, subclasses 16+ for a machine tool combined with a
    significantly recited tool changer.  Note that a tool changer of Class 483
    bodily removes a tool from the turret.


CLS 83/553
TXT Apparatus under subclass 523 wherein one or more cutters are positionable
    to coact, always through the agency of a single drive train, with different
    ones of a group or series of cooperating cutters.


CLS 83/554
TXT Device under subclass 523 with means which necessarily results in, or whose
    disclosed purpose is to permit, successive applications of force, including
    gravitational, to the tool in its cutting motion (as contrasted with its
    return motion) in two or more distinct pulses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    234,    Selective Cutting, (e.g., Punching), subclasses 76+ for similar
    tool actuating means in a pattern-controlled card or tape punch.


CLS 83/555
TXT Apparatus under subclass 523 wherein the tool, in its approach to and
    contact with the work, follows two or more successive diverse type paths or
    types of motion; e.g., rectilinear and pivotal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    376     and 377, for a tool which moves in a vertical path with a clamp,
    then in a second path oblique to the first after the clamp has tightened on
    the work.

    644+,   for tool motion involving two or more simple components
    simultaneously present.


CLS 83/556
TXT Device under subclass 523 with means for giving one of the members of a
    cutting pair a noncutting motion with respect to the work as a result of,
    or otherwise in timed relation with, either the advancing or retracting
    portion of the cutting stroke.


CLS 83/557
TXT Apparatus under subclass 556 wherein a cutting anvil is transported, during
    each cutting cycle, from a retracted noncutting position to an effective
    position and is again returned to the retracted position.


CLS 83/558
TXT Apparatus under subclass 556 wherein the noncutting motion is along a
    rectilinear path.


CLS 83/559
TXT Apparatus under subclass 523 wherein both members of a cutting couple are
    movable (in a noncutting motion) simultaneously to various selected
    locations with respect to a work holder or to the base or supporting frame
    of the apparatus.


CLS 83/560
TXT Apparatus under subclass 559 wherein the tool pair is positionable along a
    rectilinear path.


CLS 83/561
TXT Apparatus under subclass 523 wherein a cutting member performs its cutting
    operation against a substantially imperforate work holder member and
    wherein either member may be positioned with respect to the other so as to
    bring different areas of the work holder into opposed or cutting
    relationship with the cutting member.

    (1)     Note.  If the positioning movement is synchronized with the cutting
    or retraction stroke, the patent would be classified in subclasses 556+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    531+,   for a clicker die press to actuate a loose tool which may be
    positioned at will upon different areas of the work carried by a flat
    surfaced work holder.

    556+,   and see (1) Note.


CLS 83/562
TXT Apparatus under subclass 561 wherein the members may be relatively
    positioned along a rectilinear path.


CLS 83/563
TXT Apparatus under subclass 523 with means for moving or permitting movement
    of a cutting member from an effective cutting position to a retracted or
    noncutting position, and back to cutting position again.

    (1)     Note.  The cutting member must remain attached to the apparatus;
    this subclass does not take patents where the cutting member is detached
    and laid aside to be again mounted at a subsequent time.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    483,    Tool Changing, subclasses 16+ for a machine tool combined with a
    significantly recited tool changer.  The tool changer of Class 483 is
    intended to detach and transfer the tool away from the machine tool.


CLS 83/564
TXT Apparatus under subclass 563 wherein the cutting member may be swung or
    oscillated to and from inactive position.


CLS 83/565
TXT Device under subclass 523 including means to constrain a cutting tool to
    follow a path, with respect to the work, which is determined (at least in
    part) by a mutually engaging and relatively movable contoured guide or
    pattern and a follower associated with the tool positioning means, so that
    the tool follows a line of cut which is similar (in at least part of its
    extent) to the guiding surface of the guide or pattern or produces spaced
    cuts lying along such a similar line.

    (1)     Note.  Search Class 33, subclasses 18.1+ and 501+ for the guide or
    pattern and the follower subcombinations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 18.1+ and 501+, and see (1)
    Note above.


CLS 83/566
TXT Device under subclass 523 whose operation, in the manner taught by the
    disclosure, accomplishes the bodily movement of the work, under the impetus
    of one tool, through space and into contact with the other or opposing tool
    of a cutting pair, which other tool is not moving toward or away from the
    work-moving tool (i.e., not moving in the path of work movement) during the
    cutting operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    431,    for means to press work on to a fixed-type cutter.

    531+,   for a clicker die press wherein a loose tool; i.e., unattached to a
    driven tool holder or machine part, may support the work and be moved into
    contact with the presser head.


CLS 83/567
TXT Device under subclass 566 including means which acts to grip the work
    between itself and the tool providing the impetus, during at least part of
    the work's movement toward the cooperating tool.

    (1)     Note.  Such binding or pressing means may also serve as a product
    handling instrumentality of the type usually termed "ejector" or
    "stripper". Patents directed to such means are placed originally in
    subclasses 111+; a few samples of such patents have been cross-referenced
    into this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111+,   for a product-handling means which also may serve to bind work to a
    moving tool; and see (1) Note, above.

    382,    for a machine in which work is clamped against a tool (or its
    support); but in which the work is held fixed or immobile during cutting.


CLS 83/568
TXT Apparatus under subclass 566 including elastic or springlike means (either
    solid or fluid) supporting one or both tools against the pull of gravity,
    or urging one or both tools in a particular direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    582+,   for a device including a tool which is resiliently-supported or
    biased; the reason for, or mode of, applying the resilient force varying
    from subclass to subclass.


CLS 83/569
TXT Device under subclass 566 in which the cooperating or opposed tool is a
    hollow cutter into the cavity of which the work is forced by the tool
    providing the impetus; or in which there are a plurality of cooperating or
    opposed tools into the interstices between which the work is forced by the
    tool providing the impetus.


CLS 83/570
TXT Means under subclass 566 in which the motive power, for the tool providing
    the work-moving impetus, is supplied by the operator or operative.


CLS 83/571
TXT Apparatus under subclass 523 including means for establishing or disrupting
    a positive connection between the tool or tool support directly and a power
    transmitting mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58+,    for randomly actuated device which brings a tool or other part to a
    halt at any point in the tool cycle by disrupting the power train thereto.

    549+,   for apparatus wherein a plurality of tools and a single power
    transmission means are relatively positionable to selectively drive a
    single one of the tools.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching).


CLS 83/572
TXT Apparatus under subclass 571 wherein that part of the power transmitting
    mechanism to or from which the tool is connected or disconnected is in a
    state of uninterrupted motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclass 119, for similar tool control in a selective cutting
    machine.


CLS 83/573
TXT Apparatus under subclass 572 wherein the force required for connecting or
    disconnecting the tool is supplied solely by a human operator.

    (1)     Note.  The operator may act upon the gag through a linkage or other
    mechanical force modifier which introduces no other source of power. If,
    however, the claimed subject matter requires that the operator merely
    actuates a switch or clutch to connect some other source of power with the
    gag-moving means, the patent is not placed in this subclass, but in
    subclass 572.


CLS 83/574
TXT Apparatus under subclass 523 provided with means to change the law of
    operation of the device, selectively or at will, to require the tool to
    follow one of a plurality of courses of travel in its cutting stroke; or
    with means to adapt a cutting implement (a claim to which alone would be
    proper for Class 30) to operation as a device of this class (83).


CLS 83/575
TXT Device under subclass 523 wherein the means to move the tool includes an
    electromechanical transducer in which reciprocatory or oscillatory motion
    between a coiled conductor carrying electric current and a ferrous or
    ironlike armature is effected by varying the instantaneous value of current
    in the conductor.

    (1)     Note.  The definition of this subclass excludes an electric motor
    of the usual rotary-shaft type, unless it is so connected in the tool drive
    that its shaft can only oscillate, without undergoing a full rotation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), subclass 108, for individually
    electrically driven tools in a selective cutting machine.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 119+, for
    reciprocating or oscillating motors, generally, and subclass 135, for
    linear-movement motors, generally.


CLS 83/576
TXT Apparatus under subclass 575 wherein the tool or its support, in its
    cutting cycle, actuates a switch or other current-controlling element which
    is so connected in a circuit that actuation of the switch or element causes
    a change in the value of current in the coiled conductor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62+,    for stopping means actuated in response to tool- or work-feed means
    detector.

    524+,   for unicyclic tool actuation, generally.


CLS 83/577
TXT Device under subclass 575 wherein the tool or an element rigidly secured
    thereto also constitutes the armature or movable portion of the
    electromechanical transducer.

    (1)     Note.  The coil, rather than the core or armature, may be the
    tool-actuating element.


CLS 83/578
TXT Apparatus under subclass 523 wherein the tool comprises two effective edges
    or blades and may be reciprocated or oscillated so that one edge or blade
    may cut during movement of the tool in one direction and the other edge or
    blade may cut during movement of the tool in the other direction.


CLS 83/579
TXT Apparatus under subclass 523 wherein the tool is guided, cammed, or
    positioned during at least a portion of the cutting cycle by the opposition
    or inertia of the work.

    (1)     Note.  This influence does not include a mere deceleration of the
    tool upon engagement with the work, but is intended to cover generally any
    change in direction of tool movement which occurs because of tool
    engagement with the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    378,    for tool motion affected by clamping pressure.


CLS 83/580
TXT Device under subclass 523 having a pair of cutting tools, the cutting edge
    of one tool being a hollow closed figure so arranged that the work to be
    severed is embraced with a portion of the work protruding axially
    therefrom, and the cutting edge of the other tool being arranged for
    relative movement thereof in a plane usually perpendicular to the axis of
    the hollow tool edge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200.1,  for a work-enclosing, wire cutting tool, which tool cuts the work
    by increased tension being applied to the end of the wire.


CLS 83/581
TXT Device under subclass 523 having a work support which holds the work in
    relation to the surface described by movement of the cutting edge so that
    the tool cuts the work to provide a surface at an oblique angle to some
    other surface of the work.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are patents for means to cut rods, tubes,
    and similar elongated work to provide a cut surface at an oblique angle to
    the longitudinal axis of such work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    559,    for device for positioning a tool pair relative to a workpiece to
    make a bias cut.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 28.2, for a pencil-sharpening machine
    including an elongated work holder or work guide so related to the cutter
    as to produce a bevelled edge, an elongated piece of attritable marking
    material.


CLS 83/581.1
TXT Device under subclass 523 wherein the tool is subjected to two balancing
    forces causing or tending to cause extension of the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    752,    for a reciprocable-type tool (e.g., jigsaw) wherein stored energy
    (e.g., spring means) furnishes drive power in one direction.


CLS 83/582
TXT Apparatus under subclass 523 wherein a tool blade is continuously subjected
    to a force tending to move it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    568,    for a constantly urged tool that is embodied in a device whose
    operation is such that, through the impetus of a tool, the workpiece is
    moved through space into contact with a cooperating tool.


CLS 83/583
TXT Apparatus under subclass 582 wherein the tool blade which is subjected to
    the force tending to move it is the normally stationary member of a cutting
    pair.


CLS 83/584
TXT Apparatus under subclass 582 wherein the tool blade upon which the urging
    force acts is a pivoted blade and the force tends to move the blade along
    the pivotal axis.


CLS 83/585
TXT Apparatus under subclass 584 wherein the tool blade is also subjected to a
    force tending to oscillate it.


CLS 83/586
TXT Apparatus under subclass 582 wherein the force tends to move the tool in a
    cutting stroke and there is provided releasable means to restrain the tool
    against moving.


CLS 83/587
TXT Apparatus under subclass 586 wherein an additional means (other than the
    restraining means) is provided for returning the tool to its restrained
    retracted position.


CLS 83/588
TXT Apparatus under subclass 582 wherein the tool blade is constantly subjected
    to a force tending to move it in the direction away from the work or a
    cooperating cutter member.


CLS 83/589
TXT Apparatus under subclass 588 wherein the tool subjected to the force
    tending to move it is a pivoted blade.


CLS 83/590
TXT Device under subclass 523 in which means other than that which drives the
    cutter into the work is provided specifically for the purpose of
    withdrawing the cutter from the work.


CLS 83/591
TXT Apparatus under subclass 523 wherein a tool is mounted for movement in one
    direction only about a fixed axis, the cutting blade being arranged thereon
    so that is will cyclically approach and recede from work presented thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    469+,   for rotatable disc cutter and carrier therefor, and especially
    subclasses 491+ for means to rotate or oscillate such a cutter.


CLS 83/592
TXT Device under subclass 591 whose cutting blade derives substantially all its
    support (either directly or indirectly) from its attachment to the external
    surface substantially normal to the axis of a rotating disk or disklike
    member.


CLS 83/593
TXT Device under subclass 591 provided with means to change the speed of
    revolution of the tool during each revolution.

    (1)     Note.  The speed change may involve, for instance, an acceleration
    of the tool in the cutting zone and deceleration elsewhere; or, by way of
    further example, the stopping and restarting of the tool at least once
    during each revolution.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for a cutting machine having means to stop at least part of the
    machine after a predetermined number of tool cycles.

    298,    313, 311+, for a "flying" cutting machine having means to vary the
    speed of a cutting tool.

    617,    for a machine of the simple rectilinear type having means to vary
    the speed of a cutting tool.


CLS 83/594
TXT Means under subclass 591 in which the moving tool passes through a cut-away
    or a re-entrant portion in a cooperating tool while making contact with a
    cutting edge of such other tool to effect a cut, or passes through the gap
    produced by spaced portions of a work-holding means and effects a cut while
    so passing.


CLS 83/595
TXT Apparatus under subclass 594 in which the moving tool and its cooperating
    tool are so related to each other, or in which the moving tool working
    through a recess in a work holder is so shaped or configurated, that the
    work is cut with a continuing or slicing action, rather than substantially
    simultaneously, as the locus of cutting contact with the work shifts along
    the tool edge(s).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    596,    for other progressively cutting rotary cutters.

    611,    for a progressively cutting oscillating cutter of the axially
    extendingcutting-edge type.

    636,    for a progressively cutting rectilinear reciprocating cutter.


CLS 83/596
TXT Apparatus under subclass 591 wherein the cutting blade is so formed that
    the work is cut with a continuing or slicing action such that the locus of
    cutting contact with the work shifts along the blade edge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    595,    for other progressively cutting rotary cutters.

    611,    for progressively cutting oscillating cutters of the axially
    extending cutting edge type.

    636,    for progressively cutting rectilinear reciprocating cutters.


CLS 83/597
TXT Apparatus under subclass 523 wherein a tool is rotatably reciprocated about
    a fixed axis toward and away from work support by a work holder or ledger
    blade to cut and then retract.

    (1)     Note.  For patents wherein the cutting member moves continuously in
    one direction about a fixed axis see subclasses 591+.


CLS 83/598
TXT Apparatus under subclass 597 wherein there is more than one set of
    cooperating cutting pairs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    513+,   for plural cutters each having a separate driving mechanism one of
    which moves relative to another.


CLS 83/599
TXT Apparatus under subclass 598 wherein a single pivoted member carries more
    than one tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    620+,   for a device having plural tools carried by a single rectilinearly
    reciprocating support.


CLS 83/600
TXT Apparatus under subclass 597 wherein both members of a cutting pair are
    moved in the cutting stroke.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    623,    for a rectilinearly reciprocating device wherein both members of
    the cutting pair are moved in a cutting stroke.


CLS 83/601
TXT Apparatus under subclass 597 wherein the actuating means for the
    oscillating tool or tool holder comprises a member which has a different
    path of motion than that of the tool or tool holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    627+,   for tool driver movable relative to rectilinearly reciprocating
    tool support.


CLS 83/602
TXT Apparatus under subclass 601 wherein the member which actuates the tool or
    tool holder oscillates or rotates about a center and carries a surface of
    fixed points of varying distance from the center, which surface imparts
    motion to a follower in contact therewith which motion varies in accordance
    with the varying distances of the fixed points on the surface from the
    center of the member.

    (1)     Note.  The follower may be the tool or tool support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    628,    for cam or eccentric driver for rectilinearly reciprocating cutter.


CLS 83/603
TXT Apparatus under subclass 601 wherein the member which actuates the tool or
    tool holder is provided with one or more protuberances or grooves which
    inter-engage and cooperate with mating protuberances on, or grooves in, the
    tool holder to form therewith a positive force transmitting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    629,    for gear driver for rectilinearly reciprocating cutter.


CLS 83/604
TXT Apparatus under subclass 601 wherein the tool or tool holder is actuated by
    two bars pivotally joined together at their ends, the other end of one bar
    being pivotally attached to the tool holder and the other end of the second
    bar being pivotally mounted to an element which is fixed with respect to
    the path of the tool holder motion, the bars being so oriented that
    movement of the bars so as to put the centers of the three pivots in line
    will actuate the tool or tool holder in a cutting stroke.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    630,    for a toggle link driver for a rectilinearly reciprocating cutter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 367+ for a
    toggle-link actuator means for a plier-type tool.


CLS 83/605
TXT Apparatus under subclass 601 wherein the tool or tool holder is actuated by
    one or more members at least one of which oscillates about a center, which
    center is always in a fixed position with respect to the axis of the tool
    or tool holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    633,    for fixed axis lever drive for rectilinearly reciprocating cutter.


CLS 83/606
TXT Apparatus under subclass 605 having two or more actuating levers wherein
    the point of connection between two or more levers may be varied.

    (1)     Note.  For line between this subclass and subclass 527 see (1) Note
    under subclass 527.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    634,    for adjustable drive for varying the mechanical advantage for
    rectilinearly reciprocating cutter.


CLS 83/607
TXT Apparatus under subclass 597 wherein the cutting edge is so disposed that
    in its cutting motion it generates a surface perpendicular to the fixed
    axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    592,    for radially mounted revolving tool.


CLS 83/608
TXT Apparatus under subclass 607 wherein the moving tool support on the one
    hand, or the work holder or ledger blade on the other hand, may be
    positioned as desired relative to each other.

    (1)     Note.  Patents for devices wherein the adjustment of the tool blade
    results in the changing of the datum plane of the tool stroke are placed in
    subclasses 527+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    527+,   and see (1) Note above.


CLS 83/609
TXT Apparatus under subclass 607 wherein a means additional to an axial bearing
    or guide structure is provided to engage the movable cutting blade and
    maintain it in its proper cutting path.


CLS 83/610
TXT Apparatus under subclass 597 wherein the cutting edge is so disposed that
    in the cutting motion it generates a right cylinder or segment thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    591+,   for a cutting blade moving continuously in one direction about a
    fixed axis.


CLS 83/611
TXT Apparatus under subclass 610 wherein the cutting edge is so shaped that it
    coacts with the work holder or ledger blade so that the point or area of
    severance of the work advances along the axis of the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    596,    for progressively cutting rotary cutter.

    636,    for progressively cutting rectilinear reciprocating cutter.


CLS 83/612
TXT Apparatus under subclass 610 wherein either the moving tool support or the
    ledger blade or work holder maybe positioned as desired.

    (1)     Note.  Patents for devices wherein the adjustment of the tool blade
    results in the changing of the datum plane in the tool stroke are placed in
    subclasses 527+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    527+,   and see (1) Note above.


CLS 83/613
TXT Apparatus under subclass 523 wherein a tool or tool holder is moved in
    alternate directions in a straight line, for example, toward and away from
    a co-operating ledger blade or work holder to cut and to retract from the
    work placed therebetween.


CLS 83/614
TXT Apparatus under subclass 613 wherein the movable tool engages the entire
    thickness of a flat workpiece and moves in a direction to traverse the
    workpiece from one side boundary thereof to another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    455,    for a traveling cutter whose guide serves as a clamp for work.

    469+,   for a traveling cutter of the rotary disc type, and especially
    subclasses 485+ for reciprocable tool carrier.


CLS 83/615
TXT Apparatus under subclass 613 wherein counter-balancing means is provided to
    negate or neutralize the kinetic effect of the weight of the punching
    mechanism.


CLS 83/616
TXT Devices under subclass 613 wherein a driving element moves idly through a
    portion of its travel before contacting another element which transmits
    motion to the cutter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    531+,   for a tool of the clicker die type.


CLS 83/617
TXT Apparatus under subclass 613 wherein means are provided to accelerate or
    decelerate the tool and/or change the impetus of the actuating means on the
    tool during a stroke.

    (1)     Note.  To be placed in this subclass, a patent must have the
    disclosed purpose of changing the force or speed of the tool.  Those
    devices having mechanical drives which would inherently change the force or
    speed of a tool in its stroke, but which are silent as to such change of
    force or speed, are placed in the respective structural subclasses. See
    subclasses 624+ and 627+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    624+,   and see (1) Note above.

    627+,   and see (1) Note above.

    628,    for cam or eccentric actuator.


CLS 83/618
TXT Apparatus under subclass 613 wherein there is more than one cutting tool,
    each of which is driven by the same power transmission means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    513+,   for plural cutters each having a separate driving mechanism one of
    which moves relative to another.

    598+,   for plural cutters of the oscillating type.


CLS 83/619
TXT Device under subclass 618 including two or more tools located in position
    by means of a plate element provided with holes or other means which are
    engageable with dowels or the like as associated with the tools or their
    holders, so that a number of tools may be readily brought into a
    predetermined relationship.

    (1)     Note.  The template may or may not serve as a structural part of
    the machine framing, but it should remain in place as a machine element as
    distinguished from a setting-up appliance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    565,    for a template which controls the path of movement of a tool in its
    cutting stroke.


CLS 83/620
TXT Apparatus under subclass 618 wherein there is more than one tool on one of
    the tool supports.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    599,    for plural tools on a single oscillating arm or tool holder.


CLS 83/621
TXT Apparatus under subclass 620 wherein the plural tools are telescopically
    arranged one within another (e.g., nut and washer cutting and punching
    machines).


CLS 83/622
TXT Apparatus under subclass 620 wherein the plurality of tools are so arranged
    on the tool support that in the cutting stroke one of the tools comes into
    cutting engagement with the work ahead of another.


CLS 83/623
TXT Apparatus under subclass 613 wherein during the cutting cycle, both the
    tool or tool holder, on the one hand, and the cooperating ledger blade or
    work holder, on the other hand, are given simple rectilinear motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    600,    for a device wherein both members of a cutting pair have motion in
    a cutting stroke, at least one of which is an oscillating motion.


CLS 83/624
TXT Apparatus under subclass 613 wherein alternate-motion-creating force is
    applied to both extremities of an elongated tool carrying member which is
    restrained by guides at each extremity to travel in a rectilinear path, the
    extremities being located in the areas closest to the respective cross-head
    guides.


CLS 83/625
TXT Apparatus under subclass 624 wherein the force is applied by means of
    pivoted oscillating arms which have different paths of motion than that of
    the tool or tool support, and which are pivoted on centers which are always
    in a fixed position with respect to the path of the tool or tool support.


CLS 83/626
TXT Apparatus under subclass 624 wherein the means for applying force to the
    extremities of the tool carrying member is a lever having a bearing at each
    end, one bearing connecting the lever to the extremity of the tool carrying
    member, for transmitting motion to the extremity by a push and pull
    movement, the other bearing being connected to some force transmitting
    mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    632,    for single connecting rod articulated with tool support.


CLS 83/627
TXT Apparatus under subclass 613 wherein the actuating means for the
    reciprocating tool or tool holder comprises a member which has a different
    path of motion than that of the tool or tool holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    601+,   for tool drivers movable relative to oscillating tool supports.


CLS 83/628
TXT Apparatus under subclass 627 wherein the member which actuates the tool or
    tool holder oscillates or rotates about a center and carries a surface of
    fixed points of varying distance from the center which surface imparts
    motion to a follower in contact therewith which motion varies in accordance
    with the varying distances of the fixed points on the surface from the
    center of the member.

    (1)     Note.  The follower maybe the tool or tool support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    602,    for cam or eccentric drivers for oscillating tool supports.


CLS 83/629
TXT Apparatus under subclass 627 wherein the member which actuates the tool or
    tool holder is provided with one or more protuberances or grooves which
    inter-engage and cooperate with mating protuberances on, or grooves in, the
    tool holder to form therewith a positive force transmitting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    603,    for gear drivers for oscillating tools.


CLS 83/630
TXT Apparatus under subclass 627 wherein the tool or tool holder is actuated by
    two bars pivotally joined together at their ends, the other end of one bar
    being pivotally attached to the tool holder and the other end of the second
    bar being pivotally mounted to an element which is fixed with respect to
    the path of the tool holder motion, the bars being so oriented that
    movement of the bars so as to put the centers of the three pivots in line
    will actuate the tool or tool holder in a cutting stroke.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    604,    for a toggle link driver for an oscillating tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 367+ for toggle-link actuator means for
    plier-type tool.


CLS 83/631
TXT Apparatus under subclass 627 wherein the tool or tool holder is either
    internally or externally threaded and is driven by a mating threaded driver.


CLS 83/632
TXT Apparatus under subclass 627 wherein the actuating means for the tool or
    tool holder is an intermediate connector having a bearing at each end, one
    bearing connecting it to the tool or tool holder, for transmitting motion
    to the tool by a push and pull movement, the other bearing being connected
    to some force transmitting mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    626,    for connecting rod articulated to opposite ends of a
    tool-supportingcross-head.


CLS 83/633
TXT Apparatus under subclass 627 wherein the tool or tool holder actuating
    member oscillates about a center, which center is always in a fixed
    position with respect to any point on the straight line path of tool
    movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    605+,   for fixed axis lever driver for an oscillating tool.


CLS 83/634
TXT Apparatus under subclass 633 wherein the point of connection between two or
    more of the actuating levers may be varied.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    527+,   for means to change the datum plane of a tool or tool-presser
    stroke and see (1) Note thereunder for the line.

    606,    for adjustable driver for varying the mechanical advantage for an
    oscillating cutter.


CLS 83/635
TXT Apparatus under subclass 627 wherein a passive means is provided to engage
    with and thereby direct the course of movement of, a moving cutting member
    or cutting member holder.


CLS 83/636
TXT Apparatus under subclass 613 wherein the direction of motion of the cutting
    member is in a plane normal to the broad side of the work and the member is
    so shaped that it coacts with the ledger blade or work holder so as to
    shear the work in a gradually advancing manner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    595     and 596, for progressively cutting rotary cutters.

    611,    for progressively cutting oscillating cutters of the axially
    extending cutting edge type.


CLS 83/637
TXT Apparatus under subclass 613 wherein two or more guide members are provided
    to align a punch and die.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 7+ for linear bearings.


CLS 83/638
TXT Rectilinearly reciprocating tool under subclass 613 which is guided by
    slots, ways, etc., which are disposed at an oblique angle to ledger blade
    or work holder in the plane of movement of the tool.

    (1)     Note.  The inclination of the tool guide-means generally serves to
    impart a slicing or draw-cutting action to the tool, as distinguished from
    the bevel-cutting referred to in subclass 581.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    581,    for a tool which is guided in a plane oblique to the work table for
    bevel-cutting.


CLS 83/639.1
TXT Fluid pressure actuated:

    Apparatus under subclass 613 wherein the cutting blade is caused to move in
    a cutting stroke by an expansible chamber motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177,    for apparatus wherein the cutting tool itself is a fluid blast or
    suction, that cooperates with a fixed reaction tool or with a directly
    opposing second fluid blast.


CLS 83/639.2
TXT Utilizing fluid amplifier:

    Apparatus under subclass 639.1 wherein the cutting blade is caused to move
    in a cutting stroke by an expansible chamber motor that utilizes the
    inertia of moving fluid impinging upon a portion thereof as a source of
    pressure.


CLS 83/639.3
TXT Diaphragm:

    Apparatus under subclass 639.1 wherein the cutting blade is caused to move
    in a cutting stroke by an expansible chamber motor having a flexible
    portion that moves to carry the cutting blade.


CLS 83/639.4
TXT Explosive fluid:

    Apparatus under subclass 639.1 wherein the cutting blade is caused to move
    in a cutting stroke by an expansible chamber motor by the action of fluid
    therein, that has been caused to burn and thereby expand and drive the
    movable portion of the motor to carry the blade.


CLS 83/639.5
TXT Plural cylinders:

    Apparatus under subclass 639.1 wherein the cutting blade(s) is caused to
    move by more than one expansible chamber motor.

    (1)     Note.  A single blade driven by plural cylinders is included
    herein, as is a device including a blade driven by a first cylinder and a
    second blade driven by a second cylinder.


CLS 83/639.7
TXT Offset cutter:

    Apparatus under subclass 639.1 wherein the force of the expansible chamber
    device extends along a first line and wherein the resultant force on the
    cutting tool extends along a second, distinct line.


CLS 83/640
TXT Apparatus under subclass 613 wherein a tool may be positioned with respect
    to its tool holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    527+,   for a device wherein the means to vary the position of the tool on
    its holder serves to vary the limits of travel of the tool.

    556+,   for a device wherein the tool is positioned in synchronization with
    the cutting stroke.

    560,    for a device wherein a tool pair is positioned as a unit.

    561+,   for a device wherein a tool and a flat surfaced cooperating member
    are relatively positionable.


CLS 83/641
TXT Apparatus under subclass 640 wherein means are provided for positioning the
    ledger blade or work holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    583,    for a spring-biased ledger blade.


CLS 83/642
TXT Means under subclass 523 whose tool motion is a nonlinear combination of
    work-approaching and lateral components of motion in a plane, during which
    motion the tool remains parallel to its initial position throughout its
    stroke.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    638,    for a rectilinearly moving tool operating in inclined guides and
    which may effect a draw-cut.


CLS 83/643
TXT Device under subclass 642 in which the tool is suspended, guided and/or
    restrained in its motion by a plurality of parallel links of equal length.

    (1)     Note.  The links may, of course, comprise portions of levers,
    bell-cranks, or other elements having additional functions.


CLS 83/644
TXT Device under subclass 523 whose cutter has a component of rotation of less
    than 360o about a pivot, which pivot reciprocates rectilinearly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    647.5,  for a similar device wherein the pivot moves in a circular path.


CLS 83/646
TXT Apparatus under subclass 523 wherein a plurality of motions are given to
    the cutting member simultaneously, all of the motions being in the same
    plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    644+,   for rectilinear motion combined with rotary tilting motion.


CLS 83/647
TXT Apparatus under subclass 646 wherein one of the motions is a to-and-fro
    motion while another motion is toward the work, thus giving the tool a
    sawing type action.


CLS 83/647.5
TXT Device under subclass 646 whose cutter has a component of rotation about a
    pivot, which pivot moves about a fixed center.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    644+,   for a similar device wherein the pivot moves in a straight line.


CLS 83/648
TXT Device under the class definition including a tool and means to support the
    work during cutting or to support a reserve stock of the work.

    (1)     Note.  For the distinctions between this subclass and Class 269 and
    subclasses 523+ and 651+ of this class, see (3) Note under subclasses 651+
    of this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 28.1+, for a pencil-sharpening machine;
    i.e., including movably related cutter and pointing-facilitating
    work-holder parts.

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, appropriate subclasses, for
    similar work supply means combined with a tool of the type classified in
    that class.

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses for a work holder, per se, or
    a work holder with a tool couple element, and see (1) Note above.


CLS 83/649
TXT Device under subclass 648 in which the work supply is in the form of a web
    or strand wrapped upon itself and the supply is supported for rotation upon
    an axis.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is the locus of all patents including a
    cutting tool and means to support a reserve supply of work in which the
    work supply is in the form of a web or strand wrapped upon itself and the
    supply is supported for rotation upon an axis.  Hence, the usual lines
    between this class (83) and Class 30, Cutlery, do not apply in this
    situation (see the third paragraph under III A of the class definition).
    Class 225, Severing by Tearing or Breaking, includes patents reciting a
    tearing edge or a breaking device and means to support a reserve supply of
    work.


CLS 83/650
TXT Device under subclass 649 in which two or more work supplies are associated
    with the tool so as to permit selective severing from one or more of the
    supplies.


CLS 83/651
TXT Device under the class definition comprising a tool, or a tool and its
    support, or a plurality of tools with a common support, ("tool" and "tool
    support" being defined in the Definition of Terms).

    (1)     Note.  A patent drawn to a tool having a portion specifically
    provided for in a subclass higher in this schedule will be found in such
    subclass.  For example, a patent claiming a tool having a portion which has
    the specific purpose of guiding the product will be found in subclasses
    78+.  As another example, a patent drawn to a tool having a portion thereon
    whose purpose is to act as a work-stop abutment will be found in subclasses
    391+ or subclasses 467+.

    (2)     Note.  This and indented subclasses include a tool pair as defined
    in the Definition of Terms if the means for moving, guiding or permitting
    movement of either of the tools in the pair is not claimed.  However, this
    subclass does not include a tool pair of the type provided for in
    subclasses 284+ (particularly subclasses 343+), subclasses 469+ or
    subclasses 509+.

    (3)     Note.  For distinction between a tool for this and indented
    subclasses and a work holder or work support for Class 269, see section V
    (B) 2, under the Class Definition of Class 269.  A patent disclosing a work
    holder or work support of the type classified in Class 269 and a tool
    movable with respect to the work support or work holder to effect cutting,
    will be found in subclasses 648+ of this class if the tool is claimed in
    combination with the work holder or work support, but no means to move or
    permit movement of the tool is claimed.  (The inclusion of such named means
    will result in the placement of the patent in subclasses 523+, above).

    (4)     Note.  This and indented subclasses provide for patents claiming a
    joint or connection between a tool and a tool support.  However, where the
    claimed joint or connection is specifically provided for in an existing
    body of art and only that portion of the tool is claimed which is necessary
    to modify the joint or connection, the patent will be found in such body of
    art. Such bodies of art include, Class 279, Class 285, Class 403.

    (5)     Note.  A tool defined in terms of its composition without the
    claiming of significant structure enabling the composition to operate as a
    tool is placed originally in the class providing for the composition,
    rather than in this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284+,   and see (2) Note, above.

    469+,   and see (2) Note, above.

    509+,   and see (2) Note, above.

    523+,   and see (3) Note, above.

    648+,   and see (3) Note, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses and see (3) Note, above.

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, appropriate subclasses and see (4) Note, above.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, appropriate subclasses and see (4) Note,
    above.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses and see (4) Note.
    above.

    407,    Cutters, for Shaping, for a cutter intended to give shape other
    than subdividing the work; e.g., the cutter to be used in a milling machine
    or the cutter to be used in a lathe.


CLS 83/651.1
TXT Device under subclass 651 wherein the tool comprises at least one wire
    (elongated member having a diameter which is relatively insignificant
    compared to its length).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200.1,  for a wire-tool type cutting device which functions by having an
    increased tensional stress applied to said tool after it is placed in
    position to encircle or surround at least a portion of the work.

    307.1+, for a "flying" wire cutting tool.


CLS 83/652
TXT Device under subclass 651 which is disclosed as being supported against
    gravity solely by resting on the work, and which is caused to cut the work
    by being forced into the work by a force applying member that is not
    connected thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    531+,   for a clicker die press utilizing a work supported tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 314+ for a work supported cutting implement.


CLS 83/653
TXT Device under subclass 652 having a special provided portion which enables
    (that is, permits) another element to remove the product from the tool.

    (1)     Note.  The facilitator may be simply a channel for an operator's
    finger.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78+,    for a tool having means for moving or guiding the product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, subclass 13 for a product discharge facilitator on a
    work holder.


CLS 83/654
TXT Device under subclass 652 provided with a special part or element which is
    intended to be grasped to facilitate placing the tool on or removing it
    from the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    532,    for a clicker die press with a die handling attachment.


CLS 83/655
TXT Device under subclass 652 having a portion thereon whose function is to
    engage a particular portion of the work so as to enable the tool to be
    placed on top of a desired part of the work.


CLS 83/656
TXT Device under subclass 652 which, in its intended use, cuts out a discrete
    product from the work and in addition makes a cut within the confines of
    the product that does not intersect any edge of the product.


CLS 83/657
TXT Device under subclass 652 having means to change, or permit the changing
    of, the relative positions of two work contacting cutting portions, of the
    tool to thereby change the size and/or shape to the cut made in the work by
    the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    696,    for a tool having tool contour adjusting means.


CLS 83/658
TXT Device under subclass 651 wherein the tool is an anvil as defined in the
    Definition of Terms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 289+ and section V(B) 2 of the class
    definition (269) for the line.


CLS 83/659
TXT Device under subclass 658 wherein the anvil, during the cutting operation,
    swings in a single direction about an axis that is fixed with respect to
    the anvil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    663+,   for a rotatable type tool that is not an anvil.


CLS 83/660
TXT Device under subclass 651 wherein the portion of the tool contacting the
    work has a pointed end which, in operation, penetrates the work and,
    without removing any material from the work, makes a hole having
    substantially the same dimension as the dimension of the portion of the
    tool that penetrates the work.


CLS 83/661
TXT Device under subclass 651 wherein the tool in use forms a closed loop of
    flexible material wrapped about or traveling about a plurality of pulleys
    or drums.


CLS 83/662
TXT Device under subclass 651 wherein the tool has an elongated cutting edge
    and is connected at or near each of the ends of its cutting edge to a tool
    support, with the tool being unsecured to the support for at least a
    portion of its length between said connections.

    (1)     Note.  The tool may have an additional backing member bearing
    against it between the connections to the spaced arms.


CLS 83/663
TXT Means under subclass 651 which is intended (during cutting) to swing in a
    single direction about an axis that is fixed with respect to the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    343+,   for a rotatable tool pair of the flying pair.

    469+,   for a rotatable disc tool pair or tool and carrier, especially
    subclasses 495+, for a rotatable tool combined with means to cause or
    permit such rotation.

    591+,   for a means to cause or permit simple revolving motion of a tool.

    659,    for a rotatable type anvil.

    698.41+,for a rotary cutter joint or connection, or for a nominally recited
    rotary cutter in combination with a joint or connection therefor.


CLS 83/664
TXT Device under subclass 663 wherein a plurality of tools are mounted on an
    elongated rotatable member extending through the centers of the tools or
    tool supports, so that the tools rotate with such member; with at least two
    tools being axially spaced along the elongated member by means of an
    element positioned between facing sides of such two tools or their supports.


CLS 83/665
TXT Device under subclass 663 including a tool or tool support fixedly secured
    to and circumferentially encompassing an elongated member having a length
    substantially greater than the dimension of the tool or tool support along
    the axis of the member; and means for securing the member to the tool or
    tool support.

    (1)     Note.  For the placement of a patent as an original in this
    subclass, the securing means must be claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    698.11+, for a connection between a tool and a tool support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses, for means for
    securing a collar or like member to a shaft and see (4) Note under subclass
    651 of this class for the line.


CLS 83/666
TXT Device under subclass 665 wherein the tool or tool support is secured to
    the shaft at or near one extremity thereof.


CLS 83/667
TXT Device under subclass 663 which is constructed to perform a punching
    operation on the work as defined in the Definition or Terms and also make a
    cut in the work which is not a punching cut.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    682,    for another punching plus nonpunching tool.


CLS 83/668
TXT Device under subclass 663 which is constructed to perform a notching
    operation on the work as defined in the Definition of Terms and also make a
    cut in the work which is not a notching cut.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    683,    for another notching plus nonnotching tool.


CLS 83/669
TXT Device under subclass 663 which is constructed to perform a punching
    operation on the work as defined in the Definition of Terms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    684+,   for another punching tool.


CLS 83/670
TXT Device under subclass 669 which is constructed to cut the work by a
    shearing operation as defined in the Definition of Terms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    686+    and 690, for another shearing type tool.


CLS 83/671
TXT Device under subclass 663 which is constructed to perform a notching
    operation on the work as defined in the Definition of Terms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    692+,   for another notching tool.


CLS 83/672
TXT Device under subclass 663 wherein at least a portion of the work-contacting
    (cutting) part of the tool follows the mathematical space curve commonly
    known as a helix.


CLS 83/673
TXT Device under subclass 663 which is constructed to make a shearing cut as
    defined in the Definition of Terms.


CLS 83/674
TXT Device under subclass 673 wherein all of the work-contacting (cutting)
    portion of the tool lies along a straight line, all points of which are
    equidistant from the axis of rotation.


CLS 83/675
TXT Device under subclass 673 wherein all of the work-contacting (cutting)
    portion of the tool lies in a plane that is at a right angle with respect
    to the axis of rotation of the tool.


CLS 83/676
TXT Device under subclass 663 which consists of a relatively thin, generally
    flat, member having work-contacting (cutting) portion or portions along its
    periphery, such portion or portions being symmetrically arranged with
    respect to the geometric center.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are a disc-type tool having a
    circular periphery, a tool having a serrated or saw toothed periphery, and
    a tool having a plurality of equiangularly spaced cutting lobes.


CLS 83/677
TXT Device under subclass 663 wherein the
    work-contacting (cutting) portion of the tool is spaced from the axis of
    rotation and the tool is so mounted on the tool support that the distance
    from said portion of the tool to the axis of rotation may be varied.


CLS 83/678
TXT Means under subclass 663 wherein the device is comprised of a plurality of
    cutting elements, each adapted to make a separate cut in the work, with the
    cuts being unconnected to each other, so that the resultant product has an
    uncut portion between cut portions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    695,    for another spaced cut forming tool.


CLS 83/679
TXT Means under subclass 651 wherein the device is intended to be initially on
    one side of the work and to cause the work to be cut by the relative
    movement of such device with respect to another tool located on the
    opposite side of the work.


CLS 83/680
TXT Device under subclass 679 constructed to make a cut in the shape of a
    series of convolutions of ever increasing radius.


CLS 83/681
TXT Device under subclass 679 constructed to perform a punching operation as
    defined in the Definition of Terms and to make a cut in the punched-out
    portion produced by the punching operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    656,    for a work supported tool that cuts out an article and cuts within
    the article.

    682,    for a tool that makes both a punching and nonpunching cut, the
    nonpunching cut not being within the punched out article.


CLS 83/682
TXT Device under subclass 679 constructed to perform a punching operation as
    defined in the Definition of Terms and also to make a cut in the work which
    is not a punching cut.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    667,    for a punching plus nonpunching tool of the rotatable type.

    681,    for a punching tool which also makes a cut within the punched out
    article.


CLS 83/683
TXT Device under subclass 679 constructed to perform a notching operation as
    defined in the Definition of Terms and also to make a cut in the work which
    is not a notching cut.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    668,    for a notching plus nonnotching tool of the rotatable type.


CLS 83/684
TXT Device under subclass 679 constructed to perform a punching operation as
    defined in the Definition of Terms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    669+,   for a punching tool of the rotatable type.


CLS 83/685
TXT Device under subclass 684 which, as claimed, includes both tools of the
    tool pair as defined in the Definition of Terms.


CLS 83/686
TXT Device under subclass 684 whose claimed tool is constructed to cut the work
    by a shearing operation, as defined in the Definition of Terms, by
    penetrating a complemental female tool.


CLS 83/687
TXT Means under subclass 686 wherein the device comprises a plurality of
    cutting elements mounted on a common support, each of the elements being
    intended to cut out a discrete product unconnected with a product cut-out
    by another element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    691,    for another punching tool that produces multiple punchings.


CLS 83/688
TXT Device under subclass 686, wherein the tool has at least two portions
    thereon effective to cut the work by a shearing action, as defined in the
    Definition of Terms, said portions being connected by a portion of the tool
    which is not effective to cut the work, one of said work cutting portions
    engaging the work before the other portion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    407,    Cutters, for Shaping, subclasses 13+ for a broaching tool having a
    series of teeth that successively cut to enlarge an existing hole.


CLS 83/689
TXT Device under subclass 686 wherein the cutting edge of the male tool that
    coacts with the female tool to effect cutting is so constructed that in its
    intended operation the work will initially be engaged by a portion only of
    the edge, with other edge portions then successively engaging the work
    until the punching operation is completed.


CLS 83/690
TXT Device under subclass 684 whose claimed tool is constructed to cut the work
    by a shearing operation, as defined in the Definition of Terms, by being
    penetrated by a complemental male tool.


CLS 83/691
TXT Means under subclass 684 wherein the device comprises a plurality of
    cutting elements mounted on a common support, each of the elements being
    intended to cut out a discrete product unconnected with a product cut out
    by another element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    687,    for a shear-type male punching tool that produces multiple
    punchings.


CLS 83/692
TXT Device under subclass 679 constructed to perform a notching operation, as
    defined in the Definition of Terms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    671,    for a notching tool of the rotatable type.


CLS 83/693
TXT Device under subclass 692 constructed to cut the work by a shearing
    operation, as defined in the Definition of Terms.


CLS 83/694
TXT Device under subclass 679 constructed to cut the work by a shearing
    operation as defined in Definition of Terms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    670     and 673+, for a shearing tool of the rotatable type.

    686+    and 690, for a shear-type punching tool.

    693,    for a shear-type notching tool.


CLS 83/695
TXT Means under subclass 679 wherein the device comprises a plurality of
    cutting elements each adapted to make a separate cut in the work, with the
    cuts being unconnected to each other, so that the resultant product has an
    uncut portion between cut portions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    678,    for a spaced cut forming tool of the rotatable type.


CLS 83/696
TXT Device under subclass 679 having means to change, or permit the changing
    of, the relative positions of two work contacting cutting portions of the
    tool to thereby change the size and/or shape of the cut made in the work by
    the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    657,    for a work supported tool having tool contour adjusting means.


CLS 83/697
TXT Means under subclass 651 which is intended in operation to be moved toward
    and away from the work along the same path so as to effect cutting during
    this movement.

    (1)     Note.  A tool that oscillates in operation or moves to-and-fro in a
    sinuous path is considered to be of the reciprocable type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    679+,   for a reciprocable tool of the cutting couple type.

    698.71+,for a reciprocable cutter joint or connection, or for a nominally
    recited reciprocable cutter in combination with a joint or connection
    therefor.


CLS 83/698.11
TXT Joint or connection:
    Device under subclass 651 wherein means are provided for (1) securing a
    cutting tool to its support, (2) securing one cutting element of a tool to
    another cutting element, or (3) securing one portion of a cutting tool
    support to another portion of a tool support.

     (1)    Note. Included herein are patents to connections for strippers and
    guide assemblies for moving tools and tool supports.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129     through 146, for a stripper to which a joint or connection of this
    subclass pertains.

    651,    (4) Note for the line with existing classes providing for joints
    and connections.


CLS 83/698.21
TXT Magnetic connection:
    Joint or connection under subclass 698.11 including means to secure a tool
    or tool support in position by utilizing the force of a magnet to a
    ferromagnetic member.


CLS 83/698.31
TXT Resiliently biased connection:
    Joint or connection under subclass 698.11 including means to secure a tool
    or tool support in position by utilizing the force of a component thereof
    stressed within its elastic limit.


CLS 83/698.41
TXT For rotary tool:
    Joint or connection under subclass 698.11 wherein the tool is one carried
    to turn at least 360 degrees about an axis passing therethrough comprising
    means for (1) securing that tool to its support or (2) for securing that
    tool to another tool.

    (1)     Note. This subclass does not include securing one portion of a tool
    support to another portion of a tool support.


CLS 83/698.42
TXT Flexible sleevelike tool:
    Joint or connection under subclass 698.41 wherein the tool comprises a
    pliable cylindrical collar substantially encompassing a generally
    cylindrical roller.


CLS 83/698.51
TXT Adjustable:
    Joint or connection under subclass 698.41 wherein means are provided which
    enable the cutting element of the tool to be positioned on  its support, or
    in the case of a tool having multiple cutting elements, to be positioned
    relative to another cutting element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    699.51, and see the search notes thereunder for other adjustable joints or
    connections under the class definition.


CLS 83/698.61
TXT Rectilinearly:
    Joint or connection under subclass 698.51 wherein the position of the
    cutting element is adjustable along a straight line.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are patents to a device which move, allow to
    move, or cause to move a rotary cutting tool axially with respect to a
    supporting arbor, or for axially moving an arbor for a rotary cutting tool
    along its bearing support.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is not intended to provide for a connection to
    allow a rotary cutter carriage to slide along a rail.


CLS 83/698.71
TXT For rectilinearly reciprocating tool:
    Joint or connection under subclass 698.11 wherein the tool is one intended
    to move to and fro along a straight line comprising means for (1) securing
    that tool to its support, or (2) for securing that tool to another tool, or
    (3) for securing a tool support that reciprocates with the tool to another
    reciprocating support.

    (1)     Note. Included herein are patents to a stationary cutting tool, as
    distinguished from an anvil, that cooperates with a reciprocating tool to
    form a tool pair.


CLS 83/698.91
TXT Tool is single element with continuous cutting edge  (e.g., punch,
    etc.):Joint or connection under subclass 698.71 wherein the tool includes a
    sharp edge intended to penetrate the workpiece, which sharp edge extends
    such that it curves back on itself without interruption.

      (1)   Note.  This subclass is limited to patents to a connection for
    directly attaching a tool to a support.


CLS 83/699.11
TXT Tool is single element reciprocable generally perpendicularly to elongate
    cutting edge (e.g., shear, etc.):Joint or connection under subclass 698.71
    wherein the tool includes a sharp edge that extends a limited distance, and
    said edge extends substantially perpendicularly to the line of travel of
    the tool.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is limited to patents to a connection for
    directly attaching a tool to a support.


CLS 83/699.21
TXT Tool is single element reciprocable along elongate cutting edge (e.g., saw
    blade, etc.):Joint or connection under subclass 698.71 where- in the tool
    is a long, thin blade having a cutting edge extending along the
    longitudinal axis thereof and parallel to the to-and-fro movement.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is limited to patents to a connection for
    directly attaching a tool to a support.


CLS 83/699.31
TXT Adjustable:
    Joint or connection under subclass 698.71  wherein means are provided which
    enable the cutting element of the tool to be positioned on  its support, or
    in the case of a tool having multiple cutting elements, to be positioned
    relative to another cutting element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    699.51, and see the search notes thereunder for other adjustable joints or
    connections under the class definition.


CLS 83/699.41
TXT Rectilinearly:
    Joint or connection under subclass 699.31 wherein the cutting element is
    positionable along a straight line.


CLS 83/699.51
TXT Adjustable:
    Joint or connection under subclass 698.11 wherein means are provided which
    enable the cutting element of the tool to be positioned on  its support, or
    in the case of a tool having multiple cutting elements, to be positioned
    relative to another cutting element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    527+,   for a device wherein the means to vary the position of the tool on
    its holder serves to vary the limits of travel of the tool.

    640+,   for a device of the type found in this subclass which, as claimed,
    is embodied in a machine having means to drive or guide the tool in a
    rectilinearly reciprocatory path.

    698.51+, for a rotary cutting tool or tool support    including a joint or
    connection.

    699.31+, for a reciprocating cutting tool or tool       support including a
    joint or connection.


CLS 83/699.61
TXT Rectilinearly:
    Joint or connection under subclass 699.51 wherein the cutting element is
    positionable along a straight line.


CLS 83/701
TXT Apparatus or method under the class definition which is not in conformance
    with the definition of any prior subclass in this schedule.

    (1)     Note.  A special exception to the limitations expressed in these
    definitions (i.e., the limitations which require a moving tool and/or edge
    backup member) exists in the case of a machine wherein sound waves (e.g.,
    supersonic sound) cause work to be cut through its thickness.  Such a
    machine will be proper for this class and this subclass as apparatus for
    such cutting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13+,    for the corresponding process.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 104+ for apparatus or process for
    testing a cutting edge.


CLS 83/703
TXT Device under subclass 401 including means for sequentially moving the work
    in two distinct directions, namely (a) work infeed motion along a path
    parallel to the plane of cut, and (b) transverse work motion in a direction
    generally perpendicular to the plane of cut; and wherein movements (a) and
    (b) are repeated.

    (1)     Note.  For the purpose of this definition, the means which permits
    movement of the work transverse to the plane of cut must have structure
    which at least facilitates such movement, e.g., work pusher, or a
    guide-like groove or track.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284+,   for a cutting tool which moves in two directions, namely (a)
    perpendicularly toward the work, and (b) parallel to the direction of
    movement of the work ("flying cutter").


CLS 83/704
TXT Device under subclass 703 including means to facilitate or cause
    alternating clockwise-counterwise rotational movement of the work about an
    axis parallel to the cutting plane when the work is out of contact with the
    cutting tool.

    (1)     Note.  This device is usually a "shingle-cutting" machine wherein
    the work supported by the feed carriage is given alternate outward cants
    (of each of the lead corners of the workpiece) into the plane of cut such
    that the work is tilted or slanted in a step-by-step fashion with respect
    to the feed carriage base or platform.

    (2)     Note.  A device having an alternately tilting or slanting gauge
    (thickness) plate, against which the lead edge of the work contacts as the
    work is being fed to the cutting zone, is found in this subclass (704).


CLS 83/705
TXT Device under subclass 704 wherein the means to facilitate the
    clockwise-counterclockwise rotational movement of the work is a member
    supplemental to the work moving means, which supplemental means contacts
    the work and positions it with respect to the cutting zone between
    successive cuts, but does not move with the work-moving means.


CLS 83/706
TXT Device under subclass 704 wherein the means to cause the
    clockwise-counterclockwise rotational movement of the work is a series of
    elements which hold or support the work, each element having a peripheral
    surface, any point of which moves in an arc-like path.


CLS 83/707
TXT Device under subclass 703 wherein the infeed means moves the work back and
    forth in a straight line path past a cutting zone, said back and forth
    movement constituting a cycle of work movement, wherein one complete cut is
    produced during each such cycle, and including a cutting tool at said zone
    having a cutting plane which is parallel to the direction of said work
    movement.

    (1)     Note.  These devices are generally known in the art as "slicers".

    (2)     Note.  The infeed means is usually referred to as a "work-support"
    or a "work-carriage".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    717+,   for a "slicer" wherein the work is moved perpendicularly toward the
    plane of cut solely by the force of gravity upon the work.


CLS 83/708
TXT Device under subclass 707 including means for turning the work through a
    partial rotation about a centerline which is parallel to the straight line
    path, such turning occurring only when the work is out of contact with the
    tool, or including means to facilitate such a rotation of the work.

    (1)     Note.  The work turning means may be used to rotate the work while
    it is resting on the work support (carriage) or it may be used to transfer
    the work from a supply means directly to and onto the work carrier.


CLS 83/709
TXT Device under subclass 708 wherein the work turning means comprises a closed
    loop of flexible material, and wherein said means includes a plurality of
    pointed, work engaging projections spaced along the outside edge of said
    loop.

    (1)     Note.  This device usually is in the form of either a wheel or
    endless chain having a plurality of work engaging teeth spaced around the
    periphery thereof.


CLS 83/710
TXT Device under subclass 708 wherein the work turning means comprises a
    substantially rectangular reciprocating means which includes at least one
    pointed, work engaging projection located on the periphery closest to the
    work.

    (1)     Note.  For the purposes of this definition, the pointed work,
    engaging projection can include a pin, cog, tooth, hook, etc.

    (2)     Note.  A work engaging hook attached to a driving or pulling chain
    (nonendless) will be considered a device for this subclass.


CLS 83/711
TXT Device under subclass 710 wherein the rectangular means includes two or
    more work engaging projections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    709,    for a similar device wherein the plurality of teeth are attached to
    a rotating or revolving endless member.


CLS 83/712
TXT Device under subclass 711 wherein the work turning means is actuated by
    pneumatic or hydraulic power means.


CLS 83/713
TXT Device under subclass 707 including means for positively moving the work in
    a direction toward and substantially perpendicular to the cutting plane,
    such means being effective during the interval when the work is out of
    engagement with the cutter.

    (1)     Note.  The means which moves the work transversely may be advanced
    manually. However, if the transverse movement is caused by the operator
    grasping the work itself and pushing or pulling such work, the device will
    be found in subclass 707.

    (2)     Note.  The means for shifting the work transversely may be the
    force of gravity, per se, (see subclass 717 indented hereunder).


CLS 83/714
TXT Device under subclass 713 wherein the means for moving the work
    perpendicularly toward the cutting plane retracts the work from said plane
    after the cutting operation has been performed.

    (1)     Note.  The alternate to-and-fro shifting of the work is for the
    purpose of aligning the work with the cutting plane prior to each cut and
    then clearing the work from the plane as it is reciprocated back to prepare
    for a subsequent pass or cut.

    (2)     Note.  The means to move the work toward and away from the cutting
    plane must be structural.  For devices wherein the transverse
    work-advancing means is moved manually, see subclass 713.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    724,    for a similar device wherein a work retraction means is provided in
    addition to the means to move the work toward the cutting plane.


CLS 83/715
TXT Device under subclass 714 wherein actuation of the means to move the work
    perpendicularly is effected by an element which is a movable part of the
    infeed means.

    (1)     Note.  The movable element is usually affixed to the wheel or axle
    of the work supporting carriage (infeed means) and rotates therewith, thus
    transmitting power to the transversework-mover.


CLS 83/716
TXT Device under subclass 714 wherein actuation of the means to move the work
    perpendicularly is effected by an integral part of the work infeed means
    contacting a relative stationary means situated in the path of travel of
    the infeed means.


CLS 83/717
TXT Device under subclass 713, including means to regulate or limit the
    distance that the work is moved perpendicularly toward the cutting plane.

    (1)     Note.  Such means can comprise (a) baffle structure on the side of
    the cutting plane opposite the transverse work moving means so as to
    provide a work-stop abutment, (b) mechanical means (e.g., ratchet, screw)
    associated with the work moving means so as to regulate the distance the
    work is moved toward the cutting plane for each cutting cycle.

    (2)     Note.  Devices relying on gravity as being the sole means for
    moving the work perpendicularly toward the cutting plane are found in this
    subclass (717).


CLS 83/718
TXT Device under subclass 717 wherein actuation of the means to move the work
    perpendicularly to the cutting plane is effected by or associated with
    means to cause or permit the work infeed motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    725,    for a similar device having plural, work-pushing elements, which
    elements are actuated to move perpendicularly toward the cutting plane by
    the work infeed means.


CLS 83/719
TXT Device under subclass 717 wherein the movement of the work perpendicular to
    the cutting plane is effected by means which engages the work along a plane
    farthest removed from the plane of cut, and forces the work toward the
    plane of cut.

    (1)     Note.  The pusher mechanism may be manually forced toward the
    cutting plane by grasping a handle associated with the pusher; see subclass
    729 indented hereunder.


CLS 83/720
TXT Device under subclass 719 including means to either (a) secure the work
    against relative movement with respect to the pusher element, or (b) adjust
    the work relative to the pusher element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    409+,   for a device wherein the work is moved through the cutting tool
    station (infeed) by a conveyor means, said means including a work
    constrainer (e.g., clamp, hook).

    451+,   for a work immobilizer or constrainer of general utility.


CLS 83/721
TXT Device under subclass 720 wherein the means to secure the work against
    movement includes means to adjust or move said securing means into or out
    of engagement with the work.


CLS 83/722
TXT Device under subclass 719 wherein two or more spaced, work engaging means
    are interconnected so as to concurrently produce a shifting of the work
    toward the cutting plane.


CLS 83/723
TXT Device under subclass 722 including means for varying the position of one
    pusher element relative to another.

    (1)     Note.  These devices are generally intended to accommodate a
    tapered work piece in such a manner that the side presented to the cutting
    plane will be parallel thereto.


CLS 83/724
TXT Device under subclass 722 including means to effect movement of the pusher
    elements away from the cutting plane.

    (1)     Note.  The retraction of the pusher elements away from the cutting
    plane is generally for the purpose of preparing the devices for the receipt
    of a new work piece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    714+,   for a similar device wherein the means which advances the work
    toward the cutting plane (e.g., pusher element) physically retracts the
    work from the cutting plane as well.


CLS 83/725
TXT Device under subclass 722 wherein at least one work engaging means is
    actuated by an intermediate means which utilizes energy transferred thereto
    by the movement of the infeed means.


CLS 83/726
TXT Device under subclass 722 wherein at least one work engaging means is
    actuated by pneumatic or hydraulic means.


CLS 83/727
TXT Device under subclass 722 wherein a work engaging means includes a threaded
    follower which is engaged by a threaded, rotatable shaft, the work engaging
    means being urged toward the cutting plane when the shaft is rotated.


CLS 83/728
TXT Device under subclass 722 wherein a work engaging means includes a
    rectilinear, toothed member attached to or integral with the underside
    thereof, and wherein said means is advanced toward the cutting plane by
    either (a) a driven, toothed gear means which engages said rectilinear
    member by intermeshing teeth therewith, or (b) a driven, reciprocating
    finger which engages a tooth of the rectilinear member on one stroke, and
    slides over that tooth on the return stroke.


CLS 83/729
TXT Device under subclass 719 wherein the pusher mechanism has associated
    therewith means adapted to be grasped by the hand of the user so as to
    impart movement thereto.


CLS 83/730
TXT Device under subclass 717 wherein the means to move the work transversely
    toward the cutting plane is a member which supports the work against
    gravity, which member includes means to limit the increments of said work
    movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    276+, for a cutting device including a reciprocating work-mover, wherein
    the tool engages the work during dwell of intermittent workfeed.

    409+, for other rectilinear work-mover means including a work-constrainer.


    425+,   for a work supporting carriage which moves the work along a path
    which is parallel to the cutting plane.

    435.11+, for a cutting device having a rectilinearly moving work carriage
    and tool adapted to cut parallel to the direction of and during work
    movement.

    437.1+, for a cutting device having a rectilinearly moving work carriage
    and a tool, generally.


CLS 83/731
TXT Device under subclass 707 wherein the means for moving the work back and
    forth in a straight line (infeed) is a driven, flexible member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    713+,   for a device having such a driven, flexible member, and including
    means to positively move the work toward the cutting plane.


CLS 83/732
TXT Device under subclass 401 having active means, distinct from the work
    conveyor, for moving a work piece laterally of the direction of motion of
    the work-moving means.


CLS 83/733
TXT Device under subclass 401 in which the means to convey the work is
    restricted to rotate or oscillate around an axis which is stationary with
    respect to the zone of the cutter.


CLS 83/734
TXT Device under subclass 401 including a common mechanism to drive both the
    cutter-moving means and the work moving means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202+,   for a tool engaging work during a dwell.

    284+,   for a flying tool movement.

    350+,   for a timed stroke synchronized with the tool.


CLS 83/743
TXT Device under the class definition having means which engages a tool or tool
    support so as to define or limit the path (usually rectilinear) of movement
    of the tool, and means for attaching an element of the apparatus to the
    work to support or give additional support to the apparatus while the tool
    engages the work.

    (1)     Note.  For a listing of the subclasses in this class which include
    a clamping device, see section IX of the Class Definition and search notes
    for subclass 452, this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    454+,   for a tool guide means combined with, or peculiarly related to, a
    work clamp.

    761+    and 821+, respectively, for a passive tool guide which directly
    engages the tool or tool support, or a tool guide, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, appropriate subclasses and particularly subclasses 371+,
    for a cutting device with a work engaging member which remains stationary
    with respect to the work and which provides support for, or movement to,
    the cutter, but does not guide, or assist in guiding, the cutter.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 31+, for a tool driving
    device with means to engage the work to bear the weight of the drive means
    or resist the reactive force caused by the movement of the tool.

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 86+,
    for a work holder provided with a clamp.


CLS 83/744
TXT Device under subclass 743 in which the attaching means includes an
    elongated deformable member (e.g., cable, strap, series of articulated
    links) which conforms to a portion of the periphery of the work to affix it
    thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses and in particular subclass 212, for
    means for compressing material by rendering a flexible member taut around
    the material.

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 287+, for a holder which surrounds at
    least a portion of the work and substantially conforms to the outer
    periphery of the work.


CLS 83/745
TXT Device under subclass 743 in which the attaching means is so arranged that
    the tool engaging means, and any member utilized to support said engaging
    means are entirely supported against gravity by the work.


CLS 83/746
TXT Device under the class definition having a cutting tool comprising a member
    of substantial length having a work cutting edge extending along its
    length, said member being adapted to move such that each point along the
    elongated cutting edge has a component of motionto-and-fro and generally
    parallel to said work cutting edge, and including a means for supporting a
    means for supporting or guiding said cutter to move to and fro.

    (1)     Note.  In the definitions of the subclasses indented hereunder, the
    phrase "cutting span" will be used to designate that portion of the moving
    cutting edge which is transiently in engagement with the work.

    (2)     Note.  A device having means to guide a
    reciprocable-along-elongated-edge type tool while it moves toward and/or
    through the work (i.e., infeed) and which relates to a reciprocable type
    tool, is placed in subclasses 746+ rather than subclasses 821+, since these
    devices function to guide the tool during its basic movement (i.e.,
    to-and-fro reciprocations) and in addition, function to determine the
    direction of tool infeed movement and/or provide support for the tool.


CLS 83/747
TXT Device under subclass 746 provided with means which allows the tool to be
    oriented about an axis which is generally coextensive with the work-cutting
    edge, wherein the cutting edge can be oriented while the device is in
    operation.


CLS 83/748
TXT Device under subclass 746 provided with, (a) counterbalancing means to
    negate or neutralize the kinetic effect of the tool or (b) means to
    dissipate, or render less harmful, the vibrations or "jars" caused by the
    to-and-fro movements of the tool.


CLS 83/749
TXT Device under subclass 746 combined with one or more tools of the class type
    which are not of the reciprocable-along-elongated-edge type.


CLS 83/750
TXT Device under subclass 746 having means by which an addition, removal, or
    re-assembly of one or more of the parts of the device causes the device to
    become a cutting apparatus of the class type other than a
    "reciprocable-along-elongated-edge type".


CLS 83/751
TXT Device under subclass 746 including two or more cutting tools capable of
    to-and-fro movement.

    (1)     Note.  The cutting tools can be mounted on a single tool support
    (e.g., "gang saws") or upon separate tool supports and can be
    simultaneously usable or separately usable.


CLS 83/752
TXT Device under subclass 746 having means which absorbs part of the energy to
    move or assist in moving the tool in the opposite direction of said
    movement.


CLS 83/753
TXT Device under subclass 746 in which the tool has relative motion with
    respect to the device during (or between) the to-and-fro cutting movements
    in a direction having a component which is perpendicular to the cutting
    edge, and toward and through the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202+,   for a cutting device with means to bring the tool into cutting
    contact with the work during dwell of an intermittent workfeed.

    284+,   for a cutting device which includes means to move one or more tools
    into cutting engagement with the work while the work is moving through a
    cutting zone.

    483+,   for a movably mounted tool carrier for a rotatable disc-type tool.

    794+,   for a cutting device in which an endless flexible band-type tool is
    arranged to infeed.


CLS 83/754
TXT Device under subclass 753 provided with means ancillary to the tool or tool
    support for urging the tool to move toward and through the work or for
    checking or limiting the velocity with which the tool moves toward or
    through the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202+,   284+, (See "SEARCH THIS CLASS SUBCLASS:" of subclass 753).

    487+,   for a rotatable disc tool carrier with means to move said carrier
    during cutting.

    523+,   for means to apply a force to a tool to effect a cutting movement.

    800,    for a cutting device having an endless, flexible band type tool and
    means for promoting or regulating tool infeed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 141+, for means for causing
    movement of a tool into or along the length of the work.


CLS 83/755
TXT Device under subclass 754 in which the ancillary means includes or
    comprises an elastically deformable member which exerts a force on the tool
    or tool support.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is not the locus for a tool guide element that
    is resilient and constantly urged into contact with the tool or tool
    support, unless such contact is specifically for the purpose of retarding
    or promoting infeed.  Constantly-urged tool-contacting type guide structure
    may be found in subclasses 762+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223+,   for stored energy means for moving work or tool, which means is
    loaded by tool or work.

    314,    for a device having a resilient element which urged the tool toward
    a noncutting position.

    348,    for a device in which a first rotary tool cooperates with a second
    resiliently urged rotary tool.


CLS 83/756
TXT Device under subclass 754 in which the ancillary means has associated
    therewith means capable of modification or adjustment for effecting an
    increase or decrease in the velocity of infeed movement.

    (1)     Note.  The associated means may consist of means for varying the
    impetus of the auxiliary means on the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324,    for means to change the peripheral speed of a cutter blade which
    travels in a closed loop during a portion of the tool cycle.

    403.1,  for means to convey work relative to a tool station, combined with
    means to regulate work speed.

    617,    for means to vary force on or speed of tool during cutting stroke.

    800,    (See "SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:" of subclass 754).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 141+, for means for
    controlling the movement of a tool into or along work.


CLS 83/757
TXT Device under subclass 754 provided with means to cause to-and-fro tool
    motion in which the ancillary means is to be synchronized or interdependent
    with said to-and-fro motion causing means.


CLS 83/758
TXT Device under subclass 753 in which the tool has a to-and-fro movement along
    a straight line in addition to the infeed motion.


CLS 83/759
TXT Device under subclass 758 in which the tool infeed is effected by swinging
    the tool about a fixed point.


CLS 83/760
TXT Device under subclass 753 provided with means capable of stopping the
    motion of the tool toward or through the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    563+,   for means for moving or permitting movement of a tool, to a
    retracted or noncutting position.

    583+,   for a device wherein stored energy furnishes the force for the
    return stroke.

    587,    for a device wherein stored energy furnishes only the cutting force.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclass 156, for lock or brake means to
    inhibit or prevent a tool from infeeding.


CLS 83/761
TXT Device under subclass 753 provided with means operative, without
    application of power thereto, to engage the tool or tool support to define
    or limit the path of movement (i.e., to direct, wholly or partially the
    path) of the tool during infeed motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    441.1,  for passive tool guide means attached or operatively connected to
    means to guide moving work.

    454,    for tool guide means combined with or peculiarly related to work
    clamp.

    820,    for a device having an endless, flexible band type tool means to
    move said tool and special guide means for said tool.

    821+,   for a passive tool guide and various perfecting features for such
    guide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 286+, for a cutting tool provided with a guide.

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclasses 406+ and 409+, for elevator guiding devices.

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 7+ linear bearing; e.g., slide type, per se.


CLS 83/762
TXT Device under subclass 761 wherein the passive means comprises two or more
    elements which, have faces spaced apart for passage of a tool therebetween.


CLS 83/763
TXT Device under subclass 762 wherein the passive means is capable of
    permitting at least one guide element to be moved toward and away from the
    other to vary the spacing between the guide elements or the effective space
    for passage of the tool.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is not the locus for cutting devices having
    tool guide elements which are resilient and constantly urged toward one
    another. Such guide structure may be found in subclass 762.


CLS 83/764
TXT Device under subclass 762 provided with means permitting the tool guide
    element to be relocated or re-oriented with respect to the work or a work
    support means.


CLS 83/765
TXT Device under subclass 764 provided with two or more work support portions
    in which at least one portion thereof is capable of relative movement with
    respect to the other portion.

    (1)     Note.  The adjustment may result from the movement of the guide
    elements relative to the work support portions, or from the movement of one
    portion relative to the elements and other portion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 9+, for plural, selectively used work
    holders, and subclasses 37+, for plural holders for holding workpieces
    relative to one another.


CLS 83/766
TXT Device under subclass 764 provided with a work support surface, in which
    the relocating means permits the tool guide elements or work means to be
    turned about a line which extends generally parallel to the plane of the
    work support surface.


CLS 83/767
TXT Device under subclass 764 provided with a work support surface, in which
    the relocating means permits the tool guide elements or work support means
    to be turned about a line which extends generally perpendicular to the
    plane of the work support surface.


CLS 83/768
TXT Device under subclass 753 having means to cause the tool to follow a curved
    path.


CLS 83/769
TXT Device under subclass 753 in which the
    to-and-fro motion of the tool is effected about a point.


CLS 83/771
TXT Device under subclass 753 wherein the tool or tool support is supported by
    a to-and-fro moving carrying member including a shaft or pinlike device
    connected to the tool or tool support in a manner which permits the tool or
    tool support to turn freely there about.

    (1)     Note.  The tool or tool support is not supported by other machine
    structure during cutting but can be and normally is supported in part by
    the work or by the operator.

    (2)     Note.  The devices found herein are often referred to as "drag
    saws".

    (3)     Note.  The tool infeed motion is usually produced by the movement
    of the tool around the pivot as the cut progresses.


CLS 83/772
TXT Device under subclass 771 in which the tool carrying member moves the pivot
    through an orbital path during cutting.


CLS 83/773
TXT Device under subclass 771 in which the tool carrying member oscillates
    about a line.


CLS 83/774
TXT Device under subclass 773 in which the line about which the tool carrying
    member is oscillated also moves during cutting.


CLS 83/775
TXT Device under subclass 771 in which the tool carrying member reciprocates in
    a straight line.


CLS 83/776
TXT Device under subclass 746 wherein means are provided which give the cutting
    tool a continuous or discontinuous reciprocating or oscillating motion in
    addition to the to-and-fro motion along its cutting edge, both the
    additional motion and the to-and-fro motion being in a plane common to all
    the motions and to the cutting span.

    (1)     Note.  The "additional motion" referred to above must be
    distinguished from the tool infeed motion of subclasses 753+.  The
    "reciprocating motion" normally causes the tool to backfeed to separate the
    cutting edge from the work during a portion of theto-and-fro motion, and
    the "oscillating motion" normally causes the tool to rock during or between
    cutting strokes (for the purpose of removing waste material from the kerf,
    etc.).


CLS 83/777
TXT Device under subclass 776 in which the cutting tool is supported by two or
    more independent holding members, each of which members move to-and-fro
    about separate, spaced axes.


CLS 83/778
TXT Device under subclass 776 wherein the tool moves in a closed loop path in
    such a manner that the cutting edge is constantly maintained in parallel
    planes.


CLS 83/779
TXT Device under subclass 776 in which the reciprocating or oscillating motion
    includes movement of the tool about a line perpendicular to said plane
    while the tool is in cutting engagement with the work.


CLS 83/780
TXT Device under subclass 779 wherein the tool has a bearing portion adjacent
    one extremity thereof and said device is provided with elongated guide
    means supported so as to remain stationary during cutting, said guide means
    extending along the path of movement of said extremity of the tool and
    wherein said bearing portion engages said guide means to constrain said
    extremity to said path of movement.


CLS 83/781
TXT Device under subclass 746 including means to sustain the work against
    gravity, and means to permit re-orientation of the tool relative to said
    support means.


CLS 83/782
TXT Device under subclass 746 in which the tool is supported in such a manner
    that every point along the cutting edge reciprocates arcuately about a
    single stationary axis.


CLS 83/783
TXT Device under subclass 746 provided with means engaging the tool at each of
    its longitudinal extremities which means serve to sustain the tool against
    gravity.


CLS 83/784
TXT Device under subclass 783 in which energy to move the tool to-and-fro along
    its cutting edge is furnished at each of its longitudinal extremities
    either (a) simultaneously at each extremity or (b) alternately, first at
    one extremity and then the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    752,    for stored energy drive in one direction of movement only (e.g.,
    spring return type).


CLS 83/785
TXT Device under subclass 784 in which said
    tool-moving energy is furnished by wrapping, slipping, or passing a
    longitudinal extremity of the tool (or a flexible member attached to said
    extremity) over a wheel-like or circular member in such a manner that said
    extremity or flexible member is temporarily deformed (under the elastic
    limit) during tool movement.


CLS 83/786
TXT Device under subclass 784 in which each of the longitudinal extremities of
    the tool is connected to opposite ends of a substantially inflexible
    unitary frame, which frame is moved to-and-fro in a direction generally
    parallel to the cutting edge of the tool.


CLS 83/788
TXT Device under the class definition wherein the tool member comprises either
    a plurality of cutter elements pivotally interconnected one with another
    forming a closed loop, or a continuous strip of material forming a closed
    loop and having a substantially continuous cutting edge on at least one
    edge thereof, and wherein said cutting loop is supported so as to be
    adapted to move around the closed path defined by said loop during the
    cutting operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    871,    for splitting by use of an endless band or chain knife.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 380 and 381+, respectively, for
    hand-manipulable band saw and chain saw devices.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 202+ for a positive drive belt; and subclasses 237+ for a
    friction drive belt.


CLS 83/789
TXT Device under subclass 788 including means to cause the tool member to carry
    out a predetermined sequence of operations or to cut a predetermined
    configuration, in response to an indicia carrying element, which element
    can be modified or substituted prior to beginning operation of the machine.

    (1)     Note.  Simple pattern-following devices are included herein.


CLS 83/790
TXT Device under subclass 788 including a cutter of the class type that is not
    of the endlessly orbiting type.


CLS 83/792
TXT Device under subclass 788 comprising two "cutting spans" in mutual contact
    over a substantial extent of the closed loop path of a single tool or of
    the paths of two adjacent tools, the spans moving in directions counter to
    each other.


CLS 83/793
TXT Device under subclass 788 having means by which an addition, removal or
    reassembly of one or more of the parts of the device causes the device to
    become a cutting apparatus of the class other than an endlessly orbiting
    type cutter.


CLS 83/794
TXT Device under subclass 788 provided with means for moving or permitting
    movement of the "cutting edge" in a plane in which the cutting span lies
    and in a direction having a component perpendicular to the "cutting edge"
    and toward and through the work.

    (1)     Note.  The term "plane" as used in this definition, is a
    generalized one, inasmuch as devices are in this and the indented
    subclasses in which the cutting span moves in a "plane" which is the
    surface of an imaginary cylinder.


CLS 83/795
TXT Device under subclass 794 in which the cutter is mounted on a
    ground-traversing carriage having wheels, skids, or crawler tracks for
    supporting the weight of the apparatus for rendering its movement bodily
    from one place to another expeditiously.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    928,    for a cutting device of general utility mounted on a ground
    traversing vehicle.


CLS 83/796
TXT Device under subclass 794 in which the line representing the cutting span
    is moved or is permitted to move in a manner such that all points on the
    cutting span remain a fixed distance from a point.


CLS 83/797
TXT Device under subclass 796 wherein means are provided to change the plane in
    which the cutting span moves.


CLS 83/798
TXT Device under subclass 797 wherein the plane in which the cutting span moves
    is changed by rotating or swinging the cutter about a line lying in said
    original plane.


CLS 83/799
TXT Device under subclass 794 provided with means to permit the tool to be
    urged through the work only by gravitational attraction.


CLS 83/800
TXT Device under subclass 799 provided with means resisting the gravitational
    movement of the tool through the work, the resisting means being controlled
    by the valve-like effect of the flow of liquid or gaseous material, which
    flow is caused by the movement of the tool through the work.


CLS 83/801
TXT Device under subclass 794 wherein the moving means is actuated by a device
    that converts energy into motion.


CLS 83/802
TXT Device under subclass 788 including means to produce a perceptible visual
    manifestation of a condition of a part of the machine, or of a position or
    characteristic of the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    522,    for a device having a scale or indicator.


CLS 83/803
TXT Device under subclass 788 wherein the cutting of work is accomplished by
    two or more cutting spans.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    792,    for two contiguous cutting spans moving in directions counter to
    each other.


CLS 83/804
TXT Device under subclass 803 including means associated with the tool at each
    cutting span for varying the spacing between spans.


CLS 83/805
TXT Device under subclass 804 wherein the space varying means is a member
    pivoted about a fulcrum.


CLS 83/806
TXT Device under subclass 804 wherein the space varying means is a member
    having a helical rib thereon that is mated with a second member so that
    relative rotation between the members varies the spacing between cutting
    spans.


CLS 83/807
TXT Device under subclass 803 in which a projection of the path defined by the
    closed loop, on a plane perpendicular to the axes of the pulleys (about
    which the loop is wrapped), has the appearance of a closed loop which
    crosses itself.


CLS 83/808
TXT Device under subclass 803 wherein there are two or more band-knives having
    cutting spans.


CLS 83/809
TXT Device under subclass 788 including a work support surface and means to
    change the positional relationship of the band knife or band knife carrier
    relative to said surface.


CLS 83/810
TXT Device under subclass 809 provided with means to permit angular
    re-orientation of the cutting span plane relative to the work supporting
    surface plane.


CLS 83/811
TXT Device under subclass 810 in which the angular re-orientation of the
    cutting span is changed by rotating the band carrier relative to the work
    support surface.


CLS 83/812
TXT Devices under subclass 811 in which the band carrier is rotated about the
    line of crossing of the band-knife and the work support surface.


CLS 83/813
TXT Device under subclass 809 in which positional relationship between the
    plane of the cutting span and the plane of the work support surface is
    changed such that the distance between the cutting span and the work
    support surface is varied while maintaining the spatial orientation between
    the cutting span and the support surface.


CLS 83/814
TXT Device under subclass 788 provided with (a) means to adjust or increase the
    tension stress to which the closed loop tool is subjected or (b) means to
    prevent harm to the tool operator by undesired contact with the tool or to
    prevent damage to the tool by undesired contact with another machine part
    or work piece.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is the locus for devices with means to
    intercept the band when it departs from its normal course of travel to
    prevent the band from making undesired contact with some other element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    544+,   for tool drive or guide means provided with guard means.

    581.1,  for means to subject a tool to a force tending to cause extension
    of the tool.

    860,    for a cutting machine frame provided with guard means.


CLS 83/815
TXT Device under subclass 814 provided with a nondriving, tool-engaging,
    wheellike member, drum, or toothed wheel and means to impede the normal
    rotation of the member, drum, or wheel.


CLS 83/816
TXT Device under subclass 814 provided with two or more tool-engaging,
    wheel-like members and including means to adjust the relative spacing
    between the axes of said members.


CLS 83/817
TXT Device under subclass 816 including means to adjust the relative angle
    between said axes.


CLS 83/818
TXT Device under subclass 816 wherein a
    wheel-like member is continuously subjected to a force tending to move its
    axis.

    (1)     Note.  A weight acted on by gravity is considered to be a biasing
    force.


CLS 83/819
TXT Device under subclass 818 wherein the force tending to move the wheel-like
    member is a fluid or gaseous means.


CLS 83/820
TXT Device under subclass 788 provided with means to constrain the tool for
    motion in a path defining a cutting stroke or cycle.


CLS 83/821
TXT Device under subclass 523 having means to constrain the motion of a tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    820,    for a tool and guide means.


CLS 83/823
TXT Device under subclass 821 in which at least one of the tool constraining
    elements which contacts the tool or tool support is mounted in such a
    manner so as to be free to move with respect to another element or with
    respect to the machine frame during the cutting operation.


CLS 83/824
TXT Device under subclass 821 in which the
    tool-constraining means includes at least one rotatable element (e.g.,
    ball, roller, disc, etc.) which contacts the tool or tool support to reduce
    the resistance to motion of the tool, or in which at least a portion of the
    surface of thetool-constraining means is made of a material having
    friction-reducing characteristic (e.g., Teflon).


CLS 83/825
TXT Device under subclass 824 in which the rotatable element is a wheel-like
    member and includes, in addition to its cylindrical surface, at least one
    additional cylindrical planar or conical, circumferential surface which
    also contacts the tool so as to render said element capable of limiting
    tool movement in more than one direction.


CLS 83/826
TXT Device under subclass 824 in which the rotatable element is a wheel-like
    member having at least one planar or conical surface which contacts the
    tool or tool support, which element has an axis of rotation perpendicular
    to the planar surface or coextensive with the axis of the conical surface.


CLS 83/827
TXT Device under subclass 821 in which the tool constraining means includes two
    or more elements spaced apart for passage of the tool or tool support
    therebetween, wherein means are provided for permitting at least one of
    said elements to be moved in a direction substantially toward or away from
    the opposed element.


CLS 83/828
TXT Device under subclass 827 wherein the movement of one of said elements is
    along a straight line.


CLS 83/829
TXT Device under subclass 821 in which all tool contacting elements of the
    tool-constraining means may be moved (or relocated) in unison with respect
    to a discrete portion of the apparatus designed to remain stationary during
    cutting, e.g. machine frame.


CLS 83/830
TXT Device under the class definition comprising (a) a plurality of
    serially-connected cutting elements joined in a manner which permits each
    element to have movement relative to all other of said elements or (b) a
    cutting element for use in (a).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    788+,   for a cutting device which employs an endless band or chain knife.


CLS 83/831
TXT Device under subclass 830 wherein means are provided to permit the
    individual cutting elements to be nondestructively disconnected from the
    assemblage.


CLS 83/832
TXT Device under subclass 830 comprising a plurality of cutting elements of
    differing size or configuration.

    (1)     Note.  "Diverse cutter elements" does not include allochiral
    cutting teeth, unless combined with a tooth or element of another type.

    (2)     Note.  "Raker teeth" are considered to be cutting elements.


CLS 83/833
TXT Device under subclass 832 including means to limit the penetration of the
    cutting elements into the work.


CLS 83/834
TXT Device under subclass 830 including means to limit the penetration of the
    cutting elements into the work.


CLS 83/835
TXT Device under subclass 651 comprising (a) a member having a pair of
    relatively closely spaced, generally oppositely facing surfaces joined by a
    relatively narrow marginal surface and a cutter assemblage mounted or
    formed on said marginal surface throughout a substantial portion of its
    longitudinal extent, said cutter assemblage comprising a plurality of
    seriately arranged cutter elements each having a cutter edge; said device
    being used to produce a line of cut by movement along the longitudinal
    extent of said marginal surface, or (b) a cutter element or cutter
    assemblage disclosed for use in (a).


CLS 83/836
TXT Device under 835 provided with means permitting the location of a cutter
    element to be changed relative to the member.


CLS 83/837
TXT Device under subclass 835 provided with means, in addition to the seriately
    arranged cutter elements, which means performs another operation of the
    class type upon the work.

    (1)     Note.  In determining whether the cutting means is additional to,
    or part of the seriately arranged elements; the test is whether the cutting
    means extends to the margin of the blade; if it does it is not an
    additional element, but a part of the seriately arranged elements.


CLS 83/838
TXT Device under subclass 835 comprising two or more parts adapted to be
    nondestructively disconnected from each other.


CLS 83/839
TXT Device under subclass 838 in which an individual cutter element is adapted
    to be disconnected from the marginal surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    838,    for a device wherein the entire cutting edge is removable from the
    blade in a unitary piece, or a device wherein the tool is formed from a
    plurality of multi-toothed sections.


CLS 83/840
TXT Device under subclass 839 having securing means which engages both said
    cutter element and said member, serving to fasten them together, and is
    separable from both the cutter element and the member to which the cutter
    element is attached.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    698.11+,for joints and connections of general utility in cutting devices.

    845,    for teeth which have a spring formed from the same material as the
    tooth itself.


CLS 83/841
TXT Device under subclass 840 in which the securing means is moved in a plane
    perpendicular to the generally oppositely facing surfaces to connect or
    disconnect the cutter element from the marginal surfaces.


CLS 83/842
TXT Device under subclass 840 in which the securing means is rotatively moved
    to connect or disconnect the cutting element from the marginal surface.


CLS 83/843
TXT Device under subclass 842 in which separate means is provided to positively
    engage the securing means and prevent undesired movement thereof.


CLS 83/844
TXT Device under subclass 840 in which the securing means is moved in a
    straight line to connect or disconnect the cutting element from the
    marginal surface.


CLS 83/845
TXT Device under subclass 839 wherein the cutter element is connected or
    disconnected by changing its shape or shape of the member to which it is
    connected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    839,    for a device in which the tooth is connected to the blade by an
    independent spring element.


CLS 83/846
TXT Device under subclass 835 in which; (a) the configuration or size of the
    individual cutter elements, or (b) the distance between adjacent cutter
    elements, changes gradually and constantly throughout a substantial portion
    of the longitudinal extent of the cutter assemblage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    847,    for a series of teeth positioned in a wave-form pattern.

    851,    for a series of teeth of nonuniform variation.


CLS 83/847
TXT Device under subclass 835 wherein the cutter elements are positioned or
    sized such that a projection of the points of the cutter elements most
    remote from the marginal face onto a plane parallel to one of the
    oppositely facing surfaces of the device produces a series of points lying
    in a curvilinear, wavelike path.


CLS 83/848
TXT Device under subclass 835 in which a cutter assemblage comprises two or
    more sets of cutter elements, each set consisting of a plurality of
    equally-spaced cutter elements identical in size and configuration to one
    another.

    (1)     Note.  Cutting elements which are alike in all particulars, but are
    mirror images of one another are considered as being of "identical size and
    configuration".


CLS 83/849
TXT Device under subclass 848 wherein at least one of the sets consists of
    cutter elements having cutting edges inclined relative to the oppositely
    facing surfaces and lying in a plane which is perpendicular to the
    oppositely facing surfaces and parallel to the intended direction of
    movement.


CLS 83/850
TXT Device under subclass 848 wherein at least some of the sets are separated
    by a cutter element whose cutting edge is inclined relatively to the
    oppositely facing surfaces and lies in a plane which is perpendicular to
    the oppositely facing surfaces and parallel to the direction of intended
    movement.


CLS 83/851
TXT Device under subclass 835 wherein each cutter element of the cutter
    assemblage is of a size or configuration different than the next adjacent
    cutter element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    846,    for similar devices wherein the variation of the teeth varies
    uniformly.


CLS 83/852
TXT Device under subclass 835 wherein each cutter element of the assemblage is
    reversely congruent (i.e., mirror-image-like) relative to the next adjacent
    cutter element.


CLS 83/853
TXT Device under subclass 835 in which a projection upon a plane perpendicular
    to the oppositely facing surfaces of a substantial extent of the cutting
    edge of a tooth is a continuous line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    830+,   for a chain saw teeth having a similar occurrence of transversely
    curved cutting edge.


CLS 83/854
TXT Device under subclass 835 in which the cutter elements have a substantial
    length of cutting edge lying in a plane, all points of which are
    equidistant from one of the oppositely facing surfaces of the blade.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    837+,   for a device in which a side-mounted cutter element has a cutting
    edge extending parallel to the blade, e.g., "planar cutters".


CLS 83/855
TXT Device under subclass 835 wherein the cutter element has a cutting edge, a
    substantial portion of which lies in a straight line which intersects the
    oppositely facing surface at an angle of 90o.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    849,    for a device having a plurality of such teeth positioned in groups
    of two or more.


CLS 83/856
TXT Device under subclass 651 wherein the tool has no motion of its own during
    its cutting operation.


CLS 83/857
TXT Device under subclass 856 having one cutting edge in each of two
    intersecting planes or coplanar edges which intersect; e.g.,scissors-type
    cutting edges, or co-planar edges with tangents which intersect.


CLS 83/858
TXT Device under subclass 856 having two or more cutting edges which extend in
    nonintersecting planes.


CLS 83/859
TXT Device under the class definition including a structural unit or housing
    which provides an environment for a cutting tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 455+ for similar machine frames for
    metal deforming machines.

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclass for other machine frame structures.


CLS 83/860
TXT Device under subclass 859 wherein a portion of the housing serves to
    prevent harm to the machine operator or damage to the cutting tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    397+,   for interrelated tool actuating means and guard moving means.

    440.2,  for guards functioning as a work guide.

    478,    for a rotatable disc tool or tool and carrier having a guard
    associated therewith.

    544+,   for a driven tool and guard therefore.


CLS 83/861
TXT OTHER THAN COMPLETELY THROUGH WORK THICKNESS OR THROUGH WORK PRESENTED:

    Method or apparatus under the class definition utilizing a tool which:  (a)
    is disclosed as limited to engage operatively only one of the nonthickness
    work surfaces (and which may or may not engage operatively a thickness work
    surface), or (b) has operative (i.e., cutting) engagement with only a
    thickness face and which is constrained to an operative path lying between
    the nonthickness faces, or (c) has a tool stroke* in a single rectilinear
    path, which stroke fails to completely cut all the work lying before it in
    the direction of its cutting path (even though the resulting line of cut
    may extend entirely through the thickness of the work).

    (1)     Note.  A thickness surface is one along which the "work thickness"
    may be measured.  See the illustration below

    Illustration of the terms

    "Nonthickness Surface"



    "Thickness Surface"

    "Work Thickness Dimension"

    *See the Class Definition of terms.

    (2)     Note.  For a patent to be placed originally in this or indented
    subclasses, it is not required that the contemplated type of cutting be
    distinctly claimed.  It is sufficient that the claimed means be disclosed
    as functioning within the limitations above defined.

    (3)     Note.  Where the tool operates to produce a mere indentation or
    distortion of surface material (i.e., without severing the work surface
    fibers), as for instance, by creasing, forging, or metal rolling, or
    combines cutting with a significant material flow, as for instance in sheet
    forming and in plastic working, then the patent for such defined subject
    matter is excluded from this class and will be classified in other classes
    according to material worked on, type of operation performed, or machine
    disclosed.

    (4)     Note.  Where the disclosed apparatus is directed to subject matter
    as above defined but the claimed recitation is limited to a cutter, per se,
    then the patent for such is originally placed in a subclass of tools, per
    se (651+).

    (5)     Note.  Where a tool element penetrates partially through the
    thickness of a workpiece and thereafter continues to coact with an opposed
    tool element, which opposed tool element completes the severance of the
    workpiece in the cutting plane extended of the first tool, then the
    combined cut through the work is considered the same as the product of a
    single coacting tool pair and the patent directed to such subject matter is
    excluded from this subclass and those indented thereunder and will be found
    elsewhere in the schedule. However, if the first said tool is withdrawn
    from the workpiece before the complete severance occurs (i.e., no coaction
    occurs between said elements) then the first tool element is considered to
    be a scorer means and the opposed tool element a through cutter, and a
    patent disclosing same is placed as an original copy in this or indented
    subclasses.

    (6)     Note.  The main body of the class (subclasses 13+) always should be
    included in the search for a particular process, or apparatus, for cutting
    partially through the thickness of the work, which process or apparatus
    additionally may be applied to cutting entirely through the work thickness.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, appropriate subclasses for combined
    operations in making footwear including cutting other than through the
    thickness of the material; Class 101, Printing, subclasses 3+ for related
    art in specific manufactures.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, for cutting and/or scoring method or means
    relating to specific manufactures, particularly subclasses 9+ and 21.5 the
    generic loci of patents directed to apparatus and process, respectively,
    for splitting or skiving of leather.

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate
    die-pressing subclasses; e.g., subclasses 343+ for channeling, grooving, or
    partially penetrating with a punchlike tool

    101,    Printing, subclasses 3.1+ for related art in printing.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, appropriate subclasses for combined operations in
    making a product from a sheet or web including cutting other than through
    the thickness of the material.


CLS 83/862
TXT Combined types of cutting:

    Method or apparatus including a first cutting action under subclass 861
    combined with a second cutting action under the class definition wherein
    the first cutting action is separately classified from the second cutting
    action.


CLS 83/863
TXT Including use of rotary scoring blade:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 862 including use of a tool turning
    about an axis to incise work (without removing material) by either (a)
    penetration of a nonthickness surface, but to a depth insufficient to reach
    an opposite nonthickness surface, or (b) penetration of a thickness surface
    only to a depth insufficient to produce a lamina.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    886,    for scoring, per se, by a rotary blade.


CLS 83/864
TXT Plural independent rotary scoring blades:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 863 comprising use of a first cutting
    tool that is generally planar and circular in shape, adapted to rotate
    about an axis normal to the planar surface of the tool during cutting,
    including a cutting edge extending generally about the circular perimeter;
    and use of a second cutting tool that is also generally planar and circular
    in shape, adapted to rotate about an axis normal to the planar surface
    thereof during cutting, including a cutting edge extending generally about
    the circular perimeter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    884,    for apparatus including plural rotary scoring tools not in
    combination with additional cutting means.


CLS 83/865
TXT With infeeding of work:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 862 including the step of or means for
    causing the workpiece to move toward a tool to effect cutting of the
    workpiece.


CLS 83/866
TXT Pricking:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 861 wherein the tool utilized is pointed
    and functions to pierce (without removing material) a single work surface
    only, thus, forming a crater which generally conforms to the shape of the
    tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclasses 17 and 42 for a sole or heel
    pricking device in a shoe making machine.


CLS 83/867
TXT Including use of orbiting tool carrier:
    Method or apparatus under subclass 866 including use of structure to
    support the cutting tool against gravity and carry that tool in a fixed
    path that describes an endless loop.


CLS 83/868
TXT With infeeding of tool:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 866 including the step of or means for
    causing the tool to move toward a workpiece to effect the cutting of the
    workpiece.


CLS 83/869
TXT Edge trimming (e.g., chamfering, etc.):
    Method or apparatus under subclass 861 wherein the tool utilized functions
    to remove a portion of work defined by the junction areas of a thickness
    and a nonthickness face.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass is a patent for a process or
    apparatus for merely slitting such a junction area, as the operation of
    slitting itself is not considered to entail removal of a work portion.
    However, a patent may properly be placed herein where a plurality of
    slitters coact to remove a portion of edge material.

    (2)     Note.  In general, the patent of this subclass discloses removal of
    a work portion planarly by a single tool. However, a patent directed to the
    formation of an edge furrow or channel, by either a single tool or multiple
    tools, would be admitted to this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    875,    for a groover, broadly.

    879,    for a slitter, broadly.


CLS 83/870
TXT Splitting:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 861 wherein the tool utilized functions
    to penetrate a thickness work surface only and is constrained in its
    cutting stroke, or in its movement relative to the work to a path lying
    between the nonthickness work surfaces so as to define product laminae.

    (1)     Note.  It is not required that the tool proceed completely through
    the work, i.e., width and/or longitudinal extent. The requirement that
    laminae be produced is significant.

    (2)     Note.  The definition of the term "splitting" may be different in
    other arts; see, for instance, that relied on in Class 69, Leather
    Manufactures, subclass 9 wherein a cutting path parallel to the work
    surfaces is required.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    879,    for a cutting tool which enters a thickness face but fails to
    produce a lamina, as by merely cutting a groove.


CLS 83/871
TXT By use of endless band or chain knife:
    Process or apparatus under subclass 870 comprising use of (a) a cutting
    tool that is made of a continuous strip of material forming a closed loop
    and having a substantially continuous cutting edge on at least one edge
    thereof wherein said continuous strip cutting tool is supported to move
    along a closed path defined by said loop during cutting to present a
    different portion of the cutting edge to the workpiece without affecting
    the overall relationship of the cutting tool and the workpiece; or (b) a
    series of pivotally interconnected, sequentially acting cutting tools, each
    including a cutting edge arranged in a closed loop so that each of the
    tools follows a preceding cutting tool to cut in the manner of a continuous
    strip cutting tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    788,    for means for cutting, generally, by an endless or chain knife.

    872,    for similar cutting by a circular blade having a continuous cutting
    edge.


CLS 83/872
TXT By use of rotary blade:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 870 comprising use of a cutting tool
    that is generally planar and circular in shape, adapted to rotate about an
    axis normal to the planar surface of the cutting tool during cutting,
    including a cutting edge extending generally about the circular perimeter.


CLS 83/873
TXT Plural independent rotary blades:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 872 comprising use of a first cutting
    tool that is generally planar and circular in shape, adapted to rotate
    about an axis normal to the planar surface of the tool during cutting,
    including a cutting edge extending generally about the circular perimeter;
    and use of a second cutting tool that is also generally planar and circular
    in shape, adapted to rotate about an axis normal to the planar surface
    thereof during cutting, including a cutting edge extending generally about
    the circular perimeter.


CLS 83/874
TXT With infeeding of work:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 870 including the step of or means for
    causing the workpiece to move toward a tool to effect cutting of the
    workpiece.


CLS 83/875
TXT Grooving:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 861 including use of a tool comprising:
    (a) a unitary member which includes a gouge element, the member adapted to
    remove a section of the workpiece to define a furrow or channel; or (b)
    coacting slitter elements (with or without a cooperating gouge means) which
    coact to remove material and leave a channel as above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    869,    for grooving to trim an edge of a workpiece.

    917,    for a notching device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 288+ for a grooving
    device and see the note in this class (83) under the class definition,
    section III (I, 6, c).


CLS 83/876
TXT By use of plural independent rotary blades: Method or apparatus under
    subclass 875 comprising use of a first cutting tool that is generally
    planar and circular in shape, adapted to rotate about an axis normal to the
    planar surface of the tool during cutting, including a cutting edge
    extending generally about the circular perimeter; and use of a second
    cutting tool that is also generally planar and circular in shape, adapted
    to rotate about an axis normal to the planar surface thereof during
    cutting, including a cutting edge extending generally about the circular
    perimeter.


CLS 83/877
TXT Forming common groove:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 876 wherein the first cutting tool
    serves to form a portion of the groove, the second cutting tool serves to
    form a portion of the same groove, either simultaneously or sequentially.


CLS 83/878
TXT Blades turning about perpendicular axes:
    Method or apparatus under subclass 876 wherein the axes about which the
    cutting tools turn are normal to each other when viewed along the direction
    of relative infeed of the cutting tool and the workpiece.


CLS 83/879
TXT Scoring:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 861 including use of a tool to incise
    work (without removing material) by either (a) penetration of a
    nonthickness surface, but to a depth insufficient to reach an opposite
    nonthickness surface, or (b) penetration of a thickness surface only to a
    depth insufficient to produce a lamina.

    (1)     Note.  Annually scoring of a workpiece preparatory to breaking a
    hole therethrough is included in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 164.9+ for a hand tool or a work supported tool
    for scoring (or marking) material.

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 18.1+ for mechanically guided
    relatively travelling means to mark work in a predetermined pattern,
    including scratching or scoring, said subclasses have not been screened for
    patents fitting the definition of this subclass.

    125,    Stone Working, appropriate subclass for a scoring device disclosed
    as being adapted to mark natural material in or removed from the ground.

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, subclasses 96+ for an implement or
    machine for preliminarily weakening (as by scoring) and subsequently
    breaking a workpiece.

    451,    Abrading, for a scoring device wherein marking is done by the
    abrasive action of a natural cutting media (e.g., by the action of a
    nonartificially formed diamond tipped tool).

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 396+ for "scoring" of a sheet or web by
    deforming rather than by cutting.


CLS 83/880
TXT Processes:

    Method of scoring under subclass 879.


CLS 83/881
TXT Active means to control depth of score:
    Apparatus under subclass 879 wherein means are actuated to coact with such
    tool to limit the extend of penetration thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The term "actuated means", contemplates and requires more
    than a merely adjustable and otherwise fixed member.


CLS 83/882
TXT Serially:

    Apparatus under subclass 879 wherein means are provided to score
    sequentially, a single workpiece, by either the same or multiple tools.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    881,    for repetitive and alternative cutting and scoring by the same tool.


CLS 83/883
TXT Plural independent scoring blades:
    Apparatus under subclass 879 including a first incising tool and a second,
    separately supported, incising tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    869     and 875+, for grooving by coacting plural tools.

    882,    for plural scorers operated sequentially.


CLS 83/884
TXT Rotary scoring blades:

    Apparatus under subclass 883 comprising a first cutting tool that is
    generally planar and circular in shape, adapted to rotate about an axis
    normal to the planar surface of the tool during cutting, including a
    cutting edge extending generally about the circular perimeter; and a second
    cutting tool that is also generally planar and circular in shape, adapted
    to rotate about an axis normal to the planar surface thereof during
    cutting, including a cutting edge extending generally about the circular
    perimeter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    864,    for the method or apparatus for cutting by plural rotary cutting
    tools combined with additional cutting of a different type.


CLS 83/885
TXT On opposite sides of work:

    Apparatus under subclass 884 wherein the first cutting tool serves to
    incise a first surface of the workpiece and the second cutting tool serves
    to incise the workpiece from the surface thereof that is directly across
    the workpiece from the first surface, so that the cutting action of the
    first tool approaches the second tool and the cutting action of the second
    tool approaches the first tool.


CLS 83/886
TXT Rotary scoring blade:

    Apparatus under subclass 879 wherein the incising tool is adapted to turn
    about an axis during the cutting operation.


CLS 83/887
TXT With means to rotate blade:

    Apparatus under subclass 886 including means other than the workpiece to
    engage the cutting tool and cause the tool to rotate.

               CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS

    The following subclasses are collections of published disclosures
    pertaining to various specified aspects of the cutting art which aspects do
    not form appropriate bases for subclasses in the foregoing classification
    (i.e., subclasses superior hereto in the schedule), wherein original copies
    of patents are placed on the basis of proximate function of the apparatus.
    These subclasses assist a search based on remote function of the apparatus
    and may be of further assistance to the searcher, either as a starting
    point in searching this class or as an indication of further related fields
    of search inside or outside the class.  Thus, there is here provided a
    second access for retrieval of a limited number of types of disclosures.

    (1)     Note.  Disclosures are placed in these subclasses for their value
    as references and as leads to appropriate main or secondary fields of
    search, without regard to their original classification or their claimed
    subject matter.

    (2)     Note.  The disclosures found in the following subclasses are
    examples, only, of the indicated subject matter, and in no instance do they
    represent the entire extent of the prior art.


CLS 83/901
TXT Cutting blanks from web material for use as collars.


CLS 83/902
TXT A cutting device mounted on and driven by or in timed relation to a machine
    which is not of the cutting type.

    (1)     Note.  A disclosure of an attachment for cutting up waste product
    from a cutting machine is found in subclass 923.  The attachments disclosed
    in publications of this subclass (902) serve other purposes, such as
    performing a cutting operation on work before, during, or subsequent to its
    processing in the principal machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    923,    for waste product cutting; and see (1) Note, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 122+, for a trimmer combined with a sewing
    machine; and subclasses 285-301, for a thread cutter combined with a sewing
    machine.


CLS 83/903
TXT Severing excess material (flash, etc.) from a cast grid for a storage
    battery, usually in one operation by appropriately formed shearing dies.

    (1)     Note.  Battery grid trimming is usually a typical die-cutting
    operation, characterized by special facilities for handling the work and
    product rapidly and efficiently by making use of projecting lugs on the
    double-grid castings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    268,    for disclosures of machine in which work slides by gravity against
    a gauge or stop in the tool zone.

    914,    for flash trimming in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 2, for battery grid making.


CLS 83/904
TXT Cutting a thumb index notch or overlapping cutout portions of different
    extents in the edges of book pages.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    917,    for notching in general.


CLS 83/905
TXT Cutting a closed-end slit or slot in flexible material for use as a button
    hole.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 65+ for buttonhole making in general.


CLS 83/906
TXT Cutting solid material into shreds, flakes, pellets, or dice of fairly
    uniform shape and size.

    (1)     Note.  This process is often termed "pelletizing".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 4.51+ for shredding metal; e.g., metal
    wool making.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses, for comminution in general.


CLS 83/907
TXT Severing wire while it is in the form of a substantially helical coil;
    e.g., cutting coil springs to length.

    (1)     Note.  The peculiar problems involved in feeding, gauging, holding,
    and cutting the wire in coiled form tend to impart special characteristics
    to these machines not found in straight wire cutters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    140,    Wireworking, appropriate subclasses, for cutting coiled wire
    combined with other article-manufacturing step(s).


CLS 83/908
TXT Producing an article having salient portions, by cutting away the waste
    portions therebetween.

    (1)     Note.  The articles are often produced in pairs, the waste from one
    article being left intact to constitute the salient portions of the other
    article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, appropriate subclasses, for manufacture of toothed
    metallic articles.

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, appropriate subclasses, for saw
    blade making.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 1+ for gear cutting,
    generally.


CLS 83/909
TXT Severing a filament (thread, wire, etc.) which projects from or is attached
    to an article.

    (1)     Note.  Device disclosed as cutting thread to strip a bobbin is
    found in Class 28, Textiles:  Manufacturing subclass 295.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, appropriate subclasses, for a thread or string cutter.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 19 and 48 for a
    disclosure of cutting a strand following the operation of winding it on a
    holder.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    subclasses 23+ for a disclosure of severing surplus lead wire from the base
    of a lamp bulb or discharge tube, combined with other operation(s).


CLS 83/910
TXT Severing surplus base fabric extending beyond the limits or contour of an
    embroidered design.

    (1)     Note.  This operation is analogous to flash trimming, for which
    search subclass 914, but is often accomplished by incidental distortion of
    the material, a feature not found in trimming solid objects such as rubber
    heels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    914,    for flash trimming, generally.


CLS 83/911
TXT Performing die cutting, or a succession of cutting and notching operations,
    to produce a flat piece of paper of suitable contour for later folding and
    gluing into envelope form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300     and 303, for an envelope blank cutter of the flying type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 186+ for an envelope machine in general.


CLS 83/912
TXT Cutting through an envelope adjacent one edge thereof so as to gain access
    to its contents without damaging them.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    418,    for an envelope opener provided with a work locator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, appropriate subclasses, for an envelope opening device
    with movable cutting blade.


CLS 83/913
TXT Cutting a continuous filament or rope of filaments into predetermined short
    lengths (preparatory to spinning into yarn, or other textile operation).

    (1)     Note.  The staple length may be constant; or the machine may be
    designed to produce periodically fluctuating lengths, or graduated lengths
    within a predetermined range.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403,    for a Beria-type cutter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses .3+ for continuous
    "tow-to-top" stabilizing method or means; or for staple fiber producing
    method or means combined with a mechanical textile process or apparatus.


CLS 83/914
TXT Severing the flash, fin, sprue or other excess material from a cast, forged
    or molded article.

    (1)     Note.  The flash trimming operation may be carried out by
    "recutting" the article in a finishing die; or the article may be
    manipulated or moved in proximity to a relatively small cutting tool
    equipped with a work guide to protect the finished edge of the work (for
    which, see subclass 445).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    445,    and see (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclass 29 for means for
    trimming flash from a chain link.


CLS 83/915
TXT Severing animal pelts.

    (1)     Note.  Fur cutters often are characterized by the provision of
    specialwork-holding means, such as impaling or gripping pins, and devices
    to hold the hair out of the path of the moving tool.  Frequently, the cut
    is made along a zigzag line (see subclass 918, pinking).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333,    for a pinking wheel.

    374+    and 451+, for work-immobilizer other than a clamp (e.g., impaling
    pin(s), or suction gripper).

    918,    for pinking in general, and see (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    69,     Leather Manufactures, appropriate subclasses, for a fur working
    method or apparatus, in general.


CLS 83/915.3
TXT Machines for cutting larger masses of ice into smaller blocks or cubes.


CLS 83/915.5
TXT Cutting thin sections, usually of organic tissue, for microscopic
    examination.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170,    for a device having means to modify the temperature of a part of
    the device or the work.

    401,    for a device having means to move the work to and/or against the
    tool.

    409+,   for a device having means to hold the work on a work carrier which
    moves the work to and/or against the tool.

    699.51, for a device having means to adjustably hold the tool.


CLS 83/916
TXT Severing work along a desired line of cut by means of successive
    overlapping notches with relative movement between the work and tool
    between each notching cut.

    (1)     Note.  Work may be severed along a desired line of cut by means of
    overlapping slitting cuts, without removal of material.  Disclosures of
    machines for doing work of this slitting type may be found, together with
    nibbling machines, in subclass 237.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237     and 249, for nibbling machine of the subclass 202 type.

    556+,   for tool positioning means synchronized with cutting stroke (such
    tool may make overlapping cuts on stationary workpiece).

    565,    for template-surface-following tool.

    917     and associated search notes, for   notching.


CLS 83/917
TXT Cutting one or more products from one edge of a workpiece, leaving portions
    of the original edge intact.

    (1)     Note.  A notch is a nonlinear cut through the thickness of a
    workpiece, extending inwardly from one edge of the workpiece and returning
    to the same edge.

    (2)     Note.  The notch may be cut in an exterior or an interior edge of
    work.

    (3)     Note.  The severing of work along a desired line of cut by a
    succession of overlapping notches is called "nibbling", for which see
    subclass 916 of this class; or, if done in the form of a nonlinear
    repetitive pattern which leaves none of the original edge intact, is called
    "pinking" or "scalloping", for which see subclass 918.

    (4)     Note.  Key cutters (notchers) are found here, rather than in
    subclass 908.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    651+,   for a notching tool, per se.

    904,    908, 916, 918, for other disclosures of notching or similar
    operations.

    911,    for notching associated with envelope blank forming.

    926,    for fringing or slashing (no product removed), or corner cutting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, for a notching implement.

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), subclasses 47+, for a
    selectivecard-notching device.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 1+ for gear cutting,
    generally.


CLS 83/918
TXT Severing work into two products by a nonlinear, generally zigzag,
    repetitive pattern cut upon a portion of the work other than its edge.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes scalloping, and is not restricted to
    cutting any particular work (such as textile fabric).

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note, in subclass 917, supra.  Pinking does not
    include the severance, from an edge of the work, of one or more generally
    triangular pieces so as to leave a recognizable part of the original edge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333,    for a pinking wheel.

    904,    915, 917, for a notching operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, for a pinking implement (shears).


CLS 83/919
TXT Cutting a small piece, or sample, from a workpiece which may be stationary,
    in motion, or undergoing treatment in some stage of a manufacturing process.

    (1)     Note.  Some cutting machines are capable of taking samples by
    modification of their normal cutting cycle, when desired, by intervention
    of the operator.  (See subclass 57).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for cyclic operation disturbed by manually actuated means; and see
    (1) Note, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 421+ for a sampler or toller in
    general.


CLS 83/920
TXT Cutting roofing shingles from a web of composition material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300     and 303, for flying-type shingle cutter.

    704+,   for a wood-shingle cutting device wherein the work is moved in two
    directions along a path parallel in to the plane of cut and in a direction
    transverse to the plane of cut.


CLS 83/921
TXT Means for cutting continuous slide fastener stock to desired length and/or
    gapping the product, i.e., cutting away the lugs or stringer scoops in
    certain areas.

    (1)     Note.  Gapping is the removal of lugs or fastener elements from the
    tape throughout a desired area, to facilitate subsequent sewing of the tape
    to fabric or articles of clothing. It is usually accomplished by shearing
    through the lugs and brushing the remnants loose from the tape.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 33.2 and 408+, for slide fastener
    manufacturing.


CLS 83/922
TXT Cutting of sticky or tacky material, usually in tape form.

    (1)     Note.  The web-contacting parts of a tacky web handling machine are
    usually of special design to facilitate passage of the web through the
    machine, without sticking or jamming or the accumulation of adhesive on the
    machine parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for method of handling a tacky product after cutting.

    276,    for a work-feed element which contacts and moves with work (which
    work may comprise tacky tape).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclasses 24, 25 and 57, for a device for severing a tacky
    tape by tearing or breaking.


CLS 83/923
TXT Cutting up the scrap or undesired portion of the product of a cutting or
    other treating machine as to facilitate its storage or disposal.

    (1)     Note.  The scrap cutter may consist of a more or less complete
    cutting machine attached to and driven with or by the principal machine, or
    it may be merely one or more cutting elements added to an actuated tool of
    the machine, to cut up the scrap simultaneously with formation of the
    desired product.

    (2)     Note.  The term "waste product" refers to a by-product in process
    of being turned out by a treating machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    906,    for a disclosure relating to chip or particle making.


CLS 83/924
TXT Cutting work presented in the form of a coil, coating, or layer surrounding
    a central element which is to be left uncut.

    (1)     Note.  Examples:  wire insulation stripper, cable sheath cutter,
    means to cut wire hood holder on milk bottle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    909,    for cutting a strand extending from a package or support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles: Manufacturing, subclasses 292+ for bobbin strippers, in
    general.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, appropriate subclasses, for
    winding and cutting the so wound material.


CLS 83/927
TXT Device for cutting, scoring, or grooving a printer's rule in the
    manufacture thereof.


CLS 83/928
TXT A cutting tool carrier which is supported on a conveyance which is driven
    or traversed over the ground or other horizontal surface to the location
    where the tool is to be used.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 379 for a vehicle mounted saw wherein the saw
    support and vehicle are moved together randomly with respect to work during
    cutting; and subclass 379.5 for a vehicle mounted saw wherein the saw
    support structure moves relatively to the vehicle and randomly relatively
    to the work during cutting.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 34.1+ for cutting structure that is vehicle
    mounted and is combined with means such as a tree pusher to assist the
    cutter operation in tree felling.


CLS 83/929
TXT PARTICULAR NATURE OF WORK OR PRODUCT:

    Performing a cutting operation (1) on work which possesses unusual or
    unique characteristic, or (2) producing a product having an unusual or
    unique characteristic.

    (1)     Note.  A disclosure may be placed in this subclass because of:  (1)
    an unusual feature of the machine adapting it to handle a particular kind
    of work, or (2) unusual or particular work, per se,  (e.g., a germanium
    wafer for transistor manufacture, or a banknote voided by a cutting action).


CLS 83/929.1
TXT Printed circuit board:
    A collection of art under subclass 929 relating to cutting or punching of a
    generally planar sheet on which an integral electrical conductor has been,
    or is intended to be, provided.


CLS 83/929.2
TXT Electrical component lead trimming:
    A collection of art under subclass 929 relating to cutting an external
    conductor of an electrical circuit element (e.g., a resistor, a capacitor,
    a transistor, etc.).


CLS 83/930
TXT Radioactive:

    Performing a cutting operation under subclass 929, wherein the work or
    product radiates alpha or beta particles.

    (1)     Note.  The material of this subclass commonly comprises spent
    nuclear fuel rods.


CLS 83/931
TXT Tobacco:

    Performing a cutting operation under subclass 929, wherein the work or
    product is tobacco or tobaccolike material.


CLS 83/932
TXT Edible:

    Performing a cutting operation under subclass 929, wherein the work or
    product is suitable for consumption by a man or an animal.

    (1)     Note.  Chewing gum is considered to be "edible".


CLS 83/933
TXT Book, being destroyed; e.g., cover being cut away:

    Performing a cutting operation under subclass 929, wherein the work is an
    assembly of sheets of paper and is reduced by the cutting operation to a
    different form.


CLS 83/934
TXT Book, being made; e.g., trimming a signature:   Performing a cutting
    operation under subclass 929, wherein the work comprises sheets of paper
    being cut, as part of assembling or otherwise forming an assembly of the
    sheets for subsequent viewing.

    (1)     Note.  Cutting performed during rebinding a book is included herein.


CLS 83/935
TXT Endless band:

    Performing a cutting operation under subclass 929, wherein the work or
    product is doubled  back on itself so that it has no beginning and no end.

    (1)     Note.  The work may comprise a tube which is cut perpendicularly to
    its axial extent to form an endless band.


CLS 83/936
TXT Cloth or leather:

    Performing a cutting operation under subclass 929 wherein the work or
    product is woven from strands or is made of cured animal skin.

    (1)     Note.  Cutting a shoe heel, sole or upper is included in this art
    collection and those indented hereunder, even if the heel, sole or upper is
    made of material other than cloth or leather.


CLS 83/937
TXT From continuous or wound supply:

    Performing a cutting operation under subclass 936 including means to supply
    work such that there is no recognized terminal end of the work; or
    including means to advance the lead end of a coil of work.


CLS 83/938
TXT Moving cloth or leather:

    Performing a cutting operation under subclass 936 including provision to
    allow movement of the work during the cutting operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    952,    for similar structure, wherein the work is not restricted to cloth
    or leather.


CLS 83/939
TXT With work support:

    Performing a cutting operation under subclass 936 including means to hold
    the work against the force of gravity during the cutting operation.

    (1)     Note.  Cutting a shoe heel, sole or upper is included in this art
    collection and those indented hereunder, even if the heel, sole or upper is
    made of material other than cloth or leather.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    953,    for similar art collection wherein the work is not limited to cloth
    or leather.


CLS 83/940
TXT Cutter moves along bar, bar moves perpendicularly:

    Performing a cutting operation under subclass 939 including an elongated
    member to support the cutting tool with provision to allow movement of the
    cutting tool there along, and including means to support the elongated
    member with provision to allow movement of the elongated member at a right
    angle with respect to its elongated extent.


CLS 83/941
TXT Work support comprising penetratable bed:

    Performing a cutting operation under subclass 940 wherein the means to hold
    the work against the force of gravity is made of material that can be
    readily entered by the cutting tool, without damage to that material.


CLS 83/942
TXT Contact pin of electrical component:

    Performing a cutting operation under subclass 929 wherein the material
    being cut comprises an assembly for transmission and utilization of
    electrical energy which assembly has an elongated connection terminal which
    is trimmed.


CLS 83/943
TXT Pallet:

    Performing a cutting operation under subclass 929 wherein the material
    being cut comprises an assembly made for support of material above a
    subordinate supporting surface, the cutting operation comprising severing
    one component of the assembly from another.


CLS 83/944
TXT Syringe needle:

    Performing a cutting operation under subclass 929 wherein the work
    comprises a tubular rod previously intended for penetration of skin to
    transmit fluid there beneath.


CLS 83/945
TXT Separating connected articles:

    Performing a cutting operation under subclass 929 wherein the work
    comprises a web carrying a series of distinct elements (usually similar
    elements) comprising cutting the web to allow one of the elements to be
    moved away from another.


CLS 83/946
TXT Container:

    Performing a cutting operation under subclass 929 wherein the work or
    product includes a chamber intended for storage of material.

    (1)     Note.  A land or water vessel, or building is not considered to be
    a container for placement herein.


CLS 83/947
TXT Insulation about wire:

    Performing a cutting operation under subclass 929 wherein the work
    comprises a nonconductive sheath encasing a conductive strand comprising
    cutting the sheath without cutting the strand.


CLS 83/948
TXT Having "memory"; e.g., photographic or magnetic film:

    Performing a cutting operation under subclass 929 wherein the work or
    product is intended to be coated or otherwise modified to store information
    thereon.


CLS 83/949
TXT Continuous or wound supply:

    Performing a cutting operation under subclass 929 including means to supply
    work such that there is no recognized terminal end of the work, or
    including means to advance the lead end of a coil of work.


CLS 83/950
TXT Strandlike:

    Performing a cutting operation under subclass 949 wherein the work or
    product is generally elongated and round in cross-section.


CLS 83/951
TXT Rubber tire:

    Performing a cutting operation under subclass 929 wherein the work
    comprises an annular polymeric member for fitting about a wheel and
    carrying a load.


CLS 83/952
TXT Moving work:

    Performing a cutting operation under subclass 929 including provision to
    allow movement of the material being cut during the cutting operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    938,    for a similar collection wherein the material is cloth or leather.


CLS 83/953
TXT With work support:

    Performing a cutting operation under subclass 929 including means to hold
    the material being cut against the force of gravity during the cutting
    operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    939+,   for similar art collection wherein the work material is cloth or
    leather.


CLS 83/954
TXT KNIFE CHANGING:

    Performing a cutting operation including provision to allow replacement of
    the component having a sharp cutting edge.


CLS 83/955
TXT CUTTER EDGE SHIFTABLE TO PRESENT DIFFERENT PORTION OF EDGE:

    Performing a cutting operation including provision to allow repositioning
    of the component having a sharp cutting edge to utilize a previously unused
    portion thereof.


CLS 83/956
TXT ULTRASONIC:
    A collection of art relating to cutting by use of high frequency energy.

    (1)     Note. These frequencies are generally considered to be greater than
    the highest frequency discernible to the human ear.

    FOREIGN ART COLLECTIONS

    The definitions for FOR 100 - FOR 102 below conrespond to the definitions
    of the abolished subclasses under Class 83 from which these collections
    were formed.  See the Foreign Art Collection schedule for specific
    correspondences.  [Note: the titles and definitions for indented art
    collections include all the details of the one(s) that are hierarchically
    superior.]


CLS 83/FOR100
TXT Foreign art collection wherein the work moving means is of rigid
    construction and is adapted to support the work against gravity and which
    support moves relative to the tool station in a fixed rectilinear path.


CLS 83/FOR101
TXT Foreign art collection in which the work-moving means itself moves
    in the arc of a circle in peripheral engagement with the work, thereby
    moving the work in a straight path.


CLS 83/FOR102
TXT Foreign art collection in which the work-moving means itself moves
    in a straight line while in engagement with the work.


CLS 84/
TTL MUSIC

CLS 84/
TXT This class includes the instruments used in producing music and includes
    (1) electrical music instruments, (2) automatic instruments, and (3) those
    hand played.  The automatic instruments and the hand played instruments
    have a parallel classification so far as seems practical, and in both the
    patents are divided in the usual way into four groups, stringed, wind,
    rigid vibrators, and membranes.  Then follow details or features common to
    groups (1), (2), and (3). This class also includes some accessory devices
    generally recognized as belonging to the art or industry.

    (1)     Note.  Instruments furnishing a sound of only one pitch, even if it
    might be used for musical purposes, are generally to be found in Class 116,
    Signals and Indicators, Class 446, Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses
    207+ and 397+, Class 472, Amusement Devices, subclass 64 or Class 623,
    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof or Aids and
    Accessories Therefor, subclass 9 for larynxes.

    (2)     Note.  Phonographs, unless in combination with a recognized musical
    instrument, are to be searched for in Class 369, Dynamic Information
    Storage or Retrieval.

    (3)     Note.  Printed Music and systems of notation are to be found in
    Class 84 (this class), Music, subclass 483.2

    (4)     Note.  Bellows and wind flow regulators, unless specifically
    adapted to musical instruments are to be found in Class 60, Power Plants,
    subclasses 407+, Class 91, Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type; Class 92,
    Expansible Chamber Devices and Class 417, Pumps.

    (5)     Note.  Many features of construction or manufacture should be
    sought for in woodworking or metal-working and many details not limited to
    this art in appropriate classes, as pedals, supports, clamps, cases,
    springs, etc.

    (6)     Note.  For instrument supports of general application not claimed
    in combination with musical instruments or structurally limited to use with
    specific musical instruments, see Class 248, Supports, appropriate
    subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclass
    118 for amplifying and reproducing the sounds of musical instruments.

    984,    Musical Instruments, an alternative search of the type of subject
    matter generally found in Class 84 may also be found in Class 984 which is
    based on a modification of the European Patent Office.


CLS 84/1
TXT Patents under the class definition not classified in any of the subclasses
    below.


CLS 84/2
TXT The instrument includes two sets of sounding-bodies which belong to
    different groups, as specified above.

    (1)     Note.  Drums, chimes, etc., used as attachments to pianos belong
    here or in subclass 3 or subclass 6.


CLS 84/3
TXT The instruments have electric circuits.


CLS 84/4
TXT A piano or other accompaniment is provided for a phonograph cylinder or
    disk.

    (1)     Note.  Continue the search in subclass 1.02 of this class.

    (2)     Note.  For synchronizing a sound-producer with a cinematograph see
    Class 352, Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 12+.


CLS 84/5
TXT The synchronizing devices include electric circuits.


CLS 84/6
TXT The sounding-bodies of one or both sets are operated by player-pneumatics.


CLS 84/7
TXT String-playing devices not belonging in a specific subclass.


CLS 84/8
TXT Self-playing banjos, mandolins, zithers, etc., often with fingering devices
    and pneumatic mechanism.


CLS 84/9
TXT The instruments have electric circuits.


CLS 84/10
TXT Self-playing violins, usually with fingering or stopping devices, sometimes
    with pneumatic mechanism.


CLS 84/11
TXT The instruments have electric circuits.


CLS 84/12
TXT Stringed instruments of various types with strikers, sometimes operated by
    pneumatics.


CLS 84/13
TXT Patents for the complete instrument or for features not specific to a
    subclass below.

    (1)     Note.  For players readily removable from the piano and applicable
    also to a reed-organ keyboard see this class, subclasses 105 to 114.

    (2)     Note.  If the invention is limited to features of the selecting
    mechanism, see this class, subclass 115 and the indented subclasses.


CLS 84/14
TXT Instruments of the piano type for automatic playing exclusively.


CLS 84/15
TXT Automatic pianos having the strings in two narrow sets.


CLS 84/16
TXT The blow is struck by power derived from a rotating shaft or other
    constantly- operating source.


CLS 84/17
TXT The connections between the source of power and the strikers are controlled
    electrically.


CLS 84/18
TXT The power acts directly on the keys.  Most of the patents here and in the
    preceding subclass are of the roller-and-shoe type.


CLS 84/19
TXT The power is derived from a source of electricity.


CLS 84/20
TXT The power acts on the keys.


CLS 84/21
TXT These patents include means for varying the force of the blow, usually
    electric resistances.


CLS 84/22
TXT Expression is secured by varying the voltage.


CLS 84/23
TXT Devices similar to those of subclass 21, but the piano-key is not involved.


CLS 84/24
TXT This is the common type of player-piano. The blows are caused by small
    bellows called "striker-pneumatics", one to each hammer.  The patents
    generally disclose a complete mechanism and often claim details of
    selecting mechanism as well as the playing mechanism.


CLS 84/25
TXT Like the preceding subclass except that the striker-pneumatic acts on the
    key.

    (1)     Note.  For this feature see also this class, subclass 105 and
    indented subclasses.


CLS 84/26
TXT Patents showing a pneumatic action built into a grand piano.


CLS 84/27
TXT Patents claiming novelty in the connections from the pneumatics to the
    grand-piano action.


CLS 84/28
TXT Limited to patents in which the claims in terms or in substance require the
    striker-pneumatics to be above the keyboard.


CLS 84/29
TXT Similarly limited to cases having the pneumatics below the keyboard.


CLS 84/30
TXT Patents in which the parts are fitted into the piano in a novel way or are
    located in unusual positions.

    (1)     Note.  If only the tracker-box location is novel, see this class,
    subclass 116.


CLS 84/31
TXT The tracker has two sets of rows of note perforations, both normally in use
    to obtain expression.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 146, 148 and 152.


CLS 84/32
TXT The two rows are in the same line, so that the tracker is longer than usual.


CLS 84/33
TXT Miscellaneous devices for giving expression to the music.

    (1)     Note.  In the art the term "expression" usually refers only to
    controlling the force of the blow.  For tempo control see this class,
    subclass 128, etc.


CLS 84/34
TXT The pedals or other parts of the piano are moved for expression.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 216 to 224.


CLS 84/35
TXT The hammer rest-rail is shifted, usually in sections and without depressing
    the pedal.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 219, etc.


CLS 84/36
TXT Normally the hammers are in position for pianissimo effect.


CLS 84/37
TXT The rest-rail is automatically shifted as the wind-pressure in the
    reservoir varies.


CLS 84/38
TXT The ends of the rest-rail may move through unequal distances, so the
    musical effect is graduated from bass to treble.


CLS 84/39
TXT The pressure of wind supplied to some or all of the striker-pneumatics is
    varied to obtain accent.


CLS 84/40
TXT The variation is due to a change in the pumping.


CLS 84/41
TXT The variation is due to a change in the cross-section of the wind-passage.


CLS 84/42
TXT The variation is due to the action of a variable chamber additional to the
    reservoir.


CLS 84/43
TXT The variation is due to the alternate use of two wind-chambers holding air,
    respectively, at high and low tension.


CLS 84/44
TXT There are two striker-pneumatics for each note, one or both of which may be
    used.


CLS 84/45
TXT The movement of the striker-pneumatic may be retarded by another pneumatic.


CLS 84/46
TXT The fulcrum of a lever is shiftable or the connections between the
    pneumatic and the hammer are otherwise varied.


CLS 84/47
TXT The force of the blow is systematically or periodically varied
    independently of the hand-controllers or note-sheet.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 157.


CLS 84/48
TXT Pneumatic details limited to parts of the expression mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 50 for similar constructions which
    do not have this limitation.


CLS 84/49
TXT Levers or buttons for controlling expression.  The patents generally show
    also tempo-controllers.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 164 and 169.


CLS 84/50
TXT Improvements in the controlling parts between the reservoir and the
    striker-pneumatics.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 48, the patents in which are
    limited to expression mechanism, and 79, which does not include
    controlling-pneumatics.


CLS 84/51
TXT The pneumatic train includes both primary and secondary valves, sometimes
    called the "double-valve system".


CLS 84/52
TXT The lower leaf of the striker-pneumatic is the movable one.


CLS 84/53
TXT Like the preceding subclass except that there is no secondary valve.


CLS 84/54
TXT The striker-pneumatics are located in the wind-chest.

    (1)     Note.  Pneumatics in a wind-chest to operate valves are shown in
    many patents in this art and in the organ art.


CLS 84/55
TXT The construction involves many duplicate parts that are readily detachable.


CLS 84/56
TXT These parts are of metal.


CLS 84/57
TXT Patents involving the position or location of tubes from the tracker or
    other part and means for connecting tubes, as junction plates or bars.


CLS 84/58
TXT Constructions having minute openings into a passage, especially into a
    tracker-duct.


CLS 84/59
TXT The bleed is closed by a valve during part of the cycle of operations.


CLS 84/60
TXT Patents pertaining to automatics having novelty in the valve or its seat.


CLS 84/61
TXT Patents for double valves the operating-surfaces of which face one another.


CLS 84/62
TXT Patents for double valves the operating-surfaces of which face away from
    one another.


CLS 84/63
TXT Similar to the preceding except that the distance between the surfaces is
    adjustable.


CLS 84/64
TXT Means to prevent dust from entering the action or for removing it.


CLS 84/65
TXT Pneumatics to strike the keys or throw the hammers or exert power otherwise.

    (1)     Note.  For pneumatics to shift the valves see this class,
    subclasses 50+.


CLS 84/66
TXT Patents covering various forms of connections between the pneumatic and the
    hammer.


CLS 84/67
TXT The connection engages the key.


CLS 84/68
TXT The connection engages the abstract.


CLS 84/69
TXT The connection engages the wippen.


CLS 84/70
TXT Means not otherwise classified pertaining to the supply of wind.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 355.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, appropriate subclass for a pump, per se.


CLS 84/71
TXT The construction is specially fitted for grand pianos.


CLS 84/72
TXT Pedals connected to operate bellows.

    (1)     Note.  For piano-pedals see this class, subclasses 225+ and for
    organ-pedals, subclasses 353 and 357.


CLS 84/73
TXT The pedals may be folded into the piano-case.


CLS 84/74
TXT Devices to lock the keys when the pedals are drawn out.

    (1)     Note.  For other key-locks see this class, subclass 167.


CLS 84/75
TXT Pedals with doors to hide them.


CLS 84/76
TXT Mechanism to open the doors and throw down the pedals by a single action of
    the performer.


CLS 84/77
TXT The pedal is attached to the inside of the door.


CLS 84/78
TXT The panel in front of the tracker-box is shifted simultaneously with the
    pedal-door.


CLS 84/79
TXT Various elements between the bellows and the controlling-pneumatics,
    especially reservoirs and wind-chests.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 279+ for pumps having condition responsive
    control of the fluid handled by the pump.


CLS 84/80
TXT The key-slip or part of it is movable to uncover or shift various parts
    preparatory to playing.


CLS 84/81
TXT Improvements relating to the panel in front of the tracker-box.


CLS 84/82
TXT Improvements relating to the panel in front of the pedals.

    (1)     Note.  If the pedals are claimed, see this class, subclasses 75+.


CLS 84/83
TXT Automatic wind instruments not otherwise classified, as accordions, flutes,
    etc.

    (1)     Note.  For features not limited to automatic instruments see this
    class, subclass 330, and indented subclasses.


CLS 84/84
TXT Miscellaneous organ constructions having either pipes or reeds, or both.


CLS 84/85
TXT Improvements in the stop-action.


CLS 84/86
TXT The selection of notes is determined by pins on a cylinder.


CLS 84/87
TXT The selection of notes is determined by projections or perforations on a
    disk.


CLS 84/88
TXT Electropneumatic organs with automatic control.


CLS 84/89
TXT Pneumatic organs with automatic control only.


CLS 84/90
TXT Pneumatic organs with both automatic and key control.


CLS 84/91
TXT Pneumatic pipe-organs with automatic control.


CLS 84/92
TXT Small reed-organs with hand-operated bellows and a paper sheet serving as
    valves for the reeds.


CLS 84/93
TXT The instruments are small enough to be blown by the player.


CLS 84/94.1
TXT Combs:

    Miscellaneous instruments having a comb the teeth of which are tuned to be
    the sounders.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 219+ for toilet combs.


CLS 84/94.2
TXT Combined:

    Miscellaneous instruments combined with other art devices.


CLS 84/95.1
TXT Cylinder type:

    Subject matter under subclass 94.1 wherein the teeth of the comb are picked
    by pins on a rotating cylinder.  Includes Swiss music-boxes.


CLS 84/95.2
TXT Combined:

    Subject matter under subclass 95.1 combined with other art devices.


CLS 84/96
TXT Details of the construction of the cylinder.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 86.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, subclasses 30+ for a roll, per se, not elsewhere
    provided for, with a working surface having projections, indentations, or
    slits.


CLS 84/97
TXT The teeth of the comb are picked by projections on a rotating disk.
    Includes Regina music-boxes.


CLS 84/98
TXT Star-wheels are used between the disk and comb.


CLS 84/99
TXT Instruments with two or more disks and generally with devices for setting
    them in playing position.  Some are coin-controlled.


CLS 84/100
TXT The motor of the music-box is utilized to drive a spindle for a phonograph.


CLS 84/101
TXT The selector is a note-sheet and usually operates star-wheels.  Sometimes
    the sheet controls the protrusion of pins beyond the surface of a cylinder.


CLS 84/102
TXT Automatic instruments having vibrating bars and not elsewhere classifiable.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 2, 3, 6, 403, 404, and 405.


CLS 84/103
TXT Automatic instruments having vibrating bells and not elsewhere classifiable.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 406 and 407.


CLS 84/104
TXT Automatic instruments having vibrating drums and not elsewhere classifiable.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 2, 3 and 6.


CLS 84/105
TXT Instruments including a sheet or other selector, playing mechanism, and
    striker to act on the keys of a piano or organ and readily separable from
    the latter.  Some have a set of reeds or other sounders.

    (1)     Note.  Unless the construction is limited to an outside player
    search should be made under this class, subclass 24 and indented subclasses.


CLS 84/106
TXT The selector is a cylinder or disk.


CLS 84/107
TXT The power is electromagnetic or electropneumatic.


CLS 84/108
TXT The instrument stands on the floor instead of on the piano.


CLS 84/109
TXT Means for detachably holding the cabinet to the piano.


CLS 84/110
TXT The playing mechanism includes pneumatics.

    (1)     Note.  Unless the construction is limited to an outside player
    search should be made under this class, subclass 24 and indented subclasses.


CLS 84/111
TXT Details of the strikers or fingers that engage the piano-keys.


CLS 84/112
TXT The key-striker is operated from a constantly-moving source of power.


CLS 84/113
TXT The engagement between the source of power and the striker is controlled
    electrically.


CLS 84/114
TXT The engagement between the source of power and the striker is controlled
    pneumatically.


CLS 84/115
TXT The means for determining which notes of the piano, organ, etc., shall be
    sounded. It usually includes a tracker-bar, a perforated sheet, and driving
    means.

    (1)     Note.  These features are shown in automatic telegraphs and in
    patents in many other subclasses of this class, and are sometimes claimed
    along with playing mechanism, as in subclass 24, and indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes also details and optical or other
    attachments to the selector not otherwise classified.

    (3)     Note.  For indicators see this class, subclass 169.


CLS 84/116
TXT The invention is in the location or connection of the tracker-box.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30.


CLS 84/117
TXT The note-sheet acts mechanically on movable fingers.

    (1)     Note.  For electrical fingers see this class, subclass 147.


CLS 84/118
TXT The instrument carries a plurality of note-sheets and means for driving
    them.


CLS 84/119
TXT Two sheets are operated simultaneously.


CLS 84/120
TXT The sheets are brought one at a time over a single tracker-bar and then
    driven separately.


CLS 84/121
TXT Various unusual forms of note-sheets and their feeding means, such as
    folding sheets, endless sheets, etc.


CLS 84/122
TXT Inventions for moving a sheet not elsewhere classifiable.

    (1)     Note.  For simple friction-rolls see this class, subclass 92.


CLS 84/123
TXT Electric mechanism is involved.


CLS 84/124
TXT Means to carry rolls of different type or different compass one at a time.


CLS 84/125
TXT The mechanism for driving the sheet forward and back includes a
    shifting-gear and clutch.


CLS 84/126
TXT The mechanism for driving the sheet forward and back includes two clutches.


CLS 84/127
TXT The mechanism for driving the sheet forward and back includes gears.


CLS 84/128
TXT Means for regulating the constant or momentary speed of the note
    sheet-tempo control.

    (1)     Note.  For hand-controllers see this class, subclass 49.


CLS 84/129
TXT Patents including this specific variable friction-gear.


CLS 84/130
TXT The speed is controlled by regulating the supply of wind to air-motors.


CLS 84/131
TXT Means to keep the tempo constant as the diameter of the take-up roll
    increases.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 540+ for drive
    mechanisms for convolute winding in general, particularly subclass 541 for
    a linear winding drive.


CLS 84/132
TXT Miscellaneous devices for feeding a note-sheet forward.  Includes some
    special take-up rolls.

    (1)     Note.  Simple feed-rolls are mostly in this class, subclass 92.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 520+ for convolute
    winding in general.


CLS 84/133
TXT Devices involved in rewinding, as springs and weights.


CLS 84/134
TXT Means to regulate the tension on the note-sheet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 410+ for tension
    control of running material in general.


CLS 84/135
TXT Means to control the pressure of the note-sheet on the tracker-bar.


CLS 84/136
TXT Means to insure proper registration of the sheet perforations with the
    tracker-holes, usually automatic.  The tracker may be shifted, or one or
    both rolls.  Centering or guiding means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclass 10 for means
    to sense and position material of indeterminate length.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, particularly subclasses 548+ and
    615+ for guides of web material in general.


CLS 84/137
TXT The shifting is controlled by one or more movable fingers or other
    detectors at the edge of the sheet.


CLS 84/138
TXT The shifting is done by bellows controlled by the detector.


CLS 84/139
TXT The shifting is controlled by a single detector.


CLS 84/140
TXT The tracker has extra holes near its ends to control the shifting.  The
    sheet may or may not have extra cooperating perforations.


CLS 84/141
TXT There is only one extra hole to control the shifting in both directions.


CLS 84/142
TXT Holes near the middle of the tracker are vented by note perforations in the
    sheet.


CLS 84/143
TXT One flange (or both) is shifted on one or both rolls.


CLS 84/144
TXT The tracker-bar or some other part is shifted by hand.  This feature is
    found in many patents in preceding subclasses.  The shift may be great
    enough to cause transposition.


CLS 84/145
TXT The relative shift of the tracker and sheet is through one or more
    semitones to cause a change of key.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 144.


CLS 84/146
TXT Both the tracker and the sheet are modified.  Includes devices for violins,
    etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31      and 32.


CLS 84/147
TXT Electric circuits are controlled instead of pneumatic ducts.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 160.


CLS 84/148
TXT Provision is made for control of stops.


CLS 84/149
TXT The tracker is vertical.


CLS 84/150
TXT The sheet has two sets of perforations, one set to be used as usual, the
    other to be used during rewinding.


CLS 84/151
TXT Special forms or construction of the tracker or attachments thereto.


CLS 84/152
TXT Especially to allow the use of sixty-five or eighty-eight note-sheets at
    will.  There are covers or other means to close either set of ducts.

    (1)     Note.  In the trackers of subclass 31 both rows are in use together.


CLS 84/153
TXT The two rows of holes are in the same bar or in bars fixed together.


CLS 84/154
TXT The bar is pivoted.


CLS 84/155
TXT Slide-valves determine which row shall be used.


CLS 84/156
TXT Means to close a few ducts at the end of a row if a narrow sheet is used or
    to close all during rewinding or skipping.


CLS 84/157
TXT To avoid mechanically-accurate playing.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 47.


CLS 84/158
TXT The tracker-bar is of metal.


CLS 84/159
TXT The bar is adjustable in length.


CLS 84/160
TXT The tracker-bar has ducts admitting air to pouches or small bellows that
    operate electric switches.


CLS 84/161
TXT Improvements in the sheet, its material, construction, perforations, or
    attachments.


CLS 84/162
TXT Improvements at the free end of the sheet or in means for joining two ends
    together.


CLS 84/163
TXT Perforations for two successive notes overlap to produce a legato effect or
    for accent, etc.


CLS 84/164
TXT The sheet bears lines or other marks to indicate the proper expression or
    tempo.

    (1)     Note.  For cooperating parts see this class, subclasses 49 and 169.


CLS 84/165
TXT The sheet bears words or marks to indicate a vocal part.


CLS 84/166
TXT The sheet or disk has projections, sometimes adjustable, instead of
    perforations.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 97, and indented subclasses.


CLS 84/167
TXT Means to prevent the keys from moving as the piano is played.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 74.


CLS 84/168
TXT Means, usually pneumatic, for sounding two notes together, especially
    octaves.


CLS 84/169
TXT Indicators of various kinds connected to automatic instruments.


CLS 84/170
TXT Instruments having sounders belonging to two of the four groups, as a piano
    or organ with bell, bar, or drum attachment.


CLS 84/171
TXT Combined instruments employing electric circuits.


CLS 84/172
TXT Combination of a piano and reed (or pipe) organ, often with means for
    disconnecting one set of sounders from the keys.


CLS 84/173
TXT Miscellaneous stringed instruments and devices relating thereto not
    classifiable elsewhere.  Includes Aeolian harps.

    (1)     Note.  Continue the search in subclass 1.16 of this class.


CLS 84/174
TXT Miscellaneous patents showing pianos of unusual shape or claiming several
    features or not elsewhere classifiable.

    (1)     Note.  Many features of a piano are common to other instruments and
    should be searched for in appropriate subclasses of automatic, stringed, or
    wind instruments, rigid vibrators, or general features in this class.

    (2)     Note.  For pianos having bells or other sounding attachments see
    this class, subclasses 170, 171 and 172.


CLS 84/175
TXT Two sets of strings and sometimes two keyboards.


CLS 84/176
TXT The piano is conveniently separable into parts, especially for ease of
    transportation.


CLS 84/177
TXT The improvements are in the case.

    (1)     Note.  For key-beds or key-bottoms see this class, subclasses 430
    and 431.

    (2)     Note.  For cases for pneumatic pianos see this class, subclasses
    75, 80, 81, and 82.


CLS 84/178
TXT The improvements related to both the music-desk and the fall-board over the
    keys.


CLS 84/179
TXT The improvements relate to the fall-board alone.  Includes devices for
    equalizing the movements of the ends.


CLS 84/180
TXT The improvements relate to the music desk or rack.


CLS 84/181
TXT The case has pockets or shelves for holding music or music-rolls.


CLS 84/182
TXT The case has shutters or slides to control the escape of sound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189,    346 and 372.


CLS 84/183
TXT Means to protect the case, especially around the pedals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177.


CLS 84/184
TXT All three parts are modified.


CLS 84/185
TXT Both parts are modified.


CLS 84/186.1
TXT Frames:

    Subject matter under subclass 174 having improvements in the frames or
    backs of wood or metal.


CLS 84/186.2
TXT Wrest planks:

    Subject matter under subclass 186.1 having improvements in the wrest planks.


CLS 84/187
TXT Improvements in the two features.


CLS 84/188
TXT Improvements in the metal plate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200     and 209, and the subclasses indented thereunder.


CLS 84/189
TXT Devices to communicate to the air vibrations due to the strings or to
    modify them in loudness or quality.  These devices do not directly affect
    the movement of the strings.

    (1)     Note.  Some expression devices (subclass 216, etc.) might come
    under this broad definition; but most of them affect the amplitude or form
    of vibration of the strings and are under control of the player.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182,    224, 234, 294, and 295.


CLS 84/190
TXT Resonant supports on which the instrument may stand.


CLS 84/191
TXT Devices supposed to prevent the wasteful transmission of energy, as to the
    floor.


CLS 84/192
TXT The principal means by which the energy of the vibrating string is
    communicated to the air.


CLS 84/193
TXT Sounding-boards made of unusual material, especially metal.


CLS 84/194
TXT Boards additional to the main sounding board.  Hollow bodies analogous to a
    violin.


CLS 84/195
TXT Modifications in the location, arrangement, or structure of the ribs.


CLS 84/196
TXT Means to maintain the board in an arched form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184     through 188.


CLS 84/197
TXT Modifications in the location or arrangement of the strings.


CLS 84/198
TXT Extra strings or extensions furnishing unisons or harmonics.  They may be
    struck by the hammer or may vibrate sympathetically.


CLS 84/199
TXT Special material or construction of the strings.

    (1)     Note.  For spirally wrapped strands of general application, see
    Class 57, Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 210+.


CLS 84/200
TXT Miscellaneous devices for straining the strings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304,    305 and 306.


CLS 84/201
TXT Integral pins.


CLS 84/202
TXT Pins with means for locking them or for increasing the friction.


CLS 84/203
TXT Those devices that involve two pins.


CLS 84/204
TXT Those devices that involve a worm-gear.


CLS 84/205
TXT The string is pulled directly, not wound on a pin.


CLS 84/206
TXT The string is fastened to a movable block.


CLS 84/207
TXT The string is fastened to a lever.


CLS 84/208
TXT The tuning-pin deflects the string from a straight line.


CLS 84/209
TXT Patents for bridges not belonging in the subclasses below.

    (1)     Note.  The vibrating length of the string is determined by its
    bearing on the two bridges, one on the sounding-board and the other usually
    on the wrest-plank or on the string-plate.  If on the plate, it is
    sometimes distinguished as the "scale rib".  If the two bridges are not on
    the same side of the string, the one near the hammer-line may be called
    "inverted". Often the hammer-stroke tends to lift the string from the
    bridge on the plank, so in some early pianos a sort of screw-eye called an
    "a gaffe" was used, while in later times many sorts of clamps or holders
    have been devised to hold the strings on their bridges, and confusing names
    have been given them.


CLS 84/210
TXT See Note to subclass 209.


CLS 84/211
TXT See Note to subclass 209.


CLS 84/212
TXT The principal bridge, usually long, curved and near the hitch-pins.


CLS 84/213
TXT Means on the bridge for clamping or holding the strings in place.


CLS 84/214
TXT Means for clamping or holding a string not on the main bridge.


CLS 84/215
TXT Bars for holding the strings firmly against the bridge on the string-plate.
     Sometimes called "capo-tasto bars".


CLS 84/216
TXT Various means for changing the quality of tone of a piano.

    (1)     Note.  See Note to this class, subclass 189.


CLS 84/217
TXT Many or all of the dampers are lifted, so that their strings may enter into
    sympathetic vibration.  This is the ordinary "forte" arrangement controlled
    by the damper-pedal.


CLS 84/218
TXT The sustaining or third pedal device to retain only those dampers which are
    raised by the keys at the time the damper is applied.


CLS 84/219
TXT Devices to soften the blow of the hammer or produce a softer sound.  They
    may render the piano silent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35+.


CLS 84/220
TXT A curtain is interposed between the hammer and the strings.  Called in old
    patents "celeste".


CLS 84/221
TXT This is the common modern construction.


CLS 84/222
TXT Devices to prevent a gap in the connections between the keys and
    hammer-butts.


CLS 84/223
TXT Similar devices adapted to grand-actions.


CLS 84/224
TXT Small weighted tongues in the path of the hammers to strike the strings.
    Sometimes called a "mandolin attachment".


CLS 84/225
TXT Means to operate the expression devices and details thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216,    and indented subclasses.


CLS 84/226
TXT Means to hold the mechanism in operated position.


CLS 84/227
TXT One of the levers is carried on a spring instead of on bearings.


CLS 84/228
TXT Bearings specially adapted for use in this mechanism.


CLS 84/229
TXT The exposed levers of the mechanism.


CLS 84/230
TXT Pedals supplementary to the usual pedals, generally for children's use.

    (1)     Note.  Similar devices are found in this class, subclass 358, and
    in Class 74, Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 512, and indented
    subclasses, and 560, and indented subclasses.


CLS 84/231
TXT The supplementary part is clamped to the pedal.


CLS 84/232
TXT The supplementary part is carried on a footstool.


CLS 84/233
TXT Devices to prevent the entrance of mice through the pedal-openings.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 353.


CLS 84/234
TXT Means to touch a string at the middle or other nodal point, so causing it
    to produce a harmonic tone.


CLS 84/235
TXT Devices to operate two hammers from a single key.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    373     and 424.


CLS 84/236
TXT Patents covering the parts between the key and the strings, usually called
    collectively, a "piano-action".  The keys are not treated as parts of the
    action. (See subclass 423).

    (1)     Note.  The title distinguishes from the pedal-actions of an
    ordinary piano.

    (2)     Note.  For pedals to operate the hammers see this class, subclass
    426.

    (3)     Note.  For simple actions see this class, subclasses 323 and 324.


CLS 84/237
TXT These actions are mostly for the old type of square pianos.


CLS 84/238
TXT The hammers strike downward instead of upward.


CLS 84/239
TXT The modern standard action of the Herz- Erard type, in which the jack and
    repetition-lever both engage the nose on the hammer.

    (1)     Note.  For other types see this class, subclass 237.


CLS 84/240
TXT Miscellaneous types of action for pianos having strings in a nearly
    vertical plane.


CLS 84/241
TXT The jack positively retracts the hammer, so that a bridle is not needed.


CLS 84/242
TXT The common action, each unit of it including a wippen carrying a jack, a
    damper-spoon, a back-check, and a bridle-wire.


CLS 84/243
TXT Patents for features not elsewhere classifiable.


CLS 84/244
TXT The hammer is driven by power controlled by the key.


CLS 84/245
TXT Devices for producing sustained tone instead of the ordinary evanescent one.

    (1)     Note.  Continue the search in subclasses 1.05 and 1.06 and indented
    subclasses of this class.


CLS 84/246
TXT The striker is moved by an electromagnet.


CLS 84/247
TXT Actions designed to give the player constant control of the hammer, such as
    clavichord players had.


CLS 84/248
TXT The jack is pivoted at its top and escapes at the bottom.


CLS 84/249
TXT The jack is pivoted at top and bottom and jointed near the middle--a kind
    of reversed toggle.


CLS 84/250
TXT Frames carrying the parts of the action and the rails of the expression
    devices.


CLS 84/251
TXT The hingelike parts by which the moving parts are attached to one another
    or to the rails.


CLS 84/252
TXT Several flange units are integrally connected together.


CLS 84/253
TXT Devices for catching the hammer and holding it at rest after it has
    recoiled from the string.


CLS 84/254
TXT Improvements in the striking parts of the hammer and in hammer-felts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 29 for piano-hammer felting.


CLS 84/255
TXT Improvements in damper-heads.

    (1)     Note.  Dampers are shown in numerous patents for pianos or
    piano-actions or automatic pianos or stringed instruments.


CLS 84/256
TXT Instruments having many strings excited by friction; "violin-pianos".

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 325 and 326.


CLS 84/257
TXT In these the exciting means is a belt.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 325 and 326.


CLS 84/258
TXT The strings are picked, somewhat as in the old harpsichords.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    320.


CLS 84/263
TXT Instruments having two sets of strings, often on different necks or on
    opposite sides of the body.

    (1)     Note.  The following subclasses--264 to 289--are intended only for
    features specific to the instrument named.  If the feature is applicable to
    instruments of two kinds, as a harp and violin, the patent is classified
    under this class, subclass 290, and indented subclasses.


CLS 84/264
TXT Theses have many strings of graduated length stretched on a frame
    consisting of the body, neck, and pillar.  The strings are exposed on both
    sides to the player's hands.


CLS 84/265
TXT Patents for harps where the improvement is in the body only.


CLS 84/266
TXT Patents for improvements in the mechanism by which the pitch of the strings
    is changed one or two semitones.


CLS 84/267
TXT Patents showing a few strings stretched along a fretted neck, unless
    clearly belonging to a subclass below.


CLS 84/268
TXT The patents herein relate almost exclusively to the body.


CLS 84/269
TXT Instruments having a flexible head and a neck.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193,    for metal heads.


CLS 84/270
TXT Means to change the quality of the banjo-tones by an attachment or
    especially by partly-closed air-cavities.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    294.


CLS 84/271
TXT Banjos having the back partly or wholly closed.


CLS 84/272
TXT Banjos in which the head is stretched over two concentric rings.


CLS 84/273
TXT A mute or damper for pressing on the head.

    (1)     Note.  For violin-mutes see this class, subclass 310.


CLS 84/274
TXT Improvements not likely to be applicable to any instruments other than
    those of the violin family and not belonging in subclasses below; also
    patents involving two specific features.


CLS 84/275
TXT Modifications in the body of a violin.


CLS 84/276
TXT Changes in the bass-bar.


CLS 84/277
TXT Changes in the sound-post.


CLS 84/278
TXT Patents covering a combination of the two features.


CLS 84/279
TXT Changes in chin-rests.


CLS 84/280
TXT Changes in supports for a violin or violoncello.


CLS 84/281
TXT Means for holding the player's arm and the violin in proper position.


CLS 84/282
TXT Modifications in the construction of violin-bows.


CLS 84/283
TXT Devices for guiding the bow in proper relation to the strings.


CLS 84/284
TXT Strings stretched over a sounding-board to be struck by hammers in the
    player's hands.


CLS 84/285
TXT Strings stretched over a sounding-board in position to be picked.  The
    strings are often divided into melody-strings and accompaniment-strings,
    the former sometimes lying over a finger-board.

    (1)     Note.  For details see this class, subclass 290, and indented
    subclasses.


CLS 84/286
TXT Instruments, usually of the zither type, in which strings are sounded in
    chord groups, specifically by multiple picks or hammers fixed on a bar and
    operating simultaneously.


CLS 84/287
TXT The dampers mute all strings except those needed for the desired chord.
    This subclass covers the original "auto-harp".


CLS 84/288
TXT These dampers may be operated by hand or by a tune-sheet.


CLS 84/289
TXT The plate has holes through which a pick strikes strings that furnish a
    chord.


CLS 84/290
TXT Includes features not practically limited to a single one of the well-known
    types of stringed instruments in the subclasses above.


CLS 84/291
TXT Hollow resonance-bodies for instruments having a neck.

    (1)     Note.  For bodies special to any one type of instrument see the
    subclass relating to such instrument.


CLS 84/292
TXT Bodies of metal.


CLS 84/293
TXT Patents covering the construction of the neck or its connection or
    inclination to the body.


CLS 84/294
TXT Devices for changing the quality of tone of an instrument, as air-cavities,
    extra sounding-boards, sympathetically-vibrating parts, or small membranes.

    (1)     Note.  For harmonic dampers see this class, subclass 234.


CLS 84/295
TXT Extra strings inside or outside of the body.


CLS 84/296
TXT The string sets a diaphragm in vibration. A horn is usually shown.


CLS 84/297
TXT Improvements in the string and the means for fastening it.

    (1)     Note.  In this and the next six subclasses there are many devices
    for correcting the lengths of strings or tuning them or changing the
    pressure on the bridge.


CLS 84/298
TXT These usually hold the end of the string and a separate tailpiece is not
    necessary.


CLS 84/299
TXT Both a bridge and a tailpiece are used.


CLS 84/300
TXT Tailpieces specially adapted to a banjo.


CLS 84/301
TXT Tailpieces specially adapted to a mandolin.


CLS 84/302
TXT Tailpieces specially adapted to a violin.


CLS 84/303
TXT Devices for winding up the surplus length of string.


CLS 84/304
TXT Patents mostly for simple tuning-pegs, sometimes with means for gripping
    the string.


CLS 84/305
TXT Means for holding the peg more tightly than usual.


CLS 84/306
TXT Tuning devices having a worm-gear. Sometimes called "machine head" or
    "patent head".


CLS 84/307
TXT Bridges not limited to the following subclasses.


CLS 84/308
TXT Bridges specially adapted to a banjo-head.


CLS 84/309
TXT Bridges specially adapted to a violin.


CLS 84/310
TXT Devices to be applied to violin-bridges; sordines.


CLS 84/311
TXT The mute is attached to the violin and can be readily shifted into
    operative position.


CLS 84/312
TXT Unusual tunings or arrangement of chord groups, particularly in zithers.


CLS 84/313
TXT Device for producing amplitude modulation.


CLS 84/314
TXT Includes the structure of the finger-board, markings on it, frets, and nuts.


CLS 84/315
TXT Devices to shorten or stop a string at proper points, as a guitar player
    does with his finger.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    326.


CLS 84/316
TXT Devices to sharp or flat a note, so as to change the key.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266.


CLS 84/317
TXT Devices to finger several strings at once, so that a chord may be produced.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    443.


CLS 84/318
TXT Clamps to shorten all the strings of a guitar or to perform an equivalent
    operation on other instruments.


CLS 84/319
TXT Devices held by the player to stop one or more strings, as on the Hawaiian
    guitar.


CLS 84/320
TXT Miscellaneous devices for picking, plucking, or pulling strings.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and the next two subclasses deal with devices
    for "playing" or exciting the strings. Very similar devices are found in
    subclasses 8, 258, 404, and 409 of this class.


CLS 84/321
TXT All the picks are reciprocated at once.


CLS 84/322
TXT Simple picks held by the player.


CLS 84/323
TXT Patents for simple actions adapted to a zither and usually downstriking.
    The instrument is often called a "keyed zither".

    (1)     Note.  For electrically operated hammers, see this class, subclass
    246.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237,    238 and 240.


CLS 84/324
TXT To produce a vibrato or tremolo effect.

    (1)     Note.  For hand-hammers see this class, subclass 284.


CLS 84/325
TXT For violins or zithers.

    (1)     Note.  For ordinary violin-bows see this class, subclass 282.

    (2)     Note.  For automatic violins see this class, subclasses 10 and 11.


CLS 84/326
TXT The keys operate fretting or fingering means, so that only a few strings
    are needed.  The complete instrument is usually called a "piano-violin".

    (1)     Note.  For instruments having many open strings see this class,
    subclasses 256 and 257.


CLS 84/327
TXT Devices for supporting or positioning guitars, etc., during playing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278     and 280.


CLS 84/328
TXT Means to support the player's hand in proper relation to the instrument.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    469.


CLS 84/329
TXT Devices attached to an instrument to hold an article, as a pick or a cake
    of rosin.


CLS 84/330
TXT Miscellaneous wind instruments and some details not elsewhere classifiable;
    also combinations of pipes and reeds.

    (1)     Note.  The patents of this group may be classed as pipe organs,
    reed organs, minor reed instruments, orchestral wood winds, and brasses.
    The first two have many features in common; but they differ so much in size
    and consequently in details that a parallel classification has been made.
    Search should ordinarily be made in the proper subclasses of both types and
    sometimes in "Automatics".  Wind-supply devices and pressure-regulators are
    mostly classed in Class 60, Power Plants, subclass 60, and Class 417, Pumps.


CLS 84/331
TXT Patents covering the whole organization or several details or features not
    elsewhere classifiable.


CLS 84/332
TXT Pipe-organ actions not belonging to a specific subclass.

    (1)     Note.  The speaking of an organ-pipe is usually controlled by the
    joint operation of devices actuated or controlled, respectively, by a key
    and a stop.  These devices (excluding the keys) are collectively known as
    the "action".  These actions and the corresponding wind-chests are of three
    types:  (1) the older, in which the top of the wind-chest has as many
    grooves with pallets to control them as there are keys and as many
    perforated slides crossing the grooves as there are speaking-stops; (2) the
    type in which there are as many stop-chambers as stops, each carrying a
    series or "register" of pipes and each controlled by a valve or "ventil",
    every pipe having its own valve controlled by a key, and (3) the type in
    which all the pipes stand on a common or "universal" wind-chest and each
    pipe has its own valve, which is jointly controlled by a key and a
    draw-stop.  In all three types the controlling means may be mechanical,
    electrical, pneumatic, or electropneumatic.  For details of such means see
    this class, subclass 335, and following subclasses.  Patents for
    combinations of the first type are in this subclass.


CLS 84/333
TXT Combinations belonging to type 2 of the Note above.


CLS 84/334
TXT Combinations belonging to type 3 of the above Note.


CLS 84/335
TXT The invention is essentially embodied in one pneumatic and valve.


CLS 84/336
TXT A diaphragm serves as a valve.


CLS 84/337
TXT Includes patents for complete organizations and for electric details; also
    inertia-controlled circuit-closers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    341.


CLS 84/338
TXT Includes organizations in which electromagnetic valves control pneumatics;
    also pneumato-electric actions in which pneumatics control switches in the
    circuits of electromagnets.


CLS 84/339
TXT Includes units or details of such actions.


CLS 84/340
TXT Pneumatic means for coupling parts of an organ.


CLS 84/341
TXT Electric means for coupling parts of an organ.

    (1)     Note.  Means for coupling two keyboards together are in this class,
    subclass 424.  A simple type of rock-shaft for octave-couplers is common in
    reed-organs.  (See particularly subclass 373).  In pneumatic and electric
    organ-actions there is no sharp line of distinction between couplers and
    stop-actions, and in some modern constructions the old nomenclature is
    inapt.

    (2)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 1.08, 235, 337, and 338.


CLS 84/342
TXT Details of the pallet or other key-operated valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    368.


CLS 84/343
TXT Details of the draw-stops or stop-keys, etc.

    (1)     Note.  For the complete stop-action search this class, subclasses
    331, 332, 333, and 334.


CLS 84/344
TXT A single pedal or button brings on a plurality of stops selected by the
    organ builder.


CLS 84/345
TXT A single pedal or button brings on a plurality of stops selected by the
    player.

    (1)     Note.  The last two subclasses include organs of all three types
    described above and actions of the several varieties, also crescendo and
    sforzando devices.


CLS 84/346
TXT Patents relating to swell-shutters and means for operating them.


CLS 84/347
TXT The shutters are operated or controlled by an electropneumatic action.


CLS 84/348
TXT A vibrating valve produces an irregularity in the flow of air and so in
    loudness of the sound.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 374.


CLS 84/349
TXT The improvement is embodied in one individual pipe.


CLS 84/350
TXT The improvement is embodied in one individual reed-pipe, which usually has
    a beating-reed.


CLS 84/351
TXT Patents for the general construction of a reed-organ.  Familiar trade-names
    are "harmonium, melodeon, cabinet-organ".  The reeds are usually free.

    (1)     Note.  While most of these constructions are obsolete, these
    patents should be searched for features or details not clearly found in the
    subclasses below.


CLS 84/352
TXT Patents for features of the case.


CLS 84/353
TXT In these patents there is some modification of the case around the pedals.

    (1)     Note.  For other organ-pedals see this class, subclass 357.

    (2)     Note.  For mouse-guards see this class, subclass 233.


CLS 84/354
TXT Collapsible or "suitcase" organs.


CLS 84/355
TXT Includes pumpers and sometimes electric motors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70.


CLS 84/356
TXT Instruments involving both exhaust and pressure mechanisms.


CLS 84/357
TXT Includes pedals and connections to the bellows.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    353,    if a modification of the case is involved.


CLS 84/358
TXT For the use of children.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230,    231 and 232.


CLS 84/359
TXT Includes parts between the pumpers and the actions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 279+ for pumps having condition responsive
    control of the fluid handled by the pump.


CLS 84/360
TXT Boards in which the reed-cells are formed.


CLS 84/361
TXT Tubes each communicating with one or a very few reed-cells.


CLS 84/362
TXT Chambers each communicating with many cells.


CLS 84/363
TXT Patents where the improvement is in the reed alone.


CLS 84/364
TXT Means for tuning the reed are included.


CLS 84/365
TXT Modifications in the parts of the action operated or controlled by the
    keys; devices to start the tongue in prompt vibration.


CLS 84/366
TXT Actions connected to a pedal-keyboard.


CLS 84/367
TXT Patents including a pneumatic in the key action.


CLS 84/368
TXT Key-operated valves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    342.


CLS 84/369
TXT Patents relating to draw-stops and to the mutes and other parts of the
    action operated by the stops.


CLS 84/370
TXT Means to operate several stops in combination.


CLS 84/371
TXT Devices to produce the "celeste" effect.


CLS 84/372
TXT Mute, draw-stop, or shutters operated by knee or foot lever or bellows.


CLS 84/373
TXT Devices to cause two notes, usually an octave apart, to sound when one key
    is depressed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168,    235 and 340.


CLS 84/374
TXT Devices to produce interruptions in the flow of sound, usually of the
    rotating-fan type.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 348.


CLS 84/375
TXT Includes imitation trumpets, jews'-harps, and reed-horns of variable pitch.

    (1)     Note.  For accurate tuning means see this class, subclass 350.

    (2)     Note.  For ordinary fish-horns or dinner-horns see Class 116,
    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 137 and 140.

    (3)     Note.  For artificial larynxes see Class 623, Prosthesis (i.e.,
    Artificial Body Members) Parts Thereof or Aids and Accessories Therefor,
    subclass 9 for larynxes.


CLS 84/376
TXT Wind is supplied by a hand-operated bellows and the reeds are controlled by
    valves and keys.  Some forms are called "concertinas".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168,    255 and 340.


CLS 84/377
TXT Mouth-blown instruments usually sounding chords and rarely having keys.


CLS 84/378
TXT A resonance tube or chamber is added.


CLS 84/379
TXT Devices to support a harmonica on another instrument or on the player's
    body.


CLS 84/380
TXT Includes patents for features that are readily applicable to various
    instruments.


CLS 84/381
TXT Instruments having two tubes to be blown and fingered simultaneously.


CLS 84/382
TXT Includes features specially applicable to clarinets.


CLS 84/383
TXT Single-reed mouthpieces and elements thereof.


CLS 84/384
TXT Features pertaining to flutes and similar instruments that give the octave
    on overblowing.


CLS 84/385
TXT Details not applicable to other instruments.


CLS 84/386
TXT Devices for changing the key or the pitch; transposers.


CLS 84/387
TXT This title covers the band instruments commonly called "brasses", whatever
    their specific names may be.  This subclass includes combinations and
    features not classifiable below.


CLS 84/388
TXT Those instruments, of which the cornet is typical, usually having three
    piston-valves.


CLS 84/389
TXT Cornets, etc., having four or more valves.


CLS 84/390
TXT The valves rotate.


CLS 84/391
TXT The valves have a combined rotating and sliding movement or the engaging
    surfaces of the valve and its seat are planes.


CLS 84/392
TXT Details of the piston-valve.


CLS 84/393
TXT Each valve controls two tubes of different length, often symmetrically
    placed, whereby the difference in timbre between open and valve tones is
    diminished.


CLS 84/394
TXT Means to change the key or pitch.


CLS 84/395
TXT Instruments in which the changes in length of the vibrating air column
    depend on a slide.


CLS 84/396
TXT Means to change the key or pitch specially adapted to a trombone.


CLS 84/397
TXT Water-keys and analogous devices.


CLS 84/398
TXT Cornet and similar mouthpieces, usually cup-shaped.


CLS 84/399
TXT Adjustable in length or internal shape or having interchangeable parts.


CLS 84/400
TXT Cornet-mutes to enable the player to produce a softer tone than usual.


CLS 84/401
TXT Devices by which a tremolo effect may be produced.


CLS 84/402
TXT Miscellaneous constructions and features.

    (1)     Note.  This group is intended to take all solid sounding-bodies
    except strings.  They are sometimes called "autophones" or "percussion
    instruments".  When used as attachments to a piano or organ, they are to be
    searched for in this class, subclasses 2, 3, 170, and 171.


CLS 84/403
TXT Bars supported at nodal points to vibrate transversely and means for
    supporting them; also some end-supported bars and some resonators.
    Hand-strikers are used.


CLS 84/404
TXT Bars furnishing the notes of a scale and strikers therefor.  Called
    "xylophones, toy pianos, pianos, pianos without strings, chimes," etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclasses for mechanically
    operated signals.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 384.1+ for electrically
    operated audible signals.


CLS 84/405
TXT The bars are vibrated by electromagnets.


CLS 84/406
TXT A musical instrument usually including a plurality of bells and strikers or
    equivalents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, for single bells.


CLS 84/407
TXT The strikers are actuated or controlled by electromagnets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 392.1+ for an electrically
    operated signal bell.


CLS 84/408
TXT Short bars fixed at one end like the teeth of a comb and vibrated by a
    pick.  Most familiar in the Swiss music-box.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 94, and indented subclasses.


CLS 84/409
TXT A musical instrument comprising tuning-forks and their strikers.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 457 for single forks.


CLS 84/410
TXT Hollow bodies serving as resonators for a bar, fork, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics.


CLS 84/411
TXT Miscellaneous drums not classifiable in the subclasses indented hereunder.


CLS 84/412
TXT Those collapsible for convenience of transportation.


CLS 84/413
TXT Means for tightening cords that stretch the heads.


CLS 84/414
TXT Unusual materials for the head.


CLS 84/415
TXT Miscellaneous features of construction.


CLS 84/416
TXT The invention is in the material used.


CLS 84/417
TXT The snares are inside the head.


CLS 84/418
TXT Shallow drums with a single head.


CLS 84/419
TXT Kettledrums and tuning means therefor.


CLS 84/420
TXT Small cheap drums used as toys.


CLS 84/421
TXT Devices for supporting drums.

    (1)     Note.  For attachments to a drum for supporting bells, cymbals,
    etc., see Class 248, Supports, subclass 200, and indented subclasses.


CLS 84/422.1
TXT Drum and cymbal beaters:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 which are foot-operated bass drum beaters.


CLS 84/422.2
TXT Combined:

    Subject matter under subclass 422.1 combined with cymbal beaters.


CLS 84/422.3
TXT Hi-hat:

    Subject matter under subclass 422.1 which are cymbal beater (e.g., Hi-Hat).


CLS 84/422.4
TXT Drumsticks:

    Subject matter under subclass 422.1 which are drumsticks.


CLS 84/423
TXT Miscellaneous patents involving several features or features not
    specifically classified.


CLS 84/424
TXT Keyboards like those of a pipe-organ and couplers therefor.

    (1)     Note.  Continue the search in subclass 1.17 of this class.


CLS 84/425
TXT Keys of one set operate, respectively, keys of another set.


CLS 84/426
TXT The keys of the first set are foot-operated.


CLS 84/427
TXT All or some of the keys have two places for fingering; stepped keys.


CLS 84/428
TXT Successive keys furnish notes a whole tone apart; Janko keyboards, etc.


CLS 84/429
TXT The front ends of the keys lie along a curved line.


CLS 84/430
TXT Changes in the part of the case which supports the key-frame.


CLS 84/431
TXT The bottom and keys fold into the case.


CLS 84/432
TXT Means to vary the striking-point in a horizontal piano or to level the
    key-frame.


CLS 84/433
TXT The improvement can be embodied in a single key.


CLS 84/434
TXT Improvements in both fulcrum and guide.


CLS 84/435
TXT Improvements in the fulcrum.


CLS 84/436
TXT Improvements in the guiding devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    438.


CLS 84/437
TXT Improvements in the ivory or other covering.


CLS 84/438
TXT Various processes of manufacture.


CLS 84/439
TXT Means to adjust the depth or other characteristics of the touch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    435     and 467.


CLS 84/440
TXT Means to adjust the resistance of the keys.


CLS 84/441
TXT Means to hold down a depressed key, so as to sustain the sound, generally
    in organs.

    (1)     Note.  For devices to hold all the keys see this class, subclass
    167.


CLS 84/442
TXT Means for selecting out of the twelve keys of an octave those needed for
    any diatomic scale.


CLS 84/443
TXT Means whereby a single key or button sounds a chord.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    317.


CLS 84/444
TXT Means whereby a single pedal sounds a chord.


CLS 84/445
TXT Devices whereby each sound produced is systematically different in pitch
    from that normally associated with the key struck. Includes pneumatic or
    electric devices.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 442.


CLS 84/446
TXT A shiftable keyboard superposed on the ordinary one.


CLS 84/447
TXT The keyboard is shifted relatively to the action.


CLS 84/448
TXT Parts between the keyboard and sounders are shifted.


CLS 84/449
TXT The sounders are shifted.


CLS 84/450
TXT Devices for emphasizing the highest or lowest note of a chord; "melody
    attachment".


CLS 84/451
TXT Pianos or organs furnishing more than twelve notes to the octave or tuned
    to give a scale different from the equally-tempered scale of the piano;
    special keyboards and connections therefrom; quarter-tone instruments;
    enharmonic instruments.


CLS 84/452
TXT Patents in which the novelty resides in a substitution of material.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 193 and 291.


CLS 84/453
TXT Devices used in connection with a musical instrument, but not necessary to
    the production of music.  Includes testing devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169,    for indicators related to a self playing instrument.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 396 and 397 for a piano stool or bench having
    a tiltable support surface which may remain horizontal while the occupant
    is playing a piano manually, but which may be tilted forwardly to support
    the occupant in a position to facilitate pumping an organ bellows or player
    piano mechanism with his feet and subclasses 441.1+ for an easel, book or
    music score holder.


CLS 84/454
TXT Miscellaneous devices.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and the subclasses indented under it include
    devices temporarily used in tuning, usually not connected to the instrument
    to be tuned.  Some of them furnish a note of standard pitch, others are
    merely tools.


CLS 84/455
TXT Strings, usually on a graduated bar; monochord; sonometer.


CLS 84/456
TXT Pitch-pipes, reeds, etc., furnishing one or more notes of definite pitch.


CLS 84/457
TXT Tuning-forks.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    409,    for forks mounted to form a musical instrument.


CLS 84/458
TXT Machines for both shaping and blowing reeds; also some hand tools.


CLS 84/459
TXT Piano-tuners' wrenches.


CLS 84/460
TXT Needles and carriers for picking felt hammer-heads.


CLS 84/461
TXT Devices for recording the movement of keys of a keyboard.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), subclasses 49+, if the record
    is made by selectively perforating a moving sheet; subclasses 109+ and 123+
    for a keyboard controlled selective cutting device in general.


CLS 84/462
TXT These devices involve electric circuits.


CLS 84/463
TXT Means for applying expression lines or marks to a record-sheet.


CLS 84/464
TXT Devices for producing light or color effects combined with an instrument
    for producing music.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 18 for
    ornamental fountains having means to light or illuminate the fountain.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses, for electric systems for supplying electric energy to electric
    lamps.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclass 200 for a figure toy which moves
    in time with a musical instrument; and subclasses 202+ for other
    mouthpiece-actuated toys.


CLS 84/465
TXT Devices to aid students in learning to play an instrument.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281.


CLS 84/466
TXT Devices to aid in voice-training.


CLS 84/467
TXT Includes practice-keyboards; "claviers".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    440.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    434,    Education and Demonstration subclasses 176, 202 and 227+ for other
    teaching devices having key-boards.

    482,    Exercise Devices, particularly subclasses 44+ for hand, wrist, or
    finger exercise apparatus in general.

    601,    Surgery:  Kinesitherapy, subclass 40.


CLS 84/468
TXT Devices attached to the player's hand or body.


CLS 84/469
TXT A rail fixed to the piano-case to position the player's arm.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    328.


CLS 84/470
TXT Devices for use in teaching music, some with sounders; charts; indicators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    434,    Education and Demonstration, for other teaching devices.


CLS 84/471
TXT Various kinds of charts.


CLS 84/472
TXT Devices adapted to stand vertically and others of analogous construction
    and use.

    (1)     Note.  For devices in which a note, etc., is caused to appear on
    the staff upon pressing a key see this class, subclass 477.


CLS 84/473
TXT Devices having a slide for illustrating change of key.


CLS 84/474
TXT Similar devices having a dial.


CLS 84/475
TXT Various devices useful in writing music, as from a record or for a
    transposing instrument.


CLS 84/476
TXT Blocks or cards having musical characters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 292+ for card or tile games
    which may have an educational benefit, and see especially subclass 301
    thereof.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 208 and 403 for other
    educational blocks or cards.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 85+ for toy blocks; and
    subclass 147 for toy cards.


CLS 84/477
TXT Miscellaneous visual devices responding to movements of keys or directing
    their movement or showing note relationships.


CLS 84/478
TXT To be used on a keyboard.


CLS 84/479
TXT A card or board bearing indicia to register with the keys of the
    instrument-keyboard.


CLS 84/480
TXT The card has a slide to indicate various major or minor keys.


CLS 84/481
TXT A plurality of cards, each for a single key.


CLS 84/482
TXT The card is shifted along the keyboard for transposition.


CLS 84/483.1
TXT Tune sheets:

    Subject matter under subclass 477 having sheets bearing the music and
    located with special reference to the keys or sounders.


CLS 84/483.2
TXT Notation systems:

    Subject matter under subclass 483.1 including notation systems.


CLS 84/484
TXT Devices for indicating the tempo or rhythm.


CLS 84/485
TXT The music-sheet has marks showing what finger is to be used in producing a
    note.


CLS 84/486
TXT Patents showing constructions not clearly belonging in one of the following
    subclasses or showing features applicable to various types of leaf-turners.

    (1)     Note.  Leaf-turners are devices to be attached to a music-stand or
    to the music-desk of a piano to enable a player to turn one or more leaves
    of music from right to left.  In some cases the player releases a source of
    power, in others he furnishes the power.  In either case he may use his
    hand, knee, or foot, and the terms "releaser" and "finger-piece" are used
    generically herein to include also knee-levers and foot-levers.  Often a
    pedal is connected to operate a finger-key.  Usually each leaf is attached
    by clips to one or two arms extending from a solid or tubular shaft pivoted
    near the line of fold of the music-sheets or the line of the back of a
    bound book, said arms extending along the top or bottom edge of the leaf or
    along both.  This classification is based, first, on the immediate source
    of the power that turns the leaf-motor, gravity, spring, or hand--and,
    second, on whether there is a plurality of parts or a single one of each
    kind.  The parts considered are only those of turning a leaf from right to
    left.  In many instances there are keys or pedals to return the leaves from
    left to right.  These are disregarded in the classification.

    (2)     Note.  Patents for some features of construction that are not
    suggested by these titles are cross-referenced into this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 524+, 529+ for means
    to feed a continuous sheet of music and 530+ for means to turn the leaves
    of a book.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 441.1+ for an easel, book or music score
    holder.


CLS 84/487
TXT In these generally a spring-motor is released repeatedly to turn
    leaf-holding arms forward and back.  The motor must be rewound from time to
    time.  Some patents show an electric motor.


CLS 84/488
TXT The leaves are moved by the weight of some part.


CLS 84/489
TXT The arms are started by hand and their movement continued by springs.
    Accessories, Leaf-Turners, Spring-Operated Arms.  Each arm has a spring
    tending to carry it from right to left.  The arm is held by a latch, catch,
    detent, or dog. This may be liberated by a releaser, trigger, key, or
    finger-piece.


CLS 84/490
TXT There is a latch for each arm.


CLS 84/491
TXT The latches are fixed and the arms are moved slightly to release them.


CLS 84/492
TXT There is a releaser, key, or pedal for each arm.


CLS 84/493
TXT Both latches and releasers are pivoted.


CLS 84/494
TXT Each latch is integral with its releaser and is pivoted.


CLS 84/495
TXT One latch holds all the arms, so only one releaser is needed.


CLS 84/496
TXT The latch is fixed.  Commonly it holds directly the outermost arm.


CLS 84/497
TXT The latch slides to release the arms successively.


CLS 84/498
TXT The latch has means to catch the following arm before or as it releases the
    front one.


CLS 84/499
TXT The latch is operated by a puff of air.


CLS 84/500
TXT There is only one arm, and this is spring-operated.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 516 and 517.


CLS 84/501
TXT The two functions are served by one integral piece.


CLS 84/502
TXT The player supplies the power to turn the arms through finger-pieces and
    connections called "actuators".


CLS 84/503
TXT One for each arm.


CLS 84/504
TXT One for each arm.


CLS 84/505
TXT The actuator is pivoted.  Often it is a gear or segmental gear.


CLS 84/506
TXT Each finger-piece is integral with its actuator.  The latter is often
    toothed.


CLS 84/507
TXT One finger-piece operates successively all the actuators and arms.
    Accessories, Leaf-turners, Player-operated arms, Single actuator.  A single
    actuator operates all the arms.


CLS 84/508
TXT The actuator moves on step by step to shift the successive arms.


CLS 84/509
TXT The arms and actuator are pivoted on different axes.


CLS 84/510
TXT The actuator has a segmental gear.


CLS 84/511
TXT The actuator slides.


CLS 84/512
TXT It includes a segmental rack.


CLS 84/513
TXT The actuator after shifting one arm returns for the next one.


CLS 84/514
TXT The arms and actuator are pivoted on different axes.


CLS 84/515
TXT The actuator slides.


CLS 84/516
TXT Devices for turning a single leaf or sometimes a sheet around its center.


CLS 84/517
TXT There are no arms with clips, but a single actuator engages successively
    leaves or attachments on them.


CLS 84/518
TXT Devices for partly raising a leaf, so that the bar or finger may pass under
    it.


CLS 84/519
TXT The leaf is lifted by a suction-head.


CLS 84/520
TXT The leaves are notched or otherwise modified to cooperate with the
    mechanism.


CLS 84/521
TXT The leaves carry iron disks to be attracted by magnets on the transfer-bar.


CLS 84/600
TXT Electrical musical tone generation:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including means for generating or modifying
    electric currents or potentials to produce varying electric currents or
    potentials in combination with, or intended for converting the varying
    electric currents or potentials into sound vibrations for the production of
    musical tones.

    (1)     Note.  For devices which generate or modify an electric current or
    potential so as to produce a particular waveform, search the following
    classes:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 106+
    for waveform or waveshape determinative circuits.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, appropriate subclasses for
    electrical generators, particularly subclass 111 for generated wave
    modifications; subclass 160 for rotary frequency converters, and subclasses
    166+ for induction and variable reluctance type A. C. generators.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    miscellaneous generator systems for generating electric currents and
    potentials.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous nonlinear circuits using
    active devices such as tubes or transistors.

    331,    Oscillators, appropriate subclasses for electrical oscillator
    systems, per se.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 20 for electric
    waveshaping networks of the passive type and subclass 167 for electric wave
    filters.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for inductive reactors and
    transformers which are provided with fixed or movable elements (e.g.,
    having a moving armature to modify the impedance of an inductive reactor).

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 69 for mechanically variable
    resistors actuated by musical instrument playing keys.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    electric power conversion systems; particularly subclasses 13+ for
    rectifying and inverting systems, and subclasses 157+ for frequency
    conversion systems.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    51+ for speech synthesis.


CLS 84/601
TXT Data storage:

    Subject matter under subclass 600 wherein tone characteristic informations
    such as timbre, envelope, harmonic contents, pitch or etc., are retained
    and retrievable to produce musical tone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 111 and 113 for
    storing or recording voltage or current.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 32 for
    prior analog to digital conversion; subclasses 55+ for magnetic recording
    and producing; subclass 131 for recording medium, per se.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 862 for
    analog storing.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclasses
    for memory, per se, and subclass 48 for magnetic analog storage.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 63 for sound
    reproduction for toy or novelty; subclass 86 for acoustic signal storage
    and retrieval; subclasses 272+ for storage medium, per se.

    704,    Data Processing:  Speech Signal Processing, Linguistics, Language
    Translation, and Audio Compression/Decompression, subclasses 206+ for
    storage of pitch and formats.


CLS 84/602
TXT Digital memory circuit (e.g., RAM, ROM, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 601 wherein the tone characteristic
    information is stored by digital memory circuit in a discrete format (e.g.,
    RAM, ROM, etc.) to produce musical tone.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for generating musical tone
    based on digital combinational circuit (See this class subclass 647 for
    digital combinational circuit).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 32 for
    prior analog to digital conversion before storage; subclass 39 for digital
    storage; subclasses 55+ for magnetic recording and retrieval; subclasses
    131+ for storage medium, per se.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclasses,
    for specific memory systems, per se.

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclasses 100+ for generic storage accessing and control in digital data
    processing systems.


CLS 84/603
TXT Sampling (e.g., with A/D conversion):

    Subject matter under subclass 602 wherein an analog sound is digitized and
    stored for future retrieval.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation and Conversion, subclasses 122+ for generic
    A/D conversion with sampling.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 32 for
    analog to digital conversion prior to storage.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 178 for
    sampled data systems, per se.


CLS 84/604
TXT Waveform memory:

    Subject matter under subclass 602 wherein a waveform is digitally stored.


CLS 84/605
TXT Read out at different rates:

    Subject matter under subclass 604 wherein the waveforms are read out from
    memory at various rates that correspond to desired pitches.

    SEARCH CLASS:

     365,   Static Information and Retrieval, subclass 230 for addressing a
    waveform memory, per se.


CLS 84/606
TXT Read out at fixed rate:

    Subject matter under subclass 604 wherein the waveforms are read out from
    memory at a constant rate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    605,    for read out at different rates.


CLS 84/607
TXT Recursive algorithm:

    Subject matter under subclass 604 wherein a plural period waveform is
    achieved by rereading the same waveform from the same memory location.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    605,    for read out at different rates.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 194 data
    processing control system with specific algorithm.


CLS 84/608
TXT Fourier coefficient memory:

    Subject matter under subclass 602 wherein storage locations are provided
    for the Fourier coefficients.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    602,    for digital memory circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses
    726.01+ and 827 for digital and analog Fourier transformers.


CLS 84/609
TXT Note sequence:

    Subject matter under subclass 602 wherein a succession of musical notes is
    sequentially processed by digital memory circuit for performance or
    comparison.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclass 408 for simulated musical
    instruments.


CLS 84/610
TXT Accompaniment:

    Subject matter under subclass 609 wherein the stored sequence is used as a
    musical support for a voice or melody.


CLS 84/611
TXT Rhythm:

    Subject matter under subclass 610 wherein the information represents the
    timing intervals of the musical piece.


CLS 84/612
TXT Tempo control:

    Subject matter under subclass 611 wherein the rate or speed of rhythm is
    variable.


CLS 84/613
TXT Chords:

    Subject matter under subclass 610 wherein the note sequence contains a
    plurality of notes played simultaneously.


CLS 84/614
TXT Reiteration:

    Subject matter under subclass 610 wherein the plural tones are repetitively
    played in sequence.


CLS 84/615
TXT Selecting circuits:

    Subject matter under subclass 602 comprising a circuit which selects any
    musical parameter (e.g., pitch, timbre, etc.).


CLS 84/616
TXT Fundamental tone detection or extraction:

    Subject matter under subclass 615 wherein the fundamental or pitch is
    detected and used to activate or modify a musical system.


CLS 84/617
TXT Multiplexing or scanning:

    Subject matter under subclass 615 wherein the selecting circuits are
    assigned by time division multiplexing or scanning.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825+ for selective scanning
    devices.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for time division
    multiplexing, per se.


CLS 84/618
TXT Priority or preference circuits:

    Subject matter under subclass 615 wherein a plurality of musical notes or
    keys are selected with a certain note or notes having precedence over
    others selected; e.g., highest or lowest notes having priority over any
    other selected.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 1+ for signal discriminating, comparing, or selecting.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.5 and 825.51 for
    lockout or priority circuits.


CLS 84/619
TXT Transposition:

    Subject matter under subclass 615 wherein a musical piece is written or
    performed in a key other than the original or given key.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 157+ for converting a
    first frequency into a second frequency.


CLS 84/620
TXT Stops:

    Subject matter under subclass 615 wherein a circuit or system selects a
    musical voice, tone color, timbre or electrically simulated organ pipe
    sound.


CLS 84/621
TXT Noise reduction (e.g., error prevention):

    Subject matter under subclass 602 wherein circuitry is provided to reduce
    electrical noises, transients or unwanted disturbances.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 574 for
    noise reduction of a monitoring or sensing system.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    71.1+ for acoustical noise or sound cancellation; subclasses 94.1+ for
    noise or distortion suppression.


CLS 84/622
TXT Tone synthesis or timbre control:

    Subject matter under subclass 602 wherein the harmonic content of a note is
    controlled or modified.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 106+
    for waveform or waveshape determinative systems.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 100+ for miscellaneous converting, shaping, or
    generating.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 28 for audio tone
    controls; subclasses 167+ for lumped parameter filters, per se.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses
    724.011+ for filtering by specialized function, e.g., digital filtering.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    101 through 103 for automatic tone control or equalization of an audio
    signal; subclass 118 for signal processing of musical instruments, per se.


CLS 84/623
TXT Time varying or dynamic fourier components:

    Subject matter under subclass 622 wherein the Fourier components are time
    varying or dynamic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    608,    for a constant stored Fourier component.


CLS 84/624
TXT Modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 622 wherein tones are synthesized or modified
    by varying a carrier wave in accordance with a modulation wave.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 16+ for phase or frequency modulation;
    subclasses 31+ for amplitude modulation.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 29
    through 30 for the frequency modulation of stored data.


CLS 84/625
TXT Mixing:

    Subject matter under subclass 622 wherein two or more signals are combined
    to form a composite waveform.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 113+ for a miscellaneous frequency mixing circuit.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 4 for mixing
    signals that originate from storage.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclass
    119 for audio system mixers, per se.


CLS 84/626
TXT Expression or special effects (e.g., force or velocity responsive, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 602 for providing an indication of feeling or
    artistic execution to the musical tones.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 488+ for velocity measuring per
    se.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 261+ for miscellaneous delay circuits.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 28 for measuring key
    switch velocity optically.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 283.1+ for
    pressure (force) responsive capacitors.


CLS 84/627
TXT Envelope shaping (i.e., attack, decay, sustain or release):

    Subject matter under subclass 626 for providing or modifying an amplitude
    contour of an activated tone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 306+ for signal shaping by amplitude control.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, appropriate subclasses for
    networks delay.


CLS 84/628
TXT Portamento or glissando:

    Subject matter under subclass 626 for producing an audible continuous glide
    from one tone to a second tone.


CLS 84/629
TXT Vibrato or tremolo:

    Subject matter under subclass 626 wherein an audio tone is frequency or
    amplitude modulated with a subaudio frequency.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 178 for producing vibrato in the oscillator
    output frequency.

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 16+ for frequency modulation which produces
    vibrato; subclasses 31+ for amplitude modulation which produces tremolo.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclass 62
    for tremolo or vibrato effects.


CLS 84/630
TXT Reverberation:

    Subject matter under subclass 626 for providing time delays that simulate a
    plurality of acoustic reflections of a given tone; e.g., echo.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 87+ for echo systems, per se.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    63+ for reverberation.


CLS 84/631
TXT Chorus, ensemble, or celeste:

    Subject matter under subclass 626 providing for the combining of a slightly
    detuned tone with the original tone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    89 through 90 for rotating speakers that produce a chorus or "Leslie"
    effect.


CLS 84/632
TXT Chiff or percussive transients:

    Subject matter under subclass 626 wherein transients are introduced into
    the initial sounding portion of the envelope to simulate the hiss or noise
    of an organ pipe.


CLS 84/633
TXT Loudness control:

    Subject matter under subclass 626 wherein the amplitude or volume of the
    musical tones may be regulated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    104+ for amplitude or volume control of an audio signal.


CLS 84/634
TXT Accompaniment:

    Subject matter under subclass 602 wherein digital data represents a musical
    support or background.


CLS 84/635
TXT Rhythm:

    Subject matter under subclass 634 wherein the information represents timing
    intervals of a musical piece.


CLS 84/636
TXT Tempo control:

    Subject matter under subclass 635 wherein the rate or speed of rhythm is
    variable.


CLS 84/637
TXT Chords:

    Subject matter under subclass 634 wherein the data represents a plurality
    of musical tones to be played simultaneously.


CLS 84/638
TXT Arpeggio:

    Subject matter under subclass 634 wherein the data represents chord tones
    to be played in sequence one at a time.


CLS 84/639
TXT Photoelectric:

    Subject matter under subclass 601 including optical and electrical means
    for storing data representative of the musical tones.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for photocell systems.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 173+ for
    the activation of solenoids from a condition responsive photosensor.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 295 for a switch which acts in response to a
    light source or modifier which ultimately controls, for example, an
    oscillator; subclass 802 for light activated switches, per se.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 112 for generic
    photoelectric memory systems.


CLS 84/640
TXT Variable speed:

    Subject matter under subclass 639 wherein different pitches are obtained by
    varying the rotational speed of a diffraction or grating disk.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 237+ for pre-photocell grating systems.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    558+ for optical diffraction devices.


CLS 84/641
TXT Magnetic:

    Subject matter under subclass 601 including magnetic and electrical means
    for storing data representative of the musical tones.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 55+
    for general features pertaining to magnetic storage of information;
    subclasses 131+ for the storage medium, per se.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 48 for analog
    storage on magnetic medium.


CLS 84/642
TXT Tape:

    Subject matter under subclass 641 wherein the magnetic storage medium is in
    a tape form.


CLS 84/643
TXT Capacitive:

    Subject matter under subclass 601 including capacitive means for storing
    data representative of the musical tones.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 271+ for
    capacitors, per se.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 102 for
    capacitative type read only memories.


CLS 84/644
TXT Constructional details:

    Subject matter under subclass 601 including mechanical features of the
    musical instrument.


CLS 84/645
TXT MIDI (musical instrument digital interface):

    Subject matter under subclass 601 including an interface between an
    instrument and a digital processing system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 188+
    for generic data processing with operator control interface.


CLS 84/646
TXT Fret control:

    Subject matter under subclass 601 wherein the stored data is controlled via
    a stringed musical instrument fingerboard; e.g., switches on a guitar
    fingerboard.


CLS 84/647
TXT Digital combinational circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 600 wherein binary inputs are provided to
    digital combinational circuit to produce musical tone.

    (1)     Note.  Digital combinational circuit performs some unique logic
    function such as decording, encording, multiplexing, comparison or an
    arithmetic operation with binary numbers.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for stored tone
    characteristic information to produce musical tone (See this class,
    subclass 602 for digital memory circuit).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, appropriate subclasses for oscillators used to
    provided a digital signal.


CLS 84/648
TXT With frequency multiplication or division:

    Subject matter under subclass 647 wherein the discrete notes of a complete
    musical scale are obtained by varying the oscillator output frequency.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 113+ for miscellaneous frequency multiplication or
    division.

    331,    Oscillators, appropriate subclasses for oscillators used to provide
    a digital signal.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclass 157 for converting
    frequencies.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclasses 118+ for pulse frequency dividing chains;
    subclass 47 for pulse multiplication or division.


CLS 84/649
TXT Note sequence:

    Subject matter under subclass 647 wherein a succession of musical notes is
    sequentially processed by digital combinational circuit for performance or
    comparison.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    609+,   for note sequence with digital data storage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 26 for applications of pulse dividers
    utilizing memory.


CLS 84/650
TXT Accompaniment (e.g., chords, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 649 wherein the stored sequence is used as a
    musical support for a voice or melody.


CLS 84/651
TXT Rhythm:

    Subject matter under subclass 650 wherein the information represents timing
    intervals of the musical piece.


CLS 84/652
TXT Tempo control:

    Subject matter under subclass 651 wherein the rate or speed of rhythm is
    variable.


CLS 84/653
TXT Selecting circuits:

    Subject matter under subclass 647 comprising a circuit which selects
    musical parameter (e.g., pitch, timbre, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    615+,   for selective circuit with digital storage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses
    for selecting circuits in conjunction with musical instruments.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 112+
    for switching systems.


CLS 84/654
TXT Fundamental tone detection or extraction:

    Subject matter under subclass 653 wherein the fundamental or pitch is
    detected and used to activate or modify a musical system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    616+,   for fundamental tone detection or extraction with digital storage.


CLS 84/655
TXT Multiplexing or scanning:

    Subject matter under subclass 653 wherein the selecting circuits are
    assigned by time division multiplexing or scanning.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    617+,   for multiplexing or scanning with digital storage.


CLS 84/656
TXT Priority or preference circuits:

    Subject matter under subclass 653 wherein a plurality of musical notes or
    keys are selected with a certain note or notes having precedence over
    others; e.g., highest or lowest notes having priority.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    618+,   for priority or preference circuits with digital storage.


CLS 84/657
TXT Transposition:

    Subject matter under subclass 653 wherein a musical piece is written or
    performed in a key other than the original or given key.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    445,    for transposition structure.

    619,    for transposition with digital storage.


CLS 84/658
TXT Force or velocity responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 653 wherein the selecting circuit is
    responsive to the applied pressure force or velocity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    626+,   for force or velocity responsive with digital storage.


CLS 84/659
TXT Tone synthesis or timbre control:

    Subject matter under subclass 647 wherein harmonic content of a note is
    controlled or modified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    622+,   for tone synthesis or timbre control with digital storage.


CLS 84/660
TXT Mixing:

    Subject matter under subclass 659 wherein two or more signals are combined
    to form a composite waveform.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    625,    for mixing with digital storage.


CLS 84/661
TXT Filtering:

    Subject matter under subclass 659 wherein a desired waveform is obtained by
    removing one or more partials or harmonics.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 105+
    for harmonic filter or neutralizer.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 186 for
    electromechanical filters using lumped parameters.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses
    724.011+ for digital filtering by a calculating computer.


CLS 84/662
TXT Expression or special effects:

    Subject matter under subclass 647 for providing an indication of feeling or
    artistic execution to the musical tones.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    626,    for expression or special effects with digital storage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 182 for specific amplitude control to produce
    tremolo.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclass 62
    for vibrato or tremolo.


CLS 84/663
TXT Envelope shaping (i.e., attack, decay, sustain or release):

    Subject matter under subclass 662 for providing or modifying an amplitude
    contour of an activated tone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    627+,   for envelope shaping with digital storage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 306+ for signal shaping by amplitude control.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, appropriate subclasses for
    network delay.


CLS 84/664
TXT Chorus, ensemble or celeste:

    Subject matter under subclass 662 providing for the combining of a slightly
    detuned tone with the original tone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

     631+,  for chorus, ensemble, or celeste with digital storage.


CLS 84/665
TXT Loudness control:

    Subject matter under subclass 662 wherein the amplitude or volume of the
    musical tones may be regulated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    633+,   for loudness control with digital storage.


CLS 84/666
TXT Accompaniment:

    Subject matter under subclass 647 wherein digital data represents a musical
    support or background.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    610+,   for accompaniment with note sequence.

    634+,   for accompaniment with digital memory circuit.

    650+,   for accompaniment with note sequence of digital combinational
    circuit.


CLS 84/667
TXT Rhythm:

    Subject matter under subclass 666 wherein the information represents timing
    intervals of a musical piece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    611+,   for rhythm with note sequence of digital storage.

    635+,   for rhythm with accompaniment of digital storage.

    651+,   for rhythm with accompaniment of digital combinational circuit.


CLS 84/668
TXT Tempo control:

    Subject matter under subclass 667 wherein the rate or speed of rhythm is
    variable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    612+,   for tempo control with note sequence of digital storage.

    636+,   for tempo control with accompaniment of digital storage.

    652+,   for tempo control of digital combinational circuit.


CLS 84/669
TXT Chords:

    Subject matter under subclass 666 wherein the data represents a plurality
    of musical tones to be played simultaneously.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    613+,   for chords with digital memory circuit.

    637+,   for chords with accompaniment.


CLS 84/670
TXT Constructional details:

    Subject matter under subclass 647 including mechanical features of the
    musical instrument.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    644,    for construction details with digital storage.


CLS 84/671
TXT Electric analog oscillators:

    Subject matter under subclass 600 wherein the varying electric currents or
    potentials originate from an analog oscillator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, appropriate subclasses for oscillator circuits, per se.


CLS 84/672
TXT Variable frequency:

    Subject matter under subclass 671 wherein the oscillator is changed so that
    the discrete notes of a complete musical scale are obtained.


CLS 84/673
TXT With variable filtering:

    Subject matter under subclass 672 wherein the output of the oscillator is
    applied to a filter wherein partials or harmonics to be removed can be
    varied.


CLS 84/674
TXT With space discharging means:

    Subject matter under subclass 672 wherein the oscillator includes one or
    more devices in which conduction of electrons takes place through a vacuum
    or gaseous medium.


CLS 84/675
TXT With frequency multiplication or division:

    Subject matter under subclass 671 wherein the discrete notes of a musical
    scale are derived through frequency multipliers or dividers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    648,    for frequency multiplication or division with digital combinational
    circuit.


CLS 84/676
TXT With transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 675 wherein the oscillator, frequency
    multipliers or frequency dividers include a semiconductor device with three
    or more electrodes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 113+ for frequency conversion or control.


CLS 84/677
TXT With space discharging means:

    Subject matter under subclass 675 wherein the oscillators, frequency
    multipliers or frequency dividers include one or more devices in which
    conduction of electrons takes place through a vacuum or gaseous medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    674,    for space discharging mean with variable frequency.


CLS 84/678
TXT Selecting circuits:

    Subject matter under subclass 671 including a circuit which selects a
    musical parameter, e.g., pitch or timbre.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    615,    for selecting circuit with digital storage.

    653,    for selecting circuits with digital combinational circuit.


CLS 84/679
TXT With transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 678 wherein the oscillator, frequency
    multipliers or frequency dividers include a semiconductor device with three
    or more electrodes.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    676,    for transistor with frequency multiplication or division.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 113+ for frequency conversion or control.


CLS 84/680
TXT With space discharging means:

    Subject matter under subclass 678 wherein the selecting circuit includes a
    device in which conduction of electrons takes place through a vacuum or
    gaseous medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    674,    for space discharging means with variable frequency.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 113+ for frequency conversion or control.


CLS 84/681
TXT Fundamental tone detection or extraction:

    Subject matter under subclass 678 wherein the fundamental or pitch is
    detected and used to activate or modify a musical system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    616,    for fundamental tone detection or extraction with digital storage.

    654,    for fundamental tone detection or extraction with digital
    combinational circuit.


CLS 84/682
TXT Multiplexing or scanning:

    Subject matter under subclass 678 wherein the selecting circuits are
    assigned by time-division multiplexing or scanning.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    616,    for multiplexing or scanning with digital storage.

    655,    for multiplexing or scanning with digital combinational circuit.


CLS 84/683
TXT Noise reduction (e.g., error prevention):

    Subject matter under subclass 678 wherein circuitry is provided to reduce
    electrical noise, transients or unwanted disturbances.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    621,    for noise reduction (e.g., error prevention) with digital storage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 149 for noise, hum or distortion bucking
    introduced into signal channel.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    71.1+ for acoustical noise or sound cancellation; subclasses 94.1+ for
    noise or distortion suppression.


CLS 84/684
TXT Priority or preference circuits:

    Subject matter under subclass 678 wherein a plurality of musical notes or
    keys are selected with a certain note or notes having precedence over
    others; e.g., highest or lowest notes having priority.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    618,    for priority or preference circuits with digital storage.

    656,    for priority or preference circuits with digital combinational
    circuit.


CLS 84/685
TXT Transposition:

    Subject matter under subclass 678 wherein a musical piece is written or
    performed in a key other than the original or given key.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    619,    for transposition with digital storage.

    657,    for transposition with digital combinational circuit.


CLS 84/686
TXT Stops:

    Subject matter under subclass 678 wherein the circuit selects a musical
    voice, tone color, timbre or electrically simulated organ pipe sounds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    620,    for stops with digital storage.


CLS 84/687
TXT Force or velocity responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 678 wherein the selecting circuit is
    responsive to the applied pressure, force or velocity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    626,    for force or velocity responsive with digital storage.

    658,    for force or velocity responsive with digital combinational circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

     73,    Measuring and Testing, subclasses 488+ for speed or acceleration
    testing.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, Dig. 32 for speed
    responsive switching.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 160 for speed or
    velocity measuring.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 69 for variable resistance key
    activation devices.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 28 for velocity measuring
    utilizing a light detector.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 802 for a position or condition responsive
    switch.


CLS 84/688
TXT With magnetic selector:

    Subject matter under subclass 687 wherein the selecting circuit includes a
    magnetic selector or selectors.


CLS 84/689
TXT With capacitive selector:

    Subject matter under subclass 687 wherein the selecting circuit includes a
    capacitive selector or selectors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, Dig. 1 for capacitive
    switching.


CLS 84/690
TXT With variable resistance selector:

    Subject matter under subclass 687 wherein the selecting circuit includes a
    variable resistor or resistors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 69+ for musical instrument playing
    key actuated variable resistance.


CLS 84/691
TXT Noise reduction (e.g., error prevention):

    Subject matter under subclass 671 wherein circuitry is provided to reduce
    electrical noises, transients or unwanted disturbances.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    621,    for noise reduction (e.g., error prevention) with digital storage.

    683,    for noise reduction (e.g., error prevention) with electric analog
    oscillators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation and Conversion, subclasses 94+ for error
    detection or correction.


CLS 84/692
TXT Tone synthesis or timbre control:

    Subject matter under subclass 671 wherein the harmonic content of a note is
    controlled or modified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    622,    for tone synthesis or timbre control with digital storage.

    659,    for tone synthesis or timbre control with digital combinational
    circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 106+
    for waveform or waveshape determinative systems.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 100+ for miscellaneous signal converting, shaping, or
    generating.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 28 for audio tone
    control.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclass
    101 for automatic tone control; subclass 118 for signal processing of
    musical instruments; subclasses 101 through 103 for automatic tone or
    equalization of an audio signal.


CLS 84/693
TXT Time varying or dynamic fourier components:

    Subject matter under subclass 692 wherein the Fourier components are
    variable with respect to time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    623,    for time varying or dynamic Fourier components with digital storage.


CLS 84/694
TXT Modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 692 wherein tones are synthesized or modified
    by varying a carrier wave in accordance with a modulation wave.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    624,    for modulation with digital storage.


CLS 84/695
TXT Amplitude:

    Subject matter under subclass 694 wherein the carrier wave is amplitude
    modulated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 31+ for amplitude modulation.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclass 268 for amplitude
    modulation.


CLS 84/696
TXT Angle (i.e., frequency or phase):

    Subject matter under subclass 694 wherein the carrier wave is angle (i.e.,
    frequency or phase) modulated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 16+ for phase or frequency modulation.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclass 271 for angle modulation
    in systems using alternating or pulsating current.


CLS 84/697
TXT Mixing:

    Subject matter under subclass 692 wherein two or more tones are combined to
    form a composite waveform.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    625,    for mixing with digital storage.

    660,    for mixing with digital combinational circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 113+ for a miscellaneous frequency mixing circuit.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclass
    119 for audio system mixers, per se.


CLS 84/698
TXT Partials (i.e., harmonics):

    Subject matter under subclass 697 wherein two or more partials or harmonics
    are combined to form a composite waveform.


CLS 84/699
TXT Filtering:

    Subject matter under subclass 692 wherein a desired waveform is obtained by
    removing one or more partials or harmonics.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    661,    for filtering with digital combinational circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnecting Systems, subclass 105
    for harmonic filter or neutralizer.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 167 for frequency
    domain filters using lumped parameters; subclass 186 for electromechanical
    type filters.


CLS 84/700
TXT Variable:

    Subject matter under subclass 699 wherein the partials or harmonics to be
    removed can be varied in accordance with a desired timbre or color.


CLS 84/701
TXT Expression or special effects:

    Subject matter under subclass 671 for providing an indication of feeling or
    artistic execution to the musical tones.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    626,    for expression or special effects with digital storage.

    662,    for expression or special effects with digital combinational
    circuit.


CLS 84/702
TXT Envelope shaping (e.g., attack, decay, sustain or release):

    Subject matter under subclass 701 for providing or modifying an amplitude
    contour of an activated tone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    627,    for envelope shaping (e.g., attack, decay, sustain or release) with
    digital storage.

    663,    for envelope shaping (e.g., attack, decay, sustain or release) with
    digital combinational circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 306+ for signal shaping by controlling the amplitude
    thereof.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 182 for amplitude control of an oscillator.


CLS 84/703
TXT Attack and decay:

    Subject matter under subclass 702 for producing or modifying only the
    attack and decay of an activated tone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    627,    for envelope shaping with digital storage.

    663,    for envelope shaping with digital combinational circuit.


CLS 84/704
TXT Portamento or glissando:

    Subject matter under subclass 701 for producing an audible glide from one
    tone to a second tone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    628,    for portamento or glissando with digital storage.


CLS 84/705
TXT Tremolo:

    Subject matter under subclass 701 providing for rapid iteration of or a
    modulation in the amplitude of a note at sub-audio frequencies.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    629,    for tremolo with digital storage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclass 62
    for tremolo or vibrato.


CLS 84/706
TXT Vibrato:

    Subject matter under subclass 701 providing a modulation in the frequency
    or phase of a note at sub-audio frequencies.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    629,    for vibrato with digital storage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclass 62
    for tremolo or vibrato.


CLS 84/707
TXT Reverberation:

    Subject matter under subclass 701 providing for time delays that simulate a
    plurality of reflections of a given tone; e.g., echo.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    630,    for reverberation with digital storage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclass 63
    for reverberators, per se.


CLS 84/708
TXT Chorus, ensemble or celeste:

    Subject matter under subclass 701 providing for the combining of a slightly
    detuned tone with the original tone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    631,    for chorus, ensemble, or celeste with digital storage.

    664,    for chorus, ensemble, or celeste with digital combinational circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    89 through 90 for driven speaker systems to produce vibrato or chorus
    effects.


CLS 84/709
TXT Trill:

    Subject matter under subclass 701 wherein the rapid alternation of two
    tones either a whole or a half tone apart.


CLS 84/710
TXT Chiff or percussive transients:

    Subject matter under subclass 701 wherein transients are introduced into
    the initial sounding of the tone during the initial portion of the envelope
    to simulate the hiss or noise of an organ pipe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    632,    for chiff or percussive transients with digital storage.


CLS 84/711
TXT Loudness control:

    Subject matter under subclass 710 wherein amplitude or volume of the
    musical tones may be regulated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    633,    for loudness control with digital storage.

    665,    for loudness control with digital combinational circuit.


CLS 84/712
TXT Accompaniment:

    Subject matter under subclass 671 for providing a musical support or
    background.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    610,    for accompaniment with note sequence of digital memory circuit.

    634,    for accompaniment with digital memory circuit.

    650,    for accompaniment with note sequence of digital combinational
    circuit.

    666,    for accompaniment with digital combinational circuit.


CLS 84/713
TXT Rhythm:

    Subject matter under subclass 712 for creating or modifying the timing
    intervals of a music piece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    611,    for rhythm with note sequence of digital memory circuit.

    635,    for rhythm with digital memory circuit.

    651,    for rhythm with note sequence of digital combinational circuit.

    667,    for rhythm with digital combinational circuit.


CLS 84/714
TXT Tempo control:

    Subject matter under subclass 713 wherein the rate or speed of rhythm is
    variable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    612,    for tempo control with note sequence of digital memory circuit.

    636,    for tempo control with digital memory circuit.

    652,    for tempo control with note sequence of digital combinational
    circuit.

    668,    for tempo control with digital combinational circuit.


CLS 84/715
TXT Chords:

    Subject matter under subclass 712 wherein a plurality of notes are played
    simultaneously.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    613,    for chords with note sequence of digital memory circuit.

    637,    for chords with digital memory circuit.

    669,    for chords with digital combinational circuit.


CLS 84/716
TXT Arpeggio:

    Subject matter under subclass 712 wherein the notes of a chord are played
    in sequence.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    638,    for arpeggio with digital storage.


CLS 84/717
TXT Reiteration:

    Subject matter under subclass 712 wherein plural tones are repetitively
    played in sequence one at a time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    614,    for reiteration with digital storage.


CLS 84/718
TXT Constructional details:

    Subject matter under subclass 671 including mechanical features of the
    musical instrument.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for dealing with specifics of musical instrument construction.

    644,    for construction details with digital storage.

    670,    for construction details with digital combinational circuit.


CLS 84/719
TXT Keyboard:

    Subject matter under subclass 718 wherein the mechanical feature is a
    keyboard or a fret-board.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    691,    for noise reduction with electric analog oscillators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation and Conversion, subclasses 22+ for code
    selecting devices, e.g., keyboards or keypads.


CLS 84/720
TXT Keyswitch structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 718 wherein the mechanical feature is a
    keyswitch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers or Breakers, appropriate subclasses
    for specific switch construction details.


CLS 84/721
TXT Foot control:

    Subject matter under subclass 718 wherein the mechanical feature is a foot
    controlled device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers or Breakers, subclass 86.5 for foot
    controlled switches, per se.


CLS 84/722
TXT Fret control:

    Subject matter under subclass 671 wherein oscillators are controlled via a
    stringed musical instrument fingerboard; e.g., switches on the guitar
    fingerboard.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    646,    for fret control with digital storage.


CLS 84/723
TXT Transducers:

    Subject matter under subclass 600 including means which converts energy
    other than electrical into electrical energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 594 for methods of making an acoustic
    transducer.

    178,    Telegraph, subclasses 47 and 48 for electrical signaling systems in
    which vibrating means such as reeds, tuning forks and diaphragms are
    utilized in transmitting or receiving messages or signals.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, appropriate subclasses for
    general application of converting mechanical motion to electrical currents
    or potentials.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    general application of converting mechanical motion to electrical currents
    or potential, particularly subclass 3 for reciprocating or oscillating
    generator systems.

    704,    Data Processing:  Speech Signal Processing, Linguistics, Language
    Translation, and Audio Compression/Decompression, subclasses 200 through
    504 for speech signal processing, or bandwidth, or time compression, or
    expansion of an audio signal.


CLS 84/724
TXT Photoelectric:

    Subject matter under subclass 723 including means which converts varying
    light intensity into varying electric currents or potential.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    639,    for photoelectric with digital storage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for photocell electric circuits and
    photocell apparatus; subclasses 206+ for photocell with coded record;
    subclasses 232+ for photocells with light chopper type.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 59 for amplifiers including light controlled
    or light activated means.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 86+ for
    storage or retrieval of audio signals.


CLS 84/725
TXT Electromagnetic:

    Subject matter under subclass 723 including means which converts varying
    magnetic flux into varying electric currents or potentials.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    641,    for magnetic with digital storage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 602.1+ for methods of manufacturing an
    electromagnet, transformer or indicator.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for inductive reactors and
    transformers which are provided with fixed or movable elements (e.g.,
    having a moving armature to modify the impedance of an inductive reactor).

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    115 for magnetic microphone.


CLS 84/726
TXT String:

    Subject matter under subclass 725 wherein the varying magnetic flux is
    caused by a moving string.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

     7+,    172 and 173+, for miscellaneous stringed instruments.


CLS 84/727
TXT With adjustable means:

    Subject matter under subclass 726 wherein the transducer or a component
    thereof is adjustable relative to a string.


CLS 84/728
TXT Noise reduction (e.g., error prevention):

    Subject matter under subclass 726 wherein circuitry is provided to reduce
    electrical noises, transients or unwanted disturbances.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    621,    for noise reduction with digital storage.

    683,    for noise reduction with selecting circuit of analog oscillators.

    691,    noise reduction with analog oscillators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse, or Digital Communications, subclasses 284 and 285 for
    antinoise or distortion systems using alternating or pulsating current.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, appropriate
    subclass acoustical noise or sound cancellation; subclasses 94.1+ for noise
    or distortion suppression.


CLS 84/729
TXT Reed:

    Subject matter under subclass 725 wherein the varying magnetic flux is
    caused by a moving elongated flexural strip or bar with a relatively large
    length to width ratio.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402+    and 411+, for miscellaneous musical instruments employing rigid
    vibrators.


CLS 84/730
TXT Piezoelectric:

    Subject matter under subclass 723 wherein a varying mechanically stressed
    crystal causes a varying current or voltage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 29.35 for methods of making a piezoelectric
    device.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 311+ for
    piezoelectric elements and devices.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclass
    114 for piezoelectric microphone.


CLS 84/731
TXT String:

    Subject matter under subclass 730 wherein the varying mechanical stress is
    caused by a string.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7+,     172 and 173+, for miscellaneous stringed instruments.

    726,    for string with electromagnetic transducer.


CLS 84/732
TXT Reed:

    Subject matter under subclass 730 wherein the varying mechanical stress is
    caused by an elongated flexural strip or bar with a relatively large length
    to width ratio.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402+    and 411+, for miscellaneous musical instruments employing rigid
    vibrators.

    729,    for reed with electromagnetic transducer.


CLS 84/733
TXT Capacitive:

    Subject matter under subclass 723 wherein a varying capacitance produces a
    varying electric current or potential.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 181 and Dig. 1
    for electrostatic switches.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 271+ for
    electrostatic capacitors.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclass
    113 for electrostatic microphone.


CLS 84/734
TXT Strain gauge:

    Subject matter under subclass 723 wherein a varying force, tension or
    pressure is converted into a varying electrical current or potential.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 621.1 for methods of making strain gauges.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 2+ for strain gauges; subclass 69
    for variable resistors controlled by musical instrument playing keys.


CLS 84/735
TXT Tone synthesis or timbre control:

    Subject matter under subclass 723 wherein the harmonic content of a note is
    controlled or modified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    622,    for tone synthesis or timbre control with digital storage.

    659,    for tone synthesis or timbre control with digital combinational
    circuit.

    692,    for tone synthesis or timbre control with electric analog
    oscillators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 3 for
    circuits in which different frequencies are superimposed; subclasses 106+
    for waveform or waveshape determinative systems.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, appropriate subclasses for
    dynamoelectric frequency changers.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 100+ for miscellaneous signal converting, shaping, or
    generating, and particularly subclasses 113+ for miscellaneous harmonic
    generators.

    331,    Oscillators, appropriate subclasses for general harmonic generators.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 28 for audio tone
    controls.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 157+ for electric
    power frequency conversion systems.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclass
    101 for automatic tone control; subclass 118 for signal processing of
    musical instruments, per se; subclasses 101 through 103 for automatic tone
    control or equalization of audio signals.


CLS 84/736
TXT Filtering:

    Subject matter under subclass 735 wherein a desired waveform is obtained by
    removing one or more partials or harmonics.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    661,    for filtering with digital combinational circuit.

    699+,   for filtering with electric analog oscillators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical on linear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 311 for transient limiting utilizing a filter and
    subclasses 552+ for unwanted signal suppression with an active filter.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 303 for filters included or in conjunction
    with an amplifier.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 167+ for lumped
    parameter filters; subclass 165 for frequency or time domain filters and
    delay lines; subclass 166 for time domain filters.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses
    724.011+ for digital filters.


CLS 84/737
TXT Expression or special effects:

    Subject matter under subclass 723 for providing "feeling" or artistic
    execution to the musical tones.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33+,    for expression mechanism.

    157,    for modified expression.

    164,    for expression and tempo marks.

    216+,   for expression devices.

    313,    for tremolo devices.

    374,    for fan tremolo devices.

    626,    for expression or special effects with digital storage.

    662,    for expression or special effects with digital combinational
    circuit.

    701,    for expression or special effects with electric analog oscillators.


CLS 84/738
TXT Envelope shaping (e.g., attack, decay, sustain or release):

    Subject matter under subclass 737 for providing or modifying the contour of
    an activated tone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    627,    for envelope shaping with digital storage.

    663,    for envelope shaping with digital combinational circuit.

    702,    for envelope shaping with electric analog oscillators.


CLS 84/739
TXT Tremolo:

    Subject matter under subclass 737 providing for rapid iteration of or a
    modulation in the amplitude of a note at sub-audio frequencies.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    629,    for tremolo with digital storage.

    705,    for tremolo with electric analog oscillators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 31+ for amplitude modulation.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 268+ for amplitude
    modulation.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclass 62
    for general purpose tremolo.


CLS 84/740
TXT Vibrato:

    Subject matter under subclass 737 providing a modulation in the frequency
    or phase of a note at sub-audio frequencies.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    629,    for vibrato with digital storage.

    706,    for vibrato with electric analog oscillators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 178 for providing vibrato in the oscillator
    output frequency.

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 16+ for frequency modulation.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 271+ for angle
    modulation.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclass 62
    for general purpose vibrato.


CLS 84/741
TXT Loudness control:

    Subject matter under subclass 737 wherein amplitude or volume of the
    musical tone may be regulated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    633,    for loudness control with digital storage.

    665,    for loudness control with digital combinational circuit.

    711,    for loudness control with electric analog oscillators.


CLS 84/742
TXT Selecting circuits:

    Subject matter under subclass 723 including a circuit which selects a
    musical parameter; e.g., pitch or timbre.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    615,    for selecting circuits with digital storage.

    653,    for selecting circuits with digital combinational circuit.

    678,    for selecting circuits with electric analog oscillators.


CLS 84/743
TXT Constructional details:

    Subject matter under subclass 723 including mechanical features of the
    musical instrument.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for dealing with musical instrument construction.

    644,    for construction details with digital storage.

    670,    for construction details with digital combinational circuit.

    718,    for construction details with electric analog oscillators.


CLS 84/744
TXT Keyboard:

    Subject matter under subclass 743 wherein mechanical feature is a keyboard
    or a fretboard.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    423,    for keyboard structure.

    719,    for keyboard with electric analog oscillators.


CLS 84/745
TXT Keyswitch structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 743 wherein the mechanical feature is a
    keyswitch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    720,    for keyswitch structure with electric analog oscillators.


CLS 84/746
TXT Foot control:

    Subject matter under subclass 743 wherein the mechanical feature is a foot
    controlled device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    721,    for foot control with electric analog oscillators.


CLS 86/
TTL AMMUNITION AND EXPLOSIVE-  CHARGE MAKING

CLS 86/
TXT Instruments and processes peculiarly adapted for making fixed ammunition,
    including percussion caps, cartridges, or other explosive charges for
    firearms or ordnance, pyrotechnic devices, blasting charges, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Such single operations as rolling, turning, milling, boring,
    forging, casting, molding, coating, die-shaping, drawing, extruding, even
    though applied to manufacture of ammunition, are classified in appropriate
    functional classes.  Making projectiles or other metal parts of ammunition
    by general metal-working operations is in appropriate metal-working
    classes.  An operation of making a paper tube or paper body generally is in
    Class 493, particularly subclasses 269+ even though applicable to
    manufacture of cartridge cases.

    (2)     Note.  This class also takes subject matter closely related to
    ammunition and explosive-charge making, when not elsewhere provided for,
    including:

    (a)     ammunition shell unloading, subclass 49;

    (b)     bomb disposal, subclass 50.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 1.1, 1.2 and 1.3, and indented subclasses
    respectively.

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses for presses not elsewhere provided
    for.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, for the products produced by the
    processes and apparatus of this class (86).

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, for processes of, or
    apparatus for, removing explosives from explosive shells, particularly
    subclasses 5, 23 and 24, for processes and 94.1+ and 166+ for apparatus.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, for products and
    compositions utilized in this class.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 184+ for processes of
    making paper tubes by a laminating operation.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 212+ for general processes of coating
    particles flakes or granules.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclass 202
    for the destruction of explosives, propellants, or pyrotechnics other than
    bombs.


CLS 86/1.1
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Machines and devices not otherwise classifiable for making the articles
    named in the class definition.


CLS 86/10
TXT Miscellaneous machines and devices for making percussion caps and
    cartridges for firearms.


CLS 86/11
TXT Miscellaneous machines for making metal-headed shells for shot-cartridges.

    (1)     Note.  For shells see Class 102, Ammunition and Explosives,
    subclass 464.


CLS 86/12
TXT Machines for setting reinforces, wads, heads, caps, or for otherwise
    assembling the parts of paper cartridge-shells.


CLS 86/17
TXT Machines for varnishing the interior of cap and cartridge shells or for
    covering the fulminate or shell interior with metal foil.


CLS 86/19
TXT Machines and devices for lubricating bullets, wads, and cartridges.  A few
    machines cut as well as lubricate the wads.


CLS 86/20.1
TXT LOADING FIREWORKS AND BURSTING CHARGES:
    Apparatus or process under the class definition for:

    (1)     Filling or ramming fireworks,

    (2)     Placing the bursting charge in a projectile, or

    (3)     Placing, tamping and/or priming charges in blast holes to be fired
    as blasts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 310+ for blasting means which
    include plugs for closing blast holes.


CLS 86/20.11
TXT Filling and ramming fireworks:
    Subject matter under subclass 20.1 for loading into a suitable enclosure
    compositions appropriate for serving as fire works when discharged.

    (1)     Note.  Fireworks are devices which comprise various combustion of
    explosive and/or combustible materials used to generate colored lights,
    smoke and/or noises for the purpose of either signaling or amusement.  Such
    device sometimes referred to as pyrotechnics.


CLS 86/20.12
TXT By casting:
    Subject matter under subclass 20.1 in which the operation performed
    involves the transfer of the explosive or combustible material in a molten
    condition into a mold or other shape in parting means.


CLS 86/20.13
TXT By vibratory packing:
    Subject matter under subclass 20.1 in which the operation performed
    involves vibration or a confining enclosure containing the explosive or
    combustible material in granular form for the purpose of compacting that
    material.


CLS 86/20.14
TXT Placing bursting charge in projectile:
    Subject matter under subclass 20.1 in which the operation performed
    includes positioning a charge which will be exploded in use within a
    container which will be forcibly ejected.

    (1)     Note.  This may involve, e.g., placement of an explosive charge
    into the shell of a bullet, etc.


CLS 86/20.15
TXT Placing, tamping or priming charge into blasthole:
    Subject matter under subclass 20.1 involving placement of compacting of an
    explosive charge into a cavity in a solid material where it is to be
    detonated.

    (1)     Note.  This may involve, e.g., placement or ramming in of an
    explosive charge into a cylindrical hole bored into a rock quarry, etc.


CLS 86/21
TXT Hand supported and operated devices under subclass 20.


CLS 86/22
TXT Tools for cutting, capping and placing fuses in blasting charges.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, subclass 104.

    30,     Cutlery, appropriate subclasses for mere cutting tools of more
    general application.

    89,     Ordnance, subclasses 6+ for fuse setters for encased fuses of
    explosive devices.


CLS 86/23
TXT Machines and devices not otherwise classifiable for loading or reloading
    fixed ammunition for small-arms and ordnance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 147+ for apparatus to form groups of
    contents units and to subsequently package same.


CLS 86/24
TXT Hand supported and operated devices not otherwise classifiable for
    performing the various operations of loading and reloading cartridges.  A
    few perform various other additional functions, such as molding and sizing
    bullets, sizing and trimming shells, extracting cartridges from barrels or
    firearms, etc.

    (1)     Note.  All devices having a fixed base or means for clamping to a
    fixed support are considered machines throughout this class and are
    correspondingly classified.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclass 3.05 for shell, projectile or wad extractors, per
    se.


CLS 86/25
TXT Machines and devices for filling, wadding, and ramming the charge and then
    contracting the mouth of the shell either above the outer wad or upon the
    periphery of the bullet.  All the operations of loading are performed
    except capping and uncapping and in many cases these also.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 266+ for machines to form a package by
    filling a preformed receptacle and subsequently closing the same.


CLS 86/26
TXT Machines for loading or reloading and crimping cartridges in which the
    shells are fed through the machine in a straight line by means of guides,
    independent holders, or endless linked tables.


CLS 86/27
TXT Machines for loading and crimping, cartridges in which the shells are
    carried to the various loading devices by a rotary table having a
    step-by-step movement.  Many automatic machines are included which perform
    all the loading steps except capping the shells.


CLS 86/28
TXT Hand supported and operated devices for loading and closing
    cartridge-shells either by crimping the cartridge upon the outer wad or
    swaging it upon the bullet.  Some of these implements lack means for
    capping and uncapping the shells or for measuring and inserting the
    contents.


CLS 86/29
TXT Machines and devices for placing the powder and shot in cartridges and
    setting the wads in the same.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20.1,   25, 26, and 27.


CLS 86/30
TXT Machines and devices for compacting the charges in cartridges or setting
    wads in the same.  The machines usually have means for applying the same
    pressure to each of a number of ramming pistons.


CLS 86/31
TXT Instruments for measuring powder and shot charges and conveying the same
    into the shells to be loaded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     26, 27, and 29.


CLS 86/32
TXT Machines for supplying cap and cartridge shells with fulminate.  In many
    cases the explosive is spread or packed in the shell by rapidly rotating
    the latter.


CLS 86/33
TXT Hand-supported devices for measuring charging and placing the same in
    shells.


CLS 86/36
TXT Instruments for removing exploded primers from used cartridges or for
    setting fresh primers, or both.


CLS 86/37
TXT Hand supported and operated devices for removing exploded primers or for
    setting fresh ones, or both.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 244+ for related assembling and
    disassembling tools.

    81,     Tools, subclasses 3.07+ for receptacle closure removing tools.


CLS 86/38
TXT Hand-operated capping and uncapping devices having a receptacle for holding
    and presenting a fresh primer to the capping means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for article dispensers
    not otherwise provided for, including magazine type supply containers.


CLS 86/39
TXT Instruments for closing paper shells upon the outer wad or for swaging a
    metal shell upon the bullet.  The wad may be held by turning in the mouth
    of the shell, by creasing it in longitudinal folds, or by indenting or
    perforating the shell just above the wad.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     25, 26, and 27.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 285+ for machines which complete the
    forming of a package by an end closing operation.


CLS 86/40
TXT Hand supported and operated devices for closing shells to secure the outer
    wad or the bullet in place.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24      and 28.


CLS 86/41
TXT Those elements of crimping-machines which directly effect the closing of
    the cartridge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     25, 26, 27, 39, and 40.


CLS 86/42
TXT Instruments for cutting and attaching cloth patches to bullets.


CLS 86/43
TXT Instruments for pressing bullets into cartridge-shells.


CLS 86/44
TXT Devices for holding shells in convenient position for loading.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31.


CLS 86/45
TXT Instruments for conveying bullets, shells, wads, etc., to the working parts
    of ammunition-making and loading machines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for other article
    dispensing or feeding devices, not otherwise classified, and see the class
    definition of Class 221 for a statement of the line between the classes and
    for the disposition of other disclosures of similar subject matter.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, subclasses 162+ for feeding and distributing devices and
    subcombinations specialized to the purposes of that class.


CLS 86/46
TXT Instruments for feeding empty shells to ammunition-making and loading
    machines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 343.1+ and 373+ for a conveyor
    having means for orienting the conveyed load relative to the conveyor.


CLS 86/47
TXT Instruments for packaging cartridges for shipping.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, for apparatus for depositing articles in preformed
    receptacles with or without subsequent closing of the receptacle.


CLS 86/48
TXT Machines for loading or filling belts with cartridges.


CLS 86/49
TXT AMMUNITION SHELL UNLOADING:

    Apparatus and process under the class definition for removing contents from
    ammunition shells.


CLS 86/50
TXT BOMB DISPOSAL:

    Apparatus and process under the class definition for destroying or
    rendering harmless bomb-like devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclass 202
    for destruction of explosives other than bombs.


CLS 87/
TTL TEXTILES: BRAIDING, NETTING, AND LACE MAKING

CLS 87/
TXT Processes and apparatus for forming strands or fabrics from yarns,
    filaments or strands, by braiding, knotting and/or intertwisting the
    strands; and the corresponding products or fabrics.

    (1)     Note.  Class 112, Sewing, subclass 415 for braid, netting or lace
    which includes stitching.

    (2)     Note.  Class 427, Coating Processes, provides for processes of
    coating, per se, not combined with a textile operation.

    (3)     Note.  Class 140,  Wireworking, subclasses 3+ for machines and
    processes of the type found in this class (87), combined with some
    additional wireworking apparatus or process step.  Where wires are not
    interlooped by merely being placed adjacent each other and then locally
    twisted to overlie, so that only the rigidity of the wire holds them
    together, the patent is in Class 140, Wireworking.

    (5)     Note.  Class 174, Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators,
    particularly subclasses 121, 122 and 124 for insulated conductors and see
    the class definition, (3) Note, for the line.

    (6)     Note.  Class 245, Wire Fabrics and Structure, particularly
    subclasses 7 and 8 for wire fabrics even though for a structure provided
    for in this class (87) having claimed additional features of wire fabric
    structure.

    (7)     Note.  Class 156, Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical
    Manufacture, provides in subclasses 148+ for the combination of laminating
    and braiding and in subclass 52 for indefinite length conductor making
    including a step of braiding a covering thereon.

    (8)     Note.  The line between this Class 87 and Class 428, Stock Material
    or Miscellaneous Articles, is that any plural layer product or stock
    material which includes a component classifiable in this class (87) will be
    placed in this class; a plural layer stock material or product in general
    with no structure of the Class 87 type will be classified in Class 428,
    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles.  See also reference to Class 87
    in the main definition of Class 428, section VI A 1 and subclass 592 for
    metallic stock material having a helical component.


CLS 87/1
TXT Processes under the class definition, involving the applying of a coating
    or impregnating material to the product by application to the strand
    material at any time (i.e., before, during and/or after) relative to the
    mechanical interrelation of the strands; and the resulting products.

    (1)     Note.  Subclasses 5+ for the incorporation of materials other than
    coating or impregnating materials, particularly subclass 6 where the
    tubular fabric is formed about a soft core into which it may become
    embedded.

    (2)     Note.  This class, subclass 23 for apparatus involving means for
    coating or impregnating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    51 and 148 for combinations of braiding and laminating.

    427,    Coating Processes, for processes of coating, per se, not combined
    with a textile operation.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet when the strand interrelation for this class (87) is not recited.
    See also main class definition of Class 428, section VI A 1 (3) for a
    further statement of the line.


CLS 87/2
TXT Processes under the class definition for making the fabric is extensible
    either longitudinally, transversely or both due to the presence therein of
    extensible elements; and the resulting products.

    (1)     Note.  Fabrics that are merely resilient under compression are not
    here included.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 216, 220,
    222 and 362.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 421+.


CLS 87/3
TXT Processes under the class definition involving twisting strands together
    and/or intertwisting strands at different points of junction; and the
    resulting products.

    (1)     Note.  This class, subclass 10 for processes of braiding in which
    arresting carrier motion or other braiding operations cause a strand to
    pass one or more times about another strand; and the resulting products.

    (2)     Note.  This class, subclasses 24+ for corresponding apparatus.


CLS 87/4
TXT Processes under subclass 3 wherein the meshes of a net or mesh fabric are
    formed by intertwisting the strands, the individual strands comprising one
    of the two strand sets never being intertwisted; and the resulting products.

    (1)     Note.  These fabrics are distinguished from braided lace by virtue
    of the fact that certain threads, known as warp, spool, beam, etc.,
    threads, are not intertwisted but may be tied together or in position at
    certain points by means of the bobbin threads, with which they are
    intertwisted.

    (2)     Note.  This class, subclass 27 for corresponding apparatus and see
    the definition thereof for a further statement.


CLS 87/5
TXT Processes under the class definition claiming steps for incorporating
    material in the fabric in diverse ways; and the resulting products.  This
    may be by combining two or more types of fabric provided for in this class,
    or one fabric of this class with other material incorporated by other
    characters of operation.  The same strands may be interrelated in two or
    more different ways.

    (1)     Note.  In general the material incorporated is independent of the
    base fabric and does not partake of the fabric forming operations.  Also,
    it may be material of a different character uniting two or more fabrics
    made according to the methods of this class.

    (2)     Note.  This class, subclass 1 for coated or impregnated fabrics.

    (3)     Note.  This class, subclasses 28+ for corresponding apparatus.


CLS 87/6
TXT Processes under subclass 5 in which the fabric is formed about a core,
    which becomes part of the completed structure; and the resulting products.


CLS 87/7
TXT Processes under subclass 5 in which braided material and unbraided material
    are incorporated in a fabric; and the resulting products.

    (1)     Note.  The unbraided material is usually held in or to the fabric
    by the braided strands.

    (2)     Note.  Where the unbraided material is the core of a substantially
    tubular fabric, see subclass 6.


CLS 87/8
TXT Processes under the class definition involving the braiding of strands
    together, i,e., in which one or more strands pass alternately over or under
    one or more other strands; or in which one or more strands half-twist
    alternately about two or more adjacent strands; and the resulting products.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33+,    for corresponding apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 659+ for braids formed
    into button-hole loops.

    245,    Wire Fabrics and Structure, subclasses 7 and 8 for related wire
    fabrics.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclass 537 for a dynamic, circumferential, contact seal for
    other than a piston contained or compressed by a gland in a packing box
    having braided, woven, or twisted material or construction.


CLS 87/9
TXT Processes under subclass 8 involving forming a tubular, though not
    necessarily cylindrical fabric; and the resulting products.


CLS 87/10
TXT Processes under subclass 8 involving forming a fabric of the well know open
    work or net construction commonly provided with integral surface patterns
    or designs, which are formed either by open work differing from the ground
    fabric, or by portions more dense than the ground fabric.

    (1)     Note.  While these fabrics are inherently variation type, they are
    here collected on the basis of pattern or design variation, whereas those
    in subclass 11 are classified on the basis of fabric outline variation.

    (2)     Note.  Subclasses 3+ for other fabrics having a strand passing one
    or more times about another strand where the fabric is formed by other than
    a braiding operation.


CLS 87/11
TXT Processes under subclass 8 wherein the outline of the fabric (as
    distinguished from its pattern due to strand spacing, color, etc.) is
    varied; and the resulting products.

    (1)     Note.  This may be by forming projections, eyes or apertures (other
    than as defined in subclass 10), furcations, by the addition or subtraction
    of strands, etc.


CLS 87/12
TXT Processes involving forming a fabric by tying knots at the junction points
    of the strands; and the resulting products.

    (1)     Note.  The fabric may be of single or plural strand construction.


CLS 87/13
TXT Processes and products not specifically provided for above.


CLS 87/14
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which a pattern mechanism (such as
    a jacquard, a pattern sheet, cam mechanism, etc.) is used to control
    operation of the machine for any purpose, such as to produce a design on or
    to control the shape of a fabric.

    (1)     Note.  For other pattern mechanisms, see the index to
    classification of patents, the title "Pattern and Pattern Control".


CLS 87/15
TXT Apparatus under subclass 14 utilizing electrical or fluid operated means.


CLS 87/16
TXT Apparatus under subclass 14 in which the travel of the braiding carriers is
    governed by movable switches under the control of the pattern means.

    (1)     Note.  This class, subclasses 37+ for such machines without pattern
    mechanism.


CLS 87/17
TXT Apparatus under subclass 14 in which certain braiding carriers may be
    stopped in their travel, in predetermined sequence, and then permitted to
    resume travel, such stopping and resumption of travel being under the
    control of the pattern mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  This class, subclasses 39+ for such machines without pattern
    mechanisms.


CLS 87/18
TXT Apparatus under the class definition provided with means, either
    automatically or manually controlled, for either or both stopping or
    starting the entire apparatus. Apparatus wherein the operation is initiated
    by means which sense a condition of a strand, such as absence of abnormal
    tension are here classified.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 116.5+, particularly
    subclasses 125+ for stop mechanism not restricted to apparatus for this
    class (87).

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclass 43 for devices
    that stop movement of material advances upon sensing position of material.


CLS 87/19
TXT Apparatus under subclass 18 wherein the strand condition detecting means
    operate through electrical means to cause the stopping.

    (1)     Note.  The strand condition detector may be an element of a switch
    or may operate through other elements to effect operation of an electrical
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 127 for material
    controlled electrically operated power stop devices.


CLS 87/20
TXT Apparatus under the class definition provided with means that will sense a
    condition or change of condition; and will then effect the operation of
    some other device or portion thereof.

    (1)     Note.  An example is where the operation of the machine or a
    portion thereof is governed by strand or fabric tension.

    (2)     Note.  Subclasses 14+ for pattern mechanism control.

    (3)     Note.  Subclasses 18+ for automatic control of starting or stopping.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclass 10 for devices
    that sense and control accordingly the movement of material of
    indeterminate-length.


CLS 87/21
TXT Apparatus under subclass 20, wherein the automatic control governs the
    paying out of the supply on strand carriers by releasing the carrier for
    free rotation.

    (1)     Note.  The devices in this subclass are those wherein brakes and
    analogous devices are regulated for the most part by strand tension.


CLS 87/22
TXT Apparatus under subclass 21 wherein the carrier is provided with a ratchet
    or ratchet-like device that prevents unwinding of the supply except under
    the operation by the automatic control (usually by tension of the strand
    itself).

    (1)     Note.  Discs or drums with pins or holes and holding means coacting
    therewith are considered ratchet-like devices.


CLS 87/23
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means for applying a coating or
    an impregnating material to the strands and/or to the fabric at any time
    relative to the production of the fabric.

    (1)     Note.  The coating or impregnating material may be a non-plastic
    plasticizeable material which, at some stage of manufacture, or
    subsequently, is rendered plastic.

    (2)     Note.  This class, subclass 1 for corresponding processes and
    products.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for coating apparatus,
    per se.


CLS 87/24
TXT Apparatus under the class definition for producing fabric structure by
    twisting together strands and/or intertwisting strands at junction points,
    to form mesh, net or lace type of fabric.

    (1)     Note.  These devices for the most part produce polygonal mesh fence
    fabrics.

    (2)     Note.  This class, subclasses 3+ for corresponding processes and
    products.


CLS 87/25
TXT Apparatus under subclass 24 which may be moved from place to place or which
    may move along the floor or ground during fabric production.

    (1)     Note.  These devices for the most part are designed to produce wire
    fences in situ.


CLS 87/26
TXT Apparatus under subclass 25 including means to incorporate in the product
    some material (of strand or other form) in addition to the strands that are
    intertwisted to form the fabric.

    (1)     Note.  The intertwisted strand fabric would be complete without the
    additional strands.

    (2)     Note.  This class, subclasses 28+ for other such combinations.

    (3)     Note.  This class, subclasses 33+ for braiding machines capable of
    causing a strand to pass one or more times about another strand by a
    braiding operation, particularly subclasses 37+ and subclasses 39+.


CLS 87/27
TXT Apparatus under the class definition for producing fabrics such as tulle,
    curtain lace, etc.  These machines are of the general type of Levers or
    go-through lace-machines.  A plurality of thin shuttles or "carriages"
    containing shuttles and/or bobbins passed transversely across a plurality
    of longitudinal threads including warp, spool, beams, etc. threads.  By a
    lateral shogging of either the carriages or the warp threads, one or more
    carriage spaces between successive carriage passages, the bobbin threads
    twist about the warp threads and ties them together or in place at
    predetermined points to form the lace pattern.  There is no intertwisting
    of the longitudinal warp, etc. threads.

    (1)     Note.  This class, subclass 4 for corresponding processes and
    products.


CLS 87/28
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means to incorporate in the
    product some material (of strand or other form) which does not partake of
    the movements of interrelating of the strands forming the fabric.

    (1)     Note.  In general, the fabric basically produced is complete
    without the incorporated material.

    (2)     Note.  Incorporating independent selvage strand in a fabric is
    classified here.

    (3)     Note.  This class, subclass 1 and subclasses 5+ for corresponding
    processes and products; subclasses 23 and 26 for other apparatus
    combinations.


CLS 87/29
TXT Apparatus under subclass 28 for forming a substantially tubular fabric
    about a core which becomes a part of the complete fabric.

    (1)     Note.  This class, subclass 6 for corresponding processes and
    products.

    (2)     Note.  This class, subclass 34 for devices which form a fabric
    about a mandrel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclass 457 and indented subclasses, for
    circular progressive shedding weaving machines.


CLS 87/30
TXT Apparatus under subclass 28 which include means for introducing strands or
    other material into a braided fabric, which strands or other material do
    not partake of the movements which effect the braiding of the fabric.

    (1)     Note.  These strands may be "warps", fillers, stuffers, independent
    selvage strands, etc.

    (2)     Note.  This class, subclass 7 for corresponding processes and
    products.


CLS 87/31
TXT Apparatus under the class definition for forwarding the completed fabric
    through the machine and/or for winding it up.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 520+ for convolute
    winding in general.


CLS 87/32
TXT Apparatus under the class definition claiming characteristics in addition
    to the features necessary to the feeding of the strand material, the
    interrelation thereof and the appropriate mechanism for operating the
    machine; and not provided for in the preceding subclasses.

    For example, here are collected, as originals and cross references,
    combinations with gauges, signals or indicators, cutters, lubricators, dust
    shields, oil shields, etc.


CLS 87/33
TXT Apparatus under the class definition for forming strands or fabrics by the
    operations commonly known as "braiding" or "plaiting".  Bobbins, or
    carriers having bobbins thereon, are caused to travel in predetermined
    paths and they either pass each other so as to interlace strands, or
    strands leading from certain bobbins are caused to pass other bobbins to
    cause interlacing of the strands.

    (1)     Note.  The May-pole dance is a well known example of the basic
    operation of braiding.  Some simple braiding mechanisms are known as
    May-pole braiders.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclass 457 and indented subclasses for
    circular progressive shedding weaving machines.


CLS 87/34
TXT Apparatus under subclass 33 having fixed or moving guiding devices over
    which a braid, or some portion thereof, is formed and from which it is
    subsequently removed.  These devices merely maintain the form of the braid
    during the braiding operation.

    (1)     Note.  Such part may be so formed as to effect an additional
    shaping function.


CLS 87/35
TXT Apparatus under subclass 33 which condense and compact the fabric and/or
    give it a permanent set or form, during production

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 29 for forming tubular or tube-like braids
    about a core and subclass 34 for forming about a subsequently removed
    mandrel that drapes the same.


CLS 87/36
TXT Apparatus under subclass 33 having means for pushing or laying the
    interrelated strands properly into the fabric.

    (1)     Note.  Combinations of beat-up means with intertwisted strand type
    and knotted mesh type machines are also found in subclass 24 and indented
    subclasses and subclass 53.


CLS 87/37
TXT Apparatus under subclass 33 including movable controllers mounted adjacent
    the path of traveling carriers for directing the carriers in diverse
    predetermined paths.

    (1)     Note.  For pattern control of such apparatus, see subclass 16.


CLS 87/38
TXT Apparatus under subclass 37 in which the switches are moved by one carrier
    to direct a following carrier or an oppositely moving carrier in its proper
    path.


CLS 87/39
TXT Apparatus under subclass 33 having means for withdrawing certain carriers
    from their normal paths and holding them out of operation, or for stopping
    certain carriers during the operation of other carriers.

    (1)     Note.  For pattern control of such apparatus, see subclass 17.


CLS 87/40
TXT Apparatus under subclass 39 in which each carrier operating or propelling
    device is provided with an individual clutch device to couple it to the
    driving mechanism of the braiding machine.

    (1)     Note.  For pattern control of such apparatus, see subclass 17.


CLS 87/41
TXT Braiding apparatus under subclass 33 in which (1) means are provided for
    braiding a fabric having other than uniform characteristics (as by having
    different appearance braid in different areas, having specially-formed
    apertures, having branches, etc.) or (2) having means to change the
    braiding operation to produce braids of different appearance even though
    the disclosure is that any single produced fabric is to be of uniform
    appearance.

    (1)     Note.  Appropriate preceding subclasses for particular combinations
    or types of apparatus within this definition, particularly subclass 14 and
    indented subclasses, for pattern control combinations; subclass 37 and
    indented subclass, for machines having switches; and subclass 39 and
    indented subclass, for those having arrestable carriers.


CLS 87/42
TXT Apparatus under subclass 33 in which all carriers travel in the same
    directions about an axis and in which (1) each carrier is additionally
    moved in such a path as to travel alternately about two adjacent carriers;
    or (2) strands leading from certain carriers are passed alternately about
    certain other carriers adjacent to the path of movement of such strands.
    The carrier travel about the axis of the fabric twists all strands about
    such axis.

    (1)     Note.  Braiding apparatus producing interlocked strand type fabrics
    without the twist are in subclass 33.


CLS 87/43
TXT Apparatus under subclass 33 in which certain carriers travel in
    predetermined reciprocatory paths across the path of travel of carriers
    travelling in orbital paths.


CLS 87/44
TXT Apparatus under subclass 33 in which the carriers are divided into two or
    more sets or groups all traveling in concentric circular orbits and in
    which strands from one set are guided in and out about the carriers of
    another set, means being provided to permit free passage of such strands
    during travel of the carriers.


CLS 87/45
TXT Apparatus under subclass 44 in which the carriers of one set are provided
    with interrupted rack and gear driving means to permit passage of threads
    from another set about such carriers.


CLS 87/46
TXT Apparatus under subclass 44 in which the carrier driving means of one set
    of carriers is provided with two or more "pushers" alternately engaging a
    carrier to propel it and to permit passage of strands about the carrier.


CLS 87/47
TXT Apparatus under subclass 46 in which the "pushers" rotate to engage the
    carriers.


CLS 87/48
TXT Apparatus under subclass 44 claiming the means for deflecting the strands
    leading from one set of carriers in and out past a second set of carriers.

    (1)     Note.  The organized machine should not be claimed.  Where any
    features of organization or structure not common to all machines of this
    type are claimed, the patent is placed in the appropriate preceding
    subclass; i.e., this subclass takes those means providing for strand
    deflection, per se, or in combination with a broad statement of general
    known types of machine organization.

    (2)     Note.  Since strand deflection is a necessary feature of all
    machines of this type, search on this subcombination must be completed in
    subclass 44 and the other indented subclasses.


CLS 87/49
TXT Apparatus under subclass 33 including means to prevent twisting or to cause
    untwisting of a strand leading from a carrier as it is laid into the fabric
    (so that, for example, a flat strand may be laid always with the same side
    out).


CLS 87/50
TXT Apparatus under subclass 33 including the means for causing braiding
    carriers to travel in predetermined intersecting paths. This subclass
    includes, for example, raceways, horn gears, fixed guides and other means
    for causing such travel, not elsewhere provided for.

    (1)     Note.  Carrier guiding and propelling in subclass 42 for
    interlocking twist type and in subclasses 44-47 for circular orbit type.

    (2)     Note.  For this subject matter combined with switches search
    subclass 16 and subclass 37 and indented subclass.


CLS 87/51
TXT Apparatus under subclass 50 in which no raceplate or similar fixed guiding
    means is provided and the carriers are clutched or clamped to the
    propelling devices during travel between points of transfer from one
    propelling device to another.


CLS 87/52
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which means are provided for
    forming the lace-like fabric of knotted or looped form commonly known as
    tatting.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes manual means enabling or assisting
    the operator to form the loops, through which the tatting shuttle is
    passed, in hand tatting.


CLS 87/53
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which net or mesh fabrics are
    produced by tying knots in strands at their points of juncture.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is distinguished from subclass 52 in that
    those devices are for making a lace-like fabric of predetermined design
    while these are for making regular mesh net-like fabrics, such as, for
    example, seines.

    (2)     Note.  Search Class: 289, Knots and Knot Tying, for knot tyers, per
    se.


CLS 87/54
TXT Apparatus under the class definition for carrying bobbins or spools of
    strand material movably in the formation of fabrics.

    (1)     Note.  Devices for applying bobbins to carriers or shuttles, and
    for removing them therefrom, as well as devices for placing strands through
    shuttle eyes or guides, are in this subclass (54).


CLS 87/55
TXT Apparatus under subclass 54 for carrying bobbins or spools used on braiding
    machines.


CLS 87/56
TXT Apparatus under subclass 55 provided with means to apply tension to strands
    leading from the carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for miscellaneous tension devices.


CLS 87/57
TXT Apparatus under subclass 56 in which the tension is imposed by means
    retarding or opposing the rotations of the spool or bobbin mounted on the
    carrier.

    (1)     Note.  For let-offs operated or controlled in their operation by
    changing tension in the strands, see subclasses 21 and 22.


CLS 87/58
TXT Apparatus under subclass 54 designed for use in forming tatting, usually
    manually operated, and often provided with hooks and the like to assist the
    operator in making loops.


CLS 87/59
TXT Apparatus under subclass 58 having means to wind strand material on the
    bobbin without removing the same from the shuttle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

     242,   Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 18+ for a bobbin or cop
    winder.


CLS 87/60
TXT Apparatus under subclass 54 consisting of manual implements usually
    provided with means to hold a supply of strand material and used in forming
    seines and other knotted fabrics.


CLS 87/61
TXT Miscellaneous strand tensioning devices for apparatus coming under the
    class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56+,    for braiding carriers with strand tensioning means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclass 146 for strand tensioners combined
    with knitting machines.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclass 195 for
    devices for placing tension on material of indeterminate-length.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 410+ for tension
    running material.


CLS 87/62
TXT Apparatus under the class definition not particularly provided for above.


CLS 89/
TTL ORDNANCE

CLS 89/
TXT This class includes all guns adapted to be mounted or supported otherwise
    than by hand, all explosion-operated guns including hand and shoulder
    firearms, bomb dropping devices, and those gun combinations and
    subcombinations which are not provided for in other classes including
    mounts, supports, carriages, loading and hoisting mechanisms, shields,

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 233+ for gun sights and gun
    sight combinations where no more gun structure is included than is
    necessary to mount the sight.

    42,     Firearms, for all hand and shoulder firearms, except
    explosion-operated.

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 632+ for one shot explosion-actuated
    expansible chamber-type motors.

    86,     Ammunition and Explosive-Charge Making.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, for gun projectiles, per se.

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, for devices for throwing or
    projecting missiles by mechanical means.  This includes pneumatic and
    centrifugal projecting devices.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 2+ for a process or
    means for penetrating the earth by means of a below-ground explosion and
    including a device for firing a bullet or shaped charge to penetrate the
    earth formation or perforate a casing or other wall member in the bore.

    181,    Acoustics, subclass 223 for gun silencers, per se.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 11+ for apparatus and
    processes for teaching and demonstrating the art of war, including gunnery.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 150+ for high temperature (Tc greater than 30 K) superconducting
    systems or devices, particularly subclass 164 for projectile or launching
    device or system.


CLS 89/1.1
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition not otherwise classifiable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, for all hand shoulder firearms, except explosion-operated.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 167 for ordnance and projectile
    measuring and testing.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, for gun projectiles, per se.

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, for devices for throwing or
    projecting missiles by mechanical means.  This includes pneumatic and
    centrifugal projecting devices.

    235,    Registers, subclasses 400-418 for ordnance and weapon system
    calculators.

    346,    Recorders, subclass 38 for ordnance responsive recorders.

    D12,    Transportation, subclass 12 for the design of tanks and armored
    cars.

    D22,    Arms, Pyrotechnics, Hunting and Fishing Equipment, subclasses 100,
    103, and  104.


CLS 89/1.11
TXT WAGING WAR:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to conducting wars
    between nations and states, to tactics employed by a military, police, or
    like unit, or individual to the detriment of an adversary.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, for water cannon.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 91 for a flame thrower.


CLS 89/1.12
TXT GUN HEATERS:

    Subject matter under the class definition for heating the mechanisms of
    guns.


CLS 89/1.13
TXT MINE-DESTROYING DEVICES:

    Subject matter under the class definition for clearing mine fields.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclass 403 for the use of explosives
    to clear mine field.


CLS 89/1.14
TXT EXPLOSIVE-OPERATED APPARATUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition operated by means of an explosive
    agent.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass is a sub-combination for
    a combination classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclass 221 for explosive-operated underwater cable cutters.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 68.13 for explosive frangible valves.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclasses 9 through 11 for
    stud guns.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 121 for explosive means permitting rapid
    egress from an aircraft.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 84 for applying an explosive force to make an article.


CLS 89/1.15
TXT WELL PERFORATORS:

    Subject matter under the class definition used to make a hole in a well
    pipe and/or the surrounding bore.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclasses 55+, 63 and 297 for perforating well pipes.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 2+ for a process or
    means for penetrating the earth by means of a below ground explosion and
    including a device for firing a bullet or shaped charge to penetrate the
    earth formation or perforate a casing or other wall member in the bore.


CLS 89/1.16
TXT ENGINE STARTERS:

    Subject matter under the class definition generating the motive power to
    begin the operation of an engine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 39.14 for starter motors.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 183.1 for gunpowder engine
    starters.


CLS 89/1.2
TXT SMOKE OR RESIDUE EJECTORS:

    Subject matter under the class definition for removing the products of
    combustion resulting from the firing of a piece of ordnance.


CLS 89/1.25
TXT LUBRICANT INJECTORS:

    Subject matter under the class definition for applying lubricant to
    cartridges while being fed into a gun or for applying lubricant to the gun.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    184,    Lubrication, for general utility lubricators not classified
    elsewhere.


CLS 89/1.3
TXT MUZZLE LOADING:

    Subject matter under the class definition which can be loaded only from the
    forward end of the gun barrel from which the fired bullet emerges.

    (1)     Note.  Mortars and ordnance wherein the projectile surrounds the
    barrel are common here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for loading other than by the muzzle.


CLS 89/1.34
TXT LINE THROWING:

    Subject matter under the class definition for projecting cord, rope, wire,
    string, steel tape, cable etc.


CLS 89/1.35
TXT TRENCH MORTARS:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising high angle of fire
    ordnance (greater than 45o) having a relatively short barrel that fires a
    relatively small shell (85 mm or less).


CLS 89/1.4
TXT CHARGING MECHANISMS FOR GUNS:

    Subject matter under the class definition for opening the breech block of
    an automatic gun to introduce the first round into the chamber and
    mechanisms opening the breech block of an automatic gun to extract and
    eject a misfire.


CLS 89/1.41
TXT MULTIPLE BARREL GUNS:

    Subject matter under the class definition having a plurality of tubes
    through which projectiles are expelled.


CLS 89/1.42
TXT GUN HANDLES:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising that part of a piece
    of ordnance which is to be held, turned, lifted, pulled, etc., with the
    hand.


CLS 89/1.51
TXT BOMB, FLARE AND SIGNAL DROPPING:

    Subject matter under the class definition for holding and releasing bombs,
    flares and signals from aircraft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 632+ for one shot explosion-actuated
    expansible chamber-type motors.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 2 for miscellaneous trip
    device.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 382+ for drop bombs, per se,
    and subclasses 337+ for parachute flares.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for article dispensers
    not otherwise provided for.

    235,    Registers, subclasses 401 and 402 for calculators which determine
    the point at which bombs should be dropped.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 137.3 for aerial cargo unloading by parachute
    extraction.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.67 and 825.72 for
    devices and apparatus designed to be controlled by radio energy transmitted
    from a distance.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    142+ for devices and apparatus designed to be controlled by radiant energy
    (i.e., light) transmitted from a distance.


CLS 89/1.52
TXT Drop grenades:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.51 which are released manually out of an
    aircraft.

    (1)     Note.  The grenades are designed to be dropped by hand from the
    aircraft.


CLS 89/1.53
TXT Sway braces:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.51 where the ordnance to be dropped is
    supported from pylons on the wings of an aircraft and there are supports to
    prevent vibration of the bomb, flare or signal.


CLS 89/1.54
TXT Bomb displaced from exterior of plane:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.51 where the ordnance is carried on the
    outside of an aircraft until it is released.


CLS 89/1.55
TXT Arming devices:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.51 where the ordnance is not operable to
    explode until activated so that it will explode at a desired time.


CLS 89/1.56
TXT Electrical and radio releases and sighting: Subject matter under subclass
    1.51 where the ordnance is aimed and is dropped by means of an electrical
    device, or by means using an electromagnetic radio wave.


CLS 89/1.57
TXT Explosive releases:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.51 where the ordnance to be dropped is
    separated from the aircraft by means of an explosion.


CLS 89/1.58
TXT Shackles:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.51 where the ordnance to be dropped is held
    in a rack in the interior of the aircraft by means of a cable, chain or
    wire.


CLS 89/1.59
TXT Racks:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.51 comprising a magazine for holding
    ordnance to be dropped within the interior of the aircraft.


CLS 89/1.6
TXT Timing device:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.51 where the ordnance to be dropped
    contains a clock so that it will detonate at a desired moment.


CLS 89/1.61
TXT Sighting:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.51 having a nonelectric means to aim the
    ordnance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.56,   for electrical means to aim the ordnance.


CLS 89/1.7
TXT A gun under the class definition comprising means to project a projectile
    and employing an explodable propellant which produces a pressurized gas
    upon detonation thereof and having (1) a barrel means through which the
    projectile may be propelled to be ejected through an opening therein by the
    force of the gas, and (2) means to substantially neutralize, with respect
    to the gun, those propellant gas reaction forces which are developed and
    which act counter to the gas forces which act in a direction to propel the
    projectile.


CLS 89/1.701
TXT A gun under subclass 1.7 comprising an expansible chamber associated with
    the barrel means and having at least one movable wall formed by a freely
    movable reaction mass means which may be accelerated by those forces in the
    pressurized gas which are developed counter to those forces therein which
    propel the projectile.

    (1)     Note.  The expansible chamber may be a second barrel means arranged
    to cooperate with the gun-barrel means, and the reaction mass may be in the
    form of a second projectile means adapted to be projected from the gun by
    the forces in the pressurized gas which act counter to those which act to
    propel the first projectile.


CLS 89/1.702
TXT A gun under subclass 1.701 in which the barrel means comprises barrel
    portions which are secured in end-to-end relationship and which are at
    least partially separated to facilitate the loading of the projectile, the
    propellant or the reaction mass.


CLS 89/1.703
TXT A gun under subclass 1.7 in which the means to neutralize the pressurized
    gas reaction forces comprises adjustable means to vent the said gas to the
    ambient, whereby to selectively control the gas reaction force.


CLS 89/1.704
TXT A gun under subclass 1.7 having a closure means with which to close, either
    in whole or in part, an opening in the breech of the gun through which an
    explosive charge is inserted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for breech closures having locking means which hold the closure in
    the breech of the gun.


CLS 89/1.705
TXT A gun under subclass 1.704 in which the closure means is provided with a
    means to detonate the explosive means.


CLS 89/1.706
TXT A gun under subclass 1.704 in which the closure means for said opening
    comprises a cartridge.


CLS 89/1.8
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to the launching of a
    rocket.

    (1)     Note.  For the purpose of this definition a rocket is defined as a
    vehicle, which may or may not be specifically described, having therein a
    reaction motor and a propellant, whereby, independent of atmospheric
    oxygen, propulsion gas may be produced by a chemical reaction.  However, in
    the case where the rocket, before being launched is located entirely or
    partially under water, and during launching, or soon thereafter, a part or
    all of the rocket contacts the water, the rocket propulsion gas, or any
    other pressurized fluid employed to launch the rocket, may be produced by a
    chemical reaction or by a nonchemical-reaction means.

    (2)     Note.  The word launch means to cause to be moved for disengagement
    from a supporting environment either (a) by the thrust created by the
    reaction motor of the rocket being launched alone or (b) by an additional
    propelling force and the thrust of the reaction motor of the rocket.

    (3)     Note.  Subject matter under this definition includes transport,
    storage, connector, latch, ejecting, exhaust gas deflecting structures or
    the like for a rocket which are in combination with either the rocket or
    launcher for a launching purpose and which are not classified elsewhere.

    (4)     Note.  To be classified under this definition in the case of a
    rocket not launched under water, as defined in (1) Note, at least a portion
    of the propulsion gases emitted by the rocket whether generated outside the
    rocket or in the rocket are required to be produced by a chemical reaction.

    (5)     Note.  For original classification of a patent under this
    definition, rather than in other appropriate subclasses of Class 89, the
    sole disclosed use or a claim thereof must be for launching a rocket.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33.01+, for devices which hold or feed a plurality of cartridges to a gun.

    37.01+, for gun mounts in general.

    45+,    for means for placing a load into firing position in a gun.

    125+,   for automatic gun structures which could be utilized in the
    launching of rockets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 347+ for rocket support
    sticks and other supports for pyrotechnic rockets wherein the supports are
    integral with the rocket and are launched therewith.

    104,    Railways, subclasses 48+ for rail transfer structure and subclasses
    89+ for suspended rail structures, per se.

    114,    Ships, subclasses 18+ and 316+ for vessels having means for
    launching a torpedo.

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, various subclasses, for apparatus
    employing nonexplosive means to impel or launch a projectile wherein the
    projectile is disclosed as having a chemical reaction motor which is
    claimed in name only.  Patents are also classified in Class 124 which claim
    significant projectile structure having a propelling agent which is either
    produced by a nonchemical reaction or is a stored pressurized fluid.
    However, the combination of a projectile (regardless of its propulsion
    means) with a launching platform submerged in a liquid is classified in
    Class 89, subclasses 1.8+.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, various subclasses, for power driven
    conveyor devices, per se.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, various subclasses for
    electrical switch devices which interrupt the flow of electricity but which
    normally remain connected in the electrical circuit.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 317 for a container for a
    weapon.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 2+, for means to launch and lift an
    aircraft, and subclass 63 for devices and arrangements adapted to assist in
    the take off of aircraft from land or water.  Launching devices disclosed
    as rocket launchers wherein the rocket is claimed in name only are
    classified in Class 244.  Also, launchable devices comprising propeller
    blades and flight control surfaces disclosed as a stage of a
    rocket-launching means are classified in Class 244.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 248+ for
    electrical arc or spark means for igniting a fuel by which a rocket may be
    propelled.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, various subclasses for rocket
    handling structures which do not provide means for the launching of the
    rocket.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, various subclasses for details of electrical
    connections which permit making and breaking of an electrical circuit by
    physical separation of conductors.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclass 212 for reaction propulsion toy
    launchers having nonchemical reaction propulsion devices.


CLS 89/1.801
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1.8 having a rocket-storage means for storing
    or holding a rocket in a position where it is not connected to a launching
    means from which it is to be launched, and a means for engaging and
    transferring said rocket from said storage means to a point so that it may
    be launched from the rocket-launching means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.815,  for rocket launchers which support a rocket in a nonfiring or
    storage position and then move the rocket to a firing position.


CLS 89/1.802
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1.801 wherein the launching means is
    supported so that it may be moved relative to the rocket-storage means.


CLS 89/1.803
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1.801 wherein the storage means is provided
    with an opening and a means cooperating with said opening which both
    constitutes a gate or closure for said opening and a means to transfer a
    rocket from the storage means to a position from which it may be launched.


CLS 89/1.804
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1.801 in which the storage means is movable
    from a first position to a second position for facilitating transfer of the
    rocket from the storage means to the launcher.


CLS 89/1.805
TXT Apparatus under subclass 1.8  having means for transferring a rocket to be
    launched from a position removed from the launcher to a position on the
    launcher.


CLS 89/1.806
TXT Apparatus under subclass 1.8 comprising a rocket-launching means for
    restraining the rocket from movement thereon at least in a direction in
    which it is to be launched.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.812,  for other means designed to prevent a rocket from being fixed or
    launched prematurely.


CLS 89/1.807
TXT Apparatus under subclass 1.806 having means by which the rocket motor may
    be started.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.813+, for a rocket launcher having a rocket- firing means.


CLS 89/1.808
TXT Apparatus under subclass 1.806 having means to rotate a rocket on the
    launcher prior to release thereof so as to stabilize the rocket while in
    flight.


CLS 89/1.809
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1.8 wherein a rocket before being launched is
    located entirely or partially underwater, and during launching or soon
    thereafter, a part or all of the rocket contacts the water and wherein the
    rocket propulsion gas, or any other pressurized fluid employed to launch
    the rocket, may be produced by a chemical reaction or by a
    nonchemical-reaction means.


CLS 89/1.81
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1.809 having a container for enclosing a
    rocket to keep water from contacting it until contact is desired.


CLS 89/1.811
TXT Apparatus under subclass 1.8 having cable or conduit means connected to a
    rocket by connecting means with means actuated upon the launching of the
    rocket to permit or cause separation of said connecting means to disconnect
    said cable or conduit means from said rocket.

    (1)     Note.  A mere snap or manually- actuated means connecting a service
    conduit or cable to a rocket whether in launching position or not is not
    included in this subclass but is classified, per se, in Class 200,
    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, various subclasses, or Class
    439, Electrical Connectors, various subclasses.  This subclass includes
    only those cable or conduit connecting means which are separated or
    conditioned for separation as a result of launching a rocket.


CLS 89/1.812
TXT Apparatus under 1.8 having means which prevents premature starting of a
    rocket motor or launching of the rocket vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.806,  for means which physically engages a rocket for preventing movement
    thereof from a position on a launcher from which it is launched.


CLS 89/1.813
TXT Apparatus under subclass 1.8 having means by which a rocket motor may be
    started.


CLS 89/1.814
TXT Apparatus under subclass 1.813 wherein the rocket motor propellant is
    ignited by electrical means.


CLS 89/1.815
TXT Apparatus under subclass 1.8 having rocket launchers which support and hold
    a rocket in a nonfiring or storage position and then move the rocket to a
    firing position.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are those launchers rigidly
    mounted on a vehicle (e.g., jeep, aircraft, etc.) wherein movement of the
    launcher is due only to the movement of the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.802,  for a movable rocket launcher having means storing a rocket in a
    position disconnected from said launcher and means to transfer the rocket
    to the launcher.


CLS 89/1.816
TXT Apparatus under subclass 1.8 wherein the rocket launcher is provided with
    guide means in the form of a tube or barrel means to guide a rocket being
    launched.


CLS 89/1.817
TXT Apparatus under subclass 1.816 comprising means to close the end of the
    guide means through which a rocket may pass when it is launched.


CLS 89/1.818
TXT Apparatus under subclass 1.816 including a propulsion charge in the guide
    means for producing propulsion gases to aid in the launching of a rocket
    from the guide means.


CLS 89/1.819
TXT Apparatus under subclass 1.8 wherein the rocket launcher is provided with
    means to guide a rocket being launched.


CLS 89/4.05
TXT EXPLOSION OPENED BREECH:

    Subject matter under the class definition which utilize the force of an
    explosion to open the breech of a gun and eject a cartridge shell if
    present.

    (1)     Note.  A new charge inserted by hand or by nonexplosion-operated
    means usually releases the breech-block which may then be closed.

    (2)     Note.  If a new cartridge or charge is positioned by means operated
    by the explosion so that a new cycle of operation can be initiated merely
    by causing or permitting the charge to be fired, the gun is considered to
    be "automatic" and will be classified in subclasses 125+.  For further
    definition of "automatic" and "explosion-operated means", see the
    definition and notes of subclass 125.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9+,     for nonautomatic machine guns.

    17+,    for breech closures.

    27.11+, for firing devices.

    37.01+, for gun mounts.

    45+,    for loading and ramming devices handling single charges or
    cartridges.

    125+,   for automatic guns and see (2) Note     above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, for firearms having no explosion-operated features.

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 632+, for one shot explosion-actuated
    expansible chamber-type motors.


CLS 89/4.1
TXT Rotary breech block:

    Subject matter under subclass 4.05 where the force of the explosion opens a
    closure which rotates about the axis of the gun barrel to close or open the
    breech.


CLS 89/4.2
TXT Transverse sliding breech block:

    Subject matter under subclass 4.05 where the explosion opens a closure
    which moves along an axis at an angle with respect to the gun barrel.


CLS 89/4.5
TXT Guns under subclass 4 having blow back (unlocked) breech blocks.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194,    for automatic guns of blow back type.


CLS 89/5
TXT Guns adapted to be employed under water, usually for discharging torpedoes.


CLS 89/6
TXT Apparatus for operating upon encased fuses of explosive devices for
    adjusting them to determine operating time, corresponding processes and
    combinations having such subject matter as a part thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    86,     Ammunition and Explosive-Charge Making, subclass 22 for tools for
    cutting exposed fuse strings to proper length for use with blasting charges.

    235,    Registers, subclass 408 for calculators that determine the fuse
    setting to be used.


CLS 89/6.5
TXT Fuse setters under subclass 6 structurally combined with guns, launching
    guides or bomb dropping devices.

    (1)     Note.  Such combinations may involve merely means for mounting on
    the device in a place convenient for the operator to reach.


CLS 89/7
TXT Guns in which the compression of the propelling-gas is secured by exploding
    a separate charge or in which the mixture is itself exploded.


CLS 89/8
TXT Guns in which several charges are successively exploded to produced an
    accelerating effect upon the projectile.


CLS 89/9
TXT Guns in which mechanical means are employed to load, fire, and reload the
    gun or in which a holder containing a series of charges is mechanically
    shifted or fed to bring the charges successively to firing position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125+,   for automatic or self-loading guns.


CLS 89/11
TXT Machine guns in which the movement of the breech-block in opening and
    closing the breech is in line with the axis or bore of the gun.


CLS 89/12
TXT Machine guns in which the barrels revolve during the loading operations.
    The Gatling and Hotchkiss type are here included.


CLS 89/13.05
TXT Revolving cylinders:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 in which, like the common revolver, the
    cylinder containing the charges revolves to bring a new load or set of
    loads to firing position.


CLS 89/13.1
TXT Nonparallel bores:

    Subject matter under subclass 13.05 where the axes of the bores of the
    cylinders are not parallel to each other.


CLS 89/14.05
TXT BARRELS:

    Subject matter under the class definition including structure of the barrel
    or body of the gun or the shape or arrangement of the bore of firing
    chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, subclasses 76.01+ for firearm barrels.


CLS 89/14.1
TXT Devices under subclass 14.05 having means to promote the transfer of heat
    between the barrel and any external media.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.12,   for heat exchange devices for parts other than barrels.

    1.2,    for devices which flush the bore or remove residual gases therefrom.

    14.2    for devices which reduce flash by cooling burning gases at the
    barrel muzzle, and for combinations of barrel heat exchangers with flash
    reducers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 177+ for a tubular structure of general
    application with attached heat-transfer means.


CLS 89/14.2
TXT Flash shield:

    Subject matter under subclass 14.05 which reduce the sudden flame at the
    end of the barrel when a gun is fired.


CLS 89/14.3
TXT Recoil absorbers and climb arrestors:

    Subject matter under subclass 14.05 where the rearward and/or upward motion
    of the barrel caused by firing the barrel is reduced.


CLS 89/14.4
TXT Silencers:

    Subject matter under subclass 14.05 which tends to reduce the noise caused
    by the firing of a gun.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 233+ for silencers, per se.


CLS 89/14.5
TXT Recoil increasers:

    Subject matter under subclass 14.05 to amplify the effects of the rearward
    motion of the barrel caused by firing the gun.

    (1)     Note.  These are almost always used with practice ammunition in
    recoil- operated guns.


CLS 89/14.6
TXT Sabot strippers:

    Subject matter under subclass 14.05 having a device on the muzzle of the
    barrel to remove from a fired projectile a packing or wadding which covers
    or encloses a substantial portion of said projectile or supports it when
    engaged with the barrel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclass 520 for sabots, per se.


CLS 89/15
TXT Gun barrels strengthened by winding of wire, metal ribbon, rawhide, etc.


CLS 89/16
TXT Gun barrels built up or formed of more than one piece.


CLS 89/17
TXT The breech-block, its operating mechanism, or the means for securing the
    block to the breech.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.1,    for manual breech-block operating means for automatic ordnance.

    4.05+,  for guns with explosion opened breech.

    9+,     for machine guns.

    125+,   for automatic or self-loading guns.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, appropriate breech-block subclasses, particularly
    subclass 16, for manual breech-block operating means for automatic firearms.


CLS 89/18
TXT Breech-closures in which a locking-key is used to hold the block in the
    breech.  The key may be radially thrown out, inserted behind the block, or
    otherwise employed.


CLS 89/19
TXT Breech-blocks adapted to be screwed into the breech.


CLS 89/20.2
TXT Interrupted:

    Subject matter under subclass 19 having segmental threads mounted to be
    move in or out of grasping relationship.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclass 72 for other
    interrupted threads on wall and panel closures.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 34+ for interrupted threads on
    pipe joints or couplings.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, subclasses 417+ for screws and bolts provided
    with circumferentially interrupted threads.


CLS 89/20.4
TXT Motor operated:

    Subject matter under subclass 20.2 wherein the breach closure is turned by
    means of a motor.


CLS 89/21
TXT Closures of the divided-screw-thread type adapted to fire charges enclosed
    in a rigid case.


CLS 89/22
TXT Breech-closures in which the block opening or closing the breech moves
    transversely to the axis of the bore.


CLS 89/23
TXT Breech-closures in which the breech-block has both a transverse sliding and
    then a swinging movement.


CLS 89/24
TXT Breech-closures in which the breech-block slides laterally to open the
    breech.


CLS 89/25
TXT Breech-closures in which a block is pivoted and has no movement except to
    swing transversely to the axis of the bore to open or close the breech.


CLS 89/26
TXT Breech-closures in which the novelty resides in the means for checking the
    gases from escaping at the breech in those guns which fire loose charges.


CLS 89/27.11
TXT FIRING DEVICES:

    Subject matter under the class definition having a lock or charge-exploding
    mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9+,     for firing devices for machine guns.

    132+    for firing devices for automatic guns.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, particularly subclasses 41+, 65+ and 69.01+ for firing
    devices for nonautomatic firearms.


CLS 89/27.12
TXT Safety:

    Subject matter under subclass 27.11 provided with a selectively operable
    device for preventing firing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148,    for like devices on automatic guns.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, subclasses 70.01+ for like devices on firearms.


CLS 89/27.13
TXT Primer fired:

    Subject matter under subclass 27.11 using a cap or cylinder containing a
    substance that is exploded in order to ignite an explosive charge.


CLS 89/27.14
TXT Percussion firing:

    Subject matter under subclass 27.11 which is detonated by a sharp blow.


CLS 89/27.3
TXT Gun firing actuators:

    Subject matter under subclass 27.11 for pulling the trigger of a gun which
    is operated from a location remote from the gun.


CLS 89/28.05
TXT Electric:

    Subject matter under subclass 27.11 for firing guns or ordnance by means of
    electricity.

    (1)     Note.  Electric releasing mechanism for mechanical projecting
    apparatus is found in Class 124, Mechanical Guns and Projectors, subclass
    32.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135,    for electrical firing devices for automatic guns.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, subclass 84, for electrical appliances, including firing
    devices, for nonautomatic firearms.


CLS 89/28.1
TXT Electrical and mechanical:

    Subject matter under subclass 28.05 having an alternate mechanical means
    (normally percussive) to fire a propellant.


CLS 89/28.2
TXT Training and firing:

    Subject matter under subclass 28.05 combined with electrically aiming or
    directing the gun.


CLS 89/29
TXT Small barrels adapted to be inserted in the bore of larger guns in order to
    permit firing a small load for practice or any other purpose.

    (1)     Note.  For devices inserted into real firearms to convert them into
    mere spring-operated target marking devices, see Class 124, Mechanical Guns
    and Projectors, subclass 28.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, subclass 77 for similar devices in firearms.


CLS 89/30
TXT Inventions relative to the vent or touch-hole or its stopper.


CLS 89/31
TXT Devices for closing the gun-muzzle or other opening in the barrel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits subclass 89 and indented subclasses and
    the notes thereto, for closures or plugs for pipes and tubular conduits.

    181,    Acoustics, subclass 223 for gun silencers, per se.


CLS 89/33.01
TXT CARTRIDGE FEEDING:

    Subject matter under the class definition to hold and/or feed a plurality
    of cartridges to a gun.  The gun may be automatic, and the inclusion in the
    claims of conventional explosion-operated means, such as a recoiling barrel
    on a gas piston, will not prevent classification in this or indented
    subclasses where the improvement lies in the feeding device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45+,    for devices for loading single cartridges, charges or projectiles
    to guns.

    125+,   for significant automatic gun structure in addition to cartridge
    feeding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, appropriate "magazine" subclasses for cartridge feeding
    devices for firearms.

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, for the structure of
    cartridge chutes and guides not structurally associated with a gun.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for article dispensers
    not otherwise provided for.


CLS 89/33.02
TXT Drum magazine:

    Subject matter under subclass 33.01 having a cylindrical magazine from
    which cartridges are fed in a spiral path to the gun.


CLS 89/33.03
TXT Movable chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 33.01 where the part of the gun which holds
    the ammunition when it is fired is displaced between a loading and a firing
    position.


CLS 89/33.04
TXT Selective feed:

    Subject matter under subclass 33.01 wherein alternative type of ammunition
    are alternatively fed to a gun chamber from one or more magazines, or belts
    or other ammunition holders while on the gun.


CLS 89/33.05
TXT With rammer separated breach block:

    Subject matter under subclass 33.01 where the round is pushed into the gun
    by something other than the breech block.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for rammer, per se.


CLS 89/33.1
TXT With magazine:

    Subject matter under subclass 33.01 having a case or chamber on a gun from
    which cartridges are inserted into the gun.


CLS 89/33.14
TXT Belt feed:

    Subject matter under subclass 33.1 wherein cartridges are supplied from a
    strip of material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33.2+,  for belt feed without magazine.


CLS 89/33.16
TXT With rotary feeder:

    Subject matter under subclass 33.14 having a sprocket which places a
    cartridge in position to be chambered.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33.17,  for magazine with rotary feeder without belt feed.

    33.25,  for rotary feeder with belt feed without a magazine.


CLS 89/33.17
TXT With rotary feeder:

    Subject matter under subclass 33.1 having a sprocket which places a
    cartridge in position to be chambered.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33.16,  for magazine with rotary feeder with belt feed.

    33.25,  for rotary feeder with belt feed without a magazine.


CLS 89/33.2
TXT Belt feed:

    Subject matter under subclass 33.01 wherein cartridges are supplied from a
    strip of material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33.14+  for a belt feed with a magazine.


CLS 89/33.25
TXT With rotary feeder:

    Subject matter under subclass 33.2 having a sprocket which places a
    cartridge in position to be chambered.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33.16,  for a rotary feeder with a belt feed and a magazine.

    33.17,  for a rotary feeder with a magazine without a belt feed.


CLS 89/33.4
TXT Empty shell receivers:

    Subject matter under subclass 33.01 to receive or catch spent cartridge
    cases ejected from the gun.


CLS 89/33.5
TXT Cartridge feeding auxiliary feeder:

    Subject matter under subclass 33.01 where a plurality of cartridges are fed
    to one or more cartridge feeders before being ultimately being fed to a gun.


CLS 89/34
TXT Magazines, feed-cases, packages, etc., in which cartridges are regularly
    placed to be fed therefrom to the feeding-chute or other mechanism which
    directly supplies the gun.


CLS 89/35.01
TXT Belts:

    Devices under subclasses 33.01+ having a series of loops, links or grips
    for holding cartridges that are fed from  it into an automatic gun.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 76+ for article dispensers not
    otherwise provided for, in which the source is a conveyor-type cellular
    magazine, and see especially subclasses 84+ for flexible belt-carried cell
    structures.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclass 223 for plural receiver
    pockets formed by strips attached to a backing at spaced points.


CLS 89/35.02
TXT Disintegrating type:

    Devices under subclass 35.01 wherein the cartridge-holding means or a
    portion of the holding means separate into parts or decompose.


CLS 89/36.01
TXT SHIELDS:

    Devices under the class definition adapted to render protection an ordnance
    device or to the ordnance operating personnel.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are devices which also screen,
    cover, shroud or cloak.

    (2)     Note.  Enclosures and walls having gun ports which are not in
    combination with a gun or gun mount are not proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 2.5 for guards and protectors which are
    penetration resistant.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 394 for armored railway cars.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclass 9 for guard
    booths; subclass 49.5 for shields and protectors, and subclasses 58+ for
    enclosures and walls.

    114,    Ships, subclasses 1+ for warships having armor.

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclasses 167+ for armored resilient
    tires.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 121 for shields and other protective devices.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 911 for
    penetrating resistant layer and subclass 919 for camouflaged articles.


CLS 89/36.02
TXT Shape or composition:

    Devices under subclass 36.01 wherein the configuration of the ordnance
    protector is specified or the material and structure is also specified.


CLS 89/36.03
TXT Rotating shield:

    Devices under subclass 36.01 wherein the ordnance protector revolves about
    an axis.


CLS 89/36.04
TXT For fixed structure:

    Devices under subclass 36.01 wherein the ordnance protector is installed on
    a stationary structure means, e.g., hanger, building, etc.


CLS 89/36.05
TXT Body:

    Devices under subclass 36.01 wherein the ordnance protector is specifically
    adapted to fit the human body, e.g., jackets, helmets, shoes, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS

    2,      Apparel, subclass 2.5 for guards and protectors which are
    penetration resistant.

    109,    Safes, Banks Protection, or a Related Device, subclass 49.5 for
    shields and protectors.


CLS 89/36.06
TXT Small arms attached:

    Devices under subclass 36.01 wherein the ordnance protector is adapted to
    be installed on a weapon which may be carried by an individual operator.

    (1)     Note.  A small arm is a firearm of small caliber or (MM), including
    pistols, rifles, machine guns and shot guns.  The maximum caliber or (MM)
    may vary up top an including 30 caliber.


CLS 89/36.07
TXT Transportable:

    Devices under subclass 36.01 wherein the ordnance-protector means can be
    carried from one place to another to a desired location.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are devices such as blinds,
    protectors on tripods, covers for machine guns, etc.


CLS 89/36.08
TXT Self-propelled, e.g., tanks:

    Devices under subclass 36.07 wherein the ordnance protector is attached to
    or is part of an armored vehicle which moves under its own power.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is not intended to include running gear, drive
    trains, engine details, etc.  It is intended to provide only structure to
    protect an ordnance piece in broad combination with a self-propelled
    vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, and appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses
    182+ for propulsion element of endless track type.

    280,    Land Vehicles, and appropriate subclasses, especially 211, steering
    by driving.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 187+ for vehicle
    body-structural means, including means for reinforcing and resisting
    deformation from impact.


CLS 89/36.09
TXT Wheeled:

    Devices under subclass 36.07 wherein the ordnance protector is provided
    with wheels for mobility to a desired location.


CLS 89/36.11
TXT For aircraft:

    Devices under subclass 36.01 wherein the ordnance protector is attached to
    some portion of the aircraft structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 121 for shields and other protective devices.


CLS 89/36.12
TXT For ships:

    Devices under subclass 36.01 wherein the ordnance protector is attached to
    some portions of the ship structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclasses 1+ for warships having armor.


CLS 89/36.13
TXT Turret type:

    Devices under subclass 36.01 wherein the ordnance protector is a
    dome-shaped or cylindrical structure having observation slits or gun ports
    and mounted on a fixed or  mobile structure, e.g., tank, armored vehicle,
    building, aircraft, etc.


CLS 89/36.14
TXT With vision slit or gun port closure:

    Devices under subclass 36.13 provided with movable means to cover or
    uncover the slit or port.

    (1)     Note.  Also included in this subclass are bullet proof vision
    blocks and feriscopes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    402+ for a periscope, per se.


CLS 89/36.15
TXT On elevatable platform:

    Devices under subclass 36.01 wherein the ordnance protector is mounted on a
    permanent structure or a movable device and can be raised or lowered to a
    different level.


CLS 89/36.16
TXT Anti-aircraft type:

    Devices under subclass 36.01 comprising a barrage barrier or a plurality of
    barrage barriers usually a balloon restrained from free flight by means of
    a cable thereby denying access to the air space in the vicinity of the
    ordnance protector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, appropriate subclass for details of
    explosive devices, mechanism, etc.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclass 20 for fluent
    material releasing, generating and/or for explosive devices and wall
    contained detonators.


CLS 89/36.17
TXT With explosive device:

    Devices under subclass 36.01 wherein an explosive mechanism or element is
    combined with the ordnance protector.


CLS 89/37.01
TXT MOUNTS:

    Devices under the class definition comprising structure for supporting any
    ordnance-type apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.7+,   for rocket launching and nonrecoil gun mounts.

    1.815+  for movable launcher.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, subclass 94 for rests for supporting the for ward end of
    a manually held gun.

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, subclass 29 for simulated mounted
    ordnance which projects a missile by spring operated mechanical means.


CLS 89/37.02
TXT Anti-aircraft:

    Devices under subclass 37.01 wherein the ordnance mount is especially
    designed to be shifted in direction and elevation, including overhead, for
    the purpose of defense against airborne aircraft.


CLS 89/37.03
TXT Light machine gun type:

    Devices under subclass 37.01 wherein the supporting structure is
    specifically adapted to support an ordnance device that fires small arms
    ammunition automatically and is capable of sustained rapid fire.


CLS 89/37.04
TXT Rifle and pistol mounts:

    Devices under subclass 37.01 comprising supporting structure for short
    automatic or semiautomatic firearms.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are bipods and cradles for
    supporting the ordnance device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, subclass 94 for rests for  small side arms.


CLS 89/37.05
TXT Mortars:

    Devices under subclass 37.01 wherein the supporting structure is adapted to
    provide a firm base for an ordnance device that has a high angle of fire,
    e.g., greater than 450.


CLS 89/37.06
TXT Submarine:

    Devices under subclass 37.01 wherein the ordnance supporting structure is
    adapted to be submerged under water.


CLS 89/37.07
TXT Trunion:

    Devices under subclass 37.01 wherein one or two pivots supports the
    ordnance device on its carriage and forms the horizontal axis about which
    the ordnance barrel rotates when elevated.


CLS 89/37.08
TXT Counterbalances:

    Devices under subclass 37.01 wherein the supporting structure includes
    force producing mechanism designed to provide a movement about the trunions
    of a gun cradle which is equal and opposite to that caused by the
    unbalanced weight of the tipping parts, thus making it easier to elevated
    the gun.


CLS 89/37.09
TXT Leveling:

    Devices under subclass 37.01 wherein the supporting structure includes
    mechanism for adjusting the device so that all horizontal or verticle
    angles will be measured in the true horizontal and vertical planes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.18,  for motor operated trunion tilt training mechanisms.

    41.22,  for training mechanisms which are gyroscope or pendulum initiated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 235+ for gun sights or ordnance
    devices having means for leveling.


CLS 89/37.11
TXT Locks:

    Devices under subclass 37.01 wherein the supporting structure includes
    means by which the motion of the ordnance tube supporting structure is
    retarded, arrested or dampened.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, appropriate subclass for brakes, per se.


CLS 89/37.12
TXT Spherical or oval gun support:

    Devices under subclass 37.01 wherein the supporting structure is adapted to
    cradle an ordnance device in a sphere-like or egg shaped support.


CLS 89/37.13
TXT Bases:

    Devices under subclass 37.01 wherein the supporting structure includes a
    firm foundation for resting an ordnance device.


CLS 89/37.14
TXT Reciprocating mounts:

    Devices under subclass 37.01 wherein the supporting structure includes
    means that dampen the recoil or rapid fire ordnance devices.


CLS 89/37.15
TXT With body protecting devices:

    Devices under subclass 37.01 wherein the supporting structure includes
    gripping handles, breast pads, head pieces or shoulder devices for
    preventing harm to personnel that operate an ordnance device.


CLS 89/37.16
TXT Aircraft type:

    Devices under subclass 37.01 wherein the ordnance supporting structure is
    mounted on some portion of the structure of an aircraft.


CLS 89/37.17
TXT Power operated:

    Devices under subclass 37.16 having a source of power, other than manual,
    for directing the ordnance supporting structure at a target.


CLS 89/37.18
TXT On  engine:

    Devices under subclass 37.16 wherein the ordnance supporting device is
    mounted on the wings of the aircraft.


CLS 89/37.19
TXT On aircraft wing:

    Devices under subclass 37.16 wherein the ordnance supporting device is
    mounted on the wings of the aircraft.


CLS 89/37.21
TXT Retractable gun turret:

    Devices under subclass 37.16 wherein the ordnance supporting structure is a
    dome shaped or cylindrical structure having observation slits or gun ports
    and is capable of being drawn back or into the aircraft structure.


CLS 89/37.22
TXT Multiple guns on mount:

    Devices under subclass 37.16 wherein the ordnance supporting structure has
    more than one ordnance device supported thereon.


CLS 89/38
TXT Mounts for guns made to disappear after firing to be reloaded.


CLS 89/39
TXT Mounts under subclass 38 which are balanced by a weight or weights.


CLS 89/40.01
TXT For field use:

    Devices under subclass 37.01 wherein the ordnance supporting structure is
    particularly adapted to be utilized in the field and mobil enough to be
    readily moved.


CLS 89/40.02
TXT Wheeled mortars:

    Devices under subclass 40.01 having wheels attached to the ordnance
    supporting structure and an ordnance device mounted thereto which is
    adapted to be fired at elevation angles greater than 45o.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.3,    for muzzle loading device.

    1.35,   for trench mortars.

    37.05,  for mortars mounts that do not have wheels.


CLS 89/40.03
TXT On armored car:

    Devices under subclass 40.01 wherein the ordnance supporting structure is
    mounted on a wheeled motor vehicle having protective armor plate designed
    for combat use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36.08,  for self-propelled vehicles, e.g., tanks.


CLS 89/40.04
TXT Nonshielded motor driven guns:

    Devices under subclass 40.01 wherein the wheeled motor vehicle is not
    provided with armor protection.


CLS 89/40.05
TXT On sleds:

    Devices under subclass 40.01 wherein the ordnance supporting device and the
    ordnance piece are mounted and moved into field operation on skids or
    runners.


CLS 89/40.06
TXT On tripods (i.e., for light guns):

    Devices under subclass 40.01 wherein the field mount is a three-leg
    supporting structure and the ordnance device is of such small size as to be
    readily movable by the user in the field.


CLS 89/40.07
TXT Limbers and caissons:

    Devices under subclass 40.01 comprising wheeled devices, usually
    two-wheeled type, for the transport of ammunition with the ordnance device
    in the field.


CLS 89/40.08
TXT With hitches and couplings:

    Devices under subclass 40.01 including means for attaching an ordnance
    device to its ammunition supply vehicle while both are being repositioned
    in the field.


CLS 89/40.09
TXT With training spades:

    Devices under subclass 40.01 including projections on the ordnance training
    for digging into the earth to prevent the ordnance supporting structure
    from moving during recoil.


CLS 89/40.11
TXT Carriage suspended for firing:

    Devices under subclass 40.01 wherein the weight of the ordnance device and
    supporting structure, though borne by wheels when being positioned in the
    field, are supported by auxiliary structure when the ordnance is discharged.


CLS 89/40.12
TXT Traveling locks:

    Devices under subclass 40.01 including devices for holding the ordnance
    device in a fixed position with respect supporting structure while the
    supporting structure is being repositioned in the field.


CLS 89/40.13
TXT By separate transport carriage:

    Devices under subclass 40.01 wherein the ordnance device is moved in the
    field on vehicle- type devices from which the ordnance must be removed
    before actual use.


CLS 89/40.14
TXT Components are separable for transport:

    Devices under subclass 40.01 wherein the ordnance device is adapted to be
    broken down into modular components for repositioning the field, e.g., the
    ordnance barrel is separated from its cradle during field movements.


CLS 89/40.15
TXT Trail carriages and links:

    Devices under subclass 40.01 comprising wheeled vehicles upon which
    ordnance devices are mounted for in-field service.


CLS 89/40.16
TXT Railroad type:

    Devices under subclass 40.01 wherein an ordnance device is mounted and
    transported by and/or fixed from a railroad car.


CLS 89/41.01
TXT Training mechanisms:

    Devices under subclass 37.01 wherein the ordnance supporting structure
    includes means for directly moving the supporting structure to aim or
    direct an ordnance device at a target.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 11+ for training mechanisms
    for teaching gunnery.


CLS 89/41.02
TXT Motor operated:

    Devices under subclass 41.01 having a source of power, other than manual
    for directing the ordnance device at a target.


CLS 89/41.03
TXT Predetermining parameters for automatic firing:

    Devices under subclass 41.02 including means for automatically firing the
    ordnance device and determining the various individual ballistic parameters
    used in firing gun, e.g., barrel droop, powder temperature, tube ware
    velocity of round fired, etc.


CLS 89/41.04
TXT Eliminates lag or overrun:

    Devices under subclass 41.02 wherein the power source includes antihunt
    devices, e.g., position, velocity or higher deriviates feedback.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 358+ for feedback to
    hydraulic motor.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 628+ for feedback to
    electric motors.


CLS 89/41.05
TXT By television monitoring;

    Devices under subclass 41.02 wherein a target area is viewed by means of a
    television camera, e.g., iconoscope, and the target scene is converted into
    an electronic image which is reproduced into a visual image on a television
    viewing screen for controlling the motor.

    (1)     Note. Night vision devices are proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclass 143 for television surveillance.


CLS 89/41.06
TXT By light reception:

    Devices under subclass 41.02 having means for receiving light either
    originating from a target or reflected by the target from a light source
    originating from the ordnance for controlling the motors which direct the
    ordnance device at a target.

    (1)     Note. Laser range finders in combination with ballistic computers
    controlling the aiming of an ordnance device are proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 3.01+, 4.01+, 5.01+,
    139.04 through 139.1, 141.1 through 141.5 and 152.1 through 152.3 for laser
    direction and distance detectors.


CLS 89/41.07
TXT By radar:

    Devices under subclass 41.02 including means utilizing short radio wave
    signals to control the power source in aiming an ordnance device.


CLS 89/41.08
TXT By sound:

    Devices under subclass 41.02 including means utilizing acoustic energy to
    control the power source in aiming an ordnance device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclass 125 for sound locating apparatus.

    367,    Communications, Electrical: Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 118+ for distance or direction finding.


CLS 89/41.09
TXT Gyroscopically or pendulum controlled:

    Devices under subclass 41.02 having initial means to actuate and maintain
    the equilibrium of the ordnance device.

    (1)     Note. Ordnance devices mounted on aircraft, ships and tanks are
    proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 236 for similar-type devices.


CLS 89/41.11
TXT Compensates for trunion tilt:

    Devices under subclass 41.02 including means to correct for or offset the
    effects of a nonlevel condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37.09,  for leveling the gun mount.


CLS 89/41.12
TXT By hydraulic means;

    Devices under subclass 41.02 having an expansible chamber motor to control
    the aiming of an ordnance device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, for hydraulic motors, per se.


CLS 89/41.13
TXT For scattering effect:

    Devices under subclass 41.02 having means to vary the direction at which
    the ordnance devices is aimed between individual rounds to achieve a
    dispersion pattern (shot gun effect) at a target.


CLS 89/41.14
TXT For naval gun fire control:

    Devices under subclass 41.02 wherein the ordnance device supporting
    structure and aiming mechanism is mounted aboard a naval vessel (i.e., for
    use in water) and firing is controlled therefrom.


CLS 89/41.15
TXT With unitary control for plural motors:

    Devices under subclass 41.02 wherein the power source includes a single
    control means, e.g., joy stick, for controlling both movement of the
    azimuth and the elevation motors.


CLS 89/41.16
TXT For relatively movable gun barrels:

    Devices under subclass 41.01 including means to adjust the gun barrels
    relative to each other for the purpose of effecting parallelism amongst the
    barrels or to converge a volley of rounds to a target.


CLS 89/41.17
TXT Aiming device mounted on gun:

    Devices under subclass 41.01 wherein the supporting structure includes an
    ordnance device that has an aiming device directly attached to an ordnance
    barrel.

    (1)     Note. The aiming devices include sights, lights, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, subclasses 1.01+ for lights, sights and telescopes
    mounted on a firearm.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 110-114 for lights that illuminate the
    line of fire.


CLS 89/41.18
TXT For limiting the field of fire:

    Devices under subclass 41.01 wherein the supporting structure includes
    means to prevent aiming an ordnance device in certain predetermined
    directions to avoid damaging the structure on which the ordnance is mounted
    or other surrounding friendly structures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    for devices for rendering the firing devices of gun inoperative
    when the guns are pointed in certain predetermined directions, to avoid
    damaging the structure surrounding the guns.


CLS 89/41.19
TXT Sights or line devices:

    Devices under subclass 41.01 having attachments for ordnance devices
    whereby a line of sight may be established parallel to the longitudinal
    axis of the ordnance device and/or at angle thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 233+ for gun sights and
    subclass 237 for automatic gun movement compensations.

    235,    Registers, subclasses 400+ for ordnance or weapon system computers.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.69 and 825.72 for
    miscellaneous radio wave energy control systems.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 247+ for fiducial
    instruments including recticles and deflection of the line of sight.


CLS 89/41.21
TXT On aircraft:

    Devices under subclass 41.19 wherein the aiming sight device is mounted on
    the structure of an aircraft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 229+ for bombsights.


CLS 89/41.22
TXT For anti-aircraft:

    Devices under subclass 41.19 wherein the aiming sight device is for the
    purpose of directing the ordnance fire at aerial targets.


CLS 89/42.01
TXT With recoil check:

    Devices under subclass 37.01 wherein the supporting structure for the
    ordnance device includes a mechanism designed to absorb the energy of
    recoil in such manner as to prevent violent movement of the
    ordnance-supporting carriage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.05+,  for explosion-opened breech guns with recoiling barrels.

    160+,   for automatic guns with movable barrels.

    177,    for automatic guns with barrel buffers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, subclass 75.01 for barrel mounts for recoiling barrel
    automatic guns.

    181,    Acoustics, subclass 223 for gun silencers, per se.


CLS 89/42.02
TXT On trail spade:

    Devices under subclass 42.01 wherein the shock absorbing mechanism is
    located on the supporting structure which is normally embedded in the
    ground to restrict movement of the carriage during recoil.


CLS 89/42.03
TXT Fire-out-of-battery type:

    Devices under subclass 42.01 wherein there is recoil energy compensation
    and compensation for the forward movement of the ordnance device while
    being discharged.


CLS 89/43.01
TXT Fluid:

    Devices under subclass 42.01 wherein the recoil absorbing mechanism
    includes a device which utilizes compression of air, water or other liquid
    or gaseous material for its energy absorbing operation.


CLS 89/43.02
TXT With function of elevation:

    Devices under subclass 43.01 wherein there is compensation of the
    compressed fluid as ordnance device is elevated or lowered so as to
    maintain proper center of gravity for the ordnance device.


CLS 89/44.01
TXT Spring type:

    Devices under subclass 42.01 wherein the recoil absorbing mechanism
    includes resilient means.


CLS 89/44.02
TXT Elastic type:

    Devices under subclass 33.01 wherein the resilient means are stretchable,
    flexible expandable, etc., (e.g., rubber type).


CLS 89/45
TXT Devices for getting the load into firing position in the gun not otherwise
    classifiable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.05+,  for explosion opened breech guns involving features additional to
    gun loading.

    33.01+, for devices to hold and/or feed a plurality of cartridges to a gun.


CLS 89/46
TXT Apparatus for raising the load to the muzzle or breech of the gun.


CLS 89/47
TXT Devices for ramming or pushing the load into the gun.


CLS 89/125
TXT Guns under the class definition in which the forces developed by the
    explosion cause operation of the breechblock, firing mechanism and
    self-loading mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  In order to cause classification in this or the indented
    subclasses, the firearm must be of the self-loading explosion-operated
    type, and all devices of this type and subcombinations thereof are placed
    in these subclasses with the exceptions noted in the notes of this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Explosion-operated means are the gas piston, barrels which
    move due to the explosion and operate the gun mechanism, breechblocks
    having features for blow-back, means operated by motion of the projectile,
    and breechblocks having springs or other means which will cause the
    breechblock to return to closed position.

    (3)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses have both hand and shoulder
    firearms and the heavier firearms and mounted ordnance.

    (4)     Note.  Appended to this subclass and to the indented subclasses are
    notes setting forth related subject matter classified in other classes and
    in other subclasses of this class with a more specific statement of the
    particular lines followed.

    (5)     Note.  The term "automatic" as normally used in the patents of this
    art has two distinct meanings:



    A.      To indicate automatic gun operation, where the gun is entirely
    self-loading; and

    B.      To indicate automatic firing control, where the automatic gun is
    constructed to fire continuously while the trigger is held retracted, as
    long as the ammunition supply will permit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.1     for conventional automatic ordnance combined with auxiliary means
    for placing the gun in condition to begin automatic fire (e.g., breechblock
    retracting means).

    4.05+,  for explosion-opened breech guns, i.e., guns having
    explosion-operated features as defined in (2) Note but of the
    nonself-loading type.  The line is disclosure. In all cases where the
    disclosure is not clear that the gun is of the nonself-loading type,
    classification is in subclasses 125+.

    9+,     for nonautomatic rapid-fire guns in which external mechanical means
    are employed to load, fire and reload the gun.

    27.11+, for firing devices for nonautomatic ordnance.

    33.01+, for conventional automatic ordnance claimed in combination with
    cartridge feeding devices.

    37.01++, for conventional automatic guns claimed in combination with mount
    structures.

    41.01+, for guns having explosion-operated means for changing the angle of
    fire (in any direction) and including for example explosion-operated
    traversing and plural barrels with explosion-operated means to cause the
    angles between the barrels to change.

    45+,    for loading apparatus for nonautomatic ordnance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, subclass 16 for conventional automatic firearms of the
    rearward sliding-breechblock type combined with auxiliary devices for
    manually retracting the breechblock; subclasses 59+, for nonautomatic
    firearm revolvers; all "magazine" subclasses, for cartridge holders for or
    combined with conventional automatic firearms; subclasses 69.01+, for
    miscellaneous firing mechanisms for nonautomatic firearms.

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 632+ for one shot explosion-actuated
    expansible chamber-type motors.


CLS 89/126
TXT Guns or gun assemblies under subclass 125 in which two or more guns,
    barrels or barrel boxes are claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9+,     for nonautomatic, machine guns with plural barrels or boxes.


CLS 89/127
TXT Guns under subclass 126 with particular firing control mechanisms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132+,   for firing control for single barrel guns.


CLS 89/128
TXT Guns under subclass 125 convertible to different types of automatic gun
    operation, r to nonautomatic gun operation.

    (1)     Note.  The different types of operation may relate to the breech
    locking means, or the cartridge feeding, extracting or ejecting means, for
    examples.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, recoiling barrel guns
    having means settable to prevent the barrel from recoiling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129.01+ and 140+, for convertible firing control as distinguished from
    convertible gun operation.

    169     and 170, for barrel latches for other purposes.

    193,    for gas piston-operated guns with shutoff valves to convert the gun
    to nonautomatic operation.


CLS 89/129.01
TXT Regulation or speed or rate of automatic fire:

    Devices under subclass 125 having means for regulating the rate of
    continuous or automatic fire.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and the indented subclasses, include means for
    controlling or adjusting the cyclic period of the gun mechanism as well as
    the time of automatic release of the firing member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132,    for trigger-operated firing control means.

    169,    for breach block acceleration for recoiling barrel guns.

    177,    for barrel buffers and breaks.

    193,    for gas regulators for gas piston guns.

    198,    for breech block buffers and brakes.


CLS 89/129.02
TXT By regulating burst:

    Devices under subclass 129.01 having means which can control the number of
    rounds which can be fired by an automatic ordnance device.


CLS 89/130
TXT Guns under subclasses 129.01+ wherein the return of the breech block is
    delayed for a predetermined time, (e.g., by a breech block sear controlled
    by a clock escapement or fluid check).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143,    for trigger control of breech mechanism in semi-automatic fire.


CLS 89/131
TXT Guns under subclasses 129.01+ wherein the release of the hammer is delayed
    for a predetermined time after the closing of the breech block.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149     through 154, for means for automatically firing when, or preventing
    firing until, the breech block or barrel moves into battery (firing)
    position.


CLS 89/132
TXT Guns under subclass 125 where features of the firing mechanism are claimed
    as a part of the invention.

    (1)     Note.  The firing mechanism includes the firing pin and the
    mechanism for controlling or actuating the same (e.g., trigger, sear,
    etc.).  Where the breech block and its controlling or actuating means are
    claimed the mere statement that it carries a firing pin will not cause
    classification in this or the indented subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27.11+, for firing devices for nonautomatic ordnance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, subclasses 69.01+, for firing devices for nonautomatic
    firearms.


CLS 89/133
TXT Guns under subclass 132 wherein the firing device is synchronized with a
    moving nongun element such as an aircraft propeller, for example.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for synchronized firing of plural guns.


CLS 89/134
TXT Guns under subclass 132 having means to prevent firing towards parts of the
    structure on which the gun is mounted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.01,  for gun mounts having means to prevent pointing the gun in
    predetermined directions.


CLS 89/135
TXT Guns under subclass 132 with claimed electrical operation or control for
    the firing device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28.05,  for electrical firing devices for nonautomatic ordnance.

    134,    for electrical firing devices which are disabled at predetermined
    angles of fire.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, subclass 84, for electrical appliances including firing
    devices for nonautomatic firearms.


CLS 89/136
TXT Guns under subclass 132 wherein a particular trigger is claimed.  The
    trigger may be mounted on the gun or remote therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  The term "trigger" is used to designate the manually
    operated element or mechanism arranged to release the sear from the
    striker.  The sear releasing device is sometimes called a "trigger motor".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27.11+, for triggers for nonautomatic ordnance.

    127,    for firing control for plural guns, barrels or bores.

    133,    for triggers synchronized with aircraft propellers.

    135,    for electrical triggers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, subclasses 69.01+ for triggers for nonautomatic firearms.


CLS 89/137
TXT Guns under subclass 132 having interlocks between the firing mechanism and
    cartridge feeding mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the interlock is designed to prevent firing when the
    magazine is empty, or removed from the gun.


CLS 89/138
TXT Guns under subclass 137 wherein the breech block is locked open after the
    last cartridge is fed from the magazine.


CLS 89/139
TXT Guns under subclass 132 capable of semi-automatic firing operation.

    (1)     Note.  The term "semi-automatic", as applied to gun firing, is used
    to designate a firing device which requires manual release of the trigger
    after each shot before the next shot can be fired.

    (2)     Note.  Firing mechanisms comprising two trigger-operated sears (or
    sear shoulders) alternately engageable with the hammer are placed in this
    subclass (139).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132     and 149 to 154, for guns capable of full automatic fire only.


CLS 89/140
TXT Guns under subclass 139 wherein the firing device is selectively operable
    either full-automatic or semi-automatic.

    (1)     Note.  The terms "full-automatic" or "automatic" are applied to
    firing devices which effect continuous fire as long as the trigger is
    retracted and ammunition is supplied to the gun.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128,    for convertible gun operation.

    129.01+,for guns convertible to different rates of automatic fire.


CLS 89/141
TXT Guns under subclass 140 wherein the trigger and sear are automatically
    disconnected by the motion of some gun element other than the trigger or
    sear (e.g., breech block, barrel or hammer), when operating in
    semiautomatic condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145     and 146, for similar firing devices in guns capable of
    semiautomatic fire only.


CLS 89/142
TXT Convertible firing mechanisms under subclass 140 provided with a
    selectively operable safety device for preventing firing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148,    for similar safety devices for nonconvertible firing mechanisms.


CLS 89/143
TXT Guns under subclass 139 wherein the trigger alternately controls the hammer
    and either the breech block or a movable barrel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139,    for alternate control of two hammer sears.


CLS 89/144
TXT Guns under subclass 139 having means for disconnecting the trigger and sear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140+,   for similar firing devices convertible to full-automatic fire
    and/or safe condition.

    148,    for selective safety devices including those in which the trigger
    and sear are disconnected to prevent firing.


CLS 89/145
TXT Guns under subclass 144 wherein the trigger and sear are automatically
    disconnected by motion of the breech block or barrel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141,    for similar disconnection in convertible firing devices.


CLS 89/146
TXT Guns under subclass 144 wherein the trigger and sear are automatically
    disconnected by the motion of the hammer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141,    for similar disconnections in convertible firing devices.


CLS 89/147
TXT Guns under subclass 139 wherein the hammer is cocked and released by a
    continuous pull on the trigger.

    (1)     Note.  These firing devices are closely analogous to firing devices
    for double acting revolvers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, subclasses 65+ and 69.01+ for similar firing devices for
    nonautomatic firearms.


CLS 89/148
TXT Firing devices under subclass 132 provided with a selectively operable
    safety device for preventing firing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142,    for similar safety devices for convertible firing mechanisms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, subclasses 66 and 70.01+ for miscellaneous safety devices
    for gun firing mechanisms.


CLS 89/149
TXT Guns under subclass 132 having means automatically operable by motion of
    breech block or barrel into firing position to release either the trigger
    operated sear or a separate sear, to effect firing.

    (1)     Note.  The separate sear is sometimes termed a "safety sear", or
    "automatic sear".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150,    for automatic safety devices to prevent premature operation of the
    sear or trigger.

    151+,   for devices other than sears to automatically effect firing.


CLS 89/150
TXT Guns under subclass 132 having means automatically operable by motion of
    breech block or barrel into battery position to release a safety lock for a
    sear or trigger.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149,    for automatic sears or sear releasing devices.

    154,    for automatic hammer safety devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, subclasses 66 and 70.01+ for nonautomatic (manually
    operated) sear or trigger safety locks.


CLS 89/151
TXT Guns under subclass 132 having means automatically operable by motion of
    breech block or barrel into battery position to effect firing movement of
    the hammer (e.g., inertia-operated firing pins or hammers).

    (1)     Note.  Usually the hammer is automatically cocked.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149,    for automatic sear release means.


CLS 89/152
TXT Guns under subclass 151 in which the automatic hammer also operates the
    breech lock (e.g., a firing pin carried by a gas piston-operated action
    slide).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153,    for breech locks operated by an element of the firing device other
    than an automatic hammer.


CLS 89/153
TXT Guns under subclass 132 in which the firing device also operates the breech
    block lock.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    for breech locks operated by an automatic hammer.

    155     through 190, for automatic breech locks operated independently of
    the firing devices.


CLS 89/154
TXT Guns under subclass 132 having means automatically operable by motion of
    breech block or barrel to cock the hammer and/or to operate a hammer safety
    device.

    (1)     Note.  The hammer safety device is operative only when the breech
    is open or unlocked.  Any movement of the hammer or firing pin upon release
    of the safety device is insufficient to cause firing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142     and 148, for selective safety devices for firing mechanisms of
    automatic guns.

    149,    for automatic sears which when released permit firing movement of
    the hammers.

    151,    for hammers which are automatically cocked and fired.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, subclasses 66 and 70.01+ for miscellaneous safety devices
    for gun firing mechanisms.


CLS 89/155
TXT Guns under subclass 125 wherein the cartridge is fired in a movable firing
    chamber (e.g., a revolver cylinder actuated by a gas piston).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13.05+, for nonautomatic machine guns with revolving chambers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, subclasses 15, 27, 39.5, 59+, for nonautomatic firearms
    with movable chambers.


CLS 89/156
TXT Guns under subclass 155 wherein the movable chamber operates as a gas
    piston and/or a recoil member to unlock and/or open the breech.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159     and 191.01+, for other gas piston- operated guns.


CLS 89/157
TXT Guns under subclass 155 with a recoiling barrel and revolving chambers
    actuated by the recoil movement of the barrel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159     and 162+, for other recoiling barrel guns.


CLS 89/158
TXT Guns under subclass 125 wherein the breech mechanism is actuated by the
    recoil of the gun proper relative to a butt-piece movable on the shoulder
    stock.

    (1)     Note.  Patents claiming a movable butt-piece and disclosing or
    claiming possibly novel breech locking structure are cross-referenced into
    the appropriate subclass indented under subclass 180 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180+,   see (1) Note.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, subclasses 71.01+ for stock structure, per se.


CLS 89/159
TXT Guns under subclass 125 having interrelated movable barrel and gas-operated
    features.

    (1)     Note.  Where the gas-operated feature involves nothing more than
    blow back of the breech block or blow forward of the barrel after being
    unlocked, classification is in subclasses 160+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37.01+, for gun mounts for conventional movable guns.

    160+,   see (1) Note.


CLS 89/160
TXT Guns under subclass 125 in which the barrel is movably mounted relative to
    the stock.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass (160) takes guns having barrel movement other
    than forward and rearward reciprocation, e.g., rotary only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159,    for movable barrel guns having gas- operated features other than
    mere blow back.


CLS 89/161
TXT Guns under subclass 160 wherein the barrel moves forwardly relative to the
    stock or other mount when a shot is fired.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the breech block is fixed, and the barrel is not
    locked in battery position.  These are sometimes called "Blow Forward" guns.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, subclasses 10+ for nonautomatic guns having forwardly
    movable barrels.


CLS 89/162
TXT Guns under subclass 160 wherein the barrel recoils rearwardly relative to
    the stock or other mount.

    (1)     Note.  The breech block is usually locked to the barrel when the
    shot is fired, and is unlocked by the movement of the barrel on recoil.
    The locking member may be mounted on either the breech block or the barrel.

    (2)     Note.  Usually the barrel has axial, rectilinear motion.

    (3)     Note.  In this and indented subclasses the motion of the breech
    block considered is that relative to the barrel to open the breech for
    reloading.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.05+,  for explosion-opened breech guns with recoiling barrels.

    155     and 156, for guns in which the chamber only is movable.

    157,    for recoiling barrels with revolving chambers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42.01,  Firearms, subclasses 75.01+ for barrel mounts for recoiling barrels.


CLS 89/163
TXT Guns under subclass 162, wherein the barrel has motion in addition to
    axial, rectilinear motion (e.g., rotary, tilting, transverse sliding).


CLS 89/164
TXT Guns under subclass 162, having means automatically operable to latch the
    breech block lock in unlocked position during a predetermined portion of
    the gun operating cycle.


CLS 89/165
TXT Guns under subclass 162, usually termed "long recoil guns", wherein the
    barrel and breech block recoil substantially the same distance, and the
    fired shell is extracted by the subsequent counter recoil (forward)
    movement of the barrel relative to the breech block.

    (1)     Note.  The breech block (or an auxiliary cartridge fed slide) is
    usually held in recoil position during extraction by a catch which is
    automatically released after extraction is completed.

    (2)     Note.  So called "short recoil" guns are distributed among the
    various subclasses indented under subclass 162, particularly subclasses 171
    through 176.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163,    169 through 176, for "short recoil" guns, i.e., those in which the
    barrel recoils are relatively short distance locked to the breech block,
    and then the breech block is unlocked and continues to recoil, extracting
    the fired shell.


CLS 89/166
TXT Guns under subclass 165 wherein the breech block motion or one component
    thereof is nonrectilinear.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the motion is a combined one (e.g., tilting or
    rotary and sliding).


CLS 89/167
TXT Guns under subclass 165 wherein the breech block motion is rectilinear but
    nonaxial relative to the barrel (e.g., transverse sliding)


CLS 89/168
TXT Guns under subclass 165 with a pivoted member or toggle for locking the
    breech block.


CLS 89/169
TXT Guns under subclass 162 provided with a means for accelerating the rearward
    movement of the breech mechanism (or a part thereof) relative to the barrel.

    (1)     Note.  In some guns the accelerator also serves as a barrel latch.


CLS 89/170
TXT Guns under subclass 162 provided with means for latching the barrel in
    recoiled position during the opening and closing of the breech.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128,    for barrel locks for preventing recoil of the barrel.

    169,    for accelerators serving as barrel latches.


CLS 89/171
TXT Guns under subclass 162 wherein the breech block motion or one component
    thereof is nonrectilinear.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the motion is a combined one (e.g., tilting and
    sliding).


CLS 89/172
TXT Guns under subclass 171 wherein the breech block rotates and slides.


CLS 89/173
TXT Guns under subclass 162 in which a locking member slides relative to the
    breech block.


CLS 89/174
TXT Guns under subclass 162 with a breech block locking member rotatable about
    the barrel axis.


CLS 89/175
TXT Guns under subclass 162 with a toggle lock for the breech block.

    (1)     Note.  The term "toggle" is applied herein to an assembly of two
    links pivoted together at one end and pivoted to the breech block and the
    barrel extension at the other end, and arranged substantially in a straight
    line, the toggle being broken during recoil to allow the breech block to be
    moved to loading position by blow back or otherwise.


CLS 89/176
TXT Guns under subclass 162 with a pivoted member for locking the breech block.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175,    for pivoted locking members of the toggle type.


CLS 89/177
TXT Guns under subclass 160 wherein the barrel is provided with either a buffer
    to absorb excess recoil or counter-recoil energy, or a brake to retard the
    rate of recoil or counter-recoil motion.

    (1)     Note. The intended function of the barrel buffer may be that of
    increasing the rate of fire.

    (2)     Note.  To cause classification in this subclass the buffer must
    involve more than a rigid stop surface and more than a barrel return spring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.01+, for recoil checks for nonautomatic guns.

    129.01+,for devices other than buffers or brakes for regulating the rate of
    fire.

    178,    for barrel recoil springs. 198, for other buffers and brakes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes.

    267,    Spring Devices.


CLS 89/178
TXT Guns under subclass 160 in which the invention lies in the means for
    returning the barrel to firing position.

    (1)     Note.  The return means is usually a spring device, which also
    opposes the recoil of the barrel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42+,    for similar devices for nonautomatic guns.

    177,    for barrel buffer springs, claimed per se or combined with barrel
    return means.

    199,    for breech-block return means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices.


CLS 89/179
TXT Guns under subclass 125 in which the breech block is unlocked by a gas
    piston-type actuator carried by the breech block.

    (1)     Note.  The actuator may be actuated by recoil of either the entire
    cartridge or the primer thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156,    for guns having movable chambers serving as gas pistons.

    183,    for lock operating inertia members started by slight blow back of
    the entire breech block.


CLS 89/180
TXT Guns under subclass 125 in which the claimed inventions is limited to a
    breech block locking or retarding means.

    (1)     Note.  The breech block may be either positively locked in breech
    closed position against any substantial blow back motion, or merely
    initially retarded.  To cause classification in this or indented subclasses
    the patents must claim some locking or retarding means other than the
    breech block recoil spring, a brake or the inertia of the parts.

    (2)     Note.  Patents claiming breech block locking structure and also
    claiming or disclosing novel gas piston structure will be classified here
    and cross-referenced to the appropriate gas piston subclasses 191.01+.

    (3)     Note.  The breech block locking member may be movably mounted on
    either the breech block or the stationary receiver or frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17+,    for breech block locks for nonautomatic ordnance.

    159     and 160+, for breech block locks for movable barrel guns.

    191.01+, see (2) Note.

    194+,   for inertia-locked or "blow back" guns.

    198,    for brakes for retarding substantially    the entire motion of the
    breech block.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, appropriate subclasses, for breech block locks for
    nonautomatic firearms.


CLS 89/181
TXT Guns under subclass 180 provided with a latch for the locking means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164,    for similar latches for recoiling barrel guns.


CLS 89/182
TXT Guns under subclass 180 in which the breech block lock is unlocked or
    released by a separate member movable by inertia relative to the breech
    block.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156,    for inertia operated movable chambers.

    162+,   for inertia operated barrels.


CLS 89/183
TXT Guns under subclass 182 in which the inertia member is started by a slight
    blow back motion of the breech block.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179,    for breech block locks operated by blow back of a part only of the
    breech block.

    194+,   for blow back guns having no breech lock.


CLS 89/184
TXT Guns under subclass 180 in which the breech block motion or one component
    thereof is nonrectilinear (e.g., tilting rotary).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166     and 171+, for movable barrel guns with nonrectilinearly movable
    breech block.


CLS 89/185
TXT Guns under subclass 184 in which the motion is that of rotating and sliding.


CLS 89/186
TXT Guns under subclass 180 in which the breech block motion is rectilinear but
    nonaxial (e.g., transverse sliding).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    for long recoil, movable barrel guns with nonaxial, rectilinear
    breech block motion.


CLS 89/187.01
TXT Sliding locking member:

    Devices under subclass 180 including means with a sliding member for
    locking the breech block.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173,    for short recoil, movable barrel guns with sliding locks.


CLS 89/187.02
TXT Cylindrial or ball bearing:

    Devices under subclass 187.01 wherein the sliding member is columnar in
    shape or includes a ball shape bearing.


CLS 89/188
TXT Guns under subclass 180 with a breech block locking member rotatable about
    the barrel axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174,    for short recoil, movable barrel guns with rotary locks.


CLS 89/189
TXT Guns under subclass 180 with a toggle lock for the breech block.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168     and 175, for movable barrel guns with toggle locks.


CLS 89/190
TXT Guns under subclass 180 with a pivoted member for locking the breech block.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168     and 176, for movable barrel guns with pivoted locks.


CLS 89/191.01
TXT Gas piston type:

    Devices under subclass 125 having a gas- operated cylinder device, the
    movement of which operates the extracting and reloading mechanism of an
    automatic ordnance device.

    (1)     Note.  Blow back guns (no breech lock) are excluded from this and
    indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  To cause original classification herein the claims must be
    directed to the structure of the gas port, cylinder or piston, and/or the
    connection with the breech block lock and must not include and specific
    breech block lock.

    (3)     Note.  Usually the gas piston unlocks the breech block lock, but in
    some guns it serves to retard blow back of the breech block.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156,    for movable chambers operating as gas pistons.

    159,    for combined movable barrel and gas operated guns.

    179,    for gas pistons carried by the breech block.

    180+,   for gas piston-type guns where the claims include a breech block
    lock.

    194+,   for blow back guns.


CLS 89/191.02
TXT Annular piston:

    Devices under subclass 191.01 wherein the gas-operated device is circular
    in shape.


CLS 89/192
TXT Guns under subclasses 191.01+ in which the exploding gases move a gas
    piston to compress a spring, which, after the gas drops to a predetermined
    value, unlocks and moves the breech block to open position.


CLS 89/193
TXT Guns under subclass 191 with specific gas ports, cylinders and/or
    regulators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 37+ for regulators, per se.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, appropriate subclasses for valve
    structure, per se.


CLS 89/194
TXT Guns under subclass 125 in which a breech block, having rectilinear motion
    only, is not locked, but is resiliently held in breech closing position
    solely by its own inertia and its recoil or return spring.

    (1)     Note.  Classification is in this or indented subclasses where the
    claims are limited to the mounting of the breech block, even though a
    breech block lock is disclosed.

    (2)     Note.  Guns in which a breech lock or retarding means is released
    by some means after which the breech block is moved back by blow back are
    classified on the type of the locking or retarding means claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.5,    for explosion opened breech guns of the blow back type.

    183,    for inertia operated locks initiated by limited blow back of the
    breech block.


CLS 89/195
TXT Guns under subclass 194 in the form of a piston with a magazine mounted in
    the grip thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, subclass 7 for nonautomatic-grip magazine pistols.


CLS 89/196
TXT Guns under subclass 195 in which the breech block is rigidly connected to a
    member which extends forwardly adjacent the barrel and provides an abutment
    for the breech block return spring.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the member surrounds the barrel and is an integral
    part of the breech block.


CLS 89/197
TXT Guns under subclass 194 having a box magazine other than of piston grip
    type.

    (1)     Note.  A box magazine is one that dispenses cartridges therefrom in
    side-by-side relation, as distinguished from a tubular magazine, for
    example.

    (2)     Note.  The disclosure of a box magazine is sufficient to cause
    classification in this subclass rather than subclass 194.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33.01+, for cartridge holders for ordnance.

    194,    see (2) Note.

    195+,   for blow-back guns with pistol grip     magazines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, appropriate subclasses, for box magazine features in
    nonautomatic guns, or in automatic guns where the automatic features are
    not claimed.


CLS 89/198
TXT Guns under subclass 125 provided with buffers and/or brakes (e.g., for the
    breech block).

    (1)     Note.  The buffer must involve something more than a rigid stop
    surface, and more than a breech block return spring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129.01+,for devices other than buffers or brakes for regulating the rate of
    fire.

    177,    for buffers and brakes for movable barrels.

    180+,   for means for retarding the initial opening movement only of the
    breech block.

    199,    for breech block stops and return springs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes.

    267,    Spring Devices.


CLS 89/199
TXT Guns under subclass 125 with particular receiver closures and/or
    breech-block return means.

    (1)     Note.  The closure may provide an abutment for the breech-block
    return means, or a stop surface for the breech block.

    (2)     Note.  The breech-block return means is usually a spring device,
    which also apposes the recoil motion of the breech block.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    178,    for return means for movable barrels.


CLS 91/
TTL MOTORS:  EXPANSIBLE CHAMBER  TYPE

CLS 91/
TXT INDEX TO CLASS DEFINITION AND NOTES



    I.      CLASS DEFINITION

    II.     DEFINITION OF TERMS

    III.    MISCELLANEOUS CLASS NOTES

    IV.     STATEMENT RELATING TO PLACEMENT OF PATENTS INVOLVING COMBINATION
    AND SUBCOMBINATION SUBCLASSES

    V.      INDEX TO CLASSES NOTED IN (1) SECTIONS I-IV AND (2) THE SUBCLASSES
    OF THIS CLASS

    I.      CLASS DEFINITION

    This class is limited to motors for converting the energy of a pressure
    fluid into mechanical work in which a charge of simple pressure fluid is
    admitted to an expansible chamber, the expansion of said chamber converting
    into work only the original energy of the charge, the charge after
    expansion of said chamber being exhausted to some place other than whence
    it came, and in which no energy is extracted from the charge except by
    expansion of the chamber, said motors when of the reciprocating or
    oscillating type including control of the fluid.

    (1)     Note.  CLAIMS NOT CONTROLLING IN PATENTS PRIOR TO 1936

    Patents issued prior to 1936 have not necessarily been classified by claims
    so that the placement of these patents does not necessarily indicate lines
    of classification.  However, most of the patents regardless of their age
    have been placed in accordance with their claimed subject matter.

    (2)     Note.  COMBINATIONS WITH LOAD DEVICES

    In as much as the basic purpose of a motor is to operate a load the
    inclusion of the load in the claim by name only or in general terms will
    not exclude a patent from this class.  An exception to this general rule
    exists where the load on the motor is a valve.  The combination of an
    expansible chamber motor and a valve as the load driven thereby, even if
    the valve is claimed by name only, is excluded from this class and will be
    found in Class 137, Fluid Handling, or Class 251, Valves and Valve
    Actuation. A second exception exists where the claimed nominal load on the
    motor is an expansible chamber means solely disclosed as the master of a
    pulsator. This combination is classifiable in Class 60, subclasses 533+.

    This line also applies where the load is a tool; that is, a named tool
    driven by the motor will not exclude a patent from this class if no tool
    details are recited.  However, if a support for the work being acted upon
    by the tool is claimed, classification in the appropriate tool class
    results even though both the tool and the support are claimed by name only.
     Also see the Search Class 173 note in section III below for the line with
    regard to a nominally claimed tool driven by an expansible chamber motor
    combined with other features such as work cleansing or tool feeding.

    No attempt has been made to review the classification of all patents found
    in classes relating to loads adapted to be driven by a motor.  Thus, it is
    to be noted that the original classification of all patents is not
    consistent with the above statement as to nominally claimed loads and this
    particularly applies as to classes not recently reclassified.  In those
    instances in which a body of art is known to exist in a given class, in
    which the load on the motor is claimed only nominally, and especially where
    the classification of that class provides for a fluid motor actuator for
    the device, currently issuing patents will not be classified as originals
    in Class 91 even though the load is only nominally claimed.

    The means which transmits power from the working member of the motor to the
    load to be driven (e.g., linkage, gearing, etc.) is not considered to be
    the load for the motor.  See the Search Class 74 note in section III of
    Class 91 for a further discussion of this subject.

    (3)     Note.  RELATIONSHIP TO CLASS 92

    Class 92 is directed to expansible chamber devices, per se, and is related
    to Class 91 as a subcombination thereof.  Class 92 is limited to expansible
    chamber devices in which the working member has an oscillating or
    reciprocating motion to expand and contract the expansible chamber.  Thus,
    Class 92 cannot take the subcombination of any Class 91 motor in which the
    working member is of the rotating type as defined in subclass 58 of Class
    91.

    With respect to expansible chamber motors in which the working member has a
    reciprocating or oscillating motion to expand and contract the expansible
    chamber, Class 92 will take those patents in which no control of the motive
    fluid by a valving action is claimed.  Thus, any claimed valving of motive
    fluid of an expansible chamber motor in sufficient to preclude
    classification is Class 92 even though the valving claimed may not be all
    of the valving necessary to cause the motor to operate in the intended
    manner.  However, if a claim is for an expansible chamber motor driving a
    specifically claimed Class 92 device, then classification is in Class 92
    regardless of the details of the expansible chamber motor recited.

    See Class 92, subclasses 3+.  For the classification of various
    subcombination features of Class 92 devices elsewhere classified see the
    class definition and appropriate notes in Class 92.

    With regard to claim interpretation to determine whether valving is claimed
    to cause classification in Class 91, or is not claimed thus permitting
    classification in Class 92 the following criteria have been followed:

    (1)     Claims which include a limitation such as "means for supplying
    fluid to the motor" or "means supplying fluid to the motor" are construed
    as requiring no more than the conduits or ports which supply the fluid and
    would, therefore, not be interpreted as including valving for Class 91.

    (2)     Claims which include a limitation similar to that in (1) above, but
    with a further limitation which indicates a change in supply of working
    fluid such as--alternately, periodically, intermittently, pulsing,
    fluctuating, reversing flow, etc.--are construed as necessarily including
    more than a mere conduit or port and are excluded from Class 92.  These
    patents would thus be classified on their claimed disclosure of what
    performs the noted change in the supply.  Thus, a patent claiming "means
    (for) alternately supplying motive fluid to the motor" would be classified
    in Class 91 if said means is disclosed as a valve.

    (3)     A port in an expansible chamber wall which is disclosed as
    controlled by the working member as, for example, an exhaust port which is
    overrun by a piston, together with the working member constitutes valving
    for Class 91. If such a port is claimed classification is in Class 91
    regardless of whether the claim sets forth that the working member controls
    the port.

    (4)     Note.  RELATIONSHIP TO CLASS 60

    The general line between Class 91 and Class 60 is that if subject matter
    relating to power production comprising more than an expansible chamber
    motor or more than a plurality of such motors is claimed, classification is
    in Class 60 if otherwise appropriate.

    More specifically the line may be categorized as follows:

    A.      Plural or combined type motors

    (1)     The combination of a motor classifiable, per se, in Class 91 with a
    motor of another type (including a pulsator) i.e., one which, per se, would
    be classified in another motor class, is classified in Class 60.  See Class
    60 subclasses 698+.

    However, the combination of a Class 91 type motor with a second motor which
    performs an ancillary function only of the Class 91 type motor (e.g., valve
    operating motor) and provides no power for external use is not excluded
    from Class 91 even if the second motor is of another type (e.g., electric
    motor).

    (2)     The combination of a plurality of Class 91 type motors or a Class
    91 type motor having a plurality of working members (e.g., pistons) is
    classified in Class 91.  See the Search Class 60 note in subclass 170 of
    Class 91 for a further statement of this line.

    B.      Motive fluid source, modification or exhaust treatment

    (1)     Pumps.

    The inclusion in a claim of a pump broadly which provides motive fluid for
    utilization by the Class 91 motor does not preclude classification in Class
    91.

    The following examples of terminology have been considered to be nominal
    inclusion of a pump and if so claimed would not preclude classification in
    Class 91:

    (a)     a pump

    (b)     a rotary pump

    (c)     a motor driven pump

    (d)     a motor driven rotary pump

    (e)     an internal combustion engine having an intake manifold (as a
    source of vacuum)

    (f)     a plurality of pumps arranged in parallel

    (g)     a circuit comprising a sump, pump and motor

    The following examples have been considered to be significant inclusion of
    a pump, and if so claimed would preclude classification in Class 91 and
    cause classification in Class 60, if otherwise appropriate:

    (a)     a pump which is characterized as to type, e.g., centrifugal,
    eduction, constant displacement, variable displacement, pulsator, etc.,
    (however, see (b) in the preceding paragraph)

    (b)     a motor driven pump in which the motor is characterized as to type,
    e.g., turbine, electric motor, internal combustion engine (however, see (e)
    in the preceding paragraph)

    (c)     a pump which has any detail thereof recited as, for example, a
    "piston"

    (d)     a plurality of pumps in series

    (e)     a particular physical relation between a nominal pump, and (1) a
    motor supplied thereby, or (2) with a sump, reservoir or tank forming part
    of the circuit supplying the pump. For example, this particular physical
    relation may include their relation in space or mechanical interconnection
    means.

    See particularly Class 60 subclasses 325+.

    (2)     Accumulators.

    A motor having an expansible chamber in constant communication with an
    accumulator for pressurized motive fluid is not precluded from Class 91
    regardless of the specificity with which the accumulator is recited, the
    accumulator in this case being considered to be merely a part of the
    expansible chamber.

    Class 60 takes an accumulator combined with a Class 91 motor in which a
    control valve means is interposed between the accumulator and expansible
    chamber unless the accumulator is claimed so broadly as to amount to a mere
    conduit.  See particularly Class 60, subclasses 325+.

    (3)     Internal Generation.

    Class 60 takes those expansible chamber motors in which the motive fluid
    within an expansible chamber is heated or cooled, as, for example, by a
    fluid in heat exchange relation with the interior of the chamber.  Such a
    fluid may be the same motive fluid used in the chamber either before or
    after it passes through the chamber.  See Class 60, subclass 508.

    (4)     Heating, Superheating or  External Generation.

    An expansible chamber motor having nominally claimed means to heat or
    superheat the motive fluid before introduction into the expansible chamber
    is not precluded from Class 91.  For example, Class 91 takes a "boiler"
    combined with an expansible chamber motor while a "fire tube boiler"
    combined with a Class 91 motor would be classified in Class 60.  See, for
    example, Class 60, subclasses 643+.

    Class 91 does not take the combination of an expansible chamber motor with
    an explosive generation of motive fluid even if nominally claimed.  See,
    for example, Class 60, subclasses 632+.

    (5)     Exhaust Treatment or Handling.

    Class 60 takes combinations involving treatment of motive fluid after it
    leaves an expansible chamber where means is claimed to change some
    characteristic of the fluid.  A condenser is an example of such a means,
    but the inclusion of a condenser in a claim by name only is not sufficient
    to preclude a patent from Class 91.

    Class 60 also takes combinations involving handling of exhaust fluid from a
    fluid motor.  This fluid is considered to be exhaust fluid for Class 60
    after it leaves the last claimed valve means which could affect operation
    of the Class 91 motor.  Handling is considered to necessarily include more
    than a mere pipe or chamber to conduct the exhaust fluid away.  A valve for
    controlling a Class 91 motor, located in the exhaust line from the motor,
    designed to direct exhaust fluid to one or more of a number of exhaust
    passages is not exhaust fluid handling for Class 60. However, an exhaust
    fluid conductor having a number of ports therein merely for the purpose of
    dividing the exhaust stream is more than a mere chamber or pipe and is
    classified in Class 60. Claimed limitations to an elbow, support or other
    fitting which constitutes a mere part of the exhaust pipe will be ignored,
    but any significant relation of the pipe and motor will result in
    classification in the appropriate exhaust treatment subclass of Class 60.
    A particular physical relation or mechanical interconnection between a
    chamber or reservoir for receiving exhaust fluid from the motor and the
    motor has been considered exhaust handling for Class 60.

    C.      Pulsators

    Class 60 takes pulsator systems in which a generally constant mass of
    confined motive fluid passes between pump and motor expansible chambers and
    returns to the pump by the same route or conduit.  Class 60 also provides
    for such pulsator systems where additional fluid is added to the system
    whether the fluid is make-up fluid to replace leakage or pressurized motive
    fluid to operate the motor, unless the pressurized motive fluid is valved
    by a movable valve element which is mechanically connected to the pump
    working member so that movement of the working member will cause movement
    of the valve element.  The latter combination is classified in Class 91.
    See the Search Class 60 note in subclass 6 of Class 91 for a further
    statement of this line.

    It is to be noted that some pulsator systems which involve a generally
    constant mass of confined motive fluid include a valve such as a throttle
    between the pump and motor.  The claiming of the motor and valve only in
    such a disclosed system is excluded from Class 91 in that the fluid does
    not exhaust to some place other than whence it came.

    Search Class 60 subclasses 533+ for pulsators and pulsator systems.

    (5)     Note.  RELATIONSHIP TO CLASS 418

    Class 418, Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, takes rotary expansible
    chamber motors even though the disclosure and claims may be restricted to
    motor use.  In some ways Class 418 may be considered to be less
    comprehensive than Class 91, and rotary expansible chamber type motors in
    certain combinations enumerated below will be classified in Class 91 rather
    than Class 418.  Unless specifically excluded below a patent to a rotary
    expansible chamber type motor as defined in the class definition of Class
    418 will be classified as an original in Class 418 as opposed to Class 91.

    (1)     VALVING

    (a)     CYCLIC OR POSITION RESPONSIVE:  Class 418 will take rotary
    expansible motors combined with valves for the motive fluid which have a
    repetitive pattern or cycle of operation which is related to the rotation
    of the motor.  These may be termed cyclic or position responsive valving
    and include the opening and closing of inlet or exhaust ports by the
    movement of this type valving so as to provide, for example, early cutoff
    of supply is also included in Class 418.  The inclusion, however, of means
    to cutoff operation of the motor after a partial, full or predetermined
    number revolutions is excluded from Class 418 and would cause
    classification in this class (91).  See for example, subclass 2.

    (b)     IN-LINE:  An in-line valve is defined as one situated in the normal
    line of motive fluid flow which acts in some way to control the flow in the
    line, but not by diverting the fluid to a second or subsidiary flow line
    (e.g., waste).  Class 418 will take all in-line valves combined with a
    rotary expansible chamber motor which are controlled by some means other
    than a condition of the motive fluid (e.g., manual throttle) and will also
    take those which are actuated directly by the application of the motive
    fluid thereto (i.e., direct response valves).  Those devices including
    in-line valves which are controlled by a motive fluid condition (e.g.,
    pressure, flow) and in which said valves are not of the direct response
    type are excluded from Class 418 and will be classified in Class 91 if
    otherwise appropriate.

    (c)     BRANCHED FLOW OR BY-PASS:

    (1)     SEPARATE VALVE MEANS:  Those rotary expansible chamber devices
    which include a separate valve means (as opposed to a movable chamber part
    as discussed in paragraph (2) immediately below) to divert or by-pass all
    or a portion of the motive fluid from its normal or first course of flow to
    a second or waste path are excluded from Class 418 regardless of whether
    the valve is manually or otherwise controlled unless the diverted fluid is
    used merely for a motor perfecting function such as lubricating, cooling,
    vane bias, etc.

    (2)     MOVABLE CHAMBER PART:  Many rotary expansible chamber motors have
    expansible chamber parts which are in running contact with other chamber
    parts and which move from a "normal" or contacting position to a
    noncontacting position and in so moving allow passage or by-pass of motive
    fluid thereby.  Examples of such parts are vanes, abutments, end plates,
    etc., and such parts are usually biased into contacting position by means
    such as a spring, pressure fluid conducted from the expansible chamber or
    the like.  Such devices are not excluded from Class 418 even though the
    yielding of the part may be considered to be performing a by-pass function.
    However, if motive fluid is conducted to the part for such a biasing
    function (e.g., behind end plate) and there is a controlled application of
    fluid to or release of the fluid from the bias area for the disclosed
    purpose of by-passing said fluid or conducting it to another point of
    disposal such devices are excluded from Class 418 and are classified in
    Class 91 if otherwise appropriate.

    (3)     WITH DIVERSE MOTOR:  The combination of a rotary expansible chamber
    motor with another motor of a different type (e.g., reciprocating, etc.),
    is excluded from Class 418. Unless the diverse motor is a mere auxiliary of
    the rotary expansible chamber motor, as for example, a valve actuating
    motor.  See Class 91, subclass 61 for a combined rotary expansible chamber
    motor and a reciprocating motor.  See Class 60, Power Plants, subclasses
    698+, for other diverse motors one of which may be of the rotary expansible
    chamber type.

    II.     DEFINITION OF TERMS

    Cylinder        - A rigid external member which permanently surrounds the
    piston, the latter constituting a relatively moving wall for the expansible
    chamber, the other walls of which are formed by the cylinder, and the
    cylinder ordinarily including the abutment or reaction surface against
    which the motive fluid acts or the piston forming the abutment for the
    cylinder when the cylinder is movable and the piston fixed.  However, the
    abutment or reaction surface for the piston need not necessarily be formed
    by the cylinder, but may be formed by a second relatively movable opposed
    piston within the cylinder.  If the piston withdraws from the cylinder
    merely to control the motive fluid, the piston is still considered to be
    permanently surrounded by the cylinder.

    Distributor     - Means which comprises or includes a part which is movable
    relative to the working member of a cyclically operable motor to control a
    motive fluid port or passage in such a manner as to cyclically control
    inlet and/or exhaust flow of motive fluid to or from the motor.  The
    distributor need not entirely cut off the motive fluid flow, but may
    cyclically control the amount of flow (i.e., throttling).

    Motive Fluid     - The fluid (expansible or inexpansible) which is
    introduced into or withdrawn from a working chamber of the motor to cause
    the working member to move.  The term "motive fluid" applies to the fluid
    from the point of origin to the point of disposal.  Fluid which is
    withdrawn from the motive fluid supply to perform some other motor
    function, such as motor valve operation, is still considered to be motive
    fluid even though said fluid never enters the working chamber of the motor.
     Atmospheric air which acts upon the working member of a vacuum motor is
    not considered to be motive fluid unless the atmospheric air is controlled
    in some manner, as by valving.  In a vacuum motor the fluid which is
    evacuated from the working chamber is considered to be exhaust motive fluid
    and the atmospheric air, if controlled, is considered to be inlet motive
    fluid.

    Non-Working Chamber - A chamber of the motor which expands and contracts
    incident to movement of the working member, and which is neither expanded
    nor contracted to do work by fluid supplied to or evacuated from said
    chamber.

    Working Chamber - A chamber into which motive fluid is introduced or from
    which motive fluid is withdrawn (vacuum) to cause the working member to
    move to perform work, the chamber expanding or contracting incident to the
    movement of the working member.  A chamber of a vacuum motor to which
    atmospheric air has free ingress and egress without any control thereof is
    not a working chamber.  However, a chamber of a vacuum motor in which
    atmospheric air acts and some control is exercised over the atmospheric air
    is a working chamber.

    Working Member - A movable wall of the expansible chamber to which motive
    fluid is applied or to which atmospheric air is applied in the case of
    vacuum motor, said wall moving as a result of the application of the motive
    fluid and in so moving doing work for utilization by means other than the
    motor or some part thereof.  In a reciprocating motor this term is generic
    to both a moving piston and a moving cylinder.  The working member is
    considered to include the movable wall to which motive fluid is applied as
    well as all parts which are rigid therewith (e.g., piston rod).  However, a
    pair of separate movable walls disposed in separate working chambers (i.e.,
    chambers which are not in fluid communication during at least some part of
    the operation of the motor), even though rigidly connected together, are
    considered to be plural working members if the application of motive fluid
    thereto urges both walls in the same direction.  A working member has a
    single working surface which surface may have two or more relatively
    movable faces so long as adjacent faces are always an extension of each
    other (e.g., flexible diaphragm or bellows).



    See (3) Note of subclass 418 of Class 91 for definitions of terms
    applicable to subclasses 418+ only.

    III.    SEARCH CLASS:  (INCLUDES STATEMENTS OF THE LINE WITH OTHER CLASSES).

    60,     Power Plants, see (4) Note above for the relationship of Class 91
    and Class 60.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 232+ for expansible chamber type
    volume or rate of flow meters. Class 73 includes expansible chamber meters
    combined with registering mechanism and meters incapable of general use as
    an expansible chamber motor.  A meter is considered to be incapable of such
    general use if there is not disclosed means to take power therefrom for
    external use such as to a registering mechanism.  Therefore, Class 91 takes
    an expansible chamber device disclosed as a meter having means to take
    power therefrom such as for an unclaimed registering mechanism.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses for machine
    elements and mechanisms, per se, and in combination with a nominally
    claimed expansible chamber motor.  In general gearing or linkage included
    as part of the power output means from an expansible chamber motor is
    considered to be basic subject matter of the motor and would not preclude
    classification in Class 91.  Also see (2) Note, in subclass 55 of Class 91.
     For statement of the line between Class 74 and Class 92, see section III
    of the class definition Class 92.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, see (3) Note above for the relationship
    of Class 91 and Class 92.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines.  The line between Class 91 and Class
    123 is one of disclosure.  Thus, any patent which has at least one
    embodiment of the invention which is disclosed as an internal combustion
    engine, and which has a claim specific to such embodiment, and in which the
    claim includes control of the motive fluid, is classified in Class 123 even
    though the motive fluid control is not necessarily limited to internal
    combustion operation.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 82+, for pressure modulating relays or
    followers for expansible chamber motors.  The positive inclusion in a claim
    of the expansible chamber motor which is controlled by the pressure
    modulating relay or follower precludes classification in Class 137 and
    causes classification in Class 91. See, for example, subclasses 3, 47+ and
    52 of Class 91.  See subclasses 87+, 455+ and 561+ for self proportioning
    or correlating systems, line condition change responsive valves and
    multiple or multi-way valves for expansible chamber motors, respectively.
    The positive inclusion in a claim of the motor which is being controlled by
    the valve means precludes classification in Class 137.  The inclusion in a
    claim of a cylinder in combination with a valve will not exclude a patent
    from Class 137 on the basis that a cylinder is the equivalent of a flow
    path being controlled by the valve.  However, where a cylinder is claimed
    as having passages leading to or ports present in opposite ends thereof (as
    in a double acting motor) the patent is excluded from Class 137. Also see
    (2) Note in section I above.

    172,    Earth Working, appropriate subclasses, and especially subclasses
    2+, 464-466 and 491 for expansible chamber motor operated or adjusted
    implements and see the reference to Class 91 in the Search Class section of
    Class 172 for a statement of the line.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, appropriate subclasses for an expansible
    chamber fluid motor in a claimed combination peculiar to tool driving, such
    as a tool drive means combined with a tool impacting, work cleaning, tool
    advancing or manipulating handle feature.  See the class definition of
    Class 173 for a complete description of the subject matter provided for
    therein.  Also see the reference to Class 91 in section IV of the class
    definition of Class 173.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 53.1+ for vehicles with power take-off
    means from the vehicle motor to a nominally claimed load.

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    especially subclasses 215+ for an expansible chamber fluid motor and its
    control in claimed combination with a more than named stationary lift for
    raising a vehicle in its entirety between spaced vertical positions, and
    subclasses 272+ for an expansible chamber fluid motor and its control in
    claimed combination with a more than named load-underlying support surface
    (e.g., external load support guide structure which is not necessary to the
    fluid motor internal drive, particular load-underlying support structure,
    elevator counterbalances).

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, appropriate subclasses for valves and
    valve actuators for expansible chamber motors.  The positive inclusion in a
    claim of the motor which is being controlled by the valve precludes
    classification in Class 251.  The inclusion in a claim of a cylinder in
    combination with a valve will not exclude a patent from Class 251 on the
    basis that a cylinder is the equivalent of a flow path being controlled by
    the valve.  Also see (2) Note in section I above.

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, appropriate subclasses for a
    rotary motor operated by a confined or directed fluid but not inclusive of
    "expansible chamber" type classifiable in Class 418, Rotary Expansible
    Chamber Devices.

    417,    Pumps, appropriate subclasses for expansible chamber pumps.  Many
    expansible chamber devices, are capable of use either as a pump or a motor
    without modification, the only difference being whether pressure fluid is
    introduced, and mechanical power produced (motor) or mechanical power is
    introduced and pressure fluid produced (pump).  The following criteria will
    determine original classification if a patent:



    (a)     Where the disclosure is that the device can be used as a pump or
    motor, classification in Class 91, will result if the device is claimed as
    a motor or alternatively as pump or motor, or generically as an expansible
    chamber device, for example.  If such a device is claimed as a pump
    classification will be in Class 417.

    (b)     Where the device is solely disclosed as a pump, classification in
    Class 417 will result whether claimed generically or specifically.

    (c)     Where the device is solely disclosed as a motor, classification in
    Class 91 will result whether claimed generically or specifically.

    (d)     Where the device is disclosed and claimed generically,
    classification in Class 91 will result.

    (e)     For an exception to this general line see subclasses 269+ of Class
    417 and (1) Note in subclass 269 for the line between the art classified
    thereunder and the art in Class 91, subclasses 472+.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, for planetary
    gear transmissions, per se. The same line exists between Class 91 and Class
    475 as exists between Class 91 and Class 74.

    477,    Interrelated Power Delivery Controls, Including Engine Control, for
    interrelated control between an engine and a transmission, clutch, or
    brake.  Class 477 was formed from patents in Classes 74 and 192 and so the
    same line exists between Classes 91 and 477 as exists between Class 91 and
    Classes 74 and 192.

    Subclasses 375+ for expansible chamber motor driven pumps.  The claiming of
    the pump by name only is not sufficient to exclude a patent from Class 91,
    the pump or piston and cylinder being considered a nominal load or the
    equivalent of a crosshead and guide for the motor.

    IV.     PLACEMENT OF PATENTS

    A.      INVOLVING COMBINATION AND SUBCOMBINATION SUBCLASSES:

    In many instances the schedule of this class provides for a combination
    which requires a given subcombination, and elsewhere below provides for the
    subcombination.

    The following rule has been followed as to the placement of the original
    patent, and as to cross-referencing, and should be followed in the future.

    Where the combination subclass requires the same subcombination as is
    provided for in the subcombination subclass (i.e., subcombination defined
    with the same specificity in both subclasses) a patent disclosing the
    combination is placed as an original in, or under, the combination subclass
    regardless of whether the claims are directed to the combination or
    subcombination and is not cross-referenced to the subcombination subclass.
    A patent disclosing only the subcombination and claiming same is placed as
    an original in the subcombination subclass and is not cross-referenced to
    the combination subclass.

    This rule is applicable only in instances where there is but a single
    subcombination subclass (i.e., no indented subclasses), but the combination
    subclass may be further subdivided into indented subclasses.

    The prime feature of this situation is that the subcombination must, by
    definition, be of equal specificity in the two subclasses.  A search for
    the subcombination, at least in the case where it is adapted to be used in
    the combination, of necessity involves all of the patents in the
    combination subclass.  Under this system of placing the patents a complete
    search of the combination can be made in the combination subclass, and of
    the subcombination in both subclasses without the addition to the search
    files of the otherwise necessary cross-reference copies.

    The subclasses involved in this combination-subcombination relationship
    have been indicated in the schedule by numbers in parenthesis, as explained
    in a paragraph after the class title.

    Exemplary of this situation in the indented subclasses (223-229) provide
    for a distributor (valve) in the piston of a cyclically operable motor
    combination while subclass 422 requires only a valved piston
    subcombination. As between these subclasses any patent having a disclosed
    cyclically operable motor is placed as an original in subclass 222 or one
    of the indented subclasses regardless of whether the means which makes the
    motor cyclically operable is claimed and is not cross-referenced in
    subclass 422.  A complete search for the subject matter provided for in
    subclass 422 of necessity involves all of the patents in subclasses 222+.

    B.      INVOLVING ANCILLARY OR AUXILIARY EXPANSIBLE CHAMBER MOTOR:

    In many instances the claimed motor which provides the basis of
    classification for a patent in Class 91 is provided with another expansible
    chamber motor which merely performs an ancillary or auxiliary function for
    the main motor.  Illustrative of such functions are motor valve or lock, or
    lubricator actuation.  In such cases the structure or operation of the
    ancillary motor does not constitute a basis for original classification of
    the patent in the Class 91 schedule unless the patent includes a claim to
    the auxiliary motor, per se.  However, the patent may be cross-referenced
    on the basis of the auxiliary motor.  For example, see subclasses 6+ and
    282+. Subclasses 6+ provide for fluid supply through diverse paths to a
    single expansible chamber.  In this case the chamber must be a chamber of
    the motor which causes the patent to be classified in Class 91.  Subclasses
    282+ provide for the same type of supply to a motor chamber, but in this
    case the motor is an auxiliary motor in that it actuates the distributor of
    another motor.  This type of control of a distributor motor does not cause
    classification of the patent as an original in subclasses 6+, but
    cross-reference to subclasses 6+ is appropriate.

    V.      INDEX TO CLASSES NOTED IN (1) SECTIONS I-IV AND (2) THE SUBCLASSES
    OF THIS CLASS.

    After   each    class     listed       below,      the    notation  "See
    ----" refers to the sections of the class definition, and the subclasses of
    Class 91 in which there are references to the Class listed.

    60,     Power Plants.  See sections I and III, and subclasses 53, 54, 61,
    170,

    73,     Measuring and Testing, see section III, and subclasses 1.01, 173,
    176, 177, 183, 185, 191, 221, 222, 232, 338, 491, 499, and 861.58.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism. See sections I, III, and subclass 59.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, see Sections I and III, and subclasses,
    1, 4, 41, 46, 54, 55, 169, 170, 176, 177, 181, 183, 196, 210, 245, 291,
    339, 411, 472, 491, 497, 499, 501, and 504.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, see section III, and subclasses 53,
    54, and 245.

    137,    Fluid Handling.  See sections I and III, and subclasses 3, 170 and
    221.

    172,    Earth Working.  See section III.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting.  See sections I and III, and subclasses
    61 and 167.

    180,    Motor Vehicles.  See section III.

    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, or Animal Powered.  See subclass 170.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control.  See subclasses 41, 53.1+, 59, and
    76.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation.  See sections I and III, and subclass
    37.

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps. See section III and subclass
    151.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers).  See subclasses 151 and
    170.

    417,    Pumps, see sections I and III, and subclasses 6.5, 54, 152, 170,
    174, 176, 245, 276, 423, 472, 473, 491, 497, 499, 504, 505, and 506.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, see section I.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components. See section III,
    and subclass 59.

    477,    Interrelated Power Delivery Controls, Including Engine Control.
    See section III and subclass 41.


CLS 91/1
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having (1) signals, indicators,
    registers, recorders, or gauges for indicating a condition or the position
    of a motor part such as a piston, control member, valve, etc., such devices
    consisting of relatively movable, changeable or audible information giving
    parts, or (2) transparent viewing means whereby the motor operation or the
    condition of some part thereof may be observed.

    (1)     Note.  For classification under part (1) of this definition there
    must be either an indicia or an audible or visual signal.  Relative to
    indicia, there must be graduation or markings in the disclosure as claimed.
     Where it is indicated that the mere position of a motor part is indicative
    of a condition of the motor (e.g., valve handle position corresponds to
    motor position) classification under this definition does not result unless
    some cooperating indicia are included.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 232+ for expansible chamber type
    volume or rate of flow meters and see section III of the class definition
    of this class for a general statement of the line between this class and
    Class 73.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 5 for signals indicators or
    inspection windows for expansible chamber devices.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+ for electrical
    automatic condition responsive indicating systems.


CLS 91/2
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the motor has a working
    member which operates through a given cycle, i.e., from a given position
    through a revolution or reciprocation back to the starting position so as
    to be in condition to repeat the cycle, and having means for stopping or
    modifying the operation of the motor responsive to working member travel
    through a definite preselected number of cycles greater than one.

    (1)     Note.  This definition does not include those motors which operate
    for a predetermined period of time and then are stopped or controlled in
    some way even though for a given speed it could be determined how many
    cycles or revolutions would be made in a given period of time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35+,    for expansible chamber motors having means to start, stop or change
    the mode of operation thereof after passage of a predetermined time.  See
    (1) Note above.

    355+,   for motors having control means to cut off the motor after the
    working member has made one complete cycle of operation.


CLS 91/3
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means for providing a jet
    stream of motive fluid and a receiving orifice to receive all or a portion
    of the jet stream, motive fluid being conducted from the orifice to a
    working chamber of the motor to cause operation thereof, movement of the
    motor being controlled by varying the proportion of the jet stream which
    enters the orifice.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 83 for jet control type pressure
    modulating relays or followers, per se.


CLS 91/4
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the motor is provided with a
    quantity of trapped liquid which is applicable to the working member to
    move same, means to apply pneumatic pressure directly to said trapped
    liquid to actuate said working member and valve means for controlling the
    pneumatic fluid.

    (1)     Note.  Pneumatic fluid under this definition is considered to be
    any fluid in the gaseous state.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 547+ for hydraulic pulsators, i.e. a motor
    piston and pump piston with a trapped quantity of fluid there-between, and
    means to apply pneumatic pressure to the pump piston to actuate the motor
    piston.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 81 for expansible chamber
    devices in which the working member forms a reservoir for noncompressible
    working fluid and subclass 142 for expansible chamber devices having a
    reservoir for noncompressible working fluid.


CLS 91/5
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the working member of the
    motor is operated by a charge of expansible motive fluid which has been
    completely isolated in a storage chamber separate from the expansible
    chamber; i.e., the storage chamber at a given time is cut off from both the
    source of supply and the expansible chamber.

    (1)     Note.  The storage chamber generally holds only a sufficient
    quantity of motive fluid for one stroke of the working member and is
    recharged before each succeeding stroke.

    (2)     Note.  The charge of motive fluid from the storage chamber may
    constitute the only motive fluid for impelling the working member or may be
    supplemented with additional motive fluid.

    (3)     Note.  The storage chamber may not be another expansible chamber of
    the motor or another motor.


CLS 91/6
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which a working chamber of the
    motor is provided with inlet motive fluid which is supplied from different
    sources at different times or flows through supply paths that are different
    at the will of the operator or under different operating conditions so as
    to supply force to act on the same face of the working member at different
    times.

    (1)     Note.  The supply paths are considered to be different under this
    definition if the motive fluid flows through one path at one time and flows
    through the same path and additionally through another path at another time.

    (2)     Note.  Different positions of the motor working member are
    considered to be different operating conditions under this definition.

    (3)     Note.  Inlet motive fluid under this definition is considered to be
    any fluid supplied to the expansible chamber during expansion thereof for
    the purpose of driving the working member.  Also, motive fluid which is
    admitted to a contracting chamber to cushion the working member prior to
    admission of motive fluid to expand the chamber is also considered to be
    inlet motive fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282+,   for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors having a fluid
    actuated distributor with fluid supplied to the distributor motor through
    diverse flow paths.

    436,    for expansible chamber motors in which inlet fluid to an expanding
    working chamber is selectively supplemented by fluid pressurized in the
    contracting chamber.

    441,    for expansible chamber motors in which a valve is provided to
    permit ambient fluid to be drawn into a working chamber thereof as, for
    example, when the load is moving the working member to expand the chamber
    faster than inlet fluid can be supplied.

    464,    for double acting expansible chamber motors having means to
    simultaneously open opposed working chambers to inlet motive fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 563+ for pulsator systems in which the
    normally constant mass of motive fluid confined between pump and motor
    chambers of a pulsator system is increased by the addition of pressurized
    motive fluid from a valve-controlled motive fluid supply means so that the
    motor is supplied with motive fluid from diverse flow paths.  Inclusion of
    any details of the pulsator pump, for example, reciting the piston or even
    reciting broadly the type of pump (e.g., "pulsator pump") is sufficient to
    cause classification in Class 60 although patents merely reciting a "pump"
    will be classified in Class 91, subclasses 6+ even where the pump is
    disclosed as being a pulsator type.

    It is to be noted that a pair of pistons of the same size in the same
    uniform  diameter cylinder with a confined body of fluid therebetween is
    not a pulsator system, but is considered to be a mere transmission or two
    piece piston and does not preclude classification of a patent in Class 91.
    The combination of two pistons in the same cylinder with an additional,
    controlled supply of motive fluid to the space therebetween, is construed
    as a means to vary the size of the piston and thus limit the stroke or
    alternatively, as a Class 91 type working chamber which, after expansion,
    is filled with locked up fluid which may constitute a fluid link
    transmission to transmit the output of another working member.  See, for
    example, subclasses 167+ of Class 91.  Also see section C of (4) Note of
    the class definition of Class 91; and subclasses 17+, 51+ and  57+ for
    specific pumps which form diverse paths and sources of pressurized fluid
    for a Class 91 motor.  See (4) Note under the class definition of Class 91
    defining the degree of specificity of the pump which results in
    classification of Class 60.


CLS 91/6.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 6 comprising three or more cylinders each cylinder
    being provided with relatively reciprocating piston (includes diaphragm) to
    thereby form a plurality of working chambers, the cylinders or a
    transmission element in common operative engagement with said cylinders or
    pistons being adapted to rotate about a fixed axis; said cylinders being
    physically arranged in a manner such that their longitudinal axis either
    (1) intersect at a common point or (2) extend parallel to said axis of
    rotation, and in which motive fluid is supplied to at least one of said
    cylinders through diverse flow paths.

    (1)     Note.  Plural cylinder motors of the above defined type in which
    each cylinder receives motive fluid through different supply paths for the
    sole purpose of causing more than one expansion and contraction cycle of
    the working chambers during each complete revolution of 360o of the
    cylinders of rotary transmission are not intended to form subject matter
    under this definition and are therefor excluded hereunder.

    (2)     Note.  See note in Class 417, Pumps, subclass 269 for a statement
    of the line between this class and Class 417 regarding plural cylinder
    devices of the above defined type.


CLS 91/7
TXT Apparatus under subclass 6 in which the motor is capable of reciprocatory
    motion through a cycle by a forward stroke and a return stroke to the
    starting point and wherein the motor (1) may be operated continuously
    repeating said cycle without manual intervention with motive fluid being
    supplied to a working chamber thereof through one supply path or (2) may at
    the will of the operator, be operated through a full or partial forward or
    return stroke utilizing a different motive fluid supply path to said
    working chamber.

    (1)     Note.  The non-cyclic operation may be, for example, for the
    purpose of operating the motor as a servo motor or for placing the working
    member in a fixed stopped position or for starting the working member when
    on dead center.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282+,   for motors which may be made to operate cyclically or noncyclically
    by supplying fluid through diverse flow paths to a motor which operates a
    distributor therefor.


CLS 91/8
TXT Apparatus under subclass 6 wherein the motor is provided with at least two
    expansible working chambers, a prior one of the chambers receiving
    expansible motive fluid and having a passage for exhausting the fluid into
    a subsequent chamber for expansion therein; and wherein a further fluid
    passage is provided which may be used to additionally supply motive fluid
    to the subsequent chamber simultaneously with the exhaust fluid from the
    prior chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for expansible chamber motors which operate by multiple expansion,
    i.e., the motive fluid is supplied to a first working chamber and then
    discharged to a second working chamber for expansion therein and which may
    be modified so that inlet motive fluid is supplied directly to the second
    chamber and the first chamber is exhausted to some place other than the
    second chamber.


CLS 91/9
TXT Apparatus under subclass 8 having a valve for distributing motive fluid to
    and between the working chambers and wherein a movement of the valve from
    the normal limits of travel during multiple expansion operation opens an
    additional fluid passage allowing motive fluid to be introduced directly
    into the subsequent chamber.


CLS 91/10
TXT Apparatus under subclass 8 having a valve means for changing the motor to
    or from the semicompound type, the valve means responding to some condition
    of operation of the motor or the motive fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for an expansible chamber motor in which a second fluid flow path
    to the motor is opened in response to a pressure or flow condition of the
    motor.


CLS 91/11
TXT Apparatus under subclass 6 comprising two or more expansible working
    chambers having, in one condition of operation, interconnecting passages
    whereby a prior one of the chambers receives motive fluid and then exhausts
    the motive fluid into the subsequent chamber for expansion therein; and
    wherein additional passage means is provided, in another condition of
    operation, for introducing motive fluid from the source to the subsequent
    chamber, the subsequent chamber then receiving no fluid from the first
    chamber.

    (1)     Note.  This definition does not include motors in which motive
    fluid is supplied to a first expansible chamber and then directed to a
    second expansible chamber while the first is still in communication with
    the supply so as to in effect provide direct communication between the
    second chamber and the supply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8+,     for expansible chamber motors of the multiple expansion type
    wherein motive fluid may optionally be supplied directly to a subsequent
    working chamber in addition to fluid supplied thereto from a prior working
    chamber.


CLS 91/12
TXT Apparatus under subclass 6 comprising a cyclically operable motor and
    motive fluid distributing valve means operated incident to the operation of
    the motor for causing the cyclic operation and means for reversing the
    motive fluid flow to and from the motor for a given position of the motor.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of a cyclically operable motor see the
    definition of subclass 218 of this class.

    (2)     Note.  The means for reversing the motive fluid flow causes the
    motive fluid to flow to a given chamber through different paths for the two
    conditions of operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for expansible chamber motors of other than the cyclically operable
    type having serially arranged reversing valves.


CLS 91/13
TXT Apparatus under subclass 12 in which fluid connections to the motor for a
    given position of the motor are reversed by adjusting the distributor seat,
    i.e., the part of the distributor which is fixed during normal cyclic
    operation of the motor.

    (1)     Note.  See (2) Note of subclass 218 of this class for the
    definition of distributor.


CLS 91/14
TXT Apparatus under subclass 12 comprising separately actuatable means to
    additionally operate the distributor of the motor so as to reverse the
    fluid connections to the motor for a given position of the motor.

    (1)     Note.  See (2) Note of subclass 218 of this class for the
    definition of distributor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors in which the
    parts are reversed by shifting the distributor seat.


CLS 91/15
TXT Apparatus under subclass 12 comprising further valve means arranged in
    series with the distributing valve means and operable to reverse the fluid
    connections between the distributing valve means and the motor for a given
    position of the distributing valve means, the further valve means being
    located between the distributing valve means and the motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for expansible chamber motors of other than the cyclically operable
    type having serially arranged reversing valves.


CLS 91/16
TXT Apparatus under subclass 6 in which the working chamber is supplied with
    relatively high pressure fluid to drive the working member and is supplied
    with a relatively lower pressure fluid when the high pressure fluid is cut
    off and the motor is coasting (i.e., being driven by the load) to prevent
    vacuum build-up in the working chamber.

    (1)     Note.  This is an art group in which the momentum of the load
    (e.g., locomotive) drives the motor working member after the motive fluid
    has been cut off with lower fluid pressure being supplied when the high
    pressure supply is cut off.  While the lower pressure fluid may not
    actually drive the working member because of the momentum of the load, it
    must be supplied in such a manner as to provide a driving force to the
    working member in the absence of the load.  Thus, a simultaneous
    application of lower pressure fluid to opposed working chambers is not
    included under this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    437+,   for expansible chamber motors having a by-pass between opposed
    working chambers which is controlled independently of the inlet and exhaust
    control valve means.  The by-pass in many instances is to prevent pressure
    or vacuum build up in a motor which is coasting.

    441,    for expansible chamber motors in which a valve is provided to
    permit ambient fluid to be drawn into a working chamber thereof as, for
    example, when the motor is coasting.

    464,    for double acting expansible chamber motors having means to
    simultaneously open opposed working chambers to either inlet or exhaust.


CLS 91/17
TXT Apparatus under subclass 16 in which the lower pressure fluid is cut off
    from the motor in response to the speed of operation of the motor falling
    below a given amount.

    (1)     Note.  This definition does not include drifting valves which are
    controlled by a pressure condition of the motor which pressure condition
    may incidentally be indicative of the speed of the motor.


CLS 91/18
TXT Apparatus under subclass 16 in which the lower pressure fluid is controlled
    by the pressure condition in the higher pressure line or in a motor working
    chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28+,    for expansible chamber motors in which motive fluid is supplied to
    a working chamber through different flow paths, the flow in the second path
    being activated by a pressure or flow condition in the first path.

    33,     for expansible chamber motors in which motive fluid is supplied to
    a working chamber through different flow paths, the activation of one path
    acting to disable a second flow path by the pressure of fluid acting in
    said one path as, for example, by a shuttle valve.


CLS 91/19
TXT Apparatus under subclass 6 in which the supply of motive fluid to a working
    chamber of the motor through one path is effective to cause the working
    member to move to a given position or within a given limited range and then
    stop and the supply to said working chamber through a second path is
    effective to move the working member to a different position or through a
    different limited range and then stop.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    357,    for expansible chamber motor in which the stop position of the
    working member is controlled by selectively venting any of a number of
    exhaust ports.


CLS 91/20
TXT Apparatus under subclass 6 in which at least one of the flow paths of the
    motive fluid supply is controlled as a result of the motor working member
    or load attaining a given position or is incapable of being controlled
    until the working member or load has attained a given position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for expansible chamber motors having position responsive fluid
    supply through diverse flow paths to a single working chamber wherein the
    supply in one path includes a trapped motive fluid charge.


CLS 91/21
TXT Apparatus under subclass 20 comprising a rotating working member or chamber.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of rotating working member or chamber see
    subclass 58.


CLS 91/22
TXT Apparatus under subclass 20 in which the motor is of the reciprocating type
    wherein when the motor working member is moving in one direction and
    approaching the end of the stroke an initial charge of motive fluid is
    admitted to the contracting chamber in response to the working member
    attaining a given position, usually to cushion the movement of the working
    member, and then an additional charge of motive fluid is supplied through a
    different supply path to cause the working member to move in the opposite
    direction on the return stroke.


CLS 91/23
TXT Apparatus under subclass 22 in which the motor is of the double acting
    type, the initial charge of motive fluid being supplied to the contracting
    chamber from the expanding chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    399,    for expansible chamber motors in which motive fluid is by passed
    from an expanding chamber to an opposed otherwise closed contracting
    chamber so as, for example, to cushion movement of the working member.


CLS 91/24
TXT Apparatus under subclass 20 in which a working chamber is supplied with
    motive fluid through a first supply path and in response to the working
    member attaining a given position further motive fluid is supplied to said
    chamber through a second path with the first path remaining open.


CLS 91/25
TXT Apparatus under subclass 24 in which the second supply path includes a
    supply port in the working chamber which is closed by the working member or
    a relatively movable part carried on the working member, the working member
    or said relatively movable part acting to open said supply port in response
    to movement of the working member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for rotary expansible chamber motors having an additional inlet
    path opened in response to the position of the rotary working member.


CLS 91/26
TXT Apparatus under subclass 25 in which said first supply path is provided
    with (1) a self acting valve which opens in response to motive fluid flow
    to permit substantially unrestricted flow into the working chamber, but is
    self closing to prevent exhaust flow from the working chamber, or (2) a
    valve which may be manually operated to vary the flow capacity of said
    first supply path.


CLS 91/27
TXT Apparatus under subclass 20 in which motive fluid is concurrently supplied
    to a working chamber through a plurality of flow paths, one of said paths
    being closed in response to the working member attaining a given position
    while the other supply path remains open.


CLS 91/28
TXT Apparatus under subclass 6 in which motive fluid is supplied to the working
    chamber through one path and in response to a flow or pressure condition in
    said flow path a second inlet flow path to said working chamber is opened.

    (1)     Note.  The working chamber is considered to be part of the flow
    path. Thus, sensing of pressure in the working chamber to activate the
    second inlet flow path is included under this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors in which low
    pressure fluid is supplied to the working chamber when the high pressure
    fluid is cut off and the motor is coasting or drifting (e.g., locomotive),
    the low pressure fluid being controlled in response to the pressure in the
    high pressure line.

    33,     for expansible chamber motors having diverse motive fluid supply
    paths to a single expansible chamber in which the pressure or flow of
    motive fluid in one path is effective to cut off or deactivate a second
    supply path.

    436,    for expansible chamber motors in which inlet motive fluid to an
    expanding chamber is supplemented by fluid pressurized in an opposed
    contacting chamber.


CLS 91/29
TXT Apparatus under subclass 28 in which the second inlet flow path to the
    working chamber is opened in response to an increase in pressure of the
    motive fluid in the first inlet flow path.


CLS 91/30
TXT Apparatus under subclass 6 comprising a double acting reciprocating motor
    having opposed working chambers, motive fluid inlet and exhaust lines and a
    pair of valves serially arranged between the inlet and exhaust lines on the
    one hand and the opposed working chambers on the other hand, each of said
    valves being controllable to connect the motive fluid inlet to one of said
    chambers while the other chamber is connected to exhaust or vice versa.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12+,    for a cyclically operable expansible chamber motor and means for
    reversing the connections of the distributing valve and motor and
    especially subclass 15 where said means comprises a reversing or selector
    valve located between the distributing valve and motor.


CLS 91/31
TXT Apparatus under subclass 6 in which one of the flow paths to the working
    chamber has throttling means therein to restrict the flow of motive fluid
    to the working chamber.


CLS 91/32
TXT Apparatus under subclass 6 wherein when motive fluid is supplied to a
    working chamber through one supply path another motive fluid supply path to
    said chamber is inactivated and does not supply motive fluid to the chamber
    when said one supply path is active.

    (1)     Note.  Under this definition the two supply paths must be separate,
    i.e., one supply path may not include two simultaneous flow lines and the
    other comprise one of said lines as set forth in (1) Note of subclass 6.


CLS 91/33
TXT Apparatus under subclass 32 in which motive fluid from said one supply path
    acts on valve means in the second supply path to cut off said second path
    to the working chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors in which low
    pressure fluid is supplied to the working chamber when the high pressure
    fluid is cut off and the motor is coasting or drifting (e.g., locomotive),
    the pressure in the high pressure line acting to disable the low pressure
    line when the high pressure line is activated.


CLS 91/34
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which a motor having a
    reciprocating working member is provided with means by which the
    reciprocating member is moved through a complete cycle by application of
    motive fluid alternately to opposed working faces thereof and alternately
    is moved through a complete cycle with motive fluid being applied to only
    one working face thereof during a portion of the cycle.


CLS 91/35
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means separate from the
    motor to (1) cause or permit the motor to operate or not to operate for a
    period of time and then act to start, stop or change the mode of operation
    of the motor; or (2) cause the motor to operate through a given
    reciprocating cycle of operation repetitiously; the operation of said means
    being independent of and not controlled by the operation of the motor or a
    pressure or flow condition of the motive fluid supplied to or exhausted
    from the motor and not requiring the intervention of a human operator.

    (1)     Note.  The means is not considered to be independent of the motor
    and is not included under this definition if its operation is initiated by
    the motor.

    (2)     Note.  The means separate from the motor may not be another motor
    which produces power for external use such as the first stage of a multiple
    expansion engine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152+,   for expansible chamber motors of the multiple expansion type.

    170+,   for expansible chamber motors having multiple working members one
    of which acts as or controls the valve means for the other.

    218+,   and especially 219, 282+, 284+, and 289 for cyclically operable
    expansible chamber motors including means to delay the shift of a
    distributor after initiation of the shift by the working member.

    364,    for expansible chamber motors having feedback control and means to
    delay operation of the valve means in response to the feedback signal from
    the motor working member.

    393,    for expansible chamber motors having position initiated timing or
    delay means for controlling motive fluid.


CLS 91/36
TXT Apparatus under subclass 35 including a plurality of working members, each
    being capable of movement independent of the other, and each being provided
    with independently operable timing, delay, pattern or cyclic control.


CLS 91/37
TXT Apparatus under subclass 35 in which there is provided an information
    carrying device such as a perforated tape, cam or the like, said device
    being driven or moved independently relative to and not controlled by the
    motor and means operated by said device for causing the motor to operate in
    accordance with the information carried thereby.

    (1)     Note.  This definition is limited to those devices in which the
    information carrying device is driven independently of the motor and would
    continue to feed control signals to the motor even in the event that the
    motor is not following (e.g., motor jammed) as distinct from a fixed
    pattern or the like wherein a follower element is driven by the motor and
    follows the pattern only because it is driven by the motor.  However, this
    definition includes holding the information carrying device stationary and
    independently driving a tracer or pick up device over it.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 3 for a pattern or tracer
    controlled actuator for a valve which may be disclosed as controlling an
    expansible chamber motor.


CLS 91/38
TXT Apparatus under subclass 35 in which there is a fluid actuated valve which
    is operated after a predetermined time or delay to control the motor, the
    timing or delay means comprising a chamber of predetermined volume to which
    the valve actuating fluid flows at a limited rate and which must be filled
    by said fluid before the fluid actuates said valve to control the motor.


CLS 91/39
TXT Apparatus under subclass 35 in which the motor has a cycle of operation in
    which the working member moves in one direction, reverses its direction of
    movement and returns to the original position, so as to be in condition to
    repeat the operation, and in which a distributor is provided to control the
    flow of motive fluid to cause the motor to operate through said cycle, said
    distributor being driven independently of said motor and not in consequence
    of motion or operation of the motor to cause the motor to operate
    continuously repeating said cycle.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of distributor see (2) Note of subclass
    218 of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for expansible chamber motors having means to stop or change the
    mode of operation of same after a predetermined number of cycles or
    revolutions.

    218+,   for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors in which the
    motive fluid is controlled as a consequence of motor working member
    movement or cyclic change of pressure in a working chamber.

    429,    for expansible chamber motors having independent means to drive a
    distributor valve to provide pulses of fluid to opposite sides of a working
    member to maintain the working member in a "ready" or static friction-free
    state.


CLS 91/40
TXT Apparatus under subclass 39 in which the distributor is driven by a fluid
    motor other than and not controlled by the motor which is controlled by the
    distributor.

    (1)     Note.  The motor which drives the distributor may not produce power
    for external use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170+,   for expansible chamber motors having a plurality of working members
    in which one working member is controlled by the position of another
    working member.


CLS 91/41
TXT Apparatus under the class definition which includes releasable means for
    holding a working member against movement, in at least one direction, and
    in which means for controlling said holding means to provide holding and/or
    release of the working member is so related to means for controlling the
    flow of motive to or from the motor that operation of the means for
    controlling the flow of motive fluid to produce starting or stopping of the
    working member will result in operation of the holding means to produce
    holding or release of the working member, or, operation of the means for
    controlling the holding means to produce holding or release of the working
    member will result in operation of the fluid flow control means to produce
    starting or stopping of fluid flow to or from the motor.

    (1)     Note.  Motive fluid, so controlled as to be confined or entrapped
    and which thereby prevents movement of the working member, is not to be
    considered as locking means under this definition.

    (2)     Note.  Locking means for the working member which is operated only
    as a consequence of movement of the working member, even though such
    movement is produced in response to control of motive fluid applied to the
    working member, is not to be considered as related to the motive fluid
    control means in such a way as to be included under this definition.

    (3)     Note.  It is immaterial whether the locking means is applied to the
    working member, a transmission member or the load, provided that operation
    of the locking means to holding position, in some position of the working
    member, will hold the working member against movement in at least one
    direction.  If the locking means is applied to hold a transmission member
    or the load only at the limit of movement of the working member in one
    direction and does not also hold the working member against movement in the
    opposite direction it is not to be considered as holding the working
    member, and is therefore not  included under this definition, even though
    the locking means is correlated with the motive fluid control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 8 for means to control flow of
    non-working arresting fluid for the working member of an expansible chamber
    device, subclasses 15+ for controllable means to prevent movement of the
    working member of an expansible chamber device and then subclasses 19+ for
    means engageable between the working member of an expansible chamber device
    and a relatively movable part to prevent retraction of the working member.

    477,    Interrelated Power Delivery Controls, Including Engine Control, for
    the combination of an expansible chamber motor driving a rotary (not
    oscillating) output shaft and a brake or lock applied to the shaft, there
    being a joint control for the motor and for the brake or lock.


CLS 91/42
TXT Apparatus under subclass 41 in which the control means for the motive fluid
    and the control means for the holding means are interconnected by
    electrical circuit means in such a way as to provide the correlated
    operation of the two control means.


CLS 91/43
TXT Apparatus under subclass 41 in which the means for controlling the flow of
    motive fluid and the working member holding means are operated in response
    to the motor working member, or the load driven by the working member,
    attaining a given position.


CLS 91/44
TXT Apparatus under subclass 41 in which the control means for the motive fluid
    and for the locking means are so related that either the locking means or
    the motive fluid control means is necessarily operated prior to operation
    of the other.


CLS 91/45
TXT Apparatus under subclass 41 in which holding and/or release of the working
    member is accomplished by control of flow of a nonworking fluid or by
    control of fluid flow to a fluid actuated holding means, and in which the
    flow of actuating fluid for the holding means, or the flow of nonworking
    fluid is controlled by the same valve, or by a valve which is mechanically
    interconnected with a valve, which controls the flow of motive fluid.

    (1)     Note. The common or interconnected valve means may control the
    motive fluid and/or fluid to provide holding of the working member,
    directly, or may control actuating fluid for operating fluid actuated valve
    means which control the motive fluid and/or fluid to provide holding.


CLS 91/46
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a means provided for the
    function of supplying lubricant to relatively moving parts of the motor
    (e.g., piston, transmission elements, etc.), said lubricating means
    requiring the actuation of a movable motive fluid control or distribution
    means.

    (1)     Note.  Merely turning on a motive fluid supply valve, or actuating
    a distributor to supply motive fluid to the motor will inherently supply
    lubricant since motive fluid ordinarily carries out a lubricating function,
    and as such is excluded from this subclass, even if a separate means to
    entrain another material in motive fluid solely for lubrication is
    provided, unless said motive fluid supply or distribution means separately
    controls the supply of separate lubricant material, or plural actuation of
    said supply or distribution means is required to properly carry out the
    lubricating function.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 153+ for lubrication means
    for expansible chamber devices.


CLS 91/47
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which a motor working chamber and
    working member are in continuous communication with a supply of motive
    fluid under all conditions of operation of the motor, the movement of the
    motor working member being controlled by the operation of the motor, the
    movement of the motor working member being controlled by the operation of
    an outlet to selectively or adjustably connect said working chamber to a
    region of continually lower pressure to allow escape of motive fluid, the
    pressure in said region being constant (e.g., atmospheric).

    (1)     Note.  This definition includes motors in which the supply line is
    vented upstream of the motor chamber so long as the motor chamber is in
    constant communication with the pressure source.

    (2)     Note.  The supply of motive fluid under this definition may be
    atmospheric air in which case the region of lower pressure would be a
    vacuum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    307,    for cyclically operated expansible chamber motors having a
    distributor motor with constantly applied actuating fluid and controlled
    venting.

    415+,   for expansible chamber differential motors in which motive fluid is
    applied to one working face of a motor to cause motion in one direction and
    then by-passed to an opposed larger area working face to cause reverse
    motion while the motive fluid is still being applied to said one face.


CLS 91/48
TXT Apparatus under subclass 47 in which the working chamber is provided with a
    plurality of outlets or vent passages there being control means for each of
    the vent passages which act independently or at different times or under
    different conditions.


CLS 91/49
TXT Apparatus under subclass 47 in which the working member is provided with a
    passage therein and the outlet or vented fluid passes therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222+,   for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors in which motive
    fluid is exhausted through a valved piston and in which the inlet motive
    fluid is also controlled.

    376+,   for expansible chamber motors including feedback control in which
    motive fluid is exhausted through a valved working member and in which the
    inlet motive fluid is controlled.

    401,    for expansible chamber motors in which an expanding working chamber
    is vented through the working member in response to working member position
    and in which the inlet motive fluid is also controlled.

    422,    for expansible chamber motors in which motive fluid is exhausted
    through a valved piston and in which the inlet motive fluid is also
    controlled.


CLS 91/50
TXT Apparatus under subclass 47 in which the motor is of the cyclically
    operable type.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of a cyclically operable motor see
    subclass 218 of this class.


CLS 91/51
TXT Apparatus under subclass 47 in which the motor is provided with opposed
    working chambers and a working member having opposed working faces, the
    motive fluid being continuously supplied to said opposed chambers and
    opposed working member faces the working member being movable in opposite
    direction by alternately venting said working chambers.


CLS 91/52
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which a motor working chamber and
    working member are in continuous communication with a low pressure region
    by means of a restricted outlet under all conditions of operation of the
    motor, the movement of the motor working member being controlled by the
    operation of means to selectively or adjustably connect the working chamber
    to a source of motive fluid supply.

    (1)     Note.  Motor movement is obtained by supplying motive fluid in
    greater quantities than the restricted, open outlet has capacity to pass.

    (2)     Note.  The restriction of the outlet may be adjustable at the will
    of the operator, but those devices in which the outlet is variably
    restricted in response to a condition of operation of the motor are
    excluded.

    (3)     Note.  The low pressure region may be a source of vacuum and the
    controlled motive fluid supply be atmospheric air.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    296,    for cyclically operable motors having a motor operated distributor
    in which the working chamber of the distributor has a constantly open
    throttled exhaust and a controlled motive fluid supply.


CLS 91/53
TXT Apparatus under the class definition for turning or starting the rotary
    shaft of an engine and having a clutch or gearing connection with the
    engine which is disengaged from or which permits the engine shaft to rotate
    while the starting motor is inoperative.

    (1)     Note.  The inclusion in the claim of the engine by name only or
    only that part of the engine which cooperates with the starting or rotating
    motor will not act to exclude a patent from this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for expansible chamber motors combined with a clutch or
    disengageable gearing which may be selectively operated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 625+ for an internal combustion engine
    with structure for rotating or starting it by pressure fluid.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 6+ for mechanical movement
    or gearing engageable with a machine for starting the machine and in which
    conventional means applies power to the mechanical movements or gearing.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 179.1+ for internal
    combustion engine starting devices.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses .07+ for the
    combination of a motor and a clutch in which the motor control operates the
    clutch control and subclass .096 for the combination of a motor and clutch
    having separate controls which are interrelated.


CLS 91/54
TXT Apparatus under the class definition, (1) adapted to be rearranged to
    perform different functions; or (2) adapted to be altered so as to operate
    in a different way or change its function or enhance its operation in some
    way by (a) disassembling the apparatus in some portion and then
    reassembling the apparatus with the same or different portion, (b)
    disassembling some portion from the apparatus, or (c) assembling some
    portion of the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  The change in the apparatus must be more than merely placing
    a part in one of a series of holes such as piston controlled vent ports or
    in general making a change which amounts to only an adjustment such as, for
    example, adjusting the valve actuating linkage for a motor operated valve.

    (2)     Note.  A part which is disassembled and reversed to present a new
    wearing surface is included under this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for expansible chamber motors of the single acting type changeable
    to or from the double acting type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 625+ for an internal combustion engine
    that may be rotated by the admission of pressure fluid and subclass 698 for
    a system of convertible or combined motors.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 59 for expansible chamber
    devices which are convertible or changeable by assembly or disassembly
    facilitating means for expansible chamber devices.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 22 for engines operable as
    either internal combustion or air engines.

    417,    Pumps, subclass 237 for devices having means for changing a pumping
    mechanism so that it may function as a motor and vice versa.


CLS 91/55
TXT Apparatus under the class definition combined with means, which means if
    claimed, per se, would be classified in another class and which is not
    merely a part or subcombination of the motor.

    (1)     Note.  In view of Class 92 and the intimate relationship thereof
    with this class many subject matters which ordinarily would be considered
    to be combined when claimed in combination with the basic subject matter of
    this Class 91 are not considered to be combined herein and are excluded
    under this definition.  The following basis has been used to determine
    whether certain subject matter is to be considered as combined under this
    definition.  If Class 92  specifically  provides a basis of classification
    for the subject matter under consideration combined with the subject matter
    of Class 92 then said subject matter combined with basic subject matter of
    this Class 91 will be excluded from this definition.  The miscellaneous
    combined subclass of Class 92 (92-145) is not considered to specifically
    provide a basis of classification for any combined device.  For example,
    subject matter of this class combined with a fluid purifying means as
    provided for in 92-78 or with a nonsealing cleaning means as provided for
    in 92-87 would be excluded from this definition.

    (2)     Note.  Inasmuch as a motor must transmit its power to the load to
    be driven thereby there is ordinarily some power transmitting mechanism
    between the motor working member and load. This power transmitting
    mechanism is ordinarily termed the "transmission" and may include a single
    rigid element such as a piston rod or may include a number of relatively
    movable elements such as a lever or linkage system.  Any element of the
    transmission which necessarily partakes of a given motion or pattern of
    motion dependent upon the motion of the motor working member is considered
    to be basic subject matter of the motor and is excluded from this
    definition.  However, when the transmission includes some part which does
    not necessarily partake of a given motion in accordance with the motion of
    the motor working member, such as a selectively engageable clutch, this no
    longer constitutes basic subject matter for this class and causes
    classification under this definition. The mere inclusion in the
    transmission of a lost motion or resilient connection will not cause
    classification under this definition.

    (3)     Note.  Apparatus found in this subclass includes for example,
    motors having a selectively engageable clutch or gear in a transmission
    from the motor to a load and motors having means to prevent formation of
    ice or to break up ice in the exhaust passage from the motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for expansible chamber motors for starting or rotating an engine
    and having a disengageable clutch or gearing connection therewith.

    391,    for expansible chamber motors with a manual actuator which may be
    clutched to the working member to move the load in the absence of operation
    of the motor.


CLS 91/59
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which a variation of rotational
    load imposed upon the rotating shaft of the motor controls the flow of
    motive fluid to or from the motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76,     for rotary expansible chamber motors in which the motive fluid is
    controlled by the speed of the motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 731.1 for gearing with fluid
    drive having speed and/or torque responsive ratio change and see the search
    notes thereunder.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses .032 and .034 for
    interrelated motor and clutch controls having automatic torque responsive
    control and see the search notes thereunder.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses 31+,
    for fluid drive or control of planetary gearing.


CLS 91/61
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which there is provided a plurality
    of working chambers, each having a working member moving therein, at least
    one other working member having to-and-fro motion whereby the working
    members expand and contract the respective working chambers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 698+ for a system of combined or
    convertible motors.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclass 105 for impact delivering
    devices having a separate motor to rotate a driven element.


CLS 91/151
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which one or more working members
    act to form a progression of completely isolated expanding working chambers
    by a unidirectional movement.

    (1)     Note.  Motors comprising a series of working members or a single
    working member carried on an endless flexible member and travelling
    unidirectionally are found here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, subclass 5 for fluid motors
    of the endless type operated by a directed or confined fluid flow and see
    section III of this class definition for a general statement of the line
    between this Class 91 and Class 415.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclasses 7+ for one or
    more working members supported or an endless flexible carrier and reacting
    with an undirected or unconfined medium fluid flow.


CLS 91/152
TXT Apparatus under the class definition utilizing an expansible motive fluid
    and having a plurality of working chambers at least one of which receives
    its motive fluid in whole or in part from another of the working chambers
    for expansion or further expansion of the motive fluid therein to perform
    work.

    (1)     Note.  This definition does not include motors in which motive
    fluid is supplied to a first expansible chamber and then directed to a
    second expansible chamber while the first is still in communication with
    the supply so as to in effect provide direct communication between the
    second chamber and the supply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8+,     for multiple expansion motors having means for simultaneously
    supplying live motive fluid to a subsequent chamber while the prior chamber
    is exhausting to the subsequent chamber.

    62+,    for multiple expansion motors wherein one of the working chambers
    includes a rotary working member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 244+, for pumps having successive pumping stages.


CLS 91/153
TXT Apparatus under subclass 152 comprising a motive fluid distributing valve
    for each of the working chambers, the fluid distributing valve of one
    working chamber being operated by the working member of another working
    chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191+,   for expansible chamber having a plurality of relatively movable
    working members wherein the position of each working member cyclically
    controls another.


CLS 91/154
TXT Apparatus under subclass 153 comprising means for adjusting one or more of
    the fluid distributing valves for affecting the period of admission of
    motive fluid to the working chamber or for varying fluid flow to the
    working chambers so that the direction of movement of the power
    transmitting means is reversed.


CLS 91/155
TXT Apparatus under subclass 152 wherein at least one of the working chambers
    has a motive fluid distributing valve which is actuated in whole or in part
    by variations in pressure of a fluid applied to the valve or valve actuator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281+,   for expansible chamber motors having a fluid actuated distributor
    motor, the motive fluid to the distributor motor being controlled by the
    position of the working member.


CLS 91/156
TXT Apparatus under subclass 152 wherein one of the working chambers surrounds
    another working chamber, said chambers having a common axis.


CLS 91/157
TXT Apparatus under subclass 152 in which each of the working chambers is
    provided with valve means for distributing motive fluid thereto, and
    including means for selectively moving at least one of the valve means
    relative to the other, the movement being in addition to the normal fluid
    distributing movement.


CLS 91/158
TXT Apparatus under subclass 157 wherein the valve means for a plurality of
    working chambers are selectively movable, each being movable independently
    of the other or being so interrelated that a movement of one results in a
    movement of the other.


CLS 91/159
TXT Apparatus under subclass 152 comprising a plurality of working members
    which are movable relative to one another, the fluid acting on one of the
    working members and then being expanded to act on another working member.


CLS 91/160
TXT Apparatus under subclass 159 in which the relatively movable working
    members each have opposed rigidly connected working faces to which motive
    fluid is alternately applied, exhaust fluid from the working faces of one
    of the working members being expanded to the working faces of another
    working member.


CLS 91/161
TXT Apparatus under subclass 159 wherein the working face or faces on each
    working member are so disposed that the motive fluid reacts with each
    working member in a single direction only.

    (1)     Note.  The motive fluid does not necessarily act in the same
    direction on all the relatively movable working members, but acts in one
    direction only on each individual working member.


CLS 91/162
TXT Apparatus under subclass 161 wherein each working member has at least two
    integrally connected working faces disposed in the same direction, one of
    the faces receiving motive fluid from a high pressure source and another
    face simultaneously receiving motive fluid by cross expansion from another
    relatively movable working member.


CLS 91/163
TXT Apparatus under subclass 152 having a high pressure chamber and a low
    pressure chamber, a working member in the high pressure chamber having a
    fluid passage therein, the motive fluid from the high pressure chamber
    being expanded through the passage into the low pressure chamber.


CLS 91/164
TXT Apparatus under subclass 152 having at least two high pressure working
    chambers and at least two low pressure working chambers, a working member
    face in each of said working chambers, the working faces being integrally
    connected so as to move in unison and, on each stroke of the motor, motive
    fluid from a high pressure source acting in one of said high pressure
    chambers while fluid is simultaneously expanded from another of said high
    pressure chambers into one of the low pressure chambers.


CLS 91/165
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the motor is provided with
    opposed working member faces, motive fluid being applied to said faces at
    the same or different times, the motive fluid which is applied to one
    working member face being above atmospheric pressure and the motive fluid
    which is applied to the second face also being above atmospheric pressure,
    but being at a different pressure than that applied to the first face.

    (1)     Note.  The opposed working faces may be on different,
    interconnected, relatively movable working members or may be integrally
    connected together. Opposed working faces are defined as faces which when
    motive fluid is applied thereto tend to make the working member move in
    opposite directions when the faces are integrally connected.  When the
    working faces are relatively movable the application of motive fluid to the
    opposed working faces tends to move the power output member in opposite
    directions.

    (2)     Note.  This definition does not include those devices in which a
    different pressure is obtained in the opposed chambers merely because a
    flow of the motive fluid occurs as, for example, where a pressure drop
    occurs due to flow past a restriction but which would disappear when flow
    ceases.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6+      and especially 28+, for expansible chamber motors in which motive
    fluid at different pressures is applied to the same working chamber at
    different times.

    152+,   for expansible chamber motors of the multiple expansion type.

    415+,   for expansible chamber motors in which motive fluid at the same
    pressure is simultaneously applied to opposed working member faces.


CLS 91/166
TXT Apparatus under subclass 165 in which the motor is of the double acting
    type wherein valve means controls the flow of motive fluid to the opposed
    working member faces in a manner such that the working member will move in
    one direction when the pressure of the motive fluid being supplied to
    operate the motor is at a first predetermined magnitude and will move in
    the opposite direction when the motive fluid supply pressure varies from
    said predetermined magnitude.

    (1)     Note.  The predetermined magnitude of pressure may include a range
    of pressure, as for example, the working member may be in one position
    until the supply pressure drops below 90 psi. and will then move to a
    second position until the supply pressure increases to 100 psi. at which
    time the working member returns to its first position.


CLS 91/167
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having plural working chambers with
    individually actuated control means supplying motive fluid to each chamber,
    and in which the chambers are physically connected in such fashion that the
    output motion of one chamber can bodily shift another chamber in the same
    general direction in which said other chamber is expansible so that the
    individual output motions are cumulative and equal the sum of the
    individual chamber extensions.

    (1)     Note.  The chambers may expand simultaneously or in any order;
    either at the will of an operator or in response to a condition of a
    working chamber or its working fluid.  One chamber may either move the
    second chamber before the latter has expanded by abutment of moving walls
    of each chamber or it may move without affecting the second chamber to
    merely form an abutment for a subsequent expansion of said second chamber.

    (2)     Note.  Situations involving the separate control of plural chambers
    include (1) a common supply valve for plural chambers and an additional
    valve in the supply line to one chamber to control this one chamber
    relative to another and (2) a separate, controllable valve for each chamber.

    (3)     Note.  The direction in which the cumulative expansion occurs may
    be generally linear or it may be about an axis so that angular motions may
    be added.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217,    for expansible chamber motors having inner and outer cylinders
    which are relatively shifted axially to control valve ports for the inner
    cylinder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 152+ for tools which may be
    reciprocated by an expansible chamber motor and in which the tool and motor
    are advanced by another expansible chamber motor.


CLS 91/168
TXT Apparatus under subclass 167 in which the supply of motive fluid to one
    working chamber is controlled in response to the working member in another
    working chamber attaining a given position in its chamber.

    (1)     Note.  The position at which control occurs may be immediately
    after one working member is slightly moved, i.e., where a valved passage
    through a working member in one working chamber is held open or closed in
    response to the proximity of the working member to its starting position
    but upon slight movement of the working member is either (1) opened to port
    working fluid to another working chamber or (2) closed to lock up working
    fluid in another working chamber.


CLS 91/169
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having a structural unit consisting of
    a single working chamber whose surfaces include an external cylinder
    member, and internal cylindrical sleeve member slidable therein and a third
    member slidable in or on one of said members in such fashion that each of
    the members is movable relative to the others.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is intended to be the generic location of the
    structural unit defined above regardless of whether one or more of the
    members are (load engaging) working members or whether it is not clear from
    the disclosure which members are working members.

    (2)     Note.  The intermediate cylindrical member may have an end wall or
    annular flange between itself and the external cylinder provided that said
    end wall is apertured to provide a continuous and uncontrolled flow of
    motive fluid therethrough.

    (3)     Note.  The inner and outer cylinders may be axially spaced from
    each other provided that the outer cylinder is radially spaced a greater
    distance from a common axis than the inner cylinder.

    (4)     Note.  An inner sleeve which may or may not be part of an inner
    cylinder, which shifts longitudinally within an outer cylinder for the
    purpose of controlling valve ports between the cylinder and the sleeve has
    been excluded where no significant work is performed by the outer cylinder
    over and above that performed during the shifting of the inner sleeve to
    actuate said valve ports.

    (5)     Note.  Each of said members sealingly engages at least one of the
    other members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167+,   for similar structures in which an end wall on a sleeve
    intermediate a cylinder and piston divides the organization into two
    chambers with separate control means for each which control means may
    include a valve in said end wall.

    217,    276 and 423, for expansible chamber motors having inner and outer
    sleeves or cylinders which are relatively shifted axially to control valve
    ports for the inner cylinder or sleeve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, 51+ for patents showing similar
    structures where valving is not claimed.


CLS 91/170
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having plural working members which
    are capable of relative movement and in which there is either (1) control
    of motive fluid for one working member in response to the position of
    another; (2) an interconnection between the members to cause relative
    motion or (3) an interconnection between said members (such as a "lost
    motion" or separable abutment connection) which causes one member to move
    the other member under some disclosed operating condition but which permits
    relative motion of the members.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition for the definition of the term
    working member. A plurality of working member faces are not considered to
    be relatively movable merely because each is made up of constituent areas
    which are relatively movable.  For example, a pair of diaphragms fixed to a
    single rigid output rod are not considered to have relative movement when
    flexed, but a pair of diaphragms connected to separate shafts which have
    relative movement when the diaphragms are flexed are considered to be
    relatively movable.

    (2)     Note.  The working members must produce power for external use.  A
    piston or the like which operates only a valve of the motor or a motor
    latch, etc. is not considered to be a working member under this definition.
     See, for example, subclasses 304+.  However, one working member may
    transmit its power output through another.

    (3)     Note.  The control of working fluid for one working member by
    another may be such that:  (a) one member controls another only; (b) each
    of several members controls another or (c) the connected output of all of
    the working members actuates means to control some or all of them.

    (4)     Note.  Included under this definition are patents claiming a first
    working chamber having a working member which extends into a second working
    chamber to engage or abut a second working member therein to move the
    latter. However, if the first working member is disclosed as merely
    displacing fluid in the second chamber and thus moves the second working
    member without engaging it, the patent has been construed as a pulsator and
    classified in an appropriate subclass of Class 60.

    (5)     Note.  For classification as an original under this definition a
    patent must claim either features (1), (2), or (3) of the definition.

    (6)     Note.  Means to actuate a valve may be part of the motive fluid
    control in part 1 of this definition but a means to merely prevent or
    permit actuation of the valve by some other agency has not been considered
    motive fluid control.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    411+,   for more residual relations between plural working members
    including (1) those continuously connected to move as a unit (2) those
    which have unrelated or independent outputs and wherein one is not
    controlled in response to position of another (3) those in which one member
    is controlled in response to some condition or criteria of the other  than
    its position and (4) control of supply of working fluid to plural working
    chambers regardless of the relation between their outputs and including
    plural working members which are relatively moved by transmissions which
    are disclosed but not claimed.

    472+,   for motors having three or more cylinders arranged in parallel,
    radial, or conical relationship with a rotary transmission axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 426 for a system of plural motors combined
    with a pressure fluid source in which the speed of, pressure in or position
    of one output motor or motor section controls another.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 61+ for expansible chamber
    devices having relatively movable working members.

    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, or Animal Powered, subclasses 2+ for
    combined motors of that class.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclasses 120+ for
    plural impellers reacting with an undirected or unconfined medium fluid
    flow.


CLS 91/171
TXT Apparatus under subclass 170 having separate means to control the working
    fluid to two working members and additional means to sense the difference
    in distances traveled by the working members from a starting point and to
    affect the first means in a manner to decrease the difference in said
    distances.

    (1)     Note.  Means to sense angular displacements between rotating plural
    shafts driven by separate working members have been excluded and have been
    classified in subclass 412 as speed sensing devices.

    (2)     Note.  Included are patents claiming structures wherein one working
    member is controlled to follow-up another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    412,    for means (e.g., a differential) to control a working member in
    response to a sensed difference in angular positions of two shafts, one of
    which is rotated continuously by said working member.


CLS 91/172
TXT Apparatus under subclass 170 having a working member urged in one direction
    by motive fluid acting thereon and urged in an opposing direction by a
    second working member having motive fluid simultaneously supplied thereto
    and which is movable relative thereto; e.g., by engagement through
    separable abutment surfaces or by connection by a transmission or linkage
    means or indirectly through a body of interposed fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    411,    for patents showing similar organizations where the working members
    are connected to move as a unit so as to preclude relative motion.


CLS 91/173
TXT Apparatus under subclass 170 comprising a working chamber carried by and
    movable with a first working member, and a second working member movable
    within the working chamber carried by the first working member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167+,   for a motor having a unit having separately controlled working
    chambers, the extension of which is equal to the individual chamber
    extensions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 240, for expansible chamber volume
    or rate of flow meters having a transversely reciprocating piston and
    cylinder.


CLS 91/174
TXT Apparatus under subclass 170 in which at least one of the working members
    has spaced integral opposed working faces or an additional working member
    rigidly secured thereto, and engaging a relatively movable load or
    transmission member at a point between the opposed faces or at a point
    between the rigidly connected working members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    493,    for motors having three or more radially arranged cylinders and
    having at least one pair of rigidly connected pistons reciprocating in
    rigidly connected cylinders, there being provided a transmission or
    reaction element interposed between said rigid pistons.


CLS 91/176
TXT Apparatus under subclass 170 having either (1) movably mounted cylinders
    which form relatively movable working members or (2) relatively movable
    working members which are disposed in movably mounted cylinders.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173,    for cylinders which are working members and which form working
    chambers movable therewith within which other working members are movable.

    175,    for rotatably mounted cylinders which are spaced from and parallel
    to an axis about which they rotate.

    197+,   for relatively movable pistons disposed within rigidly connected,
    rotating cylinders, said cylinders being connected to the load in such
    fashion that said pistons are not working members.

    472+,   for motors having three or more cylinders arranged in parallel,
    radial, or conical relationship with a rotary transmission axis and
    especially subclass 479 wherein the motive fluid for each cylinder is
    separately controlled by movement of the cylinder or liner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 241 for meters wherein the
    cylinders are supported for rocking movement.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 66 for relatively movable
    working members disposed in moving cylinders.


CLS 91/177
TXT Apparatus under subclass 170 in which at least two relatively movable
    working members move back and forth about one or more axes to describe arcs
    of not more than 360 degrees.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 252 for meters having oscillating
    pistons.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 67 for expansible chamber
    devices having plural oscillating working members.


CLS 91/178
TXT Apparatus under subclass 170 comprising a unitary valve member which is
    within a single housing and movable relatively thereto to separately
    control separate passages communicating with different working chambers or
    with fluid operated valves controlling said chambers.


CLS 91/179
TXT Apparatus under subclass 178 in which the valve member and housing are
    mounted for relative rotary motion which is limited to not more than 360
    degrees.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176,    for oscillating distributor valves having at least one port on an
    oscillating cylinder.

    211+,   for oscillating valves formed in oscillating cylinders.


CLS 91/180
TXT Apparatus under subclass 178 having a means to impart a continuous relative
    rotation of the valve member and housing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    484+,   for motors having three or more cylinders arranged in parallel,
    radial, or conical relationship with a rotary transmission axis in which
    relatively movable parts of the motive fluid control valve therefor
    (usually of the rotary type) as fluidly biased into seating engagement.

    487,    for motors having three or more cylinders arranged in parallel,
    radial, or conical relationship with a rotary transmission axis in which
    motive fluid is directed to or from the motive fluid control valve
    interface, said control valve usually being of the rotary type.

    498,    for motors having three or more radially arranged cylinders and a
    centrally arranged relatively rotatable valve member.

    503,    for motors having three or more parallel cylinders and a rotary
    spool type motive fluid control valve.


CLS 91/181
TXT Apparatus under subclass 170 having a plurality of working members disposed
    in the same chamber and urged in opposite directions by the working fluid
    in the chamber, the working members being connected to a force transmitting
    means or mechanism which constrains them to move relative to each other.

    (1)     Note.  Continuously intercommunicating working chambers have been
    considered as the same chamber for purposes of this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 69+ for expansible chamber
    devices having interconnected oppositely movable working members in a
    common working chamber.


CLS 91/182
TXT Apparatus under subclass 170 having a single member driven by the
    transmission or the like which connects the plural working members for
    relative motion, said member actuating separate control valves for the
    working fluid supplied to each working member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    476+,   for motors having three or more cylinders arranged in parallel,
    radial, or conical relationship with a rotary transmission axis and in
    which there is provided separate motive fluid control means for each
    working chamber.


CLS 91/183
TXT Apparatus under subclass 170 having a member, linkage or transmission
    connected to each of the working members and arranged to impart relative
    movement to one working member when the other is moved or to constrain each
    of the working members to move relatively in some predetermined relation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194,    for expansible chamber motors disclosing plural, relatively movable
    working members connected to a rotary shaft by an unclaimed transmission
    and in which the valving for each working member is actuated by another
    working member.

    472+,   for motors having three or more cylinders arranged in parallel,
    radial, or conical relationship with a rotary transmission axis and
    particularly subclass 496 for positive bidirectional drive to the
    reciprocating members within radially arranged cylinders and subclass 507
    for positive bidirectional drive of the reciprocating members within
    parallel cylinders.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 245+ for meters having parallel
    working members which drive a common shaft extending transverse to the axis
    of said working members.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 61+ and especially
    subclasses 68+ and 76 for expansible chamber devices having relatively
    movable, interconnected working members.


CLS 91/184
TXT Apparatus under subclass 183 in which the flow of motive fluid to or from a
    working chamber is interrupted by a surface of the working member
    overlapping an orifice in the working chamber wall.


CLS 91/185
TXT Apparatus under subclass 183 having valve means to control the motive fluid
    flow to or from a working chamber, said valve means being actuated by
    either (1) means connected to the valve means and disposed in the path of a
    working member for intermittent contact therewith or (2) by pivotal motion
    of a member pivoted to a working member at one end and connected to a
    transmission at its other end.

    (1)     Note.  The valve means may be formed in a member pivoted to the
    working member so that ports therein are intermittently aligned with ports
    in the working member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 250+ for meters having a
    distributing valve mechanism actuated by the piston, piston rod, or part
    rigidly attached thereto.


CLS 91/186
TXT Apparatus under subclass 183 in which the member, linkage or transmission
    which connects plural working members for relative movement is formed, at
    least in part, by either (1) gearing having intermeshing teeth or cogs such
    as a rack and pinion or (2) by an elongated member which is pivoted to
    oscillate about a transverse axis and is engaged at points spaced from said
    axis by means connecting it to the working members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81+,    for rotary working members which interengage in a gear-like manner.

    411+,   for (a) differential gearing and (b) for floating links connected
    both to plural working members and to a load or transmission to move the
    latter cumulatively but which to not cause one working member to move
    another.


CLS 91/187
TXT Apparatus under subclass 183 having means actuated by a working member to
    control the motive fluid for said working member, said means being
    adjustable to vary the position of the working member at which control
    occurs.

    (1)     Note.  The adjustment may vary all cyclic events simultaneously or
    the relative timing of plural, fluid control events may be changed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    330+,   and see the note in that subclass for additional fields of search
    for expansible chamber motors having a means to adjust the positional
    relationship of its working member and the means to control working fluid
    for that working member so as to vary the position of the working member at
    which control occurs.

    478,    for motors having three or more cylinders arranged in parallel,
    radial, or conical relationship with a rotary transmission axis and in
    which there is provided separate motive fluid control for each working
    chamber and means for varying the cyclic relation between at least one of
    said reciprocating members and its associated control valve.

    482+,   for motors having three or more cylinders arranged in parallel,
    radial, or conical relationship with a rotary transmission axis and means
    for varying the cyclic relation between at least one of said reciprocating
    members and its associated control valve.


CLS 91/188
TXT Apparatus under subclass 183 in which the valve means to control flow of
    motive fluid to or from a working member is actuated by a cam, an eccentric
    or a part moving in a circular path and either (1) forming a portion of the
    means to connect plural working members for relative motion or (2)
    connected to said connecting means to move therewith as a unit.


CLS 91/189
TXT Apparatus under subclass 170 in which motive fluid for one of said working
    members is controlled in response to another working member attaining a
    given position.

    (1)     Note.  Included under this definition are patents claiming control
    of motive fluid for a first working member by fluid displaced by a second
    working member, usually from a nonworking chamber and as a function of the
    position of the latter member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35+,    for expansible chamber motors in which a fluid operated device
    controlling a working member is at least part of an independent motor which
    is in no way influenced by the working member controlled thereby and which
    has no output other than that required for control of the working member.

    44,     for expansible chamber motors having sequential operation of fluid
    operated locking means and a control of motive fluid for a working member.


CLS 91/190
TXT Apparatus under subclass 189 having plural working members at least one of
    which actuates control valve means for another working member and in which
    means are provided to disassociate said control valve means from said one
    working member and connect it for operation by the working member which it
    controls to thereby provide plural self-controlled working members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54+,    for expansible chamber motors which are convertible from one type
    of valve operation to another by disassembly or reassembly in which parts
    are removed or added or reconnected rather than adjusted for this purpose.


CLS 91/191
TXT Apparatus under subclass 189 in which each working member actuates a valve
    means controlling another working member in successive fashion to provide
    cyclic operation (e.g., "duplex" motor).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153+,   for expansible chamber motors in which a second working chamber is
    expanded by motive fluid exhausting from a first working chamber while said
    first working chamber is isolated from the working fluid supply.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 243 for meters having plural piston
    type working members and cylinders wherein the movement of each piston
    actuates the valving for another, and subclass 264 for similar meters
    wherein the working members are of the diaphragm or collapsible wall type.


CLS 91/192
TXT Apparatus under subclass 191 having at least three working members, at
    least two of which are controlled by valve means actuated by a different
    working member than the working member controlled thereby.


CLS 91/193
TXT Apparatus under subclass 191 having a valve controlling motive fluid flow
    to or from at least one of plural working members, fluid operated means to
    move the valve, and means to control the supply of fluid to said valve
    moving means in response to the position of another relatively movable
    working member.


CLS 91/194
TXT Apparatus under subclass 191 having a disclosure of a means to convert the
    motion of the working members to a rotary output.

    (1)     Note.  The patents in this subclass disclose, but do not claim
    transmission features (e.g. the wheels, crankpins and axle of a locomotive)
    which, if claimed, would cause the patent to be classified in subclasses
    183+ but the valving is peculiar to a rotary output and yet is often not
    associated with the transmission.


CLS 91/195
TXT Apparatus under subclass 191 having valve means controlling only a first
    working member, means to actuate the valve means by said first working
    member and additional means to actuate said valve means by a different
    working member.

    (1)     Note.  A typical example is a type of "duplex" motor where each
    piston actuates the valving for another piston to synchronize the pistons
    but with additional cut off valves each actuated by the piston controlled
    thereby.

    (2)     Note.  The valve means may consist of a single valve operated by
    both the working member controlled thereby and by a second working member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193,    for fluid operated distributor valves controlled jointly by plural
    working members.

    194,    for plural motors of the type provided for in this subclass (195)
    but which have a disclosed rotary output.


CLS 91/196
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which, incident to the operation of
    the motor, the cylinder has an absolute movement.

    (1)     Note.  Those motors in which it involves an obvious matter of
    choice and/or reversal of parts whether the piston is stationary and the
    cylinder movable or vice versa will not be classified under this definition
    even if the claims identify the cylinder as the movable element provided
    that the claims do not set forth a specific power transmission between the
    cylinder and driven member or load.

    (2)     Note.  An open ended cylindrical member which has sliding and/or
    rotary movement with respect to the piston merely for valving purposes is
    not included under this definition. However, if the cylindrical member
    carries or has formed as a part thereof the end wall of the expansible
    chamber (i.e., the abutment) it is considered to be a cylinder and is
    included under this definition even if the sole disclosed purpose of the
    sliding and/or rotary movement is for valving.

    (3)     Note.  A cylinder which moves merely because it is a part of a
    motor which moves as an entity, as by being mounted on a movable device
    (e.g., check) is not included under this definition because of said
    mounting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67+,    for expansible chamber motors of the rotary type in which the
    rotating working member is a rotating cylinder.

    169,    for expansible chamber motors wherein the chamber is formed by a
    movable cylinder, sleeve and piston.

    173,    for expansible chamber motors having a moving cylinder formed by a
    working member, the moving cylinder having another working member movable
    therein.

    176,    for relatively movable working members in which the cylinder is a
    moving cylinder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 54+ for cylinders mounted
    for rotation where no valving is claimed, subclasses 117+ for cylinders
    mounted for movement incident to expansion and contraction of the working
    chamber and subclasses 51+ for a working chamber having mutually relatively
    movable tubular member, member slidable therein and an outer cylinder
    therefor.


CLS 91/197
TXT Apparatus under subclass 196 comprising a plurality of working chambers
    formed by rigidly connected cylinders mounted for continuous rotation in a
    single direction about a fixed or movable axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183+,   for patents on expansible chamber motors some of which have plural
    rigidly connected stationary cylinders not acting as working members.

    472+,   for motors having three or more cylinders arranged in parallel,
    radial, or conical relationship with a rotary transmission axis.


CLS 91/206
TXT Apparatus under subclass 196 in which a unitary cylinder has a first
    internal working face actuated by motive fluid to urge the cylinder in one
    direction of movement and has a second working face extending outwardly or
    formed exteriorly thereof, said second face being a piston, the faces
    forming portions of separate working chambers and being urged by motive
    fluid in the same or different directions simultaneously or at different
    times.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167+,   for expansible chamber motors having separately controlled plural
    chambers extensible as a unit wherein one of the chambers may be formed by
    a moving cylinder.


CLS 91/207
TXT Apparatus under subclass 206 in which the first and second working faces
    are so disposed on the cylinder that when motive fluid is applied thereto
    both surfaces urge the cylinder in the same direction.


CLS 91/208
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 comprising means for applying motive fluid to
    the first working face, and means responsive to a change of the pressure of
    the motive fluid being applied thereto to cause motive fluid to be applied
    to the second working face.


CLS 91/209
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 comprising means for applying motive fluid to
    the first working face, and means responsive to the cylinder attaining a
    given position to cause motive fluid to be applied to the second working
    face.


CLS 91/210
TXT Apparatus under subclass 196 in which the cylinder swings back and forth in
    an arcuate path of not more than 360 degrees about a fixed pivot, incident
    to operation of the motor.

    (1)     Note.  A fixed pivot as herein used is meant a pivot that has no
    mechanical motion imparted thereto during the oscillation of the cylinder,
    such as reciprocating, rotating, etc.  A pivot that may be shifted and then
    remain stationary during oscillation of the cylinder is considered as being
    fixed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 241, for expansible chamber volume
    or rate of flow meters having an oscillating cylinder.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 117+ for expansible chamber
    devices having pivoted or oscillating cylinders.


CLS 91/211
TXT Apparatus under subclass 210 comprising a stationary member on which the
    cylinder moves during oscillation, the stationary member having ports
    therein through which motive fluid is conveyed, and the cylinder having
    ports aligning with the ports in the stationary member to valve the motive
    fluid.


CLS 91/212
TXT Apparatus under subclass 211 in which the cylinder oscillates about an axis
    transverse to the longitudinal axis of the cylinder the ported stationary
    member being located at one end of the cylinder and forming means on which
    the cylinder rocks or slides.


CLS 91/213
TXT Apparatus under subclass 211 in which the cylinder has at least one
    laterally extending trunnion forming a member by which the cylinder is
    pivoted, a bearing member supporting the trunnion, and fluid ports in the
    trunnion cooperating with fluid ports in the bearing member to valve the
    motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212,    for oscillating expansible chamber motors having cooperating valve
    ports formed in the cylinder and a ported end bearing about which the
    cylinder oscillates.


CLS 91/214
TXT Apparatus under subclass 211 in which the stationary member has an arcuate
    surface, an arcuate surface on the cylinder engaging therewith, fluid ports
    in the surfaces, the oscilation of the cylinder causing relative sliding
    motion between the two surfaces to align the ports and valve the motive
    fluid.


CLS 91/215
TXT Apparatus under subclass 210 comprising a valve that oscillates with the
    cylinder and in addition has sliding movement relative thereto, a
    stationary member to which the valve is connected, the sliding movement of
    the valve being caused by the oscillation of the cylinder relative to the
    stationary member.


CLS 91/216
TXT Apparatus under subclass 196 in which the cylinder has a piston therein,
    the cylinder having absolute movement back and forth in a fixed straight
    line.

    (1)     Note.  This definition does not include motors in which the
    relative movement between the piston and cylinder includes any motion other
    than rectilinear reciprocation unless the additional relative movement is
    merely for the purpose of valving.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167+,   for expansible chamber motors having separately controlled plural
    chambers extensible as a unit wherein one of the chambers may be formed by
    a moving cylinder.


CLS 91/217
TXT Apparatus under subclass 216 in which the piston partakes of absolute back
    and forth movement in a fixed straight line.


CLS 91/218
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the motor has a cycle of
    operation in which the working member moves in one direction, reverses its
    direction of movement and returns to the original position, so as to be in
    condition to repeat the operation, and in which a distributor or other
    means, operated as a consequence of motor working member movement or cyclic
    change of pressure in a working chamber, is provided to control the flow of
    motive fluid so as to cause the motor, when started, to continuously repeat
    the cycle of operation.

    (1)     Note.  A motor, in which the described operation is cyclic, will be
    classified under this definition if (1) cyclic operation necessarily
    results from the structural relationship of the claimed motor elements
    (e.g., valveless motor), (2) an element of the fluid or mechanical
    connection between the working member and a cyclically operated
    distributing means is claimed, or (3) features, considered peculiar to
    cyclically operable motors, are claimed, specifically as follows:

    a.      Exhaust through a plurality of controlled exhaust flow paths, as
    defined in subclass 236, indented hereunder.

    b.      Adjustable timing control, as defined in subclass 247 indented
    hereunder.

    c.              Clearance control, as defined in subclass 245, indented
    hereunder.

    d.      Separate control of starting and stopping of fluid flow in inlet or
    exhaust flow path by plural control elements, as defined in subclass 264
    indented hereunder.

    e.      Exhaust control by lost motion drive of exhaust valve by inlet
    valve to provide delayed opening and/or closing of exhaust flow path with
    respect to inlet valve movement, as defined in subclass 267 indented
    hereunder.

    f.              Fluid flow control by correlated throttle valve and
    distributor as defined in subclass 246 indented hereunder.

    (2)     Note.  In a cyclically operable motor the term distributor is
    defined as a means which comprises or includes a part which is movable
    relative to the working member of the cyclically operable motor to control
    a motive fluid port or passage in such a manner as to cyclically control
    inlet and/or exhaust flow of motive fluid to or from the motor.  The
    distributor need not entirely cut off the motive fluid flow, but may
    cyclically control the amount of flow (i.e., throttling).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for expansible chamber motors including means to stop or control
    the motor after a predetermined number of cycles or revolutions.

    7,      for expansible chamber motors which are caused to operate
    cyclically by supplying fluid to a working chamber thereof through one path
    and caused to operate selectively through a partial or full stroke by
    supplying fluid to said working chamber through a different path.

    8+,     for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors of the
    semi-compound type.

    12+,    for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors having means to
    reverse the inlet and exhaust porting to cause reverse operation thereof.

    16+,    for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors which operate on
    low pressure fluid when drifting or coasting.

    39+,    for expansible chamber motors having independent means to drive the
    distributor to cause the motor to continuously reciprocate.

    50,     for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors in which motive
    fluid is constantly applied to a working chamber and controllably vented
    therefrom.

    152+,   for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors of the multiple
    expansion type.

    191+,   for expansible chamber motors having relatively movable working
    members in which each cyclically controls another (e.g., duplex).


CLS 91/219
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 having (1) means to bring the working member
    of the motor to a complete stop by controlling the motive fluid or to sense
    that the working member has stopped, (2) means to maintain said member
    stopped for a given period of time and (3) means to again cause the working
    member to move by controlling the motive fluid after expiration of said
    period of time.


CLS 91/220
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 including means to halt operation of the motor
    said means being responsive to a condition of operation of the motor or of
    the motive fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for motors having means to cut off or control the motor after a
    predetermined number of cycles of the working member.


CLS 91/221
TXT Apparatus under subclass 220 in which the condition sensed to stop the
    motor is the speed of operation of the motor or the failure of a driving
    connection between the motor and a speed regulating governor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    435,    for expansible chamber motors having a valve controlled in response
    to the speed of the motor and see the subclasses there noted for other
    speed controlled expansible chamber motors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 508 for speed responsive governors
    having governor drive failure responsive means.


CLS 91/222
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 in which a passage is provided entirely within
    the piston or piston rod for inlet or exhaust of motive fluid and a
    distributor movable relative to both the piston and cylinder is carried by
    the piston or piston rod and controls said passage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for expansible chamber motors having constantly applied motive
    fluid with controlled venting, in which the fluid is vented through the
    working member.

    312,    for cyclically operable motors having working member controlled
    motive fluid for a distributor motor, in which the distributor motor may
    include a valve piston.

    422,    for noncyclically operable motors having a valved piston.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 248 for expansible chamber type
    volume or rate of flow meters having a valved piston.


CLS 91/223
TXT Apparatus under subclass 222 in which the piston moves back and forth about
    an axis to describe an arc of not more than 360 degrees.

    (1)     Note.  The term "piston", as employed in the definition of this
    subclass, includes a vane swinging within a working chamber.


CLS 91/224
TXT Apparatus under subclass 222 in which the distributor controls a passage in
    the piston which is adapted to convey fluid through a working face of the
    piston to a face which is axially opposed.


CLS 91/225
TXT Apparatus under subclass 222 in which the distributor in the piston is
    operated by a fluid motor, and a port is provided in the working chamber
    side wall to convey inlet or exhaust for the distributor motor, the
    position of the piston controlling said port so as to control supply or
    exhaust for the distributor motor.


CLS 91/226
TXT Apparatus under subclass 222 in which the inlet or exhaust of motive fluid
    is through a port in the side wall of the working chamber which
    communicates with the distributor controlled passage which opens through
    the side of the piston.


CLS 91/227
TXT Apparatus under subclass 226 in which communication between the port in the
    working chamber and the passage in the piston is established and broken by
    relative reciprocation of the two members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225,    for a cyclically operable motor having a fluid operated distributor
    in the piston, said distributor being controlled by traversal of a pilot
    port in the cylinder wall.


CLS 91/228
TXT Apparatus under subclass 222 in which the piston is provided with
    relatively movable valves which control inlet and exhaust passages to and
    from a working chamber.


CLS 91/229
TXT Apparatus under subclass 222 in which the distributor is cyclically moved
    by a part thereof contacting the cylinder head in the working chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228,    for cyclically operable motors having separate distributors for
    inlet and exhaust in the piston, one of said distributors usually being
    moved by contacting the cylinder head in the working chamber.


CLS 91/230
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 in which plural working members acting in the
    same direction are provided with a separately controlled supply of motive
    fluid, said working members being (1) relatively movable or (2) connected
    to move together as a unit under all conditions of operation and which have
    different faces forming moving walls of different working chambers which
    are not in fluid communication during at least some part of a cycle of
    operation of the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  Motors in which one working chamber is constantly supplied
    and the second working chamber receives a controlled intermittent supply
    from the first working chamber are included under this definition.


CLS 91/231
TXT Apparatus under subclass 230 in which one of the plural working members
    acting in the same direction is controlled by a distributor.


CLS 91/232
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 in which closing and opening of fluid flow
    paths for cyclically admitting and exhausting motive fluid to and from an
    expansible chamber of the motor are accomplished by movement of the motor
    working member to and from positions in which it obstructs fluid flow
    through said flow paths, said flow paths not being further controlled by a
    cyclically operated valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230+,   for a cyclically operable motor having codirectional, separately
    supplied working members, the control of one working member usually being
    by valveless distribution.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 242 for volume or rate of flow
    meters of the expansible chamber type having valveless distribution of
    metered fluid.


CLS 91/233
TXT Apparatus under subclass 232 in which the motor is of the reciprocating
    type and means are provided to rotate or oscillate the working member about
    its own axis incident to reciprocation, the opening and closing of fluid
    flow paths being accomplished as a result of movement of the working member
    about its axis.


CLS 91/234
TXT Apparatus under subclass 232 in which a fluid flow path for cyclically
    admitting or exhausting motive fluid to or from an expansible chamber of
    the motor includes a fluid flow passage formed, at least in part, by a
    passage entirely within the motor working member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233,    for valveless cyclically operable expansible chamber motors of the
    reciprocating type, in which the working member is formed to provide a
    fluid flow passage and the working member is rotated or oscillated about
    its own axis to move said passage into and out of communication with
    another fluid flow passage to open and close a fluid flow path.


CLS 91/235
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 in which the motor is provided with a first
    working chamber which is constantly supplied with motive fluid, and a
    second working chamber acting in a direction opposite to the first working
    chamber, said second working chamber being supplied with distributor
    controlled motive fluid which is taken from the first working chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224,    for a cyclically operable motor having a distributor in a piston,
    in which the distributor establishes communication between opposed faces of
    the piston.

    321,    for other cyclically operable motors in which motive fluid is
    constantly applied to one working member face.

    417,    for noncyclically operable motors of the differential type in which
    motive fluid is constantly applied to one working member face.


CLS 91/236
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 in which there are provided a plurality of
    controlled (i.e., valved or working member position controlled) exhaust
    flow paths from a working chamber (i.e., exhausting), one of said flow
    paths constituting a second exhaust passage which provides for exhaust flow
    or continuation of exhaust flow after another of said flow paths has been
    closed, or provides a flow path, separate and distinct from another of said
    flow paths, for the removal of condensate from the expansible chamber in
    synchronism with movement of the working member of the motor.

    (1)     Note.  Plural exhaust passages which are simultaneously opened and
    closed and merely provide the equivalent operation of a single larger port
    are not considered to fall within this definition, even though they may
    incidentally remove condensate; however, plural passages one of which is
    specifically provided and arranged to remove condensate, even though opened
    and closed simultaneously with another exhaust passage are included.

    (2)     Note.  For purposes of this definition the term "second exhaust
    passage" is intended to designate that passage which provides exhaust flow
    after another exhaust flow path is closed, or which provides for condensate
    removal, irrespective of the relative sizes of the plurality of flow paths.

    (3)     Note.  Fluid which is conducted from the working chamber for a
    valve operating or other function ancillary to the operation of the motor,
    such as sealing, is not considered to be exhaust motive fluid under this
    definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290+,   for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors in which the
    working member traverses a pilot port in the working chamber side wall to
    provide actuating fluid for a distributor motor.

    449+,   for expansible chamber motors, other than those which are
    cyclically operable, having separately controlled waste passages for a
    single chamber.


CLS 91/237
TXT Apparatus under subclass 236 comprising a valve member which moves to
    cyclically control a first exhaust passage, said movable valve member
    having a second exhaust passage therein, and relatively movable means to
    open and close said second exhaust passage during different phases of the
    cycle of operation of the motor or under different conditions of operation
    of the motor.


CLS 91/238
TXT Apparatus under subclass 237 in which the relatively movable means which
    controls the second exhaust passage is moved to cause such control by
    pressure of fluid within the expansible chamber.


CLS 91/239
TXT Apparatus under subclass 236 in which a distributor is moved to cyclically
    control inlet of fluid to an expansible chamber, or to control exhaust of
    fluid from the expansible chamber through a first exhaust passage, and said
    distributor, or means rigidly attached thereto, directly controls the
    second exhaust passage.

    (1)     Note.  The second exhaust passage may be a passage which also acts
    as an admission passage for the expansible chamber.


CLS 91/240
TXT Apparatus under subclass 236 in which the second exhaust passage is
    provided with a valve which is moved to open or close said passage by fluid
    pressure acting on the valve or on its actuator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239,    for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors having multiple
    exhaust passages, in which the second exhaust passage is controlled by a
    fluid pressure actuated valve member, or a part rigidly attached thereto,
    which controls inlet of fluid or controls exhaust of fluid through a first
    exhaust passage.


CLS 91/241
TXT Apparatus under subclass 240 in which the second exhaust passage is
    connected to the motive fluid supply, and the valve which controls said
    second passage is biased to closed position by fluid supply pressure; said
    valve being opened by compression pressure within the working chamber which
    exceeds the supply pressure, to permit motive fluid to pass from the
    expansible chamber to the fluid supply.


CLS 91/242
TXT Apparatus under subclass 240 in which the valve is moved by pressure within
    or from the contracting chamber.

    (1)     Note.  The exhaust pressure may act on the valve or its actuator to
    operate the valve, or may act on means which varies, limits or prevents
    operation of the valve by other valve operating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241,    for a cyclically operable motor having a second exhaust passage
    controlled by a valve which is operated by compression actuated discharge
    to motive fluid supply.


CLS 91/243
TXT Apparatus under subclass 236 in which exhaust of motive fluid through an
    exhaust flow path is controlled by the motor working member uncovering an
    exhaust port, and exhaust of motive fluid through a second exhaust flow
    path is controlled by a valve operating in synchronism with motor operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239,    for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors having a working
    member controlled exhaust port with a valved second exhaust passage, in
    which the second passage is controlled by a valve member, or a part rigidly
    attached thereto, which controls inlet of fluid or controls exhaust of
    fluid through a first exhaust passage.


CLS 91/244
TXT Apparatus under subclass 236 in which a plurality of exhaust flow paths are
    each controlled by a different valve, said valves being movable to
    cyclically control fluid flow through the different flow paths, and also
    being relatively movable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237+,   for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors having multiple
    exhaust passages controlled by separate relatively movable valves, in which
    the relatively movable valves comprise a movable exhaust valve having a
    relatively movable valve controlling a second exhaust passage therein.

    240+,   for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors having multiple
    exhaust passages controlled by separate relatively movable valves, in which
    the valve for a second exhaust passage is fluid pressure actuated.

    242,    for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors having multiple
    exhaust passages controlled by separate relatively movable valves, in which
    the valve for a second exhaust passage is controlled by exhaust pressure.


CLS 91/245
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 which includes means by which the volume of
    the working chamber, when the working member has reached the end of its
    stroke in the direction which contracts said chamber may be varied without
    altering the length of stroke of the working member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 60.5, for expansible chamber
    devices having selective clearance control.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 48 for internal combustion
    engines having clearance control means.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 274+, for pumps having condition responsive
    clearance control.


CLS 91/246
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 in which a throttle valve and distributor are
    in series in a fluid flow path, the throttle valve controlling fluid flow
    to or from the motor, and in which the operating means for the throttle
    valve and distributor are so related that (1) the throttle valve is moved
    to vary the flow and the distributor is adjusted to vary the cycle of
    motive fluid distribution with respect to the working member movement
    cycle, in response to the same motor condition (e.g., speed) or to the same
    operation of a common control means, or (2) either the throttle valve, or
    distributor, is adjusted to vary the flow of motive fluid, or the cycle of
    motive fluid distribution with respect to the working member movement
    cycle, respectively, in response to the change of a condition (e.g.,
    pressure) resulting from the adjustment of the distributor or throttle
    valve respectively.

    (1)     Note.  The inherent variation in the speed of operation of a motive
    fluid actuated distributor resulting from a pressure change in the motive
    fluid due to throttle valve adjustment is not considered as a variation in
    the cycle of motive fluid distribution with respect to the working member
    movement cycle, under this definition.


CLS 91/247
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 in which an expansible chamber is provided
    with a distributor having (1) a plurality of fluid control elements each of
    which move to cyclically control the flow of motive fluid and which, in
    addition to such control movement, are relatively adjustable so as to vary
    the time of occurrence of a fluid control event with respect to the
    movement cycle of the motor working member, and with respect to the
    occurrence of another fluid control event, or (2) a relatively fixed, but
    adjustable, fluid control element which cooperates with a moving fluid
    control element to cyclically produce one or more but not all of the fluid
    control events, and is adjusted so as to vary the time of occurrence of a
    fluid control event produced by the cooperation of the relatively fixed and
    moving fluid control elements, with respect to the movement cycle of the
    motor working member and with respect to the occurrence of another fluid
    control event.

    (1)     Note.  A fluid control event is the occurrence of starting or
    stopping the flow of motive fluid to or from a working chamber of the
    motor.  Inlet of motive fluid is started by the occurrence of the
    "admission" event and is stopped by the occurrence of the "cut off" event.
    Exhaust of motive fluid is started by the occurrence of the "release" event
    and is stopped by the occurrence of the "compression" event.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    187,    for expansible chamber motors having adjustable means to change the
    timing of control events for plural relatively movable working members.

    246,    for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors having means to
    adjust the distributor for varying the cyclic control of motive fluid, the
    operation of said means being correlated with movement of a throttle valve.


CLS 91/248
TXT Apparatus under subclass 247 in which electrically operated means are
    provided to move or control the movement of a fluid control element, and
    adjustable electrical control means are provided to vary the operation of
    the electrically operated means so as to vary the timing of a fluid control
    event.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for expansible chamber motors having correlated control of motive
    fluid and working member locking means in which the correlated control is
    accomplished by electrical control means.

    275,    for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors having
    electrically actuated distributors, other than those which involve
    adjustable timing control of fluid control events as defined under subclass
    247.

    459,    for expansible chamber motors, other than those which are
    cyclically operable, which include electrically operated valves.


CLS 91/249
TXT Apparatus under subclass 247 in which there are provided plural fluid
    control elements which are separately adjustable relative to the movement
    cycle of the motor so as to control the time of occurrence of one of a
    plurality of adjustable events with respect to the time of occurrence of
    another of a plurality of adjustable events.


CLS 91/250
TXT Apparatus under subclass 249 in which the adjusting means provides for
    adjusting the time of occurrence of the starting or stopping of fluid flow
    to the working chamber and the starting or stopping of fluid flow from the
    working chamber.


CLS 91/251
TXT Apparatus under subclass 250 in which the adjusting means provides for
    adjustment of the time of occurrence of the starting and stopping of fluid
    flow to the motor working chamber, and the starting and stopping of fluid
    flow from the motor working chamber with respect to the motor working
    member movement cycle.


CLS 91/252
TXT Apparatus under subclass 247 in which the adjusting means provides for
    adjusting a fluid control element with respect to another fluid control
    element so as to vary the time of stopping of fluid flow to the motor
    working chamber, with respect to the working member movement cycle and with
    respect to the starting of flow to the motor working chamber.


CLS 91/253
TXT Apparatus under subclass 252 in which cyclic starting and stopping of
    motive fluid flow to the working chamber is controlled by valve means
    having a plurality of relatively cyclically moved fluid flow control
    elements, and in which means are provided to adjust a fluid flow control
    element which controls the stopping of fluid flow so as to vary the time of
    occurrence of the cut off event with respect to the working member movement
    cycle and with respect to the occurrence of the admission event.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264,    for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors in which starting
    and stopping of fluid flow to a motor working chamber are separately
    controlled by plural control elements, other than those which are
    adjustable to vary the timing of fluid control events as defined under
    subclass 247.


CLS 91/254
TXT Apparatus under subclass 253 in which the means to adjust the control
    element for stopping fluid flow include means to move or hold said element
    from its fluid flow stopping position against a biasing force tending to
    move it to said fluid flow stopping position and adjustable means to
    release said moving or holding means to allow said biasing force to move
    said element to its fluid flow stopping position so as to vary the time of
    occurrence of the cut-off event.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    260+,   for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors having adjustable
    trip means for a biased inlet valve means, other than the cut off element
    of a plural control element inlet valve, for varying the time of occurrence
    of the cut-off event.

    331,    for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors having
    independently operable means to adjust the connection between a working
    member and a distributing valve, other than those which adjust the timing
    of fluid control events as defined under subclass 247, in which the
    connection includes trip means.

    344+,   for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors in which a biased
    means moves a distributor after a predetermined travel, other than those
    which involve adjustable timing of fluid control events as defined under
    subclass 247.


CLS 91/255
TXT Apparatus under subclass 253 in which the means to adjust the control
    element for stopping motive fluid flow includes means cyclically moved by
    an actuating fluid to move the control element to or from its flow stopping
    position and adjustable means to control the actuating fluid flow so as to
    vary the time of occurrence of the cut-off event.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263,    for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors having adjustable
    fluid control for an inlet valve, other than the cut off element of a
    plural control element inlet valve, for varying the time of occurrence of
    the cut off event.

    281+,   for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors having working
    member controlled motive fluid supply for operating a distributor motor,
    other than those which adjust timing of fluid control events as defined
    under subclass 247.


CLS 91/256
TXT Apparatus under subclass 253 in which the means to adjust the control
    element for stopping fluid flow includes means to move, or to vary the
    movement of the control element with respect to a reciprocating admission
    control element so as to vary the time of occurrence of the cut-off event.


CLS 91/257
TXT Apparatus under subclass 256 in which the admission control element moves
    back and forth about an axis.


CLS 91/258
TXT Apparatus under subclass 256 in which the means to adjust the control
    element for stopping fluid flow includes means to move or vary the movement
    of said control element in a arcuate path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257,    for expansible chamber motors having a plural control element inlet
    valve means in which an admission control element oscillates about an axis
    and the cut off control element is accurately adjustable.


CLS 91/259
TXT Apparatus under subclass 256 in which the means to adjust the control
    element for stopping fluid flow includes means to move or vary the movement
    of said control element in a direction parallel to or in alignment with the
    linear direction of movement of an admission control element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257,    for expansible chamber motors having a plural control element inlet
    valve means in which an admission control element oscillates about an axis
    and the cut off control element is adjustable about the same axis.


CLS 91/260
TXT Apparatus under subclass 252 in which a releasable drive means, or a
    releasable latch, is provided to cyclically open or hold open,
    respectively, the inlet valve against a biasing force tending to move said
    valve to a closed position, and in which adjustable means are provided to
    release said drive means or said latch to allow the biasing force to close
    said valve, so as to vary the time of closing of the inlet valve means with
    respect to the motor movement cycle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254,    for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors having adjustable
    trip means for a biased cut-off element of a plural control element inlet
    valve for varying the time of occurrence of the cut-off event.

    331,    for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors having
    independently operable means to adjust the connection between working
    member and a distributing valve, other than those which adjust the timing
    of fluid control events as defined under subclass 247, in which the
    connection includes trip means.

    344+,   for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors in which a biased
    means moves a distributor after a predetermined travel, other than those
    which involve adjustable timing of fluid control events as defined under
    subclass 247.


CLS 91/261
TXT Apparatus under subclass 260 in which the inlet valve is moved about an
    axis by said driving means and said biasing force to open and close the
    inlet fluid flow path.


CLS 91/262
TXT Apparatus under subclass 252 in which the inlet valve is cyclically moved,
    to control the flow of motive fluid to the working chamber, by cam means,
    and means are provided to adjust the cam means, or a valve driving member
    moved by the cam means, so as to vary the time of closing of the inlet
    valve.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this definition, a shaft mounted eccentric
    and its strap and rod, are not considered to be a cam and cam follower.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    330+,   for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors with means to
    adjust the connection between the working member and the distributing
    valve, other than those which adjust timing of fluid control events as
    defined under subclass 247, and especially subclasses 331+ for such
    adjustable connections which include a cam.


CLS 91/263
TXT Apparatus under subclass 252 in which the inlet valve is cyclically moved
    to control the flow of motive fluid to the working chamber by working
    member controlled actuating fluid, and means are provided to adjust the
    control of the inlet valve actuating fluid so as to vary the time of
    closing of the inlet valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247+,   for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors having
    independent inlet and exhaust valves each movable about an axis in which
    there is provided means to adjust relatively adjustable fluid control
    elements to vary the timing of fluid control events, especially subclasses
    252+ for such motors which include adjustable plural control element inlet
    valves to vary the timing of the cut off element, and subclass 261 for such
    motors which include a biased inlet valve movable about an axis and
    provided with adjustable trip means to vary the timing of the fluid control
    event.

    255,    for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors having adjustable
    fluid control for a fluid actuated cut off element of a plural fluid
    control element inlet valve, so as to vary the time of occurrence of the
    cut off event.

    266,    for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors employing
    oscillating working members and which may include valves which move about
    an axis.

    281+,   for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors having working
    member controlled motive fluid supply for operating a distributor motor,
    other than those which adjust timing of fluid control events as defined
    under subclass 247.

    352,    and see the subclasses there noted for other distributors movable
    about an axis.


CLS 91/264
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 including at least two distributors through
    which the motive fluid must pass serially in the course of flowing either
    to the working chamber or exhausting from the working chamber, each
    distributor having a cyclically moved flow controlling element so arranged
    that the control of motive fluid by the distributors is effected by the
    movement of one distributor relative to the movable element of another
    distributor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247+,   for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors having plural
    fluid control elements for separately starting and stopping of fluid flow
    to or from the working chamber in which means are provided for adjusting a
    fluid control element with respect to another fluid control element to vary
    the time of occurrence of fluid control events, and especially subclasses
    253+ for such motors which have plural fluid control element inlet valve
    means with means to adjust the control element which stops fluid flow so as
    to vary the timing of the cut-off event.

    444,    for expansible chamber motors of other than the cyclically operable
    type having relatively movable serial valves.


CLS 91/265
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 in which the distributor comprises movable
    inlet and exhaust valve means for controlling motive fluid flow to and from
    an expansible chamber, said valve means cyclically moving relative to one
    another as a consequence of operation of the motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222+,   for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors having
    independent inlet and exhaust valves, one of which is provided to control a
    motive fluid passage entirely within the piston or piston rod, and
    especially subclass 228 for such motors in which the piston carries
    separate inlet and exhaust valves.

    236+,   for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors having multiple
    exhaust passages for an expansible chamber, one of which exhausts, or
    continues to exhaust after another is closed.

    247+,   for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors having movable
    relatively adjustable plural fluid control elements with means to adjust
    said elements so as to vary the timing of fluid control events.

    325,    for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors having a movable
    inlet or exhaust valve and a working member controlled exhaust or inlet
    port, respectively.

    330+,   for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors with
    independently operable means to move or adjust movement of the distributor.

    454+,   for expansible chamber motors, other than those which are
    cyclically operable, having relatively movable inlet and exhaust valves for
    a single chamber.


CLS 91/266
TXT Apparatus under subclass 265 in which the working member moves back and
    forth about an axis to describe an arc of not more than 360 degrees.


CLS 91/267
TXT Apparatus under subclass 265 in which the inlet and exhaust valve means
    move in a back and forth motion to cyclically open and close, respectively,
    the inlet and exhaust flow paths, the exhaust valve means being moved by
    the inlet valve means during a portion of the movement of the inlet valve
    means, and having a lost motion connection therewith, to provide a delay in
    the opening and/or closing of the exhaust flow path with respect to closing
    and/or opening movement of the inlet valve means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    457,    for expansible chamber motors, other than cyclically operable,
    having relatively movable inlet and exhaust valves for a single chamber,
    which valves are movable by a single actuating means.


CLS 91/268
TXT Apparatus under subclass 265 in which cyclic admission of motive fluid is
    provided by operation of the inlet valve means and exhaust is provided by
    opening of an exhaust valve which is cyclically moved to or held in its
    closed position by pressure or flow of the motive fluid cyclically admitted
    by the inlet valve means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    442,    for expansible chamber motors, other than cyclically operable,
    having a self opening exhaust valve held closed by inlet pressure.


CLS 91/269
TXT Apparatus under subclass 265 in which a releasable drive means is provided
    to cyclically open the inlet and/or exhaust valve means against a resisting
    force, and means are provided to release said drive means to allow said
    force to close the valve means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247+,   for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors having movable
    relatively adjustable plural fluid control elements with means to adjust
    said elements so as to vary the timing of fluid control events, and
    especially subclasses 254 and 260+ for such motors in which the cut off is
    adjustable by means of biased valve means with adjustable trip means.

    338,    for other cyclically operable motors having trip type biased
    distributors.


CLS 91/270
TXT Apparatus under subclass 265 in which the inlet and exhaust valve means are
    each movable about an axis to cyclically control inlet and exhaust flow of
    motive fluid to and from a motor working chamber.


CLS 91/271
TXT Apparatus under subclass 265 in which the inlet and exhaust valve means
    each moves in a back and forth motion to cyclically control inlet and
    exhaust of motive fluid to and from a motor working chamber.


CLS 91/272
TXT Apparatus under subclass 271 in which the path of reciprocating movement of
    both the inlet and exhaust valve means is in alignment with or parallel to
    the path of movement of the motor working member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228,    for a cyclically operable motor having a piston which carries
    relatively movable valves for inlet and exhaust, said valves usually moving
    relative to the piston codirectional to the movement of the piston.


CLS 91/273
TXT Apparatus under subclass 272 in which the inlet and exhaust valve means are
    of the type in which a valve member moves perpendicularly to or from its
    seat to close or open the fluid flow path.


CLS 91/274
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 in which the motor is operated by motive fluid
    pressure applied to opposing faces of a working member, and in which means
    are provided to controllably vary the fluid handling capacity of either an
    inlet or exhaust passage to or from one of the working faces, without
    affecting the fluid handling capacity of the corresponding passage to or
    from the opposite working face.


CLS 91/275
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 in which the distributor or distributor
    actuating means includes an element which is operated by an electric
    current or a magnetic field.

    (1)     Note.  Electrical or magnetic adjustment of the distributor is
    included under this definition, even though the cyclic operation may be by
    other than electrical or magnetic means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248,    for cyclically operable motors having electrical adjustment of
    timing control by relative adjustment of plural movable fluid control
    elements.

    459,    for motors of other than the cyclically operable type having
    electrically operated valves.


CLS 91/276
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 in which the distributor comprises a movable
    fluid control element which is arranged so as to completely encompass the
    working member in a plane transverse to the reciprocatory path of said
    working member, the working member reciprocating relative to the fluid
    control element, and the fluid control element forming a portion of the
    working chamber wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173,    for expansible chamber motors wherein a working member forms a
    movable chamber for another and also forms a movable distributor therefor.

    423,    for a motive fluid valve which forms a movable chamber wall portion
    traversed by a working member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclass 509 for expansible chamber pumps in which the pump
    fluid is controlled by a valve means which is formed by a movable portion
    of the pump chamber wall traversed by the pumping member.


CLS 91/277
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 in which the distributor or distributor
    actuating means includes selectively operable means to adjustably cause the
    working member to reverse at two different extents of movement in one
    direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247+,   for adjustable timing control for fluid control events.

    284+,   for a cyclically operable motor having independent means to adjust
    a distributor supply or exhaust passage, such means not necessarily
    changing the length of stroke of the output motor working member.

    330+,   for independently operable means to move or adjust movement of a
    distributor.


CLS 91/278
TXT Apparatus under subclass 277 in which diverse flow paths are provided for
    supply or exhaust to or from a distributor motor working chamber, and the
    selectively operable means determines the path of flow to adjustably
    control the point of reversal of the output motor working member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    283,    for a cyclically operably motor having independently operable means
    to control fluid supply through diverse paths to a distributor motor
    chamber, such control not necessarily changing the length of stroke of the
    output motor working member.


CLS 91/279
TXT Apparatus under subclass 277 in which the selectively operable means
    comprises a lost motion connection between the working member and the
    distributor, the amount of lost motion being adjustable.


CLS 91/280
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 in which the distributor is cyclically
    actuated by a substantially constant mass of fluid forming a fluid link
    between a valve actuating surface and an actuated surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    460,    for pulsator actuated valves for motors of the noncyclically
    operable type.


CLS 91/281
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 in which the working member position controls
    or varies the supply or exhaust of motive fluid for a motor which
    cyclically moves the distributor.

    (1)     Note.  Since this definition deals with at least two fluid operated
    motors, the output motor and a motor operating the means controlling the
    distribution of motive fluid to the output motor, the titles and
    definitions of the indented subclass elements of the output motor will be
    specified as output motor elements or merely motor elements while the term
    "distributor" will preceed the motor elements operating the means
    controlling the distribution of motive fluid to the output motor.

    (2)     Note.  A motor is included under this definition as controlling
    distributor motive fluid in response to position even though the
    distributor is reversed solely by a change in pressure in the working
    chamber as a result, for example, of the working member compressing fluid
    in the working chamber, or due to a build-up of motive fluid at the end of
    the stroke of the working member.  Such position of reversal will normally
    remain constant with a consistent load and uniform motive fluid supply, but
    the position may change if the load or supply varies.

    (3)     Note.  The motor which moves the distributor under this definition
    may be merely an integral face of the distributor which is subjected to
    fluid pressure to shift the distributor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155,    for a multiple expansion expansible chamber fluid motor having a
    fluid acutated distributor.

    189+,   for relatively movable working members in which one controls
    another.

    191+,   for an expansible chamber fluid motor having plural working members
    in which the position of each cyclically controls another, and particularly
    subclass 193 for a fluid actuated valve controlled by a relatively movable
    working member.

    278,    for selectively usable distributor reversal passages for a fluid
    operated distributor.


CLS 91/282
TXT Apparatus under subclass 281 in which the distributor motor working chamber
    is provided with inlet motive fluid which is supplied from different
    sources at different times or flows through supply paths that are different
    at the will of the operator or under different operating conditions so as
    to supply force to act on the same face of the working member at different
    times.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6+,     for fluid supply through diverse flow paths to a single expansible
    chamber of an expansible chamber fluid motor.


CLS 91/283
TXT Apparatus under subclass 282 in which a manually operable means is provided
    to separately control one of the sources or paths.


CLS 91/284
TXT Apparatus under subclass 281 in which a manually operable means is provided
    to selectively vary the flow carrying capacity of a passage which supplies
    fluid to or exhausts fluid from a fluid operated distributor motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225,    for a cyclically operable motor having a distributor in the piston,
    and in which the piston traverses a pilot port to control distributor motor
    motive fluid.

    263,    for a cyclically operable motor having timing control by relative
    adjustment of plural movable fluid control elements in which cutoff is
    adjustable relative to admission, and involving adjustable fluid control
    for fluid actuated inlet valve.


CLS 91/285
TXT Apparatus under subclass 284 in which the means varies the supply or
    exhaust passage for one chamber of a double acting distributor motor
    without affecting the supply or exhaust for the opposed chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    274,    for a cyclically operable expansible chamber fluid motor having an
    independent throttle adjustment for one side of a double acting motor.


CLS 91/286
TXT Apparatus under subclass 281 in which a mechanical linkage or transmission
    connected to or engaged by the output motor working member moves the
    distributor motor working member, such movement controlling a port
    supplying fluid to or exhausting fluid from the distributor motor working
    chamber to cause an additional fluid powered movement of the distributor
    motor working member.


CLS 91/287
TXT Apparatus under subclass 286 in which the movement of the distributor motor
    working member which is caused mechanically moves a relatively movable
    valve means which controls the distributor motor supply or exhaust port.

    (1)     Note.  The relatively movable means may comprise a distributor
    which also controls supply or exhaust for the output motor.


CLS 91/288
TXT Apparatus under subclass 286 in which the mechanically caused movement of
    the distributor is about an axis, followed by a fluid actuated movement
    which may or may not be the same type as the mechanically caused movement.

    (1)     Note.  The fluid actuated movement is usually parallel to the axis
    of rotation of the rotary movement.


CLS 91/289
TXT Apparatus under subclass 281 in which a manually operable means is provided
    to (1) adjust a means such as a brake or dash pot to control rate of
    movement of the distributor working member or (2) hold the distributor
    motor in a predetermined position.


CLS 91/290
TXT Apparatus under subclass 281 in which a passage is provided to convey
    motive fluid to or convey exhaust fluid from a distributor motor working
    chamber, said passage receiving motive fluid from the output motor working
    chamber or receiving exhaust fluid from the distributor motor working
    chamber and being connected to a port in the output motor working chamber
    wall which is controlled by the reciprocatory motion of the output motor
    working member.

    (1)     Note.  The "distributor motor" under this definition may be a motor
    operating a pilot valve for the motor which operates the distributor.


CLS 91/291
TXT Apparatus under subclass 290 in which the port in the output motor working
    chamber controls a pilot valve motor which further controls the motor
    operating the distributor for the output motor.


CLS 91/292
TXT Apparatus under subclass 291 in which the distributor or distributor
    working member further controls the passage leading from the output motor
    working chamber to the pilot valve motor.


CLS 91/293
TXT Apparatus under subclass 290 in which a cyclically operated valve controls
    the passage from the output motor working chamber to the distributor motor
    working chamber.


CLS 91/294
TXT Apparatus under subclass 293 in which the cyclically operated valve is
    operated by a fluid motor the fluid supply or exhaust of which is
    controlled separately from the distributor motor supply.

    (1)     Note.  The pilot valve motor supply or exhaust is usually
    controlled by the distributor motor working member.


CLS 91/295
TXT Apparatus under subclass 290 in which the output motor working member
    controls separate ports in the working chamber wall, said ports conveying
    fluid in such a manner as to cause relative movement of plural distributor
    motors.


CLS 91/296
TXT Apparatus under subclass 290 in which the distributor motor working chamber
    is constantly connected to exhaust, said exhaust being throttled with
    relation to controlled supply through the working member controlled port to
    cause distributor cyclic operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     for expansible chamber fluid motors having constantly open
    throttled exhaust with controlled motive fluid supply.


CLS 91/297
TXT Apparatus under subclass 290 in which the output motor working member is
    provided with a passage to convey fluid to or from the distributor motor
    working chamber.

    (1)     Note.  The passage in the working member is not necessarily
    entirely within the working member but may be formed by cooperation with
    the working chamber wall.

    (2)     Note.  The passage in the working member need not necessarily
    communicate with the pilot port in the output motor working chamber side
    wall.


CLS 91/298
TXT Apparatus under subclass 297 in which the passage in the output motor
    working member supplies inlet motive fluid to the distributor working
    chamber.


CLS 91/299
TXT Apparatus under subclass 290 in which the distributor motor working member
    is moved in one direction by fluid compressed in the output motor working
    chamber by the movement of the output motor working member.


CLS 91/300
TXT Apparatus under subclass 290 in which the distributor motor working member
    is moved in one direction by motive fluid which is continuously applied to
    the distributor motor working member.


CLS 91/301
TXT Apparatus under subclass 290 in which the distributor motor working member
    controls a port in the distributor motor working chamber which conveys
    fluid to or from the distributor motor working chamber.

    (1)     Note.  The distributor motor working member controlled port need
    not actually convey fluid to move said working member, but may merely
    convey fluid for the purpose of retaining the working member in a reversed
    position.


CLS 91/302
TXT Apparatus under subclass 290 in which the pilot port conducts exhaust fluid
    from the distributor motor working chamber into the output motor working
    chamber, said output motor working chamber being exhausted through a port
    in the wall thereof which is controlled by the position of the output motor
    working member.


CLS 91/303
TXT Apparatus under subclass 281 in which the distributor is adapted to be
    moved cyclically solely by mechanical connection with the output motor
    working member (1) in one direction of movement for each complete cycle of
    operation or (2) as a safety measure to insure the continuous operation of
    the motor, even if the fluid operated distributor motor fails to properly
    function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286+,   for a cyclically operable motor having a distributor or distributor
    motor mechanically moved cyclically to control actuating fluid for the
    distributor motor.


CLS 91/304
TXT Apparatus under subclass 281 in which a fluid passage is controlled by a
    relatively movable valve in response to movement of the output motor
    working member to a predetermined position to cyclically connect the
    distributor motor working chamber to exhaust or motive fluid supply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290+,   for a cyclically operable motor in which the working member
    traverses a pilot port in the working chamber side wall to control motive
    fluid supply for a distributor motor, and particularly subclasses 291+ for
    a motor in which the pilot port controls a separate motor for an
    intermediate pilot valve and subclasses 293+ for a motor in which the
    passage from the port is controlled by a pilot valve.

    461,    for pilot valves for motors of the noncyclically operable type.


CLS 91/305
TXT Apparatus under subclass 304 in which the distributor motor is controlled
    by plural, relatively movable pilot valves, either in series or parallel.


CLS 91/306
TXT Apparatus under subclass 305 in which each pilot valve controls the
    distributor motor independent of the movement of any other pilot valve.

    (1)     Note.  Under this definition, pilot valves are considered to be
    independent if one pilot valve controls the distributor motor working
    member to move in one direction and another pilot valve controls the
    distributor motor working member to move in the opposite direction.


CLS 91/307
TXT Apparatus under subclass 304 in which the pilot valve controls the exhaust
    of motive fluid from the distributor motor working chamber, said chamber
    being constantly supplied with motive fluid under all conditions of
    operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51+,    for motors having a working chamber which is constantly supplied
    with motive fluid and having a controlled vent or exhaust passage from said
    chamber.


CLS 91/308
TXT Apparatus under subclass 304 in which the pilot valve is moved by a fluid
    operated motor controlled by position of the output motor working member or
    pressure in the output motor working chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291+,   for cyclically operable motors having working member controlled
    motive fluid for a distributor motor in which the working member traverses
    a pilot port in the working chamber side wall, and in which said port
    controls a separate motor for an intermediate pilot valve.

    294,    for cyclically operable motors having working member controlled
    motive fluid for a distributor motor in which the working member traverses
    a pilot port in the working chamber side wall, and in which said port is
    further controlled by a pilot valve moved by a separately controlled fluid
    motor.

    305+,   for a cyclically operable motor having a working member controlled
    motive fluid supply for a distributor motor, and including plural pilot
    valves, one or more of which may be fluid actuated.


CLS 91/309
TXT Apparatus under subclass 304 in which the distributor motor working member
    is moved in one direction by continuously applied fluid pressure and in the
    opposing direction by fluid under control of the pilot valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300,    for a cyclically operable motor in which the distributor is moved
    in one direction by constantly supplied motive fluid, and in the opposite
    direction by fluid supplied through a working member controlled port in the
    working chamber side wall.


CLS 91/310
TXT Apparatus under subclass 304 in which the pilot valve is cyclically moved
    about an axis.


CLS 91/311
TXT Apparatus under subclass 304 in which the pilot valve is given a cyclic
    movement which is not substantially parallel to the reciprocatory path of
    movement of the output motor working member.


CLS 91/312
TXT Apparatus under subclass 304 in which a distributor motor motive fluid
    supply or exhaust port is provided in the distributor motor working member
    and said port is controlled by relative movement between said working
    member and the pilot valve.


CLS 91/313
TXT Apparatus under subclass 304 in which means transmitting cyclic motion from
    the output motor working member to the pilot valve includes an element
    which moves relative to the working member and extends into the working
    chamber.


CLS 91/314
TXT Apparatus under subclass 304 in which means transmitting cyclic motion from
    the output motor working member to the pilot valve includes an element
    moved relative to both the working member and pilot valve at least once
    during each cycle of operation.


CLS 91/315
TXT Apparatus under subclass 281 in which the distributor is cyclically moved
    about an axis.


CLS 91/316
TXT Apparatus under subclass 281 in which the distributor is given a cyclic
    movement which is not substantially parallel to the reciprocatory path of
    movement of the output motor working member.


CLS 91/317
TXT Apparatus under subclass 281 in which the distributor motor working member
    is moved by fluid compressed in the output motor working chamber by the
    movement of the output motor working member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    299,    for cyclically operable motors having a distributor motor
    controlled by fluid from an output motor working member controlled port in
    a working chamber side wall, and including operation of the distributor
    motor by fluid compressed by the output motor working member in the output
    motor working chamber.


CLS 91/318
TXT Apparatus under subclass 281 in which the reaching of the terminus of a
    stroke of the output motor working member results in increase of pressure
    in the working chamber due to continued supply of motive fluid without
    working member movement, the increase of pressure in the working chamber
    causing the distributor motor to shift the distributor to reverse the
    direction of movement of the output motor working member.


CLS 91/319
TXT Apparatus under subclass 281 in which fluid communication through a motive
    fluid supply or exhaust passage for a fluid actuated distributor motor is
    cyclically connected and disconnected by the output motor working member
    which acts directly as a valve for said passage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225,    for a cyclically operable motor having a distributor in the piston,
    and in which the piston traverses a pilot port to control distributor motor
    motive fluid.

    290+,   for working member traversal of a pilot port in the working chamber
    side wall to cyclically control a fluid actuated distributor motor by
    supplying distributing motor actuating fluid from or exhausting
    distributing motor actuating fluid to a working chamber of the output
    motor, and particularly subclasses 297+ for such structure combined with a
    passage for pilot fluid in the working member.


CLS 91/320
TXT Apparatus under subclass 319 in which the working member comprises a piston
    having opposed working faces and a passage on or in the piston between the
    opposed working faces, the distributor motor fluid being conveyed to or
    from the distributor motor working chamber by said passage.


CLS 91/321
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 in which motive fluid is continuously supplied
    to one chamber to act constantly on a working member of a motor during
    recurring cycles thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224,    for cyclically operable motors having a distributor in the piston,
    and in which the distributor establishes communication between opposed
    faces, one face of which is usually constantly supplied.

    235,    for a cyclically operable motor having opposed working faces, and
    in which one working chamber receives a controlled motive fluid supply from
    an opposed chamber having a constant supply.  NOTE SECTION IV OF THE CLASS
    DEFINITION AND THE PARAGRAPH FOLLOWING THE TITLE IN THE SCHEDULE OF THIS
    CLASS.

    417,    for noncyclically operable motors having motive fluid constantly
    applied to one working member face.


CLS 91/322
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 including means operable independent of
    working member movement to positively hold the distributor in set position
    relative to the ports in the valve seat with which the distributor normally
    cooperates to control the motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41+,    for correlated control of motive fluid and lock means for an
    expansible chamber fluid motor.

    289,    for working member controlled motive fluid supply for a distributor
    motor combined with means to lock the motor.


CLS 91/323
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 in which the motor comprises opposed working
    chambers and separate distributors for the working chambers, said
    distributors being free of one another to cyclically relatively move during
    operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    265,    for relatively movable inlet and exhaust valves for a single
    expansible chamber.


CLS 91/324
TXT Apparatus under subclass 323 in which at least one of the distributors is
    cyclically moved about an axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    352,    and see the subclasses there noted for other distributors which
    move about an axis.


CLS 91/325
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 in which inlet or exhaust of motive fluid is
    controlled by the motor working member uncovering a motive fluid inlet or
    exhaust port which is not further controlled by a cyclically operated valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184,    for a motor having relatively movable working members with one
    movable interconnected with another to cause relative motion in which a
    working member covers a port to control motive fluid.

    232+,   for a motor in which both the inlet and exhaust are controlled
    solely by the piston overrunning or uncovering inlet and exhaust ports.

    302,    for a cyclically operable motor having working member controlled
    motive fluid supply for a distributor motor in which the working member
    traverses a pilot passage in the working chamber side wall, the pilot port
    being relieved into a chamber having a working member controlled exhaust
    port.


CLS 91/326
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 in which the distributor is moved in a first
    direction (e.g., about an axis), and also in another direction which is not
    substantially parallel to the first direction.

    (1)     Note.  For classification under this definition one direction of
    movement is cyclic and the other may or may not be cyclic (e.g., may be for
    the purpose of a throttling adjustment which is not necessarily cyclically
    changed).


CLS 91/327
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 in which the distributor is moved about an
    axis which extends substantially parallel to the axis of reciprocation of
    the motor working member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    352,    and see the subclasses there noted for other distributors which
    move about an axis.


CLS 91/328
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 in which the distributor and the motor piston
    have approximately the same cross-sectional configuration so as to
    cooperate with common cylindrical walls of the motor cylinder, the
    distributor being located either in a working chamber or in a space formed
    between opposed working member faces.


CLS 91/329
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 in which the distributor is located within the
    periphery of a cylinder defined by spaced working member faces, and within
    the space between the faces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222+,   for a cyclically operable motor having a distributor in the piston.


CLS 91/330
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 in which means are provided to (1) move a
    distributor independently of motor operation or (2) adjust movement of a
    distributor relative to the movement of the working member either
    independently of or in response to a condition of motor operation.

    (1)     Note.  This definition includes any means to cause or permit the
    adjustment of the distributor such as a relatively adjustable joint or
    connection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39+,    for independent distributor actuation for cyclic control.

    187+,   for relatively movable working member with means interconnecting
    working members to cause relative motion in which means is provided to vary
    cyclic relation of distributor to working member.

    247+,   for timing control for a cyclically operable motor by relative
    adjustment of plural movable fluid control elements.

    277+,   for adjustable working member reversal position for a cyclically
    operable motor.

    282+,   for fluid supply through diverse paths to cyclically operable
    working member controlled distributor motor chamber, which paths may be
    independently controllable.

    284+,   for independent means to adjust the distributor motor supply or
    exhaust passage of a working member controlled distributor of a cyclically
    operable motor.

    289+,   for adjustable means to retard or lock a cyclically operable,
    working member controlled distributor motor.

    478,    for motors having three or more cylinders arranged in parallel,
    radial, or conical relationship with a rotary transmission axis and in
    which there is provided separate motive fluid control for each working
    chamber and means for varying the cyclic members and its associated control
    valve.

    482+,   for motors having three or more cylinders arranged in parallel,
    radial, or conical relationship with a rotary transmission axis and means
    for varying the cyclic relation between at least one of said reciprocating
    members and its associated control valve.


CLS 91/331
TXT Apparatus under subclass 330 in which a mechanical means connects the
    working member to the distributor, and the mechanical means is manipulated
    or adjusted to move or control movement of the distributor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    187,    for relatively movable working members with means interconnecting
    working members to cause relative motion in which means is provided to vary
    cyclic relation of distributor to working member.

    277,    for a cyclically operable motor having means to adjust the working
    member reversal position, and which generally involves an adjustment of the
    motion transmission from the working member to the distributor.

    478,    for motors having three or more cylinders arranged in parallel,
    radial, or conical relationship with a rotary transmission axis and in
    which there is provided separate motive fluid control for each working
    chamber and means for varying the cyclic relation between at least one of
    said reciprocating members and its associated control valve.

    482+,   for motors having three or more cylinders arranged in parallel,
    radial, or conical relationship with a rotary transmission axis and means
    for varying the cyclic relation between at least one of said reciprocating
    members and its associated control valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 828+ for an alternating
    motion driven device with means operable during operation to adjust length
    of and/or displace stroke, and including many such devices which are
    described as operating expansible chamber motor valves.


CLS 91/332
TXT Apparatus under subclass 331 in which the mechanical means is manipulated
    or adjusted by a motor.


CLS 91/333
TXT Apparatus under subclass 331 in which the manipulating or adjusting means
    is operated in response to a means, (e.g., governor) sensing a speed
    condition of the motor.


CLS 91/334
TXT Apparatus under subclass 331 in which the manipulation or adjustment of the
    mechanical means results in causing a shaft forming part of the mechanical
    means (generally the output shaft of the motor) to change direction of
    continuous unidirectional rotation.


CLS 91/335
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 including (1) a valve positioned in the motor
    inlet or exhaust line which is operable independently of motor operation to
    selectively vary the fluid handling capacity thereof or (2) a distributor
    which is selectively adjustable either by being composed of plural
    relatively adjustable parts or cooperating in a different manner with a
    controlled port to vary the fluid handling capacity of the distributor for
    one complete cycle of motor operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247+,   for a cyclically operable motor having adjustable timing control
    for fluid control events.

    265+,   for a cyclically operable motor having relatively adjustable inlet
    and exhaust valves.

    274,    for a cyclically operable motor having an independent throttle
    adjustment for one side of double acting motor.

    326,    for a cyclically operable motor having a distributor which moves
    transverse and parallel to the same line, one of the movements of which may
    comprise a distributor throttle adjustment.

    330,    for a cyclically operable motor having independently operable means
    to move or adjust movement of distributor.


CLS 91/336
TXT Apparatus under subclass 335 in which a means sensing a speed condition of
    the motor comprises a means to directly operate the (1) valve to vary inlet
    or exhaust or (2) means to adjust the distributor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221,    for a cyclically operable motor having speed condition responsive
    stop means.

    333,    for a cyclically operable motor having speed responsive control
    means to adjust the motion transmission from the working member to the
    distributor.


CLS 91/337
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 including a means which does not cause cyclic
    distributor movement but functions to positively hold or hold a distributor
    part against movement until a predetermined force tending to cause movement
    is attained, said means being released at least once for each cycle of the
    motor to permit distributor movement.


CLS 91/338
TXT Apparatus under subclass 337 in which the holding means is adapted to
    positively hold the distributor regardless of the degree of force applied
    by the distributor, it being necessary to remove the holding means by a
    means movable relative to the distributor before distributor reversal may
    occur.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254,    for cyclically operable motors having plural movable fluid control
    elements to provide timing cutoff adjustment relative to admission in which
    the fluid control elements include a biased cutoff with an adjustable trip.

    269,    for cyclically operable motors having relatively movable inlet and
    exhaust valves at least one of which is biased with a trip means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 251 for expansible chamber type
    volume or rate of flow meters having trip type valve gear.


CLS 91/339
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 in which the working member moves back and
    forth about an axis to describe an arc of not more than 360 degrees.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177,    223 and 266, for expansible chamber motors having oscillating
    working members in organizations of the type provided therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 67 for organizations which
    include relatively moving, oscillating working members and; subclasses 120+
    for oscillating working members, per se, or for cylinders adapted to
    cooperate therewith.


CLS 91/340
TXT Apparatus under subclass 339 having a part continuously rotated in a single
    direction by a working member and a distributor actuated by said part to
    control the flow of motive fluid for said working member.


CLS 91/341
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 in which means transmitting cyclic motion from
    the working member to the distributor includes an element which moves
    relative to the working member and extends into the working chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    276,    for cyclically operable motors in which the distributor forms a
    traversed, movable portion of the working chamber side wall, the
    distributor being usually reversed by contact with the working member.

    313,    for cyclically operable motors having a working member controlled
    motive fluid supply for a distributor motor in which a pilot valve actuator
    extends into the working chamber.

    348+,   for motors in which the working member includes spaced working
    surfaces, and in which the distributor actuating means includes a member
    contacting the working member and movable relative thereto and positioned
    between said spaced working surfaces.


CLS 91/342
TXT Apparatus under subclass 341 in which the means extending into the working
    chamber cyclically relatively moves through an opening in a working face of
    the working member which comprises a piston.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229,    for a cyclically operable motor having a distributor in the piston
    which is actuated by abutment with the cylinder head.


CLS 91/343
TXT Apparatus under subclass 341 in which the means extending into the working
    chamber is given a cyclic movement which is not substantially parallel to
    the reciprocatory path of movement of the working member.


CLS 91/344
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 in which a means adapted to store kinetic
    energy, such as a weight or spring, is moved a distance as a consequence of
    working member movement to store such energy, followed by the release of
    such energy to reverse, or complete the reversal of the distributor
    regardless of whether the working member continues to move or not.

    (1)     Note.  A motor, in which a distributor reversing element is
    initially restrained to store kinetic energy solely by motive fluid which
    the distributor controls, is classified under this definition only if the
    motive fluid causes such restraint by acting upon an element which is
    movable relative to the distributor.  Motors having reversing elements
    which store kinetic energy as a result of an unbalanced action of motive
    fluid upon the distributor are classified on other features.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286+,   for working member controlled motive fluid for distributor motor in
    which the distributor motor is mechanically moved cyclically to control
    actuating fluid supply.


CLS 91/345
TXT Apparatus under subclass 344 in which the distributor is cyclically moved
    about an axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    352,    and see the subclasses there noted for other distributors which
    move about an axis.

    339,    for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors having
    oscillating working members and which include distributors whose motion
    about an axis is influenced by a bias means which varies as a function of
    the distributor position.


CLS 91/346
TXT Apparatus under subclass 344 in which the kinetic energy storing means
    comprises a spring.

    (1)     Note.  Fluid operated biasing means are considered as springs for
    the purposes of this definition only when biased by a fluid which is
    independent of the motive fluid supply for the expansible chamber motor.


CLS 91/347
TXT Apparatus under subclass 346 in which the spring comprises a helical
    element form of plural spaced coils which are biased parallel to the coil
    axis, and at least one complete coil of the helix is moved laterally
    relative to said axis during each cycle.


CLS 91/348
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 in which the working member is a piston having
    spaced working surfaces and the distributor actuating means includes a
    member contacting the working member, movable relative thereto, and
    positioned between said working surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    313+,   for a cyclically operable motor having working member controlled
    motive fluid supply for a distributor motor in which a pilot valve actuator
    extends into a working chamber.

    328,    for a cyclically operable motor having a distributor which
    peripherally engages the working chamber wall or cylinder between opposed
    working faces.

    329,    for a cyclically operable motor having a distributor located in a
    cylinder between spaced working faces.

    341+,   for a cyclically operable motor having a distributor actuator
    extending into a working chamber.


CLS 91/349
TXT Apparatus under subclass 348 in which the distributor is cyclically moved
    about an axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    352,    and see the search there noted for other distributors which move
    about an axis.


CLS 91/350
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 in which means transmitting cyclic motion from
    the working member to the distributor includes an element moved relative to
    both the working member and distributor during each cycle of operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    330+,   for independently operable means to move or adjust movement of
    distributor and particularly subclasses 331+ for such means which adjusts a
    connection between a working member and a distributor.


CLS 91/351
TXT Apparatus under subclass 350 in which the means transmitting cyclic motion
    includes a circular or arcuate element provided with peripheral teeth and
    which is unidirectionally moved about an axis, to cooperate with teeth on
    another element.


CLS 91/352
TXT Apparatus under subclass 350 in which the distributor is cyclically moved
    about an axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270,    for cyclically operable motors having relatively movable or
    adjustable inlet and exhaust valves in which both valves are moved about an
    axis.

    315,    for cyclically operable motors having working member controlled
    motive fluid supply for distributor motor in which the distributor moves
    about an axis.

    324,    for cyclically operable double acting motors having relatively
    movable distributors for opposed working chambers, at least one of the
    distributors being movable about an axis.

    327+,   for cyclically operable motors having a distributor which moves
    about an axis parallel to the working member reciprocatory path.

    339,    for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors having
    oscillating working members and which include distributors which move about
    an axis.

    345,    for cyclically operable motors having biased means to move a
    distributor after predetermined travel in which the distributor moves about
    an axis.

    349,    for cyclically operably motors in which the piston area between
    spaced working member faces contacts a relatively movable part to reverse
    the distributor, in which the distributor moves about an axis.


CLS 91/353
TXT Apparatus under subclass 350 in which the distributor is given a cyclic
    movement which is not substantially parallel to the reciprocatory path of
    movement of the working member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310,    for a cyclically operable motor having a working member controlled
    pilot valve for a distributor motor in which the pilot moves laterally
    relative to the working member reciprocatory path.

    316,    for a cyclically operable motor having a working member controlled
    distributor motor which moves laterally relative to the working member
    reciprocatory path.

    343,    for a cyclically operable motor having a distributor actuator
    extending into the working chamber, and in which the actuator moves
    laterally relative to the reciprocatory path of the working member.


CLS 91/354
TXT Apparatus under subclass 350 in which the relatively moved element is moved
    unidirectionally about an axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188,    for relatively movable working members with means interconnecting
    working members to cause relative motion in which a control actuator
    includes a cam or crank rigid with means connecting the working members.

    334,    for a cyclically operable motor having a means to adjust the motion
    transmission from a working member to a distributor in which the means
    reverses the direction of rotation of an interposed shaft.

    340,    for a cyclically operable motor having an oscillating working
    member in which the distributor is reversed by a rotated part.

    351,    for a meshing rotary gear element included in the connecting train
    between a working member and distributor.

    352,    and see the subclasses there noted for distributors which move
    about an axis.


CLS 91/355
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the working member of the
    motor operates from a given position through a forward stroke and a return
    stroke to the starting position, the motor having control means which when
    operated causes the working member to move through the forward and return
    stroke and then stop even though the control means is maintained in the
    operated position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for control means which stops or modifies the action of a motor
    after a predetermined number of cycles of the working member greater than
    one.

    218+,   for motors in which the working members operates through more than
    one cycle.  Patents disclosing motors having control means which when
    operated, but immediately released, will cause one cycle of movement of the
    working member and which are also capable of operating in a cyclic manner
    as long as the control means is operated have been placed in subclasses
    218+ even though the cyclic mode of operation has not been specifically
    described therein.


CLS 91/356
TXT Apparatus under subclass 355 in which the working member of the motor is
    reversed to operate through the return stroke by means responsive to an
    increase or decrease in the pressure of the motive fluid.

    (1)     Note.  The change in pressure of the motive fluid may be caused by
    the working member moving to a predetermined position, as by engaging the
    end of the cylinder or a stop, or by a change in the load on the working
    member having no relationship to the position of the working member or the
    distance it has traveled before the pressure change occurs.


CLS 91/357
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which a nonmovable portion of the
    working chamber wall is provided with (1) an outlet opening intermediate
    the limits of movement of the working member and means for selectively
    opening and closing said outlet opening or (2) an outlet opening the
    position of which is adjustable in the direction of working member travel;
    said outlet opening acting as a vent for the expanding chamber or an
    exhaust for the contracting chamber which is cut off when overrun by the
    working member.

    (1)     Note.  In connection with part (1) of this definition the outlet
    opening only acts as a vent when it is selectively opened.  In many cases
    there is provided a plurality of longitudinally spaced controllable vents
    to cause the working member to stop at any one of a plurality of selected
    positions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402,    for motors in which the working member overruns an exhaust port to
    vent the expanding chamber.


CLS 91/358
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising valve means for controlling
    the flow of motive fluid, signal input means operated manually or by some
    separate control instrumentality for operating said valve means to cause
    operation of the motor, the motor providing a feedback signal in response
    to the position of the working member thereof, said feedback signal acting
    to control or modify the operation of said valve means.

    (1)     Note.  This definition does not include a feedback signal
    responsive to motor chamber fluid pressure build-up or fall off even if
    such a pressure change is a result of the motor reaching an extreme of its
    travel, see subclass 433 and the search there noted for such devices.

    (2)     Note.  The term "signal input means" is intended to cover broadly
    any device for operating the valve means and may be no more than a manually
    operated handle directly connected thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    392+,   and the search there noted for expansible chamber motors having
    working member responsive motive fluid controls.


CLS 91/359
TXT Apparatus under subclass 358 comprising feedback signal means which acts on
    the valve means to cause the working member to increase or continue its
    movement in the same direction in which it was started by the signal input
    means.


CLS 91/360
TXT Apparatus under subclass 358 in which the system is of the type where upon
    loss or termination of the input signal the working member would normally
    move to one extreme of its range of travel, and means are provided which
    are effective upon loss or termination of said input signal to cause the
    working member to assume a position intermediate the ends of its range of
    travel or to prevent movement thereof to an extreme of its range.


CLS 91/361
TXT Apparatus under subclass 358 in which the input signal is electrical and
    the signal created in response to the position of the working member
    operates electrically to modify or control the operation of the valve means.

    (1)     Note.  The signal created in response to the position of the
    working member may control or modify the operation of the valve means by
    electrically altering the input signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    459,    for expansible chamber motors with electrically operated motive
    fluid control valves not involving an electrical feedback.


CLS 91/362
TXT Apparatus under subclass 361 comprising a plurality of switch or contact
    means in the electrical input and feedback circuits corresponding to a
    plurality of specific increments of the range of movement of the motor
    working member in one direction such that on making or breaking certain
    ones of the switches or contacts a definite range of movement or a specific
    position of the working member will result.


CLS 91/363
TXT Apparatus under subclass 361 in which the input and feedback means is of
    the type in which the motor will move a given amount corresponding to a
    given magnitude of input signal and the feedback signal means will reset
    the valve means to stop the motor after said corresponding amount of
    movement has been obtained.


CLS 91/364
TXT Apparatus under subclass 358 including means responsive to (1) the rate of
    movement or (2) the rate of change of movement of the working member to
    alter the feedback signal while the working member is in motion such that
    the feedback signal at any particular instant does not represent the true
    position of the working member at that instant but a position at some
    future or past time related to its rate of movement at that particular
    instant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35+,    for expansible chamber motors including an independently operated
    timing or delay means the operation of which is not initiated by the motor.

    435,    for expansible chamber motor control valves controlled by the rate
    of movement of the working member and not involving a position feedback.


CLS 91/365
TXT Apparatus under subclass 358 in which the valve means is actuated by a
    fluid pressure operated motor and a secondary or pilot valve is operable to
    control the flow of pressure fluid to the valve actuating motor, the input
    signal being applied to the secondary or pilot valve and additional
    position feedback means being provided from the valve actuating motor to
    the pilot valve.


CLS 91/366
TXT Apparatus under subclass 358 in which the input signal for the valve means
    is produced by a means which is driven from a rotating shaft and the signal
    varies in accordance with the speed at which the rotating shaft is driven.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    435,    and the subclasses there noted for other expansible chamber motors
    controlled by speed governors.


CLS 91/367
TXT Apparatus under subclass 358 in which there are a plurality of separate
    means for generating an input signal operatively associated with a single
    valve means such that the separate signal generating means may actuate the
    valve means either separately or simultaneously.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    453,    for expansible chamber motors having plural actuators for a single
    valve and not including position responsive feedback means.


CLS 91/368
TXT Apparatus under subclass 358 in which the valve means comprises relatively
    movable parts whose range of movement to cause actuation of the working
    member is limited to a fractional portion of the total input signal which
    may be applied and to the total range of movement of the working member and
    in which the signal input means and the working member are so related to
    the valve means that working member movement will result only when the
    input signal means moves and will continue only as long as the signal input
    means continues to move; movement of the working member ceasing when
    movement of the input signal means ceases.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    363,    for working member position feedback controls of the follower type
    in which both the input and feedback signal means are electrical.


CLS 91/369.1
TXT With relatively movable working and output members reacting on input member:

    Apparatus under subclass 368 in which there is an output member for
    transmitting movement of the working member to a load, the working member
    being movable relative to the output member, and in which means are
    provided to cause the relative movement between the working members and the
    output member to affect the input signal means.

    (1)     Note.  A device having a flexible wall working member must have a
    means other than the wall itself to permit relative movement of the working
    member and the output member.


CLS 91/369.2
TXT Rubber block reaction means:

    Apparatus under subclass 369.1 in which the means causing relative movement
    between the working member and the output member comprises an elastomeric
    element positioned in a chamber to transmit movement from the output member
    to the valve means.


CLS 91/369.3
TXT And transverse valve key:

    Apparatus under subclass 369.2 in which the valve means moves in one
    direction from rest position to cause movement of the working member, there
    being provided an element (e.g., key-like element) which engages the valve
    means or a member connected to the valve means for limiting movement of the
    valve means in the opposite direction beyond the rest position.


CLS 91/369.4
TXT Lever reaction means:

    Apparatus under subclass 369.1 in which the means causing relative movement
    between the working member and the output member comprises at least one
    lever to transmit movement from the output member or the working member to
    the valve means.


CLS 91/370
TXT Apparatus under subclass 368 in which the valve means is provided with a
    means responsive to fluid pressure, which means is so related to the valve
    means and a working chamber of the motor that it exerts a force on the
    valve means due to pressure existing in the motor chamber.

    (1)     Note.  The means responsive to fluid pressure may be a surface on
    one of the valve parts but for classification under this definition the
    part must be specifically described as having the function of a fluid
    pressure responsive means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    369,    for motors in which the motor chamber pressure reaction is
    transmitted to the input member by relative movement between the working
    member and the load output member.


CLS 91/371
TXT Apparatus under subclass 370 in which an additional valve means is provided
    for controlling the application of fluid to the means responsive to fluid
    pressure, said additional valve means also being responsive to fluid
    pressure of a predetermined magnitude (1) to limit the pressure of the
    fluid applied to the means responsive to fluid pressure or (2) to change
    the proportion of the fluid pressure in the working chamber applied to the
    means responsive to fluid pressure when the working chamber pressure rises
    above the predetermined magnitude.


CLS 91/372
TXT Apparatus under subclass 370 in which the valve means has a mechanical
    spring acting on a movable valve part in such a manner that a given minimum
    force must be exerted on the valve part to cause its movement.


CLS 91/373
TXT Apparatus under subclass 372 in which movable parts of the input signal
    means and the means responsive to fluid pressure are operatively connected
    to transmit forces to each other during a portion of their operation and to
    move relative to each other without transmitting force during another
    portion of their operation.

    (1)     Note.  Devices in which the signal and reaction parts move relative
    to each other because the reaction force is transmitted through relatively
    movable sequentially operable inlet and exhaust valves are excluded from
    this subclass unless there is additional means to permit lost motion
    between the parts.


CLS 91/374
TXT Apparatus under subclass 368 in which the valve means has a plurality of
    (movable) parts movable to perform a valving function, which are moved
    relative to one another to control the flow of motive fluid, one of said
    valve parts being moved by the input signal means to cause movement of the
    working member and another of said movable parts being operated in response
    to movement of the working member to stop the working member.


CLS 91/375
TXT Apparatus under subclass 374 in which at least one of the movable valve
    parts oscillates or rotates about an axis relative to another valve part to
    perform a valving function.


CLS 91/376
TXT Apparatus under subclass 374 in which one of the movable valve parts is
    rigid with the working member so as to move as a unit therewith without any
    relative motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    375,    for a plural movable valve parts type feedback control in which one
    of the valve parts is unitary with a working member which rotates or
    oscillates about an axis.


CLS 91/377
TXT Apparatus under subclass 376 in which the movable valve part, the working
    member and a load receiving member are connected by a linkage to provide a
    lost motion connection so that there is a limited amount of motion between
    the parts to cause operation of the valve before the working member
    actuates the load.


CLS 91/378
TXT Apparatus under subclass 376 in which the movable valve parts comprise a
    ported sleeve and a spool mounted within the sleeve, said sleeve and spool
    being both movable along the axis thereof to control the flow of motive
    fluid.


CLS 91/379
TXT Apparatus under subclass 368 in which the motor moves different increments
    in different parts of its range of movement for the same increment of
    signal input.


CLS 91/380
TXT Apparatus under subclass 368 including relatively rotatable screw and
    follower (e.g., nut) elements, the follower engaging the thread of the
    screw, and the elements being also bodily displaceable as a unit (either
    axially or rotatably); the input signal means, the valve means and the
    working member being operatively connected to the elements such that the
    signal input means will cause operation of the valve means to initiate
    movement of the working member by moving a first one of the elements either
    by bodily displacement or rotation relative to the second element while the
    working member remains stationary; the operation of the valve means causing
    movement of the working member which will cause the second element to move
    by the other type of movement than that caused by the input signal means to
    cause operation of the valve means to stop movement of the working member
    while the input signal means remains stationary.

    (1)     Note.  The screw element of the above definition is intended to be
    limited to an element having a helical track of more than 360o and is by
    this characteristic distinguished from a cam device as provided for in
    subclass 382.


CLS 91/381
TXT Apparatus under subclass 368 including a train of at least three
    intermeshing toothed gears, one connected to the signal input means,
    another connected to the valve means and a third connected to the working
    member to provide the feedback signal, operation of the signal input
    connected gear causing operation of the valve means connected gear while
    the working member connected gear is stationary, and operation of the
    working member causing operation of the valve connected gear while the
    signal input connected gear is stationary.


CLS 91/382
TXT Apparatus under subclass 368 including cam and cam follower elements which
    are movable relative to each other to cause a camming action and also to
    cause relative movement without a camming action (i.e., a noncamming
    movement), the input signal means, the valve means and the working member
    being operatively connected to the elements such that the input signal
    means will cause operation of the valve means to initiate movement of the
    working member by moving a first one of the elements relative to the second
    by either a camming movement or a noncamming movement while the working
    member remains stationary; the operation of the valve means causing
    movement of the working member which will cause the second element to move
    relative to the first element by a movement of the other type than that
    caused by the input signal means to cause operation of the valve means to
    stop movement of the working member while the input signal means remains
    stationary.

    (1)     Note.  Devices in which a straight lever is operatively connected
    to the input signal means, the valve means and the working member and one
    or more of such connections is of the pin and slot type to permit lost
    motion to accommodate for the difference in motion of parts, e.g.,
    rectilinear motion of a valve stem and pivotal motion of the lever are not
    considered to be a cam and follower follow-up for this subclass and will
    generally be found in subclass 384.

    (2)     Note.  See (1) Note under subclass 380 for an explanation of the
    distinction between this subclass and subclass 380.


CLS 91/383
TXT Apparatus under subclass 368 including a flexible means such as cable rope,
    chain, etc., connected to the signal input means, the valve means and the
    working member such that the signal input means will cause movement of the
    flexible means to operate the valve means to cause movement of the working
    member; the flexible means being moved by the working member to operate the
    valve means to stop movement of the working member.


CLS 91/384
TXT Apparatus under subclass 368 including a control link having three axially
    spaced connecting points, one of said connecting points being connected to
    the valve means, the second to the input signal means and the third to the
    working member so that movement of said input signal means will move said
    valve means through said link and movement of the working member will
    reposition the valve through said link.


CLS 91/385
TXT Apparatus under subclass 358 in which the signal provided by the input
    signal means is a variable force acting on the valve means and the working
    member position signal is generated by means which provides a variable
    force acting on the valve means in opposition to the input signal force and
    which force is greater the greater the deviation of the working member from
    a given position.


CLS 91/386
TXT Apparatus under subclass 385 in which the means for generating the working
    member position signal is adjustable to change the amount of force exerted
    against the valve means for a given position of the working member.


CLS 91/387
TXT Apparatus under subclass 385 in which the working member position signal is
    generated by a resilient material which is variably stressed by the
    position of the working member.


CLS 91/388
TXT Apparatus under subclass 358 in which means responsive to fluid pressure is
    connected to operate or modify the operation of the valve means by fluid
    pressure variations created in response to the position of the working
    member.

    (1)     Note.  The fluid pressure for operating the valve means in response
    to the position of the working member may be motive fluid from the motor or
    fluid from a separate supply.

    (2)     Note.  A valve means which is operated by fluid pressure variations
    which are created in the motive fluid merely by the working member engaging
    the end of the chamber in which it is working or by a mere variation in the
    load are excluded, see subclass 433 and the search there noted for such
    devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403,    for expansible chamber motors having a fluid actuated valve in
    which the valve actuating fluid is controlled in response to the working
    member position and which does not involve a feedback means.

    460     and 461, for expansible chamber motors having a pulsator operated
    valve or a pilot valve, respectively.


CLS 91/389
TXT Apparatus under subclass 358 in which the signal is provided in response to
    the working member reaching a given position, the position of the working
    member at which the signal is provided being selectively changeable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277,    for cyclic operable motors in which the working member reversal
    position is adjustable.

    386,    for a working member position feedback control having a bias type
    input signal and an adjustable feedback bias means.


CLS 91/390
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means responsive to the
    movement or the tendency to move of the working member to control the
    motive fluid so as to restore the working member to its original position
    or to provide a force counteracting the force tending to move the working
    member.

    (1)     Note.  This definition does not include means responsive to motor
    chamber pressure build up or fall off even if such pressure change is a
    result of a tendency of the working member to move from a given position,
    see subclass 433 and the search there noted for such devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    358+,   for working member position feedback controls having a valve means
    which is actuated by an input signal to initiate operation of the motor and
    the working member creates a signal which acts on the same valve means to
    modify the operation of the motor. Practically all of these devices will
    also operate to maintain the working member in position when there is no
    input signal.


CLS 91/391
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means for moving the load
    normally driven by the working member by a human operator in the absence of
    operation of the motor.

    (1)     Note.  When the load is moved manually the motor working member may
    also move due to the application of the manual force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    368+,   for follower type working member position feedback controls which
    generally provide for movement of the load when motive fluid is not
    available to operate the motor by engagement of the valve parts on extreme
    travel of such parts and without other means to facilitate manual
    actuation.  Patents in which such means is provided have been cross
    referenced to this subclass 391.


CLS 91/392
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the flow of motive fluid to
    or from a working chamber or within a working chamber is modified so as to
    alter the motor operation in response to the working member of the motor
    attaining a given position in the working chamber.

    (1)     Note.  Motors in which a control is effected by a motive fluid
    pressure change due merely to the working member reaching the end of the
    stroke or engaging a stop or the like are not considered to be position
    responsive under this definition.

    (2)     Note.  This definition includes those motors in which the motive
    fluid is controlled in response to means which senses or measures the
    quantity or volume of fluid (as opposed to rate of flow or pressure) which
    flows to or from a chamber which expands or contracts proportionally to the
    motor movement.  The chamber may be a working or nonworking chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20+,    for expansible chamber motors in which motive fluid is supplied to
    a single working chamber through different supply paths at different times,
    at least one of said supply paths being controlled in response to the
    position of the motor working member.

    58+,    for rotary expansible chamber motors in which the motive fluid is
    controlled in response to the position of the rotary working member of the
    motor.

    168,    for expansible chamber motors in which the motor has separately
    controlled working chambers, the extension of the unit equalling the sum of
    the individual chamber extensions and in which the position of one working
    member controls the motive fluid for another working member.

    170+,   and especially subclasses 189+ for expansible chamber motors having
    plural relatively movable working members in which the motive fluid for one
    working member is controlled in response to the position of another working
    member.

    218+,   for expansible chamber motors having a reciprocating cycle of
    operation and means operating in response to the position of the working
    member to control the motive fluid to cause the motor to operate
    continuously repeating the cycle.

    357,    for expansible chamber motors having selectively usable or
    positionable working member controlled vent in the working chamber wall.

    358+,   for expansible chamber motors having valve means which is operated
    by an input signal to cause operation of the motor and in which said valve
    means is further controlled in response to the working member of the motor
    attaining a given position.

    419,    for expansible chamber motors in which a motive fluid valve is
    controlled in response to the position or orientation of the entire motor.

    425,    for expansible chamber motors in which in response to position of
    the working member means are actuated to hold a valve in a given position.


CLS 91/393
TXT Apparatus under subclass 392 in which in response to the position of the
    working member means are actuated which cause a predetermined delay or time
    to elapse prior to control of the motive fluid.

    (1)     Note.  The operation of the timing or delay means is initiated in
    response to the position of the motor working member, but thereafter the
    amount of time delay which occurs before the motive fluid is controlled is
    not dependent upon the operation of the motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35+,    for expansible chamber motors having timing, delay, pattern or
    cyclic control means which are operated independently of the motor, i.e.,
    not initiated by the motor.

    218+,   and especially subclasses 219, 282+, 284+, and 289, for cyclically
    operable expansible chamber motors including means to delay the shift of a
    distributor after initiation of the shift by the working member.

    364,    for expansible chamber motors having feedback control and means to
    delay operation of the valve means in response to the feedback signal from
    the motor working member.


CLS 91/394
TXT Apparatus under subclass 392 in which the working member of the motor has
    attached thereto or formed as a part thereof a part which directly
    cooperates with an inlet or exhaust opening in the working chamber end wall
    to control motive fluid flow through said opening in response to position
    of said working member, said part being disposed within the working chamber
    in at least one position of the motor.


CLS 91/395
TXT Apparatus under subclass 394 in which the part attached to the working
    member moves relative to the working member incident to the control of said
    end wall opening.


CLS 91/396
TXT Apparatus under subclass 394 in which the part carried by the working
    member is smaller than said opening so as not to completely close the
    opening or is of tapering or irregular shape so as to progressively or
    irregularly close or open said opening on continued movement of said part.


CLS 91/397
TXT Apparatus under subclass 392 in which the working member has reciprocating
    motion and wherein at substantially the limit of the stroke in one
    direction the motive fluid being admitted to a working chamber is
    controlled in response to working member position and at substantially the
    limit of the stroke in the opposite direction the motive fluid being
    exhausted from the same working chamber is controlled in response to
    working member position.


CLS 91/398
TXT Apparatus under subclass 392 in which both a flow path for motive fluid
    entering and a flow path for motive fluid exhausting from a single working
    chamber are substantially concurrently controlled in response to working
    member position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    397,    for expansible chamber motors in which the inlet and exhaust of
    motive fluid for a single working chamber are alternately controlled in
    response to working member position at opposite ends of the stroke thereof.


CLS 91/399
TXT Apparatus under subclass 392 wherein the motor is provided with opposed
    expansible chambers, i.e., one of which contracts as the other expands and
    vice versa, and in which in response to motor position a passage
    interconnecting the two chambers is opened and at that time the contracting
    chamber is otherwise closed or the outlet therefrom is otherwise restricted.

    (1)     Note.  The purpose of the by-pass is ordinarily for cushioning by
    the passage of motive fluid from the expanding chamber to the closed
    contracting chamber to act on the opposed working member face.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for expansible chamber motors in which motive fluid is supplied to
    a contracting working chamber by by-passing from an opposed expanding
    working chamber in response to working member position and additional
    motive fluid is supplied from a different source.  NOTE SECTION IV OF THE
    CLASS DEFINITION AND THE PARAGRAPH FOLLOWING THE TITLE IN THE SCHEDULE OF
    THIS CLASS.

    235,    for cyclically operable, expansible chamber motors in which motive
    fluid is constantly applied to one working chamber and is by-passed
    therefrom to an opposed working chamber in response to position of the
    working member.

    416,    for differential, expansible chamber motors in which motive fluid
    is supplied to one working chamber by by-passing from an opposed working
    chamber.


CLS 91/400
TXT Apparatus under subclass 392 in which in response to motor position a
    working chamber of the motor which is increasing in size is opened to
    exhaust so as to vent motive fluid therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  The motive fluid need not be vented directly from the
    working chamber, but may be vented from the inlet line upstream from the
    chamber if the fluid in the chamber is capable of escaping from the vent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47+,    for expansible chamber motors in which motive fluid is constantly
    applied to a working chamber thereof, motor movement being controlled by
    operating a vent valve for said working chamber.

    399,    for expansible chamber motors in which a by-pass between an
    expanding chamber and an opposed contracting chamber is opened in response
    to position, the contracting chamber being otherwise closed or the outlet
    thereof being restricted.


CLS 91/401
TXT Apparatus under subclass 400 in which the motive fluid is vented through a
    passage in the working member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for expansible chamber motors in which motive fluid is constantly
    applied to a working chamber thereof, motor movement being controlled by
    operating a vent valve for said working chamber, the vented fluid passing
    through a passage in the working member of the motor.


CLS 91/402
TXT Apparatus under subclass 400 in which the working member travels past an
    exhaust port to permit the motive fluid in the expanding chamber to exhaust
    therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    325,    for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors in which the
    working member overruns a port to allow the expanding working chamber to
    exhaust.

    357,    for expansible chamber motors in which the working member overruns
    an exhaust port to vent the expanding chamber, the exhaust port being
    selectively positionable in the direction of working member travel or
    having means to selectively open and close same. NOTE SECTION IV OF THE
    CLASS DEFINITION AND THE PARAGRAPH FOLLOWING THE TITLE IN THE SCHEDULE OF
    THIS CLASS.


CLS 91/403
TXT Apparatus under subclass 392 comprising a control valve which is actuated
    by fluid, said fluid being controlled by the position of the motor working
    member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281+,   for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors in which the
    distributing valve is actuated by a fluid motor the motive fluid supply of
    which is controlled in response to position of the expansible chamber motor
    working member.

    388,    for expansible chamber motors having valve means which is
    controlled by an input signal and is also operated by fluid pressure which
    is controlled in response to position of the motor working member.


CLS 91/404
TXT Apparatus under subclass 392 comprising control of the motive fluid as it
    leaves the working chamber of the motor in response to working member
    position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    394+,   for expansible chamber motors in which the working member carries a
    part within the working chamber which, in response to working member
    position, cooperates with a port in the working chamber end wall to control
    exhaust flow therethrough.

    397,    for expansible chamber motors in which the inlet and exhaust of
    motive fluid to a single working chamber are alternately controlled in
    response to the working member reaching the end of its stroke in opposite
    directions.

    398,    for expansible chamber motors in which both the inlet and exhaust
    of motive fluid for a single working chamber are controlled simultaneously
    in response to working member position.


CLS 91/405
TXT Apparatus under subclass 404 in which the exhaust is only partially closed
    in response to working member position or is progressively closed or
    throttled due to movement of the working member.

    (1)     Note.  Many valves have an incidental throttling action when
    activated.  A patent will not be classified under this definition on the
    basis of such incidental throttle action.  However, a valve or porting
    which is specifically designed or modified to provide a throttling action
    is included under this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    396,    for expansible chamber motors in which the working member carries a
    part which cooperates with an exhaust port formed in the working chamber
    end wall and acts to throttle said port in response to working member
    movement.


CLS 91/406
TXT Apparatus under subclass 405 in which the exhaust is controlled by a
    separate valve, the movable part of said valve having a relatively small
    passage therein to permit limited exhaust from the working chamber after
    said movable part has been moved to closed position in response to working
    member position.


CLS 91/407
TXT Apparatus under subclass 405 in which there is provided a plurality of
    exhaust flow paths from the working chamber and (1) said flow paths being
    closed in series in response to movement of the motor working member, or
    (2) at least one of said exhaust flow paths is not controlled in response
    to working member position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24+,    for expansible chamber motors in which inlet motive fluid is
    supplied to an expanding chamber through one supply path and in response to
    working member position an additional supply path is opened.  Ordinarily in
    this type motor the supply paths are also exhaust paths when the chamber is
    contracting and one exhaust path is cut off in response to working member
    position while another remains open.

    236+,   for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors having multiple
    exhaust passages, one of which exhausts or continues to exhaust after
    another has been cut off.


CLS 91/408
TXT Apparatus under subclass 407 in which the working member covers an exhaust
    port located in a wall of the working chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    409,    for other motors in which the working member covers an exhaust port
    in the contracting chamber.


CLS 91/409
TXT Apparatus under subclass 404 in which the expansible chamber exhausts
    through a port which is so located as to be covered by the working member
    during contraction of the expansible chamber to prevent further exhaust
    therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    408,    for expansible chamber motors in which the working member covers an
    exhaust port in a contracting working chamber, there being additional
    exhaust means which remain open after the working member covers said port.
    NOTE SECTION IV OF THE CLASS DEFINITION AND THE PARAGRAPH FOLLOWING THE
    TITLE IN THE SCHEDULE OF THIS CLASS.


CLS 91/410
TXT Apparatus under subclass 392 wherein a valve which has a controlling part
    movable with respect to the working member is controlled in response to
    working member position to control the inlet of motive fluid to an
    expanding working chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    398,    for expansible chamber motors in which both the inlet and exhaust
    of motive fluid to a working chamber are simultaneously controlled in
    response to working member position.


CLS 91/415
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the motor is provided with
    opposed working member faces, motive fluid being applied to or evacuated
    from one of said faces to cause the working member to move in one direction
    and being applied simultaneously to or evacuated simultaneously from both
    of said faces to cause the working member to move in the opposite direction
    or to slow the movement in said one direction.

    (1)     Note.  The opposed working member faces are usually of different
    areas. However, they may be of the same area with or without an additional
    impelling force such as a spring applied in one direction.

    (2)     Note.  Opposed working member faces are defined as faces which when
    motive fluid is applied thereto tend to move the working member or load in
    opposite directions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22+,    for expansible chamber motors with preliminary admission of motive
    fluid to a contracting working chamber to cushion movement of the working
    member and further admission of motive fluid through a different supply
    path to said working chamber to cause the working member to move in the
    opposite direction to expand the chamber.

    51,     for double acting expansible chamber motors having motive fluid
    constantly applied to opposed working member faces and selectively vented
    therefrom to cause the motor to move in either direction.

    152,    for expansible chamber motors of the multiple expansion type.

    165,    for expansible chamber motors in which motive fluid at different
    pressures may be simultaneously applied to opposed working member faces.

    172,    for expansible chamber motors having opposed, relatively movable
    working members with motive fluid being simultaneously applied thereto.

    464,    for double acting expansible chamber motors in which motive fluid
    is supplied to opposed working member faces when the motor is in idle or
    stationary condition.


CLS 91/416
TXT Apparatus under subclass 415 in which the motive fluid which acts in one of
    the expansible chambers is supplied directly thereto from the other
    expansible chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for double acting expansible chamber motors in which motive fluid
    is supplied to the contracting chamber from the expanding chamber to
    cushion movement of the working member and additional motive fluid is
    supplied to said contracting chamber through a different path.

    224,    for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors of the
    differential type in which opposed working chambers are placed in
    communication through a valved piston.

    235,    for cyclically operable motors in which one working chamber
    receives controlled motive fluid supply from an opposed chamber having
    constant supply.

    399,    for expansible chamber motors in which in response to position of
    the working member motive fluid is by-passed from an expanding working
    chamber to a closed contracting chamber.


CLS 91/417
TXT Apparatus under subclass 415 in which motive fluid is applied to one
    working face of the motor under all conditions of operation of the motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235     and 321, for cyclically operable motors of the differential type in
    which motive fluid is constantly applied to one working member face.  NOTE
    SECTION IV OF THE CLASS DEFINITION AND THE PARAGRAPH FOLLOWING THE TITLE IN
    THE SCHEDULE OF THIS CLASS.


CLS 91/418
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including valve means to control the
    flow of motive fluid to or from the motor or while in the motor so as to
    provide a control of the motor.

    (1)     Note.  The valve means may be, for example, a distributing valve,
    throttle valve, pressure relief or check valve or a pressure reducing
    valve.  A mere fixed orifice which provides a throttling action is not
    considered to be a valve, but a controllable throttle is considered to be a
    valve even though it may not be capable of being completely cut off.

    (2)     Note.  Patents disclosing a cyclically operable motor in which the
    claims are directed to any of the motor operated valve actuating means are
    classified in subclasses 218+.

    (3)     Note.  The following definitions of terms are applicable to this
    and indented subclasses.

    (a)     Inlet and Exhaust Valve - A valve for connecting three lines; a
    pressure line, a motor line and an exhaust line; the valve being settable
    in any of three positions, namely, with the pressure line connected to the
    motor line, with the motor line connected to the exhaust line and with the
    motor line cut off.  The valve may comprise a single unitary member or
    relatively movable separate valving elements.

    (b)     Stop Valve - A valve in any line which is capable of being closed
    to stop the flow in both directions in that line.  A stop valve may also be
    a throttling valve so long as it is capable of being completely closed.

    (c)     Check Valve - A direction responsive valve which when placed in
    line is designed to prevent any flow in one direction and allow
    substantially free, unimpeded flow in the opposite direction.


CLS 91/419
TXT Apparatus under subclass 418 in which the valve means is controlled in
    response to (1) changes in the temperature or the physical state of the
    motive fluid supplied to or exhausted from the motor or (2) changes in the
    position of the motor relative to a support or relative to a predetermined
    spatial reference, such as a line, plane or direction.


CLS 91/420
TXT Apparatus under subclass 418 in which the motor has a first chamber which
    is expanded by pressure motive fluid acting therein and a second chamber
    which is contracted and from which motive fluid is exhausted due to the
    expansion of the first chamber, the exhaust from the contracting chamber
    being controlled by valve means which is operated by the pressure of motive
    fluid in or the flow of motive fluid to said expanding chamber.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes patents which disclose rotary
    expansible chamber motors but are not claimed as such.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not include patents in which the
    expanding and contracting chambers are disclosed as associated with plural
    relatively movable working members since such patents are provided for
    above in subclasses 170+ and 411+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    268,    for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors in which the
    exhaust valve for one chamber is closed or held closed by inlet pressure in
    an opposing chamber.


CLS 91/421
TXT Apparatus under subclass 418 in which the motor is provided with a first
    chamber which is expanded by pressure motive fluid acting therein and a
    second chamber which is contracted and from which motive fluid is exhausted
    due to the expansion of said first chamber, the flow of motive fluid into
    the expanding chamber being controlled by valve means which is responsive
    to the motive fluid pressure in or flow from said contracting chamber.

    (1)     Note.  See Notes (1) and (2) under subclass 420 which also apply to
    this subclass.


CLS 91/422
TXT Apparatus under subclass 418 in which the movable valve means is in or
    carried by a piston or piston rod of the motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for expansible chamber motors in which motive fluid constantly
    applied to the working chamber is vented through the piston or rod.

    163,    for multiple expansion expansible chamber motors in which the
    motive fluid is expanded through the piston from the high pressure chamber
    into the low pressure chamber.

    222+,   for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors in which the
    motive fluid is supplied or exhausted through a valved piston or rod.  NOTE
    SECTION IV OF THE CLASS DEFINITION AND THE PARAGRAPH FOLLOWING THE TITLE IN
    THE SCHEDULE OF THIS CLASS.

    234,    for cyclically operable valveless expansible chamber motors in
    which the piston has a passage for the flow of motive fluid formed therein.

    376+,   for expansible chamber motors having follower type feed back
    control valve means positioned in the piston or rod.

    401,    for expansible chamber motors having a valved passage in the piston
    or piston rod which is controlled in response to working member position.


CLS 91/423
TXT Apparatus under subclass 418 in which a part of the working chamber wall
    which is traversed by the working member is movable and forms or carries a
    part forming a portion of the motive fluid valve means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    276,    for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors in which the
    valve means is formed by a movable portion of the working chamber wall
    traversed by the working member.  NOTE SECTION IV OF THE CLASS DEFINITION
    AND THE PARAGRAPH FOLLOWING THE TITLE IN THE SCHEDULE OF THIS CLASS.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclass 509 for expansible chamber pumps in which the pump
    fluid is controlled by a valve means which is formed by a movable portion
    of the pump chamber wall traversed by the pumping member.


CLS 91/424
TXT Apparatus under subclass 418 in which operation of the valve means requires
    the use of both hands of a human operator.


CLS 91/425
TXT Apparatus under subclass 424 including means responsive to an operating
    condition of the motor for permitting the motor to continue to operate upon
    release of either or both hands of the operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301     and 337, for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors in which
    fluid is supplied to a chamber subsequent to movement of the distributor to
    reversed position to hold the distributor in such position.

    392+,   for expansible chamber motor valve means which responds to working
    member position.

    426,    for expansible chamber motor valves having subsequently applied
    fluid means to hold the valve in the position to which it had previously
    been shifted.


CLS 91/426
TXT Apparatus under subclass 418 including means to actuate the valve means to
    a given position and separate means to hold the valve means in said
    position by the application of fluid pressure to the separate means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301     and 337, for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors in which
    fluid is supplied to a chamber subsequent to movement of the distributor to
    reversed position to hold the distributor in such position.

    392+,   for expansible chamber motor valve means which responds to working
    member position.

    425,    for expansible chamber motors having two hand control valve means
    with motor controlled fluid holding means for said valve means.


CLS 91/427
TXT Apparatus under subclass 418 comprising a plurality of spaced control
    stations from which the motor may be alternatively controlled by a human
    operator.

    (1)     Note.  The spaced control stations may comprise separate control
    valves for the motor or may comprise separate operators for a single
    control valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6+,     for motors in which motive fluid is supplied to an expansible
    chamber through different supply paths and which may involve separate
    control stations.


CLS 91/428
TXT Apparatus under subclass 418 in which the valve means is manually operable
    by means carried on and movable with the working member or load or which is
    positioned to be operable by a human operator carried on and movable with
    the working member or load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    376+,   for working member position feedback controls having a valve part
    which is unitary with the working member.


CLS 91/429
TXT Apparatus under subclass 418 in which the valve means is so actuated as to
    provide motive fluid to the motor in a series of pressure impulses rather
    than in a steady continuous flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39+,    for expansible chamber motors having independent means to actuate a
    distributor to cause cyclic, reciprocating operation of the motor. Mere
    pulsing of fluid alternately to opposed working chambers of a motor to
    maintain the working member in a "ready" or static friction-free state is
    not considered to be cyclic operation for subclasses 39+.

    430,    for expansible chamber motors with valve means which has parts
    which are continuously relatively moved for a nonvalving function, usually
    to prevent sticking of the valve means.


CLS 91/430
TXT Apparatus under subclass 418 in which the valve means has parts which are
    relatively movable for a nonvalving function and means are provided to
    cause the parts to be moved continuously.

    (1)     Note.  The valve parts are usually moved for the purpose of
    reducing static friction in the valve so that the parts may be easily moved
    by other means to perform a valving function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    429+,   for expansible chamber motors with a dither valve which controls
    the motive fluid to supply a series of impulses rather than a steady flow
    to the motor.


CLS 91/431
TXT Apparatus under subclass 418 in which the valve means is so constructed as
    to provide for a circulating flow of motive fluid into and out of the motor
    working chamber while the motor working member is stationary.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47+,    for expansible chamber motors having constantly applied motive
    fluid with controlled venting.

    52,     for expansible chamber motors having a constantly open throttled
    exhaust with controlled motive fluid supply.


CLS 91/432
TXT Apparatus under subclass 418 in which the valve means comprises a check
    valve which is operable to permit motive fluid to flow into the working
    chamber, the check valve having connecting means combined therewith to
    provide for the reception of a readily disconnectable or removable motive
    fluid supply line to the motor through said check valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    468,    and see the subclasses there noted for other motors with self
    acting valves.


CLS 91/433
TXT Apparatus under subclass 418 in which the valve means controls both the
    inlet and the exhaust to initiate flow of motive fluid to and from a single
    working chamber of the motor and the valve means is operated in response to
    variations in the pressure in either the pressure line supplying motive
    fluid to the motor or the working chamber or the motor itself to control
    both the inlet and exhaust of motive fluid.

    (1)     Note.  The valve means controlling the inlet and the exhaust in
    response to variations in the pressure is an inlet and exhaust valve.

    (2)     Note.  The motive fluid which operates the valve means must also be
    subject to the control of the valve means.

    (3)     Note.  The variations in pressure in the supply line or working
    chamber may be caused by any condition including a manually operable means
    such as a throttle valve in the pressure line or by changes in the load on
    the motor so long as the inlet and exhaust are both valved by a means which
    itself operates by variations in pressure applied thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166,    for double acting motor having valve means for reversing the
    direction of operation of the motor in response to motive fluid pressure
    variations.

    356,    for reciprocating motors which operate through a complete cycle and
    then stop, the reversal of the motor being controlled in response to motive
    fluid pressure change.

    420,    for a double acting motor in which the contracting chamber exhaust
    valve is controlled by the pressure in or flow to the expanding chamber.

    421,    for a double acting motor in which the expanding chamber inlet is
    controlled by the pressure in or flow from the contracting chamber.

    461,    for pilot valves which are operated by motive fluid which is
    controlled separately from that supplied directly to the motor.


CLS 91/434
TXT Apparatus under subclass 433 in which the valve means is provided with
    manual actuating means, the variations in pressure being applied to said
    manual actuating means to provide a reaction or "feel" to the operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370+,   for expansible chamber motors having follower type valve means with
    motor chamber pressure reaction on the valve.


CLS 91/435
TXT Apparatus under subclass 418 in which the valve means is controlled in
    response to the speed of movement of the working member.

    (1)     Note.  Rate of motive fluid flow to or from a working chamber has
    not been considered to be indicative of the speed of movement of the
    working member.  Thus, this definition does not include valve means which
    are controlled in response to the rate of flow to or from a working chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors having means to
    supply low pressure fluid to the motor when the main supply is cut off and
    the motor is coasting or drifting and speed responsive means for cutting
    off the low pressure fluid when the motor speed decreases to a given value
    or the motor stops.

    76,     for rotary expansible chamber motors which are controlled in
    response to the speed of rotation of the working member.

    221,    for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors with stop means
    responsive to speed.

    333,    for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors having
    independently operable means to control the distributor in response to the
    speed of the motor.

    336,    for cyclically operable motors having speed controlled throttle
    valve means.

    364,    for expansible chamber motors of the feedback type having means to
    vary the feedback signal in response to rate of working member movement.

    366,    for expansible chamber motors of the feedback type having a speed
    governor controlled input signal.

    458,    for expansible chamber motors having speed governor operated valve
    means.

    468,    and see the search there noted for expansible chamber motors having
    self acting valves and see (1) Note above.


CLS 91/436
TXT Apparatus under subclass 418 in which the motor is provided with opposed
    chambers such that the introduction of pressure motive fluid into one
    chamber will cause expansion thereof, movement of the working member, and
    contraction of the opposed chamber to exert a pressure on fluid contained
    therein, the valve means being operable to permit fluid which has been put
    under pressure in the contracting chamber to be admitted to the expanding
    chamber during at least a portion of the period pressure motive fluid is
    also being admitted to the expanding chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6+,     for expansible chamber motors having inlet motive fluid supplied
    through diverse flow passages to a single working chamber at different
    times.


CLS 91/437
TXT Apparatus under subclass 418 in which the motor comprises a pair of working
    chambers for driving a single working member in opposite directions by the
    application of controlled pressure motive fluid to expand one chamber and
    to contract and expel exhaust motive fluid from the other chamber and in
    which the valve means controls a fluid line connecting the chambers to
    permit motive fluid to pass from one chamber to the other, said valve means
    operating separately from the control of the pressure motive fluid.

    (1)     Note.  The operation of the by-pass valve means, to be separate
    from the pressure motive fluid control, must operate in a manner
    inconsistent with the normal motor operation such that a double acting
    motor with a unitary spool valve having short lands which may interconnect
    opposed motor chambers at one valve position is excluded and will be found
    in subclass 464.

    (2)     Note.  A double acting motor in which a valve controlled by-pass
    line is also constantly open to exhaust is considered to be a common
    exhaust and is excluded from this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16+,    for expansible chamber motors with motive fluid supplied through
    diverse flow paths to a single expansible chamber in which the motor drifts
    or coasts on a lower motive fluid pressure.


CLS 91/438
TXT Apparatus under subclass 437 in which the valve means controlling the
    by-pass is held in position to close the by-pass by the pressure of motive
    fluid applied to the motor.


CLS 91/439
TXT Apparatus under subclass 438 in which the pressure motive fluid applied to
    the motor is controlled by a valve means having an inlet line common to the
    opposed chambers for the pressure motive fluid and in which the by-pass
    line is formed in part by said inlet line so that fluid may flow from one
    chamber to the other through the inlet line independently of the position
    of the pressure motive fluid control valve means.


CLS 91/440
TXT Apparatus under subclass 418 in which the motor includes a nonworking
    chamber and the valve means acts to exhaust motive fluid from the
    contracting working chamber to the nonworking chamber which is expanded due
    to the movement of the working member contracting the working chamber.


CLS 91/441
TXT Apparatus under subclass 418 in which the motor is provided with an
    additional valve means which opens to admit ambient fluid into an expanding
    chamber when the pressure in the chamber falls below the pressure of the
    ambient fluid source.

    (1)     Note.  Ambient fluid is fluid which is not under pressure and does
    not cause the working member to move when it is being admitted to the
    expanding chamber; however, pressure motive fluid may be applied to the
    chamber when the ambient fluid source is cut off from the expanding chamber
    so that the ambient fluid trapped in the expanding chamber becomes
    pressurized and assists in moving the working member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16+,    for expansible chamber motors with motive fluid supplied through
    diverse flow paths to a single expansible chamber in which the motor drifts
    or coasts on a lower motive fluid pressure.


CLS 91/442
TXT Apparatus under subclass 418 in which an expansible chamber is provided
    with a valve to discharge motive fluid therefrom, said valve being held
    closed by the pressure of inlet motive fluid applied to said chamber and
    said valve opening automatically to permit discharge when the inlet
    pressure is removed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    268,    for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors having relatively
    movable inlet and exhaust valves in which the exhaust valve is held closed
    by inlet pressure.  NOTE SECTION IV OF THE CLASS DEFINITION AND THE
    PARAGRAPH FOLLOWING THE TITLE IN THE SCHEDULE OF THIS CLASS.


CLS 91/443
TXT Apparatus under subclass 418 in which the valve means controls the inlet
    and exhaust flow of motive fluid to and from the same working chamber to
    cause the magnitude of the inlet flow and exhaust flow to be unequal.

    (1)     Note.  The valve means must be more than a mere manually operable
    throttle in a common inlet and exhaust line and includes, for example,
    additional passages in the valve means or plural motive fluid lines.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6+,     for expansible chamber motors having a single working chamber
    having fluid supplied thereto by diverse flow paths.


CLS 91/444
TXT Apparatus under subclass 418 in which the valve means comprises at least
    two valves through which the fluid must pass serially in the course of
    flowing either to the working chamber or exhausting from the working
    chamber, each valve having a movable fluid flow controlling element so
    arranged that the control of the motive fluid by the valves is effected by
    the movement of the movable element of one valve relative to the movable
    element of another valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12      and 15, for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors with
    serially arranged reversing valves arranged between the supply and exhaust
    and opposed expansible chambers of the motor.

    30,     for expansible chamber motors with serially arranged reversing
    valves arranged between the supply and exhaust and opposed expansible
    chambers of the motor.

    246+,   for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors having a throttle
    valve correlated with the distributor.

    247+,   for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors having additional
    valve means for adjusting the timing of the fluid control events.

    264,    for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors having serially
    arranged distributors which are relatively movable.

    274,    for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors having additional
    valve means to controllably vary the fluid handling capacity of the inlet
    or exhaust passage.

    335+,   for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors which include a
    throttle valve in the flow path to the distributor.


CLS 91/445
TXT Apparatus under subclass 444 in which one of the serial valves is an inlet
    and exhaust valve and another is a stop valve, the stop valve being
    disposed in the motor line between the inlet and exhaust valve and the
    working chamber.


CLS 91/446
TXT Apparatus under subclass 444 in which one of the serial valves acts in
    response to pressure or flow in the line in which said one valve is placed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    468,    and see the subclasses there noted for other motors with self
    acting valves.


CLS 91/447
TXT Apparatus under subclass 446 in which another of the serial valves is an
    inlet and exhaust valve and the pressure or flow responsive valve is
    disposed in the motor line between the inlet and exhaust valve and the
    working chamber.


CLS 91/448
TXT Apparatus under subclass 444 in which the serially arranged valves are
    located in the fluid line supplying motive fluid to the motor.


CLS 91/449
TXT Apparatus under subclass 418 in which the same working chamber of the motor
    is provided with at least two waste passages through which motive fluid may
    be diverted or exhausted from the chamber and the valve means is operable
    to control these passages separately of one another.

    (1)     Note.  A waste passage under this definition includes an exhaust
    line or a line branching from an inlet line which is controlled merely to
    prevent motive fluid from reaching the chamber by being opened, while the
    inlet line is open to the chamber.  A passage for motive fluid which is
    directed from the chamber to some motor control means, (e.g., valve
    actuator, feel or holding means) or for some function ancillary to the
    motor operation (e.g., sealing) is excluded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for expansible chamber motors in which motive fluid is constantly
    applied to a working chamber thereof and having a plurality of separately
    controlled vent or waste passages to control the operation of the motor.

    236+,   for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors having multiple
    exhaust passages.

    407+,   for expansible chamber motors having a plurality of exhaust
    passages which are successively controlled in response to working member
    position.


CLS 91/450
TXT Apparatus under subclass 449 in which the valve means controlling one of
    the passages is an inlet and exhaust valve.


CLS 91/451
TXT Apparatus under subclass 450 in which the valve means controlling a second
    passage is a self acting valve operated in response to the motive fluid
    pressure or rate of flow in the chamber or motive fluid lines.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240+    and 242, for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors having
    multiple exhaust passages with one passage controlled by a fluid pressure
    actuated valve.

    452,    for other motors having plural separately controlled waste passages
    for a single chamber, at least one of which is controlled by a motive fluid
    pressure or flow responsive valve.

    468,    and see the subclasses there noted for other motors with self
    acting valves.


CLS 91/452
TXT Apparatus under subclass 449 in which the valve means controlling one of
    the passages is a self acting valve operated in response to the motive
    fluid pressure or rate of flow in the chamber or motive fluid lines.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240+,   for cyclically operable motors having a fluid actuated valve
    controlling one of a plurality of exhaust passages.

    451,    for plural separately controlled waste passages for the same
    chamber where one passage is controlled by a motive fluid pressure or flow
    responsive valve and another passage is controlled by an inlet and exhaust
    valve.

    468,    and see the subclasses there noted for other motors with self
    acting valves.


CLS 91/453
TXT Apparatus under subclass 418 in which a single valve means is provided with
    two or more separate means to cause operation of the valve means.

    (1)     Note.  When the valving comprises separate relatively movable inlet
    and exhaust valves for one working chamber, each valve is considered a
    single valve means within this definition so that a single actuator only on
    each valve is not included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    367,    for motors having position responsive feedback control and plural
    input signal means for a single valve.  NOTE SECTION IV OF THE CLASS
    DEFINITION AND THE PARAGRAPH FOLLOWING THE TITLE IN THE SCHEDULE OF THIS
    CLASS.

    425,    and the subclasses noted thereunder for expansible chamber motors
    having valve means having plural actuating means, one of which is
    responsive to the position of the working member controlled by the valve
    means.


CLS 91/454
TXT Apparatus under subclass 418 in which the valve means comprises two valves,
    each having a movable flow controlling part, one of the valves controlling
    the pressure line to a working chamber and the other controlling the
    exhaust line from the same chamber, at least one of the valves controlling
    its respective line by movement of its movable valve part relative to the
    movable valve part of the other valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    265+,   and the subclasses there noted for cyclically operable expansible
    chamber motors having relatively movable inlet and exhaust valves.


CLS 91/455
TXT Apparatus under subclass 454 in which said two valves control the inlet and
    exhaust of one working chamber of a double acting motor and the movable
    flow controlling part of one of the valves moves as a unit with another
    movable flow controlling part of a valve which controls the flow of motive
    fluid to or from the other working chamber of the double acting motor.


CLS 91/456
TXT Apparatus under subclass 454 in which the movable flow controlling part of
    at least one of said two valves oscillates or rotates about a fixed axis to
    perform its valving function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270,    for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors having relatively
    movable inlet and exhaust valves movable about an axis.


CLS 91/457
TXT Apparatus under subclass 454 in which a single movable actuating member or
    element is operatively associated with said two valves so that the movable
    flow controlling parts of both valves are capable of being moved by the
    member or element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    376,    for working member position feedback controls of the follower type
    having plural movable valve parts one of which is unitary with the working
    member and which are generally of the type having relatively movable inlet
    and exhaust valves operated by a single actuator.


CLS 91/458
TXT Apparatus under subclass 418 in which the valve means is actuated by a
    means which is driven from a rotating shaft and the actuation of the valve
    means varies in accordance with the speed at which the rotating shaft is
    driven.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    366,    for expansible chamber motors having working member position
    feedback to the motive fluid control valve means in which the input control
    signal is derived from a speed governor.  NOTE SECTION IV OF THE CLASS
    DEFINITION AND THE PARAGRAPH FOLLOWING THE TITLE IN THE SCHEDULE OF THIS
    CLASS.

    435,    for expansible chamber motor valve means controlled by the rate of
    movement of the working member and see the subclasses noted thereunder for
    other speed controlled valve means.


CLS 91/459
TXT Apparatus under subclass 418 in which the valve means includes a movable
    part which is caused to move by a means operated by an electrical current
    to effect control of the motive fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for expansible chamber motors with locking means having correlated
    control of the motive fluid in which the correlated control is accomplished
    by electrical means.

    248,    for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors with electrically
    operated means for adjustably controlling the timing of a fluid control
    event.

    275,    for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors having
    electrically operated valve means.  NOTE SECTION IV OF THE CLASS DEFINITION
    AND THE PARAGRAPH FOLLOWING THE TITLE IN THE SCHEDULE OF THIS CLASS.

    361+,   for expansible chamber motors with working member feedback control
    in which the valve means is actuated electrically.  NOTE SECTION IV OF THE
    CLASS DEFINITION AND THE PARAGRAPH FOLLOWING THE TITLE IN THE SCHEDULE OF
    THIS CLASS.


CLS 91/460
TXT Apparatus under subclass 418 in which the valve means is operated by a
    substantially constant mass of fluid forming a fluid link between a valve
    actuating surface and an actuated surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280,    for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors having a pulsator
    actuated distributor.  NOTE SECTION IV OF THE CLASS DEFINITION AND THE
    PARAGRAPH FOLLOWING THE TITLE IN THE SCHEDULE OF THIS CLASS.


CLS 91/461
TXT Apparatus under subclass 418 in which the valve means comprises a main or
    primary valve which is movable by fluid under pressure to control the flow
    of motive fluid to or from the motor and a secondary or pilot valve
    operable to control the application of pressure fluid to the main valve, or
    a fluid actuator therefor, so as to control movement of said main valve,
    said fluid under pressure being separate or separated from the motive fluid
    controlled by the main or primary valve and not entering the working
    chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304+,   for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors having a pilot
    valve controlled distributor.  NOTE SECTION IV OF THE CLASS DEFINITION AND
    THE PARAGRAPH FOLLOWING THE TITLE IN THE SCHEDULE OF THIS CLASS.


CLS 91/462
TXT Apparatus under subclass 418 in which the motor has a working member
    positioned to move in opposite directions in opposed working chambers by
    alternate supply of motive fluid to one side of the piston and the
    alternate exhaust from the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166,    for double acting expansible chamber motors with valve means to
    reverse the direction of movement in response to variations in the motive
    fluid supply line pressure or flow.

    420,    for double acting expansible chamber motors with an exhaust valve
    for the contracting chamber which is controlled by the motive fluid
    pressure applied to the expanding chamber.

    421,    for double acting expansible chamber motors with valve means
    controlling the expanding chamber inlet in response to the contracting
    chamber motive fluid pressure or flow.

    437+,   for double acting expansible chamber motors with an independently
    controlled by-pass between opposed working chambers.

    455,    for double acting expansible chamber motors having relatively
    movable inlet and exhaust valves for one chamber in which one of the valves
    also forms a unitary valve part for the opposed chamber.


CLS 91/463
TXT Apparatus under subclass 462 in which the flow capacity of the motive fluid
    flow line to one working chamber is different from the flow capacity of the
    motive fluid flow line to an opposed working chamber, or the flow capacity
    of the motive fluid flow line from one working chamber is different from
    the flow capacity of the motive fluid flow line from an opposed working
    chambers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    274,    for cyclically operable double acting expansible chamber motors
    having a throttle adjustment for one side of the motor.

    443,    for expansible chamber motors with valve means for providing
    unequal inlet and exhaust flow rates to a single working chamber.


CLS 91/464
TXT Apparatus under subclass 462 in which valve means are provided for
    concurrently opening the opposed working chambers of the double acting
    motor to either inlet or exhaust.

    (1)     Note.  Mere independently operated valves for opposed working
    chambers without some operating means to assure that the opposed chambers
    are simultaneously opened when desired are not included under this
    definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for double acting expansible chamber motors with receiving orifices
    for the opposed working chamber to receive all or a portion of a jet stream
    to cause movement of the working member.

    439,    for double acting expansible chamber motors with an independently
    controlled by-pass between opposed working chambers which by-passes through
    the common pressure inlet line to the motor.


CLS 91/465
TXT Apparatus under subclass 462 in which the valve means comprises two unitary
    inlet and exhaust valves, each controlling the flow of motive fluid to and
    from its respective opposed working chamber, the control of motive fluid
    for each working chamber being effected by the relative movement of the
    unitary movable elements of the valves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323,    for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors having relatively
    movable unitary inlet and exhaust valves for opposed working chambers.


CLS 91/466
TXT Apparatus under subclass 462 in which the inlet and exhaust for the opposed
    chambers is controlled by a single unitary movable valve means having no
    relatively movable parts for the valving function.

    (1)     Note.  Two spaced unitary inlet and exhaust valves in which the
    unitary movable elements are connected together by a rigid means to make
    them move as a unit are included under this definition.


CLS 91/467
TXT Apparatus under subclass 466 in which the valve means oscillates or rotates
    about a fixed axis to perform the valving function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315,    327, 345, 349, and 352+, for cyclically operable expansible chamber
    motors having a distributor which moves about an axis.


CLS 91/468
TXT Apparatus under subclass 418 in which the valve means comprises a valve in
    a line which operates in response to motive fluid pressure, rate of flow,
    or direction of flow in the line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155,    for expansible chamber motors of the multiple expansion type with
    fluid actuated valve means.

    166,    for double acting expansible chamber motors having valve means to
    reverse the direction of movement in response to variations in the motive
    fluid inlet line pressure or flow.

    281+,   for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors having motive
    fluid pressure or flow responsive valve means.

    420,    for expansible chamber motors in which a contacting chamber exhaust
    valve is controlled by expanding chamber pressure or flow.

    421,    for expansible chamber motors in which an expanding chamber inlet
    valve is controlled by contacting chamber pressure or flow.

    432,    for expansible chamber motors having a check valve in the inlet the
    check valve having means providing a disconnectable motive fluid supply
    line.

    433+,   for expansible chamber motors with valve means controlling both the
    inlet and exhaust to a single chamber in response to the motive fluid
    pressure in the supply line or chamber.

    438+,   for expansible chamber motors having a by-pass between opposed
    working chambers held closed by motive fluid pressure.

    441,    for expansible chamber motors having valve means which opens to
    ambient when the pressure in the expanding chamber falls below the pressure
    of the ambient fluid source.

    442,    for expansive chamber motors with a self opening exhaust valve held
    closed by inlet pressure.

    446+,   for expansible chamber motors with relatively movable serial valves
    one of which is a motive fluid pressure or flow responsive valve.  NOTE
    SECTION IV OF THE CLASS DEFINITION AND THE PARAGRAPH FOLLOWING THE TITLE IN
    THE SCHEDULE OF THIS CLASS.

    452,    for expansible chamber motors with plural separately controlled
    waste passages for a single chamber in which one of the passages is
    controlled by a motive fluid pressure or flow responsive valve and subclass
    451 for similar motors in which another of the passages is controlled by an
    inlet and exhaust valve.


CLS 91/469
TXT Apparatus under subclass 418 in which the valve means comprises a unitary
    inlet and exhaust valve for controlling the motive fluid flow for a single
    working chamber having no relatively movable parts for the valving function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323,    for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors having relatively
    movable unitary inlet and exhaust valves for opposed working chambers.

    465,    for double acting expansible chamber motors having relatively
    movable unitary inlet and exhaust valves for controlling the opposed
    chambers thereof.


CLS 91/470
TXT Apparatus under subclass 469 in which the inlet and exhaust valve
    oscillates or rotates about a fixed axis to perform the valving function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    467,    for double acting expansible chamber motors having unitary inlet
    and exhaust valve means movable about an axis and see the subclasses there
    noted for cyclically operable motors with distributors which move about an
    axis.


CLS 91/471
TXT Subject matter under the class definition otherwise provided for.

    (1)     Note.  For example, in this subclass are classified patents
    containing method claims under the class definition.  If a patent contains
    only method claims it is classified in this subclass as an original.  If it
    contains apparatus claims as well as method claims the original is
    classified in the appropriate apparatus subclass of this class and
    cross-referenced to this subclass.


CLS 91/472
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising three or more cylinders
    each cylinder being provided with a relatively reciprocating piston
    (includes diaphragm) to thereby form a plurality of working chambers, the
    cylinders or a transmission element in common operative engagement with
    said cylinders or pistons being adapted to rotate about a fixed axis; said
    cylinders being physically arranged in a manner such that their
    longitudinal axes either (1) intersect at a common point or (2) extend
    parallel to said axis of rotation.

    (1)     Note.  See note in class 417, Pumps, subclass 269 for a statement
    of the line between this class and Class 417 regarding plural cylinder
    devices of the above stated type.

    (2)     Note.  Since all devices having three or more cylinders arranged in
    the above defined relationship are intended to be included under this
    definition regardless of whether the disclosure or claims are directed to a
    pump or a motor, provided the device is in fact capable of operation as a
    motor, such terminology as "motive fluid", "working member" and "working
    chamber", as used in this definition or those indented hereunder, should be
    construed as equally applicable to pumping apparatus and synonymous with
    the terms, "pumped fluid", "pumping member" and "pumping chamber",
    respectively.

    (3)     Note.  The recital in the claims of a plurality of cylinders is
    sufficient to cause classification under this definition if the claimed
    device has a disclosure of three or more cylinders arranged in the above
    defined relationship.  However, the specific designation in the claims of
    only one or a pair of three or more disclosed cylinders precludes
    classification under this definition and would be classified elsewhere in
    the class (e.g., subclasses 243+, if of the moving cylinder type).

    (4)     Note.  To fall within the scope of this definition the motor must
    be of the type which includes at least three cylinders and none of said
    three may be formed integral with the relatively reciprocating piston of
    another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6.5,    for motors having three or more cylinders arranged in parallel,
    radial, or conical relationship with a rotary transmission axis and in
    which motive fluid is supplied to at least one of said cylinders through
    diverse flow paths.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses, for
    mechanical motion converting devices having no motive fluid valving or
    porting claimed and see especially subclass 22 for apparatus for converting
    rotary motion to reciprocating and rotary motion and subclass 55 for
    apparatus employing a cam and slide for converting rotary motion to or from
    reciprocating or oscillating motion.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclasses, for expansible
    chamber devices having plural parallel, radial, or conically arranged
    cylinders in which there is no valving of motive fluid claimed.  The mere
    recital of a ported element or housing which cooperates with or surrounds
    the cylinders is sufficient to exclude classification in Class 92 if, by
    disclosure, the element or housing cooperates with the cylinders to perform
    a valving function.  See especially the following subclasses: 12.1+, for
    displacement control of plural cylinders arranged in parallel, radial, or
    conical relationship with a rotary transmission axis; 56+, for plural
    rotating cylinders; 68+, for relatively movable working members
    interconnected with a common rotatable shaft; and 146+, for plural
    unitarily mounted cylinders.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 269+, for pumps having three or more cylinders
    arranged in parallel, radial, or conical relationship with a rotary
    transmission axis.


CLS 91/473
TXT Apparatus under subclass 472 in which there is provided (1) drive means for
    converting the relative reciprocatory motion between said plural cylinders
    and pistons into rotary motion of a driven member, (2) control means for
    controlling the drive means in some manner and (3) a separate sensing means
    which is responsive to the occurrence of a condition of either the motor or
    motive fluid to effect operation of the control means for altering the
    operation of the drive means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 218+, for pumps having a drive transmission
    including an adjustable cam or linkage which is controlled responsive to a
    condition.


CLS 91/474
TXT Apparatus under subclass 472 in which at least one of said plural working
    chambers either (1) discharges motive fluid to an external destination
    separate from that to which another of said expansible chambers discharges
    fluid or (2) receives motive fluid from an external source separate from
    that from which another of said expansible chambers receives fluid.


CLS 91/475
TXT Apparatus under subclass 472 in which there is provided a reaction member
    in common operative engagement with said plural piston or cylinders for
    converting the relative reciprocatory motion between the pistons and
    cylinders to or from continuous rotary motion of a drive element, there
    being provided resilient means for biasing said reaction member to a
    position causing said motion conversion, said reaction member being
    directly responsive to fluid pressure within the plural expansible chambers
    for movement in opposition to the resilient bias thereon for varying the
    extent of relative reciprocation between said piston and cylinders.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    473,    for control of the drive means by means which includes a separate
    sensing means (i.e., not directly responsive to pressure in the working
    chamber) which responds to a condition (e.g., input or output pressure) of
    the device.


CLS 91/476
TXT Apparatus under subclass 472 in which there is provided individual valve
    means for each for said working chambers to cyclically control the flow of
    motive fluid to or from the chamber, each of said valve means being movable
    relative to another and each controlling the motive fluid for a single
    chamber without effecting motive fluid control for any other chamber.

    (1)     Note.  The valve means may comprise a separate valve movable with
    respect to both the piston and cylinder (i.e., distributor) or may
    comprise, for example, a part in the cylinder wall controlled by the piston
    (e.g., "valveless" or "semi-valveless").


CLS 91/477
TXT Apparatus under subclass 476 in which the cylinders contain pistons which
    reciprocate relative thereto to form the working chambers, each piston
    acting as a valve to control the flow of motive fluid to or from a working
    chamber other than the working chamber of which that piston forms a part.

    (1)     Note.  The piston may act as a pilot to control actuating fluid for
    a valve of another chamber.


CLS 91/478
TXT Apparatus under subclass 476 in which there is provided means for enabling
    the selective adjustment of the time of occurrence of admission or
    discharge of motive fluid to or from at least one of said plural working
    chambers relative to the reciprocatory movement cycle of the relatively
    reciprocating piston and cylinder forming said chamber.


CLS 91/479
TXT Apparatus under subclass 476 in which, incident to the operation of the
    device, the cylinders also have absolute individual movement (e.g.,
    rocking), the individual movement of the cylinders controlling porting to
    control the flow of motive fluid to or from the working chambers.

    (1)     Note.  Under this definition the term cylinder includes merely a
    liner which has individual motion to control the motive fluid without
    movement of the cylinder head.


CLS 91/480
TXT Apparatus under subclass 476 in which the individual valve means comprises
    a valve movable with respect to both the cylinder and relatively
    reciprocating piston therein, said valve being cyclically shifted by
    mechanical means incident to the operation of the device.


CLS 91/481
TXT Apparatus under subclass 480 in which the longitudinal axes of said plural
    cylinders intersect at a common point from which they radiate and are
    contained within a common plane perpendicular to said axis of rotation.


CLS 91/482
TXT Apparatus under subclass 472 having valve means for controlling the
    admission or discharge of motive fluid to or from said plural working
    chambers, there being provided means for enabling the selective adjustment
    of the time of occurrence of admission or discharge of fluid to or from at
    least one of said plural working chambers relative to the reciprocating
    movement cycle of the relatively recipro- cating piston and cylinder
    forming said chamber.

    (1)     Note.  The mere varying of the length of stroke or displacement of
    the device in the absence of a disclosure of valve timing control is
    excluded under this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6.5,    for three or more radial or parallel cylinders having means for
    supplying motive fluid thereto vial diverse flow paths.

    478,    for means for adjusting the time of occurrence of admission and
    discharge of motive fluid in devices having a separate valve for each
    expansible chamber.


CLS 91/483
TXT Apparatus under subclass 482 having a transmission or reaction element
    (e.g., swash-plate, crankshaft, etc.), which is mechanically connected
    (includes abutment type connection) to the cylinders or relatively
    reciprocating pistons and which is adapted to be selectively moved and held
    in different positions for the purpose of changing the time of occurrence
    of admission or discharge of fluid to or from at least one of said working
    chambers.


CLS 91/484
TXT Apparatus under subclass 472 in which there is provided a valve having a
    pair of relatively slidable abutting face portions, relative sliding
    movement of said face portions serving to control admission or discharge of
    fluid to or from said working chambers, and valve face portions being
    biased into relative seating engagement by fluid actuated means which is
    either (1) located externally of said plural working chambers or (2) if
    located within a working chamber being mounted for movement relative to
    both the piston and cylinder forming said working chamber.


CLS 91/485
TXT Apparatus under subclass 484 in which said pair of relatively slidable
    valve face portions are substantially flat and abut in a common plane, one
    of said face portions being mounted for movement relative to the other.


CLS 91/486
TXT Apparatus under subclass 472 including means to conduct a portion of the
    motive fluid to or from a part of the motor assembly to assist said part in
    performing its intended function (e.g., lubricating, sealing, thrust
    balancing).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    484,    for means for exerting a fluid pressure bias on the motor
    distributing valve, in many cases the fluid pressure so utilized being
    motive fluid.


CLS 91/487
TXT Apparatus under subclass 486 in which there is provided valve means
    comprising plural relatively movable elements having interengaging face
    portions for controlling admission or discharge of motive fluid to or from
    said plural working chambers, at least one of said valve elements being
    provided with passage means for conducting motive fluid to or from the
    interface formed by said interengaging face portions, said passage means at
    no time serving to effect control of admission or discharge of motive fluid
    to or from said working chambers.


CLS 91/488
TXT Apparatus under subclass 486 in which motive fluid is conducted to or from
    the motor assembly by means of a fluid conducting passage which is
    physically located within one of said plural pistons.


CLS 91/489
TXT Apparatus under subclass 486 in which there is provided valve means in
    addition to that controlling motive fluid admission or discharge to or from
    said plural working chambers for controlling the flow of motive fluid to or
    from said motor assembly.


CLS 91/490
TXT Apparatus under subclass 472 in which there is provided passage means
    formed within at least one of said plural pistons and extending
    therethrough for the purpose of providing communication between the
    expansible chamber associated with said piston and a source of motive fluid
    supply or discharge.


CLS 91/491
TXT Apparatus under subclass 472 in which the longitudinal axes of said plural
    cylinders intersect at a common point from which they radiate and are
    contained within a common plane perpendicular to said axis of rotation.

    (1)     Note.  In some instances, the longitudinal axes of the cylinders
    move relative to the axis of rotation and devices of this type are intended
    to be included hereunder if the individual cylinder axes pass through the
    common point in at least one position of their movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 247, for meters having two or more
    radially arranged cylinders.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses, for
    mechanical motion fluid valving or porting claimed and see especially
    subclass 22 for  apparatus for converting rotary motion to reciprocating
    and rotary motion, subclass 51, for apparatus employing a crank and
    multiple pitmans for converting rotary motion to or from reciprocating or
    oscillating motion and subclass 55, for apparatus employing a cam slide for
    converting rotary motion to or from reciprocating or oscillating motion.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclasses, for expansible
    chamber devices having plural radial cylinders in which there is no valving
    of motive fluid claimed and see especially subclass 58, for plural rotating
    cylinders in which the axes at a common point, subclasses 72+, for
    relatively movable working members interconnected with a common rotatable
    shaft and in which the shaft axis is intersected by the axis of the working
    members and subclass 148, for three or more unitarily mounted, radially
    arranged cylinders.

    417,    Pumps, subclass 273, for pumps having three or more cylinders
    arranged in radial relationship with a rotary transmission axis.


CLS 91/492
TXT Apparatus under subclass 491 comprising more than one group of plural
    radiating cylinders and in which either (1) the longitudinal cylinder axes
    of one group of plural cylinders are contained longitudinal axes of another
    group or (2) the rotation axis of one group is spaced from the rotation
    axis of another.


CLS 91/493
TXT Apparatus under subclass 491 having plural rigidly interconnected
    cylinders, the piston associated with one of said rigid cylinders being
    interconnected for unitary movement with the piston associated with nother
    of said rigid cylinders.


CLS 91/494
TXT Apparatus under subclass 491 in which said plural cylinders form or are
    connected to or coact with a first common element and said plural pistons
    form or are connected to or coact with a second common element in a manner
    such that relative rotary motion between said first and second common
    elements is positively constrained to less

    than 360o.

    (1)     Note.  To come within the scope of this definition, a plurality of
    cylinders or pistons must be connected to their respective common members
    in a manner which would positively prevent full relative rotary motion
    (e.g., 360o or more) between the common members. Therefore, a simple
    abutment connection between a plurality of pistons and a common
    eccentrically mounted ring is excluded under this definition, even though
    the ring itself may be journaled for rotation and intended to rotate with
    the pistons due to frictional engagement therewith during the normal mode
    of operation.


CLS 91/495
TXT Apparatus under subclass 494 in which either the plural cylinders or
    pistons are connected to their respective common element by means including
    a pivoted connection, and move about said pivoted connection incident to
    the limited relative rotation of said elements.


CLS 91/496
TXT Apparatus under subclass 491 in which the plural cylinders or pistons coact
    with drive transmission means (e.g., crank shaft, gear, grooved cam track,
    etc.), for converting relative reciprocatory movement of said cylinders and
    pistons to or from rotary motion of said cylinders or transmission means,
    said cylinders or pistons co-acting with said drive transmission means in a
    manner such that positive mechanical force transmission is provided
    therebetween during both directions (i.e., to-and-fro) of reciprocatory
    movement of said cylinders or pistons.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    493,    for radially disposed bidirectionally driven reciprocating members
    in which plural rigidly connected pistons reciprocate in plural rigidly
    connected cylinders.

    494+,   for radially disposed bidirectionally driven reciprocating members
    in which the cylinders or pistons form or coact with respective common
    elements having limited relative rotary movement.


CLS 91/497
TXT Apparatus under subclass 491 in which there is provided means to
    selectively vary the length of the reciprocating stroke between said
    cylinders and their respective relatively reciprocating pistons.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 12.1, for displacement control
    of plural cylinders arranged in radial relationship with a rotary
    transmission axis in which there is no valving of motive fluid claimed.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 221+, for condition responsive adjustments of a
    radial pump operating cam.


CLS 91/498
TXT Apparatus under subclass 491 in which there is provided a centrally located
    substantially cylindrically or conically shaped member having an axis from
    which the plural longitudinal cylinder axes radiate, said central member
    being provided with at least one motive fluid conveying passage terminating
    on the peripheral surface thereof, the central member and said plural
    cylinders being mounted for relative rotary movement and individual port
    means in continuous communication with each of said plural cylinders and
    cyclically communicable with the terminal portion of said motive fluid
    conveying passage as a result of said relative rotary movement.


CLS 91/499
TXT Apparatus under subclass 472 in which the longitudinal axes of said plural
    cylinders are parallel to and spaced from said axis of rotation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 244, for meters having plural
    parallel cylinders and a wobble plate or cam associated therewith.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses, for
    mechanical motion converting apparatus having no motive fluid valving or
    porting claimed and see especially subclass 22, for apparatus for
    converting rotary motion to reciprocating and rotary motion and subclass
    55, for apparatus employing a cam and slide for converting rotary motion to
    or from reciprocating or oscillating motion.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclasses, for expansible
    chamber devices having plural radial cylinders in which there is no valving
    of motive fluid claimed and see especially subclass 57, for plural rotating
    cylinders in which the axes of the cylinders are parallel to the axes of
    rotation, subclass 70, for relatively movable working members forming
    opposite walls of a common chamber and interconnected with and parallel to
    a common rotatable shaft, subclass 71, for relatively movable working
    members interconnected with and parallel to a common rotatable shaft.

    417,    Pumps, subclass 269, for pumps having three or more cylinders
    arranged in parallel relationship with a rotary transmission axis.


CLS 91/500
TXT Apparatus under subclass 499 in which said plural parallel cylinders are
    angularly disposed relative to a second set of plural cylinders having
    parallel longitudinal axes.


CLS 91/501
TXT Apparatus in which each of said plural cylinders define a single working
    chamber containing plural piston forming opposite walls thereof, said
    pistons being movable toward and away from each other during contraction
    and expansion of the working chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 70, for expansible chamber
    devices having relatively movable working members forming opposite walls of
    a common chamber and interconnected with and parallel to a common rotatable
    shaft.


CLS 91/502
TXT Apparatus under subclass 499 in which at least one of said plural parallel
    cylinders is either (1) axially longitudinally spaced relative to another
    or (2) provided with a piston which divides same into a pair of spaced
    opposed expansible working chambers.


CLS 91/503
TXT Apparatus under subclass 499 in which there is provided a valve comprising
    a pair of cylindrical parts one rotating with respect to and operating
    within the other, the axis of rotation of the valve part coinciding with
    said fixed axis, the relative rotary movement between the valve parts
    serving to cyclically control admission or discharge of motive fluid to or
    from the plural expansible chambers.


CLS 91/504
TXT Apparatus under subclass 499 in which there is provided means to
    selectively vary the length of the reciprocating stroke between said
    cylinders and their respective relatively reciprocating pistons.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 12.2 for displacement control
    of plural cylinders arranged in parallel relationship with a rotary
    transmission axis in which there is no valving of motive fluid claimed.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 222.1+, for condition responsive adjustment of an
    axial pump operating cam.


CLS 91/505
TXT Apparatus under subclass 504 in which the plural cylinders or pistons coact
    with a common drive transmission element (e.g., swashplate) for converting
    relative reciprocatory movement of said cylinders and pistons to or from
    rotary motion of said cylinders or said transmission element, said
    transmission element, being selectively angularly adjustable relative to
    said parallel cylinder axes for varying the reciprocatory stroke length
    between said cylinders and pistons.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 222.1+, for condition responsive adjustment of an
    axial pump operating cam wherein a cam may be tilted relative to the drive
    shaft axis.


CLS 91/506
TXT Apparatus under subclass 505 in which the transmission element is angularly
    adjusted by means of a motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 222.1+, for condition responsive motor operated
    adjustment of an axial pump operating cam wherein a cam may be tilted
    relative to the drive shaft axis.


CLS 91/507
TXT Apparatus under subclass 499 in which the plural cylinders or pistons coact
    with drive transmission means (e.g., swashplate, interconnecting linkage,
    etc.), for converting relative reciprocatory movement of said cylinders and
    pistons to or from rotary motion of said cylinders or transmission means,
    said cylinders or pistons co-acting with said drive transmission means in a
    manner such that positive mechanical force transmission is provided
    therebetween during both directions (i.e., to-and-fro) of reciprocatory
    movement of said cylinders or pistons.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    502,    for plural, parallel, double acting working members which of
    necessity require positive bidirectional force transmission.


CLS 91/508
TXT PLURAL RELATIVELY MOVABLE OR RIGIDLY INTERCONNECTED WORKING MEMBERS:

    Apparatus under the class definition having plural working members which
    are either (a) relatively movable, or (b) connected to move together as a
    unit under all conditions of operation and which have different faces
    forming moving walls of different working chambers which regardless of the
    positions of the different faces are not in fluid communication during at
    least some part of the operation of said apparatus, said faces being urged
    in the same direction either simultaneously or sequentially by working
    fluid in said chambers.

    (1)     Note.  Under this definition, a means o actuate a valve may be part
    of the motive fluid control means for the plural working members, but a
    means to merely prevent or permit actuation of the valve by some other
    agency has not been considered motive fluid control.

    (2)     Note.  Under this definition, plural expansible chamber type motors
    disclosed as being of the rotary type are specifically excluded unless
    otherwise not meeting the valving requirements of Class 418 (see (5) Note
    on page 91 - 4 of class definitions for relationship to Class 418).

    (3)     Note.  Under this definition, patents disclosing a working member
    having different single-acting working faces forming moving walls of
    different working chambers for the sole purpose of causing reciprocation of
    the working member in opposite directions are not considered to be drawn to
    plural working members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6+,     for an expansible chamber motor having different faces forming
    moving walls of different working chambers which are not in fluid
    communication during at least some part of the operation of said apparatus,
    communication between the working chambers being responsive to the position
    of the different faces.

    170+,   for expansible chamber motors having a plurality of relatively
    movable working members in which one is controlled by, movably
    interconnected with, or moved by another.

    206+,   for expansible chamber motors wherein the cylinder forms a working
    member and has two separate integral fluid actuated surfaces, one being
    formed exteriorly of the other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 61+ for expansible chamber
    devices having relatively movable working members; and subclasses 146+ for
    plural unitarily mounted cylinders or a frame therefor.


CLS 91/509
TXT Having (1) stand-by or (2) redundant means enabling load to be driven upon
    failure of primarily load moving means:

    Apparatus under subclass 508 including a (1) stand-by means becoming
    operative, or (2) one member of a redundant means remaining operative upon
    the inability of at least one working member to drive the load, (1) the
    stand-by means enabling the one working member to once again drive its
    load, or (2) the stand-by means comprising an auxiliary working member for
    taking over the function of the one working member.

    (1)     Note.  A working member may become unable to drive the load as the
    result of a malfunction of its control valve or other associated parts or
    adjuncts which are necessary to the operation of the said working member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    517,    for means controlling the operation of one motor, in response to
    the pressure in another motor.

    519,    for apparatus including a controllable first working member and a
    second working member connected to move with the first working member, and
    manual means or working member position responsive means for controlling
    motive fluid to the second working member so that it will aid in the
    movement of the load of the first working member in the same direction of
    movement thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 420+ for a system having distinct or
    separately operable outputs and condition responsive means controlling the
    systems such as selecting from plural pressure sources.  See in the
    definition of Class 60, subclass 325 under "Motive Fluid Source" for a
    definition of a motive fluid source in terms of Class 60.


CLS 91/510
TXT Stand-by means utilizes an auxiliary motive fluid source for another
    working member to same load:

    Apparatus under subclass 509 wherein the stand-by means comprises means to
    activate or utilize an auxiliary source of motive fluid for causing a
    working member, other than the disabled one, to drive the load which was
    previously driven by the disabled working member (i.e., redundant system).

    (1)     Note.  See section B(1) and B(2) under (4) Note in Class 91
    definitions for a statement of what constitutes a properly claimed motive
    fluid source for classification in this class.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass are those devices having plural
    motors driving the same load and each motor having its own source of motive
    fluid, whereby upon failure of one of the motors, the other motor drives
    the load using either (a) its source of motive fluid, or (b) its source of
    motive fluid in addition to that motive fluid previously supplied to the
    failed motor.


CLS 91/511
TXT Condition responsive means for modifying working member operation:

    Apparatus under subclass 508 having a means for controlling the operation
    of at least one of the working members in response to a sensed condition
    external of the motor in which the one working member operates.

    (1)     Note.  Under this subclass the means could include a condition
    responsive valve in the inlet line from the source to the motor or in the
    exhaust line downstream from the motor, the condition responsive valve
    being more than a relief valve connected between the source and the
    reservoir.

    (2)     Note.  Under this subclass the means could include a means for
    sensing insufficiency of inlet pressure to at least one working member
    which means enables compensation for this insufficiency.

    (3)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are patents having a standby
    auxiliary pressure source for a working member, which source is activated
    upon sensing complete failure of its primary source. See subclasses 509+
    for such devices.

    (4)     Note.  For the purposes of this and indented subclasses, at least,
    "motor" is defined as an expansible chamber comprising a space defined by
    stationary wall member(s) and a movable wall member or the working member
    which outputs to move a load.  Although a motive fluid control valve must
    be claimed in a patent to be classified herein, as required by the class
    definition, said valve is not an element in the definition of "motor" for
    the purpose of this and indented subclasses.

    (5)     Note.  Means "controlling" or "modifying" as used herein includes
    means by which a working member is caused to start to move, to stop from
    moving, or to change speed, force or direction of motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170+,   for means controlling one working member in response to the sensed
    position of another relatively movable working member.  However, control of
    one working member in response to the sensed angular displacements between
    rotating plural shafts driven by separate working members are placed in
    this subclass.

    519,    for nonrelatively movable intercon- nected working members
    controlled in response to the position thereof.


CLS 91/512
TXT Condition is that of a load driven by a working member other than working
    member having its operation modified:

    Apparatus under subclass 511 wherein the external condition is the
    condition of the load driven by one of the working members.

    (1)     Note.  If a force transmitting means driven by the working member
    is rigidly attached thereto the means is then considered to be a part of
    the working member.  However, if the force transmitting means is movable
    relative to the working member, said means is then considered to be part of
    the load.

    (2)     Note.  Placed in this subclass are apparatus having plural working
    members wherein the position of the load of one working member results in
    the control of the motive fluid for another working member when the working
    members are not relatively movable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170+,   for relatively movable working members wherein the motive fluid for
    one working member is controlled as the result of an attained position of
    another working member.


CLS 91/513
TXT Condition is position of fluid control member of motor other than motor
    whose operation is modified:

    Apparatus under subclass 511 wherein the external condition sensed is the
    position of the motive fluid control member of a motor other than the one
    having its operation modified.


CLS 91/514
TXT Pressure responsive valve divides motive fluid between motors:

    Apparatus under subclass 511 including a single fluid pressure or flow
    responsive valve for dividing or controlling the inlet fluid between and
    controlling a plurality of motors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    517,    for a valve which controls the motive fluid to one motor only and
    is actuated in response to the motive fluid to or exhaust from another
    motor.


CLS 91/515
TXT For synchronization of motors:

    Apparatus under subclass 514 wherein the fluid pressure or flow responsive
    valve comprises (a) means for equalizing fluid pressure or flow to the
    plurality of motors, or (b) means for synchronizing the operation of the
    plurality of motors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171,    for means controlling plural working members for synchronization
    thereof by sensing the difference in the distance the members have traveled.

    532,    for noncondition responsive means for insuring equal motive fluid
    supply to plural motors.


CLS 91/516
TXT To give one motor priority to motive fluid over another:

    Apparatus under subclass 514 wherein the fluid pressure or flow responsive
    valve comprises means for giving supply priority to one of the motors, such
    that in the absence of sufficient pressure or flow, supply to the one motor
    will be take precedence over supply to the other motor.


CLS 91/517
TXT Condition sensed is working member speed or working fluid pressure of
    another motor (i.e., fluid pressure or flow to or from expansible chamber
    of the other motor):

    Apparatus under subclass 511 wherein the external condition is the
    condition of a motor other than the one having its operation modified
    (e.g., speed, fluid pressure, amount of flow or lack thereof to or from the
    other motor).

    (1)     Note.  Specifically excluded from this subclass are patents wherein
    the condition of the other motor is the position of its working member.
    Patents to plural relatively movable working member wherein the position of
    one working member is responsible for the control of another, are found in
    subclasses 170+.  But see subclass 519 for nonrelatively movable
    interconnected working members controlled in response to the position
    thereof.

    (2)     Note.  The condition of a motor may be sensed at any point between
    the motor and its control valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    509,    for standby working member means which is activated when another
    working member means becomes inoperative.

    512,    for working members whose operation is modified in response to its
    load; and for working members whose operation is modified in response to
    the load of another motor.  See also subclass 512 for a statement as to
    what is considered to be a load.

    513,    for a motor which is controlled in response to the sensed position
    of a motive fluid control valve for another motor.


CLS 91/518
TXT Motive fluid control valve responsive to pressure in supply line to or
    exhaust line from motor which it modifies:

    Apparatus under subclass 511 wherein the means comprises a motive fluid
    control valve responsive to a change in the sensed condition in the motive
    fluid inlet line to the motor or in the motive fluid exhaust line from the
    motor to change the operation of said motor.


CLS 91/519
TXT With means for selectively changing the speed or force exerted on load by
    the selective application of motive fluid in a single direction to one or
    more working members:

    Apparatus under subclass 508 having means for selectively changing the load
    output speed or force by selectively applying motive fluid to different
    working members interconnected to actuate the load or by selectively
    applying different working fluid pressures in a single direction to one
    working member of a plurality of working members driving the load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    415+,   for a working member having its movement controlled as a function
    of motive fluid pressure acting on its opposed pressure surfaces.

    533,    for plural rigidly connected working members controlled by a single
    motive fluid control valve.


CLS 91/520
TXT Motors connected in series:

    Apparatus under subclass 508 including a conduit means for connecting the
    contracting chamber of one motor with the expanding chamber of another
    motor (serial connection).

    (1)     Note.  A mere connection through the reservoir is not considered a
    conduit means for this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Both the one motor and the other motor must have a fluid
    pressure input and a mechanical output (e.g., motor) or a mechanical input
    and a fluid pressure output (e.g., pump).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 533+ for an expansible chamber device
    which has a fluid pressure input and a fluid pressure output (e.g.,
    pulsator) with no mechanical output but which pressurizes the motive fluid
    for an expansible chamber motor.


CLS 91/521
TXT Separate valve means actuatable by a common nonmanual actuator or
    separately actuatable valve means with common manual actuator:

    Apparatus under subclass 508 having (a) separate valve means for plural
    working members and a single nonmanual means for actuating each of the
    valve means separately, or (b) separately actuatable valve means for plural
    working members with a common manual actuator.

    (1)     Note.  The single means which actuates the separate valves may have
    several different means to move it (e.g., plural handles, plural
    solenoids). Conversely, the single element which actuates separate valves
    may be a single handle or switch which controls individual operations for
    each valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    508,    for plural valves with manual means to simultaneously operate them
    in identical fashion without means to adjust the movement of one valve
    relative to another.

    530,    for separately controlled valves for each working member.

    533,    for plural rigidly connected working members controlled by a single
    valve.

    536,    for relatively movable working members controlled by a single
    motive fluid control valve.  A single motive fluid control valve is one
    having a single movable member, such as a rotatable or slidable valve core
    or sleeve, which may have a plurality of variously arranged fluid passages
    which may be caused to be aligned with passages in an associated stationary
    member to control one or more motor means upon various movements of said
    movable member.


CLS 91/522
TXT With means to independently actuate valve means:

    Apparatus under subclass 521 wherein, in addition to the single actuating
    means, included is a means permitting independent operation of the separate
    valve means.


CLS 91/523
TXT Simultaneously actuated separate valve means:

    Apparatus under subclass 521 wherein the separate valve means may be
    activated simultaneously.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 536 for device having relatively movable
    working members controlled by a single valve means.


CLS 91/524
TXT Successive actuation of separate valve means:

    Apparatus under subclass 521 wherein the separate valve means are activated
    successively.


CLS 91/525
TXT With means to control the working fluid to one working member for movement
    relative to another without controlling the working fluid to the other
    working member by said means:

    Apparatus under subclass 508 having means to individually control one
    working member to cause relative motion between said one working member and
    another without altering the operation of the other working member.

    (1)     Note.  Each working member may have its own control valve or there
    may be valve means controlling more than one working member simultaneously
    and an additional valve controlling either inlet or exhaust for only one
    working member.

    (2)     Note.  The means is more than a mere check valve in the inlet line
    to one of the motors.

    (3)     Note.  Plural motors controlled by valves of the single selector
    type are included here if the valve, when actuated, controls one motor to
    the exclusion of another motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    536,    for plural relatively movable working members controlled by a
    single selector type valve wherein the working members are controlled
    simultaneously upon actuation of said valve.


CLS 91/526
TXT With multiway valve in series with control means:

    Apparatus under subclass 525 and having a multiway valve disposed in series
    with the means to individually control one working member whereby the
    relative motion between working members may be produced.


CLS 91/527
TXT Valve controlled by remote means (e.g., radio, electromagnetic, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 525 wherein the control means is controlled by a
    remotely controlled device.

    (1)     Note.  "Remote control" as used in this subclass includes means in
    addition to a pilot valve such as a radio controlled means controlling the
    fluid for operating the fluid pressure operated valve.

    (2)     Note.  Other remote control devices include electromagnetic means,
    light sensitive means, sound or temperature sensitive means dedicated
    pump-motor systems (pulsator), etc.


CLS 91/528
TXT Control means is fluid pressure operated valve:

    Apparatus under subclass 525 wherein the means comprises a valve which is
    actuated by a means responsive to the application of a pressurized fluid.


CLS 91/529
TXT Fluid pressure operated valve controlled by a pilot valve:

    Apparatus under subclass 528 having a pilot valve for controlling the fluid
    operated valve.


CLS 91/530
TXT Control means includes separate control valves for each working member:

    Apparatus under subclass 525 wherein the means to individually control one
    working member relative to another comprises a separate control valve for
    each working member.


CLS 91/531
TXT With additional control valve in series with at least one separate control
    valve in supply line to one of motors:

    Apparatus under subclass 530 and further including a second valve between
    the source and one of the motors, the second valve being disposed in serial
    relationship with respect to at least one of the control valves.


CLS 91/532
TXT With means for proportioning motive fluid supply to plural motors:

    Apparatus under subclass 508 having means (e.g., a flow divider valve) for
    insuring predetermined proportional motive fluid supply to plural motors.

    (1)     Note.   The means has to be more than a mere conduit
    interconnecting the chambers of two motors at all times; however, conduits
    particularly designed and claimed to proportion the motive fluid among
    plural motors is included in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  A plurality of valves each dedicated to control the motive
    fluid to a fluid motor is not considered to be means to proportion motive
    fluid under this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    515,    for a condition responsive means for equalizing supply to plural
    motors.


CLS 91/533
TXT Single valve for plural rigidly connected working members:

    Apparatus under subclass 508 having a single valve controlling motive fluid
    to plural motors, the motor working members being rigidly connected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    519,    for plural working members which may be rigidly connected and
    having means to selectively apply motive fluid to one or more of said
    working members to change the output speed or force acting on the load.


CLS 91/534
TXT Single valve for relatively movable working members driving common load:

    Apparatus under subclass 508 having a single valve controlling motive fluid
    to plural motors, the motor working members being relatively movable and
    connected to a common output.


CLS 91/535
TXT Relatively movable working members of unequal cross-sectional areas:

    Apparatus under subclass 508 wherein at least two of the working members
    are relatively movable and have cross-sectional areas which are unequal.


CLS 91/536
TXT Single valve for relatively movable working members:

    Apparatus under subclass 508 wherein at least two of the working members
    are relatively movable and have their movements controlled by a common
    valve arrangement.


CLS 92/
TTL EXPANSIBLE CHAMBER DEVICES

CLS 92/
TXT INDEX TO CLASS DEFINITION AND NOTES



    I       CLASS DEFINITION

    II      DEFINITION OF TERMS

    III     MISCELLANEOUS CLASS NOTES

    IV      STATEMENT RELATING TO PLACEMENT OF PATENTS INVOLVING COMBINATION
    AND SUBCOMBINATION SUBCLASSES

    V       INDEX TO CLASSES NOTED IN (1) SECTIONS I-IV AND (2) THE SUBCLASSES
    OF THIS CLASS  population

    I       CLASS DEFINITION

    A.      This class relates to devices which include an expansible chamber,
    said chamber having a wall portion thereof (i.e., a working member) movable
    in a to and fro motion to vary the volume of the chamber, and having a
    fluid conducting passage means in communication with the chamber for
    introducing or withdrawing fluid therefrom, said device being the type in
    which:

    1.      The introduction of fluid into the chamber or the withdrawal of
    fluid from the chamber acts upon the movable wall portion and effects a
    movement thereof in a direction to change the volume of the chamber and
    produce a mechanical force output which is employed to do work (e.g.,
    motor) or

    2.      Application of a mechanical force to the movable wall portion
    effects a movement of such movable wall portion in a direction to change
    the volume of the chamber to draw fluid into or expel fluid from the
    chamber (e.g., pump).

    B.      This class also takes miscellaneous subcombinations of motors or
    pumps disclosed as being of the type having a chamber as indicated in part
    A, above, not involving control of the working fluid and not provided for
    in other classes, (e.g., bellows walls, diaphragms or pistons).

    C.      This class excludes means to control the fluid to or from the
    chamber, except in the case of a sealing means for a working member which
    is adapted under certain conditions of operation to flex away from the
    encompassing chamber wall to allow fluid passage between said means and the
    chamber wall.

    (1)     Note.  CLAIMS NOT CONTROLLING IN PATENTS PRIOR TO 1936

    Patents issued prior to 1936 have not necessarily been classified by claims
    so that the placement of these patents does not necessarily indicate lines
    of classification. However, most of the patents regardless of their age
    have been placed in accordance with their claimed subject matter.

    (2)     Note.  COMBINATIONS WITH LOAD DEVICES

    Inasmuch as a mechanical force output of an expansible chamber device
    within the definition of this class is to operate or move a load the
    inclusion of the load in the claim by name only or in general terms will
    not exclude a patent from this class.  An exception to this general rule
    exists where the load on the expansible chamber device is a valve.  The
    combination of an expansible chamber device and a valve as the load moved
    thereby, even if the valve is claimed by name only, is excluded from this
    class and will be found in Class 137, Fluid Handling, or Class 251, Valves
    and Valve Actuation.

    This line also applies where the load is a tool:  that is, a named tool
    moved by the expansible chamber will not exclude a patent from this class
    if no tool details are recited.  However, if a support for the work being
    acted upon by the tool is claimed, classification in the appropriate tool
    class results even though both the tool and the support are claimed by name
    only.  Also see Search Class 173 note in section III below for the line
    with regard to a nominally claimed tool driven by an expansible chamber
    device combined with other features such as work cleansing or tool feeding.

    No attempt has been made to review the classification of all patents found
    in classes relating to loads adapted to be moved by an expansible chamber
    device.  Thus, it is to be noted that the original classification of all
    patents is not consistent with the above statement as to nominally claimed
    loads and this particularly applies as to classes not recently
    reclassified.  In those instances in which a body of art is known to exist
    in a given class in which the load adapted to be moved by the expansible
    chamber device is claimed only nominally, and especially where the
    classification of that class provides for a fluid pressure actuator for the
    device, currently issuing patents will not be classified as originals in
    Class 92 even though the load is only nominally claimed

    The means which transmits power from the working member of the expansible
    chamber device to the load to be moved (e.g., linkage, gearing, etc.) is
    not considered to be the load to be moved by the expansible chamber device.
     See section III, under Search Class 74, for a discussion of this subject.

    (3)     Note.  RELATIONSHIP TO CLASS 91 For the relationship between this
    class and Class 91, see "(3) Note" in the class definition of Class 91.

    (4)     Note.  RELATIONSHIP TO CLASS 60 Class 92 is directed to expansible
    chamber devices per se of the type which includes an oscillating or
    reciprocating working member and is generally related to Class 60, as a
    subcombination of a Class 60 device of the type which includes an
    expansible chamber.

    More specifically the line may be categorized as follows:

    A.      Plural or combined with a  motor

    (1)     The combination of an expansible chamber device of the type set
    forth in part A 1., section I, of the class definition combined with a
    motor of a different type is classified in Class 60. However, the
    combination of a Class 92, Expansible Chamber Devices with a motor which
    performs work solely for use by the expansible chamber device (e.g., move
    the working member, or adjust a part thereof) is classified in Class 92.

    The combination of a plurality of Class 92, Expansible Chamber Devices
    having a plurality of working members (e.g., pistons) is classified in
    Class 92.

    B.      Working fluid source,  modification or exhaust  treatment

    (1)     Pumps.  The inclusion in a claim of a pump broadly which provides
    motive fluid for utilization by the Class 92, Expansible Chamber Devices
    does not preclude classification in Class 92.

    The following examples have been considered to be nominal inclusion of a
    pump and if so claimed would not preclude classification in Class 92:

    (a) a pump

    (b) a rotary pump

    (c) a motor driven pump

    (d) a motor driven rotary pump

    (e)     an internal combustion engine having an intake manifold (as a
    source of vacuum)

    (f)     a plurality of pumps arranged in parallel

    (g)     a circuit comprising a sump, pump and expansible chamber device

    The following examples have been considered to be significant inclusion of
    a pump and if so claimed would preclude classification in Class 92 and
    cause classification in Class 60, if otherwise appropriate:

    (a)     a pump which is characterized as to type, e.g., centrifugal,
    eduction, constant displacement, variable displacement, pulsator, etc.
    (however, see (b) in the preceding paragraph)

    (b)     a motor driven pump in which the motor is characterized as to type,
    e.g., turbine, electric motor, internal combustion engine (however, see (e)
    in the immediately preceding paragraph)

    (c)     a pump which has any detail thereof recited as, for example, a
    "piston"

    (d)     a plurality of pumps in series

    (e)     a particular physical relation between a nominal pump and (1) a
    motor supplied thereby or (2) with a sump, reservoir or tank forming part
    of the circuit supplying the pump.  For example, this particular physical
    relation may include their relation in space or mechanical interconnection
    means.

    See particularly Class 60, subclasses 325+.

    (2)     Accumulators.

    An expansible chamber device in constant communication with an accumulator
    for pressurized working fluid is not precluded from Class 92 regardless of
    the specificity with which the accumulator is recited, the accumulator in
    this case being considered to be merely a part of the expansible chamber.

    (3)     Internal Generation.

    Class 60 takes an expansible chamber device in which the working fluid
    within the expansible chamber device is heated or cooled, as, for example,
    by a fluid in heat exchange relation with the interior of the chamber.
    Such fluid may be the same working fluid used in the chamber either before
    or after it passes through the chamber.  However, a mere heat exchange
    space or jacket associated with the chamber through which a heat exchange
    fluid may be circulated is not excluded from Class 92, unless some means
    are provided to control the flow of heat exchange fluid into or out of the
    space or jacket. See Class 60, subclass 508.

    (4)     Heating, Superheating or  External Generation

    An expansible chamber device having a nominally claimed means to heat or
    superheat the working fluid before introduction into the expansible chamber
    is not precluded from Class 92.  For example, Class 92 takes a boiler
    combined with an expansible chamber device while a "fire tube boiler"
    combined with a Class 92 expansible chamber device would be classified in
    Class 60.  See, for example, Class 60, subclasses 643+.

    Class 92 does not take the combination of an expansible chamber device with
    an explosive generation of working fluid even if nominally claimed. See,
    for example, Class 60 subclasses 632+.

    (5)     Exhaust Treatment or Handling

    Class 60 takes combinations involving treatment of motive fluid after it
    leaves an expansible chamber where means is claimed to change some
    characteristic of the fluid.  A condenser, muffler or filter are examples
    of such means, but the inclusion of a condenser, muffler or filter in a
    claim by name only is not sufficient to preclude a patent from Class 92.

    Class 60 also takes combinations involving handling of exhaust fluid from a
    fluid motor. Handling is considered to necessarily include more than a mere
    pipe or chamber to conduct the exhaust fluid away.  However, an exhaust
    fluid conductor having a number of ports therein merely for the purpose of
    dividing the exhaust stream is more than a mere chamber or pipe and is
    classified in Class 60. Claimed limitations to an elbow, support or other
    fitting which constitutes a mere part of the exhaust pipe will be ignored,
    but any significant relation of the pipe and expansible chamber device will
    result in classification in the appropriate exhaust treatment subclass of
    Class 60.  A particular physical relation or mechanical inter-connection
    between a chamber or reservoir for receiving exhaust fluid from the motor
    and the motor has been considered exhaust handling for Class 60.  See Class
    60, subclasses 272+ and 685+.

    C.      Pulsators

    Class 60 takes a pulsator system in which a generally constant mass of
    confined working fluid is moved by the working member of one expansible
    chamber device to effect movement of the working member of said expansible
    chamber device.  Where only one of the expansible chamber devices forming a
    pulsator system is claimed, classification is generally in Class 92.
    However, see (3) Note of the definition of subclasses 533+ of Class 60 for
    a list of pulsator elements or subcombinations classifiable in Class 60.

    II      DEFINITION OF TERMS

    NONWORKING CHAMBER

    Any space within a part of an expansible chamber device which is not
    designed to receive working fluid for acting upon the working member, or
    for being acted upon by the working member.

    WORKING CHAMBER

    The space in an expansible chamber device which includes the working member
    and which is adapted to receive working fluid for acting upon the working
    member, or for being acted upon by the working member.

    WORKING MEMBER

    The wall portion of the expansible chamber of an expansible chamber device
    which is acted upon by the working fluid to be moved thereby to change the
    volume of the chamber and produce a mechanical force output, or which,
    having a mechanical force applied thereto is moved to change the volume of
    the chamber to either draw fluid into or expel fluid from the chamber.  The
    term includes the movable wall portion and any part which is immovably
    fixed thereto (e.g., piston rod).

    PISTON

    A working member which has relative sliding sealing engagement with the
    encompassing wall of a cylinder type working chamber.  The principal parts
    of a piston consist of an end face portion and a side wall portion which
    are defined as follows:

    END FACE

    The end face of the piston consists of the portion thereof which is
    opposite the abutment of reaction surface of the cylinder and which is
    adapted to contact the working fluid.

    SIDE WALL

    The side wall of the piston consists of that portion which is opposite the
    wall of the cylinder which slidably engages the piston.

    CYLINDER

    A rigid external member which permanently surrounds the piston, the latter
    constituting a relatively moving wall for the expansible chamber, the other
    walls of which are formed by the cylinder, and the cylinder ordinarily
    including the abutment or reaction surface against which the motive fluid
    acts, or the piston forming the abutment for the cylinder when the cylinder
    is movable and the piston fixed.  However, the abutment or reaction surface
    for the piston need not necessarily be formed by the cylinder but may be
    formed by a second relatively movable opposed piston within the cylinder.

    Working Fluid:

    The fluid which is admitted into or withdrawn from the expansible chamber
    to effect movement of the working member, or the fluid which is either
    drawn into or expelled from the expansible chamber responsive to movement
    of the working member.

    III     MISCELLANEOUS CLASS NOTES

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 232+  for an expansible chamber
    type volume or rate of flow meter.  Class 73 takes an expansible chamber
    meter combined with registering mechanism and a meter incapable of general
    use as an expansible chamber device.  A meter is considered to be incapable
    of such general use if there is no disclosed means to take power therefrom
    for external use such as to a registering mechanism.  Therefore class 92
    takes an expansible chamber device disclosed as a meter having means to
    take power therefrom such as for an unclaimed registering mechanism;
    subclasses 700+  for a fluid pressure gauge.  Class 73 takes a sealed
    capsule disclosed as forming a pressure sensing means.  Class 73 also takes
    an expansible chamber device combined with a means to indicate the
    condition being sensed by the deflection of the movable wall of the
    expansible chamber device.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses for a
    mechanical movement, gearing or element.  Class 74 takes a motion
    converting linkage, gearing or element there provided for even though a
    piston and cylinder is recited where such piston and cylinder amounts to no
    more than a named load on or drive source for the linkage, gearing or
    element; even a recitation of a geometrical or spatial arrangement of
    plural pistons and cylinders is not considered to constitute more than a
    named load or drive source and does not preclude classification in Class
    74.  A support, casing, housing or covering (e.g., a crankcase) may also be
    included in a claim to a Class 74 mechanism, provided that only so much
    detail of such support, casing, housing or covering is recited as to
    constitute a support or enclosure for the mechanism. For example, a machine
    element such as a crankshaft which, per se, is classifiable in Class 74
    will still be in Class 74 even though a crankcase or cover therefore is
    recited.  Similarly a mechanical movement (e.g., a piston, connecting rod
    and crankshaft) which, per se, is classifiable in Class 74 is still proper
    for Class 74 even though it includes a piston housing (e.g., cylinder) and
    crankshaft housing (e.g., crankcase).  Class 92 takes a casing for a
    crankshaft or other Class 74 element where disclosed as being associated
    with an expansible chamber device either where such casing is claimed, per
    se, or where the Class 74 element is nominally claimed.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, for an expansible chamber device which
    is limited for use as a part of an internal combustion engine.  Class 123
    has not been cleared and many expansible chamber devices which are not
    limited for use in an internal combustion engine will be found in Class 123
    without any stated line or perceptible distinction with the subject matter
    found in Class 92.

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, subclasses 56+ for a fluid pressure
    actuated gun in which a projectile is impelled from a confined space or
    barrel by the force of a fluid under pressure.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 30+ for a fluid pressure
    compensator for a fluid system, comprising a chamber provided with a
    movable wall (e.g., piston or diaphragm) to allow the volumetric capacity
    of said chamber to be varied, and disclosed as for receiving and
    accommodating a surge of fluid in the system;  subclasses 118+ for a
    circumferentially corrugated or pleated flexible tubular member of conduit.
     Class 92 takes such a device where the sole specific disclosure or a claim
    is directed to a bellows device for an expansible chamber device;
    appropriate subclasses, for a tubular member, even though disclosed as a
    cylinder for an expansible chamber device.  Class 138 takes a tubular
    member disclosed as a cylinder for an expansible chamber device, where the
    claim is directed to no more than the wall structure of such tubular member.

    173,    Tool Driving and Impacting, appropriate subclasses for an
    expansible chamber device for operating an impact delivering means or for
    operating a tool combined with work cleansing or feed means and see section
    IV of the class definition of Class 173 for a statement of the line between
    Class 92 and Class 173.

    184,    Lubrication, appropriate subclasses for lubrication of general
    utility, and particularly subclasses 18+ for lubrication of an engine
    cylinder. Class 184 takes a nominal cylinder and piston provided with
    lubricating means. Class 92 takes the combination of a cylinder and piston
    and lubricating means therefor where either the cylinder or piston is
    modified for a purpose other than for lubrication. Claimed structural
    limitations, for example, such as sealing means between the cylinder and
    piston or specific piston construction effects classification in Class 92.
    However the claiming of a pitman or connecting rod pivotally secured to a
    piston including means to lubricate such connection does not preclude
    classification in Class 184.

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    especially subclasses 213+ for an expansible chamber fluid motor in claimed
    combination with a more than named stationary lift for raising a vehicle in
    its entirety between spaced vertical positions, and subclasses 272+ for an
    expansible chamber fluid motor in claimed combination with a more than
    named load-underlying support surface (e.g., external load support guide
    structure which is not necessary to the fluid motor internal drive,
    particular load-underlying support surface structure, elevator
    counterbalances).

    188,    Brakes, appropriate subclasses for brakes and locks of general
    utility and particularly, subclasses 297+ for a fluid type brake or
    dashpot.  Class 188 takes a fluid containing chamber having a movable wall
    (e.g., piston and cylinder) or an element thereof where the sole specific
    disclosure or a claim is directed to a dashpot or brake;  subclass 67 for a
    brake or lock for a rod which may include a piston.  Class 188 takes a
    piston and cylinder combined with a movement retarding or preventing means,
    where the piston and cylinder is only nominally set forth in the claim.

    220,    Receptacles, appropriate subclasses for the structure of a device
    disclosed as a cylinder for an expansible chamber device, where the claimed
    subject matter includes no more than the structure of a container and
    particularly subclasses 200+ for a container closure.  Class 220 takes the
    combination of a cylinder and a closure or head therefor, or a cylinder
    closure or head, per se, where the claimed subject matter includes no more
    than a container and closure or a container closure of general utility.
    Class 92 takes such combination or the closure, per se, where the claim
    includes subject matter which limits the device to an element of a working
    chamber for an expansible device, such as for example fluid porting in the
    closure, or means on the closure for cooperating with a piston part.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 206+ for a resilient wall dispenser, and
    subclasses 386+ for a dispenser comprising a container or cylinder provided
    with a follower (e.g., piston) adapted to act against a fluent material to
    expel the material from the chamber.  Class 222 takes a combined container
    and follower where the sole specific disclosure or a claim is directed to a
    dispenser for fluent material.  However, Class 92 takes a claim to a
    follower or piston, per se, even though disclosed as for use in a
    dispensing device.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 12+ for a fluid pressure
    actuated valve, and especially subclasses 61+ for a valve having a fluid
    actuator which includes a diaphragm, bellows or flexible wall type
    expansible chamber device and subclasses 62+ for a fluid actuator
    comprising an expansible chamber device having a cylinder with a relatively
    movable piston therein. Class 251 takes a nominally recited valve combined
    with an expansible chamber device actuating means therefor; subclasses 324+
    for a reciprocating piston type valve and subclass 331 for a reciprocating
    diaphragm type valve.  Class 251 takes a piston or diaphragm when there is
    a disclosure that such piston or diaphragm is used as a valve element.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 93 for a fluid actuated pushing or pulling implement.  Class 254
    takes a fluid pressure actuated pushing or pulling implement where some
    detail of the load engaging means is claimed.

    267,    Spring Devices, appropriate subclasses for a fluid type spring
    device.  Class 267 takes a device comprising a chamber provided with a
    movable wall (e.g., piston and cylinder) and adapted to contain a fluid
    designed to contact and exert a force against said movable wall, or an
    element of such device (e.g., piston) when there is a disclosure that such
    device is used as a spring device.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, appropriate subclasses for a packing
    or sealing member, even though disclosed as sealing between relatively
    movable elements of an expansible chamber device.  Class 277 takes a
    nominally claimed piston and cylinder combination, or a nominally claimed
    piston or cylinder, per se, where the claim is otherwise directed to a
    packing or sealing means between relatively movable surfaces of said
    cylinder and piston or on said cylinder or piston.  Class 92 takes such
    devices, where some details of the cylinder or piston is set forth in the
    claim.  However, structure of such device which is solely intended to
    cooperate with the packing or sealing means is not considered a detail of
    the device for Class 92, and is classified in Class 277.  A device
    including either a flexible cup or flange type sealing member combined with
    a supporting body structure is classified in Class 92 where such device is
    disclosed as a piston for either a pump or motor.  Such sealing structure
    either claimed, per se, or combined with a supporting body structure and
    disclosed as a device other than a piston for a pump or motor is classified
    in Class 277.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 201+ for expanding fluid
    thermometers.  Class 374 takes, expanding fluid bulb or expansible chamber
    driving an indicator.  Such a bulb or chamber with an indeterminate load is
    classified in Class 60, subclasses 516+; an expansible chamber, per se, is
    in Class 92; and a bulb, per se, is in Class 428, subclass 35.

    384,    Bearings, appropriate subclasses for bearings and guides.  Class
    384 takes a nominally claimed piston and cylinder combination as a guide
    and slide where the claim is otherwise directed to a specific surface
    structure of one, or both of said elements to form a bearing surface.
    Further the combination of a nominal cylinder having an opening in an end
    wall thereof slidably receiving a piston rod is considered a slide and
    guide and classified in Class 384, Class 92 takes the above combination
    where the piston is claimed. Subclasses 429+ for a crankshaft bearing
    support.  Class 384 takes an engine crankcase enclosing and supporting
    bearings for a crankshaft, the inclusion of a nominal cylinder, or
    cylinders does not preclude classification in Class 384.  Class 384 takes a
    nominal piston, or cylinder where the claim is otherwise directed to a
    specific surface structure to form a bearing surface.

    403,    Joints and Connections, particularly subclasses 230+ for a rod
    connected to a base plate or head.  Class 403 takes the combination of a
    nominally claimed piston and means for either pivotally or rigidly mounting
    a rod thereto where the subject matter claimed amounts to no more than a
    connection between a rod or a means to pivotally mount a rod and a tubular
    or cup-shaped member.  Class 92 takes such combination where some detail of
    the piston other than that which is utilized solely for the purpose of
    effecting the joint or connection between the piston and the rod or rod
    mounting member is claimed. For example, claimed features involving sealing
    means on the piston, specific piston forming material, ribs or fins on the
    piston other than those utilized to support or mount the rod or rod
    mounting means on the piston, or structure in which a portion of the rod or
    rod mounting means extends through the piston end face are considered as
    piston details and are classified in Class 92.

    417,    Pumps, and see the class definition of Class 417, for a statement
    of the line.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, for planetary
    gear transmissions, per se. The same line exists between Class 92 and Class
    475 as exists between Class 92 and Class 74.

    477,    Interrelated Power Delivery Controls, Including Engine Control, for
    interrelated controls between an engine and a transmission, clutch, or
    brake.  Class 477 was formed from patents in Classes 74 and 192 and so the
    same line exists between Class 91 and Class 477 as exists between Class 91
    and Classes 74 and 192.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 218+ for piston and cylinder type hypodermic
    device, and subclasses 212+ for a pump type syringe.  Class 604, Surgery,
    provides for a device which includes no more than a piston and cylinder or
    other type of expansible chamber device, or any subcombination thereof, but
    in which the sole specific disclosure or claim is directed to a hypodermic
    dosing device or syringe.



    IV      STATEMENT RELATING TO PLACEMENT OF PATENTS INVOLVING COMBINATION
    AND SUBCOMBINATION SUBCLASSES

    In many instances the schedule of this class provides for a combination
    which requires a given subcombination and elsewhere below provides for the
    subcombination.

    The following rule has been followed as to the placement of the original
    patent and as to cross-referencing and should be followed in the future:

    Where the combination subclass requires the same subcombination as is
    provided for in the subcombination subclass (i.e., subcombination defined
    with the same specificity in both subclasses) a patent disclosing the
    combination is placed as an original in, or under, the combination subclass
    regardless of whether the claims are directed to the combination or
    subcombination and is not cross-referenced to the subcombination subclass.
    A patent disclosing only the subcombination and claiming same is placed as
    an original in the subcombination subclass and is not cross-referenced to
    the combination subclass.

    This rule is applicable only in instances where there is but a single
    subcombination subclass (i.e., no indented subclasses), but the combination
    subclass may be further subdivided into indented subclasses.

    The prime feature of this situation is the that the subcombination must, by
    definition, be of equal specificity in the two subclasses.  A search for
    the subcombination, at least in the case where it is adapted to be used in
    the combination, of necessity involves all of the patents in the
    combination subclass. Under this system of placing the patents a complete
    search of the combination can be made in the combination subclass, and of
    the subcombination in both subclasses without the addition to the search
    files of the otherwise necessary cross-reference copies.

    The subclasses involved in this combination-subcombination relationship
    have been indicated in the schedule by numbers in parenthesis, as explained
    in a paragraph after the class title.

    Exemplary of this situation in the Class 92 schedule are subclasses 11 and
    12.  It is noted that subclass 11 provides for a working member combined
    with means to control the flow of nonworking arresting fluid therefor in
    which said flow control means is responsive to the position of the working
    member and an auxiliary adjustable throttle for further controlling such
    flow while subclass 12 merely requires an adjustable throttle for
    controlling such flow.  As between these subclasses a patent having a
    disclosed means responsive to the position of the working member for
    controlling the flow of nonworking arresting fluid for a working member
    combined with an auxiliary adjustable throttle is placed as an original in
    subclass 11, whether or not working member position control means is
    claimed and is not cross-referenced in subclass 12.  A complete search for
    the subject matter provided for in subclass 12 of necessity involves all of
    the patents in subclass 11.

    V       INDEX TO CLASSES NOTED IN (1) SECTIONS I-IV AND (2) THE SUBCLASSES
    OF THIS CLASS.

    After each class listed below, the notation "See ---" refers to the
    sections of the class definition, and the subclasses of Class 92 in which
    there are references to the class listed.

    29,     Metal Working.  See subclass 896.8.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings). See subclass 51.

    60,     Power Plants.  See section I (4) Note, section III and subclasses
    80.

    73,     Measuring and Testing.  See section III and subclasses 1.01, 34,
    48, 49, 89, 90, 96, 98, 118, 120, and 148.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism.  See section I (2) Note, section III
    and subclasses 31, 34, 68, 90, 140, 168, and 261.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus.  See subclasses 78 and 79.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, see section III and subclasses 7, 31,
    54, 58, 60.5, 61, 78, 80, 82, 117, 118, 144, 146, 148, 151, 153, 161, 169,
    172, 176, 186, and 261.

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors.  See section III.

    137,    Fluid Handling, see section I, (2) Note, and subclasses 1, 34,
    58.1, 79, 91, and 96.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits.  See section III and subclasses 34, 96,
    134, 169, and 172.

    165,    Heat Exchange.  See subclass 144.

    166,    Wells.  See subclass 172.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting.  See section I (2) Note, section III and
    subclasses 2, 117, 172, and 255.

    180,    Motor Vehicles.  See subclasses 161 and 426.

    181,    Acoustics.  See subclasses 97 and 98.

    184,    Lubrication.  See section III and subclass 153.

    188,    Brakes.  See section III and subclasses 8, 15, 162, and 181.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation. See subclass 78.

    220,    Receptacles.  See section III and subclasses 78, 144 and 169.

    222,    Dispensing.  See section III and subclass 90.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, see subclass 58.1.

    248,    Supports.  See subclass 161.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation.  See section I (2) Note, section III
    and subclasses 34, 96, 172, and 175.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force.  See
    section III.

    267,    Spring Devices.  See section III and subclass 172.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture. See section III and subclasses 128,
    162, 168, 172 and 174.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings.  See subclasses 34, 96 and 148.1+.

    292,    Closure Fasteners.  See subclass 169.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing.  See section III and subclass 34.

    384,    Bearings, see section III and subclass 261.

    403,    Joints and Connections.  See section III above and subclasses 187,
    216 and 255 below.

    417,    Pumps, see section III, and subclasses 3, 12.1, 12.2, 13, 13.3, 31,
    34, 54, 56 57, 58, 60.5, 61, 66, 68, 71, 72, 75, 90, 110, 117, 118, 120,
    146, 148, 161.5, and 172.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, see subclass 13.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions.  See subclass 222.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, see subclass 103 and 223.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components. See section III,
    and subclass 68.

    477,    Interrelated Power Delivery Controls, Including Engine Control.
    See section III.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 212+ for a pump or squeeze bulb type syringe.
    For a discussion of the line between Class 92 and Class 604, see section
    III of the class definition (92).


CLS 92/1
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including temperature responsive means
    associated with the expansible chamber device, said means being effective
    to overcome or counteract a pressure change, which effects the expansion or
    contraction of the expansible chamber device, resulting from a change in
    the ambient temperature adjacent the expansible chamber device, or a change
    in the temperature of the working fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 708 for a fluid pressure gauge
    provided with temperature compensating means.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 79+ for temperature compensating means
    for a fluid handling apparatus.


CLS 92/2
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising two or more working members
    which are movable with respect to each other, said working members being
    operatively associated with a single member designed to transmit the
    mechanical force exerted by said working members, one of said working
    members being effective to impart longitudinal movement to said element,
    and a second said working member being effective to impart rotary motion to
    said element about the longitudinal axis thereof independently of the
    longitudinal movement imparted by said first working member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 61 for a rotary type
    expansible chamber device combined with a reciprocating working member.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclass 108 for means to rotate a
    reciprocated impact delivering tool, said means comprising a separate
    reciprocating type motors.


CLS 92/3
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a first rotary element
    driven by a source of power, a second rotary element connected to the
    working member to drive same, and means to selectively engage or disengage
    said first and second rotary elements to connect or disconnect the working
    member and source of power.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclass 319 for pumps having disengageable rotary drive
    connections. For the relationship between Class 92 and Class 417 see
    section III of the class definition of Class 417.


CLS 92/5
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including (1) an indicator, register,
    recorder or alarm responsive to a condition of operation or position of a
    part of the expansible chamber device or of the working fluid or (2) a
    window in a wall of an expansible chamber device part to permit inspection
    of normally hidden portions of said part or of the working fluid.

    (1)     Note.  An expansible chamber device part made of a material which
    may be transparent (e.g., a glass piston or cylinder) is excluded, unless
    the disclosure specifies that such material was used for the purpose of
    allowing inspection of interior portions of said part.

    (2)     Note.  A visible element associated with an expansible chamber
    device (e.g., fastening or securing means for an expansible chamber device
    parts) which is specifically intended to become distorted when some
    malfunction of some part of the expansible chamber device occurs to
    indicate such malfunction is included under this definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 1 for a signal,
    indicator or inspection window to indicate a condition of operation of an
    expansible chamber type motor.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+ for electrical
    automatic condition responsive indicating systems.


CLS 92/6
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the expansible chamber device
    is provided with means whereby the area of the working member end face
    which is acted upon by the working fluid or which acts upon the working
    fluid during movement of the working member may be selectively changed.


CLS 92/7
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means movable with the
    working member, said means comprising a portion which moves in an arcuate
    path between end limit positions corresponding to the end limits of the
    working member stroke, said means being effective during the first half of
    the working member stroke and while said portion moves toward a center
    position between said end positions to exert a force in a direction
    resisting the movement of the working member, and during the last half of
    the working member stroke while said portion moves away from said center
    position to exert a force in an opposite direction to assist the movement
    of the working member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 192.1+ for compensating means
    for an internal combustion engine.


CLS 92/8
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a body of nonworking fluid
    adapted to flow as a result of working member movement and incident to said
    flow to retard or stop the movement of the working member, and means for
    varying the flow of the nonworking fluid.

    (1)     Note.  A mere compressible fluid spring provided with valve means
    to allow entry of make-up fluid in the spring is excluded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    for a fluid spring for biasing a working member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 41 for correlated
    control of motive fluid, and locking means for the working member of an
    expansible chamber device.

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 297+ for fluid type brake or dashpot; Class 188
    takes the nominal recitation of a cylinder and piston and a fluid brake or
    dashpot therefor.


CLS 92/9
TXT Apparatus under subclass 8 in which the body of fluid is positioned in an
    enclosure having a movable partition therein which is in sliding sealing
    engagement with the enclosure wall providing a pair of chambers, said
    partition being secured for movement with the working member, fluid passage
    means extending between said chambers for placing said chambers in fluid
    communication with each other, and flow varying means positioned in said
    passage means.


CLS 92/10
TXT Apparatus under subclass 8 in which the flow varying means is controlled in
    response to the working member attaining a certain position in the working
    chamber.


CLS 92/11
TXT Apparatus under subclass 10 including a second means for varying the flow
    of the non working fluid, said second means being adapted to be selectively
    moved and held to different flow varying positions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for a means to control the flow of nonworking arresting fluid for a
    working member comprising an adjustable throttle.


CLS 92/12
TXT Apparatus under subclass 8 in which the flow varying means is adapted to be
    selectively moved and held in different flow varying positions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for a working member position control of flow of nonworking
    arresting fluid for working member provided with an auxiliary adjustable
    throttle.  Note section IV of the class definition and the paragraph
    following the title in the schedule of this Class.


CLS 92/12.1
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising two or more cylinders, each
    cylinder being provided with a relatively reciprocating piston (includes
    diaphragm) to thereby form a plurality of expansible chambers, the
    cylinders or a transmission element in common operative engagement with
    said cylinders or pistons being adapted for continuous rotation about a
    fixed axis; said cylinders being physically arranged in a manner such that
    their longitudinal axes either (1) intersect at a common point or (2)
    extend parallel to said axis of rotation; there being provided means to
    selectively vary either the extent or end limits of reciprocatory movement
    between said cylinders and their respective relatively reciprocating
    pistons.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 473 for expansible
    chamber type motors having three or more cylinders arranged in parallel,
    radial, or conical relationship with a rotary transmission axis in which
    means are provided for controlling the drive transmission of the motor in
    response to a sensed condition and subclasses 497+ for expansible chamber
    type motors having three or more cylinders arranged in radial relationship
    with a rotary transmission axis and means for varying the relative
    reciprocatory stroke between the motor cylinders and pistons.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 218+ for means for controlling an adjustable cam
    or linkage in a pump drive transmission in response to a sensed condition.


CLS 92/12.2
TXT Apparatus under subclass 12.1 in which the longitudinal axes of said plural
    cylinders are parallel to and spaced from said axis of rotation.

    (1)     Note.  This definition is not intended to include displacement
    control in response to a sensed condition (e.g., speed or motive fluid
    condition responsive).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 473 for expansible
    chamber type motors having three or more cylinders arranged in parallel,
    radial, or conical relationship with a rotary transmission axis in which
    means are provided for controlling the drive transmission of the motor in
    response to a sensed condition and subclasses 504+ for expansible chamber
    type motors having three or more cylinders arranged in parallel
    relationship with a rotary transmission axis and means for varying the
    relative reciprocatory stroke between the motor cylinders and pistons.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 222.1+ for means for controlling an adjustable
    axial pump operating cam in the pump drive transmission in response to a
    sensed condition.


CLS 92/13
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means associated with the
    expansible chamber device, said means being adapted to be selectively
    positioned or moved and held in different positions to either change the
    extent or vary the end limits of reciprocatory movement of the working
    member relative to the working chamber.

    (1)     Note.  Means which acts to positively lock a working member in both
    directions of reciprocatory movement is not considered to be a stroke
    varying device under this definition, such subject matter being classified
    in subclasses 15+ below.

    (2)     Note.  An expansible chamber device having means to vary the
    displacement thereof and in which it cannot be determined whether the
    expansible chamber device is of the Class 92 or Class 418 type will be
    classified under this definition.

    (3)     Note.  Included under this definition are diaphragm or bellows type
    working members which are reciprocated to cause expansion or contraction of
    the chamber formed thereby.

    (4)     Note.  This definition is not intended to include stroke control in
    response to a sensed condition (e.g., speed or motive fluid condition).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62+,    for plural relatively movable working members in which one of said
    working members is moved by a second working member through a separating
    abutment connection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 167 for an expansible
    chamber motor comprising a unit having separately controlled working
    chambers the extension of which equals the sum of the individual chamber
    extension.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 499+ for means to effect control of a pumping
    member controlled port at different positions of the pumping member stroke
    by changing the extent or varying the end limits of the pumping member
    reciprocatory path.


CLS 92/13.1
TXT Apparatus under subclass 13 in which the means which is moved or positioned
    to change the extent of movement of the working member is actuated by a
    motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 506 for a motor operated
    means to adjust the angle of inclination of a reaction plate for plural
    radial cylinders for the purpose of varying working chamber displacement.


CLS 92/13.2
TXT Apparatus under subclass 13 in which the expansible chamber is defined in
    part by a deformable wall, movement of said deformable wall being caused by
    or effecting expansion and contraction of the chamber.

    (1)     Note.  The deformable wall of the above definition may be either
    (1) fabricated of flexible material or (2) formed by a plurality or
    relatively movable rigid members hinged together in a manner such that
    relative pivotal movement thereof is caused by or effects expansion and
    contraction of the chamber.


CLS 92/13.3
TXT Apparatus under subclass 13 in which the extent of movement of said working
    member is changed relative to and independent of the extent of movement of
    another relatively movable working member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclass 429 for plural pumps having a common drive and
    means for altering the stroke of one relative to another.


CLS 92/13.4
TXT Apparatus under subclass 13 in which the means which is moved or positioned
    to change the extent of movement of the working member is limited to be
    moved and held or positioned in one or more preselected adjustment
    locations and not capable of being held or positioned in locations other
    than or intermediate of said preselected positions.


CLS 92/13.41
TXT Apparatus under subclass 13.3 in which the means which is moved or
    positioned to change the extent of working member movement comprises an
    element which is either (1) removed from the device and replaced therein in
    a different position or location, (2) removed from the device or, (3)
    assembled to the device.


CLS 92/13.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 13 in which the means which is selectively
    positioned or moved and held in different positions changes the extent of
    reciprocatory movement of a single working member in one stroke direction
    only; there being provided additional means which is selectively positioned
    or moved and held in different positions for changing the extent of
    reciprocatory movement of said working member in the other stroke
    direction, said additional means being selectively positionable or movable
    separately and irrespective of movement of said first mentioned means.


CLS 92/13.51
TXT Apparatus under subclass 13 in which the working member forms a pair of
    axially spaced working faces which are normally rigidly interconnected, the
    selectively positionable or movable means being effective to change the
    axial spacing of said working faces for the purpose of changing the extent
    of reciprocatory movement of said working member.


CLS 92/13.6
TXT Apparatus under subclass 13 in which the means which is selectively
    positioned or moved to change the extent of working member movement
    comprises an element having a portion which is positioned within the
    confines of the working chamber and exposed to working fluid therein; the
    portion of said element within the working chamber being either (1) fixed
    against movement by the working member and engageable therewith to limit
    the extent of working member movement or (2) positioned on the working
    member for movement therewith and engageable with a fixed member (e.g.,
    cylinder end wall) for limiting the extent of working member movement.


CLS 92/13.7
TXT Apparatus under subclass 13 in which there is provided means for
    transmitting motion to or from the working member comprising at least one
    element (e.g., cam, gear, link, etc.), which is mechanically associated
    with and movable relative to the working member; the selectively
    positionable or movable means for changing the extent of working member
    movement being operatively associated with said relatively movable
    transmission element to either (1) limit the motion of said element for
    changing the extent or varying the end limits of working member or (2)
    change the driving relationship of said element relative to the working
    member or another element of the transmission for the purpose of changing
    the extent or varying the end limits of working member movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.1+,  for plural cylinders arranged in parallel, radial or conical
    relationship with a rotary transmission axis and having means which is
    selectively movable to adjust a relatively movable transmission element for
    varying the displacement of the cylinder working chambers.


CLS 92/13.8
TXT Apparatus under subclass 13 in which there is provided an element carried
    by piston type working member which extends axially therefrom to a location
    exterior of the working chamber (e.g., piston rod), the portion of said
    element exterior of said working chamber being provided with screw threads
    for threadably engaging the means which is positionable or moved and held
    for changing the extent of working member movement.


CLS 92/14
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising an element positioned to be
    moved by a working member, said working member being capable of limited
    relative motion with respect to said element, and means engageable with
    said element to prevent movement thereof, said means being engageable by
    said working member during the initial portion of its stroke to disengage
    said means from operative position with respect to said element to allow
    movement of said element in response to further movement of said working
    member.


CLS 92/15
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means engageable between a
    working member or a member moved thereby and a fixed part, said means when
    engaged being effective to prevent the movement of said working member
    relative to said part in at least one direction of its movement at some
    point along the path of travel thereof, said means being selectively
    disengageable to permit movement of the working member in such direction.

    (1)     Note.  The movement preventing means may be held in operative
    working member movement preventing position by the working fluid in the
    working chamber, or may be released from such operative position by such
    working fluid.

    (2)     Note.  The movement preventing means may hold the working member
    against movement either from the action of a mechanical force exerted
    thereon or from a force exerted thereon by working fluid acting against the
    end face thereof.

    (3)     Note.  For classification under this definition the means must be
    released before any movement of the working member in the direction in
    which it is held against movement can occur.  A mere resilient detente
    which is releasable responsive to a movement of the working member is
    excluded from this definition.  Such structure is classified in subclass 30.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8+,     for a means to control the flow of nonworking arresting fluid for
    the working member.

    13+,    for an adjustable or disengageable stop or abutment means for
    varying the extent of reciprocatory movement of the working member.

    30,     for a resilient detente engageable between a fixed part and a
    working member or a member moved thereby.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 41 for a correlated
    control of motive fluid, and locking means for the working member of an
    expansible chamber motor.

    188,    Brakes, appropriate subclasses for a brake or latch, per se, and
    particularly subclass 67 for a brake or latch for a rod.  Class 188 takes a
    nominally claimed piston and cylinder, if the claim is otherwise directed
    to a brake or latch means for holding the piston against movement relative
    to the cylinder.


CLS 92/16
TXT Apparatus under subclass 15 including means for actuating the movement
    preventing means, said first means being capable of causing a predetermined
    period of time to elapse before actuation of the movement preventing means
    is effected.

    (1)     Note.  A device in which the movement preventing means is actuated
    by a fluid pressure responsive member, which device includes adjustable
    throttling means in a fluid conduit to said fluid pressure responsive
    member to regulate the flow of fluid to said member to vary the time
    required to sufficiently increase the fluid pressure to said member to
    actuate the movement preventing means after initiating flow of such fluid
    in the conduit, is included under this definition.


CLS 92/17
TXT Apparatus under subclass 15 comprising an element having the axis thereof
    coinciding with the axis of the working member, said element being
    connected to the working member so that reciprocation of the working member
    effects relative rotation between said working member and element, and in
    which the movement preventing means is adapted to engage said element to
    prevent rotation thereof relative to said working member, and thereby
    prevent movement of the working member.


CLS 92/18
TXT Apparatus under subclass 15 in which the movement preventing means
    comprises an element having intermeshing engagement with the working member
    or member moved thereby, said element being adapted to intermesh with said
    working member or member moved thereby at plural predetermined spaced
    locations corresponding to spaced locations of the working member along its
    path of travel, at least one of said locations corresponding to a position
    between the opposite extremities of said path of travel.


CLS 92/19
TXT Apparatus under subclass 18 in which means are provided to bias the
    intermeshing element toward engaging position with the working member or
    member moved thereby, so that the intermeshing element is self engaging as
    the working member or member moved thereby reaches one of said
    predetermined locations.


CLS 92/20
TXT Apparatus under subclass 15 comprising a member by which power is
    transmitted to or from the working member, said member being connected to
    said working member to permit relative movement therebetween and in which
    the movement preventing means is adapted to engage said member to prevent
    movement of said member and the working member.


CLS 92/21
TXT Apparatus under subclass 15 in which the movement preventing means is
    movable either to engage or disengage position by two or more separate
    means, said means being distinct from each other and being operable
    independently of each other.


CLS 92/22
TXT Apparatus under subclass 15 comprising two or more working members which
    are movable with respect to each other and movement preventing means to
    prevent movement of each of said working members, said movement preventing
    means for each of the working members being actuated by another of said
    working members.


CLS 92/23
TXT Apparatus under subclass 15 in which said movement preventing means
    includes an element providing intermeshing engagement between the working
    member and a fixed member.

    (1)     Note.  A member projected into a cylinder in a direction transverse
    to the direction of movement of the piston to overlie an end face of the
    piston to prevent movement thereof past said member is considered as
    intermeshing with the piston and is included in this subclass.


CLS 92/24
TXT Apparatus under subclass 23 in which the intermeshing element is moved to
    or from, or retained in working member movement preventing relationship by
    means of a member which is movable relative to said intermeshing element,
    said member being movable responsive to the action of a pressure fluid.


CLS 92/25
TXT Apparatus under subclass 24 including a mechanical motion converting means
    including a pivoted link between the intermeshing element and the fluid
    pressure actuated member so that motion of the member will be transmitted
    to said intermeshing element through said pivoted link.


CLS 92/26
TXT Apparatus under subclass 24 in which the element is formed of flexible
    resilient material.


CLS 92/27
TXT Apparatus under subclass 23 in which the intermeshing element is moved to
    or from intermeshing relationship with the working member responsive to the
    action of a pressure fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for an intermeshing movement preventing means actuated by a
    relatively movable fluid pressure responsive member.

    28,     for a fluid actuated releasable stop or latch means for a working
    member.


CLS 92/28
TXT Apparatus under subclass 15 in which the disengageable means is moved to or
    from working member movement preventing relationship responsive to the
    action of a pressure fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for an intermeshing movement preventing means actuated by a
    relatively movable fluid pressure responsive member.

    27,     for an intermeshing movement preventing means actuated by a
    pressure fluid. Note section IV of the class definition and the paragraph
    following the title in the schedule of this class.


CLS 92/29
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the working member is
    provided with a passage extending axially therethrough, and including an
    element designed to transmit movement to or from the working member, said
    element extending through the passage and mounted for sliding movement
    relative to the working member, and releasable interengaging means for
    selectively coupling or uncoupling the working member to the element to
    allow or prevent relative movement between said working member and element.


CLS 92/30
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a spring biased member
    having cooperative intermeshing engagement between the working member or a
    member moved thereby and a relatively movable element, the intermeshing
    engagement being such that relative movement between the working member or
    the member moved thereby and the relatively movable element effects
    disengagement of the spring biased member from cooperative intermeshing
    engagement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    for a resiliently biased latching means for a working member which
    latching means must be released before movement of the working member can
    occur.


CLS 92/31
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising an element positioned with
    the axis thereof coinciding with or parallel to the axis of the working
    member, said working member and element being slidably interengaged and
    including cooperating means therebetween such that (1) said element has
    rotary movement and the working member has rectilinear movement or (2) the
    element is fixed and the working member has both rotary and rectilinear
    movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 25+ for a mechanical
    movement for converting reciprocatory motion to or from rotary motion, and
    particularly subclasses 55+ for a cam and slide for converting
    reciprocatory motion to or from rotary motion.  Class 74 takes such
    mechanical movements even though a piston and cylinder are nominally
    recited.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 233 for a valveless
    expansible chamber type motor, in which the control of the motive fluid is
    effected by rotary motion of the working member responsive to the
    reciprocation thereof.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 45 for an internal combustion
    engine provided with a piston which rotates responsive to the reciprocation
    thereof.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 492 and 500, for a pump provided with a piston
    which simultaneously reciprocates and axially rotates.


CLS 92/32
TXT Apparatus under subclass 31 comprising means engageable between the element
    and a fixed part, and being effective to allow rotation of the element
    relative to the fixed part in one direction of movement of the working
    member, and to prevent rotation of said element relative to the fixed part
    in the other direction of movement of the working member, said means being
    moved to or from engaged position responsive to the action of the working
    fluid for the expansible chamber device.


CLS 92/33
TXT Apparatus under subclass 31 in which the element is positioned to extend
    through a portion of the working member in some position of axial movement
    of the working member.


CLS 92/34
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a flexible structure which
    is capable of expanding to increase the volumetric capacity thereof, said
    structure comprising (1) a tube of flexible material having a
    circumferentially corrugated or pleated wall, (2) at least two annular
    plates arranged in superposed relation, said plates being hingedly secured
    together in sealed relation along their inner peripheral edges only or (3)
    a pair of rigid plate like members pivoted together along a portion of
    their peripheral edges, the remaining peripheral edge portion of said
    plates being joined together by a flexible member which is pleated in some
    position of relative pivotal movement of the plate like members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89+,    for a collapsible wall type expansible chamber device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 262+ for a volume or rate of flow
    meter which includes a bellows type expansible chamber, and subclass 729.1
    for a bellows type fluid pressure gauge.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 18+ for a flexible sealing
    element of the bellows type attached to a relatively movable rod and casing.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 510 for a line condition change responsive
    valve having a separate connected fluid reactor surface in which the
    reactor surface comprises a bellows.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 21 for a corrugated flexible
    tube, or pipe of general utility.  Class 92, Expansible Chamber Devices
    takes a corrugated tubular member where the sole specific disclosure or a
    claim is directed to a bellows element for an expansible chamber device.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 61+ for a valve having a
    flexible wall fluid actuator including a bellows type expansible chamber
    device.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 226+ for a bellows type
    flexible joint between rigid members.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 203 for a bellows type
    thermometer.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 472+ for expansible chamber type pump
    incorporating a bellows element.


CLS 92/35
TXT Apparatus under subclass 34 comprising two concentrically arranged bellows
    defining a ring shaped expansible chamber therebetween.


CLS 92/36
TXT Apparatus under subclass 34 including a second expansible chamber device
    other than a bellows type.


CLS 92/37
TXT Apparatus under subclass 34 comprising two or more bellows type expansible
    chamber devices.


CLS 92/38
TXT Apparatus under subclass 37 in which the plural bellows expansible chambers
    are provided with passage means establishing communication between the
    chambers formed by the several bellows, and including a body of nonworking
    liquid contained within said bellows chambers such that contraction of one
    of the bellows will cause such liquid to flow into a second bellows to
    thereby cause expansion of such second bellows.


CLS 92/39
TXT Apparatus under subclass 37 in which the several bellows type expansible
    chambers are provided with a wall secured to adjacent ends of the chambers
    to form a closure wall for each of said chambers, said wall being movable
    responsive to expansion or contraction of either chamber.


CLS 92/40
TXT Apparatus under subclass 34 including a separate means other than the
    working fluid associated with the bellows type expansible chamber for
    continuously exerting a force in one direction of movement of said bellows
    type expansible chamber.

    (1)     Note.  The separate means as set forth in this definition does not
    include the inherent resiliency of the material forming the bellows, but
    must include a separate member (e.g., spring) which member may be secured
    to or embedded in the wall of the bellows.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94,     for a separate biasing means for a flexible wall type working
    member.

    130+,   and the search there noted, for a separate biasing means for a
    working member.


CLS 92/41
TXT Apparatus under subclass 34 including means designed to subdue vibrations
    incurred in the bellows type expansible chamber wall during expansion or
    contraction of such bellows.

    (1)     Note.  A mere spring designed to bias the bellows in one position
    of its movement is excluded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for a spring biasing means for a bellows expansible chamber device.


CLS 92/42
TXT Apparatus under subclass 34 including a ring-like member positioned to abut
    against the bellows type expansible chamber wall at the apex of a pleat
    thereof, said ring-like member forming a means for restraining radial
    movement of said pleat portion.


CLS 92/43
TXT Apparatus under subclass 34 including means associated with the bellows
    type expansible chamber wall and axially movable therewith, said means
    being engageable with a fixed member lying in the path of travel of the
    bellows type expansible chamber wall to arrest movement of said bellows
    type expansible chamber wall after a predetermined extent of axial movement
    thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13.2,   for an adjustable means for limiting axial movement of a flexible
    wall type working member to vary the stroke of said working member.


CLS 92/44
TXT Apparatus under subclass 34 including a rigid member extending parallel to
    the longitudinal axis of the bellows type expansible chamber device, said
    bellows type expansible chamber device having a portion thereof slidably
    engaged with said rigid member, said member functioning to constrain said
    bellows device to a path of travel extending parallel to the longitudinal
    axis thereof.


CLS 92/45
TXT Apparatus under subclass 34 in which the pleated portion includes a pair of
    superposed ring shaped elements having the inner peripheral portion thereof
    secured together.


CLS 92/46
TXT Apparatus under subclass 45 in which a portion of the ring shaped elements
    or the means forming the connection between the elements include a
    nonmetallic material.


CLS 92/47
TXT Apparatus under subclass 34 in which the bellows wall is formed of (1) two
    or more different materials, (2) a single material which has been treated
    to provide portions of the bellows wall with specific properties which are
    different from the properties of another portion thereof or (3) claimed as
    of a specific material.

    (1)     Note.  In part (3) the mere recitation that the bellows wall is
    formed, for example, of "flexible material", "rubber", "leather" or
    "plastic" is not considered as specific material and is excluded from this
    subclass.  However, specifying a kind of rubber, or plastic is considered a
    recitation of a specific material for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for a flexible diaphragm type working member of specific or diverse
    material.


CLS 92/48
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising two or more working
    members, each of said working members having a portion of the wall thereof
    formed of material which is pliable, and in which the flexing of said
    pliable material constitutes the movement of said working member.

    (1)     Note.  A device comprising plural axially spaced flexible wall
    members having working surface areas of the same size and forming the sole
    means for dividing an encompassing housing into separate working chambers,
    and in which movement of one flexible wall member is transmitted to the
    second flexible wall members as a result of having said flexible wall
    members in face to face contact, or spaced with an interposed rigid
    element, or body of incompressible fluid to form in effect a single
    diaphragm is excluded from this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37+,    for plural flexible wall working members of the bellows type.

    97,     for a flexible diaphragm comprising a pair of axially spaced
    flexible walls provided with a noncompressible force transmitting means
    therebetween.

    103,    for a flexible wall working member formed of a plurality of
    superposed laminae of flexible material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 263+ for a volume or rate of flow
    meter of the diaphragm or collapsible chamber wall type having a plurality
    of diaphragms, and subclasses 716+ for a fluid pressure gauge including
    plural and/or differential diaphragms.


CLS 92/49
TXT Apparatus under subclass 48 in which each working member comprises a
    relatively thin membrane like member peripherally secured to an
    encompassing tubular structure and extending inwardly from said
    peripherally secured edge portion forming a partition for said tubular
    structure, and in which the surface area of one working member adapted to
    contact the working fluid is larger than the working fluid contacting
    surface area of a second of said working members.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 716+ for an expansible chamber
    type fluid pressure gage having plural, differential diaphragms.


CLS 92/50
TXT Apparatus under subclass 48 in which the working members form opposite
    walls of a chamber which is adapted to contain the working fluid, said
    working members being movable toward and away from each other during the
    contraction and expansion of the expansible chamber device.

    (1)     Note.  A unitary bag-like flexible wall working member is excluded
    from this subclass, such subject matter is classified below as indicated in
    the Search Notes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69      and 75, for plural relatively movable working members of the
    nonflexible wall type forming opposite walls of a common chamber.

    91+,    for a bag-like flexible wall working member.


CLS 92/51
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a first cylinder or
    elongated tubular element, a member positioned in said first cylinder or
    tubular element in coaxial relationship therewith, and a second cylinder
    for receiving said first cylinder or tubular element therein, said member
    sealingly engaging said first cylinder or tubular element and being axially
    slidable relative thereto and said second cylinder sealingly engaging said
    first cylinder or tubular element and being axially slidable relative
    thereto and to said member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for a member slidable within a hollow piston rod, but being in
    nonsealing relationship therewith.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 115 for a fluid
    pressure operated relatively movable shaft assembly.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 169 for an expansible
    chamber type motor in which the chamber is formed of mutually relatively
    movable cylinder, sleeve and piston.


CLS 92/52
TXT Apparatus under subclass 51 in which said first cylinder or tubular element
    is so arranged in the device as to constitute a working member.


CLS 92/53
TXT Apparatus under subclass 51 including an additional cylinder receiving said
    second cylinder therein in coaxial relationship, said second cylinder
    sealingly engaging said additional cylinder and being axially slidable
    relative thereto.


CLS 92/54
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a cylinder having a piston
    therein, said cylinder being mounted on a fixed supporting structure for
    movement during operation relative thereto in a circular path of more than
    360 degrees about an axis other than the longitudinal axis of the cylinder,
    said movement being responsive to or causing the expansion or contraction
    of the expansible chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31+,    for a cylinder which is adapted to rotate about its longitudinal
    axis responsive to relative axial movement of a piston therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 196+ for an expansible
    chamber type motor having a moving cylinder.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 43+ for an internal
    combustion engine having a rotating cylinder.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 462+ for an expansible chamber type pump having a
    cylinder which rotates about an axis other than the longitudinal axis of
    the cylinder.


CLS 92/55
TXT Apparatus under subclass 54 comprising a conduit for conducting fluid to or
    from said cylinder, the axis of said conduit coinciding with the axis of
    rotation of said cylinder.


CLS 92/56
TXT Apparatus under subclass 54 comprising two or more cylinders mounted for
    movement about said axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.1+,  for plural cylinders arranged in parallel, radial, or conical
    relationship with a rotary transmission axis with means to adjust the
    working chamber displacement thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 472+ for an expansible
    chamber type motor having three or more cylinders arranged in parallel,
    radial, or conical relationship with a rotary transmission axis.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 269+ for an expansible chamber type pump having
    three or more cylinders arranged in parallel, radial, or conical
    relationship with a rotary transmission axis.


CLS 92/57
TXT Apparatus under subclass 56 in which the several cylinders are positioned
    with the axes thereof parallel to each other and in which the axis of the
    circular path extends in a direction parallel to the axes of the several
    cylinders.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.2,   for plural cylinders arranged in parallel relationship with a
    rotary transmission axis and having means to adjust the working chamber
    displacement thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 499+ for expansible
    chamber type motors having three or more cylinders arranged in parallel
    relationship with a rotary transmission axis.

    417,    Pumps, subclass 269 for expansible chamber type pumps having three
    or more cylinders arranged in parallel relationship with a rotary
    transmission axis.


CLS 92/58
TXT Apparatus under subclass 56 in which the several cylinders are so
    positioned relative to each other as to have the axes thereof intersect at
    a point on said axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.1,   for plural cylinders arranged in radial or conical relationship
    with a rotary transmission axis and having means to adjust the working
    chamber displacement thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 491+ for expansible
    chamber type motors having three or more cylinders arranged in radial
    relationship with a rotary transmission axis.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 44 for an internal combustion
    engine having a plurality of radially disposed rotating cylinders.

    417,    Pumps, subclass 273 for expansible chamber type pumps having three
    or more cylinders arranged in radial relationship with a rotary
    transmission axis.


CLS 92/58.1
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which either (1) the expansible
    chamber device or power transmission portion thereof is adapted to be
    rearranged for storage purposes or (2) the expansible chamber device is
    provided with a conduit for conducting working fluid to or from the chamber
    and means to return the conduit to or retain the conduit in a nonuse or
    stored position.

    (1)     Note.  The mere movement of a power transmission element (e.g.,
    handle) to an extreme nonuse position is excluded under this definition.
    However, a power transmission having features provided for the express
    purpose of allowing compact storage (e.g., sectionally hinged or
    telescoping portions of an operating lever or means for permitting ease of
    disassembly of an operating lever) is considered proper subject matter
    under this definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 355.16+ for apparatus for storing or
    retrieving a flexible conduit which is not combined with a claimed
    expansible chamber device.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 195+ for
    apparatus having a flexible conduit and terminal member and means for
    returning or retaining the flexible conduit or terminal member.  Also, see
    section III (b) of the Class 239 definition for a statement regarding
    various related subcombinations.


CLS 92/59
TXT Apparatus under the class definition (A) adapted to be rearranged to
    perform a different function or (B) adapted to be altered so as to operate
    in a different way or change its function in some way by (1) disassembling
    the device in some major portion and then reassembling the device with the
    same or different portion, (2) disassembling some major portion from the
    device, or (3) assembling some major portion to the device.

    (1)     Note.  A mere adjustment of some part of the expansible chamber
    device, such as for example, an adjustable spring used to bias a working
    member in a direction of its movement, or a radially adjustable piston side
    wall portion is excluded from this definition, such features being
    classified below.

    (2)     Note.  A portion of an expansible chamber device, such as for
    example a working chamber liner which is adapted to be reversed, replaced,
    removed or added to present a new working member engaging surface but which
    does not change the mode of operation of the expansible chamber device is
    excluded from this subclass, however where such change effects a change in
    the size or shape of the expansible chamber device, classification is in
    this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for an expansible chamber device in which the effective area of the
    working member end face is selectively variable.

    13.41,  for adjusting working member stroke by assembly or disassembly of a
    portion of the device.

    128,    for an expansible chamber device provided with special means, or so
    constructed as to facilitate the assembly or disassembly thereof.

    133,    and the search there noted for an adjustable spring device for
    biasing a working member in one direction of its movement.

    169+,   for a replaceable or reversible cylinder liner.

    201+,   for a piston having a radially adjustable side wall portion and
    especially subclass 204 for means to adjust the side wall portion radially
    comprising a shim element which may be selectively inserted or removed from
    between relatively movable piston portions.


CLS 92/60
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a movable wall for the
    expansible chamber device other than a working member positioned to be in
    constant open communication with the working chamber, said movable wall
    being either (1) made of resilient flexible material or (2) urged in one
    direction by means of a spring device.


CLS 92/60.5
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising selectively adjustable
    means to change the volume of the expansive chamber remaining after the
    working member has reached the limit of its movement in a chamber
    decreasing direction, said means not involving a mere stroke of the working
    member.

    (1)     Note.  The adjustment usually involves a selective movement of a
    chamber wall or the opening or closing of a valve between the expansible
    chamber and a blind chamber, i.e., clearance chamber.

    (2)     Note.  This definition excludes an expansible chamber pump or motor
    having a valved clearance chamber in which the valve is controlled in
    response to a pump or motor condition.  Such pump or motor is classified in
    the appropriate pump or motor class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13+,    for means to adjust the stroke of a working member or the end
    limits of the stroke of a working member relative to the chamber.

    60,     for a flexible or resiliently biased nonworking member wall in
    constant communication with the working chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 48, for internal combustion
    engines having clearance control means which is responsive to an engine
    condition.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 274+ for pumps having clearance control means
    which is responsive to a pump condition.


CLS 92/61
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising two or more working members
    which are movably related to each other.

    (1)     Note.  A fluid responsive element which is movable relative to the
    working member, of an expansible chamber device and which is utilized to
    perform work solely for use by a part of the expansible chamber device,
    such as for example, to adjust a part of the working member, or to effect a
    seal or a lubricating means between expansible chamber device parts is not
    considered as a working member movable relative to the working member of
    the expansible chamber device being acted upon or modified by such element,
    and is excluded from this subclass.  Such structure is classified below on
    other features.

    (2)     Note.  Class 92 excludes multiple expansion type motors and
    multistage pumps even if no valving is claimed if the claims do include the
    fluid connection between stages of the motor or pump.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for relatively movable working members which reciprocate and rotate
    a common power transmission element.

    28+,    and the search there noted, for a working member which is movable
    relative to a second working member and which operates a latch or lock to
    secure said second working member against movement.

    37+,    for plural bellows type expansible chamber devices in which the
    several bellows are movable relative to each other.

    48+,    for plural flexible wall working members in which the several
    flexible wall working members are movable relative to each other.

    52,     for relatively movable concentric working members.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 152+ for multiple
    expansion type motors, subclasses 170+ for an expansible chamber type
    motor, having relatively movable working members with one controlled by,
    movably interconnected with or moved by another; subclasses 508+ for an
    expansible chamber type motor having plural working members.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 51 for an internal combustion
    engine having a plurality of pistons.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 244+ for pumps having successive stages.


CLS 92/62
TXT Apparatus under subclass 61 comprising a first working member movable along
    a path, and a second working member coaxial therewith, means on said first
    working member normally free of force transmitting engagement with said
    second working member at some point along the path of travel of said first
    working member and adapted to contact and move said second working member
    at some other point along the path of travel of said first working member.


CLS 92/63
TXT Apparatus under subclass 62 including a separate means other than the
    working fluid associated with at least one of the working members for
    continuously exerting a force in one direction of movement of said working
    member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130+,   and the search there noted, for a separate biasing means for a
    working member.


CLS 92/64
TXT Apparatus under subclass 61 in which one of said working members has at
    least a portion of the wall thereof formed of material which is pliable,
    and in which the flexing of said pliable material constitutes the movement
    of said working member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for a bellows type expansible chamber device combined with a
    nonbellows type expansible chamber device.

    48+,    for plural flexible wall working members.


CLS 92/65
TXT Apparatus under subclass 61 comprising a first working member provided with
    a rigid stem extending axially therefrom, and a second working member
    provided with an opening extending axially therethrough, said rigid stem on
    said first working member extending slidably through said opening as said
    working members move relative to each other.


CLS 92/66
TXT Apparatus under subclass 61 in which (1) the relatively movable working
    members comprise movably mounted cylinders or (2) the relatively movable
    working members are disposed in movably mounted cylinders.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56+,    for a plurality of cylinders which rotate during relative
    reciprocatory movement of said cylinders and pistons positioned therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 176 for relatively
    movable working members including moving cylinders provided with fluid
    control means.

    417,    Pumps, subclass 467 for expansible chamber type pumps having plural
    relatively movable cylinders.


CLS 92/67
TXT Apparatus under subclass 61 in which the working members are of the type
    which move back and forth in an arcuate path within a working chamber to
    effect expansion or contraction of the expansible chamber, the travel of
    said working members in one direction of said arcuate path being limited to
    no more than 360 degrees.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66,     for a plurality of reciprocating working members which are
    positioned in movable cylinders which are mounted for oscillatory movement
    in an arcuate path of not more than 360 degrees.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 177 for relatively
    movable oscillating working members provided with fluid control means.


CLS 92/68
TXT Apparatus under subclass 61 including a shaft mounted for rotation, and a
    means (e.g., linkage or gearing) interconnecting said shaft and the working
    members so that rotation of the shaft effects reciprocatory motion of the
    working members, or reciprocatory movement of the working members effects
    rotation of the shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.1+,  for plural cylinders arranged in parallel, radial, or conical
    relationship with a rotary transmission axis with means to adjust the
    working chamber displacement thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses for mechanisms
    for converting one type of motion into another, and particularly subclasses
    25+ for mechanisms for converting reciprocating movement to or from rotary,
    and subclasses 640+ for means for converting one type of motion to another
    involving gearing.  Class 74 takes nominally recited pistons and cylinders
    combined with a mechanical motion converting linkage or gearing mechanism.
    For a further explanation of the line between Class 74 and Class 92, see
    section  III of the class definition.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 472+ for an expansible
    chamber type motor having three or more cylinders arranged in parallel,
    radial, or conical relationship with a rotary transmission axis.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 269+ for an expansible chamber type pump having
    three or more cylinders arranged in parallel, radial, or conical
    relationship with a rotary transmission axis.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, for planetary
    gearing in a motion converting drive train.


CLS 92/69
TXT Apparatus under subclass 68 in which the working members form opposite
    walls of a chamber which is adapted to receive the working fluid, said
    working members being movable toward and away from each other during the
    contraction and expansion of the expansible chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for relatively movable working members forming opposite walls of a
    common chamber.


CLS 92/70
TXT Apparatus under subclass 69 in which the axes of the working members are
    coaxial or parallel to each other and the axis of the shaft is parallel to
    the axes of the working members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for relatively movable working members interconnected with a common
    rotatable shaft having the axis thereof extending in a direction parallel
    to the axes of the working members.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 501 for expansible
    chamber type motors having three or more cylinder arranged in parallel
    relationship with a rotary transmission axis in which the cylinders contain
    plural oppositely movable pistons.


CLS 92/71
TXT Apparatus under subclass 68 in which the axes of the working members are
    parallel to each other, and the axis of the shaft is parallel to the axes
    of the working members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for relatively movable working members forming oppositely movable
    walls of a common chamber and being interconnected by a common rotatable
    shaft having the axis thereof extending parallel to the axes of the working
    members.  NOTE SECTION IV OF THE CLASS DEFINITION AND THE PARAGRAPH
    FOLLOWING THE TITLE IN THE SCHEDULE OF THIS CLASS.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 499+ for expansible
    chamber type motors having three or more cylinders arranged in parallel
    relationship with a rotary transmission axis.

    417,    Pumps, subclass 269 for expansible chamber type pumps having three
    or more cylinders arranged in parallel relationship with a rotary
    transmission axis.


CLS 92/72
TXT Apparatus under subclass 68 in which the axis of the rotary shaft extends
    transversely to the direction of movement of the working members, and the
    longitudinal axes of the working members intersect the axis of the shaft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 491+ for expansible
    chamber type motors having three or more cylinders arranged in radial
    relationship with a rotary transmission axis.

    417,    Pumps, subclass 273 for expansible chamber type pumps having three
    or more cylinders arranged in radial relationship with a rotary
    transmission axis.


CLS 92/73
TXT Apparatus under subclass 72 in which the working members are so arranged
    relative to each other that the longitudinal axes of the various working
    members are parallel.


CLS 92/74
TXT Apparatus under subclass 73 in which each of the relatively movable working
    members is provided with an opening extending therethrough in a direction
    perpendicular to the direction of a movement of the working member, and the
    shaft extends through the opening in each of the working members.


CLS 92/75
TXT Apparatus under subclass 61 in which the working members form opposite
    walls of a chamber which is adapted to receive the working fluid, said
    working members being movable toward and away from each other during the
    contraction and expansion of the expansible chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     for a plurality of oppositely movable flexible wall working members
    positioned in a common chamber.  NOTE SECTION IV OF THE CLASS DEFINITION
    AND THE PARAGRAPH FOLLOWING THE TITLE IN THE SCHEDULE OF THIS CLASS.

    69,     for oppositely moving working members in a common chamber, said
    working members being connected to a common rotatably mounted shaft.  NOTE
    SECTION IV OF THE CLASS DEFINITION AND THE PARAGRAPH FOLLOWING THE TITLE IN
    THE SCHEDULE OF THIS CLASS.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclass 488 for an expansible chamber pump having plural
    pumping members forming opposite walls of a common pump chamber.


CLS 92/76
TXT Apparatus under subclass 61 in which the working members are interconnected
    by means of a mechanical motion converting linkage device having parts
    which are movable relative to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68+,    for relatively movable working members interconnected by mechanical
    motion converting means including a rotating shaft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 186 for similar
    structure combined with means to control the supply of motive fluid to the
    working members.


CLS 92/77
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising an enclosure or casing for
    forming the working chamber of the expansible chamber device, said
    enclosure or casing being positioned within a cavity in the earth, the
    surrounding walls of said cavity being in contact with and forming
    reinforcing means for said working chamber forming enclosure or casing.


CLS 92/78
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means for separating or
    filtering a foreign material from a fluid which is adapted to contact a
    portion of the working member to enhance the operation of some portion of
    the expansible chamber device (e.g., working fluid or lubricant).

    (1)     Note.  Included under this definition are means for removing a
    gaseous fluid from a hydraulic fluid, including means for bleeding or
    venting a space designed to receive a liquid, but which may have become
    filled with a gaseous fluid.

    (2)     Note.  Class 96 or Class 210 which are directed to fluid
    purification take a fluid purification means (e.g., filter) when claimed,
    per se, or in combination with an enclosure even though disclosed as a
    cylinder or working chamber for an expansible chamber device, regardless of
    the disclosed use of such means. Class 96 or Class 210 also take the
    combination of an expansible chamber device of the type set forth in
    section IA-1 of the class definition Class 92 combined with detailed means
    to purify the working fluid thereof positioned either upstream or
    downstream of the expansible chamber device unless there is a specific
    disclosure that such purification is for the purpose of protecting some
    portion of the expansible chamber device.

    Class 92 takes the combination of an expansible chamber device with a
    specific fluid purification means where such purification means is
    specifically disclosed as protecting some portion of the expansible chamber
    device.  Class 92 also takes the combination of an expansible chamber
    device and a nominally recited purification means regardless of the
    disclosed purpose of such means.  Recitations such as "a filter", "a filter
    in the inlet line", "a filter adjacent a port or opening" are considered
    nominal recitations of a purification means and patents containing such
    recitations are classified in Class 92 regardless of the disclosed purpose
    of such means.

    (3)     Note.  The combination of an expansible chamber device of the type
    set forth in section IA-1 of the class definition of Class 92, with a
    nominally recited working fluid purifying means of the type which
    constitutes subject matter for Class 96 or Class 210 as set forth in (2)
    Note is excluded from this subclass.  For the purpose of classification in
    Class 92, the nominal purifying means will be ignored and classification
    will be on other features with cross-referencing in appropriate subclasses
    in Class 96 or Class 210.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, for apparatus for gas separation.  (See
    (2) Note and (3) Note above.)

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 41.86 for crankcase
    ventilation of an internal combustion engine, including fluid purifying
    means.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses for means
    for separating from a liquid of any character of material.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 366.1 and 367.1+ for a vented closure for a
    container in which the vented closure may include filtering means.  Class
    220 takes a nominally recited cylinder, crankcase or engine block provided
    with a specific vented closure including filtering means.


CLS 92/79
TXT Apparatus under subclass 78 in which the fluid is a liquid and the
    separating or filtering means is adapted to remove a gaseous fluid
    entrained in said liquid.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes means for venting or bleeding a
    gaseous fluid from a space designed to contain a liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 155+ for degasifying means
    for liquid.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 171+ for a fluid separating trap or vent.


CLS 92/80
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means such as a pump for
    exerting a force upon a fluid to remove such fluid from a space in the
    expansible chamber device, other than the working chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 325+ for a pump in communication with the
    working chamber of an expansible chamber device where the pump is more than
    nominally claimed.  Class 60 takes such combination even though the pump is
    disclosed for the purpose of draining condensation or other extraneous
    fluid from the working chamber.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 41.86 for crankcase
    ventilation for an internal combustion engine, including pump means to
    force fluid from the crankcase.


CLS 92/81
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a working member having a
    chamber formed therein, said chamber being in open communication with the
    working chamber through a restricted opening in said working member end
    face and forming a storage space for a noncompressible liquid type working
    fluid, said noncompressible working fluid being effective to move said
    working member upon being exhausted from said working member chamber to
    said working chamber through said restricted opening.


CLS 92/82
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a passage communicating
    with a space in the expansible chamber device other than the space which
    forms the working chamber, and valve means for said passage to control the
    egress of fluid from said space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for a means to control the flow of nonworking arresting fluid for a
    working member.

    80,     for force exerting means to move fluid from a nonworking chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 41.86 for crankcase
    ventilation of an internal combustion engine, including valve means to
    control the flow of fluid from the crankcase.

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 44 for a vented closure for a container in
    which the closure includes a valve.  Class 220 takes a nominally recited
    cylinder crankcase or engine block provided with a specific vented closure
    which includes a valve means.


CLS 92/83
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which a portion of the expansible
    chamber device is provided with a space which contains a body of nonworking
    liquid, the working member being provided with a portion which extends into
    said liquid at all positions of movement of said working member to form a
    seal between the working chamber and a nonworking chamber space.


CLS 92/84
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a working member and a
    power transmission member movable with respect thereto, a resilient device
    interposed between and in engagement with said members, said members being
    so related that movement of one of said members is effective to move said
    other member by means of said resilient element.

    (1)     Note.  A mere resilient piston side wall portion which forms a seal
    means for the piston positioned between an end face portion and a second
    piston portion such that movement of said end face portion toward said
    second portion effects radial movement of said resilient portion is
    excluded from this definition.  Such subject matter is classified below on
    other features.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130+,   and the search there noted, for a separate biasing means for a
    working member.

    193+,   for a resilient piston side wall portion interposed between a
    piston end face portion and a relatively axially movable other portion, and
    spring means for biasing said end face portion and other portion toward
    each other to effect radial movement of the resilient side wall portion.

    205+,   for a resilient piston side wall portion interposed between an end
    face portion and another piston portion in which relative axial adjustment
    of said end face portion and other portion effects radial movement of the
    resilient side wall portion.

    247,    for a resilient piston side wall portion interposed between an end
    face portion and another relatively axially movable other piston portion in
    which fluid pressure responsive axial movement of the end face portion
    effects radial movement of the resilient side wall portion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 63.4 for an expansible chamber
    valve actuator having a resilient means interposed between the actuator and
    a relatively movable valve.


CLS 92/85
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means operable for a portion
    only of the stroke of the working member, said means being effective to
    cushion the movement of such working member over the portion of the stroke
    in which it is effective.

    (1)     Note.  A device (e.g., spring) which is effective over the entire
    stroke of the working member to urge the working member in one direction of
    its movement is excluded from this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for an overcenter means to bias a working member in opposite
    directions over different portions of the stroke.

    8+,     for a movement damping means including a flowing body of fluid in
    which means are provided to control the flow of the fluid.

    41,     for a vibration damping means for a bellows type expansible chamber.

    84,     for a resilient element interposed between a working member and a
    relatively movable power transmission element.

    130+,   and the subclasses there noted, for a means for biasing a working
    member over the entire stroke.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 392+ for a working
    member stroke end cushioning means effected by control of the motive fluid.


CLS 92/86
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a passage means
    communicating with a space in the expansible chamber device which is
    intended to form a receiver for liquid which escapes from the working
    chamber, said conduit forming a means for allowing escape of such liquid
    from said space.


CLS 92/86.5
TXT Apparatus under class definition in which the working chamber is defined by
    a cylinder having a port or passage formed therein which terminates in an
    opening on an interior longitudinal wall portion of the cylinder which is
    adapted to be traversed by the working member, said passage or port being
    provided for the purpose of allowing entry of a nonworking fluid (e.g.,
    sealant or lubricant) to the area of cylinder and working member
    interengagement.


CLS 92/87
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means for scraping,
    dissolving or otherwise removing foreign matter from a part of an
    expansible chamber device, said means being in nonsealing relationship with
    said part of the expansible chamber device from which such foreign matter
    is being removed.


CLS 92/88
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising an elongated chamber for
    receiving a reciprocating working member, the longitudinal wall of said
    chamber being provided with an elongated opening extending between the ends
    of the chamber through which a portion of the working member is adapted to
    protrude and means cooperating with said chamber wall adjacent the opening
    to seal the opening adjacent said protruding portion.


CLS 92/89
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a wall portion of an
    expansible chamber, said wall portion being formed of flexible material or
    rigid members hinged or interfitted together so that the members are
    movable relative to each other; the flexing of the material or the relative
    movement of the members constituting the movement which effects the work
    function of the expansible chamber.

    (1)     Note.  As to portion (1) of this definition the sheet of flexible
    material must be disclosed as of the type which flexes or is distorted to
    cause expansion of the expansible chamber.  A member formed of flexible
    material such as a flexible material piston which is disclosed as being
    slidable in a chamber to cause expansion of the chamber is excluded. Such
    devices are classified below on other features.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34+,    for a bellows type expansible chamber wall.

    48+,    for plural flexible wall working members.

    64,     for plural relatively movable working members in which one of said
    working members is of the flexible wall type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 262+ for a collapsible chamber
    type fluid volume or rate of flow meter.


CLS 92/90
TXT Apparatus under subclass 89 in which the wall portion is formed of flexible
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34+,    for a bellows type expansible chamber portion formed of flexible
    material.

    48+,    for plural flexible wall working members.

    64,     for plural relatively movable working members in which one of said
    working members is of the flexible wall type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 262+ for a flexible wall type,
    expansible chamber volume or rate of flow meter, and subclasses 715+ for a
    flexible wall type fluid pressure gauge.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 18+ for a flexible wall
    type sealing element attached to a relatively movable rod and casing.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 206+ for a resilient wall type dispenser.

    417,    Pumps, subclass 474 for an expansible chamber type pump having a
    progressively deformed elongated flexible wall.


CLS 92/91
TXT Apparatus under subclass 90 comprising a bulb, bag, box or other container
    like enclosure formed of flexible material, said enclosure being provided
    with a relatively small opening in a wall thereof through which working
    fluid may be admitted to or exhausted from the enclosure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 150 for a flow starting means for a
    siphon, comprising a collapsible bulb.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 212+ for a pump or squeeze bulb type syringe.
    For a discussion of the line between Class 92 and Class 604, see section
    III  of the class definition (92).


CLS 92/92
TXT Apparatus under subclass 91 in which the box, bag or bulb member is formed
    of nonmetallic material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 30 for a pressure compensator
    comprising a flexible bag member, adapted to expand and contract responsive
    to pressure surges.


CLS 92/93
TXT Apparatus under subclass 90 comprising a pair of concentric rigid members,
    said members being fixed with respect to each other and being radially
    spaced from each other to provide a ring shaped space therebetween and a
    ring shaped flexible wall portion spanning said space and having the inner
    periphery thereof in sealing engagement with the inner member and the outer
    periphery thereof in sealing engagement with the outer member.


CLS 92/94
TXT Apparatus under subclass 90 including a separate means other than the
    working fluid associated with the flexible wall portion for continuously
    exerting a force in one direction of movement of said flexible wall portion.

    (1)     Note.  The separate means as set forth in this definition does not
    include the inherent resiliency of the material forming the flexible wall
    portion, but must be a separate member (e.g., spring).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for a separate biasing means for a bellows type working member.

    130+,   and the search there noted, for a separate biasing means for a
    working member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 61.3, 61.4 and 61.5 for a
    flexible wall expansible chamber valve actuator and valve which is provided
    with spring means for biasing the flexible wall.


CLS 92/95
TXT Apparatus under subclass 94 in which the force exerted by the means may be
    selectively increased or decreased so that the force exerted on the
    flexible wall portion by the means can be varied.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    for an adjustable separate biasing means for a working member.


CLS 92/96
TXT Apparatus under subclass 90 comprising a relatively thin membrane-like
    member having a peripheral edge portion, said member being adapted to be
    associated with a surrounding or encompassing tubular rigid structure to
    extend transversely thereof to form a closing wall for said tubular
    structure, the outer peripheral edge of said membrane being in sealing
    relationship with the encompassing wall of said tubular structure.

    (1)     Note.  The membrane-like member need not span the entire space
    within the encompassing wall of the tubular member, but may be in the form
    of a ring or frustum having the inner peripheral edge thereof in sealing
    engagement with a rigid element movable relative to and coaxial with the
    encompassing tubular member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 269+ for a diaphragm type,
    expansible chamber volume or rate of flow meter, subclasses 279+ for a
    diaphragm for an expansible chamber type volume or rate of flow meter, and
    subclasses 715+ for a diaphragm for a fluid pressure gauge.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 510 for a line condition change responsive
    valve with a separate connected fluid reactor surface in which the reactor
    surface is a diaphragm, and subclasses 525+ for a direct response line
    condition change responsive valve, formed of resilient material.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 30+ for a variable capacity
    chamber including a diaphragm member forming a yieldable wall for the
    chamber.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 61+ for a valve having a
    flexible material wall expansible chamber reciprocating valve actuator.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclass 225 for a diaphragm type
    flexible joint between rigid members.


CLS 92/97
TXT Apparatus under subclass 96 in which the diaphragm comprises two or more
    relatively thin membranes positioned with one member overlying and spaced
    from the other member, and means comprising a rigid element or an
    incompressible fluid positioned between said members, so that movement of
    one member is transmitted to said other member through said rigid element
    or incompressible fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for a plurality of flexible wall working members of the diaphragm
    type in which the diaphragms have different working fluid contacting areas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 157+ for a diaphragm for an acoustical device.


CLS 92/98
TXT Apparatus under subclass 96 in which the periphery of the diaphragm is
    directly secured along all of its length against motion in any direction to
    the wall of a rigid structure which forms the working chamber for the
    diaphragm.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 278 for a diaphragm mounting means
    for a diaphragm used in an expansible chamber type volume or rate of flow
    meter.

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 148+ and 157+ for a diaphragm and mounting
    therefor for an acoustical device.


CLS 92/99
TXT Apparatus under subclass 98 including a rigid member spaced from the wall
    of the working chamber and coaxial with such working chamber, said rigid
    member being secured to a portion of the diaphragm lying inwardly of the
    peripheral edge thereof.


CLS 92/100
TXT Apparatus under the subclass 99 in which said rigid member includes a pair
    of plate-like members of the same area, said plate-like members being
    positioned on opposite sides of the diaphragm.


CLS 92/101
TXT Apparatus under subclass 98 comprising a rigid power transmission element
    positioned within the working chamber, said element being unsecured to the
    diaphragm (i.e., capable of movement with respect thereto) and adapted to
    be abutted thereby.


CLS 92/102
TXT Apparatus under subclass 98 in which a separate sealing gasket is
    interposed between the peripheral portion of the diaphragm and the rigid
    structure.


CLS 92/103
TXT Apparatus under subclass 96 in which the diaphragm is formed of (1) two or
    more different materials, (2) a single material which has been treated to
    provide portions of the diaphragm with specific properties which are
    different from the properties of another portion thereof or (3) claimed as
    of a specific material.

    (1)     Note.  In part (3) the mere recitation that the diaphragm is formed
    for example of "flexible material", "rubber", "leather" or "plastic" is not
    considered a recitation of a specific material and is excluded from this
    subclass.  However, specifying a kind of rubber or plastic is considered
    specific material for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for a bellows type expansible chamber portion formed of a specific
    or diverse material.  NOTE SECTION IV OF THE CLASS DEFINITION AND THE
    PARAGRAPH FOLLOWING THE TITLE IN THE SCHEDULE OF THIS CLASS.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet which may be nominally claimed as a diaphragm, or which may be
    described as, or for use as, a diaphragm.  Class 428 takes a named
    diaphragm where the claim is directed to no more than a single or plural
    layer stock material provided for therein.

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 59+ for fabric which is coated or impregnated and subclasses
    181+ for a woven fabric which may be bonded to a second component.


CLS 92/104
TXT Apparatus under subclass 96 in which the working fluid contacting face of
    the diaphragm is provided with an embossment formed by having a portion of
    the material thereof deformed out of the plane of said face.


CLS 92/105
TXT Apparatus under subclass 90 comprising a rigid tubular member, a second
    rigid member movable relative to said tubular member positioned within said
    tubular member with the axis thereof coinciding with the axis of said
    tubular member, said members being laterally spaced from each other
    defining a ring shaped space therebetween, the flexible wall portion
    spanning said space for the full peripheral extent thereof and being
    sealingly secured to said two members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93,     for a ring shaped flexible wall portion joining a pair of
    relatively fixed rigid concentric members.

    99+,    for a diaphragm type flexible wall portion joining a pair of
    relatively movable rigid concentric members.


CLS 92/106
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a working chamber having a
    fluid conduit connected thereto, said working chamber being rotatable about
    its longitudinal axis relative to said fluid conduit, the connection
    between said working chamber and fluid conduit being so arranged as to
    allow constant communication between said conduit and working chamber,
    irrespective of the position of said working chamber relative to said
    conduit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    for a pivotally mounted moving cylinder in which a fluid conduit
    extends through the pivoted connection.


CLS 92/107
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising (1) a ring shaped working
    member provided with sealing portions along its inner and outer periphery
    for sealingly engaging the spaced walls of a chamber formed between a pair
    of fixed concentric members in which the ring shaped working member is
    slidably disposed or (2) a longitudinally extending chamber for receiving a
    ring shaped working member comprising a pair of relatively fixed concentric
    members said members being spaced from each other to provide a space
    therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for an annular working member having a coaxial element extending
    therethrough and mounted for relative rotary movement responsive to
    reciprocatory movement of the working member.

    52,     for mutually relatively movable cylinder or sleeve, member slidable
    therein and outer cylinder therefor, in which the cylinder or sleeve is an
    annular working member.

    93,     for an annular flexible wall working member peripherally sealed to
    spaced relatively fixed concentric rigid members.


CLS 92/108
TXT Apparatus under subclass 107 in which the ring shaped working member is
    provided with an elongated portion extending in a direction parallel to the
    longitudinal axis of the ring, said portion being hollow and the dimension
    of the outer peripheral portion thereof being less than the dimension of
    the outer peripheral portion of the working member end face.


CLS 92/109
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a piston provided with an
    elongated relatively slender tubular element extending axially therefrom
    and immovably secured thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for a ring shaped piston provided with a rigid axially extending
    hollow stem.


CLS 92/110
TXT Apparatus under subclass 109 in which the tubular element forms a conduit
    or passage through which a fluid is conducted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 376+ for a hollow
    piston rod provided with a valve within said hollow rod.

    417,    Pumps, subclass 486 for an expansible chamber type pump having a
    fluid conduit rigidly fixed to the piston, and see the search note therein.


CLS 92/111
TXT Apparatus under subclass 110 in which the tubular element includes two or
    more separate and distinct passages spaced from each other in a direction
    perpendicular to the direction of the piston axis.


CLS 92/112
TXT Apparatus under subclass 110 in which the piston is provided with a port
    opening through a side wall portion thereof, and said port is in open
    communication with the passage in the tubular element.


CLS 92/113
TXT Apparatus under subclass 109 including an elongated member which is movable
    relative to the piston, at least a portion of said member being positioned
    within the tubular element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65,     for a working member provided with a hollow axially extending
    hollow rod, and a second working member having a portion thereon adapted to
    extend axially through said hollow rod and being movable relative thereto.

    108,    for a ring shaped piston provided with a rigid axially extending
    hollow stem, in which the stem moves relative to a portion forming the
    working chamber for the ring shaped piston which portion extends axially
    through the stem.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 378 for a relatively
    movable valve element positioned within and movable relative to a hollow
    piston rod.


CLS 92/114
TXT Apparatus under subclass 113 in which the member may be selectively moved
    in the direction of the axis of the tubular element and held in different
    axial positions relative thereto.


CLS 92/115
TXT Apparatus under subclass 114 in which the member forms an actuator for
    means positioned within the body of the piston which means operates to vary
    the dimension of the outer peripheral portion of the piston side wall upon
    movement of said member relative to the tubular element.

    (1)     Note.  A piston in which the member is rigid with a portion of the
    piston forming the end face thereof is excluded from this subclass.  Such
    structure is classified below on other features.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206+,   for a piston having a pair of axially spaced rigid members one of
    which forms an end face portion, and an interposed side wall portion, in
    which relative axial movement of said rigid members effects lateral
    movement of the side wall portion.


CLS 92/116
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including an elongated member
    extending axially of the working member, said member being secured to the
    working member in such a manner as to allow rotation of said member
    relative to the working member, but to prevent movement of such member in a
    direction either parallel to or laterally of the axis of said working
    member.


CLS 92/117
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a cylinder adapted to
    slidably receive a piston therein, said cylinder being mounted for relative
    movement with respect to a supporting structure, movement of said cylinder
    relative to said supporting structure being responsive to or causing the
    expansion or contraction of the expansible chamber.

    (1)     Note.  An expansible chamber device in which it involves an obvious
    matter of choice or reversal of parts whether the piston is stationary and
    the cylinder movable or vice versa is excluded even if the claim identifies
    the cylinder as the movable element.  In the case, however, where the
    cylinder, for example, is provided with a specific power transmission
    element, or means to guide the cylinder in a specific path, including an
    outer casing in which the cylinder partakes of a relative axial movement
    incident to expansion or contraction of the chamber, or where a specific
    form of mounting means is provided to allow the cylinder to move about an
    axis incident to the expansion or contraction of the expansible chamber,
    classification under this definition results.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31+,    for a cylinder which is rotatable relative to a working member
    slidable therein along an axis which coincides with the axis of the
    cylinder, incident to the rectilinear motion of the working member.

    51+,    for a cylinder movable relative to a concentric outer casing, and
    having a working member within such cylinder and axially movable relative
    to both said cylinder and casing.

    54+,    for a cylinder which moves in a circular path of more than 360
    degrees incident to the expansion or contraction of the expansible chamber.

    66,     for a plurality of relatively movable cylinders forming either (1)
    working members or (2) working chambers for a plurality of relatively
    movable working members.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 196+ for an expansible
    chamber type motor having a moving cylinder.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 50 for an internal combustion
    engine having a reciprocating cylinder.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclass 125 for an impacting hammer
    head constituted by or fixed to a drive motor cylinder.

    417,    Pumps, subclass 460 for an expansible chamber type pump having a
    moving cylinder.


CLS 92/118
TXT Apparatus under subclass 117 comprising means mounting the cylinder on the
    supporting structure for movement about a fixed axis.

    (1)     Note.  A cylinder pivoted to a supporting structure for the purpose
    of adjusting the angular relation of the cylinder relative to the
    supporting structure, but which does not move incident to the expansion or
    contraction of the expansible chamber device is excluded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161+,   for a cylinder pivoted to a supporting structure for the purpose of
    adjusting the angular position of the cylinder relative to the supporting
    structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 241 for a volume or rate of flow
    meter of the expansible chamber type having a reciprocating piston movable
    in an oscillating cylinder.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 210+ for an expansible
    chamber type motor having an oscillating cylinder.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 42 for an internal combustion
    engine having an oscillating cylinder.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 464+ for an expansible chamber type pump having a
    cylinder which oscillates about an axis transverse to its longitudinal axis.


CLS 92/119
TXT Apparatus under subclass 118 in which the conduit or passage means for
    admitting working fluid to the cylinder extends through the axis of said
    mounting means, so that working fluid may be admitted to said cylinder
    continuously irrespective of the position of the cylinder relative to the
    supporting structure about said axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 211+ for an
    oscillating cylinder provided with a ported bearing or trunnion and valve
    means in said bearing or trunnion.


CLS 92/120
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising (1) a working member of the
    type designed to move back and forth in an arcuate path of not more than
    360 degrees about a fixed axis or (2) a working chamber designed to receive
    a working member of the type defined in section (1) of this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     for plural relatively movable oscillating working members.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 252+ for a volume or rate of flow
    meter of the expansible chamber type having an oscillating piston.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 481+ for an expansible chamber type pump having
    oscillating pumping member.


CLS 92/121
TXT Apparatus under subclass 120 in which the working member comprises a
    blade-like member having a rotatably mounted shaft secured along one edge
    thereof for movement therewith and forming the means for transmitting
    mechanical power to or from said working member, the axis of said shaft
    forming the axis about which said blade-like member is adapted to move.


CLS 92/122
TXT Apparatus under subclass 121 comprising a second blade-like member having
    one edge thereof secured to the rotary shaft and extending outwardly
    therefrom in spaced angular relation with the other blade-like member.


CLS 92/123
TXT Apparatus under subclass 121 in which the connection between the shaft and
    the blade-like member provides for limited movement of the shaft relative
    to the blade-like member.


CLS 92/124
TXT Apparatus under subclass 121 in which the blade-like member has a portion
    along the periphery thereof which is movable relative to other portions of
    said blade-like member, and spring means associated with said blade-like
    member for urging said portion away from said other portions.


CLS 92/125
TXT Apparatus under subclass 121 in which the blade-like member is provided
    with a nonmetallic portion along the periphery thereof adapted to sealingly
    engage a working chamber wall portion.


CLS 92/126
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means associated with the
    working member for exerting a force on the working member, or a major
    portion thereof, in a direction transverse to the longitudinal axis of the
    working member to oppose a transverse force exerted on the working member
    during the normal functioning of the apparatus of which the working member
    is a part.

    (1)     Note.  The transverse force exerted on the working member due to
    the normal functioning of the apparatus is usually that due to a piston rod
    pivoted to the working member, the weight of the working member when
    operating in a horizontal cylinder or the force exerted by burning gases on
    a sloping face of the working member.


CLS 92/127
TXT Apparatus under subclass 126 in which said force exerting means comprises a
    fluid under pressure, and means are provided to direct or conduct said
    pressure fluid between a side wall portion of the working member and the
    adjacent wall of the working chamber containing said working member.


CLS 92/128
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means designed to
    facilitate the removal or replacement of a part of an expansible chamber
    device.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are devices including mere
    securing means for either a cylinder or piston portion, which means are so
    located as to be easily accessible, for example, means for securing piston
    parts together such as bolts which extend through the piston face for easy
    accessibility upon removal of a cylinder end wall is excluded. Included in
    this subclass are, for example, an expansible chamber device combined with
    a tool for disassembling or assembling a part of the device, cooperating
    means between a cylinder and piston for facilitating the insertion or
    removal of the piston from the cylinder, special openings through which a
    tool may be inserted to assemble or disassemble a part of the device, or
    specific structure of a piston having a part removable therefrom which
    structure is specifically disclosed as for facilitating assembling or
    disassembling such part from the piston without the use of separable
    fastening means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59,     for an expansible chamber device which is convertible or changeable
    by assembly or disassembly.

    145,    for the combination of an expansible chamber device combined with a
    tool for adjusting a part of the expansible chamber device.

    216+,   for an open ended hollow skirt type piston formed of separable
    parts, and in which the parts are secured together by means which may be
    easily accessible or detachable.

    255+,   for a piston formed of plural separable parts in which the parts
    are secured together by means which may be easily accessible or detachable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 700+ for assembly or disassembly
    apparatus.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for an installation, removal,
    assembly, disassembly, or repair feature, subclass 421 for a close
    proximity labyrinth seal, subclass 435 for a piston ring, piston ring
    expander or seat therefor, subclass 511 for a dynamic circumferential
    contact seal intended for containment or compression by a gland member in a
    packing box, subclass 551 for a dynamic peripheral radially sealing
    flexible projection (e.g., lip seal, etc.) for other than a piston,
    subclass 598 for a static contact seal for use between parts of an internal
    combustion engine, or subclass 630 for a static contact seal for other than
    an internal combustion engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable.


CLS 92/129
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a working member and a
    rigid power transmission element positioned for movement therewith, said
    element being unsecured to the working member (i.e., capable of movement
    with respect thereto) and adapted to be abutted thereby.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51+,    for a concentric arrangement of tubular members, including a
    working member said members being in sealed relatively sliding
    relationship, and in which said working member moves one of the other
    members through separating abutment surfaces.

    62+,    for plural coaxial relatively movable working members in which one
    working member is moved by a second working member through separating
    abutment surfaces.

    101,    for an abutment connection between a flexible diaphragm type
    working member and a relatively movable undistortable member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 63.4 for an expansible chamber
    valve actuator having a lost motion or abutment connection between the
    actuator and the valve.


CLS 92/130
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a separate means other than
    the working fluid associated with the working member for continuously
    exerting a force in one direction of movement of the working member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for an overcenter means for biasing a working member in one
    directionduring a portion of the stroke, and in the opposite direction
    during a second portion of the stroke.

    40,     for a biasing means for a bellows type expansible chamber wall
    portion.

    84,     for a resilient element interposed between a working member and a
    relatively movable power element.

    85,     for a device which acts on a working member over a portion only of
    the stroke thereof to form a cushioning means for the working member.

    94+,    for a biasing means for a flexible wall type working member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 63.6 for an expansible chamber
    valve actuator which includes spring means biasing the working member of
    the expansible chamber device.


CLS 92/131
TXT Apparatus under subclass 130 in which the working member is normally
    maintained in a position intermediate the ends of the working chamber by
    said force exerting means, so that upon removal of the force exerted to
    move the working member in the operation of the expansible chamber device,
    the working member is returned to such position by said force exerting
    means.


CLS 92/132
TXT Apparatus under subclass 130 in which the force exerting means comprises a
    spring device, said spring device being so related to the working member
    that movement of the working member responsive to the action of working
    fluid or a mechanical force to effect normal operation of the working
    member causes said spring device to be extended from its normal position of
    equilibrium, so that upon removal of such force, the spring contracts to
    effect the return movement of said working member.


CLS 92/133
TXT Apparatus under subclass 130 in which the amount of force exerted by said
    force exerting means on the working member may be selectively increased or
    decreased.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95,     for an adjustable biasing means for a flexible wall type working
    member.


CLS 92/134
TXT Apparatus under subclass 130 in which the force exerting means comprises a
    body of confined compressible fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 30+ for an accumulator
    chamber adapted to receive a fluid on one side of a movable wall and a
    confined compressible fluid on the opposite side of the movable wall.


CLS 92/135
TXT Apparatus under subclass 130 in which the force exerting means includes a
    portion thereof in force transmitting engagement with the working member
    end face.


CLS 92/136
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means forming a part of the
    working member for engagement with a relatively movable element, said means
    comprising (1) a spline extending longitudinally of the working member, (2)
    gear teeth or (3) a thread.

    (1)     Note.  A piston having a portion thereof provided with a threaded
    or splined section for the sole purpose of securing a second piston portion
    rigidly therewith is excluded from this subclass.  Such structure is
    classified below on other features.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31+,    for a rectilinearly moving working member and coaxial element
    interengaged for relative rotary movement in which the interengaging means
    includes a thread or spline on the working member.

    217+,   for an open ended skirt type piston formed of several parts in
    which the parts are detachably secured together by means of a threaded
    connection.

    255+,   for a piston formed of several parts in which the parts may be
    secured together by means of a threaded connection.


CLS 92/137
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a flexible elongated element
    secured to the working member and movable with the working member, said
    elongated element functioning as a means for transmitting power to or from
    said working member.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass for example is a rope, chain or
    cable having one end thereof connected to a piston and the other end
    connected to a load wherein movement of the piston will move the load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     for a resilient element interposed between a working member and a
    relatively movable element.

    130+,   and the search there noted, for a spring device having one end
    thereof secured to a working member and being effective to bias said
    working member in one direction of its movement.


CLS 92/138
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a working member having a
    pair of axially spaced end faces, and a portion located between and rigidly
    secured to said end faces, said portion having means formed thereon to
    engage with a mechanical motion converting linkage or power transmission
    member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for a plurality of relatively movable working members, each working
    member having spaced end faces and a rotating shaft engaging portion
    intermediate said end faces, said working members being positioned side by
    side in parallel relationship.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 174 for a plurality of
    relatively movable working members, each working member having spaced end
    faces and a linkage or transmission engaging means intermediate said spaced
    end faces.


CLS 92/139
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a piston type working
    member, adapted to reciprocate within a cylinder, said piston type working
    member being provided with a member pivotally secured thereto and extending
    coaxially therewith, said member being slidably engageable with the walls
    of the cylinder in which the piston reciprocates to guide the piston in its
    movement in the cylinder.


CLS 92/140
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means for transmitting a
    force to or from a working member, said means comprising a plurality of
    mechanically interconnected members which are movable relative to each
    other, one of said members being connected for movement with the working
    member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13.7,   for a working member having a relatively movable power transmission
    element and means adjusting or limiting the motion of said transmission
    element to vary the working member stroke.

    68+,    for a plurality of relatively moving working members provided with
    mechanical motion converting means connecting said working members to a
    common rotary shaft.

    76,     for a plurality of relatively movable working members
    interconnected by a linkage having relatively movable members.

    136+,   for a linkage or transmission arrangement associated with an
    expansible chamber device and in which such linkage or transmission
    includes a gear, thread or spline rigid with working member.

    137,    for linkage or transmission means associated with an expansible
    chamber device, including a flexible element secured to the working member.

    138,    for an expansible chamber device provided with a working member
    having a pair of spaced end faces and a linkage or transmission means
    engaging the working member at a point intermediate the spaced end faces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses for a
    mechanical movement or mechanism of general utility.  Class 74 takes a
    nominally claimed expansible chamber device combined with a power
    transmitting linkage or transmission.  (For a more detailed statement of
    the line between Class 74 and Class 92, see section III of the class
    definition).


CLS 92/141
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a plate-like member
    detachably secured to a portion of the working member, said plate-like
    member being for the purpose of diverting a fluid away from some part of
    the expansible chamber device, or a part associated with the expansible
    chamber device.


CLS 92/142
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a chamber associated with
    the expansible chamber device, said chamber being separate from that
    portion of the working chamber traversed by the working member and being in
    open communication therewith and forming a storage space for a
    noncompressible liquid type working fluid when said fluid is not in that
    portion of the working chamber traversed by said working member.

    (1)     Note.  A mere pipe or conduit leading to the portion of the
    expansible chamber device traversed by the working member does not
    constitute a reservoir for this subclass.  For classification in this
    subclass the device must include a container-like structure into which the
    working fluid is exhausted upon being expelled from the portion of the
    chamber traversed by the working member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     for a working member provided with a chamber forming a reservoir
    for a noncompressible liquid-type working fluid.

    163+,   for a fluid conduit or port to a working chamber.


CLS 92/143
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means associated with the
    expansible chamber device to (1) resist or slow down the movement of the
    working member or (2) absorb shock or vibration incident to the operation
    of the expansible chamber device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for an overcenter means to bias the working member in opposite
    directions over different portions of the stroke.

    8,      for a means to control the flow of nonworking arresting fluid for
    the working member.

    41,     for a vibration damping means for a bellows type expansible chamber
    device.

    84,     for a resilient element interposed between a working member and a
    relatively movable power transmission element.

    85,     for a means effective over a portion only of the stroke to cushion
    the movement of the working member.

    130+,   and the search there noted for a separate means to bias a working
    member in one direction of its movement.


CLS 92/144
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a working chamber forming
    member provided with a housing, spaced from and enclosing the outer wall
    thereof to form a space between said structure and outer wall which space
    is designed to (1) form a jacket for circulating a heat exchange fluid
    therein or (2) form an insulating space to reduce the flow of heat to or
    from the working chamber through the walls of said member.

    (1)     Note.  A cylinder head or end closure provided with a heat exchange
    modifying space or jacket is included under this definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 41.72+ and subclass 195 for
    a jacketed cylinder or end closure therefor for receiving circulating heat
    exchange liquid to cool the operating parts of an internal combustion
    engine.  A specific disclosure that a jacketed cylinder or end closure
    therefor is to form a part of an internal combustion engine is sufficient
    for classification in Class 123.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for a heat exchange modifying
    space or jacket of general utility.  Class 165 takes a nominally claimed
    cylinder or working chamber forming member of an expansible chamber device,
    where the claim is otherwise directed to a surrounding space or jacket
    designed to modify the heat exchange properties of the cylinder or member.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 400+ and 415+ for a spaced wall or jacketed
    type container.


CLS 92/145
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in combination with features other
    than working fluid conducting or admitting means, working chamber
    supporting or retaining means, working member sealing, guiding or movement
    facilitating means, or mechanical motion converting means articulated to a
    working member and not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  Fluid conducting or admitting means includes a conduit,
    groove, channel or port designed to conduct fluid to or from the working
    chamber.

    (2)     Note.  Working chamber supporting or retaining means includes a
    means such as a casing, bedplate or framework for holding or maintaining a
    working chamber forming member of an expansible chamber device in a
    position for operation.

    (3)     Note.  Working member sealing, guiding or movement facilitating
    means includes piston rings or seals, guiding structure on a cylinder end
    member for encircling and maintaining a piston portion to a predetermined
    path of motion and lubricating features, special cylinder and piston
    surface structure or configuration to facilitate the movement of the piston
    in the cylinder.

    (4)     Note.  A mechanical motion converting means articulated to a
    working member includes a connecting rod or similar power transmitting
    element which is movably secured to the piston.

    (5)     Note.  In this subclass for example are combinations with (a) a
    heating element within the working chamber to evaporate a working fluid
    which has condensed (b) a tool for radially adjusting a piston side wall
    portion, said tool being mounted on the cylinder head or end closure (c) a
    piston having a hook at one end thereof to retrieve or grapple parts which
    may become detached or broken from the piston.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128,    for a combined expansible chamber device and a tool designed to
    facilitate assembly or disassembly of some part of the expansible chamber
    device.

    161,    for a nominally claimed art device (e.g., bicycle, chair) which
    forms a support for the expansible chamber device, no more of the art
    device being claimed than that necessary to mount or support the expansible
    chamber device.


CLS 92/146
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising (1) two or more cylinders
    adapted to receive reciprocatory working members, said cylinders being
    rigidly secured together in a unitary structure, or (2) a frame or support
    having means associated therewith for rigidly securing two or more
    cylinders together.

    (1)     Note.  A single axially extending hollow tubular element provided
    with a fixed partition for dividing the same into two distinct chambers is
    included under this definition, also included under this definition is a
    single axially extending hollow element having portions along its length of
    different cross-sectional areas which portions form separate working
    chambers. However, a single axially extending hollow tubular element of
    uniform diameter in which the sole means for dividing the same into two
    chambers is a reciprocatory working member is not considered to constitute
    two or more cylinders for this subclass and is excluded.  Such structure is
    classified below on other features.

    (2)     Note.  Class 92 excludes multiple expansion type motors and
    multistage pumps even if no valving is claimed if the claims do include the
    fluid connection between stages of the motor pump.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56+,    for a plurality of unitarily mounted rotating cylinders.

    61+,    for relatively movable working members positioned in plural
    unitarily mounted cylinders.

    161,    for a support or frame for a single cylinder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 152+ for multiple
    expansion type motors and subclasses 508+ for an expansible chamber type
    motor having a plurality of working members.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 52.1+ for an internal
    combustion engine having a plurality of unitarily mounted cylinders,
    subclass 195 for a frame construction for an internal combustion engine
    having a plurality of unitarily mounted cylinders.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 55+ for a motor vehicle having its motor
    mounted partly or wholly on the vehicle's lower running gear; subclass 63
    for a motor vehicle having its motor mounted on the vehicle's body or body
    frame, connected to the vehicle's rear axle, and movable with the axle
    relative to the body or body frame; subclasses 291+ for a motor vehicle
    having a specific motor-to-body-frame relationship; and subclass 312 for a
    motor vehicle having a frame which is provided with structure adapted to
    receive or support a motor, a change-speed gearing, or some other element
    of the vehicle's power train.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 244+ for pumps having successive stages.


CLS 92/147
TXT Apparatus under subclass 146 including means to enclose or support a
    mechanical motion converting linkage including a rotary shaft, said means
    being rigidly secured to the cylinder supporting means to form a unitary
    structure therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68+,    for a plurality of unitarily mounted cylinders having pistons
    therein, said pistons being connected to a crankshaft.


CLS 92/148
TXT Apparatus under subclass 147 comprising three or more cylinders arranged
    with the axes thereof lying in angularly related planes which intersect at
    a common line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for three or more radially arranged cylinders provided with
    relatively movable working members secured by mechanical motion converting
    means to a common rotating shaft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 247+ for a volume or rate of flow
    meter of the expansible chamber type having a plurality of radially
    arranged cylinders.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 491+ for expansible
    chamber type motors having three or more cylinders arranged in radial
    relationship with a rotary transmission axis.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 54.1+ for an internal
    combustion engine having a plurality of radiating cylinders.

    417,    Pumps, subclass 273 for expansible chamber type pumps having three
    or more cylinders arranged in radial relationship with a rotary
    transmission axis.


CLS 92/149
TXT Apparatus under subclass 147 in which a pair of cylinders are positioned
    with the axis thereof lying in angularly related planes, said planes
    extending at an angle of less than 180 degrees relative to each other.


CLS 92/150
TXT Apparatus under subclass 147 in which the cylinders are positioned end to
    end and have a common longitudinal axis.


CLS 92/151
TXT Apparatus under subclass 146 in which the cylinders are positioned end to
    end and have a common longitudinal axis.

    (1)     Note.  A mere axially extending hollow tubular element of uniform
    diameter, in which the sole means for dividing the same into two chambers
    is a reciprocatory working member, is not considered as constituting plural
    cylinders, and is excluded from this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150,    for coaxial cylinders combined with a casing or support for a
    rotary shaft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 58.2+ for an internal
    combustion engine having a plurality of tandem cylinders.


CLS 92/152
TXT Apparatus under subclass 151 in which the cross sectional area of a first
    of said cylinders is smaller than the cross sectional area of a second of
    said cylinders.


CLS 92/153
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including (1) means to, apply, direct
    or conduct a substance to a location between relatively movable parts of an
    expansible chamber device designed to reduce the friction between said
    parts or (2) means forming a part of an expansible chamber device, which
    means is formed of a material which is normally applied between relatively
    movable elements to reduce the friction between said elements.

    (1)     Note.  Included under this definition are expansible chamber device
    parts, such as for example, a piston formed of Teflon, mica or a material
    having a high graphite content or other material known to be
    self-lubricating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141,    for a separable deflector plate or baffle on a working member for
    deflecting lubricant from a portion of the expansible chamber device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 46 for interrelated
    control of motive fluid and lubricant.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 196 for lubricating means for
    an internal combustion engine.

    184,    Lubrication, appropriate subclasses for lubrication of general
    utility, and particularly subclasses 18+ for lubricating means for an
    engine cylinder.  Class 184 takes a nominal cylinder and piston having
    lubricating means therefor.  For a more detailed statement of the line
    between Class 184 and Class 92, see section III of the class definition.


CLS 92/154
TXT Apparatus under subclass 153 in which the lubricant is picked up or
    collected and carried along by working fluid which is entering or being
    exhausted from the expansible chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 46 for interrelated
    control or motive fluid and lubricant.


CLS 92/155
TXT Apparatus under subclass 153 in which a part of the expansible chamber
    device which is in slidable engagement with another part of such device is
    formed of material which inherently performs a lubricating function.


CLS 92/156
TXT Apparatus under subclass 153 comprising a passage through which lubricant
    is adapted to flow and means associated with said passage capable of being
    operated to selectively open or close said passage.


CLS 92/157
TXT Apparatus under subclass 153 in which a piston is provided with a
    connecting rod pivotally connected thereto, said rod having an axially
    extending passage means through which lubricant is conveyed between a
    lubricant source and a portion of the piston.


CLS 92/158
TXT Apparatus under subclass 153 comprising a piston provided with means for
    (1) holding or storing lubricant or (2) conveying or guiding lubricant from
    one location on the piston to another location thereon.

    (1)     Note.  Such means may include an open peripheral groove or channel
    either sectional or continuous, a port, slit, or any opening through a
    portion of the piston disclosed as for the purpose of conducting lubricant
    from one point to another.


CLS 92/159
TXT Apparatus under subclass 158 in which said means includes a cavity, trough,
    or other means which forms a part of the piston and acts as a reservoir for
    the lubricant.

    (1)     Note.  A mere radially directed circumferential oil retaining
    groove on the piston side wall portion having the open side closed by the
    relatively movable cylinder wall is excluded. Included is a circumferential
    groove having a configuration which permits the retention of oil therein
    independently of the cooperating cylinder wall, or a ported trough or
    chamber on a piston portion or generally any receptacle means on the piston
    capable of trapping or collecting lubricant for holding such lubricant or
    directing the same to some specified outlet in said receptacle means.


CLS 92/160
TXT Apparatus under subclass 158 in which said means comprises a passage or
    port which extends completely through a portion of the side wall of the
    piston so that there is an unobstructed opening from the piston outer
    periphery to the interior of the piston.


CLS 92/161
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a base, bracket, standard or
    framework to which a cylinder or other working chamber forming means of an
    expansible chamber device is secured to be supported in operative position.

    (1)     Note.  A mere cylindrical sleeve or casing claimed as a pump body,
    crankcasing, cylinder block or engine block, which receives a second sleeve
    therein claimed either as a cylinder or cylinder liner which forms the
    inner surface thereof for slidably receiving a piston, is not considered a
    support for this subclass and is classified as a cylinder detail in
    subclasses 169+.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass will take those patents in which an expansible
    chamber device is supported on a nominally claimed art device such as a
    chair or bicycle.  However, if the art device is claimed specifically,
    i.e., more is claimed than that necessary to support the expansible chamber
    device, classification is generally with art device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54+,    for a cylinder mounted for rotation incident to the reciprocation
    of a piston positioned therein.

    77,     for a ground embedded expansible chamber device.

    117+,   for a cylinder mounted on a support, said cylinder being mounted
    for movement relative to said support incident to the operation of the
    expansible chamber device.

    146,    for a plurality of cylinders secured to a support or frame to be
    immovable relative to each other when in an operative position.  Note
    section IV of the class definition and the paragraph following the title in
    the schedule of this class.

    169+,   for a cylinder liner detachably secured in a tubular sleeve-like
    casing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 195 for a support or frame
    for an internal combustion engine.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 55+, 63, 291+, and 312 as explained in
    the reference to each appearing in subclass 426 above.

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses for a support of general utility,
    and particularly subclasses 637+ for a machinery support.  Class 92 takes
    the combination of a cylinder or working chamber forming means of an
    expansible chamber device and a support therefor where some specific
    structure of the cylinder or working chamber forming means other than means
    which are designed solely for the purpose of positioning or securing the
    cylinder or working chamber forming means to the support is claimed.  For
    example, the mere  nominal recitation of "a cylinder having a flange",
    "means for positioning the cylinder on a support", or "openings for the
    reception of bolts for securing the cylinder to a support", will not
    preclude classification in Class 248.


CLS 92/161.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 161 in which the base, bracket, standard or
    framework is particularly adapted to be connected to or cooperate with a
    vehicle wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclass 233 for pumps which are operated by a wheel or axle.


CLS 92/162
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a cylinder and a piston
    reciprocally mounted therein, and in which a relatively small unobstructed
    space or passage is provided between the side wall of the piston and the
    adjacent cylinder wall, said space or passage extending from one end of the
    piston side wall portion to the opposite end thereof to allow working fluid
    to flow from the chamber formed at one end of the piston side wall portion
    to the chamber formed at the opposite end thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclass 316 for an internal resistance fluid brake
    comprising a cylinder and piston, and passage means between the cylinder
    wall and piston side wall to allow restricted flow of fluid from one end of
    the piston to the other as the piston moves in the cylinder.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 411+ for a dynamic close proximity seal (e.g.,
    contactless, fluent, etc.) having a gap or clearance.


CLS 92/163
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a passage or port adapted
    to conduct and permit the entry or exhaust of fluid to or from the working
    chamber of the expansible chamber device, said passage or port not being in
    the movable wall portion of said chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for a rotating cylinder provided with a fluid conduit coaxial with
    the axis of rotation of the cylinder.

    106,    for a fluid conduit in constant communication with a relatively
    rotating working chamber.

    110+,   for a piston having a hollow rigid stem or rod forming a fluid
    conduit for introducing or exhausting working fluid to a working chamber.

    119,    for a cylinder having one end thereof pivotally mounted on a
    supporting structure, and in which the fluid conduit or port for permitting
    entry or exhaust of working fluid to or from the cylinder extends through
    the pivoted connection.

    153+,   for a fluid conduit to a working chamber designed to convey
    lubricant to the chamber.

    181+,   for a fluid conduit or port in the end face of a piston.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclasses for a
    fluid port or conduit opening into the working chamber of an expansible
    chamber which conduit is provided with selectively variable means to
    control the flow of fluid through the conduit.  A mere closure cap or plug
    for a port or conduit opening into the working chamber of an expansible
    chamber device is not considered as a means to control the flow of fluid
    through the port or passage and is classified in Class 92.


CLS 92/164
TXT Apparatus under subclass 163 in which the working chamber is provided with
    a removable end closure member, the port or passage being located in said
    member.


CLS 92/165
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means formed on an end
    portion of a cylinder, and being engageable with the piston or a member
    moved by the piston, said means being effective to (1) constrain said
    piston or member to a predetermined path of movement or (2) provide a
    sealing means between the inside of the cylinder and the outside thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for a self sealing opening in a longitudinal wall of a working
    chamber for forming a guide for a working member portion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 7+ for linear bearings.  Class 384, Bearings
    takes a nominally claimed cylinder and end wall therein slidably engaging a
    rod to guide the same, however, where details of the piston are included in
    the claim, classification is in this class (92).


CLS 92/166
TXT Apparatus under subclass 165 comprising a second guide means positioned in
    the end of the cylinder opposite the end containing said first guide means.


CLS 92/167
TXT Apparatus under subclass 165 in which the guide means is so related to the
    cylinder end portion as to be movable relative to the cylinder in a
    direction perpendicular to the direction of the longitudinal axis of the
    cylinder.


CLS 92/168
TXT Apparatus under subclass 165 comprising a nonmetallic sealing element
    between the cylinder end portion and the piston or element moved by the
    piston.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 18.2 for a flexible sealing
    element secured to a casing portion and to a reciprocating rod portion to
    prevent the seepage of fluid into or out of the casing.  The mere nominal
    recitation of a cylinder and piston does not preclude classification in
    Class 74.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 500+ for a dynamic, circumferential, contact seal for
    other than a piston.


CLS 92/169.1
TXT CYLINDER DETAIL:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising particulars of a cylinder.

    (1)     Note.  Patents disclosing a cylinder or working chamber but
    claiming no more of the disclosed device than what is descriptive of a
    structure of general utility, such as a tube, container or closure are
    classified in appropriate structural classes.  Examples of claimed features
    which are considered to be too special to the cylinder art for
    classification in general structural classes and which cause classification
    under the definitions are (a) a part or other restricted passage for fluid
    flow, (b) a nominally claimed piston, (c) the naming of a part as a pump
    body, engine block, cylinder block, crankcasing or the like or (d) a
    cylinder or liner positioned in a casing or housing and in which the casing
    or housing closure secures the cylinder or liner within the casing.

    (2)     Note.  A cylinder head or closure, per se, claiming some structure
    which goes beyond a closure of general utility, and which limits such
    closure or head for use as a part of an expansible chamber device is
    included under this definition.

    (3)     Note.  A piston and cylinder combination in which the cylinder is
    nominally claimed is excluded from this subclass.  Such structure is
    classified below on the structure of the piston.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51+,    for a telescoping cylinder.

    107+,   for a cylinder adapted to receive an annular working member.

    120+,   for a cylinder adapted to receive an oscillating working member.

    146+,   for plural unitarily mounted cylinders.

    163+,   for a cylinder provided with a fluid conduit or port.

    164,    for a cyclinder and closure provided with a fluid conducting port.

    165+,   for a cylinder head or closure provided with means to guide a
    piston or a member moved by the piston.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 193.1+ for a cylinder for
    an internal combustion engine.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, appropriate subclasses for the
    structure of a tubular memeber even though disclosed as a cylinder for an
    expansible chamber device.  Class 138 takes a cylinder when the claims
    include no more than the structure of a tubular member.

    220,    Receptacles, appropriate subclasses for a container and/or closure
    thererfor of general utility.  Class 220 takes a nominally claimed cylinder
    for an expansible chamber device when the claims are directed to no more
    than the structure of a container.  Also Class 220 takes a cylinder or
    cylinder head therefor to no more than a container or closure therefor.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, appropriate subclasses for a joint
    between a plurality of tubular members or between a tubular member and a
    plate-like element.  Class 285 takes a device comprising a plurality of
    tubular members and means to join said tubular member together, even though
    the completed structure may be disclosed as or nominally claimed as a
    cylinder for an expansible-chamber device.  Further Class 285 takes a joint
    between a tubular member and a plate-like element even though the tubular
    member may be disclosed as as cylinder.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, appropriate subclasses for closure fasteners of
    general utility.  Class 292 takes a nominally claimed cylinder and head or
    closure combined with means to secure the head or closure to the cylinder.


CLS 92/169.2
TXT With reinforcing member:

    Apparatus under subclass 169.1 including structure specifically provided
    for (a) increasing the rigidity of the cylinder, or (b) strengthening the
    cylinder, or (c) bypassing the effect of pressure deformation on the
    cylinder to a cylinder mounting structure.


CLS 92/169.3
TXT Extending through working member:

    Apparatus under subclass 169.2 wherein the structure of the reinforcing
    structure comprises a member extending through the working member.


CLS 92/169.4
TXT Coaxial sleeve or tube:

    Apparatus under subclass 169.2 wherein the structure is the reinforcing
    structure comprises a member extending parallel and concentrically with the
    working member.


CLS 92/170.1
TXT Nonmetallic piston contacting portion:

    Apparatus under subclass 169, including a nonmetallic portion of the
    cylinder adapted to slidably contact a piston.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168,    for a cylinder provided with a guide or seal on an end portion
    thereof including a nonmetallic portion.


CLS 92/171.1
TXT Cylinder or liner retained in casing by casing closure or closure
    associated means:

    Apparatus under subclass 169 comprising a casing and a cylinder or liner
    positioned within said casing to be encompassed thereby, and a removable
    closure for closing an end of the casing, said cylinder or liner being
    secured in said casing by the closure member, or by means which cooperate
    with the closure member.


CLS 92/172
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a piston as defined in
    section II of the class definition.

    (1)     Note.  A member secured to the piston so as to be immovable
    relative thereto (e.g., rigid piston rod) when the piston is performing its
    intended function in the expansible chamber device is considered as forming
    a part of the piston.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107+,   for a ring shaped piston.

    108+,   for a piston having a rigidly attached axially extending hollow rod
    or stem.

    120+,   for an oscillating piston.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 888.04+ for the method of making a piston.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 422, and see the search
    there noted, for a valved piston for an expansible chamber type motor.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 47 for a valved piston for
    use in an internal combustion engine, and subclasses 193.1+ for a piston
    which is limited for use in an internal combustion engine.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 30+ for a piston disclosed
    as for use in a variable capacity pressure compensator.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 153+ for a piston which is fluid driven into a
    well.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 206+ for a piston of a drive
    motor which forms an impacting hammer head.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 324+ for a piston which is
    disclosed as for use in a piston type valve.

    267,    Spring Devices, appropriate subclasses for a piston disclosed as
    for use in a fluid type spring device.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 434+ for a piston ring or piston ring expander or seat
    therefor.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 545+ for a valved piston disclosed as for use in
    a pump. A piston of the type in which a peripheral sealing element is
    adapted to be deflected out of sealing engagement with a chamber wall
    during a portion of the stroke of such piston, to allow passage of fluid
    from one side of the piston to the other is not considered a valved piston
    for Class 417, and is classified in Class 92.


CLS 92/173
TXT Apparatus under subclass 172 including a surface on the piston positioned
    to be contacted by the working fluid, said surface being so shaped that
    contact of the working fluid therewith effects either a rotary movement of
    said piston about its longitudinal axis or a rotary movement of the body of
    working fluid about an axis coinciding with the longitudinal axis of the
    piston.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31+,    for a means to cause rotation of a piston responsive to rectilinear
    movement of said piston in a cylinder.


CLS 92/174
TXT Apparatus under subclass 172 in which the piston includes a pair of axially
    spaced rigid side wall portions and a body of liquid positioned between
    said spaced portions for direct engagement with such chamber wall when said
    piston is in operative position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 411+ for a dynamic close proximity seal (e.g.,
    contactless, fluent, etc.) having a gap or clearance.


CLS 92/175
TXT Apparatus under subclass 172 in which the piston includes a pair of axially
    spaced portions each of which includes an end face and a side wall, said
    spaced portions being rigidly joined by a portion of smaller peripheral
    extent than the spaced portions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    for a piston provided with spaced faces joined by a rigid stem, in
    which the stem is provided with a linkage or transmission engaging portion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 324+ for a spool type piston
    valve.


CLS 92/176
TXT Apparatus under subclass 172 in which the piston is provided with a sealed
    space in a portion thereof for the purpose of modifying the heat exchange
    properties of said piston portion.

    (1)     Note.  The space may either be filled with a gas, or an insulating
    material, or may be under a vacuum.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 41.16 for an internal
    combustion engine piston provided with a closed space having a coolant
    material sealed in said space.


CLS 92/177
TXT Apparatus under subclass 172 in which the peripheral portion of the piston
    at the end thereof containing the end face portion has a shape in
    transverse cross section other than circular.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233,    for an open ended hollow skirt type piston in which the skirt has a
    portion thereof, spaced from the end of the piston containing the end face,
    oval shaped in transverse cross section.


CLS 92/178
TXT Apparatus under subclass 172 including a ball or roller bearing means
    mounted on the piston for engagement with a working chamber wall when the
    piston is in operative position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, appropriate subclasses for linear bearings with ball or
    roller anti-friction contacting surfaces.  Class 384 takes a nominally
    claimed piston and cylinder having ball or roller type anti-friction
    contacting surfaces.


CLS 92/179
TXT Apparatus under subclass 172 in which the piston is provided with a rod
    adapted to transmit motion between the piston and a relatively movable
    member, said rod being pivotally mounted on the piston and having the end
    thereof which is joined to the piston in direct communication with working
    fluid when the piston is in operative position in a working chamber.


CLS 92/181
TXT Apparatus under subclass 172 in which the piston is provided with a fluid
    conducting port or passage extending from the end face thereof through a
    portion of the piston and (1) communicating with a cavity in the piston for
    which the port or passage forms a restricted opening or (2) extending
    through a wall of the piston other than the end face (3) communicating with
    a cavity in the piston having a wall which is radially movable and forming
    a side wall portion of the piston.

    (1)     Note.  See the search class notes under subclass 172 of Class 92
    for a piston having an opening in the face thereof for admitting or
    exhausting working fluid to or from a working chamber, said opening being
    controlled by valve means.

    (2)     Note.  The mere claiming of a flow through passage in a well type
    pump plunger is not sufficient for classification in this subclass.  Such
    plunger is classified below on its other features.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 316+ for an internal resistance fluid type brake
    (e.g., dashpot) including a piston having a passage therethrough, for
    allowing fluid to pass from one side of the piston to the other.


CLS 92/182
TXT Apparatus under subclass 181 in which the port or passage communicates with
    a cavity in the piston, said cavity having a wall thereof which is radially
    movable and forming a side wall portion of the piston.


CLS 92/183
TXT Apparatus under subclass 182 in which the port or passage is provided with
    valve means for controlling the flow of fluid through the port or passage.

    (1)     Note.  The valve means under this definition must be some means
    other than a means which has a valving action due to a radial movement of
    the radially movably wall itself.


CLS 92/184
TXT Apparatus under subclass 182 in which the piston is provided with opposed
    end faces each of which is provided with a fluid port or passage.


CLS 92/185
TXT Apparatus under subclass 184 in which the ports or passages in the opposed
    end faces communicate with the same cavity.


CLS 92/186
TXT Apparatus under subclass 172 in which the piston is provided with a chamber
    having a restricted opening for communicating such chamber with a source of
    heat exchange fluid.

    (1)     Note.  The fluid may be the working fluid for the expansible
    chamber device, or a fluid which is separate and distinct from the working
    fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 41.35+ for an internal
    combustion engine piston provided with a cavity therein and means to
    circulate a coolant in said cavity.


CLS 92/187
TXT Apparatus under subclass 172 including a member joined to the piston by
    means which allow separation of said member from the piston without in any
    way destroying or permanently deforming the piston or member or the means
    joining said piston and member together, said member forming a support or
    bearing member for pivotally mounting a connecting rod to the piston.

    (1)     Note.  An open ended skirt type piston in which a portion of the
    skirt is detachably secured to a second portion containing the end face and
    in which the connecting rod pin bearing portions forms an integral part of
    such skirt portion or portion containing the end face is excluded.  Such
    structure is classified on other features.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216+,   for an open ended skirt type piston formed of plural separable
    parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 52+ for articulated connections
    in general, particularly subclasses 150+.  See section III of the class
    definition under "SEARCH CLASS", 403, for the line between Class 92 and
    Class 403.


CLS 92/188
TXT Apparatus under subclass 187 in which the means for securing the member to
    the piston comprises a ring-shaped element positioned about the outer
    periphery of the piston and forms a side wall portion thereof.


CLS 92/189
TXT Apparatus under subclass 187 in which the piston is formed of separate end
    face and side wall forming portions and in which such portions are secured
    together by means which allow separation of said portions without, in any
    way, destroying or permanently deforming the end face or side wall forming
    portions or the means securing said portions together.


CLS 92/190
TXT Apparatus under subclass 189 in which the means for pivotally mounting the
    connecting rod to the piston forms the means which secures the end face and
    side wall portions together.


CLS 92/191
TXT Apparatus under subclass 187 in which the means for joining the member to
    the piston extends through the end face portion.


CLS 92/192
TXT Apparatus under subclass 172 in which the side wall portion of the piston
    is provided with a plurality of axially spaced relatively thin flexible
    metallic tongue-like members extending circumferentially and radially with
    respect to the piston axis, said tongue-like members being formed as an
    integral part of the side wall portion and the outer ends thereof forming
    the outer peripheral extent of the piston side wall portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249+,   for a nonmetallic piston formed of flexible material which may be
    provided with circumferential radially extending sealing tongues.


CLS 92/193
TXT Apparatus under subclass 172 in which the piston is provided with a side
    wall portion which is movable radially with respect to the piston axis, and
    a separate spring device is provided for exerting a force against said
    portion of urging the same in such radial direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126,    for a differential thrust producing means for a working member
    comprising a spring member for biasing the working member toward one side
    of the working chamber.

    201+,   for a piston having a radially adjustable side wall portion.


CLS 92/194
TXT Apparatus under subclass 193 in which the radially movable side wall
    portion comprises a lip made of flexible material extending around the
    periphery of this piston and in a direction axially of the piston, and the
    spring device exerts a force on said lip for urging the same in a radial
    direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240+,   for a piston having a side wall portion which includes a peripheral
    axially extending flexible lip.


CLS 92/195
TXT Apparatus under subclass 193 in which the radially movable side wall
    portion is, or is a part of an elongated hollow tubular skirt-like member
    closed at one end by the end face portion and being open at the opposite
    end.


CLS 92/196
TXT Apparatus under subclass 195 in which the hollow tubular skirt-like member
    is provided with a slit in the wall thereof extending from the open end in
    a direction toward the closed end thereof and in which the spring device is
    positioned in the slit.


CLS 92/197
TXT Apparatus under subclass 195 in which the force exerted by the spring
    device may be selectively increased or decreased.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199,    for a spring means for biasing a side wall portion radially in
    which the biasing force of the spring is adjustable.


CLS 92/198
TXT Apparatus under subclass 195 in which the spring device comprises a
    discontinuous ring-like element made of resilient material, a substantial
    portion of the periphery of said element being in force exerting engagement
    with the interior surface of the skirt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200,    for a split annular type spring for biasing a side wall portion
    radially.


CLS 92/199
TXT Apparatus under subclass 193 in which the force exerted by the spring
    device may be selectively increased or decreased.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    197,    for an open ended skirt-type piston provided with a spring member
    for biasing a portion of the skirt radially, and in which the force exerted
    by the spring is adjustable. NOTE SECTION IV OF THE CLASS DEFINITION AND
    THE PARAGRAPH FOLLOWING THE TITLE IN THE SCHEDULE OF THIS CLASS.


CLS 92/200
TXT Apparatus under subclass 193 in which the spring device comprises a
    discontinuous ring-like element made of resilient material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198,    for an open ended skirt-type piston in which the skirt is radially
    biased by means of a split annular type spring. NOTE SECTION IV OF THE
    CLASS DEFINITION AND THE PARAGRAPH FOLLOWING THE TITLE IN THE SCHEDULE OF
    THIS CLASS.


CLS 92/201
TXT Apparatus under subclass 172 in which means are provided to move and hold a
    side wall portion of the piston to different positions laterally of the
    piston axis to vary the peripheral extent of the piston.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    for a piston having a radially adjustable side wall portion, and
    provided with means for moving said side wall portion, said means including
    an actuator extending through an axially extending hollow rod on the piston.

    193+,   for a spring means for biasing a side wall portion radially.


CLS 92/202
TXT Apparatus under subclass 201 in which the adjustable portion comprises a
    hollow tubular skirt-like member secured at one end to the end face portion
    and extending in a direction opposite from the end face, said skirt-like
    member being open at one end and being closed at the opposite end by the
    end face portion.


CLS 92/203
TXT Apparatus under subclass 202 in which the means for effecting lateral
    movement of the skirt-like member comprises an element having a bevelled
    surface, said element being movable relative to said skirt-like member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207,    for a radially adjustable side wall portion in which the adjustment
    is effected by a wedge member movable relative to the side wall portion.


CLS 92/204
TXT Apparatus under subclass 201 in which the means for effecting the radial
    adjustment of the side wall portion includes a spacer or shim element
    positionable between relatively movable parts of the piston and which may
    be optionally inserted between said parts or removed therefrom to effect
    such adjustment.


CLS 92/205
TXT Apparatus under subclass 201 in which the side wall portion is positioned
    between and in contact with a pair of rigid axially spaced end members,
    said end members being capable of being moved and held to different
    positions toward or away from each other, movement of said end members
    effecting lateral movement of the side wall portion.


CLS 92/206
TXT Apparatus under subclass 205 in which the surfaces of one of said rigid end
    members and side wall portion at the point of contact between said member
    and portion are beveled.


CLS 92/207
TXT Apparatus under subclass 201 in which the means for effecting lateral
    movement of the side wall portion comprises an element having a beveled
    surface and being movable relative to said side wall portion, so that
    movement of said element relative to the side wall portion effects lateral
    movement of said portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203,    for an open ended skirt-type piston in which the skirt is radially
    adjustable and in which the adjustment is effected by a wedge member
    movable relative to the skirt.  NOTE SECTION IV OF THE CLASS DEFINITION AND
    THE PARAGRAPH FOLLOWING THE TITLE IN THE SCHEDULE OF THIS CLASS.

    206,    for a radially expansible side wall portion positioned between
    axially spaced relatively movable end members, and in which the abutting
    surfaces between an end member and the side wall portion are beveled to
    provide a wedging action.


CLS 92/208
TXT Apparatus under subclass 172 in which the peripheral portion of the piston
    includes a hollow tubular skirt-like member secured to and extending in a
    direction opposite from the end face portion, said skirt-like member being
    open at one end thereof and being closed at the opposite end by said end
    face portion.


CLS 92/209
TXT Apparatus under subclass 208 in which the skirt-like member is
    frusto-conical in shape.


CLS 92/210
TXT Apparatus under subclass 208 including means adapted to be added to or
    removed from the piston to vary the weight of the piston for the purpose of
    (1) equalizing the weight of the piston with respect to another piston with
    which the piston is to be associated or (2) equalizing the weight of a
    portion of the piston with respect to another portion of the piston.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes pistons provided either with integral
    projections which may be cut away as desired to vary the weight of the
    piston or with separate weight elements which may be attached or removed
    from the piston to vary the weight of the piston.


CLS 92/211
TXT Apparatus under subclass 208 in which the piston is provided with a
    circumferentially extending expansible ring positioned in a groove on the
    outer periphery of the skirt-like member, and a substantially rigid
    elongated member formed of material which is different from the material
    which forms the skirt-like member, said member extending diametrically
    across the interior of the skirt-like member and having an end thereof
    extending through an opening in the wall of the skirt-like member and
    abutting against said ring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188,    for a separable transversely extending wrist pin for a connecting
    rod retained in position by a piston ring.


CLS 92/212
TXT Apparatus under subclass 208 in which the piston includes as an element
    thereof a portion which is formed of material other than metal.

    (1)     Note.  Since few trunk type pistons include nonmetallic parts, all
    trunk type pistons which include a part formed of nonmetallic material are
    classified in this subclass.  Normally the nonmetallic portion is for the
    purpose of modifying the transfer of heat between piston parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248,    for a piston having a nonmetallic portion.


CLS 92/213
TXT Apparatus under subclass 208 in which the end face surface is provided with
    a portion made of material which is different from the material which forms
    another portion of said end face.


CLS 92/214
TXT Apparatus under subclass 208 in which the skirt-like member is formed at a
    portion thereof extending for the full perimetric extent thereof with a
    pair of walls which are spaced from each other.


CLS 92/215
TXT Apparatus under subclass 208 comprising independent end face and skirt
    portions, said portions being secured together by means of a separate
    fastening element in the form of a spring-like device for effecting a
    resiliently movable connection between said end face and skirt portions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     for resilient means interposed between a working member and a
    relatively movable power transmission element.


CLS 92/216
TXT Apparatus under subclass 208 in which the piston is formed of a plurality
    of parts or sections, joined together by means which allow separation of
    the parts from each other without in any way destroying or permanently
    deforming any of the parts or the means for joining the parts.

    (1)     Note.  For classification under this definition, the parts must
    constitute a major portion of either the end face or side wall portion of
    the piston.  A mere ring positioned in a groove about the periphery of the
    skirt, for example, which forms but a small area of the side wall portion
    is excluded. Such subject matter is classified on other features.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    187+,   for a separable means for pivotally mounting a connecting rod to a
    piston.

    190,    for a piston having separable end face and skirt portions secured
    together by an element which forms a pivot mounting for a connecting rod.

    226,    for an annular element of diverse material positioned about the
    periphery of the skirt to limit radial movement of a skirt part.

    255,    for a piston having plural separable parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for joints in
    general. Class 92 takes a joint between metallic parts where the sole
    disclosure is directed to a piston structure.


CLS 92/217
TXT Apparatus under subclass 216 in which the parts are provided with
    cooperating interengaging portions such that the rotation of one of the
    parts relative to the other will cause engagement of said interengaging
    portions to detachably secure the parts together.


CLS 92/218
TXT Apparatus under subclass 217 including a separate element interengaging
    between the relatively rotatable piston parts, said element when in
    operative interengaging position being effective to prevent relative
    rotation between the parts.


CLS 92/219
TXT Apparatus under subclass 216 in which separable parts of the piston are so
    interfitted or related as to remain joined in operative relation to one
    another without the addition of a connecting or fastening member which is
    intended to be entirely detached from the parts when the parts are
    disconnected.


CLS 92/220
TXT Apparatus under subclass 216 in which the parts are secured together by
    means of a separate threaded fastener member.


CLS 92/221
TXT Apparatus under subclass 220 in which the threaded fastener is in the form
    of a bolt or screw which extends through the end face portion of the
    piston, and in which the head of such bolt or screw is accessible from the
    side of the end face portion which constitutes the pressure receiving
    surface of the piston.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191,    for a threaded fastener for securing a separable connecting rod
    mounting means to a piston, said fastener extending through an end face
    portion of the piston.


CLS 92/222
TXT Apparatus under subclass 208 in which the piston or a portion thereof is
    composed of (1) two or more different materials (2) a single material which
    has been treated to provide portions of the piston with specific properties
    which are different from the properties of another portion thereof (3) a
    specific material or (4) a welded brazed or soldered joint.

    (1)     Note.  Under part (3) the mere recitation that the piston is formed
    of iron, steel or aluminum is excluded since such subject matter is
    extremely common in this art.  However specifying, for example, a
    combination iron and steel or iron and aluminum, or a specific alloy is
    included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195,    for an open ended skirt-type piston provided with a separate spring
    member for biasing a portion of the skirt radially, said spring member
    being normally formed of material which is different from the material
    forming the piston.

    211,    for an open ended skirt-type piston provided with an element of
    diverse material extending through a wall of the skirt, and abutting
    against a circumferentially extending resilient ring positioned on the
    outer periphery of the skirt.

    212,    for an open ended skirt-type piston provided with a nonmetallic
    portion.

    213,    for an open ended skirt-type piston in which the end face surface
    has portions thereof formed of different kinds of material.

    257,    for a piston having a side wall portion interposed between
    separable axially spaced rigid members.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, appropriate subclasses for an
    alloy, per se.  Class 420 also provides for a nominal piston made of a
    specific alloy.


CLS 92/223
TXT Apparatus under subclass 222 in which one of the materials is in the form
    of a thin layer of metal applied to the surface of the end face or
    skirt-like member of the piston and which forms a unitary part thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a plural layer or coated
    article, and especially subclasses 375+ for a coated or bonded rod or
    strand.  Class 428 takes a nominally recited piston having a surface
    thereof provided with a specific coating.  However, a limitation in a claim
    that the coated surface constitutes a specific part of the piston, such as
    the head or skirt, for example, is considered a structural limitation and
    indicates classification in Class 92.


CLS 92/224
TXT Apparatus under subclass 222 in which the end face portion of the piston is
    formed of material which is different from the material forming a major
    portion of the outer peripheral portion of the skirt-like member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213,    for an open ended skirt-type piston in which the end face surface
    has portions thereof formed of different kinds of material.

    223,    for an open ended skirt-type piston in which the end face or skirt
    is provided with a surface coating which constitutes a material for such
    portion different from the material forming the other portion.


CLS 92/225
TXT Apparatus under subclass 222 in which the piston is provided with an
    element formed of material other than the material forming the skirt-like
    member, said element being positioned in engagement with a skirt portion,
    and being effective to restrain movement of said skirt portion in a
    direction normal to the longitudinal axis of the piston.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195+,   for an open ended skirt-type piston provided with a spring member
    for biasing a portion of the skirt radially, said spring member being
    normally formed of material which is different from the material forming
    the piston.


CLS 92/226
TXT Apparatus under subclass 225 in which the element is in the form of a
    laminated plate-like member in which the different laminae are composed of
    different metals.


CLS 92/227
TXT Apparatus under subclass 225 in which the element is in the form of a ring
    positioned about the skirt-like member and forming a portion of the outer
    periphery of the skirt-like member.


CLS 92/228
TXT Apparatus under subclass 225 in which the element is secured to the piston
    by having a portion thereof embedded in a part of the piston in such a way
    that removal of the member would require a distortion or deformation of
    such element or piston part.


CLS 92/229
TXT Apparatus under subclass 228 in which the element comprises a ring-like
    member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227,    for an annular skirt expansion restraining element positioned to
    encircle the outer periphery of the skirt.


CLS 92/230
TXT Apparatus under subclass 229 in which the axis of the ring-like member
    extends transversely to the longitudinal axis of the piston and is
    positioned to encircle a projection on the piston which forms the
    supporting bearing for a transversely extending piston rod connecting pin.


CLS 92/231
TXT Apparatus under subclass 222 comprising a welded, brazed or soldered joint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223,    for an open ended skirt-type piston having a surface portion
    thereof provided with a metal coating which is molecularly bonded to the
    metal of the piston surface.

    260,    for a piston formed of parts which are welded, brazed or soldered
    together.


CLS 92/232
TXT Apparatus under subclass 208 in which the skirt-like member is provided
    with a slit or other separation along the periphery thereof forming a pair
    of spaced skirt portions, and means to bridge the space between said
    portions comprising an inwardly bent web or corrugation formed from the
    material of the skirt-like member, said web or corrugation being resilient
    to allow relative movement between said skirt portions.


CLS 92/233
TXT Apparatus under subclass 208 in which the cross sectional shape of the
    skirt-like member for a major portion of its longitudinal dimension is
    elliptical.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177,    for a noncircular piston.


CLS 92/234
TXT Apparatus under subclass 208 in which the skirt-like member is provided
    with an elongated relatively narrow aperture extending through the wall
    thereof normally for allowing relative movement between the parts of the
    skirt-like member adjacent the aperture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 174 for a plurality of
    relatively movable working members, each working member having spaced end
    faces and a common rotating shaft connected to said working members between
    said spaced end faces.


CLS 92/235
TXT Apparatus under subclass 234 in which the elongated relatively narrow
    aperture extends circumferentially of the skirt-like member in a direction
    normal to the longitudinal axis of the piston.


CLS 92/236
TXT Apparatus under subclass 235 including another elongated relatively narrow
    aperture extending in a direction which lies at an angle to the direction
    of the first aperture.


CLS 92/237
TXT Apparatus under subclass 208 in which the free end of the skirt-like member
    has parts which are circumferentially spaced from each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    234+,   for a skirt provided with a narrow slit in the wall thereof
    extending from the free end of said skirt.


CLS 92/238
TXT Apparatus under subclass 208 in which the piston is provided with an
    apertured connecting rod pin support portion, all parts of said support
    portion being located within the hollow skirt-like member and radially
    spaced from the inner periphery of the skirt-like member portion which lies
    immediately adjacent said connecting rod pin support portion.


CLS 92/239
TXT Apparatus under subclass 208 in which the end face or the skirt portion is
    provided with (1) a projecting formation in the form of a rib or
    corrugation or (2) a rigid member secured to an end face and a skirt
    portion.


CLS 92/240
TXT Apparatus under subclass 172 in which the piston includes around the
    periphery thereof a lip made of flexible material and extending in a
    direction axially of the piston, said lip being adapted to be in direct
    contact with working fluid to be urged in a radial direction thereby when
    the piston is in operative position in a working chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194,    for a piston having a side wall portion which includes a peripheral
    axially extending flexible lip, and provided with separate resilient means
    to bias the lip radially.


CLS 92/241
TXT Apparatus under subclass 240 including an element of a material other than
    the material forming the lip, said element being embedded in the axially
    extending lip for reinforcing the same.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254,    for a piston having a flexible nonmetallic portion provided with
    embedded reinforcing means.


CLS 92/242
TXT Apparatus under subclass 240 comprising a plurality of peripheral axially
    extending flexible lips, said lips being spaced one from the other in a
    direction extending along the piston axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    192,    for a piston having a plurality of integrally formed radially
    extending resilient metallic sealing tongues on the side wall portion
    thereof.


CLS 92/243
TXT Apparatus under subclass 242 in which the spaced lips extend in opposite
    directions axially of the piston.


CLS 92/244
TXT Apparatus under subclass 243 in which each of the axially spaced oppositely
    facing lips is formed on separate independent members, which members are
    secured together by means which allow separation of the members from each
    other without in any way destroying or permanently deforming the members or
    the means for forming the members.


CLS 92/245
TXT Apparatus under subclass 240 comprising a cup-shaped element formed of
    flexible material having an imperforate planar portion forming the bottom
    of the cup and in which the peripheral lip forms the side wall of the cup.


CLS 92/246
TXT Apparatus under subclass 240 in which the flexible lip is formed of
    metallic material.

    (1)     Note.  A laminated lip forming member including layers of metallic
    and nonmetallic material and in which the layer of metallic material forms
    the outer periphery of the lip, which is adapted to contact the working
    chamber wall is included under this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    192,    for a piston having a plurality of integrally formed radially
    extending resilient metallic sealing tongues on the side wall portion
    thereof.

    241,    for a nonmetallic lip provided with embedded reinforcing means, and
    in which the reinforcing means may be a metallic element.


CLS 92/247
TXT Apparatus under subclass 172 in which the piston comprises a pair of spaced
    relatively axially movable rigid members one of which comprises the end
    face portion, and a radially movable element forming a side wall portion of
    the piston interposed between said members so that axial movement of said
    end face portion relative to said other rigid member responsive to the
    pressure of working fluid acting on said end face portion causes radial
    movement of said element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205+,   for a piston provided with a side wall portion positioned between a
    pair of axially spaced relatively movable rigid members, and in which the
    axially spaced members may be moved and held to different positions toward
    or away from each other to effect radial adjustment of the side wall
    portion.


CLS 92/248
TXT Apparatus under subclass 172 in which the piston includes a portion made of
    nonmetallic material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    for a vane like oscillating piston provided with a nonmetallic
    peripheral sealing portion.

    212,    for an open ended skirt type piston provided with a nonmetallic
    portion.


CLS 92/249
TXT Apparatus under subclass 248 in which the nonmetallic material is of a type
    which is pliable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    for an oscillating vane type piston provided with a nonmetallic
    peripheral sealing portion.


CLS 92/250
TXT Apparatus under subclass 249 in which the pliable nonmetallic portion forms
    a side wall portion and is interposed between a pair of axially spaced
    relatively axially movable separate rigid elements.


CLS 92/251
TXT Apparatus under subclass 250 in which the flexible nonmetallic portion
    comprises two or more separate independent elements extending in axially
    aligned relation.


CLS 92/252
TXT Apparatus under subclass 251 in which the pliable nonmetallic portion
    comprises three or more separate independent axially aligned pliable
    nonmetallic elements.


CLS 92/253
TXT Apparatus under subclass 249 in which the flexible portion forms a side
    wall portion of the piston and includes a pair of axially spaced flexible
    elements having a nonflexible member interposed between said elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251+,   for two or more axially spaced flexible nonmetallic elements
    interposed between separable rigid members, and including a rigid spacer
    member positioned between said elements.


CLS 92/254
TXT Apparatus under subclass 249 including means formed of a material other
    than the material forming the flexible nonmetallic portion of the piston,
    said means being embedded in the flexible nonmetallic portion for
    reinforcing the same.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241,    for a piston having a peripheral axially extending flexible lip
    provided with a reinforcing means embedded in the lip.  NOTE SECTION IV OF
    THE CLASS DEFINITION AND THE PARAGRAPH FOLLOWING THE TITLE IN THE SCHEDULE
    OF THIS CLASS.


CLS 92/255
TXT Apparatus under subclass 172 in which the piston is formed of a plurality
    of members joined together by means which allow separation of the parts
    from each other without in any way destroying or permanently deforming any
    of the members or the means for joining the parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    187+,   for a connecting rod pivotally connected to a piston.

    216+,   for an open ended hollow skirt type piston formed of plural
    separable parts.  NOTE SECTION IV OF THE CLASS DEFINITION AND THE PARAGRAPH
    FOLLOWING THE TITLE IN THE SCHEDULE OF THIS CLASS.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclass 127 for a piston of a drive
    motor formed of plural separate parts in which said piston forms an
    impacting hammer head.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 230+ for a joint between a rod
    and a plate or head.  Class 403 takes a joint between a plate or head and a
    rod even though the plate or head and rod are disclosed and nominally
    included as a piston and piston rod.  Class 92 takes the above combination
    where some feature of the piston other than that which relates to the joint
    is included.  For a further statement of the line between Class 92 and
    Class 403, see section III of the class definition of this class (92).
    Class 92 takes a joint between metallic parts where the sole disclosure is
    directed to a piston for an expansible chamber device.


CLS 92/256
TXT Apparatus under subclass 255 in which the members are secured together by
    means of a separate fastening element in the form of a spring-like device
    for effecting a resiliently movable connection between the members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     for a piston in which the end face portion is movable relative to
    another portion of said piston, and having a spring device interposed
    between said portions, such that movement of the end face portion
    responsive to the action of the motive fluid will effect compression of
    said spring device.

    215,    for an open ended skirt type piston in which the end face portion
    is secured to the skirt portion by means of a resilient element.


CLS 92/257
TXT Apparatus under subclass 255 comprising a side wall forming portion and two
    axially spaced rigid members, said side wall forming portion being
    interposed between said members, said members being detachably secured
    together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205+,   for a piston having a side wall portion interposed between a pair
    of separable axially spaced rigid members and in which movement of the
    rigid members toward or away from each other effects radial adjustment of
    said side wall portion

    250+,   for a piston having a flexible nonmetallic side wall portion
    interposed between separable axially spaced rigid members.


CLS 92/258
TXT Apparatus under subclass 257 in which the means for detachably securing the
    members together comprises a rigid elongated stem or rod, the axis of which
    coincides with the axis of the members.


CLS 92/259
TXT Apparatus under subclass 255 in which the piston includes a side wall
    portion which abuts and is movable relative to another part, the abutting
    surfaces of said side wall portion and the other part being bevelled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207,    and the subclasses there noted for a radially adjustable side wall
    portion, in which the adjustment is effected by relative movement between
    the side wall portion and a piston part in which said portion and part have
    abutting bevelled surfaces.


CLS 92/260
TXT Apparatus under subclass 172 comprising a welded, brazed or soldered joint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231,    for an open ended skirt-type piston having a portion thereof
    welded, brazed or soldered to another portion.  NOTE SECTION IV OF THE
    CLASS DEFINITION AND THE PARAGRAPH FOLLOWING THE TITLE IN THE SCHEDULE OF
    THIS CLASS.


CLS 92/261
TXT Subject matter under the class definition not provided for in other
    subclasses.

    (1)     Note.  For example this subclass includes a housing for a
    mechanical motion converting linkage or transmission disclosed as being
    interconnected with an expansible chamber device, and not classifiable
    elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147+,   for a housing or support for a rotatable shaft combined with a
    plurality of unitarily mounted cylinders.

    161,    for a support or frame for an expansible chamber device which may
    include a housing or support for a rotatable shaft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses for a machine
    element or mechanism enclosed within a casing or housing.  Class 74 takes a
    housing for a crankshaft, or other Class 74 element where some detail of
    the crankshaft or other element is set forth in the claim.  However the
    claiming of a gear as part of the device enclosed within the casing will
    effect classification in Class 74 even though no detail of the gear is set
    forth. Class 92 takes a casing for a shaft or other Class 74 element, where
    disclosed as being associated with an expansible chamber device, either,
    per se, or where such element is nominally claimed, unless such structure
    is classifiable elsewhere on other features.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 195 for a crankcase for an
    internal combustion engine.

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 429+ for a crankshaft plain bearing and
    subclasses 457+ for a crankshaft antifriction bearing which may include a
    housing or casing for the shaft.  The nominal recitation of the crankshaft
    will not preclude placement in Class 384.


CLS 95/
TTL GAS SEPARATION:  PROCESSES

CLS 95/
TXT
    I.      STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    II.     GLOSSARY

    III.    CLASSIFICATION LINES AND SEARCH NOTES TO OTHER CLASSES

    IV.     INDEX TO CLASSES NOTED IN THE CLASS DEFINITION AND THE SUBCLASSES
    OF THIS CLASS

    I.      STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    This class provides for processes involving steps resulting in separation
    of a gas from a fluid mixture comprising (i) a gas and solid or liquid
    particles entrained therein, (ii) a liquid and gas entrained therein, or
    (iii) a plurality of gases.  As a general rule for this class, there must
    be a relationship of process steps embracing: (a) inflow of the fluid
    mixture to be treated, (b) a step or steps effective to cause the
    separation into constituent parts, and (c) an outflow of at least one
    constituent which is separate and distinct from the outflow of another
    constituent, including outflow of a constituent by removing the separating
    medium itself.  The gas separation for this class is effected by processes
    other than chemical reaction.

    The basic subject matter of this class is of a subcombinational nature and
    may include only such ancillary process steps (e.g., fluid handling, etc.)
    as are necessary to perfect the gas separating function.  Significant
    inclusion in a claim of features beyond merely perfecting the gas
    separating function indicates classification in a more comprehensive class.
     Thus, the combination of a gas separation process of this class and any
    cleaning or regenerating of the separation media is properly in this class,
    because the cleaning or regenerating is perfecting the gas separating
    function.  Generally, however, the mere naming of an art process in a claim
    to gas separation does not affect classification.  Thus, a claim to
    filtration of a gas from a named source with no details of that source is
    proper for this class.

    (1)     Note.  The gas separation processes for this class generally
    involve the use of physical chemistry, chromatography, solid sorption, gas
    and liquid contact, gas contact, electrical fields, magnetic fields, wave
    energy, selective diffusion, filtration, deflection, or other mechanical
    means.  See the class search note in section III for Class 423, Chemistry
    of Inorganic Compounds, for the line concerning the processes in which the
    gas separation is caused by a chemical reaction.  Also, see the class
    search note in section III for Class 588, Hazardous or Toxic Waste
    Destruction or Containment, for the line concerning the processes in which
    the gas separation is caused by destruction or permanent containment of the
    hazardous or toxic waste.

    (2)     Note.  This class also provides for processes in which the fluid
    mixture is treated to change its make-up, but no real separation occurs,
    provided no other suitable classification exists. Accordingly, in this
    class are found processes of using "spark arresters," which merely change
    the size of particles entrained in a gas.  These devices are usually
    deflectors or screens.  The processes of using them are included in this
    class because of their similarity to processes which actually separate the
    fluid mixture into constituent parts.  Similarly, agglomeration, which by
    itself may not separate particles entrained in a gas, but cause small
    particles entrained therein to join together or coalesce to form larger
    particles, is in this class unless basis for other classification exists.

    (3)     Note.  Degassing or purging processes for the removal of a gas from
    a solid will be placed in the class where the solid is either manufactured
    or treated.  The removal of a gas from a solid sorbent (i.e.,
    regeneration), per se, will be found in Class 502, Catalyst, Solid Sorbent,
    or Support Therefor:  Product or Process of Making.  However, the use of a
    solid sorbent to separate a gas from a fluid mixture and the removal of the
    gas from the solid sorbent (i.e., regeneration) will be found in this
    class.  For the removal of a gas from a solid, where the solid is not
    identified, see Class 134, Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids.

    II.     GLOSSARY

    DETECT
    The term "detect," which is used in many of the control subclasses, is used
    in both a quantitative and a qualitative sense.  This means that a definite
    measurement of a process variable is made (e.g., temperature, pressure,
    concentration, etc.) or that the presence of a particular event is
    determined (e.g., presence of sparking, change in liquid level determined
    by position of float, etc.).

    FILTER
    An article or mass of material made of closely spaced or intimately
    arranged intermeshed or unconnected fibers, elements, strands, or particles
    that collectively act as a barrier to physically retain at least one
    constituent of a fluid mixture on its surfaces or in the spaces between the
    fibers, elements, strands, or particles while permitting passage of the
    remaining constituents.

    A filter has no "chemical" affinity for a constituent of a fluid mixture.
    The retention of the constituent by the filter depends upon a mechanical
    entrapment of solid or liquid particles because of their relatively large
    size compared with the interstices or spaces between individual fibers,
    elements, strands, or particles.  The retained particles can be removed by
    brushing, wiping, shaking, or similar mechanical action.

    FLUID MIXTURE
    The phrase "fluid mixture" is used throughout the definitions to mean (a) a
    gas and solid or liquid particles entrained therein, (b) a liquid and gas
    entrained therein, or (c) a plurality of gases.

    GAS
    Matter of very low density and viscosity, relatively great expansion and
    contraction with changes in pressure and temperature, that is readily
    diffusive, with a tendency to expand indefinitely, with molecules in free
    movement.  The term "gas" includes "vapor" (q.v.).

    GASEOUS FLUID MIXTURE
    The phrase "gaseous fluid mixture" is used throughout the definitions to
    mean (a) a gas and solid or liquid particles entrained therein or (b) a
    plurality of gases.

    LIQUID SORBENT
    A liquid capable of retaining part of a fluid mixture with which it is
    contacted.  The action in most cases is that of selective retention (i.e.,
    the sorbent removes only that part of the fluid mixture for which it has
    the greatest affinity).

    REGENERATION
    Restoration of the separatory material to the condition it was in before
    the separatory process.

    SOLID SORBENT
    A solid sorbent is a solid material which separates a constituent (e.g., a
    gas, vapor, etc.) from a fluid mixture containing such constituents in a
    "quasi-chemical" manner.  The action in most instances is that of selective
    retention (i.e., the sorbent removes only the part of the fluid mixture for
    which it has the greatest affinity).  The retained constituent cannot be
    removed by shaking, brushing, or similar mechanical action, but generally
    can be removed by heating, pressure reduction, or use of a stripping or
    denuding fluid.

    TREATMENT
    (a) With respect to the class subject matter, the term is restricted to
    reversible and nonchemical changes in physical characteristics of the fluid
    mixture or a separated constituent (e.g., heating, cooling, humidity
    control, agitating, pressure regulation, etc.).  (b) With respect to the
    media used to perform the gas separation or to a material used to condition
    the fluid mixture for separation, the term may include chemical
    preparation, reconditioning, or reaction.

    VAPOR
    The gaseous state of matter that is liquid or solid under a temperature of
    00C and 760 mm Hg pressure.

    III.    CLASSIFICATION LINES AND SEARCH NOTES TO OTHER CLASSES

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, appropriate subclasses indented under subclass 592,
    particularly subclass 896.62 for processes of mechanical manufacture for
    making a filter.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses
    for generic processes for separating liquids from solids (i.e., drying) and
    the contacting of solids with either gases or vapors.  Class 95 takes the
    separation of a gas from a fluid mixture in combination with the
    regeneration of the separating media by drying or by gas or vapor contact.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, appropriate subclasses for processes of separation
    of a gas from a fluid mixture by use of a plant of higher order.

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, appropriate subclasses for
    processes for the manufacture of heating and illuminating gases.

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 273+ for processes of treating or handling
    the materials discharging from the combustion chamber of an internal
    combustion engine.

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclasses for processes peculiar to
    removing heat from a substance, usually by a change of phase of a coolant
    or refrigerant and for processes involving subject matter for Class 95
    combined with a significant refrigeration step.  Examples of significant
    refrigeration are: (i) expansion of a gas through an orifice whereby
    cooling is effected to condense any of the constituents of the gas by such
    temperature reduction; (ii) a significant physical relationship or
    arrangement between elements of a refrigeration circuit (e.g., two related
    refrigeration coils, detailed description of the circuit, etc.); (iii)
    change of phase of a coolant or refrigerant (i.e., evaporation, melting, or
    sublimation) whereby cooling is effected to condense any of the
    constituents of the gas by such temperature reduction.  Some examples of
    what may be found in Class 62 are: (a) separation of a constituent from a
    plurality of gases by a significantly claimed refrigeration step or
    apparatus; (b) condensation of moisture from the atmosphere as a result of
    a refrigeration operation; (c) gas drying by sorption followed by
    contacting the dried gas with a liquid to produce cooling by evaporation;
    (d) a refrigerated enclosure combined with sorption means; (e)
    refrigeration producing processes and apparatus combined with steps or
    means for drying the refrigerant; and (f) extracting a constituent from a
    plurality of gases by liquefaction and separation (e.g., fractionation or
    distillation, etc.).  Class 95 takes gas separation of general application,
    including cooling of the sorbent or cooling of gas, but not including
    evaporative cooling after sorption of the type noted in (c) above.  Class
    95 takes the cold wall-hot wall thermal diffusion or repulsion type of
    separation, regardless of any refrigeration claimed.  Class 95 also takes
    expansion through an orifice of a liquid and gas entrained therein where
    the gas is removed from the liquid through the lowering of the pressure and
    the cooling effect which inherently results from such pressure reduction is
    not transferred through a wall to another material; if such heat transfer
    occurs, classification in Class 62 is proper.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 23.2+ for gas analysis, per se,
    and also the combination of gas separation and significant gas analysis.
    The combination of gas separation and a nominal step of "analyzing" or
    "detecting" without further detail of the analysis or detection is
    insufficient to cause a patent to be placed in Class 73; that patent will
    be placed in Class 95.  Also, if there is feedback from the analytical
    apparatus to control or effect a change in the gas separating operation,
    then classification is in Class 95.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, appropriate subclasses for processes for the treatment of liquid
    or vaporous metal.  See subclass 405 for removal of gas from liquid metal
    by use of a gas permeable membrane and subclasses 407+ for filtering
    vaporous metal.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, for the corresponding apparatus to the
    processes of Class 95.  When a patent has a claim or claims to a Class 95
    process and a claim or claims to a Class 96 apparatus, the patent will be
    placed as an original in Class 95, even though there may be an apparatus
    claim that is more comprehensive than a process claim.

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 200.24+ for methods of supplying a breathable
    gas to, or exhausting such gas from, a living body.  Subclass 200.24 and
    the subclasses mentioned below require that the method be adapted for use
    on or in the living body and also include diagnostic or therapeutic methods
    when the only disclosed utility is for diagnosis or treatment of a living
    body.  See especially subclass 200.25 for an artificial gill or means for
    separating entrained air from a liquid stream; subclass 201.25 for a
    respiratory device including body or head supported means covering user's
    scalp and means for removing a substance from  respiratory gas; subclass
    204.16 for removal of a substance from respiratory gas by cooling; subclass
    205.12 for means for supplying respiratory gas under positive pressure
    including means for removing a substance from the respiratory gas; and
    subclass 205.27 for a respiratory device including means for removing a
    substance from respiratory gas.

    137,    Fluid Handling, appropriate subclasses for combinations of fluid
    handling and gas separation involving more than mere flow control to or
    from the separating means.  (a) For classification in either Class 137 or
    Class 95, where both the fluid handling and gas separation are included in
    the combination, classification will be based upon the ultimate purpose of
    the subject matter and not upon the ancillary or subordinate feature of the
    combination consistent with the objects and aims therefor (e.g., it is not
    intended that the inclusion of filtering, no matter how specifically
    defined, will be sufficient to carry a "gas field storage and distribution
    process" to Class 95 whether the filtering protects the apparatus used in
    the process or is the last step in the process).  The fluid handling for
    Class 95 should be no more than that necessary to convey or conduct the
    fluid mixture to, at, or away from the point of separation.  (b) Class 137
    also takes separation of gases from gases, liquids, or solids by gravity
    only (i.e., where  no specific means is claimed for effecting the
    separation).

    140,    Wireworking, subclasses 3+ for wire fabric making.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 4+ for processes of transferring fluent material through a flow
    confining system, the source and receiver parts of which are normally
    separable, including varying gaseous conditions (e.g., causing a vacuum,
    etc.) in the receiver.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for processes there classified for adhesively
    bonding and otherwise manufacturing filters.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for processes where only
    indirect heat exchange is involved and especially subclasses 201+ and 58+
    for heating and cooling including addition or removal of water vapor from
    air.  Cold wall-hot wall thermal diffusion processes will be found in Class
    95, subclass 289.

    166,    Wells, for processes involving shafts or deep borings in the earth
    for the extraction of fluids from the earth.  See especially subclasses
    265+ for processes involving separating material leaving the well.  A gas
    separation process including a nominal recitation of a well process is
    proper for Class 95.  For classification in Class 166, some details
    specific to a well process should be recited for the combination of a gas
    separation process and a well process.  However, in the situation in which
    one of the constituents separated is inserted into an input well, a mere
    broad recitation of such well process is sufficient for classification in
    Class 166.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclasses 39+ for processes
    for separating a liquid mixture (distilland) by vaporizing and condensing
    at least a portion thereof to isolate in the condensed liquid (distillate)
    or in the unvaporized portion (residue) a comparatively pure compound
    combined with subjecting the vapor to a disparate physical treatment to
    remove a substance.  For Class 203, the liquid mixture (distilland) must
    have a boiling point above 00C under normal atmospheric pressure (760 mm
    Hg).

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclasses for
    processes in which a chemical change is brought about by the application of
    an electric current or wave energy to material being treated wherein more
    than the mere thermal effect of the current or energy is involved and
    subclasses 554+ for processes for the separation or purification of liquids
    by the physical or physical-chemical action of an electrical stress.  See
    particularly subclass 157.3 for processes in which an initial normally
    gaseous mixture is treated by wave energy so as to remove therefrom by a
    chemical reaction or change to a different chemical form at least one of
    the components therein.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, for processes for the
    recovery or treatment of naturally occurring mineral oil which result in
    the production of a purified or modified mineral oil.  See particularly
    subclass 310 for the separation of mineral oils into hydrocarbon fractions,
    at least one of which is a mineral oil, wherein a mineral oil containing
    fluid mixture is contacted with a solid material which selectively adsorbs
    a mineral oil fraction from the fluid mixture.  See also subclass 340 for
    the recovery of liquid mineral oils from natural gases or from uncondensed
    gas-vapor mixtures obtained from a mineral oil conversion operation
    including separation of mineral oils into hydrocarbon fractions, at least
    one of which is a mineral oil.  Processes which involve a gas separation
    procedure classifiable in Class 95 followed by the recovery of a mineral
    oil by name only (e.g., reciting only rectification, vacuum pressure or
    flash distillation, etc.) are classified in Class 95.  Processes wherein
    the mineral oil recovery step includes any details thereof or includes some
    subsequent treatment of the separated mineral oil are classified in Class
    208.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses indented
    under subclasses 21 and 133 that include "deposition" in their titles for
    processes for the separating and segregating into grades components of
    solid mixtures employing a gaseous suspending medium which is separated
    from the solids.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses for the
    separation of a constituent from a flowable liquid mixture; except for the
    separation of a gas initially present in a liquid mixture.  Class 210 is
    superior to Class 95 and takes separating processes, per se, generically
    disclosed or claimed as fluid separation or if the disclosure or a claim is
    restricted to liquid separation.  Class 210 also takes processes which
    remove or vent gas formed incidentally to the handling of the fluid mixture
    or as a result of a Class 210 treatment (see particularly subclasses 603,
    640, 664, 718, and 750).  However, Class 95 takes processes operating to
    remove gas initially present in an inflowing liquid mixture, with or
    without liquid separation.  The removal of a volatile organic compound
    (e.g., ethanol (C2H5OH), gasoline, etc.) from a liquid is not taken to be
    degasification of a liquid for Class 95 when the volatile organic compound
    is initially present as a liquid mixed with another liquid.  The removal of
    a volatile organic compound from a liquid may be found in Class 210 for
    liquid purification or separation or Class 203 for separatory distillation
    processes.  Class 95 will also take a process including a liquid separation
    step in a Class 95 operation (e.g., regenerating a scrubbing liquid in a
    gas scrubbing operation).

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 18+ for
    processes for combinations of comminution and separation of solids from a
    gas.  Class 241 is superior to the material separation classes and,
    therefore, provides for processes in which comminution is combined with
    steps to separate the material into classes according to the physical
    characteristics of its components before, during, or after the comminuting
    operation.  Class 95 takes processes, such as deflection or the like, that
    may act to comminute material as a secondary or incidental function of what
    is basically a holding back or separating procedure (e.g., disintegration
    or attrition of ignited particles in spark arresters).  Such processes are
    classified on the basis of their essential function in Class 95.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 282+ for methods for the ionic
    separation of materials utilizing the charge-to-mass ratios of particles.
    These methods may be for subjecting the ionized particles to the effects of
    an electric or magnetic field, which causes the particles to travel through
    a curved trajectory, the particles of a certain charge-to-mass ratio having
    a trajectory different from those particles having other charge-to-mass
    ratios.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 189+ for substances (e.g., liquid sorbent
    compositions, etc.) for use in absorbing or binding carbon monoxide (CO),
    sulfur (S), negative elements, or acids; subclass 193 for substances (e.g.,
    liquid sorbent compositions, etc.) for use in absorbing or binding ammonia,
    alkalis, or other bases; and subclass 194 for substances (e.g., liquid
    sorbent compositions, etc.) for use in absorbing or binding water.  See
    subclasses 319+, particularly subclass 321, for processes for breaking foam
    or inhibiting foam formation in a liquid by utilization of defoaming or
    foam inhibiting compositions alone or combined with a mechanical or
    manipulative operation to break the foam.  See subclass 358 for
    compositions for defoaming a liquid.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus for degasifying liquid (e.g., deaerating feed water heater, etc.)
    wherein the liquid is merely contacted with a gas in a chamber or space for
    deaeration thereof; for apparatus wherein a gaseous fluid mixture is
    contacted with a liquid spray, sheet, stream, or bath to precipitate dust
    or to sorb a constituent from the gaseous fluid mixture; for apparatus
    comprising a nonabsorbent element on which a gaseous fluid mixture is
    contacted with a liquid if the element is continuously supplied with a
    liquid or is continuously moved into and out of a liquid bath or supply;
    and for apparatus comprising an absorbent porous sheet or mass on which a
    gaseous fluid mixture is contacted with a liquid if the sheet or mass is:

    (a)     continuously supplied with liquid,

    (b)     cyclically or periodically moved through a liquid reservoir,

    (c)     maintained wet by liquid applying means, or

    (d)     moistened by maintaining some part      of a continuous wick type
    member immersed in liquid, by following the law of the machine, or during
    normal operation of a gas contacting function.


            Note that under the provisions of (a) and (b) there must be no
    affirmative means to dry the sheet or mass, nor means to assure a dry
    condition of the sheet or mass before gas flow is resumed or the sheet or
    mass is returned to the gas contacting position.

            If apparatus for degasifying liquid by contact with a gas has other
    means to cause gas separation of the liquid with gas entrained therein, of
    the separated gas, or of the separated liquid, then the apparatus is
    classified in Class 96.  If apparatus in which a gaseous fluid mixture is
    contacted with a liquid to precipitate dust or to sorb a constituent from
    the gaseous fluid mixture has other means to cause gas separation or has
    means to treat the contact liquid, then the apparatus is classified in
    Class 96.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus for separating ammonia (NH3) or acid anhydrides
    (CO2, SO2, etc.) from a gas by mere contact with a liquid is classified in
    Class 261.

    (2)     Note.  Processes for gas separation by contacting a gaseous fluid
    mixture with a liquid and processes of degasifying a liquid are classified
    in Class 95.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements, for
    processes for induced nuclear reactions combined with steps for reaction
    product treatment.  See particularly subclasses 146+, 189, 195, 198, and
    201.  See subclasses 308+ for processes including fission reactor material
    treatment.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclasses 154+ for processes to convey
    solid material in a fluid current with separation of the solids from the
    fluid at the conveyor outlet.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving or Sterilizing, subclass 4 for processes of acting on a gas for
    maintaining a protective environment or counteracting a destructive
    environment by disinfecting, deodorizing, preserving, or sterilizing.  The
    deodorizing for Class 422 generally involves adding a substance to a gas to
    mask an odor.  Class 95 takes deodorizing a gas that involves gas
    separation of the type that meets the requirements for gas separation in
    the definition for Class 95.  Class 422 is the residual place for
    deodorizing a gas that does not meet the requirements of the definitions
    for Class 95 or Class 423.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 210+ for gas
    separation methods relying upon a chemical reaction (including combustion).
     However, for a Class 95 process including a chemical reaction not involved
    in the separation, per se, see Class 95, section II, TREATMENT.  A
    particular chemical must be claimed and the chemical reaction must be
    inherent or disclosed for patents to be placed in Class 423.  Broadly
    reciting the separating material as a "chemical" or as "gas purifying
    material" does not exclude the patent from Class 95.  Absorption and
    adsorption are not considered chemical reactions in this respect.
    Processes for separating a gaseous fluid mixture having therein ammonia
    (NH3) or acid anhydrides (e.g., CO2, SO2, etc.) by contacting the gaseous
    fluid mixture with water and thus dissolving these gases out of the gaseous
    fluid mixture are in Class 95, notwithstanding the fact that a chemical
    reaction occurs in the solution and that ammonium hydroxide or the acids
    are formed.  Corresponding gas and liquid contact apparatus, per se, is
    classified in Class 261.  See the search class note for Class 261 in this
    section for the line.  See subclass 658.2 for hydriding an alloy of two or
    more metals and recovering hydrogen from the hydride.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology,   for   processes
    of   using   a   micro-organism or enzyme to synthesize a chemical product
    and for processes of treating a material with a micro-organism or enzyme to
    separate, liberate, or purify a preexisting substance.  See particularly
    subclass 266 for processes of treating a gas, emulsion, or foam with an
    enzyme or immobilized enzyme or micro-organism or plant or animal cells to
    isolate or recover a preexisting substance which is chemically unchanged by
    the process.

    494,    Imperforate Bowl:  Centrifugal Separators, for processes for the
    breaking up or subdividing of material, which material comprises a mixture
    of fluids or fluent substances, into two or more components by utilizing a
    rotatable, receptaclelike member having a generally solid wall, and
    commonly termed a bowl, for subjecting the material to centrifugal force.
    Thus, gas separation processes that use an imperforate bowl, centrifugal
    separator are proper for Class 494.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor: Product or Process of
    Making, subclasses 20+ for regenerating or rehabilitating solid sorbent
    compositions, per se, subclasses 60+ for zeolite compositions and for
    processes of making zeolite compositions, and subclasses 400+ for other
    solid sorbent compositions and for processes of making solid sorbent
    compositions.  Class 95 will take the combination of gas separation using a
    solid sorbent composition and regenerating or rehabilitating the solid
    sorbent composition.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclasses 800+ for processes
    in which a mixture of a hydrocarbon compound with another substance is
    treated to recover that same compound in a more usable condition, that is,
    a purer or more desirable condition, by a treatment which comprises
    separating the hydrocarbon from the other substance or making the other
    substance less noxious.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, for hazardous
    or toxic waste destruction by any means to include heating, chemical
    action, or the interaction with any form of radiation and hazardous or
    toxic waste conversion by any means (e.g., chemical, physical, etc.) to an
    environmentally safe substance.  Class 588 includes such destruction or
    conversion in combination with gas separation.

    IV.     INDEX TO CLASSES NOTED IN THE CLASS DEFINITION AND THE SUBCLASSES
    OF THIS CLASS

            After each class listed below, the notation "See ---" refers to the
    sections of the class definition and the subclasses of Class 95 in which
    there are references to the class involved.

    29,     Metal Working.  See section III.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids.  See section III.

    47,     Plant Husbandry.  See section III.

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating.  See section III.

    55,     Gas Separation.  See subclasses 1, 29, 68, 69, 70, 71, 149, 199,
    210, 221, 223, 226, 253, 267, 273, 274, 275, 278, 279, 281, 282,286, 287,
    288, and 289.

    60,     Power Plants.  See section III.

    62,     Refrigeration.  See section III and subclass 288.

    73,     Measuring and Testing.  See section III and subclasses 1.01, 25,
    and 82.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures.  See section III and subclass 46.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus.  See section III and subclasses 1, 2,
    28, 43, 44, 46, 57, 58 ,59, 61, 62, 63, 64, 69, 70, 71, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78,
    79, 80, 81, 82, 85, 86, 90, 91, 107, 156, 157, 159, 160, 161, 165, 172,
    173, 178, 241, 242, 245, 246, 247, 249, 250, 251, 253, 263, and 266.

    128,    Surgery.  See section III.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids.  See section I and
    subclass 74.

    137,    Fluid Handling.  See section III.

    140,    Wireworking.  See section III.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means.
     See section III and subclass 89.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture.  See
    section III.

    165,    Heat Exchange.  See section III and subclasses 114,115, and 288.

    166,    Wells.  See section III.

    203,    Distillation: Processes, Separatory.  See section III and
    subclasses 90 and 241.

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy.  See section III and
    subclasses 45 and 57.

    208,    Mineral Oils: Process and Products.  See section III.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids.  See section III and
    subclasses 28 and 57.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation.  See section III and subclasses
    28, 45, 46, 56, 57, 82, 190, 241, and 253.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration.  See section III.

    250,    Radiant Energy.  See section III and subclass 57.

    252,    Compositions.  See section III and subclasses 155,157,242, and 253.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus.  See section III and subclasses
    149, 211, 213, and 226.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements.  See
    section III.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current.  See section III.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions.  See subclass 90.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing.  See section III.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds.  See sections I and III and
    subclasses 56 and 90.

    427,    Coating Processes.  See subclass 45.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology.  See section III.

    436,    Chemistry: Analytical and Immunological Testing.  See subclasses
    82, 90, and 149.

    494,    Imperforate Bowl: Centrifugal Separators.  See section III.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor: Product or Process of
    Making.  See sections I and III and subclasses 90 and 900.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers.  See subclass 45.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds.  See section III and subclasses
    45, 90, and 149.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment.  See sections
    I and III.


CLS 95/1
TXT WITH CONTROL RESPONSIVE TO SENSED CONDITION:

    Process under the class definition in which the separation is regulated by
    detecting a characteristic or a change in a characteristic of the process
    and by implementing an action in the process based upon the detected
    characteristic or change therein.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder, a
    single means may be used both to detect the characteristic or the change in
    the characteristic in the process and to implement an action in the process
    based upon the detected characteristic or change therein.  There must be a
    positive action made by the means because of the detected characteristic or
    change therein.  An example is the use of a pressure relief valve in which
    a certain pressure must be reached before the valve opens to relieve the
    high pressure in the process.  Another example is the use of a bimetallic
    element in a thermostat in which a certain temperature must be reached
    before a switch is tripped in order to control the temperature in the
    process.  A third example is the use of increased weight on a separating
    media because of accumulation of a separated constituent to cause the
    separating media to move to a position of nonuse or regeneration.  Excluded
    from this subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder are processes in
    which there is no positive action made by the single means because of the
    detected characteristic or change therein.  An example of a process which
    is excluded and placed below is the flow of liquid over a baffle once the
    liquid level reaches the top of the baffle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 210+ for automatic control means for gas
    or nongaseous constituent discharge and subclass 270 for sampling,
    weighing, testing, or metering means.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 23.2+ for gas analysis, and see
    the class definition of Class 95 for a statement of the line.

    96,     Gas Separation: Apparatus, subclasses 18+ for electrical separation
    apparatus with control means responsive to sensed condition; subclass 102
    for chromatography apparatus with control means responsive to sensed
    condition; subclasses 109+ for solid sorbent apparatus with control means
    responsive to sensed condition; and subclasses 156+ for degasifying means
    with control means responsive to sensed condition.


CLS 95/2
TXT Electric or electrostatic field (e.g., electrostatic precipitation, etc.):

    Process under subclass 1 in which there is a step including discharge of an
    electric current into the fluid mixture or electrifying a fluid or solid
    that contacts the fluid mixture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57+,    for processes using electric or electrostatic fields without
    control responsive to a sensed condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 18+ for electrical
    separation apparatus with control means responsive to sensed condition.


CLS 95/3
TXT Concentration sensed:

    Process under subclass 2 in which concentration of a constituent present in
    the process or a change therein (e.g., dust, humidity, etc.) is detected
    and is used to control some aspect of the process.


CLS 95/4
TXT Temperature sensed:

    Process under subclass 2 in which temperature or a change therein is
    detected and is used to control some aspect of the process.


CLS 95/5
TXT Sparking sensed:

    Process under subclass 2 in which the presence or frequency of sparking in
    the gas phase, often accompanied by short bursts of increasing current flow
    or decreasing electrode voltage, is detected and is used to control some
    aspect of the process.


CLS 95/6
TXT Current sensed:

    Process under subclass 2 in which current flowing between discharge and
    collector electrodes or a change therein is detected and is used to control
    some aspect of the process.


CLS 95/7
TXT Voltage sensed:

    Process under subclass 2 in which voltage applied, either directly to an
    electrode or indirectly to the fluid mixture, or a change therein is
    detected and is used to control some aspect of the process.


CLS 95/8
TXT Concentration sensed:

    Process under subclass 1 in which concentration of a constituent present in
    the process or a change therein (e.g., pH, humidity, dust content, etc.) is
    detected and is used to control some aspect of the process.


CLS 95/9
TXT pH sensed:

    Process under subclass 8 in which pH or a change therein is detected and is
    used to control some aspect of the process.


CLS 95/10
TXT Humidity sensed:

    Process under subclass 8 in which humidity or a change therein is detected
    and is used to control some aspect of the process.


CLS 95/11
TXT Flow of fluid mixture to sorber stopped or diverted to other equipment, or
    sorbent regenerated:

    Process under subclass 8 in which the flow of the fluid mixture to a sorber
    is stopped or the flow of the fluid mixture is switched to another sorber
    based upon the detected concentration or change therein; or process in
    which a sorbent is regenerated based upon the detected concentration or
    change therein.


CLS 95/12
TXT Gas flow rate modified:

    Process under subclass 8 in which flow rate of a gas is changed based upon
    the detected concentration or change therein.


CLS 95/13
TXT Sorbent flow rate modified:

    Process under subclass 8 in which flow rate of a sorbent is changed based
    upon the detected concentration or change therein.


CLS 95/14
TXT Temperature sensed:

    Process under subclass 1 in which temperature or a change therein is
    detected and is used to control some aspect of the process.


CLS 95/15
TXT And pressure sensed:

    Process under subclass 14 in which pressure or a change therein is also
    detected and is used to control some aspect of the process.


CLS 95/16
TXT Modification of flow rate of liquid which is added to gas:

    Process under subclass 14 in which flow rate of liquid which is added to a
    gas is modified based upon the detected temperature or change therein.


CLS 95/17
TXT Cooling:
    Process under subclass 14 in which the fluid mixture, a separated
    constituent, or an apparatus involved in the process is cooled based upon
    the detected temperature or change therein.


CLS 95/18
TXT Heating:
    Process under subclass 14 in which the fluid mixture, a separated
    constituent, or an apparatus involved in the process is heated based upon
    the detected temperature or change therein.


CLS 95/19
TXT Pressure sensed:
    Process under subclass 1 in which pressure or a change therein is detected
    and is used to control some aspect of the process.


CLS 95/20
TXT Apparatus cleaned:
    Process under subclass 19 in which apparatus is cleaned based upon the
    detected pressure or change therein.


CLS 95/21
TXT Sorbent regenerated:
    Process under subclass 19 in which a sorbent is regenerated based upon the
    detected pressure or change therein.


CLS 95/22
TXT Gas flow rate modified:
    Process under subclass 19 in which flow rate of a gas is changed based upon
    the detected pressure or change therein.


CLS 95/23
TXT Gas flow rate sensed:
    Process under subclass 1 in which gas flow rate or a change therein is
    detected and is used to control some aspect of the process.


CLS 95/24
TXT Liquid level sensed:
    Process under subclass 1 in which liquid level or a change therein is
    detected and is used to control some aspect of the process.


CLS 95/25
TXT WITH RECORDING OR SIGNALING CONDITION:
    Process under the class definition in which a characteristic or a change in
    a characteristic of the fluid mixture, of a separated constituent, or of
    apparatus used in the process is set down for preservation in permanent
    form or is indicated by means giving information of an audible or a visual
    nature (e.g., alarm, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 23.2+ for gas analysis and see
    the class definition of Class 95 for a statement of the line.


CLS 95/26
TXT WITH TIMING OF OPERATION:
    Process under the class definition in which the time at which an operation
    occurs is controlled or the length of time in which an operation is
    performed is controlled.


CLS 95/27
TXT MAGNETIZED PARTICLE BED:
    Process under the class definition in which magnetic lines of force are
    applied to a bed of loose particles that contain a magnetizable component.

    (1)     Note.  The application of magnetic lines of force to a magnetizable
    particle bed may be to stabilize the bed, to prevent back-mixing, or to
    control porosity of the bed.


CLS 95/28
TXT MAGNETIC SEPARATION:
    Process under the class definition in which the separation is caused or
    aided by magnetic lines of force.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 1+ for apparatus which
    separates a gas by magnetic lines of force.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 38, 39,
    40, 212, and 213+ for classifying, separating, and assorting solids using
    apparatus of the magnetic type.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 222+ for magnetic
    apparatus for purification or separation of a liquid and subclass 695 for
    processes of purifying or separating a liquid using magnetic force.


CLS 95/29
TXT SOUND WAVES USED:
    Process under the class definition in which the separation is effected or
    enhanced by the energy of compressional vibratory waves in a fluid medium,
    the waves being below, within, or above the audible spectrum.

    (1)     Note.  Pressure pulses in a fluid generated merely by intermittent
    discharge of a gas are not considered to be compressional vibratory waves
    under this definition.  However, compressional vibratory waves under this
    definition may be produced by intermittent discharge of a gas, as in a
    siren.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclass 277 for separating apparatus of the sonic
    type and subclass 292 for cleaning means for separating media of the sonic
    type.


CLS 95/30
TXT Degasification of liquid:
    Process under subclass 29 in which the wave energy is used to separate gas
    from a liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for processes of degasification of a liquid by selective diffusion
    of gases through a substantially solid barrier.

    156+,   for processes of contacting a gas with a liquid and degasification
    of the contact liquid.

    241+,   for other processes of degasification of a liquid.


CLS 95/31
TXT DIFFERENCE IN MOLECULAR VELOCITY, DENSITY, OR MOMENTUM OF GASES
    USED:Process under the class definition in which the plurality of gases is
    separated into constituent gaseous parts by making use of physical
    differences in molecular speed, weight, or inertia of the constituent
    gaseous parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    267+,   for processes of separating solid or liquid particles from a gas by
    deflection.


CLS 95/32
TXT Passing gases through nozzle:
    Process under subclass 31 in which gaseous constituents having different
    molecular weights or different gas kinetic cross sections are separated,
    with the plurality of gases flowing out of a short tube, usually tapering,
    that forms the vent of a hose or pipe in order to effect the separation.


CLS 95/33
TXT Directing gas streams toward one another:
    Process under subclass 32 in which gas streams or jets are directed toward
    one another and are deflected.


CLS 95/34
TXT Centrifugal force:
    Process under subclass 31 in which the plurality of gases is separated by
    the effect of centrifugal action which causes the gases to assume a rapid
    arcuate or circular movement, with this movement causing the constituents
    of the mixture to separate into more or less distinct layers, depending
    upon the density of the constituents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    269+,   for processes of separating solid or liquid particles from a gas by
    using centrifugal force.


CLS 95/35
TXT Created by rotating equipment:
    Process under subclass 34 in which the centrifugal force is caused by a
    rotating element moving around an axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270,    for processes of separating solid or liquid particles from a gas by
    using centrifugal force created by rotating equipment.


CLS 95/36
TXT LIQUID-SOLID SLURRY USED:
    Process under the class definition in which the separation is accomplished
    by contacting the fluid mixture with a pumpable mixture of a solid and a
    liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92,     for a two-step process of solid sorption and liquid sorption.


CLS 95/37
TXT Organic compound removed from gas:
    Process under subclass 36 in which an organic compound is removed from gas
    by contact with a liquid-solid slurry.


CLS 95/38
TXT Halogen containing compound removed from gas:
    Process under subclass 36 in which a halogen (i.e., fluorine (F), chlorine
    (Cl), bromine (Br), iodine (I), astatine (At)) containing compound is
    removed from gas by contact with a liquid-solid slurry.


CLS 95/39
TXT COMPRESSING AND INDIRECT COOLING OF GASEOUS FLUID MIXTURE TO
    SEPARATE:Process under the class definition in which the separation of a
    constituent from a gaseous fluid mixture is accomplished by extracting heat
    in an indirect heat exchanger before, after, or while increasing the
    pressure on the gaseous fluid mixture.

    (1)     Note.  The cooling must not involve details of a refrigeration
    process or apparatus.  See the class definition for the line between Class
    95 and Class 62.


CLS 95/40
TXT And use of heat absorbing agent:
    Process under subclass 39 in which a substance is added to the gaseous
    fluid mixture to prevent a material rise in temperature of the gaseous
    fluid mixture by absorbing the heat of compression.


CLS 95/41
TXT And solid sorption:
    Process under subclass 39 in which a solid sorbent is used to remove a
    constituent from the gaseous fluid mixture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90+,    for processes of solid sorption without compressing and cooling of
    the gaseous fluid mixture in order to separate.


CLS 95/42
TXT And liquid contact (e.g., scrubbing, sorption, etc.):
    Process under subclass 39 in which a liquid is used to remove a constituent
    from the gaseous fluid mixture (e.g., scrubbing, sorption, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149+,   for processes of liquid contact without compressing and cooling of
    the gaseous fluid mixture in order to separate.


CLS 95/43
TXT SELECTIVE DIFFUSION OF GASES:
    Process under the class definition in which a fluid mixture containing a
    gas to be separated contacts a solid, liquid, or gaseous barrier, with the
    gas separating because of the differential permeability of the barrier with
    respect to the gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 4+ for apparatus for
    selective diffusion of gases.


CLS 95/44
TXT Selective diffusion of gases through immobilized liquid:
    Process under subclass 43 in which a plurality of gases containing a gas to
    be separated contacts a liquid barrier that is supported or immobilized in
    or on a porous medium, with the plurality of gases being separated because
    of the differential permeability of the liquid with respect to the gases.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149+,   for processes of contacting a fluid mixture with a liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclass 5 for corresponding apparatus.
    Patents are not cross-referenced from Class 96, subclass 5 to this subclass
    based only on disclosure. Therefore, relevant disclosures of gas separation
    processes may be found in the apparatus area.


CLS 95/45
TXT Selective diffusion of gases through substantially solid barrier (e.g.,
    semipermeable membrane, etc.):Process under subclass 43 in which a
    plurality of gases or a mixture of gas entrained in a liquid contacts a
    substantially solid surface (e.g., semipermeable membrane, etc.) and a gas
    is separated from another gas or a gas is separated from the liquid because
    of the differential permeability of the surface of the solid with respect
    to the gases.

    (1)     Note.  Class 95 will take dissociation of a gas molecule at the
    barrier boundary when such dissociation facilitates passage of the gas
    through the barrier; the atoms reconvert to the gas molecule on the
    downstream side of the barrier.  If the dissociation of the gas occurs away
    from the barrier and a resulting product diffuses through the barrier, then
    the patent will be in Class 423 for an inorganic gas and in the appropriate
    organic class for an organic gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 334+ for processes using a solid
    electrolyte membrane (SEM) situated between two electrodes positioned to
    apply external voltage across the membrane. These membranes are used where
    the partial pressure of the gas to be diffused through the membrane on the
    feed side of the membrane is lower than that on the permeate side.
    Molecules on the feed side of a cell containing a solid electrolyte
    membrane are electrochemically dissociated into ions on the cathode. The
    ions are then transported across the matrix of the membrane by the applied
    voltage and recombined to form molecules on the anode. Class 95 takes the
    use of a solid electrolyte membrane which functions without electrodes and
    without externally applied voltage. These membranes are used where the
    partial pressure of the gas to be diffused through the membrane on the
    permeate side is lower than that on the feed side. Electrodeless solid
    electrolyte membrane cells are operated by maintaining a pressure on the
    feed side such that a positive driving force for ion transport can be
    achieved in the absence of an externally applied voltage and power source.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 96.2, 257.2, and
    321.6+ for apparatus having membranes or dialyzers for separating liquids,
    subclasses 500.21+ for semipermeable membranes used in the separation of
    liquids, and subclasses 634+ for processes of separating a liquid by
    selective diffusion of a component of a liquid through a membrane or
    septum.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 245+ for methods of coating a base so
    that the resulting product is foraminous or porous, wherein the coating
    includes openings or holes which are very small, generally microscopic in
    size.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, for synthetic resins or
    natural rubbers that may be used for selective diffusion of gases.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclasses 818+ for processes
    in which a liquid hydrocarbon is recovered from a liquid mixture containing
    the hydrocarbon by the use of selective diffusion through a semipermeable
    membrane.


CLS 95/46
TXT Degasification of liquid:

    Process under subclass 45 in which gas is separated from a liquid by
    selective diffusion of the gas through a substantially solid barrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for processes of degasification of a liquid by use of sound waves.

    156+,   for processes of contacting a gas with a liquid and degasification
    of the contact liquid.

    241+,   for other processes of degasification of a liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclass 405 for processes of removing gas from liquid metal by
    use of a gas permeable membrane.

    96,     Gas Separation: Apparatus, subclass 6 for corresponding apparatus.
    Patents are not cross-referenced from Class 96, subclass 6 to this subclass
    based only on disclosure.  Therefore, relevant disclosures of gas
    separation processes may be found in the apparatus area.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 640 for processes of
    separating a constituent from a liquid by selective diffusion of the
    constituent through a membrane or septum wherein the constituent is not
    initially present as a gas in the liquid and passes through the membrane or
    septum in vapor phase.


CLS 95/47
TXT Nitrogen or nitrogen containing compound permeates barrier:

    Process under subclass 45 in which nitrogen (N2) or a nitrogen containing
    compound selectively diffuses through a substantially solid barrier.


CLS 95/48
TXT Halogen containing compound permeates barrier:

    Process under subclass 45 in which a halogen (i.e., fluorine (F), chlorine
    (Cl), bromine (Br), iodine (I), astatine (At)) containing compound
    selectively diffuses through a substantially solid barrier.


CLS 95/49
TXT Sulfur containing compound permeates barrier:

    Process under subclass 45 in which a sulfur (S) containing compound
    selectively diffuses through a substantially solid barrier.


CLS 95/50
TXT Organic compound permeates barrier:

    Process under subclass 45 in which an organic compound selectively diffuses
    through a substantially solid barrier.


CLS 95/51
TXT Carbon dioxide or carbon monoxide permeates barrier:

    Process under subclass 45 in which carbon dioxide (CO2) or carbon monoxide
    (CO) selectively diffuses through a substantially solid barrier.


CLS 95/52
TXT Water vapor permeates barrier:

    Process under subclass 45 in which water (H2O) vapor selectively diffuses
    through a substantially solid barrier.


CLS 95/53
TXT Helium permeates barrier:

    Process under subclass 45 in which helium (He) selectively diffuses through
    a substantially solid barrier.


CLS 95/54
TXT Oxygen permeates barrier:

    Process under subclass 45 in which oxygen (O2) selectively diffuses through
    a substantially solid barrier.


CLS 95/55
TXT Hydrogen permeates barrier:

    Process under subclass 45 in which hydrogen (H2) selectively diffuses
    through a substantially solid barrier.


CLS 95/56
TXT Elemental metal or alloy barrier:

    Process under subclass 55 in which hydrogen (H2) selectively diffuses
    through a substantially solid barrier that is made of elemental metal or
    alloy or contains a layer of elemental metal or alloy.

    (1)     Note.  The hydrogen (H2) molecule may dissociate into hydrogen (H)
    atoms at the surface of the barrier.  The atoms will then diffuse through
    the barrier and recombine into a hydrogen (H2) molecule on the downstream
    side of the barrier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 500.25 for a
    metal-containing semipermeable membrane used in liquid separation.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclass 658.2 for processes of
    producing elemental hydrogen (H) by direct decomposition of a binary
    compound (e.g., chemical storage, etc.).


CLS 95/57
TXT ELECTRIC OR ELECTROSTATIC FIELD (E.G., ELECTROSTATIC PRECIPITATION,
    ETC.):Process under the class definition in which an electric current is
    discharged into the fluid mixture or the fluid mixture is contacted with a
    fluid or solid which has been electrified.

    (1)     Note.  The separation of the fluid mixture need not be accomplished
    directly by the electrical treatment, provided that the overall process
    results in separation of the fluid mixture.  The electrical treatment may
    be for the purpose of causing entrained particles to become agglomerated
    for easier removal by other means, such as filtration or deflection.

    (2)     Note.  Gas separation processes including the mere application of
    electricity to a material contacting the fluid mixture for the purpose of
    resistance heating is classified below.

    (3)     Note.  Processes for separating isotopes are classified based upon
    the specific methods used (e.g., the separation of liquid isotopes by
    distillation is classified in Class 203, subclass 5; isotope separation
    involving chemical reaction brought about by wave energy is found in Class
    204, subclasses 157.2+, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for processes involving an electric field with control responsive
    to sensed condition.

    25,     for processes involving an electric field with recording or
    signaling of a condition.

    26,     for processes involving an electric field with timing of an
    operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 15+ for apparatus using an
    electric field to separate gas constituents.  Also, see other collected
    search class notes regarding related subject matter.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 164+ for
    processes involving gas treatment by chemical reaction and electrical
    discharge or chemical change by electrical discharge, and subclasses 554+
    and 660+ for similar processes and apparatus for electrical separation or
    purification of liquids and for degasification of liquid aided by
    electrical discharge involving the conversion of constituents to other
    compounds.  When such chemical conversion is in doubt, placement of
    electrical processes and apparatus for degasifying liquid is proper for
    Class 95 or Class 96, respectively.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 12.2 for a
    combination process or apparatus of classifying, separating, and assorting
    solids including an electrostatic field; and subclasses 127.1+ for process
    and apparatus for classifying, separating, or assorting solids by an
    electrostatic field.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 748 for processes of
    treating a liquid by directly subjecting the liquid to an electric field or
    a current or to a regular pulsating source of energy.  Also, see the search
    class note to Class 204.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 282+ for methods of separating certain
    accelerated ionized material from similar accelerated ionized material
    having different mass-to-electric-charge ratios by use of electrostatic or
    magnetic fields.


CLS 95/58
TXT With addition of solid, gas, or vapor:
    Process under subclass 57 which includes adding a solid, gas, or vapor to
    the fluid mixture undergoing treatment or separation.

    (1)     Note.  To come under this definition, the added solid, gas, or
    vapor must not be merely a different amount of the same fluid mixture that
    is to be separated, but may be a constituent of this mixture, which may be
    derived from a previous separation process.

    (2)     Note.  The addition of solid includes the use of a fluidized solid
    particle bed, regardless of whether the solid remains entrained in the gas
    after passage through the bed.  The use of a stationary particle bed is not
    considered to be addition of a solid, and patents in which a stationary
    particle bed is used will be found elsewhere under subclass 57.  Also, for
    the purposes of this subclass, the added solid, gas, or vapor may include
    any combination thereof (except for a different amount of the fluid mixture
    to be separated, as in (1) Note), including aerosols.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclass 27 for means to add charged
    solid or liquid particles to the gas stream, subclass 52 for vapor or
    liquid contact apparatus involving electrical separation, and subclass 74
    for gas separation apparatus including an electrical precipitator and means
    to treat or condition the gas before, during, or after precipitation.


CLS 95/59
TXT Electrode treating (e.g., coating, cleaning, etc.):
    Process under subclass 58 which includes the physical treatment of an
    electrode (e.g., by addition of a protective or reactive layer to the
    electrode or the removal of collected material from the electrode, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74+,    for processes with cleaning of a collecting electrode but without
    the addition of a solid, gas, or vapor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 28+ for electrical
    separation apparatus with electrode cleaner, apparatus part flusher or
    discharger, or wet collector.


CLS 95/60
TXT Heating or cooling:
    Process under subclass 58 in which the fluid mixture to be separated is
    heated or cooled either by or along with the addition of solid, gas, or
    vapor.


CLS 95/61
TXT Solid is electrically conducting:
    Process under subclass 58 in which a solid of low electrical resistance is
    added to the fluid mixture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 28+ for electrical
    separation apparatus containing electrodes coated with a wet conductive
    film.


CLS 95/62
TXT Agglomerating gas-borne particles:
    Process under subclass 58 in which solid or liquid particles to be
    separated from a gas are agglomerated into larger conglomerates either in
    the gas phase or on a collecting surface, with the agglomeration being
    facilitated by addition of a solid, gas, or vapor to the incoming fluid
    mixture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclass 77 for electrical separation
    apparatus containing electrical means for agglomerating particles.


CLS 95/63
TXT And nonelectrical separation of fluid mixture:
    Process under subclass 57 which includes methods of separation of the fluid
    mixture other than those explicitly connected with an electrical separation
    technique.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74+,    for processes involving the removal of material from a collecting
    electrode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclass 27 for electrical separation
    apparatus with means to add charged liquid or solid particles to the
    gaseous fluid mixture, subclass 52 for electrical separation apparatus with
    means to add a liquid or vapor to the gaseous fluid mixture, and subclass
    55 for electrical separation apparatus with serially arranged nonelectrical
    separators.


CLS 95/64
TXT Liquid addition to gaseous fluid mixture:
    Process under subclass 63 in which a liquid is added to a gaseous fluid
    mixture before, during, or after electrical treatment either (a) to cause
    separation or (b) to condition the gaseous fluid mixture in any way.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for processes involving the removal of material from a collecting
    electrode by flushing with a liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 52+ for electrical
    separation apparatus with vapor or liquid contact.


CLS 95/65
TXT Liquid addition precedes electrical precipitation:
    Process under subclass 64 in which liquid addition is made before the
    gaseous fluid mixture is subjected to electrical separation.


CLS 95/66
TXT With heating or cooling:
    Process under subclass 65 including heating or cooling either as a result
    of the liquid addition or as a separate, additional gas treatment.


CLS 95/67
TXT By heating or cooling:
    Process under subclass 63 in which nonelectrical gas separation is caused
    by heating or cooling a gaseous fluid mixture.


CLS 95/68
TXT Including cleaning or regeneration of separating means (e.g., particulate
    bed filter, deflector, etc.):Process under subclass 63 which includes
    removal of collected material from or regeneration of a nonelectrical gas
    separating means, such as a particulate bed filter or deflector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90+,    for processes of solid sorption which may include regeneration of
    the solid sorbent.

    276,    for processes of cleaning a particulate filter bed.

    278,    for processes of cleaning a cohesive filter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclass 242 for gas separating apparatus with
    liquid cleaning means for separating media, subclasses 282+ for gas
    separating apparatus with nonliquid cleaning means for separating media,
    and subclass 431 for means contacting an apparatus part with a fluid for
    discharge of material residue.


CLS 95/69
TXT Distinct separation step precedes electric or electrostatic
    treatment:Process under subclass 63 in which at least one nonelectrical
    separating step is performed on the fluid mixture before electric or
    electrostatic treatment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 315+ for serial diverse separating media
    not including an electrical separation apparatus.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 55+ for electrical
    separation apparatus with serially arranged diverse separators; in
    particular, subclass 57 for such apparatus preceded by a nonelectrical
    separator.


CLS 95/70
TXT Distinct separation step follows electric or electrostatic
    treatment:Process under subclass 63 in which at least one nonelectrical
    separating step is performed on the fluid mixture after electric or
    electrostatic treatment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 315+ for serial diverse separating media
    not including electrical separation apparatus.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 55+ for electrical
    separation apparatus with serially arranged diverse separators.


CLS 95/71
TXT With addition of liquid to gaseous fluid mixture:
    Process under subclass 57 in which a liquid is added to a gaseous fluid
    mixture undergoing treatment, but does not directly result in the
    separation of gas constituents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64+,    for processes involving contacting a gaseous fluid mixture with a
    liquid in a diverse type operation (in which gas constituents are also
    separated by nonelectrical methods, such as directly results from liquid
    addition).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 220+ for apparatus with liquid
    contacting means.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclass 52 for corresponding
    electrical field separation apparatus with means to add liquid or vapor to
    the gas.


CLS 95/72
TXT Vaporization of liquid:
    Process under subclass 71 in which the added liquid is vaporized to join
    the gas phase.


CLS 95/73
TXT With heating or cooling:
    Process under subclass 57 which includes heating or cooling of the fluid
    mixture being treated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     for related processes in which a nonelectrical gas separation is
    caused by heat exchange with the gas.


CLS 95/74
TXT With cleaning of collector electrode:
    Process under subclass 57 which includes cleaning or removing of a
    deposited constituent from an electrical element provided to attract and
    retain the constituent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 28+ for corresponding
    electrode cleaning means.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, for cleaning matter from
    solid materials or objects.


CLS 95/75
TXT By liquid flushing:
    Process under subclass 74 in which the cleaning of the element is performed
    by the application of a liquid stream.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 43+ for corresponding
    apparatus with fluid contacting means.


CLS 95/76
TXT By scraping or vibrating:
    Process under subclass 74 in which the cleaning of the element is performed
    by the application of mechanical contacting or jarring means to remove
    retained material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 32+ for corresponding
    apparatus with vibrating means, and subclass 51 for corresponding apparatus
    with scraping means.


CLS 95/77
TXT Continuously moving electrode:
    Process under subclass 57 in which an element discharging electricity into
    the fluid mixture or collecting deposits therefrom continually moves during
    operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 39+ for electrical
    separation apparatus with movably mounted electrode assembly for cleaning
    purposes and subclass 94 for electrode supporting means permitting movement
    thereof during use or for orientation.


CLS 95/78
TXT Including baffling, deflection, or restriction of gas flow:
    Process under subclass 57 in which a restriction or redirection of gas flow
    is caused by inclusion of a baffle, deflector, or specially shaped
    electrode for the purpose of such restriction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 60+ for corresponding
    apparatus with gas flow distribution means, subclasses 95+ for apparatus
    with specific type or shape of discharge electrode, and subclasses 98+ for
    specific collector means.


CLS 95/79
TXT Plural separate stages or zones (e.g., separate ionization and collection
    regions, etc.):Process under subclass 57 in which a gaseous fluid mixture
    passes through two or more distinct regions or units, such regions
    providing either multiple identical gas treatments or plural diverse
    treatments for removal of entrained particles.

    (1)     Note.  The stages or zones may be arranged in series or in parallel.

    (2)     Note.  A single stage with two or more regions or zones of
    differing applied voltage is included under this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63+,    for processes with nonelectrical gas separating steps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 55+ for electrical
    separation apparatus with serial diverse separators and subclasses 75+ for
    electrical separation apparatus with diverse or serially distinct
    electrical fields.


CLS 95/80
TXT Pulsing or time-varying electric field (e.g., AC, pulsed DC, etc.):Process
    under subclass 79 involving the application of a voltage which fluctuates
    with time during treatment of the gaseous fluid mixture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation: Apparatus, subclass 54 for electrical separation
    apparatus having an alternating current field.


CLS 95/81
TXT Pulsing or time-varying electric field (e.g., AC, pulsed DC, etc.):Process
    under subclass 57 involving the application of a voltage which fluctuates
    with time during treatment of the gaseous fluid mixture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation: Apparatus, subclass 54 for electrical separation
    apparatus having an alternating current field.


CLS 95/82
TXT CHROMATOGRAPHY:
    Process under the class definition in which (a) the plurality of gases to
    be separated enters a column to contact a liquid, known as the "stationary
    liquid phase," supported by a base of solid material to successively sorb
    therein the different gases of the mixture or (b) the plurality of gases to
    be separated enters a column to contact a solid sorbent to successively
    sorb thereon the different gases of the mixture with or without
    subsequently successively eluting or displacing the sorbed gases in (a) or
    (b) with a gas which is inert with respect to the sorbed gases and sorbent;
    and subcombinations of the processes in (a) and (b) that do not result in
    separation when the subcombinations are not provided for elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  The plurality of gases is usually allowed to flow slowly
    through a column of particulate sorbent.  Different gases will pass at
    different speeds through the column and will eventually be separated into
    zones.  The zones can be eluted by passing an inert gas through the column
    and collecting the various fractions.

    (2)     Note.  When a liquid is supported by a base of solid material for
    the separation of the mixture of gases, the process is known as "gas-liquid
    chromatography" or "GLC." If liquid is not present, the process is known as
    "gas-solid chromatography." Other phrases used when referring to
    chromatography are "gas-chromatography" or "GC," "vapor-phase
    chromatography" or "VPC," "gas-liquid partition chromatography," "vapor
    fractometry," "capillary column gas chromatography" or "CC-GC," and
    "partition chromatography."

    (3)     Note.  Sometimes a "carrier" gas is mixed with or used to propel
    the plurality of gases to be separated through the chromatography column.

    (4)     Note.  The plurality of gases to be separated may be obtained by
    vaporizing a liquid.  The liquid that is injected into the chromatography
    column is vaporized, and then the resulting vapors are separated in the
    chromatography column.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    245+    and 263+, for processes of separating gases from liquids by
    contacting the liquid with a gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 19.02, 23.22+, and 23.35+ for
    chromatography including analysis of eluted or displaced gas.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 101+ for gas chromatography
    apparatus.

     210,   Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 656+ and 198.2+ for
    processes and apparatus of liquid purification or separation involving
    chromatography.

    436,    Chemistry: Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 161+
    for processes which involve a chemical reaction for analytical testing
    including chromatography and for processes of analysis of the chemical
    properties of a sample including chromatography.


CLS 95/83
TXT Liquid supported on surface of capillary column:
    Process under subclass 82 in which the base of solid material supporting
    the stationary liquid phase as a thin film is the inner surface of a
    capillary tube or column.


CLS 95/84
TXT Liquid supported on particulate packing:
    Process under subclass 82 in which the base of solid material supporting
    the stationary liquid phase is a granular solid.


CLS 95/85
TXT Including use of gas flow distributor in column:
    Process under subclass 82 in which gas is directed or channelled by use of
    a deflector inside the column.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclass 107 for corresponding
    apparatus.  Patents are not cross-referenced from Class 96, subclass 107 to
    this subclass based only on disclosure.  Therefore, relevant disclosures to
    gas separation processes may be found in the apparatus area.


CLS 95/86
TXT Plural separate columns:
    Process under subclass 82 in which the plurality of gases passes through
    two or more parallel or serial columns.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclass 104 for chromatographic
    apparatus having two or more separate and distinct stages or zones.


CLS 95/87
TXT With heating or cooling:
    Process under subclass 82 in which the plurality of gases, a liquid, a
    separated constituent, or an apparatus involved in the process is heated or
    cooled (e.g., the column may be heated in order to degas the solid sorbent
    or a gas may be heated or cooled, etc.).


CLS 95/88
TXT Specific column packing or sorbent material (e.g., particle size,
    composition, etc.):Process under subclass 82 in which a specified packing
    or sorbent material (e.g., sorbent compositions, particle size, etc.) is
    used.


CLS 95/89
TXT Injection, per se, without separation:
    Process under subclass 82 in which a method of injecting the plurality of
    gases or a liquid into the chromatography column is claimed, per se,
    without gas separation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    for processes and apparatus for the transfer of fluent material through a
    flow confining system, the source and receiver parts of which are normally
    separable.


CLS 95/90
TXT SOLID SORPTION:
    Process under the class definition in which a solid sorbent is used to
    retain on its internal or external surfaces a constituent of the fluid
    mixture passing in contact therewith.

    (1)     Note.  A solid sorbent is a solid material which separates a
    constituent (e.g., a gas, vapor, etc.) from a fluid mixture containing such
    constituents in a  "quasi-chemical" manner.  The action in most instances
    is that of selective retention (i.e., the sorbent removes only the part of
    the fluid mixture for which it has the greatest affinity).  The retained
    constituent cannot be removed by shaking, brushing, or similar mechanical
    action, but generally can be removed by heating, pressure reduction, or use
    of a stripping or denuding fluid.

            A filter (particulate solids or other) has no particular "chemical"
    affinity for a constituent of a fluid mixture.  The separation in the case
    of a filter depends on a mechanical entrapment of solid or liquid particles
    because of their relatively large size compared with the interstices or
    spaces between individual elements of the filter.  The retained particles
    can be removed by brushing, wiping, shaking, or similar mechanical action.

    (2)     Note.  "Absorption" is the holding of a constituent by cohesion or
    capillary action in the pores of a solid.  "Adsorption" is the ability of a
    sorbent to hold or concentrate gases, liquids, or dissolved substances upon
    its surface.

    (3)     Note.  The desorption of a solid sorbent, which may appear in one
    of the subclasses below, must be before or after its use as a sorbent, as
    claimed.  The mere treatment of a solid sorbent to drive off the fluid
    sorbed thereon or therein is proper subject matter for Class 502.  See
    search class note below.

    (4)     Note.  This subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder will
    take the degasification of a liquid by use of a solid sorbent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for processes using compressing and cooling of a fluid mixture to
    separate a constituent from the mixture in addition to using a solid
    sorbent to separate a constituent from the gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 108+ for apparatus
    containing solid sorbents.

    203,    Distillation: Processes, Separatory, subclass 41 for a separatory
    distillation process including the step of passing the produced vapor
    through a solid sorbent.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 660+ for processes of
    using a solid sorbent to purify or separate a liquid.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, subclass 900 for hydrogen (H2)
    storage alloys or metallic compositions.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclass 658.2 for processes of
    producing elemental hydrogen (H) by direct decomposition of a binary
    compound (e.g., chemical storage, etc.).

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclass 167 for
    processes wherein the basis for analysis is an optical result of a chemical
    reaction that is measured mechanically or visually, including solid
    sorption of a gas.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor: Product or Process of
    Making, subclasses 20+ for regenerating or rehabilitating solid sorbent
    compositions, per se, subclasses 60+ for zeolite compositions and for
    processes of making zeolite compositions, and subclasses 400+ for other
    solid sorbent compositions and for processes of making solid sorbent
    compositions.  Class 95 will take the combination of gas separation using a
    solid sorbent composition and regenerating or rehabilitating the solid
    sorbent composition.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclasses 820+ for processes
    in which a mixture of a hydrocarbon compound with another substance is
    treated to recover that same compound in a more usable condition, that is,
    a purer or more desirable condition, by a treatment which comprises
    separating the hydrocarbon from the other substance by contact with a solid
    sorbent.


CLS 95/91
TXT Soluble or deliquescent material used:

    Process under subclass 90 in which the solid sorbent dissolves in the
    constituent retained or sorbed therein or thereon.

    (1)     Note.  The resultant solution may be used in a liquid contacting
    zone to aid in the separation.

    (2)     Note.  A deliquescent material is a water-soluble chemical salt
    used to sorb atmospheric water vapor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 118+ for apparatus
    containing a soluble or deliquescent sorbent material.


CLS 95/92
TXT And liquid contact (e.g., scrubbing, sorption, etc.):
    Process under subclass 90 in which a gaseous fluid mixture is contacted by
    a liquid in addition to a solid sorbent in order to remove a gas, solid, or
    liquid therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36+,    for processes in which a liquid-solid slurry is used to cause gas
    separation.


CLS 95/93
TXT Sweep gas used on solid sorbent:
    Process under subclass 92 in which a gas is used to purge the constituent
    separated from the solid sorbent or a gas is used to regenerate the solid
    sorbent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97+     and 104+, for processes of using a sweep gas on a solid sorbent
    including reduction of pressure.


CLS 95/94
TXT And recycle or reuse of contact liquid for further contact:
    Process under subclass 92 in which (a) the contact liquid is recirculated
    for further contact with the fluid mixture or a portion thereof or (b) the
    contact liquid is used in another step of the process for further contact
    with the fluid mixture or a portion thereof.


CLS 95/95
TXT Including reduction of pressure:
    Process under subclass 90 in which pressure over a mass of solid sorbent is
    decreased in order to separate from the solid sorbent the constituent
    sorbed in the gas separation process.


CLS 95/96
TXT Plural pressure varying steps (e.g., pressure swing adsorption,
    etc.):Process under subclass 95 in which there is more than one step of
    increasing or decreasing the pressure on the solid sorbent.


CLS 95/97
TXT Sweep gas used:
    Process under subclass 96 in which a gas is used to purge the constituent
    separated from the solid sorbent or a gas is used to regenerate the solid
    sorbent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93,     for processes of solid sorption and liquid contact including use of
    a sweep gas on a solid sorbent.

    104+,   for processes in which a sweep gas is used to carry desorbed gas
    without the use of plural pressure varying.


CLS 95/98
TXT Feed gas or constituent thereof is sweep gas:
    Process under subclass 97 in which the sweep gas is the gaseous fluid
    mixture or a portion thereof, before or after being treated or separated.


CLS 95/99
TXT With heating or cooling:
    Process under subclass 98 in which the solid sorbent or a gas is heated or
    cooled.


CLS 95/100
TXT Stepped pressure reduction:
    Process under subclass 98 in which the pressure over the solid sorbent is
    decreased in more than one step.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for processes in which there is use of pressure reduction in more
    than one step without the use of a sweep gas to carry desorbed gas.


CLS 95/101
TXT Vacuum applied:
    Process under subclass 100 in which a step of pressure reduction is
    accomplished by using a pressure below that of the atmosphere.


CLS 95/102
TXT Vacuum applied:
    Process under subclass 98 in which a step of pressure reduction is
    accomplished by using a pressure below that of the atmosphere.


CLS 95/103
TXT Stepped pressure reduction:
    Process under subclass 96 in which the pressure over the solid sorbent is
    decreased in more than one step.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    for processes in which there is use of pressure reduction in more
    than one step with the use of a sweep gas to carry desorbed gas.


CLS 95/104
TXT Sweep gas used:
    Process under subclass 95 in which a gas is used to purge the constituent
    separated from the sorbent or a gas is used to regenerate the solid sorbent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93,     for processes of solid sorption and liquid contact including use of
    a sweep gas on a solid sorbent.

    97+,    for processes in which a sweep gas is used to carry desorbed gas
    with the use of plural pressure varying.


CLS 95/105
TXT Feed gas or constituent thereof is sweep gas:
    Process under subclass 104 in which the sweep gas is the gaseous fluid
    mixture or a portion thereof, before or after being treated or separated.


CLS 95/106
TXT With heating or cooling:
    Process under subclass 95 in which the solid sorbent or a gas is heated or
    cooled.


CLS 95/107
TXT Moving sorbent:
    Process under subclass 90 in which the solid sorbent is moved from one zone
    to another by moving a housing, is moved from one zone to another in a
    stationary housing, or is blown about or fluidized by a gas in a housing.

    (1)     Note.  The zones need not all be for sorbing the gas or for
    desorbing the solid sorbent; it is sufficient that the solid sorbent be
    moved from one zone to another, in each of which zones the solid sorbent
    either is treated or is used to treat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclass 150 for apparatus having a
    moving solid sorbent.


CLS 95/108
TXT Fluidized bed:
    Process under subclass 107 in which the solid sorbent is blown about or
    fluidized by a gas in a housing.


CLS 95/109
TXT Having gravity flow of sorbent from zone to zone:
    Process under subclass 108 in which the solid sorbent is moved from one
    zone to another in a stationary housing by the forces of gravity.


CLS 95/110
TXT Gravity flow of sorbent from zone to zone:
    Process under subclass 107 in which the solid sorbent is moved from one
    zone to another in a stationary housing by the forces of gravity.


CLS 95/111
TXT Sweep gas used:
    Process under subclass 110 in which a gas is used to purge a constituent
    separated from the solid sorbent or a gas is used to regenerate the solid
    sorbent.


CLS 95/112
TXT Steam is sweep gas:
    Process under subclass 111 in which the sweep gas is steam.


CLS 95/113
TXT Rotating housing containing fixed sorbent or rotating plurality of
    housings:Process under subclass 107 in which the housing containing a fixed
    solid sorbent turns on its axis in order to move the solid sorbent from one
    treatment zone to another or a plurality of housings is turned about a
    central axis to the housings to place a housing in a position of use or
    nonuse or regeneration.


CLS 95/114
TXT With plural indirect heat transfer steps on solid sorbent or gaseous fluid
    mixture or constituent thereof:Process under subclass 90 in which there is
    more than one step of heating or cooling the solid sorbent or the gaseous
    fluid mixture or constituent thereof through a wall before or after
    separation.

    (1)     Note.  The heat transfer steps must be part of a larger process
    containing subject matter for Class 95, such as will be found in this and
    the indented subclass where the heat transfer steps are combined with
    sorption of a constituent from a gas on a solid sorbent.  If the only
    separation involved is conducted by the heat transfer steps, then
    classification in Class 165 is proper.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for processes where only
    indirect heat exchange causes the separation of a constituent from a gas.


CLS 95/115
TXT Heating and cooling:
    Process under subclass 114 in which there is heating and cooling of the
    solid sorbent or of a gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 58+ and 201+ for processes of heating and
    cooling where only the indirect heat exchange causes the separation of a
    constituent from a gas.


CLS 95/116
TXT Inorganic gas or liquid particle sorbed (e.g., vapor, mist, etc.):Process
    under subclass 90 in which an inorganic gas or liquid particle (e.g.,
    vapor, mist, etc.) is sorbed from the plurality of gases or the gas with
    entrained liquid particles.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of classification in this area, "inorganic"
    compounds or elements are those that would fall within the definition of
    Class 423.  For example, the cyanides (CN joined only to a metal or to
    hydrogen) and the carbon oxides are found in the indented subclasses.


CLS 95/117
TXT Water sorbed:
    Process under subclass 116 in which water is sorbed from the plurality of
    gases or the gas with entrained liquid particles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     for processes in which water-soluble chemical salts are used to
    sorb atmospheric water vapor.


CLS 95/118
TXT Plural separating treatments of gas by solid sorbent to remove
    water:Process under subclass 117 in which the gas is passed through a
    plurality of discrete or diverse separating stages or steps, with the solid
    sorbent being the same or a different solid sorbent in each step of the
    process.


CLS 95/119
TXT And regeneration of any solid sorbent:
    Process under subclass 118 in which at least one of the solid sorbents is
    revivified or regenerated.


CLS 95/120
TXT Heating or cooling:
    Process under subclass 119 in which the solid sorbent or a gas is heated or
    cooled.


CLS 95/121
TXT And regeneration of solid sorbent:
    Process under subclass 117 in which the solid sorbent is revivified or
    regenerated.


CLS 95/122
TXT Sweep gas used:
    Process under subclass 121 in which a gas is used to purge the water
    separated from the solid sorbent or a gas is used to regenerate the solid
    sorbent.


CLS 95/123
TXT Hot sweep gas:
    Process under subclass 122 in which there is a positive step of raising the
    temperature of the sweep gas above the ambient temperature or the sweep gas
    is already at a temperature above the ambient temperature.


CLS 95/124
TXT And cooling of sweep gas:
    Process under subclass 123 in which the sweep gas is cooled.


CLS 95/125
TXT And cooling of solid sorbent:
    Process under subclass 123 in which the solid sorbent is cooled.


CLS 95/126
TXT By heating:
    Process under subclass 121 in which the solid sorbent is revivified or
    regenerated by heating.


CLS 95/127
TXT Noble gas sorbed:
    Process under subclass 116 in which a noble gas (i.e., helium (He), neon
    (Ne), argon (Ar), krypton (Kr), xenon (Xe), or radon (Rn)) is sorbed.


CLS 95/128
TXT Nitrogen containing compound sorbed:
    Process under subclass 116 in which a nitrogen containing compound is
    sorbed.


CLS 95/129
TXT Nitrogen oxide sorbed:
    Process under subclass 128 in which a nitrogen oxide (e.g., nitric oxide
    (NO), nitrogen dioxide (NO2), etc.) is sorbed.


CLS 95/130
TXT Nitrogen sorbed:
    Process under subclass 116 in which nitrogen (N2) is sorbed.


CLS 95/131
TXT Halogen or halogen containing compound sorbed:
    Process under subclass 116 in which a halogen (i.e., fluorine (F), chlorine
    (Cl), bromine (Br), iodine (I), astatine (At)) or a halogen containing
    compound is sorbed.


CLS 95/132
TXT Chlorine or chlorine containing compound sorbed:
    Process under subclass 131 in which chlorine (Cl) or a chlorine containing
    compound is sorbed.


CLS 95/133
TXT Metal or metal containing compound sorbed:
    Process under subclass 116 in which a metal or metal containing compound is
    sorbed.

    (1)     Note.  Arsenic (As) is considered to be a metal.


CLS 95/134
TXT Mercury sorbed:
    Process under subclass 133 in which mercury (Hg) is sorbed.


CLS 95/135
TXT Sulfur containing compound sorbed:
    Process under subclass 116 in which a sulfur (S) containing compound is
    sorbed.


CLS 95/136
TXT Hydrogen sulfide sorbed:
    Process under subclass 135 in which hydrogen sulfide (H2S) is sorbed.


CLS 95/137
TXT Sulfur dioxide or sulfur trioxide sorbed:
    Process under subclass 135 in which sulfur dioxide (SO2) or sulfur trioxide
    (SO3) is sorbed.


CLS 95/138
TXT Oxygen or ozone sorbed:
    Process under subclass 116 in which oxygen (O2) or ozone (O3) is sorbed.


CLS 95/139
TXT Carbon dioxide sorbed:
    Process under subclass 116 in which carbon dioxide (CO2) is sorbed.


CLS 95/140
TXT Carbon monoxide sorbed:
    Process under subclass 116 in which carbon monoxide (CO) is sorbed.


CLS 95/141
TXT Organic gas or liquid particle sorbed (e.g., vapor, mist, etc.):Process
    under subclass 90 in which an organic gas or liquid particle (e.g., vapor,
    mist, etc.) is sorbed from the plurality of gases or the gas with entrained
    liquid particles.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of classification in this area, "organic"
    compounds are those that would fall within the definitions of Class 260.


CLS 95/142
TXT Halogen containing compound sorbed (e.g., phosgene, etc.):
    Process under subclass 141 in which a halogen containing (i.e., fluorine
    (F), chlorine (Cl), bromine (Br), iodine (I), astatine (At)) compound
    (e.g., phosgene, etc.) is sorbed.


CLS 95/143
TXT Hydrocarbon sorbed:
    Process under subclass 141 in which a hydrocarbon is sorbed.


CLS 95/144
TXT Alkene sorbed:
    Process under subclass 143 in which an alkene (i.e., olefin) is sorbed.


CLS 95/145
TXT Alkyne sorbed (e.g., acetylene, etc.):
    Process under subclass 143 in which an alkyne (i.e., alkine) is sorbed
    (e.g., acetylene, etc.).


CLS 95/146
TXT Gasoline sorbed:
    Process under subclass 143 in which gasoline is sorbed.


CLS 95/147
TXT Benzene ring containing compound sorbed:
    Process under subclass 143 in which a benzene ring containing compound is
    sorbed.


CLS 95/148
TXT And regeneration:
    Process under subclass 90 in which the solid sorbent is revivified or
    regenerated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95+,    for processes of regeneration of the solid sorbent including the
    reduction of pressure.

     107+,  for processes of regeneration of the solid sorbent including the
    use of a moving sorbent.

    114+,   for processes of regeneration of the solid sorbent including plural
    indirect heat transfer steps.

    116+    and 141+, for processes of regeneration of the solid sorbent
    including the sorption of a specifically named compound.


CLS 95/149
TXT LIQUID CONTACTING (E.G., SORPTION, SCRUBBING, ETC.):
    Process under the class definition in which the fluid mixture is contacted
    with a liquid.

    (1)     Note.  The contact of the fluid mixture with a liquid generally
    results in separation of a gas, solid particles, or liquid particles from a
    gaseous fluid mixture (e.g., sorption, scrubbing, etc.).  The contact of
    the fluid mixture with a liquid does not have to cause separation of the
    mixture, however, but may be used for other reasons (e.g., to humidify a
    gas, etc.).  As long as there is separation of the fluid mixture by some
    process of this class along with the contacting of the mixture with a
    liquid for reasons other than separation, the patent will be placed here
    (e.g., filtration plus humidification, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for selective diffusion of gases through an immobilized liquid.

    64+     and 71+, for electric or electrostatic field processes combined
    with liquid addition to the gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 220+ for gas separation apparatus using
    liquid contact means combined with means to further handle the process
    constituents before, during, or after separation.  See the class line to
    Class 261 in section III of this class for further details about gas and
    liquid contact apparatus and processes.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, for gas and liquid contact
    apparatus, per se, with or without separation, and for gas and liquid
    contact processes, per se, without separation (e.g., humidification, etc.).
     See the class line to Class 261 in section III of this class for further
    details about gas and liquid contact apparatus and processes.

    436,    Chemistry: Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclass 168 for
    processes wherein the basis for analysis is an optical result of a chemical
    reaction that is measured mechanically or visually, including liquid
    sorption of a gas.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclasses 833+ for processes
    in which a mixture of a hydrocarbon compound with another substance is
    treated to recover that same compound in a more usable condition, that is,
    a purer or more desirable condition, by a treatment which comprises
    separating the hydrocarbon from the other substance by addition of an
    extraneous agent (e.g., solvent, etc.).


CLS 95/150
TXT Including foaming of liquid to aid in the separation:
    Process under subclass 149 in which a frothy or sudslike dispersion of gas
    in the contact liquid is formed to aid in the separation.

    (1)     Note.  When foam is intentionally formed, it will be assumed to aid
    in the separation unless otherwise stated.


CLS 95/151
TXT Mechanical agitation of liquid body to contact gaseous fluid
    mixture:Process under subclass 149 in which the gaseous fluid mixture is
    contacted with the liquid by mechanically stirring a liquid body or mass or
    by mechanically disturbing the surface of a liquid body or mass in such a
    way that the liquid is flung into the mixture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150,    for processes in which agitation of the liquid body causes foaming
    of the liquid.

    185,    for processes of contacting a fluid mixture with a liquid combined
    with mechanical agitating in order to degasify the liquid.

    260,    for processes of degasification of a liquid by agitating.


CLS 95/152
TXT Coagulating or flocculating agent:
    Process under subclass 149 in which solid particles are removed from a gas
    by a contact liquid that contains an agent that causes the solid particles
    to agglomerate.

    (1)     Note.  These agents are known as "coagulating" agents,
    "flocculating" agents, or "flocculent" materials.


CLS 95/153
TXT Hydrate inhibitor:
    Process under subclass 149 in which the contact liquid contains an agent
    that prevents formation of a substance containing water combined in the
    molecular form (e.g., agent prevents formation of methane hydrate:
    CH4-7H2O, ethane hydrate: C2H6-8H2O, chlorine hydrate: Cl2-8H2O, etc.).


CLS 95/154
TXT Surfactant or wetting agent:
    Process under subclass 149 in which the contact liquid contains an agent
    that reduces the surface tension of the contact liquid.

    (1)     Note.  These agents are known as "surfactants," "wetting" agents,
    or "surface-active" substances.


CLS 95/155
TXT Defoaming or antifoaming agent:
    Process under subclass 149 in which the contact liquid contains an agent
    that either (a) resolves or breaks a frothy or sudslike dispersion that was
    formed during the liquid-gas contact into separate fluid phases or (b)
    prevents formation of a frothy or sudslike dispersion during the liquid-gas
    contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157     and 242, for other processes of defoaming a liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 321 for processes of breaking foam or
    inhibiting foam formation by a chemical agent and subclass 358 for
    compositions for breaking foam or inhibiting foam formation.  See section
    III of this class for the line between these two classes.


CLS 95/156
TXT And degasification of a liquid:
    Process under subclass 149 in which a gas is removed from a liquid.

    (1)     Note.  Generally, the patents in this subclass and the subclasses
    indented hereunder involve contacting a plurality of gases, with or without
    solid or liquid particles entrained therein, with a liquid in order to sorb
    or remove a gas or gases from the plurality of gases, allowing the
    remaining gas or gases to pass out of contact with the liquid.  The liquid
    with gas entrained therein then is treated to remove the sorbed gas.  The
    removal may be for regenerating the liquid for further use or may be for
    obtaining the sorbed gas.  In addition, this area takes processes in which
    the degasification of a liquid occurs first and the removed gas is
    subjected to a liquid contacting step (see subclass 158).

    (2)     Note.  In order for a patent to be placed here, the gas sorbed by a
    liquid from a plurality of gases and removed from the liquid must be
    normally gaseous at a temperature of 0oC and a pressure of 760 mm Hg (e.g.,
    hydrogen sulfide (H2S), carbon monoxide (CO), carbon dioxide (CO2), ethane
    (C2H6), ammonia (NH3), etc.).  If, however, a constituent is at a
    temperature above its boiling temperature for a particular pressure, then
    the constituent is presumed to be a gas and the patent is placed here when
    the constituent is sorbed as a gas by a liquid, remains in gaseous phase in
    the liquid, and is removed from the liquid as a gas.  The C4 hydrocarbons,
    which have boiling points above and below a temperature of 0oC, are
    classified according to their individual boiling points in subclasses 149+
    (e.g., butane with a boiling point of -0.5oC at 760 mm Hg pressure is a gas
    at a temperature of 0oC and 760 mm Hg pressure; whereas 1,2-butadiene with
    a boiling point of 10.8oC at 760 mm Hg pressure is a liquid at a
    temperature of 0oC and 760 mm Hg pressure).  This handling of the C4
    hydrocarbons is in contrast to that of Class 203, in which all of the C4
    hydrocarbons are arbitrarily classified as liquids at a temperature of 0oC
    and 760 mm Hg pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for processes of degasification of a liquid by use of sound waves.

    46,     for processes of degasification of a liquid by selective diffusion
    of gases through a substantially solid barrier.

    188+    and 206+, for removal of a liquid from the contact liquid.

    241+,   for processes of degasification of a liquid without liquid
    contacting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 155+ for degasifying means
    for liquid.


CLS 95/157
TXT Defoaming:
    Process under subclass 156 in which a frothy or sudslike dispersion that
    was formed during the liquid-gas contact or was present before the
    liquid-gas contact is resolved or broken into separate fluid phases.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155     and 242, for other processes of defoaming a liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 176+ for defoaming apparatus.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 321 for processes of breaking foam or
    inhibiting foam formation by a chemical agent.  See section III of this
    class for the line between these two classes.


CLS 95/158
TXT Degasification step occurs first, with removed gas subsequently contacted
    by liquid:Process under subclass 156 in which a liquid with gas entrained
    therein is degassed and the removed gas is then contacted with a liquid.


CLS 95/159
TXT By stripping with gas:
    Process under subclass 156 in which the gas is removed from the contact
    liquid by passing a gas through or in contact with the contact liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83      and 84, for processes of eluting or displacing separated
    constituents from a chromatographic column comprising a liquid solvent on a
    solid base.

    191     and 207, for separation of liquid from contact liquid by stripping
    with gas.

    245+,   for plural successive liquid degassing treatments which include
    stripping with gas.

    263+,   for degasification of liquid by stripping with gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 202+ for degasifying means
    for liquid with gas contacting means.


CLS 95/160
TXT And reduction of pressure (e.g., flashing, etc.):
    Process under subclass 159 in which the pressure acting on the contact
    liquid is decreased.

    (1)     Note.  The pressure reduction may be used in a separate step in
    order to remove gas from the contact liquid in addition to the step of
    removing gas from the contact liquid by stripping with gas, or the pressure
    reduction may be used in order to aid the removal by stripping with gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172+,   for liquid contacting and degasification of liquid by reduction of
    pressure.

    247+,   for plural successive liquid degassing treatments which include
    reduction of pressure.

    266,    for degasification of liquid by reduction of pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 193+ for degasifying means
    for liquid of the pressure reducing type.


CLS 95/161
TXT And heating:
    Process under subclass 160 in which the contact liquid or a gas is heated.

    (1)     Note.  The heating may be used in a separate step in order to
    remove gas from the contact liquid in addition to another step of removing
    gas from the contact liquid, or the heating may be used in order to aid the
    removal by stripping with gas or by reduction of pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165+,   for liquid contacting and degasification of liquid by stripping
    with gas combined with heating.

    173+,   for liquid contacting and degasification of liquid by reduction of
    pressure combined with heating.

    178+,   for liquid contacting and degasification of liquid by heating.

    251+,   for plural successive liquid degassing treatments which include
    heating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclass 218 for heat exchange
    apparatus to degasify liquid.


CLS 95/162
TXT Steam is stripping gas:
    Process under subclass 161 in which the stripping gas is steam.


CLS 95/163
TXT Liquid recycled or reused:
    Process under subclass 160 in which (a) the contact liquid is recirculated
    for further contact with the fluid mixture or a portion thereof or (b) the
    contact liquid is used in another step of the process.


CLS 95/164
TXT Feed gas or constituent thereof is stripping gas:
    Process under subclass 160 in which the stripping gas is the gaseous fluid
    mixture or a portion thereof, before or after being treated or separated.


CLS 95/165
TXT And heating:
    Process under subclass 159 in which the contact liquid or a gas is heated.

    (1)     Note.  The heating may be used in a separate step in order to
    remove gas from the liquid in addition to the step of removing gas from the
    liquid by stripping with gas, or the heating may be used in order to aid
    the removal by stripping with gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161+,   for liquid contacting and degasification of liquid by stripping
    with gas combined with reduction of pressure and heating.

    173+,   for liquid contacting and degasification of liquid by reduction of
    pressure combined with heating.

    178+,   for liquid contacting and degasification of liquid by heating.

    251+,   for plural successive liquid degassing treatments which include
    heating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclass 218 for heat exchange
    apparatus to degasify liquid.


CLS 95/166
TXT Liquid recycled or reused:
    Process under subclass 165 in which (a) the contact liquid is recirculated
    for further contact with the fluid mixture or a portion thereof or (b) the
    contact liquid is used in another step of the process.


CLS 95/167
TXT Vaporized component of contact liquid is stripping gas:
    Process under subclass 165 in which a constituent of the contact liquid is
    gasified and this constituent removes another gas from the contact liquid.


CLS 95/168
TXT Steam is stripping gas:
    Process under subclass 165 in which the stripping gas is steam.


CLS 95/169
TXT Liquid recycled or reused:
    Process under subclass 159 in which (a) the contact liquid is recirculated
    for further contact with the fluid mixture or a portion thereof or (b) the
    contact liquid is used in another step of the process.


CLS 95/170
TXT Air is stripping gas:
    Process under subclass 159 in which the stripping gas is air.


CLS 95/171
TXT Inert stripping gas:
    Process under subclass 159 in which the stripping gas is specified as being
    inert or is one of the following gases: helium (He), neon (Ne), argon (Ar),
    krypton (Kr), xenon (Xe), radon (Rn), nitrogen (N2), or carbon dioxide
    (CO2).


CLS 95/172
TXT By reduction of pressure (e.g., flashing, etc.):
    Process under subclass 156 in which the gas is removed from the contact
    liquid by decreasing the pressure acting on the contact liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160+,   for processes of liquid contacting and degasification of liquid by
    stripping with gas in which there is reduction of pressure.

    192     and 208, for separation of liquid from contact liquid by reduction
    of pressure.

    247+,   for plural successive liquid degassing treatments which include
    reduction of pressure.

    266,    for degasification of liquid by reduction of pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 193+ for degasifying means
    for liquid of the pressure reducing type.


CLS 95/173
TXT And heating:
    Process under subclass 172 in which the contact liquid or a gas is heated.

    (1)     Note.  The heating may be used in a separate step in order to
    remove gas from the liquid in addition to the step of removing gas from the
    liquid by reduction of pressure, or the heating may be used in order to aid
    the removal by reduction of pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161+,   for liquid contacting and degasification of liquid by stripping
    with gas combined with reduction of pressure and heating.

    165+,   for liquid contacting and degasification of liquid by stripping
    with gas combined with heating.

    178+,   for liquid contacting and degasification of liquid by heating.

    251+,   for plural successive liquid degassing treatments which include
    heating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclass 218 for heat exchange
    apparatus to degasify liquid.


CLS 95/174
TXT Liquid recycled or reused:
    Process under subclass 173 in which (a) the contact liquid is recirculated
    for further contact with the fluid mixture or a portion thereof or (b) the
    contact liquid is used in another step of the process.


CLS 95/175
TXT Vacuum applied:
    Process under subclass 172 in which the step of pressure reduction is
    accomplished by using a pressure below that of the atmosphere.


CLS 95/176
TXT Removed gas recycled:
    Process under subclass 172 in which the gas removed from the contact liquid
    is recirculated to the fluid mixture for further contact with liquid.


CLS 95/177
TXT Liquid recycled or reused:
    Process under subclass 172 in which (a) the contact liquid is recirculated
    for further contact with the fluid mixture or a portion thereof or (b) the
    contact liquid is used in another step of the process.


CLS 95/178
TXT By heating:
    Process under subclass 156 in which the gas is removed from the contact
    liquid by heating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161+,   for liquid contacting and degasification of liquid by stripping
    with gas combined with reduction of pressure and heating.

    165+,   for liquid contacting and degasification of liquid by stripping
    with gas combined with heating.

    173+,   for liquid contacting and degasification of liquid by reduction of
    pressure combined with heating.

    193     and 209, for separation of liquid from contact liquid by heating.

    251+,   for plural successive liquid degassing treatments which include
    heating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclass 218 for heat exchange
    apparatus to degasify liquid.


CLS 95/179
TXT Liquid recycled or reused:
    Process under subclass 178 in which (a) the contact liquid is recirculated
    for further contact with the fluid mixture or a portion thereof or (b) the
    contact liquid is used in another step of the process.


CLS 95/180
TXT Liquid cooling step before being recycled:
    Process under subclass 179 in which there is a step of lowering the
    temperature of the liquid before it is recycled.


CLS 95/181
TXT Sulfur compound removed:
    Process under subclass 178 in which a gaseous sulfur (S) compound is sorbed
    by the contact liquid and then is removed from the contact liquid by
    heating.


CLS 95/182
TXT Halogen compound removed:
    Process under subclass 178 in which a gaseous halogen compound (i.e., a
    compound with fluorine (F), chlorine (Cl), bromine (Br), iodine (I),
    astatine (At)) is sorbed by the contact liquid and then is removed from the
    contact liquid by heating.


CLS 95/183
TXT Carbon dioxide removed:
    Process under subclass 178 in which carbon dioxide (CO2) is sorbed by the
    contact liquid and then is removed from the contact liquid by heating.


CLS 95/184
TXT Organic compound removed:
    Process under subclass 178 in which a gaseous organic compound is sorbed by
    the contact liquid and then is removed from the contact liquid by heating.


CLS 95/185
TXT By liquid flow modifying or mechanical agitating:
    Process under subclass 156 in which the gas is removed from the contact
    liquid by mixing, stirring, or turbulating by contact with a solid member
    or the flow path of the contact liquid is altered.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    260+,   for degasifying liquid by liquid flow modifying or mechanical
    agitating.


CLS 95/186
TXT Liquid recycled or reused:
    Process under subclass 156 in which (a) the contact liquid is recirculated
    for further contact with the fluid mixture or a portion thereof or (b) the
    contact liquid is used in another step of the process.


CLS 95/187
TXT And recycle or reuse of contact liquid for further contact:
    Process under subclass 149 in which (a) the contact liquid is recirculated
    for further contact with the fluid mixture or a portion thereof or (b) the
    contact liquid is used in another step of the process for further contact
    with the fluid mixture or a portion thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The recycled or reused contact liquid may have been
    regenerated or it may be a mixture with the removed constituent.


CLS 95/188
TXT After separation of liquid from contact liquid:
    Process under subclass 187 in which the contact liquid is recycled or
    reused after another liquid constituent is removed from the contact liquid.

    (1)     Note.  The liquid removed from the contact liquid may have been
    originally present as liquid particles entrained in a gas, or the liquid
    removed may have been originally present as vapors as part of a plurality
    of gases, in which case the vapors would have condensed to liquid because
    of the liquid contact.

    (2)     Note.  In order for a patent to be placed here, the vapors sorbed
    by a liquid from a plurality of gases and removed from the liquid must be
    normally liquid at a temperature of 0oC and a pressure of 760 mm Hg and the
    vapors must have condensed to liquid (e.g., methanol (CH3OH), ethanol
    (C2H5OH), etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156+,   for liquid contact and removal of a gas from a liquid.

    206+,   for separation of a liquid constituent from the contact liquid
    without recycling or reusing the contact liquid.


CLS 95/189
TXT And separation of solid from contact liquid:
    Process under subclass 188 in which a solid is removed from the contact
    liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195     and 205, for other processes of separating a solid from the contact
    liquid.


CLS 95/190
TXT By liquid-liquid extraction or formation of azeotrope:
    Process under subclass 188 in which (a) a liquid extractant is mixed with
    the contact liquid in order to cause separation of a solute from the
    contact liquid and then the liquid extractant with the removed solute is
    separated from the contact liquid or (b) a compound that forms a mixture of
    constant boiling point with a solute in the contact liquid is added to the
    contact liquid and then the azeotropic mixture is separated from the
    contact liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 634 for processes, per
    se, in which a dissolved or suspended constituent of a liquid is
    preferentially dissolved or dispersed into a second liquid.


CLS 95/191
TXT By stripping with gas:
    Process under subclass 188 in which the liquid constituent is removed from
    the contact liquid by passing a gas through or in contact with the contact
    liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159+,   for liquid contacting and degasification of liquid by stripping
    with gas.

    207,    for liquid contacting and separation of a liquid constituent from
    the contact liquid by stripping with gas without recycle or reuse of the
    contact liquid.


CLS 95/192
TXT By reduction of pressure (e.g., flashing, etc.):
    Process under subclass 188 in which the liquid constituent is removed from
    the contact liquid by decreasing the pressure acting on the contact liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172+,   for liquid contacting and degasification of liquid by reduction of
    pressure.

    208,    for liquid contacting and separation of a liquid constituent from
    the contact liquid by reduction of pressure without recycle or reuse of the
    contact liquid.


CLS 95/193
TXT By heating (e.g., fractional distillation, etc.):
    Process under subclass 188 in which the liquid constituent is removed from
    the contact liquid by heating the contact liquid (e.g., fractional
    distillation, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    178+,   for liquid contacting and degasification of liquid by heating.

    209,    for liquid contacting and separation of a liquid constituent from
    the contact liquid by heating without recycle or reuse of the contact
    liquid.


CLS 95/194
TXT Indirect heat exchange:
    Process under subclass 193 in which heat is transferred through a wall.


CLS 95/195
TXT After separation of solid from contact liquid:
    Process under subclass 187 in which the contact liquid is recycled or
    reused after a solid is removed from the contact liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189     and 205, for other processes of separating a solid from the contact
    liquid.


CLS 95/196
TXT By filtration:
    Process under subclass 195 in which the contact liquid containing the solid
    to be removed is passed through a foraminous or porous mass which separates
    the solid from the liquid by entrapment and retention while permitting the
    liquid to pass through.


CLS 95/197
TXT By gravity separation:
    Process under subclass 195 in which the solid settles to the bottom of a
    mass of the contact liquid in a settling tank or the solid rises to the top
    of a mass of the contact liquid in a flotation tank due to the difference
    in density of the solid and the contact liquid, with the layer of the
    contact liquid containing the solid being separated from the remainder of
    the mass of contact liquid.


CLS 95/198
TXT And deflection to remove liquid particles from gas:
    Process under subclass 187 in which the gas and liquid after contact
    impinge on a surface to effect an abrupt change in direction of the
    gas-liquid mixture or to guide the gas-liquid mixture to cause the liquid
    to drop out and remain behind while the gas flows on.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216+,   for other processes of liquid contacting and deflection.

    267+,   for deflection without liquid contacting.


CLS 95/199
TXT Liquid contact in plural serial stages:
    Process under subclass 187 in which liquid and gaseous fluid mixture
    contact is effected in more than one step or zone in series.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223+,   for liquid contact in plural serial stages without recycle or reuse
    of the contact liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclass 223 for gas and liquid contact apparatus
    including two or more diverse liquid applying steps.


CLS 95/200
TXT Removal of solid or liquid particles from gas:
    Process under subclass 199 in which solid or liquid particles are removed
    from a gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202,    for removal of solid or liquid particles from gas in a single stage.


CLS 95/201
TXT Reduction of pressure during liquid contact:
    Process under subclass 199 in which pressure is decreased during the liquid
    contact.


CLS 95/202
TXT Removal of solid or liquid particles from gas:
    Process under subclass 187 in which solid or liquid particles are removed
    from a gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200,    for removal of solid or liquid particles from gas in plural serial
    stages.


CLS 95/203
TXT Reduction of pressure:
    Process under subclass 187 in which pressure is decreased.


CLS 95/204
TXT And recycle of gas for further contact:
    Process under subclass 149 in which the gaseous fluid mixture or a
    separated gaseous constituent is recirculated for further contact with the
    liquid.


CLS 95/205
TXT And separation of solid from contact liquid:
    Process under subclass 149 in which a solid is removed from the contact
    liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189     and 195, for other processes of separating a solid from the contact
    liquid.


CLS 95/206
TXT And separation of liquid from contact liquid:
    Process under subclass 149 in which a liquid constituent is removed from
    the contact liquid.

    (1)     Note.  The liquid removed from the contact liquid may have been
    originally present as liquid particles entrained in a gas, or the liquid
    removed may have been originally present as vapors as part of a plurality
    of gases, in which case the vapors would have condensed to liquid because
    of the liquid contact.

    (2)     Note.  In order for a patent to be placed here, the vapors sorbed
    by a liquid from a plurality of gases and removed from the liquid must be
    normally liquid at a temperature of 0oC and a pressure of 760 mm Hg and the
    vapors must have condensed to liquid (e.g., methanol (CH3OH), ethanol
    (C2H5OH), etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156+,   for liquid contact and removal of a gas from a liquid.

    188+,   for separation of a liquid constituent from the contact liquid with
    recycling or reusing the contact liquid.


CLS 95/207
TXT By stripping with gas:
    Process under subclass 206 in which the liquid constituent is removed from
    the contact liquid by passing a gas through or in contact with the contact
    liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159+,   for liquid contacting and degasification of liquid by stripping
    with gas.

    191,    for liquid contacting and separation of a liquid constituent from
    the contact liquid by stripping with gas with recycle or reuse of the
    contact liquid.


CLS 95/208
TXT By reduction of pressure (e.g., flashing, etc.):
    Process under subclass 206 in which the liquid constituent is removed from
    the contact liquid by decreasing the pressure acting on the contact liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172+,   for liquid contacting and degasification of liquid by reduction of
    pressure.

    192,    for liquid contacting and separation of a liquid constituent from
    the contact liquid by reduction of pressure with recycle or reuse of the
    contact liquid.


CLS 95/209
TXT By heating (e.g., fractional distillation, etc.):
    Process under subclass 206 in which the liquid constituent is removed from
    the contact liquid by heating the contact liquid (e.g., fractional
    distillation, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    178+,   for liquid contacting and degasification of liquid by heating.

    193+,   for liquid contacting and separation of a liquid constituent from
    the contact liquid by heating with recycle or reuse of the contact liquid.


CLS 95/210
TXT On surface extending mass:
    Process under subclass 149 in which the contact between the gaseous fluid
    mixture and the liquid takes place on a material which serves to increase
    the area for contact.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclass 233 for gas separating   apparatus   in
    which   gas-liquid contact takes place on a porous or particulate solids
    medium.


CLS 95/211
TXT Particulate media, fibrous media, or packing elements:
    Process under subclass 210 in which the surface extending mass consists of
    (a) a plurality of small, discrete solids (e.g., particulate bed, etc.),
    (b) a mass of slender, elongated material (e.g., a mass of wicklike or
    threadlike material, etc.), or (c) a mass of randomly oriented or
    positioned loose pieces of solid material possessing specific advantages of
    surface availability for liquid-gas contacting (e.g., Raschig rings, Berl
    saddles, Intalox saddles, Pall rings, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 94+ for apparatus
    specially adapted to produce an intimate contact between gases and liquids
    including a stationary porous mass of material (not a sheet).  See also
    digest 72 for packing elements.


CLS 95/212
TXT And cleaning of particulate media, fibrous media, or packing
    elements:Process under subclass 211 in which the liquid or the separated
    constituent is removed from the particulate media, fibrous media, or
    packing elements.


CLS 95/213
TXT Apertured partition member:
    Process under subclass 210 in which the surface extending mass has one or
    more openings through which the gaseous fluid mixture or liquid passes in
    order to increase the contact of the gas with the liquid (e.g., use of
    perforated plates, bubble cap trays, mesh screens, parallel wires, parallel
    bars, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 108+ for apparatus
    specially adapted to produce an intimate contact between gases and liquids
    including stationary baffles over which the liquids flow in contact with
    gases. See particularly subclass 113 for perforated baffles and subclass
    114.2 for apparatus utilizing bubble caps.


CLS 95/214
TXT And filtration of gas:
    Process under subclass 149 in which a gas and solid or liquid particles
    entrained therein is passed through a foraminous or porous mass which
    separates the solid or liquid particles from the gas by entrapment and
    retention while permitting the gaseous or vaporous constituents to pass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273+,   for filtering without liquid contact.

    281,    for filtering with cleaning of the filter by use of a liquid.


CLS 95/215
TXT Including movement of filter:
    Process under subclass 214 in which the filter is not stationary during
    filtration.


CLS 95/216
TXT And deflection:
    Process under subclass 149 in which the gaseous fluid mixture, liquid, or
    the gaseous fluid mixture and liquid after contact (a) are impinged on a
    solid or liquid mass and the direction of flow is changed because of the
    impinging on the solid or liquid mass or (b) are contacted by a gas stream
    to effect an abrupt change in direction of flow.

    (1)     Note.  The deflection may or may not cause separation of a
    constituent from the gaseous fluid mixture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198,    for other processes of liquid contacting and deflection with
    recycle or reuse of the contact liquid.

    267+,   for separation of a constituent from a gas by deflection.


CLS 95/217
TXT Liquid is in form of curtain:
    Process under subclass 216 in which the liquid falls through open space
    freely in a thin stream for gas-liquid contact.


CLS 95/218
TXT Including movement of deflector:
    Process under subclass 216 in which the deflection is caused by a solid
    mass that is not stationary during deflection.


CLS 95/219
TXT Including rotation of liquid, gaseous fluid mixture, or gas-liquid mixture
    through 360 degrees in stationary apparatus:Process under subclass 216 in
    which the liquid, gaseous fluid mixture, or gas-liquid mixture rotates or
    spins around an axis through 360o in an apparatus that does not move to
    cause the rotating or spinning.


CLS 95/220
TXT With heating or cooling:
    Process under subclass 219 in which the gaseous fluid mixture, a separated
    constituent, the contact liquid, or apparatus involved in the process is
    heated or cooled.


CLS 95/221
TXT Deflection in plural serial stages:
    Process under subclass 216 in which the deflection of the gaseous fluid
    mixture, liquid, or the gaseous fluid mixture and liquid after contact
    occurs in more than one step or zone in series.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223+,   for liquid contact in plural serial stages without deflection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclass 223 for gas and liquid contact apparatus
    including two or more diverse liquid applying means.


CLS 95/222
TXT Using diverse type deflectors:
    Process under subclass 221 in which two or more discrete deflectors are
    arranged one downstream of the other, at least two of the deflectors being
    of differing types.


CLS 95/223
TXT In plural serial stages:
    Process under subclass 149 in which the fluid mixture is contacted with a
    liquid in more than one step or zone in series.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199+,   for liquid contact in plural serial stages with recycle or reuse of
    contact liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclass 223 for gas and liquid contact apparatus
    including two or more diverse liquid applying means.


CLS 95/224
TXT Liquid sprays:
    Process under subclass 223 in which the fluid mixture is treated in each
    zone or stage with liquid which has been finely dispersed.


CLS 95/225
TXT With heating or cooling:
    Process under subclass 224 in which the fluid mixture, a separated
    constituent, the contact liquid, or apparatus involved in the process is
    heated or cooled.


CLS 95/226
TXT Gaseous fluid mixture discharged against or beneath surface of liquid
    body:Process under subclass 149 in which the gaseous fluid mixture to be
    treated (a) impinges onto the top layer of a liquid contained in a
    reservoir or (b) is discharged beneath the top layer of a liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 244+ for gas and liquid contact
    apparatus in which gas flow contacts a liquid bath.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 121.1+ for devices
    specially adapted to produce an intimate contact between gases and liquids
    by means that discharges gas beneath the surface of the liquid.


CLS 95/227
TXT With heating:
    Process under subclass 149 in which the fluid mixture, a separated
    constituent, the contact liquid, or apparatus involved in the process is
    heated.


CLS 95/228
TXT With cooling:
    Process under subclass 149 in which the fluid mixture, a separated
    constituent, the contact liquid, or apparatus involved in the process is
    cooled.


CLS 95/229
TXT Cooling before liquid contacting:
    Process under subclass 228 in which the contact with a liquid occurs after
    the cooling.


CLS 95/230
TXT Inorganic gas, liquid particle, or solid particle sorbed (e.g., vapor,
    mist, dust, etc.):Process under subclass 149 in which an inorganic gas,
    liquid particle, or solid particle is separated from the plurality of gases
    or the gas with entrained liquid or solid particles by the contact with a
    liquid.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of classification in this area, "inorganic"
    compounds or elements are those that would fall within the definition of
    Class 423.  For example, the cyanides (CN joined only to a metal or to
    hydrogen) and the carbon oxides are found in the indented subclasses.


CLS 95/231
TXT Water sorbed:
    Process under subclass 230 in which water is separated.


CLS 95/232
TXT Nitrogen or nitrogen containing compound sorbed:
    Process under subclass 230 in which nitrogen (N2) or a nitrogen containing
    compound is separated.


CLS 95/233
TXT Halogen or halogen containing compound sorbed:
    Process under subclass 230 in which a halogen (i.e., fluorine (F), chlorine
    (Cl), bromine (Br), iodine (I), astatine (At)) or a halogen containing
    compound is separated.


CLS 95/234
TXT Metal or metal containing compound sorbed:
    Process under subclass 230 in which a metal or a metal containing compound
    is separated.


CLS 95/235
TXT Sulfur or sulfur containing compound sorbed:
    Process under subclass 230 in which sulfur (S) or a sulfur containing
    compound is separated.


CLS 95/236
TXT Carbon dioxide sorbed:
    Process under subclass 230 in which carbon dioxide (CO2) is separated.


CLS 95/237
TXT Organic gas, liquid particle, or solid particle sorbed (e.g., vapor, mist,
    dust, etc.):Process under subclass 149 in which an organic gas, liquid
    particle, or solid particle is separated from the plurality of gases or the
    gas with entrained liquid or solid particles by the contact with a liquid.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of classification in this area, "organic"
    compounds are those that would fall within the definitions of Class 260.


CLS 95/238
TXT Alkyne sorbed (e.g., acetylene, etc.):
    Process under subclass 237 in which an alkyne (i.e., alkine) is separated
    (e.g., acetylene, etc.).


CLS 95/239
TXT Cyclic compound sorbed:
    Process under subclass 237 in which a cyclic compound is separated.


CLS 95/240
TXT Alkene sorbed:
    Process under subclass 237 in which an alkene (i.e., olefin) is separated.


CLS 95/241
TXT DEGASIFICATION OF LIQUID:
    Process under the class definition in which a gas is removed from a liquid.

    (1)     Note.  In order for a patent to be placed here, the gas removed
    from the liquid must be normally gaseous at a temperature of 0oC and a
    pressure of 760 mm Hg (e.g., hydrogen sulfide (H2S), carbon monoxide (CO),
    carbon dioxide (CO2), ethane (C2H6), ammonia (NH3), etc.).  If, however, a
    constituent is at a temperature above its boiling temperature for a
    particular pressure, then the constituent is presumed to be a gas, and a
    patent to a process for removing the constituent will be placed here when
    the constituent is initially present in gaseous phase in the liquid and is
    removed from the liquid as a gas.

    (2)     Note.  The removal of a volatile organic compound (e.g., ethanol
    (C2H5OH), gasoline, etc.) from a liquid is not taken to be degasification
    of a liquid for Class 95 when the volatile organic compound is initially
    present as a liquid mixed with another liquid.  The removal of a volatile
    organic compound from a liquid may be found in Class 210 for liquid
    purification or separation or Class 203 for separatory distillation
    processes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for processes of degasification of a liquid by use of sound waves.

    46,     for processes of degasification of a liquid by selective diffusion
    of gases through a substantially solid barrier.

    90+,    for processes of degasification of a liquid by use of a solid
    sorbent.

    156+,   for processes of contacting a gas with a liquid and degasification
    of the contact liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 155+ for degasifying means
    for liquid.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, for processes for separating
    a liquid mixture by vaporizing and condensing at least a portion thereof to
    isolate in the condensed liquid (distillate) or in the unvaporized portion
    (residue) a comparatively pure compound that was present as such in the
    original mixture.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, for processes of removing a
    volatile organic compound from a liquid wherein the volatile organic
    compound is initially present as a liquid mixed with another liquid.


CLS 95/242
TXT Defoaming:
    Process under subclass 241 in which a frothy or sudslike dispersion is
    resolved or broken into separate fluid phases.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155     and 157, for other processes of defoaming a liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 176+ for defoaming apparatus.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 321 for processes of breaking foam or
    inhibiting foam formation by a chemical agent.  See section III of this
    class for the line between these two classes.


CLS 95/243
TXT Plural successive degassing treatments:
    Process under subclass 241 in which the liquid is subjected to more than
    one degasifying step, each step occurring at a different time than another
    step.


CLS 95/244
TXT Boiler feed water degassing:
    Process under subclass 243 in which the liquid that is degasified is the
    feed going to a steam generator, whether raw water or condensed steam.


CLS 95/245
TXT By stripping with gas:
    Process under subclass 243 in which in at least one of the degasifying
    steps the gas is removed from the liquid by passing a gas through or in
    contact with the liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83      and 84, for processes of eluting or displacing separated
    constituents from a chromatographic column comprising a liquid solvent on a
    solid base.

    159+,   for contacting a gas with a liquid and degasifying the contact
    liquid by stripping with gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 202+ for degasifying means
    for liquid with gas contacting means.


CLS 95/246
TXT And reduction of pressure (e.g., flashing, etc.):
    Process under subclass 245 in which the pressure acting on the liquid is
    decreased.

    (1)     Note.  The pressure reduction may be used in a separate step in
    order to remove gas from the liquid in addition to the step of removing gas
    from the liquid by stripping with gas, or the pressure reduction may be
    used in order to aid the removal by stripping with gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160+,   for contacting a gas with a liquid and degasifying the contact
    liquid by stripping with gas and reduction of pressure.

    247+    and 266, for degasification of liquid by reduction of pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 193+ for degasifying means
    for liquid of the pressure reducing type.


CLS 95/247
TXT By reduction of pressure (e.g., flashing, etc.):
    Process under subclass 243 in which in at least one of the degasifying
    steps the gas is removed from the liquid by decreasing the pressure acting
    on the liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172+,   for contacting a gas with a liquid and degasifying the contact
    liquid by reduction of pressure.

    266,    for degasification of liquid by reduction of pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 193+ for degasifying means
    for liquid of the pressure reducing type.


CLS 95/248
TXT And liquid flow modifying or mechanical agitating:
    Process under subclass 247 in which the liquid is mixed, stirred, or
    turbulated by contact with a solid member or the flow path of the contact
    liquid is altered.

    (1)     Note.  The liquid flow modifying or mechanical agitating may be
    used in a separate step in order to remove gas from the liquid in addition
    to the step of removing gas from the liquid by reduction of pressure, or
    the liquid flow modifying or mechanical agitating may be used in order to
    aid the removal by reduction of pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185,    for contacting a gas with a liquid and degasifying the contact
    liquid by liquid flow modifying or mechanical agitating.

    260+,   for degasifying liquid by liquid flow modifying or mechanical
    agitating.


CLS 95/249
TXT And heating:
    Process under subclass 248 in which the liquid or the gas is heated.

    (1)     Note.  The heating may be used in a separate step in order to
    remove gas from the liquid in addition to the step of removing gas from the
    liquid by reduction of pressure or liquid flow modifying, or the heating
    may be used in order to aid the removal by reduction of pressure or liquid
    flow modifying.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156+,   for liquid contacting and degasification of the contact liquid by
    heating.

    251+,   for degasifying liquid by heating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclass 218 for heat exchange
    apparatus to degasify liquid.


CLS 95/250
TXT And heating:
    Process under subclass 247 in which the liquid or the gas is heated.

    (1)     Note.  The heating may be used in a separate step in order to
    remove gas from the liquid in addition to the step of removing gas from the
    liquid by reduction of pressure, or the heating may be used in order to aid
    the removal by reduction of pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156+,   for liquid contacting and degasification of the contact liquid by
    heating.

    251+,   for degasifying liquid by heating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclass 218 for heat exchange
    apparatus to degasify liquid.


CLS 95/251
TXT By heating:
    Process under subclass 243 in which in at least one of the degasifying
    steps the gas is removed from the liquid by heating the liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156+,   for liquid contacting and degasification of the contact liquid by
    heating.

    247+,   for degasifying liquid by reduction of pressure and heating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclass 218 for heat exchange
    apparatus to degasify liquid.


CLS 95/252
TXT And liquid flow modifying or mechanical agitating:
    Process under subclass 251 in which the liquid is mixed, stirred, or
    turbulated by contact with a solid member or the flow path of the contact
    liquid is altered.

    (1)     Note.  The liquid flow modifying or mechanical agitating may be
    used in a separate step in order to remove gas from the liquid in addition
    to the step of removing gas from the liquid by heating, or the liquid flow
    modifying or mechanical agitating may be used in order to aid the removal
    by heating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185,    for contacting a gas with a liquid and degasifying the contact
    liquid by liquid flow modifying or mechanical agitating.

    260+,   for degasifying liquid by liquid flow modifying or mechanical
    agitating.


CLS 95/253
TXT Emulsion breaking or multiple liquid separating:
    Process under subclass 241 in which two liquids are separated, one of which
    (a) is originally finely dispersed in the other, as in an emulsion, or (b)
    is mixed in and flows with the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188+    and 206+, for contacting a gas with a liquid and separation of the
    liquid from the contact liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclass 421 for gas separation apparatus which has
    means to separate a liquid from a mixture with one or more additional
    liquids.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 182+ for degasifying means
    for liquid which has means to separate a liquid from a mixture with one or
    more additional liquids.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, for liquid purification or
    separation, and see particularly subclass 708 for emulsion breaking.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 319+ for processes for resolving colloids
    or emulsions by a chemical agent.


CLS 95/254
TXT And subsequent handling of evolved gas, stripping gas, or residue liquid:

    Process under subclass 241 in which the removed gas, a stripping gas, or
    the remaining liquid is further treated or used in some manner involving
    more than mere removal from the system.


CLS 95/255
TXT Evolved gas removed by sweep gas:

    Process under subclass 254 in which a purge gas is used to carry off the
    removed gas.


CLS 95/256
TXT For indirect heat exchange:

    Process under subclass 254 in which the removed gas, the stripping gas, or
    the remaining liquid is used to transfer heat to or to accept heat from any
    material through a solid wall.


CLS 95/257
TXT Gas condensed:

    Process under subclass 256 in which the removed gas or the stripping gas is
    the heat exchange medium and is condensed to liquid.


CLS 95/258
TXT Gas recycled or further separated:

    Process under subclass 254 in which (a) the removed gas is used to further
    strip gas from the liquid, (b) the stripping gas is recovered and is used
    for further stripping of gas from the liquid, or (c) the gas is subjected
    to an additional separating treatment.


CLS 95/259
TXT Liquid further separated:

    Process under subclass 254 in which the remaining liquid is subjected to an
    additional separating treatment.


CLS 95/260
TXT By liquid flow modifying or mechanical agitating:

    Process under subclass 241 in which the gas is removed from the liquid by
    mixing, stirring, or turbulating by contact with a solid member or the flow
    path of the liquid is altered.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185,    for contacting a gas with a liquid and degasifying the contact
    liquid by liquid flow modifying or mechanical agitating.

    248+            and 252, for plural successive liquid degassing treatments
    which include liquid flow modifying.


CLS 95/261
TXT Centrifugal force:

    Process under subclass 260 in which the gas is removed from the liquid by
    the effect of centrifugal action which causes the liquid with gas entrained
    therein to assume a rapid arcuate or circular movement.


CLS 95/262
TXT Impinging on baffle:

    Process under subclass 260 in which the gas is removed from the liquid by
    causing the liquid with gas entrained therein to contact a solid surface in
    the flow path of the process in order to redirect or alter the flow path
    and to cause separation of the gas from the liquid.


CLS 95/263
TXT By stripping with gas:

    Process under subclass 241 in which the gas is removed from the liquid by
    passing a gas through or in contact with the liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83      and 84, for processes of eluting or displacing separated
    constituents from a chromatographic column comprising a liquid solvent on a
    solid base.

    159+,   for liquid contacting and degasification of the contact liquid by
    stripping with gas.

    245+,   for plural successive liquid degassing treatments which include
    stripping with a gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 202+ for degasifying means
    for liquid with gas contacting means.


CLS 95/264
TXT Steam is stripping gas:

    Process under subclass 263 in which the stripping gas is steam.


CLS 95/265
TXT Nitrogen is stripping gas:

    Process under subclass 263 in which the stripping gas is nitrogen (N2).


CLS 95/266
TXT By reduction of pressure (e.g., flashing, etc.):
    Process under subclass 241 in which the gas is removed from the liquid by
    decreasing the pressure acting on the liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160+,   for processes of liquid contacting and degasification of liquid by
    stripping with gas in which there is reduction of pressure.

    172+,   for liquid contacting and degasification of liquid by reduction of
    pressure.

    247+,   for plural successive liquid degassing treatments which include
    reduction of pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 193+ for degasifying means
    for liquid of the pressure reducing type.


CLS 95/267
TXT DEFLECTING:
    Process under the class definition in which solid or liquid particles are
    removed from a gas by causing the gas and solid or liquid particles
    entrained therein (a) to contact a solid surface to effect an abrupt change
    in direction of the gas which (i) causes the solid or liquid particles to
    drop out and remain behind while the gas flows on or (ii) causes the solid
    or liquid particles to move to the outer periphery of a rotating gas stream
    in a concentrated layer to permit such layer to be separated from the gas
    with fewer or no entrained particles or (b) to contact a gas stream to
    effect an abrupt change in direction of the gas which causes the solid or
    liquid particles to drop out and remain behind while the gas flows on.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31+,    for processes of separating a plurality of gases into constituent
    parts by making use of differences in molecular velocity, density, or
    momentum of gases.

    198,    for processes of contacting a gas with a liquid and deflection to
    remove liquid from gas with recycle of contact liquid.

    216+,   for processes of contacting a gas with a liquid and deflection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 434+ for deflectors.


CLS 95/268
TXT And filtering:
    Process under subclass 267 in which a gas and solid or liquid particles
    entrained therein is passed through a foraminous or porous mass which
    separates the solid or liquid particles from the gas by entrapment and
    retention while permitting the gaseous or vaporous constituents to pass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273+,   for filtering without deflection.


CLS 95/269
TXT Centrifugal force:
    Process under subclass 267 in which the solid or liquid particles are
    removed from the gas by the effect of centrifugal action causing the gas
    and the solid or liquid particles entrained therein to assume a rapid
    arcuate or circular movement, with this movement causing the constituents
    of the mixture to separate into more or less distinct layers, depending
    upon the density of the constituents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34+,    for processes of separating a plurality of gases into constituent
    parts by making use of centrifugal force.


CLS 95/270
TXT Created by rotating equipment:
    Process under subclass 269 in which the centrifugal force is caused by a
    rotating element moving around an axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     for processes of separating a plurality of gases into constituent
    parts by making use of centrifugal force in rotating equipment.


CLS 95/271
TXT Tangential gas inflow (e.g., cyclone, etc.):
    Process under subclass 269 in which the gas enters deflecting apparatus in
    a path other than one that intersects or is parallel to the longitudinal
    axis of the apparatus.


CLS 95/272
TXT Tortuous flow path:
    Process under subclass 267 in which the gas passes through an apparatus in
    a path that is repeatedly turned or bent.


CLS 95/273
TXT FILTERING:
    Process under the class definition in which a gas and solid or liquid
    particles entrained therein are passed through a foraminous or porous mass
    which separates the solid or liquid particles from the gas by entrapment
    and retention while permitting the gaseous or vaporous constituents to pass
    through; and subcombinations of gas filtration processes that do not result
    in separation (e.g., cleaning of a filter, etc.) when the subcombinations
    are not provided for elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  A filter (particulate solids or other) has no "chemical"
    affinity for a constituent of a fluid mixture.  The separation in the case
    of a filter depends on a mechanical entrapment of solid or liquid particles
    because of their relatively large size compared with the interstices or
    spaces between individual elements of the filter.  The retained particles
    can be removed by brushing, wiping, shaking, or similar mechanical action.

            A solid sorbent is a solid material which separates a constituent
    (e.g., a gas, vapor, etc.) from a fluid mixture containing such
    constituents in a "quasi-chemical" manner.  The action in most instances is
    that of selective retention (i.e., the sorbent removes only the part of the
    fluid mixture for which it has the greatest affinity).  The retained
    constituent cannot be removed by shaking, brushing, or similar mechanical
    action, but generally can be removed by heating, pressure reduction, or use
    of a stripping or denuding fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    214+,   for processes of contacting a gas with a liquid and filtration of
    the gas.

    268,    for processes of filtering with deflection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, appropriate subclasses for filters.


CLS 95/274
TXT Through particulate solids:
    Process under subclass 273 in which the mass comprises a plurality of
    small, distinct, separate, nonfilamentous solids.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 512+ for filtering apparatus including
    means for securing or retaining a mass of particulate solids during use as
    a filter medium.


CLS 95/275
TXT Moving bed:
    Process under subclass 274 in which a bed of solid particles is constantly
    in motion during the separation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclass 474 for apparatus in which a bed of
    particulate solids is agitated or caused to be moved to different zones
    during normal use thereof.


CLS 95/276
TXT With cleaning of filter bed:
    Process under subclass 274 in which the separated solid or liquid particles
    are removed from the particulate solids.


CLS 95/277
TXT Moving filter:
    Process under subclass 273 in which the filter is in motion during the
    separation.


CLS 95/278
TXT With cleaning of filter:
    Process under subclass 273 in which the separated solid or liquid particles
    are removed from the filter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 301+ for cohesive filter cleaning means.


CLS 95/279
TXT By use of gas:
    Process under subclass 278 in which the separated solid or liquid particles
    are removed from the filter by contacting the filter with a gas, usually in
    a direction opposite that of the process fluid flow during separation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 302+ for cohesive filter cleaning means
    using pneumatic reverse flushing.


CLS 95/280
TXT Pulsed gas flow:
    Process under subclass 279 in which the pressure of the gas that contacts
    the filter in order to remove the separated solid or liquid particles
    increases and decreases periodically.


CLS 95/281
TXT By use of liquid:
    Process under subclass 278 in which the separated solid or liquid particles
    are removed from the filter by contacting the filter with a liquid, usually
    in a direction opposite that of the process fluid flow during separation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 242+ for cohesive filter cleaning means
    using liquid flushing.


CLS 95/282
TXT By mechanical manipulation:
    Process under subclass 278 in which the separated solid or liquid particles
    are removed from the filter by effecting filter motion or a relative
    movement among portions thereof whereby accumulations are removed or
    prevented.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 304+ for cohesive filter cleaning means
    using filter manipulation.


CLS 95/283
TXT With heating of filter:
    Process under subclass 273 in which the filter is heated.


CLS 95/284
TXT And reduction of pressure:
    Process under subclass 273 in which the pressure acting in the process is
    decreased.


CLS 95/285
TXT Coated or chemically treated filter:
    Process under subclass 273 in which the filter is coated or in which the
    filter is treated with a chemical before its use for filtration.


CLS 95/286
TXT Plural separate media:
    Process under subclass 273 in which at least two filters that are spaced
    apart are used.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 482+ for two or more spaced filters in a
    flow line or casing.


CLS 95/287
TXT In series:
    Process under subclass 286 in which the filters are placed one after the
    other in succession.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclass 485 for three or more serially spaced
    filters.


CLS 95/288
TXT HEAT EXCHANGING:
    Process under the class definition in which there is transfer of heat.

    (1)     Note.  The heat transfer steps must be part of a larger process
    containing subject matter for Class 95.  If the only separation involved is
    conducted by indirect heat transfer steps, then classification in Class 165
    is proper.  However, Class 95 does take cold wall-hot wall thermal
    diffusion and condensing a constituent of a gas to the solid state.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 267+ for apparatus including a
    separating medium for a gas mixture and a means for transferring heat to or
    from the gas.

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclasses for specialized refrigeration
    arrangements.  See the class definition of Class 95 for an amplification of
    the line.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for heat exchange apparatus
    or processes.  See the class definition of Class 95 for an amplification of
    the line.


CLS 95/289
TXT Cold wall-hot wall thermal diffusion:
    Process under subclass 288 in which the separation occurs by contacting the
    plurality of gases with plural surfaces of different temperatures to cause
    migration of gaseous constituents to one surface or another.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes specific refrigerating steps for
    maintaining the cooler wall at the lower temperature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclass 209 for corresponding apparatus.  Patents
    are not cross-referenced from Class 55, subclass 209 to this subclass based
    only on disclosure.  Therefore, relevant disclosures of gas separation
    processes may be found in the apparatus area.


CLS 95/290
TXT Condensing to solid:
    Process under subclass 288 in which the separated constituent is caused to
    pass to the solid state.


CLS 95/291
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:
    Process under the class definition not otherwise provided for above.

     CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS

    The following subclasses represent a collection of patents found elsewhere
    in the classification of this class, but merit isolation for aid in
    searching certain concepts which do not form appropriate bases for the
    placement of original patents.  These concepts are as given in the titles
    and definitions of the subclasses listed hereunder.

    The cross-reference patents contained in these collections may be of
    further assistance to the searcher, either as a starting point in searching
    this class or as an indication of further related fields of search inside
    or outside the class.  Thus, there is provided here a further path of
    access for retrieval of a limited number of types of disclosure.

    (1)     Note.  Disclosures are placed in these subclasses for their value
    as references and as leads to appropriate main or secondary fields of
    search, without regard to their original classification or their claimed
    subject matter.

    (2)     Note.  The disclosures found in the following subclasses are only
    examples of the indicated subject matter, and in no instance do they
    represent the entire extent of the prior art.


CLS 95/900
TXT SOLID SORBENT:
    Solid sorbent as provided for use in this class in which particular details
    are disclosed about the solid sorbent.

    (1)     Note.  Merely stating that a solid sorbent, activated carbon (C),
    or molecular sieve is used is insufficient to cause a patent to be placed
    here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor: Product or Process of
    Making, for solid sorbents.


CLS 95/901
TXT Activated carbon:
    Solid sorbent under subclass 900 as provided for use in this class in which
    particular details are disclosed about the activated carbon (C), which is a
    highly absorbent carbon obtained by heating granulated charcoal, obtained
    from vegetable matter, to exhaust contained gases.


CLS 95/902
TXT Molecular sieve:
    Solid sorbent under subclass 900 as provided for use in this class in which
    particular details are disclosed about the molecular sieve which is usually
    a natural or synthetic metal aluminum silicate.

    (1)     Note.  The separation is similar to filtration in that the
    interstices of the molecular sieve particle accept and retain only those
    molecules which are smaller in size than the interstices.


CLS 95/903
TXT Carbon:
    Solid sorbent under subclass 902 as provided for use in this class in which
    the molecular sieve material is carbon (C).


CLS 96/
TTL GAS SEPARATION:  APPARATUS

CLS 96/
TXT
    I.      STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    II.     GLOSSARY

    III.    CLASSIFICATION LINES AND SEARCH NOTES TO OTHER CLASSES

    IV.     INDEX TO CLASSES NOTED IN THE CLASS DEFINITION AND THE SUBCLASSES
    OF THIS CLASS

    I.      STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    This class provides for apparatus used in separation of a gas from a fluid
    mixture comprising (i) a gas and solid or liquid particles entrained
    therein, (ii) a liquid and gas entrained therein, or (iii) a plurality of
    gases.  As a general rule for this class, there must be a relationship of
    apparatus parts embracing: (a) an inlet for the fluid mixture to be
    treated, (b) a means effective to cause separation into constituent parts,
    and (c) an outlet for at least one constituent separate and distinct from
    an outlet for another constituent, which may be for removal of the
    separating media itself, or a single outlet used at different times to
    remove the separated constituents.  The gas separation apparatus for this
    class does not include means in which the separation is caused by a
    chemical reaction.

    The basic subject matter of this class is of a subcombination nature and
    may include only such ancillary apparatus (e.g., fluid handling means,
    etc.) as is necessary to perfect the gas separating function.  Significant
    inclusion in a claim of features beyond merely perfecting the gas
    separating function indicates classification in a more comprehensive class.
     Generally, however, the mere naming of an art device in a claim to a gas
    separator does not affect classification.  Thus, a claim to an air filter
    combined with a nominally included motor vehicle is proper for this class.

    (1)     Note.  The gas separation apparatus for this class generally
    involves means to use a magnetic field, to use an electrical field, to
    diffuse selectively, to sorb on a solid sorbent, to degasify a liquid, to
    contact a gas with a liquid, to filter, or to deflect, or involves other
    mechanical means.  See the class search note for Class 422, Chemical
    Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing, Preserving, or
    Sterilizing,  for the line concerning the means in which the gas separation
    is caused by a chemical reaction.

    (2)     Note.  This class also provides for the subcombination of the
    separating media, per se, when disclosed for gas separating.  However,
    solid sorbents are found in Class 502, Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support
    Therefor:  Product or Process of Making, and liquid sorbents are found in
    Class 252, Compositions.  See the search class notes in section III of this
    class.

    (3)     Note.  Devices which may inherently perform a gas separating
    function but are not found in this class include grids, gratings, grilles,
    woven fabrics, screens, and the like.  They will be found in a stock
    material class (e.g., Class 428, Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles,
    etc.).  However, devices of these types when positively stated as being for
    gas separation will be found in Class 96.

    (4)     Note.  This class also provides for apparatus in which the fluid
    mixture is treated to change its make-up, but no real separation occurs,
    provided no other suitable classification exists.  Accordingly, in this
    class are found "spark arresters," which merely change the size of
    particles entrained in a gas.  (See the class search note for Class 110,
    Furnaces, for the line concerning spark arresters when used on furnaces.)
    These devices are usually deflectors or screens and are included in this
    class because of their similarity to apparatus which actually separate the
    fluid mixture into constituent parts.  Similarly, agglomerators which by
    themselves may not separate constituents of a fluid mixture, but cause
    small particles therein to join together or coalesce to form larger
    particles, are in this class unless basis for other classification exists.

    II.     GLOSSARY

    DETECT
    The term "detect," which is used in many of the control subclasses, is used
    in both a quantitative and a qualitative sense.  This means that a definite
    measurement of a process variable is made (e.g., temperature, pressure,
    concentration, etc.) or that the presence of a particular event is
    determined (e.g., presence of sparking, change in liquid level determined
    by position of float, etc.).

    FILTER
    An article or mass of material made of closely spaced or intimately
    arranged intermeshed or unconnected fibers, elements, strands, or particles
    that collectively act as a barrier to physically retain at least one
    constituent of a fluid mixture on its surfaces or in the spaces between the
    fibers, elements, strands, or particles while permitting passage of the
    remaining constituents.

    A filter has no "chemical" affinity for a constituent of a fluid mixture.
    The retention of the constituent by the filter depends upon a mechanical
    entrapment of solid or liquid particles because of their relatively large
    size compared with the interstices or spaces between individual fibers,
    elements, strands, or particles.  The retained particles can be removed by
    brushing, wiping, shaking, or similar mechanical action.

    FLUID MIXTURE
    The phrase "fluid mixture" is used throughout the definitions to mean (a) a
    gas and solid or liquid particles entrained therein, (b) a liquid and gas
    entrained therein, or (c) a plurality of gases.

    GAS
    Matter of very low density and viscosity, relatively great expansion and
    contraction, with changes in pressure and temperature, that is readily
    diffusive, with a tendency to expand indefinitely, with molecules in free
    movement.  The term "gas" includes "vapor" (q.v.).

    GASEOUS FLUID MIXTURE
    The phrase "gaseous fluid mixture" is used throughout the definitions to
    mean (a) a gas and solid or liquid particles entrained therein or (b) a
    plurality of gases.

    LIQUID SORBENT
    A liquid capable of retaining part of a fluid mixture with which it is
    contacted.  The action in most cases is that of selective retention (i.e.,
    the sorbent removes only that part of the fluid mixture for which it has
    the greatest affinity).

    REGENERATION
    Restoration of the separatory material to the condition it was in before
    the separatory process.

    SOLID SORBENT
    A solid sorbent is a solid material which separates a constituent (e.g., a
    gas, vapor, etc.) from a fluid mixture containing such constituents in a
    "quasi-chemical" manner.  The action in most instances is that of selective
    retention (i.e., the sorbent removes only the part of the fluid mixture for
    which it has the greatest affinity).  The retained constituent cannot be
    removed by shaking, brushing, or similar mechanical action, but generally
    can be removed by heating, pressure reduction, or use of a stripping or
    denuding fluid.

    TREATMENT
    (a) With respect to the class subject matter, the term is restricted to
    reversible and nonchemical changes in physical characteristics of the fluid
    mixture or a separated constituent (e.g., heating, cooling, humidity
    control, agitating, pressure regulation, etc.).  (b) With respect to the
    media used to perform the gas separation or to a material used to condition
    the fluid mixture for separation, the term may include chemical
    preparation, reconditioning, or reaction.

    VAPOR
    The gaseous state of matter that is liquid or solid under a temperature of
    0oC and pressure of 760 mm Hg.

    III.    CLASSIFICATION LINES AND SEARCH NOTES TO OTHER CLASSES

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, appropriate subclasses
    for gas separation devices claimed in combination with a work contacting
    tool (e.g., a vacuum cleaner comprising a device contacting the work to be
    cleaned and an air filter, etc.) and subclasses 301+ for gas separating
    means associated with fixed position or installed cleaners.  For
    classification in Class 15, subclasses 301+, it is not necessary to claim
    the work contacting tool; it is sufficient to claim a building modification
    to accommodate the system parts or some special modification of the
    apparatus for its intended use, such modification going beyond mere ground
    support means.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses
    for generic apparatus for separating liquids from solids (i.e., drying) and
    the contacting of solids with either gases or vapors.  Class 96 takes the
    apparatus for the separation of a gas from a fluid mixture in combination
    with means to regenerate the separating media by drying or by gas or vapor
    contact.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for
    separation of a gas from a fluid mixture by use of a plant of higher order.

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus for the manufacture of heating and illuminating gases and means
    for the purification, distribution, and storage thereof.

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 272+ for a power plant of the internal
    combustion engine type with treatment or handling of exhaust gas.

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclasses for apparatus peculiar to
    removing heat from a substance, usually by a change of phase of a coolant
    or refrigerant, and for apparatus involving subject matter for Class 96
    combined with significant refrigeration apparatus.  Examples of significant
    refrigeration are: (i) expansion of a gas through an orifice whereby
    cooling is effected to condense any of the constituents of the gas by such
    temperature reduction; (ii) a significant physical relationship or
    arrangement between elements of a refrigeration circuit (e.g., two related
    refrigeration coils, detailed description of the circuit, etc.); (iii)
    change of phase of a coolant or refrigerant (i.e., evaporation, melting, or
    sublimation) whereby cooling is effected to condense any of the
    constituents of the gas by such temperature reduction.  Some examples of
    what may be found in Class 62 are: (a) separation of a constituent from a
    plurality of gases by a significantly claimed refrigeration step or
    apparatus; (b) condensation of moisture from the atmosphere as a result of
    a refrigeration operation; (c) gas drying by sorption followed by
    contacting the dried gas with a liquid to produce cooling by evaporation;
    (d) a refrigerated enclosure combined with sorption means; (e)
    refrigeration producing processes and apparatus combined with steps or
    means for drying the refrigerant; and (f) extracting a constituent from a
    plurality of gases by liquefaction and separation (e.g., fractionation or
    distillation, etc.).

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 23.2+ for apparatus for gas
    analysis, per se, and also the combination of gas separation apparatus and
    significant gas analysis means.  The combination of gas separation
    apparatus and nominal means for "analyzing" or "detecting" without further
    detail of the analysis or detection means is insufficient to cause a patent
    to be placed in Class 73; that patent will be placed in Class 96.  Also, if
    there is feedback means from the analytical apparatus to control or effect
    a change in the gas separation, then classification is in Class 96.  For
    volume or rate of flow meters combined with gas-liquid separators, see
    Class 73, subclass 200.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, for the corresponding processes to the
    apparatus of Class 96.  When a patent has a claim or claims to a Class 95
    process and a claim or claims to a Class 96 apparatus, the patent will be
    placed as an original in Class 95, even though there may be an apparatus
    claim that is more comprehensive than a process claim.

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 119+ for significant furnace apparatus
    including a spark arrester.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 715+ for coating apparatus in which
    the coating material used is either gaseous or vaporous.  The apparatus may
    have gas separation means for removing foreign or undesirable components
    from the coating material.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 492 for devices located in
    the steam dome of a boiler for separating water from steam.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 518+ for
    internal-combustion engines including a charge-forming device having a fuel
    vapor recovery and storage system.

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 200.24+ for apparatus for supplying a
    breathable gas to, or exhausting such gas from, a living body.  Subclass
    200.24 and the subclasses mentioned below require that the apparatus be
    adapted for use on or in the living body and also include diagnostic or
    therapeutic apparatus when the only disclosed utility is for diagnosis or
    treatment of a living body.  See especially subclass 200.25 for an
    artificial gill or means for separating entrained air from a liquid stream;
    subclass 201.25 for a respiratory device including  body or head supported
    means covering user's scalp and means for removing a substance from
    respiratory gas; subclass 204.16 for removal of a substance from
    respiratory gas by cooling; subclass 205.12 for means for supplying
    respiratory gas under positive pressure including means for removing a
    substance from the respiratory gas; and subclass 205.27 for a respiratory
    device including means for removing a substance from a respiratory gas.

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 331+ for means for removing or separating a
    constituent material from tobacco smoke combined with tobacco products or
    disclosed for use with a tobacco user's appliance or article where the
    disclosure or claim is directed solely to such use.  A copy of a patent so
    limited as above should be placed as a cross-reference in Class 96 if
    general utility for gas separation is recognized.

    137,    Fluid Handling, appropriate subclasses for combinations of fluid
    handling apparatus and gas separation apparatus involving more than mere
    flow control (e.g., valving, etc.) to or from the gas separating apparatus.
     (i) For classification in either Class 137 or Class 96 where both the
    fluid handling apparatus and gas separation apparatus are included in the
    combination, classification will be based upon the ultimate purpose of the
    subject matter and not on the ancillary or subordinate feature of the
    combination consistent with the objects and aims therefor (e.g., it is not
    intended that the inclusion of a fabric filter no matter how specifically
    defined will be sufficient to carry a "gas field storage and distribution
    system" to Class 96, whether the filter protects the operating parts of the
    system or is the most downstream element thereof).  The fluid handling for
    Class 96 should be no more than that necessary to convey or conduct the
    fluid mixture to, at, or away from the point of separation.  (ii) However,
    where (a) the Class 137 feature is a simple valve (e.g., a check valve, a
    mere stop and go valve, or a mere flow control valve as distinct from a
    multiway valve or a pressure regulator), (b) the gas separation apparatus
    and valve are in an intimate flow relationship within a gas conduit, and
    (c) the gas separation apparatus is claimed by more than name only,
    classification is in Class 96, regardless of the ultimate purpose of the
    subject matter and irrespective of the details of the valve recited in the
    claim.  (iii) Class 137 also takes separation of gases from gases, liquids,
    or solids by gravitational means only (i.e., where no specific means is
    claimed for effecting the separation).  A single expansion chamber alone
    which separates a fluid mixture is not regarded as a specific separating
    means.  However, two such chambers (in series or parallel) are considered
    to be specific.  If there is a baffle or other impingement surface claimed,
    other than the wall of the chamber itself, such apparatus is to be placed
    in Class 96.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    appropriate subclasses for apparatus for transferring fluent material
    through a flow confining system, the source and receiver parts of which are
    normally separable.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for apparatus there classified for adhesively
    bonding and otherwise manufacturing filters.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, appropriate
    subclasses for flexible fabric panel units and subclasses 382+ for fabric
    fastening means.  Class 160 is the generic class for panel units having
    flexible fabric and takes flexible fabric panel units having several
    different named purposes, one of which may be gas separation.  Class 96
    takes a panel unit having flexible fabric when used only for gas separation.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for apparatus where only
    indirect heat exchange is involved and subclasses 58+ for a heating and
    cooling system with an ancillary separator.  However, cold wall-hot wall
    thermal diffusion apparatus will be found in Class 55, subclass 209.

    166,    Wells, for shafts or deep borings in the earth for the extraction
    of fluids from the earth.  Gas separation apparatus including a nominal
    recitation of a well is proper for Class 96.  For classification in Class
    166, some details specific to wells should be recited for the combination
    of gas separation apparatus and a well.  However, in the situation in which
    one of the constituents separated is inserted into an input well, a mere
    broad recitation of such well is sufficient for classification in Class 166.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 68.3 for modified vehicle structure such
    as hood modifications and other air inlets (e.g., body grille, etc.) with
    conduits or connections to or for carburetor intake and including filter
    means.

    181,    Acoustics, subclass 231 for a muffler with a solid particle
    separator (e.g., spark arrester, vacuum cleaner, etc.).  See Class 55,
    subclass 276 for gas separators with sound damping or acoustical means.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, for apparatus for treating, refining, or
    recovering mineral oils such as petroleum, coal, tar, pitch, asphalt, or
    related products.  Class 196 takes apparatus having means for gas
    separation combined with significant means to treat, refine, or recover
    mineral oils.

    202,    Distillation: Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for
    the volatilization of a substance from either solids or liquids for the
    purpose of recovering material from the vapor produced by condensation or
    absorption.  Other means for the physical treatment of the vapor may be
    included (e.g., filter, deflector, dephlegmator, etc.).

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 193+ for
    apparatus in which a chemical change is brought about by the application of
    an electric current to material being treated wherein more than the mere
    thermal effect of the current is involved, and subclasses 660+ for
    apparatus for the separation or purification of liquids by the physical or
    physical-chemical action of an electrical stress.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses indented
    under subclasses 21 and 133 that include "deposition" in their titles for
    apparatus for the separating and segregating into grades components of
    solid mixtures employing a gaseous suspending medium which is separated
    from the solids.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus for the separation of a constituent from a flowable liquid
    mixture; except for apparatus for the separation of a gas initially present
    in a liquid mixture.  Class 210 is superior to Class 96 and takes
    separating apparatus, per se, generically disclosed or claimed for use in
    fluid separation or if the disclosure or a claim is restricted to liquid
    separation apparatus.  Class 210 also takes apparatus which removes or
    vents gas formed incidentally to the handling of the fluid mixture or as a
    result of a Class 210 treatment (see particularly subclasses 120, 180, 188,
    218, 406, and 436).  However, Class 96 takes apparatus operating to remove
    gas initially present in an inflowing liquid mixture, with or without
    liquid separation.  Apparatus for the removal of a volatile organic
    compound (e.g., ethanol (C2H5OH), gasoline, etc.) from a liquid is not
    taken to be apparatus for the degasification of a liquid for Class 96 when
    the volatile organic compound is initially present as a liquid mixed with
    another liquid.  Apparatus for the removal of a volatile organic compound
    from a liquid may be found in Class 210 for liquid purification or
    separation or Class 202 for separatory distillation.  Class 96 will also
    take apparatus including a liquid separation means in a Class 96 gas
    separation apparatus (e.g., means to regenerate a scrubbing liquid in a gas
    scrubbing apparatus, etc.).

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclass 308 for closures for bottles and jars
    with the receptacle interior communicable with the exterior through a
    filter when the closure is in the applied position.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 366 and 367+ for vents for closures for
    receptacles combined with gas separating means wherein the gas separator is
    recited by name only, or the claim includes details of the receptacle
    (e.g., splash plate in the receptacle or vent, etc.) or of the closure
    (e.g., configuration or means for attaching to the receptacle, etc.).

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 53-60 for
    steam traps with thermostatically controlled valves.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 34+ for slow
    diffusers, which are devices used to disperse or spread material into the
    ambient air without the use of draft producing means.

            With a disclosure of gas separation or humidity control (air
    conditioning), Class 239 will take, as a slow diffuser, a pad, filter, or
    fibrous mass that is saturated or maintained saturated with a diffusible
    liquid (water or volatile solvents) unless any of the following are
    included:

    (i)     gas contacting means within the meaning of Class 261 (e.g., special
    flow arrangements through conduits or the like, etc.), or

    (ii)    gas movement effecting means (e.g., pump, fan, etc.).

            Class 261 will take patents having the qualifications in (i) or
    (ii) if the filter, pad, or mass is:

    (a)     continuously supplied with liquid,

    (b)     cyclically or periodically moved through a liquid reservoir,

    (c)     maintained wet by liquid applying means, or

    (d)     moistened by maintaining some part of a continuous wick type member
    immersed in liquid.

            Class 96 will take patents having the qualifications in (i) or (ii)
    if the liquid supply means described in (a) through (d) is not included.
    An absorbent mass with oil or viscous fluid therein or supplied thereto
    disclosed for gas separation, or a solid or nonabsorbent sheet disclosed in
    a gas separating environment is not classified in Class 239, but is
    classifiable in either Class 96 or Class 261, depending on the nature of
    the liquid source.  (See also the search class note to Class 261 in this
    section).

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 68+ for
    apparatus for combinations of comminution and separation of solids from a
    gas.  Class 241 is superior to the material separation classes and,
    therefore, provides for apparatus in which comminution is combined with
    means to separate the material into classes according to the physical
    characteristics of its components before, during, or after the comminuting
    operation.  Class 96 takes apparatus, such as deflectors or the like, that
    may act to comminute material as a secondary or incidental function of what
    is basically a holding back or separating procedure (e.g., disintegration
    or attrition of ignited particles in spark arresters, etc.). Such apparatus
    are classified on the basis of their essential function in Class 96.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 550+ for unwinding an
    elongated material, and subclasses 570+ for a coil holder of general use.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 281+ for apparatus for the ionic
    separation of materials utilizing the charge-to-mass ratios of particles.
    See particularly subclasses 294+ for apparatus to subject the ionized
    particles to the effects of an electric or magnetic field, which causes the
    particles to travel through a curved trajectory, the particles of a certain
    charge-to-mass ratio having a trajectory different from those particles
    having other charge-to-mass ratios.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 189+ for substances (e.g., liquid sorbent
    compositions, etc.) for use in absorbing or binding carbon monoxide (CO),
    sulfur (S), negative elements, or acids; subclass 193 for substances (e.g.,
    liquid sorbent compositions, etc.) for use in absorbing or binding ammonia,
    alkalis, or other bases; and subclass 194 for substances (e.g., liquid
    sorbent compositions, etc.) for use in absorbing or binding water.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses, for
    apparatus for degasifying liquid (e.g., deaerating feed water heater, etc.)
    wherein the liquid is merely contacted with a gas in a chamber or space for
    deaeration thereof; for apparatus wherein a gaseous fluid mixture is
    contacted with a liquid spray, sheet, stream, or bath to precipitate dust
    or to sorb a constituent from the gaseous fluid mixture; for apparatus
    comprising a nonabsorbent element on which a gaseous fluid mixture is
    contacted with a liquid if the element is continuously supplied with a
    liquid or is continuously moved into and out of a liquid bath or supply;
    and for apparatus comprising an absorbent porous sheet or mass on which a
    gaseous fluid mixture is contacted with a liquid if the sheet or mass is:

    (a)     continuously supplied with liquid,

    (b)     cyclically or periodically moved through a liquid reservoir,

    (c)     maintained wet by liquid applying means, or

    (d)     moistened by maintaining some part of a continuous wick type member
    immersed in liquid, by following the law of the machine, or during normal
    operation of a gas contacting function.

            Note that under the provisions of (a) and (b) there must be no
    affirmative means to dry the sheet or mass, nor means to assure a dry
    condition of the sheet or mass before gas flow is resumed or the sheet or
    mass is returned to the gas contacting position.

            If apparatus for degasifying liquid by contact with a gas has other
    means to cause gas separation of the liquid with gas entrained therein, of
    the separated gas, or of the separated liquid, then the apparatus is
    classified in Class 96.  If apparatus in which a gaseous fluid mixture is
    contacted with a liquid to precipitate dust or to sorb a constituent from
    the gaseous fluid mixture has other means to cause gas separation or has
    means to treat the contact liquid, then the apparatus is classified in
    Class 96.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus for separating ammonia (NH3) or acid anhydrides
    (CO2, SO2, etc.) from a gas by mere contact with a liquid is classified in
    Class 261.

    (2)     Note.  Processes for gas separation by contacting a gaseous fluid
    mixture with a liquid and processes of degasifying a liquid are classified
    in Class 95.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 144+ for metallurgical
    apparatus combined with gas separating means and subclasses 200+ for
    apparatus for treating liquefied metal.  See particularly subclasses 208+
    for apparatus for treating liquefied metal by application of vacuum that
    may include degasification of the liquefied metal.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 77.1+ for storm-front
    shields, aprons, or robes used to protect the occupants of vehicles from
    storm or wind coming from the direction in which the vehicle is moving.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    220-354 for voltage magnitude control means not restricted to electrostatic
    precipitator systems.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 59+, 74+, and 100 for current rectification systems
    not restricted to electrostatic precipitator systems.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements, for
    apparatus for induced nuclear reactions combined with means for reaction
    product treatment.  See particularly subclasses 146+, 189, 195, 198, and
    201.  See subclasses 308+ for apparatus including fission reactor material
    treatment and subclasses 370+ for reactor structures with means for
    separation of a vapor.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 42+ for bag closures and appropriate
    subclasses for bags not used as filter bags for gas separation.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclasses 154+ for apparatus to convey
    solid material in a fluid current with means to separate the solids from
    the fluid at the conveyor outlet.

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, subclass 121.2 for a pump or
    motor combined with means to separate solids from a gaseous working fluid
    and subclasses 169.2+ for a pump or motor combined with means to separate
    moisture vapor or liquid from a gaseous working fluid.

    417,    Pumps, appropriate subclasses for pumps combined with upstream
    filtering or separating means specifically disclosed as protecting the pump
    and also for pumps combined with separators if any of the separated
    constituents are fed back or applied to the pump.  This includes, for
    example, lubricant, coolant, or an impelling fluid which is separated from
    an impelled fluid, as in a jet pump.  Class 417 takes jet pumps for flues
    combined with a spark arrester, because the combination of a jet pump and a
    spark arrester is considered to be a perfecting feature of the pump.  See
    Class 417, subclass 156.

    (1)     Note.  A system for evacuating a space and in which a trap is
    included for preventing back-streaming or back-migration of molecules from
    a pumping area to the space being evacuated and which operates in the
    manner of a Class 96 gas separator will be considered a gas separator
    whether or not the apparatus is so identified.  It will be noted that with
    the trap positioned between the space and the pump, separation would occur
    with gas flowing in either direction (i.e., from the space to the pump or
    from the pump to the space), if the fluid is separable.

            Classification of the different combinations which may be claimed
    is as follows:

    (a)     A Class 96 type trap or separator, per se, identified either as a
    pump or a separator is classified in Class 96.

    (b)     A separator or molecule trap of the Class 96 type combined with a
    pump to evacuate space is classified in Class 96 unless there is some
    specific relationship between the separator or trap and the pump (other
    than the mere pumping of the fluid to and through the trap).  As a
    nonlimiting example, if the separated material is conducted to a pump
    element for lubrication, cooling, etc., then classification is in Class 417.

    (c)     A separator or molecule trap of the Class 96 type combined with a
    pump and a space being evacuated is classified in Class 96 unless there is
    some special separable connection of the type recognized in Class 141 for
    receiver coaction, in which case classification is in Class 141, regardless
    of any interrelationship between the pump and the separator or trap as set
    forth in (b) above.

    (d)     A pump claimed in combination with nominally claimed filter or
    separator will be classified in Class 417.

            (a), (b), and (c) do not take into account the combination with
    heat exchanging or refrigerating means provided for in Classes 62 and 165,
    for which see the search class notes set out in other parts of this section.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, for rotary expansible chamber
    type pumps.  The line between Class 96 and Class 418 is the same as set
    forth above for Class 417.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, for apparatus for (a) carrying out chemical
    reactions, (b) preparing or treating chemical compounds or compositions,
    even though only a physical reaction is discernible, and (c) performing an
    analysis which involves either a chemical reaction or a physical reaction
    not elsewhere provided for.  See subclasses 88+ for apparatus for
    quantitative or qualitative chemical analysis of a gas sample including
    means for absorbing or adsorbing the gas sample or that portion to be
    tested into or onto liquid or solid media.  See subclasses 120+ for
    apparatus for (a) taking the odor out of or masking the odor of or (b)
    chemical purification of a life-sustaining environmental gas (for breathing
    apparatus) or the chemical generation of the same.  See subclasses 168+ for
    apparatus for the modification of a waste gas, prior to its discharge into
    the atmosphere, by chemical reaction to reduce the pollutant content
    thereof.  Class 96 takes the combination of preserving, disinfecting, or
    sterilizing means and gas separation means of the type that meets the
    requirements for gas separation apparatus in the definition for Class 96.
    The gas separating means may be claimed by name only, provided such named
    device is disclosed as being more than a mere supporting or treating means
    for a preserving, disinfecting, or sterilizing substance (see, e.g., Class
    55, subclass 279).

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for stock material which may inherently perform a gas separating function
    (e.g., a structurally defined web or sheet including apertures, etc.).
    However, stock material when positively stated as being for gas separation
    will be found in Class 96 (see Class 55, subclasses 522+).

    435,    Chemistry: Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 283.1+
    for apparatus claimed or solely disclosed for using a microorganism or
    enzyme to synthesize a chemical product or for treating a material with a
    microorganism or enzyme to separate, liberate, or purify a preexisting
    substance.

    451,    Abrading, subclass 453 for an accessory usable with abrading means
    for collecting particles coming from a grinding wheel or work during
    operation of the grinding wheel.

    454,    Ventilation, appropriate subclasses for ventilated structures, per
    se, or combined with a gas separating operation.  Class 454 includes
    devices such as screens or gridlike members (e.g., bird screens, etc.),
    chimney caps, diffusion type air registers, hoods, offtakes, louvers, and
    pipe caps which function to control rather than to separate gas.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 39+ for cigarette filter making methods or
    apparatus; see especially subclasses 47+ for methods or apparatus to
    assemble dissimilar filter materials (e.g., fiber and powdered charcoal,
    etc.) and subclass 941 for a cross-reference art collection for operations
    involving the construction of a filter.

    494,    Imperforate Bowl:  Centrifugal Separators, for apparatus for the
    breaking up or subdividing of material, which material comprises a mixture
    of fluids or fluent substances, into two or more components by utilizing a
    rotatable, receptaclelike member having a generally solid wall, and
    commonly termed a bowl, for subjecting the material to centrifugal force.
    Thus, gas separation apparatus that is an imperforate bowl, centrifugal
    separator is proper for Class 494.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, subclasses 60+ for zeolite compositions, per se, and for
    processes of making zeolite compositions, and subclasses 400+ for other
    solid sorbent compositions, per se, and for processes of making solid
    sorbent compositions.  Class 502 will take zeolite or other solid sorbent
    compositions having details of the physical characteristics of the
    composition itself (e.g., porosity, particle size, etc.).  Class 502 will
    also take zeolite or other solid sorbent compositions that are layered,
    laminated, or otherwise affixed to another zeolite or other solid sorbent
    composition or to a support material.  Class 96 takes apparatus having (a)
    an inlet for the fluid mixture to be treated, (b) a means effective to
    cause separation into constituent parts, and (c) an outlet for at least one
    constituent separate and distinct from an outlet for another constituent or
    a single outlet used at different times to remove the separated
    constituents.  The means effective to cause separation into constituent
    parts confines the zeolite or other solid sorbent composition inside an
    enclosure that contains the fluid mixture being separated.  Class 96 also
    takes filter elements having zeolite or other solid sorbent compositions
    held in an open structure or rim that encases, holds, or borders the
    zeolite or other solid sorbent composition or held on a skeletal structure.

    IV.     INDEX TO CLASSES NOTED IN THE CLASS DEFINITION AND THE SUBCLASSES
    OF THIS CLASS

            After each class listed below, the notation "See ---" refers to the
    sections of the class definition and the subclasses of Class 96 in which
    there are references to the class involved.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning.  See section III and
    subclass 28.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids.  See section III and
    subclasses 123 and 150.

    47,     Plant Husbandry.  See section III.

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating.  See section III.

    55,     Gas Separation.  See subclasses 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 25, 26, 28, 32,
    39, 41, 43, 46, 48, 55, 56, 61, 63, 64, 67, 102, 103, 107, 109, 111, 112,
    113, 114, 115, 116, 117, 123, 127, 134, 139, 140, 142, 147, 150, 152, 156,
    160, 167, 170, 171, 173, 174, 175, 177, 180, 181, 182, 188, 189, 191, 195,
    196, 197, 198, 204, 207, 208, 214, 215, 216, 217, 219, and 220.

    60,     Power Plants.  See section III.

    62,     Refrigeration.  See section III and subclass 108.

    73,     Measuring and Testing.  See section III and subclasses 26, 101, and
    117.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes.  See section III and subclasses 1, 4,
    5, 6, 15, 18, 19, 20, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 32, 39, 44, 48, 51, 52,
    54, 55, 64, 74, 94, 101, 102, 103, 104, 105, 107, 108, 109, 110, 111, 112,
    113, 114, 115, 117, 118, 122, 123, 124, 125, 126, 130, 141, 143, 144, 146,
    150, 155, 156, 157, 160, 161, 164, 166, 167, 169, 171, 172, 173, 174, 175,
    176, 177, 181, 182, 193, 194, and 202.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus.  See subclass 148.

    110,    Furnaces.  See sections I and III.

    116,    Signals and Indicators.  See subclasses 26 and 117.

    118,    Coating Apparatus.  See section III.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers.  See section III.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines.  See section III and subclass 108.

    128,    Surgery.  See section III.

    131,    Tobacco.  See section III.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids.  See subclass 28.

    137,    Fluid Handling.  See section III and subclass 158.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means.
     See section III and subclass 105.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture.  See
    section III.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition,  or Panel.  See section
    III.

    165,    Heat Exchange.  See section III.

    166,    Wells.  See section III.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators.  See subclasses 15 and 88.

    180,    Motor Vehicles.  See section III.

    181,    Acoustics.  See section III.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus.  See section III.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus.  See section III and subclasses 155 and
    182.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory.  See subclasses 182 and 188.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy.  See section III and
    subclass 15.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package.  See subclass 108.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids.  See section III and
    subclass 1.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation.  See section III and subclasses
    1, 4, 8, 10, 12, 13, 14, 15, 101, 108, 152, 155, 182, 185, and 219.

    215,    Bottles and Jars.  See section III and subclass 4.

    220,    Receptacles.  See section III and subclass 148.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation.  See section III and
    subclasses 19, 111, 112, 160, and 173.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing.  See section III and
    subclass 200.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration.  See section III.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding.  See section III.

    250,    Radiant Energy.  See section III and subclass 15.

    252,    Compositions.  See sections I and III and subclasses 82, 95, 98,
    and 108.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus.  See section III and subclasses
    155, 181, and 202.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus.  See section III and subclass 155.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings.  See subclass 106.

    296,    Land Vehicles: Bodies and Tops.  See section III.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure.  See subclass 17.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices.  See subclasses 15 and 108.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems.  See subclass 15.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems.  See section III
    and subclass 80.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems. See subclasses 15 and 80.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets.  See subclass 36.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical.  See subclass 18.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices.  See subclasses 15,
    27, and 95.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems.  See section III.

    366,    Agitating.  See subclass 155.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing.  See subclasses 26 and 117.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements.  See
    section III.

    383,    Flexible Bags.  See section III.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current.  See section III and subclasses 123 and
    150.

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps.  See section III.

    417,    Pumps.  See section III and subclasses 108, 127, and 128.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices.  See section III.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions.  See subclass 108.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing.  See sections I and III and subclasses 15, 101,
    108, 123, and 150.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds.  See subclass 108.

    427,    Coating Processes.  See subclasses 95 and 98.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles.  See sections I and III.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology.  See section III.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing.
     See subclass 108.

    451,    Abrading.  See section III.

    454,    Ventilation.  See section III.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web.  See section III.

    494,    Imperforate Bowl:  Centrifugal Separators.  See section III.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making.  See sections I and III and subclasses 108, 153, and 154.


CLS 96/1
TXT MAGNETIC SEPARATING MEANS:
    Apparatus under the class definition having means to produce magnetic lines
    of force in order to separate a constituent or to aid the separation of a
    constituent from a fluid mixture.

    (1)     Note.  The means may be either a permanent magnet or an
    electromagnet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 27 and 28 for processes of
    gas separation using magnetic lines of force.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 38, 39,
    40, 212, and 213+ for classifying, separating, or assorting solids using
    magnetic lines of force.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 222+ for magnetic
    apparatus purifying or separating a liquid and subclass 695 for processes
    purifying or separating a liquid using magnetic lines of force.


CLS 96/2
TXT Electromagnet:
    Apparatus under subclass 1 in which the magnetic lines of force are
    produced by an electric current.


CLS 96/3
TXT And electric field separation apparatus:
    Apparatus under subclass 1 in which means to form an electric field is also
    used.


CLS 96/4
TXT APPARATUS FOR SELECTIVE DIFFUSION OF GASES (E.G., SEMIPERMEABLE MEMBRANE,
    ETC.):Apparatus under the class definition comprising a solid, liquid, or
    gaseous barrier which is permeable to one or more gases of a fluid mixture,
    where the permeation of such gases occurs at differing rates for different
    gases.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 43+ for a process using the
    selective diffusion of gases through a solid, liquid, or gaseous barrier,
    such as a semipermeable membrane.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 96.2, 257.2, and
    321.6+ for apparatus having membranes or dialyzers for separating liquids
    and subclasses 500.21+ for semipermeable membranes used in the separation
    of liquids.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclass 261 for closures for bottles and jars
    having a barrier permeable to gas and impermeable to liquid.


CLS 96/5
TXT Immobilized liquid membrane:
    Apparatus under subclass 4 in which the barrier to gas diffusion is a
    liquid that is supported or immobilized in or on a porous medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclass 44 for corresponding
    processes.  Patents are not cross-referenced from Class 95, subclass 44 to
    this subclass based only on disclosure. Therefore, relevant disclosures of
    gas separation apparatus may be found in the process area.


CLS 96/6
TXT Membrane to degasify liquid:
    Apparatus under subclass 4 which is used to separate gas entrained in a
    liquid (e.g., by selectively allowing the gas to pass through a barrier,
    such as a membrane, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155+,   for apparatus effecting the degasification of a liquid without
    utilizing the selective diffusion of gases.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclass 46 for corresponding
    processes.  Patents are not cross-referenced from Class 95, subclass 46 to
    this subclass based only on disclosure. Therefore, relevant disclosures of
    gas separation apparatus may be found in the process area.


CLS 96/7
TXT Plural separate barriers:
    Apparatus under subclass 4 comprising two or more distinctly separate
    barriers (e.g., membrane stack, etc.).


CLS 96/8
TXT Parallel hollow fibers or cylinders (e.g., bundled, etc.):
    Apparatus under subclass 7 comprising a plurality of hollow fibers or
    cylinders, where the hollow fibers or cylinders are usually small-diameter
    tubes bundled for parallel gas flow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 323.2 for plural
    distinct tubular separators and subclass 500.23 for hollow fibers or
    cylindrical semipermeable membranes used in the purifying or separating of
    liquids.


CLS 96/9
TXT Barriers connected in series:
    Apparatus under subclass 7 in which at least two separate barriers are
    arranged in series for sequential gas diffusion or separation.


CLS 96/10
TXT Hollow fiber or cylinder:
    Apparatus under subclass 4 in which the gas is diffused through the wall of
    a hollow fiber or cylinder (e.g., tube, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 500.23 for hollow
    fibers or cylindrical semipermeable membranes used to purify or separate
    liquids.


CLS 96/11
TXT Plural layers (e.g., laminated barrier, etc.):
    Apparatus under subclass 4 in which the barrier for gas diffusion comprises
    two or more distinguishable layers.

    (1)     Note.  The layers or laminates may be of similar composition. Where
    the barrier has been formed by evaporation of one or more components to
    result in a surface layer depleted in these components and the surface
    layer is distinguishable from the remaining barrier thickness upon
    subsequent inspection, the barrier is taken to be composed of at least two
    distinguishable layers.

    (2)     Note.  Plural layer (or laminated) membranes are often referred to
    as composites.  However, the use of this term as applied to classification
    in this subclass does not include a single porous barrier material
    impregnated with a second material unless enough of the second material
    remains on the exterior of the single porous barrier material to form a
    distinguishable coating or second layer.


CLS 96/12
TXT Organic compound containing layer:
    Apparatus under subclass 11 in which at least one of the distinguishable
    layers contains an organic compound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 500.27+ for
    semipermeable membranes containing an organic compound which are used for
    purifying or separating liquids.


CLS 96/13
TXT Ring containing organic compound:
    Apparatus under subclass 12 in which at least one of the distinguishable
    layers contains an organic compound that is cyclic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for gas diffusion membranes composed of a single layer and having
    at least one ring containing organic compound.

     SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 500.28+ for
    semipermeable membranes containing a cyclic organic compound which are used
    for purifying or separating liquids.


CLS 96/14
TXT Membrane having ring containing organic compound:
    Apparatus under subclass 4 in which the barrier has at least one cyclic or
    ring containing organic compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for gas diffusion apparatus with plural layers in which at least
    one of such layers has a ring containing organic compound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 500.28+ for
    semipermeable membranes containing a cyclic organic compound which are used
    for purifying or separating liquids.


CLS 96/15
TXT ELECTRIC FIELD SEPARATION APPARATUS (E.G., ELECTRICAL PRECIPITATOR,
    ELECTROSTATIC TYPE, ETC.):Apparatus under the class definition in which a
    constituent of the fluid mixture is separated or precipitated by an
    electric field or discharge means and includes an electrode arranged to
    emit, collect, or control movement of charged particles (e.g., electrical
    or Cottrell precipitators, electrostatic type, etc.); and subcombinations
    thereof (e.g., electrodes for such apparatus, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Treatment by an electric field to agglomerate or coalesce
    constituents of the fluid mixture, where no provision for separation or
    precipitation, as such, is described, is classified in this subclass if the
    disclosure relates to gas separation and the ultimate use of the apparatus
    is for gas separation.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is the collecting home for means for insuring
    nonconducting properties of the apparatus, other than mere conductor
    sheath.  Thus, patents claiming such means with only nominal recitation of
    other features are classified in this subclass rather than the indented
    subclasses, and other patents with significant disclosures of such means
    are cross-referenced to this subclass.  However, patents concerning
    insulation and having a disclosure or claims pertaining to electrode
    retaining or supporting means are not placed in this subclass but are found
    in subclass 88.

    (3)     Note.  The line between Class 96 and the applicable electrical
    classes is based on the amount of disclosure.  If there is a general
    utility or multiple purpose disclosure and the claims are not limited to
    electric field separation apparatus for this class (such as by including
    precipitator electrodes), then classification is in the appropriate other
    class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for electric field separation apparatus combined with magnetic
    separating means.

    88,     for insulation features combined with electrode retaining or
    supporting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclass 279 for gas separation apparatus combined
    with sterilizing means, such as ozonizers.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 57+ for processes involving
    an electric field for separating fluid mixtures.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 137+ for
    insulators.

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclasses;
    particularly 660+ for similar apparatus dealing with the electrical
    separation of liquids and degasification of liquid aided by electrical
    discharge involving the conversion of constituents to other compounds.
    When such chemical conversion is in doubt, placement of electrical
    apparatus for degasifying liquid is proper for Class 96.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 243 for liquid
    separation apparatus with electrical insulating or electricity discharging
    means.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 281+ for processes and apparatus for
    separating ionized material based on the differing charge-to-mass ratios of
    such material.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses for
    electric space discharge devices, especially subclasses 231.01+ for such
    discharge devices which have means for passing a fluent material between
    the discharge electrodes.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for miscellaneous systems for supplying electrical energy to
    electric space discharge devices of the gas or vapor ionization type.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses and particularly subclasses 530+ for
    miscellaneous circuits having a specific source of supply or bias voltage.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 227+ for
    particle charging means and 230+ for ionizing means which are not solely
    disclosed in connection with the separation of a gaseous fluid mixture.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 22+ for processes of disinfecting,
    deodorizing, preserving, or sterilizing using direct contact with
    electrical or electromagnetic radiation, and subclasses 186.04+ for
    electrostatic field or electrical discharge apparatus for chemical
    treatment not combined or associated with gas separation apparatus of the
    type found in Class 55, subclass 279.  Also, see the search class note to
    Class 422 at the beginning of this class.


CLS 96/16
TXT And radioactive or ultraviolet light ionizer:
    Apparatus under subclass 15 having means to ionize a gaseous fluid mixture
    either by radioactive or ultraviolet light means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclass 279 for nonelectrical separation apparatus
    combined with sterilizing means.


CLS 96/17
TXT Electric charge produced by friction (e.g., by gas flow, etc.):Apparatus
    under subclass 15 in which electrification of a separator part is
    accomplished by friction between two solid bodies or by flow of gas across
    or through a solid.

    (1)     Note.  Placing a member in an electric field to charge such member
    is not included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for electric field separation apparatus including radioactive or
    ultraviolet light ionizers.

    80+,    for electric field separation apparatus with voltage supply means
    or circuitry.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclass 360 for means to ground a filter and
    serving to prevent shock hazard, the static electricity having no
    precipitating or separating function.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 308+;
    particularly subclass 310 for charge accumulating electrostatic generators
    of the friction type.


CLS 96/18
TXT With control means responsive to sensed condition:
    Apparatus under subclass 15 in which means are provided to detect an
    apparatus or a process characteristic or change therein and to control or
    regulate operation of the apparatus or process based on the detected
    characteristic or change therein.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder, a
    single means may be used both to detect the characteristic or a change
    therein and to implement an action in the apparatus based upon the detected
    characteristic or change therein.  There must be a positive action made by
    the apparatus because of the detected characteristic or change therein.  An
    example is a pressure relief valve in which a certain pressure must be
    reached before the valve opens to relieve pressure differential across the
    valve.  Another example is a thermostat with a bimetallic element in which
    a certain temperature must be reached before the element is deformed enough
    to trip a switch, thus implementing a control action in the apparatus as a
    result of the temperature or change therein.  Apparatus in which no
    positive action is made by the single means as a result of the detected
    characteristic or change therein is not classified in this subclass or in
    the subclasses indented hereunder, but is classified below.  An example of
    such means would be an ammeter for recording spikes in electric current to
    denote sparking events, but without means for implementing any reaction in
    the apparatus (e.g., to reduce electrode voltage, etc.) as a result of such
    current spikes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for electric field separation apparatus with programmed, cyclic, or
    time responsive control means not responsive to a sensed condition.

    26,     for electric field separation apparatus with measuring, indicating,
    signal, or alarm means.

    30+,    for electric field separation apparatus with cleaner and
    interrelated shutdown or voltage adjustment means.

    80+,    for electric field separation apparatus with voltage supply or
    circuitry which is not specifically used to control operation of the
    apparatus.

    102,    for chromatography type apparatus with control means responsive to
    sensed condition.

    109+,   for solid sorbent apparatus with control means responsive to sensed
    condition.

    156+,   for apparatus degasifying liquid with control means responsive to
    sensed condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 210+ for automatic control means for gas
    or nongaseous constituent discharge and subclass 270 for sampling,
    weighing, testing, or metering means.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 2+ for electric field
    separation processes with control responsive to sensed condition, subclass
    25 for processes with recording or signaling condition, and subclass 26 for
    processes with timing of operation.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+ for automatic
    electrical condition responsive indicating systems; particularly subclasses
    632+ for gas responsive devices.


CLS 96/19
TXT Concentration or temperature sensing means:
    Apparatus under subclass 18 in which means are provided to detect the
    amount of a constituent present (e.g., dust, humidity, etc.) or a change
    therein in the fluid mixture or the temperature or a change therein of the
    fluid mixture under treatment and to control or regulate the operation of
    the apparatus based on the detected characteristic or change therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclass 217 for temperature or humidity responsive
    automatic control means for gas or nongaseous constituent discharge.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 3 and 4 for corresponding
    processes with control responsive to concentration and temperature,
    respectively; subclasses 8+ and 14+ for nonelectrical separation processes
    with control responsive to concentration and temperature, respectively.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, for automatic
    temperature or humidity control means, per se.


CLS 96/20
TXT Arc, spark, or flashover sensing means:
    Apparatus under subclass 18 in which means are provided to detect the
    presence or frequency of sparking discharge in the gaseous fluid mixture
    (e.g., arc or flashover of current bursts between differently charged
    parts, such as between discharge and collector electrodes, etc.) and to
    control or regulate the apparatus based on the detected sparking.

    (1)     Note.  A sparking event or its frequency may be detected indirectly
    (e.g., by detecting short bursts of increasing system electrical current or
    decreasing electrode voltage, etc.), but must be specifically claimed to be
    classified in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclass 5 for electric field
    separation processes with control responsive to sensed sparking.


CLS 96/21
TXT Current sensing means:
    Apparatus under subclass 20 in which means are provided to detect
    electrical current or a change therein and to control or regulate the
    operation of the apparatus based on the detected electrical current or
    change therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for electric field separation apparatus with control means
    responsive to electrical current, but without means responsive to arc,
    spark, or flashover.


CLS 96/22
TXT Current sensing means:
    Apparatus under subclass 18 in which means are provided to detect
    electrical current or a change therein and to control or regulate the
    operation of the apparatus based on the detected electrical current or
    change therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for electric field separation apparatus with control means
    responsive to arc, spark, or flashover and also responsive to electrical
    current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclass 6 for corresponding processes
    with control responsive to sensed electrical current.


CLS 96/23
TXT And voltage sensing means:
    Apparatus under subclass 22 in which means are provided to detect voltage
    or a change therein and to control or regulate the operation of the
    apparatus based on the detected voltage or change therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for electric field separation apparatus with control means
    responsive to voltage, but without means responsive to arc, spark,
    flashover, or electrical current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclass 7 for electric field
    separation processes with control responsive to sensed voltage.


CLS 96/24
TXT Voltage sensing means:
    Apparatus under subclass 18 in which means are provided to detect electrode
    voltage or a change therein and to control or regulate the apparatus based
    on the detected voltage or change therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for electric field separation apparatus with control means
    responsive to voltage and electrical current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclass 7 for electric field
    separation processes with control responsive to sensed voltage.


CLS 96/25
TXT With programmed, cyclic, or time responsive control means:
    Apparatus under subclass 15 which is provided with control means not
    directly responsive to a sensed condition for (a) storing coded
    instructions or other data necessary to regulate operation of the treating
    apparatus, (b) repetitively regulating a sequence of operational steps
    performed in or by the treating apparatus, or (c) causing various system
    operations to occur according to preset timing sequences or to last for
    predetermined durations (e.g., timer switches, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes any control means which maintains an
    operating condition, predetermines apparatus operation, or regulates
    repetition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18+,    for electric field separation apparatus with control means
    responsive to sensed condition.

    26,     for electric field separation apparatus with measuring, indicating,
    signal, or alarm means.

    30+,    for electric field separation apparatus with cleaner and
    interrelated shutdown adjustment means; particularly subclass 31, including
    means for sequential operation.

    80+,    for electric field separation apparatus with voltage supply or
    circuitry which is not specifically used to control operation of the
    apparatus.

    103,    for chromatography type separation apparatus with programmed,
    cyclic, or time responsive control means.

    115+,   for solid sorbent apparatus with programmed, cyclic, or time
    responsive control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 271+ for nonelectrical gas separation
    apparatus with timing or changeable programming means.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclass 26 for gas separation
    processes with timing of operation.


CLS 96/26
TXT With indicating, signal, or alarm means:
    Apparatus under subclass 15 which is provided with means to indicate a
    characteristic or change therein (e.g., of the fluid mixture, a separated
    constituent, or the apparatus, etc.); or means to signal or alert the
    status of such a characteristic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18+,    for electric field separation apparatus with control means
    responsive to sensed condition.

    25,     for electric field separation apparatus with programmed, cyclic, or
    time responsive control means.

    117,    for solid sorbent apparatus with indicating, signal, or alarm means
    combined with programmed, cyclic, or time responsive control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclass 270 for gas treating apparatus with
    sampling, weighing, testing, or metering means and subclasses 274+ for gas
    treating apparatus with signals or indicators (e.g., inspection means,
    etc.).

    73,     Measuring and Testing, for measuring and testing procedures and
    apparatus.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclass 25 for gas treating processes
    with recording or signaling condition.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, particularly subclasses 67+ for alarms and
    200+ for indicators.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, for thermal measuring methods and
    devices, particularly subclasses 100+ for thermometers and similar devices.


CLS 96/27
TXT With means to add charged solid or liquid particles to gaseous fluid
    mixture:Apparatus under subclass 15 which has means for commingling a solid
    or liquid agent carrying an electrical charge with the gaseous fluid
    mixture being separated, where the solid or liquid agent ionizes,
    agglomerates, or collects constituents of the mixture or otherwise
    electrically treats the gaseous fluid mixture.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus including a charged fluidized bed for treatment of
    the gaseous fluid mixture is also found in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44+,    for electric field separation apparatus with wet film type
    electrodes in which liquid is directly applied to an electrode rather than
    being introduced into the gaseous fluid mixture as charged discrete liquid
    particles.

    52+,    for electric field separation apparatus with means for vapor or
    liquid contact to treat a gaseous fluid mixture or a separated constituent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 58+ for electric field
    separation processes with addition of solid, gas, or vapor to the gaseous
    fluid mixture; subclasses 64+ for electric field separation processes
    including separation by liquid addition to the gaseous fluid mixture; and
    subclasses 71+ for electric field separation processes with addition of
    liquid to the fluid mixture.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 227+ for
    means charging particles (e.g., fluid spray, etc.), and see the search note
    included there for other fields of search.


CLS 96/28
TXT Electrode cleaner, apparatus part flusher, discharger, or wet collector
    (e.g., wet film electrode, etc.):Apparatus under subclass 15 which has (a)
    means to remove the constituent gathered on an electrode, (b) means to
    remove the separated constituent by air draft, suction, liquid, or
    positively acting discharging means from parts other than electrodes of the
    apparatus, or (c) means to provide a bath type collector or a moving liquid
    film for the surface of a collecting electrode.

    (1)     Note.  The constituent which has been separated is usually
    nongaseous and adheres to the electrodes or has fallen therefrom onto a
    collecting means (e.g., a series of shelves, etc.).

    (2)     Note.  A collector electrode with a moving liquid film thereon is
    included herein (see subclass 45 in particular) since a cleaning action is
    inherent during passage of the liquid film over the electrode, even though
    the cleaning action may not be specifically disclosed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, for cleaning means of
    various types not specific to electric field separation apparatus.

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 220+ for nonelectrical separation
    apparatus with liquid cleaning means for a fluid mixture, and subclasses
    282+ for nonelectrical separating apparatus with means to clean a
    separating medium.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 74+ for electrical
    separation processes including cleaning of a collector electrode.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, for various cleaning
    processes and apparatus, not specific to electric field separation
    apparatus.


CLS 96/29
TXT Electrode or part thereof moved on or against another:
    Apparatus under subclass 28 arranged so that electrodes (discharge or
    collector) or parts thereof, in the case of sectionalized members, can move
    on or rub against each other or contact each other (e.g., by scraping or
    knocking against one another, etc.).


CLS 96/30
TXT With shutdown or voltage adjustment means interrelated with cleaning (e.g.,
    cutting off flow of gaseous fluid mixture or electrical current,
    etc.):Apparatus under subclass 28 having an interlock, electrical control,
    or blocking means (a) preventing normal operation of the apparatus or
    section thereof, as by cutting off or diverting the flow of gaseous fluid
    mixture or (b) disconnecting or effectively changing the voltage in an
    electrical circuit to the apparatus or section thereof, while the electrode
    cleaner is operating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80+,    for apparatus with details of voltage supply means or circuitry not
    specifically interrelated with cleaning.


CLS 96/31
TXT Sequential operation:
    Apparatus under subclass 30 having means for cleaning the apparatus in
    sequence with shutdown or voltage adjustment.

     SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for electrical separation apparatus with programmed, cyclic, or
    time responsive control means.


CLS 96/32
TXT Vibrating, jarring, or rapping means:
    Apparatus under subclass 28 having means to shake, jar, or set into a
    motion of small amplitude and relatively high frequency the electrode
    itself or its supporting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclass 300 for nonelectrical separation apparatus
    with vibrating, jarring, or rapping means for cleaning separating media.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclass 76 for electrical separation
    processes with electrode cleaning by scraping or vibrating.


CLS 96/33
TXT Mounted on rotatable shaft (e.g., swinging arm or hammer, etc.):Apparatus
    under subclass 32 in which the vibrating, jarring, or rapping means is
    attached to a rotatable shaft (e.g., swinging arm or hammer, etc.) and is
    used to strike the electrode or its support or in some other way transfer
    impact so that collected constituents are dislodged from the electrode.


CLS 96/34
TXT Having reciprocating rod or piston type activating or rapping
    means:Apparatus under subclass 33 in which a rod or piston is activated by
    or used to activate a rotatable means to accomplish transfer of an impact
    so that collected constituents are dislodged from the electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for reciprocating rod or piston type activating or rapping means
    not combined with rotatable means.


CLS 96/35
TXT Activated by second swinging or rotatable means:
    Apparatus under subclass 33 in which a shaft-mounted swinging or rotating
    means is caused to transfer vibration or impact to the electrode by motion
    of a second swinging or rotating means.


CLS 96/36
TXT Magnet or solenoid activating means:
    Apparatus under subclass 32 in which a magnetic or electromagnetic means is
    used to induce vibration of the electrode or cause a second means to jar or
    rap the electrode or its support means, so that a collected constituent is
    removed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets,  subclasses  255+  for  magneto-mechanical devices of the
    core armature type for use as a rapping or jarring means for electrostatic
    precipitators, but not solely disclosed for use therein.


CLS 96/37
TXT Reciprocating rod or piston type activating or rapping means:Apparatus
    under subclass 32 in which a rod or piston is moved in an axial direction
    to strike the electrode or to activate a second means to rap the electrode,
    so that a collected constituent is removed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for reciprocating rod or piston type activating or rapping means
    combined with rotatable means.


CLS 96/38
TXT Horizontal striking means:
    Apparatus under subclass 32 in which means are provided to strike the
    electrode or its support means horizontally, in order to dislodge a
    collected constituent.


CLS 96/39
TXT Movably mounted electrode:
    Apparatus under subclass 28 wherein the electrode is supported for movement
    relative to the apparatus either to effect or perfect cleaning of the
    apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  There may be a plurality of electrodes, each being moved
    separately at the time of cleaning.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93,     for electric field separation apparatus with nonrigid support means
    for collector electrode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclass 400 for nonelectrical separation apparatus
    with means mounted or supported for continuous motion.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclass 77 for electric field
    separation processes involving a continuously moving electrode.


CLS 96/40
TXT Nonliquid contact cleaning means:
    Apparatus under subclass 39 in which the cleaning is accomplished by
    contact of the electrode with either a solid or gaseous agent.


CLS 96/41
TXT Liquid bath for immersion of electrode:
    Apparatus under subclass 39 in which the movable electrode is dipped or
    partially dipped into a reservoir or body of liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclass 243 for nonelectrical gas separation
    apparatus with liquid immersion cleaning means for separating media.


CLS 96/42
TXT Endless belt carried or belt type electrode:
    Apparatus under subclass 41 in which the movable electrode comprises (a) an
    electrode means affixed to a continuous running length member or (b) a
    running length (e.g., web, etc.) or belt type electrode.


CLS 96/43
TXT Fluid contacting means (e.g., suction means, etc.):
    Apparatus under subclass 28 in which cleaning is accomplished by causing a
    nonsolid agent to contact the electrode or an apparatus part (e.g., by
    vacuum means, etc.) to remove a collected constituent.

    (1)     Note.  The agent may be the gaseous fluid mixture from which the
    constituent is being removed or a gaseous fluid from which the constituent
    has been separated if applied to a part to be cleaned by pressure or
    suction means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 242+ for nonelectrical separation
    apparatus with liquid cleaning or flushing means for separating media.


CLS 96/44
TXT Liquid applying means for electrode (e.g., projection type, etc.):Apparatus
    under subclass 43 in which a liquid is brought into contact with electrode
    means to move thereon, whereby cleaning is effected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for electric field separation apparatus having means to add charged
    solid or liquid particles to the gaseous fluid mixture.

    52+,    for electric field separation apparatus with means to treat a
    gaseous fluid by contacting it with a vapor or liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclass 75 for electric field
    separation processes with electrode cleaning by liquid flushing.


CLS 96/45
TXT Weir or overflow wet film type:
    Apparatus under subclass 44 having means to apply liquid to the electrode
    by permitting a supply of liquid to run over the retaining walls therefor
    and down over the electrode in overflowing fashion (as contrasted, for
    example, with immersion or projection spraying).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes collector electrodes, per se (e.g.,
    not claiming liquid supply means), defining structure limited or peculiar
    to liquid control either to wash down the electrode or to supply liquid to
    provide a film or wet-surfaced electrode.


CLS 96/46
TXT Having movable spraying means for liquid:
    Apparatus under subclass 44 in which spray nozzles or other movable means
    are mounted for movement to distribute liquid across the electrode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 230+ for nonelectrical separation
    apparatus with movably mounted liquid distributor.


CLS 96/47
TXT Including means to recirculate liquid:
    Apparatus under subclass 44 in which a flow path is provided to recycle at
    least a portion of the liquid used to wash the electrode.


CLS 96/48
TXT Including baffle for directing gas flow:
    Apparatus under subclass 44 in which a baffle or deflector is arranged to
    funnel or redirect gas flow.

    (1)     Note.  The treatment casing walls are not considered to serve as
    baffling means; in order to be classified in this subclass, additional
    baffle or deflector means must be arranged to affect gas flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for electric field separation apparatus with perforated baffle or
    gas diffuser for contact with ionizing electrode or uniform flow in
    treating zone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 434+ for nonelectrical separation
    apparatus with deflector or impingement baffle.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclass 78 for electric field
    separation processes using baffling, deflection, or restriction of gas flow.


CLS 96/49
TXT Cylindrical electrode:
    Apparatus under subclass 44 in which at least one electrode is formed in
    the shape of a cylinder.


CLS 96/50
TXT Apparatus purging or flushing means using gas or liquid:
    Apparatus under subclass 43 in which gas or liquid is brought into contact
    with an apparatus part other than the electrodes (e.g., as in wet bottom
    precipitators, etc.) in order to effect cleaning.

    (1)     Note.  This definition includes apparatus in which a gas draft of
    high volume is pumped through the apparatus to sweep it clean of
    accumulated deposits without special contact means expressly arranged for
    the electrodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for electric field separation apparatus including special means
    expressly arranged to contact an electrode with cleaning gas.


CLS 96/51
TXT Electrode scraping, brushing, or wiping means:
    Apparatus under subclass 28 having a solid agent for contacting the
    electrode to remove encrustation or residue.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for electrodes moved against brushes, scrapers, or wipers for
    cleaning.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclass 76 for electric field
    separation processes involving constituent removal from collector
    electrodes.


CLS 96/52
TXT With means for vapor or liquid contact (e.g., for gas separation, cooling,
    conditioning, etc.):Apparatus under subclass 15 having means to treat a
    gaseous fluid mixture or a separated constituent by contact with a liquid
    or vapor (e.g., for separation, heating, cooling, or conditioning, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Means to apply a fluid viscid coating or conditioning agent
    to electrodes are included, where the coating is substantially stationary,
    for the purpose of treating the gaseous fluid mixture or separated
    constituent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41+,    for electrode immersion means wherein the cleaning means may
    include a liquid useful for separation, such as a viscous liquid.

    44+,    for liquid applying means and weir or overflow wet film type
    electrodes wherein the liquid is applied for cleaning.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 58+, 63+, and 71+ for
    electric field separation processes involving the addition of gas, vapor,
    or liquid to the gaseous fluid mixture under treatment.


CLS 96/53
TXT Liquid spray means:
    Apparatus under subclass 52 in which means are provided to distribute or
    spray liquid in the gaseous fluid mixture to be treated.


CLS 96/54
TXT Having alternating electrostatic field:
    Apparatus under subclass 15 in which a constituent of the fluid mixture is
    treated or separated by passage of the fluid mixture through or along an
    alternating electrostatic field established between two electrode members
    by an alternating current.

    (1)     Note.  Alternating field ionizers, agglomerators, coalescers, or
    collectors are classified herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 80 and 81 for electric field
    separation processes using pulsing or time-varying electric fields (e.g.,
    AC, pulsed DC, etc.).


CLS 96/55
TXT And serially arranged nonelectrical separator:
    Apparatus under subclass 15 having a separator other than an electric field
    separation apparatus arranged in the line of fluid flow.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses do not provide for (a) baffle
    means for directing or spreading flow for distribution within the electric
    field separation apparatus or for contact with ionizing electrodes, or (b)
    electrodes modified to include baffling or flow distributing arrangements
    to direct a flowing stream.  Such apparatus is more properly classified
    below.

    (2)     Note.  This and indented subclasses do not include interstitial,
    porous, or foraminous collector electrodes that provide means for
    simultaneously filtering and precipitating contaminants from a flowing
    stream.  Such apparatus is more properly classified below.

    (3)     Note.  This and indented subclasses will take serially arranged
    separators even broadly recited coming within the definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60+,    for flow distribution means and see (1) Note above.

    65+,    for foraminous, porous, or interstitial collectors and see (2) Note
    above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 315+ for nonelectrical separation
    apparatus with serial diverse separating media.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 63+ for electric field
    separation processes including a diverse type separator.


CLS 96/56
TXT Bypass or modification of flow of gaseous fluid mixture to second
    stage:Apparatus under subclass 55 including means for (a) directing at
    least a portion of the gaseous fluid mixture to pass around the first
    separator or (b) modifying the quantity or quality of gaseous fluid mixture
    flowing from the first separator to the second.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 309+ for nonelectrical separation
    apparatus with means to bypass separating media.


CLS 96/57
TXT Precedent nonelectrical separator:
    Apparatus under subclass 55 in which electric field separation apparatus
    follows downstream of the nonelectrical separator.


CLS 96/58
TXT Separator is single porous filter:
    Apparatus under subclass 57 in which the nonelectrical separator is a
    single foraminous, porous, or perforated filter.


CLS 96/59
TXT Total flow of gaseous fluid mixture through porous collector
    electrode:Apparatus under subclass 55 in which all of the gaseous fluid
    mixture to be treated flows through openings in a porous collector
    electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66+,    for electric field separation apparatus with total flow of gaseous
    fluid mixture through an interstitial or porous collector but without a
    serially arranged nonelectrical separator.


CLS 96/60
TXT Including gas flow distribution means:
    Apparatus under subclass 15 having means or arrangements to direct, guide,
    or limit (including stopping or redirecting) gas flow within the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  The combination of electric field separation apparatus and a
    pump for merely causing gas to flow through the apparatus has not been
    recognized as flow distribution and is not specifically provided for in
    this section of the class.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder are
    intended to provide for flow distribution means comprising (a) baffles and
    deflectors of all types and (b) other structures or fixtures besides flow
    conduits or the apparatus casing which are intentionally included or
    positioned to affect flow distribution or which would present a major
    inherent restriction to gas flow.


CLS 96/61
TXT Spiralling inflow, centrifugal, or whirl generating surface means:Apparatus
    under subclass 60 having inlet means or means within the apparatus
    intimately associated with electrical elements to impart a centrifugal,
    vortical, or cyclonic flow pattern to the gas flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55+,    for serially arranged diverse separators, one of which is a
    vortical separator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 434+ for nonelectrical separation
    apparatus with deflectors and see the notes for related search areas.


CLS 96/62
TXT For contact with ionizing electrode or uniform flow in treating
    zone:Apparatus under subclass 60 in which the means guide or direct gas
    flow (a) into close proximity to a discharging electrode for more complete
    ionization or (b) for obtaining a less turbulent or more uniform
    distribution of flow through the apparatus.


CLS 96/63
TXT Having means for driving gas flow (e.g., fan, blower, etc.):Apparatus under
    subclass 62 which includes a fan, blower, or other means to push or pull
    gas through the apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclass 383 for nonelectrical separation apparatus
    with remote fan or pump for gas flow, subclasses 437+ for nonelectrical
    separation apparatus with deflector and gas pump or fan, and subclasses
    467+ for nonelectrical separation apparatus with other types of gas flow
    effecting means.


CLS 96/64
TXT Perforated baffle or gas diffuser:
    Apparatus under subclass 62 which contains at least one baffle penetrated
    by holes for gas flow or other means to distribute or restrict the flow of
    gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for apparatus with baffling means for gas and liquid applying means
    for an electrode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 434+ for nonelectrical separation
    apparatus with deflector or impingement baffle.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclass 78 for electric field
    separation processes using baffling, deflection, or restriction of gas flow.


CLS 96/65
TXT Collecting electrode modifies gas flow:
    Apparatus under subclass 60 in which the distribution means comprises one
    or more collecting electrodes shaped (e.g., as with a flow guide or
    directing means, etc.) or positioned to modify the flow of gas.

    (1)     Note.  A plurality of collecting electrodes may be arranged in the
    apparatus to provide a gas flow pattern having special characteristics.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60+,    for baffles and perforated ionizing electrodes for directing gas
    flow around or through ionizing electrodes.


CLS 96/66
TXT Total flow of gaseous fluid mixture through interstitial or porous
    collector:Apparatus under subclass 65 in which the collecting electrode or
    electrodes are arranged and fashioned in such manner as to require all of
    the gaseous fluid mixture to flow through apertures, pores, or spaces of
    such electrode(s).

    (1)     Note.  Arrangements of collector means requiring total flow of
    gaseous fluid mixture through such means as fibrous massed material,
    particulate material, and the like are considered to have inherent effect
    or influence on such flow.

    (2)     Note.  Spaces must be small enough to have a substantial effect on
    flow of gaseous fluid mixture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59,     for apparatus with total flow of gaseous fluid mixture through
    porous collector and serially arranged nonelectrical separator.

    62+,    for apparatus with gas flow distribution means for contact with
    ionizing electrode.


CLS 96/67
TXT Zigzag running length:
    Apparatus under subclass 66 in which the collecting electrode is shaped or
    positioned to provide a substantially uninterrupted surface of zigzag
    configuration.

    (1)     Note.  Uninterrupted surfaces of zigzag configuration are read as
    having inherent flow controlling influence on the


            gaseous fluid mixture whether so stated in the patent or not.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclass 521 for nonelectrical separating means of
    zigzag shape.


CLS 96/68
TXT Particle type collector:
    Apparatus under subclass 66 in which the gaseous fluid mixture passes
    through the apertures, pores, or spaces of a particle type collector.


CLS 96/69
TXT Layered, laminated, or coated:
    Apparatus under subclass 65 in which the collecting electrode is composed
    of plural layers.

    (1)     Note.  Only collectors with coatings substantial enough to compose
    complete and distinguishable layers are included in this subclass.


CLS 96/70
TXT Plural separate electrode members aligned in direction of gas
    flow:Apparatus under subclass 65 in which a plurality of separate and
    distinct collecting electrode members are arranged in a serial fashion
    along the direction of gas flow (e.g., as in Fig. 1 below, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  The separate electrode members may be attached to a common
    frame or housing, provided that this attachment is made only at the ends of
    each member.  For this purpose, the "ends" of each member are defined as
    the points most distant from one another, measured perpendicular to the
    direction of gas flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for segmented collecting electrodes.


CLS 96/71
TXT Segmented electrode:
    Apparatus under subclass 65 in which the collecting electrode is composed
    of plural attached segments, abutted or overlapped, to form a single
    combined element (e.g., as in Fig. 2 below, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for similar type collecting electrodes with attached projections.


CLS 96/72
TXT Continuous electrode with integral or attached projections:
    Apparatus under subclass 65 in which the collecting electrode is composed
    of a continuous member with raised sections or connected

            projecting elements extending from its sides or edges (e.g., as in
    Fig. 3 below, etc.).



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     for a zigzag running length collector arranged to allow total flow
    of gaseous fluid mixture therethrough.

    71,     for similar type collecting electrodes without integral or attached
    projections.


CLS 96/73
TXT Flow distribution means for parallel sections:
    Apparatus under subclass 60 in which the flow distribution means is
    effective to restrict or distribute gas flow to or through plural electrode
    sections arranged to provide parallel flow paths.


CLS 96/74
TXT With nonelectrical gas treating or conditioning means:
    Apparatus under subclass 15 which has nonelectrical means to alter a
    characteristic of the gaseous fluid mixture either before or during
    electric field separation or to alter a characteristic of the separated
    gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18+,    for electric field treatment or conditioning apparatus with control
    means responsive to sensed condition.

    52+,    for electric field separation apparatus with vapor or liquid
    contacting means.

    55+,    for electric field separation apparatus with serially arranged
    nonelectrical separator.

    61,     for electric field separation apparatus with spiralling inflow,
    centrifugal, or whirl generating surface means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation: Processes, subclasses 58+, 63+, and 73 for electric
    field separation processes with nonelectrical gas treating or conditioning.


CLS 96/75
TXT Plural diverse electric fields:
    Apparatus under subclass 15 in which there are provided separate electric
    fields for separation or treatment of the gaseous fluid mixture (a) by
    different voltages, currents, or electrode arrangements, or (b) by plural
    electric field separation units to provide effectively different electric
    fields arranged in the direction of flow of the gaseous fluid mixture.

    (1)     Note.  A mere serial or continuous arrangement of electrodes to
    produce an elongated or repetitive field of one effective character is
    classified on some other basis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for electric field separation apparatus using an alternating
    electrostatic field.

    55+,    for serially arranged, diverse type separators.

    73,     for flow regulating means for electric field separation sections in
    parallel flow arrangement.

    83+,    for electrodes supported or retained by a casing or duct wall and
    not including features of voltage regulation or special arrangements for
    electric fields.


CLS 96/76
TXT One or more electrodes common to plural fields:
    Apparatus under subclass 75 in which the electric fields are provided by
    means including arrangements of electrodes such that one electrode or a
    group or array of similar electrodes is common to the separate electric
    fields.


CLS 96/77
TXT Serially arranged ionizing and collecting or agglomerating fields:Apparatus
    under subclass 75 in which the electrode arrangement defines two electric
    fields, one downstream of the other in the direction of flow of the gaseous
    fluid mixture, the upstream field serving primarily to electrically charge
    particles in the gaseous fluid mixture and the downstream field serving
    primarily to collect or coalesce the charged particles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for electric field separation apparatus having plural diverse
    electric fields of other types.

    76,     for serially arranged ionizing and collecting or agglomerating
    fields in which one set of electrodes is common to both fields.


CLS 96/78
TXT Adjacent parallel collector electrodes are differently charged:Apparatus
    under subclass 77 in which alternating collecting electrodes are charged to
    one potential (voltage) and the remaining plates to a second potential.

    (1)     Note.  For example, if a positive potential is applied to the first
    alternating set, then either a negative potential or ground would be
    applied to the remaining electrodes, so that adjacent electrodes would be
    maintained at differing or opposite voltages.


CLS 96/79
TXT Collecting electrodes are flat plates:
    Apparatus under subclass 78 in which the electrodes are in the form of flat
    plates.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60+,    for flat plate collecting electrodes arranged to distribute gas
    flow.


CLS 96/80
TXT With details of voltage supply means or circuitry:
    Apparatus under subclass 15 in which there is more than a nominal
    recitation of a circuit for voltage supply, power pack, or some other
    feature of electric conduction to an electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18+,    for voltage supply means involving control means responsive to a
    sensed condition.

    30+,    for voltage adjustment means interrelated with cleaning.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    220-354 for voltage magnitude control means not restricted to electric
    field separation apparatus as by the inclusion of electrodes.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses and particularly subclasses 530+ for
    miscellaneous circuits having a specific source of supply or bias voltage.


CLS 96/81
TXT Closure interlock or removable section:
    Apparatus under subclass 80 in which means are provided to make or break
    contact between a power source and an electrode by placement or removal of
    a movable member or section.

    (1)     Note.  Closure interlocks or switches for deenergizing the
    electrodes upon gaining access to the apparatus and other nonautomatic
    electrical blocks are classified in this subclass.


CLS 96/82
TXT Circuit portions:
    Apparatus under subclass 80 which includes specific power source components
    connected in the form of a circuit.

    (1)     Note.  Merely including a resistor, capacitor, or transformer, for
    example, is not considered specific enough for this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 500+ for compositions specialized for
    conducting electricity.


CLS 96/83
TXT Electrode retaining or supporting means:
    Apparatus under subclass 15 having means to sustain one or more electrodes
    against gravity in an operative position in the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  For classification herein, at least some modification of the
    electrode for retaining it or some mechanical coupling feature as in the
    case of replaceable units (e.g., a slidably retained assembly, etc.) must
    be specified.

    (2)     Note.  The electrode means may be (a) retained in a unitary
    assembly independent of the apparatus casing or (b) supported directly by
    walls of the apparatus casing.


CLS 96/84
TXT Plural electrode unit assembly type (e.g., unitized, etc.):
    Apparatus under subclass 83 in which plural electrodes are maintained in a
    spaced relationship and are retained as a unit assembly to thereby permit
    simultaneous movement into or out of operative position within the
    apparatus.


CLS 96/85
TXT Disposable (e.g., collapsible or foldable cardboard, etc.):
    Apparatus under subclass 84 in which the unit assembly (e.g., collapsible
    or foldable cardboard, etc.) is not cleaned for reuse, but is disposed of
    and replaced by a new unit.


CLS 96/86
TXT Parallel disk or plate collector unit:
    Apparatus under subclass 84 in which individual means for attracting or
    gathering ionized particles are of flat or planar configuration and have
    comparatively large surface area, and in which each such means is held
    parallel to the others.

    (1)     Note.  The structures of this subclass are usually referred to as
    plate type collectors.  Classified here are collectors comprising flat disk
    or plate members, as contrasted with spherical, tubular, or other such
    members having surfaces of revolution.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76      and 77+, for a parallel disk or plate collector unit which
    comprises one field in a serially diverse field arrangement.

    85,     for parallel plate type disposable collector assemblies.

    87,     for parallel disk or plate type collector arrangements not
    qualifying as unitized assemblies.


CLS 96/87
TXT Parallel disk or plate collector:
    Apparatus under subclass 83 in which individual means for attracting or
    gathering ionized particles are of flat or planar configuration and have
    comparatively large surface area, and in which each such means is held
    parallel to the others.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86,     for parallel disk or plate collectors retained as a unitary
    assembly.


CLS 96/88
TXT With insulation feature:
    Apparatus under subclass 83 in which the electrode retaining or supporting
    arrangement has electrical nonconductor means.

    (1)     Note.  A mere housing or the like to keep parts dry is not
    considered a nonconductor means for this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for nonconducting features other than a mere conductor sheath to
    maintain an electrically insulated condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, particularly subclasses
    137+ for insulators, per se, and for electrical apparatus with insulating
    means not limited to or solely disclosed for use in gas separators (e.g.,
    electric field separation apparatus, etc.).


CLS 96/89
TXT Tensioning means:
    Apparatus under subclass 83 in which means are provided for maintaining an
    electrode under tension, with the tension being due to more than the weight
    of the electrode.


CLS 96/90
TXT Spring or expansible bellows:
    Apparatus under subclass 89 in which the tension is maintained by the use
    of spring means or bellows which may be expanded by stretching, with the
    spring means or bellows connected to the electrode in such a way as to
    maintain tension therein.


CLS 96/91
TXT Hanging weight:
    Apparatus under subclass 89 in which the tension is provided by a hanging
    weight.


CLS 96/92
TXT Suspensory means:
    Apparatus under subclass 83 in which the sustaining means is such as to
    afford support by making contact above the bottommost surface or face of
    the electrode in its normal operating position (e.g., electrode is held at
    the top, middle, etc.).


CLS 96/93
TXT Nonrigid support (e.g., hanging electrode, etc.):
    Apparatus under subclass 92 in which the electrode is supported in such a
    way as to allow swinging movement about the point of support.

    (1)     Note.  The provision of nonrigid damping means to reduce electrode
    movement during use does not exclude placement in this subclass.


CLS 96/94
TXT Movably supported during use or for orientation:
    Apparatus under subclass 83 in which electrode means is sustained against
    gravity in such a manner as to afford movement thereof (a) while it is
    operative as an electrode or (b) for adjustment or orientation without
    disassembly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39+,    for movably mounted electrode assemblies so mounted for cleaning.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclass 77 for electric field
    separation processes involving a continuously moving electrode.


CLS 96/95
TXT Ionizing electrode details (e.g., coil, mat, corona suppression,
    etc.):Apparatus under subclass 15 in which an ionizing electrode stock
    material or composite has been specially altered, configured, or
    constructed (e.g., coil, mat, corona suppression, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Although the vast majority of patents in this section of the
    class must include discharge electrodes, not all patents will be referred
    to this group.  Ionizers claimed by name only and having no unusual
    property will be omitted from this group.

    (2)     Note.  Electrodes having means (a) tending to limit the building up
    of a concentrated charge or (b) preventing the formation of a shortened
    discharge path, to thereby preclude sparkover are included.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 500+ for compositions specialized for
    conducting electricity and electrodes defined solely by their composition.
    For electrodes not classified in Class 252, see the search notes under
    Class 252, subclass 500.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 230+ for
    means injecting ions into the atmosphere.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 58+ for processes of coating, per se,
    wherein the product is electrical.


CLS 96/96
TXT Filamentary or filar form:
    Apparatus under subclass 95 in which the electrode material is comprised of
    fine wire.

    (1)     Note.  A fine-tipped wire supported such that electron flow is
    concentrated off the tip, fine coils of random or specific pitch, spun
    wool, and the like are typical examples of filamentary or filar form
    ionizers.


CLS 96/97
TXT Sharpened point, serrated, or tip discharge:
    Apparatus under subclass 95 in which the ionizing electrode is provided
    with a projecting point or finely dimensioned projection, as compared with
    the remainder or body of the ionizing electrode, or a tip to provide for
    concentrated discharge of electrons.


CLS 96/98
TXT Collecting electrode details (e.g., sheet type, running length web,
    etc.):Apparatus under subclass 15 in which a collecting electrode stock
    material or composite has been specifically altered, configured, or
    constructed (e.g., sheet type, running length web, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66+,    for collectors of interstitial, perforated, foraminous, or porous
    construction through which the gaseous fluid mixture to be separated is
    constrained to flow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 500+ for electrodes defined solely in
    terms of composition and see the search notes under Class 252, subclass 500
    for electrodes not there classified.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 58+ for processes of coating, per se,
    wherein the product is electrical.


CLS 96/99
TXT Dielectric material containing or covering:
    Apparatus under subclass 98 in which the collecting electrode is a
    composite element containing or being coated with a nonconducting
    (insulating) material or with substances having relatively high resistance
    to the flow of electricity.


CLS 96/100
TXT Multiple similar elements or sections (e.g., built up, etc.):Apparatus
    under subclass 98 in which the collecting electrode is comprised of
    multiple units or items all of the same kind placed or secured together to
    thereby define a composite member (e.g., built up, etc.).


CLS 96/101
TXT CHROMATOGRAPHY TYPE APPARATUS:
    Apparatus under the class definition comprising a column containing (a) a
    liquid, known as the "stationary liquid phase," supported by a base of
    solid material to successively sorb therein the different gases in a
    plurality of gases or (b) a solid sorbent to successively sorb thereon the
    different gases in a plurality of gases with or without subsequently
    successively eluting or displacing the sorbed gases with a gas which is
    inert with respect to the sorbed gases and sorbent.

    (1)     Note.  The plurality of gases is usually allowed to flow slowly
    through a column of sorbent.  Different gases will pass at different speeds
    through the column and will eventually be separated into zones.  The zones
    can be eluted by passing an inert gas through the column and collecting the
    various fractions.

    (2)     Note.  Use of a liquid supported by a base of solid material for
    the separation of mixture of gases is  known  as  "gas-liquid
    chromatography" or "GLC." Use of a solid sorbent without a liquid phase
    present is known as "gas-solid chromatography." Other terms used when
    referring to chromatography type apparatus include: "gas chromatography" or
    "GC," "vapor-phase chromatography" or "VPC," "gas-liquid partition
    chromatography," "vapor fractometry," "capillary column gas chromatography"
    or "CC-GC," and "partition chromatography."

    (3)     Note.  Sometimes a "carrier" gas is mixed with or used to propel a
    plurality of gases to be separated through the chromatography apparatus.

    (4)     Note.  The plurality of gases to be separated may be obtained by
    vaporizing a liquid.  The liquid that is injected into the chromatography
    column is vaporized, and then the resulting vapors are separated in the
    chromatography column.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108+,   for solid sorbent apparatus of a more general nature used to sorb
    gases or liquids from a gas phase.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 19.02, 23.22+, and 23.35+ for
    chromatography processes including analysis of eluted or displaced gas.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 82+ for chromatography
    processes.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 198.2+ for apparatus
    and subclasses 635 and 656+ for processes for the purification or
    separation of liquids using chromatography.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 89 for gas chromatography apparatus
    involving chemical reaction and associated with an analyzer, structured
    indicator, or manipulative laboratory device.


CLS 96/102
TXT With control means responsive to sensed condition:
    Apparatus under subclass 101 in which means are provided to detect an
    apparatus or process characteristic or a change therein and to control or
    regulate operation of the apparatus or process based upon the detected
    characteristic or change therein.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass a single means may be used both to detect
    the characteristic or a change therein and to implement an action in the
    apparatus based upon the detected characteristic or change therein.  There
    must be a positive action made by the means because of the detected
    characteristic or change therein.  An example is a pressure relief valve in
    which a certain pressure must be reached before the valve opens to relieve
    pressure differential across the valve.  Another example is a thermostat
    with a bimetallic element in which a certain temperature must be reached
    before the element is deformed enough to trip a switch, thus implementing a
    control action in the apparatus as a result of the temperature or change
    therein.  Apparatus in which no positive action is made by the single means
    as a result of the detected characteristic or change therein is not
    classified in this subclass, but is classified below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18+,    for electric field separation apparatus with similar control means.

    103,    for chromatography type apparatus with programmed, cyclic, or time
    responsive control means.

    109+,   for solid sorbent apparatus with similar control means.

    156+,   for degasifying means for liquid with similar control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 210+ for automatic control means for gas
    or nongaseous constituent discharge, and subclass 270 for sampling,
    weighing, testing, or metering means.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 1+ for gas separation
    processes with control responsive to sensed condition, subclass 25 for
    processes with recording or signaling condition, and subclass 26 for
    processes with timing of operation.


CLS 96/103
TXT With programmed, cyclic, or time responsive control means:
    Apparatus under subclass 101 which is provided with control means not
    directly responsive to a sensed condition for (a) storing coded
    instructions or other data necessary to regulate operation of the
    apparatus, (b) repetitively regulating a sequence of operational steps
    performed in or by the apparatus, or (c) causing various operations to
    occur according to preset timing sequences or to last for predetermined
    durations (e.g., timer switches, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is meant broadly and includes any control
    means which predetermines apparatus operation or regulates repetition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for electric field separation apparatus with similar control means.

    115+,   for solid sorbent apparatus with similar control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclass 271 for apparatus with timing or
    changeable programming means.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclass 26 for processes with timing
    of operation.


CLS 96/104
TXT Plural separate and distinct stages:
    Apparatus under subclass 101 which has two or more separate and distinct
    stages or zones for chromatographic treatment of the plurality of gases
    where these stages may either be contained within the same column or housed
    in separate columns.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55+,    for apparatus with serially arranged electric field and
    nonelectrical separators.

    121+,   for apparatus with plural solid sorbent beds.

    134+,   for solid sorbent apparatus with plural basically diverse
    separating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclass 86 for chromatographic
    processes using plural separate columns.


CLS 96/105
TXT Including injection system or inlet fluid distributor:
    Apparatus under subclass 101 which includes means specifically structured
    and disposed at the chromatography column inlet to inject or distribute the
    plurality of gases or a liquid for treatment therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclass 89 for the process of
    injecting a plurality of gases or a liquid into a chromatography type
    apparatus without causing separation thereof.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    for processes and apparatus for the transfer of fluent material through a
    flow confining system, the source and receiver parts of which are normally
    separable.


CLS 96/106
TXT Having system connector or coupling:
    Apparatus under subclass 101 which is provided with a flow connector or
    coupling in tubing between different sections of a chromatography system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is intended to include only those systems with
    couplings to connect nonchromatography type stages with chromatography or
    nonchromatography type stages.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for apparatus having plural separate chromatographic stages.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, for connectors or tubing couplings, per
    se.


CLS 96/107
TXT Having imbedded baffle or flow distributor:
    Apparatus under subclass 101 which has been constructed with (a) a static
    solid surface member (e.g., deflector, etc.) or (b) other static layer of
    solid material (e.g., nonsorbent particles, etc.) inside the column in
    order to redirect or channel gas flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    for solid sorbent apparatus with a baffle for directing gas flow,
    which may be imbedded in the solid sorbent bed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 434+ for deflectors of diverse type used
    to redirect the flow of gas at some point in the treatment apparatus.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclass 85 for corresponding
    processes.  Patents are not cross-referenced from Class 95, subclass 85 to
    this subclass based only on disclosure.  Therefore, relevant disclosures of
    gas separation apparatus may be found in the process area.


CLS 96/108
TXT SOLID SORBENT APPARATUS:
    Apparatus under the class definition in which a solid sorbent (e.g.,
    particulate or fibrous mass of solids, etc.) is used to retain on its
    internal or external surfaces a constituent of the fluid mixture passing in
    contact therewith.

    (1)     Note.  A solid sorbent is a solid material which separates one or
    more constituents (e.g., gas, vapor, etc.) from a fluid mixture containing
    such constituents in a "quasi-chemical" manner.  The action in most
    instances is that of selective retention (i.e., the sorbent removes only
    that part of the fluid mixture for which it has the greatest affinity).
    The retained constituent cannot be removed by shaking, brushing, or similar
    mechanical action, but can generally be removed by heating, pressure
    reduction, or use of a stripping or denuding fluid.

            A filter (e.g., particulate solids, etc.) has no particular
    "chemical" affinity for a constituent of a fluid mixture.  The separation
    in the case of a filter depends on a mechanical entrapment of solid
    particles because of their relatively large size compared with the
    interstices or spaces between individual elements of the filter.  The
    retained particles can be removed by brushing, wiping, shaking, or similar
    mechanical action.

    (2)     Note.  "Absorption" is the holding of a constituent by cohesion or
    capillary action in the pores of a solid.  "Adsorption" is the ability of a
    sorbent to hold or concentrate gases, liquids, or dissolved substances upon
    its surface.

    (3)     Note.  "Gettering" or use of a "getter" material may involve one or
    more different processes to remove an undesired constituent from a gaseous
    mixture, usually within an enclosed space, by sorption, chemical reaction,
    etc.  Class 96 provides for getter apparatus under the class definition
    except where such apparatus is part of a more comprehensive apparatus
    properly classified elsewhere.  This subclass provides for getter apparatus
    of the solid sorbent type only.  See the search class notes below and the
    class definition for class lines between Class 96 and other applicable
    classes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101+,   for chromatography type apparatus which contains or utilizes a
    solid sorbent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, for processes and apparatus with solid desiccant
    disposed in a refrigeration system.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 82+ and 90+ for
    corresponding chromatography and solid sorption processes, respectively.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 519+ for an
    internal-combustion engine including a charge-forming device having a fuel
    vapor recovery and storage system wherein the fuel vapor storage system is
    an adsorbent canister.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass .7 for receptacles and
    packages for storing gas containing an adsorbent in which the gas is stored
    and subclass 204 for receptacles and packages including means for removing
    water or water vapor from the atmosphere within a container or the surface
    of container content.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 660+ for ion exchange
    or selective sorption processes; subclasses 150+ for apparatus for liquid
    purification or separation consisting of solid contact means to increase
    the surface area of a liquid in a gas-liquid contact device whereby the
    contact is enhanced; and subclasses 263+ for liquid purification or
    separation apparatus of the particulate material type (e.g., ion exchange
    or sand bed, etc.).

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 181.1+ for gas getter compositions for
    electric lamps, electric space discharge devices, and similar devices and
    subclass 184 for absorptive or bindive and chemically yieldive compositions
    under the class definition.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 481 for cathode ray
    tube envelopes with getter or gas and subclasses 547+ and 553+ for electric
    lamp or discharge devices with getter means.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 48+ for electrical or getter type pump apparatus.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, for metal alloys or compositions
    used for gas (e.g., hydrogen, etc.) storage.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 129+ for chemical reactors,
    particularly subclasses 177+ for particulate catalyst beds and other solid,
    extended surface fluid contact reaction means.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, for processes of chemical storage
    and release (e.g., subclass 658.2 for direct decomposition of a binary
    compound containing hydrogen, etc.).

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    subclasses 53+ for manufacturing processes including evacuating,
    degasifying, or getter or fluent material introduction, particularly
    subclass 55 for gettering.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, for solid sorbent, per se; and subclasses 20+ for the
    regeneration of sorbents.  See section III of this class for the line
    between these two classes.


CLS 96/109
TXT With control means responsive to sensed condition:
    Apparatus under subclass 108 in which means are provided to detect an
    apparatus or process characteristic or a change therein and to control or
    regulate operation of the apparatus or process based upon the detected
    characteristic or change therein.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder, a
    single means may be used both to detect the characteristic or a change
    therein and to implement an action in the apparatus or process based upon
    the detected characteristic or change therein.  There must be a positive
    action made by the means because of the detected characteristic or change
    therein.  An example is a pressure relief valve in which a certain pressure
    must be reached before the valve opens to relieve pressure differential
    across the valve.  Another example is a thermostat with a bimetallic
    element in which a certain temperature must be reached before the element
    is deformed enough to trip a switch, thus implementing a control action in
    the apparatus as a result of the temperature or change therein.  A third
    example is a separating medium which experiences a change in mass due to
    accumulation of a separated constituent, causing the separating medium to
    move to a position of nonuse or regeneration.  Apparatus in which no
    positive action is made by the single means as a result of the detected
    characteristic or change therein is not classified in this subclass or the
    subclasses indented hereunder, but is classified below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18+,    for electrical precipitators with similar control means.

    102,    for chromatography type apparatus with similar control means.

    115+,   for solid sorbent apparatus with programmed, cyclic, or time
    responsive control means.

    156+,   for liquid degasifying means with similar control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 210+ for automatic control means for gas
    or nongaseous constituent discharge and subclass 270 for sampling,
    weighing, testing, or metering means.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 1+ for gas separation
    processes with control responsive to sensed condition, subclass 25 for
    processes with recording or signaling condition, and subclass 26 for
    processes with timing of operation.


CLS 96/110
TXT Fluid flow sensing means:

    Apparatus under subclass 109 which is provided with means to detect fluid
    flow or a change therein and to control operation of the apparatus based
    upon the detected fluid flow or change therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclass 23 for processes with control
    responsive to gas flow rate.


CLS 96/111
TXT Concentration sensing means:

    Apparatus under subclass 109 which is provided with means to detect
    concentration of a constituent present in a fluid stream (e.g., humidity,
    etc.) or a change therein and to control operation of the apparatus based
    upon the detected concentration or change therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for electrical separation apparatus with control means responsive
    to concentration or temperature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclass 217 for temperature or humidity responsive
    automatic control means for gaseous or nongaseous constituent discharge.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 8+ for gas separation
    processes with control responsive to concentration.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, for control
    apparatus of this type, per se.


CLS 96/112
TXT Temperature sensing means:

    Apparatus under subclass 109 which is provided with means to detect
    temperature or a change therein and to control operation of the apparatus
    based upon the detected temperature or change therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for electrical separation apparatus with control means responsive
    to concentration or temperature.

    173,    for degasifying means for liquid with control means responsive to
    temperature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclass 217 for temperature or humidity responsive
    automatic control means for gas or nongaseous constituent discharge.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 14+ for gas separation
    processes with control responsive to temperature.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, for control
    apparatus of this type, per se.


CLS 96/113
TXT Pressure sensing means:
    Apparatus under subclass 109 which is provided with means to detect
    pressure or a change therein and to control operation of the apparatus
    based upon the detected pressure or change therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174,    for degasifying means for liquid with control means responsive to
    pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclass 213 for apparatus with gas pressure
    responsive automatic control means for gaseous or nongaseous constituent
    discharge.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclass 15 for processes with control
    responsive to sensed temperature and pressure and subclasses 19+ for
    processes with control responsive to sensed pressure.


CLS 96/114
TXT And programmed, cyclic, or time responsive control means:
    Apparatus under subclass 113 which is also provided with control means not
    directly responsive to a sensed condition for (a) storing coded
    instructions or other data necessary to regulate operation of the
    apparatus, (b) repetitively regulating a sequence of operational steps
    performed in or by the apparatus, or (c) causing various operations to
    occur according to preset timing sequences or to last for predetermined
    durations (e.g., timer switches, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes any control means which maintains an
    operating condition, predetermines apparatus operation, or regulates
    repetition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for electrical separation apparatus with programmed, cyclic, or
    time responsive control means not responsive to a sensed condition.

    103,    for chromatography type separation apparatus with programmed,
    cyclic, or time responsive control means not responsive to a sensed
    condition.

    115+,   for solid sorbent apparatus with programmed, cyclic, or time
    responsive control means not responsive to a sensed condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 271+ for gas treating apparatus with
    timing or changeable programming means.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclass 26 for gas treating processes
    with timing of operation.


CLS 96/115
TXT With programmed, cyclic, or time responsive control means:
    Apparatus under subclass 108 which is provided with control means not
    directly responsive to a sensed condition for (a) storing coded
    instructions or other data necessary to regulate operation of the
    apparatus, (b) repetitively regulating a sequence of operational steps
    performed in or by the apparatus, or (c) causing various operations to
    occur according to preset timing sequences or to last for predetermined
    durations (e.g., timer switches, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes any control means which maintains an
    operating condition, predetermines apparatus operation, or regulates
    repetition.

    (2)     Note.  Apparatus not specifically designed or used as described
    above (e.g., with mere use of a rotating gas distributor, etc.) are more
    appropriately classified below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for electrical separation apparatus with programmed, cyclic, or
    time responsive control means.

    103,    for chromatography type separation apparatus with programmed,
    cyclic, or time responsive control means.

    114,    for solid sorbent apparatus with programmed, cyclic, or time
    responsive control means combined with control means responsive to sensed
    pressure.

    124,    for solid sorbent apparatus with plural solid sorbent beds and
    rotating gas distributor means not combined with control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 271+ for gas treating apparatus with
    timing or changeable programming means.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclass 26 for gas treating processes
    with timing of operation.


CLS 96/116
TXT Regulating or metering means:
    Apparatus under subclass 115 which is also provided with means to maintain
    or adjust an apparatus or process characteristic using regulator or meter
    type components (e.g., programmed pressure regulator, metering valve, flow
    restrictor, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclass 270 for gas treating apparatus with
    sampling, weighing, testing, or metering means.


CLS 96/117
TXT Indicating, signal, or alarm means:
    Apparatus under subclass 115 which is also provided with means to indicate
    or signal an apparatus or process characteristic or change therein (e.g.,
    to indicate the extent of solid sorbent saturation, etc.), or with means to
    alert the condition of such a characteristic.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 274+ for gas treating apparatus with
    signals or indicators (e.g., inspection means, etc.).

    73,     Measuring and Testing, for measuring and testing processes and
    apparatus.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclass 25 for gas treating processes
    with recording or signaling condition.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, particularly subclasses 67+ for alarms and
    subclasses 200+ for indicators.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, for thermal measuring methods and
    devices, particularly subclasses 100+ for thermometers and other devices.


CLS 96/118
TXT Soluble or deliquescent type (e.g., calcium chloride, etc.):Apparatus under
    subclass 108 in which the solid sorbent dissolves in the constituent
    retained or sorbed therein or thereon.

    (1)     Note.  Soluble sorbents of this type are usually composed of a
    metallic salt or brine material used to retain liquids or condensable gases
    from a gaseous fluid mixture.

    (2)     Note.  These soluble type sorbents are also called "hygroscopic"
    materials since they are frequently used to remove moisture from a
    contacting gaseous fluid mixture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclass 91 for corresponding processes
    using soluble or deliquescent material.  Patents are not cross-referenced
    from Class 95, subclass 91 to this subclass based only on disclosure.
    Therefore, relevant disclosures of gas separation apparatus may be found in
    the process area.


CLS 96/119
TXT Supported by holder with drip openings:
    Apparatus under subclass 118 which comprises a support or holder with one
    or more drip openings to allow drainage of the dissolved solid sorbent.


CLS 96/120
TXT Including liquid contacting means:
    Apparatus under subclass 119 which is provided with means to allow the
    entering fluid mixture to contact the dissolved solid sorbent as it drains
    through the holder drip openings.


CLS 96/121
TXT Plural solid sorbent beds:
    Apparatus under subclass 108 which comprises two or more masses of solid
    sorbent which may be either combined within a single housing or distributed
    into separate units.

    (1)     Note.  Plural layers of solid sorbent and support material (e.g.,
    laminated, corrugated, etc.) do not constitute plural beds unless clearly
    separable one from another for staged use (e.g., separate and distinct
    packing units, divided section, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for chromatography apparatus with plural separate stages.

    134,    for solid sorbent apparatus with plural basically diverse
    separating means.

    154,    for solid sorbent which has been layered or laminated on a second
    solid sorbent or nonsorbent support.


CLS 96/122
TXT With recovery or separation means for desorbing fluid:
    Apparatus under subclass 121 which includes a recovery or separation means
    for a fluid used to regenerate the solid sorbent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130,    for plural solid sorbent beds with means to regenerate sorbent but
    without recovery means for desorbing fluid.

    143+,   for solid sorbent apparatus with sorbent regenerating means but
    without plural beds or recovery means for desorbing fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 90+ for solid sorption
    processes which may include regeneration of the solid sorbent.


CLS 96/123
TXT Movable solid sorbent bed (e.g., fluidized bed, etc.):
    Apparatus under subclass 122 in which (a) at least one of the solid sorbent
    beds is arranged for movement, either by physically moving a housing
    containing the solid sorbent or by causing the solid sorbent alone to move
    from one place to another, or (b) the solid sorbent is caused to be moved
    about or fluidized by a gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    for plural solid sorbent beds in which at least one of the beds is
    caused to rotate.

    150,    for a movable or fluidized solid sorbent bed, but without plural
    beds or recovery means for desorbing fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 359+ for
    processes and subclasses 576+ for apparatus utilizing fluid current for
    conveying or suspending of dried solids.

    55,     Gas Separation, subclass 474 for general gas separating apparatus
    with particulate solids movement during use or agitating means therefor.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 107+ for processes using
    moving solid sorbent.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, for pneumatic solids conveyors,
    particularly subclasses 86+ and 136+ for means to fluidize the conveyed
    solids.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 139+ for fluidized bed chemical
    reactors.


CLS 96/124
TXT With rotating gas distributor:
    Apparatus under subclass 121 in which a rotating means is positioned to
    distribute the fluid mixture to be treated over one or more of the solid
    sorbent beds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    for plural solid sorbent beds in which at least one solid sorbent
    bed is rotating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclass 113 for processes utilizing a
    rotating housing containing fixed solid sorbent.


CLS 96/125
TXT Rotating solid sorbent bed:
    Apparatus under subclass 121 in which one or more of the solid sorbent beds
    is rotated about one or more axes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124,    for plural nonrotating solid sorbent beds provided with a rotating
    gas distributor.

    150,    for single movable solid sorbent bed apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclass 113 for processes utilizing a
    rotating housing containing fixed solid sorbent.


CLS 96/126
TXT With heat exchange means:
    Apparatus under subclass 121 which is provided with means to heat or to
    cool the solid sorbent, the fluid mixture, a separated constituent, or a
    gas stream.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes apparatus utilizing heat exchange to
    regenerate or recondition solid sorbent for use after such regeneration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146,    for single solid sorbent bed apparatus with means for regenerating
    the sorbent by heat exchange.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 114+ for solid sorption
    processes with plural indirect heat transfer steps.


CLS 96/127
TXT And means for driving gas flow (e.g., pump, blower, compressor,
    etc.):Apparatus under subclass 126 which is also provided with means for
    driving or effecting gas flow (e.g., pump, blower, compressor, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 467+ for general gas separation
    apparatus with gas flow effecting means.

    417,    Pumps, for pumps used to drive fluid flow.


CLS 96/128
TXT Compressor:
    Apparatus under subclass 127 in which the means for driving gas flow is a
    device used to pressurize gas (e.g., reciprocating piston type, bellows,
    rotary type, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, appropriate subclasses, for pumps and compressors, per se.


CLS 96/129
TXT Zigzag arrangement of flat solid sorbent beds for parallel flow: Apparatus
    under subclass 121 in which flat rectangular solid sorbent beds are
    arranged and secured in a holder device in a zigzag fashion such that gas
    flow is directed through only one layer of sorbent before leaving the
    apparatus.


CLS 96/130
TXT With means for regenerating solid sorbent:
    Apparatus under subclass 121 which is provided with means to remove a
    sorbed constituent from the solid sorbent, thus regenerating the solid
    sorbent for further use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    for plural solid sorbent beds with recovery means for desorbing
    fluid.

    143+,   for solid sorbent apparatus with regenerating means but without
    plural sorbent beds.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 90+ for solid sorption
    processes which may include regeneration of the solid sorbent.


CLS 96/131
TXT Serial:
    Apparatus under subclass 121 in which the plural solid sorbent beds are
    arranged for sequential gas flow.


CLS 96/132
TXT Diverse type:
    Apparatus under subclass 131 in which the serial solid sorbent beds are of
    different types (e.g., material composition, particulate vs. sheet form,
    etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Solid sorbent beds which are merely different in particle
    size or sheet thickness are not of "diverse type" and as such are not
    classified in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134+,   for plural diverse gas separating means with no more than one solid
    sorbent bed.


CLS 96/133
TXT Plural canisters:
    Apparatus under subclass 121 in which two or more containers are used to
    hold the solid sorbent beds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136,    for plural diverse separating means in separate housings or casings.


CLS 96/134
TXT Plural diverse separating means:
    Apparatus under subclass 108 which comprises two or more different types of
    gas separating means, at least one of which must be a solid sorbent (e.g.,
    solid sorbent and mechanical filtering means, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132,    for plural serial diverse type solid sorbent beds.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 315+ for plural serial basically diverse
    gas separating media without the use of a solid sorbent.


CLS 96/135
TXT At least one a dispersed or impregnated solid sorbent bed:
    Apparatus under subclass 134 which includes at least one bed of solid
    sorbent (a) dispersed in a second sorbing or nonsorbing medium (e.g.,
    sorbent particles bonded in a matrix or set in a mass of filler material,
    etc.) or (b) impregnated with a second nonsorbing material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153,    for dispersed or impregnated solid sorbent beds; not combined with
    any other type of gas separating means.


CLS 96/136
TXT Plural housings or casings for separating components:
    Apparatus under subclass 134 which is provided with plural, usually
    separate, containers for different separating components or means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for chromatography type apparatus with plural separate stages.

    133,    for solid sorbent apparatus with plural solid sorbent beds in
    separate canisters.


CLS 96/137
TXT With means to compress or compact solid sorbent bed:
    Apparatus under subclass 134 in which a spring or other compacting means is
    provided to exert continual physical force on a solid sorbent bed to
    maintain close packing of individual solid particles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149,    for solid sorbent apparatus with means to compress or compact a
    solid sorbent bed; not combined with any other type of gas separating means.


CLS 96/138
TXT Including means to access or replace solid sorbent:
    Apparatus under subclass 134 which is provided with a removable solid
    sorbent cartridge, opening to access solid sorbent, or other means to allow
    replacement of spent or used solid sorbent with new or regenerated solid
    sorbent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151,    for solid sorbent apparatus with means to access or replace solid
    sorbent; not combined with any other type of gas separating means.


CLS 96/139
TXT Including baffle for modifying gas flow (e.g., flow vanes, diffuser,
    etc.):Apparatus under subclass 134 in which a static solid surface member
    (e.g., deflector, etc.) is provided to modify or distribute a gas flowing
    in contact therewith (e.g., flow vanes, gas diffuser, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for chromatography type apparatus with imbedded baffle or flow
    distributor.

    152,    for solid sorbent apparatus with a baffle for directing gas flow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 434+ for general gas separation
    apparatus with deflector means.


CLS 96/140
TXT And means for driving gas flow:
    Apparatus under subclass 139 which is also provided with means for driving
    or effecting gas flow.

     SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127+,   for plural solid sorbent beds with heat exchange means and means
    for driving gas flow, such as a pump, blower, or compressor.

    142,    for solid sorbent apparatus with plural diverse separating means
    and with means for driving gas flow, not including a baffle for modifying
    gas flow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 467+ for general gas separation
    apparatus with gas flow effecting means.


CLS 96/141
TXT And means regenerating solid sorbent:
    Apparatus under subclass 139 which is also provided with means to desorb a
    retained constituent from the solid sorbent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122+,   for plural solid sorbent beds with recovery or separation means for
    desorbing fluid.

    130,    for plural solid sorbent beds with means for regenerating solid
    sorbent.

    143+,   for solid sorbent apparatus with means for regenerating solid
    sorbent, without plural diverse separating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 90+ for solid sorption
    processes which may include regeneration of the solid sorbent.


CLS 96/142
TXT With means for driving gas flow:
    Apparatus under subclass 134 which is provided with means for driving or
    effecting gas flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127+,   for plural solid sorbent beds with heat exchange means and means
    for driving gas flow, such as a pump, blower, or compressor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 467+ for general gas separation
    apparatus with gaseous fluid flow effecting means.


CLS 96/143
TXT With means regenerating solid sorbent:
    Apparatus under subclass 108 which is provided with means to desorb the
    retained constituent from the solid sorbent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122+,   for plural solid sorbent beds with recovery means for desorbing
    fluid.

    130,    for plural solid sorbent beds with means for regenerating solid
    sorbent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 90+ for solid sorption
    processes which may include regeneration of the solid sorbent.


CLS 96/144
TXT Gas contacting means:
    Apparatus under subclass 143 in which the solid sorbent is regenerated by a
    means contacting gas therewith.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 97+, 104+, and 122+ for
    processes of gas separation using solid sorption with sweep gas used to
    help remove a sorbed constituent.


CLS 96/145
TXT Means applies steam to solid sorbent:
    Apparatus under subclass 144 in which the contacting means is provided to
    apply steam to the solid sorbent to effect regeneration thereof.


CLS 96/146
TXT Heat exchanger to regenerate:
    Apparatus under subclass 143 in which the solid sorbent is regenerated by
    heating or cooling means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126+,   for plural solid sorbent beds with heat exchange means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclass 87 for chromatography
    processes with heating or cooling and subclasses 114+ for solid sorption
    processes with plural indirect heat transfer steps.


CLS 96/147
TXT Having mountable casing:
    Apparatus under subclass 108 which is provided with means to support or
    attach a container for the solid sorbent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 490+ for apparatus with fixed media
    securing or retaining means.


CLS 96/148
TXT Storage or food receptacle:
    Apparatus under subclass 147 which is attached to or utilized in connection
    with a storage or food container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 347 for self-basting
    cooking utensils (e.g., wherein condensed vapors are returned to the
    utensil, etc.).

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 366.1 and 367.1+ for vented closures,
    particularly subclasses 369+ for antispattering covers.


CLS 96/149
TXT With means to compress or compact solid sorbent bed:
    Apparatus under subclass 108 in which a spring or other compacting means is
    provided to exert a continual physical force on a solid sorbent bed to
    maintain close packing of individual solid sorbent particles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137,    for solid sorbent apparatus with plural diverse separating means
    also having means to compress or compact a solid sorbent bed.


CLS 96/150
TXT Movable solid sorbent bed (e.g., fluidized bed, etc.):
    Apparatus under subclass 108 in which (a) the solid sorbent is arranged for
    movement, either by physically moving the housing containing the solid
    sorbent or by causing the solid sorbent alone to move from one place to
    another or (b) the solid sorbent is moved about or fluidized by a gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123,    for movable plural solid sorbent beds with recovery means for
    desorbing fluid.

    125,    for plural solid sorbent beds in which at least one of the beds is
    rotated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 359+ for
    processes and subclasses 576+ for apparatus utilizing fluid current
    conveying or suspending of dried solids.

    55,     Gas Separation, subclass 474 for general gas separating apparatus
    with particulate solids movement during use of agitating means therefor.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 107+ for processes using a
    moving solid sorbent.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, for pneumatic solids conveyors,
    particularly subclasses 86+ and 136+ for means to fluidize the conveyed
    material.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 139+ for fluidized bed chemical
    reactors.


CLS 96/151
TXT Including means to access or replace solid sorbent:
    Apparatus under subclass 108 which is provided with a removable solid
    sorbent cartridge, opening to access solid sorbent, or other means to allow
    replacement of spent or used solid sorbent with new or regenerated solid
    sorbent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    for solid sorbent apparatus combined with diverse separating means
    and means to access or replace solid sorbent.


CLS 96/152
TXT Including baffle for modifying gas flow (e.g., imbedded in solid sorbent,
    etc.):Apparatus under subclass 108 in which a static solid surface member
    (e.g., deflector, etc.) is provided to modify or distribute gas flowing in
    contact therewith, such as might be imbedded in a solid sorbent bed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for chromatography type apparatus with imbedded baffle or flow
    distributor.

    139,    for solid sorbent apparatus with plural diverse separating means
    and a baffle for directing gas flow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 434+ for general gas separation
    apparatus with deflector means.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 285+ for liquid
    purification or separation apparatus of the particulate material type
    (e.g., ion exchange or sand bed, etc.) provided with at least one baffle
    completely or partially embedded in the particulate material.


CLS 96/153
TXT Dispersed or impregnated solid sorbent bed:
    Apparatus under subclass 108 in which the solid sorbent is (a) dispersed in
    a second sorbing or nonsorbing medium (e.g., sorbent particles bonded in a
    matrix or set in a mass of filler material, etc.) or (b) impregnated with a
    second nonsorbing material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135,    for dispersed or impregnated solid sorbent beds combined with other
    basically diverse separating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, appropriate subclasses for dispersed or impregnated solid
    sorbents, per se, and for the process of making the same.  See section III
    of this class for the line between these two classes.


CLS 96/154
TXT Layered or laminated (e.g., solid sorbent on support material,
    etc.):Apparatus under subclass 108 in which the solid sorbent is
    distributed as a distinct layer on or between laminates of a second solid
    sorbent or nonsorbent support material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, appropriate subclasses for layered or laminated solid sorbent or
    support material, per se, and for the process of making the same.  See
    section III of this class for the line between these two classes.


CLS 96/155
TXT DEGASIFYING MEANS FOR LIQUID:
    Apparatus under the class definition which is provided with means to
    eliminate or drive out a gas from a liquid.

    (1)     Note.  In order to distinguish the apparatus of this subclass from
    that used for distillation as found in Class 202, which is used to separate
    a liquid constituent by volatilization from a plurality of liquids, only
    degasifying means providing for the removal of a normally gaseous
    constituent at STP (i.e., standard temperature of 0oC and pressure of 760
    mm Hg) from a liquid will be classified in this subclass.  If, however, a
    constituent is at a temperature above its boiling temperature for a
    particular pressure, then the constituent is presumed to be a gas, and a
    patent to apparatus for removing the constituent will be placed here.  See
    search class notes below.

    (2)     Note.  The apparatus of this subclass may be used to degasify a
    liquid which was formed as a result of a prior system treatment (e.g.,
    regeneration of a liquid that was used to remove a gas from a plurality of
    gases, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134+,   for degasifying means for liquid combined with solid sorbent
    apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 156+ for processes of
    degasifying liquid combined with liquid contacting and subclasses 241+ for
    other processes of degasifying liquid.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, for apparatus used to separate liquids by
    volatilization, the most volatile of which must be a liquid above a
    temperature of 0oC at 760 mm Hg pressure.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, for processes and apparatus for
    separating liquids.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, for apparatus used to mix liquids
    and gases by contacting.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 208+ for apparatus for treating
    liquefied metal by application of vacuum that may include degasification of
    the liquefied metal.

    366,    Agitating, for processes and apparatus providing agitation without
    degasification of liquid.


CLS 96/156
TXT With control means responsive to sensed condition:
    Apparatus under subclass 155 in which means are provided to detect an
    apparatus or process characteristic or a change therein and to control or
    regulate operation of the apparatus or process based upon the detected
    characteristic or change therein.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder, a
    single means may be used both to detect the characteristic or a change
    therein and to implement an action in the apparatus based upon the detected
    characteristic or change therein.  There must be a positive action made by
    the means because of the detected characteristic or change therein.  An
    example is a pressure relief valve in which a certain pressure must be
    reached before the valve opens to relieve pressure differential across the
    valve.  Another example is a thermostat with a bimetallic element in which
    a certain temperature must be reached before the element is deformed enough
    to trip a switch, thus implementing a control action in the apparatus as a
    result of the temperature or change therein.  Apparatus in which no
    positive action is made by the single means as a result of the detected
    characteristic or change therein is not classified in this subclass or in
    the subclasses indented hereunder, but is classified below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18+,    for electrical precipitators with similar control means.

    102,    for chromatography type apparatus with similar control means.

    109+,   for solid sorbent apparatus with similar control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 210+ for automatic control means for
    gaseous or nongaseous constituent discharge and subclass 270 for sampling,
    weighing, testing, or metering means.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 1+ for gas separation
    processes with control responsive to sensed condition, subclasses 25+ for
    processes with recording or signaling condition, and subclass 26 for
    processes with timing of operation.


CLS 96/157
TXT With liquid level sensing means:
    Apparatus under subclass 156 which is provided with means to detect the
    height of a liquid level or a change therein and to control operation of
    the apparatus based upon the detected level or change therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclass 24 for processes with control
    responsive to sensed liquid level.


CLS 96/158
TXT Separator inlet or outlet valve responsive to float level:
    Apparatus under subclass 157 in which a flow control member is positioned
    at a fluid inlet or outlet and is actuated as a result of change in
    position of a liquid level float.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 386+ for other liquid level responsive
    or maintaining systems.


CLS 96/159
TXT Plural floats:
    Apparatus under subclass 158 which has more than one float for sensing
    liquid level.


CLS 96/160
TXT And temperature sensing means:
    Apparatus under subclass 159 which is also equipped with means to detect
    temperature or a change therein and to control operation of the apparatus
    based upon the detected temperature or change therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    for solid sorbent apparatus with control means responsive to sensed
    temperature.

    173,    for other liquid degasifying means with control means responsive to
    sensed temperature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclass 217 for temperature or humidity responsive
    automatic control means for gaseous or nongaseous constituent discharge.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 14+ for gas separation
    processes with control responsive to sensed temperature.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, for control
    apparatus of this type, per se.


CLS 96/161
TXT And pressure sensing means:
    Apparatus under subclass 159 which is also equipped with means to detect
    pressure or a change therein and to control operation of the apparatus
    based upon the detected pressure or change therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for solid sorbent apparatus with control means responsive to sensed
    pressure.

    164,    166, 169, 172, and 174, for other means to degasify liquid with
    control means responsive to sensed pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 15 and 19+ for processes
    with control responsive to sensed pressure.


CLS 96/162
TXT Plural float-controlled valves:
    Apparatus under subclass 158 which has more than one valve actuated by a
    float detecting liquid level.


CLS 96/163
TXT At least one is gas outlet valve:
    Apparatus under subclass 162 in which at least one of the valves is used to
    release gas removed from the liquid under treatment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165+,   for other means to degasify liquid with a gas outlet valve
    responsive to float level.


CLS 96/164
TXT And pressure sensing means:
    Apparatus under subclass 163 which is also equipped with means to detect
    pressure or a change therein and to control operation of the apparatus
    based upon the detected pressure or change therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for solid sorbent apparatus with control means responsive to sensed
    pressure.

    161,    166, 169, 172, and 174, for other means to degasify liquid with
    control means responsive to sensed pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 15 and 19+ for processes
    with control responsive to sensed pressure.


CLS 96/165
TXT Gas outlet valve responsive to float level:
    Apparatus under subclass 158 in which a gas removed from the liquid under
    treatment is released through a valve controlled in response to the
    position of a liquid level float.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163+,   for means to degasify liquid equipped with liquid level sensing
    means and plural valves, at least one of which is a gas outlet valve.


CLS 96/166
TXT And pressure sensing means:
    Apparatus under subclass 165 which is also equipped with means to detect
    pressure or a change therein and to control operation of the apparatus
    based upon the detected pressure or change therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for solid sorbent apparatus with control means responsive to sensed
    pressure.

    161,    164, 169, 172, and 174, for other means to degasify liquid and
    control means responsive to sensed pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 15 and 19+ for processes
    with control responsive to sensed pressure.


CLS 96/167
TXT Centrifugal separating means:
    Apparatus under subclass 165 in which means are provided to separate
    entrained gas (e.g., bubbles, etc.) from the liquid under treatment by
    centrifugal force, causing the gas and liquid to rotate as by tangential
    flow about a central axis which forces the degasified liquid to move away
    from the axis and the separated gas to move toward the axis of rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171,    for tangential flow or centrifugal separating means with liquid
    outlet valve responsive to float level.

    177+,   for centrifugal or rotating defoaming means.

    195+,   for centrifugal type flow modifier with means to reduce pressure.

    216,    for centrifugal type means with flow slinger, spreader, disperser,
    or restrictor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 447+ for fixed gas whirler or rotator
    gas separating means.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclass 185 for liquid contacting
    processes with degasification of liquid by liquid flow modifying or
    mechanical agitating, and subclass 261 for processes of degasifying liquid
    by agitating or liquid flow modifying with the use of centrifugal force.


CLS 96/168
TXT Liquid outlet valve responsive to float level:
    Apparatus under subclass 158 in which degasified liquid is released through
    a valve controlled in response to the level of a liquid level float.


CLS 96/169
TXT And pressure sensing means:
    Apparatus under subclass 168 which is also equipped with means to detect
    pressure or a change therein and to control operation of the apparatus
    based upon the detected pressure or change therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for solid sorbent apparatus with control means responsive to sensed
    pressure.

    161,    164, 166, 172, and 174, for other means to degasify liquid with
    control means responsive to sensed pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 15 and 19+ for processes
    with control responsive to sensed pressure.


CLS 96/170
TXT And recycle means (e.g., for degasified liquid, etc.):
    Apparatus under subclass 168 which is also provided with means to
    recirculate fluid outside the means for degasifying liquid and return it to
    the same for secondary processing (e.g., recycling degasified liquid back
    to the apparatus inlet for further treatment, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  The recirculated fluid may be gas, liquid, or a mixture of
    the two (e.g., liquid which has not been completely degasified may be
    recycled for further treatment, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 338+ for gas separation apparatus with
    recycle means.


CLS 96/171
TXT And tangential flow or centrifugal separating means:
    Apparatus under subclass 168 (a) which is also provided with means for
    tangential fluid flow (e.g., having an inlet or outlet arranged for
    directing fluid flow about a central axis, etc.) or (b) in which means are
    provided to separate entrained gas from the liquid under treatment by
    centrifugal force, causing the gas and liquid to rotate about a central
    axis which forces degasified liquid to move away from the axis and
    separated gas to move toward the axis of rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    for centrifugal separating means with gas outlet valve responsive
    to float level.

    177+,   for centrifugal or rotating defoaming means.

    195+,   for centrifugal type flow modifier with means to reduce pressure.

    216,    for centrifugal type means with flow slinger, spreader, disperser,
    or restrictor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 447+ for fixed gas whirler or rotator
    gas separating means.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclass 185 for liquid contacting
    processes with degasification of liquid by liquid flow modifying or
    mechanical agitating and subclass 261 for processes of degasifying liquid
    by agitating or liquid flow modifying with the use of centrifugal force.


CLS 96/172
TXT With pressure sensing means:
    Apparatus under subclass 158 which is equipped with means to detect
    pressure or a change therein and to control operation of the apparatus
    based upon the detected pressure or change therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for solid sorbent apparatus with control means responsive to sensed
    pressure.

    161,    164, 166, 169, and 174, for other means to degasify liquid with
    control means responsive to sensed pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 15 and 19+ for processes
    with control responsive to sensed pressure.


CLS 96/173
TXT With temperature sensing means:
    Apparatus under subclass 156 which is provided with means to detect
    temperature or a change therein and to control operation of the apparatus
    based upon the detected temperature or change therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    for solid sorbent apparatus with control means responsive to sensed
    temperature.

    160,    for means to degasify liquid with separator inlet or outlet valve
    responsive to plural floats and temperature sensing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclass 217 for temperature or humidity responsive
    automatic control means for gaseous or nongaseous constituent discharge.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 14+ for gas separation
    processes with control responsive to sensed temperature.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, for control
    apparatus of this type, per se.


CLS 96/174
TXT With pressure sensing means:
    Apparatus under subclass 156 which is provided with means to detect
    pressure or a change therein and to control operation of the apparatus
    based upon the detected pressure or change therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for solid sorbent apparatus with control means responsive to sensed
    pressure.

    161,    164, 166, 169, and 172, for other means to degasify liquid with
    control means responsive to sensed pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclass 213 for gas separation apparatus with gas
    pressure responsive automatic control means for gaseous or nongaseous
    constituent discharge.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 15 and 19+ for processes
    with control responsive to sensed pressure.


CLS 96/175
TXT Sonic means (i.e., using sound waves):
    Apparatus under subclass 155 in which the separation is effected or
    enhanced by the energy of compressional vibratory waves in a fluid medium,
    the waves being below, within, or above the audible spectrum.

    (1)     Note.  Pressure pulses in a fluid generated merely by intermittent
    discharge of a gas are not considered to be compressional vibratory waves
    under this definition.  However, compressional vibratory waves under this
    definition may be produced by intermittent discharge of a gas, as in a
    siren.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176+,   for defoaming apparatus not using sound waves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclass 277 for other gas separation means of the
    sonic type.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclass 30 for processes of
    degasifying liquid using sound waves.


CLS 96/176
TXT Defoaming means:
    Apparatus under subclass 155 in which means are provided to remove a
    substantially stable aggregation of dispersed gas or vapor bubbles (e.g.,
    froth or foam, etc.) from a liquid.

    (1)     Note.  In order to qualify under this definition, the liquid must
    be disclosed as containing a froth or foam prior to treatment.  Apparatus
    for treating mixtures which may foam or merely contain a composition
    predisposed to produce a foam after agitation, etc., are classified below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175,    for defoaming means using sound waves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclass 157 for processes of gas
    separation with liquid contacting and defoaming, and subclass 242 for
    processes of degasifying liquid by defoaming.


CLS 96/177
TXT Centrifugal or rotating separator:
    Apparatus under subclass 176 in which means are provided to separate
    entrained gas (e.g., bubbles, etc.) from the liquid under treatment (a) by
    centrifugal force, causing the gas or liquid to rotate as by tangential
    flow about a central axis which forces degasified liquid to move away from
    the axis and separated gas to move toward the axis of rotation or (b) by a
    rotating separator, causing the liquid to be agitated, breaking a liquid
    film surrounding the gas (i.e., foam) and liberating the entrained gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    for centrifugal separating means with gas outlet valve responsive
    to float level.

    171,    for tangential flow or centrifugal separating means with liquid
    outlet valve responsive to float level.

    195+,   for centrifugal type flow modifier with means to reduce pressure.

    216+,   for centrifugal type means with flow slinger, spreader, disperser,
    or restrictor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 447+ for fixed gas whirler or rotator
    gas separating means.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclass 185 for liquid contacting
    processes with degasification of liquid by liquid flow modifying or
    mechanical agitating, and subclasses  260+  for  processes  of  degasifying
    liquid by agitating or liquid flow modifying.


CLS 96/178
TXT Having flow-through foam restrictor or eliminator (e.g., screen,
    etc.):Apparatus under subclass 177 which is also equipped with a porous
    screen or filter to remove foam (i.e., entrained gas bubbles) from the
    liquid passing therethrough by (a) physically excluding the foam or (b)
    breaking a liquid film surrounding entrained gas (i.e., foam) and
    liberating the entrained gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179,    for defoaming means having flow-through foam restrictor or
    eliminator without a centrifugal or rotating separator.


CLS 96/179
TXT Having flow-through foam restrictor or eliminator (e.g., screen,
    etc.):Apparatus under subclass 176 which is equipped with a porous screen
    or filter to remove foam (i.e., entrained gas bubbles) from the liquid
    passing therethrough by (a) physically excluding the foam or (b) breaking a
    liquid film surrounding entrained gas (i.e., foam) and liberating the
    entrained gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    178,    for defoaming means having flow-through foam restrictor or
    eliminator combined with a centrifugal or rotating separator.


CLS 96/180
TXT Having recycle means (e.g., for foam or separated liquid, etc.):Apparatus
    under subclass 176 which is provided with means to redirect a fluid flowing
    from a separation stage back through an apparatus inlet for secondary
    processing, as in the recycle of collected foam or the corresponding
    separated liquid back to an apparatus inlet for further treatment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 338+ for gas separation apparatus with
    recycle means.


CLS 96/181
TXT And liquid contact means:
    Apparatus under subclass 155 in which means are provided to contact a
    gaseous fluid mixture with a liquid in order to remove a gas from the
    gaseous fluid mixture and means are provided to remove the gas from the
    liquid.

    (1)     Note.  An example of such means would be an extended surface for
    enhanced liquid contact with a gaseous fluid mixture to scrub or sorb a
    constituent from the gaseous fluid mixture, followed by separate means for
    degasifying the liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     for electrical separation apparatus with means for vapor or liquid
    contact.

    120,    for soluble or deliquescent solid sorbent apparatus with means to
    contact a liquid containing dissolved solid sorbent with a gaseous fluid
    mixture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 220+ for gas separation apparatus using
    liquid contact means combined with means to further handle process
    constituents before, during, or after separation.  See the search class
    note to Class 261 below.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 149+ for processes of gas
    separation with liquid contacting.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, for gas and liquid contact
    apparatus, per se, with or without separation, and for gas and liquid
    contact processes, per se, without separation (e.g., humidification, etc.).
     See the class line to Class 261 in section III of this class for further
    details about gas and liquid contact apparatus and processes.


CLS 96/182
TXT With separator for multiple liquids:
    Apparatus under subclass 155 which includes means to separate a mixture of
    two or more liquids.

    (1)     Note.  The separation may be a physical separation into two bodies
    having a fluid interface or may include one or more liquid phases retained
    in a separating media (e.g., filter, etc.), leaving the remaining liquid as
    a separate unretained phase.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclass 421 for other types of gas separation
    apparatus in which a plurality of liquids are separated from each other.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclass 253 for processes of
    degasifying a liquid in which a plurality of liquids are separated from
    each other.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, for distillation apparatus, per se.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclasses 43+ for separatory
    distillation processes including a step of removing a distillate or residue
    by liquid-liquid extraction, and other appropriate subclasses for processes
    in which a distillate includes two immiscible liquids which are separated.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, for processes and apparatus of
    separating or purifying liquids, per se.


CLS 96/183
TXT Reservoir with three or more outlets, each for different fluid:Apparatus
    under subclass 182 which is constructed with a container or compartment
    having at least three discharge conduits, each conduit passing a fluid
    which differs in state or nature from each other fluid passing in other
    conduits.


CLS 96/184
TXT Horizontal reservoir:
    Apparatus under subclass 183 in which the longest axis of the reservoir is
    in a horizontal plane.


CLS 96/185
TXT With heat exchange means:
    Apparatus under subclass 183 which includes a means to heat or cool a
    system fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201,    for liquid degasification apparatus with heat exchange means and
    pressure reducing means.

    218,    for other liquid degasification apparatus with heat exchange means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification and Separation, subclasses 175+ for apparatus
    and 774+ for processes for separating liquids or solids from liquids with
    the aid of heat exchange means.


CLS 96/186
TXT And internal filter or screen (e.g., coalescer, etc.):
    Apparatus under subclass 185 which also includes a filter or screen, such
    as a coalescer device, inside the reservoir.


CLS 96/187
TXT Tank or tank part movably mounted on support (e.g., for deaerating aircraft
    lubricating oil, etc.):Apparatus under subclass 155 in which degasification
    occurs in a reservoir, the whole or any part (e.g., inlet or outlet pipe,
    inner casing, etc.) of which is arranged for movement relative to a fixed
    support.

    (1)     Note.  Patents dealing with the problem of removing air from the
    oil system of an aircraft which assumes various positions in flight are
    found here.


CLS 96/188
TXT Including means to remove mist entrained in gas:
    Apparatus under subclass 155 which is provided with a member or members in
    a gas outlet flow path acting to remove entrained liquid droplets from a
    gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 434+ and appropriate subsequent other
    subclasses for structure of the means to remove mist, per se.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclass 40 for distillation
    processes directed to removing entrained particles of liquid from a vapor.


CLS 96/189
TXT Baffle, filter, or screen:
    Apparatus under subclass 188 which comprises (a) a static solid surface
    interposed in the gas flow path on which the gas impinges, or (b) a mass or
    member through which the gas passes and which retains the liquid droplets.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    197+    and 220, for other liquid degasifying means with a baffle type
    deflector.

    219,    for liquid degasifying means with a fluid filter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 434+, 490+, 520, and 521 for the
    structure of a deflector or filter, per se, for separating a constituent
    from a gaseous fluid mixture; and subclasses 522+ for the specific material
    used in a deflector or filter.


CLS 96/190
TXT Plural, serially arranged:
    Apparatus under subclass 189 which comprises at least two similar or
    dissimilar baffles, filters, or screens, with one arranged downstream from
    the other in the gas flow path.


CLS 96/191
TXT Concentric tubular members:
    Apparatus under subclass 190 in which the baffles, filters, or screens are
    in the form of tubes of different diameters, all having a common axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclass 441 for a similar arrangement of tubes of
    different diameters for reversing the flow of a fluid mixture to separate a
    constituent therefrom.


CLS 96/192
TXT Alternate central and peripheral gas paths:
    Apparatus under subclass 190 in which the baffles, filters, or screens
    comprise two or more members arranged to direct the gas flow through the
    center of one member and around the outside of the next adjacent downstream
    member to provide a gas flow path that is alternately central and
    peripheral to the members placed in series.


CLS 96/193
TXT Pressure reducing means:
    Apparatus under subclass 155 which decreases pressure acting on the liquid
    to cause or facilitate degasification of the liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 172+, 247+, and 266 for gas
    separation processes of various types involving a decrease in pressure
    acting on a liquid.


CLS 96/194
TXT And liquid flow modifier:
    Apparatus under subclass 193 which is also provided with a means to change
    or alter the liquid flow path within the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204+,   for liquid degasifying means with a flow slinger, spreader,
    deflector, disperser, or rotation modifier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 248+ for liquid
    degasification processes with flow modification and pressure varying.


CLS 96/195
TXT Centrifugal type:
    Apparatus under subclass 194 which (a) separates a fluid mixture by
    centrifugal force causing the fluid mixture to spin or whirl as by
    tangential flow about a central axis, forcing denser fluids away from the
    axis and remaining fluids closer to the axis of rotation, or (b) rotates or
    causes the fluid mixture to spin or whirl as by tangential flow about a
    central axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    171, 177+, 208+, and 216+, for centrifugal type separators of this
    class combined with other features.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 447+ for other gas separation apparatus
    in which the fluid mixture is caused to spin or turn about an axis to
    separate a constituent therefrom.


CLS 96/196
TXT Rotating means:
    Apparatus under subclass 195 which is provided with a helical screw,
    impeller, or other means on a rotating shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    171, 177+, 208+, and 216+, for centrifugal type degasifying means
    combined with other features.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 447+ for other gas separation apparatus
    in which the fluid mixture is caused to spin or turn about an axis to
    separate a constituent therefrom.


CLS 96/197
TXT Baffle:
    Apparatus under subclass 194 in which the means to alter the liquid flow
    path is a static solid surface member (e.g., deflector, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189+    and 220, for other liquid degasification means with a baffle type
    deflector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 434+ for the structure of the static
    solid surface member.


CLS 96/198
TXT Plural baffles in series:
    Apparatus under subclass 197 which comprises a plurality of such static
    solid surface members arranged with each member downstream from the
    previous member in the liquid flow path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 442+ for plural deflectors serially
    spaced in a gas stream to separate a constituent therefrom.


CLS 96/199
TXT With heat exchange means:
    Apparatus under subclass 198 which is provided with means to heat or cool a
    constituent of the fluid mixture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201,    for means to degasify liquid with pressure reducing and heat
    exchange means.

    218,    for means to degasify liquid by heat exchange.


CLS 96/200
TXT Spray nozzle:
    Apparatus under subclass 194 which has a nozzle to disperse the liquid
    under treatment into smaller particles.

    (1)     Note.  The liquid under treatment may either pass through the
    nozzle or be broken up by a second fluid which is sprayed from the nozzle
    onto a stream of the liquid under treatment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing for the nozzle structure,
    per se.


CLS 96/201
TXT With heat exchange means:
    Apparatus under subclass 193 which is also provided with means to heat or
    cool a constituent of the fluid mixture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199,    for means to degasify liquid having heat exchange means, plural
    baffles in series, and means for reduction of pressure.

    218,    for general apparatus to degasify liquid by heat exchange means.


CLS 96/202
TXT With gas contacting means:
    Apparatus under subclass 155 which is also provided with means to pass a
    gas through or in contact with the liquid.

    (1)     Note.  The gas contacting means may or may not cause gas to
    separate from the liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 159+ for processes of liquid
    contacting and degasifying liquid by stripping with a gas, and subclasses
    245+ and 263+ for other processes of degasifying liquid with the use of a
    stripping gas.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus for degasifying liquid (e.g., deaerating feed water heater, etc.)
    wherein the liquid is merely contacted with a gas in a chamber or space for
    deaeration thereof.  If apparatus for degasifying liquid by contact with a
    gas has other means to cause gas separation of the liquid with gas
    entrained therein, of the separated gas, or of the separated liquid, then
    the apparatus is classified in Class 96.  See section III of this class for
    an amplification of the line between these two classes.


CLS 96/203
TXT Spray nozzle:
    Apparatus under subclass 202 which has a nozzle to disperse the liquid
    under treatment into smaller particles.


CLS 96/204
TXT Liquid flow slinger, spreader, deflector, disperser, or rotation
    modifier:Apparatus under subclass 155 which is a liquid flow modifier
    comprising (a) a moving member used to throw the liquid in the form of
    drops or spray, (b) a member which causes the liquid to flow in a thin,
    laminar stream, (c) a solid member on which the liquid impinges and is
    deflected, (d) a member which causes the liquid to assume a spray or
    mistlike form, or (e) a member which causes a spinning or whirling motion
    to be imparted to or removed from the flowing liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194+,   for liquid degasifying apparatus with a flow modifier and pressure
    reducing means.

    220,    for other degasifying apparatus including a baffle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 434+ for a deflecting or dispersing
    member, per se, separating a constituent from a fluid stream.


CLS 96/205
TXT And preliminary heat exchange means:
    Apparatus under subclass 204 in which a means to heat or cool a constituent
    of the fluid mixture is positioned in the apparatus to precede the flow
    slinger, spreader, deflector, disperser, or rotation modifier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201,    for heat exchange means combined with pressure reducing means.

    218,    for means to degasify liquid by heat exchange.


CLS 96/206
TXT At inlet to separator:
    Apparatus under subclass 204 in which the liquid flow modifier is
    positioned within, at, or around the discharge end of an inlet conduit to
    the apparatus.


CLS 96/207
TXT Plural, serially arranged:
    Apparatus under subclass 206 in which two or more flow modifying means are
    arranged downstream of one another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    190+,   for means to degasify liquid with plural, serially arranged
    baffles, filters, or screens to remove mist entrained in a gas.

    198+,   for means to degasify liquid with plural baffles in series and
    pressure reducing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 442+ for plural deflectors overlapped
    and spaced serially in a gas flow.


CLS 96/208
TXT Centrifugal type:
    Apparatus under subclass 206 which (a) separates a fluid mixture by
    centrifugal force causing the fluid mixture to spin or whirl as by
    tangential flow about a central axis, forcing denser fluids away from the
    axis and remaining fluids closer to the axis of rotation, or (b) rotates or
    causes a fluid mixture to spin or whirl as by tangential flow about a
    central axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216+,   for a centrifugal type flow slinger, spreader, deflector,
    disperser, or rotation modifier not located at an inlet to the degasifying
    apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 447+ for means which cause a gaseous
    stream to whirl or rotate to separate a constituent therefrom.


CLS 96/209
TXT Tangential inlet:
    Apparatus under subclass 208 in which an inlet is arranged to direct inflow
    along a path other than one which intersects or is parallel to the
    longitudinal axis of the apparatus casing.


CLS 96/210
TXT Including tangential outlet:
    Apparatus under subclass 209 in which an outlet fluid flow conduit is also
    tangential to the apparatus casing.


CLS 96/211
TXT Split or plural inlets:
    Apparatus under subclass 209 in which (a) the inlet is split or divided at
    its discharge end or (b) more than one inlet is provided, at least one of
    which is tangential to the apparatus casing.


CLS 96/212
TXT Including inner and outer casings or plural compartments:
    Apparatus under subclass 209 which is provided with (a) two or more
    casings, at least one being completely enclosed within the other, or (b)
    two or more separate compartments within a single casing.


CLS 96/213
TXT Tangential outlet:
    Apparatus under subclass 208 in which an outlet is arranged with an axis in
    a direction other than one which intersects or is parallel to the
    longitudinal axis of the casing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS;

    210,    for apparatus with both tangential inlet and outlet.


CLS 96/214
TXT Rotating means:
    Apparatus under subclass 208 which is provided with a helical screw,
    impeller, or other means on a rotating shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    171, 177+, 195+, and 216+, for centrifugal type degasifying means
    combined with other features.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 447+ for other types of gas separation
    apparatus in which a fluid mixture is caused to spin or turn about an axis
    to separate a constituent therefrom.


CLS 96/215
TXT Plural, serially arranged:
    Apparatus under subclass 204 in which two or more liquid flow modifiers are
    arranged downstream of one another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    190+    and 198+, for other plural, serially arranged members on which a
    fluid mixture impinges for separating a constituent therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 442+ for plural deflecting surfaces
    spaced serially in a gas stream to separate a constituent therefrom.


CLS 96/216
TXT Centrifugal type:
    Apparatus under subclass 204 which (a) separates a fluid mixture by
    centrifugal force causing the fluid mixture to spin or whirl as by
    tangential flow about a central axis, forcing denser fluids away from the
    axis and remaining fluids closer to the axis of rotation, or (b) rotates or
    causes a fluid mixture to spin or whirl as by tangential flow about a
    central axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208,    for a centrifugal type flow slinger, spreader, deflector,
    disperser, or rotation modifier located at an inlet to the degasifying
    apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 447+ for means which cause a gas to
    whirl or rotate to separate a constituent therefrom.


CLS 96/217
TXT Impeller or screw on rotating shaft:
    Apparatus under subclass 216 which is provided with a helical screw or
    impeller on a rotating shaft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 456+ for fixed gas whirler or rotator
    means in the form of a helical vane or baffle within a flow conduit.


CLS 96/218
TXT Heat exchanger to degasify:
    Apparatus under subclass 155 which is provided with a heat exchanger to
    liberate gas from the liquid under treatment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185+,   199, 201, and 205, for means degasifying liquid with nonseparatory
    heat exchange means.


CLS 96/219
TXT And fluid filter:
    Apparatus under subclass 155 which is provided with a fluid filter for
    either the liquid under treatment or a gas separated therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179,    186, and 189+, for other means for degasifying liquid also having a
    filter or screen member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, appropriate subclasses for various gas filters, per
    se, and the structures and materials associated therewith.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses for
    various liquid filters, per se, and structures and materials associated
    therewith.


CLS 96/220
TXT Including baffle:
    Apparatus under subclass 155 which is provided with a static solid surface
    member to direct the flow of liquid under treatment or a gas separated
    therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189+    and 197+, for other means for degasifying a liquid combined with a
    baffle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 434+ for gas separation apparatus with
    various types of deflectors.


CLS 99/
TTL FOODS AND BEVERAGES:   APPARATUS

CLS 99/
TXT INDEX TO CLASS DEFINITION AND NOTES



    I.      CLASS DEFINITION

    II.     DEFINITION OF TERMS

    III.    MISCELLANEOUS CLASS NOTES

    I.      CLASS DEFINITION

    This class comprises apparatus for preparing, treating and preserving
    substances (foods) intended to be eaten and drunk by human beings, or
    animals for their nourishment and not provided for elsewhere.


    II.     DEFINITION OF TERMS

    Terms in the definitions of this class followed by an asterisk(*) will be
    found to be defined in this section.

    ACCESS

    The term "access" is intended to include a cutting means which (a) makes an
    incision (usually at a point adjacent either the stem or tip of the food)
    for the purpose of allowing the same means and/or another means to separate
    the core-pit* from the interior of the food; or, (b) impales the food (and,
    the place of entry of the impaling means frequently is used for the same
    purpose as the incision in (a), immediately above); or, (c) halves the food
    (and, once the food is "halved", an easier "access" is obtained to separate
    the core-pit, seeds, inner membranes, etc.)

    BLOSSOM-END

    This expression relates to the surface area of food at the location of the
    natural attachment to the food of the flower or calyx of food such as a
    cherry or strawberry and may also include a small portion of adjacent skin;
    the expression is arbitrarily extended to include the tip or root of food
    such as a turnip or potato.

    CORE-PIT

    That portion of an article of food that is located in and around the
    geometrical center of the food; however, the outer periphery of the
    core-pit is NOT necessarily equidistant for the outer periphery of the
    food, (e.g., a generally ellipsoidal "pit" in a generally spherical peach).
     Further, in some varieties of food (e.g., a relatively small variety of
    apple) a drilling or punch-die type means which may remove a substantially
    right circular cylinder section, when aligned with the stem-blossom axis of
    the apple, will usually remove not only the seed pocket but also that
    portion of the apple containing matter connected to both the stem and
    blossom ends of the apple.  Thus, the core-pit portion may include a
    central portion only, or a central portion plus a right-circular-cylinder
    section containing the central portion.

    CORE-PIT

    This expression usually precedes the word "means", and is intended to
    comprehend a "mechanical treatment" which contacts all or a portion of the
    core-pit and then severs, tears away, separates, and/or removes the
    core-pit from the remaining portion of the food.

    DISJOIN (DISJOINING)

    These expressions are used to indicate that one portion of a naturally
    occurring article of food is detached or disunited from an immediately
    adjacent portion of the food without necessarily being spatially separated
    to a significant extent.  For example:  rolling, with some slight pressure,
    a hard-boiled fowl egg will disunite at least part of the bond between the
    outer shell* and the interior of the egg; however, unless the shell is
    totally removed, the membrane between the shell and the interior egg
    portions keeps the shell attached.  Thus, at least portions of the shell
    have been disjoined from the inner portions although the same, or other
    portions of the shell, have not been spatially separated from the inner
    portions.

    EDIBLE

    An object that is subject to consumption by an human or animal by chewing
    or masticating prior to swallowing.

    FOOD

    A man-made or naturally-occurring discrete article consumable by animals or
    humans for nourishment.

    GRAIN

    This term is interpreted to include those seeds to which the term is
    ordinarily applied, e.g., wheat, oats, cottonseed, corn, coffee beans,
    barley, etc., and to exclude larger vegetables such as beets, nuts,
    potatoes, etc.

    HULL or HULLING

    These expressions are treated as being species of skin* disjoining*;
    however, an exception is recognized, as follows:  Grain-hulling equates a
    covering of dirt or similar impurities, with the naturally occurring outer
    covering of grain*.

    REMOVE

    To spatially separate significantly one portion of food from another.

    SEED

    A discrete article, constituting a propagative part of a
    naturally-occurring edible food, usually found in or near the core-pit
    area.  As to human consumption, it is frequently "waste"; but, as to the
    reproduction of the species, it is essential.

    SHELL

    Shell includes those outer coverings of articles of food which fracture
    upon impact, as distinguished from those outer coverings that yield upon
    impact.  Prime example of foods having fractile and/or fracturable outer
    coverings are fowl eggs and nuts.

    SKIN

    That portion of the outer periphery of an article of food that is
    dissimilar with respect to the inner portion of the food in at least one
    (and usually several) of the following respects: color, consistency,
    density, firmness, flexibility, hardness, texture ("rough" vs. "slick" to
    the touch), and toughness (resistance or lack of resistance to "tearing").

    STEM-END

    This expression relates to the surface area of food at the location of the
    natural attachment to the food of a stalk, stem, branch, vine or cap that
    supports an article of food such as a cherry or strawberry and may also
    include a small portion of the adjacent skin; the expression is arbitrarily
    extended to include the area of attachment of the sprout, leaf, stalk or
    foliage of food such as a potato.

    STEMMING

    This expression is arbitrarily assigned as being generic to the separation
    of items such as a blossom, leaf, root, tip, or similar portion of a
    naturally occurring food, in addition to connoting the separation of a stem.

    III.    MISCELLANEOUS CLASS NOTES.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, provides for combined hand-held devices.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, for apparatus for
    removing materials by a draft or current of air, stem, or other gaseous
    fluid, and for apparatus for brushing, beating, scraping, wiping, shooting
    or use of a squeegee, with or without the use of liquids particularly
    subclasses 3.1+, for treating fruit, vegetables, meat or eggs.

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, for apparatus for isolating and
    manipulating fibers so as to place them in condition for the purpose for
    which they are to be utilized, particularly subclasses 2+.

    30,     Cutlery, appropriate subclasses for hand-held devices of that class
    (30).

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, see notes under that
    class (34) definition for the lines with Class 99.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, appropriate subclasses, apparatus for testing and
    treating seed grain in preparation for planting.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses for
    mere storage structure e.g., storage bins but having no additional means
    peculiar to food preservation.

    53,     Package Making, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for packaging
    materials including food.

    56,     Harvesters, for apparatus for cutting or scooping-up crops that
    grow above the ground, even though combined with other cutting or
    comminuting means.

    62,     Refrigeration, for refrigerating apparatus, per se, even though
    limited to foods or beverages.

    83,     Cutting, for general cutting or severing of that class (83) type.
    This class (99) requires separation of different portions of food or
    apparatus that recognizes the food, e.g., means to hold a vegetable so the
    stem-end is cut off.

    100,    Presses, for presses not elsewhere provided for.  See this class
    (99) for devices for removing the juices from citrus fruit where a reaming
    action is employed, such action is employed, such action being deemed
    inherent in a pair of rolls where the rolls are driven at different speeds.
     Also subclasses 94+ of Class 100 for presses not elsewhere provided for
    combined with means for cutting, breaking, piercing or comminuting.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 13+ for apparatus for coating edible
    material.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, for apparatus for cleaning
    fruit or vegetables with liquids.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    for apparatus for filling receivers with fluent material with treatment as
    provided in section III (2) of the class definition of that class (141).

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, for concentration of fluid-borne
    substances by evaporation.

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, for a guide and
    particularly subclass 44+ for orienting means.

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, for a power conveyor and particularly
    subclasses 343.1+ and 373+ for a conveyor having means for orienting the
    conveyed load relative to the conveyor.

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 194+, for
    electrolytic apparatus to treat a food or beverage.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, for packages adapted to contain food.

    220,    Receptacles, for receptacles adapted to contain food.

    222,    Dispensing, for apparatus for dispensing.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, for receptacles adapted
    to contain food.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses for the comminution of food substances and such combinations of
    other treatment therewith as are provided for in Class 241.  See sections
    2, 3, 4, and 10 of the class definition of that class (241) for a complete
    statement of the line.

    250,    Radiant Energy, see section 8 of the Class Definition of class
    (250) for a statement of the line.

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses. Class 269 is the residual
    locus for patents to a device for clamping, supporting and/or holding an
    article in position to be operated on or treated.

    383,    Flexible Bags, for a bag adapted to contain food.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, for general disinfecting, deodorizing,
    preserving, or sterilizing of materials and articles.

    435,    Chemistry: Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 289.1+
    for apparatus for carrying out fermentations.

    451,    Abrading, for an abrading process or apparatus of general
    application.  For example, included in Class 451 is a grain tumbling device
    which presents no abrasive or other material removing surface to the grain
    wherein abrading is effected by mutual engagement of the grains with each
    other.  However, note that a grain container that is either stationary or
    moving is included in Class 99 when provided with a grain contacting member
    which moves the grain in the container for the disclosed purpose of
    removing the husk or adhering impurities, even if using an abradant.

    452,    Butchering, appropriate subclasses, for apparatus for killing and
    dressing animals for food, for linking and stuffing of sausages, for
    cleaning intestines, and for tendering meat.

    554,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 8+ for extraction of oils from
    vegetable material and from animal fats.

    935,    Genetic Engineering:  Recombinant DNA Technology, Hybrid or Fused
    Cell Technology, and Related Manipulations of Nucleic Acids, which provides
    a search collection for processes of altering the genetic structure of
    micro-organisms; genes and methods of modifying genes and their expression;
    vectors and methods of modifying vectors; methods of introducing DNA into a
    cell; micro-organisms, per se, which have had their genetic sequence
    altered by recombinant DNA techniques or by cell fusion or by uptake of
    DNA; testing; separation techniques; apparatus; and methods of use of
    vectors or of the genetically engineered micro-organisms; methods of gene
    therapy or genetic modification of living organisms.


CLS 99/275
TXT Apparatus under the definition which is adapted and designed for making
    beverages or beverage intermediates and not provided for below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    452+,   for treatment of dairy food apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus for electrical treatments of alcoholic or other beverages or
    alcoholic or other liquids.

    435,    Chemistry: Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 289.1+
    for apparatus that includes means for carrying out propagations of yeasts,
    or other living ferments, or diastatic mashings or other fermentations, or
    germinating seeds, or preparing malt, or preserving or treating, or
    containing yeasts or other living ferments, or treating products of
    fermentations, or preparing materials for use in propagating yeasts or
    other living ferments, or for use in fermentations.


CLS 99/276
TXT Apparatus under subclass 275 which includes means that is adapted and
    designed for carrying out primary (first) ethyl alcoholic fermentations,
    combined with means for preparation of the material or treatment of the
    product to make a beverage or combined with both material preparation and
    product treatment to form a beverage or beverage intermediate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry: Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 289.1+
    for apparatus directed to fermentation and prior or subsequent steps.


CLS 99/277
TXT Apparatus under subclass 275 which includes means for treating products of
    primary (first) ethyl alcoholic fermentations for the purpose of making
    beverages, or beverage intermediates, therefrom.

    Search this class, subclass:
    276.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, for apparatus for subjecting alcoholic
    materials to distillations.

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 194 and appropriate
    indented subclasses for apparatus for electrolytic treatment of alcoholic
    beverages.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses, for
    separation of solid matter from liquids, especially subclasses 348+ for
    filters, and subclasses 513+ for gravitational separators.

    435,    Chemistry: Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 289.1+.


CLS 99/277.1
TXT Apparatus under subclass 277 especially adapted for aging, refining, and
    purifying alcoholic beverages and potable alcohols.

    (1)     Note.  For electrolytic apparatus for aging, refining, or purifying
    alcoholic beverages, see Class 204, Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy,
    subclass 194 and appropriate indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 11+ and 330.4 for methods of aging and purifying alcoholic
    beverages.


CLS 99/277.2
TXT Apparatus under subclass 277.1 wherein means are provided for agitating the
    liquid being treated.

    (1)     Note.  For agitating apparatus of general application, see Class
    366, Agitating.


CLS 99/278
TXT Apparatus under subclass 275 which includes means for hopping, or preparing
    hop-extracts, or making or purifying worts, or otherwise preparing
    materials for primary (first) ethyl alcoholic fermentations.

    Search this class, subclass:
    276.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry: Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 289.1+,
    particularly 291.1+, for apparatus for carrying out diastatic mashings or
    other operations that involve, or are subsequent or prior to, fermentations
    of any kind.


CLS 99/279
TXT Apparatus under subclass 275 for subjecting a material containing an
    extractable or infusible beverage substance to the action of an extracting
    or infusing fluid which is usually at an elevated temperature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 255+ for apparatus for dissolving,
    leaching, or extracting a soluble constituent of a nonbeverage material.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    for processes of infusing beverage materials.


CLS 99/280
TXT Infusion apparatus under subclass 279 provided with means to initiate,
    maintain and/or terminate an operation thereof in accordance with the
    functioning of timing means and/or condition responsive means.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this classification, the timing mechanism
    must be of the chronometric type, normally found, per se, in Class 368,
    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, and not mere cycling means,
    such as a cam device.


CLS 99/281
TXT Infusion apparatus under subclass 280, wherein a heating operation is
    controlled by time and/or condition responsive means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    326     and 331, and their indented subclasses, for cooking apparatus
    having automatic heat control.


CLS 99/282
TXT Infusion apparatus under subclass 281 wherein the contact of the infusing
    fluid and the infusive material is initiated, controlled or terminated by a
    time or condition responsive device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    283,    for similar devices having no control of the heat.


CLS 99/283
TXT Infusion apparatus under subclass 280 wherein the contact of the infusing
    fluid and the infusive material is initiated, controlled, or terminated by
    a time or condition responsive device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282,    to complete the search for devices of this type.


CLS 99/284
TXT Infusion apparatus under subclass 279 which is adapted for a different use,
    either as another type of beverage infuser or as any other device by means
    of a modification of its adjustment, assembly, or position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    318+,   for infusive material containing receptacles which are adjustable
    to various positions.


CLS 99/285
TXT Infusion apparatus under subclass 279, including means for gauging,
    signalling, indicating, testing, or facilitating the visual inspection, of,
    the beverage, the beverage material, or the existence or occurrence of some
    condition usually relating to the infusing operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    341     and 342+, for cooking apparatus provided with signals, indicators,
    or observation means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses, for gauges, per se.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclasses.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 377, 602+ and 662 for an inspection window.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, appropriate subclass, for electrical
    signaling systems, especially subclasses 603+ for a signal automatically
    responsive to the condition of a fluent material, and subclasses 309.15+
    for a time controlled signal.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 43, 72+,
    94, 98+, 109, and 244+ for an horological device including an alarm.


CLS 99/286
TXT Infusion apparatus under subclass 279 combined with means for subjecting
    the infusible material or infusing liquid to an operation or manipulation,
    other than heating and prior to infusive contact therebetween, which
    modifies either the physical or chemical state of the material or liquid.

    (1)     Note.  The prior operations of roasting and/or grinding are here
    included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290,    for treatment or handling subsequent to infusive contact.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate
    subclasses, for coffee roasters.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses for coffee grinders, per se, and in other combinations.


CLS 99/287
TXT Infusion apparatus under subclass 279, including means for stirring,
    commingling, or compressing, the infusible materials during the infusing
    operation usually to facilitate formation of the infusion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    348     and 349+, for cooking apparatus with stirring or compressing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 73+ for presses, not elsewhere provided for,
    having means to add material to the pressed material where the material
    added is liquid or steam.


CLS 99/288
TXT Infusion apparatus under subclass 279 including one or more food heating or
    cooking devices combined with beverage infusing apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    339,    for cooking apparatus combined with other cooking or heating means.


CLS 99/289
TXT Infusion apparatus under subclass 279, including mechanism for delivering
    infusible material, i.e., material containing the extractable substances
    into, or withdrawing infusible material from the extracting zone.

    (1)     Note.  The flushing out of adherent infusible material by a washing
    fluid is here included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323.9,  for the feeding or discharging of material to a corn popper.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 95+ for devices for separating a
    predetermined charge of material from the bulk and delivering separated
    charge.


CLS 99/290
TXT Infusion apparatus under subclass 279, claimed in association with means
    for performing some operation other than infusing.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes operations or handling performed on
    the beverage subsequent to the completion of the infusion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    298,    for plural infusor beds or filters.

    323.5   and 357, for cereal poppers or food cookers combined with some
    other operation.


CLS 99/291
TXT Infusion apparatus under subclass 279 which includes two or more devices,
    each operating to extract a distinct beverage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    298,    for devices which contain a plurality of charges of infusible
    material but extract only one beverage.


CLS 99/292
TXT Infusion apparatus under subclass 279 of the type in which infusing liquid
    is forced from a heating and storage vessel, by the pressure of the vapor
    evolved during a heating operation through a suitable channel into an
    extraction vessel and is then caused to revert to the heating and storage
    vessel, through substantially the same channel, by either gravity alone or
    in conjunction with the vacuum produced in the heating and storage vessel
    incident to the condensation of the vapors therein.

    (1)     Note.  These devices are frequently fabricated of glass and are
    sometimes referred to as "glass coffee makers".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    296,    for infusors in which liquid is caused to pass from one vessel to
    another by an inversion of the apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 481 for filters for
    reflex coffee makers.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 396+ or handles for glass bowls.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 19+ for a joint between spaced
    plates (e.g., between the walls of two vessels), and subclasses 223+ for a
    flexible joint between rigid members.

    392,    Electric Resistance Heating Devices, subclass 450 for electric
    heaters, for this type of infusion apparatus.


CLS 99/293
TXT Infusion apparatus under subclass 279 of the type in which (1) the
    infusible material is subjected to the action of a vaporized liquid,
    usually steam, (2) the infusible material is contacted with condensate of
    the infusing fluid, or (3) the infusing device is provided with some
    special means to extract the heat of vaporization of, or to receive the
    condensate of, either the infusing fluid or a volatile constituent of the
    infusible material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 369+ for steaming apparatus and
    subclasses 381+ for water heaters provided with condensers.


CLS 99/294
TXT Infusion apparatus under subclass 293 in which separate means are provided
    to contact the infusible material with both a liquid and a vapor.


CLS 99/295
TXT Infusion apparatus under subclass 279 modified to accept infusible material
    associated in a vendable, disposable, or single use infusing package or
    receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323,    for infusible material containing receptacles adapted for reuse.


CLS 99/296
TXT Infusion apparatus under subclass 279 having oppositely disposed vessels
    communicating through an infusion chamber, and means whereby (1) the
    apparatus may be selectively positioned with either vessel in the subjacent
    position, (2) one vessel may be detached from the other vessel and placed,
    top surface down, on an appropriate support, or (3) the apparatus may be
    tilted to cause the completed or partially completed beverage to pass or
    repass through the infusion chamber.


CLS 99/297
TXT Apparatus under subclass 279 in which the infusible material is carried by
    a piston closely fitted within an elongated chamber containing infusing
    fluid so that movement of the piston requires passage of the infusing fluid
    through the infusible material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    319+,   for infusors in which the infusible material is manipulated
    vertically by means other than a piston.


CLS 99/298
TXT Infusion apparatus under subclass 279, including (1) two or more surfaces,
    receptacles, or compartments, for the reception of the infusible material
    for a single beverage, or (2) one or more surfaces, receptacles, or
    compartments, for the reception of infusible material provided with
    additional means for separating solid material from the beverage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 294+ for diverse
    distinct separators of general utility.


CLS 99/299
TXT Infusion apparatus under subclass 279 in which means are provided to vary
    or adjustably determine the duration or character of contact between the
    infusible material and the infusing fluid, other than by manipulation of
    the infusible material or the supply of infusing fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282     and 283, for automatic control of the infusive contact.

    292,    293, 296, 305, and 306, and any indented subclass, for control of
    the infusive contact by regulation of the time or rate of supply of
    infusing fluid.

    297     and 318+, for control of the infusive contact by manipulation of
    the infusible material.


CLS 99/300
TXT Infusion apparatus under subclass 279, including means to conduct or
    deflect infusing liquid toward the infusible material for contact therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    292,    for the supply of liquid by vapor displacement in pressure-vacuum
    type infusors.

    294,    for the subject matter of this subclass combined with other means
    for the supply of vapor.


CLS 99/301
TXT Infusion apparatus under subclass 300 wherein a body of liquid is arranged
    in the liquid supply so as to prevent escape through the supply of vapors
    present in the infusor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    293+,   for liquid seals which condense vapors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 228 for closures provided with liquid seals.


CLS 99/302
TXT Infusion devices under subclass 300 wherein pressure means are provided to
    induce flow of infusing liquid through the infusible material.

    (1)     Note.  Vacuum means for inducing flow are here included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    292     and 297, for infusor types having force feed incorporated therein.


CLS 99/303
TXT Infusion apparatus under subclass 302 wherein the direction of flow of
    infusing liquid through the infusible material is contrary to the action of
    gravity.


CLS 99/304
TXT Infusion apparatus under subclass 300 wherein the flow of infusing fluid
    through the infusible material is due to the weight of the liquid which is
    in contact with the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    316+,   for gravity feed infusors where there is no means for the supply or
    direction of infusing liquid.


CLS 99/305
TXT Infusion apparatus under subclass 304 wherein means are provided to vary or
    adjust the rate of liquid supply or to determine the total quantity of
    liquid supplied.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    299,    for regulators for varying the flow of liquid through the infusible
    material.

    309,    for valve means which selectively connect anyone of a plurality of
    liquid sources as the supply source.


CLS 99/306
TXT Infusion apparatus under subclass 304, wherein the liquid supply in its
    entirety consists of a vessel of sufficient size to contain substantially
    the entire charge of liquid and apertured to permit a restricted gravity
    discharge thereof upon the infusible material positioned therebelow.


CLS 99/307
TXT Infusion apparatus under subclass 304, wherein the liquid supply includes
    means for elevating or otherwise propelling the liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302+,   for infusors wherein the flow through the infusible material is the
    result of the liquid propelling means and not gravity alone.

    346,    for means for elevating and applying basting liquid to food.


CLS 99/308
TXT Infusion apparatus under subclass 307 wherein liquid after contact with the
    infusible material is returned to the liquid supply means for reuse in
    again contacting the infusible material.


CLS 99/309
TXT Infusion apparatus under subclass 308, wherein means are provided for
    supplying at will either unprocessed liquid or partially infused beverage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    294,    for infusors in which both steam and a liquid are contacted with
    the infusible material.


CLS 99/310
TXT Infusion apparatus under subclass 308 wherein liquid is delivered upwardly
    through a conduit surrounded by a bed of infusible material and is allowed
    to gravitate upon the infusible material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    313+,   for similar infusors where the beverage is not recycled.


CLS 99/311
TXT Infusion apparatus under subclass 310 wherein means are provided to
    discharge liquid in excess of a desired height above the infusible material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 383+ for boil over receptors
    associated with heating vessels.


CLS 99/312
TXT Infusion apparatus under subclass 310 including means to facilitate the
    spreading of liquid over the area of the infusible material, frequently by
    means of perforated spreader plates.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    314     and 315, for distributors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses,
    for specific means for discharging or distributing liquid in the form of a
    spray.


CLS 99/313
TXT Infusion apparatus under subclass 307 wherein liquid is delivered upward
    through a conduit surrounded by a bed of infusible material and is allowed
    to gravitate upon the infusible material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310+,   for similar infusors which recycle the beverage.


CLS 99/314
TXT Infusing apparatus under subclass 313 including means to facilitate the
    spreading of liquid over the area of the infusible material, frequently by
    means of perforated spreader plates.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312     and 315, for distributors.


CLS 99/315
TXT Infusion apparatus under subclass 307 including means to facilitate the
    spreading of liquid over the area of the infusible material, frequently by
    means of perforated spreader plates.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312     and 314, for distributors.


CLS 99/316
TXT Infusion apparatus under subclass 279 wherein there is provided a beverage
    vessel having associated therewith a space or support for infusible
    material.


CLS 99/317
TXT Infusion apparatus under subclass 316 in which the support for the
    infusible material includes a perforated or otherwise pervious receptacle
    within but distinct from the beverage vessel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403+,   for food boilers and deep fat fryers.


CLS 99/318
TXT Infusion apparatus under subclass 317 wherein the inner pervious receptacle
    is arranged so that its position, relative to the outer beverage vessel or
    the liquid therein, can be varied.

    (1)     Note.  Mere removability of the inner receptacle is construed as
    being neither movable nor adjustable within the definition of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284,    for infusors in which the parts may be assembled differently to
    vary the position of the foraminous receptacle.


CLS 99/319
TXT Infusion apparatus under subclass 318 in which the pervious receptacle can
    be moved or adjusted in a straight vertical path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    297,    for pervious receptacles constituting pistons or plungers.


CLS 99/320
TXT Infusion apparatus under subclass 319 in which the means for positioning
    the pervious receptacle includes a buoyant element.


CLS 99/321
TXT Infusion apparatus under subclass 317 in which the pervious receptacle
    includes a flexible, nonmetallic fabric in its construction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    383,    Flexible Bags, various subclasses for cloth receptacles.


CLS 99/322
TXT Infusion apparatus under subclass 317 in which means are provided for
    supporting the pervious receptacle from the top or sides of the beverage
    vessel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    321,    for suspended, pervious receptacles of flexible, nonmetallic
    fabrics.


CLS 99/323
TXT Infusion apparatus under subclass 279 consisting of a reusable pervious
    enclosure for the infusible material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    295,    for infusion apparatus using disposable containers.

    320,    for infusing receptacles, per se, combined with a float.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass .5 for nonbeverage
    infusible material, containing receptacles or packages.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 282 for particulate
    material separators with a movable cartridge; subclasses 314+ for spaced
    filters, and subclasses 323.1+ for plural distinct filters of more general
    utility.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 77+, for the combination of an infusion receptacle and a food
    material, also tea bags, per se.


CLS 99/323.1
TXT Device under subclass 275 wherein the beverage or beverage intermediate is
    contacted by an aeriform fluent substance (other than ambient atmosphere).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324,    for other pertinent classes see, under Search Class, the (c) Note.

    467+,   for means subjecting food to an enclosed modified atmosphere.

    515+,   for means applying a food treating fluid to food.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, for apparatus for carbonating
    beverages.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 474+, for process involving a gas-liquid contact.


CLS 99/323.11
TXT Device under subclass 323.9 wherein means is provided to select a portion
    of the treated cereal having a predetermined size and discharge the same
    from the treating zone, independently of, or to the exclusion of, that
    portion of the material not selected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    469,    for means removing undesirable solid material from food.

    528,    for a screen separating products in combination with grain hulling.

    569+,   for means separating or sorting in combination with shell removal.

    601+,   for means segregating diverse materials in combination with grain
    hulling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, for general purpose
    separation of solids.


CLS 99/323.12
TXT Device under the class definition including apparatus specifically adapted
    for the preparation or treatment of acetic acid derived from fermentation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry: Molecular Biology and Microbiology, for fermentation
    processes and apparatus; see the definition of Class 435, under II, B (1)
    Note, in the reference to Class 99, for the line between Classes 99 and 435.

    562,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 607+, and the notes thereunder, for
    acetic acid.


CLS 99/323.2
TXT Device under subclass 323.1 wherein the gas treating means is carbon
    dioxide or other carbonating substance; and in addition a liquid or solid
    substance is applied which affects the taste of the carbonated beverage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 602+ for a system having a multiple
    inlet and a single outlet.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 129+ for a dispenser having plural sources.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 549 for
    beverage mixing nozzles.


CLS 99/323.3
TXT Device under subclass 275 including means which make a beverage by
    combining a mixture which includes a constituent heated above the ambient
    temperature, or raises the temperature of a beverage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    279+,   for infusors wherein the beverage is heated.


CLS 99/323.4
TXT Device under the class definition; including apparatus adapted to subject
    cereal to sudden changes in pressure to disrupt the same and produce an
    expanded or inflated product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, for apparatus for
    drying grain or applying gas or vapor to grain for various purposes and see
    the statement of the line in the class definition of Class 34.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, and the notes thereto for
    apparatus for cleaning grain or applying liquid to grain that class (134)
    for the line.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclass 247 for apparatus
    including a fibrous material digester including means to subject the
    material to sudden changes in pressure to disrupt the fibers.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, for apparatus for
    comminuting grain.


CLS 99/323.5
TXT Device under subclass 323.4 designed to pop corn or other cereal by heat
    treatment at substantially atmospheric pressure.

    (1)     Note.  The atmospheric pressure in the definition of this subclass
    refers to the ambient conditions in and around the device and the
    individual kernel of popcorn.  This is to be distinguished from that heat
    which penetrates into the interior of a kernel, heats at least some of the
    internal fluid to the point of vaporization, and thus contributes to the
    bursting of a kernel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, appropriate subclasses for a receptacle, disclosed as
    a corn-popping receptacle, but having no structural feature claimed which
    is limited thereto.

    312,    Supports: Cabinet Structure, subclass 236 for a support or cabinet
    provided with a heating means.

    366,    Agitating, appropriate subclasses for agitating apparatus disclosed
    as a corn popping device, but having no claimed limitations restricting it
    thereto.


CLS 99/323.6
TXT Device under subclass 323.5 whose operation is effected by the use of a
    coin, check, or token.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    357,    for a coin controlled cooking device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    194,    Check-Actuated Control Mechanisms, appropriate subclasses for
    check-actuated control mechanisms in general.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses, for apparatus for dispensing
    previously popped corn.


CLS 99/323.7
TXT Device under subclass 323.5 provided with means to initiate, maintain or
    terminate the operation in accordance with the functioning of timing means
    or condition responsive means.

    (1)     Note.  For purpose of this classification, the timing mechanism
    must be of the chronometric type, normally found, per se, in Class 368,
    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280+,   for an automatic control device related to beverage apparatus.

    325+,   for an automatic control device related to cooking apparatus.


CLS 99/323.8
TXT Device under subclass 323.5 including means for contacting the cereal with
    a condiment, usually salt or butter, prior to, during, or subsequent to the
    popping.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    345+,   for basting or solid applying means in combination with cooking.

    494,    for means applying solid or particulate material to food.

    516+,   for means applying a fluid to food.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, particularly subclasses 13+ for an edible-base
    coating.

    222,    Dispensing, for a flavor dispenser, per se.


CLS 99/323.9
TXT Device under subclass 323.5, including mechanism for delivering the cereal
    into, withdrawing cereal from or transporting the cereal between distinct
    points either within or without the heat treating zone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    352+,   for means treating or handling food combined with cooking.

    443,    for a conveyor or movable support combined with a cooking means and
    see the search notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, for dispensing or discharge means, per se.


CLS 99/324
TXT Apparatus under the class definition adapted to receive and support food
    and subject it to a heat, or other energy treatment, sufficient to change a
    chemical or physical property of the food, the change affecting the
    edibility of the food.

    (1)     Note.  The lines existing between this class (99), subclasses 324+,
    Class 126, Stoves and Furnaces, and Class 219, Electric Heating, are as
    follows:

    Class 126 takes (1) food support devices of all types combined with stoves
    or other general heating structures involving the combustion of fuel and
    not limited in their use to the application of heat to the food on the
    claimed food support, (2) shelf, tray, or receptacle type supports, not
    necessarily limited to use with foods, combined with heat or vapor
    enclosures, and either with or without heat, steam, or vapor  generating
    means, and (3) vessels, containing, or capable of containing, a liquid and
    either structurally modified to facilitate the heating of the contents of
    the vessel or combined with a combustion heat generator.

    Class 219 takes (1) food support devices of all types combined with
    electric stoves, or other general, electrical heating structures not
    limited in their use to the application of heat to the food on the claimed
    food support, (2) shelf, tray, or receptacle type supports not necessarily
    limited to use with foods combined with electrical heat generators, claimed
    significantly, and either with or without a heat or vapor enclosure.

    Class 99, subclasses 324+ takes food support means, (1) peculiar to a food,
    shape, or condition, (e.g., can, jar, bottle, or slice holders, spits,
    griddles, waffle irons, sandwich grills, article confining or conforming
    supports), (2) including mechanism for manipulating food during cooking,
    other than mere agitation or stirring (e.g., conveying or bodily moving),
    or (3) including mechanism for treating food (e.g., basting, compressing,
    molding, drip, or gravy segregating), and, in any case, irrespective of
    whether or not a heat, steam, or vapor generator or enclosure is claimed.

    (2)     Note.  The lines existing between this class (99), subclasses 324+
    and Class 198, Conveyors: Power-Driven, and Class 414, Material or Article
    Handling, are as follows:

    Class 198 takes (1) conveyor structures, per se, (2) conveyors, per se,
    provided with means adapting the conveyor to transport material or articles
    between points having unlike fluid pressures, and (3) conveyors, per se,
    combined with an enclosure for all or a part of the conveyor even though
    the enclosure is designated by a particular name, but where no significant
    structure or cooperation of the enclosure is claimed.

    Class 414 takes conveyors combined with an enclosure or tank provided with
    means facilitating or fluid pressure sealing the entry and/or exit of the
    conveyor to or from the enclosure or tank, even though the latter is
    designated by a particular name or is stated to contain a treating fluid,
    but where no structure of the enclosure or tank is claimed other than that
    necessary to effect the handling of the material.

    Class 99, subclasses 324+ takes conveyors designed for the reception of
    food articles or food or beverage containing receptacles when combined with
    (1) a heat generator, (2) a heat exchanger, (3) other means for treating
    material operative during the conveying, or (4) an enclosure or tank where
    the structure thereof is in excess of that necessary for the operation of
    the conveyor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    (a)     For article heating.



    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 349+ for glass annealing or tempering
    apparatus.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 14, 19, 41, 273, and any indented
    subclass for ovens in which articles are enclosed for the heating thereof,
    and see (2) Note above for the stated line.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 391+ for electrically heated ovens,
    and see (2) Note above for the stated line.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclass 249 for treating solid metal with
    heat.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 243+ for cottonseed cookers; and
    subclasses 292+ for apparatus for sterilizing articles by heat.

    432,    Heating, appropriate subclass for a residual heating process or
    structure.

    (b)      For liquid heating.



    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, appropriate subclasses, for heating
    confined bodies of liquid.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 34+ and 344+ for apparatus for
    heating unconfined bodies of liquid and see (2) Note above for the stated
    line.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, appropriate subclasses.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses, for apparatus for
    transferring heat between two or more fluids.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclasses 105+ for distillation
    apparatus.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 426+ for metallic vessels having heating
    jackets (i.e., double boilers), but including no heat transfer feature.

    392,    Electric Resistance Heating Devices, subclasses 341, 394, and 441+
    for apparatus for electrically heating liquids, and see (2) Note above for
    the stated line.

    (c)    For the treatment of solid material with
              a gas.



    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate
    subclasses. See Class 34, class definition, (1) Note for the stated line
    with Class 99.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 19, 273, 369, and their indented
    subclasses, for ovens and steaming apparatus and see (2) Note above for the
    stated line.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 391+ for electrically heated ovens,
    and see (2) Note above for the stated line.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 292+ for apparatus for sterilizing
    articles with a heated atmosphere.

    454,    Ventilation, appropriate subclasses, for apparatus for supplying,
    circulating, or removing gas or vapors present in an enclosure.

    (d)    For the treatment of solid material with
             a liquid.



    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 329+ for
    drying solids by contact with a liquid.

    68,     Textiles: Fluid Treating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 13+ for apparatus for coating edible
    materials.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclass 114 for treating of solid metal
    with a liquid.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 261+ for apparatus for extracting
    nonbeverage substances from a solid material.

    (e)     For the handling of articles



    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses, and see Note (2)
    above, for the stated line.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 139+ for a carrier, for
    potable beverage containers (e.g., cans, bottles, etc.), having means to
    space the containers in a desired arrangement, and additionally having hand
    or finger engaging means to pendulously support the containers.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 5 for ear corn
    holders, subclasses 7+ for pancake turners, and subclass 26.5 for hand
    manipulable discharging receptacles, frequently used to poach eggs, and
    subclass 137 for a hand-held article carriers, especially subclasses 144
    and 172 for a tray or rack having hand-held portions for transporting the
    tray or rack.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, appropriate subclasses for conveying
    solid material by a liquid current.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 147+ for the combination
    of a chamber of a type utilized for a heating function and material
    charging or discharging means therefor, and subclass 287 for the
    combination of a static receptacle of a material conditioning type and
    means to move, or facilitate the movement of, material to, within, or from
    the receptacle.

    (f)      For the shaping of articles



    65,     Glass Manufacturing, appropriate subclasses, for a process of, or
    apparatus for glassworking and/or treating.

    249,    Static Molds, appropriate subclasses, for static molds, per se, for
    shaping material of any composition, e.g., glass, butter, etc.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    appropriate subclasses for (1) apparatus without working means for shaping
    or reshaping edible material into a self-sustaining product, especially
    subclasses 110+ for such apparatus to make a composite edible from a
    preform and fluent material or (2) for meat briquette making means.

    (g)     For supports or containers appropriate
             for the reception of food material.



    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass .5 for infusible material
    containing receptacles and packages.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 14, 71.01+ for food support racks.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, appropriate subclasses, for food receptacles.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 385+ for electrically heated
    enclosures and receptacles, and see Note (2) above, for the stated line.

    220,    Receptacles, appropriate subclasses, for metallic food receptacles.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 3.1 3.5 and
    406 for paper food receptacles.

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, appropriate subclasses for food
    supports involving a cabinet.


CLS 99/325
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 324 provided with means to initiate,
    maintain and/or terminate an operation thereof in accordance with the
    functioning of timing means and/or condition-responsive means.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this classification, the timing mechanism
    must be of the chronometric type, normally found, per se, in Class 368,
    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, and not mere cycling means,
    such as a cam device, nor a thermal time delay device, such as an
    independently heated thermostat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280+,   for beverage infusors having automatic controls.

    285     and 342+, for cooking apparatus having timing means to actuate
    signals or alarms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 29.02+, for hygrometers and
    hygrostats.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 351 and 374 for automatic control
    of liquid heating vessels.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, appropriate
    subclasses.

    337,    Electricity: Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclasses 298+ for a thermostatic switch.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 100+ for a thermometer.


CLS 99/326
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 325, in which both the operations of
    heating and of manipulating the material are controlled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282,    for infusor type cooking apparatus having control of both heating
    and manipulating of material.


CLS 99/327
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 326 wherein both operations are controlled
    by timing mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    328     and 329, for cooking apparatus in which a time interval is
    determined by an independently heated thermostat.


CLS 99/328
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 327 wherein the operations are jointly or
    severally under control of both a timing means and a means directly
    responsive to a thermal condition usually a thermostatic device.


CLS 99/329
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 326 wherein both operations are controlled
    by means which is directly responsive to a thermal condition, usually a
    thermostatic device.  Independently heated thermostats which determine a
    time interval for a cooking operation are here classified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    328,    for cooking apparatus wherein both operations are additionally
    controlled by timing mechanism.


CLS 99/330
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 325 wherein is controlled the operation of
    manipulating the fluid which surrounds the food support or receptacle and
    functions as a medium for the conduction of heat to the food material.

    (1)     Note.  Arrangements where there is a control of heating fluid not
    having access to the cooking support or receptacle are not included here
    but are placed in those subclasses where there is control of the heat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282     and 283, for automatic control of infusing fluids.


CLS 99/331
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 325 in which the operation of heating is
    controlled either in the generation of heat or in the application of heat
    to the food material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281+,   for infusion apparatus having control of heating.

    326+,   for the subject matter of this subclass disclosure in combination
    with the control of the food material.

    330,    for devices where the heat is controlled by supplying a heated
    cooking fluid such as steam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, appropriate
    subclasses.


CLS 99/332
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 331 wherein the heating is under control
    of timing mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327+,   to complete the search.


CLS 99/333
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 332 wherein the heating is additionally
    controlled by means directly responsive to a thermal condition, usually a
    thermostatic device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    328,    to complete the search.


CLS 99/334
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 325 wherein is controlled the operation of
    manipulating the material treated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282     and 283, for infusion apparatus having control means for the food
    material under treatment.

    326+,   for the same subject matter either disclosed or claimed in
    combination with the control of the heat or heater.


CLS 99/335
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 334 wherein the control is by a timing
    mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327+,   to complete the search.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 124+ for
    escapements, per se.


CLS 99/336
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 335 wherein the food material is withdrawn
    from contact with a heated liquid upon the operation of the timing
    mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    330,    for devices in which the heated liquid is withdrawn from contact
    with the food material upon operation of the timing mechanism.

    403+,   for boilers.

    440,    for egg cooking supports.


CLS 99/337
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 324 having (1) means to insure the
    concomitant operation of two or more manually operable controls or
    operators each of which control different operations; and/or (2)
    arrangements which insure the safety of either the cooking apparatus or the
    person operating it by maintaining the apparatus in a passive condition
    upon occurrence of a harmful or dangerous condition there within.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    325+,   for cooking apparatus having controls operated by timing mechanism
    or by a condition-responsive means.


CLS 99/338
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 337 wherein the control or actuation means
    for manipulating the food material and the control means for initiating,
    terminating and/or modifying the heating operation are interlocked for
    dependent control.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    326,    for devices where the interlocked control is automatically
    responsive to timing mechanism and/or condition-responsive means.


CLS 99/339
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 324 comprising a unitary assembly of (1) a
    plurality of cooking devices, or (2) a cooking device and a food heating
    device, each of which devices is adapted to perform a different type of
    cooking or heating operation.

    (1)     Note.  Cooking apparatus comprising two or more devices, all of the
    same or similar types, are classified elsewhere in this class, according to
    the type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    340,    for cooking apparatus for performing a single cooking operation but
    which may be converted from one type of cooking operation to either another
    cooking operation or a food heating operation.


CLS 99/340
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 324 in which a single device, by means of
    a modification of its adjustment, assembly, or position, is adapted for
    different types of cooking or cooking and food heating operations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    339,    for cooking apparatus having a plurality of cooking devices, each
    for a different type of cooking operation.

    376,    for apparatus convertible to either a waffle iron or a sandwich
    grill.


CLS 99/341
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 324 including means for facilitating
    visual inspection of either the food material or some portion of the
    cooking apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  Illuminating means combined with cooking apparatus are here
    classified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    285,    for inspection means for infusers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 88 for
    inspection means associated with apparatus classified in that class.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 200 for ovens with a transparent
    panel.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 662+ for receptacles having transparent
    walls.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 114+ for show-case
    cabinets.

    362,    Illumination, appropriate subclasses for illuminators combined with
    structural devices.


CLS 99/342
TXT Combinations under subclass 324 cooking apparatus with means for gauging,
    signalling, or indicating the existence or occurrence of or testing for
    some condition usually relating to the cooking operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    285,    for similar combinations wherein the cooking apparatus is of the
    beverage infuser type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses, for gauges, per se.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclasses.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 388, for water heating vessels
    combined with signaling or indicating means.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, appropriate subclasses for electrical
    signaling-systems, especially subclasses 309.15+ for a time controlled
    signal, and subclasses 500+ for electrical automatic condition responsive
    indicating systems.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 100+ for a thermometer.


CLS 99/343
TXT Combinations under subclass 342 wherein the indicating means is (1) a gauge
    such as a thermometer, pressure gauge, liquid level gauge, et cetera, or
    (2) is a series of markings to indicate to the operator the degree or
    extent of a condition usually relating to the cooking operation.


CLS 99/344
TXT Combinations under subclass 342 wherein the indication is given by means
    audibly informing the operator of the existence or occurrence of the
    condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, particularly subclasses 67, 137, 147, 148,
    and any indented subclass.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+ for electrical alarm
    systems which are automatically responsive to a condition.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 43, 72+,
    94, 98+, 109, and 244+ for an horological device including an alarm.


CLS 99/345
TXT Combinations under subclass 324 of cooking apparatus with means to (1)
    baste the material during cooking, or (2) apply solid matter such as bread
    crumbs, fat, et cetera, to said material during cooking.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323.8,  for devices for adding butter, salt, or other condiment to popcorn.

    355+,   for cooking devices combined with means for applying solid matter
    to the food after cooking.


CLS 99/346
TXT Combinations under subclass 345 having means, such as a pump, for elevating
    basting liquid from a sump usually below the material to a discharge point
    above said material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    307+,   for beverage infusers having similar means for elevating liquids.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, appropriate subclasses.


CLS 99/347
TXT Combinations under subclass 345 having means for condensing vapors
    resulting from the cooking, plus means for directing condensate upon the
    material being cooked. Here included are the so-called "self-basting"
    cooking receptacles having means arranged over the material so that vapors
    may condense on said means and the liquid may drip down upon the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    293+,   for condenser type beverage infusers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 381+ for condensers combined with
    liquid heating vessels not specific to cooking, and having no means claimed
    for directing condensate back upon the food material being cooked.


CLS 99/348
TXT Combinations under subclass 324 of cooking apparatus with means for
    stirring the material during cooking.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    287,    for beverage infusers combined with agitating means.

    352+,   for means for mixing, stirring, or agitating material prior or
    subsequent to the cooking operation.

    364,    371, 388, 395, 409, and any indented subclass, for cooking
    apparatus having means for agitating other than by stirring or for turning
    the material during cooking.

    443,    and see the Notes thereto, for food conveyors which agitate the
    food thereon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 387 for liquid heating vessels
    combined with heat type agitating or circulating means for the liquid.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 109.1 for a heat exchanger combined with an
    agitator.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 241+ for agitators with movable stirrers.


CLS 99/349
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 324 combined with means for exerting
    mechanical pressure on the food material during heat treatment thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    369,    for hold-down devices associated with filled receptacles.

    372,    385, and any indented subclass, for devices in which the pressure
    element constitutes one of a pair of heating or heat transmission elements
    for substantially heating opposite sides of the food material.

    426+,   for food supports which confine or mold the food material without
    exerting mechanical pressure thereon.

    433,    for devices which clamp together the upper and lower crusts of pies
    while being baked.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 265+ for reciprocating platen presses, not
    elsewhere provided for, having a spring or weight actuating means.


CLS 99/350
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 349 in which the food support encircles
    the article and compresses the food therein, solely by said encirclement
    and not by end closures or the like.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 16 for bale or package
    ties.

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 138.1+ for packaging apparatus including
    means to place a binding about the package in a manner to aid in or
    contribute to the retention of the cover about the contents.


CLS 99/351
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 349 in which the means for exerting
    mechanical pressure includes a spring or other yielding element for
    limiting or maintaining the pressure on the food material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 578+ for an internal closure-like member
    which rests on the unused contents of a container.


CLS 99/352
TXT Combinations under subclass 324 of cooking apparatus and means for
    performing a noncooking operation or process on or an additional
    manipulation of the material cooked, not elsewhere provided for.  The
    operation, process or manipulation may take place prior, concurrent, or
    subsequent to the cooking.

    (1)     Note.  For combinations of cooking apparatus with conveying,
    feeding, turning, or discharging means, see appropriate subclasses under
    the various types of cooking apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    345,    348 and 349+, for other material treating or handling operations.


CLS 99/353
TXT Combinations under subclass 352 of cooking apparatus and means for changing
    the form or shape of the material.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are combinations such as cooking and slicing,
    et cetera.

    (2)     Note. Patents claiming means for merely depositing, feeding, or
    introducing food to a cooking apparatus are classified with the particular
    apparatus claimed, even though the disclosed means likewise shapes the food.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    349+,   for cooking apparatus provided with means to press the material
    during cooking.

    450.1,  for apparatus for making a composite edible including preform
    assembly means with or without shaping or reshaping except for laminating
    within a mold cavity (See the reference to Class 425 below).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, for hand manipulable cutters.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus, for
    apparatus without cooking means to shape or reshape edible material into a
    self-sustaining product, especially subclasses 110+ for such apparatus to
    make a composite edible from a preform and fluent material in a mold cavity.


CLS 99/354
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 353 in which the article formed is an
    annulus or other hollow article, frequently a doughnut.


CLS 99/355
TXT Combinations under subclass 352 wherein the additional treating or handling
    follows the cooking operation.

    (1)     Note.  Cooking vessels combined with draining devices for
    separating the food material from the cooking liquid are here classified.


CLS 99/356
TXT Combinations under subclass 355 wherein the subsequent operation comprises
    placing the cooked material in receptacles or applying closures to the
    filled receptacles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclass 127 for packaging apparatus including
    means to heat or cool the contents of the package.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 81 for receiver filling combined with heating or cooling.


CLS 99/357
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 324 claimed in association with means for
    performing some operation other than cooking.

    (1)     Note.  Operations which constitute a part of the cooking function,
    such as feeding, moving, or discharging the material into, within, or from
    the cooking zone, are not combined operations, but are classified with the
    various types of cooking apparatus.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein are coin operated or coin freed cooking
    devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    285     through 290, 323.5 and 323.8, for cereal  puffing and beverage
    infusing apparatus combined with some other operation.

    323.5   and 323.6, for coin controlled cereal poppers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 541+ for cooking
    receptacles combined with camp or lunch kits.


CLS 99/358
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 324 wherein the food material is heated by
    the passage of an electrical current therethrough.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclasses, for heating of material
    in general by the passage of an electrical current therethrough.


CLS 99/359
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 324 adapted to heat treat food material
    within receptacles which are designed to contain the food until it reaches
    the consumer. Included here are can processors, bottle pasteurizers and
    food jar canning apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324+    and 483, for sterilizing or pasteurizing apparatus for foods and
    beverages in bulk.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 369+ for steaming apparatus in
    general.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, for receptacle cleaning
    apparatus and processes.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 74+ for canning racks for a plurality
    of canning receptacles.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 427+ for carriers or canning racks for
    bottles and the like, having a base depending from a handle and means to
    hold a plurality of said bottles, etc., on said base in a desired
    arrangement, regardless of the material from which the carrier is made.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 146+ for supports for single receptacles.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 292 for apparatus for sterilizing
    articles by heat.


CLS 99/360
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 359 wherein means is provided to transport
    the food containing receptacles from a feeding station to a discharge
    station while undergoing heat treatment.  The feeding or discharging may be
    accomplished either manually or mechanically.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    443,    and see the Notes thereto, for other types of cooking apparatus
    utilizing conveyors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses.


CLS 99/361
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 360 in which the conveyor transports the
    food in turn through a plurality of heat treating devices or areas.  The
    heat treatment may include either heating or cooling of the food material,
    but at least one must be heating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    367+,   for successive treating zones where there is no conveyor structure.


CLS 99/362
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 361, in which the food receptacles are
    transported through the various treating zones or units by the same endless
    conveyor extending through all.


CLS 99/363
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 360, wherein the course of the food
    receptacles through the treating zone can be selected to modify the length
    of travel therein and thereby the duration of the treatment.


CLS 99/364
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 360, in which the food receptacles contact
    a surface or trackway in such a manner that forward motion of the
    receptacles is accompanied by rolling of the receptacle along the surface
    or trackway and about the longitudinal axis of the receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    193,    Conveyors:  Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, subclasses 38+ for the
    structure of the ways.


CLS 99/365
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 364 in which the rollway is in the form of
    a helix.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 778 for power-driven rollers
    tandemly arranged on a helical path.


CLS 99/366
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 360 in which there is provided means to
    transfer a food receptacle into or from the treating chamber without
    release of fluid pressure existing within the chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 217+ for apparatus for
    moving material between zones having different pressures and inhibiting a
    change in pressure gradient therebetween.


CLS 99/367
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 359 providing two or more devices or two
    or more areas of the same device for the heat treatment of food in
    receptacles, at least one such treatment being heating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    361+,   for similar treating means utilizing a conveyor for the receptacles.


CLS 99/368
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 367 in which a treating fluid is
    transferred from one unit or zone to another unit or zone usually to modify
    the character of heat treatment therein.


CLS 99/369
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 359 in which there is provided means for
    exerting a restraining force against the receptacle or its closure, usually
    to prevent deformation or dislocation of the receptacle or its closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    349+,   and see the Notes thereto, for devices exerting mechanical pressure
    directly on food being cooked.


CLS 99/370
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 359 including means for supplying two or
    more treating fluids, either simultaneously or in turn, for contact with
    the food receptacles, at least one of the fluids heat treating the food.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    368,    for a plurality of treating chambers supplied with plural treating
    fluids by an interchange of fluid therebetween.


CLS 99/371
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 359 in which either (1) the treating
    enclosure is so mounted that the same may partake of motion, or (2) the
    support for the food receptacles is adapted to be moved within the
    enclosure during treatment.

    (1)     Note.  The movement usually is for agitating the contents of the
    receptacles or for facilitating loading or unloading of the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    443,    and see the Notes thereto, for movable cooking supports.


CLS 99/372
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 324 including two imperforate movably
    connected heated plates or mold sections adapted to be positioned so as to
    confine and contact food material therebetween.

    (1)     Note.  The surfaces of the plates may be planes or may carry
    designs or configurations.

    (2)     Note.  Waffle irons and sandwich grills are here classified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    422+,   for single heated cooking surfaces.

    428+,   for cooking apparatus wherein one of two opposed surfaces receives
    the food material in contact heating relationship and the other surface (1)
    constitutes a mere cover, (2) is without a substantially continuous contact
    heating relationship with the food, or (3) is not movably connected to the
    first named surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 300+ for presses, not otherwise provided for,
    which have means to treat the material by heating, cooling or drying.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 443+ for electrically heated stove or
    cooking surfaces.


CLS 99/373
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 372, including in combination at least one
    of the following:  (1) means for supplying or facilitating the supply of
    uncooked material, between the cooking surfaces, (2) means for bodily
    transporting both cooking surfaces from a feeding station to a discharging
    station, or (3) means for withdrawing or facilitating the withdrawal of the
    food material from both cooking surfaces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 178 for concurrent pressing and conveying presses
    of the moving compression chamber type, not elsewhere provided for, having
    a piston or platen, subclass 215 for reciprocating presses having means to
    place material on the means which supports the material during pressing,
    and subclass 218 for presses which have means to remove the material
    compacted from the support on which it rested during compression.


CLS 99/374
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 372 consisting of two or more pairs of
    cooking surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291,    339, 367, and any indented subclass and subclasses 416, 448, for
    other cookers having provision for a plurality of like or unlike cooking
    operations.

    373,    for a plurality of pairs of cooking plates arranged on a conveyor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 193+ for plural presses not elsewhere provided
    for.


CLS 99/375
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 372 including means for catching,
    deflecting, accommodating, or severing excess material from the cooking
    surfaces.

    (1)     Note.  The material discharged is usually a surplus of batter,
    cooked food, or cooking fat, not desired for the cooking operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    444+,   and see the Notes thereto, for similar devices associated with
    other cooking apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 98 for presses not otherwise provided for, having
    means to treat material in the press by cutting, breaking, piercing or
    comminuting, and subclasses 104+ for presses, not otherwise provided for,
    having drain means for expressed liquid.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 383+ for liquid heating or cooking
    vessels provided with overflow receptors or directors.


CLS 99/376
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 372 provided with means for readily
    detaching the cooking surfaces from their support or for assembling the
    cooking surfaces by inversion or substitution so as to present any one of
    two or more different surfaces. Apparatus convertible to either a sandwich
    grill or a waffle iron are classified here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    340,    for cooking apparatus convertible to effect a different type of
    cooking.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 226+ and subclass 229 for presses, not
    elsewhere provided for, having a platen movable transversely of the
    compressing direction to a nonuse position.


CLS 99/377
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 372 wherein the pair of heated surfaces is
    bodily moved as a unit, such as to invert, rotate, or adjust as to position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    373,    when the motion is one of conveying from a material feeding station
    to a material discharging station.

    443,    and see the notes thereto, for movably supported cooking devices.


CLS 99/378
TXT Cooking apparatus, under subclass 372, in which there is included some
    electrical structure, over and above an electrical heating element.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are arrangements of connectors or conductors
    supplying electric current to various heating elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity: Conductors and Insulators, appropriate subclasses.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 443+ for electrical heating surfaces
    in general.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for the structure of
    electrical connectors, per se.


CLS 99/379
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 372 in which provision is made for
    accommodating food materials of different or nonuniform thicknesses between
    the heated surfaces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 235 for a hinge, per se, having
    leaves which may be moved and fixed relative to each other; and subclasses
    357+ and 362+ for a hinge in which the leaves are free to translate
    relative to each other.

    100,    Presses, subclass 257 for presses of the reciprocating platen type,
    not elsewhere provided for, and having range of movement adjustment.


CLS 99/380
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 372 in which the opposed heated surfaces
    are significantly claimed as portions of a matrix or mold, and are movably
    jointed to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    428,    430-433 and 439, for cooking molds including dynamic feature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 160+ for movably connected mold sections.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    appropriate subclasses for apparatus without heating means for shaping
    edible fluent material, especially see subclasses 408+ for opposed
    registering female molds and see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 99/381
TXT Cooking apparatus, under subclass 380 in which the mold sections are
    modified to receive two or more distinct foods and mold the same into a
    unitary food article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    383,    for devices adapted to shape a hollow article so that another food
    material may be added subsequent to the cooking.

    432+,   for composite article forming molds.


CLS 99/382
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 380 in which the mold sections define an
    article having an opening therein or therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    442,    for cooking supports for pre-shaped hollow articles.


CLS 99/383
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 382 in which the food article is a
    receptacle, usually disclosed to receive additional food material
    subsequent to the cooking.


CLS 99/384
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 380 in which the mold sections define a
    relatively long, slender article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    441,    for cooking supports shaped to receive an elongate article.


CLS 99/385
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 324 peculiarly adapted to support food
    material in the form of a slice while undergoing heat treatment.  The
    support is noncontinuous, such as a grid, to permit direct action of the
    heat or heated vapor on the material and usually has portions cooperating
    with both sides of the slice.

    (1)     Note.  When the material treated is bread, the operation is known
    as toasting, and when meat, as broiling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    372+,   for nonforaminous slice supports.

    450,    for single grids or surfaces, which although disclosed for
    receiving slices are not necessarily so limited, as by structural
    cooperation with both sides of the slice or delimiting the thickness
    thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 14 and 41, for broiling devices
    associated with a general purpose stove or designed to be incorporated in
    such a stove as a part thereof.


CLS 99/386
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 385 in which means is provided to
    transport the food slice from a feeding station to a discharge station
    while undergoing heat treatment.

    (1)     Note.  The feeding or discharging may be accomplished either
    manually or mechanically.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    443,    and see the notes thereto, for other types of cooking apparatus
    utilizing conveyors.


CLS 99/387
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 386 in which the food slices are stored in
    a stacked condition from which they are delivered to the conveyor, as
    required.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for article dispensing
    devices, per se.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 35+ for removal
    facilitating magazine type cabinets.


CLS 99/388
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 385 including either (1) means to produce
    a particular design character, or lettering on the slice, such as by
    unequal heating of the surface of the slice, through a stencil, or (2)
    means to prevent the unequal heating of the surface of the slice with the
    consequent color variation. "Anti-shadow" devices where the slice support
    is prevented from marking the slice are here classified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401,    for heat baffles, distributors, or enclosures, which also operate
    to equalize the heating of the surface of the slice.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclasses 127+, and see the notes thereto, for stencils.


CLS 99/389
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 385 in which both sides of the slice are
    simultaneously subjected to like heating from (1) a source of heat
    individual with each side of the slice, or (2) a single source of heat with
    suitable deflectors or reflectors for directing the heat to both sides of
    the slice.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    372+,   for opposed heated surfaces contacting the food slice.


CLS 99/390
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 389 including means to move the heat
    source, reflector or deflector toward or away from the slice.

    (1)     Note.  The movement may be for adjustment or may facilitate access
    to the slice.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    372+,   for waffle irons in which heated surfaces are movable relative to
    the food.


CLS 99/391
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 389, in which the slice support or carrier
    is arranged in the device for relative motion.

    (1)     Note.  The motion may be one of adjustment or may facilitate access
    to or manipulation of the slice.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    393,    for other movable or adjustable slice carriers or holders.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, appropriate subclasses for enclosures
    with movable components.


CLS 99/392
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 391 in which the entire movable slice
    support or carrier is adapted to be withdrawn along definite guide means
    and separated bodily from the cooking device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    399,    for other removable slice carriers or holders.


CLS 99/393
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 385 in which the slice support or carrier
    is so mounted in the device that the support or carrier may be moved either
    for adjustment or manipulation of the slice.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    391+,   to complete the search.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, appropriate subclasses for enclosures
    with movable components.


CLS 99/394
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 393 in which the slice carrier or holder
    is movably or adjustably mounted on a handled device, which is, or is
    adapted to be, hand-held during the cooking operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, appropriate subclasses
    for hand-held devices for manipulating or transporting an article.


CLS 99/395
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 393 in which means are provided to turn
    over the food slice relative to its support or carrier, usually to present
    a different surface to the heat source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    397,    and indented subclass, for devices where the support and the food
    slices are so mounted as to be inverted bodily or as a unit and there is no
    turning over of the slice relative to the support or carrier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 7, and indented
    subclass, for pancake turner type hand implements.


CLS 99/396
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 393 in which a series of two or more slice
    carriers or holders are initially located in a series of two or more heat
    treating stations and each carrier or holder may be relocated, in an
    inverted condition relative to the heat source, in a station vacated by
    another carrier or holder of the series.


CLS 99/397
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 393 in which the food slice support or
    carrier is so mounted as to permit bodily rotation through at least one
    hundred-eighty degrees, relative to its mounting, about an axis in, or
    generally parallel to, the plane of the slice.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    396,    to complete the search.


CLS 99/398
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 397 in which the rotational axis of the
    slice support or carrier is bodily movable or adjustable.

    (1)     Note.  The movement frequently provides clearance for the rotation
    of the support or carrier, but, for example, may allow adjustment of the
    spacing of the slice support and heat source.


CLS 99/399
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 393 in which the entire movable slice
    support or carrier is adapted to be withdrawn along definite guide means
    and separated bodily from the cooking device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    392,    for removable slice holders used in an opposed heater type of
    toaster or broiler.


CLS 99/400
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 385 including means to catch, direct, or
    segregate juice or solid particles released by the food slice while
    undergoing heat treatment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    444,    and indented subclasses, and see the notes thereto, for drip
    segregators.


CLS 99/401
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 385 including means to direct, deflect or
    confine heat or heated vapors towards or about a food slice.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    389,    and indented subclasses, for heat deflectors on opposite sides of
    the slice.

    447,    for similar arrangements associated with a single foraminous
    support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 275, for distributing or deflecting
    means associated with an oven.


CLS 99/402
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 385 including opposed cooperating grids
    which are adapted to be relatively displaced.


CLS 99/403
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 324 in which food articles or materials
    are supported or manipulated for heat treating by contact with a body of
    heated liquid.

    (1)     Note.  Operations performed by this apparatus are usually termed
    boiling or deep fat or french frying.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    279,    and indented subclasses, for infusors.

    330     and 336, for automatically controlled cookers involving a cooking
    liquid.


    345,    and indented subclasses, for contacting food with a noncooking,
    basting liquid.

    355,    for drain devices associated with a deep fat fryer.

    359,    for heat treating filled food receptacles with either a heated
    liquid or vapor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 344 and indented subclasses, for
    heating vessels for liquids.

    220,    Receptacles, appropriate subclasses for vessels which include no
    heating feature.


CLS 99/404
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 403, wherein means is provided to
    transport the food from a feeding station to a discharge station while
    undergoing heat treatment by contact with a heating liquid.

    (1)     Note.  The feeding or discharging may be accomplished either
    manually or mechanically.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    443,    and see the notes thereto, for conveyors used in cooking.


CLS 99/405
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 404 in which the conveyor is modified to
    accommodate material having a tendency to float in the cooking liquid.


CLS 99/406
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 405 in which the material while floating
    in the cooking liquid is carried at least in part from the feeding station
    toward the discharging station solely by flow of the cooking liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, appropriate subclasses for hydraulic
    conveyors (no treatment involved).


CLS 99/407
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 403 including means for supplying
    removing, or facilitating the supply or removal of food material from the
    liquid treating support therefor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404,    for feeding or discharging devices associated with conveying
    apparatus.


CLS 99/408
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 403 including means for manipulating,
    accommodating, or separating debris, usually produced by the reaction of
    the cooking liquid and the food material, present in the cooking liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    444,    and indented subclasses, and see the notes thereto, for drip
    segregators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 153+, particularly
    subclasses 167+ and 171, for means for purification of liquids in general
    when combined with structure not classified in Class 210 but not so
    specifically defined as to be provided for elsewhere.


CLS 99/409
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 403, wherein means are provided to (1)
    relocate the food material relative to its treating support, (2) relocate
    the food material relative to the cooking liquid, or (3) relocate the
    treating support in an inverted position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    348,    for apparatus for the mixing of food material by stirring usually
    to obtain a homogeneous mass.

    404,    and indented subclasses for turning or inverting devices associated
    with a conveyor.

    443,    and see the notes thereto, for movable food supports.


CLS 99/410
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 403 wherein the food treating support is
    adjustable or can be assembled in any one of a plurality of superposed
    positions at different levels and in which in one position, usually the
    lowest, the food material is contacted with the cooking liquid.

    (1)     Note.  The various elevated positions may permit cooking at a
    different level in the cooking liquid, cooking by vapor evolved by the
    cooking liquid or draining of the food material to free it of cooking
    liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    319,    for beverage steeper pots having vertically adjustable containers
    for infusible material.

    355,    for draining devices located to one side of the cooking liquid
    vessel or where the draining does not utilize the cooking support.

    417,    for plural food supports in which at least one is an elevated or
    food steaming support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 369 and indented subclasses, for
    steamers, per se.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclass 135 for liquid
    contact apparatus in which a work holder is held in draining position above
    the treating liquid.


CLS 99/411
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 410 wherein the food support, when in an
    elevated position, is sustained by the cooking liquid containing vessel,
    cantilever fashion, i.e., at one side only of the food support.


CLS 99/412
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 410 in which the food support is retained
    in a selected elevated position by reason of a rotary misalignment of
    normally vertically movably cooperating portions of the food support and
    cooking liquid containing vessel.


CLS 99/413
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 410 wherein the food support in its
    elevated position has portions thereof resting on the upper edge of the
    cooking liquid containing vessel.


CLS 99/414
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 410 wherein the food support, in an
    elevated position, is sustained by a jointed or flexible connection.

    (1)     Note.  The bail of the food support is usually one of the elements
    of the flexible connection.


CLS 99/415
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 410 wherein the food support, when in an
    elevated position, derives its support from a part thereof, or a device
    connected therewith which rests on the bottom wall of the cooking liquid
    containing vessel.


CLS 99/416
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 403 in which the food support is provided
    with a plurality of distinct food receiving portions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    448,    and see the notes thereto, for other plural food supports.


CLS 99/417
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 416 wherein a food receiving portion of
    the food support is located in an elevated position relative to another
    food receiving portion, and which portions may be either unitary or
    separable, but at least one contacts food with the cooking liquid.

    (1)     Note.  Certain of the receiving portions may be arranged to
    function as a food steaming support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    410,    for food supports adapted to be positioned at different elevations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 369 and indented subclasses, for
    steaming apparatus.


CLS 99/418
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 403, wherein the food support or a part
    connected therewith rests on the bottom wall of the cooking liquid
    containing vessel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    415,    to complete the search.


CLS 99/419
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 324 including a food support of which
    portions thereof penetrate or pierce the food material and retain the food
    thereon.

    (1)     Note.  The food support is usually pointed so as to form its own
    passage in the food.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    358,    where the impaling means is one or more electrodes.

    442,    where the support is adapted to be inserted in a preformed opening
    in a food article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 322 and indented subclass, for table forks.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 125, and see the note thereto for
    impaling racks.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 49 and indented
    subclasses, for hand forks, and subclass 61, for spears.


CLS 99/420
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 419 wherein means is provided to transport
    the food from a feeding station to a discharge station while undergoing
    heat treatment.

    (1)     Note.  The feeding or discharging may be accomplished either
    manually or mechanically.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    443,    and see the notes thereunder, for the types of cooking apparatus
    utilizing conveyors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 692+, for conveyors having
    article impaling means thereon.


CLS 99/421
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 419 in which the food support is so
    mounted or arranged that the support can be given motion or adjustment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    443,    and see the notes thereto, for movably mounted food supports.


CLS 99/422
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 324 wherein the food receiving support is
    an imperforate, although not necessarily continuous, surface.

    (1)     Note.  Griddles, hot plates, cookie sheets, and solid broiling
    plates are here classified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    372,    and indented subclasses for opposed imperforate heating surfaces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 373 and indented subclasses, for
    heating vessels adapted to contain liquid and subclass 390 and indented
    subclasses, for heat transmitting griddle surfaces.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 7 and indented
    subclass, for implements for manipulating the food on the cooking surface.


CLS 99/423
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 422, combined with (1) means supplying
    food material to, inverting food material on, or removing material from,
    the imperforate surface, or (2) means for supporting or mounting the
    imperforate surface so that the same can be adjusted, moved, transported,
    or hinged.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    443,    and see the notes thereto, for other movably mounted food supports.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 447+ for a shaping surface and means feeding fluent stock
    thereto.


CLS 99/424
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 423 in which the imperforate surface
    includes at least one section which is caused to swing relative to another
    section about an axis located generally in the plane of the surface.

    (1)     Note.  The pivoting of the section is usually disclosed as useful
    for transferring food from one section to another in a turned or inverted
    condition.


CLS 99/425
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 422 including means for separating the
    food and the material exuded therefrom or for accommodating or disposing of
    the exuded material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    444,    and indented subclasses, and see the notes thereto, for drip
    segregators.


CLS 99/426
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 324 wherein the food receiving support is
    shaped or otherwise modified to especially accommodate, shape, or enclose a
    food article having a characteristic shape.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, appropriate subclasses, for food molds, per se, not
    combined with means working or treating the food.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 461+ for a means providing a shaping orifice and subclasses 470+
    for a shaping or casing surface, per se; see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 99/427
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 426 in which the food receiver is so
    mounted or supported that the same can be adjusted, moved, or transported.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    443,    and see the Notes thereto, for other cooking supports which are
    movably mounted.


CLS 99/428
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 426 comprising a mold having stationary
    means for producing a hollow food product.

    (1)     Note.  Molds are here classified which, by either disclosures or
    structural modifications, contain food during a cooking operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 373+ for heating vessels.

    220,    Receptacles, appropriate subclasses.


CLS 99/430
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 426, comprising a mold having scoring or
    severing means which function by relative movement between said means and
    the object being scored or severed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    388,    for marking devices associated with a toaster or broiler.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclasses 127+ for stencils.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 289+ for a shaping or reshaping apparatus combined with
    severing, cutting or scoring means.


CLS 99/431
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 426 wherein a form is coated with batter
    by dipping prior to the cooking.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 26+ for apparatus for coating edible
    material by immersion.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 269 for shaping apparatus comprising a dipping form, per se.

    427,    Coating  Processes, subclass 430.1 for immersion coating processes.


CLS 99/432
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 426 comprising means for shaping preformed
    sheet material.

    (1)     Note.  Receptacles for composite food articles where no feature
    characteristic of the composite article is claimed are in the appropriate
    receptacle classes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    381,    for connected molds modified to receive and shape composite food
    materials.


CLS 99/433
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 432 in which a pie is the article
    supported and means are provided to (1) compress the joint between the
    upper and lower crusts, or (2) shield the joint from the direct action of
    the heat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, appropriate subclasses for packaging apparatus
    including means to apply plural sectioned cover members.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 383 for receptors for the overflow
    from liquid heating vessels.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 4.01+ for extensions positioned on a
    receptacle to prevent the overflow of the contents of the receptacle.


CLS 99/439
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 426 having a female mold combined with a
    dynamic shaping element.


CLS 99/440
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 426 in which the food support is so
    modified as to receive an ovoid or spherical food article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 14 for supporting racks having no
    cooking features.


CLS 99/441
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 426 in which the food support is so
    modified as to receive an elongate cylindrical food article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    358,    for electrode type sausage cookers.

    384,    for hinged or connected baking molds forming elongate articles.


CLS 99/442
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 426 in which the food support is so
    modified or constructed as to receive an annular cored, or other pre-shaped
    hollow article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    382+,   for hollow article forming hinged holds.

    419+,   for devices in which the support itself is adapted to pierce or
    penetrate the article.


CLS 99/443
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 324 in which a food receiver is so mounted
    or supported that the same can be adjusted, moved or transported.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    (I, CONVEYORS)

    289,    for conveyors used in the infusion of beverages.

    323.9,  for conveyors associated with corn poppers.

    360+,   for conveyors for filled receptacle type cookers.

    373,    for conveyors adapted to transport opposed, heated surface type
    cooking plates.

    386+,   for conveyors used in broilers or bread toasters.

    404+,   for devices arranged to convey food articles through a heated
    contact liquid.

    420,    for conveyors having spits for supporting the food articles.

    423+,   for conveyors having imperforate sheets or griddles thereon.

    427,    for conveyors having conforming or molding supports thereon.

    (II Movable Food Supports Other Than Conveyors)

    296,    297, and 318+, for movable supports in a beverage infusor.

    326,    334, and 338+, for movable food supports, automatically controlled.

    371,    for movable supports for food receptacles.

    377,    for movably supported opposed heating plates.

    391,    393, and any indented subclass, for movable slice toaster or
    broiler grids.

    409     and 410, and any indented subclass, for movable supports for food
    in contact with a heating liquid.

    421,    for movably supported spits.

    423+,   for movably supported sheets or griddles.

    427,    for movably mounted forming or molding supports.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 453+ for a female mold and a dynamic mold support or mold
    carrier; see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 99/444
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 324 including food supports having
    combined therewith means for separating the food and the material exuded
    therefrom or for accommodating or disposing of the exuded material.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the food supports usually are open or
    foraminous so that they permit passage of heat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    375,    400, 408, and 425, to complete the search for drip segregating
    devices used in cooking food.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 51 for drip receiving devices
    associated with a liquid fuel burner, and subclasses 383+ for receptacles
    for the overflow of liquid from heating vessels.


CLS 99/445
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 444 including a series of spaced grooved
    bars or strips adapted to support food thereon and conduct the drip liquid
    therealong.


CLS 99/446
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 444 in which the food support has a
    separate container or deflecting surface positioned directly thereunder to
    receive or collect drip liquid falling through openings in the food support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    447,    for supports combined with heat deflectors or distributors,
    frequently positioned beneath the support.


CLS 99/447
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 324 including food supports combined with
    means to direct heat or heated vapors in desired amounts to various
    portions of the support, usually to promote a more uniform cooking of the
    food thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    389,    401, 433, and any indented subclass, for heat distributors
    associated with various types of cooking apparatus.

    446,    for drip receptacles or directors positioned beneath food supports
    and additionally functioning as heat distributors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 273, and 376+ for ovens and
    enclosed water heating vessels.


CLS 99/448
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 324 in which two or more similar food
    supports are associated together to form a unitary device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291,    298, 367, 374, 416, and any indented subclass, for plural food
    supports associated with various types of food apparatus.

    339,    for plural food supports providing for diverse cooking thereon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 20.1+ and 369.2+ for plural ovens
    and steaming chambers.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 500+ for compartmented receptacles having
    no heating or food supporting feature.


CLS 99/449
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 324 in which the food support is adapted
    to be folded, compacted, or extended or to have one portion thereof
    separable.

    (1)     Note.  The devices in this subclass frequently are false bottoms,
    per se, which are adapted to be adjusted to fit various sizes of cooking
    vessels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    349+,   for food supports combined with presser or follower means,
    accommodating foods of different thicknesses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 85 for collapsible bottle or jar racks.

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 155+ for food molds which are adjustable
    as to size.


CLS 99/450
TXT Cooking apparatus under subclass 324 in which food is received directly on
    an open, perforate support which is adapted to pass heat or heated vapors
    through the perforations thereof.

    (1)     Note.  When the foraminous support constitutes a shelf or tray
    adapted to receive an article or receptacle, not necessarily food, and is
    provided with a heated enclosure, classification is in Class 126, Stoves
    and Furnaces, subclasses 19, 273+, or Class 219, Electric Heating,
    subclasses 443+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, (see (1) Note).

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 483+ for strainer
    structures, per se, especially subclass 499 for screens.

    211,    Supports: Racks, appropriate subclasses.

    219,    Electric Heating, (see (1) Note).

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 485+ for wire receptacles.

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses.


CLS 99/450.1
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means to assemble and/or
    unite edible preforms or to assemble an edible preform and other edible
    material into a laminated product, the assembling operation being performed
    outside of a mold cavity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 700+ for assembling and disassembling
    apparatus without bonding.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 13+ for an edible composite making
    machine comprising a nonmolding means for applying a fluent coating to a
    base, or without molding of a plastic base for the coating.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    349+ for apparatus for laminating preforms, especially subclasses 500+
    including casting, plastic molding or extruding means spaced from the
    laminating means Class 156 excludes edible material.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    appropriate subclasses for molding apparatus for shaping or reshaping
    nonmetals (including bread dough, pastry on confectionery compositions);
    see especially subclasses 104+ for such a molding apparatus combined with a
    downstream coating means; subclass 110 for apparatus for laminating
    preforms in a mold cavity; subclass 130 for such apparatus comprising means
    feeding fluent stock from plural sources to a common shaping cavity to form
    a composite product; subclass 182 for a compound implement including a
    shaping means; subclasses 276+ for a means for excavating from a bulk
    source with simultaneous shaping; and subclasses 238+ for a dough divider
    including a trap chamber.


CLS 99/450.2
TXT Apparatus under subclass 450.1 including means to form or reshape plural
    sheet or web-type preforms.


CLS 99/450.3
TXT Apparatus under subclass 450.2 including means to assemble the preforms in
    stacked relation with a filling (e.g., fruit, etc.) encased therebetween to
    form a pie.


CLS 99/450.4
TXT Apparatus under subclass 450.1 comprising means to handle each of plural
    preforms individually and to assemble same into a stacked (e.g., laminated,
    etc.) relationship.


CLS 99/450.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 450.4 comprising means requiring manual assistance
    of an operator in the preassembly of assembly operation.


CLS 99/450.6
TXT Apparatus under subclass 450.1 comprising means to form an edible casing or
    housing and means to fill the same with an edible.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 558+ for means forming or partially
    forming a receptacle combined with downstream means to fill the same.


CLS 99/450.7
TXT Apparatus under subclass 450.1 including means to feed a diverse edible
    material into an edible casing or housing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 266.1+ for a means to fill and close a
    preformed receptacle.


CLS 99/450.8
TXT Apparatus under subclass 450.7 comprising means for penetrating an edible
    preform and injecting an edible fluid into the interior thereof (e.g.,
    donut filler, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 329+ for a puncturing connecting means between a supply means
    and a receiver.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 272+ for needles, per se.


CLS 99/451
TXT Devices under the class definition, including electrostatic means or energy
    that may be of the sonic type (including subsonic and ultrasonic),
    electromagnetic, or other wave type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    275,    for other beverage treating means.

    358,    for means passing an electric current through food to cook it.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 194+, for
    electrolytic apparatus for sterilizing and pasteurizing foods and beverages.

    219,    Electrical Heating, subclasses 600+ for inductive heating,
    subclasses 678+ for microwave heating, and subclasses 764+ for capacitive
    dielectric heating.


    250,    Radiant Energy, particularly subclasses 461.1+ for apparatus for
    subjecting materials to the effects of ultraviolet and similar radiant
    energy rays.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for miscellaneous systems for supplying electric space discharge
    devices of the gas or vapor ionization type.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, or
    Systems, subclasses 530+ for miscellaneous circuits which apply a specific
    source or bias voltage to an active electrical device or circuit.


CLS 99/452
TXT Device under the class definition including means to raise or lower the
    temperature of milk products or closely allied animal products, such as
    lard, shortening, etc. to such a degree that a significant change is
    produced (e.g. sterilization or pasteurization, etc.), means to subject
    such food to a gaseous treatment, or means to provide for a food
    manipulating treatment that changes the character of the food (e.g.
    separating, coagulating, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  The foodstuffs that are prepared and treated are
    predominantly those commonly known as "dairy" foods, including milk,
    butter, cheese and other products derived from the mammary fluid of
    domestic animals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324,    for apparatus wherein the food is heated enough to cook it.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, appropriate subclasses for and apparatus for
    encompassing or encasing goods or materials with a separate cover or band
    which serves as means for identifying, protecting or unit handling the
    goods or materials.

    62,     Refrigeration, for refrigerating apparatus, including those for
    cooling butter and milk and for congealing ice cream.

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses for presses not elsewhere provided
    for, and particularly subclasses 104+ for presses for expressing the whey
    from cheese.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 14.01+, for milking machines.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, and see the notes thereto
    for apparatus for cleaning and for contacting solids with liquids for
    cleaning or other purposes.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 256+ for holding tanks for sterilized
    milk.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 40+, for flow restrictors
    disclosed for emulsifying milk.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators.

    165,    Heat Exchange, for heating or cooling of that class (165) type
    which may include a dairy product.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 348+ for filters,
    especially subclasses 464+ for portable receptacle draining type filters,
    subclasses 470+ for handled filters, subclasses 473+ for filters resting on
    a supporting receiver, and subclasses 514+ for decanting milk and cream
    separators.

    215,    Bottles and Jars.

    220,    Receptacles, generally, for milk cans and pails of general
    construction and especially subclasses 17.1+, for leg or lap supported
    pails.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for article dispensing
    devices not otherwise provided for, and see especially subclasses 150 and
    286 for article dispensers provided with heating or cooling means and for
    article dispensers having spaced casings, respectively.

    222,    Dispensing subclasses 129.1+ and 130+ for dispensers having cabinet
    or jacketed housing features and involving general cooling, and subclasses
    146.1-146.6 for dispensers having generally recited cooling means.

    232,    Deposit and Collection Receptacles, subclasses 41-43, for milk
    safes and receptacles.

    248,    Supports, subclass 94 for supports for strainers and subclasses
    128+ and 146+ for milk pail stands.

    252,    Compositions, for compositions useful for treating milk.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for carbon compounds useful for
    treating milk.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, generally for general liquid and
    gas contact devices, note particularly subclasses 31+.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 31.01+ for evaporative
    cooler-type cabinets, subclass 101, for outdoor-type milk safes and
    receptacles, and subclass 213 for cabinets with ventilated or foraminous
    walls.

    366,    Agitating, generally, for churns of general applications and for
    devices for emulsifying milk by agitation.

    494,    Imperforate Bowl:  Centrifugal Separators, appropriate subclasses,
    for a separator of that class utilized for breaking down whole milk into
    cream and skim milk.


CLS 99/453
TXT Device under subclass 452, including means to change the degree of heat
    content of the food or means to create or maintain a gaseous environment
    different from ambient air.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    467+,   for means subjecting food to an enclosed modified atmosphere which
    may include temperature modification.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclass 127 for heating or cooling the contents of
    a container.


CLS 99/454
TXT Device under subclass 453 including means for withdrawing gaseous matter
    from a chamber that encloses the food to produce a sub-atmospheric pressure
    within the chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    472,    for other vacuum-producing means associated with apparatus of this
    class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 510+ for treating the contents of a
    container by means of a vacuum or an inert atmosphere.


CLS 99/455
TXT Device under subclass 453 provided with means to remove heat from the food.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    517,    for a device provided with means to apply food treating fluid to
    food, including cooling means.


CLS 99/456
TXT Device under subclass 452, with means to spatially separate from the food
    one of its ingredients having a high water content.

    (1)     Note.  The "means to isolate" (or, spatially separate) of this and
    the indented subclasses must include:



    (a)     structure which has a receptacle aspect to it (spoon-shaped, pail,
    etc.); or,

    (b)     structure, (per se, or related to cooperating parts) which causes
    the butter, cheese, etc., to adhere, or otherwise be retained by the
    structure.  If no such subject matter is present, see subclasses 460+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    495+,   for nondairy food treating devices provided with means to isolate a
    fluid constituent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, particularly subclasses 104+ for a press for expressing
    whey from cheese.


CLS 99/457
TXT Device under subclass 456 wherein the food is presented between (1) a
    compacting surface that encloses an axis about which the surface rotates
    and (2) a fluid-conducting means (e.g., trough, etc.) that permits the
    passage of fluid from the compacting area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    464,    for a device including a roller, but having no drain means.


CLS 99/458
TXT Device under subclass 456 wherein the separating means is a perforated
    member that permits passage of fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    279+,   for beverage infusing apparatus.

    495+,   for apparatus isolating a fluid, particularly subclasses 503, 508,
    and 513.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, 348+ for filter means separating
    a liquid from a solid.


CLS 99/459
TXT Device under subclass 458 provided with means to operate on the food before
    the food and the water-constituent ingredient are separated by the
    reticulated member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 90 for separation and an additional treatment of
    the material.


CLS 99/460
TXT Device under subclass 452 wherein the food treatment is accomplished by a
    moving element having a face that contacts the food, applies force thereto,
    and moves one portion of the food relative to another portion thereof.


CLS 99/461
TXT Device under subclass 460 wherein the relative movement of the food is
    accomplished by two or more elements that move relative to one another.


CLS 99/462
TXT Device under subclass 461 including two or more rotating surfaces, each
    rotating about an axis, at least two of the axes being equidistant from
    each other and lying in the same plane and not collinear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    461,    for a device that includes plural rotating surfaces rotating about
    collinear axes.

    585,    for pinching rollers that remove the skin from food.

    640,    for rollers that pull the stem from food.


CLS 99/463
TXT Device under subclass 462 wherein two or more of the rotating surfaces also
    revolve about a common axis.

    (1)     Note.  The planetating surfaces may be either parallel or
    nonparallel to the parallel axes of subclass 462; and, these planetating
    surfaces may also be "idling rollers".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 207+ for a
    planetary movement comminutor.


CLS 99/464
TXT Device under subclass 460 wherein the moving the moving element has a face
    that rotates about an axis and the axis moves in a direction perpendicular
    to its extent, whereby the food is subjected to radial forces.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are rolling surfaces whose axes are
    constrained at one point to guide the axes in angular movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    457,    for combined roller and drain.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 84.2 and
    related subclasses for rollers used in comminutors.


CLS 99/465
TXT Device under subclass 460 provided with a perforated member that permits
    passage of the food moved by the food-contacting face.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    458,    for a foraminous member that separates a liquid dairy product.

    503,    for a foraminous member that separates a liquid in combination with
    a rotary food-entering member.

    508,    for a foraminous member that separates a liquid in combination with
    a stationary food-entering member.

    513,    for a foraminous member that separates a liquid in combination with
    a comminuting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 233+ for
    sifting of solids.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 68+ for
    separating of materials in combination with comminution and 83+ for a
    comminution surface that has openings to permit discharge.


CLS 99/466
TXT Device under subclass 460 wherein the food-contacting face moves in a
    circular path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    574+,   for a rotating shell separator.

    617+,   for a rotating grain hulling surface.

    630+,   for a rotating abrading means for skin removal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    366,    Agitating, for agitators, per se.


CLS 99/467
TXT Device under the class definition including a chamber surrounding the food,
    and means associated with the chamber for exposing the food to contact with
    gaseous matter under conditions other than merely ambient or heated
    atmospheric conditions.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates to an enclosed atmosphere that is
    modified by a gas or gaseous suspension and the modification is
    accomplished by more than the single means of heating ambient atmosphere
    (such as by an oven or similar heated enclosure as found in a heating class
    such as Class 126, Stoves and Furnaces).  The modification usually involves
    some feature such as: entrapping smoke around the food, adding flavor or
    moisture, increasing pressure, etc.

    Compare:  Class 99, subclasses 352+, especially subclass 356, for
    "receptacle filling or closing"; subclasses 359+, for treatment of food
    already in a "filled receptacle"; Class 99, subclasses 372+ and 426+, for a
    "heated mold" or "confining, conforming or molding support" which may
    completely enclose the food; and subclasses 403+, for a boiler or deep fat
    fryer which may include a lid, but in which the food is treated in "body of
    heated liquid".

    (2)     Note.  For the line with other heat applying classes, such as Class
    34, Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids; Class 126, Stoves and
    Furnaces; Class 219, Electric Heating; Class 422, Chemical Apparatus and
    Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing, Preserving, or Sterilizing, see the
    reference to these classes in the class definition of this class (99) and
    search notes under subclass 324.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    293+,   for a steamer or condenser-type beverage making infusor.

    352+,   359+, 372+, 403+, and 426+, see (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    Classes 34, 126, and 219, see (2) Note above.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 125+ for
    fumigating apparatus for destroying vermin.

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 79+ for gas filling and/or evacuating a
    receptacle and closing; subclasses 111+ for contents material treating;
    and, see the line with Class 53 in (5.5) Note under the class definition of
    the class (99).

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, for steam and liquid contact
    apparatus generally.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, appropriate subclasses for subjecting subject
    matter for the class to a modified atmosphere.


CLS 99/468
TXT Device under subclass 467 provided with means to initiate, maintain or
    terminate the operation thereof in accordance with the functioning of
    timing means or condition responsive means.

    (1)     Note.  For purpose of this classification, the timing mechanism
    must be of the chronometric type, normally found, per se, in Class 368,
    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280+,   for automatic control of an infusor.

    323.7+, for automatic control of a corn popper.

    325+,   for automatic control of a cooking device.


CLS 99/469
TXT Device under subclass 467 including means to separate matter from the
    desired food product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323.11, for a device including means to separate the unpopped kernels from
    the popped kernals in a corn popper; and see the search notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 2, 3+,
    10, 11, and 12.1+ for processes and apparatus of the type there provided
    for, with separating steps or means.


CLS 99/470
TXT Device under subclass 467 including means to reduce the temperature of the
    food and means to heat the food before or after the temperature has been
    reduced.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 58+ for heating and cooling.


CLS 99/471
TXT Device under subclass 467 wherein a chamber is vertically elongated and
    wherein the food to be treated flows downwardly through the chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, 165+ for gravity flow
    type drying apparatus; and see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 99/472
TXT Devices under subclass 467 including means for withdrawing gaseous matter
    from a food container to produce a sub-atmospheric pressure within the
    container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    454,    for vacuum producing means associated with the treatment of dairy
    food.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 79+ for apparatus for evacuating a
    receptacle and closing the same, and subclasses 510+ for apparatus for
    subjecting the contents of a package to vacuum.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 65 for apparatus of general utility for merely evacuating a
    receiver, and subclasses 59+ for apparatus for exhausting air from
    receivers in connection with filling same.


CLS 99/473
TXT Device under subclass 467 including an element which may change the
    direction or rate of movement of the gaseous matter inside the chamber.


CLS 99/474
TXT Device under subclass 473 including means to propel gaseous matter into,
    within, or from the chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    518,    for the application of a fluid to a grain hulling zone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 2+ for heating system control.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 47+ for a
    gas swept comminuting zone.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 70+, 238, 255, and 340 for air pumps
    controlling pressure in a living enclosure.


CLS 99/475
TXT Device under subclass 474 including two or more forced gas circulation
    means.


CLS 99/476
TXT Device under subclass 474 including a revolving impeller means to move the
    gas.


CLS 99/477
TXT Device under subclass 473 including means to propel food into, within, or
    from the chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    443,    for a conveyor or movably supported food support; and see the
    extensive search notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, for general purpose conveyors and see the
    search notes under that class (198) definition for other conveying classes.


CLS 99/478
TXT Device under subclass 477 including means to move the food, or its support,
    in a generally arcuate, circular, elliptical, or orbital path within the
    enclosed modified atmosphere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    397,    for a rotary inverter in a toaster.

    419+,   for a spit or impaling type cooker.


CLS 99/479
TXT Device under subclass 478 wherein the structure which supports the food is
    rotatable about a fixed axis, within the chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    421,    for a moveable spit in a cooking device.


CLS 99/480
TXT Device under subclass 473 including a movable member which, by relative
    movement with respect to a chamber aperture, will permit an increased or
    decreased rate of flow of gases to enter or leave, the chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 163, for a damper of that class (110) type.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 285+ for dampers in a stove or
    furnace.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 49+ and 173+ for ventilating devices, many
    of which include dampers; and, see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 99/481
TXT Device under subclass 473 including a stationary element in the enclosure,
    which alters the movement of gaseous matter in a given direction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 310+ and 322+, for deflectors of that class
    (110) type.


CLS 99/482
TXT Device under subclass 467 including receptacle-type structure for retaining
    material which, when diffused or dispersed (e.g., by heating), modifies the
    enclosed atmosphere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 125+ for
    fumigators.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 59.5 for smoke generators.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 305 for fume generators.


CLS 99/483
TXT Device under the class definition having a heat source, however, the change
    in the temperature is so slight, or the application of the heat is of such
    short duration, that only a small portion of the mass of any given food
    article is affected.

    (1)     Note.  The heat treatment of this subclass is primarily directed
    (a) toward the outer periphery of the food article, (b) to aid in a
    concurrent or subsequent mechanical operation, or (c) causes such a small
    change in temperature or over such a temperature range that it does not
    affect the edibility of the food, e.g. warm, singe, thaw, melt etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324+,   for a device that raises the temperature of the food enough to
    change the edibility.


CLS 99/484
TXT Device under the class definition having in addition to or combined
    therewith structure which has a function other than preparation or
    treatment of food.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    275+,   for beverage apparatus combined with other type apparatus.

    323.4+, for cereal-puffing apparatus combined with other type apparatus.

    324+,   for cooking apparatus combined with perfecting features and
    particularly subclass 357 for an noncooking means combined therewith.

    452+,   for the treatment of dairy food combined with other type apparatus.

    467+,   for subjecting food to an enclosed modified atmosphere including
    perfecting features combined therewith.

    485+,   for apparatus for the nonheat treatment of food combined with
    perfecting features.


CLS 99/485
TXT Device under the class definition including means to modify a property of
    food other than by elevating the temperature of the food.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    357,    for food cooking apparatus which may include a nonheat treatment of
    food.


CLS 99/486
TXT Device under subclass 485 including means to initiate, maintain, or
    terminate a mechanical treatment in accordance with the functioning of
    timing means or condition-responsive means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    325,    for automatic control of a cooking device, and see the search notes
    thereunder.


CLS 99/487
TXT Device under subclass 486 including means for controlling the quantity of
    food treating fluid to which the food is subjected.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting means,
    subclasses 192+ for automatic control of that (141) class type.


CLS 99/488
TXT Device under subclass 486 wherein the travel of grain, through a skin,
    husk, or impurity removing means or a gas which aids therein is controlled
    by a condition responsive means.

    (1)     Note.  Hulling members, valve bodies and like members, which are
    contacted and moved directly by the material, are excluded and will be
    found in subclasses 518+ and 600+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 524+, and
    notes thereto for automatic control of apparatus for applying gas to solids.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 116.5+, for
    automatically controlled stop mechanisms of general application.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 52+, and the notes thereto for dispensers
    having automatic controls.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 33+, for
    automatically controlled comminutor organizations.


CLS 99/489
TXT Device under subclass 486 including means responsive to the presence, size,
    weight, or alinement of the food.


CLS 99/490
TXT Device under subclass 486 including means for ascertaining whether or not a
    core-pit* has been removed from the food and means in response thereto
    which guides or moves the core-pit or food (usually, in one of at least two
    alternative paths).


CLS 99/491
TXT Devices under subclass 489 including means which sense the size or position
    of the food and moves a cutter in response thereto.


CLS 99/492
TXT Device under subclass 486 wherein a means is provided to relieve, release,
    or stop the machinery when abnormal operating conditions are encountered.


CLS 99/493
TXT Device under subclass 485 including means for gaging, signalling, or
    testing some condition relating to the mechanical treatment of the food.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    285,    for beverage infusors having means to signal, indicate, or test,
    and see the search notes thereunder.

    342,    for cooking apparatus having means to signal, indicate, or test,
    and see the search notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 522.11+ for a signal, scale, or indicator in a
    cutting device of that class (83) type, and see the search notes thereunder.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 101.3 for
    means to indicate the condition in a comminutor.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+ for electrical
    automatic condition responsive indicating systems.


CLS 99/494
TXT Device under subclass 485 including means to fill a void in food or apply
    finely divided solid matter to food.

    (1)     Note.  The material applied is usually in the form of an additional
    food or seasoning and may be a frozen food that becomes liquid or viscous
    at room temperature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323.8,  for adding flavoring material to popcorn.

    345,    for solid applying means in cooking apparatus.

    516+,   for fluid applying means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 13+ for coating with an edible base.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products for
    processes wherein the association of particles is effective mechanically.


CLS 99/495
TXT Device under subclass 485 including means to spatially separate a specific
    and distinguishable liquor portion of the food.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    456+,   for devices for treating dairy food provided with means to isolate
    a watery constituent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 94+ for apparatus combining pressing and
    comminuting where not otherwise provided for and subclasses 104+ and 213
    for apparatus removing juice from fruit.


CLS 99/496
TXT Device under subclass 495 including additional means for spatially
    separating one distinguishable liquid portion of food from another.

    (1)     Note.  A device having a compartment or plural compartments for
    holding separated liquids therein, the liquids, having been separated by
    hand, are classified in the receptacle classes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 105, for separation of plural liquids.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses, for a
    liquid separator of general utility; and see the class definition of Class
    210 for a collection of notes to other classes which include liquid
    separation.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 23.2 - 23.86, 500 - 557 inclusive, for
    plural receptacles, one of which may be used to hold a liquid; and see (1)
    Note above.


CLS 99/497
TXT Device under subclass 496 including means to separate the albumen and
    vitellus which are (or, previously were) contained in a naturally produced
    outer shell* encapsulation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 13+ for edible coating which may
    include eggs.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 52+ for egg testing
    apparatus.


CLS 99/498
TXT Device under subclass 497, having additional means to separate the food
    shell* from the internal liquid portions of the egg.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    495,    for a shell breaking apparatus, wherein there is liquid drainage
    means, or a receptacle to receive liquid from the shell, but no means to
    separate diverse internal liquids.

    568+,   for a shell removal means wherein there is a no liquid recovery
    means (e.g., from a previously heated egg).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 120.1 for hand-held egg shell openers.


CLS 99/499
TXT Device under subclass 497 including a container which has a volume
    essentially that of the vitellus of a single egg, the album draining
    through apertures in the container or overflowing the container to
    accomplish the separation.

    (1)     Note.  The apparatus of this and indented subclasses may be movable
    (e.g., rotatable, or reciprocatable).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 124+, 141, 147, 149, 150, and 324+ for a spoon,
    or spoon combination, which may function as a yolk-white separator.


CLS 99/500
TXT Device under subclass 499 having additional means movable relative to the
    container for tipping the container in order to discharge at least a part
    of its contents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    499,    for a device including a handle means which permits an operator to
    manually invert, pivot or tilt the receptacle.


CLS 99/501
TXT Device under subclass 495 having a member with a contoured profile which
    rotates or is capable of being rotated about a center-line axis and engages
    the food along its axis to produce a void in the food corresponding in
    profile to the contour of the member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    506+,   for a device with stationary food entering members and rotating,
    coacting food holders and foraminous separators.


CLS 99/502
TXT Device under subclass 501 including means to move the member in the
    direction of its axis and towards the food.


CLS 99/503
TXT Device under subclass 501 having a perforated or screened member which
    revolves about an axis, and which permits the liquid to pass through while
    retaining the more solid portions of the food.


CLS 99/504
TXT Device under subclass 501 including means to immobilize the food article
    against the forces of the rotary food entering member while the food
    article is being acted on by it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    507,    for a nonrotary food entering member having means to move the food
    to the member.


CLS 99/505
TXT Device under subclass 501 wherein a human operator supplies the power which
    rotates the contoured member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    506+,   for a device with stationary food entering members, hand rotated,
    coacting food holders and foraminous separators.


CLS 99/506
TXT Device under subclass 495 having a stationary member with a contoured
    profile, engaged by the food to produce a void in the food corresponding in
    profile to the contour of the member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    501+,   for a device including a rotating, contoured profile, food entering
    member.


CLS 99/507
TXT Device under subclass 506 including means to force the food toward the food
    engaging means.

    (1)     Note.  The means to force the food may be operated manually or by
    power means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    504,    for means forcing food toward a rotating food-entering member.


CLS 99/508
TXT Device under subclass 506 having in addition a perforated or slotted means
    which permits the liquid to pass through while retaining substantially all
    of any solid portions of the food which may be present.

    (1)     Note.  To be placed in this subclass the openings must accomplish
    the separation.

    (2)     Note.  A device that discloses a ridge, projection, or similar
    structure that separates the seeds, or other food portions, from the liquid
    is properly placed in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    501+,   for a similar device having a foraminous separator.


CLS 99/509
TXT Device under subclass 495 having means to comminute cut, or pierce the food
    to aid in the separation of the liquid portion.


CLS 99/510
TXT Device under subclass 509 wherein the subdividing means is a crushing,
    tearing or pulverizing means which subdivides the food into small particles
    or a pulp.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 173+ for apparatus of
    that class (210) type which comminutes and strains.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses for comminuting apparatus of general utility; and, see sections
    2, 3, 4B, and 10 of the class definition of Class 241 for the lines between
    Class 99 and Class 241.


CLS 99/511
TXT Device under subclass 510 having in addition a rapidly rotating means which
    effects separation of the liquid portion from the solid portions of the
    food by tending to force or impel the food away from the center of
    rotation, after receiving the food from the subdividing means, the liquid
    portion being separated from the solid portion of the food by allowing the
    liquid portion to pass (a) through a perforated portion of the device, or
    (b) over the edge of an imperforate container portion of the device; or,
    both (a) and (b).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    503,    for a rotating foraminous separator which separates a liquid from a
    solid food portion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration especially section 8
    of the definition of that class, for (a) the statement that Class 241 is
    superior to the several separating classes, (b) the subclasses of that
    class (241) which involve comminuting and separating, and (c) the search
    notes to the several separating classes.


CLS 99/512
TXT Device under subclass 511 including relatively movable means which force a
    separated portion of food to or from the centrifugal separator.


CLS 99/513
TXT Device under subclass 510 including a perforated member which force a
    separated portion of food to or from the centrifugal separator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    503,    for a device including a rotating foraminous separator which
    separates an internal liquid portion.


CLS 99/514
TXT Device under subclass 485 including means to receive and retain that part
    of a naturally occurring plant that is used for reproducing the plant.

    (1)     Note.  Once the seed* is recovered, it may be ready for immediate
    planting, or it may require further processing; in either event, the seed
    is available for such use or processing as a result of the action of the
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    547+,   for core-pit removal apparatus wherein there is no suggestion of
    using the pit for reproduction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 14, for seed testers and subclass 57.6
    for coated or impregnated seeds.

    111,    Planting, for means for planting seeds.


CLS 99/515
TXT Device under subclass 485 including a resilient tool which flexes or a tool
    support which is based so that there may be movement of the tool during
    cutting while the tool is within the interior of the food.

    (1)     Note.  A typical tool of this subclass will follow the contour of a
    pit as it separates it from the flesh.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 542 for deforming a resilient tool or tool
    support.


CLS 99/516
TXT Device under subclass 485 wherein gaseous or liquid matter contacts the
    food for modifying the food for immediate, or ultimate, consumption.

    (1)     Note.  In a device where the gas and/or liquid is to handle (move,
    transport, etc.) the food bodily; or, to clean the food of inedible
    material; or, to both clean and handle, as above described, classification
    is in a handling or cleaning class, as appropriate.  See paragraphs (c) and
    (d) under "Search Class" of Class 99, subclass 324.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323.1,  for apparatus for treating a beverage with a gas.

    453+,   for apparatus for atmospheric modification of a dairy food.

    467+,   for apparatus for subjecting food to an enclosed modified
    atmosphere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 3.1+ for
    fruit washers.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, for bleaching apparatus for
    textile materials.

    83,     Cutting, subclass 169 for applying a fluid to a cutter or material,
    and see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 99/517
TXT Device under subclass 516 including means for refrigerating either the food
    or the fluid applied thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    455,    for dairy food treating means with cooling.

    470,    for sequential heating and cooling of food.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclasses.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses.


CLS 99/518
TXT Device under subclass 516 including means for disjoining a hull* portion of
    grain* from the remainder of the grain, the disjoining occurring in one or
    more hulling zones.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    467+,   for a device which treats grain in an enclosed modified atmosphere
    which may also include hulling and scouring of the grain.

    488,    for a grain hulling device having automatic control of grain flow.

    600+,   for a device wherein grain is hulled without fluid contact.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 6+ for a
    grain comminuting process in combination, and particularly subclasses 8 and
    12 for fluid applying and subclasses 38+ for a comminuting device provided
    with means to add fluid to material.


CLS 99/519
TXT Device under subclass 518 including means to propel the grain through space
    against an element which does not form part of the propelling
    instrumentality.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    571,    for impact-type nut crackers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 5, 39+,
    and 275 for corresponding comminuting processes and apparatus.


CLS 99/520
TXT Device under subclass 518 in which the grain is treated in a plurality of
    distinct and separate grain-hulling* areas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    612+,   for other plural hulling zone combination not involving fluid
    contact with the grain.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 11 for
    alternate separation and comminution steps.


CLS 99/521
TXT Device under subclass 520 wherein at least one of the plural hulling zones
    includes two or more hulling elements (one of which revolves about an axis)
    that cooperates to perform a hulling operation and these cooperating
    elements are not multi-perforated.

    (1)     Note.  The hulling elements of this subclass may contain a single
    opening to allow grain to flow in or out, but are otherwise imperforate
    (they are usually of the "grinding stone" variety).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    601+,   for imperforate sections in nonfluid-contact areas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 198.1+,
    for cooperating comminuting surfaces such as jaw crushers.


CLS 99/522
TXT Device under subclass 520 including two or more hulling elements that each
    have plural apertures therein and each element revolves about its own
    respective axis.

    (1)     Note.  At least one multi-perforated surface participates in the
    hulling operation; however, one or more of the multi-perforated surfaces
    may serve only as a "screen", as in subclass 528. Also, the plural axes may
    be collinear, or angularly related, or a combination of both.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    601+,   for "screens" in the nonfluid-contact grain huller.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 49+ for a
    gas borne material applied to a screen.


CLS 99/523
TXT Device under subclass 518 including plural hulling elements, and means to
    adjustably position one hulling element with respect to another hulling
    element.

    (1)     Note.  The means to vary the spacing between the hulling members
    may be so interconnected that the adjustment may be made during operation,
    or, it may be of the type where the device must be stopped in order to vary
    the spacing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    618+,   for an adjustable hulling element in a nonfluid contact
    grain-huller.


CLS 99/524
TXT Device under subclass 518 including means to increase or decrease the rate
    at which the grain passes a given point in the device.

    (1)     Note.  The means of this subclass are usually located near the
    entrance or exit of the hulling zone; and, responding to the weight of
    volume of grain restrict the flow of grain, or, allow the grain to move at
    an increased rate of flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    488,    for automatic control of grain flow, and see the notes thereunder.

    609+,   for nonfluid contact grain-hullers with flow regulators.


CLS 99/525
TXT Device under subclass 518 including (A) dynamic means to forcibly propel
    gas to or from the device, (B) static means to direct the flow of gas to or
    from the device, or both (A) and (B).


CLS 99/526
TXT Device under subclass 525 including means to force or guide gas to the
    interior of a hulling zone, and, means to force or guide gas at another
    point in the device (usually adjacent the entrance or exit for the grain)
    exterior of the hulling zone.


CLS 99/527
TXT Device under subclass 525 including a relatively movable member that stops
    or varies the flow of gas through a gas entrance or gas exit.

    (1)     Note.  The damper or valve may be self-acting (e.g., due to
    gas-pressure buildup), spring or weight biased, or, mechanically actuated.


CLS 99/528
TXT Device under subclass 525 including a multi-perforated member which (a)
    retains the grain and allows nongrain material to pass through or (b)
    allows the grain to pass through and retains nongrain material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    601+,   for a screen in nonfluid area of grain hullers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 21+ for
    gaseous suspension and sifting.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, 49+ for a comminutor
    having gas borne material applied to a screen.


CLS 99/529
TXT Device under subclass 525 including a single driving mechanism, or
    drivetrain, for moving both (A) one or more hulling elements and (B) one or
    more gas-propelling elements.


CLS 99/530
TXT Device under subclass 529 wherein at least one of the rotating internal
    elements which contacts the grain during the hulling operation has rigidly
    attached thereto, or formed as a part thereof, structure which acts to
    propel gas.


CLS 99/531
TXT Device under subclass 529 including distinct gas-moving and hulling
    elements that are supported on a single revolving driveshaft or that are
    supported on two such shafts in such a manner that the centerline of one
    shaft constitutes an extension of the centerline of the other shaft (both
    having a common driving means).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 50 and 56,
    for a comminutor and gas mover on the same shaft.


CLS 99/532
TXT Device under subclass 516 including a hollow, generally sharp-pointed
    device having at least one aperture allowing passage of the liquid from the
    hollow device to the interior of the food.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    494,    for similar apparatus for injecting solids (e.g., salt or other
    solid seasoning materials).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    27,     Undertaking, subclasses 24.1+ for an injector used in embalming.

    111,    Planting, subclasses 89+ for a dibbling device.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 187+ for hypodermic injectors.


CLS 99/533
TXT Device under subclass 532 including means to propel the needle toward and
    from the food, or to propel the food toward and from the needle.


CLS 99/534
TXT Device under subclass 516 wherein the applied fluid is a nongaseous,
    nonsolid substance.


CLS 99/535
TXT Device under subclass 534 including means for immersing, or otherwise
    wetting the food with salt-containing water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    536,    for water soaking only.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, for sprinkling, spraying
    and diffusing apparatus; and see the line with Class 99 in the class
    definition of Class 239.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 256+ and 261+ for apparatus for
    making brine.


CLS 99/536
TXT Device under subclass 534 including means for immersing, or otherwise
    wetting, the food with water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    535,    for brine soaking only.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, for sprinkling, spraying
    and diffusing apparatus; and, see the line with Class 99 in the class
    definition of Class 239.


CLS 99/537
TXT Device under subclass 485 comprising means to disjoin* one portion of food
    from another portion of food.

    (1)     Note.  One or more of the plural products may be edible and, one or
    more of the products may be usable (though nonedible), or "waste" (e.g., to
    be further processed to make alcohol, fertilizer, etc.).

    (2)     Note.  Any "starting" food which is entirely reduced to a
    comminuted state, is excluded and will be found elsewhere (e.g., Class 241,
    etc.).  However, compare subclasses such as 494 and 516+, where the
    addition of a solid or a treating fluid may require placement in the
    nonheating treatment area. Similarly, see Class 99, subclass 286, which may
    involve grinding prior to infusion; and subclass 494, which may involve the
    recovery of a fluid constituent of food.

    (3)     Note.  For cutting devices which may cut food into two or more
    parts (without further treatment appropriate for Class 99) see Class 83,
    Cutting, appropriate subclasses; and, note the residual character of the
    cutting subject matter, as indicated in sections II and III of the class
    definition of Class 83.

    (4)     Note.  This subclass, and the subclasses indented hereunder receive
    subcombinations where there is no specific provision for such a
    subcombination in another class.  For example such sub-combinations which
    are provided for are:



    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 110+ for a roll, per se.

    83,     Cutting, subclass 651 for a tool or tool with support.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 291+ for a
    comminuting element.

    269,    Work Holders, for a work holder, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, for subdividing of this class (99) type in combination
    with a harvester of that class (56) type.

    452,    Butchering, subclasses 149+ for subdividing animal flesh in a
    butchering type operation.


CLS 99/538
TXT Device under subclass 537 including means to separate one recognizable
    interior portion of a food article from another interior portion of the
    same food article.

    (1)     Note.  It is not necessary that there be complete separation of
    portions to fit the limitation "recognizable".  For example, a removed pit,
    seed or stone having small particles of "flesh" clinging thereto after
    removal would not be barred from this subclass.


CLS 99/539
TXT Device under subclass 538 wherein means are provided to spatially remove an
    external portion from an internal portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    567+,   for means to remove an external portion.


CLS 99/540
TXT Device under subclass 539 including means to remove the outer integument of
    food.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    584,    for skin removal wherein there is no internal separating means.


CLS 99/541
TXT Device under subclass 540 including an elongated sharpened cutting edge
    which removes the skin as it is moved relative to the food.


CLS 99/542
TXT Device under subclass 541 including a curved food entering means which is
    rotated, or which is formed of a circumferential surface, which removes an
    elongated section from the food including the seed portion.


CLS 99/543
TXT Device under subclass 542 including additional means which further
    subdivide the food.


CLS 99/544
TXT Device under subclass 539 including a curved food entering means which is
    rotated, or which is formed of a circumferential surface, which removes an
    elongated section from the food including the seed portion.


CLS 99/545
TXT Device under subclass 544 including additional means which further
    subdivide the food.


CLS 99/546
TXT Device under subclass 539 having a severing means for detaching a stem-end*
    or blossom-end* from the food.


CLS 99/547
TXT Device under subclass 538 including means to disjoin* the core-pit*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 113.1+ for hand held core-pit removers.


CLS 99/548
TXT Device under subclass 547 including means to move a cutter, knife, severer,
    tearer, twister, (or, similar core-pit removing device), simultaneously:



    (A)     in the direction of food movement, and

    (B)     relative to the moving food; such combined movements effecting the
    separation* of the core-pit from the remaining "flesh" or edible portion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 284+, for a cutter of the class type wherein
    the cutter has one component of motion in the direction of the moving work.


CLS 99/549
TXT Device under subclass 547 including means to cause relative movement
    between the food and separating means so that the center lines of the
    core-pit and the separating means coincide.

    (1)     Note.  The configuration of the food (e.g., a stem "indent") is
    frequently used to align the core-pitting means for proper cutting or
    incising.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 373+ for a conveyor having
    means for changing the attitude of the conveyed load relative to the
    conveying direction.


CLS 99/550
TXT Device under subclass 549 including means which engage the food-stem indent
    or other natural nonspherical external portion of the food to align the
    core-pit axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 383+ for a conveyor having a
    significantly-shaped portion that cooperates with a significantly-shaped
    load to orient the latter.


CLS 99/551
TXT Device under subclass 547 including: (A) means to hold or restrain the
    core-pit, plus (B) means to hold or restrain the flesh or edible portion,
    plus (C) means to oscillate or rotate (A) with respect to (B).


CLS 99/552
TXT Device under subclass 547 including at least one cutter which separates the
    food into at least two parts as it, or another means, separates the pit
    from the food.

    (1)     Note.  A device that partially severs the pit from the food, or
    severs the food to the pit, while feeding to an adjacent portion of the
    device that completes the severing or pitting, is considered "simultaneous"
    for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    543,    for removing a cylindrical core while slicing and removing skin.

    545,    for removing a cylindrical core while slicing.

    551,    for a device which simultaneously severs and pits by twisting.


CLS 99/553
TXT Device under subclass 552 including a curved severing edge, the line of
    curvature of the edge being rotatable about an axis of rotation; and, the
    contour of curvature being essentially that of the profile of the pit or
    core to be removed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    562+,   for an arcuate cutter which removes the pit from previously
    subdivided food.


CLS 99/554
TXT Device under subclass 552 including a gripping or seizing means which
    restrains the pit as a severed portion of the food is removed therefrom.


CLS 99/555
TXT Device under subclass 552 wherein the cutting means, or means rigidly
    attached thereto, removes the pit by pushing it away from the flesh.


CLS 99/556
TXT Device under subclass 555 including a relatively moving pressure means
    which cooperates with the severing means; and, either the severing means or
    the pressure means has a passage through which the pit is pushed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    559+,   for an incision-type punch which forces a pit through an orifice
    but which has no food subdivision.


CLS 99/557
TXT Device under subclass 547 including a multiplicity of sharp tines or pins
    which pierce the food, engage the pit, and alone or in combination with
    adjacent structure of the device, remove the pit from the food.

    (1)     Note.  The tines or pins upon piercing or penetrating the food may
    also pierce or penetrate the pit, seed, or stone.


CLS 99/558
TXT Device under subclass 557 having at least two revolving drums, the axes of
    each being parallel, one drum having tines or pins and the other having a
    yieldable surface, the drums coacting to cause the tines or pins to pierce
    or penetrate the food or pit.


CLS 99/559
TXT Device under subclass 547 including a support for the food having an
    opening (e.g., cavity, pocket or unobstructed passage), the opening being
    of lesser diameter than the food, but larger than the pit, or smaller than
    the pit but yieldable about the opening, to permit the pit to pass
    therethrough upon being contacted by a sharp-pointed or edged impaling
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    556,    for a punch and die type device which also subdivides the food.


CLS 99/560
TXT Device under subclass 559 including means for conveying the food to or
    through the pit separating means.


CLS 99/561
TXT Device under subclass 560 wherein the conveying means is an endless belt,
    cylinder or disc having recesses or openings in the surface thereof for
    receiving food articles and delivering such articles to the impaling means.


CLS 99/562
TXT Device under subclass 547 including a severing means which removes the pit,
    or portion thereof, from food which has been previously subdivided.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    552+,   for a device which removes the pit from the food during severing.


CLS 99/563
TXT Device under subclass 562 including at least one cutting means which
    subdivides the food, after which the pit is removed.


CLS 99/564
TXT Device under subclass 547 including a curved severing edge or member which
    enters the food and either pulls or forces the pit from the food; the
    contour of curvature being essentially that of the profile of the pit or
    core to be removed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    553,    for an arcuate cutter that removes the pit from an article of food
    simultaneously with severing.

    562,    for an arcuate cutter that removes the pit from a halved food
    article.


CLS 99/565
TXT Device under subclass 547 including means which causes the meat or pulp to
    pass through an orifice or slot that is too narrow to permit passage of the
    pit; or, means which causes the pit to pass through an orifice or slot that
    does not accommodate the meat or pulp.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    556,    for a device that forces a pit through an opening while severing
    the flesh.

    559+,   for a punch that forces the pit through a die.


CLS 99/566
TXT Device under subclass 565 wherein the flesh and pit are separated by means
    of threads, grooves, or elongated projections on a turning surface or drum.


CLS 99/567
TXT Device under subclass 537 including means to spatially remove one
    recognizable external portion from the remaining food.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    452,    Butchering, subclasses 149+ for subdividing recognizable portions
    of animals in a butchering type operation.

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, for separating recognizable portions
    of food of that class (130) type.


CLS 99/568
TXT Device under subclass 537 including a compressing, impacting, or severing
    means that disjoins* the relatively brittle outer covering of the food.

    (1)     Note.  See the definition of "shell" and "disjoin" in the glossary.

    (2)     Note.  The device will remove a hard shell and/or a soft skin or an
    outer covering by breaking, cracking, or fracturing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 120.1+ for hand- held shell openers.


CLS 99/569
TXT Device under subclass 568 including means to classify diverse portions of
    food according to their characteristics, and means to remove* one portion
    of the food (or foreign matter) from the remaining food portion.


CLS 99/570
TXT Device under subclass 569 wherein the means to sort the food, or foreign
    matter from the food, includes means to contact part of the food with a gas
    or liquid.

    (1)     Note.  An exemplary device of this subclass is one in which the
    food is placed in a body of liquid, one food portion floats and another
    food portion sinks to the bottom; and, the floating and nonfloating food
    portions are then separately removed from the liquid bath.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate subclass.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclass.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration subclasses 38+ and 68+
    for gas application and separating, respectively, in a comminutor.


CLS 99/571
TXT Device under subclass 568 including means to utilize kinetic energy by:



    (A)     rapidly propelling an element into contact with a relatively
    stationary article of food, either the element or the food having no
    substantial support; or,

    (B)     rapidly propelling the food against a stationary or movable solid
    element; or,

    (C)     both (A) and (B).

    (1)     Note.  The propelling means may be gravity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    519,    for projecting grain against a surface.

    629,    for removing skin by tumbling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 5, for a
    process which comminutes by utilizing the kinetic energy of projected or
    suspended material.


CLS 99/572
TXT Device under subclass 568 wherein the shell disjoining* means is regulated
    (releasably positioned), in relation to the shell size, and operated in
    three distinct movements: (A) the shell disjoining means is moved into
    contact with the food; (B) upon contact, a regulatable portion of the
    disjoining means is locked; and, (C) the shell disjoining means is then
    moved further to effect separation of the shell from its contents.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus of this subclass subjects each shell to the same
    length separation stroke so as to separate, but not crush, the meat or
    shell contents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    579,    for a shell separating device including means whereby the spacing
    between the separating members may be varied.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 120.4 for plural relatively movable pivots.


CLS 99/573
TXT Device under subclass 572 wherein the adjustable shell separating means of
    movement (B) is locked by the interengagement of a tooth-type rack gear and
    a securing means (e.g., a pawl, a pin, or a second toothed gear means).


CLS 99/574
TXT Device under subclass 568 including a shell disjoining* means which turns
    more than 360o about an axis.

    (1)     Note.  The separating means of this subclass may be of the cutting,
    crushing, tumbling, or shearing type.

    (2)     Note.  Separating means, otherwise proper for placement in this
    subclass, may accomplish shell separation from a single nut in less than
    360o rotation (e.g., a circularly-configured multiple-toothed cutting means
    may complete a desired cut in less than one revolution; or, two rotating
    adjacent drums, having sharp-edged pockets therein, may grasp a nut
    therebetween and completely sever a single shell in but a few degrees of
    rotation); when plural nuts are fed to such a device, the eventual rotation
    is more than 360o, and thus, placement in this, or in the indented
    subclasses, is proper.


CLS 99/575
TXT Device under subclass 574 including a first surface spaced from a second
    surface a distance less than the diameter of the food to be treated, one of
    the surfaces having projections or depressions; and, one surface is
    stationary, rotating at a different speed, or rotating in a different
    direction, than that of the other surface; in which device a food portion
    is separated as the food passes between the surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    625,    for a skin removing device having similar structure wherein one
    element rotates at a different speed with respect to a second element.

    628,    for a skin removing device having relatively moving adjacent
    surfaces.


CLS 99/576
TXT Device under subclass 574 wherein one disjoining member rotates and has a
    sharp or irregular edge which cuts a slot or incision in the food to
    separate, or aid in separating, the shell from its contents.

    (1)     Note.  The food may be moved at any angle with respect to the axis
    of rotation of the disjoining member.


CLS 99/577
TXT Device under subclass 568 including means tending to urge the shell
    breaking member to or from shell-contacting position or resiliently
    supporting a breaking member.

    (1)     Note.  The bias means may be a spring, rubber, or other resilient
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 234+, for spring jointed shears.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 211, 259, 260+,  265+, 278, and 296, for a
    biased press means; and see the search notes thereunder.

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 22, 157+, 254, 263, 275, 281, 310, and 317
    for bias means in a work holder.


CLS 99/578
TXT Device under subclass 577 wherein the spring device moves, or tends to
    move, a shell-breaking member away from the shell.


CLS 99/579
TXT Device under subclass 568 including at least two members and means to
    position the members relative to one another independent of the actuating
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 385+ for adjustable jaws.

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 140+ and 165+ for adjustment of work
    holders, and see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 99/580
TXT Device under subclass 568 including means which accomplish, or assist in
    accomplishing removal of a subdivided portion of food away from the
    separating* means.

    (1)     Note.  The discharge feature can be an ejector, guiding-trough,
    trapdoor, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 128+, for material holder or disposal, ejectors
    or strippers.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 78+, for product handling means in a cutting
    device; and, see the search notes thereunder.

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 13+, for a product discharge facilitator.


CLS 99/581
TXT Device under subclass 568 including at least one pair of separating means,
    and means to propel at least one member of a pair into contact with the
    shell.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, various subclasses, for opposed platens.


CLS 99/582
TXT Device under subclass 581 including means to constrain the food as the
    shell-contacting means is moved into contact with the shell.


CLS 99/583
TXT Device under subclass 581 including means for attaching, or fixing the
    position of, the entire device with respect to a disclosed stable structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 95+ for means to fasten a work holder to a
    support; and, see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 99/584
TXT Device under subclass 567 including means to disjoin* the skin* from the
    remaining portion of food.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    540+,   for skin removal in combination with removal of an internal portion.

    568+,   for removing a brittle outer covering by compressing, impacting, or
    by severing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    452,    Butchering, subclasses 125+ for removing the skin from a carcass or
    carcass part in a butchering-type operation.


CLS 99/585
TXT Device under subclass 584 including generally cylindrically-shaped means
    which cooperate with another surface of the same or dissimilar shape to
    initially grip a protruding portion of the skin; and, subsequent to the
    gripping, relative movement between the cylindrically-shaped surface and
    the other surface pulls or withdraws the skin from the remaining portion of
    the food.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    625,    for adjacent moving surfaces that remove skin by abrading.

    640,    for roller means that grip a stem to remove it from food.


CLS 99/586
TXT Device under subclass 584 including a flexible material or a plurality of
    flexible members which cooperate to form a flexible tube pocket, or
    passage, the skin being removed from the food as the food is passed or
    forced through the conduit.

    (1)     Note.  The flexible members may have an abrading surface or cutting
    means and may be solid members which are pivoted under spring tension.


CLS 99/587
TXT Device under subclass 584 including a pulling or tearing means which
    contact the skin and separate it by causing internal stresses.

    (1)     Note.  A cutting means for scoring to aid the tearing is in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    637+,   for means that grip and pull the stem from food.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    452,    Butchering, subclasses 128+ for devices which grip and pull the
    skin from a carcass in a butchering type operation.


CLS 99/588
TXT Device under subclass 584 including an elongated sharpened cutting edge
    which removes the skin as the cutting edge is moved relative to the food.


CLS 99/589
TXT Device under subclass 588 including a fixed blade or a blade that has a
    reciprocating motion longitudinally of the blade and a means to transport
    the food by the blade.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 746 for a blade holder that reciprocates.


CLS 99/590
TXT Device under subclass 588 including a curved severing edge, the contour of
    curvature being essentially that of the food surface to be removed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    553,    for an arcuate cutter that separates the core pit.


CLS 99/591
TXT Device under subclass 588 including an additional severing means, or more
    than one paring means for a single food item.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    593,    for a single cutting means having plural cutting edges, each edge
    alternately cutting as the cutter rotates.


CLS 99/592
TXT Device under subclass 591 wherein the additional cutting means subdivides
    the food.


CLS 99/593
TXT Device under subclass 588 wherein the paring means rotates more than 360o
    about an axis within its physical confines while severing the skin from the
    food.


CLS 99/594
TXT Device under subclass 588 including means which grasp or pierce and turn
    the food about an axis as it is pared.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    82,     Turning, for the cutting of turning work of that class (82) type.


CLS 99/595
TXT Device under subclass 594 including means which feed the food past the
    paring means.


CLS 99/596
TXT Device under subclass 594 including a means associated with the paring
    means which causes the paring means to travel in a curved path about the
    periphery of the food.


CLS 99/597
TXT Device under subclass 596 wherein the paring means is supported on an arm
    which pivots, toward and away from the center line of the rotating food, on
    a means that moves the pivot point of the arm in a path parallel with the
    center line of the rotating food.


CLS 99/598
TXT Device under subclass 597 wherein the paring support arm pivots at a right
    angle with respect to the axis of rotation of the food.


CLS 99/599
TXT Device under subclass 596 including a rotatable arm or disc which supports,
    and gives an arcuate motion to, the pivot point of the paring means support
    arm.


CLS 99/600
TXT Device under subclass 584 including grain hulling*.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is a locus for reciprocating, solid
    (nonperforated) grain-hulling members.

    (2)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are mere tumbling devices (i.e.,
    rotary drums or other moving receptacles which present no abrasive or other
    material removing surface to the grain) for effecting mutual abrasion only
    between the grains for hulling or cleaning, such devices being classified
    in the appropriate subclasses of Classes 51, 366, or other appropriate
    classes in accordance with the line between those classes.  However,
    receptacles, whether moving or stationary, when provided with relatively
    movable grain contacting members which move the grain in the receptacle for
    the purpose of removing the husk or adhering impurities (see (3) Note.),
    are provided for in this class even though the action on the grain is
    limited to mere mutual abrasion. Combinations, which include both mere
    mutual abrasion by tumbling in a moving receptacle and the use of an
    abrading or other material removing surface, are provided for in this and
    the indented subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  Most of the devices classified in this or the indented
    subclasses are for the purpose of removing husks, skins, or other naturally
    occurring integuments from grains.  However, because of the similarity of
    their structure to hullers, cleaners (to remove adhering impurities) are
    included when the cleaner is of such a nature as to subject the grain to an
    appreciable rubbing, abrasion or impact action by a solid work treating
    surface or agent.  Cleaners not involving appreciable abrasion or impact
    action will be found in the generic cleaning Class 134, Cleaning and Liquid
    Contact With Solids, or some other cleaning class according to the notes
    appended to the class definition of Class 134.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    488,    for a grain-hulling device having automatic control.

    518+,   for a grain-hulling device which includes noncleaning, nonhandling,
    fluid contact with the grain or grain part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 3.1+ for
    grain cleaners employing the instrumentalities provided for in that class,
    e.g., brushes and wipers.  See subclass 620 of this class (99) for hullers
    employing brushes or wipers.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, see (3) Note above.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, for grain comminuting
    devices having structure similar to the devices classified herein and for
    combinations of grain hullers of the type classified here, with comminutors
    (see subclasses 7 and 101.01 of that class).  Since most of the hullers
    classified here inherently divide the husk or adhering impurities into a
    number of pieces in the process of removal from the grain, only such
    devices as effect the division of the grain body (endosperm) into a
    plurality of parts should be considered comminutors or comminutor-huller
    combinations for Class 241.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 219+ for movable mixing chambers, and
    subclasses 241+ for stationary mixing chambers with movable stirrers having
    general utility as described in (2) Note above.

    451,    Abrading, for an abrading process or apparatus of general
    application.  For example, included in Class 451 is a grain tumbling device
    which presents no abrasive or other material removing surface to the grain
    wherein abrading is effected by mutual engagement of the grains with each
    other.  However, note that a grain container that is either stationary or
    moving is included in Class 99 when provided with a grain contacting member
    which moves the grain in the container for the disclosed purpose of
    removing the husk or adhering impurities, even if using an abradant.


CLS 99/601
TXT Device under subclass 600 provided with means to set apart from one another
    grain, nongrain or separated grain portions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 68+ for a
    comminuting device provided with means to separate or classify material.


CLS 99/602
TXT Device under subclass 601 wherein the segregating takes place in the
    hulling zone and is accomplished by a hulling surface (e.g., wire mesh).


CLS 99/603
TXT Device under subclass 602 wherein the segregating-hulling surface is a
    driven member with reticulations or apertures or foraminae.


CLS 99/604
TXT Device under subclass 603 provided with a hulling surface through which no
    segregating can take place in addition to the segregating hulling surface.


CLS 99/605
TXT Device under subclass 602 wherein the segregating-hulling means is a
    portion of a surface of revolution generated by a nonperpendicular line
    revolving about an axis at least 360o, said surface consisting of apertures
    or foraminae, the hulling action taking place on its inner surface.


CLS 99/606
TXT Device under subclass 605 wherein the surface of revolution includes
    segments extending in the direction of the axis of revolution from one
    axial end of the hulling portion to the other which do not include
    apertures or foraminae but which hull the grain.


CLS 99/607
TXT Device under subclass 605 wherein the enclosure has surface features (e.g.,
    radially extending barbs, undulations, radially-extending nonperforated
    segments) in addition to perforations which participate in the
    grain-hulling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 88.2+ for
    a comminuting device provided with a perforated surface and an auxiliary
    nonperforated surface.


CLS 99/608
TXT Device under subclass 605 wherein the cylindrical or conical perforated
    enclosure contains an inner hulling member which revolves about an axis
    substantially coincident with the axis of the cylinder or cone, with which
    the cylinder or cone cooperates to hull the grain, said inner hulling
    member having a relatively movable surface, or projection on its surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    618+,   for a yieldable, rotary hulling surface, per se.


CLS 99/609
TXT Device under subclass 600 including dynamic means to move or to control
    movement of grain to or from the hulling zone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    612+,   for means which conveys grain between hulling zones.


CLS 99/610
TXT Device under subclass 609 wherein the feeding or discharging means partakes
    of all the motion of at least one hulling member which is in motion during
    the hulling operation.


CLS 99/611
TXT Device under subclass 609 including a device to vary the rate of discharge
    of the grain from the final hulling zone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    488,    for automatic control of gas and/or grain, and see (1) Note
    thereunder.


CLS 99/612
TXT Device under subclass 600 which includes two or more separated areas in
    which hulling takes place, the separation consisting of an area where no
    hulling takes place or a district change in the characteristics of two
    contiguous-hulling means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    520+,   for grain-hullers having plural hulling zones and fluid means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 134+ and 152.01+
    for a comminuting device provided with plural operating zones.


CLS 99/613
TXT Device under subclass 612 including a communication between the zones and
    means to move or to permit movement of grain from one zone to another.


CLS 99/614
TXT Device under subclass 613 wherein two or more of the hulling zones include
    hulling means which revolve about axes which are colinear and in which the
    coaxial hulling zones are spaced from each other in the direction of their
    axes.


CLS 99/615
TXT Device under subclass 614 including a nonhulling member, fixed or moving in
    the space between two hulling zones which, because of its presence, alters
    the flow of grain from one hulling zone to the next.


CLS 99/616
TXT Device under subclass 600 wherein the hulling surface is a surface of a
    flexible strip forming a closed loop and moving in a path defined by said
    loop during hulling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 200 for an
    endless belt-comminuting surface.


CLS 99/617
TXT Device under subclass 600 wherein the hulling surface moves, during the
    hulling operation, about an axis.


CLS 99/618
TXT Device under subclass 617 wherein the hulling surface as a whole or a
    portion of it is attached to its supporting structure (rotating or
    stationary) in such a way that the attached surface is movable relative to
    its support.


CLS 99/619
TXT Device under subclass 618 wherein the attachment of the adjustably or
    yieldably mounted member to its supporting structure includes a spiral cam
    and cam follower between which relative movement produces relative movement
    between the adjustable member and its supporting structure.


CLS 99/620
TXT Device under subclass 617 wherein a hulling surface consists of a material
    that will yield locally under force transmitted by a grain.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is the locus for brushes as well as rubber and
    cloth surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    586,    for a resilient conduit, skin removing, means.

    626+,   for a skin removing device provided with a brush.


CLS 99/621
TXT Device under subclass 617 including at least one other surface rotating,
    about a noncolinear axis or a concentric colinear axis, to hull the grain.


CLS 99/622
TXT Device under subclass 617 wherein the rotary hulling surface faces the
    axial direction.

    (1)     Note.  The hulling may be effected by projections extending from
    the radial surface.


CLS 99/623
TXT Device under subclass 584 having a rough or yielding surface that (A)
    wears, grinds, or scrapes or (B) holds and twists the skin from the food.


CLS 99/624
TXT Device under subclass 623 having at least two traveling separating means
    which move relative to each other at different surface velocities.


CLS 99/625
TXT Device under subclass 624 wherein the abrading or resilient separating
    means are closely spaced and simultaneously contact the food.


CLS 99/626
TXT Device under subclass 623 wherein a multiplicity of elongated resilient
    elements protrude from a surface and form abrading means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    620,    for a rotating grain-hulling device having a deformable surface.


CLS 99/627
TXT Device under subclass 626 including a rotating cylinder or drum having the
    brushes secured thereon or adjacent thereto.


CLS 99/628
TXT Device under subclass 623 including at least two cooperating surfaces, one
    of which is movable, spaced to permit passage of the food as the surfaces
    simultaneously contact it.


CLS 99/629
TXT Device under subclass 623 wherein the separating means moves or is adjacent
    to a moving means which causes the food to randomly contact the separating
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 200 for a belt
    comminutor.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 326+ for a tumbling means in which workpiece
    are caused to be abraded by tumbling over or upon one another.


CLS 99/630
TXT Device under subclass 629 including a drum or vessel which rotates or has
    therein a rotating means, the abrading means being on the drum, vessel, or
    rotating means.


CLS 99/631
TXT Device under subclass 630 wherein the drum or vessel center line is
    essentially vertical and the bottom of the drum or vessel is formed by a
    rotating means that agitates or abrades.


CLS 99/632
TXT Device under subclass 631 including additional means in the drum or vessel
    which influences the path of travel of the food.

    (1)     Note.  A rotating flat disc that is inclined or tilted at an angle
    to the central axis of the container is proper for this subclass.


CLS 99/633
TXT Device under subclass 632 wherein the path of travel of the food is
    influenced by ribs, depressions, projections or curves on the surface of
    the rotating bottom.

    (1)     Note.  The irregular shape must be in addition to any abrading
    means that may be present on the surface of the rotating bottom.


CLS 99/634
TXT Device under subclass 630 including means to direct the food through the
    container or into contact with the abrading means.


CLS 99/635
TXT Device under subclass 567 wherein a portion of the food, which is distinct
    from but naturally attached to the food, is detached; or, wherein the
    stem-end* or blossom-end* of the food is detached.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    539+,   particularly subclass 546, for separating an external portion of
    food and an internal portion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 121.4+ for removing

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects subclasses 26+ for removing the
    ends from food after removing it from the ground.

    452,    Butchering, subclasses 154 and 166+ for removing the extremities of
    animals in a butchering type operation.


CLS 99/636
TXT Device under subclass 635 including means to spatially remove both the
    blossom-end* and the stem-end* from an article of food.


CLS 99/637
TXT Device under subclass 635 wherein means is provided for stemming* food.


CLS 99/638
TXT Device under subclass 637 including means to subdivide bunches or masses of
    naturally-connected food products into single food products; and, means to
    remove the stem* from a single, naturally-produced, food product.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes means which receive two or more
    cherries which have the remote ends of their respective stems attached,
    separate the stems from each other, and, separate each cherry from its
    attached stem.


CLS 99/639
TXT Device under subclass 637 including a food containing or conveying means
    having perforations or openings which are so dimensioned or positioned as
    to permit only a stem to protrude therethrough; and, means in close
    proximity to the containing or conveying means to disjoin* the stem from
    the food.


CLS 99/640
TXT Device under subclass 637 including two or more revolving cylinders which
    coact to grasp and pull off a stem while the food is in contact with the
    cylinders.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    585,    for a skin-removing device including pinching rollers.

    624+,   for a device including two moving elements, in contact with the
    food, traveling at different speeds, to remove skin.


CLS 99/641
TXT Device under subclass 637 including a perforated or roughened surface which
    moves relative to the food and strikes the stem* of the food attached
    thereto to effect separation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    587,    for a resilient conduit that separates the skin from food.

    600+,   for grain hullers that separate by friction or impact.

    623+,   for abrading or friction means that separate the skin from food.


CLS 99/642
TXT Device under subclass 635 including a severing means which enters the food
    in a nonplanar cut.

    (1)     Note.  The typical cutter of this subclass removes an indented
    portion of food without the waste of a planar cut.


CLS 99/643
TXT Device under subclass 635 including means to transport food to or past a
    cutting means and means to gauge, stop, or adjust the depth of cut.


CLS 99/644
TXT Device under the class definition including elements which move, or allow
    movement of, discrete food articles supported thereby through at least 90o
    of rotation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 323+, for egg turners in combination
    with an incubator.


CLS 99/645
TXT Device under the class definition including a rigid or pliable sheet or
    web-like structure which contacts an exposed portion of food.

    (1)     Note.  The purpose of the shield is usually to prevent ingress or
    egress of moisture, and the spacing element is usually to allow circulation
    of fluid between adjacent food articles.


CLS 99/646
TXT Device under the class definition not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is the locus of silo-like containers with
    "breathing" means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 192, 223.3, and
    245+ for silo structures, per se.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 173+ for pressure maintenance or
    ventilation of a storage structure.


CLS 100/
TTL PRESSES

CLS 100/
TXT The main class definitions and notes are divided into the following
    sections:


    I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    II.     EXPLANATORY NOTE ON SCOPE OF CLASS

    III.    DEFINITIONS OF TERMS USED

    IV.     COMBINED PRESSING ELSEWHERE CLASSIFIED

    V.      BINDING AND PRESSING ELSEWHERE CLASSIFIED

    VI.     PRODUCTS

    VII.    PRESS SUBCOMBINATIONS

    VIII.MISCELLANEOUS NOTES, AND INDEX TO THE CLASSES REFERRED TO HEREIN

    I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    1.      This is the generic class for apparatus for subjecting material to
    compressive force by:

    (1)     causing solid surfaces to approach one another while the material
    is between them,

    (2)     compelling the material to move through a constriction or

    (3)     by rendering a flexible member taut around the material.

    2.      This class is the generic class for methods and apparatus for
    binding material with a flexible filament, strand or band.  (See subclasses
    1+).

    2.5     This class is the generic class for apparatus for pressing
    particulate material.  Class 264 is the generic class for  corresponding
    methods; for the line between these classes see paragraphs under 1A 3 of
    the class definition of Class 264.

    3.      This class includes methods in which material is pressed to compact
    it to a smaller volume.  (See subclasses 35+).

    4.      This class includes methods and apparatus for pressing a lid
    against a receptacle.  (See subclasses 54+).

    5.      This class includes silos combined with means to compact ensilage
    within them. (See subclasses 65+).

    6.      This class includes presses with a duct or collector for liquid
    flowing from the material as a result of the pressing.  (See subclasses
    104+).

    7.      This class includes devices for removing from the material a cloth
    in which the material has been compacted. (See subclass 298).

    8.      This class includes methods and apparatus for crushing hollow metal
    bodies such as tin cans, automobile bodies, etc., (see appropriate
    subclasses).  Disclosure of additional utility for bottle breaking is also
    included here (Class 100) while bottle breaking, per se, is in Class 241,
    subclass 99.

    9.      This class includes devices for subjecting previously associated
    articles to compressive force to cause them to be bonded together where no
    associating means is claimed.

    II.     EXPLANATORY NOTE ON SCOPE OF CLASS

    Presses are employed in many arts and are classified generally according to
    the art to which they pertain.  For the locus of various arts, reference
    may be made to the Index to the Manual of Classification.  In sections IV
    and V hereof are listed arts in which pressing is common or in which
    subclasses have been established relating to it.

    Class 100 has heretofore gathered presses relating to such arts as baling,
    bundling, copying, expressing liquids from solids, and packing.  The art so
    gathered has been employed to establish this generic classification of
    presses.

    Since it is not desirable to withhold from use those portions of the
    reclassification which can be completed and handled as a unit, the
    reclassification is established even though many inventions relating to the
    subject matter are represented herein only by search notes to other
    classifications.

    III.    DEFINITIONS OF TERMS USED

    BINDING:        The disposing of a flexible filament, strand, or band taut
    and circumferentially closed about material.

    MATERIAL:       The solid substance subjected to compressive force or about
    which a binder is applied.

    IV.     COMBINED PRESSING ELSEWHERE CLASSIFIED

    (40)    This class provides in subclass 102, and in the various subclasses
    preceding it for pressing in combination with other features. Nearly all
    pressing elsewhere classified includes not only pressing, per se, but in
    combination with other devices or steps.  Where other classes set out
    subclasses directed to combinations of pressing with other features, which
    combinations relate to those appearing in the Class 100 schedule, suitable
    cross search notes to the subclasses concerned have been made.

    (41)    The classes listed below each include pressing and have a subclass
    directed to combined features generally, one of which may be pressing, or a
    specific combination of pressing with other features and not appearing in
    the Class 100 schedule or of special note.

    (49)    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 137+, for methods of cleaning combined with
    pressing of textiles.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 33+ for combined machines employed in
    metal working, and subclasses 400.1+, for manufacturing processes
    generically.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 90, for
    drying apparatus with additional features. See the Class Definition of
    Class 34 for the line where heating and pressing are employed.

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclasses 2+, for ironing
    machines with combined features, subclasses 75+, for flat irons with
    combined features.

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclass 635 for artificial fuel
    briquetting apparatus including plural operations, and subclass 631 for
    peat briquetting apparatus including plural operations.

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 436+ and 523+, for methods of and
    apparatus for, respectively, compacting material combined with a packaging
    operation including the application of a cover to a bale, and subclass
    138.1, for the application of a cover combined with applying a binding.  An
    exception is that Class 100, in subclasses 54+, takes devices for pressing
    lids on mercantile containers and in which the contents may be compacted by
    such compression.  In general, where pressing only is involved,
    classification is in appropriate subclasses of Class 100 even if the press
    box is a portable receptacle.

    56,     Harvesters, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 341+
    for presses in combination with means to gather from the ground the
    material to be pressed.

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclasses 16+, for combined
    machines for chain making, and subclasses 37+, for combined machines for
    horseshoe making.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, appropriate subclasses for a process of, or
    apparatus for manufacturing glass stock including a pressing step or means,
    especially subclasses 305+, for a press molding machine; see the "Search
    Notes" thereunder.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 28+, for combined
    operations machines.

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses, for a press combined with
    shaped dies (i.e., other than planar) for plastically die-shaping metal.

    81,     Tools, subclasses 3.09+, for combined press and receptacle closure
    remover.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 14+, for process of cutting combined with
    ancillary treatment of work; and appropriate subclasses relating to
    apparatus for clamping work in a cutting machine, e.g., subclasses 176,
    282, 375+, and 452+.

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 50.01+, for a
    horizontal planar surface member with combined features.

    117,    Coating:  Processes and Miscellaneous Products, subclass 65, for
    processes wherein a coating is subjected to a pressure treatment such as,
    for example, calendering.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 100+, for coating apparatus having a
    solid member or material acting on the coating after application.

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, subclasses 18+, for the purging
    and molding of sugars.

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 28+ and 78+, for cigar and cigarette machines
    with combined features.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclass 131, for processes of heat treating metal
    combined with the application of a nondeforming pressure.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses, for laminating apparatus which may include a press.
     The patents in Class 156 recite some step or mechanism peculiar to
    laminating, such as adhesive applying, assembly or association of parts,
    shaping of at least one of the parts, etc. See also the note to 156 under
    section V, "(59) SEARCH CLASS" below.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 599 and
    699, for devices which assort articles by determining their compressibility.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclass 188.03, for trouser pressing attachment
    with a chair.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses, for
    apparatus for determining the electrical properties of material while under
    pressure including means to apply the pressure.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, appropriate
    subclasses, for cutting by a tool that turns about an axis and moves along
    that axis toward a workpiece with no additional motion during operation.

    412,    Bookbinding:  Process and Apparatus, appropriate subclasses, for
    presses combined with other book manufacturing apparatus.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus, for
    apparatus to shape or reshape non-metallic preform or powdered metal
    combined with perfecting features or operations not elsewhere provided for;
    see subclass 77 for an ultra high pressure generating device disclosed for
    use in changing or  controlling chemical or physical properties of material
    (e.g., diamond maker, etc.).

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 546, for
    metallic stock material having metal particles.

    452,    Butchering, subclasses 35+ for sausage stuffers and subclasses 46+
    for sausage linkers.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, appropriate subclasses processes and apparatus in which pressing
    combined with other   operations to produce the articles indicated in the
    class title except as provided for in Class 408.



    V.      BINDING AND PRESSING ELSEWHERE CLASSIFIED

    (50)    Note.  Methods and apparatus are intermixed in the art as elsewhere
    classified and they are included together in the references below.

    (51)    Plastic shaping.  The shaping of material by molecular flow under
    pressure is generically in Class 264, Plastic and Nonmetallic Article
    Shaping or Treating:  Processes, and divided among other classes according
    to the nature of the material worked.  Of these, Class 99, Foods and
    Beverages:  Apparatus and Class 426, Food or Edible Material:  Processes,
    Compositions, and Products, are generic to food material and Class 72,
    Metal Deforming, as to metal.  Class 419, Powder Metallurgy Processes, for
    making articles from particulate material including metal particles.  See
    the definitions of these classes for the distribution of related art.

    The compaction of particulate material into a definite shape wherein at
    least some of the particles maintain their identity in the product is
    classified in Classes 100 and 264.  For the line, see the definitions to
    Class 264, particularly subclasses 109+.

    (59)    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, appropriate subclasses, for presses having a
    pressure surface conformed to fit or shape shoe parts such as sole blanks
    (subclass 21) sole laying and leveling (subclasses 33+), heels (subclass
    48) and toe and heel stiffeners (subclasses 64+). Class 100 includes, in
    appropriate subclasses, presses compacting a stack of shoe soles together
    for binding.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 260+, for mop
    wringers.

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclass 144.5, for apparatus or
    processes for manufacturing articles, other then bales or packages,
    comprising compressing, compacting or shaping fibers into a wad or plug.
    Class 100 includes, appropriate subclasses, the compacting of cotton, hay,
    etc., into bales.

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 16+, for binder chains,
    cords or wires, per se, or in combination with an attached binder
    tightener.  See Class 100, subclass 1, (2) Note, for the line.

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, appropriate subclasses, as the generic
    class for the production of structures by the mechanical interengagement of
    fibers and strands.  Class 100 includes, appropriate subclasses, the
    compacting of cotton, hay, etc., into bales.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 4.51+, for devices for shaping metal wool
    packages, subclasses 33+, for combined operation metal working apparatus,
    one of which operations may be pressing, subclasses 90.01+, as generic for
    machines and processes of condensing, smoothing, compacting, or polishing
    the surface of metallic or nonmetallic articles usually by rubbing with a
    smooth surface of greater hardness than that of the article being operated
    upon, subclasses 400.1+, as the generic locus for processes of
    manufacturing, and subclasses 700+, as the generic locus for apparatus for
    assembling and disassembling.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate
    subclasses, for devices for expressing liquids from solids for drying,
    particularly subclasses 143+, for the stationary press type.  Class 34
    includes also expressing of liquids from solids for other purposes than
    drying where there is drying of the solids other than by heating necessary
    for expressing. Class 34 includes also the denuding of fluent solids.

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 225+, for devices for excavating snow and
    compressing it.

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclasses 1+, for smoothing
    machines, subclasses 69+, for smoothing machines, subclasses 69+, for
    smoothing implements, and subclass 144, for textile pressing or smoothing
    processes.

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclasses 634+ for apparatus for
    briquetting fuels, and subclasses 630+ for apparatus for briquetting peat.

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, for a
    process of making an abrasive tool which may involve pressing the material.

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 396+, for methods of banding material to
    make a package, subclasses 436+, for methods involving compacting material
    and packaging it, subclasses 523+, for apparatus for compressing material
    into bales and covering the compressed material, subclasses 582+, for
    apparatus for forming band type packages, and subclasses 387+, for package
    flap or seam holders for adhesive setting.  See the Class Definition of
    Class 53 and the notes thereto for the locus of art on packaging and
    binding. Class 100 includes in subclasses 1+ compressing material and
    binding it in a flexible filament strand or band while Class 53 includes in
    subclasses 124+ compressing material and covering it with flexible sheet
    material with or without additionally binding of the covered material.

    56,     Harvesters, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclass 341, for
    devices which gather material from the ground and then compact and bind the
    material gathered, subclasses 401+, for shockers, and subclasses 432+, for
    compressing and binding devices.

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, appropriate subclasses, for
    forging or welding presses for making the articles indicated in the class
    title.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 66, 322, 601+, and 604, for processes and
    apparatus for manufacturing a solidified gas or liquid and shaping it.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, appropriate subclasses, for molding of glass
    by pressing.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 94+, for apparatus
    for squeezing textiles while subjected to a liquid, and subclasses 241+,
    for wringers for removing the liquid from textiles.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclass 1, for leather hammering devices
    subclass 7, for seam pressers, subclass 8, for devices for forming and
    pressing leather articles, subclasses 21+, for processes of working leather
    involving pressure, and, subclass 48 for presses for working leather.

    71,     Chemistry:  Fertilizers, appropriate subclasses, for methods of
    producing and manufacturing fertilizers which may include pressing as a
    part of manufacturing.

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses, for a means or a method
    for shaping plastic metal, e.g., by forging, rolling, bending, drawing or
    extruding it.  See the definition of Class 72 for what constitutes "plastic
    metal".  Shaping combined with cutting and/or heating or cooling to working
    or ambient temperature is included.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 78, for presses for hardness
    testing materials, and, subclasses 788+, particularly subclasses 818+, for
    presses for compression testing material.

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclass 4, for test presses
    for use in die making, and, appropriate subclasses, for presses and dies
    for forging tools.

    81,     Tools, subclasses 3.09+, for the combination of a press and
    receptacle closure remover.

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses for means relating to the clamping
    of work in a cutting machine, e.g., subclasses 176, 282, 375+, and 452+.

    86,     Ammunition and Explosive-Charge Making, appropriate subclasses, for
    ammunition and explosive charge-making including pressing.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, for apparatus for gas separation with
    means to compact the separating media.  See particularly subclasses 137 and
    149 for solid sorbent apparatus with means to compress or compact a solid
    sorbent bed.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, for methods and apparatus for
    treating food which may include pressing, particularly subclasses 349+, for
    cooking devices with material pressing means, subclasses, 495+ for removing
    a fluid from food, and, subclasses 568+, for shell crackers.

    101,    Printing, appropriate subclasses, for presses having means to
    produce characters or designs on surfaces by impression or by applying
    coating material.

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 77+, for cigarette and cigar making machines
    including tobacco molding or forming devices, and, subclasses 111+, for
    apparatus for making plugs or compressed shapes of tobacco.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    appropriate subclasses, for combinations involving means for filling
    receivers with fluent material including means to compact the material
    charge either prior to or after placement thereof into the receiver.  In
    general, where pressing only is involved, classification is in appropriate
    subclasses of Class 100 even if the press box is a portable receptacle  See
    also the discussion of Class 141 in (4) Note and (5) Note of subclass 229
    of this class (100) and the Search Note of that subclass to Class 141.

    144,    Woodworking. subclass 256.1 for woodworking bending presses,
    subclass 284 for a cork or bung press, and subclasses 329+ for processes or
    methods of working wood including compression, particularly subclasses 381+
    for a Woodworking process.

    147,    Coopering, subclass 4, for barrel compressors, subclass 6, for
    barrel headers for heading barrels during manufacture, and, subclasses
    7-12, for barrel hoop drivers.

    148,    Metal Treatment, appropriate subclasses, for processes which press
    metal and also heat-treat it.  See particularly subclass 131 for processes
    of treating solid material involving a nonreshaping pressing operation.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses, for press structures peculiarly adapted to
    laminating functions and, especially subclasses 580+, for presses, per se,
    peculiar to laminating.  Heating or cooling a press structure is provided
    for in Class 100 (subclasses 92+); also vacuum means to facilitate the
    pressing operation is provided for in Class 100 (subclass 90).

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, appropriate subclasses, for
    paper making operations that may involve a pressing step, and, especially
    subclass 56, for chemical processes involving squeezing or compression,
    subclasses 205+, for the subsequent pressure treatment of a formed web,
    subclasses 224+, for processes of treating an article by pressure, subclass
    305, for the combination of molds for forming a paper article combined with
    pressing means, and subclasses 358+, for press and felt combinations.  This
    class (100) provides for calenders, per se, when not combined with a felt
    for conveying the moist web.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 37+, for processes of compacting sand to
    form a metal casting mold and, subclasses 169+, for corresponding apparatus.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 14.5, for apparatus for
    separating paraffin from oil by a filter press.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses, for
    filters or devices in which material is pressed against a perforated
    surface by the pressure of fluid contacting the material.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 600+ for inductive heating, subclasses
    678+ for microwave heating, and subclasses 764+ for capacitive dielectric
    heating; and subclasses 50+ and 149+ for shaping or working metal by
    pressure in combination with means to heat the metal electrically.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 578+ for an internal closure-like member
    which rests on the unused contents of a container.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses, for article dispensing
    (feeding) devices which may be disclosed as feeding to press structure.

    222,    Dispensing, for devices which operate to separate a quantity of
    material from a larger receptacle-enclosed mass of such material by the
    application of pressure upon the walls of the receptacle, as in subclasses
    95+ and 214, in which the walls of collapsible and resilient wall
    containers, respectively, are pressed together by press-like structures in
    order to expel the contents of such containers.  See Class 222 also for
    combinations involving devices so related to a source of material as to
    assist the discharge of such materials from the source.  Where such
    discharge assistants serve only to forward the material through a discharge
    opening, classification is in Class 222 but where the further function of
    pressing a compressible material is accomplished as by forcing the
    compressible material through a restricted opening, or between pressing
    rolls, classification is in Class 100, subclasses 144+.  See Class 222 also
    for dispensers, per se, disclosed as delivering material to or from a
    press. Where the press is claimed as an element of the combination other
    than as of a nominal source of supply for the dispenser, classification is
    in Class 100.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 12+ for hat shaping presses,
    subclasses 28+ for apparel fluting presses, and subclasses 52+ for devices
    for pressing garments.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclass 152, for apparatus for
    holding a lid on a receptacle combined with applying a member, e.g., nail,
    thereto. Class 100 includes, in subclasses 54+, presses for applying a lid
    to a receptacle combined with means to apply a member thereto.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses, for apparatus for disintegrating a solid mass into a number of
    smaller masses.  See section 12 of the definition of Class 241 for the line
    between Classes 100 and 241.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses, for molding and shaping processes within the class
    definition, particularly subclasses 109+, for processes of forming articles
    by uniting of bulk assembled discrete particles.

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses.  Class 269 is the residual
    locus for patents to a device for clamping, supporting and/or holding an
    article (or articles) in position to be operated on or treated.  See notes
    thereunder for other related loci. Particularly, see section VIII under the
    class definition of Class 269 for the line with respect to Class 100.

    366,    Agitating, appropriate subclasses, for compacting material by
    merely shaking it.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 658+ for apparatus for burnishing or
    polishing a photographic image by applying to it heat and pressure or
    friction.

    399,    Electrophotography,  subclasses 222+ for development, particularly
    subclasses 279+ for a roller-type application member; subclass 318 for
    transfer by pressure; subclasses 320+ for fixing, particularly subclass 331
    for pressure roller; subclass 357 for cleaning roller; and subclasses 361+
    for document handling.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, appropriate subclasses, for key operated
    machines for the production at will of printed matter generally,
    particularly, subclasses 127+, for machines for producing characters in
    relief or intaglio or entirely through the material.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 72+, for
    drilling of that class type utilizing a drill press.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 467 (especially subclasses
    501+ and 508+) and also subclass 679, in both of which areas a means for
    compressing material within a vehicle body may be included, in which the
    means for compressing the load functions (1) to fill or load the vehicle
    body, (2) move the material within the body for increasing the load
    capacity thereof, or (3) unload the vehicle body.  However, compressing the
    material for the purpose of baling or forming a solid, compact,
    self-contained bundle is considered treatment of matter to change its shape
    or condition and so would go beyond Class 414 subject matter and cause
    classification in Class 100 even if associated with a vehicle.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, for rotary expansible chamber
    devices particularly adapted to compress elastic or compressible fluids.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    appropriate subclasses for a reshaping means for nonmetallic materials, see
    subclasses 394+, for a preform reshaping apparatus, and subclasses 406+,
    for a press for shaping fluent material:  see the search notes thereunder.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    appropriate subclasses, especially 479+ for food working operations which
    may involve a pressing operation.

    449,    Bee Culture, subclasses 57+ for a press for setting honey comb
    foundation into a honey frame. Class 100 includes, in appropriate
    subclasses, a press for expressing honey from honey comb.

    452,    Butchering, subclasses 35+ for sausage stuffers, subclasses 46+ for
    sausage linkers, and subclasses 141+ for meat tenderizers.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for metal forging presses for making the
    articles indicated in the class title.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the search notes thereunder.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 162+ for a paper box making press.

    504,    Plant Protecting and Regulating Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses for methods of producing and manufacturing substances regulating
    the action on plant growth which may include pressing as a part of
    manufacturing.

    554,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 8+ for processes which include the
    recovery or extraction of fats from vegetable or animal substances or waste
    materials where there may be a broad inclusion of pressing or filtering;
    processes directed to a significant pressing or filtering may be in Class
    100 or in Class 210 Liquid Separation or Purification.

    VI.     PRODUCTS

    (69)    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 83.5, for bales and see the
    Notes thereto for compacted or bound articles elsewhere classified.



    VII.    PRESS SUBCOMBINATIONS

    (70)    Note.  The following classes are of particular interest as
    including subcombinations of special utility in presses.  Class 100
    includes press subcombinations not elsewhere provided for.

    (79)    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 256.5+, for
    cleaning attachments to be applied to a device to remove material from a
    moving surface thereof in the normal operation of the device.

    60,     Power Plants, appropriate subclasses, for power plants as defined
    in definitions of that class and including nominally recited press elements
    as the loads thereof.  Combinations of such power plants with significant
    press structure or press relationships are classified in appropriate
    subclasses of Class 100.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses, for power
    transmitting devices of general utility.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclasses, for
    expansible-chamber type motors or fluid motors of the type provided for in
    that class and including nominally recited press elements as the loads
    thereof. Combinations of such motors with significant press structure or
    press relationships are classified in appropriate subclasses of Class 100,
    and especially in subclasses 269+.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 168+, for a heat exchange platen, per se.

    173,    Tool Driving Or Impacting, appropriate subclass, for subject matter
    directed to driving or impacting a tool, when such subject matter includes
    combined features peculiar to tool driving, but which does not include
    features limiting the subject matter to a specific tool art, such as
    specific shape of the work contacting portion of a tool, related tools, or
    an opposed work support.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 116.5+, for mechanisms
    usually automatic in operation for stopping a machine when a predetermined
    result is reached, when some part of the machine fails to function, or the
    material fails or is disarranged, when an operator's position renders him
    liable to injury.  This subclass takes the subcombinations, per se.

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, appropriate subclasses,
    for chutes, per se, for carrying material as to a press box or between
    stages of a plural stage roll type press.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses, as residual for
    power type conveyors or elements thereof, such as belts, per se.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses, for separating devices such as separator belts, per se.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 400+, for belt type
    filters.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for article dispensers
    (feeders) not otherwise provided for, and see the class definition of Class
    221 for a statement of the class lines and for the disposition of related
    disclosures of articles and strip feeding processes and apparatus.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses,
    for apparatus for liquid distributors or discharges.

    249,    Static Molds, appropriate subclasses, for molds intended for use
    with a press member for shaping a fluent material.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 199+, for portable implements or apparatus for tensioning
    flexible material (e.g., tightening cord around a box) from which the
    implement or apparatus is detached after tensioning.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclass 119 for a fluid spring press cushion; and
    subclass 130, for press cushion structure using a spring other than a fluid
    spring.

    289,    Knots and Knot Tying, appropriate subclasses, for apparatus for and
    methods of intertwining portions of cords, ropes, or strips for the purpose
    of fastening them together.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, appropriate subclasses, for bolt elements and
    latching devices, not combined with lock structure for securing any closure
    element in closed or adjusted position.

    384,    Bearings, appropriate subclasses for linear bearings.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, for rotary expansible chamber
    motors, per se, or with nominally recited press elements as the loads
    thereof.  Combination of such motors with significant press structure or
    press relationships are classified in appropriate subclasses of Class 100
    and especially subclasses 269+.

    VIII.MISCELLANEOUS NOTES AND INDEX TO THE CLASSES REFERRED TO HEREIN

    (81)    In the indication below of the location in these Notes of the
    references, the initial number refers to the section of these Notes and the
    units number the location in that section.  For example, a reference marked
    (49) would be in section IV as indicated by the initial 4 in 49. The units
    numeral 9 has been used uniformly for Search Class.

    (89)    SEARCH CLASS:

    6,      Bee Culture     (59)

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers     (49)

    11,     Books, Making   (49)

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making    (59)

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning               (59) (79.1+)

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation    (59)

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc.  (59)

    26,     Textiles: Cloth Finishing, subclasses 27+, for devices for
    finishing cloth by rubbing other than pressing.

    28,     Textiles: Manufacturing (59)

    29,     Metal Working   (49) (59)

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids     (49)(59)

    37,     Excavating      (59)

    38,     Textiles: Ironing or Smoothing
                            (49) (59)

    44,     Fuel and Igniting Devices       (49) (59)

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process,
    Material, or Composition        (59)

    53,     Package Making  (49) (59)

    56,     Harvesters      (49) (59)

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making                     (49)(59)

    60,     Power Plants    (79)

    62,     Refrigeration   (59)

    65,     Glass Manufacturing     (49)(59)

    68,     Textiles: Fluid Treating Apparatus
                            (49) (59)

    69,     Leather Manufactures    (59)

    71,     Chemistry: Fertilizers  (59)

    72,     Metal Deforming (49) (51) (59)

    73,     Measuring and Testing   (59)

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism
                            (79)

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate Mixtures
       (59)

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making                      (59)

    81,     Tools           (49) (59)

    83,     Cutting         (49) (59)

    86,     Ammunition and Explosive-Charge Making  (59)

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type                        (79)

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus      (59)

    99,     Foods and Beverages: Apparatus
                            (51) (59)

    101,    Printing                (59)

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 369, for braces or holding lading
    in place in a freight car which brace may compact the lading.

    117,    Coating:  Processes and Miscellaneous Products  (49)

    118,    Coating Apparatus       (49)

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates
                            (49)

    131,    Tobacco         (49) (59)

    144,    Woodworking     (59)

    147,    Coopering       (59)

    148,    Metal Treatment (59)

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical
    Manufacture                 (49) (59)

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation                       (59)

    166,    Heat Exchange   (79)

    173,    Tool Driving Or Impacting       (79)

    184,    Lubrication, appropriate sub-class, for forced feed lubricators

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control                                 (79)

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways              (79)

    196,    Mineral Oils: Apparatus (59)

    197,    Typewriting Machines    (59)

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven (79)

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package   (69)

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids.  (49) (79)

    210,    Liquid Separation or Purification
                            (59) (79)

    219,    Electric Heating        (59)

    220,    Receptacles     (59)

    221,    Article Dispensing      (59) (79)

    222,    Dispensing      (59)

    223,    Apparel Apparatus       (59)

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving
    Apparatus       (59)

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing               (79)

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration    (59)

    254,    Implements or  Apparatus  for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force
                       (79)

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds
                            (59)

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:
    Processes                  (51) (59)

    267,    Spring Devices  (79)

    269,    Work Holders    (59)

    289,    Knots and Knot Tying    (79)

    292,    Closure Fasteners       (79)

    297,    Chairs and Seats        (49)

    384,    Bearings, appropriate subclasses, for linear bearings.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing                             (49)

    366,    Agitating               (59)

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool  (49) (59)

    412,    Bookbindind:  Process and Apparatus                     (49)

    414,    Material or Article Handling    (59)

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices                       (59) (79)

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus.
                                    (49) (59)

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and
    Products (51) (59)

    452,    Butchering      (49) (59)

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus,             (49) (59).

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web     (59)


CLS 100/1
TXT Methods and apparatus under the class definition for use in disposing a
    flexible binder tightly and circumferentially closed around the material.

    (1)     Note.  The flexible binder is in the form of a filament, strand or
    band.

    (2)     Note.  Binder chains or wires or cords, per se, or with a binder
    tightener which stays with the binder member will be found in Class 24,
    Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 16+.  See particularly subclass
    18 for cords for binding and subclass 19 for binder members with
    tighteners.  Where a tightening device is supported from the ground or from
    a material penetrating element and is claimed in combination with a cord,
    which the tightener tensions about the material the device will be found in
    this class, subclass 212.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212,    for presses in which the material is compressed within a bendable
    filament, strand or band by contracting it around the material by endwise
    pulling.  See (2) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 243.57+ for a means not classified here
    or elsewhere, to assemble a metal strip over an edge of an article to form
    a binding or covering therefor.

    53,     Package Making, subclass 135 for combined packaging in sheet
    material and binding and subclasses 582+ for apparatus for applying band
    type covers.  See the class definition of Class 53, section IV, (40) Note
    and (41) Note, as to banding elsewhere classified.

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 22 for devices which have a motor for driving
    a portion of the apparatus and having means to cut, convey and bind grain,
    subclasses 131+, for harvesters which cut, convey and bind grain,
    subclasses 341+, for devices for raking hay, straw, and the like and
    securing it in a bundle, as by binding, subclasses 401+, for shock tying
    harvesters, and subclasses 432+ for devices for compressing and binding
    grain.

    452,    Butchering, subclass 48 for devices which wrap a binding member
    between successive portions of stuffed casing to form sausage links.


CLS 100/2
TXT Methods under subclass 1.


CLS 100/3
TXT Methods under subclass 2 which include subjecting the material to
    compression other than and in addition to that due to the tightness of the
    flexible binder around the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35+,    for methods of pressing material.


CLS 100/4
TXT Apparatus under subclass 1 having (1) means to detect a condition or change
    of condition and to cause, in response to the detected condition a control
    operation modifying the action of the apparatus or (2) means which when
    contacted by the material causes operation of means controlling performance
    of the apparatus or some part thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Automatic control here is of the binding operation and also
    other features where binding is involved.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for automatic or material triggered control of pressing operations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 436 for compressing and binding devices of the
    cord knotter type in which the pressure of the grain trips the mechanism
    which carries the cord around the bundle.


CLS 100/5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 1 having, in addition to binding means, some means
    to bend the material into a coil or into layers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76+,    for apparatus for pressing material including means to wind or fold
    a sheet, web or strand.


CLS 100/6
TXT Apparatus under subclass 1 having in addition to binding means, some means
    to cut or rupture the material into parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for methods of pressing including cutting or comminuting.

    94+,    for presses having means for cutting, breaking, piercing or
    comminuting the material in addition to pressing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 131+ for harvesters having means to cut
    grain or the like, means for binding the grain into sheaves, and means for
    conveying the grain from the platform to the binder.


CLS 100/7
TXT Apparatus under subclass 1 having means for placing the material on or
    removing it from the means which supports the material for binding.

    (1)     Note.  Mere rollers affording support for the material during
    binding are not considered material depositing or discharging devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215+,   for reciprocating platen presses having means to place material on
    the means which supports the material during the compacting operation and
    see the notes thereto for other presses having material depositing means.

    218,    for reciprocating platen presses having means to remove the
    compacted material bodily from the means which supported the material
    during the pressing operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 449 for compressing and binding of the cord
    knotter type having ejectors or discharge gates.


CLS 100/8
TXT Apparatus under subclass 1 having means for placing a binder in position
    encircling the material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes the species of binder appliers in
    which an article is set upon a portion of the binder and there are means to
    carry the binder around the rest of the circumference of the article.


CLS 100/9
TXT Apparatus under subclass 8 which places about the material a binder which
    is circumferentially closed and ringlike prior to such placement.

    (1)     Note.  The annular binders here applied include rubber bands.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 235+ for other devices applying resilient
    annular members to articles.


CLS 100/10
TXT Apparatus under subclass 8 having means by which a portion of binder of the
    necessary or a desired length is severed from another binder portion and
    the cut off piece is subsequently bent around the material.


CLS 100/11
TXT Apparatus under subclass 8 in which the encircling binder member as
    completed on the material is made up of more than one flexible member with
    the ends of the several members joined together.

    (1)     Note.  The several sections of the binder as here placed are each
    flexible.  This subclass does not include a single flexible element
    combined with a stiff buckle joining its ends.


CLS 100/12
TXT Apparatus under subclass 8 for placing a binder passing through the opening
    in ringlike material.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are devices for wrapping tape around the
    overlapping ends of a cable to make therefrom an annulus to serve as a tire
    bead core.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 241, for apparatus for assembling by a
    stringing action, either by stringing parts (which may be annular) on an
    attenuated or elongated means or by passing such means through a part or
    parts.

    53,     Package Making, subclass 409, for package making methods in which
    the package product is annular and covered and subclass 204, for apparatus
    for wrapping sheet material to form an annular package.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 434+ for apparatus for
    winding material upon a ring-shaped core.


CLS 100/13
TXT Apparatus under subclass 8 by which the binder is coiled about the material
    in a series of spaced convolutions.


CLS 100/14
TXT Apparatus under subclass 8 by which binding is placed a plurality of times
    around the material and the material is relocated relative to the binder
    applier between placements, so that the several turns are spaced along the
    material and/or extend in plural directions about the material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes moving material so that the specific
    operation of binder applying is repeated at intervals spaced along the
    article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    452,    Butchering, subclass 48 for devices for indexing a tubular casing
    filled with sausage material and periodically wrapping twine about the
    casing and drawing the twine tight in order to form links.


CLS 100/15
TXT Apparatus under subclass 8 in which the surface of the material is moved
    past a source of binder supply by rotating the material with the binder
    being laid on the material as it rotates.


CLS 100/16
TXT Apparatus under subclass 8 in which there is a pivoted or oscillating jaw
    which forces the material toward another jaw and in so doing carries the
    binder with it around the material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes a wool press, tables which have
    upwardly swinging hinged edge leaves which move the binder up along the
    sides of a fleece.  For presses having such leaves but not including means
    to move the binders with them, search this class, subclass 232.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232,    See (1) Note above.

    233+,   for reciprocating platen press constructions in which the press has
    an oscillatory or hinged platen or piston.


CLS 100/17
TXT Apparatus under subclass 8 in which the binder is applied to the material
    by moving the material along a path which intersects a line between two
    points between which points the binder is stretched.


CLS 100/18
TXT Apparatus under subclass 17 having means by which the material is moved
    along the path across which the binder is stretched.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass, for example, the binder is delivered to
    the joiner by the insertion of a separator or partition block.


CLS 100/19
TXT Apparatus under subclass 18 having a needle which carries the binder across
    the path of the material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes devices in which the threader
    delivers within range of a supplementary binder mover which in turn
    delivers the binder to the range of movement of a joiner or of a gripper
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 448 for compressing and binding devices of the
    cord knotter type having needle cleaners or guards for cleaning straw from
    the needle or binder-arm or for preventing the straw from becoming
    entangled with it, and subclass 453 for wire twister type compressing and
    binding devices in which there is a curved binder arm carrying wire around
    the bundle.


CLS 100/20
TXT Apparatus under subclass 19 in which the needle, in its movement across the
    path of movement of the material, carries the binder into the range of
    means which grips the end of the binder during the subsequent forwarding of
    the material for application of the binder.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes patents in which a threader delivers
    to a gripper but where there is no joiner, and in which the joining is done
    by hand.


CLS 100/21
TXT Apparatus under subclass 20 in which the movement of the needle to place
    the binder in the end gripper also places the binder in means which
    connects the ends of the binder to each other.


CLS 100/22
TXT Apparatus under subclass 21 in which the gripper rotates or pivots between
    positions in order to grip successive binder ends delivered to it.


CLS 100/23
TXT Apparatus under subclass 20 in which the needle delivers to a gripper and
    the gripper in turn shifts to carry the delivered end to means to connect
    the ends of the binder to each other.


CLS 100/24
TXT Apparatus under subclass 19 directed to needles, per se, for carrying the
    binder across the path along which the material is conveyed.


CLS 100/25
TXT Apparatus under subclass 8 in which there is a guideway curving relative to
    the material and the curve is such that the leading end of a binder thrust
    along the guideway is directed around the material.

    (1)     Note.  The guideway or channel contains and directs the binder
    rather than directing a puller for the binder.


CLS 100/26
TXT Apparatus under subclass 25 into which the guideway is of annular formation
    so that the material to which the binder is to be applied may be received
    within the opening of the annulus.


CLS 100/27
TXT Apparatus under subclass 8 in which the means for placing the binder
    includes an abutment over which the binder passes or to which the binder is
    secured, which abutment moves in a closed path circumferentially around the
    material to place the binder.


CLS 100/28
TXT Apparatus under subclass 27 in which the abutment, during successive
    circumferential travels about the material, goes in opposite directions.


CLS 100/29
TXT Apparatus under subclass 1 in which a binder encircling the material is
    tensioned to increase its tightness about the material and while so
    tensioned has spaced portions secured together.

    (1)     Note.  The joining in the patents classified in this subclass is
    often done by electric welding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 138.6+ for apparatus for tightening and
    joining a flexible filament which serves as a bag closure string.

    140,    Wireworking, subclass 93.2 for binder tensioning and joining
    implements, i.e. manually or work supported devices.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 86.1+ for spot welding by electricity.


CLS 100/30
TXT Apparatus under subclass 29 in which the means to secure together the
    spaced portions of the binder includes means to deform a sleeve, or a
    U-shaped clamp member within which the portions are received.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 464+ for compressing and binding devices in
    which the ends of the cord are secured together by band or clip.

    81,     Tools, subclass 9.1 for seal applying tools which secure members
    together by means of the seal.

    140,    Wireworking, subclass 93.4 for implements which are manually or
    work supported and which tension and join the binder employing a clamp or
    clip, subclasses 150+ manually held or work supported implement for joining
    the ends of a band together and subclasses 111+ for apparatus for joining
    wires.


CLS 100/31
TXT Apparatus under subclass 29 in which the tensioning of the binder about the
    material involves the intertwisting of the local spaced portions of the
    binder, such twisting being employed for joining the binder portions
    together.

    (1)     Note.  Twisters often include a means to bend over a projecting
    twisted end so as to insert or tuck such end into or against the material
    to avoid a protruding point which might be dangerous in handling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 451+ for grain compressing and binding
    devices of the wire twister type wherein the bundle is encircled by the
    wire and the ends of the wire are twisted together.

    140,    Wireworking, appropriate subclasses for wire twisting generally,
    and particularly subclass 93.6 for binder tightening and joining implements
    which are hand or work supported, and subclasses 118+ for twisting
    implements.


CLS 100/32
TXT Apparatus under subclass 1 by which a binder encircling the material is
    tensioned to increase its tightness about the material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 450 for compressing and binding devices of the
    cord knotter type having tension and take-up devices which tension the cord
    about the bundle.

    140,    Wireworking, subclass 123.6 for implements which combine tensioners
    and cutters for wire.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 199+ for portable implements or apparatus for tensioning
    flexible material (e.g., tightening cord around a box, from which the
    implement or apparatus is detached after the material is tensioned.


CLS 100/33
TXT Apparatus under subclass 1 for securing to one another spaced portions of a
    binder encircling the material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    289,    Knots and Knot Tying, in appropriate subclasses for apparatus for
    and methods of intertwining portions of cords, ropes, or strips for the
    purpose of fastening them together.


CLS 100/34
TXT Apparatus under subclass 1 having means to support or grip the material and
    means to affix a binder detachably to such support or grip.

    (1)     Note. This subclass includes platens having grooves containing
    means movable relative to the pressure surface of the platen for urging the
    binder from the groove toward the material. Reciprocating platen presses
    with straight access grooves permitting binder placement on the platen will
    be found in this class, subclasses 214+.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes tables with binder locating grooves
    where the grooves are narrower at the mouth than inwardly thereof.

    (3)     Note.  For material supports or clamps for holding the material
    while a wire is manually placed and then tightened and/or joined, see this
    class, subclasses 29+, 32 and 33.


CLS 100/35
TXT Methods under the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for methods of applying a binder around the material.

    3,      for methods in which pressing is combined with the application of a
    binder to hold the material in compression.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, appropriate subclasses for processes employed for the
    purpose indicated by the class title and definition which processes may
    utilize mechanical pressure.

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, subclasses 293+ for physical
    chemistry processes which processes may utilize the application of
    mechanical pressure.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 397+ for
    processes for the removal of liquids from solids mechanically, i.e., by
    operations other than by heating and/or gas or vapor contact.

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclass 144, for processes of
    smoothing or ironing of fabrics.

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, for a
    process of making an abrasive tool which may involve pressing the material.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses
    66+ for a process of forming glass in a mold cavity, e.g., by pressing.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclasses 21+, for processes of working
    leather involving pressure.

    71,     Chemistry:  Fertilizers, in appropriate subclasses, for methods of
    producing and manufacturing fertilizers which may include pressing.

    72,     Metal Deforming, for a process of plastically shaping metal.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 13+ for methods of cutting.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 329+ for a process of working wood, such
    processes including compressing.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, for
    pressing processes disclosed for the purpose of laminating.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses for methods within the class definition of molding
    or shaping, particularly subclasses 109+ for processes of forming articles
    by uniting discrete bulk assembled

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, for processes for making articles from
    metal containing powders with or without sufficient heat to effect
    sintering.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    appropriate subclasses, for food working operations which include among
    others a pressing operation.

    427,    Coating  Processes, subclass 361 for processes wherein a coating is
    subjected to calendering.

    504,    Plant Protecting and Regulation Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses for methods of producing and manufacturing substances regulating
    the action on plant life which may include pressing.


CLS 100/36
TXT Methods under subclass 35 in which the material is surrounded on all sides
    by a woven or knitted member and the material subsequently subjected to
    compressive force while so surrounded.

    (1)     Note.  The cloth is here applied ordinarily as a filter.  For
    commercial packaging, see Class 53, Package Making, appropriate subclasses.


CLS 100/37
TXT Methods under subclass 35 involving subjecting material to compression to
    cause the flow of liquid therefrom and the isolation of such liquid from
    the compressed mass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 478+, for processes of separating liquid from a food material by
    pressure.


CLS 100/38
TXT Methods under subclass 35 involving subjecting the material to a change in
    temperature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 69 for a process of forming a hollow
    glass article in a mold cavity combined with the step of annealing or
    tempering.

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses, for a plastic metal
    shaping method including such heating or cooling as is required merely to
    maintain or establish a working or an ambient temperature.

    148,    Metal Treatment, appropriate subclass, for combined processes of
    pressing and heat treating metal.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, appropriate subclasses, for processes
    of making articles from particulate material containing metal particles
    including pressure with or without heat.

    554,    Organic Compounds, subclass 23 for processes directed to or
    including the melting out of fats, oils or waxes from animal or vegetable
    matter by heat, where no significant pressing is claimed.


CLS 100/39
TXT Methods under subclass 35 involving severing or breaking the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for apparatus for applying a binder and having means to sever the
    material bound.

    94+,    for presses having, additionally, means for cutting, breaking,
    piercing, or comminuting the material compacted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 324+ for plastic metal shaping combined
    with cutting, and see the notes thereunder for other subclasses.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    appropriate subclasses, especially 478+ for process of separating edible
    material including the step of cracking, crushing, squeezing, twisting, or
    tearing.


CLS 100/40
TXT Methods under subclass 35 including bending the material into successive
    coils or layers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for apparatus for applying a binder and also having means for
    winding or folding the material bound.

    76+,    for apparatus for pressing material having, additionally, means for
    winding or folding the material compacted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, appropriate subclasses, for processes which coil
    metal and also heat-treat it.  See particularly subclasses 155+.


CLS 100/41
TXT Methods under subclass 35 in which the material is compressed by compelling
    it to pass through an opening of cross-section smaller than that of the
    uncompressed material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144+,   for presses which concurrently compress and convey the material.


CLS 100/42
TXT Methods under subclass 35 in which there are plural compression steps
    performed one after another and the direction of compression in one step is
    transverse to that of another step.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232,    for plural platen presses having three or more platens acting upon
    the same material with one or more platens acting in one direction to
    compact the material while it is compacted between the jaws of another pair
    of platens, in another direction.


CLS 100/43
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having (1) means to detect a condition
    or change of condition and to cause, in response to the detected condition
    or change of condition, a control operation modifying the action of the
    apparatus, or (2) means which when contacted or moved by the material
    causes such a control operation.

    (1)     Note.  The condition sensed may be a condition of the material
    treated, of the treating means, or of the apparatus.

    (2)     Note.  Mere periodic, cyclic or sequential operation, that is, that
    in which the same series of operations in the material are repeated
    unchanged, in the absence of adjustment of the machine, under a particular
    stimulus such as the presence of material or the application of power to
    the drive shaft is not considered automatic control.

    (3)     Note.  In this subclass, for example, are patents in which a
    condition is sensed during the operation of a press which conveys material
    while compressing it and in response to such sensed condition controls the
    size of an adjustable choke through which the material is conveyed by the
    press.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for binder applying apparatus having automatic or material
    triggered control.

    99,     for presses with an alarm, signal, indicator or press means which
    devices are not employed to control the press.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 6+, for a condition - responsive
    plastic metal shaping machine.

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 280+ for apparatus relating to the manufacture
    of cigars and cigarettes or like tobacco articles and in which there are
    means responsive to a condition to automatically control the operation of
    the cigarette or cigar apparatus or a part thereof.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 33+ for
    comminutors with means to sense a condition which means causes operation of
    a control device.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 8+ for
    drilling machines having means to feed a tool relative to the work and
    having a control which initiates a change of speed or direction of tool
    movement in response to the sensing of a condition, or in response to the
    distance the tool has traveled from a datum position.


CLS 100/44
TXT Apparatus under subclass 43 in which the control is of means inserting a
    divider block between portions of material placed in the press one after
    another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180+,   for concurrent pressing and conveying presses of the plunger type
    having means for inserting successive charge separators between material
    portions.


CLS 100/45
TXT Apparatus under subclass 43 in which the control is of the placing of
    material into the press, the addition of treating solids or fluids to the
    material, or the removal of material from the press.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71+,    for presses which additionally treat the material by adding a
    material treating substance to the material compacted.

    215+,   for reciprocating platen presses having means to deposit material
    on the means which supports the material during compacting and see the
    notes thereto for other presses having material depositing means.

    218,    for reciprocating platen presses having means to remove material
    from the surface which supported the material during the compacting
    operation and see the notes thereto for other presses having compacted
    material ejecting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 34 for
    comminutors with automatic control of the means feeding material to the
    comminuting zone.


CLS 100/46
TXT Apparatus under subclass 43 having means to detect differences in the
    travel of spaced portions of a movable platen and means to control the
    platen movement in response to detected differences so as to assure equal
    travel of all portions of the platen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258,    for reciprocating platen presses having platen level compensating
    means.


CLS 100/47
TXT Apparatus under subclass 43 in which the control is of the spacing apart of
    opposed pressing rolls or of the rate of rotation of such rolls.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168+,   for roll type concurrent pressing and conveying presses having
    means to adjust the rolls.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 253 for wringers in
    which the roll pressure applying or releasing mechanism and the means for
    driving the rolls are interconnected with one another to effect
    simultaneous adjustment in the units as one unit is adjusted such that roll
    separation effects a change in the drive mechanism.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 37, for
    comminutors with automatic control of the spacing between cooperating
    comminuting surfaces.


CLS 100/48
TXT Apparatus under subclass 43 in which the control is of means which causes
    the platens or pressure surfaces to move relative to one another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 36 for
    comminutors with automatic control of the comminutor driving means.


CLS 100/49
TXT Apparatus under subclass 48 in which means sensitive to the location of the
    material causes the actuating means to begin operation to cause movement of
    the platen or pressure surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215+,   for reciprocating platen presses having means to deposit material
    of the surface which supported the material during compacting.


CLS 100/50
TXT Apparatus under subclass 48 in which means sensitive to the pressure
    condition of the material as compacted controls the operation of the
    actuating means.


CLS 100/51
TXT Apparatus under subclass 50 in which the pressure upon the material causes
    the movement of the platen in the compacting direction to cease and hold
    position and there is means to maintain the platen in such compression
    position for a predetermined length of time.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 8+ for
    drilling machines having feeding means and automatic control for the feed
    in which the control includes means to interrupt the relative approach of
    work and tool at a predetermined point or points, maintain the tool and
    work in set position while relative rotation of the work and tool continues
    and then reverse the direction of feed.


CLS 100/52
TXT Apparatus under subclass 50 in which the means sensitive to the pressure on
    the material causes the actuating means to reverse the direction of
    movement of the movable platen upon the achievement of a predetermined
    pressure in the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256,    for reciprocating platen presses in which the movement of the
    movable platen trips a stop or trips a trigger to cause the press to
    reverse.

    260+,   for reciprocating platen presses with actuation releasing for
    rebounding or biased return.

    266,    for reciprocating platen presses having a spring or weight return
    bias.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 8+ for
    drilling machines with feeding means and having automatic control such that
    on the occurrence of a predetermined condition during relative movement of
    the tool and work in the approach direction there is brought into operation
    a control means which reverses the direction of the relative movement of
    the tool and work to withdraw the tool from work.


CLS 100/53
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which (1) two or more portions of
    the apparatus having distinct functions each have the regulating elements
    therefor so arranged as to require one element to assume a desired position
    simultaneously or in proper sequence with the positioning of another
    element, whereby the operation of one part is directly dependent upon the
    correct positioning of the regulating element of another part or (2) some
    nonautomatic mechanism is so arranged as to prevent operation of part or
    all of the machine when such operation would (a) endanger the person of an
    operator or (b) injure some part of the machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclass 77, for package making apparatus with
    interrelated or safety controls.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 116.5+, for mechanisms
    usually automatic in operation for stopping a machine when a predetermined
    result is reached, when some part of the machine fails to function, when
    the material fails or is disarranged, or when an operator's position
    renders him liable to injury.  This subclass takes the subcombinations, per
    se.


CLS 100/54
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the material pressed includes
    a mercantile container and a lid for the container and the compressive
    force urges the lid either against the container or against the contents of
    the container.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes apparatus for applying lids to
    preformed receptacles, the application of the lid effecting a compression
    of the contents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229,    for reciprocating platen presses having nonuse displacement of the
    receptacle, the receptacle being that within which the material is
    compressed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 287+ for apparatus for applying separate
    closures to receptacles wherein the application of the closure does not act
    to compact the contents.  See (1) Note, above.

    147,    Coopering, subclass 6 for machines which place the ends in a barrel
    during the manufacture of the barrel.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclass 152 for apparatus for
    holding a lid on a receptacle combined with means to drive a member, e.g.,
    nail.

    413,    Sheet Metal Container Making, subclasses 43+ for presses for
    applying heads upon cans with or without subsequent seaming of the head to
    the can body.


CLS 100/55
TXT Apparatus under subclass 54 having means by which the container is
    transported to or from the support on which it rests during the pressing
    operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215+,   for reciprocating platen presses having means for placing material
    on a support which supports the material during the compacting operation
    and see the notes thereto for other presses having material depositing
    means.

    218,    for reciprocating platen presses having means to remove material
    from the means which supported it during the pressing operation.


CLS 100/56
TXT Apparatus under subclass 54 having means which apply or manipulate means
    for securing the lid to the container while the compressive force continues.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclass 152 for apparatus for
    holding a lid on a receptacle combined with means to drive a member, e.g.,
    nail.


CLS 100/57
TXT Apparatus under subclass 54 having means for pushing contents of the
    container within the locus of the movement of the lid during the pressing
    operation so that the compression forces the material into the container.


CLS 100/58
TXT Apparatus under subclass 54 having means positioning or holding the lid
    against movement transversely of the press during the compression operation.

    (1)     Note.  These devices are usually on the movable platen so that the
    lid may be applied thereto prior to movement thereof in the compacting
    direction so that the lid is carried by the platen against the box or the
    material therein.


CLS 100/59
TXT Apparatus under subclass 54 in which the movable platen and its actuating
    means may be secured to the container to which the lid is to be applied in
    such manner that the movable platen and its actuating means are carried by
    or supported by the container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227,    for reciprocating platen presses in which the movable platen may be
    removed from the press and in which it is mountable on a portable
    receptacle.


CLS 100/60
TXT Apparatus under subclass 54 in which the application of compressive force
    includes lifting the container bodily upward.


CLS 100/61
TXT Apparatus under subclass 54 in which there are several platen areas each
    contacting the lid which are located at a distance from one another and
    which press against the lid at the same time.

    (1)     Note.  The separation of the platen areas is usually for the
    purpose of affording access for the application of securing means or for
    ease of manually loading the press.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237,    for reciprocating platen presses having plural movable platens
    moving in parallel paths toward a single opposing platen.


CLS 100/62
TXT Apparatus under subclass 61 in which the several pressing areas are bridge
    portions connecting the sides of U-shaped members while the container is
    between such sides.


CLS 100/63
TXT Apparatus under subclass 61 in which the spaced platen areas are on members
    which move toward one another prior to or during the pressing of the lid
    toward the receptacle support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226+,   for reciprocating platen presses having platens which are capable
    of nonuse displacement in a direction transverse to that of the pressing
    movement.


CLS 100/64
TXT Apparatus under subclass 61 in which the platen areas are on cantilever
    members which during the compressing operation move rectilinearly toward
    the support for the container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231,    for reciprocating platen presses of the C-frame type.


CLS 100/65
TXT Apparatus under the class definition acting within a storage chamber
    building to compact fodder material confined by the floor and walls of the
    building.

    (1)     Note.  The devices in this and the subclasses indented hereunder
    are usually employed while the silo is being filled and thus act to compact
    successively added increments of material against the mass already
    compacted within the silo.  As the silo thus fills, the compacter acts
    always on the top of the material as it rises within the silo.  This
    requires that the compacter be so connected to its actuator means that the
    operation is continuous despite the changing level.

    (2)     Note.  The storage chamber is usually round in cross section.  This
    permits the use of a compacter moving circularly about an axis normal to
    such cross section and having a uniform radius of action.  Furthermore, the
    round wall presents a continuous surface which may be used to guide such a
    circularly moving compacter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83,     for presses which circularly deposit a sheet, web, or strand
    through an eccentrically positioned hole upon a receiver, and there is a
    pressure roll at or along the hole.

    100,    for presses with ground traversing wheels or guides.

    221+,   for reciprocating platen presses in which a single support is
    indexed to bring various portions of a material successively under a
    reciprocating platen or tamper.


CLS 100/66
TXT Apparatus under subclass 65 having means for placing material within the
    silo or means for relocating the material within the silo after it has been
    so placed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215+,   for reciprocating platen presses with means to deposit the material
    on the means which supports the material during the pressing operation.


CLS 100/67
TXT Apparatus under subclass 65 in which the compacting pressure surface has
    rolling motion relative to the material and its movement over the material
    is directed by the silo wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210,    for presses in which the compression is between the surfaces of a
    platen and a pressure roll.

    245,    for box and piston type reciprocating platen presses in which the
    piston is guided by a box wall.


CLS 100/68
TXT Apparatus under subclass 65 in which the compacting pressure surface has
    rolling motion relative to the material and its movements are directed by a
    vertical post extending centrally of the silo.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210,    for presses in which the compression is between the surfaces of a
    platen and a pressure roll.


CLS 100/69
TXT Apparatus under subclass 65 in which the compacting member is a
    reciprocating element hanging on a flexible member supported from a point
    above the storage compartment of the silo.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    265,    for reciprocating platen presses in which the actuation is by means
    of a weight.


CLS 100/70
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means to subject the solid
    material before, after, or during pressing to some treatment other than and
    in addition to pressing which other treatment causes a change of a physical
    or chemical characteristic of the solid material.

    (1)     Note.  The treatment here classified is of the compressed material
    and not of the expressed liquid.  See this class, subclass 102, for
    combinations including means for treating the liquid expressed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclass 636 for apparatus
    especially adapted for use in manufacturing briquetted artificial fuel in
    which more than one operation is performed in making the briquette and the
    final operation is a briquetting of the material, and subclass 632 for
    apparatus for working peat by performing one or more operations and
    including the final modeling of the peat into briquettes.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 306, for a press molding machine
    combined with means to treat a product formed thereby.

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses, for a combined machine for
    plastically shaping metal and otherwise treating it, e.g., handling,
    cleaning or deoxidizing it, as provided for in the class.  Heating or
    cooling means for merely taking the work to or from a proper working
    temperature are included whether specifically set forth in the subclass
    titles or not.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses commencing with 451,
    for apparatus specifically adapted for the preparation and treatment of
    foodstuffs, which apparatus may employ pressing.

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 31 for cigar and cigarette making apparatus
    having cooperating rolling surfaces in which the rolling mechanism is
    provided with means to treat the tobacco to change its physical or chemical
    character, and subclass 79 for cigar and cigarette making apparatus with
    means to mold or form the tobacco combined with means to treat the tobacco
    to change physical or chemical characteristics.

    148,    Metal Treatment, appropriate subclasses for processes of using
    pressure, with or without heat, in order to alter the internal structural
    characteristics or properties of metals and metal alloys.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 404, for a shaping means and a downstream product treating Means;
    see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 100/71
TXT Apparatus under subclass 70 in which the means to subject the material to
    additional treatment includes means for placing another substance with
    material compacted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215,    for reciprocating platen presses having means to place the material
    on the means which supports the material during the compacting operation
    and see the notes thereto for other presses having material depositing
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 17, for machines
    combined with means to supply soap or concentrated soap solution to the tub
    in which the fabric is treated with liquid.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 516+, for applying a
    fluid to food, and subclass 494, for applying a solid or particulate
    material to food including pressing means.

    101,    Printing, subclass 335, for devices for attachment to printing
    apparatus for applying ink to the printing surfaces.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate apparatus subclasses, for means for applying adhesive to
    laminae surfaces and for pressing such surfaces together.


CLS 100/72
TXT Apparatus under subclass 71 in which the means for placing another
    substance with material compacted includes means for reintroducing into the
    press material which has already been compacted therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 97, for
    comminutors with means for recirculating material to comminuting zone.


CLS 100/73
TXT Apparatus under subclass 71 in which the means for placing another
    substance with material compacted includes means for introducing liquid
    and/or steam into contact with such material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92,     for heating the material by contact with a heated solid surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclass 3, for apparatus for
    smoothing textile material combined with a fabric moistener, subclasses
    14+, for smoothing machines with means for effecting a flow of fluid
    whether it be a gas, a liquid or a vapor, to or through the work during the
    smoothing operation, and, subclasses 77.1+ for flat irons wherein the flat
    iron has means to apply moisture to the fabric being pressed.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclasses 43+ and 94+ for machines for fluid treating textile
    fabrics for the removal of soil from them by the use of solvents and
    employing squeezing.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 287 for beverage infusors
    with means for stirring, commingling, or compressing the material during
    the infusing operation usually to facilitate formation of the infusion.

    101,    Printing, subclasses 147+ for dampeners for applying water or other
    in repellents to the printing surface of a planographic printing machine.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 38+ for
    comminutors including means to apply fluid to the material.


CLS 100/74
TXT Apparatus under subclass 73 in which the means for introducing liquid
    and/or steam into contact with material compacted is so arranged that the
    liquid and/or steam is added to such material while it is moving either to
    or through the press.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92+,    for heating in the press by contact with a heated solid surface.


CLS 100/75
TXT Apparatus under subclass 74 in which the means for introducing liquid
    and/or steam into contact with material compacted is so arranged that the
    liquid and/or steam is added to such material while it is moving from one
    of a plurality of pressing stages to another pressing stage.


CLS 100/76
TXT Apparatus under subclass 70 in which the means to subject the material to
    additional treatment includes means for bending the material into layers,
    or spirally or helically disposing it in convolutions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for apparatus for applying a binding strand or wire to material and
    having means for winding or folding the material.

    40,     for methods involving pressing with winding or folding.

    142,    for plural diverse presses having a press conveying while pressing
    and means for loading the press which means is a packer moving through an
    inlet of the press such as a platen which may incidentally fold the
    material.

    187,    for presses concurrently conveying the material in which a plunger
    moves through a tube and there is a tucker which may bend down material
    protruding above the plunger.

    218,    for reciprocating platen presses having means to remove the
    material compacted from the means which supported the material during the
    compacting operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles: Fiber Preparation, subclass 149, for devices for bringing
    together fibers with relation to each other by winding.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 46, for combined
    squeezing and liquid flow machines in which there is a roll about which the
    textile is wrapped and which carries the textile through the liquid and
    beneath another roller.

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate work and/or product handling
    subclasses.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    443+, for laminating including winding.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, appropriate subclasses, for
    winding and reeling elongated material on a core for storage purposes.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 102+ and 160, for apparatus for
    coiling and heat treating metal.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 319+, for means to form a preform and means to convolute or
    twist the preform, and subclasses 324+ for an apparatus comprising diverse
    distinct shaping means, especially subclass 328, for the combination of
    roll means and diverse press means.


CLS 100/77
TXT Apparatus under subclass 76 having means effective, after folding or
    winding of the material to move the material into the zone of action of
    pressure surfaces by which the material is pressed into a more compact
    state.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215,    for reciprocating platen presses having means to place the material
    on the means which supports the material during the compacting operation
    and see the notes thereto for other presses having material depositing
    means.


CLS 100/78
TXT Apparatus under subclass 76 having means to maintain the material in its
    folded or wound shape after release of the forces for bending the material
    into such shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220,    for reciprocating platen presses having means to restrain the
    material against rebound due to its elasticity.


CLS 100/79
TXT Apparatus under subclass 76 having means to pull or push a centrally
    located mandrel upon which the material has been wound from within the roll
    of material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 700+, for apparatus for disassembling
    including strippers, per se.


CLS 100/80
TXT Apparatus under subclass 76 having means by which successive bends are made
    in a single sheet of material so as to form a series of layers
    alternatively connected at their ends.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses 160 and 163, for bringing
    together fibers with relation to each other by laying a web or sliver
    transversely to the movement of a base upon which it is being deposited.


CLS 100/81
TXT Apparatus under subclass 80 having means for successively setting the
    layers down in a receiver which swings between end positions which
    determine the location of the fold or folds in the material.


CLS 100/82
TXT Apparatus under subclass 76 in which the means for bending the material has
    a member with an opening, offset from an axis of rotation, through which
    the material moves as the member rotates about such axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclass 159, for devices for laying
    a sliver of fibers in a coil in a receptacle through an eccentric opening
    circularly moving.


CLS 100/83
TXT Apparatus under subclass 82 in which there is a pressure surface having
    rolling motion relative to the material acting on the material at the
    opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65+,    for apparatus in which a roller acting upon the top of material
    compacts it within a silo.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses,
    for devices for discharging or distributing fluids.


CLS 100/84
TXT Apparatus under subclass 82 in which there is a mean associated with the
    opening which means forces material to pass through the opening by
    reciprocation to and from the opening.


CLS 100/85
TXT Apparatus under subclass 82 having means to receive the material as it is
    deposited through the eccentric opening, said means having a receiving
    surface which moves away from the orbit of the opening as the material is
    received.


CLS 100/86
TXT Apparatus under subclass 76 in which the means for bending the material
    includes an inner central core and a presser roll and the material is
    disposed circumferentially of the core and compressed thereon by the
    presser roll.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89,     for presses which wind a sheet, web, or strand within a cage of
    rolls and do not employ a mandrel.

    155+,   for concurrent pressing and conveying presses of the roll type,
    particularly subclasses 173+ for roll type concurrent pressing and
    conveying presses having material handling or guiding means.

    210,    for roll and platen type presses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclass 196 for apparatus for winding
    warp on a beam and having means to compress the warp on the beam as wound.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 284+ for inventions
    for molding articles by winding a sheet of pulp upon a form until
    sufficient thickness is obtained.


CLS 100/87
TXT Apparatus under subclass 76 in which the means for bending the material
    includes a flexible member and the material is wound within a loop formed
    in the flexible member.

    (1)     Note.  The flexible member is mounted so that it may give as the
    roll formed by the wound material enlarges during the winding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151+,   for concurrent pressing and conveying presses of the endless
    conveyor type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclass 215, for package wrapping machines in
    which a wrapper is disposed around the contents by rotation of the material
    within an apron.

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 47+, for cigar and cigarette machines having
    cooperating rolling surfaces including an apron member which substantially
    encloses the tobacco in a single loop or bight during a rolling operation.


CLS 100/88
TXT Apparatus under subclass 76 in which the means for bending the material
    includes opposed flexible members and the material is wound or rotated into
    a roll by movement of such opposed flexible members relative to the
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151+,   for endless conveyor type concurrent pressing and conveying presses.


CLS 100/89
TXT Apparatus under subclass 76 in which the means for bending the material is
    a group of positively driven circumferentially spaced rolls and the
    material is wound into a bale within the space between the rolls, the wound
    bale being contained in said space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86,     for presses which wind a sheet or web about a mandrel and employ an
    opposed presser roll or rolls.

    155+,   for concurrent conveying and pressing presses of the roll type,
    particularly subclasses 173+ for roll type concurrent pressing and
    conveying presses with material handling or guiding means.

    210,    for roll and platen presses in which the material is compressed by
    rolling motion between a stationary surface and a roll.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclass 125 for apparatus in which
    material to be felted is rolled up and worked in a machine in a rolled form
    and subclass 126 for apparatus in which material to be felted is rolled up
    and worked between a plurality of rolls so arranged as to provide a cavity
    between them in which the roll pack is held and worked.


CLS 100/90
TXT Apparatus under subclass 70 in which the means to subject the material
    compacted to additional treatment includes means for removing one substance
    from another.

    (1)     Note.  The substance removed may be air.  In this subclass may be
    found, for example, presses having means subjecting the space between the
    platens to a vacuum to remove air from between layers of the material being
    pressed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104+,   for presses including means for collecting or a duct for
    transferring liquid coming from the material pressed as a result of the
    application of compressing force.

    218,    for reciprocating platen presses having means to remove the
    compacted material from the surface which supported it during the
    compacting operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 79+, for package evacuating and sealing.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 18 for machines
    combined with means to reclaim and reuse a solvent.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 68, for
    comminutors with means for separation or classification of material.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 197+ for apparatus to shape plastic material and having an
    upstream straining or homogenizing screen.


CLS 100/91
TXT Apparatus under subclass 90 in which the means for removing one substance
    from another is apparatus for the separation of one solid from another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 599 and
    699, for apparatus and methods which assort articles according to their
    compressibility or the degree to which they yield to pressure.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 261+ for apparatus for dissolving a
    compound or the soluble part of a composition of matter.


CLS 100/92
TXT Apparatus under subclass 70 in which the means to subject the material
    compacted to additional treatment includes means for changing the
    temperature or reducing the moisture content of the material compacted.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are patents to a device otherwise meeting the
    definitions of Class 269, Work Holders, but combined with heating, cooling
    or drying means.  See the class definition of Class 269, section VIII for
    the line with this class (100).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73+,    for adding steam or other heated fluid to the material being
    pressed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 70, for
    apparatus for removing liquid from material in which there are two or more
    distinct means for removing the liquid and at least one of the means causes
    liquid removal by applying mechanical pressure to the solid material
    treated, and subclass 145, for apparatus in which the material to be
    treated is held between two opposed members which are movable or expansible
    toward one another to press or retain the material, and away from each
    other to release the material and there is means to pass a gas or vapor
    into contact with the material treated.

    37,     Excavating, subclass 226 for apparatus for excavating and
    compacting snow in which the compressor for the snow is provided with a
    heater.

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclass 74, for flat irons.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 20, for machines
    combined with means to facilitate drying of the textiles by means of the
    passage of a gaseous medium through the textiles or by withdrawing vapor
    from the textiles.

    72,     Metal Deforming.  See the "SEARCH CLASS" Note to Class 72 under
    subclass 70 above.

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 254, for a wood bending machine which
    includes a heating device for drying the wood in its bent form.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 168+, for a heat exchange platen, per se.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 600+ for inductive heating, subclasses
    678+ for microwave heating, and subclasses 764+ for capacitive dielectric
    heating; and subclasses 50+ and 149+ for metal heating by electricity
    combined with shaping, where the shaping may be by means of dies, and
    subclasses 200+, for miscellaneous electric heaters.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 65+, for
    comminutors with means to modify the temperature of the material.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 102+ and 160+, for apparatus
    which coils and heat-treats metal.

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses, Class 269 is the residual
    locus for patents to a device for clamping, supporting and/or holding an
    article (or articles) in position to be operated on or treated.  See notes
    thereunder for other related loci.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 285+, for melt separators.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    appropriate subclasses for shaping or reshaping apparatus for nonmetals
    including heating or cooling means for in situ treatment, especially
    subclasses 383+, for a vulcanizing means including a preform support,
    subclass 407, for a press couple shaping apparatus including heating and
    cooling means; and subclass 446 for means treating shaped work in or on a
    work confining surface; see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 100/94
TXT Apparatus under subclass 70 in which the means to subject the material to
    additional treatment includes means to sever or rupture the material into
    parts.

    (1)     Note.  Breaking or crushing up material due to compaction between
    surfaces is inherent in nearly all presses.  The devices here classified
    have comminuting, breaking, cutting, piercing by some means in addition to
    the pressing surfaces to effect these operations upon the material pressed.

    (2)     Note.  The devices here classified do not include those in which
    piercing points are employed for antifriction purposes, as, for example,
    for preventing slippage of the material on the platen during compression.
    Not included also are pronged gates for arresting movement of the material
    in feeding as any piercing of the material by the prongs is merely
    incidental and not a significant treatment of the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for apparatus for applying a binding in combination with means for
    severing the material.

    39,     for methods including cutting or comminuting.

    235,    for plier type presses having a sharp spit-like member for piercing
    the material and holding in place while being compressed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclass 2, for machines for cutting or
    trimming leather and at the same time creasing or otherwise impressing it
    for ornamental purposes or which simply crease or impress without cutting.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 324+, and other appropriate subclasses
    as indicated in the notes thereto, for combined machines which plastically
    shape and cut metal.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 14+, for cutting process including ancillary
    treatment of work, and appropriate subclasses relating to the clamping of
    work in a cutting device; for example, subclasses 282, 375+ and 452+.

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 46, for cigar and cigarette making machines
    having cooperating rolling surfaces combined with means to trim the ends of
    the tobacco article, subclass 83, for cigar and cigarette making apparatus
    having means for molding or forming combined with a trimmer or perforating
    or slitting means, and subclass 118, for apparatus for making plugs, plug
    tobacco or compressed shapes of tobacco including separately cutting the
    molded material into plugs or shapes.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, for comminutors of
    that class (241) type, particularly subclasses 101.01+, for comminution in
    combination with other apparatus, and subclasses 68+, for comminution and
    separation or classification.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 289+, for a shaping or reshaping apparatus for nonmetals
    combined with cutting, perforating or severing means.


CLS 100/95
TXT Apparatus under subclass 94 in which the material severing or rupturing
    means is so arranged as to act on the material during its movement to or
    from the means for subjecting the material to compressive force.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes devices which cut material as it
    leaves the constriction of a concurrent pressing and conveying press. For
    cutting  devices within the concurrent press severing the material during
    the compressing operation search this class, subclass 98.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98,     and see (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 2, 25 and
    101.1, for processes and apparatus for comminuting material combined with
    means to apply an expressing operation on the material prior to the
    comminuting operation and see section 12 of the class definition of Class
    241 for the line between Class 100 and Class 241.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating.  Apparatus,
    subclasses 289+, for apparatus for shaping or reshaping fluent or plastic
    material in combination with product cutting, scoring, or severing means.


CLS 100/96
TXT Apparatus under subclass 95 in which the material severing or rupturing
    means is so arranged as to act on the material moving to the press.


CLS 100/97
TXT Apparatus under subclass 96 in which the material severing or rupturing
    means has a sharp edge which severs the material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 112, for a process of treating a
    glass preform combined with severing or perforating; and see the collection
    of notes thereunder for the field of search on combined glassworking or
    treating and scoring, cutting or perforating.


CLS 100/98
TXT Apparatus under subclass 94 in which the severing or rupturing means is so
    arranged as to act on the material during the compacting operation.


CLS 100/99
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means (1) to detect some
    condition in the operation of the machine, the detecting means operating a
    visual and/or audible indication of the condition, (2) or to indicate or
    test a physical or chemical condition of the material under treatment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43+,    for apparatus in which the detecting means effects the operation of
    some control to bring about some change in the operation of the apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 158, for a glassworking apparatus
    combined with a signal, indicator, or inspection means.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 863+, for samplers, per se; and
    subclass 760, for determination of stress within a press structure absent
    detailed recitation of the press structure.

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 280+, for cigar and cigarette making machines
    having automatic control means responsive to weight.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    378, for laminating devices having measuring, testing or inspecting means.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 599 and
    699, for devices which assort articles by determining their compressibility.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses, for
    apparatus for determining the electrical properties of material while under
    pressure including means to apply the pressure.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+, for electrical
    automatic condition responsive indicating systems.


CLS 100/100
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having wheels or skids for supporting
    the weight of the apparatus for rendering its movement bodily from one
    place to another expeditious.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65,     for pressure rollers actuated to travel over ensilage within a silo.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, appropriate subclasses, for wheeled
    transportation equipment for railways.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 467+ for self loading or
    unloading vehicles which may have means for compressing the load to allow
    the vehicle to carry a greater, more compact load (see section V of the
    class definition of Class 100).


CLS 100/101
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means to bend a woven or
    knitted fabric to enclose in it the material compacted.

    (1)     Note.  In the patents classified herein the covering material is
    always folded about the material compacted as distinguished from devices in
    which textile bags are filled with material to be compacted and pressed in
    such bags, the bags being closed by means other than by folding, such
    devices being in this class, subclasses 122+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122+,   and see (1) Note above.

    298,    for apparatus for removing a cloth    from a compacted cake.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, and appropriate subclasses, for apparatus for
    making commercial packages by enclosing material with a cover made from
    sheet material stock, and especially subclasses 523+, for such apparatus
    involving compacting the materials which are so enclosed.


CLS 100/102
TXT Apparatus under the class definition claimed in combination with features
    other than and in addition to solid pressing surfaces, means to actuate
    them relative to one another so as to subject the material to pressure,
    means for mounting or supporting such pressing and actuating means and
    means to handle or guide the material treated.

    (1)     Note.  The solid pressing surfaces are the surfaces which contact
    the material treated and bear upon it with force to cause the treatment.

    (2)     Note.  In this subclass, for example, are press combinations
    including; means to scrape the platen or to flush the compression chamber,
    means to attach tags to a bale, a duct to vent a press box, means to
    ventilate the operating station, means to crush ice, presses mounted on
    chairs, elevators, etc.

    (3)     Note.  All preceding subclasses must be searched for particular
    combinations within the definition of this subclass as shown by the titles
    of such preceding subclasses.

    (4)     Note.  See the notes to Part IV of the class definition for the
    location of apparatus of this class combined with apparatus classified in
    other classes.


CLS 100/103
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means by which an adjustment,
    addition, removal or reassembly of one or more of the parts of the
    apparatus causes the apparatus to be capable of performing some function
    other than pressing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 4, for textile fluid
    treating machines with some additive, removable, or displaceable part,
    other than the drive mechanism, and which part may or may not be replaced
    by another part to alter the function of the machine.


CLS 100/104
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means for collecting or a
    duct for transferring liquid coming from the material pressed as a result
    of the application of the compressing force.

    (1)     Note.  Mere openings or grooves for access or egress are not
    regarded as ducts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218,    for reciprocating presses having means to remove the compacted
    material from the surface which supported it during compacting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 260+, for mop
    wringers.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 19+, for machines
    combined with means for removing liquid from the textile.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 375, for cooking devices
    of the opposed heated mold or surface type, such as a waffle iron or
    sandwich-grill, having a drip or waste receptor or director; subclasses
    501+ and 506+, for liquid recovery means combined with pressing means.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, appropriate subclasses for
    processes and apparatus for making fibrous articles by depositing a fiber
    slurry on a foraminous surface and draining the suspending medium through
    the surface and especially subclasses 396+, for devices in which pressure
    is applied to express the suspending medium through the foraminous surface.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses, for
    devices for separating liquids from solids, and see the statement of the
    class lines in the class definition of the (100) class.


CLS 100/105
TXT Apparatus under subclass 104 in which there are ducts or collecting means
    in which different liquids are conducted or gathered.

    (1)     Note.  The liquids may differ in kind or in grade of the same kind.


CLS 100/106
TXT Apparatus under subclass 104 in which there are means other than the
    pressing surfaces of a press for causing forced flow of the liquid from the
    press.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218,    for reciprocating platen presses having means to remove the
    material from the support on which it was compacted and see the notes
    thereto for other ejecting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 335, 351+ and 363+
    for devices placed below a foraminous forming surface wherein a partial
    vacuum may be produced to assist in drawing the water out of the pulp web.


CLS 100/107
TXT Apparatus under subclass 104 in which the collecting means or duct for
    transferring the expressed liquid is surrounded by the compacted material.


CLS 100/108
TXT Apparatus under subclass 107 in which the collecting means or duct has a
    tapered or sharpened end so that it may be pushed into the material so as
    to be surrounded thereby.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 501+ and 506+, for a
    comminutor especially adapted to enter a food for the purpose of liberating
    liquid.


CLS 100/109
TXT Apparatus under subclass 107 in which the collecting means or duct which is
    surrounded by the material extends through a plurality of pairs of
    superposed pressing surfaces which support or contain the material
    compacted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113+,   for presses having drain means for the expressed liquid in which
    the drainage is through or along a pressure surface and the pressure
    surfaces are in stacked boxes or plates.

    194+,   for plural presses of the stacked box or plate type.


CLS 100/110
TXT Apparatus under subclass 104 in which a collecting means or duct for
    transferring the expressed liquid extends through or along one of the
    opposing surfaces which contact the material during the pressing operation
    to exert pressure on the material by movement relative to one another.


CLS 100/111
TXT Apparatus under subclass 110 in which the collecting means or duct is
    equipped with a means having a variable opening so that the flow of liquid
    therethrough may be altered or stopped.


CLS 100/112
TXT Apparatus under subclass 110 in which means is provided for removing from
    the collecting means or duct solid material which would impede the progress
    of the expressed liquid therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    for means for removing material from the belt conveyor element of a
    concurrent press and conveyor.

    174,    for roll type concurrent pressing and conveying presses having
    means to strip the material from the roll.

    205,    for plural presses of the stacked box or plate type which have
    openings through the side walls of the chamber for loosening or removing
    the compacted material cake from within the chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 256.5, for
    scrapers, wipers or brushes attached to a device having a moving surface as
    a part thereof and are so mounted as to act upon the surface to remove
    material therefrom during the normal operation of the device.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 274+, for attachments
    for cleaning press felt or forming wires of web forming devices for paper
    making machines.


CLS 100/113
TXT Apparatus under subclass 110 in which there are a plurality of pairs of
    approaching surfaces, all parallel to one another and either superposed one
    on the other or side by side in a row, and the collecting means or duct is
    through or along at least one of the surfaces of each pair.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109,    for stacked box or plate presses having drain means for the
    expressed liquid in the form of a drain tube embedded in the material
    compacted.

    194+,   for plural presses of the stacked box or plate type.


CLS 100/114
TXT Apparatus under subclass 113 in which the pressure surfaces or plates
    comprising each pair are joined together by flexible means connected to
    both of them.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200,    for plural presses of the stacked box or plate type in which there
    are positioning or supporting means in the form of links, for maintaining
    the several boxes and plates in position relative to each other.


CLS 100/115
TXT Apparatus under subclass 113 directed solely to the specific structure of
    the pairs of approaching surfaces, per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    for presses including box or plate structures in which there is
    drainage along a fixed abutment or end wall surface.

    194+,   for plural presses of the stacked plate type.


CLS 100/116
TXT Apparatus under subclass 110 in which the surface through or along which
    the collecting means or duct extends is one which has motion relative to
    the stationary parts or frame of the apparatus during the pressing
    operation.


CLS 100/117
TXT Apparatus under subclass 116 in which the surface through or along which
    the collecting means or duct extends is a helical member which is rotated
    to exert the pressing force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145+,   for concurrent pressing and conveying presses of the helical
    compressor type.


CLS 100/118
TXT Apparatus under subclass 116 in which the surface through or along which
    the collecting means or duct extends is an endless conveyor or a web or
    belt against which the material is pressed during the movement of the
    material by the belt from one position to another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151+,   for concurrent pressing and conveying presses of the endless
    conveyor type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclass 314, for web forming
    apparatus comprising rolls which bear upon a pulp web on a forming screen
    to assist in the expressing of liquids therefrom and, subclasses 358.1+,
    for inventions relating to rolls and felts employed in pressing moisture
    out of the web after it has left the forming surface.


CLS 100/119
TXT Apparatus under subclass 118 in which the traveling endless conveyor, web
    or belt is concave transversely to form a channel holding the material.


CLS 100/120
TXT Apparatus under subclass 119 having means extending across the mouth or
    opening of the concavity so that the material is surrounded.


CLS 100/121
TXT Apparatus under subclass 116 in which the surface through or along which
    the collecting means or duct extends is one which has a continuous pressure
    surface which rotates circularly about an axis and has rolling contact with
    the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155+,   for roll type concurrent conveying and compressing presses.

    210,    for presses of the type in which the compression is between the
    surfaces of a roll and a platen.


CLS 100/122
TXT Apparatus under subclass 110 in which the surface contacting the material
    during the pressing operation includes a woven or knitted member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211+,   for presses with a flexible sheet pressure surface.


CLS 100/123
TXT Apparatus under subclass 122 in which the woven or knitted member is in the
    form of a receptacle having sidewalls and a closed bottom and such
    receptacle is suspended by its mouth.


CLS 100/124
TXT Apparatus under subclass 122 in which a hoop or ring has means for clamping
    the edge of the woven or knitted member to sustain the material within it,
    or to support the woven or knitted member in assembled position in a press.


CLS 100/125
TXT Apparatus under subclass 110 in which the surface through or along which
    the collecting means or duct extends is an abutment which is fixed or
    stationary relative to the stationary parts or frame of the apparatus
    during the pressing operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    for boxes or plates structure, per se, having drainage through the
    bottom of the box or across the plate and usable in presses employing
    stacked boxes or plates.


CLS 100/126
TXT Apparatus under subclass 104 in which the collecting means or duct for
    transferring the expressed liquid is through or along a material retaining
    surface which extends along the direction of motion of relatively
    approaching pressing surfaces and is of a length such as to extend at least
    from one of the pressing surfaces to the other.


CLS 100/127
TXT Apparatus under subclass 126 in which the material retaining surface is in
    the form of a box, frame, cage or annular wall.

    (1)     Note.  In the devices classified in this subclass the box, frame,
    cage, or annular wall is substantially continuous around the plunger or
    piston.


CLS 100/128
TXT Apparatus under subclass 127 in which the wall is made up of stacked rings,
    annuli, or hoops.


CLS 100/129
TXT Apparatus under subclass 127 in which the wall is made up of longitudinally
    extending slats or staves, extending into the direction of the motion of
    the relatively approaching pressing surfaces.


CLS 100/130
TXT Apparatus under subclass 104 having means associated with the collecting
    means or duct and outside of the pressing zone for separating retained
    solids from the expressed material by allowing liquid to pass and retaining
    such solids.


CLS 100/131
TXT Apparatus under subclass 104 in which the collecting means for the
    expressed liquid is a trough or receptacle.


CLS 100/132
TXT Apparatus under subclass 131 in which the trough or receptacle carries the
    weight of the means for applying compressive force and causing expressing
    and said means is secured demountably or releasably to the trough or
    receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227,    for reciprocating platen presses in which there is a movable piston
    or platen which may be displaced to a nonuse position from a portable
    receptacle on which it is mountable.


CLS 100/133
TXT Apparatus under subclass 132 in which the receptacle is one from which the
    expressed liquid may be imbibed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229,    for reciprocating platen presses in which a receptacle or box is
    displaceable transversely of the direction of compression force to a nonuse
    position.


CLS 100/134
TXT Apparatus under subclass 131 in which the trough or receptacle is a
    reservoir for the expressed liquid and includes means to separate a portion
    of the liquid collected therein from the balance of said liquid.


CLS 100/135
TXT Apparatus under subclass 134 in which the separating means includes a
    channel along which the expressed liquid may flow as the receptacle or
    trough is tilted or overflows.


CLS 100/136
TXT Apparatus under subclass 104 having a surface against which the expressed
    material may impinge for the purpose of reducing the area of spread of the
    expressed liquid and deflecting or guiding it.


CLS 100/137
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having several means for subjecting
    material to compressive force, in at least one of which the pressing
    surfaces differ in kind from those of at least one other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215+,   for reciprocating platen presses with means to deposit the material
    on the means which supports the material during the pressing operation.


CLS 100/138
TXT Apparatus under subclass 137 in which at least one of the means for
    subjecting the material to compressive force is of the kind that carries
    the material bodily from a loading or inlet location to an unloading or
    outlet location while the compressive force upon the material is increasing
    and such means follows another means for subjecting the same material to
    compressive force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144+,   for single concurrent pressing and conveying presses and for plural
    concurrent pressing and conveying presses of the same type.

    188+,   for concurrent pressing and conveying presses of the plunger type
    having feeding or discharge handling means.

    207,    for plural presses of the same type with material transfer from
    press to press.

    215+,   for reciprocating platen presses having means to deposit the
    material on the means which supports the material during the compacting
    operation and see the notes thereto for other presses having means to
    deposit material in the press.

    218,    for reciprocating platen presses in which there is means to remove
    the material from the surface which supported it during the compressing
    operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses for a combined machine
    which performs a plurality of forming operations on a metal workpiece,
    e.g., rolling and drawing it, subclass 206.

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 45 for cigar and cigarette making machines in
    which there are cooperating rolling surfaces combined with means for
    subjecting the tobacco bunch to compression prior to the rolling operation
    usually for the purpose of preshaping the tobacco.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 252+ for dispensing devices comprising
    containers having plural discharge assistants.


CLS 100/139
TXT Apparatus under subclass 138 in which there are two means for subjecting
    material to compressive force, each of which carries the material bodily
    from one location to another and the pressing surfaces of one of these
    means differ in kind from those of the other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 328, for apparatus for shaping nonmetals comprising roll means and
    diverse press means.


CLS 100/140
TXT Apparatus under subclass 138 in which the material is bodily removed from
    between the pressing surfaces of one means for subjecting the material to
    compressive force and placed into the means for subjecting the material to
    compressive force which is of the kind that carries the material bodily
    from one location to another while the compressive force upon the material
    is increasing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207,    for presses with material transfer from press to press where the
    presses are of the same type.


CLS 100/141
TXT Apparatus under subclass 138 in which the material to be compressed by the
    means which carries the material from one location to another while the
    compressive force is increasing is first compacted within such means by a
    pressure surface moving in some direction other than that in which the
    material is to be carried by said means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188+,   for concurrent conveying and pressing presses of the plunger type
    having means to feed material thereto.


CLS 100/142
TXT Apparatus under subclass 141 in which the pressure surface moves through an
    inlet of the means which carries the material from one location to another
    while the compressing force is increasing to compress the material against
    a side wall of said means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76+,    for presses in which there are means to wind or fold the sheet
    material as it is placed in the press.


CLS 100/143
TXT Apparatus under subclass 141 in which the material is loaded into the means
    which carries the material from one location to another while the
    compressive force is increasing by several pressure surfaces which move in
    a direction across the compacting and conveying direction of said means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264,    for reciprocating platen presses in which there are opposed platens
    both of which are actuated.


CLS 100/144
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the material while the
    compressive force upon it is increasing is carried bodily from an inlet or
    loading zone to an outlet or discharge zone.

    (1)     Note.  In the devices here classified the material is moved from
    one position to another to transport it between openings generally by the
    platen causing compression or the pressure surface.  For devices in which
    there is movement of the material from one place to another where the
    movement is incidental to the compressing operation search this class,
    subclasses 214+, particularly subclass 239, where as the piston advances
    the box and piston and material all rotate, and subclasses 265+, in which a
    press is acutated by the weight of the material between the platens, that
    is, the material resting on a platen and falling from one location to
    another causes the movable platen to exert the compressive force.
    Additionally a movable platen may transport the material into contact with
    the stationary platen.

    (2)     Note.  The material may be pressed progressively in these presses.
    That is, successive increments are compressed which may be forced together
    into one mass or may have a distinct line of demarcation maintained between
    them.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for methods involving the forcing of material through a constricted
    passage.

    137+,   for plural diverse presses one of which presses while conveying the
    material.

    218,    for reciprocating platen press construction having means for
    displacing the material from the means which supported the material during
    the compression operation.

    239,    and see (1) Note above 265, and see (1) Note above

    SEARCH CLASS:

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclasses 7+, for machines with a
    movable device for transferring the articles smoothed to, through, from, or
    back to the front of the machines.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclass 47, for apparatus for the treatment
    of leather in which the leather is placed on a support which is in motion
    during the treatment of the hide, skin or leather.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 253.1+, for extruding, metal through a
    bottomless closed shaping die, subclasses 343+, for push-drawing or deep
    drawing metal through such a die, and, subclasses 380+, for a bending press
    which may carry the work with the tool.

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 84.1 for cigar and cigarette making machines
    which mold tobacco into a continuous rod or  ribbon.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 174 for die expressing sand mold or core
    forming apparatus and, subclasses 418+, for continuous metal casting
    apparatus.

    184,    Lubrication, appropriate subclasses for forced feed lubricators.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 251+ for dispensers with a discharge
    assistant for a container, note particularly subclasses 386+, for container
    with follower.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 84+ for a
    comminutor surface having openings and a cooperating surface whereby the
    material being comminuted is forced through the openings, and subclasses
    82.1+, wherein a helical pusher moves the material being comminuted through
    a perforated member.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 335+, for sets of shaping couples comprising an endless surface
    (e.g., roll, belt, etc.) for press forming reshaping or vulcanizing.

    452,    Butchering, subclasses 35+ for apparatus for filling sausage
    casings.


CLS 100/145
TXT Apparatus under subclass 144 in which the material is forwarded by a
    rotating member having a fin or fins extending spirally about and along the
    axis of rotation and the material is compressed by being forced by the
    forwarding movement through a constricted passage of cross section smaller
    than that of the uncompressed material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for presses in which there is drainage through or along a pressure
    surface in which the pressure surface is a movable surface helix.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 256+ and 259, for helix type compressors utilized as rotary
    packing augers.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 412+, for containers with a rotary discharge
    assistant which has helically arranged projections, e.g., screws.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 82.1+, for
    a comminutor wherein a helical pusher moves material through a perforated
    member.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 69, for similar structure into means to
    enhance kneading or mixing of heavy plastics (e.g., gums, dough, etc.).

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 208, for shaping apparatus for nonmetals with an upstream
    agitating or kneading means comprising a modified screw helix in a
    pressurizing chamber.

    452,    Butchering, subclass 44 for sausage stuffing machines in which a
    screw conveyor forces the material into a sausage case.


CLS 100/146
TXT Apparatus under subclass 145 in which the material is forwarded by plural
    parallel rotating finned members turning oppositely.


CLS 100/147
TXT Apparatus under subclass 145 in which the walls of the constricted passage
    are held in place by a limited but continuing force so that the size of the
    constriction may vary with the amount of material forced therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169,    for roller type concurrent pressing and conveying presses in which
    the rolls are yieldable so as to separate.

    192,    for plunger type concurrent pressing and conveying presses having
    an adjustable choke with features to permit overload relieving.


CLS 100/148
TXT Apparatus under subclass 145 in which there are means by which the size of
    the constricted passage may be changed by changing the position of the
    walls of the constriction relative to one another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191+,   for plunger and casing type conveying presses having an adjustable
    choke.


CLS 100/149
TXT Apparatus under subclass 145 in which at least a portion of the wall of the
    constricted passage is removable.


CLS 100/150
TXT Apparatus under subclass 145 in which the material as it is carried forward
    by the rotating finned member comes against an abutment blocking the space
    between successive turns of the spiral.


CLS 100/151
TXT Apparatus under subclass 144 in which the material during pressing is
    carried forward

    by continuous traveling web like member which is a pressure surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87,     for presses having means for additionally treating the material in
    which such further treatment comprises winding or folding a sheet web or
    strand within an embracing belt loop.

    88,     for presses which wind sheet material between opposed belts.

    118,    for presses having drain means for an expressed liquid in which the
    drainage is through or along a pressure surface, and the pressure surface
    is on an endless conveyor.

    222,    for reciprocating presses with an indexing belt material support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 44+, for machines
    provided with means to squeeze a textile, combined with means to effect
    relative motion between the textile and the liquid in which the squeezing
    of the textile is effected by the cooperation of a plurality of endless
    belts carrying the textile in or beneath a liquid and a squeezer.

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 55 for cigar and cigarette making machines having
    cooperating rolling surfaces in which one of the cooperating rolling
    surfaces is an endless belt.

    164,    Metal Funding, subclasses 427+, for continuously advancing metal
    casting means.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 415, for containers which have a discharge
    assistant in the form of an endless belt.


CLS 100/152
TXT Apparatus under subclass 151 having means to place solid material on or
    remove it from the endless belt type pressing member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    for devices for cleaning drain holes in a belt.

    215,    for reciprocating platen presses having means to deposit the
    material on the means which supports the material during the compressing
    operation.

    218,    for reciprocating platen presses having material displacing or
    ejecting means and see the notes thereto for other presses with similar
    structure.


CLS 100/153
TXT Apparatus under subclass 151 in which the material is pressed between the
    traveling web and a coacting body which rotates about an axis while rolling
    upon the material during pressing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155+,   for presses in which the opposed pressing elements are both rolls.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclass 9, for pressing machines
    with a movable device for transferring the articles smoothed to, through or
    from the back or front of the machine wherein the movable device is a
    conveyor belt which passes between opposing press elements.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 45 for machines
    provided with means to squeeze a textile, combined with means to effect a
    relative motion between the textile and the liquid in which the squeezing
    of the textile is effected between an endless belt carrying the textile in
    or beneath a liquid and a squeezer and subclass 267 for wringers for
    pressing liquid from treated material in which the textile is carried
    through the wringer by means of an apron or belt passing through the bite
    of the rolls.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclass 41 for apparatus for the treatment
    of leather by the use of the tool which is positively rotated upon its own
    axis during contact with the leather worked upon and the leather during
    treatment with the rotating tool, is supported by a cylindrical roll.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 557+ for a roller or
    belt contacting another member to press seeds from food, subclass 575, for
    adjacent surfaces that separate the shell from food, one surface of which
    rotates, and, subclass 625, for relative moving means that cooperate to
    remove the skin of food.

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 255 for a wood bending device which has a
    rotating roller which forces the wood against the yielding or unyielding
    roller, a belt, or shoe to crimp the wood without securing it to a former.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclass 314 for web forming
    apparatus comprising rolls which bear upon a pulp web on a forming screen
    to assist in the expressing of liquids therefrom.


CLS 100/154
TXT Apparatus under subclass 151 in which the portion of the endless belt
    against which the material is being pressed is supported on the side
    opposite from that receiving the pressure by a means separate from the belt
    located between loops or bends in the belt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160,    for roll type pressing apparatus having a backup roll supporting a
    working roll.


CLS 100/155
TXT Apparatus under subclass 144 in which the material is compressed between
    bodies having pressure surfaces and at least one of bodies has a continuous
    pressure surface which rotates circularly about an axis with respect to the
    material and successive portions of the surface engage the material in
    rolling contact therewith.

    (1)     Note.  Rolling mills for plastically shaping or bending metal are
    generally classified in Class 72, Metal Deforming.  A number of the
    classified characteristics are similar to or parallel those set forth in
    subclasses indented hereunder.  Class 72 should be investigated in any case
    involving roll type press, especially in metal shaping.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86,     for presses which have additional treatment of the material in
    which such additional treatment involves winding a sheet, web, or strand
    upon a mandrel with pressure exerted by an opposed roll.

    89,     for presses which additionally treat the material to change their
    physical characteristic in which the additional treating involves winding a
    web, sheet or strand within a cage of pressure rolls.

    121,    for presses having drain means for expressing liquid through a
    pressure surface in which the pressure surface is on a roll.

    153,    for presses in which a roll and an endless belt are the opposing
    pressing members.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclass 65 for toe and heel stiffener
    forming machines which mold the material between rolls or between a roll
    and a fixed form, the roll being rotated to feed the blank through.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 262, for mop
    wringers employing one or more pressure rollers for squeezing moisture from
    the mop.

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclasses 44+, for smoothing
    machines of the roller pressure type, and, subclasses 100+, for smoothing
    instruments consisting of rolls or rollers.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 253, for a glass sheet or strip
    rolling means; see the "Search Notes" thereunder.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 22, for textile
    treating machines combined with squeezing means of the roller type to
    extract liquid from the textile subsequent to the liquid treatment,
    subclasses 97+, for machines in which a textile is squeezed while subjected
    to a liquid and which embody a roll which rolls over a textile, or
    squeezing machines wherein the textiles are carried by said roll into and
    between the roll and a cooperating squeezing element and, subclasses 244+,
    for wringers for removing liquid from textile material where the wringer is
    of the roller type.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclasses 42+ for apparatus for the
    treatment of leather by the use of a tool which is positively rotated upon
    its axis during contact with the leather and the leather during treatment
    with the rotating tool is supported by a cylindrical roll.

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses.  See (1) Note above.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 284+, for a flying cutter, and, subclasses
    509+, for a cutting tool pair comprising a rotatable anvil.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 457, 462+, and 464, for
    revolving surfaces that treat dairy food; subclasses 557+, for a roller or
    belt contacting another member to press seeds from food, subclass 575, for
    adjacent surfaces that separate the shell from food, one surface of which
    rotates, and, subclass 625, for relative moving means that cooperate to
    remove the skin of food.

    101,    Printing, subclasses 3.1+ appropriate subclasses entitled "rolling
    contact" for embossing or penetrating printing machines, subclasses 22+,
    for rolling contact embossing machines and subclasses 216+, for machines
    for printing by exerting a rolling contact upon the printing surface and
    the surface to be printed upon in which the work is engaged in rolling
    contact between the peripheries of rotating members.

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 27.1+, for cigar and cigarette making machines
    having cooperating surfaces which rotate about the tobacco to form a cigar
    or cigarette, place a wrapper thereon, or perform analogous operations,
    subclass 56, for cigar and cigarette making machines having cooperating
    rolling surfaces in which the cooperating rolling surfaces comprise a
    plurality of rollers, subclasses 84.1+ for cigar and cigarette making
    machines which mold or form the tobacco and shape it into a continuous rod
    of tobacco of indefinite length, and subclasses 116+, for plug or
    compressed tobacco shape making machines wherein the tobacco is molded into
    a sheet of indefinite length from which the plugs may be separated.

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 255, for a woodbending machine wherein a
    rotating roller forces the wood against a yielding or an unyielding roller,
    a belt, or a shoe to crimp the wood without securing it to a former.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 428 for roll couple, metal casting means.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 281, for containers with a discharge assistant
    such containers having a single outlet formed by plural discharge
    assistants where the discharge assistants are parallel rolls.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses,
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.

    399,    Electrophotography,  subclasses 222+ for development, particularly
    subclasses 279+ for a roller-type application member; subclass 318 for
    transfer by pressure; subclasses 320+ for fixing, particularly subclass 331
    for pressure roller; subclass 357 for cleaning roller; and subclasses 361+
    for document handling.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 362, for shaping apparatus for nonmetals comprising a roll press
    member coacting with an endless surface having shape imparting cavities
    therein; and subclasses 363+, for a press forming, reshaping or vulcanizing
    means comprising a roll or endless belt; see the search notes thereunder.

    452,    Butchering, subclass 142 for meat tenderers in which the meat is
    passed between a plurality of rolls.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roller, per se, not elsewhere provided for,
    and see the notes thereunder.


CLS 100/156
TXT Apparatus under subclass 155 in which the material is pressed between the
    rotating pressure surface and another surface which does not rotate with
    respect to the work but across or on which the work is transported during
    the pressing operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210,    for roll and platen presses in which there is no conveying of the
    material during the pressing operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclass 34, for machines for laying and
    leveling shoe soles in which the shoe is supported on a jack and subjected
    to pressure by a rotating roll with the roll moving along the length of the
    sole and, subclass 65, for machines for molding toe and heel stiffeners by
    rolls or between a roll and a fixed form with the roll being rotated to
    feed a blank through.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 105, for squeezing
    machines in which a textile is squeezed while subjected to a liquid and the
    squeezing machine is of the roll type wherein the roll rotates on a fixed
    axis and the bed is translated rectilinearly or oscillatably about an axis.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclass 44, for apparatus for the treatment
    of leather by the use of a tool which is positively rotated upon its own
    axis during contact with the leather and the leather is placed upon a work
    support which is in motion during treatment of the hide.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 220, for devices in which the metal is
    shaped between a roll and a moving platen.

    101,    Printing, subclass 250, for rolling contact printing machines
    comprising a flat printing member and a cylinder between which the work is
    engaged by rolling contact.

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 255, for a wood bending machine which
    includes a rotating roller which forces the wood against a yielding or an
    unyielding roller, a belt, or a shoe to crimp the wood without securing it
    to a former.

    452,    Butchering, subclass 143 for meat tenderers in which a roll coacts
    with a plate.


CLS 100/157
TXT Apparatus under, subclass 155, in which the material is compressed between
    at least two rotating bodies having continuous pressure surfaces and in
    which one of the rotating bodies is annular and the working surface is on
    the inner surface of the annulus and the opposing working surface is on the
    exterior of a rotating body within the annulus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 98, for machine in
    which a textile is squeezed while subjecting it to a liquid and a roll or
    drum has a planetary motion by reason of which a textile is squeezed
    between the roll or drum and a cooperating surface.

    72,     Metal Deforming, for a means to shape a tube-like metal workpiece
    between internal and external rollers.


CLS 100/158
TXT Apparatus under subclass 155 in which the material is compressed between at
    least two continuous rotating bodies having pressure surfaces and in which
    the axis about which one of the bodies rotates is at an angle to the axis
    about which another of the bodies rotates.

    (1)     Note.  The subclass includes a rotary table or disc and a roll as
    opposing pressure surfaces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 108, for machines for
    squeezing a textile while subjected to a liquid in which the squeezing is
    provided with a roll or wheel and a bed mounted to rotate on a vertical
    axis in which the roll or wheel axis is radial to a vertical axis with the
    roll or wheel located wholly to one side of the vertical axis.

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses under 67+, 127+ and 199+,
    for a metal deforming apparatus which utilizes skewed or inclined rollers.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 461, for plural
    relatively movable surfaces that may have nonparallel axes.


CLS 100/159
TXT Apparatus under subclass 155 in which the axis of the rotating pressure
    surface is upright.


CLS 100/160
TXT Apparatus under subclass 155 in which at least one of the bodies the rotary
    surface of which acts to press upon the material is supported on the side
    of the body opposite that on which such pressing surface contacts the work
    by an auxiliary rotary body located at a place where the support is in
    opposition to the material passing the pressing body.

    (1)     Note.  This apparatus includes presses in which the pressing rolls
    are in the form of an annulus and the backup roll is within the opening of
    the annulus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154,    for endless belt type concurrent conveying and compressing
    apparatus having an auxiliary support for the belt opposite the area of
    pressing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 163 and 241+.


CLS 100/161
TXT Apparatus under subclass 155 in which material is compressed between more
    than one pair of bodies with surfaces having rolling contact with the
    material.

    (1)     Note.  The plural presses here classified usually act successively
    upon the same material with the material going through one press and then
    through a succeeding press.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193+,   for plural presses not otherwise provided for.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 221+, and 226+.


CLS 100/162
TXT Apparatus under subclass 161 in which the same rotating surface of a single
    body opposes at least two other rotary surfaced bodies to form with them
    pairs of rolling surfaces of plural passes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 223 and 232+.

    399,    Electrophotography,  subclasses 222+ for development, particularly
    subclasses 279+ for a roller-type application member; subclass 318 for
    transfer by pressure; subclasses 320+ for fixing, particularly subclass 331
    for pressure roller; subclass 357 for cleaning roller; and subclasses 361+
    for document handling.


CLS 100/163
TXT Apparatus under subclass 162 in which the rotary body common to the two
    passes is urged under a limited but continuing force toward at least one of
    rotary surfaced bodies with which it forms a rolling pass so that the
    surfaces of the bodies may spread apart or approach one another as the
    amount of material passing between them changes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169,    for concurrent pressing and conveying presses of the single roll
    pass type with a yieldable roll.


CLS 100/164
TXT Apparatus under subclass 163 in which the direction of application the
    force which urges the rotary bodies together may be shifted.


CLS 100/165
TXT Apparatus under subclass 163 in which the path of movement of the common
    rotary body is such that as the common roll moves the spacing of one pass
    may vary in size differentially from the other roll pass.


CLS 100/166
TXT Apparatus under subclass 162 having a guide surface which directs the
    material coming from one roll pass into the bight of another roll pass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174,    for concurrent conveying and pressing apparatus of the roll type
    having means to deflect the material coming from a roll press away from at
    least one of the rolls.


CLS 100/167
TXT Apparatus under subclass 161 in which the plural pairs of bodies have
    between them a means to conduct the material coming from one pair of rotary
    bodies to another pair of rotary bodies.

    (1)     Note.  The conducting means of the apparatus here classified may
    be, for example, a power operated conveyor or a chute down which the
    material slides.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173,    for single pass roll type concurrent pressing and conveying presses
    with material handling or guiding means.

    174,    for single pass roll type concurrent pressing and conveying presses
    having means to strip the material from a roll.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 227+.


CLS 100/168
TXT Apparatus under subclass 155 having means such that the distance between
    the axis of

    the rotary body and the opposed pressing body may be altered.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for presses having automatic or material triggered control of the
    separation of rolls or of roll speed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 256, for means to
    apply or release pressure between wringer rolls.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 237+, for metal rolling mills having
    means to adjust the rolls to vary the size or shape of the roll pass.
    Where the adjustment is made automatically in response to a predetermined
    condition, search the appropriate subclasses under 6+.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses,
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.


CLS 100/169
TXT Apparatus under subclass 168 in which the rotary bodies are urged toward
    one another under limited but continuing force so that the axes of the
    rolls may spread apart or approach one another as the amount of material
    between them changes.

    (1)     Note.  Means may be included in the apparatus so that the force
    urging the rolls together may be adjusted so as to change in amount.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147,    for concurrent pressing and conveying presses of the helix type
    compressor which have an overload release.

    163,    for roll type concurrent conveying and compressing presses having
    plural stages or passes with a common roll which is yieldable.

    192,    for plunger type concurrent pressing and conveying presses having
    an adjustable choke which is overload relieving.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 101 for squeezing
    machines for squeezing a textile while it is subjected to liquid wherein
    the squeezing action is effected between a roll and a bed made up of
    rollers and the bed is resiliently mounted, subclass 257, for wringers for
    removing liquid from textiles having means to release the pressure of one
    roll on another by bodily shifting one roll away from the other against the
    action of means constantly tending to press the rolls together and,
    subclass 259, for wringers for removing the liquid from textiles having
    means to release the pressure between the rolls effected through abnormal
    separation of the rolls.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 240 for means to vary the bite of a
    roller couple in a rolling mill during operation.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution and Disintegration, subclass 32 for
    comminuting apparatus provided with means which rigidly connects two
    comminutor parts under normal working conditions but which on imposition of
    an overload, will disconnect the parts to prevent damage to the comminutor.


CLS 100/170
TXT Apparatus under subclass 169 in which the urging force is transmitted
    through a liquid or a gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    269.01+,for reciprocating platen presses in which the actuation is by fluid
    pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, subclass 99, for a hydraulic, or pneumatic bearing
    support and subclass 100 for a fluid bearing.


CLS 100/171
TXT Apparatus under subclass 169 in which a solid resilient member exerts the
    force urging the rotary bodies together.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 202+, for a resilient bearing support.


CLS 100/172
TXT Apparatus under subclass 155 including means to cause the rotary bodies to
    rotate relative to one another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 269, for wringers
    with special gearing to drive the same or wringers with special bearing
    structure.


CLS 100/173
TXT Apparatus under subclass 155 which include, in addition to the pressing
    structure, means for manipulating or directing the movement of the material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, conveyors, feeders or
    chutes for presenting the material to be pressed to the bight of the
    pressing rolls.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86,     for presses which wind a bat on a mandrel and have an opposed
    pressure roll.

    89,     for presses which wind a bat of the material, the winding being
    within a cage of rolls.

    167,    for roll type concurrent pressing and conveying presses with plural
    stages or passes and a chute or conveyor between stages.

    215,    for reciprocating platen presses having means to deposit the
    material on a support which supports the material during the compacting
    operation and see the Notes thereto for other presses having material
    depositing means.

    218,    for reciprocating platen presses having means to eject the material
    and see the Notes thereto for other presses having ejecting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 264+, for wringers
    provided with guard means between a roller and a bearing, or with guard
    means either in advance of the roll bight or about the rolls to hinder
    access of the hands of an operator to the bight of the rolls, or wringers
    provided with means to direct or carry fabric to or from the bight of the
    rolls.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 227+, and 250+.

    101,    Printing, subclasses 232+, for machines having rotary printing
    elements and means to move the sheets to be printed to or from printing
    position.

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 38+, for cigar and cigarette making machines
    employing cooperating rolling surfaces and having means for feeding the
    tobacco or tobacco bunch to the rolling apparatus.


CLS 100/174
TXT Devices under subclass 173 including a deflector adjacent the outgoing side
    of the rotary body which deflector is so mounted as to direct the pressed
    material away from the surface of the rotary body.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes scrapers bearing on the roll to
    remove material therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    for presses with drain means extending through or along the
    pressure surface and having a clearer or cleaner for the pressing surface
    or drain means.

    166,    for plural stage roll arrangements having a common roll and a guide
    surface directing the material coming from one pass into another roll pass.

    167,    for plural stage or pass roll arrangements having means to conduct
    the material coming from one roll pass into a succeeding roll pass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 256.5, for
    doctors or scrapers for keeping rolls free and clean wherein only the
    scraper, per se, is claimed or the roll is recited in the combination only
    nominally.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 128, for means for
    stripping textiles from squeeze rolls employed to squeeze the material
    while subjected to liquid to prevent the winding of the textile thereabout,
    and subclass 270, for wringers for effecting the removal of liquid from
    textiles in which there are devices for stripping textiles from the wringer
    rolls to prevent their winding about the rolls.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 245, for rotary applicators having
    means to strip coated material from the applicator.


CLS 100/175
TXT Devices under subclass 173 in which the guide is so mounted as to protect a
    bearing on which the rotary body turns by bending material away from it.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, subclass 130, for a rotary bearing with a specified seal
    i.e., for preventing matter from entering into, passing through, or
    escaping from a bearing.


CLS 100/176
TXT Apparatus under subclass 155 comprising at least two coacting rotary bodies
    between which material is compacted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses,
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.

    399,    Electrophotography,  subclasses 222+ for development, particularly
    subclasses 279+ for a roller-type application member; subclass 318 for
    transfer by pressure; subclasses 320+ for fixing, particularly subclass 331
    for pressure roller; subclass 357 for cleaning roller; and subclasses 361+
    for document handling.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roller, per se, not elsewhere provided for,
    and see the notes thereunder.


CLS 100/177
TXT Apparatus under subclass 144 having a cavity in which the material is
    compacted and means to change the position of the cavity from one location
    to another during the compacting operation.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes presses in which a paddle wheel with
    radially sliding paddles is mounted to rotate within and in eccentric
    relation to a surrounding wall so that on a rotation of the wheel the
    paddles forward the material and the chamber defined by the wheel, paddles
    and surrounding wall diminishes in volume as the paddles are forced
    inwardly by the eccentric relation of wheel to wall.


CLS 100/178
TXT Apparatus under subclass 177 in which the press has pressure surface which
    reciprocates within the compression chamber to compact the material in the
    chamber.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes presses in which a series of separate
    cavities are filled successively at one location and then moved to another
    location and during such movement a platen or piston moves within each
    cavity to reduce the volume occupied by the filling material.

    (2)     Note.  The devices here are usually plural.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    for piston and platen type presses in which there is drainage of
    expressed liquid through or along the pressure surface.

    193+,   for plural presses not otherwise provided for.

    214+,   for reciprocating platen presses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 373 for cooking apparatus
    including two movably connected heated plates adapted to be positioned so
    as to confine and contact food material therebetween and having means for
    bodily transporting both cooking surfaces from a feeding station to a
    discharging station.

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 87, for devices for making cigars and cigarettes
    in which the tobacco is molded and there being a plurality of molds carried
    upon a rotary or endless carrier.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 71+, for devices for filling receivers and having means for
    compacting the contents material.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 345, for a transversely traveling mold in a combination of plural
    sets each set comprising a female mold and opposed coaxial dynamic male
    press members, subclasses 347+, for sets of male-female press molds having
    traveling female molds, subclasses 352+, for a female mold and opposed
    coaxial dynamic press members, subclass 356, for plural shaping plungers or
    rolls coacting with a single female mold, and, subclass 357, for plural
    female mold cavities which coact with a single press member.


CLS 100/179
TXT Apparatus under subclass 144 in which a reciprocatory pressure surface
    forwards the material through a tubular casing while compressing the
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    for presses in which there is drainage of expressed liquid along a
    piston or platen surface.

    214+,   for reciprocating platen presses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 386+, for dispensing containers having a
    discharge assistant of the follower type.

    452,    Butchering, subclass 40 for sausage stuffing apparatus in which a
    plunger forcing material into a casing, oscillates back and forth, and
    subclasses 42+ for sausage stuffers in which a piston reciprocates back and
    forth in a straight line.


CLS 100/180
TXT Apparatus under subclass 179 having divider members interposed between
    material placed in successive amounts intermittently into the tubular
    casing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for presses with automatic or material triggered control of
    separator insertion between material portions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    subclasses 376.1+, for extrusion shaping apparatus having an intermittent
    feed and stock pressurizing means whereby detached blocks are formed.


CLS 100/181
TXT Apparatus under subclass 180 in which the reciprocating pressure platen
    carries more than one divider for separating the intermittently placed
    quantities of material.


CLS 100/182
TXT Apparatus under subclass 180 in which a plurality of dividers is connected
    to an endless belt which carries them as they travel through the casing and
    returns them to charging position.


CLS 100/183
TXT Apparatus under subclass 180 in which the casing carries a means for
    transversely propelling the divider block into the casing.


CLS 100/184
TXT Apparatus under subclass 180 in which divider or separator blocks, per se,
    are claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    295+,   for platen structure, per se.


CLS 100/185
TXT Apparatus under subclass 179 in which there is more than one tubular casing
    through which the material is forwarded while being compressed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193+,   for plural presses which do not forward the material while under
    compression.


CLS 100/186
TXT Apparatus under subclass 185 in which there are either (1) plural casings
    having a common axis but extending in opposite directions, or (2) a single
    straight casing open at both ends through which ends the material is
    conveyed in opposite directions.


CLS 100/187
TXT Apparatus under subclass 179 in which the casing supports (1) means which
    prevents the compacted material from expanding in the direction toward the
    pressing platen after the material has been compressed, or (2) means
    adjacent the filling opening and above the path of movement of the pressing
    platen such that, as the plunger retracts from the compressing position,
    the material above the top of the pressing platen not compressed thereby
    will be forced downwardly into the path which the pressing platen would
    pursue in the succeeding stroke.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76+,    for presses with means to wind or fold a sheet, web or strand.

    220,    for reciprocating platen presses having material rebound
    restraining means.


CLS 100/188
TXT Apparatus under subclass 179 in which there is means to place material on a
    support which carries the material during the compacting operation or means
    to handle the compressed material as it is conveyed from the press.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138+,   for plural diverse presses in which at least one of the presses
    concurrently presses and conveys the material where the other press acting
    as a means for loading material into or compressing material within the
    casing of a concurrently conveying and pressing press.  See particularly
    subclasses 141+, for platen presses loading concurrently pressing and
    conveying presses in which usually the bottom of the casing acts as a
    stationary platen for the platen press.

    215,    for reciprocating platen presses having means to deposit the
    material on the means which supports the material during the compacting
    operation and see the notes thereto for other presses having material
    depositing means.

    218,    for reciprocating platen presses having means for removing the
    material that has been compacted from the support which carried the
    material during the compacting operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 71+ for devices for filling receivers and having means for
    compacting the contents material.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses, and see the reference
    to Class 221, sections V and VII, in the class definition of this class
    (100).

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses, see the reference to Class 222
    in the class definition.


CLS 100/189
TXT Apparatus under subclass 188 in which the feeding or discharging means
    carries the material up to or forces it through the feed opening in the
    side wall of the casing through which the material is forwarded for
    compaction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142,    for plural diverse presses in which a press is loaded by a
    transversely moving platen or packer which moves through the inlet for the
    press.


CLS 100/190
TXT Apparatus under subclass 179 having means by which the movement of material
    through the loading opening of the press is prevented.


CLS 100/191
TXT Apparatus under subclass 179 in which there are means by which the size of
    the outlet end of the tubular casing may be changed by changing the
    position of the walls relative to one another.


CLS 100/192
TXT Apparatus under subclass 191 in which the walls of the casing are held in
    place by a limited but continuing force so that the size of the outlet
    opening may vary with the amount of material forced therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147,    for concurrent pressing and conveying presses of the helix type
    compressor having overload release.

    169,    for concurrent type pressing and conveying presses having rolls in
    which the rolls are yieldable relative to one another.


CLS 100/193
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including more than one pair of
    opposing pressure surfaces such pairs (1) not concurrently co-compressing
    the same material and/or (2) being either separately actuated or
    compressing during movement in different directions if having a single
    actuator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161,    for plural stage rolling mills.

    178,    for plural moving compression chamber conveying presses.

    185,    for plural plunger and casing type conveying presses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclasses 36+, for shoe sole laying and
    leveling machines having multiple work supports for the shoes being
    operated upon.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 144 for
    apparatus in which the material to be treated is held between two opposed
    members which are movable or expansible toward one another to press or
    retain the material, and away from each other to release the material and
    there are a plurality of press couples which may constitute single or
    plural machines.

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclasses 4+, for multiple
    smoothing machines having independent pressing couples.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 255+ and 404+, for cutting devices having means
    to move work to and through a plurality of tool stations, and subclasses
    282, 375+ and 452+, for a work clamp associated with a cutting machine.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 374, for cooking devices
    having two movably connected heated plates adapted to be positioned so as
    to confine and contact food material therebetween in which there are two or
    more pairs of such cooking surfaces.

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 80, for cigar and cigarette machines comprising
    means for molding or otherwise forming the tobacco including means for
    carrying out a plurality of molding or forming operations, and subclass
    115, for plug or compressed tobacco shape making machines involving the use
    of a plurality of molding means arranged on a turret.


CLS 100/194
TXT Apparatus under subclass 193 in which the pressure surfaces of the plural
    pairs are all parallel to one another and either superposed one on the
    other or side by side in a row.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109,    for presses of the stacked box or plate type having a drain tube
    surrounded by the press material.

    113,    for stacked box and plate type presses where there is drainage
    through or along a pressure surface.

    229,    for reciprocating platen presses in which there is nonuse
    displacement of a box, receptacle or stationary platen.


CLS 100/195
TXT Apparatus under subclass 194 in which there is more than one row or
    super-posed pile of plural pairs of pressing surfaces.


CLS 100/196
TXT Apparatus under subclass 194 having means for placing the material to be
    compressed on or removing it from the means which supports the material
    during the compressing operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215+,   for reciprocating platen presses having means to deposit material
    on the means which supports the material during the compacting operation
    and see the Notes thereto for other presses having material depositing
    means.

    218,    for reciprocating platen presses having means for removing material
    from the means which supports the material during the compacting operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses, and see the reference
    to Class 221 in sections V and VII of the class definition of this class
    (100).

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses, and see the reference to Class
    222 in the class definition of this class (100).

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 222+, for apparatus for
    charging a load holding or supporting element from a source, and means for
    transporting the element to a working, treating, or inspecting station,
    which station may be a press, and subclasses 267+ for charging a plurality
    of, or discharging a plurality of, static, load underlying members (e.g.,
    racks, shelves, troughs, etc.), which plural members may be nominally
    claimed pressing surfaces.


CLS 100/197
TXT Apparatus under subclass 196 in which the material to be compacted is
    granular or flowing in nature.


CLS 100/198
TXT Apparatus under subclass 196 having means for freeing the compressed mass
    from the pressure surface or for removing it from the support on which it
    was carried during the compression.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218,    for reciprocating platen presses having means for removing material
    from the means which supports the material during pressing.


CLS 100/199
TXT Apparatus under subclass 194 having means by which the several pressure
    surfaces of the stack are located relative to one another or individually
    supported.


CLS 100/200
TXT Apparatus under subclass 199 in which the plates are connected by pivotally
    mounted elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for stacked box or plate type presses in which the boxes or plates
    are flexibly connected and there is drainage through or along a pressure
    surface.


CLS 100/202
TXT Apparatus under subclass 194 in which the pressure surfaces are pivotally
    connected together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    296,    for platens, per se, in which there are two platens which are
    flexibly connected.


CLS 100/203
TXT Apparatus under subclass 194 in which in each pair of pressure surfaces
    there are material retaining side walls around one of the pressure surfaces
    so as to constitute a chamber and the other pressure surface moves between
    the sidewalls as the pressure surfaces are brought together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240,    for reciprocating presses of the box and piston type.


CLS 100/204
TXT Apparatus under subclass 203 in which the pairs of pressing surfaces have
    means to secure them in fixed relation with the material under compression
    after the relief of the compression actuating force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219,    for reciprocating platen presses having means to lock the platens
    in position with the material compressed between them.


CLS 100/205
TXT Apparatus under subclass 203 in which the chamber has openings through the
    bottom or a sidewall through which access may be had to the interior of the
    box.

    (1)     Note.  The openings are usually for the purpose of removing or
    loosening the compacted material contained within the compression chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    for expressing presses having drain means for the expressed liquid
    and having means to clear or clean a duct passing through or along the
    pressure surface.


CLS 100/206
TXT Apparatus under subclass 203 in which the compression chamber is made up of
    sections which may be taken apart from one another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246+,   for reciprocating press construction of the box and piston type in
    which the box is made up of movable or removable sections.


CLS 100/207
TXT Apparatus under subclass 193 having means for bodily removing material from
    one of the pairs of opposed pressure surfaces and causing it to be moved to
    another of the pairs of opposed pressure surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    for plural diverse presses in which at least one of the presses
    conveys while pressing the material, the conveyance frequently being to a
    subsequent press and sometimes the compaction being in one press with
    conveyance to a second place through which the material is conveyed during
    compaction.

    140,    for plural diverse presses of which at least one press conveys
    while pressing and there is loading from another type press by transfer.

    215+,   for reciprocating platen presses having means to deposit the
    material on the means which supports the material during the compacting
    operation and see the notes thereto for other presses having material
    depositing means.

    218,    for reciprocating platen presses in which there is means to remove
    the material from the means which supports the material during the
    compacting operation.

    221,    for reciprocating presses having plural or indexing material
    supports.

    229,    for reciprocating presses in which the work support may be
    displaced to or from position opposing the pressing element.


CLS 100/208
TXT Apparatus under subclass 193 in which the movable pressure surfaces of at
    least two pairs of compressing surfaces are actuated or forced to move at
    the same time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236,    for reciprocating presses of the oscillatory or hinged platen type
    having pairs of opposed platens.


CLS 100/209
TXT Apparatus under subclass 208 in which the actuation of one movable pressure
    surface of one pair in compaction would necessarily involve the removal or
    return from the compaction of the movable pressing surface of the other
    pair of compressing surfaces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 116 for machines for
    squeezing textiles wherein a plurality of squeezers are mounted on a
    horizontal axis and are provided with opposed squeezing faces cooperating
    with two opposed walls of the tub, subclass 118, wherein a single squeezer
    having a pair of squeezing members is mounted on a horizontal axis and is
    provided with opposed squeezer faces which cooperates with opposed beds,
    and subclass 121, for squeezing machines with a squeezer having a
    substantially rectilinear motion the squeezer being provided with opposed
    squeezer faces cooperating with opposed beds or walls of a tub.


CLS 100/210
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which material is compacted between
    a solid surface and a body of continuous periphery having rolling motion
    relative thereto.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes devices in which the roll axis sweeps
    in a circular path so that the rotation of the roll on its axis is
    planetary in nature.  In such devices the solid surface relative to which
    the roll rotates is usually dished or conical in shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     for pressing devices for compacting ensilage within a silo which
    devices employ rollers which are guided by the side wall of the silo.

    68,     for pressing devices for compacting ensilage within a silo
    employing rollers for compressing which rollers are guided by a vertical
    post centrally of the silo.

    86,     for presses which additionally treat the material in which the
    additional treatment involves winding a sheet, web, or strand on a mandrel
    with an opposed presser roll.

    89,     for presses which treat the material by winding it within a cage of
    rolls.

    121,    for presses with drain means for expressed liquid in which the
    drainage is through or along a movable pressure surface of the roll type.

    156,    for concurrent pressing and conveying presses of the roll type in
    which a roll coacts with a nonrotary press element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, subclass 111, for a pastry rolling pin which is
    convertible to another device or which is combined with a diverse device.

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclass 34, for machines for laying or
    leveling shoe soles in which the shoe is held on a support and the sole is
    subjected to pressure by a rotating roll with the roll moving relative to
    the sole along the length of the sole.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 256+, for a similar apparatus for
    rolling glass; and see the "Search Notes" thereunder.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 102+, for machines
    in which a textile is squeezed while subjected to a liquid and the
    squeezing machine is of the roller type wherein the roll translates
    rectilinearly and cooperates with a bed.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclass 45, for apparatus for the treatment
    of leather by the use of a tool which is pivoted about a point external
    from the tool and the tool turns upon the pivot during treatment of the
    leather.

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses, for an apparatus which
    deforms work between a roller means and an anvil means, particularly
    subclasses 91+, for a fixed axis roller and concave surface, and subclasses
    214+, for a movable axis roller and fixed anvil means.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 457, 464 and 466, for a
    rolling surface working dairy food; subclasses 557+, for a roller or belt
    contacting another member to press seeds from food; and subclass 575, for
    adjacent surfaces that separate the shell from food, one surface of which
    rotates.

    101,    Printing, subclass 269, for bed and cylinder printing presses in
    which a cylinder is given a bodily movement along the bed.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 84+, for a
    comminutor surface having openings and cooperating surface whereby the
    material being comminuted is forced through the openings.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 374, for shaping apparatus comprising a roll and platen.

    452,    Butchering, subclass 143 for meat tenderers in which a roll coacts
    with a plate.

    492,    Roll or Roller, subclass 14 for a rolling pin or pastry roller, per
    se.


CLS 100/211
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which one of the pressure surfaces
    is bendable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122+,   for presses with drain means for an expressed liquid and there is a
    textile containing pressure surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclass 38 for dies and formers for shoe
    sole laying and leveling machines which may be rigid, resilient,
    inflatable, or deformable (such as a flexible bag full of a liquid).

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 146, for
    drying devices of the stationary press type having nonplanar press couples.

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclasses 25+, for smoothing
    machines wherein the work is smoothed between platens and it is necessary
    to move both press platens one of which may be a bag wall, the bag being
    inflated to exert the pressure.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 96, for machines in
    which a textile is squeezed while subjecting it to a liquid and the
    squeezing is by a receptacle deformable to effect a squeezing action on the
    textile, and subclass 242, for wringers for pressing or removing liquid
    from a material which effect the removal of liquid from textiles by
    pressure applied to a diaphragm which presses against the textiles.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 54+, for metal deforming apparatus
    including a fluent tool means, and, subclasses 382, and 396+, for
    die-shaping apparatus having a yieldable tool or tool face portion.

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 256.1, for a machine for bending wood to a
    desired form by compressing it between formers or dies which may embody an
    integral convex former and a flexible former, subclasses 263 to 266, for a
    machine for bending wood about a fixed former which comprises a windlass
    connected with the ends of a strap which is drawn against the wood and
    forces it against the former, and, subclass 268, for a machine for bending
    wood which comprises a revolving former to which one end of the wood to be
    bent is secured and which, as the former is rotated, draws the wood closely
    therearound and employing a flexible apron which presses the wood firmly
    against the cylinder or former.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 401+ for pulp molding
    devices having a pressing diaphragm composed of elastic material.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 214 for resilient wall dispensers having wall
    deflecting means and subclass 386.5 for dispensing containers with a
    nonrigid follower discharge assistant.


CLS 100/212
TXT Apparatus under subclass 211 in which material is compressed within a
    bendable filament, strand or band by contracting it around the material by
    endwise pulling.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes binder chain wires and cords equipped
    with means to support them from the ground or support them from an element
    penetrating the material whether or not the binder chain wire or cord is
    equipped with means to tighten the binder chain or cord around the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for devices for disposing a flexible binder tightly and
    circumferentially closed around the material.

    278,    for reciprocating platen presses having a flexible element actuator
    for the platen.


CLS 100/213
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which one of the pressure surfaces
    has a projection on it which is received within a cavity in the other
    pressure surface, the material compacted being contained within and lining
    the cavity and surrounding the projection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 343+, for a reciprocating die press for
    deep drawing or forging a metal workpiece between a male die and a closed
    periphery female die.


CLS 100/214
TXT Means under the class definition including opposed pressure surfaces and
    means moving at least one of the surfaces to cause it to approach the
    opposing surface to compress material therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    for presses with drain means for expressed liquid along or through
    a pressure surface and the surface is a movable piston or platen.

    141,    for plural diverse presses in which at least one of the presses
    conveys while pressing and such press is loaded by a transversely moving
    platen or packer.

    178,    for concurrent pressing and conveying presses in which the
    conveying is by means of a moving compression chamber and the compression
    involves a piston or platen type press.

    179,    for plunger type concurrent pressing and conveying presses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 261, for mop
    wringers in which the mop is squeezed between flat boards or plates.

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 251, for assembling and disassembling
    apparatus having means for engaging two work parts to be assembled or
    disassembled and means for multiplying the force input to the apparatus
    where the apparatus is of the arbor press type.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 143+, for
    apparatus for removing liquid from material in which the material to be
    treated is held between two opposed members which are movable or expansible
    toward one another to press or retain the material, and away from each
    other to release the material.

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclasses 17+, for smoothing
    machines wherein the work is smoothed between platens, and subclass 71, for
    implements involving simple elemental devices for effecting pressure
    between the platens.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 305+, for a press molding machine;
    see the "Search Notes" thereunder.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 113+, for squeezing
    machines for squeezing textiles while subjected to a only of a pair of
    members between which the pressure is effected, is moved and, subclasses
    241+, for wringers for removing the liquid from textiles by pressing.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclass 48, for apparatus for treating
    leather in which opposing forces are brought to bear upon the leather which
    tend to compress the leather.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 523+, and particularly subclasses 531+,
    indented thereunder, for a clicker die press or other device having a
    reciprocable tool or platen.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 557+ and 559+, for
    punch type seed removers; and subclasses 572+, and 577-583, for shell
    separators having presser members.

    101,    Printing, subclass 134.5, for bed and platen copying apparatus
    having opposed members capable of relative movement toward each other to
    make the impression by nonrolling contact where there is a printing surface
    bearing designs in ink of such nature as not to require reinking and
    subclasses 287+, for machines comprising two opposing pressure members so
    constructed as to contact simultaneously at all points with the work held
    therebetween thereby effecting a nonrolling impression.

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 111+, for apparatus for making tobacco plugs of
    compressed shapes.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 256.1+, for machine for bending wood to
    desired form by compressing it between formers or dies.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 169+, for sand compacting mold making
    means and, particularly subclasses 207+, for press type compactors.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 386, for dispensing containers having a
    follower type discharge assistant.

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 86+, for patents to a device with
    relatively movable jaws to grip an object while being treated.  See section
    VIII under the class definition of Class 269 for the line with respect to
    Class 100.

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 7+, for linear bearings.

    410,    Freight Accommodation on Freight Carrier, subclasses 121+, e.g.,
    for squeeze-type brace structures of indented subclass(es) 123+, and the
    wall-to-lading structures of indented subclass 128 in which a brace
    structure applies pressure against lading on a freight carrier.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 394+, for a preform reshaping or resizing means or vulcanizing
    means compressing coacting press surfaces, and subclasses 406+, for means
    shaping a mass comprising opposed press members; see the search notes
    thereunder.

    452,    Butchering, subclass 144 for meat tenderers having plates provided
    with projections to mash the meat therebetween.


CLS 100/215
TXT Apparatus under subclass 214 having means to convey or conduct material to
    be compacted to place the material on a surface which supports the material
    during the compacting operation.

    (1)     Note.  The support is usually a platen or a box bottom but it is
    not limited thereto.

    (2)     Note.  The depositing means claimed in combination with the press
    may be a mere chute.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for apparatus having means for placing material on or removing it
    from a means which supports the material during the disposing of a flexible
    filament, strand, or band tightly and circumferentially closed around the
    material.

    45,     for presses having automatic or material trigger control of
    material addition, depositing, or displacing.

    49,     for presses with automatic or material triggered control of the
    actuating means in which the press actuation is started by material
    presence of position.

    55,     for apparatus for applying the lids to portable receptacles and
    having means to transfer the receptacle to be lidded to or from the press.

    66,     for apparatus for compacting ensilage within a silo combined with
    means for depositing or distributing the material within the silo.

    71,     for presses having means to deposit material into the press which
    material is added to other material for the purpose of changing a physical
    or chemical characteristic of the material as pressed.

    77,     for apparatus having means to wind or fold a sheet, web or strand
    and deposit such wound or folded article into a press for repressing.

    137+,   for plural diverse presses one of which usually deposits the
    material in the other press.

    138,    for plural diverse presses in which at least one of the presses
    concurrently conveys the material while pressing.

    152,    for endless conveyor type concurrent pressing and conveying presses
    having means for charging or discharging the material on the conveyor.

    173+,   for roller type concurrent pressing and conveying presses having
    means for handling or guiding the material to or from the rollers.

    188,    for plunger type concurrent pressing and conveying presses having
    means for feeding or discharge handling.

    196+,   for plural presses of the nature of stacked boxes or plates with
    means for loading material into or taking it from the boxes or plates.

    207,    for plural presses having means to transfer the material compressed
    by one press to a second press.

    221+,   for presses having plural boxes or platen portions each of which
    acts as a pressure surface as they are brought successively under a plunger.

    229,    for presses in which the box or platen acting as a pressure surface
    is movable from a position under a plunger or piston in a direction other
    than the compressing direction and may be loaded while displaced in such
    direction.

    232,    for presses in which one platen moves material into position
    between other platens for compression between them.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclasses 7+, for smoothing
    machines having a movable device for transferring the article smoothed to,
    through, or from or back to the front of the machine.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 207+, especially subclass 223, for
    glass molding apparatus combined with means charging glass thereto; see the
    "Search Notes" thereunder.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 405, for a forging press having plural
    tool couples and means to feed work between them.

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses for cutting devices which include
    means to move work.

    99,     Food and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 373, for cooking devices
    having two imperforate movably connected heated plates or mold sections
    adapted to be positioned so as to confine and contact food material
    therebetween and including means to supply uncooked material to the cooking
    surfaces.

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 81, for cigar and cigarette making machines
    having means for molding or forming the tobacco combined with a feeder for
    the tobacco or a tobacco bunch to the machine.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    appropriate subclasses for filling receivers with fluent material.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses, and especially
    subclasses 191+, for article dispensers, not otherwise classified, for
    delivering articles to a stationary article support.  See the reference to
    Class 221 in sections V and VII of the class definition of this class (100).

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses, and see references to Class 222
    in the class definition.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 256+, for a female mold and means to feed measured charges of
    fluent material thereto; see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 100/216
TXT Apparatus under subclass 215 having means interrelating the pressure
    surface moving means and the placement means such that on termination of
    the placement movement the moving means becomes effective to move the
    pressure surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for apparatus in which a means sensitive to the amount of material
    added by the feeder controls the plunger actuation.


CLS 100/217
TXT Apparatus under subclass 215 having a walled receptacle for receiving the
    material to be compressed and a means which moves across the open end of
    such receptacle to distribute the material within the receptacle as it
    brings the material into position over the receptacle.


CLS 100/218
TXT Apparatus under subclass 214 having means to remove the compressed material
    bodily from a means supporting the material during pressing.

    (1)     Note.  Where one of the pressure surfaces is a piston telescoping
    within a box, and the piston, by continued motion in the same direction as
    it moved in the compressing motion, moves the material out of the box,
    search this class, subclasses 240+ particularly subclasses 244 and 247.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for binding machines having means for discharging material from the
    support which bears the weight of the material during the application of
    the binding member thereto.

    45,     for presses having automatic or material triggered control of the
    displacing of material from the press.

    55,     for portable receptacle lid applying presses having means to
    transfer the receptacle from the pressing device.

    76+,    for presses which form a sheet or web and discharge it so as to
    wind or fold the sheet.

    104+,   for presses with drain means for conducting the expressed liquid,
    particularly 106, for presses having drain means for an expressed liquid or
    for a liquid pressed from the material during the compacting and having
    means to propel the liquid.

    138,    for plural diverse presses in which one press discharges into
    another press.

    144+,   for a press which as it presses conveys the material from one
    opening to another the moving press element usually acting as the conveying
    and discharging means, particularly subclasses 152, for an endless conveyor
    type concurrent pressing and conveying press having means for discharging
    the material from the conveyor, subclass 173 for a roll type concurrent
    pressing and conveying press having means for handling or guiding the
    material, particularly, subclass 174 for such press having means to strip
    the material from the rolls, and subclass 188 for a plunger type concurrent
    conveying and compressing press having means for handling the discharge
    from the press.

    196,    for plural presses comprising stacked boxes and having means to
    discharge material from the boxes.

    207,    for plural presses having means to transfer or discharge the
    material from one press and place it into the other.

    240+,   see (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 771+ for apparatus for assembling work
    pieces by pressure which require no manual operation other than placing the
    work parts in or removing them from the machine the operations of
    assembling or disassembling being without manual operation and, subclasses
    809+, for assembling apparatus having a magazine for the work from which
    the work is fed to be operated upon by apparatus which may press work
    pieces together.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 344+ and 426+, for a reciprocating
    press with a product removal means.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 78+ for product handling means associated with
    cutting apparatus, and, particularly subclasses 109+ indented thereunder,
    for means to move or guide movement of the product.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 373, for cooking
    apparatus including two movable connected heated plates adapted to be
    positioned so as to confine and contact the food material therebetween and
    having means for withdrawing or facilitating the withdrawal of the food
    material from both cooking surfaces.

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 82, for cigar and cigarette making machines
    having means for molding or forming the tobacco combined with a bunch
    remover and/or transfer device.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 180+ and 213+, for sand mold shaping
    means having means to remove shaper from product, subclasses 344+, for
    metal casting means with product ejector, and, subclasses 401+, for
    strippers or ejectors, per se.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 255, for shaping apparatus comprising a mold, pallet handling
    means arranged to eject the product and charging means, and subclass 443,
    for means ejecting a product from a mold comprising a movable mold bottom
    or wall.


CLS 100/219
TXT Apparatus under subclass 214 having means in addition to the pressure
    surface actuating means for securing the pressure surface against motion
    relative to the opposed pressure surface either in a position where the
    press is empty or in a position in which the material compressed is held in
    compacted condition between the pressure surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     for presses which wind or fold a sheet, web or strand and have
    means to retain the material in the folded or wound shape.

    204,    for box or pot type stacked box plural presses having means to lock
    the compressing surfaces with the material compacted between them under
    compression.

    220,    for apparatus for restraining the compacted material within the
    press other than some means to hold the platen.

    274,    for intermittent actuators which move the platen step by step in
    the compressing direction and a means for arresting the restoring motion of
    the platen between steps.


CLS 100/220
TXT Apparatus under subclass 214 having means contacted by the material as
    compacted and separate from the pressure surfaces, which means holds the
    material in its compacted condition against expansion upon withdrawal of
    the movable pressure surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     for presses which additionally treat the material by winding or
    folding a sheet, web, or strand and which have means to retain the material
    in the wound or folded state.

    187,    for plunger type concurrent pressing and conveying presses in which
    a tube through which a plunger forces material is equipped with a means to
    restrain rebound of the material as the plunger is retracted.

    219,    for apparatus in which the rebound of the material is prevented by
    locking the platen in position.


CLS 100/221
TXT Apparatus under subclass 214 having either (1) multiple supports or
    supporting areas each bearing discrete portions of material to be
    compressed by a single opposing pressure surface or, (2) a support having
    plural areas for a single mass of material and means whereby the support
    and an opposed single pressure surface may be relatively shifted laterally
    for compressing different portions of the single mass of material at
    successive or alternative offset locations.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes platens or boxes which can be shifted
    transversely to alternative compression positions for the compression of
    different portions a single mass of material at successive or alternative
    offset locations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65+,    for a platen shifting across the top of a silo contents between
    successive compressive strokes.

    215,    for presses having means to place the material upon the support
    portions which carry the weight of the material during the compacting
    operation and see the notes thereto for other presses having material
    charging or handling means.

    229,    for single material supports displaceable transversely of the
    direction of platen movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclasses 36+, for shoe sole laying and
    leveling machines having multiple work supports for the shoes being
    operated upon.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 308+, for glass working press
    molding apparatus comprising a plunger coacting with successively presented
    molds.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 123, for machines for
    squeezing textiles while subjected to a liquid in which the squeezer
    element only of a pair of members, between which pressure is effected, is
    moved and the squeezer has a substantially rectilinear vertical motion and
    in which the squeezer is displaced, or in which means are provided to
    facilitate displacement of the squeezer, while out of pressure engagement
    with the textiles, to cause the succeeding squeezing actions to be at
    different positions in the tub.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 44+,
    69+, and 89+ for a cutting machine of that class type combined with an
    indexing material support.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 357+, for a single press member coacting with plural female
    molds.


CLS 100/222
TXT Apparatus under subclass 221 in which the supporting areas are on an
    endless flexible web member which carries them successively to position
    opposing the single pressure surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215,    for reciprocating platen presses having means to deposit the
    material on the means which supports the material during the compacting
    operation and see the notes thereto for other presses having material
    depositing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclass 10, for devices in which
    there is a conveyor belt for moving material into the pressing zone and in
    which there are opposed pressing elements which are platens.

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 87 for cigar and cigarette making machines having
    means to mold or form the tobacco in which the mold is mounted upon an
    endless carrier there being plural molds.


CLS 100/223
TXT Apparatus under subclass 221 in which the supports or support areas are
    carried by a member which moves them in a circular or swinging orbit to
    carry them successively to position opposing the single pressure surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclass 37 for shoe sole laying and leveling
    machines having multiple work supports in which the work supports are held
    on a turret or wheel rotating about a single fixed axis to move the work
    supports past a loading and pressure applying station or zone.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 35.5+ for rotatable tool holders.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 111, for machines in
    which a textile is squeezed while subjected to a liquid and there is a tub
    which is displaceable about a vertical axis to position successive portions
    of a batch of textiles beneath a vertically reciprocable squeezer.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 813+ for assemblies with
    means to turn a shaft or rotatably mounted device about its axis to one or
    more selected loci including means to prevent or hold against rotation at
    such loci.

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 87 for cigar and cigarette making machines in
    which molds for forming the tobacco are carried upon a rotary member, there
    being plural molds.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 325+ for metal casting apparatus wherein
    plural molds are carried by a rotating table or wheel.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 453+ for a female mold and dynamic support or dynamic carrier
    therefor; see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 100/224
TXT Apparatus under subclass 221 in which the multiple supports or support
    areas are translated to move successively to position opposing the single
    pressure surface.


CLS 100/225
TXT Apparatus under subclass 221 in which the multiple supporting areas are
    formed by walls extending across between the side walls of a chamber so as
    to separate various charges of material within the chamber.


CLS 100/226
TXT Apparatus under subclass 214 in which the movable pressure surface can be
    additionally moved transversely of the compressing direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     for portable receptacle lid applying presses in which approaching
    arms embrace the receptacle, the arms usually being the movable platen and
    displaceable to a nonuse position endwise of a box to be lidded.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclasses 32+, for platen presses
    wherein there are but two platens, one of which is movable and a platen is
    moved in an orbital path about a fixed axis and in a rectilinear horizontal
    path to effect a smoothing operation, and subclasses 34+ for platen presses
    in which there are two platens, one of which is movable and the platen is
    moved in both an orbital path about a fixed axis and in a rectilinear
    vertical path to effect a smoothing operation.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 353+, 381+, 393, and 394+, for a
    reciprocating metal shaping press utilizing a tool-complex, i.e., three or
    more coacting relatively moving tools or segments, and subclass 406 for a
    press in which a tool has a compound motion.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 376, for cooking
    apparatus including two movably connected heated plates opposed to one
    another to confine food material therebetween and having means for
    laterally detaching the cooking surfaces from their support.

    164,    Metal Founding, appropriate subclasses for roll or rock-over type
    mold pressing machines, particularly subclasses 169+.


CLS 100/227
TXT Apparatus under subclass 226 in which the movable pressure surface has
    means for mounting it upon a box, barrel or other means for holding the
    material during later transportation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59,     for portable receptacle lid applying presses which are mountable
    upon the receptacle to be lidded.

    132,    for presses with drain means for an expressed liquid which have a
    liquid collector or receptor and the press is demountably supported thereon.


CLS 100/228
TXT Apparatus under subclass 226 having means for mounting the movable pressure
    surface so that a cross member carries it and such cross member may be
    swung or disconnected from the stationary pressure surface.


CLS 100/229
TXT Apparatus under subclass 214 in which a material receiving pressure surface
    having side walls to form a chamber or a pressure surface which does not
    move during the compacting operation are movable to a nonuse position
    transversely of the direction of application of the compacting force or of
    the line of approach movement of the compressing surfaces.

    (1)     Note.  The material receiving pressure surface is not actuated
    during the compression operation but moves transversely of the direction of
    compressing motion in order for the patent to be classified in this
    subclass.

    (2)     Note.  In the devices here classified the box bottom and frame must
    move as an entirety.  For devices in which the box bottom or the box frame
    moves separately search this class, subclasses 246+.

    (3)     Note.  The displacement of the box to nonuse position is generally
    for the purpose of placing material upon the box or platen.  Where means
    are provided for moving the material into such loaded condition of the box
    see this class, subclass 215.

    (4)     Note.  This subclass includes compression of material within a box,
    barrel or bag or other portable receptacle where there is no lid applied or
    where the material to be compressed is not carried from outside the
    receptacle to position within the receptacle. Where the compression within
    the receptacle.  Where the compression within the receptacle is by means of
    a lid for the receptacle search this class, subclasses 54+. Where material
    is carried from without the receptacle to position within it search Class
    141, appropriate subclasses.  The inclusion of a funnel or loading device
    directing or guiding the material into the container renders the device one
    for Class 141.  Note particularly Class 141, subclasses 71+, for compacting
    material within the receptacle during filling.

    (5)     Note.  This subclass includes compacting of material within
    portable receptacles by a reciprocating platen. Auger or revolving screw
    devices for the purpose of compacting material within the receptacle having
    been deemed filling devices for Class 141 as they transport material from
    outside the receptacle to a position within it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54+,    and see (4) Note above.

    133,    for presses with drain means for expressed liquid which are
    demountably supported upon a drinking receptacle.

    194,    for plural presses of the stacked box or plate type such boxes or
    plates frequently being removable from the press.

    215,    and see (3) Note above.

    221+,   for plural or indexing material supports displaceable transversely
    to the nonuse position.

    246,    and see (2) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 376, for cooking
    apparatus having two movably connected heated plates adapted to be
    positioned so as to confine and contact food material therebetween and
    having means for readily detaching the cooking surfaces from their support.

    101,    Printing, subclass 316, for bed and platen printing machines in
    which the printing member moves in a straight path, the printing member
    being the bed of the machine.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 71+, and see (4) Note, above.  In addition, it is observed that
    subclass 73 thereof includes a collection of packing augers, per se.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 452, for a female mold and pallet handling means in which a filled
    mold may be carried away from a press after filling; see the search notes
    thereunder.


CLS 100/230
TXT Apparatus under subclass 214 in which the movable pressure surface
    surrounds and is moved along a tension rod which is located medially of the
    movable pressure surface, the tension rod taking the reactive force of the
    compression operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    289,    for screw and nut actuated reciprocating platen presses in which
    the screw rod is not located centrally of the platen.


CLS 100/231
TXT Apparatus under subclass 214 having a frame supporting a pressure surface
    and an opposed cantilever portion of the frame supporting a pressure
    surface, the reaction force of the compression operation being a thrust
    against the cantilever support and the opposed frame portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for portable receptacle lidding presses in which the movable
    pressure element projects over the bed of a box or receptacle supporting
    surface.


CLS 100/232
TXT Apparatus under subclass 214 having three or more pressure surfaces at
    least two of which are movable along paths in different directions and
    which act either simultaneously to co-compress the same material or
    sequentially so that one moving platen recompresses material compressed and
    held compressed by another moving platen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes wool press tables which have upwardly
    swinging hinged ledge leaves as one pair of platens.  For such devices in
    which the leaves have means to carry with them a binder card, search this
    class, subclass 16.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     and see (1) Note above.

    42,     for methods of pressing in which there are successive compressions
    from different directions.

    215,    for reciprocating platen presses of the box and piston type where
    there are means to place the material to be compressed on the means which
    supports the material during the pressing operation.

    240+,   for box and piston type presses in which a side of the box may be
    removable as on hinges but in which the movement of such side does not have
    a compressing function.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclasses 21+, for smoothing
    machines wherein the work is smoothed between platens and where there are
    three or more press elements.


CLS 100/233
TXT Apparatus under subclass 214 in which the movement of one pressure surface
    to approach the other is an arcuate or swinging motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for binder applying devices in which a swinging jaw carries a
    binder about the material, such jaw being a gripping jaw for the material.

    250,    for box and piston presses in which the box bottom and its frame
    may be separated from each other by the swinging motion upon a pivot.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclasses 36+, for smoothing
    machines wherein the work is smoothed between platens and there are but two
    platens, one of which is movable and such platen moves in an orbital path
    about a fixed axis to effect the pressing action.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 117+ for machines
    which squeeze textiles while subjected to a liquid and in which the
    squeezer member only of a pair of members is moved and the single squeezer
    is mounted on a horizontal axis and cooperates with a bed.

    101,    Printing, subclasses 297+ for bed and platen printing machines in
    which the path of approach of the bed and platen to printing position is in
    an arc intersecting the surface to be printed upon.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 211 for press type sand mold compactors
    having a swinging press head.


CLS 100/234
TXT Apparatus under subclass 233 in which each of the pressure surfaces has a
    handle and the pressure surfaces are caused to move relative to one another
    by the pivotal motion of the handles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243,    for plier type box and piston presses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 300+, for tools of the plier type.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 169, for
    apparatus in which comminution is effected by cooperating surfaces which
    reciprocate relative to each other and in which the device is adapted to be
    supported in the hand during operation.


CLS 100/235
TXT Apparatus under subclass 234 having a sharp penetrating spit like member
    for piercing the material and holding it in position to be compressed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94,     for presses having additional means to cut, break, pierce or
    comminute the material.


CLS 100/236
TXT Apparatus under subclass 233 in which the platens are divided along the
    pivot axis into several pressing areas which crimp the material at spaced
    points and move parallel to one another when actuated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193+,   for plural presses not co-compressing the same material.


CLS 100/237
TXT Apparatus under subclass 214 in which a single mass of material is
    compressed by plural movable pressure surfaces moving in parallel paths
    toward a single opposing pressure surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61+,    for portable receptacle lid applying presses having a movable
    platen which presses spaced areas of the lid concurrently, the movable
    platen sometimes being in the form of a plurality of pressure surfaces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclass 20, for smoothing
    machines wherein the work is smoothed between platens and one of the press
    platens is sectional and has parts which are adjustable with respect to the
    other parts of the platen.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 124, for squeezing
    machines in which the squeezers are of the vertically rectilinearly
    reciprocating type and in which there are a plurality of squeezers acting
    successively on a batch of textiles.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 404, for a plural tool-couple metal
    shaping apparatus, and see the notes thereunder.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 172+, for sand mold compacting apparatus
    employing plural rammers.

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), for a machine in which a series
    or gang of punches is employed, and from which series any number or set may
    be selected (by the operator or by a pattern) to perforate a design or an
    array of code symbols.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 343, for plural spaced reshaping means or vulcanizing means acting
    on a single preform, subclass 356 for plural shaping plungers coacting with
    a single female mold, subclass 421, for a male-female shaping couple with a
    tamp rod, and subclass 431, for a female mold and tamp rod combination.


CLS 100/238
TXT Apparatus under subclass 214 in which one pressure surface approaches the
    other with a straight line movement and also turns about an axis along the
    line of such movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 406, for a metal shaping press with means
    to effect compound motion of a tool, and see the notes thereto.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 501+, for a rotary food
    entering member that has a reaming action.


CLS 100/239
TXT Apparatus under subclass 238 having a chamber, a pressure surface advancing
    within the chamber to exert compressing force within the chamber, means to
    rotate the chamber and means interconnecting the chamber and pressure
    surface so that the rotation of the chamber causes the pressure surface to
    advance within the chamber.

    (1)     Note.  In these devices the box is interposed in the power path of
    the actuating force.  The actuation of the box in rotation causes
    concurrent rotation and compression of the material.


CLS 100/240
TXT Apparatus under subclass 214 in which there are material retaining side
    walls around one of the pressure surfaces so as to constitute a chamber and
    the other pressure surface moves between the sidewalls as the pressure
    surfaces are brought toward one another to apply compressive force to the
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232,    for presses having three or more platens, several of which platens
    may be so located as to form a box.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 305+ for a glass press molding
    machine.

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses, for a closed-die press for
    plastically shaping metal. Particularly, see subclasses 253.1+ for an
    extrusion machine and 347+ for a deep drawing machine, each utilizing a
    bottomless "through" die, and subclasses 352+ for a forging machine in
    which a cuplike female die entraps the shaped work.

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 119, for molds, per se, for use in molding
    tobacco into plugs, in plug or compressed tobacco shape making machines.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 578+ for an internal closure-like member
    which rests on the unused contents of a container.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 412+, for a press molding apparatus comprising a plunger-mold
    couple for plastic or fluent material not otherwise provided for; see the
    search notes thereunder.


CLS 100/241
TXT Apparatus under subclass 240 in which the pressure surface which moves
    between the side walls of the material retaining chamber has mounted
    circumferentially upon it edged devices which move along said side wall as
    said pressure surface advances into the chamber.


CLS 100/242
TXT Apparatus under subclass 240 in which the area of the cross-section of the
    chamber at right angles to the direction of approach of the pressure
    surfaces may be varied.


CLS 100/243
TXT Apparatus under subclass 240 in which the chamber and the pressure surface
    which enters the chamber are each equipped with a handle and these handles
    are movable relative to one another to cause the said pressure surface to
    move between the side walls of the chamber and rectilinearly approach an
    opposing pressure surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    234+,   for plier type hinged platen or piston presses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, particularly subclasses 300+, for tool-jaw(s) positioned by
    relatively movable plural handles (e.g., pliers).


CLS 100/244
TXT Apparatus under subclass 240 in which the opposing pressure surfaces both
    enter the side walls of the chamber and both are actuated for movement
    between the side walls of said chamber and in the direction of said side
    walls.

    (1)     Note.  In these devices there are two movable pistons in the same
    box.

    (2)     Note.  The travel of the piston or of one of the pistons or of the
    box bottoms may be after the compressive force has been discontinued and
    the movement merely for the removal of the material from within the frame
    of the box.  Search this class, subclass 218 for reciprocating platen
    presses in which the press has means for removing the material from the
    pressure surface.

    (3)     Note.  In the devices here classified both pressure surfaces are
    movable relative to the box frame and both are actuated.  Where there is
    but one movable pressure surface yet the other pressure surface is
    removable from the box frame, search this class, subclasses 247+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218,    see (2) Note above.

    247+,   see (3) Note above.

    264,    for reciprocating platen presses in which both platens are movable
    relative to one another, i.e., and each has actuating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 352+, for a female mold and opposed coaxial dynamic press
    members coacting therewith; see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 100/245
TXT Apparatus under subclass 240 in which a pressure surface is so supported as
    to be free to move laterally if unrestrained, but is restrained in its
    direction of motion by the side walls of the chamber or by guiding
    structure associated with the chamber.

    (1)     Note.  In these devices the acutation is usually by a flexible
    connection so that the guiding restraint of the box is necessary to the
    correct motion of the piston, the connection being either a pivot or a
    rope, cable, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     for devices for compressing material within a silo in which the
    side walls of the silo guide a roller type pressing means.


CLS 100/246
TXT Apparatus under subclass 240 in which any of the elements of the chamber,
    as the side walls or portions thereof, or a pressure surface which is
    stationary relative thereto during the application of compressive force to
    the material are movable relative to one another for purposes other than
    the application of compressive force to the material.

    (1)     Note.  In these devices the box parts may be movable relative to
    each other, that is, the bottom of the box may be separable from the side
    walls or the side walls movable relative to the box bottom.  Where the box
    is movable as a unit transversely to the direction of compressive force,
    search this class, subclass 229.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206,    for plural presses of the stacked box type in which the box is of
    separable sections.

    229,    See the Note, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclass 66 for shoe toe and heel stiffener
    molding machines having a separable matrix or a matrix made in sections
    which separate to allow the insertion or withdrawal of a stiffener carrying
    plunger or former.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 316, for glass press molding machine
    with means to rotate a plunger upon withdrawal from the mold, and subclass
    317 for a reciprocating or oscillating female mold; see the "Search Notes"
    thereunder.


CLS 100/247
TXT Apparatus under subclass 246 in which the pressure surface which is
    stationary relative to the chamber during the application of compressive
    force to the material and the side walls of the chamber are relatively
    movable for purposes other than the application of compressive force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244,    for box and piston presses in which the box bottom is a piston,
    that is, the box frame contains two pistons.


CLS 100/248
TXT Apparatus under subclass 247 in which the chamber contains a movable or
    removable pressure surface supported by another surface which may act as a
    surface for compression is not supplemented by the removable pressure
    surface.


CLS 100/249
TXT Apparatus under subclass 247 in which the pressure surface which is
    stationary during the application of compressive force and the side walls
    of the chamber are relatively movable and have associated therewith
    surfaces which direct such relative movement during the separation of said
    surface from the side walls of the chamber.


CLS 100/250
TXT Apparatus under subclass 249 in which the surfaces which direct the
    relative motion of the pressure surface and the side walls of the chamber
    include means mounting them for relative swinging motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233+,   for presses in which the piston has a swinging motion during the
    compression stroke.


CLS 100/251
TXT Apparatus under subclass 249 in which the surfaces which direct the
    relative motion of the pressure surface and the side walls of the chamber
    include means to direct relative movement in the direction of the
    compressive force.


CLS 100/252
TXT Apparatus under subclass 246 in which the side walls forming the chamber,
    or portions thereof, may be separated from each other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 160+, for a static mold comprising plural
    mold sections.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, appropriate subclasses for bolt elements and
    latching devices, not combined with lock structure for securing any closure
    element in closed or adjusted position.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 441+, for a molding machine including a female mold having
    movable side walls or sections for product removal.


CLS 100/253
TXT Apparatus under subclass 252 in which the means which causes the pressure
    surfaces to reciprocate relative to one another also causes separation of
    the chamber side wall parts from each other.


CLS 100/254
TXT Apparatus under subclass 252 in which there is a continuing biasing force
    restraining movement of the chamber side wall portions relative to one
    another.


CLS 100/255
TXT Apparatus under subclass 252 in which the chamber side wall portions are
    movable relative to each other in a swing or pivotal movement.


CLS 100/256
TXT Apparatus under subclass 214 in which a pressure surface, as it moves to a
    predetermined position, triggers the control of the pressure surface moving
    means to cause the said means to stop moving the surface or to cause
    movement of the surface in the opposite direction.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes presses with limit switches for
    electric motors, limit switch structures not including press structure
    being classified in Class 200, Electricity: Circuit Makers and Breakers, in
    subclass 47.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     for presses having automatic or material triggered control of the
    movable platen actuating means and in which the pressure applied to the
    material causes reversing.

    260+,   for reciprocating platen presses with actuation releasing for
    rebounding or biased return.

    266+,   for reciprocating platen press construction in which a spring or
    weight exerts a return bias on the movable platen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 47.  See (1)
    Note above.


CLS 100/257
TXT Apparatus under subclass 214 in which there is means other than a force
    multiplier by which the locus through which the moving means actuates a
    pressure surface may be relocated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 586, for longitudinally
    adjustable pitmans and connecting rods, per se.

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses, for cutting apparatus
    incorporating means to vary the length or datum position of a tool stroke,
    and particularly subclasses 525 and 527+.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 379, for cooking
    apparatus including two movably connected opposed heating plates and having
    provision for accommodating food materials of different thickness between
    the plates.


CLS 100/258
TXT Apparatus under subclass 214 having means to assure parallelism of the
    approaching pressure surfaces, either as an adjustment which may be made
    while the moving means is not operating, or as plural power paths such that
    motion of one portion of a movable pressure surface necessarily involves a
    uniform motion of another portion of said movable pressure surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for apparatus having a sensing means for controlling the
    parallelism of the platens.


CLS 100/259
TXT Apparatus under subclass 214 having means resiliently receiving impact from
    a reciprocating pressure surface or its moving means during the movement of
    return from the compressing stroke.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 431+, for a metal forging apparatus
    having a yieldable connection in its tool driving means.


CLS 100/260
TXT Apparatus under subclass 214 having means to move a pressure surface in a
    material compressing direction, said means including a force transmitting
    member which, after completion of the compressing stroke, continues to move
    in the same direction as it did when moving the surface through the
    compressing stroke, but has means to discontinue the transmission of moving
    force to free the surface to return under the influence of the compressed
    material or of the continuing pull of a biasing spring or weight.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     for presses having automatic or material triggered control of the
    actuating means by the pressure applied to the material which control
    causes reversing the platen motion.

    256,    for reciprocating platen presses in which the platen trips a
    trigger to stop or reverse the press.

    266+,   for reciprocating platen presses in which a spring or weight biases
    the platen to return from compressing position.


CLS 100/261
TXT Apparatus under subclass 260 in which the force transmitting member acts
    upon a force receiving abutment which is connected to the pressure surface
    and the discontinuance of the transmission of the moving force is due to
    the movement of the force receiving abutment across the line of direction
    of pressure surface motion.


CLS 100/262
TXT Apparatus under subclass 260 in which the discontinuance of the
    transmission of the pressure surface moving force is due to the movement
    out of contact of the teeth of a rack and pinion actuator.


CLS 100/263
TXT Apparatus under subclass 260 in which the discontinuance of the
    transmission of the pressure surface moving force is due to the movement of
    a force transmitting abutment from contact with a passing eccentric surface
    intercepted by and pushing on such abutment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282,    for actuators in which a shaft turned cam forces a linkage joint
    transversely of the compression direction.

    291,    for presses having a cam actuator.


CLS 100/264
TXT Apparatus under subclass 214 in which both of the opposed pressure surfaces
    are caused to move relative to one another and to stationary elements of
    the apparatus by applying moving force to each of the surfaces.

    (1)     Note.  The moving force for one of the surfaces may be springs
    supporting such surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143,    for plural diverse presses in which one of the presses is of the
    type which conveys while pressing, and is loaded by plural transverse
    moving platens usually opposed to one another.

    244,    for box and piston type presses in which there are plural opposing
    pistons movable within the box.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclasses 25+, for smoothing
    machines wherein there are two press platens and it is necessary in
    effecting the smoothing of a textile to move both press platens.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 112, for machines in
    which a textile is squeezed while subjected to a liquid and the squeezer is
    provided with a pair of elements both of which are movable toward and from
    each other to effect the squeezing of the textiles.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 259, for an opposed-plunger metal
    extrusion device, subclass 354, for an opposed ram closed-die forging
    machine, and, subclasses 399+, 403, 411, and 418, for various other
    opposed-ram swaging devices.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclass 1 for resilient press beds.


CLS 100/265
TXT Apparatus under subclass 214 in which the moving means includes a resilient
    member or a weight.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for tampers suspended in silos.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 429+ for means to drive a tool of a
    forging press.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 349+, particularly
    subclass 351, for devices for exerting pressure on the food material during
    a treatment thereof for cooking, such devices usually having a weight or a
    spring to exert the force.

    147,    Coopering, subclass 12 for machines in which the hoops are forced
    upon barrels by the impact of a falling weight.


CLS 100/266
TXT Apparatus under subclass 265 in which the resilient element or weight
    exerts a continuing force against an opposed moving means to return a
    pressure surface from the compressive stroke.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     for presses having automatic or material triggered control of the
    actuating means by pressure applied to the material, said control causing
    reversing of the direction of platen motion.

    256,    for presses of the reciprocating platen type having a platen
    tripped stop or reverse control of the actuation.

    260+,   for reciprocating platen presses with actuation releasing for quick
    return of the platen by rebounding from the elasticity of the material or
    due to a biasing force.


CLS 100/267
TXT Apparatus under subclass 266 in which the resilient element or weight which
    urges the pressing surface to return position is opposed by or acts in
    opposition to a flexible element which actuates the pressure surface on the
    compressive stroke.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278+,   for reciprocating platen presses having a flexible element
    actuating the platen.


CLS 100/268
TXT Apparatus under subclass 265 in which the moving means is a power
    transmitting means including a spring and other substantially nonresilient
    elements, and the power acting upon a moving pressure surface to move it on
    the compression stroke is transmitted through the spring, the spring being
    in compression.


CLS 100/269.01
TXT Fluid pressure actuation:

    Apparatus under subclass 214 in which the means to move an opposed pressure
    surface (i.e., platen) includes an expansible working chamber, and means to
    admit fluid under pressure into the working chamber to cause expansion of
    the working chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170,    for a roll-type concurrent conveying and pressing press having
    fluid pressure means for yieldably mounting at least one of the rolls.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 252 for a pulling or pushing assembling or
    disassembling device having a fluid operator.

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 325+ (and particularly 533+) for an
    hydraulic-type motor not combined with press structure, and see the
    reference to Class 60 in the class definition of Class 100 for a statement
    of the line.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 429+ for means to drive a tool of a
    metal shaping machine, and see the notes thereto.

    83,     Cutting, subclass 137 for cutting apparatus embodying a fluid
    pressure actuated stripper; subclasses 375, 390, 460, and 461 for cutting
    apparatus with fluid pressure actuated work clamp; and subclass 639 for a
    cutting tool reciprocated by fluid pressure means.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclasses for
    expansible chamber motors not combined with press structure, and see the
    reference to Class 91 in the Class Definition of Class 100 for a statement
    of the line.


    147,    Coopering, subclass 9 for a machine having an hydraulic or steam
    press for forcing a hoop upon a barrel.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 212 for a fluid pressure operated sand
    mold press, and subclasses 312+ for a fluid pressure operated metal
    injection machine.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 93+ for a fluid pressure actuated implement (other than a power
    applying element or machine) for applying a pushing or pulling force to an
    object (e.g., jack, extractor, tensioning apparatus, etc.).

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 20+ for a device having fluid means to
    grip work while being treated.  See section VIII under the class definition
    of Class 269 for the line with Class 100.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 63, 99,
    and 130 for a drill press in which the motor making the tool and work move
    relative to one another along the axis of relative rotation is operated by
    fluid pressure.

    417,    Pumps, appropriate subclasses for a pump, per se, for generating
    pressure for a fluid motor actuated press.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, for a rotary expansible
    chamber-type pump, per se.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    subclasses 389+ for a preform reshaping or resizing or vulcanizing means
    utilizing a fluid pressure actuated diaphragm as a press surface, and
    subclass 417 for a press forming apparatus including an expansible
    male-shaping member.

    452,    Butchering, subclass 43 for a sausage stuffer in which a
    reciprocating piston is actuated by a fluid motor.


CLS 100/269.02
TXT Platen moved by elastically deformable pressure member:

    Apparatus under subclass 269.01 wherein the fluid under pressure acts
    against a flexible member (e.g., fluid pressure actuated diaphragm) which
    in turn transfers force to the pressure surface.


CLS 100/269.03
TXT Plural pressure members:

    Apparatus under subclass 269.02 including more than one flexible member.


CLS 100/269.04
TXT Inflatable bag:

    Apparatus under subclass 269.02 wherein the flexible member comprises a
    closed envelope or pouch which expands in response to the pressure fluid.


CLS 100/269.05
TXT Pressure intensifier:

    Apparatus under subclass 269.01 wherein means are provided for pressure
    multiplication in a working chamber in order to amplify the total pressure
    supplied to the platen (e.g., pressure multiplication sleeve, pressure
    accumulator).

    (1)     Note.  The working chamber which provides the pressure
    multiplication feature may be separate from the working chamber in direct
    contact with the platen.


CLS 100/269.06
TXT Multiple or staged driving means:

    Apparatus under subclass 269.01 including plural pressure actuated moving
    means which operate either simultaneously or sequentially on the platen to
    cause it to compress material.

    (1)     Note.  Means acting to move the platen in the direction away from
    the work; e.g., a biasing return spring, is not considered to be a driving
    means.


CLS 100/269.07
TXT Displacement additive:

    Apparatus under subclass 269.06 wherein a driving means transmits movement
    to another driving means so that the total  movement of the platen is
    dependent on the total movement of the plural driving means.


CLS 100/269.08
TXT Pressure additive:

    Apparatus under subclass 269.06 wherein more than one driving means
    transmits force to the platen so that the total force acting on the platen
    represents the sum of the forces of the plural driving means.


CLS 100/269.09
TXT Axially aligned pistons:

    Apparatus under subclass 269.08 wherein more than one of the pressure
    actuated driving means includes a piston, the pistons being aligned along a
    common direction of movement.


CLS 100/269.1
TXT Independently actuated:

    Apparatus under subclass 269.08 including separately actuated means to
    supply pressurized fluid to more than one driving means.


CLS 100/269.11
TXT Pull-down press:

    Apparatus under subclass 269.08 including a press-supporting surface, and
    wherein the pressure actuated driving means are positioned below the
    press-supporting surface and act through connecting tie members to force
    the platen (located above the supporting surface) down toward the
    supporting surface.


CLS 100/269.12
TXT Platen positioning means:

    Apparatus under subclass 269.01 including means to orient a pressure
    surface as it is moved under the force of its driving means or into
    operative connection with its driving means.


CLS 100/269.13
TXT Pull-down press:

    Apparatus under subclass 269.01 including a press-supporting surface, and
    wherein a pressure actuated driving means is positioned below the
    press-supporting surface and acts through connecting tie members to force
    the platen (located above the supporting surface) down toward the
    supporting surface.


CLS 100/269.14
TXT Fluid supply system detail:

    Apparatus under subclass 269.01 wherein significance is attributed to a
    pressure fluid supply system operatively connected to the working chamber.

    (1)     Note. Reciprocating press structure must be claimed along with an
    hydraulic or pneumatic control system to be placed in this subclass.


CLS 100/269.15
TXT Manually operable fluid system:

    Apparatus under subclass 269.14 wherein the pressure fluid supply system is
    provided with means for an operator of the apparatus to manually control
    the fluid supply system.


CLS 100/269.16
TXT Particular valve feature:

    Apparatus under subclass 269.14 wherein significance is attributed to a
    valve in the fluid supply system.


CLS 100/269.17
TXT Frame assembly detail:

    Apparatus under subclass 269.01 wherein significance is attributed to
    structure supporting the working chamber.

    (1)     Note.  The structure may provide an operative connection between
    the working chamber and a safety mechanism.


CLS 100/269.18
TXT Rod, piston, or cylinder detail:

    Apparatus under subclass 269.01 wherein significance is attributed to the
    structure of a piston-and-cylinder-type working chamber element (i.e., the
    piston, piston rod, or pressure cylinder).


CLS 100/269.19
TXT Cylinder position adjustment:

    Apparatus under subclass 269.18 wherein means are provided to move the
    pressure cylinder location.


CLS 100/269.2
TXT Platen pivotally connected to piston or rod:

    Apparatus under subclass 269.18 wherein the piston or piston rod has an
    articulate connection to a pressure surface.


CLS 100/269.21
TXT Gasket or packing around piston:

    Apparatus under subclass 269.18 including a sealing means surrounding the
    piston which is intended to act between the piston and pressure cylinder
    wall.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, subclasses 434+ for a piston ring or
    piston ring expander or seat therefor, or subclasses 634+ for a flexible
    sleeve, boot, or diaphragm.


CLS 100/270
TXT Apparatus under subclass 269.01 in which there is in addition to the
    expansible chamber operating means some means for mechanically causing the
    movable pressure surface to act in the compressing direction.


CLS 100/271
TXT Apparatus under subclass 270 in which the means for mechanically causing
    movement of the pressure surface includes means for increasing the
    magnitude of the input force as it is transmitted to the pressing surface.


CLS 100/272
TXT Apparatus under subclass 271 in which the means for increasing the
    magnitude of the input force includes structure in which the input force is
    applied to a joint between links.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281+,   for presses having toggle actuating means.


CLS 100/273
TXT Apparatus under subclass 214 in which the moving means includes plural
    force transmission lines and the rate of movement of one pressure surface
    relative to another or the magnitude of the force applied to move one
    surface relative to another may be changed by employing one force
    transmission line rather than another.

    (1)     Note.  This selection is as to movement in one direction.


CLS 100/274
TXT Apparatus under subclass 214 in which the moving means includes means
    reacting against a fixed abutment to move a pressure surface relative
    thereto by which the surface is caused to move in a single direction by
    successive force inputs at spaced time intervals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219,    for presses having means to lock the platens in compression
    position where such means are not a part of the actuating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclass 17, for
    drilling machines having a drill feed operated by the motor which rotates
    the drill and in which the transmission of the drive from the drill-spindle
    to the feeding means is by successive impulses with intervening pauses
    while the spindle rotates continuously.


CLS 100/275
TXT Apparatus under subclass 274 in which there are a plurality of means
    reacting against fixed abutment means and through each of which a
    successive timed spaced input of force may be made.


CLS 100/276
TXT Apparatus under subclass 275 in which the plurality of means acting to move
    the pressure surface are spaced by the length of an elongated member
    extending across the press and moving with the pressure surface and act
    upon the ends of such member to move it and the pressure surface.


CLS 100/277
TXT Apparatus under subclass 275 in which the several reacting means are joined
    to a common member so that the input of force through one necessarily
    occurs while there is no input through the other.


CLS 100/278
TXT Apparatus under subclass 214 in which the moving means includes means
    reacting against a fixed abutment to move a pressure surface relative
    thereto, which reacting means includes a rope, chain, or filament which is
    longitudinally tensioned while moving the platen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212,    for presses in which the pressure surface is a circumferentially
    tightened band such as a rope or strand.

    267,    for presses having a return biasing member such as a resilient
    element or a weight which acts counter to a flexible compression actuator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 440, for a forging press in which a drop
    hammer is retracted by a flexible strap.


CLS 100/279
TXT Apparatus under subclass 278 in which the reacting means is wound up on a
    cylinder or conical member which changes in radius for successive winds of
    the reacting means.


CLS 100/280
TXT Devices under subclass 214 in which the moving means includes some
    mechanical device interposed between a fixed abutment and a movable
    pressure surface for moving the surface and for increasing the pressure
    effect or output applied to the surface as a result of the force put into
    the moving means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 429+, for means to drive a tool of a
    metal shaping press.


CLS 100/281
TXT Apparatus under subclass 280 in which the mechanical device includes
    connected links interposed between the fixed abutment and the movable
    pressure surface, movement of the connection between the links in a
    direction transverse to the direction of movement of the pressure surface
    resulting in an increase of the input force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272,    for reciprocating platen presses in which a fluid pressure
    actuating means is combined with toggle means to actuate a platen.


CLS 100/282
TXT Apparatus under subclass 281 in which the connection is between a pitman
    and/or connecting rod and a cam or crank, which cam or crank is actuated in
    revolution by a shaft to which the cam or crank is attached.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263,    for presses in which the actuation is released for rebounding or
    biased return by an interruption in a rotated camming actuating surface.

    291+,   for reciprocating platen presses in which a cam or wedge acts
    directly on a platen to move it.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses, for a rotary shaft-driven cutting
    device (often including a shaft-driven work clamp or work feed gripper)
    usually by cam or crank connection.


CLS 100/283
TXT Apparatus under subclass 281 in which the connection is between a lever and
    a link or pitman, with the leverage on the lever causing the connection to
    move transversely to the direction of movement of the pressure surface.


CLS 100/284
TXT Apparatus under subclass 283 in which the leverage is applied to the lever
    by a toothed gear sector or through a toothed gear sector which is carried
    by the lever.


CLS 100/285
TXT Apparatus under subclass 283 in which there are several lever and link
    combinations which cooperate to move the same pressure surface.


CLS 100/286
TXT Apparatus under subclass 281 having plural sets of connected links the
    input force in each case being applied at the point of connection to cause
    the links to straighten or collapse whereby a compressive action is exerted
    on a pressure surface.


CLS 100/287
TXT Apparatus under subclass 286 in which the several connections are
    simultaneously moved by screw and nut means positioned between and joining
    the connections.


CLS 100/288
TXT Apparatus under subclass 280 in which the mechanical device includes a
    pinion or toothed segment and a toothed bar, the teeth of which engage
    those of the pinion or segment so that the movable pressure surface may be
    made to move relative to the fixed abutment by the rotation of the pinion
    or toothed segment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 66, 99
    and 135 for drill presses having feeding mechanism of the rack and pinion
    type.


CLS 100/289
TXT Apparatus under subclass 280 in which the mechanical device includes an
    internally screw threaded member and an externally screw threaded shaft
    with the member extending around the shaft and the screw threads of the
    shaft and member interengaging, the pressure surface being made to move
    relative to the fixed abutment by the relative rotation of the shaft and
    member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230,    for reciprocating platen presses having a central strain rod
    carrying the reaction to the compacting force, the rod usually being in the
    form of a screw threaded actuator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 463, for cutting apparatus including a work clamp
    jaw actuated by self-locking drive means (e.g., screw), and, subclass 631,
    for a screw-actuated reciprocating tool.

    147,    Coopering, subclass 11, for machines which force hoops upon barrels
    by means of screw operated pressing or driving means.

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 240+, for patents to a device with
    relatively movable jaws, actuated by screw-nut means, to grip work while
    being treated.  See section VIII under the class definition of Class 269
    for the line with Class 100.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 64, 100+
    and 129+, for drill presses having screw and nut feeding mechanism.


CLS 100/290
TXT Apparatus under subclass 289 having plural pairs of internally screw
    threaded members and externally screw threaded shafts for moving the same
    movable pressure surface.


CLS 100/291
TXT Apparatus under subclass 280 in which the mechanical device includes either
    a body having a continuous surface of gradually increasing radius or a body
    of diverging opposed surfaces, movement of the movable pressure surface
    being caused by movement of the body transversely of the direction of
    compressing motion and between the pressure surface and a fixed abutment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263,    for reciprocating platen presses in which the actuation of the
    platen is by a camming movement and the camming surface is interrupted to
    allow quick release of the platen for return by rebound of the material or
    by a biasing means.

    282,    for reciprocating platen presses in which a shaft turned cam is
    used to actuate a pitman connected to the platen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    147,    Coopering, subclass 8 for machines which force hoops upon barrels
    by means of a cam operated pressing or driving means.


CLS 100/292
TXT Apparatus under subclass 291 in which a member of continuously varying
    radius is moved between the pressure surface and a fixed abutment by
    swinging or rotating it relative to the abutment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 49, 50,
    64, 100+, and 129+, for drill presses having cam driven feeding means.


CLS 100/293
TXT Apparatus under subclass 280 in which the mechanical device includes a
    lever mounted so the point about which it moves does not change position
    relative to the fixed abutment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 604, 605+, 625, 630, and 633+, for a cutting
    tool actuated by toggle or fixed-axis lever, and appropriate subclasses
    referring in their titles to work clamps or work feed grippers, for clamp
    or gripper jaws variously actuated.

    147,    Coopering, subclass 10 for machines which force hoops upon barrels
    by means of lever or crank gearing operated driving means.


CLS 100/294
TXT Apparatus under subclass 280 in which the mechanical device includes more
    than one lever or insertable strut connected to move concurrently in
    opposite directions to move the same movable pressure surface.


CLS 100/295
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having a pressure surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    for presses with drain means for the expressed liquids in which the
    drain is through or along a movable pressure surface of the piston or
    platen type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclass 38, for dies and formers for shoe
    sole laying and leveling machines, and, subclasses 133+, for shoe making
    lasts.

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclasses 74+, for flat irons,
    and, subclasses 103+, for ironing boards.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 256+, for glass sheet rolling means
    coacting with a planar platen, and, subclasses 305+, for a glass press
    molding machine.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 129+, for structure
    of nonrotary squeezers, per se, that is the squeezing elements which
    cooperate with the bed.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 462+, for a metal shaping tool or die,
    per se, usable with the apparatus provided for in Class 72.

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses, including in particular subclasses
    which refer to work clamping means, and, subclasses 531+, (clicker die
    press).

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclasses for a cylinder
    and piston type expansible chamber device, and, particularly subclasses
    172+, for piston structure.

    101,    Printing, subclasses 368+, for printing members.

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, appropriate subclasses for
    a horizontal planar surface.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, particularly,
    subclasses 169.2 and 195, for comminutors having a pressure surface.

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 257+, for patents specific to the jaw
    features of a work holder.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 394+, for a preform reshaping, resizing or vulcanizing means
    comprising coacting pressure surfaces, subclasses 406+, for opposed press
    members comprising a forming apparatus, and, subclasses 470+, for a shaping
    surface, per se; see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 100/296
TXT Apparatus under subclass 295 in which there are plural pressure surfaces
    for acting on opposite sides of material and such surfaces are joined
    together by a flexible means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for plural presses of the stacked box or plate type having flexibly
    connected plates and also having drain means.

    202,    for plural presses of the stacked box or plate type having plates
    hinged to one another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 372+ for cooking means
    comprising opposed heated mold surfaces (e.g., waffle iron, etc.).

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 408 for opposed registering, coacting mold cavities; see the
    search notes thereunder.


CLS 100/297
TXT Apparatus under subclass 295 in which the pressure surface is an auxiliary
    member which is insertable between the material compacted and a solid
    pressing surface, the auxiliary member being permeable by liquids.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113+,   for auxiliary members in the form of plates which are interposed
    between increments of material to form a stack which is positioned between
    the platens of a press, said plates having liquid draining means.

    122+,   for press structures including textile containing pressure surfaces.


CLS 100/298
TXT Apparatus under the class definition for removing a covering of woven
    fabric from material which has been compressed within the covering.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    for apparatus for enfolding a cloth about the material compacted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, appropriate subclasses, for methods and apparatus
    for closing packages and portable receptacles, not elsewhere provided for,
    Class 53 being the generic and residual locus of patents relating to such
    subject matter.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    584 for delaminating devices, per se.


CLS 100/299
TXT Apparatus under the class definition and not provided for in the preceding
    subclasses.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass, among other things are pressing
    apparatus in which a rotating helical member packs material into a
    receptacle, the receptacle not being a portable receptacle, but an element
    of a press.  For similar devices in which the receptacle is a portable
    receptacle, see Class 141, Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or
    Receiver Coacting Means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    and see the Note above.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 79+, for a heavy plastic kneading or mixing
    mill comprising a through-pass screw conveyor.


CLS 100/300
TXT Press for a brake lining:

    Apparatus under subclass 92 specifically designed to apply a compressive
    force for the purpose of placing a portion of a member intended to
    frictionally engage a relatively moving member to reduce or terminate such
    relative movement (i.e., a brake pad) onto the structure intended to
    support that member (i.e., onto a brake shoe or brake assembly).

    (1)     Note. Class 100 takes a brake press for a lining if it includes
    treating means of the type found in subclass 92. The class also includes a
    laminating press for a brake lining having heating, cooling, or drying
    means if the adhesive applying means is only nominally recited.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 233 for an apparatus for (a) bringing a
    brake lining from a remote location into positional relationship with the
    brake shoe to which it is to be assembled, (b) stretching or bending a
    brake lining into position on a brake shoe, (c) holding a brake lining on a
    brake shoe to facilitate securement of the lining to the shoe, or (d) for
    applying a fastener to the previously assembled lining and shoe to secure
    the lining to the shoe, provided the device does not include means to
    subject the material compacted to additional treatment that includes means
    for changing the temperature or reducing the moisture content of the
    material compacted.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    580+ for a device for adhesively bonding a brake lining to a brake shoe
    comprising a specialized laminating device and a press, and wherein the
    laminating feature of the device is more than nominally recited. For
    example a device found in subclasses 580+ includes a press having (a) a
    relieved or discontinuous surface for the purpose of joining laminae in a
    configured pattern or in a hit-miss manner or (b) a platen wherein a
    limited portion only of the press surface area is heated so that a
    restricted portion only of the pressed area is joined, etc.

    188,    Brakes, for a device for retarding the motion of or for stopping a
    machine by friction, by positive engagement of elements, or by the internal
    resistance of a fluid or a field of force, especially subclasses 250+ for a
    brake shoe with or without a brake lining.

    269,    Work Holders, for the residual locus for a patent to a device which
    during a work treating operation contacts a workpiece for the purpose of
    (a) supporting the work against the force of gravity or (b) preventing
    movement of the work in a particular direction or in all directions while,
    as disclosed, such work is supported against the force of gravity or (c)
    providing a surface juxtaposed to the work for constraining the motion of a
    tool during its performance of such a work treating operation. However, the
    work holders of Class 269 do not include means to modify or treat the
    material engaged; this combination is found in Class 100, subclasses 92+.


CLS 100/301
TXT Electric heater:

    Apparatus under subclass 300 including means to increase the temperature of
    the brake pad, brake shoe, brake assembly, or press and wherein the means
    to increase the temperature is provided through the conversion of
    electrical energy to thermal energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    580+ for a device for adhesively bonding a brake lining to a brake shoe
    comprising more than a mere press, in particular note indented subclasses
    583.7 and 583.9 for a device that is heated electrically.

    219,    Electric Heating, for the generic class for electric heating
    devices, especially subclasses 243+ for an electrical heating means
    combined with a press (e.g., electrically heater iron, etc.) where no
    significant structural details of the press or article being pressed is
    claimed; also see subclasses 600+ for inductive heating, subclasses 678+
    for microwave heating, subclasses 764+ for capacitive dielectric heating,
    subclasses 50+ and 149+ for metal heating by electricity combined with
    shaping, where the shaping may be by means of dies, and subclasses 200+ for
    miscellaneous electric heaters.


CLS 100/302
TXT Plural diverse presses:

    Apparatus under subclass 92 having at least two means for subjecting the
    material to compressive force which means are independent of each other,
    and at least one of which includes a pressing surface which differs in kind
    from those of at least one other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137+,   for an apparatus having plural diverse presses without the heating,
    cooling, or drying means.


CLS 100/303
TXT In press material handling train:

    Apparatus under subclass 92 including means to convey the material to the
    means for subjecting the material to compressive force, or means to remove
    the material from the means for subjecting the material to compressive
    force, wherein the heating, cooling, or drying means is so arranged as to
    act on the material during its movement to or from the means for subjecting
    the material to compressive force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for a press having means to introduce liquid or steam into contact
    with the material while it is moving to or through the press.

    95+,    for a press having means to cut, break, pierce, or comminute the
    material in a press material handling train.


CLS 100/304
TXT In feed train:

    Apparatus under subclass 303 including means to convey the material to the
    means for subjecting the material to compressive force, and wherein the
    heating, cooling, or drying means is arranged to act on the material during
    its movement to the means for subjecting the material to compressive force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for a press having means to introduce liquid or steam into contact
    with the material while it is moving to or through the press.

    96+,    for a press having means to cut, break, pierce, or comminute the
    material in the means for subjecting the material to compressive force
    material feed train.


CLS 100/305
TXT In press:

    Apparatus under subclass 92 wherein the means for changing the temperature
    or reducing the moisture content is so arranged that the treatment occurs
    in the means for subjecting the material to compressive force or during the
    compacting operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for a method of pressing which includes subjecting the material to
    a change in temperature.

    74,     for a device for adding steam to the material in the means for
    subjecting the material to compressive force.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 70 for an
    apparatus for removing liquid from material in which there are two or more
    distinct means for removing the liquid by applying mechanical pressure to
    the solid material treated.

    53,     Package Making, subclass 388 for a press for maintaining package
    flaps or seams under pressure for a sufficient time to (a) effect bonding
    or (b) set or dry the cover material; or having means to apply or remove
    heat from the flaps or seams while held in the device.

    62,     Refrigeration, for an apparatus for removing heat from a substance
    by a change of phase of the coolant (i.e., refrigerant) therein, especially
    subclass 341 for a device including a shaping press for making a congealed
    product.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 319 for a glass press molding
    apparatus combined with apparatus heating or cooling means.

    99,     Foods and Beverages: Apparatus, subclasses 372+ for  cooking
    apparatus having two imperforate movably connected heated plates or molds
    which confine and contact food material there between including a waffle
    iron or sandwich grill.

    101,    Printing, subclasses 3.1+ entitled "hot die" for an embossing or
    penetrating press in which there is means to heat a die performing a
    printing operation.

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 223 for an incinerator having a press.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical  Manufacture, for
    heated presses combined with other laminating features; see especially
    subclasses 583.1+ for a heated press unique to laminating.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, for a paper making operation
    that may involve a pressing step; especially subclass 56 for a chemical
    process involving squeezing or compressing, subclasses 205+ for the
    subsequent pressure treatment of a formed web, subclasses 224+ for a
    process of treating an article by pressure, subclass 305 for the
    combination of a mold for forming a paper article combined with pressing
    means, and subclasses 358+ for a press combined with a felt.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 600+ for inductive heating, subclasses
    678+ for microwave heating, and subclasses 764+ for capacitive dielectric
    heating; subclasses 50+ and 149+ for metal heating by electricity, combined
    with shaping, where the shaping may be by means of a die; and subclasses
    200+ for a miscellaneous electric heater.

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 78 for a static mold having electrical
    heating means as part thereof and subclass 79 for a static mold with means
    within the mold body to confine a heat exchange medium.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 79+, 156.1+, and 318+ for a screw-type
    conveyor or agitator and subclasses 144+ for heating and cooling means in
    an agitator.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    subclasses 200+ for a mixing or kneading device upstream of a plastic or
    article former, especially subclass 208 wherein the kneading device is in
    the form of a helix.

    432,    Heating, for the residual class for apparatus for or related method
    generating of heat and its application to materials, where the heat
    generating means is more than nominally recited.


CLS 100/306
TXT Endless conveyor-type press:

    Apparatus under subclass 305 wherein the means to subject the material to a
    compressive force includes a pliable movable web or belt supported at its
    extremities by rollerlike members, against which the material is pressed
    during the movement of the material by the web or belt from one position to
    another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151+,   for additional endless conveyor-type presses without heating,
    cooling or drying means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 70 for an
    apparatus for removing liquid from material in which there are two or more
    distinct means for removing the liquid by applying mechanical pressure to
    the solid material treated.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, for a paper making operation
    that may involve a pressing step; especially subclass 56 for a chemical
    process involving squeezing or compressing, subclasses 205+ for the
    subsequent pressure treatment of a formed web, subclasses 224+ for a
    process of treating an article by pressure, subclass 305 for the
    combination of a mold for forming a paper article combined with pressing
    means, and subclasses 358.1+ for a press combined with a felt.


CLS 100/307
TXT Plural endless conveyor presses:

    Apparatus under subclass 306 wherein the means for subjecting the material
    to compressive force includes at least two traveling webs arranged in
    series or in parallel and acting on the material independently of each
    other.

    (1)     Note. Only one of the two presses needs to have a temperature
    conditioning means.


CLS 100/308
TXT Means to control temperature:

    Apparatus under subclass 306 including means to modify the temperature at
    which the material is treated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, the generic class for an electric heating device,
    especially subclasses 243+ for an electrical heating means combined with a
    press (e.g., electrically heated iron, etc.) where no significant
    structural details of the press or article being pressed are claimed.


CLS 100/309
TXT Multiple temperature treating zones:

    Apparatus under subclass 306 wherein more than one distinct temperature
    conditioning area is provided.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, the generic class for an electric heating device,
    especially subclasses 243+ for an electrical heating means combined with a
    press (e.g., an electrically heated iron, etc.) where no significant
    structural details of the press or article being pressed are claimed.


CLS 100/310
TXT Having cooling:

    Apparatus under subclass 309 wherein at least one of the distinct
    temperature conditioning areas is designed to reduce the temperature of the
    material being treated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, for an apparatus for removing heat from a substance
    by a change of phase of the coolant or refrigerant, especially subclass 341
    for a device for making a congealed product having a shaping press.


CLS 100/311
TXT Platen in thermal contact with endless conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 306 further including a temperature conditioned
    planar surface provided adjacent to the continuous web or belt to transfer
    heat either to or from the web or belt.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, the generic class for an electric heating device,
    especially subclasses 243+ for an electrical heating means combined with a
    press (e.g., an electrically heated iron, etc.) where no significant
    structural details of the press or article being pressed are claimed.


CLS 100/312
TXT Having cooling:

    Apparatus under subclass 311 wherein the device includes means to reduce
    the thermal level of the web.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, for an apparatus for removing heat from a substance
    by a change of phase of the coolant or refrigerant, especially subclass 341
    for a device for making a congealed product having a shaping press.


CLS 100/313
TXT Drum in thermal contact with endless conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 306 including a temperature conditioned roller
    provided adjacent to the continuous web or belt to transfer heat from or to
    the web or belt.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, the generic class for an electric heating device,
    especially subclasses 243+ for an electrical heating means combined with a
    press (e.g., an electrically heater iron, etc.) where no significant
    structural details of the press or article being pressed are claimed.


CLS 100/314
TXT Having cooling:

    Apparatus under subclass 313 wherein the device includes means to transfer
    heat from the web or belt.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, for an apparatus for removing heat from a substance
    by a change of phase of the coolant or refrigerant, especially subclass 341
    for a device for making a congealed product having a shaping press.


CLS 100/315
TXT Reciprocating platen-type press:

    Apparatus under subclass 305 wherein the means for subjecting the material
    to compressive force includes a material contacting rigid planar surface
    and means to move the rigid planar surface towards and away from the
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    214+,   for a reciprocating press without the heating, cooling, or drying
    means.

    295,    for a platen or pressure surface.

    300+,   for a platen press for a brake assembly.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, for an apparatus for removing heat from a substance
    by a change of phase of the coolant or refrigerant, especially subclass 341
    for a device for making a congealed product having a shaping press.

    99,     Foods and Beverages: Apparatus, subclasses 372+ for  cooking
    apparatus having two imperforate movably connected heated plates or mold
    which confine and contact food material there between including waffle
    irons and sandwich grills.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 256.1+ for a wood bending press, especially
    subclasses 256.3+ for a wood bending machine which includes a platen press
    and a heating device for drying the wood in its bent form.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    498 for a laminating device having cooling means and  subclasses 580+ for a
    device for adhesively bonding comprising a specialized laminating press,
    especially subclasses 583.3 and 583.9+ for a platen press.

    219,    Electric Heating, the generic class for electric heating devices,
    especially subclasses 243+ for an electrical heating means combined with a
    nominal press (e.g., electrically heated iron, etc.) where no significant
    structural details of the press or article being pressed are claimed.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    subclasses 200+ for a mixing or kneading device upstream of a plastic or
    article former, especially subclass 208 wherein the kneading device is in
    the form of a helix.


CLS 100/316
TXT Piston and box type:

    Apparatus under subclass 315 including a material enclosing housing,
    wherein the rigid planar surface is movable within the confines of a
    housing to compress the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240+,   for a piston and box type press, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating; Apparatus,
    subclasses 200+ for a mixing or kneading device upstream of a plastic or
    article former.


CLS 100/317
TXT Heating or cooling element in box wall:

    Apparatus under subclass 316 wherein the treating means includes means to
    heat or cool the material, wherein the means to heat or cool the material
    is located within the confines of the housing wall.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, for an apparatus for removing heat from a substance
    by a change of phase of the coolant or refrigerant, especially subclass 341
    for a device for making a congealed product having a shaping press.

    219,    Electric Heating, the generic class for an electric heating device,
    especially subclasses 243+ for an electrical heating means combined with a
    nominal press (e.g., electrically heated iron, etc.) where no significant
    structural details of the press or article being pressed are claimed.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 144+ for an agitator having heating and
    cooling means, especially subclass 149 wherein the heating or cooling
    material is located in the housing wall.


CLS 100/318
TXT Electric heater:

    Apparatus under subclass 317 wherein the treating means includes means to
    raise the temperature of the material, wherein the means for increasing the
    temperature is provided through the conversion of electrical energy to
    thermal energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    498 for a laminating device having cooling means and subclasses 580+ for a
    device for adhesively bonding comprising a specialized press (i.e., a press
    that is not of general utility), especially subclasses 583.3 and 583.9+ for
    a platen press.

    219,    Electric Heating, the generic class for an electric heating device,
    especially subclasses 243+ for an electrical heating means combined with a
    press (e.g., electrically heated iron, etc.) where no significant
    structural details of the press or article being pressed are claimed.


CLS 100/319
TXT Means to control temperature:

    Apparatus under subclass 315 including means to modify the temperature at
    which the material is treated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, the generic class for an electric heating device,
    especially subclasses 243+ for an electrical heating means combined with a
    press (e.g., electrically heated iron, etc.) where no significant
    structural details of the press or article being pressed is claimed.


CLS 100/320
TXT Electric heater:

    Apparatus under subclass 315 wherein the means for changing the temperature
    of  the material includes means to increase the temperature and wherein the
    means for increasing the temperature is provided through the conversion of
    electrical energy to thermal energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    318,    for an electric heater associated with a piston and box type press.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,  subclass
    498 for a laminating device having cooling means and subclasses 580+ for a
    device for adhesively bonding comprising a specialized laminating press
    (i.e., a press that is not of general utility), especially subclasses 583.3
    and 583.9+ for a platen press.

    219,    Electric Heating, the generic class for an electric heating device,
    especially subclasses 243+ for an electrical heating means combined with a
    press (e.g., electrically heated iron, etc.) where no significant
    structural details of the press or article being pressed are claimed.


CLS 100/321
TXT Platen having particular thermally conductive feature:

    Apparatus under subclass 315 wherein the planar surface has at least one
    layer which is particular designed to enhance heat transfer between the
    material being pressed and the means for subjecting the material to
    compressive force surface.


CLS 100/322
TXT Temperature modulating insert:

    Apparatus under subclass 315 wherein heat transfer occurs between a member
    that is not a pressure surface, but that is within the means for subjecting
    the material to compressive force apparatus, and the material being pressed
    (e.g., a separate heated platen from the pressure platen which provides
    heat transfer between the separate heated platen and either of the means
    for subjecting the material to compressive force platen or the material
    being pressed).


CLS 100/323
TXT Press apparatus thermally insulated from heating/cooling means:

    Apparatus under subclass 315 wherein the means for subjecting the material
    to compressive force is specifically provided with means (e.g., radiating
    fins, insulated layer or platen, etc.) which minimizes the effect of the
    temperature change on the press apparatus.


CLS 100/324
TXT Plural reciprocating platens:

    Apparatus under subclass 315 wherein more than one planar pressure surface
    is movable.


CLS 100/325
TXT Heating or cooling element in platen:

    Apparatus under subclass 324 wherein the means for changing the temperature
    is provided within a platen, such that the platen is temperature
    conditioned internally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, for an apparatus for removing heat from a substance
    by a change of phase of the coolant or refrigerant, especially subclass 341
    for a device for making a congealed product having a shaping press.

    219,    Electric Heating, the generic class for electric heating device,
    especially subclasses 243+ for an electrical heating means combined with a
    press (e.g., electrically heated iron, etc.) where no significant
    structural details of the press or article being pressed are claimed.


CLS 100/326
TXT Heating or cooling element in platen:

    Apparatus under subclass 315 wherein the means for changing the temperature
    is provided within a platen, such that the platen is temperature
    conditioned internally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, for an apparatus for removing heat from a substance
    by a change of phase of the coolant or refrigerant, especially subclass 341
    for a device for making a congealed product having a shaping press.

    219,    Electric Heating, the generic class for an electric heating device,
    especially subclasses 243+ for an electrical heating means combined with a
    press (e.g., electrically heated iron, etc.) where no significant
    structural details of the press or article being pressed are claimed.


CLS 100/327
TXT Roll-type press:

    Apparatus under subclass 305 wherein the means for subjecting the material
    to compressive force is a rotatable cylinder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155+, for a roll-type press without heating, cooling, or drying means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 108+ for a
    dryer-type hollow drum or receptacle member through, over, by, or in which
    the material is carried to be treated and rotating about an axis.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    498 for a laminating device with cooling means and subclasses 580+ for a
    device for adhesively bonding an article comprising a specialized
    laminating press, especially subclass 555 for a laminating press having a
    continuous roller feed, subclass 582 for a rotary-type laminating press,
    and subclasses 583.1+ for a heated laminating press.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, for a paper making operation
    that may involve a pressing step; especially subclass 56 for a chemical
    process involving squeezing or compression, subclasses 205+ for the
    subsequent pressure treatment of a formed web, subclasses 224+ for a
    process of treating an article by pressure, subclass 305 for the
    combination of a mold for forming a paper article combined with pressing
    means, and subclasses 358.1+, 358.5, and 360.2 for a press and felt
    combination.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 89+ for a rotary drum-type heat exchanger.

    219,    Electric Heating, the generic class for an electric heating device,
    especially subclasses 243+ for an electrical heating means combined with a
    press (e.g., electrically heated iron, etc.) where no significant
    structural details of the press or article being pressed are claimed.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 79+, 156.1+, and 318+ for a screw-type
    conveyor or agitator and subclasses 144+ for heating and cooling means in
    an agitator.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    subclass 363 for a Class 425 roll-type press.

    432,    Heating, for the residual class for apparatus or related method for
    the generation of heat and its application to materials, where the heat
    generating means is more than nominally recited, especially subclasses 60
    and 228 for the above combined with a roll.

    492,    Roll or Roller, the generic class for cylindrical work contacting
    surfaces, especially subclass 46 for a roll having heat transfer means.


CLS 100/328
TXT Electric heater:

    Apparatus under subclass 327  wherein the means for changing the
    temperature includes means to raise the temperature of the material and
    wherein the means for increasing the temperature is provided through the
    conversion of electrical energy to thermal energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, the generic class for an electric heating device,
    especially subclasses 243+ for an electrical heating means combined with a
    press (e.g., electrically heater iron, etc.) where no significant
    structural details of the press or article being pressed are claimed,
    especially subclasses 469+ wherein the device includes a cylinder or roll.


CLS 100/329
TXT Means to independently heat or cool different sections of roll:

    Apparatus under subclass 327 wherein the means for changing the temperature
    is provided at multiple locations, such that one section of a pressure roll
    may be conditioned to a different temperature than another section of the
    same roll.


CLS 100/330
TXT Roll surface has particular thermally conductive feature:

    Apparatus under subclass 327 wherein the cylinder surface has a layer or
    other feature particularly designed to enhance heat transfer between the
    material being pressed and the means for subjecting the material to
    compressive force surface.


CLS 100/331
TXT Plural stage or pass:

    Apparatus under subclass 327 wherein more than one cylindrical pressure
    surface is temperature conditioned.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161+,   for a plural stage or pass roller-type press without temperature
    conditioning means.


CLS 100/332
TXT Roll temperature conditioning means is external of roll, but in direct
    temperature conditioning contact with roll:

    Apparatus under subclass 327 wherein the means for changing the temperature
    is placed immediately adjacent to the cylindrical pressure surface.

    (1)     Note. A roll press which is temperature conditioned within a heated
    or cooled container (e.g., an oven or cooler) is not considered direct
    temperature conditioning contact with the means for subjecting the material
    to compressive force roll.


CLS 100/333
TXT Gas (e.g., steam):

    Apparatus under subclass 332 wherein heat transfer fluid is conveyed to the
    material in a vapor state.


CLS 100/334
TXT Roll heated or cooled internally:

    Apparatus under subclass 327 wherein the means for changing the temperature
    is provided within a pressure roll.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, for an apparatus for removing heat from a substance
    by a change of phase of the coolant or refrigerant, especially subclass 341
    for a device for making a congealed product having a shaping press.

    219,    Electric Heating, the generic class for an electric heating device,
    especially subclasses 243+ for an electrical heating means combined with a
    press (e.g., electrically heated iron, etc.) where no significant
    structural details of the press or article being pressed are claimed.


CLS 100/335
TXT Temperature conditioning fluid flow passage in roll surface:

    Apparatus under subclass 334 wherein the means for changing the temperature
    includes a heated or cooled gas or liquid which is passed through a conduit
    in the outer wall of the means for subjecting the material to compressive
    force roll in order to provide heat transfer between the roll and the
    material being pressed.


CLS 100/336
TXT Roll core has a temperature conditioning fluid flow passage:

    Apparatus under subclass 334 wherein the means for changing the temperature
    includes a heated or cooled gas or liquid which is passed through a conduit
    within the hollow center of the means for subjecting the material to
    compressive force roll in order to provide heat transfer between the roll
    and the material being pressed.


CLS 100/337
TXT Helix-type press:

    Apparatus under subclass 305 wherein the means for subjecting the material
    to compressive force surface is a rotating member having a fin or fins
    extending spirally about and along the axis of rotation and the material is
    compressed by being forced by the forwarding movement through a constricted
    passage of  cross section smaller than that of the uncompressed material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145,    for a helix-type press, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 87 for a screw-type heat exchanger.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 236+ for helical rotary dispenser.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 79+, 156.1+, and 318+ for a screw-type
    conveyor or agitator and subclasses 144+ for heating and cooling means in
    an agitator.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    subclasses 200+ for a mixing or kneading device upstream of a plastic or
    article former, especially subclass 208 wherein the kneading device is in
    the form of a helix.

    432,    Heating, for the residual class for apparatus or a related method
    for the generation of heat and its application to material, where the heat
    generating means is more than nominally recited.


CLS 100/338
TXT Plural helices:

    Apparatus under subclass 337 including at least two helical-type presses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 83+ and 156.2  for an agitator having plural
    screws.


CLS 100/339
TXT Temperature conditioning means in chamber wall or jacket:

    Apparatus under subclass 337 including an outer housing, wherein the means
    for changing the temperature is provided within the outer housing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    366,    Agitating, subclass 149 for a heating or cooling fluid in a stirrer
    jacket.


CLS 100/340
TXT Temperature conditioning means within helix:

    Apparatus under subclass 337 including a hollow center, wherein the means
    for changing the temperature is provided within the hollow center.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    366,    Agitating, subclass 147 for a heating or cooling element in a
    stirrer.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS

    The following subclasses comprise collections of cross-reference copies of
    patents pertaining to various specified aspects of the pressing art, the
    original copies of which are classified in the subclasses above or
    elsewhere.  Nonpatent disclosures may also be found in these subclasses.
    Disclosures are placed in these subclasses for their value as references
    and as leads to appropriate main or secondary fields of search without
    regard to their original classification or their claimed subject matter.
    The disclosures found in the following subclasses are examples, only, of
    the indicated subject matter, and in no instance do they represent the
    entire extent of the prior art.


CLS 100/901
TXT SCRAP AUTO BODY CRUSHERS:

    Subject matter pertaining to the compressing of scrap automobile bodies to
    form bales.


CLS 100/902
TXT CAN CRUSHERS:

    Subject matter pertaining to the crushing of empty cans between rollers or
    reciprocating platens.


CLS 100/903
TXT PELLETERS:

    Subject matter pertaining to the compressing of material into pellet form.


CLS 100/904
TXT Screw:

    Subject matter under subclass 903 using a screw device to make pellets.


CLS 100/905
TXT Inner roll:

    Subject matter under subclass 903 using an inner roll within a perforated
    drum to form pellets.


CLS 100/906
TXT Reciprocating:

    Subject matter under subclass 903 using a reciprocating ram to form pellets.


CLS 100/907
TXT Rotary:

    Subject matter under subclass 903 using two rotary bodies to form pellets.


CLS 100/908
TXT Series rolls:

    Subject matter under subclass 903 using a series of rolls to form pellets.


CLS 100/909
TXT Adjustable die openings:

    Subject matter under subclass 903 using apparatus having adjustable die
    openings to form pellets.


CLS 100/910
TXT MEAT:

    Subject matter pertaining to the compressing of meat.


CLS 100/911
TXT JET OR EXPLOSIVE:

    Subject matter pertaining to the use of an explosive or jet device as a
    power source for reciprocating type presses.


CLS 100/912
TXT BINDER CONTAINERS:

    Subject matter comprising twine binder containers used with hay balers.


CLS 100/913
TXT TRUSS PRESSES:

    Subject matter comprising pressing devices for forming wooden roof trusses.


CLS 100/914
TXT SCRAP PAPER:

    Subject matter pertaining to the compressing of scrap paper to form bales.


CLS 100/915
TXT FIXED UPPER RAM, LOWER MOVABLE RECEPTACLE:

    Subject matter comprising reciprocating presses which have a fixed upper
    ram and a lower movable receptacle.


CLS 100/916
TXT COIL TIGHTENER AND BINDER:

    Subject matter comprising apparatus for tightening coils of metal and then
    strapping the coils.


CLS 100/917
TXT MAGNETIC:

    Subject matter pertaining to the use of magnetic devices as a pressure
    source in roller or reciprocating platen presses.


CLS 100/918
TXT BOLSTER AND DIE:

    Subject matter comprising presses which include bolster and dies and means
    to removably attach the latter to the former.

    FOREIGN ART COLLECTIONS

    The foreign patents/nonpatent literature from Class 100, subclass 93, has
    been transferred directly to the foreign art collection below (subclass FOR
    100) which is intended only as a repository for foreign patents/nonpatent
    literature.  The Class 100 reference in parentheses following the subclass
    title below provides the source of the respective foreign patents/nonpatent
    literature.  The definition below corresponds to the respective Class 100
    definition.


CLS 100/FOR100
TXT In press: (100/93)

    Foreign art collection including apparatus in which the means for changing
    the temperature or reducing the moisture content is so arranged that the
    treatment occurs in the press or during the compacting operation.


CLS 101/
TTL PRINTING

CLS 101/
TXT Means not otherwise provided for adapted to produce characters or designs
    on surfaces by impression of types or dies or by applying coating material
    thereto through openings of previous portions of a pattern sheet, as in
    stenciling, or by impression from planographic or intaglio surfaces.

    (1)     Note.  Includes organizations using design or character dies that
    emboss, burn, or perforate, as well as those that are intended to apply ink.

    (2)     Note.  For means and methods for making type or other bodies having
    printing surfaces see Class 76, Metal Tools and Implements, Making; Class
    156, Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture; Class 164,
    Metal Founding; Class 178, Telegraphy; Class 199, Type Casting; Class 204,
    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy;  Class 205, Electrolysis:
    Processes, Compositions Used Therein and Methods of Preparing the
    Compositions; Class 264, Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or
    Treating; Processes; Class 425, Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or
    Treating:  Apparatus; and Class 430, Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process,
    Composition, or Product Thereof.

    (3)     Note.  Patents containing product claims originally classified in
    Class 101, Printing, subclasses 128.21 through 129, 450.1 through 473, 211,
    295, 401.1 through 401.6 involving significant claimed chemical subject
    matter and no significant structure or printing steps are being
    reclassified into the appropriate chemical product or material class.
    Notes under the pertinent above indicated subclasses indicate the extent
    and scope of this work as of August 1969.

    (4)     Note.  Where a printing plate of the planographic type or a stencil
    element, i.e., stencils and blanks, is claimed with no significant printing
    plate or stencil element structure or printing steps but merely in terms of
    the composition or material of which at least one of its layers is
    composed, it will be classified in the appropriate product or composition
    class, even though there is no claim to the composition, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, particularly subclasses 445+, for chemical processes
    and compositions for printing textiles and other materials there designated
    with dyes.

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 131.2+ for machines to package articles
    combined with a device to print indicia or to place a coating on the cover
    thereof.

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, (see (2) Note).

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses for presses not otherwise provided
    for.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, for coating apparatus of general application,
    especially subclass 46 for printing apparatus combined with significant
    coating, subclasses 211+, 301 and 406 for apparatus for applying coating to
    restricted areas for special purposes, and subclasses 504+ for masks, per
    se.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    277 and 384+ for the combination of printing and laminating.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 2+ for processes of forming metal
    printing plates (e.g., stereotypes, etc.) and subclasses 139+ for
    corresponding apparatus.  Also, see (2) Note above.

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclasses 2+ for a recording weighing device.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 4 and 23+ for printing telegraph systems.

    199,    Type Casting, (see Note 2).

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, subclass 10 for the manufacturing
    of a printing roll using etching.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for article dispensing
    or feeding devices not otherwise provided for, and including sheet and card
    dispensers.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), for a device for selective
    cutting or punching of a workpiece, usually a paper card or strip, in one
    cycle of operation, or step-by-step in alternation with work feed
    movements, wherein the cutting extends entirely through  the  workpiece
    and   is  not  restricted to the production of characters or designs (e.g.,
    it may reproduce pattern indicia in original or modified form, or it may
    cut coded perforations under the control of a keyboard or other data input
    means).

    235,    Registers, for printing-registers, calculators, and voting machines.

    270,    Sheet-Material Associating, subclasses 1.1+ for combinations of
    printing with operations falling in that class.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, appropriate subclasses for means for
    feeding separate sheets, etc.

    346,    Recorders, subclasses 150.1+ for electric recording of phenomenom.

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, subclasses 112+ for
    the production of latent electrostatic images by the use of electrically
    charged character dies onto a record, which latent images are later
    developed with toner to render them visible, subclasses 159+ and 163+ for
    printing of symbolic information by electrical discharge and by
    electrochemical respectively.

    380,    Cryptography, subclass 51 and 55 for production of printed copy by
    cryptographic equipment.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 130+ for image formation, subclass
    154 for image formation with transfer of latent image, and subclasses 297+
    for transfer of toner image, per se.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, for printing mechanism in which each type is
    impressed separately, with means to feed the work to position for the next
    impression.

    427,    Coating Processes, for processes of coating, per se, and note
    especially subclasses 256+ for a nonuniform coating.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a single or plural layer stock material useful as a printing plate or
    stenciling element, but having no significant printing structure or other
    printing feature, and subclasses 908 and 909 (cross-reference art
    collections) for a printer's matrix or a printer's blanket, respectively.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, see the class definition.

    902,    Electronic Funds Transfer (a cross-reference art collection),
    subcollections 18+ for an automated teller machine having a particular
    printing means.


CLS 101/2
TXT Machines under class definition which print on articles and selectively
    deliver related articles in groups, each group in a separate position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for comprising analogous devices, but which do not deliver to
    separate positions.


CLS 101/3.1
TXT EMBOSSING OR PENETRATING:

    Means under the class definition for producing characters or designs on
    surfaces by dies adapted to deform or remove portions of the material.

    (1)     Note.  Since many printing mechanisms can inherently deform the
    material being printed upon, organized machines, even though called
    "embossing machines", are placed below in appropriate coordinate
    subclasses, except that recitation of specific mechanism particularly
    designed to deform the material, will cause classification in this and
    indented subclasses, e.g., conforming punch and die structure.

    (2)     Note. The line between Class 83, Cutting, and Class 101, Printing,
    subclasses 3.1+ is as follows:

    The mere removal of portions of sheet material interposed between one or
    more punch and die sets, whether or not the aperture or series of apertures
    produced form characters or designs which convey intelligence, has been
    considered punching for Class 83.  However, where more than the mere
    removal of material is involved and additional apparatus or steps add to
    enhance the character or design produced, (e.g., the application of ink to
    the punches to additionally mark or outline the apertures), such additions
    have been considered printing for Class 101, subclass 3.1.

    Deforming of sheet material into characters or designs with or without the
    removal of any portion of the material has been considered printing for
    Class 101, subclasses 3.1+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401.2,  401.4, 401.5, and 401.6, for means for swaging characters into
    metal and involving more than simple pressure, such as would be applicable
    to any material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses for machines having die members
    with perforating-points adapted to pass entirely through the material for
    producing designs other than characters.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, appropriate subclasses for
    processes and apparatus for shaping wet fibrous sheets by patterned dies.

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), appropriate subclasses for a
    machine having a gang of separately movable punches so mounted and
    connected that any desired combination thereof may be depressed to produce
    a design or an array of coded perforations.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 127+ and 135+ for machines in
    which each die is impressed separately, with means to feed the work to
    position for the next impression.


CLS 101/4
TXT Machines under subclass 3.1 peculiarly adapted for printing by embossing or
    penetrating on articles other than rectangular sheets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclass 9.21 for a stamp-scarifying device which may
    include means for printing cancellation indicia.


CLS 101/5
TXT Machines under subclass 4 the impression being made by rolling contact
    between the printing-surface and the surface printed upon.


CLS 101/6
TXT Machines under subclass 5 the article engaged between the peripheries of
    two oppositely-rotating members to effect the printing act.


CLS 101/7
TXT Machines under subclass 5 the article rotating during impression, but not
    between a pair of oppositely-rotatable members.


CLS 101/8
TXT Machines under subclass 5 there being means to heat the die.


CLS 101/9
TXT Machines under subclass 4 there being means to heat the die.


CLS 101/10
TXT Machines under subclass 9 wherein the path of approach of the hot die and
    the special article to printing position is an arc intersecting the surface
    printed upon.


CLS 101/11
TXT Machines under subclass 9 having means to feed or deliver the article.


CLS 101/12
TXT Means under subclass 3.1 for impressing material adapted to be employed as
    molds from which casts may be taken.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a single or plural layer stock material product, and subclasses 908 and
    909 (cross-reference art collections) for a printer's matrix or a printer's
    blanket, respectively.


CLS 101/13
TXT Machines under subclass 12 carrying a supply of printing characters so
    constructed that different characters may be employed at successive
    impressions.


CLS 101/14
TXT Machines under subclass 13 there being a plurality of rotatable coaxial
    members with characters on their peripheries.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    199,    Type Casting, subclass 3 comprising similar mechanism for
    assembling matrices.


CLS 101/15
TXT Machines under subclass 13, the carriers being flat and slidable and each
    bearing a plurality of characters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    199,    Type Casting, subclass 6 comprising similar mechanism for
    assembling matrices.


CLS 101/16
TXT Machines under subclass 12 limited to the dies or the holders therefor.


CLS 101/17
TXT Processes only under subclass 12 of embossing or penetrating matrix
    material.


CLS 101/18
TXT Machines under subclass 3.1 carrying a supply of printing characters so
    constructed that different characters may be employed at successive
    impressions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13+,    for similar machines for operating on a matrix material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), for analogous structure in a
    selective cutting machine.


CLS 101/19
TXT Machines under subclass 18, the dies being adapted to penetrate the
    material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is at present the locus for original patents
    directed to the combination of means for printing and means for punching,
    selectively, one or more holes (in the same or in a different workpiece).
    For example, the machine may punch code symbols to record data which may or
    may not relate to the printed subject matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), subclasses 35+ for a selective
    cutting device associated with a disclosure of printing means.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 135+ for the combination of means
    for typing and means for perforating (the same workpiece or different
    workpieces), under the control of a common keyboard.


CLS 101/20
TXT Machines under subclass 19 wherein the path of approach to printing
    position is in an arc intersecting the surface to be pierced.


CLS 101/21
TXT Machines under subclass 18, there being means to heat the die.


CLS 101/22
TXT Means under subclass 3.1, the impression being made by rolling contact
    between the printing-surface and the surface to be printed upon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5+,     for machines for embossing special articles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 155+ for concurrent conveying and pressing
    presses of the roller type, not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 101/23
TXT Means under subclass 22, the work being engaged between the peripheries of
    two oppositely-rotating members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for similar special article machines.


CLS 101/24
TXT Means under subclass 23, the die being adapted to penetrate the material.


CLS 101/25
TXT Means under subclass 23, there being means to heat the die.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for other rolling contact, hot die machines.


CLS 101/26
TXT Means under subclass 3.1 in which the die is adapted to penetrate the
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     20, and 24, for piercing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclass 9.22 for a hand-manipulated device including driven
    means to perforate a surface and means to introduce ink into the
    perforations.


CLS 101/27
TXT Machines under subclass 3.1 having means to heat the die.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      9, 21, and 25, for other hot die machines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 300+ for presses not elsewhere provided for,
    and having means for heating, cooling or drying material in the press.


CLS 101/28
TXT Limited to the dies or the holders therefor for machines under subclass 3.1.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16      and 368+, for other dies.


CLS 101/29
TXT Dies under subclass 28 carrying a supply of printing characters so
    constructed that different characters may be employed at successive
    impressions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13+     and 18+, for machines having selective members.


CLS 101/30
TXT Means under subclass 28, the die being adapted to penetrate the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19+,    24, and 26, for machines having piercing members.


CLS 101/31
TXT Means under subclass 28, the die being peculiarly adapted to be heated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      9+, 21, 25, and 27, for machines having hot dies.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 401+ for a tool comprising a work
    engager and fuel burner.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 243+ for die members having specific
    electrical heating means.


CLS 101/31.1
TXT Seal press:

    Means under subclass 3.1 particularly adapted to deform material into the
    shape of a seal or crest.


CLS 101/32
TXT Processes only under subclass 3.1 for embossing or penetrating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for processes of embossing or penetrating matrix material.


CLS 101/33
TXT Means under class definition for transferring designs of special
    compositions from temporary supports to plates adapted to be developed into
    printing-surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137,    142+, 154, 177, 217+, and 251+, for other transfer machines.


CLS 101/34
TXT Processes only under subclass 33 for transferring preparatory designs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 467+ for processes of dyeing by transfer.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    230+ for processes for directly transferring a lamina from a carrier to a
    base.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 256+ for processes of forming a
    nonuniform coating and subclasses 146+ for processes of making a transfer
    or copy sheet.


CLS 101/35
TXT Machines under class definition peculiarly adapted for printing on articles
    other than rectangular sheets.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4+      and 33, for other special article machines.

    114+,   for stenciling machines for operating on special articles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclass 131.2 for machines to form packages
    combined with a device to print indicia or to place a coating on the cover
    thereof.

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 284 for cigar and cigarette making machines with
    combined means for printing on the article.


CLS 101/36
TXT Machines under subclass 35, the article being engaged in rolling contact
    between the peripheries of two oppositely-rotating members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for similar embossing or penetrating machines.


CLS 101/37
TXT Machines under subclass 36 comprising means to move the articles to or from
    the printing mechanism.


CLS 101/38.1
TXT Rotating object:

    Machines under subclass 35, the article rotating during impression, but not
    between a pair of oppositely-rotatable members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for similar embossing or penetrating machines.


CLS 101/39
TXT Machines under subclass 38.1, the article being given a bodily movement
    also during the printing operation.


CLS 101/40
TXT Machines under subclass 39 comprising means to move the article to or from
    the printing mechanism.


CLS 101/40.1
TXT Feeding or delivering:

    Machines under subclass 38.1 comprising means to move the article to or
    from the printing mechanism.


CLS 101/41
TXT Machines under subclass 35 wherein the impression is made without rolling
    contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      and appropriate subclasses thereunder, and subclasses 57+, 68-70,
    78+, 93+, 134.5, 163+, 193+, and 287+ for other bed and platen machines.


CLS 101/42
TXT Machines under subclass 41 carrying a supply of printing characters so
    constructed that different characters may be employed at successive
    impressions.


CLS 101/43
TXT Machines under subclass 42 comprising means to move the articles to or from
    the printing mechanism.


CLS 101/44
TXT Machines under subclass 41, there being means to move the articles to or
    from the printing mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for selective machines having such means.


CLS 101/45
TXT Means under class definition carrying a supply of printing characters so
    constructed that different characters may be employed at successive
    impressions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13+,    18+, 29, and 42+, for other selective machines.


CLS 101/46
TXT Means under subclass 45 for impressing each type separately and causing
    relative feed of the work to position for the next impression, in
    combination with other printing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    400,    Typewriting Machines, for such machines, per se.


CLS 101/47
TXT Machines under subclass 45 peculiarly adapted for printing addresses, with
    or without other printed matter.


CLS 101/48
TXT Machines under subclass 47 employing members having design areas through
    which ink may pass.


CLS 101/49
TXT Machines under subclass 48, the work being engaged in rolling contact
    between the peripheries of rotating members, the surface on one of the
    members being a stencil and having a roller-inker receiving ink from a
    reservoir.


CLS 101/50
TXT Machines under subclass 48 having stencils in strip form, which strip may
    be composed of separate sections.


CLS 101/51
TXT Machines under subclass 48 wherein a roller supplied with ink from a
    reservoir is passed bodily over the back of the stencil.


CLS 101/52
TXT Machines under subclass 47, the work being engaged in rolling contact
    between the peripheries of rotating members.


CLS 101/53
TXT Machines under subclass 52 having means to move the work to or from the
    printing mechanism.


CLS 101/54
TXT Machines under subclass 53, there being a chain for passing disconnected
    printing-plates between the members of the printing-couple.


CLS 101/55
TXT Machines under subclass 47 having a flat printing member and a cylinder
    between which the work is engaged by rolling contact.


CLS 101/56
TXT Machines under subclass 55, the cylinder being given a bodily movement
    along the bed.


CLS 101/57
TXT Machines under subclass 47 wherein the impression is made without rolling
    contact.

    (1)     Note.  See the search note under subclass 41 of the class.


CLS 101/58
TXT Machines under subclass 57 having means for distinguishing different groups
    of the printed articles, but not for delivering the groups to different
    positions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for analogous devices, but which deliver the groups to different
    positions.


CLS 101/59
TXT Machines under subclass 57, there being a plurality of rotatable coaxial
    members provided with printing characters on their peripheries.


CLS 101/60
TXT Machines under subclass 57, a plurality of printing-plates being secured
    together and fed one at a time to printing position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50      and 121, for stencil web machines.


CLS 101/61
TXT Machines under subclass 60 wherein the path of approach of the bed and
    platen to printing position is an arc intersecting the surface to be
    printed upon.


CLS 101/62
TXT Machines under subclass 57, a plurality of printing-surfaces being mounted
    on a rotary carrier and moved step by step to operative position.


CLS 101/63
TXT Machines under subclass 57, a plurality of printing-surfaces being placed
    in a chase and the chase shifted step by step.


CLS 101/64
TXT Machines under subclass 63 wherein the path of approach of the bed and
    platen is an arc intersecting the surface to be printed upon.


CLS 101/65
TXT Machines under subclass 57 wherein the path of approach of the bed and
    platen is an arc intersecting the surface to be printed upon.


CLS 101/66
TXT Machines under subclass 45 for printing on transportation-tickets route or
    destination, in combination with other data, employing at least in part
    selective or progressive mechanism.


CLS 101/67
TXT Machines under subclass 66 having means to produce a plurality of copies of
    the same matter at each printing operation.


CLS 101/68
TXT Machines under subclass 67 wherein the impression is made by a nonrolling
    contact.

    (1)     Note.  See the search note under subclass 41 of this class.


CLS 101/69
TXT Machines under subclass 66 wherein the impression is made by a nonrolling
    contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for duplicating types of machines.


CLS 101/70
TXT Machines under subclass 69, there being means for printing numbers
    progressively.


CLS 101/71
TXT Machines under subclass 45 for canceling mail-matter that are inclosed in a
    receptacle for storing the canceled matter.


CLS 101/72
TXT Machines under subclass 45 for printing numbers that are provided with
    means for advancing the type progressively between operations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for ticket machines having a numbering attachment.


CLS 101/73
TXT Machines under subclass 72 adapted for printing at predetermined distances
    upon the work.


CLS 101/74
TXT Machines under subclass 73, the work being engaged in rolling contact
    between the peripheries of rotating members.


CLS 101/75
TXT Machines under subclass 74, there being a plurality of rotatable coaxial
    members with printing characters on their peripheries.


CLS 101/76
TXT Machines under subclass 72, the work being engaged in rolling contact
    between the peripheries of rotating members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for rotary measuring machines.


CLS 101/77
TXT Machines under subclass 76, there being a plurality of rotatable coaxial
    members with printing characters on their peripheries, the series being
    revoluble bodily about an exterior axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for measuring machines of the drum series type.


CLS 101/78
TXT Machines under subclass 72 in which the impression is made without rolling
    contact.

    (1)     Note.  See the search note under subclass 41 of this class.


CLS 101/79
TXT Machines under subclass 78, there being a plurality of rotatable coaxial
    members with printing characters on their peripheries.


CLS 101/80
TXT Machines under subclass 79 wherein the path of approach of bed and platen
    to printing position is an arc intersecting the surface to be printed on.


CLS 101/81
TXT Machines under subclass 80, there being an ink-supply plate and a roller
    for transferring ink therefrom to the printing-surface.


CLS 101/82
TXT Machines under subclass 79, there being an ink-supply plate and a roller
    for transferring ink therefrom to the printing-surface.


CLS 101/83
TXT Machines under subclass 72 limited to a plurality of rotatable coaxial
    members with printing characters on their peripheries in combination with
    ink-pads making contact with the type along a path intersecting the
    type-surface.


CLS 101/84
TXT Limited to printing-surfaces and supporting and holding therefor for
    machines under subclass 72.


CLS 101/85
TXT Printing members under subclass 84 comprising a plurality of rotatable
    coaxial members with printing characters on their peripheries.


CLS 101/86
TXT Printing members under subclass 85, the series being revoluble bodily about
    an exterior axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for rotary numbering machines having planetary drum series.


CLS 101/87
TXT Printing members under subclass 86, the series being shiftable on its
    support.


CLS 101/88
TXT Printing members under subclass 85, the drums being progressed by pressure
    from the work-support.


CLS 101/89
TXT Printing members under subclass 88, the drums withdrawing slightly under
    pressure and effecting the progression of the types upon their return to
    normal position.


CLS 101/90
TXT Machines under subclass 45 having means to produce a plurality of copies of
    the same matter at each printing operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67+,    for duplicating ticket machines.


CLS 101/91
TXT Machines under subclass 45 in which the work is engaged in rolling contact
    between the peripheries of rotating members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     52+, 74+, and 76+, for other rotary selective or progressive
    machines.


CLS 101/92
TXT Machines under subclass 91 for printing on continuous strips of indefinite
    length.


CLS 101/93
TXT Machines under subclass 45 in which the impression is made without rolling
    contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13+,    18+, 42+, and see the search note under subclass 41 of this class
    for other bed and platen machines.


CLS 101/93.01
TXT Processes of printing under subclass 93.


CLS 101/93.02
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93 in which there is provided means to prevent a
    repeated and unwanted print impression of a print character.

    (1)     Note.  Merely dampening the movement of a print hammer returning to
    its home position after a print operation is not considered proper subject
    matter for classification here.  For classification here, there should at
    least be a disclosure that a repeated impact of the same print character is
    at least substantially positively prohibited whereby the probability of a
    repeated or double impression is highly remote.


CLS 101/93.03
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93 in which means is provided whereby the force
    used in the act of printing may be adjusted.


CLS 101/93.04
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93 provided with print means for producing print
    characters each of which is made up of a plurality of character fragments.


CLS 101/93.05
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93.04 in which there is provided a plurality of
    flexible relatively movable elongated members, end portions thereof or
    separate members at the end portions cooperating therewith striking a
    relatively stationary member to perform a print action, each end portion or
    separate member thereat printing a respective portion only of a character
    or symbol.


CLS 101/93.06
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93 in which means is provided by which space
    between words or print characters may be modified so that a printed line of
    print will have a desired length.


CLS 101/93.07
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93 in which the print apparatus includes a means
    for severing and/or piercing the article being printed.

    (1)     Note.  The means may be a bar having a tear edge thereon.


CLS 101/93.08
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93 in which a separate relatively moving print
    means is provided for concurrent printing on each of two or more print
    lines of a record medium moving therepast.

    (1)     Note.  It is not intended that a print character carrying member
    having two or more lines of print thereon engageable by a relatively
    movable platen member for effecting a print action is proper for
    classification here.  However, where a separate hammer or platen member
    concurrently movable for simultaneously printing indicia on each of two or
    more print lines, classification is proper here.


CLS 101/93.09
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93 in which there is provided a character striking
    member either (1) having a width spanning a plurality of adjacently
    positioned type characters or type columns, or (2) being movable to strike
    characters in a plurality of print columns, the character striking member
    being engageable with a single print type character only when it is urged
    to strike the print character carrying member at a print line as the print
    characters move therepast.


CLS 101/93.1
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93 wherein either a platen or hammer member or a
    print character carrying member is moved by a fluid under pressure whereby
    a print act may be performed.


CLS 101/93.11
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93 in which there are-two or more printing means
    each of which comprises a separate print character carrying member for
    cooperation with a separate platen for printing on a separate record
    keeping means.


CLS 101/93.12
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93.11 in which at least one of the separate
    printing means comprises a printing mechanism dissimilar to any other
    printing mechanism in the machine.


CLS 101/93.13
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93 in which print characters are carried on a band
    or web-like element the ends of which are connected together to form a
    continuous loop and movable past or along a print line.


CLS 101/93.14
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93.13 wherein the band or web-like element has a
    portion moving in a direction parallel to the print line.


CLS 101/93.15
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93 wherein either a character carrying member or a
    character striking member is moved from print position to print position
    along a line generally parallel to a print line and from end to end thereof.


CLS 101/93.16
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93.15 wherein the character striking member is
    moved parallel to the print line.


CLS 101/93.17
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93.15 wherein the character carrying member
    comprises a rotatable print unit.


CLS 101/93.18
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93 in which the print characters are part of or
    carried on a member movable at least substantially 360 degrees about its
    axis.

    (1)     Note.  A print wheel either having print characters extending
    completely around its periphery or disclosed as rotating but having print
    characters extending partially therearound is considered proper subject
    matter for classification here.


CLS 101/93.19
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93.18 in which the member comprises a relatively
    thin rotating member having print characters at or about its periphery.


CLS 101/93.2
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93.18 in which in addition to the rotating print
    character carrying member there is provided another print character
    carrying member which is other than rotatably, each member engageable with
    a common platen member.


CLS 101/93.21
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93.18 in which the member having the print
    characters thereon rotates about an axis which is at least substantially
    parallel to the line being printed.


CLS 101/93.22
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93.21 in which the rotating type carrying member
    includes a means alternately accelerating and retarding its rotative
    movement, the rotation thereof being impeded for the act of printing.


CLS 101/93.23
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93.21 in which either (1) the print characters are
    spirally arranged over the circumference of the rotatable print character
    carrying member or (2) like print characters in axially spaced column of
    print characters are circumferentially spaced on the rotating member.


CLS 101/93.24
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93.21 in which the member having the print
    characters thereon is also movable in a direction to strike a backing or
    platen member to thereby perform a printing action.


CLS 101/93.25
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93.24 wherein the member movable to engage the
    rotatable print character carrying member moves in a curved path of travel.


CLS 101/93.26
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93.21 in which the rotating member has mounted
    thereon a plurality of individually movable print characters, the
    individually movable print characters being selectively moved to a print
    position whereby the print action may be performed.


CLS 101/93.27
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93.21 wherein a plurality of spaced platen or
    hammer sets are positioned adjacent the periphery of the rotatable print
    character carrying member, each set performing a separate print action on a
    separate record means.

    (1)     Note.  The record means may be a tape, sales slip, envelope, etc.


CLS 101/93.28
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93.21 in which there is provided a member movable
    in a direction to strike one or more type or print characters on the
    rotatable member thereby to perform a printing action.


CLS 101/93.29
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93.28 in which the means to move the member
    striking the type or print characters to perform the print action includes
    a solenoid or like electrical member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 229+ for the combination of an electromagnet
    used in conjunction with a permanent magnet.


CLS 101/93.3
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93.29 in which there is provided a rotating member
    having an impelling surface or means thereon for impelling the print
    character striking member into engagement with a print character.


CLS 101/93.31
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93.3 in which there is provided a separate movable
    member interposed between the solenoid or like means and the type or print
    character striking member, the rotating member moving the interposed member
    into engagement with the striking member to perform the print action.


CLS 101/93.32
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93.29 in which there is provided a movable member
    interposed between the solenoid or like means and the type or print
    character striking member, the interposed member being caused to move the
    striking member into engagement with a print character to perform the print
    action.


CLS 101/93.33
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93.32 in which there is provided a resilient
    mechanical device for urging the interposed member in at least one
    direction of its movement.


CLS 101/93.34
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93.29 in which there is provided a resilient
    mechanical device for urging the striking member in at least one direction
    of its movement.


CLS 101/93.35
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93.28 in which there is provided a member movable
    to engage the rotatable print character carrying member to perform the
    printing act, the movable member being moved solely by mechanistic
    elements, e.g., cams, levers, springs, etc.


CLS 101/93.36
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93.35 wherein the member movable to engage the
    rotatable print character carrying member moves in a curved path of travel.


CLS 101/93.37
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93 in which the print characters are part of a
    member movable alternately back and forth in a path of travel.


CLS 101/93.38
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93.37 in which the print character carrying member
    includes at least two spaced sets of print characters.

    (1)     Note.  A print character carrying member having a set of
    characters, portions of which are grouped together on different faces
    thereof is considered proper for classification here.


CLS 101/93.39
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93.38 wherein there is a separate platen member
    cooperating with each print character set enabling simultaneous spaced
    print actions on separate record means.


CLS 101/93.4
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93.39 wherein each set of print characters is
    mounted on the same face of the reciprocating member.


CLS 101/93.41
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93.37 in which there is provided a member movable
    in a direction to engage the print characters whereby to perform a print
    action.


CLS 101/93.42
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93.41 in which the movable member is urged to
    engage the print character by the force exerted thereto of a solenoid or
    like electrical member.


CLS 101/93.43
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93.37 wherein a print character carrying member is
    moved to engage a relatively stationary member by the force exerted thereto
    of a solenoid or like member, the print character carrying member being
    moved either, per se, or by an intermediate member acting thereon.


CLS 101/93.44
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93.37 in which the member carrying the printing
    characters moves back and forth in a circular path generally substantially
    less than 360 degrees.


CLS 101/93.45
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93.37 in which the member movable alternately back
    and forth is provided with individual print character means movable
    relative thereto and to each other.


CLS 101/93.46
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93.45 in which movement of the print carrying
    reciprocating member is controlled by means including a solenoid or like
    member for selectively positioning the print characters at the print line.


CLS 101/93.47
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93 in which a member having indicia or symbol
    thereon is moved in a direction to engage a platen member thereby to
    perform a print action.


CLS 101/93.48
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93 comprising a member engageable with a print
    character member not otherwise claimed or disclosed.

    (1)     Note.  Hammers or platen member disclosed or claimed for use with a
    specific type of print character carrying member are classified with the
    particular print character carrying member.


CLS 101/94
TXT Machines under subclass 93 wherein the path of approach of the bed and
    platen to printing position is in an arc intersecting the surface to be
    printed upon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     61, 64, 65, and 80+, for other oscillating bed and platen machines.


CLS 101/95
TXT Machines under subclass 94, there being a plurality of rotatable coaxial
    members with printing characters on their peripheries.


CLS 101/96
TXT Machines under subclass 95, an inked ribbon being held over the type during
    the printing act.


CLS 101/97
TXT Machines under subclass 95 having an ink-pad making contact with the type
    along a path intersecting the type-surface.


CLS 101/98
TXT Machines under subclass 94 having an ink-pad making contact with the type
    along a path intersecting the typed-surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97      and 103, for other pad inkers.


CLS 101/99
TXT Machines under subclass 93 having a plurality of rotatable coaxial members
    with printing characters on their peripheries.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     59, 79+, and 95+, for other drum series machines.


CLS 101/100
TXT Machines under subclass 99, an inked ribbon being held over the type during
    the printing act.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     for other ribbon inkers.


CLS 101/101
TXT Machines under subclass 99 with an ink-pad making contact with the type
    along a path intersecting the type-surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98,     for other pad inkers.


CLS 101/102
TXT Machines under subclass 93, an inked ribbon being held over the type during
    the printing act.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96      and 100, for other ribbon inkers.


CLS 101/103
TXT Limited to printing-surfaces and supporting and holding means therefor in
    combination with means for applying ink to the surfaces for machines under
    subclass 45.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84+,    for numbering printing members.


CLS 101/104
TXT Means under subclass 103, the printing member being inverted to make
    nonrolling contact with an ink-pad.


CLS 101/105
TXT Means under subclass 104, the printing characters being carried on endless
    flexible strips or belts.


CLS 101/106
TXT Means under subclass 103 having a plurality of rotatable coaxial members
    with printing characters on their peripheries.


CLS 101/107
TXT Means under subclass 106, an ink-ribbon being held over the type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96      and 100, for other ribbon inkers.


CLS 101/108
TXT Means under subclass 106 with an ink-pad making contact with the type along
    a path intersecting the type-surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97      and 101, for other pad inkers.


CLS 101/109
TXT Limited to the specific members that bear the printing-surfaces and
    supporting and holding means therefor for machines under subclass 45.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29      and 84+, for other selective or progressive printing members.


CLS 101/110
TXT Means under subclass 109, the printing members comprising a plurality of
    rotatable coaxial members with printing characters on their peripheries.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     59, 75, 77, 79+, 83, 85+, 95+, 99+, and 106+, for other drum series
    members.


CLS 101/111
TXT Means under subclass 109, the printing characters being carried on endless
    flexible strips or belts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    for other endless band printing members.


CLS 101/112
TXT Means under subclass 109 comprising stencil-plates each having a plurality
    of characters or designs from which selection may be made.


CLS 101/113
TXT Machines under class definition having means to produce a plurality of
    copies of the same matter at each printing operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67+     and 90, for other duplicating machines.


CLS 101/114
TXT Subject matter under the class definition using tools or members having
    design areas through which inks pigment, or other coating substance may
    pass to the surface to be printed upon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48+     and 112, for other stencil machines and stencils.


CLS 101/115
TXT Machines under subclass 114 for producing stenciled effects in a plurality
    of colors or tints.


CLS 101/116
TXT Machines under subclass 114, the work being engaged in rolling contact
    between the peripheries of rotating members, the periphery of one of the
    members being or carrying a stencil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for other rotary stencil machines.


CLS 101/117
TXT Machines under subclass 116 having means to perforate or sever the work and
    means to move it to or from stenciling position.


CLS 101/118
TXT Machines under subclass 116 having means to move the work to or from
    stenciling position.


CLS 101/119
TXT Machines under subclass 116, the ink being supplied from within the stencil
    member.


CLS 101/120
TXT Machines under subclass 119, the inker being in traveling contact with the
    back of the stencil.


CLS 101/121
TXT Machines under subclass 114 employing stencils in strip form, which strip
    may be composed of separate sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50      and 60+, for other stencil web machines and interconnected plate
    machines.


CLS 101/122
TXT Machines under subclass 121 includes stencil-web in the form of an endless
    band.


CLS 101/123
TXT Machines under subclass 114 wherein the inker is passed bodily over the
    back of the stencil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for other traveling inker machines.


CLS 101/124
TXT Machines under subclass 114 wherein the stencil is caused to move past a
    nontraveling inker.


CLS 101/125
TXT Machines under subclass 114 comprising a stencil-plate with an ink-pad
    covering the back of the same.


CLS 101/126
TXT Machines under subclass 114 limited to means for holding a stencil and the
    work in associated relation.


CLS 101/127
TXT Subject matter under subclass 114 including (1) stenciling elements, i.e.,
    stencils and blanks including mounts, holders and extensions, (2) processes
    of and apparatus for manufacture of such elements not elsewhere provided
    for, and (3) such processes combined with a use step.

    (1)     Note.  The term "blank" includes the sheet or plate through which
    the stenciling openings are to be made or the unit including the
    unperforated stencil sheet and its attached protecting or backing sheets.
    The term "stencil" includes the sheets or plates with the openings in them
    and also such completed sheets or plates combined with backing or
    protective sheets.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48+,    for selective or progressive addressing machines using stencils.

    112,    for stencil plates used in selective and progressive printing
    machines.

    129,    for stenciling processes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, particularly subclasses 562+ and see the
    reference to Class 101, Printing, in (3) Note  in said subclass.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 388 and 430 for
    stencils which mark food during the cooking thereof.

    106,    Compositions: Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses for
    stenciling compositions.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 504+ and see the Notes thereto, for
    devices for protecting areas adjacent to the part being coated.

    132,    Toilet, subclass 216 for eyebrow stencils to act as templates in
    the application of make-up, subclass 73 for manicure stencils, and subclass
    319 for other stencils adapted for use with toilet articles (e.g., rouge or
    lipstick).

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 143 for processes of coating, per se,
    wherein the product produced is a stencil blank.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a single or plural layer stock material product in the form of a web or
    sheet, and especially subclasses 131+ for such a product including
    apertures.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, particularly subclasses 117 and 162+
    for writing guides.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 29+, 442, 445, 448, and  457 for an abrading
    shield, including an erasing shield (subclass 445), a mask, or a stencil;
    and see the search notes of subclass 442.


CLS 101/127.1
TXT Devices under subclass 127 including (A) a stencil or blank combined with
    (1) a mount or holder, usually a frame surrounding it, (2) an extension
    usually an index tab or sheet bearing indicia, (3) means for attaching the
    stencil or blank to other structures such as a duplicating machine or
    surface to be stenciled, or (4) any of the above combined, and (B) the
    mounts or holders, per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for single stencil sheets or plates provided with an adhesive area.

    415.1,  for flexible sheet securing devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 642.02+ for a display
    label holder, per se, which may be utilized for a stencil holder.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 371+
    for frame type devices for flexible fabrics and see the Notes thereto for
    the search for similar structures.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 521+ for card holders which hold
    cards against the platen of a typewriter.


CLS 101/128
TXT Subject matter under subclass 127.1, including a plurality of stencils
    which can be assembled in a desired order and adjuncts thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 218+
    for movably interconnected plural strip, slat or panel type devices therein
    provided.


CLS 101/128.1
TXT Subject matter under subclass 127.1, including means for attaching the
    stencil or stencil blank to other structures.


CLS 101/128.21
TXT Laminated and/or plural sheets and/or coated base and manufacture:

    Subject matter under subclass 127 including (a) laminated or plural sheets
    including a blank which is or may be cut to form a stencil, (b) a specific
    base sheet combined with a coating, (c) apparatus and processes of
    manufacture of the above, and (d) such processes combined with a use step.

    (1)     Note.  Stenciling elements, i.e., stencils or blanks, including
    laminated or plural sheet stenciling elements defined in terms of the
    chemical composition of one of the layers or sheets of the stencil element
    without other printing structure limitations or printing steps shall be
    classified in the appropriate chemical product or material class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128.4,  for manufacture processes including the assembly of a stencil or
    blank and its frame and for stencil cutting processes even though a
    laminated or coated base is cut.

    129,    for use processes only and see the notes thereto.

    149.4,  for hectographic surfaces, sheets, and plates which are not
    stencils.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet; and particularly subclasses 411.1+ for a plural layer product in
    which at least one of the layers is defined in terms of its composition.


CLS 101/128.4
TXT Subject matter under subclass 127, including apparatus and processes of
    manufacture, per se, or combined with a use step.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129,    for use processes only.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses, for cutting and punching in
    general.

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching).


CLS 101/129
TXT Processes only under subclass 114 for stenciling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128.4,  for processes of manufacture of stencils even though a use step is
    claimed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 256+ for nonuniform coating processes
    which may include the use of a stencil.  For the line between Classes 427
    and 101 see the class definition of Class 427.


CLS 101/130
TXT Process or apparatus under the class definition of printing from a surface
    not depending upon differences in elevation, but (A) which surface has been
    treated so as to be ink-repellent except where an ink-attractive
    configuration has been placed thereon, or (B) on which surface an ink
    design has been prepared which will give off multiple impressions without
    re-inking.

    (1)     Note.  Within the meaning of this subclass the term "planographic"
    does not include printing from plain or smooth surfaces in which the design
    is first printed or otherwise delineated on the surface in ink and then
    transferred by impression to the surface to the printed on and the
    operation repeated for each impression.  Operations of the latter sort are
    herein designated "transfer-printing" and classified as such under the
    appropriate main divisions, such as "Multi-color, Intaglio, Rolling-Contact
    Machines," etc.


CLS 101/131
TXT Copying apparatus under subclass 130 having a printing-surface bearing
    designs in ink of such a nature as not to require reinking, but which may
    be treated with a solvent to give off impressions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    468+,   for copying surfaces and processes of manufacture.


CLS 101/131.5
TXT Copying apparatus under subclass 131 by which the printing surface and the
    sheet to be printed upon are brought into impression-taking contact by
    simultaneously flexing the surface and the sheet.


CLS 101/132
TXT Copying apparatus under subclass 131, involves work engaged in rolling
    contact between the peripheries of rotating members.


CLS 101/132.5
TXT Rotary copying apparatus under subclass 132 employing dampening means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131,    133, 134.5, 147, and 148, for dampening structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for dampening apparatus,
    per se.


CLS 101/133
TXT Copying apparatus under subclass 131 comprising a flat printing member and
    a cylinder, between which the work is engaged by rolling contact.


CLS 101/134
TXT Copying apparatus under subclass 133 in which the printing-surface is
    formed by dry ink-blocks of different colors.


CLS 101/134.5
TXT Opposed members under subclass 131 capable of relative movement toward each
    other to make the impression by a nonrolling contact.

    (1)     Note.  For details of mechanism for imparting the movement, search
    appropriate subclasses in Class 74, Machine Element or Mechanism, and Class
    100, Presses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41+,    57+, 68-70, 78+, 93+, 163+, 193+, and 287+, for other bed and
    platen machines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, (See (1) Note).

    100,    Presses, subclasses 214+ for reciprocating platen presses not
    elsewhere provided for.


CLS 101/135
TXT Apparatus under subclass 130 for printing with inks of different colors or
    tints.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    for related copying apparatus.


CLS 101/136
TXT Machines under subclass 135 in which the work is engaged in rolling contact
    between the peripheries of rotating members.


CLS 101/137
TXT Machines under subclass 136 wherein the design is first printed by means of
    a planographic surface on an intermediate surface and then offset or
    transferred to the surface to be printed on, there being also means whereby
    to prevent an impression.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142+,   154, 177, 215, 217+, and 251+, for other transfer machines.


CLS 101/138
TXT Machines under subclass 136 for printing on continuous strips of indefinite
    length.


CLS 101/139
TXT Machines under subclass 138 with means whereby to prevent an impression.


CLS 101/140
TXT Machines under subclass 136 with means whereby to prevent an impression.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139,    for web machines with interrupter.


CLS 101/141
TXT Machines under subclass 130 in which the work is engaged in rolling contact
    between the peripheries of rotating members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132     and 136+, for other rotary planographic machines.


CLS 101/142
TXT Machines under subclass 141 wherein the design is first printed by means of
    a planographic surface on an intermediate smooth surface, and then offset
    or transferred to the surface to be printed on.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137,    154, 177, 215, 217+, and 251+, for other transfer machines.


CLS 101/143
TXT Machines under subclass 142 for printing on continuous strips of indefinite
    length, there being means whereby to prevent an impression.


CLS 101/144
TXT Machines under subclass 142 with means whereby to prevent an impression.


CLS 101/145
TXT Machines under subclass 141 with means whereby to prevent an impression.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137,    139, 140, 143, and 144, for other machines with interrupter.


CLS 101/146
TXT Machines under subclass 130 comprising a flat printing member and a
    cylinder, between which the work is engaged by rolling contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    for related copying apparatus.


CLS 101/147
TXT Attachments for machines under subclass 130 for applying water or other
    ink-repellents to the printing-surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 73+ for presses, not elsewhere provided for,
    having means to treat the material pressed with liquid and/or steam.


CLS 101/148
TXT Means under subclass 147 wherein the dampeners are cylindrical in form, the
    dampening material being supplied from a reservoir.


CLS 101/150
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which printing is done by
    means of surfaces dependent upon design-grooves to retain the ink.


CLS 101/151
TXT Subject matter under subclass 150 in which printing is done with inks of
    different colors or tints.


CLS 101/152
TXT Machines under subclass 151 in which the work is engaged in rolling contact
    between the peripheries of rotating members.


CLS 101/153
TXT Machines under subclass 150 in which the work is engaged in rolling contact
    between the peripheries of rotating members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    for rotary, multicolor, intaglio machines.


CLS 101/154
TXT Machines under subclass 153, the design being first printed by means of an
    intaglio surface upon an intermediate smooth surface and then offset or
    transferred onto the work, there being a stiff blade for scraping off the
    ink not retained in the grooves of the intaglio surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137,    142+, 177, 215, 217+, and 251+, for other transfer machines.

    157,    for other scrapers.


CLS 101/155
TXT Machines under subclass 153 having means for removing the ink not retained
    in the grooves of the printing surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167+,   for other wipers.


CLS 101/156
TXT Machines under subclass 155 employing a long flexible strip adapted to
    present a fresh portion at each operation.


CLS 101/157
TXT Machines under subclass 155, the wiper being a stiff blade bearing against
    the surface in line contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154,    for other scrapers.


CLS 101/158
TXT Machines under subclass 150 comprising a flat printing member and a
    cylinder, between which the work is engaged in rolling contact.


CLS 101/159
TXT Machines under subclass 158, the printing-bed traveling head foremost
    around a circuit.


CLS 101/160
TXT Machines under subclass 159, there being an ink-applying roller not
    receiving ink from a plate and a long flexible strip for removing the ink
    not retained in the grooves of the printing element.


CLS 101/161
TXT Machines under subclass 158, there being an ink-applying roller not
    receiving ink from a plate and means for removing the ink not retained in
    the grooves of the printing element.


CLS 101/162
TXT Machines under subclass 161, the wiper being a long flexible strip.


CLS 101/163
TXT Machines under subclass 150 in which the impression is made without rolling
    contact with the surface to be printed.

    (1)     Note.  See the search note under subclass 41 of this class.


CLS 101/164
TXT Machines under subclass 163, the printing member moving in a straight path,
    there being an ink-applying roller not receiving ink from a plate and a
    long flexible strip for removing the ink not retained in the grooves of the
    printing member.


CLS 101/165
TXT Machines under subclass 163, there being an ink-applying roller not
    receiving ink from a plate and a long flexible strip for removing the ink
    not retained in the grooves of the printing member.


CLS 101/166
TXT Machines under subclass 163, there being a long flexible strip for removing
    the ink not retained in the grooves of the printing member.


CLS 101/167
TXT Attachments for machines under subclass 150 limited in function to removing
    the ink from the printing surface except where retained by the
    design-grooves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155     and 161, for other wipers.


CLS 101/168
TXT Means under subclass 167 employing a long flexible strip adapted to present
    a fresh portion at each operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156,    160, 162, 164, and 165, for other webs.


CLS 101/169
TXT Means under subclass 167 employing a stiff blade bearing against the
    surface in line contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154     and 157, for other scrapers.


CLS 101/170
TXT Processes only, under subclass 150 dependent upon intaglio printing.


CLS 101/171
TXT Machines under class definition which involve printing with inks of
    different colors or tints.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    134, 135+, and 151+, for other multicolor machines.


CLS 101/172
TXT Machines under subclass 171 peculiarly adapted for printing on strands,
    either singly of side by side.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 200+, for apparatus
    for applying liquids to textiles.


CLS 101/173
TXT Machines under subclass 171, which combine both "rotary" and
    "bed-and-cylinder" structures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    214+,   for rolling contact, rotary and bed and cylinder machines.


CLS 101/174
TXT Machines under subclass 171 in which the work is engaged in rolling contact
    between the peripheries of rotating members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    for multicolor, rotary, intaglio machines.


CLS 101/175
TXT Machines under subclass 174, the complete design being printed by one
    passage of the work through one couple.


CLS 101/176
TXT Machines under subclass 175 for printing on continuous strips of indefinite
    length.


CLS 101/177
TXT Machines under subclass 174, the design being printed upon an intermediate
    surface and then transferred or offset onto the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137,    142+, 154, 217, and 251+, for other transfer machines.


CLS 101/178
TXT Machines under subclass 174 for printing on continuous strips of indefinite
    length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    for planographic, multicolor, rotary, web machines.


CLS 101/179
TXT Machines under subclass 178 having means peculiarly adapted for printing on
    both sides of the web, at least one side in multicolor.


CLS 101/180
TXT Machines under subclass 179 employing a plurality of separate
    printing-couples for printing different colors on the same side of the web.


CLS 101/181
TXT Machines under subclass 178 employing a plurality of separate
    printing-couples.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180,    for similar perfecting machines.


CLS 101/182
TXT Machines under subclass 178 having means to prevent an impression.


CLS 101/183
TXT Machines under subclass 174 employing a plurality or separate
    printing-couples.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180     and 181, for multiple couple web machines.


CLS 101/184
TXT Machines under subclass 183 having means to prevent an impression.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182,    for web machines with interrupter.


CLS 101/185
TXT Machines under subclass 174 having means whereby to prevent an impression.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139,    140, 144, 145, 182, and 184, for other rotary machines with
    interrupter.


CLS 101/186
TXT Machines under subclass 171 comprising a flat printing member and a
    cylinder, between which the work is engaged in rolling contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173,    for rotary and bed-and-cylinder machines.


CLS 101/187
TXT Machines under subclass 186, a complete design being printed by one passage
    of the work through one couple.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175+,   for rotary single impression multicolor machines.


CLS 101/188
TXT Machines under subclass 186, the work being moved longitudinally of the
    cylinder between impressions to present it to a different printing-surface.


CLS 101/189
TXT Machines under subclass 186 having a plurality of cylinders and cooperating
    forms, to which the work is successively presented.


CLS 101/190
TXT Machines under subclass 189 having means peculiarly adapted for printing on
    both sides of the work, at least one side being in multicolor.


CLS 101/191
TXT Machines under subclass 189 including means for bringing the bed and
    cylinder together on the printing stroke and separating them on the return
    stroke.


CLS 101/192
TXT Machines under subclass 191 having means whereby to prevent an impressions.


CLS 101/193
TXT Machines under subclass 171 in which the impression is made without rolling
    contact.

    (1)     Note.  See the search note under subclass 41 of this class.


CLS 101/194
TXT Machines under subclass 193, the complete design being printed by one
    passage of the work through one couple.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175+,   for single impression rotary machines.

    187,    for single impression bed-and-cylinder machines.


CLS 101/195
TXT Machines under subclass 194 wherein the path of approach of the bed and
    platen to printing position is in an arc intersecting the surface to be
    printed on, there being an ink-supply plate and a roller for transferring
    ink therefrom to the printing-surface.


CLS 101/196
TXT Machines under subclass 193 adapted for printing on continuous strips of
    indefinite length.


CLS 101/197
TXT Machines under subclass 196 wherein the printing member oscillates.


CLS 101/198
TXT Machines under subclass 196, the printing member moving in a straight path.


CLS 101/199
TXT Machines under subclass 198 having an ink-roller not receiving ink from a
    plate.


CLS 101/200
TXT Machines under subclass 193 wherein the bed and platen approach to printing
    position is in an arc intersecting the surface to be printed on.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195     and 197, for other oscillating bed-and-platen machines.


CLS 101/201
TXT Machines under subclass 171 which consist of printing-forms each having one
    or more sections adapted to be moved from the plane of the printing-surface
    to be inked or to escape inking.


CLS 101/202
TXT Limited to attachments for applying ink to the printing-surface of machines
    under subclass 171.


CLS 101/203.1
TXT Roller and plate:

    Means under subclass 202 having an ink-supply plate and a roller for
    transferring ink therefrom to the printing-surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195,    for other roller and plate inkers.


CLS 101/204
TXT Means under subclass 203.1, the plate receiving ink from a reservoir.


CLS 101/204.1
TXT Multidisc plate:

    Means under subclass 203.1 wherein said ink supply plate is a multiple disk
    type, for transferring ink therefrom to the printing surface.


CLS 101/205
TXT Means under subclass 202 having an ink-roller not receiving ink from a
    plate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199,    for other roller inkers.


CLS 101/206
TXT Means under subclass 205 peculiarly adapted in which the work is engaged
    between the peripheries of rotating members.


CLS 101/207
TXT Means under subclass 206, the roller receiving ink from a reservoir.


CLS 101/208
TXT Means under subclass 205, the roller receiving ink from a reservoir.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207,    for other fountains.


CLS 101/209
TXT Means under subclass 205 with means to prevent inking.


CLS 101/210
TXT Means under subclass 202 limited to supply-reservoir structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204,    207, and 208, for other fountains.


CLS 101/211
TXT Processes only, under subclass 171 dependent on printing in a plurality of
    different colors.


CLS 101/212
TXT Machines under class definition for printing by exerting a rolling contact
    between the printing-surface and the surface to be printed upon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5+      and 22+, for rolling contact embossing or penetrating machines.

    36+,    for rolling contact special article machines.


CLS 101/213
TXT Devices under subclass 212 adapted to hold a roll of paper or the like and
    having a rotary printing member bearing against the roll, with an
    ink-applying roller not receiving ink from a plate.  As the web is pulled
    out it is automatically printed upon.

    (1)     Note.  For similar roll-holders without printing attachments see
    Classes 83, Cutting; and 242, Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses
    550+ and 570+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting,  (See (1) Note).

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 550+ and 570+ for an
    unwinding machine or roll holder of general use.


CLS 101/214
TXT Machines under subclass 212 which combine both "rotary" and
    "bed-and-cylinder" structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173,    for similar multicolor machines.


CLS 101/215
TXT Machines under subclass 214, the design being printed upon an intermediate
    surface and then transferred or offset onto the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33+,    137, 142+, 154, 177, 217+, and 251, for other transfer machines.


CLS 101/216
TXT Machines under subclass 212 in which the work is engaged in rolling contact
    between the peripheries of rotating members.

    (1)     Note.  Does not include those which oscillate to-and-fro.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      23+, 36, 37, 49, 52+, 74, 75+, 77, 91, 92, 116+, 132, 136+, 141+,
    152, 153+, 173, 174+, 214, and 215, for other machines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 155+ for concurrent pressing and conveying
    presses of the roller type, not elsewhere provided for.

    270,    Sheet-Material Associating, subclasses 4+, 18+ and 20.1 for rotary
    printer combinations.


CLS 101/217
TXT Machines under subclass 216 the design being first printed on an
    intermediate surface and then offset or transferred onto the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     137, 142+, 154, 177, 215, and 251+, for other transfer machines.


CLS 101/218
TXT Machines under subclass 217 having means to prevent an impression.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137     and 247, for other rotary machines with interrupter.


CLS 101/219
TXT Machines under subclass 216 for printing on continuous strips of indefinite
    length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92,     178+, and 213, for other rotary, web machines.


CLS 101/220
TXT Machines under subclass 219 having means peculiarly adapted for printing on
    both sides of the web.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179+,   for rotary, perfecting, multicolor machines.


CLS 101/221
TXT Machines under subclass 220, a plurality of impressions being made on at
    least one side of the web.


CLS 101/222
TXT Machines under subclass 221, there being means for turning the web over
    about its longitudinal axis prior to the perfecting impression.


CLS 101/223
TXT Machines under subclass 220, there being means for turning the web over
    about its longitudinal axis prior to the perfecting impression.


CLS 101/224
TXT Machines under subclass 220 having means for perforating the web or
    severing after printing, with means to feed or deliver the work.


CLS 101/225
TXT Machines under subclass 220 with means to feed or deliver the work.


CLS 101/226
TXT Machines under subclass 219 having means for perforating the web or
    severing after printing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224,    for perfecting machines having cutting.


CLS 101/227
TXT Machines under subclass 226 having means to move the work to or from the
    machine.


CLS 101/228
TXT Machines under subclass 219 having means to move the work to or from the
    printing mechanism.


CLS 101/229
TXT Machines under subclass 216 having means peculiarly adapted for printing on
    both sides of sheets.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220+,   for perfecting web machines.


CLS 101/230
TXT Machines under subclass 229 wherein the sheets are turned over prior to the
    perfecting impression other than by a continuous forward movement without
    lateral deflection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222,    223, and 257, for web machines that reverse.


CLS 101/231
TXT Machines under subclass 229 having means to move the work to or from
    printing position.


CLS 101/232
TXT Machines under subclass 216 having means to move the work to or from
    printing position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 173 for roller type concurrent pressing and
    conveying presses, not elsewhere provided for, having material handling or
    guiding means.


CLS 101/233
TXT Machines under subclass 232 wherein the printing-couple moves into
    operative position due to the presence of the article.


CLS 101/234
TXT Machines under subclass 233, movement being given the type-carrying
    cylinder to bring it to position.


CLS 101/235
TXT Machines under subclass 234, the printing-cylinder being arrested except
    during the passage of the article.


CLS 101/236
TXT Machines under subclass 235 with means to arrange the printed articles in a
    compact collection.


CLS 101/237
TXT Machines under subclass 234 with means to arrange the printed articles in a
    compact collection.


CLS 101/238
TXT Machines under subclass 233 with means to arrange the printed articles in a
    compact collection.


CLS 101/239
TXT Machines under subclass 238, there being a positive stop for the article to
    bring it into register with the printing-surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241     and 242, for other article turning stops.


CLS 101/240
TXT Machines under subclass 232 with means to arrange the printed articles in a
    compact collection.


CLS 101/241
TXT Machines under subclass 240, there being a positive stop for the article to
    bring it into register with the printing surface.


CLS 101/242
TXT Machines under subclass 232, there being a positive stop for the article to
    bring it into register with the printing-surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239     and 241, for other article turning stops.


CLS 101/243
TXT Machines under subclass 232, an ink-ribbon being held over the
    printing-surface.


CLS 101/244
TXT Machines under subclass 216, an ink-ribbon being held over the
    printing-surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243,    for other ribbon inkers.


CLS 101/245
TXT Machines under subclass 216, the printing-cylinder being arrested except
    during the passage of the article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235+,   for other single revolution machines.


CLS 101/246
TXT Machines under subclass 216, one of the cylinders having means for grasping
    the sheets.


CLS 101/247
TXT Machines under subclass 216 with means for preventing an impression.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139,    140, 143, 144, 145, 182, 184, 185, and 218, for other rotary
    machines with interrupter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 126+ for means of this
    nature capable of general application.


CLS 101/248
TXT Machines under subclass 216 having means for moving one of the members of
    the printing-couple or the work so as to accurately present the desired
    portions of the work and the printing-surface to each other.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include mere adjustable gearing or
    journals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286,    for related bed-and-cylinder machines.


CLS 101/249
TXT Machines under subclass 216 having a plurality of work-supporting blankets
    arranged side by side, but out of alinement, along the cylinder and adapted
    to cooperate with similarly-arranged typeforms.


CLS 101/250
TXT Machines under subclass 212 comprising a flat printing member and a
    cylinder, between which the work is engaged by rolling contact.

    (1)     Note.  Does not include those having rotating members with flat
    printing-surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55+,    133+, 146, 158+, 173, 186+, and 214+, for other bed-and-cylinder
    machines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, for carriage-motion, per se, for
    machines of this type.

    100,    Presses, subclass 156 for presses of the concurrent pressing and
    conveying type, not elsewhere provided for, in which a roller coacts with a
    nonrotary press element.

    270,    Sheet-Material Associating, subclass 22.1 for this type machine
    combined with sheet associating or folding means.


CLS 101/251
TXT Machines under subclass 250, the design being first printed upon an
    intermediate surface and then offset or transferred onto the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     137, 142+, 154, 177, 215, and 217+, for other transfer machines.


CLS 101/252
TXT Machines under subclass 251, the cylinder being given a bodily movement
    along the bed.


CLS 101/253
TXT Machines under subclass 250 for printing on continuous strips of indefinite
    length.


CLS 101/254
TXT Machines under subclass 253 having means peculiarly adapted for printing on
    both sides of the web.


CLS 101/255
TXT Machines under subclass 254, the printing-bed traveling head foremost
    around in an endless path.


CLS 101/256
TXT Machines under subclass 254, the cylinder being given a bodily movement
    along the bed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    270,    Sheet-Material Associating, subclass 22.1 for this type machine
    combined with sheet associating or folding means.


CLS 101/257
TXT Machines under subclass 256 having means to turn the web over about its
    longitudinal axis prior to the perfecting impression.


CLS 101/258
TXT Machines under subclass 254 the rotation of the cylinder being reversed
    with each reciprocation of the bed.


CLS 101/259
TXT Machines under subclass 253, the printing-bed traveling head foremost
    around in a circuit.


CLS 101/260
TXT Machines under subclass 253, the cylinder being given a bodily movement
    along the bed.


CLS 101/261
TXT Machines under subclass 253, the rotation of the cylinder being reversed
    with each reciprocation of the bed.


CLS 101/262
TXT Machines under subclass 250 having means peculiarly adapted for printing on
    both sides of sheets.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254+,   for perfecting machines for printing on webs.


CLS 101/263
TXT Machines under subclass 262, the printing-bed traveling head foremost
    around in an endless path.


CLS 101/264
TXT Machines under subclass 262, the cylinder being given a bodily movement
    along the bed.


CLS 101/265
TXT Machines under subclass 262 with means for preventing the rotation of the
    cylinder except during the printing operation.


CLS 101/266
TXT Machines under subclass 262, the rotation of the cylinder being reversed
    with each reciprocation of the bed and having work feeding or delivering
    means.


CLS 101/267
TXT Machines under subclass 262 having means to deliver the sheet on the second
    revolution of the cylinder.


CLS 101/268
TXT Machines under subclass 250, the printing-bed traveling around head
    foremost in an endless path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60+,    for addressing machines having interconnected plates.

    159+,   255, 259, and 263, for other circulating bed machines.


CLS 101/269
TXT Machines under subclass 250, the cylinder being given a bodily movement
    along the bed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     252, 256+, 260, and 264, for other traveling cylinder machines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 210 for roll and platen presses, not elsewhere
    provided for.

    270,    Sheet-Material Associating, subclass 22.1 for this type machine
    combined with sheet associating or folding means.


CLS 101/270
TXT Machines under subclass 269, the cylinder having a bodily travel in an
    endless path.


CLS 101/271
TXT Machines under subclass 270 with means to move the work to or from the
    printing mechanism, an ink-ribbon being held over the printing-surface.


CLS 101/272
TXT Machines under subclass 269 with means to move the work to or from the
    printing mechanism.


CLS 101/273
TXT Machines under subclass 272 an ink-ribbon being held over the
    printing-surface.


CLS 101/274
TXT Machines under subclass 269 an ink-ribbon being held over the
    printing-surface.


CLS 101/275
TXT Machines under subclass 250 with means for preventing the rotation of the
    cylinder except during the printing operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    265,    for perfecting, stop cylinder, machines.


CLS 101/276
TXT Machines under subclass 275 with means to move the work to or from the
    printing position.


CLS 101/277
TXT Machines under subclass 250, the rotation of the cylinder being reversed
    with each reciprocation of the bed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258,    261, and 266, for other oscillating cylinder machines.


CLS 101/278
TXT Machines under subclass 277 with means to move the work to or from the
    printing mechanism.


CLS 101/279
TXT Machines under subclass 250 with means to move the work to or from the
    printing mechanism.


CLS 101/280
TXT Machines under subclass 279 with means to deliver the sheet on the second
    revolution of the cylinder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    267,    for other machines having this type of delivering.


CLS 101/281
TXT Machines under subclass 250, an ink-ribbon being held over the
    printing-surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    271,    273, and 274, for other ribbon inkers.


CLS 101/282
TXT Means under subclass 250 for producing relative movement between the bed
    and cylinder not peculiar to the types of bed-and-cylinder machines named
    in the preceding subclasses.


CLS 101/283
TXT Machines under subclass 282 including means for bringing the bed and
    cylinder together on the printing stroke and separating them on the return
    stroke.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191,    for multicolor machines of this type.


CLS 101/284
TXT Machines under subclass 283 with means to prevent an impression.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    192,    for multicolor machines of this type.


CLS 101/285
TXT Machines under subclass 282 with means to prevent an impression.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284,    for throw-off machines having interrupter means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 126+ for means of this
    nature susceptible of general application, functioning in a similar manner.


CLS 101/286
TXT Means under subclass 282 to accurately present the same portion of the
    surface of the cylinder to the type at each stroke.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248,    for rotary machines having cylinder-registering machines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, for adjustable gearing merely for
    this purpose.


CLS 101/287
TXT Machines under the class definition comprising two opposing pressure
    members so constructed as to contact simultaneously at all points with the
    work held therebetween, thereby effecting a non-rolling impression.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.1+,   41+, 57+, 68, 69+, 78+, 93+, 134.5, 163+, and 193+, for other
    bed-and-platen machines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 214+ for reciprocating platen presses, not
    elsewhere provided for.


CLS 101/288
TXT Machines under subclass 287 for printing on continuous strips of indefinite
    length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196+,   for multicolor machines of this type.


CLS 101/289
TXT Machines under subclass 288 having means peculiarly adapted for printing on
    both sides of the web.


CLS 101/290
TXT Machines under subclass 289, the printing member moving in a straight path
    and having a roller-inker not receiving ink from a plate.


CLS 101/291
TXT Machines under subclass 288, the printing member moving in an arc.


CLS 101/292
TXT Machines under subclass 288, the printing member moving in a straight path.


CLS 101/293
TXT Machines under subclass 292, there being an ink-supply plate and a roller
    for transferring ink there-from to the printing-surface.


CLS 101/294
TXT Machines under subclass 293, the ink-roller traveling bodily in an endless
    path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304     and 308, for other inkers of this type.


CLS 101/295
TXT Machines under subclass 292, there being a roller-inker not receiving ink
    from a plate.


CLS 101/296
TXT Machines under subclass 287 having means peculiarly adapted for printing on
    both sides of sheets.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    289+,   for perfecting web type machines.


CLS 101/297
TXT Machines under subclass 287 wherein the path of approach of the bed and
    platen to printing position is an arc intersecting the surface to be
    printed on.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     20, 61, 64, 65, 80, 81, 94+, 195, 197, 200, and 291, for other
    oscillating machines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 233+ for reciprocating platen presses of the
    hinged type, not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 101/298
TXT Machines under subclass 297, the printing member moving in an arc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    197     and 291, for other oscillating bed machines.


CLS 101/299
TXT Machines under subclass 298 with means to prevent an impression.


CLS 101/300
TXT Machines under subclass 299, there being an ink-supply plate and a roller
    for transferring ink therefrom to the printing-surface.


CLS 101/301
TXT Machines under subclass 298 with means for applying ink to the
    printing-surface.


CLS 101/302
TXT Machines under subclass 301 comprising an ink-supply plate and a roller for
    transferring ink therefrom to the printing-surface.


CLS 101/303
TXT Machines under subclass 302, the plate being bodily movable to carry ink to
    the roller.


CLS 101/304
TXT Machines under subclass 302, the ink-roller traveling bodily in an endless
    path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    294     and 308, for other circulating roller inkers.


CLS 101/305
TXT Machines under subclass 301 comprising a roller not receiving ink from a
    plate.


CLS 101/306
TXT Machines under subclass 297 with means to prevent an impression.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    299+,   for other oscillating machines with interrupter.

    317,    for reciprocating bed machines with interrupter.


CLS 101/307
TXT Machines under subclass 306, there being an ink-supply plate and a roller
    for transferring ink therefrom to the printing-surface.


CLS 101/308
TXT Machines under subclass 307, the ink-roller traveling bodily in an endless
    path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    294     and 304, for other circulating roller inkers.


CLS 101/309
TXT Machines under subclass 306, there being a roller-inker not receiving ink
    from a plate.


CLS 101/310
TXT Machines under subclass 297 with means for applying ink to the
    printing-surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301+,   for inkers for oscillating bed machines.


CLS 101/311
TXT Machines under subclass 310 comprising an ink-supply plate and a roller for
    transferring ink therefrom to the printing-surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     195, 300, 302+, and 307, for other roller and plate inkers.


CLS 101/312
TXT Machines under subclass 311, the plate being bodily movable to carry ink to
    the roller.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    303,    for other traveling plate inkers.


CLS 101/313
TXT Machines under subclass 311, the ink-roller traveling bodily in an endless
    path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    294,    304, and 308, for other circulating roller inkers.


CLS 101/314
TXT Machines under subclass 310 comprising a roller not receiving ink from a
    plate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    295,    305, and 309, for other roller inkers.


CLS 101/315
TXT Machines under subclass 314, the ink being supplied from a reservoir.


CLS 101/316
TXT Machines under subclass 287, the printing member moving in a straight path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164,    198+, 290, and 292+, for other reciprocating bed machines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 229 for presses of the reciprocating platen type,
    not elsewhere provided for, having a transversely displaceable stationary
    platen.


CLS 101/317
TXT Machines under subclass 316 with means to prevent an impression.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306+,   for oscillating bed machines with interrupter.


CLS 101/318
TXT Machines under subclass 316 with means for applying ink to the
    printing-surface.


CLS 101/319
TXT Machines under subclass 318 comprising an ink-supply plate and a roller for
    transferring ink therefrom to the printing-surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    293+,   300, 302+, 307+, and 311+, for other roller and plate machines.


CLS 101/320
TXT Machines under subclass 318 comprising a roller not receiving ink from a
    plate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164,    199, 290, and 295, for other roller inkers.


CLS 101/321
TXT Machines under subclass 320, the ink being supplied from a reservoir.


CLS 101/322
TXT Machines under subclass 287 with means to prevent an impression.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    299+,   306+, and 317, for other machines with interrupter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 126+ and 134 for
    machine parts susceptible of general application and functioning in a
    similar manner.


CLS 101/323
TXT Machines under subclass 322, there being an ink-roller not supplied with
    ink from a plate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    309,    for oscillating machines having interrupter and roller inker means.


CLS 101/324
TXT Machines under subclass 287 with means for applying ink to the
    printing-surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     82, 96, 97, 98, 164, 165, 195, 199, 290, 293, 295, 301+, 310+,
    318+, and 323, for other inkers.


CLS 101/325
TXT Machines under subclass 324 comprising an ink-supply plate and a roller for
    transferring ink therefrom to the printing-surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     82, 195, 293+, 300, 302+, 307+, 311+, and 319, for other roller and
    plate inkers.


CLS 101/326
TXT Machines under subclass 324 comprising a roller which is supplied with ink
    from a reservoir.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315     and 321, for other roller and fountain inkers.


CLS 101/327
TXT Devices under the class definition limited to elements having
    printing-surfaces and supporting and holding means therefor, in combination
    with means for applying ink to said surfaces.


CLS 101/328
TXT Devices under subclass 327 having curved surfaces capable of printing by
    rolling or rocking upon the work.

    (1)     Note.  The line between this class (101), subclasses 328+, and
    Class 401, Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 208+, is as
    follows:

    Class 101, takes rolling applicator implements disclosed as pigment
    distributors and where the applicator surface produces a mark of other than
    general character.  Marks of general character include (1) an indeterminate
    line or (2) a single continuous line of uniform width.

    Class 401, Coating Implements With Material Supply, takes hand-manipulable
    rolling contact applicators of general utility or disclosed as being
    pigment distributors producing a mark of general character.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 208+ for a
    hand-manipulable rolling-contact applicator with material supply; and see
    (1) Note, above.


CLS 101/329
TXT Devices under subclass 328, the surface being inked by a roller which does
    not receive its ink-supply from a plate.


CLS 101/330
TXT Devices under subclass 329, the roller being supplied with ink from a
    reservoir.


CLS 101/331
TXT Devices under subclass 330, the reservoir supplying ink by rolling contact.


CLS 101/332
TXT Devices under subclass 327, a strip of material provided with ink being
    placed over the printing-surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     100, 107, 243, 244, 271, 273, 274, and 281, for other ribbon inkers.


CLS 101/333
TXT Devices under subclass 327, the inkers making contact with the
    printing-surfaces along a path intersecting the same.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83,     97, 98, 101, 104+, and 108, for other pad inkers.


CLS 101/334
TXT Devices under subclass 333, the printing members being inverted to make
    contact with the ink-pads.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104+,   for other tumbler beds with pad inkers.


CLS 101/335
TXT Devices under the class definition limited to attachments for printing
    apparatus for applying ink to the printing surface other than in multicolor
    work or stenciling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83,     97, 98, 101, 103, 104, 105, 108, 125, 202, 301, 310, 318, 324, 327,
    and 333, for other pad inkers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 71+ for presses having means to add material to
    treat the pressed material, and not elsewhere provided for.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, for coating apparatus of general application,
    and especially subclasses 258+ for rotary applicators having means to apply
    coating material thereto.


CLS 101/336
TXT Devices under subclass 335, comprising strip of material provided with ink
    being placed over the printing-surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     100, 102, 107, 243, 244, 273, 274, 281, and 332, for other ribbon
    inkers.


CLS 101/337
TXT Devices under subclass 335, ink being held on a surface other than
    continuously cylindrical, from which it is transferred by a roller.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     82, 203.1+, 300, 302+, 307+, 311+, 319, and 325, for other roller
    and plate inkers.


CLS 101/338
TXT Machines under subclass 337 peculiarly adapted for bed-and-platen
    printing-presses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     82, 195, 293+, 300, 302+, 307+, 311+, 319, and 325, for
    bed-and-platen machines having this type inker.


CLS 101/339
TXT Machines under subclass 338, the ink-holding plate being bodily moved to
    carry the ink to the roller.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    303     and 312, for other inkers of this type.


CLS 101/340
TXT Machines under subclass 338, the plate being supplied with ink from a
    reservoir.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204,    for other roller and plate inkers with fountain.


CLS 101/341
TXT Machines under subclass 340 with means whereby to prevent inking other than
    a mere hand cut-off from the supply.


CLS 101/342
TXT Machines under subclass 338 with means whereby to prevent inking.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    341,    for other interrupters.


CLS 101/343
TXT Machines under subclass 337, the ink-holding plate being bodily moved to
    carry the ink to the roller.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    339,    for other traveling plate inkers.


CLS 101/344
TXT Devices under subclass 343, the plate being supplied with ink from a
    reservoir.


CLS 101/345
TXT Devices under subclass 344 with means to prevent inking other than a mere
    hand cut-off from the supply.


CLS 101/346
TXT Devices under subclass 343 with means to prevent inking.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    345,    for other interrupters.


CLS 101/347
TXT Devices under subclass 337, the plate being supplied with ink from a
    reservoir.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204,    340+, and 344+, for other roller and plate inkers with fountain.


CLS 101/348
TXT Machine under subclass 335 including a cylindrical member adapted to roll
    over the printing surface of the printing member of a printer;  to transfer
    printing fluid thereto, wherein the cylindrical member receives ink from a
    supply other than a plate.

    (1)     Note. the roller may be called the "inking roller"

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160,    161+, 165, 199, 205+, 213, 295, 305, 309, 314+, 320+, 326, and 329+
    for other roller inkers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the notes thereunder.


CLS 101/349.1
TXT Rotary machine:

    Subject matter under subclass 348 adapted for inking the printing member of
    a printing press, wherein the printing member turns about an axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206,    for similar inkers.


CLS 101/350.1
TXT Having fountain to supply ink to roller:

    Subject matter under subclass 349.1 including a reservoir for storage of
    printing fluid and a passageway for supplying said printing fluid from the
    reservoir to the  inking roller.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for an addressing machine with a similar inker.

    207,    for multicolor printer with a similar inker.


CLS 101/350.2
TXT Selective feed path of ink to roller:

    Subject matter under subclass 350.1 including more than one passageway for
    supplying printing fluid to the inking roller, and including provision to
    allow choice of one or another passageway.


CLS 101/350.3
TXT Vibrating:

    Subject matter under subclass 350.1 including an element of the passageway
    reciprocated to cause the printing fluid to be evenly distributed on the
    printing surface.


CLS 101/350.4
TXT Variable speed roller in train of rollers supplying ink to inking roller:

    Subject matter under subclass 350.1, wherein the passageway for supplying
    printing fluid is comprised of a series of rotary cylinders adapted to
    transfer printing fluid from one to the other to thereby move the printing
    fuild from the reservoir to the inking roller, and wherein the velocity of
    one of said cylinders can be changed.


CLS 101/350.5
TXT Having excess ink return; i.e., recovery:

    Subject matter under subclass 350.1 including provision to pick up and
    retain extra, i.e., unused, printing fluid.


CLS 101/350.6
TXT Having plural doctor means:

    Subject matter under subclass 350.1 including more than one element to
    scrape off excess printing fluid from the inking roller.


CLS 101/351.1
TXT Having interrupter in ink supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 350.1 including means (other than a mere hand
    cut-off) to prevent the flow of printing fluid to the inking roller.


CLS 101/351.2
TXT Spring biased:

    Subject matter under subclass 351.1, wherein the means for preventing  flow
    of printing fluid is yieldably urged by a resilient member into or out of
    functioning position.


CLS 101/351.3
TXT Pivoted:

    Subject matter under subclass 351.1, wherein the means to prevent flow of
    printing fluid comprises an element in the passageway that turns about an
    axis to move into or out of functioning position


CLS 101/351.4
TXT Hydraulically moved:

    Subject matter under subclass 351.1, wherein the means to prevent flow of
    printing fluid comprises a device operated by fluid pressure.


CLS 101/351.5
TXT Hydrophobic roller:

    Subject matter under subclass 349.1, wherein the  surface of one of the
    rotary cylinders of the passageway is treated to be water-repelling.


CLS 101/351.6
TXT Segmented roller:

    Subject matter under subclass 349.1, wherein  one of the rotary cylinders
    of the passageway is  comprised of several portions.


CLS 101/351.7
TXT Covered:

    Subject matter under subclass 349.1, wherein  one of the rotary cylinders
    of the passageway has a sleeve thereabout.


CLS 101/351.8
TXT Having means to spray ink on roller:

    Subject matter under subclass 349.1 including sparging means to transfer
    the printing fluid to the inking roller.


CLS 101/352.01
TXT Having interrupter:

    Subject matter under subclass 349.1 including  means to prevent the flow of
    printing fluid to the inking roller.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209     and 351.1, for other roller inker, interrupter combinations.


CLS 101/352.02
TXT Biased:

    Subject matter under subclass 352.01, wherein  an element of the means for
    preventing flow of printing fluid is urged into or out of functioning
    position.


CLS 101/352.03
TXT Spring

    Subject matter under subclass 352.02, wherein the means for urging the
    element is an elastic device.


CLS 101/352.04
TXT Pivoted:

    Subject matter under subclass 352.01, wherein the means to prevent flow of
    printing fluid comprises an element in the passageway that turns about an
    axis to move into or  out of functioning position.


CLS 101/352.05
TXT Hydraulically moved:

    Subject matter under subclass 352.01, wherein the means to prevent flow of
    printing fluid comprises a device operated by fluid pressure.


CLS 101/352.06
TXT Vibrating:

    Subject matter under subclass 349.1 including an element of the passageway
    reciprocated to cause the printing fluid to  be evenly distributed on the
    printing surface.


CLS 101/352.07
TXT Biased:

    Subject matter under subclass 349.1, wherein means are provided to urge in
    the movement of an element into or out of engagement with an adjacent
    element.


CLS 101/352.08
TXT Spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 352.07, wherein the means for urging  the
    movement of the element is an elastic device.


CLS 101/352.09
TXT Pivoted:

    Subject matter under subclass 349.1, wherein  an element turns about an
    axis to move into or out of engagement with an adjacent element.


CLS 101/352.1
TXT Specific shape:

    Subject matter under subclass 349.1, wherein the roller has a form for a
    purpose.


CLS 101/352.11
TXT Specific surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 349.1, wherein the peripheral portion of the
    roller has a peculiar area specially adapted for a purpose.


CLS 101/352.12
TXT Pile or nap:

    Subject matter under subclass 352.11, wherein the peripheral portion of the
    roller has externally exposed filament ends or loops of filament.


CLS 101/352.13
TXT Plurality of projections or indentations:

    Subject matter under subclass 352.11, wherein the peripheral portion of the
    roller has raised or lowered areas.


CLS 101/353
TXT Machines under subclass 348 peculiarly adapted for inking the printing
    member of a bed-and-cylinder press.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160     and 161+, for similar inkers.


CLS 101/354
TXT Machines under subclass 353, the roller being given a bodily movement along
    the printing-surface.


CLS 101/355
TXT Machines under subclass 354, the roller supplied with ink from a reservoir.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for other traveling roller inkers with fountain.


CLS 101/356
TXT Machines under subclass 353, the roller supplied with ink from a reservoir.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    355,    for fountain, traveling roller inkers.


CLS 101/357
TXT Machines under subclass 356 with means whereby to prevent inking other than
    by a mere hand cut-off from the supply.


CLS 101/358
TXT Machines under subclass 353 with means whereby to prevent inking.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    357,    for other interrupters.


CLS 101/359
TXT Machines under subclass 348 peculiarly adapted for inking the printing
    member of a bed-and-platen press.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164,    165, 199, 290, 295, 305, 309, 314+, 320+, 323, and 326, for other
    roller inkers for bed-and-platen machines.


CLS 101/360
TXT Machines under subclass 359, the roller supplied with ink from a reservoir.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315,    321, and 326, for similar inkers.


CLS 101/361
TXT Machines under subclass 360 with means whereby to prevent inking other than
    a mere hand cut-off from the supply.


CLS 101/362
TXT Machines under subclass 359 with means whereby to prevent inking.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    361,    for other interrupters.


CLS 101/363
TXT Machines under subclass 348, the roller supplied with ink from a reservoir.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     208, 330+, 350.1+, 355, 356, 357, and 360+, for other roller inkers
    with fountain.


CLS 101/364
TXT Devices under subclass 335 limited to form and structure of
    supply-reservoir.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     51, 204, 207, 208, 210, 315, 321, 326, 330, 331, 340, 341, 344,
    345, 347, 350.1, 351.1+, 355, 356, 357, 360, 361, and 363, for other
    fountains.


CLS 101/365
TXT Devices under subclass 364 with means for regulating the amount of ink
    discharged at different places.


CLS 101/366
TXT Devices under subclass 364 with means other than gravity for expelling the
    ink.


CLS 101/367
TXT Devices under subclass 364, the reservoir rotating as the ink is delivered.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148     and 331, for other roller fountains.


CLS 101/368
TXT Devices under class definition limited to elements bearing the
    printing-surfaces and supporting and holding means therefor.

    (1)     Note.  Where the printing member is claimed with no significant
    printing member structure but merely in terms of the composition or
    material of which it is composed, it will be classified in the appropriate
    composition or material class, even though there is no claim to the
    composition, per se.  In this connection the following classes should be
    considered:



    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting,subclass 328 for labeled hand
    stamps.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic.

    148,    Metal Treatment, particularly subclasses 400+ for materials which
    are products of processes of treating metals classifiable in Class 148, or
    for products distinguished only by the internal structure or
    characteristics of the metals, metallic compositions or alloys comprising
    such structures.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, appropriate subclasses for
    articles defined solely by their metal or alloy composition.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses for
    synthetic resins or natural rubbers and compositions thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16      and 28+, for embossing or penetrating die members.

    84+,    103+, and 109+, for selective or progressive printing members.

    327+,   for printing members with inkers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 295+ for platens and pressure surfaces, not
    elsewhere provided for.


CLS 101/369
TXT Devices under subclass 368 peculiarly adapted for printing addresses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 642.02+ for a tab or
    display label holder, per se, which may be utilized for attachment to an
    address plate.


CLS 101/370
TXT Devices under subclass 369 having one or more channels each adapted to hold
    a line of type.


CLS 101/371
TXT Devices under subclass 368 peculiarly adapted for disfiguring
    postage-stamps without mutilating the material thereof.


CLS 101/372
TXT Devices under subclass 368 having printing-sections peculiarly adapted to
    be assembled in different arrangements for producing particular effects.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    397     and 399, for special design face line bars and types.


CLS 101/373
TXT Devices under subclass 372, the rearrangement being effected without
    withdrawing the sections from the holder.


CLS 101/374
TXT Devices under subclass 368 having a printing-section readily removable and
    replaceable by another without disturbing the remaining portion of the form.


CLS 101/375
TXT Devices under subclass 368 having curved surfaces capable of printing by
    rolling or rocking upon the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212+,   for rolling contact machines.

    328+,   for rolling contact printing members with inkers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the notes thereunder.


CLS 101/376
TXT Devices under subclass 375 so constructed as to be accommodated under
    pressure to curved or uneven surfaces

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet, and especially subclass 909 (a cross-reference art collection) for a
    printer's blanket.


CLS 101/377
TXT Devices under subclass 375 having one or more channels each adapted to hold
    a line of type.


CLS 101/378
TXT Devices under subclass 375 having means for clamping thin rigid curved
    printing-surfaces to curved bases.


CLS 101/379
TXT Devices under subclass 368 so constructed as to be accommodated under
    pressure to curved or uneven surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    376,    for rolling contact printing members with yielding surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet, and especially subclass 909 (a cross-reference art collection) for a
    printer's blanket.


CLS 101/380
TXT Devices under subclass 379 having one or more channels each adapted to hold
    a line of type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370     and 377, for other members with type groove.


CLS 101/381
TXT Devices under subclass 368 having one or more channels each adapted to hold
    a line of type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370,    377, and 380, for other members with type groove.


CLS 101/382.1
TXT Plate mountings:

    Devices under subclass 368 with supports for thin flat rigid members having
    printing surfaces.


CLS 101/383
TXT Devices under subclass 382.1 with means to clamp the plates to the bases.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    378,    for other plate securing means.

    415.1,  for means of general application for holding a flexible sheet, even
    though named as a printing-plate stretched upon its support.


CLS 101/384
TXT Devices under subclass 383, the plate being modified to engage with a
    particular holding means on the base.


CLS 101/385
TXT Devices under subclass 383 comprising a plurality of small devices readily
    separable from both the plate and the base and adapted to be placed at any
    desired positions on the base.


CLS 101/386
TXT Devices under subclass 385, the bases being channeled to receive the hooks.


CLS 101/387
TXT Devices under subclass 386, the grooves extending across the base in lines
    oblique to the sides.


CLS 101/388
TXT Devices under subclass 387 with means for causing the hooks to move along
    the grooves.


CLS 101/389
TXT Devices under subclass 385, the hooks being carried by rectangular
    supporting members, which are in turn removably held in the base.


CLS 101/389.1
TXT Magnetic or vacuum means to hold printing plates:

    Devices under subclass 382.1 wherein the supports include structure which
    operates under the principle of magnetism or suction for supporting and
    firmly holding the printing surfaces.


CLS 101/390
TXT Devices under subclass 368 having means for securing the chase to the
    press-bed.


CLS 101/391
TXT Devices under subclass 368 having frame-like structures to be secured to
    the press-bed and adapted to hold a plurality of lines of assembled type.


CLS 101/392
TXT Devices under subclass 391, the parts of the frame structure being
    adjustable.


CLS 101/393
TXT Devices under subclass 391 having means adapted to be placed in various
    positions within the frame for subdividing the type-holding chamber.


CLS 101/394
TXT Devices under subclass 391 having means attached to the chase for producing
    pressure upon the type to hold it in position therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 40+ for separate locking means, per se, adapted to secure type
    in the chase.


CLS 101/395
TXT Printing members under subclass 368 comprising thin sheets of material
    provided with printing-surfaces and incapable of being locked up in a chase
    unless mounted upon base members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    453+,   for planographic printing plates and see Notes thereto.


CLS 101/396
TXT Unitary structures under subclass 368 of not more than one line composed of
    a plurality of printing characters.


CLS 101/397
TXT Devices under subclass 396 adapted to print particular effects.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    372+    and 399, for special design forms and types.


CLS 101/398
TXT Printing characters under subclass 368, any one of which is so related to
    others that they may be interchangeably employed in setting up a form.


CLS 101/399
TXT Devices under subclass 398 adapted for printing particular effects.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    372     and 397, for special design forms and line bars.


CLS 101/400
TXT Devices under subclass 368 for producing marginal designs or straight lines.


CLS 101/401
TXT Devices under subclass 368 limited to improvements in the printing-face.


CLS 101/401.1
TXT Devices under subclass 368 consisting of printing or impression blanks,
    plates, surfaces, etc., and processes of making them.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 69 and 127 for electrolytic methods
    of preparing printing members, blanks, plates, and surfaces.


CLS 101/401.2
TXT Processes under subclass 401.1 of forming metal printing-surfaces other
    than by etching, casting, deposition, or mere embossing unaccompanied by
    special manipulation; also blanks for the same.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401.5,  for related apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclass 69 for electrolytic methods of forming
    electrotypes.


CLS 101/401.3
TXT Processes under subclass 401.2 of manipulating printing-plates so that the
    desired pressure will be obtained at all portions of the design, also
    "make-readys" and processes of preparing and using them.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, for the mere straightening of printing-plates.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    59 for a method of making a relief or intaglio representation of a three
    dimensional object.

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 67 and 69 for reproduction of
    surfaces by electrodeposition.


CLS 101/401.4
TXT Processes under subclass 401.1 of forming type having a plurality of
    characters arranged in line on a single body member of a standard
    type-point thickness; also blanks for the same.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401.6,  for related apparatus.


CLS 101/401.5
TXT Machines under subclass 368 for forming metal printing-surfaces other than
    by etching, casting, deposition, or straight embossing unaccompanied by
    special manipulations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401.2+, for related processes.


CLS 101/401.6
TXT Machines under subclass 401.5 for forming type having a plurality of
    characters arranged in line on a single body member of a standard
    type-point thickness.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401.4,  for related processes.


CLS 101/402
TXT Devices under subclass 368 comprising means not having printing-surfaces
    adapted to be locked up in the form to maintain the printing elements in
    proper position.


CLS 101/403
TXT Devices under subclass 402 adapted for insertion within a line between the
    type, usually for separating words.


CLS 101/404
TXT Devices under subclass 402 for surrounding and holding the type-forms
    intact during transfer and adapted to be locked up in the chase.


CLS 101/405
TXT Devices under subclass 368 having means directly attached to free printing
    members whereby they may be grasped for use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 328 for labeled hand
    stamps.


CLS 101/406
TXT Devices under subclass 405 so attached as to permit angular movement
    between the handle and printing member during impression.


CLS 101/407.1
TXT WORK SUPPORTING MEMBERS:

    Members under the class definition having means for supporting the material
    being printed during the act of impression.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401.3,  for "make-readys".


CLS 101/408
TXT Grippers under subclass 407.1 having automatic means for grasping the work.


CLS 101/409
TXT Grippers under subclass 408 carried by a cylinder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246,    for rotary machines having gripper cylinders.


CLS 101/410
TXT Grippers under subclass 409 being circumferentially movable with relation
    to the cylinder.


CLS 101/411
TXT Gripper carrying means under subclass 409 adapted to be operated in
    opposite directions by separate obstructions in the path of travel.


CLS 101/412
TXT Grippers under subclass 409 there being no means included for operating the
    gripper-jaws.


CLS 101/413
TXT Devices under subclass 407.1 having means mounted upon the work-supporting
    members to position the work preparatory to printing.


CLS 101/414
TXT Devices under subclass 413 being actuated by the operation of the machine.


CLS 101/415
TXT Devices under subclass 413 adapted to be attached directly to the sheet
    which underlies the work.


CLS 101/415.1
TXT Means under class definition for attaching to their supports and stretching
    the flexible sheets employed in printing operations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    126, 131, 131.5, 132, 132.5, 133, 378, 407.1, and 418, for related
    securing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 95+ for
    means for attaching a sheet of blotting material to a backing which, in
    indented subclasses 95.1+, is part of a handle.

    346,    Recorders, appropriate subclasses.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 23+ and 648+ for typewriter plates.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 352, 353, 458, 496+, and 504+ for an abrasive
    sheet securing device.

    492,    Roll or Roller, subclasses 22+ for a roll per se, not elsewhere
    provided for, having means to grip or impale the edge of a sheet.


CLS 101/416.1
TXT ANTISMUT DEVICES:

    Means under the class definition to prevent the improper deposition of ink
    or the rubbing of the ink on the work.

    (1)     Note.  Combined processes and apparatus for printing and drying are
    in this class (101), appropriate subclasses, particularly this subclasses
    (416+).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses
    for processes and apparatus for drying freshly printed matter.


CLS 101/417
TXT Devices under subclass 416.1 employing strips of continuous or indefinite
    length which contact the printed matter.  The web may be either absorbent
    or nonabsorbent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    419,    for similar organizations using sheets instead of strips.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 94 and 306
    for such processes and devices with additional steps or means to cause
    drying such as the step or means to feed a drying fluid.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 520+ for convolute
    winding or subclasses 550+ for unwinding in general use.


CLS 101/418
TXT Devices under subclass 417, the ends of the strip being secured to reels
    mounted within a cylinder, over the periphery of which the strip passes.


CLS 101/419
TXT Devices under subclass 416.1 in which separate pieces of sheet material are
    applied to the printed matter.  Such sheet material may be absorbent or
    nonabsorbent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    417+,   for similar organizations using strips.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 94 and 306
    for such processes and devices with additional steps or means to cause
    drying, such as the step or means to feed a drying fluid.

    270,    Sheet-Material Associating, subclasses 58.01+ for sheet associating.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering.


CLS 101/420
TXT Devices under subclass 416.1 operating to keep the freshly-printed work
    from touching undesired parts of the apparatus.


CLS 101/421
TXT Devices under subclass 420 in which shields having openings therein are
    placed over the work, with the portions of the work which are to receive
    the impressions being in register with openings.


CLS 101/422
TXT Devices under subclass 416.1 dependent on use of surfaces to which the ink
    will not adhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclass 2 for ink repellent
    compositions.


CLS 101/423
TXT Devices under subclass 416.1 adapted to remove from portions of the
    apparatus ink received from the work.


CLS 101/424
TXT Devices under subclass 423 employing detergents or analogous substances to
    facilitate the cleaning.


CLS 101/424.1
TXT Drying with fluid (air) or by heating:

    Means under subclass 416.1 wherein air or heat is applied to the work so
    that the ink will be dried, this preventing smutting.


CLS 101/424.2
TXT Anti-offset material application:

    Means under subclass 416.1 wherein an additional material is applied to the
    work to set the ink thereon preventing it's smearing or smutting.


CLS 101/425
TXT Attachments under class definition for printing apparatus for removing
    undesirable matter from the work or from parts of the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    423+,   for means for removing from the apparatus ink received from the
    work.


CLS 101/450.1
TXT Processes of lithographic printing:

    Process of printing under subclass 130 utilizing a plate or surface which
    has first areas of configuration or printing to be reproduced, which first
    areas accept ink to be transferred to a sheet or other material, and which
    plate or surface has second areas that are not to be reproduced, which
    second areas reject ink so as to prevent transfer of ink therefrom to said
    sheet or other material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for processes of embossing or penetrating.

    129,    for processes of stencilling.

    170,    for processes of printing by intaglio.

    211,    for processes of printing by use of multicolor.

    401.1+, for printing members, processes,and blanks.

    483,    for processes of printing in general.


CLS 101/451
TXT Process under subclass 450.1 including the step of applying a liquid to the
    plate or surface, said liquid depending upon the mutual immiscibility of
    water and ink or aliphatic hydrocarbons and nonoily or nonoleoresinous inks
    for its rejection or acceptance by said areas.

    (1)     Note.  The liquid applied to the plate may contain both the ink and
    the ink-repellent material or, two fluids may be applied at intervals to
    supply the ink or ink-repellent material in separate applications thereof.

    (2)     Note.  Fluids of this type are usually referred to as dampening or
    fountain solutions.


CLS 101/452
TXT Process under subclass 451 wherein the liquid applied to the plate or
    surface does not contain water.


CLS 101/453
TXT Articles or devices for printing under subclass 130 characterized by having
    a surface which has a first area of configuration or printing to be
    reproduced, which first area receives ink to be transferred to other
    materials, and second areas on said surface which are not to be reproduced,
    which second areas are not receptive to ink thus failing to transfer ink
    therefrom to said other material.

    (1)     Note.  The ink-repellent and ink-receptive surface portions are
    usually in the form of coatings or impregnations which are distinguished as
    being nonprinting portions (ink repellent) and printing portions
    (ink-receptive) carried upon a suitable base or support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    395,    for a printing plate having surface characteristics other than
    planographic.

    401.1,  for a printing blank not restricted to planographic printing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet, and especially subclasses 195+ for such a product including a
    discontinuous or differential coating (e.g., design or indicia to be
    printed) and subclasses 615+ for a product having a metal bonded to a
    metal, or plural metal layers.


CLS 101/454
TXT Articles or devices under subclass 453 wherein the ink-repellent or
    ink-receptive surface portions are in the form of an impregnation or layer
    carried upon a base which includes metal.

    (1)     Note.  The metal support must be the ultimate carrier for the layer
    or coating, and does not have to be contiguous therewith.


CLS 101/455
TXT Articles or devices under subclass 454 in which the ink-repellent or
    ink-receptive layer or impregnation includes (A) fused silica, (B) a
    mixture of fused silica and alkali or alkaline silicates, or (C) the salts
    of the silicic acids, commonly known as glass.


CLS 101/456
TXT Articles or devices under subclass 454 in which the ink-repellent or
    ink-receptive layer or impregnation includes a composition or compound
    which solidifies upon being exposed to a light source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    467,    for processes of making lithographic plates ink-receptive by use of
    light.

    471,    for processes of making or using copy material by exposure to light.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 621+, for means to apply electrical
    and/or radiant energy to work and/or coating material.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 457+ for processes of coating wherein
    electrical, magnetic or wave energy is utilized.


CLS 101/457
TXT Articles or devices under subclass 454 in which the ink-repellent or
    ink-receptive layer or impregnation includes either a naturally occurring
    gum or resin, or a synthetic resin, that is, complex organic compounds
    produced from ingredients which are nonresinous in themselves, and which
    compounds simulate natural resins in that they are usually adapted for
    forming films or for use as binders in plastic compositions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, for synthetic resins or
    natural rubber and compositions thereof.


CLS 101/458
TXT Articles under subclass 454 in which the ink-repellent or ink-receptive
    layer is a metal.

    (1)     Note.  The metal layer of this subclass is one which is additional
    to the metal base support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 544+ for stock
    materials, e.g., of indefinite length, which are all metal or have adjacent
    metal components.


CLS 101/459
TXT Articles under subclass 458 in which said ink-repellent or ink-receptive
    layers or impregnation contains aluminum, copper, or zinc or alloys thereof.


CLS 101/460
TXT Articles under subclass 453 wherein the ink-repellent or ink-receptive
    surface portions are in the form of an impregnation of, or layer carried
    upon, a base of carbohydrate material derived from the structural material
    of plant life.

    (1)     Note. Cellulosic is inclusive of lignocellulose, cellulose, and
    chemically modified forms of cellulose as cellophane, pyroxylin, viscose,
    and rayon.

    (2)     Note. Where the support itself is a cellulosic product which is a
    resin and is ink-repellent or ink-receptive the patent would be placed in
    the appropriate subclass indented below.


CLS 101/461
TXT Articles under subclass 460 in which the ink-repellent or ink-receptive
    layer or impregnation includes a complex nitrogenous substance composed
    mainly of an a-amino-acid residue joined by peptide linkages, or compounds
    or compositions hydrolized thereto.


CLS 101/462
TXT Articles under subclass 460 in which the ink-repellent or ink-receptive
    layer or impregnation includes either a naturally occurring gum or resin,
    or a synthetic resin, that is, complex organic compounds produced from
    ingredients which are nonresinous in themselves, and which compounds
    simulate natural resins in that they are usually adapted for forming films
    or for use as binders in plastic compositions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, for synthetic resins or
    natural rubbers and compositions thereof.


CLS 101/463.1
TXT Lithographic plate making, and processes of making or using copy elements,
    and elements, per se:

    Process under subclass 130 including (a) the manufacture of a printing
    plate having an ink-repellent portion and an ink-receptive portion thereon,
    or (b) the process of manufacture or use of a master sheet having an
    ink-design thereon, said design being capable of transfer to a plurality of
    sheets or surfaces to be printed without re-inking between successive
    transfers, or (c) such master sheet material, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, particularly subclass 2 for
    coating repellent compositions; and subclass 14.5 for hectographic or
    copying compositions.

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, particularly subclass 127 for processes of
    making printing members involving electrolytic steps.

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, subclass 210 for the manufacturing
    of a printing roll using etching.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 144 for processes of forming a uniform
    coating on a substrate disclosed as useful in making copying surfaces.  See
    the notes in subclass 144 for a more detailed line between that class and
    Class 101.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 49, 204, and 300+ for process of making printing plates.


CLS 101/464
TXT Subject matter under subclass 463.1, having a marking material absorbed in
    a master pellicle transferred to another pellicle by absorption through
    contact between pellicles.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass usually disclose the duplication of
    color photographs by dye migration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211,    for other multicolor printing processes.

    468,    for copying processes.

    473,    for copying sheets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, appropriate subclasses for dyeing processes of general
    application.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 232+ and especially subclass
    234 for motion picture carriers.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 200+ for film to film imbibition.


CLS 101/465
TXT Process of manufacture under subclass 463.1 wherein a printing surface is
    treated to modify a selected (particular) surface portion thereof to cause
    it to either (A) repell water and aliphatic hydrocarbons; (B) receive inks
    whether greasy, nonoily or nonoleoresinous; or (C) both to repel water and
    aliphatic hydrocarbons and to receive greasy, nonoily or nonoleoresinous
    inks.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and its indents are restricted to patents for
    making printing plates which depend upon re-inking to make multiple copies
    therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    468,    for methods of printing without re-inking to produce multiple
    copies.


CLS 101/466
TXT Process of manufacture under subclass 465 wherein a plate surface portion
    has been treated to become receptive to inks whether greasy, nonoily or
    nonoleoresinous.


CLS 101/467
TXT Process under subclass 466 wherein a source of caloric energy effects a
    modification of the plate surface portion.

    (1)     Note.  Patents directed to heating the surface merely to dry, are
    not proper subject matter for this subclass, but will be found in various
    subclasses, based on other characteristics.

    (2)     Note.  Caloric energy may be produced by electricity, light, or any
    other means which elevates the temperature to effect a modification of the
    plate surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 621+ for means to apply electrical or
    radiant energy to work or coating material.


CLS 101/468
TXT Process under subclass 463.1 including (A) the manufacture or use of a
    master sheet having an ink design or printing thereon, said design being
    capable of being transferred to a plurality of sheets or surfaces to be
    printed, without re-inking between successive transfers, or (B) such master
    sheet material, per se.

    (1)     Note.  Patents directed to hectographic printing steps are proper
    subject matter for this and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131+,   for copying apparatus.


CLS 101/469
TXT Process of manufacture or use under subclass 468 in which a particular hue
    or tint is given to the ink design or printing by a chemical reaction or by
    the addition of a mordant to a dye component of the ink, such mordant
    serving to give the ink a more permanent characteristic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    464,    for color formation or mordanting during imbibition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 400-696 for dye compositions and methods of
    dyeing.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 539+ for color.


CLS 101/470
TXT Process of manufacture or use under subclass 468 in which the master sheet
    is made by the application of caloric energy.

    (1)     Note.  For additional search notes on the use of radiant energy,
    see search notes under subclass 467.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    467,    for processes utilizing radiant energy or heat in making
    lithographic plates.


CLS 101/471
TXT Process of manufacture or use under subclass 470 in which the caloric
    energy is in the form of electromagnetic wave energy.

    (1)     Note.  The term electromagnetic wave energy includes visible and
    invisible light radiation such as ordinary infrared, and ultraviolet
    radiations.


CLS 101/472
TXT Process of manufacture or use under subclass 468 in which the ink design or
    printing is contacted by a substance, usually liquid, which causes part of
    the ink in the design to dissolve and transfer to the surface being made or
    printed.

    (1)     Note.  This is the proper locus for patents directed to application
    of a solvent to a copy sheet, or having a solvent contained in the
    reproducing material, or a solvent contained in a copy sheet.


CLS 101/473
TXT Articles or manufacture under subclass 468 comprising copy master sheets,
    or copy elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet and embodying a hectographic or copying surface; not especially
    subclasses 195+ for such a product comprising a discontinuous or
    differential coating, impregnation or bond, and subclass 914 (a
    cross-reference art collection) for a transfer or decalcomania product.


CLS 101/474
TXT Work held on flat surface:

    Means under subclass 407.1 wherein the support for holding the material
    being printed during the impression is a planar surface.


CLS 101/475
TXT Work in rolling contact with printing plate:

    Means under subclass 407.1 wherein the support for the material being
    printed during the act of impression is a support adapted to hold the work
    as it is rolled into contact with the printing plate.


CLS 101/476
TXT PRINTING ON STACKED ARTICLES:

    Means under the class definition for accommodating one item piled on top of
    one or more other such items at a printing station.


CLS 101/477
TXT PRINT PLATE FEEDING OR DELIVERING:

    Means under the class definition for conveying an indicia forming member to
    or from a printing station so that a new printing surface may be used.


CLS 101/478
TXT ERASABLE PLATE:

    Means under the class definition for the removal, or modification of
    normally fixed indicia on a printing member.


CLS 101/479
TXT ASSEMBLY OR DISASSEMBLY FEATURE:

    Means under the class definition which allows for the ready removal or
    replacement of portions of a printing means for purposed of renewal or
    repair.

    (1)     Note.  The renewal or repair must be incidental to the printing
    operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 700+ for assembly or disassembly of
    printing presses which are not incidental to press operation (see Note
    above).


CLS 101/480
TXT PRESS PART OR ATTACHMENT:

    Device under the class definition which is a subcombination of, or an
    addition to, a printing press and performs some function in printing.


CLS 101/481
TXT LAYOUT OR REGISTRATION:

    Means under the class definition to position either a printing surface or a
    print receptor for alignment purposes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    485+,   for a process involving positioning or alignment of a printing
    means or a print receptor.

    Digest 12, for a collection of art relating to the registration or
    alignment of a print plate on a print press structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 614+ if no printing apparatus
    claimed.


CLS 101/482
TXT TAB:

    Printing means under the class definition which are provided with a tag or
    ear used for identification or location purposes.


CLS 101/483
TXT PROCESSES:

    Processes under the class definition of printing in general.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17      and 32, for embossing or penetrating processes.

    34,     for processes of transferring preparatory designs.

    129,    for stenciling processes.

    170,    for intaglio processes.

    211,    for multicolor processes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing:  Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 467+, for diffusion transfer dyeing
    processes.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 52+ for electrolytic marking or a
    composition therefor (e.g., electrolytic printing, etc.).

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 132 for a step of applying an indicia or a design, e.g., printing,
    to a workpiece out of the mold, when combined with a molding or shaping
    operation.

    346,    Recorders, subclasses 2+ for phenomenal apparatus and processes
    recording.

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, subclasses 1+ for
    processes and apparatus for conveying information by selectively creating
    on a medium a visibly distinguishable symbol or mark composed of a
    plurality of portions.


CLS 101/484
TXT Condition responsive:

    Process under subclass 483 wherein a process step is performed in response
    to a sensed changing or abnormal condition or circumstance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    Digest 24,      for ink control.

    Digest 26,      for blade positioning.


CLS 101/485
TXT Position or alignment:

    Process under subclass 483 wherein provision is made for adjustment of
    position or registration between parts, images, impressions or products.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248     and 286, for cylinder registration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 614+ if no printing apparatus
    detail claimed.


CLS 101/486
TXT Of print means:

    Process under subclass 485 wherein the position adjustment or registration
    includes positioning the means used to form the image.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    Digest 12, for a collection of art relating to the registering of printing
    means.


CLS 101/487
TXT With heating or cooling:

    Process under subclass 483 wherein a temperature modifying treatment is
    provided for the printing apparatus or the materials used or worked on.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, subclass 76.1 for phenomenal recording using thermal
    apparatus and processes.

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, subclasses 171+ for
    thermal apparatus and processes for printing incremental symbolic
    information, especially subclasses 185+ for preheating and subclasses 223
    for cooling device.


CLS 101/488
TXT Of print medium:

    Process under subclass 487 wherein an image formed by printing is subjected
    to a temperature modifying treatment after transfer to a receptor to modify
    or fix the image.

    (1)     Note.  This type of step is usually performed to drive off solvent
    or cure ink.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    424.1,  for drying by heating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, for drying, per se.


CLS 101/489
TXT Electric or magnetic transfer:

    Process under subclass 483 wherein an impression printing step is
    supplemented or assisted by using a difference in electrostatic or magnetic
    attraction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 621+ for electrostatic projection or
    attraction of material to work.

    346,    Recorders, subclass 74.2 for nonvisible images magnetically
    transferred to a recording media.

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, subclasses 111+ for
    apparatus and processes including means to apply electricity to a medium
    for recording an image and especially subclasses 112+ for apparatus and
    processes using electrostatic charge as the applied electricity.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 130+ for image formation, subclass
    154 for image formation with transfer of latent image, and subclasses 297+
    for transfer of toner image, per se.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 12+ for processes of electrostatic or
    magnetic projection of material to work.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 31+ for processes, compositions and products used in
    electromagnetic radiation image formation for printing.


CLS 101/490
TXT Plural impressions on a single article:

    Process under subclass 483 wherein a print receptor is subjected to two or
    more separate impressions or two or more separate impressions are made to
    form a single indicia.


CLS 101/491
TXT Specific ink:

    Process under subclass 483 wherein a particular printing step is performed
    because of a peculiar characteristic of the ink.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:   Coating or Plastic, subclasses 31.13+ for specific
    ink compositions.


CLS 101/492
TXT Transfer or offset:

    Process under subclass 483 wherein a printing step uses one or more
    intermediate surfaces between an image donor or formation surface and a
    final image receptor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137,    142+, 154, 177, 217+, and 251+, for transfer or offset apparatus.

    468+,   for copying type transfer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    230+ for decal type transfer.


CLS 101/493
TXT Resilient surface:

    Process under subclass 483 wherein a donor, receptor, or support therefor
    is provided with a yielding outer portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    376,    for yielding surface rollers.

    379,    for a yielding surface.


CLS 101/494
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Means under the class definition for performing operations falling in this
    class not provided for in other subclasses.

    FOREIGN ART COLLECTIONS

    The definitions for FOR 100-FOR 103 below correspond to the definitions of
    the abolished subclasses under Class 101 from which these collections were
    formed. See the Foreign Art Collection schedule for specific
    correspondences. [Note: The titles and definitions for indented art
    collections include all the details of the one(s) that are hierarchically
    superior.]


CLS 101/FOR100
TXT Foreign art collection peculiarly adapted for inking the printing
    member of a rotary press.


CLS 101/FOR101
TXT Foreign art collection  being supplied with ink from a reservoir.


CLS 101/FOR102
TXT Foreign art collection with means to prevent inking other than a
    mere hand cut-off from the supply.


CLS 101/FOR103
TXT Foreign art collection with means to prevent inking.


CLS 102/
TTL AMMUNITION AND EXPLOSIVES

CLS 102/
TXT

    I.      TERM DEFINED:

    EXPLOSIVE

    The term is used to include a detonating, deflagrating, or thermic
    composition of the type defined in the class definition of Class 149,
    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges.

    PAYLOAD:

    A container for holding explosive, research, reconnaissance, or counter
    measure equipment, animal life, parachute, etc., which is propelled into
    the air by an explosive means.

    MISSILE:

    Any object thrown, dropped, projected, or propelled for the purpose of
    making it damage a target.

    II.     GENERAL STATEMENT OF THE CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    This is the residual class for ammunition propelled by explosives and
    explosives methods or means which includes:

    A.      Missile, blasting means, payload, pyrotechnic, gun ammunition
    and/or miscellaneous explosive means.

    B.      Gun barrel cleaning means which are propelled through the barrel by
    explosive or fluid under high pressure.

    C.      Fluid under high pressure, other then chemical reaction, which
    escape very rapidly.

    D.      Material which burns or combusts which is intended to be projected,
    dropped, thrown, or propelled is proper for the class.

    (1)     By releasing a combustion material to the atmosphere, e.g., gas,
    incendiary shell, grenade, etc.

    (2)     By generating heat to damage an object, e.g., thermite means.

    E.      Subcombination peculiar to the class which are not classified in
    other classes, e.g., cartridge case, primer ignitor, fuse, sabot, rifling
    band, wad, propellant form, etc.

    F.      Dummy, practice, drill, training ammunition, etc., is classified
    with the conventional ammunition.

    G.      Patents issued prior to 1950 have not in all instance been
    classified by their claimed disclosure but by their total disclosure so
    that placement of these older patents does not necessarily indicate lines
    of classification.

    III.    CLASSIFICATION LINES AND SEARCH NOTES TO OTHER CLASSES

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 421.2 for shaping by direct application of
    explosive pressure.

    42,     Firearms, for guns and gun ammunition combinations.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 53 for shaping metal by shot-blasting;
    and subclass 56 for shaping metal by an explosive.

    86,     Ammunition and Explosive-Charge Making, for the processes of making
    explosive charges or ammunition for firearms, ordnance, pyrotechnic,
    blasting charges, etc.

    89,     Ordnance, for guns of the class type and subclass 1.14 for
    explosive-operated apparatus, e.g, explosive and door hinge, tool
    explosively actuated, band release, expansion of tube, cable cutter, etc.

    109,    Safe, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclasses 36+ for
    safe, bank protection and related devices combined with explsive means.

    114,    Ships, subclasses 20.1+ for marine torpedoes having
    self-propulsion; and subclass 221 for chain cutting.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 11, 15, 17, 23, 78, 83, 87+, and
    105  for detonating alarms adapted to be fired by intruders or by the
    occurrence of some event.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 24 for explosive-type fluid
    boilers.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 24 and 183 for
    internal-combustion engines and engines starters employing gun-powder
    charges.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Changes, for explosive and
    thermic composition.

    166,    Wells, subclass 299 for well processes using explosives; subclass
    55.1 for well-tubing perforators operated by explosives combined with a
    disparate feature and perforator which do not act inherently to penetrate
    the formation; and subclass 63 for well apparatus with an explosive means.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, subclasses 28 and 58 for explosive fire
    extinguisher.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 1 and 2+ for process or
    apparatus for boring a hole into the earth including a below-ground
    explosion or for subject matter relating to a gun or shape charge device
    for penetrating an earth formation or perforating a casing or other wall
    member in an inaccessible hole in the earth, see section V of the class
    definition of Class 175 for the line between classes (102) and 175.

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 116 for geophysical or subsurface exploration
    using an explosive.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 524.1 for ammunition
    receptacles.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclasses 191+ for cartridge belts.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclass 2.5 for explosive welding means; and
    subclass 107 for the process of using explosive energy for bonding.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 2.1 and 14.1
    for rain producing methods and apparatus.

    244,    Aeronautic, subclasses 3.1+ for trajectory control or stabilizing
    means for propelled or thrown explosive weapons or for missiles; and
    subclass 14 for air-sustained, self-propelled aerial torpedoes; and
    subclass 117 for heat shields.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclasses 210+ and 487 for railway
    torpedoes.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 3 for processes of shaping or treating explosive or propellent
    articles.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 728+ for air bag type passenger safety
    guard attachments.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclass 13 for
    process of disintegrating by explosives; and subclass 20 for expansible
    breaking-down devices.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 627+ for
    distribution or control panel boards with fuses.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 34 for chemilluminescent lighting.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclass 145 for means to cause underwater shock wave by an explosion.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 357+ for a flashing charge type illuminating
    burner; subclasses 288+ for a candle or candle apparatus; and appropriate
    subclass for a residual process or structure specialized to combustion or
    combustion starting and not specifically provided for in Class 110 or in
    some other class.


CLS 102/200
TXT IGNITING DEVICES AND SYSTEMS:

    Subject matter under the class definition for initiating the combustion or
    detonation of explosive or thermic compositions or charges.

    (1)     Note.  The explosive or thermic compositions or charges of this
    subclass type are the same as those defined in the class definition of
    Class 149, Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges.

    (2)     Note.  Illustrative of the devices and systems of this subclass
    type are missile and ordnance fuzes, both mechanical and electrical, and
    priming and igniting devices and systems not specifically provided for
    elsewhere in this class.

    (3)     Note.  Systems, as used in this subclass and the subclasses
    indented hereunder, refer to a plurality of electrical, mechanical and/or
    explosive elements all acting in a pattern or sequence to cause detonation
    or combustion of a main explosive such as a war head or propellant.
    Typical of such systems is the type commonly referred to as a firing train.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for  fuses and ignitors, per se, for  marine type drop bombs,
    specially designed for operation in water, e.g., those operated by water
    flow or by hydrostatic pressure.

    7.4,    for drop bombs having a target contact anticipator for controlling
    or operating an ignitor.

    16+,    for igniting devices for marine-type mines.

    19.2,   for igniting devices for mines other than the marine type involving
    the use of electricity, magnetic wave, or radiant energy.

    27+,    for igniting devices for blasting cartridges and devices.

    45+,    for primers for gun cartridges.

    49.7,   for ignitors for missile rocket motors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 143+ for ignition systems
    in internal-combustion engines.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, for explosive
    compositions, per se, which may be used for igniting other explosives.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 247+ for
    circuits, per se, for igniting explosives.

    431,    Combustion, appropriate subclasses for igniting devices used in
    combustion.


CLS 102/201
TXT Laser or light initiated:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 in which the explosive is ignited by
    visible radiant energy.

    (1)     Note.  Not included herein are devices which detect light (i.e.,
    photocell circuits) and then cause ignition of an explosive.


CLS 102/202
TXT Propellant ignitors:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 for initiating the combustion of a charge
    for driving missiles in which the driving charge travels with the missile.

    (1)     Note.  For devices such as impact or friction primers for igniting
    propelling charges of the type that do not travel with the missile, e.g.,
    for propelling gun cartridges, search this class, subclass 204 or 205.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49.7,   for ignitors in combination with a missile rocket motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 39.821+ for ignition devices in
    combination with power plants; and subclass 256 for ignitors in combination
    with rocket motors.

    89,     Ordnance, subclasses 1.813+ for ignition devices for rockets in
    launching devices.


CLS 102/202.1
TXT Accidental fuse ignition prevention means:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 which includes a device, to set off an
    explosive or thermic composition or charge, which includes means to prevent
    an unwanted energization of the device.

    (1)     Note.  Electrical and nonelectrical primers and igniters are
    included in the term "device".


CLS 102/202.11
TXT Having an electric matchhead:

    Subject matter under subclass 202.5 wherein the composition or charge burns
    to produce a flame when ignited by the electrical igniting device and the
    composition or charge is integral with the electrical igniting device.

    (1)     Note.  There may or may not be a housing to encompass the matchhead.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclasses 507+ or matches.


CLS 102/202.12
TXT Assemblies (e.g., packaging):

    Subject matter under subclass 202.5 wherein the recited elements form an
    electric blasting cap having leads to supply power to the igniting or
    detonating device and there is a support member to (a) support the blasting
    cap within or on the support member or (b) permit the coiling of the lead
    wires about, within, or on the support member to form a compact unit when
    not in use or (c) there is an electric blasting cap with leads long enough
    to coil the lead wires into a wire bundle with the cap inserted within the
    bundle, in either case, to form a packaged item before use.

    (1)     Note.  The support member may also be designed to hold a explosive
    charge as a stick of dynamite as well as the blasting cap.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 701+ for a special
    receptacle or package for an electrical component.


CLS 102/202.13
TXT Having a powder train time delay:

    Subject matter under subclass 202.5 which additionally includes in a common
    unit a combustible chemical composition which is ignited or detonated by
    the explosive or thermic material when it is ignited or detonated to cause
    a delay in the time a further explosive or thermic composition will be
    ignited in the same unit as a result of the detonated or ignited
    composition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    275.3,  for a fuse cord with a connector having a combustible time delay.

    275.9,  for nonelectric fuses having a combustible time delay.

    277.1+, for munition type combustible time delays.


CLS 102/202.14
TXT With housing:

    Subject matter under subclass 202.5 wherein the explosive or thermic
    composition or charge and the electrical igniting or detonating device are
    within a common container.

    (1)     Note.  Blasting caps having an electric bridgewire igniting device
    and an explosive charge in a common container are here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202.7,  for a detonator having an exploding bridgewire and an explosive or
    thermic charge within a container.

    202.8,  for a spark gap and an explosive or thermic charge or a conductive
    explosive ignitor or detonator within a container.

    202.11, for an electric matchhead and an explosive or thermic charge within
    a container.

    202.13, for an electric igniting or detonating device, a combustible time
    delay, and an explosive or thermic charge within a container.

    322,    for contained blasting charges with a primer or ignitor having an
    explosive or thermic charge with an electric detonating or igniting device
    in a common container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 264+ for
    igniting systems for explosive devices having incandescent ignition.


CLS 102/202.2
TXT Having electromagnetic field effects diminishing or elimination means:

    Subject matter under subclass 202.1 wherein the device has lead wires
    connected thereto and means forming part of the device to attenuate or
    eliminate (a) the effects of electromagnetic radiation on all or part of
    the device, (b) the passage of unwanted frequencies of alternating currents
    or voltages through the lead wires or the device, (c) the passage of
    unwanted current or voltage through the lead wires or the device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 32+ for
    anti-inductive structures.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 607+ for quick make and break
    connectors having a screen to reduce or eliminate the self-inductance of a
    connector or external magnetic fields on a connector.


CLS 102/202.3
TXT Fuse device resistive shunt:

    Subject matter under subclass 202.1 wherein the device includes bare lead
    wires and a resistive shunt connected between the wires or between a wire
    and a casing of the device so that the bulk of the current caused by
    accidental abnormal voltages is diverted through the shunt to prevent the
    ignition of the device.

    (1)     Note.  The shunt may or may not be removed when the device is
    energized.

    (2)     Note.  The shunt, per se, is here.

    (3)     Note.  The term "lead wires" include terminals.

    (4)     Note.  Here the resistance of the shunt is fixed.  See subclass
    202.5 for resistances which change due to high voltage breakdown.

    (5)     Note.  See subclass 202.1 for devices to short circuit the bare
    leads of the device.


CLS 102/202.4
TXT Voltage responsive variable resistance shunt (e.g., semiconductor shunts):

    Subject matter under subclass 202.3 wherein the resistive shunt has a high
    resistance to normal operating voltage and a lower resistance to higher
    than normal voltage present between the wires or a wire and the casing to
    pass most of the currents caused by the higher voltage through the shunt.

    (1)     Note.  The shunt may be a gas which conducts when the higher
    voltage ionizes the gas or a semiconductive material that breaks down and
    passes current.

    (2)     Note.  Here are spark gaps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 63+ for dielectric or electrically
    insulating compositions.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 325 for miscellaneous
    discharge devices.


CLS 102/202.5
TXT Electric primer or ignitor:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 which includes an explosive or thermic
    composition or charge and an electrical igniting or detonating device to
    cause the composition or charge to attain its combustion or detonation
    point.

    (1)     Note.  In this group of subclasses are electrically energized
    ignitors or detonators not contained in a container.  If there are
    components in addition to the detonating or igniting device forming an
    electric circuit within the container common unit and wires or terminals
    leading outside the unit to some continuation of the circuit, the claim
    will be classified within this group of subclasses.  If electrical
    components are claimed in addition to the lead wires outside of common
    unit, the claim will be classified under subclasses 206+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202.1+, for accidental fuse ignition prevention means.

    206+,   for electrical ignition or detonation circuits.

    275.9,  for in name only electrical primers claiming a housing with an
    explosive therein.

    305+,   for detonation wave modifying.

    311+,   for patterned blasting.

    313,    for borehole loading.

    322,    for a contained blasting charge with an electric primer or ignitor.

    332,    for a blasting charge with an electrical primer or ignitor.

    380,    for a reaction motor having a propellent charge ignitor.

    419+,   for electrically fired mines.

    472,    for electric primer means with breech end cartridge case structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    86,     Ammunition and Explosive-Charge Making, subclass 1 for methods of
    making fuses.

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 116+ for seismic wave generation explosive
    devices.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 260+ for resistive ignitors.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 248+ for
    igniting systems for explosives.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave System and Devices,
    subclass 145 for underwater explosive type transmitter signal transducers.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 258+ for a burner having an electrical
    heater or igniter.


CLS 102/202.6
TXT Having an additional ignitor or water destructible fuse:

    Subject matter under subclass 202.5 wherein there is (a) a second igniting
    or detonating device to cause the composition or charge to burn or
    detonate, or (b) means, including a housing for enclosing the composition
    or charge and the igniting or detonating device, affected by water to cause
    the igniting or the detonating device from energizing or the composition or
    charge from igniting or detonating.

    (1)     Note.  The term "burn" includes deflagrating charges or
    compositions.

    (2)     Note.  Here the composition or charge and the two means to ignite
    or detonate the composition or charge are in a common housing.

    (3)     Note.  Munition and blasting fuses are in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    265+,   for multiple mode fuses.

    426,    for automatic deactivation or self-destructing mines.


CLS 102/202.7
TXT Having an exploding bridgewire:

    Subject matter under subclass 202.5 wherein the electrical device is an
    electrically conductive wire or semiconductor which vaporizes when
    electrically energized and produces a shock wave of high pressure or high
    temperature which causes the composition or charge to detonate, deflagrate
    or burn.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 61.08 for
    destructible circuit makers or breakers.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclasses 227+ for electrothermal fusible elements having a fuse link
    carrier or holder; and subclasses 290+ for electrothermal fusible links or
    element structure or material.


CLS 102/202.8
TXT Having a spark gap or conductive composition or charge:

    Subject matter under subclass 202.5 wherein the device produces an electric
    arc to ignite or detonate the composition or charge or the composition or
    charge is electrically conductive so that in an electric energized circuit
    the charge or composition is self-detonating or igniting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 383+ for nonmetal arc heating devices;
    and subclasses 552+ for heating element structure.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 500+ for electrically conductive
    compositions.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 306+ for discharge
    devices having three or more electrodes; subclass 309 for discharge devices
    having a multi-pointed or serrated edge electrode; and subclass 325 for
    miscellaneous discharge devices.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    generally.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 326+ for
    discharge device loads.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 264+ for a burner with a spark electrode.


CLS 102/202.9
TXT With electric terminals:

    Subject matter under subclass 202.5 wherein the electric igniting or
    detonating device has an electric power connection of the quick make or
    break type to connect the device with an appropriate source of power.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202.14, for an igniting or primer device with a housing having wires to
    connect the device with an energizing electrical source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 775+ for a metallic connector
    having a movable or resilient securing part.


CLS 102/204
TXT Percussion primers or ignitors:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 comprising means to ignite an explosive
    by mechanical force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     for percussive actuated explosives to initiate blasting explosives.

    45,     for percussive actuated explosives to initiate gun cartridges.


CLS 102/205
TXT Heat, friction, or chemical primers or ignitors:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 comprising heating, friction, or chemical
    means to ignite an explosive.


CLS 102/206
TXT Ignition or detonation circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 comprising an electrical circuit, or
    components of an electrical circuit to supply electrical energy to an
    igniting device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for circuits for selectively firing units of mines in fields or
    groups.

    16,     for marine mine firing circuits.

    19.2,   for nonmarine mine firing circuits.

    20+,    for circuits for firing well explosives.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 247+ for
    similar circuits.


CLS 102/207
TXT Including activated generator:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 including means to selectively convert
    nonelectrical energy into electrical energy.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter for supplying electrical energy which is
    excluded from this subclass includes, for example, storage batteries and
    capacitors merely switched into a circuit.  Subject matter included in this
    subclass includes, for example, tribo-electric generators and thermal and
    deferred-action batteries.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, appropriate subclasses for
    electrical generators, per se.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process, subclasses 110+ for deferred-action batteries, per se.


CLS 102/208
TXT Turbine:

    Subject matter under subclass 207 wherein the electrical generator
    comprises a rotating member driven by fluid flow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 10+ for
    dynamoelectric generators, per se.


CLS 102/209
TXT Magnetic:

    Subject matter under subclass 207 wherein electricity is generated by
    relative movement between a coil and magnetic material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 10+ for
    dynamoelectric generators, per se.


CLS 102/210
TXT Piezoelectric crystal:

    Subject matter under subclass 207 wherein the electrical generator
    comprises a piezoelectric crystal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 311 for
    piezoelectric generators, per se.


CLS 102/211
TXT Proximity fuze:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 which comprises a means for sensing the
    distance or proximity of a target, such sensing means causing ignition of
    an explosive.


CLS 102/212
TXT Magnetic:

    Subject matter under subclass 211 wherein the sensing means is a device for
    sensing the magnetic properties of a target.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for magnetic sensing devices in marine mines.

    19.2,   for magnetic sensing devices in non-marine mines.


CLS 102/213
TXT Light or infrared:

    Subject matter under subclass 211 wherein the sensing means includes an
    optical or infrared detecting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 3+ for optical
    range-finding devices.


CLS 102/214
TXT Radio wave:

    Subject matter under subclass 211 wherein target proximity is determined by
    the use of radio waves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar Radio Navigation), subclasses 68 and 166 for similar proximity fuzes
    and appropriate subclasses for distance measuring devices.


CLS 102/215
TXT Including logic means:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 including a computer or logic device
    (e.g., AND gate, OR gate, etc.).


CLS 102/216
TXT Including impact or inertia switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 including a switch activated by inertia
    or target impact.


CLS 102/217
TXT Plural sequentially fired ignitors or detonators:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 including a plurality of igniting devices
    activated one after another.


CLS 102/218
TXT Electronic switch discharges capacitor:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 in which a switching means discharges a
    capacitor through the igniting device.


CLS 102/219
TXT Ionized gas, i.e., glow tube or thyratron:

    Subject matter under subclass 218 in which the switching means includes a
    gas to be ionized, such as the gas in a glow tube or thyratron.


CLS 102/220
TXT Silicon controlled rectifier:

    Subject matter under subclass 218 in which the switching means includes a
    silicon controlled rectifier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous circuits which employ
    silicon controlled rectifiers.


CLS 102/221
TXT Arming devices:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 which includes means selectively
    rendering the igniting device or system capable of igniting an explosive.

    (1)     Note.  The means of this subclass type, for example, renders an
    igniting device or system incapable of igniting an explosive until the
    means is either activated or withdrawn.

    (2)     Note.  Restrained impacting devices which are released upon
    striking a target or similar object are not considered arming devices of
    this subclass type and are classifiable in subclass 272 below.

    (3)     Note.  Arming devices combined with art provided for elsewhere in
    this class are classified with such art.


CLS 102/222
TXT Blocking or interrupting type:

    Subject matter under subclass 221 wherein ignition requires the cooperation
    of at least two elements, and wherein the arming means includes movable
    means which selectively either prevents or permits cooperation of the two
    elements.


CLS 102/223
TXT Fluid pressure operated:

    Subject matter under subclass 222 in which the blocking or interrupting
    means is activated or rendered operative by fluid pressure.


CLS 102/224
TXT Fluidic device:

    Subject matter under subclass 223 including a fluidic device, i.e., a fluid
    amplifier or fluid oscillator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 803+ for fluidic devices in general.


CLS 102/225
TXT Rotating vane:

    Subject matter under subclass 223 including a member rotated about an axis
    by the fluid pressure to move or permit movement of the blocking or
    interrupting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), for vane structures per
    se.


CLS 102/226
TXT Rotor or slide release:

    Subject matter under subclass 225 in which the blocking or interrupting
    means is slidable or rotatable.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type includes, for example,
    an element either carrying an explosive or having an aperture initially out
    of alignment in a firing train which subsequently moves the explosive or
    aperture into alignment with the firing train.


CLS 102/227
TXT Impacting device release:

    Subject matter under subclass 225 in which the rotating vane releases means
    for creating an impulse of mechanical force, e.g., firing pin, inertial
    weight, etc.


CLS 102/228
TXT With or including a timing device:

    Subject matter under subclass 223 including means activated or operated by
    the fluid pressure to delay the functioning of some element of the igniting
    device or system.

    (1)     Note.  The timing device of this subclass type, although included
    in the igniting device or system, need not necessarily be included in the
    blocking or interrupting means.


CLS 102/229
TXT Rotor or slide:

    Subject matter under subclass 223 in which the blocking or interrupting
    means is slidable or rotatable.


CLS 102/230
TXT Impacting device release:

    Subject matter under subclass 223 in which a means for creating an impulse
    of mechanical force is released by the fluid pressure.


CLS 102/231
TXT Centrifugal and setback operated:

    Subject matter under subclass 222 in which the blocking or interrupting
    means arms the igniting device or system by a combination of centrifugal
    force and an inertial force due to linear acceleration.

    (1)     Note.  The term "setback" as used in the art generally refers to
    accelerating force acting on an inertial mass caused by the launching of a
    missile.

    (2)     Note.  The acceleration of this subclass type always increases
    velocity.  Acceleration of the type which decreases velocity is referred to
    as deceleration (see for example subclass 246 below) and does not form a
    basis for classification in this subclass.


CLS 102/232
TXT With or including a timing device:

    Subject matter under subclass 231 including means to delay the functioning
    of some element in the igniting device or system.

    (1)     Note.  The timing device of this subclass type, although included
    in the igniting device or system, need not necessarily be included in the
    blocking or interrupting means.


CLS 102/233
TXT With setback latch:

    Subject matter under subclass 232 having means to hold the timing means
    inoperative until released by setback force.


CLS 102/234
TXT Impacting device release:

    Subject matter under subclass 231 in which a means for creating an impulse
    of mechanical force is caused to be released by the centrifugal and/or
    setback force.


CLS 102/235
TXT Rotor or slide with setback latch:

    Subject matter under subclass 231 in which the blocking or interrupting
    means is rotatable or slidable and which has means to prevent the blocking
    or interrupting means from rotating or sliding until released by a setback
    force.


CLS 102/236
TXT Firing pin is latch:

    Subject matter under subclass 235 in which the rotor or slide setback
    release is also an impacting device which imparts an impulse of mechanical
    force to an explosive charge.


CLS 102/237
TXT Centrifugal operated:

    Subject matter under subclass 222 in which the blocking or interrupting
    means arms the igniting device or system by centrifugal force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231,    for blocking and interrupting-type arming devices operated by both
    centrifugal and setback forces.


CLS 102/238
TXT With or including a timing device:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 including means to delay the functioning
    of some element of the igniting device or system.

    (1)     Note.  The timing device of this subclass type, although included
    in the igniting device or system, need not necessarily be included in the
    blocking or interrupting means.


CLS 102/239
TXT Latch for impacting device:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 which includes means for holding
    inoperative a means for creating an impulse of mechanical force until
    released by centrifugal force.


CLS 102/240
TXT Spiral band:

    Subject matter under subclass 239 in which the latching device is a
    spirally wrapped flexible band.


CLS 102/241
TXT Pivoted weight:

    Subject matter under subclass 239 in which the latch includes a weight or
    inertia responsive member attached at and pivotable about a point and acted
    on by the centrifugal force to release the impacting device.


CLS 102/242
TXT Spring biased piston:

    Subject matter under subclass 239 in which the latch includes a plurality
    of members movable by centrifugal force and each acted on by a separate
    resilient means tending to counteract the centrifugal force.


CLS 102/243
TXT Expanding weight:

    Subject matter under subclass 239 in which the latch includes weighted or
    inertia responsive members which move outwardly relative to one another
    under the influence of centrifugal force and which are interconnected
    circumferentially by resilient means which tends to counteract the
    centrifugal force.


CLS 102/244
TXT Rotor or slide:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 in which the blocking or interrupting
    means includes a rotatable or slidable means actuated or operated by
    centrifugal force.


CLS 102/245
TXT Centrifugally released latch:

    Subject matter under subclass 244 in which the rotor or slide is restrained
    by a means which releases the rotor or slide in response to centrifugal
    force.


CLS 102/246
TXT Deceleration released latch:

    Subject matter under subclass 244 in which the rotor or slide is released
    in response to a decelerating force.


CLS 102/247
TXT Inertia operated:

    Subject matter under subclass 222 in which the blocking or interrupting
    means is activated or operated by the reaction of a mass to an accelerating
    or decelerating force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231,    for blocking and interrupting-type arming means operated by both
    centrifugal and setback forces.


CLS 102/248
TXT With or including a timing device:

    Subject matter under subclass 247 including means to delay the functioning
    of some element of the igniting device or system.

    (1)     Note.  The timing device of this subclass type, although included
    in the igniting device or system, need not necessarily be included in the
    blocking or interrupting means.


CLS 102/249
TXT With setback latch:

    Subject matter under subclass 248 having means to hold the timing device
    inoperative until released by a setback force.

    (1)     Note.  The term "setback" as used in this subclass is defined in
    subclass 231 above.


CLS 102/250
TXT Fluent material:

    Subject matter under subclass 248 in which the timing device includes a
    fluid-like material, i.e., a liquid or granular material.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type includes, for example,
    sand, small balls, etc.


CLS 102/251
TXT Rotor or slide with setback release:

    Subject matter under subclass 247 in which the blocking or interrupting
    means is rotatable or slidable and is held inoperative by means which
    releases the blocking or interrupting means in response to a setback force.

    (1)     Note.  The term "setback" as used in this subclass is defined in
    subclass 231 above.


CLS 102/252
TXT Impacting device latch:

    Subject matter under subclass 247 in which a first means (i.e., latch)
    holds inoperative a second means (i.e., impacting device) for creating an
    impulse of mechanical force until the first means is caused to release the
    second means by a setback force.

    (1)     Note.  The term "setback" as used in this subclass is defined in
    subclass 231 above.


CLS 102/253
TXT Ball and detent:

    Subject matter under subclass 252 in which the latching means includes a
    cooperating ball and detent.


CLS 102/254
TXT Slide and rotor:

    Subject matter under subclass 222 in which the blocking or interrupting
    means is rotatable or slidable.

    (1)     Note.  For examples of rotors or slides of this subclass type, see
    (1) Note under subclass 226 above.


CLS 102/255
TXT Timing device operated:

    Subject matter under subclass 254 in which the rotor or slide is actuated
    or operated by a delay causing means.


CLS 102/256
TXT Spring operated:

    Subject matter under subclass 254 in which the rotor or slide is operated
    by a spring means.


CLS 102/257
TXT Timer operated impacting device latch:

    Subject matter under subclass 222 in which the blocking or interrupting
    means is a timing device which operates or releases a means for creating an
    impulse of mechanical force.


CLS 102/258
TXT Externally released latch:

    Subject matter under subclass 222 in which the blocking or interrupting
    means includes a means either physically removable from the device to be
    armed or actuated from outside the device to be armed.


CLS 102/259
TXT Bore riding pin:

    Subject matter under subclass 258 in which the device to be armed is a
    missile launched by a device having a missile guiding bore and in which the
    blocking or interrupting means includes a latch which is held in its
    restraining position by the bore of the launching device and which moves to
    its release position after the missile leaves the bore of the launching
    device.


CLS 102/260
TXT Manually released:

    Subject matter under subclass 258 in which the latch is released by hand.


CLS 102/261
TXT To actuate impacting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 260 in which the release of the latch
    actuates a means for creating an impulse of mechanical force.


CLS 102/262
TXT Switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 221 which includes an electrical switching
    means which opens or closes an arming circuit.


CLS 102/263
TXT Vane or fluid pressure operated:

    Subject matter under subclass 262 in which the switching means is caused to
    be opened or closed by a rotating vane or by fluid pressure.


CLS 102/264
TXT Timing device operated:

    Subject matter under subclass 262 wherein the switching means is opened or
    closed by a timing device.


CLS 102/265
TXT Multiple mode fuzes:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 which includes a plurality of igniting
    devices or systems which may operate independently of one another.


CLS 102/266
TXT Impact and time delay:

    Subject matter under subclass 265 in which one of the igniting devices or
    systems is actuated upon impact with a target and another one of the
    igniting devices or systems detonates the main charge after a predetermined
    time delay.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type includes, for example,
    self-destruct type fuzes.


CLS 102/267
TXT Spin decay:

    Subject matter under subclass 266 in which the armed device is carried by a
    missile and in which the delay mode actuation is caused by the slowing down
    of the spinning of the missile carrying the armed device.


CLS 102/268
TXT Mechanical time delay:

    Subject matter under subclass 266 in which the time delay is caused by a
    mechanical timing means.


CLS 102/269
TXT Powder train delay:

    Subject matter under subclass 266 in which the time delay is caused by the
    burning of a predetermined length of explosive.


CLS 102/270
TXT Mode selecting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 265 in which the armed device is carried by a
    missile and which includes a means for selecting the igniting device or
    system before the missile is launched.


CLS 102/271
TXT Delay or impact:

    Subject matter under subclass 270 in which the choice of modes is between
    an igniting device or system which detonates the main explosive on target
    impact and one which detonates the main explosive after a predetermined
    delay from launch.


CLS 102/272
TXT Impacting devices:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 including a device to impart an impulse
    of mechanical force to a percussion sensitive explosive.


CLS 102/273
TXT Graze or multiangle:

    Subject matter under subclass 272 in which the impacting device is actuated
    by a sliding (i.e., grazing) hit or a hit other than head on.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type may be referred to in
    the art as "all-way fuzes" and "multiangle fuzes".


CLS 102/274
TXT Spring driven with latch:

    Subject matter under subclass 272 in which the impacting device is urged
    toward ignition, but is held back by a releasable means.


CLS 102/275
TXT With frangible restraint:

    Subject matter under subclass 272 in which the impacting device is held by
    a restraint which fractures or gives way to release the impacting device
    when subjected to a predetermined force.


CLS 102/275.1
TXT Fuse cord (e.g., blasting cord):

    Subject matter under subclass 200 for setting off explosive or thermic
    charges which includes an indefinite length of flexible material including
    a combustible substance along the length of the material which substance
    when ignited or detonated causes the ignition or detonation to travel the
    length of the combustible substance to transfer the ignition or detonation
    to an explosive or thermic charge.

    (1)     Note.  The term "indefinite length" includes cords, ropes, tapes,
    and tubes.

    (2)     Note.  The term "combustible" includes burning, deflagrating, and
    detonating.

    (3)     Note.  Included are safety fuses, igniter cords, timing fuses, and
    detonator cords.

    (4)     Note.  Included are connectors, per se, which join fuse cords
    together to form an explosive circuit to fire a main charge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200,    for protective covers for a blasting cap joined to a fuse.

    277.1+, for powder trains, fixed or variable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    86,     Ammunition and Explosive-Charge Making, subclass 1 for methods and
    apparatus for making fuse cords.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, subclasses 71+ for a
    composition having a nitrogen and oxygen containing salt, carbon, and
    sulfur.


CLS 102/275.11
TXT Initiating devices:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 which includes nonelectric devices, per
    se, used to ignite and explosive or thermic composition or charge of the
    primer or ignitor type.

    (1)     Note.  Here are manually operated initiators.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204,    for percussive primers or ignitors.

    205,    for heat, friction, or chemical primers or ignitors.

    275.6,  for a fuse cord with an igniting device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclasses 506+ for a solid fuel
    having a friction igniting mass or surface and subclass 519 for a solid
    fuel composition or product having a wick or fuse.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 267+ for frictional, chemical, or percussive
    type ignitors; and subclasses 288+ for candles.


CLS 102/275.12
TXT Holders for fuse or fuse cord to blasting cartridge, igniting device or
    detonator:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 which includes devices, per se, to secure
    a fuse cord to a detonating or igniting device or a fuse cord with or
    without a detonating or igniting device to a blasting cartridge or other
    explosive charge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200,    for protective covers for detonators.

    202.12, for electric primer or ignition assemblies.

    275.7,  for a fuse cord with a cord coupling device.


CLS 102/275.2
TXT With one-way connector or arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 275.1 which include (a) a connector joining
    the combustible substance of the indefinite length of fuse material to
    another indefinite length of fuse material by means to permit a one-way
    transfer of the detonation or burning proceeding along one indefinite
    length to the other indefinite length, or (b) the joining of the
    combustible substance of the indefinite length to a second combustible
    length of fuse material to permit only the passage of the burning or
    detonation one-way.


CLS 102/275.3
TXT With combustible time-delay cord connection means:

    Subject matter under subclass 275.1 which includes a connector containing a
    combustible time delay joining an end of the indefinite length of material
    including the combustible substance to an end of a second indefinite length
    of material including a combustible substance in a series arrangement.

    (1)     Note.  The connector, per se, with the contained combustible time
    delay is placed as an original in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  To have a detonator or safety fuse cord ignite the
    combustible time delay, an explosive with or without other thermic
    materials may be necessary in the connector, and they may or may not be
    claimed.

    (3)     Note.  The first and the second cord or only one of these cords may
    be claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277.1+, for time controlled munition powder trains.


CLS 102/275.4
TXT To or from connector having booster charge:

    Subject matter under subclass 275.1 which includes a booster explosive
    charge containing connector to join the combustible substance of the
    indefinite length material to the charge to (a) detonate the charge, or (b)
    to have the charge detonate the combustible substance of the indefinite
    length material.

    (1)     Note.  Here are the connectors per se.

    (2)     Note.  The combination of a fuse cord to a booster charge
    containing connector to one or more fuse cords is here.

    (3)     Note.  The detonator fuse cord and the charge containing connector
    may set off a main charge not claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    311,    for a fuse cord and a booster to set off a blasting charge at each
    of several locations.

    313,    for a fuse cord and a booster charge to set off a blasting charge
    placed or inserted in a borehole.

    318,    for a fuse cord and a booster charge to set off a blasting charge.

    322,    for a fuse cord and a booster charge to set off a blasting charge.


CLS 102/275.5
TXT With explosive charge:

    Subject matter under subclass 275.1 which includes an explosive charge
    connected to the combustible substance of the indefinite length material so
    that the ignited or detonated combustible substance will ignite or detonate
    the explosive charge or vice versa.

    (1)     Note.  Explosive charge includes deflagrating material.

    (2)     Note.  No main charge is claimed in this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  A fuse cord with a integral booster charge, a blasting cap,
    or other detonator is here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305+,   for detonation wave modifying and shaped charges ignited or
    detonated by a fuse cord and a detonator.

    311,    for patterned blasting involving plural locations set off by a fuse
    cord and a detonator.

    313,    for an inserted or placed blasting charge in a borehole set off by
    a fuse cord and a detonator.

    322,    for a contained blasting charge set off by a fuse and detonator.

    332,    for a blasting charge set off by a fuse and a detonator.


CLS 102/275.6
TXT With igniting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 275.1 which includes combustible material
    attached to or part of the indefinite length material so that the
    combustible material when ignited will cause the ignition of the
    combustible substance of the indefinite length material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202.5+, for electric ignition of a fuse cord.

    204,    for percussion primers or ignitors.

    205,    for heat, friction, or chemical primers or ignitors.

    275.11, for nonelectric initiating devices to ignite or detonate an
    explosive or thermic composition.

    322,    for a contained blasting charge with a primer or ignitor.

    332,    for a blasting charge with a primer or ignitor.

    499+,   for shells with ignition means.

    530+,   for jacketed or cartridge gas generators sources with igniting
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclasses 506+ for a solid fuel
    having a friction igniting mass or surface and subclass 519 for a solid
    fuel composition or product having a wick or fuse.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 267+ for frictional, chemical, or percussive
    type ignitors; subclass 287 for a combustion starting assistant; and
    subclasses 288+ for candles.


CLS 102/275.7
TXT With cord holding device to couple cords:

    Subject matter under subclass 275.1 wherein the indefinite length of
    material with a combustible substance is a detonator cord and there is a
    holder to place the detonator cord in relation to another detonator cord so
    that the shock wave traveling in one cord and induce a shock wave in the
    other cord.

    (1)     Note.  The second detonator cord may or may not be claimed.

    (2)     Note.  The holder, per se, is here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    275.3,  for a connector with a booster and a combustible time delay between
    detonator cords.

    275.4,  for a connector with a booster explosive to join two cords.


CLS 102/275.8
TXT Detonator cord:

    Subject matter under subclass 275.1 wherein the combustible substance is
    one which detonates to produce a shock wave which is used to detonate a
    shock sensitive explosive charge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202.5,  for electrically detonated detonator cords.

    275.5,  for a detonator cord detonated blasting cap.

    305,    for detonation wave modifying including shaped charges with a
    detonator cord primer.

    311,    for patterned blasting at plural locations using a detonator cord
    primer.

    313,    for placing or inserting a blasting charge in a borehole to be set
    off by a detonator cord.

    322,    for a contained blasting charge set off by a detonator cord.

    332,    for a blasting charge set off by a detonator cord.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, subclasses 105+ for
    detonator cord compositions.


CLS 102/275.9
TXT Fuse:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 which includes methods and apparatus
    involving nonelectric devices for setting off a larger explosive or thermic
    charge not classified elsewhere in the class.

    (1)     Note.  Here are casings containing an ignitor or a primer charge
    with no means to ignite or detonate the ignitor or detonator charge.

    (2)     Note.  Here are electric blasting caps with a casing, bridge plug,
    and an explosive or thermic charge with no electrical features or ignitor
    claimed.

    (3)     Note.  Casings, per se, for a fuse are here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202.1,  for accidental fuse ignition prevention means.

    202.5,  for electric primers or ignitors.

    204,    for percussive primers or ignitors.

    205,    for heat, friction, or chemical primers or ignitors.

    275.1,  for igniting, detonating, or safety fuses.


CLS 102/276
TXT Time controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 which includes a timing or delay causing
    means.


CLS 102/277
TXT With fluent material:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 in which the timing or delay causing
    means includes a fluid, fluid-like or granular material.


CLS 102/277.1
TXT Munition powder train:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 wherein the timing or delay causing means
    includes a path of powder having ends so that the powder, when ignited,
    burns along the path to an end where the burning can be transferred to an
    explosive or thermic charge.

    (1)     Note.  Here are mainly shell munition fuses.

    (2)     Note.  The means to ignite the powder may or may not be claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202.13, for an electric primer or ignitor with a powder train time delay.

    269,    for a multiple mode fuse including a powder train time delay.

    275.1,  for detonator, ignition, and safety fuse cords, particularly
    subclass 275.3 for a fuse cord with a combustible time delay cord connector
    means.


CLS 102/277.2
TXT Train length selection means:

    Subject matter under subclass 277.1 wherein there is included means to
    adjust the length of powder path between its ends to be ignited so as to
    create a variable combustible time fuse.


CLS 102/281
TXT EXPLOSIVE CAPS FOR TOY GUNS:

    Subject matter under the class definition which comprises explosive packets
    or containers commonly referred to as "caps" for merely producing a noise
    when used with a toy gun or other impacting means.


CLS 102/282
TXT PROPELLENT CHEMICAL CHARGE CONTAINER:

    Subject matter under the class definition which includes apparatus and
    corresponding methods involving a container to hold a propellent charge.

    (1)     Note.  Consumable and partly consumable powder bags are here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    314+,   for a contained blasting charge, particularly subclass 323 for a
    charge with a rupturable or expansible casing.

    324,    for a charge having a flexible tube or bag container.

    331,    for blasting charge cases.

    464+,   for cartridge cases.

    530+,   for jacketed or cartridge gas generator sources for blank shells or
    cartridges, and gas-powered tools or means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    383,    Flexible Bags, appropriate subclasses for a flexible bag.


CLS 102/283
TXT POWDER FORM:

    Subject matter under the class definition which includes method and
    apparatus including a chemically reactive combustible composition having
    more than a nominal solid propellent form for the purpose of changing the
    burning rate or the manner of burning when ignited.

    (1)     Note.  The "solid propellent form" is defined here as being a
    unitary mass of solid propellent composition or a plurality of individual
    propellent forms united to define a unitary or composite form which
    includes:



    (a)     an external or internal surface of specific configuration;

    (b)     a burning rate modifier structure which directs a flame front
    through the form (the "flame front" is intended to be the actual burning
    surface of the solid propellent form at any particular instant in the total
    burning period); or

    (c)     reinforcing or form support means attached to or imbedded within or
    in immediate contact with the propellent form, or forming a portion of the
    unitary structure.

    The solid propellent composition includes all detonating and deflagrating
    compositions, including immediately adjacent oxidizer and fuel compositions
    (see "(1) Note", Class 60, Power Plants, subclass 205), which react under
    combustion to detonate or deflagrate.  It further includes a solid fuel or
    solid oxidizer composition which is adapted to be brought in immediate
    contact with a solid or fluid oxidizer or fuel, respectively, when
    combustion is desired.  For example, the solid propellent form used in
    reaction motors of the type classified in Class 60, Power Plants, subclass
    251 would be included under this definition.  The solid propellent
    composition referred to above excludes manufactured fuel of general
    utility, such as fuel briquets which are provided for elsewhere, see the
    search notes below.

    (2)     Note.  A "granule" of propellent is defined here as synonymous with
    finely divided particulate or powdered material, and further includes an
    individual propellent form which is disclosed as used in combination with
    other unconnected granules of an identical or similar shape, size, or
    composition which produce a combined gas producing result upon combustion.
    Each granule burns individually with its own individual characteristics
    depending upon its shape, size, and composition.  The individual
    characteristics of each granule are combined with the characteristics of
    other unconnected granules to produce a total desired result upon
    combustion.

    (3)     Note.  A "solid propellent form" claimed with only a nominal shape
    is provided for elsewhere, see the search notes below.  However if the
    "solid propellent form" is characterized by structure or size such that
    there is imparted to the form the capacity to function as an individual
    unit to produce or alter a particular detonation or deflagrating effect the
    form is not regarded as nominal and is classified under this definition.

    The following examples have been considered to be significant inclusion of
    structure and if included would cause classification in Class 102:



    (a)     a generally perforated propellent mass combined with a specific
    density;

    (b)     a broadly configured mass (i.e., a sheet) with at least one
    specific dimension; and

    (c)     a porous propellent mass claimed in combination with a capillary
    perforation extending therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   for igniting devices or systems with an explosive, deflagrating, or
    igniting composition.

    305,    for a detonation wave modifying explosive.

    314+,   for a contained blasting charge.

    332,    for a blasting charge having a definite structural form used for
    blasting purposes.

    335+,   for pyrotechnics including flares in subclasses 336+.

    372+,   for a radially directed propelling means.

    374+,   for a reaction motor with a payload.

    401+,   for mines.

    430+,   for cartridges which include a casing with gun powder.

    464+,   for cartridge cases.

    473+,   for shells having an explosive within.

    530+,   for a jacketed or cartridge gas generator source with or without an
    ignitor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclasses 530+ for a fuel product
    having a defined shape or structure.

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 39.47 for a solid propellent form in
    combination with nominal reaction motor casing structure with no nozzle
    claimed; subclass 251 for a reaction motor with a specific form of an
    oxidizer or fuel charge within a reaction motor and which charge is adapted
    to be brought in contact with a fluid fuel or oxidizer, respectively, upon
    ignition; subclass 252 for a reaction motor with a specific form of a gel
    propellant within a reaction motor; and subclasses 253+ for a reaction
    motor having a solid propellant.

    86,     Ammunition and Explosive-Charge Making, subclasses 1 and 20 for
    methods and apparatus of making a propellent form by other than molding.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, subclasses 2+ for
    structure or arrangement of component or product.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    subclasses 3+ for explosive or propellant article shaping or treating.


CLS 102/284
TXT Spiral type:

    Subject matter under subclass 283 wherein the form is wound circularly to
    make a curve that constantly increases in size or the form has a portion
    that circles about a point in a curve that constantly increases in size.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    285,    for layer-type powder forms.

    332,    for sheet-type blasting charges.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, subclass 3 for a
    coating and a base or a support; and subclasses 14+ for superimposed or
    contiguous layers of different compositions or different properties.


CLS 102/285
TXT Composite type:

    Subject matter under subclass 283 which includes a unitary solid propellent
    form composed of a plurality of members.

    (1)     Note.  Here are single grain composite gas generator sources for
    (a) rocket motors, (b) weapons, and (c) gas-powered tools where the grain
    is not in a housing.

    (2)     Note.  The oxidizer and the reducing chemicals may be in each of
    the members or one member may contain the oxidizer and the other member may
    contain the reducing chemical.

    (3)     Note.  Generally, the propellent form has a solid oxidizer and
    reducing agent, but one of the two can be a liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    374,    for reaction motors with a payload.

    430+,   for cartridges which have a contained powder charge.

    472,    for spiral-type powder forms.

    530+,   for jacketed or cartridge gas generator sources.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 39.01+ for methods and apparatus for using
    combustion products as a motive fluid; subclass 219 for methods using solid
    material in reaction zone of reaction motor; subclasses 253+ for reaction
    motors using a solid propellent; and subclasses 632+ for one shot explosion
    actuated expansible chamber-type motors.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, subclasses 3+ for
    coated component of a structure or arrangement of component or product; and
    subclasses 14+ for contiguous layers or zones of a structure or arrangement
    of component or product.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 74 for explosive jet aircraft propulsion; and
    subclass 172 for spacecraft with propulsion.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, subclasses 440+ for fasteners having means to
    facilitate the explosive driving of the fastener.


CLS 102/286
TXT Having different burning rates:

    Subject matter under subclass 285 wherein the propellent form includes
    members having different speeds of combustion.


CLS 102/287
TXT Rocket motor type:

    Subject matter under subclass 296 wherein the propellent form is a rocket
    propellent grain.


CLS 102/288
TXT Powder grain shape formed of fixed shape segments:

    Subject matter under subclass 285 wherein each of the plurality of members
    are of fixed shape and when only the members are place together, form a
    single unitary configuration whose overall solid propellent form is
    different than any of the parts.

    (1)     Note.  The overall form may be cylindrical, hexagonal, star shaped,
    cruciform, etc.


CLS 102/289
TXT Having embedded reinforcing or burning control means:

    Subject matter under subclass 283 including structural means within the
    form to (a) strengthen the form, (b) change the surface burning area of the
    form, or (c) change the burning rate of the form.

    (1)     Note.  The form material can be heated to the ignition temperature
    where it contacts the structural means heated by conduction from the
    burning propellent or heated by the ignited structural means ignited by the
    burning form. This heating changes the burning surface area of the form and
    the burning rate of the form.

    (2)     Note.  The "structural means" excludes flakes, powders, chips, or
    particles of metal used as a burning rate additive in the propellent
    composition.

    (3)     Note.  The "structural means" includes metallic wires, fiber glass
    strands, sheets of corrugated metal, wire screen, hardware cloth, or the
    like.

    (4)     Note.  The "structural means" includes form supporting means which
    inherently reinforces the form or it may be a burning front guide means
    which  functions to direct the flame front through a preselected path in
    the propellent form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286,    for a fixed shape propellent form composed of fixed segments having
    different burning rates.

    290,    for powder forms having burning inhibiting means having a different
    rate than the propellent form placed on the surface of the form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charge, subclass 89 for
    compositions or charges having a fuel component having a metal, metalloid,
    metal hydride, metalloid with a hydrocarbon or halogenated hydrocarbon.


CLS 102/290
TXT Having burning inhibiting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 283 wherein the propellent form has surfaces
    limiting the physical extent of the form and includes a medium, to control
    the burning area of the form, selectively placed on one or more of the
    surfaces to control the amount of the surface and the shape of the surface
    that can be burned at any instant of time.

    (1)     Note.  The medium to inhibit may be combustible but it burns at a
    slower rate than the propellent form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286,    for composite propellent forms having different burning rates.

    289,    for burning control means within the propellent form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 253 for reaction motors of the solid type
    having inhibiting means to produce a particular burning.


CLS 102/291
TXT Rocket propellent grain:

    Subject matter under subclass 283 wherein the solid propellent form is a
    powder charge which, when ignited, will create a hot gas which is the
    moving force of a reaction motor.

    (1)     Note.  Here are the propellent grains, per se, used to propel
    missiles, rockets, aircraft, and spacecraft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202,    for propellent ignitors with a propellent rocket grain which
    travels with a missile.

    202.5+, for an electrically ignited powder form.

    347+,   for pyrotechnic rockets of the fireworks type.

    374+,   for reaction motors, particularly subclass 380 for a reaction motor
    with an ignitor means having a payload.

    531,    for jacketed or cased rocket propellent grains.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 200.1+ for reaction motors, particularly
    subclass 219 for methods of operating a reaction motor by using solid
    material in the reaction zone.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 73+ for devices relative to and combined
    with an aircraft using jets of air or other fluid for propelling aircraft;
    and subclass 172 for spacecraft with propulsion.


CLS 102/292
TXT Powder grain:

    Subject matter under subclass 283 wherein the solid propellent form is a
    powder granule.

    (1)     Note.  A granule here is a singularly shaped chemical powder having
    shape or structure for the purpose of modifying the rate of manner of
    burning or exploding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    314+,   for blasting cartridges which contain a plurality of propellent
    grains forming the blasting charge.

    335+,   for pyrotechnics including flares and fireworks made up of a
    plurality of granules to form a charge.

    430+,   for cartridges including shotgun shells having a charge made of a
    plurality of grains.

    473,    for shells containing a charge having a plurality of grains.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    86,     Ammunition and Explosive-Charge Making, subclasses 10+ for making
    caps and cartridges; and subclasses 20+ for loading bursting charges; and
    subclasses 23+ for ammunition loading having a charge of a plurality of
    grains.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, subclasses 2+ for
    compositions or products having a particular shape or structure of one
    ingredient of the composition or product or the nominal shape and/or the
    physical characteristic of the composition or product.  See the notes to
    this subclass, subclass 3, and the general notes to this class.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    subclasses 3+ for methods for molding or treating a propellent form.


CLS 102/293
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition which is not provided for under
    any of the preceding subclass.


CLS 102/301
TXT BLASTING:

    Apparatus and corresponding methods under the class definition involving
    the breaking up or the destruction of natural or man-made objects or
    material by the use of a fluid under high pressure including means for (a)
    the sudden release of the fluid under high pressure resulting from a
    chemical reaction, or (b) a very rapid escape or release of the fluid under
    high pressure.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses include accessories, e.g.,
    mats, plugs, etc., or subcombinations specialized in blasting.

    (2)     Note.  This group of subclasses does not include ammunition for
    weapons.

    See "SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS", for notes to subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  The objects or material broken up or destroyed may be above
    or below the ground or underwater.

    (4)     Note.  The blasting may be for mining, excavation, or demolition
    purposes. See "SEARCH CLASS" notes for classes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    283+,   for powder forms.

    363+,   for fuel air explosives.

    382+,   for drop bombs.

    401+,   for mines.

    530+,   for jacketed or cartridge gas generator sources.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclass 201 for railway snow excavators of the
    blasting type.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 56 for metal deforming by an explosive
    force.

    86,     Ammunition and Explosive-Charge Making, subclass 20 for methods and
    apparatus for placing of explosive compositions and devices to transport
    the composition into a blast hole without detonation of the composition;
    and subclass 22 for tools for cutting, capping, and placing fuses in a
    blasting charge.

    89,     Ordnance, subclass 1.14 for explosively operated apparatus
    including explosively operated splitting wedges.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclass 1 for bomb
    exploding or removing devices.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, particularly
    subclasses 2+ for structure or arrangement of component or product.

    166,    Wells, subclass 299 for a process involving an explosion; and
    subclass 63 for apparatus for causing an explosion in a well.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 2+ for boring with an
    explosion in an inaccessible hole.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 302+ for the testing for radiation
    tracing material in blasting charges.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    subclasses 3+ for explosive or propellent article shaping or treating.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclass 13 for
    processes involving explosives.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclass 914 for nuclear explosives.


CLS 102/302
TXT Terrain clearance:

    Subject matter under subclass 301 wherein the means for sudden release of
    the fluid is used to remove foliage.

    (1)     Note.  The blasting means may act on another device to cause
    detonation or removal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403,    for explosive mine clearing means.


CLS 102/303
TXT Mat or deflector:

    Subject matter under subclass 301 which includes a covering, for placement
    over an explosive device, which catches or deflects solid material
    propelled by the detonation of an explosive device to prevent damage to
    people or property by the propelled material.

    (1)     Note.  Mats for bombs are in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301,    for stemming material.

    333,    for blasting plugs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclass 1 for bomb
    disposal safes, and subclass 49.5 for shields and protectors.


CLS 102/304
TXT Blasting plug including an opening for a fuse, fuse ignitor, or explosive:

    Subject matter under subclass 301 which includes means to seal the opening
    of a blast hole having a passageway for (a) a fuse cord or fuse ignitor, or
    (b) supplying or holding an explosive in the plug or blast hole.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301,    for stemming used to seal blast holes or combined with a charge not
    provided for elsewhere.

    333,    for blasting plugs.


CLS 102/305
TXT Detonation wave modifying:

    Subject matter under subclass 301 wherein the means is an explosive charge
    and there is means to change the shape or direction of the detonation wave
    resulting from the detonation of the charge.

    (1)     Note.  The means to change the shape or direction of the detonation
    wave may be integral with the explosive or separate therefrom.

    (2)     Note.  The means to ignite or detonate the explosive charge may or
    may not be claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    475+,   for a shell having focussed or directed detonation.


CLS 102/306
TXT Shaped charge or charge with detonation wave cavity modifier:

    Subject matter under subclass 305 wherein the explosive charge (a) has a
    cavity in its external surface, or (b) has a material next to the charge
    with a cavity in its external surface, the charge upon detonation produces
    a detonation wave front determined by the shape of the cavity.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this group of subclasses, per se, or combined
    with the cavity is a liner conforming to the shape of the cavity.  The
    cavity upon detonation of the charge produces a wave front, dependent on
    the cavity shape which acts on the liner to propel the liner and shape the
    liner into a jet stream of high energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331,    for a container for a blasting charge. 476, for a shell having a
    shaped charge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    89,     Ordnance, subclass 1.15 for well perforators of the shaped charge
    type.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 4.6 for a shaped charge
    to attack the formation or wall member in a hole.


CLS 102/307
TXT Linear or curvilinear cavity:

    Subject matter under subclass 306 wherein the cavity has two sides which
    taper outward from a line intersection of the two sides to form a through
    like linear or curvilinear cavity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    89,     Ordnance, subclass 1.14 for explosively operated apparatus
    including material cutting devices using linear or curvilinear charges.


CLS 102/308
TXT Tandem charge:

    Subject matter under subclass 306 wherein there are plural explosive
    charges, axially aligned, one next to the other, at least one being a
    shaped charge, the detonation of the one charge reinforces the other charge
    to produce a additive detonating effect at the same location.

    (1)     Note.  One of the charges may be a booster.

    (2)     Note.  The charges may be ignited simultaneously or sequentially.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310,    for plural shaped charges.

    317,    for axially aligned contained charges with structure to join the
    charges end to end.

    320,    for plural contained charges.


CLS 102/309
TXT Having a barrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 306 which includes a member to direct and
    alter the detonation wave through the charge, when detonated, to the cavity.


CLS 102/310
TXT Plural charges:

    Subject matter under subclass 306 having more than one shaped charge.

    (1)     Note.  Here are well perforators having a support, with a plurality
    of shaped charges each aimed in different directions, adapted to be lowered
    into a well.  The perforator is also called a gun.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    307,    for a linear or curvilinear-shaped charge cavity which may have
    plural explosive charges.

    308,    for plural charges axially aligned, at least one charge being a
    shaped charge.

    317,    for similar contained charges joined end to end.

    318,    for a booster charge and a main charge.

    320,    for plural contained charges.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 4.6 for a shaped charge
    in an inaccessible hole.


CLS 102/311
TXT Pattern blasting:

    Subject matter under subclass 301 wherein there is a blasting charge at
    each of several locations.

    (1)     Note.  The blasting charge includes (a) an explosive, or (b) a
    fluid under high pressure capable of escaping or being released rapidly for
    the purposes of breaking up material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206+,   for charge ignition or detonating circuits.

    305+,   for detonation wave modifying including subclass 310 for plural
    shaped charges.

    313,    for placing or inserting charges in a borehole.

    317,    for similar contained charges joined end to end in a borehole.

    319,    for a contained charge with well-anchoring means, wall-contacting
    guides, or buffers.

    320,    for plural charges at least one a contained charge.

    332,    for plural charges in a borehole.


CLS 102/312
TXT Borehole arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 311 wherein a blasting charge is in each of
    several boreholes.


CLS 102/313
TXT Borehole loading:

    Subject matter under subclass 301 including means for placing or inserting
    (a) an explosive, or (b) a fluid under high pressure capable of rapid
    expansion to break up material in a hollowed-out place.

    (1)     Note.  The "hollowed out place" can be in or on the earth, under
    the water, or within some object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305+,   for borehole loading involving the shaping or the directing of a
    detonation wave.

    311+,   for loading boreholes or patterned blasting arrangements.

    321,    for a contained blasting charge having a support means including
    bails.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    86,     Ammunition and Explosive-Charge Making, subclass 20 for loading an
    explosive charge into a blast hole when making the charge or when not
    detonated.

    166,    Wells, subclass 299 for a process involving an explosion; and
    subclass 63 for apparatus for causing an explosion in a well.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 2+ for boring a hole
    with an explosive in an inaccessible place.

    181,    Acoustics, subclass 101 for seismic exploration using an explosive
    compressional wave source placed in a hole.

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclasses 312+ for traveling cranes, subclasses
    223+ for rotary cranes, and subclasses 71+ for overhead hoists.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 370+ for a reeling
    device of general use.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 2+ for hoisting trucks; and subclasses 264+ for cable-hauling
    apparatus.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 19+ for
    poles; and subclass 78 for cable and hook tackle.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclass 13 for
    processes using explosives.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 680+ for vertically
    swinging load supports.


CLS 102/314
TXT Contained blasting charge:

    Subject matter under subclass 301 which includes a container and an
    explosive within the container, the contained explosive being capable of
    being detonated for blasting purposes.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this group are contained materials which are
    components which make up the blasting charge but lack some necessary
    ingredient which is added at a later time.

    (2)     Note.  Commercial and military demolition blasting charges are in
    this section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    283+,   for explosive or deflagrating powder forms.

    305+,   for a contained charge and means to vary or alter the direction of
    the detonation waveform when the charge is detonated.

    311+,   for patterned blasting where plural charges are located at separate
    locations, including borehole arrangements.

    313,    for means to place or insert a contained explosive or a blasting
    fluid capable of rapid expansion in a hollowed-out place.

    325+,   for contained pressurized nondetonating blasting charges.

    331,    for blasting charge cases, per se.

    332,    for blasting charges having an overallshape.

    530+,   for a jacketed or cartridge gas generator power sources for blank
    cartridges and gas powered tools.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, subclasses 2+ for
    structure or arrangement of component or product.


CLS 102/315
TXT Having or receiving separated explosive constituents:

    Subject matter under subclass 314 wherein there are first and second
    containers each having a component necessary to form a blasting charge and
    means to allow the components to come together to form the blasting charge.

    (1)     Note.  The first and second containers may be in a third container,
    the first or second container may enclose the other container, or the first
    and second container may be separate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    313,    for borehole loading of an explosive whose components are mixed in
    or out of the boreholes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    86,     Ammunition and Explosive-Charge Making, subclass 20 for the loading
    of bursting charges where the charge is not detonated.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 219+ for mixing of
    materials in a container.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    subclasses 3+ for explosive or propellent article shaping or treating.


CLS 102/316
TXT With flame or heat suppressant:

    Subject matter under subclass 314 which includes a substance which, upon
    the detonation of the explosive and the release of heat or flame as a
    result of the explosion, prevents or minimizes the chances of the
    surroundings from catching fire or causing an explosion by putting out the
    flame or absorbing some of the heat of the explosion.

    (1)     Note.  The substance will (a) absorb some of the heat of the
    explosion, or (b) volatilizes, (c) liquifies, (d) releases water of
    crystallization and absorbs some of the heat resulting from the explosion,
    or (e) forms a gas which will not support combustion.

    (2)     Note.  The substance may be in the form of a sheath about the
    container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301,    for tamping materials in a blast hole which will cool the blast
    area or smother the flames of the blast.

    313,    for borehole loading of a blasting charge having means to cool the
    reacting blasting charge or the surrounding medium blasted or to quench the
    flames of the blast.

    326,    for contained pressurized blasting fluids which are generated by
    chemical reaction and may include a cooling medium or a flame quenching
    material for the generated blasting fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 18.11+ for
    compositions having fire-proofing agents.

    252,    Compositions subclasses 2+ for fire-extinguishing compositions and
    the processes for making the compositions including chemicals decomposed by
    heat to form a noncombustible gas; and subclass 67 for compositions
    involving vaporization, heat, or energy exchange.


CLS 102/317
TXT Similar contained charges joined end to end:

    Subject matter under subclass 314 which includes a plurality of like type
    contained charges, each having ends and means at each end of every
    contained charge to hold one end of another contained charge in a series
    arrangement.

    (1)     Note.  The individual contained charges themselves may (a)
    incorporate the means to hold the plurality of contained charges in series,
    or (b) the means may be entirely separate from the contained cartridges, or
    (c) structure on each of the contained charges may cooperate with
    additional structure separate from the contained charges to hold the
    charges end to end.

    (2)     Note.  In name only, contained charges or the container, per se,
    claiming only the details to hold the contained charges end to end are in
    this subclass rather than subclass 331.

    (3)     Note.  A claimed single blasting charge container designed to join
    end to end similar charged container is in this subclass.

    (4)     Note.  A booster charge in one of the charged containers joined at
    its end to an end of a similar charged container having a main charge is in
    this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    311,    for pattern blasting at plural locations.

    313,    for borehole loading at one location of a string of explosives.

    318,    for a booster and a main charge, at least one being contained.

    320,    for plural charges, at least one being contained.

    332,    for charges not contained.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclass 116 for explosive type seismic wave generation.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclass 24 for coupling parts installed in
    an art device.


CLS 102/318
TXT Booster or charge with booster detonator:

    Subject matter under subclass 314 wherein (a) the contained charge is one
    used to detonate another blasting explosive which is incapable of
    detonation by the usual means, or (b) a first explosive charge is combined
    with a second explosive charge used to detonate the first charge where the
    first or the second charge is within a container.

    (1)     Note.  A fuse, detonator cap, or detonator cord is not considered a
    booster charge for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    275.4,  for fuse cords interconnected with a booster charge containing
    connector.

    275.5,  for a fuse cord and an explosive charge.

    283,    for powder forms having more than an in name structure.

    317,    for similar contained charges joined end to end where a booster may
    be one of the charges.

    320,    for plural explosives.

    322,    for a blasting charge with a primer or an igniter to set off the
    charge.

    332,    for booster or other charges which are not contained and have
    overall structural shape or form.


CLS 102/319
TXT With well-anchoring means, wall-contacting guides, or buffers:

    Subject matter under subclass 314 which includes means to (a) support the
    explosive in a fixed location along the wall of a well, (b) to cushion the
    contact between the explosive and the wall in its movement, or (c) center
    the explosive in the borehole.

    (1)     Note.  The anchor, buffer, or centering subcombination is placed
    here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    313,    for placing or inserting an explosive in a borehole.


CLS 102/320
TXT Having plural charges:

    Subject matter under subclass 314 wherein there are more than one contained
    blasting charge.

    (1)     Note.  Here are plural explosive charges separately contained in a
    common unit and plural contained blasting charges joined together, but not
    similar contained charges joined end to end.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310,    for plural charges, at least one being a shaped charge.

    311,    for explosive means at plural locations including plural boreholes.

    313,    for the placing or inserting of explosives in a hollowed-out place.

    317,    for similar contained charges joined end to end.

    318,    for a booster and a main explosive charge.

    332,    for plural charges not contained.


CLS 102/321
TXT With support means:

    Subject matter under subclass 314 which includes some structure to hold the
    blasting cartridge against the force of gravity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    313,    for means to place or insert a charge in a wellbore.

    317,    for supports to join similar contained charges end to end.

    319,    for charge-anchoring means in a wellbore.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 752+ for a container handle.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 683+ for article-carried supports.


CLS 102/322
TXT With primer or ignitor:

    Subject matter under subclass 314 wherein the contained blasting charge has
    means coupled to ignite or detonate the contained explosive.

    (1)     Note.  A primer detonates to set off an explosive charge and in
    ignitor burns but does not detonate to set off a charge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202.1,  for accidental fuse ignition prevention means.

    202.5,  for electric primers or ignitors to set off a blasting charge.

    204,    for percussion primers or ignitors.

    275.1+, for fuse cords, per se, or with igniting means or with a primer.

    275.9,  for fuses.

    305+,   for detonation wave modifying for a contained charge and a primer
    or ignitor to set off the charge.

    311+,   for a blasting charge and a primer or ignitor at each of several
    locations.

    313,    for means to insert or place an explosive and a primer or ignitor
    for the charge in a hollowed-out place.

    332,    for a blasting charge and a primer or ignitor for the charge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclasses 507+ for matches.

    86,     Ammunition and Explosive-Charge Making, subclass 20 for placing,
    tamping, and priming charges into a blast hole.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 248+ for
    electrical igniting systems for explosives.


CLS 102/323
TXT Having a rupturable or expandable casing:

    Subject matter under subclass 314 wherein (a) the container is designed to
    change its volume, or (b) the container is serrated to cause the container
    to rupture at the serrations when the container is tamped in a shot hole.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324,    for a flexible tube or bag container. 331, for a blasting charge
    case.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    383,    Flexible Bags, appropriate subclasses for a flexible bag.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 34.1+ for a
    hollow or container-type article.


CLS 102/324
TXT Having a flexible tube or bag container:

    Subject matter under subclass 314 wherein the container comprises a pliable
    hollow cylinder-like body having one or more open ends and means to close
    the open one or both ends to hold the explosive within the container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282,    for propellent powder containers.

    323,    for a contained charge having a flexible rupturable or expansible
    tube or bag-type casing.

    331,    for blasting charge cases.

    530,    for jacketed or cartridge gas generator power sources for blank
    cartridges, shells, and gas-powered tools or devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 118 for flexible hollow
    cylinders.

    383,    Flexible Bags, appropriate subclasses for a flexible bag.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 34.1+ for
    hollow or container-type articles.


CLS 102/325
TXT Contained pressurized fluid blasting charge:

    Subject matter under subclass 301 which includes a high pressure resistant
    container and a contained high pressure nondetonatable fluid which when
    suddenly released from the container, acts as a physical force to break up
    material.

    (1)     Note.  Subcombinations of a nondetonating fluid blast cartridges
    are placed with the combination.

    (2)     Note.  An inlet to the chamber is necessary to charge the chamber
    in order to have the gas or liquid within the chamber, but generally this
    inlet is not claimed.

    (3)     Note.  Here are patents wherein a gas or liquid under pressure
    bursts the container to release the high pressure gas or liquid to a shot
    hole in which it is placed.

    (4)     Note.  The term "fluid" includes gas and liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    311+,   for patterned blasting involving plural separate locations
    including plural borehole arrangements.

    313,    for placing or inserting a contained pressurized fluid blasting
    charge in a borehole.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 581+ for a high-pressure-gas tank.


CLS 102/326
TXT Fluid generated within container:

    Subject matter under subclass 325 wherein the container has within it a
    reactable chemical or chemicals which form the blasting fluid as a result
    of a chemical reaction.

    (1)     Note.  Means to cause heat necessary to start the chemical reaction
    to form the blasting medium may or may not be claimed.

    (2)     Note.  The "reactable chemical" can be a heat decomposable
    substance.

    (3)     Note.  See subclass 327 where heat is utilized to cause fluid to
    increase the pressure of the gas to allow the escape of the pressurized
    blasting medium suddenly from the container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 166 for chemical reaction apparatus
    for solid reactants.


CLS 102/327
TXT Fluid heated within container:

    Subject matter under subclass 325 wherein there is some means to cause the
    fluid within the chamber to raise the temperature of the contained blasting
    fluid.

    (1)     Note.  Since the volume of the container is fixed, as the
    temperature of the blasting medium increases, the pressure of the blasting
    medium increases.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 280+ for fluid heaters.


CLS 102/328
TXT Contained fluid exit seal controlled by fluid pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 325 wherein the container has an outlet for
    the fluid in the container and a closure to seal the outlet to keep the
    fluid in the container and to open the seal as a result of the fluid
    pressure itself reaching a predetermined pressure to allow the fluid to
    exit suddenly from the container through the outlet.

    (1)     Note.  An inlet into the container to charge the container with
    fluid may or may not be claimed.  Also the means to charge the container
    with high pressure fluid through the inlet may or may not be claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    326,    for fluid generated chemically within the container and having an
    exit seal.

    327,    for fluid heated within the container and having an exit seal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 797 for frangible seals.


CLS 102/329
TXT Valve-type seal:

    Subject matter under subclass 328 wherein the closure for the outlet of the
    container is a valve.

    (1)     Note.  Here are outlet valves operated by a difference between the
    pressure of the blasting fluid within the container and atmospheric
    pressure when the container is vented to the atmosphere by some type of
    manually operated value.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 12+ for fluid actuated
    valves.


CLS 102/330
TXT Automatically operated:

    Subject matter under subclass 329 wherein the valve is operated without
    human intervention as a result of the pressure in the container reaching a
    preset valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 12+ for fluid actuated
    valves.


CLS 102/331
TXT Blasting charge case:

    Subject matter under subclass 301 which includes a container or casing, per
    se, for an explosive chemical charge.

    (1)     Note.  Casings for rifle, revolver, pistol, artillery field piece
    ammunition, or rocket missiles are not in this subclass.  See subclasses
    464+ for cartridge cases.

    (2)     Note.  Here are casings for explosive demolition work whether
    military or commercial.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282,    for containers to hold gun powder for firing shells.

    325+,   for cases with a pressurized nondetonatable blasting fluid.

    431+,   for combustible or destructible cartridge cases.

    449+,   for shot-type cartridge containers.

    464+,   for cartridge cases.

    530+,   for jacketed or cartridge-type gas generator sources, particularly
    subclass 530 for blank gun cartridges.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 35.17 for a safety feature or a
    containment structure detail for use while testing an explosive.

    220,    Receptacles, appropriate subclasses.

    383,    Flexible Bags, appropriate subclasses for a flexible bag.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 542.8 and 577+
    for an article of intermediate shape.


CLS 102/332
TXT Blasting charge:

    Subject matter under subclass 301 which includes blasting chemical
    compounds or elements which have some unitary overall structural shape or
    form.

    (1)     Note.  Here are chemicals forming explosives having a definite form
    and have a coating around them.

    (2)     Note.  Booster or main charges are here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    317,    for contained blasting charges joined end to end.

    318,    for a contained booster charge or a blasting charge with a booster
    charge detonator, one being contained.

    320,    for plural blasting explosives, one being contained.

    322,    for a contained blasting charge with an ignitor or primer to set
    off the charge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, subclasses 2+ for
    structure or arrangement of a component or product which is an explosive or
    thermic chemical.  See the general notes and subclasses 2+ notes of Class
    149.


CLS 102/333
TXT Plug:

    Subject matter under subclass 301 which includes means to seal a blast hole
    opening to confine an explosion or the rapid escape of a fluid under high
    pressure in a blast hole.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    313,    for inserting or placing an explosive in a hollowed-out place which
    includes plugs.

    319,    for well-anchoring means with or without an explosive.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclasses 192+ for well plugs generally.


CLS 102/334
TXT SMOKE GENERATING:

    Apparatus and corresponding methods under the class definition for causing
    vapor, cloud, etc., to be formed by a burning.

    (1)     Note.  The smoke is used for signaling, cover, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    335,    for pyrotechnics means.

    363,    for fuel air explosive means.

    364+,   for incendiary means.

    367+,   for gas or mist dispersing means.


CLS 102/335
TXT PYROTECHNICS:

    Apparatus and corresponding methods under the class definition having a
    mixture of oxidant and reluctant designed to produce light, heat and/or
    noise, e.g., fireworks display, amusement, flash photo, signal, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334,    for smoke generating means.

    363,    for fuel air explosive means.

    364+,   for incendiary means.

    367+,   for gas or mist dispersing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclass 487 for railway signaling
    torpedos.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 1 for combustion bursts or flare-ups on
    nonthermic fuel in pulses or serial pattern.


CLS 102/336
TXT Flare:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 having means to burn for an appreciable
    time, e.g., for signaling or to illuminate an area.

    (1)     Note.  Flares which also produce infrared rays or heat are included
    in this and indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  Means which just make a flash of light for display or sound
    are not included, but a flash using powder for taking a picture is included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334,    for a smoke generating means with a flare.

    513,    for target marking by tracing a light on a projectile.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 357+ for a rechargable illuminating
    flash-type burner or a fuel-type photographic flash bulb.


CLS 102/337
TXT With parachute:

    Subject matter under subclass 336 including an umbrella of such area that
    its resistance to motion through the air will cause an object attached to
    it to be lowered slowly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    354,    for a pyrotechnic means with a parachute, and see the search notes.


CLS 102/338
TXT Multiple flares:

    Subject matter under subclass 337 having more than one flare.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    345,    for plural successively ignited flares, and see the search notes.


CLS 102/339
TXT Plural or vane-type parachutes or means to restrain complete initial
    parachute opening:

    Subject matter under subclass 337 having more than one umbrella means
    and/or a vane-type umbrella means and/or means to prevent an umbrella means
    from forming its complete shape for a period of time.


CLS 102/340
TXT With means to eject parachute or flare from casing:

    Subject matter under subclass 337 including means to drive out a parachute
    and/or flare from a container without destroying the container.

    (1)     Note.  The parachute and flare may remain connected to the casing
    or be completely separated from it.

    (2)     Note.  For means which burst the casing, release casing sections so
    that they separate to expose the parachute and/or flare, or which pull the
    parts from a casing, (as distinguished from ejecting same) see subclass 337
    or other appropriate indented subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    357,    for pyrotechnic means including means to eject an object from a
    casing, and see the search notes.


CLS 102/341
TXT Marine type:

    Subject matter under subclass 336 wherein the flare is constructed so it
    will float on water or can be ignited under water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    390,    for a marine-type drop bomb, and see the search notes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclasses 13+ for illuminating
    means with a floating support.


CLS 102/342
TXT With means to eject flare from casing:

    Subject matter under subclass 336 including means to drive out the flare
    from a container without destroying the container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    357,    for means to eject an object from a casing, and see the search
    notes.


CLS 102/343
TXT With support means:

    Subject matter under subclass 336 including means to carry or bear the
    weight of, to keep from falling, to hold up, etc., a container for holding
    the flare.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    358,    for a pyrotechnic support means.


CLS 102/344
TXT Spike form:

    Subject matter under subclass 343 wherein the support is a long rodlike
    means with a pointed end for penetrating the ground, wood, etc.


CLS 102/345
TXT With plural, successively ignited flares:

    Subject matter under subclass 336 having more than one flare and means for
    igniting them one after another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    360,    for other plural pyrotechnic means successively ignited charges,
    and see the search notes.


CLS 102/346
TXT Gun-type cartridge:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 having means, e.g., case, container, etc,
    for containing pyrotechnic means and ignition means and adapted to be fired
    in a gun.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    430,    for cartridges with a projectile.


CLS 102/347
TXT Rocket:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 having a combustible propellent reaction
    motor and a payload or a combustible propellent reaction motor including a
    supporting stick or launcher secured to a casing for initially positioning
    the rocket when it is fired.

    (1)     Note.  The payload is limited to (a) a pyrotechnic means, (b) a toy
    novelty, e.g., toy figure and parachute, (c) a parachute to aid in the
    lowering of a skyrocket or payload to the earth, (d) a substantially
    cone-shaped surface for (1) providing the skyrocket with a forward
    streamlined aerodynamic surface, or (2) providing a container for the other
    payload set forth above, or (e) payload such as chaff.

    (2)     Note.  The supporting stick or launcher must be launched and remain
    with the skyrocket for at least a substantial portion of the flight of the
    rocket.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    373,    for a missile including an external propellent charge.

    374,    for a missile having a reaction motor and a payload.

    504,    for a projectile carrying a line or filamentary material, e.g.,
    chaff.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 253+ for solid propellent reaction motors.

    89,     Ordnance, subclasses 1.8+ for the combination of a skyrocket and a
    launcher which remains at the launching area or is separated at
    substantially the same time the rocket is launched.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclass 52 for a parachute release from
    a nonpyrotechnical rocket.


CLS 102/348
TXT With vane, wings, parachute, or balloon:

    Subject matter under subclass 347 including means for sustaining flight of
    the rocket or means to lower the rocket slowly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    354,    for other pyrotechnic means with a parachute or a balloon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 3.23 and 3.24+ for a missile stabilized by
    rotation or an externally mounted stabilizing fin.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclass 52 for a parachute released from
    a nonpyrotechnical rocket.


CLS 102/349
TXT With support means:

    Subject matter under subclass 347 including means to carry or bear the
    weight of, to keep from falling, to hold up, etc., a container for holding
    the rocket before flight.

    (1)     Note.  The support can be carried with the rocket in flight and is
    sometimes disclosed as stabilizing the flight thereof or effecting its
    trajectory.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    358,    for other pyrotechnic support means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    89,     Ordnance, subclasses 1.8+ for rocket launching support usable
    repeatedly for launching warfare or pyrotechnic rockets.


CLS 102/350
TXT With means to rotate by gas discharge:

    Subject matter under subclass 347 including means which cause the rocket to
    turn about an axis during flight by the gas which comes from the interior
    of the rocket.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    348,    for vanes which cause a rocket to rotate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 201 for a reaction motor arranged to turn
    continuously about an axis for stabilization in flight.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 3.23 for a missile stabilized by rotation.


CLS 102/351
TXT With means to eject object from casing:

    Subject matter under subclass 347 including means to drive out an article,
    charge, etc., from a container without destroying the container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    357,    for other pyrotechnic means or object ejected from a casing, and
    see the search notes.


CLS 102/352
TXT Including plural, successively ignited charges:

    Subject matter under subclass 347 having more than one charge and means for
    igniting them one after another.

    (1)     Note.  The rocket fuel may be one of the charges.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    360,    for other plural pyrotechnic means successively ignited, and see
    the search notes.


CLS 102/353
TXT Toy torpedoe:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 having means adapted to be thrown by hand
    and explode upon impact or to explode when pressure is applied for
    noise-making.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    441,    for a projectile and explosive cap.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclass 487 for signal torpedoes.


CLS 102/354
TXT With parachute or balloon:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 having an umbrella or inflatable bag of
    such area that their resistance to motion through the air will cause an
    object attached to it to be lowered slowly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    387,    for a drop bomb with a parachute, and see notes for other areas of
    search.


CLS 102/355
TXT Simulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 having a shape other than a firecracker.

    (1)     Note.  For example, a device that simulates a pine cone, a house
    that is destroyed, tent, figure toy, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, appropriate subclasses for a toy made in
    simulation of another thing.


CLS 102/356
TXT Combined:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 to which has been added other devices or
    structures having an added purpose or independent utility other than to
    perfect a pyrotechnic means.


CLS 102/357
TXT With means to eject an object from a casing:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 including means to drive out an article,
    charge, etc., from a container without destroying the container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334,    for smoke means ejected from a casing.

    337+,   for parachute ejected from a casing.

    342,    for flare means ejected from a casing.

    351,    for an object ejected from a casing including rocket means.

    404,    for a pop-up type mine.


CLS 102/358
TXT With support means:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 including means to carry or bear the
    weight of, to keep from falling, to hold up, etc., a container for holding
    the pyrotechnic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    343+,   for a flare with support means.

    486,    for grenades with throwing handle,    handgrip, or strand.


CLS 102/359
TXT Wheel, rotor, or whirler:

    Subject matter under subclass 358 wherein the support has means to allow
    the pyrotechnic means to turn or spin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 236+ for a nonpyrotechnical
    spinning or whirling toys.


CLS 102/360
TXT With plural, successively ignited charges:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 having more than one charge which are
    ignited one after another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    314+,   for well torpedoes involving plural explosive charges.

    338,    for multiple parachute flares.

    345,    for flares with plural successively ignited charges.

    352,    for pyrotechnic rockets with plural successively ignited charges.

    355,    for successively ignited charges associated with simulations.

    357,    for plural successively ignited charges, one of which functions to
    eject an article or material from a casing, and see the notes thereto for
    other art of this type.

    358+,   for successively ignited charges associated with a holder or
    support.

    393,    for cluster-type drop bombs.

    394,    for rebounding or multiple bursting charges.

    409+,   for fields or groups of marine type mines.

    431+,   for combustible, destructible, or caseless cartridges.

    443,    for cartridges with divided propelling charge.

    478,    for shells with divided bursting charge.


CLS 102/361
TXT Firecracker:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 having means for making a sharp noise
    and/or a flash of light, e.g., for signal purpose, amusement, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    530,    for a blank cartridge.


CLS 102/362
TXT HAVING GROUND PROPULSION MEANS:

    Apparatus and corresponding methods under the class definition for moving
    an explosive along or under the surface of the soil of the earth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclass 20 for self-propelled explosive devices for
    traveling on or under the surface of water.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 3.1+ for air-sustained, self-propelled
    aerial missiles; and subclass 14 for aerial torpedoes.


CLS 102/363
TXT FUEL AIR EXPLOSIVE:

    Apparatus and corresponding methods under the class definition to produce
    an explosive gas or vapor cloud that is subsequently ignited.


CLS 102/364
TXT INCENDIARY:

    Apparatus and corresponding methods under the class definition having
    material that will ignite to cause a fire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334,    for smoke generating means.

    335+,   for pyrotechnics means.

    363,    for fuel air explosive means.

    367,    for antipersonnel gas means.


CLS 102/365
TXT Liquid or jelly:

    Subject matter under subclass 364 wherein the incendiary means is a liquid
    or is in a semisolid state.


CLS 102/366
TXT OIL DISTRIBUTING:

    Apparatus and corresponding methods under the class definition to contain
    oil and release it by an explosion on the surface of water or just below
    the water surface.

    (1)     Note.  The purpose is usually for calming of waves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    367,    for means containing gas which may be in a liquid form to be
    distributed and see notes for other place of distributing liquids.


CLS 102/367
TXT GAS OR MIST DISPERSING:

    Apparatus and corresponding methods under the class definition wherein an
    explosion causes a liquid, solid, or gas to be scattered or spread about in
    the form of a vapor, particles, or gas.

    (1)     Note.  The gas or mist can be dispersed in air or water.

    (2)     Note.  Gas or mist dispersing by an explosion are antipersonnel,
    e.g., noxious or incapacitating, plant, insect, animal, foliage, BW/CW, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334,    for smoke generating and dispersing means.

    363,    for fuel air explosive means.

    364+,   for incendiary dispersing means.

    366,    for oil distributing means on water.

    530+,   for a cartridge gas generator means.


CLS 102/368
TXT Grenade:

    Subject matter under subclass 367 wherein the gas or mist is contained in a
    case or container which has an explosion means to cause the gas or mist to
    be dispersed from it and the case or container is to be thrown by hand or
    by a mechanical throwing means or projected from the end of a gun barrel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    482,    for grenades of the shell type.


CLS 102/369
TXT Drop bomb:

    Subject matter under subclass 367 wherein the gas or mist is contained in a
    case or container with an explosive means to cause the gas or mist to be
    dispersed from it and in use the case or container falls without the use of
    force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    382+,   for drop bombs of general use.


CLS 102/370
TXT Cartridge or projectile:

    Subject matter under subclass 367 wherein the gas or mist is contained in a
    case or container which has a charge and a primer for forcing the gas or
    mist out of the case or container or a missile which contains the gas or
    mist within it, e.g., shell, bullet, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    430+,   for a cartridge of the ordnance type.

    501+,   for a projectile of the ordnance type.


CLS 102/371
TXT BOMB LANCE:

    Apparatus or corresponding methods under the class definition wherein a
    missile, e.g., harpoon or spear, with a sharp spearhead carries an
    explosive propelling charge to be exploded upon contact with an object or
    carries an explosive charge to be exploded within an object.

    (1)     Note.  The lances are usually employed in fishing operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 6 for harpoons
    or spears without explosive features.


CLS 102/372
TXT HAVING RADIALLY DIRECTED PROPELLING HOLES:

    Apparatus and corresponding methods under the class definition wherein an
    aerial missile or payload carrying or containing a propelling charge which
    charge when ignited generates gases which are directed radially and axially
    or omni-directionally from the longitudinal axis of the missile.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter is peculiarly adapted for use with a
    relatively stationary launching structure, such as a gun barrel or
    cartridge case, to sufficiently enclose the propelling charge to provide an
    axial propulsion force between the missile and the relatively stationary
    launching structure.


CLS 102/373
TXT Including external propellent charge:

    Subject matter under subclass 372 wherein at least a portion of the
    propelling charge is outside the missile or payload structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    431,    for a projectile attached to or embedded within a solid propellent
    form or a projectile attached to a combustible cartridge.


CLS 102/374
TXT HAVING REACTION MOTOR:

    Apparatus and corresponding methods under the class definition having a
    missile and/or payload and an attached reaction motor for propelling the
    missile and/or payload through the atmosphere.

    (1)     Note.  While the nominal recitation of the subject matter of this
    class does not ordinarily cause classification in this subclass, for
    example, a "missile" plus a reaction motor, the inclusion of any missile
    structure, such as a warhead, is considered basic subject matter of this
    class and classified in this subclass.  (See (5) Note, Class 60, Power
    Plants, subclass 200.)

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes "missiles" under the subclass
    definition with a nominally recited stabilization means (i.e., fins).  For
    subject matter under this definition claimed in combination with specific
    trajectory or stabilization means, see Class 244, Aeronautics, subclass 3.1
    for unmanned payloads; and subclasses 75+ for manned payloads.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass includes an orbiting vehicle (called a
    satellite or space vehicle) when claimed in combination with a reaction
    motor for propelling the orbiting vehicle through the atmosphere on its
    initial launch from the earth into space, but excludes subject matter
    directed exclusively to the orbiting vehicle or an orbiting vehicle claimed
    in combination with a nominal reaction motor.  For such orbiting or space
    vehicles, see Class 244, Aeronautics, subclass 1.

    (4)     Note.  This subclass excludes all aircraft, which are sustained by
    the air.  For such subject matter, see Class 244, Aeronautics, appropriate
    subclasses.

    (5)     Note.  This subclass excludes a missile disclosed for ultimate
    operation in the water (i.e., a torpedo).  For such subject matter, see
    Class 114, Ships, subclasses 20+.  Conversely, where the missile is
    designed for aerial flight, but merely launched from the water, it is
    included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    283+,   for the particular shape or form of a solid propellent charge.

    347+,           for a pyrotechnic rocket.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 200.1+ and the subclasses there noted for
    a reaction motor.  The distinction between Class 60 and this class,
    subclass 374 is set forth in (2) Note above.


CLS 102/375
TXT Pneumatically self-propelled type:

    Subject matter under subclass 374 having a chamber which releases a
    compressed gas or means to create a vapor under pressure and release it to
    propel a projectile.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, subclass 57 for a combination of
    gun projector and a self-contained fluid pressure driven projectile.

    273,    Amusement Devices: Games, subclasses 317+ for a toy bullet-type
    projectile.


CLS 102/376
TXT With cartridge means:

    Subject matter under subclass 374 including a case for containing a
    propellant or charge and a projectile containing the reaction motor.


CLS 102/377
TXT Having separation means:

    Subject matter under subclass 374 including means in or on the missile or
    payload to cause a separation of one or more parts of the missile or
    payload after a launch.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes the means for:



    (a)     separating a booster motor from a sustainer motor;

    (b)     separating or projecting a means enclosed within the missile from
    the missile;

    (c)     severing the missile to lose aerodynamic stability for range safety
    considerations, and the like.

    Specially excluded as a separation means is the explosion of the warhead.
    Such subject matter is classified in this class, subclass 374.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes a specific releasable joint or
    connecting means, used to temporarily secure two stages of a missile
    together, claimed in combination with structure of a missile which is
    unique to a missile. For example, a joint or connecting means joining two
    stages of a missile claimed as having a fin, rocket motor, propellent
    charge, aerodynamically shaped surface, etc., is classified in this
    subclass.  However, a releasable joint or connecting means claimed in
    combination with a nominal missile or a joint or connecting means claimed
    in combination with conventional elements of the missile nominally recited
    (i.e., launcher, booster, sustainer, nose cone, warhead, etc.) is excluded
    from this class and is classified in either Class 285, Pipe Joints or
    Couplings, or Class 403, Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    340,    for a parachute flare ejecting means.

    351,    for means to separate or eject a firework or toy from the
    combustible reaction motor casing.

    357,    for miscellaneous firework ejecting means.

    489,    for separation of nested shells.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 98 for means to sever
    a frangible missile casing.

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 225 for the separation of plural reaction
    motors.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 54 for the separation of a power plant from
    an aircraft; and subclasses 138+ for the separation of a safety lowering
    means from an aircraft.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, appropriate subclasses for releasable
    connections between tubular members, in general, which may be connections
    between stages of a missile.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for releasable
    connections between stages of a missile; particularly subclasses 11+ for
    means facilitating disconnection of the members.


CLS 102/378
TXT Explosive:

    Subject matter under subclass 377 wherein the separation is caused by a
    separate explosive change.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes an explosive charge for severing a
    unitary missile casing claimed in combination with unique missile
    structure. However, where no unique missile structure is claimed this
    subject matter is excluded from this subclass and classified in Class 52,
    Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 98.

    (2)     Note.  If the separation is completely caused by the propelling
    charge of the missile or by such charge in combination with other
    nonexplosive release means, it is excluded from this subclass and
    classified in this class, subclass 377.


CLS 102/379
TXT Having warhead fuse or arming means:

    Subject matter under subclass 374 including (a) a fuse to initiate the
    explosion or other actuation of the payload of the missile, or (b) arming
    means for the fuse of the missile which conditions the fuse for operation
    at a predetermined time, position, or condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   for igniting device or systems.


CLS 102/380
TXT Having propellent charge ignitor means:

    Subject matter under subclass 374 including means for initiating the
    combustion or detonation of the propellent charge of the reaction motor.

    (1)     Note.  A specific ignitor claimed in combination with a nominal
    missile, payload, or solid propellent form is provided for elsewhere, see
    the search notes below.

    (2)     Note.  A specific ignitor claimed in combination with a specific
    propellent form and nominal missile structure is provided for elsewhere,
    see the search notes below.

    (3)     Note.  A specific ignitor claimed in combination with a reaction
    motor having no significant missile or vehicle structure is provided for
    elsewhere, see the search notes below. (See (5) Note, Class 60, Power
    Plants, subclass 200 for examples of "significant" missile or vehicle
    structure.)

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   for igniting devices or systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, for the combination of a reaction motor having
    ignition means or such combination with nominal missile or vehicle
    structure.  See in particular subclasses 212 and 256 for a solid propellant
    having an ignitor means.


CLS 102/381
TXT Having pressurization or variable control means for the propellant:

    Subject matter under subclass 374 including means for (a) the
    pressurization of a fluid propelling means of the reaction motor, or (b)
    the variable control or regulation of the propellent charge of the reaction
    motor during the flight of the missile so that the degree of combustion of
    the motor propellant or the time of combustion of such propellant may be
    regulated.

    (1)     Note.  The phrase "means for the variable control or regulation of
    the propelling charge" in the definition includes controlling or regulating.



    (a)     the flow of a fluent propelling charge to the combustion chamber of
    the reaction motor, or

    (b)     the feeding of a solid propellent form to the combustion chamber of
    the reaction motor, or

    (c)     the burning surface of a solid propellent charge.

    (2)     Note.  See (2) Note of this class, subclass 374 for the statement
    of the line between this subclass and Class 60, Power Plants.  For fuel
    pressurization and regulation of the propelling charge in a reaction motor,
    see Class 60, Power Plants, subclasses 233+, 254, and 259.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, for motors for the production of power.  See in
    particular subclasses 233+ for fuel flow control; subclass 254 for solid
    fuel regulation or termination; and subclass 259 for oxidizer pressurizing
    means.


CLS 102/382
TXT DROP BOMBS:

    Apparatus and corresponding methods under the class definition having an
    explosive means to cause damage or destroy an objective or payload and when
    in use falls without the use of force.

    (1)     Note.  The bombs are usually hurled or dropped from an aircraft or
    watercraft and are detonated by a timing mechanism or impact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   for igniting devices or systems which may include only enough bomb
    structure for supporting them or necessary for their operation.

    301+,   for blasting means which may be dropped into a hole.

    369,    for drop bomb with a gas or mist.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 229+ for a sighting device used
    in aerial bomb dropping.

    89,     Ordnance, subclasses 1.51+ for bomb, flare, and signal dropping
    devices.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 3.1+ for missile control or stabilizing
    means; and subclass 14 for air-sustained, self-propelled aerial torpedoes.


CLS 102/383
TXT With laterally directed barrels:

    Subject matter under subclass 382 including tubes arranged generally
    transversely to the axis of the bomb and from which missiles are projected
    after a predetermined period or upon impact of the bomb with its objective.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    480,    for a shell with laterally directed barrels.


CLS 102/384
TXT With direction controlling means:

    Subject matter under subclass 382 including means to regulate the course of
    descent.

    (1)     Note.  For means, in general, for controlling steering, see
    particularly Class 114, Ships, subclasses 21, 23, and 24; and Class 244,
    Aeronautics.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclasses 21, 23, and 24 for means to control a steering in
    general.

    244,    Aeronautics, appropriate subclasses for control means for steering
    a bomb.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    electric motor systems which can be used to steer a drop bomb.


CLS 102/385
TXT Fin stabilizer only:

    Subject matter under subclass 382 having structure of an airfoil whose
    primary function is to increase stability.


CLS 102/386
TXT With drop-retarding means:

    Subject matter under subclass 382 having means to slow the rate of descent
    of the bomb.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    348,    for pyrotechnic rockets with retarding means.

    354,    for miscellaneous pyrotechnic means with retarding means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 138+ for safety lowering devices.


CLS 102/387
TXT Parachute:

    Subject matter under subclass 386 having an umbrella-like canopy of such
    area that its resistance to motion through the air will cause an object
    attached to it to be lowered slowly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    335,    for pyrotechnics with a parachute.

    337+,   for parachute flares.

    405,    for mines with parachutes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 142+ for parachute generally.


CLS 102/388
TXT Vane or rotor:

    Subject matter under subclass 386 having a fixed structure as a fin, blade,
    etc., or a movable surface which causes the bomb to slow down.


CLS 102/389
TXT Fragmentation:

    Subject matter under subclass 382 wherein the bomb has a number of small
    missiles or fragments which are scattered by an explosion charge of the
    bomb or the bomb has scorings or other formations to render the bomb
    readily fragmentable by an explosive charge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    482+,   for grenades which are usually of shrapnel type.

    491+,   for shrapnel shells.


CLS 102/390
TXT Marine type:

    Subject matter under subclass 382 wherein the bomb is constructed so it can
    be detonated underwater.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    336+,   for flare lights which float on water.

    384,    for marine-type drop bomb with direction control.

    386,    for marine-type drop bomb with drop-retarding means.

    398,    for nonrecocheting type of projectile.

    399,    for marine-type projectile.

    406+,   for marine mines.


CLS 102/391
TXT Depth regulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 390 having means to control the distance a
    bomb goes below the surface of the water before it explodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    396,    for bomb firing means.

    412+,   for mine depth regulation means.


CLS 102/392
TXT Hydrostatic:

    Subject matter under subclass 391 wherein the bomb is ignited by means
    responsive to the pressure of the water at a certain depth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    414,    for mine depth regulation by hydro-static pressure.


CLS 102/393
TXT Cluster type:

    Subject matter under subclass 382 wherein there are plural bombs contained
    within a container or supported by structure and means to separate them
    while in the air so as to cover a large area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    357,    for pyrotechnic means with means to eject articles or charger.

    394,    for a bomb with plural bursting charges separately encased in
    different parts of the bomb.


CLS 102/394
TXT Rebounding or multiple bursting charges:

    Subject matter under subclass 382 wherein a bomb has means, to cause at
    least a portion of it, when it comes into contact with an object to return
    to the air before exploding or more than one explosive charges.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    342,    for a flare with means to eject flare from casing.

    383,    for bombs with laterally directed barrels.

    404,    for a pop-up mine.


CLS 102/395
TXT Practice:

    Subject matter under subclass 382 wherein the bomb is constructed for use
    in practice, e.g., has no explosive charge, a very small explosive charge,
    etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334,    for practice bombs with smoke signal means.

    444,    for a cartridge with a practice projectile, and see the search
    notes.


CLS 102/396
TXT Igniting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 382 having means for initiating the
    combustion or detonation of explosive or thermic composition or change.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   for igniting devices or system for other types of explosive means.

    416+,   for marine-type igniting means.

    424+,   for mine igniting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, appropriate
    subclasses for electrical igniting means.


CLS 102/397
TXT With target contact anticipator:

    Subject matter under subclass 396 including means which projects a distance
    for the bomb so that when it contacts a target the firing means will
    actuate before the bomb comes into contact with the target.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    383,    for drop bombs having laterally directed barrels with target
    contact anticipator.

    394,    for bombs which on contact project a section upward so that it may
    explode above the target.


CLS 102/398
TXT NONRICOCHETING PROJECTILE:

    Apparatus and corresponding methods under the class definition wherein a
    missile hasstructure to prevent oblique rebound or skipping after striking
    a surface at an angle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 3.1+ for control or stabilizing means for
    propelled or thrown explosive weapons or missiles.


CLS 102/399
TXT MARINE-TYPE PROJECTILE:

    Apparatus and corresponding methods under the class definition wherein a
    missile is adapted to be projected upon or through bodies of water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    390+,   for marine-type drop bomb.

    398,    for missiles having means to prevent ricochet from the surface of
    water.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclasses 20+ for self- propelled marine torpedoes.


CLS 102/400
TXT WITH EXTENDABLE ARMS:

    Apparatus and corresponding methods under the class definition having
    elements which move outward from a missile after it has left a gun barrel.

    (1)     Note.  The arms are for tearing out barbed wire, detonator
    actuator, limit penetration, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    504,    for line-carrying projectiles.


CLS 102/401
TXT MINES:

    Apparatus and corresponding methods under the class definition wherein the
    explosive means is positioned relative to the earth's surface to be
    actuated by contact or proximity of a person or object.

    (1)     Note.  Contact actuated includes pressure, impact, remote control,
    etc.

    (2)     Note.  Subcombinations specialized to mines, not provided for
    elsewhere, are in this or indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclasses 36+ for a
    mine-like explosive in combination with a safe, bank protection means, or
    related means.

    114,    Ships, subclasses 20+ for marine torpedoes having self-propulsion
    means.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, subclass 28 for an explosive-type fire
    extinguishing receptacle.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclass 487 for railway torpedoes.


CLS 102/402
TXT Counter measure:

    Subject matter under subclass 401 having means to permit passage of an
    object without detonation of the mine or means to explode a mine before an
    object, e.g., ship, tank, etc., is damaged by the mine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    293,    for a mine arming means.


CLS 102/403
TXT By explosion:

    Subject matter under subclass 402 wherein the means to explode the mine is
    chemical reaction producing a violent expansion of the substance involved
    which is exterior of the mine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301+,   for blasting means.


CLS 102/404
TXT Pop-up type:

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein the mine is below a surface and
    has means to cause it to raise above the surface when actuated by an object
    or person.


CLS 102/405
TXT Aerial type:

    Subject matter under subclass 401 having means to sustain the mine in the
    air, e.g., balloon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    354,    for pyrotechnic with a parachute or balloon, and see the search
    notes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    89,     Ordnance, subclass 36.16 for balloon barrages having no explosive
    means.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 14 for air-sustained, self-propelled aerial
    torpedoes.


CLS 102/406
TXT Marine type:

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein the mine is constructed so it can
    be used in water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    390+,   for marine-type drop bomb, and see the search notes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclasses 20+ for marine torpedoes with self-propulsion
    means.


CLS 102/407
TXT Practice (e.g., drill):

    Subject matter under subclass 406 wherein the mine is constructed for use
    in practice, e.g., has no explosive charge, a very small explosive charge,
    reusable, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    444,    for a cartridge with a practice projectile, and see the search
    notes.


CLS 102/408
TXT Flooder means:

    Subject matter under subclass 406 which has means that will allow water to
    enter the mine to deactivate it.

    (1)     Note.  A plug for allowing flooding is proper for this subclass.


CLS 102/409
TXT Field or group:

    Subject matter under subclass 406 wherein mines are placed in a certain
    area either randomly or a set pattern and/or means for selectively firing
    them.


CLS 102/410
TXT With manipulating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 409 including means to control the movement
    or orientation of the mines.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    411,    for means to manipulate a single mine.


CLS 102/411
TXT Laying, anchoring, or manipulating:

    Subject matter under subclass 406 having means for placing or putting the
    mine in a particular place and/or means for holding or keeping the mine in
    a particular place and/or means to control the movement or orientation of
    the mine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    410,    for means to manipulate a field or group of mines.


CLS 102/412
TXT Depth regulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 411 having means to hold or keep the mine at
    a certain distance below the surface of the water or above the bottom
    surface of the water.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclass 25 for marine torpedoes having depth regulating
    means.


CLS 102/413
TXT Anchor cable length:

    Subject matter under subclass 412 wherein the depth of the mine is
    controlled by adjusting the length of a rope, chain, etc., between the mine
    and an anchoring means.


CLS 102/414
TXT Hydrostatic pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 412 wherein the depth of the mine is
    controlled by means responsive to the pressure of the water at a certain
    depth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    392,    for drop marine bomb with hydrostatic ignition means.


CLS 102/415
TXT Antisweep anchorage:

    Subject matter under subclass 411 having means for resisting or preventing
    the mine from moving from a position where it is placed.


CLS 102/416
TXT Igniting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 406 having means for initiating the
    combustion or detonation of explosive or thermic composition or charge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   for igniting devices or systems for other types of explosive means.

    396+,   for drop bomb igniting means.

    424+,   for mine igniting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, appropriate
    subclasses for electrical igniting means.


CLS 102/417
TXT Magnetic:

    Subject matter under subclass 416 wherein a firing means is actuated by
    varying a magnetic field or magnetic properties.


CLS 102/418
TXT Wave responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 416 wherein an ignition means is actuated by
    a vibrational disturbance propagated in a medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211+,   for ignition means actuated by wave for general use.


CLS 102/419
TXT Electrical:

    Subject matter under subclass 416 comprising an electrical circuit or
    component (s) of an electrical circuit to supply electrical energy to the
    igniting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206+,   for ignition for detonation circuit of general use.


CLS 102/420
TXT Including arming means:

    Subject matter under subclass 419 having means selectively rendering the
    igniting means or system capable of igniting an explosive.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221+,   for arming devices of general use.


CLS 102/421
TXT Contact type:

    Subject matter under subclass 419 wherein the igniting means is actuated by
    means touching or meeting a portion of a mine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    422,    for nonelectric contact type actuating means.


CLS 102/422
TXT Contact type:

    Subject matter under subclass 416 wherein the igniting means is actuated by
    means touching or meeting a portion of a mine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    421,    for an electrical contact-type actuator.


CLS 102/423
TXT Extending firing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 422 including means protruding from a mine
    surface which when contacted actuate the igniting means.


CLS 102/424
TXT Igniting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 401 for initiating the combustion or
    detonation of explosive or thermic compositions or charge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   for igniting devices or systems for other types of explosive means.

    396+,   for drop bomb igniting means.

    416+,   for marine-type igniting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, appropriate
    subclasses for electrical igniting means.


CLS 102/425
TXT With position sensing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 424 including means which senses the position
    of the mine and arms the igniting means when the mine is placed in an area
    where it is to be exploded.


CLS 102/426
TXT Automatic deactivation or self-destruction:

    Subject matter under subclass 424 wherein the mine igniting means is
    rendered inactive after a period of time or the mine is activated causing
    it to be demolished, breakup, etc.


CLS 102/427
TXT Electrical, magnetic, wave, or radiant energy actuated:

    Subject matter under subclass 424 wherein an electrical circuit or current,
    a magnetic field, a wave force, or radiant energy will cause ignition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    419+,   for marine-type electric igniting means.


CLS 102/428
TXT Pressure actuated:

    Subject matter under subclass 424 wherein a compression, squeezing, etc.,
    force acting downward on the ignitor will cause ignitions.


CLS 102/429
TXT Spring biased:

    Subject matter under subclass 428 wherein the pressure causes a spring
    which is held under compression to be released and actuate an ignitor.


CLS 102/430
TXT CARTRIDGE:

    Apparatus and corresponding methods under the class definition having
    means, e.g., case, for containing a propellant or charge, a primer and a
    projectile or payload.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses includes subcombinations
    specialized to cartridges not provided for elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    283+,   for explosive or deflagrating chemically reactive powder forms.

    314+,   for contained blasting charges.

    370,    for noxious gas cartridges.

    530+,   for gas generator cartridges.


CLS 102/431
TXT Combustible, destructible, or caseless:

    Subject matter under subclass 430 wherein the cartridge is formed by
    molding a propellant to a projectile in such a way that it has sufficient
    strength to be handled or a material used to hold a propellant is easily
    burned or destroyed.


CLS 102/432
TXT Expendable cartridge:

    Subject matter under subclass 431 wherein the cartridge is so constructed
    that it can be propelled through a gun barrel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    449,    for a shot container which can be propelled through a gun barrel.


CLS 102/433
TXT Telescoping powder charge:

    Subject matter under subclass 431 wherein the means to propel a projectile
    covers the side (s) of the projectile but the top is left open.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    434,    for a telescoping power charge in a cartridge.


CLS 102/434
TXT Telescoping powder charge:

    Subject matter under subclass 430 wherein the means to propel a projectile
    covers the sides (s) of the projectile but the top is left open.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    433,    for a telescoping powder charge with a combustible, destructible,
    or caseless cartridge.


CLS 102/435
TXT Wear reducing additive for barrel:

    Subject matter under subclass 430 wherein means are added to the explosive
    material to prevent a barrel from becoming oversized when a projectile
    passes through it, e.g., reduce erosion.


CLS 102/436
TXT Noncircular projectile or cartridge:

    Subject matter under subclass 430 wherein the shape of a projectile is such
    that when an imaginary cut is taken through a plane perpendicular to the
    longitudinal axis of the projectile, the outer surface does not form a
    continuous curved path.


CLS 102/437
TXT Recoilless:

    Subject matter under subclass 430 wherein the cartridge is constructed to
    be used in a recoilless gun.


CLS 102/438
TXT Multiple projectiles:

    Subject matter under subclass 430 wherein the cartridge is constructed so
    it will fire a group of missiles.

    (1)     Note.  The missiles are larger than pellets or shot for a
    shot-shell.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    448,    for pellets shot from a shotgun cartridge.


CLS 102/439
TXT Projectile structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 430 having details of a projectile.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    436,    for projectile noncircular in shape.


CLS 102/440
TXT Having liquid/gas propellent means:

    Subject matter under subclass 430 wherein the force that causes a
    projectile to move is a combination of a liquid and gas.


CLS 102/441
TXT With projectile and explosive cap:

    Subject matter under subclass 430 including a missile to be propelled
    through the air and the missile has an explosive packet or container within
    it to produce a noise.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281,    for explosive caps for toy guns. 353, for a toy torpedo.


CLS 102/442
TXT With bore cleaning means:

    Subject matter under subclass 430 including means to remove dirt,
    impurities, etc., from the bore of a gun.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    511,    for a projectile with lubricating means for lubricating the bore of
    a gun.

    529,    for a projectile with cleaning means for cleaning the bore of a gun.


CLS 102/443
TXT Having divided propelling charge:

    Subject matter under subclass 430 wherein the propelling charge is
    separated into compartments or portions so that the rate of propagation of
    the explosion is regulated.

    (1)     Note.  The compartments or portions are usually for the purpose of
    controlling the rate of acceleration of the projectile.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    478,    for shells having divided explosive charges.


CLS 102/444
TXT Practice projectile type:

    Subject matter under subclass 430 wherein the projectile is constructed for
    use in practice, e.g., short range target work, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are means to allow a projectile to move but
    not to leave the cartridge or barrel of a gun.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    498,    for a shell projectile used in practice.

    502,    for cartridges with practice projectile.

    529,    for a projectile used in practice.


CLS 102/445
TXT Mortar:

    Subject matter under subclass 444 wherein the projectile has
    fin-stabilizing means on it and is for use in a smooth bore gun.


CLS 102/446
TXT Cartridge adapter:

    Subject matter under subclass 444 having means to make a projectile fit a
    cartridge in which the opening is larger than the projectile.


CLS 102/447
TXT Reduced charged:

    Subject matter under subclass 444 wherein a charge smaller than what would
    be use to propel a projectile in a normal cartridge is used, e.g., primer
    charge only, etc.


CLS 102/448
TXT Shot:

    Subject matter under subclass 430 wherein the cartridge is constructed so
    it will fire a group of pellets, e.g., shotgun cartridges.

    (1)     Note.  The indented subclasses include subcombination.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    432,    for pellets in an expandable casing.

    438,    for multiple projectile other than pellet type.


CLS 102/449
TXT Shot container:

    Subject matter under subclass 448 having means for holding a group of
    pellets within a shot cartridge.

    (1)     Note.  The shot container leaves the shot cartridge where fired and
    allows the pellets to leave the shot container after it leaves the barrel
    of a gun.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass and indents include a shot cartridge case plus
    additional protecting means for a shot cartridge case, per se, see
    subclasses 464+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    432,    for an expendable cartridge which may contain pellets.

    464+,   for shot cartridge case, per se.


CLS 102/450
TXT Collapsible wad:

    Subject matter under subclass 449 wherein a plug, packing, etc., is used as
    a spacer, seal, cushion, etc., in a shot container and is so constructed
    that it will cave-in, breakdown, etc., when the cartridge is fired.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    461,    for a collapsible wad used in a shot cartridge.

    532,    for wads not provided for here.


CLS 102/451
TXT Integral wad:

    Subject matter under subclass 450 wherein the wad is formed as part of the
    shot container.


CLS 102/452
TXT Having integral closure means:

    Subject matter under subclass 449 wherein the open end of the shot
    container is closed by deforming part of the shot container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    463,    for a shot cartridge with integral closure means.


CLS 102/453
TXT Having integral wad:

    Subject matter under subclass 449 wherein a wad is formed as part of the
    shot container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    451,    for a shot container having an integral collapsible wad.


CLS 102/454
TXT Including divided shot charge:

    Subject matter under subclass 449 having means to separate the pellets into
    individual groups.


CLS 102/455
TXT Including filler means in the shot area:

    Subject matter under subclass 449 having means to occupy the space between
    the pellets.


CLS 102/456
TXT With additional means to keep container closed:

    Subject matter under subclass 449 including means not integral with the
    container for holding the container from opening until it has left a gun
    barrel e.g., wire, cord, etc.


CLS 102/457
TXT With control of shot spread:

    Subject matter under subclass 448 including means to cause the shot to
    spread as the shot leaves a gun barrel or to keep the shot together for a
    certain distance after leaving the gun barrel before allowing it to spread.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    449+,   for a container that holds shot together as it leaves a gun barrel.


CLS 102/458
TXT With tracer means:

    Subject matter under subclass 448 including means to indicate a flight path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334,    for smoke generating means.

    335+,   for pyrotechnic or flare means used for general purposes, e.g.,
    light, signal, etc.

    364,    for incendiary means.

    513,    for target or tracer means.


CLS 102/459
TXT Including coated shot:

    Subject matter under subclass 448 wherein each shot pellet is covered with
    a material, e.g., plastic, oil, etc.


CLS 102/460
TXT Having shot of different size or shape:

    Subject matter under subclass 448 wherein the shot pellets vary in
    dimension and/or the outline or external surface varies.


CLS 102/461
TXT Collapsible wad:

    Subject matter under subclass 448 wherein a plug, packing, etc., is used as
    a spacer, seal, cushion, etc., in a shot cartridge and is so constructed
    that it will cave-in breakdown, etc., when the cartridge is fired.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    450+,   for collapsible wad used in a shot container.

    532,    for wads not provided for here or the above search subclass.


CLS 102/462
TXT Closure means:

    Subject matter under subclass 448 wherein a plug, packing, etc., is used to
    cover the end of the shot cartridge where the pellets leave when fired.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    532,    for wads not provided for here.


CLS 102/463
TXT Integral:

    Subject matter under subclass 462 wherein the end where the pellets leave
    is closed by deforming part of the shot cartridge.


CLS 102/464
TXT Case:

    Subject matter under subclass 430 having structure relating to that part of
    a cartridge which is for holding a projectile, charge, and primer.


CLS 102/465
TXT Nonmetallic:

    Subject matter under subclass 464 wherein the case is made of a material
    that lacks the characteristics or a metal.


CLS 102/466
TXT Plastic cases:

    Subject matter under subclass 465 wherein the case is made of, at least in
    part, plastic material.

    (1)     Note.  Paper is not a plastic material for this or indented
    subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    464,    for a paper case.


CLS 102/467
TXT With metal base or reinforcement:

    Subject matter under subclass 466 wherein the end of the cartridge that
    holds a primer is made of metal and/or the tubular part of the cartridge is
    laminated, strengthened by ribs, added material, etc.


CLS 102/468
TXT Iron case:

    Subject matter under subclass 464 wherein the tubular portion of a
    cartridge is made of iron or alloys of iron.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    465,    for nonmetallic case with metal base or reinforcement.


CLS 102/469
TXT Breech end structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 464 relating to the bottom part of a case
    which holds the primer.


CLS 102/470
TXT With primer means:

    Subject matter under subclass 469 including means to ignite a charge in the
    cartridge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204,    for procession primers or ignitors, per se.


CLS 102/471
TXT Rim fired:

    Subject matter under subclass 470 wherein the igniting means is in the
    breech end edge of the cartridge case or a lever extends from the breech
    end edge for the purpose of igniting the primer.


CLS 102/472
TXT Electric:

    Subject matter under subclass 470 wherein the charge is ignited by
    electrical means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202.5,  for electric fuses, per se.


CLS 102/473
TXT SHELLS:

    Apparatus and corresponding methods under the class definition having a
    missile containing a high explosive.

    (1)     Note.  The projectile can be of the type to be projected from a gun
    or otherwise projected.

    (2)     Note.  Search the appropriate subclasses above for combination with
    a shell.

    (3)     Note.  Subcombination specialized to shells not provided for
    elsewhere are in this or indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   for ignition devices or systems, per se.

    370,    for gas or mist dispensing shells.


CLS 102/474
TXT Continuous rod warhead:

    Subject matter under subclass 473 wherein the shell is made of shafts,
    bars, etc., connected together to form a continuous, usually annular,
    structure upon detonation.


CLS 102/475
TXT Focused or directed detonation:

    Subject matter under subclass 473 wherein a wave generated by the explosive
    force is controlled so that the wave is concentrated at a common place for
    directing the shell or wave.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305,    for detonation wave modifying means for blasting devices.

    480,    for laterally directed barrels for guiding projectiles.


CLS 102/476
TXT Shaped charge:

    Subject matter under subclass 475 wherein the explosive force is focused
    into a very sharp beam of high gain.

    (1)     Note.  The explosive charge usually has a cavity to direct or shape
    the force of the explosive.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306+,   for a shape charge for blasting devices.


CLS 102/477
TXT With means to form bursting charge after projection:

    Subject matter under subclass 473 having normally inactive or isolated
    components which are admixed or otherwise rendered active during flight of
    the shell to produce an explosive bursting charge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    478,    for divided bursting charges to reduce compression as a shell
    leaves a gun.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 524.1+ for a receptacle
    with specified material for the container or content.


CLS 102/478
TXT Having divided bursting charge:

    Subject matter under subclass 473 wherein the bursting charge is separated
    into portions by separators or baffles.

    (1)     Note.  The separation is usually to reduce the compression of the
    charge produced by acceleration of the shell when leaving a gun barrel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    443,    for a cartridge having divided propelling charges.

    477,    for a shell wherein the active ingredients for producing a bursting
    charge are divided prior to firing of the shell.

    490,    for a shell having plural propelling charges.


CLS 102/479
TXT With bursting charge cushioning means:

    Subject matter under subclass 473 including means to absorb shock of the
    explosive bursting charge during handling or the acceleration produced when
    the shell leaves a gun barrel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    478,    for a shell wherein the explosive charge is divided by separators
    or baffles to reduce the compression caused by acceleration.

    481,    for a shell with other type safety means.


CLS 102/480
TXT With laterally directed barrels:

    Subject matter under subclass 473 including tubed, cylinders, etc., for
    guiding missiles which extend generally laterally from the flight axis and
    from which missiles are projected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    383,    for drop bombs with laterally directed barrels.

    475,    for wave focus or direction.

    491+,   for shells which indiscriminately disperse missiles or particles.


CLS 102/481
TXT With safety means:

    Subject matter under subclass 473 including means for preventing an
    accident.


CLS 102/482
TXT Grenade:

    Subject matter under subclass 473 wherein the explosive device is adapted
    to be thrown by hand, by a mechanical throwing means or projected from the
    end of a gun barrel.

    (1)     Note.  The grenade does not pass bodily through a gun barrel in the
    manner of a bullet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    353,    for toy torpedoes.

    368,    for a gas or mist dispersing grenade.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, subclass 36 for fire extinguishing grenades.


CLS 102/483
TXT With gun or other projector engaging or cooperating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 482 including means for mounting or attaching
    the grenade to a gun barrel or other projector.

    (1)     Note.  Subcombination of means to actuate the grenade in
    cooperation with the projection means are included here, e.g., shafts or
    rods to enter a gun barrel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, subclass 1 for firearm with a grenade launcher.

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, subclass 5 for hand-operated
    centrifugal throwing devices.


CLS 102/484
TXT With bullet passage through grenade:

    Subject matter under subclass 483 wherein the grenade has a hole extending
    axially so that a bullet can pass through it.


CLS 102/485
TXT With bullet stopping means:

    Subject matter under subclass 483 including means to prevent a bullet from
    passing through the grenade.


CLS 102/486
TXT With throwing handle, handgrip, or strand:

    Subject matter under subclass 482 including means so that the grenade can
    be held to assist in throwing it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    358,    for pyrotechnic devices having handle, handgrip, or other forms of
    support, and see the search notes.


CLS 102/487
TXT With igniting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 482 including means for initiating the
    combustion or detonation of explosive or thermic compositions or charges.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   for ignition devices and systems.

    260+,   for manually released latch.


CLS 102/488
TXT Impact-operated:

    Subject matter under subclass 487 wherein the initiating is caused by
    imparting an impulse or mechanical force to a percussion sensitive
    explosive.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272,    for impacting igniting devices.


CLS 102/489
TXT With secondary shells:

    Subject matter under subclass 473 wherein a main shell has plural shells
    held within it and these shells are projected from the main shell.

    (1)     Note.  The secondary shells have explosive means in them so that
    they will explode.


CLS 102/490
TXT With range increasing means.

    Subject matter under subclass 473 having means successively fired while a
    shell is in flight to impart thrust to the shell for adding distance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    377+,   for a reaction motor for propelling a missile.


CLS 102/491
TXT Shrapnel:

    Subject matter under subclass 473 wherein the shell has a number of small
    missiles or fragments which are scattered by the explosive charge of the
    shell or the shell has scorings or other formations to render the shell
    readily fragmentable by the explosive charge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    389,    for fragmentation drop bombs.

    482+,   for grenades which are usually of    shrapnel type.


CLS 102/492
TXT Focused fragmentation:

    Subject matter under subclass 491 having means to direct fragments in a
    particular direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    480,    for a shell with laterally directed barrels.


CLS 102/493
TXT Structurally weakened casing:

    Subject matter under subclass 491 wherein the shell casing has scores,
    grooves, etc., to enhance fragmentation.


CLS 102/494
TXT Multiple fragments:

    Subject matter under subclass 491 wherein the shell contains or is composed
    of plural separate elements.

    (1)     Note.  The multiple elements are not formed by fragmentation upon
    detonation of the shell.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    493,    for fragmenting of a shell.


CLS 102/495
TXT Casing:

    Subject matter under subclass 494 wherein a shell outer surface is made up
    of a plurality of elements.


CLS 102/496
TXT Embedded:

    Subject matter under subclass 494 wherein the fragments are set or fixed in
    the shells surface and/or inside of the shell.


CLS 102/497
TXT With explosive:

    Subject matter under subclass 496 wherein the embedded fragments are placed
    in the explosive of the shell.


CLS 102/498
TXT Practice:

    Subject matter under subclass 473 wherein the shell is constructed for use
    in practice.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    444,    for a cartridge with a practice projectile, and see the search
    notes.


CLS 102/499
TXT With igniting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 473 including means for initiating the
    detonation of the explosive.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   for igniting devices or systems.


CLS 102/500
TXT Axially movable impacting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 499 including means movable along an axis to
    impart an impulse of mechanical force to a percussion sensitive explosive.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272+,   for impacting igniting devices.


CLS 102/501
TXT PROJECTILES:

    Apparatus and corresponding methods under the class definition having a
    projectile or payload which is to be propelled through air or water.

    (1)     Note.  Subcombination specialized to projectiles not provided for
    elsewhere are in this or indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  Where the disclosure is silent to the type of propelling
    means for the projectile and the projectile structure is not unique to
    explosive propulsion, the device is classified with the nonexplosively
    propelled aerial devices in Class 273, Amusement Devices:  Games.

    (3)     Note.  Where the projectile is claimed with no significant
    projectile structure but merely in terms of the composition or material of
    which it is composed, it will be classified in the appropriate composition
    or material class.

    (4)     Note.  A projectile is a missile or payload for these subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    430+,   for a missile in combination with a cartridge case.

    473+,   for a missile enclosing an explosive charge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, note particularly the class
    definition for the type of composition within the scope of Class 106.

    148,    Metal Treatment, particularly subclasses 400+ for materials which
    are products of processes of treating metals classifiable in Class 148, or
    for products distinguished only by the internal structure or
    characteristics of the metals, metallic compositions, or alloys comprising
    such structures.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, subclasses 2.01+ for compositions
    containing a synthetic resin; and subclasses 709+ for compositions
    containing a natural rubber.

    273,    Amusement Devices: Games, subclasses 317+ for aerial devices
    nonexplosively propelled.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions for articles defined solely by
    their metal or alloy composition.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 542.8 and 577+
    for an article of intermediate shape.


CLS 102/502
TXT Nonlethal or deterrent:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein the projectile is designed so
    that it will only stun, mark, shock, etc., a person or animal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    512,    for narcotizing projectiles.


CLS 102/503
TXT Tubular:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein the projectile has a hole passing
    through it in the direction of travel.


CLS 102/504
TXT Line carrying or filamentary material distributing:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 including strands, filamentary, or solid
    material carried by or in the projectile.

    (1)     Note.  The projectile may have an explosive charge within it to
    force a line, chaff, etc., out that is carried within the projectile.

    (2)     Note.  The line may be (a) for lifesaving (b) for destructive
    purposes such as to entangle troops, aircraft, etc., or (c) for
    distributing material such as barbed wire, rope, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    371,    for line-carrying bomb lances.


CLS 102/505
TXT Chaff dispensing:

    Subject matter under subclass 504 wherein the material released from the
    projectile are strips, blanks, short pieces, etc., which are comparatively
    light so as to float in air.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400,    for line-carrying projectile with anchor means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and  Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclass 12 for  chaff radar reflectors, per se.


CLS 102/506
TXT Fragmenting:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein the projectile is formed of
    disconnectable or severable parts which separate and scatter during flight.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    473,    for shells with a bursting charge to cause fragmentation.


CLS 102/507
TXT Dumdum or mushrooming:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein the projectile nose is made of a
    soft material or specially constructed for lateral expansion upon impact.


CLS 102/508
TXT With cavity:

    Subject matter under subclass 507 including a hole in the projectile to
    facilitate lateral expansion upon impact.


CLS 102/509
TXT Hollow:

    Subject matter under subclass 508 wherein the cavity has a bottom.


CLS 102/510
TXT With expanding member:

    Subject matter under subclass 509 including means to partially fill the
    cavity to cause expansion upon impact.


CLS 102/511
TXT Lubricating:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein the projectile has means to
    lubricate the bore of a gun.

    (1)     Note.  The lubricating is for minimizing the effect of drag.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    366,    for means to distribute oil for quieting waves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    508,    Solid Antifriction Devices, Materials Therefor, Lubricant or
    Separant Compositions for Moving Solid Surfaces, and Miscellaneous Mineral
    Oil Compositions, for lubricant compositions or for projectiles claimed by
    name only but which are recited solely in terms of the lubricating
    composition of which it is composed even if there is no claim to the
    composition, per se.


CLS 102/512
TXT Narcotizing:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein the projectile includes means to
    lull or dull the senses of a human or animal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    502,    for nonlethal missile.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    604,    Surgery, subclass 130 for projectile hypodermic dosing devices not
    of the bullet type.


CLS 102/513
TXT Target marking:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 including means to indicate a flight path
    or an impact with an objective.

    (1)     Note.  Projectiles containing radioactive material are included
    here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334,    for smoke generating used for general purpose.

    335+,   for pyrotechnic or flare means use for general purposes, e.g.,
    light, signal, etc.

    364+,   for incendiary means.

    458,    for tracer means within a short     cartridge.


CLS 102/514
TXT Having jacket:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 including a layer or coating of material
    enclosing the projectile.

    (1)     Note.  The jacket may not completely enclose the projectile.


CLS 102/515
TXT Nonmetallic:

    Subject matter under subclass 514 wherein the jacket is composed of
    elements other than metal.


CLS 102/516
TXT Composite:

    Subject matter under subclass 514 wherein the means within the jacket is
    made of a plurality of individual elements.


CLS 102/517
TXT Composite:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein the projectile is made of a
    plurality of individual elements connected together to form a unitary body.

    (1)     Note.  The indented subclasses have subcombination of the
    projectile, e.g., rifling or driving means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    430,    for a composite projectile in combination with a cartridge case.

    473,    for a composite projectile having an enclosed explosive charge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 1.23 for means to make a composite
    projectiles.


CLS 102/518
TXT Hardened core within a chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 517 wherein the projectile has an element
    made of firm, unyielding, etc., material enclosed within it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    519,    for a separate hardened nose of a projectile.


CLS 102/519
TXT With separate hardened nose:

    Subject matter under subclass 517 including an element made of firm,
    unyielding, etc., material which is secured to the front of the projectile.


CLS 102/520
TXT Sabot or carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 517 wherein the projectile has means which
    enclose or cover a substantial portion of it or supports it when engaged
    with a bore or rifling means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    524,    for rifling or driving means, e.g., band.


CLS 102/521
TXT Subcaliber:

    Subject matter under subclass 520 having means to enlarge a portion of the
    projectile so that it will fit a bore of a larger size.


CLS 102/522
TXT Base enclosed:

    Subject matter under subclass 521 wherein the bottom or lowest part of the
    projectile is surrounded or enclosed by the sabot or carrier.


CLS 102/523
TXT With projectile exposed to propellent gas:

    Subject matter under subclass 522 wherein the base enclosed means has an
    aperture to allow gases to contact the projectile.


CLS 102/524
TXT Rifling or driving means (e.g., band):

    Subject matter under subclass 517 wherein the projectile includes rings,
    disks, flanges, grooves, etc., which form part of it or are attached to it.

    (1)     Note.  The rifling or driving means of a projectile engage the bore
    or rifling of a gun to prevent windage.


CLS 102/525
TXT Wedge expanded:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 wherein a tapering element is movable to
    cause the sabot or rifling band to be expanded or the sabot or rifling band
    are adapted to slide upon a tapering or conical shaped part.


CLS 102/526
TXT Including annular member:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 wherein the band is a separate element
    and forms a ring around the projectile.


CLS 102/527
TXT Nonmetallic:

    Subject matter under subclass 526 wherein the member is composed of
    elements other than metal.


CLS 102/528
TXT Band protector:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 having means to shield from damage the
    rifling or driving band, e.g., during storage.


CLS 102/529
TXT Practice or cleaning:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein the projectile is constructed for
    use in practice, e.g., short range target work or to remove dirt,
    impurities, etc., from the bore of a gun.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    442,    for cartridges with bore cleaning means.

    444,    for cartridges with practice projectiles.

    498,    for a shell projectile used in practice.

    502,    for nonlethal or deterrent projectile.


CLS 102/530
TXT JACKETED OR CARTRIDGE GAS GENERATOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition which includes method and
    apparatus having a casing or covering and a combustible charge within the
    casing or covering, such charge when ignited produces a gas under pressure
    to perform some task or to simulate the noise of genuine ammunition.

    (1)     Note.  Here are blank cartridges and shells.

    (2)     Note.  The primer to ignite the charge may or may not be claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    314,    for blasting cartridges.

    370,    for noxious gas container.

    374,    for a reaction motor and a payload.

    430,    for cartridges including a projectile.

    498,    for practice shells.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 317+ for a toy bullet or bomb.


CLS 102/531
TXT For gas-powered tools or means:

    Subject matter under subclass 530 wherein the charge and the casing or
    covering is used as a motive source for instruments designed to perform
    some task.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 84 for
    explosively actuated traps.

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 432+ for two or more filters; and
    subclasses 460+ for means securing or retaining separating media.

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 39.01+, particularly subclass 39.02 for
    processes; subclass 39.47 for solid fuel containing oxygen used as a motive
    fluid; subclasses 39.821+ or a combustion products generator having an
    ignitor device; subclasses 200+ for rocket motors; and subclass 632 for one
    shot explosion actuated expansible chamber motors.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 5+ for metal deforming by application
    of fluid medium or energy field; and subclass 362 for processes of metal
    deforming.

    89,     Ordnance, subclass 1.14 and 1.16 for explosively operated apparatus
    and engine starters using explosively generated gas under pressure.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, subclass 84 for portable extinguishers operated
    by gas produced by combustion.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclasses 9+ for explosively
    operated driving means.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 146 for parachutes having inflated bracing.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 728.1+ for inflatable passengers
    restraints or confinements and attachments thereto.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, subclasses 440+ for fasteners having means to
    facilitate the explosive driving of the fastener.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 164 for solid reactant-type gas
    generators with or without ignition and cooling means.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclasses 40+ for inflatable
    life rafts; and subclasses 98+ with expanding means by chemical operation
    for a personal flotation device.


CLS 102/532
TXT WADS:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a plug, packing,
    stuffing, etc., is used as a spacer, seal, cushion, etc., for a gun or
    cartridge.

    (1)     Note.  Where the wad is claimed with no significant wad structure
    but merely in terms of the composition or material of which it is composed,
    it will be classified in the appropriate composition or material class,
    even though there is no claim to the composition, per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333,    for plugs for blasting means.

    448+,   for a wad provided for with or   without a shot cartridge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing; and 57, Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting,
    and Twining, for products which are mere admixtures of textile fibers of
    which have textile structure within the scope of these classes.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, note particularly the class
    definition for the type of composition within the scope of Class 106, and
    for compositions elsewhere classified.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, for paper stock.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, subclasses 2.01+ for compositions
    containing a synthetic resin; and subclasses 709+ for compositions
    containing a natural rubber.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet; and particularly subclasses 292.1+ for such product when including a
    component containing structurally defined fibers.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 102/700
TXT COMBUSTIBLE CARTRIDGE:

    A cartridge is formed by molding a propellant to a projectile in such a way
    that it has sufficient strength to be handled.


CLS 102/701
TXT CHARGE WAVE FORMING:

    A charge is shaped and/or has material added so that upon detonation the
    resulting wave will be formed according to the shape or its direction of
    travel will be changed because of the addition of material.


CLS 102/702
TXT COMPRESSION IGNITION:

    The ignition is a high pressured air or gas, heat generating material,
    spring, etc., for propelling a projectile.


CLS 102/703
TXT FLECHETTE:

    A rodlike dart with vanes or fluted shaft, small lightweight elongated
    projectile, etc.


CLS 102/704
TXT COOLANTS:

    Material or a fluid is added to an explosive or projectile to lower the
    temperature of combustion or of the projectile.


CLS 102/705
TXT SEPARATED EXPLOSIVE CONSTITUENTS:

    The materials which form an explosive are not in contact with each other
    until an explosion is desired.


CLS 104/
TTL RAILWAYS

CLS 104/
TXT This class includes railway rolling stock and track, each of which is
    modified for interrelation and cooperation with each other, as in the case
    of traction and propulsion systems not otherwise classified; railway track
    other than normal surface track; car-stopping devices of abutting type
    associated with the track; amusement railway apparatus, such as used in
    recreation parks; track layers, shifters, and repairers; railway fixtures,
    such as turntables, transfer tables, and terminal features; appliances for
    use with railway track, such as hose bridges, car replacers, and car
    derailers, and miscellaneous features relating to railway track not
    elsewhere classified.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclass 1, for a road
    system.

    446,    Amusement Devices: Toys, subclasses 444+ for a toy railway wherein
    the energy for moving the rolling stock is supplied by the child, such as a
    wind-up toy, or where a feature peculiar to Class 446 is claimed.


CLS 104/2
TXT Apparatus and tools under class definition for distributing track material
    along the grade, for placing the rails and ties and assembling the track,
    and for adjusting the track and tamping the same into final position.


CLS 104/3
TXT Apparatus and tools under subclass 2 in which the rails and ties are spiked
    or fastened together in completed sections before they are positioned on
    the roadbed.


CLS 104/4
TXT Apparatus under subclass 2 in which the detachable track sections are
    continuously shifted from the rear of the moving vehicle to the front
    thereof.


CLS 104/5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 2 comprising one or more cars or a train with
    means for distributing the rails and ties to the roadbed in advance of the
    train.


CLS 104/6
TXT Distributor under subclass 5 which delivers the ties transversely of and
    upon the roadbed substantially in final position.


CLS 104/7.1
TXT Track raising car:

    Apparatus under subclass 2 comprising a track-supported vehicle which
    includes means to raise connected rails and ties to a higher position as it
    passes slowly over the track.


CLS 104/7.2
TXT With means to tranversely shift track (i.e., aligning):

    Apparatus under subclass 7.1 wherein the thack-supported vehicle further
    includes means to shift the completed track laterally to a new position as
    it passes along the track.


CLS 104/7.3
TXT Under-track ballast sled or plow:

    Apparatus under subclass 7.1 wherein the track-supported vehicle includes
    means inserted between the roadbed and connected rails and ties for raising
    the track from the roadbed as it passes along underneath the track; the
    track raising means further functioning to either (1) evenly distribute,
    level, or smooth the roadbed material supporting the track befor allowing
    the levelled or smoothed roadbed, or (2) scrape away a portion of the
    roadbed material supporting the track before allowing the raised track to
    settle back onto the remaining roadbed or sub-grade.


CLS 104/8
TXT Track cars under subclass 2 which slue or shift the completed track
    laterally to a new position as they pass along the track.


CLS 104/9
TXT Devices under subclass 2 mounted upon track trucks for removing and
    replacing ties in track repair.


CLS 104/10
TXT Apparatus and tools under subclass 2 for tamping the ballast, cement, or
    earth around ties.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclass 463 for impact tools of general application and see
    the Notes thereto for other impact tools.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 90+ and see the search notes
    therein for a means to impact a tool or the like.


CLS 104/11
TXT Pneumatic injection apparatus under subclass 10 for forcing cement or
    concrete beneath and around ties.


CLS 104/12
TXT Tampers under subclass 10 mounted on cars which are adapted to run on the
    track rails.


CLS 104/13
TXT Hand implements under subclass 10 for tamping ballast in place.


CLS 104/14
TXT Hand tools under subclass 13 of the pneumatic-hammer type for placing
    ballast around the ties.


CLS 104/15
TXT Electric welding apparatus under subclass 2 for operation on a completed
    track, such as making welded rail joints.


CLS 104/16
TXT Apparatus under subclass 2 for permanently seating tie plates in position
    on the ties.


CLS 104/17.1
TXT Track rail mounted spike driver:

    Apparatus under subclass 2 comprising a track rail supported vehicle or
    carriage specially adapted to secure the track rails to the ties by means
    of forcing large elongated nail-like fasteners into the ties.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 90+ and see the search notes
    therein for a means to impact a tool or the like.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, appropriate subclasses, for
    apparatus for applying a member, e.g., spike, not mounted on a track.


CLS 104/17.2
TXT Track rail mounted rail anchor applicator:

    Apparatus under subclass 2 comprising a track-supported vehicle or carriage
    having means to attach spring clip members (which are intended to span and
    resiliently grip a trach rail base) to a trach rail base and abut them
    against a side of the ties or tie plates, whereby the attached spring clip
    members prevent longitudinal movement of a track rail relative to the ties.


CLS 104/18
TXT Load transfer under class definition to and from moving trains.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    258,    Railway Mail Delivery, for mailbag and train order transfer, and
    also for loading or unloading aircraft in flight.


CLS 104/19
TXT Apparatus under subclass 18 for enabling a train-man in case of danger to
    land safely from a rapidly moving train or locomotive.


CLS 104/20
TXT Apparatus under subclass 18 for the transfer of passengers to and from a
    continuously moving train.


CLS 104/21
TXT Apparatus under subclass 20 comprising a terminal having a large turntable
    which travels with the train as the latter runs around the periphery of the
    turntable.


CLS 104/22
TXT Balloons under class definition connected with cars or trucks which are
    designed to travel along defined tracks.


CLS 104/23.1
TXT FLUID SUPPORTED CAR OR SIMULATED AERIAL VEHICLE:

    Railway under the class difinition either (1) wherein a vehicle travels
    along a guideway and is supported entirely or in part by a fluid medium
    while still being contstrained to move along the guideway; or (2) wherein a
    vehicle travels along a rail or cable way and represents an air vehicle,
    but is incapable of being, at least in part, aerodynamically supported.


CLS 104/23.2
TXT Car supported by fluid current pushing against surface:

    Railway under subclass 23.1 wherein the vehicle is supported above the
    guideway by a current of fluid moving between a surface of the vehicle and
    a supportting surface, the movement of the fluid forcing the two surfaces
    away from one another so as to sustain the vehicle out of contact with, but
    in close proximity to the supporting surface.

    (1)     Note.  The "supporting surface" may either constitute the guideway
    or be located on or near the guideway.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, appropriate subclasses, for a surface effect marine vehicle
    utilizing water as a supporting surface.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 116+ for a surface effect vehicle which
    is not track guided.


CLS 104/24
TXT Rail vehicles under class definition provided with sails for effecting the
    movement of such vehicles.


CLS 104/25
TXT Passenger cars or carriers under class definition connected in endless
    horizontal trains.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 321+ for endless carriers of
    the escalator type.


CLS 104/26.1
TXT CAR YARD:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising an arrangement of a
    plurality of railway tracks, means to facilitate the making-up of a train
    of railway cars, means to facilitate the sorting of railway cars, or the
    general arrangement of a railway yard designed to receive, distribute, or
    classify railway cars.


CLS 104/26.2
TXT Track brake:

    Apparatus under subclass 26.1 comprising car retarding means located on or
    in the vicinity of a railway track of a car yard for reducing the speed of
    a railway car moving along the track, not on the vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 62+, for brakes for track guided vehicles, the
    brakes being mounted solely on the track, not on the vehicle.


CLS 104/27
TXT Railway stopping places under class definition for the receipt or discharge
    of passengers or freight.


CLS 104/28
TXT Arrangements of stations under subclass 27 for the handling of passenger
    traffic.


CLS 104/29
TXT Arrangements of stations under subclass 27 for the handling of freight
    traffic.


CLS 104/30
TXT Platforms under subclass 27 and fixtures thereon for railway stations.


CLS 104/31
TXT Station platforms under subclass 30 having portions shiftable to facilitate
    passenger movement or the handling of freight.


CLS 104/32.1
TXT Apparatus under class definition for removing and replacing trucks or
    wheels and axles on railway rolling stock or yard fixtures for removing car
    or locomotive bodies from their trucks.


CLS 104/33
TXT Gauge frogs or other track fixtures under subclass 32.1 for effecting the
    change of the wheel gauge on trucks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 178 for changeable gauge trucks.


CLS 104/34
TXT Station apparatus under class definition for effecting battery interchange
    and supply on electric vehicles.


CLS 104/35
TXT Intermediately pivoted rotary track sections under class definition for
    shifting vehicles angularly.


CLS 104/36
TXT Operating mechanism under subclass 35 for rotating turntables not otherwise
    classified below.


CLS 104/37
TXT Mechanism under subclass 36 comprising compressed air or steam motor
    devices for rotating turntables.


CLS 104/38
TXT Turntable operators under subclass 36 comprising electric motors and
    control therefor and electric controlling systems for other motors.


CLS 104/39
TXT Turntables under subclass 36 actuated directly or indirectly by traction
    cables such as are used for car propulsion.


CLS 104/40
TXT Turntables under subclass 36 in which the vehicle which is to be shifted
    furnishes the power for operating the turntable.


CLS 104/41
TXT Turntables under subclass 40 in which the vehicle traction drive wheels
    operate friction drive wheels on the turntable to effect the operation of
    the latter.


CLS 104/42
TXT Turntables under subclass 40 in which the weight of the vehicle is used to
    operate the turntable.


CLS 104/43
TXT Turntables under subclass 36 in which rotation is effected by power driven
    traction wheels, which may also act as the end carriers of the turntable.


CLS 104/44
TXT Turntables under subclass 35 designed for handling automobiles.


CLS 104/45
TXT Portable turntables under subclass 35 carried by or separate from the
    vehicles, designed for temporary use wherever desired.


CLS 104/46
TXT Center bearings and end supports for turntables under subclass 35 which
    involve a substantial modification of the turntable structure to accomodate
    them.


CLS 104/47
TXT Locking devices under subclass 35 for holding turntables in fixed
    positions. These locks are usually associated with the aligning rail ends.


CLS 104/48
TXT Trucks under class definition carrying tracks to receive vehicles and carry
    them laterally or longitudinally to fixed tracks adapted to register with
    the tracks on the trucks.


CLS 104/49
TXT Transfer tables under subclass 48 pivoted at one end, adapted to receive
    and carry a vehicle during the swinging of the transfer table.


CLS 104/50
TXT Mechanism under subclass 48 for effecting the movement of transfer tables.


CLS 104/51
TXT Fixed apparatus under class definition in locomotive sheds or roundhouses
    for use with locomotives.


CLS 104/52
TXT Smoke removers under subclass 51 for use in roundhouses and train sheds
    over locomotive smoke stacks.  They may or may not be provided with means
    for producing an artificial draft.


CLS 104/53
TXT Railway and analogous devices under class definition for use in amusement
    parks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclasses 1+ for an amusement
    roundabout.


CLS 104/54
TXT Apparatus under subclass 53 comprising special forms of track and vehicles
    in which the moving vehicle jumps across gaps between sections of the track.


CLS 104/55
TXT Apparatus under subclass 53 comprising a track provided with substantially
    vertical loops, around which the vehicles travel.


CLS 104/56
TXT Apparatus under subclass 53 comprising a track in helical form, which may
    vary to substantially spiral form with substantially vertical axes.


CLS 104/57
TXT Apparatus under subclass 56 in which a helical track rotates, and thus
    causes the car to move by gravity, similar to the action of the Archimedean
    screw.


CLS 104/58
TXT Apparatus under subclass 53 comprising a track made of flexible sheet metal
    in which waves or undulations are produced to cause the movement of the
    cars located on the track.


CLS 104/59
TXT Apparatus under subclass 53 in which passenger carrying tubs usually
    provided with roller bottoms, coast by gravity down inclined track surfaces
    provided with surface variations or obstacles.


CLS 104/60
TXT Devices under subclass 53 which include parallel track arrangements, speed
    controlling devices, electric circuit control, and other features designed
    particularly for producing racing effects. The vehicle may or may not carry
    passengers.


CLS 104/61
TXT Vehicles and tracks under subclass 53 for simulating horseback riding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for devices particularly designed to produce racing effects.


CLS 104/62
TXT Apparatus under subclass 53 comprising vehicles traveling along fixed ways
    for use in physical training.


CLS 104/63
TXT Appartus under subclass 53 having railway tracks distorted in alignement in
    all directions for producing surprising and pleasing shocks during travel.


CLS 104/64
TXT Railway tracks under subclass 63 arranged in a generally horizontal zigzag
    layout when viewed in plan.


CLS 104/65
TXT Apparatus under subclass 64 in which the vehicles are moved in arcuate
    paths by interrelated wheels, each of which carries the vehicle through a
    certain arc and then passes it to another wheel.


CLS 104/66
TXT Apparatus under subclass 64 in which the vehicles are connected for endless
    chain drive through a horizontal zigzag path.


CLS 104/67
TXT Apparatus under subclass 53 in which the cars have a back-and-forth
    movement over track sections connected at their ends by switches, where the
    car movement is reversed.


CLS 104/68
TXT Special circular tracks under subclass 53 for bicycles and motor vehicles
    for exhibition purposes.


CLS 104/69
TXT Inclined slideways and tracks under subclass 53 for coasting.


CLS 104/70
TXT Apparatus under subclass 69, with the track terminal ending in a body of
    water.


CLS 104/71
TXT Apparatus under subclass 53 having boats and cars designed to run entirely
    submerged and having guideways for determining their path of movement.


CLS 104/72
TXT Apparatus under subclass 53 having cars with boatlike bottoms and a path of
    travel an intermediate portion of which causes the car to trail over the
    surface of a body of water.


CLS 104/73
TXT Apparatus under subclass 53 comprising canal walls and moving currents of
    water to guide and carry the boat or car throughout its course of travel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclass 13 for a marine amusement
    roundabout.


CLS 104/74
TXT Apparatus under subclass 53 in which the car body is designed to rotate
    relatively to the truck on which it is carried.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclass 3 for an amusement
    roundabout having a feature for facilitating transport by a vehicle.


CLS 104/75
TXT The car body under subclass 74 rotates about a vertical axis on the truck.


CLS 104/76
TXT The car body under subclass 74 rotates about a horizontal axis on the truck.


CLS 104/77
TXT Apparatus under subclass 53 in which the car travels on a track inside a
    wheel.


CLS 104/78
TXT Apparatus under subclass 77 in which the wheel in which the car travels is
    itself adapted to travel along a track.


CLS 104/79
TXT Apparatus under subclass 53 in which the cars are designed to travel back
    and forth along a teetering track.


CLS 104/80
TXT Apparatus under subclass 53 in which the teeter or seesaw track is mounted
    upon a wheeled truck and the oscillating track is connected in driving
    relation to the wheeled truck to propel it along a track.


CLS 104/81
TXT Apparatus under subclass 53 in which the oscillations of a swing suspended
    from a wheeled truck cause the truck to move along a track.


CLS 104/82
TXT Devices under subclass 53 for giving a passenger a vertical jolt or
    movement on a vehicle for the purpose of simulating horseback riding or
    giving a thrilling effect.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for horse simulation devices.


CLS 104/83
TXT Imitation cars or boats under subclass 53 which simulate rapid movement.


CLS 104/84
TXT Scenic illusion effects under subclass 53 other than static scenery,
    associated with traveling vehicles for giving the passenger a false
    impression as to his traveling conditions and surroundings.


CLS 104/85
TXT Means under subclass 53 associated with traveling vehicles for producing
    unexpected physical effects.


CLS 104/86
TXT Apparatus under subclass 53 having water movement display operatively
    associated with moving vehicles.


CLS 104/87
TXT Apparatus under class definition in which a rigid rail track merges into a
    cable rail track, or vice-versa.

    (1)     Note. This subclass includes rigid curved rail sections for cable
    rail.


CLS 104/88.01
TXT SELECTIVE DELIVERY:

    Subject matter under the class definition for predetermined delivery of
    rolling stock at selected locations on a plurality of tracks.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170+,   for traction truck-freight handling systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclasses 1+ for fluid current
    conveyors having selective delivery.


CLS 104/88.02
TXT Electrical control:

    Subject matter under subclass 88.01 wherein the delivery of the rolling
    stock is regulated by a device which is electrically powered.

    (1)     Note.  The device for this subclass may include a control means
    comprising an electrically operated mechanical mechanism such as an
    electrically operated fluid-pressure control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclass 28 for automatic electric
    control for signals.


CLS 104/88.03
TXT Centralized:

    Subject matter under subclass 88.02 wherein the device is a single dominant
    source for controlling the delivery.


CLS 104/88.04
TXT Including local control:

    Subject matter under subclass 88.03 wherein the device, in conjunction with
    a secondary control means, performs a function of the delivery.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117.1,  for automatic stopping or reversing means for cable rails.


CLS 104/88.05
TXT Including override feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 88.02 wherein the device includes a control
    means which upon actuation nullifies the action directed by the device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclasses 25+ for signal clearing
    operation.


CLS 104/88.06
TXT Including pre-established manual setting:

    Subject matter under subclass 88.02 wherein the device is secured in a
    calibrated position by a human operator before actuation.


CLS 104/89
TXT Railways under class definition having overhead track for rolling stock in
    which the load carrying parts are suspended below the trucks and rails upon
    which they run.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 94-96, inclusive, for tracks for
    panel hangers and travelers.


CLS 104/90
TXT Railways under subclass 89 comprising suspended cars having a load carrying
    platform or track designed to travel between and in alignment with two
    stationary track sections or platforms, like a ferry boat.


CLS 104/91
TXT Trolley or overhead track systems under subclass 89 involving special
    arrangements and relative track location.


CLS 104/92
TXT Overhead track under subclass 89 terminating in a laterally swinging boom
    track.


CLS 104/93
TXT Overhead or trolley track structure under subclass 89 having a single rail.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 87+, for panel hangers and
    travelers.


CLS 104/94
TXT Overhead or trolley track structure under subclass 89 having two rails,
    with a clear space between them for passage of car suspenders.


CLS 104/95
TXT Track structure under subclass 89 for carrying outwardly-projecting rails
    or a single rail with two oppositely-extending rail tread-surfaces.  In
    either case the truck-wheels for use on such tracks have opposite
    inwardly-extending track-wheels.


CLS 104/96
TXT Apparatus under class definition for the shifting and transfer of trolley
    and suspended cars on their track systems.


CLS 104/97
TXT A shifting device under subclass 96 for bodily lifting a trolley from one
    track and placing it on another track.


CLS 104/98
TXT Apparatus under subclass 96 having the traveling-bridge trolley-track of an
    overhead crane is designed to register with a series of fixed track
    sections, so that the trolley may pass from the bridge to any registering
    track-section, or vice versa.


CLS 104/99
TXT Devices under subclass 96 comprising frog-pieces and switches of turntable
    type having intermediate vertical axes.


CLS 104/100
TXT Devices under subclass 96 comprising switch or frog pieces having
    transverse horizontal end pivots, so that the pieces may swing upwardly in
    the vertical plane of the track.


CLS 104/101
TXT Devices under subclass 96 comprising switch or frog pieces having
    horizontal axes running longitudinally of the track, so that the pieces may
    swing in vertical planes transversally to the track.


CLS 104/102
TXT Devices under subclass 96 comprising switch or frog pieces having
    transverse sliding movement.


CLS 104/103
TXT Stub-switches under subclass 96 pivoted at one end and swinging in
    horizontal planes.


CLS 104/104
TXT Devices under subclass 96 comprising switch and frog pieces of the
    split-point type.


CLS 104/105
TXT Devices under subclass 96 comprising fixed frogs having no movable parts.


CLS 104/106
TXT Rail-forms under class definition for suspended or trolley tracks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 94-96, for tracks for panel
    hangers and travelers.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 49+ for pipe and cable supports which are
    closely related in structure to rail supports.


CLS 104/107
TXT Trolley-rails under subclass 106 provided with a plurality of
    tread-surfaces.


CLS 104/108
TXT Trolley-rails under subclass 107 of slotted-tube form, in which the
    interior surfaces of the opposed slot edges form the tread-surfaces.


CLS 104/109
TXT Trolley-rails under subclass 107 which are integral and have tread-surfaces
    on their opposite sides.


CLS 104/110
TXT Trolley-rails under subclass 106 each having a single tread-surface.


CLS 104/111
TXT Devices under subclass 106 comprising hangers and suspension means for
    trolley-rails.


CLS 104/112
TXT Elevated or suspended railways under class definition in which the tracks
    are formed of cables.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 264+ for apparatus for hauling or hoisting a load including a
    driven device which contacts and either (a) pulls a cable attached to the
    load, or (b) travels with the load along a cable.


CLS 104/113
TXT Inclined or inclinable cable-tracks under subclass 112 upon which the cars
    or trolleys travel by gravity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164,    for tilting, track railway propulsion systems.


CLS 104/114
TXT Cable-railways under subclass 112 of marine type in which the track length
    is continually changing, as, for example, in coaling vessels at sea.


CLS 104/115
TXT Devices under subclass 112 comprising hangers, suspension devices, and
    saddles for cable-rails.


CLS 104/116
TXT Cable rail suspension devices under subclass 115 which permit of vertical
    movement of the cable ends.


CLS 104/117
TXT Devices under subclasses 112 comprising cable-rail tension regulators and
    anchoring devices for the ends of cable-rails.


CLS 104/117.1
TXT With automatic stopping or reversing:

    Apparatus under subclass 112 including means for bringing a vehicle riding
    on the cable to a halt or reversing its direction of movement at a
    predetermined location or time, without manual intervention.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    303,    for other electric railways having means externally to the vehicle
    for reversing the direction of travel of the vehicle.


CLS 104/118
TXT Apparatus under class definition comprising monorail track structure for
    cars in which the load-carrying body is above the rail, in
    contradistinction to a suspended-car system.


CLS 104/119
TXT Monorail track structure under subclass 118 having side guides or tracks to
    prevent the cars tipping over.


CLS 104/120
TXT Apparatus under subclass 118, in which the truck or car bottom is of saddle
    form seated over a raised center rail.


CLS 104/121
TXT Apparatus under subclass 118 comprising track structure having a bottom
    rail and an upper suspended rail, between which the rolling-stock, with
    wheels at the top and bottom thereof, is adapted to be supported and
    vertically maintained in its travel.


CLS 104/122
TXT Devices under class definition adapted to be lowered from an overhead car
    for picking up passengers or freight.


CLS 104/123
TXT Railways under class definition comprising catenary cable or chain
    suspension of suspension-bridge type and towers or posts with inclined
    tie-rods or cables for track suspension.


CLS 104/124
TXT Railways under class definition comprising the horizontal portion of
    elevated track structure and horizontal trussing therefor.


CLS 104/125
TXT Railways under class definition comprising the vertical main supports, such
    as towers or posts, for elevated track structure.


CLS 104/126
TXT Portable elevated tracks under class definition as for use with trenchwork,
    or shiftable tower-tracks, as used in handling coal or ore.


CLS 104/127
TXT Apparatus under class definition comprising passenger and freight elevators
    interconnected in operation with elevated railways.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclass 403 for elevator car structure having means for engaging the
    wheels of a carried vehicle.


CLS 104/128
TXT Elevators under subclass 127 for handling railway rolling-stock.


CLS 104/129
TXT Elevators under subclass 127, interconnected in operation with adjacent
    rail or track structure.


CLS 104/130.01
TXT SWITCHES:

    Subject matter under class definition comprising a device having a
    plurality of track sections of a railway track which, in conjunction with a
    control means, is used for guiding the rolling stock from one railway track
    to an adjacent or intersecting railway track.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     for suspended trolley transfer devices.

    195,    for cable conduit slot switches.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, for railway switches of general
    utility, especially subclass 419 for switches more or less modified in
    construction by the presence of the conduits, third rails, and cables and
    conducting wires of cable and electric railways.


CLS 104/130.02
TXT For levitated vehicle:

    Subject matter under subclass 130.01 wherein the device is adapted for
    guiding the rolling stock which is elevated above the track by a magnetic
    or pneumatic source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    292,    for a motor element for a linear motor generating a magnetic field
    for a propulsion of a railway rolling stock.


CLS 104/130.03
TXT Having movable track element:

    Subject matter under subclass 130.02 wherein the device includes at least
    one moving component for guiding the rolling stock.


CLS 104/130.04
TXT For vertical guide:

    Subject matter under subclass 130.01 wherein the device  is used for
    guiding rolling stock to or from tracks at different heights.


CLS 104/130.05
TXT Having longitudinal pivot axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 130.01 wherein the device rotates about its
    horizontal axis which is longitudinal to the track.


CLS 104/130.06
TXT Having horizontal sliding shift:

    Subject matter under subclass 130.01 wherein the device is operated by
    sliding it in the direction transverse to the track.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for trolley transfer switch or frog pieces having a transverse
    sliding movement.


CLS 104/130.07
TXT Having all stationary track elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 130.01 wherein all track sections of the
    device are fixed in place with respect to one another.

    (1)     Note. In this subclass the device operates in conjunction with a
    guiding member located on the body of the rolling stock.


CLS 104/130.08
TXT For toothed rail:

    Subject matter under subclass 130.01 wherein the device is adapted for rack
    or cogged railways.


CLS 104/130.09
TXT Having movable track element for slot-guided vehicle:

    Subject matter under subclass 130.01 wherein (a) at least one of the
    components of the track sections of the device changes its position for
    guiding the rolling stock on the railway track, and (b) the railway track
    consists of a narrow and continuous groove wherein means projecting (e.g.,
    pins,  posts) from the body of the rolling stock are traveling during
    operation.


CLS 104/130.11
TXT Having flexible element:

    Subject matter under subclass 130.01 wherein one of the components of the
    track section of the device bends when a force is applied and retracts to
    its original position when the force is removed.

    (1)     Note.  The component of the track section for this subclass
    includes a single bendable member or a plurality of members jointed at ends
    by means (e.g., hinges) which allow the members to move as a unit.


CLS 104/133
TXT Railway apparatus under class definition comprising drip-pans, nets, etc.,
    for catching liquids, dirt, or articles that might fall from an elevated
    railway.


CLS 104/134
TXT Railways under class definition in which the vehicles move over a defined
    track by sliding contact.


CLS 104/135
TXT Sledways under subclass 134 having the track-surface made up of a series of
    rollers, over which the nonwheeled vehicles slide.


CLS 104/136
TXT Sledways under subclass 134 in which the defined track-surface is formed of
    ice, along which the vehicles are adapted to slide.


CLS 104/137
TXT Railways under class definition in which a traveling track is interposed
    between a bottom fixed track and a traveling vehicle.


CLS 104/138.1
TXT TUBULAR WAY:

    Railway Under the class definition having an enclosed tubular form.


CLS 104/138.2
TXT Internal service device:

    Tubular way under subclass 138.1 including a means movable therewithin for
    inspecting, servicing, treating, cleaning, or performing some other
    maintenance function upon the interior of the tubular way.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains patents directed to the motive
    systems for carrying and moving the actual servicing tools through the
    interior of a tubular way.  If the specific servicing tool is more than
    nominally claimed (even in combination with the motive carrying device),
    the patent is located in the appropriate classes provided for the tool.


CLS 104/139
TXT Railways, under class definition having a track with a slot opening into an
    enlarged conduit, in which a truck travels.  The car-body is above the slot
    and has connecting-bars passing downwardly through the lost and fastened to
    the truck.


CLS 104/140
TXT Railways under class definition in which the trackway is provided with an
    underground slotted conduit for the reception of traction elements, such as
    electric conductors or traction-cables.


CLS 104/141
TXT Apparatus under subclass 140 comprising crossings for slotted-conduit
    railway-track.  The conduit-slot rails enter into the structure.


CLS 104/142
TXT Apparatus under subclass 140 comprising transverse yoke or U-beam structure
    for support of the track-rails and a slotted conduit.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is largely composed of built-up rolled and
    cast sectional yokes.


CLS 104/143
TXT Yokes or slotted conduit structure under subclass 142 made of concrete or
    concrete with metal structure.


CLS 104/144
TXT Yokes or slotted conduit structure under subclass 142 composed of a single
    piece of metal.


CLS 104/145
TXT Apparatus under subclass 140 comprising conduit enlargements and surface
    trap-doors for conduits for facilitating the insertion and removal of
    electric plow shoes or cable-grippers and devices for handling the
    trap-doors, plows, or grippers.


CLS 104/146
TXT Conduit construction under subclass 140 provided with slots, in which means
    are provided for laterally adjusting the slot-irons to increase or diminish
    the width of the slot.


CLS 104/154
TXT Car-propulsion systems under subclass 287 in which the power is hydraulic
    and propulsion is effected through the cooperation of the car-carried
    mechanism and mechanism, such as nozzles and troughs, located along the
    trackway.


CLS 104/155
TXT Car-propulsion systems under subclass 287 in which the power is pneumatic
    and propulsion is effected through the cooperation of the car-carried
    mechanism and mechanism located along the trackway and not otherwise
    classified below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    406,    Conveyors: Fluid Current, for propulsion of carriers through tubes
    by means of a current of air flowing through the tube.  Class 104 provides
    for similar subject matter having tracks on which the carriers ride through
    the tubes.


CLS 104/156
TXT Pneumatic car-propulsion systems under subclass 155 in which a car-carried
    piston slides in a slotted tube extending longitudinally along the trackway
    and is acted upon by air therein for effecting the propulsion of the car.


CLS 104/157
TXT Mechanism under subclass 155 located along the trackway and adapted to
    cooperate with car-carried mechanism for charging the air-cylinders of the
    car and not otherwise classified below.


CLS 104/158
TXT Mechanism under subclass 157, allowing the charging of the car while in
    motion, and not otherwise classified below.


CLS 104/159
TXT Moving-car pneumatic motor-charging systems under subclass 158 in which a
    longitudinal air-supply tube is located along the trackway and is adapted
    to charge the car by means of a car-carried receiver adapted to slide in a
    slot in said tube.


CLS 104/160
TXT Moving-car pneumatic motor-charging systems under subclass 159, the
    receiver being adapted to surround the supply-tube and slide on the outer
    surface thereof.


CLS 104/161
TXT Devices under subclass 155 for closing the receiver slots in longitudinal
    air-supply or piston tubes to prevent the escape of air therefrom and
    adapted for movement to allow the passage of the receiver or piston shank
    therealong.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194,    for slot closers for traction cable conduits.


CLS 104/162
TXT Car propelling means under subclass 165 comprising piston-rods or
    reciprocating plungers or rachet-bars located on the track for pushing cars.


CLS 104/163
TXT Pushers under subclass 162 comprising horizontal rotary arms or armed
    wheels for pushing cars around curves and vertical wheel devices for
    peripheral engagement with cars to raise them to a higher level.


CLS 104/164
TXT Railways under the class definition having rigid track sections
    horizontally pivoted, whereby upon tilting of a track section a car may
    move on the same by gravity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for gravity cable rails.


CLS 104/165
TXT Track and rolling stock under class definition in which the car-propelling
    means consists of a moving element or elements located along the trackway
    adapted to engage or be engaged by mechanism on the car for effecting
    movement thereof and not otherwise classified below.


CLS 104/166
TXT Car-propelling means under subclass 165 in which the moving element in the
    road-bed consists of a longitudinally-extending rotary shaft.


CLS 104/167
TXT Car-propelling means under subclass 165 in which rotary shafts along the
    track are provided with helical or screw surfaces for propelling the car,
    on the principle of the screw or worm gear.


CLS 104/168
TXT Car-propelling means under subclass 165 in which the moving element in the
    road-bed consists of vertically or transversely extending live-rolls for
    engagement with car parts.


CLS 104/169
TXT Traction railways under subclass 165 in which field farm tools are adapted
    to reciprocate transversely of the field by traction and to move
    longitudinally thereof at the same time or adapted for transverse and
    longitudinal movement independent of each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235,    for whelp-wheel traction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 23+ for earth working implements driven
    from or guided by a stationary object.  A patent claiming an earth working
    implement by name only and concerned with a drive therefor, as defined in
    subclass 169, is classified in Class 104.  Claiming some manipulation of
    the implement additional to traverse over the field or some detail
    concerned with earth working causes classification in Class 172.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 264+ for apparatus for hauling or hoisting a load including a
    driven device which contacts and either (a) pulls a cable attached to the
    load, or (b) travels with the load along a cable.


CLS 104/170
TXT Freight-handling systems under subclass 165 in which the freight is
    distributed from one point to another, as from car to warehouse, by means
    of small trucks operated by traction system, such as traveling cables or
    chains.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for selective delivery features.


CLS 104/171
TXT Freight-handling systems under subclass 170 in which trucks of the
    two-wheel type are adapted to be engaged by traction cables or chains.


CLS 104/172.1
TXT CHAIN:

    Car-propelling means under subclass 165 in which the moving element along
    the trackway effecting the movement of a car comprises a flexible series of
    joined links carrying means for selectively engaging a car or adapted to be
    selectively engaged by a car-carried mechanism.


CLS 104/172.2
TXT Tow pin or mast:

    Car-propelling means under subclass 172.1 in which the car carries a
    movably attached car-propelling pin or member wwhich is movable through a
    guide slot into engagement with a traction chain moving within a channel
    disposed behind the guide slot; the weight of the car and its load, if any,
    is supported on a floor surface while the car is propelled and guided along
    the floor surface by the moving traction chain.

    (1)     Note.  Although the drive chain usually moves along a level below
    that of the surface which supports the car (i.e., below floor level), also
    included herein is a drive chain moving along a level above the car, in
    which case the car carries a rather long upwardly extending mast-like
    member in order to engage the overhead drive chain.


CLS 104/172.3
TXT Beneath  vehicle:

    Car-propelling means under subclass 172.1 in which the car is always
    located directly above the traction chain during the time it is being
    propelled thereby.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172.2,  for a chain for propelling a car which is usually located undeneath
    the car.


CLS 104/172.4
TXT Suspended:

    Car-propelling means under subclass 172.1 having an overhead rail or track
    for supporting and guiding a movable truck thereon, and further having an
    overhead traction chain for propelling the truck along the rail or track,
    whereby the load carrying parts are suspended or hung below the truck and
    the rail or track upon which it runs.

    (1)     Note.  An overhead conveyor which merely tows or pulls a
    floor-supported car therealong is not included herein.  To be included in
    this subclass, an overhead conveyor must also have an overhead rail which
    supports the weight of the car or truck and its load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89+,    for an overhead track for rolling stock in which the load carrying
    parts are suspended below the truck and the rail upon which it runs.


CLS 104/172.5
TXT Chain construction:

    Subject matter under subclass 172.1 pertaining to the structure of the
    traction chain, per se.


CLS 104/173.1
TXT Cable:

    Car-propelling means under subclass 165 in which the moving element along
    the trackway effecting the movement of a car comprises a flexible belt or a
    thick, heavy, flexible rope or wire which carries means for selectively
    engaging a car or adapted to be selectively engaged by a car-carried
    mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 264+ for apparatus for hauling or hoisting a load including a
    driven device which contacts and either (a) pulls a cable attached to the
    load, or (b) travels with the load along a cable.


CLS 104/173.2
TXT Ski tow:

    Traction means under subclass 173.1 in which the traction cable is
    specifically adapted to pull, haul, or carry skiers particpating in the
    sport of skiing from one place to another.

    (1)     Note.  Although most of the traction cables included herein are
    directed to the sport of snow skiing, also included herein are traction
    cables directed to the sports of water skiing and surfing.

    (2)     Note.  Subclasses 174-240, also indented under subclass 173.1, were
    not screened upon the creation of this subclass.  Therefore, patents
    directed to "Ski tow" traction cables may still be present in subclasses
    174-240.


CLS 104/174
TXT Cable-operated car systems under subclass 173.1 in which cars traveling
    downgrade under gravity are adapted to move or assist in moving other cars
    upgrade, not classified below.


CLS 104/175
TXT Cable-operated car systems under subclass 174 in which cars travelling
    downgrade under gravity are adapted to lift a weight, which acting under
    gravity, moves or assists in moving other cars upgrade.


CLS 104/176
TXT Car-haul systems under subclass 173.1 having a pushing car or mule operated
    by traction-cables and adapted to engage the railroad cars by means of a
    pusher-arm for moving the same.  The pusher-arm in many of these patents is
    depressible to allow the mule to pass under the car.


CLS 104/177
TXT Traction-cable systems under subclass 173.1 in which a mail-carrying car is
    suspended from a trackway and adapted to ply between two points, as between
    a farmhouse and the road, and in which the car is propelled by cables
    operated by means of hand-cranks.


CLS 104/178
TXT Apparatus under subclass 173.1 for driving and braking railway traction
    cables or chains and also controlling means for the driving-motors thereof.


CLS 104/179
TXT Devices under subclass 178 for signaling to the power-house in case of
    injury to the traction-cable.


CLS 104/180
TXT Traction-cable systems under subclass 173.1 in which a single cable is
    utilized for both propelling and supporting the cable-car.


CLS 104/181
TXT Traction-cable systems under subclass 180 in which the car is adapted to
    carry mail and ply between two points, as farmhouse and road, the cable
    being operated by means of a hand-crank.


CLS 104/182
TXT Cable apparatus under subclass 173.1 comprising hangers for load-carrying
    cables which are displaceable with respect to the cables to permit the
    unobstructed passage of the load-carriers.


CLS 104/183
TXT Traction-cable systems under subclass 173.1 in which the car is propelled
    by means of a single draft cable having one end attached to the car and the
    other end adapted to be wound upon a drum operated by hand or by power.


CLS 104/184
TXT Special arrangements under subclass 173.1 of traction cables at switches
    and modifications in the track-way structure for their adaptation.


CLS 104/185
TXT Special arrangements under subclass 173.1 of traction cables and cable
    apparatus at crossing conduits and modifications in the conduit
    construction for their adaptation.


CLS 104/186
TXT Cable apparatus under subclass 185 having means for depressing the cable of
    one line at or near the point where it is crossed by another in such manner
    that the grip on the car of the crossing line shall not come in contact
    with the cable of the crossed line.


CLS 104/187
TXT Cable apparatus under subclass 185 having means for impelling the cars of
    one line across the crossing line by means auxiliary to the cable, in cases
    where it is necessary temporarily to let go the cable altogether.


CLS 104/188
TXT Special arrangements under subclass 173.1 of traction cables and cable
    apparatus at swing-bridges.  This subclass shows the method of passing the
    cable across the stream and for propelling the car while on the bridge.


CLS 104/189
TXT Special arrangements under subclass 173.1 of traction cables and cable
    apparatus at curves.


CLS 104/190
TXT Cable apparatus under subclass 189 having means for impelling the car
    around the curve auxiliary to the main cable, either to allow a reduction
    in speed at the curve or to allow the main cable to continue along the
    straight track as the car takes the curve onto a crossing track.


CLS 104/191
TXT Special arrangements under subclass 189 involving the construction and
    arrangement of horizontal pulleys for guiding a single traction cable
    around the curve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 152+ for a positive drive pulley or guide roll; and subclasses
    166+ for a friction drive pulley or guide roll.


CLS 104/192
TXT Cable apparatus under subclass 189 having means for conducting the two
    traction cables of a double rope-system around a curve without interfering
    with each other.


CLS 104/193
TXT Devices under subclass 173.1 for detachably coupling the end of a draft
    cable to a car. This subclass is largely composed of automatic uncoupling
    means.


CLS 104/194
TXT Devices under subclass 173.1 for closing the grip-slots in longitudinal
    cable and electric conduits to prevent the admission of dirt therein and
    adapted for movement to allow the passage of the grip-shank therealong.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161,    for pneumatic conduit-slot closers.


CLS 104/195
TXT Cable apparatus under subclass 173.1 comprising switches in conduit-slots
    and modifications in the conduit construction for their adaptation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclass 419 for switches having some
    modification in connection with the conduits, cables, etc, of cable
    railways.


CLS 104/196
TXT Mechanism under subclass 173.1 adapted to regulate the tension in traction
    cables during use to take up slack and compensate the variations in the
    length occuring from fluctuations of load or weather conditions or from
    shifting track conditions.


CLS 104/197
TXT Cable apparatus under subclass 173.1 comprising supporting pulleys for
    railway traction cables and modifications in the track or conduit structure
    for their adaptation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 152+ for a positive drive pulley or guide roll; and subclasses
    166+ for a friction drive pulley or guide roll.


CLS 104/198
TXT Apparatus under subclass 173.1 for switching traction cables, adapted to be
    placed within the cable conduit and operating to move the cable out if its
    normal position into position to be grasped by the grip-jaws or to move one
    cable out of gripping position while shifting another cable into gripping
    position.


CLS 104/199
TXT Apparatus under subclass 173.1 for lifting traction cables adapted to be
    placed within the cable conduit and operating to lift the cable from its
    normal position up into position to be grasped by the grip-jaws of the car;
    also car-carried devices adapted to lift the cable into gripping position.


CLS 104/200
TXT Devices under subclass 173.1 in the nature of clips whereby buckets or
    suspension-cars may be secured to the cable of tramways for sustaining and
    carrying the buckets or cars and not otherwise classified below.


CLS 104/201
TXT Cable clips under subclass 200 provided with head portions adapted to be
    inserted wholly or partly between the shanks of the cables.


CLS 104/202
TXT Cable apparatus under subclass 173.1 comprising grasping devices on
    cable-railway cars by which a car can be attached to the traction cable or
    relased therefrom at will.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 115+ for cord and rope
    holders of general application.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 5+ for strand-engaging
    torso harness, and subclasses 10+ for a carrier supported for movement on
    an inclined cable.

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 65.1+ for strand gripers employed as brakes.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.


CLS 104/203
TXT Cable apparatus under subclass 202 comprising pneumatic power means and
    controlling devices therefor for operation of cable-gripping jaws.


CLS 104/204
TXT Devices under subclass 202 located along the trackway for causing an
    application of car-carried cable-gripping jaws to the traction cable or the
    release of said jaws from said cable.


CLS 104/205
TXT Devices under subclass 204 having the gripping-jaws operatively connected
    to a trip-lever on the car or trolley.  The trip-lever being operated by a
    stop or ramp located along the track.


CLS 104/206
TXT Devices under subclass 205 which have a pair of toggle-links directly
    connected to one or both of the gripping jaws.


CLS 104/207
TXT Devices under subclass 204 having pawls locking the grip-control levers to
    their ratchet segments and released by the action of track-trips.


CLS 104/208
TXT Devices under subclass 204 in which the weight of the trolley load holds
    the gripping-jaws to the traction cable and track ramps or trips raise the
    trolley-load to release the jaws.


CLS 104/209
TXT Devices under subclass 204 in which trip-controlled spring-pressed
    gripping-jaws either normally tend to grip the traction cable or normally
    tend to release it.


CLS 104/210
TXT Devices under subclass 204 in which trip-controlled gripping-jaws are
    actuated by a screw or helical cam.


CLS 104/211
TXT Devices under subclass 204 having trip-controlled gripping-jaws actuated by
    a cam.


CLS 104/212
TXT Devices under subclass 204 in which the gripping-jaws may be wedge-formed
    or are operated by wedges or beveled arms.


CLS 104/213
TXT Cable apparatus under subclass 202 having longitudinal buffers for
    grip-carriers on cars to dissipate the abruptness of the jerk when the
    gripper engages the running cable.


CLS 104/214
TXT Grippers under subclass 202 in which each of the jaws is pivotally,
    flexibly, or slidably mounted so as to be movable laterally in a horizontal
    sense to engage the cable.


CLS 104/215
TXT Grippers under subclass 214, having end guide-rollers adjacent the jaws for
    sustaining the cable while disengaged from the gripping-jaws.


CLS 104/216
TXT Grippers under subclass 202 having one jaw fixed and the other jaw is
    pivoted so as to be movable toward the fixed jaw.


CLS 104/217
TXT Grippers under subclass 202 having two pivoted jaws of forceps type with
    lever-jaws having intermediate fulcrums.


CLS 104/218
TXT Grippers under subclass 202 in which one or both of the jaws slide
    vertically.


CLS 104/219
TXT Grippers under subclass 218, with links connecting the movable jaw or jaws
    with the operating lever and the latter carrying a pawl engaging a ratcher
    segment.


CLS 104/220
TXT Grippers under subclass 218 with end guide-rollers adjacent the jaws for
    sustaining the cable while disengaged from the gripping-jaws.


CLS 104/221
TXT Grippers under subclass 220 having pawl lever and link jaw operators.


CLS 104/222
TXT Grippers under subclass 202 having wedge devices for operating one or both
    of the gripping-jaws.


CLS 104/223
TXT Grippers under subclass 202 having screw devices for operating one or both
    of the gripping-jaws.


CLS 104/224
TXT Grippers under subclass 202 having cam devices for operating one or both of
    the gripping-jaws.


CLS 104/225
TXT Grippers under subclass 202 in the form of forks, clips, or hooks with
    V-shaped recesses for engaging the traction-cable.


CLS 104/226
TXT Grippers under subclass 202 in which one or both of the gripping-jaw faces
    are formed of an endless belt parallel to the running cable, the endless
    belts having restricted movement with the traction-cables.


CLS 104/227
TXT Cable apparatus under subclass 202 in which the gripper on the car releases
    from the traction-cable, raises up, passes over an overlying crossing
    cable, and, dropping down again, engages its traction-cable.


CLS 104/228
TXT Apparatus under subclass 227 having a recessed wheel associated with the
    gripper on the car for passing an overlying cable on a cable-crossing.


CLS 104/229
TXT Apparatus under subclass 202 in which the cable-engaging faces of the
    gripping-jaws are rollers.


CLS 104/230
TXT Apparatus under subclass 229 in which one or more of the rollers is used
    for transmitting power for use on the car.


CLS 104/231
TXT Grippers under subclass 229 having laterally movable roller-type jaws.


CLS 104/232
TXT Grippers under subclass 229 having vertically movable roller-type jaws.


CLS 104/233
TXT Grippers under subclass 232 in which the cable-engaging faces are alined
    opposing pairs of rollers.


CLS 104/234
TXT Grippers under subclass 232 in which the cable-engaging faces are staggered
    opposing series of rollers.


CLS 104/235
TXT Cable apparatus under subclass 202 in which the cable extending along a
    trackway has intermediate its length one or more coils around one or more
    drums or pulleys mounted on a vehicle, the vehicle being caused to move in
    either direction by relative movement of the cable and drum or drums.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169,    for farm tools similarly operated.


CLS 104/236
TXT Cable apparatus under subclass 202 in which a sprocket-wheel on the car
    engages a cable, to which are affixed buttons or stops adapted to engage
    the sprocket-wheel.


CLS 104/237
TXT Grippers under subclass 202 having one or both faces of the gripping-jaws
    formed of sprocket-belts extending parallel to the traction-cable.


CLS 104/238
TXT Cable apparatus under subclass 202 comprising car-carried stops and
    abutments for engagement with buttons or stops on traction-cables.


CLS 104/239
TXT Devices under subclass 202 comprising buttons or stops attached to
    traction-cables.


CLS 104/240
TXT Features under subclass 173.1 of traction cable construction.


CLS 104/241
TXT Devices under class definition located along the track for controlling the
    locking of seat-guards to retain passengers in their seats, as used on
    amusement railways.


CLS 104/242
TXT Apparatus under class definition for preventing cars from becoming derailed
    and for safeguarding them after derailment.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter under this definition includes track-like
    guides for steering a nontrack supported vehicle without the intervention
    of a power actuated means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 401 for a motor vehicle provided with
    steering gear which includes a land-based steering datum and means on the
    vehicle for sensing the datum, which means cooperates with a steering motor
    on the vehicle for the purpose of controlling the course of the vehicle.


CLS 104/243
TXT Derailment guards under subclass 242 in which the truck or car is provided
    with normally inactive wheels, which in case of derailment come into
    bearing upon supplemental rails other than the regular traction-rails.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    for side guides for monorail railways.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 215.1 for supplemental wheels
    without supplemental rails.


CLS 104/244
TXT Derailment guards under subclass 242, comprising inclined traction and
    supplemental wheels to guard against derailment.


CLS 104/244.1
TXT Devices under the subclass 242 comprising a feeler element for a vehicle,
    said feeler element being adapted to contact a furrow or channel previously
    made in the ground to guide the vehicle on a path determined by the
    direction of said furrow or channel.

    (1)     Note.  The feeler element must not be a load supporting member such
    as a load supporting wheel of the vehicle; it must be an added element for
    the purpose only of guiding the vehicle. The feeler element may, however,
    be a part added to a load supporting wheel to function as a furrow follower.

    (2)     Note.  The previously made furrow must not be freshly made by an
    earth working element ahead of the feeler.  It must have been made on a
    previous pass of the apparatus or made by some other apparatus.

    (3)     Note.  The vehicle may be an earth working implement claimed by
    name only.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 41.1+ for scriber means for
    producing a line at an unvarying distance from a guiding edge or the like.

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 26 for an earth working implement guided by
    a feeler element running in a furrow, subclasses 278+ for earth working
    implements with wheel steering means or means for horizontally angling a
    wheel axis, subclass 126 for earth marker apparatus, earth markers often
    being mounted on a vehicle in a manner similar to that of furrow followers,
    subclasses 383+ for earth working implements with an angularly adjustable
    wheel or with means for locking it against swinging, subclasses 387+ for an
    earth working implement with a wheel substitute, subclasses 395+ for an
    earth working implement with a ground support vertically adjustable
    relative to the frame, and subclasses 669+ for an earth working implement
    with a wheel.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 401 as explained in the reference thereto
    appearing in subclass 242 above.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 87.2 for a land vehicle of the wheeled type
    provided with means whereby one or more of its wheels may be steered by an
    occupant and wherein the steering means controls also a wheel offset from
    the principal supporting wheels of the vehicle, and see the search notes of
    that subclass (87.2) for the line with this class (104); and subclass 776
    for a wheeled vehicle of the occupant steered type wherein bias means is
    provided for maintaining a steerable wheel in engagement with an elongate,
    more or less vertical surface (e.g., a curb) for a vehicle-steering purpose.


CLS 104/245
TXT Derailment guards under subclass 242, comprising nonload carrying
    guide-rollers for preventing derailment, or the rollers may constitute the
    sole guiding means for the vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the notes thereunder.


CLS 104/246
TXT Derailment guards under subclass 245 in which the guide-rollers have
    interlocking engagement with the rails to prevent upward movement of the
    rollers from the rails.


CLS 104/247
TXT Derailment guards under subclass 245, in which the guide-rollers have
    horizontal thrust only, without any restraining means against vertical
    displacement.


CLS 104/248
TXT Derailment guards under subclass 242 comprising car-carried lugs or fingers
    having interlocking engagement with the rails.


CLS 104/249
TXT Apparatus under class definition comprising impact devices on the trackway
    for stopping cars.


CLS 104/250
TXT Buffers under subclass 249 for tracks other than surface tracks, such as
    suspended and cable tracks.


CLS 104/251
TXT Buffers and stops under subclass 250 which are adapted to become locked to
    and retain the car.


CLS 104/252
TXT Apparatus under subclass 249 comprising releasable stops which are
    removable from the trackway, so that no obstruction is left for the further
    forward movement of the car.


CLS 104/253
TXT Car stops under subclass 252 in which there are a plurality of releasable
    stops arranged in tandem for feeding out one car at a time.


CLS 104/254
TXT Stop-bumpers under subclass 249 for cars on surface tracks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 139+ for a bumper spring device of the
    solid material spring element type.


CLS 104/255
TXT Car-stop devices under subclass 254 in which the momentum of the car is
    wholly or in part taken up by counterweights.


CLS 104/256
TXT Car-stops under subclass 254 comprising fluid pressure devices for car
    stoppage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 297+ for a fluid-pressure shock absorber of
    general utility.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclass 116, for a fluid spring device useful in
    bumper construction.


CLS 104/257
TXT Car-stops under subclass 249 comprising wheel-chocks located along the
    trackway for engagement with car-wheels and designed to be seated on the
    rail or shifted therefrom at will.


CLS 104/258
TXT Car-stops under subclass 249 comprising chock-blocks having base flanges or
    clamps for securing them to the rail.


CLS 104/259
TXT Car-stops under subclass 249 comprising bumpers and chock-blocks adapted to
    have sliding engagement with the track when in action.


CLS 104/260
TXT Car-stops under subclass 249 comprising chock-blocks adapted to remove the
    wheel from contact with the rail and to slide along the same.


CLS 104/261
TXT Devices under class definition carried by the car and adapted to be dropped
    to the track when in operative position to derail the car.


CLS 104/262
TXT Devices under class definition for replacing car-wheels on the track-rails
    when they have been derailed.


CLS 104/263
TXT Car-replacing devices under subclass 262 operatively attached to and
    normally carried by the car.


CLS 104/264
TXT Car-replacing devices under subclass 262 comprising fixed track parts and
    supplemental rails designed to restore derailed wheels to the rails.


CLS 104/265
TXT Car-replacing frog-blocks under subclass 262 adapted for use at one side of
    a rail and operative in either direction of movement of a car-wheel over
    the same.


CLS 104/266
TXT Car-replacing frog-blocks under subclass 265, having antifriction-rollers
    to facilitate the lateral shifting of the car-wheels.


CLS 104/267
TXT Car-replacing frog-blocks under subclass 265 with the car-replacing frogs
    in duplicate on each side of each rail.


CLS 104/268
TXT Car-replacing frog-blocks under subclass 262 which are operative in only
    one direction of the car-wheel relatively to said block.


CLS 104/269
TXT Car-replacing frog-blocks under subclass 268, the frog-blocks being
    symmetrical longitudinally, so that they are applicable to either side of a
    rail for operation in the same direction, thus obviating the manufacture of
    rights and lefts.


CLS 104/270
TXT Car-replacing devices under subclass 268 comprising two frog-blocks
    connected together in saddle-like form to seat over a rail-head.


CLS 104/271
TXT Car-replacing devices under subclass 268 comprising a ramp or bar pivoted
    to a rail-engaging block and forming the track for the derailed wheel.


CLS 104/272
TXT Car-replacers under subclass 262 provided with pivoted or articulated
    extensions on the main car-replacing element.


CLS 104/273
TXT Car-replacers under subclass 262 comprising laterally-shifting jacks and
    wheel-carriers for wheel-replacing.


CLS 104/274
TXT Car-replacing apparatus under subclass 262 comprising rail-attaching
    devices particularly adapted for use on car-replacers.


CLS 104/275
TXT Devices under class definition for the crossing of railway-tracks by
    fire-hose, so as to avoid interference with car movement.


CLS 104/276
TXT Railway hose-bridges under subclass 275 for elevation of the hose, so that
    it will be carried over the car-track above the car-stops.


CLS 104/277
TXT Hose-crossings under subclass 275 located beneath the track-rails.


CLS 104/279
TXT Devices under class definition for cleaning or clearing railway-tracks.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes combinations of
    railway-track-clearing elements which if claimed separately would go into
    different official classes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, for apparatus for
    cleaning by any of the following operations; brushing, beating, shaking,
    shotting, wiping, or the use of a squeegee, particularly subclasses 54+ for
    rail sweepers.

    37,     Excavating, particularly subclasses 198+ for railway snow
    excavators.

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 230+ for rail- road vehicle mounted
    vegetation cutters.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 307 for track guided cars with means to
    spray a liquid onto the rails.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 271.1+ for surface heaters.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, particularly subclasses
    173 and 174 for railroad sprinklers.

    256,    Fences, subclass 12.5 for driftage control fences.


CLS 104/280
TXT Devices under subclass 279 for cleaning slotted conduits used in cable and
    electric railway tracks.


CLS 104/281
TXT MAGNETICALLY SUSPENDED CAR:

    Railways under the class definition wherein a vehicle adapted to travel
    along a guideway is suspended above the guideway by a magnetic field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130.1,  for means to switch a magnetically suspended vehicle from one
    guideway to an adjacent or intersecting guideway.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 90.5 for magnetic
    bearing supports.


CLS 104/282
TXT Propulsion means employed to suspend car: Apparatus under subclass 281
    wherein the magnetic field employed to suspend the vehicle above the
    guideway is due at least in part to elements employed to move the vehicle
    along the guideway.


CLS 104/283
TXT By permanent magnets only:

    Apparatus under subclass 281 wherein the magnetic field is caused solely by
    material on the vehicle or guideway having inherent magnetic
    characteristics, rather than by an electric current.


CLS 104/284
TXT Including means to sense or control car position or attitude with respect
    to guideway:

    Apparatus under subclass 281 wherein means are provided which either
    detects or initiates vertical, lateral, or rotational displacement of the
    vehicle with respect to the guideway.

    (1)     Note.  Suspension systems which display inherent stability (e.g.,
    repulsive systems) are not proper for this subclass on that basis alone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    293,    for vehicles propelled by linear motor having means to regulate the
    gap between linear elements.


CLS 104/285
TXT With cooling means:

    Apparatus under subclass 281 wherein means are provided to remove heat from
    the apparatus.


CLS 104/286
TXT Construction or composition of suspension elements:

    Apparatus under subclass 281 relating to particular structure or material
    of a magnet or reaction surface on the vehicle or guideway.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    294,    for specific structure or material of linear motor elements used to
    propel vehicles.


CLS 104/287
TXT CAR-CARRIED PROPULSION SYSTEM:

    Railways under the class definition wherein the vehicle is propelled along
    a guideway by means carried by a vehicle and cooperating with static
    structure provided on a modified guideway.

    (1)     Note.  A stationary conduit along the guideway which confines a
    propelling fluid current is considered to be a "static structure" as
    defined above.


CLS 104/288
TXT Electric:

    Apparatus under subclass 287 wherein electric current is supplied to either
    the vehicle or guideway to propel the vehicle along the guideway.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 49+ for electrically-powered
    locomotion.

    191,    Electricity: Transmission to Vehicles, appropriate subclasses for
    devices for electrically-propelled vehicles for transmitting electricity
    from a conductor along the guideway to the vehicle.


CLS 104/289
TXT With regenerative energy means:

    Apparatus under subclass 288 wherein kinetic energy of the vehicle is
    converted for alternate or later use.


CLS 104/290
TXT Linear motor:

    Apparatus under subclass 288 wherein either a primary or secondary motor
    element of a linear induction motor is carried by the vehicle, and the
    other is formed or adjacent on the guideway to mutually propel the vehicle
    along the guideway.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282,    for linear motors which, in addition to propelling the vehicle, are
    also employed to suspend it above the guideway.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 12+ for a
    linear motor, per se.  Patents disclosing a linear motor for use with a
    railway system and positively claiming either a vehicle carrying one of the
    linear motor elements or track structure in addition to a motor element are
    properly classified in Class 104.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 38, 135 and 687 for
    linear motors in combination with an electrical system.  Patents disclosing
    a linear motor and associated control system for use with a railway system,
    and claiming in addition to the combination either a vehicle or track
    structure in addition to a motor element are properly classified in Class
    104.


CLS 104/291
TXT Suspension between truck and vehicle body: Apparatus under subclass 290
    relating to the particular connection between a portion of the vehicle
    carrying the primary or secondary motor element and the remainder of the
    vehicle.


CLS 104/292
TXT Propulsion by active guideway; e.g., linear synchronous motor, etc.:

    Apparatus under subclass 290 wherein the motor element associated with the
    guideway includes a current-carrying conductor for generating a magnetic
    field, the current being induced by means other than the motor element
    carried by the vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 13 for a linear
    motor having fixed and movable wound elements.


CLS 104/293
TXT Including means to control gap:

    Apparatus under subclass 290 wherein means are provided to regulate that
    distance between the primary and secondary linear motor elements carried on
    the vehicle and guideway.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284,    for magnetically-suspended railway vehicles having means to control
    the position or attitude of the vehicle with respect to the guideway.


CLS 104/294
TXT Construction or composition of motor elements:

    Apparatus under subclass 290 relating to specific structure or material of
    the primary or secondary element motor of the linear motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286,    for specific structure or material of magnet or reaction surfaces
    used for magnetically supporting a vehicle.


CLS 104/295
TXT External car control:

    Apparatus under subclass 288 wherein means causing propulsion of the
    vehicle is controlled from a point externally of the vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclasses 187+ for external control
    of propulsion not associated with a peculiar type of railway.


CLS 104/296
TXT Auxiliary function on car:

    Apparatus under subclass 295 wherein a vehicle-carried electrical device,
    other than a vehicle-propelling motor, is controlled externally of the
    vehicle.


CLS 104/297
TXT Superimposed signal on same conductor:

    Apparatus under subclass 296 comprising a multiplex system for transmitting
    concurrently along a common conductor a signal for operating or controlling
    means propelling the vehicle and a signal for operating or controlling the
    electrical device.


CLS 104/298
TXT By block system:

    Apparatus under subclass 295 wherein the railway is divided into serially
    arranged sections electrically insulated from one another, each section
    provided with vehicle-controlling means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclasses 20+ for
    propulsion-controlling railway block systems not associated with a peculiar
    type of railway.


CLS 104/299
TXT Of spacing between cars:

    Apparatus under subclass 295 including means for regulating the speed or
    dispatch of one vehicle in response to a sensed condition regarding another
    vehicle.


CLS 104/300
TXT Car-carried speed regulator:

    Apparatus under subclass 295 wherein a device, in addition to the
    propelling means, is provided on the vehicle to alter the speed of the
    vehicle over the guideway.


CLS 104/301
TXT Of multiple trains on same track:

    Apparatus under subclass 295 wherein means are provided to independently
    control propulsion means of a plurality of vehicles guided on a common
    continuous guideway.


CLS 104/302
TXT Reversing of car movement or conductor current:

    Apparatus under subclass 295 wherein either (a) means externally of the
    vehicle are provided for controlling the direction of movement of the
    vehicle along the guideway, or (b) means are provided whereby the polarity
    of propulsion current at a propulsion motor is kept constant.


CLS 104/303
TXT By switch responsive to discrete means along guideway:

    Apparatus under subclass 302 including a polarity-reversing switch
    activated in response to a vehicle passing either a device on or adjacent
    the guideway or a modified section of the guideway.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117.1,  for automatic stopping or reversing of vehicles riding on cableways.


CLS 104/304
TXT Of steerable car:

    Apparatus under subclass 295 wherein the vehicle is movable laterally back
    and forth across the guideway and means are provided externally of the
    vehicle to control the lateral movement.

    (1)     Note.  Mere pivotal movement of the car as it is propelled along
    the guideway is not sufficient to cause classification in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    238,    Railways:  Surface Track, subclass 10 for portable track structure
    having slots to guideway vehicles.

    463,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 58+ for portable track
    structure and steerable cars claimed in combination with a game feature
    (e.g., lap counter, clock, plural simultaneous racing cars, etc.).


CLS 104/305
TXT Of slot-guided car:

    Apparatus under subclass 295 including a groove along the length of the
    guideway adapted to be engaged by a protuberance on the vehicle to maintain
    the vehicle on the guideway.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    238,    Railways:  Surface Track, subclass 10 for portable track structure
    having slots to guide vehicles.

    463,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 58+ for portable track
    structure and steerable cars claimed in combination with a game feature
    (e.g., lap counter, clock, plural simultaneous racing cars, etc.).


CLS 104/306
TXT WITH RUNNING GEAR:

    Railway under the class definition combined with a railway vehicle support
    wheel adapted to roll over a railway rail, the wheel and the rail being
    modified for interrelation and cooperation with each other.


CLS 104/307
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Apparatus under the class definition not otherwise classified above.


CLS 105/
TTL RAILWAY ROLLING STOCK

CLS 105/
TXT This class is restricted to wheeled transportation equipment for railways.
    The rolling-stock or equipment may be for use on monorail, two-rail,
    elevated, suspended, or cable railways.

    (1)     Note.  Patents for railway wheel Rolling stock under the class
    definition comprising a plurality of wheeled cars or train elements adapted
    to be attached trailingly together and adapted to travel sequentially along
    a rail and axles are separately classified in Class 295, Railway Wheels and
    Axles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, appropriate subclasses for closures
    of the type provided for and see the search notes in section IV of Class 49
    for the loci of closures in other classes.

    295,    Railway Wheels and Axles, (see (1) Note).

    305,    Wheel Substitutes for Land Vehicles, subclass 8 for a wheel
    substitute modified to travel on a railroad rail.

    410,    Freight Accommodation on Freight Carrier, subclass 28 for a
    drop-center car for the tiered stowage of vehicles as objects of freight;
    and subclass 45 for stowage of a massive (e.g., massively tall) article on
    a drop-center car.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclass 25 for smoking toy locomotives;
    and subclasses 431+ for other toy rolling stock having a structural detail
    not suitable for a full size train.


CLS 105/1.1
TXT STREAMLINE FORM ROLLING STOCK:

    Rolling stock under the class definition having exterior surface
    configuration designed to promote smooth airflow thereover when passing
    through the air, so as to create a minimum amount of resistance of the
    train to movement and to create a minimum of air turbulence.


CLS 105/1.2
TXT Airlift or ducted:

    Rolling stock under subclass 1.1 of such configuration that ambient air is
    forced vertically upward by the rolling stock passing therethrough; or
    including a tublike passage to direct air from a high pressure surface of
    the rolling stock to a relatively low pressure surface thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Control of vertical movement of air, e.g., provision to
    prevent disturbance of overhead power lines, is included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for a locomotive having an inclined planar surface intended to
    react with ambient atmosphere to increase downward pressure on the wheels
    to thereby increase traction.


CLS 105/1.3
TXT Having laterally movable air directing member:

    Train under subclass 1.1 including air flow controlling structure movable
    normally with respect to the remainder thereof and with respect to the
    direction of travel.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a streamline surface on the front of a
    locomotive shiftable to provide access to a front coupler.

    (2)     Note.  A laterally movable member intended to interrupt smooth air
    flow and provide increased friction, i.e., a brake, is included in this
    subclass.


CLS 105/1.4
TXT TRAINS:

    Rolling stock under the class definition comprising a plurality of wheeled
    cars or train elements adapted to be attached trailingly together and
    adapted to travel sequentially along a rail.


CLS 105/1.5
TXT Toy or model train:

    Train under subclass 1.4 intended for entertainment, of inadequate size to
    be used for transportation of people and not intended to be used for
    transportation of produce.

    (1)     Note.  A model train, even though structurally identical to a
    conventional train is included in this subclass, since it is not for
    transportation of people or produce.


CLS 105/3
TXT Articulated:

    Train under subclass 1.4 (a) comprising plural cars pivotally connected but
    not readily detachable from each other; or (b) including a first car
    supporting truck connected to a second car supporting truck so that they
    mutually interact to steer each other or prevent excessive independent
    oscillation of the cars when traveling over straight and variously curved
    track.

    (1)     Note.  A coupling, per se, not specifically provided for elsewhere,
    for an articulated train is included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175.1,  for a railway truck including three or more wheels engaging a
    single rail, with provision to allow lateral movement of at least one wheel
    so that the truck can round a turn.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    213,    Railway Draft Appliances, subclasses 62+ for a rigid train drawbar,
    per se.

    410,    Freight Accommodation on Freight Carrier, subclass 45 for
    articulated car structure for hauling a massive article.


CLS 105/4.1
TXT Two-car truck:

    Articulated train under subclass 3 including a truck adapted to support one
    end of each of two adjacent car bodies.

    (1)     Note.  A two-car truck, per se, is considered to be a "train" since
    it supports a first and a second car.


CLS 105/4.2
TXT Separable bogie:

    Articulated train under subclass 4.1 in which the truck is adapted to be
    separated into distinct members each including support wheels and each
    adapted to support one of the adjacent car bodies.


CLS 105/4.3
TXT Truck under first car, second car carried by first:

    Articulated train under subclass 4.1 including a truck supporting the end
    of a car, which car supports the mating end off a second car.


CLS 105/4.4
TXT Including wheel steering provision:

    Articulated train under subclass 4.1 including a truck supporting the end
    of a car, which car supports the mating end of a second car.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165+,   for a truck including a plurality of axles with provision to allow
    each to turn about an axis that intersects the axis of track curvature;
    especially subclass 169 for such a truck including a stub axle.

    176,    for a truck adapted to be interconnected with another truck.

    180,    for a truck including a stub axle, generally.


CLS 105/5
TXT Devices under subclass 1.4 for avoidance of telescoping of cars or
    locomotives in case of collision.


CLS 105/6
TXT Nontelescoping locomotives or cars under subclass 5 having bevel ends or
    inclines for opposite lateral diversion of adjacent ends in case of heavy
    impact.


CLS 105/7
TXT Trains or cars under subclass 1.4 adapted to pass each other on the same
    track without collision.


CLS 105/8.1
TXT Vestibule connections:

    Train under subclass 1.4 including a connection between adjacent cars in
    addition to the draft/buff coupler to restrict or otherwise provide for
    relative movement between the cars, to transmit energy, information, etc.
    from one car to another and to render the train effectively a continuous
    unit.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a car body connection allowing movement
    of a passenger from one car to another and a car body connection between
    adjacent freight cars without provision to allow passenger movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, for such a
    device not restricted to train structure.


CLS 105/9
TXT Devices under subclass 8.1 including special forms of vestibule connection
    between a locomotive cab and tender or between a tender and car.


CLS 105/10
TXT Devices under subclass 8.1 including means by which the diaphragm
    face-plates of adjoining cars are brought together and maintained under
    pressure in such position.


CLS 105/11
TXT Devices under subclass 10 including face-plate expanders in which the
    object is accomplished by air-pressure.


CLS 105/12
TXT Devices under subclass 10 including weighted means for accomplishing the
    object and also sliding or link connections in which the diaphragm
    face-plates are brought together and so maintained by the weight of the
    diaphragms and face-plates.


CLS 105/13
TXT Devices under subclass 10 including face-plate expanders in which the
    mechanism is so arranged that movement of one end of the diaphragm
    face-plate will be transmitted through the mechanism, so as to cause
    movement of the opposite end of the face-plate.


CLS 105/14
TXT Devices under subclass 10 including face-plate expander in which the upper
    portions of the diaphragm face-plates of adjoining cars are brought
    together and so maintained by the action of a single-trip bow-spring, and
    including supporting means for said spring.


CLS 105/15
TXT Devices under subclass 8.1 including vestibule-diaphragms forming a closed
    connection between the car ends.


CLS 105/16
TXT Devices under subclass 15 in which the diaphragm is metallic.


CLS 105/17
TXT Devices under subclass 16 in which the diaphragm-plates of adjoining cars
    have telescopic connection or in which the diaphragm-plates and the
    car-body to which they are attached have telescopic connection.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also includes telescopic metal cover-plates
    for diaphragms.


CLS 105/18
TXT Devices under subclass 15 involving the specific construction of the
    folding bellows of vestibule-cars, including the composition of fabric, and
    without regard to the means of fastening same to the car-body or face-plate.


CLS 105/19
TXT Devices under subclass 18 including folding-bellows diaphragms in which the
    legs of the bellows are formed of two separate pieces, with fastening means
    releasable under tension, so as to allow outward tilting of the face-plate
    for repairs.


CLS 105/20
TXT Devices under subclass 18 including means for fastening the folding
    diaphragms to the car face-plates or the diaphragm face-plates, either
    permanently or releasably.


CLS 105/21
TXT Devices under subclass 8 including specific face-plate construction and
    also lock or catch means for holding adjoining face-plates in catching
    engagement.


CLS 105/22
TXT Devices under subclass 21 including means for preventing diaphragm
    face-plates and parts connected thereto from sagging and consisting of
    resilient vertical hanger-rods extending from the car-body to the
    face-plate.


CLS 105/23
TXT Devices under subclass 8 including releasable means for vestibule-curtains
    connecting adjacent cars in which the releasing operation takes place
    automatically on the pulling apart of the cars.


CLS 105/24
TXT Devices under subclass 23 in which the curtain-handle is pivoted at one end
    and at the other end releasably held in engagement with a fixed catch
    member.


CLS 105/25
TXT Devices under subclass 23 in which the catch mechanism consists of twin
    jaws arranged on either the curtain or on the adjoining car and releasably
    engaging a fixed element on the opposite member.


CLS 105/25.1
TXT Ventilation:

    Train under subclass 8.1 including provision to permit passage to ambient
    atmosphere therethrough.


CLS 105/25.2
TXT Resilient mounting drive connection for shear stress:

    Train under subclass 1.4 including drive structure having a portion thereof
    intended to yield within its elastic limit to prevent destructive failure
    thereof.


CLS 105/26.05
TXT LOCOMOTIVES:

    Rolling stock under the class definition comprising a railway vehicle (or
    traction machine) including drive structure having a portion thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90.1+,  for a device under the instant control of a trackman for forcing a
    railway vehicle to move a short


CLS 105/26.1
TXT Devices under subclass 26.05 comprising (1) power propelled railway
    vehicles operated by a walking attendant or (2) relatively small railway
    vehicles similar to the hand cars or railway velocipedes classified in this
    class, subclass 86, but having power propulsion means.


CLS 105/27
TXT Self-propelled power-tools and locomotives under subclass 26.05 provided
    with auxiliary power devices, such as wind-lasses or motors for general use.


CLS 105/28
TXT Self-propelled power-tools and locomotives under subclass 26.05 modified by
    the provision of a turn-table, which usually carries the power plant, as in
    case of a mounted railway-crane or excavator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    275,    for horizontally rotary tilting dumping car bodies.

    455,    for horizontal rotary rolling stock generally.


CLS 105/29.1
TXT With rack rail engaging drive:

    Locomotive under subclass 26.05 including drive structure adapted to engage
    for propelling thrust, a toothed bar (a) parallel to a support rail
    therefor or (b) comprising a support rail  therefor.


CLS 105/29.2
TXT Toy or model locomotive:

    Locomotive under subclass 29.1 intended for entertainment, of inadequate
    size to be used for transportation of people, and not intended to be used
    for transportion of produce.

    (1)     Note.  A model locomotive, even though structurally identical to a
    conventional locomotive is included in this subclass, since it is not for
    transportion of people or produce.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclass 410 for a toy locomotive,
    generally; e.g., a locomotive which as claimed structure, even if enlarged,
    would not be a locomotive of the type found in this class.


CLS 105/30
TXT Locomotives under subclass 26.05 having drive wheels which grip the
    opposite sides or tops and bottoms of a rail or may be pressed against one
    side of a rail-head.


CLS 105/31
TXT Locomotives under subclass 26.05 having a propelling mechanism consisting
    of one or more pusher-bars extending beneath the car and engaging the track
    or road-bed for pushing the locomotive along the track.


CLS 105/32
TXT Locomotives under subclass 26.05 having incorporated therein either an
    axle-driving or axle-driven mechanism, there being included as a link in
    such driving mechanism an intermittent-grip arrangement, or in case of
    power-motor drive the grip may be directly on the axle, adapted to be
    freely moved in one direction and to have driving engagement with the
    mechanism when moved in the opposite direction.


CLS 105/33
TXT Locomotives under subclass 26.05 having means for raising driving-wheels
    from the rails, as in case of auxiliary drivers or continuously-running
    engines, or to get the drivers out of the way, as in case of log-loading
    machines.


CLS 105/34.1
TXT Powered bogie:

    Locomotive under subclass 26.05 including an assembly comprised of a pair
    of wheels, and supporting framework to carry a distinct vehicle body;
    constructed for connection to a vehicle-body with capability of swiveling
    motion as a unit with relation thereto.

    (1)     Note.  A bogie including a positively recited "third rail"
    electrical collector is considered to be a "locomotive" for placement
    herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, for a track-engaging
    electrical collector, per se, to be used as part of the combined bogie of
    this subclass.


CLS 105/34.2
TXT Secondary traction device on locomotive:

    Locomotive under subclass 34.1 including a first track engaging means for
    generating thrust to propel the locomotive and, on the same locomotive, a
    powered bogie also for generating thrust to propel the locomotive.


CLS 105/35
TXT Locomotives under subclass 26.05 in which a prime mover, such as a stream
    or explosive-gas engine, runs a dynamo for generating electricity, which
    supplies current for electric motors to drive the locomotive.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants, subclasses indented under "Traction"
    (subclasses 9 to 29) for arrangements wherein a nonelectric prime mover
    driven electric generator supplies a traction motor and subclasses 9+ for
    prime mover driven generator supplied electric traction motor systems.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 140+ for generator
    fed motor systems having generator control.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    generator control systems.


CLS 105/36
TXT Locomotives under subclass 35 in which the prime mover is a steam-turbine,
    commonly called "turbo-electric".


CLS 105/37
TXT Locomotives under subclass 26.05 in which steam furnishes the motive power.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is limited to the driving connections and
    arrangement and location of parts on the frame.


CLS 105/38
TXT Locomotives under subclass 37 in which a rotary piston or steam-turbine
    wheel is used as the prime mover.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61.5,   for a locomotive prime mover comprising a turbine driven by gaseous
    products of combustion.


CLS 105/39
TXT Locomotives under subclass 37 of the compound type in which steam exhausts
    from a high to a low pressure cylinder.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass merely relates to the driving connections and
    general arrangement of cylinders on a locomotive.


CLS 105/40
TXT Locomotives under subclass 37 having boilers provided with flexible steam
    tight joints, so that the boiler may flex in going around a curve.


CLS 105/41
TXT A double locomotive under subclass 37 built together rear to rear, so that
    the fire-boxes are at the center of the locomotive.


CLS 105/42
TXT Locomotives under subclass 37 in which the piston-cylinders have their axes
    at right angles to the length of the locomotives.


CLS 105/43
TXT Locomotive apparatus under subclass 37 comprising boilers.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes only such patents as relate to boiler
    shape, arrangement, or fastenings, designed for use on locomotives.


CLS 105/44
TXT Devices under subclass 43 comprising seats or saddles for supporting
    locomotive steam-boilers, usually at the front end, and providing for
    boiler expansion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    362,    for freight cars having saddles for tanks.


CLS 105/45
TXT Apparatus under subclass 37 including location, arrangement, and special
    construction of super-heaters particularly adapted for use on
    steam-locomotives.


CLS 105/46
TXT Apparatus under subclass 37 relating to fire-box arrangement, shape, and
    location for locomotives.


CLS 105/47
TXT Locomotive apparatus under subclass 37 relating to movably-jointed and
    flexible pipes for connection between relatively movable parts of
    locomotives.


CLS 105/48
TXT Devices under subclass 37 for controlling the operation of a
    steam-locomotive.


CLS 105/48.1
TXT Devices under subclass 37 wherein the locomotive is provided with means to
    convey solid fuels, such as coal, coke, etc., into the combustion chamber
    of the locomotive.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of the type of structures to be found herein are
    screw type conveyer stokers and pusher type conveyer stokers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232,    for coal feed structure on locomotive tenders.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 105.5 for locomotive type stokers combined with
    significant furnace structure or means for feeding air or otherwise
    promoting combustion but not including significant railway vehicle
    structure.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses, especially
    subclasses 657+ for screw conveyors of general utility.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 276 for
    locomotive type stokers provided with comminuting means but not including
    significant railway vehicle structure.


CLS 105/48.2
TXT And with or convertible to internal combustion engine:

    Locomotive under subclass 37 (1) including a second prime mover of the type
    having a enclosed chamber adapted to be filled with gas wherein the gas is
    explosively ignited; or (2) wherein the prime mover can utilize steam or
    explosive gas fuel.

    (1)     Note.  The second prime mover may be on a second vehicle attached
    to that of the first prime mover.


CLS 105/48.3
TXT And/or electric:

    Locomotive under subclass 37 including a second prime mover of a type to
    which electrical energy is supplied as fuel.


CLS 105/49
TXT Locomotives under subclass 26.05 having electric-motor devices for their
    propulsion.

    (1)     Note.  Novel features in electric-motor construction are classified
    here only when their only utility would be on a traveling vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, appropriate subclasses for
    electric motor structure, particularly subclass 255 for railway type stator
    structures.


CLS 105/50
TXT Electric locomotives under subclass 49 which carry primary or storage
    batteries for the entire or partial supply of electricity to the motors or
    other car devices.

    (1)     Note.  The charging of the storage battery may or may not be
    effected from line contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35      and 36, for electric locomotives carrying a prime mover for
    charging storage batteries.


CLS 105/51
TXT Apparatus under subclass 50 relating to holders, automatic circuit-closers,
    and special location of the battery-cells on railway rolling-stock.


CLS 105/52
TXT Electric locomotives under subclass 49 in which the field and armature of
    the electric motor both rotate, but in opposite directions.


CLS 105/53
TXT Electric locomotives under subclass 49 in which traction-wheel contains the
    electric motor and the rotor is attached to the tire of the wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 67 for a rotary
    motor or generator in built with another unit such as a wheel.


CLS 105/54
TXT Electric locomotives under subclass 49 in which the armature is mounted on
    the axle, thus effecting a gearless drive for an electric locomotive.


CLS 105/55
TXT The armature or rotor under subclass 54 has a reducing-gear connection with
    the axle.


CLS 105/56
TXT Electric locomotives under subclass 54 in which the field-pieces are
    arranged at each side of the armature--that is, the armature revolves in a
    vertical plane between the two fields.


CLS 105/57
TXT Electric locomotives under subclass 54 in which the field is substantially
    balanced with respect to the axle and is outside the periphery of the
    armature.


CLS 105/58
TXT Electric locomotives under subclass 54 in which the fields have portions in
    common between two axles, one of which carries an armature.


CLS 105/59
TXT Devices under subclass 49 for cooling and ventilating electric motors in
    locomotives.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 16 for cooling of
    a reciprocating electric motor of generator and subclasses 52+ for cooling
    of a rotary electric motor or generator.


CLS 105/60
TXT Electric railway apparatus under subclass 49 having a special location and
    arrangement of insulating material between parts of cars or locomotives.


CLS 105/61
TXT Devices under subclass 49 for controlling electric locomotives.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 543+ for rheostats
    in combination with motors.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 50 for an electrical resistor
    mounted on wheels wherein the sole purpose of the wheel mounting is to make
    the resistor mobile, and subclasses 68+ for mechanically variable
    electrical resistors, per se.


CLS 105/61.5
TXT Locomotive under subclass 26.05 in which the motive power is furnished by a
    turbine driven by gaseous products of combustion.

    (1)     Note.  A device in which the only motive power for driving the
    locomotive furnished by the turbine is a jet of gas (e.g., turbojet) is not
    included in this definition.

    (2)     Note.  A turbine comprises a rotor driven by the kinetic energy of
    a fluid, as distinct from a rotor driven by positive displacement due to
    the action of fluid in an expansible chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for a steam turbine driven locomotive.

    62,     for locomotive power comprising an internal combustion or explosive
    engine other than a gas turbine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, appropriate subclasses, and especially subclasses
    39.01+ for power plants including gas turbines.

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, appropriate subclasses for a
    gas turbine, per se.


CLS 105/62.1
TXT Internal combustion engine:

    Locomotive under subclass 26.05 in which the prime mover is of the type
    having an enclosed chamber adapted to be filled with an explosive chemical
    combined with provision to bring about such explosion and utilize the power
    therefrom for motive power.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61.5,   for a locomotive powered by an external combustion engine, other
    than a steam engine.


CLS 105/62.2
TXT Water cooled engine:

    Locomotive under subclass 62.1 with provision to remove thermal energy from
    the prime mover by passage of water thereabout.


CLS 105/63
TXT Locomotives under subclass 26 in which a propelling force is derived from
    air-pressure, either atmospheric or compressed.


CLS 105/64.1
TXT With pump:

    Locomotive under subclass 63 combined with means to compress the pneumatic
    medium used for exerting the propelling force.

    (1)     Note.  A reversible pneumatic motor utilized to save the energy of
    momentum is included herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, for a pneumatic railway vehicle combined with an external
    source of pressurized air.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 216 for fluid type energy storing device
    for an occupant propelled vehicle.


CLS 105/64.2
TXT Jet propelled:

    Locomotive under subclass 64.1 wherein fluent material (e.g., gaseous
    material) is cast into the atmosphere to yield a resultant driving force to
    the locomotive.


CLS 105/65
TXT Locomotives under subclass 63 in which a propelling force is derived from
    compressed air, such air being carried in storage-reservoirs on the
    locomotive and not including that type in which the air is compressed on
    the car.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also relates to the general arrangement of
    air-reservoirs on the locomotive.


CLS 105/66
TXT Locomotives under subclass 26.05 driven by wind or water wheels.


CLS 105/67
TXT Locomotives under subclass 26.05 in which a propelling force is derived
    from a spring or springs.


CLS 105/68
TXT Locomotives under subclass 67, the springs being of the elliptical or bow
    type.


CLS 105/69
TXT Locomotives under subclass 67, the springs being of the coil or helical
    type acting under tension or compression only.


CLS 105/70
TXT Locomotives under subclass 67, the springs being of the torsion type,
    usually of coil or bar form.


CLS 105/71
TXT Locomotives under subclass 67 in which a propelling force is derived from a
    spring or springs of the spiral type.


CLS 105/72
TXT Locomotives under subclass 67 in which the weight of the car, acting by
    gravity, or a falling weight, operates through some agency, as gears or
    cams, to give motion to the car.


CLS 105/72.1
TXT Inertia drive:

    Locomotive under subclass 26.05 including a mass adapted to be in motion
    with driving connection to propel the locomotive from the energy of motion
    stored therein.


CLS 105/72.2
TXT With land engaging wheel:

    Locomotive under subclass 26.05 having a wheel for rolling along a rail,
    and having at least one wheel for riding on a planar surface of the earth.

    (1)     Note.  To be a locomotive, a railway vehicle must include provision
    to propel itself along a rail.

    (2)     Note.  A locomotive receiving part of its tractive or lading load
    from a wheel engaging the flat surface beside a rail is included herein.

    (3)     Note.  A locomotive including a single wheel particularly adapted
    to ride on a (1) rail or (2) planar surface of the earth is included in
    this subclass.

    (4)     Note. A vehicle carrying wheel-substitute; e.g., an endless belt,
    is considered to be a "wheel" for placement in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215.2,  for a railway truck including both rail and highway engaging
    wheels, wherein there is no provision to propel itself along a rail.


CLS 105/73
TXT Devices under subclass 26 for increasing the tractive effect of a
    locomotive.


CLS 105/74
TXT Rolling-stock under subclass 73 carries airplanes or inclined surfaces to
    regulate the load on the traction-wheels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.2,    for streamline rolling stock with foil surfaces to lift the air.


CLS 105/75
TXT Rolling-stock under subclass 73 in which the weight of the tender,
    locomotive-pilot, or trailing trucks may be shifted to or from the
    locomotive drive-wheels to vary their tractive effect.


CLS 105/76
TXT Rolling-stock under subclass 73 which provides for the passage of electric
    current through the wheel and rail to increase the tractive effect.


CLS 105/77
TXT Rolling-stock under subclass 73 in which a magnetic field on the locomotive
    or road-bed causes increased adhesion between the wheels and rails.


CLS 105/78
TXT Apparatus under subclass 77 in which the wheel and axle or the wheels alone
    form part of the electromagnet.


CLS 105/79
TXT Locomotives under subclass 26.05 having axle driving-boxes located at the
    inner sides of the drive-wheels for supporting the locomotive-frame.


CLS 105/80
TXT Axle driving-boxes under subclass 79, having means permitting lateral
    motion of the locomotive-frame on the driving-boxes.


CLS 105/81
TXT Axle driving-boxes under subclass 79 having vertical guide-wedges for
    lateral adjustment of the drive-boxes.


CLS 105/82
TXT Locomotives under subclass 26.05 having means including interconnected
    links, levers, with or without springs, and pneumatic systems for
    equalizing the load distribution to the axles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for means for varying the load on locomotive drivers.

    194,    for equalizers for bogies.

    209,    for equalizers for trucks.


CLS 105/84
TXT Connecting-rods and pitmen under subclass 26.05 for locomotive drive-wheels.


CLS 105/85
TXT Round-house appliances under subclass 26.05 for turning locomotive
    drive-wheels without moving the locomotive for the purpose of setting the
    valves.


CLS 105/86
TXT Mechanism under the class definition comprising manually or bodily operated
    driving means for hand-cars, railway velocipedes, and other trackman's car.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26.1    for trackman's-car type vehicles are power propelled for transport.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 200+ for velocipedes of general utility.


CLS 105/87
TXT Manually-operated railway-vehicles under subclass 86 in which a vertical
    hand-operated lever has driving connections with the wheels of the vehicle.


CLS 105/88
TXT Manually-operated railway vehicles under subclass 86 having a horizontal
    hand-operated lever to drive the vehicle.


CLS 105/89
TXT Vehicles under subclass 86 driven by means of a hand-crank.


CLS 105/90.1
TXT Car pusher:

    Trackman's-car drive under subclass 89 adapted to engage another railway
    car and move the same along a track.


CLS 105/90.2
TXT Motorized:

    Trackman's car drive under subclass 90.1 including a prime mover to power
    and urge the other piece of rolling stock to move.


CLS 105/91
TXT Railway-vehicles under subclass 86, composed largely of the velocipede type
    of trackman's cars, which are operated by means of a pedal-crank.


CLS 105/92
TXT Railway-vehicles under subclass 91 having the pedal-cranks located directly
    on the axle of the driving-wheels.


CLS 105/93
TXT Railway-vehicles under subclass 86 having treadle-operated driving means.


CLS 105/94
TXT Railway-vehicles under subclass 86 in which a rocking or sliding movement
    of the seat or seats is utilized to drive the vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 220+ for land vehicles operated in this
    way.


CLS 105/95
TXT Devices under subclass 86 comprising attachments to an ordinary bicycle
    whereby it is rendered capable of running on an ordinary railroad-track.


CLS 105/96
TXT Wheel or axle drives for railway vehicles under class definition including
    both axles which are driven and those which act as a driver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 337+ for a motor vehicle having
    mechanism for connecting the power shaft to the road wheels.


CLS 105/96.1
TXT Devices under subclass 96 where the transmission is partially or wholly
    mounted in or on the usual journal box.


CLS 105/96.2
TXT Devices under subclass 96 in which the drive is constituted wholly or
    partially of fluid means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63+,    for pneumatic locomotive power plants.


CLS 105/97
TXT Driving-gear under subclass 96 including at some point, as a speed-changing
    link therein, a planetary gear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for electric power plants for locomotives having gearing and having
    the rotor on the axle.


CLS 105/98
TXT Power-transmitting devices under subclass 96 on locomotives for driving and
    controlling a belt-gear or flexible-shaft drive along a train.

    (1)     Note.  The direct axle-driving means of these drives are found in
    the subclasses below.


CLS 105/99
TXT Power transmitting devices under subclass 96 comprising driving connections
    from a locomotive to one or more axles having angular movement with respect
    to the locomotive or the axles having relative horizontal radial movement
    with respect to each other.

    (1)     Note.  Other forms of articulated radial drive are found in the
    subclasses below.


CLS 105/100
TXT Driving connections under subclass 96 in which a small inner drive-wheel
    rests upon the inner rim of the large external traction-wheel and drives
    the latter.


CLS 105/101
TXT Driving devices under subclass 96 in which the axle is directly driven by a
    belt-gear.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, appropriate
    subclasses for an endless belt transmission.


CLS 105/102
TXT Driving devices under subclass 101 in which the belt-gear on the axle
    passes around the rotor element of a motor or machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106     and 107, for swing and sliding motors, respectively, functioning as
    belt tighteners.


CLS 105/103
TXT Driving devices under subclass 102 in which the driving-belt is looped
    twice around the axle and twice around the rotor.

    (1)     Note.  These drives are for dynamos.


CLS 105/104
TXT Driving devices under subclass 101 in which the driving-belt passes from
    the wheel or axle to a wheel on a crankshaft, or the last element of the
    gear-train is a reciprocating engine.


CLS 105/105
TXT Driving devices under subclass 96 comprising special belt-tighteners for
    axle-drives.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 101+ for a belt tensioner.


CLS 105/106
TXT Belt-tighteners under subclass 105 comprising a motor or dynamo carried on
    swinging supports, so that the rotor-wheel can be shifted.


CLS 105/107
TXT Belt-tighteners under subclass 105 comprising a motor or dynamo slidably
    mounted to regulate the tension of the belt from the axle.


CLS 105/108
TXT Driving devices under subclass 96 having two gear-wheels, either toothed or
    friction, in the same plane, one of the wheels being on the axle.


CLS 105/109
TXT Plane gears under subclass 108 with the axle gear continuing the
    transmission in a bevel-gear drive.


CLS 105/110
TXT Plane gears under subclass 108 with an extension transmission by belt-gear.


CLS 105/111
TXT Plane gears under subclass 108 with an extension transmission by a pitman.


CLS 105/112
TXT Plane gears under subclass 108, frictional or toothed, which engage
    directly with the traction-wheel.


CLS 105/113
TXT Plane gears under subclass 108 in which the car-wheel or axle-gear engages
    directly with a rotor-wheel of a rotary motor or dynamo.


CLS 105/114
TXT Drive devices under subclass 113 in which a traction-wheel or rim
    integrally formed with or rigidly attached to the gear engages directly
    with a rotor-wheel of a rotary motor or dynamo.


CLS 105/115
TXT Plane gears under subclass 108 in which the car-axle gear engages a train
    of gearing, which ends in a cranked shaft.


CLS 105/116
TXT Drive devices under subclass 115 in which the traction-wheel is engaged
    directly by the plane gear.


CLS 105/117
TXT Drive devices under subclass 96 in which the wheel or axle usually carries
    a bevel-gear, which engages a corresponding gear on a shaft which is at an
    angle, usually a right angle, to the axle or car-wheel.

    (1)     Note.  The gearing may be either frictional or toothed.


CLS 105/118
TXT Drive gearing under subclass 117 in which the angle or bevel-gear on the
    transverse shaft is the rotor-wheel of the motor or dynamo.


CLS 105/119
TXT Drive devices under subclass 96 in which the car-wheel or axle is driven
    directly by a worm-gear.


CLS 105/120
TXT Drive devices under subclass 96 in which a pitman passes from the cranked
    car-wheel or axle to a parallel cranked jack-shaft.


CLS 105/121
TXT Drive devices under subclass 120 in which the jack-shaft has a gear-wheel
    for the motor-drive.


CLS 105/122
TXT Drive devices under subclass 96 in which the cranked car-wheel or axle is
    connected directly by a pitman, which in turn is connected directly to the
    rotor of a motor.


CLS 105/123
TXT Drive devices under subclass 96 in which the pitman connects at one end to
    a cranked car-wheel or axle and at the other end to a lever, which may be a
    bar-lever or a lever of the bell-crank and shaft type.


CLS 105/124
TXT Railway-vehicles under subclass 96 in which the driving mechanism consists
    of a ratchet drawbar or pawl in combination with a rachet-wheel secured to
    the car-wheel or axle.


CLS 105/125
TXT Pawl-and-rachet-driven railway-vehicles under subclass 124 in which the
    pawl is mounted directly on the car-axle or on a bracket or lever carried
    by the car-axle.


CLS 105/126
TXT Pawl-and-rachet-driven railway vehicles under subclass 125 in which the
    pawl-carrying bracket is accurate in form and is actuated by means of a
    rope or chain passing over the arcuate surface.


CLS 105/127
TXT Railway-vehicles under subclass 96 in which the driving mechanism consists
    of a rack-bar in combination with a car-wheel or axle carried pinion.


CLS 105/128
TXT Railway-vehicles under subclass 96 in which the car-wheels or axles are
    provided with clutches, such as cam or rollers, holding by frictional
    contact when moved in one direction and adapted to move freely in the
    opposite direction.


CLS 105/129
TXT Car-moving devices under subclass 96 comprising levers with wheel-rim or
    axle engaging jaws, or both, for moving cars by hand.


CLS 105/130
TXT Driving devices under subclass 96 comprising special forms of clutch
    mechanism in connection with wheel, axles and motors.


CLS 105/131
TXT Driving devices under subclass 96 which include yielding and spring driving
    connections between the motor and the traction-wheels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, appropriate subclasses for a flexible coupling between a
    shaft and driven member.


CLS 105/132
TXT Driving devices under subclass 96 which include loose-link driving
    connections between the motor and the traction-wheels.


CLS 105/132.1
TXT Driving devices under subclass 96 having transmission gearing where the
    driving torque reactions are transmitted to the vehicle, truck frame or
    adjacent axle by a torque arm resiliently or nonresiliently connected.


CLS 105/133
TXT Devices under the class definition relating to the location or
    base-fastening of a motor or dynamo on a car-body or its truck.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 637+ for machinery supports in general.


CLS 105/134
TXT Devices under subclass 133 relating to modifications of a car-body or its
    truck so that a cable-gripper may be operatively supported thereon for use
    with a traction-cable.


CLS 105/135
TXT Devices under subclass 133 in which a plurality of pivotally-mounted
    electric motors are interconnected, so that the motor-torques oppose and
    neutralize each other.


CLS 105/136
TXT Devices under subclass 133 which include special collars and sleeves for
    mounting motors on axles.


CLS 105/137
TXT Devices under subclass 136 which include modifications of the
    stator-casings of electric motors to form bearings thereon for
    axle-mounting.


CLS 105/138
TXT Motor placement devices under subclass 133 comprising bars or frames for
    supporting motors on trucks.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106     and 107, for swinging and sliding motors, respectively, functioning
    as belt tighteners.


CLS 105/139
TXT Bars or frames under subclass 138 with springs to yieldingly support the
    motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135,    for plural motors pivotally mounted so that their torques are
    opposed.


CLS 105/140
TXT Motor placement devices under subclass 133 comprising boxes, crates, and
    castings for inclosing and supporting motors or dynamos on trucks.


CLS 105/141
TXT Railway rolling-stock under class definition adapted to run on and above a
    single rail, so that the center of gravity of the vehicles is above the
    rail.

    (1)     Note.  Two rails so close together as to leave merely a
    wheel-flange way between them are classed as monorails.


CLS 105/142
TXT Monorail vehicles under subclass 141 in which the rider balances the moving
    vehicle by his body movement.


CLS 105/143
TXT Monorail vehicles under subclass 141 in which a draft-animal or human being
    keeps the car balanced upon and moves it along the track.


CLS 105/144
TXT Monorail vehicles under subclass 141 in which the vehicle-balance is
    maintained by side wheels or contact members engaging auxiliary side rails
    or ways.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 119 for monorail tracks and tracks and vehicles
    combined.


CLS 105/145
TXT Monorail vehicles under subclass 144 adapted to tracks in which the center
    or monorail is raised above the level of the side tracks.


CLS 105/146
TXT Monorail vehicles under subclass 141 adapted to tracks which include a
    monorail beneath the cars and separated guide-rails above the cars.


CLS 105/147
TXT Monorail vehicles under subclass 141 adapted to tracks which include a
    single rail beneath the cars and a single guide-rail above the same.


CLS 105/148
TXT The vehicles under class definition suspended from trolleys, which run on
    elevated tracks.


CLS 105/149
TXT Devices under subclass 148 for maintaining a car-body horizontal regardless
    of whether the body-supporting trolleys are running on a horizontal,
    inclined, or catenary track.


CLS 105/149.1
TXT Passenger car; e.g., for skiing:

    Passenger car under subclass 148 including a portion of particular utility
    to the transportation of people located below the support structure.


CLS 105/149.2
TXT Suspended chair:

    Passenger car under subclass 149.1 comprising an unenclosed seat.

    (1)     Note.  The chair of this subclass may include such accessories as a
    safety rail and a foot rest.


CLS 105/150
TXT Suspended vehicles under subclass 148 designed to travel on a single
    elevated rigid or cable track.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 87 for panel hangers and
    travelers.


CLS 105/151
TXT Suspended vehicles under subclass 150 having shiftable latches and guards
    for preventing a trolley from being derailed or jumping from its track.


CLS 105/152
TXT Multiple-wheeled suspended vehicle trolleys under subclass 150 so connected
    to their load as to insure a uniform load distribution to the several
    trolley-wheels.


CLS 105/153
TXT Suspended vehicles under subclass 150 in which the trolleys have an
    auxiliary set of wheels or rollers adapted to engage the underside of the
    elevated rail.


CLS 105/154
TXT Suspended vehicles under subclass 148 in which the trolleys are provided
    with inwardly-projecting traction-wheels designed to travel on a separated
    pair of rails or on a single middle rail having two separate wheel
    tread-surfaces.


CLS 105/155
TXT Suspended vehicles under subclass 148 in which the trolleys have
    outwardly-projecting traction-wheels for travel on separated rail
    tread-surfaces, and the vehicle suspension means travel between said
    tread-surfaces.


CLS 105/156
TXT Suspended vehicles under subclass 148 having swiveling devices for the
    suspension-hangers between the trolleys and car-bodies or load-carriers.


CLS 105/157.1
TXT TRUCKS:

    Rolling stock under the class definition comprising an assembly of a pair
    of wheels and supporting framework to carry a distinct vehicle body.


CLS 105/157.2
TXT Toy or model truck:

    Truck under subclass 157.1 intended for entertainment, or of inadequate
    size to be used for transportation of people and not intended for
    transportation of produce.

    (1)     Note.  A model truck, even though structurally identical to a
    conventional truck is included in this subclass, since it is not for
    transportation of people or produce.


CLS 105/158.1
TXT Modified car:

    Truck under subclass 157.1 adapted to support a distinct vehicle of a shape
    specially chosen for interfitting with that truck.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.1+,   for a two-car truck for an articulated train.


CLS 105/158.2
TXT With spring for low floor car:

    Truck under subclass 158.1 combined with resilient means to support the
    vehicle with respect thereto, to support a vehicle having a load surface
    that is physically lower than is usual for a car of the particular type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for trucks designed to support two adjacent car bodies in an
    articulated train.


CLS 105/159
TXT Floorless trucks under subclass 157.1 designed to carry other vehicles,
    such as loaded wagons.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    410,    Freight Accommodation on Freight Carrier, subclass 53 for paired
    trucks, spaced apart to support each of the end of a loaded semitrailer for
    transporting off the ground.


CLS 105/160
TXT Logging-trucks under subclass 157.1 in which the log-supports are
    transverse beams or bolsters termed "log-bunks".


CLS 105/160.5
TXT Trucks under subclass 157.1 for handling lumber, conveying it to
    drying-kilns, etc.


CLS 105/161
TXT Trucks under subclass 157.1 designed to receive and transport
    mining-machines and to serve as base-supports for such machines when in
    operation.


CLS 105/162
TXT Trucks under subclass 157.1 comprising structural features and attachments
    to trackman's cars.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86+,    for trackman's car drive.


CLS 105/163.1
TXT Overhead crane:

    Truck under subclass 157.1 particularly adapted to support and carry a
    dragline other lifting structure of a type adapted to travel on a rail
    vertically higher than material carried thereby.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29.1    for a locomotive of the rack rail type.

    96+,    for a wheel or axle drive for railway rolling stock, generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclasses 205+ for traveling bridge cranes
    having a hoisting trolley thereon; and subclass 142.1 for a hoisting
    trolley, per se.  Hoisting means or structure peculiar thereto must be
    claimed for original placement in Class 212.


CLS 105/163.2
TXT Skew control:

    Truck under subclass 163.1 having a wheel for rolling over each of a pair
    of rails and having provision to regulate the amount of travel of one wheel
    with respect to the other wheel.


CLS 105/164
TXT Devices under subclass 157.1 for leveling up and temporarily fixing the
    positions of truck-platforms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 840+ for vehicles having body leveling
    devices.


CLS 105/165
TXT Trucks under subclass 157.1 having a plurality of axles so mounted as to
    allow each to take a position on a curved track substantially radial to the
    curve.


CLS 105/166
TXT Trucks under subclass 165 having six-wheels.


CLS 105/167
TXT Trucks under subclass 165 of the four-wheeled swiveled type with axles
    which may radiate relatively to curved tracks.


CLS 105/168
TXT Trucks under subclass 167 having a connection such that the swiveling of
    the truck relative to the body operates positively to place each axle in
    substantially radial position to the track.


CLS 105/169
TXT Trucks under subclass 165 wherein each wheel has its independent axle.


CLS 105/170
TXT Trucks under subclass 165 wherein each wheel is swiveled and follows a
    curved track by swiveling on a vertical axis which intersects the
    contact-point of the wheel and rail.


CLS 105/171
TXT Trucks under subclass 157.1 connected to the car-body so as to permit of
    lateral movement relative to the car-body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174,    for locomotive trucks capable of lateral motion relative to the
    locomotive frame.

    185+,   for lateral motion bolsters.


CLS 105/172
TXT Truck frame structure under subclass 157.1 useful only for locomotives.


CLS 105/173
TXT Locomotive frames under subclass 172 having end buffers or pilot beams.


CLS 105/174
TXT Locomotive frames under subclass 172 in which the front or trailing truck,
    comprising one or more wheeled axles and a frame connection, is mounted so
    that the truck is capable of lateral movement relative to the
    locomotive-frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     for equalizer connections.

    189,    for shifting center-plates.

    222,    for shifting axle-boxes.


CLS 105/175.1
TXT Articulated:

    Locomotive truck under subclass 172 with relatively movable truck and frame
    parts to render the rolling stock supported thereby flexible for rounding a
    turn on the supporting rails.

    (1)     Note.  The truck of this subclass may include three (or more)
    wheels wherein one wheel may be displaced laterally for rounding a turn.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein is a truck of a car including plural trucks
    interrelated with provision to allow for rounding of a turn.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3+,     for a plurality of railway cars flexibly coupled in such a way as
    to appear to be a single unit.


CLS 105/176
TXT Railway trucks under subclass 157.1 provided with means so connecting the
    running-gear units that motion of one with relation to the vehicle causes
    motion of another with relation to the vehicle.


CLS 105/177
TXT Trucks under subclass 157.1 provided with a plurality of sets of
    supporting-wheels, each set adapted for running in a different angular
    direction.


CLS 105/178
TXT Trucks under subclass 157.1 modified so as to run on tracks of different
    gauges.


CLS 105/179
TXT Trucks under subclass 157.1 wherein the sides are individually pivoted by
    vertical pivots through the transom or bolster ends.


CLS 105/180
TXT Trucks under subclass 157.1 wherein each wheel has its independent axle.

    (1)     Note.  Where the axle-sections are so connected across the truck
    (as by a sleeve) as to require no change in frame structure over that
    required to support a single axle with two wheels, the patent is not
    classified here.


CLS 105/181
TXT Antifriction-wheels under subclass 157.1 to carry the frame on the
    supporting wheels or axles.

    (1)     Note.  The presence of mere rollers or ball-bearings in the
    journal-boxes does not bring the patent to this subclass.


CLS 105/182.1
TXT Bogie:

    Truck under subclass 157.1 constructed for connection to the vehicle-body
    with capability of swivel motion as a unit with relating thereto.


CLS 105/183
TXT Bogies under subclass 182.1 comprising eight-wheeled trucks.


CLS 105/184
TXT Bogies under subclass 182.1 constructed so as to throw the weight of the
    vehicle largely on a single pair of driving-wheels of each truck, the
    remaining wheels serving mainly to guide the truck along the track.


CLS 105/185
TXT Bogies under subclass 182.1 provided with a cross-beam or bolster mounted
    so as to allow it limited bodily action laterally of the truck.


CLS 105/186
TXT Bogies under subclass 185 having the bolster or spring-seat mounted on
    rollers for lateral movement.


CLS 105/187
TXT Bogies under subclass 185 in which the bolster is mounted on rockers or the
    spring-seat rocks.


CLS 105/188
TXT Bogies under subclass 185 having six-wheel trucks.


CLS 105/189
TXT Bogies under subclass 185 having a short bolster member which is a mere
    center-bearing or swivel-connection plate to support the vehicle-body.


CLS 105/190.1
TXT Swinging:

    Bogie under subclass 185 including a side frame along each lateral side
    thereof, a link member pivotally attached to each side frame, and a body
    supporting bolster pivotally attached to each link and extending from the
    link of one side frame to the link of the other, with load transmitted from
    the bolster by tension only being applied to the links, allowing the
    bolster to move laterally with respect to the side frames.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189,    for a bogie having a lateral-motion bolster and a mere center
    bearing to support a vehicle body.


CLS 105/190.2
TXT Sprung or cushioned bolster:

    Bogie under subclass 190.1 including resilient means to transmit load or
    means to limit vibration from the bolster to each side frame


CLS 105/191
TXT Bolster-hangers under subclass 190 mounted on the column-guides in the
    truck side frame.


CLS 105/192
TXT Bolster under subclass 185 supported from the truck side frames at
    substantial distances from its side.


CLS 105/193
TXT Devices under subclass 185, comprising attachments specially adapted to
    check or cushion the lateral motion of truck-bolsters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 297+ for a fluid- resistance dashpot of general
    utility.


CLS 105/194
TXT Bogies under subclass 182.1 provided with means for transmitting weight
    from the truck-frames to the axle-boxes in substantially equal proportions
    regardless of inequalities in the level of the track.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209,    for truck equalizers.

    210,    for parallel depression body    supporting means.


CLS 105/195
TXT Bogies under subclass 194 provided with six supporting-wheels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166,    for six wheel radial trucks.

    188,    for six wheel bogies with lateral-motion bolster.


CLS 105/196
TXT Bogies under subclass 182.1 provided with six supporting-wheels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188,    for six wheel bogies with lateral motion bolster.

    195,    for six wheel bogies with equalizing load-carrying means.


CLS 105/197.05
TXT Sprung bolster:

    Bogie under subclass 182.1 including a wheel supported side frame structure
    extending parallel to a first rail over which the device is to travel, a
    resilient member supported thereby, and a rigid cross-member supported by
    the resilient member, said cross-member extending to a corresponding wheel
    supported side frame riding on a second rail parallel to the first.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 6+ for a spring device, per se,
    especially adapted for a vehicle bolster.


CLS 105/197.1
TXT Sprung bolster bogies under subclass 197.05 where the spring assembly
    includes leaf and coil springs in series, parallel, series-parallel, or
    other relation.


CLS 105/197.2
TXT Sprung bolster bogies under subclass 197.05 where some provision between
    bolster and side frame connections is made to compensate for omission of
    the conventional spring plank.


CLS 105/198
TXT Sprung bolster bogies under subclass 197.05 in which the bolster is so
    mounted as to allow it to rock in a longitudinal vertical plane with
    relation to the truck-frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203,    for similar mounting of a combined transom and bolster.


CLS 105/198.1
TXT Pneumatic spring:

    Bogie under subclass 197.05 wherein the resilient member comprises a vessel
    filled with compressible gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 64.11+ for vehicle fluid springs in
    general.


CLS 105/198.2
TXT Bolster movement dampened by snubber:

    Bogie under subclass 197.05 including provision to resistingly control free
    movement of the cross-member with respect to the frame.

    (1)     Note.  A snubber is similar in function to a shock absorber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 195+ for a railway truck snubber, per
    se, which comprises a mechanical spring combined with a fluid or friction
    motion retarder.


CLS 105/198.3
TXT Hydraulic damping:

    Bogie under subclass 198.2 including a chamber filled with liquid having
    provision to transfer the liquid from one location to another, utilizing
    the viscosity of the liquid to restrict free movement of the cross-member
    with respect to the frame.

    (1)     Note.  A telescoping "shock absorber" is considered to be a
    hydraulic snubber in the absence of other disclosure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 217+ for a railway truck snubber, per
    se, which comprises a mechanical spring combined with a fluid damper.


CLS 105/198.4
TXT Snubber biasing spring also supports bolster:

    Bogie under subclass 198.2 including a resilient member to urge the snubber
    into frictional engagement with a cooperating friction surface, wherein the
    resilient member urging the snubber is positioned such that it also acts to
    support the cross-over bolster directly.


CLS 105/198.5
TXT Bolster-mounted snubber:

    Bogie under subclass 198.2 wherein the provision to resistingly control
    free movement of the cross-member comprises structure mounted on the
    cross-member.

    (1)     Note.  In order to control movement of the bolster with respect to
    the frame, there must be engagement of both those parts.  The snubber of
    this subclass includes significant structure fixedly attached to the
    bolster, i.e., more than a specific friction surface.


CLS 105/198.6
TXT Linear torsion spring:

    Bogie under subclass 197.05 wherein the resilient member includes a
    generally straight, elongated portion adapted to twist within its elastic
    limit to yieldably support the cross-member.

    (1)     Note.  A coil spring, though supporting a load by torsion, is not
    included in this subclass.


CLS 105/198.7
TXT Nonmetallic spring or cushion:

    Bogie under subclass 197.05 wherein the resilient member is made of
    material other than metal, and may include an additional resilient member,
    such that the nonmetallic member only absorbs relatively small oscillations.


CLS 105/199.1
TXT Body connections:

    Bogie under subclass 182.1 including claimed detail of the structure for
    attachment thereof to a vehicle body supported thereby.


CLS 105/199.2
TXT Anti-roll device:

    Bogie under subclass 199.1 including provision to counter movement of the
    supported vehicle body with respect to the bogie about an axis parallel to
    the supporting rail, or to allow or cause the vehicle body to lean away
    from the direction of centrifugal force.

    (1)     Note.  A truck side bearing is not considered to "counter movement"
    for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199.3,  for a bogie having a truck side bearing.


CLS 105/199.3
TXT Truck side bearing:

    Bogie under subclass 199.1 also including means remote from the center of
    the bogie to assist in carrying the weight of the supported vehicle body.


CLS 105/199.4
TXT Truck center bearing:

    Bogie under subclass 199.1 including a support surface at the upper center
    thereof for pivotally carrying the weight of the supported vehicle body.


CLS 105/199.5
TXT Single axle:

    Bogie under subclass 199.1 including a frame supported by only one wheel
    riding on each supporting rail and all wheels thereof riding on a common
    axle.


CLS 105/200
TXT Bogies under subclass 182.1 including the connections between (the
    truck-bolster and truck and connections between) truck and body bolsters,
    but not including side and center bearings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, subclass 586 for side and center antifriction bearings.


CLS 105/201
TXT Bolster connections under subclass 200 provided with means between the
    truck-bolster and vehicle-bolster allowing bodily lateral motion of the
    truck with relation to the car-body in addition to the relative swivel
    motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171,    for lateral motion connections between the car body and truck.

    185,    for lateral motion connection between the bolster and truck.


CLS 105/202
TXT Bogies under subclass 182.1 wherein the cross-framing at the center of the
    truck carries a center-bearing rigid therewith, thus performing the
    functions of both transom and bolster.


CLS 105/203
TXT Combined transom and bolster bogies under subclass 202 provided with a
    joint between the side and cross frames, allowing a relative rocking motion
    in a vertical plane longitudinally of the truck.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198,    for rocking spring bolsters.


CLS 105/204
TXT Bogies under subclass 182.1 having side frames of the arch-bar type, each
    comprising a truss structure mounting journal boxes at its ends, the
    bolster-guides forming a double strut between the tension and compression
    members at the center.


CLS 105/205
TXT Arch-bar type bogies under subclass 204 having the arch-bar and the
    longitudinal compression member integral.


CLS 105/206.1
TXT Side frames:

    Bogies under subclass 182.1 having structure supported directly by the
    wheel axle, which structure extends predominately parallel with the wheel
    supporting rail.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202,    for combined transom and bolster type framing.


CLS 105/206.2
TXT Welded:

    Bogie under subclass 206.1 including components that have been united by
    fusion bonding.


CLS 105/207
TXT Bogies under subclass 182.1 including guide-columns for bolster ends in
    side frames.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204,    for arch-bar type bogies.


CLS 105/208
TXT Bogies under subclass 182.1 including structure of the cross-tie members
    between the side frames adjacent the bolster, exclusive of bolster
    structure, together with their means of attachment to the side frames.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204,    for arch-bar type bogies.


CLS 105/208.1
TXT Bogies under subclass 208 in which the transoms are resiliently mounted on
    the side frames.


CLS 105/208.2
TXT Bogies under subclass 208 specific to spring plank structure which permit
    relative vertical and/or tilting movement between opposite truck side
    frames without straining the spring plank and its connection to the
    respective side frames.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179,    for trucks with vertical side pivots.


CLS 105/209
TXT Trucks under subclass 157.1 having means for transmitting load from the
    truck-frame to the axles in substantially equal proportions regardless of
    inequalities in the track-level.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194+,   for bogie truck equalizers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 6.1 for vehicle body leveling devices
    comprising means for keeping the body portion of a vehicle level responsive
    to a means sensing an actual or incipient nonlevel condition.


CLS 105/210
TXT Trucks under subclass 157.1 having means for maintaining the vehicle-body
    substantially parallel with the track even under the weight of an
    eccentrically-disposed load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 6.1 for vehicle body leveling devices
    comprising means for keeping the body portion of a vehicle level responsive
    to a means sensing an actual or incipient nonlevel condition.


CLS 105/211
TXT Trucks under subclass 157.1 having a top platform or frame designed to
    receive the underframe of a car-body or a load.


CLS 105/212
TXT Trucks under subclass 211 having a spring-supported platform or side-bar
    top to receive the sills or underframe of a car-body directly.


CLS 105/213
TXT Trucks under subclass 212 with axle-box frames attached to a side frame,
    which supports the springs for the platform.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210,    for parallel depression type trucks.


CLS 105/214
TXT Trucks under subclass 213 having the side-frame bar integrally formed with
    inverted U-yokes, which guide the axle-boxes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    192,    for span-supported lateral motion bolsters.


CLS 105/215.1
TXT Supplemental wheel:

    Truck under subclass 157.1 having a wheel intended to be in an inoperative
    position during some vehicular uses of the truck and to be in an operative
    position during other uses of the truck.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is (1) a truck for use alternately as a land
    vehicle or as a railroad vehicle; and (2) a truck having a wheel that does
    not touch the rail under light loading, but settles down and ride on the
    rail under heavy loading.

    (2)     Note.  A vehicle carrying wheel-substitution device; e.g., an
    endless belt, is considered to be a "wheel" for placement in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    410,    Freight Accommodation on Freight Carrier, subclass 67 for a freight
    carrying vehicle which may have supplemental guidance wheels cooperating
    with a track mounted on a freight car floor.  The stowed vehicle may be a
    semitrailer proper for that subclass (rather than subclasses 56+ for
    semitrailer stowage on a freight carrier), as explained in subclass 67 note
    for the line between these subclasses.


CLS 105/215.2
TXT Railway/highway truck:

    Truck under subclass 215.1 for including wheel means for riding on a rail
    and including wheel means for riding on a planar surface, generally.

    (1)     Note.  A truck including a single wheel particularly adapted to
    ride on a (1) rail or (2) planar surface is included in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The railway wheel may ride on a rail at the same time that
    the other wheel rides on a planar surface.

    (3)     Note.  The planar surface engaging wheel of this subclass may be
    driven.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72.2,   for a locomotive including a land engaging wheel and a rail
    engaging wheel wherein the rail engage wheel is driven, or wherein the land
    engaging wheel is driven to propel the locomotive along the rail.


CLS 105/216
TXT Trucks under subclass 157.1 having supporting-shoes or runner members
    arranged to slide along the track in case of truck derailment.


CLS 105/217
TXT Trucks under subclass 157.1 having means to support parts of truck in case
    of breakage thereof to prevent them from interfering with the movement of
    the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199,    for body and truck connecting means.

    200,    for bolster connections to trucks and to body bolsters.


CLS 105/218.1
TXT Axle bearing mounting:

    Truck under subclass 157.1 including claimed details of the mounting of the
    bearing supporting a frame on a wheel axle.


CLS 105/218.2
TXT Axle bearing mounted on pivotal sideframe arms:

    Truck under subclass 218.1 wherein the side frame includes a support member
    movable about an axis to and from supporting position with respect to the
    axle-box.


CLS 105/219
TXT Axle-box mountings under subclass 218.1 wherein some part of or the whole
    axle-box is fixed to the truck side frame, either integrally, by welding,
    or by casting.


CLS 105/220
TXT Axle-box mountings under subclass 218.1 in which the axle-box is secured at
    its top or side, or both, to the truck-frame by bolts or lugs, so that it
    may be readily detached from the frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219,    for axle-boxes permanently fixed to the truck side frame.


CLS 105/221.1
TXT Releasable enclosure:

    Truck under subclass 218.1 having an axle bearing mounting wherein the axle
    bearing is attached to the truck frame by an enclosing or surrounding
    means, which enclosing or surrounding means has one or more detachable
    parts to permit removal of the axle bearing.


CLS 105/221.2
TXT Key release:

    Truck under subclass 221.,1 including a frame having an open bottom slot
    for receiving the axle and including a slot blocking member for attachment
    to only one side of the a slot to retain the axle in the slot.


CLS 105/222
TXT Axle box mountings under subclass 218.1 having the axle box or bearing
    designed to have movement transversely of the truck frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     for lateral motion inside drive boxes for locomotives.


CLS 105/223
TXT Axle box mountings under subclass 218.1 in which the connections are such
    that the axle journal may have lateral, vertical or universal rocking
    movement relatively to the truck frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169,    for stub axle mountings in radial trucks.


CLS 105/224.05
TXT Spring and guide:

    Truck under subclass 218.1 including a way for movement of the axle and its
    immediate bearing structure with respect to the supporting frame and
    including a spring for yieldably transmitting load from the axle to the
    frame.


CLS 105/224.06
TXT Spring biased guide or guide follower:

    Truck under subclass 224.05 including a walled way, wherein the wall is
    resiliently urged to narrow the way or wherein the member directed by the
    wall to thereby restrict the way.

    (1)     Note.  The spring biased guide or guide follower of this subclass
    may comprise a buffer (i.e., a shock absorber).


CLS 105/224.1
TXT Axle box mountings under subclass 218.1, of rubber or other similar
    nonmetallic material.


CLS 105/225
TXT Axle box mountings under subclass 218.1 having wear plates in the truck
    pedestals, against which the axle boxes rub.


CLS 105/226
TXT Truck construction under subclass 157.1 involving transverse supporting
    beams between trucks and car bodies, usually termed "truck" and "body"
    bolsters.


CLS 105/227
TXT Twin beam or frame bolsters under subclass 226 for four wheeled trucks.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188,    195 and 196, for frame bolsters for six-wheeled trucks.


CLS 105/228
TXT Body bolsters on car under frames under subclass 226 in which the center
    sills are framed into the bolsters or the bolsters are substantially
    modified to accommodate the center sills.


CLS 105/229
TXT Bolsters under subclass 226 having tie and compression members separated in
    part from each other.


CLS 105/230
TXT Bolsters under subclass 226 made by casting.


CLS 105/231
TXT Supply vehicles under class definition for carrying fuel, water, and other
    supplies for locomotives.


CLS 105/232
TXT Tenders under subclass 231 having means for aiding the fireman in supplying
    coal to the furnace.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 101+, particularly subclasses 105.5 and 105.6
    for locomotive stokers, per se.

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses for conveyors of
    particular types, including reciprocating and screw type conveyors often
    used for feeding bulk material to furnaces.


CLS 105/233
TXT Coal-feeding tenders under subclass 232 having reciprocating pushers for
    moving coal so as to facilitate the work of the fireman.


CLS 105/234
TXT Coal-feeding tenders under subclass 232 having screw or helical devices for
    moving the coal forward in a tender.


CLS 105/235
TXT Coal-feeding tenders under subclass 232 having a tilting pan which is
    raised at its rear end to cause the fuel thereon to slide forward in the
    vicinity of the fireman.


CLS 105/236
TXT Tenders under subclass 231 having tanks for carrying oil or water on a
    tender.


CLS 105/237
TXT Tender constructions under subclass 231 involving coal-bin arrangements and
    gate control.


CLS 105/238.1
TXT SPECIAL CAR BODIES:

    Railway rolling stock under the class definition comprising car bodies
    designed for special purposes and appurtenances special thereto.


CLS 105/238.2
TXT Toy or model railway car:

    Special car body under subclass 238.1 intended for entertainment or of
    inadequate size to be used for transportation of people, and not intended
    to be used for transportation of produce.

    (1)     Note.  A model car, even though structurally identical to a
    conventional railway car is included in this subclass, since it is not for
    transportation of people or produce.


CLS 105/239
TXT Car-bodies under subclass 238.1 adapted to throw out their load or permit
    it to fall out by gravity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, for dispensing in general, and see the notes thereto.

    298,    Land Vehicles:  Dumping, for land vehicle dumping bodies.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 333-402 for the loading or
    unloading of a wheeled (except subclass 373), load-transporting type
    vehicle (e.g., a railway vehicle) wherein means external to the vehicle is
    involved.


CLS 105/240
TXT Dumping bodies under subclass 239 having motor operated dumping doors.


CLS 105/241.1
TXT Moving car dump:

    Dumping bodies under subclass 239 in which the dumping operation is
    controlled by and concurrent with the movement of the car.


CLS 105/241.2
TXT Actuated by means external to car:

    Dumping bodies under subclass 241.1 comprising means to cooperate with an
    externally located (e.g., trackside) device for carrying out the dumping
    operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 383+ for the combination
    of a load-transporting vehicle and means external thereto cooperating in
    the loading or unloading thereof, and wherein the vehicle is in motion and
    the means reorients the vehicle load body into an attitude whereby the load
    departs by gravity; and subclasses 387+ for an arrangement differing from
    that of subclass 383 only in that, instead of the body being reoriented, a
    body component (e.g., gate) is relocated.


CLS 105/242
TXT Dumping-vehicles under subclass 239 having supporting-trolleys designed to
    travel on an over-head track or cable.


CLS 105/243
TXT Cars under subclass 239 designed to be converted at will from a box or
    gondola car to a hopper-bottom dumping-car.


CLS 105/244
TXT Gondola cars under subclass 239 having drop-doors in its bottom between the
    center sills and side walls.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280+,   for dumping door constructions which may include so much of car
    construction as is necessary to mount the door.

    286+,   for dumping door actuators which may include so much of the car as
    is necessary to mount the actuator.


CLS 105/245
TXT Gondola cars under subclass 244 having a permanent inverted-V ridge placed
    over the center sills to prevent retention of the lading thereon after
    dumping.


CLS 105/246
TXT Gondola cars under subclass 245 in which the self-cleaning ridge rises in
    the act of dumping and falls again when the doors are closed.


CLS 105/247
TXT Lading-receptacles under subclass 239 having an interior form such as to be
    self-clearing by gravity when the bottom-doors are opened.


CLS 105/248
TXT Lading-receptacles under subclass 247 in which the car-bottom has a
    plurality of funnel-shaped outlets longitudinally arranged.


CLS 105/249
TXT Lading-receptacles under subclass 248, in which the downwardly-inclined end
    walls converge toward the car-center, where they form two or more chutes,
    which discharge the lading longitudinally toward each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256,    for inclined bottom side-spout gondolas.


CLS 105/250
TXT Hopper type cars under subclass 247 having drop-bottom doors arranged to
    swing about axes longitudinally of the car or slide transversely of the car.


CLS 105/251
TXT Hopper type cars under subclass 250 in which the hopper-outlet is divided
    centrally and longitudinally by a center sill or door-pivot means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244+,   for gondola drop bottom cars.


CLS 105/252
TXT Hopper type cars under subclass 250 having the longitudinal hopper-doors
    pivoted adjacent the center sill, their outer edges dropping to contact
    with stationary side chutes or aprons for conducting the lading to the side
    of the way.


CLS 105/253
TXT Hopper type cars under subclass 247 having the out-let-doors at the base of
    the hopper swinging about axes running transversely of the car or sliding
    longitudinally of the car.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248,    for multiple hopper constructions.


CLS 105/254
TXT Dumping car bodies under subclass 239 in which the car-bottom has such an
    inclination that upon the release of a side door the entire lading is
    discharged by gravity.


CLS 105/255
TXT Inclined-bottom cars under subclass 254 in which the car-bottom inclines
    downwardly and outwardly both ways from the center to discharge-doors on
    opposite sides of the car.


CLS 105/256
TXT Gondola cars under subclass 254 having portions of the flat floor removed,
    and inclined chutes or spouts extending from the center sill beneath the
    floor-lever to the car-sides, where the spouts are closed with doors below
    the side walls of the gondola.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249,    for multiple hopper cars with facing center chutes.


CLS 105/257
TXT Gondola cars under subclass 254 in which the car-floor or a part thereon is
    moved to an inclined position for the discharge of the load by gravity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246,    for cars having a rising ridge between outlet doors.


CLS 105/258
TXT Gondola cars under subclass 239 having side or end doors to facilitate
    loading and unloading.


CLS 105/259
TXT Gondola cars under subclass 258 designed to be unloaded by a plow operated
    throughout a train length.


CLS 105/260
TXT Gondola cars under subclass 239 having drop-bottom and side-wall doors
    operatively interconnected.


CLS 105/261.1
TXT Tilting body:

    Dumping-cars under subclass 239 including a load-carrying part which is
    unloaded by tilting or inclining the load-carrying part in its entirety.


CLS 105/261.2
TXT End dumping car:

    Dumping car under subclass 261.1 wherefrom unloading is effected by
    movement of the load along the length of the load-carrying part.

    (1)     Note.  The load-carrying part of this subclass may be reoriented
    before dumping to unload beside the supporting rails.


CLS 105/262
TXT Cars under subclass 261.1 having a pair or series of pairs of
    dumping-sections adapted to tilt toward each other and toward the
    car-center and arranged either longitudinally or transversely of the car.


CLS 105/263
TXT Cars under subclass 261.1 having a pair or series of pairs of
    dumping-sections adapted to tilt away from each other toward the car sides
    or ends.


CLS 105/264
TXT Lading-receptacles under subclass 261.1 having a curved bottom or
    trunnion-supports adapted to have rolling contact with ways on the
    supporting-trunk.


CLS 105/265
TXT Lading-receptacles under subclass 264 having a motor for effecting the
    rolling tilt of the receptacle.


CLS 105/266
TXT Lading-receptacles under subclass 264 having a worm-gear control to
    regulate the tilting.


CLS 105/267
TXT Lading-receptacles under subclass 264 having a screw to effect the tilting.


CLS 105/268
TXT Lading-receptacles under subclass 261.1 provided on each side with a
    plurality of projections adapted to slide along camways on the track to
    effect tilting of the receptacle.


CLS 105/269
TXT Lading-receptacles under subclass 261.1 which in dumping slides
    longitudinally until they tip at the ends of the ways on which they slide.


CLS 105/270
TXT Lading-receptacles under subclass 261.1 trunnioned or hung on horizontal
    pivots carried by the truck.


CLS 105/271
TXT Lading-receptacles under subclass 270 having a motor to tilt the receptacle.


CLS 105/272
TXT Lading-receptacles under subclass 270 supported on two parallel pivots
    equil-distant from the center of the receptacle for dumping at will to
    either side of the car, or on a single pivot-line offset from the
    receptacle-center for dumping to one side only.


CLS 105/273
TXT Lading-receptacles under subclass 272 having a power device for tilting the
    receptacle.


CLS 105/274
TXT Lading-receptacles under subclass 272 in which the car-body is adapted to
    tilt one way only.

    (1)     Note.  The pivot is usually off center, so that the body tilts or
    rights itself by gravity on being unlocked.


CLS 105/275
TXT Lading cars under subclass 274 having a turn-table or vertical pivot for
    the lading-receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for locomotive turntables, usually carrying a tool such as a crane
    or excavator.

    455,    for turntable connections between car bodies and trucks.


CLS 105/276
TXT Car-bodies under subclass 261.1 provided with hinged or slidable sides or
    side doors to release the lading upon the tilting of the car-body.


CLS 105/277
TXT Car-bodies under subclass 276 in which the movable sides or side doors have
    a movement of translation away from load-retaining position relative to the
    car-body.


CLS 105/278
TXT Car-bodies under subclass 261.1 having struts and tie members to retain the
    tiltable car-body in load-carrying positions.


CLS 105/279
TXT Car-body constructions under subclass 261.1 involving guides and guard
    walls or plates for directing the placement of the lading during the
    dumping operation.


CLS 105/280
TXT Car-body constructions under subclass 239 involving doors adapted for use
    on dumping-cars only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256,    for side-spout gondolas with doors.

    276+,   for tilting body cars with displaceable sides.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, appropriate subclasses for closures
    of the type provided for.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 130+
    for doors composed of plural panels interconnected for relative movement
    mounted upon the side of a car for holding grain in the car and/or allowing
    grain to be dispensed from the car.


CLS 105/281
TXT Doors under subclass 280 provided with releasable hinges on the opposite
    edges, so that they may swing from either edge at will.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclass 193 for a closure movable
    on alternative axes on opposite ends of the closure.


CLS 105/282.1
TXT Sliding:

    Doors under subclass 280 operable along guideways, which may be comprised
    of straight,circular, cam, or plural inclined ways and extend parallel to
    plane of the door.


CLS 105/282.2
TXT Having resilient sealing gasket:

    Door under subclass 282.1 including a relatively soft member of material
    that will return to its original shape, which soft member is intended to
    interfit with other body opening structure and create a tight fit between
    the door and the opening structure.


CLS 105/282.3
TXT Driven by rack and pinion:

    Door under subclass 282.1 including means to force the door from/to open
    position to/from closed position comprising a bar having gear teeth
    therealong and a relatively small gear for drively interfitting therewith.


CLS 105/283
TXT Doors under subclass 280 having pivots or hinges located laterally away
    from the plane of the door.


CLS 105/284
TXT Doors under subclass 280 in which the links are pivotally connected to the
    doors, so that there is angular motion between each link and its door.


CLS 105/285
TXT Doors under subclass 280 having buffer or stop devices to receive the
    impact of a door.


CLS 105/286
TXT Devices under subclass 239 for operating dumping-car doors.


CLS 105/287
TXT Door actuators and releasers under subclass 286 for determining the order
    of operation of a series of doors.


CLS 105/288
TXT Door actuation under subclass 286 for a plurality of doors having rigid or
    fixed connections therebetween, whereby they may be operated as a unit.


CLS 105/289
TXT Door actuators under subclass 288 connected to a plurality of independent
    doors for simultaneously operating same.


CLS 105/290
TXT Door actuators under subclass 289 in which the doors are connected for
    operation through a pair of connected links.


CLS 105/291
TXT Door actuators under subclass 290 having one or more hooks, so as to hang
    up and lock the doors and links at the end of the door operation.


CLS 105/292
TXT Door actuators under subclass 289 having chain attachments between a
    plurality of doors for operating the same.


CLS 105/293
TXT Door actuators under subclass 286 comprising a bodily-moving shaft parallel
    to the door-hinges and movable against the lower side of the door and
    toward its free edge for closing the door.

    (1)     Note.  The shaft usually travels on fixed guideways on the under
    frame.


CLS 105/294
TXT Door actuators under subclass 293 having a rack and pinion for operating
    the creeping shaft.


CLS 105/295
TXT Door actuators under subclass 293 in which the creeping shaft is operated
    by a chain wrapped one or more turns around the shaft.


CLS 105/296
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 286 in which the door is closed by a crank-arm
    wiping against the underside of the door.


CLS 105/297
TXT Door actuators under subclass 296 in which the crank-shaft itself has a
    traveling or rolling movement along fixed guideways in the underframe.


CLS 105/298
TXT Door actuators under subclass 296 in which the crank arms are U-shaped.


CLS 105/299
TXT Door actuators under subclass 286 having a crank-arm connected through a
    link to the door.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291,    for multiple door actuators comprising hooks and links.


CLS 105/300
TXT Door actuators under subclass 286 comprising means for winding up chains to
    close doors.


CLS 105/301
TXT Chain-winding shafts under subclass 300, which, as the door seats in closed
    position, shift bodily under the edge of the door and act as a lock for the
    door.


CLS 105/302
TXT Chain winders under subclass 300 in which the door seats in closed
    position, a continued operation of the chain-winder produces an increased
    chain tension, which operates the door-lock.


CLS 105/303
TXT Chain winders under subclass 300 in which the chain has a hook adjacent its
    attachment to the door, so when the latter is closed the hook engages a
    locking abutment and holds the door closed.


CLS 105/304
TXT Door actuators under subclass 286 in which the straightening of a pair of
    toggle links or moving a strut or prop to upright position pushes the door
    upward against the car-bottom to closed position.


CLS 105/305
TXT Door actuators under subclass 286 comprising a rack and pinion.


CLS 105/306
TXT Door actuators under subclass 286 comprising a lever and attached links or
    chains located beneath a door and closing the door when raised.


CLS 105/307
TXT Door actuators under subclass 286 comprising a screw or worm device.


CLS 105/308.1
TXT Having door latch:

    Dumping body under subclass 239 having means to physically secure a door in
    a closed position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    364,    for a mine cars which may have  a door latch.


CLS 105/308.2
TXT Toggle:

    Dumping body under subclass 308.2 wherein the securing means includes a
    pair of links pivotally fitting together and adapted to limitedly snap past
    the center line with the ends of the links in latching the door to either
    (1) secure the door directly or (2) secure a door latching pin.


CLS 105/309
TXT Door locks under subclass 308 comprising a shaft which is moved bodily
    under the free edge of the door for locking it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    293+,   for creeping shaft door actuators.

    301,    for chain winding door actuators with  creeping shaft lock.


CLS 105/310
TXT Door locks under subclass 308.1 in which the device which opens or closes
    the door also operates the door-lock.


CLS 105/310.1
TXT Bolt pivoted about axis parallel to door plane:

    Dumping body under subclass 308.1 wherein the means to physically secure a
    door comprises a member attached to the door or to body structure and
    adapted to turn about a line that extends in a direction that is parallel
    with the surface of the door in order to block relative movement of the
    door and body structure.


CLS 105/310.2
TXT Sliding bolt:

    Dumping body under subclass 308.1 wherein the means to physically secure a
    door comprises a member attached to the door or to a door structure and
    adapted to move along its length in order to block relative movement of the
    door and body structure.


CLS 105/311.1
TXT Control:

    Dumping cars under subclass 239 including (1) means utilizing energy of an
    external source, e.g., momentum of the car, to effect dumping; (2) means to
    limit the degree of opening of a door, e.g., a chain; or (3) means to drive
    car body closure from one position to another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286+,   for a dumping car with a door actuator.


CLS 105/311.2
TXT Lost motion:

    Dumping car under subclass 311.1 wherein including means to open the
    closure thereof having play in the drive train thereof, so that opening
    movement of the door does not necessarily effect corresponding movement of
    the drive train element.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is a device providing safety for
    the person operating the door in dumping.  Once the door is moved, the
    weight freight therein could, without the lost-motion clutch, over power
    the person.


CLS 105/312
TXT Dump door controls under subclass 311.1 comprising ratchet-handle devices.


CLS 105/313
TXT Dump car controls under subclass 311.1 comprising locking devices for
    shafts used in door control.


CLS 105/314
TXT Car-bodies under subclass 238.1 adapted to provide sleeping accommodations
    for passengers.


CLS 105/315
TXT Interior arrangement of cars under subclass 314 involving compartments,
    seats, berths, closets, and storage-places to adapt a car for day and night
    travel.


CLS 105/316
TXT Sleeping-car constructions under subclass 314 comprising berth fixtures
    involving some modifications of the car interior.


CLS 105/317
TXT Berths under subclass 316 movable bodily and vertically as unitary beds
    from the car-top downwardly or upwardly from the floor.


CLS 105/318
TXT Berths under subclass 317 having means for effecting the berth movement.


CLS 105/319
TXT Berths under subclass 316 having frames in small sections adapted to be
    folded or collapsed against the car-wall; also collapsible pneumatic berths.


CLS 105/320
TXT Berths under subclass 316 formed of tensioned fabrics, somewhat like a
    hammock.


CLS 105/321
TXT Berths under subclass 316 hinged to the car-wall and adapted to be folded
    upwardly when not in use.


CLS 105/322
TXT Berths under subclass 316 in which seat-backs are moved upwardly and into
    horizontal positions to form upper berths.


CLS 105/323
TXT Sleeping car constructions under subclass 314 comprising movable partitions
    for night use in sleeping-cars.


CLS 105/324
TXT Sleeping car constructions under subclass 314 comprising curtain and rod
    fixtures for use around berths.


CLS 105/325
TXT Sleeping car constructions under subclass 314 comprising devices for
    holding clothing and other things at night.


CLS 105/326
TXT Sleeping car apparatus under subclass 314 comprising steps and ladders to
    facilitate entrance to upper berths.


CLS 105/327
TXT Cars under subclass 238.1 provided with kitchen and dining facilities.


CLS 105/328
TXT Cars under subclass 238.1 designed for the use of traveling salesmen or for
    the display of merchandise or other articles.


CLS 105/329.1
TXT Passenger:

    Special car body under subclass 238.1 particularly adapted to the
    transportation of people.


CLS 105/330
TXT Passenger-cars under subclass 329.1, in which the body is in the form of a
    ball or cylinder, which is adapted to be rolled along the track.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    356,    for similar cars for freight.


CLS 105/331
TXT Passenger cars under subclass 329.1 having a portion of the passenger-space
    open at the sides and another portion closed in at the sides.


CLS 105/332
TXT Passenger cars under subclass 329.1 adapted to be used as an open-sided
    summer-car or to be converted into a closed-sided winter-car at will.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, appropriate
    subclasses for closures made of flexible material, or made of plural
    strips, slats or panels interconnected for relative motion, including such
    structures claimed in combination with other types of closures or other
    types of flexible and portable panels, where the features of car structure
    claimed are only those necessary for the mounting and operating of the
    closure.


CLS 105/333
TXT Convertible passenger cars under subclass 332 in which vertically-sliding
    panels between the side posts of the car may be adjusted to make the car an
    open or closed car.


CLS 105/334
TXT Cars under subclass 333, in which the vertically-sliding panels may be
    pushed under the roof if desired.


CLS 105/335
TXT Cars under subclass 333 in which the sliding panels may be dropped low in
    the side wall or under the floor when desired.


CLS 105/336
TXT Cars under subclass 332 in which the seats aligned along the car side have
    the seat-backs forming an exterior panel of the car side which is pocketed
    to receive an upper sliding panel.


CLS 105/337
TXT Cars under subclass 332 in which the side walls of the car made in one or
    two sections, may be removed.


CLS 105/338
TXT Cars under subclass 332 having individual panels between the side posts
    which may be removed.


CLS 105/339
TXT Cars under subclass 332 in which the side panels of the car are made up of
    alternating fixed panels and sliding panels or doors.


CLS 105/340
TXT Passenger cars under subclass 329.1 provided with upper and lower decks or
    floors for passenger accommodation.


CLS 105/341
TXT Passenger car arrangements under subclass 329 comprising steps, doors,
    conductor's and motormen's stations, and partition-bars to facilitate the
    collection of fares and to systematize the entrance and exit of passengers
    to and from the cars.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclass 24 for a plurality of
    closures controlled individually and jointly through a master control and
    subclass 49 for a closure combined with means to direct or control traffic
    when no defined train control or car structure or arrangement is included.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclasses for
    expansible chamber motors for operating gates or doors.

    303,    Fluid-Pressure and Analogous Brake Systems, for fluid pressure
    brakes combined with door operating motors.


CLS 105/341.5
TXT Arrangements under subclass 341 of the turnstile type to facilitate the
    collection of fares and to systematize the entrance and exit of passengers
    to and from cars.


CLS 105/342
TXT Passenger cars under subclass 329.1 having special arrangements for
    motorman's cab or compartment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    341,    for entrance and exit control combined with motorman's station.


CLS 105/343
TXT Passenger car constructions under subclass 329.1 involving door location
    and arrangement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    341,    for passenger entrance and exit control.


CLS 105/344
TXT Passenger car constructions under subclass 329 involving the relative
    arrangement of seats, standing-room, handholds, doors, and trainmen's space
    whereby the interior passenger capacity of a car may be utilized in a
    desired way.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    340,    for double deck cars.

    341,    for entrance and exit control.


CLS 105/345
TXT Passenger car constructions under subclass 344 comprising seats built into
    and forming part of a car structure.


CLS 105/346
TXT Seats under subclass 345 for summer-cars placed transversely and framed
    against the side posts.


CLS 105/347
TXT Seat construction under subclass 346 comprising seat and panels fastened to
    the side posts.


CLS 105/348
TXT Passenger car constructions under subclass 329 comprising closed openings
    through the floor, roof, or walls of a car, adapted to be opened only in
    case of emergency for escape of passengers.


CLS 105/349
TXT Emergency exits under subclass 348 in which the closures for the openings
    are automatically actuated, as by the overturning of a car, for example.


CLS 105/350
TXT Passenger car constructions under subclass 329 comprising devices tending
    to lessen the dust contents of the air in the vicinity of car doors or
    windows.


CLS 105/351
TXT Dust guards under subclass 350 tending to limit the distribution of dust
    from the road-bed by the action of the car wheels and trucks.


CLS 105/352
TXT Dust guards under subclass 351 having dust-collecting troughs in the
    vicinity of the trucks.


CLS 105/353
TXT Passenger car constructions under subclass 329.1 involving glass fronts and
    protective closures for motormen on electric cars.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, for storm fronts
    in the form of flexible and portable panels, including their mounting
    and/or operating means and combinations with rigid closures (including
    wind-shields).  Such combinations claimed in combination with other vehicle
    structure (as wind-shield wipers, glare shields, etc.) or when the relation
    to the vehicle is claimed, are in this class (105).

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 77.1+ for storm fronts
    for land vehicles.


CLS 105/354
TXT Passenger car constructions under subclass 329.1 involving depending straps
    and handholds for safety of standing passengers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 318 for car hand straps
    carrying advertising indicia thereon.


CLS 105/355
TXT Cars under subclass 238.1 designed for the carrying of freight.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    410,    Freight Accommodation on Freight Carrier, for a freight carrier of
    any category, including railway, provided with means particularly for
    inhibiting the undesirable effects of untoward occurrences on the lading
    while on board; see, for example:  Subclasses 2+ for means on the freight
    carrier engageable with a particular article; i.e., of such shape as to
    present a vulnerability which is overcome by the way said means
    accommodates the article; subclasses 52+ wherein the freight carrier
    accommodating means contacts a stowed load bearer such as a semitrailer
    (56+) or other wheeled (66+) or wheelless containers; for example,
    subclasses 77+ wherein containers are positively retained on the freight
    carrier; subclasses 96+ wherein indiscriminate load units are lashed on
    board a freight carrier; and subclasses 121+ wherein the load unit is
    accommodated by load bracing means.


CLS 105/356
TXT Freight-carrying receptacles under subclass 355 in the form of drums or
    cylinders, which are adapted to be rolled along the track.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    330,    for similar cars for passengers.


CLS 105/357
TXT Freight-cars under subclass 355 with double walls, from between which the
    air may be exhausted to stabilize the interior temperature of the car.


CLS 105/358
TXT Freight-cars under subclass 355 designed to carry fluid material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    410,    Freight Accommodation on Freight Carrier, subclass 68 for a freight
    carrier of any category including railway provided with accommodating means
    for rigid wall fluid-filled containers; i.e., means in contact with the
    container(s) to inhibit untoward movement thereof while on board.


CLS 105/359
TXT Cars under subclass 358 having fluid-carrying tanks and also adapted to
    carry ordinary freight.


CLS 105/360
TXT Tank cars under subclass 358 involving variations in tank form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    410,    Freight Accommodation on Freight Carrier, subclass 68 for a freight
    carrier which accommodates a plurality of removable containers for bulk
    material.


CLS 105/361
TXT Tank cars under subclass 358 with provision for longitudinal movement of
    the tank relative to the supporting-cradles or underframes.


CLS 105/362
TXT Tank car constructions under subclass 358 including tank-supporting
    saddles, bolsters, and anchoring devices for holding the tank in place.


CLS 105/363
TXT Freight car-bodies under subclass 355 designed to be folded down upon their
    under-frames or to be separated into sections, as for marine shipment.


CLS 105/364
TXT Cars under subclass 355, of low narrow gauge for use in mines.

    (1)     Note.  The wheel-axles are attached directly to the car-bottom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    275,    for horizontally rotary tilting dumping cars.


CLS 105/365
TXT Freight-cars under subclass 355 designed for use in cylindrical passage,
    such as tunnels, kilns, and treatment-tanks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 138.1 for tubular railways.


CLS 105/370
TXT Box cars under subclass 355 which are convertible into a multiple floor or
    deck car at will.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    410,    Freight Accommodation on Freight Carrier, subclasses 26+ for a
    multideck freight car for transporting wheeled vehicles.


CLS 105/371
TXT Convertible box cars under subclass 370 in which the supplemental floor or
    deck is made in sections.


CLS 105/372
TXT Convertible box cars under subclass 371 in which the deck or floor sections
    are hinged to the car walls.


CLS 105/373
TXT Freight cars under subclass 355 provided with vertical tiers of slides or
    crates designed as car-fixtures for shipping fruit or fragile articles.


CLS 105/374
TXT Freight cars under subclass 355 having buffers inside the car for taking up
    the shock in case the lading shifts longitudinally.


CLS 105/375
TXT Freight cars under subclass 355 having independent auxiliary floors adapted
    to rest upon the main car floor, as in case of refrigerator cars.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 660+ for fabric or
    lattice openwork of more general application including slatted floor
    covering and gratings.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, appropriate subclasses under
    subclass 17, for walkway and floor-like structure.


CLS 105/377.01
TXT Movable cover:

    Subject matter under subclass 355 wherein the uppermost space bounded by
    the top of sidewalls of the car is covered by a movable member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 100+ for a top of the
    freight load vehicle.


CLS 105/377.02
TXT Flexible material (e.g., tarp):

    Subject matter under subclass 377.01 wherein the movable member is made of
    thin bendable material (e.g., tarp, plastic).


CLS 105/377.03
TXT Mounted on removable frame:

    Subject matter under subclass 377.02 comprising a support structure
    removably mounted on the car wherein the cover is mounted on the support
    structure.


CLS 105/377.04
TXT Having multiple folding sections:

    Subject matter under subclass 377.01 wherein the member consists of a
    plurality of segments connected by a structure which permits the segments
    to be doubled upon themselves.


CLS 105/377.05
TXT Hinged to car body:

    Subject matter under subclass 377.01 wherein the member is attached to the
    car by a jointed or flexible device which permits a turning or pivoting of
    the movable member.


CLS 105/377.06
TXT With actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 377.05 including a mechanism for causing the
    turning or pivoting of the movable member.

    (1)     Note.  The mechanism includes a hydraulic, pneumatic, or spring
    device.


CLS 105/377.07
TXT Hatch:

    Subject matter under subclass 377.05 wherein the member includes a
    substantially smaller opening located therein.


CLS 105/377.08
TXT With seal:

    Subject matter under subclass 377.01 comprising a means for preventing the
    passage of foreign matter wherein the member is supported by an underlying
    surface of the car and the means is located between the member and the
    surface for preventing the passage of the foreign matter therethrough.


CLS 105/377.09
TXT Sliding:

    Subject matter under subclass 377.01 wherein the member is moved by sliding
    it on a supporting structure.


CLS 105/377.1
TXT Substantial sidewall portion:

    Subject matter under subclass 377.01 wherein the member forms a substantial
    part of a perimeter wall of the car.


CLS 105/377.11
TXT Locking device:

    Subject matter under subclass 377.01 wherein the member includes a securing
    means for preventing an unauthorized access to the inside of the car.


    (1)     Note.  Mere fastener means such as hooks or clamps or bolts
    attached to the member or to the body of the car do not constitute a
    locking device for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    308.1+, for door latch for car bodies adapted to unload by dumping.


CLS 105/378
TXT Freight cars under subclass 355 having openings in the car walls and
    closures therefor.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include freight-car doors with or
    without their operating or mounting means.Dumping doors are in this class,
    subclasses 280+, and dumping operators are in this class, subclasses 286+.
    Other car closures will be found in Class 49, Movable or Removable
    Closures, appropriate subclasses and in Class 160, Flexible or Portable
    Closure, Partition, or Panel.

    (2)     Note.  Closures on plural walls which are not interconnected for
    concurrent movement or do not close a continuous opening will be found in
    this Class 105.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258+,   for side door gondolas.

    280+,   for dumping doors.

    286+,   for dumping door operators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, (see (1) and (2) Notes).

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, (see (1) Note).


CLS 105/379
TXT Freight cars under subclass 355 having auxiliary side boards or walls for
    increasing the wall height of open-top cars.


CLS 105/380
TXT Freight cars under subclass 355 having stakes for holding logs or other
    lading on logging or flat cars and for holding up the walls of gondola cars.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 143+ for land vehicle bolsters and
    standards.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclass 43 for stakes and sockets
    for land vehicles.


CLS 105/381
TXT Stake type freight cars under subclass 380 in which the stakes have a
    folding movement in the vertical plane of the car sides.


CLS 105/382
TXT Stake type freight cars under subclass 380 in which the stakes on being
    unlocked may fall outwardly and release the lading.


CLS 105/383
TXT Releasable stake cars under subclass 382 in which a closure on a wall of
    the stake-pocket is released to permit the stake to fly out under
    load-pressure.


CLS 105/384
TXT Releasable stake cars under subclass 382 in which a pawl, hook, or
    locking-lug directly engages the stake or a lug thereon to hold the stake
    upright.


CLS 105/385
TXT Releasable stake cars under subclass 382 in which the stake slides
    outwardly on horizontal guides as a preliminary movement to falling to
    load-release position.


CLS 105/386
TXT Releasable stake cars under subclass 382 in which the stake move to
    load-releasing position by a vertical sliding movement.


CLS 105/387
TXT Releasable stake cars under subclass 382 in which the stake is usually in
    the form of an articulated inverted V, which is adapted to collapse or
    flatten out when unlocked.


CLS 105/388
TXT Releasable stake cars under subclass 382 in which the stake is held upright
    by a chain under tension, upon release of which the stake falls.


CLS 105/389
TXT Stake type cars under subclass 380 in which the stake is made up of a
    plurality of telescopic or sliding sections.


CLS 105/390
TXT Stake type cars under subclass 380 having sockets or pockets adapted to
    hold car-stakes.


CLS 105/391
TXT Stake pockets under subclass 390 adapted to collapse or fold out of the way
    when not in use.


CLS 105/392
TXT Freight cars under subclass 355 having anti- friction rolls in car doorways
    or on the car floor to facilitate freight-handling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the notes thereunder.


CLS 105/392.5
TXT Car-bodies under subclass 238.1 modified to take up the shock of collisions
    or severe bumps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    213,    Railway Draft Appliances, subclasses 220+ for car-buffers, per se.


CLS 105/393
TXT Cars under subclass 238.1 adapted to be extended laterally or
    longitudinally to increase their floor space, or foldable house cars.


CLS 105/394
TXT Express cars under subclass 238.1, usually metallic, designed to be
    bullet-proof and provided with defensive means, and protective devices for
    guarding against train robbery.


CLS 105/395
TXT Cars under subclass 238.1 having door locks under control of the air-brake
    system or the engineer or by the train or car movement.

    (1)     Note.  The objects are to prevent passengers opening car doors
    while the car is moving and to prevent robbery from freight cars.


CLS 105/396
TXT Car constructions under class definition involving frame and structure
    designed as a load sustainer and carrier and a unit subjected to train
    shocks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 41+ and 45+ for a
    car roof construction.


CLS 105/397
TXT Car constructions under subclass 396 includes passenger car structure not
    otherwise classified.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 781+ for land vehicle frames.


CLS 105/398
TXT Passenger cars under subclass 397 having depressed under-frames to provide
    low side entrances.


CLS 105/399
TXT Passenger car frames under subclass 397 in which a series of struts and
    ties are used in the side walls.


CLS 105/400
TXT Passenger cars under subclass 397 in which a pair of side posts and a
    carline of a car are replaced by a unitary inverted U-shaped member arched
    over the under frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334,    for the roof-storage type of convertible open and closed passenger
    car.


CLS 105/401
TXT Passenger cars under subclass 397 having metal sheathing or plates in their
    frames.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    409+,   for metal sheathing for freight cars.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses for
    various constructions of more general application which have exterior
    sheathing particularly subclasses 330+, 459+, 474+, and 518+.


CLS 105/402
TXT Passenger car constructions under subclass 397 involving end structure.


CLS 105/403
TXT Passenger car ends under subclass 402 having cast metallic framing members.


CLS 105/404
TXT Freight car structure under subclass 396 not otherwise classified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    478+,   for lading tiedown anchor structure formed from or affixed (e.g.,
    welded) to a structural member of a car.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 781+ for land vehicle frames.


CLS 105/405
TXT Freight cars under subclass 404 in which concrete or cement structure is
    used in whole or in part.


CLS 105/406.1
TXT Gondola:

    Freight car framing and structure under subclass 404 of particular utility
    to a open to p railway car having a floor, two vertical side walls and two
    vertical end walls.


CLS 105/406.2
TXT Drop end door:

    Freight car framing and structure under subclass 406.1 including provision
    for replacably opening one of the end walls by movement thereof about an
    axis parallel to and located near the floor.


CLS 105/407
TXT Freight-car frames under subclass 404 in which tie and strut elements are
    used in the car walls.


CLS 105/408
TXT Freight car constructions under subclass 404 involving castings and
    abutment plates to receive the ends of car posts.


CLS 105/409
TXT Freight car constructions under subclass 404 involving metal-plate side
    walls.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401,    for metal sheathing for passenger cars.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses for
    various constructions of more general application which have exterior
    sheathing, particularly subclasses 459+, 474+, 518+, and 761+.


CLS 105/410
TXT Freight car sheathing under subclass 409 comprising sheet-metal ends for
    cars.


CLS 105/411
TXT Freight cars under subclass 404 having special braces.


CLS 105/412
TXT Freight cars under subclass 404 having means for taking up the shrinkage in
    wooden side walls.


CLS 105/413
TXT Car structures under subclass 396 involving under or floor frames for all
    types of cars.


CLS 105/414
TXT Under or floor frames under subclass 413 which are metallic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    358+,   for tank-type freight cars.


CLS 105/415
TXT Under or floor frames under subclass 414 made by casting.


CLS 105/416
TXT Underframes under subclass 414 in which the center sill is made from a
    single beam, which may be integral or two contacting beams riveted together.


CLS 105/417
TXT Underframes under subclass 414 in which the center sills are spaced more
    widely apart than in an ordinary double-center construction, as for
    accommodation of hopper-car body, for example.


CLS 105/418
TXT Underframe constructions under subclass 414 involving longitudinal side or
    center sills only.


CLS 105/419
TXT Underframe construction under subclass 414 involving only cross members in
    the under-frame intermediate the ends thereof.


CLS 105/420
TXT Under frame constructions under subclass 396 involving connections of the
    draft-sills to the end sills, bolsters, or center sills.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    213,    Railway Draft Appliances, for drawbar connections to the
    draft-sills, particularly subclass 57.


CLS 105/421
TXT Underframe constructions under subclass 396 involving structure and
    connections of end sills only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173,    for locomotive frame buffer beams.

    402+,   for cast ends for passenger cars.


CLS 105/422
TXT Car constructions under class definition involving floors for all types of
    cars.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    375,    for auxiliary floors for freight cars.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, appropriate subclasses under
    subclass 17 for walkway and floor-like structure.


CLS 105/423
TXT Car constructions under class definition comprising fabric, metallic, and
    other linings for car interiors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet: see especially subclasses 175+, 190, 193, and 196+ for such a
    product embodying a fabric or textile, and subclasses 457+ for a composite
    web or sheet including metal as one of the layers.

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 181+ and 304+ for a woven or knit fabric.


CLS 105/424
TXT Freight cars under class definition having special joint-fixtures to
    prevent leakage of granular material.


CLS 105/425
TXT End platform structure under class definition for all railway rolling-stock.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    341,    for passenger car entrance and exit controls.

    342,    for motorman's compartment.


CLS 105/426
TXT Platforms under subclass 425 having horizontal trap doors or closures over
    car steps.


CLS 105/427
TXT Platform constructions under subclass 426 having trap doors, vertical gates
    or doors, and movable steps all operatively connected together.


CLS 105/428
TXT Trap doors under subclass 426 cut across diagonally and hinged together
    along the cut, so as to be foldable.


CLS 105/429
TXT Trap doors under subclass 426 operatively connected with a gate or door
    closing the entry to the platform.


CLS 105/430
TXT Trap doors under subclass 426 operatively connected with the shiftable
    steps located beneath the trap door.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    427,    for trap doors, vertical gates or doors and movable steps all
    operatively connected together.


CLS 105/431
TXT Trap doors under subclass 430 which may be converted into a series of
    steps, and vice versa.


CLS 105/432
TXT Trap doors under subclass 426 having operating means.


CLS 105/433
TXT Actuators for trap doors, under subclass 432 which are slid laterally to
    project from the car side to register with a station platform.


CLS 105/434
TXT Actuators for trap doors under subclass 432, comprising spring devices for
    throwing up or aiding in throwing up the doors.


CLS 105/435
TXT Trap doors under subclass 426 having locks for holding them down and
    starters for initiating the opening movement of the trap after it is
    unlocked.


CLS 105/436
TXT Platforms under subclass 425 having means for laterally bridging the space
    between a car platform or car floor and an adjacent track-platform.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes door operated gangways, and also
    those constructions where the door itself constitutes a gangway in one
    position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    393,    for car bodies in which parts can be shifted to expand or contract
    the floor space.

    433,    for laterally shiftable trap doors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    14,     Bridges, subclasses 70+ for gangways of general application.


CLS 105/437
TXT Car construction under class definition in which the movement of a car door
    or gate is interconnected for operation with the car-steps.


CLS 105/438
TXT The car-step and gate construction under subclass 437 involves the
    conversion of the steps into a door or gate to bar the way to a car
    platform.


CLS 105/439
TXT Car constructions under class definition involving side barriers on open
    street cars or in other similar relation to railway rolling-stock.


CLS 105/440
TXT Side barriers under subclass 439 each of which controls single or
    individual passageways, as on an open street car.


CLS 105/441
TXT Side barrier constructions under subclass 440 in which the reversal of the
    seat-backs of an open street car controls the side guards on both sides of
    the car.


CLS 105/442
TXT Side barriers under subclass 439 in which the bars drop from the top of the
    car or are raised from the bottom to form side barriers at the ends of the
    seats in an open-type street car.


CLS 105/443
TXT Steps under class definition adapted for use only on railway rolling-stock.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 177+ for wear or
    friction increasing traffic carrying surface, and subclasses 182+ for
    miscellaneous stepped surfaces.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 93+ for a wall
    attached ladder.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 163 for steps for land vehicles.


CLS 105/444
TXT Steps under subclass 443 which are shiftable and are either electrically
    controlled or control an electric circuit.


CLS 105/445
TXT Steps under subclass 443 which are shifted by a pneumatic motor.


CLS 105/446
TXT Car steps under subclass 443 which are thrown into inoperative position by
    the movement of the car.


CLS 105/447
TXT Steps under subclass 443 pivoted so as to be folded or swung to inoperative
    position.


CLS 105/448
TXT Steps under subclass 447 in which step-riser or link connection is pivoted
    to the adjacent step-treads, so that they may be folded together.


CLS 105/449
TXT Steps under subclass 443 which are slid into operative position.


CLS 105/450
TXT Cover-guards for steps under subclass 443 to prevent the use of the steps.


CLS 105/451
TXT Railway car heating devices under class definition for loosening ore or
    coal, so that it can be readily unloaded, and other special purposes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    237,    Heating Systems, for car heating.


CLS 105/452
TXT Devices under class definition, for elimination of noise on railway
    rolling-stock.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclass 207 for sound deadening devices on mechanical
    vibrating structure.

    295,    Railway Wheels and Axles, subclass 7 for sound-deadeners on wheels.


CLS 105/453
TXT Car-body suspension devices and spring-supports under class definition
    located in whole or in part above the underframe.


CLS 105/454
TXT Car bodies under class definition which have a longitudinal slidable
    movement relatively to the truck.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    361,    for longitudinally slidable tank car bodies.


CLS 105/455
TXT The car body under class definition has a turn-table or vertical pivotal
    connection with the truck.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for locomotives with turn-table connections.

    275,    for tilting body dump cars with turn-table connections.


CLS 105/456
TXT Railway rolling stock under class definition having trainmen's compartments
    on locomotives and on top of freight-cars.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for power tool and other locomotive constructions with operator's
    station on turn-table.

    342,    for such compartments built into motor passenger-cars.


CLS 105/457
TXT Railway rolling stock under class definition having trainmen's
    running-boards and hand-rails on the tops or sides of cars.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    341,    for passenger entrance and exit arrangements.


CLS 105/458
TXT Railway rolling stock under class definition having bridging devices
    between adjacent coupled cars to permit safe passage there-between or to
    catch a trainmen falling from the top and between the cars.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    436,    for side gangway devices.


CLS 105/459
TXT Bridging devices under subclass 458 located where the fireman usually
    stands, which in case of uncoupling of the tender may prevent the falling
    of the fireman.


CLS 105/460
TXT Railway rolling stock constructions under class definition comprising low
    transverse footboards on the ends of switch-engines and freight-cars for
    the use of trainmen.


CLS 105/461
TXT Railway rolling-stock under class definition having bar handholds.


CLS 105/462
TXT Railway-rolling-stock under class definition having abutment fixtures
    adapted for temporary engagement with side-track push-rods, ropes, chains,
    or lifting jacks.


CLS 105/463.1
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Railway rolling stock under the class definition, not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  An accessory for railway rolling stock not provided for in a
    preceding subclass or in another class may be found in this subclass.


CLS 106/
TTL COMPOSITIONS:  COATING OR PLASTIC

CLS 106/
TXT This class is the broad generic class for:

    I.      Coating, impregnating or plastic compositions, especially those
    which set or harden to retain a given shape.  Most of the compositions
    herein found are those which are capable of undergoing a change from a
    fluent to a nonfluent condition, or from a solid noncoherent form to a
    solid coherent form, which changes may be effected in any or more of the
    followings ways:

    (a)     By setting, e.g., concrete:

    (b)     By chemical reaction or conversion, e.g., viscose;

    (c)     By removal of solvents or vehicles, e.g., lacquers;

    (d)     By solidification from a molten state, e.g., asphalt or sulfur.

    This class takes all such compositions unless more specifically provided
    for in other main classes, for which see the notes below under the heading
    "Coating or Plastic Compositions Elsewhere Classified".

    The term "coating" is used throughout the definitions and notes of this
    class to include "impregnating".

    II.     Materials or ingredients, not in themselves coating, impregnating
    or plastic compositions which are for use in such compositions and for
    which there is no provision elsewhere.  Fillers or pigments for use in
    rubber, synthetic resins or paper are also included in this class.

    III.    The line followed between sections I and II is, that patents
    broadly claiming coating or plastic compositions, wherein the only
    ingredients named do not by themselves form coating or plastic
    compositions, are classified in the appropriate subclasses under the
    heading "Materials or Ingredients", unless the coating or plastic
    composition has a characteristic or property specifically provided for
    above.  Thus "a paint comprising a specific pigment" is classified on the
    basis of the pigment because paints as such are not provided for; however,
    "an ink comprising a specific pigment" would be placed under "Inks" since
    inks are provided for as such.

    IV.     This class takes processes for preparing or making the
    compositions, materials, or ingredients classified herein, which processes
    are classified with the corresponding composition, material or ingredient.
    It does not, however, include processes which are clearly distinct from the
    composition, material or ingredient, and which are more specifically
    provided for elsewhere.  See the appropriate notes below for the lines with
    the pertinent process classes.

    V.      This class does not include patents which are limited to apparatus
    only, for which see the appropriate apparatus classes.  Patents containing
    a claim to a composition and/or process of preparing same within this class
    and a claim to apparatus employed in the preparation of the composition are
    classified on the basis of the composition or process and cross-referenced
    to the appropriate apparatus class.

    NOTES



    It is the present office policy to classify article patents wherein the
    claims mention the article by name only and define the same only in terms
    of the composition or material of which it is composed, in the appropriate
    composition or material class.  The collection of these patents and
    reclassification thereof into the composition or material classes is under
    way, and as a corollary thereto patents claiming a composition or material
    for an art use heretofore classified in the art classes are also being
    transferred to the appropriate composition or material class. The
    subsequent notes indicate the extent of this work as of June 1953 and as
    the remaining use classes are inspected, the article and use patents will
    be transferred into the appropriate composition or material class.

    (1)     Note.  Articles Defined by Composition.

    A.      The line in general between this class and the article classes is
    as follows:  Where there are claims to the composition and claims to
    articles made therefrom, mentioned by name only with no inclusion of
    structure and defined only in terms of the composition, such patents are
    classified as originals in the appropriate composition subclasses of this
    class (106).  Patents wherein all the claims are limited to a named
    article, mentioned by name only with no inclusion of structure and defined
    only in terms of the composition, are also classified as originals in this
    class except as noted in "B" below.  Where there is claimed significant
    structure of the article, the patent is classified in the appropriate class
    providing for the same whether or not there is also present a claim to the
    composition (see Note C, below).

    B.      See the following classes for named articles defined only by
    compositions. Some of the article classes also provide for the composition,
    per se, when specialized for the article classified therein and these
    classes are indicated in the succeeding references to the article class and
    in the notes under the caption "Coating or Plastic Compositions Elsewhere
    Classified".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclasses 127+ for stencils, subclasses 453+ for
    lithographic printing plates, and subclass 473 for copying elements, per se.

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 359 for tobacco products and compositions,
    subclasses 219, 220 and 230 for smoking devices and compositions therefor
    and subclasses 331+ for composition of smoke separators or treaters, per
    se, disclosed for use with a tobacco user's appliance or article.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, for for tubular conduits when there is
    no claim to the composition, per se.

    181,    Acoustics, subclass 294 for materials characterized by the
    particular sound absorbing material used to form the product.

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 291+ for
    electrode compositions and subclasses 295+ for diaphragm compositions
    limited to use in electrolytic apparatus.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, appropriate subclasses for compositions
    directed to use in electrolytic processes (e.g., electrolytic plating bath
    compositions are found in subclasses 80+, etc.).

    210,    Liquid Purification of Separation, subclasses 500.1+ for filters
    for use in liquid purification and compositions therefor.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 62.51+ of Class 252 provides for magnets
    defined only by their composition and for compositions specialized and
    designed for use as magnetic materials.  Subclasses 181.1+ and the classes
    specified in the Notes thereto, provide for compositions and materials for
    use as getters (e.g., a material designed to eliminate unwanted gases from
    a sealed envelope) and for materials designed to generate a gas or vapor
    within the envelope of an electric lamp or electronic tube.  Subclasses
    625+ provides for radio active materials.  Subclasses 301.16 - 301.6
    provide for luminescent materials.  Subclass 478 provides for materials
    specialized for use as shields against X-ray and other similar radiations.
    Subclass 500 provides for compositions specialized for use as electrical
    conductors and emitters and such devices defined solely by their
    composition.  Such compositions and devices include electron emissive
    compositions, electrodes, filaments, and shields for electric lamp and
    electric space discharge devices, resistances, brushes, contacts, switches
    and welding electrodes. Subclasses 570+ provide for a normally fluent
    dielectric composition.  Solid dielectric compositions, including a mass of
    fluent solids are classified herein, when appropriate, or in the 520
    Classes, Synthetic Resins, except in the case of a web or sheet impregnated
    with a defined fluent dielectric, which is classified in Class 252,
    subclass 567.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 280+ for linings specially
    designed for use in metallurgical furnaces.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 400
    for a composition of this class having a permanent electric charge, that
    is, an electret.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 271+ for
    condensers including a dielectric composition, even though the dielectric
    composition is claimed, per se.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, appropriate subclasses for molds
    claimed solely in terms of the metal or alloy of which they are composed.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process, subclasses 247+ for battery separator which may be mentioned by
    name only.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, appropriate subclasses for radiation sensitive and post imagery
    compositions.

    492,    Roll or Roller, subclasses 53+ and 57+ for the disclosure of
    specific compositions of a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for.

    501,    Composition:  Ceramic, for articles defined solely by composition,
    which composition is a ceramic material.

    508,    Solid Antifriction Devices, Materials Therefor, Lubricant or
    Separant Compositions for Moving Solid Surfaces, and Miscellaneous Mineral
    oil Compositions, for lubricant packs and compositions therefor,
    particularly subclasses 100+ for bearings or guides mentioned by name only
    and defined solely by the composition of which they are composed.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Class 523, subclasses 130+ for a composition having utility in
    consolidating a formation in a well or in cementing a well or to processes
    of preparing said composition and Class 524, subclasses 2+ for a water
    settable inorganic composition containing a synthetic resin or natural
    rubber.



    C.      See the following classes for named articles wherein there is
    claimed significant structure of the article whether or not there are
    claims to the composition of which the article is composed:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 345 and 350 for cutting elements.

    55,     Gas Separation, for filtering media.

    101,    Printing, subclasses 368 and 398 for printing members or type.

    132,    Toilet, subclass 93 for toothpicks.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits.

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 250+ for brake elements.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 107 for clutches.

    200,    Electricity: Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 166 for
    electrical contacts.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 524.1 for containers with
    specified material therein, particularly subclass 524.5 for a container
    with caustic material content.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 500.1+ for filters
    for use in liquid purification.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 200+ for closures.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclass 3 for linings claimed in combination
    with wood receptacles.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 145.1+ and 146.1+ for welding
    electrodes for arc or for gas welding.

    238,    Railways:  Surface Track, subclasses 84+ for railway ties, and
    subclass 150 for rails.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 291+ for
    comminuting elements.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 615+ and 157.1+ for
    guides for directing indefinite length, running material.

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 134+ for a static mold comprising
    significant structure and composition thereof.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 219+ for processes within the class definition, including the
    step of making the mold (including mold making, per se), and subclasses
    337+ pertaining to the use of particular mold materials.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclass 280 for linings especially
    designed for use in metallurgical furnaces.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 252+ for
    electrical brushes.

    337,    Electricity: Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclasses 109, 137, 180, 329, 373, 399, and 413 for electrical contacts
    for use in electrothermal and thermal switches.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 244, 245, 248, 250, 257, 262+,
    269, and 275 for electrical resistors with a coated casing or a casing
    formed on and hardened on the resistors, and subclasses 308+ for resistors
    whose element is coated on a base.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    885+ for optical ab sorption filters.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 131+
    for magnetic records.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 271+
    condensers.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 272+ for sound
    records with detail of information bearing structure.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 74+ subclass 18
    for arc furnace electrodes and subclasses 137, 155 and 164 for electrode
    furnace linings.

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 276+ for sleeves, or liners.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    the combination of a Class 106, composition (or process) with structure (or
    steps) peculiar to road building.  See note to Class 106, under the class
    definition Class 404.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet and particularly subclasses 98+ for a structurally defined web or
    sheet; subclass 221 for a web or sheet having a structurally defined
    element or component; subclasses 357+ for a coated or structurally defined
    element (e.g., strand, fiber, flake, or filament), or a mass thereof and
    subclasses 411+ for a composite web or sheet in which the composition of at
    least one layer is specified.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, appropriate subclass for articles provided for by the class.

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 167+ for an artificial tooth or denture; and
    subclasses 215+ for a method of restoring a natural tooth by using a
    specific coating or plastic composition.

    492,    Roll or Roller, subclasses 53+ and 57+ for the disclosure of
    specific compositions of a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for.

    602,    Surgery:  Splint, Brace, or Bandage, subclasses 5+ for splints.



    (2)     Note.  Coating or Plastic Compositions Elsewhere Classified.

    A.      The following general lines exist between Class 106 and the other
    composition classes or with classes containing patents wherein the claims
    recite a composition limited to an art use provided for in that class.

    1.      Compositions are in general placed in the appropriate composition
    class whether or not they are claimed broadly or specifically as
    specialized for a use, property, or function provided for in some other
    main class, except as noted below under B.

    2.      Compositions which are disclosed as having a plurality of uses,
    properties or functions provided for in different main classes and only a
    single use, property or function is claimed, are placed in the composition
    providing for such claimed use, property or function and cross-referenced
    to other classes for disclosed uses, properties or functions when desirable.

    3.      A list of superiority of composition classes appears in the main
    class definition of Class 252 Compositions (5) Note.  This note in Class
    252 explains classification of a generic composition with several disclosed
    uses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    504,    Plant Protecting and Regulating Compositions.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions.

    71,     Chemistry:  Fertilizers.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges.

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions.

    148,    Metal Treatment.

    508,    Solid Antifriction Devices, Materials Therefor, Lubricant or
    Separant Compositions for Moving Solid Surfaces, and Miscellaneous Mineral
    Oil Compositions.

    252,    Compositions (special uses or functions).

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic.

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds.

    252,    Compositions (nonspecial uses or functions).

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products.

    451,    Abrading.



    This superiority list is not intended as a complete list and will be
    expanded or added to as the relationship between other classes containing
    compositions and the above listed classes is determined.

    B.      For compositions elsewhere classified, see Classes:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, for compositions specialized for use as dyestuffs, and
    for compositions which (1) react with hide skin, feathers or animal tissues
    or (2) are specialized for use in the treatment of hides, skins, feathers
    and animal tissues and do not form a coating thereon.

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, for fuel compositions not
    specifically provided for in Classes 48, Gas:  Heating and Illuminating and
    196, Mineral Oils, and binders specialized for use in briquetting
    comminuted fuel.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 1 for seed containing compositions and
    compositions for preserving cut plants.

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, for a
    composition specialized for use as an abrasive.  Patents containing claims
    to the abrasive function as well as claims to a function or use
    specifically provided for in Class 106 (e.g., refractory) are placed in
    this class (106) as originals and cross-referenced to Class 51.

    71,     Chemistry:  Fertilizers, for compositions of matter specialized for
    use as fertilizers.

    101,    Printing, subclass 424 for anti-smut cleaners, utilizing detergent
    compositions.

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, subclasses 29-33 for mixtures of
    sugars, starches and carbohydrates resulting from operations encompassed by
    said class.

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 352+ for tobacco compositions, subclasses 300+
    for compositions employed in the treatment of tobacco, and subclasses 208,
    219, 220, and 230 for compositions for smoking devices.

    148,    Metal Treatment, for compositions specialized for use in the
    treatment of metal, particularly subclasses 240+, 13.1+ and 22+.  The line
    between Class 106 and subclass 6 of Class 148 in regard to coating
    compositions is as follows: If the coating composition reacts with the
    metal base whereupon the base supplies any ingredient of the coating formed
    thereon, such a composition is in Class 148, otherwise in this class (106).

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, for compositions of
    matter specialized for uses or functions embraced within the scope of this
    class (149).

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 100+ for fiber
    containing compositions which are formed, or intended to be formed by
    deposition from a liquid suspension.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclasses for
    compositions prepared by electrical or wave energy only, subclasses 291+
    for electrode compositions limited to use in electrolytic apparatus, and
    subclasses 295+ for diaphragm compositions limited to use in electrolytic
    apparatus.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, appropriate subclasses for compositions
    directed to use in electrolytic processes (e.g., electrolytic plating bath
    compositions are found in subclasses 80+, etc.).

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 4+ and 14+ for
    coating or plastic compositions containing as ingredients only mineral oils.

    252,    Compositions, is the generic class for compositions of matter.  (1)
    Where a use, property or function provided for in Class 252 is claimed, the
    composition belongs in Class 252. See the notes to the main class
    definition of Class 252 for references to other classes having nonplastic
    or noncoating compositions:  (2) See the reference to Class 252 in (1)
    Note, Part B, for the coating and plastic compositions included in Class
    252. Patent discloses species, all of which belong in Class 523, subclasses
    1+ and claims broadly a composition which is not limited to the subject
    matter of said classes, the patent is placed in Class 520 in the subclasses
    first appearing therein provided for the disclosed species.  Patents
    containing composition claims differing in scope only, some of which
    standing alone, belong in Class 106, and some in Class 520 are placed as
    originals and cross-referenced to Class 106 when desirable.

    349,    Liquid Crystal Cells, Elements and Systems, subclasses 182+ for a
    liquid crystal optical element with a specified composition.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    321+ for an optical modulator with significant composition, subclasses 490+
    for polarizing by dichroic medium and subclass 500 for polarization by
    birefringent element of particular material.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, appropriate subclasses for
    compositions which contain a continuous phase of metal.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses for a composition specialized as a medicine or poison and
    especially subclasses 59 to 74 for a composition to be applied to a living
    body (e.g., sun tanning cream, lipstick, hair waving lotion, etc.).

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 70+ for edible compositions
    including those intended for use in coating, impregnating or treating foods.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process, for compositions of matter limited to use in electrochemical
    batteries, especially subclasses 188+ for electrolytic compositions, and
    subclasses 247+ for separator compositions.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, for compositions of matter which are specialized for use as a
    radiation image sensitizing agent and post imaging treating agent.

    452,    Butchering, subclass 72 for composition for use in removing
    feathers and hair from fowls and animals in the preparation of the
    carcasses for food.

    504,    Plant Protecting and Regulating Compositions, for compositions of
    matter specialized for use as plant catalysts or stimulants.

    508,    Solid Antifriction Devices, Materials Therefor, Lubricant or
    Separant Compositions for Moving Solid Surfaces, and Miscellaneous Mineral
    Oil Compositions is the generic class for lubricants. As between Class 106
    and Class 508, the following line is followed. Where the composition is
    disclosed as a lubricant, whether or not other uses are disclosed, the
    composition belongs in Class 508 if claimed only broadly or if claimed as a
    lubricant.

    (3)     Note.  Material or Ingredients.

            See classes:

    196,    Mineral Oils, for mineral oils, such as, for example, petroleum
    fractions, asphalt and all mixtures of any mineral oil with another mineral
    oil within the definition of Class 196, as well as processes of preparing,
    extracting, or purifying the same.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, its daughter Classes 530-570 and
    Class 585, Chemistry, Hydrocarbons for single carbon compounds, including
    mixtures of carbon compounds resulting from a  reaction or synthesis
    provided for in said class, which are new, even though they have a claimed
    utility, property or function provided for in this class (106), and
    processes of preparing carbon compounds. Class 260, etc., includes
    compositions which contain definite chemical compounds of dyestuff or
    pigment compounds with metals. Carbons coloring compounds which are
    produced in the presence of a preformed substratum, wherein novelty is
    alleged to reside in the combination or in the amount, form or nature of
    the substratum, are in this class (106); however, where the substratum is
    synthesized simultaneously with the carbon compound, the product belongs in
    class 260 Classes 530-570 or Class 585.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, for materials or ingredients
    which are a single inorganic compound and processes for their manufacture
    involving a chemical reaction.  For the general line between Class 423 and
    the composition classes see the notes under subclass 265 of that class
    (423).



    (4)     Note.  Processes of Preparing  Compositions.

    A.      The character of compositions included within Class 106 is such
    that they are generally capable of being prepared in molds or on surfaces.
    Where the locus of the preparation is merely incidental to the making of
    the composition, and no significant molding or coating step is claimed,
    such processes are classified with the composition in this class (106).

    B.      See the following classes for processes which include the
    preparation of coating or plastic compositions:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, appropriate subclasses for glass working or
    treating; for the line between these classes, see the line note under the
    class definition of Class 65.

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes and non-coating apparatus for
    growing therein-defined single-crystal of all types of materials, including
    inorganic or organic, and including those in the form of a coating.
    Coating apparatus is generally located in Class 118.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 100+ for processes
    involving deposition of a fiber containing material from a liquid
    suspension.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate subclass
    for processes of classifying solid materials, even though for the purpose
    of making plastic compositions, which are distinct from the composition.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 1 to 30
    for comminuting processes and see section 2 of the class definition of that
    class for the line.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes, for
    processes of molding or shaping compositions of matter which include
    significant molding or shaping operation.  The line between this class
    (106) and Class 264 is as follows:  Class 106 takes processes of making
    compositions within the class definition even though including the step of
    molding, when such step is claimed broadly.  Broad references to extruding,
    spinning into a setting medium (without naming the medium) or sheeting in a
    claim to the preparation of a composition of matter, are considered broad
    molding steps.  Also the statement that heat and pressure are used during
    the molding, whether or not specific temperatures or specific pressures are
    recited, is not considered sufficient of itself to take a patent claiming a
    process of preparing a composition out of this class (106).  For a more
    detailed discussion of the line between Class 264 and the composition
    classes see the definition of Class 264.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 2+ for physical processes of mixing mortars
    and asphaltic and hydraulic cement concrete which are clearly distinct from
    the composition.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus appropriate subclasses for
    the combination of a Class 106, composition (or process) with structure (or
    steps) peculiar to road building.  See note to Class 106, under the class
    definition of Class 404.

    427,    Coating Processes.  The line between Classes 106 and 427 is as
    follows:  If a patent claims a coating composition and also claims a
    process of coating, the patent is classified in Class 427 if the process is
    "significant", and in Class 106 if the process is not "significant".  For a
    definition of "significant" process see the class definition of Class 427.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles.  Except for subject
    matter classifiable in Class 428, subclasses 544+, the line between this
    class (106) and Class 428 is as follows:  A patent containing a claim to a
    product classifiable in Class 428, but with no significant structural
    limitation recited, and a claim to a coating material of the Class 106
    type, which material is included as at least part of the claimed product,
    it is classified in Class 106 on the basis of the coating material. If the
    patent also has a claim to a process of coating including a significant
    method step, the patent is classified in Class 428. Section VI, B, for the
    general relationship between Class 428 and the composition classes.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 1+ for a residual process of heating or
    calcining an object or material which is clearly distinct from the
    composition.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclass 257
    for methods of containing hazardous or toxic waste in a Class 106
    composition.

    (5)     Note.  For definitions of organic chemical terms, such as
    "heterocyclic", "oxo", "oxy", etc., see the main class definition of Class
    260, Chemistry of Carbon Compounds.


CLS 106/1.05
TXT Metal-depositing composition or substrate-sensitizing compositions for
    metal-depositing compositions:

    Coating or plastic compositions from which metal is deposited as a coating,
    usually by chemical precipitation.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are metal-coating compositions
    (metalization) for coating of metallic and nonmetallic substrates by
    processes such as electroless metal-deposition process, hot dipping
    (tinplate, galvanizing), metal spraying, electrophoresis, vacuum or vapor
    deposition, oxide reduction, cementation, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Each of the subclasses 1.05, 1.11-1.19, and 1.21-1.29
    provide for metal-coating compositions other than subclass 1.11, which is
    directed to compositions for activating or sensitizing substrates (metal or
    nonmetal), for subsequent metal coating with metal-containing compositions
    of subclasses 1.05, 1.12-1.19 and 1.21-1.29.  Activating or sensitizing
    compositions are generally coupled to the electroless metal-deposition
    process and compositions therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, for metal treating of base metals to alter their
    physical or chemical properties.

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 291+ for
    electrode compositions and subclasses 295+ for diaphragm compositions
    limited to use in electrolytic apparatus.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 80+ for an electrolytic coating
    process or a composition used therefor.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 181.1+ for compositions and materials for
    use as getters for electric lamps, electric space-discharge devices and
    similar evacuation of gas-filled containers or for generating a gas or
    vapor within the containers of an electric lamp, and electric
    space-discharge device or similar containers.  The getter material or gas
    or vapor generated is sometimes a metal and is intended to be deposited as
    a coating upon the walls or other parts of the lamp or discharge device.

    427,    Coating Processes, including electroless processes of metal
    consisting of metal or nonmetal substrates.


CLS 106/1.11
TXT Sensitizing composition:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.05 which is directed to compositions for
    activating or sensitizing substrates (metal or nonmetal) which art to be
    subsequently subjected to metal-coating compositions generally using the
    electroless metal-deposition process.


CLS 106/1.12
TXT Metal-depositing composition contains mixtures of elemental metal and a
    metal compound other than solely as a Group IA metal compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.05 involving a metal-depositing composition
    containing a mixture of elemental metal and a metal compound and wherein
    the metal portion of said compound contains a metal other than solely as a
    Group IA (Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs, Ra) metal.


CLS 106/1.13
TXT Elemental metal is a Group IB (Cu, Ag, Au) Metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.12 wherein the elemental metal is a Group
    IB (Cu, Ag, Au) metal.


CLS 106/1.14
TXT Elemental metal is Ag:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.13 wherein the elemental metal is silver
    (Ag).


CLS 106/1.15
TXT Elemental metal is a noble metal of Group VIII (Ru, Rh, Pd, Os, Ir, Pt):

    Subject matter under subclass 1.12 wherein the elemental metal is a noble
    metal of Group VIII (Ru, Rh, Pd, Os, Ir, Pt).


CLS 106/1.16
TXT Elemental metal is a Group IIB (Zn, Cd, Hg) metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.12 wherein the elemental metal is a metal
    of Group IIB (Zn, Cd, Hg).


CLS 106/1.17
TXT Elemental metal is Zn:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.16 wherein the elemental metal is zinc (Zn).


CLS 106/1.18
TXT Metal-depositing composition contains elemental metal of Group IB (Cu, Ag,
    Au):

    Subject matter under subclass 1.05 involving a metal-coating composition
    containing an elemental metal of Group IB (Cu, Ag, Au).


CLS 106/1.19
TXT Elemental metal is Ag:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.18 wherein the elemental metal is silver
    (Ag).


CLS 106/1.21
TXT Metal composition contains elemental noble metal of Group VIII (Ru, Rh, Pd,
    Os, Ir, Pt):

    Subject matter under subclass 1.05 involving a metal-coating composition
    containing an elemental noble metal of Group VIII (Ru, Rh, Os, In, Pt).


CLS 106/1.22
TXT Metal-depositing composition contains mixtures of metal compounds other
    than solely as Group IA metal compounds. e.g., electroless:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.05 wherein the metal-depositing composition
    contains mixtures of metal compounds and wherein at least two metal
    compounds contain metal atoms other than Group IA metal compounds generally
    used in the electroless metal deposition process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.11,   for activating or sensitizing substrates for metalizing said
    substrates with metal-containing compositions by the electroless metal
    deposition process.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, for a process of coating substrates by an
    electroless metal-deposition process.


CLS 106/1.23
TXT At least one metal is a Group IB (Cu, Ag, Au) metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.22 wherein at least one metal atom of said
    mixture of metal compounds is a Group IA (Cu, Ag, Au) metal atom.


CLS 106/1.24
TXT At least one metal is a noble metal of a Group VIII (Ru, Rh, Pd, Os, Ir,
    Pt) metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.22 wherein at least one metal atom of said
    mixture of metal compounds is a noble metal of Group VIII (Ru, Rh, Pd, Os,
    Ir, Pt).


CLS 106/1.25
TXT Metal-depositing composition contains polyvalent metal compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.05 wherein a metal-depositing composition
    contains a polyvalent metal compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.11,   for sensitizing or activating compositions for substrates to be
    subsequently treated with a polyvalent metal-depositing composition.


CLS 106/1.26
TXT Group IB (Cu, Au) metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.25 wherein the polyvalent metal portion of
    said compound is a polyvalent metal of Group IB (Cu, Au).


CLS 106/1.27
TXT Group VIII metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.25 wherein the polyvalent metal portion of
    said compound is a polyvalent metal of Group VIII (Fe, Co, Ni).


CLS 106/1.28
TXT Group VIII noble metal (Ru, Rh, Pd, Os, Ir, Pt):

    Subject matter under subclass 1.27 wherein the polyvalent metal is a noble
    metal of Group VIII (Ru, Rh, Pd, Os, Ir, Pt).


CLS 106/1.29
TXT Group IIB (Zn, Cd, Hg) metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.25 wherein the polyvalent metal is a Group
    IIB (Zn, Cd, Hg) metal atom.


CLS 106/2
TXT Coating or plastic compositions specially designed for use in the
    prevention of the adherence of a coating material to a surface.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes anti-smut compositions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclass 130 and subclasses 135 to 146 for apparatus for
    printing dependent on the use of ink repellent surfaces, subclasses 450+
    for processes of printing, subclasses 453+ for lithographic printing
    plates, subclasses 463+ for lithographic plate making, and subclasses
    416.1+ for anti-smut devices.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 90+ for plastic or fluent material molding apparatus combined
    with means to apply a parting (i.e., repellent, etc.) material, many of
    which disclose specifics of the composition.


CLS 106/3
TXT Coating or plastic compositions, known as polishes, specially designed for
    use in producing a luster or sheen on a surface which may be applied by
    rubbing or burnishing.  This subclass and indented subclasses include
    furniture polish, shoe polish, floor polish, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 104.93+ for
    fabrics coated or saturated with a polish for use as wipers, daubers or
    polishers.

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, for a
    polishing composition wherewith polishing is accomplished solely by an
    abradant.

    510,    Cleaning, Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses for cleaning compositions which include a particulate polishing
    component or which deposit a polishlike coating component on the cleaned
    surface (e.g., subclasses 256, 400, etc.).

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Class 523, subclass 167 for a composition containing a
    synthetic resin or natural rubber.  having utility in the manufacturing or
    repairing of shoes or to processes of preparing said composition.


CLS 106/4
TXT Compositions under subclass 3 in the preparation of which a protein is
    employed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31.53+, 124+, 614+, and 645+, for other compositions containing proteins or
    derivatives.


CLS 106/5
TXT Compositions under subclass 3 in the preparation of which a carbohydrate or
    reaction product thereof is employed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31.36+, 31.69+, 126+, 139+, 150, 151, 157, 158, 162+, 617, 687, 729+, 779+,
    and  804+, for other compositions containing carbohydrates or derivatives.


CLS 106/6
TXT Compositions under subclass 3 in the preparation of which is natural resin
    or reaction product thereof is employed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     31.4, 31.72,  133, 144, 152, 156, 160, 172, 173.1, 200, 207, 212,
    216, 218+, 622, 660,  for other compositions containing natural resin or
    derivative.


CLS 106/7
TXT Compositions under subclass 6 in the preparation of which a fatty oil is
    employed.

    (1)     Note.  The term "varnish" when broadly used is presumed to include
    a mixture of natural resin with a drying oil, and patents drawn to
    compositions containing "varnish" recited broadly are classified upon this
    basis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     31.34, 172, and 220+, for other compositions containing a natural
    resin or derivative with a fatty oil.


CLS 106/8
TXT Compositions under subclass 3 in the preparation of which a fat, fatty oil,
    fatty oil acid or salt thereof is employed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     31.34+, 131, 132, 142, 143, 159, 171, 172, 199, 206, 211, 215,
    219+, 243+, 620+, and 661+, for other compositions containing a fat, fatty
    oil, fatty oil acid or salt thereof.


CLS 106/9
TXT Compositions under subclass 8 in the preparation of which a fatty oil is
    employed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     31.34,  132, 143, 159, 171, 199, 206, 211, 215, 220+, 244+, 620+,
    and  661+, for other compositions containing fatty oil.


CLS 106/10
TXT Compositions under subclass 3 in the preparation of which a wax, a
    bituminous material or tarry residue is employed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31.29,  134, 145, 152, 156, 160, 191, 201, 202, 207, 212, 216, 224, 225,
    230, 231, 232+, 245, 246+, 269, 270+, 273.1, 622, and 660, for other
    compositions containing wax, bituminous material or tarry residue.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses for cleaning compositions which include wax as one of the
    components (e.g., subclasses 201+, 222, 347, etc.), although the wax may or
    may not be retained on the cleaned substrate.


CLS 106/11
TXT Compositions under subclass 3 in the preparation of which a hydrocarbon is
    employed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31.88,  191, 227, 234, 239, 265, 267, and 285, for other compositions
    containing hydrocarbons.


CLS 106/12
TXT Coating or plastic compositions specially designed for saturating or
    indurating solid base material.

    (1)     Note.  Compositions found in this subclass are those which do not,
    by themselves, usually form hard, adherent films but exert a hardening or
    indurating action on the base.

    (2)     Note.  Most of the compositions in this subclass are compositions
    for saturating and hardening siliceous and calcareous substances, e.g.,
    concrete.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 601+ for impregnating compositions which
    exert a fireproofing action.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclass for a composition, biocidal or repellent to pest life, i.e.,
    insects, rodents, microorganisms, etc. and which may saturate a substrate
    such as paper, wood or textile, etc.


CLS 106/13
TXT Coating or plastic compositions specialized for use in preventing the
    formation of a fog, frost or ice on a surface, usually the surface of a
    window.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 104.93+ for
    fabrics impregnated with a frost preventing composition to be used as
    wipers, daubers, or polishers.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 70 for other frost preventing compositions.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, particularly Class 523,
    subclass 169 for a composition containing a synthetic resin or natural
    rubber having utility to preserve visibility through a windshield or other
    optical device by preventing the buildup of fog or by rendering the surface
    hydrophobia, thereby causing the surface to repel water or to processes of
    preparation thereof.


CLS 106/14.05
TXT Corrosion inhibiting coating composition:

    COATING OR PLASTIC COMPOSITIONS (unnumbered subclass preceding subclass
    1.05) specifically designed for inhibiting corrosion of metal other than
    mere exclusion of air or other corrosive influences.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 240+ for chemical modification of a
    metal involving the use of a corrosion inhibiting composition.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 387+ for preservative agents and
    compositions containing anticorrosion agents.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 7+ for processes of preserving
    metals or metallic surfaces against corrosion by maintaining the
    environment noncorrosive; and subclasses 14+ wherein the environment is
    water.

    427,    Coating Processes, for coating substrates using a composition
    containing a corrosion inhibitor.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, coated with a composition
    containing a corrosion inhibitor.


CLS 106/14.11
TXT Contains water:

    Subject matter under subclass 14.05 wherein the corrosion inhibiting
    composition contains water.


CLS 106/14.12
TXT Phosphorus material:

    Subject matter under subclass 14.11 wherein the corrosion inhibiting agent
    contains a phosphorus atom.


CLS 106/14.13
TXT Carboxylic acid, ester, alcohol or sulfur or metal derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 14.11 wherein the corrosion inhibiting
    composition contains a carboxylic acid, ester, alcohol, sulfur, or metal
    derivative.


CLS 106/14.14
TXT Inorganic material other than water:

    Subject matter under subclass 14.13 wherein said composition also contains
    an inorganic material other than water, e.g., inorganic salts, inorganic
    fillers, metal, sulfur, etc.


CLS 106/14.15
TXT Organic nitrogen-containing material, e.g., amine, amide, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 14.11 wherein the corrosion inhibiting
    composition contains an organic nitrogen-containing material, e.g., organic
    amine, amide, etc.


CLS 106/14.16
TXT Heterocyclic nitrogen-containing material:

    Subject matter under subclass 14.15 wherein the organic nitrogen-containing
    material contains at least one nitrogen atom in a hetero ring compound,
    e.g., pyridine or pyrrolidone-type compound, etc.


CLS 106/14.17
TXT Inorganic material other than water:

    Subject matter under subclass 14.16 wherein said composition also contains
    an inorganic material other than water.


CLS 106/14.18
TXT Amine salt of carboxylic acid:

    Subject matter under subclass 14.15 wherein the corrosion inhibiting
    composition contains an amine salt of a carboxylic acid, e.g.,
    triethanolamine oleate, etc.


CLS 106/14.21
TXT Inorganic material or elemental component thereof, e.g., s, metal, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 14.11 wherein said corrosion inhibitor
    coating composition contains an inorganic material.


CLS 106/14.22
TXT Contains animal, vegetable, fish oil or a fraction or derivative thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 14.05 wherein the corrosion inhibiting
    composition contains an animal, vegetable or fish oil or fraction or a
    derivative thereof.


CLS 106/14.23
TXT Carboxylic acid, ester, alcohol or metal or sulfur or amine or amide
    derivative thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 14.22 wherein the corrosion inhibiting
    composition contains a carboxylic acid, ester, alcohol, sulfur, metal,
    amine, or amide derivative.


CLS 106/14.24
TXT Carboxylic acid, ester, or amine or amide derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 14.23 wherein the corrosion inhibiting
    composition contains a carboxylic acid, ester, amine, or amide derivative
    of said carboxylic acid.


CLS 106/14.25
TXT Inorganic material or elemental component thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 14.22 wherein a component of said corrosion
    inhibiting composition contains an inorganic material or elemental
    component thereof.


CLS 106/14.26
TXT Contains petroleum oil or a fraction thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 14.05 wherein the corrosion inhibiting
    composition contains a petroleum oil or liquid fractions thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14.34,  for solid petroleum wax is part of a corrosion inhibiting
    composition.


CLS 106/14.27
TXT Carboxylic acid, ester, alcohol or sulfur or metal derivative thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 14.26 wherein the corrosion inhibiting
    composition contains a carboxylic acid, ester, alcohol, sulfur, or metal
    derivative thereof.


CLS 106/14.28
TXT Metal salt of carboxylic acid:

    Subject matter under subclass 14.27 wherein the corrosion inhibiting
    composition contains a metal salt of a carboxylic acid, e.g., sodium
    stearate, etc.


CLS 106/14.29
TXT Metal salt of sulfonic acid:

    Subject matter under subclass 14.27 wherein the corrosion inhibiting
    composition contains a metal salt of a sulfonic acid, e.g., Na petroleum
    sulfonate, etc.


CLS 106/14.31
TXT Organic nitrogen-containing material, e.g., amine, amide, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 14.26 wherein the corrosion inhibiting
    composition contains an organic nitrogen-containing material, e.g., amine,
    amide, etc.


CLS 106/14.33
TXT Inorganic material or elemental component thereof, e.g., S, metal, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 14.26 wherein a component of said petroleum
    oil-containing composition is an inorganic material or elemental component
    thereof.


CLS 106/14.34
TXT Contains wax, bitumen, asphalt, gum, natural resin, varnish, lacquer, or
    paint:

    Subject matter under subclass 14.05 wherein the corrosion inhibiting
    composition or a component thereof contains wax, bitumen, asphalt, gum,
    natural resin, varnish, lacquer, or paint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14.26,  for a liquid petroleum fraction which is part of a corrosion
    inhibiting composition.


CLS 106/14.35
TXT Carboxylic acid, ester, alcohol or sulfur or metal derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 14.34 wherein the corrosion inhibiting
    composition contains a carboxylic acid, ester, alcohol, sulfur, or metal
    derivative thereof.


CLS 106/14.36
TXT Metal salt of carboxylic acid:

    Subject matter under subclass 14.35 wherein the corrosion inhibiting
    composition contains a metal salt of a carboxylic acid.


CLS 106/14.37
TXT Organic nitrogen-containing material:

    Subject matter under subclass 14.34 wherein the corrosion inhibiting
    composition contains a nitrogen-containing material, e.g., amine, amide,
    etc.


CLS 106/14.38
TXT Organic sulfur-containing material:

    Subject matter under subclass 14.34 wherein the corrosion inhibiting
    composition contains a sulfur-containing material, e.g., organic sulfide,
    sulfonate, etc.


CLS 106/14.39
TXT Inorganic material or elemental component thereof:

    Subject Matter under subclass 14.34 wherein a component of said composition
    is an inorganic material or elemental component thereof.


CLS 106/14.41
TXT Contains mixture of at least two organic compounds:

    Subject matter under subclass 14.05 wherein the corrosion inhibiting
    coating compositions contains at least two organic compounds.


CLS 106/14.42
TXT Organic nitrogen-containing material:

    Subject matter under subclass 14.41 wherein at least one of the organic
    compounds is an organic nitrogen-containing compound, e.g., amine, amide,
    etc.


CLS 106/14.43
TXT Organic sulfur-containing material:

    Subject matter under subclass 14.41 wherein at least one of the organic
    compounds is an organic sulfur-containing compound.


CLS 106/14.44
TXT Contains mixture of organic material and at least one inorganic material or
    elemental component thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 14.05 wherein the corrosion inhibiting
    coating composition contains at least one organic material and at least one
    inorganic material or elemental component thereof.


CLS 106/14.45
TXT Elemental S or inorganic sulfur-containing compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 14.44 wherein the inorganic material is
    elemental sulfur or an inorganic sulfur-containing compound, e.g., CS2,
    Na2S, etc.


CLS 106/14.5
TXT Coating or plastic compositions specially designed for producing sheets or
    surfaces for receiving the negative design in copy printing and usually
    serving as a member for which to print a large number of copies.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    311,    and other appropriate subclasses below, for duplicator fluids, that
    is, solvents which may be applied to the hectograph surface or the copy
    sheet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclass 131 for apparatus employing copy compositions;
    subclass 468 for hectographs and processes of use.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 144 for processes of applying a uniform
    coating to a base disclosed as useful in making hectographic copying
    surfaces.


CLS 106/15.05
TXT Contains fireproofing or biocidal agent:

    COATING OR PLASTIC COMPOSITIONS (unnumbered subclass preceding subclass
    1.05) containing an agent or material specifically designed to render the
    coating or plastic composition resistant to the effects of fire or
    unwarranted organisms.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this area have been placed away into the first
    appearing subclass of the classification schedule that provides for any
    part of the fireproofed or biocidal containing plastic composition.  No
    attempt has been made to classify on the particular agent in the coating or
    plastic composition which may provide the desired fireproofing or biocidal
    effect.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein are repellants, biocides, biostats, etc.

    (3)     Note.  The organisms protected against may be microscopic or
    macroscopic.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 2+ for fire-extinguishing compositions;
    and subclass 8.1 for fireproofing compositions.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, for a pest
    repelling composition, per se, and for certain coated substrates wherein
    the substrate functions as an applicator or carrier for the composition and
    wherein the general intent is to provide a pesticidal or pest-repelling
    effect rather than a means to protect the carrier or substrate.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a single layer having
    significant structure, or plural layers webs or sheets; and especially
    subclasses 920+ for a cross-reference art collection product which is
    resistant against plant or animal attack.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Class 523, subclass 122 for a composition containing a
    synthetic resin or natural rubber and an ingredient which prevents the
    commencement of biocidal deterioration from fungi, bacteria, or other
    organisms; and subclass 179 for a composition containing a synthetic resin
    or natural rubber and having utility as an ablative or intumescent coating
    composition or to processes of preparing said compositions.


CLS 106/16
TXT Compositions under subclass 15 in the preparation of which a natural resin
    or derivative is employed.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, the subclasses including "natural resin or
    derivative" or "resinous material" in the titles thereof, for other
    compositions containing natural resin or derivatives.


CLS 106/17
TXT Compositions under subclass 16 in the preparation of which a fat, fatty
    oil, fatty oil acid or salt thereof is employed.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, the subclasses including "natural resin or
    derivative with fat, fatty oil, fatty oil acid or salt thereof" in the
    titles thereof for other compositions containing natural resin or
    derivatives and a fat, fatty- oil, fatty oil acid or salt thereof.


CLS 106/18
TXT Compositions under subclass 15 in the preparation of which a fat, fatty
    oil, fatty oil acid or salt thereof is employed.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses including "fat, fatty oil, fatty
    oil acid or salt thereof" in the titles thereof for other compositions
    containing a fat, fatty oil, fatty oil acid or salt thereof.


CLS 106/18.11
TXT Contains fireproofing agent:

    Subject matter under subclass 15.05 wherein the coating or plastic
    composition contains a specific material which renders it resistant to fire.


CLS 106/18.12
TXT Silicon containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 18.11 wherein the coating or plastic
    composition contains a silicon-containing material.


CLS 106/18.13
TXT Boron containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 18.11 wherein the coating or plastic
    composition contains a boron-containing material.


CLS 106/18.14
TXT Phosphorus containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 18.11 wherein the coating or plastic
    composition contains a phosphorus-containing material.


CLS 106/18.15
TXT Nitrogen-containing phosphorus compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 18.14 wherein phosphorus is in the form of
    phosphorus compound containing a nitrogen atom.


CLS 106/18.16
TXT Inorganic compound contains a phosphorus and a nitrogen atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 18.15 wherein the phosphorus-containing
    nitrogen compound is inorganic in nature.


CLS 106/18.17
TXT Contains phosphorus directly bonded to nitrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 18.15 wherein the phosphorus-containing
    nitrogen compound has at least one nitrogen atom directly bonded to a
    phosphorus atom.


CLS 106/18.18
TXT Phosphorus compound is organic:

    Subject matter under subclass 18.14 wherein the phosphorus is in the form
    of an organic compound.


CLS 106/18.19
TXT Phosphorus compound which is organic contains halogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 18.18 wherein the organic phosphorus compound
    contains at least one halogen atom.


CLS 106/18.2
TXT With halogen-containing compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 18.18 wherein the organic phosphorus compound
    is in admixture with a halogen-containing compound.


CLS 106/18.21
TXT Nitrogen-containing organic compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 18.11 wherein the coating or plastic
    composition contains an organic compound which has at least one nitrogen
    atom therein.


CLS 106/18.22
TXT Nitrogen compound contains a sulfur atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 18.21 wherein the organic nitrogen compound
    contains at least one sulfur atom.


CLS 106/18.23
TXT Elemental sulfur or sulfur-containing organic compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 18.11 wherein the coating or plastic
    composition contains sulfur in elemental form or as part of a
    sulfur-containing organic compound.


CLS 106/18.24
TXT Halogen-containing organic compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 18.11 wherein the coating or plastic
    composition contains a halogen-containing organic compound.


CLS 106/18.25
TXT With at least one inorganic material which is other than water:

    Subject matter under subclass 18.24 wherein the organic halogen-containing
    compound is in admixture with at least one inorganic material, and wherein
    when water is present there is additionally present a different inorganic
    material.


CLS 106/18.26
TXT Metal-containing material:

    Subject matter under subclass 18.11 wherein the coating or plastic
    composition contains at least one metal atom-containing material.


CLS 106/18.27
TXT Group IIB metal atom (Zn, Cd, Hg):

    Subject matter under subclass 18.26 wherein a Group IIB metal atom (Zn, Cd,
    Hg) is present.


CLS 106/18.28
TXT Group VA metal atom (As, Sb, Bi):

    Subject matter under subclass 18.26 wherein a Group VA metal atom (As, Sb,
    Bi) is present.


CLS 106/18.29
TXT Wax containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 15.05 wherein the coating or plastic
    composition contains a wax.

    (1)     Note.  The wax may be of any origin.


CLS 106/18.30
TXT Boron containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 15.05 wherein the coating or plastic
    composition contains a boron-containing material.


CLS 106/18.31
TXT Phosphorus containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 15.05 wherein the coating or plastic
    composition contains a phosphorus-containing material.


CLS 106/18.32
TXT Nitrogen-containing compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 15.05 wherein the coating or plastic
    composition contains a nitrogen-containing compound.


CLS 106/18.33
TXT Nitrogen compound contains a sulfur atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 18.32 wherein the nitrogen compound contains
    at least one sulfur atom.


CLS 106/18.34
TXT Elemental sulfur or sulfur-containing organic compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 15.05 wherein the coating or plastic
    composition contains sulfur in elemental form or as part of a
    sulfur-containing organic compound.


CLS 106/18.35
TXT Halogen-containing organic compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 15.05 wherein the coating or plastic
    composition contains a halogen-containing organic compound.


CLS 106/18.36
TXT Group IIB metal containing (Zn, Cd, Hg):

    Subject matter under subclass 15.05 wherein the coating or plastic
    composition contains at least one Group II metal atom (Zn, Cd, Hg).


CLS 106/31.01
TXT Marking:

    Coating or plastic compositions under the class definition which are
    specialized for use in producing characters and indicia by means of
    marking, writing, printing, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    Appropriate subclasses, for similar compositions not designed for use as
    marking  compositions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 49+ for pencils
    wherein significant structure of the pencil is claimed

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Class 523, subclass 164 for a composition containing a
    synthetic resin or natural rubber having utility as the writing material in
    a lead pencil or crayon or to processes of preparing said composition.


CLS 106/31.02
TXT Odor masked, odor reduced, or perfumed compositions:

    Coating or plastic compositions under subclass 31.01 which contain
    components which are odor masking, odor reducing, or perfuming.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 5 for deodorizing process.

    512,    Perfume Compositions, for perfume compositions, per se.


CLS 106/31.03
TXT Composition for marking live animal or plant, or for marking animal derived
    products (e.g., animal skins, etc.):

    Coating or plastic compositions under subclass 31.01 used for marking
    living animals or plants, or for marking animal derived products.


CLS 106/31.04
TXT Reflecting composition for marking pavement or sign:

    Reflecting coating or plastic compositions under subclass 31.01 for marking
    pavement or signs.


CLS 106/31.05
TXT Composition for marking an inorganic settable or ceramic object (e.g., for
    marking cement or glass, etc.):

    Coating or plastic compositions under subclass 31.01 for marking an
    inorganic settable or ceramic object.


CLS 106/31.06
TXT Composition for marking metal or metal product:

    Coating or plastic composition under subclass 31.01 for marking metal or
    metal products.


CLS 106/31.07
TXT Indelible crayon:

    Coating or plastic compositions under subclass 31.01 used as crayon, whose
    markings are indelible.


CLS 106/31.08
TXT Wax containing:

    Coating or plastic compositions under subclass 31.07 containing wax.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31.1,   for erasable crayon composition containing wax.

    31.12,  for pencil lead compositions containing wax.

    31.29,  for inks, containing organic dye, that also are the hot melt type
    or wax-containing.

    31.61,  for inks containing pigments, that also are the hot melt type or
    wax-containing.


CLS 106/31.09
TXT Erasable crayon (i.e., washable or removable crayon):

    Coating or plastic compositions under subclass 31.01 used as crayon whose
    markings are erasable (i.e., washable or removable)


CLS 106/31.1
TXT Wax containing:

    Coating or plastic compositions under subclass 31.09 containing wax.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31.08,  for indelible crayon compositions containing wax.

    31.12,  for pencil lead compositions containing wax.

    31.29,  for inks, containing organic dye, that also are the hot melt type
    or wax-containing.

    31.61,  for inks, containing pigments, that also are the hot melt type or
    wax-containing.


CLS 106/31.11
TXT Pencil leads:

    Coating or plastic compositions under subclass 31.01 used as pencil leads.


CLS 106/31.12
TXT Wax containing:

    Coating or plastic compositions under subclass 31.11 containing wax.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31.08,  for indelible crayon compositions containing wax.

    31.1,   for erasable crayon compositions containing wax.

    31.29,  for inks, containing organic dye, that also are the hot melt type
    or wax-containing.

    31.61,  for inks, containing pigments, that also are the hot melt type or
    wax-containing.


CLS 106/31.13
TXT Inks:

    Coating or plastic compositions under subclass 31.01 specially designed for
    use as inks to be used for producing characters, by means of writing,
    printing, or marking.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing: Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 445+ for textile printing pastes.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 5 for infusion packages or
    receptacles containing ink.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 209+ for the
    combination of a ballpoint pen and ink.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Class 523, subclass 160 for a composition containing a
    synthetic resin or natural rubber having utility as an ink for glass or for
    ceramic substrates; subclass 161 for a ballpoint pen or a typewriter ink
    composition, or for processes of preparing said compositions.


CLS 106/31.14
TXT Invisible:

    Coating or plastic compositions under subclass 31.13 specifically designed
    to be an invisible ink, which may be activated by any known means to
    produce a visible ink (e.g., by the action of heat, light, or other
    subsequent treatment).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Class 523, subclass 161 for a composition containing a
    synthetic resin or natural rubber having utility as an invisible ink or to
    processes of preparing said composition.


CLS 106/31.15
TXT Fluorescent:

    Compositions under subclass 31.14 which radiate unpolarized light when
    illuminated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 301.16 to 301.35, 301.36, 301.4 to 301.6,
    and 625 for compositions containing a fluorescent or phosphorescent
    material, becoming visible when subjected to subsequent excitation (e.g.,
    ultraviolet light.)


CLS 106/31.16
TXT Chromogenic (i.e., color formation by reaction of color former with color
    developer):

    Compositions under subclass 31.14 which develop a color by contacting a
    color former compound (electron donor) with a color developer compound
    (electron acceptor) in a manner to cause reaction.


CLS 106/31.17
TXT Specified developer  (i.e., electron acceptor):

    Compositions under subclass 31.16 where the developer (electron acceptor)
    is identified.


CLS 106/31.18
TXT Phenolic hydroxy compound as the developer:

    Compositions under subclass 31.17 wherein the specified developer is a
    phenolic hydroxy compound.

    (1)     Note. A phenolic hydroxy compound is a compound wherein a hydroxy
    group is bonded directly to a substituted or unsubstituted benzene ring.


CLS 106/31.19
TXT With specified color former:

    Compositions under subclass 31.18 where the color former (electron donator,
    proton accepting component) is identified.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a color former is malachite green lactone.


CLS 106/31.2
TXT Specified color former (i.e.,  electron donating):

    Compositions under subclass 31.18 where the color former (electron donating
    or proton accepting) is identified.


CLS 106/31.21
TXT The color former contains a heterocyclic oxygen ring:

    Compositions under subclass 31.2 wherein the color former contains a
    heterocyclic ring having a ring oxygen atom.

    (1)     Note. A heterocyclic oxygen ring herein is a ring that contains
    carbon, oxygen, and optionally nitrogen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium as
    the only ring members.


CLS 106/31.22
TXT Fluoran or derivative containing:

    Compositions under subclass 31.21 wherein the color former contains a
    fluoran or derivative thereof.


CLS 106/31.23
TXT Erasable composition:

    Compositions under subclass 31.14 which have the ability to be removed
    (erased).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31.32,  for inks containing organic dye and features (to include, i.e.,
    erasable, purified, fugitive, indicative, conductive, fluorescent,
    chromogenic, or  magnetic).

    31.34,  for inks (containing a pigment) which are erasable, purified,
    fugitive, indicative, conductive, fluorescent, chromogenic or magnetic.


CLS 106/31.24
TXT Protein, carbohydrate, or wax containing

    Compositions under subclass 31.14 containing one of the substances protein,
    carbohydrate, or wax.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31.53,  for inks containing organic dye and a protein or derivative.

    31.82,  for inks containing pigment and a protein or derivative.

    31.94,  for marking compositions containing carbohydrate, protein, or
    derivative.


CLS 106/31.25
TXT Emulsion:

    Compositions under subclass 31.13 which are in the form of an emulsion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 306+ for emulsions, per se (i.e., not used
    as an ink).


CLS 106/31.26
TXT Water in oil:

    Compositions under subclass 31.25 wherein the emulsion is water in oil.


CLS 106/31.27
TXT Organic dye containing:

    Compositions under subclass 31.13 wherein a dye in the ink composition is
    an organic dye.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing: Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, for other compositions to be used for dyeing.


CLS 106/31.28
TXT With pigment:

    Compositions under subclass 31.27 further  containing a pigment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24.00,  for inks containing a pigment.

    24.33,  for inks containing an inorganic pigment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclass 400+ for pigment,
    filler, or aggregate compositions.


CLS 106/31.29
TXT Hot melt type or wax containing:

    Compositions under subclass 31.27 having the characteristic of being hot
    melt type ink compositions or containing wax.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31.08,  for indelible crayon compositions containing wax.

    31.1,   for erasable crayon compositions containing wax.

    31.12,  for pencil lead compositions containing wax.

    31.61,  for inks containing pigments that also are the hot melt type or
    wax-containing.


CLS 106/31.3
TXT Petroleum derivative containing (e.g., paraffin or microcrystalline, wax,
    etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 31.29 containing a petroleum derivative (e.g.,
    paraffin or microcrystalline wax, etc.).


CLS 106/31.31
TXT Natural wax containing (e.g., carnauba, montan, Japan, candelilla, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 31.29 containing a natural wax, (e.g.,
    carnauba, montan,  Japan, candelilla, etc.).


CLS 106/31.32
TXT Erasable, purified, correctable, fugitive, indicator, conductive,
    fluorescent, chromogenic, or magnetic compound:

    Compositions under subclass 31.27 having the characteristic of being
    erasable purified, correctable, fugitive, indicative, conductive,
    fluorescent, chromogenic or magnetic in nature.

    SEARCH  THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31.23,  for invisible inks that are erasable compositions.

    31.84,  for inks, containing a pigment, which are erasable, purified,
    correctable, fugitive, indicator, conductive, fluorescent, chromogenic, or
    magnetic.


CLS 106/31.33
TXT Specified particle size or coated particle containing:

    Compositions under subclass 31.27 containing a particle of a specified size
    or which contain coated particles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31.65,  for  pigmented ink containing a particle of a specified size or
    containing coated particles.


CLS 106/31.34
TXT Fat, fatty oil, fatty acid, or derivative thereof containing:

    Compositions under subclass 31.27 containing fat, fatty oil, fatty acid, or
    derivative thereof (e.g., castor oil).

    (1)     Note. Many of the patents in this subclass and indented subclasses
    are for printing inks.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31.66,  for inks containing pigments and fat, fatty oil, fatty acid, or
    derivative thereof.


CLS 106/31.35
TXT Fatty acid or derivative containing:

    Compositions under subclass 31.34 containing a fatty acid or fatty acid
    derivative.


CLS 106/31.36
TXT Carbohydrate or derivative containing:

    Compositions under subclass 31.27 containing carbohydrate or derivative
    thereof (e.g., dextrin, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31.24,  for invisible inks containing protein, carbohydrate, or wax.

    31.68,  for pigment containing inks with carbohydrate or derivative thereof.

    31.94,  for marking compositions containing carbohydrate, protein, or
    derivative thereof.


CLS 106/31.37
TXT Cellulose or derivative containing:

    Compositions under subclass 31.36 containing cellulose or derivative.


CLS 106/31.38
TXT Carbohydrate gum containing:

    Compositions under subclass 31.36 containing carbohydrate gum.

    (1)     Note. Examples of carbohydrate gum, are gum Arabic, xanthan gum,
    and guar gum.


CLS 106/31.39
TXT Starch containing:

    Compositions under subclass 31.36 containing starch.


CLS 106/31.4
TXT Natural resin or derivative containing:

    Compositions under subclass 31.27 containing natural resin or derivative
    thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31.72,  for pigmented inks which contain a  natural resin or derivative
    thereof.

    31.96,  for marking compositions containing natural resin or derivative
    thereof.


CLS 106/31.41
TXT Resin or derivative containing:

    Compositions under subclass 31.4 containing rosin or derivative thereof.


CLS 106/31.42
TXT Shellac or derivative containing:

    Compositions under subclass 31.4 containing shellac or derivative thereof.


CLS 106/31.43
TXT Organic nitrogen compound containing:

    Compositions under subclass 31.27 which contain an organic nitrogen
    compound.

    (1)     Note.  An organic nitrogen compound is a compound wherein nitrogen
    is attached directly or indirectly to carbon of an organic compound by
    nonionic bonding

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31.75,  for pigmented ink containing an organic nitrogen compound, wherein
    the organic nitrogen compound may or may not be the pigment.

    31.97,  for marking compositions containing an organic nitrogen or organic
    sulfur compound.


CLS 106/31.44
TXT Anthraquinone attached directly or indirectly to the nitrogen by nonionic
    bonding:

    Subject matter under subclass 31.43 wherein the nitrogen is attached
    directly or indirectly to an anthraquinone ring system by nonionic bonding.


CLS 106/31.45
TXT The nitrogen is part of a cyano group:

    Subject matter under subclass 31.43 wherein the nitrogen is in a cyano
    group.


CLS 106/31.46
TXT The nitrogen is a ring member of a heterocyclic ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 31.43 wherein a heterocyclic ring contains at
    least one nitrogen atom as a ring member.

    (1)     Note. A heterocyclic ring is a ring that contains only carbon and
    at least one ring hetero atom selected from nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium.


CLS 106/31.47
TXT Six-ring members in the heterocyclic ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 31.46 wherein the heterocyclic ring is
    six-membered.


CLS 106/31.48
TXT Acyclic azo attached directly or indirectly to the heterocyclic ring by
    nonionic bonding:

    Subject matter under subclass 31.47 wherein an acyclic azo group, -N=N-, is
    bonded to two discrete carbons and is attached directly or indirectly to
    the six-membered, heterocyclic ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 106/31.49
TXT Five-ring members in the heterocyclic ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 31.48 wherein the heterocyclic ring is
    five-membered.


CLS 106/31.5
TXT Acyclic azo attached directly or indirectly to the heterocyclic ring by
    nonionic bonding:

    Subject matter under subclass 31.49 wherein an acyclic azo group, -N=N-, is
    attached directly or indirectly to the five-membered, heterocyclic ring by
    nonionic bonding. The azo group is bonded directly to two discrete carbons.


CLS 106/31.51
TXT The nitrogen is part of an acyclic azo group:

    Compositions under subclass 31.43 wherein the nitrogen is part of an
    acyclic azo group, -N=N-, which is bonded directly to two discrete carbons.


CLS 106/31.52
TXT Plural acyclic azo group component containing:

    Compositions under subclass 31.51 wherein a plural acyclic azo group
    containing compound is present.


CLS 106/31.53
TXT Protein or derivative containing:

    Compositions under subclass 31.43 containing a protein or derivative (e.g.,
    alginic acid-plant protein, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31.24,  for invisible inks containing protein, carbohydrate, or wax.

    31.82,  for pigmented inks containing protein or derivative thereof

    31.94,  for marking compositions containing carbohydrate, protein, or
    derivatives thereof.


CLS 106/31.54
TXT Gelatin, glue, or derivative containing:

    Compositions under subclass 23.28 containing gelatin, glue, or derivative
    thereof.


CLS 106/31.55
TXT Casein or derivative containing:

    Compositions under subclass 31.53 containing casein or derivative thereof.


CLS 106/31.56
TXT Seed or derivative thereof containing (e.g., nuts, beans, zein, grain,
    rice, corn, wheat, oats, gluten, soybean, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 31.53 containing natural seed or derivative
    thereof.


CLS 106/31.57
TXT Specified vehicle, solvent, or dispersing medium containing:

    Compositions under subclass 23.00 containing an identified vehicle,
    solvent, or dispersing medium.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass and its indent, a substance is
    "identified" if it is defined either (a) in terms of a chemical structure
    characteristic, or (b) quantatively in terms of a specific physical
    property.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31.59,  for inks containing an organic dye and specified surfactant.

    31.85,  for inks containing a pigment and specified  vehicle, solvent, or
    dispersing medium.

    31.89,  for inks containing a pigment and a specified surfactant.


CLS 106/31.58
TXT Organic oxygen compound containing:

    Compositions under subclass 31.57 containing an organic oxygen  compound.

    (1)     Note. An organic oxygen compound is one wherein oxygen is attached
    directly or indirectly to carbon of an organic compound by nonionic bonding.


CLS 106/31.59
TXT Specified surfactant containing:

    Compositions under subclass 31.27 containing an identified surfactant.

    (1)     Note. The surfactants may be of any type (e.g., anionic, nonionic
    etc.).

    (2)     Note. For purposes of this subclass, a substance is "identified" if
    it is defined either (a) in terms of a chemical structure characteristic or
    (b) quantatively in terms of a specific physical property.


CLS 106/31.6
TXT Pigment containing:

    Compositions under subclass 31.13 containing a pigment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31.27,  for inks containing an organic dye and a pigment.

    31.9,   for inks containing an inorganic pigment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 400+ for pigment,
    filler, or aggregate composition.


CLS 106/31.61
TXT Hot, melt type, or wax containing:

    Composition under subclass 31.6 having the characteristic of being hot melt
    type or wax containing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31.08,  for indelible crayon compositions containing wax.

    31.1,   for erasable crayon compositions containing wax.

    31.12,  for pencil lead compositions containing wax.

    31.29,  for inks containing organic dye, that are  hot, melt type,  or wax
    containing.


CLS 106/31.62
TXT Petroleum derivative containing (e.g., paraffin, or microcrystalline wax,
    etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 31.61 containing a petroleum derivative (e.g.,
    paraffin or microcrystalline wax.)


CLS 106/31.63
TXT Natural wax containing (e.g., carnauba, montan, Japan, candellilla, etc.)

    Compositions under subclass 31.61 containing a natural wax.


CLS 106/31.64
TXT Erasable, purified, correctable,  fugitive, indicator, conductive,
    fluorescent, chromogenic, or magnetic composition:

    Compositions under subclass 31.6 having the characteristic of being
    erasable, purified correctable, fugitive, indicator, conductive,
    fluorescent, chromogenic, or magnetic in nature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31.23,  for invisible inks which have the ability to be removed or erased.

    31.32,  for inks containing organic dye which are erasable, purified,
    correctable, fugitive, indicator, conductive, fluorescent,  chromogenic, or
     magnetic.


CLS 106/31.65
TXT Specified particle size or coated particle containing:

    Compositions under subclass 31.6 containing a particle of a specified size
    or coated particles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31.33,  for inks containing organic dye where a component is identified by
    particle size or is coated.


CLS 106/31.66
TXT Fat, fatty oil, fatty  acid, or derivative thereof containing:

    Compositions under subclass 31.6 containing fat, fatty oil, fatty acid, or
    derivative thereof, (e.g., castor oil).

    (1)     Note. Many of the patents in this subclass and indented subclasses
    are for printing inks.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31.84,  for organic dye containing inks with a component of fat, fatty oil,
    fatty acid, or  derivative thereof (e.g., castor oil).


CLS 106/31.67
TXT Fatty acid or derivative containing:

    Compositions under subclass 31.66 containing a fatty acid or fatty acid
    derivative.


CLS 106/31.68
TXT Carbohydrate or derivative containing:

    Compositions under subclass 24.00 containing carbohydrate or derivative
    thereof (e.g., dextrin, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31.24,  for invisible inks containing protein, carbohydrate, or wax.

    31.36,  for ink containing carbohydrate or derivative (e.g., dextrin, etc.).

    31.94,  for marking compositions containing carbohydrate, protein, or
    derivatives  thereof.


CLS 106/31.69
TXT Cellulose or derivative containing:

    Compositions under subclass 31.68 containing cellulose or derivative
    thereof.


CLS 106/31.7
TXT Carbohydrate gum containing:

    Compositions under subclass 31.68 containing carbohydrate gum, (e.g., gum
    Arabic (acacia), xanthan gum, guar, etc.).


CLS 106/31.71
TXT Starch containing:

    Compositions under subclass 31.68 containing starch.


CLS 106/31.72
TXT Natural resin or derivative containing:

    Compositions under subclass 31.6 containing a natural resin or derivative.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31.4,   for inks containing organic dye and natural resin or derivative
    thereof.

    31.96,  for marking compositions containing natural resin or derivative
    thereof.


CLS 106/31.73
TXT Resin or derivative containing:

    Compositions under subclass 31.72 containing rosin or derivative.


CLS 106/31.74
TXT Shellac or derivative containing:

    Compositions under subclass 31.72 containing shellac or derivative.


CLS 106/31.75
TXT Organic nitrogen compound containing:

    Compositions under subclass 24.00 which contains an organic nitrogen
    compound.

    (1)     Note. An organic nitrogen compound is a compound wherein nitrogen
    is attached directly or indirectly to carbon of an organic compound by
    nonionic bonding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31.43,  for ink containing organic dye wherein an organic nitrogen
    compound, which may be the dye, is present.

    31.47,  for marking compositions containing an organic nitrogen or an
    organic sulfur compound.


CLS 106/31.76
TXT The nitrogen is a ring member of a heterocyclic ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 31.75 wherein a heterocyclic ring contains at
    least one nitrogen atom as a ring member.

    (1)     Note. A heterocyclic ring is a ring that contains only carbon and
    at least one ring hetero atom selected from nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium.


CLS 106/31.77
TXT Six-ring members in the heterocyclic ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 31.76 wherein the heterocyclic ring is
    six-membered and has at least one ring nitrogen.


CLS 106/31.78
TXT Five-ring members  in the heterocyclic ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 31.76 wherein the heterocyclic ring is
    five-membered and has at least one ring  nitrogen.


CLS 106/31.79
TXT Acyclic azo attached directly or indirectly to the heterocyclic ring by
    nonionic bonding:

    Subject matter under subclass 31.78 wherein an acyclic azo group, -N=N-, is
    bonded directly to two discrete carbons and is attached directly or
    indirectly to the heterocyclic ring by nonionic bonding


CLS 106/31.8
TXT The nitrogen is part of an acyclic azo group:

    Compositions under subclass 31.75 wherein an acyclic azo group compound is
    present.

    (1)     Note. An acyclic azo group compound is one wherein acyclic -N=N- is
    bonded to two discrete carbons.


CLS 106/31.81
TXT Plural acyclic azo group component containing:

    Compositions under subclass 31.80 wherein a plural acyclic azo group
    containing compound is present.


CLS 106/31.82
TXT Protein or derivative containing:

    Compositions under subclass 31.75 containing a protein or derivative (e.g.,
    alginic acid-plant protein).


CLS 106/31.83
TXT Gelatin, glue, or derivative containing:

    Compositions under subclass 31.82 containing gelatin, glue, or derivative.


CLS 106/31.84
TXT Casein or derivative containing:

    Compositions under subclass 31.82 containing casein or derivative.


CLS 106/31.85
TXT Specified vehicle, solvent, or dispersing medium containing:

    Compositions under subclass 31.6 containing an identified vehicle, solvent,
    or dispersing medium.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass and its indents, a substance
    is "identified" if it is defined either (a) in terms of a chemical
    structure characteristic or (b) quantatively in terms of a special physical
    property.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31.57,  for inks containing an organic dye and a specified vehicle,
    solvent, or dispersing medium.

    31.59,  for inks containing an organic dye and a specified surfactant.

    31.89,  for inks containing a pigment and an identified surfactant.


CLS 106/31.86
TXT Organic oxygen compound containing:

    Compositions under subclass 31.85 containing an organic oxygen compound.

    (1)     Note. An organic oxygen compound is one wherein oxygen is attached
    directly or indirectly to carbon of an organic compound by nonionic bonding.


CLS 106/31.87
TXT Organic sulfur compound  containing:

    Compositions under subclass 31.85 containing an organic sulfur compound.

    (1)     Note. An organic sulfur compound is one wherein sulfur is attached
    directly or indirectly to carbon of an organic compound by nonionic bonding.


CLS 106/31.88
TXT Hydrocarbon compound containing:

    Compositions under subclass 31.85 containing a hydrocarbon.

    (1)     Note. A hydrocarbon compound consists of only carbon and hydrogen
    atoms.


CLS 106/31.89
TXT Specified surfactant containing:

    Compositions under subclass 31.6 containing an identified surfactant

    (1)     Note. The surfactants may be of any type (e.g., anionic, nonionic,
    etc.).

    (2)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass and its indents, a substance
    is "identified" if it is defined either (a) in terms of a chemical
    structure characteristic or (b) quantitatively in terms of a special
    physical property.


CLS 106/31.9
TXT The pigment is inorganic:

    Compositions under subclass 31.6 containing an inorganic pigment.


CLS 106/31.91
TXT Bituminous material or tarry residue containing:

    Compositions under subclass 31.01 containing bituminous material or tarry
    residue.


CLS 106/31.92
TXT Electrically conductive or magnetic compositions (e.g., electrically
    sensitive, electrochemical, electrolytic, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 31.01 which exhibit electrically conductive or
    magnetic properties.


CLS 106/31.93
TXT Felt tip or correction composition:

    Coating or plastic compositions under subclass 31.01 useful as felt tip
    devices or as correction compositions.


CLS 106/31.94
TXT Carbohydrate, protein, or derivative containing:

    Compositions under subclass 31.01 containing carbohydrate, protein, or
    derivative thereof.


CLS 106/31.95
TXT Glass, glass derivative, carbon, or free metal containing:

    Compositions under subclass 31.01 containing glass, glass derivative,
    carbon, or free metal.

    (1)     Note. Buckminister fullerenes, graphite, and diamond are
    encompassed by carbon.


CLS 106/31.96
TXT Natural resin or derivative thereof containing:

    Compositions under subclass 31.01 containing a natural resin or derivative
    thereof.


CLS 106/31.97
TXT Organic nitrogen compound  or organic sulfur compound  containing:

    Compositions under subclass 31.01 wherein an organic nitrogen compound or
    organic sulfur compound is present.

    (1)     Note.  An organic nitrogen compound is one wherein nitrogen is
    attached directly or indirectly to carbon of an organic compound by
    nonionic bonding. An organic sulfur compound is  similarly defined.


CLS 106/32.5
TXT Coating or plastic compositions specialized for use in producing surfaces
    which are intended to receive marks, and from which the marks may be
    readily removed, e.g., blackboards, slates and analogous surfaces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 687 for metallic
    stock material having a special surface feature, e.g., glossy.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclass 425 for devices having
    erasable surfaces wherein the structure is claimed in combination with
    special materials used in its construction, and including devices which are
    merely coated bases.


CLS 106/33
TXT Coating or plastic compositions specialized for use in plugging or stopping
    leaks or punctures.

    (1)     Note.  Most of the patents in this subclass are drawn to
    compositions for stopping leaks in automobile radiators and in pneumatic
    tires.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclasses 502+ for pneumatic tire
    leak-stopping compositions for the self-healing of tire punctures.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 72 for heat exchange, low-freezing or pour
    point or high boiling compositions containing Leak-stopping agents.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 912 (a
    cross-reference art collection) for a product embodying a puncture healing
    layer.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Class 523, subclass 166 for a composition containing a
    synthetic resin or natural rubber as a puncture sealant for a pneumatic
    tire or for a composition used in the emergency repair of vehicular tires
    or to processes of preparing said composition.


CLS 106/34
TXT Coating or plastic compositions which are specially designed for use as
    stains.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclass 402 for
    stains wherein the staining action is accomplished by use of compositions
    including dyestuffs, which do not form a permanent film on the base.


CLS 106/35
TXT Coating or plastic compositions specialized for dental use, e.g., for
    dentures, artificial teeth, etc., and dental fillings and cements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, for alloys which contains less
    than 50 percent iron and which may be useful for making dental parts and
    cements, particularly subclasses 526+ for amalgams.

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 167+ for dentures and artificial teeth, per
    se, where there is no claim to the composition, per se.

    523,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 116+ for a
    composition containing a synthetic resin or natural rubber used as a cement
    or filling for a tooth or to processes of preparing said composition.


CLS 106/36
TXT Coating or plastic compositions specially designed for the production of a
    tractive or friction surface, e.g., in forming pulley, clutch or brake
    facing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclass 231 for a composition having a continuous phase of free
    metal made by consolidating metal particles and having an abrasive
    constituent.

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclass 211 for anti-skid tires.

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 250+ for brake elements having significant brake
    structure which brake elements may include as an element a lining or facing
    of a traction or friction composition.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 107 for clutches having
    significant clutch structure which clutches may include as an element a
    lining or facing of a traction or friction composition.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 177+ and 190+ for a friction drive pulley having a nonmetallic
    component forming the drive face, for pulleys including a composition on
    the rim to increase the traction on the belt.


CLS 106/37
TXT Coating or plastic composition which are specially designed for use in
    recording sound.

    (1)     Note.  The broad reference to shape or to the presence of grooves
    is not considered enough structure to take a claim to a sound record, which
    is otherwise defined solely by composition of matter, away from this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 272+ for sound
    records which include significant structure, other than shape or presence
    of grooves.


CLS 106/38
TXT Coating or plastic compositions specially designed for fillings in the
    bottom of shoes or soles thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 520, Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers,
    appropriate subclasses particularly Class 523, subclass 167 for a
    composition containing a synthetic resin or natural rubber having utility
    in the manufacturing or repairing of shoes or to processes of preparing
    said composition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclasses 25 and 34 for shoes and elements, thereof, e.g., soles or heels,
    defined only by composition.


CLS 106/38.2
TXT Compositions which are (a) specialized for use in making molds, (b)
    specialized for use in coating molds, or (c) molds claimed solely in terms
    of the composition of which they are composed.

    (1)     Note.  The molds and mold compositions included in this subclass
    are intended for use in plastic shaping processes such as casting,
    injecting, film spreading, etc., regardless of the material shaped.  For
    the purpose of classification in this and indented subclasses, such shaping
    members as patterns, matrices, cores and film casting surfaces are all
    considered to be molds.

    (2)     Note.  For molds and analogous devices claimed in terms of
    significant mold structure, whether or not the composition of which the
    mold is composed is also claimed, the following classes should be consulted:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses
    520+ for processes of making molds from particular material subclass 138
    for processes of casting metal in a mold of a particular composition and
    subclasses 349+ for sand molds or cores.

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 134+ for molds having a particular
    structure composed of a specific composition; see (2) Note above.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 219+ for processes within the class definition including the
    step of making the mold (including mold making, per se) and subclasses 337+
    pertaining to the use of particular mold materials.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    appropriate subclasses for a molding machine for manufacturing nonmetal
    products, especially see subclasses 175+ for such apparatus for forming a
    mold.

    520,    Synthetic Resins, for a composition for making or coating a mold,
    particularly Class 523, subclasses 139+ for compositions relating to metal
    foundry molding or metallurgical furnaces.

    (3)     Note.  Molds mentioned by name only and defined by a single
    material other than a composition of which the mold is made, are classified
    on the basis of such material.  In this connection, the following classes
    should be consulted:

    SEARCH CLASS

    148,    Metal Treatment.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    appropriate subclasses, for similar compositions which are not specialized
    for use in making or coating molds.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 400+ for molds which are stock
    resulting from processes of treating metals classifiable in Class 148, or
    are stock distinguished only by the internal structure or characteristics
    of the metals, metallic compositions or alloys comprising such products.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, appropriate subclasses for molds
    claimed solely in terms of the metal or alloy of which they are composed.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 133+ for processes of coating, per
    se, wherein the substrate is disclosed as a mold.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a coated mold, where no significant mold structure is claimed,
    especially subclasses 411+ for a composite, nonstructural product
    distinguished only by the compositions of the layers and subclasses 544+
    for molds claimed in terms of metallic stock.


CLS 106/38.22
TXT Compositions under subclass 38.2 which are specialized for use in coating
    or lining molds.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 114+ for molds having a particular
    structure provided with a coating or lining.


CLS 106/38.23
TXT Compositions under subclass 38.22 in the preparation of which a
    carbohydrate or derivative thereof is employed.


CLS 106/38.24
TXT Compositions under subclass 38.22 in the preparation of which a fat, fatty
    oil, fatty oil acid or salt thereof is employed.


CLS 106/38.25
TXT Compositions under subclass 38.22 in the preparation of which a wax,
    bituminous or resinous material or tarry residue is employed.


CLS 106/38.27
TXT Compositions under subclass 38.22 which contain only inorganic materials or
    materials in elemental form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, appropriate subclasses for mold
    coatings claimed solely in terms of the metal or alloy of which they are
    composed.


CLS 106/38.28
TXT Compositions under subclass 38.27 in the preparation of which elemental
    carbon, e.g., graphite, is employed.


CLS 106/38.3
TXT Compositions under subclass 38.2 in the preparation of which an alkali
    metal silicate or an inorganic settable ingredient is employed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    600+    and 638+, for similar compositions which are not specialized for
    use in making molds.


CLS 106/38.35
TXT Compositions under subclass 38.3 in the preparation of which an organic
    material is employed.


CLS 106/38.4
TXT Compositions under subclass 38.2 in the preparation of which a protein or
    derivative thereof is employed.


CLS 106/38.51
TXT Carbohydrate or Derivative Containing: Compositions under subclass 38.2 in
    the preparation of which a carbohydrate or derivative thereof is employed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclass .5 and subclasses 122.1+ for


            molds claimed solely in terms of the metal or alloy composition of
    which they are composed.


CLS 106/38.6
TXT Compositions under subclass 38.2 in the preparation of which a natural
    resin or derivative thereof is employed.


CLS 106/38.7
TXT Compositions under subclass 38.2 in the preparation of which a fat, fatty
    oil, fatty oil acid or salt thereof is employed.


CLS 106/38.8
TXT Compositions under subclass 38.2 in the preparation of which a wax,
    bituminous material or tarry residue is employed.


CLS 106/38.9
TXT Compositions under subclass 38.2 which contain only inorganic materials or
    materials in elemental form.

    SEARCH CLASS

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, appropriate subclasses for molds
    claimed solely in terms of the metal or alloy of which they are composed.


CLS 106/122
TXT Coating or plastic compositions which are rendered porous by some specific
    step performed for this purpose.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include porous compositions in which
    the porosity is due solely to the use of naturally occurring porous
    ingredients, which compositions are classified on some other basis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     41, 601+, and 672+, for other pore forming within this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, subclass
    296 for an abrasive tool making process including a pore forming step, or
    for a porous abrading composition.

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, subclass 56 for the use of etching
    in the formation of a porous or perforated article.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 41+ for processes of molding which include the step of pore
    forming in situ.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 3+ for mortar mixing processes including the
    step of incorporating air or gas.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, subclass 2 for processes of making
    porous products from particulate material which include metal particles
    with heat.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 304.4+ for a
    stock material product of at least two components, in which one of the
    components is either porous or cellular and subclass 613 for porous
    metallic stock.

    521,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclass for a
    cellular or pore containing synthetic resin or natural rubber.


CLS 106/123.11
TXT CELLULOSE LIBERATION WASTE LIQUOR, SOLID, OR REACTION PRODUCT THEREOF
    CONTAINING (E.G., BLACK LIQUOR, SULFITE YEAST LIQUOR, NEUTRALIZED SULFITE
    LIQUOR, ETC.):

    Compositions under the class definition which contain a waste product from
    sulfur paper making process or the chemical modification of such waste
    product.

    (1)     Note. This subclass and indented subclasses provide for all
    treatments of waste cellulose liberation residues or liquor for which there
    is no provision elsewhere.

    (2)     Note. The expression "organic compound" in this and indented
    subclasses corresponds to the class 260 class definition, i.e., compounds
    containing carbon, which are further characterized by the presence in a
    molecule thereof of (a) two carbon atoms bonded together, (b) one atom of
    carbon bonded to at least one atom of hydrogen or halogen, or (c) one atom
    of carbon bonded to at least one atom of nitrogen by a single or double
    bond, with the proviso that HCN, CN-CN, HNCO, HNCS, cyanamide, cyanogen
    halides, fulminic acid, metal carbides, and graphite are excluded from
    being organic compounds.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 346 for processes of burning waste cellulose
    liberation liquor or residues not accompanied by the recovery of any
    specific material.


    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, particularly subclasses 29+ for
    processes of fiber liberation including recovery or recycle of the waste
    digestion liquor or residue thereof.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 1+ for treating mixtures to obtain metal containing
    compounds.

    435,    Chemistry: Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 251 and
    252 for processes of fermenting cellulose liberation waste liquor not
    combined with a fiber liberation.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, Class 524, subclasses 72+ and
    735 for lignin nonreactant materials in admixture with a synthetic resin;
    and Class 527, subclasses 400+ for a lignin containing synthetic resin.

    530,    Chemistry: Natural Resins or Derivatives; Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclasses 205+ and 500+, for the
    recovery of organic compound from waste fiber treating agents, not combined
    with fiber treating steps.


CLS 106/123.12
TXT With proteinaceous material or carbohydrate from an external source:

    Compositions under subclass 123.11 which contain a proteinaceous material
    or a carbohydrate from a source external to the cellulose liberation waste
    liquor, solid, or reaction product thereof in addition to the cellulose
    liberation waste liquor, solid, or reaction product thereof.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 124.1 for the definition of a
    proteinaceous material.

    (2)     Note. See this class, subclass 124.1, (5) Note for the definition
    of a carbohydrate.


CLS 106/123.13
TXT With bituminous or tarry residue, naturally occurring wax, or organic
    compound containing oxygen:

    Compositions under subclass 123.11 which contain (a) a composition or
    compound having the characteristics of a tar or pitch no matter what the
    origin, (b) a naturally occurring low-melting organic mixture or compound
    of hydrocarbons or esters of fatty acids and alcohols having the
    characteristics of wax (solid at room temperature), or (c) an organic
    compound which has at least one oxygen atom therein in addition to the
    cellulose liberation waste liquor, solid, or chemical modification thereof.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 123.11, (2) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.


CLS 106/124.1
TXT Proteinaceous material containing:

    Compositions under the class definition which contain a polypeptide
    (polyamide) of more than 100 ,a-amino acid residues or of molecular weight
    of greater than 10,000, a naturally occurring material which has such
    polypeptide as one of its ingredients, or a chemical modification of such
    polypeptide.

    (1)     Note. A peptide (amide) bond is an amino bond between the carboxyl
    group of one amino acid and the amino group of another.





    (2)     Note. Examples of proteins included herein are chemically modified
    protein wherein the polypeptide chemical structure is preserved, chemically
    modified protein wherein part of the polypeptide chemical structure has
    been removed, chemically modified protein wherein part of the polypeptide
    chemical structure has been replaced, chemically modified protein wherein
    the polypeptide chemical structure is indeterminate, and plant- or
    animal-derived material which has protein as one of its ingredients.

    (3)     Note. The term "chemical modification" herein is intended to
    include the conjugation of a protein with a nonpeptide compound, the
    addition of simple chemical elements or compounds to the protein, the
    sundering of parts of a large protein molecule, and the treatment to
    deliberately change the secondary, tertiary or quaternary structure of a
    polypeptide.

    (4)     Note. The expression "organic compound" in this and indented
    subclasses corresponds to the class 260 class definition, i.e., compounds
    containing carbon, which are further characterized by the presence in a
    molecule thereof of (a) two carbon atoms bonded together, (b) one atom of
    carbon bonded to at least one atom of hydrogen or halogen, or (c) one atom
    of carbon bonded to at least one atom of nitrogen by a single or double
    bond, with the proviso that HCN, CN-CN, HNCO, HNCS, cyanamide, cyanogen
    halides, fulminic acid, metal carbides, and graphite are excluded from
    being organic compounds.

    (5)     Note. The term "carbohydrate or derivative" in this and indented
    subclasses corresponds to Class 536 subclass 1.1 definition; i.e.,
    saccharide whose monomeric units are polyhydroxy mono-aldehydes or
    polyhydroxy mono-ketones, having the formula Cn(H2O)n (wherein n is five or
    six), or the corresponding cyclic hemiacetals thereof; or the reaction
    derivatives thereof in which the product is of indeterminate structure or
    the carbon skeleton and the carbonyl function or hemiacetal function of the
    saccharide unit are not destroyed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158.1,  for compositions containing albumin or derivative thereof.

    159.1,  for compositions containing casein or derivative thereof.

    160.1,  for compositions containing gelatin or collagen or derivative
    thereof.

    161.1,  for compositions containing prolamine or derivative thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    426,    Food or Edible Material: Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    appropriate subclasses especially 23, 32, 41, 54, 55+, 92, 105, and 129 for
    edible material which are or contain protein and processes for preparing
    the same.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 474.4+ for a
    nonstructural stock material product in the form of a composite web or
    sheet including a layer comprising protein, and other appropriately titled
    subclasses (e.g., subclasses 435 and 458 ).

    451,    Abrading, for abrasive tool compositions having a protein
    component.


    514,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 2+
    for a composition containing peptide or protein.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, Class 523, subclasses 449 and
    508, and Class 524, subclasses 9+, 17+, and 704 for a protein nonreactant
    material in admixture with a synthetic resin or natural rubber; and Classes
    525, 526, 527, and 528 for a protein containing synthetic resin. See in
    particular, Class 520, subclass 1 (Note 9, C) for an explanation of the
    type of polymer derived from a protein reactant which is proper for Class
    520.

    530,    Chemistry: Natural Resins or Derivatives; Peptides or Proteins,
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclass 350+ for proteins or
    derivatives thereof.

    930,    Peptide or Protein Sequence, subclasses 10+ for peptide or protein
    sequence of four or more amino acids.


CLS 106/124.2
TXT Milk:

    Compositions under subclass 124.1 wherein the proteinaceous material is
    milk.

    (1)     Note. A portion of a milk sample will be assumed to be proper for
    this subclass unless it is clearly indicated that the sample contains no
    amino acid or polypeptide.


CLS 106/124.3
TXT Chemically modified tissue derived from multicellular animal of
    indeterminate structure (e.g., hydrolyzed, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 124.1 wherein the proteinaceous material is
    found in a hydrolysis product or other chemical modification of tissue
    derived from multicellular animal of indeterminate structure.

    (1)     Note. The term "multicellular animal" refers to living sentient
    multicelled organisms and is intended to include insects, fish, fowl,
    mammals, and other members of the animal kingdom.


CLS 106/124.4
TXT Tissue derived from multicellular animal (e.g., connective tissue, muscle,
    organ, tendon, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 124.1 wherein the proteinaceous material is a
    tissue of multicellular animal origin.

    (1)     Note. The term "multicellular animal" refers to living sentient
    multicelled organisms and is intended to include insects, fish, fowl,
    mammals, and other members of the animal kingdom.


CLS 106/124.5
TXT Blood or blood plasma:

    Compositions under subclass 124.4 wherein the tissue derived from
    multicellular animal is blood or blood plasma.

    (1)     Note. A portion of a blood or blood plasma sample will be assumed
    to be proper for this subclass unless it is clearly indicated that the
    sample contains no amino acid or polypeptide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses
    85.1+ for composition of that class containing a blood protein.

    514,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 2+
    for compositions of that class containing a blood protein.


CLS 106/124.51
TXT With carbohydrate from an external source:

    Compositions under subclass 124.5 which contain, in addition to the blood
    or blood plasma, a carbohydrate material from a source external to the
    blood or blood plasma.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 124.1, (5) Note for the definition
    of a carbohydrate.


CLS 106/124.6
TXT Hide:

    Compositions under subclass 124.4 wherein the tissue derived from
    multicellular animal is animal skin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, particularly Class 523 and
    Class 524 for synthetic resin or natural rubber compositions containing
    leather.


CLS 106/124.61
TXT With carbohydrate from an external source:

    Compositions under subclass 124.6 which contain, in addition to the hide, a
    carbohydrate material from a source external to the hide.


CLS 106/124.62
TXT With natural resin or derivative, lanolin, lecithin, fat, or fatty oil:

    Compositions under subclass 124.6 which contain, in addition to the hide, a
    natural resin or chemical modification of a natural resin, lanolin,
    lecithin, fat, or fatty oil.

    (1)     Note. Natural resins include but are not limited to shellac, copals
    from various sources (e.g., congo, manila, etc.), amber, dammar, dead
    dammar, gum rosin, japan, japan varnish, rosin (colophony), tall oil
    (liquid rosin), wood rosin, burgundy pitch, gurjun balsam, canada balsam,
    sandrac, mastic, accroides, benzoin, elemi, gamboge, gum thus, venice
    turpentine, bordeaux turpentine, abietic acid, and pimaric acid.

    (2)     Note. Examples of derivatives included herein are hydrogenated,
    esterified, polymerized, and sulfurized resins, or salts thereof.

    (3)     Note. Definitions:

    (a)     By "fat" and "fatty oil" are meant the glyceryl triester
    (triglyceride) of the same or different higher fatty acids (e.g., oleic,
    myristic, palmitic, stearic, linolenic, etc.) or mixtures thereof present
    in a single oil or fat (e.g., lard, tallow, castor oil, etc.);

    (b)     By "lanolin" is meant cholesterol esters of higher fatty acids

    (c)     By "lecithin" is meant a mixture of the diglycerides of stearic,
    palmitic, and oleic acids, linked to the choline ester of phosphoric acid.

                            wherein the R's are the same or different, and are
    acyclic hydrocarbon radicals of at least seven carbon atoms chain length.


CLS 106/124.7
TXT Feather, scale, horn, hoof, claw, ivory, or bone:

    Compositions under subclass 124.4 wherein the tissue derived from
    multicellular animal is feather, scale, horn, hoof, claw, ivory, or bone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 280+ and
    note thereto, for feather treatment.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, particularly Classes 523 and
    524 for synthetic resin or natural rubber compositions containing feathers.


CLS 106/124.8
TXT Hair or fur:

    Compositions under subclass 124.4 wherein the tissue derived from
    multicellular animal is hair or fur.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, particularly Classes 523 and
    524 for synthetic resin or natural rubber compositions containing hair.


CLS 106/124.81
TXT With carbohydrate from an external source:

    Compositions under subclass 124.8 which contain, in addition to the hair or
    fur, a carbohydrate material from a source external to the hair or fur.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 124.1, (5) Note for the definition
    of a carbohydrate.


CLS 106/124.82
TXT With natural resin or derivative, lanolin, lecithin, fat, or fatty oil:

    Compositions under subclass 124.8 which contain, in addition to the hair or
    fur, a natural resin or chemical modification of a natural resin, lanolin,
    lecithin, fat, or fatty oil.


CLS 106/124.83
TXT With bituminous or tarry residue, hydrocarbon, or naturally occurring wax:

    Compositions under subclass 124.8 which contain, in addition to the hair or
    fur, (a) a composition or compound having the characteristics of a tar or
    pitch no matter what the origin, (b) an organic compound consisting
    exclusively of the elements carbon and hydrogen, or (c) a naturally
    occurring low-melting organic mixture or compound of hydrocarbons or esters
    of fatty acids and alcohols having the characteristics of wax (solid at
    room temperature).

    (1)     Note. Examples of components included herein are alkanes, alkenes,
    olefins, montan wax, ceresin wax, carnauba wax, all asphalts, bitumens,
    pitches and tars from coal, mineral oil, cotton seed pitch and the residue
    from the destructive distillation of wood, and natural oil distillations.


CLS 106/125.1
TXT Seed or tuber material (e.g., whole grains, rice flour, wheat flour,
    cornmeal, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 124.1 wherein the proteinaceous material is
    seed or tuber material (e.g., potatoes, arrowroot, etc.).

    (1)     Note. A naturally occurring mixture of carbohydrate and protein can
    be found in seed or tuber material.

    (2)     Note. This and indented subclasses will take compositions
    containing seed or tuber material that has been physically processed (e.g.,
    cooked, mashed, comminuted, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 6+ for
    processes involving comminution of grain and the like.


CLS 106/126.1
TXT With carbohydrate from an external source:

    Compositions under subclass 125.1 which contain, in addition to the seed or
    tuber material, a carbohydrate material from a source external to the seed
    or tuber material.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 124.1, (5) Note for the definition
    of a carbohydrate.


CLS 106/126.2
TXT Lignocellulosic material (e.g., flock, sawdust, wood, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 126.1 wherein the carbohydrate is found in a
    lignocellulosic material.

    (1)     Note. Lignocellulosic material is raw vegetable matter consisting
    primarily of cellulose, primarily of cellulose and lignin, or primarily of
    cellulose and lignin and minor amounts of carbohydrate and resin.

    (2)     Note. Lignin is a noncarbohydrate, polymeric substance found in
    wood and woody plants which functions as a natural plastic binder for the
    cellulose fibers. It is isolated directly from wood or wood products or
    from the treatment of wood, e.g., waste sulfite liquor or black liquor. The
    structure of the lignin monomer is not completely known.

    (3)     Note. Cellulose is a carbohydrate consisting of repeating glucose
    units having the following structure:


CLS 106/126.3
TXT Carbohydrate gum or cellulosic material:

    Compositions under subclass 126.1 wherein the carbohydrate is a
    carbohydrate gum or a chemically modified carbohydrate gum, cellulose or a
    chemically modified cellulose, or a naturally occurring material which has
    cellulose as one of its ingredients.

    (1)     Note. Carbohydrate gums include but are not limited to arabic,
    tragacanth, xanthan, galactomannan, irish moss, carrageenan, karaya, agar
    agar, algin, guar, xylogalactan, and glucomannan.

    (2)     Note. Carbohydrate gums are highly branched polysaccharides
    composed of two or more monosaccharides, and are exudations of plants
    produced by the plant to cover wounds and to prevent attack by organisms.

    (3)     Note. The term "derivative" herein is intended to include a
    chemical modification of the carbohydrate gum or cellulose wherein the
    carbon skeleton of the carbohydrate gum or cellulose is not destroyed or
    wherein the carbon skeleton of the carbohydrate gum or cellulose is
    indeterminate.

    (4)     Note. This subclass and indented subclasses provide for relatively
    pure cellulose (e.g., cotton linters, etc.), regenerated cellulose (e.g.,
    cellophane and rayon), or chemically modified forms of cellulose (e.g.,
    pyroxylin, viscose, etc.) for which there is no provision elsewhere.


CLS 106/127.1
TXT With nonproteinaceous hetero ring compound:

    Compositions under subclass 125.1 which contain, in addition to the seed or
    tuber material, a nonproteinaceous organic compound having a hetero ring.

    (1)     Note. Hetero ring is a ring having only carbon and at least one
    atom from the group consisting of nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, selenium and
    tellurium as ring members.


CLS 106/128.1
TXT With nonproteinaceous phosphorus or boron compound or organic compound
    containing silicon:

    Compositions under subclass 125.1 which contain, in addition to the seed or
    tuber material, a nonproteinaceous compound of phosphorus or boron or an
    organic compound which has at least one silicon atom therein.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 124.1, (4) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.


CLS 106/129.1
TXT With natural resin or derivative:

    Compositions under subclass 125.1 which contain, in addition to the seed or
    tuber material, a natural resin or a chemical modification of a natural
    resin.

    (1)     Note. Natural resins include but are not limited to shellac, copals
    from various sources (e.g., congo, manila, etc.), amber, dammar, dead
    dammar, gum rosin, japan, japan varnish, rosin (colophony), tall oil
    (liquid rosin), wood rosin, burgundy pitch, gurjun balsam, canada balsam,
    sandrac, mastic, accroides, benzoin, elemi, gamboge, gum thus, venice
    turpentine, bordeaux turpentine, abietic acid, and pimaric acid.

    (2)     Note. Examples of derivatives included herein are hydrogenated,
    esterified, polymerized, and sulfurized resins, or salts thereof.


CLS 106/130.1
TXT With terpene or derivative (e.g., pine oil, clove oil, spirits of
    turpentine, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 125.1 which contain, in addition to the seed or
    tuber material, a terpene or a chemical modification of a terpene.

    (1)     Note. Terpene denotes a hydrocarbon having two or more isoprene
    units (C5H8). Most terpenes have carbon skeleton of 10, 15, 20, or 30 atoms.

    (2)     Note. The term "derivative" herein is intended to include a
    chemical modification of the terpene wherein the terpene structure is not
    destroyed or wherein the terpene structure is indeterminate.


CLS 106/131.1
TXT With nonproteinaceous organic compound containing sulfur or nitrogen:

    Compositions under subclass 125.1 which contain, in addition to the seed or
    tuber material, a nonproteinaceous organic compound which has at least one
    sulfur or nitrogen atom therein.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 124.1, (4) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.


CLS 106/132.1
TXT With nonproteinaceous organic compound containing oxygen except wax:

    Compositions under subclass 125.1 which contain, in addition to the seed or
    tuber material, a nonproteinaceous organic compound which has at least one
    oxygen atom therein except wax.


CLS 106/132.2
TXT The oxygen is part of a -C(=O)O- group:

    Compositions under subclass 132.1 wherein the nonproteinaceous organic
    compound containing oxygen has a carboxylate group (i.e., -C(=O)O-).


CLS 106/133.1
TXT With bituminous or tarry residue, hydrocarbon, or naturally occurring wax:

    Compositions under subclass 125.1 which contain, in addition to the seed or
    tuber material, (a) a composition or compound having the characteristics of
    a tar or pitch no matter what the origin, (b) an organic compound
    consisting exclusively of the elements carbon and hydrogen, or (c) a
    naturally occurring low-melting organic mixture or compound of hydrocarbons
    or esters of fatty acids and alcohols having the characteristics of wax
    (solid at room temperature).


    (1)     Note. Examples of components included herein are alkanes, alkenes,
    olefins, montan wax, ceresin wax, carnauba wax, all asphalts, bitumens,
    pitches and tars from coal, mineral oil, cotton seed pitch and the residue
    from the destructive distillation of wood, and natural oil distillations.


CLS 106/134.1
TXT With element or inorganic compound except water:

    Compositions under subclass 125.1 which contain, in addition to the seed or
    tuber material, elemental material or any inorganic compound except water.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 124.1, (4) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.


CLS 106/134.2
TXT Elemental silicon or inorganic silicon compound:

    Compositions under subclass 134.1 wherein the element or the inorganic
    compound is elemental silicon or an inorganic compound containing silicon.


CLS 106/135.1
TXT With carbohydrate or derivative:

    Compositions under subclass 124.1 which contain, in addition to the
    proteinaceous material, a carbohydrate or derivative.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 124.1, (5) Note for the definition
    of a carbohydrate or its derivative.


CLS 106/136.1
TXT Cellulosic material:

    Compositions under subclass 135.1 wherein the carbohydrate or derivative is
    cellulose, a derivative of cellulose, or a naturally occurring material
    which has cellulose as one of its ingredients.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 126.2, (3) Note for the definition
    of a cellulose.

    (2)     Note. The term "cellulose derivative" herein is intended to include
    chemically modified cellulose wherein the carbon skeleton of the cellulose
    is unchanged or is indeterminate.

    (3)     Note. This subclass and indented subclasses provide for
    lignocellulosic material (e.g., wood, bark, etc.), relatively pure
    cellulose (e.g., cotton linters, etc.), regenerated cellulose (e.g.,
    cellophane and rayon), or chemically modified forms of cellulose (e.g.,
    pyroxylin, viscose, etc.) for which there is no provision elsewhere.


CLS 106/137.1
TXT Lignocellulosic material (e.g., flock, sawdust, wood, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 136.1 wherein the cellulosic material is a
    lignocellulosic material.

    (1)     Note. Lignocellulosic material is raw vegetable matter consisting
    primarily of cellulose, primarily of cellulose and lignin, or primarily of
    cellulose and lignin and minor amounts of carbohydrate and resin.

    (2)     Note. Lignin is a noncarbohydrate, polymeric substance found in
    wood and woody plants which functions as a natural plastic binder for the
    cellulose fibers. It is isolated directly from wood or wood products or
    from the treatment of wood, e.g., waste sulfite liquor or black liquor. The
    structure of the lignin monomer is not completely known.


CLS 106/137.2
TXT Cork or peat:

    Compositions under subclass 137.1 wherein the lignocellulosic material is
    the exterior layer of the bark of the Cork Oak Tree or cork, per se, or
    partially decayed plant matter formed in water-saturated environments, such
    as bogs and marshes.


CLS 106/137.3
TXT With nonproteinaceous noncarbohydrate hetero ring compound:

    Compositions under subclass 137.1 which contain, in addition to the
    lignocellulosic material, a nonproteinaceous noncarbohydrate organic
    compound having a hetero ring.

    (1)     Note. Hetero ring is a ring having only carbon and at least one
    atom from the group consisting of nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, selenium and
    tellurium as ring members.


CLS 106/137.4
TXT With nonproteinaceous phosphorus or boron compound or organic compound
    containing silicon:

    Compositions under subclass 137.1 which contain, in addition to the
    lignocellulosic material, a nonproteinaceous compound of phosphorus or
    boron or an organic compound which has at least one silicon atom therein.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 124.1, (4) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.


CLS 106/137.5
TXT With natural resin or derivative:

    Compositions under subclass 137.1 which contain, in addition to the
    lignocellulosic material, a natural resin or a chemical modification of a
    natural resin.

    (1)     Note. Natural resins include but are not limited to shellac, copals
    from various sources (e.g., congo, manila, etc.), amber, dammar, dead
    dammar, gum rosin, japan, japan varnish, rosin (colophony), tall oil
    (liquid rosin), wood rosin, burgundy pitch, gurjun balsam, canada balsam,
    sandrac, mastic, accroides, benzoin, elemi, gamboge, gum thus, venice
    turpentine, bordeaux turpentine, abietic acid, and pimaric acid.

    (2)     Note. Examples of derivatives included herein are hydrogenated,
    esterified, polymerized, and sulfurized resins, or salts thereof.


CLS 106/137.6
TXT With nonproteinaceous organic compound containing sulfur or nitrogen:

    Compositions under subclass 137.1 which contain, in addition to the
    lignocellulosic material, a nonproteinaceous organic compound which has at
    least one sulfur or nitrogen atom therein.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 124.1, (4) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.


CLS 106/137.7
TXT With nonproteinaceous organic compound containing oxygen except wax:

    Compositions under subclass 137.1 which contain, in addition to the
    lignocellulosic material, a nonproteinaceous organic compound which has at
    least one oxygen atom therein except wax.


CLS 106/137.71
TXT The oxygen is part of a -C(=O)O- group:

    Compositions under subclass 137.7 wherein the nonproteinaceous organic
    compound containing oxygen has a carboxylate group (i.e., -C(=O)O-).


CLS 106/138.1
TXT Cellulose xanthate or viscose or cuprammonium cellulose:

    Compositions under subclass 136.1 wherein the cellulosic material is
    cellulose xanthate or viscose or cellulose in cupra-ammonium solution.

    (1)     Note. Cellulose xanthate or viscose is a cellulose derivative with
    the group:

    (2)     Note. The viscose process is based on the reaction of carbon
    disulfide with the sodium salt of cellulose to yield a


            xanthate, which forms a viscous colloidal solution in dilute
    aqueous alkali.


CLS 106/139.1
TXT Cellulose ester or salt thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 136.1 wherein the cellulosic material is the
    product of the reaction of a hydroxyl group of cellulose with an acid.

    (1)     Note. The esterifying acid may be organic or inorganic.


CLS 106/139.2
TXT With nonproteinaceous organic compound containing sulfur or nitrogen:

    Compositions under subclass 139.1 which contain, in addition to the
    cellulose ester or salt thereof, a nonproteinaceous organic compound which
    has at least one sulfur or nitrogen atom therein.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 124.1, (4) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.


CLS 106/139.3
TXT With nonproteinaceous organic compound containing oxygen except wax:

    Compositions under subclass 139.1 which contain, in addition to the
    cellulose ester or salt thereof, a nonproteinaceous organic compound which
    has at least one oxygen atom therein except wax.


CLS 106/140.1
TXT Cellulose ether or salt thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 136.1 wherein the cellulosic material is a
    compound having the general formula ROR4, wherein RO- is the cellulose
    residue moiety and R4 is an ether-forming radical.

    (1)     Note. Cellulose ether is made by etherifying the hydroxyl groups of
    cellulose.


CLS 106/140.2
TXT With natural resin or derivative:

    Compositions under subclass 140.1 which contain, in addition to the
    cellulose ether or salt thereof, a natural resin or a chemical modification
    of a natural resin.

    (1)     Note. Natural resins include but are not limited to shellac, copals
    from various sources (e.g., congo, manila, etc.), amber, dammar, dead
    dammar, gum rosin, japan, japan varnish, rosin (colophony), tall oil
    (liquid rosin), wood rosin, burgundy pitch, gurjun balsam, canada balsam,
    sandrac, mastic, accroides, benzoin, elemi, gamboge, gum thus, venice
    turpentine, bordeaux turpentine, abietic acid, and pimaric acid.

    (2)     Note. Examples of derivatives included herein are hydrogenated,
    esterified, polymerized, and sulfurized resins, or salts thereof.


CLS 106/140.3
TXT With nonproteinaceous organic compound containing oxygen except wax:

    Compositions under subclass 140.1 which contain, in addition to the
    cellulose ether or salt thereof, a nonproteinaceous organic compound which
    has at least one oxygen atom therein except wax.


CLS 106/141.1
TXT With nonproteinaceous noncarbohydrate hetero ring compound:

    Compositions under subclass 136.1 which contain, in addition to the
    cellulosic material, a nonproteinaceous noncarbohydrate organic compound
    having a hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Hetero ring is a ring having only carbon and at least one
    atom from the group consisting of nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, selenium, and
    tellurium as ring members.


CLS 106/142.1
TXT With nonproteinaceous organic compound containing sulfur or nitrogen:

    Compositions under subclass 136.1 which contain, in addition to the
    cellulosic material, a nonproteinaceous organic compound which has at least
    one sulfur or nitrogen atom therein.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 124.1, (4) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.


CLS 106/143.1
TXT With nonproteinaceous organic compound containing oxygen except wax:

    Compositions under subclass 136.1 which contain, in addition to the
    cellulosic material, a nonproteinaceous organic compound which has at least
    one oxygen atom therein except wax.


CLS 106/144.1
TXT Dextrin or derivative, carbohydrate gum or derivative (e.g., arabic,
    tragacanth, guar, karaya, agar agar, algin, irish moss, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 135.1 wherein the carbohydrate is dextrin,
    carbohydrate gum, or derivative thereof.

    (1)     Note. Dextrin consists of various gummy polysaccharides produced by
    thermal or acid degradation of starch.

    (2)     Note. Carbohydrate gums are highly branched polysaccharides
    composed of two or more monosaccharides, and are exudations of plants
    produced by the plant to cover wounds and to prevent attack by organisms.

    (3)     Note. Carbohydrate gums include but are not limited to arabic,
    tragacanth, xanthan, galactomannan, irish moss, carrageenan, karaya, agar
    agar, algin, guar, xylogalactan, and glucomannan.

    (4)     Note. Examples of derivatives included herein are esterified,
    etherified, sulfonated, and borated.

    (5)     Note. The term "derivative" in this and indented subclasses is
    intended to include a chemical modification of the carbohydrate gum or
    dextrin wherein the carbon skeleton of the carbohydrate gum or dextrin is
    not destroyed or wherein the carbon skeleton of the carbohydrate gum or
    dextrin is indeterminate.


CLS 106/144.2
TXT With nonproteinaceous phosphorus or boron compound or organic compound
    containing silicon:

    Compositions under subclass 144.1 which contain, in addition to the dextrin
    or derivative thereof, the carbohydrate gum or derivative thereof, a
    nonproteinaceous compound of phosphorus or boron or an organic compound
    which has at least one silicon atom therein.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 124.1, (4) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.


CLS 106/144.3
TXT With natural resin or derivative:

    Compositions under subclass 144.1 which contain, in addition to the dextrin
    or derivative thereof, the carbohydrate gum or derivative thereof, a
    natural resin or a chemical modification of a natural resin.

    (1)     Note. Natural resins include but are not limited to shellac, copals
    from various sources (e.g., congo, manila, etc.), amber, dammar, dead
    dammar, gum rosin, japan, japan varnish, rosin (colophony), tall oil
    (liquid rosin), wood rosin, burgundy pitch, gurjun balsam, canada balsam,
    sandrac, mastic, accroides, benzoin, elemi, gamboge, gum thus, venice
    turpentine, bordeaux turpentine, abietic acid, and pimaric acid.

    (2)     Note. Examples of derivatives included herein are hydrogenated,
    esterified, polymerized, and sulfurized resins, or salts thereof.


CLS 106/144.4
TXT With lanolin, fat, or fatty oil:

    Compositions under subclass 144.1 which contain, in addition to the dextrin
    or derivative thereof, the carbohydrate gum or derivative thereof, a fat,
    fatty oil, or lanolin.

    (1)     Note. Definitions:

    (a)     By "fat" and "fatty oil" are meant the glyceryl triester
    (triglyceride) of the same or different higher fatty acids (e.g., oleic,
    myristic, palmitic, stearic, linolenic, etc.) or mixtures thereof present
    in a single oil or fat (e.g., lard, tallow, castor oil, etc.);

    (b)     By "lanolin" is meant cholesterol esters of higher fatty acids.


CLS 106/144.5
TXT With terpene or derivative:

    Compositions under subclass 144.1 which contain, in addition to the dextrin
    or derivative thereof, the carbohydrate gum or derivative thereof, a
    terpene or a chemical modification of a terpene.

    (1)     Note. Terpene denotes a hydrocarbon having two or more isoprene
    units (C5H8). Most terpenes have carbon skeleton of 10, 15, 20, or 30 atoms.

    (3)     Note. The term "derivative" herein is intended to include a
    chemical modification of the terpene wherein the terpene structure is not
    destroyed or wherein the terpene structure is indeterminate.


CLS 106/144.6
TXT With nonproteinaceous organic compound containing sulfur or nitrogen:

    Compositions under subclass 144.1 which contain, in addition to the dextrin
    or derivative thereof, the carbohydrate gum or derivative thereof, a
    nonproteinaceous organic compound which has at least one sulfur or nitrogen
    atom therein.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 124.1, (4) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.


CLS 106/144.7
TXT With nonproteinaceous organic compound containing oxygen except wax:

    Compositions under subclass 144.1 which contain, in addition to the dextrin
    or derivative thereof, the carbohydrate gum or derivative thereof, a
    nonproteinaceous organic compound which has at least one oxygen atom
    therein except wax.


CLS 106/144.71
TXT The oxygen is part of a -C(=O)O- group:

    Compositions under subclass 144.7 wherein the nonproteinaceous organic
    compound containing oxygen has a carboxylate group (i.e., -C(=O)O-).


CLS 106/144.72
TXT Dihydric or polyhydric alcohol:

    Compositions under subclass 144.7 wherein the nonproteinaceous organic
    compound containing oxygen is an alcohol having two or more -OH groups.


CLS 106/145.1
TXT Starch or derivative:

    Compositions under subclass 135.1 wherein the carbohydrate is a compound
    containing amylose and amylopectin as its main components or derivatives
    thereof.

    (1)     Note. Starches are heterogenous in that the amylose and amylopectin
    occur in different ratios to each other.

    (2)     Note. Included herein are starch fractions such as amylose and
    amylopectin as well as modified starches (e.g., thin boiling starches,
    etc.).


CLS 106/145.2
TXT With natural resin or derivative:

    Compositions under subclass 145.1 which contain, in addition to the starch
    or derivative thereof, a natural resin or a chemical modification of a
    natural resin.

    (1)     Note. Natural resins include but are not limited to shellac, copals
    from various sources (e.g., congo, manila, etc.), amber, dammar, dead
    dammar, gum rosin, japan, japan varnish, rosin (colophony), tall oil
    (liquid rosin), wood rosin, burgundy pitch, gurjun balsam, canada balsam,
    sandrac, mastic, accroides, benzoin, elemi, gamboge, gum thus, venice
    turpentine, bordeaux turpentine, abietic acid, and pimaric acid.

    (2)     Note. Examples of derivatives included herein are hydrogenated,
    esterified, polymerized, and sulfurized resins, or salts thereof.


CLS 106/145.3
TXT With lanolin, lecithin, fat, or fatty oil:

    Compositions under subclass 145.1 which contain, in addition to the starch
    or derivative thereof, a fat, fatty oil, lecithin, or lanolin.

    (1)     Note. Definitions:

    (a)     By "fat" and "fatty oil" are meant the glyceryl triester
    (triglyceride) of the same or different higher fatty acids (e.g., oleic,
    myristic, palmitic, stearic, linolenic, etc.) or mixtures thereof present
    in a single oil or fat (e.g., lard, tallow, castor oil, etc.);

    (b)     By "lanolin" is meant cholesterol esters of higher fatty acids;

    (c)     By "lecithin" is meant a mixture of the diglycerides of stearic,
    palmitic, and oleic acids, linked to the choline ester of phosphoric acid.

            Lecithin has the following structure:



            wherein the R's are the same or different, and are acyclic
    hydrocarbon radicals of at least seven carbon atoms chain length.


CLS 106/145.4
TXT With nonproteinaceous organic compound containing sulfur or nitrogen:

    Compositions under subclass 145.1 which contain, in addition to the starch
    or derivative thereof, a nonproteinaceous organic compound which has at
    least one sulfur or nitrogen atom therein.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 124.1, (4) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.


CLS 106/145.5
TXT With nonproteinaceous organic compound containing oxygen except wax:

    Compositions under subclass 145.1 which contain, in addition to the starch
    or derivative thereof, a nonproteinaceous organic compound which has at
    least one oxygen atom therein except wax.


CLS 106/146.1
TXT Sugar or hydrogenated sugar (e.g., sorbitol, maltitol, xylitol, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 135.1 wherein the carbohydrate is a sugar or a
    sugar that has undergone hydrogenation.

    (1)     Note. Sugar is a carbohydrate which has one or more saccharide
    units. The ending of the names of most sugars is -ose.

    (2)     Note. Examples of sugars included herein are sucrose, glucose,
    fructose, and maltose.


CLS 106/146.2
TXT With natural resin or derivative:

    Compositions under subclass 146.1 which contain, in addition to the sugar
    or the hydrogenated sugar, a natural resin or a chemical modification of a
    natural resin.

    (1)     Note. Natural resins include but are not limited to shellac, copals
    from various sources (e.g., congo, manila, etc.), amber, dammar, dead
    dammar, gum rosin, japan, japan varnish, rosin (colophony), tall oil
    (liquid rosin), wood rosin, burgundy pitch, gurjun balsam, canada balsam,
    sandrac, mastic, accroides, benzoin, elemi, gamboge, gum thus, venice
    turpentine, bordeaux turpentine, abietic acid, and pimaric acid.

    (2)     Note. Examples of derivatives included herein are hydrogenated,
    esterified, polymerized, and sulfurized resins, or salts thereof.


CLS 106/146.3
TXT With lanolin, lecithin, fat, or fatty oil:

    Compositions under subclass 146.1 which contain, in addition to the sugar
    or the hydrogenated sugar, a fat, fatty oil, lecithin, or lanolin.

    (1)     Note. Definitions:

    (a)     By "fat" and "fatty oil" are meant the glyceryl triester
    (triglyceride) of the same or different higher fatty acids (e.g., oleic,
    myristic, palmitic, stearic, linolenic, etc.) or mixtures thereof present
    in a single oil or fat (e.g., lard, tallow, castor oil, etc.);

    (b)     By "lanolin" is meant cholesterol esters of higher fatty acids;

    (c)     By "lecithin" is meant a mixture of the diglycerides of stearic,
    palmitic, and oleic acids, linked to the choline ester of phosphoric acid.

            Lecithin has the following structure:



            wherein the R's are the same or different, and are acyclic
    hydrocarbon radicals of at least seven carbon atoms chain length.


CLS 106/146.4
TXT With nonproteinaceous organic compound containing sulfur or nitrogen:

    Compositions under subclass 146.1 which contain, in addition to the sugar
    or the hydrogenated sugar, a nonproteinaceous organic compound which has at
    least one sulfur or nitrogen atom therein.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 124.1, (4) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.


CLS 106/146.5
TXT With nonproteinaceous organic compound containing oxygen except wax:

    Compositions under subclass 146.1 which contain, in addition to the sugar
    or the hydrogenated sugar, a nonproteinaceous organic compound which has at
    least one oxygen atom therein except wax.


CLS 106/146.51
TXT The oxygen is part of a -C(=O)O- group:

    Compositions under subclass 146.5 wherein the nonproteinaceous organic
    compound containing oxygen has a carboxylate group (i.e., -C(=O)O-).


CLS 106/147.1
TXT With natural resin or derivative:

    Compositions under subclass 124.1 which contain, in addition to the
    proteinaceous material, a natural resin or a chemical modification of a
    natural resin.

    (1)     Note.  Natural resins include but are not limited to shellac,
    copals from various sources (e.g., congo, manila, etc.), amber, dammar,
    dead dammar, gum rosin, japan, japan varnish, rosin (colophony), tall oil
    (liquid rosin), wood rosin, burgundy pitch, gurjun balsam, canada balsam,
    sandrac, mastic, accroides, benzoin, elemi, gamboge, gum thus, venice
    turpentine, bordeaux turpentine, abietic acid, and pimaric acid.

    (2)     Note. Examples of derivatives included herein are hydrogenated,
    esterified, polymerized, and sulfurized resins, or salts thereof.


CLS 106/147.2
TXT With nonproteinaceous phosphorus or boron compound or organic compound
    containing silicon:

    Compositions under subclass 147.1 which contain, in addition to the natural
    resin or derivative thereof, a nonproteinaceous compound of phosphorus or
    boron or an organic compound which has at least one silicon atom therein.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 124.1, (4) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.


CLS 106/147.3
TXT With lanolin, fat, or fatty oil:

    Compositions under subclass 147.1 which contain, in addition to the natural
    resin or derivative thereof, a fat, fatty oil, or lanolin.

    (1)     Note. Definitions:

    (a)     By "fat" and "fatty oil" are meant the glyceryl triester
    (triglyceride) of the same or different higher fatty acids (e.g., oleic,
    myristic, palmitic, stearic, linolenic, etc.) or mixtures thereof present
    in a single oil or fat (e.g., lard, tallow, castor oil, etc.);

    (b)     By "lanolin" is meant cholesterol esters of higher fatty acids


CLS 106/147.4
TXT With terpene or derivative:

    Compositions under subclass 147.1 which contain, in addition to the natural
    resin or derivative thereof, a terpene or a chemical modification of a
    terpene.

    (1)     Note. Terpene denotes a hydrocarbon having two or more isoprene
    units (C5H8). Most terpenes have carbon skeleton of 10, 15, 20, or 30 atoms.

    (3)     Note. The term "derivative" herein is intended to include a
    chemical modification of the terpene wherein the terpene structure is not
    destroyed or wherein the terpene structure is indeterminate.


CLS 106/147.5
TXT With nonproteinaceous organic compound containing sulfur or nitrogen:

    Compositions under subclass 147.1 which contain, in addition to the natural
    resin or derivative thereof, a nonproteinaceous organic compound which has
    at least one sulfur or nitrogen atom therein.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 124.1, (4) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.


CLS 106/147.6
TXT With nonproteinaceous organic compound containing oxygen except wax:

    Compositions under subclass 147.1 which contain, in addition to the natural
    resin or derivative thereof, a nonproteinaceous organic compound which has
    at least one oxygen atom therein except wax.


CLS 106/147.61
TXT The oxygen is part of a -C(=O)O- group:

    Compositions under subclass 147.6 wherein the nonproteinaceous organic
    compound containing oxygen has a carboxylate group (i.e., -C(=O)O-).


CLS 106/148.1
TXT With lanolin, lecithin, fat, or fatty oil:

    Compositions under subclass 124.1 which contain, in addition to the
    proteinaceous material, a fat, fatty oil, lanolin, or lecithin.

    (1)     Note. Definitions:

    (a)     By "fat" and "fatty oil" are meant the glyceryl triester
    (triglyceride) of the same or different higher fatty acids (e.g., oleic,
    myristic, palmitic, stearic, linolenic, etc.) or mixtures thereof present
    in a single oil or fat (e.g., lard, tallow, castor oil, etc.);

    (b)     By "lanolin" is meant cholesterol esters of higher fatty acids;

    (c)     By "lecithin" is meant a mixture of the diglycerides of stearic,
    palmitic, and oleic acids, linked to the choline ester of phosphoric acid.

            Lecithin has the following structure:



            wherein the R's are the same or different, and are acyclic
    hydrocarbon radicals of at least seven carbon atoms chain length.


CLS 106/148.2
TXT With nonproteinaceous phosphorus or boron compound or organic compound
    containing silicon:

    Compositions under subclass 148.1 which contain, in addition to the
    lanolin, lecithin, fat, or fatty oil, a nonproteinaceous compound of
    phosphorus or boron or an organic compound which has at least one silicon
    atom therein.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 124.1, (4) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.


CLS 106/148.3
TXT With terpene or derivative:

    Compositions under subclass 148.1 which contain, in addition to the
    lanolin, lecithin, fat, or fatty oil, a terpene or a chemical modification
    of a terpene.

    (1)     Note. Terpene denotes a hydrocarbon having two or more isoprene
    units (C5H8). Most terpenes have carbon skeleton of 10, 15, 20, or 30 atoms.

    (2)     Note. The term "derivative" herein is intended to include a
    chemical modification of the terpene wherein the terpene structure is not
    destroyed or wherein the terpene structure is indeterminate.


CLS 106/148.4
TXT With nonproteinaceous organic compound containing sulfur or nitrogen:

    Compositions under subclass 145.1 which contain, in addition to the
    lanolin, lecithin, fat, or fatty oil, a nonproteinaceous organic compound
    which has at least one sulfur or nitrogen atom therein.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 124.1, (4) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.


CLS 106/148.5
TXT With nonproteinaceous organic compound containing oxygen except wax:

    Compositions under subclass 148.1 which contain, in addition to the
    lanolin, lecithin, fat, or fatty oil, a nonproteinaceous organic compound
    which has at least one oxygen atom therein except wax.


CLS 106/148.51
TXT The oxygen is part of a -C(=O)O- group:

    Compositions under subclass 148.5 wherein the nonproteinaceous organic
    compound containing oxygen has a carboxylate (-C(=O)O-) group.


CLS 106/148.52
TXT Dihydric or polyhydric alcohol:

    Compositions under subclass 148.5 wherein the nonproteinaceous organic
    compound containing oxygen is an alcohol with two or more hydroxyl (-OH)
    groups.


CLS 106/149.1
TXT With terpene or derivative:

    Compositions under subclass 124.1 which contain, in addition to the
    proteinaceous material, a terpene or a chemical modification of a terpene.

    (1)     Note. Terpene denotes a hydrocarbon having two or more isoprene
    units (C5H8). Most terpenes have carbon skeleton of 10, 15, 20, or 30 atoms.

    (3)     Note. The term "derivative" herein is intended to include a
    chemical modification of the terpene wherein the terpene structure is not
    destroyed or wherein the terpene structure is indeterminate.


CLS 106/150.1
TXT With nonproteinaceous hetero ring compound:

    Compositions under subclass 124.1 which contain, in addition to the
    proteinaceous material, a nonproteinaceous organic compound having a hetero
    ring.

    (1)     Note. Hetero ring is a ring having only carbon and at least one
    atom from the group consisting of nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, selenium and
    tellurium as ring members.


CLS 106/150.2
TXT With nonproteinaceous organic compound containing sulfur or nitrogen:

    Compositions under subclass 150.1 which contain, in addition to the
    nonproteinaceous hetero ring compound, a nonproteinaceous organic compound
    which has at least one sulfur or nitrogen atom therein.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 124.1, (4) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.


CLS 106/150.3
TXT With nonproteinaceous organic compound containing oxygen except wax:

    Compositions under subclass 150.1 which contain, in addition to the
    nonproteinaceous hetero ring compound, a nonproteinaceous organic compound
    which has at least one oxygen atom therein except wax.


CLS 106/151.1
TXT With nonproteinaceous phosphorus compound:

    Compositions under subclass 124.1 which contain, in addition to the
    proteinaceous material, a nonproteinaceous compound of phosphorus.


CLS 106/151.2
TXT With nonproteinaceous organic compound containing oxygen:

    Compositions under subclass 151.1 which contain, in addition to the
    nonproteinaceous phosphorus compound, a nonproteinaceous organic compound
    which has at least one oxygen atom therein.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 124.1, (4) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.


CLS 106/152.1
TXT With nonproteinaceous boron compound:

    Compositions under subclass 124.1 which contain, in addition to the
    proteinaceous material, a nonproteinaceous compound of boron.


CLS 106/153.1
TXT With organic compound containing silicon:

    Compositions under subclass 124.1 which contain, in addition to the
    proteinaceous material, an organic compound which has at least one silicon
    atom therein.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 124.1, (4) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.


CLS 106/154.11
TXT With nonproteinaceous organic compound containing sulfur:

    Compositions under subclass 124.1 which contain, in addition to the
    proteinaceous material, a nonproteinaceous organic compound which has at
    least one sulfur atom therein.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 124.1, (4) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.


CLS 106/154.2
TXT Carbon double bonded directly to the sulfur:

    Compositions under subclass 154.11 wherein the sulfur is double bonded
    directly to a carbon.


CLS 106/154.3
TXT Nitrogen and sulfur in the same compound:

    Compositions under subclass 154.11 wherein the nonproteinaceous organic
    compound has both nitrogen and sulfur.


CLS 106/154.4
TXT Sulfonated compound of indeterminate structure:

    Compositions under subclass 154.11 wherein the nonproteinaceous organic
    compound containing sulfur is a sulfonation chemical modification of
    indeterminate structure.


CLS 106/155.1
TXT With nonproteinaceous organic compound containing nitrogen:

    Compositions under subclass 124.1 which contain, in addition to the
    proteinaceous material, a nonproteinaceous organic compound which has at
    least one nitrogen atom therein.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 124.1, (4) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.


CLS 106/155.2
TXT Nitrogen and oxygen in the same compound:

    Compositions under subclass 155.1 wherein the nonproteinaceous organic
    compound has both nitrogen and oxygen.


CLS 106/155.21
TXT Nitrogen single bonded directly to carbon of a -C(=O)- group:

    Compositions under subclass 155.2 wherein the nonproteinaceous organic
    compound has the carbon of a -C(=O)- group bonded directly to the nitrogen
    by a single bond.


CLS 106/155.22
TXT Alkanol amine or salt thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 155.2 wherein the nonproteinaceous organic
    compound has an amino nitrogen attached directly to the carbon of an alkyl
    alcohol, or salt thereof.


CLS 106/155.23
TXT Tertiary amine oxide:

    Compositions under subclass 155.2 wherein the nonproteinaceous organic
    compound has an oxygen attached to tertiary nitrogen by ionic bonding
    (i.e., R3N+O-, where R is an organic group).


CLS 106/156.1
TXT With nonproteinaceous organic compound containing oxygen except wax:

    Compositions under subclass 124.1 which contain, in addition to the
    proteinaceous material, a nonproteinaceous organic compound which has at
    least one oxygen atom therein except wax.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 124.1, (4) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.


CLS 106/156.2
TXT The oxygen is part of a -C(=O)O- group:

    Compositions under subclass 156.1 wherein the nonproteinaceous organic
    compound containing oxygen has a carboxylate group (i.e., -C(=O)O-).


CLS 106/156.21
TXT Carbon bonded directly to the single bonded oxygen of the -C(=O)O- group:

    Compositions under subclass 156.2 wherein the nonproteinaceous organic
    -C(=O)O- group containing compound has the single-bonded oxygen of the
    -C(=O)O- group single bonded to an additional carbon atom.


CLS 106/156.22
TXT Plural -C(=O)O- groups:

    Compositions under subclass 156.21 wherein the nonproteinaceous organic
    -C(=O)O- group containing compound has two or more carboxylate groups.


CLS 106/156.23
TXT Metal salt:

    Compositions under subclass 156.2 wherein the carboxyl hydrogen of a
    carboxylic acid is replaced by a metal.


CLS 106/156.24
TXT Metal salt of higher fatty acid:

    Compositions under subclass 156.23 wherein the carboxyl hydrogen of a
    higher fatty acid is replaced by a metal.

    (1)     Note. By "higher fatty acid" is meant aliphatic monocarboxylic acid
    containing an unbroken chain of at least seven carbon atoms bonded to a
    carboxyl group (e.g., lauric, palmitic, stearic, oleic, ricinoleic,
    linoleic, behenolic, etc.) Where there are several unbroken chains of
    carbon atoms bonded to the -C(=O)O- group, one of the chains must contain
    at least seven carbon atoms.


CLS 106/156.25
TXT With additional nonproteinaceous organic compound containing oxygen:

    Compositions under subclass 156.2 which contain, in addition to the organic
    compound containing the carboxylate group, a nonproteinaceous organic
    compound which has at least one oxygen atom therein.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 124.1, (4) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.


CLS 106/156.3
TXT Carbonyl group containing:

    Compositions under subclass 156.1 wherein the nonproteinaceous organic
    compound containing oxygen has a carbonyl group (i.e., -C(=O)-)


CLS 106/156.31
TXT With additional nonproteinaceous organic compound containing oxygen:

    Compositions under subclass 156.3 which contain, in addition to the organic
    compound containing the carbonyl group, a nonproteinaceous organic compound
    which has at least one oxygen atom therein.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 124.1, (4) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.


CLS 106/156.4
TXT Ether except dialkylene or polyalkylene glycol:

    Compositions under subclass 156.1 wherein the nonproteinaceous organic
    compound containing oxygen has an ether group (i.e.,-C-O-C-) except
    dialkylene or polyalkylene glycol.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156.5,  for compositions containing dialkylene or polyalkylene glycol.


CLS 106/156.5
TXT Dihydric or polyhydric alcohol:

    Compositions under subclass 156.1 wherein the nonproteinaceous organic
    compound containing oxygen is an alcohol with two or more hydroxyl (-OH)
    groups.


CLS 106/156.51
TXT Glycerol:

    Compositions under subclass 156.5 wherein the nonproteinaceous organic
    compound containing oxygen is a trihydric alcohol with the following
    structure:



CLS 106/157.1
TXT With bituminous or tarry residue, hydrocarbon, or naturally occurring wax:

    Compositions under subclass 124.1 which contain, in addition to the
    proteinaceous material, (a) a composition or compound having the
    characteristics of a tar or pitch no matter what the origin, (b) an organic
    compound consisting exclusively of the elements carbon and hydrogen, or (c)
    a naturally occurring low-melting organic mixture or compound of
    hydrocarbons or esters of fatty acids and alcohols having the
    characteristics of wax (solid at room temperature).

    (1)     Note. Examples of components included herein are alkanes, alkenes,
    olefins, montan wax, ceresin wax, carnauba wax, all asphalts, bitumens,
    pitches and tars from coal, mineral oil, cotton seed pitch and the residue
    from the destructive distillation of wood, and natural oil distillations.


CLS 106/157.2
TXT With element or inorganic compound except water:

    Compositions under subclass 124.1 which contain, in addition to the
    proteinaceous material, elemental material or any inorganic compound except
    water.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 124.1, (4) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.


CLS 106/157.3
TXT Mineral acid (e.g., sulfuric, nitric, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 157.2 wherein the inorganic compound is an
    inorganic acid.

    (1).    Note. Mineral acids include but are not limited to sulfuric,
    nitric, hydrochloric, and phosphoric acids.

    (2)     Note. All mineral acids are highly irritant and corrosive to human
    tissue.


CLS 106/157.4
TXT Ammonium hydroxide (i.e., ammonium hydrate, aqua ammonia, ammonia solution)
    or ammonia:

    Compositions under subclass 157.2 wherein the inorganic compound is
    ammonium hydroxide (NH4OH) or anhydrous ammonia (NH3).


CLS 106/157.5
TXT Elemental sulfur or inorganic sulfur compound:

    Compositions under subclass 157.2 wherein the element or inorganic compound
    is elemental sulfur or an inorganic compound containing sulfur.


CLS 106/157.51
TXT Aluminum sulfate (e.g., alum, pearl alum, cake alum, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 157.5 wherein the inorganic compound containing
    sulfur is Al2(SO4)3.


CLS 106/157.6
TXT Elemental halogen, inorganic halogen compound, or inorganic nitrate
    compound:

    Compositions under subclass 157.2 wherein the inorganic compound or element
    is an inorganic compound containing halogen or elemental halogen or an
    inorganic compound having a nitrate (NO3_) radical.


CLS 106/157.7
TXT Elemental silicon or inorganic silicon compound:

    Compositions under subclass 157.2 wherein the element or inorganic compound
    is elemental silicon or an inorganic compound containing silicon.


CLS 106/157.71
TXT Clay:

    Compositions under subclass 157.7 wherein the inorganic compound containing
    silicon is a naturally occurring, fine grained, earthy, hydrated aluminum
    silicate containing composition; i.e., clay.

    (1)     Note. The term "clay" includes materials commonly known as
    attapulgite, bentonite, fuller's earth, halloysite, illite, kaolinite, and
    montmorillonite.


CLS 106/157.8
TXT Metal oxide:

    Compositions under subclass 157.2 wherein the inorganic compound is a metal
    oxide.


CLS 106/157.9
TXT Alkali or alkaline earth metal hydroxide (e.g., caustic soda, caustic
    alkali, caustic lime, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 157.2 wherein the inorganic compound is an
    alkali metal hydroxide or an alkaline earth metal hydroxide.

    (1)     Note. The alkali metals are lithium, sodium, potassium, rubidium,
    cesium, and francium.

    (2)     Note. The alkaline earth metals are magnesium, calcium, strontium,
    barium, and radium.


CLS 106/158.1
TXT Albumin or derivative:

    Compositions under subclass 124.1 wherein the proteinaceous material is
    albumin or a chemical modification of albumin.

    (1)     Note. Albumins are proteins characterized by heat coagulability and
    solubility in dilute salt solution. The most notable albumins are
    ovalbumin, serum albumin, lactalbumin, grain and soybean albumins.

    (2)     Note. Example of derivative included herein is the metal salt of
    the albumin.


CLS 106/159.1
TXT Casein or derivative:

    Compositions under subclass 124.1 wherein the proteinaceous material is
    casein or a chemical modification of casein.

    (1)     Note. Casein is the principal protein in milk. It is a
    phosphoprotein consisting of about 15 amino acids and has a molecular
    weight ranging from 75,000 to 375,000.

    (2)     Note. Example of derivative included herein is the metal salt of
    the casein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124.2,  for compositions containing milk.


CLS 106/160.1
TXT Gelatin or collagen or derivative (e.g., glue, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 124.1 wherein the proteinaceous material is
    gelatin, collagen, or a chemical modification of gelatin or collagen.

    (1)     Note. Gelatin is derived from collagen by boiling skin, tendons,
    ligaments, bones, etc. with water.

    (2)     Note. Collagen is a protein with a molecular weight of about
    130,000. It is the main constituent of skin, connective tissue, and the
    organic substance of bones and teeth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124.4+, for compositions containing tissue derived from multicellular
    animal.


CLS 106/161.1
TXT Prolamine or derivative (e.g., zein, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 124.1 wherein the proteinaceous material is
    prolamine or derivative thereof.

    (1)     Note. Prolamines are those proteins contained in cereal grains
    which are soluble in strong alcohol and insoluble in water. Prolamine from
    corn is known as zein; from wheat, gleadin; from rye, hordein.


CLS 106/162.1
TXT Carbohydrate or derivative containing:

    Coating or plastic composition containing a carbohydrate or derivative
    thereof.

    (1)     Note. The term "carbohydrate or derivative" in this and indented
    subclasses corresponds to class 536 subclass 1.1 definition; i.e.,
    saccharide whose monomeric units are polyhydroxy mono-aldehydes or
    polyhydroxy mono-ketones, having the formula Cn(H2O)n (wherein n is five or
    six), or the corresponding cyclic hemiacetals thereof; or the reaction
    derivatives thereof in which the carbon skeleton and the carbonyl function
    or hemi-acetal function of the saccharide unit are not destroyed.

    (2)     Note. The expression "organic compound" in this and indented
    subclasses corresponds to the Class 260 class definition; i.e., compounds
    containing carbon, which are further characterized by the presence in a
    molecule thereof of (a) two carbon atoms bonded together, (b) one atom of
    carbon bonded to at least one atom of hydrogen or halogen, or (c) one atom
    of carbon bonded to at least one atom of nitrogen by a single or double
    bond, with the proviso that HCN, CN-CN, HNCO, HNCS, cyanamide, cyanogen
    halides, fulminic acid, metal carbides, and graphite are excluded from
    being organic compounds.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, appropriate subclass for
    processes of production, purification, extraction, etc., of starch and
    sugar, and products of such processes.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 532+ for a
    nonstructural laminate including a layer comprising carbohydrate.

    435,    Chemistry: Molecular Biology and Microbiology, appropriate subclass
    for the liberation or treatment of carbohydrates by fermentation processes.
    Class 935, Genetic Engineering: Recombinant DNA Technology, Hybrid or Fused
    Cell Technology, and Related Manipulations of Nucleic Acids, which provides
    a search collection for processes of altering the genetic structure of
    micro-organisms; genes and methods of modifying genes and their expression;
    vectors and methods of modifying vectors; methods of introducing DNA into a
    cell; micro-organisms, per se, which have had their genetic sequence
    altered by recombinant DNA techniques or by cell fusion or by uptake of
    DNA; testing separation techniques; apparatus; and methods of use of
    vectors or of the genetically engineered micro-organisms; methods of gene
    therapy or genetic modification of living organisms.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, Class 523, subclasses 447+ and
    509, Class 524, subclasses 9+, 27+ 702+, 716, and 732+ for a carbohydrate
    or derivative nonreactant material in admixture with a synthetic resin or
    natural rubber and Classes 525, 526, 527, and 528 for a carbohydrate or
    derivative containing synthetic resin, and see Class 520, subclass 1 for an
    explanation of the type of polymer derived from a protein reactant which is
    proper for Class 520 (Note 9, C).

    536,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 1.11+, for a carbohydrate prepared by
    a synthesis other than hydrolytic conversion of a carbohydrate.

    935,    Genetic Engineering: Recombinant DNA Technology, Hybrid or Fused
    Cell Technology, and Related Manipulations of Nucleic Acids, which provides
    a search collection for processes of altering the genetic structure of
    micro-organisms; genes and methods of modifying genes and their expression;
    vectors and methods of modifying vectors; methods of introducing DNA into a
    cell; micro-organisms, per se, which have had their genetic sequence
    altered by recombinant DNA; testing; separation techniques; apparatus; and
    methods of use of vectors or of the genetically engineered micro-organisms;
    methods of gene therapy or genetic modification of living organisms.


CLS 106/162.2
TXT Aminopolysaccharide (e.g., heparin, glycosamine, mucopolysaccharide,
    chitin, hyaluronic acid, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 162.1 wherein the carbohydrate is a
    polysaccharide with an amino group therein.


CLS 106/162.5
TXT With lignocellulosic material (i.e., mixture of a lignocellulosic material
    and a carbohydrate material which is other than a lignocellulosic material
    or a component thereof):

    Compositions under subclass 162.1 which contain a lignocellulosic material
    in addition to the carbohydrate or derivative whereby the carbohydrate or
    derivative is not a lignocellulosic material or a constituent thereof.

    (1)     Note. Lignocellulosic material is raw vegetable matter consisting
    primarily of cellulose, primarily of cellulose and lignin, or primarily of
    cellulose and lignin and minor amounts of carbohydrate and resin.
    Lignocellulosic materials include but are not limited to: straw, bagasse,
    corn stalk, grass, wood pulp, wood, bark.

    (2)     Note. Lignin is a noncarbohydrate, polymeric substance found in
    wood and woody plants which functions as a natural plastic binder for the
    cellulose fibers. It is isolated directly from wood or wood products or
    from the treatment of wood, e.g., waste sulfite liquor or black liquor. The
    structure of the lignin monomer is not completely known.

    (3)     Note. See this class, subclass 163.01 for definition of cellulose.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162.6,  162.7, 162.8, and 162.9 for compositions containing carbohydrate or
    derivative and cellulose xanthate, cellulose ester or salt thereof,
    cellulose ether or salt thereof, or cellulose or derivative.

    164.01+, for compositions containing one or more lignocellulosic materials.


CLS 106/162.51
TXT The carbohydrate is starch:

    Compositions under subclass 162.5 wherein the carbohydrate is a
    polysaccharide in plants (e.g., corn, potatoes, tapioca, rice, wheat, etc.)
    which has amylose and amylopectin as the main ingredients.

    (1)     Note. Starches are heterogenous in that the amylose and amylopectin
    occur in different ratios to each other.

    (2)     Note. Included herein are starch fractions such as amylose and
    amylopectin as well as modified starches (e.g., thin boiling starches,
    etc.).


CLS 106/162.6
TXT With cellulose xanthate or viscose (i.e., mixture of cellulose xanthate or
    viscose and a carbohydrate material which is other than cellulose xanthate
    or viscose):

    Compositions under subclass 162.1 which contain cellulose xanthate or
    viscose in addition to the carbohydrate or derivative whereby the
    carbohydrate or derivative is not cellulose xanthate or viscose.

    (1)     Note. Cellulose xanthate or viscose is a cellulose derivative with
    the group:

    (2)     Note. The viscose process is based on the reaction of carbon
    disulfide with the sodium salt of cellulose to yield a xanthate, which
    forms a viscous colloidal solution in dilute aqueous alkali.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162.5,  162.7, 162.8, and 162.9 for compositions containing carbohydrate or
    derivative and lignocellulosic material, cellulose ester or salt, cellulose
    ether or salt, or cellulosic material.


CLS 106/162.7
TXT With cellulose ester or salt thereof (i.e., mixture of (A) a cellulose
    ester or salt thereof and (B) a carbohydrate material which is other than
    cellulose ester or salt of the same acid as in (A) differing only in the
    degree of esterification):

    Compositions under subclass 162.1 which contain (A) a cellulose ester or
    salt thereof in addition to (B) the carbohydrate or derivative thereof
    whereby the carbohydrate or derivative can not be a cellulose ester or salt
    of the same acid as in (A) differing only in the degree of esterification.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 168.01 for definition of cellulose
    ester or salt thereof.

    (2)     Note. This subclass provides for compositions containing both a and
    b as defined below:

    (a)     cellulose ester such as:

            (1) cellulose ester of a single acid (e.g., cellulose acetate,
    cellulose propionate, etc.),

            (2) cellulose ester of mixed acids (e.g., cellulose butyrate
    propionate, cellulose propionate isobutyrate, etc.), or

            (3) mixture of cellulose esters of the same acid differ only in the
    degree of esterification (e.g., pyroxylin - mixture of cellulose
    tetranitrate and cellulose trinitrate, mixture of cellulose acetate and
    cellulose triacetate, etc.), and

    (b)     carbohydrate or derivative.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162.5,  162.6, 162.8, and 162.9, for compositions containing carbohydrate
    or derivative and lignocellulosic material, cellulose xanthate, cellulose
    ether or salt, or cellulosic material.

    162.71, for compositions containing cellulose ester (e.g., cellulose
    nitrate, cellulose acetate, etc.) and a cellulosic material (e.g.,
    carboxymethyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose, etc.).

    162.72, for compositions containing two or more different cellulose esters
    (e.g., cellulose nitrate and cellulose acetate, cellulose propionate and
    cellulose acetate, cellulose propionate and cellulose propionate
    isobutyrate, etc.).

    169.01+, for compositions containing pyroxylin as the only carbohydrate or
    derivative and the only cellulose ester or derivative.


CLS 106/162.71
TXT The carbohydrate is a cellulosic material:

    Compositions under subclass 162.7 wherein the carbohydrate derivative is
    cellulose, chemically modified cellulose wherein the carbon skeleton of the
    cellulose is not destroyed, or a naturally occurring material which has
    cellulose as one of its ingredients.

    (1)     Note. See subclass 163.01 for definition of cellulose or derivative
    thereof.


CLS 106/162.72
TXT Diverse cellulose ester or salt thereof (i.e., mixture of two or more
    cellulose esters or salts of diverse acids or mixture of two or more
    cellulose mixed esters or salts of different diverse acids groups):

    Compositions under subclass 162.71 which contain (A) mixture of two or more
    cellulose esters or salts thereof whereby at least one cellulose ester or
    salt has a diverse acid group or (B) mixture of two or more mixed cellulose
    esters or salts thereof whereby at least one mixed cellulose ester or salt
    has a diverse mixed acids group.

    (1)     Note. Cellulose ester is a product of a reaction of a hydroxyl
    group of cellulose with an acid. The esterifying acid may be organic or
    inorganic.

    (2)     Note. This subclass provides for compositions containing two or
    more different cellulose esters (e.g., cellulose nitrate and cellulose
    acetate, cellulose propionate and cellulose acetate, cellulose propionate
    and cellulose propionate isobutyrate, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168.01+, for compositions containing cellulose mixed esters or mixture of
    cellulose esters of the same acid different only in the degree of
    esterification (e.g., cellulose acetate propionate, cellulose propionate
    and cellulose tripropionate, etc.).

    171.1,  for compositions containing mixture of cellulose acetate of
    differing degree of esterification (e.g., cellulose acetate and cellulose
    triacetate, etc.).


CLS 106/162.8
TXT With cellulose ether or salt thereof (i.e., mixture of (A) a cellulose
    ether or salt thereof and (B) a carbohydrate material which is other than
    cellulose ether or salt of the same etherifying radical as in (A) differing
    only in the degree of etherification):

    Compositions under subclass 162.1 which contain (A) a cellulose ether or
    salt thereof in addition to (B) the carbohydrate or derivative whereby the
    carbohydrate or derivative can not be a cellulose ether or salt of the same
    etherifying radical as in (A) differing only in the degree of
    etherification.

    (1)     Note. Cellulose ether is a cellulose derivative having a general
    formula ROR4, wherein RO- is the cellulose residue moiety and R4 is an
    ether forming radical.

    (2)     Note. Cellulose ether is made by etherifying the hydroxyl groups of
    cellulose.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162.82, for compositions containing mixture of cellulose ethers.


CLS 106/162.81
TXT The carbohydrate is starch or derivative:

    Compositions under subclass 162.8 wherein the carbohydrate is a
    polysaccharide in plants (e.g., corn, potatoes, tapioca, rice, wheat, etc.)
    which has amylose and amylopectin as the main ingredients or derivatives
    thereof.

    (1)     Note. Starches are heterogenous in that the amylose and amylopectin
    occur in different ratios to each other.

    (2)     Note. Included herein are starch fractions such as amylose and
    amylopectin as well as modified starches (e.g., thin boiling starches,
    etc.).


CLS 106/162.82
TXT The carbohydrate is diverse cellulose ether or salt thereof (i.e., mixture
    of two or more cellulose ethers or salts of diverse etherifying radicals or
    mixture of two or more cellulose mixed ethers or salts of different diverse
    etherifying radical groups):

    Compositions under subclass 162.8 wherein the carbohydrate derivative is a
    diverse cellulose ether or salt thereof or a diverse cellulose mixed ethers
    or salts thereof.

    (1)     Note. This subclass provides for compositions containing two or
    more different cellulose ethers or mixed ethers or salts thereof (e.g.,
    methyl cellulose and ethyl cellulose, methyl propyl cellulose and ethyl
    butyl cellulose, etc.).


CLS 106/162.9
TXT With cellulosic material (i.e., mixture of a cellulosic material and a
    carbohydrate material which is other than a cellulosic material):

    Compositions under subclass 162.1 which contain a) a naturally occurring
    material which has cellulose as one of its ingredients, cellulose, or a
    derivative thereof, and b) a carbohydrate or derivative thereof whereby the
    carbohydrate or derivative is not a cellulosic material.

    (1)     Note. See subclass 163.01 for definition of cellulose or derivative
    thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162.5,  162.6, 162.7, and 162.8, for compositions containing cellulose or
    other derivatives of cellulose and additional carbohydrate or derivative.


CLS 106/163.01
TXT Cellulosic material:

    Compositions under subclass 162.1 wherein the carbohydrate is cellulose
    with the following structure:

    or the reaction products wherein the carbon skeleton of the cellulose is
    not destroyed or a naturally occurring material which has cellulose as one
    of its ingredients.

    (1)     Note. This subclass and indented subclasses provide for
    lignocellulosic material (e.g., wood, bark, etc.), relatively pure
    cellulose (e.g., cotton linters, etc.), regenerated cellulose (e.g.,
    cellophane and rayon), or chemically modified forms of cellulose (e.g.,
    pyroxylin, viscose, etc.) for which there is no provision elsewhere.

    (2)     Note. The expression "organic compound" in this and indented
    subclasses corresponds to the Class 260 class definition; i.e., compounds
    containing carbon, which are further characterized by the presence in a
    molecule thereof of (a) two carbon atoms bonded together, (b) one atom of
    carbon bonded to at least one atom of hydrogen or halogen, or (c) one atom
    of carbon bonded to at least one atom of nitrogen by a single or double
    bond, with the proviso that HCN, CN-CN, HNCO, HNCS, cyanamide, cyanogen
    halides, fulminic acid, metal carbides, and graphite are excluded from
    being organic compounds.

    (3)     Note. The term "carbohydrate or derivative" in this and indented
    subclasses corresponds to Class 536 subclass 1.1 definition; i.e.,
    saccharide whose monomeric units are polyhydroxy mono-aldehydes or
    polyhydroxy mono-ketones, having the formula Cn(H2O)n (wherein n is five or
    six), or the corresponding cyclic hemiacetals thereof; or the reaction
    derivatives thereof in which the carbon skeleton and the carbonyl function
    or hemi-acetal function of the saccharide unit are not destroyed.

    (4)     Note. The term "alloy" in this and indented subclasses corresponds
    to Class 75 class definition; i.e., a union, possessing metallic properties
    of two or more metallic elements or of nonmetallic element(s) and metallic
    elements(s) which are not pure compounds and which are miscible with each
    other, which at least to a certain extent when molten forms a more or less
    homogeneous liquid having a metallic matrix and which does not separate
    into distinct layers when solid. Such combinations when solidified from a
    melt may consist of mechanical mixtures, entectics, entectoids, solid
    solutions, or in part of chemical compounds one or more of which may exist
    at the same time. Intermetallic compounds are considered alloys for
    purposes of classification.

    (5)     Note. The term "hetero ring" in this and indented subclasses
    corresponds to Class 532 class definition; i.e., a ring having only carbon
    and at least one atom from the group consisting of nitrogen, oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium and tellurium as ring members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15.05+, for compositions within this class containing fireproofing or
    biocidal agent.

    31.36+, for compositions within this class which are specialized for use as
    marking, writing, printing, and particularly subclass 31.37 for ink
    compositions containing cellulose or derivative thereof.

    166.01, 168.01, 169.01, and 172.1, for compositions containing cellulose
    xanthate, cellulose ester, cellulose nitrate, or cellulose ether.

    638+,   for compositions within this class containing inorganic settable
    ingredients.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 118.1 for inedible sausage
    casings, per se, including shirred casings, with more than nominal wall
    structure.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 1+ for processes of
    liberating cellulosic fibers from natural sources including chemical
    treatment, and subclasses 100+ for cellulosic fiber containing compositions
    which are deposited from liquid suspensions.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 582+ for compositions containing
    ultraviolet filtering material or other light transmission modifying
    materials.

    426,    Food or Edible Material: Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 105, 135, and 138+ for edible food casings or casings containing
    a food product.


    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles subclass 34.8 for a
    flexible casing with nominal wall structure for food products such as
    sausage, appropriate subclasses for a stock material product in the form of
    a single or plural layer web or sheet and particularly subclasses 227+ for
    such a product comprising intertangled strands or strand-portions, and
    subclasses 375+ for structurally defined or coated fiber or filament, or a
    mass thereof.

    536,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 56+ for cellulose or derivatives
    thereof, per se.


CLS 106/164.01
TXT Lignocellulosic material (e.g., wood, bark, straw, bagasse, wood pulp,
    etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 163.01 wherein the cellulosic material is raw
    vegetable matter consisting primarily of cellulose, primarily of lignin and
    cellulose, or primarily of lignin and cellulose and minor amounts of
    carbohydrate and resin.

    (1)     Note. Lignin is a noncarbohydrate, polymeric substance found in
    wood and woody plants which functions as a natural plastic binder for the
    cellulose fibers. It is isolated directly from wood or wood products or
    from the treatment of wood, e.g., waste sulfite liquor or black liquor. The
    structure of the lignin monomer is not completely known.

    (2)     Note. Lignocellulosic materials include but are not limited to:
    straw, bagasse, corn stalk, grass, wood pulp, wood, bark.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164.1,  for cork or 164.2 for peat.

    165.01, for compositions containing chemically modified lignocellulosic
    material of indeterminate structure (e.g., hydrolyzed, etherified, etc.).


CLS 106/164.1
TXT Cork:

    Compositions under subclass 164.01 wherein the lignocellulosic material is
    (A) the exterior layer of the bark of the Cork Oak Tree or (B) cork, per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for shoe filling composition with cork.


CLS 106/164.11
TXT With fat, fatty oil, higher fatty acid, or derivative:

    Compositions under subclass 164.1 which contain in addition to the cork
    fat, fatty oil, higher fatty acid, and functional derivative thereof.

    (1)     Note. Definitions:

    (a)     By "fat" and "fatty oil" are meant the glyceryl triester
    (triglyceride) of the same or different higher fatty acids (e.g., oleic,
    myristic, palmitic, stearic, linolenic, etc.) or mixtures thereof present
    in a single oil or fat (e.g., lard, tallow, castor oil, etc.);

    (b)     By "higher fatty acid" is meant aliphatic monocarboxylic acid
    containing an unbroken chain of at least seven carbon atoms bonded to a
    carboxyl group (e.g., lauric, palmitic, stearic, oleic, ricinoleic,
    linoleic, behenolic, etc.). Where there are several unbroken chains of
    carbon atoms bonded to the -C(=O)O- group, one of the chains must contain
    at least seven carbon atoms.

    (2)     Note. Examples of derivative included herein are esterified,
    oxidized, polymerized, vulcanized, hydrogenized fat, or fatty oil and the
    functional derivative of higher fatty acid such as esters, acid salts, and
    amides.

    (3)     Note. Included herein are oils derived from plant and animal origin
    (e.g., castor, coconut, corn, soybean, olive, cottonseed, safflower, fish,
    fish-liver, sperm, etc.) and the functional oils, such as drying oils
    (linseed, tung, oiticica), semidrying oils (soybean, cottonseed), and
    nondrying oils (castor, coconut).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164.4,  compositions containing lignocellulosic material and organic
    compound containing chalcogen.

    164.43, for compositions containing fat, fatty oil, higher fatty acid, or
    derivative in combination with lignocellulosic material and natural resin
    or derivative.

    164.44, for compositions containing fat, fatty oil, higher fatty acid, or
    derivative in combination with lignocellulosic material.


CLS 106/164.12
TXT With bituminous or tarry residue:

    Compositions under subclass 164.1 which contain in addition to the cork a
    composition or compound having the characteristics of a tar or pitch no
    matter what the origin.

    (1)     Note. Examples of components included herein are all asphalts,
    bitumens, pitches and tars from coal, mineral oil, cotton seed pitch and
    the residue from the destructive distillation of wood, and natural oil
    distillations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164.6,  for compositions containing lignocellulosic material and bituminous
    or tarry residue.


CLS 106/164.2
TXT Peat:

    Compositions under subclass 164.01 wherein the lignocellulosic material is
    partially decayed plant matter formed in water-saturated environments, such
    as bogs and marshes.


CLS 106/164.3
TXT With organic compound containing nitrogen:

    Compositions under subclass 164.01 which contain in addition to the
    lignocellulosic material an organic compound which has at least one
    nitrogen atom therein.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 163.01, (2) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166.4+, 169.46+, 170.42+, 190.1, and 200.1+, for compositions containing
    cellulose xanthate, cellulose nitrate, cellulose ester or salt thereof,
    cellulose ether or salt thereof, or a cellulosic material and an organic
    compound containing nitrogen.


CLS 106/164.4
TXT With organic compound containing chalcogen:

    Compositions under subclass 164.01 which contain in addition to the
    lignocellulosic material an organic compound which has at least one
    chalcogen atom (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium) therein.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 163.01, (2) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.


CLS 106/164.41
TXT Natural resin or derivative:

    Compositions under subclass 164.4 wherein the organic compound containing
    chalcogen is a natural resin or derivative of a natural resin.

    (1)     Note. Natural resins include but are not limited to shellac, copals
    from various sources (e.g., congo, manila, etc.), amber, dammar, dead
    dammar, gum rosin, rosin (colophony), tall oil (liquid rosin), wood rosin,
    burgundy pitch, gurjun balsam, canada balsam, sandrac, mastic, accroides,
    benzoin, elemi, gamboge, gum thus, venice turpentine, bordeaux turpentine,
    abietic acid, and pimaric acid.

    (2)     Note. Examples of derivatives included herein are hydrogenated,
    esterified, polymerized, or sulfurized resin, or salt thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169.18+, 170.21, and 178.1, for compositions containing natural resin or
    derivative and cellulose nitrate, cellulose ester or salt thereof, or
    cellulose ether or salt thereof.


CLS 106/164.42
TXT With hydrocarbon (e.g., petroleum fraction, paraffin, olefin, acetylene,
    etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 164.41 which contain in addition to the
    lignocellulosic material and natural resin an organic compound consisting
    exclusively of the elements carbon and hydrogen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166.7,  for compositions containing cellulose xanthate and hydrocarbon.


CLS 106/164.43
TXT With fat, fatty oil, higher fatty acid, or derivative:

    Compositions under subclass 164.41 which contain in addition to the
    lignocellulosic material and natural resin fat, fatty oil, higher fatty
    acid or derivative thereof.

    (1)     Note. Definitions:

    (a)     By "fat" and "fatty oil" are meant the glyceryl triester
    (triglyceride) of the same or different higher fatty acids (e.g., oleic,
    myristic, palmitic, stearic, linolenic, etc.) or mixtures thereof present
    in a single oil or fat (e.g., lard, tallow, castor oil, etc.);

    (b)     By "higher fatty acid" is meant aliphatic monocarboxylic acid
    containing an unbroken chain of at least seven carbon atoms bonded to a
    carboxyl group (e.g., lauric, palmitic, stearic, oleic, ricinoleic,
    linoleic, behenolic, etc.) Where there are several unbroken chains of
    carbon atoms bonded to the -C(=O)O- group, one of the chains must contain
    at least seven carbon atoms.

    (2)     Note. Examples of derivative included herein are esterified,
    oxidized, polymerized, vulcanized, hydrogenized fat, or fatty oil and the
    functional derivative of higher fatty acid such as esters, acid salts, and
    amides.

    (3)     Note. Included herein are oils derived from plant and animal origin
    (e.g., castor, coconut, corn, soybean, olive, cottonseed, safflower, fish,
    fish-liver, sperm, etc.) and the functional oils, such as drying oils
    (linseed, tung, oiticica), semidrying oils (soybean, cottonseed), and
    nondrying oils (castor, coconut).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164.11, for compositions containing cork and fat, fatty oil, higher fatty
    acid or derivative.

    164.44, for compositions containing lignocellulosic material and fat, fatty
    oil, higher fatty acid or derivative.


CLS 106/164.44
TXT Fat, fatty oil, higher fatty acid or derivative:

    Compositions under subclass 164.4 wherein the organic compound containing
    chalcogen is fat, fatty oil, higher fatty acid or derivative thereof.

    (1)     Note. Definitions:

    (a)     By "fat" and "fatty oil" are meant the glyceryl triester
    (triglyceride) of the same or different higher fatty acids (e.g., oleic,
    myristic, palmitic, stearic, linolenic, etc.) or mixtures thereof present
    in a single oil or fat (e.g., lard, tallow, castor oil, etc.);

    (b)     By "higher fatty acid" is meant aliphatic monocarboxylic acid
    containing an unbroken chain of at least seven carbon atoms bonded to a
    carboxyl group (e.g., lauric, palmitic, stearic, oleic, ricinoleic,
    linoleic, behenolic, etc.) Where there are several unbroken chains of
    carbon atoms bonded to the -C(=O)O- group, one of the chains must contain
    at least seven carbon atoms.

    (2)     Note. Examples of derivative included herein are esterified,
    oxidized, polymerized, vulcanized, hydrogenized fat, or fatty oil and the
    functional derivative of higher fatty acid such as esters, acid salts, and
    amides.

    (3)     Note. Included herein are oils derived from plant and animal origin
    (e.g., castor, coconut, corn, soybean, olive, cottonseed, safflower, fish,
    fish-liver, sperm, etc.) and the functional oils, such as drying oils
    (linseed, tung, oiticica), semidrying oils (soybean, cottonseed), and
    nondrying oils (castor, coconut).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164.11, for compositions containing cork and fat, fatty oil, higher fatty
    acid or derivative.

    164.43, for compositions containing fat, fatty oil, higher fatty acid or
    derivative in combination with lignocellulosic material and natural resin
    or derivative.


CLS 106/164.5
TXT With element or inorganic compound except water:

    Compositions under subclass 164.01 which contain in addition to the
    lignocellulosic material elemental material or any inorganic compound
    except water.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 163.01, (2) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.

    (2)     Note. Examples of components included herein are carbon black,
    metal alloy, metal dust, sodium chloride, and calcium carbonate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166.8+, and 204.01+, for compositions containing cellulose xanthate or
    cellulose and inorganic compound or element, other than water.


CLS 106/164.51
TXT Elemental silicon or inorganic silicon compound:

    Compositions under subclass 164.5 in which the inorganic compound or
    element is an inorganic compound containing silicon or elemental silicon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166.82, 169.55, 170.57, and 203.3, for compositions containing cellulose
    xanthate, cellulose nitrate, cellulose ester or salt, cellulose ether or
    salt, or a cellulosic material and an inorganic compound containing silicon
    or an elemental silicon.


CLS 106/164.52
TXT Asbestos:

    Compositions under subclass 164.51 in which the compound containing silicon
    is fibrous calcium magnesium silicate.


CLS 106/164.53
TXT Elemental sulfur or inorganic sulfur compound:

    Compositions under subclass 164.5 in which the inorganic compound or
    element is an inorganic compound containing sulfur or elemental sulfur.


CLS 106/164.6
TXT With bituminous or tarry residue:

    Compositions under subclass 164.01 which contain a composition or compound
    having the characteristics of a tar or pitch no matter what the origin.

    (1)     Note. Examples of components included herein are all asphalts,
    bitumens, pitches and tars from coal, mineral oil, cotton seed pitch and
    the residue from the destructive distillation of wood, and natural oil
    distillations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164.12, for compositions containing cork and bituminous or tarry residue.


CLS 106/165.01
TXT Chemically modified lignocellulosic material of indeterminate structure
    (e.g., hydrolyzed, etherified, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 163.01 wherein the cellulosic material is found
    in a hydrolyzed, etherified, or other reaction products of lignocellulosic
    material of indeterminate structure.


CLS 106/166.01
TXT Cellulose xanthate or viscose:

    Compositions under subclass 163.01 wherein the cellulosic material contains
    the group:

    (1)     Note. The viscose process is based on the reaction of carbon
    disulfide with the sodium salt of cellulose to yield a xanthate, which
    forms a viscous colloidal solution in dilute aqueous alkali.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    subclasses 188+ for processes of forming indefinite or continuous length
    articles from viscose spinning solutions by extrusion thereof into a
    specified precipitating medium as defined, see Class 264 definitions, II A
    5. Where an additive is included in a molding composition or a treating
    bath for purposes of preventing fouling of equipment see Class 264,
    subclass 170.

    536,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 60+ for viscose, per se, and its
    subsequent treatment.


CLS 106/166.1
TXT With organic compound containing silicon:

    Compositions under subclass 166.01 which contain an organic compound which
    has at least one silicon atom therein in addition to the cellulose xanthate.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 163.01, (2) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169.17, 170.2, and 177.1, for compositions containing cellulose nitrate,
    cellulose ester or salt, or cellulose ether or salt and organic compound
    containing silicon.


CLS 106/166.2
TXT With phosphorus compound:

    Compositions under subclass 166.01 which contain a compound of phosphorus
    in addition to the cellulose xanthate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169.14+, 170.15+, and 175.1, for compositions containing cellulose nitrate,
    cellulose ester or salt, or cellulose ether or salt and phosphorus compound.


CLS 106/166.3
TXT With organic compound containing sulfur:

    Compositions under subclass 166.01 which contain an organic compound which
    has at least one sulfur atom therein in addition to the cellulose xanthate.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 163.01, (2) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169.45, 170.46, 191.1, and 202.1, for compositions containing cellulose
    nitrate, cellulose ester or salt, cellulose ether or salt, or a cellulosic
    material and organic compound containing sulfur.


CLS 106/166.31
TXT Carbon double bonded directly to the sulfur:

    Compositions under subclass 166.3 wherein the sulfur is double bonded
    directly to a carbon.


CLS 106/166.4
TXT With organic compound containing nitrogen:

    Compositions under subclass 166.01 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose xanthate an organic compound which has at least one nitrogen atom
    therein.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 163.01, (2) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164.3,  169.46+, 170.42+, 190.1, and 200.1+, for compositions containing
    lignocellulosic material, cellulose nitrate, cellulose ester or salt,
    cellulose ether or salt, or a cellulosic material and an organic compound
    containing nitrogen.


CLS 106/166.41
TXT The nitrogen is a member of a hetero ring:

    Compositions under subclass 166.4 wherein the nitrogen of the organic
    compound containing nitrogen is part of a hetero ring.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 163.01, (5) Note for the definition
    of hetero ring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169.1+, 170.1+, 173.01, and 200.2, for compositions containing cellulose
    nitrate, cellulose ester or salt, cellulose ether or salt, or a cellulosic
    material and nitrogen containing hetero ring.


CLS 106/166.42
TXT Oxygen and nitrogen in the same compound (e.g., ammonium alkyl sulfonate,
    tertiary amine oxide, triethanolamine, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 166.4 wherein the organic compound has both
    oxygen and nitrogen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200.3,  for compositions containing a cellulosic material and organic
    compound containing both oxygen and nitrogen.


CLS 106/166.43
TXT The oxygen is part of a -C(=O)- group (e.g., amide, urea, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 166.42 wherein the oxygen is double bonded to a
    carbon atom.


CLS 106/166.5
TXT With organic compound containing oxygen:

    Compositions under subclass 166.01 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose xanthate an organic compound which has at least one oxygen atom
    therein.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 163.01, (2) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203.1,  for compositions containing a cellulosic material and organic
    compound containing oxygen.


CLS 106/166.51
TXT Natural resin or organic -C(=O)O- compound (e.g., rosin, tall oil, tallow,
    castor oil, carboxylic acid, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 166.5 wherein the organic compound containing
    oxygen is (a) a natural resin, or (b) a compound in which the carbon of the
    -C(=O)O- group is, or is attached directly or indirectly by nonionic
    bonding to, the carbon of an organic compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203.3,  for compositions containing a cellulosic material and natural resin
    or organic -C(=O)O- compound.


CLS 106/166.52
TXT Dihydric or polyhydric alcohol or ether derivative thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 166.5 wherein the organic compound containing
    oxygen has two or more -OH groups, each of which is bonded directly to a
    carbon, which carbon may be single bonded to any element but may be
    multiple bonded only to carbon or ether derivative thereof whereby the H of
    the -OH group is replaced by a C.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203.2,  for compositions containing a cellulosic material and a dihydric or
    polyhydric alcohol.


CLS 106/166.6
TXT With organic compound containing halogen:

    Compositions under subclass 166.01 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose xanthate an organic compound which as at least one halogen atom
    therein.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 163.01, (2) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170.55, 195.1, and 201.1, for compositions containing cellulose ester or
    salt, cellulose ether or salt, or a cellulosic material and an organic
    compound containing halogen.


CLS 106/166.7
TXT With bituminous or tarry residue or hydrocarbon (e.g., petroleum fraction,
    paraffin, olefin, acetylene, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 166.01 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose xanthate a composition or compound having the characteristics of
    a tar or pitch no matter what the origin or an organic compound consisting
    exclusively of the elements carbon and hydrogen.

    (1)     Note. Examples of components included herein are all asphalts,
    bitumens, pitches and tars from coal, mineral oil, cotton seed pitch and
    the residue from the destructive distillation of wood, and natural oil
    distillations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164.42, for compositions containing a hydrocarbon in addition to a
    lignocellulosic material, an organic compound containing chalcogen, and a
    natural resin or derivative.


CLS 106/166.8
TXT With element or inorganic compound except water:

    Compositions under subclass 166.01 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose xanthate elemental material or any inorganic compound except
    water.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 163.01, (2) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.

    (2)     Note. Examples of components included herein are carbon disulfide,
    carbon black, metal alloy, metal dust, sodium chloride, and calcium
    carbonate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164.5+, and 203.1+, for compositions containing a lignocellulosic material
    or a cellulosic material and inorganic compound or element, other than
    water.


CLS 106/166.81
TXT Elemental titanium or inorganic titanium compound:

    Compositions under subclass 166.8 wherein the inorganic compound or element
    is elemental titanium or an inorganic compound containing titanium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204.2,  for compositions containing a cellulosic material and inorganic
    compound containing titanium.


CLS 106/166.82
TXT Elemental silicon or inorganic silicon compound:

    Compositions under subclass 166.8 wherein the inorganic compound or element
    is elemental silicon or an inorganic compound containing silicon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164.51+, 169.55, 170.57, 197.01, and 203.3, for compositions containing a
    lignocellulosic material, cellulose nitrate, cellulose ester or salt,
    cellulose ether or salt, or a cellulosic material and elemental silicon or
    inorganic compound containing silicon.


CLS 106/167.01
TXT Cuprammonium cellulose:

    Compositions under subclass 163.01 wherein the cellulosic material is
    cellulose in cupra-ammonium solution.


CLS 106/168.01
TXT Cellulose ester or salt thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 163.01 wherein the cellulosic material is the
    product of the reaction of a hydroxyl group of cellulose with an acid.

    (1)     Note. The esterifying acid may be organic or inorganic.

    (2)     Note. For purposes of classifying patents in this and indented
    subclasses, each of the following group is considered to be a single
    cellulose ester and not diverse cellulose esters:

    (a)     cellulose ester of a single acid (e.g., cellulose acetate,
    cellulose propionate, etc.),

    (b)     cellulose ester of mixed acids (e.g., cellulose butyrate
    propionate, cellulose propionate isobutyrate, etc.), or

    (c)     mixture of cellulose esters of the same acid differ only in the
    degree of esterification (e.g., mixture of cellulose propionate and
    cellulose tripropionate, etc.)

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169.01+, for compositions containing cellulose nitrate as the cellulose
    ester.


CLS 106/169.01
TXT Cellulose nitrate:

    Compositions under subclass 168.01 wherein the cellulose ester is a product
    produced by


    reacting nitric acid with cellulose one of the principal component of which
    has the following structure:



    (1)     Note. Examples of cellulose nitrate included herein are pyroxylin,
    nitrocellulose, and gun cotton.


CLS 106/169.1
TXT With nitrogen hetero ring compound (e.g., succinimide, caprolactam,
    piperazine, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 169.01 which contain an organic compound having
    a heterocyclic ring containing nitrogen as a hetero atom in addition to the
    cellulose nitrate.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 163.01, (5) Note for the definition
    of hetero ring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166.41, 170.1+, 173.01, and 200.2, for compositions containing cellulose
    xanthate, cellulose ester or salt, cellulose ether or salt, or a cellulosic
    material and nitrogen containing hetero ring.


CLS 106/169.11
TXT The hetero ring is part of a polycyclo ring system (e.g., guanine,
    phthalimide, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 169.1 wherein the nitrogen containing hetero
    ring compound has a ring system with at least two rings which (a) share
    with each other two adjacent ring atoms, or (b) share with each other three
    or more ring atoms.


CLS 106/169.12
TXT With chalcogen hetero ring compound (e.g., lactone, maleic anhydride,
    furan, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 169.01 which contain an organic compound having
    a hetero ring containing chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, and
    tellurium) as a hetero atom in addition to the cellulose nitrate.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 163.01, (5) Note for the definition
    of hetero ring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170.12+ and 174.1+, for compositions containing cellulose ester or salt or
    cellulose ether or salt and chalcogen containing hetero ring.


CLS 106/169.13
TXT Plural oxygens in the hetero ring (e.g., dioxane, dioxene, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 169.12 wherein the hetero ring has two or more
    oxygens as ring members.


CLS 106/169.14
TXT With phosphorus compound:

    Compositions under subclass 169.01 which contain a compound of phosphorus
    in addition to the cellulose nitrate.

    (1)     Note. Phosphorus compounds are often used as plasticizers and fire
    retardants.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18.14+, for compositions within this class containing phosphorus
    fireproofing or biocidal agent

    166.2,  170.15+, and 175.1, for compositions containing cellulose xanthate,
    cellulose ester or salt, or cellulose ether or salt and phosphorus compound.


CLS 106/169.15
TXT Trialkyl or triaryl phosphate or mixed esters thereof (e.g., tributyl
    phosphate, triphenyl phosphate, dicresyl lauryl ortho phosphate, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 169.14 wherein the formula for the phosphorus
    compound is PO(OR)(OR1)(OR2), where R, R1, and R2 = alkyl radical or aryl
    radical and where R, R1, and R2 can be the same or diverse radicals.


CLS 106/169.16
TXT With boron compound:

    Compositions under subclass 169.01 which contain a compound of boron in
    addition to the cellulose nitrate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170.19  and 176.1, for compositions containing cellulose ester or salt or
    cellulose ether or salt and boron compound.


CLS 106/169.17
TXT With organic compound containing silicon:

    Compositions under subclass 169.01 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose nitrate an organic compound which has at least one silicon atom
    therein.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 163.01, (2) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166.1,  170.2, and 177.1, for compositions containing cellulose xanthate,
    cellulose ester or salt, or cellulose ether or salt and organic compound
    containing silicon.


CLS 106/169.18
TXT With natural resin or derivative:

    Compositions under subclass 169.01 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose nitrate a natural resin or reaction product of a natural resin.

    (1)     Note. Natural resins include but are not limited to: Shellac,
    copals from various sources (e.g., congo, manila, etc.), amber, dammar,
    dead dammar, gum rosin, rosin (colophony), tall oil (liquid rosin), wood
    rosin, burgundy pitch, gurjun balsam, canada balsam, sandrac, mastic,
    accroides, benzoin, elemi, gamboge, gum thus, venice turpentine, bordeaux
    turpentine, abietic acid, and pimaric acid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164.41+, 170.21, and 178.1, for compositions containing natural resin or
    derivative and lignocellulosic material, cellulose ester or salt thereof or
    cellulose ether or salt thereof.

    169.19, for compositions containing cellulose nitrate and chemically
    modified natural resin of indeterminate structure.


CLS 106/169.19
TXT Chemically modified natural resin of indeterminate structure (e.g.,
    oxidized, polymerized, hydrogenized, esterified, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 169.18 wherein the resin undergoes oxidation,
    polymerization, hydrogenation, esterification or other chemical reaction
    products of a resin of indeterminate structure.


CLS 106/169.2
TXT With additional diverse natural resin or derivative:

    Compositions under subclass 169.18 which contain two different natural
    resins or derivative thereof in addition to the cellulose nitrate.


CLS 106/169.21
TXT With naturally occurring wax (e.g., mineral, ceresin, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 169.18 which contain a naturally-occurring
    low-melting organic mixture or compound of hydrocarbons or esters of fatty
    acids and alcohols having the characteristics of wax (solid at room
    temperature) in addition to the cellulose nitrate and the resin.


CLS 106/169.22
TXT With fatty oil or derivative (e.g., coconut, cottonseed, soybean, fish,
    sperm oil, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 169.18 which contain in addition to the resin
    and cellulose nitrate fatty oil or derivative.

    (1)     Note. By "fatty oil" are meant the glyceryl triester (triglyceride)
    of the same or different higher fatty acids (e.g., oleic, myristic,
    palmitic, stearic, linolenic, etc.) or mixtures thereof present in a single
    oil derived from animals or plant seeds or nuts;

    (2)     Note. Examples of derivative included herein are esterified,
    oxidized, polymerized, vulcanized, hydrogenized fatty oil.

    (3)     Note. Included herein are oils derived from plant and animal origin
    (e.g., castor, coconut, corn, soybean, olive, cottonseed, safflower, fish,
    fish-liver, sperm, etc.) and the functional oils, such as drying oils
    (linseed, tung, oiticica), semidrying oils (soybean, cottonseed), and
    nondrying oils (castor, coconut).

    (4)     Note. Pine oil is not a vegetable fatty oil because its chief
    constituents are tertiary and secondary terpene alcohols.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169.23, for compositions containing fatty acids, salts, or esters other
    than the triglyceride of the higher fatty acids in addition to cellulose
    nitrate and natural resin or derivative.


CLS 106/169.23
TXT With carboxylic acid, ester, or salt thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 169.18 which contain in addition to the resin
    and cellulose nitrate an organic compound having a carboxylate group (i.e.,
    -C(=O)O-) as part of a carboxylic acid, ester, or salt.


CLS 106/169.24
TXT With organic compound containing oxygen:

    Compositions under subclass 169.18 which contain in addition to the resin
    and cellulose nitrate a compound which has at least one oxygen atom therein.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 163.01, (2) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.


CLS 106/169.25
TXT With chemically modified lanolin, fat, or fatty oil (e.g., blown,
    polymerized, hydrogenized, esterified, etc.)

    Compositions under subclass 169.01 which contain blown, polymerized,
    hydrogenized, esterified or reaction products which still maintain the
    basic ester structures of a fat, lanolin, or fatty oil.

    (1)     Note. Definitions:

    (a)     By "fat" and "fatty oil" are meant the glyceryl triester
    (triglyceride) of the same or different higher fatty acids (e.g., oleic,
    myristic, palmitic, stearic, linolenic, etc.) or mixtures thereof present
    in a single oil or fat (e.g., lard, tallow, castor oil, etc.);

    (b)     By "lanolin" is meant cholesterol esters of higher fatty acids

    (2)     Note. Included herein are reaction products of oils derived from
    plant and animal origin (e.g., castor, coconut, corn, soybean, olive,
    cottonseed, safflower, fish, fish-liver, sperm, etc.), and of the
    functional oils, such as drying oils (linseed, tung, oiticica), semidrying
    oils (soybean, cottonseed), and nondrying oils (castor, coconut).

    (3)     Note. Hydrolysis is excluded from this subclass as a chemical
    modification of lanolin, fat, or fatty oil since this chemical reaction
    produces cholesterol or glycerol and salts of higher fatty acids.


CLS 106/169.26
TXT With lanolin, fat, or fatty oil (e.g., lard, tallow, castor oil, linseed
    oil, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 169.01 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose nitrate a fat, lanolin, or fatty oil.

    (1)     Note. Definitions:

    (a)     By "fat" and "fatty oil" are meant the glyceryl triester
    (triglyceride) of the same or different higher fatty acids (e.g., oleic,
    myristic, palmitic, stearic, linolenic, etc.) or mixtures thereof present
    in a single oil or fat (e.g., lard, tallow, castor oil, etc.);

    (b)     By "lanolin" is meant cholesterol esters of higher fatty acids

    (2)     Note. Included herein are oils derived from plant and animal origin
    (e.g., castor, coconut, corn, soybean, olive, cottonseed, safflower, fish,
    fish-liver, sperm, etc.) and the functional oils, such as drying oils
    (linseed, tung, oiticica), semidrying oils (soybean, cottonseed), and
    nondrying oils (castor, coconut).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169.25, for compositions containing cellulose nitrate and chemically
    modified lanolin, fat, or fatty oil.

    170.23  and 179.1, for compositions containing cellulose ester or salt
    thereof or cellulose ether or salt thereof and lanolin, fat, or fatty oil
    or derivative thereof.


CLS 106/169.27
TXT With organic compound containing oxygen:

    Compositions under subclass 169.26 which contain in addition to cellulose
    nitrate and lanolin, animal fat, or animal or vegetable oil an organic
    compound which has at least one oxygen atom therein.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 163.01, (2) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.


CLS 106/169.28
TXT With terpene or derivative (e.g., pine oil, terpineol, borneol, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 169.01 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose nitrate a terpene or reaction products wherein the terpene
    structure is not destroyed.

    (1)     Note. Terpene denotes a hydrocarbon having two or more isoprene
    units (C5H8). Most terpenes have carbon skeleton of 10, 15, 20, or 30 atoms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170.25  and 180.1, for compositions containing cellulose ester or salt
    thereof or cellulose ether or salt thereof and terpene or derivative
    thereof.


CLS 106/169.29
TXT Camphor:

    Compositions under subclass 169.28 wherein the terpene derivative is a
    compound of the following structure:



CLS 106/169.3
TXT With carboxylic acid, ester, or salt thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 169.29 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose nitrate and camphor an organic compound having a carboxylate
    group (i.e., -C(=O)O-) as part of a carboxylic acid, ester, or salt.


CLS 106/169.31
TXT With organic compound containing nitrogen, halogen, or chalcogen:

    Compositions under subclass 169.29 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose nitrate and camphor an organic compound which has at least one
    nitrogen, halogen, or chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium) atom therein.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 163.01, (2) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.


CLS 106/169.32
TXT With compound of indeterminate structure prepared by reacting an organic
    -C(=O)O- compound:

    Compositions under subclass 169.01 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose nitrate a compound of unknown structure, resulting from the
    reaction of an organic compound containing the -C(=O)O- group.


CLS 106/169.33
TXT With organic -C(=O)O- group containing compound except wax (e.g., fatty
    acid, dicarboxylic acid, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 169.01 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose nitrate an organic compound containing the -C(=O)O- group except
    wax.

    (1)     Note. Examples of compounds included herein are the carboxylic
    acids such as dicarboxylic acid, and fatty acid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169.54, for compositions containing cellulose nitrate and naturally
    occurring wax.

    170.26+ and 181.1+, for compositions containing cellulose ester or salt
    thereof or cellulose ether or salt thereof and organic -C(=O)O- group
    containing compound.


CLS 106/169.34
TXT Carbon bonded directly to the single bonded oxygen of the -C(=O)O- group
    (e.g., fatty acid ester, acid anhydride, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 169.33 wherein the single bonded oxygen of the
    organic-C(=O)O- group is single bonded to an additional carbon atom.


CLS 106/169.35
TXT Plural -C(=O)O- groups attached directly or indirectly to each other by
    nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 169.34 wherein the -C(=O)O- group is attached
    directly or indirectly to one or more -C(=O)O- groups by nonionic bonding.


CLS 106/169.36
TXT Carbocyclic ring attached directly or indirectly to the -C(=O)O- groups:

    Compositions under subclass 169.35 wherein the -C(=O)O- groups are attached
    directly or indirectly to a benzene or an alicyclic (cycloaliphatic) ring.

    (1)     Note. Alicyclic (cycloaliphatic) denotes (1) Cycloparaffins
    (saturated), (2) cycloolefins (unsaturated with one or more double bonds),
    and (3) cycloacetylenes or cyclynes (unsaturated with triple bond).


CLS 106/169.37
TXT Exactly two -C(=O)O- groups attached directly to the carbocyclic ring by
    nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 169.36 wherein the carbocyclic ring is attached
    directly to two -C(=O)O- groups by nonionic bonding.


CLS 106/169.38
TXT Oxygen, other than in -C(=O)O- group, attached indirectly to the -C(=O)O-
    groups by nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 169.37 wherein a non carboxylate oxygen is
    attached indirectly to the  -C(=O)O- groups by nonionic bonding.


CLS 106/169.39
TXT Esterified dihydric or polyhydric alcohol:

    Compositions under subclass 169.35 wherein the plural carboxylic acid ester
    groups are produced by reacting a carboxylic acid with an alcohol having
    two or more -OH groups.


CLS 106/169.4
TXT Nitrogen or oxygen bonded directly to the carbon of the -C(=O)O- group
    (e.g., diethyl carbonate, dodecyl phenylcarbamate, octyl carbanilate,
    urethane, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 169.34 wherein the carbon of the -C(=O)O- group
    is bonded directly to nitrogen or to oxygen.


CLS 106/169.41
TXT Oxygen attached indirectly to the -C(=O)O- group by nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 169.34 wherein a non oxygen is attached
    indirectly to the-C(=O)O- group by nonionic bonding.


CLS 106/169.42
TXT Benzene ring attached directly or indirectly to the -C(=O)O- group by
    nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 169.34 wherein the -C(=O)O- group is attached
    directly or indirectly to a benzene ring.


CLS 106/169.43
TXT With organic compound containing oxygen (e.g., alcohol, ketone, additional
    carboxylic acid ester, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 169.34 which contain an organic compound which
    has at least one oxygen atom therein in addition to the cellulose nitrate
    and the compound having carbon bonded directly to the single bonded oxygen
    of the -C(=O)O- group.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 163.01, (2) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.


CLS 106/169.44
TXT Metal or Nitrogen salt:

    Compositions under subclass 169.33 wherein the hydrogen of the carboxylic
    acid is replaced by a metal or ammonium or substituted ammonium.


CLS 106/169.45
TXT With organic compound containing sulfur:

    Compositions under subclass 169.01 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose nitrate an organic compound which has at least one sulfur atom
    therein.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 163.01, (2) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166.3+, 202.1, 170.46, and 191.1, for compositions containing cellulose
    xanthate, a cellulosic material, cellulose ester or salt, or cellulose
    ether or salt and organic compound containing sulfur.


CLS 106/169.46
TXT With organic compound containing nitrogen:

    Compositions under subclass 169.01 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose nitrate an organic compound which has at least one nitrogen atom
    therein.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 163.01, (2) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164.3,  166.4+, 170.42+, 190.1, and 200.1+, for compositions containing
    lignocellulosic material, cellulose xanthate, cellulose ester, cellulose
    ether or salt thereof, or a cellulosic material and organic compound
    containing nitrogen.


CLS 106/169.47
TXT The nitrogen is single bonded directly to the carbon of a -C(=O)- group:

    Compositions under subclass 169.46 wherein the organic compound containing
    nitrogen has the carbon of a -C(=O)- group bonded directly to the nitrogen
    by a single bond


CLS 106/169.48
TXT With organic -C(=O)- group containing compound (e.g., aldehyde, ketone,
    etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 169.01 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose nitrate an organic compound having a -C(=O)- group.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170.47+ and 192.1, for compositions containing cellulose ester or salt
    thereof or cellulose ether or salt thereof and organic -C(=O)- group
    containing compound.


CLS 106/169.49
TXT With ether except dialkylene or polyalkylene glycol:

    Compositions under subclass 169.01 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose nitrate an organic compound having -C-O-C- group except
    dialkylene or polyalkylene glycol.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169.51+, for compositions containing cellulose ester or salt thereof and
    dialkylene or polyalkylene glycol.

    170.5   and 193.1, for compositions containing cellulose ester or salt
    thereof or cellulose ether or salt thereof and an organic -C-O-C- group
    containing compound.


CLS 106/169.5
TXT With organic -C(-OH)- group containing compound, where the H of the -OH
    group can be replaced by a metal (e.g., alkanol, phenol, polyol, phenolate,
    etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 169.49 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose nitrate and the ether an organic compound having a carbon bonded
    directly to a hydroxyl -OH group, where metal can replace the H of the -OH
    group.


CLS 106/169.51
TXT With organic -C(-OH)- group containing compound, where the H of the -OH
    group can be replaced by a metal (e.g., alkanol, phenol, polyol,
    alkanolate, dialkylene glycol, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 169.01 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose nitrate an organic compound having a carbon bonded directly to a
    -OH group, where metal can replace the H of the -OH group.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170.51+ and 194.1+, for compositions containing cellulose ester or salt
    thereof or cellulose ether or salt thereof and organic -C(-OH)- group
    containing compound.


CLS 106/169.52
TXT Halogen containing or with organic compound containing halogen:

    Compositions under subclass 169.51 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose nitrate (a) an organic  -C(-OH)- group containing compound which
    has at least one halogen atom therein (where a metal can replace the H of
    the -OH group) or (b) an organic compound which has at least one halogen
    atom therein and an organic -C(-OH)- group containing compound, where a
    metal can replace the H of the -OH group.


CLS 106/169.53
TXT With organic compound containing halogen:

    Compositions under subclass 169.01 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose ester or salt thereof and the organic -C(-OH)- group containing
    compound an organic compound which has at least one halogen atom therein.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 163.01, (2) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.


CLS 106/169.54
TXT With bituminous or tarry residue, hydrocarbon, or naturally occurring wax:

    Compositions under subclass 169.01 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose nitrate (a) a composition or compound having the characteristics
    of a tar or pitch no matter what the origin, (b) an organic compound
    consisting exclusively of the elements carbon and hydrogen, or (c) a
    naturally-occurring low-melting organic mixture or compound of hydrocarbons
    or esters of fatty acids and alcohols having the characteristics of wax
    (solid at room temperature)

    (1)     Note. Examples of components included herein are alkanes, alkenes,
    olefins, montan wax, ceresin wax, carnauba wax, all asphalts, bitumens,
    pitches and tars from coal, mineral oil, cotton seed pitch and the residue
    from the destructive distillation of wood, and natural oil distillations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170.56  and 196.1, for compositions containing cellulose ester or salt
    thereof or cellulose ether or salt thereof and hydrocarbon, wax, bituminous
    or tarry residue.


CLS 106/169.55
TXT With elemental silicon or inorganic silicon compound:

    Compositions under subclass 169.01 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose nitrate an elemental silicon or an inorganic compound containing
    silicon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164.51+, 166.82, 170.57, 197.01, and 203.3, for compositions containing
    lignocellulosic material, cellulose xanthate, cellulose ester or salt,
    cellulose ether or salt, or a cellulosic material and elemental silicon or
    inorganic compound containing silicon.


CLS 106/169.56
TXT With elemental metal or alloy or metal compound:

    Compositions under subclass 169.01 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose nitrate free metal, mixture of two or more metals or of one or
    more metals with certain nonmetallic elements (e.g., carbon steel), or
    compound of metal.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 163.01, (4) Note for the definition
    of an alloy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170.58  and 198.1, for compositions containing cellulose ester or salt
    thereof or cellulose ether or salt thereof and elemental metal or alloy or
    metal compound.


CLS 106/169.57
TXT With elemental carbon (e.g., graphite, coal, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 169.01 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose nitrate carbon in substantially pure form including its
    crystalline allotrope (i.e., graphite) and amorphous allotropes (e.g.,
    coal, coke, carbon black, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199.1,  for compositions containing cellulose ether or salt thereof and
    elemental carbon.


CLS 106/170.1
TXT With nitrogen hetero ring compound:

    Compositions under subclass 168.01 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose ester or salt thereof an organic compound having a hetero ring
    containing nitrogen as a hetero atom.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 163.01, (5) Note for the definition
    of hetero ring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166.41, 169.1+, 173.01, and 200.2, for compositions containing cellulose
    xanthate, cellulose nitrate, cellulose ether or salt, or a cellulosic
    material and nitrogen containing hetero ring.


CLS 106/170.11
TXT Chalcogen hetero atom:

    Compositions under subclass 170.1 wherein the hetero ring compound has both
    nitrogen and chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, and tellurium) as
    hetero atoms in the same hetero ring or has a hetero ring containing
    nitrogen attached directly or indirectly to a hetero ring containing
    chalcogen.


CLS 106/170.12
TXT With chalcogen hetero ring compound:

    Compositions under subclass 168.01 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose ester or salt thereof an organic compound having a hetero ring
    containing chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, and tellurium) as a
    hetero atom.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 163.01, (5) Note for the definition
    of hetero ring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169.12+ and 174.1+, for compositions containing cellulose nitrate or
    cellulose ether or salt and chalcogen containing hetero ring.


CLS 106/170.13
TXT Three-membered hetero ring (e.g., epichlorohydrin, epoxide, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 170.12 wherein the chalcogen containing hetero
    ring has exactly three members.


CLS 106/170.14
TXT Plural chalcogens in the hetero ring:

    Compositions under subclass 170.12 wherein the hetero ring has two or more
    chalcogens as ring members.


CLS 106/170.15
TXT With phosphorus compound:

    Compositions under subclass 168.01 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose ester or salt thereof a compound of phosphorus.

    (1)     Note. Phosphorus compounds are often used as plasticizers and fire
    retardants.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166.2,  169.14+ and 175.1, for compositions containing cellulose xanthate,
    cellulose nitrate, or cellulose ether or salt and phosphorus compound.


CLS 106/170.16
TXT Trialkyl or triaryl phosphate or mixed esters thereof (e.g., tributyl
    phosphate, triphenyl phosphate, dicresyl lauryl ortho phosphate, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 170.15 wherein the formula for the phosphorus
    compound is PO(OR)(OR1)(OR2), where R, R1, and R2 = alkyl radical or aryl
    radical and where R, R1, and R2 can be the same or diverse radicals


CLS 106/170.17
TXT With organic compound containing nitrogen:

    Compositions under subclass 170.16 which contain in addition to the
    trialkyl, triaryl phosphate or mixed esters thereof an organic compound
    which has at least one nitrogen atom therein.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 163.01, (2) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.


CLS 106/170.18
TXT With carboxylic acid, ester, or salt thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 170.16 which contain in addition to the
    trialkyl, triaryl phosphate or mixed esters thereof an organic compound
    containing the -C(=O)O- group.


CLS 106/170.19
TXT With boron compound:

    Compositions under subclass 168.01 which contain a compound of boron in
    addition to the cellulose ester or salt thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169.16  and 176.1, for compositions containing cellulose nitrate or
    cellulose ether or salt and boron compound.


CLS 106/170.2
TXT With organic compound containing silicon:

    Compositions under subclass 168.01 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose ester or salt thereof an organic compound which has at least one
    silicon atom therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166.1,  169.17 and 177.1, for compositions containing cellulose xanthate,
    cellulose nitrate, or cellulose ether or salt and organic compound
    containing silicon.


CLS 106/170.21
TXT With natural resin or derivative:

    Compositions under subclass 168.01 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose ester or salt thereof natural resin or a chemical modification of
    a natural resin.

    (1)     Note.  Natural resins include but are not limited to shellac,
    copals from various sources (e.g., congo, manila, etc.), amber, dammar,
    dead dammar, gum rosin, rosin (colophony), tall oil (liquid rosin), wood
    rosin, burgundy pitch, gurjun balsam, canada balsam, sandrac, mastic,
    accroides, benzoin, elemi, gamboge, gum thus, venice turpentine, bordeaux
    turpentine, abietic acid, and pimaric acid.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of derivatives included herein are hydrogenated,
    esterified, polymerized, or sulfurized resin, or salt thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164.41+, 169.18+ and 178.1, for compositions containing natural resin or
    derivative and lignocellulosic material, cellulose nitrate or cellulose
    ether or salt thereof.


CLS 106/170.22
TXT With chemically modified lanolin, fat, or fatty oil (e.g. blown,
    polymerized, hydrogenized, esterified, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 168.01 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose ester or salt thereof a blown, polymerized, hydrogenized,
    esterified or reaction products which still maintain the basic ester
    structures of lanolin, fat, or fatty oil.

    (1)     Note. Definitions:

    (a)     By "fat" and "fatty oil" are meant the glyceryl triester
    (triglyceride) of the same or different higher fatty acids (e.g., oleic,
    myristic, palmitic, stearic, linolenic, etc.) or mixtures thereof present
    in a single oil or fat (e.g., lard, tallow, castor oil, etc.);

    (b)     By "lanolin" is meant cholesterol esters of higher fatty acids.

    (2)     Note. Included herein are reaction products of oils derived from
    plant and animal origin (e.g., castor, coconut, corn, soybean, olive,
    cottonseed, safflower, fish, fish-liver, sperm, etc.), and of the
    functional oils, such as drying oils (linseed, tung, oiticica), semidrying
    oils (soybean, cottonseed), and nondrying oils (castor, coconut).

    (3)     Note. Hydrolysis is excluded from this subclass as a chemical
    modification of lanolin, fat, or fatty oil since this chemical reaction
    produces cholesterol or glycerol and salts of higher fatty acids.


CLS 106/170.23
TXT With lanolin, fat, or fatty oil (e.g., lard, tallow, castor oil, linseed
    oil, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 168.01 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose ester or salt thereof a fat, lanolin, or fatty oil.

    (1)     Note. Definitions:

    (a)     By "fat" and "fatty oil" are meant the glyceryl triester
    (triglyceride) of the same or different higher fatty acids (e.g., oleic,
    myristic, palmitic, stearic, linolenic, etc.) or mixtures thereof present
    in a single oil or fat (e.g., lard, tallow, castor oil, etc.);

    (b)     By "lanolin" is meant cholesterol esters of higher fatty acids.

    (2)     Note. Included herein are oils derived from plant and animal origin
    (e.g., castor, coconut, corn, soybean, olive, cottonseed, safflower, fish,
    fish-liver, sperm, etc.) and the functional oils, such as drying oils
    (linseed, tung, oiticica), semidrying oils (soybean, cottonseed), and
    nondrying oils (castor, coconut).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169.26+ and 179.1, for compositions containing cellulose nitrate or
    cellulose ether or salt thereof and lanolin, fat, or fatty oil or
    derivative thereof.


CLS 106/170.24
TXT With organic compound containing oxygen:

    Compositions under subclass 170.23 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose ester or salt thereof an organic compound which has at least one
    oxygen atom therein.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 163.01, (2) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.


CLS 106/170.25
TXT With terpene or derivative (e.g. camphor, pine oil, terpineol, borneol,
    etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 168.01 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose ester or salt thereof a terpene or reaction products wherein the
    terpene structure is not destroyed.

    (1)     Note. Terpene denotes a hydrocarbon having two or more isoprene
    units (C5H8). Most terpenes have carbon skeleton of 10, 15, 20, or 30 atoms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169.28+ and 180.1, for compositions containing cellulose nitrate or
    cellulose ether or salt thereof and terpene or derivative thereof.


CLS 106/170.26
TXT With organic -C(=O)O- group containing compound except wax (e.g., fatty
    acid, dicarboxylic acid, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 168.01 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose ester or salt thereof an organic compound containing the -C(=O)O-
    group except wax.

    (1)     Note. Examples of compounds included herein are the carboxylic
    acids such as dicarboxylic acid, and fatty acid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169.33+ and 181.1+, for compositions containing cellulose nitrate or
    cellulose ether or salt thereof and organic-C(=O)O- group containing
    compound.


CLS 106/170.27
TXT Carbon bonded directly to the single bonded oxygen of the -C(=O)O- group
    (e.g., fatty acid ester, acid anhydride, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 170.26 wherein the organic -C(=O)O- group
    containing compound has the single bonded oxygen of the -C(=O)O- group
    single bonded to an additional carbon atom.


CLS 106/170.28
TXT Nitrogen, halogen or chalcogen bonded directly to the carbon of the
    -C(=O)O- group (e.g., diethyl carbonate, octyl carbanilate, dodecyl
    phenylcarbamate, urethane, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 170.27 wherein the carbon of the -C(=O)O- group
    is bonded directly to a nitrogen or to a chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium).


CLS 106/170.29
TXT Plural -C(=O)O- groups attached directly or indirectly to each other by
    nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 170.27 wherein the -C(=O)O- group is attached
    directly or indirectly to one or more -C(=O)O- groups by nonionic bonding.


CLS 106/170.3
TXT Benzene ring attached directly or indirectly to the -C(=O)O- groups by
    nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 170.29 wherein the -C(=O)O- groups are attached
    directly or indirectly to a benzene ring.


CLS 106/170.31
TXT Exactly two -C(=O)O- groups attached directly to the same benzene ring by
    nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 170.3 wherein the benzene ring is attached
    directly to two  -C(=O)O- groups by nonionic bonding.


CLS 106/170.32
TXT With organic compound containing oxygen (e.g., alcohol, ketone, additional
    carboxylic acid ester, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 170.31 which contain an organic compound which
    has at least one oxygen atom therein in addition to the cellulose ester or
    salt thereof and a compound containing two -C(=O)O- groups attached
    directly to the same benzene ring.


CLS 106/170.33
TXT Cycloaliphatic ring attached directly or indirectly to the -C(=O)O- groups
    by nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 170.29 wherein the -C(=O)O- groups are attached
    directly or indirectly to a cycloaliphatic ring.

    (1)     Note. Alicyclic (cycloaliphatic) denotes (a) Cycloparaffins
    (saturated), (b) Cycloolefins (unsaturated with one or more double bonds),
    and (c) Cycloacetylenes or cyclynes (unsaturated with triple bond)


CLS 106/170.34
TXT Esterified dihydric or polyhydric alcohol:

    Compositions under subclass 170.29 wherein the plural   -C(=O)O- groups are
    produced by reacting carboxylic acids with alcohol having two or more
    hydroxyl (-OH) groups.


CLS 106/170.35
TXT The polyhydric alcohol is glycerol (e.g., triacetin, tripropionin, glyceryl
    diproprionate, glyceryl diproprionate monoacetate, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 170.34 wherein the esterified polyhydric
    alcohol is an alcohol with the following structure:



CLS 106/170.36
TXT Nitrogen, sulfur, halogen, or oxygen other than in -C(=O)O- group attached
    indirectly to the  -C(=O)O- groups by nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 170.29 wherein the -C(=O)O- groups are attached
    indirectly to nitrogen, sulfur, ether oxygen, hydroxy (-OH), or halogen by
    nonionic bonding.


CLS 106/170.37
TXT Nitrogen attached indirectly to the
    -C(=O)O- group by nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 170.27 wherein the -C(=O)O- group is attached
    indirectly to nitrogen by nonionic bonding.


CLS 106/170.38
TXT Oxygen attached indirectly to the -C(=O)O- group by nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 170.27 wherein the -C(=O)O- group is attached
    indirectly to oxygen by nonionic bonding.


CLS 106/170.39
TXT Benzene ring attached directly or indirectly to the -C(=O)O- group by
    nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 170.38 wherein the -C(=O)O- group is attached
    directly or indirectly to oxygen and to a benzene ring.


CLS 106/170.4
TXT With organic compound containing oxygen (e.g., alcohol, ketone, additional
    carboxylic acid ester, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 170.27 which contain an organic compound which
    has at least one oxygen atom therein in addition to the cellulose ester or
    salt thereof and the compound having carbon bonded directly to the single
    bonded oxygen of the -C(=O)O- group.


CLS 106/170.41
TXT Metal or nitrogen salt:

    Compositions under subclass 170.26 wherein the hydrogen of the carboxylic
    acid is replaced by a metal or ammonium or substituted ammonium.


CLS 106/170.42
TXT With organic compound containing nitrogen:

    Compositions under subclass 168.01 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose ester or salt thereof an organic compound which has at least one
    nitrogen atom therein.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 163.01, (2) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164.3,  166.4+, 169.46+, 190.1, and 200.1+, for compositions containing
    lignocellulosic material, cellulose xanthate, cellulose nitrate, cellulose
    ether or salt thereof, or a cellulosic material and organic compound
    containing nitrogen.


CLS 106/170.43
TXT Chalcogen and nitrogen in the same compound:

    Compositions under subclass 170.42 wherein the organic compound has
    nitrogen and chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).


CLS 106/170.44
TXT The nitrogen is single bonded directly to carbon of a -C(=X)- group (X is
    chalcogen):

    Compositions under subclass 170.43 wherein the organic nitrogen compound
    has the carbon of a -C(=X)- group single bonded directly to the nitrogen (X
    is oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).


CLS 106/170.45
TXT The nitrogen is single bonded directly to sulfur of a -S(=O)(=O)- group
    (i.e., sulfonamide):

    Compositions under subclass 170.43 wherein the organic compound contains a
    -SO2N< group.


CLS 106/170.46
TXT With organic compound containing sulfur:

    Compositions under subclass 168.01 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose ester or salt thereof an organic compound which has at least one
    sulfur atom therein.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 163.01, (2) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166.3+, 169.45, 191.1, and 202.1, for compositions containing cellulose
    xanthate, cellulose nitrate, cellulose ether or salt, or a cellulosic
    material and organic compound containing sulfur.


CLS 106/170.47
TXT With organic -C(=O)- group containing compound (e.g., aldehyde, ketone,
    etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 168.01 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose ester or salt thereof an organic compound having a -C(=O)- group.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169.48  and 192.1, for compositions containing cellulose nitrate or
    cellulose ether or salt thereof and organic (-C(=O)-) group containing
    compound.


CLS 106/170.48
TXT Carbocyclic ring containing:

    Compositions under subclass 170.47 wherein the organic compound has a
    benzene or alicyclic (cycloaliphatic) ring attached directly or indirectly
    to the -C(=O)- group by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note. Alicyclic (cycloaliphatic) denotes (a) Cycloparaffins
    (saturated), (b) cycloolefins (unsaturated with one or more double bonds),
    and (c) cycloacetylenes or cyclynes (unsaturated with triple bond).


CLS 106/170.49
TXT With organic -C(-OH)- group containing compound, where the H of the -OH
    group can be replaced by a metal (e.g. alkanol, phenol, polyol, phenolate,
    etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 170.47 which contain an organic compound having
    a carbon bonded directly to a -OH group, where metal can replace the H of
    the -OH group in addition to the cellulose ester or salt thereof and the
    organic (-C(=O)-) group containing compound.


CLS 106/170.5
TXT With ether except dialkylene or polyalkylene glycol:

    Compositions under subclass 168.01 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose ester or salt thereof an organic compound having a-C-O-C- group
    except dialkylene or polyalkylene glycol.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169.49+ and 193.1, for compositions containing cellulose nitrate or
    cellulose ether or salt thereof and organic (-C-O-C-) group containing
    compound.


CLS 106/170.51
TXT With organic -C(-OH)- group containing compound, where the H of the -OH
    group can be replaced by a metal (e.g., alkanolate, alkanol, polyol,
    dialkylene glycol, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 168.01 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose ester or salt thereof an organic compound having a carbon bonded
    directly to a -OH group, where metal can replace the H of the -OH group.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169.51+ and 194.1+, for compositions containing cellulose nitrate or
    cellulose ether or salt thereof and organic-C(-OH)- group containing
    compound.


CLS 106/170.52
TXT Carbocyclic ring containing:

    Compositions under subclass 170.51 wherein the organic compound has a
    benzene or alicyclic (cycloaliphatic) ring attached directly or indirectly
    to the -C(-OH)- group by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note. Alicyclic (cycloaliphatic) denotes (a) Cycloparaffins
    (saturated), (b) cycloolefins (unsaturated with one or more double bonds),
    and (c) cycloacetylenes or cyclynes (unsaturated with triple bond)


CLS 106/170.53
TXT With organic compound containing halogen:

    Compositions under subclass 170.51 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose ester or salt thereof and the organic -C(-OH)- group containing
    compound an organic compound which has at least one halogen atom therein.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 163.01, (2) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.


CLS 106/170.54
TXT Three or more halogens containing or with additional organic compound
    containing halogen:

    Compositions under subclass 170.53 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose ester or salt thereof and the organic -C(-OH)- group containing
    compound (a) an organic compound containing three or more halogens or (b)
    two or more organic compounds containing halogens.


CLS 106/170.55
TXT With organic compound containing halogen:

    Compositions under subclass 168.01 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose ester or salt thereof an organic compound which has at least one
    halogen atom therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195.1,  for compositions containing cellulose ether or salt thereof and
    organic compound containing halogen.


CLS 106/170.56
TXT With bituminous or tarry residue, hydrocarbon, or naturally occurring wax:

    Compositions under subclass 168.01 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose ester or salt thereof (a) a composition or compound having the
    characteristics of a tar or pitch no matter what the origin, (b) an organic
    compound consisting exclusively of the elements carbon and hydrogen, or (c)
    a naturally occurring low-melting organic mixture or compound of
    hydrocarbons or esters of fatty acids and alcohols having the
    characteristics of wax (solid at room temperature).

    (1)     Note. Examples of components included herein are alkanes, alkenes,
    olefins, montan wax, ceresin wax, carnauba wax, all asphalts, bitumens,
    pitches and tars from coal, mineral oil, cotton seed pitch and the residue
    from the destructive distillation of wood, and natural oil distillations.


CLS 106/170.57
TXT With elemental silicon or inorganic silicon compound:

    Compositions under subclass 168.01 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose ester or salt thereof an elemental silicon or an inorganic
    compound containing silicon.


CLS 106/170.58
TXT With elemental metal or alloy or metal compound:

    Compositions under subclass 168.01 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose ester or salt thereof a free metal, a mixture of two or more
    metals or of one or more metals with certain nonmetallic elements (e.g.,
    carbon steel), or a compound of metal.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 163.01, (4) Note for the definition
    of alloy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169.56  and 198.1, for compositions containing cellulose nitrate or
    cellulose ether or salt thereof and elemental metal or alloy or metal
    compound.


CLS 106/171.1
TXT Cellulose acetate:

    Compositions under subclass 168.01 wherein the cellulose ester is cellulose
    acetate.


CLS 106/172.1
TXT Cellulose ether or salt thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 163.01 wherein the cellulosic material is a
    compound having the general formula ROR4, wherein RO- is the cellulose
    residue moiety and R4 is an ether forming radical.

    (1)     Note. Cellulose ether is made by etherifying the hydroxyl groups of
    cellulose.


CLS 106/173.01
TXT With nitrogen hetero ring compound:

    Compositions under subclass 172.1 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose ether or salt thereof an organic compound having a hetero ring
    containing nitrogen as a hetero atom.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 163.01, (5) Note for the definition
    of hetero ring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166.41, 169.1+, 170.1+, and 200.2, for compositions containing cellulose
    xanthate, cellulose nitrate, cellulose ester or salt, or a cellulosic
    material and nitrogen containing hetero ring.


CLS 106/174.1
TXT With chalcogen hetero ring compound:

    Compositions under subclass 172.1 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose ether or salt thereof an organic compound having a hetero ring
    containing chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) as a
    hetero atom.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 163.01, (5) Note for the definition
    of hetero ring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169.12+ and 170.12+, for compositions containing cellulose nitrate or
    cellulose ester or salt and chalcogen containing hetero ring.


CLS 106/174.2
TXT The chalcogen in the ring is sulfur:

    Compositions under subclass 174.1 wherein the hetero atom in the ring is
    sulfur.


CLS 106/175.1
TXT With phosphorus compound:

    Compositions under subclass 172.1 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose ether or salt thereof a compound of phosphorus.

    (1)     Note. Phosphorus compounds are often used as plasticizers and fire
    retardants.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166.2,  169.14+, and 170.15+, for compositions containing cellulose
    xanthate, cellulose nitrate, or cellulose ester or salt and phosphorus
    compound.


CLS 106/176.1
TXT With boron compound:

    Compositions under subclass 172.1 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose ether or salt thereof a compound of boron.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169.16  and 170.19, for compositions containing cellulose nitrate or
    cellulose ester or salt and boron compound.


CLS 106/177.1
TXT With organic compound containing silicon:

    Compositions under subclass 172.1 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose ether or salt thereof an organic compound which has at least one
    silicon atom therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166.1,  169.17, and 170.2, for compositions containing cellulose xanthate,
    cellulose nitrate, or cellulose ester or salt and organic compound
    containing silicon.


CLS 106/178.1
TXT With natural resin or derivative:

    Compositions under subclass 172.1 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose ether or salt thereof a natural resin or derivative of a natural
    resin.

    (1)     Note. Natural resins include but are not limited to shellac, copals
    from various sources (e.g., congo, manila, etc.), amber, dammar, dead
    dammar, gum rosin, rosin (colophony), tall oil (liquid rosin), wood rosin,
    burgundy pitch, gurjun balsam, canada balsam, sandrac, mastic, accroides,
    benzoin, elemi, gamboge, gum thus, venice turpentine, bordeaux turpentine,
    abietic acid, and pimaric acid.

    (2)     Note. Examples of derivatives included herein are hydrogenated,
    esterified, polymerized, or sulfurized resin, or salt thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164.41+, 169.18+, and 170.21, for compositions containing natural resin or
    derivative and lignocellulosic material, cellulose nitrate or cellulose
    ester or salt thereof.


CLS 106/179.1
TXT With lanolin, fat, or fatty oil or derivative thereof (e.g., lard, tallow,
    castor oil, linseed oil, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 172.1 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose ether or salt thereof lanolin, fat, or fatty oil or the
    derivatives thereof.

    (1)     Note. Definitions:

    (a)     By "fat" and "fatty oil" are meant the glyceryl triester
    (triglyceride) of the same or different higher fatty acids (e.g., oleic,
    myristic, palmitic, stearic, linolenic, etc.) or mixtures thereof present
    in a single oil or fat (e.g., lard, tallow, castor oil, etc.);

    (b)     By "lanolin" is meant cholesterol esters of higher fatty acids.

    (2)     Note. Examples of derivative included herein are esterified,
    oxidized, polymerized, vulcanized, or hydrogenized fatty oil, fat, or
    lanolin.

    (3)     Note. Included herein are oils derived from plant and animal origin
    (e.g., castor, coconut, corn, soybean, olive, cottonseed, safflower, fish,
    fish-liver, sperm, etc.) and the functional oils, such as drying oils
    (linseed, tung, oiticica), semidrying oils (soybean, cottonseed), and
    nondrying oils (castor, coconut).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169.26+ and 170.23+, for compositions containing cellulose nitrate or
    cellulose ester or salt thereof and lanolin, fat, or fatty oil or
    derivative thereof.


CLS 106/180.1
TXT With terpene or derivative (e.g. camphor, pine oil, terpineol, borneol,
    etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 172.1 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose ether or salt thereof a terpene or reaction products wherein the
    terpene structure is not destroyed.

    (1)     Note. Terpene denotes a hydrocarbon having two or more isoprene
    units (C5H8). Most terpenes have carbon skeleton of 10, 15, 20, or 30 atoms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169.28+ and 170.25, for compositions containing cellulose nitrate or
    cellulose ester or salt thereof and terpene or derivative thereof.


CLS 106/181.1
TXT With organic -C(=O)O- group containing compound except wax (e.g., fatty
    acid, dicarboxylic acid, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 172.1 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose ether or salt thereof an organic compound containing the -C(=O)O-
    group except wax.

    (1)     Note. Examples of compounds included herein are the carboxylic
    acids such as dicarboxylic acid, and fatty acid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169.33+ and 170.26+, for compositions containing cellulose nitrate or
    cellulose ester or salt thereof and organic-C(=O)O- group containing
    compound.


CLS 106/182.1
TXT Carbon bonded directly to the single bonded oxygen of the -C(=O)O- group
    (e.g., fatty acid ester, acid anhydride, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 181.1 wherein the organic -C(=O)O- group
    containing compound has the single bonded oxygen of the -C(=O)O- group
    single bonded to an additional carbon atom.


CLS 106/183.1
TXT Nitrogen or chalcogen bonded directly to the carbon of the -C(=O)O- group
    (e.g., diethyl carbonate, dodecyl phenylcarbamate, octyl carbanilate,
    urethane, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 182.1 wherein the carbon of the -C(=O)O- group
    is bonded directly to a nitrogen or to a chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium).


CLS 106/184.1
TXT Plural -C(=O)O- groups attached directly or indirectly to each other by
    nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 182.1 wherein the -C(=O)O- group is attached
    directly or indirectly to one or more -C(=O)O- groups by nonionic bonding.


CLS 106/184.2
TXT Exactly two -C(=O)O- groups attached directly to the same benzene ring by
    nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 184.1 wherein a benzene ring is attached
    directly to two-C (=O)O- groups by nonionic bonding.


CLS 106/184.3
TXT Esterified dihydric or polyhydric alcohol:

    Compositions under subclass 184.1 wherein the plural -C(=O)O- groups are
    produced by reacting carboxylic acids with alcohol having two or more
    hydroxyl -OH groups.


CLS 106/185.1
TXT Nitrogen attached indirectly to the
    -C(=O)O- group by nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 182.1 wherein the -C(=O)O- group is attached
    indirectly to nitrogen by nonionic bonding.


CLS 106/186.1
TXT Oxygen attached indirectly to the -C(=O)O- group by nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 182.1 wherein the -C(=O)O- group is attached
    indirectly to oxygen by nonionic bonding.


CLS 106/186.2
TXT Benzene ring attached directly or indirectly to the -C(=O)O- group by
    nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 186.1 wherein the -C(=O)O- group is attached
    directly or indirectly to oxygen and to a benzene ring.


CLS 106/187.1
TXT With organic compound containing oxygen (e.g., alcohol, ketone, additional
    carboxylic acid ester, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 182.1 which contain an organic compound which
    has at least one oxygen atom therein in addition to the cellulose ether or
    salt thereof and the compound having carbon bonded directly to the single
    bonded oxygen of the -C(=O)O- group.


CLS 106/188.1
TXT With organic compound containing halogen:

    Compositions under subclass 182.1 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose ether or salt thereof and the compound having carbon bonded
    directly to the single bonded oxygen of the -C(=O)O- group an organic
    compound which has at least one halogen atom therein.


CLS 106/189.1
TXT Metal or nitrogen salt:

    Compositions under subclass 181.1 wherein the hydrogen of the carboxylic
    acid is replaced by a metal or ammonium or substituted ammonium.


CLS 106/190.1
TXT With organic compound containing nitrogen:

    Compositions under subclass 172.1 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose ether or salt thereof an organic compound which has at least one
    nitrogen atom therein.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 163.01, (2) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164.3,  166.4+, 169.46+, 170.42+, and 200.1+, for compositions containing
    lignocellulosic material, cellulose xanthate, cellulose nitrate, cellulose
    ester or salt thereof, or a cellulosic material and organic compound
    containing nitrogen.


CLS 106/191.1
TXT With organic compound containing sulfur:

    Compositions under subclass 172.1 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose ether or salt thereof an organic compound which has at least one
    sulfur atom therein.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 163.01, (2) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166.3+, 169.45, 170.46, and 202.1, for compositions containing cellulose
    xanthate, cellulose nitrate, cellulose ester or salt, or a cellulosic
    material and organic compound containing sulfur.


CLS 106/192.1
TXT With organic -C(=O)- group containing compound (e.g., aldehyde, ketone,
    etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 172.1 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose ether or salt thereof an organic compound having a carbonyl
    -C(=O)- group.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169.48  and 170.47+, for compositions containing cellulose nitrate or
    cellulose ester or salt thereof and organic (-C(=O)-) group containing
    compound.


CLS 106/193.1
TXT With ether except dialkylene or polyalkylene glycol:

    Compositions under subclass 172.1 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose ether or salt thereof an organic compound having an ether -C-O-C-
    group except dialkylene or polyalkylene glycol.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169.49+ and 170.5, for compositions containing cellulose nitrate or
    cellulose ester or salt thereof and organic (-C-O-C-) group containing
    compound.


CLS 106/194.1
TXT With organic -C(-OH)- group containing compound, where the H of the -OH
    group can be replaced by a metal (e.g. alkanol, phenol, alkanolate,
    phenolate, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 172.1 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose ether or salt thereof an organic compound having a carbon bonded
    directly to a -OH group, where metal can replace the H of the -OH group.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169.51+ and 170.51+, for compositions containing cellulose nitrate or
    cellulose ester or salt thereof and organic-C(-OH)- group containing
    compound.


CLS 106/194.2
TXT Plural hydroxyl groups containing (e.g., glycol, glycerol, etc.):


    Compositions under subclass 194.1 wherein the organic compound has two or
    more hydroxyl (-OH) groups.


CLS 106/194.3
TXT With organic compound containing halogen:

    Compositions under subclass 194.1 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose ether or salt thereof and the organic -C(-OH)- group containing
    compound an organic compound which has at least one halogen atom therein.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 163.01, (2) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.


CLS 106/195.1
TXT With organic compound containing halogen:

    Compositions under subclass 172.1 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose ether or salt thereof an organic compound which has at least one
    halogen atom therein.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 163.01, (2) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170.55, for compositions containing cellulose ester or salt thereof and
    organic compound containing halogen.


CLS 106/196.1
TXT With bituminous or tarry residue, hydrocarbon, or naturally occurring wax:

    Compositions under subclass 172.1 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose ether or salt thereof (a) a composition or compound having the
    characteristics of a tar or pitch no matter what the origin, (b) an organic
    compound consisting exclusively of the elements carbon and hydrogen, or (c)
    a naturally occurring low-melting organic mixture or compound of
    hydrocarbons or esters of fatty acids and alcohols having the
    characteristics of wax (solid at room temperature).

    (1)     Note. Examples of components included herein are alkanes, alkenes,
    olefins, montan wax, ceresin wax, carnauba wax, all asphalts, bitumens,
    pitches and tars from coal, mineral oil, cotton seed pitch and the residue
    from the destructive distillation of wood, and natural oil distillations.


CLS 106/197.01
TXT With elemental silicon or inorganic silicon compound:

    Compositions under subclass 172.1 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose ether or salt thereof an elemental silicon or an inorganic
    compound containing silicon.


CLS 106/198.1
TXT With elemental metal or alloy or metal compound:

    Compositions under subclass 172.1 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose ether or salt thereof free metal, mixture of two or more metals
    or of one or more metals with certain nonmetallic elements (e.g., carbon
    steel), or compound of metal. free metal, mixture of two or more metals or
    of one or more metals with certain nonmetallic elements (e.g., carbon
    steel), or compound of metal.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 163.01, (4) Note for the definition
    of alloy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169.56  and 170.58, for compositions containing cellulose nitrate, or
    cellulose ester or salt thereof and elemental metal or alloy or metal
    compound.


CLS 106/199.1
TXT With elemental carbon (e.g., graphite, coal, carbon black, etc.):


    Compositions under subclass 172.1 which contain in addition to the
    cellulose ether or salt thereof carbon in substantially pure form including
    its crystalline allotrope (i.e., graphite) and amorphous allotropes (e.g.,
    coal, coke, carbon black, etc.).


CLS 106/200.1
TXT With organic compound containing nitrogen (e.g., amine, quaternary ammonium
    halide, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 163.01 which contain in addition to the
    cellulosic material an organic compound which has at least one nitrogen
    atom therein.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 163.01, (2) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164.3,  166.4, 169.46, 170.42, and 190.1, for compositions containing
    lignocellulosic material, cellulose xanthate, cellulose nitrate, cellulose
    ester or salt, or cellulose ether or salt and organic compound containing
    nitrogen.


CLS 106/200.2
TXT The nitrogen is part of a hetero ring:

    Compositions under subclass 200.1 wherein the organic compound containing
    nitrogen is part of a hetero ring containing nitrogen as a hetero atom.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 163.01, (5) Note for the definition
    of hetero ring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166.41, 169.1, 170.1, and 172.1, for compositions containing cellulose
    xanthate, cellulose nitrate, cellulose ester or salt, or cellulose ether or
    salt and nitrogen containing hetero ring.


CLS 106/200.3
TXT Oxygen and nitrogen in the same compound (e.g., amide, ammonium alkyl
    sulfonate, urea, tertiary amine oxide, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 200.1 wherein the organic compound containing
    nitrogen has both nitrogen and oxygen in the same compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166.42, for compositions containing cellulose xanthate and oxygen attached
    directly or indirectly to an organic compound containing nitrogen.


CLS 106/200.4
TXT Alkanol amine or salt thereof (e.g., monoethanolamine formate,
    monoethanolamine hydrochloride, triethanolamine, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 200.3 wherein the organic compound has a
    nitrogen attached directly to the carbon of an alkyl alcohol or salt
    thereof.


CLS 106/201.1
TXT With organic compound containing halogen:

    Compositions under subclass 163.01 which contain in addition to the
    cellulosic material an organic compound which has at least one halogen atom
    therein.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 163.01, (2) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166.6,  170.55 and 195.1, for compositions containing cellulose xanthate,
    cellulose ester or salt, or cellulose ether or salt and an organic compound
    containing halogen.


CLS 106/202.1
TXT With organic compound containing sulfur:

    Compositions under subclass 163.01 which contain in addition to the
    cellulosic material an organic compound which has at least one sulfur atom
    therein.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 163.01, (2) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166.3,  169.45, 170.46, and 191.1, for compositions containing cellulose
    xanthate, cellulose nitrate, cellulose ester or salt , or cellulose ether
    or salt and organic compound containing sulfur.


CLS 106/203.1
TXT With organic compound containing oxygen:

    Compositions under subclass 163.01 which contain in addition to the
    cellulosic material an organic compound which has at least one oxygen atom
    therein.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 163.01, (2) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166.5,  for compositions containing cellulose xanthate and organic compound
    containing oxygen.


CLS 106/203.2
TXT Dihydric or polyhydric alcohol or ether derivative thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 203.1 wherein the organic compound has two or
    more -OH groups, each of which is bonded directly to a carbon, which carbon
    may be single bonded to any element but may be multiple bonded only to
    carbon or ether derivative thereof whereby the H of the -OH group is
    replaced by a C.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166.52, for compositions containing cellulose xanthate and dihydric or
    polyhydric alcohol.


CLS 106/203.3
TXT Natural resin or organic -C(=O)O- compound (e.g., rosin, tall oil, tallow,
    castor oil, carboxylic acid, ester wax, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 203.1 wherein the organic compound containing
    oxygen is (a) a natural resin, or (b) a compound in which the carbon of the
    -C(=O)O- group is, or is attached directly or indirectly by nonionic
    bonding to, the carbon of an organic compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166.51, for compositions containing cellulose xanthate and a natural resin
    or organic -C(=O)O- compound.


CLS 106/204.01
TXT With element or inorganic compound except water:

    Compositions under subclass 163.01 which contain in addition to the
    cellulosic material elemental material or any inorganic compound except
    water.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 163.01, (2) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.

    (2)     Note. Examples of components included herein are carbon disulfide,
    carbon black, metal alloy, metal dust, sodium chloride, and calcium
    carbonate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164.5   and 166.8, for compositions containing lignocellulosic material or
    cellulose xanthate and inorganic compound or element, other than water.


CLS 106/204.2
TXT Elemental titanium or inorganic titanium compound:

    Compositions under subclass 204.01 wherein the inorganic compound or
    element is elemental titanium or inorganic compound containing titanium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166.81, for compositions containing cellulose xanthate and inorganic
    compound containing titanium.


CLS 106/204.3
TXT Elemental silicon or inorganic silicon compound:

    Compositions under subclass 204.01 wherein the inorganic compound or
    element is elemental silicon or inorganic compound containing silicon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164.51, 166.82, 169.55, 170.57, and 197.01, for compositions containing
    lignocellulosic material, cellulose xanthate, cellulose nitrate, cellulose
    ester or salt, or cellulose ether or salt and elemental silicon or
    inorganic compound containing silicon.


CLS 106/205.01
TXT Carbohydrate gum, dextrin or derivative (e.g., arabic, tragacanth, guar,
    karaya, agar agar, algin, irish moss, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 162.1 wherein the carbohydrate or derivative is
    dextrin, carbohydrate gum, or derivative thereof.

    (1)     Note. Dextrin consists of various gummy polysaccharides produced by
    thermal or acid degradation of starch.

    (2)     Note. Carbohydrate gums are highly branched polysaccharides
    composed of two or more monosaccharides, and are exudations of plants
    produced by the plant to cover wounds and to prevent attack by organisms.

    (3)     Note. Carbohydrate gums include but are not limited to: Arabic,
    tragacanth, xanthan, galactomannan, irish moss, carrageenan, karaya, agar
    agar, algin, guar, xylogalactan, and glucomannan.

    (4)     Note. Examples of derivatives included herein are esterified,
    etherified, sulfonated, and borated.


CLS 106/205.1
TXT With hetero ring compound except carbohydrate:

    Compositions under subclass 205.01 which contain dextrin, or derivative
    thereof, an organic compound having a hetero ring in addition to the
    carbohydrate gum.

    (1)     Note. Hetero ring is a ring having only carbon and at least one
    atom from the group consisting of nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, selenium and
    tellurium as ring members.


CLS 106/205.2
TXT With phosphorus compound:

    Compositions under subclass 205.01 which contain dextrin, or derivative
    thereof, a compound of phosphorus in addition to the carbohydrate gum.


CLS 106/205.3
TXT With boron compound:

    Compositions under subclass 205.01 which contain dextrin, or derivative
    thereof, a compound of boron in addition to the carbohydrate gum.


CLS 106/205.31
TXT With organic compound containing oxygen:

    Compositions under subclass 205.3 which contain an organic compound which
    has at least one oxygen atom therein in addition to the boron compound.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 162.1, (2) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.


CLS 106/205.4
TXT With natural resin or derivative:

    Compositions under subclass 205.01 which contain dextrin, or derivative
    thereof, a natural resin or a chemical modification of a natural resin in
    addition to the carbohydrate gum.

    (1)     Note. Natural resins include but are not limited to shellac, copals
    from various sources (e.g., congo, manila, etc.), amber, dammar, dead
    dammar, gum rosin, japan, japan varnish, rosin (colophony), tall oil
    (liquid rosin), wood rosin, burgundy pitch, gurjun balsam, canada balsam,
    sandrac, mastic, accroides, benzoin, elemi, gamboge, gum thus, venice
    turpentine, bordeaux turpentine, abietic acid, and pimaric acid.

    (2)     Note. Examples of derivatives included herein are hydrogenated,
    esterified, polymerized, and sulfurized resins, or salts thereof.


CLS 106/205.5
TXT With terpene or derivative, lanolin, fat, or fatty oil:

    Compositions under subclass 205.01 which contain dextrin, or derivative
    thereof, a terpene or a chemical modification of a terpene, lanolin, fat,
    or fatty oil in addition to the carbohydrate gum.

    (1)     Note. Terpene denotes a hydrocarbon having two or more isoprene
    units (C5H8). Most terpenes have carbon skeleton of 10, 15, 20, or 30 atoms.

    (2)     Note. The term "derivative" herein is intended to include a
    chemical modification of the terpene wherein the terpene structure is not
    destroyed or wherein the terpene structure is indeterminate.

    (3)     Note. Definitions:

    (a)     By "fat" and "fatty oil" are meant the glyceryl triester
    (triglyceride) of the same or different higher fatty acids (e.g., oleic,
    myristic, palmitic, stearic, linolenic, etc.) or mixtures thereof present
    in a single oil or fat (e.g., lard, tallow, castor oil, etc.);

    (b)     By "lanolin" is meant cholesterol esters of higher fatty acids.


CLS 106/205.6
TXT With organic compound containing sulfur or nitrogen:

    Compositions under subclass 205.01 which contain dextrin, or derivative
    thereof, an organic compound which has at least one sulfur or nitrogen atom
    therein in addition to the carbohydrate gum.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 162.1, (2) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.


CLS 106/205.7
TXT With organic compound containing oxygen except wax:

    Compositions under subclass 205.01 which contain, in addition to the
    carbohydrate gum, dextrin, or derivative thereof, an organic compound which
    has at least one oxygen atom therein except wax.


CLS 106/205.71
TXT The oxygen is part of a -C(=O)O- group:

    Compositions under subclass 205.7 wherein the organic compound containing
    oxygen has a carboxylate group (i.e., -C(=O)O-).


CLS 106/205.72
TXT Dihydric or polyhydric alcohol:

    Compositions under subclass 205.7 wherein the organic compound containing
    oxygen is an alcohol with two or more hydroxyl (-OH) groups.


CLS 106/205.8
TXT With bituminous or tarry residue, hydrocarbon, or naturally occurring wax:

    Compositions under subclass 205.01 which contain, in addition to the
    carbohydrate gum, dextrin, or derivative thereof, (a) a composition or
    compound having the characteristics of a tar or pitch no matter what the
    origin, (b) an organic compound consisting exclusively of the elements
    carbon and hydrogen, or (c) a naturally occurring low-melting organic
    mixture or compound of hydrocarbons or esters of fatty acids and alcohols
    having the characteristics of wax (solid at room temperature).

    (1)     Note. Examples of components included herein are alkanes, alkenes,
    olefins, montan wax, ceresin wax, carnauba wax, all asphalts, bitumens,
    pitches and tars from coal, mineral oil, cotton seed pitch and the residue
    from the destructive distillation of wood, and natural oil distillations.


CLS 106/205.9
TXT With element or inorganic compound except water:

    Compositions under subclass 205.01 which contain dextrin, or derivative
    thereof, elemental material or any inorganic compound except water in
    addition to the carbohydrate gum.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 162.1, (4) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.


CLS 106/206.1
TXT Starch or derivative:

    Compositions under subclass 162.1 wherein the carbohydrate or derivative is
    a compound containing amylose and amylopectin as its main components or
    derivatives thereof.

    (1)     Note. Starches are heterogenous in that the amylose and amylopectin
    occur in different ratios to each other.

    (2)     Note. Included herein are starch fractions such as amylose and
    amylopectin as well as modified starches (e.g., thin boiling starches,
    etc.).


CLS 106/207.1
TXT Starch ester:

    Compounds under subclass 206.1 wherein the starch derivative results from
    the reaction of a hydroxyl group of starch with an acid.

    (1)     Note. The esterifying acid may be organic or inorganic.

    (2)     Note. This subclass does not provide for compounds formed when the
    sole acid moiety entering into the formation is a halogen.


CLS 106/207.2
TXT With hetero ring compound except carbohydrate:

    Compositions under subclass 207.1 which contain an organic compound having
    a hetero ring except a carbohydrate in addition to the starch ester.

    (1)     Note. Hetero ring is a ring having only carbon and at least one
    atom from the group consisting of nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, selenium and
    tellurium as ring members.


CLS 106/207.3
TXT With phosphorus compound or boron compound or organic compound containing
    silicon:

    Compositions under subclass 207.1 which contain a compound of phosphorus, a
    compound of boron, or an organic compound which has at least one silicon
    atom therein in addition to the starch ester.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 162.1, (2) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.


CLS 106/207.4
TXT With organic compound containing sulfur or nitrogen:

    Compositions under subclass 207.1 which contain an organic compound which
    has at least one sulfur or nitrogen atom therein in addition to the starch
    ester.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 162.1, (2) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.


CLS 106/207.5
TXT With organic compound containing oxygen except wax:

    Compositions under subclass 206.1 which contain an organic compound which
    has at least one oxygen atom therein except wax in addition to the starch
    or derivative thereof.


CLS 106/208.1
TXT Oxidized starch:

    Compounds under subclass 206.1 wherein the starch derivative is a starch
    which has undergone oxidation.


CLS 106/208.2
TXT With hetero ring compound except carbohydrate:

    Compositions under subclass 208.1 which contain an organic compound having
    a hetero ring except a carbohydrate in addition to the oxidized starch.

    (1)     Note. Hetero ring is a ring having only carbon and at least one
    atom from the group consisting of nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, selenium and
    tellurium as ring members.


CLS 106/208.3
TXT With phosphorus compound or boron compound or organic compound containing
    silicon:

    Compositions under subclass 208.1 which contain, in addition to the
    oxidized starch, a compound of phosphorus, a compound of boron, or an
    organic compound which has at least one silicon atom therein.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 162.1, (2) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.


CLS 106/208.4
TXT With organic compound containing sulfur or nitrogen:

    Compositions under subclass 208.1 which contain an organic compound which
    has at least one sulfur or nitrogen atom therein in addition to the
    oxidized starch.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 162.1, (2) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.


CLS 106/208.5
TXT With organic compound containing oxygen except wax:

    Compositions under subclass 208.1 which contain an organic compound which
    has at least one oxygen atom therein except wax in addition to the oxidized
    starch.


CLS 106/209.1
TXT With hetero ring compound except carbohydrate:

    Compositions under subclass 206.1 which contain an organic compound having
    a hetero ring except a carbohydrate in addition to the starch or derivative
    thereof.

    (1)     Note. Hetero ring is a ring having only carbon and at least one
    atom from the group consisting of nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, selenium, and
    tellurium as ring members.


CLS 106/210.1
TXT With phosphorus compound:

    Compositions under subclass 206.1 which contain a compound of phosphorus in
    addition to the starch or derivative thereof.


CLS 106/211.1
TXT With boron compound:

    Compositions under subclass 206.1 which contain a compound of boron in
    addition to the starch or derivative thereof.


CLS 106/212.1
TXT With organic compound containing silicon:

    Compositions under subclass 206.1 which contain, in addition to the starch
    or derivative thereof, an organic compound which has at least one silicon
    atom therein.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 162.1, (2) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.


CLS 106/213.1
TXT With organic compound containing sulfur:

    Compositions under subclass 206.1 which contain an organic compound which
    has at least one sulfur atom therein in addition to the starch or
    derivative thereof.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 162.1, (2) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.


CLS 106/214.1
TXT With organic compound containing nitrogen:

    Compositions under subclass 206.1 which contain an organic compound which
    has at least one nitrogen atom therein in addition to the starch or
    derivative thereof.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 162.1, (2) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.


CLS 106/214.2
TXT Nitrogen and oxygen in the same compound:

    Compositions under subclass 214.1 wherein the organic compound has both
    nitrogen and oxygen.


CLS 106/215.1
TXT With organic compound containing oxygen except wax:

    Compositions under subclass 206.1 which contain an organic compound which
    has at least one oxygen atom therein except wax in addition to the starch
    or derivative thereof.


CLS 106/215.2
TXT The oxygen is part of a -C(=O)O- group:

    Compositions under subclass 215.1 wherein the organic compound containing
    oxygen has a carboxylate group (i.e., -C(=O)O-).


CLS 106/215.3
TXT Carbon bonded directly to the single bonded oxygen of the -C(=O)O- group:

    Compositions under subclass 215.2 wherein the organic -C(=O)O- group
    containing compound has the single-bonded oxygen of the -C(=O)O- group
    single bonded to an additional carbon atom.


CLS 106/215.4
TXT Plural -C(=O)O- groups:

    Compositions under subclass 215.3 wherein the organic -C(=O)O- group
    containing compound has two or more carboxylate groups.


CLS 106/215.5
TXT Dihydric or polyhydric alcohol:

    Compositions under subclass 215.1 wherein the organic compound containing
    oxygen is an alcohol with two or more hydroxyl (-OH) groups.


CLS 106/216.1
TXT With bituminous or tarry residue, hydrocarbon, or naturally occurring wax:

    Compositions under subclass 206.1 which contain, in addition to the starch
    or derivative thereof, (a) a composition or compound having the
    characteristics of a tar or pitch no matter what the origin, (b) an organic
    compound consisting exclusively of the elements carbon and hydrogen, or (c)
    a naturally occurring low-melting organic mixture or compound of
    hydrocarbons or esters of fatty acids and alcohols having the
    characteristics of wax (solid at room temperature).


    (1)     Note. Examples of components included herein are alkanes, alkenes,
    olefins, montan wax, ceresin wax, carnauba wax, all asphalts, bitumens,
    pitches and tars from coal, mineral oil, cotton seed pitch and the residue
    from the destructive distillation of wood, and natural oil distillations.


CLS 106/217.01
TXT With element or inorganic compound except water:

    Compositions under subclass 206.1 which contain elemental material or any
    inorganic compound except water in addition to the starch or derivative
    thereof.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 162.1, (2) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.


CLS 106/217.1
TXT Elemental halogen or halogen containing:

    Compositions under subclass 217.01 wherein the inorganic compound or
    element is an inorganic compound containing halogen or elemental halogen.


CLS 106/217.2
TXT Alkali or alkaline earth metal hydroxide (e.g., caustic soda, caustic
    alkali, caustic lime, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 217.01 wherein the inorganic compound  is an
    alkali metal hydroxide or an alkaline earth metal hydroxide.

    (1)     Note. The alkali metals are lithium, sodium, potassium, rubidium,
    cesium, and francium.

    (2)     Note. The alkaline earth metals are magnesium, calcium, strontium,
    barium, and radium.


CLS 106/217.3
TXT Elemental silicon or silicon containing:

    Compositions under subclass 217.01 wherein the inorganic compound or
    element is an inorganic compound containing silicon or elemental silicon.


CLS 106/217.4
TXT With natural resin or derivative:

    Compositions under subclass 162.1 which contain a natural resin or a
    chemical modification of a natural resin in addition to the carbohydrate or
    derivative thereof.

    (1)     Note. Natural resins include but are not limited to shellac, copals
    from various sources (e.g., congo, manila, etc.), amber, dammar, dead
    dammar, gum rosin, japan, japan varnish, rosin (colophony), tall oil
    (liquid rosin), wood rosin, burgundy pitch, gurjun balsam, canada balsam,
    sandrac, mastic, accroides, benzoin, elemi, gamboge, gum thus, venice
    turpentine, bordeaux turpentine, abietic acid, and pimaric acid.

    (2)     Note. Examples of derivatives included herein are hydrogenated,
    esterified, polymerized, and sulfurized resins, or salts thereof.


CLS 106/217.5
TXT With hetero ring compound except carbohydrate:

    Compositions under subclass 162.1 which contain an organic compound having
    a hetero ring except a carbohydrate in addition to the carbohydrate or
    derivative thereof.

    (1)     Note. Hetero ring is a ring having only carbon and at least one
    atom from the group consisting of nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, selenium, and
    tellurium as ring members.


CLS 106/217.6
TXT With organic compound containing nitrogen:

    Compositions under subclass 162.1 which contain an organic compound which
    has at least one nitrogen atom therein in addition to the carbohydrate or
    derivative thereof.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 162.1, (2) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.


CLS 106/217.7
TXT With organic compound containing oxygen except wax:

    Compositions under subclass 162.1 which contain an organic compound which
    has at least one oxygen atom therein except wax in addition to the
    carbohydrate or derivative thereof.


CLS 106/217.8
TXT With bituminous or tarry residue, hydrocarbon, or naturally occurring wax:

    Compositions under subclass 162.1 which contain, in addition to the
    carbohydrate or derivative thereof, (a) a composition or compound having
    the characteristics of a tar or pitch no matter what the origin, (b) an
    organic compound consisting exclusively of the elements carbon and
    hydrogen, or (c) a naturally-occurring low-melting organic mixture or
    compound of hydrocarbons or esters of fatty acids and alcohols having the
    characteristics of wax (solid at room temperature).


    (1)     Note. Examples of components included herein are alkanes, alkenes,
    olefins, montan wax, ceresin wax, carnauba wax, all asphalts, bitumens,
    pitches and tars from coal, mineral oil, cotton seed pitch and the residue
    from the destructive distillation of wood, and natural oil distillations.


CLS 106/217.9
TXT With element or inorganic compound except water:

    Compositions under subclass 162.1 which contain elemental material or any
    inorganic compound except water in addition to the carbohydrate or
    derivative thereof.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 162.1, (2) Note for the definition
    of an organic compound.


CLS 106/218
TXT Coating or plastic compositions in the preparation of which a natural resin
    or derivative, e.g., rosin, copal, gamboge or ester gum, is employed.

    (1)     Note.  For the purpose of this classification, crude products,
    e.g., pine tar, wood tar, wood pitch, which contain natural resins or
    reaction products thereof, are considered to be natural resins.  Also
    included within the scope of natural resins are those compounds of known
    chemical structure containing the hydrophenanthrene nucleus which are
    derived from natural resins by treatment of the resin, per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for polishes containing a natural resin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, subclasses 97+ for natural resins or
    reaction products thereof.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, Class 524, subclasses 77, 187,
    270+, and 764 for a natural resin or natural rubber or derivative
    nonreactant material in admixture with a synthetic resin; and Classes 525,
    526, 527, and 528 for a natural resin or derivative containing synthetic
    resin, and see in particular Class 520, subclass 1 (Note 9, B) for an
    explanation of the type of polymer derived from a natural resin or
    derivative reactant which is proper for Class 520 as well as what is
    considered a natural resin or derivative for that Class.


CLS 106/219
TXT Compositions under subclass 218 in the preparation of which a fat, fatty
    oil, fatty oil acid or salt thereof is employed.


CLS 106/220
TXT Compositions under subclass 219 in the preparation of which a fatty oil is
    employed.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the patents in this subclass and indented subclasses
    are for varnishes.


CLS 106/221
TXT Compositions under subclass 220 in the preparation of which two or more
    kinds of fatty oil are employed.

    (1)     Note.  The fatty oils may be from different sources, or may be
    different forms of the same oil, e.g., mixtures of linseed oil and cotton
    seed oil, castor oil and Turkey red oil.


CLS 106/222
TXT Compositions under subclass 220 in the preparation of which a drying oil is
    employed.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains oils which are either drying or
    semi-drying, e.g., linseed oil or cotton seed oil.

    (2)     Note.  The term "varnish" when broadly used is presumed to include
    a mixture of a natural resin and a drying oil, and patents drawn to
    compositions containing "varnish" recited broadly are classified on this
    basis, i.e., in this subclass or indented subclasses or in the appropriate
    subclass above.


CLS 106/223
TXT Compositions under subclass 222 in the preparation of which a sulfurizing
    or sulfonating agent is employed, including those compositions in the
    preparation of which sulfurized or sulfonated resin or oil is employed as
    such.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233,    247 and 249, for other natural resin or fatty oil compositions
    including a sulfurizing or sulfonating agent.


CLS 106/224
TXT Compositions under subclass 222 in the preparation of which a wax is
    employed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229,    230, 231, and 245, for other natural resin or fatty oil
    compositions in the preparation of which a wax is employed.


CLS 106/225
TXT Compositions under subclass 222 in the preparation of which a bituminous
    material or tarry residue is employed.

    (1)     Note.  The bituminous material or "tarry residue" is employed in
    addition to the natural resin or derivative or crude products containing
    the same.


CLS 106/226
TXT Compositions under subclass 222 in the preparation of which a terpene or
    derivative, other than a natural resin, is employed.


CLS 106/227
TXT Compositions under subclass 222 in the preparation of which a hydrocarbon
    is employed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226,    for natural resin fatty oil compositions in which the hydrocarbon
    is a terpene, e.g., spirits of turpentine.


CLS 106/228
TXT Compositions under subclass 222 containing a filler, dye or pigment.

    (1)     Note.  Patents wherein the filler, dye or pigment is claimed
    broadly as such are not placed in this subclass unless specific proportions
    or special treatments are claimed in connection therewith.


CLS 106/229
TXT Compositions under subclass 220 in the preparation of which a wax,
    bituminous material or tarry residue is employed.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 224 and 225.

    (2)     Note.  The bituminous material or tarry residue is employed in
    addition to the natural resin or derivative or crude products containing
    the same.


CLS 106/230
TXT Compositions under subclass 218 in the preparation of which a wax is
    employed.

    (1)     Note.  The wax employed may be either an ester type wax or a
    hydrocarbon wax, e.g., paraffin.


CLS 106/231
TXT Compositions under subclass 230 in the preparation of which an ester type
    wax, e.g., beeswax or carnauba, is employed.


CLS 106/232
TXT Compositions under subclass 218 in the preparation of which a bituminous
    material or tarry residue is employed.

    (1)     Note.  The bituminous material and "tarry residue" is employed in
    addition to the natural resin or derivative or crude products containing
    the same.


CLS 106/233
TXT Compositions under subclass 232 in the preparation of which a sulfurizing
    or sulfonating agent is employed, including those compositions in which a
    sulfurized or sulfonated natural resin or bituminous material is employed
    as such.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247,    274 and 275, for other bituminous compositions in the preparation
    of which a sulfurizing or sulfonating agent is employed.


CLS 106/234
TXT Compositions under subclass 232 in the preparation of which a hydrocarbon
    (other than the bituminous material or tarry residue) is employed.


CLS 106/235
TXT Compositions under subclass 232 containing a filler, dye or pigment.

    (1)     Note.  Patents wherein the filler, dye, or pigment is claimed
    broadly as such are not placed in this subclass unless specific proportions
    or special treatments are claimed in connection therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241,    242 and 281, and indented subclasses, for other natural resin or
    derivative or bituminous compositions containing a filler, dye or pigment.


CLS 106/236
TXT Compositions under subclass 218 which are normally liquid and contain a
    definite solvent or dispersing medium.

    (1)     Note.  Patents wherein the solvent or dispersing medium is merely
    claimed broadly are not classified in this subclass or indented subclasses,
    unless specific proportions or special treatments are claimed in connection
    with the solvent or dispersing medium.


CLS 106/237
TXT Compositions under subclass 236 containing an alcohol.


CLS 106/238
TXT Compositions under subclass 236 containing water.


CLS 106/239
TXT Compositions under subclass 236 containing a hydrocarbon.


CLS 106/240
TXT Compositions under subclass 218 containing a definite flux, softener or
    plasticizer.

    (1)     Note.  Patents wherein the flux, softener or plasticizer is claimed
    broadly as such are not placed here unless specific proportions or some
    special treatments are claimed in connection therewith.


CLS 106/241
TXT Compositions under subclass 218 containing a definite filler, dye or
    pigment.

    (1)     Note.  Where the filler, dye or pigment is claimed broadly as such,
    the patent is not classified in this subclass unless specific proportions
    or special treatments are claimed in connection with these ingredients.


CLS 106/242
TXT Compositions under subclass 241 containing a fibrous filler, e.g., asbestos.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156,    for natural resin compositions containing proteinaceous fibers,
    e.g., hair or leather fiber; and subclass 200 for natural resin
    compositions containing cellulose fibers, e.g., cork or cotton.


CLS 106/243
TXT Coating or plastic compositions in the preparation of which a fat, fatty
    oil, fatty oil acid or salt thereof is employed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, Class 523, subclasses 455 and
    511 and Class 524, subclasses 284+ for a fat, fatty oil, dimer or trimer of
    a fatty acid as a nonreactant material in admixture with a synthetic resin
    or natural rubber; and Classes 525, 526, 527, and 528 for a fat, fatty oil,
    dimer or trimer containing synthetic resin and see in particular Class 520,
    subclass 1 (Note 9, A) for an explanation of the type of polymers derived
    from said materials which are proper for Class 520.

    554,    Organic Compounds, subclass 1 and definition thereof, for the
    definition of "fats", "fatty oil" and "higher fatty acid".


CLS 106/244
TXT Compositions under subclass 243 in the preparation of which a fatty oil is
    employed.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the patents in this subclass and indented subclasses
    are for paints.


CLS 106/245
TXT Compositions under subclass 244 in the preparation of which wax is employed.


CLS 106/246
TXT Compositions under subclass 244 in the preparation of which a bituminous
    material or tarry residue is employed.


CLS 106/247
TXT Compositions under subclass 246 in the preparation of which a sulfurizing
    or sulfonating agent is employed including those compositions in which a
    sulfurized or sulfonated fatty oil or bituminous material or tarry residue
    is employed, per se.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 249, 274, and 275.


CLS 106/248
TXT Compositions under subclass 246 containing a filler, dye or pigment.

    (1)     Note.  Patents wherein the filler, dye or pigment is claimed
    broadly as such are not placed in this subclass unless specific proportions
    or special treatments are claimed in connection therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251,    253 and indented subclasses 266 and 281 and indented subclasses for
    other fatty oil or bituminous compositions containing a filler, dye or
    pigment.


CLS 106/249
TXT Compositions under subclass 244 in the preparation of which a sulfurizing
    or sulfonating agent is employed including those compositions in which a
    sulfurized or sulfonated oil is employed as such.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223     and 247, for other fatty oil compositions with sulfurizing or
    sulfonating agents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    554,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 33 and 85 and indented subclasses,
    for sulfur containing fatty oils, per se.


CLS 106/250
TXT Compositions under subclass 244 in the preparation of which two or more
    kinds of fatty oil are employed.

    (1)     Note.  The fatty oils may be from different sources, or may be
    different forms of the same oil, e.g., mixtures of linseed oil and cotton
    seed oil; linseed oil and chlorinated linseed oil.


CLS 106/251
TXT Compositions under subclass 250 containing a pigment or filler.

    (1)     Note.  Patents wherein the pigment or filler is claimed broadly as
    such are not placed in this subclass unless specific proportions or special
    treatments are claimed in connection therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228,    248, 253+, and 266, for other fatty oil compositions containing a
    filler dye or pigment.


CLS 106/252
TXT Compositions under subclass 244 in the preparation of which a drying oil is
    employed.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and indented subclasses include oils which are
    either drying or semi-drying, e.g., linseed oil or cotton seed oil.


CLS 106/253
TXT Compositions under subclass 252 containing a filler, dye or pigment.

    (1)     Note.  Patents wherein the pigment or filler is claimed broadly as
    such are not placed in this subclass or indented subclasses unless specific
    proportions or special treatments are claimed in connection therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228,    248, 251, and 266, for other fatty oil compositions containing a
    filler, dye or pigment.

    288,    especially subclass 308 for pigments, per se, and for pigments
    containing an oil or soap as an ingredient thereof.


CLS 106/254
TXT Compositions under subclass 253 containing zinc compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    292+,   and Notes thereto, for pigments, per se, including a zinc compound.


CLS 106/255
TXT Compositions under subclass 254 containing lithopone, a composite pigment,
    containing zinc sulfide and barium sulfate, usually formed by double
    decomposition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    294     and 295, for lithopone pigments or fillers, per se.


CLS 106/256
TXT Compositions under subclass 253 containing a lead compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    297     and 298, for pigments or fillers containing a lead compound.


CLS 106/257
TXT Compositions under subclass 256 containing white lead, i.e., basic lead
    carbonate.


CLS 106/258
TXT Compositions under subclass 256 containing red lead, i.e., lead tetroxide.


CLS 106/259
TXT Compositions under subclass 253 containing an iron compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304,    for pigments or fillers containing an iron compound.


CLS 106/260
TXT Compositions under subclass 253 containing a calcium compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306,    for pigments or fillers containing a calcium compound.


CLS 106/261
TXT Compositions under subclass 253 containing carbon in an elemental form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    472+,   for pigments or fillers containing elemental carbon.


CLS 106/262
TXT Processes under subclass 253 drawn to some specific treatment of the
    pigment.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the patents in this subclass are for processes of
    transferring a pigment from an aqueous medium into an oil medium.


CLS 106/263
TXT Compositions under subclass 252 containing an agent for preserving or
    stabilizing the composition, e.g., anti-oxidant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 380+ for  anti-oxidants or other
    preserving agents.  For compositions, each of which contains a substance
    and an agent for inhibiting caking of granules of, corrosion by, or
    chemical change of the substance, search where the substance is
    classifiable.


CLS 106/264
TXT Compositions under subclass 252 containing an agent which accelerates the
    drying of the drying oil.

    (1)     Note.  Patents wherein the drier is claimed broadly as such are not
    placed in this subclass unless specific proportions or special treatments
    are claimed in connection therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310,    for driers, per se.


CLS 106/265
TXT Compositions under subclass 252 in the preparation of which a hydrocarbon
    is employed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    245,    for the use of hydrocarbon wax in the preparation of drying oil
    compositions.


CLS 106/266
TXT Compositions under subclass 244 containing a pigment or filler.

    (1)     Note.  Patents wherein the pigment or filler is claimed broadly as
    such are not  placed in this subclass unless specific proportions or
    special treatments are claimed in connection therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228,    248, 251, and 253+, for other fatty oil compositions containing a
    filler, dye or pigment.

    288+,   especially subclass 308 for pigments, per se, and for pigments
    containing an oil or soap as an ingredient thereof.


CLS 106/267
TXT Compositions under subclass 244 in the preparation of which a hydrocarbon
    is employed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    245,    for the use of a hydrocarbon wax in the preparation of fatty oil
    compositions.


CLS 106/268
TXT Compositions under subclass 243 in the preparation of which a wax is
    employed. The wax may be either a hydrocarbon type wax or ester type wax.


CLS 106/269
TXT Compositions under subclass 243 in the preparation of which a bituminous
    material or tarry residue is employed.


CLS 106/270
TXT Coating or plastic compositions in the preparation of which a wax is
    employed. Compositions in the subclass and indented subclasses may include
    either an ester type wax, e.g., beeswax, or a hydrocarbon wax, e.g.,
    paraffin.

    (1)     Note.  Paraffin wax admixed with a preservative is classified
    herein in the absence of ingredients classified above, unless the
    preservative is a mineral oil in which case see Class 208, Mineral Oils:
    Processes and Products, subclass 21.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 24+ for the
    treatment of paraffin or the recovery of the same from mineral oils.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, Class 523, subclasses 465 and
    520, and Class 524, subclasses 275+ and 474+ for a wax nonreactant material
    in admixture with a synthetic resin or natural rubber.

    554,    Organic Compounds, particularly subclass 1 for ester type wax, per
    se.


CLS 106/271
TXT Compositions under subclass 270 which are normally liquid and contain a
    definite solvent or dispersing medium.

    (1)     Note.  Patents wherein the solvent or dispersing medium is claimed
    broadly are not placed in this subclass, unless specific proportions or
    special treatments are claimed in connection therewith.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 311.5 for dispersions of paraffin wax in
    water which contain no material other than that to produce or stabilize the
    dispersion.


CLS 106/272
TXT Compositions under subclass 270 containing a definite filler, dye or
    pigment.

    (1)     Note.  Where the filler, dye or pigment is merely claimed broadly,
    the patent is not classified in this subclass unless specific proportions
    or special treatments are claimed in connection with these ingredients.


CLS 106/273.1
TXT Bituminous material or tarry residue:

    Coating or plastic compositions in the preparation of which a bituminous
    material or tarry residue is employed.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 404, Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus,
    appropriate subclasses for the combination of a Class 106 composition (or
    process) with structure (or steps) peculiar to road building.  See note to
    Class 106, under class definition of Class 404.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 208, Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products,
    subclasses 4+ for preparation of oxidized asphalts and the resulting
    products, subclasses 22+ for asphalts, tars or pitches, per se, or in
    admixture with each other, and subclasses 39+ for the preparation,
    treatment or recovery of asphalts, tars and pitches.

    (3)     Note.  See Class 366, Agitating, subclasses 3+ for physical
    processes of mixing asphaltic mortars which are clearly distinct from the
    composition.

    (4)     Note.  See Class 520, Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, Class
    523, subclasses 450 and 518, and Class 524, subclasses 59+ and 705 for a
    nonreactant coal or bituminous material admixed with a synthetic resin; or
    natural rubber and Classes 525, 526, 527, and 528 for a coal or bituminous
    containing synthetic resin, and see in particular Class 520, subclass 1 for
    an explanation of the type of polymer derived from coal or bituminous
    material which is proper for Class 520.


CLS 106/274
TXT Compositions under subclass 273 in the preparation of which a sulfurizing
    or sulfonating agent is employed, including those compositions in which a
    sulfurized or sulfonated bituminous material or tarry residue is employed,
    per se.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 233 and 247.


CLS 106/275
TXT Compositions under subclass 274 containing a definite filler, dye or
    pigment.

    (1)     Note.  Where the filler, dye or pigment is merely claimed broadly,
    the patent is not classified in this subclass unless specific proportions
    or special treatments are claimed in connection with these ingredients.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280     and 281, for other bituminous compositions including a filler, dye
    or pigment.


CLS 106/276
TXT Compositions under subclass 273 in the preparation of which rock asphalt is
    employed.


CLS 106/277
TXT Compositions under subclass 273 in the preparation of which bituminous
    emulsion is employed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278,    for other bituminous compositions containing a solvent or
    dispersing medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 302, particularly subclass 311.5 for
    bituminous emulsions, per se.  Class 252 takes all bituminous emulsions,
    even though claimed as coating or plastic compositions, when they include
    nothing more than is necessary to form or stabilize the emulsion.


CLS 106/278
TXT Compositions under subclass 273 which are normally liquid and contain a
    definite solvent or dispersing medium.

    (1)     Note.  Patents wherein the solvent or dispersing medium is merely
    claimed broadly are not placed in this subclass, unless specific
    proportions or special treatments are claimed in connection therewith.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 302, particularly subclass 311.5 for
    bituminous emulsions, per se.


CLS 106/279
TXT Compositions under subclass 273 containing a definite flux or plasticizer.

    (1)     Note.  Patents wherein the flux or plasticizer is claimed broadly
    as such are not classified in this subclass unless specific proportions or
    special treatments are claimed in connection therewith.


CLS 106/280
TXT Compositions under subclass 279 containing a definite filler, dye or
    pigment.

    (1)     Note.  Where the filler, dye or pigment is merely broadly claimed,
    the patent is not classified in this subclass unless specific proportions
    or special treatments are claimed in connection with these ingredients.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    275     and 281+, for other bituminous compositions containing a filler,
    dye or pigment.


CLS 106/281.1
TXT With filler, dye or pigment:

    Compositions under subclass 273 containing a definite filler, dye or
    pigment.

    (1)     Note.  Where the filler, dye, or pigment is merely claimed broadly
    as such, the patent is not placed in this subclass unless specific
    proportions or special treatments are claimed in connection with these
    ingredients.

    (2)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 275 and 280 for other bituminous
    compositions containing a filler, dye or pigment.


CLS 106/282
TXT Compositions under subclass 281 containing a fibrous filler.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156,    for bituminous compositions containing a proteinaceous fiber, e.g.,
    hair or leather; subclass 202 for bituminous compositions containing a
    cellulosic fiber, e.g., cotton or sawdust.


CLS 106/283
TXT Compositions under subclass 281 in the preparation of which water is
    employed. The water may be employed as such or in the form of steam, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277,    for compositions in the preparation of which a bituminous emulsion
    is employed.


CLS 106/284
TXT Compositions under subclass 281 in the preparation of which coal tar pitch
    is employed.


CLS 106/284.01
TXT Specified particle or screen-mesh size stated:

    Composition under subclass 281.1 containing particles of a claimed
    specified size or which pass through a specifically sized mesh screen.


CLS 106/284.02
TXT Heavy metal or aluminum containing:

    Composition under subclass 281.1 containing a heavy metal or aluminum atom.


CLS 106/284.03
TXT Alkali or alkaline earth metal containing:

    Composition under subclass 281.1 containing an alkali or alkaline earth
    metal atom.


CLS 106/284.04
TXT Lime, limestone or chalk containing:

    Composition under subclass 284.03 which contains lime (CaO), limestone or
    chalk (CaCO3).


CLS 106/284.05
TXT Elemental carbon containing:

    Composition under subclass 281.1 containing elemental carbon.


CLS 106/284.06
TXT Nitrogen containing:

    Composition under subclass 281.1 which contains nitrogen.


CLS 106/284.1
TXT Phosphorus containing:

    Composition under subclass 273.1 containing phosphorus.


CLS 106/284.2
TXT Halogen containing:

    Composition under subclass 273.1 containing halogen.


CLS 106/284.3
TXT Metal containing:

    Composition under subclass 273.1 containing a metal.


CLS 106/284.4
TXT Nitrogen containing:

    Composition under subclass 273.1 containing nitrogen.


CLS 106/285
TXT Coating or plastic compositions in the preparation of which a hydrocarbon
    is employed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270+,   for compositions in the preparation of which a hydrocarbon wax is
    employed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclasses 300+ for a liquid fuel
    containing a hydrocarbon and a nonhydrocarbon.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 14+ for
    compositions containing mineral oils only; and subclass 1 for mineral oils
    which have drying properties (i.e., synthetic drying oils).

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, subclasses 2.01+, and its daughter
    classes, Class 520+, Synthetic Resins, for synthetic resin compositions
    containing a hydrocarbon; and subclasses 719 and 759 of Class 260 for
    rubber compositions.

    508,    Solid Antifriction Devices, Materials Therefor, Lubricant or
    Separant Compositions for Moving Solid Surfaces, and Miscellaneous Mineral
    oil Compositions, subclasses 110+, for a lubricant containing a hydrocarbon
    and a nonhydrocarbon or a solid polymeric hydrocarbon and for a heavy
    mineral oil composition of unspecified use containing a nonhydrocarbon or a
    solid polymeric hydrocarbon.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclasses 1+ for a composition
    containing only hydrocarbons; and subclass 945 for processes which result
    in a hydrocarbon drying oil.


CLS 106/286.1
TXT Inorganic materials only containing at least one metal atom:

    COATING OR PLASTIC COMPOSITIONS (unnumbered subclass preceding subclass
    1.05) which contain only inorganic materials, at least one of said
    materials contains a metal atom.


CLS 106/286.2
TXT Containing two or more diverse metal atoms in a single compound:

    Compositions under subclass 286.1 which contain at least two diverse metal
    atoms in a single compound, e.g., metal metallate and double salt, etc.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass, glass, clay, asbestos, mica,
    and alloys are not considered as having at least two metal atoms in a
    single compound and are therefore excluded herefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286.4,  for a glass containing coating or plastic composition.

    286.5,  for a clay (kaolin, bentonite, montmorillonite, etc.) or mica
    containing coating or plastic composition.

    286.6,  for an asbestos containing coating or plastic composition.


CLS 106/286.3
TXT Fe or Co containing:

    Compositions under subclass 286.1 which contain an iron or cobalt atom.


CLS 106/286.4
TXT Group IV metal atom (Ti, Zr, Hf, Ge, Sn, or Pb) containing:

    Compositions under subclass 286.1 which contain a Group IV metal atom,
    i.e., Ti, Zr, Hf, Ge, Sn, or Pb.

    (1)     Note.  Thorium for the purpose of this subclass is excluded
    herefrom.

    (2)     Note.  Glass, per se, is considered as being lead containing unless
    the disclosure is devoid of teaching lead in a glass composition.


CLS 106/286.5
TXT Aluminum containing:

    Compositions under subclass 286.1 which contain aluminum.

    (1)     Note.  Clay is a generic term and properly includes, but is not
    limited to, kaolin, bentonite, montmorillonite, etc.


CLS 106/286.6
TXT Group II metal atom (Be, Mg, Sr, Ca, Ba, Ra, Zn, Cd, or Hg) containing:


    Compositions under subclass 286.1 which contain a Group II metal atom,
    i.e., Be, Mg, Sr, Ca, Ba, Ra, Zn, Cd, or Hg.

    (1)     Note.  Asbestos is properly classified herein.


CLS 106/286.7
TXT Group I Metal Atom (Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs, Fr, Cu, Ag, or Au) containing:

    Compositions under subclass 286.1 which contain a Group I metal atom, i.e.,
    Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs, Fr, Cu, Ag, or Au.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286.4,  for a glass containing coating or plastic composition.


CLS 106/286.8
TXT Inorganic materials only:

    COATING OR PLASTIC COMPOSITIONS (unnumbered subclass preceding subclass
    1.05) which contain inorganic materials only.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes mixtures of compounds or elements
    containing nonmetal atoms.


CLS 106/287.1
TXT Silicon containing other than solely as SiO2 or as part of an
    aluminum-containing compound:

    COATING OR PLASTIC COMPOSITIONS (unnumbered subclass preceding subclass
    1.05). which contain a silicon atom other than in a compound of aluminum or
    as SiO2, per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    287.13, for a composition containing "a silicone" or "silicone oil"
    otherwise unidentified.

    287.17, for an aluminum-containing compound containing a silicon atom.

    287.34, for a coating composition containing a silicon atom solely as SiO2
    containing compositions.


CLS 106/287.11
TXT N-containing Si compound:

    Coating or plastic compositions under subclass 287.1 wherein the compound
    which contains the silicon atom also contains a nitrogen atom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    287.25, for compositions with nitrogen-containing compounds which also
    contain the carbonyl group.

    287.3,  for compositions containing a nitrogen-containing compound.


CLS 106/287.12
TXT -OH bonded directly to Si atom:

    Coating or plastic compositions under subclass 287.1 wherein an -OH group
    is directly bonded to a silicon atom.


CLS 106/287.13
TXT C bonded directly to Si atom:

    Coating or plastic compositions under subclass 287.1 which contain silicon
    bonded directly to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  When a substituent is claimed as a monovalent radical and is
    otherwise unidentifiable, placement is proper in subclass 287.13.

    (2)     Note.  A composition containing "a silicone" or "silicone oil"
    otherwise unidentifiable is classified here.


CLS 106/287.14
TXT H or alkyl directly bonded to Si:

    Coating or plastic compositions under subclass 287.13 in which the silicon
    atom is directly attached to a hydrogen atom or alkyl group.


CLS 106/287.15
TXT C radical bonded to Si is unsaturated:

    Coating or plastic compositions under subclass 287.13 wherein the organic
    radical attached to the silicon atom has at least one ethylenically
    unsaturated bond.


CLS 106/287.16
TXT Si-O-C bonded compound:

    Coating or plastic compositions under subclass 287.1 which contain a
    compound having a Si-O-C- linkage.


CLS 106/287.17
TXT Aluminum compound containing:

    COATING OR PLASTIC COMPOSITIONS (unnumbered subclass preceding subclass
    1.05) containing an aluminum compound.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes clays.


CLS 106/287.18
TXT Heavy metal compound containing:

    COATING OR PLASTIC COMPOSITIONS (unnumbered subclass preceding subclass
    1.05) which contain compounds of metals with a specific gravity greater
    than 4.

    (1)     Note.  Heavy metal as used here includes arsenic and antimony.


CLS 106/287.19
TXT Group IVA or IVB (Ti, Zr, Hf, Ge, Sn, Pb):

    Coating or plastic compositions under subclass 287.18 which contain a
    compound of titanium, zirconium, hafnium, germanium, tin, or lead.


CLS 106/287.2
TXT Heterocyclic (only N, O, S, Se, Te):

    COATING OR PLASTIC COMPOSITIONS (unnumbered subclass preceding subclass
    1.05) which contain a ring whose members are composed solely of at least
    one carbon and one or more atoms of the elements nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, and tellurium.


CLS 106/287.21
TXT Two hetero ring atoms:

    Coating or plastic compositions under subclass 287.2 wherein a compound
    contains at least two hetero ring atoms.

    (1)     Note.  The hetero atoms do not have to be diverse.


CLS 106/287.22
TXT Epoxy ring containing:

    Coating or plastic compositions under subclass 287.2 wherein a compound
    contains an oxirane ring.


CLS 106/287.23
TXT O-containing organic compound:

    COATING OR PLASTIC COMPOSITIONS (unnumbered subclass preceding subclass
    1.05) which contain an oxygen-containing organic compound.


CLS 106/287.24
TXT Carbonyl group containing:

    Coating or plastic compositions under subclass 287.23 which contains a
    carbonyl radical, i.e., -C=O.

    (1)     Note.  In the absence of a clear showing to the contrary a compound
    claimed as a "drying oil" is classifiable herein.


CLS 106/287.25
TXT N containing:

    Coating or plastic compositions under subclass 287.24 in which the compound
    containing the carbonyl radical also contains a nitrogen atom.


CLS 106/287.26
TXT Hydroxy group containing or alcoholate:

    Coating or plastic compositions under subclass 287.23 which contains an
    C-OH group or is an alcoholate thereof.


CLS 106/287.27
TXT Halogen containing:

    COATING OR PLASTIC COMPOSITIONS (unnumbered subclass preceding subclass
    1.05) which contain elemental fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine, or
    astatine or compounds thereof.


CLS 106/287.28
TXT Organic halide:

    Coating or plastic compositions under subclass 287.27 in which the molecule
    containing a halogen atom is organic in nature.


CLS 106/287.29
TXT Phosphorus or nitrogen containing:

    COATING OR PLASTIC COMPOSITIONS (unnumbered subclass preceding subclass
    1.05) which contain phosphorus or nitrogen or a compound thereof.


CLS 106/287.3
TXT Nitrogen containing:

    Coating or plastic compositions under subclass 287.29 which contain
    nitrogen or a compound thereof.


CLS 106/287.32
TXT Sulfur containing:

    COATING OR PLASTIC COMPOSITIONS (unnumbered subclass preceding subclass
    1.05) which contain sulfur or a compound thereof.


CLS 106/287.34
TXT Silicon dioxide containing:

    COATING OR PLASTIC COMPOSITIONS (unnumbered subclass preceding subclass
    1.05) which contain SiO2, per se.

    (1)     Note.  This includes colloidal silicon and silica aerogel.


CLS 106/287.35
TXT Miscellaneous:

    COATING OR PLASTIC COMPOSITIONS (unnumbered subclass preceding subclass
    1.05) not otherwise provided for.


CLS 106/310
TXT Materials or ingredients specialized for use to accelerate the rate of
    drying of coating or plastic compositions.  These materials are usually
    intended for use with fatty oil compositions, e.g., paints, varnishes, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264,    for drying oil compositions containing a drier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    554,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 71- 76 for salts of fatty oil acids
    which are useful as driers.


CLS 106/311
TXT Materials or ingredients specially designed for use as a solvent or vehicle
    to be used in the production of coating or plastic compositions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244,    and indented subclasses and 285 for vehicles including a fatty oil
    or a hydrocarbon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 364, for other solvents.


CLS 106/312
TXT Materials or ingredients specially designed for use in producing opacity in
    glass, usually in the form of vitreous enamels or glazes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48      and 49, for enamels or glazes including an opacifier, and
    subclasses 299 and 300, for titanium or zirconium containing pigments or
    fillers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Class 523, subclass 170 for a composition containing a
    synthetic resin or natural rubber, having utility as an enamel for a glass
    substrate or as a medium or binder in the preparation of glass enamel or to
    processes of preparing said composition.


CLS 106/313
TXT Materials or ingredients specially designed for use as ceramic fluxes
    which, when mixed with a ceramic composition, reduce the melting or
    softening temperature of the same.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     and indented subclasses, for ceramic compositions including a flux.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 303+ for flux compositions for use with molten metals.


CLS 106/316
TXT Materials or ingredients not otherwise provided for.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, and 423, Chemistry of Inorganic
    Compounds, for materials or ingredients of coating or plastic compositions
    which are single compounds or are reaction mixtures.


CLS 106/400
TXT Pigment, filler, or aggregate compositions (e.g., stone, shale, pebbles,
    rock, etc.):

    Materials or ingredients specialized for use as pigments, fillers, or
    aggregates in coating or plastic compositions.

    (1)     Note.  This class and indented subclasses include all pigments,
    fillers or aggregates which are specialized for use in producing coating or
    plastic compositions whether or not the said coating or plastic
    compositions are classified in this class, e.g., synthetic resins, rubber,
    paper fillers, etc.

    (2)     Note.  When a composition contains no "identified material" other
    than a material such as rock, stone, etc., which may have varied
    compositions in the art, it is placed in this subclass, unless the stone or
    rock is specifically defined by the patent.  See the definition of
    "identified material" in the definitions (1) Note, of subclass 401 of this
    class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses for processes of producing pigments, involving comminution.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, appropriate subclasses for pigments,
    fillers or aggregates which are single compounds or are reaction mixtures.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses for
    pigments, fillers or aggregates which are single compounds or are reaction
    mixtures.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product of that class including elements of structure
    (e.g., crimped fibers) and especially subclass 364 for a rod, strand or
    fiber with structure (e.g., varying cross-section, physical dimension,
    etc.) or with a coating.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses
    particularly Class 524, for a pigment, filler or aggregate composition,
    otherwise proper for Class 106, subclasses 400+ when the composition
    contains a synthetic resin or rubber.


CLS 106/401
TXT Composition contains identified material other than water:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein the composition contains
    material, other than water, which meets the definition of identified
    material for these subclasses.

    (1)     Note.  For the purposes of subclasses 401-506 of this class
    "Identified material" is defined to mean:  material wherein at least one
    chemical atom is identified, e.g., amine, hydrocarbon, alcohol, ether, etc.
     Identified material is material wherein at least one of the chemical atoms
    can be deduced with certainty.  For purposes of these subclasses, organic
    material although inherently reciting the presence of a carbon atom is
    considered to be too broad.  An exemplary list of materials to be regarded
    as identified material is as follows:  metal hydrate, chalcogen, carboxylic
    acid, peroxy, peroxide, alkali or alkaline earth metal, halogen, sulfide,
    oil, fat, fatty acid or ester, etc.  Identified material is by no means
    limited to the above noted examples.  The list below is not exhaustive and
    merely enumerates certain materials that will not be considered as
    identified material, e.g., organic compound, metal containing, inorganic
    compound, organometallic, solvent, pigment, aggregate, filler, hydrophobic,
    hydrophillic, plasticizer, preservative, antioxidant, stabilizer,
    lubricant, fibrous, particulate, liquid, solid gas, dispersant, emulsifier,
    surfactant, surface active agent, crystalline, plastic, fluorescent,
    phosphorescent, luminescent, deliquescent, drier, humectant, blue color,
    numerically described without providing a chemical atom, Lewis acid or
    base, mineral, organic solvent, co-solvent, free radical, amphoteric,
    anionic, cationic, ionic, dielectric, conductor, insulator, etc.

    (2)     Note.  While water fits the intent of what one would consider an
    identified material under this definition, water is positively excluded
    from subclasses 401+ as not sufficient by itself to place a composition in
    these subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  For subclass indents, the same requirement for identified
    material obtains, e.g., a composition containing organic solvent and a
    phthalocyanine would not be sufficient to bring a composition into subclass
    413, etc.

    (4)     Note.  Special terms used in the subclass titles, whether meeting
    the definition of identified material or not, are considered sufficient to
    bring a composition into the subclass, e.g., cork, fly ash, organic refuse,
    mica, etc.


CLS 106/402
TXT Lake containing:

    Pigments under subclass 401 which contain carbon compound dyes absorbed in
    or absorbed on particles of salts, inorganic hydroxides or other compounds,
    e.g., aluminum hydroxide, barium sulfate, etc.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 260, Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, appropriate
    subclasses for compositions which contain definite chemical compounds of
    dyestuff or organic pigment compounds with metals.  Carbon coloring
    compounds which are produced in the presence of a preformed substratum,
    wherein novelty is alleged to reside in the combination or in the amount,
    form, or nature of the substratum, are in this class (106); however, where
    the substratum is synthesized simultaneously with the carbon compound, the
    product belongs in Class 260.


CLS 106/403
TXT Elemental metal or alloy containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein the composition contains an
    elemental metal or alloy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 228+ for a composition having a continuous phase of
    free metal made by consolidating metal particles, and subclasses 251+ for a
    loose metal particle composition.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses for methods and means for making metal particles mechanically.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 546+ for
    metallic stock material having metal particles which may be made, for
    example, by coating a composition containing metal particles on a
    nonparticulate metal substrate.


CLS 106/404
TXT Aluminum containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 wherein the composition contains aluminum.


CLS 106/405
TXT Fly ash, coal ash or bottom ash or derived therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein the composition contains fly ash,
    bottom ash or coal ash or contains a material whose source is indicated to
    be such ash material.


CLS 106/406
TXT Cork, bark, vegetable shell, hull or cob, or material derived therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein the composition contains cork,
    bark, vegetable shell, hull or cob, or contains material whose source was
    one of these materials.


CLS 106/407
TXT Organic refuse or waste material containing or derived therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein the composition contains material
    identified as waste or refuse material or as having been derived from such
    a source, however, waste polymer material, e.g., used to produce carbon
    black, etc., is excluded from this subclass.


CLS 106/408
TXT Alkali blue pigment containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein the composition contains an
    Alkali blue pigment.

    (1)     Note.  Alkali blue pigment is considered to be a pigment having an
    arylpararosaniline sulfonic acid type formula.


CLS 106/409
TXT Hollow, porous or foam particle containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein at least some of the particles in
    the composition are hollow or porous or are particles of foam material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, subclasses 80+ for the production of porous
    materials from ceramic compositions.


CLS 106/410
TXT Phthalocyanine or derivative containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein the composition contains a
    phthalocyanine or derivative.


CLS 106/411
TXT Mixed phthalocyanines or derivatives:

    Subject matter under subclass 410 wherein the composition contains more
    than one phthalocyanine or derivative compound.


CLS 106/412
TXT Special process of milling, grinding, comminuting, plural stage or zone
    mixing or product:

    Subject matter under subclass 410 wherein there is recited a specific
    method of milling, grinding, or comminuting or multiple stages or zones are
    recited in a mixing process or product thereof.

    (1)     Note. Mere recitation of milling, grinding, comminuting, or mixing
    is not sufficient to place a patent in this subclass, but specific
    parameters of operation must be recited.


CLS 106/413
TXT With organic compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 410 wherein the composition contains an
    additional organic compound other than phthalocyanine or derivative.


CLS 106/414
TXT Ultramarines, e.g., ultramarine green, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein the composition contains
    ultramarine, a complex blue pigment made up of sodium polysulfides with
    sodium and aluminum silicates, e.g., ultramarine green, etc.


CLS 106/415
TXT Mica, shell, scale, platelet, or lamellate:

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein the composition contains shell,
    scales, platelets, micaceous material or similar lamellate materials.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 4, and the
    notes thereto, for processes of comminuting mica and the like.


CLS 106/416
TXT Clay containing or derived therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 415 wherein the composition contains clay.


CLS 106/417
TXT Mica containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 415 wherein the composition contains mica.

    (1)     Note.  Mica is generally defined as a group of silicates
    characterized physically as flat, six-sided monoclinic crystals, all of
    which contain hydroxy, an aluminum silicate, and an alkali.  Included
    within the term mica are biotite, muscovite, phlogopite, zinnwaldite,
    isinglass, and muscovy glass.


CLS 106/418
TXT Iron or bismuth compound containing (Fe or Bi):

    Subject matter under subclass 417 wherein the composition contains a
    compound of iron or bismuth.


CLS 106/419
TXT Zinc compound containing (Zn):

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein the composition contains a zinc
    compound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses for zinc
    compounds, per se.


CLS 106/420
TXT Zinc sulfide containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 419 wherein the composition contains zinc
    sulfide.


CLS 106/421
TXT Lithopone (zinc sulfide + barium sulfate):

    Subject matter under subclass 420 wherein the composition contains
    lithopone, a composite pigment containing zinc sulfide and barium sulfate,
    usually formed by double decomposition.


CLS 106/422
TXT Metal compound other than barium or zinc containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 421 wherein the composition contains a metal
    compound other than a zinc or barium compound.


CLS 106/423
TXT Subsequent treatment or product thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 421 wherein the lithopone composition is
    further treated, e.g., to purify, etc., or product thereof.


CLS 106/424
TXT Calcium compound containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 wherein the composition also contains a
    calcium compound.


CLS 106/425
TXT Zinc oxide containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 419 wherein the composition contains zinc
    oxide.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 423, Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate
    subclasses for zinc oxide, per se.


CLS 106/426
TXT Aluminum compound or silicon containing, e.g., clay, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 425 wherein the composition contains silicon
    or an aluminum compound.


CLS 106/427
TXT Sulfur or phosphorus containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 425 wherein the composition contains sulfur
    or phosphorus.


CLS 106/428
TXT Titanium compound containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 425 wherein the composition also contains a
    titanium compound.


CLS 106/429
TXT Organic material containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 425 wherein the composition contains organic
    material.


CLS 106/430
TXT Titanium compound containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 419 wherein the composition also contains a
    titanium compound.


CLS 106/431
TXT Silicon or aluminum compound containing;

    Subject matter under subclass 419 wherein the composition also contains
    silicon or an aluminum compound.


CLS 106/432
TXT Lead compound containing, e.g., litharge, etc. (Pb):

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein the composition contains a lead
    compound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses for lead
    compounds, per se.


CLS 106/433
TXT Lead chromate containing, e.g., molybdate orange, chrome yellow, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 432 wherein the composition contains lead
    chromate.


CLS 106/434
TXT Silicon containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 433 wherein the composition contains silicon.


CLS 106/435
TXT Silicon containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 432 wherein the composition contains silicon.


CLS 106/436
TXT Titanium compound containing (Ti):

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein the composition contains a
    titanium compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312,    for opacifiers for enamel which contain a titanium compound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses for
    titanium compounds, per se.


CLS 106/437
TXT Oxidation of titanium tetrahalide or product:

    Subject matter under subclass 436 wherein the composition contains a
    titanium compound obtained by oxidation of a titanium tetrahalide.


CLS 106/438
TXT Zirconium compound containing (Zr):

    Subject matter under subclass 436 wherein the composition contains a
    zirconium compound.


CLS 106/439
TXT Iron tungsten, molybdenum, or cerium compound containing (Fe, W, Mo, Ce):

    Subject matter under subclass 436 wherein the composition contains a
    compound of iron, tungsten, molybdenum, or cerium.


CLS 106/440
TXT Nickel, cobalt, copper, or cadmium compound containing (Ni, Co, Cu, Cd):

    Subject matter under subclass 436 wherein the composition contains a
    compound of nickel, cobalt, copper, or cadmium.


CLS 106/441
TXT Antimony, chromium, arsenic, or tin compound containing (Sb, Cr, As, Sn):

    Subject matter under subclass 436 wherein the composition contains a
    compound of antimony, chromium, arsenic or tin.


CLS 106/442
TXT Aluminum compound or silicon containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 436 wherein the composition contains an
    aluminum compound or silicon.


CLS 106/443
TXT Phosphorus containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 442 wherein the composition also contains
    phosphorus.


CLS 106/444
TXT Alkali or alkaline earth metal containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 442 wherein the composition also contains an
    alkali or alkaline earth metal.


CLS 106/445
TXT Organic material containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 442 wherein the composition contains organic
    material.


CLS 106/446
TXT Silicon containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 442 wherein the composition also contains
    silicon.


CLS 106/447
TXT Organic material containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 436 wherein the composition contains organic
    material.


CLS 106/448
TXT Organic nitrogen containing material:

    Subject matter under subclass 447 wherein the organic material is nitrogen
    containing.


CLS 106/449
TXT Alkali or alkaline earth metal containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 436 wherein the composition contains an
    alkali or alkaline earth metal compound.


CLS 106/450
TXT Zirconium compound containing (Zr):

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein the composition contains a
    zirconium compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312,    for opacifiers for enamel which contain a zirconium compound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses for
    zirconium compounds, per se.


CLS 106/451
TXT Vanadium or praseodymium containing (V, Pr):

    Subject matter under subclass 450 wherein the composition contains a
    vanadium or praseodymium compound.


CLS 106/452
TXT Cadmium compound containing (Cd):

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein the composition contains a
    cadmium compound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses for
    cadmium compounds, per se.


CLS 106/453
TXT Chromium compound containing (Cr):

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein the composition contains a
    chromium compound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses for
    chromium compounds, per se.


CLS 106/454
TXT Silicon containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 453 wherein the composition also contains
    silicon.


CLS 106/455
TXT Antimony containing (Sb):

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein the composition contains an
    antimony compound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses for
    antimony compounds, per se.


CLS 106/456
TXT Iron compound containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein the composition contains an iron
    compound.

    (1)     Note.  Clay is not sufficient to place in this subclass, unless
    iron is positively indicated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses for iron
    compounds, per se.


CLS 106/457
TXT Silicon containing, e.g., slag, turkey umber, fullers earth, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 456 wherein the composition also contains
    silicon, e.g., slag, turkey umber, Fullers earth, etc.


CLS 106/458
TXT Compound containing carbon triple bonded to nitrogen, e.g., prussian blue,
    iron blue, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 456 wherein the composition includes a
    compound which contains carbon triple bonded to nitrogen, e.g., Prussian
    blue, iron blue, etc.


CLS 106/459
TXT With other metal compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 456 wherein the composition also contains a
    metal other than iron.


CLS 106/460
TXT Organic material containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 456 wherein the composition contains organic
    material.


CLS 106/461
TXT Alkaline earth metal compound containing, other than glass, e.g.,
    ettringite, gypsum, barium sulfate, anhydrite, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein the composition contains an
    alkaline earth metal compound other than glass, e.g., ettringite, gypsum,
    barium sulfate, anhydrite, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Glass is not sufficient to place a patent in this subclass
    unless an alkali metal is specifically recited.  Mere recitation of glass
    will place the patent in the appropriate subclass under silicon below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses for
    alkaline earth metal compounds, per se.


CLS 106/462
TXT Phosphorus or boron containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 461 wherein the composition also contains
    phosphorus or boron.


CLS 106/463
TXT Carbonate containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 461 wherein the composition contains a
    carbonate.


CLS 106/464
TXT Calcium containing, e.g., calcite, dolomite, chalk, whiting, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 463 wherein the composition contains a
    calcium compound, such as calcite, dolomite, chalk, whiting, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Calcium carbonate is not required to place a patent in this
    subclass.  Any combination of a calcium compound and a carbonate is
    sufficient.


CLS 106/465
TXT Organic material or silicon containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 464 wherein the composition contains organic
    material or silicon.


CLS 106/466
TXT Soil or inorganic silicon compound containing, e.g., granite, chrysotile,
    asbestos, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 461 wherein the composition contains soil or
    an inorganic silicon compound, e.g., granite, chrysotile, asbestos, etc.


CLS 106/467
TXT Aluminum compound containing, e.g., zeolites, perlites, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 466 wherein the composition contains an
    aluminium compound, e.g., zeolites, perlite, satin white, etc.


CLS 106/468
TXT Clay or material derived from clay containing, e.g., bentonite,
    montmorillonite, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 467 wherein the composition contains clay or
    a material indicated to have been derived from clay, e.g., montmorillonite,
    bentonite, kaolin, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Some clays, such as montmorillonites, bentonite, etc.,
    contain an alkaline earth metal and therefor make a composition containing
    them proper for this subclass alone; however, note that kaolin would not
    bring a composition into this area unless the composition also contained an
    alkaline earth metal.


CLS 106/469
TXT Talc, e.g., soapstone, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 466 containing talc.


CLS 106/470
TXT Calcium silicate, e.g., dicalcium silicate or silicate hydrate,
    tobermorite, wollastonite, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 466 wherein the composition contains calcium
    silicate, e.g., dicalcium silicate, or silicate hydrate, tobermorite,
    wollastonite, etc.

    (1)     Note.  A silicate compound containing both magnesium and calcium is
    not considered sufficient to place in this subclass.  For such a
    composition see subclass 466.


CLS 106/471
TXT Organic material containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 461 wherein the composition contains organic
    material.


CLS 106/472
TXT Elemental carbon containing, e.g., carbon black, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein the composition contains carbon
    in the elemental form, e.g., carbon black, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses for
    elemental carbon and processes of manufacturing elemental carbon, per se.


CLS 106/473
TXT Sulfur containing treatment therewith or product:

    Subject matter under subclass 472 wherein the composition contains sulfur
    or the composition is treated with sulfur or product thereof.


CLS 106/474
TXT Metal compound containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 472 wherein the composition contains a metal
    compound.


CLS 106/475
TXT Silicon containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 472 wherein the composition contains silicon.


CLS 106/476
TXT Organic material containing, e.g., wax paraffin, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 472 wherein the composition contains organic
    material.


CLS 106/477
TXT Fat, oil, higher fatty acid or derivative, e.g., tallow, mineral oil,
    essential oils, salts, amides and esters of higher fatty acids, soap, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 476 wherein the composition contains a fat,
    oil, higher fatty acid or a derivative thereof, e.g., tallow, mineral oil,
    essential oil, a salt, amide or ester of a higher fatty acid, soap, etc.


CLS 106/478
TXT Oxidation of carbon black or product thereof, e.g., treating of carbon
    black to increase volatile content or to lower PH, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 472 involving oxidation of carbon black,
    wherein such a process is claimed or a product of such a process is a part
    of the composition.


CLS 106/479
TXT Bismuth, vanadium, molybdenum or tungsten compound containing (Bi, V, Mo,
    W):

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein the composition contains a
    compound of bismuth, vanadium, molybdenum or tungsten.


CLS 106/480
TXT Cobalt, nickel, or copper compound containing (Co, Ni, or Cu):

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein the composition contains a
    compound of cobalt, nickel, or copper.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses for
    copper, cobalt or nickel compounds, per se.


CLS 106/481
TXT Silicon containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein the composition contains silicon.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains compositions having an organic
    silicon compound and not containing an inorganic silicon compound.


CLS 106/482
TXT Inorganic silicon compound, e.g., diatomaceous earth, soil, glass, sand,
    etc., or material derived therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 481 wherein the composition contains
    diatomaceous earth, soil, glass, an inorganic silicon compound or material
    derived therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  For the purposes of these subclasses, 400+, glass will be
    considered to contain silicon and to not contain an alkaline earth metal
    unless contra is positively indicated.


CLS 106/483
TXT Aluminum compound containing, e.g., feldspar, mullite, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 482 wherein the composition also contains
    aluminum, e.g., feldspar, mullite, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses for
    aluminum compounds, per se.


CLS 106/484
TXT Special process of milling, grinding, crushing or comminuting or product:

    Subject matter under subclass 483 including a significant process of
    milling, grinding, crushing, or comminuting materials, e.g., reciting
    grinding materials or hardness factor, type of apparatus, etc. or product
    thereof.


CLS 106/485
TXT Special process of pelletizing or agglomerating or product:

    Subject matter under subclass 483 including a significant process of
    pelletizing or agglomerating materials or product thereof.


CLS 106/486
TXT Clay or material derived therefrom containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 483 wherein the composition contains clay,
    e.g., kaolin, etc.


CLS 106/487
TXT Organic material containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 486 wherein the composition contains organic
    material.


CLS 106/488
TXT Bleaching treatment or product:

    Subject matter under subclass 486 wherein the composition is treated by
    bleaching or product thereof.


CLS 106/489
TXT Glass containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 482 wherein the composition contains glass.

    (1)     Note.  Material referred to simply as glass will be assumed to
    contain silicon and therefor classified in this subclass.


CLS 106/490
TXT Organic silicon material containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 482 wherein the composition includes organic
    silicon containing material.


CLS 106/491
TXT Organic material containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 482 wherein the composition contains organic
    material.


CLS 106/492
TXT Treatment of alkali silicate with mineral acid or product:

    Subject matter under subclass 482 including treatment of alkali metal
    silicate with mineral acid or product thereof.


CLS 106/493
TXT Organic pigment containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein the composition contains an
    organic pigment.


CLS 106/494
TXT Mixed pigments containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 493 wherein the composition contains more
    than one pigment at least one of which is an organic pigment.


CLS 106/495
TXT Quinacridone pigment or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 494 wherein the composition contains a
    quinacridone pigment or derivative.


CLS 106/496
TXT Pigment containing -N=N- group:

    Subject matter under subclass 493 wherein the pigment contains an -N=N-
    group.


CLS 106/497
TXT Quinacridone pigment or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 493 wherein the composition contains a
    quinacridone pigment or derivative.


CLS 106/498
TXT Ring containing atom other than carbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 493 wherein the pigment compound has a carbon
    ring containing at least one atom other than carbon in the ring.


CLS 106/499
TXT Organic material containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein the composition contains organic
    material.


CLS 106/500
TXT Rosin, natural resin or derivative, e.g., shellac, dammar, colophony, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 499 wherein the composition contains rosin,
    natural resin or derivative, e.g., shellac, dammar, colophony, turpentine,
    etc.


CLS 106/501.1
TXT Carbohydrate, proteinaceous material, gum, or lignin (e.g., pectate
    alginate, albumin, glue, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 499 which contain a carbohydrate, proteinaceous
    material, gum, or lignin in addition to the organic material.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 124.1 for the definition of a
    proteinaceous material.

    (2)     Note. See this class, subclass 124.1, (5) Note for the definition
    of a carbohydrate.


CLS 106/502
TXT Wax, paraffin, bituminous material, asphalt, oil shale, tar or pitch
    containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 499 wherein the composition contains wax,
    paraffin, bituminous material, asphalt, oil shale, tar, or pitch.


CLS 106/503
TXT Sulfur or phosphorus containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 499 wherein the composition contains sulfur
    or phosphorus.


CLS 106/504
TXT Fat, oil, higher fatty acid or derivative, e.g., tallow, mineral oil,
    essential oils, salts, amides and esters of higher fatty acids, soap, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 499 wherein the composition contains a fat,
    oil, higher fatty acid or derivative, e.g., tallow, mineral oil, essential
    oils, salts, amides and esters of higher fatty acids, soap, etc.


CLS 106/505
TXT Carboxylic acid or derivative, e.g., tannin, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 499 wherein the composition contains a
    carboxylic acid or derivative, e.g., tannin, etc.


CLS 106/506
TXT Ring containing atom other than carbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 499 wherein the organic material has a carbon
    ring containing at least one atom other than carbon in the ring.


CLS 106/600
TXT Alkali metal silicate containing:

    Coating or plastic compositions under the class definitions in the
    preparation of which an alkali metal silicate, e.g., water glass, etc. is
    employed or process of preparing such composition

    (1)     Note.  Claims which include a reference to filler or aggregate
    only, with no additional identification of the filler as to composition,
    structure or other properties in the claims, will be classified based on
    other specified elements of the claim rather than consulting the
    specification for the type of filler or aggregate employed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    494,    for filler, per se, made by treatment of alkali silicate.


CLS 106/601
TXT Pore forming or product thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 600 wherein pores are formed in the process
    or product of such process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    605,    for porous compositions in which the porosity is due solely to the
    physical nature of an ingredient such as a hollow filler material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 304.4+ for a
    stock material product of at least two components, in which one of the
    components is either porous or cellular, and subclass 613 for porous
    metallic stock.


CLS 106/602
TXT Perlite, slag, ash or ceramic material:

    Subject matter under subclass 601 employing perlite, slag, ash or ceramic
    material.


CLS 106/603
TXT Organic material containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 601 employing organic material.


CLS 106/604
TXT Process employing steam, electrical, magnetic or wave energyor product
    thereof or specified particle size or shape:

    Subject matter under subclass 601 (1) employing steam, electrical, magnetic
    or wave energy or (2) wherein particle size or shape is specifically
    recited.


CLS 106/605
TXT Hollow, foam, cellular or porous material containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 600 including hollow, foam, cellular or
    porous material, e.g., porous filler or aggregate, etc.


CLS 106/606
TXT Portland type cement containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 600 involving portland type cement.

    (1)     Note.  For definition of such cements see the definition of
    subclass 739 of this class.


CLS 106/607
TXT Soil, diatomaceous earth or clay containing or material for treating soil
    or earth (e.g., soil stabilization, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 606 involving soil, diatomaceous earth or
    clay or material or process for treating earth or soil such as soil
    stabilization.


CLS 106/608
TXT Organic material containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 606 wherein the composition contains organic
    material.


CLS 106/609
TXT Carbohydrate containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 608 containing carbohydrate.


CLS 106/610
TXT Natural resin containing (e.g., rosin, shellac, turpentine, tall oil, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 600 containing a natural resin, e.g., rosin,
    shellac, turpentine, tall oil, balsam, copal, colophony, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218     and 657, for compositions containing natural resins not including
    an alkali silicate.


CLS 106/611
TXT Calcium sulfate containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 600 containing calcium sulfate, e.g.,
    anhydrite, gypsum, plaster of paris, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    772+,   for compositions containing calcium sulfate and an inorganic
    settable ingredient.


CLS 106/612
TXT Lime containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 600 employing lime, i.e., calcium oxide or
    calcium hydroxide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    792+,   for compositions employing lime and not including an alkali
    silicate.


CLS 106/613
TXT Organic material containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 612 wherein the composition contains organic
    material.


CLS 106/614
TXT Protein containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 600 containing protein, e.g., glue, gelatin,
    albumin, blood, cereal grain, gluten, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124+    and 645+, for a composition containing protein and no alkali
    silicate.


CLS 106/615
TXT Carbohydrate containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 614 containing carbohydrate.


CLS 106/616
TXT With other organic material:

    Subject matter under subclass 614 containing other organic material in
    addition to protein.


CLS 106/617
TXT Carbohydrate containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 600 envolving a composition containing
    carbohydrate.


CLS 106/618
TXT Cellulose:

    Subject matter under subclass 617 employing cellulose material, e.g., plant
    material.


CLS 106/619
TXT Wood, paper, or paper pulp:

    Subject matter under subclass 618 employing wood, paper or paper pulp.


CLS 106/620
TXT Higher fatty acid or ester, amide or salt thereof containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 600 employing a composition containing a
    higher fatty acid or an ester, amide or salt thereof.

    (1)     Note.  For the purposes of this subclass, higher fatty acid is
    defined as a long-chain alphatic monocarboxylic acid, characterized by
    having the carbonyl of the carboxylic acid bonded directly to one end of an
    acyclic chain of at least seven uninterrupted carbons, i.e., the acid
    moiety.


CLS 106/621
TXT With other organic material or asbestos:

    Subject matter under subclass 620 containing other organic material in
    addition to the higher fatty acid or derivative.


CLS 106/622
TXT Wax, paraffin, oil shale, or bituminous material containing (e.g., asphalt,
    pitch, tar, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 600 employing a wax, paraffin, oil shale, or
    bituminous material, e.g., tar. asphalt, pitch, etc.


CLS 106/623
TXT Free metal or alloy containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 600 involving a free metal or alloy.

     (1)    Note.  For the purposes of this subclass a free metal or alloy is
    defined as any metal in the zero valence state.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403,    for filler compositions, per se, containing a free metal or alloy.


CLS 106/624
TXT Ash, slag, slag wool, rock wool, mineral wool, asbestos, or organic garbage
    or sewage material containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 600 employing slag, ash, slag wool, rock
    wool, mineral wool, asbestos or organic garbage, refuse or sewage.


CLS 106/625
TXT Asbestos containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 624 employing asbestos material.


CLS 106/626
TXT Mica, elemental carbon, zeolite or talc containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 600 involving mica, elemental carbon, zeolite
    or talc.


CLS 106/627
TXT Sulfur containing (e.g., alum, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 600 wherein sulfur or a compound thereof is
    employed, e.g., alum, etc.


CLS 106/628
TXT Boron containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 600 wherein boron or a compound thereof is
    employed.


CLS 106/629
TXT Phosphorus containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 600 wherein phosphorus or a compound thereof
    is employed.


CLS 106/630
TXT Organic material containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 629 employing organic material.


CLS 106/631
TXT Perlite, rock, stone, shale, slate, flint, granite, feldspar or limestone
    containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 600 employing perlite, rock, stone, shale,
    slate, flint, granite, feldspar or limestone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400     and 467, for filler materials, per se.


CLS 106/632
TXT Clay containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 600 wherein clay is employed.


CLS 106/633
TXT Soil or diatomaceous earth containing, or material for treating soil or
    earth (e.g., soil stabilization, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 600 involving soil or diatomaceous earth or
    material for treating soil or earth, e.g., soil stabilization, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 266 for earth treatment
    or control employing cement.


CLS 106/634
TXT Organic material containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 600 employing organic material.


CLS 106/635
TXT Zirconium, titanium, zinc, lead, iron, or tin compound containing (Zr, Ti,
    Zn, Pb, Fe, Sn):

    Subject matter under subclass 600 employing a zirconium, zinc, lead, iron
    or tin compound.


CLS 106/636
TXT Particle size specified:

    Subject matter under subclass 600 wherein particle size of a constituent is
    specified.


CLS 106/637
TXT Fluorine containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 600 wherein fluorine is employed.


CLS 106/638
TXT Inorganic settable ingredient containing:

    Compositions containing an inorganic ingredient which sets or hardens when
    mixed with water or aqueous solutions, usually forming a hard, stone-like
    product.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and indented subclasses include compositions
    containing inorganic cementitious materials which set or harden by
    hydration or hydrolysis or the inorganic material, or compound contained
    therein.

    (2)     Note.  Claims to filler or aggregate only, with no additional
    identification of the filler as to composition or structure in the claims,
    will be classified based on other specified elements of the claim rather
    than consulting the specification for the type of filler or aggregate
    employed; on the assumption that use of such is routine in the art, without
    indication to the contrary in the case.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400+,   for filler or aggregate compositions per se which may be used in
    inorganic settable compositions.

    819     through 823, for materials or ingredients designed to be added to
    an inorganic settable composition to improve or modify its properties.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclass 235 for a composition having a continuous phase of free
    metal made by consolidating metal particles and containing Al2O3.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses for processes, within the class definition,
    including a significant molding operation or a significant treatment of the
    molded article.  In particular, see subclasses 30, 31, 42, 125, 228, 333,
    603+.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 2+ for physical processes of mixing mortars
    and concrete which are clearly distinct from the composition.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Class 524, for a settable composition, otherwise proper for
    Class 106, subclasses 638+, when the composition contains a synthetic resin
    or rubber under the definition of such in the class 520 definitions.


CLS 106/639
TXT For use underwater:

    Subject matter under subclass 638 involving compositions specifically
    designed for use underwater or processes adapted therefor.


CLS 106/640
TXT Free metal or alloy containing (e.g., dust, powder, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 638 employing a free metal or alloy, e.g.,
    dust, powder, etc.

    (1)     Note.  For the purposes of this subclass a free metal or alloy is
    defined as any metal in the zero valence state.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403+,   for a filler or aggregate composition, per se, which may be used in
    a settable composition and contains a free metal or alloy.


CLS 106/641
TXT Aluminum:

    Subject matter under subclass 640 employing aluminium.


CLS 106/642
TXT Organic material containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 641 employing organic material.


CLS 106/643
TXT Iron or steel:

    Subject matter under subclass 640 employing iron or steel.


CLS 106/644
TXT Fiber, bar or wire containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 643 wherein the composition includes a fiber,
    bar or wire shaped element.


CLS 106/645
TXT Protein containing (e.g., glue, gelatin, albumin, blood, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 638 employing protein, e.g., glue, gelatin,
    albumin, blood, cereal grain, gluten, isinglass, feathers, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124+,   for a composition containing protein and no settable material.


CLS 106/646
TXT Hollow, foam, cellular or porous material:

    Subject matter under subclass 645 involving hollow, foam, cellular or
    porous material.


CLS 106/647
TXT Soil, diatomaceous earth, clay, rock, stone, granite, flint, slate, shale,
    or material for treating soil or earth (e.g., soil stabilization, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 645 including soil, diatomaceous earth, clay,
    rock, stone, granite, flint, slate, shale, or material for treating soil or
    earth, e.g., wells or roads, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 266 for earth treatment
    or control employing cement.


CLS 106/648
TXT With organic material other than protein:

    Subject matter under subclass 647 including additional organic material
    other than protein.


CLS 106/649
TXT Cereal grain or derived therefrom or vegetable flour or meal (e.g., gluten,
    corn flour, rice, rye, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 645 including cereal grain or material
    derived therefrom or vegetable flour or meal, e.g., gluten, corn flour,
    rice, rye, etc.

    (1)     Note.  For the purposes of this subclass, cereal grains or flours
    will be assumed to contain protein and will be classified herein in the
    absence of an indication to the contrary in the patent.


CLS 106/650
TXT Calcium sulfate containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 645 including calcium sulfate.


CLS 106/651
TXT With organic material other than protein:

    Subject matter under subclass 650 including organic material other than
    protein.


CLS 106/652
TXT Carbohydrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 651 including carbohydrate.


CLS 106/653
TXT Plant or vegetable fiber (e.g., wood, sawdust, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 652 including plant or vegetable fiber, e.g.,
    wood, sawdust, etc.


CLS 106/654
TXT Portland type cement, slag, talc, mica, asbestos, ash, or alum containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 650 which also includes portland type cement,
    slag, talc, mica, asbestos, ash, or alum.


CLS 106/655
TXT With organic material other than protein:

    Subject matter under subclass 645 which includes additional organic
    material other than protein.


CLS 106/656
TXT Carbohydrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 655 including carbohydrate.


CLS 106/657
TXT Natural resin containing (e.g., shellac, turpentine, balsam, copal, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 638 involving natural resin, e.g., shellac,
    turpentine, balsam, copal, etc.


CLS 106/658
TXT Calcium sulfate, aluminous or oxy salt type cement:

    Subject matter under subclass 657 including calcium sulfate, oxy salt type
    or aluminous cement.


CLS 106/659
TXT Rosin or tall oil (e.g., colophony, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 657 including rosin or tall oil, e.g.,
    colophony, etc.


CLS 106/660
TXT Wax containing (e.g.., petroleum wax, beeswax, montan wax, carnauba wax,
    spermaceti, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 638 involving wax.

    (1)     Note.  Wax for the purpose of this subclass is intended to include
    a hydrocarbon wax, an ester-type wax or where the term wax is recited but
    undefined, e.g., petroleum wax, beeswax, montan wax, carnauba wax,
    spemaceti, etc.


CLS 106/661
TXT Higher fatty acid or ester, amide or salt thereof containing (e.g., fish
    oil, vegetable oil, soap, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 638 employing a composition containing a
    higher fatty acid or an ester, amide or salt thereof, e.g., fish oil,
    vegetable oil, soap, etc.

    (1)     Note.  For the purposes of this subclass, higher fatty acid is
    defined as a long-chain alphatic monocarboxylic acid, characterized by
    having the carbonyl of the carboxylic acid bonded directly to one end of an
    acyclic chain of at least seven uninterrupted carbons, i.e., the acid
    moiety.


CLS 106/662
TXT Soil, diatomaceous earth, shale, slate or clay, containing, or material for
    treating soil or earth (e.g., soil stabilization, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 661 including soil, diatomaceous earth,
    shale, slate, or clay or material for treating soil or earth, e.g., wells
    or roads, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 266 for earth treatment
    or control employing cement type materials.


CLS 106/663
TXT Linseed oil or tallow containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 661 including linseed oil or tallow.


CLS 106/664
TXT Portland type cement containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 661 wherein the composition includes portland
    cement.


CLS 106/665
TXT With other organic material:

    Subject matter under subclass 661 including additional organic material
    other than the higher fatty acid or derivative.


CLS 106/666
TXT Stearic acid or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 661 wherein the composition includes stearic
    acid or a derivative thereof.


CLS 106/667
TXT Lime containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 661 wherein the composition includes lime.


CLS 106/668
TXT Bituminous material or tarry residue, pitch, or coal containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 638 involving bituminous material or tarry
    residue, pitch or coal, e.g., asphalt, etc.


CLS 106/669
TXT Soil, diatomaceous earth, or clay, containing, or material for treating
    soil or earth (e.g., soil stabilization, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 668 including soil, diatomaceous earth or
    clay or material for treating soil or earth, e.g., soil stabilization, well
    treating, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 266 for earth treatment
    or control employing cement.


CLS 106/670
TXT Calcium sulfate containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 668 wherein the composition includes calcium
    sulfate.


CLS 106/671
TXT With other organic material:

    Subject matter under subclass 668 including additional organic material
    other than bituminous material, tarry residue, pitch or coal.


CLS 106/672
TXT Hollow, foam, cellular or porous material containing or method of forming
    cellular or porous product:

    Subject matter under subclass 638 involving hollow, foam, cellular or
    porous material or a process of forming cellular or porous material.

    (1)     Note.  To be proper for this subclass, an intent to achieve
    porisity, etc.,  must be evident, i.e., mere inclusion of, for example,
    wood as a filler, which is known to be porous to a degree, is not
    sufficient to place the patent herein.


CLS 106/673
TXT Peroxide or hypochlorite containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 672 including a peroxide or hypochlorite.


CLS 106/674
TXT Carbohydrate containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 672 including a carbohydrate.


CLS 106/675
TXT Perlite or vermiculite containing (e.g., jeffersite, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 672 including perlite or vermiculite, e.g.,
    jeffersite, etc.


CLS 106/676
TXT Glass containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 672 including glass.


CLS 106/677
TXT Organic material containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 672 wherein the composition includes organic
    material.


CLS 106/678
TXT Organic sulfur or organic phosphorus:

    Subject matter under subclass 677 including organic sulfur or organic
    phosphorus material.


CLS 106/679
TXT Slag, cinder or ash containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 672 including slag, cinder or ash.


CLS 106/680
TXT Calcium sulfate containing (e.g., anhydrite, plaster of paris, gypsum,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 672 containing calcium sulfate, e.g.,
    anhydrite, plaster of paris, gypsum, etc.


CLS 106/681
TXT Soil, diatomaceous earth, clay, shale, slate or rock material  containing
    or material for treating soil or earth (e.g., soil stabilization, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 672 including soil, diatomaceous earth, clay,
    shale, slate, or rock material or material for treating soil or earth,
    e.g., well treating, soil stabilization, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 266 for earth treatment
    or control employing cement.


CLS 106/682
TXT Physical introduction of gas (e.g., by mixing, agitation, injection,
    whipping, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 672 involving physical introduction of gas,
    e.g., by mixing, agitation, injection, whipping, etc.


CLS 106/683
TXT Oxy salt type cement:

    Subject matter under subclass 638 containing as the cementitious
    ingredient, the combination of an oxide and another salt which react
    together, forming a hardening material.

    (1)     Note.  The combination usually comprises the combination of the
    oxide and chloride or sulfate of the same metal, such as magnesium or zinc.


CLS 106/684
TXT Soil, diatomaceous earth, clay, slate or shale containing or material for
    treating soil or earth (e.g., soil stabilization, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 683 also containing soil, diatomaceous earth,
    clay, slate or shale or material for treating soil or earth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 266 for earth treatment
    or control employing cement.


CLS 106/685
TXT Magnesium oxy-chloride (e.g., sorel cement, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 683 including magnesium oxy-chloride, e.g.,
    Sorel cement, etc.


CLS 106/686
TXT Organic material containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 685 including organic material.


CLS 106/687
TXT Carbohydrate (e.g., cellulose, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 686 including carbohydrate, e.g., cellulose,
    etc.


CLS 106/688
TXT Specified filler, dye or pigment (e.g., silica, feldspar, carbon, talc,
    asbestos, slag, mineral wool, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 685 including a specified filler, dye or
    pigment, e.g., silica, feldspar, carbon, talc, asbestos, slag, mineral
    wool, etc.


CLS 106/689
TXT Organic material or specified filler:

    Subject matter under subclass 683 including organic material or a specified
    filler.


CLS 106/690
TXT Phosphate based cement:

    Subject matter under subclass 638 involving compositions employing
    phosphates or phosphorus acids as a reactive compound of the settable
    material.

    (1)     Note.  Commonly the composition comprises: 1. an inorganic salt of
    an acid phosphate, especially alkali metal or ammonium acid phosphates and
    2. a basic material such as magnesium oxide, deadburned magnesite,
    deadburned dolomite or deadburned aluminates of the alkali and alkaline
    earth metals.


CLS 106/691
TXT Specified filler or organic material containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 690 including a specified filler or organic
    material.


CLS 106/692
TXT Aluminous cement (e.g., high alumina, calcium aluminate, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 638 involving compositions which are cements
    of the high alumina type or calcium aluminate.

    (1)     Note.  Commonly, high alumina or calcium aluminate cements are
    those containing a large proportion of aluminium oxide, together with lime,
    and smaller amounts of iron oxide and silica, and are formed by fusion of
    the raw materials. The ordinary high alumina cement contains approximately
    forty per cent alumina.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclass 600 for calcium
    aluminate, per se.


CLS 106/693
TXT Cement clinker preparation:

    Subject matter under subclass 692 involving the preparation of aluminous
    cement clinker.


CLS 106/694
TXT Soil, diatomaceous earth, clay, shale, slate, or rock-type material
    containing or material for treating soil or earth (e.g., soil
    stabilization, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 692 employing soil, diatomaceous earth, clay,
    shale, slate or rock-type material for treating soil or earth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 266 for earth treatment
    or control employing cement.


CLS 106/695
TXT With other cement material (e.g., portland, calcium sulfate, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 692 also containing other cement material
    such as Portland type cement, calcium sulfate, etc.


CLS 106/696
TXT Organic material containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 692 containing organic material.


CLS 106/697
TXT Organic garbage, refuse, sewage or waste material containing or treating
    (other than sulfite waste liquor):

    Subject matter under subclass 638 involving compositions containing or
    derived from garbage, refuse, sewage or other waste material of an organic
    nature, other than sulfite waste liquor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    745,    for use of waste material as raw material or fuel in preparing
    portland type cement, per se, i.e., clinker preparation.


CLS 106/698
TXT Perlite containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 638 involving compositions containing perlite.


CLS 106/699
TXT Asbestos containing (e.g., amosite, chrysotile, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 638 involving compositions containing
    asbestos, e.g., amosite, chrysotile, fibrous actinolite, etc.


CLS 106/700
TXT Slag, ash or organic material containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 699 including slag, ash or organic material.


CLS 106/701
TXT Calcium sulfate containing (e.g., gypsum, plaster of paris, anhydrite,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 700 including calcium sulfate, e.g., plaster
    of paris, anhydrite, gypsum, etc.


CLS 106/702
TXT Soil, diatomaceous earth, clay, slate, shale or rock containing or material
    for treating soil or earth (e.g., soil stabilization, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 699 employing soil, diatomaceous earth, clay,
    shale, slate or rock or material for treating soil or earth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 266 for earth treatment
    or control employing cement.


CLS 106/703
TXT Portland type cement:

    Subject matter under subclass 699 including portland type cement.


CLS 106/704
TXT Lime containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 699 including lime.


CLS 106/705
TXT Ash containing (e.g. fly ash, volcanic ash, coal ash, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 638 involving compositions containing ash,
    e.g., fly ash, volcanic ash, bottom ash, coal ash, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Any material identified merely as ash is proper for this
    subclass, however, heavier residues of burning such as cinders, clinkers,
    etc. are not intended for this subclass if so identified.


CLS 106/706
TXT Soil, diatomaceous earth, clay, shale, slate or rock containing or material
    for treating soil or earth (e.g., soil stabilization, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 705 employing soil, diatomaceous earth, clay,
    shale, slate or rock or material for treating soil or earth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 266 for earth treatment
    or control employing cement.


CLS 106/707
TXT With slag, coke, cinder, stack dust, kiln dust or flue dust:

    Subject matter under subclass 705 employing slag, coke, cinder, stack dust,
    kiln dust, or flue dust.


CLS 106/708
TXT Organic material containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 705 including organic material.


CLS 106/709
TXT Portland type cement:

    Subject matter under subclass 705 including portland type cement.


CLS 106/710
TXT With additional lime:

    Subject matter under subclass 705 including lime additional to the lime
    content of the ash material.


CLS 106/711
TXT Mineral fibers or glass fibers containing (e.g., slag wool, cotton wool,
    mineral wool, rock wool, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 638 which includes glass fibers or mineral
    fibers, e.g., slag wool, cotton wool, mineral wool, rock wool, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, subclass 36 for mineral fibers, per se.


CLS 106/712
TXT Color additive (other than whitener):

    Subject matter under subclass 638 including a color additive other than a
    whitener.


CLS 106/713
TXT Portland type cement:

    Subject matter under subclass 638 employing a composition containing
    portland type cement.

    (1)     Note.  For a definition of such cements see the definition of
    subclass 739 of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    739+,   for portland type cement, per se, and processes of preparing same.


CLS 106/714
TXT Slag containing (e.g., blast furnace slag, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 713 wherein the composition also contains
    slag, e.g., blast furnace slag, etc.

    (1)     Note.  As slag, a by-product from various metallurgical processes,
    is a relatively indefinite or broad term in the art, this subclass is
    intended to take compositions referred to as slag by the applicant and
    where appropriate the claims may also be crossed elsewhere based upon the
    disclosure by applicant as to the specific composition of the slag.


CLS 106/715
TXT Calcium sulfate specified (e.g., gypsum, anhydrite, plaster of paris, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 714 wherein the composition also contains
    calcium sulfate, e.g., plaster of paris, anhydrite, gypsum, etc.


CLS 106/716
TXT With mica, talc, cinder, glass, vermiculite, coke breeze or kiln dust:

    Subject matter under subclass 713 wherein the composition contains mica,
    talc, cinder, vermiculite, coke breeze, or kiln dust.


CLS 106/717
TXT Boron, elemental carbon or phosphorus containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 713 wherein the composition contains boron,
    elemental carbon or phosphorus.


CLS 106/718
TXT Soil, diatomaceous earth, clay, slate or shale, containing or material for
    treating soil or earth (e.g., soil stabilization, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 713 employing soil, diatomaceous earth, clay,
    slate, or shale or material for treating soil or earth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 266 for earth treatment
    or control employing cement.


CLS 106/719
TXT Organic material containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 718 wherein the composition also includes
    organic material.


CLS 106/720
TXT Carbohydrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 719 including carbohydrate material, e.g.,
    plant material, etc.


CLS 106/721
TXT Silica or lime added:

    Subject matter under subclass 718 wherein the composition contains lime or
    silica in addition to that contained in the portland cement, per se.


CLS 106/722
TXT Calcium sulfate specified (e.g., gypsum, anhydrite, plaster of paris, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 718 wherein the composition contains calcium
    sulfate specified in the claims.


CLS 106/723
TXT Process involving steam, electrical, magnetic or wave energy, vibration or
    vacuum or product thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 713 involving a process employing steam,
    electrical, magnetic or wave energy, vibration or vacuum.


CLS 106/724
TXT Organic material containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 713 including organic material.


CLS 106/725
TXT Organic sulfur compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 724 including an organic sulfur containing
    compound.


CLS 106/726
TXT Cellulose or silica containing (e.g., sand, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 725 wherein the composition also contains
    cellulose or silica, e.g., sand, plant material, etc.


CLS 106/727
TXT Organic nitrogen compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 724 including an organic nitrogen containing
    compound.


CLS 106/728
TXT Carboxylic acid, ester or salt thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 724 wherein the composition contains a
    carboxylic acid or an ester, or salt of a carboxylic acid.


CLS 106/729
TXT Carbohydrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 724 including a carbohydrate.


CLS 106/730
TXT Starch, dextran, cellulose ether or gum:

    Subject matter under subclass 729 containing starch, dextran, a cellulose
    ether or a gum.


CLS 106/731
TXT Plant material (e.g., vegetable fiber, wood, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 729 containing plant material, e.g.,
    vegetable fiber, wood, etc.


CLS 106/732
TXT Calcium sulfate specified (e.g., gypsum, anhydrite, plaster of paris, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 724 also including calcium sulfate.


CLS 106/733
TXT Titanium, vanadium, chromium, molybdenum, tungsten, manganese, iron,
    copper, zinc, tin or lead compound containing (Ti V Cr Mo W Mn Fe Cu Zn Sn
    Pb):

    Subject matter under subclass 713 including a compound of titanium,
    vanadium, chromium, molybdenum, tungsten, manganese, iron, copper, zinc,
    tin, or lead.


CLS 106/734
TXT Halogen containing (F Cl Br I):

    Subject matter under subclass 713 containing a halogen, e.g., fluorine,
    chlorine, bromine or iodine.


CLS 106/735
TXT Calcium sulfate specified (e.g., gypsum, anhydrite, plaster of paris, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 713 wherein calcium sulfate is specifically
    claimed.

    (1)     Note.  Calcium sulfate is commonly added to portland cement clinker
    material, per se, and is often already present in the basic cement employed
    in making cement compositions.  This subclass is not intended to include
    said routine calcium sulfate containing cement    compositions, but only
    compositions where applicant specifically recites calcium sulfate in the
    claimed  composition.


CLS 106/736
TXT Sulfur containing (e.g., alum, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 713 including sulfur or a sulfur compound.


CLS 106/737
TXT Silica containing (e.g., sand, quartz, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 713 wherein the composition contains added
    silica other than the silica of the portland cement, per se, e.g., sand
    quartz, etc.


CLS 106/738
TXT Rock, gravel, stone or carbonate containing (e.g., limestone, dolomite,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 713 containing rock, gravel, stone or a
    carbonate, e.g., limestone, dolomite, etc.


CLS 106/739
TXT Portland type cement, per se, (e.g., clinker preparation, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 713 involving portland type cement, per se,
    which is usually formed by sintering or calcining a mixture of calcareous
    and argillaceous materials to produce a sintered "clinker" which is
    subsequently ground to a finely divided state.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Soilds, appropriate subclasses
    for processes of drying Portland type cement raw material and for processes
    of cooling Portland type cement clinker by solid and gas or vapor contact.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses for the preliminary treatment of cement raw material by
    classifying, separating or assorting.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses for
    filtration or other means of separation of liquid from cement raw material.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 1 to 30
    for processes of comminuting solids, such as clinker, etc.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 1+ for methods of generating and applying heat
    to materials which do not undergo a chemical reaction during the heating.
    Processes which involve "calcining", "dead-burning", "removing water of
    hydration", etc. are considered to involve a chemical reaction and, when
    applied to the manufacture of Portland type cement, are classified herein.
    Residual apparatus for performing such processes is in Class 432.


CLS 106/740
TXT Process involving spray drying, atomizing of solid material, steam,
    nonatmospheric pressure, cleaning step or avoiding contamination of
    equipment:

    Subject matter under subclass 739 including processes involving spray
    drying, atomizing, of solid material, steam, nonatmospheric pressure,
    cleaning step or avoiding contamination of equipment.


CLS 106/741
TXT Color control or modification (e.g., steps to produce white cement, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 739 involving color control or modification
    of color of the cement, e.g., steps or additives to produce white cement,
    etc.


CLS 106/742
TXT Cooling in reducing atmosphere:

    Subject matter under subclass 741 involving cooling in a reducing
    atmosphere.


CLS 106/743
TXT Control of a parameter of operation in response to a measurement or test or
    to vary a result in a process:


    Subject matter under subclass 739 involving control of a parameter of
    operation in response to a measurement or test or to vary a result in a
    process.


CLS 106/744
TXT Employment of a fluidized bed:

    Subject matter under subclass 739 employing a fluidized bed.

    (1)     Note.  A fluidized bed is defined here to mean a bed of solid
    particles with gas flowing upward through the particles with sufficient
    velocity to keep the particles suspended and in motion in the gas without
    blowing them bodily out of the bed. The suspended particles act much like a
    fluid.

    (2)     Note.  A stirred bed is generally not considered a fluidized bed.
    However, when a applicant refers to a fluidized bed the patent should be
    included in this subclass and also any other appropriate subclass,
    regardless of whether it meets the strict definition.


CLS 106/745
TXT Waste material employed as raw material or fuel (not kiln dust):

    Subject matter under subclass 739 employing waste material as the raw
    material or fuel.

    (1)     Note.  Kiln dust is not considered a waste material for the
    purposes of this subclass.


CLS 106/746
TXT Electrical, magnetic or wave energy employed (e.g., electric arc, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 739 employing electrical, magnetic or wave
    energy, e.g., electric arc, electrostatic, etc.


CLS 106/747
TXT Use of heat transmitting or conducting solid material for cooling solid
    material from gas or for modifying temperature of solid material:

    Subject matter under subclass 739 involving the use of heat transmitting or
    heat conducting solid material for cooling (or precipitating) solid
    material from gas or modifying the temperature of solid material.


CLS 106/748
TXT Aftertreatment of clinker:

    Subject matter under subclass 739 involving aftertreatment of clinker,
    i.e., sintered raw material.


CLS 106/749
TXT Refire or recalcine clinker:

    Subject matter under subclass 748 involving refiring, resintering or
    recalcining  the clinker.


CLS 106/750
TXT Specified cooling (e.g., recycling heated coolant, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 748 involving specified cooling of the
    clinker, e.g., recycling the heated coolant gas obtained in the step of
    cooling the clinker, etc.


CLS 106/751
TXT Involving kiln dust (e.g., recovery, treatment, processing thereof or
    product, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 739 involving kiln dust, e.g., intentional
    recovery, treatment, purifying, processing thereof, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Incidental production of kiln dust, inherent in clinker
    production is not sufficient for classification in this subclass.


CLS 106/752
TXT Treatment or removal of alkali, sulfurous or chloride impurities from raw
    material or fuel:

    Subject matter under subclass 739 involving treatment or removal of alkali,
    sulfurous or chloride impurities from raw material or fuel.


CLS 106/753
TXT Agglomerate, pellet, molded or shaped form of raw material:

    Subject matter under subclass 739 involving agglomerate, pellet, molded or
    shaped form of raw material.


CLS 106/754
TXT Sheet, film, layered, brick, briquette, block, fiber, strand, cake or
    egg-shape:

    Subject matter under subclass 753 wherein the raw material is layered,
    egg-shaped, or in the form of a sheet, film, brick, briquette, block,
    fiber, strand or cake.


CLS 106/755
TXT Fuel containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 753 wherein the agglomerated composition also
    contains fuel.


CLS 106/756
TXT Classifying, sorting, separating, screening, sizing, grading or subdividing
    solid material (e.g., centrifugal separation, flotation, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 739 involving classifying, sorting,
    separating, screening, sizing, grading or subdividing solid material, e.g.,
    centrifugal separation, flotation, etc.


CLS 106/757
TXT Comminuting or grinding, other than nominal, of raw material or fuel (e.g.,
    to desired size or relative sizes, etc.) or recited particle of specified
    size:

    Subject matter under subclass 739 involving comminuting, or grinding, in a
    specified manner, of raw material or fuel, e.g., to desired size or
    relative sizes, etc. or recited particle of specified size is claimed.

    (1)     Note.  Mere recitation of milling, grinding or comminuting is not
    sufficient to place a patent in this subclass, but specific parameters of
    operation must be recited.

    (2)     Note.  Composition containing a grinding aid  material is placed
    above in Portland cement compositions unless the additive material is
    clearly not present after the grinding.


CLS 106/758
TXT Raw material and fuel premixed or specified fuel:

    Subject matter under subclass 739 involving raw material and fuel premixed
    before firing or specified fuel, e.g., composition of the fuel.


CLS 106/759
TXT Flow of gases to produce turbulence (e.g., spiral, helical, venturi,
    centrifugal, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 739 wherein a particular flow of gas designed
    to produce turbulence is employed, e.g., centrifugal, Venturi, spiral,
    helical pattern, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Mere flow of air countercurrent to the flow of raw  material
    or fuel is deemed routine in the art and not considered sufficient alone to
    place in this subclass.


CLS 106/760
TXT Shape, angle, intensity or condition of fuel or flame specified (e.g., jet,
    oscillating, plural streams, spray, temperature, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 739 wherein the shape, angle, or other
    descriptive condition of the fuel or flame is specified, e.g., jet, spray,
    oscillating, plural streams, temperature, duration, etc.


CLS 106/761
TXT Recycling exhaust gas, reusing heat from process, or purifying exhaust gas:

    Subject matter under subclass 739 involving recycling of exhaust gas,
    reusing heat from process, or purifying exhaust gas.

    (1)     Note.   Recycling of reheated cooling gas, used to cool clinker, is
    classified in subclass 750 of this class.


CLS 106/762
TXT Processing of exhaust gas prior to recycling (e.g., purifying, separating
    constituents, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 761 involving special processing of exhaust
    gas, prior to recycling to prepare the gas for said recycling, e.g.,
    purifying, separating constituents, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Purifying to remove certain impurities is provided for in
    subclass 752 above.


CLS 106/763
TXT Ash containing raw material:

    Subject matter under subclass 739 wherein the raw material includes ash.


CLS 106/764
TXT Organic material or sea shell containing raw material:

    Subject matter under subclass 739 wherein the raw material includes organic
    material or sea shell.


CLS 106/765
TXT Calcium sulfate containing raw material:

    Subject matter under subclass 739 wherein the raw material includes calcium
    sulfate, i.e., the calcium sulfate is present prior to sintering, not a
    subsequent additive.


CLS 106/766
TXT Phosphorus, boron, chromium, molybdenum, vanadium, or nickel containing raw
    material (P, B, Cr, Mo, V, Ni):

    Subject matter under subclass 739 wherein the raw material includes
    phosphorus, boron, chromium, molybdenum, vanadium or nickel.


CLS 106/767
TXT Slag containing raw material:

    Subject matter under subclass 739 wherein the raw material includes slag,
    e.g., blast furnace slag, etc.

    (1)     Note.   As slag is a relatively indefinite or broad term in the
    art, this subclass is intended to take compositions referred to as slag by
    the applicant and where appropriate the claims may also be crossed
    elsewhere based upon the disclosure by applicant as to the specific
    composition of the slag.


CLS 106/768
TXT Potassium, halogen or sulfur containing raw material (K, F, Cl, Br, I, S):

    Subject matter under subclass 739 wherein the raw material includes
    potassium, fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine or sulfur.


CLS 106/769
TXT Iron or manganese containing raw material (Fe, Mn):

    Subject matter under subclass 739 wherein the raw material includes iron or
    manganese.


CLS 106/770
TXT Slurry employed:

    Subject matter under subclass 739 employing a slurry.


CLS 106/771
TXT Preprocessing or processing of raw material before firing (e.g.,
    preheating, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 739 involving preprocessing or processing of
    raw material before firing, e.g., preheating, etc.


CLS 106/772
TXT Calcium sulfate (e.g., gypsum, anhydrite, plaster of paris, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 638 employing calcium sulfate, e.g., plaster
    of paris, anhydrite, gypsum, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    765,    for processes using calcium sulfate as a starting material in the
    making of Portland type cement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclass 555 for calcium sulfate,
    per se.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 1+ for methods of generating and applying heat
    to materials which do not undergo a chemical reaction during the heating.
    Processes which involve "calcining", "dead-burning", "removing water of
    hydration", etc. are considered to involve a chemical reaction and, when
    applied to the manufacture of calcium sulfate cement, are classified
    herein. Residual apparatus for performing such processes is in Class 432.


CLS 106/773
TXT Soil, diatomaceous earth, clay, slate or shale, containing or material for
    treating soil or earth (e.g., soil stabilization, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 772 employing soil, diatomaceous earth, clay,
    slate, or shale or material for treating soil or earth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 266 for earth treatment
    or control employing cement.


CLS 106/774
TXT Organic material containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 773 including organic material.


CLS 106/775
TXT Anhydrous calcium sulfate (e.g., anhydrite, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 772 employing anhydrous calcium sulfate,
    e.g., anhydrite, etc.


CLS 106/776
TXT Organic material or slag containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 775 also containing organic material or slag.


CLS 106/777
TXT Keene's cement:

    Subject matter under subclass 775 employing Keene's cement.

    (1)     Note.  When a patent refers to Keene's cement it is appropriate for
    this subclass.  Commonly, Keene's cement is dead burned gypsum ground to a
    desired fineness.


CLS 106/778
TXT With organic material:

    Subject matter under subclass 772 including organic material.


CLS 106/779
TXT Carbohydrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 778 containing a carbohydrate.


CLS 106/780
TXT Cellulose (e.g., wood, cork, bark, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 779 containing cellulose, e.g., plant
    material, wood, cork, bark, etc.


CLS 106/781
TXT Silicon, sulfur, nitrogen or phosphorus containing organic material:

    Subject matter under subclass 778 wherein the composition includes silicon,
    sulfur, nitrogen, or phosphorus containing organic material.


CLS 106/782
TXT Slag, cinder, mica, talc, glass, boron or elemental carbon containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 772 including slag, cinder, mica, talc,
    glass, boron, or elemental carbon.


CLS 106/783
TXT Layered or coated material, nominal molding or shaping, or other physical
    process (e.g., steam, electrical, magnetic or wave energy, manipulative
    steps, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 772 involving layered or coated material,
    nominal molding or shaping, or other physical process, e.g., manipulative
    steps, steam or electrical, magnetic or wave energy, etc.


CLS 106/784
TXT Particle size specified:

    Subject matter under subclass 772 wherein the particle size or relative
    size of any ingredient is specified.


CLS 106/785
TXT Stabilizer, retarder, or setting agent specified:

    Subject matter under subclass 772 involving use of a specified material
    which is indicated to be a stabilizer, retarder or setting agent for the
    composition.


CLS 106/786
TXT By-product gypsum (e.g., phosphogypsum, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 772 employing by-product gypsum, e.g.,
    phosphogypsum, etc.

    (1)     Note.  By-product gypsum is simply gypsum indicated to have been
    derived as a by-product of another process.


CLS 106/787
TXT Alum or halogen containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 772 including alum, fluorine, chlorine,
    bromine or iodine.


CLS 106/788
TXT Silica containing (e.g., sand, quartz, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 772 including silica, e.g., sand, quartz,
    etc.


CLS 106/789
TXT Slag:

    Subject matter under subclass 638 employing a composition containing slag.

    (1)     Note.  As slag, a by-product from various metallurgical  processes,
    is a relatively indefinite or broad term in the art, this subclass is
    intended to take compositions  referred to as slag by the applicant and
    where appropriate the claims may also be crossed elsewhere based upon the
    disclosure by applicant as to the specific composition of the slag.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    767,    for a process employing slag as a raw material in making Portland
    cement.


CLS 106/790
TXT Organic material, soil, diatomaceous earth, clay, slate, shale, or
    rock-type material containing or material for treating soil or earth (e.g.,
    soil stabilization, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 789 employing organic material, soil,
    diatomaceous earth, clay, slate, shale or rock type material or material
    for treating soil or earth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 266 for earth treatment
    or control employing cement.


CLS 106/791
TXT Lime containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 790 including a specified filler or organic
    material.


CLS 106/792
TXT Lime:

    Subject matter under subclass 638 employing lime, i.e., calcium oxide or
    calcium hydroxide.


CLS 106/793
TXT Soil, diatomaceous earth, clay, slate or shale, containing or material for
    treating soil or earth (e.g., soil stabilization, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 792 employing soil, diatomaceous earth, clay,
    slate, or shale or material for treating soil or earth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 266 for earth treatment
    or control employing cement.


CLS 106/794
TXT Organic material or halogen containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 793 employing organic material or fluorine,
    chlorine, bromine or iodine.


CLS 106/795
TXT Organic material containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 792 employing organic material.


CLS 106/796
TXT Silica-lime mixtures:

    Subject matter under subclass 792 employing silica, e.g., sand or quartz.


CLS 106/797
TXT Fiber containing or step of molding or shaping of material:

    Subject matter under subclass 796 including fiber or involving a step of
    molding or shaping of material.


CLS 106/798
TXT Iron, sulfur or aluminum containing (e.g., alum, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 796 including iron, sulfur or aluminium,
    e.g., alum, etc.


CLS 106/799
TXT Aluminum or sulfur containing (e.g., alum, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 792 including sulfur or aluminium, e.g.,
    alum, etc.


CLS 106/800
TXT Magnesium compound containing (e.g., quicklime, dolomite, talc, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 792 including a magnesium compound, e.g.,
    quicklime, dolomite, talc, etc.


CLS 106/801
TXT Magnesium compound (e.g., vermiculite, talc, soapstone, dolomite, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 638 employing a magnesium compound, e.g.,
    magnesium  oxide or hydroxide, talc, soapstone, vermiculite, dolomite, etc.


CLS 106/802
TXT Organic material containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 638 wherein the composition includes organic
    material.


CLS 106/803
TXT Soil, diatomaceous earth, clay, slate or shale containing, or material for
    treating soil or earth (e.g., soil stabilization, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 802 employing soil, diatomaceous earth, clay,
    slate, or shale or material for treating soil or earth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 266 for earth treatment
    or control employing cement.


CLS 106/804
TXT Carbohydrate containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 802 wherein the composition includes a
    carbohydrate.


CLS 106/805
TXT Cellulose or plant material:

    Subject matter under subclass 804 wherein the composition contains
    cellulose or plant material.


CLS 106/806
TXT Organic silicon, organic boron or organic phosphorus:

    Subject matter under subclass 802 including organic silicon, organic boron
    or organic phosphorus containing material.


CLS 106/807
TXT Mineral oil or hydrocarbon oil:

    Subject matter under subclass 802 including mineral oil or hydrocarbon oil.


CLS 106/808
TXT Organic nitrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 802 including an organic nitrogen containing
    material.


CLS 106/809
TXT Organic sulfur:

    Subject matter under subclass 802 including an organic sulfur containing
    material.


CLS 106/810
TXT Organic acid or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 802 including an organic acid or derivative.


CLS 106/811
TXT Soil, diatomaceous earth, clay, slate or shale containing, or material for
    treating soil or earth (e.g., soil stabilization:

    Subject matter under subclass 638 employing soil, diatomaceous earth, clay,
    slate, or shale or material for treating soil or earth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 266 for earth treatment
    or control employing cement.


CLS 106/812
TXT With added silica (e.g., sand, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 811 including silica other than that
    contained in the clay, soil, diatomaceous earth, slate or shale.


CLS 106/813
TXT Synthetic zeolite or so-called mineral polymer containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 638 employing a mineral polymer, e.g.,
    synthetic zeolite, etc.


CLS 106/814
TXT Mica, cinder, glass or elemental carbon containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 638 wherein the composition also contains
    mica, cinder, glass, or elemental carbon.


CLS 106/815
TXT Boron, sulfur, or halogen containing (e.g., alum, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 638 wherein the composition also contains
    fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine, boron, or sulfur, e.g., alum, etc.


CLS 106/816
TXT Particle size specified:

    Subject matter under subclass 638 wherein particle size of any material in
    the composition is specified.


CLS 106/817
TXT Rock, stone, gravel, trass, shell or carbonate containing (e.g., limestone,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 638 wherein the composition also contains
    rock, stone, gravel, trass, shell or carbonate, e.g., limestone, etc.


CLS 106/818
TXT Process involving a temperature of zero degrees C. or below:

    Subject matter under subclass 638 including a proceess involving a
    temperature of zero degrees Centigrade or below.


CLS 106/819
TXT Additive materials for inorganic cements which contain a hydraulic settable
    material:

    Materials or ingredients specifically designed to be added to inorganic
    cements which contain a settable material.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the patents in this and indented subclasses are for
    water-proofing agents, stabilizers, retarders or setting agents to be added
    to settable compositions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, and 423, Chemistry of Inorganic
    Compounds, for materials or ingredients of coating or plastic compositions
    which are single compounds or are reaction mixtures.


CLS 106/820
TXT Expanding, foaming or porosity producing additive:

    Subject matter under subclass 819 wherein the additive material serves for
    producing porosity in, foaming or expanding inorganic cements.


CLS 106/821
TXT Protein containing additive:

    Subject matter under subclass 819 containing protein.


CLS 106/822
TXT Wax, tallow, oil, natural resin or higher fatty acid or salt, amide, or
    ester thereof containing additive (e.g., rosin, tall oil, hydrocarbon oil,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 819 containing wax, tallow, oil, natural
    resin or higher fatty acid or salt, amide, or ester thereof, e.g., rosin,
    tall oil, hydrocarbon oil, etc.

    (1)     Note.  For the purposes of this subclass, higher fatty acid is
    defined as a long-chain alphatic monocarboxylic acid, characterized by
    having the carbonyl of the carboxylic acid bonded directly to one end of an
    acyclic chain of at least seven uninterrupted carbons, i.e., the acid
    moiety.


CLS 106/823
TXT Organic material containing additive (e.g., carbohydrate, bituminous
    material, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 819 containing organic material, e.g.,
    carbohydrate, bituminous material, etc.

            CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS RELATING TO SUBCLASS 287.1


CLS 106/900
TXT Soil stabilization:

    Subject matter under subclass 287.1 wherein the coating or plastic
    composition alters the mechanical or hydraulic properties of soil.


CLS 106/901
TXT Low molecular weight hydrocarbon polymer-containing mixture:

    Subject matter under subclass 287.1 wherein the coating or plastic
    composition contains a hydrocarbon polymer of molecular weight under 100 or
    is a liquid.

    FOREIGN ART COLLECTIONS

    The definitions for FOR 100-FOR 197 below correspond to the definitions of
    the abolished subclasses under Class 106 from which these collections were
    formed. See the Foreign Art Collection schedule for specific
    correspondences. [Note: The titles and definitions for indented art
    collections include all the details of the one(s) that are hierarchically
    superior.]


CLS 106/FOR100
TXT Cellulose liberation liquor containing:

    Foreign art collection including coating or plastic compositions in
    thepreparation of which a waste reside or liquor for the processes of
    liberating cellulose; e.g., by the sulfite, sulfate, or soda processes, or
    fraction thereof, is used.


CLS 106/FOR101
TXT Tall oil:

    Foreign art collection including compositions  in the preparation of which
    tall oil or reaction product thereof is employed.


CLS 106/FOR102
TXT Foreign art collection including coating or plastic compositions
    in the preparation of which a protein or derivative thereof is employed.


CLS 106/FOR103
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in which the protein
    is gelatine or glue, or a reaction product thereof.


CLS 106/FOR104
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which a carbohydrate or derivative thereof is employed.


CLS 106/FOR105
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which cellulose or a derivative thereof is employed.


CLS 106/FOR106
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which a cellulose ether or ester is employed.


CLS 106/FOR107
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which a carbohydrate gum, e.g., gum arabic, dextrin, etc., or
    derivative, is employed.


CLS 106/FOR108
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which starch or derivative thereof is employed.


CLS 106/FOR109
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which a fat, fatty oil, fatty oil acid or salt thereof is employed.


CLS 106/FOR110
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which a fatty oil, e.g., linseed or castor oil, is employed.


CLS 106/FOR111
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which a natural resin or derivative is employed.


CLS 106/FOR112
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which a wax, bituminous material or tarry residue is employed.


CLS 106/FOR113
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions which are normally
    liquid and contain a definite solvent or dispersing medium.


CLS 106/FOR114
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions containing a
    definite flux or plasticizer.


CLS 106/FOR115
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions containing a filler,
    dye or pigment.


CLS 106/FOR116
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which casein or a derivative thereof is employed.


CLS 106/FOR117
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which a carbohydrate or derivative thereof is employed.


CLS 106/FOR118
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which cellulose or derivative thereof is employed.


CLS 106/FOR119
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which a cellulose ether or ester is employed.


CLS 106/FOR120
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which a fat, fatty oil, fatty oil acid or salt thereof is employed.


CLS 106/FOR121
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which a fatty oil is employed.


CLS 106/FOR122
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which a natural resin or derivative is employed.


CLS 106/FOR123
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which a wax, bituminous material or tarry residue is employed.


CLS 106/FOR124
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions which are normally
    liquid and which contain a definite solvent or dispersing agent.


CLS 106/FOR125
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions containing definite
    flux or plasticizer.


CLS 106/FOR126
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions containing a filler,
    dye or pigment.


CLS 106/FOR127
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which a prolamine or derivative is employed.


CLS 106/FOR128
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which a carbohydrate or derivative thereof is employed.


CLS 106/FOR129
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which cellulose or derivative thereof is employed.


CLS 106/FOR130
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which a wax, bituminous or resinous material or tarry residue is
    employed.


CLS 106/FOR131
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions which contain a
    definite flux or plasticizer or are normally liquid and contain a definite
    solvent or dispersing medium.


CLS 106/FOR132
TXT Seed protein or derivative:

    Foreign art collection including compositions  in the preparation of which
    vegetable seed protein, e.g., soya bean protein, or derivative is employed.


CLS 106/FOR133
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which feathers, hair or leather is employed.


CLS 106/FOR134
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which a wax, bituminous or resinous material or tarry residue is
    employed.


CLS 106/FOR135
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which a carbohydrate or derivative thereof is employed.


CLS 106/FOR136
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which cellulose or derivative thereof is employed.


CLS 106/FOR137
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which a fat, fatty oil, fatty oil acid or salt thereof is employed.


CLS 106/FOR138
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which a wax, bituminous or resinous material or tarry residue is
    employed.


CLS 106/FOR139
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions which contain a
    definite flux or plasticizer or are normally liquid and contain a definite
    solvent or dispersing medium.


CLS 106/FOR140
TXT Foreign art collection including coating or plastic compositions
    in the preparation of which a carbohydrate or derivative is employed.


CLS 106/FOR141
TXT Cellulose or derivative:

    Foreign art collection including compositions  in the preparation of which
    cellulose or derivative thereof is employed.


CLS 106/FOR142
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions  in the preparation
    of which viscose is employed.


CLS 106/FOR143
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions which are drawn to
    viscose solutions specialized for use in forming filaments, films, etc., by
    extrusion in some precipitating medium, i.e., spinning solutions.


CLS 106/FOR144
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in which a
    delustering agent is added to the spinning solution.


CLS 106/FOR145
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which cupra-ammonium solution of cellulose is employed.


CLS 106/FOR146
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions containing
    regenerated cellulose, whether made from viscose, cupra-ammonium cellulose
    or other cellulosic compositions.


CLS 106/FOR147
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which a cellulose ether or ester is employed.


CLS 106/FOR148
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions which are
    dispersions or emulsions of cellulose ethers or esters.


CLS 106/FOR149
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which a fat, fatty oil, fatty oil acid, or salt thereof is employed.


CLS 106/FOR150
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions  in the preparation
    of which a natural resin or derivative is employed.


CLS 106/FOR151
TXT With natural resin or derivative:

    Foreign art collection including compositions  in the preparation of which
    a natural resin or derivative, e.g., rosin, copal or ester gum, is employed.


CLS 106/FOR152
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which a terpene compound, e.g., camphor, pine oil, etc., is employed.


CLS 106/FOR153
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which an ether, ester or alcohol is employed in addition to the terpene
    compound and cellulose ether or ester.


CLS 106/FOR154
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which a heterocyclic compound is employed in addition to the cellulose
    ether or ester.


CLS 106/FOR155
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which a phosphorous compound, e.g., triaryl phosphate, which is usually
    present as a plasticizer, is employed in addition to the cellulose ether or
    ester.


CLS 106/FOR156
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which a compound containing a carboxylic group (-COOX, wherein X is
    hydrogen, a metal or an organic radical) is employed in addition to the
    cellulose ether or ester.


CLS 106/FOR157
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions wherein the
    carboxylate compound contains an ether group (C-O-C), e.g., ether-esters.


CLS 106/FOR158
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions wherein the
    carboxylate compound is an ester of a polyhydric alcohol.


CLS 106/FOR159
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions wherein the
    carboxylate compound is a polycarboxylic acid, salt or ester thereof.


CLS 106/FOR160
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions wherein the
    carboxylate compound is an oxo- or oxy-acid, salt or ester thereof.


CLS 106/FOR161
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions wherein the
    carboxylate compound is a lower fatty acid, salt or ester thereof.


CLS 106/FOR162
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which an aldehyde or ketone is employed in addition to the lower fatty
    acid or ester.


CLS 106/FOR163
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which an ether or alcohol is employed in addition to the lower fatty
    acid or ester and cellulose derivative.


CLS 106/FOR164
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which an amine or amide is employed in addition to the cellulose ether
    or ester.


CLS 106/FOR165
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which a ketone or aldehyde is employed in addition to the cellulose
    ether or ester.


CLS 106/FOR166
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which an ether is employed in addition to the cellulose ether or ester.


CLS 106/FOR167
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which an alcohol or a phenol is employed in addition to the cellulose
    ether or ester.


CLS 106/FOR168
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which a halogen containing carbon compound is employed in addition to
    the cellulose ether or ester.


CLS 106/FOR169
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which a hydrocarbon, wax, bituminous material or tarry residue is
    employed.


CLS 106/FOR170
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which a delustering agent is employed.


CLS 106/FOR171
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which a metal salt of an acid other than a carboxylic acid is employed.


CLS 106/FOR172
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which cellulose nitrate is employed.


CLS 106/FOR173
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which cellulose acetate is employed.


CLS 106/FOR174
TXT Cellulose ether:

    Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation of which
    cellulose ether is employed.


CLS 106/FOR175
TXT Carboxymethyl cellulose:

    Foreign art collection including compositions wherein the cellulose ether
    is carboxymethyl cellulose.


CLS 106/FOR176
TXT Foreign art collection including processes which are of general
    application to cellulose ether or ester compositions.


CLS 106/FOR177
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which a fat, fatty oil, fatty oil acid or salt thereof is employed.


CLS 106/FOR178
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which a natural resin or reaction product thereof is employed.


CLS 106/FOR179
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    which a wax is employed.


CLS 106/FOR180
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which a bituminous material or tarry residue is employed.


CLS 106/FOR181
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions which are normally
    liquid and contain a definite solvent or dispersing medium.


CLS 106/FOR182
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions containing a filler,
    dye, or pigment.


CLS 106/FOR183
TXT Cork:

    Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation of which
    cork is employed.


CLS 106/FOR184
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which a carbohydrate gum; e.g., gum arabic, tragacanth, dextrin, is
    employed.


CLS 106/FOR185
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which a fat, fatty oil, fatty oil acid or salt thereof is employed.


CLS 106/FOR186
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which wax, bituminous or resinous material or tarry residue is employed.


CLS 106/FOR187
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions which are normally
    liquid and contain a definite solvent or dispersing medium.


CLS 106/FOR188
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions containing a filler,
    dye or pigment.


CLS 106/FOR189
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which starch or derivative thereof is employed.


CLS 106/FOR190
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which a fat, fatty oil, fatty oil acid or salt thereof is employed.


CLS 106/FOR191
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which a wax, bituminous or resinous material or tarry residue is
    employed.


CLS 106/FOR192
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions which are normally
    liquid and contain a definite solvent or dispersing medium.


CLS 106/FOR193
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions containing a filler,
    dye, or pigment.


CLS 106/FOR194
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which a fat, fatty oil, fatty oil acid, or salt thereof is employed.


CLS 106/FOR195
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions in the preparation
    of which a wax, bituminous or resinous material or tarry residue is
    employed.


CLS 106/FOR196
TXT Foreign art collection including compositions containing a filler,
    dye, or pigment.


CLS 106/FOR197
TXT Carbohydrate, protein, gum, or lignin, e.g., pectate, alginate,
    albumin, glue, etc.:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter wherein the composition
    contains a carbohydrate, protein, gum or lignin.


CLS 108/
TTL HORIZONTALLY SUPPORTED  PLANAR SURFACES

CLS 108/
TXT This class includes rigid, planar, supporting surfaces having structure to
    support the surface in a horizontal plane.  Throughout the definitions of
    the subclasses of this class, the supporting surface is referred to as the
    "surface", and the structure which supports this surface is referred to as
    the "support".

    (1)     Note.  This class includes traylike planar supports; i.e.,
    horizontal planar surfaces having an upstanding flange around the perimeter
    thereof when the flange is not involved in the relationship between the
    surface and the support.

    (2)     Note.  The schedule of this class was built on patents issued since
    1931. Older patents were placed in the schedule on the basis of the total
    disclosure and not necessarily on the basis of claimed subject matter.

    (3)     Note.  For a horizontal surface without claimed support means and
    having face-to-face sheets with a rim, see Class 52, subclasses 782.2+.
    For a surface having no claimed support means and having a separate
    attached, elongated edging or stiffener, see Class 52, subclasses 800.1+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclasses 103+ for tables having
    structure related to the art of ironing or smoothing textiles.

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 217.1+ for a sewing machine table.

    114,    Ships, subclass 195 for tables having automatic leveling tops or
    equivalent devices securing the same end.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 712+ for restraining an animal on a
    horizontal surface, especially subclasses 722+ for a tiltable support and
    subclasses 753+ for a stationary table.

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 50+ for a cigarette making machine having a
    stationary table.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, appropriate
    subclasses for a flexible or portable panel usable as a table top,
    especially subclasses 87+ for plural panels; subclasses 327+ for a panel
    supported at opposite edges by elongated elements; subclasses 371+ for a
    panel mounted in a frame; and subclasses 383+ for means to fasten one edge
    of a fabric panel to an elongated supporting element.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 114 for a supporting stand adapted to
    connecting up or manipulating telegraph instruments or arrangements thereof
    specific to telegraphy.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, appropriate subclasses for a
    platform for supporting a workman in vertically spaced relation with a
    primary support such as the ground or a floor.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 703+ for
    a table for supporting articles for inspection and manual selection of the
    articles, and subclass 458 for a table on which material with mingled
    liquid is so treated that the heaviest constituents of the material may
    settle as a stratum.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclasses 154+ for apparatus
    for driving a member; e.g., nail, combined with a work support.

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses for a supporting surface in the
    form of an open border framework.

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 289+ for a work holder comprising a
    surface which, when the work is being treated, is positioned beneath at
    least a part of the work and is in contact with said part of the work to
    support the work against the force of gravity in at least one position of
    adjustment of the work holder.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, appropriate subclasses for seats having a bottom
    and a back, or legrest, or both.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 264+ for
    holding a rotating storage medium element in operative position.

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 108+ for a game table which
    is used in playing a surface projectile game thereon, subclasses 236+ for
    gameboard structure for playing a board game thereon, and subclass 309 for
    a game table or supporting surface, in general.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclass 209 for a table or
    couch combined with an X-ray device.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 578+ for supports for webs or
    sheets or paper to hold the paper in position to be fed into and from a
    typewriting machine.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclass 482 for a toy table.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 411+ for a work supporting table of an
    abrading machine.

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, subclasses 4+ for a table or
    gameboard specifically adapted for playing the games of billiards or pool,
    subclass 475 for game apparatus for playing the game of table tennis, and
    subclass 496 for a table tennis table, per se.

    601,    Surgery:  Kinesitherapy, subclasses 49+ for couches, chairs, or
    other supports which vibrate as a whole while treating the body.


CLS 108/1
TXT Device under the class definition wherein the surface is operably retained
    in at least one inclined position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 477+ for adjustable work tables; and subclass
    477.2 for slatted saw tables.

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 171 for a tilting work table of a wood
    slicing machine.


CLS 108/2
TXT Device under subclass 1 provided with means to urge the supporting surface
    about its tilt axis.


CLS 108/3
TXT Device under subclass 1 wherein the supporting surface comprises a
    plurality of components, which components are tiltably adjustable relative
    to each other.


CLS 108/4
TXT Device under subclass 1 in which the surface is tiltable about more than
    one axis.


CLS 108/5
TXT Device under subclass 1 in which the surface is additionally movable in a
    direction parallel to a horizontal plane.


CLS 108/6
TXT Device under subclass 1 wherein the surface is selectively retainable about
    a horizontal axis in a plurality of inclined positions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for a device tiltable additionally about another axis.


CLS 108/7
TXT Device under subclass 6 wherein the surface is tilted by means employing a
    mechanical advantage.


CLS 108/8
TXT Device under subclass 6 wherein opposite edges of the surface alternately
    are above or below a horizontal plane.


CLS 108/9
TXT Device under subclass 6 comprising a surface-engaging,
    inclination-adjusting link in a spatial relation with the axis about which
    the surface tilts.


CLS 108/10
TXT Device under subclass 9 wherein the tilt axis may be retained at various
    heights.


CLS 108/11
TXT Device under the class definition having means or parts capable of
    structural rearrangement or modification by addition, removal or,
    reassembly of one or more of the parts to provide another structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for an invertible surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclass 3 for a table which by inversion or manipulation of
    parts may be converted to a bed, or a table which has a bed stored within
    and withdrawable from it.

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclasses 11+ for a table
    convertible to a carrying case.

    248,    Supports, subclass 155 for a cane convertible to a table.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 144 for a
    hand-held tray convertible to table.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 241 for a cabinet
    convertible to a table.


CLS 108/12
TXT Device under subclass 11 wherein the support is rearranged relative to the
    element supported.


CLS 108/13
TXT Device under subclass 11 wherein (1) a primary surface is moved to a nonuse
    position with a secondary surface exposed or movable to a position of use,
    or (2) a primary surface is removed and replaced by another surface having
    usually a different function.


CLS 108/14
TXT Device under subclass 11 in which the other structure is a receptacle.


CLS 108/15
TXT Device under subclass 11 wherein the other structure comprises the surface
    in a vertical plane.


CLS 108/16
TXT Device under subclass 11 in which the other structure is a rack.


CLS 108/17
TXT Device under subclass 11 comprising a plurality of surfaces movable from a
    terraced or superposed relationship to an arrangement wherein all the
    surfaces rest in the same horizontal plane.


CLS 108/18
TXT Device under subclass 11 wherein the other structure has the support in an
    inoperative position.


CLS 108/19
TXT Device under subclass 18 in which the support comprises at least two sets
    of legs of different lengths, one set being in an inoperative position when
    the other set is in an operative position, and wherein the sets of legs
    support the surface at different elevations above a reference plane.


CLS 108/20
TXT Device under the class definition provided with motor means designed to
    impart motion to the surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 16 for a powered table for
    operating attachments and auxiliaries.

    104,    Railways, subclasses 35+ for a railway turntable, and subclasses
    48+ for a transfer table.

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 47+ for a cigarette- making machine having a
    movable table.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 326+ for horizontal rotating tables
    carrying metal casting molds.

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, subclass 9 for a
    drawbridge, turntable, or other transfer table with means for maintaining
    the bridge or table or a vehicle thereon in electrical connection with a
    relatively fixed point exterior to the bridge or table.


CLS 108/21
TXT Device under subclass 20 wherein the means imparts motion to the surface in
    interrupted sequence.


CLS 108/22
TXT Device under subclass 20 in which the movement of the surface is along a
    fixed roundabout course.


CLS 108/23
TXT Device under the class definition provided with a source of artificial
    light.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, appropriate subclasses for other structure with
    illumination, particularly subclasses 127+ for furniture.


CLS 108/24
TXT Device under the class definition having fluid drainage means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 604+ for an invalid bed with a toilet, subclass
    695 for a mattress which includes a toilet means, and subclass 606 for a
    surgical table combined with a drain.


CLS 108/25
TXT Device under the class definition in combination with an upwardly opening
    container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for a surface convertible to a receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclass 111 for an ironing table
    combined with a receptacle to support fabric beneath the table; e.g., work
    catcher.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 33 for a device in the form of
    shallow chambers provided with means for causing a circulation of steam or
    hot water therein, whereby the top plates or receptacles placed thereon are
    heated.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 694+ for a receptacle in combination with
    miscellaneous attachments therefor, where the combination is not otherwise
    provided for.  See the search notes thereto.

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclass 309 for tables or supporting
    surfaces having structure which facilitates the playing of a game thereon.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 114 for a showcase, subclass
    140.1 for a counter, subclasses 235.2+ for a stool or chair in combination
    with a cabinet structure, subclass 237 for a cabinet structure with a
    table, subclass 277 for an enclosure with a separable table, subclasses
    280+ for an enclosure with a continuously external table, and subclasses
    313+ for an enclosure with a table pivotable to a nonhorizontal position.


CLS 108/26
TXT Device under subclass 25 wherein the container is removable, or is movable
    relative to the surface.


CLS 108/26.2
TXT Device under subclass 26 wherein the container is intended to hold ink and
    to receive the tool of a writing implement for the application of ink
    thereto.


CLS 108/27
TXT Device under the class definition having an upright barrier adjacent to an
    edge of the surface.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are devices typed in the art as "splashbacks".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55.1,   for an industrial platform with load- confining means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 137 for a showcase with a
    counter guard, and subclasses 140.1+ for a counter with a guard.


CLS 108/28
TXT Device under the class definition including nonclass means for supporting
    articles relative to the surface of the device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclasses 104+ for a device
    involving an ironing function for supporting a flat iron relative to an
    ironing board, and subclass 111 for ironing tables combined with devices to
    support fabric beneath the table; e.g., work catchers.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 281 for a cabinet and table.


CLS 108/29
TXT Device under subclass 28 wherein the diverse support comprises a slender
    elongated member.


CLS 108/30
TXT Device under subclass 29 wherein the rod or bar is supported at one end
    only, and has its other end curved or bent into a hook shape.


CLS 108/31
TXT Device under subclass 29 wherein the rod or bar is positioned above the
    surface.


CLS 108/32
TXT Device under subclass 28 wherein the diverse support comprises a surface in
    a sloping relationship with the horizontal surface.


CLS 108/33
TXT Device under the class definition which includes structure forming an
    enclosure for part or all of the surface or support in an inoperative or
    stored condition.

    (1)     Note.  The enclosing structure may function also as a part of the
    support for the surface when in an operative condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     for superposed surfaces which invert to coplanar position exposing
    another surface.

    65+,    for plural related coplanar surfaces wherein one surface is always
    available for use, but another surface is movable to a stored position
    beneath the one surface.

    93,     for terraced surfaces wherein one surface is concealed beneath
    another surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclass 159.1 for cases for upending beds.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 277 for a cabinet associated
    with a leg-supported table which can be removed from and used independently
    of the cabinet.


CLS 108/34
TXT Device under subclass 33 wherein the surface collapses to form a
    substantially enclosed container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25+,    for a surface combined with a receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclasses 11+ for a trunk,
    traveling bag, or camp kit box provided with space for storing disparate
    articles and which converts to a table or desk.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 144 for a
    handheld tray convertible to and from table.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 231 for a cabinet combined
    with a drafting board, and subclasses 281+ for a cabinet combined with a
    continuously projecting shelf or table.


CLS 108/35
TXT Device under subclass 34 wherein the support is hingedly joined to the
    surface or to its reinforcing structure.


CLS 108/36
TXT Device under subclass 35 wherein the support includes legs which are
    connected in pairs for simultaneous movement.


CLS 108/37
TXT Device under subclass 33 having biasing means to move or assist in moving
    the surface to or from a housed inoperative position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 164.1+ for an upending bed having a
    counterbalancing spring, and subclass 166.1 for an upending bed having a
    counterbalancing weight.


CLS 108/38
TXT Device under subclass 33 wherein the surface in an inoperative position
    completes one wall of the enclosure.


CLS 108/39
TXT Device under subclass 33 wherein the surface is selectively positionable
    relative to the housing.


CLS 108/40
TXT Device under subclass 33 wherein the surface is directly connected to the
    housing wall by a hinge which is slidable relative to the support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for a housed slidably hinged surface which adjusts to plural
    operative positions.


CLS 108/41
TXT Device under subclass 33 wherein the surface is housed in an enclosure made
    up of elements of the support.


CLS 108/42
TXT Device under the class definition with (1) means having a function external
    to the subject matter of this class, (2) combined with another static
    constructional installation, or (3) related to a particular geographic
    feature, wherein there is included only enough structure foreign to this
    class to associate it with the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134+,   for a folding laterally attached surface.

    152,    for a surface laterally attached to its support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 36.4 for a
    combination of a horizontal surface type of article of furniture and more
    building structure than is required to support or house the article.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclass 128 for
    workman-supporting platform mounted on the inside wall of a shaft.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclass 163 for a table mounted behind a seat,
    and subclass 174 for a table mounted in front of a seat.


CLS 108/43
TXT Device under subclass 42 including means for supporting the surface from
    some part of a person's body or for accommodating a portion of the body
    when so supported.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclass 270 for a body or belt attached package or article carrier.


CLS 108/44
TXT Device under subclass 42 comprising means to attach the device to a vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 94 and 118+ for a crib or a bed attached to a
    vehicle.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclasses 400+ for a vehicle
    supported package and article carrier.


CLS 108/45
TXT Device under subclass 44 wherein the vehicle structure is an instrument
    panel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclasses 400+ for a
    vehicle-supported package or article carrier, especially subclass 483 where
    the article carrier is attached to the dashboard of the vehicle.


CLS 108/46
TXT Device under subclass 44 wherein the means includes structure which extends
    over a window sill of the vehicle door, and into a space which accommodates
    the window.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclasses 400+ for a
    vehicle-supported package or article carrier, especially subclass 482 where
    the article carrier is attached to the window or window frame.


CLS 108/47
TXT Device under subclass 42 wherein the surface rests upon the top edge of an
    upright wall, and has a clamp or brace which engages the side of the wall
    below the top.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11+,    for a similar device additionally provided with legs for supporting
    the device on a horizontal surface.


CLS 108/48
TXT Device under subclass 42 in which the surface is laterally attached to an
    upright wall and is retained in operative position by a floor- engaging
    prop or leg member.


CLS 108/49
TXT Device under subclass 42 having its support related to specific features of
    a bed.

    (1)     Note.  Specific features of a bed include laterally spaced side
    rails, and a structural relationship between the side rails and the head
    and/or foot structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclass 507.1 for a bed-supported surface wherein the bed
    structure is in some way altered to receive and support the surface.


CLS 108/50.01
TXT WITH MACHINE (I.E., COPY MACHINE, TYPEWRITER, ETC.):

    Device under class definition adapted to support a mechanical apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports: Cabinet Structure, subclasses 208.1+ for cabinet
    structure for key-board writing machine, subclasses 208.5+ for cabinet
    structure for sewing machine.


CLS 108/50.02
TXT HAVING MEANS FOR SUPPORTING AN ELECTRICAL  COMPONENT (E.G., WIRE,  OUTPUT
    JACK, ETC.):

    Device under class definition adapted to support an electrical element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports: Cabinet Structure, subclasses 223.1+for cabinet having
    structure to accommodate an electrical device or component.


CLS 108/50.11
TXT COMBINED:

    Device under class definition in combination with structure having another
    function or serving to perfect the device for its intended function.


CLS 108/50.12
TXT With umbrella structure:

    Device under subclass 50.11 in combination with structure of an umbrella
    (e.g., umbrella shaft, canopy, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, for particular umbrella structure.


    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 184.1+, for chair or seat with weather
    shield or insect protector.


CLS 108/50.13
TXT With heating or air moving means:

    Device under subclass 50.11 in combination with a heating source or a fan.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 258 for refrigeration apparatus combined
    with a non-cooled work surface, and subclass 458 for similar apparatus
    including an access surface and cooling means  therefore.

    312,    Supports: Cabinet Structure, subclass 236 for cabinet structure
    with heating, cooling,  or heat exchange means.


CLS 108/50.14
TXT With head, arm, leg, or foot rest:

    Device under subclass 50.11 in combination with a means for supporting a
    user's head, arm,  leg,  or foot.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 391+, 411.2+, 423.1+, for head, arm,
    knee, leg, or foot rest.

    601,    Surgery: Kinesitherapy, subclasses 24+ for treatment table or
    surface with head, arm, leg, or foot support.


CLS 108/50.15
TXT With mirror:

    Device under subclass 50.11 in combination with structure of a mirror
    (e.g., mirror frame, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclass 185 for chair or seat with mirror.

    312,    Supports: Cabinet Structure, subclasses 224+for cabinet structure
    with mirror.


CLS 108/50.16
TXT With walker:

    Device under subclass 50.11 in combination with a means for assisting a
    user to walk ( e.g., invalid walker, baby walker,etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 5+, for chair or seat with
    occupant-propelled walker or skater frame.


CLS 108/50.17
TXT With a roll:

    Device under subclass 50.11  in combination with a cylinder serving as a
    core upon which something is rolled up.


CLS 108/50.18
TXT With liquid conduit or gas duct:

    Device under subclass 50.11 in combination with a pipe or channel  for
    conveying fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports: Cabinet Structure, subclasses 31+for cabinet structure
    with gas or vapor treatment material, subclass 209 for cabinet structure
    with laboratory, dental, barber, or medical structure, and subclass 229 for
    cabinet structure with liquid drain, dust collector, or guard.


CLS 108/51.11
TXT INDUSTRIAL PLATFORM:

    Device under class definition wherein the support surface is provided with
    supporting means (e.g., a leg, runner, etc.) whereby a load may be
    supported relatively close to a floor; and having means to receive handling
    means beneath said surface or load.


CLS 108/51.3
TXT Device under subclass 51.11 which is formed from a sheet of semirigid
    foldable material, such as cardboard or the like, which has sufficient
    strength and rigidity to maintain the shape into which it is bent or folded.

    (1)     Note.  The platforms of the type classified herein may or may not
    be a "knockdown" type of platform.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51.11,  for other foldable devices which are not made of semirigid material.


CLS 108/52.1
TXT Device under subclass 51.11 wherein the surface is provided with grooves,
    passages, or the like, allowing a handler to be inserted intermediate the
    load and the support.

    (1)     Note.  Platforms of this character are typed in the art as
    "load-transfer" or "take-it-or-leave-it" platforms.


CLS 108/53.1
TXT Device under subclass 51.11 wherein one device is provided with means which
    may cooperate with a second similar device whereby a plurality of said
    devices may be placed one upon the other in a stacked relationship.


CLS 108/53.3
TXT Device under subclass 53.1 whereby said means is in the form of a recess
    adapted to receive a part of a second device and thus form a stack of
    superposed devices of less vertical height than the sum of the heights of
    the individual devices comprising the stack if each is stood separately on
    a floor.


CLS 108/53.5
TXT Device under subclass 53.1 wherein the means permits the stacking of a
    plurality of devices one upon another so that the supporting surface of
    each device in the stack may support a load.


CLS 108/54.1
TXT Device under subclass 51.11 provided with means whereby the usable
    load-supporting surface of said device may be selectively increased or
    decreased to accommodate loads of various sizes.


CLS 108/55.1
TXT Device under subclass 51.11 provided with means to prevent a load thereon
    from shifting about or falling therefrom.


CLS 108/55.3
TXT Device under subclass 55.1 wherein the means is provided on or in the
    load-receiving surface and projects therefrom or is recessed therein to
    restrain the article against relative movement therewith.


CLS 108/55.5
TXT Device under subclass 55.1 provided with means to receive the means which
    prevents a shift of the load, said latter means to be adapted to engage
    over the load or a portion thereof to hold said load against the supporting
    surface.


CLS 108/56.1
TXT Device under subclass 51.11 constructed to be (1) readily set up from
    unassembled parts, (2) readily disjointed into unassembled parts, or (3)
    foldable from or into a structure of reduced volume.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51.3,   for devices of the type found in this subclass but which are made
    of foldable semirigid material.


CLS 108/56.3
TXT Device under subclass 56.1 wherein the support for the support surface is
    (1) readily attachable to, or (2) readily separable from the support
    surface.


CLS 108/57.1
TXT Device under subclass 51.11 wherein the platform is reversible to expose
    alternative load-supporting surfaces.


CLS 108/57.12
TXT Including shock-absorbing means:

    Device under subclass 51.11 including a means for damping vibration.


CLS 108/57.13
TXT For supporting a barrel:

    Device under subclass 51.11 having structure adapted for bearing a
    cylindrical vessel.


CLS 108/57.14
TXT Wire pallet:

    Device under subclass 51.11 including structure made of elongated rods.


CLS 108/57.15
TXT Including a roller or track contacting area:

    Device under subclass 57.11 provided with a wheel or a means for allowing
    the support surface to be positioned on a railing system.


CLS 108/57.16
TXT Load-contacting surface having upwardly projected edge:

    Device under subclass 51.11 wherein the support surface includes  a side
    having an upwardly projected ridge.


CLS 108/57.17
TXT Load-contacting surface having parallel spaced-apart support members:

    Device under subclass 51.11 including plural load-contacting elements
    arranged parallel to  and at a distance from one another.


CLS 108/57.18
TXT Corrugated or grooved support members:

    Device under subclass 57.17 wherein the load-contacting elements are
    provided with either alternating grooves and ridges or an elongated
    depression.


CLS 108/57.19
TXT Support members interlock with parallel crossing stringers by notched
    joints:

    Device under subclass 57.17 including plural lower support members arranged
    parallel to one another and extending transversely to the load-contacting
    elements; wherein either the lower support members or the load-contacting
    elements are provided with cut-out structure  adapted for interlocking with
    a structure of the corresponding load-contacting elements or lower support
    members.


CLS 108/57.20
TXT Including elongated binding means extending perpendicular to and engaging
    upper surface of support members (e.g., flange, strap, etc.):

    Device under subclass 57.17 including a securing means having a length
    which extends  perpendicular to the length of the load-contacting elements
    and adapted to contact with a load contacting surface of each of the load-
    contacting elements.


CLS 108/57.21
TXT Load-contacting surface having parallel support members in juxtaposed
    position:

    Device under subclass 51.11 including plural load-contacting elements
    arranged side by side and parallel  to one another.


CLS 108/57.22
TXT Tubular or channel-shaped support members:

    Device under subclass 57.21 wherein the load-contacting elements each has
    an elongated hollow body or U-like cross section.


CLS 108/57.23
TXT Including one-piece elongated channel bar engaging upper and lower surfaces
    of support members:

    Device under subclass 57.21  including an elongated structure having a
    U-shape cross section adapted to  contact a load-contacting surface and a
    lower surface of each of the load-contacting elements.


CLS 108/57.24
TXT Including elongated angle bar having horizontal flange engaging upper
    surface of support members:

    Device under subclass 57.21 including an L-shape structure having a
    horizontal part which extends traverse to the length of the load-contacting
    elements and contacts a load-contacting surface of each of the
    load-contacting elements.


CLS 108/57.25
TXT Having plastic load-contacting surface:

    Device under subclass 51.11 wherein the support surface is made of a group
    of synthetic or natural organic materials that may be shaped when soft and
    then hardened.


CLS 108/57.26
TXT Formed by joining mating spacers of identical pallet halves together:

    Device under subclass 57.25 comprising a pair of similar surfaces each has
    plural support pillars; and wherein the similar surfaces are connected
    together at the corresponding support pillars.


CLS 108/57.27
TXT Load-contacting surface formed by bonded plastic sheets:

    Device under subclass 57.25 wherein the support surface includes plural
    sheets each made of a group of synthetic or natural organic materials, and
    wherein the sheets are secured face-to-face on one another.


CLS 108/57.28
TXT One-piece molded pallet:

    Device under subclass 57.25 wherein the device is shaped into one single
    unit when in a molten state.


CLS 108/57.29
TXT Having corrugated, grooved, or notched load-contacting surface:

    Device under subclass 51.11 wherein the support surface is provided with
    either alternating grooves and ridges, an elongated depression,  or  a
    cut-out structure (e.g., hole, etc.).


CLS 108/57.30
TXT One-piece bent sheet metal:

    Device under subclass 57.29 wherein the support surface is made of a single
    piece of metal which is  bent to form a groove,  or  alternating grooves
    and ridges.


CLS 108/57.31
TXT Including tubular support:

    Device under subclass 51.11 wherein the supporting means includes an
    elongated hollow member.


CLS 108/57.32
TXT Metal load-contacting surface:

    Device under subclass 51.11 wherein the support surface is made of metal.


CLS 108/57.33
TXT Having support spacer between a load-contacting surface and a base member:

    Device under subclass 51.11 wherein the supporting means includes a base
    element and an intermediate element, wherein the intermediate element has a
    length spanning between the support surface and the base element.


CLS 108/57.34
TXT Laminated load-contacting surface:

    Device under subclass 51.11 wherein the support surface is provided with
    plurality of superimposed layers  of material.


CLS 108/59
TXT Device under the class definition in which the spatial or functional
    relationship of two or more horizontal surfaces is involved.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 130+ for plural
    platforms having a common support.


CLS 108/60
TXT Device under subclass 59 comprising a vertically disposed divider member
    separating at least one of the surfaces into distinct areas.


CLS 108/61
TXT Device under subclass 60 wherein the divider member is selectively movable
    along the surface, and in the direction of the plane of the surface.


CLS 108/62
TXT Device under subclass 59 wherein the surface is reversible to expose either
    side thereof in a horizontal, article-supporting position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57.1,   for an invertible industrial platform.


CLS 108/63
TXT Device under subclass 62 wherein a portion of the surface is situated above
    another portion thereof, and is interconnected therewith to move to a
    horizontally juxtaposed position.


CLS 108/64
TXT Device under subclass 59 comprising a series of individual self-supporting
    surfaces connected in side-by-side coplanar relationship.


CLS 108/65
TXT Device under subclass 59 provided with an auxiliary surface which may be
    added to the main planar surface in the same horizontal plane therewith to
    selectively increase the effective support area in the plane of the main
    surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54.1,   for an adjustable industrial platform.


CLS 108/66
TXT Device under subclass 65 wherein the addition comprises a section which
    increases the effective surface area while either (1) retaining a generally
    circular form of the main surface, or (2) providing a generally circular
    form for the whole surface area.


CLS 108/67
TXT Device under subclass 65 in which the leaf insert is made up of (1) a
    flexible textile, or other flexible sheet material, or (2) a plurality of
    slats or panels interconnected for relative motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34+,    for a housing formed by a collapsible surface.

    63,     for other movably interconnected panels which invert to permit
    either side of at least one panel to be exposed in a horizontal,
    article-supporting position.


CLS 108/68
TXT Device under subclass 67 wherein the flexible insert follows an angular or
    curved guide to an inoperative position.


CLS 108/69
TXT Device under subclass 65 in which the area of the main surface may be
    increased by the addition of an endleaf or panel adjacent to the outer edge
    thereof.


CLS 108/70
TXT Device under subclass 69 wherein the surface is lowered into a plane
    coplanar with the extended leaf or panel.


CLS 108/71
TXT Device under subclass 69 provided with means to move the endleaf or panel
    from a lower level position to a raised position coplanar with the main
    surface.


CLS 108/72
TXT Device under subclass 71 comprising a linkage mechanism operatively
    connected to the endleaf or panel, and to movable supporting structure.


CLS 108/73
TXT Device under subclass 71 wherein the means includes a relatively movable
    cam and slide, or runner.


CLS 108/74
TXT Device under subclass 73 in which the main surface is moved out of the path
    of the leaf, or panel, by and as the latter moves between extended and
    nonextended positions.


CLS 108/75
TXT Device under subclass 73 in which the camming means comprises a slot, or a
    groove in either a slide member, or a guide member with a laterally
    extending pin on the other of said members slidable therein.


CLS 108/76
TXT Device under subclass 69 wherein the endleaf of panel is movable from an
    extended lower level position to a raised position coplanar with the main
    surface.


CLS 108/77
TXT Device under subclass 69 in which the extension surface is hinged to the
    main surface, and which may be rotated about its hinge axis to a depending
    nonuse position.


CLS 108/78
TXT Device under subclass 77 provided with means movable in a plane underlying
    and parallel to the surface member to a position engaging and supporting
    the leaf in extended position.


CLS 108/79
TXT Device under subclass 78 in which the leaf supporting and engaging means
    includes a ground-engaging member.


CLS 108/80
TXT Device under subclass 77 supported by means extending from a point on the
    underside of the leaf downwardly and inwardly to a point on the support.


CLS 108/81
TXT Device under subclass 80 in which the brace is pivoted intermediate the
    ends thereof.


CLS 108/82
TXT Device under subclass 80 provided with means to release the brace from its
    supporting position.


CLS 108/83
TXT Device under subclass 65 wherein the auxiliary surface is stored relative
    to the main surface, and is insertable intermediate end sections of the
    main surface, the end sections being movable toward each other into
    abutting contact.


CLS 108/84
TXT Device under subclass 83 provided with means to raise the leaf from its
    stored position to its position coplanar with the main surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67+,    wherein the insert comprises a plurality of hingedly interconnected
    panels.

    71+,    for endleaf elevating mechanism.


CLS 108/85
TXT Device under subclass 84 wherein the intermediate leaf insert is elevated
    from its stored position into the plane of the surface in response to
    separation of the end sections.


CLS 108/86
TXT Device under subclass 83 in which said leaf of panel when in nonuse
    position is stored and substantially hidden within the confines of said
    device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33+,    for a surface with an independent housing.

    67+,    wherein the concealed leaf comprises a plurality of hingedly
    interconnected panels.


CLS 108/87
TXT Device under subclass 83 having interconnecting means between the end
    portions of the surfaces causing one end portion to move relative to the
    other when force is applied to the interconnecting means or to one end
    portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137+,   for mere supporting surfaces which may be shifted horizontally.


CLS 108/88
TXT Device under subclass 83 wherein a pedestal is laterally separable into
    individual portions, each of which carries a respective end section.


CLS 108/89
TXT Device under subclass 83 comprising means for securing the surface portions
    together after they have been drawn against each other or against an
    inserted leaf portion.


CLS 108/90
TXT Device under subclass 59 wherein an auxiliary surface may be removably
    secured in a covering relationship to a primary surface.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are table covers, per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69+,    for a surface adapted to be increased in area by addition to its
    end.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, various subclasses for
    sheet material which may be used as a cover.


CLS 108/91
TXT Device under subclass 59 wherein one surface is storable within or atop
    another surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33+,    for a surface with an independent housing.

    34+,    for a device wherein the housing is formed by a collapsible surface.

    53.1+,  for nested or stacked industrial platforms.


CLS 108/92
TXT Device under subclass 59 arranged in a stepped relationship with an edge of
    one surface protruding beyond the edge of another surface.


CLS 108/93
TXT Device under subclass 92 wherein one of the surfaces is stored beneath
    another surface.


CLS 108/94
TXT Device under subclass 92 wherein at least one of the surfaces revolves
    about an axis.


CLS 108/95
TXT Device under subclass 94 wherein at least one of the surfaces may be
    selectively positioned upwardly or downwardly.


CLS 108/96
TXT Device under subclass 92 wherein at least one of the surfaces may be
    selectively positioned upwardly or downwardly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95,     for a vertically adjustable rotatable terraced arrangement.


CLS 108/97
TXT Device under subclass 92 wherein an auxiliary surface member is releasably
    connected to a primary surface member.


CLS 108/98
TXT Device under subclass 97 wherein the auxiliary surface is provided with a
    supporting leg member which also functions as a releasable connector.


CLS 108/99
TXT Device under subclass 92 relating to pivoting at least one surface relative
    to another surface or to the support.


CLS 108/100
TXT Device under subclass 99 wherein the rear edge of one surface is in the
    same vertical plane as the front edge of a superposed surface.


CLS 108/101
TXT Device under subclass 92 constructed to be readily set up from, or
    disjointed into, unassembled elements.


CLS 108/102
TXT Device under subclass 59 wherein at least one of the surfaces is movable in
    a plane normal to the vertical.


CLS 108/103
TXT Device under subclass 102 wherein at least one of the surfaces turns about
    an axis normal to the horizontal plane.


CLS 108/104
TXT Device under subclass 103 wherein the surfaces are concentrically related
    to each other, the outer surface being fixed, and the inner surface being
    rotatable relative thereto.


CLS 108/105
TXT Device under subclass 103 wherein at least one of the surfaces may be
    selectively positioned upwardly or downwardly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95,     for vertically adjustable rotatable terraced surfaces.


CLS 108/106
TXT Device under subclass 59 wherein at least one of the surfaces may be
    selectively positioned upwardly or downwardly.


CLS 108/107
TXT Device under subclass 106 wherein the adjustment is brought about by
    separation of the surface, and the support and reassembly in a different
    position.


CLS 108/108
TXT Device under subclass 107 wherein the support comprises a member supported
    only at one end.


CLS 108/109
TXT Device under subclass 108 wherein plural members are detachably connected
    to facing sides of upright structures at opposite sides of the surface and
    project toward each other.


CLS 108/110
TXT Device under subclass 107 wherein the support has openings or protuberances
    with which portions of the surfaces are secured by interfitting engagement.


CLS 108/115
TXT Device under the class definition in which the surface and the support are
    hingedly related.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     for this structure with a housing.

    65+,    for an extension leaf having a folding feature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 174+ for a folding bedstead.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 152+ for a unitary
    foldable scaffold.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 195+ for a folding rack.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 166+ for a folding plural leg stand of more
    general utility.

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclass 285 for collapsible boards
    which are intended to be used in a board game.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 16.1+ for a folding chair.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclass 65 for a member pivotally
    connected to a rigid corner and subclasses 52+ for articulated joints in
    general.


CLS 108/116
TXT Device under subclass 115 with means to fix the surface in different
    vertical positions.


CLS 108/117
TXT Device under subclass 116 wherein the support in connected to the surface
    by a pivot movable along a guide.


CLS 108/118
TXT Device under subclass 115 wherein the support comprises legs which
    mutually, pivotally intersect intermediate their ends.


CLS 108/119
TXT Device under subclass 118 wherein the surface is connected by a fixed pivot
    at one point to the leg structure, and disengagebly supported by the leg
    structure at another point.


CLS 108/120
TXT Device under subclass 118 wherein the surface is connected to the leg
    structure by a pivot which reciprocates in a guide.


CLS 108/121
TXT Device under subclass 115 in which the surface is supported by legs which
    are all foldable in the same direction on parallel axes.


CLS 108/122
TXT Device under subclass 121 wherein the pivotal connections of the legs to
    the surface are coaxial.


CLS 108/123
TXT Device under subclass 121 wherein the legs are interconnected by a
    generally elongated link member simultaneously actuating all the legs upon
    movement of any one of the legs.


CLS 108/124
TXT Device under subclass 115 wherein the surface is pivoted at one point to
    the support, and releasably supported by the support at a point remote from
    the fixed pivot.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    for similar structure having mutually pivoted crossed legs.


CLS 108/125
TXT Device under subclass 115 in which the surface is supported by legs which
    fold along the perimeter of said surface.


CLS 108/126
TXT Device under subclass 125 provided with means cooperable therewith to cause
    the legs to be folded either simultaneously or in succession.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123,    for similarly actuated devices wherein all legs pivot toward a
    common surface edge.

    130,    for similarly actuated devices wherein paired legs fold axially
    parallel to surface edges.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 169 and 171 for stand legs in which means is
    provided to make all the legs move when one is moved.


CLS 108/127
TXT Device under subclass 115 wherein the legs fold parallel to the plane of
    the surface, and inwardly of all the surface edges toward the center of
    said surface.


CLS 108/128
TXT Device under subclass 115 wherein the surface is held in operative position
    by members pivoted outwardly of the support, and extending to a juncture
    with said surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 434+ for similar structures for supports other
    than horizontal planar surface.


CLS 108/129
TXT Device under subclass 115 wherein the surface is supported by legs pivoted
    on an axis substantially parallel to first opposed edges of the surface,
    and foldable to a stored or inoperative position to rest substantially
    parallel with the second opposed edges of the surface.


CLS 108/130
TXT Device under subclass 129 wherein the legs are in pairs, and an actuating
    mechanism is provided to cause said pairs to be folded either in unison or
    in succession.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for a surface which is collapsible to form a housing, and wherein
    the support includes legs connected in pairs.

    123,    for conjointly actuated legs wherein all legs pivot toward a common
    surface edge.

    126,    for conjointly actuated legs which pivot perimetrically of the
    surface.


CLS 108/131
TXT Device under subclass 129 wherein the leg pairs may be held in a
    predetermined position against unintentional movement.


CLS 108/132
TXT Device under subclass 131 wherein the leg pairs may be held in their
    inoperative position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11+,    for a surface used as a hand tray when the legs are held folded.


CLS 108/133
TXT Device under subclass 131 in which the means is a spring, or is spring
    actuated.


CLS 108/134
TXT Device under subclass 115 wherein the surface is mounted to one side of the
    support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for a similar device attached to the top and side of an upright
    support.

    48,     for a similar surface having a wall and floor relationship.


CLS 108/135
TXT Device under subclass 134 wherein the surface is readily removable from the
    support.


CLS 108/136
TXT Device under the class definition provided with means to urge the surface
    in a predetermined direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for means to urge the surface about its tilt axis.

    37,     for means to urge the surface to or from a housed position.

    71+,    for an extension endleaf elevating mechanism.

    84+,    for an extension intermediate leaf elevating mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 560+ for resilient supports, and subclasses
    637+ for machinery supports.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 307+ for a resiliently supported chair
    or seat.


CLS 108/137
TXT Device under the class definition wherein the surface may be shifted
    horizontally relative to the support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5+,     for a tiltable surface having horizontal adjustment.

    20+,    for a surface having power means for moving it.

    102+,   for plural related surfaces having horizontal adjustment.


CLS 108/138
TXT Device under subclass 137 having means concurrently to effect vertical
    adjustment of the surface relative to the horizontal movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136,    for similar devices in which the surface member is biased in a
    horizontal plane.


CLS 108/139
TXT Device under subclass 137 in which the surface turns about an axis which is
    normal to a horizontal plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for a housed surface having this type of adjustment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 466 for a revolving
    surface used in treating dairy food.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 264+ for
    holding a rotating storage medium element in operative position.


CLS 108/140
TXT Device under subclass 139 provided with means for additionally moving the
    surface in a straight line.


CLS 108/141
TXT Device under subclass 139 wherein the surface may be selectively positioned
    in a direction normal to a horizontal plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95,     for vertically adjustable rotatable terraced surfaces.

    105,    for other plural related rotatable surfaces which are vertically
    adjustable.


CLS 108/142
TXT Device under subclass 139 wherein means are provided to selectively prevent
    or resist the rotation of the surface.


CLS 108/143
TXT Device under subclass 137 wherein the surface is mounted upon a slide and
    guide-type bearing member.


CLS 108/144.11
TXT VERTICALLY ADJUSTABLE:

    Device under class  definition including structure which allows the support
    surface to be retained in a plurality of vertically spaced positions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for a tilting table having a vertically adjustable axis.

    12,     for a convertible device wherein the support is rearranged relative
    to the supported surface, and which may include vertical adjustability.

    19,     for a convertible device in which the support comprises at least
    two sets of legs of different lengths, one set being in an inoperative
    position,  and wherein the sets of legs support the surface at different
    elevations above a reference plane.

    40,     for a surface which is slidably hinged to a housing wall.

    95,     for rotatable terraced surfaces which are vertically adjustable.

    96,     for terraced surfaces  which are vertically adjustable.

    105,    for plural related rotatable surfaces which are vertically
    adjustable.

    106+,   for a folding surface having vertical adjustability.

    138,    for a surface which is capable of concurrent horizontal and
    vertical adjustments.

    141,    for a surface which rotates about a verticle axis  and has vertical
    adjustability.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclass 611 for vertically adjustable body-supporting
    elements in invalid bed.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 477+ and 477.2, for sawing tables and
    adjustment therefor.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 141+ for a
    workman-supporting platform with elevating means.


CLS 108/145
TXT Device under subclass 144.11 comprising an intermediate member pivotally
    joining the surface and the support, which member may be swung from a
    horizontal or inclined position toward the vertical to lift said surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9+,     for a surface-adjusting link for a tiltable surface.

    72,     for elevating mechanism for an endleaf which includes a link.


CLS 108/146
TXT Device under subclass 144.11 wherein the surface is retained in its
    adjusted position by a bolt, pawl, latch, or other holding means which is
    urged into locking position by a spring element or other urging means.


CLS 108/147
TXT Device under subclass 144.11 in which the surface is lifted or raised by
    means which employs a mechanical advantage; e.g., gears or hydraulic motors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 404+ for a vertically adjustable standard-type
    stand having similar force-multiplying means.


CLS 108/147.11
TXT Shelf type:

    Device under subclass 144.11 wherein the support surface is  a thin
    platelike member fixed horizontally to a vertical surface or in a frame.


CLS 108/147.12
TXT Including means for securing a corner of shelf to a vertical tubular post:

    Device under subclass 147.11 including an elongated hollow upright support
    pole and a means for fastening a corner of the thin platelike member  to
    the upright support pole.


CLS 108/147.13
TXT Including corner sleeve:

    Device under subclass 147.12 wherein the fastening means includes a collar
    member adapted to embrace the upright support pole.


CLS 108/147.14
TXT Including corner clamp:

    Device under subclass 147.12 wherein the fastening means includes movable
    opposed  parts; and wherein the corner of the thin platelike member is
    affixed to the upright support pole by urging the opposite parts closer
    together.


CLS 108/147.15
TXT Attached to corner post:

    Device under subclass 147.11 wherein the thin platelike member includes a
    corner adapted to be secured to an upright support post.


CLS 108/147.16
TXT Having shelf-supporting means mounted between parallel spaced-apart upright
    walls:

    Device under subclass  147.11 including a pair of parallel vertical
    partitions and means secured to the partitions adapted to support the thin
    platelike member in a horizontal position and between the verticle
    partitions.


CLS 108/147.17
TXT Including shelf supporting bracket:

    Device under subclass  147.11 including a shelf rest means mounted to and
    projecting from the vertical  surface or frame, and adapted to bear the
    weight of the thin platelike member.


CLS 108/147.18
TXT By clamping assembly:

    Device under subclass 144.11 including a securing means having two movable
    opposite parts adapted to hold either the support surface or the support
    structure in between them.


CLS 108/147.19
TXT By telescoping:

    Device under subclass 144.11 wherein the support structure includes two
    elongated hollow tubes  adapted to slide one within another; and wherein
    the support surface is vertically adjusted by sliding one tube relative to
    the other.


CLS 108/147.20
TXT And pivoting:

    Device under subclass 147.19 wherein the support surface is vertically
    adjusted by including a step of turning the support surface about an axis.


CLS 108/147.21
TXT Including fastening means passing through registered openings:

    Device under subclass 147.19  including aligned holes  in the hollow tubes;
    and a securing means  projecting through the aligned holes.


CLS 108/147.22
TXT By pivoting a leg:

    Device under subclass 144.11 wherein the support structure includes a leg
    having structure adapted to turn about a pivot point; and wherein the
    support surface can be vertically adjusted  by moving and adjusting the leg
    about the pivot point.


CLS 108/148
TXT Device under subclass 144.11 wherein the surface may be retained in an
    infinite number of use positions by means laterally engaging an even,
    imperforate face of the support.


CLS 108/149
TXT Device under the class definition wherein the structure which supports the
    surface extends upwardly of the surface to engage overhead supporting
    structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclass 150 for a suspended
    platform.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 317+ for a device for supporting an article by
    hanging it from an overhead support.


CLS 108/150
TXT Device under the class definition in which a standard forms the support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for an extension surface having a divided pedestal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 158+ for a vertical standard extending from a
    base.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 351.2 for a pedestal
    supported cabinet.


CLS 108/151
TXT Device under the class definition wherein the surface at least partially
    surrounds and is attached to the structure which supports it.


CLS 108/152
TXT Device under the class definition including means to mount the surface to
    one side of the support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134+,   for a similarly mounted surface which folds.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 187+ for a
    workman-supporting platform mounted exteriorly of a shaft.


CLS 108/153.1
TXT WITH SEPARABLE COMPONENTS:

    Device under class  definition including elements adapted to be detached
    from one another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56.1+,  for a collapsible industrial platform.

    97+,    for a detachable surface clamped to a stationary surface.

    101,    for terraced surfaces having separable components.

    107+,   for plural related surfaces which are removably mounted in plural
    positions.

    180+,   for plural related surfaces having separable components.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 165 for a plural legged stand which is readily
    taken apart usually without the removal of bolts,  etc.


CLS 108/154
TXT Device under subclass 153.1 wherein the connection between the surface and
    the support is operatively sustained by a fastener remote from said
    connection, which fastener also retains the components of the support in
    assembled relationship.


CLS 108/155
TXT Device under subclass 153.1 wherein the surface is removably attached to
    means joining the upper portions of leg structure, which means lies in a
    plane parallel to the plane of the surface.


CLS 108/156
TXT Device under subclass 153.1 comprising independent legs, (i.e., legs not
    interconnected with each other) sustaining a surface in operative position
    by a direct connection therewith or with an apron thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 188 for leg-attaching connections.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 230+ for a connection between a
    rod end and a transverse surface.


CLS 108/157.1
TXT Surface separable from support entity:

    Device under subclass 153.1 wherein the support surface is readily
    detachable from an assembled support unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90,     for a detachable enlarging or substitute surface.


CLS 108/157.11
TXT Attachable to armchair:

    Device under subclass 157.1 wherein the assembled support unit is a seating
    means having structure to support an arm of a user; and wherein the support
    surface is adapted to be secured to the arm-supporting structure of the
    seating means.


CLS 108/157.12
TXT Detachable ironing board:

    Device under subclass 157.1 wherein the detachable support surface is
    adapted to be used for ironing purpose.


CLS 108/157.13
TXT Detachable shelf- type:

    Device under subclass 157.1 wherein the support surface is a thin platelike
    member  detachably attached horizontally to a wall or in a frame.


CLS 108/157.14
TXT Formed from folded semi-rigid material (e.g., cardboard, fibrous paper
    material, etc.):

    Device under subclass  157.1 wherein the device is made from a folded sheet
    of material  having a degree of rigidity which is only rigid enough to
    support the device in an upright position.


CLS 108/157.15
TXT Table top having downwardly extended edge for directly contacting with and
    securing to an end of support entity:

    Device under subclass 157.1 wherein the support surface includes an edge
    having a downwardly turned flange; and wherein the assembled support unit
    includes an end adapted to be secured directly to the downwardly turned
    flange.


CLS 108/157.16
TXT Table top having notch means for receiving projection from support entity:

    Device under subclass 157.1 including a cut-out structure on the support
    surface and a tongue means either integral with or attached to the
    assembled support unit; wherein the support surface is attached to the
    assembled support unit by projecting the tongue means  into the cut-out
    structure.


CLS 108/157.17
TXT Table top solely connected to support entity by its own weight:

    Device under subclass 157.1 wherein the support surface is adapted to be
    placed upon the  assembled support unit without any securing means.


CLS 108/157.18
TXT Support entity having means with opposite members (e.g., slot, groove,
    clamping means, etc.) for holding an edge of table top therebetween:

    Device under subclass 157.1 wherein the assembled support unit includes a
    securing means  having opposite elements adapted to hold an edge of the
    support surface therebetween.


CLS 108/158
TXT Device under subclass 157.1 wherein the surface is removably fastened to
    the support by a threaded connector.


CLS 108/158.11
TXT Having means to detachably connect a tubular component to another component:

    Device under subclass 153.1 including an elongated hollow element and a
    means to  detachably secure the elongated  hollow element to another
    element.


CLS 108/158.12
TXT Separable components connected together by  interlocking parts (e.g.,
    groove and tongue, etc.):

    Device under subclass 153.1 including a connecting means having parts
    adapted to exactly fit and lock into each other.


CLS 108/158.13
TXT Separable components connected together by clamping means:

    Device under subclass 153.1 including a securing means having movable
    opposite parts; wherein the elements are secured together by moving the
    opposite parts closer together to tightly  hold one of the elements
    therebetween.


CLS 108/159
TXT Device under subclass 157.1 having means whereby the surface is removable
    from the support in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the surface,
    which means prevents lateral movement of the surface relative to the
    support.


CLS 108/159.11
TXT By latch or clamping means:

    Device under subclass 157.1 wherein the support surface is connected to the
    assembled support unit by a locking device having structure adapted to be
    slide or pivot into a catch means (e.g., groove, hole, etc.); or by a
    securing means having movable opposite parts that maybe brought closer
    together or further apart.


CLS 108/159.12
TXT Including folding legs:

    Device under subclass 157.1 wherein the assembled support entity includes
    plurality of pivotally connected legs adapted to be brought into a compact
    form by bending the legs relative to each other.


CLS 108/160
TXT Device under the class definition wherein the surface has hingedly attached
    thereto a leg which is held in an operative position by a link member
    extending between a portion of the leg and the surface.


CLS 108/161
TXT Device under the class definition not elsewhere classified.


CLS 108/162
TXT Foldable component:
    Plural related horizontal surfaces under subclass 59 wherein either one
    surface is foldably connected to another, or support structure for a
    horizontal surface is foldably connected to the surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65+,    for an extension leaf having a folding feature.

    115+,   for similar related subject matter which does not include plural
    related horizontal surfaces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 174+ for bedsteads having a folding component.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 85 for foldable support, subclass 132.1
    for foldable rack, and subclass 195 for foldable rack.

    248,    Supports, subclass 166 for a folding stand.


CLS 108/163
TXT Surfaces comprise plural bars:
    Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein the surfaces include relatively
    long, straight, rigid, and parallel structural members.


CLS 108/164
TXT Superjacent support:
    Subject matter under subclass 162 in which the structure supporting a
    horizontal surface is located above the surface.


CLS 108/165
TXT Integrally formed from sheet:
    Subject matter under subclass 162 in which the horizontal surfaces and
    supporting structure are formed from a single piece of material such as
    cardboard, plastic, sheet metal, etc.


CLS 108/166
TXT Hinged horizontal surfaces:
    Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein the horizontal surfaces are
    pivotally connected to each other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 71 for a barrier
    having hingedly connected sections.


CLS 108/167
TXT Folded along lateral center line:
    Subject matter under subclass 166 in which the surface sections are
    hingedly connected to fold along a width of the whole surface area.


CLS 108/168
TXT With latch:
    Subject matter under subclass 167 in which the structure includes a bar
    that fits into a notch, slot, or cavity to lock the components in either a
    folded or a nonfolded position.


CLS 108/169
TXT Leg collapses between surface sections:
    Subject matter under subclass 167 wherein the support is positioned between
    the surface components when the device is in a folded or inoperative
    position.


CLS 108/170
TXT Surface section collapses between legs:
    Subject matter under subclass 167 wherein a surface component is positioned
    between plural support members when the device is in a folded or
    inoperative position.


CLS 108/171
TXT Folded along longitudinal center line:
    Subject matter under subclass 166 wherein the surface sections are hingedly
    connected to fold along a length of the whole surface area.


CLS 108/172
TXT With latch:
    Subject matter under subclass 171 in which the structure includes a bar
    that fits into a notch, slot, or cavity to lock the components in either a
    folded or  a nonfolded position.


CLS 108/173
TXT Leg and surface sections collapse concurrently:
    Subject matter under subclass 166 wherein the surface components collapse
    simultaneously with the support.


CLS 108/174
TXT Leg collapses between surface sections:
    Subject matter under subclass 173 wherein the leg is positioned between the
    surface sections when the device is in folded or inoperative position.


CLS 108/175
TXT Surface section collapses between legs:
    Subject matter under subclass 173 wherein the surface section is positioned
    between the legs when the device is in folded or inoperative position.


CLS 108/176
TXT Support structure includes leg:
    Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein the support structure includes an
    elongated floor- engaging member.


CLS 108/177
TXT With caster:
    Subject matter under subclass 176 in which the leg is combined with a
    rolling member mounted for movably supporting the structure.


CLS 108/178
TXT Pairs of legs pivotally connected at their top ends and diverging
    downwardly:Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein the support structure
    includes two or more pairs of legs, each pair being hingedly connected at
    their upper ends to another pair of legs and extending downwardly and
    outwardly from the other pair to engage the floor.


CLS 108/179
TXT Horizontal surface pivotally connected to support:
    Subject matter under subclass 162 in which the surface is hingedly
    connected to the support.


CLS 108/180
TXT Separable component:
    Plural related horizontal surfaces under subclass 59 wherein a surface or a
    support for a surface can be detached.

     (1)    Note.  A component is considered separable if it can be detached
    without being damaged.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107+,   for a device wherein vertical adjustment is brought about by
    separation of the surfaces, and the support, and reassembly in a different
    position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 186+ for a shelf support and
    subclasses 189+ for a knockdown rack.

    248,    Supports, subclass 165 for a knockdown stand and subclasses 460+
    for a knockdown device adapted to support an article in an inclined
    position.


CLS 108/181
TXT Surfaces comprise plural bars:
    Subject matter under subclass 180 in which the surfaces include relatively
    long, straight, rigid, and parallel structural members.


CLS 108/182
TXT Superjacent support:
    Subject matter under subclass 180 in which the structure supporting a
    horizontal surface is located above the surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164,    for foldable device having superjacent support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports: Racks, subclasses 113+ for support suspended to a ceiling.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 317+ for a device for supporting an article by
    hanging it from an overhead support.


CLS 108/183
TXT Vertically spaced circular surfaces:
    Subject matter under subclass 180 wherein the horizontal surfaces are round
    and spaced one above the other.


CLS 108/184
TXT Transparent surface:
    Subject matter under subclass 180 in which the surface is made from
    material capable of transmitting light so that an object can be seen
    through it.


CLS 108/185
TXT Laterally interconnected coplanar surfaces:
    Subject matter under subclass 180 wherein the surfaces are united in a
    side-by-side relationship so that the top surfaces lie in the same plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for structure wherein self-supporting units are laterally
    connectible.

    89,     for a device wherein end sections are mutually secured to each
    other or to an insert.


CLS 108/186
TXT Support structure includes leg:
    Subject matter under subclass 180 in which the support structure includes
    an elongated floor-engaging member.


CLS 108/187
TXT Horizontal brace connecting legs:
    Subject matter under subclass 186 wherein the support structure includes at
    least two legs and an elongated horizontal member connected to them and
    extending between them.


CLS 108/188
TXT Diagonal brace connecting legs:
    Subject matter under subclass 186 in which the support structure includes
    at least two legs and a strengthening member extending obliquely from one
    leg to another.


CLS 108/189
TXT With caster:
    Subject matter under subclass 186 in which the leg is combined with a
    rolling member mounted for movably supporting the structure.


CLS 108/190
TXT Sectional legs:
    Subject matter under subclass 186 in which the leg comprises more than one
    separable piece.


CLS 108/191
TXT Single pedestal:
    Subject matter under subclass 186 in which the support is one centrally
    located leg.


CLS 108/192
TXT Leg attached at surface corner by clamping means:
    Subject matter under subclass 186 in which the leg is fastened to the
    surface at a corner thereof by a gripping arrangement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclass 288 for bedsteads with side rails detachably
    connected to the corner posts.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 226.11+ for a device with a bracket removably
    secured to its support.


CLS 108/193
TXT Surface detachably connected to vertical side frames:
    Subject matter under subclass 186 in which the surface is releasably
    attached to at least two leg assemblies each of which comprises vertical
    legs connected by a horizontal member.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS

    The following subclasses are collections of published disclosures
    pertaining to various aspects of the art of horizontally supported planar
    surfaces and do not form an appropriate base for subclass classification in
    the classification schedule.

    (1)     Note.  Disclosures are placed herein for value as a search aid and
    in no instance do they represent the entire extent of the prior art.


CLS 108/901
TXT Industrial pallets or platforms made of synthetic plastic material.


CLS 108/902
TXT Synthetic plastic industrial platforms having deformable means integral
    therewith and by which the platform may be attached or fastened to
    something else.

    FOREIGN ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 108/FOR100
TXT COMBINED:

    Device under the class definition in combination with structure having
    another function or serving to perfect the device for its intended function.


CLS 108/FOR101
TXT INDUSTRIAL PLATFORM:

    Devices under the class definition wherein the support surface is provided
    with support means comprising legs, runners, or the like whereby a load may
    be supported relatively close to a floor or primary support, and haivng
    means to receive handling means beneath said surface or load.


CLS 108/FOR102
TXT VERTICALLY ADJUSTABLE:

    Device under the class definition wherein the surface is retained in a
    plurality of vertically spaced positions.


CLS 108/FOR103
TXT WITH SEPERABLE COMPONENTS:

    Device under the class definition wherein one element of the device may be
    parted or divorced from another of its elements.


CLS 108/FOR104
TXT Surface separable from support entity:

    Device wherein the support remains as an assembled unit upon removal of the
    surface therefrom.

















CLS 109/
TTL SAFES, BANK PROTECTION,  OR A RELATED DEVICE

CLS 109/
TXT This is the generic class for:



    I.      Safes:

    All buildings and receptacles which have combined therewith (a) means in
    addition to their structure and/or (b) means built into their structure,
    for repelling or protecting their contents (including living beings) from
    explosion, penetration of missiles, other attacks by force or stealth
    (including burglary or larceny), fire, or for any other protective, or
    safe-guarding purpose not elsewhere provided for.

    II.     Bank protection devices:

    Banks, stores, or other related institutions, having means to protect or
    defend them and their personnel against a burglary or robbery attack.

    III.    Related devices:

    All devices not elsewhere classified for preventing physical objects
    (including living beings) from being harmed by violence of any kind, or
    from getting into unauthorized possession of any person.

    NOTES



    (1)     The recitation of a closure fastener or lock upon a building or
    receptacle is not considered a protecting means within this class.  Where
    the fastening means or lock is claimed in combination with features for
    this class, see subclass 59 and indented subclasses of this class.  Locks,
    closure fasteners and their combinations with building or receptacle
    structures will be found in various classes, the following being
    particularly noted:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 106 for residual jail
    type structures and subclass 660 for fabric or lattice (e.g., grille type
      openwork), per se, even though defined as useful for the purposes of
    Class 109.

    70,     Locks, subclass 77.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 308, 395, 435.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 8.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 383.

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclasses 331 and 335 for means for locking a barrier to prevent access to
    an elevator car.

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclass 56.

    194,    Check-Actuated Control Mechanisms, subclasses 51, 59, 65.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package,subclass 1.5.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclass 207.

    292,    Closure Fasteners.

    312,    Supports: Cabinet Structure, subclasses 107.5, 215, 216, 222, and
    333.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclass 25, for a pavement
    with a vault cover-closure.



    (2)     The mere recitation of a resistant wall, without going into the
    structure which makes the wall resistant for the purposes of this class
    does not constitute a safe within the meaning of this class, but will be
    found in the appropriate building and receptacle classes, particularly
    Classes 52, Static Structures (e.g., Buildings); 190, Trunks and
    Hand-Carried Luggage; 206, Special Receptacle, or Package; 217, Wooden
    Receptacles; 220, Receptacles and 312, Supports: Cabinet Structure.
    Particular attention is directed to Class 52, Static Structures (e.g.,
    Building), subclasses 169+ for buildings including a terrane an feature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, for closures of the type provided
    for.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses for
    miscellaneous reinforced building structures having no features other than
    those adding structural strength to the construction even though defined as
    useful for the purposes of Class 109.

    89,     Ordnance, subclasses 36.01+ for shields for ordnance and for
    related shielding structures.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 394, for armored and protected
    railway rolling stock bodies.

    114,    Ships, subclass 9, for armored ships and armor therefor.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, for fire extinguishers of general application.

    174,    Electricity: Conductors and Insulators, subclass 2, for lightning
    protection of buildings, persons or any other object.

    211,    Supports: Racks, subclass 4, for racks with article-locking devices
    therein.

    232,    Deposit and Collection Receptacles, subclass 43.1 and subclass 44,
    for closure and chute subcombinations, for safes of the deposit and
    collection type.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 121, for shields and other protective devices
    for aircraft.

    248,    Supports, subclass 551, for bracket type devices combined with
    anti-theft means.

    293,    Vehicle Fenders, for vehicle fenders, and bumpers.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet, and subclass 544 for stock materials, e.g., of indefinite length,
    which are all metal or have adjacent metal components.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclass 32 for buoyant safes,
    including those adapted to float in case of shipwreck.

    454,    Ventilation, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 237+
    and 254 for ventilated building structures.


CLS 109/1
TXT Devices under the class definition and not classifiable below.  Included
    are processes or methods relating to features of this class,
    cross-references being made to the particular feature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 742.1+ for methods
    of filling hollow walls.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 35.17 for a safety feature or a
    containment structure detail for use in testing an explosive.


CLS 109/2
TXT Devices as defined in section II of the main class definition.  The device
    is often manually actuated by an employee in a protected position.


CLS 109/3
TXT Devices under subclass 2 for confining a person either against his will or
    while transacting business.  The confining means is under the control of
    one or more of the personnel of the bank or related institution.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 59, for those
    traps which are released by an attacker or prowler.


CLS 109/4
TXT Devices under subclass 3 wherein the trap is combined with a partition or
    counter to confine a customer while a transaction is taking place.  The
    trap is normally under control of the person behind the partition or
    counter.


CLS 109/5
TXT Devices under subclass 3 wherein the trap is combined with an otherwise
    protected transaction or display partition, the latter being defined in
    this class, subclass 10.


CLS 109/6
TXT Devices under subclass 3 wherein a plurality of closures are operable to
    form the confining means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclass 94 for interconnected
    closures on opposite or angularly related barriers.


CLS 109/7
TXT Devices under subclass 6 wherein fastening means of the closures are
    interrelated.


CLS 109/8
TXT Devices under subclass 6 wherein at least one of the closures is of the
    rotary plural-blade door type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclass 42 for revolving
    plural-blade type closures of the type provided for.


CLS 109/9
TXT Devices under subclass 2 comprising booths and enclosures for the
    protection of armed guards and other personnel of the protected institution
    from which they may repel an attack and sometimes send an alarm.  The
    enclosures may be built in, movable or portable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for transaction partitions which may be transformed into a guard
    booth.


CLS 109/10
TXT Devices under subclass 2 comprising a desk, counter or display surface,
    with or without a partition, combined with means for protection against
    attack.  The partition may have a wicket therein and may be transparent or
    foraminous.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, for devices (1)
    in which a flexible fabric or other flexible sheet material forms the panel
    portion, (2) formed of plural strips, slats or panels inter-connected for
    relative motion (excluding those connected only by a common operator or
    mounted only on a common support), (3) combinations of (1) and (2), and (4)
    combinations of (1) to (3), inclusive, with rigid closures.  Such devices
    in the combination set forth in the definition of this subclass (10)
    including those having attack actuated operating means, are in this
    subclass.

    312,    Supports: Cabinet Structure, appropriate subclasses, for cabinet
    structure, particularly subclass 114, for show-cases; 140.1, for counters;
    194, for knee-hole desks.


CLS 109/11
TXT Devices under subclass 10 wherein a movable protective shield is placed
    between an attacker and the desk, counter or display.


CLS 109/12
TXT Devices under subclass 11 wherein a plurality of separate shields are moved
    to protecting position.


CLS 109/13
TXT Devices under subclass 12 wherein there are a plurality of transaction
    openings or partitions to be protected.


CLS 109/14
TXT Devices under subclass 11 wherein a rolled shield is unrolled to protecting
    position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, particularly
    subclass 238, for roller type devices.


CLS 109/15
TXT Devices under subclass 11 wherein the shield is formed of a plurality of
    strips or slats.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, particularly
    subclass 130, for movably interconnected plural strip, slat or panel type
    devices.


CLS 109/16
TXT Devices under subclass 15 wherein the strips or slats are each pivoted for
    rotation or oscillation about their longest axis to meet or overlap and
    form a single shield.


CLS 109/17
TXT Devices under subclass 11 wherein a substantially flat shield slides in its
    plane to protecting position.


CLS 109/18
TXT Devices under subclass 17 wherein the shield upon release falls by the
    action of gravity alone to protected position.


CLS 109/19
TXT Devices under subclass 10 wherein means is provided for the transfer of
    articles in both directions through a partition without the presence of a
    straight unobstructed passage therethrough.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass .8, for coin receptacles
    and packages, including mats and trays having features to facilitate
    picking up of coins lying thereon.

    232,    Deposit and Collection Receptacles, subclass 64, for receptacles
    upon, or in, which coins are deposited and having one or more movable parts
    (as tiltable mounting of a tray type receptacle) which when moved will
    cause delivery of the coins, usually into the customer's hand.


CLS 109/20
TXT Devices under subclass 10 wherein the transaction and display partition or
    desk is combined with means for releasing, generating and/or distributing
    fluent materials, the latter means being defined in this class, subclass 29.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclass for a composition for disabling or repelling an animal including a
    human.


CLS 109/21
TXT Devices under subclass 10 wherein the transaction and display partition or
    desk is combined with an alarm, signal or indicator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for alarms, signals and indicators combined with other structures
    within the class definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 541, for indicating systems
    automatically responsive to intrusion detection; subclass 568 for
    indicating systems automatically responsive to article placement or
    removal; and subclass 574 for electric automatic holdup responsive
    indicating systems.


CLS 109/21.5
TXT Devices under subclass 10 in which the partition has an indirect passage
    permitting passage of sound waves but preventing passage of solid objects
    (such as projectiles).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 18 through 22, for speaking tubes and
    subclasses 148 and 157, for diaphragms and mounting.


CLS 109/22
TXT Devices under the class definition which are convertible to other devices
    or uses.


CLS 109/23
TXT Devices under the class definition which are combined with miscellaneous
    additional structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for devices under the main class definition combined with means for
    movably mounting or supporting them for some motion incident to their
    protective function.

    50,     for other supporting or mounting combinations.


CLS 109/24
TXT Devices under subclass 23 combined with a jacket or enclosure distinct from
    the wall structure of the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for those devices where the jacket is part of the wall structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 185+, for jackets combined with means for
    circulating air for ventilating purposes around the exterior of the device.


CLS 109/24.1
TXT Device under subclass 23 for receiving an article for safeguarding and
    against unauthorized retrieval, combined with means to mark the article so
    as to register its reception or to mark a receipt for the article to be
    served to the depositor.

    (1)     Note.  A depository which includes photographing means is so akin
    to the art of making a record of the article as to be excluded from the
    instant subclass (24.1) and found, rather, in Class 346, Recorders,
    subclass 22 or in another (optical art) locus related thereto, this being
    so even were a photocopy to be served as a receipt.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, subclass 22, for the subject matter of this instant
    subclass (24.1) and further including, (1) means making a record of the
    article, as by photographing it (e.g., on microfilm), or (2) a time
    recorder (clock) or means responsive thereto to effect the marking means
    operation.


CLS 109/25
TXT Devices under subclass 23 combined with means for marking contained
    articles upon attack.  The articles are usually money or negotiable paper
    and the marking is generally for the purpose of warning that it has been
    stolen.  The marking may be done, for example, by stamping,  punching,
    dyeing, or burning, and may be set off either automatically or manually
    upon attack.

    (1)     Note.  See the pertinent subclasses of Classes 8, Bleaching and
    Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of Textiles and Fibers;
    83, Cutting; 102, Ammunition and Explosive Devices; and 118, Coating
    Apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for bank protecting devices for releasing, generating and/or
    distributing fluent material upon attack for other purposes.


CLS 109/26
TXT Devices under subclass 23 (other than mere closure sealing mechanisms)
    wherein means is provided to prevent a successful attack upon a safe by
    means of an explosive.  The explosive is normally inserted between the
    closure and jamb, and the device may either impede the entry, convey the
    explosive away from the place inserted, or may absorb or release the
    explosive forces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for mere sealing mechanisms for this and other purposes.

    79,     for joints and connections peculiarly constructed to stand an
    explosion or to relieve the pressure of one.


CLS 109/27
TXT Devices under subclass 26 wherein means is provided for venting the
    excessive pressure resulting from an explosive attack.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 455, particularly subclasses 467, 469, 506
    to 510 and 511 for excess pressure relief valves of general application.


CLS 109/28
TXT Devices under subclass 26 wherein there is a drain and/or a sump to remove
    immediately any explosive from the place in which it is inserted.


CLS 109/29
TXT Devices under subclass 23 wherein means is provided for releasing,
    generating and/or distributing gas, smoke, vapors and/or liquids either
    manually, automatically upon attack, or automatically in case of fire. The
    fluent material is normally, but not necessarily, toxic, noncombustible, or
    incapacitating and may normally, but not necessarily, be used to repel
    attacks and/or put out, prevent, or impede the action of a fire.  This
    subclass includes devices relating to jails, where the purposes of this
    subclass are also present.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for means for marking articles upon attack, usually to warn that
    the articles have been stolen.

    36,     for fluent material released or generated solely as an incident to
    the firing of an explosive device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclass 367, for gas generating
    explosive devices.

    137,    Fluid Handling, for fluid handling or distribution systems in
    general.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, appropriate subclasses, particularly 54 for
    manual or automatic extinguishers and 91 for apparatus causing gas flow.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses
    for the discharge or distributing structure, per se, which projects the
    fluid(s).

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 2 and 350 for foam producing and gas
    generating compositions.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 305 for fume generators.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclass for a composition for disabling or repelling an animal including a
    human.

    454,    Ventilation, particularly subclasses 237+ and 254+ for means for
    ventilating the devices.


CLS 109/30
TXT Devices under subclass 29 combined with means for imposing an additional
    impediment to the opening of a closure on the structure being attacked.


CLS 109/31
TXT Devices under subclass 29 combined with an alarm, signal or indicator.
    This subclass includes devices relating to jails, where the purposes of
    this subclass are also present.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 500 for electrical automatic
    condition responsive indicating systems.


CLS 109/32
TXT Devices under subclass 29 wherein a mechanism is utilized to initiate,
    release and/or control the action of the device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 2, for initiators of the
    trip type which are of more general application.


CLS 109/33
TXT Devices under subclass 32 wherein the mechanism is initiated or released by
    the action of heat.  The device may be thermally responsive or may contain
    a fusible or combustible element.

    (1)     Note.  Thermal responsive mechanisms may be found in many other
    places, including particularly:  Class 137, Fluid Handling, subclasses
    12.1, 59, 65, 72, 79, 389, 457, and 468:  Class 49, Movable or Removable
    Closures, subclass 1, and Class 337, Electricity: Electrothermally or
    Thermally Actuated Switches, appropriate subclasses for thermostatically
    switches, per se, see Class 236, Automatic Temperature and Humidity
    Regulation, subclasses 91-104.


CLS 109/34
TXT Devices under subclass 29 wherein the release or initiation is caused by
    the breakage of an element due to the shock of an attack.


CLS 109/35
TXT Devices under subclass 23 wherein a surface or other exposed part of the
    device is electrically charged.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    256,    Fences, subclass 10, for analogous devices.


CLS 109/36
TXT Devices under subclass 23 wherein an explosive mechanism or element is
    combined with the device.  The explosive mechanism is usually a piece of
    ordnance while the element is usually a cartridge or equivalent structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     for an explosive device which acts as a detonator to release,
    generate, or distribute a fluent material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, for the mechanism of general application.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges.


CLS 109/37
TXT Devices under subclass 36 wherein the detonator is housed in the wall of
    the device.


CLS 109/38
TXT Devices under subclass 23 combined with an alarm, signal, or indicator.
    This subclass includes devices relating to jails, where the purposes of
    this subclass are also present.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for this structure combined with fluent releasing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, appropriate subclasses for
    signs, per se.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclasses for indicators and
    signals, per se.

    200,    Electricity: Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses
    under subclass 61.62, and subclass 61.93 for wall or closure mounted
    circuit makers and breakers, including those in which the circuit is closed
    by attempted penetration.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 500 for electrical alarms
    automatically responsive to a condition.  Note especially subclasses 541
    and 574 for burglar alarms.


CLS 109/39
TXT Devices under subclass 38 wherein the movement of the receptacle as a unit
    initiates the operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for handle initiated mechanisms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 568 for electrical automatic
    article placement or removal responsive indicating systems.


CLS 109/40
TXT Devices under subclass 38 wherein a plurality of different types of
    initiators are found.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 521 for electrical automatic
    plural diverse condition responsible indicating systems.


CLS 109/41
TXT Devices under subclass 40 in which the several initiators include wall
    penetrating and closure movement types, as defined respectively in
    subclasses 42 and 43.


CLS 109/42
TXT Devices under subclass 38 wherein the penetration of the wall by attack
    initiates the operation.

    (1)     Note.  The word "wall" is to be interpreted broadly to include a
    screen, a grille, or any other confining mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for the puncture of a wall to release a fluent material under
    pressure, or to allow the influx of air to bring up the pressure to that of
    the atmosphere.

    38,     for operation initiated by an attack upon the wall that does not
    penetrate the wall.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 544 for fluid flow operated
    alarms such as those in which the fluid is released when a hollow bar is
    sawed by a trespasser, and subclass 550 for electrically actuated alarms
    which are automatically responsive to the penetration of screens, walls,
    roofs, floors, etc.


CLS 109/43
TXT Devices under subclass 38 wherein the movement of a closure initiates the
    operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 545 for electrical automatic
    door or window movement responsive indicating systems.


CLS 109/44
TXT Devices under subclass 38 wherein the movement of a closure fastening means
    or a handle initiates the operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 542 for electrical automatic
    lock condition responsive indicating systems.


CLS 109/45
TXT Devices under the class definition wherein the entire safe, or some
    compartment thereof, is movable as an incident to the protective function
    of the safe.


CLS 109/46
TXT Devices under subclass 45 wherein the movement is utilized to dump the
    contents of the safe or the compartment to a location which is less
    accessible to a person attacking the same.  The movement may be for an
    emergency deposit of the valuables.


CLS 109/47
TXT Devices under subclass 45 where the safe or compartment is bodily,
    rectilinearly movable to a location less accessible to a person attacking
    the same, or further away from, or less accessible to, a fire. Includes
    safety deposit boxes in combination with their individual safes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclass 32 for devices of this
    type for use on shipboard which act as a buoy upon the sinking of a ship.


CLS 109/48
TXT Devices under subclass 45 wherein the safe or compartment is mounted for
    revolution upon an axis so that relative rotation of the safe or
    compartment to the remaining structure is necessary to get an entrance of
    the safe or compartment in line with an exterior closure.


CLS 109/49
TXT Devices under subclass 45 wherein a pair of independent safe sections, each
    of which is a compartment, serves as a closure for the other when locked.


CLS 109/49.5
TXT Devices under the class definition, and in a form which is more than a
    wall, panel or closure but is not a complete enclosure, for shielding or
    protecting from projectiles, swords, knives or other mode of attack.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for mere wall, panel and closure structures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 455, but particularly subclass 2.5, for
    protective devices worn on or attached to the body.

    89,     Ordnance, subclasses 36.01+, and see the notes thereto for shields
    in combination with guns.

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclass 115, for covers for
    portable shelters.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 97 for protective guards or screens to shield the operator of a
    receptacle filling machine.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclass 351,
    for portable panels of more general application.

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 404 and 410 for projectile
    stops for targets.


CLS 109/50
TXT Devices under the class definition combined with means to support or mount
    the device including partial or complete burial of the device and/or its
    support.

    (1)     Note.  Supports of general application are found in the appropriate
    subclasses in classes 211, Supports:  Racks, and 248, Supports.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, appropriate subclasses for
    a horizontally supported planar surface.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, (see Note 1).

    232,    Deposit and Collection Receptacles, subclass 39 for letter boxes
    combined with supports.

    248,    Supports, (see Note 1).

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, appropriate subclasses, where the
    support is a cabinet.


CLS 109/51
TXT Devices under subclass 50 wherein the means fastening the device to its
    support or mounting is accessible only from the interior of the device.


CLS 109/52
TXT Devices under subclass 50 wherein the means for fastening the device to its
    support or mounting is controlled by a lock.  The fastening means may be
    controlled by the same lock which controls the closure of the device.


CLS 109/53
TXT Devices under the class definition wherein a plurality of separate storage
    compartments or receptacles are combined in a single structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 69 for similar storage compartments
    combined with means to remove articles from such compartments.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, appropriate subclasses, for similar
    cabinet structure.


CLS 109/54
TXT Devices under subclass 53 wherein at least one of the compartments is so
    hidden that an unauthorized person would not become aware of its existence,
    even when the device is not protected.


CLS 109/55
TXT Devices under subclass 53 wherein there is a depositing means between two
    of the compartments.  Access to the receiving compartment may be through
    the depositing compartment, or there may be a separate entrance.


CLS 109/56
TXT Devices under subclass 53 where two or more compartments constitute
    separate safes as defined in the class definition.  Includes safety deposit
    safe structures, per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for safety deposit boxes in combination with their individual safes.


CLS 109/57
TXT Devices under subclass 56 wherein one safe is inside another safe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for safes with inner and outer doors between which there is no
    substantial storage space.


CLS 109/58
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to wall panel and
    closure structure and arrangements of and adjuncts for said structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 98 for a
    structurally defined web or sheet which is nonmetallic, subclass 594 for a
    plural-layer metallic stock which is discontinuously bonded, and subclass
    911 (Art Collection) for a penetration-resistant layer.


CLS 109/58.5
TXT Devices under subclass 58 in the form of ports, with or without closure
    means, specially designed to protect a person from projectiles or other
    type of attack. Includes gun ports, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclass 171 for a viewing,
    ventilating or packet passage mounted on a closure and see the search notes
    in section IV of Class 49 for the loci of closures in other classes.

    89,     Ordnance, particularly subclasses 36.01+ and subclasses 37.01+, for
    such structures combined with a gun or a gun mount.

    114,    Ships, subclass 5, for warship gun turrets and subclass 175 for
    ships' gun ports.

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 662+ and the notes thereto for structures
    wherein a transparent panel is mounted in a wall.


CLS 109/59
TXT Devices under subclass 58 involving the fastening means for the closures.

    (1)     Note.  The mere recitation of a safe, a jamb, or a closure, or the
    recitation of such details of these parts as are necessary to the location
    or operation of the fastening means, will not of itself be sufficient to
    classify a patent in this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, appropriate subclasses, for locks of general application.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, appropriate subclasses, for other closure
    fastening means.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 99 for a
    nonmetallic web or sheet, including a fastener, and subclass 594 for
    metallic sheet discontinuously bonded, e.g., by mechanical fastening means.


CLS 109/60
TXT Devices under subclass 59 wherein the closure is held ajar against
    unauthorized movement.  The devices are normally releasable from the
    interior and may be set so that the device goes into operation upon
    attempted closing.


CLS 109/61
TXT Devices under subclass 59 wherein a cooperative relation exists between the
    closure boltwork and the pressure mechanism, the latter means being defined
    in this class, subclass 62.


CLS 109/62
TXT Devices under subclass 59 wherein camming means cooperates with
    complementary means to force and hold the closure tight in its jamb.  The
    device usually aids in cracking the closure from its jamb.  These devices
    are invariably in addition to the regular boltwork of the safe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for combined boltwork and pressure mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    292,    Closure Fasteners, appropriate subclasses, for boltwork mechanism
    which itself does the camming.


CLS 109/63
TXT Devices under subclass 62 combined with means to prevent the entrapping of
    a person within the safe or vault by an unauthorized person.


CLS 109/63.5
TXT Devices under subclass 59 including means to render the closure fastening
    means ineffective when the receptacle is being occupied by a person or when
    it is in a condition of abnormal use or of nonuse.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are devices wherein the means for rendering
    the closure fastening means ineffective consists of apparatus which
    prevents closing of the closure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 82 for devices, per se, which
    prevent closing of a closure.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclasses 14, 70 and 251.5 for closure
    fasteners which are ineffective to hold a closure in closed position
    against a relatively slight amount of force, and subclasses 144, 201 and
    251.5 for closure fasteners which are rendered ineffective to hold a
    closure in closed position upon disconnection of the means (e.g., pressure
    or electrical supply) which is normally employed for control of the
    fastener.


CLS 109/64
TXT Devices under subclass 58 wherein the closure, per se, and so much of the
    jamb structure as is necessary to support or cooperate with the closure are
    recited.  A closure operator may be included in combination.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for arrangements of two or more closures to create a plurality of
    separate compartments.

    78,     for closure structure which is no more than that of an ordinary
    wall structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, appropriate subclasses, for closures
    of the type provided for and see the search notes in section IV of Class 49
    for the loci of closures in other classes.


CLS 109/65
TXT Devices under subclass 64 wherein means is provided to prevent the
    conduction of heat between the exterior and interior of the device by the
    material of the closure and its adjacent jamb.


CLS 109/66
TXT Devices under subclass 64 wherein the closure constitutes a part of a
    depositing mechanism for a deposit and collection type of safe.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    232,    Deposit and Collection Receptacles, subclass 44, for closures and
    chutes, per se, of this type.


CLS 109/67
TXT Devices under subclass 64 wherein a plurality of closures are claimed.


CLS 109/68
TXT Devices under subclass 67 wherein the closures are arranged in tandem
    making an outer and at least one inner closure.  Such closures may be
    arranged for either simultaneous or sequential opening and closing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for sufficient space between the inner and outer closures to
    constitute a substantial storage compartment.


CLS 109/69
TXT Devices under subclass 64 wherein the closure has a plurality of distinct
    movements in opening and closing.  Includes closures having more than two
    movements, cross-referencing being made into the subclasses indented
    hereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclass 208 for closures of the
    type provided with means mounted for multidirectional movement.


CLS 109/70
TXT Devices under subclass 69 wherein the closure has both a sliding and a
    swinging movement.


CLS 109/71
TXT Devices under subclass 69 wherein the closure moves through a combined
    rotary and translating movement around a common axis. The movements need
    not be simultaneous. Includes closures of the screw type and bayonet slot
    type.


CLS 109/72
TXT Devices under subclass 71 wherein, by the use of lugs or interrupted
    threads, the rotary movement necessary to release the closure takes place
    for a fraction of a revolution.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    89,     Ordnance, subclasses 20.2+ for similar closures for breeches in
    ordnance.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclass 391 for a screw coupling
    comprising interrupted threads, and subclass 401 for a socket joint of the
    lugged pipe, rotary engagement type.  See the Search Notes thereunder.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, subclass 417 for externally threaded fasteners
    having circumferentially interrupted threads.


CLS 109/73
TXT Devices under subclass 64 wherein only a single sliding, rotary, or
    oscillating movement is necessary to open the closure.


CLS 109/74
TXT Devices under subclass 64 wherein the closure has a swinging movement and
    wherein the closure and adjacent jamb and closure have projections and
    recesses (usually, but not necessarily, complementary) which serve to
    prevent the inserting of tools or liquids, or the transmission of heat in
    the space between the door and jamb.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65,     for devices provided with means to cut down the conduction of heat
    by the material of the closure at its edge to the interior of the safe.


CLS 109/75
TXT Devices under subclass 64 wherein some positive sealing means is used
    between the door and the jamb.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclass 475.1 for closure seals of
    the type provided for.


CLS 109/76
TXT Devices under subclass 64 wherein the closure is made up of a plurality of
    parts which after assembly act as a unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     for devices, the several parts of which may be separately used.


CLS 109/77
TXT Devices under subclass 64 relating to jamb structure, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 204.1 for a building
    with a feature for forming a door or window opening.


CLS 109/78
TXT Devices under subclass 58 relating to the structure of one or a plurality
    of walls or panels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85,     for devices having a plurality of distinct metal parts.

    (1)     Note. Safe, safe walls or safe plates made of a single metal or
    alloy are classified in Class 420, Alloys or Metallic Compositions. Class
    148, Metal Treatment, subclasses 400+ provides for safes, safe walls or
    safe plates made of a metal or alloy which has been treated by a Class 148
    process, e.g., heat treated, ect., or recited as having propeties which are
    the result of such a treatment. For the line between metallic articles
    classified in Classes 148 and 420, see the definition of subclass 400 in
    Class 148.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses for a
    construction of a building, wall, floor or roof of more general application.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclass 17 for wall structure of such
    receptacles.

    220,    Receptacles, particularly subclasses 415 and 660+ for residual
    receptacle wall structure.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    and its main Class Definition, section C, 3, d, for related materials,
    especially subclass 544 for stock materials, e.g., of indefinite length,
    which are all metal or have adjacent metal components.


CLS 109/79
TXT Devices under subclass 78 comprising joints or connection between a
    plurality of walls or a plurality of parts of a wall.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses for
    wall and panel joints in general.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, appropriate
    subclasses, for panel structures composed of a plurality of movably
    interconnected strips, slats or panels and for the joint subcombinations of
    such structures.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 594 for plural
    metallic layers discontinuously bonded, e.g., by mechanical fastening means
    or spot welds.


CLS 109/80
TXT Devices under subclass 78 wherein a plurality of different elements compose
    a single wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     for safes, safe walls, or safe plates made of a single alloy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 547 for
    particulate metal-containing stock having a composition or density
    gradient, and subclass 614 for metallic stock having embedded components.


CLS 109/81
TXT Devices under subclass 80 wherein one or more of the parts are movable with
    respect to the outer walls.


CLS 109/82
TXT Devices under subclass 80 comprising metallic and nonmetallic parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 621 for metallic
    composite stock comprising two or more adjacent metal layers and having an
    additional nonmetal layer.


CLS 109/83
TXT Devices under subclass 82 wherein a metallic part or parts form a
    reinforcement for the nonmetallic part by being embedded therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Building), appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclasses 251, 319, 378, 380, and 414 for cast-in-situ
    barriers with embedded reinforcement.


CLS 109/84
TXT Devices under subclass 82 wherein is a metallic shell completely enclosing
    a nonmetallic filler.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, for filling compositions that
    are plastic, setted or settable.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 62, for heat insulating fillings.


CLS 109/85
TXT Devices under subclass 80 wherein all parts are metallic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     for safes, safe walls and safe plates made of a single alloy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 609 for metallic
    stock comprising plural layers having an irregular interface, and
    subclasses 615+ for other composite metallic stock defined in terms of the
    composition of its component.


CLS 109/87
TXT Devices under subclass 58 comprising movable or removable floor sections
    for bridging recesses in floors necessitated to accommodate the opening of
    a vault door. These recesses are usually necessary when the level of the
    vault floor and building floor are desired on the same level.


CLS 110/
TTL FURNACES

CLS 110/
TXT I.      CLASS DEFINITION

    This class provides for the following:

    (a)     solid material combustion (*) apparatus with or without the
    capability of utilizing auxiliary gaseous or liquid fuel (*);

    (b)     solid material combustion apparatus convertible to a gaseous or
    liquid fuel combustion apparatus;

    (c)     combustion apparatus for incinerating (*) solid or liquid refuse
    (*);

    (d)     solid material combustion apparatus subcombinations and structure
    not provided for elsewhere; or

    (e)     methods of operating solid material combustion apparatus not
    provided for elsewhere.

    II.     GLOSSARY

    COMBUSTION

    The chemical action resulting from the direct combination of oxygen gas,
    generally in air, with a combustible material accompanied by the evolution
    of heat and light.

    COMBUSTION CHAMBER

    The structure immediately surrounding the combustion reaction and generally
    above the fuel (*) or refuse (*) grate and designed to support or promote
    the combustion reaction.

    FUEL

    A combustible material having good combustible properties such as a
    relatively low ignition temperature, a long burning time, and a minimum of
    impurities which hinder combustion and used primarily to produce heat.

    INCINERATION

    The combustion of refuse (*) for primary purpose of disposing of that
    refuse rather than for producing heat.

    NONCOMBUSTIBLE FLUID

    A gas or liquid which itself does not burn but which is capable of
    supporting or promoting combustion (i.e., air, steam, or water).

    REFUSE

    A combustible waste material which is burned for the sole or primary
    purpose of disposing of that material.

    III.    SCOPE OF THE CLASS

    A.      Placement of an original patent into Class 110 requires the
    following minimum structure or steps of operating such structure:

    (1)     means or a step to either convey or support solid combustible
    material during combustion;

    (2)     means or a step to supply either directly or indirectly a
    noncombustible fluid to the solid combustible material; and

    (3)     means or a step to enclose or control the combustion reaction.

    B.      Class 110 further provides for the following subcombination devices
    peculiar to solid material combustion apparatus, the following of which is
    a partial list:

    (1)     Fuel Feeders, subclasses 101+.

    (2)     Spark Arresters, subclasses 119+.

    (3)     Spark and Smoke Conductors, subclasses 145+.

    C.      Class 110 also provides for the following types of structure
    peculiar to solid material combustion apparatus, the following of which is
    a partial list:

    (1)     Baffle or Heat Retainer Structure, subclasses 322+.

    (2)     Solid Fuel Feed Structure, subclasses 267+.

    (3)     Arch or Roof Structure, subclasses 331+.

    (4)     Wall Structure, subclasses 336+.

    IV.     RELATIONSHIP TO CLASSES INVOLVING, PER SE, FURNACES

    A.      The Classes of Electrical Heating:

    1.      Class 373, Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, provides for
    furnace structure with characteristics limited to electric heating.

    2.      Class 219, Electric Heating, subclasses 420+ provide for electric
    heating characteristics including furnace structure.

    B.      The Classes of Heating:

    1.      Class 126, Stoves and Furnaces, provides for furnaces for ordinary
    domestic uses, such as subclasses 1+, cooking and heating stoves;
    subclasses 500+, fireplaces; and subclass 99, hot-air furnaces.

    2.      Class 431, Combustion, provides for furnaces for burning of gaseous
    or liquid fuel material, particularly subclasses 159+ for fluid-fed
    furnaces with or without other noncombustible fluids; and subclasses 173+
    for a furnace in which the fluid fuel is fed tangentially to the wall of a
    circular combustion chamber.  See the head notes of Class 431 for the
    general class line with this class.

    C.      The Classes of Plastic and Plastic Type Material Shaping and
    Treating:

    1.      Class 65, Glass Manufacturing, provides for furnaces specially
    adapted for making glass, particularly subclass 347 for a glass melting
    furnace having a structurally defined delivery or refining zone; and
    subclasses 349+ for a glass annealing or tempering furnace including means
    to control the rate of cooling.

    2.      Class 196, Mineral Oils: Apparatus, subclasses 116+ provide for
    furnaces specially adapted for oil treatment.

    3.      Class 266, Metallurgical Apparatus, provides for furnaces specially
    adapted for metallurgical processes, particularly subclasses 171+ for
    furnaces treating ores or extracting metals, and subclasses 200+ for
    furnaces for melting or vaporizing metal.

    D.      The Classes of Plant and Animal Husbandry:

    1.      Class 452, Butchering, subclass 73 provides for furnaces specially
    adapted for singeing hogs.

    V.      RELATIONSHIP TO COMBINATION CLASS-ES

    A.      The Classes of Miscellaneous Treating:

    1.      Class 34, Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, provides for
    a furnace combined with a chamber limited to drying work other than fuel or
    refuse.  See the notes in that class definition for the line with Class 110.

    B.      The Classes of Heating:

    1.      Class 122, Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, provides for a furnace
    combined with a boiler.  See particularly subclasses 371+ of Class 122 for
    grates through which water circulates with or without connection to the
    boiler.

    2.      Class 236, Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, provides
    for furnaces combined with automatic temperature and humidity regulators
    wherein the furnace or furnace structure is broadly recited or claimed,
    particularly subclass 15 for furnaces controlled by thermostats and
    humidistats.

    3.      Class 432, Heating, is the residual class for a furnace combined
    with means for applying heat so as to treat material or work rather than
    for incinerating refuse or burning solid fuel for the production of
    transferable heat.

    C.      The Class of Physical Separation:

    1.      Class 159, Concentrating Evaporators, provides for furnaces
    combined with evaporator structure peculiar to the concentration of solids
    held in solution or suspension.  See particularly subclasses 29 and 32.

    D.      The Class of Comminuting:

    1.      Class 241, Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, provides
    for comminuting processes and apparatus in combination with furnaces to
    apply heat to the material.  See section (6) of the definition of that
    class for a statement of the line between these classes.

    E.      The Classes of Vehicles:

    1.      Class 105, Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 37+ provide for the
    combination of a furnace with a steam locomotive.

    VI.     RELATIONSHIP TO OTHER CLASSES

    A.      The Classes of Earthworking:

    1.      Class 37, Excavating, subclasses 227+ provides for furnace devices
    for snow excavators and melters.

    B.      The Classes of Fluid Handling:

    1.      Class 138, Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 32+ provide for
    furnace devices used in thawing pipes.

    C.      The Classes of Motors, Engines, and Pumps:

    1.      Class 60, Power Plants, subclasses 39.461+ provides for furnaces
    for burning solid fuel for the production of products of combustion
    intended to be used as a motive fluid.

    D.      The class for dealing with nonnuclear hazardous or toxic waste.

    1.      Class 588, Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment,
    appropriate subclasses for the process of burning hazardous or toxic waste.
     Additionally, see cross-reference art collection, subclass 900, for the
    apparatus used in the treating of hazardous and toxic waste.


CLS 110/101
TXT Devices under the class definition for feeding fuel to furnaces not
    provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass are collected fuel feeders having automatic
    control except those belonging in subclasses 103 and 186+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196+,   for straw feeders.

    235+,   for wet fuel feeders.

    263+,   for devices for feeding fine fuel which is burned in suspension.

    267+,   for progressive feed stokers and grates.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclass 86 for cupola chargers.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses, for conveyor
    structure.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclasses 262+ for feeding apparatus for
    stills.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses, for fuel feeders, per se, including means to comminute the
    material.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 146 for charging or
    discharging means adapted for use with a nuclear reactor, subclasses 147+
    for the combination of a chamber of a type utilized for a heating function
    and material charging or discharging means therefor, and subclasses 568+
    for a device or element associated with the handling or moving of a charge
    for a heating-type chamber.


CLS 110/102
TXT Fuel-feeding devices under subclass 101 especially adapted for feeding
    shaving and sawdust to furnaces.

    (1)     Note.  Where the structure is capable of feeding coal and other
    fuel also, it is classified under the other fuel-feeding subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196,    for feed-chutes located on straw-burning furnaces.


CLS 110/103
TXT Devices under subclass 101 for feeding fuel whose operation is controlled
    by the pressure of steam in the boiler heated by the fuel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186+,   for furnaces having progressive-feed grates whose movements and
    feeding mechanism are controlled by the pressure of steam in the boiler.

    188+,   for boiler controlled devices for feeding air and steam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 26 for
    boiler pressure controlled regulating mechanism.


CLS 110/104
TXT Devices under subclass 101 for blowing the fuel into the firebox either by
    air or steam or both conjoined together, with devices for conveying the
    fuel to the blower into the path of the fluid current, and all devices for
    preparing the fuel by pulverizing it if subsequently delivered to the
    furnace by a fluidjet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 638+ for a thrower-type
    conveyor.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, appropriate subclasses for means to
    convey solids with a fluid current.  Class 406 will take a nominally
    recited furnace combined with a fluid current conveyor.

    417,    Pumps, subclass 151, for jet pumps.


CLS 110/105
TXT Feeders under subclass 104 in which the fuel is fed from a hopper and
    delivered to furnace by a blast of air or steam, such hopper being
    immediately attached to the furnace.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for devices in which the hopper feeds into a conduit a long
    distance from the furnace.


CLS 110/105.5
TXT Devices under subclass 104 in which a solid fuel feeder has fluid jet means
    for distributing the fuel over a fire bed or grate.  These devices are
    generally known as the locomotive stoker type of blower feeders though some
    are not disclosed for use on locomotives.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 232+ for coal feed structure on
    locomotive tenders.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses for conveyors of
    particular types, including reciprocating and screw-type conveyors often
    used for feeding bulk material to furnaces.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 637 for a solid fuel feeder having a fluid jet
    for blasting the fuel as it issues from a feeder.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 276 for
    locomotive-type stokers provided with comminuting means, but including no
    furnace structure.  See the general line stated in section 6 of the main
    class definition of Class 241.


CLS 110/105.6
TXT Devices under subclass 105.5 in which the fuel feeding means causes the
    fuel to be elevated from below and presented directly to the front of the
    fluid jets.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105.5,  for plural diverse species, and devices having additional jets to
    which the fuel is not underfed.


CLS 110/106
TXT Devices under subclass 104 having a fan blower where the fuel is passed
    through the fan casing and is pulverized by the fan blades, and it includes
    also those devices having a fan blower and a rotary grinder in the same
    casing or in a casing in close proximity to the fan casing for pulverizing
    the fuel, and the fuel is passed on by the air-current to the firebox.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 18 and 38+
    for comminution provided with means to apply fluid to the material for some
    purpose other than to support combustion.  See the line stated in section
    (6) of the main class definition of that class.


CLS 110/107
TXT Devices under subclass 101 for feeding fuel to the furnace at the bridge
    wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    269+,   for those that feed at the bridge wall upon a chain grate.


CLS 110/108
TXT Subject matter under subclass 101 relating to feed-hoppers, per se.


CLS 110/109
TXT Devices under subclass 108 in which the fuel is simply pushed into the
    furnace by a reciprocating member.


CLS 110/110
TXT Devices under subclass 108 that push the fuel into the body of fuel in the
    firebox by a rotary screw.


CLS 110/111
TXT Devices under subclass 101 that have a carrier for taking the fuel into the
    furnace over the fire and scattering it thereon, such carrier not passing
    through the door.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, generally for various forms or carriers.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclasses 262+ for similar feeding
    apparatus for stills.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 147+ (as explained in
    subclass 101 of Class 110), and particularly subclasses 172+ thereunder.


CLS 110/112
TXT Devices under subclass 111 for carrying fuel through the furnace door over
    the fire and scattering it thereon.


CLS 110/113
TXT Devices under subclass 101 having an oscillating fuel spreader that
    scatters the fuel delivered upon it over the fire.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 172+ (as explained in
    subclass 111 of Class 110), and particularly subclass 194 thereunder.


CLS 110/114
TXT Devices under subclass 101 that deliver the fuel before a plunger that
    scatters the coal over the fire.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 172+ (as explained in
    subclass 111 of Class 110), and particularly subclass 198 thereunder.


CLS 110/115
TXT Devices under subclass 101 having a rotary fuel-spreader that scatters the
    fuel delivered to it over the fire.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 172+ (as explained in
    subclass 111 of Class 110), and particularly subclass 195 thereunder.


CLS 110/116
TXT Devices under subclass 101 for feeding fuel through a gravity-feed chute to
    the furnace through the furnace doorway.


CLS 110/117
TXT Devices under subclass 116 for charging furnaces with fuel at intervals,
    either motor or clock operated or operated by hand, at the will of the
    operator, such being fed through the doorway of the furnace.


CLS 110/118
TXT Devices under subclass 101 for delivering fuel to the firebox by gravity
    feed when the fuel is fed from overhead and falls directly upon the fire
    from above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclass 86 for similar structure
    in cupola chargers.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 176+ for chargers for
    metallurgical furnaces.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 147+ (as explained in
    subclass 101 of Class 110), and particularly subclasses 167+ and 199+
    thereunder.


CLS 110/119
TXT Devices under the class definition for preventing live sparks from passing
    out of the stack or chimney.  This is accomplished either by screens,
    baffles, steam or water spray located either in the smokebox or smokestack
    and in some cases by screens in the boiler flues.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for devices for returning only the sparks to a firebox.

    145+,   for devices wherein the sparks and smoke are conducted away to the
    ground from the locomotive or over the train.

    203+,   for structure wherein both the smoke and sparks are returned to the
    firebox.

    322+,   for furnaces having ordinary baffles and heat-retainers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, appropriate subclasses, for gas separation devices
    involving no significant furnace structure, especially subclasses 220+ for
    gas separators combined with gas and liquid contact means.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 280, for soot catchers.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, for devices in which the
    separation is effected by gas and liquid contact only.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 3+ for outlet cowls.


CLS 110/120
TXT Devices under subclass 119 in which the sparks are returned to the furnace,
    either to the firebox or ashpan.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203+,   for structure in which smoke and sparks both are returned to the
    firebox.


CLS 110/121
TXT Devices under subclass 119 in which the arrester is contained in both the
    stack and smokebox.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 447+ for fixed gas whirler or rotator
    deflection separators.


CLS 110/122
TXT Devices under subclass 119 located in the smokebox for arresting sparks.


CLS 110/123
TXT Subject matter under subclass 122 including also draft regulation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126,    for devices including regulation of vertical drum type.


CLS 110/124
TXT Devices under subclass 122 having two compartments, into one of which the
    sparks are precipitated.


CLS 110/125
TXT Devices under subclass 122 having a hood over the boiler tubes, through
    which the products of combustion must pass.


CLS 110/126
TXT Devices under subclass 122 where the arrester is hollow, somewhat
    cylindrical in form, and vertically arranged, through which the
    exhaust-steam passes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 155+ for flue-type jet pumps.


CLS 110/127
TXT Devices under subclass 122 for ejecting the sparks from the smokebox by a
    jet of steam, air, water, fan, or other means.


CLS 110/128
TXT Devices under subclass 122 where the sparks are precipitated into a water
    receptacle in the smokebox and also includes devices with a steam or water
    spray in combination with the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124,    for structure in which sparks are precipitated into a separate
    compartment of the smokebox, but not into a water receptacle.


CLS 110/129
TXT Devices under subclass 122 including discharge-valves for dumping the
    sparks from the smokebox.


CLS 110/145
TXT Devices under the class definition applied to a stack or smokebox for
    conducting the smoke and sparks and discharging them upon the ground or
    into the air.  They need not necessarily be conduits but may be shields or
    deflectors.  Includes conduits applied the stack of a boiler used for
    threshing purposes on a farm, the conduit being carried at a distance from
    the boiler or engine and discharging into a water  receptacle to prevent
    the sparks setting fire to the straw.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for furnace conductor spark arresters.

    198+,   for smoke and gas return devices.


CLS 110/146
TXT Devices under subclass 145 having a conduit extending from the
    smoke-discharge end of the locomotive past the cars of the train to carry
    away the smoke and sparks and discharge them at the rear of the train.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    237,    Heating Systems, subclass 12.5 for devices which use the heat from
    the smoke to heat the cars.


CLS 110/147
TXT Devices under the class definition which act directly on the products of
    combustion after they leave the firebox to affect the velocity of said
    products.  Also devices that act directly on the fire as blowers for the
    fire, in combination with steam or air jets that either increase or
    decrease the draft; and exhaust mechanisms that have exhaust  nozzles.

    (1)     Note.  Where air or steam is injected into the products for the
    sole purpose of more completely consuming the smoke and gases, such devices
    are classified in this class, see subclasses 297+, for feeding air or
    feeding steam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 285+, for ordinary dampers for
    stoves and furnaces and their operating mechanism.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, appropriate
    subclasses for automatic damper controls.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 151+ for jet pumps.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 1+ for chimney or stack structure, per se.


CLS 110/148
TXT Devices under subclass 147 for separating the heavy gases and drawing them
    off, allowing only the lighter gases to pass through the stack.


CLS 110/150
TXT Devices under subclass 147 in which steam is injected into the path of the
    products of combustion to regulate its velocity.


CLS 110/157
TXT Devices under subclass 147 for admitting air to the smokebox or base of
    stack to retard the draft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 261+ for means treating a gas involving
    a diverse gas or a solid.


CLS 110/158
TXT Devices under subclass 157 having an air-opening valve controlled by
    movement of a furnace door.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174,    for doors having means for feeding air or steam.

    192,    for time controls.


CLS 110/159
TXT Devices under subclass 147 applied to a stack for a limited time to assist
    the draft, especially in firing up a locomotive.


CLS 110/160
TXT Devices under subclass 147 for forcing a jet of air into a stack or chimney
    to regulate the draft by induction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162,    for fan-type exhausts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 261+ for means treating a gas involving
    a diverse gas or a solid.


CLS 110/161
TXT Devices under subclass 160 comprising a jet of steam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    267+,   for undergrate steam feeders.


CLS 110/162
TXT Devices under subclass 147 in which the products of combustion or a part of
    them are drawn through a fan to increase the draft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159,    for portable fans designed to be applied to a smokestack to assist
    the draft of the fire and capable of being readily detached.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 400+ for separators mounted for
    continuous motion.

    454,    Ventilation, air pump subclasses.


CLS 110/163
TXT Devices under subclass 147 movable in the path of the products of
    combustion for regulating the cross sectional area of said path or for
    closing one path in order to pass them through another or longer course.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    192,    for time control devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 285+ especially subclasses 292-297
    for dampers in the outlet-flue or stack with its operating mechanism.


CLS 110/165
TXT Devices under the class definition for receiving and removing ashes,
    including ashpit structures, ashpans and conveyors when furnace structure
    is included.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 242+ for devices for domestic
    stoves and furnaces.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, appropriate subclasses for tubular
    conductors, per se.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, for form of conveyor.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclasses 227+, for quenchers of that
    class.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 233+ for
    sifters.


CLS 110/166
TXT Devices under subclass 165 comprising receptacles under a furnace-grate for
    receiving the ashes as they fall therefrom, except the ash-pit itself.  The
    pan must be a removable receptacle suspended from the furnace or resting on
    a support beneath the grate or permanently attached to the furnace, as in
    some locomotive structures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 242+ for ashpans for domestic
    stoves and furnaces.


CLS 110/167
TXT Devices under subclass 166 relating to mechanical devices for emptying the
    ashpan, including pans having scrapers or carriers, valves in the bottom
    for allowing the ashes to fall out when opened, or pans allowing the whole
    bottom to swing down to dump the ashes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171,    for water or steam ejectors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling-Stock, subclasses 239+ for dumping car bodies.


CLS 110/168
TXT Devices under subclass 167 whose bottoms are made of a plurality of
    sections pivoted at each end and connected to a common operating-bar.


CLS 110/169
TXT Ashpans under subclass 167 that dump the contents by reciprocating one or
    more valves in the bottom of the pan.


CLS 110/170
TXT Ashpans under subclass 167 that have a scraper for pushing the contents out
    of the pan.


CLS 110/171
TXT Devices under subclass 166 where water or steam is injected into the ashpan
    for the purpose of ejecting the ashes or extinguishing sparks.


CLS 110/172
TXT Constructions under the class definition for furnace-fronts, including door
    structures in furnace-fronts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 497+ for boiler fronts.


CLS 110/173
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to closures for openings
    in furnace-walls.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172,    for doors in front structure.

    192,    for devices which feed air or steam to the furnace for a limited
    time.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclass 124, for lids for retorts.

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, appropriate subclasses for closures
    of the type provided for and see the search notes in section IV of Class 49
    for the loci of closures in other classes.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 498 for doors with water
    circulation connected with the boiler.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 190+ for stove doors.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclasses 242+ for still closures.


CLS 110/174
TXT Doors under subclass 173 through which air and steam or steam are fed to
    the fire and also where air and steam or steam is fed to the fire when the
    valve controlling the admission of the fluid is operated by the door,
    whether the fluid passes through the door or not.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    192,    for time limit controls.


CLS 110/175
TXT Doors under subclass 173 which admit air to the furnace either by ports or
    conduits through the door structure or having means for keeping the door
    partly open where the construction is especially adapted for admitting air
    other than by simply opening a door of common construction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    192,    for time limit controls.


CLS 110/176
TXT Devices under subclass 173 for opening and closing doors aside from the
    ordinary latch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 324+ for other closure
    operators.

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclass 166 for discrete apparatus for removing
    a furnace door from above and shifting it horizontally.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 684.3 for furnace door
    removers which are disengaged from the furnace door after replacement.


CLS 110/177
TXT Devices under subclass 176 including a motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclass 334 for a motor operated
    closure and see the search notes thereto for the loci of other motor
    operated closures.


CLS 110/178
TXT Devices under subclass 176 using foot-power directly.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 263+ for pedal operated
    closures of the type provided for.


CLS 110/179
TXT Devices under subclass 173 for preventing the heat, gases, or flames from
    passing out of the furnace when the door is opened either by a spray of
    steam, air, or water or by causing air to be drawn into the door or having
    means to draw the gases through a bypass when the door is opened.  These
    devices also serve to prevent the cold outside air from cooling the boiler.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163,    for devices for preventing the chilling of the fire and
    boiler-flues.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclass 87 for cupola screens.


CLS 110/180
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to doors and casings
    that are kept cool by the circulation of steam or air through them.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182,    for doors and casings where the fluid after passing through them is
    fed to the fire.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 497+ for boiler fronts.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclasses 243+ for fluid cooled still
    closures.

    432,    Heating, subclass 237 for the subcombination of a material heating
    chamber comprising a door, door frame or chamber cover having protective
    cooling structure.


CLS 110/181
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to the construction of
    casings and arches for furnace doors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180,    for casings containing conduits.

    331+,   for furnace arch construction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 85, 86+, 245+, and
    639+ for a curvilinear building construction of more general application.


CLS 110/182
TXT Arches and casings under subclass 181 with circulation conduits through
    which air or air and steam are passed to be fed to the furnace.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180,    for casings having conduits for cooling them through which air,
    steam, or water circulates, such steam or air not passing into the furnace.

    192,    for time limit controls.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 112 for devices for feeding air to
    hot air furnaces.


CLS 110/182.5
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to conduits for feeding
    air to furnaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    297+,   for feeding of air to a firebox.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 6.6+ for tuyeres in
    boilers.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 186+, 218+, and 265+ for
    tuyeres used in a metallurgical furnace.


CLS 110/182.6
TXT Tuyeres under subclass 182.5 for a type used in a forge and in which the
    direction of the air blast is usually vertical.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195,    for forge furnace structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 6.7 for forge tuyeres in
    boilers.


CLS 110/184
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to metal smokestacks of
    locomotives and portable boilers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160+,   for stacks having air jet draft regulators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g. Buildings), subclasses 218, 219, and 245+
    for flues or curvilinear constructions there provided for.

    104,    Railways, subclass 52 for locomotive smokejacks.

    114,    Ships, subclass 187 for ship smoke- stacks.

    454,    Ventilation, subclass 2 for vehicle stacks, per se.


CLS 110/185
TXT WITH CONTROL MEANS RESPONSIVE TO A SENSED CONDITION:

    Apparatus under the class definition provided with detection means for
    sensing a particular state, property, or characteristic or a change in the
    state, property, or characteristic of the apparatus or combustion
    constituents or combustion products used or produced by the apparatus and
    with a mechanism, actuated by or responsive to the detection means, for
    regulating the operation of the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191+,   for apparatus under the class definition provided with means
    designed to control the apparatus in a particular mode or for a particular
    time duration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, for a furnace with a
    control.  See headnote V, B, 2 of these definitions.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 78+ for metallurgical furnaces
    provided with control means responsive to a sensed condition.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 8+ for such
    furnace provided with environmental control system.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 18+ for liquid or gaseous fuel burning
    apparatus provided with control means responsive to a sensed condition.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 36+ for apparatus for generating heat and
    applying same to materials provided with control means responsive to a
    sensed condition.


CLS 110/186
TXT Feed control:

    Apparatus under subclass 185 wherein the mechanism is provided for
    regulating the supply of combustion constituents to the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  The term "combustion constituents" includes solid fuel or
    combustible refuse singularly or combined with fluid fuel as well as a
    noncombustible fluid such as air, water, or steam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101+,   for subcombination fuel feeders, per se.

    103,    particularly for a boiler controlled subcombination fuel feeder.

    267,    for furnaces provided with means for feeding solid fuel to same.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 449 for the combination of
    boiler structure with means to control the combustion of solid fuel and the
    regulation of water feed to the boiler structure.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 750.1+ for a
    reciprocating-type conveyor provided with control means responsive to a
    sensed condition; and subclass 810 for an endless belt conveyor provided
    with control means responsive to a sensed condition.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 18+ for apparatus for
    charging a chamber used for a heating function provided with a control
    system responsive to supply or discharge of material to the chamber.


CLS 110/187
TXT Supplemental burner:

    Apparatus under subclass 186 wherein means are provided for controlling the
    addition of supplemental heat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 14 and 15
    for regulation of fuel and air supply by condition of furnace or by
    combined boiler and furnace.


CLS 110/188
TXT Of noncombustible fluid; e.g., air, etc:

    Apparatus under subclass 186 wherein the constituent being supplied is air,
    steam, or water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    297+,   for furnace structure provided with fluid supply means.


CLS 110/189
TXT Pressure sensor:

    Apparatus under subclass 188 wherein the sensed state, property, or
    characteristic is the force per unit area existing at a point within the
    combustion chamber or in fluid lines connected thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for a subcombination fuel feeder controlled by boiler pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclass 89 for metallurgical treating
    apparatus provided with control means responsive to pressure variations.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 19 for a fluid fuel burner provided with
    control means responsive to sensed pressure within its burning chamber.


CLS 110/190
TXT Temperature sensor:

    Apparatus under subclass 188 wherein the sensed state, property, or
    characteristic is sensible heat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclass 87 for metallurgical treating
    apparatus provided with control means responsive to temperature.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 68 for a fluid fuel burner provided with
    control means responsive to temperature.


CLS 110/191
TXT WITH PROGRAMMED OR CYCLIC CONTROL MEANS:

    Apparatus under the class definition provided with (a) means for storing
    coded instructions or other data necessary to regulate the operation of the
    apparatus, or (b) means repetitively regulating the sequence of operational
    steps performed in or by the apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclass 111.2 for dry
    closets having cyclic control means.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclass 96 for a metallurgical treating
    apparatus provided with programmable control means.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 18+ for a fluid fuel burner provided with
    programmable control means.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 51+ for heating apparatus provided with
    programmable control means.


CLS 110/192
TXT Timer:

    Apparatus under subclass 191 wherein means are provided to control any or
    all of the operation(s) or operational step(s) of the apparatus for a
    specific duration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 285.5 for a damper provided with a
    timer control means.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 97+ for a metallurgical
    apparatus provided with a timer control means.


CLS 110/193
TXT WITH SAFETY MEANS:

    Apparatus under the class definition provided with means to prevent direct
    injury to the apparatus or to a human being.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 504+ for a boiler
    provided with safety devices.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclass 174 for an ore treating or metal
    extracting furnace provided with a safety device; and subclass 903 for a
    cross-reference art collection to safety devices.


CLS 110/194
TXT CREMATORY:

    Apparatus under the class definition specially adapted for the burning of
    human corpses or animal carcasses.


CLS 110/195
TXT FORGE:

    Apparatus under the class definition specially adapted for building a
    blacksmith's fire generally consisting of an open firepot and means for
    feeding air thereto, together with other combustion features peculiar to
    such an organization.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182.6,  for a subcombination tuyere for use in a forge furnace.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 49+ for a hood or offtake means for
    ventilating a forge furnace.


CLS 110/196
TXT STRAW BURNER AND FEEDER:

    Apparatus under the class definition specially adapted for burning straw
    and the feeding means thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 222 to 225 for burning refuse in a
    domestic stove or furnace.


CLS 110/197
TXT External structure detachable from firebox: Apparatus under subclass 196
    having fireboxes located exteriorly of the main furnace structure and
    capable of being readily separated or detached therefrom.


CLS 110/198
TXT LOCOMOTIVE:

    Apparatus under the class definition specially adapted for use with
    mechanical structure movable upon a railway track and propelled by a steam
    engine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 37+ for steam locomotive, per se.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 434 for boiler water
    preheater combined with locomotive tender water tank.


CLS 110/199
TXT Having noncombustible fluid feed means:

    Apparatus under subclass 198 provided with means to inject air, steam, or
    water into a combustion chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    297,    for other types of combustion apparatus with fluid feed means.


CLS 110/200
TXT And noncombustible fluid treatment means: Apparatus under subclass 199
    provided with means for modifying the physical properties of the fluid
    prior to its injection into the combustion chamber.

    (1)     Note.  Physical properties include temperature, pressure, and
    volume of the fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301+,   for other furnace structure provided with noncombustible fluid
    treatment means.

    342+,   for process of treatment.


CLS 110/201
TXT Preheater:

    Apparatus under subclass 200 wherein the modifying means is provided to
    increase the temperature of the fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302+,   for other types of solid fuel combustion apparatus having a
    preheater.


CLS 110/202
TXT Undergrate feed:

    Apparatus under subclass 199 provided with means for feeding the fluid
    below the combustion reaction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312,    for other combustion apparatus provided with undergrate fluid feed
    means.


CLS 110/203
TXT WITH EXHAUST GAS TREATMENT MEANS:

    Apparatus under the class definition provided with means for conditioning
    combustion products subsequent to their production and prior to their
    venting to the atmosphere to render them less objectionable to the
    environment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    345,    for process of exhaust gas treatment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 144+ for metallurgical treating
    apparatus provided with means for treating the exhaust fumes produced
    during the metallurgical treatment.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 66, 67+, and 72 for a heating means of general
    utility provided with means for treating or handling exhaust gases.


CLS 110/204
TXT Recirculation means:

    Apparatus under subclass 203 wherein the conditioning means returns all or
    part of the products of combustion to a combustion chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 79 for a heating stove provided with
    means for returning the combustion products to the combustion chamber.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclass 156 for metallurgical treating
    apparatus provided with exhaust gas recycling means.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 115+ for fluid fuel burners provided with
    exhaust gas recirculation means.


CLS 110/205
TXT Air supply means:

    Apparatus under subclass 204 provided with means for introducing air into
    the combustion products being returned to the combustion chamber.


CLS 110/206
TXT Including pump:

    Apparatus under subclass 205 provided with means for impelling the returned
    combustion products into the combustion chamber.


CLS 110/207
TXT Eductor:

    Apparatus under subclass 206 wherein the impelling means is a moving stream
    of fluid which mixes with and draws the returning combustion products into
    the combustion chamber.


CLS 110/208
TXT Furnace having multiple firebox:

    Apparatus under subclass 203 having a plurality of combustion chambers and
    further provided with means for passing combustion products from one
    combustion chamber to another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    295+,   for other types of multiple firebox combustion apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 57 and 60 provided with
    multipart water fireboxes provided with means for passing combustion
    products from one part to the other.


CLS 110/209
TXT By undergate means:

    Apparatus under subclass 208 provided with means for passing combustion
    products beneath a combustion reaction.


CLS 110/210
TXT Afterburning means:

    Apparatus under subclass 203 wherein the treating means includes means to
    effect combustion of unburned components in the gaseous products of
    combustion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    431,    Combustion, appropriate subclass for fluid fueled burners.


CLS 110/211
TXT Means directing main flame or combustion products for afterburning:

    Apparatus under subclass 210 wherein means is associated with the main
    burner to direct a portion of the flame into an afterburning zone spaced
    from the main combustion zone or to redirect the gaseous products of
    combustion through the flame of the main burner.


CLS 110/212
TXT Liquid or gaseous fueled:

    Apparatus under subclass 210 wherein an auxiliary fluid fueled burner is
    used to assist in effecting combustion of unburned components in the
    gaseous products of combustion.


CLS 110/213
TXT Swirl inducing:

    Apparatus under subclass 212 wherein the fluid fueled burner is arranged to
    induce a turbulent or whirling motion to the products of combustion to
    promote burning of the unburned components.


CLS 110/214
TXT Including means to add air:

    Apparatus under subclass 210 including means to supply air to the
    afterburner zone to effect combustion of the unburned components of the
    gaseous products of combustion.


CLS 110/215
TXT Means contacting exhaust gas with liquid: Apparatus under subclass 203
    including means to commingle or otherwise encounter the gaseous products of
    combustion with a liquid medium to remove impurities from the gaseous
    products.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119+,   for devices for preventing live sparks from passing out of the
    stack or chimney. The devices include screens, baffles, steam, or water
    sprays located in smokebox or stack.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclass for
    apparatus of general utility for contacting a gas with  a liquid.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 146+ for metallurgical
    apparatus provided with means for contacting an exhaust gas with a liquid.


CLS 110/216
TXT Means separating particles from exhaust gas:

    Apparatus under subclass 203 including means to remove particulate matter
    suspended in the gaseous products of combustion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119+,   for devices for preventing live spark from passing out of the stack
    or chimney of furnaces. The devices include screens, baffles, steam, or
    water sprays located in smokebox or stack.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, for apparatus for gas separation, per
    se.


CLS 110/217
TXT Outlet screen:

    Apparatus under subclass 216 wherein the chimney or flue has a foraminous
    member for preventing discharge of solid particles to the environment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119+,   for means preventing live sparks from passing out of the stack or
    chimney.


CLS 110/218
TXT WITH FUEL TREATMENT MEANS:

    Apparatus under the class definition provided with means to enhance the
    combustible properties of the solid fuel to be burned or refuse to be
    incinerated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    342+,   for process of treatment.


CLS 110/219
TXT Preliminary refuse treatment means:

    Apparatus under subclass 218 provided with means for conditioning the
    refuse to be incinerated prior to burning.


CLS 110/220
TXT Sorter:

    Apparatus under subclass 219 provided with means for separating the waste
    material on the basis of some physical characteristic.

    (1)     Note.  Some of the physical characteristics upon which the material
    is separated are size, magnetic properties, removal of liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses for sorting or separating solid materials, per se, and subclass
    11 for sorting or separating solid materials combined with heat treatment.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclass for
    separation from a liquid of any character of material.


CLS 110/221
TXT Dewatering:

    Apparatus under subclass 220 having means for removing liquid from the
    refuse.

    (1)     Note.  The devices of this subclass are provided with means which
    effect the physical separation of solids and water, as for example,
    centrifuges, strainers, skimming devices, etc. Those devices which merely
    heat a watery mass to evaporate the water contained therein will not be
    found in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224+,   for devices which drive water from a wet mass by the application of
    heat thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses for
    liquid purifiers and separators.


CLS 110/222
TXT Comminutor:

    Apparatus under subclass 219 provided with means for breaking up or
    reducing in size the waste material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    for fuel feeders having blowers combined with pulverizers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate subclass
    for comminuting or disintegrating apparatus, per se, or combined with
    heating means where no chemical change to the material heated occurs.


CLS 110/223
TXT Compactor:

    Apparatus under subclass 219 provided with means for condensing or
    densifying the waste material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses for press structure, per se, and
    subclasses 92+ for press combined with heating means for drying without
    producing incineration.


CLS 110/224
TXT Dryer:

    Apparatus under subclass 219 provided with means for driving off moisture
    from the waste material by heating the material prior to delivery to an
    incineration zone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclass
    for methods and apparatus not provided for elsewhere for removing excess or
    unwanted moisture from solid materials.  Further, see the search note in
    the class definitions of Class 34 for a statement of the line between Class
    34 and Class 110.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclass 175 for means to preheat or to
    dry a charge prior to its entry into a metallurgical furnace.


CLS 110/225
TXT Furnace with multiple hearth:

    Apparatus under subclass 224 provided with plural drying means wherein the
    refuse is moved progressively from one drying zone to another.


CLS 110/226
TXT Rotary drum type:

    Apparatus under subclass 224 wherein the means to drive off the moisture
    includes a barrel-like receptacle which is mounted to revolve about its
    longitudinal axis while the material is being dried.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246,    for incinerating apparatus employing rotary drum-type structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 130+ for
    rotary drum-type driers.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclass 173 for rotary drum preheating or
    drying apparatus.


CLS 110/227
TXT Having means to effect or facilitate refuse movement:

    Apparatus under subclass 224 having means to either cause or to aid in the
    passage of the material being treated from a drying zone to a combustion
    zone.


CLS 110/228
TXT Mechanical conveying means:

    Apparatus under subclass 227 wherein the means to cause or to aid in the
    passage of the material includes a power-driven conveyor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 618+ for a conveyor of general
    utility.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 147+ for an apparatus for
    charging a chamber used for a heating function other than incineration.


CLS 110/229
TXT Means for liberating gas from solid fuel:
    Apparatus under subclass 218 wherein the means produces a combustible fluid
    from the solid fuel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclasses 61+ for a gas producer,
    per se, in which the produced or liberated gas is not burned during its
    production, and subclass 113 for a gas generator of the furnace retort type.

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 39.12 for a combustion products generator
    provided with means to produce a combustible gas which is subsequently
    delivered to and burned in the generator.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 5 for the combination of
    boiler structure intimately related with a gas producer.


CLS 110/230
TXT Coking means:

    Apparatus under subclass 229 provided with means to separate or eliminate
    the combustible fluid from the solid fuel such that the distilled fuel is
    mainly consumed within the combustion chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 66 for a boiler combined
    with a water cooled coking chamber.


CLS 110/231
TXT Undergrate:

    Apparatus under subclass 230 provided with means to pass the separated
    fluid under the fuel supporting means and through a combustion reaction.


CLS 110/232
TXT Means for pulverizing solid fuel:

    Apparatus under subclass 218 wherein the means is capable of comminuting or
    disintegrating solid lump fuel into powdered fuel for use in a powdered
    fuel burner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222,    for a comminutor for disintegrating waste material combined with an
    incinerator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses for comminuting or disintegrating apparatus, per se, or combined
    with heating means where no chemical change to the heated material occurs.


CLS 110/233
TXT COMBINED:

    Apparatus under the class definition including means in addition to the
    incinerating or burning apparatus for performing some additional
    nonincinerating or nonburning function or for perfecting the operation of
    the basic incinerating or burning apparatus not provided for in another
    class.

    (1)     Note.  See headnote V, Relationship to Combination Classes, of
    these (Class 110) definitions for structure of another class combined with
    a Class 110, Furnaces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 4 for combined
    cleaning and incineration.

    71,     Chemistry:  Fertilizers, subclasses 11+ for the making of
    fertilizer from refuse material.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 92+ for compacting combined with heating means
    for drying without incineration.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 224 and 225 for refuse burners
    structurally related to cooking or heating stoves.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, appropriate subclass for the recovery of
    metals from refuse material.  Where a number of diverse constituents are
    reclaimed; e.g., glass and lead, etc., classification is in this (110)
    class.


CLS 110/234
TXT With boiler:

    Apparatus under subclass 233 wherein the addition apparatus is a liquid
    heater or vaporizer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 2 for significant boiler
    structure combined with an incinerator or solid fuel burning apparatus.


CLS 110/235
TXT REFUSE INCINERATOR:

    Apparatus under the class definition specially adapted for burning waste
    material.

    (1)     Note.  Includes apparatus for the destruction by burning of
    unwanted materials which materials include solids, liquids, or mixtures
    thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 224 for a domestic stove or furnace
    which uses garbage or refuse as fuel.


CLS 110/236
TXT Means for cleaning by combustion:

    Apparatus under subclass 235 including means to effect the burning of the
    unwanted waste material from a salvable item.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of devices to be found herein are incinerators to
    burn the upholstery from car bodies, means to burn insulation from wires,
    etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 1+ and
    especially subclasses 19+ for methods of cleaning salvable objects by
    combustion.


CLS 110/237
TXT For explosive or radioactive material:

    Apparatus under subclass 235 specially adapted to burn radioactive or
    explosive waste material.


CLS 110/238
TXT For liquid refuse:

    Apparatus under subclass 235 specially adapted for the burning of liquid
    waste material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    431,    Combustion, appropriate subclass for apparatus for burning fluid
    fuels.


CLS 110/239
TXT For stump in situ:

    Apparatus under subclass 235 specially adapted for burning stumps of trees
    in their original place.

    (1)     Note.  Generally the apparatus is in the form of a hood enclosing
    the stump.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 271.3 for solid fuel furnaces for
    thawing frozen earth.


CLS 110/240
TXT Vehicle mounted:

    Apparatus under subclass 235 wherein the incinerator is mounted on an
    ambulant structure.


CLS 110/241
TXT Portable:

    Apparatus under subclass 235 wherein the incinerator is constructed to be
    readily transported from place to place.


CLS 110/242
TXT Closed vessel:

    Apparatus under subclass 235 wherein the incinerator is a sealed container
    into which the refuse is placed and incinerated over the fire.

    (1)     Note.  The vessel may or may not have means for dumping its
    contents on the fire.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclasses 119+ for retorts
    pertinent to that class.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclasses 86+, 96+, 105+, and 217+ for
    distillation retorts.


CLS 110/243
TXT Refuse suspended in or supported by a fluid medium:

    Apparatus under subclass 235 wherein the incinerator consists of means by
    which the material to be incinerated either floats on the surface of a body
    of liquid or is carried within and by a moving stream of gas during its
    incineration.


CLS 110/244
TXT Suspended in a gaseous medium:

    Apparatus under subclass 243 wherein the incinerator consists of means by
    which the material to be incinerated is carried within and by a moving
    stream of gas during its incineration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261+    and 263+, for fine fuel burned in suspension.


CLS 110/245
TXT Fluidized bed of noncombustible particles:
    Apparatus under subclass 244 wherein the incinerator consists of means by
    which a distinct, flowable stratum of nonburnable particulate matter is
    formed in the combustion zone by the action of gas passing upwardly through
    the stratum.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 576+ for
    fluid current conveying of treated material.

    432,    Heating, subclass 215 for a residual work tumbling-type or work
    heating furnace utilizing a solid fluent heat carrier.


CLS 110/246
TXT Rotary drum:

    Apparatus under subclass 235 wherein the incinerator is a barrellike
    receptacle within which the refuse material is placed, which receptacle is
    mounted to revolve about its longitudinal axis during incineration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    432,    Heating, subclasses 103+ for a residual work tumbling-type heating
    furnace.


CLS 110/247
TXT Rotary grate movable about a vertical axis: Apparatus under subclass 235
    wherein the incinerator has a grate that revolves about an axis which is
    generally normal to the horizon upon which grate the refuse is supported.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    275,    for a rotary grate movable about a vertical axis for burning solid
    fuels other than refuse.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclass 803.16 for a power-driven rotary
    conveyor, per se.


CLS 110/248
TXT Refuse supported above grate:

    Apparatus under subclass 235 wherein the incinerator has means to support
    the refuse over the grate in spaced relation thereto, which means allows
    for circulation of air through the refuse.


CLS 110/249
TXT Reverberatory type:

    Apparatus under subclass 235 wherein the incinerator has means to shield
    the refuse over which the flames of the furnace pass to consume the refuse.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224,    for similar structure wherein the refuse is dried on a platform or
    shelf and then transferred to the incineration zone.


CLS 110/250
TXT With electric heater:

    Apparatus under subclass 235 including electrical heating means to assist
    or perform incineration of the refuse.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclass 111.5 for dry
    closets having electric heating means.

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclass for electric heating
    structure.


CLS 110/251
TXT Including air supply means extending vertically within refuse:

    Apparatus under subclass 235 having means extending upwardly within a mass
    of the refuse to supply air thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    297+,   for means feeding air to firebox of a solid fuel furnace.


CLS 110/252
TXT With supplementary burner:

    Apparatus under subclass 251 including a burner for discharging hot gases
    or flames vertically into the mass of refuse.


CLS 110/253
TXT With means shielding burner from refuse:

    Apparatus under subclass 235 including means to prevent refuse from
    clogging or effecting operation of the burner.


CLS 110/254
TXT With air preheater:

    Apparatus under subclass 235 including means to raise the temperature of
    air being delivered to the combustion chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201,    for a locomotive-type furnace provided with a noncombustible fluid
    preheater.

    302,    for a furnace for burning solid fuel other than refuse provided
    with a noncombustible fluid preheater.


CLS 110/255
TXT With means for advancing or handling refuse or residue:

    Apparatus under subclass 235 including similar means for feeding,
    conveying, or agitating refuse to or within the combustion chamber or for
    discharging ash from the chamber, without particular heating or combustion
    chamber structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101+,   for subcombination solid fuel feeding means.

    267+,   for a furnace for burning solid fuel other than refuse provided
    with means to feed the fuel to the furnace.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses for conveyor
    structures.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 147+ for feeding,
    conveying, or agitating refuse to or within the combustion chamber or for
    discharging ash from the chamber.  Without particular or combustion chamber
    structure.


CLS 110/256
TXT Means for feeding through chimney:

    Apparatus under subclass 255 having means to deliver the refuse through the
    chimney or offtake flue to the combustion chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116+,   for chute feeding means for solid fuel furnace.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, appropriate subclass
    for chute feeding means.


CLS 110/257
TXT Continuous advance:

    Apparatus under subclass 235 having mechanical means to cause or aid in
    continuous movement of refuse through the furnace.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    267+,   for progressive feed of solid fuel.


CLS 110/258
TXT Refuse agitating:

    Apparatus under subclass 255 having means within the combustion chamber to
    stir or shake the burning mass of refuse.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247,    for agitators combined with a rotary grate, vertical axis.


CLS 110/259
TXT Residue handling; e.g., ash, etc.:
    Apparatus under subclass 255 for receiving or removing the spent solid
    products of combustion from the incinerator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165+,   for ash receiving and handling for a pulverized fuel furnace
    provided with residue handling means.

    266,    for a pulverized fuel furnace provided with residue handling means.


CLS 110/260
TXT INCLUDING FLUID FUEL BURNER:

    Apparatus under the class definition provided with means for burning solid
    fuel and liquid or gaseous fuel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 22 for a combined boiler
    with a solid and fluid fuel furnace, and subclass 211 for a sectional
    boiler combined with a solid and fluid fuel furnace.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 36 for a culinary heating stove, and
    subclass 116 for a combined coal and liquid or gaseous fueled hot air
    furnace.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 74+ for fluid fuel outing
    apparatus provided with means for feeding solid material for enhancing the
    cutting operation.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 159+ for a fluid fuel burner provided in a
    combustion furnace.


CLS 110/261
TXT Powdered solid fuel:

    Apparatus under subclass 260 capable of burning pulverized solid fuel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for a subcombination blower-type fuel feeder.

    233,    for furnace structure combined with solid fuel pulverizing means.

    263+,   for a pulverized fuel furnace adapted to burn only solid pulverized
    fuel.

    347,    for process of pulverized fuel combustion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 39.461 for a power plant using combustion
    products as a motive fluid adapted to use powdered fuel.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 9+ for fluid fuel metal cutting
    apparatus provided with means to feed adjuvant powder.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, especially subclasses
    79+ and 336 for a fluid distributor, per se, which may include means to mix
    a plurality of fluents, one of which may be a fluent solid; see search note
    to Class 239 in the Class 431 class definition for the line between those
    classes.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate subclass
    for comminuting or disintegrating apparatus, per se, or combined with
    heating means where no chemical change to the heated material occurs.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 173 for fluid fuel burner provided in a
    combustion furnace wherein the fuel is fed into a circular chamber
    substantially tangentially to the wall of the chamber.


CLS 110/262
TXT Alternate fuel:

    Apparatus under subclass 261 wherein the apparatus is capable of burning
    either powdered solid fuel or fluid fuel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 22 for a boiler which can
    be alternately heated by solid or fluid fuel, and subclass 211 for a
    sectional boiler which can be alternately heated by solid or fluid fuel.


CLS 110/263
TXT UTILIZING POWDERED FUEL:

    Apparatus under the class definition provided with means for burning
    pulverized solid fuel which has been suspended in air such that the burning
    occurs as the fuel remains so suspended.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for a subcombination blower-type fuel feeder.

    232,    for furnace structure combined with solid fuel pulverizing means.

    261,    for powdered fuel furnace structure provided with a fluid fuel
    burner.

    347,    for process of fluidized fuel combustion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 39.461 for a power plant using combustion
    products as a motive fluid adapted to use powdered fuel.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate subclass
    for comminuting or disintegrating apparatus, per se, or combined with
    heating means where no chemical change to the heated material occurs.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 173 for fluid fuel burner provided in a
    combustion furnace wherein the fuel is fed into a circular chamber
    substantially tangentially to the wall of the chamber.


CLS 110/264
TXT Having rotary flow means:

    Apparatus under subclass 263 provided with vane or vanelike structure
    through which the pulverized fuel and air mixture is caused to flow into
    the combustion chamber thereby producing a rotary flow of the mixture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213,    for an incinerator or solid fuel furnace provided with a liquid or
    gaseous fuel swirl inducing after-burner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 173+ for fluid fuel circular combustion
    furnace structure in which the fuel is fed tangentially into the furnace.


CLS 110/265
TXT Having secondary air mixing means:

    Apparatus under subclass 263 provided with variable control means to
    intermingle the suspended pulverized fuel with air other than that used to
    suspend the fuel to thereby produce a desired air-fuel mixture.


CLS 110/266
TXT With residue handling means (e.g., ash, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 263 further provided with means to remove or
    dispose of the solid or liquid waste produced by the combustion of the
    pulverized solid fuel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165+,   for subcombination ash receiving and handling devices.

    259,    for residue handling combined with incinerator structure.

    342+,   for process of treatment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 242 for domestic stoves and furnaces
    provided with means for the removal and collection of ashes.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 209+ for a discharging
    device of a chamber used for a heating function.


CLS 110/267
TXT INCLUDING MEANS TO FEED SOLID FUEL:

    Apparatus under the class definition provided with means for conveying lump
    combustible material to the combustion chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101+,   for subcombination fuel feeder structure.

    186+,   for solid fuel feed means combined with control means responsive to
    a sensed condition.

    255+,   for refuse feed means combined with incinerator structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 376 for boiler structure
    provided with means for feeding fuel along a water cooled grate.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 176+ for ore treating or metal
    extracting means provided with means for moving the material being treated
    through a heating zone.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 147+ for a driven means
    for charging a chamber used for a heating function.

    432,    Heating, subclass 121 for a heating chamber provided with means for
    moving work therethrough, and subclasses 239+ for a feeding or conveying
    subcombination specialized for heating.


CLS 110/268
TXT Movable grate:

    Apparatus under subclass 267 wherein the fuel conveying means in an
    ambulatory perforated plate or bar structure which also supports the fuel
    during the burning.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    328,    for a grate element, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 152+ for grate structure
    specialized for use with a domestic furnace, stove, or range.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 178+ for ore treating or metal
    extracting apparatus provided with a traveling grate.


CLS 110/269
TXT Endless chain:

    Apparatus under subclass 268 wherein the movable grate is composed of an
    assemblage of link sections attached together to form a beltlike conveyor
    structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329,    for endless chain element, per se, or for an assemblage of endless
    chain elements not claimed with other furnace structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 804+ for endless conveyor
    structure, per se.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 157 and 196  for a  merely
     named heating chamber structure combined with endless conveyor charging
    means.


CLS 110/270
TXT Including air supply means:

    Apparatus under subclass 269 provided with means for introducing air to the
    endless chain grate to thereby promote and support the burning of the fuel
    on the grate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    348,    for process of fluid feed.


CLS 110/271
TXT And chain seal:

    Apparatus under subclass 270 further provided with means contiguous to and
    communicating with the chain grate to prevent the escape of supplied air or
    burning gases associated with the burning fuel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclass 179 for an ore treating or metal
    extracting apparatus provided with a traveling grate having seal means.

    432,    Heating, subclass 242 for subcombination feeding or conveying
    structure provided with means to seal the opening by which the work is
    moved into the chamber, or subclass 244 for preventing leakage through the
    chamber wall.


CLS 110/272
TXT Between runs:

    Apparatus under subclass 209 wherein the seal means is located either
    within the interior or contiguous to a longitudinal side of the endless
    grate.


CLS 110/273
TXT Inclined run:

    Apparatus under subclass 269 provided with means to vertically dispose one
    end of the chain grate so that the longitudinal axis of the grate is at an
    angle with the horizon.


CLS 110/274
TXT Mobile support:

    Apparatus under subclass 269 wherein the grate rests upon an ambulatory
    structure capable of allowing the entire grate to be moved as an entity
    with respect to the remainder of the combustion apparatus.


CLS 110/275
TXT Rotary:

    Apparatus under subclass 268 wherein the grate or grate element is movable
    about its longitudinal axis and further wherein the fuel is fed onto the
    top of the grate or grate element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247,    for a combination of a refuse incinerator provided with a vertical
    axis rotary grate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclass 803.16 for a rotary conveyor, per
    se.


CLS 110/276
TXT About horizontal axis:

    Apparatus under subclass 275 wherein the axis of the rotary grate is at a
    right angle to plumb line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246,    for an incinerator provided with a rotary drum movable on a
    horizontal axis for processing refuse.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 181 for domestic furnace, stove, or
    range grate horizontally pivoted and capable of rotary motion.


CLS 110/277
TXT Conical type:

    Apparatus under subclass 275 wherein the rotary grate is in the shape of a
    pyramid having a circular base.

    (1)     Note.  The grate may be either of an upright or an inverted cone
    shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    287+,   for similar stationary inverted frustoconical grate structure.


CLS 110/278
TXT Oscillatory:

    Apparatus under subclass 268 wherein the grate or grate element is fixed at
    a fulcrum point and capable of moving alternately backward and forward
    thereby advancing the fuel along the grate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 170+ for grate structure for
    domestic stoves and furnaces capable of moving in a to-and-fro motion.


CLS 110/279
TXT Manual actuation means:

    Apparatus under subclass 278 further provided with means for producing the
    oscillatory motion by human hand motion.


CLS 110/280
TXT Multiple retort:

    Apparatus under subclass 278 provided with plurality of grate assemblages.


CLS 110/281
TXT Reciprocatory:

    Apparatus under subclass 268 wherein the grate or grate elements are
    mounted for linear alternate back and forth motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 174 for a domestic furnace, stove, or
    range grate capable of a horizontal to-and-fro movement.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 750+ for a reciprocating
    conveying surface, per se.


CLS 110/282
TXT Including power feed:

    Apparatus under subclass 281 further provided with fuel supply means driven
    by mechanical device for feeding the fuel from a supply hopper to the
    reciprocating moving grate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286+,   for a stationary grate provided with conveyor means.

    289,    particularly for a push ram-type feed conveyor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 657 for power-driven conveyors,
    per se, of similar structure.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclass 183 for ore treating or metal
    extracting means provided with power-driven conveying means.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 187+ for a merely named
    heating chamber provided with a hopper and a power-driven conveyor charging
    means.


CLS 110/283
TXT UNDERFEED:

    Apparatus under subclass 282 wherein the fuel supply means lies in a plane
    below the topmost point of the grate structure.


CLS 110/284
TXT Power feed perpendicular to grate:

    Apparatus under subclass 283 wherein the power feed means is at a right
    angle to the axis of the reciprocating motion of the grate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    289,    for a pusher ram feed means perpendicular to a static grate.


CLS 110/285
TXT Raking bar type:

    Apparatus under subclass 268 wherein the movable grate is composed of
    relatively long evenly shaped pieces of metal interposed with similar
    stationary metal pieces such that the movable grate produces a raking
    action to advance the fuel.


CLS 110/286
TXT Power driven:

    Apparatus under subclass 267 wherein the fuel conveying means is a machine
    propelled by mechanical energy.

    (1)     Note.  The term mechanical energy is to be distinguished from hand
    labor as being produced from a variety of electrical or mechanical motors
    or engines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 657 for power-driven conveyors,
    per se, of similar structure.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclass 183 for ore treating or metal
    extracting means provided with power-driven conveying means.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 147+ for a merely named
    heating chamber provided with a power-driven conveyor charging means.


CLS 110/287
TXT Having circular grate:

    Apparatus under subclass 286 provided with a fuel supporting means which is
    round in structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277,    for similar inverted frustoconical rotary grate structure with or
    without forced air means.


CLS 110/288
TXT And forced air supply:

    Apparatus under subclass 287 further provided with air fan impeller means
    for feeding air to the circular grate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    348,    for process of fluid feed.


CLS 110/289
TXT Pusher ram:

    Apparatus under subclass 286 wherein the fuel supply means includes a fuel
    engaging means and means to cause the engaging means to move alternately to
    and fro along a straight line from a fuel engaging point to a fuel
    releasing point.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 198 for a merely named
    heating chamber provided with a reciprocating pusher type charging means.


CLS 110/290
TXT Parallel to grate:

    Apparatus under subclass 289 provided with a fuel supporting means composed
    of an assemblage of elements the longitudinal axis of which is parallel to
    the axis of the straight line movement of the fuel supply means.

    (1)     Note.  The assemblage of grate elements comprises what is generally
    known in the solid fuel furnace art as a fuel retort.


CLS 110/291
TXT Inclined step grate:

    Apparatus under subclass 290 wherein the grate assemblage is composed such
    that the elements overlap one another in a descending configuration thereby
    producing a steplike structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    328,    for a grate element, per se.


CLS 110/292
TXT Separate feed:

    Apparatus under subclass 267 provided with means to supply the fuel in
    discrete separate quantities.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 147+ for a merely named
    heating chamber provided with discrete quantity charging means.


CLS 110/293
TXT Supply hopper;  e.g., magazine, etc.:

    Apparatus under subclass 267 wherein the feed means is of the chute type
    such that the fuel is fed to the combustion chamber by its own weight.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 30 for a boiler provided
    with a fuel magazine.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 7, 10, 11, 68, 73, and 74 for
    stoves having magazine fuel feed.


CLS 110/294
TXT Cage grate:

    Apparatus under subclass 293 wherein the lower part of the magazine has
    perforations or bars on opposite sides such that air may enter one side of
    the burning fuel and flames may pass out of the other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 373 for boilers with water
    cage grates.


CLS 110/295
TXT HAVING MULTIPLE FIREBOX:

    Apparatus under the class definition provided with more than one combustion
    chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 57 and 60 for similar
    structure in fire tube boilers.


CLS 110/296
TXT Including fluid supply means:

    Apparatus under subclass 295 provided with means to supply air, steam, or
    water to a combustion chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188+,   for a furnace provided with noncombustible fluid feed means
    provided with control means responsive to a sensed condition.

    348,    for process of fluid feed.


CLS 110/297
TXT INCLUDING NONCOMBUSTIBLE FLUID SUPPLY MEANS:

    Apparatus under the class definition provided with means to inject a
    noncombustible gas or liquid into a combustion chamber to thereby promote
    or support the combustion reaction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    348,    for process of fluid feed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 70 for boiler structure
    provided with an air feeding conduit.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 78 for a heating stove provided with
    a steam feeding device.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 186+ for ore treating or metal
    extracting apparatus provided with means for feeding fluids.


CLS 110/298
TXT Hollow grate:

    Apparatus under subclass 297 wherein the fluid supply means is composed of
    a mechanical structure provided with an internal closed cavity for allowing
    the fluid to pass therethrough such that mechanical structure is
    additionally used to support the fuel during combustion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 232 for a sectional boiler
    provided with a water grate; and subclasses 371+ for a boiler with a water
    grate.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 152+ for a grate for a furnace,
    stove, or range.


CLS 110/299
TXT Having flow controller:

    Apparatus under subclass 298 provided with means to directly modify the
    direction, velocity, or pressure of the fluid through the hollow grate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclass 187 for an ore treating or metal
    extracting apparatus provided with flow regulated fluid feed means.


CLS 110/300
TXT For forced air supply:

    Apparatus under subclass 299 wherein the flow control means is an impeller
    fan.


CLS 110/301
TXT Having treatment means:

    Apparatus under subclass 297 provided with means to modify the physical
    properties of the fluid passing into the combustion chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200,    for a locomotive-type furnace provided with noncombustible fluid
    treatment means.

    342+,   for process of treatment.


CLS 110/302
TXT Preheater:

    Apparatus under subclass 301 wherein the modifying means increases the
    temperature of the fluid prior to entering the combustion chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201,    for a locomotive-type furnace provided with a preheater.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 15 for a culinary heating apparatus
    provided with a preheater, subclass 58 for a heating stove provided with a
    preheater, and subclass 112 for a hot air furnace provided with a preheater.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 138+ for a metallurgical
    apparatus provided with means to preheat a gas or vapor supplied to the
    apparatus.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 78+ for a heating apparatus provided with means
    to heat incoming air.


CLS 110/303
TXT And furnace gas mixer:

    Apparatus under subclass 302 further provided with means to intermingle the
    incoming fluid with gases rising from the combustion of the fuel.


CLS 110/304
TXT Remote from combustion chamber:

    Apparatus under subclass 302 wherein the preheater is located such that it
    receives its heat from the combustion chamber exhaust gases, but the
    preheater is external to the combustion chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    432,    Heating, subclasses 179+ for a heated work chamber provided with
    exhaust preheater means.


CLS 110/305
TXT Bridgewall:

    Apparatus under subclass 302 further provided with a hollow barrier
    structure located at the rear of the fire grate attached to the preheater
    such that the heated fluid enters the combustion reaction from barrier
    structure.


CLS 110/306
TXT Water or steam:

    Apparatus under subclass 302 wherein the fluid being injected into the
    combustion chamber is water in either its liquid or gaseous state.


CLS 110/307
TXT Below grate:

    Apparatus under subclass 306 wherein the water or steam is fed below the
    fuel supporting means.


CLS 110/308
TXT Internal to or attachable to wall:

    Apparatus under subclass 302 wherein the preheater means is located on the
    interior of or is contiguous to a sidewall of the combustion chamber.


CLS 110/309
TXT And flow modifying means:

    Apparatus under subclass 301 further provided with means to modify the
    course of the fluid through the combustion chamber.


CLS 110/310
TXT Deflector:

    Apparatus under subclass 309 wherein the flow modifying means is in the
    form of a plate or sheet for diverting the fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322+,   for deflector element, per se.


CLS 110/311
TXT Grate mounted:

    Apparatus under subclass 310 wherein the deflector is attached to or
    substantially contiguous to the fuel supporting means.


CLS 110/312
TXT Below grate:

    Apparatus under subclass 311 wherein the deflector is located below the
    grate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202,    for noncombustible fluid feed means in a locomotive wherein the
    fluid is fed below the grate.


CLS 110/313
TXT Feed nozzle:

    Apparatus under subclass 309 wherein the flow modifying means is a terminal
    shaping outlet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclass for
    fluid spraying or diffusing nozzle, per se.


CLS 110/314
TXT Supplying through hollow bridgewall:

    Apparatus under subclass 297 provided with a vertical barrier structure at
    the rear of the firebox having a substantially closed cavity through which
    the fluid may pass into the combustion chamber.


CLS 110/315
TXT DOWNDRAFT:

    Apparatus under the class definition provided with a grate and further
    having means to cause the incoming air to flow down through the fuel and
    grate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 76 for a downdraft domestic heating
    stove.


CLS 110/316
TXT Grateless:

    Apparatus under subclass 315 wherein the fuel support means is the solid
    unperforated bottom of the combustion chamber.


CLS 110/317
TXT INCLUDING FIREBOX:

    Apparatus under the class definition relating to combustion chamber
    construction.


CLS 110/318
TXT Having arch:

    Apparatus under subclass 317 provided with structure specifically provided
    to reflect heat or combustion products in a desired direction or to a
    desired area.


CLS 110/319
TXT And flame shaper:

    Apparatus under subclass 318 provided with means having a series of
    relatively small openings designed to contour and direct the combustion
    flames onto the structure desired to be heated.

    (1)     Note.  The flame shaper is generally located at the rear of the
    combustion chamber and usually designed to heat the water boiler tubes of a
    boiler heating system.


CLS 110/320
TXT Adjustable dimension firebox:

    Apparatus under subclass 318 provided with means to vary the size of the
    combustion chamber either by a vertically movable grate, a movable
    bridgewall, or a movable dead plate which can vary the effective area of
    the grate surface.


CLS 110/321
TXT Door arch:

    Apparatus under subclass 318 wherein the arch extends from the front of the
    combustion chamber over the combustion reaction.


CLS 110/322
TXT BAFFLE OR HEAT RETAINER STRUCTURE:

    Structure under the class definition relating to construction specially
    designed or provided for to either reflect or retard heat.

    (1)     Note.  The baffle or heat retainer is generally provided for use
    with boiler water tubes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 503 for boiler structure
    combined with furnace having a water-cooled baffle for receiving the impact
    of burning fuel.

    432,    Heating, subclass 249 for heat shielding means for protecting the
    work or work area.


CLS 110/323
TXT Refractory type:

    Structure under subclass 322 wherein the baffle or retainer is composed of
    a ceramic or ceramic-like material which is resistant to high temperatures
    and large quantities of heat.


CLS 110/324
TXT Having concavity for engaging pipe exterior:

    Structure under subclass 323 wherein the refractory structure is provided
    with a negatively curved area adapted to mate with the external surface of
    a boiler tube.


CLS 110/325
TXT And structure to bridge pipes:

    Structure under subclass 324 wherein the refractory structure is further
    provided with a second concavity such that refractory structure
    simultaneously engages two separate boiler water tubes.


CLS 110/326
TXT Metallic type:

    Structure under subclass 322 wherein the baffle or retainer is composed of
    metal.


CLS 110/327
TXT SOLID FUEL FEED STRUCTURE:

    Structure under the class definition relating to a component of an
    apparatus, device, or mechanism used to supply either fluid or solid fuel
    to a combustion chamber of the class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186+,   for furnace feed means provided with control means responsive to a
    sensed condition.

    267,    for feed means combined with furnace structure.


CLS 110/328
TXT Movable grate:

    Structure under subclass 327 relating to a solid fuel feed component which
    additionally supports the fuel during burning.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 155+ for movable grate structures
    for a domestic furnace, stove, or range.


CLS 110/329
TXT Endless chain:

    Structure under subclass 328 relating to endless conveyor component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    269+,   for an endless belt feed grate combined with furnace structure.


CLS 110/330
TXT Having sprocket drive:

    Structure under subclass 329 provided with a wheel structure provided with
    projections on its periphery such that the projections engage chain links
    to thereby impel the chain.


CLS 110/331
TXT ARCH OR ROOF STRUCTURE:

    Structure under the class definition relating to combustion chamber ceiling
    construction provided to reflect and direct combustion gases and heat back
    to the burning fuel to thereby further promote the burning action.


CLS 110/332
TXT Planar surface area:

    Structure under subclass 331 wherein the roof has a flat horizontal contour.


CLS 110/333
TXT Inclined:

    Structure under subclass 332 further provided with a section having a plane
    surface area which is at an angle with the horizon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 90.1+ for a flat
    roof construction of general application.


CLS 110/334
TXT And convex surface area:

    Structure under subclass 333 further provided with an outwardly curved
    contoured area.

    (1)     Note.  The convex surface is usually known as a nose arch.


CLS 110/335
TXT Concave surface area:

    Structure under subclass 331 wherein the arch has an inwardly curved
    contour.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 86+, 245, and 639+
    for curved roof construction of general application.


CLS 110/336
TXT WALL STRUCTURE:

    Structure under the class definition relating to vertical barrier
    construction of a combustion chamber of the class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 6 for a boiler provided
    with a water cooled furnace wall.


CLS 110/337
TXT Bridgewall:

    Structure under subclass 336 relating to wall structure for use at the rear
    of the fire grate generally provided to turn the burning flame upwards and
    to the structure to be heated.

    (1)     Note.  The structure to be heated is usually a boiler water tube.


CLS 110/338
TXT BRICK ELEMENT:

    Structure under the class definition relating to a monolithic structure
    specially adapted for use as a basic building element in a furnace wall,
    ceiling, baffle, or arch.

    (1)     Note.  The brick element is generally composed of refractory
    material resistant to extreme temperatures for sustained periods of time.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 578+ for a module,
    per se, of general utility adapted to engage a similar module and provided
    with an intermediate distinct connecting means between connected modules,
    and subclasses 596+ for a module, per se, of general utility having an
    interrelating feature for engagement with a similar module.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 9.1+ for checker brick structure adapted
    to be assembled to form heat exchange open-work structure.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 267 for elemental materials of
    construction of structure of that class.


CLS 110/339
TXT Having hanger:

    Structure under subclass 338 provided with distinct attached means to allow
    the brick element to be suspended from a separate support structure.

    (1)     Note.  The brick element of this subclass is generally used to form
    a suspended arch or ceiling wherein the hanger consists generally of some
    type of metal bracket.


CLS 110/340
TXT And metal casing:

    Structure under subclass 339 further provided with a metallic sheathing
    enclosing substantially all of the brick element.

    (1)     Note.  The metallic casing acts as a seal between adjacent brick
    when assembled.


CLS 110/341
TXT PROCESS:

    Method under the class definition drawn to an operation peculiar to an
    apparatus of the class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 44+ for a process of operating
    a metallurgical apparatus.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 2+ for a process of operating a fluid fuel
    burner.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 1+ for a process of operating a heating
    apparatus.


CLS 110/342
TXT Treating fuel constituent or combustion product:

    Process under subclass 341 wherein the fuel, refuse, or a combustion
    product is subjected to a distinctive agent, action, device, or apparatus
    in order to bring about a desired result.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   for a locomotive-type furnace provided with means to treat a
    noncombustible fluid.

    218+,   for furnace structure combined with means to treat fuel prior to
    combustion.

    301+,   for furnace structure provided with means to treat a noncombustible
    fluid.


CLS 110/343
TXT To prevent corrosion of furnace:

    Process under subclass 342 wherein the desired result is the hindrance of
    the decay of the apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    431,    Combustion, subclass 3 for a process of clearing or preventing the
    accumulation of undesired matter from a fluid fuel burner.

    432,    Heating, subclass 2 for a process of clearing or preventing the
    accumulation of undesired matter from a heating apparatus.


CLS 110/344
TXT Combustion product:

    Process under subclass 342 for treating the material produced during the
    combustion reaction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259,    for refuse incinerator structure provided with ash handling means.

    266,    for powdered fuel furnace provided with ash handling means.


CLS 110/345
TXT Exhaust gas; e.g., pollution control, etc.:
    Process under subclass 344 wherein the materials to be treated are the
    gaseous fumes normally expended to the atmosphere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203+,   for furnace structure provided with exhaust gas treatment means.


CLS 110/346
TXT Incinerating refuse:

    Subject matter under subclass 341 including processes for the combustion of
    refuse material and the operation of incinerating apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235+,   for refuse incinerator structure.


CLS 110/347
TXT Burning pulverized fuel:

    Process under subclass 341 relating to the combustion of solid powdered
    fuel suspended in a fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232,    for furnace structure combined with means for pulverizing solid
    fuel.

    261+,   for furnace structure for burning pulverized fuel and fluid fuel.

    263+,   for furnace structure for burning pulverized fuel.


CLS 110/348
TXT Supplying fluid:

    Process under subclass 341 relating to the injecting of gases or liquids
    into the combustion apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclass 47 for a method of operating
    tuyere fluid feed means in metallurgical apparatus.


CLS 110/349
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Inventions under the class definition specially adapted for use with an
    apparatus of the class but not provided for elsewhere.


CLS 111/
TTL PLANTING

CLS 111/
TXT Processes and instruments for inserting in the ground seed, fertilizer,
    poison, plants, or other material or objects handled in a similar manner.
    Instruments for planting therefore include means for conveying, dropping,
    or directing material or objects to or upon the ground, combined with means
    for preparing the ground, as by furrowing, dribbling, or otherwise
    loosening or forming cavities therein for the reception of said material or
    objects, or with means for ridging, hilling, or other wise placing earth
    over said material or objects, or with both said means.

    (1)     Note.  This class includes, in addition to means for planting or
    burying certain specifically-named materials or objects (1)
    broadcast-planting, comprising means for depositing and spreading material
    in general uniformly over the surface, together with means operating on the
    surface (as plows, rollers, harrows) to prepare the surface to receive such
    uniformly-spread material or to cover it or mix it with earth; (2) drilling
    and dribbling, comprising means having earth-working tools or elements, (as
    furrow-opener, furrow-closer, hill-marker, cavity-former, etc.), together
    with means for depositing the material and in most instances means for
    separating the material from bulk.

    (2)     Note.  Mechanisms per se for dispensing or retailing material from
    bulk are classified in appropriate dispensing or material or article
    handling classes, as for example, Class 221, Article Dispensing, or Class
    222, Dispensing; but mechanisms comprising a valved chute to accumulate
    charges or otherwise peculiarly adapted to insure depositing at intervals,
    when specialized for use in a planter, are deemed to be planting devices
    and are classified in this class, subclasses 4+.

    (3)     Note.  The terms "pipe or strand" and "liquid or gas" are used in
    the titles of subclasses herein as typical of a class of materials rather
    than as limitations.  The term "planter element" as used herein includes
    devices peculiar or necessary to a complete planting operation, the usual
    elements being an earth-worker, a seed-depositor, and a covering device.


CLS 111/7.1
TXT Devices under subclass 118 where the earth working means are hand operated.


CLS 111/7.2
TXT Devices under subclass 7.1 having material supply means integral with the
    implement or directly supported by and carried with the implement.


CLS 111/7.3
TXT Devices under subclass 7.2 having a fluid control valve operated solely by
    contact of the implement with the ground.


CLS 111/7.4
TXT Devices under subclass 7.2 wherein the fluid is ejected by means of a force
    pump or other discharge assistant.


CLS 111/8
TXT Processes under the class definition of planting comprising both drilling
    and broadcasting operations or implements which by an interchange or shift
    of parts may be used at will to plant in drill or to broadcast or
    implements which by a combination of parts drill material and broadcast
    other material simultaneously.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14      and 130, and see the notes thereto.


CLS 111/9
TXT Instruments under subclass 8 embodying a main supporting-frame-section and
    an auxiliary frame-section, the latter usually composed of or carrying the
    earth-working tools and other elements and movable relative to the main
    frame-section.


CLS 111/11
TXT Broadcasting implements under subclass 130 having a device, such as a
    spreader, deflecting-board, blower, centrifugal blade, or the like, adapted
    to distribute the material over a more extended area than the normal
    discharge of the apparatus would otherwise effect.


CLS 111/12
TXT Implements under subclass 11 embodying also a main supporting-frame section
    and an auxiliary frame section, the latter usually composed of or carrying
    the earth-working elements and movably relatively to the main frame-section.


CLS 111/13
TXT Implements under subclass 130 embodying a main supporting-frame and an
    auxiliary frame, the latter carrying or unitary with the earth-working
    elements.


CLS 111/14
TXT Processes or instruments under the class definition for placing material in
    the ground, accompanied by the forming of a furrow to receive the material
    or the closing of a furrow containing such material or by the forming of a
    ridge over the deposited material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, appropriate subclass for a means to
    drive or impact a tool or the like, and particularly subclasses 184+ for
    such means mounted on a supporting vehicle.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, appropriate subclass for subject
    matter including steps or means to bore or penetrate the earth.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 174+ for a process or
    apparatus for laying pipe or cable into a submerged or subterranean
    location, and including a device for laying a cable which is nominally
    recited as a seed tape.


CLS 111/15
TXT Drilling machines under subclass 14 embodying means for accumulating
    charges of material for deposit at spaced points or means to insure the
    depositing of material at spaced points or to aline the points of material
    deposit in a plurality or substantially parallel lines.


CLS 111/16
TXT Devices under subclass 15 embodying instrumentalities for effecting a
    change in the relationship of machine parts for the purpose of starting or
    maintaining the transverse alinement of points of material deposit in
    successively-drilled lines.


CLS 111/17
TXT Devices under subclass 16 comprising an alinement-maintaining means
    responding to movements of the planter over uneven portions of traversed
    ground.


CLS 111/18
TXT The general organization of hill-planting machines, under subclass 15
    comprising the construction and arrangement of the supporting and operating
    frames and the relations of the hill-planting elements thereto and to each
    other.


CLS 111/19
TXT Devices under subclass 18 comprising and endless belt actuated by contact
    with the ground traversed for effecting the operation of the means for
    controlling or causing the delivery of the seed or other material from the
    hopper or other container.


CLS 111/20
TXT The frame under subclass 18 being in a plurality of sections adjoining in
    the supporting of the total load placed upon the machine.


CLS 111/21
TXT Devices under subclass 20 comprising forward and rearward sections
    connected by a transverse pivot and capable of a buckling action to lift
    certain parts of the planter from contact with the ground.

    (1)     Note.  In the usual type the forward frame carries the
    seed-dispensing elements and furrow-opener, which are lifted from the
    ground by a buckling or breaking of the joint between the frame sections
    through means generally located upon the rearward frame-section and
    comprising a lever mechanism.


CLS 111/22
TXT Devices under subclass 18 embodying a main supporting section and an
    auxiliary section having movement with relation to each other, the main
    frame being designed to support or carry the auxiliary frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19.


CLS 111/23
TXT The auxiliary section under subclass 22 consisting of or carrying a rotary
    spot-marking device from which power is taken to actuate the means for
    causing or controlling the delivery of seed or other material from the
    hopper or other container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19.


CLS 111/24
TXT The auxiliary section under subclass 22 carrying the hopper and dispensing
    devices.


CLS 111/25
TXT Dropping mechanism and mechanism under subclass 15 for making a mark to
    locate the dropped material, the actuation of which mechanisms has a fixed
    time relationship.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     comprising devices for and aids in producing a change in the timing
    of operation of the depositing and marking mechanisms.

    18+,    for organizations comprising depositing and marking mechanisms in
    combination with special planter-frame construction.


CLS 111/26
TXT Marking devices under subclass 25 wherein accomplished by dropping upon the
    ground traversed a distinctively colored powder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 656 for a
    device comprising plural containers for nonfluid materials and a scattering
    or strewing means, one of which materials may be a colored indicating
    powder.


CLS 111/27
TXT Depositing mechanism under subclass 25 driven from the marking mechanism,
    the driving power being produced by the engagement of the marking device
    with the ground during the travel of the planter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19      and 23.


CLS 111/28
TXT Wherein the marking device under subclass 27 is a revolving member having a
    wheel-like form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21      and 23.


CLS 111/29
TXT Marking device under subclass 25 is driven directly or indirectly from the
    main axle of the planter.

    (1)     Note.  Excludes machines in which marking arms, lugs or the like
    are mounted directly upon or formed integral with the supporting wheels or
    axle.  For such devices see this class, subclass 25.


CLS 111/30
TXT Wherein the marking device under subclass 29 is a tool which is plunged
    into the ground at intervals by a movement other than that of rotation, as
    by reciprocating or vibrating to and from the ground.


CLS 111/31
TXT Plunging marker under subclass 30 is so timed and located as to act as a
    cover for the deposited material.


CLS 111/32
TXT Marking device under subclass 29 is a revolving member of wheel-like form.


CLS 111/33
TXT Device under subclass 15 comprising means for intermittently impressing
    upon the ground traversed guide marks or impressions to indicate the points
    where the material should be planted to make aligned hills or combinations
    of such means with means for marking an unbroken line across a field as
    distinguished from a succession of spots.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 126+ for an apparatus including a means
    for making a continuous mark in the earth. Patents in which a planter is
    defined by name only are classifiable in Class 172, subclasses 126+ if the
    mark made is continuous.


CLS 111/34
TXT Dispensing or dropping devices under subclass 15 particularly adapted for
    use in hill-planting and characterized by means insuring discharge at
    intervals, such as a line-wire actuating or controlling means or a valved
    chute for checking or accumulating charges of material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for article dispensing
    devices, per se, and particularly subclass 185 for ambulant article
    dispensing devices.


CLS 111/35
TXT Depositing mechanism under subclass 34 adapted to be actuated through its
    cycle by any one of a plurality of means.

    (1)     Note.  The alternate operations of the mechanism may result in a
    change in the operation of the machine from hill-planting to simple
    drilling.


CLS 111/36
TXT Mechanism under subclass 34 wherein there is a primary and a secondary
    operating train, the source of power for the primary train being always
    from the axle of the traction wheels.

    (1)     Note.  In this type of machine the operation of the primary train
    may be modified or supplemented by the secondary, as when the primary
    serves to deliver seed from the hopper to the discharge chute and the
    secondary actuates a valve to release the seed from the chute.  The
    secondary train may be actuated from the axle or other source of power.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25.


CLS 111/37
TXT The mechanism under subclass 36 in whole or in part subject to a periodic
    control.

    (1)     Note.  The word "control" as herein used includes the initiation of
    the actuation, as by effecting a connection or disconnection of a
    driving-train, rather than the actuation itself for the dispensing elements.


CLS 111/38
TXT Devices under subclass 37 wherein intermittent control is effected by a
    wire having knots or equivalent, which engage suitable devices on the
    machine.


CLS 111/39
TXT Devices under subclass 38 wherein the intermittent control extends to means
    for the actuation of both the main dispensing device and an accumulating
    device.


CLS 111/40
TXT Devices under subclass 38 wherein the check-wire controls the actuation of
    the main dispensing means and also actuates the accumulator.


CLS 111/41
TXT Devices under subclass 36 wherein the dispensing element is actuated from
    the axle, while the check-wire actuates only the accumulator.


CLS 111/42
TXT Devices under subclass 34 wherein an endless belt having trip members
    engages a tappet, fork, or equivalent upon a rock-shaft or the like
    connected with the depositing devices.


CLS 111/43
TXT Devices under subclass 34 wherein actuation is effected solely by a wire or
    cable, which is anchored at a point outside of the machine and engages some
    relatively movable element of the machine.


CLS 111/44
TXT Devices under subclass 43 wherein the wire is wound upon a reel on the
    machine and actuates the depositing mechanism by reason of the winding or
    unwinding due to the draft of the wire during the traverse of the machine.


CLS 111/45
TXT Devices under subclass 43 wherein the line-wire carries knots and actuates
    the depositing mechanism by tripping a forked device connected thereto.


CLS 111/46
TXT Devices under subclass 43 wherein the tripped fork actuates both the main
    dispensing element and the accumulator.


CLS 111/47
TXT Devices under subclass 43 comprising a forked element or the like combined
    with guiding devices for directing the knot into contact with the forked
    element; also modifications of structure and means to accomplish the
    attachment or detachment of the wire and the fork.


CLS 111/48.1
TXT Guide:
    Device for guiding the line-wire to and from, across, or through the
    planting machine.


CLS 111/49
TXT Devices under subclass 43 for staking the ends of a line-wire,
    characterized generally by the presence of means for shifting the attached
    end laterally or providing additional length or wire, etc., as the planter
    approaches that end of the line-wire.

    (1)     Note.  Compare Classes 104, Railways, subclass 124; 114, Ships,
    subclasses 204+; 119, Animal Husbandry, subclasses 120 and 121; and 135,
    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclass 118.


CLS 111/50
TXT Devices under subclass 34 wherein the depositing devices are operated at
    will by the hand or foot of the operative.


CLS 111/51
TXT Devices under subclass 34 having combinations of a main dispensing element
    and a valved chute.


CLS 111/52
TXT Devices under subclass 14 having general organization of the supporting and
    operating frame of a drilling-machine other than hill-planters and the
    relation of the planting elements thereto and to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 43+ for vehicles having vertically
    adjustable wheels.


CLS 111/53
TXT Devices under subclass 52 wherein the frame being in a plurality of
    sections joining in the support of the total load placed upon the machine.


CLS 111/54
TXT Devices under subclass 53 wherein sections of the frame hingedly connected
    to permit relative movement of the sections.


CLS 111/55
TXT Devices under subclass 54 comprising also a frame designed to be supported
    or carried by the hinged sections of the main frame.


CLS 111/56
TXT Devices under subclass 54 comprising forward and rearward sections
    connected by a transverse pivot and capable of a buckling action to lift
    certain parts of the planter from contact with the ground.

    (1)     Note.  In the usual type the forward frame carries the
    seed-dispensing elements and furrow-opener, which are lifted from the
    ground by a buckling or breaking of the joint between the frame sections
    through means generally located upon the rearward frame section and
    comprising a lever mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 325 for a break joint frame in which
    earth-working tools are carried on a tongue means vertically pivoted to a
    wheel frame.


CLS 111/57
TXT Devices under subclass 53 wherein the sections of the main frame having
    capacity of movement to each other resulting in an enlargement of frame to
    cover increased area of ground.


CLS 111/58
TXT Devices under subclass 57 wherein the sections of the extensible frame
    mounted to move upon vertical pivots and movable toward and from each other
    at one end only of the frame.


CLS 111/59
TXT Devices under subclass 52 embodying a main supporting section and a
    secondary section having movement with relation to each other, the main
    frame-section being designed to support or carry the secondary frame.


CLS 111/60
TXT Devices under subclass 59 wherein a plurality of secondary frames are
    associated with a main frame.

    (1)     Note.  Where the several auxiliaries are identical in structure and
    function, and therefore constitute a mere duplication of a single auxiliary
    of that type, they are classified as if only a single auxiliary were
    present.


CLS 111/61
TXT Devices under subclass 60 wherein movement of the auxiliaries is controlled
    by a single means, usually such as a lever mechanism, for elevating or
    depressing the earth-working elements from or toward the ground.


CLS 111/62
TXT Devices under subclass 59 in operative position the auxiliary being free to
    trail or move with relation to the main frame to accommodate itself to the
    unevenness or inequalities of the ground traversed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23.


CLS 111/63
TXT Devices under subclass 62 wherein the floating auxiliary frame carries the
    hopper and dispensing devices.


CLS 111/64
TXT Devices under subclass 63 wherein the hopper-carrying auxiliary having the
    general form of planter or distributer attachable and detachable with
    respect to an otherwise complete machine, as a wagon, cultivator, or the
    like.


CLS 111/65
TXT The machine under subclass 64 and its attached planter or distributer
    constituting a complete planting instrumentality of the single row or drill
    type.


CLS 111/66
TXT Device under subclass 62 wherein the floating or trailing auxiliary frame
    comprising one or more drags or push-bars by which the earth-working
    elements or tools are carried.


CLS 111/67
TXT Devices under subclass 66 provided with means for lifting the tool-bars
    from contact with the ground and at the same time disconnecting the driving
    devices of the depositing mechanism.


CLS 111/68
TXT Devices under subclass 59 wherein the auxiliary frame elevated and
    depressed by means of a cranked ground-wheel axle forming part of or
    mounted upon the main or supporting frame of the planter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 395+ for earth-working apparatus having
    ground wheels mounted on crank axles which are vertically adjustable
    relative to the frame of the apparatus.


CLS 111/69
TXT Devices under subclass 52 having provision in the construction of the frame
    for the adjustment of planter elements individually thereon, vertically, as
    to elevate or depress them; laterally, as to vary the distance between
    drilled rows, or longitudinally, as to change the relative spacing of
    elements acting in a single row.


CLS 111/70
TXT Devices under subclass 52 wherein the frame is of general rigid structure
    or has no hinged or articulated parts.


CLS 111/71
TXT Devices under subclass 70 carrying planter elements for drilling one row
    during one traverse, as distinguished from those implements that drill a
    plurality of rows during one traverse.


CLS 111/72
TXT Devices under subclass 71 comprising a depositing mechanism operable by the
    muscular power of the operative.


CLS 111/73
TXT Devices under subclass 71 comprising means for depositing a plurality of
    different materials in the same drill or trench.


CLS 111/74
TXT Devices under subclass 71 wherein the material is dispensed from a hopper
    that has a movement of rotation always in the same direction when the
    planter is moving in one direction.


CLS 111/75
TXT Devices under subclass 71 wherein the material is dispensed from a hopper
    that has a back-and-forth movement, either oscillating or reciprocating.


CLS 111/76
TXT Devices under subclass 71 wherein the material is dropped upon a vibrating
    chute, from which it is discharged to the ground.


CLS 111/77
TXT Devices under subclass 71 wherein the material is dispensed from a hopper
    by means of an element revolving in such manner as to intermittingly
    discharge or control the discharge from a nonrotatable and nonvibrating
    hopper.


CLS 111/78
TXT Devices under subclass 77 wherein the rotating dispenser is mounted
    directly upon the driving-axle.


CLS 111/79
TXT Devices under subclass 14 wherein organized planting implements are
    peculiarly adapted to single-row drilling not involving specified relation
    to frame arrangement.


CLS 111/80
TXT Devices under subclass 79 adapted to deposit a plurality of materials.


CLS 111/81
TXT Devices under subclass 79 wherein the invention alleged lies in the
    arrangement of material depositing and earth-working elements with relation
    to each other only.

    (1)     Note. For arrangements for planting elements associated with and
    effected by peculiarities of the supporting frame see this class,
    subclasses 52+.


CLS 111/82
TXT Implements under subclass 79 constructed or adapted to be propelled by the
    muscular power of a man.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 351+ for hand propelled earth-working
    devices.


CLS 111/83
TXT Planting elements under subclass 14 comprising a plow for forming a wide
    trench and means for drilling material in a relatively narrow drill in the
    bottom thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 721+ for lister plows.


CLS 111/84
TXT Devices under subclass 14 wherein bars are with planting elements thereon
    designed to be dragged over the earth.

    (1)     Note.  The drag-bar unit may be considered as a special type of
    auxiliary frame carrying a furrow-opening and other planter elements of the
    single-row planter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66+.


CLS 111/89
TXT Processes of and instruments under the class definition for placing
    material in general in the ground, comprising the forming of a cavity other
    than a furrow therein to receive the material and the depositing of the
    material in said cavity.

    (1)     Note.  The cavity may be formed by removing earth or by displacing
    it, as by a piercing-tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, appropriate subclasses for wells for receiving fluids from
    the earth or inserting fluid into the pores of an earth formation.


CLS 111/90
TXT Devices under subclass 89 comprising a rotating material-dispensing
    receptacle, which usually also carries the tools for forming the cavity.


CLS 111/91
TXT Devices under subclass 90 comprising a rotating member carrying the
    cavity-forming tools.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90.


CLS 111/92
TXT Hand devices under subclass 89 for forming a depression in the earth and
    depositing material therein.

    (1)     Note.  For hand devices which merely form a depression, see this
    class, subclass 99.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106+    and 118+.


CLS 111/93
TXT Implements under subclass 92 designed to be attached to some vehicle,
    traveling agricultural implement, or the like and operable at will by the
    operative.

    (1)     Note.  Typified by the "replanting" attachments for cultivators.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50      and 82.


CLS 111/94
TXT Devices under subclass 92 comprising means, such as a plurality of chutes
    or material- guideways, for insuring a deposit of material in spaced
    relationship within the "hill".


CLS 111/95
TXT Devices under subclass 92 comprising a material-depositing mechanism with
    means to control or regulate the discharge of material at will.


CLS 111/96
TXT Devices under subclass 95 including a sliding member designed to be plunged
    into the ground to form a cavity, the dropping of material being under the
    control of said member.


CLS 111/97
TXT Devices under subclass 92 including a plurality of pivoted staves adapted
    to cooperate in forming a cavity in the ground, the dropping of material
    being under the control of said staves.


CLS 111/98
TXT Devices under subclass 92 including a foot- plate, which is brought into
    contact with the ground in forming the cavity, the dropping of material
    being under the control of said foot-plate.


CLS 111/99
TXT Hand implements under subclass 89 for forming a cavity other than a furrow
    in the ground to receive material.

    (1)     Note.  For manually operated implements for holding material,
    making a cavity in the ground and depositing the material therein, see this
    class, subclasses 106+ and 92+.

    (2)     Note.  For tools for forming similar cavities in the earth and
    introducing liquid vapor, or gas into contact with or beneath the surface
    of the soil, see this class, subclasses 118+.

    (3)     Note.  For an earth-perforating means which makes a plurality of
    holes in the ground by means which enter and leave the ground at the same
    angle see Class 172, Earth Working, subclasses 21+ and for rolling
    implements with tines which may perforate the ground see subclasses 540+.

    (4)     Note.  For devices for boring or perforating the earth to form a
    hole therein, see Class 175, and particularly subclasses 327+ for an
    earth-boring bit or bit element.

    (5)     Note.  For manually-operated implements for digging a hole and
    gripping and removing material therefrom, see Class 294, Handling:  Hand
    and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 50.5 to 50.9.


CLS 111/100
TXT PLANT SETTING:
    Process or apparatus under the class definition for placing plants or
    primordial plant material such as cuttings, slips, tubers, clones, or the
    like into the soil or a soil confining receptacle at an attitude which
    permits and for the purpose of facilitating subsequent growth thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199,    for seed tape planters which may contain seedlings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclasses 73+ for transplanting containers, per
    se; and subclasses 85 and 86 for modular containers, per se.


CLS 111/101
TXT Excavating transplanter:
    Apparatus under subclass 100 in which a means such as a blade, scoop,
    shovel or the like is impressed into the soil to surround the bulk of a
    plant's root system and which can be manipulated so that a substantially
    undisturbed root ball is removed from the soil to facilitate moving of the
    plant to a new growing location.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus of this subclass are disclosed as being used for
    plants to be transplanted or saved as opposed to apparatus found in Class
    37, subclasses 302 and 303 which are "stump removers" which merely remove
    or destroy plants.  Apparatus which places the excavated plant into a
    container will be found here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 302 and 303 for stump removers and see (1)
    Note above.

     47,    Plant Husbandry, subclass 76 for receptacles, per se, for the root
    balls of trees.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 1 for methods of
    recovering buried objects; and subclass 50 for extractors, per se.


CLS 111/102
TXT Through mulch:
    Process or apparatus under subclass 100 where the plant material is
    implaced through a natural or synthetic layer which breaks up the
    capillarity of a mineral soil layer therebeneath.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 9 for mulching, per se.


CLS 111/103
TXT Laterally shifted to final position:
    Process or apparatus under subclass 100 which includes a provision or
    special structural feature which causes the plant material to be moved into
    its final growth position from a direction which is parallel to the soil
    surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62      and 191+, for rolling packers whcih may express pressure laterally
    against planted material.


CLS 111/104
TXT Plant dispensing (i.e., singulation from a bulk source):
    Process or apparatus under subclass 100 which includes a supply of living
    plant material and which further includes means to select a single element
    from the supply for spaced or timed delivery to the soil.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for the subcombination
    of a dispenser.


CLS 111/105
TXT Supply in organized array:
    Process or apparatus under subclass 104 wherein the bulk supply of plant
    material includes an organizer for the material such as a tape, chain,
    tray, string, band or the like.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 331 for a moveable rack
    having superposed charge supporting elements and external means for
    discharging the elements; and subclasses 403+ for a device for emptying
    portable receptacles.


CLS 111/106
TXT Manually operated implement:
    Apparatus under subclass 100 manipulated and directly controlled by the
    exertion of muscle power by the operator to perform the needful planting
    operation.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include hand propelled machines
    wherein the cycle of operations is performed without hand control other
    than the propulsion of the machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     for hand propelled, single row seed planting implements and see (1)
    Note above.

    92,     for similar devices for forming a depression and depositing
    material in the earth.

    99,     for hand devices which merely form a depression in the soil.

    101,    for manually-operated excavating transplanters.


CLS 111/107
TXT With furrow opener:
    Apparatus under subclass 106 further including a device adapted to be drawn
    through the soil to open a long shallow narrow trench therein into which
    plants or plant materials are set.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
    14,     for drilling machines for seed planters.

    109+,   for machine powered, plant setting drilling machines.

    120+,   for drilling machines including liquid or gas soil treatment.


CLS 111/108
TXT With irrigator:
    Apparatus under subclass 106 further including a reservoir for containing a
    plant watering liquid and a manually operated release means for dispensing
    a portion of such liquid into the general area of the set plant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.1,    for hand-manipulated devices which direct liquid, gas or vapor into
    contact with or beneath the top surface of the soil.

    110,    for plant setting drilling machines with irrigators.


CLS 111/109
TXT Drilling machines (i.e., furrow opener):
    Apparatus under subclass 100 including a device adapted to be drawn through
    the soil to open a long, shallow, narrow trench therein and further
    including a depositing device which sets plants in the trench.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
    14+,    for drilling machines for seed planters.

    120+,   for drilling machines including liquid or gas soil treatment, but
    not used for plant setting.


CLS 111/110
TXT With irrigator:
    Apparatus under subclass 109 further including a reservoir for containing a
    plant watering liquid and means for dispensing a portion of such liquid
    within the formed furrow or into the general area of the set plant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for manually-powered plant setting machines which include an
    irrigator.

    120+,   for drilling machines which treat the soil with a gas or liquid.


CLS 111/111
TXT Runner opener:
    Apparatus under subclass 109 wherein the opening element is symmetrically
    arranged with respect to the line of draft, has an earth- breaking portion
    which extends downwardly and rearwardly from the top front portion of the
    element, and has side portions extending rearwardly and diverging outwardly
    from the earth- breaking portion and which become generally planar and
    parallel to each other towards the rear of the element so that the element
    has an overall shape which resembles the bow portion of a boat.

    (1)     Note.  This definition comprehends flat-bottomed structures or
    structures which have a bottom which is V-shaped in cross-section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    for runner-type openers used in con-junction with a liquid or gas
    soil treat      ment.

    152,    for runner-type openers used with seed depositors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 721+ runner-type openers, per se.


CLS 111/112
TXT Rotating or orbiting opener:
    Apparatus under subclass 109 wherein the opening element turns, spins, or
    revolves about an axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121+,   for a rotary opener associated with liquid or gas soil treatment.

    157+,   for a rotary opener associated with seed depositors

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 518 for a rotating or orbiting
    earth-working tool, per se.


CLS 111/113
TXT Power operated:
    Apparatus under subclass 112 wherein the opening element derives its rotary
    or orbiting motion from forces transmitted thereto by means other than or
    in addition to, the opener's frictional contact with the soil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    for power-operated rotary furrowers associated with liquid or gas
    soil treatment.

    158+,   for power-operated rotary furrowers associated with seed depositors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 35+ for power-operated earth working
    tools, per se.


CLS 111/114
TXT Plant containing receptacle impressed into soil:
    Process or apparatus under subclass 100 wherein the plants are situated
    within a specialized container, and means are provided which act in
    coordination with the specialized container for exerting a force on such
    container to press the container into the soil and wherein at least a
    portion of the container remains in the soil with the root system of the
    plant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclasses 73+ for receptacles, per se, used in
    transplanting; and subclass 84 for shipment packaging of plants.


CLS 111/115
TXT Dibbler:
    Apparatus under subclass 100 including means to form a cavity, other than a
    furrow, in the soil by a nub, stem, nipple, dagger, probe, protrusion, or
    the like which is intermittently impressed and removed from the soil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89+,    for a dibbler associated with a seed depositor and particularly
    subclass 99 for a hand im-plement type of dibbler.


CLS 111/116
TXT Auger type:
    Apparatus under subclass 115 wherein the dibbler forms a hole in the soil
    by means of at least one element which is rotated as it is forced into the
    soil, the element including a cutting edge and an upwardly directed helical
    surface which feeds engaged soil upwardly with rotation of the element to
    remove soil from the hole.


CLS 111/117
TXT Angled:
    Apparatus under subclass 115 wherein the dibbler is forced into the soil at
    an orientation which is other than generally perpendicular to the soil
    surface.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus of this subclass may include a ram or motor
    causing the dibbler to enter the soil by a chopping action or swinging
    motion about a pivot.


CLS 111/118
TXT LIQUID OR GAS SOIL TREATMENT:
    Process or apparatus under the class definition for directing liquid, gas,
    or vapor into contact with or beneath the top surface of the soil.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are patents claiming a means to spray a
    liquid onto the surface of the soil and means to scratch or disturb the
    soil where the spraying and soil disturbance, as disclosed, are applied to
    the same area of the soil to facilitate penetration of the liquid into the
    soil.  See the Notes to Class 47, subclass 1.1 for a statement of the line

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    for implements having means to hold or guide plants into the ground.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 48.5 for soil-treating devices of
    cartridge or container form to be buried in and to remain in the ground,
    usually discharging their irrigating or fertilizing contents over a period
    of time; and subclass 1.7 for similar combinations of liquid sprayers and
    soil-disturbing means where the sprayer, as disclosed, is adapted to spray
    a plant; and subclass 1.01 for this combination where, as disclosed, the
    soil is disturbed at an area other than that sprayed.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 271.1+ for means to apply hot gas
    (e.g., steam or flame) to the earth or other surface for the purpose of
    heating said surface.

    166,    Wells, appropriate subclasses for subject matter relating to the
    treating of wells by directing fluid into the well or the adjacent earth.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for fluid dispensers.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses
    for means to spray a liquid onto the ground surface where no means is
    provided to disturb the ground to facilitate penetration of the soil by the
    liquid.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 38 for machines which
    inject a waterproof material into the soil for creating a water barrier to
    retain irrigation water in arid soil; subclasses 53+ for subject matter
    relating to the storing of fluid underground for subsequent recovery; and
    subclasses 12+ for irrigating systems involving the conduction of liquids
    in channels or the like.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclasses 38+ and 185 wherein the
    claimed treatment fluid may contain entrained solid treatment materials,
    and soil disturbance is not claimed.

    504,    Plant Protecting and Regulating Compositions, subclasses 116+ for
    processes of treating terrestrial or aquatic plants or their habitat by
    applying a specific chemical thereto.


CLS 111/119
TXT Treating substance includes ammonia (e.g., flashing control):Apparatus
    under subclass 118 including a special provision for the problems inherent
    with the storage, handling, or dispensing of ammonia into the soil because
    of its low boiling point.


CLS 111/120
TXT Drilling machine (i.e., furrow opener):
    Apparatus under subclass 118 further including a device adapted to be drawn
    through the soil to open a long, shallow, narrow trench therein into or
    about which the liquid or gas treatment is applied.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14+,    for drilling machines for seed planting.

    109+,   for drilling machines for plant setting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 9 for vertical mulchers having plow
    openers.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 681+ for a specific type of earth-working
    tool.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 154+ for machines which
    lay pipe, cable, or the like behind furrow openers.


CLS 111/121
TXT Rotating or orbiting opener:
    Apparatus under subclass 120 wherein the opening element turns, spins, or
    revolves about an axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112+,   for a rotary opener associated with plant setting.

    157+,   for a rotary opener associated with seed depositors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 518+ for a    rotating or orbiting
    earth-working tool, per se.


CLS 111/122
TXT Power operated:
    Apparatus under subclass 121 wherein the opening element derives its rotary
    or orbiting motion from forces transmitted thereto by means other than, or
    in addition to, the opener's frictional contact with the soil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for power-operated rotary furrowers associated with plant setting.

    158+,   for power-operated rotary furrowers associated with seed depositors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 35+ for powered rotating earth working
    tools.


CLS 111/123
TXT Chisel opener:
    Apparatus under subclass 120 wherein the opening element is specifically
    disclosed as working deep in the soil and having such a configuration that
    it merely lifts the soil and does not shift it laterally of the line of the
    furrow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156,    for a chisel opener used with a seed planter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 699+ for chisel type openers, per se.


CLS 111/124
TXT Shoe opener:
    Apparatus under subclass 120 wherein the opening element is symmetrically
    arranged with respect to the line of draft, has an earth breaking portion,
    has wing portions extending laterally beyond the sides thereof which form a
    V-shape when viewed in plan or front elevation, and has a portion extending
    upwardly from the central portion of the V for attachment to a standard.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    for a shoe-type opener used with a seed depositor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 724 and 730   for shoe-type openers, per
    se.


CLS 111/125
TXT Runner opener:
    Apparatus under subclass 120 wherein the opening element is symmetrically
    arranged with respect to the line of draft, has an earth- breaking portion
    which extends downwardly and rearwardly from the front portion of the
    element and has side portions extending rearwardly and diverging outwardly
    from the earth breaking portion and which become generally planar and
    parallel to each other towards the rear of the element so that the element
    has an overall shape which resembles the bow portion of a boat.

    (1)     Note.  This definition comprehends flat bottomed structures or
    structures which have a bottom which is V-shaped in cross-section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111,    for runner-type openers used for plant setting.

    153,    for runner-type openers used with seed depositors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 721+ for runner-type openers, per se.


CLS 111/126
TXT Moldboard opener:
    Apparatus under subclass 120 wherein the opening element includes a
    landside which has a member adapted to slide over the soil to receive the
    side pressure caused by soilworking, a point for making an initial cut in
    the earth, a share for making a substantially horizontal cut beneath the
    surface to cut a slice of soil, and a board to guide and completely invert
    the soil slice.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 366+ for similar   ditching-type excavation
    plows.

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 754 for moldboard openers, per se.


CLS 111/127
TXT Injector nozzle situated above soil surface:
    Process or apparatus under subclass 118 wherein the treating fluid is
    caused to enter the soil or to disturb the soil by action of a pressurized
    fluid issuing from a nozzle which is spaced at a selected distance above
    the surface of the soil.


CLS 111/128
TXT Rotating dibble injector:
    Process or apparatus under subclass 118 including a revolving, cavity
    forming tool and timing means which causes introduction of the treating
    fluid into the soil in timed relationship with the penetration of the soil
    by the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     for a rotating dibble carrying tool used with a seed depositor.


CLS 111/129
TXT Multiple fluid treatment:
    Process or apparatus under subclass 118 wherein the treating fluid is at
    least two disparate substances delivered to the soil in a fluid state or
    dissolved or entrained in a carrying fluid.


CLS 111/130
TXT BROADCASTING:
    Process or apparatus which is adapted to strew seed, fertilizer, or
    particulate matter with substantial uniformity, but with no specific
    pattern, upon and to mix the same with the soil.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffus-ing, subclasses 650+ for
    apparatus adapted to strew or scatter nonfluid material, without mixing or
    covering with soil.


CLS 111/131
TXT Including powered tiller:
    Apparatus under subclass 130 including a device which turns over or mixes
    the soil and which derives its motion from forces transmitted thereto by
    means other than, or in addition to, frictional contact with the soil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161,    for material deposited into a tiller  operating zone wherein the
    tiller forms furrows.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, appropriate subclasses for specific types of powered
    tillers.


CLS 111/132
TXT Material dispensed ahead of tiller:
    Apparatus under subclass 131 wherein the strewn material is first deposited
    on the soil and thereafter mixed with the soil by the powered tiller.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160,    for a powered rotary furrow opener wherein material is deposited
    ahead of the furrow opener.


CLS 111/133
TXT Material dispensed behind tiller:
    Apparatus under subclass 131 wherein the soil is first turned over and
    mixed by the powered tiller and thereafter the material is strewn upon the
    turned over or mixed soil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162,    for a power-rotary furrow opener wherein the material is deposited
    behind the opener.


CLS 111/134
TXT Gauge means for auxiliary frame:
    Apparatus under subclass 62 which includes a means to effectively control
    the cutting depth of a furrow opener mounted on a floating auxiliary frame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 738 for an adjustable gauge runner and
    subclass 764 for runner or shoe gauges, per se.


CLS 111/135
TXT Rotating gauge means:
    Apparatus under subclass 134 wherein the means to control the cutting depth
    of the furrower opener turns, spins, or revolves about an axis.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are gauge wheels that precede an opener
    acting in conjunction with packer wheels that follow openers, which
    together effectively gauge the cutting depth of an opener mounted on an
    auxiliary frame.


CLS 111/136
TXT Packing means gauges opener:
    Apparatus under subclass 135 wherein the rotating gauging means serves the
    auxiliary function of moving or compressing soil back into the furrow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191+,   for rotating-packing means which does not gauge a floating
    auxiliary frame.


CLS 111/137
TXT Adjustable gauge wheels separate from packer:
    Apparatus under subclass 135 wherein the rotating-gauge means selectively
    supports the opener so as to operate at any of a variety of set depths.


CLS 111/138
TXT Sled frame:
    Apparatus under subclass 134 in which the gauging means comprises a pair of
    spaced parallel runners which slide over the surface of the soil, and an
    opening element is positioned between and supported by both runners.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 393 for sled frames limited to working the
    earth.


CLS 111/139
TXT Including trash control accessory:
    Apparatus under subclass 14 including a specific device which cuts, breaks
    up, moves, or removes living vegetation, fallow, stones, clods, residue or
    the like from the path of the opener.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 29 for a means  for shifting surface
    material without soil disturbance.


CLS 111/140
TXT Coulter:
    Apparatus under subclass 139 wherein the trash control accessory includes a
    device which cuts a vertical slit in the trash or soil to clear and
    predefine a path for an opener which follows thereafter and which has a
    vertically extending portion operating in the slit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 165 for the combination of a coulter and an
    earth-working tool.


CLS 111/141
TXT Dozer (e.g., deflector):
    Apparatus under subclass 139 wherein the trash control accessory includes
    at least one primary blade set at a predetermined height above the soil and
    positioned ahead of the opener to grade or deflect laterally obstructive
    material from the path of the opener.


CLS 111/142
TXT With tine:
    Apparatus under subclass 141 wherein the primary dozing blade has attached
    thereto a secondary blade which serves to scratch, sweep, or rake at least
    a portion of the path of the opener.


CLS 111/143
TXT Having holddown:
    Apparatus under subclass 139 wherein the trash control accessory includes
    means for positioning or holding trash or plants (e.g., weeds) so that they
    may be covered or cut by the operation of the opener.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 29+ and 514 for holddowns for
    earth-working machinery.


CLS 111/144
TXT Including mulching accessory:
    Apparatus under subclass 14 including a specific means to change the
    compaction or arrangement of, and thereby the capillarity of soil areas
    down to a preselected depth along a path which includes and is wider than
    the width of the furrow formed by the opening means.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are devices which break up soil (i.e.,
    crust) which lies in and to the side of the path of the opener and also
    devices which form a mulched surface wider than the furrow and which follow
    the depositing device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 9 for mulching devices, per se.


CLS 111/145
TXT Harrow:
    Apparatus under subclass 144 in which the mulching accessory comprises a
    framework which includes a plurality of spikes or sharpened disks which are
    drawn through the soil.


CLS 111/146
TXT Spring tooth:
    Apparatus under subclass 145 wherein the harrow includes resilient spikes
    which are drawn through the soil.


CLS 111/147
TXT Including subsoiler (i.e., deep soil tiller):
    Apparatus under subclass 14 including a specific soil-penetrating device
    preceding the material-depositing means which enters and disturbs soil to a
    depth which exceeds the depth at which seeds are to be deposited.

    (1)     Note.  The subsoiler may act as the primary furrow opener in
    combination with and ahead of such an opener.


CLS 111/148
TXT With furrow smoother:
    Apparatus under subclass 147 which further include a device which follows
    the subsoiler and function to fill, cover or even out the soil disruption
    caused by the subsoiler.

    (1)     Note.  These devices generally operate between the subsoiler and
    the furrow opener and may take the form of a rolling or nonrolling member.


CLS 111/149
TXT Furrow opener:
    Apparatus under subclass 14 wherein significance is attributed to a device
    adapted to be drawn through the soil to open a long, shallow, narrow trench
    therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107+,   for manually-operated furrow openers used with plant setting
    machines.

    109+,   for furrow openers used with plant setting machines.

    120+,   for drilling machines including liquid or gas soil treatment.


CLS 111/150
TXT Including dispensed material deflector:
    Apparatus under subclass 149 further including a device mounted on or a
    surface associated with the opener to cause a change in the direction of
    the material being deposited to generate a preferred pattern of material
    placement within the opened soil.


CLS 111/151
TXT Including trip mechanism:
    Apparatus under subclass 149 including means permitting the furrow opening
    element to shift with respect to the soil or with respect to its supporting
    or propelling means when it meets an obstacle while being drawn over the
    field, said means (1) having a high initial resistance to said shifting of
    the element, which resistance decreases after the element starts to shift,
    or (2) requiring manual resetting by an attendant (e.g., shear pin).

    (1)     Note.  This definition comprehends flat bottomed structures or
    structures which have a bottom which is V-shaped in cross-section.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 260.5, 261+, and 705 for trip mechanisms
    for earth-working elements used without material depositors.


CLS 111/152
TXT Shoe opener:
    Apparatus under subclass 149 wherein the opening element is symmetrically
    arranged with respect to the line of draft, has an earth- breaking portion,
    has wing portions extending laterally beyond the sides thereof which form a
    V-shape when viewed in plan or front elevation, and has a portion extending
    upwardly from the central portion of the V for attachment to a standard.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124,    for a shoe-type opener used with a seed depositor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 724 and 730   for shoe-type openers, per
    se.


CLS 111/153
TXT Runner opener:
    Apparatus under subclass 149 wherein the opening element is symmetrically
    arranged with respect to the line of draft, has an earth- breaking portion
    which extends downwardly and rearwardly from the top front portion of the
    element, and has side portions extending rearwardly and diverging outwardly
    from the earth- breaking portion and which become generally planar and
    parallel to each other towards the rear of the element, so that the element
    has an overall shape which resembles the bow portion of a boat.

    (1)     Note.  This definition comprehends flat-bottomed structures or
    structures which have a bottom which is V-shaped in cross-section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111,    for runner-type openers used with a plant setting drilling machine.

    125,    for runner-type openers used in conjunction with a liquid or gas
    soil treatment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 707+ for resilient tine-type furrow
    openers, per se.


CLS 111/154
TXT Boot opener (e.g., tooth or tine):
    Apparatus under subclass 149 having a generally elongated-furrow-opening
    element having a soil-working portion and a standard to support it in
    furrow opening position in which the soil working portion is no longer in
    lateral and longitudinal extent than the standard.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 713 for boot-type furrow openers, per se.


CLS 111/155
TXT Spring formed tool or standard:
    Apparatus under subclass 154 in which the furrow-opening element or its
    intermediate supporting means is formed of resilient material.

    SEARCH CLASS

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 707+ for resilient tine-type furrow
    openers, per se.


CLS 111/156
TXT Chisel opener:
    Apparatus under subclass 149 wherein the opening element is specifically
    disclosed as working deep in the soil and having such a configuration that
    it merely lifts the soil and does not shift it laterally of the line of the
    furrow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123,    for a chisel-type opener used with a liquid or gas soil treatment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 699+ for          chisel-type openers,
    per se.


CLS 111/157
TXT Rotary opener:
    Apparatus under subclass 149 wherein the opening element turns, spins, or
    revolves about an axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112+,   for a rotary opener associated with plant setting.

    121+,   for a rotary opener associated with a liquid or gas soil treatment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 518+ for a    rotating earth-working
    tool, per se.


CLS 111/158
TXT Power rotated:
    Apparatus under subclass 157 wherein the opening element derives its rotary
    motion from forces transmitted thereto by means other than, or in addition
    to, the opener's frictional contact with the soil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for power-operated rotary furrowers associated with plant setting.

    122,    for power-operated rotary furrowers associated with a liquid or gas
    soil treatment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 35+ for powered-rotating earth working
    tools.


CLS 111/159
TXT With tine:
    Apparatus under subclass 158 in which the rotating opener has teeth,
    projections, blades, or other configurations spaced circumferentially and
    projecting generally at right angles to the axis of rotation to engage the
    soil intermittently or with a varying effect as the opener turns.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 540 for a tined  earth-working implement,
    per se.


CLS 111/160
TXT Rotatable about vertical axis:
    Apparatus under subclass 159 wherein the tines rotate about an axis which
    is generally perpendicular to the surface of the soil.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 495 for plural driven, contiguous,
    cooperating, or intermeshing rotary ground-engaging tools which rotate
    about a vertical axis; and subclass 111 for a single tool which rotates
    about a vertical axis.


CLS 111/161
TXT Material deposited into tiller operated zone:
    Apparatus under subclass 159 wherein a depositing means introduces material
    simultaneously with and into the same area where the opener is creating a
    furrow to thereby incorporate the dispensed material into the soil which is
    formed into a furrow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131,    for a machine having a powered tiller and material broadcaster
    which operates simultaneously and in the same location but where the
    furrows are not formed.


CLS 111/162
TXT Material deposited behind tiller:
    Apparatus under subclass 159 wherein a furrow is formed by the powered
    tiller and thereafter material is deposited into the formed furrow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    for material broadcasting behind a tiller which does not form a
    furrow.


CLS 111/163
TXT Disk:
    Apparatus under subclass 157 wherein the  rotary opener is a generally
    circular, plate-like member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135+,   for rotating openers with gauge means mounted on an auxiliary frame.


CLS 111/164
TXT Plural cooperating disk openers:
    Apparatus under subclass 163 including at least two coacting disk elements
    which operate to open a furrow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 574+ for openers of this general type but
    which lack a depositing means.


CLS 111/165
TXT Staggered arrangement:
    Apparatus under subclass 164 wherein at least one of the disks is not
    aligned in a transverse direction with the other disk or disks in the
    assembly.


CLS 111/166
TXT Scalloped or fluted:
    Apparatus under subclass 164 wherein at least one of the disks has
    undulations, indentations or the like at the outer periphery thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169,    for a dish-shaped disk which is scalloped or fluted.


CLS 111/167
TXT Flat:
    Apparatus under subclass 163 wherein the sides of the disk are
    substantially planar.


CLS 111/168
TXT Dished:
    Apparatus under subclass 163 wherein the disk is concave on one side and
    convex on the other side.


CLS 111/169
TXT Scalloped or fluted:
    Apparatus under subclass 168 wherein the disk has undulations, indentations
    or the like at the outer periphery thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166,    for a plural disk opener with at least one scalloped or fluted disk.


CLS 111/170
TXT Having depositor feature:
    Apparatus under subclass 14 having a specific device which causes spaced or
    timed delivery of material into a furrow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
    34+,    for hill drop planters.


CLS 111/171
TXT Endless conveyor with traps:
    Apparatus under subclass 170 including a driven endless element moveable
    along a path of circulation and which includes traps which are loaded and
    unloaded at different points along said path to deliver material towards
    the open furrow as the machine advances.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power Driven, subclasses 804+ for endless conveyors,
    per se.


CLS 111/172
TXT Chain:
    Apparatus under subclass 171 wherein the endless element is a series of
    interconnected links.


CLS 111/173
TXT Screw conveyor:
    Apparatus under subclass 170 including a material supporting surface which
    traverses a spiraling path to deliver material towards the open furrow as
    the machine advances.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 788 for spiral conveyors, per se.


CLS 111/174
TXT Fluid current conveyor:
    Apparatus under subclass 170 wherein material to be deposited is carried
    toward the open furrow by means of, or with the assistance of a flowing gas
    stream.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, appropriate subclasses for fluid current
    conveying, per se.


CLS 111/175
TXT Flow divider head:
    Apparatus under subclass 174 wherein at least one primary fluid conveying
    current conveys material from an inlet to the fluid conveyer to a structure
    which substantially evenly divides the fluid conveying current into a
    plurality of secondary streams for delivery to the opened furrow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, appropriate subclasses for fluid current
    conveying, per se.


CLS 111/176
TXT Material speed reducing means:
    Apparatus under subclass 174 including means near the outlet of the fluid
    current conveyor which is effective to reduce the pressure of the
    entraining fluid to near atmospheric so that the deposited materials will
    not be blown or bounced out of the furrow.


CLS 111/177
TXT Rotating dispensing element:
    Apparatus under subclass 170 including at least one member which turns,
    spins, or revolves about an axis to receive a charge of material from a
    bulk supply and deliver that charge for deposit into the furrow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 277 for rotary discharge assistants.


CLS 111/178
TXT Roll or drum:
    Apparatus under subclass 177 wherein the rotating dispenser is at least one
    cylinder which extends across an outlet of the source of supply.


CLS 111/179
TXT Air pressure differential drum:
    Apparatus under subclass 178 wherein the rotating dispensing element is a
    hollow cylinder and wherein the charge of material is held on the surface
    of the drum by an air pressure differential caused by (1) the creation of a
    subatmospheric pressure within the hollow interior of the drum and
    expressed through holes in the drum surface or (2) by a superatmospheric
    pressure which traps material against the surface of the drum.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 211 for suction-type discharge
    assistants, per se.


CLS 111/180
TXT Vacuum blocker rotates:
    Apparatus under subclass 179 including a member which turns, spins, or
    revolves about an axis and rolls along the interior of the drum's surface
    to selectively cover the holes in the drum's surface thereby cutting off
    the relative  vacuum so as to allow the charge of material to be released
    from the drum.


CLS 111/181
TXT Excess material remover:
    Apparatus under subclass 179 which further includes means such as a brush,
    air nozzle, scraper, or the like to remove extra material which may adhere
    to the surface of the drum before that extra material is released into the
    furrow.


CLS 111/182
TXT Protrusions on drum periphery:
    Apparatus under subclass 179 further including members which extend
    radially outwardly from the drum periphery and through which the air
    pressure differential is expressed.


CLS 111/183
TXT Plate type trap:
    Apparatus under subclass 177 wherein the rotating dispensing element is a
    disk which contains holes, grooves, depressions or the like which capture a
    charge of material from the supply and deliver that charge for deposit into
    the furrow.


CLS 111/184
TXT Vertical:
    Apparatus under subclass 183 wherein the plate assumes a substantially
    vertical attitude and rotates about a substantially horizontal axis.


CLS 111/185
TXT Air pressure differential:
    Apparatus under subclass 184 wherein the charge of material is held on the
    surface of the disk by an air pressure differential caused by (1) the
    creation of a subatmospheric pressure on one side of the disk which is
    expressed through holes in the disk surface or (2) by a superatmospheric
    pressure which traps material against the surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 211 for suction type discharge
    assistants, per se.


CLS 111/186
TXT Plural depositors for disparate material:
    Apparatus under subclass 170 including at least two depositing mechanisms
    which deposit at least two materially different materials into the soil.

    (1)     Note.  At least one of the materials must be dispensed directly
    into the furrow.

    (2)     Note.  The multiple depositors may deposit different types of seed
    or seed and an agricultural amendment such as fertilizer, insecticide, or
    the like.


CLS 111/187
TXT To various depths:
    Apparatus under subclass 186 including means to deposit one material at a
    level in or upon the soil which is different  than the level at which the
    other material is deposited.


CLS 111/188
TXT At least one solid, one liquid:
    Apparatus under subclass 186 wherein one of the disparate materials
    dispensed is a particulate solid, and another of the disparate materials
    dispensed is a flowable liquid.


CLS 111/189
TXT Including seed tamper in furrow:
    Apparatus under subclass 14 including a specific element such as a wheel,
    roller, blade, or the like which exerts pressure on seed dispensed within
    the open furrow to press the seed into the soil at the bottom of the furrow.


CLS 111/190
TXT Furrow closer:
    Apparatus under subclass 14 including a specific device which moves soil
    back into the furrow to cover the deposited material.


CLS 111/191
TXT Rotating furrow closer:
    Apparatus under subclass 190 wherein the furrow-closing element turns,
    spins, or moves about an axis as it moves soil back into the furrow.


CLS 111/192
TXT Disk:
    Apparatus under subclass 191 wherein the rotating furrow-closing element is
    a generally circular plate-like member which pushes soil laterally into the
    furrow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194+,   for a wheel-type closing means which exerts a downwardly directed
    compo-nent of force on the soil which closes the furrow.


CLS 111/193
TXT Plural:
    Apparatus under subclass 192 including at least two furrow-closing disks.


CLS 111/194
TXT Packer wheel:
    Apparatus under subclass 191 wherein a rotating furrow-closing element has
    a circular periphery which exerts a component of force downwardly on the
    soil as it moves the soil into the furrow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    192,    for disk-type furrow closers which resemble a wheel in shape, but
    only apply a laterally directed force to the soil.


CLS 111/195
TXT Plural:
    Apparatus under subclass 194 including at least two furrow-closing wheels.


CLS 111/196
TXT Pinch adjustment:
    Apparatus under subclass 195 in which wheels are mounted in angular
    relationship to each other so as to form a ridge of soil when moved over
    the furrow, the angular relationship being resettable to selectively vary
    the height or compaction of the ridge.


CLS 111/197
TXT Drag:
    Apparatus under subclass 190 in which soil is moved back into the furrow by
    a member which slides along the soil surface and is pulled behind the
    drilling machine.


CLS 111/198
TXT Chain:
    Apparatus under subclass 197 wherein the furrow-closing member is a series
    of interconnected links.


CLS 111/199
TXT SEED TAPE PLANTERS:
    Process or apparatus under the class definition wherein a narrow, flexible
    strip, ribbon, or band which has seeds secured thereto in spaced relation
    is placed into the soil.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 56 for seed tapes, per se.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 176 for apparatus for
    laying a tape or strip within the ground.


CLS 111/200
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:
    Process or apparatus under the class definition not provided for in any of
    the above subclasses.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 111/900
TXT METHODS OF PLANTING SEEDS AND MISCELLANEOUS COMPOSITIONS:
    Collection or art relating to processes for placing seeds in soil or to the
    chemical make up of various soil or seed treating materials.


CLS 111/901
TXT LAWN OR TURF:
    Collection of art relating to the treating, maintaining, or installing of
    grassy areas.


CLS 111/902
TXT Pasture renovation:
    Collection of art under 901 specifically relating to the reconditioning or
    replanting of lawn or turf used for the feeding of grazing animals.


CLS 111/903
TXT MONITOR:
    Collection of art relating to devices which keep track of, regulate, or
    control the operation of a planting machine.


CLS 111/904
TXT Population control function:
    Collection of art under 903 specifically relating to control elements which
    change the rate of dispensing in a planting machine responsive to a sensed
    undesired rate.


CLS 111/905
TXT SEED TREATING SEED PLANTER:
    Collection or art relating to a planting device including an agent which
    acts upon seed either before or during the planting operation to improve or
    alter the seed itself or the planting operation.


CLS 111/906
TXT SPECIALIZED COMMODITY:
    Collection of art relating to the planting of a particularly named type of
    agricultural product.


CLS 111/907
TXT Cane:
    Collection of art under 906 specifically relating to the planting of tall,
    woody grasses or reeds (e.g., sugar cane).


CLS 111/908
TXT Potato:
    Collection of art under 906 specifically relating to the planting of plant
    or tuber parts which develop sturdy edible tubers (e.g., sweet potato,
    white potato).


CLS 111/909
TXT Bulb:
    Collection of art under 906 specifically relating to the planting of an
    underground stem, usually surrounded by scalelike modified leaves and
    containing stored food for the undeveloped shoots of the new plant stored
    within it (e.g., tulip).


CLS 111/910
TXT Onion:
    Collection of art under 909 specifically relating to the planting of an
    edible bulb having a pungent odor and taste and commonly known as an onion.


CLS 111/911
TXT Rice:
    Collection of art under 906 specifically relating to the planting of a
    cereal grass with a starchy edible seed and commonly known as rice.


CLS 111/912
TXT Pineapple:
    Collection of art under 906 specifically relating to the planting of a
    tropical plant having large swordlike leaves and a large, fleshy edible
    fruit consisting of the flowers fused into a compound whole with a terminal
    tuft of leaves and which is commonly known as a pineapple.


CLS 111/913
TXT Vegetable (i.e., small seed):
    Collection of art under 906 specifically related to the planting of a
    specialized small, seeded, named edible plant (e.g., beet, spinach, etc.).


CLS 111/914
TXT Lettuce:
    Collection of art under 913 specifically related to the planting of a
    vegetable having edible leaves and commonly known as lettuce.


CLS 111/915
TXT SPECIAL CONDITION:
    Collection of art relating to machines designed to handle or treat seeds
    which are in a peculiar state.


CLS 111/916
TXT Seed pellet:
    Collection of art under 915 specifically related to the planting of single,
    small seeds which are placed into solid or densely packed balls of nonseed
    material in units of uniform size which may in turn be singulated by a
    conventional planting machine.


CLS 111/917
TXT Gel:
    Collection of art under 915  specifically related to the planting of seeds
    which are encased in a semisolid colloid.


CLS 111/918
TXT Sprout:
    Collection of art under 915 specifically related to the planting of chitted
    (i.e., soaked, presprouted, germinating, or dormancy broken) seeds.


CLS 111/919
TXT SPECIAL TRANSPLANT RELATED FEATURE:
    Collection of art related to the preparation of a living plant for moving
    it from one location in the soil to another.


CLS 111/920
TXT AIRPLANE:
    Collection of art relating to transplanting or planting from an
    aeronautical device.


CLS 111/921
TXT UNIQUE MOTOR DRIVE:
    Collection or art relating to unconventional means by which power is
    derived from or transmitted to a planting machine.


CLS 111/922
TXT VARIABLE DRIVE MECHANISM:
    Collection of art relating to speed adjustable power transfer devices used
    or usable in planting machines.


CLS 111/923
TXT INTERROW, INTERCROP PLANTER:
    Collection of art relating to the planting of a second crop between rows or
    within a population of a growing crop before the harvesting of that growing
    crop.


CLS 111/924
TXT MINIMUM AND NO TILL PLANTER:
    Collection of art relating to machines which are designed to plant crops
    with the savings of at least one tillage step (e.g., plowing, harrowing,
    fertilizing, etc.).


CLS 111/925
TXT TANK AND HOPPER TRAILERS:
    Collection of art relating to vehicles which deliver material to and are
    towed by, hitched to, or otherwise associated with a planter so as to
    supply the planter.


CLS 111/926
TXT SPECIAL SUSPENSION OR GAUGING FEATURE:
    Collection of art related to a planting machine which has a particular
    provision to adjust or maintain weight or pressure onto an opener assembly,
    subframe, or the like, to maintain or enhance planting depth.


CLS 111/927
TXT PARALLELOGRAM MOUNTING:
    Collection of art relating to the use of links connected in parallel
    (parallelogram linkage) for the mounting of assemblies, subassemblies,
    tools or the like on planting machines.


CLS 112/
TTL SEWING

CLS 112/
TXT

    I.      This is the generic locus for patents for (1) sewing machines, (2)
    methods of sewing, and (3) stock material products of a sewing operation.
    This class is also residual for patents for sewn articles which are not
    specifically provided for in any other class.

    II.     SCOPE OF THE CLASS AND RELATIONSHIP TO OTHER CLASSES

    Sewing is the operation of uniting or ornamenting material by means of a
    strand which is inserted (stitched) in the material at spaced locations by
    a needle having an eye, or equivalent structure, and enchained or otherwise
    locked in position.

    With the addition of product subclasses 400-441, inclusive, no change has
    been made in the relationship of this class with other classes in regard to
    patents for machines and processes.

    As to patents for products, it is intended that only such patents in which
    layers have been secured together, or a strand has been affixed to a base,
    solely by a stitching operation shall be placed in this class. However,
    patents for such products which include structure which is the result of an
    operation which may be considered ancillary to the stitching operation
    (e.g., manipulating, folding, cutting) or which include merely a
    description of the sewn material (e.g., woven, knitted, braided, carded,
    twisted) will not be excluded from this class.

    A patent for a stock material product resulting from a combined operation
    (e.g., sewn and coated or bonded) will be placed in an appropriate subclass
    in Class 428, Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, and see the main
    definition of that class, (428), section V1 A 1.

    It is recognized that patents for sewn stock material may be found in other
    classes.  No attempt has been made at this time to collect such patents in
    this class.  It is expected that when such other classes are reclassified,
    sewn stock material patents will be transferred to this class (112).

    Search notes to related classes will be found under the definition of
    subclass 400 for products, subclass 2 for apparatus, and subclass 262.1 for
    methods.

    III.    GLOSSARY OF TERMS

    BLIND STITCH

    A stitch in which the sewing thread penetrates only one nonthickness
    surface of a layer or component.  See   Figure 1.

    COMPONENT

    A distinct unitary element of a composite web or sheet which is
    longitudinally coextensive therewith and which, if separated from said
    multi-part web or sheet, would be recognized as a web or sheet by itself.

    A component may consist of plural layers as in the folded component shown
    in Figure 2.

    COMPOSITE SHEET

    A sheet comprising a plurality of components.

    COMPOSITE WEB

    A web comprising a plurality of components.

    CONCEALED STITCH

    A stitch in which the sewing thread completely penetrates one or more
    layers of material and is hidden from view on at least one side of the
    assembly by a fold of material overlying the stitch.  See  Figure  3.

    FIBER

    A relatively short, slender, flexible element of macroscopic size and
    finite length and having a width and thickness of the same order magnitude.
     A fiber is generally of staple length to facilitate being spun, twisted,
    or otherwise secured together into a composite strand but may be of shorter
    length requiring bonding, felting, or matting to form a strand or layer.
    It may be of animal (e.g., wool, rabbit hair); vegetable (e.g., cotton,
    jute, hemp); or mineral (e.g., asbestos, glass, metal) origin; and may be
    either natural, modified, or synthetic.

    LAYER

    A single thickness of material or materials in the form of a panel, web, or
    sheet, or a plurality of any of these in side-by-side coplanar relation, or
    particulate material arranged in continuity to constitute a distinct
    stratum.

    A layer may include a plurality of components as in Figure   4 .

    NONTHICKNESS SURFACE

    The surface of a web, sheet, layer, or component on which both its length
    and width may be measured.  See  Figure  5.

    OVEREDGE STITCH

    A stitch wherein the sewing thread extends thickness-wise across a marginal
    extremity of one or more layers of material without penetrating side
    extremity.   See Figure 6.

    PANEL

    A portion of material of finite perimeter having length and width greater
    than thickness and (a) having a modification or embellishment of or on the
    entire periphery thereof or at least two nonadjacent corners, (b) being
    completely enclosed in an envelope which substantially conforms thereto, or
    (c) having a boundary shape which is other than rectangle.

    SHEET

    A rectangular portion of material of finite length and width which are each
    greater than its thickness.  A piece of material having a peripheral shape
    other than rectangular will be considered a panel.

    STRAND

    A relatively slender and flexible element having a width and thickness of
    the same order of magnitude and a length which is either (a) indeterminate
    or (b) coextensive with the length or width of a sheet or layer.  A strand
    may be a monofilament or it may include either a plurality of filaments or
    fibers disposed in parallelism (e.g., tow) or constituent fibers and/or
    filaments knitted, plaited, braided, twisted, interlaced, interlocked, or
    otherwise secured together to form a unit such as roving, thread yarn,
    cord, rope or cable.

    STRAND PORTION

    A strand of finite length; or an unsevered but determinate part of a strand.

    STRIP

    A web or sheet of relatively narrow ribbon-like material.  A strip which is
    interwoven or intertangled with other strips or strands in the same manner
    as a strand will be termed a "strand-like strip".

    WEB

    A portion of material having length and width each greater than its
    thickness and with at least its longitudinal dimension undetermined.

    A web may comprise (a) a single thickness of material, (b) a plurality of
    portions of a single piece of material folded onto each other
    longitudinally or transversely, or (c) a plurality of individual web
    components joined together in longitudinally coextensive face or edge
    contact to form a composite web.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    606,    Surgery, subclasses 144+, for mechanical sewing devices for sewing
    parts of the animal body.


CLS 112/1
TXT Not otherwise classified.


CLS 112/2
TXT Adapted for special work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, appropriate subclasses for a shoe making
    machine including stitching means, and particularly subclass 58.5 for a
    machine for inserting lacings in the eyelets of shoe uppers.

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 241 for apparatus for assembling and
    disassembling by a stringing action.

    53,     Package Making, subclass 138.5 for packaging apparatus which
    includes means for joining portions of the cover material by sewing, and
    subclass 545 for an apparatus for forming packages by confining the
    contents within a progressively seamed cover formed from a continuous web
    or webs.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, appropriate subclasses for a knitting
    apparatus.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, appropriate subclasses for a weaving apparatus.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 768 for an apparatus for "electronic
    sewing".

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for a machine not
    including stitching means for making, repairing or treating articles of
    apparel and analogous articles, and see notes thereunder.

    289,    Knots and Knot Tying, subclasses 2+ for an apparatus for tying a
    knot in a strand.

    300,    Brush, Broom, and Mop Making, appropriate subclasses for a machine
    particularly adapted to the manufacture of the articles set out in the
    title of that class.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 21+ for a sewing machine
    cabinet structure.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclasses 54+ for a fan
    actuated by the operation of a sewing machine.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 432+ for an abrading device designed to be
    attached to and driven by a sewing machine.  A nominal recitation of a
    sewing machine in combination with such an attachment will not exclude a
    patent from Class 451.

    606,    Surgery, subclasses 144+ for mechanical machines for sewing
    portions of an animal body, subclasses 222+ for suturing needles.


CLS 112/2.1
TXT Mattress sewing:

    Device under subclass 2 wherein means are provided to fasten together, with
    needle and thread,  material which covers a pad or tick filled with soft
    material.

    (1)     Note.  The pad or tick is generally used, as, or on a bed.

    (2)     Note.  The needle is used to fasten material together but is not a
    part of the fastening means remaining at the end of the sewing process.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclass 737 for a mattress or cushion with a cover wherein
    means are provided to physically connect the cover to the mattress or
    cushion.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 91.2+ for an apparatus or process for
    compressing portions of a furniture cushion or padded furniture component
    in accord with a desired pattern.


CLS 112/2.2
TXT Tufting:

    Device under subclass 2.1 wherein material on upper and lower sides of the
    pad or tick is fastened together with needle and thread which needle and
    thread passes through the material and the pad or tick at spaced points
    over the upper and lower sides of the pad or tick.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclass 272 for a mattress or cushion with a cover which is
    secured to the mattress or cushion by tufting.


CLS 112/4
TXT For uniting jacquard pattern-cards by sewing.


CLS 112/6
TXT For making brooms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    300,    Brush, Broom, and Mop Making, appropriate subclasses for a machine
    or method particularly related to one or more of the operations necessary
    to the manufacture of the articles set out in the title of that class.


CLS 112/7
TXT For sewing carpets and similar heavy fabrics.


CLS 112/8
TXT Adapted for use on carpet-sewing machines.


CLS 112/9
TXT For sewing together strips, loops, etc., to form rugs.

    (1)     Note.  For making rugs by turfing, see this class, subclasses
    80.01+.


CLS 112/10
TXT Automatic machines for making bags.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclass 138.5 for devices which make a bag fill
    and thereafter close the bag by a sewing operation.


CLS 112/11
TXT Holding, feeding, and sewing filled sacks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclass 138.5 for apparatus to fill and then close
    a package by sewing a seam or seams thereof.


CLS 112/12
TXT For sewing operations on hats.

    (1)     Note.  For straw-hat making, see this class, subclass 23.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    475.11, for methods of making headwear.


CLS 112/13
TXT Work-supports of a hat-sewing machine.


CLS 112/14
TXT The work-supports have a rotary movement.


CLS 112/15
TXT Guides for hat-sewing machines.

    (1)     Note.  For straw-boardguides, see this class, subclass 23.


CLS 112/16
TXT For sewing furs and making leather gloves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149,    for guides for fur-sewing.


CLS 112/17
TXT Includes means to color seams.


CLS 112/18
TXT Includes special means to manipulate the work.


CLS 112/19
TXT A clamp-frame manipulates the work.


CLS 112/20
TXT Includes a guide.


CLS 112/21
TXT For sewing books.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus for applying a member to work, e.g., signature.

    412,    Bookbinding:  Process and Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    processes and apparatuses for manufacturing books which may involve sewing
    operations.


CLS 112/22
TXT Includes a tying mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    289,    Knots and Knot Typing, subclass 1.5 for a method and subclasses 2+
    for an apparatus for tying a knot in a strand.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 375+.


CLS 112/23
TXT For sewing straw braid, as in making hats.

    (1)     Note.  For machines for twisting straw into strands, combined with
    sewing, see Class 57, Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining,
    subclasses 4 and 6.


CLS 112/24
TXT For making mats on straw or similar materials such as those used for
    bottle-covers.


CLS 112/25
TXT For stitching looped or knitted fabrics.


CLS 112/26
TXT Trimming and other operations relating to the sewing process.


CLS 112/27
TXT Includes special means to manipulate the work.


CLS 112/28
TXT Machines specially organized to sew leather.


CLS 112/29
TXT Includes means to form indentations in the leather between the stitches to
    separate them.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclasses 32+ for machines which indent the
    edge of the sole, particularly subclass 32.1, for those machines provided
    with means to cause the indentations to occur at the stitch points.


CLS 112/30
TXT Includes means to pull out lasting-tacks from a lasted shoe.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclass 16.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclass 63 for apparatus for
    driving a member, e.g., tack, combined with (or convertible to) apparatus
    for withdrawing the same.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 18+ for devices of the nail-extractor type.


CLS 112/31
TXT Stitches are held in place by friction, either of the threads themselves,
    or of a plug inserted in the leather or other material.


CLS 112/32
TXT The sewing-thread is locked by a loop of another thread, the latter not
    being locked or enchained.


CLS 112/33
TXT The loop is locked by a tongue cut in the leather or other material.


CLS 112/34
TXT Chain-stitch machines.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes those machines having straight
    needles.

    (2)     Note.  For further definition of chain-stitch see this class,
    subclass 154.


CLS 112/35
TXT Chain-stitch machines having a curved needle.


CLS 112/36
TXT Lock-stitch machines.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes those machines having straight
    needles.

    (2)     Note.  For a further definition of lock-stitch, see this class,
    subclass 154.


CLS 112/37
TXT This machine has a curved needle.


CLS 112/38
TXT The shuttle oscillates or rotates.

    (1)     Note.  Revolving-hook machines are also included.


CLS 112/39
TXT Means to form a support or rest against which the upper or a lasted shoe
    may be held to guide the shoe as it is presented to the sole-sewing
    mechanism.


CLS 112/40
TXT Includes devices to protect the work from injury by the awl or needle.


CLS 112/41
TXT Includes means for heating the machine to soften wax on the thread.


CLS 112/42
TXT Includes means to wax the thread.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for coating, per se, and
    especially subclasses 405 and 425 for immersion coating of strand form work.


CLS 112/43
TXT Includes means to moisten or lubricate the needle, thread, or work to
    facilitate the sewing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42      and 256.


CLS 112/44
TXT Includes means to bevel the edge of a welt or to slit it transversely.


CLS 112/45
TXT Includes means to cut a channel in the leather in advance of the needle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131.


CLS 112/46
TXT Includes means to guide and control the supply of a welt-strip.


CLS 112/47
TXT Includes means to feed the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.


CLS 112/48
TXT Includes an awl which is shifted to feed the work.


CLS 112/49
TXT Includes a sewing-needle which is shifted to feed the work.

    (1)     Note.  For needle-feeds of general application, see this class,
    subclass 310.


CLS 112/50
TXT Includes devices to enter a channel in the work to guide or position the
    same.


CLS 112/51
TXT Includes means to guide the work by contact with an edge of, or crease, or
    groove in the work.


CLS 112/52
TXT Includes means to guide a welt-strip to be stitched.


CLS 112/53
TXT Chain-stitch machines.

    (1)     Note.  For further definition of chain-stitch see this class,
    subclass 154.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34.


CLS 112/54
TXT Lock-stitch machines.

    (1)     Note.  For a further definition of lock- stitch, see this class,
    subclass 154.


CLS 112/55
TXT The thread-looper moves in an orbit completely around the needle to lay the
    thread in the needle-hook.


CLS 112/56
TXT Includes means to cast the previously-formed loop from the needle as it
    pulls a new loop through the work.


CLS 112/57
TXT Includes take-up mechanisms.

    (1)     Note.  For take-ups of general application, see this class,
    subclass 241, and indented subclasses.


CLS 112/58
TXT Includes pull-offs or thread-measuring devices.

    (1)     Note.  For pull-offs of general application, see this class,
    subclasses 242 and 243.


CLS 112/59
TXT Includes tension devices.

    (1)     Note.  For tensions of general application, see this class,
    subclass 254.


CLS 112/60
TXT Includes presser-feet and operating mechanism therefor.

    (1)     Note.  For presser-feet of general application, see this class,
    subclass 235, and indented subclasses.


CLS 112/61
TXT Includes means to intermittently lock the presser-foot on the work during
    sewing.


CLS 112/62
TXT Includes means to support the work.

    (1)     Note.  For work-supports of general application, see this class,
    subclass 260.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclass 123.


CLS 112/63
TXT For making tubular articles.


CLS 112/64
TXT For attaching fringes or loops to the edge of a fabric.

    (1)     Note.  For analogous machines, see this class, subclasses 80.01+,
    98 and 100.


CLS 112/65
TXT For stitching around the edges of an opening, such as a buttonhole.

    (1)     Note.  For making the buttonhole-stitch, see this class, subclass
    157.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264.1,  for methods of making buttonholes and eyelets.

    446+,   for zigzag stitch forming mechanism wherein the needle is shifted
    back and forth across the line of material feed, which mechanism includes
    particular structure for sewing a pattern which encloses a portion of the
    material within boundaries formed by the pattern (e.g., buttonholes).


CLS 112/66
TXT For stitching around the edges of a round opening, such as an eyelet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89.


CLS 112/67
TXT Includes mechanism for starting and stopping.

    (1)     Note.  For starting and stopping mechanism of general application
    to sewing-machines, see this class, subclasses 271+.


CLS 112/68
TXT Includes cutting mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for cutting or
    pinking sheet or web material, or cutting a strand or yarn.


CLS 112/69
TXT Includes means for stitching the thrums or loose ends of thread after the
    buttonhole proper is made.


CLS 112/70
TXT The fabric is held in a frame or clamp which is moved.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for similar devices adapted for glove-sewing.

    102,    and indented subclass.

    112     and 117, and indented subclasses.


CLS 112/71
TXT The stitch-forming mechanism is bodily rotated to form an end of the
    buttonhole.


CLS 112/72
TXT The clamp is bodily rotated to form an end of the buttonhole.


CLS 112/73
TXT The needle is shifted laterally in forming the buttonhole-stitch.

    (1)     Note.  For vibrating-needle machines, per se, see this class,
    subclasses 446+.


CLS 112/74
TXT Buttonhole-clamps and operating mechanism adapted to spread the buttonhole
    before stitching.


CLS 112/75
TXT Includes gaging mechanisms.


CLS 112/76
TXT Work-holding devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114.


CLS 112/77
TXT Attachable and detachable without disorganization of the sewing mechanism.


CLS 112/78
TXT For ornamentation by stitching operations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    475.18, for methods of ornamental stitching.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170+,   for nonturfing sewing machines employing short lengths of thread
    and noneyed needles.


CLS 112/80.01
TXT Tufting:
    Device under subclass 78 including means for inserting a strand or strands
    through a base material to form a material surface of raised strands or
    strand loops.

    (1)     Note.  Strands or strand loops are "raised" if they extend above
    the base material by design and do not merely lie thereon.

    (2)     Note.  The strand loops may be cut or left uncut after being formed
    on the base material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222+,   for thread inserting device elements (needles).

    410+,   for a web or sheet having a plurality of fibers, strand portions,
    narrow strand-like strips, or groups of strands which are attached to the
    web or sheet by stitching and extend outwardly from a surface thereof.

    475.23, for tufting methods which do not recite particular structure of a
    tufting device.


CLS 112/80.02
TXT Rooting hair in doll or wig:
    Device under subclass 80.01 wherein the strand or strands are inserted into
     (1) part of a doll to simulate hair or (2) an element to be worn as
    artificial or real hair.

    (1)     Note.  "Hair" are the filaments forming the coat of an animal or
    covering a portion of the skin of a human.

    (2)     Note.  With regard to (1), the strand or strands are usually
    inserted into a doll's head.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    132,    Toilet, subclass 5 for processes, under that class definition, for
    making wigs, switches, rolls, or other artificial hair structures, subclass
    56 for devices, under the class definition, specially designed for making
    wigs, switches, rolls, or other hair structures.


CLS 112/80.03
TXT Hand implement:
    Device under subclass 80.01 wherein the device is supported by and
    manipulated by the hands of a human attendant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169,    for hand sewing implements of general application.


CLS 112/80.04
TXT With power drive:
    Device under subclass 80.03 including a motivating means, other than the
    human attendant, for generating and imparting motion to the device.


CLS 112/80.05
TXT Having hollow or chance needle:
    Device under subclass 80.03 wherein the strand inserting means has an
    elongated portion which penetrates the material to pass the strand or
    strands therethrough, the elongated portion having (1) a cavity
    substantially parallel to the direction of elongation or (2) a passage or
    groove substantially parallel to the direction of elongation.

    (1)     Note.  The cavity of (1) and the passage or groove of (2) are
    usually for guiding the strand or strands.


CLS 112/80.06
TXT Having noneyed needle:
    Device under subclass 80.03 wherein the strand inserting means has an
    elongated portion which penetrates the material to pass the strand or
    strands therethrough substantially transverse to the direction of
    elongation.

    (1)     Note.  The elongated portion usually has a reentrant or planar
    surface which engages the strand or strands.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80.03+, for an eyed needle having an eye opening latch or gate.


CLS 112/80.07
TXT Yarn manipulation by fluid flow:
    Device under subclass 80.01 wherein a streat or air or other fluid acts
    directly on the strand or strands to guide, tension, advance, or otherwise
    handle the strand or strands.

    (1)     Note.  The fluid medium is usually air which acts directly on the
    strand or strands, for example to propel the strand or strands through a
    guiding tube.


CLS 112/80.08
TXT Having hollow needle:
    Device under subclass 80.07 wherein the strand inserting means has an
    elongated portion which penetrates the material to pass the strand or
    strands therethrough, the elongated portion having a cavity substantially
    parallel to the direction of elongation for guiding the strand.


CLS 112/80.15
TXT Dual sided:
    Device under subclass 80.01 wherein surfaces of raised strands or strand
    loops are formed on both upper and lower (opposite) sides of the base
    material.


CLS 112/80.16
TXT Including hollow or  channelled needle:
    Device under subclass 80.01 wherein the strand inserting means has an
    elongated portion which penetrates the material to pass the strand or
    strands therethrough, the elongated portion having (1) a cavity
    substantially parallel to the direction of elongation or (2) a passage or
    groove substantially parallel to the direction of elongation.

    (1)     Note.  The cavity of (1) and the passage or groove of (2) are
    usually for guiding the strand or strands.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80.02,  for tufting devices which root hair in a doll or wig and which have
    a hollow or channelled needle.

    80.05,  for hand tufting implements having a hollow or channelled needle.

    80.08,  for tufting devices which have fluid means for manipulating a
    strand and which also have a hollow needle.


CLS 112/80.17
TXT Including noneyed needle:
    Device under subclass 80.01 wherein the strand inserting means has an
    elongated portion which penetrates the material to pass the strand or
    strands therethrough, the elongated portion having strand engaging
    structure other than a hole therethrough substantially transverse to the
    direction of elongation.

    (1)     Note.  The elongated portion usually has a reentrant or planar
    surface which engages the strand or strands.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80.02,  for tufting devices which root hair in a doll or wig and which
    include a noneyed needle.

    80.06,  for hand tufting implements which have a noneyed needle.


CLS 112/80.18
TXT With condition responsive stop motion means:
    Device under subclass 80.01 including means for halting the operation of
    the device upon the detection of a random, noncyclic condition or change of
    condition, without the intervention of an operator or human attendant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    271+,   for elements used in sewing operations which facilitate stopping or
    starting of the sewing drive mechanism.


CLS 112/80.23
TXT With optical, electronic, or magnetic pattern program means:Device under
    subclass 80.01 wherein instructions having light sensitive, electrical, or
    magnetic properties are read and acted upon by the device to form a
    designed (i.e., patterned) surface of strands or strand loops.

    (1)     Note.  Devices wherein a human attendant must intervene to read or
    act upon the instructions to form the designed surface of strands or strand
    loops are not included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    470.01, for sewing devices wherein the operation of the device is
    controlled by a prearranged pattern or program.


CLS 112/80.24
TXT Having pattern drum:
    Device under subclass 8.23 including a cylinder which has the instructions
    stored upon its circumferential surface or upon an element (e.g., sheet)
    placed upon the circumferential surface.

    (1)     Note.  The cylinder usually rotates relative to a device which
    reads the instructions.


CLS 112/80.3
TXT With specific fabric supporting, manipulating, cutting, or treating
    means:Device under subclass 80.01 wherein significance is attributed to (1)
    means for holding, guiding, tensioning, advancing, severing, or otherwise
    handling the base material or (2) means for subjecting the base material to
    a physical or chemical process in order to change a characteristic of the
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    303+,   for stitch forming mechanisms having means for feeding work
    material.


CLS 112/80.31
TXT Means to shift fabric laterally of feed:
    Device under subclass 80.3 for moving the base material transverse to a
    direction of material advance past the strand inserting means.


CLS 112/80.32
TXT Means to feed fabric:
    Device under subclass 80.3 for advancing the base material past the strand
    inserting means.


CLS 112/80.33
TXT Fabric vertically moveable at tufting position:
    Device under subclass 80.3 for holding the base material wherein the device
    and the material held thereby are adjustable or otherwise transportable, at
     the location or strand insertion, in a direction transverse to a face of
    the held material.

    (1)     Note.  The material is usually moveable in a direction toward or
    away from the strand inserting means for varying the depth of penetration
    of the inserting means into the material.


CLS 112/80.4
TXT Including specific needle supporting or manipulating mans:
    Device under subclass 80.01 wherein significance is attributed to means for
    holding, moving, or guiding a strand inserting means having an elongated
    portion which portion penetrates the base material to pass the strand or
    strands therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80.04,  for power driven hand tufting implements which include needle
    supporting or manipulating means.

    221,    for sewing devices which include a driving mechanism for driving a
    needle.

    222+,   for needle element structure, per se.


CLS 112/80.41
TXT Means to shift needle laterally of fabric feed:
    Device under subclass 80.4 for moving the strand inserting means transverse
    to a direction of material advance past the inserting means..

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80.31,  for tufting devices which include means to move the base material
    transverse to a direction of material advance past the strand inserting
    means.


CLS 112/80.42
TXT Means to vertically adjust stroke:
    Device under subclass 80.4 for reciprocating the strand inserting means in
    a direction parallel to its direction of elongation which includes (1)
    means for adjusting the amplitude of reciprocation or (2) means for
    adjusting the position of reciprocation in a direction parallel to the
    direction of reciprocation.


CLS 112/80.43
TXT Means to selectively drive one of plural needles:
    Device under subclass 80.4 wherein there are at least two strand inserting
    means, having an elongated portion which portion penetrates the base
    material to pass a strand or strands therethrough, the device further
    including means to reciprocate, in the direction of elongation, one of the
    inserting means to penetrate the base material while not reciprocating, in
    the direction of elongation, one other of the inserting means.


CLS 112/80.44
TXT Means to disconnect needle and drive:
    Device under subclass 80.4 for making and braking a motive coupling between
    (1) the strand inserting means and (2) an element which imparts
    reciprocation to the strand inserting means to cause the strand inserting
    means to penetrate the material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes devices (1) means to disconnect a
    needle bar and a needle to prevent the needle from reciprocating or (2)
    means to disconnect a needle bar and the bar's drive means.

    (2)     Note.  A device having merely a switch which turns on a tufting
    machine's drive motor is not included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80.41,  for tufting devices which include means to shift the needle
    laterally of fabric feed.

    80.43,  for tufting devices which include means to selectively drive one of
    plural needles.

    221,    for needle driving mechanisms which may include disconnect means
    for skip stitching.

    450,    for zigzag stitch forming devices which have a vibrating needle and
    skip stitch mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, appropriate subclasses.


CLS 112/80.45
TXT Supporting structure:
    Device under subclass 80.4 for mounting, holding, or carrying the strand
    inserting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80.03+, for hand tufting devices which include means to hold a strand
    inserting means (e.g., handle).

    226,    for elements used in sewing operations which clamp a needle to a
    needle bar.


CLS 112/80.5
TXT Including specific loop catcher:
    Device under subclass 80.01 wherein significance is attributed to means for
    engaging, holding, or guiding a strand portion which portion has been
    formed on the base material and which portion is in the configuration of a
    roughly oval, closed or nearly closed turn or figure (i.e., a strand loop).

    (1)     Note.  "Loopers", "hooks", and loop guiding guards are included in
    this and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80.03+, for hand tufting implements which include loop catcher means.

    80.15,  for tufting devices which produce tufts on both sides of the base
    material and include loop catcher structure.


CLS 112/80.51
TXT Bill with clip or gate:
    Device under subclass 80.5 wherein the strand loop engaging, holding, or
    guiding means includes an elongated portion with a free and adapted to
    extend through a strand loop and further includes means acting in
    cooperation with the elongated portion to surround the periphery of or
    otherwise hold or contain the strand loop.

    (1)     Note.  The means cooperating with the elongated portion is usually
    mounted on the strand loop engaging, guiding, or hold means.


CLS 112/80.52
TXT Plural loop catchers having different shapes or orientations:Device under
    subclass 80.5 wherein at least two means are provided which each engage,
    hold, or guide a strand loop wherein each of the means (1) has a different
    appearance or (2) operates with a different positional relationship with
    regard to the strand loop being engaged, held or guided.

    (1)     Note.  Each of the loop engaging, holding, or guiding means may act
    on the same stand loop or set of loops or may act on a different loop or
    set of loops.

    (2)     Note.  In loop catching devices with plural loop catching bills,
    each bill and associated support is considered to be a separate strand loop
    engaging, hold, or guiding means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80.15,  for dual sided tufting devices having plural loop catchers with
    different shapes or orientations.


CLS 112/80.53
TXT Stationary relative to one another:
    Device under subclass 80.52 wherein the strand loop engaging, holding, or
    guiding means do not move relative to one another during operation of the
    device.


CLS 112/80.54
TXT Variable height loops:
    Device under subclass 80.5 wherein the strand loop engaging, holding, or
    guiding means engages, holds, or guides strand loops of differing lengths
    which have been formed on the base material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80.52+, for plural loop catchers having different shapes or orientations
    which may engage, hold, or guide strand loops of differing lengths which
    have been formed on the base material.

    80.55+, for tufting devices including loop catcher structure with loop
    cutting means which cuts a strand loop thereby forming two strands of
    unequal length.

    80.70+, for tufting devices including yard manipulating means for producing
    variable height strands or strand loops on the base material by varying the
    rate of feed of the strands to the strand inserting means (e.g.,
    backdrawing).


CLS 112/80.55
TXT With loop cutting means:
    Device under subclass 80.5 including means for severing the strand loop.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS,  SUBCLASS:

    80.51   for tufting devices including loop catching structure with loop
    cutting means, which structure has a loop catching bill with a clip or
    gate..

    80.71,  for tufting devices including means to sever a strand.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    26,     Textile:  Cloth Finishing, subclass 8 for devices under that class
    definition for cutting pile loops, and particularly subclasses 9+ for
    devices which simultaneously cut pile loops while feeding material.


CLS 112/80.56
TXT Selective cutting means:
    Device under subclass 80.55 including means for severing one strand loop
    and for never severing another strand loop.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80.51,  for tufting devices having a bill with a clip or gate which devices
    include means for severing one strand loop and for never severing another
    strand loop.


CLS 112/80.57
TXT Rotary cutter:
    Device under subclass 80.55 wherein the severing means rotates about a
    central axis.

    (1)     Note.  Devices having a severing means which merely oscillates
    along an arcuate path are classified by other features.


CLS 112/80.58
TXT Knife pivots on loop catcher:
    Device under subclass 80.55 wherein the strand loop severing means is
    supported by and rotates about the means which engages, holds, or guides
    the strand loop.

    (1)     Note.  Devices with severing means which are supported on and
    rotate about a support of the loop engaging, holding, or guiding means are
    included in this subclass if the support is integral with and does not move
    relative to the loop engaging, holding, or guiding means.


CLS 112/80.59
TXT Cutting means stationary relative to loop catcher:
    Device under subclass 80.55 wherein the severing means does not move with
    respect to the means which engages, holds, or guides the strand loop.


CLS 112/80.6
TXT Including supporting structure (e.g., knife block):
    Device under subclass 80.55 having means for mounting, holding, or carrying
    the severing means.


CLS 112/80.7
TXT Including specific yarn manipulating, cutting, or treating means:Device
    under subclass 80.01 wherein significance is attributed to (1) means for
    guiding, tensioning, advancing, severing, or otherwise handling the strand
    or (2) means for subjecting the strand to a physical or chemical process in
    order to change a characteristic of the strand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80.07+, for tufting devices including fluid actuating means for guiding,
    tensioning, advancing, or otherwise manipulating a strand.

    80.18   for tufting devices including a stop motion device such as for
    detecting a broken strand.

    222+,   for elements used in sewing operations which insert thread.

    273,    for elements used in sewing operations which sense a condition of a
    sewing thread and facilitate the starting or stopping of a sewing drive
    mechanism.

    285+,   for devices having a thread cutting, severing, or breaking element.


CLS 112/80.71
TXT Cutting or treating means:
    Device under subclass 80.7 for (1) severing the strand or (2) subjecting
    the strand to a physical or chemical process in order to change a
    characteristic of the strand.

    (1)     Note.  Strand dyeing devices are included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80.55+, for tufting devices including a loop catcher with a loop cutter.


CLS 112/80.72
TXT Feed via intermeshing slats:
    Device under subclass 80.7 for advancing the strand including two sets of
    bars, one set of which overlaps and opposes a second set in an intermeshing
    area, each bar having a projected edge which contacts the strand when in
    the intermeshing area.  The two sets of bars are driven to advance the
    strand by alternately passing the strand from a projected edge of one bar
    of the one set to a projected edge of an opposing bar of the second set.

    (1)     Note.  The bars are often provided with indentations in the strand
    contacting projected edges which indentations vary in depth are are
    configured so as to cause a variation in the rate of strand advance.


CLS 112/80.73
TXT Feed roller:
    Device under subclass 80.7 for advancing a strand wherein the strand
    advancing means has a drive, rotating, cylindrical element over which the
    strand is guided.


CLS 112/81
TXT For hemstitching.


CLS 112/82
TXT The machine has a feed mechanism controllable to move work in all
    directions.

    (1)     Note.  For universal feeding mechanism, per se, see this class,
    subclass 309.


CLS 112/83
TXT The needle operates in a horizontal plane.


CLS 112/84
TXT The machine is controlled by a pattern mechanism, such as a jacquard.


CLS 112/85
TXT The boring-tool is pattern-controlled.


CLS 112/86
TXT The fabric-shifting mechanism is pattern controlled.


CLS 112/87
TXT Includes mechanism for starting and stopping.

    (1)     Note.  For mechanism for starting and stopping of general
    application to sewing machines, see this class, subclass 271.


CLS 112/88
TXT Attaching separate articles for ornamentation.

    (1)     Note.  For general article-attaching, see this class, subclass 104,
    and indented subclasses.


CLS 112/89
TXT Includes mechanism to bore or pierce the fabric to be sewed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85.


CLS 112/90
TXT Includes special fabric-shifting mechanisms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86.


CLS 112/91
TXT Counterbalancing the weight of the fabric-shifting frame.


CLS 112/92
TXT Counterbalancing by a spring.


CLS 112/93
TXT Includes special stitch-forming mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  For general stitch-forming mechanism see this class,
    subclass 154, and indented subclasses.


CLS 112/94
TXT The needle passes bodily through the fabric inserting a thread of definite
    length.

    (1)     Note.  For general short-thread machines, see this class, subclass
    170, and indented subclasses.


CLS 112/95
TXT Includes a shuttle to insert a locking-thread.

    (1)     Note.  For shuttle-machines, generally, see this class, subclass
    185, and indented subclasses.


CLS 112/96
TXT Includes mechanisms to take up the slack in the needle-thread.

    (1)     Note.  For take-ups, generally, see this class, subclass 241, and
    indented subclasses.


CLS 112/97
TXT Includes tension mechanisms for the needle-thread.

    (1)     Note.  For tensions, generally, see this class, subclass 254, and
    indented subclass.


CLS 112/98
TXT The needle operates in a vertical plane.


CLS 112/99
TXT Attaching separate articles, including cords and braids, for ornamentation.

    (1)     Note.  For general article-attaching, see this class, subclass 104
    and indented subclasses, and 139.


CLS 112/100
TXT Threads are entwined with stitch without penetrating the fabric.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161.


CLS 112/101
TXT Attachable and detachable without disorganization of sewing mechanism.


CLS 112/102
TXT Includes special fabric-shifting mechanisms.


CLS 112/102.5
TXT Electronic pattern controlled or programmed:

    Device under subclass 102 including a control system having an electronic
    program storing means to produce either (a) a series of stitches along a
    predetermined path, or (b) to control an ancillary operation of the
    machine.

    (1)     Note. An example of an ancillary operation includes a machine
    generated audio voice command, a pattern learning system, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80.23+, for an embroidery-type tufting device responsive to an optical,
    electronic or magnetic pattern program means.

    445+,   for a vibrating needle-type zigzag stitch forming mechanism having
    an electronic memory and an indicator.

    447,    for a vibrating needle-type zigzag stitch forming mechanism for
    sewing a closed pattern (e.g. buttonhole, etc.) having electronic memory.

    453+,   for a vibrating needle-type zigzag stitch forming mechanism having
    electronic  memory, especially subclass 458 wherein the device includes
    pattern selection means through which an operator can select one pattern
    from a plurality of patterns.

    470.01+, for a pattern controlled or programmed sewing machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 700+ for an instrument for the
    measurement of a distance, especially subclass 735 where the measurement
    device is for flexible material and is achieved by rolling contact and the
    resultant data is processed through a computer.

    38,     Textiles: Ironing and Smoothing, subclass 102.2 for an embroidery
    hoop.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 159+ for an inspecting,
    measuring, or testing device for a sheet, woven fabric, fiber, or filament.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 25 through 62 for a
    mechanism which converts rotary motion to reciprocating motion or
    reciprocating motion to rotary motion; subclasses 111 through 125.5 for an
    intermittent grip-type device, especially subclasses 112 through 125.5 for
    an intermittent grip-type device which converts rotary motion to
    intermittent unidirectional motion; and subclasses 113 and 114 for an
    intermittent grip-type device which converts rotary motion to intermittent
    unidirectional motion which includes an automatic control system.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 202 for a photocell system responsive to a
    pattern, subclass 548 for a photocell system which controls a web, strand,
    strip, or sheet; subclasses 559+ for a photocell which is responsive to
    light from a web, strand, strip, or sheet and which produces an electrical
    signal which is indicative of some characteristic of the material; and
    subclasses 571+ for a prephotocell system which detects the presence,
    absence, or some characteristic of a web, strand, strip, or sheet.

    318,    Electricity: Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses for a
    motor control system in general, and especially subclasses 567+ for an
    electrical motor control system which uses a program or pattern control
    system.


CLS 112/103
TXT The fabric is clamped in a frame.


CLS 112/104
TXT Attaching separate articles, such as labels, buttons, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     99, 100, 101, and 265.1+.


CLS 112/105
TXT Attaching hooks and eyes.


CLS 112/106
TXT Includes means to feed hooks and eyes to be sewed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for article dispensers
    (feeders) not otherwise provided for and not combined with a sewing
    machine, and see the class definition of Class 221 for the disposition of
    related disclosures of article and strip feeding processes and apparatus.


CLS 112/107
TXT Holders for hooks and eyes to be sewed on.


CLS 112/108
TXT Sewing eye-shank buttons.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 243.56 for an apparatus not elsewhere
    classifiable for joining a first part to a second part by applying a clip.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclasses 31+ for combined
    apparatus for assembling a button with a workpiece and applying a member,
    e.g., nail, thereto.


CLS 112/109
TXT The needle is shifted laterally.


CLS 112/110
TXT Sewing on flat buttons.


CLS 112/111
TXT The needle is shifted laterally.

    (1)     Note.  Includes those where the button-holder is also shifted.


CLS 112/112
TXT The button-holding clamp is shifted laterally.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111.


CLS 112/113
TXT Article-feeders specially adapted for sewing machines.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106     and 144.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for article dispensers
    (feeders) not otherwise provided for and not combined with a sewing
    machine, and see the class definition of Class 221 for the disposition of
    related disclosures of article and strip feeding processes and apparatus.


CLS 112/114
TXT Holders for articles to be attached.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    112, and 115.


CLS 112/115
TXT Attachable and detachable without disorganization of the sewing mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101.


CLS 112/116
TXT For applying to the edge of a fabric a succession of stitches joined by one
    or more crochet-stitches.


CLS 112/117
TXT For sewing quilts.


CLS 112/118
TXT Includes mechanisms to shift the work with respect to the stitching
    mechanisms.


CLS 112/119
TXT The work is stretched in a frame.


CLS 112/120
TXT For stitching two plies of fabric folded inward toward each other.


CLS 112/121
TXT For darning fabrics.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclass 2.


CLS 112/122
TXT Includes mechanisms for trimming the work adjacent the seam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses for cutting or pinking of sheet
    material.


CLS 112/122.1
TXT Having specified stitching mechanism:
    Device under subclass 122 wherein significance is attributed to the means
    for uniting or ornamenting material by means of a thread.


CLS 112/122.2
TXT Pinker:

    Device under subclass 122.1 wherein work is trimmed leaving a pattern,
    usually sawtoothed work edge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 918 for cross-referenced art collection pinking
    devices.


CLS 112/122.3
TXT Rotary cutter:

    Device under subclass 122 including a knife which rotates about a central
    axis in performing the cutting operation.


CLS 112/122.4
TXT Pinker:

    Device under subclass 122.3 wherein work is trimmed leaving a pattern,
    usually sawtoothed work edge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 918 for cross-referenced art collection pinking
    devices.


CLS 112/125
TXT Includes means for throwing in and out of operation.


CLS 112/126
TXT Adjustable to and from the line of feed.


CLS 112/127
TXT For trimming different plies separately.


CLS 112/128
TXT Includes operative connection with needle-bar.


CLS 112/129
TXT Includes special cutting elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, for knives.

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses for cutting and pinking apparatus.


CLS 112/130
TXT Sever parts of work, as strips or tapes, after seam is completed.


CLS 112/131
TXT Devices which mark either by creasing or otherwise, adapted for use on a
    sewing machine.


CLS 112/132
TXT For making ruffles and gathers in the work.


CLS 112/133
TXT For gathering and stitching in the manner known as "smocking".


CLS 112/134
TXT Attachable and detachable without disorganization of the sewing mechanism.


CLS 112/135
TXT Includes a vibrating blade which engages the work.


CLS 112/136
TXT Means to guide the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, may include a nominal
    recitation of a supply or take-up coil (e.g., less than a support for such
    a coil or a cooperative relationship between a tension or exhaust detector
    and reel driving or reel stopping means, etc.), subclass 196.1 for a
    passive guide combined with a material feeder.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 157+ for a residual
    guide that directs a strand*, subclass 566 for an unwinding apparatus
    having a particular guide or guard, or subclasses 615+ for a residual guide
    or guard that directs elongated flexible material that may be combined with
    more than nominal winding structure.


CLS 112/137
TXT To fold a strip over an edge of the work to be attached as a binding.


CLS 112/138
TXT The binding-strip is supplied from one side.


CLS 112/139
TXT To facilitate applying braids and cords to a fabric.


CLS 112/140
TXT Guides adapted for blindstitching.


CLS 112/141
TXT Includes means to fold the work to form a hem.


CLS 112/142
TXT To form a lap-seam.


CLS 112/143
TXT Includes means to adjust.


CLS 112/144
TXT For making tucks.


CLS 112/145
TXT For making tucks in the form of a box-plait.


CLS 112/146
TXT Includes mechanism to facilitate spacing.


CLS 112/147
TXT Includes means to fold the work.


CLS 112/148
TXT Fabric-holders and means for guiding the holder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclass 415.1.


CLS 112/149
TXT Guides which turn back projecting threads of ragged edges, pile-threads of
    carpets,the hair of fur, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20.


CLS 112/150
TXT Guides which press upon the material guided.


CLS 112/151
TXT Guides attached to presser fork or bar.


CLS 112/152
TXT Engaging two edges of fabric or material to be sewed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139.


CLS 112/153
TXT Device under subclass 136 which guides the work according to a profile of
    one edge thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140.


CLS 112/154
TXT Devices under the class definition having mechanisms which cooperate to
    form stitches in work material.

    (1)     Note.  Lock-stitch machines, including the revolving-hook type and
    the shuttle type, are those in which a mass of threads is passed bodily
    through a loop of needle-thread.  In chain stitch machines, one loop is
    inserted through another loop without passing the mass of thread supply
    therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93.


CLS 112/155
TXT Includes a plurality of complete stitch-forming mechanisms.


CLS 112/156
TXT Sewing machines including means to tie the stitching-threads.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22.


CLS 112/157
TXT The line of stitches is zigzag.


CLS 112/159
TXT The looper (either chain or lock stitch) is shifted with the needle.


CLS 112/160
TXT The fabric is moved back and forth across the line of feed.


CLS 112/161
TXT An additional thread is entwined with the stitches.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100.


CLS 112/162
TXT The thread of the stitch is carried over an edge of fabric by some
    mechanism other than the needle.

    (1)     Note.  For those machines where the thread is carried over by the
    needle, see this class, subclass 65.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for overedge seaming machines adapted for making gloves.

    475.26, for methods of forming an overedge seam.


CLS 112/163
TXT Characterized by a plurality of needles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    452,    for a zigzag stitch forming mechanism wherein the needle is shifted
    back and forth across the line of material feed which mechanism further
    includes a second needle.


CLS 112/164
TXT The locking-thread is inserted by a shuttle.

    (1)     Note.  For shuttle-type machines, generally, see this class,
    subclass 185.


CLS 112/165
TXT Forming a chain-stitch seam.

    (1)     Note.  For chain-stitch machines, generally, see this class,
    subclass 197, and indented subclasses.


CLS 112/166
TXT Includes a looper for each needle.


CLS 112/167
TXT Includes means to change the spacing between the multiple stitch-forming
    mechanisms.


CLS 112/168
TXT Adapted for conversion from one type to another, as from chain-stitch to
    lock-stitch.


CLS 112/169
TXT Machines without bases adapted to be held in the hands while operating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80.03+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 104 for awl type thread inserters.

    606,    Surgery, subclasses 144+, for hand manipulated sewing devices for
    inserting sutures into an animal body.


CLS 112/170
TXT The needle passes bodily through the fabric, inserting a thread of definite
    length, as in hand-sewing.


CLS 112/171
TXT The needle is passed through the work each end alternately.


CLS 112/172
TXT Forming an overedge-seam.


CLS 112/173
TXT The thread passes through the work from one side to the other alternately.


CLS 112/174
TXT Includes means to crimp the work.


CLS 112/175
TXT The work is fed upon a stationary needle.


CLS 112/176
TXT The thread does not pass all the way through the work so that no seam
    appears on one side.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    267.1,  for methods of blind stitching.


CLS 112/177
TXT Forming an overedge-seam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    268.1   and 269.1, for methods of forming an overedge seam.


CLS 112/178
TXT Work-handling (supporting, feeding, manipulating, etc.) for blindstitch
    machines.


CLS 112/179
TXT The stitch is formed loosely, so that two fabrics united thereby may be
    separated to simulate hemstitching.


CLS 112/180
TXT Includes means to facilitate removal of the bobbin.


CLS 112/181
TXT A hook member draws out the needle-loop without passing bodily
    therethrough, the under-thread carrier or bobbin being passed bodily
    through the loop either by the movement of the loop or the carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    467,    for a zigzag stitch forming mechanism wherein the needle is shifted
    back and forth across the line of material feed which mechanism includes
    specified means for working the thread on the side of the material opposite
    the side from which the needle penetrates the material.


CLS 112/182
TXT The hook is operated at a variable speed or through a plurality of
    revolutions to one reciprocation of the needle.


CLS 112/183
TXT The thread-carrier is reciprocated bodily through the loop.


CLS 112/184
TXT The hook moves about a vertical axis.


CLS 112/185
TXT A movable thread-carrier draws out the needle-loop and passes bodily
    through it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95      and 164.

    467,    for a zigzag stitch forming mechanism wherein the needle is shifted
    back and forth across the line of material feed which mechanism includes
    specified means for working the thread on the side of the material opposite
    the side from which the needle penetrates the material.


CLS 112/186
TXT Includes means to replenish the under thread.


CLS 112/187
TXT Includes means to aid in spreading the loop.


CLS 112/188
TXT Includes devices to fasten the bobbin in place.


CLS 112/189
TXT The shuttle revolves about a given axis.


CLS 112/190
TXT The shuttle rotates with a variable speed.


CLS 112/191
TXT The shuttle moves about a vertical axis.


CLS 112/192
TXT The shuttle moves back and forth about an axis.


CLS 112/193
TXT The axis is vertical.


CLS 112/194
TXT The shuttle moves back and forth in a straight line.


CLS 112/195
TXT The shuttle moves lengthwise of the bed or arm of the machine.


CLS 112/196
TXT Includes specific shuttle-holders or raceways.


CLS 112/197
TXT One loop of thread is inserted through another without passing the
    thread-supply mass therethrough.


CLS 112/198
TXT Includes a hooked needle.


CLS 112/199
TXT The looper oscillates back and forth about a central axis or in a given
    path.


CLS 112/200
TXT The looper is moved in four directions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159.


CLS 112/201
TXT The looper rotates continuously.


CLS 112/202
TXT The looper moves about a vertical axis.


CLS 112/217
TXT Includes means for beating out or finishing the seam.


CLS 112/217.1
TXT Supports for devices under the class definition including a generally flat
    horizontal top or working surface member, supporting frame or base
    structure therewith and either (a) mechanism for driving or controlling a
    sewing device on the said surface or (b) work or product supporting or
    handling features claimed in relation to the sewing device.


CLS 112/217.2
TXT Sewing machine stands under subclass 217.1 for supporting multiple sewing
    devices.


CLS 112/217.3
TXT Sewing machine stands under subclass 217.1 including mechanisms to aid in
    the drive or control of an electric or mechanical motor connected with the
    sewing machine.


CLS 112/217.4
TXT Subject matter under subclass 217.3 wherein the stand includes a
    foot-treadle disclosed for driving the sewing device wherein the motor
    displaces the foot-treadle drive and the motor control is usually connected
    with the foot-treadle.

    (1)     Note.  In some instances the foot-treadle drive and the motor drive
    are both operative and may be used selectively.  However, usually, the
    conversion is from foot-treadle to motor driven.


CLS 112/220
TXT Construction of driving mechanisms.


CLS 112/221
TXT For driving the needle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80.4+,  for an embroidering, tufting device having needle supporting or
    manipulating means.


CLS 112/222
TXT Thread-inserting devices fore wing-machines.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80.05   and 80.16, for an embroidering, tufting device having a hollow or
    channelled needle.

    80.06   and 80.17, for an embroidering, tufting device having a noneyed
    needle.

    80.08,  for an embroidering, tufting device having yarn manipulation by
    fluid flow and also having a hollow needle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 102 as the general subclass for pointed
    instruments having an eye, hook, or equivalent to attach to a thread, tape,
    or the like for sewing, threading, or attaching the thread to a fabric.

    606,    Surgery, subclass 222 for surgical needles adapted to carry a
    suture through the skin or flesh of a living animal body.


CLS 112/223
TXT Adapted to thread and unthread at each operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198.


CLS 112/224
TXT To facilitate threading, the thread being retained during sewing operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223,    for needles adapted to be threaded and unthreaded at each operation
    of the needle.


CLS 112/225
TXT Attachments to facilitate setting and threading.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, subclass 170 for compound tools including needle
    setting and threading implements.

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 626 for needle-setting gages.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 99 for needle-threading implements.


CLS 112/226
TXT Includes means to clamp needle to needle-bar.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80.45,  for an embroidering, tufting device having particular needle
    supporting means.


CLS 112/227
TXT Guiding and guarding needles during their operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261,    for devices to prevent operator's fingers being drawn beneath the
    needle.


CLS 112/228
TXT Hook mechanisms or mechanism contained therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    467,    for a zigzag stitch forming mechanism wherein the needle is shifted
    back and forth across the line of material feed, which mechanism includes
    specified means for working the thread on the side of the material opposite
    the side from which the needle penetrates the material.


CLS 112/229
TXT Includes tension means for the bobbin.


CLS 112/230
TXT A plurality of members connected together to form the hook.


CLS 112/231
TXT Casings are provided for bobbins with means to hold the casings in position.


CLS 112/232
TXT Devices carrying a package of thread adapted to pass through a loop of
    needle-thread.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185,    and indented subclasses.

    467,    for a zigzag stitch forming mechanism wherein the needle is shifted
    back and forth across the line of material feed, which mechanism includes
    specified means for working the thread on the side of the material opposite
    the side from which the needle penetrates the material.


CLS 112/233
TXT Controlling the delivery of thread.


CLS 112/234
TXT Adapted to be reciprocated back and forth through the needle-loops.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195.


CLS 112/235
TXT Pressing the work against the work-support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60      and 61.


CLS 112/236
TXT For embroidering and darning machines.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     and indented subclasses and 121.


CLS 112/237
TXT Operable to release work.


CLS 112/238
TXT Releasing thread-tension when presser-bar is lifted.


CLS 112/239
TXT Operable connection with other moving parts.


CLS 112/240
TXT Securing presser-feet or other attachments to presser-bars.


CLS 112/241
TXT Take up slack in thread during thread formation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57      and 96.


CLS 112/242
TXT Drawing thread from the supply mass.


CLS 112/243
TXT Variable sewing-stitch formation independent of adjustments.


CLS 112/244
TXT Controlled through connection with presser-bar.


CLS 112/245
TXT Operated by the needle-bar.


CLS 112/246
TXT Includes means for adjustment of throw.


CLS 112/247
TXT Includes a spring.


CLS 112/248
TXT Continuously rotating takeups.


CLS 112/249
TXT A stationary cam over which the thread is moved.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248,    for rotary cam.


CLS 112/250
TXT Clamp and release thread periodically.


CLS 112/253
TXT Hold the free end of a thread for stitching.


CLS 112/254
TXT Regulate the feeding of thread.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59      and 97.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 195+ for
    devices adapted to place tension on material of indeterminate length.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 416+ and 147+ for a
    tensioning device with winding, unwinding, or in general use.


CLS 112/255
TXT Variable during stitch formation.


CLS 112/256
TXT Lubricating systems for sewing machines.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    184,    Lubrication, appropriate subclasses.


CLS 112/257
TXT Hold attachments by connections to work-support other parts of machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240.


CLS 112/258
TXT Supports including stationary parts cooperating with operating mechanisms.


CLS 112/259
TXT Stationary parts cooperating with needle-actuating mechanisms and
    associated devices.


CLS 112/260
TXT Support work for stitching operations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses.  Class 269 is the residual
    locus for patents to a device for clamping, supporting and/or holding an
    article (or articles) in position to be operated on or treated.  See notes
    thereunder for other related loci.


CLS 112/261
TXT Covers and guards for moving parts.


CLS 112/270
TXT ELEMENTS:

    Elements under the class definition wherein special significance is
    attributed to the elements structural adaptability for use in sewing
    operations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 570+ and 118+ for a
    spool of general use.


CLS 112/271
TXT Starting or stopping:

    Devices under subclass 270 to facilitate the starting or stopping of the
    sewing drive mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67      and 87, for devices of this type used on specialized machines.

    80.18,  for an embroidering, tufting device with condition responsive stop
    motion means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 68-85 for "wheel" brakes, properly classified in
    that class.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, appropriate subclasses.


CLS 112/272
TXT Work sensing:

    Devices under subclass 271 which sense the presence or absence of work and
    cause the sewing drive mechanism to start or stop in response to the
    condition sensed.


CLS 112/273
TXT Thread sensing:

    Devices under subclass 271 which sense a condition of the sewing thread,
    such as its slackness, a break or run out, and cause the sewing drive
    mechanism to start or stop in response to the condition sensed.


CLS 112/274
TXT With element positioning:

    Devices under subclass 271 including means to position an additional
    machine element such as a needle.


CLS 112/275
TXT Electrically operated:

    Devices under subclass 274 which are electrically controlled or operated.


CLS 112/276
TXT Fluid operated or controlled:

    Devices under subclass 271 which are operated or controlled by a fluid
    mechanism.


CLS 112/277
TXT Electrically operated or controlled:

    Devices under subclass 271 which are operated or controlled by electrical
    means.


CLS 112/278
TXT Thread sensing:

    Devices under subclass 270 which sense a condition of the sewing thread,
    such as slackness, breakage or run out, and activate a signal generator in
    response to the condition sensed.


CLS 112/279
TXT Bobbin winding:

    Devices under subclass 270 for winding the sewing thread onto bobbins.


CLS 112/280
TXT Cooling:

    Devices under subclass 270 for reducing the temperature of selected parts
    of the sewing machine.


CLS 112/281
TXT Needle:

    Devices under subclass 280 wherein the selected machine part is the needle.


CLS 112/282
TXT Waste extraction:

    Devices under subclass 270 for removing waste material, such as thread
    pieces, from any general or selected area of the sewing operation.


CLS 112/283
TXT Fly wheels:

    Devices under subclass 270 which are generally known in the machine arts as
    "fly wheels", including means to fasten or secure them on the supporting
    shaft.


CLS 112/284
TXT Linkage systems:

    Devices under subclass 270 made of one or more elements and specifically
    designed to cause a given mechanical motion or movement at a given point.


CLS 112/285
TXT Thread cutting, severing or breaking:

    Devices under subclass 270 designed to cut, sever, break, or otherwise part
    the stitch forming thread or threads at the end of a seam or between
    articles which are attached by a seam forming chain.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80.7+,  for an embroidering, tufting device including specific yarn
    manipulating, cutting or treating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, appropriate subclasses for compound tools including
    thread cutters.

    30,     Cutlery, for thread, string, or twine cutters, per se.


CLS 112/286
TXT With thread wiping:

    Devices under subclass 285 including additional structure which holds or
    positions the end of the thread which emanates from the needle, usually for
    the purpose of keeping the thread end out of the way of the next piece of
    work or work function.


CLS 112/287
TXT With thread disposal by air flow:

    Devices under subclass 285 having means to provide an air flow, positive
    and/or negative (suction), the function of such means being to remove or
    dispose of a piece of cut or waste thread.


CLS 112/288
TXT Thread chain:

    Devices under subclass 285 for parting the chain of thread which links
    adjacent articles or an article and the needle of the sewing machine.


CLS 112/289
TXT Rotary type:

    Devices under subclass 285 wherein the thread cutting blade rotates in its
    cutting action.


CLS 112/290
TXT Hot wire type:

    Devices under subclass 285 wherein a heated wire or rod is used to sever or
    part the thread.

    (1)     Note.  The wire or rod is usually heated electrically.


CLS 112/291
TXT Upper and lower threads:

    Devices under subclass 285 designed to cut a thread emanating from the
    upper surface or plane of the work and a thread emanating from the lower
    surface or plane of the work.


CLS 112/292
TXT Single cutter:

    Devices under subclass 291 wherein both the upper and the lower threads are
    cut by a single blade or sharpened surface.


CLS 112/293
TXT Upper thread:

    Devices under subclass 285 designed to cut a thread emanating from the
    upper surface or plane of the work.


CLS 112/294
TXT Scissors type:

    Devices under subclass 293 wherein the cutter comprises at least two blades
    which are movable relative to each other.


CLS 112/295
TXT Single blade cutter:

    Devices under subclass 293 wherein the cutter comprises a single blade or
    sharpened surface.


CLS 112/296
TXT Lower thread:

    Devices under subclass 285 designed to cut a thread emanating from the
    lower surface or plane of the work.


CLS 112/297
TXT Scissors type:

    Devices under subclass 296 wherein the cutter comprises at least two blades
    which are movable relative to each other.


CLS 112/298
TXT Single blade cutter:

    Devices under subclass 296 wherein the cutter comprises a single blade or
    sharpened edge.


CLS 112/299
TXT Manual control:

    Devices under subclass 285 wherein the thread parting operation is
    performed by manually positioning the thread against the parting means or
    by manually moving the parting means into and out of its operating position
    and/or movement.


CLS 112/300
TXT Electrically actuated:

    Devices under subclass 285 wherein the thread parting means is actuated by
    electricity or by an electrically actuated mechanism.


CLS 112/301
TXT Fluid actuated:

    Devices under subclass 285 wherein the thread parting means is actuated by
    fluid or a fluid operated mechanism.


CLS 112/302
TXT Thread guiding or handling:

    Devices under subclass 270 designed to guide, position or otherwise handle
    the thread before or after the seam or chain has been made but prior to
    cutting the seam or chain.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, may include a nominal
    recitation of a supply or take-up coil (e.g., less than a support for such
    a coil or a cooperative relationship between a tension or exhaust detector
    and reel driving or reel stopping means, etc.), subclass 196.1 for a
    passive guide combined with a material feeder.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 157+ for a residual
    guide that directs a strand* or subclass 566 for an unwinding apparatus
    having a particular guide or guard.


CLS 112/303
TXT Feeding work material:

    Device under subclass 154 having means to advance the work material into or
    away from the stitch forming mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80.3+,  for an embroidering, tufting device with specific fabric
    supporting, manipulating, cutting, or treating means.

    461+,   for a zigzag stitch forming mechanism wherein the needle is shifted
    back and forth across the line of material feed, which mechanism includes
    cam means for actuating the needle or material feed and further includes
    specified structure for transporting the material.


CLS 112/304
TXT By endless conveyor:

    Device under subclass 303 wherein the means to advance the work material
    comprises an endless conveyor.


CLS 112/305
TXT Under tension:

    Device under subclass 303 wherein the work material being advanced is
    stretched or otherwise placed under a tensile stress.


CLS 112/306
TXT Having means to align work:

    Device under subclass 303 including means to align the work with respect to
    the machine or with respect to another piece of work.


CLS 112/307
TXT Work of indeterminate length:

    Device under subclass 303 wherein the longitudinal dimension of the
    material being advanced is effectively infinite insofar as can be
    determined from the disclosed structure for advancing such material.


CLS 112/308
TXT Having curate feature:

    Device under subclass 303 wherein the work is advanced along a path that
    has curate or nonstraight-line portions.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are feed mechanisms which sense
    that the work has moved laterally of the stitch line, and make correction
    by feeding the work back to its proper position.


CLS 112/309
TXT Capable of feeding through 360o:

    Device under subclass 308 wherein the feed mechanism is cable of advancing
    the work material in all directions.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are mechanisms to advance the work
    material according to a predetermined pattern or design and are capable of
    reset or reprogram to different patterns or designs.


CLS 112/310
TXT Needle and helper:

    Device under subclass 303 wherein the stitch forming needle acts as one of
    two or more work material feed means.


CLS 112/311
TXT Clamp type:

    Device under subclass 303 wherein the work material is advanced by feed
    means in the form of two opposed surfaces which grip the upper and lower
    surfaces of the work material therebetween.


CLS 112/312
TXT Plural differential feed means:

    Device under subclass 303 wherein the feed means comprises at least two
    distinct work engaging mechanisms, each mechanism advancing at a different
    rate of speed.

    (1)     Note.  The feed mechanisms of this subclass either move apart to
    stretch the work or move toward each other to bunch or ruffle the work.


CLS 112/313
TXT Having adjustment feature:

    Device under subclass 312 having means to adjust the relative speed of
    movement between the two work engaging mechanisms.


CLS 112/314
TXT Having adjustment feature:

    Device under subclass 303 having means to adjust or otherwise change the
    movement, rate of advancement, or position of the work advancing means
    relative to the stitch forming means.


CLS 112/315
TXT Stitch length:

    Device under subclass 314 wherein the adjustment changes the length of the
    stitch.


CLS 112/316
TXT Reversible feed direction:

    Device under subclass 315 including means to reverse the direction of the
    work material feed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    446+,   for a zigzag stitch forming mechanism wherein the needle is shifted
    back and forth across the line of material feed, which mechanism includes
    particular structure for sewing a pattern which encloses a portion of the
    material within boundaries formed by the pattern (e.g., buttonholes).


CLS 112/317
TXT Reversible feed direction:

    Device under subclass 314 including means to reverse the direction of the
    work material feed.


CLS 112/318
TXT Rotary feed:

    Device under subclass 314 wherein the work advancing means rotates.


CLS 112/319
TXT Intermittent feed:

    Device under subclass 314 wherein the adjustment means provides for
    operation of the work advancing means at periodic intervals.


CLS 112/320
TXT Engaging upper side of work material:

    Device under subclass 303 wherein the work advancing means engages the
    upper or needle side of the work.


CLS 112/321
TXT Needle acts as feed means:

    Device under subclass 320 wherein the stitch forming needle acts as the
    sole work advancing means.


CLS 112/322
TXT Rotary feed:

    Device under subclass 303 wherein the work advancing means rotates.


CLS 112/323
TXT Four motion feed:

    Device under subclass 303 wherein the work advancing means moves in an up,
    forward, down, backward, generally rectangular path.


CLS 112/324
TXT Feed dog structure:

    Device under subclass 303 drawn to the structure of the feed dog or work
    engaging element.


CLS 112/400
TXT Product under the class definition.

    (1)     Note.  A patent for a strand or strandlike body including a
    longitudinal line of stitching in said strand or body will be placed in
    this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, appropriate subclasses, for a sewn garment, a
    subcombination thereof, and for a supporter or retainer therefor, and
    particularly subclass 274 for garment structure including a sewn binding,
    and subclass 275 for garment structure including a sewn seam.

    5,      Beds, appropriate subclasses, for sewn bedding such as pillows,
    mattresses or cushions.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 208+ for a
    sewn wiper or applicator.

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 17.1 for a patent to a sewn rug
    combined with an anti-slip or stiffener attachment where no more rug
    structure is claimed than is necessary to support the attachment.

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, appropriate subclasses, for a sewn
    article of the type provided for in that class, or a subcombination thereof.

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclass 140 for a sewn cover for
    an ironing board.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 7+ for a sewn
    fishnet.

    54,     Harness, appropriate subclasses for a sewn article of the type
    provided for in that class, particularly subclasses 65+ for a pad and
    subclasses 80.4+ for a fly-net.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclass 2 for a product of a darning
    operation which includes knitting.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclass 532 for a sewn gun or cartridge
    wad, and subclass 282 for a sewn bag adapted to contain explosive powder.

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclass 115 for covers for
    shelters.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 383+ for woven stock material.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, appropriate
    subclasses for a sewn product of the type provided for in that class, and
    particularly subclasses 385+ for a curtain or drape panel including sewn
    means (e.g., hem, loops) for mounting the panel on a support.

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 284+ for sewn stock material or article
    having particular structure which gives it an acoustical property.

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclasses 100+ for a sewn
    traveling bag.

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, subclass 25 for a chute
    of sewn flexible material.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 846+ for structure of apron
    type endless belt conveyors.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, appropriate subclasses, for a sewn
    receptacle particularly constructed to contain a specific article.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, appropriate subclasses for a rack having portions
    joined by sewing.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, appropriate subclasses for a sewn
    article carrier adapted to be supported on a person or object.

    281,    Books, Strips, and Leaves, subclass 16 for a sewn book.

    283,    Printed Matter, apropriate  subclasses for a sewn book in
    combination with printed matter.

    289,    Knots and Knot Tying, subclass 1.2 for the product of a knot tying
    operation.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 3+ for a cabinet
    comprising sewn fabric wall structure.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 357 for a sewn lamp shade.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 92 for a sewn paper bag.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    and particularly, subclasses 4+ for a sewn bow, pom-pom or rosette;
    subclasses 24+ for a sewn artificial flower; subclass 37 for a spirally
    flatwound strand or strip (e.g., braided rug) where the convolutions are
    held in place by stitching, and subclasses 102+ for a product which
    includes stitching combined with a discrete fastener, coating, or adhesive
    bond.

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, subclasses 598+ for a baseball
    having a sewn cover.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 237+ for a friction drive belt which may be sewn.


CLS 112/401
TXT Product under subclass 400 wherein panels* or longitudinally noncoextensive
    sheets* are joined by stitching in edge-abutting or edge-overlapping
    relation to form a web*, sheet* or layer*.

    (1)     Note.  A patent for a plurality of fur sections joined in
    edge-to-edge relation by sewing will be placed in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    423+,   for longitudinally coextensive webs or sheets joined by stitching
    and including a marginal reverse fold of at least one component.

    440+,   for longitudinally coextensive webs or sheets joined by stitching
    in edge-abutting or edge-overlapping relation, and see search notes
    thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, appropriate subclasses, for garment parts joined by a
    stitched seam.

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclass 57 for a stitched seam
    connecting dissimilar shoe parts or located in a particular zone of a shoe.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclass 22 for a method of cutting and
    assembling fur sections in general.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 54+ and 57+
    for similar structure in which sections are united other than by, or in
    addition to, stitching.


CLS 112/402
TXT Product under subclass 400 comprising a web* or sheet* which is embellished
    by - or in which layers* or components* thereof, or added elements thereon,
    are joined, reinforced or held in position by - a stitched strand* so
    disposed that it may have been introduced into the product by an eyed
    needle (with or without the cooperation of other sewing instrumentalities).

    (1)     Note.  A patent for a single layer of material with stitching not
    specifically provided for in any of the indented subclasses will be placed
    in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    412,    for a web or sheet formed by sewing a layer of strands or strand
    portions together.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, appropriate subclasses for a combined process of
    sewing and fluid treatment.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a single or plural layer sheet material product which is the result of
    a sewing operation followed by some other operation and which is not
    provided for in this class (112) or any other class, and particularly
    subclasses 102+ for a product which includes stitching combined with a
    discrete fastener, coating, or adhesive bond.


CLS 112/403
TXT Product under subclass 402 including a strand* or component* which, as
    disclosed, may be removed from the web or sheet by dissolution or
    disintegration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266.1+, for a process of embroidering which includes the incorporation of a
    decomposable element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclasses 164 and 168 a textile process
    which includes the step of dissolving a thread or component of a web.

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, appropriate subclasses for the use
    of etching in the dissolution or disintegration of a strand or component
    from a web.


CLS 112/404
TXT Product under subclass 402 wherein a plurality of horny epidermal
    outgrowths which make up the outer covering or plumage of birds; aperture
    pellets; or shiny platelets, strips or strands; are attached to the web or
    sheet, directly or indirectly, by stitching.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    475.01+, for a method of sewing feathers together and a method of attaching
    articles to a base by sewing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 44+ the generic locus for machines
    and machine methods of making and/or attaching trimmings to apparel,
    linens, and analogous articles, and see notes thereunder.


CLS 112/405
TXT Product under subclass 402 wherein a panel* or sheet* overlies and is
    attached by stitching to a nonthickness surface of a base web or sheet of
    greater length than the attached panel or sheet.

    (1)     Note.  The panel or sheet may be inserted in an aperture in the
    base and stitched to the edge of the aperture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 77+ for a
    similar product where the attaching means is other than or supplementary to
    stitching.


CLS 112/406
TXT Product under subclass 402 wherein the web or sheet has means secured
    thereto by a stitched thread for selectively attaching it to, and detaching
    it from, a cooperating means on another web or sheet.

    (1)     Note.  A stitched buttonhole is not considered an external
    fastening means within the definition of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    265.1+, for a method of attaching a fastener to a base by stitching.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 265 for a method of attaching a separable
    fastener to a garment element and for the resultant product.

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 695 for
    separable-fasteners attached by stitching.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 348 for a haberdashery type
    fastener stitched to a card to provided a mercantile unit.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 99+ for a
    product including an external type fastener attached to a base sheet or web
    by means other than stitching.


CLS 112/407
TXT Product under subclass 406 wherein the fastener is either an element curved
    or bent to catch or hold to another element, or an element adapted to be
    engaged by a curved or bent fastener element.

    (1)     Note.  A fastener of the type having a hook portion which
    resiliently interlocks with a cooperating fastener will be considered to be
    a snap fastener and will be placed in subclass 406.


CLS 112/408
TXT Product under subclass 406 wherein the fastener is an article of any shape
    (e.g., disc, knob) joined to the base web or sheet by stitching and adapted
    to pass through a cooperating slit or loop.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps etc., subclasses 90.1+ for button
    structure, per se, or combined with attaching means.


CLS 112/409
TXT Product under subclass 402 provided with a plurality of individual strand
    portions*, groups of strand portions (such as tassels) or strand-like loops
    integral with or sewn to a web or sheet edge and freely dependent or
    extending outwardly therefrom,  the so formed fringe being coextensive with
    said edge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 122 for a tassel attached to
    flexible suspending means and adapted to function as a handle therefor.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclass 385 for a woven fabric wherein loose
    unwoven ends of the constituent strands form a fringe.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 28 for a tassel,
    per se, and subclass 115 for a fringed stock material not including
    stitching.


CLS 112/410
TXT Product under subclass 402 wherein a plurality of fibers*, strand
    portions*, narrow strand-like strips* or groups of strands are attached to
    the web or sheet by a stitching operation and extend outwardly from a
    surface thereof; or wherein a component having outwardly extenting fibers,
    strand portions, or strand-like strips, no matter how provided, is
    embellished, reinforced, or joined to a base web or sheet by a stitched
    strand.

    (1)     Note.  The projecting portions of strand-like material may be cut
    to form discontinuous or independent tufts, or they may remain uncut to
    form pile loops.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80.01+, for an embroidering, tufting apparatus.

    401,    for a uniplanar sectional web, sheet or panel including a tufted or
    looped surface.

    405,    for a similar product including a longitudinal noncoextensive
    superposed panel or sheet.

    409,    for a pile fabric having a fringe sewn thereon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 208+ for a
    cleaning implement or applicator having a pile working surface.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 391+ for a fabric having tufts woven
    thereinto.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 85+ for a
    strand-type fabric which has been subjected to a napping operation or
    wherein a pile surface is secured to a base by means other than, or in
    addition to, stitching (e.g., by adhesion).


CLS 112/411
TXT Product under subclass 410 wherein the strand-like portions forming the
    tufts or loops do not pass through the base web or sheet and are attached
    thereto by a sewing thread.


CLS 112/412
TXT Product under subclass 402 wherein the web or sheet consists of a layer of
    strands* or strand portions* arranged side-by-side and held together by
    stitching.

    (1)     Note.  The strand portions may be portions of a single strand
    folded back and forth to lie side by side.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    429+,   for a product wherein strands or strand portions are sewn to a
    surface of a base web.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 37 for a
    spirally flat-wound strand product in which the convolutions are held in
    place by stitches; subclasses 105+ and 114 wherein strands in adjacent
    layers are in angular or parallel relation, respectively, and are held in
    place by means other than or in addition to stitching; and subclass 298.1
    for a web of parallel strands or strand-portions held together by an
    adhesive substance.

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 402+ for a needled nonwoven fabric.


CLS 112/413
TXT Product under subclass 402 in which at least a portion of a web or sheet,
    or in which a constituent strand* or sewing thread incorporated in a web or
    sheet, possesses a relatively high degree of extensibility or deformability
    longitudinally and/or transversely of the web or sheet and the ability to
    resile from such extension or deformation with substantially no permanent
    deformation.

    (1)     Note.  Patents including a layer which is elastically compressible
    in the direction of web thickness only are excluded from this subclass, as
    indicated by the term "longitudinally and/or transversely" in the
    definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    415+,   for a product wherein elasticity is due merely to the relation of
    the strands or strand portions to each other.

    420,    for a web which includes a compressible fiber-containing layer
    between other layers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclasses 169+ for a knitted elastic fabric.

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, subclass 2 for
    elastic braid, netting or lace.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 421+ for a woven elastic material.

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 182+ for a woven fabric which has an elastic quality and
    subclasses 328+ for a nonwoven fabric which has an elastic quality.


CLS 112/414
TXT Product under subclass 413 in which a portion or element of the structure
    is folded or pleated, or has a wavy, creped, crinkled, or embossed surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    418+,   for sewn stock material including an inelastic nonplanar welt, stay
    or edge binding.

    421,    for sewn inelastic stock material including a component of varying
    thickness.

    422+,   for sewn inelastic stock material including a component of
    nonplanar uniform-thickness material.


CLS 112/415
TXT Product under subclass 402 in which the web or sheet, or a component
    thereof, either (1) comprises significant claimed structure peculiar to one
    of the textile making arts other than sewing or felting (e.g., weaving,
    braiding, knitting), or (2) manifests a particular relation of the
    stitching strand to the strands of a sewn fabric.

    (1)     Note.  A mere descriptive term (e.g., woven) will not be sufficient
    for placement of a patent in this subclass. However, a limitation as to a
    particular structure or composition of individual strands of the fabric
    (e.g., straw, twisted paper), a particular arrangement or relationship of
    fabric strands or strand portions (e.g., mesh, lace, selvage, woven
    multi-ply, thick and thin strands), two dissimilar fabrics (e.g., woven and
    crocheted), or a particular weave of knit (e.g., twill, leno, rib, warp
    knit, tubular knit) will justify placement in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  A patent for sewn bias cut textile material will be placed
    in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    410+,   for a tufted or looped surface produced by stitching on a specific
    strand-type fabric.

    413+,   for a sewn fabric including elastic and inelastic strands.

    430,    for stitching including a nonpenetrating strand supported on the
    surface of a sewn web and having portions of the strand or of several such
    strands interlooped.

    SEARCH CLASS

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclasses 169+ for a knitted product, per se,
    and subclasses 190+ for a knitted product including nonknitted textile
    material.

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, subclasses 8+ for a
    braided product, per se.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 383+ for a woven product, per se.


CLS 112/416
TXT Product under subclass 415 in which the significant nonsewn textile
    structure of the web or sheet, or at least one component thereof, comprises
    either a plurality of courses of interlocked loops of strand material or
    crossed strands which are tied at their junctions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    430,    for knitted strand material disposed upon and sewn to a base web.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclasses 169+ for a knitted product, per se.

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, subclass 12 for
    knotted mesh.

    289,    Knots and Knot Tying, subclass 1.2 for a knotted strand, and
    subclass 1.5 for a method of tying a knot.


CLS 112/417
TXT Product under subclass 402 wherein a narrow component, a strand*, or a
    strand portion* lies either intermediate and in contact with two parallel
    web components or within a fold of a web or component and is held in place,
    in either instance, by stitching extending through the components or layers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    413+,   for a similar product including an elastic strip or strand.

    418,    for a strip sewn in a seam joining a plurality of components.

    429+,   for a web or sheet which includes a strand which does not penetrate
    it but is attached to an outer surface thereof by a stitched strand.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 181+ for sweat-band stock material for head
    coverings and subclass 275 for garment structure including a reinforced
    seam.

    5,      Beds, subclass 739 for an edge roll for a mattress.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 123 for a
    nonsewn stock material including a strand or strand-portion between folded
    layers; subclasses 189+ for such material including a strip between
    components.

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 388 and 402+ for a needled nonwoven fabric.


CLS 112/418
TXT Product under subclass 402 wherein a relatively narrow width of material is
    inserted in or overlies the sewn joint between adjacent components, or is
    folded over an edge of the web sheet, or a component thereof, and is
    secured thereto by stitching.

    (1)     Note.  The strip may be in a single thickness or infolded at one or
    both longitudinal edges, as in bias tape, and may be held in place by the
    stitches effecting the seam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    414,    for sewn elastic stock material including a nonplanar component.

    423+,   for a reversely folded sewn web in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 275 for garment structure including a reinforced
    seam.

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclass 57 for a reinforced seam in a
    particular zone of a shoe or uniting two dissimilar parts of a shoe.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 121+ for a
    nonsewn stock material including a folded piping.


CLS 112/419
TXT Product under subclass 418 wherein the strip is folded longitudinally back
    upon itself to form substantially parallel legs joined integrally at the
    bend and extending over the edge of at least one web component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    410+,   for a U-shaped edge binding sewn on a pile fabric.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 122 for a
    U-shaped or channel shaped edge binding secured to a web or sheet by means
    other than or supplementary to a stitched strand.


CLS 112/420
TXT Product under subclass 402 wherein a body of fibers (including paper or
    felt) or particles is disposed in a layer intermediate two surface layers
    of material differing in structure or composition from the intermediate
    layer, with the fiber or particulate layer stitched to at least one of the
    surface layers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    417,    for a product including a relatively narrow strip or strand
    enclosed between layers or components.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 161+ for a
    nonsewn composite stock material including a component of varying thickness
    and at least one other component conforming to the nonplanar surfaces of
    the first named component; subclasses 195+ for plural web components
    differentially or discontinuously adhered.

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 295+ for a woven fabric containing a paper or wood pulp layer,
    subclasses 320+ for a felt fabric, and subclasses 412 and 413 for a
    nonwoven fabric containing paper or wood.


CLS 112/421
TXT Product under subclass 402 wherein the nonthickness surfaces of a component
    deviate substantially from parallelism.

    (1)     Note.  Mere compression of the sewn material incidental to a normal
    stitching operation will not be considered a substantial deviation from
    parallelism.  However, a patent claiming a groove or depression produced by
    the stitching thread will be placed in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    420,    for a product wherein the component of varying thickness is of
    fibrous material and is retained between other layers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 156+ for
    similar nonsewn stock material.


CLS 112/422
TXT Product under subclass 402 wherein a web sheet or component of
    uniform-thickness material has its nonthickness surfaces* defined by other
    than two parallel planes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    414,    for a similar product including an elastic strand or component.

    417,    for a similar product including a strip, strand or strand portion
    enclosed between layers or components.

    418,    for a product including a nonplanar strip sewn in or over a seam or
    over an edge of a web, sheet or component.

    420,    for a product wherein the nonplanar component is a cover for a
    fibrous or particulate layer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 174+ for
    similar nonsewn stock material.


CLS 112/423
TXT Product under subclass 422 wherein the nonplanarity is in the form of a
    marginal portion of the web, sheet, or component folded to extend out of
    the plane thereof or turned back on itself substantially 180o and
    maintained in such condition, directly or indirectly, by stitching.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    410+,   for a tufted or looped product including a folded edge binding.

    417,    for a product including a strip, strand or strand portion enclosed
    within a reverse fold of a web, sheet or component.

    418+,   for a reversely folded narrow strip or tape included in a stitched
    seam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 181+ for sweat-band stock material for head
    coverings.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 121+ for
    similar nonsewn stock material.


CLS 112/424
TXT Product under subclass 423 wherein stitches which join layers or components
    in the zone of the fold are covered by a fold or layer of material on at
    least one face of the web or sheet, with or without penetration by the
    stitches of the inner surface of said covering fold or layer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    419,    for a reversely folded and blind-stitched component in the form of
    a U-shaped binding.

    441,    for nonfolded components united by concealed stitching running
    along an edge of at least one of the components.

    475.24, for a method of blind stitching.


CLS 112/425
TXT Product under subclass 424 wherein the concealed or blind stitching has
    portions extending thickness-wise and outside the marginal extremity of one
    or more layers of a web or sheet; or wherein a reversely folded component
    is sewn to an adjacent face-contacting component (or reversely folded
    layers of a web, sheet, or component are sewn to each other) by concealed
    or blind stitching running along or adjacent the fold margin of the folded
    component (or the web or sheet), which margin is displaced inwardly from
    the edge of the composite web or sheet.

    (1)     Note.  The marginal extremity referred to above may be the fold
    junction of two layers of a web or sheet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    475.24, for a method of blind overedge stitching.


CLS 112/426
TXT Product under subclass 423 in which the reversely folded portion of a
    component is located in the zone of stitching uniting such component to one
    or more other components.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    418,    for a similar product including a welt or stay sewn in or over the
    seam.

    419,    for a product wherein the folded component is a U-shaped edge
    binding.

    424+,   for a similar product including concealed or blind stitching.

    440+,   for united planar components.


CLS 112/427
TXT Product under subclass 422 wherein at least a portion of the web, sheet or
    component has been folded back upon itself substantially 180o+ two or more
    times in series, each succeeding fold of such portion being made in a
    rotary directional sense opposite to that of the next preceding fold so as
    to provide a series of offset portions in substantially parallel relation;
    or wherein a longitudinally extending portion of the web, sheet, or
    component has been gathered in regular or irregular folds or crimps and is
    held in this condition by stitching.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    414,    for a similar product including an elastic strand or component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 181 for similar
    nonsewn stock material.


CLS 112/428
TXT Product under subclass 422 comprising two or more longitudinally
    coextensive components* held together in a composite web or sheet by
    stitching with at least one of the components being nonplanar.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    417,    for plural components or layers sewn together with a strand or
    narrow strip therebetween.

    420,    for plural components sewn together in which an intermediate
    component is a fiber layer.

    423+,   for plural components at least one of which has a marginal reverse
    fold.

    427,    for plural components at least one of which is pleated or tucked.


CLS 112/429
TXT Product under subclass 402 wherein a strand*, a narrow component which
    functions in the assembly like a strand, part of a strand, or a group of
    fibers, is disposed upon a base web or sheet which it does not penetrate
    and is attached thereto by a sewn thread.

    (1)     Note.  A floating strand or strand-like member may be, for
    instance, a locking thread or one that serves only as an ornament.

    (2)     Note.  A tape which has been bent about its longitudinal axis and
    sewn to a base in that condition as an edge binding is not considered to be
    a strand-like tape for this subclass. See subclass 419.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404,    for a floating strand of reflective material secured to a surface
    by stitching.

    411,    for floating strands, fibers, or strand-like tapes which form tufts
    upon the base.

    412,    for a fabric consisting of a layer of strands or strand portions in
    side-by-side contact and held together by stitching.

    417,    for a strand lying between two layers and secured in position by
    sewing.

    419,    for a narrow-edge binding tape sewn to a base.


CLS 112/430
TXT Product under subclass 429 wherein a loop of a floating strand or
    strand-like member passes through a loop of the same or another such strand
    or member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    416,    for sewn stock material including a knitted component.

    435,    for a product including a plurality of intersecting floating
    strands which are not interlooped.


CLS 112/431
TXT Product under subclass 429 wherein the floating strand, strand portion, or
    strand-like member is included in a seam which extends along or immediately
    adjacent the perimeter of a slit, or of a space from which the substance of
    the base web or sheet has been removed or omitted in its manufacture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    433     and 436, for a float thread incorporated in or held by overedge
    stitching.

    437,    for a sewn apertured stock material of a more general nature and
    especially for an overedge seam along an opening such as a buttonhole.

    441,    for stitching extending across or through a gap between two
    components and serving to unite such components.

    475.25, for a method of stitching a buttonhole.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 266 for a buttonhole strip.

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 659+ for a buttonhole
    structure which does not include stitching.

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclass 52 for a buttonhole piece for
    shoes.


CLS 112/432
TXT Product under subclass 429 wherein the sewing thread(s) fastening the
    floating strand or strand-like member to the base penetrate(s) the base at
    intervals along two or more substantially straight equidistant lines to
    provide two or more series of loops, and in which the floating strand on
    strand-like member is interlooped with the loops of at least two such
    series in continuing sequence.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    431     and 436, for a strand floating back and forth between curved lines
    of stitching.


CLS 112/433
TXT Product under subclass 432 wherein the lines of sewing thread with which
    the floating strand or strand-like member is interlooped include a line of
    stitch-loops extending over the edge of the base from one face thereof
    toward the other, or in which the floating strand or strand-like member
    itself extends over the edge of the base from one face thereof toward the
    other, the combined floating and needle-thread elements forming an
    arrangement of stitches which extends around the edge of the base.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    475.26, for a method of over edge stitching.


CLS 112/434
TXT Product under subclass 432 wherein the lines of sewing thread, with which
    the floating strand or strand-like member is interlooped, penetrate,
    respectively, different ones of a pair of edge-contacting, overlapped or
    adjacent substantially coplanar components and in which the said floating
    strand or member extends back and forth across the interweb line of
    abutment, area of overlap or intervening gap.

    (1)     Note.  A patent for a product in which the adjacent edges of the
    components are bent out of the plane of the web or sheet into face contact
    will be placed in subclass 423.

    (2)     Note.  A patent for a similar product including overedge stitching
    will be placed in subclass 433.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    405,    for a seam serving to unite a panel to a web.

    418,    for a seam uniting contiguous components and provided with a strip
    or tape over the seam.

    423+,   for a product wherein the adjacent edges of the components are bent
    out of the plane of the web or sheet into face contact.

    440+,   for a seam of more general nature uniting a plurality of components.


CLS 112/435
TXT Product under subclass 434 wherein a plurality of floating strands or
    strand-like members run back and forth between the parallel lines of
    stitching and cross each other at spaced points in their travel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    430,    for a seam comprising interlooped floating strands.


CLS 112/436
TXT Product under subclass 429 wherein the floating strand, strand portion or
    strand-like member is bound to the base by, or is an integral part of, an
    arrangement of stitches which extends from a line of through-stitches on
    one face of the base around an edge of the base to a line of
    through-stitches on the other face.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    431,    for similar seam structure along the periphery of an opening in a
    web or sheet.

    433,    for a strand or strandlike member floating back and forth between
    parallel lines of stitching to constitute an overedge seam.

    437,    for an overedge seam of a more general nature running along a
    perforation in a web or sheet.

    441,    for an overedge seam in general.

    475.26, for a method of overedge stitching.


CLS 112/437
TXT Product under subclass 402 wherein the sewn web or sheet, or a component
    thereof, includes one or more holes, slits, gaps, or other openings formed
    independently of the introduction of the sewing thread therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    405,    for a product including an apertured base and a longitudinally
    noncoextensive panel or sheet located in or over the aperture and secured
    by stitching.

    431,    for a floating strand, strand portion or strandlike member disposed
    upon and sewn to a base web or sheet along the perimeter of an opening
    therein

    441,    for stitching extending across or through a gap between two
    components and serving to unite such components.

    446+,   for a zigzag stitch forming mechanism wherein the needle is shifted
    back and forth across the line of material feed, which mechanism includes
    particular structure for sewing a pattern which encloses a portion of the
    material within boundaries formed by the pattern (e.g., buttonholes).

    475.25, for a method of sewing a buttonhole.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 266 for a buttonhole strip.

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 659+ for a buttonhole
    structure which does not include stitching.

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclass 52 for a buttonhole piece for
    shoes.


CLS 112/438
TXT Product under subclass 402 wherein the sewing thread is arranged in a
    series of stitch loops each of which is drawn through the bight of a
    preceding loop.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    430,    for a product including interlooped floating strands or strand
    portions.

    475.17+, for a method of making chain stitches.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclasses 169+ and appropriate subclasses for
    a fabric formed of a strand or strands formed in loops which extend through
    the bights of preceding loops in series.


CLS 112/439
TXT Product under subclass 402 wherein the stitches are arranged on the surface
    of the web or sheet to form a decorative pattern.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78+,    for an embroidery machine, and subclass 266 for an embroidery
    method.

    403,    for an embroidered fabric including a decomposable thread or
    component.

    404,    for a fabric embellished by feathers, beads or reflective material
    attached thereto by stitching.

    409,    for an embroidered product including strand portions or strand
    loops extending outwardly from an edge thereof.

    410+,   for a tufted or looped web or sheet surface wherein the tufts or
    loops are arranged in an ornamental pattern.

    429+,   for ornamental stitching including a floating strand.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 244 for an embroidery form, and subclass 246 for
    an embroidered insignia.


CLS 112/440
TXT Product under subclass 402 not provided for in any of the preceding
    subclasses wherein the sewing strand joins a plurality of web or sheet
    components to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    409,    for a product wherein one of the components has an edge fringe.

    410+,   for a product wherein one of the components has a tufted or looped
    pile surface.

    418+,   for a product including a welt or stay.

    420,    for a product wherein a fibrous or particulate layer or component
    is enclosed between other layers.

    421,    for a product including a component of varying thickness.

    422+,   for a product wherein one of the components is of nonplanar
    uniform-thickness material.

    429+,   for components joined by stitching which includes a floating strand.

    438,    for components joined by a chain stitch.

    439,    for components joined by ornamental stitching.


CLS 112/441
TXT Product under subclass 440 wherein the uniting stitches of the sewing
    strand occur in the region of one of the marginal boundaries of at least
    one of the components.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    440.


CLS 112/443
TXT Vibrating needle:

    Device under subclass 157 wherein the needle is shifted back and forth
    laterally across a line of material feed in forming stitches in one or more
    layers of material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81+,    for machines adapted for ornamentation by hemstitching.

    98+,    for machines adapted for ornamentation by stitching operations and
    in which the needle operates in a vertical plane.

    111,    for machines adapted to sew on flat buttons and in which the needle
    is shifted laterally.

    321,    for stitch forming mechanisms engaging the upper side of the work
    material and in which the needle acts as a feed means.


CLS 112/444
TXT Having indicator:

    Device under subclass 443 including means to provide a human attendant with
    information regarding the operation or condition of the device or the
    material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 200+ for general indicators,
    subclasses 309+ for general rotary indicators.


CLS 112/445
TXT And specified electronic memory:

    Device under subclass 444 wherein significance is attributed to means to
    store information for later retrieval and wherein the information stored
    has electrical or magnetic properties.


CLS 112/446
TXT Closed pattern sewing (e.g., buttonholes):

    Device under subclass 443 particularly adapted to sewing a discrete set of
    stitches (i.e., a pattern) on material, which pattern encloses a portion of
    the material within boundaries formed by the stitches.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65+,    for machines adapted for stitching around the edges of an opening,
    such as a buttonhole.  Note subclass 73, particularly, in which the needle
    is shifted laterally in forming the buttonhole stitch.

    264.1,  for methods of buttonhole or eyelet forming.

    316,    for stitch forming mechanisms having means to advance the work
    material wherein the stitch length is adjustable and the material feed
    direction is reversible.


CLS 112/447
TXT Including electronic memory:

    Device under subclass 446 including means to store information for later
    retrieval wherein the information stored has electrical or magnetic
    properties.


CLS 112/448
TXT Having cam actuation of needle or material feed:

    Device under subclass 446 including a first element and a slave element
    which move relative to one another, wherein the first element has an
    irregular or eccentric surface over which a portion of the slave element is
    caused to slide, and wherein needle or material movement is controlled by
    the resultant movement of the slave element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    459+,   for zigzag stitch forming mechanisms having cam actuation of either
    needle or material feed which are not restricted to closed pattern sewing.


CLS 112/449
TXT And means to change, without operator intervention, stitch width or
    material feed:

    Device under subclass 448 wherein a human attendant can preset elements of
    the device to cause the amplitude of lateral needle movement or the amount
    of material transported past the needle per needle reciprocation to vary as
    the device operates without further input from the human attendant.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is intended to include a device which can be
    preset by a human attendant to produce rectangular buttonholes wherein the
    device sews at least parts of two sides of the buttonhole without further
    input by the attendant.


CLS 112/450
TXT Basting stitch or skipping stitch:

    Device under 443 wherein means are provided (1) to produce stitches which
    temporarily hold material elements together or (2) to omit (skip) stitches
    from a chosen discrete set of stitches to be sewed.

    (1)     Note.  With respect to (2), devices with unlatching means for
    unlatching the needle bar from the associated needle bar reciprocatory
    drive mechanism in order to omit a stitch are included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80.44,  for an embroidering, tufting device having means to disconnect a
    needle and drive means.

    221,    for needle driving mechanism elements.


CLS 112/451
TXT Backstitch:

    Device under subclass 443 wherein means are provided to produce a stitch at
    the beginning or at the end of a discrete set of stitches (e.g., a
    pattern), the stitch specifically functioning to prevent unravelling of the
    pattern; the stitch is selectable separately from the pattern.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    317,    for stitch forming mechanisms having means for feeding the work
    material in a reverse direction so as to produce backstitching.


CLS 112/452
TXT Having multiple needles:

    Device under subclass 443 wherein at least two needles are shifted back and
    forth transverse to the line of feed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163,    for zigzag stitch forming mechanisms which contain a plurality of
    needles.


CLS 112/453
TXT Having electronic memory:

    Device under subclass 443 including means to store information for later
    retrieval wherein the information stored has electrical or magnetic
    properties.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    445,    for zigzag stitch forming mechanisms including indicator means and
    an electronic memory.

    447,    for zigzag stitch forming mechanisms adapted for sewing closed
    patterns (e.g., buttonholes) which include an electronic memory.

    470.01+, for machines adapted for special work which are controlled by a
    prearranged pattern or program.


CLS 112/454
TXT Plural diverse patterns in series:

    Device under subclass 453 including means whereby a human attendant can
    preset the device to sew two different and discrete sets of stitches (i.e.,
    patterns) in succession without further input from the attendant; each
    discrete set of stitches is selectable alone for sewing by the attendant.


CLS 112/455
TXT Having computer control of linkage intermediate motor and needle or
    material feed:

    Device under subclass 453 including a unit which receives and logically
    processes electrical signals and then outputs an electrical signal to
    adjust, select, or actuate an element located in a drive train between a
    drive motor and a needle movement or material transporting mechanism.


CLS 112/456
TXT Including means to calculate needle or material feed parameters:

    Device under subclass 453 including means to algebraically manipulate
    selected variables or constants and to produce an output command which
    effects alteration of needle movement or material transport.


CLS 112/457
TXT Including programmable or detachable memory:

    Device under subclass 453 wherein (1) the information storage means
    contains stored information which is alterable by a human attendant or (2)
    the information storage means is specified as being physically
    exchangeable, by a human attendant, for another information storage means.


CLS 112/458
TXT Including pattern selection means:

    Device under subclass 453 having means whereby a human attendant can choose
    a discrete set of stitches (i.e., a pattern) to be sewn from a plurality of
    patterns.

    (1)     Note.  The plurality of patterns, from which the pattern to be sewn
    is chosen, are usually stored in the electronic memory.

    (2)     Note.  Devices including means for a human attendant to vary the
    amplitude of needle oscillation or to vary the material feed
    characteristics are included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    457,    for zigzag stitch forming mechanisms including a programmable or
    detachable electronic memory.


CLS 112/459
TXT Having cam actuation of needle or material feed:

    Device under subclass 443 including a first element and a slave element
    which move relative to one another wherein the first element has an
    irregular or eccentric surface over which a portion of the slave element is
    caused to slide, and wherein needle movement or material transport is
    controlled by the resultant movement of the slave element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    448+,   for zigzag stitch forming mechanisms having cam actuation of the
    needle or material feed which are applied to closed pattern sewing (e.g.,
    buttonholes).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 567+ for cam elements.


CLS 112/460
TXT Including detachable cam:

    Device under subclass 459 including structure to facilitate the physical
    removal of the first element (cam) from the device by a human attendant.

    (1)     Note.  Cam detaching devices are included in this subclass.


CLS 112/461
TXT And specified material feed:

    Device under subclass 459 wherein significance is attributed to particular
    structure for transporting the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    303+,   for stitch forming mechanisms having means to advance the material.

    448+,   for zigzag stitch forming mechanisms particularly adapted to sewing
    closed patterns (e.g., buttonholes).


CLS 112/462
TXT And fine adjustment of stitch width or material feed:

    Device under subclass 461 further including means by which the amplitude of
    needle oscillation or the rate of material transport can be varied
    independently of the first element cam surface.

    (1)     Note.  Means for adjusting the stitch width are usually similar in
    structure to means for adjusting the material feed; therefore, both means
    are included in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Devices wherein the only available adjustment of stitch
    width or material feed results in the elimination of needle shifting or
    material transport are not included in this subclass.


CLS 112/463
TXT And plural, selectively used cams:

    Devices under subclass 461 including at least two first element cams, one
    of which can be chosen for active engagement by a slave element.

    (1)     Note.  A first element cam is in "active" engagement with a slave
    element if cam movement causes movement of the slave element which in turn
    causes another functional element such as a needle movement or material
    transporting mechanism to move.

    (2)     Note.  Devices having coaxial cams with cam portions which potions
    are adjustable relative to one another so as to define a single cam
    surface, which surface rotates to move a slave element and connected
    mechanism, are included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    460,    for zigzag stitch forming mechanisms having cam actuation of the
    needle or material feed and including a detachable cam.


CLS 112/464
TXT Including fine adjustment of stitch width:

    Device under subclass 459 further including means by which the amplitude of
    needle shifting can be varied independently of the first element cam
    surface.

    (1)     Note.  Devices wherein the only adjustment of stitch width results
    in the elimination of needle shifting are not included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    462,    for zigzag stitch forming mechanisms having cam actuation of the
    needle or material feed and including specified material feed means and
    means for the fine adjustment of stitch width or material feed.


CLS 112/465
TXT Including plural, selectively used cams:

    Devices under subclass 459 including at least two first element cams, one
    of which can be chosen for active engagement by a slave element.

    (1)     Note.  A first element cam is in "active" engagement with a slave
    element if cam movement causes movement of the slave element which in turn
    causes another functional element such as a needle movement or material
    transporting mechanism to move.

    (2)     Note.  Devices having coaxial cams with cam portions which portions
    are adjustable relative to one another so as to define a single cam
    surface, which surface rotates to move a slave element and connected
    mechanism, are included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    460,    for zigzag stitch forming mechanisms having cam actuation of the
    needle or material feed and including a detachable cam.

    463,    for zigzag stitch forming mechanisms having cam actuation of the
    needle or material feed and including plural selectively used cams and
    specified material feed means.


CLS 112/466
TXT And plural followers:

    Device under subclass 465 including at least two slave elements which slave
    elements actively engage the same or different first element cams.


CLS 112/467
TXT Having specified looptaker structure:

    Device under subclass 443 wherein significance is attributed to means for
    working the stitching thread on the side of the material opposite the side
    from which the needle penetrates the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159,    for zigzag stitch forming mechanisms having a looper which is
    shifted with the needle.


CLS 112/470.01
TXT Pattern controlled or programmed:

    Device under subclass 2 including a control system having program storing
    means either (a) to produce a series of stitches along a predetermined
    path, or (b) to control an ancillary operation of the machine.

    (1)     Note. An example of an ancillary operation includes a machine
    generated audio voice command, a pattern learning system, etc.

    (2)     Note. The program storing means can be either a mechanical device
    or an electrical device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80.23+, for an embroidery-type tufting device responsive to an optical,
    electronic or magnetic pattern program means.

    102.5,  for a vertically reciprocating needle-type fabric shifting
    embroidery machine have an electronic pattern or program control system.

    445+,   for a vibrating needle-type zigzag stitch forming mechanism having
    an electronic memory and an indicator.

    447,    for a vibrating needle-type zigzag stitch forming mechanism for
    sewing a closed pattern (e.g. buttonhole, etc.) having electronic memory.

    453+,   for a vibrating needle-type zigzag stitch forming mechanism having
    electronic memory, especially subclass 458 wherein the device includes
    pattern selection means through which an operator can select one pattern
    from a plurality of patterns.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 700+ for an instrument for the
    measurement of a distance, especially subclass 735 where the measurement
    device is for flexible material and is achieved by rolling contact and the
    resultant data is processed through a computer.

    38,     Textiles: Ironing and Smoothing, subclass 102.2 for an embroidery
    hoop.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 159+ for an inspecting,
    measuring, or testing device for a sheet, woven fabric, fiber, or filament.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 25 through 62 for a
    mechanism which converts rotary motion to reciprocating motion or
    reciprocating motion to rotary motion; subclasses 111 through 125.5 for an
    intermittent grip-type device, especially subclasses 112 through 125.5 for
    an intermittent grip-type device which converts rotary motion to
    intermittent unidirectional motion; and subclasses 113 and 114 for an
    intermittent grip-type device which converts rotary motion to intermittent
    unidirectional motion which includes an automatic control system.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 202 for a photocell system responsive to a
    pattern, subclass 548 for a photocell system which controls a web, strand,
    strip, or sheet; subclasses 559+ for a photocell which is responsive to
    light from a web, strand, strip, or sheet and which produces an electrical
    signal which is indicative of some characteristic of the material; and
    subclasses 571+ for a prephotocell system which detects the presence,
    absence, or some characteristic of a web, strand, strip, or sheet.

    318,    Electricity: Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses for a
    motor control system in general, and especially subclasses 567+ for an
    electrical motor control system which uses a program or pattern control
    system.


CLS 112/470.02
TXT With stitch counter:

    Device under subclass 470.01 wherein the control system is combined with
    means to record the number of stitches produced.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, appropriate subclasses for a mechanical counter.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, appropriate subclasses for an electrical counter.


CLS 112/470.03
TXT Material sensing and subsequent feed adjustment:

    Device under subclass 470.01 including a workpiece sensor, means for
    conveying the workpiece through the stitch forming region, and means for
    adjusting the speed of the workpiece conveyer; and wherein the control
    system adjusts the speed of the workpiece conveyer based on the output of
    the workpiece sensor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272,    for a work sensor which inputs data into a  stopping or starting
    control system.

    273,    for a thread sensor which inputs data into a stopping or starting
    control system.

    303+,   for a stitch forming mechanism having a workpiece conveyer; and
    especially subclasses 314+ for a stitch forming mechanism having means to
    adjust or otherwise change the movement, the rate of advancement, or the
    position of the workpiece conveying means relative to the stitch forming
    mechanism.


CLS 112/470.04
TXT Operator controlled data entry means:

    Device under subclass 470.01 including means to enable the operator of the
    sewing machine to readily alter the program data of the control system.

    (1)     Note. Examples of program data are fabric type, fabric weight,
    stitch length, stitch count, sewing speed, stitch pattern, etc.


CLS 112/470.05
TXT With means for performing a diverse operation:

    Device under  subclass 470.01 combined with means to perform a
    non-stitching procedure on the work either prior to or after the sewing
    operation.

    (1)     Note. Examples of non-stitching procedure include cutting,
    stacking, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses for a cutting device, per se.,
    especially subclass 100 wherein the product is handled by suction,
    subclasses 202+ for a cutting device which operates during the dwell time
    of an intermittent feed system, subclasses 209+ for the aforementioned
    combined with a work sensor,; subclasses 255+ for a multiple station
    system, subclass 276 for a work-feed element which moves with the work,
    subclass 360 for a cutting system having a work sensor, subclass 910 for an
    embroidery trimming or cutting device, and subclasses 936+ for a cutting
    device for cloth or leather.


CLS 112/470.06
TXT Positionable work carrier under electronic pattern or program control:

    Device under subclass 470.01 wherein the program storing means is an
    electronic device which stores a stitch pattern and wherein the sewing
    machine further includes means for gripping, supporting, and conveying the
    work with respect to the sewing needle to form the stitch pattern.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86,     for a horizontally reciprocating embroidery-type sewing machine
    having a fabric shifting mechanism which is pattern controlled (e.g.,
    jacquard type).

    90+,    for a horizontally reciprocating embroidery-type sewing machine
    having a fabric shifting mechanism.

    102+,   for a vertically reciprocating embroidery-type sewing machine
    having a fabric shifting mechanism, subclass 102.5 for a vertically
    reciprocating embroidery-type sewing machine having a pattern or program
    control system and subclass 103 for a vertically reciprocating
    embroidery-type sewing machine having a work holder frame.

    118+,   for a sewing machine especially adapted to sew a quilt having a
    mechanism to shift the work relative to the sewing machine, and especially
    subclass 119 for the aforementioned combined with a work holder.

    136+ ,  for a workguide.

    303+,   for a stitch-forming mechanism having a workfeeder, especially
    subclasses 308+ wherein the workfeeder is capable of moving along a curved
    path, and subclass 311 for a workfeeder having a work clamp.

    470.14+,for a sewing machine having a work holder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    38,     Textiles: Ironing and Smoothing, subclass 102.2 for an embroidery
    hoop.


CLS 112/470.07
TXT For workpiece edge sewing.

    Device under subclass 470.06 wherein the work carrier is movable along a
    path which is parallel and adjacent to the perimeter of the workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153,    for a workguide responsive to the edge of the material.


CLS 112/470.08
TXT For stocking:

    Device under subclass 470.06 wherein the work carrier is movable along a
    path which is specialized for sewing a nether garment which is a
    close-fitting covering for the foot and at least a part of the leg.


CLS 112/470.09
TXT Positionable work carrier under mechanical pattern or program control:

    Device under subclass 470.01 wherein the program storing means is a
    mechanical device which stores a stitch pattern, and wherein the sewing
    machine further includes means for gripping, supporting, and conveying the
    work with respect to the needle to form the stitch pattern.


CLS 112/470.11
TXT Spiral pattern:

    Device under subclass 470.09 wherein the work carrier moves the article
    along a path which produces a helical stitch pattern.


CLS 112/470.12
TXT Traveling sewing machine:

    Device under subclass 2 including means for moving the sewing machine
    during the sewing process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.1+,   for a machine for sewing a mattress.

    117+,   for a machine for sewing a quilt.


CLS 112/470.13
TXT Multidirectional or rotational:

    Device under subclass 470.12 having means for moving the sewing machine
    along either (a) two axis or (b) rotationally about a single axis.


CLS 112/470.14
TXT Positionable work carrier:

    Device under subclass 2 having means to grip, support, and carry the
    workpiece relative to the sewing needle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12+,    for a hat sewing machine, and especially subclasses 13+ for a hat
    sewing machine having a work carrier.

    65+,    for a buttonhole sewing machine, especially subclasses 70+ wherein
    the sewing machine includes a work clamp.

    103,    for a work carrier associated with an embroidery machine.

    114,    for a sewing machine having a holder for an article to be attached.

    148,    for a work holder, per se.

    470.06+, for a sewing machine having a moveable work carrier responsive to
    an electronic pattern or program.

    470.09+,for a sewing machine having a moveable work carrier responsive to a
    mechanical pattern or program.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 37+ for a folding device, subclass 43
    and subclasses 66+ for a form, especially subclass 75 for a form for a
    stocking.

    269,    Work Holders, subclass 53 for a pin-type work holder and subclasses
    55+ for a work holder mounted for movement.


CLS 112/470.15
TXT For  stocking:

    Device under subclass 470.14 wherein the work carrier is specialized for
    gripping, supporting, and carrying a nether garment which is a
    close-fitting covering for the foot and at least part of the leg.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    470.08,  for a work carrier of this type which is moved under control of an
    electronic program.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 43 and subclasses 66+ for a form,
    especially subclass 75 for a form for a stocking.


CLS 112/470.16
TXT For folding the work:

    Device under subclass 470.14 further including means for doubling the work
    over upon itself.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147,    for a work folding mechanism, per se, used in a sewing machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 38 for a folding mechanism including a
    templet over which the edge of the material is folded by a moveable  folder
    blade.


CLS 112/470.17
TXT For stitching in a circle:

    Device under 470.14 wherein the work holder is rotatable about an axis to
    produce a circular line of stitching.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12+,    for a hat sewing machine, especially subclass 14 for a rotary work
    support for a hat.


CLS 112/470.18
TXT Driving mechanism for work carrier:

    Device under subclass 470.14 having means for moving the work carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220,    for driving means for a sewing needle.


CLS 112/470.19
TXT Feather sewing machine:

    Device under subclass 2 wherein the sewing machine is specially adapted to
    sew feathers together or to a backing.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes both natural or man-made feathers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles: Fiber Preparation, subclass 4 for a device for reducing
    feathers to upholstery or cloth making material.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 47 for a device for preparing feathers
    not otherwise provided for.


CLS 112/470.21
TXT Stringer:

    Device under subclass 2 wherein the sewing machine includes means to attach
    an elongated threadlike member of fixed, predetermined length to a
    workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156,    for a stitch forming mechanism having means to tie the stitching
    thread.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 241 for an apparatus for assembling either
    by stringing parts on an attenuated or elongated means or by passing such
    means through a part or parts, where no stitching is involved; and subclass
    433 for a process of mechanical assemble or joining which includes passing
    a narrow attenuating member through a series of pieces or passing pieces
    serially over the member to arrange the pieces upon the member.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 50 for a device for inserting a tape
    thread or cord into a garment lace or the like where no sewing needle is
    involved.

    412,    Bookbinding: Process and Apparatus, subclass 35 for book edge
    binding device which has a sewing needle.


CLS 112/470.22
TXT With knotter:

    Device under subclass 470.21 wherein the stringer-type sewing machine is
    combined with means for tying one end of the thread.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    289,    Knots and Knot Tying, subclasses 2+ for a device for forming a knot.


CLS 112/470.23
TXT For sewing same length stranded material together:

    Device under subclass 2 wherein the sewing machine is particularly
    configured to stitch together equal length stands of material.


CLS 112/470.24
TXT Fabric tuft:

    Device under subclass 470.23 wherein the strands of material are sewn to a
    fabric backing without inserting them through the backing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80.01+, for a tufting machine of the type which inserts the yarn through
    the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    289,    Knots and Knot Tying, subclass 2 for a device for forming a knot in
    a cord, strand, or strip.


CLS 112/470.25
TXT For making shoe sole of plant stalk material (e.g. hemp, jute, straw, etc.):

    Device under subclass 2 specialized to stitch together plant stalk material
    to form a shoe sole.


CLS 112/470.26
TXT Necktie:

    Device under subclass 2 specialized to stitch material to form an
    elongated, decorative, neck-encircling garment.


CLS 112/470.27
TXT Upholstery:

    Device under subclass 2 wherein the sewing machine is specialized to sew a
    large padded or stuffed impact absorbing article.

    (1)     Note. An example of an impact absorbing article includes a cushion
    in a chair, the cushion in a couch, a car seat, a padded dashboard, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.1+,   for a mattress sewing machine.


CLS 112/470.28
TXT Having drag clamp:

    Device under subclass 2 including means to grip and maintain tension on the
    fabric being advanced through the sewing machine, and wherein the tension
    is applied to the means by the force of gravity acting on a weight.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153,    for a sewing machine edge guide.


CLS 112/470.29
TXT Having tube end tensioner:

    Device under subclass 2 wherein the sewing machine includes means for
    tensioning a loop of fabric during a sewing operation.


CLS 112/470.31
TXT For sewing plural workpieces under tension:

    Device under subclass 2 wherein the sewing machine is especially configured
    to sew together multiple workpieces and includes a device to apply tension
    to at least one of the workpieces being sewn.


CLS 112/470.32
TXT Differential feed of plural workpieces:

    Device under subclass 470.31 wherein the sewing machine includes at least
    two workpiece feed mechanisms and wherein said feed mechanisms deliver the
    workpieces to the stitch forming region of the sewing machine at different
    rates.


CLS 112/470.33
TXT Elongated article:

    Device under subclass 2 wherein the sewing machine is especially adapted to
    sew an object which has a length which is much greater than its width.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    470.26, for a sewing machine especially adapted to sew a necktie.


CLS 112/470.34
TXT For attaching a belt loop:

    Device under subclass 470.33 wherein the elongated article is a belt loop.

    (1)     Note. This subclass includes a device which makes a belt loop and a
    device which sews a belt loop to a  waistband.


CLS 112/470.35
TXT Spherical object:

    Device under subclass 2 wherein the sewing machine is especially adapted to
    sew a globe shaped object.


CLS 112/470.36
TXT With diverse downstream operation:

    Device under subclass 2 combined with means to perform a non-sewing
    operation downstream of the sewing machine.


CLS 112/475.01
TXT METHOD OF SEWING:

    A method under the class definition which includes stitch-forming or a
    stitching operation on a workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154+,   for a device under the class definition having a mechanism which
    cooperates to form stitches in the work material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, appropriate subclasses for a process of making an entire
    garment which may involve sewing.

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclasses 142+ for a process of making a
    boot or shoe which may involve sewing.

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 90 for a button having an
    aperture for thread, subclasses 395 through 397 for a zipper attached by
    stitching, and subclass 695 for a separable fastener having a specific
    structure for cooperating with stitching.

    28,     Textiles: Manufacturing, for a method of making a fabric which
    involves both sewing and a Class 28 process and, in particular, subclass
    164 for a process of making an ornamental or textured fabric by sewing
    combined with a Class 28 process.

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 408 through 410 for a method of making a
    zipper which involves a sewing step.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 664 for a check, label,
    or tag attached to an item by stitching.

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 138.5 and 418 for a packaging process
    which includes joining portions of the package material by sewing.

    57,     Textiles: Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclass 903 for sewing
    thread.

    66,     Textiles: Knitting, subclasses 180+ for a process of knitting a
    nether garment which includes ornamental stitching.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 13 through 56 for a process of cutting;
    subclasses 78+ for a cutting device having means to move, guide, or
    otherwise effect the motion of the product or work, especially subclasses
    98+ where the movement is effected by a fluid current; subclass 202 for a
    cutting device which has intermittent workfeed, especially subclasses 209+
    which includes work sensing means; subclass 255 for work feeding to plural
    tools; subclasses 276+ for workfeed element which contacts and moves with
    the work; subclass 360 for a cutting device controlled by detection means
    responsive to work, especially subclass 365 where the sensor is
    photoelectric; subclass 409 for a work carrier; subclasses 410+ for a work
    carrier which guides the material in a non-rectilinear path; subclass 910
    for a cutting or trimming device for embroidery; subclass 915 for a fur
    cutting device, and subclasses 936+ for a cutting device for cloth or
    leather.

    39,     Textiles: Weaving, appropriate subclasses for a method of weaving.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for seaming by laminating, especially subclass 93
    for a process of laminating and sewing.

    200,    Electricity: Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 611.3+ for an
    electric circuit maker or breaker which is responsive to a running length,
    web or strand.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 105.3 for a method of seam welding
    (e.g., electronic sewing).

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for a non-stitching
    method of making, repairing, or treating articles of apparel and analogous
    articles.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 20+ for a winding
    device for use with sewing thread upon or in connections with a sewing
    machine, subclasses 37+ for a thread break detector; and subclasses 57+ for
    a web break detector.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 559+ and 571+ for a photoelectric sensor
    for a web, strand, strip, or sheet.

    270,    Sheet-Material Associating, subclasses 37+ for a method or
    apparatus for associating a plurality of sheets or webs of flexible
    material by stitching or stapling in accordance with a recognizable indicia
    thereon, and subclasses 53+ for a method or apparatus for associating a
    plurality of sheets or webs of flexible material by stitching or stapling
    in accordance with a recognizable indicia thereon combined with folding.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, appropriate subclasses for a device
    for feeding or delivering a sheet to or away from a mechanism where the
    particulars of the mechanism is not specifically set forth

    289,    Knots and Knot Tying, subclass 1.5 for a method of tying a knot in
    a strand.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 79 and 92 for a flexible bag having a
    closure which includes a securing element designed to extend through
    aligned openings in the bag material (e.g., stitching).

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles,  subclasses 102 through
    104 for sewn stock material which includes stitching and either a discrete
    mechanical fastener, a coating, or an adhesive bond.

    450,    Foundation Garments, subclass 92 for a method of making or
    assembling a breast or chest protector (e.g., brassiere).

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, appropriate subclasses for a method of making a bag or
    a method of attaching a bag adjunct (e.g., a handle) to a bag, each of
    which may include the step of stitching, especially subclasses 405+ which
    includes the step of folding.


CLS 112/475.02
TXT Material sensing:

    Method under subclass 475.01 including the step of sensing the position of
    the workpiece relative to the sewing needle

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130,    for an apparatus which severs part of the work upon completion of a
    sewing operation.

    470.03, for a programmed sewing apparatus in which the feed pitch of the
    work advancing means is adjusted in response to detection of an edge of the
    work.


CLS 112/475.03
TXT Workpiece edge guiding:

    Method under subclass 475.02 including the step of guiding one of the edges
    of the workpiece according to the data sensed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    470.07, for a device in which a work carrier is moved to sew along the
    workpiece perimeter.


CLS 112/475.04
TXT Workpiece manipulation other than straight line feeding:

    Method under subclass 475.01 including the step of manipulating, handling,
    or guiding the workpiece, other than by mere straightline feeding of the
    workpiece.

    (1)     Note. The manipulation may occur before, during, or after the
    sewing operation.


CLS 112/475.05
TXT Workpiece manipulation according to calculated data or operator produced
    recording:

    Method under subclass 475.04 including the step of moving the workpiece
    along a path determined by (a) data which has been calculated immediately
    prior to sewing, or (b) data which has been produced by a person during a
    controlled data collecting procedure.

    (1)     Note. An example of item "a" is the step of calculating the number
    of stitches and their length required to sew a given length of material,
    and an example of item "b" includes the step of recording in electronic
    memory the stitching pattern (e.g., number of stitches, stitch lengths,
    stitch type, and path taken) produced by the operator for use later on
    another article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    470.06, for a device which moves the workpiece along a path determined by
    data which is introduced prior to sewing.


CLS 112/475.06
TXT Folding workpiece:

    Method under subclass 475.04 further including the step of doubling the
    workpiece over on itself.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141,    for a device adapted to form a hem.

    147,    for a device adapted to fold the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    270,    Sheet-Material Associating, subclass 32 for a method or apparatus
    for associating two flexible webs by the correlation of two indicia thereon
    through a folding step or device; subclass 37 for the aforementioned
    combined with sewing or stapling.


CLS 112/475.07
TXT Delivering or removing workpiece to or from a sewing machine:

    Method under subclass 475.04 including the step of moving the workpiece to
    the sewing machine or moving the workpiece away from the sewing machine

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    470.36, for a device which stacks workpieces after stitching.


CLS 112/475.08
TXT On specified product:

    Method under subclass 475.01 wherein the stitching operation is performed
    on an object substantially in its ultimate use form as distinguished from
    stock material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    475.01+ and 475.14, for a stitching process performed on stock material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, appropriate subclasses for a method of making a bag or
    a method of attaching a bag adjunct (e.g.,  a handle) to a bag, each of
    which may include the step of stitching, especially subclasses 405+ which
    includes the step of folding.


CLS 112/475.09
TXT Garment:

    Method under subclass 475.08 wherein the sewing operation is performed on a
    portion of an article of clothing (e.g.; pocket, cuff, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, appropriate subclasses for a process of making an entire
    garment which may involve sewing.

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclasses 142+ for a process of making an
    entire shoe or boot which may involve sewing.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for a non-stitching
    method of making, repairing, or treating an article of apparel or analogous
    article.

    450,    Foundation Garments, subclass 92 for a method of making or
    assembling a breast or chest protector (e.g., brassiere).


CLS 112/475.11
TXT Headwear:

    Method under subclass 475.09 wherein the stitching operation is performed
    on a head covering.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for a non-stitching
    method of making, repairing, or treating an article of apparel or analogous
    article.


CLS 112/475.12
TXT Stocking (e.g.; sock, hose, pantyhose, etc.):

    Method under subclass 475.09 wherein the sewing operation is performed on a
    nether garment which is a close-fitting covering for the foot and at least
    a part of the leg.


CLS 112/475.13
TXT Trousers:

    Method under subclass 475.09 wherein the sewing operation is performed on
    an exterior bifurcated outer garment worn about the hips and legs.


CLS 112/475.14
TXT Attaching fastener:

    Method under subclass 475.01 wherein the sewing operation is used to attach
    a fastener to a workpiece.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 90 for a button having an
    aperture for thread, subclasses 395 through 397 for a zipper attached by
    stitching, and subclass 695 for a separable fastener having a specific
    structure for cooperating with stitching.


CLS 112/475.15
TXT Button:

    Method under subclass 475.14 wherein the stitching operation is used to
    attach a fastener which is generally disk-shaped and is intended to be
    fitted through a hole or loop.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc. subclass 90 for a button having an
    aperture for thread, subclasses 395 through 397 for a zipper attached by
    stitching and subclass 695 for a separable fastener having a specific
    structure for cooperating with stitching.


CLS 112/475.16
TXT Zipper:

    Method under subclass 475.14 wherein the stitching operation is used to
    attach a fastener of the type having parallel rows of teeth on adjacent
    edges of an opening that interlock by a sliding tab.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 408 through 410 for a method of making a
    zipper which involves a sewing step.


CLS 112/475.17
TXT Stitch forming:

    Method under subclass 475.01 including the step of moving a sewing thread
    with respect to the workpiece along a specified pathway to produce a
    specific type of stitch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154+,   for a device under the class definition having mechanisms which
    cooperate to form stitches in the work material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for seaming by laminating, especially subclass 93
    for processes of laminating and sewing.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 10.53 for a method of  seam welding
    (e.g.; electronic sewing).


CLS 112/475.18
TXT Embroidery:

    Method under subclass 475.17 wherein stitches are formed along a path
    having a geometric configuration which is perceived as a decorative design.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78+,    for a stitch-forming mechanism specialized to perform embroidering.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    66,     Textiles: Knitting, subclasses 180+ for processes of knitting a
    nether garment which includes ornamental stitching.


CLS 112/475.19
TXT Electronically stored pattern:

    Method under subclass 475.18 which includes the step of accessing an
    electronic storage device which includes stitch forming information.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    453+,   for a stitch-forming mechanism in which data is electronically
    processed to control the lateral position of the sewing needle and/or the
    position of the feeddog thereby forming a stitch pattern on a base fabric.

    470.06+,for a stitch-forming mechanism in which data is electronically
    processed to control the motion of a work carrier thereby forming a stitch
    pattern on a base fabric.


CLS 112/475.21
TXT Edging:

    Method under subclass 475.18 wherein the decorative design extends along
    the perimeter of the workpiece.


CLS 112/475.22
TXT Relief:

    Method under subclass 475.18 wherein the stitching operating produces a
    puffed region in the workpiece or a cockled region in the workpiece.


CLS 112/475.23
TXT Pile type:

    Method under subclass 475.18 including the step of attaching a fabric tuft
    to a substrate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles: Manufacturing, for a method of making a fabric which
    involves both sewing and a Class 28 process and, in particular, subclass
    164 for a process of making an ornamental or textured fabric by sewing
    combined with a Class 28 process.


CLS 112/475.24
TXT Blind stitch forming:

    Method under subclass 475.17 wherein the stitching operation includes
    guiding the thread through one surface of a workpiece to a depth which is
    less than the thickness of the workpiece resulting in a stitch which is
    visible from only one side of the workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176,    for an apparatus which forms a blind stitch.


CLS 112/475.25
TXT Buttonhole finishing or forming:

    Method under subclass 475.17 including either (a) the step of guiding a
    thread along a path which encircles an aperture in the workpiece, (b) the
    steps of (1) guiding the thread along a path which encircles a location of
    the intended buttonhole, then (2) making a buttonhole aperture in the
    workpiece within the region defined by encircling threaded region, or (c)
    the step of simultaneously forming an aperture in the workpiece while
    guiding the thread along a path which encircles the aperture.


CLS 112/475.26
TXT Overedge stitch forming:

    Method under subclass 475.17 wherein the stitching operation includes
    guiding a thread around the edge of the workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162,    for an apparatus which forms an overseam stitch.

    177,    for an apparatus to form overedge-type blind stitch.


CLS 114/
TTL SHIPS

CLS 114/
TXT
    This class includes marine vehicles and accessories, as merchant vessels,
    warships, submarines, torpedoboats, etc., their spars, sails, and fittings
    specific thereto and not otherwise classifiable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 713+, and see the notes thereto
    for depth sounding devices and related art.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclass 1 for a horizontally
    pivoted ladder wherein a step remains level, subclasses 83+ for a wall
    attached platform and ladder, and subclasses 93+ for a wall attached ladder.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 3.1+ for control or stabilizing means for
    missiles and subclasses 75+ for apparatus and devices for controlling
    aircraft generally of the manned typed. Subclasses 76+ is the generic
    subclass for the automatic steering of mobile craft in two and three
    dimensions.  See subclasses 175+ and the classes specified in the notes
    thereto for the classes which provide for electrically controlled or
    actuated apparatus for automatically controlling the motion and/or steering
    of mobile craft and for a statement as to the line between the classes.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, for rafts.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 150+ for high temperature (Tc > 30 K) superconducting systems or
    devices, particularly subclass 164 for projectile or launching device or
    system.


CLS 114/1
TXT Ships and similar structures for offensive and defensive purposes, elements
    or details specific thereto, and inventions relating to the construction
    and building of such vessels not otherwise classifiable.


CLS 114/2
TXT Vessels provided with bow or stern extensions below the waterline for
    ramming purposes -- or ships having battering-rams or augers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for rams used in ice-breaking.


CLS 114/3
TXT Vessels having reciprocating or thrusting rams designed to batter in or
    puncture the hull of a vessel; also vessels provided with augers or boring
    devices to effect the same ends.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclass 463 and see the notes thereto for other impact
    tools.


CLS 114/4
TXT Floating forts designed to be anchored in harbors usually of circular
    section and cylindrical or globular in form, and though such forts may have
    means of propulsion they differ from the general type of warships and form
    a distinctive class.

    (1)     Note.  These devices differ from turrets in that turrets are
    fortified structures mounted upon, rotating with, or being elevated upon
    other structures, while floating batteries form a single structure, being
    rotated or elevated as a whole.


CLS 114/5
TXT Warships having mounted thereon an armored short or flat tower, generally
    cylindrical or conical in shape within which guns are operated.  These
    structures usually rotate upon or are elevated or lowered on the vessel
    carrying them.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for revolving vessels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    89,     Ordnance, subclass 36.13


CLS 114/6
TXT Warships provided with revoluble turrets that may be elevated or depressed
    at will.


CLS 114/7
TXT Turrets that may be elevated or depressed on the vessel that supports them.


CLS 114/8
TXT Turrets that are revoluble upon the vessel supporting them.


CLS 114/9
TXT Miscellaneous armor-clad vessels in which turret features are not claimed
    and which involve novelty in protected hulls or decks, etc., either through
    belts or sheathing of armor-plate which may be placed to form
    deflecting-surfaces or by means of temporary shields and screens (other
    than the shields of gun mounts in Class 89, Ordnance, subclass 36).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, particularly subclass
    49.5 for nonvehicular screens or shields for persons; subclass 58.5 for gun
    ports and subclass 78 and indented subclasses for penetration resistive
    rigid wall structures not involving a combination with a gun or gun mount.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet, and especially subclasses 457+ for a composite product including a
    layer of metal, and subclasses 615+ for a metallic composite defined in
    terms of the composition of its components.


CLS 114/10
TXT Devices for protecting warships by means of armor arranged to form
    deflecting-surfaces to receive the impact of projectiles and cause their
    rebound.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 5 and indented subclasses.


CLS 114/11
TXT Inventions in protecting warships by armor, involving the structure,
    assembling, and securing of armor-plates or equivalent upon the hull,
    decks, or elsewhere to form sheaths or belts.


CLS 114/12
TXT Armor-plating composed of a plurality of superposed parts jointed or locked
    together to form an integral plate or in which the belting or plating is of
    a compound character formed of different materials, including buffers or
    equivalent, or structurally united or in which the plating is composed of a
    plurality of layers of plates.


CLS 114/13
TXT Armor belting and plating in which yielding or elastic means are provided
    either at the backing or supports or between the elements of the compound
    armor or plates.


CLS 114/14
TXT Devices in which protection is secured to the vessel or crew by means of a
    screen or shield secured to the vessel or which is portable.  It differs
    from Class 89, Ordnance, subclass 36, in that the latter shields are a part
    of the gun-mount, while the devices of this subclass are a part of the
    vessel or are independent of the gun and its mount.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174     and 175.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    89,     Ordnance, subclass 36.12 for shields of gun-mounts.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, particularly subclass
    49.5 for nonvehicular screens or shields for persons; subclass 58.5 for gun
    ports and subclass 78 and indented subclasses; for rigid penetration
    resistant walls or armor not involving a combination with a gun or gun
    mount.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a single or plural layer web or sheet stock material, and especially
    subclass 911 (a cross-reference art collection) for such product having a
    penetration resistant layer.


CLS 114/15
TXT Means for rendering a warship invisible or indistinguishable at a distance
    by particular combinations of paints or through resemblance to surroundings.


CLS 114/18
TXT Torpedo-boats that run on the surface or awash and that are not
    submergible.  All have means for placing, launching, or discharging
    torpedoes or are themselves the carrier of the explosive.

    (1)     Note.  Torpedoboats differ from torpedoes in that they are manned
    and controlled by a crew while torpedoes carry no crew, are not designed
    for such purpose and are much smaller.


CLS 114/19
TXT Torpedoboats carrying torpedoes at the end of a spar, the torpedo being
    exploded on contracting the hull of the vessel toward which it is directed,
    being launched from the spar toward the hull, or discharged at will.


CLS 114/20.1
TXT TORPEDOES:

    Subject matter under the class definition including fish or automobile
    torpedoes, the power or propulsion being self-contained and nearly always
    actuating screw-propellers, which propel the torpedo on the surface or at
    any desired depth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238,    for torpedo launching.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 406+, and indented subclasses
    for submarine mines; subclasses 347+ for pyrotechnic rockets and subclasses
    374+ for aerial missiles having a reaction motor propulsion means.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses, for
    electric motor systems which might be used to either steer or propel a
    torpedo; particularly subclasses 580+, and 648+ for automatic control of
    electric motors in response to direction, inclination or angular position.


CLS 114/20.2
TXT With power plants:

    Subject matter under subclass 20.1 wherein means are provided for driving
    the torpedo through the water.


CLS 114/20.3
TXT With net cutting:

    Subject matter under subclass 20.1 wherein means are provided for cutting a
    net.


CLS 114/21.1
TXT With external control:

    Subject matter under subclass 20.1 including fish or automobile torpedoes
    controlled from a shore or other station by electrical or radiant energy
    means, (e.g., radio, electric conductors) for steering.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is the generic subclass Class 114 for the
    electrical control of movable bodies which are classified in Class 114
    (e.g., ships and torpedoes) and provides for such inventions where the
    device claimed is not limited to being a device other than a torpedo.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144+,   for mechanism for controlling the direction or motion of a ship by
    means of rudders, speed-retarders etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 77, and the classes specified in the Notes
    thereto for electrically actuated or controlled apparatus and devices for
    automatically controlling the motion and/or steering of mobile devices, and
    for a statement as to the line between the classes.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    electric motor systems which might be used to either steer or propel a
    cable controlled torpedo.


CLS 114/21.2
TXT With remote control:

    Subject matter under subclass 21.1 wherein means are provided for
    controlling the device remotely.


CLS 114/21.3
TXT With homing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 20.1 wherein means are provided with some
    type of homing features.


CLS 114/22
TXT Fish-torpedoes formed of a plurality of separable sections or parts, one of
    which contains the explosive, the remaining sections being capable of a
    subsequent use.


CLS 114/23
TXT Torpedoes of this type wherein the invention relates to the steering
    mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for other than automatic or self- contained devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    electric motor systems which might be used to steer a torpedo.


CLS 114/24
TXT Steering mechanisms for fish-torpedoes in which a gyroscope disk or wheel
    controls the steadiness of the torpedo's course, direction, speed, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 5+ for gyroscopes of
    general application.


CLS 114/25
TXT Devices for keeping torpedoes at a predetermined depth below the surface
    while on its course or flight.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16      and 17, for such regulating devices as are applicable to submarines.

    (1)     Note.  For submarine mines having depth regulation means responsive
    to hydrostatic pressure, see Class 102, Ammunition and Explosives, subclass
    414.


CLS 114/26
TXT Vessels of the well-known type approximately flat-bottomed or square-ended;
    also oyster-floats.


CLS 114/27
TXT Scows having means for discharging a load by overturning, opening doors at
    bottom or sides, by tilting platforms, by conveyers, carriers, by
    sectional, hinged, or separable parts, or by flooding or washing away, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 137.1+ for means to load a
    scow or means to unload a scow other than by dumping into the water;
    subclasses 137.7+ for the combination of means to load a scow with means to
    dump the load into the water; and, subclass 140.06 for means to bodily lift
    a vessel out of the water onto land and then dumping the vessel.


CLS 114/28
TXT Scows formed of a plurality of sections, hulls, or parts.


CLS 114/29
TXT Dumping-scows in which the sections are hinged together and hold the load
    when united and dump it when separated, the sections turning on the hinges
    usually placed amid-ships.


CLS 114/30
TXT Dumping and sectional scows, the load being dumped by the separation of the
    sections.


CLS 114/31
TXT Scows carrying loads on platforms or decks rather than in holds and having
    means or structure to facilitate dumping or unloading.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 140+ as explained in
    subclass 27 of this class (114), and subclasses 467+ for a self-loading or
    unloading vehicle (i.e., a vehicle having a load receiving portion and a
    means to move a load thereto or therefrom).


CLS 114/32
TXT Scows in which a platform carrying the load is adapted to be tilted and
    dumped the load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 467+ as explained in
    subclass 31 of this class (114), and particularly subclasses 469+
    thereunder; also, subclasses 628+ and 639+ for an elevator having a
    tiltable carrier, and subclasses 697+ and 743 for a vertically swinging
    load support having a tiltable means for engaging the load.


CLS 114/33
TXT Scows having tilting platforms which are movable laterally before tilting,
    affording greater facility in tilting the platform to discharge the load
    overboard.


CLS 114/34
TXT Scows of this type in which an endless belt, carrier, conveyer, or
    equivalent conveys and discharges the load by its movement.


CLS 114/35
TXT Scows wherein the load is discharged by opening doors or gates at the sides
    of the scow, the platform usually being inclined and the load held in place
    by the closed gates.


CLS 114/36
TXT Dumping-scows discharging loads by the opening of doors or gates in the
    bottom of the scow.


CLS 114/37
TXT Dumping-scows having bottom doors and additional gates for admission of
    water to flood the load and facilitate dumping or discharge.


CLS 114/38
TXT Scows adapted to be reversed or turned over to dump the load.


CLS 114/39.1
TXT SAILBOAT:

    Combination under the class definition of a boat, sail, mast, rigging,
    spar, float, etc., especially adapted for use in a small craft or sailboat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123,    for use of floats in ballasting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 213 and 810 for sail attachments for
    velocipedes and body attached sails for skaters, respectively.


CLS 114/39.2
TXT Sailboard:

    Subject matter under subclass 39.1 comprising a vessel having a mast and
    boom with a sail attached thereto wherein the mast is connected to but
    unsupported by the vessel deck such that a vessel sailor must directly
    grasp and manipulate the boom in order to erect the mast and thereby
    navigate the vessel.


CLS 114/40
TXT Vessels or boats designed and operated to break and cut up ice-floes or to
    open channels for the passage of vessels.


CLS 114/41
TXT Ice-breakers adapted to break up the ice by ramming, the bow or stern
    structure being designed for that purpose, the cutting being produced by
    the blows and wedging caused by the speed and impact of the vessel.


CLS 114/42
TXT Ice-breakers having saws or cutters for disrupting the ice, usually
    actuated by means independent of the speed of the boat or not due to the
    momentum of the vessel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 24+
    for apparatus of general utility for mining or disintegrating ice in a
    naturally occurring location.


CLS 114/43
TXT Boats or vessels designed to be used on water or ice and sometimes land.
    The boat's structure is essential.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 11.1, and indented subclasses for skates
    and skis, and 845+, and indented subclasses for sleds.


CLS 114/44
TXT Miscellaneous means or devices for raising sunken or submerged vessels,
    floating drydocks, or devices specific to such use.


CLS 114/45
TXT Means for raising vessels by use of semi-submergible docks, nearly all of
    which are floating vessels and constructed to receive the vessel upon its
    bottom or upon a platform or equivalent way, the dock being raised by
    changing the line of flotation through buoyancy by ejecting or pumping
    water from the water-tanks or by changing ballast.

    (1)     Note.  Compare with this class, subclasses 258+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49      and 53, for structures that are to be entirely submerged.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 4 for stationary or land
    dry docks.


CLS 114/46
TXT Floating drydocks formed of a plurality of movable and independent sections
    that united form the dock or in which one or more sections may be used to
    dock other sections or vessels.


CLS 114/47
TXT Integral structures provided with gates or caissons adapted to be closed
    and inclose the vessel in a dock, from which the water may be expelled to
    expose the hull of the vessel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 6 for gates associated
    with stationary or land dry docks.


CLS 114/48
TXT Floating drydocks having a platform upon which the hull of the vessel is
    supported and which is elevated or depressed upon the dock by buoyant
    action secured by emptying water-tanks or by hoisting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 3 for elevators in
    stationary or land dry docks in which the elevator is usually raised by
    hoisting.


CLS 114/49
TXT Devices between which a vessel is raised by their buoyant action, the
    structures not being designed to be sunk (as in subclass 53, below).  The
    camels, caissons, or pontoons are partially submerged by opening
    watervalves and the vessels secured by straps, chains, etc., and by
    changing the buoyancy of the structures by expelling water from tanks or on
    rise of tide the vessel is raised.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for similar structures designed to be sunk and secured to sunken or
    submerged vessels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclasses 35+ for rafts.


CLS 114/50
TXT Devices for raising sunken vessels; also means for forcing air into a
    vessel and expelling the water after sealing up openings.


CLS 114/51
TXT Means for raising sunken vessels by hoisting or for hauling vessels off
    shoals or bars.  The sunken vessel is hoisted toward some floating vessel
    which supports the hoisting apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 264+ for a driven, cable-pulling device for hauling or hoisting
    a load.


CLS 114/52
TXT Vessels, tanks, or receptacles for containing air adapted when filled to
    raise a sunken vessel by their combined buoyant force.


CLS 114/53
TXT Structures adapted to receive water and be sunk, attached to sunken
    vessels, and have the water expelled, thus raising the vessel by buoyant
    force.


CLS 114/54
TXT Bags or receptacles for containing air adapted to be attached or secured to
    or in sunken vessels when empty and by inflation raise the same by buoyancy.


CLS 114/55
TXT Devices or means for removing the sand or mud about a submerged hull.


CLS 114/56
TXT Inventions in the shape, cross-section, or "lines" of a vessel in contact
    with the water or the exterior form in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 105-107 for air ships adapted to marine use.

    440,    Marine Propulsion, appropriate subclasses for specific features
    involved in marine propulsion.


CLS 114/57
TXT Inventions in the exterior form of vessels propelled by screw-propellers.


CLS 114/58
TXT Inventions in the form of vessels propelled by wheels.


CLS 114/59
TXT Vessels of spindle form having nearly circular cross-section amidships and
    tapering toward bow and stern.


CLS 114/60
TXT Inventions relating to the form of vessels designed for canal, ferry, or
    tow service.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    440,    Marine Propulsion, subclasses 33+ and indented subclasses.


CLS 114/61
TXT Types of ship form in which the ship's body is divided into a plurality of
    hulls or in which the hull is divided below the waterline.


CLS 114/62
TXT Forms of hull presenting a more or less concave surface to the water from
    bilge to bilge, bilges to keel, or longitudinally.


CLS 114/63
TXT Inventions in ship's forms in which flat bottoms are used with or without
    keels or in which the bottom is nearly flat or horizontal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     and indented subclasses for flat bottom scows.


CLS 114/65
TXT Inventions relating to the construction of vessels except warships or
    submarine types and not otherwise classifiable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     and indented subclasses for inventions in external form or
    water-resistance surface.

    343+,   for small boats.


CLS 114/66
TXT Boats having glass bottoms or windows for the purpose of viewing marine
    life and scenery.


CLS 114/67
TXT Devices providing means for diminishing the resistance between the water
    and the vessel when moving through the water and effective in increasing
    the speed.  The present types comprise friction-roller surfaces, conveyers,
    and air-distributing means or attachments to produce a better cutting edge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232     and 233, for devices for distributing oils or liquids between the
    ship's skin and the water.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    440,    Marine Propulsion, subclasses 38+ and indented subclasses for
    vessels having means to expel air or water about the surface of the
    submerged hull with sufficient effect and force to propel the vessel.


CLS 114/68
TXT Vessels provided with means for preventing a vessel from sinking, involving
    sufficient bulkheads or compartments to keep it afloat or providing
    impenetrable or puncture-proof skins or sides with or without linings or
    fillings of waterproof or leak stopping character.


CLS 114/69
TXT Vessels of insubmergible or nonsinkable type having linings or fillings in
    the sheathing that through yielding surfaces, waterproof, or leak stopping
    qualities prevent the admission of water.


CLS 114/70
TXT Vessels designed and constructed for the above service and including those
    carrying trains and cars.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for form of boats.


CLS 114/71
TXT Inventions relating to vessels having cabin structures or means for
    supporting them.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189,    for separate structures.


CLS 114/72
TXT Vessels designed for carrying, securing, and preserving freight or cargo.

    (1)     Note.  For vessels designed to accommodate watercraft or aircraft,
    see this class, subclasses 258+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26      and 70.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    410,    Freight Accommodation on Freight Carrier, appropriate subclass, the
    freight carrier possibly being a ship; see indented subclass(es) 52+ for
    accommodation of a load bearer (e.g., a container or pallet) thereon board.


CLS 114/73
TXT Vessels constructed to carry cargo in bulk, as ore, grain, coat, etc.,
    whether of the hopper type or otherwise.


CLS 114/74
TXT Bulk cargo freighter vessels under subclass 73, constructed to carry liquid
    or gaseous fluids.  Waterborne tanks which are tight and not obviously
    unseaworthy are included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256,    for marine storage tanks not adapted for towing or other
    transportation movement.  Examples of structure considered to be excluded
    from subclass 74 under this note are:

    (1)     exterior form not tanker or boat-like;

    (2)     obviously unseaworthy, as entirely open bottom;

    (3)     free interchange between contents between contents of tank and
    ambient buoying liquid.


CLS 114/75
TXT Inventions relating to means for keeping the cargo from moving about during
    the movements of the vessel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    410,    Freight Accommodation on Freight Carrier, appropriate subclass for
    accommodation of lading on a freight carrier, which could be a ship; see
    indented subclasses 52+, particularly for inventions in means in engagement
    between the freight carrier and a load bearer (e.g., container) to inhibit
    shifting during transit, particularly indented subclasses 70+ for
    securingly retaining the load bearer on the freight carrier under such
    condition.


CLS 114/76
TXT Devices for sustaining and covering cargoes, preventing access of water or
    moisture, etc.


CLS 114/77
TXT Composite vessels constructed of a plurality of independent parts
    structurally united or decked to form a single vessel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    352+,   for sectional boats.


CLS 114/78
TXT Vessels having bulkheads or compartments as elements of combinations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116+,   for bulkheads, per se, and doors.


CLS 114/79
TXT Various types of construction for iron vessels or in which iron or metal is
    an essential element of the hull structure.


CLS 114/80
TXT Ships in which corrugated iron is used.


CLS 114/81
TXT Ships in which iron tubes are used in construction.


CLS 114/82
TXT Vessels in which wood is the principal material used in construction.


CLS 114/83
TXT Means for bracing, staying, trussing, etc., the timbers, frames, sheathing,
    and decks of vessels.


CLS 114/84
TXT Various means and methods of constructing the sides of vessels, involving
    the use of planks or sheaths or placing additional sheaths or linings
    thereon or therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     and indented subclasses for metal or armor belts or sheaths.


CLS 114/85
TXT Methods and means for constructing vessels' decks or relating thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    process and apparatus for making similar walkway and deck-like structure.


CLS 114/86
TXT Methods and means for filling or closing the seams between planking, etc.,
    and making them watertight.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224,    for tools, implements, and machines for putting in the calking
    material and paying or puttying seams.


CLS 114/87
TXT Braces or knees used in shipbuilding.


CLS 114/88
TXT Specific means or devices for uniting timbers, plates, frames, seats, and
    thwarts, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for joints of
    general utility.


CLS 114/89
TXT Inventions in ships' spars, as masts, yards, booms, gaffs, etc., their
    attachments, connections, and manner of mounting, raising, and securing
    them.


CLS 114/90
TXT Inventions in masts, their material, form, construction, and position, and
    means for securing them.


CLS 114/91
TXT Devices for pivoting masts, adapting them to be turned down, up, around at
    will, or automatically.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for swinging masts, and 143 for swinging masts with rocking keels.


CLS 114/92
TXT Inventions in the above-mentioned devices or their equivalents,
    trestle-trees being defined as fore-and-aft pieces secured on each side of
    a mast or resting on the hounds to support the rigging, cross-trees, etc.
    Cross-trees are athwartships timbers supported by bibs and trestle-trees to
    sustain top frames or extend topgallant shrouds.


CLS 114/93
TXT Devices for protecting a mast or the deck through which it passes,
    rendering the joint impervious to water, and devices or means for securing
    the heel or foot of the mast to the ship's timbers, keel, or keelson, etc.,
    and fastening it in place.


CLS 114/94
TXT Caps and trucks or structure of the upper end or head of the mast and the
    various types of metal bands or irons, etc., that are secured to masts not
    otherwise classifiable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98,     for "irons".


CLS 114/95
TXT Inventions in the horizontally-disposed spars extending athwartships to
    which the sails of square-rigged vessels are secured, as courses, topsails,
    topgallant, and royal sails.


CLS 114/96
TXT Devices for hanging, supporting, or securing the yards of vessels, trusses
    usually being of iron, to which the lower yard is pivoted or secured, and
    parrels being hoops, rings, or chains encircling the mast and secured to
    the yards.


CLS 114/97
TXT All ship-spars except masts and yards (separately classified) and their
    connections to masts or yards.


CLS 114/98
TXT Gaffs, booms, etc., which are pivoted or the means or devices for pivoting
    them to the masts or other supports.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19.


CLS 114/99
TXT Devices for supporting booms, usually a support having a crotch in its
    upper end in which the boom rests.


CLS 114/100
TXT Bands or irons of various types which are attached or secured to yards,
    booms, gaffs, etc., and which are not classifiable in subclasses 94, 96,
    98, 101, 112, and 218.


CLS 114/101
TXT Devices to secure the free running of ropes, cables, etc., adapted to be
    secured to spars or ship-timbers or structurally a part of spars or
    attached to tops, cross-trees, decks, pinrails, etc.


CLS 114/102
TXT Miscellaneous inventions relating to sails, standing and running rigging,
    setting, reefing, and furling sails, and their elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 238+
    for roll type flexible panels of general utility.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 199+ for portable implements or apparatus for tensioning
    flexible material from which the implement or apparatus is detached after
    the material is tensioned.


CLS 114/103
TXT Sails, their patterns, material, construction, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.


CLS 114/104
TXT Inventions for taking in or shortening sail.


CLS 114/105
TXT Means and methods of reefing and furling those sails which are set normally
    in a fore-and-aft line, as jibs, stay-sails, spankers, and sails of the
    sloop or schooner rig types.


CLS 114/106
TXT Devices for shortening fore-and-aft sails by rolling them upon rollers,
    said rollers being the booms, gaffs, etc., or rollers attached thereto or
    to stays, etc.


CLS 114/107
TXT Devices for shortening the sails of other than fore-and-aft types on
    rollers, the rollers being the yards or attached thereto or to the masts.


CLS 114/108
TXT Mechanical devices, usually metallic, by means of which sails are secured
    to their support, these devices usually being secured to the sail, and
    which are not classifiable in subclasses 112, 113, 114, and 115.


CLS 114/109
TXT Means for tightening up or shortening shrouds or other standing rigging and
    permanently placed, the turning of screw producing greater tension between
    the ends of shrouds, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223,    for portable rigging-screws.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 199+ for portable implements or apparatus for tensioning
    flexible material from which the implements or apparatus are detached after
    the material is tensioned.


CLS 114/111
TXT Means for making or setting sails, hoisting means, or relating thereto.


CLS 114/112
TXT Devices by which the hoops or sail-fasteners are made to travel up and down
    on masts and longitudinally on yards or spars when the sails are being set
    or furled, etc., the sail-fastening device having an element movable in a
    guide, slot, or iron attached to or structurally a part of the mast or
    spar.  This subclass includes all travelers attached to spars or which are
    not secured to the rail or deck.


CLS 114/113
TXT The title is self-explanatory, the connections usually being a part of the
    hoop rather than a sail-fastener, the latter forming a part of or secured
    to the sail or its bolt-rope.


CLS 114/114
TXT Eyes, loops, grommets, etc., or their metal equivalents worked in or
    secured to the sides or leaches of sails at the bolt- ropes, the eye or
    loop adapted to receive the hook of a tackle or equivalent or to
    sail-fastening devices secured to jibs and stay-sails or fore-and-aft sails
    and having a plurality of loops, one for the stay, another for the
    bolt-rope of sails, and which are usually in the same plane and adapted to
    secure the free running of the sail on its stay or support.


CLS 114/115
TXT So-called "spectacle" or other irons or devices secured to the lower
    corners of sails to which the sheets are attached. The spectacle-iron or
    iron clew is usually formed with three eyes, to which the leach-rope, the
    foot-rope of the sail, and the sheet or sheet-block are attached.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclass 210 for eye forming thimbles on
    the end of a rope or cable.


CLS 114/116
TXT Inventions in bulkheads usually adapted to form watertight compartments of
    vessels.


CLS 114/117
TXT Bulkheads provided with doors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclass 124.

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, appropriate subclasses for closures
    of the type provided for and see the search notes in section IV of Class 49
    for the loci of closures in other classes.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclasses.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclasses 58+.

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 271 for a wood bending steamer.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, for doors or
    flexible material and doors made of plural strips, slats or panels
    interconnected for relative motion.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, for rotary expansible chamber
    devices, per se.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 310+.


CLS 114/118
TXT Doors of bulkheads adapted for self-closure or in which the closing is
    automatic, as on the entry of water to a certain height, the doors being
    closed by swinging or rotating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 10+ for a stream spanning
    closure responsive to the amount or velocity of water in the stream and
    subclasses 21+ for a closure released for movement or directly actuated by
    an ambient fluid, e.g., rain or snow.


CLS 114/119
TXT Automatic closing doors of the bulkheads, said doors being sliding.


CLS 114/120
TXT Bulkhead-doors which close by sliding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 404+ for a closure
    mounted for sliding movement.


CLS 114/121
TXT Devices designed to steady and trim vessels, prevent careening, rolling,
    pitching, etc.


CLS 114/122
TXT Means to prevent the rolling, pitching, etc., due to wave motion.


CLS 114/123
TXT Means providing buoyant floats, caissons, etc., secured to the vessel and
    floating alongside, preventing careening, capsizing, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for combinations with boats, spars, sails, etc.


CLS 114/124
TXT Devices in which weights are adapted to move about or to be moved to
    distribute the weight and change the position of the center of gravity to
    steady, trim, or ballast a vessel when sailing or in a seaway.


CLS 114/125
TXT Devices in which ballasting is secured by watertanks adapted to be filled
    or emptied, thereby distributing weight, which steadies and trims the
    vessel in sailing, etc.


CLS 114/126
TXT Ballasting devices in which lee or weather boards or fins, plated, blades,
    etc., are adapted to project from the vessel's sides or keel laterally,
    obliquely, or horizontally to form a resistance-surface to prevent
    careening or capsizing and to enable a vessel to point or sail closer to
    the wind and prevent making leeway.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135     and 142, for center-boards, lateral, which partake of the nature of
    fins and leeboards, though used as centerboards or keels; and 152 for
    diving-fins.


CLS 114/127
TXT Vessels having boards, plates, planks, etc., placed longitudinally
    amidships and projecting in line with the keel or approximate thereto and
    adapted to be raised or lowered to increase the resistance-surface and
    prevent capsizing or sudden careening, thereby steadying and trimming the
    vessel, usually preventing making to leeward, and enabling a vessel to
    point or sail closer to the wind. Centerboards are usually short in length
    and move in a recess or casing formed in the bottom of the vessel and
    raised, lowered, or adjusted at will.


CLS 114/128
TXT Centerboards adapted to be turned more or less obliquely or athwartships
    and capable or adapted to be used for steering.  The devices of this type
    are centerboards in that they are adapted to be lowered as centerboards and
    serve the purpose of such or are too long to be considered as mere rudders.

    (1)     Note.  Subclass 149, this class, is limited to rudders placed upon
    or in line with the keel and not adapted to be raised or lowered as
    centerboards, or the invention relates to the means for steering rather
    than to the principles of centerboards.


CLS 114/129
TXT Devices in which more than one centerboard is used and in line with the
    keel longitudinally.


CLS 114/130
TXT Devices in which the centerboard is adapted to be lowered vertically and
    then swung down to greater depth at will or tilted or turned transversely
    athwartships.


CLS 114/131
TXT Centerboards of vertical drop and swing type and made of a plurality of
    movable parts.


CLS 114/132
TXT Centerboards pivoted at or near one end, adapted to swing down to greater
    or less depth, and adjustable at will.


CLS 114/133
TXT Pivoted centerboards composed of a plurality of separate parts usually
    movable or pivotally connected.


CLS 114/134
TXT Folding sectional boards in which the parts fold together fan-like and
    having a common pivot on which the sections turn.


CLS 114/135
TXT Centerboards displaced laterally from the keel and not in line therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126.


CLS 114/136
TXT Centerboards adapted to be swung obliguely across the line of the keel, but
    not primarily for steering.


CLS 114/137
TXT Centerboards that are adapted to tilt horizontally or obliquely up or down
    against the keel, being usually hinged at or in line therewith.


CLS 114/138
TXT Centerboards that are adapted to be raised or lowered vertically, both ends
    being adjustable at will either separately or simultaneously, and in most
    cases the centerboard is moved as a whole and not merely one end.


CLS 114/139
TXT Centerboards adapted to be moved vertically and composed of a plurality of
    movable parts.


CLS 114/140
TXT Keels and their structure and means and methods of securing them, whether
    fixed or movable.

    (1)     Note.  Keels differ from centerboards in being longer, being
    usually the length of the boat, or being, when short, immovably fixed to
    the hull.


CLS 114/141
TXT Keel structures which are adapted to be moved vertically as a whole and
    which extend from bow to stern and not merely centerboards.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130,    131, 138, and 139, for centerboards.


CLS 114/142
TXT Keels laterally displaced from the true keel--i.e., located upon the sides
    or bilge of the vessel's bottom.


CLS 114/143
TXT Keel structures that are adapted to rock or swing upon pivots laterally or
    longitudinally and which are keels rather than centerboards.


CLS 114/144
TXT Devices for changing the direction or speed of a vessel's motion by means
    of rudders, brakes, speed-retarders, and the like.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21      and 23+, for torpedoes with steering control means.

    162,    for tillers.

    209,    for drag anchors for speed-retarding and steering.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses under
    Mechanical Movements.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclasses for
    expansible chamber motors for operating steering mechanism.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 6.2+ for a motor vehicle which is
    steered by creating a difference between the driving effort developed by
    one or more traction elements located on one side of the vehicle and the
    driving effort developed by one or more traction elements located on the
    other side thereof; and subclasses 79+ for a motor vehicle having means for
    guiding it.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 75+ for apparatus and devices for
    controlling aircraft.  Subclasses 76+ is the generic subclass for the
    automatic steering of mobile craft in two and three dimensions.  See
    subclass 175 and the classes specified in the notes thereto for the classes
    which provide for electrically controlled or actuated apparatus for
    controlling the motion and/or steering of mobile devices and for a
    statement as to the line between the classes.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 263+ and 771+ for occupant steered
    vehicles.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    electric motor systems which might be used to steer a vessel particularly
    subclasses 580+ and 648+ for automatic control of electric motors in
    response to direction, inclination or angular position.

    440,    Marine Propulsion, subclasses 12, 13+, 21+, 40+, 53+, 90+, and 95+
    for various types of steering-gear involved in and combined with propelling
    devices.


CLS 114/145
TXT Brakes or devices for retarding a ship's motion through the water and also
    adapted for steering when used separately, usually rudders or projecting
    plates attached to the vessel's sides.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209,    for checking headway by drags.


CLS 114/146
TXT Inventions in steering apparatus having a plurality of devices for
    operating the rudder or steering means, one auxiliary to the other for
    simultaneous use, or as an aid to that in general use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163,    for multiple rudders, and 164 for auxiliary rudders.


CLS 114/147
TXT Devices in which paddle-wheels or screw-propellers, etc., are used to
    effect a change of direction, such devices being used for steering and not
    primarily for propulsion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    440,    Marine Propulsion, subclasses 53+ and 90+ for combined steering and
    propelling screws or wheels.


CLS 114/148
TXT Wheels or propellers placed in channels or waterways formed in the ship's
    side or hull to effect changes in direction by propulsion, the wheels or
    propellers located in the channels setting in motion a column of water or
    jet which be reaction changes direction of course.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151,    for steering devices in which a mere jet is used without the use of
    wheels, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    440,    Marine Propulsion, subclasses 40+ for combinations of propulsion
    and steering wheels in channels, subclasses 53+ and 90+ for screws or
    wheels in channels or waterways.


CLS 114/149
TXT Rudders or equivalent which are located upon or below the keel and
    partaking of the nature of centerboards and adapted to be turned across the
    keel, but not adjustable vertically.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128     and 129.


CLS 114/150
TXT Steering mechanism in which fluid-pressure is used to control the rudder,
    tiller, or steering wheel, etc., or to react upon the water through which
    the vessel moves.  It includes all pneumatic, steam, and hydraulic means
    specific to ships and their structure and not so claimed as to be of
    general application in steam steering.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146,    for devices in which either hand or fluid pressure steering powers
    are used independently or simultaneously or for means for coupling one to
    the other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclasses for
    expansible chamber motors for operating steering mechanism.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, for rotary expansible chamber
    motors for operating steering mechanism.


CLS 114/151
TXT Devices in which a jet of fluid, usually water, is thrown out approximately
    athwartships or obliquely to the keel at bow or stern, turning a vessel by
    the reaction due to jet propulsion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 221+ for reaction motors which obtain a
    thrust by the ejection of water and having means to eject water in a
    plurality of directions to obtain a resultant variation in thrust
    direction, and subclasses 228+ for reaction motors which eject fluids other
    than water and are provided with thrust direction modifying means.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 127.1+,
    265.23 and 265.33+ for a reaction motor discharge nozzle whose direction of
    stream discharge may be varied for steering a vehicle with which it may be
    associated.

    440,    Marine Propulsion, subclasses 40+ for combined propulsion and
    steering jets.


CLS 114/152
TXT Structures located at ships' ends designed to effect diving, or similar
    devices at the sides of vessels, any of which may be used for steering, but
    which are not rudders in the ordinary means, their action and position
    being similar to those of the fins of fishes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126,    for ballasting-fins.


CLS 114/153
TXT Means for steering operated by the foot or feet.


CLS 114/154
TXT Combinations of the ordinary steering wheel or equivalent and its shaft
    with gears for operating the rudder, but not involving a wheel and drum.


CLS 114/155
TXT Wheel-shaft gearing in which screws or worms are used.  This subclass also
    includes multiple screw devices in which a plurality of screws or worms is
    used, provided one of them is upon the wheel-shaft and said shaft turns
    another through intermediate gear, all screws being of the same type.


CLS 114/156
TXT Screw-shaft gearing in which other gears are placed between the steering
    wheel shaft and the screws or worms.  In the miscellaneous subclass above
    (155) the screw or worm is located upon the wheel-shaft.


CLS 114/157
TXT Wheel-shaft gearing involving right and left screws or worms operating the
    rudder, one or both of the screws being upon the wheel-shaft.


CLS 114/158
TXT Steering mechanisms of the above mentioned type in which other gearing is
    placed between the wheel-shaft and the screws or worms, which are geared to
    control the rudder.


CLS 114/159
TXT Wheel-shaft gearing operating a rack of segmental shape or equivalent
    located upon the rudderhead and turning therewith.


CLS 114/160
TXT Steering mechanism comprising a wheel and a drum, upon which the steering
    ropes or chains are wound.


CLS 114/161
TXT Wheel and drum steering means in which gears or mechanical elements are
    placed between the wheel or axle and the drum.


CLS 114/162
TXT Miscellaneous forms of rudders, not otherwise classifiable; also includes
    "tillers".


CLS 114/163
TXT Steering mechanisms in which a plurality of rudders is used.


CLS 114/164
TXT Rudders of permanent nature brought into use upon loss of the usual rudder.
     They are movable into position, but are not portable, as are jury rudders.


CLS 114/165
TXT Means for pivoting, securing, or supporting the rudder or its post in the
    bearings in combination with stern or stem posts, keel, or keelson, and
    devices for shipping or unshipping the rudder from its hanging or support.


CLS 114/166
TXT Rudders of tubular shape through which the propeller forces a jet or
    through which water reacts to move the stern.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    440,    Marine Propulsion, subclasses 53+ and 76+.


CLS 114/167
TXT Rudders composed of a plurality of rudders, parts, extensions, or blades
    designed to increase resistance-surface.


CLS 114/168
TXT Portable and temporary devices designed to serve as a steering means when
    the usual rudders have been lost or rendered inoperative.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209,    for drag-anchors.


CLS 114/169
TXT The title is self-explanatory.


CLS 114/170
TXT Devices for relieving strain on the helmsman or rudder, adapted to yield
    gradually to the force of the waves, thereby preventing the breaking of the
    rudder or its connections.


CLS 114/171
TXT Brakes in which tension is relieved through fluid resistance, the fluid
    being compressed or retarded in its flow.


CLS 114/172
TXT Devices for securing the steering mechanism or rudder in fixed position,
    and controllable at will.


CLS 114/173
TXT Devices including openings through ships' sides or decks not otherwise
    classifiable, and stoppers, shutters, and shields for closing the same.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, appropriate subclasses for closures
    of the type provided for and see the search notes in section IV of Class 49
    for the loci of closures in other classes.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, for closures of
    flexible material and closures made of plural strips, slats or panels
    interconnected for relative motion.


CLS 114/174
TXT Covers, doors, etc., for closing ports, differing from the covers of the
    light and air ports principally in the use to which said port is adapted
    and being generally larger and of rectangular construction, while the light
    and air ports are usually circular.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclass 124.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclass 58 and
    indented subclasses.

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 271 for a wood bending steamer.

    404,    Road Structure, Process and Apparatus subclasses 25+ for pavement
    with a vault cover-closure.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 310+.


CLS 114/175
TXT Port-stoppers specially adapted for ports through which the gun is pointed,
    the stoppers fitting the muzzle of the gun or forming a shield or protector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    89,     Ordnance, subclass 5 for stoppers for submarine ordnance, and
    subclass 36.14 for protectors that close the port, but are structurally a
    part of the gun-mount.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclass 58.5 for
    other gun ports not for ships and not involving a combination with the gun
    or gun mount.


CLS 114/176
TXT Port-stoppers in which the cover or stopper is hinged or pivoted in or to
    the port.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175,    for hinged gunport stoppers and shields, and 178 for hinged covers
    for light and air ports.


CLS 114/177
TXT Ports, usually of circular shape, designed to secure light and air, and
    smaller than cargo or gun ports.


CLS 114/178
TXT Light and air ports provided with hinged, pivoted, or swinging covers for
    closing the same, usually forming air and water tight joints when closed.


CLS 114/179
TXT Devices involving openings or passages in a vessel's bow or stern or sides
    to permit cables or hawsers to run through.


CLS 114/180
TXT Hawse-pipes having means of closure.


CLS 114/181
TXT Hawse-holes having friction rollers or pulleys to facilitate the running
    out or heaving in of the cable.


CLS 114/182
TXT Devices involving passages or holes from the decks through the ship's side
    to permit water accumulating on the decks to run out.


CLS 114/183
TXT Devices for expelling bilgewater, ash, or refuse from a ship's bilge or
    hold, including ejectors or other devices operated by the movement of the
    vessel in the water, or specific to ship use or structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, or Animal Powered, subclasses 29 and 30
    for oscillating weight motors which may be operated by a rolling vessel.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, appropriate subclasses for a fluid
    current conveyor which expels material from a ship's bilge by water, steam
    injection, etc., where no ship structure is recited.

    417,    Pumps, subclass 328 for pumps operated by weights which are caused
    to oscillate by the rolling of a vessel, and subclass 334 for pumps
    operated by fluid current motors of the type which may be attached to or
    towed by a moving vessel.


CLS 114/184
TXT Devices for entraining water or ashes, etc., by the motion of the ship
    through the water, water being injected to entrain the former or by suction
    produced by shape of discharge orifice or its position in the bottom of the
    vessel.


CLS 114/185
TXT Ejectors which take in water forward or acting by suction due to the shape
    of the discharge orifice or its position, either type being operative only
    when the ship is moving through the water or when a current is flowing and
    the vessel is stationary.


CLS 114/186
TXT Ejectors including hoppers or other means for dumping and expelling ashes
    through water or steam injection, etc.


CLS 114/187
TXT Steamboat stacks or chimneys specially adapted to use on vessels, mostly
    swinging or telescopic in structure and having no application elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 184.


CLS 114/188
TXT Furniture and furnishings of ships not classifiable elsewhere because of
    special fitness to use on ships.


CLS 114/189
TXT Devices or arrangements of cabins and state-rooms to secure light,
    ventilation, comfort, and economy of space and usually separate structures
    rather than permanent structures in shipbuilding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for permanent structures in shipbuilding.


CLS 114/190
TXT Devices for holding or supporting life preservers on vessels and specific
    thereto.


CLS 114/191
TXT Furniture that is specific to use on ships, automatic in operation,
    maintaining a level surface during rolling and tossing of the vessel.


CLS 114/192
TXT Berths providing for single or double swing, etc., during the rolling and
    pitching of the vessel, maintaining a level surface, and devices to steady
    berths during the rise and fall of the vessel.


CLS 114/193
TXT Berths suspended from a universal joint or single pivot, providing for
    berth equilibrium during the motions of the vessel.


CLS 114/194
TXT Chairs automatically maintaining a level seat or rest during motions of the
    vessel in the water.


CLS 114/195
TXT Tables having automatic leveling tops or equivalent devices securing the
    same end.


CLS 114/197
TXT Plugs having valves therein adapted to fit in the bottom of a boat and
    permit the emergence of water.


CLS 114/198
TXT Devices permitting the entrance of seawater from outside to the hold,
    magazine, etc., or for submerging the ship and usually placed in the bottom
    or between double bottoms and structurally united therewith.


CLS 114/199
TXT Devices of the nature of compressors or controllers which have means to
    check or stop the cable from running out and to hold it securely at any
    point.  Cable is used generically and includes hawsers,(towlines, ropes,
    etc.  These devices are controllable at will).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, appropriate subclasses, and 254, Pushing and Pulling
    Implements, subclass 150, and indented subclasses for analogous devices, or
    rope-clamps combined with hoisting apparatus.


CLS 114/200
TXT Cable-stoppers structurally adapted for use on chain cables and not upon
    rope or wire.


CLS 114/201
TXT Inventions in deck hatches involving structure of hatches or deck openings
    and covers thereto and devices for fastening or locking said covers down.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, appropriate subclasses for closures
    of the type provided for.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, for hatches in
    the form of flexible and portable panels, including hatches of flexible
    material and of plural strips, slats and panels which are interconnected
    for relative movement.  These patents may include so much of the mounting
    means as is necessary to support the hatch and may include the operating
    means for such hatch.

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclasses 336+ for means for closing an opening for an elevator shaft
    through a building's floor.


CLS 114/202
TXT Sliding covers and gratings involving more than sliding doors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 404+ for sliding doors of
    the type provided for.


CLS 114/203
TXT Hatches combined with means for battening, securing or locking them in
    place.

    (1)     Note.  For hatch-fastening clamps per se, search must be made in
    Class 292, Closure Fasteners, subclass 256.5.


CLS 114/204
TXT Devices having means to permit the reciprocation of a slide or ring to
    which the sheet of fore-and-aft sails is secured, such devices being
    fastened to the deck or rail.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    for travelers permitting vertical motion on masts and longitudinal
    motion on yards, etc.


CLS 114/205
TXT Travelers having one or more tension or surge relievers as an element of
    construction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213.


CLS 114/210
TXT Devices for instantaneously releasing anchors, shank-painters, ring or cat
    stoppers, anchor-supporters, shoes, and fluke-holders, and devices for
    catting and fishing anchors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    378+,   for devices for releasing a life craft from its supporting
    connections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    54,     Harness, subclass 69.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 110.

    278,    Land Vehicles:  Animal Draft Appliances, subclass 21, and indented
    subclasses.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 82.24+ and
    particularly subclass 82.27.


CLS 114/211
TXT Ventilating devices specific to ships and involving the structure of the
    ship.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    454,    Ventilation, for ventilation in general.


CLS 114/212
TXT Ventilating devices in which cowls or hoods are provided with valves,
    dampers, or baffle-plates to prevent the ingress of water.


CLS 114/213
TXT Devices specific to ships having yielding parts to prevent tension or
    strains from rupturing some element of the combination and applied to
    cables, cable-stoppers, sheets, secured ends or "standing" parts, ropes,
    etc.  The yielding means is usually rubber, spring, or fluid, which is
    compressed or stretched, as the case may be.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 277 for fluid or resilient shock-absorbing or tension-maintaining
    means attached to, supported by, or supporting guiding structure for a load
    hauling or hoisting cable.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclass 69, and indented subclasses for tension
    relievers not specific to ships.


CLS 114/214
TXT Tension or surge relievers in which the yielding means is hydraulic or
    pneumatic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171.


CLS 114/215
TXT Tension-relievers to take up the strain on the cable and prevent parting of
    the cable. The yielding means generally forms an element of the cable
    stopper or compressor. This subclass includes tension-relievers for
    chain-stoppers as well as cable-stoppers.


CLS 114/216
TXT Elastic couplings specific to use on ships and in rigging.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, subclass 69, and indented subclasses.


CLS 114/217
TXT Tension-relievers of the coupling type having a safety-release by means of
    which the coupled part is released when the tension reaches a certain limit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210,    and see the notes to this subclass for analogous or related
    safety-release means.


CLS 114/218
TXT Devices for belaying and securing ropes, cables, hawsers, cleats being
    stationary and formed with projecting horns, with or without safety
    releasing means; also includes rotary piles or spiles, rails for
    belaying-pins, and their attachments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 115.


CLS 114/219
TXT Devices to prevent injury to ships' hulls, their bows, and sides from
    collision, grounding, or waves, the wavefenders acting as a screen or
    protector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 212+ for fenders
    carried by marine structures to protect the structure from damage by a
    vessel.


CLS 114/220
TXT Fenders provided or formed with a freely rotating friction-roller.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 213 for roller-type
    fenders carried by marine structure to protect the same.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the notes thereunder.


CLS 114/221
TXT Devices of miscellaneous character adaptable and specific to use on board
    ships and boats, usually separate and independent of the structure of the
    ship.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 632+ for one shot explosion actuated
    expansible chamber type motors.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 54.5+ for means for cutting a cable or rope in a
    well below ground.

    294,    Handling: Hand Hoist-line Implements, subclass 19.1 for pole
    mounted handling implements which do not have exclusive disclosure for use
    on board a ship

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 185+ for submersible
    apparatus with which men may perform an underwater operation.


CLS 114/222
TXT Devices of various types especially adapted to cleaning, painting, or
    scraping a ship's hull or preventing the growth and deposit of foreign
    matter thereon, as barnacles, or means for preventing barnacle growth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, for cleaning apparatus
    of general application operating to clean through the agency of a draft or
    current of air, steam, or equivalent gaseous fluid, a brush, a beater, a
    scraper, shot, or a squeegee.

    30,     Cutlery, especially subclass 169, and indented subclasses for
    scrapers of general utility.


CLS 114/223
TXT Miscellaneous devices specific to use in or about ships' rigging, but not
    in permanent use, including rope stoppers, grips, tighteners, and other
    rope-handling devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 199+ for portable implements or apparatus for tensioning
    flexible material (e.g., cable, wire) from which the implements or
    apparatus are detached after the material is tensioned.


CLS 114/224
TXT Devices for calking or making the seams watertight and painting, pitching,
    or puttying the same.

    (1)     Note.  Where such results are secured by the manner or means of
    uniting sheaths, strakes, plates, or planking, see this class, subclass 86,
    the devices of this subclass being implements or machines entirely separate
    therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses as the residual class for making articles by
    adhesive bonding.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 89 for a caulking implement including material supply and means
    for simultaneously shaping plural dimensions, and subclass 458 for a
    similar implement without a material supply.


CLS 114/227
TXT Devices for stopping leaks of vessels applied from the inside or from the
    exterior of the vessel, but not of the nature of linings and fillings
    between bottoms, planks, or plates.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for linings and fillings between bottoms, planks, or plates.


CLS 114/228
TXT Stoppers applied to the inside of the hull.


CLS 114/229
TXT Means applied externally to prevent leaking in which the stopper is of the
    nature of an apron, mat, mattress, curtain, etc., and applied over the leak.


CLS 114/230
TXT Devices for securing a vessel to a buoy-float, dock, or slip, the securing
    or releasing means being usually automatic in the latter case.


CLS 114/231
TXT Moorings in which a part of the securing means is located upon the vessel
    and usually operated automatically as the boat comes in.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    14,     Bridges, the subclasses indented under "Gangways".


CLS 114/232
TXT Miscellaneous devices for spreading oil upon the surface of the waves or
    hulls of the vessels, primarily to diminish the roughness and force of the
    waves in storms; includes devices that distribute oil to the contact
    surface of the hulls of vessels to diminish the water friction and increase
    the speed and prevent attachment and growth of barnacles, etc., thus
    cleaning the hull.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclass 366.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 22 for oil distributors
    used in harbors.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclass 34 for buoys for
    distributing oil upon the surface of waves.


CLS 114/233
TXT Devices fixed to or involving the ship or its structure, usually
    distributing oil through pipes to orifices in or about the hull.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     for air and oil distributers of similar structure used for
    diminishing friction.


CLS 114/234
TXT Oil receptacles thrown overboard from vessel to gradually spread oil on the
    surface of the sea secured to the vessel by a towline or hawser and dragged
    or floated on the surface of the sea.


CLS 114/238
TXT Devices for launching, releasing, handling, or expelling torpedoes of the
    fish or automobile type.  In the torpedotubes included herein the expelling
    power of air, gas, liquid, or gunpowder is only sufficient to make the
    torpedo take the water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for torpedo structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    89,     Ordnance, subclasses 1.51+ for apparatus and processes for dropping
    torpedoes and other bombs from aircraft, and subclass 5 for torpedo-guns
    for torpedo-projectiles that are projected rather than launched.

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, subclasses 56+ for pneumatic
    projectile impelling devices.


CLS 114/239
TXT Devices pivoted, suspended, or secured to the ship's side or deck for
    expelling, handling, or launching torpedoes, including tubes mounted upon
    boats' decks but not torpedo-tubes of the inboard type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for torpedoes carried at the end of the spar.


CLS 114/240
TXT Devices applied externally to a ship or supported thereon to prevent
    torpedoes from touching the vessel's hull.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 160, Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or
    Panel, for flexible and portable panels of more general utility.


CLS 114/241
TXT Net-like torpedo guards.


CLS 114/242
TXT Device under the class definition including means enabling a vessel either
    to pull an object through the water or to bear against or otherwise apply a
    thrusting force to an object to shove the object through the water.


CLS 114/243
TXT Device under subclass 242 wherein means are provided for use about a towing
    line which means acts to reduce eddying and resultant drag as the line
    moves through the water.


CLS 114/244
TXT Device under subclass 242 wherein the object being towed is an underwater
    object.


CLS 114/245
TXT Device under subclass 244 wherein means are provided either to maintain the
    towed object at a desired depth or to controllably vary the depth at which
    the object is towed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for depth regulators associated with torpedoes.


CLS 114/246
TXT Device under subclass 242 including means specialized for towed or pushed
    vessels or objects for changing the direction of movement of the towed or
    pushed vessel or object or a train of such vessels.

    (1)     Note.  Those vessels which recite no more than conventional
    steering gear, e.g., a rudder controlled from the vessel upon which it is
    mounted, have not been placed herein but rather have been placed on their
    specific coupling or towing structure.

    (2)     Note.  Push boat-barge combinations having variable length lashings
    connecting the vessels together will be found herein if the lashings permit
    the boat to be canted with respect to the barge to facilitate or effect
    steering of the same.


CLS 114/247
TXT Device under subclass 242 wherein a connecting means is provided which has
    means to disconnect a towed object or to otherwise reduce the pulling force
    acting through the connecting means when the force exceeds a predetermined
    limit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 272+ for a cable pulling drum provided with a control mechanism
    having a cable deflecting or path-defining component; the component shifts
    when variations in the tension on the cable occur.


CLS 114/248
TXT Device under subclass 242 wherein the hull of one of the vessels is
    configured to receive and confine a hull portion of a coacting vessel.


CLS 114/249
TXT Device under subclass 242 having a) a plurality of substantially rigid
    members which are configured to cooperate one with another to effect a
    force transmitting link between vessels joined together thereby, b) a
    pliable member holding one vessel in contact with and fast to another, or
    c) hooks or clamps for towing cables having releasing trips.


CLS 114/250
TXT Device under subclass 249 wherein one of the coacting members is carried by
    a solid arm which holds the connected vessels in a spaced relationship.


CLS 114/251
TXT Device under subclass 249 wherein a pliable member holds one vessel in
    contact with and fast to another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246,    for steering arrangements which employ a pair of flexible lashing
    to connect a push vessel to a barge, where one of the lashings connects the
    port side of the push vessel to the port side of the barge and the other
    lashing connects the starboard sides and where means are provided to change
    the relative lengths of the lines to thereby cant the push vessel with
    respect to the barge to facilitate steering of the connected assemblage.


CLS 114/252
TXT Device under subclass 249 wherein the coupling means is provided with means
    to effect or facilitate disconnect of the joined vessels.


CLS 114/253
TXT Device under subclass 242 wherein a flexible line is provided for
    connecting a towing vessel to a towed object which is spaced therefrom.


CLS 114/254
TXT Device under subclass 253 wherein means are provided for holding the
    flexible line when it is not in use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 398+ and 904 for a
    reeling device of general use or with nominal ship structure or combined
    with a nominally recited boat.  Class 114 takes the combination of reel
    structure with a boat where the boat is more than nominally recited. Class
    114 will also take a reel combined with a motor which is actuated by the
    boat's motion through the water or where line guide structure is recited
    which is adapted to be attached to the boat rather than the reel, e.g.,
    bridles which attach to the transom of the boat.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 264+ for a driven, cable-pulling drum for hauling or hoisting a
    load.


CLS 114/255
TXT Vessels under the class definition with provisions for procuring or
    processing aquatic life other than vegetation.


CLS 114/256
TXT Structures under the class definition which are containers of such
    construction that they remain at least partially above water when in use.


CLS 114/257
TXT Structures under the class definition which are containers of such
    construction that when in use they are completely under water, but are not
    at rest on the bottom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 210 for submerged storage
    vessels which rest on the sea floor.


CLS 114/258
TXT Floating structures under the class definition designed to receive, either
    within or upon the same, watercraft or aircraft, to transport or harbor
    them, and appliances peculiar thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 137.7+ for a ship with
    means to load or unload cargo from the water.


CLS 114/259
TXT Devices under subclass 258 designed to transport other water vessels.


CLS 114/260
TXT Devices under subclass 259 wherein the water vessel being transported is of
    general type for transporting bulk cargo across water.


CLS 114/261
TXT Devices under subclass 258 designed to transport or harbor airplanes,
    helicopters, or the like.


CLS 114/262
TXT Devices under subclass 261 wherein the carrier or harbor is in the form of
    a way station or loading platform which is adapted to accommodate aircraft
    which is designed to land or take off from the surface of a body of water.


CLS 114/263
TXT Structures under subclass 258 which are buoyant platforms which have
    provisions for berthing of boats thereto or thereon.


CLS 114/264
TXT Structure under the class definition which is wholly supported by a body of
    water and which when in use forms or takes the form of an approximately
    planar work surface.

    (1)     Note.  Exemplary of the art in this subclass and in subclass 265
    are offshore drilling platforms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 195.1+ for offshore
    drilling platforms which rest on the bottom, are solidly connected to the
    bottom, or are connected to the marine bed by a continuous riser pipe
    (i.e., a conduit which serves to convey material from beneath the surface
    of the water) which may comprise a rigid segment over a substantial portion
    of its length, and a relatively flexible segment.


CLS 114/265
TXT Structures under subclass 264 wherein the working surface of the platform
    is supported by a plurality of depending structural members.


CLS 114/266
TXT Structures under subclass 264 formed of a group of united pontoons.


CLS 114/267
TXT Devices under the class definition concerning the structure of a single
    float unit, i.e., laminations, filling, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266,    for float structure in combination with a float connection device.


CLS 114/268
TXT Vessels under this class with attachments for lifting or hauling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 137.1+ for a free floating
    marine structure with means to load that or another marine structure.


CLS 114/269
TXT Structure under the class definition with features drawn to the specific
    location of engine room equipment in or with respect to the engineering
    space of a vessel.


CLS 114/270
TXT Subject matter under the class definition not classifiable elsewhere.


CLS 114/271
TXT Device under the class definition wherein a hull attachment is provided or
    the hull form of the vessel is such that as the vessel moves through or
    across the surface of a body of water, a force is generated tending either
    to raise the vessel out of the water or to change the fore and aft drafts
    of the vessel relative to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16+,    for analogous devices on submarines.

    20+     for analogous devices on torpedoes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclasses 65+ for aquaplanes
    and analogous skimming devices adapted to be attached to a person or animal.


CLS 114/272
TXT Device under subclass 271 wherein the vessel is provided with a wing-like
    member mounted so as to coact with the atmosphere to generate a lifting
    force, when the vessel is in motion, which tends to raise the vessel out of
    the water.

    (1)     Note.  The vessels found herein are always more or less waterborne
    and the airfoil merely tends to reduce the amount of hull below the
    waterline, thus, seaplanes and like aeronautic devices will generally not
    be found herein.


CLS 114/273
TXT Device under subclass 272 including means for adjustably supporting the
    wing-like member such that the direction the foil faces or the angle of
    attack of the foil can be altered.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280+,   for means to reposition hydrofoils or flaps associated therewith.


CLS 114/274
TXT Device under subclass 271 wherein the hull is provided with a submerged
    wing-like lift generating member.


CLS 114/275
TXT Device under subclass 274 wherein means are provided to regulate the
    operation of a vessel in response to a signal generated by a means which
    measures or perceives some characteristic of the vessel or the environment
    within which it operates.


CLS 114/276
TXT Device under subclass 275 wherein the vessel is provided with a signal
    generating means which has a member which rides on or adjacent the surface
    of the water and which gauges the relative distance between the vessel's
    hull and the water's surface.


CLS 114/277
TXT Device under subclass 275 wherein the control signal generating means
    responds to variations in the force per unit area of the water with which
    the vessel coacts and through which it moves.


CLS 114/278
TXT Device under subclass 274 wherein the wing-like lift generating member or a
    support therefor is provided with a fluid passage which begins or
    terminates in an aperture formed in the member or its support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277,    for control means employing ported struts to sense variations in
    liquid pressure.


CLS 114/279
TXT Device under subclass 274 wherein means are provided to absorb or reduce
    impacts or vibration being transmitted to the vessel via the wing-like
    member or its support.


CLS 114/280
TXT Device under subclass 274 wherein means are provided for mounting the
    wing-like member or a portion thereof such that it may be moved.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273,    for repositionable airfoil.

    275+,   for means which control foil or foil adjunct position in response
    to a sensed condition.

    284+,   for means to reposition hull adjuncts other than hydrofoils to
    drive lift or alter trim.


CLS 114/281
TXT Device under subclass 280 wherein the direction in which the vessel moves
    can be altered by turning or otherwise repositioning the foil.


CLS 114/282
TXT Device under subclass 280 wherein means are provided for shifting the foil
    between an inactive storage position and an active fluid coacting position.


CLS 114/283
TXT Device under subclass 271 wherein a plurality of floats or surface skimming
    members are either connected together in a spaced, side-by-side fashion to
    form a vessel or they are connected to, but spaced from either side of a
    vessel's hull in such a manner that they coact with the water to at least
    partially support the weight of the vessel and thus allow the vessel's hull
    to raise up in the water when the vessel is under way.

    (1)     Note.  For placement in this subclass, the float must be a separate
    and distinct entity which is not formed as part of the vessel's hull but
    rather is attached thereto.


CLS 114/284
TXT Device under subclass 271 wherein a section of the hull or some attachment
    to the hull is mounted to be shifted relative to the hull such that it will
    coact with the water when the vessel is underway either to facilitate the
    vessel's passage through the water or to alter the vessel's fore-and-aft
    drafts relative to each other.


CLS 114/285
TXT Device under subclass 284 wherein the shiftable member is a generally
    planar element which either is formed as a portion of the vessel's hull or
    is an adjunct thereto.


CLS 114/286
TXT Device under subclass 285 wherein a gas or liquid powered motive means is
    provided to shift the generally planar element.


CLS 114/287
TXT Device under subclass 286 wherein the fluid motor comprises a pliant
    bag-like member.


CLS 114/288
TXT Device under subclass 271 wherein the hull of the vessel is either so
    contoured or accessories are so attached thereto that (a) a groove-like
    configuration is formed in the bottom of the vessel which runs generally
    parallel to the keel, or (b) a space is formed within which a gas or liquid
    is captured or confined, whereby a lifting force is generated as fluid
    either courses through the groove or is captured in the fluid confining
    space.


CLS 114/289
TXT Device under subclass 288 wherein means are provided for supplying a gas or
    liquid to said enclosed space or open channel.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of the types of devices to be found herein are
    pumps, air scoops or funnels, engine exhaust lines, etc.  This structure
    constitutes means in addition to the shape of the channel or fluid
    entrapping configuration.  Thus, those channels which merely have a shaped
    inlet which facilitates the supply of air thereto have been placed on
    channel structure and will not be found in this subclass.


CLS 114/290
TXT Device under subclass 288 wherein a multiplicity of fluid conducting
    grooves are formed in the bottom of the hull.


CLS 114/291
TXT Device under subclass 271 wherein the hull is made from a plurality of
    vertically spaced segments which are connected one to the other by a
    generally perpendicular stop or wall portion.


CLS 114/292
TXT Device under subclass 271 which comprises an elongate float of particular
    configuration or construction.


CLS 114/293
TXT Device under the class definition wherein a vessel is provided with a
    plurality of lines each of which has means to releasably engage the sea
    bed, which lines are disposed so as to hold the vessel substantially
    stationary with respect to a single spot on the sea bed.

    (1)     Note.  Vessels found herein usually have at least a bow and a stern
    anchoring line which hold the vessel over a single point on the ocean floor
    regardless of the effects of current, tide, wind or the like.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 155+ for structures
    employing discrete disparate earth anchors.


CLS 114/294
TXT Device under the class definition wherein means are provided, (a) for
    engaging the sea bed, which means is adapted to be carried by a flexible
    line secured to a vessel and which means acts through the line to hold the
    vessel fast to the sea bed, or (b) which when deployed, coact with the
    water to produce a drag on the vessel to which it is attached to impede the
    motion of the vessel through water.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 345+ for projecting piles for anchoring
    dredges.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 42.72 for
    fishing line shock absorbers, and subclass 44.96 for fishing line sinkers
    with ground engaging means.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 155+ for expanding
    or piercing earth anchors.


CLS 114/295
TXT Device under subclass 294 wherein the means engaging the sea bed has power
    driven means for thrusting the engaging means into the sea bed.

    (1)     Note.  Explosively driven anchors will be found herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 158+ for a driven
    earth anchor.


CLS 114/296
TXT Device under subclass 294 wherein the engaging means is so configured that
    a zone of reduced pressure is formed between the sea bed and the engaging
    means either (a) when an attempt is made to extract the engaging means from
    the sea bed, or (b) by additional means provided for the purpose of
    evacuating fluid from the zone, whereby an imbalance of forces is created
    tending to hold the engaging means in contact with the sea bed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 21+ for vacuum-type holding means.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 64.1+ for
    vacuum cup elements, per se, as well as other vacuum-operated load engagers.


CLS 114/297
TXT Device under subclass 294 wherein the engaging means is provided with means
    to facilitate the withdrawing of the engaging means from the sea bed.


CLS 114/298
TXT Device under subclass 297 wherein the engaging means includes a
    longitudinally extending shank carrying a blade-like member, and releasable
    means is provided which either holds the blade-like member in fixed
    position or restrains it to swing through a limited arc relative to the
    shank when in use, but which allows it to swing free when dislodgement of
    the engaging means is desired.


CLS 114/299
TXT Device under subclass 297 in which a flexible line is attached to the
    engaging means at a first location when in use, and wherein means are
    provided to enable the point of attachment to be shifted to a second
    location when dislodgement of the engaging means is desired.


CLS 114/300
TXT Device under subclass 294 wherein the engaging means is provided with a
    bowl-shaped member which contacts and digs into the sea bed.

    (1)     Note.  The bowl-shaped member may have projections protruding about
    the periphery thereof.


CLS 114/301
TXT Device under subclass 294 wherein the engaging means is provided with a
    blade-like member which is adapted to dig into the sea bed.


CLS 114/302
TXT Device under subclass 301 wherein the engaging means includes a
    longitudinally extending shank and a rod-like member which, when in use is
    arranged to be perpendicular thereto, which rod-like member is movable to a
    nonuse storage position.


CLS 114/303
TXT Device under subclass 301 wherein the engaging means is provided with
    either, (a) means which facilitates the putting together or the taking
    apart of the various elements of the engaging means, or (b) stop means for
    limiting the swing of the fluke when the latter is pivotally carried by a
    shank, wherein the stop means is selectively movable to any one of a
    plurality of different positions to alter the fluke's swing, or means are
    provided for substituting a new stop means for a worn or different size
    stop.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    298,    for a replaceable abutment adapted to be sheared off at a
    predetermined force to permit the fluke to swing free for dislodgement from
    an obstruction.


CLS 114/304
TXT Device under subclass 301 wherein the engaging means is provided with a
    longitudinally extending shank to which the blade-like member is swingable
    attached.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 162+ for pivoted
    fluke-type earth anchors.


CLS 114/305
TXT Device under subclass 304 wherein either, (1) the blade-like member is held
    in a collapsed position when the anchor is stowed and a means is provided
    for releasing or moving the blade-like member such that it may assume its
    operative position, or (2) releaseable means are provided on the engaging
    means to lock the blade-like member in an extended operative position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    295,    for anchors having means for driving the same into the sea bed, and
    which may include extensible flukes that are swung into an operative
    position subsequent to the anchor being driven into the seabed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 155+ for expanding
    earth anchors.


CLS 114/306
TXT Device under subclass 304 wherein either, (1) the end of the shank which
    connects with the fluke is branched and the fluke is straddled by and
    either side thereof connect with the arms of the branched shank, or (2) the
    shank is provided with a hole in which the fluke is swingably secured, and
    wherein the fluke is constrained to swing between the arms or through the
    aperture when in use.


CLS 114/307
TXT Device under subclass 304 comprising multiple blade-like members which are
    swingably attached to the shank, and wherein movement of one of the
    blade-like members with respect to the shank does not invariably cause
    movement of another blade-like member.


CLS 114/308
TXT Device under subclass 304 wherein the shank has an enlargement or
    protuberance on one end thereof which fits into a complementary recess
    formed in the fluke.


CLS 114/309
TXT Device under subclass 304 wherein a rod-like stabilizing member is either
    attached to and extends outwardly from the fluke or is secured to the shank
    immediately adjacent to the fluke.


CLS 114/310
TXT Device under subclass 304 including a member projecting outwardly from the
    engaging means, which member, upon contact with the sea bed, causes the
    fluke to pivot about its point of attachment with the shank and thereby
    assume the proper attitude for penetration into the sea bed.


CLS 114/311
TXT Device under subclass 294 wherein means are provided which when deployed
    coacts with the water to produce a drag on the vessel to which it is
    attached to impede the motion of the vessel through the water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168,    for portable drag-type devices employed as temporary steering means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 113 for aircraft retarding devices, and
    subclasses 142+ for parachutes.


CLS 114/312
TXT SUBMERSIBLE DEVICE:

    Device under the class definition including (a) an underwater habitat which
    is not permanently secured to the marine floor, (b) an independently
    propelled submergible vessel, (c) a device not provided for elsewhere which
    is either worn by a diver or upon which or within which a diver rides while
    in open communication with the water, which device assists in the
    propulsion or regulates the movement of the diver through the water, or (d)
    other submersible bodies not provided for elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244+,   for submergible towed objects.

    257,    for submersible storage tanks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 185+ for submergible
    devices with manipulating arms to perform an underwater work function; and
    subclasses 195.1+ for a marine structure physically secured to a seabed.


CLS 114/313
TXT With disparate vehicle feature:

    Device under subclass 312 wherein said submergible vessel is provided with
    additional structure peculiar to another type of vehicle whereby said
    vessel can perform functions in addition to those functions restricted to
    submarine vessels.


CLS 114/314
TXT Underwater habitat:

    Device under subclass 312 wherein an enclosure is provided which rests on
    or is temporarily secured to the marine floor which enclosure provides a
    living space for people working in a submerged environment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 195.1+ for structures
    including habitats rigidly secured to a seabed.


CLS 114/315
TXT Diver assistance device:

    Device under subclass 312 wherein means are provided to propel, to assist
    in the propulsion, or to regulate the movement of a diver through a body of
    water with which he is in direct contact.

    (1)     Note.  A diver wearing a wet suit is still considered to be in
    direct contact with the body of water if said wet suit contacts the body of
    water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244+,   for towed sleds.


CLS 114/316
TXT With weapon or weapon system:

    Device under subclass 312 having an offensive or defensive weapon or means
    for deploying an offensive or defensive weapon.


CLS 114/317
TXT Having ballast compensating means:

    Device under subclass 316 wherein a submergible vessel is provided with
    means which compensates for loss of ballast during weapon deployment to
    maintain the stability of the vessel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331+,   for ballasting systems used for depth control.


CLS 114/318
TXT Power assisted deployment:

    Device under subclass 316 wherein a means is provided to effect or
    facilitate the discharge of the weapon from the submergible vessel.


CLS 114/319
TXT Pneumatic or hydraulic dispatch:

    Device under subclass 318 wherein said means uses fluid pressure to
    discharge the weapon from the vessel.


CLS 114/320
TXT Having specific hatch structure:

    Device under subclass 316 wherein said weapon system possesses an aperture
    cover for a weapon deployment device which cover prevents communication
    between the weapon and the water until the weapon is ready for deployment.


CLS 114/321
TXT Having storage hold:

    Device under subclass 312 including a cargo receiving compartment.


CLS 114/322
TXT Detachably connected to a main vessel:

    Device under subclass 312 wherein a submergible device is held in contact
    with and releasably secured to a main submergible vessel in order that the
    two may proceed underwater together.

    (1)     Note.  A buoy, per se, is not considered a submergible device for
    this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    326+,   for submergible devices carrying buoys.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclasses 1+ for buoys, per se.


CLS 114/323
TXT Emergency escape means:

    Device under subclass 322 wherein said submergible device is used as a
    means of escape from said main submergible vessel if said main submergible
    vessel is unable to return to the surface of the water.


CLS 114/324
TXT Chamber completely enclosed in the hull:

    Device under subclass 323 wherein said submergible device is a chamber
    which is held completely out of communication with the water within the
    hull of a main submergible vessel which chamber is capable of carrying a
    member of the crew of said main submergible vessel to the surface of the
    water.


CLS 114/325
TXT Chamber nested in the hull:

    Device under subclass 323 wherein said submergible device is a chamber
    carried in a complementary indentation in the hull of a main submergible
    vessel with at least part of said submersible device always in
    communication with the water, which chamber is capable of carrying a member
    of the crew of said main submergible vessel to the surface of the water.


CLS 114/326
TXT Having buoy:

    Device under subclass 312 wherein a submergible vessel is provided with a
    floatable member which is tethered to the submergible vessel and which is
    capable of being released.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    441,    Buoys Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, for buoys, per se.


CLS 114/327
TXT And snorkel:

    Device under subclass 326 wherein the floatable member is provided with a
    means to supply air from above the surface of the water to a submergible
    vessel located below the water.


CLS 114/328
TXT With communication means:

    Device under subclass 326 wherein the floatable member is provided with
    equipment for exchanging information with those in a submergible vessel
    located below the water.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of equipment for exchanging information are
    telephones, telegraph keys, wireless antennas, etc..


CLS 114/329
TXT With indicator:

    Device under subclass 326 wherein the floatable member is provided with
    additional means to make the floatable member more readily noticeable.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of the additional means are lights, flags, flares,
    reflectors, etc..

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, for indicators, per se.


CLS 114/330
TXT Having attitude control:

    Device under subclass 312 wherein said submergible vessel is provided with
    means to control the inclination of said vessel in relation to its frame of
    reference or to otherwise vary the vertical distance between the vessel and
    the frame of reference.


CLS 114/331
TXT Depth control:

    Device under subclass 330 wherein a means is provided to control the
    vertical distance of a submersible device from the surface of the water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    245,    for submerged towed objects having depth control means.


CLS 114/332
TXT Diving plane:

    Device under subclass 331 wherein said means comprises a tiltable surface
    on the exterior of the vessel which reacts with the water passing
    thereacross to change the pitch of the vessel upward or downward depending
    on the position assumed by the surface.


CLS 114/333
TXT Water ballast:

    Device under subclass 331 wherein said means controls the intake or
    expulsion of water from a holding tank.


CLS 114/334
TXT Having air supply:

    Device under subclass 312 wherein means are provided to supply or circulate
    a breathable gaseous mixture to the interior of a submergible device.


CLS 114/335
TXT Having air locks:

    Device under subclass 312 wherein means are provided to isolate one zone
    from another zone which means comprises a chamber interposed between the
    zones which chamber has a first sealable opening communicating the chamber
    with the one zone and a second sealable opening communicating said chamber
    with the other zone.

    (1)     Note.  The air locks found here provide communication between a
    vessel and the surrounding sea, between different vessels, or between
    different compartments in the same vessel.


CLS 114/336
TXT Emergency equipment:

    Device under subclass 312 wherein a means is provided which is operable in
    unforeseen circumstances to avert the loss of a submergible device or its
    occupants.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    326+,   for buoys which can be released from the submergible vessel for
    various purposes in emergency situations.


CLS 114/337
TXT Having propulsion unit:

    Device under subclass 312 wherein means are provided for driving a
    submergible vessel through the water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    330+,   for propellers used as a means for attitude control of the vessel.


CLS 114/338
TXT Propeller:

    Device under subclass 337 wherein said means includes a revolving hub with
    radiating blades mounted externally of a vessel's hull which react with the
    surrounding water to propel the vessel through the water.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), for propellers, per se.


CLS 114/339
TXT Superstructure:

    Device under subclass 312 relating to the shape, composition, or
    construction of the major appurtenance of a vessel's exterior surface.


CLS 114/340
TXT With periscope:

    Device under subclass 339 wherein said structure includes a tubular optical
    instrument containing mirrors and lenses by which a view of the surface or
    the water, through which the submergible vessel is moving, is allowed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    402+ for periscopes, per se.


CLS 114/341
TXT Hulls with transverse reinforcement:

    Device under subclass 312 wherein a vessel's exterior surface is
    strengthened by members lying perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the
    vessel.


CLS 114/342
TXT Hull within a hull:

    Device under subclass 312 wherein the exterior surface of the vessel is
    formed as a plurality of spaced apart shells one within the other.


CLS 114/343
TXT BOATS, BOAT COMPONENT OR ATTACHMENT:

    Device under the class definition which is a small vessel with or without a
    deck, a particular component for a boat, or an attachment for a boat.

    (1)     Note.  In the maritime industry, a boat is a vessel less than 65
    feet long and a ship is 65 feet or longer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclass 406 for an article carrier
    for an aquatic vessel where the vessel is nominally recited.

    440,    Marine Propulsion, subclasses 106+ for oar locks.


CLS 114/344
TXT With wheeled buoyant landing or launching aid:

    Device under subclass 343 in which the boat is provided with wheel or
    wheeled means for carrying the boat to or from launching sites, the wheel
    or wheeled means being either attached to the boat or buoyant and separable
    from the boat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270,    for propelling means for vessels designed for use upon either land
    or water and see the search notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 414.1+ for boat carrying vehicles and see
    the search notes thereunder.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 1+ for apparatus for
    launching a vessel from or carrying a vessel over land.


CLS 114/345
TXT Inflatable:

    Boats under subclass 343 which are expanded from a collapsed position by a
    gaseous medium.


CLS 114/346
TXT Circular:

    Device under subclass 343 wherein the outer edge of the boat is
    substantially in the shape of a circle.


CLS 114/347
TXT Canoe or kayak:

    Device under subclass 343 comprising a relatively light, long and narrow
    boat usually moved by paddles, the boat normally having turned up ends, and
    in the case of a kayak is covered except for an opening at least
    substantially engaging the waist of a person seated therein.


CLS 114/348
TXT Lifeboat:

    A boat under subclass 343 adapted especially for saving the life of a
    person stranded in water.


CLS 114/349
TXT Enclosed:

    A boat under subclass 348 which has an air chamber or space to receive
    passengers which can be closed watertight.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclass 38 for rafts with
    shelters; and subclass 87 for water rescue apparatus which encloses the
    passenger.


CLS 114/350
TXT With self-leveling passenger compartment:

    A lifeboat under subclass 349 in which a passenger compartment is supported
    such that it will maintain or return to a level position independent of the
    hull orientation.


CLS 114/351
TXT Hunting:

    Boats under subclass 343 especially designed to conceal a hunter and for
    more or less quiet propulsion to aid a hunter in approaching game.


CLS 114/352
TXT Sectional:

    Boats under subclass 343 which can be folded or which are made of sections
    which are releasably fixed together to form the boat.


CLS 114/353
TXT With folding:

    Boats under subclass 353 wherein the different sections are rigid and are
    hinged together so that the sections may be folded onto or into each other.


CLS 114/354
TXT Collapsible:

    Boats under subclass 343 which collapse into themselves through such means
    as telescoping rods, accordion pleats,  etc..


CLS 114/355
TXT Hull construction:

    Method or device under subclass 343 for constructing or making the hull of
    a boat.


CLS 114/356
TXT Metal:

    Boat hulls under subclass 355 in which the hull is substantially formed of
    metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79+,    for iron ships.


CLS 114/357
TXT Plastic:

    Boat hulls under subclass 355 in which the hull is substantially formed of
    a plastic.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses for specific methods of forming plastics which could
    be used to shape a boat hull.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 61 for means to facilitate the flotation of a formed ship or boat.


CLS 114/358
TXT Wood:

    Boat hulls under subclass 355 in which the hull is substantially formed of
    wood.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     for ships with wood hulls.


CLS 114/359
TXT Former and framer:

    Device under subclass 355 comprising apparatus or implements for bending,
    shaping, stamping or temporarily holding in place frames, timbers, or sides
    of the hull.


CLS 114/360
TXT With means to prevent capsizing or sinking:

    Device under the subclass 343 in which the boat has an attached float, a
    built in compartment, additional built in buoyancy material, or a similar
    device to prevent the boat from capsizing or sinking.


CLS 114/361
TXT Protective cover or shield:

    Device under subclass 343 wherein the boat is provided with a covering or
    other protective structure to shield or protect a person, boat portion or
    thing thereon.


CLS 114/362
TXT Boarding aids:

    Apparatus under subclass 343 in which a boat part or a structure expedites
    the boarding or disembarking of the boat by a person.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 139.5 for lifting devices
    for transporting personnel from one marine vessel to another; and subclass
    140.1 for the combination of a land vehicle gangway with a ship when
    combined with means to manipulate the cargo.


CLS 114/363
TXT Seat and foot supports:

    Device under subclass 343 comprising means to support the body or foot of a
    user.


CLS 114/364
TXT Deck or gunwale attachments:

    Devices under subclass 343 comprising boat parts or structure mounted to
    either an exposed portion of a boat deck, or on, or at the top of a boat
    side.

    (1)     Note.  Oar locks are found in Class 440, Marine Propulsion,
    subclass 106.


CLS 114/365
TXT LIFE CRAFT HANDLING DEVICE, APPARATUS, OR IMPLEMENT:

    Means under the class definition for handling life craft aboard ships and
    also analogous apparatus located on docks and sea walls.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258,    for motherships with handling and launching means for small
    warships and the like.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    212,    Traversing Hoists, for load elevating and shifting means in general
    especially subclasses 294+, 307+ and 255+ for those having structures
    analogous or related to those provided for herein.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force, for
    implements for applying a push or pull directly to an object to be moved,
    particularly subclasses 264+ for cable hauling apparatus.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 1+ for launching in
    general.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, for material or article handling in
    general and see the class definition for a list of classes relating to
    vehicle loading and unloading.  Search especially subclasses 137.7+ for a
    ship with means to load or unload cargo from the water and subclass 139.5
    for lifting devices for transporting personnel from one marine vessel to
    another.


CLS 114/366
TXT Moving from storage position to launching position:

    Means under subclass 365 for moving life craft from storage position to
    launching position wherein the moving apparatus and the launching apparatus
    are distinct.

    (1)     Note.  All combinations of such conveying with storage and/or with
    launching are found here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    368,    for davit structures which will perform this function with no
    distinct conveying apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, appropriate subclasses
    for conveyors in general.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses for power driven
    conveyors.


CLS 114/367
TXT Means for automatic launch upon sinking of ship:

    Device under subclass 365 wherein means are provided for enabling an
    automatic launching of the lifecraft upon the sinking of the lifecraft
    carrying ship.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    381,    for chocks and lashings which leave the boat free at all times to
    float off upon the sinking of the ship.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclass 24 for buoys adapted on
    the sinking of a body or vessel to become unseated.


CLS 114/368
TXT Davit:

    Device under subclass 365 comprising booms or cranes projecting over the
    side of a ship to raise or lower life crafts.

    (1)     Note.  Subcombinations, not claiming the added lowering means but
    intended for use therewith, are here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    365,    for similar devices without added lowering means, i.e., which are
    so constructed as to place the life craft directly in the water.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 569+ and 680+ for similar
    article handling devices in general.


CLS 114/369
TXT Movably mounted:

    Device under subclass 368 comprising davits in which means cause or permit
    the davit to be movable so that some part of the davit is moved from a
    normal, inboard position to an outboard launching position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    212,    Traversing Hoists, particularly subclasses 294+, 307+, and 255+ for
    cranes or similar supports constituting or forming part of a transversing
    hoist.


CLS 114/370
TXT Compound movement:

    Device under subclass 369 comprising a davit or portion thereof which moves
    about plural axes.

    (1)     Note.  Multiple pivots are found here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    373,    for single or plural davits each of which has a single pivotal
    motion.


CLS 114/371
TXT Relative arcuate movement:

    Device under subclass 370 comprising davits having an arcuate sector on the
    lower end thereof about which it is rocked on a supporting bed.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are patents wherein the arcuate sector and its
    supporting bed are provided with mating teeth.


CLS 114/372
TXT Translating and tilting:

    Device under subclass 370 in which the davit moves linearly along a
    horizontal path and pivots about a horizontal axis so that some part
    thereof will overhang the water.

    (1)     Note.  Any sequence of bodily movement and tilting as well as
    simultaneous body movement and tilting are included here.


CLS 114/373
TXT Pivoting:

    Device under subclass 369 comprising a davit which turns about a single
    axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370,    for a davit having a compound pivotal motion about two or more axes.


CLS 114/374
TXT Vertical axis:

    Device under subclass 373 comprising a davit in which the axis of the pivot
    is vertical.


CLS 114/375
TXT Chute or track:

    Device under subclass 365 comprising apparatus in the form of chutes or
    tracks for launching life craft from ships.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    366,    for combinations of chutes or tracks with conveying of the boat to
    the chute or track.

    368,    for combination of chutes or tracks with davits.

    375,    for tracks which are used only as protectors or guides during
    launching.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, appropriate subclasses for particular types of tracks.

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, subclasses 2+ for
    particular types of chutes.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 2 for similar structures
    for launching and drydocking boats and ships on shore.


CLS 114/376
TXT Protector for lifecraft during launching:

    Device under subclass 365 comprising means to protect the life craft, ship,
    or other launching support against damage during launching.

    (1)     Note.  Devices for maintaining a spaced relation between the life
    craft and the ship during launching are found here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219+,   for analogous devices for maintaining a spaced relation between a
    dock and a ship, two ships, or a boat and a ship, both of which are water
    borne.


CLS 114/377
TXT Connector between boat and lowering tackle:

    Device under subclass 365 comprising means for connecting a life craft with
    lines, hooks, and similar hardware used in lowering the life craft.

    (1)     Note.  Documents herein disclose some additional structure which
    limits the invention to life craft handling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc, subclasses 598.4+ and 698.1+ for
    hooks and snap hooks, respectively, type projection members of separable
    fasteners and subclasses 455+ for clasps type projection members of
    separable fasteners.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 67.1+ for
    hoist line frames which surround a load and/or support it from below; and
    subclass 82.27 for hooks designed for instantaneous operation for detaching
    boats from davit lines.


CLS 114/378
TXT Releasing mechanism:

    Device under subclass 377 wherein the connectors have means for breaking
    the connection between the life craft and the lowering tackle.

    (1)     Note.  A portion of the connector is either attached to the boat or
    is disclosed as being attachable to the boat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210,    for devices for instantaneously releasing anchors, etc.

    217,    for tension relievers of the coupling type having safety release
    means.

    218,    for bitts, cleats, etc., with safety releasing means.

    379,    for connectors having automatically controlled releasing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 410 for pulley blocks including means for quickly detaching the
    block from the object to which it is attached.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 82.27+ for
    releasing boat hooks, per se, when the hook is attached to the lowering
    tackle.


CLS 114/379
TXT Automatic:

    Device under subclass 378 wherein the release mechanism automatically
    breaks the connection between the lowering tackle and the life craft upon
    the life craft contacting water.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 82.24+ for
    releasing hoist line hooks per se and claimed in combination with the load
    broadly.


CLS 114/380
TXT Simultaneously releasing bow and stern:

    Device under subclass 378 in which means are provided to break bow and
    stern connections both at the same time.


CLS 114/381
TXT CHOCK OR LASHING:

    Device under the class definition comprising either supports for boats
    wherein the support is shaped to fit the hull of the boat or some part
    thereof, means for securing the boat to its support against movement.

    (1)     Note.  Documents herein are limited to use for supporting and
    securing boats to ship decks, sea walls, docks or the like.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 499 for miscellaneous lashings.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 68.1+ for
    launching cradles, per se.

    410,    Freight Accommodation on Freight Carrier, subclasses 49+ for load
    binders used with loads on vehicles; and subclasses 96+ for analogous
    supports and lashings used on railway cars and for miscellaneous shipping
    supports.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, for buoys, adapted on the
    sinking of a body or vessel to become unseated.


CLS 116/
TTL SIGNALS AND INDICATORS

CLS 116/
TXT

    I.      This class is limited to mechanical, as distinguished from
    electrical, devices for giving signals of the nature of either alarms or
    indicators, which signals are generally due to some movement of some part
    or element from a normal or nonsignaling or signal-controlling position.
    The signal may be of any type which appeals to any one or more of the
    senses, but is generally a bell, horn, whistle, semaphore, light-shutter,
    explosive device, pointer, or flag.  Methods are classified in the
    appropriate subclasses with the signal devices unless specifically provided
    for by a method subclass.

    II.     The patents of this class are divided into several main groups:

    (1)     Those for devices having combined functions, as signaling, and also
    some additional function, as igniting a lamp, fastening a door or window,
    etc.

    (2)     Those adapted for some special purpose, as code signaling, ships'
    telegraphs, vehicle motion and direction, street traffic, etc.

    (3)     Those which are for alarms, such as bells, horns, whistles,
    rattles, etc.

    (4)     Those for indicators, as pointers, semaphores, drop-annunciators,
    etc.

    (5)     Those for novel horns, whistles, bells, flags, etc., per se.

    III.    Where the claims cover printed cards, or printed calendars,
    pictures, labels, tags or signs, either stationary or which may be made to
    appear at windows or apertures, the patents are placed in Class 40, Card,
    Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, with the exception of patents of the following
    functional subclasses of this class (116), viz., 21, 32, 35+, 63, and 72,
    when other than mere signs are present.  Generally signs normally hidden
    and adapted to be made to appear at a window in a casing are in Class 40,
    Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 28+, but an exception is made
    in this class (116), subclasses 42+.

    IV.     This class does not ordinarily include conventional signals and/or
    alarms applied to devices of other main classes where the structure of such
    devices is specifically claimed or is materially modified in order to
    cooperate with the conventional signal mechanism.

    V.      As between this class and any of the electrical classes, in the
    following cases the patents will be found classified in the appropriate
    electrical classes:

    (1)     When an electrical means for transmitting the signal, which is to
    be indicated, is claimed, whether in combination with mechanical signalling
    means or not.  The inclusion of a magnetic means (which acts in the nature
    of an adhesive or fastening) to hold a nonelectrical signal in position is
    not sufficient to exclude the device from Class 116.

    (2)     When the indication is given by an electrical signal, such as an
    electric light, bell or meter, which indicator is claimed.

    (3)     Electrical signals, per se, such as electric bells, horns, etc.

    VI.     The class in general includes the communication of information,
    except when otherwise specifically classified - as, for example, in classes
    434, Education and Demonstration; 40, Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting;
    178, Telegraphy; 181, Acoustics; 235, Registers; 246, Railway Switches and
    Signals; 250, Radiant Energy; 340, Communications:  Electrical; 342,
    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g., Radar,
    Radio Navigation);  343, Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas; 346,
    Recorders; 375, Pulse or Digital Communications; and 455,
    Telecommunications.

    VII.    The production of sound, per se, is excluded; for which see Classes
    42, Firearms; 446, Amusement Devices:  Toys; 84, Music; 102, Ammunition and
    Explosive Devices, appropriate subclasses for explosive or ignitable
    devices and processes which may be useful for signal purposes; 181,
    Acoustics;  369, Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, and 623,
    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof or Aids and
    Accessories Therefor, subclass 9 for larynxes.

    VIII. The classes referred to under "Search Class" below which takes the
    combination where a signal or alarm is claimed are regarded as superior to
    this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     32, 35+, 63, and 72, (see paragraph III above).

    42,     (see paragraph III above).



    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclass 314 for an indicator
    combined with closet structure.

    14,     Bridges, subclasses 49 for signals with features specific to
    bridges.

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 300+ for methods of an
    apparatus for signaling direction by utilizing forces such as terrestrial
    gravitation or magnetism.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, (see paragraphs III and VI for
    the line between Class 40 and Class 116).

    42,     Firearms, for producers of sound per se (see paragraph VII for the
    line between Class 42 and Class 116).

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying subclasses 16 and 17 for
    signals for signaling that a fish has been hooked.

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 13+ for a device that
    signals the position of a closure.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Building), subclass 105 for signaling
    means combined with structure of the class type.

    70,     Locks, conventional or unmodified lock, latch, bolt, or knob
    structure when merely used to operate a signal, is placed in Class 116;
    also whenever any modification of the lock, latch, bolt, or knob is made in
    order to cooperate with a signal it is placed in this class (116).  In
    Class 70, search subclasses 330+, for visual, contractual or audible
    signals for effecting the release of combination type locks and subclasses
    432+, for devices to indicate the condition of locking mechanism.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, for signals or indicators combined with
    measuring apparatus Class 73, also includes measuring devices wherein
    response is made to a condition over a range or a series of indications are
    given which follow or vary with the variation of the condition.  Class 116
    includes devices for giving a signal (other than electrical) of the
    presence or absence of a condition.  Class 116 also includes in subclasses
    114+, indicating means such as dial and pointer structures, wherein such
    means is independent of any particular measuring instrument.

    81,     Tools, subclass 479 for electric signal devices associated with
    wrenches or screwdrivers that indicate when a selected torque is reached on
    the work.

    83,     Cutting, subclass 522 for a signaling means and a cutting device.

    84,     Music, for devices for producing music and subclass 169 for signals
    associated with automatic musical instruments and subclasses 477+ for
    signals to be used with keyboards for teaching music.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 285 for beverage infuser
    with signaling means; and subclasses 342+ for cooking apparatus with
    signaling means.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclass 21 for
    transaction and display partitions and counters with alarm signal, or
    indicator, subclass 31 for combined fluent material releasing, generating
    and/or distributing means with alarm, signal, or indicator and subclasses
    38+ for signal, indictor, or alarm combined with miscellaneous structure.

    114,    Ships, subclass 246 for steering mechanism signaling means for
    locating the position of a ship in a tow train.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 712+ for coating apparatus combined
    with signal or indicator means.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 227+, 524 and 551+ for fluid handling
    means combined with signaling devices.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, appropriate
    subclasses for explosive or ignitable compositions which may be useful for
    signal purposes.

    178,    Telegraphy, for signaling means limited to use in telegraph systems
    or apparatus, (see paragraphs V and VI for the line between Class 178 and
    Class 116).

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 18 for signaling
    devices combined with a ladder, scaffold or fire escape.

    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, or Animal Powered, subclass 14 for
    composite motor with spring winding indicator, subclass 36 for weight motor
    winding indicator and subclass 44 for spring winding indicator.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 167 for
    electric switch operators which are provided with means to show either the
    location of the switch or the operated position (e.g., off or on) of the
    switch contacts, and appropriate subclasses for mere circuit controllers
    for electrical signals, and see paragraphs V and VI above.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, for a pill box or container with a
    label or indicia and nothing movable, adjustable, or selective with respect
    to the indicia.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 85+ for signaling
    means combined with a separator.

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclasses 276+ for a crane having a random
    condition sensor which regulates an indicator or alarm device and
    subclasses 282+ for other cranes equipped with an indicator.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 365+ for devices for indicating the
    nature of or quantity of the contents of receptacles.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 2+ for structure to facilitate
    dispensing or removal of particular dosage with a label or indicia and
    nothing movable, adjustable, or selective with respect to the indicator.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 14+ for indicators for presetting volume or
    rate of flow of dispensers of the cut-off type, subclasses 23+ for
    dispensers with recorder, register, indicator, signal or exhibitor and
    subclasses 154+ for dispensers with gauges and scales.

    232,    Deposit and Collection Receptacles, subclass 34 for sight signals,
    subclass 35 for door controlled sight signals, subclass 36 for door
    controlled sound signals and subclass 37 for door operated indicators.

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), subclasses 4+ for a
    typographical tape punch provided with means to indicate approach to and
    entry into the "justification zone"; and appropriate subclasses for a
    selective cutting machine with indicating means for various operating
    conditions.

    235,    Registers, for signaling means associated with calculating or
    registering equipment, (see paragraph VI for the line between Class 116 and
    Class 235).

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 101.01 for
    signaling means combined with comminuting apparatus.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 305+ for a fishing reel
    with an unwinding indicator; subclasses 534+ and 563+ for a winding machine
    and unwinding machine control, respectively, which may include an
    indicator; and subclass 912 for a cross reference-collection of indicators
    and alarms.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, for railway signals.  (See paragraph
    VI for the line between Class 116 and 246).

    250,    Radiant Energy, appropriate subclasses for electrical and
    nonelectrical detection of invisible electromagnetic or nuclear radiation,
    X-ray apparatus, the irradiation of material by electromagnetic or nuclear
    radiation, supports for irradiated material, detectors and sources,
    electro-magnetic energy generation and sources, radiation controlling
    elements, light wave communication systems, and photocell circuits and
    apparatus.  See also sections "V" "VI" of the Class 116, Class Definitions.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, for electric signals.  See paragraphs
    V and VI above for the line between Class 116 and Class 340.

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), appropriate subclasses for radar signaling
    systems (see paragraphs sections V and VI for the line between Class 116
    and Class 342).

    346,    Recorders, subclasses 3+ for steam engine indicators and 17+ for
    signals, indicators or alarms associated with recorders.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    515+ for signal reflectors and subclasses 436+ for scale or indicia reading
    devices

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 23+ for illuminated scale or dial which
    may include a broad recitation of indicia on the scale or dial.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 272+ for
    clock-work-operated striking-trains, including different toned bells and
    subclasses 210+ for devices to signal when a timepiece needs winding or for
    showing the degree to which it is wound.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, for signalling associated
    with sound recording or reproducing devices.  (See paragraph VII for the
    line between Class 116 and Class 369).

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, for a signal or indicator combined
    with a thermal measurement.  Class 374 includes a measurement made by a
    series of indications to as to produce a quantitative indication.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, for light transmitting fibers, rods, or pipes.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 610.1+ for billing devices with
    indicating scales, subclass 249 for ribbon mechanism signals and subclasses
    703+ for miscellaneous indicators associated with typewriting machines.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclass 194 for signaling
    means combined with a coating implement.

    402,    Binder Device Releasably Engaging Aperture or Notch of Sheet,
    subclass 3 for visual identification means.

    406,    Conveyors: Fluid Current, subclasses 34+ for signals and indicators
    associated with pneumatic dispatching apparatus and other fluid current
    conveyors.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 16 and
    116 for signaling means combined with structure of the class type.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 148 for the combination of a
    chamber of a type utilized for a heating function and material charging or
    discharging means therefor, and wherein is further provided an alarm,
    indicator, or signal, and subclass 289 for the combination of a static
    receptacle, and means for charging or discharging, or facilitating the
    charging or discharging of, the receptacle, and wherein is further provided
    an alarm, indicator, or signal.

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, subclass 116 for signaling
    means combined with structure of the class type.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclasses 31+ for
    signaling means combined with structure of the class type.

    417,    Pumps, subclass 63 for signaling means combined with structure of
    this class type.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 2 for signaling means
    combined with structure of the class type.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 9.1+
    for a drug, bio-affecting, or body treating composition, according to the
    main Class 424 definitions, used for in vivo diagnosis or in vivo testing
    wherein no radionuclide is involved and subclasses 10.1+ for drug,
    bio-affecting, or body treating compositions with an identification or
    warning feature.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 169 for signaling means combined with structure of the class type.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 13 for signaling or inspection means combined
    with structure of the class type.

    432,    Heating, subclass 32 for signaling or inspection means combined
    with structure of the class type.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 222+ for devices for
    teaching the art of signaling such as telegraphy or wigwagging (see
    paragraph VI above for the line between Class 35 and Class 116).

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclasses 6+ for wreck
    signalling buoys.

    446,    Amusement Devices: Toys, has visual and audible devices whose
    purpose is for amusement or recreation, but not working models, or devices,
    even though called toys, which if made of sufficient size would be
    operative devices of the kind found in other classes. Mouth-operated
    devices for producing sound are in Class 446 except where the device is
    used in producing music.  (See paragraph VII above for the line between
    Class 446 and Class 116).

    483,    Tool Changing, subclass 12 for apparatus including a tool transfer
    means combined with     either a tool support or storage means and combined
    with an alerting means.


CLS 116/1
TXT Miscellaneous patents under the class definition for devices pertaining to
    this class but not elsewhere classified.


CLS 116/2
TXT Devices under the class definition include combinations of different types
    of signals or combinations of a signal with some means for producing some
    function in addition to signaling or indicating--for example, a bell and
    horn, a horn and lamp, fire-alarms added to fire-extinguishing systems,
    boot-scrapers used also to ring doorbells, etc.


CLS 116/3
TXT Devices under subclass 2 include a horn and lamp combined in a unitary
    structure for use on vehicles.


CLS 116/4
TXT Devices under subclass 2 for combined structures in which there is an alarm
    and also an indicator.


CLS 116/5
TXT Devices under subclass 4 in which the combined alarm and indicator is of
    the burglar or fire alarm type.

    (1)     Note.  For the alarm or indicator per se search should be made in
    the proper subclasses below.


CLS 116/6
TXT Devices under subclass 2 in which the burglar-alarm is also combined with
    some additional function, as grasping or shooting the burglar, lighting a
    match or lamp, securing a door or window, exploding a blank cartridge, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77      through 83, for portable burglar alarms.


CLS 116/7
TXT Devices under subclass 6 which sound an alarm by a bell or cartridge
    explosion and also ignite a lamp or match.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 13+ for a burner having a means indicating a
    condition of the burner or providing for inspection of the burner.


CLS 116/8
TXT Devices under subclass 6 include locks combined with alarms, which are set
    off when the lock is operated.  The alarm may be a bell or an explosive
    device.


CLS 116/9
TXT Devices under subclass 8 in which the alarm is controlled by the movement
    of the doorknob.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92,     for door knob operated clockwork bell.

    96,     for door knob operated single-stroke bell.

    97,     for door knob operated alarm.


CLS 116/10
TXT Devices under subclass 9 in which the doorknob and bell are more or less of
    a unitary or combined structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153,    for door knob contained bell.


CLS 116/11
TXT Devices under subclass 8 in which the operation of the lock releases a
    hammer, which explodes a cartridge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for door fastening devices with detonating cartridges.

    17,     for sash fastening devices with detonating cartridges.

    23,     for periodic detonating devices.

    83,     for portable burglar alarms of the detonating type.

    87,     for door and window actuated detonating devices.


CLS 116/12
TXT Devices under subclass 6 for fastening doors capable of also acting as
    burglar-alarms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     for floor supported, portable, burglar alarms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    292,    Closure Fasteners, appropriate subclasses, for closure fasteners
    having signals or indicators.


CLS 116/13
TXT Devices under subclass 12 in which an inclined brace is used to secure the
    door and cooperates in setting of a burglar-alarm.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclasses 338+ for braces to secure closures in
    adjusted positions.


CLS 116/14
TXT Devices under subclass 12 in which the fastener is of the well-known chain
    or link type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclass 264 for chain devices to secure
    closures in adjusted positions.


CLS 116/15
TXT Devices under subclass 12 in which the alarm is of a detonating type,
    whereby a hammer is released to explode a cartridge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for lock actuated detonating devices.

    17,     for sash fastening detonating device.

    23,     for periodic detonating devices.

    83,     for portable detonating type burglar alarms.

    87,     for closure operated detonating burglar alarms.


CLS 116/16
TXT Devices under subclass 6 which include fasteners for window-sashes capable
    also of acting as burglar-alarms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    292,    Closure Fasteners, appropriate subclasses, for closure fasteners
    having signals or indicators.


CLS 116/17
TXT Devices under subclass 16 include sash-fastening burglar-alarms which
    explode a cartridge when set off.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for lock actuated detonating devices.

    15,     for door securing detonating devices.

    23,     for periodic detonating devices.

    83,     for portable detonating type burglar alarms.

    87,     for closure operated detonating burglar alarms.


CLS 116/18
TXT Devices under the class definition limited to the transmission of code
    messages by means of visual or audible indications.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes signaling means on lighthouses,
    buoys, vessels, etc., for sending out signals in the form of codes as
    distinguished from mere sounds or light-flashes regularly repeated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for simple sound or light signals, repeated periodically.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, appropriate subclasses for
    electric code signalling.


CLS 116/19
TXT Devices under subclass 18 include mechanically-operated means, sometimes
    automatically controlled by the position of the ship's rudder or the
    direction of motion of the ship and sometimes manually controlled, by which
    the ship's course is indicated by code-signals to other vessels.


CLS 116/20
TXT Devices under subclass 18 in which the signals are given by
    mechanically-controlled intermittent flashes of light, usually reflected
    sunlight.


CLS 116/21
TXT Devices under the class definition by which the navigating officers of a
    vessel can mechanically transmit commands from various stations of the
    ship, as the pilot-house, bridge, etc., to various other stations, as the
    engine-room, the windlass-desk, etc.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes devices using works and other indicia
    which would, if claimed alone, be placed in Class 40, Card, Picture, or
    Sign Exhibiting.


CLS 116/22
TXT Devices under class definition include means for the automatic and periodic
    actuation of signals, usually by various types of motors--e.g., electric,
    clock-work, explosive gas, compressed air, etc.  Fog-signals,
    danger-signals, and bird-scarers are here included.

    (1)     Note.  Continuously-ringing clock-work-bells, signals which can be
    repeating the operator's acts, and similar devices are not here included;
    but signals that are automatically repeated at successive periods so long
    as their operation is continued are included.

    (2)     Note.  When the claims cover any of the details of an electric
    motor, whether generally or specifically, the patent is excluded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for code-signals that may be periodically repeated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclass 248 for an
    horological device including a repeating alarm.


CLS 116/23
TXT Devices under subclass 22 include means for the periodic actuation of
    detonating signals, usually used as alarms for scaring animals, birds,
    etc., from fields, orchards, or gardens.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for lock actuated detonating devices.

    15,     for door securing detonating devices.

    17,     for sash fastening detonating devices.

    78,     for portable drop detonated devices.

    83,     for portable detonating type devices.

    87,     for closure operated detonating devices.


CLS 116/24
TXT Devices under subclass 22 include means for the periodic actuation of horns
    and whistles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137+,   for general features of sound-producing devices, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, subclasses 380+ for wood-wind instruments, and 387+ for
    brass-wind instruments.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 204+ for a whistle; and
    subclasses 207+ for a vibratory reed sounder.


CLS 116/25
TXT Devices under subclass 22 include means for the periodic actuation of bells.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150,    for swinging bells.

    151,    for pneumatically actuated bells.

    167,    for fixed bells with pivoted striker.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 392.1+ for electrically
    operated percussion type sound producers, such as bells.


CLS 116/26
TXT Devices under the class definition include miscellaneous signaling systems,
    devices, or methods especially adapted for use at sea.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18      and 19, for code-signaling from or to ships.

    22+,    for periodic ship-signals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 984+ for electrical nautical
    signaling.


CLS 116/27
TXT Devices under subclass 26 includes means for the mechanical production and
    reception of sound-vibrations transmitted through bodies of water.

    (1)     Note.  The subclass does not include ordinary signals devised for
    use upon submarine vessels nor electric undersea signal devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclasses 327+ for submarine vessels.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave System and Devices,
    subclasses 131+ for electrical underwater communication systems, such as
    compressional waves systems.


CLS 116/28
TXT Signals, indicators, and alarms under the class definition especially
    adapted by structure for use upon or in connection with vehicles.

    (1)     Note.  Those intended for railway use and provided for in Class
    246, Railway Switches and Signals, are excluded.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 264 for vehicle alignment.

    200,    Electricity: Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.27+,
    61.54+, and 61.87 to 61.91 for signal type switches used in connection with
    vehicles.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, (see Note 1).

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 462.1 for self-luminous signaling means.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 288.4+ for signaling means with structure
    of the class type.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 907+ for electrically
    operated signal systems utilized in connection with traffic or vehicles.


CLS 116/28.1
TXT Transmission indicator:

    Devices under subclass 28 wherein the indicator indicates the position of a
    shift lever.

    (1)     Note.  The indicator is for any type of vehicle.


CLS 116/29
TXT Indicators under subclass 28 usually of the pointer-and-dial or
    pointer-and-scale type which indicate the station or street where the
    vehicle will make the next stop.  The vehicle is usually a railway-car or a
    street-railway car, and the indicator-pointer is advanced by being geared
    to the car-axle or by an obstruction along the track or by manual operation
    by the conductor or other train employee.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56+,    for vehicle energy actuated signals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 370 for indicators
    operated in this same way for the same purpose and which are of the type
    having a window at which words or numbers are made to appear.


CLS 116/30
TXT Visual devices under subclass 28 usually lights, flags, or display devices,
    marking the tail ends of cars or trains or giving signals to trains ahead
    or following or other information relating to a car or train.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, appropriate subclasses for sign
    and plate holders.

    248,    Supports, for supports for train-markers and lanterns.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 253 for illuminating means combined with
    signs and plate holders.


CLS 116/31
TXT Devices under subclass 28 to indicate to the operator the position of the
    steering-wheels of the vehicle.


CLS 116/32
TXT Devices under subclass 28 include license-tags, checks, or other means for
    identifying a vehicle, with means for automatically dropping or discharging
    them when the vehicle strikes a person or other object.

    (1)     Note.  The mere presence of indicia upon the checks is not
    sufficient to exclude the patent from this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 12 for article dispensers not
    otherwise provided for, having automatic control of article releasing
    outlet closures and see also subclass 13 for such dispensers having
    automatic control of discharge assistant operation.


CLS 116/33
TXT Devices under subclass 28 for indicating or preventing the theft or
    unauthorized use of a vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for alarm-locks.

    6+      and 77+, for burglar-alarms for general   and other purposes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, for locks, per se.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses
    10.2+ for electrical systems which prevent unauthorized entry or use of a
    vehicle.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 426+ for electrically
    operated vehicle burglar alarms.


CLS 116/34
TXT Devices under subclass 28 include means for giving warning when the
    pressure within the pneumatic tire of an automobile or other vehicle is
    either raised above or reduced below the normal pressure, either by
    puncture, leakage, or otherwise.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24      and 137+, for signaling devices, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 146.2+ for a fluid pressure gauge
    combined with a vehicle, tire or tire stem.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.22+ for
    mere circuit-controllers associated with a tire.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 442+ for electrically
    operated tire deflation alarms.


CLS 116/35
TXT Devices under subclass 28 placed upon a vehicle for indicating to others
    than the operator the motion or any change, either actual or intended, in
    the rate or direction of motion of the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  Elevators are not considered vehicles within the meaning of
    this definition.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes devices using words and other
    indicia, which would otherwise be placed in Class 40, Card, Picture, or
    Sign Exhibiting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 425.5+ for electric vehicle
    signals; note especially indented subclasses 463+ for signals which are
    automatically actuated in response to a particular condition (e.g.,
    turning) of the vehicle, and subclasses 468+ for signals (e.g., turn
    signals, brake lights) which are manually actuated.


CLS 116/36
TXT Devices under subclass 35 in which the signal-operating means is connected
    to the brake or clutch lever or the steering mechanism or to more than one
    of these, so the signal is operated whenever such controlling mechanism is
    operated.

    (1)     Note.  For details of the signaling device, search this class, the
    appropriate subclass in this group.


CLS 116/37
TXT Devices under subclass 35 in which the signal is caused to operate, usually
    revolve, by connection with an axle or wheel of the vehicle.  Generally a
    light flashes according to the speed of a rail-way-car.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     for vehicle station indicators.

    56+,    for vehicle energy actuated signals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclass 182 for cab, signal, or
    train controls, speed control systems.


CLS 116/38
TXT Devices under subclass 37 in which the signal is governor-actuated, so that
    the particular signal changes with the speed.

    (1)     Note.  Some automobile and some rail-way-car signals are here
    included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     for vehicle station indicators.

    56+,    for vehicle energy actuated signals.


CLS 116/39
TXT Devices under subclass 35 in which the stop or direction signal is operated
    pneumatically.


CLS 116/40
TXT Devices under subclass 35 in which the operating means includes lazy-tongs.


CLS 116/41
TXT Devices under subclass 35 in which the signal spreads out like a fan when
    operated.


CLS 116/42
TXT Devices under subclass 35 in which a fixed casing, usually carrying a light
    within it for use at night and having a window or opening, which may be
    normally covered by some sort of an interior shutter movable to uncover the
    light, or a normally-hidden sign or transparency may be moved to the
    opening or window.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for movable cover or screen indicators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 446+ for similar
    structure used for other purposes.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 277+ for similar structure used for other
    purposes.


CLS 116/43
TXT Devices under subclass 42 in which the shutter or sign is rotated to and
    from its position at the window of the casing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46+,    for rotatable type signs.


CLS 116/44
TXT Devices under subclass 42 in which the shutter or sign is made to slide to
    and from its position at the casing-window.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     for sliding type signs.


CLS 116/45
TXT Devices under subclass 35 in which a cover or screen external to a
    light-carrying casing or a sign is made to produce a signal either by being
    moved in front of the light or sign or by being moved away, so as to reveal
    the light or sign.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42+,    for window-exhibited sign or shutter.


CLS 116/46
TXT The signal device under subclass 35 is rotated to signaling position by
    suitable mechanical means.

    (1)     Note.  The distinction between rotatable and pivoted signaling
    devices is rather vague.  Generally an arm or swinging device pivoted at
    its edge or end adapted to be swung to a single signaling position through
    an angle of not over ninety degrees is regarded as a pivoted signal, while
    a device journaled at both ends or between its ends or even at one end or
    edge and adapted to be rotated to either of two signaling positions,
    generally through an angle of one hundred and eighty degrees, is regarded
    as a rotatable signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for window-exhibited sign or shutter, rotatable type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 493+ for changeable
    exhibitors, rotatable type.


CLS 116/47
TXT The signal device under subclass 46 is of the pointer type, often simulates
    a hand or an arrow, and can be rotated to point to either the right or left.


CLS 116/48
TXT Devices under subclass 47 in which the pointer carries a lamp for use at
    night.


CLS 116/49
TXT Devices under subclass 46 in which a casing having a light therein and one
    or more transparent sides bearing letters, arrows, or other indicia is
    adapted to be rotated to bring the transparency into view.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclass 35 for rotatable signal lanterns.


CLS 116/50
TXT Devices under subclass 35 in which the signal is adapted to be slid,
    generally out of a tube, to signaling position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for sliding window-exhibited sign or shutter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 491 for sliding plate
    changeable exhibitors.


CLS 116/51
TXT Devices under subclass 35 in which the signal is pivoted, so as to be swung
    to signalling position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for rotatable window-exhibited sign or shutter.


CLS 116/52
TXT Devices under subclass 51 in which an arm is pivoted, usually at the side,
    but sometimes at the front or rear of the vehicle, so as to swing outward
    to signalling position.


CLS 116/53
TXT Devices under subclass 52 include several swinging arms, each bearing a
    different signal, are employed, together with means for moving any desired
    one of the arms to signaling position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 492 for pivoted plate
    changeable exhibitors.


CLS 116/54
TXT Devices under subclass 52 in which the swinging arm carries a lamp for use
    at night.


CLS 116/55
TXT Devices under subclass 28 include compressed-air-train-pipe signaling
    arrangements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65,     for pneumatic type signals.

    70,     for fluid pressure variation indicating alarms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 494+, particularly subclasses 505+ for
    fluid-pressure regulators, per se.

    303,    Fluid-Pressure and Analogous Brake Systems, subclass 1 for
    miscellaneous type systems, and subclass 86 for miscellaneous operations on
    control pipe.


CLS 116/56
TXT Vehicle signals, usually warning alarms, under subclass 28 actuated by the
    energy of the moving vehicle when thrown into engagement with some moving
    part thereof by the operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     for vehicle station indicators.

    37,     for vehicle motion and direction speed controlled signals.

    174,    for nonfouling flags.


CLS 116/57
TXT Signals under subclass 56 actuated by the vehicle movement which indicate
    when a predetermined speed is reached.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 493 for a speedometer installed on
    a structure and subclasses 514.39 through 535 for speed sensing means, per
    se.


CLS 116/58
TXT Warning-whistles under subclass 56 thrown at will into operative relation
    to some moving part of the vehicle, as the road-wheel, or some engine part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for friction-wheel signal-actuating features.

    65,     for pneumatically operated signals.


CLS 116/59
TXT Audible signal devices under subclass 56 in which a vibrating diaphragm is
    the source of sound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for friction-wheel signal-actuating features.

    141+,   for horns, per se.


CLS 116/60
TXT The audible signal under subclass 56 usually used as a warning-signal, is a
    bell and is adapted to be at will thrown into operative relation to some
    moving part of the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for periodically actuated bells.

    95,     for closure operated single stroke bells.

    148+,   for bell structure and actuating means.


CLS 116/61
TXT Devices under subclass 60 in which the energy is imparted to the actuating
    mechanism by a frictionally-driven wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for vehicle energy actuated pneumatic type signals, and subclass 59
    for vehicle energy actuated diaphragm horn signals.


CLS 116/62
TXT Devices under subclass 60 in which the bells are carried or operated by the
    bicycle-pedal or operated by the rider's foot while still engaging the
    pedal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166,    for bells clamped to bicycle handlebars, so as to be operated by
    the rider's hand.


CLS 116/62.1
TXT Speedometer (e.g., odometer):

    Devices under subclass 28 wherein the indicator indicates speed and/or
    distance traveled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 488+ for speed or accelerator
    indicators of the class type.


CLS 116/62.2
TXT With scale conversion (e.g., english-metric):

    Devices under subclass 62.1 including means to change a scale from one form
    of quantity to another form of quantity.


CLS 116/62.3
TXT With means to indicate range or set speed:

    Devices under subclass 62.1 including an indicator that is movable or fixed
    to indicate when a certain speed is reached or an indicator that shows when
    different speeds are reached.


CLS 116/62.4
TXT With diverse indicators:

    Devices under subclass 62.1 having more than one type of indicator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62.3,   for a diverse indicator to show maximum speed or range.


CLS 116/63
TXT Devices under the class definition placed at street intersections for
    controlling and directing street traffic by movable signs or indicators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 446+ for more general
    changeable-exhibitor features, subclass 611 for stationary street-traffic
    signs, and subclasses 607+ for post attached type signs.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 907+ for electrically
    operated traffic signals.


CLS 116/64
TXT Devices under the class definition include mechanical, as distinguished
    from electric, means for signaling the elevator from different floors or
    mine-levels or for signaling between the operator and the engineer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for automatically operated elevator or hoist alarms.

    122,    for devices for indicating the position of the elevator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 19+ for electrical elevator
    signaling systems.


CLS 116/67
TXT Devices under the class definition for giving audible indications, usually
    operated automatically.

    (1)     Note.  Patents for burglar, fire, poison-container,
    liquid-overflow, tide, fog, channel, and shoal-water alarms are here
    included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28+,    for alarms peculiar to vehicles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 344 for alarms associated
    with cooking apparatus.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 52+ for alarm
    type switches actuated by or responsive to a condition.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 305+, 358, and 912 for
    an alarm or indicator in a winding, unwinding, tensioner, or guide device.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 500+ for automatically
    actuated electrical alarm systems, and subclasses 384.1+ for audible
    electrically actuated signals.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 43, 72+,
    94, 98+, 109, and 244+ for an horological device including an alarm.


CLS 116/68
TXT Alarms under subclass 67 actuated by the motion of an elevator, mine-hoist,
    or similar mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for elevator signals.

    122,    for elevator position indicators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, when indicia are also displayed
    or pointed out.


CLS 116/69
TXT Alarms under subclass 67 operated by the fall of rain.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 170.01+ for a meteorological
    method or apparatus combined with an apparatus for measuring fluid flow
    direction and subclass 170.17 for a method or apparatus for measuring rain.


CLS 116/70
TXT Alarms under subclass 67 set off by a change in the pressure of a fluid, as
    a check in the flow of gas in a gas-main, a break in any of the hollow bars
    across jail, bank, or vault windows or doors, train air-brake pipes, etc.
    These alarms are generally fault or defect or burglar alarms as
    distinguished from signalling devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for pneumatic-train-pipe signal arrangements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclass 318 for a seal combined with a fluid pressure indicator,
    sampler, or inspection feature.


CLS 116/71
TXT Alarms under subclass 67 associated with the grain-feed or grinding-mills,
    or grain bins, set off to indicate some change in the feed-supply.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for comminutor-signal combinations
    only for those patents which do not include significant comminutor
    structure.  The broad inclusion of a comminutor element was not considered
    to be a reference to significant comminutor structure.  For patents
    including alarms or signals combined with significant disintegrator
    structure, see Class 241, Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration,
    subclass 101.01.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 23+ for signals combined with significantly
    claimed dispensers.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 101.01.
    (See Note 1).


CLS 116/72
TXT Devices under subclass 67 adapted to sound an alarm or make some noise when
    a bottle or other receptacle containing poison is moved or opened.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclass 113 for containers having merely some
    distinctive points or roughened portion on or blown in or otherwise made a
    part of the material.


CLS 116/73
TXT Devices under subclass 67 include arrangements for giving an alarm when
    some device--as a shaft, wheel, or work-carriage--rotates or moves a
    predetermined number of times.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclass 128 for register alarm mechanism.


CLS 116/74
TXT Devices under subclass 67 which include arrangements whereby an alarm is
    sounded when a predetermined speed of rotation of a shaft or wheel or other
    movement is reached.  Used on machines of various sorts, mills,
    cream-separators, grain-elevators, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for vehicle energy actuated speed limit indicators.

    116,    for speed limit indicators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 494 for a speed responsive device
    installed on a rotary speed source.

    235,    Registers, subclasses 95 and 103, respectively, for odometers and
    rotation-counters.


CLS 116/75
TXT Alarms under subclass 67 set off by attempt at unauthorized entrance to
    buildings, safes, receptacles, money-tills, graves, pocket-books, or
    persons' pockets or the unauthorized attempt to remove articles of wear or
    ornament or to move things from their proper places, as fire-escape
    ladders, jewel-boxes, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for devices which do something else in addition to sounding an
    alarm.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 42.01+,
    43.01+, 61.93, and 86.5 for electric burglar alarm type switches, and
    subclasses 61.69 to 61.83 for door or sash type operated switches.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 500+ for automatically
    actuated alarm. Note particularly subclasses 541+ for burglar alarms, and
    the subclasses referred to in the search notes to that subclass.


CLS 116/76
TXT Money-drawer or till alarms under subclass 75 operated by the movement of
    or the attempt to open the till.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 61.61 for alarm
    type switches actuated concurrently with the movement of a drawer.


CLS 116/77
TXT Portable alarm devices under subclass 75, generally of a type to be carried
    by travelers and quickly applied to hotel or other room doors, windows, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 546 for electrically operated
    portable alarms.


CLS 116/78
TXT Devices under subclass 77 in which the dropping of the device by being
    displaced from its support by an opening door or window detonates a signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for combined burglar alarm, door securing detonating type.

    23,     for periodic detonating type signal.

    83,     for portable burglar alarms of the detonating type.

    87,     for closure operated detonating type alarms.


CLS 116/79
TXT Devices under subclass 77 in which clamps or their equivalents are provided
    for attaching the device to the knobs or knob-spindles of doors or windows,
    the turning of the knob actuating the alarm.


CLS 116/80
TXT Devices under subclass 77 in which means are provided whereby the key or
    keyhole is utilized in securing the device to the door, the alarm being
    actuated by the insertion, the attempt to insert, or the turning of the key
    in the keyhole.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.64+,
    particularly subclass 61.66 for key operated switches.


CLS 116/81
TXT Devices under subclass 77 in which trains or clock-work or the triggers of
    detonating devices are released by the rupture or slackening of a cord
    stretched across pathways or connected to doors or windows.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94,     for closure operated clockwork bell, cable control alarms.

    165,    for pull cord or rod operated bell.


CLS 116/82
TXT Devices under subclass 77 which are placed upon the floor of a room and are
    actuated by the impact of an opening door.

    (1)     Note.  Many of these devices also act as door securers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12+,    for combined operation of burglar alarms and door securers.


CLS 116/83
TXT Devices under subclass 77 which include detonating alarms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for periodic detonating signals.

    78+,    for portable drop detonating type signals.

    87+,    for closure operated detonating type signals.


CLS 116/84
TXT Pocket devices under subclass 77 which are capable of giving an audible
    warning when an attempt is made to pick the pocket.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, subclass 134 for safety
    devices for wallets.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 39 for audible signaling means and structure
    of the class type.


CLS 116/85
TXT Devices under subclass 75 in which the signal is actuated by the opening or
    attempted opening of a door, window, box-cover, shutter-slat, or other
    closure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 13+ for signaling means
    with structures of the class type.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclass 10 for
    signaling means with structure of the class type.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses,
    for electrical switching devices, particularly subclass 61.62 for closure
    operated or accessory operated switches.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclass 205 for signaling means with structure of the class type.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 545+ for similar subject
    matter where the signal is electrically actuated.


CLS 116/86
TXT Devices under subclass 85 in which a door or window is the actuating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 42+ for
    unauthorized-use preventing switches, and subclasses 61.69 to 61.83 for
    door or sash operated switches.


CLS 116/87
TXT Devices under subclass 86 in which the alarm is detonating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for periodic detonating type devices.

    78,     for portable drop detonating type devices.

    83,     for portable detonating devices.


CLS 116/88
TXT Devices under subclass 87 in which the firing pin or hammer reciprocates in
    a right line.


CLS 116/89
TXT Devices under subclass 88 in which the firing pin or hammer is rotated when
    released.


CLS 116/90
TXT Signals and alarms under subclass 86 actuated by gear or friction wheels
    attached to the moving door or window and in contact with the floor or
    window frame.


CLS 116/91
TXT Bells under subclass 86 actuated by trains of clock-work controlled by
    doors or windows.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for periodically actuated bells.

    60+,    for vehicle energy actuated bells.

    98,     for tread operated signals.

    148,    for bells.


CLS 116/92
TXT Devices under subclass 91 in which the train of clock-work is controlled by
    the motion of the doorknob.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for doorknob controlled locks.

    96,     for doorknob controlled single stroke bells.

    97,     for doorknob control alarms.


CLS 116/93
TXT Bells under subclass 91 actuated by clockwork which are automatically wound
    by the opening of a door or window.


CLS 116/94
TXT Clockwork-bells under subclass 91 controlled by cords or wires or other
    cables connected to the closures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     for portable cord controlled burglar alarms.

    104,    for ignition controlled thermal alarms.

    165,    for pull cord or rod actuated bells.


CLS 116/95
TXT Bells and gongs under subclass 86 upon which a single stroke is given by
    each opening of a door or window.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for periodically actuated bells.

    60+,    for vehicle energy actuated bells.

    91,     for closure operated clockwork bells.

    148,    for bells.


CLS 116/96
TXT Devices under subclass 95 in which the turning of the knob gives a single
    stroke upon the bell.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for combined burglar alarm of the doorknob controlled type.

    92,     for doorknob controlled clockwork bell.

    97,     for doorknob controlled alarm.


CLS 116/97
TXT Devices under subclass 86 in which the turning of the knob gives two or
    more strokes upon the bell.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for combined burglar alarm of the doorknob controlled type.

    92,     for doorknob controlled clockwork bell.

    96,     for doorknob controlled single stroke bell.


CLS 116/98
TXT Alarms, bell or detonating type, some of gun type under subclass 75, which
    are intended to kill, operated by a person treading on a mat, platform,
    step, or floor.


CLS 116/99
TXT Portable boxes, small safes, satchels, trunks, or other receptacles
    provided with alarms under subclass 75 operated when the receptacle is
    moved by any unauthorized person.


CLS 116/100
TXT Miscellaneous closure-operated alarms under subclass 67 not intended for
    burglar-alarm purposes.  Some are to give a local alarm when a fire-alarm
    box is opened, others to operate as house-bells, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     and appropriate indented subclasses, for burglar alarms, per se.


CLS 116/101
TXT Alarms under subclass 67 actuated by changes of temperature, usually for
    fire-alarms, for incubators, steam-boilers, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 136+ for
    thermal circuit-closers.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, appropriate
    subclasses, for automatic temperature-regulating devices controlled by
    temperature changes.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclass 319 for a seal combined with a fluid temperature
    indicator, sampler, or inspection feature.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 577+, 584+, and 600+ for
    electric alarms which are automatically responsive to temperature or flame
    or radiant energy.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 143+ for fire prevention and
    isolation apparatus frequently including alarms for use with motion picture
    films.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 100+ for thermometers.


CLS 116/102
TXT Devices under subclass 101 in which the actuating element expands with rise
    of temperature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 187+ for a mechanical
    thermometer.


CLS 116/103
TXT Devices under subclass 102 in which the expanding element is normally in
    the liquid or gaseous state.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 388 for signaling means with
    structure of the class type.


CLS 116/104
TXT Devices under subclass 101 include systems of alarm based upon the ignition
    of inflammable substances--e.g., cord or fusible links--usually intended
    for use as fire-alarms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     for portable cord controlled burglar alarms.

    94,     for cable controlled clockwork bells.


CLS 116/105
TXT Devices under subclass 104 in which the inflammable substance is an
    explosive.

    (1)     Note.  Devices in which the noise of the explosion constitutes the
    alarm are here included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for burglar or fire alarms with indicators.

    83,     for portable detonating type burglar alarms.

    87,     for closure operated detonating type alarms.


CLS 116/106
TXT Devices under subclass 101 include systems based upon the fusibility of a
    restraining member, usually the fusible link of a chain or wire.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, subclass 26 for signaling means with a fire
    extinguisher receptacle; and subclass 42 for fusible connectors of the
    class type.


CLS 116/107
TXT Devices under subclass 67 in which the actuating and signal mechanism is
    placed upon a buoy, and the alarm is produced by the waves or the current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 170.31 for determing a physical
    parameter or phenomenon by making a measurement of a moving ridge or swell
    on the surface of a naturally occurring body of water.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, appropriate subclasses for buoy
    structure.


CLS 116/108
TXT Devices under subclass 107 in which air is periodically compressed by the
    motion of the buoy and utilized for blowing the whistle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, appropriate subclasses for buoy
    structure.


CLS 116/109
TXT Devices under subclass 67 in which the change of a liquid-level sets up an
    alarm.

    (1)     Note.  Leak, low-water, or overflow alarms are here included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    where a flow of the fluid or the check in the flow sets up an alarm.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 290+ for liquid level gauges
    combined with liquid level alarms.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 558 for fluid handling apparatus combined
    with a liquid level responsive indicator or alarm.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclass 320 for a seal combined with a fluid leakage indicator,
    sampler, or inspection feature.


CLS 116/110
TXT Devices under subclass 109 include float-actuated audible warnings of a
    liquid-level condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for buoy alarms.

    108,    for whistling buoy alarms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    For float actuated and controlled alarms or indicators see:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 307 and 308, for float gauges
    combined with signals, and subclass 322.5, for floats, per se.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 386+, particularly subclasses 409+ for
    float operated valves, and subclass 558, for fluid handling apparatus
    combined with a liquid level responsive indicator or alarm.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 84 for float
    controlled switches.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 612+ for electrically
    operated alarms automatically responsive to liquid level.


CLS 116/111
TXT Devices under subclass 110 include float-controlled clock-work-bells.


CLS 116/112
TXT Devices under subclass 67 in which the flow of a current of fluid or the
    check of its flow in a pipe or between confining walls controls an alarm.

    (1)     Note.  Boiler-feed alarms are here included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for fluid pressure variation actuated alarms.

    117,    for fluid flow indicators.

    109+,   for mere liquid-level alarms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclass 320 for a seal combined with a fluid leakage indicator,
    sampler, or inspection feature.


CLS 116/113
TXT Devices under subclass 67 include systems based upon the varying depth of
    water, used on moving vessels to give warning when the water is shoaling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 713, for distance sounding type
    devices.


CLS 116/137
TXT Devices under class definition limited to structure of horns, whistles, and
    compressional wave generators and the means for their actuation, automatic
    means being excluded.  This is the generic place for mechanical sonic and
    supersonic generators for wave transmission through media.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for periodically operated horns and whistles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, subclasses 349+ for pipe organ pipes, subclasses 363+, for
    reed organ reeds, subclass 375, for minor reeds, subclass 380, for
    woodwinds, subclass 387, for brasses, and subclass 456, for tuning devices
    for pipes and reeds.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 384.1+ for audible electric
    signals.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 140+ for underwater and geophysical electric vibration
    transducers.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 202+ for a mouth-actuated
    whistle or siren.


CLS 116/138
TXT Devices under subclass 137 wherein the exhaust or suction intake of a
    fluid-pressure motor is utilized for sounding the horn or whistle,
    diaphragm-horns being excluded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for vehicle energy actuated pneumatic signals.

    216+,   for pneumatic signals.


CLS 116/139
TXT Devices under subclass 137 in which manually or pedally actuated
    air-compressors are used for sounding the horn or whistle, diaphragm-horns
    being excluded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for mechanically operated motion and direction indicators.

    58,     for vehicle energy actuated pneumatic signals.

    70,     for fluid pressure variation indicating alarms.

    151,    for pneumatically actuated bells.

    216+,   for pneumatic signals.


CLS 116/140
TXT Devices under subclass 137 include whistles and horns provided with devices
    whereby the pitch of the note can be gradually varied during its sounding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, subclass 350 for reed type organ pipes, subclass 364 for
    tuneable reeds, and subclass 375, for minor reeds.


CLS 116/141
TXT Devices under subclass 137 in which two or more horns or whistles are
    adapted to be sounded in unison, the same having different but usually
    concordant tones.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, appropriate subclasses.


CLS 116/142
TXT Devices under subclass 137 include audible alarms in which a vibrating
    diaphragm is the source of sound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for vehicle energy actuated pneumatic signals.


CLS 116/143
TXT Devices under subclass 142 in which the diaphragm is caused to vibrate by
    the blows of a rotating body, usually pivoted or sliding hammers, on a
    rotating disk or wheel.

    (1)     Note.The means for rotating the wheel may be a manually-operated
    arrangement or a conventional electric motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for vehicle energy actuated pneumatic signals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 390.1+ for similar subject
    matter where the rotating hammers are electrically actuated.


CLS 116/144
TXT Devices under subclass 143 in which the striker has the form of a toothed
    wheel, the teeth being fixed or rigid with the wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for vehicle energy actuated pneumatic signals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 390.1+ for similar subject
    matter where the rotating hammers are electrically actuated.


CLS 116/145
TXT Devices under subclass 144 in which the plane of the toothed wheel is
    parallel to the plane of the diaphragm.


CLS 116/146
TXT Device under subclass 143 in which the ball-contacts are used either on the
    striker or on the diaphragm.


CLS 116/147
TXT Sound-producing devices under class definition provided with diaphragms
    capable of rotation and pierced with holes, whereby, when rotated, by
    escaping gas a succession of sound-producing puffs or impacts is produced.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclass 205 for a mouth-actuated whistle
    or siren.


CLS 116/148
TXT Devices under class definition usually metallic, supported at one point and
    used to produce sound when struck or otherwise thrown into vibration.They
    are generally of the well-known bell or gong type.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also includes rods, bars, tubes, spiral
    springs, disks, and other shapes when so used and supported.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for periodically operated bells.

    35+,    for motion direction indicating bells.

    91+,    for closure operated clockwork bells.

    95+,    for closure operated single stroke bells.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 392.1+ for similar subject
    matter electrically operated.


CLS 116/149
TXT Devices under subclass 148 are used to raise, lower, muffle, or otherwise
    modify the sound of the bell.


CLS 116/150
TXT Devices under subclass 148 in which the bell is so hung as to swing freely
    upon an axis or from a single point of suspension. The clapper is usually
    inside the bell and is also pivoted to swing.

    (1)     Note.  Bells on spiral springs are here included.


CLS 116/151
TXT Bells under subclass 148 in which pneumatic means are used for moving the
    bell or controlling its motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for vehicle energy actuated pneumatic signals.

    65,     for pneumatic signals.

    70,     for fluid pressure variation operated alarms.

    139,    for motor exhaust or suction actuated horns or whistles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, for expansible-chamber type
    motors intended to operate bells. Where any significant structure of the
    bell operated by the motor is claimed, the patent is provided for in Class
    116. Merely reciting the bell by name only or stating that the bell has a
    striker movable into and out of engagement with the bell is not considered
    significant structure such as would exclude patents from Class 91. A
    recitation that the bell is mounted so as to be swung or is provided with
    crank means for moving the bell is considered to be sufficient structure to
    cause classification in Class 116.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclasses for
    rotary expansible chamber motor actuated bells and see the search note to
    Class 91 above for the line between this class (116) and Class 91, for line
    between this class (116) and Class 418 being the same.


CLS 116/152
TXT Bells of the so-called "gong" type under subclass 148, having the form of a
    round shallow cup or dish and of flat curvature.


CLS 116/153
TXT Devices under subclass 152 in which the bell is placed within a hollow
    doorknob or itself forms the knob.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for doorknob gongs which are operated by turning the knob and latch.


CLS 116/154
TXT Bells under subclass 152 in which the gong is rotated while being sounded.


CLS 116/155
TXT Bells under subclass 152 in which the striker or hammer is pivoted and may
    be either inside or outside the gong.


CLS 116/156
TXT Bells under subclass 155 in which two or more separate striking-faces are
    provided for the hammer.


CLS 116/157
TXT Bells under subclass 155 in which two or more strokes of the
    striking-hammer are given.


CLS 116/158
TXT Devices under subclass 157 in which the striker makes one or more complete
    revolutions about its pivot.


CLS 116/159
TXT Levers under subclass 158 which are used for operating the bells.


CLS 116/160
TXT Plungers under subclass 158 which are used for operating the bells.


CLS 116/161
TXT Devices under subclass 157 in which the striker is attached to pallet
    mechanism actuated by an escapement-wheel similar to that usually found in
    clocks.


CLS 116/162
TXT Devices under subclass 161 in which energy stored up by previous winding or
    a spring is released when required for actuating the striker through the
    clockwork and its escapement.


CLS 116/163
TXT Devices under subclass 157 in which two and only two distinct strokes are
    given, one on the initial and the other on the return motion of the
    operating device.


CLS 116/164
TXT Devices under subclass 155 in which a single stroke is given by the impact
    of a hammer driven by a spring placed in tension or compression by the
    actuating device.


CLS 116/165
TXT Devices under subclass 155 in which a single stroke is given by pulling
    upon a cord, rod, or chain, the mechanism being returned to normal position
    by springs or gravity without giving a second stroke.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     for cord controlled portable burglar alarms.

    94,     for cable controlled clockwork bell of the closure operated type.


CLS 116/166
TXT Devices under subclass 152 in which the novelty resides solely in the clamp
    by which the bell is attached to the frame of a bicycle or tricycle, the
    clamp being more or less modified for that particular use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for friction wheel actuated bells.


CLS 116/167
TXT Devices under subclass 148 in which the bell is fixed in position, the
    clapper being moved by the actuating mechanism.


CLS 116/168
TXT Devices under subclass 148 in which a spiral metallic spring is used as a
    sounding element, the type being frequently used in clocks.


CLS 116/169
TXT Devices under subclass 148 in which a metallic tube or rod is used as a
    sounding element.


CLS 116/170
TXT Devices under subclass 148 include bells of the well-known cow-bell and
    sleigh-bell types, and also other small bells, provided with means for
    attaching same, often in grouped units, to vehicles or animals.


CLS 116/171
TXT Bells of various types provided with handles under subclass 148, whereby
    they may be grasped and rung.


CLS 116/172
TXT Devices under subclass 148 include bellpulls, bellcranks, push buttons, and
    other similar devices used for distant actuation of bells.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for vehicle energy actuated pneumatic signals.

    70,     for fluid pressure variation operated alarms.

    139,    for motor exhaust or section actuated horns or whistles.

    151,    for pneumatically actuated bells.


CLS 116/173
TXT Devices under class definition limited to the structure of flags and
    fittings and their supports when especially adapted to the display of flags.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, appropriate subclasses for flags
    and banners displaying pictures, words or insignia, and particularly
    subclass 218 for devices for causing flags to wave so as to attract
    attention thereto for advertising or exhibiting purposes.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 170.01+ for fluid flow direction
    indicators, and subclasses 170.07 and 170.09 for fluid flow direction
    indicators with velocity determination, for example, wind socks, weather
    vanes, and the like.


CLS 116/174
TXT Devices under subclass 173 designed to prevent the flag from wrapping
    around its support or otherwise fouling or becoming entangled with it or
    with the halyards.


CLS 116/175
TXT Devices under subclass 173 include flags of metal, generally for railway
    use or where great wearing qualities are needed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132,    for hand set semaphore indicators.


CLS 116/200
TXT INDICATORS:

    Devices under the class definition having means to convey information to
    one of the senses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67+,    for reel alarms and alarm signaling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 446 and appropriate
    indented subclasses for signs and indications which appear at a window and
    are concealed when moved away from such openings.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 33 for plant labeling devices.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 1 for signaling means
    with structure of the class type.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 5 for signaling means with
    structure of the class type.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 41+ for dispensers with position or extent
    of motion signaling means.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 305+, 534+, 563+, and
    912 for an indicator in a winding, unwinding, or similar environment.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 45 for transformers and inductive
    reactors having a movable element and a position or extent of motion
    signaling means.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 196 for signal means with structure
    of the class type.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 760 for antennas
    with signaling means which is responsive to the scan, sweep, or orientation
    of the antenna; and subclass 894 for antennas with signaling means
    responsive to some other condition of the antenna.  See (4) Note, C, 3,
    under subclass 700 of this class for certain classification lines involving
    antennas and signaling means.

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, subclasses 40+ for signaling means with
    structure of the class type.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    246+, 281+, and 301+ for light wave modulators of polarized light.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 132
    and 137 for signaling means with structure of the class type, e.g., tape
    recorder.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 19+ for
    control of reproduction by external condition; and subclasses 53+ for
    indication of condition of storage or retrieval device.


CLS 116/201
TXT Methods:

    Processes under subclass 200 which includes the step of indicating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclass 10 for
    mine safety processes.


CLS 116/202
TXT Visual light signal:

    Devices under subclass 200 wherein illumination is used to provide a visual
    indication of a condition.

    (1)     Note.  Any source of illumination may produce the light, e.g.,
    flame, artificial light, sun, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Illumination merely to light a scale, dial, pointer, or
    etc., is provided for in subclasses below.

    (3)     Note.  Where the light signal is disclosed as being electrical, the
    patents are in Class 340.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250,    for an indicator with illumination means and see search notes for
    other areas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclass 334 for smoke-generating means;
    and subclasses 336+ for flare means which are used for signalling.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 815.4+ for visual electric
    signal means.


CLS 116/203
TXT Impact type:

    Devices under subclass 200 having means to indicate shock or acceleration
    of an object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215,    for an indicator which is moved by tilting an object and gravity
    causes it to move.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 492 for reading maximum
    acceleration.

    346,    Recorders, subclass 7 for recording impact and see search class
    notes for other areas of search.


CLS 116/204
TXT Magnetically actuated:

    Devices under subclass 200 wherein the indicator is moved by the force of a
    permanent magnet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    267,    for a permanent magnet used to prevent actuation until a certain
    pressure is reached.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 419 for reed switch
    testing; and subclass 228 for an electric or permanent magnet to test
    material.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, appropriate subclass for a permanent
    magnetic with structure of the class type.


CLS 116/205
TXT By touch:

    Devices under subclass 200 where an indication is perceived by the sense of
    feeling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 407.1+ for tactual
    signaling means of the class type.


CLS 116/206
TXT Chemically activated type:

    Devices under subclass 200 wherein the indication is given by a chemical
    reaction, e.g., change in color, smoke, odor, etc., and means to hold the
    chemicals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    214,    for smoke or odor as an indicator where no chemical reaction
    holding means is used.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 408 for compositions designed for indicating.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 13 and 45 for signaling means
    with structure of the class type.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 50+ for determining qualitatively or
    quantitatively the presence of chemical compound.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclass 264 for changing color
    characteristic of impurity.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 1-183
    for determining qualitatively or quantitatively the presence of chemical
    compound.


CLS 116/207
TXT By heat:

    Device under subclass 206 wherein the chemical reaction is caused by a
    raise in temperature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 106 and 162 for
    quantitative color change thermometers.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 1-183
    for determining qualitatively or quantitatively the pressure of chemical
    compound by heat.


CLS 116/208
TXT Element wear type:

    Devices under subclass 200 having means to indicate a structure exceeds a
    predetermined minimum use or to show amount of material consumed by use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 36 for pipes having wear
    indicator.

    188,    Brakes, subclass 1.11 for brake wear indicator.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 30 for an indicator and
    clutch.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclass 321 for a seal combined with a wear, proper seating or
    presence indicator, sampler, or inspection feature.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 454 for a brake wear indicator
    of the class type.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 1-183
    for corrosion tests.


CLS 116/209
TXT By location:

    Devices under subclass 200 wherein the indicator shows the place of a
    person, a particular boundary, or an object with respect to the surface of
    the earth, i.e., to the ground or to body of water.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include indicators wherein a pointer
    moves relative to a dial or scale so as to give information with reference
    to elements within the structure of the indicator itself.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 103 for markers that
    are permanently placed in the ground.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclass 21 for pyrotechnics signalling
    devices.


CLS 116/210
TXT Inflatable type:

    Devices under subclass 209 wherein the indicator is a hollow receptacle of
    an elastic and impervious material that is filled with a gas so that said
    receptacle will expand and float in the atmosphere or in a body of water.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 214 for balloon devices
    as signs.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 98 for inflatable devices of the class type.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 220+ for an inflatable toy.


CLS 116/211
TXT Dye marker type:

    Devices under subclass 209 wherein the indicator is a brightly colored
    material, e.g., dye stuff, pigment, chemiluminescent matter, etc., that is
    released from said indicator and spreads over the surface of the ground or
    body of water.


CLS 116/212
TXT Stress type:

    Devices under subclass 200 having means to indicate that a force exerted
    upon a body has strained or deformed its shape.

    (1)     Note.  If the force is only to move an indicator to show fluid flow
    or pressure, see subclasses 222 and 266+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220     and 266+, for a fluid force to cause an indicator to move.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 760+ for stress or strain
    measuring a general and see search note for other areas.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, subclasses 8+ for a stress or stain indicator
    combined with a fastener of the Class 411 type.


CLS 116/213
TXT Camera type:

    Devices under subclass 200 wherein the indicator forms part of a camera.

    (1)     Note.  Only camera structure to support the indicator is proper for
    this subclass; if camera structure which cooperates or moves elements of
    the camera are claimed, the patent is placed in the proper camera class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics: Motion Pictures, subclasses 170+ for indicating means and
    motion picture camera structure.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 281+ for indicating means and camera
    structure.


CLS 116/214
TXT By smoke or odor:

    Devices under subclass 200 wherein the indicator is a gas with particles
    suspended in it to make it visible or with a characteristic of a substance
    which makes it perceptible to the sense of smell.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206,    for chemically activated means which may cause a smoke or odor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclass 169 for hot bearing
    detectors.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 628 for an electrical smoke
    indicator.


CLS 116/215
TXT Gravity type:

    Devices under subclass 200 wherein the indicator moves by its own weight or
    has a tendency to move without artificially applied force.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are means to release an indicator for movement
    from a nonindication to an indication position.

    (2)     Note.  If the indicator has positive means to move it, the patents
    are placed below in the schedule even if the indicator could move by
    gravity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203,    for impact indicator where the indicator is moved by gravity after
    the impact.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, subclasses 30+ for fire extinguisher and
    indicator.


CLS 116/216
TXT Temperature responsive or compensating means:

    Devices under subclass 200 having means to sense warmth or coldness, to
    indicate or cause the indicator to move, or other means including warmth or
    coldness sensing means to cause the indicator to move.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    for thermal means to actuate an alarm.

    205,    for temperature sensing which uses the sense of touch.

    207,    for a chemical reaction caused by heat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclass 169 for hot bearing
    detectors of the class type.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclass 319 for a seal combined with a fluid temperature
    indicator, sampler, or inspection feature.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 100+ for quantitative
    indicating thermometers.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclass 88 for food temperature indicator devices of the class types.


CLS 116/217
TXT Fusible substance:

    Devices under subclass 216 having a material which melts at a known
    temperature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    214,    for a smoke or odor indicator which may include a fusible material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, subclass 42 for fusible connections of the
    class type.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 106 and 160 for
    indicative devices wherein the fusible element constitutes the indicator.


CLS 116/218
TXT With resilient or fluid pressure biased means: Devices under subclass 217
    including means to apply a force by an element seeking to restore its
    shape, or a liquid or gas, to an element whose movement is restrained by
    the fusible substance.


CLS 116/219
TXT With absorbing or diffusing material:
    Devices under subclass 217 including a material to suck up, drink in, or
    spread out the fusible substance.


CLS 116/220
TXT And fluid pressure indicator:

    Devices under subclass 216 including means responsive to the force of a
    liquid, gas, or vapor to give an indication.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266+,   for pressure indicators.


CLS 116/221
TXT Bimetal element:

    Devices under subclass 216 having a sensing means which has a composite
    structure of at least two materials abutted and fixed together and having
    different expansion coefficients.


CLS 116/222
TXT Game type:

    Devices under subclass 200 having means to indicate the progress of a
    contest for amusement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209,    for location indicators, e.g., position, foul line, or etc.

    306+,   for operator movable indicators of general use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 2+ for checks, label,
    or tag.

    235,    Registers, subclass 90 for game boards provided with means for
    counting the game scores.

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, for game apparatus combined with a means
    to indicate the progress of the game.

    463,    Amusement Devices:  Games, for game apparatus combined with a means
    to indicate the progress of the game.

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, for game apparatus combined with a
    means to indicate the progress of the game.


CLS 116/223
TXT Rotary:

    Devices under subclass 222 wherein the indicator turns about a point or
    axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    309+,   for an operator movable rotary indicator of general use.


CLS 116/224
TXT With rectilinear indicator:

    Devices under subclass 223 including an indicator movable along a straight
    path or along a two-dimensional path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225,    for a game-type indicator movable in a rectilinear path.

    323+,   for an indicator which is moved by an operator in a rectilinear
    path.


CLS 116/225
TXT Rectilinear:

    Devices under subclass 222 wherein the indicator is movable along a
    straight path or along a two-dimensional path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323+,   for an indicator which is moved by an operator in a rectilinear
    path.


CLS 116/226
TXT Elevator position:

    Devices under subclass 200 wherein the indicator is operated by or
    simultaneously with an elevator or hoist to show position in the elevator
    shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for means to signal the elevator operator at which floor or mine
    level to stop.

    68,     for alarms sounded by the movement of the elevator or hoist.


CLS 116/227
TXT Liquid level:

    Devices under subclass 200 having means to indicate the plane of the
    surface of a body of a nongaseous fluid.

    (1)     Note.The plane of surface is usually determined to be above, below,
    or at a given vertical position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264+,   for fluid flow and/or the arrival of fluid at a point in a flow
    path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 290+ for liquid level gauges
    combined with liquid level indicators.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 94+ for indicators combined with filling means, particularly
    subclasses 95+ for receiver level or pressure indicators.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 662+, and see the notes thereto, for
    structures wherein a transparent panel is mounted in a wall.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 51 for dispensers with float level indicators;
    and subclasses 155+ for dispensers with external gauge tubes.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclass 320 for a seal combined with a fluid leakage indicator,
    sampler, or inspection feature.


CLS 116/228
TXT Float:

    Devices under subclass 227 wherein a buoyant body is the indicator or
    controls the position of the indicator.


CLS 116/229
TXT On pivoted arm:

    Devices under subclass 228 wherein the float is attached to a level that
    turns about a point or axis.


CLS 116/230
TXT Machine tool position:

    Devices under subclass 200 having means to show the relative movement of a
    shaping tool in relation to a work support or the relative movement of a
    work support to a shaping tool.

    (1)     Note.  For machines having the same type of indicators search the
    appropriate subclasses in the following classes:



    29,     Metal Working

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism

    82,     Turning

    83,     Cutting

    142,    Wood Turning

    144,    Woodworking

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing

    451,    Abrading

    (2)     Note.  A tool support or disclosure of relative movement of tool
    and work is proper for this subclass.


CLS 116/231
TXT Plural scales:

    Devices under subclass 230 having more than one element, each having a
    series of marks and/or numerical notations used to indicate the relative
    travel.


CLS 116/232
TXT Scale conversion (e.g., english-metric):

    Devices under subclass 231 wherein the scales have marks to indicate
    different forms of quantity.


CLS 116/233
TXT Machine tool variable transmission:

    Devices under subclass 200 having means to indicate the ratio between
    toothed wheels, or the angular speed output, of a shaping machine
    changeable speed device.


CLS 116/234
TXT Page type:

    Devices under subclass 200 having means for indicating a particular leaf of
    a stack.

    (1)     Note.  Many patents are to book markers and particularly to
    indicate a page of a closed book.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 67+ for a clip-type
    temporary paper holding clamp; subclasses 336+ for a combined Clasp.

    281,    Books, Strips, and Leaves, subclass 42 for similar subject matter
    of the class type.


CLS 116/235
TXT With line indicator:

    Devices under subclass 234 including means to indicate a row or column of
    indicia on a leaf.

    (1)     Note.  The line indicator can also be the page indicator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240,    for a line indicator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 352+ for an indicator
    (e.g., line guide) movably attached to a copy holder to indicate a portion
    of the copy supported thereon.


CLS 116/236
TXT With resilient gripper:

    Devices under subclass 235 including means to press or grasp the leaf or a
    cover to hold the line indicator at a particular position.


CLS 116/237
TXT With resilient gripper:

    Devices under subclass 234 including means to press or grasp the leaf or a
    cover to hold the page indicator on the leaf or cover.


CLS 116/238
TXT With means to secure to book back:

    Devices under subclass 234 including means to fix the page indicator to a
    part of a book binding that ties the covers of a book together.


CLS 116/239
TXT With means to secure to book cover:

    Devices under subclass 234 including means to fix the page indicator to
    that part of a book that touches the outermost leaves of the book when it
    is closed.


CLS 116/240
TXT Line indicator:

    Devices under subclass 200 having means to indicate a row or column of
    indicia on a leaf.

    (1)     Note.  The line indicators are for open pages or a page which
    indicators are not adapted because of bulk or other attributes to be used
    as page indicator, e.g., bookmark.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235,    for a line indicator which can also be used as a page indicator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 352+ for an indicator
    (e.g., line guide) movably attached to a copy holder to indicate a portion
    of the copy supported thereon.


CLS 116/241
TXT Frequency tuner type:

    Devices under subclass 200 wherein the indicator conveys information as to
    a particular band or portion within a band of frequencies to show where a
    tuner is adjusted to.

    (1)     Note.  The tuner is usually a sign type, e.g., for television or
    dial type, e.g., for radios.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, appropriate subclasses for card,
    picture, or sign either stationary or which may be made to appear at
    windows or apertures.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 10+ for mechanical dial
    operators and see (3) Note of subclass 10 for the line between these
    classes.

    334,    Tuners, subclasses 86+ for a tuner with indicating means.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 45 for transformers and inductive
    reactors having a movable element and a position or extent of motion
    indicator.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 539+ for electrically
    actuated condition responsive indicating system including a radio.

    361,    Electricity: Electrical Systems, and Devices, subclass 300 for a
    capacitor having an indicating means.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 154.1+ for receivers with indication
    of the frequency or channel to which it is tuned.


CLS 116/242
TXT Plural scales and indexes:

    Devices under subclass 241 having more than one element each having a
    series of marks and/or numerical notations and more than one element having
    index structure wherein there is relative movement between the element and
    index structure to relate information.


CLS 116/243
TXT Indicia on movable web:

    Devices under subclass 241 having means to move the indicator, and the
    indicator is an element than can bend without breaking and has markings as
    signs that indicate information.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278,    for a flexible ribbon with indicia of general use and see search
    notes.


CLS 116/244
TXT Pipette type:

    Devices under subclass 241 wherein one or more transparent elongated
    structures, e.g., rods, fibers, or pipes, are used to transmit light rays
    for indicating information.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202,    for a visual light signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 502 and 541+ for
    illuminated exhibitors and signs using pipettes.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 815.4+, particularly
    subclasses 815.42+ for light piping used in electrically controlled visual
    signal indicators.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, appropriate subclasses for light transmitting
    rods, fibers, or pipes.


CLS 116/245
TXT Rotary scale or index:

    Devices under subclass 241 having an element with indicia on it which turns
    about an axis with respect to a stationary index, e.g., mark, pointer,
    etc., or an element which turns about an axis with respect to a stationary
    dial to point to information of the dial.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284+,   for rotary indicators in general.


CLS 116/246
TXT Projection type:

    Devices under subclass 245 in which an image of a selected portion of a
    tuner is projected onto a screen.

    (1)     Note.  The projected image can be either the scale or index element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200,    for indicator projection of general use.


CLS 116/247
TXT With color variations:

    Devices under subclass 246 wherein different hues or tints are used to
    indicate different positions of the tuner.


CLS 116/248
TXT Plural scales:

    Devices under subclass 245 having more than one dial each of which are
    rotatably mounted for independent operation.


CLS 116/249
TXT On concentric axes:

    Devices under subclass 248 wherein the dials turn about axes having a
    center in common or a common axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301,    for pointers that turn on a common axis.


CLS 116/250
TXT With illumination means:

    Devices under subclass 249 including artificial light means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251,    256, 257, 263, 286+, and 310, for indicators wherein indicia is
    made visible by a source of artificial light.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 23+ for artificial lighting of a scale or
    dial of general use.


CLS 116/251
TXT With illumination means:

    Devices under subclass 248 including artificial light means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250,    for illumination of an indicator and see search notes for other
    search areas.


CLS 116/252
TXT Drum structure:

    Devices under subclass 245 wherein the dial has a cylindrical shape and has
    indicia thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    299,    for a drum with indicia of general use.


CLS 116/253
TXT With illumination means:

    Devices under subclass 252 including artificial light means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250,    for illumination of an indicator and see search notes for other
    search areas.


CLS 116/254
TXT Single scale:

    Devices under subclass 245 wherein only one dial is used.


CLS 116/255
TXT With plural groups of indicia:

    Devices under subclass 254 wherein the dial has more than one set of
    recognizable information thereon.


CLS 116/256
TXT And illumination means:

    Devices under subclass 255 including artificial light means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250,    for illumination of an indicator and see search notes for other
    search areas.


CLS 116/257
TXT With illumination means:

    Devices under subclass 254 including artificial light means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250,    for illumination of an indicator and see search notes for other
    search areas.


CLS 116/258
TXT Dish-shaped scale:

    Devices under subclass 257 wherein the dial has a shallow concave or
    angular shape, e.g., plate shape.


CLS 116/259
TXT Rectilinear moving scale:

    Devices under subclass 241 wherein a dial is movable only in a straight
    line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281+,   for a rectilinear movable indicator.


CLS 116/260
TXT Hinged scale:

    Devices under subclass 241 wherein a dial is pivotally connected to its
    support structure.


CLS 116/261
TXT Rotary input to linear index movement:

    Devices under subclass 241 having means that turns about an axis to give
    rectilinear motion to an index element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282,    for a rectilinear movable indicator with rotary input.


CLS 116/262
TXT Draw cord type:

    Devices under subclass 261 wherein the index element is connected to a
    flexible element, e.g., chain, cable, string, etc.


CLS 116/263
TXT With illumination:

    Devices under subclass 241 including artificial light means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250,    for illumination of an indicator and see search notes for other
    search areas.


CLS 116/264
TXT Fluid flow:

    Devices under subclass 200 wherein the indicator is caused to move or is
    made visible by the motion or force of a liquid, gas, or vapor.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes indicators that are moved directly by
    the fluid or indirectly by some effect resulting from the fluid movement.

    (2)     Note.  The indicator does not have to be in the flow path.

    (3)     Note.  The indication of arrival of a fluid at a point in a flow
    path is in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    for fluid flow alarms.

    227,    for liquid level indicators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 170.01+ for a device which
    determines fluid flow direction, in particular subclass 170.05 for fluid
    flow direction determination utilizing a fluid actuated alignment means,
    and subclasses 861+ for a volume or rate of flow meter.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 662+, and see the notes thereto, for
    structures wherein a transparent panel is mounted in a wall.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 40 for dispensers with signal indicator; and
    subclass 159 for dispensers with transparent flow rate section.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclass 36 for conduits with material
    motion.


CLS 116/265
TXT At exterior of fluid-craft:

    Devices under subclass 264 wherein the indicator is moved by fluid flow
    along or from outside a craft which is kept buoyant by a liquid, gas, or
    vapor, e.g., aircraft, boat, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 170.05 for a weather vane or wind
    sock.


CLS 116/266
TXT Pressure:

    Devices under subclass 264 having means responsive to the force of the
    fluid to cause the indicator to move or to release an element to allow the
    indicator to move.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, Digest II for filter of
    the class type with indicators.

    55,     Gas Separation, subclass 274 for indicator with filters of the
    class type.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 146.2+ for tire inflation
    indicators.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclass 318 for a seal combined with a fluid pressure indicator,
    sampler, or inspection feature.


CLS 116/267
TXT With magnetic means:

    Devices under subclass 266 including a magnetic field to control the
    actuation of the indicator.

    (1)     Note.  The indicator may be a magnet which is moved by the fluid to
    give a signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204,    for a magnetically actuated indicator.


CLS 116/268
TXT Differential:

    Devices under subclass 266 wherein the indicator is responsive to fluid
    forces that are not the same and the fluid forces are acting on the
    indicator at all times.

    (1)     Note.  A fluid force that is applied to move an indicator in one
    direction and no fluid pressure to return it, or the same fluid pressure is
    directed to return the indicator in the opposite direction is not proper
    for this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  An indicator which senses the pressure drop across a filter
    which is an indication of the flow and resistance to flow through the
    filter is proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for fluid pressure variation with an alarm.

    269,    for plural fluid pressure inputs with a single pressure applied.


CLS 116/269
TXT Plural input with single readout:

    Devices under subclass 266 wherein the same fluid pressure is applied to
    different fluid openings of an indicator to cause the indicator to move in
    different directions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    268,    for different fluid pressures to cause an indicator to move.


CLS 116/270
TXT Flexible indicator:

    Devices under subclass 266 where the pressure is applied to a material that
    causes it to bend or expand to give an indication.


CLS 116/271
TXT Rotary indicator:

    Devices under subclass 266 wherein the pressure is applied to an element
    which causes the indicator to turn about a point or axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284+,   for a rotary indicator with mechanical means to move it.


CLS 116/272
TXT Rectilinear indicator:

    Devices under subclass 266 wherein the pressure is applied to an element
    which causes the indicator to move in a straight line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281+,   for a rectilinear indicator with mechanical means to move it.


CLS 116/273
TXT Movable means in flow path:

    Devices under subclass 264 wherein the indicator is moved by an element
    directly in the flow path.

    (1)     Note.  The flow of the fluid causes the indicator to move whereas
    in subclasses 266+ a force moves the indicator.

    (2)     Note.  The element in the flow path may be integral with the
    indicator or connected to the indicator by an element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 170.01+ for a device which
    determines fluid flow direction, in particular subclass 170.05 for fluid
    flow direction determination utilizing a fluid actuated alignment means,
    and subclasses 861+ for a volume or rate of flow meter.


CLS 116/274
TXT Rotary only:

    Devices under subclass 273 wherein the indicator turns about an axis in one
    direction only.


CLS 116/275
TXT Lever or cantilever:

    Devices under subclass 273 wherein either the indicator is part of or
    connected to the element and turns about a fulcrum or pivot, or the
    indicator is flexible.


CLS 116/276
TXT Sight glass:

    Devices under subclass 264 wherein the fluid may be directly viewed through
    a clear material.


CLS 116/277
TXT Valve position:

    Devices under subclass 200 wherein the indicator shows the location of a
    valve closure that can be adjusted with respect to the associated seat of
    the valve, e.g., in a closed, open, or intermediate position.

    (1)     Note.  When the valve is broadly recited, e.g., when there is an
    insufficient number of parts thereof to make a complete working valve,
    these patents are proper for Class 116; when a complete working valve is
    claimed, e.g., including a valve closure plus a valve seat or passage,
    etc., these patents are in Class 251.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 332 for valves carrying
    indicia to merely denote the substance to be dispensed through the valve.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 295 for indicators combined with a
    damper device.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, for indicators combined with a complete
    valve.


CLS 116/278
TXT Flexible ribbon, band, or link with indicia:

    Devices under subclass 200 having means to move the indicator, wherein the
    indicator is part of or mounted on an element that can bend without
    breaking and has markings, colors, or signs that indicate information.

    (1)     Note.  An index, e.g., single mark, pointer, etc., which is mounted
    on or part of a flexible band, string, cord, etc. without indicia is not
    proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243,    for a movable web for a frequency tuner.

    322,    for a flexible operator movable indicator.


CLS 116/279
TXT Push-button type:

    Devices under subclass 200 wherein an indicator is caused to appear either
    within or adjacent to a button or knob that is linearly moved from a normal
    position to a depressed or activated position or vice versa.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 483 for push-button elements
    of the class type and indicators.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 308+ and 333
    for indicator with elements of the class type.

    235,    Registers, subclass 145 for keyboard with an indicator.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 465.1 for manual operators or luminous
    attachment for self-luminous device.

    334,    Tuners, subclasses 86+ for push-button tuners with indicators.


CLS 116/280
TXT Diverse:

    Devices under subclass 200 having more than one type of indicator within a
    support structure.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass will take a rotary pointer and/or rotary disk
    and/or rectilinear indicator, etc., where any two do not cooperate to form
    a single readout.  Also included are operator movable indicator and
    actuated indicator.

    (2)     Note.  Plural indicators of the same type with a single readout or
    plural readouts will be found in the appropriate subclasses below, e.g.,
    plural pointers, disks, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300,    for plural rotary actuated indicators.

    316,    for plural rotary operator movable    indicators.


CLS 116/281
TXT Rectilinear indicator with actuating means: Devices under subclass 200
    wherein the indicator is restricted to move in a straight path and means
    for applying a mechanical force to cause the indicator to move in said
    straight path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224     and 225, for a game-type indicator movable in a rectilinear path.

    226,    for a rectilinear indicator to show the position of an elevator.

    321,    for an indicator moved by an operator in a straight path.


CLS 116/282
TXT With rotary input means:

    Devices under subclass 281 including means that rotates about an axis and
    applies a force to the indicator to cause it to move in a straight path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261,    for rotary input to linear index movement of a tuner.


CLS 116/283
TXT With rectilinear input means:

    Devices under subclass 281 including means that moves in a straight line
    and applies a force to the indicator to cause it to move in a straight line.


CLS 116/284
TXT Rotary indicator with actuating means:

    Devices under subclass 200 having means to apply a mechanical force to the
    indicator to cause it to turn about an axis so as to indicate information.

    (1)     Note.  The indicator is a scale, pointer, index, dial, or any means
    information can be obtained from.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226,    for a rotary indicator to show position of an elevator.

    309,    for a rotary indicator moved directly by an operator.

    328+,   for a pointer mounted for movement.

    334+,   for a scale mounted for movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclasses 45+ for a weigher with a signal means.


CLS 116/285
TXT With rectilinear input means:

    Devices under subclass 284 including means that moves in alternate
    directions in a straight line to cause the indicator to rotate.


CLS 116/286
TXT With illumination means:

    Devices under subclass 284 including artificial light means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250,    for illumination means for a tuner and see search notes for other
    search areas.


CLS 116/287
TXT Edge:

    Devices under subclass 286 wherein rays of light are picked up at an end
    part of a light modifying means and are conducted or transmitted internally
    of said light modifying means in a direction generally transverse to a
    scale, dial, pointer, etc.

    (1)     Note.  If the rays of light are passed straight through the scale
    dial, pointer, etc., the patents are placed in subclass 286.


CLS 116/288
TXT Pointer:

    Devices under subclass 287 wherein the light rays are conducted internally
    of an elongated element that turns about a point or axis.


CLS 116/289
TXT With means to change rate of movement of pointer:

    Devices under subclass 284 including an elongated element and means to
    cause the element to turn at different speeds.


CLS 116/290
TXT Scale and pointer move during indication:

    Devices under subclass 284 wherein an elongated element and an element with
    indicia on it both change position at the same time so that information is
    indicated from them as a single readout.


CLS 116/291
TXT Including means to adjust index position (e.g., zeroing, etc.):

    Devices under subclass 284 having means to align an elongated element with
    an element having indicia on it so that when the elongated element moves
    the correct information can be read from them as a single readout.


CLS 116/292
TXT Including means to adjust scale position:

    Devices under subclass 284 having means to align an element with indicia on
    it with respect to a mark, pointer, etc., so that correct information can
    be read when there is relative movement between them as a single readout.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are means to adjust one scale to another scale
    or a scale to a point, mark, pointer, etc.


CLS 116/293
TXT Plural pointers, one of which moves the other (e.g., maximum-minimum, etc.):

    Devices under subclass 284 having more than one elongated element each
    movable about an axis or point and means on one of the elements to cause
    the other element to move.

    (1)     Note.  The pointer moved by another pointer usually will stay at
    the position it is moved to until it is released or reset.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    296,    for means to indicate the maximum and minimum distance an indicator
    should move.


CLS 116/294
TXT Including means to lock indicator in position: Devices under subclass 284
    having means to hold the indicator from movement.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the means to lock the indicator is for preventing
    damage or misalignment of indicator during movement, inadvertent rotation
    caused by vibration, or from manipulation by an operator.


CLS 116/295
TXT Scale:

    Devices under subclass 294 wherein an element with indicia on it is held
    from movement.


CLS 116/296
TXT Including maximum and minimum indicating means:

    Devices under subclass 284 having means to show or point out the lower
    limit and the upper limit of a scale.

    (1)     Note.  The means to indicate the maximum and minimum usually do not
    stop the movable indicator from moving but are markings, adjustable index,
    etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    293,    for a pointer moved to show the maximum distance another pointer
    has moved.


CLS 116/297
TXT Including stop means for pointer:

    Devices under subclass 284 having means to prevent an elongated element
    from moving past a certain point.


CLS 116/298
TXT Disk with indicia:

    Devices under subclass 284 having a flat-shaped element that turns about an
    axis through its center and has markings, signs, or colored areas that
    indicate information.

    (1)     Note.  The disk is usually called a dial and a reading is taken
    directly off it.


CLS 116/299
TXT Drum with indicia:

    Devices under subclass 284 having a cylindrical-shaped element that turns
    about an axis through its center and has printed marking, signs, or colored
    areas that indicate information.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252,    for drum indicator for a tuner.


CLS 116/300
TXT Plural indicators:

    Devices under subclass 284 having more than one indicator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280,    for different types of indicators mounted in a single structure.


CLS 116/301
TXT Coaxial pointers:

    Devices under subclass 300 having more than one elongated element that
    turns about a common axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249,    for indicators that turn on concentric axes.


CLS 116/302
TXT Including mask means:

    Devices under subclass 284 having means to cover a portion of a scale.

    (1)     Note.  The mask can act as an index, e.g., pointer, if as it moves
    over a scale the leading edge is used to indicate information.


CLS 116/303
TXT Pivoted:

    Devices under subclass 284 wherein the indicator rotates about a fixed axis
    less than 360o.


CLS 116/304
TXT With scale reading aid:

    Devices under subclass 284 having means to help see or read the indicator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    436+ for scale or indicia reading in general.


CLS 116/305
TXT Specified housing structure:

    Devices under subclass 284 having a particularly described structure to
    hold the indicator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 431 for instrument casing.


CLS 116/306
TXT Operator movable:

    Devices under subclass 200 wherein the indicator is moved to its indicating
    position directly by a living being so that information can be obtained.

    (1)     Note.  There is no mechanical advantage in this or indented
    subclasses, e.g., gears, linkage, drive belts, etc., a knob or handle to
    help turn the indicator is proper for this area.

    (2)     Note.  An index or scale structure, per se, are placed lower in the
    schedule.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222+,   for game type operator movable indicator.

    281+,   for rectilinear actuated indicator.

    284+,   for rotary actuated indicator.

    327+,   for index structure, per se.

    334+,   for scale structure, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 446+ for hand-set or
    changeable signs.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, for hand set indicators which serve an
    educational purpose.


CLS 116/307
TXT With diverse art device:

    Devices under subclass 306 wherein the indicator is combined with other
    devices or structure having an added purpose or independent utility other
    than to perfect the indicator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 305+, for devices that
    indicate spool rotation in fishing reels.


CLS 116/308
TXT Time scale:

    Devices under subclass 306 wherein the information shown relates to hour,
    day, week, year, etc.


CLS 116/309
TXT Rotary indicator:

    Devices under subclass 306 wherein the indicator turns about an axis or
    point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223+,   for a rotary indicator of the game type.


CLS 116/310
TXT Illuminated scale:

    Devices under subclass 309 including artificial light means whereby indicia
    on an element is made visible.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250,    for illumination means of a tuner and see search notes for other
    search areas.


CLS 116/311
TXT Including means to restrain movement:

    Devices under subclass 309 having means to hold the indicator in a position
    or to limit the indicator to a range of position.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass must have positive structure to restrain
    motion as against inherent friction between the rotary indicator and
    contiguous support structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324,    for a sliding indicator with means to restrain movement.


CLS 116/312
TXT By resilient means:

    Devices under subclass 311 wherein the restraining means is an element
    which tends to return to its original form after it has been deformed to
    bias the indicator.

    (1)     Note.  The resilient element may bias another element which is in
    contact with the indicator.


CLS 116/313
TXT Pivoted indicator:

    Devices under subclass 312 wherein the indicator turns about an axis or
    point less than 3600.


CLS 116/314
TXT Helical spring type:

    Devices under subclass 312 wherein the resilient means has the shape of a
    spiral moving around a cone, cylinder, etc.


CLS 116/315
TXT By a protrusion in notch, slot, or gap:

    Devices under subclass 311 wherein the restraining means is a projection
    adapted to be confined in an indentation, a narrow elongated aperture, or a
    space between other projections.


CLS 116/316
TXT Plural:

    Devices under subclass 309 having more than one rotary indicator.


CLS 116/317
TXT Indicia on contoured surface:

    Devices under subclass 316 wherein markings, signs, or colored areas are
    displayed on a continuously bending form of the indicator body, e.g., a
    cylindrical, conical, etc., surface.


CLS 116/318
TXT Indicia on flat surface of disk:

    Devices under subclass 316 wherein markings signs, or color areas are
    displayed on a planar area of the indicator body.


CLS 116/319
TXT Tab, arm, sector, or pointer:

    Devices under subclass 309 wherein the rotary indicator is elongate,
    oblong, or has an axis of rotation at its periphery.


CLS 116/320
TXT With scale:

    Devices under subclass 319 including indicia on a stationary element with
    respect to the rotatable tab, arm, etc.


CLS 116/321
TXT Sliding indicator:

    Devices under subclass 306 wherein the indicator moves along a surface and
    is in constant frictional contact with the surface.


CLS 116/322
TXT Flexible type:

    Devices under subclass 321 wherein the indicator is formed of pliant
    material or a portion is pliant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278,    for a flexible indicator with indicia on it.


CLS 116/323
TXT With guide:

    Devices under subclass 321 including means to confine and direct motion of
    the indicator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225,    for a game indicator with guide means.


CLS 116/324
TXT And means to restrain movement:

    Devices under subclass 323 including means to hold the indicator to a
    position or to limit the indicator to a range of position.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass must have positive structure to restrain
    motion as against inherent friction between guide and indicator.


CLS 116/325
TXT Peg type:

    Devices under subclass 306 wherein the indicator has an elongated portion
    that enters a surface of an element or the surface of the element has an
    elongated portion that enters the indicator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222,    for a peg used as a game indicator.


CLS 116/326
TXT Piercing:

    Devices under subclass 325 wherein the elongated portion is sharp and
    punctures the surface of the element or the indicator.


CLS 116/327
TXT Index structure:

    Devices under subclass 200 having means which only points out but does not
    give information by itself.

    (1)     Note.  The index structure is used with a scale to point to indicia
    on the scale.

    (2)     Note.  A movable pointer that is not used with a scale, etc., will
    be found in the above appropriate subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  Structure to support the index, e.g., for movement,
    stationary, is proper for this and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 463.1 for self-luminous index means.


CLS 116/328
TXT Pointer type:

    Devices under subclass 327 wherein the index is an elongated element which
    turns about an axis when in use.


CLS 116/329
TXT Plural:

    Devices under subclass 328 having more than one separate pointer.


CLS 116/330
TXT With balance means:

    Devices under subclass 328 including means to cause the pointer when
    mounted to be in a state of equilibrium.

    (1)     Note.  Weights are added or adjusted to a point to distribute the
    overall weight of the point equally about the axis it turns on.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333,    for balance means, per se.


CLS 116/331
TXT With angular adjusting means:

    Devices under subclass 328 including means operatively connected to a
    pointer for changing the angle of said pointer with respect to a shaft
    which carries said pointer so as to initially situate said pointer at such
    a position that during the operation of an instrument a correct reading can
    be achieved.


CLS 116/332
TXT Specified shape:

    Devices under subclass 328 wherein the pointer has a particular
    configuration, structure, material, etc.


CLS 116/333
TXT Balance means:

    Devices under subclass 200 which only cause a pointer to be in a state of
    equilibrium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    330,    for a pointer and balance means.


CLS 116/334
TXT Scale structure:

    Devices under subclass 200 having means with a series of marks, numerical
    notations, and/or areas of color, but does not give information by itself.

    (1)     Note.  The scale structure is used with index structure to point
    out information.

    (2)     Note.  A movable scale that is not used with a pointer will be
    found in the above appropriate subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 463.1 for self-luminous scale.


CLS 116/335
TXT Color:

    Devices under subclass 334 wherein different hues or tints are used to
    indicate different positions of the tuner.

    (1)     Note.  Color and indicia can be on the same scale.


CLS 116/336
TXT Frequency tuner type:

    Devices under subclass 334 wherein the scale conveys information as to a
    particular band.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241+,   for frequency tuner to show where the tuner is adjusted to.


CLS 116/337
TXT Drum type:

    Devices under subclass 334 wherein the scale support is a
    cylindrical-shaped element.


CLS 117/
TTL SINGLE-CRYSTAL, ORIENTED- CRYSTAL, AND EPITAXY  GROWTH PROCESSES;
    NON-COATING APPARATUS  THEREFOR

CLS 117/
TXT -o-                     TABLE OF CONTENTS                     -o-

    I.      STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    A.      GENERAL STATEMENT

    B.      GUIDE TO USING THIS CLASS DEFINITION

    C.      NOTES APPLICABLE TO THIS ENTIRE CLASS

    D.      NOTES APPLICABLE ONLY TO PROCESSES OF THIS CLASS

    E.      NOTES APPLICABLE ONLY TO APPARATUS OF THIS CLASS

    II.     GLOSSARY, ABBREVIATIONS, AND ACRONYMS

    III.    CLASSIFICATION LINES WITH OTHER CLASSES

    A.      LINES WITH PROCESS CLASSES

    B.      SELECTED NOTES TO ARTICLE, MATERIAL, COMPOSITION, DEVICE, AND
    PRODUCT CLASSES

    C.      LINES WITH APPARATUS CLASSES

    IV.     INDEXES TO CLASS REFERENCES

    A.      INDEX TO REFERENCES TO OTHER CLASSES APPEARING IN CLASS 117

    B.      INDEX TO REFERENCES TO CLASS 117 APPEARING IN OTHER CLASSES

    V.      SUBCLASS DEFINITIONS

    -o-                         CONTENTS                          -o-

    I.      STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    A.      GENERAL STATEMENT

    (1)     Note.  Terms having an asterisk (*) are defined in section II,
    GLOSSARY, ABBREVIATIONS, AND ACRONYMS.

    This is the generic class for:

    (a)     processes consisting of the single or repeated unit operation of
    forming a single-crystal* of any type of material, including inorganic or
    organic;

    (b)     such processes combined with perfecting operations; and

    (c)     apparatus for conducting non-coating processes of this class.

    However, the following classes specifically provide for the unit operation
    of single-crystal* growth:

    (i)     Class 505;

    (ii)    Class 419;

    (iii)   Class 204; and

    (iv)    Class 164, subclass 122.2;

    and the following classes specifically provide for apparatus for
    single-crystal* growth:

    (i)     Class 118;

    (ii)    Class 204; and

    (iii)   Class 422.

    B.      GUIDE TO USING THIS CLASS DEFINITION

            The statements in section III, CLASSIFICATION LINES WITH OTHER
    CLASSES, set forth the precise and controlling class lines.

            Unless otherwise indicated, placement according to these class
    lines is subject to the hierarchical and comprehensive rules of placement.

            Class 117 is most broadly organized according to processes and
    apparatus.  Further arrangement is premised on the physical state of the
    immediate-precursor* (the precursor* material immediately adjacent to the
    growing single-crystal*).

            The descending order of arrangement of the physical state of the
    immediate-precursor* is:  solid or gel state; liquid or supercritical
    state; vapor or gaseous state.  Care must be exercised to correctly
    identify the physical state of the immediate-precursor* in order to obtain
    correct placement.

            For example, vapor phase deposition of a non-single-crystal*
    material followed by a single-crystal* forming step from that vapor
    deposited material would be placed as follows:  into a solid state
    precursor* subclass if that formation step does not change the solid state
    of the material (such as by melting or liquefying it); into a liquid state
    precursor* subclass if the material is liquified in the formation step and
    the single-crystal* is grown from the liquid; into a vapor state precursor*
    subclass if during the single-crystal* formation step the material is
    evaporated or sublimed and redeposited to form a single-crystal*.

            This class also provides an extensive Cross-Reference Art
    Collection schedule.  A portion of this is loosely based upon the European
    Patent Office-modified IPC classification.  However, where there are
    indents, the U.S. hierarchical practice of placement in the first
    appropriate subclass among corresponding indents is followed.  Coextensive
    use of cross-referencing has been used so that this alternative schedule
    may provide an acceptable substitute search in certain situations.
    However, it is important to note that where the standard U.S. subclasses
    have substantially complete overlap within a Cross-Reference Art Collection
    subclass, cross-referencing from that U.S. subclass into the
    Cross-Reference Art Collection subclass has not been done, and a note
    appears in each of those subclasses indicating that cross-referencing is
    unnecessarily duplicative and that a complete search of the Cross-Reference
    Art Collection concept would have to include the noted U.S. subclass.  For
    example, a U.S. patent cross-referenced into subclass 75 would not be
    placed into the cross-reference art collection 921, as the notes therein
    indicate.

    C.      NOTES APPLICABLE TO THIS ENTIRE CLASS

    (1)     Note.  Definition of Single-Crystal*.

            The definition of single-crystal* for this class is set forth below
    in section II, GLOSSARY, ABBREVIATIONS, AND ACRONYMS.

            Twins*, oriented-crystals*, and superlattices* are included in this
    class because they are similar or identical to the more conventionally
    categorized epitaxy* and single-crystals*.  Further, such materials are
    frequently used as though they are single-crystals*.  The use of the term
    single-crystal* throughout this class will be taken to encompass twin*,
    superlattice*, epitaxy*, oriented-crystal*, or single-crystal*.

            Both twins* and superlattices* are considered to be composed of
    layers of single-crystals* and therefore are classified where layered
    single-crystals* are provided for in the schedule.

    (2)     Note.  Keywords.

            References directed to the following are deemed proper for Class
    117 unless the disclosure reveals that the product is not single-crystal*:

            crystal or seed pulling;
            Verneuil method;
            whisker growth;
            superlattice*;
            twin*;
            oriented-crystal*;
            epitaxy*; or
            epitaxial* deposition or growth.

    (3)     Note.  Indicative Terminology.

            The following criteria are intended to assist in the determination
    of whether placement is proper in this class.

            (a)     Positive indications include:

            the use of one or more of the terms monolithic crystal, single
    crystal, isotropic crystal, monocrystal, or macro-crystal;

            method or apparatus which produces a true single crystal; i.e.,
    only one crystal;

            method or apparatus which produces multiple single-crystals*
    simultaneously by virtue of multiple, purposeful seed crystals; and

            the reference clearly focuses on the utility of a single-crystal*
    (e.g., optical or electrical device comprising one crystal, or a gemstone).

            Class 117 is not the proper place for uncontrolled crystallization.
     When processing conditions may be controlled with an intent to encourage
    growth of a larger size crystal, this does not rise to the level of
    single-crystal* growth or apparatus for Class 117 if recovery involves
    merely selecting product crystals which are merely fortuitously large
    enough from the other product crystals.  The following may be considered as
    indicating (but necessarily determining) that placement does not belong in
    Class 117.

            (b)     Negative indications include:

            spontaneously nucleated crystallization; i.e., without seed crystal;

            crystallization which results in an indefinite number of crystals
    and/or in an indefinite distribution of crystal sizes;

            crystallization for the stated purpose of recovery and/or
    purification of the material, particularly when an intended use doesn't
    depend upon a single-crystal* property; e.g., crystallization of salt or
    sugar to achieve purification or recovery;

            the use of the term bulk crystals or polycrystalline; and

            the reference focuses on bulk uses; e.g., abrasives.

            NB:  The term bulk crystal is used in some technologies to mean
    single-crystal* while the term bulk crystals is used in some technologies
    to mean numerous purified crystals, usually from material recovery
    operations.

    (4)     Note.  Perfecting Operations Combined with Growth.

            This class provides for single-crystal* growth and apparatus
    combined with perfecting operations and means, unless such combination is
    specifically provided for elsewhere.

            Perfecting operations are as defined herein or are operations which
    are merely broadly or nominally claimed so as not to be a basis for
    classification in an art class.

            Special class lines affecting placement of single-crystal* growth
    combined with perfecting steps exist with the metallurgy arts (Class 148
    and Class 164), and with the semiconductor art of Class 438, as noted
    herein below.  As a result of these special class lines, certain operations
    combined with single-crystal* growing which are otherwise perfecting for
    this class are provided for and placed outside of Class 117 (i.e., if the
    single-crystal* is a non-semiconductor metal* or is a Class 438-type
    semiconductor).

            Determination of whether a step or operation is perfecting focuses
    on its contribution to the forming of the single-crystal* product and on
    the single-crystal* product itself.  Operations are categorized hereinbelow
    as (a) simultaneous, (b) prior, or (c) subsequent.

            (a)     Simultaneous.

            Simultaneous operations are those performed on the growing
    single-crystal*.  All simultaneous operations performed upon the growing
    single-crystal* are considered perfecting and hence processes including
    simultaneous operations are located in this class.  For example:  doping
    the growing crystal while growing; plasma-enhanced CVD*; volatile
    constituent overpressure; growing while shaping (e.g., confined in a
    recess); etc.

            However, Class 164 provides for processes and apparatus forming a
    non-semiconductor metal* single crystal in a mold.

            (b)     Prior.

            Prior operations which are preparatory to the growth operation are
    perfecting.  Preparatory operations may be enhancing of or necessary to the
    growth.

            Examples of perfecting prior steps are:  pretreatment or
    manipulation of a substrate* or seed* such as cleaning, polishing, shaping,
    etching, ablating,  doping, diffusing, gettering, ion implanting, aligning,
    or positioning; preparation or manipulation of a precursor* such as (a)
    mixing together components of a liquid, or (b) deposition of other than
    single-crystal* material which is then subsequently grown to
    single-crystal* (e.g., amorphous material deposited) or subsequently
    recrystallized to single-crystal* (e.g., polycrystalline material
    deposited), or (c) working, shaping, and/or heat treating a solid
    precursor* which is subsequently grown to single-crystal* (e.g., in the
    solid phase); preparation, pretreatment, or manipulation of a base* if such
    is necessary to successful growth (e.g., to create  the necessary
    substrate* for epitaxy*); pretreating a substrate* or seed* by preparing a
    non-seeding mask (e.g., patterning) directly on a substrate* or seed* (this
    may include several steps, such as coating followed by selective etching);
    pretreating a substrate* or seed* by etching a region thereof (e.g., making
    a groove); combinations of perfecting steps.

            Examples of claimed prior steps proper for Class 438 when combined
    with single-crystal* growth are:  nonuniform material removal of a
    substrate* or base* in order to impart Class 438-type semiconductor device
    structure or region (i.e., other than to uniformly clean or ``polish" the
    substrate) to a subsequently formed single-crystal* (e.g., etching or
    ablating to form a recess, groove, rib, mesa, ridge, strip, stripe,
    terrace, trench, trough, etc., see U.S. Patent No. 4,383,883), except that
    removal of non-seed material (e.g., a mask) in order to expose a seed*
    material (i.e., to expose a substrate*) followed by material deposition and
    single-crystal* growth seeded by the exposed substrate* is placed in Class
    117 (e.g., epitaxial* layer overgrowth); acting to alter the composition of
    a substrate* or a non-seed material so as to provide a Class 438-type
    semiconductor device structure or region, even if performed uniformly or
    even if such is also necessary to prepare the substrate* to achieve the
    subsequent crystal growth (e.g., doping by ion implanting, diffusing or
    fusing, gettering); broad or nominal claimed step of forming a Class
    438-type semiconductor device region or structure in a substrate*.  Note,
    repeatedly growing single-crystal* on single-crystal* is a Class 117
    process.

            (c)     Subsequent.

            Subsequent operations are perfecting usually only if they do not
    modify the physical shape or the single-crystallinity of the grown
    single-crystal*.

            Growth combined with subsequent shaping operations are usually
    beyond perfecting and are usually proper for classes providing for
    combination operations such as Class 29, Class 438, Class 264, and Class
    156.

            Subsequent steps which are considered perfecting are typically
    recovery steps or the operation recited merely broadly or nominally so as
    not to afford a basis of classification in an art class.  In addition, heat
    treatment and impurity content modifying (e.g., doping or implanting or
    diffusing or gettering) are designated perfecting operations in this class.

            Examples of perfecting subsequent operations are:  cleaning;
    removing ``flashing" (the unintentional or extraneous material); washing;
    drying; removing a substrate* or a base*; removing a mask; separating from
    a substrate* or a base*; removing from a reaction vessel; uniformly etching
    or grinding (e.g., polishing or cleaning); impurity content modifying
    (e.g., doping, implanting, diffusing, gettering); and heat treating (e.g.,
    annealing, tempering).

            Examples of subsequent operations which are beyond perfecting when
    combined with single crystal growth are:  nonuniform material removal (such
    as etching or ablating) to provide structure in the single-crystal* (e.g.,
    groove, rib, mesa, ridge, strip, stripe, terrace, recess, trench, trough);
    coating with other than single-crystal* material; bombardment to produce an
    induced nuclear reaction or transmutation (see Class 376, subclasses 156+).

            Examples of claimed subsequent perfecting operations proper for
    Class 438 when acting upon or forming a Class 438-type semiconductor device
    and when combined with single-crystal* growth are:  nonuniform material
    removal of a substrate or non-seed base in order to impact structure to a
    previously formed single crystal component of the semiconductor substrate,
    such structure intended to permit the utilization of the electrical
    characteristics of the semiconductive regions thereof (e.g., etching or
    ablating to form a recess, groove, rib, mesa, ridge, strip, stripe,
    terrace, trench, trough, see U.S. Patent No. 4,383,883); composition
    modifying, whether uniformly or otherwise (e.g., doping, gettering); heat
    treatment (except merely a specified cooling schedule, which is proper for
    Class 117, subclass 3); and a broad or nominally recited step of forming a
    Class 438-type semiconductor electrical device or device structure or
    device region.

            Class 148 provides for single-crystal* growing when combined with a
    subsequent heat treatment (which herein includes controlled cooling) step
    when the purpose of the heat treatment (or controlled cooling) is to modify
    the internal physical structure or chemical property of a metal, alloy, or
    intermetallic material.  Examples of claimed sebsequent operations proper
    for Class 148 even when combined with single-crystal* growth are
    solutionizing, homogenizing, and precipitation hardening.

    (5)     Note.  Chemical and Physical Reactions.

            Class 117 provides for single-crystal* growth and apparatus without
    regard to whether such growth and apparatus involves a chemical reaction*
    or a physical reaction or any combination thereof.

    (6)     Note.  Zone Melting (e.g., ZMR*).

            Processes and apparatus directed to moving zone melting or zone
    melt refining or zone leveling are assumed not to result in a
    single-crystal*, absent a recitation that a single-crystal* is formed.

            However, where it is clear by disclosure that the usefulness of the
    intended product of the claimed process or apparatus relies upon a
    single-crystal* property (e.g., semiconductor for electronic devices), then
    it is appropriate to infer that the product is a single-crystal* even in
    the absence of an explicit statement.

    (7)     Note.  Single-Crystal* Matrix Materials; Non-Homogeneous,
    Non-Isotropic, or Impure Single-Crystals*.

            Class 117 takes processes and apparatus for  making a
    single-crystal* having an impurity or foreign component therein so long as
    the single-crystal* forms a continuous matrix.

            Examples of materials found within single-crystals* are:  (a)
    electronic property affecting impurity (e.g., semiconductor  dopant*); (b)
    optical property affecting component (e.g., solid needle crystals of
    titanium (IV) oxide within beryl matrix); and (c) a processing remnant such
    as a processing aide (e.g., graphite string used in string-stabilized web
    crystal).

    (8)     Note.  Treatment of Single-Crystals*.

            Single-crystal* treatment, not combined with a step of growing a
    single-crystal*, is not provided for in Class 117.

            Per se doping is proper for (a) Class 427 or (b) either Class 252
    or Class 501 if a nonsignificant coating step makes a composition or (c)
    Class 438, if therein provided for.

            Per se heat treatment of Class 438-type semiconductor material,
    including single-crystal* material, is provided for in Class 438.
    (However, note that application of heat to a polycrystalline or amorphous
    material to grow a single-crystal* is proper for Class 117.)

            Per se heat treatment of non-semiconductor metal* to modify or
    maintain the internal physical structure (e.g., microstructure) or chemical
    properties of non-semiconductor metal* is proper for Class 148.  Note,
    however, that solid phase single-crystal* growing (i.e., heat treatment to
    recrystallize) of all materials, including the non-semiconductor metals*,
    is proper for Class 117.

            Per se heat treatment of non-semiconductor, non-metal*, preformed,
    shaped, or solid article for the purpose of modifying or controlling the
    chemical or physical properties or characteristics of the article is proper
    for Class 264, subclasses 345+.

    D.      NOTES APPLICABLE ONLY TO PROCESSES OF THIS CLASS

    (1)     Note.  Variously Classified Non-Coating Processes.

            A reference directed to process(es) which forms a single-crystal*
    species and which forms any one or combination of the species of an
    amorphous material or a polycrystalline material or multiple
    (non-single-crystal*) crystals (a) is proper for placement of the original
    where the most comprehensive embodiment is proper and (b) where there are
    equally comprehensive claims, is proper for placement of the original in
    Class 117, if single-crystal* embodiment is in any claim, singly or listed,
    or if only generic claims are presented and single-crystal* embodiment is
    disclosed.

    (2)     Note.  Variously Classified Coating Operations.

            A reference directed to coating process(es) which forms a
    single-crystal* coating species and which forms either or both of the
    species of an amorphous coating or a polycrystalline coating (a) is proper
    for placement of the original where the most comprehensive embodiment is
    proper and (b) where there are equally comprehensive claims, is classified
    using a genus-species rule as follows.  A reference with coating
    process(es) which forms a single-crystal* coating as the solely claimed or
    disclosed species is proper for placement of the original in Class 117.  A
    reference with generic claim(s) and plural claimed species or plural
    disclosed species is proper for placement of the original to Class 427 or
    Class 438, as appropriate.

    E.      NOTES APPLICABLE ONLY TO APPARATUS OF THIS CLASS

    (1)     Note.  Coating Versus Non-Coating Apparatus.

            Single-crystal* growth requires layering deposition of molecule
    upon molecule.  However, in the case of apparatus for single-crystal*
    growth, a distinction is made between that used for a method of coating and
    that used for a method of non-coating.

            Where the grown material is intended to mimic the shape of the
    substrate* or base*, then the grown material is a coating (often the
    substrate* or base* remains as a significant or integral part of the
    product in use), and the apparatus effective therefor is classified in
    Class 118, Class 204, or Class 422.  On the other hand, when the material
    deposition occurs so as to produce a product substantially independent of
    or far removed of the initial substrate* or base*, then the process is
    non-coating single-crystal* growth (often the substrate* or base* is not
    significant to or an integral part of the product in use), and the
    apparatus effective therefor is classified in Class 117.

            Generally, Class 118 takes the apparatus for epitaxial*
    single-crystal* growth, while Class 117 takes most other single-crystal*
    growing apparatus.

    (2)     Note.  Subcombination Apparatus.

            Subcombinations having specific applications are placed with that
    specific application unless there is an art class providing for it.

    (3)     Note.  Apparatus With Multiple Uses.

            A reference having equally comprehensive claims to apparatus for
    multiple uses, or multiply disclosed uses and only generic claims (for
    example for making single-crystal* material or for making polycrystal
    material), is properly placed in Class 117 for the original and is
    cross-referenced to the other appropriate apparatus class for the other
    embodiments.

    II.     GLOSSARY, ABBREVIATIONS, AND ACRONYMS

    AMORPHOUS
    Noncrystalline; having no molecular lattice structure; e.g., glass, liquid.

    BASE
    The surface upon which a coating is formed, except where a surface has been
    previously coated and a second coating is applied, in which case the
    initial surface is the base.  Contrast with substrate*.

    BERYL
    Beryllium aluminum silicate; Be3Al2Si6O18; 3BeO.Al2O3.6SiO2; emerald;
    aquamarine.  Usually green.

    BOULE
    (From French; ball) A lump of material.  In this class the term applies to
    the raw, single-crystal* product.

    CBE
    Chemical Beam Epitaxy*.

    CHALCEDONY
    Microcrystalline form of quartz; usually milky or grayish in color.

    CHEMICAL REACTION
    For purposes of Class 117, chemical reaction is given a broad meaning.  The
    following are included:  metathesis; changing the water of hydration;
    forming intermetallic compounds from constituent elements or from alloys;
    forming compound semiconductor material from constituent elements; forming
    ions (ionization) or ionized plasma.  Not included are:  dissolution of a
    compound and solidification (e.g. crystallization) of the same compound; a
    change of phase (e.g., amorphous to single-crystal*); change of crystal
    phase or form (e.g., face centered cubic to body centered cubic).

    CHRYSOBERYL
    Beryllium aluminate; BeO.Al2O3; cat's eye; alexandrite; optionally with up
    to about 10 wt% chromium oxide and titanium oxide.

    CORUNDUM
    Natural aluminum oxide; Al2O3; sometimes with intended small amounts of
    cobalt (green), chromium (red; i.e., ruby), iron (yellow), magnesium, or
    silica; synthetic emery.

    CRUCIBLE
    A vessel for containing a molten material.  The crucible may be of the same
    material as the molten material and may ultimately become molten.

    CRYPTOCRYSTALLINE
    Microscopic crystalline structure, indistinguishable to the naked eye.

    CRYSTAL BOUNDARY
    The interface between a crystal and its surroundings; e.g., another
    crystal, air.

    CSL
    Coherent Superlattice.

    CTSL
    Coherent Tilted Superlattice.

    CVD
    Chemical Vapor Deposition.  CVD may be employed to produce single-crystal*,
    polycrystal, or amorphous material.  See also MOCVD.

    CZ
    Abbreviation for Czochralski.  J. Czochralski was the Polish inventor of
    the basic single crystal pulling method (1918) bearing his name.

    DIASPORE
    Al2O3.H2O; a natural hydrous aluminum oxide; HAlO2.

    DOPANT
    A desired material intentionally present in an amount insufficient to
    satisfy the lattice unit cell, which may be present interstitially or by
    occupying crystal lattice positions substitutionally.

    DOPING
    The process of introducing a dopant* into a material.

    EDFFG
    Edge-Defined Film-Fed Growth.  Also abbreviated as EDFG and EFG.

    EPITAXY
    Formation of a single-crystal* on a substrate* (which acts as a seed*) or
    the product of such a process.  Usually, the formed crystal bears a
    definite crystallographic relationship to the substrate*.  Typically, the
    term applies to coating or layer formation when the width and length are
    substantially larger than the height and when the substrate* remains as a
    significant or integral part of the product in use.

    FERRITE SPINELS
    MFe2O4, where M = divalent metal (or mixtures thereof) and having the cubic
    lattice structure.

    FET
    Field Effect Transistor.

    GARNET, SYNTHETIC
    Term applied to crystals having the same complicated cubic structure as
    mineral garnets or beryl, but usually without the silicon; e.g.,
    yttrium-iron, Y3Fe5O12.  Other variations include substituting part of the
    yttrium and/or iron with valence-equivalent metals.

    GETTERING
    A process or operation that reduces or removes impurities or defects from a
    region either by complete removal (e.g., volatilization) or by transporting
    them to another region.

    GGG
    Gadolinium Gallium Garnet.  Composite oxide compound Gd3Ga5O12.  Useful as
    substrate in magnetic bubble domain memory and as man-made gemstones.

    IMMEDIATE-PRECURSOR
    The precursor immediately next to the growing single-crystal* and from
    which the single-crystal* forms or grows.  Contrast with precursor*.

    JUNCTION, SEMICONDUCTOR
    The region of transition between semiconduction regions of different
    electrical properties, usually between p-type and n-type materials, and
    usually a junction exhibits asymmetric conductivity.

    LATTICE CONSTANT
    Usually the edge length of a unit cell.

    LEC
    Liquid Encapsulated Czochralski (CZ*) method.

    MBE
    Molecular Beam Epitaxy*.

    METAL
    Element other than non-metal* (see non-metal*).

    METAL, NON-SEMICONDUCTOR
    See NON-SEMICONDUCTOR METAL.

    MOCVD
    Metal-Organic CVD*.  CVD in which a precursor* contains an organo-metallic
    compound.  Also sometimes OMCVD.

    MOMBE
    Metal-Organic Molecular Beam Epitaxy*.  MBE in which a precursor* contains
    an organo-metallic compound.

    MOS FET
    Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor.

    NON-METAL
    The twenty-one elements:  hydrogen, boron, carbon, silicon, nitrogen,
    phosphorus, oxygen, sulfur, selenium, tellurium, fluorine, chlorine,
    bromine, iodine, astatine, helium, neon, argon, krypton, xenon, and radon.

    NON-SEMICONDUCTOR METAL
    A metal* other than which has a disclosed semiconductor property or
    intended use.  For example, a single-crystal* of germanium or indium
    antimonide would be inferred to be a semiconductor even though composed of
    a metal* because of its known semiconductor property.

    NUTRIENT
    The source material from which the single-crystal* deposits or grows.  See
    also precursor*.

    ORIENTED-CRYSTAL
    A material in which substantially all the crystal grains are oriented in a
    preferential way.  Also called preferred-orientation polycrystalline
    material.

    OMCVD
    Metal-Organic CVD*.

    PECVD
    Plasma Enhanced CVD*.

    PELTIER EFFECT
    A thermoelectric effect wherein electric current between/through a
    solid/solid or a solid/liquid junction creates heating in one side and
    cooling in the other.

    P/N JUNCTION
    An interface formed by two semiconductor materials in which one contains a
    charge carrier which is an electron donor (n-type semiconductor) and the
    other contains a charge carrier which is an electron acceptor (p-type
    semiconductor).

    PRECURSOR
    Any part, or all, of the starting material from which a single-crystal* is
    grown.  This may be a material which undergoes one or more chemical
    reactions* prior to the actual crystal growth step.  Hence, the term is not
    limited to the compound or composition present just immediately prior to
    the growth of the single-crystal*.  Contrast with immediate-precursor*.
    See also nutrient*.

    QUARTZ
    SiO2; silicon dioxide; silica.  Polycrystalline forms include agate, cat's
    eye, chalcedony, and jasper.  Crystalline forms include amethyst,
    catalinite, citrine, rose quartz, and smoky quartz.

    QUARTZ, FUSED
    Vitreous or glassy quartz.

    ROCHELLE SALT
    Potassium sodium tartrate; KNaTartrate.4H2O; (KNaCO2CHOHCHOHCO2.4H2O);
    (KNaC4H4O6.4H2O).  Seignette's salt.

    SCHOTTKY JUNCTION
    An interface formed by a semiconductor and a conductor.

    SEED
    A material, usually a single-crystal*, upon which a single-crystal* is
    grown.  Seeded crystal growth proceeds by the alignment of atoms or
    molecules or clusters into a thermodynamically favored arrangement
    determined by the nature of the seed.

    SEIGNETTE'S SALT
    See Rochelle salt.

    SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICE
    Used here to mean any article or structure comprised of semiconductor
    material, such as the optical waveguides of Class 385 or the electronic
    semiconductor devices of Class 438.  The phrase is not determinative of
    proper classification; intended use frequently dictates proper
    classification.

    SEMICONDUCTOR JUNCTION
    See JUNCTION, SEMICONDUCTOR.

    SINGLE-CRYSTAL
    Solid phase material characterized by an absence of crystal boundaries and
    by a uniform atomic structural arrangement.  However, in this class, the
    term includes material composed of twins*, superlattice*, epitaxy*,
    oriented-crystals*, or enlarged crystals (when the enlarged crystals are
    used as though they are a single-crystal or when the enlarged crystals are
    used individually as single-crystals).

    SOI
    Semiconductor On Insulator.  A layered structure commonly found as the
    starting point for integrated circuit manufacture on silicon wafers.

    SOS
    Silicon On Sapphire.

    SPINEL
    MAl2O4; rubicelle, ruby almandine, ruby balas.  Also sometimes used
    generically to refer to a crystal having the cubic crystal lattice form.

    SUBSTRATE
    The surface upon which a coating is formed.  In the case of single-crystal*
    growth, such as epitaxy*, the substrate is also a seed*.  Contrast with
    base*.

    SUPERLATTICE
    A single-crystal*, usually composed of a semiconductor, having an internal
    structure of more than two layers, each layer having a composition
    different from the next adjacent layer.  The term includes alternating
    layers of two compositions.

    TWIN
    (Twin plane)  A polycrystalline material in which the adjoining lattices
    have a mirror-image symmetrical relationship.

    VERNEUIL
    A. Verneuil, French inventor of the crystal growth technique (1902) used
    for materials with a high melting point.  The Verneuil method is typified
    by use of a high temperature heat source, such as a gas flame or plasma
    torch, into which powdered material is directed, whereupon it melts as or
    prior to its arrival to a thin film of melt on a seed crystal which is
    pulled away at an appropriate rate.

    VFG
    Vertical Freeze Gradient.  Also VGF.

    VPE
    Vapor Phase Epitaxy*.

    WHISKER
    A single-crystal* which is typically small diameter, elongate, and
    generally cylindrical.

    YAG
    Yttrium Aluminum Garnet.

    ZMR
    Zone Melt Recrystallization.


    III.    CLASSIFICATION LINES WITH OTHER CLASSES

    A.      LINES WITH PROCESS CLASSES

            Also see Notes, in section I, C and D, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, for crystallization of inorganic
    compounds or non-metal* elements with no intent to obtain a single-crystal*
    product and having no significant shaping.  Placement of the original, when
    both Class 117 and Class 23 species are claimed or where such are disclosed
    but only generic claims are present, is Class 117.

    29,     Metal Working, for processes which include diverse operations and
    which include a step of single-crystal* growth when making the specified
    articles enumerated in that part of the Class 29 schedule which precedes
    subclass 592, Processes of Mechanical Manufacture.  Additionally, Class 29
    takes processes which include diverse operations and which include a step
    of single-crystal* growth combined with (a) specific metal shaping steps or
    (b) mechanical joining either broad or specific.  Class 117 takes multistep
    processes which include a step of single-crystal* growth combined with (a)
    broad or nominally claimed metal shaping steps or (b) assembling the
    precursors* of forming the single-crystal*.  See subclasses 592.1+ for
    processes of mechanical manufacture of electrical devices not classified
    elsewhere.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses
    for cooling, treating, and drying processes not in combination with
    single-crystal* formation; e.g., solidification of bulk material.  For
    further elucidation of what Class 34 takes, see (2) Note therein.  Class
    117 takes drying and gas or vapor contact of single-crystal* as a
    perfecting operation; i.e., combined with single-crystal* growth.

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclasses for processes of other than
    single-crystal* growing which include a Class 62 cooling step.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, for processes of making glass.  Fused quartz
    is considered glass.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, etc., subclass 10.11 for zone
    melting or refining and for fractional crystallization of metals or alloys
    wherein no single-crystal* is produced.  If both single-crystal* and
    polycrystal formation are claimed, or both are disclosed but only generic
    claims are present, the original is proper for Class 117.  See subclasses
    331+ for forming metal powders from a melt or liquid without a shaping
    surface; e.g., liquid comminuting.

    125,    Stone Working, for processes of acting upon stone and stone-like
    material previously removed from its native position in the earth.

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, appropriate subclasses for
    processes of recovery or treatment of class named materials which are not
    single-crystal*.

    148,    Metal Treatment, appropriate subclasses for (a) the class provided
    for per se processes of non-semiconductor metal* treating or (b)
    single-crystal* growth of metal, alloy, or intermetallic material combined
    with a subsequent step of heat treatment (which herein includes controlled
    cooling) when the purpose of the heat treatment (or controlled cooling) is
    to modify the internal physical structure or chemical property of a metal,
    alloy, or intermetallic material.  When the subsequent heat treatment (or
    controlled cooling) merely operates on the single-crystallinity, such as
    stress or strain annealing or to remove point defects, the combined process
    is proper for Class 117; when the subsequent heat treatment (or controlled
    cooling) operates to effect significant metal, alloy, or intermetallic heat
    treatment (or controlled cooling) purposes, such as solutionizing,
    homogenizing, or precipitation hardening, then the combined process is
    proper for Class 148.  Class 117 provides for simultaneous or prior
    perfecting operations combined wiht single-crystal growing.  See Class 117
    definition, section C, (4) Note, for discussion of perfecting operations.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclasses 47.1+ for processes of
    crystallization without significant chemical changes and in which
    single-crystal* growth is not intended.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 122.1+ for simultaneously shaping (i.e.,
    in a mold) and solidifying to form non-semiconductor metal* directionally
    solidified material or single-crystal*.  See subclasses 48+, 250.1+, and
    469 and Digest 5 for the use of high energy radiation to melt a metal* when
    not combined with growing a single-crystal*.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclass 48 for processes of
    distillation combined with crystallization (bulk).

    204,    Chemistry:  Electric and Wave Energy, for processes of forming a
    single crystal by a method set forth in that class definition as restricted
    in the Class 204 class definition, (5) Note, and the Class 204, subclass
    157.15, (9) Note.  Thus, Class 204 is proper for single-crystal* growth
    processes which involve a stated chemical reaction and glow discharge,
    plasma torch, electrolysis,  electrophoresis, sputtering, or vacuum arc
    discharge.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses for
    processes which include crystallization, other than single-crystal* growth,
    when such is a by-product of a process which occurs simultaneously with a
    Class 210-defined process which is the primary purpose.

    219     Electric Heating, for processes using high energy radiation to
    melt, absent the growing of a single-crystal*.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for processes of handling single crystals of indeterminate length (e.g.,
    fiber) and not combined with single-crystal* forming means.

    252,    Compositions, appropriate subclasses for processes of making
    compositions of the class, unless by a process provided for elsewhere.  See
    subclasses 62.3+ for processes of making a composition suitable for a
    barrier layer device (e.g., by doping without a claimed step of crystal
    growing); subclasses 500+ for making electrically conductive or emissive
    compositions; subclasses 582+ for making non-linear optical compositions;
    subclasses 301.16+, 301.36, or 301.4+ for making coherent light generating
    compositions; and subclasses 299.01+ for making liquid crystal compositions.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    for per se processes of shaping or treating non-glass, non-metal*
    single-crystal*, except as provided for in Class 437, and for processes of
    single-crystal* forming of non-semiconductor, non-metal* material combined
    with a step proper for Class 264 and which is not a Class 117 perfecting
    step (see the Class 117 definition, section I, C, (4) Note).  See
    subclasses 5+ for forming non-glass, non-metal* powders from a melt or
    liquid without a shaping surface; e.g., liquid comminuting.  Class 117
    takes (a) single-crystal* growing simultaneous with shaping (except molding
    of non-semiconductor metal* which is placed in Class 164, subclasses
    122.1+) or (b) single-crystal* forming of all types of materials, including
    organic or inorganic (non-metal* or metal*), combined with a broad or
    nominally recited shaping or treating step.  See subclasses 340+ for the
    per se treating of a preformed, shaped, or solid article, which may be a
    single-crystal*, wherein the chemical or physical property or
    characteristic is modified or controlled, and see subclasses 345+
    thereunder where such treatment is heat treating the article.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 30+ for processes of
    optical measuring or testing of a crystal or a gem.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    especially subclasses 156+, for processes, either per se or combined with
    single-crystal* growing, of acting on a single-crystal* which involves
    bombardment (e.g., irradiation, to produce an induced nuclear reaction or
    transformation), especially subclass 183 for doping a semiconductor
    material.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, for processes of forming
    single-crystals* by Class 419 methods.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, for methods of making  metals and
    metallic compositions, other than single-crystal*.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, for processes of producing or
    separating by a chemical reaction an inorganic compound or non-metal*
    element, which may have crystalline form, and where there is no intent to
    obtain a single-crystal* product.  Note, although Class 117 is proper for
    original placement of single-crystal* diamond making, a mandatory search is
    found in Class 423, subclass 446, which is the locus for all diamond making
    and products (unless a coating), whether or not a chemical reaction is
    involved.

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclasses for processes of
    depositing a coating other than single-crystal* (e.g., polycrystalline or
    amorphous) on a substrate, except as specifically provided for elsewhere.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, for processes which include a single-crystal* growth step combined
    with a non-perfecting (see Class 117 definition, section I, C, (4) Note)
    operation which is proper for this class.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, appropriate subclasses
    for (a) per se treatments or operations acting on single-crystal*
    semiconductor material (e.g., heat treating, doping, etching, coating,
    etc.) not specifically provided for elsewhere or (b) growing a
    single-crystal* semiconductor material (i.e., a Class 117 step) combined
    with named diverse treatments or operations, including those noted in the
    Class 117 definition, section I, C, (4) Note.  Where there are only generic
    claims and both Class 438 and Class 117 processes are disclosed, or where
    both Class 438 and Class 117 processes are claimed and the claims are
    equally comprehensive, the reference is originally placed in Class 438 and
    cross-referenced to Class 117.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, for processes of making ceramic
    compositions not provided for in an art class and when there is no
    intention of growing single-crystal* ceramics.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process, for all
    subject matter relating to high temperature (functioning above 30 degrees
    K) superconductor compositions, materials, devices, and methods of making
    same.  See subclass 451 for zone melting or seed pulling processes which
    make superconductor precursors or products and see cross-reference art
    collection 729 for producing high temperature superconducting single
    crystal or single crystal film or single crystal layer.

    520-528,        Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, for processes of
    making materials of the class definition which are other than
    single-crystal*.

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives; Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, for processes of making materials of
    the class definition which are other than single-crystal*.

    532-570,        Organic Compounds, for processes of synthesizing organic
    compounds which are other than single-crystal*.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, for processes of making
    materials of the class definition which are other than single-crystal*.
    See subclasses 812+ for processes of purification, separation, or recovery
    of hydrocarbons by crystallization, other than single-crystal* forming.

    B.      SELECTED NOTES TO ARTICLE, MATERIAL, COMPOSITION, DEVICE, AND
    PRODUCT CLASSES

            Class 117 does not provide for the products of its processes or
    apparatus.  The following is not represented as a complete listing of all
    possible locations for such products, but may be useful as a guide or
    starting point for locating them.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    63,     Jewelry, subclass 32 for a gem or a stone intended to be worn by a
    person as an ornament.

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, appropriate subclasses for
    products of the processes of recovery or treatment of class named materials.

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclasses 200+ for
    thermoelectric devices, subclasses 203+ for Peltier* thermoelectric effect
    devices, and subclasses 243+ for solar cell devices.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 33+ for p/n junction semiconductor
    stock material (including superlattice materials), subclasses 400+ for
    metal* stock material, and subclass 404 for directionally solidified metal*
    stock material.

    252,    Compositions, for class provided for compositions, which may be
    single-crystal*, especially:  subclasses 62.3+ for barrier layer device
    compositions such as p-type and n-type semiconductor materials; subclass
    62.9 for piezoelectric compositions; subclasses 301.16+, 301.36, and 301.4+
    for light emitting compositions (e.g., fluorescent, phosphorescent, or
    coherent (laser)); subclasses 500+ for electrically conductive or emissive
    compositions; subclasses 582+ for non-linear optical compositions; and
    subclasses 299.01+ for liquid crystal compositions.


    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    for semiconductor devices such as diodes, transistors, and thyristors.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 311+ for an
    inorganic piezoelectric structure when shaped to claimed configuration,
    where the configuration is disclosed as being significant to the
    piezoelectric property of the material (e.g., plate).

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, for
    optical elements and optical systems not elsewhere classified.

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, appropriate subclasses for art named
    devices (e.g., lasers), especially subclasses 43+ for semiconductor lasers.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, for passive optical elements effecting a
    deviation of light rays or a modification in the character or properties of
    the light, especially subclasses 129+ for planar optical waveguides.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, for metal*, alloy, or
    intermetallic compositions which may be single-crystal*.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, for inorganic compounds or
    nonmetal* elements, single-crystal* or otherwise, especially where shape,
    structure, or device is not claimed.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, for structurally defined
    non-metal* single-crystal* products, and for non-structurally defined
    laminates comprising a single-crystal*, particularly subclasses 544+ for a
    metal* stock having contiguous metal* layers (e.g., where one or more
    layers may be single-crystal*).

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, for compositions of ceramic materials,
    especially subclass 86, for synthetic single-crystal* ceramic composition
    of gem quality.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:   Apparatus, Material, Process, for all
    subject matter relating to high temperature (functioning above 30 degrees
    K) superconductor compositions, materials, devices, and methods of making
    same, see subclass 451 for processes of making superconducting precursor or
    product by zone melting or seed pulling and cross-reference art collection
    729 for making high temperature superconducting single crystal or single
    crystal film or single crystal layer.

    520-528,        Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, for materials of the
    class definition which may be single crystal.

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives; Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, for materials of the class definition
    which may be single crystal.

    532-570,        Organic Compounds, for materials of the class definition
    which may be single crystal.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, for materials of the class
    definition which may be single crystal.

    C.      LINES WITH APPARATUS CLASSES

            Also see Notes, in section I, C and E, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, takes apparatus which practice diverse operations
    and which include a means of single-crystal* growth when making the
    specified articles enumerated in that part of the Class 29 schedule which
    precedes subclass 592, Processes of Mechanical Manufacture.  For example,
    see subclass 25.35 for apparatus for manufacturing piezoelectric crystal
    devices by means comprising single-crystal* forming and additional
    manufacturing means.  Additionally, Class 29 takes apparatus which practice
    diverse operations and which include a means of single-crystal* growth
    combined with (a) specific metal shaping means or (b) mechanical joining
    means either broad or specific.  Class 117 takes apparatus which include a
    means of single-crystal* growth combined with (a) broad or nominally
    claimed metal shaping means or (b) means for assembling the precursors* of
    forming the single-crystal*.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, for cooling, treating,
    or drying apparatus, not combined with single-crystal* forming means.  See
    Class 34 definition for comprehensive statement of its relationship with
    other classes.

    62,     Refrigeration, for apparatus for removing heat from a substance
    which may cause crystallization and not combined with single-crystal*
    forming means.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, for glass making apparatus, especially
    subclasses 187+ and 193+, for means for pulling glass from a melt.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, for apparatus for applying or obtaining a
    coating on a substrate (e.g., epitaxy*) and for apparatus not provided for
    elsewhere for treating the substrate (or base or work) or to subsequently
    treat the coating.  See especially subclasses 400+ for liquid phase
    epitaxy* and subclasses 715+ for vapor phase epitaxy*.  Apparatus for the
    non-coating (e.g., non-epitaxy*) single-crystal* growth is proper for Class
    117.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, for apparatus for heating liquids
    which have a closed liquid heating chamber of generally disclosed utility
    and not combined with single-crystal* forming means.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, for apparatus for heating liquids which have
    an open liquid heating chamber of generally disclosed utility and not
    combined with single-crystal* forming means.

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, subclasses 15+ and 17+ for
    apparatus for bulk crystallizing and treatment of bulk crystals of the
    class-defined materials.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, for apparatus for cleaning
    and for miscellaneous contact of liquids with solids in general, including
    such with single-crystal*, and not combined with single-crystal* forming
    means.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclass 33 and subclass 45 for
    concentrating evaporators with means for collecting (bulk) crystals.

    164,    Metal Founding, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for dynamic
    metal* molding or for treating of metal* in a mold, including apparatus
    which grows metal* single-crystal*.

    165,    Heat Exchange, for apparatus for heating and cooling the same
    material, including single-crystal*, when not combined with single-crystal*
    forming means.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 14.5 for dewaxing apparatus of
    mineral oils by solidification or crystallization.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, for apparatus for forming
    single crystal by a Class 204 method which involves a stated chemical
    reaction, but with exceptions noted in the class definition at (C) and in
    (5) Note; see Class 204, subclass 157.15, (9) Note.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, for apparatus in which recovery
    of a crystallized material is a by-product of a Class 210-defined process
    which is the primary purpose.  Since placement is according to disclosed
    intent, appropriate cross-referencing is usually required.

    219,    Electric Heating, for electrical heating devices of generally
    disclosed utility and not combined with single-crystal* forming means.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for apparatus for handling single crystals of indeterminate length (e.g.,
    fiber) and not combined with single-crystal* forming means.

    249,    Static Molds, appropriate subclasses for static mold of fluent
    material not combined with a diverse art device such as single-crystal*
    forming means.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for
    refining, purifying, or otherwise treating molten or liquified metal* or
    for melting metal*, not provided for elsewhere.

    269,    Work Holders, e.g., subclass 46, for workholders not provided for
    in other art classes.  Class 117 takes its own workholders.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 30+ for apparatus for
    optical measuring or testing of crystal or gem.

    366,    Agitating, appropriate subclasses for agitating apparatus not
    intended for chemical reaction and not combined with single-crystal*
    forming means.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus having a specific electrical heating structure and of generally
    disclosed utility and for heating a material, especially subclass 17 for
    apparatus for zone melting by electron beam furnace and subclass 139 for
    apparatus for zone melting by induction heating.  Class 117 takes apparatus
    claimed or solely disclosed for single-crystal* growing.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    appropriate subclasses for apparatus for carrying out nuclear reactions
    which may act on a single-crystal*; e.g., irradiation to perform nuclear
    transformation (e.g., doping of a semiconductor material).

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 129+ for apparatus for crystallizing
    material other than single-crystal*, not provided for elsewhere, and in
    which chemical reaction(s) is(are) provided for; subclasses 186+ for
    apparatus for forming single-crystal* by a method of Class 204, subclasses
    157.15+; subclasses 245.1+ for apparatus for crystallizing material other
    than single-crystal*,  not provided for elsewhere, in which only physical
    process(es) is(are) provided for; and in all cases such apparatus not
    intended for acting upon glass or metal*, or for shaping an article.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 6+ for apparatus making non-glass, non-metal* powders, which may
    be crystals, from liquid by means dividing or comminuting and allowing the
    liquid to solidify while in particulate form of a desired size or shape but
    with no shaping surface; subclass 77 for ultra-high-pressure generating
    apparatus other than for single-crystal* forming; subclass 222 for tumbling
    type agglomerating apparatus; and appropriate subclasses for dynamic
    molding apparatus for other than glass.

    432,    Heating, appropriate subclasses for apparatus of general utility
    for the generation of heat and its application to materials, not  provided
    for elsewhere.

     IV.    INDEXES TO CLASS REFERENCES

    A.      INDEX TO REFERENCES TO OTHER CLASSES APPEARING IN CLASS 117

                           Location in Class 117
           Class Definition Class   Section         Subclass(es)

    23      III, A          13

    29      I,C; III,A&C

    34      III, A&C

    62      III,A&C

    63      III,B

    65      III,A&C

    75      III,A           921,922

    118     I,A,D&E; III,C  54,84,200,900

    122     III,C

    125     III,A

    126     III,C

    127     III,A,B,&C

    134     III,C

    136     III,B

    148     I,C&D; III,A&B  3,939

    156     I,C; III,A              200

    159     III,A&C

    164     I,A&C; III,A&C  928,937,939

    165     III,C

    196     III,C

    203     III,A

    204     I,A,D&E; III,A&C        29,62, 92, 103, 200

    210     III,A&C

    219     III,A&C         217,222

    226     III,A&C

    249     III,C

    252     I,C;III,A&B             928,930,931,935,
                            936,937,953,954,
                            955,956,957,958

    257     III,B

    264     I,C&D; III,A    3,7,13

    266     III,C

    269     III,C

    310     III,B

    356     III,A&C

    359     III,B

    366     III,C

    372     III,B

    373     III,C           217,222

    376     I,C; III,A&C

    385     II; III,B               918

    419     I,A; III,A

    420     III,A&B

    422     I,A,D&E; III,C  200,900

    423     III,A&B         13,79,929

    425     III,C           224

    427     I,C&D; III,A    2,54,79,84,92

    428     III,B

    430     III,A

    432     III,C

    438     I,C&D; II; III,A        2,3,54,84

    501     I,C; III,A&B    937,943

    505     I,A; III,A&B

    520-528 III,A&B

    530     III,A&B

    532-570 III,A&B

    562                     926

    585     III,A&B

    B.      INDEX TO REFERENCES TO CLASS 117 APPEARING IN OTHER CLASSES

                                Location in Class 117 of Other Classes
      Class Section         Subclass(es)

    23                      295

    29                      25.01, 25.35

    62      Class Def.              123, 532

    63      Class Def.              32

    65      III,B

    75      IV              10.11,331,343,952,                              954

    106     Class Def.

    118     IX              400,407,715

    127     Class Def.              15,58

    136     Class Def.

    148     III,C           562

    156     II,D

    159     Class Def.              45

    164                     122.1,122.2

    210     III,B,1&3               665,702

    252     Class Def.              62.3,62.9,301.17

    257     IV,D

    260     Class Def.

    264     II

    359     XV

    373     V               17,139

    376                     156,183

    385                     129

    419     II,C&D

    422     II,D,2          105,245.1

    423     III             446

    425                     77

    427     III             248.1,450,457

    436                     4

    438     III, A          455, 478, 486, 493,                     497, 500,
    503, 507,                       607, 795

    501     III,C           86

    520     Class Def.

    530                     200,300,350,500

    532     Class Def.

    585     II              800,812

    V.      SUBCLASS DEFINITIONS



CLS 117/1
TXT PROCESSES JOINING       INDEPENDENT CRYSTALS:

    Processes under the class definition in which two or more independently
    manipulatable single-crystals* are joined in a specified crystallographic
    orientation so as to form a single-crystal*.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is not the proper location for epitaxy* layer
    overgrowth types of processes since crystals joined in that process
    originated on a common substrate and hence were not independently
    manipulatable, such processes will be found below in this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4+,     for de-twinning processes.

    45,     for epitaxy* layer overgrowth processes in which a moving
    solid-liquid-solid region is used.

    54+,    for liquid phase epitaxy* growth processes.

    84+,    for vapor phase growth processes such as vapor phase epitaxy*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, particularly subclass 121 for bonding of
    nonmetals with a metal filler.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, subclasses 455+ for
    bonding of plural semiconductor substrates.


CLS 117/2
TXT PROCESSES OF GROWTH WITH A SUBSEQUENT STEP ACTING ON THE CRYSTAL TO ADJUST
    THE IMPURITY AMOUNT (E.G., DIFFUSING, DOPING, GETTERING, IMPLANTING):

    Subject matter under the class definition in which, subsequent to a claimed
    single-crystal* growing step, the crystal is treated to remove or add an
    impurity; e.g., by a diffusion, doping*, gettering*, or implanting process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for like processes in which the impurity is merely redistributed
    rather than adjusted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, for the per se step, other than as specifically
    provided for elsewhere (see the reference to Class 437 below).

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, for such processes in
    which a single crystal of semiconductor material is acted upon and for the
    per se operation of gettering*, doping*, implanting*, or diffusion acting
    on the semiconductor material.


CLS 117/3
TXT PROCESSES OF GROWTH WITH A SUBSEQUENT STEP OF HEAT TREATING OR DELIBERATE
    CONTROLLED COOLING OF THE SINGLE-CRYSTAL:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which the process includes a
    step subsequent to a claimed single-crystal* growth which includes:  (a)
    the application of heat to the single-crystal* or (b) a specified,
    deliberate cooling schedule (i.e., the specification of a cooling rate or
    step, or of one or more temperature plateaus prior to or during cooling
    down to room temperature).

    (1)     Note.  A specified temperature gradient in the cooling crystal is
    included here.

    (2)     Note.  The positive recitation of a subsequent step of holding the
    single-crystal* at a specified temperature, or of cooling at a specified
    rate, constitutes a heat treatment for placement here.  The mere recitation
    of ``heat treatment" or ``tempering" or ``annealing" or other like terms is
    not enough for placement in this subclass; such mere recitations will find
    proper placement in the appropriate crystal growing subclasses, below,
    based upon the claimed growth step.

    (3)     Note.  A single-crystal* growth step followed by heat treatment to
    de-twin is proper for placement here.

    (4)     Note.  See the Search Class entries for  Class 148 and Class 437
    listed below for exceptions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4+,     for processes of crystal formation from the solid state and for per
    se processes of de-twinning.

    11+,    for processes which act on single-crystal* and which result in the
    liquefying thereof and from which a single-crystal* is then grown.

    204,    for corresponding apparatus other than coating apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, appropriate subclasses for (a) the class provided
    for per se processes of non-semiconductor metal* treating or (b)
    single-crystal* growth of metal, alloy, or intermetallic material combined
    with a subsequent step of heat treatment (which herein includes controlled
    cooling) when the purpose of the heat treatment (or controlled cooling) is
    to modify the internal physical structure or chemical property of a metal,
    alloy, or intermetallic material.  When the subsequent heat treatment (or
    controlled cooling) merely operates on the single-crystallinity, such as
    stress or strain annealing or to remove point defects, the combined process
    is proper for Class 117; when the subsequent heat treatment (or controlled
    cooling) operates to effect significant metal, alloy, or intermetallic heat
    treatment (or controlled cooling) purposes, such as solutionizing,
    homogenizing, or precipitation hardening, then the combined process is
    proper for Class 148.  Class 117 provides for simultaneous or prior
    perfecting operations combined with single-crystal* growing.  See Class 117
    definition, section C, (4) Note, for discussion of perfecting operations.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 345+ for, per se, processes of heat treating a
    non-semiconductor, non-metal*, preformed, shaped, or solid article which
    may be a single-crystal*.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, appropriate subclasses
    for (a) per se treatments or operations acting on single-crystal*
    semiconductor material (e.g., heat treating, doping, etching, coating,
    etc.) not specifically provided for elsewhere or (b) growing a
    single-crystal* semiconductor material (i.e., a Class 117 step) combined
    with named diverse treatments or operations, including those noted in the
    Class 117 definition, section I, C, (4) Note.  Where there are only generic
    claims and both Class 438 and Class 117 processes are disclosed, or where
    both Class 438 and Class 117 processes are claimed and the claims are
    equally comprehensive, the reference is originally placed in Class 438 and
    cross-referenced to Class 117.


CLS 117/4
TXT PROCESSES OF GROWTH FROM SOLID OR GEL STATE (E.G., SOLID PHASE
    RECRYSTALLIZATION):

    Subject matter under the class definition  which includes a step forming
    single-crystal* from an immediate-precursor* in solid or gel state.

    (1)     Note.  This definition does not include processes in which the
    solid or gel passes through another state other than a gel or solid
    immediately prior to crystal formation.  Thus, the dissolving of a solid
    nutrient* into a liquid would be considered passing through another state
    and placement would be proper in Class 117, subclasses 11+, even though
    some solid state nutrient* may be constantly supplying precursor to the
    dissolving vehicle during the crystal formation (e.g., in a spatially
    separated nutrient* zone).

    (2)     Note.  Per se heat treating to de-twin involves the elimination of
    crystal boundary while in the solid state and hence is placed here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   for corresponding apparatus, other than coating apparatus.


CLS 117/5
TXT Organic product:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 in which the product formed is a
    single-crystal* of an organic compound, as defined in Class 532.


CLS 117/6
TXT At pressure above 1 atmosphere:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 in which the process includes use of
    pressure greater than 1 atmosphere during the growth step.


CLS 117/7
TXT Using heat (e.g., strain annealing):

    Subject matter under subclass 4 in which the process includes use of heat
    to initiate and/or maintain crystal growth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for processes growing a single-crystal* which include a subsequent
    step of heat treating the product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 345+ for, per se, processes of heat treating a
    non-semiconductor, non-metal*, preformed, shaped, or solid article, which
    may be a single-crystal*.


CLS 117/8
TXT Of amorphous precursor:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 where the immediate-precursor* which is
    being thermally treated is amorphous* (non-crystalline).


CLS 117/9
TXT Epitaxy formation:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 in which the single-crystal* grown is
    epitaxy*.


CLS 117/10
TXT Using temperature gradient (e.g., moving zone recrystallization):

    Subject matter under subclass 7 in which a temperature gradient is used to
    effect the crystal growth.


CLS 117/11
TXT PROCESSES OF GROWTH FROM LIQUID OR SUPERCRITICAL STATE:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which an immediate-precursor*
    supplies crystallization material in the liquid or supercritical state to
    the growing single-crystal*.

    (1)     Note.  The immediate-precursor* may comprise dissolved, molten, or
    otherwise liquid media.

    (2)     Note.  All uses of the term liquid in this and indented subclasses
    shall be taken to mean liquid or supercritical state.

    (3)     Note.  See the (5) Note located in subclass 13 for discussion of
    distinguishing characteristics among several liquid phase processes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206+,   for corresponding apparatus other than coating apparatus.


CLS 117/12
TXT Crucibleless process having movement of discrete droplets or solid
    particles to thin-film precursor (e.g., Verneuil method):

    Subject matter under subclass 11 in which droplets or solid particles of
    precursor* are moved as such (i.e., as discrete particles) to the thin-film
    liquid precursor* zone or region from which the single-crystal* product is
    grown and which precusor is not contained by a crucible.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207,    for corresponding apparatus.


CLS 117/13
TXT Having pulling during growth (e.g., Czochralski method, zone drawing):

    Subject matter under subclass 11 characterized by bringing a seed* into
    contact with a liquid precursor* (or nutrient*) media to initiate and
    conduct the growth process by then withdrawing it under conditions which
    permit crystal formation while pulling.

    (1)     Note.  The salient feature of this and indented subclasses is the
    necessary and sufficient requirement of relative movement between the
    crystal product (holder) and the nutrient* supply holder (or means).

    (2)     Note.  Processes termed zone drawing or zone pulling in which a
    zone of melted material is moved through a solid precursor* while
    simultaneously conducting a drawing or pulling operation and wherein the
    drawing or pulling causes the product to have a cross-sectional mass
    different from the solid precursor* are properly placed in this subclass
    and its indents. This subclass also includes those processes in which a
    product has a larger diameter than the precursor*.  These might be termed
    ``pushing" techniques as opposed to pulling techniques.  For example see
    U.S. Patent No. 3,622,282.

    (3)     Note.  Although a crucible* with a reservoir of nutrient* is
    typical of these processes, this is not a requirement.

    (4)     Note.  This subclass and its indents do not include processes in
    which crystal pulling is used only to initiate the crystallization.  For
    example, pulling initially and then switching to moving zone process is
    proper for subclasses 37+.

    (5)     Note.  The moving zone, Bridgman-Stockbarger, and crystal pulling
    methods each involve a moving solid-liquid interface with a trailing
    recrystallization.  The following typical indicia are provided to help in
    distinguishing them from each other.

    (a)     Moving zone recrystallization:

            Two solid-liquid interfaces are present and are generally planar
    and generally parallel to each other.

            Both precursor* and product are attached to and moved by the same
    means or are controlled so as to move so that there is no relative movement
    between them, or both precursor* and product are attached to the same
    structure and the heating means is moved, but again there is no relative
    movement between precursor* and product.

            The precursor* may be a layer (e.g., a coating) or may be
    sandwiched between two layers.

            In the case of crucibleless zone melting, there is no
    disparate-material crucible*.

            Precursor* and product travel along a common axis and travel at the
    same rate, or the heating element moves while the precursor* and product
    remain stationary.

            The heating element may be immersed in the liquid zone.

    (b)     Bridgman-Stockbarger method:

            There is one solid-liquid interface.

            The crystal grows into the nutrient*.

            There is a vessel which contains the liquified precursor* and the
    crystal product.

    (c)     Crystal pulling:

            A seed* material is moved into contact with the precursor*, and
    then withdrawn so as to pull the precursor* from the liquid by surface
    tension into a cooler zone where single-crystallization* occurs.

            There may be no replenishment of precursor* during the process, in
    which case there will be only one solid-liquid interface; e.g., the
    precursor* is completely liquefied and contained in a crucible*.

            There may be another solid-liquid interface associated with
    liquefying of solid precursor* replenishment.

            Direction of travel of the precursor* material (or precursor*
    replenishment material) and the product are unrelated to each other.

            The seed* is attached to a pulling means/structure.

            The crucible* may be composed of precursor* material and thus may
    be consumed.

    (6)     Note.  The pulling of a body which results in a polycrystalline rod
    will generally be found in Class 23 if no chemical reaction occurs and
    Class 423 if a chemical reaction occurs.  If shaping means are employed
    (e.g., EDFFG*), the polycrystallization process will generally be found in
    Class 264.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for processes of growing wherein there is movement of discrete
    droplets or solid particles (e.g., Verneuil method).

    37+,    for processes of moving zone recrystallization without a pulling or
    drawing operation.

    54+,    for processes of immersing a substrate* or seed* and then
    withdrawing it, either to cause epitaxy* or after epitaxy* has occurred.

    208+,   for corresponding apparatus other than coating apparatus.


CLS 117/14
TXT With a step of measuring, testing, or sensing (e.g., using TV, photo, or
    X-ray detector or weight changes):

    Subject matter under subclass 13 which includes the measuring, testing, or
    sensing of a process condition or parameter during the process.

    (1)     Note.  Since all processes involve control of process parameters,
    placement here requires more than merely a statement of controlling or
    operating at a certain set of conditions.  Thus, not included are mere
    recitations of ``controlling" or ``maintaining."  Further, merely reciting
    a program or cycle or time control is not sufficient for placement here.

    (2)     Note.  Equivalent terms include examining, inspecting, observing,
    viewing, and monitoring.


CLS 117/15
TXT With responsive control:

    Subject matter under subclass 14 further including a step of controlling a
    specified parameter or condition in response to the measured, tested, or
    sensed condition or parameter.


CLS 117/16
TXT Shape defined by a solid member other than seed or product (e.g.,
    edge-defined film-fed growth, Stepanov method):

    Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein a solid member (i.e., a physical
    or mechanical shaper or die) is provided sufficiently close to the
    precursor*-product interface to affect, and at least partially define, the
    shape of the crystal as it is pulled from the liquid and passes against the
    shaping means.

    (1)     Note.  The solid member may be pulled with and become attached to
    or embedded in the crystal; e.g., string-stabilized web pulling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for similar processes which do not involve measuring, testing, or
    sensing.


CLS 117/17
TXT With contact with an immiscible liquid (e.g., LEC):

    Subject matter under subclass 13 in which the liquid precursor* contacts
    another liquid, immiscible therewith, for any indicated purpose.


CLS 117/18
TXT Using a sectioned crucible or providing replenishment of precursor:

    Subject matter under subclass 17 in which the liquid precursor* is present
    in a crucible* which has sections clearly defined by a physical member, at
    least two of which sections contain liquid precursor* (e.g., a sectioned
    crucible or a double crucible*), or in which a step of precursor*
    replenishment is recited.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for processes using sectioned crucible* in the absence of an
    immiscible liquid.


CLS 117/19
TXT Forming an intended mixture (excluding mixed crystal) (e.g., doped):

    Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein the process includes an intended
    or desired mixture in the single-crystal* product, but excluding mixed
    crystal compositions like GaxAl1-xAs.

    (1)     Note.  Compounds and intermetallics, such as GaAs or InSb, are
    stoichiometric compounds and hence are not considered mixtures for purposes
    of placement here.

    (2)     Note.  Unintended or undesirably impure single-crystals* are not
    considered intended mixtures for purposes of placement here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for processes of doping* subsequent to a single-crystal* growth
    step.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, for a process
    consisting of the single crystal growth of a semiconductor material from
    the liquid phase which is combined with named operations or treatments,
    including those noted in the Class 117 definition, section I, C, Note (4).


CLS 117/20
TXT Comprising a silicon crystal with oxygen containing impurity:

    Subject matter under subclass 19 in which the crystal product is silicon
    which includes an intended or desired impurity which contains or consists
    of oxygen.


CLS 117/21
TXT Comprising a semiconductor with a charge carrier impurity:

    Subject matter under subclass 19 in which the crystal product is a
    semiconductor which includes an intended or desired impurity which is an
    electric charge carrier.


CLS 117/22
TXT Forming adjoining crystals of different compositions (e.g., junction):

    Subject matter under subclass 21 in which adjoining single-crystals* of
    different composition are formed, either simultaneously or successively.

    (1)     Note.  For placement in this subclass, a reference must claim a
    process in which both of the adjoining single-crystals* are grown in the
    claimed process.


CLS 117/23
TXT Shape defined by a solid member other than seed or product (e.g.,
    edge-defined film-fed growth, Stepanov method):

    Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein a solid member (i.e., a physical
    or mechanical shaper or die) is provided sufficiently close to the
    precursor*-product interface to affect, and at least partially define, the
    shape of the crystal as it is pulled from the liquid and passes against the
    shaping means.

    (1)     Note.  The solid member may be pulled with and become attached to
    or embedded in the crystal; e.g., string-stabilized web pulling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54+,    for processes of liquid epitaxy* crystallization even though the
    epitaxy* substrate may be pulled relative to the precursor*.


CLS 117/24
TXT Embedded in product (e.g., string-stabilized web):

    Subject matter under subclass 23 in which the solid member becomes embedded
    in the crystal product; e.g., string-stabilized web growth.


CLS 117/25
TXT Defines a product with a hollow structure (e.g., tube):

    Subject matter under subclass 23 in which the solid member controls the
    growth so as to define a single-crystal* product having a hollow structure.

    (1)     Note.  Cross-referencing to art collection 920 is precluded as
    unnecessarily duplicative.


CLS 117/26
TXT Defines a flat product:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 in which the solid member controls the
    growth so as to define a single-crystal* product having two substantially
    planar and parallel faces.

    (1)     Note.  Cross-referencing to art collection 922 is precluded as
    unnecessarily duplicative.


CLS 117/27
TXT Pulling includes a horizontal component:

    Subject matter under subclass 26 in which the pulling motion includes at
    least some horizontal component.

    (1)     Note.  Cross-referencing to art collection 922 is precluded as
    unnecessarily duplicative.


CLS 117/28
TXT Including non-coincident axes of rotation (e.g., relative eccentric):

    Subject matter under subclass 13 characterized in that non-coincident axes
    of rotation are employed during growth, for example, where the axes of
    rotation of the seed/product and of the liquid precursor* support means
    (e.g., the crucible*) are not coincident or where the seed/product is
    simultaneously spun and eccentrically rotated.


CLS 117/29
TXT Passing non-induced electric current through a crystal-liquid interface
    (e.g., Peltier):

    Subject matter under subclass 13 in which the crystal and the liquid are
    connected to an electric potential and current is caused to flow
    therebetween.

    (1)     Note.  RF induction, per se, is not proper for placement here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, for processes of forming a
    single crystal by a method set forth in that class definition and as
    restricted in Class 204, subclass 157.15, (9) Note.  Thus, Class 204 is
    proper for single crystal growth processes which involve glow discharge,
    plasma torch, electrolysis, electrophoresis, sputtering, or vacuum arc
    discharge.


CLS 117/30
TXT With liquid flow control or manipulation during growth (e.g., mixing,
    replenishing, magnetic levitation, stabilization, convection control,
    baffle):

    Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein flow of a liquid precursor* is
    purposefully manipulated or controlled during growth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    if the control is in response to a measured, tested, or sensed
    condition or parameter.

    33,     for processes wherein the manipulation or control comprises
    replenishing of the liquid precursor*.


CLS 117/31
TXT Including a sectioned crucible (e.g., double crucible, baffle):

    Subject matter under subclass 30 in which the liquid precursor* is present
    in a crucible* which has sections clearly defined by a physical member, at
    least two of which sections contain liquid precursor*; e.g., double
    crucible*.


CLS 117/32
TXT Using a magnetic field:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein the process uses a magnetic field
    to act directly on the liquid to effect said flow control or manipulation.

    (1)     Note.  Cross-referencing to art collection 917 is precluded as
    unnecessarily duplicative.


CLS 117/33
TXT Replenishing of precursor during growth (e.g., continuous method, zone
    pulling):

    Subject matter under subclass 30 in which precursor* is replenished or
    added to the liquid precursor* while growth occurs.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are processes in which the precursor* is added
    to the crucible* in any form (solid, liquid, or gas), including those
    arrangements in which a mass of precursor* residing in the crucible* from
    the inception of growth is liquefied while growth occurs, or those
    arrangements in which a moving zone is used; i.e., zone pulling.

    (2)     Note.  Cross-referencing to art collection 912 is precluded as
    unnecessarily duplicative.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for replenishment wherein a sectioned crucible* is utilized.


CLS 117/34
TXT Including significant cooling or heating detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 in which the means or method of providing
    or controlling heating or cooling is significantly specified; i.e., it is
    more than merely recited or provided for.


CLS 117/35
TXT With a significant technique for (a) preliminary preparation or growth
    starting or (b) product handling or growth ending (e.g., arrangement of or
    crystallography of seed):

    Subject matter under subclass 13 in which a significant technique (i.e., a
    technique more than merely recited or provided for) is specified for:
    preparing the precursor* materials or the apparatus; handling the product
    (e.g., severing product from seed holder, manipulatively removing from
    furnace); initiating growth; or terminating growth (e.g., accelerated
    pulling motion).

    (1)     Note.  Placement herein requires more than merely mixing a
    precursor* starting batch.


CLS 117/36
TXT Precursor intentionally contains an excess component or a non-product
    appearing component (e.g., solvent, flux, crystal lattice modifier):

    Subject matter under subclass 13 in which the precursor* is intentionally
    formulated to contain non-crystallizing component or an excess of a
    crystallizing component relative to another crystallizing component.

    (1)     Note.  For example, arsenic in excess molten gallium, from which
    crystallizes gallium arsenide; all the gallium cannot crystallize due to a
    stoichiometric deficiency of available arsenic to do so.

    (2)     Note.  Processes in which the liquid has undesired impurities which
    are rejected from the growing crystal at the precursor*-product interface
    are not proper for placement here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19+,    for processes of pulling and having an intended impurity such as a
    dopant*.


CLS 117/37
TXT Having moving solid-liquid-solid region:

    Subject matter under subclass 11 in which solid precursor* material is
    subjected to localized heating to liquefy a region, thereby forming two
    solid-liquid interfaces, usually substantially parallel to each other,
    followed by moving the means of heating or moving said solid precursor* so
    as to effect additional liquid formation at one interface and concomitant
    cooling at the other interface, thereby obtaining single-crystal* product
    at the trailing solidifying interface.

    (1)     Note.  Common terminology includes crucible-free and floating zone
    methods.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass and its indents include processes in which
    during liquefying an additional component may be introduced so as to
    prepare a product of different composition than the starting solid, so long
    as the process does not meet the criteria of crystal pulling processes.

    (3)     Note.  See the (5) Note located in subclass 13 for discussion of
    distinguishing characteristics among several liquid phase processes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13+,    for processes of growing while pulling crystal from a liquid, such
    as zone pulling or zone drawing.

    219+,   for corresponding apparatus other than coating apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, for a process
    consisting of the single crystallization of a semiconductor material by a
    moving solid-liquid-solid region which is combined with named operations or
    treatments, including those noted in the Class 117 definition, section I,
    C, Note (4).


CLS 117/38
TXT With a step of measuring, testing, or sensing:

    Subject matter under subclass 37 which includes the measuring, testing, or
    sensing of a process condition or parameter during the process.

    (1)     Note.  Since all processes must involve control of process
    parameters, placement here requires more than merely a statement of
    controlling or operating at a certain set of conditions.  Thus, not
    included are mere recitations of ``controlling" or ``maintaining." Further,
    merely reciting a program or cycle or time control is not sufficient for
    placement here.

    (2)     Note.  Equivalent terms include examining, inspecting, observing,
    viewing, and monitoring.


CLS 117/39
TXT With responsive control:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 further including a step of controlling a
    specified parameter or condition in response to the measured, tested, or
    sensed condition or parameter.


CLS 117/40
TXT Liquid precursor penetrating only a portion of a single-crystal, thereby
    liquefying it, and single-crystal formation therefrom which adjoins the
    never-liquefied portion of the single-crystal (e.g., liquid wire migration):

    Subject matter under subclass 37 in which a single-crystal* is formed by
    applying a liquid precursor to liquefy (e.g., melt or dissolve) an existing
    single-crystal and causing or allowing the liquid region to move into the
    single-crystal*, thereby penetrating it, and obtaining single-crystal*
    product from the moving region which adjoins never-liquefied regions of the
    single-crystal*.

    (1)     Note.  Cross-referencing to subclasses 902 or 923 is precluded as
    unnecessarily duplicative.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for similar processes absent a moving zone in which a region of a
    single-crystal* is liquified, the liquid composition is adjusted
    (concurrently or subsequently), and then a single-crystal* is grown.


CLS 117/41
TXT Precursor composition intentionally different from product (e.g., excess
    component, non-product forming component, dopant, non-stoichiometric
    precursor, travelling solvent, flux):

    Subject matter under subclass 37 in which the precursor* composition is
    intentionally different from the single-crystal* product grown therefrom,
    which results in an unusable residual portion.

    (1)     Note.  The unusable residual portion of the precursor* refers to
    the material that would be left if the desired single-crystal* product were
    grown as completely as possible.  Examples of processes proper for
    placement in this subclass are:  alumina single-crystal* grown from
    aluminum solvent or gallium arsenide single-crystal* grown from  gallium
    solvent.

    (2)     Note.  Since the distribution coefficient or segregation factor of
    dopants* is usually not unity, a process in which a doped crystal is formed
    is proper for placement here, except when the reference states that the
    coefficient or the factor is unity.

    (3)     Note.  Processes in which the liquid has unintended or undesired
    impurities which are rejected from the crystal at the precursor*-product
    interface are not proper for placement here.


CLS 117/42
TXT Product has an element in common with the unusable residual portion:

    Subject matter under subclass 41 in which the product single-crystal*
    contains at least one element in common with the unusable residual portion
    of the precursor* composition.

    (1)     Note.  The unusable residual portion of the precursor* refers to
    the material that would be left if the desired single-crystal* product were
    grown as completely as possible.  Examples of processes proper for
    placement in this subclass are:  alumina single-crystal* grown from
    aluminum solvent or gallium arsenide single-crystal* grown from  gallium
    solvent.


CLS 117/43
TXT Distinctly layered product (e.g., twin, SOI, epitaxial crystallization):

    Subject matter under subclass 37 in which the process results in a product
    having distinct layers.

    (1)     Note.  All the layers need not be single-crystal*, nor do they need
    to be formed by the process.

    (2)     Note.  A layer may be a seed* or merely a confining or contacting
    member.


CLS 117/44
TXT Adjacent single-crystal product regions separately formed (e.g., multiple
    non-coextensive passes of a scanning laser):

    Subject matter under subclass 43 in which a liquid precursor* region is
    formed adjacent to a previously grown single-crystal* product region, and
    then a single-crystal* product is grown therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  The adjacently formed product region may or may not have a
    common crystal lattice with the previously (or subsequently) separately
    formed product region.

    (2)     Note.  Where a liquefying pass completely liquefies a previously
    formed single-crystal*, the proper classification will be elsewhere, based
    on the characteristics of the step of single-crystal* growth from the
    liquid.


CLS 117/45
TXT Non-planar crystal grown (e.g., ELO):

    Subject matter under subclass 43 in which the boundary between the layer
    and the grown single-crystal* product is not a simple uniform plane.

    (1)     Note.  For example, a product having recesses, mesas, etc.


CLS 117/46
TXT Movement includes a horizontal component:

    Subject matter under subclass 37 in which the solid-liquid-solid region is
    caused to move in a direction which includes a horizontal component.


CLS 117/47
TXT Flat, free-standing (i.e., substrate-free) product (e.g., ribbon, film,
    sheet):

    Subject matter under subclass 37 in which the single-crystal* product is
    free-standing (i.e., not adhering to a substrate) and is flat (i.e. has two
    substantially planar and parallel faces).

    (1)     Note.  If the disclosed intent is to produce an unlayered product
    but the claims do not recite separation of the crystal product from its
    substrate, then the reference should be placed in both this subclass and in
    subclass 43.

    (2)     Note.  Cross-referencing to art collection 922 is precluded as
    unnecessarily duplicative.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for processes in which the flat product (e.g., ribbon, film, or
    sheet) is part of a layered product.


CLS 117/48
TXT Solid heating means contacting the liquid (e.g., immersed):

    Subject matter under subclass 37 in which solid heating means contacts the
    liquid region.

    (1)     Note. The heating means may be an ``indirect" heat source such as a
    graphite element which is heated by RF induction.

    (2)     Note. Not included here are techniques in which the solid
    precursor* itself is used as an indirect source of heating; i.e., heated by
    RF induction.


CLS 117/49
TXT Liquid zone contacts only precursor and product solids (e.g., crucibleless,
    liquid encapsulant, float zone):

    Subject matter under subclass 37 in which the liquid region is
    characterized by being free of direct contact with any solid (e.g., the
    wall of a crucible* or the surface of a substrate) other than the
    precursor* and the single-crystal* product.


CLS 117/50
TXT Liquefying by energy from an electromagnetic wave or electromagnetic
    particle or arc or plasma (e.g., radiant heat):

    Subject matter under subclass 49 in which the energy to liquefy is at least
    in part provided by electromagnetic wave or electromagnetic particle or arc
    or plasma (e.g., radiant energy, electric current (e.g., Peltier* effect),
    laser beam, RF induction, electron beam, electric discharge).

    (1)     Note.  It is not enough for this and indented subclasses that the
    process uses such energy source to initiate the process; the energy must be
    supplied concurrent with the growth process.


CLS 117/51
TXT Electromagnetic induction:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 in which the energy for liquefying is
    supplied by electric or magnetic induction phenomenon by the influence of a
    neighboring electric or magnetic field (e.g., radio frequency waves).

    (1)     Note.  Heating by radiation or by electron beam is placed above in
    subclass 50, unless accompanied by application of a source of
    electromagnetic induction energy.


CLS 117/52
TXT With liquid control (e.g., vibration damping, stabilizing, melt levitation,
    focusing coil):

    Subject matter under subclass 51 further including liquid control means,
    especially to prevent sagging of or to provide shape to the liquid region.


CLS 117/53
TXT Forming a single-crystal region by liquefying a region of a single-crystal
    and adjusting the composition of the liquid (e.g., alloying, regrowth):

    Subject matter under subclass 11 in which a region of an existing
    single-crystal* is liquefied and the composition of the liquid is adjusted
    (either simultaneously or subsequently) and the liquid is then
    single-crystallized*.

    (1)     Note.  Typically this process forms a semiconductor junction*.

    (2)     Note.  Cross-referencing to art collections 902 and 923 is
    precluded as unnecessarily duplicative.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for similar processes in which a moving solid-liquid-solid region
    is effected.


CLS 117/54
TXT Liquid phase epitaxial growth (LPE):

    Subject matter under subclass 11 characterized by single-crystal* growth
    onto a seed* where the product has a definite crystallographic relationship
    to the seed*, where its thickness is not greater than the same order of
    magnitude than its width and/or length, and where the substrate* remains as
    a significant or integral part of the product in use (i.e., epitaxy*).

    (1)     Note.  See the (5) Note located in subclass 13 for discussion of
    distinguishing characteristics among several liquid phase processes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13+,    for processes of growing while pulling crystals from a liquid.

    75,     for growing whiskers or needles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 400+ for corresponding apparatus.

    427,    Coating Processes, for processes of coating except as specifically
    provided for elsewhere (e.g., single-crystal* growing or onto or with
    semiconductor material), especially subclasses 457- 601 for processes of
    coating combined with direct application of electrical, magnetic, wave, or
    particle energy (e.g., subclasses 581, 594, 601) and subclasses 430.1+ for
    immersion or partial immersion.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, for a process
    consisting of a liquid phase epitaxial growth step of a semiconductor
    material which is combined with named operations or treatments, including
    those noted in the Class 117 definition, section I, C, Note (4).


CLS 117/55
TXT With a step of measuring, testing, or sensing:

    Subject matter under subclass 54 which includes measuring, testing, or
    sensing of a process condition or parameter during the process.

    (1)     Note.  Since all processes must involve control of process
    parameters, placement here requires more than merely a statement of
    controlling or operating at a certain set of conditions.  Thus, not
    included are mere recitations of ``controlling" or ``maintaining." Further,
    merely reciting a program or cycle or time control is not sufficient for
    placement here.

    (2)     Note.  Equivalent terms include examining, inspecting, observing,
    viewing, and monitoring.


CLS 117/56
TXT Including change in a growth-influencing parameter (e.g., composition,
    temperature, concentration, flow rate) during growth (e.g., multilayer or
    junction or superlattice growing):

    Subject matter under subclass 54 in which a growth-influencing parameter,
    such as temperature, precursor* composition, precursor* concentration, or
    precursor* flow rate, is varied during growth and as a result the growth is
    altered, usually so that distinct layers of single-crystal* are formed or
    so that a single-crystal* of varying internal composition is formed (e.g.,
    superlattice).


CLS 117/57
TXT Including a sliding boat system:

    Subject matter under subclass 56 in which a boat (enclosed volume)
    containing a liquid precursor* or a substrate* slides relative to one
    defining wall of the boat (enclosed volume) so as to bring the precursor*
    in contact with the substrate*.


CLS 117/58
TXT With pretreatment of epitaxy substrate (e.g., autodoping control, cleaning,
    polishing, leveling, masking):

    Subject matter under subclass 54 in which an epitaxy* substrate is treated
    prior to the growth step.

    (1)     Note.  Pretreatment includes:  cleaning such as etching; heating
    (e.g., to evolve impurities); or coating (e.g., masking), including when
    such coating is a separate layer in the final product or is removed in a
    subsequent step or is one which is absorbed into the final product (e.g.,
    an adherence enhancing coating).

    (2)     Note.  Preparation of an epitaxy* substrate is not a pretreatment
    step.

    (3)     Note.  Not included as pretreatment are:  merely heating up to
    operating temperature, or moving or positioning the substrate or the
    apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56+,    for processes which grow multiple single-crystal* layers or a
    single-crystal* of varying internal composition.


CLS 117/59
TXT Including a tipping system (e.g., rotation, pivoting):

    Subject matter under subclass 54 in which the liquid nutrient* source is
    contacted with the substrate by dispensing it from a vessel containing it
    by a tipping motion of the vessel.


CLS 117/60
TXT Including a vertical dipping system:

    Subject matter under subclass 54 in which vertical motion immerses the
    substrate in the nutrient*.


CLS 117/61
TXT Including a sliding boat system:

    Subject matter under subclass 54 in which a boat (enclosed volume)
    containing a liquid precursor* or a substrate slides relative to one
    defining wall of the boat (enclosed volume) so as to bring the precursor*
    in contact with the substrate.


CLS 117/62
TXT Electric current controlled or induced growth:

    Subject matter under subclass 54 in which an electric current is used to
    control or induce crystal growth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, for processes of forming a
    single crystal by a method set forth in that class definition and as
    restricted in Class 204, subclass 157.15, (9) Note.  Thus, Class 204 is
    proper for single crystal growth processes which involve glow discharge,
    plasma torch, electrolysis, electrophoresis, sputtering, or vacuum arc
    discharge.


CLS 117/63
TXT Characterized by specified crystallography of the substrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 54 in which the claim specifies the substrate
    by its crystallography (e.g., lattice orientation, Miller index).

    (1)     Note.  Cross-referencing to art collection 902 is precluded as
    unnecessarily duplicative.


CLS 117/64
TXT Precursor composition intentionally contains an excess component or a
    non-product appearing component (e.g., solvent, flux):

    Subject matter under subclass 54 in which the precursor* is intentionally
    formulated to contain a non-crystallizing component or an excess of a
    crystallizing component relative to another crystallizing component.

    (1)     Note.  The unusable portion of the precursor* refers to the
    material that would be left if the desired single-crystal* product were
    grown as completely as possible.  Examples of processes proper for
    placement in this subclass are: alumina single-crystal* grown from aluminum
    solvent or gallium arsenide single-crystal* grown from gallium solvent.

    (2)     Note.  Processes in which the liquid has unintended or undesired
    impurities which are rejected from the crystal at the precursor*-product
    interface are not proper for placement here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for similar processes using a seed pulling technique.

    41+,    for similar processes using a moving solid-liquid-solid zone.

    68+,    for non-LPE processes in which the precursor* is in a solution in
    which the solvent is a liquid at room temperature.

    78+,    for non-LPE processes in which the precursor* is in a solution and
    in which the solvent is a liquid at above room temperature.


CLS 117/65
TXT Having an element in common:

    Subject matter under subclass 64 in which the product single-crystal*
    contains at least one element in common with the unusable portion of the
    precursor* composition.

    (1)     Note.  The unusable portion of the precursor* refers to the
    material that would be left if the desired single-crystal* product were
    grown as completely as possible.  Examples of processes proper for
    placement in this subclass are:  alumina single-crystal* grown from
    aluminum solvent or gallium arsenide single-crystal* grown from  gallium
    solvent.


CLS 117/66
TXT Excess component or non-product appearing component contains an oxygen atom
    (e.g., hydrothermal):

    Subject matter under subclass 65 in which the intentional excess component
    or the intentional non-product forming component contains an oxygen atom
    (e.g., boric acid, lead oxide).

    (1)     Note.  The oxygen does not have to be the element in common with
    the product.


CLS 117/67
TXT Excess component or non-product appearing component contains a metal atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 65 in which the intentional excess component
    or the intentional non-product forming component contains a metal* atom or
    a metal* alloy or an intermetallic compound.

    (1)     Note.  The metal* atom does not have to be the element in common
    with the product.


CLS 117/68
TXT Having growth from a solution comprising a solvent which is liquid at or
    below 20 degrees Celsius (e.g., aqueous solution):

    Subject matter under subclass 11 in which the crystallizing material is
    present in a solution with another material which is a liquid at or below
    20 degrees Celsius.

    (1)     Note.  See the (5) Note located in subclass 13 for discussion of
    distinguishing characteristics among several liquid phase processes.

    (2)     Note.  When the disclosure is generic to liquid solutions and it is
    not clear whether the solvent is liquid at room temperature, search and
    cross-references are appropriate here and in subclasses 73+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13+,    for processes of growing while pulling crystals from a liquid which
    may be liquid at room temperature.


CLS 117/69
TXT With a step of measuring, testing, or sensing:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 which includes measuring, testing, or
    sensing of a process condition or parameter during the process.

    (1)     Note.  Since all processes must involve control of process
    parameters, placement here requires more than merely a statement of
    controlling or operating at a certain set of conditions.  Thus, not
    included are mere recitations of ``controlling" or ``maintaining." Further,
    merely reciting a program or cycle or time control is not sufficient for
    placement here.

    (2)     Note.  Equivalent terms include examining, inspecting, observing,
    viewing, and monitoring.


CLS 117/70
TXT Growth accompanied by material removal (other than the product) from
    solution (e.g., solvent evaporation, osmosis):

    Subject matter under subclass 68 in which material other than the
    single-crystal* product itself is removed from the liquid during growth;
    for example, solvent removal by evaporation or by osmosis.

    (1)     Note.  Where a removed material may also be a component of the
    single-crystal* product, the process is still proper for placement here;
    for example, evaporating water while growing a hydrated phosphate
    single-crystal*.


CLS 117/71
TXT At pressure above 1 atmosphere (e.g., hydrothermal processes):

    Subject matter under subclass 68 in which growth occurs under conditions of
    greater than 1 atmospheric pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224,    for corresponding apparatus other than coating apparatus.


CLS 117/72
TXT Quartz (SiO2) product:

    Subject matter under subclass 71 in which single-crystal* silicon dioxide
    is grown.

    (1)     Note.  Cross-referencing to art collection 943 is precluded as
    unnecessarily duplicative.


CLS 117/73
TXT Having growth from molten state (e.g., solution melt):

    Subject matter under subclass 11 in which the liquid precursor* is a solid
    at room temperature, whether it is a solution or otherwise.

    (1)     Note.  See the (5) Note located in subclass 13 for discussion of
    distinguishing characteristics among several liquid phase processes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19+,    for processes of growing by pulling from a liquid solution
    containing a dopant*.

    64+,    for liquid phase epitaxy* using a precursor* comprising a solution.


CLS 117/74
TXT Including change in a growth-influencing parameter (e.g., composition,
    temperature, concentration, flow rate) during growth (e.g., multilayer or
    junction or superlattice growing):

    Subject matter under subclass 73 in which a growth-influencing parameter,
    such as temperature, precursor* composition, precursor* concentration, or
    precursor* flow rate, is varied during growth and as a result the growth is
    altered, usually so that distinct layers of single-crystals* are formed or
    so that a single-crystal* of varying internal composition is formed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56+,    for processes of liquid phase epitaxy* in which a change in
    growth-influencing parameter occurs.


CLS 117/75
TXT Forming a platelet shape or a small diameter, elongate, generally
    cylindrical shape (e.g., whisker, fiber, needle, filament) (e.g., VLS
    method):

    Subject matter under subclass 73 in which the product formed is stated to
    be or appears to be a platelet shape or a small diameter, elongate,
    generally cylindrical shape (e.g., whisker, fiber, needle, filament).

    (1)     Note.  Search also subclass 87 for processes in which it is not
    clearly evident that a liquid phase is present.

    (2)     Note.  Cross-referencing to art collection 921 is precluded as
    unnecessarily duplicative.


CLS 117/76
TXT Using a scavenger agent (e.g., remove, add, deplete, or redistribute
    impurity or dopant):

    Subject matter under subclass 73 in which an agent is specified to
    scavenge, remove, isolate, or control an impurity such as a dopant*,
    desired or undesired.


CLS 117/77
TXT Gas or vapor state precursor or overpressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 73 in which an overpressure of a precursor*
    is used or a precursor* of the single-crystal* product is delivered during
    the process to the molten precursor* in the gas or vapor state.


CLS 117/78
TXT Precursor composition intentionally different from product (e.g., excess
    component, non-product forming component, dopant, non-stoichiometric
    precursor, solvent, flux):

    Subject matter under subclass 73 in which the precursor* composition is
    intentionally formulated different from the single-crystal* product grown
    therefrom which results in an unusable residual portion.

    (1)     Note.  The unusable residual portion of the precursor* refers to
    the material that would be left if the desired single-crystal* product were
    grown as completely as possible.  Examples of processes proper for
    placement in this subclass are:  alumina single-crystal* grown from
    aluminum solvent or gallium arsenide single-crystal* grown from  gallium
    solvent.

    (2)     Note.  Since the distribution coefficient or segregation factor of
    dopants* is usually not unity, a process in which a doped crystal is formed
    is proper for placement here, except when the reference states that the
    coefficient or the factor is unity.

    (3)     Note.  Processes in which the liquid has undesired impurities which
    are rejected from the crystal at the precursor*-product interface are not
    proper for placement here.

    (4)     Note.  Methods including evaporation of material in the precursor*
    composition, such as an excess component or a non-product forming
    component, are properly placed here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for processes in which the difference in compositions is due to or
    coupled to a gas or vapor state precursor* delivered to the melt during
    growth.


CLS 117/79
TXT Unusable portion contains a metal atom (e.g., diamond or CBN growth in
    metal solvent):

    Subject matter under subclass 78 in which the unusable residual portion of
    the precursor* contains free metal*, metal* alloy, or intermetallic
    compound.

    (1)     Note.  Although Class 117 is proper for original placement of
    single-crystal* diamond making, a mandatory search and cross-reference is
    found in Class 423, subclass 446, which is the locus for all diamond making
    processes (other the than coating processes for Class 427) and products,
    whether or not a chemical reaction is involved.


CLS 117/80
TXT Unusable portion contains an oxygen atom (e.g., oxide flux):

    Subject matter under subclass 78 in which the unusable residual portion of
    the precursor* contains an oxygen atom (e.g., boric acid, lead oxide).


CLS 117/81
TXT Growth confined by a solid member other than seed or product (e.g.,
    Bridgman-Stockbarger method):

    Subject matter under subclass 73 in which a solid member, other than the
    seed or product, confines growth in at least one direction and at least
    partially defines the shape of the product; for example, a crucible* or a
    mold.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13+,    for processes of growing a single-crystal* while pulling and
    subclasses 16 and 23+ when the solid-liquid interface may be contacted or
    confined by a solid member shaping means.

    43+,    for processes of moving zone crystallization in which the
    solid-liquid interface may be confined or contacted by a solid.

    54+,    for processes of epitaxy*.

    223,    for corresponding apparatus other than coating apparatus.


CLS 117/82
TXT Including vertical precursor-product interface (e.g., horizontal Bridgman):

    Subject matter under subclass 81 in which growth is characterized by a
    vertical precursor*-product interface, and therefor, the solid-liquid
    interface moves horizontally.


CLS 117/83
TXT Having bottom-up crystallization (e.g., VFG, VGF):

    Subject matter under subclass 81 in which crystal growth initiates at the
    lowest point in the melt and progresses up; e.g., vertical freeze gradient
    (VFG).


CLS 117/84
TXT FORMING FROM VAPOR OR GASEOUS STATE (E.G., VPE, SUBLIMATION):

    Subject matter under the class definition in which the single-crystal* is
    grown by depositing material directly from the vapor or gaseous state;
    i.e., the immediate-precursor* is in a vapor or gaseous state.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11+,    for processes in which the crystal grows from an
    immediate-precursor* in a liquid or supercritical state, even if the liquid
    or supercritical material (or a precursor* thereof) was present as a gas or
    vapor state during the process.

    200+,   for corresponding apparatus other than coating apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 715+ for corresponding VPE coating
    apparatus.

    427,    Coating Processes, for processes of depositing a coating other than
    single-crystal* (e.g., polycrystalline or amorphous) on a substrate, except
    as specifically provided for elsewhere; especially subclasses 457+ for
    processes of coating combined with direct application of electrical,
    magnetic, wave, or particle energy (e.g., subclasses 497, 509, 523+, 569+,
    580, 582+, 585+, and 593), and subclasses 248.1+ for coating by vapor, gas,
    or smoke.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, for a process
    consisting of a vapor of gaseous coating step of or with a semiconductor
    material, or for a process including a step of growing a single-crystal* of
    a semiconductor material which is combined with named operations or
    treatments, including those noted in the Class 117 definition, section I,
    C, Note (4).


CLS 117/85
TXT With a step of measuring, testing, or sensing:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 which includes the measuring, testing, or
    sensing of a process condition or parameter during the process.

    (1)     Note.  Since all processes must involve control of process
    parameters, placement here requires more than merely a statement of
    controlling or operating at a certain set of conditions.  Thus, not
    included are mere recitations of ``controlling" or ``maintaining." Further,
    merely reciting a program or cycle or time control is not sufficient for
    placement here.

    (2)     Note.  Equivalent terms include examining, inspecting, observing,
    viewing, and monitoring.


CLS 117/86
TXT With responsive control:

    Subject matter under subclass 85 further including a step of controlling a
    specified parameter or condition in response to the measured, tested, or
    sensed condition or parameter.


CLS 117/87
TXT Forming a platelet shape or a small diameter, elongate, generally
    cylindrical shape (e.g., whisker, fiber, needle, filament):

    Subject matter under subclass 84 in which the product formed is stated to
    be or appears to be a platelet shape or a small diameter, elongate,
    generally cylindrical shape (e.g., whisker, fiber, needle, filament).

    (1)     Note.  Search also subclass 75 for processes in which it is unclear
    whether a liquid phase is present.

    (2)     Note.  Cross-referencing to art collections 921 or 922 is precluded
    as unnecessarily duplicative.


CLS 117/88
TXT With decomposition of a precursor (except impurity or dopant precursor)
    composed of diverse atoms (e.g., CVD):

    Subject matter under subclass 84 in which a precursor* molecule composed of
    different atoms, other than an impurity or a dopant* precursor*, is
    involved in a decomposition chemical reaction* during the growth process.


CLS 117/89
TXT Including change in a growth-influencing parameter (e.g., composition,
    temperature, concentration, flow rate) during growth (e.g., multilayer or
    junction or superlattice growing):

    Subject matter under subclass 88 in which a growth-influencing parameter,
    such as temperature, precursor* composition, precursor* concentration, or
    precursor* flow rate, is varied (e.g., modulated) during growth and as a
    result growth is altered, usually so that distinct layers of
    single-crystals* are formed or so that a single-crystal* of varying
    internal composition is formed (e.g., superlattice).

    (1)     Note.  Variations which occur during initiating and terminating
    growth are not included as changes in a growth-influencing parameter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98,     for movement of substrate or vapor or gas supply means during
    growth; e.g., rotation of wafer.


CLS 117/90
TXT With pretreatment of substrate (e.g., coating, ablating):

    Subject matter under subclass 89 in which a substrate* is treated prior to
    growth.

    (1)     Note.  Pretreatment includes:  cleaning such as etching; heating
    (e.g., to evolve impurities); or coating, other than single-crystal*
    coating (e.g., masking), including when such coating is a separate layer in
    the final product or is removed in a subsequent step or one which is
    absorbed into the final product (e.g., an adherence enhancing coating).

    (2)     Note.  Multiple single-crystal* growth processes are not proper for
    placement here based on one of the single-crystal* growth steps.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    for specified arrangement of or crystallographic orientation of the
    substrate.


CLS 117/91
TXT With a chemical reaction (except ionization) in a disparate zone to form a
    precursor:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 including a step of forming a precursor*,
    including dopant* precursor*, by a chemical reaction* (except ionization)
    in a location separate from the deposition zone.

    (1)     Note.  Not included here are processes in which the precursor*
    undergoes chemical reaction* immediately at the deposition zone.

    (2)     Note.  Cross-referencing between this subclass and subclass 93 is
    not necessary when based on the same step or steps.  However, when it is
    unclear whether the basis of placement is based on the same step,
    cross-referencing is appropriate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92,     for similar processes involving ionization.


CLS 117/92
TXT Using an energy beam or field, a particle beam or field, or a plasma (e.g.,
    ionization, PECVD, CBE, MOMBE, RF induction, laser):

    Subject matter under subclass 89 in which the process utilizes a particle
    beam or an energy beam or a particle field or an energy field or a plasma.

    (1)     Note.  For example:  laser, electron, chemical, or molecular beams;
    plasma; RF, magnetic, or electric fields; ionization.

    (2)     Note.  The decomposition reaction may be related to or unrelated to
    the energy beam or field, particle beam or field, or plasma.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90,     for processes in which the substrate is pretreated with an energy
    or particle beam or field, or plasma.

    103,    for similar processes in which there is no change in a
    growth-influencing parameter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, for processes of forming a
    single crystal by a method set forth in that class definition and as
    restricted in Class 204, subclass 157.15, (9) Note.  Thus, Class 204 is
    proper for single crystal growth processes which involve glow discharge,
    plasma torch, electrolysis,  electrophoresis, sputtering, or vacuum arc
    discharge.

    427,    Coating Processes, for processes of depositing a coating other than
    single-crystal* (e.g., polycrystalline or amorphous) on a substrate, except
    as specifically provided for elsewhere, especially subclasses 457+ for
    processes of coating combined with direct application of electrical,
    magnetic, wave, or particle energy (e.g., subclasses 497, 509, 523+, 569+,
    580, 582+, 585+, and 593) and subclasses 248.1+ for coating by vapor, gas,
    or smoke.


CLS 117/93
TXT With significant flow manipulation or condition, other than merely
    specifying the components or their sequence or both:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 in which significant gas or vapor flow
    manipulation or condition, other than merely specifying the components of
    precursors*, or their sequence, or both, is specified.

    (1)     Note.  For example:  stagnant zone provided; coaxial vapor inlet
    described; horizontally or tangentially directed flow specified; flow
    through a porous medium (e.g., frit); backflow control means; laminar or
    turbulent flow specified; mixing order or arrangement specified (more than
    merely mixing); flow rates given; proportions of constituents or flows
    given; or specified temperature or pressure of the gas or vapor flow
    specified (more than specifying the temperature or pressure of the reaction
    chamber).

    (2)     Note.  Not included here are claims merely reciting alternating
    flows or layers deposited (e.g., superlattice) absent a recitation of some
    significant flow manipulation or condition provided for in this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  Cross-referencing between this subclass and subclass 91 is
    not necessary when based on the same step or steps.


CLS 117/94
TXT With pretreatment or preparation of a base (e.g., annealing):

    Subject matter under subclass 88 in which a base* is prepared or is subject
    to treatment prior to single-crystal* growth.

    (1)     Note.  Pretreatment includes:  cleaning such as etching; heating
    (e.g., to evolve impurities); or coating (e.g., masking), including when
    such coating is a separate layer in the final product or is removed in a
    subsequent step or is one which is absorbed into the final product (e.g.,
    an adherence enhancing coating).

    (2)     Note.  Placement here is proper for claims directed to preparation
    of the base* when combined with a step of single-crystal* growth.

    (3)     Note.  Not included as pretreatment are:  merely heating up to
    operating temperature, or moving or positioning substrate or apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89+,    for processes which include a change in growth-influencing
    parameter during crystal growth; e.g., making superlattices, layers,
    junction.

    101,    for specified arrangement of or crystallographic orientation of the
    substrate.

    106,    for similar processes involving pretreatment or preparation of the
    substrate and not involving a decomposition reaction of the precursor*.


CLS 117/95
TXT Coating (e.g., masking, implanting):

    Subject matter under subclass 94 in which the pretreatment is coating of
    the base*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89+,    for processes in which multiple layers of single-crystal* are
    formed.


CLS 117/96
TXT For autodoping control:

    Subject matter under subclass 95 in which there is a disclosed intent to
    control autodoping during growth by performing the coating.


CLS 117/97
TXT Material removal (e.g., etching, cleaning, polishing):

    Subject matter under subclass 94 in which the pretreatment involves
    removing material from the base*.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of subject matter proper for this subclass are:
    uniform material removal from the base* surface, such as etching or
    non-uniform removal such as exposing a seed* region (e.g., by removing a
    masking material).


CLS 117/98
TXT With a movement of substrate or vapor or gas supply means during growth
    (e.g., substrate rotation):

    Subject matter under subclass 88 in which the process employed includes
    simultaneous growth and movement of (a) the substrate through a vapor or
    gas supply field or (b) the vapor or gas supply means (e.g., supply tube)
    relative to the substrate (e.g., rotation of the substrate in the
    deposition chamber).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for merely moving a substrate
    from one station to another without simultaneous deposition and movement.


CLS 117/99
TXT With a chemical reaction (except ionization) in a disparate zone to form a
    precursor (e.g., transport processes):

    Subject matter under subclass 88 including a step of forming a precursor*,
    including dopant* precursor*, by a chemical reaction* (except ionization)
    in a location separate from the deposition zone.

    (1)     Note.  Not included here are processes in which the precursor*
    undergoes chemical reaction* immediately at the deposition zone.

    (2)     Note.  Cross-referencing between this subclass and subclass 102 is
    not necessary when based on the same step or steps.  However, when it is
    unclear, cross-referencing is appropriate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for similar processes involving ionization.


CLS 117/100
TXT Fully-sealed or vacuum-maintained chamber (e.g., ampoule):

    Subject matter under subclass 99 in which a sealed chamber (e.g., ampoule)
    is used or in which the only communication between a reaction chamber and
    the external environment is a vacuum-maintaining means.


CLS 117/101
TXT Characterized by specified crystallography or arrangement of substrate
    (e.g., wafer cassette, Miller index):

    Subject matter under subclass 88 in which (a) the arrangement of the
    substrate is specified, for example a wafer cartridge or tray or a bank of
    wafers, or (b) the crystallography of the substrate is specified; e.g.,
    crystal lattice orientation, Miller index.

    (1)     Note.  Cross-referencing to art collection 902 is precluded as
    unnecessarily duplicative.


CLS 117/102
TXT With significant flow manipulation or condition, other than merely
    specifying the components or their sequence or both:

    Subject matter under subclass 88 in which significant gas or vapor flow
    manipulation or condition, other than merely specifying the components of
    precursors* or their sequence or both, is specified.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of subject matter proper for this subclass are:
    stagnant zone provided; coaxial vapor inlet described; horizontally or
    tangentially directed flow specified; flow through a porous medium (e.g.,
    frit); backflow control means; laminar or turbulent flow specified; mixing
    order or arrangement specified (more than merely mixing); flow rates given;
    proportions of constituents or flows given; or specified temperature or
    pressure of the gas or vapor flow specified (more than specifying the
    temperature or pressure of the reaction chamber).

    (2)     Note.  Not included here are claims merely reciting alternating
    flows or layers deposited (e.g., superlattice) absent a recitation of some
    significant flow manipulation or condition provided for in this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  Cross-referencing between this subclass and subclass 99 is
    not necessary when based on the same step or steps.


CLS 117/103
TXT Using an energy beam or field, a particle beam or field, or a plasma (e.g.,
    ionization, PECVD, CBE, MOMBE, RF induction, laser):

    Subject matter under subclass 88 in which the process utilizes a particle
    beam or an energy beam or a particle field or an energy field or a plasma
    during growth.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of subject matter proper for this subclass are:
    laser, electron, chemical, or (some) molecular beams; plasma; RF, magnetic,
    or electric fields; or ionization.

    (2)     Note.  Some MBE processes are proper for this subclass, however
    most do not involve a decomposition reaction of a precursor*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92,     for similar processes in which there is also a change in a
    growth-influencing parameter during growth; e.g., to grow layers, junction,
    superlattice.

    94,     for processes in which the substrate is pretreated with an energy
    beam or field, particle beam or field, or plasma.

    108,    for similar processes in which there is no chemical decomposition
    reaction of precursor* (e.g., most MBE processes).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, for processes of forming a
    single crystal by a method set forth in that class definition and as
    restricted in Class 204, subclass 157.15, (9) Note.  Thus, Class 204 is
    proper for single crystal growth processes which involve  glow discharge,
    plasma torch, electrolysis,  electrophoresis, sputtering, or vacuum arc
    discharge.


CLS 117/104
TXT Using an organic precursor (e.g., propane, metal-organic, MOCVD, MOVPE):

    Subject matter under subclass 88 in which the product contains atoms
    derived from a precursor* which is an organic compound as defined in Class
    532.


CLS 117/105
TXT Including change in a growth-influencing parameter (e.g., composition,
    temperature, concentration, flow rate) during growth (e.g., multilayer or
    junction or superlattice growing):

    Subject matter under subclass 84 in which a growth-influencing parameter,
    such as temperature, precursor* composition, precursor* concentration, or
    precursor* flow rate, is varied (e.g., modulated) during growth and as a
    result growth is altered, usually so that distinct layers of
    single-crystals* are formed or so that a single-crystal* of varying
    internal composition is formed (e.g., superlattice).

    (1)     Note.  Initiating and terminating growth are not included as
    changes in a growth-influencing parameter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for movement of substrate or vapor or gas supply means during
    growth.


CLS 117/106
TXT With pretreatment or preparation of a base (e.g., annealing):

    Subject matter under subclass 84 in which a base* is prepared or in which a
    base* is subject to treatment prior to single-crystal* growth.

    (1)     Note.  Pretreatment includes:  cleaning such as etching; heating
    (e.g., to evolve impurities); or coating (e.g., masking), including when
    such coating is a separate layer in the final product or is removed in a
    subsequent step or is one which is absorbed into the final product (e.g.,
    an adherence enhancing coating).

    (2)     Note.  Placement here is proper for claims directed to preparation
    of the base* when combined with a step of single-crystal* growth.

    (3)     Note.  Not included as pretreatment are:  merely heating up to
    operating temperature, or moving or positioning substrate or apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89+,    for processes involving pretreatment or preparation of the
    substrate and involving a decomposition reaction of a precursor*.

    105,    for processes which include a change in growth-influencing
    parameter during crystal growth (e.g., making superlattice, layers,
    junction).


CLS 117/107
TXT With movement of substrate or vapor or gas supply means during growth:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 in which the process employed includes
    simultaneous growth and movement of (a) the substrate through a supply gas
    or vapor field or (b) the gas or vapor supply means (e.g., supply tube)
    relative to the substrate; e.g., rotation of substrate in the deposition
    chamber.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for merely moving a substrate
    from one station to another without simultaneous crystal growth.


CLS 117/108
TXT Using an energy beam or field, a particle beam or field, or a plasma (e.g.,
    MBE):

    Subject matter under subclass 84 in which the process utilizes a particle
    beam or an energy beam or a particle field or an energy field or a plasma
    during growth.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of subject matter proper for this subclass are:
    laser, electron, chemical, or molecular beams; plasma; or RF, magnetic, or
    electric fields.


CLS 117/109
TXT Fully-sealed or vacuum-maintained chamber (e.g., ampoule):

    Subject matter under subclass 84 in which a sealed chamber (e.g., ampoule)
    is used or in which the only communication between a reaction chamber and
    the external environment is a vacuum-maintaining means.


CLS 117/200
TXT APPARATUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising apparatus for growing
    single-crystal* (i.e., non-coating single-crystal* growing apparatus).

    (1)     Note.  See section I, C and E, for defining notes for apparatus of
    this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, for apparatus for depositing a coating which may
    be single-crystal*, especially subclasses 400+ for liquid phase epitaxy*
    and subclasses 715+ for vapor phase epitaxy*.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    345 for differential etching apparatus.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, for apparatus for forming
    single crystal by class defined processes with exceptions noted at (C) and
    (5) Note in the class definition.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving or Sterilizing, subclasses 186+ for apparatus for forming single
    crystals by a method of Class 204, subclasses 157.15+.


CLS 117/201
TXT With means for measuring, testing, or sensing:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 which includes means for measuring,
    testing, or sensing a process condition or parameter during the process.

    (1)     Note.  Since all processes and apparatus require controlling means
    in order to provide satisfactory operation, placement here requires more
    than merely a statement of controlling or operating at a certain set of
    conditions.  Thus, not included are mere recitations of ``means to control"
    absent a recitation of a means for measuring, sensing, or testing some
    parameter or condition.  Further, merely reciting a program or cycle or
    time control is not sufficient for placement here.

    (2)     Note.  Equivalent terms include examining, inspecting, observing,
    viewing, and monitoring.


CLS 117/202
TXT With responsive control means:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 which includes means for controlling a
    specified parameter or condition in response to the measured, tested, or
    sensed condition or parameter.


CLS 117/203
TXT With a window or port for visual observation or examination:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 which includes a window or port for
    visual (i.e., human) observation, viewing, or examination of the growth
    process or of an intimately related process parameter or condition.


CLS 117/204
TXT With means for treating single-crystal (e.g., heat treating):

    Subject matter under subclass 200 in which the apparatus further includes
    means for treating a single-crystal*, and said means provides that the
    single-crystal* remains in the solid state and that the result is a
    single-crystal*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for processes of growth with a subsequent step of heat treating or
    deliberate controlled cooling of the single-crystal*.


CLS 117/205
TXT For forming a platelet shape or a small diameter, elongate, generally
    cylindrical shape (e.g., whisker, fiber, needle, filament):

    Subject matter under subclass 200 in which the apparatus produces
    single-crystal* product which is stated to be or appears to be a platelet
    shape or a small diameter, elongate, generally cylindrical shape (e.g.,
    whisker, fiber, needle, filament).

    (1)     Note.  Cross-referencing to art collections 921 or 922 is precluded
    as unnecessarily duplicative.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for processes forming platelet or small diameter, elongate,
    generally cylindrical-shaped single-crystal* from the molten state.

    87,     for processes forming platelet or small diameter, elongate,
    generally cylindrical-shaped single-crystal* from the vapor or gaseous
    state.


CLS 117/206
TXT For crystallization from liquid or supercritical state:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 in which the apparatus provides means to
    produce a product from an immediate-precursor* which is in a liquid or
    supercritical state.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11+,    for corresponding processes.


CLS 117/207
TXT Crucibleless apparatus having means providing movement of discrete droplets
    or solid particles to thin-film precursor (e.g., Verneuil method):

    Subject matter under subclass 206 in which droplets or solid particles of
    precursor* are moved as discrete entities to a thin-film liquid precursor*
    mass from which the single-crystal* product is grown and which precursor is
    not contained by a crucible.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for corresponding processes.


CLS 117/208
TXT Seed pulling:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 including features intended for seed
    pulling which is characterized by bringing a seed* into contact with a
    liquid precursor* (or nutrient*) media to initiate and conduct the growth
    process by then withdrawing it under conditions which permit crystal
    formation while pulling.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 13, (5) Note, for discussion of the differences
    between seed pulling and several other liquid state crystallization
    processes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13+,    for corresponding processes.


CLS 117/209
TXT Including solid member shaping means other than seed or product (e.g., EDFG
    die):

    Subject matter under subclass 208 including a solid member (i.e.,
    mechanical or physical shaper or die), other than the seed or the
    single-crystal* product, is provided sufficiently close to the
    precursor*-product interface to affect, and at least partially define, the
    shape of the crystal as it is pulled from the liquid and passes against the
    shaping means.

    (1)     Note.  The solid member may be pulled with and become attached to
    or embedded in the crystal; e.g., string-stabilized web pulling.


CLS 117/210
TXT Means for forming a hollow structure (e.g., tube, polygon):

    Subject matter under subclass 209 which forms a crystal having a hollow
    structure.

    (1)     Note.  Cross-referencing to art collection 920 is precluded as
    unnecessarily duplicative.


CLS 117/211
TXT Including means forming a flat shape (e.g., ribbon):

    Subject matter under subclass 209 which forms a crystal having two
    substantially planar and parallel faces.

    (1)     Note.  Cross-referencing to art collection 922 is precluded as
    unnecessarily duplicative.


CLS 117/212
TXT Pulling includes a horizontal component:

    Subject matter under subclass 211 in which the pulling motion to form the
    flat single-crystal* product includes at least some horizontal component.

    (1)     Note.  Cross-referencing to art collection 922 is precluded as
    unnecessarily duplicative.


CLS 117/213
TXT Including a sectioned crucible (e.g., double crucible, baffle):

    Subject matter under subclass 208 in which the crucible* has sections
    clearly defined by a physical member, at least two of which sections
    contain liquid precursor*; e.g., double crucible*.


CLS 117/214
TXT Including details of precursor replenishment:

    Subject matter under subclass 208 in which precursor* replenishment means
    are described in some detail.

    (1)     Note.  Mere provision for precursor* replenishment is not
    sufficient for placement here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213,    for precursor* replenishment details which involve a sectioned
    crucible*.


CLS 117/215
TXT Including sealing means details:

    Subject matter under subclass 208 in which sealing means are described in
    some detail.

    (1)     Note.  Mere provision for sealing means is not sufficient for
    placement here.


CLS 117/216
TXT Including a fully-sealed or vacuum-maintained crystallization chamber
    (e.g., ampoule):

    Subject matter under subclass 208 in which the crystallization chamber is
    completely isolated from the exterior environment or communicates with it
    only through vacuum-maintaining means.


CLS 117/217
TXT Including heating or cooling details (e.g., shield configuration):

    Subject matter under subclass 208 in which temperature affecting element or
    means (such as  RF susceptor,  radiation shield or reflector, cooling
    coils, or  heating element) is described in some detail.

    (1)     Note.  Mere provision for heating or cooling means or element is
    not sufficient for placement here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, for electrical heating devices of generally
    disclosed utility and not combined with single-crystal* forming means.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus having a specific electrical heating structure and of generally
    disclosed utility and for heating a material.  Class 117 takes apparatus
    claimed or solely disclosed for single-crystal* growing.


CLS 117/218
TXT Including details of means providing product movement (e.g., shaft guides,
    servo means):

    Subject matter under subclass 208 in which an element or means for
    providing movement of the single-crystal* product (such as pulling or
    rotating linkages, a pulling carriage or guide, shaft guides, servo means,
    or a differential gear) is described in some detail.

    (1)     Note.  Merely providing movement means or an element is not
    sufficient for placement here.


CLS 117/219
TXT Having means for producing a moving solid-liquid-solid zone:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 including means for subjecting solid
    precursor* material to localized heating to liquefy a region, thereby
    forming two solid-liquid interfaces, usually substantially parallel to each
    other, followed by moving the means of heating or moving said solid
    precursor* so as to effect additional liquid formation at one interface and
    concomitant cooling at the other interface, thereby obtaining
    single-crystal* product at the trailing solidifying interface.

    (1)     Note.  Common terminology includes crucible-free or floating zone
    melting apparatus.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass and its indents include apparatus having means
    for introducing an additional component so as to prepare a product of
    different composition than the starting solid.

    (3)     Note.  See the (5) Note located in subclass 13 for discussion of
    distinguishing characteristics among several liquid phase processes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37+,    for corresponding processes.


CLS 117/220
TXT Including a solid member other than seed or product contacting the liquid
    (e.g., crucible, immersed heating element):

    Subject matter under subclass 219 in which a solid member, other than the
    seed or single-crystal* product, contacts the crystallizing liquid.


CLS 117/221
TXT Having details of a stabilizing feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 in which means for stabilizing the
    apparatus are provided in some detail.

    (1)     Note.  Merely providing for stabilizing means is not sufficient for
    placement here.


CLS 117/222
TXT Including heating or cooling details:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 in which temperature affecting element or
    means (such as RF susceptor, radiation shield or reflector, cooling coils,
    or heating element) is described in some detail.

    (1)     Note.  Mere provision for heating or cooling means or element is
    not sufficient for placement here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, for electrical heating devices of generally
    disclosed utility and not combined with single-crystal* forming means.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus having a specific electrical heating structure and of generally
    disclosed utility and for heating a material, especially subclass 17 for
    apparatus for zone melting by electron beam furnace and subclass 139 for
    apparatus for zone melting by induction heating.  Class 117 takes apparatus
    claimed or solely disclosed for single-crystal* growing.


CLS 117/223
TXT Shape defined by a solid member other than seed or product (e.g.,
    Bridgman-Stockbarger):

    Subject matter under subclass 206 in which a solid member, other that the
    seed or the product, at least partially shapes the single-crystal* product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68+,    73+, and especially 81+, for corresponding processes.


CLS 117/224
TXT Including pressurized crystallization means (e.g., hydrothermal):

    Subject matter under subclass 206 including means for providing or
    containing pressure greater than one atmosphere in the crystallization
    chamber during growth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71+     and 73+, for corresponding processes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 77 for ultra-high-pressure apparatus.

               CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS

    Note.  Where there is an IPC subclass (or EPO-modified IPC subclass) which
    substantially encompasses the subject matter of an art collection, even
    though it may encompass other subject matter as well, it is noted in
    brackets, {}.


CLS 117/900
TXT APPARATUS CHARACTERIZED BY COMPOSITION OR TREATMENT THEREOF (E.G., SURFACE
    FINISH, SURFACE COATING):

    A collection of art in which an apparatus under the class definition is
    specified in terms of its material of construction or in terms of a
    treatment of it.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, for apparatus for forming coatings of
    single-crystal* products.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 240+ for chemical reaction of a
    specific material of construction (and not provided for in subclasses 129+).


CLS 117/901
TXT LEVITATION, REDUCED GRAVITY, MICROGRAVITY, SPACE:

    A collection of art under the class definition which discloses growing
    single-crystal* in outer space, suspended in air, in low gravity, or in
    simulated conditions thereof.


CLS 117/902
TXT SPECIFIED ORIENTATION, SHAPE, CRYSTALLOGRAPHY, OR SIZE OF SEED OR SUBSTRATE:

    A collection of art under the class definition which specifies the
    orientation, shape, crystallography, or size of the seed or substrate
    material (e.g., lattice orientation, Miller index).

    (1)     Note.  A complete search would include subclasses 40, 63, and 101.
    Cross- referencing therewith is precluded as unnecessarily duplicative.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     for processes of making single-crystals* by liquid phase epitaxy*
    in which the crystallographic orientation of the substrate is specified.

    101,    for processes of making single-crystals* which includes a
    decomposition reaction of a precursor* (except an impurity or dopant
    precursor*) and further specifies the substrate* crystallography.


CLS 117/903
TXT DENDRITE OR WEB OR CAGE TECHNIQUE:

    A collection of art under the class definition which discloses employing
    the dendrite or web or cage technique to make single-crystal*.


CLS 117/904
TXT LASER BEAM:

    A collection of art under the class definition which discloses employing a
    laser beam in the growing of single-crystal*.


CLS 117/905
TXT ELECTRON BEAM:

    A collection of art under the class definition which discloses employing an
    electron beam in the growing of single-crystal*.


CLS 117/906
TXT SPECIAL ATMOSPHERE OTHER THAN VACUUM OR INERT:

    A collection of art under the class definition which discloses providing or
    maintaining a specified atmosphere, other than vacuum or inert, during
    single-crystal* growing.


CLS 117/907
TXT Refluxing atmosphere:

    A collection of art under the art collection 906 wherein the atmosphere
    contains a component which is in the single-crystal* and which is condensed
    and evaporated during the growing of the single-crystal*.


CLS 117/910
TXT DOWNWARD PULLING:

    A collection of art under the class definition involving the downward
    pulling of the growing single-crystal*.


CLS 117/911
TXT SEED OR ROD HOLDERS:

    A collection of art disclosing apparatus under the class definition which
    includes means for holding or manipulating a seed or a substrate which is
    intended to facilitate single-crystal* growing.


CLS 117/912
TXT REPLENISHING LIQUID PRECURSOR, OTHER THAN A MOVING ZONE:

    A collection of art under the class definition disclosing replenishing the
    liquid nutrient* for single-crystal* formation other than a moving zone
    type of process.

    (1)     Note.  A complete search would include subclass 33.
    Cross-referencing therewith is precluded as unnecessarily duplicative.


CLS 117/913
TXT GRAPHOEPITAXY OR SURFACE MODIFICATION TO ENHANCE EPITAXY:

    A collection of art under the class definition which discloses modifying
    the surface of an epitaxy* substrate* to enhance or improve the growth or
    the product.


CLS 117/914
TXT CRYSTALLIZATION ON A CONTINUOUS MOVING SUBSTRATE OR COOLING SURFACE (E.G.,
    WHEEL, CYLINDER, BELT):

    A collection of art under the class definition which discloses growing
    single-crystal* on a continuous moving substrate* or cooling surface, such
    as a wheel, conveyor, or drum.


CLS 117/915
TXT SEPARATING FROM SUBSTRATE:

    A collection of art under the class definition which discloses separating a
    single-crystal* from its seed* or substrate*.


CLS 117/916
TXT OXYGEN TESTING:

    A collection of art under the class definition which discloses detecting
    oxygen during the growth of the single-crystal* product.


CLS 117/917
TXT MAGNETIC:

    A collection of art under the class definition which discloses using a
    magnet during the growth of the single-crystal* product.

    (1)     Note.  A complete search would include subclass 32.
    Cross-referencing therewith is precluded as unnecessarily duplicative.


CLS 117/918
TXT SINGLE-CRYSTAL WAVEGUIDE:

    A collection of art under the class definition which discloses growing
    single-crystal* intended for use as a waveguide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    385,    Optical Waveguides, for passive optical elements effecting a
    deviation of light rays or a modification in the character or properties of
    the light, especially subclasses 129+ for planar optical waveguides.


CLS 117/919
TXT Organic:

    A collection of art under the art collection 918 in which the crystal is
    composed of organic material.


CLS 117/920
TXT SINGLE-CRYSTALS HAVING A HOLLOW (E.G., TUBE, CONCAVO-CONVEX) {C30B 29/66}:

    A collection of art under the class definition which discloses growing
    single-crystal* having a hollow such as a tube.

    (1)     Note.  A complete search would include subclasses 25 and 210.
    Cross-referencing therewith is precluded as unnecessarily duplicative.


CLS 117/921
TXT SMALL DIAMETER, ELONGATE, GENERALLY CYLINDRICAL SINGLE-CRYSTAL (E.G.,
    WHISKERS, NEEDLES, FILAMENTS, FIBERS, WIRES) {C30B 29/62}:

    A collection of art under the class definition which discloses growing
    small diameter, elongate, generally cylindrical single-crystal* such as
    whiskers, needles, filaments, fibers, or wires.

    (1)     Note.  A complete search would include subclasses 75, 87, and 205.
    Cross- referencing therewith is precluded as unnecessarily duplicative.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for processes of growing small diameter, elongate, generally
    cylindrical single-crystal* from a melt.

    87,     for processes of growing small diameter, elongate, generally
    cylindrical single-crystal* from vapor or gas state.

    205,    for apparatus for growing small diameter, elongate, generally
    cylindrical single-crystal*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, etc., art collections 952 and 954
    for metal* whiskers or flakes.


CLS 117/922
TXT FREE-STANDING, FLAT SINGLE-CRYSTAL (E.G., PLATELET, PLATE, STRIP, DISK,
    TAPE, SHEET, RIBBON) {C30B 29/64}:

    A collection of art under the class definition which discloses growing
    single-crystal* of substantially flat shape (having two substantially
    planar and parallel faces); e.g., plate, strip, disk, tape, sheet, or
    ribbon.

    (1)     Note.  A complete search would include subclasses 16, 26, 27, 47,
    87, 211, and 212.  Cross-referencing therewith is precluded as
    unnecessarily duplicative.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for processes of growing shaped single-crystal* by pulling method
    including responsive control.

    26+,    for processes of growing flat single-crystal* by pulling method.

    47,     for processes of growing flat, free-standing single-crystal* by
    moving zone method.

    903,    for dendrite-containing, flat-shaped single-crystal*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, etc., art collections 952 and 954
    for metal* whiskers or flakes.


CLS 117/923
TXT SINGLE-CRYSTAL OF COMPLEX GEOMETRY (E.G., PATTERNED, ELO) {C30B 29/66}:

    A collection of art under the class definition which discloses growing
    single-crystal* having complex geometric shapes such as patterns, ELO
    products, or dental braces.

    (1)     Note.  A complete search would include subclasses 40 and 53.
    Cross-referencing therewith is precluded as unnecessarily duplicative.


CLS 117/924
TXT HOMOGENEOUS COMPOSITION PRODUCT WITH ENLARGED CRYSTALS OR ORIENTED-CRYSTALS
    (E.G., COLUMNAR):

    A collection of art under the class definition which discloses processing
    homogeneous (single composition) material having multiple crystals which
    are intentionally enlarged or are oriented-crystal*.


CLS 117/925
TXT ORGANIC COMPOUND CONTAINING SINGLE-CRYSTAL {C30B 29/54}:

    A collection of art under the class definition which discloses growing a
    single-crystal* comprising an organic compound.


CLS 117/926
TXT Tartrate containing (e.g., Rochelle salt) {C30B 29/56}:

    A collection of art under art collection 925 disclosing growing a
    single-crystal* comprising tartrate or a salt thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    562,    Organic Compounds, subclass 580 for methods of purification or
    recovery of tartrate.


CLS 117/927
TXT Macromolecular compound containing (i.e., more than about 100 atoms) {C30B
    29/58}:

    A collection of art under art collection 925 disclosing growing a
    single-crystal* comprising an organic molecule having more than about 100
    atoms (e.g., proteins, polymers).


CLS 117/928
TXT SINGLE-CRYSTAL OF PURE OR       INTENTIONALLY DOPED ELEMENT {C30B 29/02}:

    A collection of art under the class definition which discloses growing a
    pure or intentionally doped* single-crystal* of an element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 122.1+ for methods of forming
    directionally solidified material, especially subclass 122.2 for methods of
    forming single crystal material, in all cases being non-semiconductor
    metals*, alloys, or intermetallics in a mold.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 62.3+ for barrier layer compositions, per
    se (i.e., dopant* containing semiconductor materials).


CLS 117/929
TXT Carbon (e.g., diamond) {C30B 29/04}:

    A collection of art under art collection 928 disclosing growing carbon
    single-crystal*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     for single-crystal* growth from a molten liquid using a precursor*
    of different composition than the single-crystal* product and where the
    unusable portion of the precursor* contains free metal*, alloy, or
    intermetallic; e.g., diamond growth from metal* solvent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclass 446 for diamond products
    and methods of making same.


CLS 117/930
TXT Silicon from solid or gel state {C30B 29/06}:

    A collection of art under art collection 928 disclosing growing silicon
    single-crystal* grown from the solid or gel state.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 62.3+ for barrier layer compositions, per
    se (i.e., dopant* containing semiconductor materials).


CLS 117/931
TXT Silicon from liquid or supercritical state {C30B 29/06}:

    A collection of art under art collection 928 disclosing growing silicon
    single-crystal* grown from the liquid or supercritical state.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 62.3+ for barrier layer compositions, per
    se (i.e., dopant* containing semiconductor materials).


CLS 117/932
TXT By pulling {C30B 29/06}:

    A collection of art under art collection 931 disclosing growing silicon
    single-crystal* grown from the liquid or supercritical state by a pulling
    technique.


CLS 117/933
TXT By moving zone (not Verneuil) {C30B 29/06}:

    A collection of art under art collection 931 disclosing growing silicon
    single-crystal* grown from the liquid or supercritical state by a moving
    zone technique, but excluding all Verneuil.


CLS 117/934
TXT By liquid phase epitaxy {C30B 29/06}:

    A collection of art under art collection 931 disclosing growing silicon
    single-crystal* grown from the liquid or supercritical state by a liquid
    phase epitaxy* technique.


CLS 117/935
TXT Silicon from vapor or gaseous state {C30B 29/06}:

    A collection of art under art collection 928 disclosing growing silicon
    single-crystal* grown from the vapor or gaseous state.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 62.3+ for barrier layer compositions, per
    se (i.e., dopant* containing semiconductor materials).


CLS 117/936
TXT Germanium {C30B 29/08}:

    A collection of art under the art collection 928 disclosing growing
    germanium single-crystal*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 62.3+ for barrier layer compositions, per
    se (i.e., dopant* containing semiconductor materials).


CLS 117/937
TXT INORGANIC CONTAINING SINGLE-CRYSTAL (E.G., COMPOUND, MIXTURE, COMPOSITE)
    {C30B 29/10}:

    A collection of art under the class definition which discloses growing a
    single-crystal* comprising an inorganic compound or a mixture or a
    composite.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    928,    for a collection of art disclosing growing single-crystal* of pure
    or intentionally doped element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 122.1+ for methods of forming
    directionally solidified material, especially subclass 122.2 for methods of
    forming single crystal, in all cases being non-semiconductor metals*,
    alloys, or intermetallics in a mold.

    252,    Compositions, appropriate subclasses for various special use and
    miscellaneous compositions, per se, which may be in the form of single
    crystal, especially see subclasses 62.3+ for barrier layer compositions
    (i.e., dopant* containing semiconductor materials).

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, for compositions of ceramic materials,
    especially subclass 86 for synthetic single-crystal* composition of gem
    quality.


CLS 117/938
TXT Gold, silver, or platinum containing {C30B 29/52}:

    A collection of art under the art collection 937 disclosing growing a
    single-crystal* comprising gold, silver, or platinum.


CLS 117/939
TXT Free metal or intermetallic compound or silicon-metal compound based,
    except arsenic (e.g., alloys, SiGe, InSb) {C30B 29/40, 29/52}:

    A collection of art under the art collection 937 disclosing growing a
    single-crystal* comprising free metal* or intermetallic compound or
    silicon-metal* compound; except arsenic.

    (1)     Not.  Included in this subclass are such inorganic compounds as
    PbTe.

    (2)     Note.  In this subclass, arsenic is excluded from the elements
    defined as metal*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    928,    for a collection of art disclosing growing pure or intentionally
    doped single-crystal* of an element.

    930,    931+ and 935, for a collection of art disclosing growing pure or
    intentionally doped single-crystal* of silicon.

    954,    for a collection of art disclosing growing single-crystal*
    comprising gallium arsenide and mixed crystals thereof (e.g., GaAs, GaAlAs).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclass 404 for stock material of the class
    formed by directional solidification; e.g., so as to form columnar crystals.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 122.1+ for methods of forming
    directionally solidified material, especially subclass 122.2 for methods of
    forming single crystal, in all cases being a non-semiconductor metal*,
    alloy, or intermetallic in a mold.


CLS 117/940
TXT Halide containing (e.g., fluorphlogopite, fluor-mica) {C30B 29/12}:

    A collection of art under the art collection 937 disclosing growing a
    single-crystal* comprising a halogen compound.


CLS 117/941
TXT Phosphorus-oxygen bond containing (e.g., phosphate (PO4)) {C30B 29/14}:

    A collection of art under the art collection 937 disclosing growing a
    single-crystal* comprising a compound having a phosphorus-oxygen bond such
    as an acid, its salt, or its complex, including the phosphoric acids:
    hypophosphate (M4P2O6), orthophosphate (M3PO4), metaphosphate (MPO3),
    pyrophosphate (M4P2O7), or polyphosphates (Mx+2PxO3x+1).


CLS 117/942
TXT Silicon-oxygen bond containing (e.g., emerald, beryl, garnet, mica) {C30B
    29/16}:

    A collection of art under the art collection 937 disclosing growing a
    single-crystal* comprising a compound having a silicon-oxygen bond such as
    silicates, emerald, beryl, garnet, or mica.


CLS 117/943
TXT Quartz (SiO2) {C30B 29/18}:

    A collection of art under the art collection 942 disclosing growing a
    single-crystal* comprising quartz (SiO2).

    (1)     Note.  A complete search would include subclass 72.
    Cross-referencing therewith is precluded as unnecessarily duplicative.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for processes of growing quartz single-crystal* by a hydrothermal
    method.

    224,    for apparatus providing pressure for single-crystal* growth; e.g.,
    hydrothermal methods.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, subclass 86 for synthetic precious stones
    and methods of making same when not proper for Class 117.


CLS 117/944
TXT Oxygen compound containing (e.g., yttria stabilized zirconia) {C30B 29/16}:

    A collection of art under the art collection 937 disclosing growing a
    single-crystal* comprising a compound containing oxygen.


CLS 117/945
TXT Containing A3Me5O12 (1.5(A2O3):2.5(Me2O3)), wherein A is trivalent and
    selected from the group Sc, Y, La, Hf, or a rare earth metal and Me is
    trivalent and selected from the group Fe, Ga, Sc, Cr, Co, or Al (e.g.,
    non-silicate garnets) {C30B 29/28}:

    A collection of art under the art collection 944 disclosing growing a
    single-crystal* comprising a compound with the formula A3Me5O12, wherein A
    is trivalent and selected from the group Sc, Y, La, Hf, or a rare earth
    metal and Me is trivalent and selected from the group Fe, Ga, Sc, Cr, Co,
    or Al; e.g., non-silicate garnets.


CLS 117/946
TXT Containing AMe2O4 (AO:(Me2O3)), wherein A is divalent and selected from the
    group Mg, Ni, Co, Mn, Zn, or Cd and Me is trivalent and selected from the
    group Fe, Ga, Sc, Cr, Co, or Al (e.g., spinels) {C30B 29/26}:

    A collection of art under the art collection 944 disclosing growing a
    single-crystal* comprising a compound with the formula AMe2O4, wherein A is
    divalent and selected from the group Mg, Ni, Co, Mn, Zn, or Cd and Me is
    trivalent and selected from the group Fe, Ga, Sc, Cr, Co, or Al; e.g.,
    specific spinels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    949,    for titanates that may have spinel structure.


CLS 117/947
TXT Containing AMeO3 ((A2O3):(Me2O3)), wherein A is trivalent and selected from
    the group Sc, Y, La, Hf, or a rare earth metal and Me is trivalent and
    selected from the group Fe, Ga, Sc, Cr, Co, or Al (e.g., Perovskite
    structure, ortho-ferrites) {C30B 29/24}:

    A collection of art under the art collection 944 disclosing growing a
    single-crystal* comprising a compound with formula AMeO3,wherein A is
    trivalent and selected from the group Sc, Y, La, Hf, or a rare earth metal
    and Me is trivalent and selected from the group Fe, Ga, Sc, Cr, Co, or Al
    (e.g., Perovskite structure,  ortho-ferrites).


CLS 117/948
TXT Niobate, vanadate, or tantalate containing {C30B 29/30}:

    A collection of art under the art collection 944 disclosing growing a
    single-crystal* comprising an acid, or its salt, or its complex, of niobium
    (MNbO3, M8Nb6O19), vanadium (M3VO4, MVO3, M4V2O7), or tantalum (MTaO3,
    M8Ta6O19, M8TaO8).


CLS 117/949
TXT Titanate, germanate, molybdate, or tungstate containing {C30B 29/32}:

    A collection of art under the art collection 944 disclosing growing a
    single-crystal* comprising an acid, or its salt, or its complex, of
    titanium (M2TiO3, M4TiO4), germanium (MGeO3), molybdenum (M2MoO4, M2Mo2O7,
    M6Mo7O24), or tungsten (M2WO4, M2W4O13, M10W12O41).


CLS 117/950
TXT Aluminum containing (e.g., Al2O3, ruby, corundum, sapphire, chrysoberyl)
    {C30B 29/20}:

    A collection of art under the art collection 944 disclosing growing a
    single-crystal* comprising aluminum or a compound thereof.


CLS 117/951
TXT Carbide containing (e.g., SiC) {C30B 29/36}:

    A collection of art under the art collection 937 disclosing growing a
    single-crystal* comprising a carbide compound.


CLS 117/952
TXT Nitride containing (e.g., GaN,cBN,BN) {C30B 29/38}:

    A collection of art under the art collection 937 disclosing growing a
    single-crystal* comprising a nitride compound.


CLS 117/953
TXT {B,Al,Ga,In,Tl}{P,As,Sb,Bi} compound containing, except intermetallics
    thereof (i.e., except {Al,Ga,In,Tl}{Sb,Bi}) {C30B 29/40}:

    A collection of art under the art collection 937 disclosing growing a
    single-crystal* comprising a compound of the formula {B,Al,Ga,In,Tl}
    {P,As,Sb,Bi}, except the intermetallics thereof {Al,Ga,In,Tl}{Sb,Bi}.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    939,    for III-V compounds which  comprise an intermetallic compound such
    as InSb.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 62.3+ for barrier layer compositions, per
    se (i.e., dopant* containing semiconductor materials).


CLS 117/954
TXT Gallium arsenide containing (e.g., GaAlAs, GaAs) {C30B 29/42}:

    A collection of art under the art collection 953 disclosing growing a
    single-crystal* comprising gallium arsenide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 62.3+ for barrier layer compositions, per
    se (i.e., dopant* containing semiconductor materials).


CLS 117/955
TXT Gallium phosphide containing {C30B 29/44}:

    A collection of art under the art collection 953 disclosing growing a
    single-crystal* comprising gallium phosphide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 62.3+ for barrier layer compositions, per
    se (i.e., dopant* containing semiconductor materials).


CLS 117/956
TXT {Zn,Cd,Hg}{S,Se,Te} compound containing {C30B 29/46}:

    A collection of art under the art collection 937 disclosing growing a
    single-crystal* comprising a compound of the formula {Zn,Cd,Hg}{S,Se,Te}.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    944+,   for oxygen containing compounds.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 62.3+ for barrier layer compositions, per
    se (i.e., dopant* containing semiconductor materials).


CLS 117/957
TXT CdHgTe containing {C30B 29/48}:

    A collection of art under the art collection 956 disclosing growing a
    single-crystal* comprising cadmium mercury telluride.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 62.3+ for barrier layer compositions, per
    se (i.e., dopant* containing semiconductor materials).


CLS 117/958
TXT Cadmium sulfide containing (e.g., ZnCdS) {C30B 29/50}:

    A collection of art under the art collection 956 disclosing growing a
    single-crystal* comprising cadmium sulfide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 62.3+ for barrier layer compositions, per
    se (i.e., dopant* containing semiconductor materials).


CLS 118/
TTL COATING APPARATUS

CLS 118/
TXT OUTLINE OF NOTES



    I       GENERAL STATEMENT OF SUBJECT MATTER OF THE CLASS

    II      DEFINITION OF TERMS

    III     COATING COMBINED WITH OTHER OPERATIONS

    IV      COATING APPARATUS, PER SE, FOUND ELSEWHERE

    V       TREATMENT OF TEXTILES OR LEATHER

    VI      MOLD OR DIE COATING

    VII     MOLDED, SHAPED OR CONFIGURED COATINGS

    VIII    COATING EDIBLE MATERIALS, ANIMAL BODIES AND VEGETATION

    IX      INDEX TO NOTES AND MISCELLANEOUS SEARCH NOTES

    I       GENERAL STATEMENT OF SUBJECT MATTER OF THE CLASS

    This is the generic class for apparatus for applying or obtaining a surface
    coating on a base and/or apparatus for impregnating base materials and
    takes all such apparatus not provided for in other classes.

    The coating obtained may be permanent or transitory.  The coating may be
    supplied solely by extraneous materials, as in a painting or waxing
    operation, or may be supplied wholly or in part by the base materials as in
    the formation of an oxide coating on a metal base.  The coating may consist
    of an emulsion, dispersion, solution, admixture or oil which is clearly
    disclosed as leaving a residual film, layer or continuous deposit on the
    base. (However, mere application of water to a base is excluded and
    classified in generic liquid contact Class 134 or other appropriate related
    liquid contact classes even where the stated function is to lubricate, coat
    or protect the base).  However, see the class definition of Class 134, (2)
    Note, "Coating and Impregnating", paragraph (b).

    The class also provides for apparatus for preparing the base for the
    coating operation, subsequent treatment of the coated base and ancillary
    noncoating apparatus, per se, when there is no class which specifically
    provides therefor. The treatment of the surface coating may be by
    application of water or other solvent alone, e.g., where a sponge supported
    on a fixed base is disclosed as applying water to a stamp to moisten the
    coating thereon. On the other hand, application of water or a solvent to a
    coated surface to remove the coating or to clean it without otherwise
    modifying it, would be excluded from Class 118 and classified in the
    appropriate surface treating class.

    To be classified in this class the work treated must not be a part of the
    coating machine itself but must be an article separate and distinct
    therefrom. Machines having as a part thereof means to condition or prepare
    the machine are generally classified with the art that provides for the
    particular machine, but see VI MOLD OR DIE COATING, for an exception to the
    line.

    For other coating apparatus, per se, see section IV.

    II      DEFINITION OF TERMS

    COATING

    The term "coating" is used throughout the definitions in a generic sense to
    mean either (1) an initially fluent film or layer of material lying on or
    bonded to the surface of a base, or (2) an impregnating material which
    penetrates the base either partially or completely and all or part of which
    is retained therein, either in its original form or physically or
    chemically combined therewith.

    WORK

    The base or material to which the coating is applied, either before or
    after coating.

    DOCTOR, WIPER OR SCRAPER

    Any instrument acting on the coating or on the work for the purpose of
    spreading or removing surplus coating material.  The instrument may be, for
    example, a solid scraper blade, a roller squeegee or as in the case of an
    "air doctor" a gaseous blast.  For definitions of terms appearing in
    subclass titles and not mentioned in the above definitions, see the
    definitions to the particular subclass in which the term appears.

    III     COATING COMBINED WITH OTHER OPERATIONS

    Many classes provide for coating or impregnating combined with apparatus
    for other operations.  In general, the assignment of patents has been on
    the basis of the noncoating operation where apparatus for performing such
    operation is claimed.  However, this class does provide for certain
    combinations, as set forth in the various subclass titles above and
    including subclass 75 in the class schedule.  By way of example, this class
    provides for the combination of coating apparatus and cutting or punching
    apparatus (subclass 35); this class also provides for coating apparatus
    combined with means to prepare the work to receive the coating (subclass
    72).  For combinations of coating and noncoating devices excluded from this
    class:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclass 41.3 for apparatus for flexing or
    otherwise making pliable a shoe sole, in which the sole is treated with a
    moistening fluid, generally a liquid while being flexed.

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses 66+ for apparatus for
    liquid treatment of textile fibers combined with working of the fibers.

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclass 19 for apparatus for working a
    fabric in wet condition to increase its compactness.

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclasses 217+ and especially 246, 261,
    265+, and 285+ for mechanical operations and finishing thread, combined
    with fluid treatment.

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclass 3 for smoothing machines
    for that class, combined with a fabric moistener.

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 111+ for apparatus for coating an
    article and then packing or packaging the article, and subclass 131.1 for
    packaging apparatus combined with means to coat  the package cover.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 7, 8, 32,
    286, 292, and 295+ for the various operations provided for in that class,
    combined with coating apparatus.

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, subclass 23 for
    apparatus for forming strands or fabrics from yarns, filaments, or strands
    by braiding, knotting and/or intertwisting the strands, having means for
    applying a coating or an impregnating material to the strands and/or to the
    fabric at any time relative to the production of the fabric.

    112,    Sewing, subclass 17 for sewing machines having means to color the
    seams, and subclass 42 for shoe sewing machines including means to wax the
    thread.

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses  35, 69, 90, and 284 for cigar and cigarette
    making apparatus combined with means to coat the work.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclass 36 for means for applying a fluid to
    the warp threads while in the loom.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for processes and devices for laminating combined
    with means applying a fluent material such as adhesive to the materials to
    be bonded.  That class (156) also provides for the combination of
    laminating followed by coating and machines and implements including means
    for moistening (to activate an adhesive coating) and adhering the flap of
    an envelope to the body (subclasses 441.5+).

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 265+ for paper making
    apparatus combined with means to coat the formed web.  This class (118)
    takes coating devices, per se, even though disclosed as applying a coating
    to a fibrous product before completion.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 47+ for
    apparatus for separating some components of a mixture of solids by causing
    them to adhere to a surface or body, in which some of the components of the
    mixture of solids to be separated are coated with some substance which
    enables such components to adhere to the selecting body or surface.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 193 for filter means
    with means to precoat the filter.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 113 and 146.1+ for a dispenser including
    either a burner or other heating means, respectively, which subclasses
    include patents to sealing wax heating and dispensing devices.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 3 for apparatus for applying paste to
    collars in combination with means to fold the material of the collar.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, for winding and unwinding to or
    from storage and selected articles of defined length.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 56 and 130 for methods and
    apparatus for film treating or working including coating combined with
    motion picture methods or apparatus.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 564+ for means to accomplish an operation
    of that class which may include coating means.

    399,    Electrophotography, appropriate subclasses for means to accomplish
    an electrophotography having coating means.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 202+ for typewriters having means
    to ink the ribbon.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, appropriate subclass for a
    hand manipulable implement with material supply, which contacts the work
    for applying or spreading coating material.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, appropriate subclasses under
    subclass 83 for the combination of means to coat or impregnate with other
    means for road building.

    412,    Bookbinding:  Process and Apparatus, appropriate subclass for
    apparatus for manufacturing books, including means to apply adhesive to
    various parts of the book.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, appropriate subclasses for the combination of coating
    apparatus and machines for working up previously made paper or other sheet
    or web material into an article of commerce.  Working of wood veneer, cloth
    and similar flexible materials is to be found in class (493) unless
    provided for elsewhere.  Class (493) is the generic home for such apparatus
    as is defined in its main class definition, combined with coating
    apparatus.  See especially subclasses 220+ for a machine which applies gum
    or glue to a previously cut envelope blank and folds the same.



    IV      COATING APPARATUS, PER SE, FOUND ELSEWHERE

    Certain classes provide for coating apparatus, per se.  Classification of
    patents is in these classes when coating subclasses occur in such art class
    and are defined to receive such patents.  These locations are detailed
    below in sections V to VIII, and in the miscellaneous notes to other
    classes in section IX.

    V       TREATMENT OF TEXTILES OR LEATHER

    Class 118 provides the generic place for coating textile or leather work,
    including the working of the textile or leather, except (1) where a
    chemical reaction takes place between the coating and the work, or (2)
    where the means to work the textile or leather before, during or after the
    coating treatment is other than to modify the coating.  For example, this
    class provides for textile or leather coating apparatus having working
    means to insure proper coating or impregnation (subclass 427 by way of
    example) or having means to modify the coating on the work (subclasses
    100+), but does not provide for combination of coating devices and means to
    work the base for other purposes (see Note IX below).

    For coating of textiles or leather excluded from Class 118:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclass 79.5 for machines for applying wax
    to parts of boots and shoes, generally the edge of the sole or heel, and
    polishing such parts, and subclass 18.2 for machines for inserting filling
    material into shoe bottoms and for smoothing and packing the same.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 30+ and see
    section IX of the class definition of this class (118).

    19,     Textiles: Fiber Preparation, subclasses 66+ for apparatus in which
    fibers are treated with fluids for some other purpose than to make them
    straight, clean, and parallel.  The fluid treatment is usually to place the
    fibers in condition for the purpose for which they are to be utilized.

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclasses 19+ for fluid treatment of
    cloth for the purpose of fulling the same.

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclasses 178+ for devices for
    manipulating warps in the form of sheets in connection with sizing and
    drying operations.  A complete machine is called a slasher.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    machines, implements and accessories for fluid treatment of textile
    fabrics, textile fibers, and pulp as for the purpose of carbonizing,
    bleaching, dyeing, moistening, mercerizing, or mordanting the same or for
    the removal of dirt, grease, soil, and other like substances from them by
    the use of solvents, saponifiers or emulsifiers, unless specifically
    provided for elsewhere. This class (Class 68) provides for all of the above
    mentioned operations and patents, even though claimed generically, are
    placed in Class 68 if any of the above described operations are disclosed.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclass 28 for the treatment of fur with a
    fluid, and subclass 29 for apparatus for the treatment of hides, skins, and
    leather, with a fluid for the production of leather.

    101,    Printing, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for printing on
    textile materials.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus directed to electrolytic treatment of textiles.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass .5 for bluing and infusion
    packages.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, for patents for separating
    liquids from textiles by decantation, filtration, or centrifugal action.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 10 for apparatus for wetting or sizing
    hat bodies by dipping, brushing, or in other ways, subclass 23 for
    miscellaneous devices for cleaning hats during manufacture or to renovate
    them, and subclass 51 for devices for heating and/or steaming hats and
    other articles of that class in making or remodeling the same.



    VI      MOLD OR DIE COATING

    Class 118 provides in appropriate subclasses for apparatus for coating
    molds or casting dies where no more of the molding or casting apparatus is
    claimed than is necessary to present the mold or die to the coating device
    or station.  The coating which is applied must act to promote or perfect
    the molding operation and must not be a constituent part of the molded
    product such as a chocolate shell for a filled chocolate candy.  Excluded
    from this class also are mold coating arrangements where application of the
    coating is dependent at least in part on the use of the apparatus in a
    molding operation as where heat from the molten material vaporizes a
    coating material for deposit on the mold surfaces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 169 for a glass working or treating
    apparatus combined with means providing a parting material to either the
    work or to the apparatus; and subclass 170 for glass-working or treating
    apparatus having apparatus lubricating means.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 41+ and 46+ for a plastic-metal shaping
    apparatus having means for applying a coating or lubricant to the work or
    to the work-engaging surface of a tool, e.g., lubricating a wire-drawing
    die, prior to forming the work.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 267+ for coating means associated with a
    metal casting means.

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 471+ for
    electrophoretic or electro-osmotic coating or forming of an object (e.g.,
    coating mold, etc.), subclasses 192.12+ for glow discharge sputter
    deposition (e.g., cathode sputtering to coat a coating mold, etc.),
    subclasses 194+ for electrolytic apparatus (e.g., means used to electroform
    or electroplate a coating mold, etc.), subclasses 622+ for electrophoretic
    or electro-osmotic coating or forming apparatus, and subclasses 298.02+ for
    sputter coating apparatus.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 67+ for electroforming or a
    composition used therefor (especially subclass 70 for electroforming a
    mold, mask, or masterform) and subclasses 80+ for electrolytic coating
    (e.g., electroplating of a coating mold, etc.).

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 90+ for shaping or reshaping apparatus combined with coating
    means for a work contact means or for the work; see the class definition of
    this class for the line between Classes 118 and 425.



    VII     MOLDED, SHAPED OR CONFIGURED COATINGS

    This class provides for apparatus for the application of coating material
    to restricted areas of the work such as in stripes, bands or spots
    (subclasses 211+, 301 and 406).  In subclasses 321 and 323 may be found
    apparatus in which a spray gun is manipulated to apply the coating in a
    particular pattern.  This class also provides for devices for modifying the
    coating by removing certain portions of it from the work (subclass 102).
    This class also provides for apparatus for producing configured coatings
    applied to base under the control and/or direction of electrical, magnetic
    or radiant energy applied to the coating material in a predetermined
    pattern (subclasses 620+).

    For molded, shaped or configured coating excluded from this class:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 235.1+ for
    implements used in applying mortar or plaster to a surface, and subclass
    210.5 for graining implement, i.e., devices having a working face
    especially adapted for imitating the grain of wood by drawing the implement
    over pigment; and see the reference to Class 401, Coating Implements With
    Material Supply, hereinbelow.

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 41+ for marking means when
    designed for drawing a plurality of parallel lines or for drawing a line at
    a definite distance from a guide.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 156 for fusion bonding means combined
    with article molding means.

    101,    Printing, appropriate subclasses for apparatus adapted to produce
    characters or designs on surfaces by impression of types or dies, by
    applying coating material through openings or previous portions of a
    pattern sheet as in stenciling or by impressions in planographic or
    intaglio surfaces.

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 73, 216 for template type devices which aid in
    defining the area of application of cosmetics and subclasses 319, 320 for
    devices there provided, peculiarly shaped so as to aid in applying
    cosmetics in a definite form or pattern.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses and especially subclass 500 for laminating devices
    having in addition means to cast, mold or extrude a lamina.

    164,    Metal Founding, appropriate subclasses for an apparatus for casting
    metals.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 4+ and 23+ for printing telegraph systems.

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 471+ for
    electrophoretic or electro-osmotic coating or forming of an object (e.g.,
    coating mold, etc.), subclasses 192.12+ for glow discharge sputter
    deposition (e.g., cathode sputtering to coat a coating mold, etc.),
    subclasses 194+ for electrolytic apparatus (e.g., means used to electroform
    or electroplate a coating mold, etc.), subclasses 622+ for electrophoretic
    or electro-osmotic coating or forming apparatus, and subclasses 298.02+ for
    sputter coating apparatus.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 67+ for electroforming or a
    composition used therefor (especially subclass 70 for electroforming of a
    mold, mask, or masterform) and subclasses 80+ for electrolytic coating
    (e.g., electroplating of a coating mold, etc.).

    235,    Registers, appropriate subclass for printing registers, calculators
    and voting machines.

    396,    Photography, appropriate subclasses for apparatus producing
    pictures on a light sensitive medium by the action of light thereon.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, appropriate subclass for printing mechanism
    in which each type is impressed separately, with means to feed the work to
    position for the next impression.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, appropriate subclasses for
    a writing, or other hand-manipulated coating implement; including subclass
    35 for an implement having plural, side-by-side, simultaneously operative
    striping tools; and subclass 193 for a striping implement including a
    work-engaging guide for the tool; and see section V. B. 1. of the
    Definition of Class 401, for the line between Class 401 and Class 33,
    Geometrical Instruments.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 104+ for apparatus for making a composite article by shaping or
    reshaping a base combined with means molding a coating on the base and
    subclasses 110+ for composite article making apparatus comprising means to
    mold fluent or bulk stock to a preform within a shaping cavity.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 81+ for apparatus relating
    to the artistic sense, freehand and mechanical drawing, painting and
    sculpturing.

    462,    Books, Strips, and Leaves for Manifolding, appropriate subclass for
    manifolding articles comprising superposed bodies on which indicia is to be
    simultaneously produced and which may include transfer means (e.g., carbon
    paper interposed between the bodies or comprising a coating on one of the
    bodies).



    VIII    COATING EDIBLE MATERIALS, ANIMAL BODIES AND VEGETATION

    This class provides for apparatus for applying fluent coating material to
    foodstuffs.  By fluent material is meant any material which flows or may be
    handled like a liquid or fluid substance.  By way of example, flour, salt
    or sugar are considered to be fluent materials.  This class does not
    provide for the application of material handled as discrete units to the
    work, such as nut meats, which are positioned individually on the work.
    This class does not provide for the treatment of living animals and does
    not provide for the treatment of growing plants.  For subject matter
    excluded from this class:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 3.12+ for
    devices there provided, disclosed for treating (usually cleaning) fruit,
    vegetables, meat, eggs, nuts, or other discrete edible particles by
    instrumentalities provided for in that class, usually by brushes or wipers,
    in which either (1) a fluid is applied to the work, or (2) the work is
    heated, usually to dry it.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying subclasses 125+ for
    apparatus for creating or involving fumes or smoke when such fumes are used
    for destroying vermin.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, appropriate subclass for
    miscellaneous treatment of foodstuffs. In that class (99) may be found
    apparatus subjecting food to direct application of steam or gas (subclass
    467), applying a solid or particulate material (subclass 494), and
    subjecting foodstuff to the action of a chemical curing agent or other
    fluid such as brine (subclass 516).

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 156+ for inventions for washing,
    applying medicaments to, or otherwise treating animals for the purpose of
    freeing them from filth and parasites, or for repelling insects, healing
    sores, etc.

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 200.14+ and 203.12+ for medicating atomizers,
    vaporizers and powdered depositors.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus for cleaning by application of liquid only.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclasses for
    electrolytic apparatus for the preparation, treatment, and preservation of
    foods and beverages.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 90+ for apparatus to coat edible materials combined with means
    to shape or reshape a fluent or plastic edible into a base for the coating.

    452,    Butchering, subclass 72 for an apparatus for coating a carcass with
    wax for hair removal and subclasses 74+ for apparatus particularly adapted
    for the scalding of animal carcasses.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 19+ and 58 for medicating, irrigating and
    aspirating devices which introduce or remove materials from the body.



    IX      INDEX TO NOTES AND MISCELLANEOUS SEARCH NOTES

                                    Section No.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making
    Subclass 41.3   III

            Subclasses 18.2, 79.5   V

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and        V, VIII

            General Cleaning, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for the
    removal of foreign matter by a draft or current of air, steam, or
    equivalent gaseous fluid; dry brushing alone; brushing with an applied
    liquid; or any combination including one or more of these agencies.  Also
    see subclasses 30+ for machines especially adapted for cleaning, blacking
    and polishing boots and shoes in which the cleaning or polishing
    instruments are of the brush or broom type, except those provided for in
    Class 401, Coating Implements with Material Supply, as defined in the
    definition of that class (401); see, particularly, section V. A. 1. thereof.



            In addition, Class 15 provides for the following type of
    applicators:



    (1) Solid member applicators that are implements, i.e., devices adapted to
    be held in the hand and directly actuated by the hand of the user as
    defined in section IV of the main class definition of Class 15.

    (2) Work traversing solid member applicators the direction of motion of
    which is determined by the operator rather than by the inherent law of
    operation of the machine itself.  In this respect guides which aid in the
    determination of the direction do not exclude the device from Class 15 (see
    subclass 560 of Class 15 by way of example).

    (3) Subcombinations of coating devices provided for in Class 15 such as
    impregnated wipers, brush structure, scraper structure, or pad structure
    where the base or supporting element is not claimed; except that a patent
    shall be placed in Class 118 when by disclosure it is restricted to a
    coating doctor blade function (i.e., operating to distribute or determine
    the thickness of coating material applied to work or to an applicator).

    Class 118 takes all coating apparatus not set forth above and not provided
    for in any other class.  See also section VIII of the class definition of
    this class (118).

    17,     Butchering      III

            subclasses 11.2 and 15

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation

            subclass 66     III, V

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing

            subclasses 19+  III, V

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing

            subclasses 217+ III

            subclasses 178+ V

    33,     Geometrical Instruments II

            subclass 41

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclass
    for dryer structure, per se, even if the drying entails a chemical reaction
    between the coated base and the drying medium. Class 34 also provides for
    steam application to or impregnation of the work, per se.  Apparatus for
    treating a coating with a solvent vapor to smooth, polish or coalesce the
    coating, per se, is in Class 34.

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing
    subclass 3              III

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin
    Destroying
    subclass 125    VIII

    53,     Package Making

            subclasses 111, 131     III

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting,

            and Twining

            subclasses 7, 8, 32, 286, 292, and 295   III

    65,     Glass Manufacturing

            subclass 156    VII

            subclasses 169, 170     VI

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus     V

    69,     Leather Manufactures

            subclasses 28, 29       V

    72,     Metal Deforming

            subclasses 41, 46       VI

    86,     Ammunition and Explosive-Charge Making, subclasses 17 and 19 for
    machines for varnishing the interior of cartridge shells or for lubricating
    bullets, wads, and cartridges.

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and
    Lace Making

            subclass 23     III

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus,

            In General and

            subclasses 467+, 494, 516+      VIII

    101,    Printing                V, VII

    112,    Sewing

            subclasses 17, 42       III

    114,    Ships, subclass 224 for devices for calking or making the seams
    water tight and painting, pitching or puttying the same.

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes and non-coating apparatus for
    growing therein-defined single-crystal of all types of materials, including
    inorganic or organic.  See Class 117 definitions for guidance in the
    placement of single-crystal related art.

    119,    Animal Husbandry

            subclasses 156+ VIII

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 343.5, for devices for melting
    material in a receptacle, vat, tank, or conduit.

    128,    Surgery

            subclasses 200.14, 203.12       VIII

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 300+ for    III

            apparatus for subjecting tobacco to the action of fluids or fluent
    materials or for adding fluent material to tobacco or tobacco compositions
    and see note (3) of that subclass for the line between Class 131 and Class
    118.  And see also the reference to subclasses 35, 69, 90, 284 in section
    III of the Class Definition of this class (118).

    132,    Toilet

            subclasses 73, 216, 319, and 320        VII

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses,
    for apparatus for contacting of solids with liquids for any purpose not
    provided for in other classes and see note (2) of the main class
    definitions of that class for the line between Class 134 and Class 118, and
    see also section VIII.

    137,    Fluid Handling, as the generic class for the handling of fluids,
    which class has miscellaneous fluid distributing systems, valve actuation,
    fluid handling tanks, etc.  Class 118 does not provide for the fluid
    handling systems, per se, even though the disclosure is of the fluid as a
    coating material.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving

            subclass 36     III

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 58 for apparatus for inserting severed match
    splints into a dipping frame or conveyor and dipping the splints into a
    bath necessary to form the match heads.  Class 144 is the generic home for
    apparatus which takes match splints and passes them through one or more of
    the operations involved in the conversion of the splints into matches
    including coating.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    441.5+, 500+

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation

            subclass 265    III

            subclasses 192 and 411  III, VII

    164,    Metal Founding

            subclasses 267+ VI

            and see also    VII

    166,    Wells, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for cementing wells.

    178,    Telegraphy

            subclasses 4, 23+       VII

    184,    Lubrication, for apparatus for applying lubricants to the bearing
    surfaces of machines parts, and see especially subclasses 15.1+ for
    apparatus for applying lubricant to rope, chain, belt or cables.

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 471+ for
    electrophoretic or electro-osmotic coating or forming of an object (e.g.,
    coating mold, etc.), subclasses 192.12+ for glow discharge sputter
    deposition (e.g., cathode sputtering to coat a coating mold, etc.),
    subclasses 194+ for electrolytic apparatus (e.g., means used to electroform
    or electroplate a coating mold, etc.), subclasses 622+ for electrophoretic
    or electro-osmotic coating or forming apparatus, and subclasses 298.02+ for
    sputter coating apparatus.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 67+ for electroforming or a
    composition used therefor (especially subclass 70 for electroforming of a
    mold, mask, or masterform) and subclasses 80+ for electrolytic coating
    (e.g., electroplating of a coating mold, etc.).

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package
    subclass .5     V

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and
    Assorting Solids

            subclasses 47+  III

    210,    Liquid Purification or  III, V

            Separation

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 438 for electrically heated vessels
    including subcombinations of a coating device which claim only an
    electrically heated vessel for holding material.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for article dispensing
    (feeding) not otherwise provided for.  Such feeding may be the feeding of
    articles to a coating machine of the type provided for in this class where
    the details of the coating machine are not significant and where the
    feeding is not so specialized to the performance of the coating function as
    to preclude classification in a general feeding art.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses, as the generic place for
    dispensers, per se.  Class 222 provides for the dispensing of a coating
    material where all that is being claimed is the dispensing, per se, that
    is, no work handling structure is recited in the claims nor is any
    relationship implied between the coating material dispenser and the work.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus

            subclass 3              III

            subclasses 10, 23, 51   V

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, appropriate subclasses for uniting plural
    metallic work portions by a fusion bonding operation; as well as uniting a
    metal to a nonmetal or a nonmetal to another nonmetal if a metallic filler
    is used to effect a metallurgical bond.

    235,    Registers               VII

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses,
    for apparatus pertaining to the projection, spraying, diffusing or
    scattering of liquids, gases or other materials.  The line between Class
    118 and Class 239 is as follows:  Class 118 provides for spray type coating
    devices having means to handle or manipulate the work relative to the spray
    device (subclasses 300+).  Class 118 also provides for spray system wherein
    the coating apparatus control means is responsive to the presence or
    absence of work (subclasses 2+).  Class 118 also provides for spray type
    coating devices which are supported by or traverse the surface of the work
    and in which the direction of motion of the spray type device is controlled
    by the law of the machine, rather than by direct manipulation of the
    operator.  Class 239 takes spraying or scattering systems, per se, where no
    work handling structure is recited in the claims.  Class 239 also takes
    work surface supported and traversing spray type coating devices in which
    the direction of motion of the carriage is determined at the will of the
    operator. The presence of guide structure which merely aids in the
    determination of the direction of motion by the operator does not exclude
    the subject matter from Class 239.  By way of example, devices for spray
    painting a stripe on the surface of a road having a guide for aiding the
    operator in maintaining the direction of the painting device can be found
    in Class 239; devices for spray painting a stripe on a roadway having means
    engaging the edge of the road, which means positively limits the direction
    of motion of the device once the device is put into operation, can be found
    in Class 118 (subclass 305).  In Class 239 the device may have a shield,
    guard or deflector to confine the distributed material; however, if the
    material is discharged through a stencil or applied in a particular
    predetermined pattern, the device is excluded from Class 239 and is found
    in Class 118 (subclass 301).  In the matter of a railway car traveling and
    being guided on rails, if the discharge is directed at the rails, the
    device may be found in Class 118 (subclass 307); if, however, the discharge
    is directed at the ground on either side or between the rails, the device
    can be found in Class 239.  Lawn Sprinklers which traverse a hose,
    supported on the ground are found in Class 239 (subclass 748) since the
    ground on both sides of the hose (equivalent to the rail in the example
    cited above) is being sprayed.



            In regard to the mixing with fluid and spraying of particulate
    solids, the line between Class 118 and Class 239 is as follows:  In the
    absence of a work surface or support claimed in relation to the spray
    apparatus, (which indicates classification in Class 118), devices which add
    the particulate solids to fluid and discharge the mixture through a claimed
    terminal element recognized for Class 239, or devices which add particulate
    solids downstream of a recited terminal element of the Class 239 type in an
    unobstructed or unconfined space are classified in Class 239; devices which
    add particulate solids to fluid discharging from an opening or nozzle
    (nominal of specific) in a confining and guiding chamber or pipe with or
    without flow guides therein and discharging the mixture from the chamber or
    pipe through a mere opening or unmodified outlet, are classified in Class
    118.



            Apparatus comprising a container for nonfluid material and a
    scattering or strewing means for the material will be found in Class 239,
    subclasses 650+.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding III

    291,    Track Sanders, for means for applying sand or like material to
    vehicle wheel treads or to vehicle tracks for the purpose of increasing the
    tractive effect between such wheels and roads or rails.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 31+ for containers under
    the class definition combined with means to treat contained material or
    articles with a gas or vapor usually by the operation of a slow diffuser or
    absorber.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures        III

    366,    Agitating, appropriate subclasses for

            agitating apparatus which may be disclosed as involving a coating
    function but comprising merely means to agitate particulate base material
    with particulate or liquid coating material.  Class 366 does not provide
    for additional operations such as separation of the coated base from the
    coating material or vice versa, such combinations being classified in this
    class (118) or other classes appropriate thereto.  Class 366 provides for
    apparatus for the preparation and dispensing of mortar where the
    preparation includes an agitation step in subclasses 1+, and in subclass 10
    may be found mixing nozzles having means to commingle liquid and dry
    materials.

    400,    Typewriting Machines

            subclasses 202+, section        III, VII

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, appropriate subclasses for
    coating implements (i.e., solid member applicators) with material supply.
    Original placement of patents to implements conforming to the definition of
    that class may be found in Class 118, in subclasses 100+ and 200+, only
    because these subclasses have not been screened.  Subclasses 76+, however,
    have been screened and the hand manipulated implements for coating a
    surface by rubbing transfer of solid coating material have been placed in
    Class 401, subclasses 49+.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for
    conveying solid material in a fluid current, particularly subclasses 108+
    for intakes to fluid current conveyors where a dry particulate coating
    material is entrained in a gaseous stream and where no relationship to the
    work being coated is claimed.

    412,    Bookbinding:  Process and
    Apparatus       III

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 222+ for apparatus for
    charging a load holding or supporting element from a source, and means for
    transporting the element to a working treating, or inspecting station.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,

            subclasses 90+  VI, VIII

            subclasses 104+, 110+   VII

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclasses for processes of coating
    or impregnating a workpiece, and see the notes in the class definition of
    that class for other classes that provide for coating processes.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, appropriate subclasses for post imaging processes.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 81+.

    462,    Books, Strips, and      VII
    Leaves for  Manifolding

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see section IIB of the class definition for the loci of roll pairs with
    working surface.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, in general and particularly subclasses 220+.


CLS 118/13
TXT Coating apparatus under the class definition specialized or adapted to
    apply a coating to work and wherein the coating and/or work constitutes
    food for human consumption.

    (1)     Note.  Patents are placed in this and the indented subclasses on
    the basis of disclosure, i.e., if the device, as disclosed, is for use in
    coating edible materials classification is here and in the indented
    subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  This and indented subclasses also take apparatus, except
    molding apparatus for shaping or reshaping an edible base, to prepare the
    base material, apparatus to subsequently treat the coated base and other
    ancillary noncoating apparatus, per se, when there is no other class which
    specifically provides therefore.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, and see the notes of the main
    class definition of that class for apparatus for the preparation, treatment
    and preservation of foods and beverages.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 90+ for coating apparatus combined with molding means for
    shaping or reshaping an edible base or edible composite and subclasses 110+
    for apparatus to make a composite product including an edible by uniting a
    preform and fluent or bulk material within a shaping cavity.


CLS 118/14
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 13 having means to modify the coating on
    the work, which modification is in the nature of an ornamentation or design.

    (1)     Note.  Here may be found, for example, devices which have solid
    means contacting the coating to draw out a string of coating for the
    purpose of imitating the appearance of hand dip chocolate, and devices for
    applying a second layer of coating material to the coated base, which
    second layer is applied in a limited area or in a particular pattern or
    configuration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     and see the notes thereto, for coating devices having a solid means
    for contacting the surface of the coating after application to the base for
    purposes other than those provided for in this subclass.

    211,    and see the notes thereto, for other coating devices wherein the
    coating is applied in a particular pattern or definite circumscribed area
    of application.


CLS 118/15
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 13 combined with means to sever the base.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35+,    for other work cutting and punching combinations wherein the base
    is an inedible material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses for cutting and punching apparatus,
    per se.


CLS 118/16
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 13 having two or more distinct coating
    instrumentalities.

    (1)     Note.  The patents in this subclass and indented subclass are
    cross-referenced to the appropriate subclasses for the single coating
    devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216+    and see the notes thereto, for other coating apparatus having
    plural instrumentalities for applying the coating to the base.


CLS 118/17
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 13 having means for removing excess
    coating material from the coating apparatus and/or for placing the
    apparatus in condition for use.

    (1)     Note.  Here, for example, may be found devices for cleaning the
    article conveyor or for applying a lubricating means to the conveyor to
    prevent the coated article from adhering thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for cleaning and/or conditioning apparatus for use in coating
    inedible base material.


CLS 118/18
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 13 having a solid member contacting the
    coating on the coated base to modify the coating.

    (1)     Note.  The solid work treating means may have one or more of a
    number of functions, for example, it may remove surplus coating material
    from the coated article and thus determine the thickness of the coating
    left on the article, it may finish the coated article without removing the
    surplus coating material or it may remove tailings from the coated article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100+,   for coating devices having solid means acting on an edible coated
    base.


CLS 118/19
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 13 wherein discrete work pieces to be
    coated are tumbled or agitated in contact with the coating material to
    thereby receive a coating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    417+,   for rumble type coating devices wherein the base to be coated is an
    inedible material and see the notes thereto for other rumble type devices.


CLS 118/20
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 13 provided with means for heating,
    drying, cooling and/or contacting a noncoating gas or a vapor with the work
    before, during and/or after the coating operation.

    (1)     Note.  The gas or vapor may heat, cool, dry, or remove surplus
    coating material from the coated work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for coating an edible base with a coating gas or vapor.

    58+,    for heating, cooling, drying, and/or contacting a noncoating gas or
    vapor with an inedible base.

    715+,   for coating an inedible base with a coating gas or vapor.


CLS 118/21
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 20 wherein the gas or vapor is directed
    forcibly against the coated work to redistribute and/or remove excess
    coating material therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     for apparatus for redistributing and/or removing excess coating
    material from an inedible coated base by a gas blast.


CLS 118/22
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 13 having means for striking or shaking
    the work to distribute the coating material on the base or to remove excess
    coating material from the coated base.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for apparatus for vibrating coated inedible work.


CLS 118/23
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 13 combined with noncoating devices not
    provided for specifically above.

    (1)     Note.  The basic subject matter of this class (118) is detailed in
    the definition and notes for the homologous subclass for inedible coating
    devices, viz., subclass 75, which definition and notes are here included by
    reference.

    (2)     Note.  See (5) Note to subclass 75 for examples of combined
    apparatus found in this subclass (23) or in subclass 75, and see section
    III of the class definition of this class for other combined apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for coating devices combined with noncoating devices wherein the
    work is inedible, and see (1) and (2) Notes, above.


CLS 118/24
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 13 wherein coating material, unsupported
    at the moment of contact with the base to be coated, is sprayed, poured,
    dripped, flung or impelled against the base to be coated.

    (1)     Note.  If the coating material is supported at the instant of
    contact with the base to be coated, it is considered to be applied by an
    applicator or by immersion.  Edible bases coated by applicators are
    classified in subclass 13, above, and those coated by immersion are
    classified in subclass 26, below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     and see (1) Note, above.

    26+,    and see (1) Note, above.

    300+,   and see the notes thereto, for coating devices of the projection or
    spray type wherein the coating is applied to an inedible base material.


CLS 118/25
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 24 having means to sequentially interrupt
    and initiate the operation of the projector to apply coatings to successive
    workpieces.

    (1)     Note.  The projector may be so controlled as to apply a definite
    measured quantity of coating material each time it is operated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    676+,   for coating apparatus in which the projected application is
    controlled by the presence of successive work- pieces.


CLS 118/26
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 13 wherein the article to be coated is (1)
    introduced or dipped, wholly or partially into a pool or bath of coating
    material or (2) where a supported pool stream or column of coating material
    is brought into contact with the article to be coated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400+,   for devices for applying coating to inedible articles by immersion
    and see the notes thereto for other places wherein apparatus for immersing
    work in fluids can be found.


CLS 118/27
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 26 where pool or head of coating material
    is positioned above the work and is confined, retained, or supported, at
    least in part, by a surface of the work being coated, the motion of the
    article away from the confined coating material separating a film of
    material which adheres to the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    407+,   for other coating apparatus wherein the work confines or supports
    the coating material pool.


CLS 118/28
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 26 wherein a container for the pool or
    bath is mounted for movement.

    (1)     Note.  By way of example, immersion tank may move to surround a
    fixed work piece with coating material, or both the workpiece to be coated
    and the immersion tank may move into coating position, or the tank may be
    movable mounted to facilitate cleaning.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    421,    for other coating apparatus having movably mounted receptacles for
    the coating material.


CLS 118/29
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 26 having means to manipulate, conduct and
    regulate the flow of the coating material to and/or from the pool or bath,
    and/or to maintain circulation of the coating material therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    429,    for liquid supply and/or control means for immersion type apparatus
    which applies coating material to an inedible base.

    688+,   for automatic control means for maintaining a desired level of
    coating material in an immersion tank.


CLS 118/30
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 26 having means for conveying or
    manipulating the work into, through, and/or out of the pool or bath.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    423+,   for conveying or manipulating an inedible base into, through, and
    out of a pool or bath.


CLS 118/31
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 13 having (1) means, per se, for holding
    or handling the work and/or (2) means to receive surplus coating material
    draining from the work after the coating operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500+,   for devices for handling and/or holding inedible work.


CLS 118/31.5
TXT Apparatus under the class definition particularly adapted to taking prints,
    impressions or patterns of animal surfaces wherein the animal body member,
    per se, is the printing device.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes, for example the making of finger
    prints, foot prints, etc., for identification purposes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264+,   for inking pads, per se.

    500+,   for finger print card or sheet holders which retain the record
    during the printing operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 1 for body member printing processes.


CLS 118/32
TXT Coating apparatus under the class definition combined with means to (1)
    bend or double the work back upon or alongside itself to form folds or
    pleats, and/or (2) open or unbend work previously folded or pleated.

    (1)     Note.  Here may be found, for example, means for opening a folded
    envelope and applying sealing material to the flap, or means for hanging a
    coated web in pleated form to facilitate drying.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 90+ for molding apparatus for shaping or reshaping plastic or
    earthly materials combined with means for applying a coating to the
    material or the apparatus.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper, or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 405+ for a device for folding sheet or web
    material.


CLS 118/33
TXT Coating apparatus under the class definition combined with means to apply a
    stress tending to cause elongation of the work.

    (1)     Note.  Here may be found, for example, patents for tentering cloth
    during the coating operation, and also means for maintaining a web under
    tension as it passes through the coating device.

    (2)     Note.  Mere means for pulling a web through a coating device
    against the normal resistance of the device are not considered tensioning
    devices unless some specific means are present to place a drag on the web,
    and such devices will be found in appropriate subclasses below, for
    handling web or strand form work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclasses 71+ for means for applying
    tension to cloth or expanding it to remove wrinkles, creases and folds or
    to increase its dimensions.

    28,     Textiles: Manufacturing, subclasses 240+ for thread stretching
    apparatus, per se, or combined with coating means, where the thread is
    stretched beyond its elastic limit.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 410+ and 147+ for a
    device to control longitudinal stress in a running material; e.g., during
    unwinding.


    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 171+ for processes of coating
    including stretching or tensioning.


CLS 118/34
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 33 in which the stress is applied in the
    direction at right angles to the length or direction of motion of the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclasses 87+ for the structure of a
    spreader for the transverse stretching of a running web of cloth.


CLS 118/35
TXT Coating apparatus under the class definition combined with means for
    cutting, severing, scoring, pricking, and/or punching the base.

    (1)     Note.  Provision of a cutting edge or strip against which the
    article may be severed by tearing is considered a cutting means for
    purposes of this classification.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    for cutting edible base material.

    18      and 100+, for cutting or scoring of the coating material only.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses for devices for cutting, scoring,
    pricking and/or punching a solid material, in general.


CLS 118/36
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 35 wherein the work is in the nature of a
    flexible strand or cord.


CLS 118/37
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 35 wherein the work is in the nature of a
    web or sheet.


CLS 118/38
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 37 wherein the cutting operation is
    performed longitudinally of the work.


CLS 118/39
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 38 wherein the base is also cut
    transversely of the length of the work.


CLS 118/40
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 37 wherein the work is cut transversely of
    its length.


CLS 118/41
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 40 in which the cutter has a reversible
    motion about a pivot point.


CLS 118/42
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 40 in which the cutter has a reversible
    motion in a plane normal to the surface of the work.


CLS 118/43
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 40 provided with a rigid edge against
    which the work may be torn.


CLS 118/44
TXT Coating apparatus under the class definition combined with means to alter
    the shape of the base either before, during or after the coating operation.

    (1)     Note.  Distortion of work incident to the handling thereof is
    excluded from this subclass, as is the mere flexing between opposed members
    of textile work in the presence of coating material to facilitate
    penetration of the coating material.  To be placed in this subclass the
    work must be deformed from its normal state, for example, as by embossing
    of sheet-form work or untwisting of the strands of rope-form work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for coating apparatus combined with folding, unfolding or
    festooning.

    72+,    for coating apparatus combined with means to place the base in
    suitable condition to receive the coating, which means may modify the
    surface of the work.

    427,    for immersion coating apparatus having opposed relatively movable
    solid means acting on the work during the coating operation to bring about
    a more intimate contact between the work and the coating material, and see
    the notes thereto for the location of other art in which the base material
    is subjected to a combined coating and working operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclass 32 and see the
    notes thereto, for operations there provided combined with means for
    applying fluid or plastic material to the work.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 41+ and 46+ for plastic-metal shaping
    apparatus having means for applying a lubricant or a coating to work or to
    the work-engaging surface of a tool prior to forming the work, e.g.,
    lubricating a wire-drawing die.

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, subclass 23 for
    apparatus there provided, combined with means for applying a coating or
    impregnating material to the strands or to the fabric at any time relative
    to the production of the fabric.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 90+ for molding apparatus for shaping or reshaping plastic or
    earthy materials combined with means for applying a coating to the material
    or the apparatus.


CLS 118/45
TXT Coating apparatus under the class definition combined with means to place a
    solid member adjacent the coated surface to shield the freshly coated
    surface from damage or to prevent transfer of coating material therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclass 59 for machines for covering boot
    straps with paper or other material to prevent soiling of the strap in the
    manufacture of the boot or shoe.

    101,    Printing, subclasses 416.1+ for means there provided for, to
    prevent the improper deposition of ink or the rubbing of the ink on the
    work.


CLS 118/46
TXT Coating apparatus under the class definition combined with means to print
    upon the base, which printing means if claimed, per se, would fall within
    the purview of Class 101, Printing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 256+ for processes of forming a
    nonuniform coating.


CLS 118/47
TXT Coating apparatus under the class definition including means to (1) subject
    either the coated surface or the surface to be coated to a flame of fire,
    or (2) subject the work to a carbonizing treatment.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, apparatus employing a
    flame to burn off undesired matter or to ignite or decompose solvent or
    other ingredient of the coating, to oxidize the base or coating, to
    generate carbon for deposit on the base or to fuse the coating material
    adjacent the base.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass also includes apparatus for depositing carbon
    on a base by cracking hydrocarbons in the presence of the base.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58+,    and see the notes thereto for devices for bringing a noncoating gas
    or vapor into contact with the base material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclass 174 for devices for assembling
    yarns or threads into warps, and manipulations leading up to and including
    placing the warps in the loom, including means for subjecting the warp to
    the action of an open flame or an oxidizing temperature.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 271.2 for a surface heater burning
    fluid fuel.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 79+ for hand
    manipulated coating devices which fuse coating material and spray it
    against a base.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 150+ for carbon black making
    apparatus wherein the collector or deposit receiving surface is a part of
    the apparatus as distinguished from a transitory workpiece.

    427,    Coating Processes, for processes of coating and note especially
    subclasses 299+ for pretreatment of a base and subclasses 331+ for
    post-treatment of a coating.


CLS 118/50
TXT Coating apparatus under the class definition combined with a chamber or
    housing in contact with at least a portion of the work, which chamber or
    housing has means for inducing a pressure therein other than atmospheric.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, appropriate subclasses for evaporating
    apparatus.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 226, 241, and 242 for apparatus for
    carrying out reactions of relatively high temperature and pressure; and
    subclasses 295+ for apparatus having a closed chamber adapted to receive
    the material to be treated.


CLS 118/50.1
TXT Apparatus under subclass 50 combined with means to treat the work and/or
    coating material with electrical and/or radiant energy.

    (1)     Note.  The energy may be applied, for example, in the form of an
    electrostatic or electromagnetic field or as infrared waves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 457+ for processes of coating
    utilizing electrical, magnetic, or wave energy.


CLS 118/52
TXT Coating apparatus under the class definition combined with means to rotate
    the base at such speed that centrifugal force affects the coating.

    (1)     Note.  The patents are placed in this and the indented subclasses
    on the bases of disclosure, i.e., if the rotating device functions as a
    centrifuge the patents are here classified.  For work rotating devices
    combined with a coating apparatus which do not have a centrifuging
    function, see subclass 416 and the notes thereto.

    (2)     Note.  The centrifuging may be for the purpose of distributing the
    coating on the article or for removing excess coating material from the
    article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    416,    and see (1) Note, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 286+ for centrifugal metal casting
    apparatus, and particularly subclass 288 for such apparatus including means
    to hold or position a preformed body.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 425 for centrifugal nonmetal casting apparatus.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 240+ for processes of coating wherein
    centrifugal force is utilized.

    494,    Imperforate Bowl: Centrifugal Separators, primarily in regard to
    section V of the definition of that class (494), which includes a listing
    of certain classes, other than the separating classes, which contain
    subclasses relating to centrifugal devices or centrifugal force.


CLS 118/53
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 52 wherein the base is rotated around more
    than one axis of rotation.


CLS 118/54
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 52 wherein the centrifuge is so mounted as
    to have a reversible translating or pivotal motion in addition to the
    motion of rotation.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found, for example, devices in which
    the centrifuge first immerses the article to be coated in an immersion bath
    and then removes and centrifuges the article.


CLS 118/55
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 52 particularly adapted to coat the inner
    surface of a cavity or hole within the confines of the work.

    (1)     Note.  The work is usually rotated about an axis which passes
    through its center.


CLS 118/56
TXT Coating apparatus under the class definition provided with means to impart
    motion to the work for the purpose of altering the characteristics of the
    coating.

    (1)     Note.  In this and the indented subclass may be found, for example,
    devices for immersing the work and then slowly rotating or positionally
    moving it to insure that the coating flows evenly over the entire surface
    of the article.

    (2)     Note.  Normal advancement of the work is not considered
    manipulation within the definition of this subclass even though the work is
    operated on by a device such as a doctor blade during said normal
    advancement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52+,    for coating apparatus combined with means to rotate the base at
    such speed that centrifugal force affects the coating.

    100+,   for coating apparatus having a solid member acting on a coating
    after its application.

    639,    for coating apparatus combined with means to deter excess
    accumulations of coating material by the action of an electrostatic field.


CLS 118/57
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 56 having means for striking or shaking
    the work to distribute the coating material on the base or to remove excess
    coating material from the coated base.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for apparatus for vibrating edible work.


CLS 118/58
TXT Coating apparatus under the class definition combined with means to heat,
    cool, dry and/or contact a noncoating gas or vapor with the work, before,
    during and/or after the coating operation.

    (1)     Note.  Devices for merely holding the base in the ambient air for
    the purpose of cooling the same are excluded from this subclass.  For such
    subject matter search the appropriate work handling subclasses set forth
    below.

    (2)     Note.  Means for merely applying heated coating material to the
    base or mere heating systems for the coating material are not considered
    subject matter for this subclass. Separate means must be provided to apply
    heat directed to the base to be classified here.  Mere heated receptacles
    for coating material, or systems for conveying heated coated material, or
    systems for heating the coating while on the base must be searched in the
    various classes noted below, which classes provide for such apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for similar apparatus for treating edible work.

    47,     for coating apparatus in which a flame directly contacts the work
    piece or having means to cause ignition of the coating material on the base.

    620,    for coating apparatus having means to apply electrical energy
    directly to the work to generate heat.

    641+,   for coating apparatus having means to apply radiant energy directly
    to the work to generate heat.

    715+,   for coating apparatus having means to contact the base with a
    gaseous or vaporized coating material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses
    and see the notes of the class definition of that class for drying means,
    per se. Class 118 provides for the combination of coating and drying.
    Means to treat a coating with a solvent vapor to smooth, polish or coalesce
    the coating, per se, is in Class 34.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 341 for solvent polishing processes within the class definition.

    432,    Heating, appropriate subclass for a residual apparatus for the
    application of heat to material.  See the references to other classes
    having heating apparatus collected under the search notes to the definition
    of Class 432.


CLS 118/59
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 58 having a solid member contacting a
    surface of the work, which member is either heated or cooled, which
    functions only to heat the work.

    (1)     Note.  Heated or cooled solid scrapers or applicators which modify
    the coating other than by changing the temperature thereof are excluded
    from this subclass and will be found in subclasses 101 and 202,
    respectively.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101     and 202, see (1) Note, above.


CLS 118/60
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 59 in which the solid member is a rotary
    treating drum the external surface of which is in contact with the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 110+ for
    drying apparatus in which material is carried on the outside surface of a
    rotary treating drum.

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, appropriate subclasses for
    external rotary drum textile ironers or smoothers.


CLS 118/61
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 58 having means to modify the gas or vapor
    which either contacts or is evolved from the material undergoing treatment.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found, for example, apparatus for
    recovering solvents or vehicles from the coating material which are evolved
    in the drying action.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 72+ for
    apparatus there provided for having means to treat the gases or vapors.


CLS 118/62
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 58 wherein a blast of gas alters the
    position of the work.

    (1)     Note.  Here may be found, for example, devices for removing a
    coated article from a work support by means of a fluid blast, or means to
    separate sheets of paper by directing a fluid blast against the edges
    thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for removing surplus coating from an edible base by a blast of gas.

    63,     for removing surplus coating from an inedible base by a blast of
    gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses for cutting or punching methods or
    apparatus, including means to move the work or the product, and
    particularly subclasses 22, 24, 98+, and 402 which relate to the
    application of fluid to work or to product, usually for the purpose of
    moving it.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclasses 90+ for means for removing
    an individual sheet from its position in a pack wherein the sheet is
    engaged by suction or an air blast.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, appropriate subclasses for conveyors in
    which material is carried by air or some other gas.


CLS 118/63
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 58 having means to direct a gas blast
    against the coating material on the work to redistribute or remove coating
    material therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for removing surplus coating from an edible base by a blast of gas.

    100+,   for coating apparatus having a solid member for redistributing or
    removing coating material from the work.

    639,    for coating apparatus combined with means to deter excess
    accumulations of coating material by the action of an electrostatic field.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 300.1+ for
    the devices there provided for having structure functioning to contact the
    work piece or work surface with a draft of air, steam, or equivalent
    gaseous fluid, for the purpose of dislodging and/or removing unwanted
    foreign material therefrom, and see the search notes thereto for other
    apparatus having blast or suction means.


CLS 118/64
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 58 having a casing or housing enveloping
    or positioned in intimate contact with coating means whereby a particular
    atmosphere may be maintained around the work piece.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found, for example, apparatus having
    means for maintaining a nonoxidizing atmosphere around the work piece to
    facilitate the coating operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 201+ for
    apparatus there provided for, having an enclosure which may be opened on
    one side, and see especially the notes thereto for other apparatus having
    houses, kilns, and containers surrounding a work station.


CLS 118/65
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 64 specialized or peculiarly adapted to
    coat work traveling longitudinally of itself, the length of which work may
    be continuous and uninterrupted as distinguished from apparatus which
    handles the work as discrete units.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    419,    and see the notes thereto for other devices for treating running
    length work.


CLS 118/66
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 58 having means for performing two or more
    of the treatments recited in the definition of subclass 58, before, during
    and/or after the coating operation.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found, for example, apparatus having
    means to subject the work to a heating device and then a cooling device.


CLS 118/67
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 66 specialized or peculiarly adapted to
    coat work traveling longitudinally of itself, the length of which may be
    continuous and uninterrupted as distinguished from apparatus which handles
    the work as discrete units.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    419,    and see the notes thereto for other devices for treating running
    length work.


CLS 118/68
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 58 specialized or peculiarly adapted to
    coat work traveling longitudinally of itself, the length of which may be
    continuous and uninterrupted as distinguished from the apparatus which
    handles the work as discrete units.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    419,    and see the notes thereto for other devices for treating running
    length work.


CLS 118/69
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 58 having means to lower the temperature
    of the work or the coating on the work.


CLS 118/70
TXT Coating apparatus under the class definition having a work carrier or
    manipulator and means to place the work carrier or manipulator in condition
    for use.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found, for example, devices for
    scraping stray coating material from the work carrier so that a succeeding
    base to be coated will not be contaminated by this surplus coating
    material, and devices for  lubricating the work carrier so that the article
    handled thereby can be readily removed therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for means for cleaning or conditioning apparatus for use in coating
    edible work.

    203,    and see the notes thereto, for other coating apparatus having means
    to clean or condition a portion of the coating apparatus.


CLS 118/71
TXT Coating apparatus under the class definition combined with ancillary means
    to mount and/or hold other objects or articles than the applicator and/or
    the work.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found, for example, envelope flap
    moistening devices having drawers or compartments for stamps.


CLS 118/72
TXT Coating apparatus under the class definition combined with means acting on
    the surface of the work to be coated, which means affects the surface of
    the work so that it may better receive the coating.

    (1)     Note.  Means which merely heats or cools the base to prepare it to
    receive the coating is excluded from this subclass and is found in
    subclasses 58+.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, apparatus to wash,
    flux, clean, abrade and/or smooth the work surface of the base, preparatory
    to and combined with a coating operation. Where the apparatus applies a
    preliminary coating, permanent in nature, and then applies a second coating
    to this same base, such apparatus has been classified in the plural coating
    subclasses, for which see the notes to subclass 216.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58+,    for heating and cooling the work and see (1) Note, above.

    63,     for devices for removing previously applied coating material by
    means of a fluid blast in order to prepare the base for further coating
    operations.

    216+,   and see the notes thereto for plural applicators, and see (2) Note,
    above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, appropriate subclasses,
    and see especially the notes of the class definition of that class for
    devices, per se, for cleaning and for other related art.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 299+ for processes of coating
    including a pre-treatment of the base.


CLS 118/73
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 72 wherein the means to prepare the work
    surface applies a fluid to the base.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found, for example, a combination of
    a coating device and means to wash the base to remove foreign matter
    therefrom.  Where the fluid is applied to the coated base, see subclass 75.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for means to apply a fluid to the coated base, and see (1) Note,
    above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses,
    and see the notes thereto, for preparatory fluid treatments, per se,
    including washing and pickling.


CLS 118/74
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 73 having means to contact metal work with
    material which chemically removes impurities from he work.

    (1)     Note.  Where the application of flux to a base is by means of a
    coating device, the fluxing instrumentality, per se, is cross-referenced to
    the appropriate subclass below which provides for the particular type of
    applying device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 33+ for apparatus for and
    subclasses 223+ for method of applying flux to metallic work parts that are
    to be united in a fusion bonding operation.


CLS 118/75
TXT Coating apparatus under the class definition claimed in combination with
    features other than and in addition to work handling structure, applicator
    structure and/or means to modify the coating in some way, and not provided
    for in any of the preceding subclasses.

    (1)     Note.  By work handling structure is meant any device for
    manipulating, restraining, retaining, supporting, guiding, feeding, and/or
    discharging the work.

    (2)     Note.  By applicator structure is meant any instrument for
    contacting the work with a quantity of coating material, means to supply
    coating material to the coating instrument, means to heat, condition,
    clean, or manipulate the coating instrument.

    (3)     Note.  By means to modify the coating is meant any solid member
    contacting the coating on the base after application to the base, which
    member modifies the coating in some way, or any masking members which
    restrict the application of the coating to a particular area of the work.

    (4)     Note.  See section III of the class definition for combinations of
    coating apparatus with other devices located in other classes.

    (5)     Note.  In this subclass or in subclass 23 may be found, for
    example, the combination of bat forming and impregnating apparatus, the
    combination of coating plus a subsequent work handling feature which is
    more than mere removal of the work from the coating zone, the combination
    of washing machines and starching pans, coating apparatus combined with
    washing or liquid treating means for treating the coating after application
    to the base, (compare  subclasses 73+), and coating apparatus combined with
    means to package the work after the coating operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for apparatus for coating edible work combined with noncoating
    devices, and see (3) Note, above.

    73+,    for apparatus for washing the base before coating, and see (5)
    Note, above.


CLS 118/76
TXT Coating apparatus under the class definition in which the coating material
    is in a nonfluid, self-sustaining state and is transferred to the base or
    work to be coated by relative frictional moving contact between the coating
    material and the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 446+ for apparatus for applying an abrasive to
    a buffing wheel in which a block of abrasive is fed against a wheel to
    charge the wheel with abrasives by rubbing contact with the block.


CLS 118/77
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 76 specialized or peculiarly adapted to
    coat work traveling longitudinally of itself, the length of which may be
    continuous and uninterrupted as distinguished from apparatus which handles
    the work as discrete units.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    419,    and see the notes thereto for other coating apparatus for coating
    running length work.


CLS 118/78
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 77 for coating running length work wherein
    the work is in the form of flexible strands or cords.


CLS 118/79
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a frame-like holder
    carrying a transparent sheet particularly adapted for the application of
    ink or other fluid to a base member to be made into a printing plate.

    (1)     Note.  These devices generally comprise a holder for a transparent
    plate onto which is applied the ink in the form of dots, etc., and such
    dots are subsequently transferred from the plate to the work.  The holder
    is usually provided with some kind of micrometer lateral adjustment to
    provide for movement of the plate to and from the work in a special
    relationship to a previously applied design by the same or different plate.


CLS 118/100
TXT Coating apparatus under the class definition having a nonfluid,
    self-sustaining member, spaced from the coating applier and physically in
    contact with the previously applied coating, which member works or
    otherwise modifies the coating.

    (1)     Note.  The member may be rigid or flexible and it may be porous.
    It may squeegee surplus coating material from the work, or finish the
    coating, or remove complete portions of the coating from the work.

    (2)     Note.  Among the art terms used to describe these members are the
    terms: wipers, scrapers, doctors and burnishers.

    (3)     Note.  Wiping or doctoring members which are actually part of the
    coating material supply device, for example, strand coating devices having
    an exit die below the upper surface of the coating material reservoir, are
    excluded from this subclass, and will be found in subclasses 400+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     for apparatus utilizing a gas blast to modify the coating on the
    base.

    200+,   for coating apparatus having solid applicators for transferring a
    film of coating material from a source of supply to the work.

    400+,   for coating devices wherein the base contacts a pool of coating
    material and a retaining wall for the pool serves to meter the quantity of
    coating material applied to the base, and see (3) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclasses 70+ for machines which polish and
    condense the surface of boots and shoes, particularly the sole and heel
    surfaces, through the rubbing action of a rigid metallic tool which is
    usually heated.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, appropriate subclasses
    for solid members, per se, (e.g., brush elements, scraper blades)
    especially subclasses 236.01 and 256.5 and see section IX of the class
    definition of this class (118) for the line between Class 15 and Class 118.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 90.01+ as the generic place for machines
    or processes for burnishing the surface of metallic or nonmetallic articles
    and see the notes thereto for burnishing elsewhere provided for.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 241+ for wringers
    there provided for, comprising mechanical means for pressing or otherwise
    removing liquids from treated material.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 11 for devices for removing excess
    water or size from hat bodies after felting or sizing, usually by roll
    pressing or brushing.


CLS 118/101
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 100 in which the solid member has
    associated therewith heat exchange means for modifying the temperature of
    the member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59+,    for solid members which heat the work.

    202,    for coating apparatus having a solid coating applicator having heat
    exchange means associated therewith.


CLS 118/102
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 100 wherein the solid work treating means
    (1) treats a portion only of the coated surface and/or (2) treats the
    entire coated surface in a nonuniform manner.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found, for example, devices for
    forming parallel stripes on the coated base by removing the coating
    material from portions of the base only, devices for burnishing restricted
    areas only of the coated base, or devices for removing beads of coating
    material which form along the edges of the coated article.

    (2)     Note.  In this subclass may be found certain hand implements for
    modifying a wet coating by applying a design carrying face thereto.  This
    is an exception to the general rule that Class 118 does not provide for
    hand implements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for coating apparatus for applying a coating to edible work having
    means to alter the coating on the work in a manner to decorate or adorn the
    surface thereof.

    204,    for devices having means to remove coating material from the
    surface of a solid applicator in a discontinuous and nonuniform manner
    before contact of the applicator with the work.


CLS 118/103
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 100 having at least two solid members,
    each acting on the coating to modify it in a different manner.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass are cross-referenced to the proper
    single treating means subclasses provided for below.

    (2)     Note.  In this subclass may be found, for example, devices
    including a scraper blade and a rotary brush.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217,    for coating apparatus having at least two solid applicators each
    transferring coating material to the work in a different manner.


CLS 118/104
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 100 having means to prepare the solid work
    treating means for the work treating operation.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found for example coating devices
    having work treating means provided with scrapers for removing excess
    coating material from the work treating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    for coating apparatus having heated or cooled work treating means.

    203,    and see the note thereto for other coating devices having means to
    clean or condition the device.


CLS 118/105
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 100 specialized or peculiarly adapted to
    enter and contact the inner surface of a cavity or hole within the confines
    of the work and modify the coating thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254,    and see the notes thereto for other coating apparatus for coating
    the inside of a hollow work piece.


CLS 118/106
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 100 wherein the solid member is a strip,
    loop or belt of flexible material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257,    for apparatus having an applicator in the form of a strip, loop or
    belt of flexible material.


CLS 118/107
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 100 having means to rotate the coated base
    about an axis passing through the article during the work treating
    operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    416,    and see the notes thereto for other coating apparatus having work
    rotating means.


CLS 118/108
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 100 in which the solid member is supported
    by, attached to, or suspended from the work and travels along the surface
    to be treated.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found, for example, cable painters
    having additional brushing means and in which the entire device is
    supported on and traverses the cable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305,    and see the notes thereto for other coating apparatus supported by
    the work.


CLS 118/109
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 100 in which the solid member comprises a
    saturable or fluid permeable, loose or felted mass of material, or fabric.

    (1)     Note.  Solid work treating means in this subclass may be, for
    example, a batch of fabric waste material, a textile surfaced pad, or a
    mass of asbestos fibers.


CLS 118/110
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 100 in which the solid member turns about
    an axis while in contact with the coated surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258,    and see the notes thereto for other coating apparatus having rotary
    members.


CLS 118/111
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 110 in which the axis of rotation of the
    solid working member is in a plane normal to the coated surface of the work
    being treated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 28+ for
    brushing devices having a rotary disc brush or broom.


CLS 118/112
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 110 in which the work has motion relative
    to the axis of rotation of the rotary working member and the motion
    parallels or coincides with the axis.


CLS 118/113
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 110 in which the rotary member has an
    additional reversible or vibratory motion along the axis of rotation.


CLS 118/114
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 110 having at least one pair of rotary
    working members which are in direct apposition one to the other and between
    which the work is contacted.

    (1)     Note.  In this and the indented subclasses may be found, for
    example, coating devices combined with devices of the wringer type for
    removing surplus coating material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see section IIB of the class definition for the loci of roll pairs with
    working surface.


CLS 118/115
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 114 wherein the opposed rotary members are
    arranged with their axes of revolution disposed in the same horizontal
    plane whereby the work is vertically disposed between the rolls.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 248 for wringers of
    the roller type wherein the rolls are arranged in a horizontal plane.


CLS 118/116
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 114 restricted or peculiar to the
    treatment of pliable, nonrigid work.

    (1)     Note.  In this and the indented subclasses may be found, for
    example, devices for treating coated textiles or textile articles, paper,
    cords or filaments.


CLS 118/117
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 116, peculiar or specialized to the
    treatment or handling of work traveling longitudinally of itself, the
    length of which is continuous and uninterrupted as distinguished from
    apparatus which handles the work as discrete units.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    419,    and see the notes thereto for other devices for coating running
    length work.


CLS 118/118
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 110, specialized or peculiarly adapted to
    coat work traveling longitudinally of itself, the length of which may be
    continuous or uninterrupted as distinguished from apparatus which handles
    the work as discrete units.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    419,    and see the notes thereto for other apparatus for coating running
    length work.


CLS 118/119
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 118 in which the rotary member acts on the
    work treated in direct apposition to a support member for the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248+,   for coating apparatus having rotary applicators and opposed
    back-ups.


CLS 118/120
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 100 in which the solid working member has
    a reversible or vibratory motion over the surface of the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241+,   for coating apparatus in which the solid applicator has a
    reciprocating motion.


CLS 118/121
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 100 having at least one pair of working
    members in direct apposition one to the other and between which the work is
    contacted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for coating apparatus having at least one pair of cooperating
    rotary members wherein at least one of the opposed members is a rotary
    wiper.

    227+,   for coating devices having opposed applicators.


CLS 118/122
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 121 specialized or peculiarly adapted to
    coat work traveling longitudinally of itself, the length of which work may
    be continuous and uninterrupted as distinguished from apparatus which
    handles the work as discrete units.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for apparatus for coating running length work in which both of the
    opposed members are rotary.

    419,    and see the notes thereto for other apparatus for applying a
    coating to running length work.


CLS 118/123
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 100 specialized or peculiarly adapted to
    coat work traveling longitudinally of itself, the length of which may be
    continuous and uninterrupted as distinguished by the apparatus which
    handles the work as discrete units.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    118 and 122, for other coating apparatus having solid work treating
    means which are peculiarly adapted to treat running or indefinite length
    work.

    419,    and see the notes thereto for other apparatus for applying a
    coating to running length work.


CLS 118/124
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 123 in which the solid member is
    positioned out of the normal straight line path of the running length work
    and means are provided for guiding the work into contact with the member
    whereby the work must assume a tortuous or angled path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     and see the notes thereto for devices for placing running length
    work under tension, which devices may cause the work to assume a zig zagged
    or jogged path.


CLS 118/125
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 123 in which the solid member has a
    working surface which completely surrounds and closely embraces the work
    being treated.

    (1)     Note.  The member may be of unitary construction or it may be in
    several segments or Sections, however, it must substantially completely
    encircle the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404,    for other coating devices having die members.


CLS 118/126
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 123 in which the solid member acts on the
    work in direct apposition to a support member for the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    for apparatus wherein at least one of the working members is a
    rotary wiper.

    248,    and see the notes thereto for other coating apparatus having
    coating applying means and opposed work back-ups.


CLS 118/200
TXT Coating apparatus under the class definition having a nonfluid,
    self-sustaining body impregnated with or wetted by fluent coating material,
    the body physically touching the work and transferring a film of coating
    material thereto from a bulk supply.

    (1)     Note.  An impregnated applicator may be, for example, a brush, a
    porous pad or other body which retains or contains the bulk supply of
    coating material.

    (2)     Note.  Solid applicators for transferring coating material having
    side walls to enable the transfer means to retain a layer of coating
    material of thickness greater than a surface film are considered to be
    immersion coating devices and such subject matter is classified in subclass
    400.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76+,    for coating apparatus in which the coating material is in a solid
    or self-sustaining form.

    100+,   for solid work treating means which contact the base after
    application of the coating material thereto and modify the coating in some
    way.

    400+,   for coating apparatus in which a supported pool, column, or stream
    of coating material is brought into contact with the base to be coated, and
    see (2) Note, above.


CLS 118/201
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 200 having means to attach or support the
    solid applicator on the person of the user or upon his apparel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclasses 261, 265, and 600+ for package and article carriers formed as
    articles of clothing or directly or indirectly attached to or supported
    from the body.


CLS 118/202
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 200 wherein either (1) the solid
    applicator or (2) means acting as an applicator in transferring a film of
    coating material to the solid work coating applicator, has heat exchange
    means associated therewith.

    (1)     Note.  To be included in this subclass the heat exchange means must
    be in direct association with the solid applicator, rather than indirectly,
    as by immersion of the applicator in a supply of heated coating material,
    for which see the pertinent applicator subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58+,    for apparatus for applying heat to the coated or uncoated base
    through means other than the applicator.

    101,    for heated or cooled solid means acting on the coating after
    application to perform some function, as there defined, in addition to
    heating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclasses 8, 9, 21, 25, 27, and 31, (and see the search
    notes to subclass 31) for heated dies.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 89+ for a heated or cooled roll of
    general application.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 1+ for a
    coating implement with material supply and having means to heat the
    material prior to its application to a work surface.


CLS 118/203
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 200 having means to prepare the applicator
    for the coating operation.

    (1)     Note.  Here may be found, for example, coating apparatus having
    means to scrape excess coating material from the applicator after the
    applicator has contacted the base, means to remove coating material from
    noncoating areas of the applicator (such as bearing surfaces of roll type
    applicators), means for pointing brush type applicators, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Mere heating or cooling of the applicator is excluded from
    this subclass, for which see subclass 202, above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     and see the notes thereto for coating apparatus having means to
    clean or condition the work carrier or manipulator.

    104,    for coating apparatus having means to condition solid work
    contacting devices.

    202,    for coating apparatus having means to heat or cool the applicator
    and see (2) Note, above.


CLS 118/204
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 200 having means to (1) remove coating
    material from a portion only of the coating surface of an applicator or (2)
    remove coating material in an uneven manner from the entire coating surface
    thereof before contact of the applicator with the work.

    (1)     Note.  The coating may be removed entirely from some areas of the
    applicator and left intact on other coatings of the applicator or the
    coating may be left thicker in some areas than in other areas or removed
    nonuniformly in any way.  In this manner the coating will, of necessity, be
    applied to the base in patterns, stripes or discontinuous areas or thicker
    in one portion than in the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    and see the notes thereto for apparatus for removing the coating
    material from the base so as to leave the coating on the base in patterns,
    stripes or thicker in one part than in another.

    211,    for other means for applying coating material to the base in a
    pattern or definite circumscribed area of application.

    261+,   for coating apparatus having means to remove coating material from
    a rotary applicator before application to the base in which the material is
    removed uniformly over the surface of the applicator.


CLS 118/205
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 200 provided with means to intermittently
    alter the shape of a flexible or otherwise deformable applicator, to cause
    the applicator to conform to the surface of an object to be coated.

    (1)     Note.  Some special means must be provided to directly alter the
    shape of the applicator.  Mere resilient or flexible applicators, such as
    brushes or pads which deform on being pressed against the work, are
    excluded from this subclass, for which see subclasses 264+.

    (2)     Note.  The solid applicator is usually (1) placed within a hollow
    work piece and then expanded into contact with the inner surfaces of the
    work piece to transfer coating material to the inner surface, or (2)
    contracted about the external surface of the work piece to transfer coating
    to that surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    214+    and 254, for other coating devices having solid applicators
    contacting the inner surface of hollow work pieces.

    264+,   and see (1) Note, above.


CLS 118/206
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 200 having two or more instrumentalities
    for applying a coating material to the work, at least one of which is not a
    solid applicator as defined in subclass 200.

    (1)     Note.  It is immaterial for the purpose of classification in this
    subclass whether the coating is a single coating or plural coating, whether
    coatings are applied simultaneously or sequentially, or in which order the
    coatings are applied.

    (2)     Note.  Patents in this subclass are cross-referenced to the
    appropriate single coating subclasses below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216+,   for various arrangements of plural solid applicators.

    715+,   for combinations of an applicator coating device and means for
    applying the coating wherein the coating material is in a gaseous or
    vaporous state.


CLS 118/207
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 200 in which the coating device is
    supported, attached to or suspended from the work, and travels along the
    surface to be coated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305,    and see the notes thereto, for other coating apparatus supported
    and/or guided by the work being coated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, appropriate subclasses
    for other work traversing solid applicators and see the reference to Class
    15 in section IX of the class definitions of this class (118) for the line
    between Class 15 and Class 118.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclass 48 for a
    hand-manipulated coating implement with material supply, including
    work-contacting supporting or stabilizing means; and subclass 193 for such
    an implement including a guide.


CLS 118/208
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 207 wherein the work is of great length
    with respect to its width and thickness, the cross-Sectional dimensions of
    which are approximately equal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305+,   and see the notes thereto for other work traversing coating
    devices, and subclass 307 when the work is of strand, rod or bar form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 10 and 11,
    respectively, for an implement of that class including a tool which
    includes plural work-contacting faces or a concave work-contacting face.


CLS 118/209
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 200 having means for manipulating,
    restraining, retaining, supporting, guiding, feeding or discharging the
    work in addition to any movement of the work caused by the applicator.

    (1)     Note.  Where two or more opposed applicators act to handle or
    support the work between them, classification is in this or indented
    subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305+,   and see the notes thereto for coating apparatus supported by and
    traversing the work.


CLS 118/210
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 209 having means to change at will the
    rate of relative movement between the work and applicator.

    (1)     Note.  For example, the relative rates of work and applicator
    motions may be altered for the purpose of increasing or decreasing the
    thickness of film of coating material deposited on the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    668+,   for coating devices having automatic control means for sensing a
    condition and causing a control operation to vary the rate of work and
    applicator movement.


CLS 118/211
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 209 including means which applies the
    coating in definite configurations forming restricted areas for special
    purposes.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus using applicators having roughened, grooved,
    stippled or other irregular surfaces where the purpose is not primarily to
    apply the coating in definite patterns or areas, but merely to allow the
    applicator to retain more coating material, to cause better feed of the
    work, or to coat the work in spots which are indiscriminately applied and
    not definitely located for special purposes, are excluded.  Such devices
    are classified in the appropriate subclasses where the type apparatus is
    classified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204,    for apparatus having means for partially removing the coating from
    the applicator or other coating material transfer means so as to leave the
    coating on the work in patterns, strips, or thicker in one part than
    another.

    216+,   and see the notes thereto for apparatus for applying the coating in
    plural bands or stripes of definite width which may cover only part of the
    work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, appropriate subclasses for means adapted to produce
    characters for designs on surfaces by impression of types or dies or by
    employing coating material thereto through openings of previous portions of
    a pattern sheet, as in stenciling or by impression from planographic or
    intaglio surfaces.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 256+ for coating processes wherein a
    nonuniform coating is obtained.

    492,    Roll or Roller, subclasses 30+ for a roll, per se, not elsewhere
    provided for, having surface projections, indentations or slits.


CLS 118/212
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 211 including applicators having areas
    raised or depressed relative to a base level which areas apply coating
    material to the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclasses 150+ for printing machines in which printing
    is done by means of surfaces dependent upon design grooves to retain the
    ink, and see other appropriate subclasses in Class 101 for printing by
    means of inked raised areas.


CLS 118/213
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 211 in which part of the work is shielded
    by a solid member interposed between the work and the coating device, the
    shield preventing transfer of coating material onto the work part so
    shielded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301,    for projection coating devices utilizing a mask or stencil.

    406,    for immersion coating apparatus utilizing a mask or stencil, and
    see the notes thereto for other apparatus utilizing masks or stencils.


CLS 118/214
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 209 specialized or peculiarly adapted to
    enter or contact the inner surface of a cavity or hole within the confines
    of the work and apply a coating thereto.

    (1)     Note.  Those patents which have apparatus to coat surfaces in
    addition to the inside surface only of the hollow work are cross-referenced
    to the appropriate subclasses for such apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254,    and see the notes thereto for other devices for applying a coating
    to the inside of a hollow work piece.


CLS 118/215
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 214 having means to coat the inside only
    of the hollow work piece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254,    and see the notes thereto, for other devices for applying a coating
    to the inside of hollow work.


CLS 118/216
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 209 having (1) two or more applicators,
    (2) a single applicator divided into Sections, as by grooves, so as to
    apply coating to the work in parallel bands or stripes, (3) a single
    applicator having separate supply means for the coating material so that
    the coating is applied in parallel bands or stripes, or (4) any combination
    of the above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204,    for coating devices in which coating is applied in parallel bands
    or stripes because of scrapers acting on the applicator to remove coating
    bands therefrom.

    206,    for the combination of a solid applicator with other coating
    applying devices.

    211+,   and see the notes thereto, for coating apparatus having pattern or
    circumscribed area applicators.

    255,    for apparatus having plural applicators and/or material supplies
    with no means to handle the work.

    304,    for a projector or spray-type coating device combined with a
    nonsolid applicator.

    313+,   for coating apparatus having plural projector or spray-type
    applicators.


CLS 118/217
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 216 having at least two solid applicators
    which act in a different manner to transfer coating material to the work.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found, by way of example, a rotary
    solid applicator and a stationary pad-type applicator.


CLS 118/218
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 216 having means to turn the article about
    an axis passing therethrough during the coating operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    416,    and see the notes thereto for the other coating apparatus having
    means to rotate the article.


CLS 118/219
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 218 wherein the plural solid applicating
    surfaces are so arranged and related that the coating is applied to the
    base in parallel, adjacent, spaced, and/or overlapping stripes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221,    for plural solid applicator surfaces where the work does not rotate.


CLS 118/220
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 216 wherein at least two of the solid
    applicator surfaces coat different work pieces.


CLS 118/221
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 216 wherein the plural solid applicator
    surfaces are so arranged that the coating is applied to the base in
    parallel, adjacent, spaced, and/or overlapping stripes.


CLS 118/222
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 221 having means to vary the positional
    relationship of the solid applicator surfaces.


CLS 118/223
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 216 wherein the work to be coated
    traverses a path which passes two or more solid applicators so positioned
    that the work contacts one applicator after the other.


CLS 118/224
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 223 having (1) two or more rotating
    applicators in direct apposition between which the work passes or (2)
    rotating work feeders and applicators in direct apposition between which
    the work passes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114+    and 119, for coating apparatus wherein the work passes between a
    backing member and an opposed solid work treating device acting on the
    coating after application.

    227+    and 248+, for other coating apparatus having opposed rotary work
    feeders and/or applicators.


CLS 118/225
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 216 having at least two solid applicators
    so arranged as to apply the coating material to the work at the same time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223+,   for coating apparatus wherein the work moves past sequentially
    arranged applicator which may or may not act on the work at the same time.


CLS 118/226
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 225 having at least two applicators in
    direct apposition one to the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114+    and 121+, for coating apparatus having opposed solid means acting
    on the coating after application of the coating to the base.


CLS 118/227
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 226 wherein both of the applicators turn
    about an axis of rotation passing through the applicator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114+,   for coating apparatus having opposed rotary members acting on the
    coated work.


CLS 118/228
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 227 having a cantilever mounting for at
    least one of the opposed rotary applicators whereby work of indefinite
    width may be passed between the opposed members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250,    for opposed rotary applicators and work back-ups at least one of
    which is supported by a cantilever member.


CLS 118/229
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 209 having a cylindrical body around the
    periphery of which flexible strand form work is wound in fixed position,
    the body being indexed about its longitudinal axis whereby successive
    portions of the wound body are presented to the coating means for applying
    a coating to the work wound there-about.

    (1)     Note.  The art term usually used to describe these devices is "yarn
    striper".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230+,   and see the notes thereto for other coating devices using a drum
    type work conveyor.


CLS 118/230
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 209 having means to move the work about an
    axis of rotation, which axis is external of the work thus moving the work
    in an arc or circle.

    (1)     Note.  The apparatus in this subclass usually moves the work from
    work station to work station or through a coating zone as distinguished
    from devices which rotate the work about an axis internal of the work to
    present every portion of the work to the coating instrumentality such as is
    found in subclass 232.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232+,   for apparatus for rotating work about an internal axis and see (1)
    Note, above.

    319,    for apparatus having turret type work conveyors having a projection
    coating device, and see the notes thereto for the location of other turret
    type work conveyors.


CLS 118/231
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 230 having means on its periphery for
    clamping discrete workpieces that are flexible and very thin relative to
    its width and length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236+,   and see the notes thereto, for other apparatus for handling
    sheet-form work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclass 277 for sheet handling
    devices, per se, comprising drums or having clamps.


CLS 118/232
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 209 having means to turn the work about an
    axis passing through the work while in contact with the applicator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52+,    for other coating apparatus in which the article is rotated at a
    speed sufficient to apply centrifugal force to the coating on the base.

    416,    and see the notes thereto, for other apparatus for rotating the
    work while being coated.


CLS 118/233
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 232 wherein the base to be coated is
    freely mounted for rotation and is rotated by the applicator in contact
    therewith.


CLS 118/234
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 209 having means peculiar or specialized,
    to applying a coating to flexible running length work, a cross Section of
    which is approximately equal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     for apparatus for coating strands or cords utilizing solid or
    self-sustaining coating material.

    122     and 123+, for other patents peculiar or specialized with the
    treatment of running lengths of material in which a solid work treating
    means acts on the coating after application to the base.

    305,    for coating apparatus for traversing a strand, rod or bar and
    coating the same.

    420,    for immersion coating devices for coating work in the form of
    flexible strands or cords.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles: Manufacturing, subclasses 217+ and especially 246, 261,
    265+, and 285+ for apparatus for performing mechanical operations in
    finishing braids, yarns, threads and similar strands with finishing
    operation including the application of gas or liquid.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 7, 32, 286,
    292, and 295, and see the notes thereto for textile spinning, twisting and
    twining apparatus having means to apply a coating material to the textile.

    101,    Printing, subclass 172 for devices which involve printing with inks
    of different colors on strands either singly or side by side.

    184,    Lubrication, subclasses 15.1+ for devices intended to apply
    lubricant to a belt, cable or chain and constructed with such purpose in
    view.


CLS 118/235
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 209 having means for coiling or uncoiling
    running length flexible work to remove it from, or to supply it to, the
    coating apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found, for example, strip servers
    which feed a strip from a roll supply and moisten the strip.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39      and 40+, for strip servers which feed a strip from a roll supply
    combined with means to sever the strip.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, appropriate subclasses for a
    winding, tensioning, or guiding a running material.


CLS 118/236
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 209 having means for handling individual
    sheets or for applying a coating to the faces of sheets arranged in a pile.

    (1)     Note.  A "sheet" is defined in the definitions of subclass 231.

    (2)     Note.  Where a stack of sheets is handled as a unit and coated as a
    unit rather than as discrete sheets, classification is in the appropriate
    subclasses which provide for the specific work handling or coating
    apparatus.

    (3)     Note.  In this and the indented subclass may also be found, for
    example, devices for applying adhesive to the top sheet in a stack of
    sheets and then removing the coated sheet from the stack so that the next
    sheet may be coated.  Here also are devices for stacking or unstacking
    sheets before or after the coating operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231,    for coating apparatus having a rotating turret, wheel, or drum type
    work conveyor for handling sheet form work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for article dispensing
    not otherwise provided for and see the reference to class (221) in section
    IX of the class definition of this class (118) for a statement of the class
    line.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, appropriate subclasses for sheet
    feeding or delivering devices, per se, and see (2) Note of the main class
    definitions of that class for other sheet handling devices.

    412,    Bookbinding:  Process and Apparatus, subclasses 9+ for apparatuses
    for applying glue or adhesives to the back of a stack of sheets combined
    with other operations provided for in that class; in particular, subclass
    36 for adhesive tapes used in an edge binding operation; and subclass 37
    for adhesives used in edge binding operations.  Riffling or otherwise
    disturbing the stacked sheets to aid in the penetration of glue or
    adhesives between the sheets combined with adhesive or glue applying may
    also be found in class (412).


CLS 118/237
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 236 having means positioning the
    applicator so that it rests upon the upper surface of the stack of sheets,
    whereby as each sheet is removed, the sheet immediately will support the
    applicator.


CLS 118/238
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 209 having means for supporting and
    presenting the work to the applicator, which means has a reversible motion
    to and from the applicator surface.

    (1)     Note.  In each case the work is supported in fixed position
    relative to the presenting means during its motion transmitting movement.

    (2)     Note.  Mere backups for pressing the work against the applicator to
    insure coating are excluded from this subclass.  See subclasses 248+ and
    253 for such subject matter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248+,   for coating apparatus having a backup for pressing the work against
    the rotary applicator and see (2) Note above.

    253,    for coating apparatus having fixed position applicators with
    movable back up members for pressing the work against the applicator and
    see (2) note above.


CLS 118/239
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 209 having means to impart a motion to the
    work which means is a flexible transporting means of continuous or
    indefinite length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324,    and see the notes thereto for other devices having endless
    conveyors.


CLS 118/240
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 209 wherein an applicator moves across the
    surface of the work with a motion that at any point on the surface of the
    work is other than in a straight line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241+,   for coating apparatus in which the applicator has a reciprocating
    or oscillating motion.

    244+,   for coating apparatus in which the applicator has a rotary motion.


CLS 118/241
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 209 having means to impart to the
    applicator a reversible or alternate back and forth motion.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found, for example, apparatus in
    which the applicator moves from a rest position into contact with the work
    to apply a coating thereto and then back to the rest position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for coating apparatus having a reciprocatory solid member modifying
    the coating.

    240,    for coating apparatus wherein the applicator has compound motion
    while in contact with the work surface being coated.

    256+,   for other movably mounted applicators having no means to manipulate
    support or guide the work.


CLS 118/242
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 241 wherein the applicator moves in a
    plane parallel to the surface being coated while in contact with this
    surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229,    for devices in which the applicator moves transversely of the axis
    of strand form work wound on an indexed drum.


CLS 118/243
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 241 in which the applicator moves from a
    source of coating material to the work and then back to the source of
    coating material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263,    for other coating apparatus having applicators which reciprocate
    between a coating position and the source of coating materials supply.


CLS 118/244
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 209 wherein the coating transfer surface
    of the applicator turns about an axis of rotation.

    (1)     Note.  The surface of the applicator may be continuous or
    discontinuous, solid or yielding e.g., it may consist of the bristle ends
    of a brush, and it may extend only along a portion or segment of the
    periphery of the applicator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110+,   for coating apparatus having solid means acting on the coating
    after application to the base which solid means has a work treating surface
    which rotates about an axis.

    216,    for coating apparatus having plural or Sectioned applicators one of
    which might be a rotary applicator.

    258+,   for rotary applicators having coating material supply but no work
    handling means and see the notes thereto for other apparatus having rotary
    applicators.


CLS 118/245
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 244 having a normally stationary solid
    member contacting the periphery of the rotary applicator which solid member
    prevents the coated article from adhering to the applicator in its rotary
    motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 174 for roll type presses having roll strippers.


CLS 118/246
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 244 provided with means for causing the
    work to follow the surface of the rotary applicator over at least a portion
    of the circumference of said surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for coating apparatus having means which does not cooperate with
    the coating applicator to deform the work.


CLS 118/247
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 244 having a work pressing member not
    attached to the work but which is alternately moved into position to press
    the work against the applicator and moved out of work pressing position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238,    for work holders which grasp work pieces and have a motion of
    reciprocation in presenting the work to the solid, applicator.


CLS 118/248
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 244 in which the work is retained against
    a rotary applicator member by a pressing member in direct apposition to the
    applicator, i.e., the work is engaged between the pressing or retaining
    means and the applicator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    for coating apparatus having opposed rotary working and backing
    members which working member acts on the coated base after coating
    application.

    224,    for coating apparatus in which the base to be coated moves between
    sequentially arranged pairs of opposed rotary work feeders and/or
    applicators.

    226+,   for coating apparatus in which the base to be coated moves between
    two opposed applicators which apply a coating to opposite sides of the work.


CLS 118/249
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 248 wherein the work backup is cylindrical
    in form and turns about its longitudinal axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114+,   for coating apparatus having opposed rotary members acting on the
    coated base.

    224,    for plural rotary applicators and opposed backup couples.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see section IIB of the class definition for the loci of roll pairs with
    working surface.


CLS 118/250
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 249 having a cantilever mounting for at
    least one of the opposed rotary members whereby work of indefinite width
    may be passed between the opposed members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228,    for opposed rotary applicators having a cantilever mounting for at
    least one of the opposed rotary applicators.


CLS 118/251
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 248 having a cantilever mounting for at
    least one of the opposed members whereby work of indefinite width may be
    passed between the opposed members.


CLS 118/252
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 244 having a normally stationary member
    contacting with the work for determining the relationship of the coating
    surface of the rotary applicator to the surface of the work being coated.

    (1)     Note.  The guide or gauge member may be a part of, or integral
    with, the rotary applicator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclasses 226+ for sheet feeding and
    delivering devices with rotary conveyors having means to position the
    lateral edge of the sheet parallel to the line of travel.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 10 or 193 for
    hand-manipulated coating implements with material supply wherein work is
    guided, respectively, between confronting tool faces (subclass 10) or by a
    tool guide for engaging a work surface (subclass 193); and see, also,
    subclass 48, wherein means stabilizing the implement acts as a guide, as
    well.

    492,    Roll or Roller, subclasses 9+ for a roll, per se, not elsewhere
    provided for, with measuring, testing, or indicating means.


CLS 118/253
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 209 having a static applicator and movably
    mounted members to press the work against the applicator during the coating
    operation.

    (1)     Note.  The movably mounted members do not move the work along the
    surface of the applicator but merely press the work into contact with the
    applicator. The appropriate work handling subclasses above provide for
    apparatus for moving work relative to the coating surface of an applicator
    with a rubbing motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238,    for coating apparatus having a work holder for grasping the work
    and imparting a reciprocating motion thereto.


CLS 118/254
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 200 specialized or peculiarly adapted to
    enter and contact the inner surface cavity or hole within the confines of
    the work and applying a coating thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for devices for coating the inside of a hollow article utilizing
    centrifugal force to facilitate the coating operation.

    105,    for apparatus having solid means acting on a coating applied to the
    inside of a hollow workpiece after application of the coating material to
    the workpiece.

    214+,   for coating apparatus having applicators for coating the inside of
    a hollow workpiece and having also means to handle, retain, or relatively
    guide the work with respect to the applicator.

    306,    and see the search notes thereto for coating devices for coating
    the inside of hollow work in which the coating device is supported by and
    traverses the inner surface of the hollow work.

    317+,   for coating apparatus for spraying a coating against the inside of
    a hollow workpiece.

    408,    for coating apparatus for coating the inside of a hollow work piece
    by immersion.

    622,    for hollow work interiorly coated by means of electrostatic and/or
    electromagnetic attraction or projection of the coating material to the
    work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 56 and
    104.03+ for devices especially adapted for  cleaning miscellaneous
    receptacles, pipes and tubes, by means of a brush, broom or other cleaning
    instrument.

    166,    Wells, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for cementing wells.


CLS 118/255
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 200 having (1) two or more applicators,
    (2) a single applicator divided into Sections as by grooves so as to apply
    coating to the work in parallel bands and stripes, (3) a single applicator
    having plural means for supplying coating material so that the coating is
    applied in parallel bands or stripes, or any combination of the above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204,    for coating devices in which coating is applied in parallel bands
    or stripes because of scrapers acting on the applicator to remove bands of
    coating material therefrom.

    216,    for other coating apparatus having plural applicators and/or
    material supply and also having work handling or feeding means.


CLS 118/256
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 200 in which the applicator is so
    supported as to be capable of motion during the coating operation.

    (1)     Note.  The motion of the applicator may be a motion of the working
    surface of the applicator with respect to the surface of the article being
    coated or it may be bodily motion of the applicator to or from a source of
    coating material supply during the normal operation of the machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207+,   for solid applicators having work supported or guided applicators
    and which traverse the work in applying the coating.

    209+,   for coating apparatus having movable applicators and means to
    handle, guide or feed the article.


CLS 118/257
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 256 wherein the solid applicator is a
    strip, loop, or belt of flexible material, coated or impregnated with
    coating material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    for coating apparatus having solid work treating means acting on
    the coating after application to the base in which the work treating means
    is in the form of a moving web or belt.


CLS 118/258
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 256 in which the applicator surface turns
    about an axis of rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110+,   for coating apparatus having a rotary member acting on the coating
    after application to the base.

    216+,   for coating apparatus having arrangements of plural rotary
    applicators with work handling means for the base to be coated.

    244+,   for other coating apparatus having rotary applicators in addition
    to work handling means for handling the coated base or the base to be
    coated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see section IIB of the class definition for the loci of roll pairs with
    working surface.


CLS 118/259
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 258 in which the coating material is
    supplied to the applicator surface from a spaced coating material supply by
    means of a pump and/or means to spray, project or drip the coating material
    on the applicator surface.

    (1)     Note.  Gravity feed which does not spray, project or drip the
    coating material on the applicator surface may be found in subclass 258, or
    other appropriate indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258+,   and see (1) Note supra.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclass 315, and see the search notes thereto for
    devices adapted for inking the printing member of a rotary press, the
    roller being supplied with ink from a reservoir.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 143+ for a
    hand-manipulated coating implement having means for producing force on the
    material for moving it to or through the tool.


CLS 118/260
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 258 in which the coating material supply
    is fed to the applicator by means of an absorbent or porous capillary feed
    member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    268,    for absorbent or porous applicators which are static and in which
    the coating material is fed through a wick from a separate source of
    coating material supply, and see especially the search notes thereto, for
    other devices having wick feed means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    184,    Lubrication, subclass 64 for feeding lubricant to a bearing surface
    in which the lubricant is fed through a wick by capillary attraction.


CLS 118/261
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 258 having (1) a solid transfer member
    which separates a film of coating material from a bulk supply and applies
    said film to the applicator, or (2) a member for limiting the thickness of
    the film of coating material retained on the applicator.

    (1)     Note.  The means for limiting the thickness of the film retained on
    the applicator may be, by way of example, a solid scraper edge or it may be
    a so-called "air-doctor" or gaseous blast which blows off the surplus
    coating material.

    (2)     Note.  In every instance the doctor member regulates the thickness
    of the film on the applicator before the applicator contacts the base to be
    coated.  For members which scrape excess coating material from the
    applicator after the completion of the coating operation, see subclass 203
    of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     and see the notes thereto for devices for removing surplus coating
    material from the coated article by means of a blast of gas.

    100+,   for coating apparatus having solid means contacting the base after
    the base is coated for the purpose of removing surplus coating material
    from the base.

    203,    for coating apparatus in which excess or surplus coating material
    is removed from the applicator after the applicator surface contacts the
    base to be coated, and see (2) Note, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclasses 167+ and see the notes thereto, for devices
    there provided limited in function to removing the ink from the printing
    surface except where retained by the design-grooves.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 91 for a rotatable heat exchanger drum with
    a surface scraper of broader application.


CLS 118/262
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 261 in which the means to limit or apply
    the coating material to the rotary applicator has a generally cylindrical
    contacting surface, which surface turns about its longitudinal axis.

    (1)     Note.  The rotary member or doctor need not be rotated during the
    time that it regulates the thickness of the coating on the applicator but
    may, for example, rotate only intermittently to permit foreign matter to
    pass between the applicator and the doctor.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass also provides for rotary feeders which carry a
    film of coating material to the applicator itself and combinations of a
    plurality of such rotary feeders.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243,    for rotary applicators movable bodily to and from a source of
    coating material.


CLS 118/263
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 256 in which the applicator has a
    reversible motion between the base to be coated and a source of coating
    material.

    (1)     Note.  Mere yieldably mounted pad or absorbent type applicators
    which may be deformed by pressure to contact a source of coating material
    supply are excluded from this subclass, and will be found in subclass 265.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243,    for reciprocating applicators having, in addition, means to handle
    or retain the work.

    265,    and see (1) Note, above.


CLS 118/264
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 200 wherein the applicator is a static
    structure of saturable or fluid permeable material impregnated or saturated
    with coating material.

    (1)     Note.  In this and in the indented subclasses may be found, for
    example, so-called hand-stamp ink pads.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401,    for coating devices having capillary passages for bringing fluid
    into contact with the base wherein the passages are other than a porous or
    absorbent mass or brush.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 104.92 for a
    static cleaning implement having a tool which is either impregnated or
    coated with material supply; and subclasses 104.93+ for a hand-manipulated
    cleaning implement having such a tool.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 196+ for a
    hand-manipulated device with material supply and a porous applying tool
    through which the material flows.


CLS 118/265
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 264 in which at least a portion of the pad
    or applicator surface is distorted into contact with the coating material
    supply.

    (1)     Note.  Deformation of the surface of the applicator, per se, must
    occur, resulting either in indirect application of coating material to the
    applicator from a remote supply, or in direct contact of the applicator
    into coating material supply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243     and 263, for coating devices in which the entire applicator is
    removably mounted for movement to a source of coating material supply.


CLS 118/266
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 264 having either (1) a movable member for
    separating coating material from a source of supply and transporting it to
    the applicator surface, or (2) pump or pressure means other than gravity
    head for flowing a stream of coating material from a source of supply to
    the applicator surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    265,    for other pads or absorbent or porous applicators in which the pad
    or applicator is deformable to contact the coating material supply.

    267,    for gravity feed from a separate coating material supply to the pad.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 143+ for an
    implement of that class provided with means to produce a force on the
    material so as to move it from the supply toward the tool; and subclass
    191, for such an implement wherein the tool is movable to and from the
    material supply for receiving material therefrom and applying it to a
    surface.


CLS 118/267
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 264 having a source of coating material
    supply spaced from the applicator surface and having means causing the
    coating material to flow by gravity alone to the coating surface.

    (1)     Note.  The coating material may merely drip under the influence of
    gravity from an overhead source of coating material onto the surface of the
    pad or it may be conducted to the under surface of a porous pad through a
    passageway from a distant source of supply.


CLS 118/268
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 264 in which the feed from the supply
    reservoir to an applicator spaced from the coating reservoir is by means of
    capillary force through a saturable member which may be either integral
    with or separate from the applicator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    260,    for apparatus having a wick for feeding fluid to a movably mounted
    applicator.

    401,    for immersion coating devices having a capillary tube for feeding
    the fluid coating material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 187 for dispensers in which the discharge or
    dispensing feed is by means of a wick or absorbent material and see
    especially the search notes for other devices utilizing a wick or wick-like
    member for feeding fluid.


CLS 118/269
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 264 in which the absorbent layer of the
    applicator which normally contacts the article to be coated may be inverted
    or taken off to expose a fresh surface.


CLS 118/270
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 264 in which the coating applicator is a
    resilient and porous body or mass which is confined in a receptacle which
    holds a supply of coating material and/or prevents loss of coating material
    from the applicator.


CLS 118/271
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 264 in which the applicator is coated or
    impregnated with a normally solid material which requires the application
    of heat to melt it.


CLS 118/300
TXT Coating apparatus under the class definition wherein coating material,
    unsupported at the moment of contact with the work to be coated, is
    sprayed, poured, dripped, flung or impelled against the base to be coated.

    (1)     Note.  If the coating material is supported at the instant of
    contact with the base to be coated, it is considered to be applied by an
    applicator (subclasses 200+) or by immersion (subclasses 400+).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24+,    and see the notes thereto, for coating devices of the spray type
    for coating edible work.

    58+,    for noncoating gas and/or vapor contact with a base.

    200+,   and see (1) Note, above.

    400+,   and see (1) Note, above.

    621+    for coating apparatus in which the coating material is caused to
    move to the work to be coated by the force of an electrostatic and/or
    electromagnetic field.

    715+,   for coating apparatus in which the coating material is in a gaseous
    or vaporous condition when it contacts the base to be coated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 348+ for gas solid contact means
    comprising spray nozzles and mounting means therefore in glass heat
    treating apparatus.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses,
    for devices which project, discharge or distribute fluid.  See section IX
    of this class (118) for the line between classes (239) and (118).


CLS 118/301
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 300 in which at least a part of the work
    is shielded by a solid member interposed between the work and the coating
    device, the shield preventing transfer of coating material onto the work
    part so shielded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323,    for coating apparatus having a moving spray gun applying a coating
    over the surface of the work, the motion being such as to apply the coating
    in a particular pattern.

    406,    and see the notes thereto, for other coating apparatus having masks
    or stencils.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 103, 104,
    150, and 288 for apparatus there provided for involving spraying means and
    including solid wall type guard means or shields which are positioned
    relative to the nozzle for preventing undesirable spreading of the spraying
    material; for fluid type shields preventing undesirable spreading of the
    spray material, Search Class 239, subclasses 105 and 290+.


CLS 118/302
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 300 having means to (1) maintain desired
    temperature conditions in the spray system, or (2) place the spray system
    in condition for the coating operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58+,    and see the notes thereto, for apparatus having means to heat or
    cool the work.

    203,    and see the notes thereto, for other apparatus having means to
    clean or condition the same.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 128+ for
    spray devices having heating or cooling means to treat the system or the
    contained fluid; and subclasses 79+ for spray devices in which a solid
    material is fused by the application of heat at the terminal element and
    the resulting fluid is sprayed from the nozzle.


CLS 118/303
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 300 having means to pass a stream of
    discrete particles of material past a coating material projector whereby
    the discrete particles of the stream are coated.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass, for example, may be found devices for
    applying coating material to a stream of coal passing underneath the spray
    discharge device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19      and 417+, and see the notes to subclass 417 for devices for
    tumbling articles to be coated in the presence of a mass of coating
    material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 336, 398+ and
    549 for spray systems having means to introduce particulate material into
    the fluid stream being projected.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 212+ for processes of coating
    particles, flakes, or granules.


CLS 118/304
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 300 having two or more instrumentalities
    for applying a coating material to the work at least one of which is not a
    spray applicator under the definition of subclass 300, and not provided for
    above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206,    for the combination of a spray coating device and a solid
    applicator coating device.


CLS 118/305
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 300 in which the coating device is
    supported by, attached to or suspended from the work and traverses the
    surface to be coated.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found by way of example devices for
    painting a smokestack, which devices are suspended from the top of the
    smokestack by means of cables and travel up and down the smokestack to
    paint the same.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for coating apparatus that traverses the work and has solid means
    acting on the coating applied to the base.

    207+,   for work traversing devices wherein the coating is applied to the
    base by means of a solid applicator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclass 222 for devices of various types especially adapted
    to cleaning, painting, or scraping a ship's hull, many of which devices are
    attached to or supported from the hull.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses
    for fluid distributing or discharging devices which traverse the work at
    the will of the operator and see the class definition, section IX, of this
    class (118) for the line between classes (239) and (118).


CLS 118/306
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 305 in which the coating device traverses
    and is supported by the inner surface of a cavity or hole within the
    confines of the work being coated.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found, for example, devices for
    applying a coating of cement to the inner surfaces of pipes, which devices
    have wheeled carriages carrying the projector, the carriage running along
    the inner surface of the pipe while spraying the inner surface with the
    cement material; except that inclusion of trowel means defines a molding
    apparatus (Class 425, Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:
    Apparatus).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    317,    for nontraversing devices for applying a coating to the inside of a
    hollow workpiece by means of a projector.


CLS 118/307
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 305 wherein the work is of great length
    with respect to its width and thickness and is of relatively uniform cross
    Sectional dimensions of both width and thickness.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are vehicles or carriages (e.g., railway
    cars) which travel along a guiding and supporting means which includes a
    rail, said vehicle or carriage having means to spray a coating liquid onto
    all or any part of the rail.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208,    for coating devices supported on a strand, rod or bar and having a
    solid applicator for applying the coating to the work.

    421,    for immersion tanks attached to strand-form work and movable
    therealong for coating the strand.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    184,    Lubrication, subclasses 15.1+ for devices intended to apply
    lubricant to a belt, cable, or chain and constructed with such purpose in
    view; and subclasses 3.1+ for oilers for the wheel-flange-contacting
    surfaces of railway track rails.


CLS 118/308
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 300 specialized or peculiarly adapted to
    apply to the base a coating material in the form of fibers, granules,
    pellets, beads, flakes, platelets or powder.

    (1)     Note.  The patents are placed in this and the indented subclasses
    on the basis of a particulate coating material being disclosed.

    (2)     Note.  The fibers or particular material may be dry or moistened
    but where they are suspended in a liquid, see the appropriate subclasses
    below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for apparatus for the production and deposition of carbon in the
    presence of the base, such as, for example, by the burning or cracking of
    gaseous hydrocarbons in the presence of the base.

    303,    for coating apparatus for projecting a coating material against
    particulate type base material, and for apparatus for first applying an
    adhesive coating to particulate material before contacting the particulate
    material with the base to be coated.

    620+,   for apparatus directed to the employment of an electrostatic field
    to effect deposition or orientation of the particulate material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses, for apparatus for dispensing
    particulate material and see especially paragraph numbers 12, 16 and 17 of
    the class definitions of that class (Class 222) for the location of other
    apparatus for sanding, abrading, throwing, spraying, scattering, and
    dusting of particulate material.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 650+ for a
    container for nonfluid material and an associated scattering or strewing
    means whereby the material may be distributed over an extended area.

    291,    Track Sanders, appropriate subclasses, for means for applying sand,
    or like material, to vehicle wheel treads or to vehicle tracks, such as
    automobile roads or railway rails, or to both the wheel treads and tracks
    for the purpose of increasing the tractive effect between such wheels and
    roads or rails.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, appropriate subclasses for conveyors
    utilizing a pneumatic current for conveying particulate material from one
    place to another.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 80.1+ for apparatus including air-felting means for forming self
    sustaining bodies from particulate material.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 180+ for coating processes wherein
    the coating is applied in the form of solid particles or fibers.


CLS 118/309
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 308 having a housing surrounding the work
    and means to saturate the atmosphere within the housing with finely divided
    particulate material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    634,    for apparatus for coating a base by electrostatic projection in
    which the work is positioned in a housing.

    715+,   for apparatus for coating a base with a gaseous or vaporized
    coating material in which the work is positioned in a housing.


CLS 118/310
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 308 having at least two diverse sources of
    the particulate material to be applied to the base.

    (1)     Note.  The various supplies of particulate material may be diverse
    as to color or size of particles, or any other distinguishing
    characteristics.


CLS 118/311
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 310 having means to join the plural
    streams of particulate material and project them through a single orifice.


CLS 118/312
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 308 having means to collect the surplus
    particulate material and cause the material to return to the source of
    supply or to treat the particulate coating material by nonradiant heating
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    429,    for apparatus having means to recirculate or subject to nonradiant
    heat the coating materials in an immersion coating device.

    600+,   for treatment of coating material by means other than nonradiant
    heating means.


CLS 118/313
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 300 having more than one projector for
    applying coating material to the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206,    for the combination of one or more projector type coating devices
    combined with a solid applicator type of coating device.

    216+,   for coating apparatus having plural solid applicators for applying
    a coating to an article.

    411     and 412, for apparatus having plural work confined pools of coating
    material.


CLS 118/314
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 313 having means to convey the work along
    a path and having at least two projectors spaced along the path whereby the
    work receives coating material from one projector after the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223+,   for coating apparatus wherein the work moves past sequentially
    arranged solid applicators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclass 61 for fluid
    treating apparatus there provided, having sequential work treating
    receptacles or stations with means to transfer work or to transfer the
    fluid applying devices.


CLS 118/315
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 313 wherein at least two of the coating
    material projectors apply coating material to the work at the same time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225+,   for coating apparatus wherein at least two solid applicators act on
    the base at the same time.

    314,    for coating apparatus wherein the work moves past sequentially
    arranged projectors which may or may not act on the work at the same time.


CLS 118/316
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 315 wherein at least two of the coating
    material projectors are positioned in direct apposition one to the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226+,   for coating apparatus having two or more opposed solid applicators.


CLS 118/317
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 300, peculiar or specialized to applying a
    coating to the inner surface of a cavity or hole within the confines of the
    work.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found, for example, apparatus for
    supporting a hollow article and means to cause the projector to be inserted
    into and removed from the hollow article.  Also in this subclass may be
    found devices for supporting the hollow article and causing the projector
    to have a motion to cover the inner surfaces of the hollow article with
    coating material without the projector actually entering the hollow article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254,    and see the notes thereto for other coating apparatus for applying
    a coating to the inside of a hollow article.


CLS 118/318
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 317 having means to turn the work about an
    axis passing therethrough during coating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    416,    and see the notes thereto, for other coating apparatus having means
    to rotate the article.


CLS 118/319
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 300 having means to convey the work to be
    coated about an axis of rotation which axis is external of the work thus
    moving the work in an arc or circle.

    (1)     Note.  The devices in this subclass are usually for conveying the
    article between work stations rather than devices to manipulate the work so
    as to present each portion of the work to the coating device, such as are
    found in subclass 320 above and other rotating work subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230+,   and see the notes thereto, for other apparatus having turret type
    work conveyors.

    320,    for coating devices in which the work is rotated about an axis
    which passes through the work, and see (1) Note, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses for rotatable
    conveyors, particularly subclass 803.16.


CLS 118/320
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 300 having means to rotate the work being
    coated about an axis passing therethrough during the coating operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    416,    and see the notes thereto, for other coating apparatus having means
    to rotate the work.


CLS 118/321
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 320 having a mobile mounting for the
    projector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323,    and see the notes thereto, for other projector type coating
    apparatus having a moving projector.


CLS 118/322
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 320 having a flexible transporting means
    of continuous or indefinite length for the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323,    and see the notes thereto for other projector type coating
    apparatus having an endless conveyor for the work.


CLS 118/323
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 300 having a mobile mounting for the
    projector.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found, for example, apparatus for
    (1) applying the coating in a design by moving the projector over the
    surface of the work being coated in a particular manner, and (2) for moving
    the projector over the surface of the work to insure a uniform coating over
    the entire surface of the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305+,   for coating apparatus in which the projector is supported by and
    traverses along the work coated.

    317,    for coating apparatus for applying coating to the inside of a
    hollow workpiece wherein the projector is mounted for motion to position it
    within the hollow workpiece.

    321,    for coating apparatus having a moving projector for applying
    coating material to rotating work.

    631,    for a movable coating projector for spray coating by means of
    electrostatic projection of the coating material to the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclass 172 for apparatus
    for contacting solids with liquids in which at least one fluid spray or jet
    applying conduit or nozzle is movably mounted, including those movable due
    to flexibility.


CLS 118/324
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 300 having a flexible transporting means
    of continuous or indefinite length for the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239,    for coating apparatus having a solid applicator and a work carrier
    or manipulator in the form of an endless carrier.

    630+,   for means to transport work for spray coating by means of
    electrostatic projection of the coating material to the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 658 for
    devices there provided for having an endless conveyor for conveying the
    material treated.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With solids, subclasses 70+, and 124+
    for apparatus provided for in that class having an endless conveyor for the
    work.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses for endless belt
    conveyors, particularly subclasses 804+ and search notes thereunder which
    recite the locations of other endless belt patents.


CLS 118/325
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 300 specialized or peculiarly adapted to
    coat flexible work traveling longitudinally of itself, the length of which
    may be continuous and uninterrupted as distinguished from apparatus which
    handles the work as discrete units.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77+,    for apparatus for transferring solid coating material to running
    length work by rubbing contact.

    117,    118, 122, and 123, for apparatus having solid members acting on
    coated running length work.

    234     and 235, for apparatus for coating indefinite length work by means
    of a solid applicator.

    419+,   for apparatus for coating indefinite length work by means of
    immersion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 64 and 122 for
    devices for contacting solids with liquids, the solid being in the form of
    a sheet, strand, web, or bar traveling longitudinally of itself.


CLS 118/326
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 300 having means to collect or remove
    excess coating material from the atmosphere surrounding the article being
    coated, usually in the nature of a housing or casing at the coating station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50      and 715+, for coating apparatus having a vacuum or fluid pressure
    chamber within which the work is positioned.

    58+,    for coating apparatus having means for bringing a noncoating gas or
    vapor into contact with work.

    628,    for collecting means comprising an electrode for collecting
    fugitive electrostatic projected spray coating material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 49+ for devices for conducting away fumes,
    vapors, steam, dust, etc., from various places.  Class 454 is the parent
    class for apparatus for supplying air to and removing it from enclosures,
    for distributing and circulating the air therein, and for preventing its
    contamination, including ventilated hoods or offtakes which do not claim
    work handling or specific coating means in combination.  See also the
    search notes in the class definition of Class 454 for the location of other
    ventilated structures.


CLS 118/400
TXT Coating apparatus under the class definition wherein the work to be coated
    is (1) introduced or dipped wholly or partially into a bath, puddle or
    other enclosed or restricted bulk supply of coating material, or (2) where
    a supported stream, column, puddle or other enclosed restricted bulk supply
    of coating material is brought into contact with the work to be coated.

    (1)     Note.  The base may contact the coating material in the bulk supply
    of coating material or it may contact only a thin column of coating
    material which has been conducted away from the bulk supply of the coating
    material.

    (2)     Note.  To be classified in this and the indented subclasses coating
    material must be supported up to the instant it contacts the base to be
    coated and must be more than a film on a solid supporting surface.
    Compare, for example, subject matter of subclass 300 in which the coating
    material is flung or projected against the base, and subclass 200 for solid
    applicators supporting a wetting film of coating material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26+,    for immersion coating devices in which the work is edible.

    56,     for the combination of an immersion coating device and means to
    manipulate the work in some manner to distribute or move surplus coating
    material.

    76+,    for coating apparatus in which the work contacts a solid
    self-sustaining block of coating material.

    200+,   and see (2) Note, above.

    300+,   and see (2) Note, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 257.05+ for
    applicator-loading supply means into which a coating tool is dipped to
    transfer material to the tool surface, particularly subclasses 257.07+ for
    inkwells; and see the search notes to subclass 257.07.

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes and non-coating apparatus for
    growing therein-defined single-crystal of all types of materials, including
    inorganic or organic, especially subclasses 54+ for processes of liquid
    phase epitaxy corresponding to the liquid phase epitaxy apparatus found in
    Class 118.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 158 for apparatus for dipping animals in
    an insecticidal liquid.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses for
    other devices for contacting solids with liquids for cleaning and purposes
    not provided for in other classes.  See (2) Note of the class definitions
    of that class (134) for the line between that class and Class 118.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 386+ for liquid level maintaining a
    responsive system, and appropriate subclass for fluid handling systems
    including receptacles with means to supply fluid material thereto.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 50+ for apparatus for dipping matches to
    form heads.

    366,    Agitating, appropriate subclass for commingling of fluid and
    particulate material.  See section IX of the class definition of Class 118
    for the line between Class 118 and Class 366.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 564+ for photographic fluid-treating
    apparatus.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 126+ for the
    combination of a supply container and an applicator which either overlies
    the supply of coating material or depends from a closure into the supply.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 301 for apparatus for sterilizing by
    immersion.

    451,    Abrading, subclass 113 for abrading apparatus wherein the article
    to be abraded is immersed in the abrading medium.


CLS 118/401
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 400 having a receptacle or tube for
    containing the coating fluid the level of which is kept constant by (1) a
    tube of capillary dimensions for conducting fluid to the receptacle from a
    source of supply, or (2) the liquid supply chamber, otherwise sealed, has
    an outlet leading to the immersion receptacle, which outlet is closed by
    liquid accumulating in the coating receptacle to stop flow thereunto except
    when material is removed from the coating receptacle whereupon an amount
    corresponding to that removed is thereby permitted to flow out of the
    supply chamber to replenish the coating receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include absorbent or porous pads or
    brushes which may use capillary action to conduct or convey coating
    material, and for such subject matter search the solid applicator
    subclasses 264+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264+,   and see (1) Note, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 261 for barometric supply for battery or
    electrolytic cell replenishment, and subclasses 453+ for other barometric
    control of fluid flow.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 585+ for a barometric inkwell which includes
    a dip cup for receiving and coating the surface of a dip pen.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclass 120 for the
    combination of an applicator and a barometric supply container including a
    zone whereat the applicator is dipped into, and coated with, coating
    material.


CLS 118/402
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 400 having one or more strata of coating
    material directly supported upon the surface of a pool of liquid material,
    which liquid material may itself be another coating material.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found, for example, machines for
    producing a so-called "marbled surface" on work by distributing and
    floating drops of variously colored coating material over a supporting
    liquid and bringing the object to be coated into contact with the floating
    coating material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    421,    for immersion type coating devices having a floating receptacle for
    holding the coating material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 256+ especially subclasses 262, 267,
    274, and 280 for processes of producing a variegated surface coloring in
    the coating applied.


CLS 118/403
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 402 having pools of more than one coating
    material, one of the pools floating on a second pool, the base to be coated
    contacting and being coated by both pools.


CLS 118/404
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 400 wherein the article coated enters or
    leaves the coating material pool below the upper surface of the pool
    through a restraining surface of the coating material receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  Since the article enters or leaves the coating material
    below the upper level of the material, gland, packing or die means are
    usually provided to prevent leakage or escape of coating material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    for coating apparatus having a die passage separate and distinct
    from the coating supply means for modifying the coating on the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 147+ for apparatus for laminating
    wire to glass in combination with glass forming means.


CLS 118/405
TXT Apparatus under subclass 404 specialized or peculiarly adapted to coat work
    the length of which may be continuous or uninterrupted as distinguished
    from apparatus which handles the work as discrete units.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 419 for apparatus for casting a metal
    layer against a base passing through a mold or die.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 113+ for apparatus for casting a nonmetallic layer against a
    base passing through an extrusion shaping chamber, where the configurations
    of the base and layer are diverse.


CLS 118/406
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 400 in which part of the work is shielded
    by a solid member interposed between the work and the coating medium, the
    shield preventing contact of the coating material with the part of the work
    so shielded.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found, for example, apparatus in
    which a portion of the work is masked to yield a configured outline; also
    devices for closing an opening in a hollow article so the external surface
    only is coated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213     and 301, for other coating devices having masks or stencils.

    504,    for work surface shields, masks or protectors, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclasses 114+ for printing devices using tools or
    members having designed areas through which ink pigment or other coating
    substance may pass to the surface to be printed upon.


CLS 118/407
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 400 wherein the pool of coating material
    is confined, retained or supported at least in part by a surface of the
    work being coated, relative motion between the work and the confined
    coating material separating a film of the material adhering to the work.

    (1)     Note.  In this and the indented subclasses may be found, for
    example, hoppers or containers for coating material positioned above the
    base to be coated with an open bottom of the hopper or container directly
    in contact with the base to be coated so that the bottom of the batch of
    coating material is supported at least in part by the base being coated.
    Also in this subclass may be found the so-called striping devices in which
    coating material is fed under pressure through a thin tube and into direct
    contact with a moving base, the column of coating material being supported
    up to the instant of contact with the base material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes and non-coating apparatus for
    growing therein-defined single-crystal of all types of materials, including
    inorganic or organic, especially subclasses 54+ for processes of liquid
    phase epitaxy corresponding to the liquid phase epitaxy apparatus found in
    Class 118.


CLS 118/408
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 407 having means to apply coating material
    to the inside surfaces only of a hollow article which inside surfaces
    support or retain a batch of coating material against gravity.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus for coating the inside of a hollow work piece by
    merely immersing the entire object in coating material is excluded from
    this subclass, and may be found in appropriate subclasses set forth below.

    (2)     Note.  In this subclass may be found, for example, devices for
    coating the inside of a hollow work piece such as a container in which the
    container is filled with coating material then inverted to drain off the
    surplus coating material, leaving a film of coating material on the inside
    of the hollow work piece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254,    for other coating devices for applying a coating to the inside of a
    hollow work piece; and see the notes thereto.

    406,    for apparatus of the immersion or work confined pool type for
    coating the inside surface of a hollow work piece in which the outer
    surface is masked or protected, and the entire work piece is immersed in a
    pool of coating material.

    423+,   for apparatus for moving a hollow article bodily into an immersion
    pool to coat the inside surfaces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclass 150 for apparatus
    there provided, in which the work is of a receptacle form, the receptacle
    form work constituting the sole treating liquid holding means.


CLS 118/409
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 407 having means to turn the work about an
    axis of revolution passing through the article during the coating operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    416,    and see the notes thereto, for other coating devices in which the
    base is rotated during the coating operation.


CLS 118/410
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 407 in which forced feed means other than
    or in addition to gravity are provided to move the coating material from
    the source of supply into contact with the base to be coated.


CLS 118/411
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 410 in which plural conducting means feed
    separate columns or pools of coating material into contact with the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216+,   for coating devices in which plural solid applicators coat the work.

    313+,   for coating apparatus in which plural sprays coat the work.


CLS 118/412
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 407 in which plural conducting means pass
    separate columns or pools of coating material into contact with the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    411,    for plural coating devices having a nongravity flow assistant.


CLS 118/413
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 407 in which at least a portion of the
    pool receptacle wall in contact with the work at the point of departure of
    the work from the pool determines the thickness of the film of coating
    material retained on the work and in which the wall portion is mounted for
    motion to (1) vary the spacing between the wall portion and the work and/or
    (2) obtain a relative motion between the working face of the wall portion
    and the work.

    (1)     Note.  The difference between the subject matter of this subclass
    and the subject matter of subclass 100 is that the subject matter of the
    present subclass has a movable member which is part of the coating material
    supply chamber.  In subclass 100 the movable members, for determining the
    thickness of the coating, contact the coating after application of the
    coating material to the base and are distinct and separate
    instrumentalities from the coating material supply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100+,   and see (1) Note, above.


CLS 118/414
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 413 in which the movable wall portion for
    determining the thickness of the coating is a cylinder and turns about the
    axis of the cylinder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110+,   for coating apparatus having a rotary member acting on the coating
    distinct from the device which applies the coating.


CLS 118/415
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 407 in which a confined column or pool of
    coating material is supported or positioned above the base to be coated and
    the bottom of the pool or column is in contact with the work to be coated
    so that the work supports and confines the bottom of the pool of coating
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300+,   for coating devices having a hopper or container superposed above
    the base to be coated but not in direct contact therewith so that the
    coating material falls freely onto the base to be coated.

    413+,   for coating devices having a superposed hopper with a movable
    doctor as one wall thereof.


CLS 118/416
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 400 having means to turn the work being
    coated about an axis passing through the work during the coating operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52+,    for devices in which an article is immersed in coating fluid, then
    rotated to remove surplus coating material.

    56+,    for devices which impart a motion to the work after coating for the
    purpose of modifying the coating.

    107,    for devices having solid means for treating a coated base having
    means to rotate the coated base.

    218+,   232+, 318, 320, and 409, for other coating devices in which the
    work is rotated during the coating operation.

    500+,   for subcombinations of work rotating devices, per se, for use in a
    coating operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 157+ for
    apparatus of that class in which the work support is mounted so as to have
    a rotary revolving, swinging or oscillating motion.


CLS 118/417
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 400 having means to agitate a mass of
    discrete particles of work in intimate contact with a batch of coating
    material.

    (1)     Note.  In this and the indented subclass may be found, for example,
    devices for coating seeds in which a plurality of seeds are placed in a
    container along with the coating material and the seed and the coating
    material are agitated together to distribute the material over the seeds
    and thereafter the excess material being separated from the coated seeds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for similar devices for coating edible materials.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    366,    Agitating, especially subclasses 219+ for devices which merely
    agitate the base to be coated in contact with a coating material supply,
    and see section IX of the class definition of this class (118) for the line
    between Class 118 and Class 366.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 326+ for apparatus for abrading by tumbling.


CLS 118/418
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 417 having a container which turns about
    an axis in which the materials are agitated together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    421,    for other movably mounted immersion receptacles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclass 30 for apparatus for treating hides
    in which the hides are enclosed in a rotating drum during the fluid
    treatment.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 242 for processes of coating by
    rumbling or tumbling.


CLS 118/419
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 400 specialized or peculiarly adapted to
    coat work traveling longitudinally of itself the length of which may be
    continuous and uninterrupted as distinguished from apparatus which handles
    the work as discrete units.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65,     67 and 68, for coating apparatus combined with means for drying
    running length work.

    77+,    for apparatus for transferring solid coating material to running
    length work by rubbing contact.

    117,    118+, 122, and 123+, for apparatus having solid members acting on
    coated running length work.

    235,    for apparatus for coating indefinite length work by means of a
    solid applicator.

    325,    for apparatus for coating webs or strands using a projector type
    coating device.

    405,    for devices for coating running length work wherein the work enters
    or leaves the coating pool below the upper surface of the pool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 623 for
    drying and gas or vapor contact with running length base material, and see
    the search notes of these subclasses for other running length material
    handling apparatus.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 418 for apparatus for casting metal onto
    a running indefinite length base.


CLS 118/420
TXT Apparatus under subclass 419 for coating flexible running length work the
    cross Sectional dimensions of which are approximately equal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    234,    and see the notes thereto for other apparatus for coating strand
    form work.


CLS 118/421
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 400 wherein the immersion receptacle is
    movably mounted or wherein the pool level may be varied.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found, for example, devices in which
    the work to be coated is held above a coating material container and the
    container is raised to cause the article to be immersed therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    407+,   for other coating apparatus having a movable coating material
    carrier.

    417+,   for tumbling devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 117+ and 150
    for devices in which there is a receptacle for treating fluid which
    receptacle is mounted for motion.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 219+ for mixing chambers which move, in whole
    or part, to effect agitation.


CLS 118/422
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 400 having means to clear the surface of
    the immersion pool of noncoating materials or to agitate materials carried
    on or otherwise prepare the surface of the immersion pool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    429,    for pool conditioning that treats more than the surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclass 42 for devices for straining or
    skimming liquids in a concentrating evaporator.

    366,    Agitating, appropriate subclasses for agitators, per se.


CLS 118/423
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 400 having work handling means for
    displacing the work relative to the coating material pool to cause
    immersion of the work in the pool or withdrawal of the work from the pool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    421,    for devices for immersing articles in which the immersion pool
    moves to cause the immersion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclass 32 for apparatus for the fluid
    treatment of hides, skin and leather, including means for moving the hide,
    skin or leather through the fluids with which the same is treated.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses for conveyors, per
    se, particularly subclass 346.1 for a conveyor arranged to dip a load into
    a treating tank.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 198+ for
    electrolytic coating apparatus having means for moving articles through the
    electrolyte.


CLS 118/424
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 423 having at least one pair of opposed
    rotary cylindrical bodies for conveying the work therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114+,   and see the notes thereto, for opposed roll couples for modifying
    the coating on the base.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclass 624.


CLS 118/425
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 423 in which work carrier or manipulator
    has a reversible motion or moves in alternate directions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for devices for immersing and centrifuging an article having a
    reciprocating work carrier for immersing the article.

    238,    for other coating devices having a reciprocating work holder and in
    which the coating device is a solid applicator.


CLS 118/426
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 423 wherein the means for moving the work
    has a movement about an axis of rotation which axis is external of the work
    being rotated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230+    and 319, for other coating devices having rotary work carriers.

    416,    for immersing devices which rotate the work about an internal axis
    during the coating operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 184+ for
    apparatus there provided having rotary or swinging conveyors.


CLS 118/427
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 400 having at least two solid members
    immersed in the coating pool with the work disposed therebetween, the solid
    members moving with respect to each other to manipulate the work to bring
    about a more intimate contact between the work and the coating material.

    (1)     Note.  For example, in this subclass may be found devices which
    beat, scrub, press, or agitate the work while immersed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100+,   for other coating devices having solid work treating means which
    act on the coated base after the coating is applied rather than during the
    coating operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclass 41.3 for apparatus for pliabilizing
    soles with fluid treatment.

    28,     Textiles: Manufacturing, subclasses 217+ and especially 246, 261,
    265+, and 285+ for thread finishing including a fluid treatment.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    fluid textile treating devices there provided for and having solid means
    acting on the material being treated.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 15+ and
    38+ for apparatus there provided for having means to apply fluid to the
    work treated.

    366,    Agitating, appropriate subclasses, for devices for agitating a
    particulate base in the presence of coating material and see section IX of
    the class definitions of this class (118) for the line between the two
    classes.


CLS 118/428
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 400 wherein the immersion vessel is
    provided with normally stationary surfaces upon which the work rests or
    which direct the work as it is moved through the immersion pool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252,    for coating apparatus having a solid applicator and means to guide
    the work.

    423+,   for immersion coating devices having means to move the article
    through the immersion pool.

    500+,   for work handling or supporting devices, per se.


CLS 118/429
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 400 having specific structure of the
    immersion receptacle peculiarly adapting it to the coating operation and/or
    means for manipulating the coating material or subjecting it to nonradiant
    heat.

    (1)     Note.  Included here, for example, are devices for recirculating
    coating material, supplying or replenishing the supply of coating material
    in the tank, or devices for guiding or flowing the coating material into
    intimate contact with the article immersed in the coating material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401,    for coating devices having a capillary tube feed from a source of
    supply to the immersion pool or a barometric column feed from a source of
    supply to the immersion pool.

    600+,   for means for treating coating material other than by the
    application of nonradiant heat.

    668+,   for means for controlling or conditioning the coating material
    having automatic controls.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 147+ for textile
    treating machines wherein the treatment is effected by reason of relative
    motion between the fluid and the article being treated.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 284 for heated glue pots.

    137,    Fluid Handling, appropriate subclass for fluid handling systems
    including tanks of general application.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 193 for a filter with
    precoat adding means.

    220,    Receptacles, pertinent subclasses, for tank or container structure,
    per se.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, appropriate subclass for furnace or pots
    for holding molten metal.


CLS 118/500
TXT Coating apparatus under the class definition having means, per se, to grasp
    or manipulate the work.

    (1)     Note.  The subclasses above provide for work handling devices
    claimed in combination with means to coat or treat the coated article.  To
    complete the search for particular types of work handling devices search
    must be made in the various work handling subclasses set forth above.

    (2)     Note.  The work handling and holding devices found here either (1)
    hold the work with no means to move the work from one place to another, or
    (2) impart a motion to the work for the purpose of assisting the coating
    operation, such as rotating the work during a spray coating operation.
    Class 198 provides for mechanisms, per se, for moving work pieces from one
    place to another even when disclosed in combination with a coating device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 343.1+ and 373 for a conveyor
    provided with a device for orienting an article.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for article dispensing
    not otherwise provided for, and see the reference to Class 221 in section
    IX of the class definition of this class (118) for a statement of the class
    line.

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses. Class 269 is the residual
    locus for patents to a device for clamping, supporting and/or holding an
    article (or articles) in position to be operated on or treated.  See notes
    thereunder for other related loci.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, appropriate subclasses
    for such devices not limited by disclosure to, or claiming use in, a
    coating operation.


CLS 118/501
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 500 having means positioned beneath the
    work holder to receive surplus coating material that falls from the coated
    work, or the coating applicator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for drain troughs and implements for use in the coating of edible
    materials.


CLS 118/502
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 500 having means to penetrate the article
    to assist in holding the article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 61, and see the
    notes thereto, for other devices for handling articles and designed to be
    plunged into or through the article engaged.


CLS 118/503
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 500 having at least two opposed jaws
    between which the article is held for handling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 455+ for clasps.

    81,     Tools, subclasses 300+ and 487 the notes thereto, for other opposed
    jaw type work grasping or manipulating devices.

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 86+ for patents to a work holder with
    relatively movable jaws.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, appropriate subclasses,
    especially 87.1+ for grapple devices not limited by disclosure to, or
    claiming use in, a coating operation and subclass 99.2 for tweezers.


CLS 118/504
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a solid member interposed
    between an applicator and a surface to be protected for preventing the
    transfer of coating material to surfaces shielded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213,    301 and 406, for the combination of a shield, mask or protector and
    means to apply coating material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 246 and 248
    for similar devices attached to a hand manipulated coating implement during
    use.

    101,    Printing, subclasses 127+ and see the notes thereto for stencils.

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 73, 216 and 319 for templet type devices for use
    in the application of cosmetics.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclass 22 for compositions specialized for use
    in masking areas of metal surface to protect said areas during a metal
    treatment.  See subclass 149 for processes including shielding metal
    surfaces during heat treatment operation.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 29+ for a method of abrading including use of
    an abrading shield, subclass 445 for an erasing shield, subclass 448 for a
    button cleaning shield, and subclass 457 for a work guard for use during
    abrading.


CLS 118/505
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 504 which are affixed to the work or base
    during the coating operation.


CLS 118/506
TXT Coating apparatus under the class definition not provided for in any of the
    other subclasses.


CLS 118/600
TXT Coating apparatus under the class definition combined with means, other
    than nonradiant heating means, to create and/or maintain a desired
    condition of the coating material.

    (1)     Note.  Such means may be operative either before or during the time
    the so-treated coating is being applied to the base, or at both such times.

    (2)     Note.  Coating devices combined with nonradiant heating means are
    classified on the basis of the particular coating devices.

    (3)     Note.  This class (118) provides for coating apparatus herein
    classifiable including (a) radiant energy heating means or (b) separate
    work heating or treating gas or vapor nozzles, whose primary function is to
    heat or treat the work before or after coating thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    620+,   for coating apparatus including means to apply electrical and/or
    radiant energy to the workpiece and/or coating material; and see the notes
    thereto.


CLS 118/602
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 600 including means to withdraw the
    coating material from the coating zone, means to treat the withdrawn
    coating material, and means to return such material to the coating zone
    subsequent to treatment.

    (1)     Note.  Similar coating devices, not effective to treat recirculated
    material other than by nonradiant heat, will be found classified upon the
    basis of the nature of the coating operation, and see particularly
    subclasses 29, 312 and 429.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     312, 429, and see (1) Note, above.


CLS 118/603
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 602 which treats the coating material by
    removing foreign matter or undesirable components such as oversize
    particles or agglomerates.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    610,    for separating means operating upon nonrecirculated coating
    material; and see the note thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 155+ for degasifying means
    for liquid, per se.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses for solid separation devices, and see the notes to the
    definition of that class (209).

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses for
    liquid separation devices, and see the notes to the definition of that
    class (210).


CLS 118/606
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 600 which is effective to administer to
    the coating material a treatment in the nature of a fiber preparation
    operation, such as fiber mass disintegration, assembly, or cleaning, or
    fiber parallelizing within the mass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, pertinent subclasses, particularly
    subclass 66 for fiber treating apparatus, per se.

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses for means for severing filaments or
    fibers without any further fiber treatment.


CLS 118/608
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 600 in which the coating material treating
    means operates to knead, mill, rub, grind, comminute, or otherwise break
    down, smooth, or homogenize such material by a triturating action.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 494 for applying a solid
    or particulate material to food.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 31 to 301,
    for solid material comminuting apparatus; and see the notes to the class
    definition.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 69+ for a kneading or mixing mill for rubber
    or heavy plastics.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 200+ for the combination of separate and distinct upstream
    agitating or kneading means and shaping or reshaping apparatus for
    nonmetals.


CLS 118/610
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 600 including means for removing from the
    coating material foreign matter or undesirable components such as oversize
    particles or agglomerates.

    (1)     Note.  A separator which also functions as a coating applier will
    be classified on the basis of its function as an applicator, rather than in
    this subclass.  Where, however, the separator deposits the coating material
    upon an applicator, the patent is classified in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    603,    for treatment of recirculated coating material by separation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 155+ for degasifying means
    for liquid, per se.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses for solid separation devices, and see the notes to the
    definition of that class (209).

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses for
    liquid separation devices, and see the notes to the definition of that
    class (210).


CLS 118/612
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 600 in which the treating means operates
    to shake, stir, or otherwise impart irregular or random motion to fluid or
    solid particulate coating material for the purpose of commingling the
    components or particles thereof or creating or maintaining a fluent
    condition thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    366,    Agitating, appropriate subclasses for agitating apparatus, per se.


CLS 118/620
TXT Coating apparatus under the class definition combined with means to treat
    the work and/or coating material with electrical or radiant energy.

    (1)     Note.  The energy may be applied, for example, in the form of an
    electro- static or electromagnetic field or as infrared rays.

    (2)     Note.  Generation of heat in the base caused by the application of
    electrical energy directly to the work will be found here.  Generation of
    heat in the base by radiation will be found in subclasses 641+.  The
    conversion of electrical or radiant energy into heat and the subsequent
    application of the heat in a nonradiant form to the work will be found in
    subclasses 58+.

    (3)     Note.  As between the instant class and that of Class 347,
    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, the latter will take for
    placement a patent directed to a device of that class and including means
    to develop by coating a latent image produced by such device. However,
    recitation of further means to transfer the developed image, if by a
    coating operation otherwise proper for this class (118), will place the
    patent in this and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50.1,   724+ and 726+, for coating devices there provided for having
    electrical or radiant energy applied to the work or coating material.

    58+,    and see (1) Note, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 15+ for apparatus for gas
    separation using an electric field (e.g., electrical precipitator,
    electrostatic type, etc.).

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 194+ for
    electrolytic coating or forming apparatus, subclasses 622+ for
    electrophoretic or electro-osmotic coating or forming apparatus, and
    subclasses 298.02+ for sputter coating apparatus.  See section III,
    CLASSIFICATION LINES AND SEARCH NOTES TO OTHER CLASSES, of the Class 204
    definition for the line between Class 118 and Class 204.

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclasses for electrical heating
    means, per se.

    346,    Recorders, appropriate subclasses especially subclasses 74.2 for
    magnetic recording.

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, subclasses 112+ for
    electrostatic printing devices including development of a latent image by a
    coating operation, and see (3) Note above.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 458+ for processes of coating
    utilizing electrical, magnetic, or wave energy.


CLS 118/621
TXT Apparatus under subclass 620 wherein there is movement of coating material
    to the work to be coated, which movement is caused, in whole or in part, by
    the force of an electrostatic and/or electromagnetic field.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 457+ for coating processes utilizing
    direct application of electrical, magnetic, wave, or particulate energy,
    specifically subclasses 472+ and 475+ for positioning, orientation or
    application of sprayed or non-sprayed coating material utilizing
    electrostatic charge, field or force.


CLS 118/622
TXT Coating apparatus under subclass 621 specialized or peculiarly adapted to
    apply a coating to the inner or concave surface of a cavity, bore,
    depression, or hole in the work.

    (1)     Note.  A patent which includes in the claims a recitation of
    relationship between the shape of the work and the coating apparatus may be
    placed in this subclass; in the absence of such recitation the patent will
    be classified elsewhere based on other features and cross-referenced here
    if the disclosure warrants.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254,    and see the notes thereto for other coating apparatus for applying
    a coating to the inside of a hollow article.


CLS 118/623
TXT Apparatus under subclass 621 wherein said apparatus has, at least in part,
    an electromagnetic field.


CLS 118/624
TXT Apparatus under subclass 621 wherein means are provided for varying the
    concentration or pattern of the lines of force of an electrostatic field
    for the purpose of obtaining a uniform or patterned coating on the work.


CLS 118/625
TXT Apparatus under subclass 624 wherein a multiplicity of electrodes is
    provided which may be individually energized in desired patterns whereby a
    coating is applied to the work according to the desired pattern.


CLS 118/626
TXT Apparatus under subclass 621 wherein the coating material is presented to
    the action of the electrostatic field in sheetlike or film form whereby the
    thus formed coating material is moved by the action of the field toward the
    work to be coated.


CLS 118/627
TXT Apparatus under subclass 621 wherein a means or force additional or
    supplemental to an electrostatic field is provided which aids the
    electrostatic field in moving the coating material toward the work to be
    coated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    623,    for combined electrostatic and electromagnetic attraction or
    propulsion.


CLS 118/628
TXT Apparatus under subclass 627 wherein a surface other than and additional to
    the work desired to be coated is provided, such surface having an
    electrical potential differing from that of the coating material to attract
    thereto any coating material which fails to be attracted to or projected
    upon the work.


CLS 118/629
TXT Apparatus under subclass 627 wherein the additional or supplemental force
    is provided by a blower or spraying mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300+,   for apparatus for spraying coating material upon the base to be
    coated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 3 and 690+
    for methods and apparatus, respectively, for projecting a liquid into the
    air which include a step or means for imparting an electrostatic charge to
    the projected liquid and see the notes to said subclass 690 for a statement
    of the line.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 271+ for
    methods and apparatus for applying an electrical charge to materials, per
    se, and see the notes to Class 239, subclass 690 for a statement of the
    line.


CLS 118/630
TXT Apparatus under subclass 629 wherein a conveyor or similar means is
    provided to move one or more work pieces through the coating zone.


CLS 118/631
TXT Apparatus under subclass 630 wherein the additional blower or spraying
    mechanism is permitted to move or is given motion during the coating
    operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323,    for coating apparatus having a movable coating projector.


CLS 118/632
TXT Apparatus under subclass 630 wherein the conveyor line is arranged to have
    a return bend whereby the workpieces are kept in the vicinity or returned
    to the vicinity of the coating zone.


CLS 118/633
TXT Apparatus under subclass 630 wherein two or more conveyor lines of work are
    so arranged with respect to the blower or sprayer that the projected
    coating material from each such projector is attracted, part to one work
    transport line and part to another.


CLS 118/634
TXT Apparatus under subclass 630 having a specific housing or cabinet structure
    which surrounds or defines the coating zone.


CLS 118/635
TXT Apparatus under subclass 630 wherein a conductive work holder structure is
    provided having a protective nonconducting coating or casing which will
    prevent the conductive work holder structure from attracting coating
    material thereto.


CLS 118/636
TXT Apparatus under subclass 627 in which the additional or supplemental force
    is that of the earth's pull on the coating material as it falls freely
    through an electrostatic field.

    (1)     Note.  The coating material may be discharged from a hopper or
    similar apparatus onto the work which is located below.


CLS 118/638
TXT Apparatus under subclass 621 wherein the work to be coated is moved through
    an electrostatic field created between two or more spatially separated
    differentially charged electrodes.


CLS 118/639
TXT Apparatus under subclass 620 wherein previously coated work is subjected to
    the effects of an electrostatic and/or electromagnetic field for the
    purpose of removing built-up localized accumulations or "tears" of coating
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     and see the notes thereto for other apparatus for redistributing or
    removing surplus coating material.

    638,    for transfer of an uneven coating using spaced electrodes, e.g.,
    image transfer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    399,    Electrophotography, subclass 222 for an apparatus for applying
    developer material.


CLS 118/640
TXT Apparatus under subclass 620 wherein an electrostatic and/or an
    electromagnetic field is provided for the purpose of causing the particles
    of the coating material to assume a desired arrangement, formation or
    inclination to the work.

    (1)     Note.  The orientation here included may be applied to
    previously-coated work as well as to work coated by other than
    electrostatic or electromagnetic means.

    (2)     Note.  In this subclass may be found, for example, devices for
    coating sandpaper in which the particles of abrasive are subjected to the
    action of the electric field so that they will position themselves properly
    on the base.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 472+ for coating processes including
    aligning particles by electrostatic force.


CLS 118/641
TXT Apparatus under subclass 620 for subjecting the coated material to radiant
    heat energy.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes apparatus wherein the transfer of
    energy to the work may be a preheating operation prior to the coating
    application and/or a finishing operation after the coating has been applied.

    (2)     Note.  See (1) Note under subclass 620.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 372.2+ for coating processes followed
    by heating of the coating.


CLS 118/642
TXT Apparatus under subclass 641 wherein the transfer of heat energy takes the
    form of one or more radiant or infrared transmission means for the purpose
    of solidifying or baking the previously applied coating material.


CLS 118/643
TXT Apparatus under subclass 642 wherein a second, dissimilar, drying means is
    provided.


CLS 118/663
TXT CONTROL MEANS RESPONSIVE TO A RANDOMLY OCCURRING SENSED CONDITION:

    Apparatus under the class definition wherein the apparatus is provided with
    means which regulates the supply of energy or power to the apparatus or an
    element thereof to operate the same, the operation of the regulating means
    in turn being affected by a means which detects the chance occurrence of a
    characteristic or a change in a characteristic of (a) the work or product,
    (b) the coating material, or (c) the apparatus or some element thereof or
    the surrounding environment.

    (1)     Note.  A mere manually operated on-off switch will not be found in
    this or the indented subclasses unless it is combined with structure
    provided for herein.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass provides for those devices which are operated
    by an external energy or power source where the application of this
    external energy or power to the device is controlled by a condition sensor.
    Those devices employing a sensor which is moved by contact with an object
    to be coated and which have means to transmit this motion directly to an
    applicator it thereby use this motion directly to operate the applicator
    will not be found in this or the indented subclasses.  For such devices see
    subclass 708.


CLS 118/664
TXT Sampling of associated base:

    Apparatus under subclass 663 wherein a means, other than the work, is
    provided to receive a coating, which coating is measured and compared to a
    standard whereby the rate of application of the coating to the work is
    adjusted.


CLS 118/665
TXT Condition of coated material:

    Apparatus under subclass 663 wherein the regulating means reacts to a
    device which detects a characteristic of the coating material which has
    been applied to the work.


CLS 118/666
TXT Temperature responsive:

    Apparatus under subclass 663 wherein the detecting means reacts to the
    variation of sensible heat.


CLS 118/667
TXT Of coating material or applicator:

    Apparatus under subclass 666 wherein the detecting device senses variations
    in the temperature of the material to be applied to the work or the device
    used to apply the coating material to the work.


CLS 118/668
TXT Responsive to attribute, absence or presence of work:

    Apparatus under subclass 663 wherein the detecting means reacts to a
    characteristic of the work or to the entrance or exit of the work from a
    particular position in the apparatus.


CLS 118/669
TXT Selective application at a specific position:

    Apparatus under subclass 668 wherein (a) a predetermined particular point
    or area on the work to receive the coating is detected or (b) coating
    material is applied to the work at a particular point or in a particular
    area in response to a detecting of a characteristic of the work.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of the types of coating apparatus to be found
    herein are means to deposit material at selected locations in a rotating
    unbalanced rotor to balance the same, applying coating to bare spots on the
    interior of a previously coated pipe, etc.


CLS 118/670
TXT Defect in the workpiece sensed:

    Apparatus under subclass 668 wherein a fault or imperfection in the work
    being coated is detected.

    (1)     Note.  Breakage of running length work is not considered to be a
    defect within the meaning of this subclass since the detectors used to
    sense loss of tension usually can be alternately used to sense either
    breakage or mere slackening of the running length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    672+,   for detectors which sense loss of tension in running length of work.


CLS 118/671
TXT Proximity of work to electrically charged applicator sensed:

    Apparatus under subclass 668 wherein the space between the work and a
    coating applying means is permeated by an electric potential and having
    means to detect a too close approach to the coating means by the work.


CLS 118/672
TXT Running length work:

    Apparatus under subclass 668 wherein a characteristic of a continuous,
    moving web or strand is detected.


CLS 118/673
TXT Edge of running length of web material sensed:

    Apparatus under subclass 672 wherein a deviation of a border of a continuum
    of sheetlike material having a width substantially greater than its depth
    from its normal workpath is detected.


CLS 118/674
TXT Having means to sense speed of running length of work:

    Apparatus under subclass 672 wherein the rate at which a continuous web or
    strand of material moves past a specific point is detected.


CLS 118/675
TXT Removal of article sensed:

    Apparatus under subclass 668 wherein the departure of the work from a
    coating station is detected.


CLS 118/676
TXT Presence of work at or passage of work through coating station sensed:

    Apparatus under subclass 668 wherein the appearance of the work at or the
    progress of the work through a location where the coating is to be applied
    is detected.


CLS 118/677
TXT With means to remove or to prevent depositing of excess coating material:

    Apparatus under subclass 676 wherein the detection of work at a point in
    the apparatus (a) actuates means to remove superfluous coating material
    from a coating position or (b) activates means to block or divert the
    application of coating material without the presence of work.


CLS 118/678
TXT By means to interpose barrier:

    Apparatus under subclass 677 wherein the means to block or divert the
    application of coating material is a physical shield placed between a
    coating material outlet and the position which is to be occupied by the
    work.


CLS 118/679
TXT Having means to control coating application:

    Apparatus under subclass 676 wherein means are provided to actuate or
    regulate a coating applying means.

    (1)     Note.  The coating means includes backup members or auxiliary
    members of the apparatus which are necessary to perform the coating
    operation.


CLS 118/680
TXT By means to initiate movement of applicator or applicator adjunct:

    Apparatus under subclass 679 wherein means are provided to begin movement
    of either a coating applying means from one point to another during a
    coating operation or an element associated with but external to the coating
    applying means which allows a coating to be applied to the work.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an associated element is a backup roll which
    is used to move the work into contact with the coating applying means so
    that the coating operation can be performed.


CLS 118/681
TXT By means to move applicator or applicator adjunct from inoperative position
    to operative position:

    Apparatus under subclass 680 wherein means are provided to regulate the
    movement of the coating material outlet or an ancillary piece of the
    coating apparatus associated with the coating material outlet from a nonuse
    position to a use position.


CLS 118/682
TXT By means controlling the operation of a timing means:

    Apparatus under subclass 679 wherein the means to actuate the coating
    applying means include means for controlling the time at which an operation
    occurs or the length of time during which the operation occurs.


CLS 118/683
TXT Of a pump:

    Apparatus under subclass 679 wherein the actuating means initiates or
    otherwise controls the operation of means to pump the coating material to
    thereby apply said material to the work.


CLS 118/684
TXT Of a valve:

    Apparatus under subclass 679 wherein the actuating means controls the
    movement of a flow obstructing means to effect or to regulate the
    application of coating material to the work.


CLS 118/685
TXT Fluid motor actuated:

    Apparatus under subclass 684 wherein a fluid motor means controls the
    movement of the flow obstructing means by either pneumatic or hydraulic
    pressure.


CLS 118/686
TXT By means to control conveyor operation:

    Apparatus under subclass 676 wherein the detection of the work at a point
    in the apparatus actuates means to regulate the movement of work transport
    means.


CLS 118/687
TXT By means to intermittently advance conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 686 wherein means are provided to cause the work
    transport means to start and stop at regular or irregular intervals.


CLS 118/688
TXT Responsive to condition of coating material:

    Apparatus under subclass 663 wherein the detecting means reacts to a
    characteristic of the material to be applied to the work.

    (1)     Note.  These characteristics are such things as density,
    concentration, etc., of the coating material.


CLS 118/689
TXT Concentration of coating material in carrier medium:

    Apparatus under subclass 688 wherein the coating material is composed of
    more than one component, the quantity of one being measured.


CLS 118/690
TXT During application:

    Apparatus under subclass 689 wherein the measurement of the quantity of one
    of the components of the coating material is performed during the time in
    which the coating material is travelling from an applying means to the work.


CLS 118/691
TXT Photoelectric sensor:

    Apparatus under subclass 689 wherein the means for measuring the quantity
    of one of the components of the coating material is composed of a light
    transmitting device and a light responsive device between which the coating
    material passes.


CLS 118/692
TXT Pressure responsive:

    Apparatus under subclass 688 wherein the supply of the coating material is
    controlled in response to variations in the force per unit area existing
    within said material.


CLS 118/693
TXT Means to raise coating material to a predetermined level inside an enclosed
    container:

    Apparatus under subclass 688 wherein the coating material is admitted to
    the interior of a receptacle and the advancing surface of the coating
    material is detected when it reaches a certain selected point.

    (1)     Note.  The art found in this subclass pertains to those devices in
    which the coating material is supplied to a container (which may be the
    work) and fills the container to a certain height whereupon a sensor is
    actuated which prevents further filling of the container.


CLS 118/694
TXT Level of supply:

    Apparatus under subclass 688 wherein the coating material is contained in a
    confined space and means are provided to sense the upper surface of the
    contained material.


CLS 118/695
TXT INTERFACING CONTROL OF PLURAL OPERATIONS:

    Apparatus under the class definition wherein a plurality of independently
    driven and concurrently moving members operate on the work to be coated and
    means are provided to synchronize the movement for these members.


CLS 118/696
TXT PROGRAM, CYCLIC, OR TIME CONTROL:

    Apparatus under the class definition having a regulating means which is
    provided with (a) means for operating the apparatus in response to a set of
    coded instructions, (b) means for regulating the sequence of operational
    steps performed in or by the apparatus, or (c) means for determining the
    time at which an operation occurs or length of time taken to perform such
    an operation.


CLS 118/697
TXT Having prerecorded program medium:

    Apparatus under subclass 696 wherein a set of coded instructions is
    contained on a registration means which can be fed through and read by the
    regulating means to control the operation of the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of the registration means are magnetic tapes,
    punched cards, paper tapes, disk packs, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    901,    Robots, subcollection 43 for a programmed robot which performs a
    coating operation.


CLS 118/698
TXT Having selection means for alternate operational sequences:

    Apparatus under subclass 696 wherein a means is provided to choose between
    two or more modes in which the apparatus may operate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    901,    Robots, subcollection 43 for a robot which performs a coating
    operation.


CLS 118/699
TXT Having timer:

    Apparatus under subclass 696 wherein the regulating means is provided with
    means for controlling the time at which an operation occurs or the length
    of time in which said operation is performed.


CLS 118/700
TXT Timing motor with cam or disk:

    Apparatus under subclass 699 wherein the timing mechanism consists of a
    rotating, electrical motor which drives an irregularly shaped cylinder or a
    circular plate.


CLS 118/701
TXT Notched rotating disk:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 wherein the circular plate is provided with an
    angular cut in its periphery.


CLS 118/702
TXT Sequential timing of plural operations:

    Apparatus under subclass 699 wherein a means is provided to control the
    time at which an operation is performed in a series of operations.


CLS 118/703
TXT Time delay means:

    Apparatus under subclass 699 wherein a means is provided which causes an
    operation of the apparatus to be postponed for a specific period.


CLS 118/704
TXT Sequential energization of plural operations:

    Apparatus under subclass 696 wherein a means is provided to actuate the
    apparatus through a series of operations in a specific order.


CLS 118/705
TXT Having means to reverse operation at end of travel path:

    Apparatus under subclass 696 wherein a means is provided to cause a moving
    part of the apparatus to begin movement in the direction opposite to the
    one in which it has been moving upon reaching a terminal position.


CLS 118/706
TXT Cyclic operation of singular element:

    Apparatus under subclass 696 wherein only one specific part of the
    apparatus is moved from a starting position to a stopping position during
    each period of operation.


CLS 118/707
TXT INTERCONTROL OR SAFETY INTERLOCK:

    Apparatus under the class definition in which means is provided for
    interrelating the operation of various parts of the apparatus so that upon
    the operation of one part, one or more other operating parts are
    disconnected or activated.

    (1)     Note.  A mere common drive means for plural parts of the coating
    apparatus are not included but are found under appropriate type of
    apparatus.

    (2)     Note.  Safety interlocks which prevent an operator from being
    harmed when the apparatus is operating are found here.


CLS 118/708
TXT CONDITION RESPONSIVE CONTROL:

    Apparatus under the class definition wherein a work sensing means is
    provided which is contacted and moved by work moving therepast and wherein
    any movement imparted to the sensing means is transmitted directly to and
    causes the movement of some other element of the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of subject matter to be found herein are valves
    having depending fingers rigidly connected thereto which are contacted by
    the work and which unseat the valve, means sensing the diameter of a wound
    package which controls the path taken by work being wound across a coating
    applying means, etc.


CLS 118/709
TXT Responsive to diameter of wound material spool:

    Apparatus under subclass 708 wherein a means responds to a change in the
    diameter of a reel as material is wound thereon.


CLS 118/710
TXT Valve actuator:

    Apparatus under subclass 708 wherein a valve is provided to control the
    flow of coating material, which valve has a sensing means associated
    therewith such that any motion imparted to the sensing means by contact
    with the work will be transmitted directly to the valve to actuate the same.


CLS 118/711
TXT Integral actuator extends through or is formed on valve seat:

    Apparatus under subclass 710 wherein the sensing means is either an element
    carried by or a surface formed on (a) the valving member and extending
    through a circumscribing valve seat or (b) the valve seat.


CLS 118/712
TXT WITH INDICATING TESTING, INSPECTING, OR MEASURING MEANS:

    Apparatus under the class definition (1) having means to sense a condition
    and in response thereto actuate a signalling or indicating device or (2)
    being combined with means to perform a test upon, permit observation of, or
    perform a measuring operation upon (a) the coated or uncoated work, (b) the
    coating material, or (c) the apparatus.


CLS 118/713
TXT With means for visual observation:

    Apparatus under subclass 712 wherein a means is provided to facilitate the
    visual examination of (a) the coating apparatus, (b) the work, or (c) the
    material applied by an operator.


CLS 118/714
TXT With means to return indicator to zero point:

    Apparatus under subclass 712 wherein a means is provided to move the
    indicator from its indicating position to its initial rest position so that
    the indicator can be reused.


CLS 118/715
TXT GAS OR VAPOR DEPOSITION:

    Apparatus under the class definition wherein a coating material which is in
    the form of either the third state of matter, i.e., gaseous, or the
    transition between the second and third states of matter, i.e., vaporous,
    is condensed upon and forms a deposit of a base.

    (1)     Note.  The mere atomization of a liquid coating material by the
    influx of a pressurized gas thereby forming a fine mist is not included
    here.  See Class 118, subclasses 300+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes and non-coating apparatus for
    growing therein-defined single-crystal of all types of materials, including
    inorganic or organic, especially subclasses 84+ for processes of vapor
    phase epitaxy corresponding to the vapor phase epitaxy apparatus found in
    Class 118.


CLS 118/716
TXT Means to coat or impregnate particulate matter:

    Apparatus under subclass 715 wherein the base to be coated is granular.


CLS 118/717
TXT Object embedded in particulate mass:

    Apparatus under subclass 715 wherein the base to be coated is fixed in a
    surrounding bed of granulated coating material.


CLS 118/718
TXT Running length work:

    Apparatus under subclass 715 wherein the base which is being coated is
    longitudinally continuous and of indeterminate length.


CLS 118/719
TXT Multizone chamber:

    Apparatus under subclass 715 wherein the coating apparatus is divided into
    a number of distinct areas wherein different aspects of the coating
    treatment can be performed.


CLS 118/720
TXT Having means to expose a portion of a substrate to coating medium:

    Apparatus under subclass 715 wherein a mechanism is provided to selectively
    coat only a portion of the base with the coating material.


CLS 118/721
TXT Substrate contacting mask:

    Apparatus under subclass 720 wherein said mechanism is a solid object which
    touches the base to prevent the underlying Section from being coated with
    the coating material.


CLS 118/722
TXT With treating means (e.g., jarring, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 715 wherein a means is provided to condition
    either the base or the coating material in a manner other than and in
    addition to applying the coating to the base.

    (1)     Note.  The additional treatment of this and the indented subclasses
    may either enhance or perfect the actual coating operation or it may be
    totally unrelated with that operation. Examples of other treatments to be
    found herein are vibrating or otherwise agitating the base, heating the
    base, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, for apparatus for gas separation, per
    se.


CLS 118/723
TXT By means creating additional electric field:

    Apparatus under subclass 722 wherein the means performing the additional
    conditioning creates an electric field which acts on the base or coating
    material.


CLS 118/724
TXT By means to heat or cool:

    Apparatus under subclass 722 wherein a means is provided which alters the
    temperature which means is other than and in addition to any temperature
    altering means associated with a source of the coating material.


CLS 118/725
TXT Substrate heater:

    Apparatus under subclass 724 wherein the temperature altering means heats
    the base or a support for the base.


CLS 118/726
TXT Crucible or evaporator structure:

    Apparatus under subclass 715 wherein significance is attributable to a
    means which either vaporizes the coating material or contains the coating
    material during vaporization.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 11+ for crucibles
    used with electron beam vaporizing furnaces.


CLS 118/727
TXT Movable crucible:

    Apparatus under subclass 726 wherein the holder of the coating material can
    be transported from one position to another.


CLS 118/728
TXT Work support:

    Apparatus under subclass 715 wherein significance is attributable to a
    means which holds the base to be coated.


CLS 118/729
TXT Moving work support:

    Apparatus under subclass 728 wherein the holding means for the base is
    capable of motion.


CLS 118/730
TXT Rotary:

    Apparatus under subclass 729 wherein the base holding means is capable of
    circular motion.


CLS 118/731
TXT Inverting:

    Apparatus under subclass 730 wherein a means is provided to flip the base
    holding means over to expose first one face of the base and then the other.


CLS 118/732
TXT Porous:

    Apparatus under subclass 729 wherein the base holding means is foraminously
    constructed to allow gaseous flow therethrough.


CLS 118/733
TXT Chamber seal:

    Apparatus under subclass 715 wherein a means is provided to prevent
    communication between a coating chamber and the exterior environment.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTION


CLS 118/900
TXT SEMICONDUCTOR VAPOR DOPING:

    Apparatus which implants impurities into a pure crystalline semiconductor
    material by vapor deposition to enhance the conductive characteristics of
    the semiconductor material.


CLS 119/
TTL ANIMAL HUSBANDRY

CLS 119/
TXT I.      Statement of Class Subject Matter

    This class provides for methods or apparatus for the propagation, rearing,
    training, exercising, amusing, feeding, milking, grooming, housing,
    controlling, handling, or general care of a living animal unless provided
    for elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  The word "animal" is used in its generic biological meaning
    of a living sentient multicellular organism and is applicable to insects,
    fish, fowl, mammals, and other members of the animal kingdom.

    (2)     Note.  This class is subdivided into:
    (a)     an array of specified animal culturing                  subclass
    groups, the common bond within          each group being determined by the
    partic-              ular kind of animal that is the subject of the
                invention;(b)   an array of subclass groups directed to a
                      method or apparatus for obtaining milk
                           from an animal other than a human; and(c)        a
    number of subclass groups, the common           bond within each group
    being determined                by the function or mode of
    operation    rather than the particular creature to     which the invention
    is applied.

            The groups mentioned in (c) may include subject matter specifically
    limited in use to a human or to fowl, and patents directed to said specific
    uses are classified in subclasses having a distinctive title which provides
    for the respective human or fowl specific use.  It should be noted that the
    subclass(es) that specifically provide for a human use are the only areas
    in this class providing for a human application, and since these subclasses
    are the residual areas for human application not otherwise provided for,
    the definitions of these subclasses are strictly limited.  The outside
    classes listed in the search notes of both the class definition and the
    subclass(es) relating to a human should be exhausted before placement of a
    patent relating to a human application in this class.

    (3)     Note.  A method provided for in this class is appropriately
    classified in a subclass specifcally providing for the method or, absent a
    specific method subclass, in a subclass providing for the apparatus of this
    class used in the method.

    (4)     Note.  A method of making an apparatus of this class is excluded
    from this class, and may be found in an appropriate manufacturing class.

    II.     Search Notes


    A.      For Subject Matter Related To Milkers

    (1)     Note.  Class 60, Power Plants, has pulsators distinguished from
    Class 119 and Class 137 Fluid Handling, subclasses 103+, pulsators or fluid
    distributors in that the former do not relate to through-flow mechanisms
    but rather effect the pulsing of a confined body of fluid, the same body of
    fluid, for example, operating upon a pressure responsive mechanism.
    Milking machine pulsators are broadly construed as valving arrangements
    which cyclicly control fluid flowing under pressure and not involving the
    same body of fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    54,     Harness, for girth or surcingle devices not restricted by utility
    to milking organizations.

    60,     Power Plants, and see (1) Note above.

    62,     Refrigeration, for cooling or refrigerating apparatus in which
    milking apparatus is identified by name only.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, for uncombined prime movers for
    converting the energy of a pressure fluid into mechanical work.  Teat cups
    and teat compressors are not considered as motors of the type contemplated
    by Class 91.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, for mechanical devices for giving signals
    of the nature of either alarms or indicators including milking apparatus
    where the milking apparatus is included by name only and is not modified in
    order to cooperate with the signal mechanism.

    128,    Surgery, for catheters combining a treating function and a milking
    function or treating function, per se. The catheters of this class (119)
    are disclosed for milking only.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, for apparatus for cleaning
    milking equipment involving liquid contact, such apparatus not including
    additional means for some milking function.

    137,    Fluid Handling, (a) for general utility valving devices for
    cyclicly or periodically controlling pressure fluids even though known as
    and called "milking machine pulsators" except where such devices are
    modified by features restricting the said device to a milking function.
    Modified pulsators adapting them to be mounted or supported upon a receiver
    cover or wall, for example, where no more than is necessary for performing
    a supporting function is included, is not sufficient to place the patent in
    this class (119).  See (1) Note above; (b) for tanks having general utility
    filling or discharging characteristics for handling milk; (c) for general
    utility valves combined with other structure not provided for elsewhere
    e.g., for general utility valves combined with a receiver cover where only
    so much of the cover is recited as to provide a seat for the valve; (d) for
    systems of fluid handling of general utility; and (e) for valve actuation
    not related to the elements of a milking system, and especially fluid
    pressure responsive devices, e.g., vacuum cutoffs of general utility.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses, for heat exchange apparatus,
    per se.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 473+ for a filter and
    receptacle (e.g., milk pail) combination.

    220,    Receptacles, for milk pails and cans and for leg and lap supported
    pails.

    222,    Dispensing, for milk pails having a spout, pouring lip, or other
    material pouring guide.

    248,    Supports, for general supports for milking elements, pails and cans
    not limited by structure to use in milking operations.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 175+ for a stool particularly adapted
    to facilitate the milking operation, as by the inclusion of a tail holder
    or pail support, and see the search notes thereto.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, for electric signaling devices
    including those having the combinations with milking apparatus by name only.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ for
    electromagnetic make and break circuits for milking machine electromagnetic
    controls.

    417,    Pumps, for devices, per se, for pumping fluids, having a relatively
    movable member and a relatively stationary member comprising a chamber and
    a contained impeller, the relative movements of which cause fluid from a
    source of supply to enter the chamber through an induction port and to be
    impelled therefrom through an eduction port, said ports in general being
    valved, and general utility pump elements.  "Pump elements" of this class
    (119) permit through flow of fluids but lack, in general, valving ingress
    except that provided by the nature of the cow being milked.
    Super-atmospheric pressure is thereby utilized to discharge the fluid
    through the eduction port and to simultaneously relieve the negative
    pressure beyond the induction port.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    for processes of treating milk and milk products.

    433,    Dentistry, subclass 1 for veterinary dentistry methods and
    apparatus.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 191+ for an electrical connector
    combined with a fluent material transmission line.

    B.      Miscellaneous Search Notes

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, appropriate subclass for animal beds consisting only of a
    sleeping surface and its support which would have utility for humans.

    30,     Cutlery, appropriate subclasses for hand manipulated cutting
    implements adapted for dehorning animals, but of more general utility.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, particularly subclasses 300+ for
    a check, label, or tag for attaching to an animal.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, for apparatus for
    capturing wild animals.

    54,     Harness, for work and training harness for animals.

    81,     Tools, subclass 9.22 for a tattooing device, including means for
    reciprocating a perforating tool and for introducing coloring material into
    the perforations.

    101,    Printing, for printing and branding instruments.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 402+ for a self heating branding
    tool of general application.

    219,    Electric Heating, particularly subclasses 227+ for an electrical
    branding iron having a fixed character or indicia.

    222,    Dispensing, for dispensers not specialized to animal husbandry
    purposes.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, for rotary expansible chamber
    devices, per se.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclass for a composition for preventing, alleviating, treating, curing,
    or diagnosing a disease or condition in an animal and for a process of
    using such a composition(s), or compound for such purposes, e.g., feeding a
    coccidiostat, etc., to poultry.

    449,    Bee Culture, appropriate subclasses for the care and propagation of
    bees.

    452,    Butchering, subclasses 52+ for slaughtering apparatus.

    606,    Surgery, subclasses 116 for marking animals, 117 for animal
    identification devices, 135+, for means for or to assist in animal
    sterilization, 167+, cutting, punching and piercing devices used on animal
    bodies, and in particular subclass 175 for snout cutters.


CLS 119/6.5
TXT ENTOMOLOGICAL CULTURE DEVICE:
    Subject matter under the class definition employed in the propagation,
    care, or observation of an animal taxonomically classified in the class
    Insecta, i.e., an insect or an insect larva.

    (1)     Note.  The propagation, care, or observation of a bee is excluded
    from this subclass.  See the Search Class note below.

    (2)     Note.  An insect observation center such as an "ant farm" is found
    in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for the propagation or care of a silkworm caterpillar.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    449,    Bee Culture, appropriate subclasses for subject matter related to
    the propagation, care, or observation of a bee.


CLS 119/6.6
TXT Egg treatment, production, or storage:
    Subject matter under subclass 6.5 including structure (1) for aiding in
    altering normal development of an externally deposited ovum, i.e., an egg,
    of an insect, (2) for enhancing laying of an insect egg, or (3) for holding
    or keeping an insect egg for a period of time, e.g., during transportation,
    etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6.8,    for avian egg treatment or production structure.

    50.7,   for structure used to place a distinguishing indication on an egg.


CLS 119/6.7
TXT WORM CULTURE:
    Subject matter under the class definition employed in the propagation or
    care of an invertebrate animal taxonomically classified in the phyla
    Annelida, Nematoda, Platyhelminthes, Acanthocephala, Nematomorpha, or
    Nemertea, i.e., a worm.

    (1)     Note.  The larval stage of an insect is not considered to be a worm
    for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for the propagation or care of a silkworm caterpillar.

    6.5,    for the propagation, care, or observation of an insect or an insect
    larva.


CLS 119/6.8
TXT AVIAN EGG TREATMENT OR PRODUCTION:
    Subject matter under the class definition consisting of structure (1) for
    aiding in altering normal development of an externally deposited ovum,
    i.e., an egg, of a bird or (2) enhancing laying of a bird egg.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6.6,    for insect egg treatment, production, or storage structure.

    45.2    and 50.7, for a structure used to place a distinguishing indication
    on an egg.


CLS 119/14.01
TXT Methods and apparatus under the class definition peculiarly designed for
    extracting milk from cows by force exerting or manipulative devices, and
    including ancillary devices, not provided for in other classes, associated
    with a collateral to milk extracting apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 236.01 for teat
    cup cleaning implements having a hard blade-like or scraping edge.

    55,     Gas Separation, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 434+
    for deflection type separating means peculiarly adapted for separating a
    fluid from a mixture of gas and liquid as for example in a vacuum line.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 61.64+ for sediment type milk
    testers, and subclasses 863+ for devices for obtaining samples, usually
    either of absolute volume or of a predetermined ratio to the source from
    which the sample is taken.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 34 for lactometers and visual
    inspecting means for detection of abnormal milk, e.g., strip cuts.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 20+ for drives for
    mechanical milking machines.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclasses for an
    expansible chamber device, and particularly subclasses 34+ for a bellows
    type expansible chamber device, and subclasses 89+ for a collapsible wall
    type expansible chamber device.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 241+ for degasification of
    liquid, per se.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 155+ for degasifying means
    for liquid, per se.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus relating to the production of dairy products.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses,
    for such subject matter, and see the appropriate search class note in
    section I of the class definition of this class (119) for a statement of
    the line.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 103+ for vacuum type pulsators, per se,
    (see section I of the class definition of this class (119) for the line).

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 37+ for flow restrictors and
    regulators including variable restrictors.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 416.1+ for a filter
    combined with a pump, gas pressure or suction source.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 12+ for fluid actuated
    valves and subclasses 149+ for stall cocks and vacuum line connections.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    for process of treating milk.


CLS 119/14.02
TXT Methods under subclass 14.01 of extracting milk from cows and/or of
    obtaining milk directly from the cow under controlled conditions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for milk
    preservation and treatment, and see the appropriate search class notes in
    section I of the main class definition of this class (119) for a statement
    of the line.


CLS 119/14.03
TXT Structural arrangements under subclass 14.01, designed for sequential
    treatment of animals for purposes of conducting and facilitating milking,
    for milking or for milking in combination with other dairy operations,
    e.g., milk delivery, animal feeding, washing, exercising and the like.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14.05+, for milk releasers not involving milking parlor structure.

    15+     and 147+, for mere housing and confining or stanchion devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 191+ for an electrical connector
    combined with a fluent material transmission line.


CLS 119/14.04
TXT Arrangements under subclass 14.03 including a moving platform on which the
    animal is carried while being milked, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 29+ for a residual
    building construction of more general application having a defined means
    mounted for movement, particularly subclass 31 for a rotating or endless
    type conveyor.


CLS 119/14.05
TXT Milkers under subclass 14.01 having means to discharge milk from the milker
    apparatus during continuous milking while maintaining the milk conveying
    fluid pressure in the milker without interruption.

    (1)     Note.  Trap valve milkers, subclasses 14.32+, operating on a
    pressure-vacuum cycle, discharging milk to atmosphere or to a receiver, are
    not considered as apparatus maintaining fluid pressure without interruption.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14.32+, see (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, appropriate subclass for milk receivers and
    handling means of general utility.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for trap type dispensers where
    the trap is permanently connected to a source of supply and where the
    supply does not depend upon a milking operation.


CLS 119/14.06
TXT Releasers under subclass 14.05 having plural separate receivers which are
    alternately filled and which alternately discharge their contents to the
    atmosphere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 35+ and 59 for filling receptacles under vacuum in a continuous
    milk delivery system where the receptacle is not a permanent part of the
    system, e.g., transport can.


CLS 119/14.07
TXT Releasers under subclass 14.05 having means to vary pressures in the
    releaser apparatus cyclicly to effect intermittent discharge of the milk.


CLS 119/14.08
TXT Apparatus under subclass 14.01 claiming some character of automatic control.

    (1)     Note.  By automatic control is meant the provision of means to
    sense a condition (for example, means to sense stoppage of milk flow) which
    means causes operation of a control device.

    (2)     Note.  The above definition is intended to exclude valves, check
    valves, and safety valves directly operated by  gravity, inertia or fluid,
    but includes float valves which inter-dependently perform sensing and
    control functions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14.05+, for cyclicly operated milk releasers including float valves.

    14.44,  for fluid pressure regulators.


CLS 119/14.09
TXT Apparatus under subclass 14.01 claimed in combination with means to cool
    the milk during its delivery from the cow to a milking machine receiver or
    upon delivery to the milking machine receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14.18,  for apparatus involving a combined milking and receptacle filling
    function.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclasses for refrigerating apparatus
    and see the search class note of section I of the main class definition of
    this class (119) for a statement of the line.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 213 for preservation of
    milk by treatment with chemical gases and subclass 455 for a cooling means
    used in combination with a dairy food treating means.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 82 for filling receptacles combined with cooling.

    237,    Heating Systems, appropriate subclasses, for heat exchange
    apparatus and see the appropriate search class note in section I of this
    class definition of this class (119) for a statement of the line.


CLS 119/14.1
TXT Milkers under subclass 14.01 combined with means which carry the weight of
    the milking apparatus while the animal is milked; the means may be
    installed or portable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14.27+, for pulsators, traps and pumps supported on a receiver or wall.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 17.1+ for lap or leg supported pails and
    appropriate subclasses for milk cans.

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses for supports for milking elements,
    pails and cans not limited by structure to use in milking operations.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 177+ for a milker stool having an
    adjustable pail support.


CLS 119/14.11
TXT Milker Supports under subclass 14.1 provided with means for conveyance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclass 234 for pumps combined with means for conveyance.


CLS 119/14.12
TXT Girth suspensory type apparatus under subclass 14.1 which supports the
    milker from the back of the animal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    54,     Harness, subclass 23 for girth or surcingle devices, per se, not
    restricted in utility to milking organizations.


CLS 119/14.13
TXT Supports under subclass 14.1 with means in addition to the effect of
    gravity to exert a force on the milker to effect a pull on the teat cups.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14.18,  for milkers combined with udder manipulative and teat cup biasing
    means.


CLS 119/14.14
TXT Milkers under subclass 14.01 having means for indicating a condition (or
    lack thereof) or performing a measuring function during the milking
    operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, and see the appropriate search class note
    in section I of the class definition of this class (119) for a statement of
    the line.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 551+ for fluid handling apparatus
    including an indicator, register, recorder, alarm or inspection means, and
    subclasses 624.11+ for a fluid distribution system including a programmer
    or timer.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+ for electrically
    operated alarms.


CLS 119/14.15
TXT Devices under subclass 14.14 which indicate a fluid flow condition or lack
    thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 117 for fluid flow indicators.


CLS 119/14.16
TXT Devices under subclass 14.15 having flow sight inspection means variously
    located in the apparatus, through which the flow of milk can be observed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 154+ for inspection devices for dispensers,
    especially subclass 159, for transparent flow line sections.


CLS 119/14.17
TXT Devices under subclass 14.14 which indicate a quantitative condition in the
    milker.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 290+ and 426+ for volume
    determining devices, and subclasses 194+ for volume or rate of flow meters.


CLS 119/14.18
TXT Milkers under subclass 14.01 claimed in combination with features other
    than receiver, pump, teat cups or pulsator structure, and supports
    therefor, including nonuse supports, and not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass for example, are combinations with traction
    applying or teat supporting devices, filling, udder stimulation as by
    electric current or massage, strippers, air or milker washing apparatus,
    and fluid-pressure stabilizer.

    (2)     Note.  All preceding subclasses must be investigated for particular
    combinations within this definition and shown by the preceding subclass
    titles.

    (3)     Note.  Milkers in name only combined with subject matter outside
    the class definition are classified with the class providing for such
    subject matter.


CLS 119/14.19
TXT Milkers under subclass 14.01 having a tubular device, dilator or conduit to
    be inserted in the teat canal whereby milk is drawn off.


CLS 119/14.2
TXT Catheter milkers under subclass 14.19 including vacuum means to assist in
    the withdrawal of milk.


CLS 119/14.21
TXT Catheters under subclass 14.19 claiming the tubular or conduit-like device,
    per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 93+, for catheters for introducing or removing
    medicating material in the animal body.


CLS 119/14.22
TXT Milkers under subclass 14.01 in which the hand of the operator directly
    supplies force to the teat compressing means without intervening linkage,
    and in which the hand of the operator or the means contacted by the hand of
    the operator surrounds the cow's teat.


CLS 119/14.23
TXT Hand milkers under subclass 14.22 having a hand supported and/or
    manipulated conduit and/or teat cover (e.g., shield or glove-like mitt) and
    having a receiver for the extracted milk.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 86.1 for pails with inlets modified to
    receive the milk while milking.


CLS 119/14.24
TXT Milkers under subclass 14.01 in which the teats are compressed by
    mechanical squeeze mechanisms such as plates, cams, rollers and the like,
    or by fluid pressure means with mechanical intervention and having means
    for actuating such mechanisms.

    (1)     Note.  The actuating means may consist of a drive shaft, hand lever
    or crank, foot crank, fluid or the like.


CLS 119/14.25
TXT Milkers under subclass 14.24, having vacuum means to convey the extracted
    milk to a receiver.


CLS 119/14.26
TXT Milkers under subclass 14.24 in which the squeeze mechanism is operated by
    pulsing fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 533+ for devices effecting the pulsing of
    a confined body of fluid.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 103+ for a vacuum type pulsator, per se;
    subclasses 455+ for a line condition change responsive valve; subclass
    624.14 for a self-cycling programmed or timed valve. See section I of the
    class definition of this class (119) for the line.


CLS 119/14.27
TXT Milkers under subclass 14.01 in which the teats are compressed by fluid
    pressure directly applied to the teats without mechanical intervention, and
    having means cyclicly controlling said fluid pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 533+ for devices effecting the pulsing of
    a confined body of fluid and see the appropriate search class note in
    section I of the main class definition of this class (119) for a statement
    of the line.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 103+ for a vacuum type pulsator, per se;
    subclasses 455+ for a line condition change responsive valve; subclass
    624.14 for a self-cycling programmed or timed valve. See section I of the
    class definition of this class (119) for the line.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 37+ for flow regulators
    (pulsing timers) combined with pulsators in name only.

    188,    Brakes, subclass 297 for fluid braking mechanisms, e.g., fluid
    dashpots, for pulsators.


CLS 119/14.28
TXT Milkers under subclass 14.27, in which the fluid control means is
    electromagnetically operated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 129+ for electrical valve
    actuation.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ for
    electromagnetic make and break circuits for milkers.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 191+ for an electrical connector
    combined with a fluent material transmission line.


CLS 119/14.29
TXT Milkers under subclass 14.27 in which a primary or master pulsator
    establishes a pulsing fluid line which drives a secondary pulsator to
    cyclicly control fluid pressure on the teats.

    (1)     Note.  Patents claiming a pulsing fluid line in combination with a
    secondary or driven pulsator are in this and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses, for drives
    applicable to this subject matter, particularly subclasses 500.5+ for
    flexible cable transmitters.


CLS 119/14.3
TXT Milkers under subclass 14.29 having some means usually in the form of check
    valve which is operated by the pulsing fluid line to derive therefrom a
    source of continuous vacuum.

    (1)     Note.  The continuous vacuum is generally maintained in a receiver
    and is applied to the milk channel of the teat cup.


CLS 119/14.31
TXT Milkers under subclass 14.27 including a sectionally collapsible teat
    compressor and having means to effect progressive or sectional collapse
    thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14.24+, for mechanical compression milkers having progressive collapse
    features.

    14.52,  for sectionally collapsible teat compressor or cup, per se.


CLS 119/14.32
TXT Milkers under subclass 14.27 having a cyclicly vacuumized chamber,
    including a milk port, a pressure port and a valved discharge port; the
    milk is drawn into the chamber on the vacuum cycle and discharged therefrom
    through the discharge port during the pressure cycle.

    (1)     Note.  The milk conveying pressure fluid is cyclicly interrupted in
    contradistinction to the subject matter of subclass 14.05 above.

    (2)     Note.  For a statement of the line between the subject matter of
    this subclass and Classes 60, 103 and 230, see the Search Class notes to
    these classes in section I of the main class (119) definitions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14.05,  for milker releasers maintaining the milk conveying fluid pressure
    without interruption.  See (1) Note.

    14.42,  for trap type pumps into which the milk is drawn and from which it
    is discharged.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, appropriate subclasses, and particularly subclasses 118+ for
    liquid pumping by the supplying and exhausting of a gaseous motivating
    fluid.


CLS 119/14.33
TXT Milkers under subclass 14.32 provided with means for preventing the egress
    of milk or milk vapor through the pressure port.

    (1)     Note.  Usually baffles or filters, but arrangements for imparting a
    swirling motion to the milk either at the inlet or in the trap are included.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, for apparatus for gas separation, per
    se.


CLS 119/14.34
TXT Milkers under subclass 14.32 having a plurality of valved trap chambers.


CLS 119/14.35
TXT Milkers under subclass 14.34 having a single valve means supported between
    a pair of chambers so as to alternately close the discharge port of one of
    the chambers while the other discharge port is opened.


CLS 119/14.36
TXT Milkers under subclass 14.27 having a milk conveying conduit provided with
    means to admit air behind the milk (e.g., at the claw or teat cup) so as to
    prevent surging or churning of the milk in its flow to a receiver, to
    relieve pressure on the teat, or to cause the cow to let down the milk more
    freely.


CLS 119/14.37
TXT Milkers under subclass 14.27 having the fluid control means intimately
    associated with the teat-compressor coupling or claw.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14.29+, for pulsator combined with claw in   series with a master or
    primary pulsator or with a pulsing fluid line.


CLS 119/14.38
TXT Milkers under subclass 14.27 having the fluid control means intimately
    associated with the teat compressor.


CLS 119/14.39
TXT Milkers under subclass 14.27 having the fluid pressure control associated
    with the cover of a receiver.

    (1)     Note.  Compare with subclass 14.32 above.  The fluid control means
    of this subclass 14.39 is distinguished from the trap chamber of subclass
    14.32 by the fact that the control does not trap the milk and discharge it
    therefrom. The control in one position permits through vacuum and milk flow
    from the teat cup to the receiver and in an alternate position permits
    atmospheric air to relieve the pressure on the teat cup but does not
    disturb the vacuum in the receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14.32,  see (1) Note.

    14.46,  for receiver structure modified to mount the pulsator.


CLS 119/14.4
TXT Milkers under subclass 14.39 having the fluid pressure to the outer chamber
    of the teat compressor cyclicly controlled and having uninterrupted vacuum
    applied to the interior portion of the teat compressor immediately
    surrounding the teat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14.46,  for receiver structure modified to mount the pulsator.


CLS 119/14.41
TXT Milkers under subclass 14.27 having the fluid pressure to the outer chamber
    of the teat compressor cyclicly controlled and having uninterrupted vacuum
    applied to the interior portion of the teat compressor immediately
    surrounding the teat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14.39,  for combinations with two chambered teat cups where the vacuum on
    the interior portion of the teat compressor is cyclicly interrupted.


CLS 119/14.42
TXT Milkers under subclass 14.27 in which the fluid control means is a pump,
    usually double acting; the milk is drawn into the pump on the vacuum stroke
    and expelled on the pressure stroke.  Provision in the pump to completely
    relieve the vacuum on the teat is not required but may be included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14.32,  for trap chambers which have a milk port, a discharge port and a
    pressure port; the pressure port providing both pressure ingress and egress
    connections to a double acting air pump, and see the search notes to that
    subclass.

    14.36,  for means associated with the claw or teat cup to relieve vacuum in
    the line behind the milk.


CLS 119/14.43
TXT Milkers under subclass 14.01 including a receiver and an air exhausting
    means for said receiver.  Milk is drawn from the cow to the receiver under
    constant vacuum without cyclic control or interruption.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, appropriate subclasses for vacuum pumps, per se.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclasses for
    rotary expansible chamber type of vacuum pumps, per se.


CLS 119/14.44
TXT Devices under subclass 14.01 having means to regulate the degree and/or
    flow rate of pressure maintained in the milker.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14.08,  for automatic vacuum cut-offs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, appropriate subclasses for valve
    actuation in general.


CLS 119/14.45
TXT Milkers under subclass 14.01 having some means for securing some part of
    the milking apparatus in some position other than the position in which it
    normally functions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14.1+,  for means supporting the apparatus in position while the animal is
    being milked.


CLS 119/14.46
TXT Apparatus under subclass 14.01 having milk receiver or receptacle
    structure, either claimed in combination with specific milking mechanism,
    or restricted in utility to milking organizations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14.39   and 14.4, for pulsator-receiver combinations including the teat
    cups.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 863+ for interposed testing
    sampler, per se, and subclasses 426+ for measuring vessels.

    137,    Fluid Handling, appropriate subclasses for fluid handling apparatus
    in general including tanks, valves, filling and discharging means, etc.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 59 for filling with exhausting the receiver, and subclasses 331+
    for funnels.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 473+ for a receiver
    and filter combination.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 200+ for receptacle closures, and
    appropriate subclasses for milk pails and cans.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 566+ for milk pails having material pouring
    guide.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 441 for lactometers.


CLS 119/14.47
TXT Devices under subclass 14.01 which are applied to or receive the teats of
    the cow for compression thereof during the milking operation.  The
    structure of the device, per se, is here involved.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14.22+, 14.24+ and 14.27+, for teat compressors in combination with means
    to operate and control them.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 235 for apparatus for applying teat cups to
    rings.


CLS 119/14.48
TXT Teat cups under subclass 14.47 which have means whereby the size of the cup
    may be changed to accommodate various teats, or which may be adjusted to
    compensate for liner slack or wear, or which have features which permit a
    liner to be used with various shells.


CLS 119/14.49
TXT Teat cups under subclass 14.48 of the conventional two chamber variety
    wherein the flexible liner or inflation may be separated from the shell or
    rigid casing.


CLS 119/14.5
TXT Teat cups under subclass 14.47 having means whereby a reciprocatory action
    is imparted to the teat cup and/or the teat cup is so constructed as to
    permit one section thereof to reciprocate with respect to another section
    apart from mere inherent resilience of the device.


CLS 119/14.51
TXT Teat cups under subclass 14.47 distinguishable by a particularized fluid
    conveying tubular member or members connected to the shell and/or liner,
    integrally formed there with, or comprising coupling combinations there
    between.


CLS 119/14.52
TXT Teat cups under subclass 14.47 having structural means whereby the nature
    and direction of contraction and/or flexure of the cup or liner is
    predetermined.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14.31,  for sectionally collapsible teat cups in combination with means for
    their operation.


CLS 119/14.53
TXT Teat cups under subclass 14.47 having two separate and distinct fluid
    chambers for separately applying fluid pressures to the teats; one pressure
    being applied directly to the teat channel and the other exteriorly thereof.


CLS 119/14.54
TXT Devices under subclass 14.01 involving the structure of the coupling,
    manifold, or claw means which connects the teat cups with the pressure
    and/or milk lines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, appropriate subclasses for general
    utility pipe joints and couplings not identified as a claw or manifold for
    milking machines, especially subclasses 240+ for a nonmetal-to-metal
    coupling comprising a flexible tip pipe.


CLS 119/14.55
TXT Claws under subclass 14.54 provided with means whereby the flow of fluid
    through the device may be controlled.

    (1)     Note.  Control is merely on or off, not cyclical for milking.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14.08,  for automatic fluid control means combined with claw structure.

    14.37,  for pulsator combined with claw structure.


CLS 119/28.5
TXT BED OR REST:
    Subject matter under the class definition consisting of structure upon
    which the animal may recline or be supported when inactive.

    (1)     Note.  A bed or rest does not cover, completely enclose, or confine
    an animal although it may have sidewalls.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for a portable animal housing, carrying container, or animal
    enclosing bag.

    171+,   for absorbent material, per se, used to absorb moisture from a
    waste product and which may additionally be used as bedding material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, appropriate subclasses, for a bed intended to receive a
    reclining human body.


CLS 119/50.7
TXT EGG MARKING DEVICE:
    Subject matter under the class definition consisting of a structure for
    placing a distinguishing indication on an externally deposited ovum, i.e.,
    an egg, of an animal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45.2,   for a nesting appliance used to mark a bird egg.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    606,    Surgery, for means for marking an animal.


CLS 119/51.01
TXT FEEDING DEVICE:

    Subject matter under the class definition consisting of structure used to
    supply an animal with nourishment, i.e., a feeding device.

    (1)     Note.  While a device utilizing feed in a flowable form is found
    hereunder, a device using liquid feed with a viscosity similar to water is
    found elsewhere in this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51.5,   for a feeding device combined with a watering device.

    72+,    for a device used for providing water, or liquid feed, e.g.,
    buttermilk, etc., with a viscosity similar to water, to an animal.


CLS 119/51.02
TXT Having electronic identification and feed control:

    Subject matter under subclass 51.01 wherein the nourishment supplying
    structure includes electrical circuitry which incorporates a solid-state
    device or vacuum tube and is used to recognize the animal and regulate the
    amount of nourishment it is supplied.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    840+,   for apparatus for sorting animals based upon some feature of the
    animal.


CLS 119/51.03
TXT Solid or lick feeder:

    Subject matter under subclass 51.01 wherein the nourishment supplying
    structure presents a firm piece of food substance for the animal to consume
    by eating a portion thereof or lapping with its tongue.

    (1)     Note.  The food substance, which may include salt blocks, suet,
    vegetables, etc., may be either movably or nonmovably supported.


CLS 119/51.04
TXT For aquatic animal; e.g., a fish, etc:

    Subject matter under subclass 51.01 wherein the nourishment supplying
    structure presents a food substance to an animal which lives in the water,
    e.g., an animal of the super class Pisces, etc.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes a device which may dispense feed
    above or below the surface of the water which may be in a time release form
    which dissolves in water to release food.


CLS 119/51.11
TXT Feeding devices under subclass 51 in which the time at which an element of
    the feeding device is actuated, or the length of time of a feeding
    operation, is controlled by a timer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 650 for timer controlled dispensing of plant,
    or animal food, per se.


CLS 119/51.12
TXT Feeding devices under subclass 51.11 in which access, by an animal, to a
    feeding trough is controlled.


CLS 119/51.13
TXT Feeding devices under subclass 51.11 in which discharge of feed from plural
    sources is sequentially controlled.


CLS 119/51.14
TXT Feeding devices under subclass 51.11 in which a part of the feeder is
    biased in one direction, a latch holds the part against the bias and a trip
    for shifting the latch to releasing position is controlled, the part
    requiring relatching before the operation may be repeated.


CLS 119/51.15
TXT Feeding devices under subclass 51.14 in which the trip includes the alarm
    mechanism of an alarm clock.


CLS 119/51.5
TXT Combined devices for supplying animals with both food and water.

    (1)     Note.  For watering devices, per se, search this class, subclass
    72, and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 540+ for a conveyor system
    comprising a gravity discharge material holder feeding to a power-driven
    conveyor section; subclass 616 for a supply bin having a power-driven
    conveyor section for withdrawing material therefrom; and subclasses 657+
    for a power-driven conveyor section of the screw type, especially 671
    thereunder for means for feeding to and discharging from the screw conveyor
    (e.g., gates, apertures, etc., in the housing thereof).


CLS 119/52.1
TXT Hopper and trough:

    Subject matter under subclass 51.01 wherein the nourishment supplying
    structure consists of a receptacle used as a primary depository for the
    nourishment, i.e., a hopper, which outlets to a long, narrow, generally
    shallow, nourishment receiving receptacle, i.e., a trough, from which an
    animal may eat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74+,    for a watering device having a supply fountain used to provide
    water, or liquid feed with a viscosity similar to water, to a trough.


CLS 119/52.2
TXT Having a perch:

    Subject matter under subclass 52.1 wherein the nourishment supplying
    structure includes specific structure for supporting the entire weight of
    the animal as it eats.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57.8,   for similar structure used in an arrangement other than a hopper
    and trough type.

    72+,    and subclass 77 in particular, for a device used to provide water
    or liquid feed, e.g., sugar water, etc., with a viscosity similar to water,
    to an animal, e.g. a hummingbird feeder, etc.


CLS 119/52.3
TXT And feature for excluding undesirable animal:

    Subject matter under subclass 52.2 wherein the nourishment supplying
    structure further includes structure for preventing an unwanted animal from
    obtaining nourishment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57.9,   for similar structure used in an arrangement other than a hopper
    and trough type.


CLS 119/52.4
TXT Having selective feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 52.1 wherein the nourishment supplying
    structure includes structure which permits only animals of a desired size
    to eat or which controls the spacing or number of animals along the trough.

    (1)     Note.  Braces or partitions provided primarily for structural
    strengthening or shaping purposes are not included in this subclass.


CLS 119/53
TXT Devices comprising in addition to the combined hopper and trough a means
    for regulating the amount of feed passing from the hopper to the trough,
    said means consisting usually of a manually adjustable valve or other
    device performing the function of a flow regulator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for other devices which regulate
    the flow of grain or ground feed from a hopper.


CLS 119/53.5
TXT Combined hoppers and troughs under subclass 53 provided with means for
    causing or controlling the flow of feed from hopper to trough, operated by
    pressure from the feeding animal, generally applied through the animal's
    nose or forehead.

    (1)     Note.  For other animal-controlled feeding or watering devices, see
    this class, subclasses 54, 55, 62, 75, and 76.


CLS 119/54
TXT Combined hoppers and troughs provided with means for causing or controlling
    the flow of feed from hopper to trough operated by pressure from the
    feeding animal, generally applied through the animal's nose or forehead.

    (1)     Note.  Search this class, subclass 53.5 and 75.


CLS 119/55
TXT Combined hoppers and troughs having means whereby the weight of the feeding
    stock may control the flow of feed from hopper to trough or the uncovering
    of the trough, the essential feature lying in the fact that the stock
    seeking food controls access to it or the rate of its flow, or both, by
    stepping upon a platform or treadle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76.


CLS 119/56.1
TXT Charge delivering:

    Subject matter under subclass 52.1 wherein the nourishment supplying
    structure transfers a specific quantity of nourishment from the hopper into
    the trough or elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51.11,  for a timer controlled feeding device.


CLS 119/56.2
TXT Including horizontal transport device:

    Subject matter under subclass 56.1 wherein the nourishment supplying
    structure has a mechanism for transferring the nourishment along a path
    parallel to the horizon, i.e., horizontally.

    (1)     Note.  A feeding device in which a horizontal auger, etc.,
    functions solely as a discharge assistant for promoting the smooth flow of
    feed to an underlying trough or which includes a series of reciprocating
    paddles, etc., for moving feed back and forth over hopper discharge
    apertures, e.g., a sweep shuttle, etc., are not proper for this subclass
    absent any other horizontal transport structure for transferring a charge.


CLS 119/57
TXT The supply of feed from hopper to trough is controlled by a device
    operatively connected to the trough, which upon receiving a charge of feed
    moves said device to shut off the source of supply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81.


CLS 119/57.1
TXT Powered:

    Subject matter under subclass 52.1 wherein the nourishment supplying
    structure uses motorized structure for moving the nourishment or some
    component of the nourishment supplying structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57.92,  for a powered feeding structure used in an arrangement other than a
    hopper and trough type.


CLS 119/57.2
TXT Conveyor in a linear trough:

    Subject matter under subclass 57.1 wherein the nourishment moving motorized
    structure is used for moving the nourishment inside a straight portion of
    the trough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57.7,   for a endless belt or screw conveyor hopper attachment used to
    dispense food above a stationary trough.


CLS 119/57.3
TXT Feed recirculated to hopper:

    Subject matter under subclass 57.2 wherein the nourishment is returned to
    the hopper for reuse after passage through the trough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57.2,   for arrangements whereby feed is simply recirculated about an
    endless circuit without final deposition into a supply hopper.


CLS 119/57.4
TXT Utilizing discrete troughs:

    Subject matter under subclass 57.1 wherein the nourishment supplying
    structure uses spaced apart troughs to provide separate animal eating
    places.


CLS 119/57.5
TXT Feed dispensing hopper portion or attachment moves relative to stationary
    underlying trough:

    Subject matter under subclass 57.1 wherein the nourishment moving motorized
    structure repositions a nourishment dispersing portion of the hopper, or
    apparatus connected to the hopper, to serve various locations above a
    static trough.


CLS 119/57.6
TXT Entire hopper moved:

    Subject matter under subclass 57.5 wherein the nourishment moving motorized
    structure repositions the complete hopper to various locations along the
    static trough.


CLS 119/57.7
TXT Endless belt or screw conveyor hopper  attachment:

    Subject matter under subclass 57.5 wherein the apparatus connected to the
    hopper is a (1) band-like structure movable continuously along a path
    defined by its longitudinal axis and providing an uninterrupted surface for
    carrying the nourishment, or (2) helical auger formation which is rotated
    about its longitudinal axis to move the nourishment.

    (1)     Note.  While the nourishment carrying surface of the endless belt
    itself is uninterrupted, the inclusion of a sweep member or other mechanism
    which pushes feed from the belt surface to an underlying trough would be
    proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57.2+,  for a conveyor found in a linear  trough for moving the feed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, particularly subclasses 657+ for a screw
    conveyor, per se, and subclasses 804+ for an endless conveyor, per se.


CLS 119/57.8
TXT Having a perch:

    Subject matter under subclass 51.01 wherein the nourishment supplying
    structure includes specific structure for supporting the entire weight of
    the animal as it eats.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52.2,   for similar structure used in a hopper and trough arrangement.

    72+,    and subclass 77 in particular, for a device used to provide water
    or liquid feed, e.g., sugar water, etc., with a viscosity similar to water,
    to an animal, e.g., a hummingbird feeder, etc.


CLS 119/57.9
TXT And feature for excluding undesirable   animal:

    Subject matter under subclass 57.8 wherein the nourishment supplying
    structure further includes structure for preventing an unwanted animal from
    obtaining nourishment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52.3,   for similar structure used in a hopper and trough arrangement.


CLS 119/57.91
TXT Having feed scatterer:

    Subject matter under subclass 51.01 wherein the nourishment supplying
    structure includes apparatus for strewing the nourishment over an extended
    area, e.g., on the ground.


CLS 119/57.92
TXT Powered:

    Subject matter under subclass 51.01 wherein the nourishment supplying
    structure uses motorized structure for moving the nourishment or some
    component of the nourishment supplying structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57.1+,  for a powered feeding structure used in a hopper and trough
    arrangement.


CLS 119/58
TXT Combinations of a rack for hay or coarse fodder and a trough for receiving
    and holding concentrated feed or for supporting the fodder in the rack or
    receiving it when dislodged from the rack.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     52, and indented subclasses, and 60, for details.


CLS 119/59
TXT Combined racks and troughs having means to permit the exclusion of stock
    from the feed trough or rack, both or either, at the option of the
    attendant.


CLS 119/60
TXT Apparatus for holding the various fodder and bulky food, specially designed
    to prevent the wasting of said foods and characterized by the presence of
    open slat-work, grids, or parallel bars, for supporting or inclosing and
    preventing waste of fodder.


CLS 119/61
TXT Miscellaneous feeding devices consisting of open receptacles specially
    designed to receive and hold feed accessible to animals.  Trough guards and
    similar devices designed to prevent the fouling and wasting of feed are
    also included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for analogous devices, and 65, and indented subclasses for easily
    portable feed troughs, pails and boxes performing the function of the
    conventional "nose bag".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, for metal troughs of general application.


CLS 119/62
TXT Troughs normally closed, but adapted to be automatically opened by animals
    approaching them for the purpose of feeding.


CLS 119/63
TXT Troughs provided with means for excluding stock therefrom at the option of
    the attendant for the purpose of permitting him to place food in said
    trough without interference, of cleaning the same, or of limiting the
    quantity of food consumed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for troughs having a mere guard for preventing the fouling of food
    or for preventing the monopoly thereof by the stronger members of the
    feeding stock and which are not elsewhere placed.


CLS 119/64
TXT Devices to be applied to the manger or trough to discourage, prevent, or
    cure the habit of seizing, sucking, or biting the manger or trough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    823+,   and indented subclasses for devices applied to the head of the
    animal to prevent cribbing.


CLS 119/65
TXT Miscellaneous bags, nose bags, pails, boxes, etc., specially designed to be
    employed in feeding animals and adapted to be placed easily in position and
    removed therefrom for transportation or storage, the invention lying
    primarily in the structure of the receptacle.  Inventions residing in the
    apparatus employed in supporting the feed-bag in operative position are
    classified in one of the subclasses hereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, subclasses 154+ for a
    flaccid protective cover which is configured for and supported by the
    article it protects.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 371+ for spring wound
    reel.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclass 69, and indented subclasses for elastic
    supports of general utility.


CLS 119/66
TXT Feed-bags adapted to be supported from the head of the feeding animal by
    means of straps, halters, bridles, or other devices capable of holding said
    receptacles in operative position wherein the claimed invention includes
    the structure of the supporting means.


CLS 119/67
TXT Feed-bags provided with means for supporting them from the harness of an
    animal or some specially constructed devices secured to the animal about
    the base of the neck or body, or both, and designed so to support the
    receptacle as to allow free movement of the head of the animal with
    references to said receptacle, the invention residing in the means of
    support rather than in the construction of the feed-bag.


CLS 119/68
TXT Feed-bags provided with means for supporting them from the pole or thills
    of a vehicle, the invention residing in the supporting means rather than in
    the receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 95+ for bag supports.


CLS 119/69
TXT Feed-bags to be supported by a standard adapted to rest upon the ground.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 95+ for bag supports.


CLS 119/69.5
TXT BIRDBATH:
    Subject matter under the class definition consisting of a water holding or
    spraying structure for use by an animal taxonomically classified in the
    class Aves, i.e., a bird, to splash water on itself.

    (1)     Note.  The bird may additionally use the birdbath for a drinking
    purpose.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72+,    for an animal watering device.


CLS 119/70
TXT Devices constructed to supply feed to poultry in a manner to promote
    exercise.


CLS 119/71
TXT Devices having one or more nipples and a corresponding number of tubes
    leading to a source of liquid-food supply, designed to be employed in
    conveying liquid nourishment to the young of mammals.  These devices may be
    of comparatively large capacity, such as pails, tanks, or casks, and the
    suckling appliances suitable for young calves, colts, pigs, etc.


CLS 119/72
TXT Inventions not otherwise classifiable especially designed for supplying
    animals with drink.  This subclass and the indented subclasses also include
    those devices designed for supplying liquid-food, such as buttermilk, etc.,
    as well as structures equally adapted to use as a feeding or watering
    device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51.01+, for a feeding device used to supply nourishment to an animal
    wherein the nourishment, if in a flowable form, has viscosity
    characteristics significantly different from water.

    51.5,   for a feeding device combined with a watering device.

    69.5,   for a birdbath.


CLS 119/72.5
TXT Watering devices in which the water is delivered in drop form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 420+ for drop forming dispensers and see the
    notes thereto.


CLS 119/73
TXT Water holding devices for supplying stock involving a trough or the
    combination of a barometric fountain or other means of constant supply and
    a trough with means to prevent the freezing of the water or to regulate the
    temperature for other purposes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 601+, 605, 672+, and
    122 for compositions useful for insulating purposes.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 360, and subclasses indented under
    Water-Heaters, submerged, and Class 219, Electric Heating, subclass 523 and
    indented subclasses for tank and trough heaters, per se.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 334+ for tanks and other fluid handling
    devices with means for heating as for preventing freezing and subclass 375
    for tanks and other fluid handling provided with insulating jackets.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, and 220, Receptacles, for apparatus and methods
    relating to heat insulation.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 62 for heat insulating compositions.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet which may possess structure or be of such a composition as to
    inherently influence the loss or gain of heat; see particularly subclasses
    304.4+, 426+, 457+, and 920+ (a cross-reference art collection).


CLS 119/74
TXT Devices not otherwise classifiable specially designed to serve water to
    domestic animals, involving a trough and source of supply therefor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     for analogous structures designed to hold feed and usually
    involving those modifications incident upon the serving of solids instead
    of liquids.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 192+ for bin or
    hopper type building constructions with a material port.

    220,    Receptacles, for metallic tanks and troughs of general application.


CLS 119/75
TXT Animal-watering fountains and troughs comprising a source of supply, a
    valve or pump controlling said supply, and means operatively connected to
    said valve or pump and operable by pressure exercised by the animal,
    generally by the nose of forehead for regulating or causing the supply to
    the trough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53.5    and 54, for details.


CLS 119/76
TXT Stock-watering fountains and troughs comprising a source of supply and a
    means for controlling the source of supply adapted to be operated by the
    weight of the animal seeking water, generally applied by stepping upon a
    platform or treadle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    Appropriate subclasses indented under subclass 51 for details.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, appropriate subclasses for pumps details.  Animal treadle
    operated pumps, not in combination with a receiving trough for the pumped
    fluid, are classified in Class 417.


CLS 119/77
TXT Stock-watering fountains and troughs comprising a barometric fountain so
    related to the trough as to afford a constant supply of water to said
    trough at a fixed level.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 380 for heating vessels having liquid
    supply means.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 453+ for barometric level maintaining
    systems in general.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 353, 437, 457, 479, and especially
    subclasses 585+ for barometric inkwells.


CLS 119/78
TXT Combined fountains and troughs wherein the supply to the trough is
    controlled by a float valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 380 for heating vessels having liquid
    supply means.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 409+ for fountains and troughs
    automatically controlled by a float where the means for control usually
    consists of an inlet valve so related to a float that the level of the
    liquid supplied is maintained at a predetermined point.


CLS 119/79
TXT Fountains and troughs wherein a float-operated, hinged, flap, or
    oscillating valve controls the supply conduit.


CLS 119/80
TXT Fountains and troughs having a float-operated reciprocating valve
    controlling the source of supply.


CLS 119/81
TXT Fountains and troughs having depressible water receptacles connected to a
    water-supply valve, so as to hold it open when in its uppermost position.
    The weight of the water in the receptacle causes the trough to move and
    close the supply valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 386+ for tanks combined with automatic
    devices for maintaining a liquid level.


CLS 119/161
TXT WASTE TOILET OR RELATED DEVICE:
    Subject matter under the class definition consisting of a receiver for
    collecting an animal waste product, i.e., excrement or urine, or structure
    associated with such a use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171+,   for moisture absorbing material, per se, which may be disclosed for
    use in a waste toilet.

    867+,   for a manure pouch used to receive animal excrement or urine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, appropriate subclasses for a
    waste toilet suitable for use only by a human, i.e., without any animal
    accommodating feature.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, particularly subclasses
    1.3+ for a sanitary handler for pet droppings.


CLS 119/162
TXT Mounted above or within existing human commode:
    Subject matter under subclass 161 consisting of structure supported over or
    inside a waste toilet normally used by a human being.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, appropriate subclasses for a
    waste toilet intended for use by a human, i.e., without any animal
    accommodating feature.


CLS 119/163
TXT Activated by presence of animal:
    Subject matter under subclass 161 having an operating mechanism actuated in
    response to the animal approaching, using, or leaving the waste product
    collecting receiver or associated structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159,    for a washing or spraying device, respectively, used for antivermin
    treatment which may additionally be actuated by the presence of an animal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, particularly subclasses 302+
    and 313 for means to cause a toilet flushing device to operate
    automatically when a condition occurs.


CLS 119/164
TXT Underlying belt type:
    Subject matter under subclass 163 wherein the actuated mechanism is a
    flexible, relatively continuous band of material or fabric positioned
    beneath the animal and used to help remove the animal waste product.

    (1)     Note.  A belt may be formed from an uninterrupted length of
    material, a series of spaced bars, plates, or other transversely disposed
    members which, as a whole, are capable of supporting and removing an animal
    waste product.  It may be an endless loop of material or a web of material
    feeding from a supply reel or source to a collection reel, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, particularly subclasses 810.1+ for a
    condition responsive, power-driven, endless conveyor.


CLS 119/165
TXT Walled receptacle; e.g., litter box, etc., containing moisture absorbent
    material:Subject matter under subclass 161 wherein the waste product
    collecting receiver is configured to have bottom structure surrounded by
    upstanding side structure and to hold a substance which will soak up, i.e.,
    absorb liquid present in the waste product collected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171+,   for material, per se, used to absorb moisture present in a waste
    product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, particularly subclass 204 for a
    container including means for removing water, or water vapor, from the
    atmosphere within the container or the surface of container content.


CLS 119/166
TXT Having means for separating waste from absorbent material:
    Subject matter under subclass 165 including structure which may be used to
    isolate the waste product from the liquid absorbing substance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169,    for a walled receptacle having a moisture absorbing pad and often
    including a protective screen or grid placed above the pad to protect it
    from scratching by the animal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, particularly
    subclasses 233+ for a sifting device, per se, and subclasses 417+ for a
    manually supported sifter.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, particularly subclasses
    1.3+ for a sanitary handler for pet droppings.


CLS 119/167
TXT Flaccid, liner-type separator:
    Subject matter under subclass 166 wherein the waste product isolating
    structure is a thin, limp sheet or screen which extends upwardly along both
    an interior bottom and side surface of the waste product collecting
    receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170,    for a walled receptacle having a flaccid liner used to contain both
    waste and absorbent material.


CLS 119/168
TXT Having foldable or pivotable portion:
    Subject matter under subclass 165 wherein the waste product collecting
    receiver includes a part thereof which is shaped by bending it beyond its
    elastic limit along a line to form a permanent crease or is otherwise
    rotated about an axial region.

    (1)     Note.  The folding or pivoting feature must be more than just a
    lid, cover, separator, or flaccid liner pivotably mounted on or in the
    receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, particularly subclasses
    100+ for a paperboard box of general utility.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, particularly subclasses 162+ for the manufacture of a
    container by folding.


CLS 119/169
TXT Pad-type absorbent material:
    Subject matter under subclass 165 wherein the liquid absorbing substance is
    a sheet-like mat.

    (1)     Note.  A pad made from a sheet of fabric, newspaper, etc., is
    proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166+,   for a walled receptacle having a foraminous separator for sifting a
    waste product from litter.

    170,    for a walled receptacle having a flaccid, impervious sheet used as
    a liner.


CLS 119/170
TXT Having flaccid liner:
    Subject matter under subclass 165 including a thin, limp, moisture
    impervious sheet which extends upwardly along both an interior bottom and
    side surface of the waste product collecting receiver for holding both the
    liquid absorbing substance and the waste product.

    (1)     Note.  A flaccid liner is often used to protect the walled
    receptacle and permit easy disposal of both the waste and absorbent
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    for a flaccid, liner-type separator used to isolate the waste
    product from the absorbent material.


CLS 119/171
TXT MATERIAL FOR ABSORBING MOISTURE FROM WASTE PRODUCT:
    Subject matter under the class definition consisting of a substance which
    is used to soak up, i.e., absorb, liquid present in animal excrement or
    urine.

    (1)     Note.  The absorbent material, while usually in the form of small
    granular, formed, or cut pieces of matter, may also be in other forms,
    e.g., a pad, etc.

    (2)     Note.  The absorbent material may additionally be used as bedding
    for an animal in some circumstances, e.g., in a stall, etc., in order to
    improve sanitary conditions, reduce odors, or provide comfort for lying
    animals.

    (3)     Note.  A U.S. patent having a claimed disclosure to a type of
    absorbent material specifically provided for hereunder, i.e., paper related
    or clay component type, has been placed in the appropriate indented
    subclass as an original classification and cross referenced back to this
    outdent subclass when another embodiment is also disclosed or claimed,
    e.g., absorbent material containing alfalfa, peanut hulls, diatomaceous
    earth, wood shavings, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    for an animal confining or housing device which may include
    absorbent material spread over a bottom portion thereof.

    28.5,   for an animal bed or rest which may include absorbent material
    spread over a bottom portion thereof.

    45+,    for a nest or nest appliance in which a fowl may lay an egg.

    165,    for a walled receptacle which contains a material used to absorb
    liquid present in an animal waste product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, particularly
    subclass 76.6 for a deodorizing composition for fecal material, urine, pet
    litter, etc.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, particularly subclasses 400+ for a solid sorbent composition in
    general.


CLS 119/172
TXT Having paper-related component:
    Subject matter under subclass 171 wherein the liquid absorbing substance
    includes cellulose which is initially in the form of a thin, matted,
    fibrous sheet, i.e., paper, or is created from a pulp, sludge, or slurry
    associated therewith.

    (1)     Note.  Wood or cellulose particles, per se, are not proper for this
    subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Subsequently, the paper related component may be made into
    pellets, granules, cut strips, etc.


CLS 119/173
TXT Having clay component:
    Subject matter under subclass 171 wherein the liquid absorbing substance
    includes a naturally occurring, fine grained, earthy, hydrated aluminum
    silicate containing composition, i.e., clay.

    (1)     Note.  Absorbent material in which clay serves only as a binder for
    the particles or is otherwise present in only minute quantities is excluded
    from this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The term "clay" includes materials commonly known as
    attapulgite, bentonite, fuller's earth, halloysite, illite, kaolinite,
    montmorillonite, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172,    for absorbent material wherein paper or a derivative thereof is
    present along with clay.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, particularly subclasses 80+ for a clay composition having
    sorbent characteristics and subclasses 400+ for a solid sorbent composition
    in general.


CLS 119/174
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:
    Subject matter under the class definition and not provided for in any of
    the above subclasses.


CLS 119/200
TXT AQUATIC ANIMAL CULTURING:
    Subject matter under the class definition relating to the propagation and
    care of one or more water living animals.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes marine mammals, such as the whale,
    etc., which normally reside in water.


CLS 119/201
TXT Handling and transportation:
    Subject matter under subclass 200 including the preparation of and
    apparatus for sustaining one or more living aquatic animals during
    transfer, shipment, and temporary storage.


CLS 119/202
TXT Including vehicle:
    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the apparatus for transport
    includes a vehicle such as a ship or truck which has a portion in which the
    animals are held while transported.


CLS 119/203
TXT Fish transportation:
    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the aquatic animals transported
    are fish (e.g., an animal of the super class Pisces).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 54.1+ for
    receptacle for use in fishing for holding catch, bait, etc.


CLS 119/204
TXT Crustacean culturing:
    Subject matter under subclass 200 relating to the care and propagation of
    lobster, shrimp, or other aquatic arthropods that have a chitinous or
    calcareous exoskeleton.


CLS 119/205
TXT Mating, spawning, and hatching:
    Subject matter under subclass 204 including methods and apparatus relating
    to crustacean egg fertilization, incubation, and emergent larva cultivation.


CLS 119/206
TXT With separating means:
    Subject matter under subclass 205 including means for removing one or more
    crustacea from a community thereof for further culturing or use thereof.


CLS 119/207
TXT Habitat:
    Subject matter under subclass 204 including method or apparatus for housing
    and cultivating crustacea.


CLS 119/208
TXT Offshore:
    Subject matter under subclass 207 for particular use in a natural marine
    environment.


CLS 119/209
TXT Individual habitat:
    Subject matter under subclass 207 wherein there are provided separate
    compartments each sized to house a single crustacean.


CLS 119/210
TXT With feeding:
    Subject matter under subclass 209 including apparatus for providing a
    supply of food to each compartment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51.01+, for animal-feeding device and especially subclass 51.04 for a
    device for feeding an aquatic animal.


CLS 119/211
TXT Habitat with recirculation and filter means:
    Subject matter under subclass 207 including means for housing and
    cultivating crustacea which means include a water containment structure
    which further includes means to cause recirculation of the contained water
    while removing contaminants therefrom as it passes through separating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclass 169 for filter meant for aquarium installation.


CLS 119/212
TXT Feeding method:
    Subject matter under subclass 204 relating to a process for providing
    nutrients to crustacea.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51.01+, for an animal-feeding device and especially subclass 51.04 for a
    device for feeding an aquatic animal.

    230,    for a fish-feeding method.

    242,    for a mollusk-feeding method.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclass 2 for a method of feeding a live animal.


CLS 119/213
TXT Separation or harvest:
    Subject matter under subclass 204 including apparatus for removing one or
    more crustacean from a community thereof for further use including
    collection for human food purposes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, particularly subclasses
    4+ for hooking or gathering "fish" and 100+ for a trap used to catch "fish"
    (as defined "fish" includes crustacea).


CLS 119/214
TXT Preserving or storing:
    Subject matter under subclass 204 directed to maintaining crustacean life
    during a period it is kept under conditions for future use such as for
    consumption or sale.

    (1)     Note.  The conditions under which the crustacean is kept may
    include deprivation of food or providing less space which affects oxygen
    requirements, for example.


CLS 119/215
TXT Fish culturing:
    Subject matter under the subclass 200 relating to the care and propagation
    of fish (e.g., an animal of the super class Pisces).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 300 for an animal
    marker.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclass 4 for a fishing method and apparatus and subclasses 7+
    for a net.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 81 for fishway for
    passing obstruction in stream.

    606,    Surgery, subclass 117 for means for applying an animal (i.e., fish)
    identification device (i.e., tag).


CLS 119/216
TXT Live fish sorting or grading:
    Subject matter under subclass 215 including apparatus for separating live
    fish according to size.


CLS 119/217
TXT Spawning, hatching, and early development:
    Subject matter under subclass 215 including method or apparatus relating to
    fish egg fertilization, incubation, and emergent fry culturing.


CLS 119/218
TXT Fish incubator or hatching tray:
    Subject matter under subclass 217 including apparatus by which fish eggs
    are hatched artificially under controlled environmental conditions.


CLS 119/219
TXT Fish diverter or barrier:
    Subject matter under subclass 215 including means to prevent or control the
    movement of fish past or through certain objects or locations.


CLS 119/220
TXT Electric type:
    Subject matter under subclass 219 wherein electricity is used, for example,
    to produce pulses in water sensed by fish to control their movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 17.1 for an
    apparatus for applying an electric current to fish or water to lure or
    drive them.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 106+
    for an electrical pulse producing system.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 852 for an underwater
    electrical communication conductor.


CLS 119/221
TXT Artificial reef or habitat:
    Subject matter under subclass 215 including a device usually positioned on
    the sea bottom or in man-made bodies of water to facilitate fish-gathering
    and culturing thereon.


CLS 119/222
TXT With tire component:
    Subject matter under subclass 221 wherein at least a portion of the habitat
    is constructed from one or more discarded rubberlike vehicle supporting
    members.


CLS 119/223
TXT Floating fish rearing assembly:
    Subject matter under subclass 215 including means for buoyantly supporting
    within or on the water a habitat for housing and cultivating fish.

    (1)     Note.  The assembly does not have to float at the water surface but
    may be all or partly submerged.


CLS 119/224
TXT Tank array:
    Subject matter under subclass 215 including a plurality of interconnected
    or cooperatively arranged water containment structures for housing fish.


CLS 119/225
TXT Sequential or stepwise tank array:
    Subject matter under subclass 224 wherein the tanks are connected such that
    water serially flows therethrough.

    (1)     Note.  The water flow direction may have vertical or horizontal
    components.


CLS 119/226
TXT Fish enclosure - recirculating type:
    Subject matter under subclass 215 including a water containment structure
    for sustaining fish and having means for removing a portion of the water
    and returning it to the containment structure after treatment to improve
    its life sustaining properties.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 416.2 for a filter with
    a cooperating pump adapted for use in an aquarium.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 4.12+ for a sectional tank for fluid.


CLS 119/227
TXT With biological filter:
    Subject matter under subclass 226 wherein the recirculated water is treated
    by a passthrough apparatus in which living organisms are utilized for water
    treatment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    260,    for a biological-type aquarium filter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 601+ for water
    treatment by a living organism.


CLS 119/228
TXT Fish enclosure - nonrecirculating type:
    Subject matter under subclass 215 including a water containment structure
    for sustaining fish life and absent any removal and return of treated water
    into such structure.


CLS 119/229
TXT With heat exchanger:
    Subject matter under subclass 228 including apparatus to affect the
    temperature of the water contained in the fish enclosure by heat transfer
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262,    for an aquarium with a heat exchanger.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    392,    Electric Resistance Heating Devices, subclass 441, for a tank-type
    liquid heater, and subclass 458 for a heating device located outside the
    tank and in heat exchange relation to the liquid to be heated.


CLS 119/230
TXT Feeding method:
    Subject matter under subclass 215 relating to a process for the nourishment
    of fish.

    (1)     Note.  A method for food manufacturing (i.e., algae cultivating) is
    included herein if the food is available for nourishment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51.01+, for an animal-feeding device, especially subclass 51.04 for a
    device for feeding an aquatic animal.

    212,    for a crustacea-feeding method.

    242,    for a mollusk-feeding method.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    426,    Food or Edible Material: Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclass 2 for a method of feeding a live animal.


CLS 119/231
TXT Water treatment composition:
    Subject matter under subclass 215 comprising chemical treatment including
    additives or other means to affect the life sustaining properties of the
    fish containing aqueous medium.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are "artificial seawater compositions."


CLS 119/232
TXT Cleaning-sweeper or mechanical agitator:
    Subject matter under subclass 215 including apparatus utilizing pressurized
    water circulation to aid in removing fish tank sediment or apparatus to
    mechanically cause suspension of such sediment to aid in its removal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclass 22.18 for pressurized fluid or fluid manipulation, and
    subclass 24 for utilization of a nozzle when treating an interior surface.


CLS 119/233
TXT Cover, light or ray affecting:
    Subject matter under subclass 215 including means to selectively intercept
    visible light and other radiation impinging upon the water surface of a
    fish pond or tank.


CLS 119/234
TXT Mollusk culturing:
    Subject matter under subclass 200 relating to the propagation and care of
    oyster, clam, or other aquatic animals with a soft unsegmented body
    enclosed in a calcareous shell.


CLS 119/235
TXT Reclaiming oyster ground:
    Subject matter under subclass 234 related to the treating of tideland to
    remove infestation of starfish, burrowing shrimp, drills, and other vermin
    and to improve it for oyster cultivating.


CLS 119/236
TXT Spawning, hatching, and larval development:
    Subject matter under subclass 234 relating to mollusk egg production and
    fertilization and the early culturing of the hatched organism.


CLS 119/237
TXT Spat collector (cultch):
    Subject matter under subclass 236 wherein the larvae do not attach to
    objects (cultch) but are nonetheless successfully sustained and grown
    without them.


CLS 119/238
TXT Offshore habitat:
    Subject matter under subclass 234 including method and apparatus for
    promoting the larvae, especially of the oyster, to "set" or attach itself
    to a surface suitable for further growing.


CLS 119/239
TXT Flotation type:
    Subject matter under subclass 234 including method and apparatus for
    housing and cultivating mollusk in a natural marine environment.


CLS 119/240
TXT Multiple container assembly:
    Subject matter under subclass 239 wherein means are provided to supply
    positive buoyancy to at least a portion of the habitat.

    (1)     Note.  The habitat does not have to float at the water surface but
    may be all or partly submerged.


CLS 119/241
TXT Cultchless cultivation:
    Subject matter under subclass 239 wherein the habitat comprises a plurality
    of cooperating individual containment structures.


CLS 119/242
TXT Feeding method:
    Subject matter under subclass 234 relating to a process for the nourishment
    of mollusk.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51.01+, for an animal-feeding device, especially subclass 51.04 for a
    device for feeding an aquatic animal.

    212,    for a crustacea-feeding method.

    230,    for a fish-feeding method.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclass 2 for a method of feeding a live animal.


CLS 119/243
TXT Purification:
    Subject matter under subclass 234 relating to the depuration of tainted
    mollusk.


CLS 119/244
TXT Pearl production:
    Subject matter under subclass 234 relating to the utilization of the
    necre-secreting cells within a pearl-producing mollusk.


CLS 119/245
TXT Aquarium:
    Subject matter under subclass 200 relating to a water containing tank or
    vessel which ordinarily houses aquatic animals and which has one or more
    transparent portions so that the inhabitants thereof can be observed from
    the exterior.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes aquarium equipment and accessories
    not elsewhere provided for.

    (2)     Note.  In certain instances, the aquarium may be partially or fully
    emptied and used to house small land animals, for example.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 7+ for a
    fishing net.

    137,    Fluid Handling, appropriate subclasses, and especially subclass 386
    for a liquid level responsive or maintaining system.


CLS 119/246
TXT Aquarium combination (e.g., aquarium-terrarium, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 245 wherein there is in cooperation with
    aquarium structure additional structure directed to the housing and display
    of other life, such as plant, insect, or land animal life.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, appropriate subclasses.


CLS 119/247
TXT Combined:
    Aquariums under the subclass 245 claimed in combination with subject matter
    not provided for in this class and which perform a function other than to
    perfect means that are provided for in the class, for example, aquariums
    combined with lamps or articles of furniture are proper for this subclass.


CLS 119/248
TXT Multicompartment:
    Subject matter under subclass 245 wherein the aquarium consists of a tank
    or vessel which is divided by structural means into two or more separate
    spaces.

    (1)     Note.  The tank may include both animal habitat spaces as well as
    other integral spaces for components such as a filter.


CLS 119/249
TXT Supported water column:
    Subject matter under subclass 245 wherein atmospheric air pressure is
    utilized to support a portion of the aquarium water media above the
    ordinary atmospheric exposed water surface of an aquarium.


CLS 119/250
TXT For joining aquariums:
    Subject matter under subclass 249 wherein a water column provides a bridge
    between at least two separate aquariums.


CLS 119/251
TXT Tank within tank:
    Subject matter under subclass 245 including an enclosure for water which is
    adapted to be at least partially submerged in cooperative relationship
    inside another such enclosure such as a larger aquarium.


CLS 119/252
TXT Breeder type:
    Subject matter under subclass 251 including structure for allowing the
    escape of live babies from a fish giving birth in the innermost submerged
    tank.


CLS 119/253
TXT Ornamental:
    Subject matter under subclass 245 including aquarium apparatus and
    structure of the kind to embellish or adorn the basic visual attractiveness
    of the aquarium.

    (1)     Note.  Ornamental features include, among others, aquarium shape,
    underwater decoration, toys, aesthetic use of a water or aeration device,
    and aesthetically improved fish viewing apparatus.

    (2)     Note.  Certain structures which conceal aquarium life support
    elements may be considered as visually enhancing and are included herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 15+ for three dimension imitation or "treated"
    natural product.


CLS 119/254
TXT Air operated:
    Subject matter under subclass 253 including ornamental means which utilize
    pressurized gas to produce a visual effect such as a bubble driven ornament
    or device.


CLS 119/255
TXT Liquid display:
    Subject matter under subclass 253 including ornamental means which utilize
    water beyond that ordinarily contained in the aquarium to produce a visual
    effect such as a waterfall.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 406+ for a display
    device with gas or liquid movement.


CLS 119/256
TXT Submerged display:
    Subject matter under subclass 253 wherein the ornamental structural feature
    is situated and viewed underwater while contained in the aquarium.


CLS 119/257
TXT Wall-type aquarium:
    Subject matter under subclass 253 wherein the aquarium is structured to be
    mounted on or in a side or inner portion of a building or other such
    vertical structure.


CLS 119/258
TXT Employing mirror:
    Subject matter under subclass 253 wherein one or more reflective surfaces
    are utilized to enhance the visual appearance of the aquarium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    838+ for mirror structure.


CLS 119/259
TXT Filter:
    Subject matter under subclass 245 including means cooperating with the
    aquarium structure to cause recirculation of the contained water while
    removing contaminants therefrom as it passes through a media holding device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclass 169 for a filter meant for aquarium installation.


CLS 119/260
TXT Biological type:
    Subject matter under subclass 259 wherein the filtering system contains
    organisms which process wastes to decontaminate the circulated water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227,    for a fish enclosure of the recirculating water type using a
    biological filter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 601+ for water
    treatment by a living organism.


CLS 119/261
TXT With aerator:
    Subject matter under subclass 259 including means to provide oxygen
    enrichment to water in the aquarium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263,    for an aquarium aerator, per se.


CLS 119/262
TXT And heat exchanger:
    Subject matter under subclass 261 including means to raise or lower the
    aquarium water temperature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229,    for a fish enclosure with a heat exchanger.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 523 for a housing, casing, or support
    means for a resistance heater unit insertable into a material or space to
    be heated (e.g., immersion type).

    392,    Electric Resistance Heating Devices, subclass 441 for a tank-type
    liquid heater and subclass 458 for a heating device located outside a tank
    in heat exchange relation to a liquid to be heated.


CLS 119/263
TXT Aerator:
    Subject matter under subclass 245 including apparatus providing oxygen
    enrichment to water in the aquarium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261,    for an aquarium aerator and filter combination.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, especially subclasses 194+
    for electrolytic water treatment apparatus.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, especially subclasses 742+ for electrolytic
    treatment of water, sewage, or other waste water.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 122.1+ for a submerged screen through which a gas
    passes into liquid contained in a receptacle.


CLS 119/264
TXT Aquarium cleaning (nonfilter type):
    Subject matter under subclass 245 including apparatus for removing
    contaminants from the aquarium environment without utilizing a water filter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 105+ for combined tools and subclasses 244.1+ for a
    sponge-type tool.


CLS 119/265
TXT Cover:
    Subject matter under subclass 245 including a device extending over an air
    exposed opening of an aquarium to exclude dust or prevent the escape of an
    inhabitant therefrom.


CLS 119/266
TXT With light:
    Subject matter under subclass 265 including an illumination device in
    connection with the cover.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 217+ for an elongated source light unit or
    support.


CLS 119/267
TXT Aquarium illumination:
    Subject matter under subclass 245 including means cooperating with the
    aquarium structure to provide enhanced interior lighting thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclass 101 for a light source combined with a
    receptacle for holding a liquid.


CLS 119/268
TXT Chemical treatment:
    Subject matter under subclass 245 wherein selective chemical substances are
    utilized to alter certain properties of the aquarium water and environment.


CLS 119/269
TXT Aquarium structural elements and assembly:
    Subject matter under subclass 245 including aquarium structure such as
    floor, wall, and sealing means necessary to permanently contain the water
    environment therein and apparatus or a method of associating such elements.

    (1)     Note.  A patent is placed as an original in this subclass if it
    claims structural details of the containment structure (i.e., a mere
    nominal recitation of a floor or wall etc., is insufficient to place a
    patent here).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 4.12+
    for a tank for fluid.


CLS 119/270
TXT SILKWORM CULTURE:
    Subject matter under the class definition related to the care and
    propagation of the "worm" and other forms of those moths whose larvae
    produce silk.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6.5,    for subject matter related to the propagation, care, or observation
    of an insect or an insect larva other than a silkworm.

    6.7,    for subject matter related to the propagation or care of a worm,
    e.g., belonging to the phyla Annelida, Nematoda, etc.


CLS 119/300
TXT METHOD OF INCUBATION OR BROODING:

    Process under the class definition disclosing poultry incubation or
    brooding, including moisture supply, ventilation and temperature regulation
    to provide optimum conditions inside the chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302+,   for apparatus for a brooder.

    311+,   for apparatus for incubation.


CLS 119/301
TXT DUAL PURPOSE BROODER

    Devices under the class definition capable of
    (1) performing the functions of a brooder and incubator simultaneously, the
    combination involving a separate chamber for each function, both warmed
    from the same source of heat,(2) converting from an incubator to a brooder
    or visa versa, or (3) performing another function not related to animal
    husbandry, such as seedling propagation, concurrent with its brooding or
    incubating function.

    (1)     Note. The brooder is distinguishable from the incubator in that the
    brooder provides a hover or canopy for the chicks protection, while the
    incubator is merely designed to receive the newly hatched chicks pending
    their removal to the brooder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302+,   for apparatus for a brooder.

    311+,   for apparatus for incubation.


CLS 119/302
TXT BROODER:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a small, warmed chick
    housing chamber, provided with a hover, hover chamber, or canopy to perform
    the function of a mother fowl in providing shelter and warmth to the chicks.

    (1)     Note. For original classification of a patent in this and indented
    subclasses, there must be claimed some structure, in addition to a heating
    or ventilation system, which particularizes the device for the confinement
    or protection of the chicks. Merely calling a device a brooder is
    insufficient disclosure for placement in this subclass.  Examples of
    particularizing structures are attraction lights, dropping boards, and
    spacers, or other antismothering devices.

    (2)     Note. The hover structure is a component within the brooder chamber
    constructed of a flexible material, usually feathers. The hover is designed
    to lie in close proximity to the chicks, so that in brushing against their
    backs, it provides not only warmth but a sense of security.

    (3)     Note. A hover chamber is a smaller compartment containing a hover
    structure as defined above which is enclosed within and distinct from the
    brooder chamber.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301,    for a brooder combined with an incubator.

    437+,   for housing structure lacking a hover, hover chamber, or canopy
    structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, particularly subclass 385.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 2+ and 6
    for an environmental regulation device for an incubator or brooder.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 3+ and 14+ for a heating system for use
    in a brooder or incubator.


CLS 119/303
TXT Warmed by water (i.e., radiator or boiler):

    Brooder under subclass 302 with a fuel consuming heating system consisting
    of a series of coils or pipes through which a fluid medium (e.g., hot water
    or steam) circulates to warm the chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304+,   for a brooder warmed by air.

    308+,   for a brooder warmed by an electrical component.

    310,    for a brooder warmed by a fireless means.

    312+,   for a water warmed incubator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 4 and 15 for a heating system for use
    in a brooder or incubator.


CLS 119/304
TXT Warmed by directed air:

    Brooder under subclass 302 provided with a fuel consuming heating system
    which warms the incoming air and directs it, by means of conduits, fans,
    etc., throughout the brooder chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    303 ,   for a brooder warmed by water.

    308+,   for a brooder warmed by an electrical component.

    310,    for a brooder warmed by a fireless means.

    315+,   for a air warmed incubator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 58+ for air heating system.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 3 and 14+ for a heating system for use
    in a brooder or an incubator.


CLS 119/305
TXT Having a central heater:

    Brooder under subclass 304 having a primary heating system located in the
    center of the chick chamber to warm the surrounding air.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315+,   for an air warmed incubator with a central heating source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 3 and 14 for a heating system for use
    in a brooder or an incubator.


CLS 119/306
TXT With environmental control means:

    Brooder under subclass 305 including a sensing means, such as a thermostat,
    which is responsive to environmental changes within the brooder and in
    detecting a change will make adjustments to maintain optimum conditions
    within the chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    314,    317 and 319, for an environmental control device used in an
    incubator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 3+, and 14+ for a heating system for
    use in a brooder or an incubator.


CLS 119/307
TXT With canopy to distribute warmth:

    Brooder under subclass 305 including shielding structure within the
    chamber, generally constructed of rigid material and attached to the
    ceiling, which is intended to lie in close proximity to the chicks and
    whose primary functions include even distribution of heat over the chicks
    and prevention of drafts.

    (1)     Note. While the canopy is intended to lie in close proximity to the
    chicks, it should not brush against their backs as a hover does.


CLS 119/308
TXT Warmed by electrical component:

    Brooder under subclass 302 which uses heat generated by an electricity
    conducting device, such as a heating coil, to warm the chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    318+,   for an incubator heated by an electrical component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclasses for electric heating
    systems and electric heaters.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, appropriate subclasses for electrical
    resistors, per se.


CLS 119/309
TXT Incandescent lamp:

    Brooder under subclass 308 wherein the heat generated is from a filament
    enclosed in a sealed transparent envelope.


CLS 119/310
TXT Warmed by fireless heater:

    Brooders under subclass 302 so constructed that the temperature is
    maintained in the brood chamber by (1) conserving warmth from a previous
    heating or (2) by utilizing the heat resulting from organic fermentation or
    any other heating process not due to the combustion of fuel.

    (1)     Note. If the patent provides no specific manner of heating, or only
    insulating material combined with a canopy or hover, it should be placed in
    subclass 302.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    437+,   for housing structure lacking a hover, hover chamber, or canopy
    structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 601+, 605, 672+, and
    122 for heat insulating plastic or coating compositions.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 273.5 and 375 for casings showing
    heat insulation.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, for casings showing heat insulation.

    220,    Receptacles, for casings showing heat insulation.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 62 for other heat insulating compositions.


    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet, and especially subclasses 304.4+ for a composite product in which at
    least one component is either porous or cellular (generally useful for
    insulation); and cross-reference art collection 920 for a similar product
    having heat insulating features.

    501,    Compositions: Ceramic, subclasses 80+ for heat insulating ceramic
    compositions.


CLS 119/311
TXT INCUBATOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition specifically designed to hatch
    fowls from eggs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302+,   for housing structure not specifically designed to hatch fowls from
    eggs and having a hover, hover chamber, or canopy structure.

    437+,   for housing structure not specially designed to hatch fowls from
    eggs and lacking a hover, hover chamber, or canopy structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 113 and 508 for combined heaters
    and air moisteners, subclass 293 for manually operated combined dampers and
    ventilators.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, for ventilation of
    heaters of general application, and for ventilators indivisibly related to
    temperature regulation and which are employed to perform the double
    function of regulating the temperature of the egg chamber and the amount of
    fresh air admitted thereto, and for thermostatic devices for regulating
    temperature.


    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, for the general art of air
    moistening.


    454,    Ventilation, for the generic art of ventilation.


CLS 119/312
TXT Warmed by water:

    Brooder under subclass 311 with a fuel consuming heating system consisting
    of a series of coils or pipes through which a fluid medium (e.g., hot water
    or steam) circulates to warm the chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    303 ,   for a brooder warmed by water.

    315+,   for an incubator warmed by air.

    318+,   for an incubator warmed by an electrical component.

    320+,   for an incubator warmed by fireless means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 4 and 14+ for a heating system for use
    in a brooder or incubator.


CLS 119/313
TXT Having a lateral heater:

    Brooder under subclass 312 having a primary heating system located to one
    side of the egg chamber to warm the surrounding air.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 3+ and subclasses 14+ for a heating
    system for use in a brooder or an incubator.


CLS 119/314
TXT With environmental control means:

    Incubator under subclass 313 including a sensing means, such as a
    thermostat, which is responsive to environmental changes within the brooder
    and in detecting a change will make adjustments to maintain optimum
    conditions within the chamber

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306,    for a brooder with an environmental regulation means.

    317,    for a warm air-heated incubator with an environmental regulation
    means.

    319,    for an electrically heated incubator with an environmental control
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 3+ and subclass 15 for a heating
    system, a brooder, or an incubator.


CLS 119/315
TXT Warmed by directed air:

    Brooder under subclass 311 provided with a fuel consuming heating system
    which warms the incoming air and directs it, by means of conduits, fans,
    etc., throughout the brooder chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304+,   for a brooder warmed by directed air.

    312+,   for an incubator warmed by water.

    318+,   for an incubator warmed by an electrical component.

    320+,   for an incubator warmed by a fireless means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 58+ for air heating system.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 3+ and subclasses 14+ for a heating
    system for use in a brooder or an incubator.


CLS 119/316
TXT Having a lateral heater:

    Brooder under subclass 315 having a primary heating system located to one
    side of the egg chamber to warm the surrounding air.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 3+ and subclasses 14+ for a heating
    system for use in a brooder or an incubator.


CLS 119/317
TXT With environmental control means:

    Incubator under subclass 316 including a sensing means, such as a
    thermostat, which is responsive to environmental changes within the brooder
    and in detecting a change will make adjustments to maintain optimum
    conditions within the chamber

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306,    for a brooder with an environmental control.

    314,    for a warm water heated incubator with an environmental control.

    319,    for an electrically heated incubator with an environmental control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 3+ and subclasses 14+ for automatic
    controls for heating systems in a brooder or incubator.


CLS 119/318
TXT Warmed by electrical component:

    Incubator under subclass 311 which uses heat generated by an electricity
    conducting device, such as a heating coil, to warm the chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    308+,   for a brooder heated by an electrical component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclasses for electric heating
    systems and electric heaters.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, appropriate subclasses for electrical
    resistors, per se.


CLS 119/319
TXT With environmental control means:

    Incubator under subclass 318 including a sensing means, such as a
    thermostat, which is responsive to environmental changes within the brooder
    and in detecting a change will make adjustments to maintain optimum
    conditions within the chamber

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306,    for a brooder with an environmental control.

    314,    for a warm water heated incubator with an environmental control.

    319,    for an electrically heated incubator with an environmental control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 3+ and 14+ for automatic controls for
    heating systems in brooders or incubators.


CLS 119/320
TXT Warmed by fireless heater:

    Brooders under subclass 311 so constructed that the temperature is
    maintained in the brood chamber by (1) conserving warmth from a previous
    heating or (2) utilizing the heat resulting from organic fermentation or
    any other heating process not due to the combustion of fuel.

    (1)     Note.  If the patent provides no specific manner of heating or only
    insulating material, it should be placed in subclass 311.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions: Coating or Plastic, subclasses 601+, 605, 672+, and
    122 for heat insulating plastic or coating compositions.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 273.5 and 375 for casings showing
    heat insulation.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, for casings showing heat insulation.

    220,    Receptacles, for casings showing heat insulation.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 62 for other heat insulating compositions.


    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet, and especially subclasses 304.4+ for a composite product in which at
    least one component is either porous or cellular (generally useful for
    insulation); and cross-reference art collection 920 for a similar product
    having heat insulating features.

    501,    Compositions: Ceramic, subclasses 80+ for heat insulating ceramic
    compositions.


CLS 119/321
TXT Having egg contacting means:

    Incubators under subclass 320 having a device to convey heat to the eggs by
    physical contact with a warm body other than air.


CLS 119/322
TXT Egg tray:

    Incubator egg trays designed to be used for supporting eggs in an incubator
    during the period of incubation and turning them for the purpose of
    presenting a fresh supply of egg food to the growing chick.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 510+ for
    egg testers combined with assorting means.

    356,    Optics: Measuring and Testing, subclass 61 for egg trays used to
    support eggs in a candling operation.


CLS 119/323
TXT Having an egg turner:

    Egg trays under subclass 322 designed to turn the eggs during the period of
    incubation to present a fresh supply of nutrients to the growing embryo.

    (1)     Note. Excluded from this subclass are egg trays supported entirely
    by a handling system which merely transports an egg or group of eggs to or
    from the incubator rather than turning them for the purpose of supplying
    nutrients to the chick.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages: Apparatus, subclass 242 for egg preserving
    apparatus combined with egg turners and egg turners, per se, used in
    preserving eggs.


CLS 119/324
TXT With rotary carrier:

    Incubator under the subclass 323 including an egg turner having a carrier
    or cup which turns about a single axis at least 180 degrees.

    (1)     Note. A rotating carrier generally consists of, but is not limited
    to, either a flat disc with egg cups rotating about its central axis or a
    cylindrical cage designed to turn about its longitudinal axis.


CLS 119/325
TXT With tilting carrier:

    Incubator under subclass 323 including an egg turner having a carrier
    designed to oscillate, thus imparting a rocking motion to the tray.

    (1)     Note. Those egg turners having carriers which rotate through an
    angle equal to or greater than 180 degrees should be placed in subclass 324.


CLS 119/326
TXT Attached to longitudinally moving support:

    Incubator under subclass 325 including an egg turner having a carrier whose
    oscillating movement is achieved through a connection between the carrier
    and a linearly moving support.


CLS 119/327
TXT With endless belt or roller carrier:

    Incubator under the subclass 323 including an egg turner consisting of a
    plurality of rolls or endless belts designed to revolve thereby turning the
    egg.


CLS 119/328
TXT Attachment:

    Incubator under subclass 311 including miscellaneous devices not provided
    for elsewhere, which are designed to improve the overall performance of the
    incubator, but are not necessary for its normal course of operations.


CLS 119/329
TXT BIRD NEST OR APPLIANCE:

    Subject matter under class definition consisting of (1) a small structure
    shaped to serve as a place in which a single fowl may lay an egg (i.e, a
    nest) or (2) a device used therewith.

    (1)     Note. Included herein are devices (intended to be used in
    conjunction with the bird nest) which perform a particular function for
    care of the nest fowl or egg and are not provided for elsewhere (i.e.
    timers, egg protectors, and sitting inhibitors).

    (2)     Note. Included herein are devices consisting of loose particulate
    or fibrous material, either manmade or natural, intended to be used as a
    nesting material for the fowl.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    437+,   for poultry housing designed to hold a substantial number of bird
    nests or fowls.


CLS 119/330
TXT Egg and fowl trap:

    Nest under subclass 329 designed to either (1) trap both the egg and the
    fowl or (2) be readily convertible from an egg trap to a fowl trap and visa
    versa.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334+,   for a trap which only captures an egg.

    339+,   for a trap which only captures a fowl.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 58+ for traps
    of general application and details applicable to this art.


CLS 119/331
TXT Having fowl actuated releasing means:

    Egg and fowl trap under subclass 330 including means whereby the fowl may
    release itself from the trap regardless of whether it lays an egg or not.


CLS 119/332
TXT Having egg actuated releasing means:

    Egg and fowl trap under the subclass 330 whereby the laid egg activates a
    door releasing means.


CLS 119/333
TXT With fowl segregating means:

    Egg and fowl trap under subclass 332 including means to insure that the
    laying fowls are released into an area separate from the nonlaying fowls.


CLS 119/334
TXT Egg trap:

    Nest under subclass 329 having a device to convey the egg from the nest or
    to a separate container out of reach of the fowl

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    330+,   for a trap which captures an egg and a fowl.

    339+,   for a trap which only captures a fowl.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 58+ for traps
    of general application and details applicable to this art.


CLS 119/335
TXT Having an inclining nest bottom:

    Egg trap under subclass 334 including a nest bottom that forms an angle
    with the adjacent wall of the trap, sloping downward so that an egg may
    roll from the nest area.

    (1)     Note. Included herein is a nest bottom with a biasing means
    attached so that when the fowl leaves the nest it pivots, causing the egg
    to roll from the area.

    (2)     Note. This subclass does not provide for a nest disclosing no
    visible distinction between the wall and the bottom of the nest, such as
    oval nests, having an aperture yet sloping downward at some angle to direct
    the egg into the hole.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334,    for nests without a visible distinction between the walls and the
    bottom, such as oval nests having an aperture and sloping downward at some
    angle.


CLS 119/336
TXT Intended for use with plural nests:

    A nest having an egg trap under subclass 335 specifically intended to be
    used with other nests to form a battery of nests to receive a plurality of
    fowl.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    437+,   for bird housing not claiming any means of egg or fowl trapping,
    yet designed to hold a comparatively large number of mature fowls, and
    which provides no significant disclosure as to the individual nests
    contained within the building.


CLS 119/337
TXT Which removes eggs via endless conveyor:

    Nest having an egg trap under subclass 336 whereby an egg rolls from the
    inclined nest bottom and onto a conveyor belt.


CLS 119/338
TXT And providing additional care:

    Nest having an egg trap under subclass 337 wherein additional care is
    administered to either the fowl or the egg (i.e., feeding, cleaning, or
    watering).


CLS 119/339
TXT Fowl trap:

    Nest under subclass 329 having a device which once actuated entraps the
    fowl and excludes others fowls from entering the nest during the period of
    occupancy.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    330+,   for a trap which captures an egg and a fowl.

    334+,   for a trap which only captures an egg.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 58+ for traps
    of general application and details applicable to this art.


CLS 119/340
TXT Having attendant operated released means:

    Nest under subclass 339 having a fowl trap with a device to prevent the
    escape of the fowl until released by an attendant.


CLS 119/341
TXT With movable floor or nest:

    Nest having a fowl trap under subclass 340 including a door closing means
    actuated by the fowls weight as it steps onto a nest, treadle, or platform.

    (1)     Note.  A patent disclosing either a vertically moving nest or an
    oscillating nest, platform, or treadle would be included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    342,    for a fowl trap with a movable floor or nest.


CLS 119/342
TXT Having movable floor or nest:

    Nest having a fowl trap under subclass 339 including a door closing means
    actuated by the fowls weight as it steps onto a nest, treadle, or platform.

    (1)     Note.  A patent disclosing either a vertically moving nest or an
    oscillating nest, platform, or treadle would be included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    341,    for an attendant operated fowl trap with a movable floor or nest.


CLS 119/343
TXT With pivotable nest:

    A nest having a fowl trap under subclass 342 wherein the nest is mounted
    within the trap so that the weight of the fowl stepping onto the nest
    causes the nest to tilt so that a door, structurally linked to the nest,
    closes and entraps the fowl.


CLS 119/344
TXT And distinct entry and exit:

    A nest having a fowl trap under subclass 343 wherein the door through which
    the fowl enters is separate from the door through which the fowl exits.


CLS 119/345
TXT Production recording appliance:

    A nest appliance under subclass 329 to (1) place a distinctive marking on
    an egg or fowl, (2) place an identifying marker such as a ring on the fowl,
    or (3) create a listing reflecting some feature of egg generation.

    (1)     Note. A feature of egg generation may include such characteristics
    as the quantity or grade of the egg laid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6.8,    for subject matter relating to avian egg treatment or enhancing
    production thereof.


CLS 119/346
TXT Support, framework, or collapsible nest:

    Bird nest or appliance under subclass 329 including therein significant
    disclosure from the structural framework designed to hold any loose or
    compacted material either fibrous or particulate which will serve as the
    fowl's nest or nests having bases and sides designed to be easily assembled
    and disassembled to facilitate the cleaning or transportation of the nest.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    431+,   for a collapsible fowl housing device.


CLS 119/347
TXT Specific nest bottom:

    Subject matter under subclass 329 wherein significance is attributed to the
    structure of the nest upon which the fowl rests.

    (1)     Note. This subclass does not include a patent for a nest wherein
    the sides are continuous with the nest bottom and no distinct bottom can be
    discerned (e.g., semispherical in shape).

    (2)     Note. This subclass provides for nest bottom structure which is
    more than simple fibers or particulate matter.

    (3)     Note.  The disclosed nest bottom generally serves some specific
    purpose such as cushioning the egg, providing comfort to the fowl,
    facilitating cleaning, or disinfecting the nest.


CLS 119/348
TXT Artificially medicated egg:

    An imitation egg under subclass 329 constructed of materials containing a
    medicament, such as an insecticide or a disinfectant, or so constructed
    that it may be charged with a volatile medicament.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, for a medicinal
    or biocidal composition (e.g., disinfectant or insecticide) particularly
    405+.


CLS 119/400
TXT RAILROAD CAR OR OTHER LIVESTOCK LONG DISTANCE CARRYING VEHICLE, (E.G.,
    TRUCK, ETC.):

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to freight or stock cars
    or other animal shipping conveyances structurally adapted for lengthy
    transporting and caring for animals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 355+ and appropriate subclasses
    for general freight car structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201+,   for handling and transporting of aquatic animals.


CLS 119/401
TXT Poultry transporter:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 having a vehicle interior with means
    included to accommodate a number of domestic fowl.


CLS 119/402
TXT Having trough:

    Subject matter under subclass 401 including an elongated and accessible
    receptacle which is utilized for providing feed or water to the transported
    poultry.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51.01+,         for feeding device, particularly subclasses 52.1+, 57, 58,
    and 61+ for trough related devices.


CLS 119/403
TXT With safeguard (e.g., interior buffers, slings, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 400 for preventing injury to an animal.

    (1)     Note. Injury may be prevented due to swaying or jerking of the
    vehicle as well as those due to long periods of standing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    725+,   for body sling means of general application.

    728,    for animal suspending means.


CLS 119/404
TXT Having vestibule:

    Having subject matter under subclass 400 including a protected passageway
    to connect contiguous vehicles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 8.1+ for vestibule structure of
    general application.


CLS 119/405
TXT Convertible:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 capable of being altered from a
    selectively open vehicle (i.e., open side slats) to a closed vehicle.

    (1)     Note. The vehicle is closed most often for protection against the
    weather.


CLS 119/406
TXT Having raised deck:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 including at least one intermediate floor
    or platform to better utilize vehicle space for smaller stock or the like.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 340 for a car with a double deck
    specifically adapted to carry human passengers.


CLS 119/407
TXT Movable or adjustable into place:

    Subject matter under subclass 406 wherein the deck is held in a ready or
    stored position and is then advanced to its working position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 370+ for a convertible deck
    freight car of various recited structure.


CLS 119/408
TXT Having feeding or watering means:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 including means for supplying nourishment
    or drinking liquid to a transported animal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51.01+, appropriate subclasses for feeding device, per se, and subclasses
    72+ for watering device of general application.


CLS 119/409
TXT Trough:

    Subject matter under subclass 408 comprising an elongated accessible
    receptacle for supplying the nourishment or drinking water to a transported
    animal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51.01+, for feeding device, particularly subclasses 52.1+, 57, 58, and 61+
    for trough related devices.


CLS 119/410
TXT Pivoted into place:

    Subject matter under subclass 409 wherein the trough is swung about an axis
    into its operative position.


CLS 119/411
TXT Having raising and lowering means:

    Subject matter under subclass 409 including means for moving the trough
    substantially vertically.

    (1)     Note. The trough is usually moved to the roof of the vehicle for
    storage and then returned to its operative lowered position.


CLS 119/412
TXT Having partition means:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 comprising means which subdivide the
    stock car into stalls or penlike compartments useful for separating animals
    during transportation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    516+,   for stall means, particularly subclass 523 for stall sidewall
    partition.


CLS 119/413
TXT Flexible:

    Subject matter under subclass 412 wherein the partition has the capability
    to bend or yield and recover as required.


CLS 119/414
TXT Having raising and lowering means:

    Subject matter under subclass 412 including means for moving the partition
    substantially vertically, usually to the roof of the car, and then to
    return it to its lowered position.


CLS 119/415
TXT With dynamic support (e.g., rail, slide, roller, rod, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 412 including means such as rail, slide,
    roller, and rod devices to support a partition for mechanical movement into
    and out of operative position.


CLS 119/416
TXT CONFINING OR HOUSING:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a structure which is
    utilized to restrict an animal to a desired and protected area for
    facilitating its care for both short and long term management.


CLS 119/417
TXT For experimental purposes:

    Subject matter under subclass 416 wherein confining or housing structure is
    adapted to allow for scientifically monitoring or studying the behavior or
    biology of a confined animal.

    (1)     Note. Requirements of contamination control of the environment,
    including water and air purity provided to the confined animal, have been
    taken as an indication of an experimental purpose hereunder.


CLS 119/418
TXT With biologically isolating ventilation means:

    Subject matter under subclass 417 wherein the air or breathing matter
    supplied to the confined animal is such as to prevent contamination from
    the surroundings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 21+ for isolation treatment chamber.


CLS 119/419
TXT Utilizing air filtration device:

    Subject matter under subclass 418 wherein the ventilation means employs a
    device through which air or breathing matter passes and is treated to
    remove biological contaminants.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, for appropriate filter related subclasses such as
    315+, 341.1+, and 361+.


CLS 119/420
TXT With gaseous medium treatment (e.g., inhalation chamber, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 417 wherein the confined animal is caused to
    breath fluid or vapor constituents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 200.24+, appropriate subclasses for respiratory
    method or device.


CLS 119/421
TXT Having animal activity monitoring means:

    Subject matter under subclass 417 including apparatus for sensing or
    measuring the physical position or locomotor activity of the confined
    animal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 573+ for human or animal
    condition responsive indicating system.


CLS 119/422
TXT Course:

    Subject matter under subclass 416 including a confining device for
    controlling an animal on a defined pathway (e.g., on a racetrack, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    472,    Amusement Devices, subclass 85 for racetrack in general.


CLS 119/423
TXT With racetrack starting means(e.g., gate, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 422 including means confining an animal,
    usually a horse or dog on a racing course such that it may be released
    simultaneously with others at a given starting moment.


CLS 119/424
TXT Dog starting box:

    Subject matter under subclass 423 including an enclosure for retaining one
    or more dogs prior to a race and for simultaneously releasing such dogs at
    the start thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    472,    Amusement Devices, subclass 87 for dog type racetrack.


CLS 119/425
TXT In motion starting gate:

    Subject matter under subclass 423 wherein the starting means is caused to
    travel on the track towards a starting point whereupon it is actuated to
    start the race.


CLS 119/426
TXT Starting gate release means:

    Subject matter under subclass 423 including electrically or mechanically
    operable removable barrier means for starting a race.


CLS 119/427
TXT Holding and releasing means for sporting animal (e.g., bird, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 416 wherein an animal, such as a pigeon, is
    held in a trap and discharged therefrom.

    (1)     Note. In this subclass, a bird or pigeon may be released for
    various purposes such as target shooting, bird dog training, and bird
    racing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 108+ for a game target for a
    surface projectile game and subclasses 317+ for a game target for an aerial
    projectile game.

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, for a game target for a game which
    uses a tangible projectile (such as a target used for the games of
    baseball, basketball, football, golf, croquet, hockey, soccer, lacrosse,
    etc.).


CLS 119/428
TXT Birdhouse

    Subject matter under subclass 416 wherein the structure comprises a small
    enclosure having an opening to admit and shelter a small bird.

    (1)     Note. The house usually includes means allowing for engagement to a
    tree or some elevated support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 60+ for traps
    for animals in general.


CLS 119/429
TXT Combined shelter and feeder:

    Subject matter under subclass 428 wherein the birdhouse includes means for
    providing access to nourishment as well as housing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51.01+, appropriate subclasses, for a feeding device, especially subclasses
    52.2 and 57.8 for those having a perch.


CLS 119/430
TXT Converted container:

    Subject matter under subclass 428 wherein the birdhouse is reconstructed
    from a receptacle used originally for another purpose.


CLS 119/431
TXT Collapsible:

    Subject matter under subclass 428 wherein the birdhouse is of such
    structure in its assembled state that it may be folded or disassembled
    therefrom.


CLS 119/432
TXT Having easy cleaning structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 428 whereby the birdhouse has an assembly
    which facilitates the removal of extraneous matter such as bird waste and
    used nesting material.


CLS 119/433
TXT Main body portion composition:

    Subject matter under subclass 428 wherein the principal structural element
    of the birdhouse is of a specified material or substance.


CLS 119/434
TXT Metallic:

    Subject matter under subclass 433 wherein the main body material is a metal.


CLS 119/435
TXT Plastic:

    Subject matter under subclass 433 wherein the main body material is of a
    synthetic formed material known generally as plastic.


CLS 119/436
TXT Permanent building (e.g., barn, stable, hog house, poultry house, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 416 directed to an onsite, enclosed, and
    roofed structure for housing a substantial number of animals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses for a
    building or building component having structural or functional
    characteristics that may relate to animal confinement or care.


CLS 119/437
TXT Poultry house:

    Subject matter under subclass 436 having structure and apparatus
    particularly suited for sheltering domestic fowl.

    (1)     Note. Included herein is poultry house equipment and furnishings
    not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 119/438
TXT Revolving:

    Subject matter under subclass 437 wherein the housing structure is caused
    to move in a curved path around a center or axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 64 and 65 for
    rotatable building or component feature in general.


CLS 119/439
TXT Having conveyor type floor in direct contact with poultry (i.e., individual
    bird rests on floor ):

    Subject matter under subclass 437 including a movably driven support
    surface upon which poultry is transferred.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power Driven, appropriate subclasses for suitable
    devices useful for the above defined animal related purpose.


CLS 119/440
TXT With egg transfer device:

    Subject matter under subclass 437 including means for conveying within the
    poultry house a hard-shelled reproductive body.


CLS 119/441
TXT Compartmented:

    Subject matter under subclass 437 wherein structure is provided to divide a
    larger space within the poultry house into smaller housing spaces.


CLS 119/442
TXT With droppings handling:

    Subject matter under subclass 437 including means for collecting, treating,
    or otherwise dealing with the poultry bodily waste matter.


CLS 119/443
TXT Having combined roost and droppings board:

    Subject matter under subclass 443 which comprises both a fowl support or
    rest and a device which receives or collects poultry bodily waste.


CLS 119/444
TXT Hog house:

    Subject matter under subclass 436 having structure and apparatus
    particularly suited for sheltering domestic swine.


CLS 119/445
TXT Farrowing house or shed:

    Subject matter under subclass 444 including structure and apparatus
    particularly suitable for the birthing, nursing, and caring for the young
    piglets by the sow mother.


CLS 119/446
TXT With guard rail for piglets:

    Subject matter under subclass 445 including a barrier whereby the body of a
    reclining sow is supported in a manner to prevent crushing of a piglet
    beneath her.


CLS 119/447
TXT With building sanitary device or system:

    Subject matter under subclass 444 including structure and apparatus used
    for the disposal of the bodily hog waste.


CLS 119/448
TXT With heating or forced air ventilation:

    Subject matter under subclass 436 including structure and apparatus for
    raising the environmental temperature or providing a driven circulation of
    air within the building.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 198+ for roof or
    cover over usable space including a fluid guiding port.

    454,    Ventilation, appropriate subclasses for a ventilating structure
    with air directing or controlling feature.


CLS 119/449
TXT Building with feeding related means:

    Subject matter under subclass 436 including means related to the provision
    of animal nourishment especially feed storage and dispensing apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

     57.1+, for a powered feeding device.


CLS 119/450
TXT Building floor having waste collecting gutter or draining means:

    Subject matter under subclass 436 wherein the ground or animal supporting
    surface of the building is provided with a channel or other flow gathering
    means for animal sewerage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power Driven, appropriate subclasses directed to the
    various apparatus wherein the load-engaging and conveying part is in the
    form of a bucket.


CLS 119/451
TXT With mechanical scraper or conveyor:

    Subject matter under subclass 450 including apparatus for utilizing a
    driven blade, belt, or similar device to gather sewage from the gutter or
    draining means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing and General Cleaning, subclass 236.01 for
    scraper, and subclass 236.04 for gutter scraper.


CLS 119/452
TXT Animal display or open work enclosure (i.e., cage):

    Subject matter under subclass 416 including a confinement structure for
    securely housing an animal with at least a portion thereof being
    transparent or having reticulated (see through ) portions of wire or barred
    material.

    (1)     Note. Included hereunder are the molded plastic transparent
    structures commonly used for rodents both in the home and laboratory.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    417+,   for experimental housing structure including cages of various types.


CLS 119/453
TXT Transporting cage:

    Subject matter under subclass 452 wherein the cage includes structure which
    facilitates its mobility or use thereof for shipment of a confined animal.

    (1)     Note. The cage may be transported on a mobile carrier or used with
    a manual carrier handle, for example.


CLS 119/454
TXT With feeding or watering means:

    Subject matter under subclass 453 including means for providing nourishment
    or drinking liquid to an animal being transported.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51.01+, appropriate subclasses for feeding device, per se, and subclasses
    7+ for watering device of general application.


CLS 119/455
TXT Battery of cages:

    Subject matter under subclass 452 including a plurality of interrelated
    individual cages.

    (1)     Note. The cages are usually in various stacked arrangements.


CLS 119/456
TXT With feeding or watering means:

    Subject matter under subclass 455 including means for providing nourishment
    or drinking liquid to a battery cage confined animal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

     51.01+,        appropriate subclasses for feeding device, per se, and
    subclasses 72+ for watering device of general application.


CLS 119/457
TXT Automatic or powered:

    Subject matter under subclass 456 including a feeding or watering device
    that is self-regulating or motively driven.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57.1+,  for a powered feeding device.


CLS 119/458
TXT With sanitary or cleaning means:

    Subject matter under subclass 455 including structure and apparatus used
    for the gathering and disposal of animal and other waste from the cage
    battery.


CLS 119/459
TXT Bird cage:

    Subject matter under subclass 452 wherein the cage is structured to
    facilitate the care for and display of any of a class (Aves) of
    warm-blooded and feathered winged vertebrates.


CLS 119/460
TXT With bath structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 459 including means provided in combination
    with the cage for a bird to utilize a liquid medium for cleaning purposes.


CLS 119/461
TXT Collapsible:

    Subject matter under subclass 459 wherein the cage is structured in a
    manner that allows a transformation between a fully assembled state and a
    disassembled state which includes folding into a reduced size or more
    compact structure.


CLS 119/462
TXT Having removable tray or drawer:

    Subject matter under subclass 459 including a shallow lipped element that
    may be withdrawn from a collecting position within the cage.


CLS 119/463
TXT Having separable cage bottom:

    Subject matter under subclass 459 including a lower end closing element of
    the cage which may be entirely removed providing cage access.


CLS 119/464
TXT With feeding or watering means:

    Subject matter under subclass 459 including means for providing nourishment
    or drinking liquid to a confined bird.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51.01+, appropriate subclasses for feeding device, per se, and subclasses
    72+ for watering device of general application.


CLS 119/465
TXT Including jaw-type holder:

    Subject matter under subclass 464 wherein the feeding means grasps the food
    between two members biased toward one another.


CLS 119/466
TXT Bone holder:

    Subject matter under subclass 464 including means for supporting in a
    position accessible to a bird, a bill and claw maintenance means referred
    to as a cuttlebone.


CLS 119/467
TXT With attachment device:

    Subject matter under subclass 459 including means connected with the basic
    cage structure and cooperating therewith to enhance its ability to confine,
    protect, and care for a bird within.


CLS 119/468
TXT Perch for cage:

    Subject matter under subclass 467 including a roost for a bird provided in
    connection with the cage.


CLS 119/469
TXT Shield or guard:

    Subject matter under subclass 467 including a barrier usually connected in
    a manner to prevent scattering of feed or other matter outside the confines
    of the cage or a feed device.


CLS 119/470
TXT Cover:

    Subject matter under subclass 467 including a device which is positioned to
    enclose or screen the cage for isolation or protective purposes.


CLS 119/471
TXT Disposable floor mat:

    Subject matter under subclass 467 including a cover for the bottom surface
    of the cage which is meant for removal after a period of use.


CLS 119/472
TXT Sectional cage:

    Subject matter under subclass 452 wherein the larger enclosed cage space is
    structurally divided into a plurality of smaller enclosures.


CLS 119/473
TXT Having movable wall:

    Subject matter under subclass 452 wherein the cage includes at least one
    enclosure barrier having means imparting motion thereto.

    (1)     Note. The barrier is not intended as a door, for example, but
    rather is a major confining element such as a cage side.


CLS 119/474
TXT Collapsible:

    Subject matter under subclass 452 wherein the cage is structured in a
    manner that allows a transformation between a fully assembled state and a
    disassembled state which includes folding into a reduced size or more
    compact structure.


CLS 119/475
TXT With feeding or watering means:

    Subject matter under subclass 452 including means for providing nourishment
    or drinking liquid to any animal confined in such a cage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51.01+, appropriate subclasses for feeding device, per se, and subclasses
    72+ for watering device of general application.


CLS 119/476
TXT Automatic or powered:

    Subject matter under subclass 475 including a feeding or watering device
    that is self-regulating or motively driven.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57.1+,  for a powered feeding device.


CLS 119/477
TXT Having attaching means to cage wire or bar:

    Subject matter under subclass 475 including apparatus which serves to mount
    or connect a feeding or watering device in operable animal serving position
    by engagement with the openwork of the cage.


CLS 119/478
TXT Having size adjustable access:

    Subject matter under subclass 475 wherein the feeding or watering means
    include structure which selectively controls the ability of an animal to
    enter and partake of the food or water according to its physical dimensions.


CLS 119/479
TXT Having animal water handling:

    Subject matter under subclass 452 including means for collecting, treating,
    or otherwise dealing with the excrement from a cage confined animal.


CLS 119/480
TXT Cage floor:

    Subject matter under subclass 452 including structure and apparatus related
    to the animal supporting bottom of the enclosure.


CLS 119/481
TXT Cage door:

    Subject matter under subclass 452 wherein the enclosure includes a usually
    swinging or sliding barrier by which an entry is opened or closed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, appropriate subclasses for cage door
    such as subclasses 404+ for sliding type and subclasses 381+ for swinging
    door mounting.


CLS 119/482
TXT Often portable, small capacity, roofed housing structure (e.g., coop,
    hutch, kennel, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 416 including an oftentimes movable covered
    enclosure for providing a protective dwelling for a limited number of
    animals.

    (1)     Note. Many but not all of the structures hereunder have a
    portability feature such as a handle for a carrier or runners for dragging
    a small coop.


CLS 119/483
TXT Rabbit hutch:

    Subject matter under subclass 482 particularly suited for housing any of a
    family (Leporidae) of long-eared, short-tailed lagomorph mammals with long
    hind legs.


CLS 119/484
TXT Human dwelling pet enclosure addition (e.g., window kennel) or pet
    exit/entrance means:

    Subject matter under subclass 482 including either (1) an animal enclosure
    associated with a personal domicile or (2) a hatch-type entry or departure
    means structure to provide animal passage to such a domicile.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports: Racks, subclasses 87.01+ for specially mounted wall or
    window rack.


CLS 119/485
TXT With housing elevation means:

    Subject matter under subclass 482 wherein the structure utilizes
    selectively operable elevation means to lift the structure above the
    ground.

    (1)     Note. Such means provides ground hazard avoidance.


CLS 119/486
TXT Below ground housing:

    Subject matter under subclass 482 wherein at least a portion of the
    enclosure is located beneath the ordinary level of the earthen surface.


CLS 119/487
TXT Poultry enclosure:

    Subject matter under subclass 482 particularly suited to shelter domestic
    fowl.


CLS 119/488
TXT Rail supported movable poultry house:

    Subject matter under subclass 487 including a poultry housing structure
    which may travel on a barlike structural member or support.


CLS 119/489
TXT Transporting type:

    Subject matter under subclass 487 wherein the enclosure includes structure
    which facilitates the use thereof for shipment of confined fowl.


CLS 119/490
TXT For chicks:

    Subject matter under subclass 487 especially facilitating the shipment of
    newborn fowl.


CLS 119/491
TXT Collapsible:

    Subject matter under subclass 487 wherein the enclosure is structured in a
    manner that allows a transformation between a fully assembled or erect
    state and at least a partially disassembled or reduced state.


CLS 119/492
TXT Having hinged structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 491 wherein one or more of the enclosure
    elements is connected to allow movement, such as folding from the assembled
    state, about a pivoted attachment to provide the enclosure collapsibility
    feature.


CLS 119/493
TXT With ventilation means:

    Subject matter under subclass 487 including structure and apparatus
    providing a circulation of air which may or may not be power driven.

    (1)     Note. A door or opening alone is not considered ventilation means
    hereunder without some further control over the air circulation (e.g.,
    slidable roof, etc.).


CLS 119/494
TXT With enclosure door:

    Subject matter under subclass 487 wherein the enclosure includes a usually
    swinging or sliding barrier by which an entry is opened or closed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, appropriate subclasses for enclosure
    door such as subclasses 404+ for sliding type and subclasses 381+ for
    swinging door mounting.


CLS 119/495
TXT Poultry self-operating:

    Subject matter under subclass 494 wherein the door may be opened or closed
    as a result of actuation by one or more domestic fowl.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 236+ for mechanical means
    imparting movement to the door and means to effect its operation by weight
    or impact.


CLS 119/496
TXT Transporting type:

    Subject matter under subclass 482 wherein the enclosure includes structure
    which facilitates the use thereof for shipment or conveying of one or more
    animals confined therein.


CLS 119/497
TXT Hand or body-type carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 496 wherein the enclosure is of a size and
    weight to be ordinarily transported by a person either with the use of
    manually gripped handles or by torso wrapped strap means.


CLS 119/498
TXT Collapsible:

    Subject matter under subclass 482 wherein the enclosure is structured in a
    manner that allows a transformation between a fully assembled or erect
    state and at least a partially disassembled or reduced state.


CLS 119/499
TXT Having hinged structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 498 wherein one or more of the enclosure
    elements is connected to allow movement, such as folding from the assembled
    state, about a pivoted attachment to provide the enclosure collapsibility
    feature.


CLS 119/500
TXT With ventilation means:

    Subject matter under subclass 482 including structure and apparatus
    providing a circulation of air which may or may not be power driven.

    (1)     Note. A door or opening alone is not considered ventilation means
    hereunder without some further control over the air circulation (e.g.,
    slide able roof, etc.).


CLS 119/501
TXT Enclosure door:

    Subject matter under subclass 482 wherein the enclosure includes a usually
    swinging or sliding barrier by which an entry is opened or closed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, appropriate subclasses for enclosure
    door, such as subclasses 404+ for sliding type and subclasses 381+ for
    swinging door mounting.


CLS 119/502
TXT Pen or rack:

    Subject matter under subclass 416 including roofless or uncovered means to
    enclose or confine one or more animals and to protect against intrusion.


CLS 119/503
TXT Hog farrowing pen:

    Subject matter under subclass 502 including structure and apparatus
    particularly suitable for the birthing, nursing, and caring for piglets by
    the sow mother.


CLS 119/504
TXT Collapsible:

    Subject matter under subclass 503 wherein the pen is structured in a manner
    that allows a transformation between a fully assembled or erect state and
    at least a partially disassembled or reduced state.


CLS 119/505
TXT With automatic farrowing device:

    Subject matter under subclass 503 including a self-regulating means
    utilized in the farrowing function.

    (1)     Note. Included hereunder is a device to diminish the speed or
    acceleration at which the sow lays down to allow escape of the piglets from
    under her (i.e., damped sow letdown).


CLS 119/506
TXT Adjustable enclosure element for piglet escape passage:

    Subject matter under subclass 503 comprising a positionable confining
    member which allows evasion by the piglets when in danger of crushing by
    the reclining sow.


CLS 119/507
TXT Sow size adjustable pen:

    Subject matter under subclass 503 wherein the pen may be made to
    accommodate various growth dimensions of mother hogs.


CLS 119/508
TXT Having heating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 503 including apparatus for raising the
    ambient temperature within the pen.


CLS 119/509
TXT Pen floor:

    Subject matter under subclass 503 including structure and apparatus related
    to the bottom animal supporting portion of the pen.


CLS 119/510
TXT With crowd gate:

    Subject matter under subclass 502 including a sweeping means to herd
    animals from a pen-type holding area.


CLS 119/511
TXT Platform scale rack:

    Subject matter under subclass 502 including an animal rack used to confine
    one or more animals on a raised structure for weighing purposes.


CLS 119/512
TXT Portable:

    Subject matter under subclass 502 including a pen or rack mounted upon
    apparatus such as wheels or skids to provide movement capability.


CLS 119/513
TXT Collapsible:

    Subject matter under subclass 502 wherein the pen or rack is structured in
    a manner that allows a transformation between a fully assembled or erect
    state and at least a partially disassembled or reduced state.


CLS 119/514
TXT Having hinged structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 513 wherein one or more of the pen or rack
    elements is connected to allow movement such as folding from the assembled
    state, about a pivoted attachment to provide the collapsibility feature.


CLS 119/515
TXT With feeding or watering means:

    Subject matter under subclass 502 including means for providing nourishment
    or drinking liquid to a pen or rack-confined animal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51.01+, appropriate subclasses for feeding device, per se, and subclasses
    72+ for watering device of general application.


CLS 119/516
TXT Stall:

    Subject matter under subclass 416 relating to one or more open compartments
    and serving as a means for segregating livestock, such as cattle, in a barn
    or the like, for protecting them from injury or locating them for feeding
    purposes.


CLS 119/517
TXT With back contacting cattle excreta device:

    Subject matter under subclass 516 including apparatus having an element for
    sensing through touch the humping of cattle prior to excreting and to
    respond by directing the excreta in a sanitary manner.


CLS 119/518
TXT With electrical system or device:

    Subject matter under subclass 516 including means operated by electrical
    power for use in such functions as training and restraining in conjunction
    with an animal stall.


CLS 119/519
TXT Portable:

    Subject matter under subclass 516 wherein the stall is structured so that
    it may be expeditiously moved between sites.

    (1)     Note. In some instances the stall hereunder is of the knockdown or
    collapsible type.


CLS 119/520
TXT Milking facilitating stall:

    Subject matter under subclass 516 including structure and apparatus for
    expediting usage and preventing interference with milking, especially by
    machine, of a stall-confined cow.


CLS 119/521
TXT With feeding or watering device:

    Subject matter under subclass 516 including means for providing nourishment
    or drinking liquid to the stall-confined animal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51.01+, appropriate subclasses for feeding device, per se, and subclasses
    72+ or watering device of general application.


CLS 119/522
TXT Adjustable (e.g., stall size, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 516 wherein one or more stall elements may be
    repositioned to accommodate an animal with regard to its proportions such
    as the length thereof.


CLS 119/523
TXT Stall side wall partition:

    Subject matter under subclass 516 including the one or more elements that
    comprise the lateral confining barrier of a stall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    412,    for livestock carrying vehicle partition means.


CLS 119/524
TXT Gate or door:

    Subject matter under subclass 516 including a movable barrier controlling
    the entrance or exit of the stall.


CLS 119/525
TXT Floor:

    Subject matter under subclass 516 directed to structure and apparatus
    related to the bottom animal supporting portion of a stall.


CLS 119/526
TXT Mat-type covering or stall floor bedding:

    Subject matter under subclass 525 wherein the stall floor is provided with
    a formed material overlayer or a material suitable for cushioning the floor
    for sleeping or resting thereupon.


CLS 119/527
TXT Drain-type floor with waste collection means:

    Subject matter under subclass 525 including a floor having animal excrement
    funnelling means combined with means for accumulation thereof (e.g., trough
    or gutter etc.).


CLS 119/528
TXT Floor including under support therefor:

    Subject matter under subclass 525 including a floor structure having
    structural bearing means.


CLS 119/529
TXT Slotted surface flooring (e.g., separate slats, etc.) including connector
    or spacer means:

    Subject matter under subclass 525 comprising spaced flooring elements with
    means for joining such with predetermined distance therebetween for
    draining or cleaning, etc.


CLS 119/530
TXT Floor, per se, having drain openings or passages (e.g., one-piece floor
    having openings formed therein, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 525 including a floor that is either
    initially formed or has formed therein surface interruptions or channels
    for flowable animal waste to pass through.


CLS 119/531
TXT Poultry perch:

    Subject matter under subclass 416 usually adapted to a poultry house or
    coop and including a rest for a roosting domestic fowl.


CLS 119/532
TXT Antivermin (e.g., trap, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 531 including structure and apparatus to
    prevent insect infestation of fowl using such a perch.


CLS 119/533
TXT Perch support includes insecticide barrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 532 wherein means upholding the perch
    includes a vermin killing or repelling means.


CLS 119/534
TXT Fumes utilization:

    Subject matter under subclass 532 including means for using insecticide to
    produce an insect killing vapor to penetrate and protect roosting poultry.


CLS 119/535
TXT Wick device:

    Subject matter under subclass 532 wherein material means are provided to
    draw insecticide from a source and transfer it to the site of a poultry
    roost for protective use.


CLS 119/536
TXT Wetting device:

    Subject matter under subclass 532 including means for causing insecticide
    in the form of a liquid to saturate the poultry roost.


CLS 119/537
TXT Portable or nonconfined bird perch:

    Subject matter under subclass 416 including a freely movable support or
    rest for a roosting bird.

    (1)     Note. Examples of such a perch include a human, shoulder-carried
    support device or a movable parrot roost.


CLS 119/600
TXT GROOMING:

    Subject matter under the class definition particularly adapted to treat;
    the coat, i.e., the hair or skin of an animal.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is currying, brushing, cleaning, massaging, or
    rubbing the coat of an animal.

    (2)     Note.  The grooming of this and the indented subclasses comprises
    an operation "particularly adapted" to be used in the care of an animal.
    Note that since a comb is deemed to always align the hair of an animal and
    a brush may treat without aligning the hair, the concept of "particular
    adaptation" has been applied somewhat differently for a comb and for a
    brush.

            A comb of the type recognized as usable on an animal is not
    considered to be of general utility unless there is specific disclosure of
    general utility, and therefor is found in this and the indented subclasses.
     Note that a hair aligning comb, for use on an animal, will be found
    herein, even if its sole disclosure is to remove vermin.

            A brush of the type recognized as usable on an animal is considered
    to be of general utility unless there is a specific disclosure that it is
    intended for use only in grooming an animal.  (See the note to Class 15,
    below.)

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    612     and 615, for the combination of a currycomb with a brush.

    651,    for a process of brushing under the definition of Class 119,
    without grooming.

    664,    for a brush used in antivermin treating or cleaning under the
    definition of Class 119.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, for cleaning, generally,
    particularly subclasses 23+ a machine for brushing by a rotary cylinder,
    subclasses 28+ for a machine for brushing by a rotary disk, subclasses 105+
    for a combined cleaning machine, subclasses 160+ for a brush or broom for
    use with special work, and subclasses 171+ for a head or casing for a brush
    or broom.  A brush, per se, is considered to be of general utility, and is
    to be found in Class 15.  (See (2) Note above.)


            The combination of cleaning by a vacuum or air supply with an
    animal grooming device is to be found in Class 15, particularly subclasses
    300.1+, and more specifically, subclasses 398+ for the combination of a
    brush with an air blast or suction and subclasses 402 for a comb with an
    air blast or suction.

    96,     Gas Separation: Apparatus, for a dust collector, dust trap, or
    other device for purifying atmosphere, generally.

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 212+ for a device for treating, dressing or
    manipulating the hair of a person.


CLS 119/601
TXT Process:

    Method of grooming under subclass 600.


CLS 119/602
TXT With means to supply treatment material to the animal; e.g., antivermin
    treatment, flame, attractant:

    Grooming device under subclass 600 combined with means to provide a
    beneficial composition to the coat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    650+,   for supplying an antivermin treating or cleaning composition to an
    animal, without grooming.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    604,    Surgery, for application of medicating material to an animal,
    generally, including the combination of a grooming device therewith.


CLS 119/603
TXT Liquid:

    Grooming device under subclass 602 wherein the material supplied to the
    coat is flowable and at a temperature below the vapor state.


CLS 119/604
TXT Sprayer:

    Grooming device under subclass 603 wherein the liquid material supplied to
    the coat is in droplets.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    665+,   for a sprayer for antivermin treating or cleaning.


CLS 119/605
TXT Powder:

    Grooming device under subclass 602 wherein the material is supplied to the
    coat is in the form or very small particles.


CLS 119/606
TXT Air;  e.g., to dry:

    Grooming device under subclass 602 wherein the material is supplied to the
    coat is the ambient mixture of the Earth's environment, and the purpose is
    other than to clean.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    677+,   for an air supplier for antivermin treating or cleaning.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, for the combination of
    cleaning by a vacuum or air supply with animal grooming, particularly
    subclasses 300.1+, and more specifically, subclasses 398+ for the
    combination of a brush with an air blast or suction and subclasses 402 for
    a comb with an air blast or suction.


CLS 119/607
TXT Means to apply decorative trim to animal:

    Grooming device under subclass 600 particularly adapted to attach an
    ornamental member to the animal.


CLS 119/608
TXT Driven:

    Grooming device under subclass 600 including means movable relative thereto
    to cause a component thereof to move with respect to the animal.


CLS 119/609
TXT By motor:

    Grooming device under subclass 608 including a prime mover to cause the
    movement.


CLS 119/610
TXT Movable cutter:

    Grooming device under subclass 609 wherein the moved component comprises a
    sharp cutting edge.


CLS 119/611
TXT Including simultaneously used comb and other grooming device:

    Grooming device under subclass 609 including a first grooming device having
    spaced apart fingers intended to inter-fit between the hairs of a coat, so
    that the hairs can be dragged therethrough to align the hairs; and
    including a distinct grooming device intended to be used at the same time.


CLS 119/612
TXT Brush:

    Grooming device under subclass 611 wherein the other grooming device
    comprises adjacent flexible fingers.

    (1)     Note.  The fingers of a brush may flex to interfit between the
    hairs of the coat in the manner of a comb or may flex so that the ends of
    the fingers will conform to the generally planar surface of the coat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 120+ for a comb combined with a brush for use by
    a person.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    664,    for a brush for antivermin treating or cleaning.


CLS 119/613
TXT Including separately used comb and other grooming device:

    Grooming device under subclass 609 including a first grooming device having
    spaced apart fingers intended to interfit between hairs of the coat, so
    that the hairs can be dragged therethrough to align the hairs; and
    including a distinct grooming device intended to be used at a different
    time.


CLS 119/614
TXT Removable other device:

    Grooming device under subclass 613 in which the other grooming device is
    intended to be readily detached from the first device.


CLS 119/615
TXT Brush:

    Grooming device under subclass 614 wherein the detachable other grooming
    device comprises adjacent flexible fingers.

    (1)     Note.  The fingers of a brush may flex to interfit between the
    hairs of the coat in the manner of a comb or may flex so that the ends of
    the fingers conform to the generally planar surface of the coat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    664,    for a brush for antivermin treating or cleaning.


CLS 119/616
TXT Another comb:

    Grooming device under subclass 614 where the second grooming device also
    has spaced apart fingers intended to interfit between hairs of the coat, so
    that the hairs can be dragged therethrough to align the hairs.


CLS 119/617
TXT Distinct edges of a single blade:

    Grooming device under subclass 613 wherein the comb comprises fingers
    extending out of a marginal portion of a plate, which plate includes other
    marginal portions which comprise the other grooming device.


CLS 119/618
TXT Including means to apply increased tensile force to hair:

    Grooming device under subclass 600 having provision to cause more pulling
    effort to be transmitted to the hair than would be normal for such a
    grooming device.


CLS 119/619
TXT Gripper:

    Grooming device under subclass 618 including provision to squeeze a hair or
    a plurality of hairs to exert pulling force thereon.


CLS 119/620
TXT Having abrasive surface:

    Grooming device under subclass 618 including a surface roughened for the
    specific purpose of increasing the pulling effort on hair engaged thereby.


CLS 119/621
TXT Passive; e.g., rub-block:

    Grooming device under subclass 600 that is immobile relative to the earth
    during use.

    (1)     Note.  The device of this subclass usually allows an animal to
    groom itself; e.g., by rubbing against the device.

    (2)     Note.  A toothed member intended to bite into the coat of a passing
    animal to drive other structure on a "rub-block is not considered to be a
    grooming device, since it does not align the hairs of the animal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    652,    for a rubbing post including antivermin or cleaning means,
    particularly subclasses 656+ for a rubbing post having an animal actuated
    treatment supply.


CLS 119/622
TXT Passageway:

    Grooming device under subclass 621 comprising an opening through which an
    animal may (or must) pass, intended to engage the coat of the animal.


CLS 119/623
TXT Straight, smooth bar:

    Grooming  device under subclass 600 comprised of a rigid rod-like or planar
    member having a linear rubbing surface without irregularities thereon.

    (1)     Note.  Some portion of the bar of this subclass must be straight.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    600,    for a grooming device comprised of a planar member having a curved
    rubbing surface without irregularities therein.


CLS 119/624
TXT Smooth wire:

    Grooming  device under subclass 600 comprised of a straight, curved or
    coiled flexible strand-like member having a rubbing surface without
    irregularities thereon.


CLS 119/625
TXT Comb:

    Grooming device under subclass 600 comprising fingers intended to interfit
    between hairs of the coat, so that the hairs can be dragged therethrough to
    align the hairs.

    (1)     Note.  A toothed member intended to bite into the coat of a passing
    animal to drive other structure on a "rub-block" is not considered to be a
    grooming device, since it does not align the hairs of the animal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    621,    for a toothed member intended to bite into the coat of a passing
    animal to drive other structure on a "rub-block".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 219+ for a comb designed to be inserted into the
    hair of a person.  Generally but not always, a comb to be used by a person
    is an elongated, planar member having teeth in the plane, extending
    laterally from an elongated edge; whereas a comb to be used in animal
    husbandry is rake-like in configuration.


CLS 119/626
TXT Having vermin or dust trap:

    Comb under subclass 625 having a particular structure intended to capture
    or hold organic or inorganic foreign material for the coat during grooming.


CLS 119/627
TXT Mounted for movement during use:

    Comb under subclass 625 designed to be repositioned by reaction from
    contact with the coat to which it is applied.

    (1)     Note.  A resiliently mounted tooth is included herein only if it is
    specifically disclosed as movable during use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    632,    for a grooming device including spike (e.g., wire) teeth mounted in
    a resilient base without reference to the teeth being movable during use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 23+ for
    cleaning generally by a rotary cylindrical brush and subclasses 28+ for
    cleaning generally by a rotary disk brush.

    19,     Textiles: Fiber Preparation, subclass 60 for a brush used in a
    textile gin.


CLS 119/628
TXT Self-cleaning:

    Comb under subclass 625 provided with means for dislodging hair and dirt
    from the teeth or body thereof.


CLS 119/629
TXT By pivoting stripper:

    Comb under subclass 628 including a member supported for movement about an
    axis with respect to the comb teeth to pull the dislodged hair or dirt from
    the teeth or body thereof.


CLS 119/630
TXT Reticulated wire teeth:

    Comb under subclass 625 including teeth, each comprised of a loop of wire
    wherein the wire loops interfit between the hairs of the coat in the manner
    of a comb.


CLS 119/631
TXT Serrated strip:

    Comb under subclass 625 comprised of a planar panel of material having an
    edge scalloped to present teeth therealong.

    (1)     Note.  The "planar" band of this subclass, usually made of sheet
    metal, may be curved or straight.  The "teeth" of this subclass may look
    like those on a saw blade.


CLS 119/632
TXT Spike-toothed:

    Comb under subclass 625 wherein the fingers are rod-like, and untapered,
    other than at the tip.

    (1)     Note.  Wires extending from a planar member are considered to be
    "rod-like" fingers.  Such device are sometimes called "cards", especially
    if the fingers are bent intermediate their extent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles: Fiber Preparation, subclasses 98+ for a card used in
    aligning textile fibers which may be similar in structure to the device of
    this subclass.


CLS 119/633
TXT Handle detail:

    Grooming device under subclass 625 comprising specific details of a
    finger-hold, or other configuration designed to facilitate the engagement
    of a grooming device by the hand of a groomer; or specific means for
    securing the handle to the frame or plate of a grooming device.


CLS 119/650
TXT ANTIVERMIN TREATING OR CLEANING:

    Invention under the class definition for applying medicament to, washing,
    or otherwise treating an animal to free the animal of filth or a parasite
    or for repelling a parasite, topical application of means for healing a
    sore, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69.5,   for a birdbath.

    600+,   for currying, brushing, cleaning, massaging, or rubbing the coat of
    an animal.  Note.  The grooming device of subclass 600 and the indented
    subclasses comprises one "particularly adapted" to be used in the care of
    an animal.  Note that since a comb is deemed to always alaign the hair of
    an animal and a brush may treat without aligning  the hair, the concept of
    "particular adaptation has been applied somewhat differently for a comb and
    brush.

            A comb of the type recognized as usable on an animal is not
    considered to be of general utility unless there is specific disclosure of
    general utility, and therefor is found in subclasses 600+; including a comb
    whose sole disclosure is to remove vermin while sliding through the hair of
    an animal.


            A brush of the type recognized as usable on an animal is considered
    to be of general utility unless there is a specific disclosure that it is
    intended for use only in grooming an animal.  Such a general utility brush
    is to be found in subclasses 650 if it is for antivermin treatment or
    cleaning.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, for a coating apparatus of general applicability.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 405+
    for an insecticide composition, especially subclasses 411+ for said
    composition, combined with a nominally recited collar.

    514,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, for a
    particular chemical composition used for treating an animal in the manner
    of the process or apparatus of Class 119.


CLS 119/651
TXT Process:

    Method of antivermin treating or cleaning under subclass 650.


CLS 119/652
TXT Means engaging animal directly; e.g., daubing or rubbing means:

    Device under subclass 650 for applying a medicament to animals by contact
    or friction.

    (1)     Note:  Included herein is a  rubbing post, a fowl-greasing device,
    or a nose-tarring device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    621,    for a rubbing post including means to groom an animal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 76+ for a coating apparatus,
    generally, in which coating material in self-sustaining form is rubbed on
    work.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 49+ for a
    hand-manipulable coating implement having a supply of self-sustaining
    coating material which is rubbed on the work surface to apply a coating
    thereto.


CLS 119/653
TXT Carried externally by animal:

    Device under subclass 652 adapted to ride on the animal being treated.


CLS 119/654
TXT Body or appendage encircling collar or band; e.g., flea collar etc:


    Device under subclass 652 intended to pass around the main trunk of an
    animal, or to pass around a protuberance extending therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  The device of this subclass may extend about the torso,
    neck, ear, leg, etc. of an animal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    850+,   for a protective shield or apparel, particularly subclass 855 for a
    neck or throat protector.

    856+,   for a body or appendage encircling collar or band, generally;
    particularly subclass 860 for such a collar or band having a releasable
    chemical agent for a purpose other than antivermin treating or cleaning.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 124+ for
    vermin destroying.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclass 411
    for a flea collar where the collar is only nominally recited as a support
    for the insecticide.


CLS 119/655
TXT Having means passing through the animal skin; e.g., ear tag:

    Device under subclass 653 including means intended to pass through a dermal
    portion of an animal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    834+,   for a device intended to penetrate the snout of an animal to
    control the animal.


CLS 119/656
TXT Having animal actuated treatment supply:

    Device under subclass 652 including a storage of treating material and a
    means to bring or allow passage of the material from storage to the
    location of application which is effected by the animal being treated.


CLS 119/657
TXT With food trough or attractant means:

    Device under subclass 656 combined with means to provide the animal with
    food, or with particular means to appeal to the animal to approach the
    device.


CLS 119/658
TXT Animal actuated valve:

    Device under subclass 656 wherein the treatment material is flowable,
    comprising a passage with means to open and shut the passage, which means
    is operated by the action of the animal to allow flow of the material.


CLS 119/659
TXT Animal actuated transfer means moving out of reservoir:

    Device under subclass 656 including a member inside a container holding
    treatment material which member is intended to travel out of the container
    and carry said material therewith for engagement with the animal.


CLS 119/660
TXT Having capillary treatment supply wick:

    Device under subclass 652 including a generally flexible member having very
    small passages intended to transport treating material upwardly against the
    force of gravity from a storage to the point of application.


CLS 119/661
TXT Yieldable, horizontally extending web or rod adapted to slide over animal
    passing thereunder:

    Device under subclass 652 including a laterally extending (a) panel member
    or (b) bar member, which may be hollow, intended to be engaged by an animal
    passing between the member and the ground to transfer treatment material to
    the animal engaged thereby.


CLS 119/662
TXT Having distinct treatment reservoir:

    Device under subclass 661 provided with a container of treatment material
    that is separate from the web or rod.


CLS 119/663
TXT Roller:

    Device under subclass 652 including a rotatable member intended to
    rollingly engage the skin of the animal to apply treatment material thereto.


CLS 119/664
TXT Brush:

    Device under subclass 652 including a flexible, bristled member intended
    slidingly engage the skin of the animal with the exposed ends of the
    bristles to apply treatment material to the animal.


CLS 119/665
TXT Sprayer:

    Device under subclass 650 adapted to project liquid into engagement with an
    animal; e.g., from a nozzle-like member or  other type projector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 300+ for apparatus in which the
    coating material is sprayed, flung or otherwise projected onto the work.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, for spraying apparatus
    of general application.


CLS 119/666
TXT Animal actuated:

    Device under subclass 665 including means to cause or control the
    projecting of liquid, dependant on a condition of the animal being treated.


CLS 119/667
TXT Pass-through type; e.g., chute:

    Device under subclass 666 including side walls but without permanent end
    walls, intended for the animal being treated to move in one end and out the
    other.


CLS 119/668
TXT With air supply;  e.g., for drying:

    Device under subclass 665 combined with means to cause atmospheric gas to
    engage the animal.


CLS 119/669
TXT Pass-through type;  e.g., chute:

    Device under subclass 665 including side walls but without permanent end
    walls, intended for the animal being treated to move in one end and out the
    other.


CLS 119/670
TXT Teat spray:

    Device under subclass 665 particularly adapted to direct fluid into
    engagement with the udder of an animal.


CLS 119/671
TXT Having animal encasing means:

    Device under subclass 665 including structure to enclose an animal for
    spraying therein.


CLS 119/672
TXT Duster:

    Device under subclass 650 adapted to cause powder to engage an animal.


CLS 119/673
TXT Immersing chamber;  e.g., dip or wash means:

    Device under subclass 650 comprising a vessel for holding a liquid and for
    receiving an animal, or a portion of an animal to inundate the animal or
    portion under the liquid.

    (1)     Note.  A dipping vat is included herein.  Also a washing tub is
    included herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 400+ for immersion coating apparatus,
    generally.


CLS 119/674
TXT Having means to lift animal:

    Device under subclass 673 including means to raise the animal against the
    force of gravity.


CLS 119/675
TXT Transportable;  e.g., vehicle mounted:

    Device under subclass 673 particularly adapted for movement from one
    location to a distant second location.

    (1)     Note. An immersing chamber mounted on a vehicle is included herein.


CLS 119/676
TXT With restraining means:

    Device under subclass 673 combined with means intended to hold the animal.


CLS 119/677
TXT Fumigating or air supplying means:

    Device under subclass 650 adapted to cause a vapor or gas (including
    atmospheric gas) to engage an animal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 715+ for apparatus for coating with
    gaseous or vaporized material, generally.


CLS 119/678
TXT Animal encasing:

    Device under subclass 677 comprising structure to contain substantially the
    entire animal being treated.


CLS 119/700
TXT TREADMILL:
    Subject matter under the class definition consisting of an apparatus having
    a movable surface, e.g., roller, endless belt, turntable, etc., upon which
    an animal may simulate travelling while remaining in essentially the same
    location relative to a fixed underlying supporting surface, e.g., a floor
    surface, etc.

    (1)     Note.  A treadmill may be used for a wide variety of purposes
    including exercise, amusement, breaking, training, or laboratory study
    purposes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    702+,   for an exercise or amusement device for an animal other than a
    treadmill, particularly subclasses 703+ for a device for forcing an animal
    to travel over a stationary floor, track, etc.  See the (1) Note under
    subclass 702.

    712+,   for a device for controlling an action of an animal, including a
    device for breaking or training an animal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, or Animal Powered, particularly subclass 3
    for an animal powered composite motor.

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclass 48 for an amusement
    walkway or passageway for a human having a movable floor or stair step and
    subclasses 90+ for a surface for a human riding a skiing or skating
    vehicle, e.g., for skis, ice, or roller skates, etc., including a sloped
    treadmill used to imitate a ski slope.

    482,    Exercise Devices, particularly subclass 54 for an exercise
    treadmill for use by a human.


CLS 119/701
TXT ROUNDABOUT:
    Subject matter under the class definition consisting of apparatus for
    compelling an animal to travel in a closed looped pathway while connected
    to rotatably or circuitously supported restraining or load means.

    (1)     Note.  The animal may be compelled to travel by a mechanical means,
    e.g., motor driven or by human urging.

    (2)     Note.  The purpose of the device may be for simple exercise as well
    as training or "breaking" an animal to bear a load for example.


CLS 119/702
TXT EXERCISE OR AMUSEMENT DEVICE:
    Subject matter under the class definition consisting of means used to (a)
    condition or develop a muscle of an animal or to participate in an athletic
    activity by an animal, or (b) to provide entertainment for an animal.

    (1)     Note.  A patent for a treadmill frequently discloses a use for an
    exercise or amusement purpose.  A cross-reference to this subclass array
    should be considered only if an additional exercise or amusement feature is
    also disclosed.  See the search notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14.03+, for a milking station arrangement used for sequential treatment of
    an animal for the purpose of conducting and facilitating milking in
    combination with another dairy operation such as exercising.

    15+,    for an animal maze combined with a significant confining or housing
    device.

    70,     for a device constructed to supply feed to poultry in order to
    promote exercise.

    700,    for a treadmill for an animal which may be used for an exercise or
    amusement purpose.

    712+,   for a device for controlling an action of an animal, e.g., an
    animal restraining, breaking, or training device, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    54,     Harness, appropriate subclasses for an animal harness for a draft
    or work purpose, per se, and particularly subclasses 71+ for an animal
    breaking or training harness, per se.

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, appropriate subclasses for a game-type
    amusement device involving competition between human beings.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, appropriate subclasses for a toy-type
    amusement device for a human being.

    472,    Amusement Devices, appropriate subclasses for an amusement device
    not provided for elsewhere for a human being.

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, for a game-type amusement device
    used in a game involving competition between human beings and in which a
    tangible projectile is used, and for a practice or training device used by
    a player of such a game, which practice or training device may involve
    exercising by the user.

    482,    Exercise Devices, appropriate subclasses for an exercise device for
    a human being.


CLS 119/703
TXT Animal forced to travel relative to an underlying, stationary, supporting
    surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 702 wherein the conditioning, developing, or
    entertaining means causes the animal to tread upon a static, weight bearing
    surface area, e.g., a floor, track, etc.

    (1)     Note.  The animal usually is forced to travel so that it may obtain
    a desired amount of exercise by walking, running, etc.  The device may be
    used to provide mild exercise for cooling an animal off after a race or
    other activity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    700,    for a treadmill which may simulate travel over a floor, track, etc.

    712+,   for an animal-controlling device, particularly subclasses 780+ for
    a hitching or tethering device employing a rotary arm to limit the travel
    of an animal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    231,    Whips and Whip Apparatus, particularly subclasses 2.1+ for a whip
    or goad used by a human to force an animal to perform a desired action.


CLS 119/704
TXT Constrained to travel in circuitous path:
    Subject matter under subclass 703 wherein the treading causing means limits
    the treading of the animal to a closed loop pathway.


CLS 119/705
TXT Hurdle, jump, or support therefor:

    Subject matter under subclass 702 wherein the conditioning, developing, or
    entertaining means is a barrier which the animal must leap over or across
    or is a holding member for such a barrier.

    (1)     Note.  The animal may leap over or across the barrier while
    traveling along an underlying surface, e.g., in a steeplechase hurdle,
    etc., or it may leap over or across it as a goal in itself, e.g., in a high
    jump or broad jump attempt, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, particularly subclasses 200+ for a support bracket in
    general, which may be used to support a member against the force of gravity.

    256,    Fences, for fence structure.

    482,    Exercise Devices, particularly subclasses 15+ for a hurdle or jump
    used by a human being in a track or field sport.


CLS 119/706
TXT Climbing or claw scratching device:
    Subject matter under subclass 702 wherein the animal may ascend, descend,
    or crawl upon the conditioning, developing, or entertaining means or may
    abrade its nail thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    for an animal confining or housing device which may also have a
    climbing or claw scratching feature, including an animal maze combined with
    a significant confining or housing device.

    28.5,   for an animal bed or rest which may also have a climbing or claw
    scratching feature.

    83+,    for a device against which an animal may rub for a grooming purpose.


CLS 119/707
TXT Toy, lure, fetch, or related device:

    Subject matter under subclass 702 wherein the conditioning, developing, or
    entertaining means is to be played with, entice, or be retrieved by the
    animal or is associated with such means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15.1+,  for a confining device used for management of an animal upon a
    roadway, racetrack, or other defined path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, particularly subclasses
    2+ for a decoy usually used to lure an animal into danger.

    104,    Railways, particularly subclasses 89+ for a suspended device and
    subclasses 118+ for a monorail railway device, each of which may be a lure
    carrier used for a dog race.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, particularly subclasses 141+ for a monorail
    carrier and subclasses 148+ for a suspended carrier, each of which may be a
    lure carrier used for a dog race.

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, appropriate subclasses for an
    apparatus for mechanically projecting an object.

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, appropriate subclasses for a game-type
    amusement device involving competition between human beings.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, appropriate subclasses for a toy-type
    amusement device for a human being.

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclasses 86+ for a racetrack for
    a nonhuman animal, often in combination with a lure which may be used to
    lead an animal, e.g., a dog, etc., around the racetrack.

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, for a game-type amusement device
    used in a game involving competition between human beings and in which a
    tangible projectile is used, and for a practice or training device used by
    a player of such a game, which practice or training device may involve
    exercising by the user.


CLS 119/708
TXT Suspended:
    Subject matter under subclass 707 wherein the means being played with,
    enticing, or being retrieved by the animal is hung from above.


CLS 119/709
TXT Mastication:
    Subject matter under subclass 707 wherein the means being played with,
    enticing, or being retrieved is constructed for chewing by the animal.

    (1)     Note.  While any toy, lure, or fetch device may be bitten by the
    animal using it, to be proper for this subclass it must be intended to have
    a significant chewing related operation performed on it by the animal.


CLS 119/710
TXT Flavor enhanced or supplemented:
    Subject matter under subclass 709 wherein the means constructed for chewing
    has an existing taste intensified, or a new taste added thereto, which
    appeals to the animal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    711,    for a toy, lure, or fetch device having a scent attractant, e.g., a
    catnip-filled toy, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    particularly subclass 805 for a pet food for a dog, cat, bird, or fish and
    subclass 807 for feed for poultry or a ruminant animal.


CLS 119/711
TXT Having scent attractant:
    Subject matter under subclass 707 wherein the means being played with,
    enticing, or being retrieved has a smell which appeals to the animal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes a catnip filled toy, lure, or fetch
    device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    710,    for a flavor enhanced toy, lure, or fetch device which an animal
    chews and which may also have a scent attractant.


CLS 119/712
TXT ANIMAL CONTROLLING OR HANDLING (E.G., RESTRAINING, BREAKING, TRAINING,
    SORTING, CONVEYING, ETC.):Subject matter under the class definition wherein
    animal limiting means is used to deter an undesired action or promote a
    desired action of an animal; or to manipulate, direct, or cause an animal
    or body part thereof to be restrained, positioned, or repositioned, or to
    move an animal to a different location.

    (1)     Note.  The action of the animal may be deterred or promoted either
    physically, e.g., by a physical restraint, an electrical shock, etc., or
    mentally, e.g., by breaking, training, etc.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass array is the residual location for a tether
    for a lower (i.e., nonhuman) animal not classifiable elsewhere.  Subclass
    770, indented hereunder, is the residual location for a tether for a human
    being.

    (3)     Note.  A body-carried diaper or manure pouch used to collect animal
    waste or to prevent an animal from depositing its waste in an undesirable
    location is also not considered to control the animal.  See the search
    notes below.

    (4)     Note.  An animal-controlling device deters or promotes an action of
    an animal to which it is secured while a shield for subclass 850 below acts
    as a barrier, pad, etc., for protecting the animal from an external source,
    e.g., dirt, a disease, an injury, an insect, or itself or another animal,
    etc.

    (5)     Note.  A collar encircling a torso, neck, or appendage or a harness
    embracing a portion of an animal body is excluded from this subclass unless:

    (a)     it is combined with animal-controlling structure, e.g., a claimed
    drag, weight, leash, poke, etc., or

    (b)     by its structural nature it is adapted to restrain a body part on
    its own, e.g., a mouth restraining muzzle, etc.  See the search notes below.

    (6)     Note.  A method of controlling an animal would be classified in the
    subclass providing for the associated structure used in the method.  A
    method not associated with any particular structure, or using a structure
    not provided for hereunder, would be classified in this subclass (712).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    for an animal maze combined with a significant confining or housing
    device.

    700,    for a treadmill which may also control an animal.

    702+,   for an exercise or amusement device which may also control an
    animal.

    770,    for a tether for a human being having a disclosure not classifiable
    in another class.  See the (2) Note above.

    840,    for animal sorting.

    843+,   for an animal relocating, loading, or unloading means, e.g., a
    gangway, chute, lift, conveyor, turntable, elevator, etc., particularly for
    a conveyor which may include an animal holding device used only for the
    purpose of restraining an animal while being conveyed.

    850+,   for a body-carried protective shield or apparel for an animal used
    as a barrier or pad and not as means for controlling an action of the
    animal.

    856+,   for a body- or appendage-encircling collar, band, or harness not
    combined with animal controlling, handling, or protecting means,
    particularly subclass 857 for a collar or body harness for a human being
    having a disclosure not classifiable in another class.  See the search
    class notes thereunder for other classes having harness structure.

    867+,   for a manure.

    907,    for a harness of general utility.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, for a human body harness in combination with or
    constituting apparel, including a bib for an infant which may also be used
    to restrain the infant, and particularly subclasses 44 and 45 for a body
    brace or support, subclass 102  for vest apparel, and subclasses 300
    through 342 for a garment supporter or retainer, e.g., subclass 311 for a
    belt having a handle which is worn by a motorcyclist so that a motorcycle
    passenger may grasp the handle as necessary.

    5,      Beds, for a bed or bed accessory for a human body, particularly
    subclasses 600+ for a body harness used with an invalid bed or surgical
    support and subclasses 424+ for a restraint disclosed for protecting a
    person from injury or from rolling out of a bed.

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., particularly subclasses 712+ for a
    drawstring or laced-fastener, subclasses 115+ for a cord or rope holder,
    subclasses 163+ for a buckle, subclasses 455+ for a clasp, subclasses 572+
    for a separable fastener, subclasses 598.4+ for a snap hook, subclasses
    698.1+ for a hook and subclass 265 for a strap-end-attaching device.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 299+ for a card,
    label, or tag, per se, which may be intended for attachment to a Class 119
    device, e.g., a collar, harness, leash, etc., particularly subclasses 300+
    for an animal marker, subclass 303 for a harness-supported animal marker,
    subclass 304 for a leg band type animal marker, subclasses 633+ for an
    identification bracelet and subclasses 642+ for a card, label, or tag
    holder.

    54,     Harness, for an animal harness for a draft, work, breaking, or
    training purpose, particularly subclasses 71+ for a harness for controlling
    a vicious or unruly animal or training an animal to trot, pace, etc.

    114,    Ships, particularly subclass 39.2 for a body harness designed to be
    connected to a sailboard-type marine vessel.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, particularly subclasses 22+ for automatic
    and periodic actuation of a mechanical signal which may be used to frighten
    an animal.

    128,    Surgery, particularly subclasses 846+ for a body protecting or
    restraining device for a patient or an infant, particularly subclasses 869+
    for a body restraining or immobilizing device, e.g., cropped ear restraint
    for a dog.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, particularly subclasses 3+ for a
    torso harness disclosed for supporting a workman or for a rescue or escape
    operation and which may employ an anchoring tether.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, for a body harness for a living
    bearer combined with package and article carrying means, particularly
    subclass 158 for a carrier for a person and subclass 184 for means attached
    to a person for towing an object along a surface, e.g., a game animal, etc.

    231,    Whips and Whip Apparatus, for a whip-related apparatus which may be
    used to control an animal.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 370+ for a reeling
    device.

    244,    Aeronautics, for the combination of significant aircraft structure
    with body harness, particularly subclass 122 for a device for holding an
    occupant to an aircraft seat and subclass 151 for a device for attaching a
    parachute to a person or object being lowered slowly to the ground.

    256,    Fences, for a fence used as a physical barrier to an animal.

    269,    Work Holders, for apparatus used to restrain a work piece during a
    work treating operation.

    280,    Land Vehicles, particularly subclass 290 for a body harness for
    attaching a human occupant to an occupant-propelled wheeled vehicle and
    subclasses 801.1+ for a safety belt or harness combined with significant
    vehicle structure and used to prevent, restrain, or limit movement of a
    human occupant relative to the vehicle in the event of a sudden, unexpected
    movement.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, particularly subclass 275 for a belt or garment
    restrainer with an oscillatory suspended baby jumper and subclasses 464+
    for a body restrainer disclosed for confining a seated human occupant to a
    chair or seat, wherein the seat may be in a vehicle if no significant
    vehicle structure is claimed.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, particularly subclass 225 for subject
    matter related to teaching a human being the occupations of farming,
    ranching, or occupations otherwise related to an animal.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, particularly subclasses 80+ for
    a water rescue or life protecting apparatus for a person which may include
    tether structure.

    452,    Butchering, particularly subclasses 54+ for a device employed in
    holding an animal for slaughtering.

    602,    Surgery:  Splint, Brace, or Bandage, subclasses 1+ for an
    orthopedic bandage for a human or an animal, particularly subclasses 5+ for
    a splint or brace.

    604,    Surgery, particularly subclasses 358+ for an absorbent body-carried
    pad, e.g., a diaper, etc., for a human or an animal.

    606,    Surgery, particularly subclasses 204.15+ for an instrument for
    applying pressure to the head of a human or animal, e.g., for bending a
    horn, etc.


CLS 119/713
TXT Bird:
    Subject matter under subclass 712 wherein the animal being limited is
    taxonomically classified in the class Aves, i.e., a bird.

    (1)     Note.  To be properly classified as an original classification
    hereunder, the claimed disclosure of a patent must restrict use of a
    device, or a portion thereof, to controlling a bird.  An animal-controlling
    device having general utility on a variety of animals, or specifically
    directed to an animal other than a bird, is found elsewhere under subclass
    712.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    843+,   for bird relocating, loading, or unloading, e.g., a conveyor, etc.

    853,    for a bird-carried shield for protecting it or for protecting
    another being or object from a bird.


CLS 119/714
TXT Body worn:
    Subject matter under subclass 713 wherein the limiting means is carried
    about upon the anatomy of the bird.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    853,    for a body-carried bird protective shield or apparel.


CLS 119/715
TXT Head carried:
    Subject matter under subclass 714 wherein the limiting means is configured
    to be supported upon a head portion of the bird anatomy.

    (1)     Note.  This type of device is often used as an "antipicking" or
    "antipecking" device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    821+,   for an animal-carried mouth guard used to limit the use of the
    mouth of an animal other than a bird, e.g., a muzzle, etc.


CLS 119/716
TXT Suspends inverted bird by leg or foot only:
    Subject matter under subclass 713 wherein the limiting means supports the
    bird upside down in a freely hanging manner solely by a lower limb or
    extremity thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    728,    for means for suspending an animal other than a bird.

    816+,   for an animal-carried leg restraining device.

    843+,   for a bird relocating, loading, or unloading means, e.g., a
    conveyor, etc., that suspends a bird upside down.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    452,    Butchering, particularly subclass 53 for apparatus for conveying a
    live animal to slaughtering apparatus.


CLS 119/717
TXT Handheld catching and holding tool:
    Subject matter under subclass 713 wherein the limiting means is a
    hand-carried implement which may be manipulated by a human user to both
    capture and to inhibit movement of the bird.

    (1)     Note.  A bird catching and holding tool usually has a bird engaging
    portion which embraces some part of the bird while being readily removable
    from the bird without inflicting injury.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    751+,   for a holding crate or trap for controlling an animal.

    769+,   for a hitching device used to secure or tether an animal.

    801+,   for a hand held animal catching and holding tool not restricted to
    or specifically designed to catch and hold a bird.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, particularly subclasses
    58+ for a trap for a burglar or an animal which is not domesticated.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, particularly subclasses
    106+ for a similarly used grapple tool having a pivoted jaw.


CLS 119/718
TXT Responsive to voice (e.g., bark, cry, etc.) of animal:
    Subject matter under subclass 712 wherein the limiting means reacts to a
    vocal sound created by the animal.

    (1)     Note.  The limiting means may react to a vocal sound actually
    emitted by the animal or to the vocal sound as it is being generated, e.g.,
    by detecting the vibration of a vocal cord of the animal, etc.  The vocal
    sound may be in the form of a bark, cry, screech, scream, shriek, howl,
    bleat, neigh, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    859,    for a collar with an electrical element.

    908,    for a shocking device used to control an animal.


CLS 119/719
TXT Mechanical wave producing device (e.g., sound, ultrasound, vibration,
    etc.):Subject matter under subclass 712 wherein the limiting means
    generates a vibratory energy wave which is transmitted through a medium to
    deter or promote the action of the animal.

    (1)     Note.  Limiting means using ultrasonic sound to control the animal
    is included in this subclass.  The sound may control the animal directly or
    indirectly, e.g., by ultrasonic sound activation of an electrical shocking
    collar.  Ultrasonic sound is an acoustic frequency above approximately
    20,000 cycles per second which is higher than is detectable by the human
    ear.

    (2)     Note.  The transmission medium may be air, water, the body of the
    animal, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    720+,   for an electromagnetic remote control device for controlling an
    animal.

    859,    for a collar with an electrical element.

    908,    for an electrical device for controlling an animal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, particularly subclasses 22+ for a periodic
    mechanical signal for frightening an animal and subclasses 137+ for a
    mechanical horn, whistle, or compression wave generator used for a
    signaling purpose.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, particularly subclasses 384+ for an
    electrical device used for producing an audible sound for a communication
    purpose, e.g., simulated noise in a training program, etc.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, particularly subclasses 202+ for a
    mouth-operated device for producing sound other than music, e.g, a dog
    whistle, etc., and subclasses 213+ for a sound producing amusement device
    not having a mouthpiece.


CLS 119/720
TXT Electromagnetic remote control:
    Subject matter under subclass 712 wherein the limiting means employs a wave
    of the electromagnetic spectrum emitted through the air at a spaced
    distance from the animal to deter or promote the action of the animal.

    (1)     Note.  The electromagnetic wave may control the animal indirectly,
    e.g., by remote activation of an electrical shocking collar, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    719,    for a mechanical wave producing device, using sound, ultrasound,
    vibration, etc., to remotely control an animal.

    859,    for a collar with an electrical element.

    908+,   for an electrical device for controlling an animal which is in
    direct contact with the animal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, particularly subclass 16 for an
    electric motor controlled by radio energy.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, particularly subclass 825.72 for a
    radio remote control device of an insignificantly disclosed or claimed
    external art device.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, particularly subclass 176 for
    a transmitter for a remote control signal of an insignificantly claimed
    external art device.

    455,    Telecommunications, particularly subclasses 352+ for light wave
    remote control of an insignificantly claimed external art device.


CLS 119/721
TXT Animal confined to predetermined territorial location:
    Subject matter under subclass 720 wherein the limiting means restricts
    travel of the animal to a predefined geographical area.

    (1)     Note.  The remote control feature, e.g., a buried wire, above
    ground fence, central transmitter, etc., may operate in conjunction with
    animal-carried circuitry.  An above ground electric fence which only limits
    travel of the animal by direct electrical contact with the animal is not
    proper for this subclass nor is a remote control device held by a human to
    control the actions of the animal, unless the remote control device
    includes structure limiting the animal to a predetermined territorial
    location.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    256,    Fences, particularly subclass 10 for an above ground electric fence
    which imparts a shock to an animal coming into contact with it.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, particularly subclass 564 for a
    condition responsive indicating system in which the entry or attempted
    entry by a living being into a protected area is detected and subclass 573
    for a condition responsive indicating system which responds to a condition
    of a human being or an animal other than indicating its location.


CLS 119/722
TXT Having tiltable support:
    Subject matter under subclass 712 wherein the limiting means includes a
    repositionable member for holding the animal against the pull of gravity
    during turning movement of the member from an initial animal holding
    orientation to a different animal holding orientation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    728,    for a restraint which suspends an animal against the pull of
    gravity and does not involve tilting a support.

    753+,   for a stationary table used as an animal restraint.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, for a bed or bed accessory which may be tiltable while
    supporting a human body, particularly subclasses 607+ and 610 for a
    tiltable invalid bed or surgical support and subclasses 424+ for a
    restraint disclosed for protecting a person from injury or from rolling out
    of a bed and subclasses 633+ for a support means for supporting back
    portions of a user sitting or reclining on a bed.

    128,    Surgery, particularly subclass 845 for a human body rest, support,
    or positioner used for a therapeutic purpose.

    248,    Supports, for a support not limited to use in a particular art. For
    structure for retaining an article on a support surface see subclass 499
    for a tie down, subclasses 500+ for a hold-down, or subclass 510 for a
    clamp-down retainer.


CLS 119/723
TXT About longitudinal axis only:
    Subject matter under subclass 722 wherein the animal holding member rotates
    solely about an axial line generally parallel with a longitudinal line
    passing through the animal along its long dimension.

    (1)     Note.  The longitudinal line would be generally parallel to the
    spine of a vertebrate animal and extend from the head or shoulder area to
    the tail or rear end of the animal.  The longitudinal axis does not
    necessarily pass through the body of the animal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, particularly subclasses 607+ for an invalid bed or surgical
    support for a human which is tiltable about a longitudinal axis.


CLS 119/724
TXT Including flexible animal securing element:
    Subject matter under subclass 723 wherein the animal holding member has a
    readily bendable animal fastening component, e.g., a strap, cord, chain,
    etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    725+,   for a flexible sling restraint which suspends an animal against the
    pull of gravity and does not involve a tilting support.


CLS 119/725
TXT Body sling:
    Subject matter under subclass 712 wherein the limiting means employs a
    flexible band or strand passing beneath the torso of the animal to support
    the animal.

    (1)     Note.  A sling may be provided with means for partially or wholly
    raising the animal off its feet.  The flexible band or strand may be of any
    width and may be made from a plurality of rigid segments, e.g., from chain
    links, etc., which when taken as a whole form a flexible band or strand.  A
    flexible band or strand passing beneath the animal, absent any disclosure
    for supporting the weight of the animal, is not considered to be a body
    sling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    724,    for a tiltable support which rotates only about a longitudinal axis
    and which includes a flexible animal securing element.

    757,    for a stationary table having a downwardly curved animal support
    portion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, particularly subclass 89.1 for a sling used in an invalid
    lift or transfer for a human.


CLS 119/726
TXT With discrete leg restraint:
    Subject matter under subclass 725 wherein the flexible band or strand for
    supporting the animal is combined with separate limiting means for holding
    a limb of the animal which is used for land travel.

    (1)     Note.  The discrete leg restraint may merely restrain the leg from
    moving or may be used to position the leg so that it, or a part thereof,
    may be worked upon, e.g., during the shoeing of a horse, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    816+,   for an animal-carried leg restraint.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, particularly subclasses 17+ for a bed section for supporting
    a human which moves out forwardly or backwardly relative to a bed.


CLS 119/727
TXT Wheeled:
    Subject matter under subclass 725 wherein the flexible band or strand for
    supporting the animal has travel wheels associated therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    843+,   for an animal handling conveyor for moving an animal from one
    location to another.


CLS 119/728
TXT Suspending:
    Subject matter under subclass 712 wherein the limiting means supports a
    major portion of the animal in a freely hanging manner against the pull of
    gravity.

    (1)     Note.  The animal does not necessarily hang completely above the
    ground.  A portion of the animal, e.g., its feet, etc., may lightly touch
    an underlying ground or floor surface.  A downward pointing, cone shaped
    holder in which an animal is wedged in a head-first position while being
    worked upon, e.g., castrated, inoculated, having a nose ring inserted,
    etc., is not considered to suspend the animal in a freely hanging manner.
    See the search notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for an easily portable animal carrying structure, e.g., a bag,
    etc., which may be suspended during transportation by a handle.

    722+,   for a tiltable support which may at times suspend an animal against
    the pull of gravity depending on the orientation of the support.

    751+,   for a holding crate or trap for confining or capturing an animal,
    including a cone shaped holder in which an animal is wedged in a head-first
    position while being worked upon. See the (1) Note above.

    753+,   for a stationary table used as an animal restraint.

    843,    for an animal elevator.


CLS 119/729
TXT Head or neck stock:
    Subject matter under subclass 712 wherein the limiting means is a rigid
    framework which securely holds the head or neck region of the animal in a
    substantially immovable position.

    (1)     Note.   The head or neck region of an animal is considered to
    contain the skull, brain, and upper vertebrae of a vertebrate animal, e.g.,
    a head or neck of a cow, hog, etc., and is located above or in front of the
    main trunk of the body of the animal, e.g., in front of its shoulder, etc.

    (2)     Note.  While a head or neck stock is a rigid framework, it may
    include a rigid component which pivots, slides, shifts, etc., into a fixed
    position relative to the animal, or another part of the framework.  A mere
    nose hole in a wall is not considered to be a head or neck stock.

    (3)     Note.  A head or neck stock may be used to facilitate the
    application of another restraining device, the removal of the animal's
    coat, the performance of a surgical operation, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    713+,   for an immobilizing device for holding a bird in a substantially
    immovable position.

    738+,   for a stanchion for restraining an animal while permitting more
    freedom of movement than a head or neck stock.  See the (3) Note thereunder.

    800,    for a removable lip or nose clasp, e.g., a twitch, etc.

    814+,   for an animal-carried restraining device for inhibiting the use of
    a specific body part, particularly 815 for limiting bending of the neck,
    and 837 for limiting use of the head, face, or horn to, for example, butt
    or gore.

    855,    for a neck or throat protector.

    856+,   for a body- or appendage-encircling collar or band worn by an
    animal and not combined with a controlling, handling, or protecting means.

    907,    for a harness of general utility.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    452,    Butchering, particularly subclasses 54+ for a device employed in
    holding an animal for slaughtering.


CLS 119/730
TXT Animal actuated:
    Subject matter under subclass 729 wherein the rigid framework is directly
    activated into a securing position by contact with the animal.


CLS 119/731
TXT Having head or neck gate pivoted about vertical axis:
    Subject matter under subclass 730 wherein the rigid framework includes a
    member which securely holds a head or neck region of the animal by rotating
    into engagement therewith about an upright axis.

    (1)     Note.  See the (1) Note under subclass 729 for a description of the
    head or neck region of an animal.


CLS 119/732
TXT And crate having movable clamping side member:
    Subject matter under subclass 729 wherein the rigid framework further
    includes a confining enclosure having therein a relatively maneuverable,
    clasping, border element for applying a confining pressure to a side of the
    animal.

    (1)     Note.  The side member may be a wall of the crate itself or may be
    distinct therefrom.

    (2)     Note.  To be proper for this subclass the crate must be used for
    more than just a mere housing, feeding, or milking purpose where
    immobilization of the animal is not essential.  The immobilization may be
    necessary to enable shearing, branding, treatment by a veterinarian, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14.03+, for a milking station arrangement used for the purpose of
    conducting and facilitating milking or in combination with another dairy
    operation, e.g., milk delivery, animal feeding, washing, exercising, etc.

    15+,    for an animal confining or housing device such as a cage, coop,
    kennel, pen, or stall for confining an animal to a comparatively restricted
    area for protecting it against intruders, unfavorable conditions of
    weather, or for facilitating its care and management.

    752,    for a crate or trap having an adjustable animal positioning or
    accommodating means but without a head or neck stock.


CLS 119/733
TXT Pivoting about horizontal axis:
    Subject matter under subclass 732 wherein the border element rotates about
    an axial line perpendicular to vertical, i.e., about a horizontal axial
    line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    734,    for a head stock having dual head or neck gates which pivot.


CLS 119/734
TXT Dual pivoting head or neck gates:
    Subject matter under subclass 729 wherein the rigid framework includes two
    opposing members which securely hold a head or neck region of the animal by
    swinging into engagement therewith.

    (1)     Note.  See the (1) Note under subclass 729 for a description of the
    head or neck region of an animal.


CLS 119/735
TXT One head or neck gate moves relative to second, stationary gate:Subject
    matter under subclass 729 wherein the rigid framework includes a member
    which engages one side of a head or neck region of the animal by moving
    with respect to another opposing, nonmoving member which engages an
    opposite side of the head or neck region to thereby securely hold the head
    of the animal.

    (1)     Note.  See the (1) Note under subclass 729 for a description of the
    head or neck region of an animal.


CLS 119/736
TXT Vertically moving gate:
    Subject matter under subclass 735 wherein the moving member travels up or
    down into engagement with a bottom or topside, respectively, of the head or
    neck region of the animal.


CLS 119/737
TXT Dual sliding head or neck gates maintaining parallel relationship during
    movement:Subject matter under subclass 729 wherein the rigid framework
    includes two opposing members which have evenly spaced animal engaging
    portions for securely holding a head or neck region of the animal by
    gliding into engagement therewith while preserving the even spacing
    throughout all ranges of motion.

    (1)     Note.  See the (1) Note under subclass 729 for a description of the
    head or neck region of an animal.


CLS 119/738
TXT Stanchion:
    Subject matter under subclass 712 wherein the limiting means consists of
    horizontally spaced, upright members which engage opposite sides of a neck
    region of the animal to prevent the animal from retracting its head region
    therethrough, i.e., a stanchion.

    (1)     Note.  The term "stanchion" is generally used to connote the entire
    frame assembly used to hold an animal in a desired location.  An upright
    member is frequently called a  stanchion bar, a neck bar, or a restraining
    arm.  At least one of the upright members of a stanchion is usually
    pivotally or slidably supported such that it can be moved away from the
    other upright member to admit the head and neck of the animal to be
    restrained.  It can then be moved toward locking engagement relative to the
    other upright member to embrace the neck and prevent withdrawal of the
    head.  An upright member may be made from a flexible material or plural
    rigid members acting as an upright member, e.g., a chain, etc.  If one of
    the upright members is intended to travel along with the head or neck
    region of the animal as it moves up or down, the moving member is
    considered to be part of a tether and not part of a stanchion.

    (2)     Note.  The head region of an animal is considered to contain the
    skull and brain and is attached to the neck region, which contains the
    upper vertebrae and throat of a vertebrate animal, e.g., a head or neck of
    a cow, hog, etc.  The neck region is located immediately above or in front
    of the main trunk of the body of the animal, e.g., in front of its
    shoulder, etc.

    (3)     Note.  A stanchion differs from a head or neck stock in that it
    permits more freedom of movement.  A head or neck stock more firmly clamps
    or immovably holds the neck of the animal and is designed to reduce to a
    minimum any movement of the head or neck, while a stanchion is designed
    simply to prevent escape of the animal from its stall or to segregate it
    for a feeding or housing purpose.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    729+,   for a head or neck stock which holds the head or neck region of an
    animal in a substantially immovable position.

    783,    for an upright member intended to travel along with the head or
    neck region of the animal as it moves up or down as part of a tether.

    814+,   for an animal-carried restraining device for inhibiting the use of
    a specific body part, particularly 815 for limiting bending of the neck,
    and 837 for limiting use of the head, face, or horn to, for example, butt
    or gore.


CLS 119/739
TXT Multiple stanchions:
    Subject matter under subclass 738 wherein plural sets of the horizontally
    separated, upright members prevent plural animals from retracting their
    head regions therethrough.

    (1)     Note.  To be proper for this subclass, more than one stanchion must
    be claimed, or connecting or controlling structure for more than one
    stanchion, e.g., for causing simultaneous securement or release, etc., must
    also be claimed.  Mere disclosure that a single stanchion may be used in a
    multiple stanchion environment without any claimed structure relating to
    the multiple stanchion environment is not proper for this subclass.


CLS 119/740
TXT Having animal actuated securing means:
    Subject matter under subclass 739 wherein one of the sets of upright
    members includes an animal-operated fastening means which causes one of the
    upright members to move into and remain in an animal contacting position.


CLS 119/741
TXT Having longitudinally slidable actuating mechanism:
    Subject matter under subclass 739 wherein one of the sets of upright
    members includes a linearly translating activating means which causes one
    of the upright members to move into or out of an animal contacting position.

    (1)     Note.  While only one of the upright members for one of the
    stanchions needs to be actuated by the mechanism, the mechanism usually
    actuates at least one of the upstanding shafts for all of the stanchions.


CLS 119/742
TXT Bottom-pivoted stanchion bar pivots near vertical centerline of
    stanchion:Subject matter under subclass 741 wherein the moving upright
    member is an upright shaft which swings about an axis near its lower end
    and located midway between the swinging upright shaft and the upright
    member cooperating therewith.

    (1)     Note.  The upright stanchion members usually have a relatively
    horizontal portion integral with, or fixedly attached to, their bottoms so
    that they can remain upright in use and still be pivotally connected near
    both their bottoms and the vertical centerline of the stanchion.  If both
    members pivot, they need not share a common axis of rotation as long as the
    axes are near each other and the vertical centerline of the stanchion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    747,    for a bottom-pivoted upright stanchion bar pivotally connected near
    both the bottom of the other upright member and the vertical centerline of
    a stanchion.


CLS 119/743
TXT Having flexible or hingedly jointed stanchion bar:
    Subject matter under subclass 738 wherein one of the upright members is a
    readily bendable member or pivotally coupled segmented member.

    (1)     Note.  The flexible stanchion bar flexes or the hingedly jointed
    stanchion bar, e.g., a chain, pivotally connected segmented bar, etc.,
    moves about its hinge area to permit the head of the animal to pass into or
    out of the stanchion.


CLS 119/744
TXT Having bottom-pivoted upright stanchion bar:
    Subject matter under subclass 738 wherein one of the upright members is an
    upright shaft which swings about an axis at or near its lower end.


CLS 119/745
TXT And member for guiding and securing upper end of stanchion bar:Subject
    matter under subclass 744 wherein the stanchion further includes a
    component which both positions and fastens a top end portion of the
    swinging upright shaft as it swings about the axis into an animal
    contacting position.

    (1)     Note.  The member may guide the upper end of the pivoted upright
    bar directly or indirectly, e.g., by guiding securing structure attached
    thereto, etc. A plurality of pivotally connected rigid links or other
    flexible element connecting the upper ends of the stanchion bars and used
    solely to move the pivoted upright stanchion bar rather than just guiding
    and securing it are not proper for this subclass.  The axis about which the
    stanchion bar pivots and any structure related thereto is not considered to
    be a guiding and securing means.


CLS 119/746
TXT Upper end of stanchion bar travels in guiding slot:
    Subject matter under subclass 745 wherein the top end portion of the
    swinging upright shaft swings in an elongated opening portion of the
    positioning and fastening component.


CLS 119/747
TXT Pivotally connected near bottom and vertical centerline of stanchion:

    Subject matter under subclass 744 wherein the swinging upright shaft swings
    about an axis which is both close to the lower end of the other upright
    member and is located approximately midway between the swinging upright
    shaft and the other upright member.

    (1)     Note.  The upright stanchion members usually have a relatively
    horizontal portion integral with, or fixedly attached to, their bottoms so
    that they can remain upright in use and still be pivotally connected near
    both their bottoms and the vertical centerline of the stanchion.  If both
    bars pivot, they need not share a common axis of rotation as long as the
    axes are near each other and the vertical centerline of the stanchion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    742,    for a multiple stanchion arrangement which has a stanchion which is
    actuated by a longitudinally slidable actuating mechanism and which has a
    bottom- pivoted upright stanchion bar which pivots near the vertical
    centerline of the stanchion.


CLS 119/748
TXT Opposing upright stanchion bars both pivot:

    Subject matter under subclass 747 wherein each of the upright members are
    upright shafts which swing about axes which are both close to their lower
    ends and are located approximately midway between them.

    (1)     Note.  See the (1) Note under subclass 747 above.


CLS 119/749
TXT Suspended:

    Subject matter under subclass 738 wherein the upright members hang from a
    supporting means positioned overhead.


CLS 119/750
TXT Pivoted upright stanchion bar biased toward or away from neck-engaging
    position by spring or weight:

    Subject matter under subclass 738 wherein one of the upright members is an
    upright shaft which swings into or out of contact with the neck region of
    the animal due to the force caused by a resilient member, a heavy member,
    or a heavy portion of the upright shaft itself.


CLS 119/751
TXT Holding crate or trap:

    Subject matter under subclass 712 wherein the limiting means restrains an
    animal in a substantially fixed position in an animal confining or
    capturing enclosure.

    (1)     Note.  To be proper for this subclass the crate or trap must be
    used for more than just a mere housing, feeding, or milking purpose where
    restraining of the animal in a fixed position is not essential.  The
    restraining of the animal in a fixed position may be necessary to enable
    shearing, branding, treatment by a veterinarian, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14.03+, for a milking station arrangement used for the purpose of
    conducting and facilitating milking or in combination with another dairy
    operation, e.g., milk delivery, animal feeding, washing, exercising, etc.

    15+,    for an animal confining or housing device such as a cage, coop,
    kennel, pen, or stall for confining an animal to a comparatively restricted
    area for protecting it against intruders, unfavorable conditions of
    weather, or for facilitating its care and management.

    732+,   for a restraining crate having a head stock and movable clamping
    side member.


CLS 119/752
TXT Having adjustable animal positioning or accommodating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 751 wherein the animal confining or capturing
    enclosure includes a relatively maneuverable member for altering the
    location of the animal in the enclosure or for adapting to a feature of the
    animal, e.g., its size, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    732+,   for a restraining crate having a head stock and movable clamping
    side member which may position the animal within the crate.


CLS 119/753
TXT Platform (e.g., grooming table, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 712 wherein the limiting means is an animal
    underlying body supporting surface or stage.

    (1)     Note.  The platform may have a planar, curved, or irregular shaped
    surface, and may include means for changing the elevation of the animal for
    the purpose of placing the animal in a convenient position for the animal
    handler.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    722+,   for a tiltable support used as an animal restraint.

    728,    for an animal suspending restraint.

    843+,   for an animal elevator or moveable platform or conveyor for
    relocationg an animal or for loading or unloading a means to transport an
    animal.


CLS 119/754
TXT Having outwardly sloped, opposing planar side walls:
    Subject matter under subclass 753 wherein the animal underlying, supporting
    platform has flat upstanding border portions extending angularly away from,
    and opposite to, each other.

    (1)     Note.  The side walls, due to their outward slopes, may support
    part or, if V-shaped, all of the body of the animal.


CLS 119/755
TXT Having distinct limb restraint:
    Subject matter under subclass 753 wherein the animal underlying, supporting
    platform includes an individual armor leg clasping member which limits free
    movement of the arm or leg.

    (1)     Note.  A stationary table having a body restraint which also clasps
    a limb of the animal is not proper for this subclass and is found elsewhere
    under subclass 753.


CLS 119/756
TXT Having animal positioning restraint:
    Subject matter under subclass 753 wherein the animal underlying, supporting
    platform includes a body clasping member which helps the platform hold the
    body of the animal in a specific orientation.

    (1)     Note.  The animal positioning restraint often helps support the
    animal on the table in a standing position, e.g., for a grooming or
    veterinary purpose, etc., but is not intended to supplant the table as the
    primary means of supporting the animal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    725+,   for a body sling which is intended to be the primary means of
    supporting the animal.


CLS 119/757
TXT Having downwardly curved animal supporting portion:
    Subject matter under subclass 753 wherein the animal underlying, supporting
    platform has a generally U-shaped animal holding component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    725+,   for a body sling having a flexible band or strand passing beneath
    the torso of an animal to suspend the animal in a hanging manner.

    728,    for a restraint from which the animal is suspended in a hanging
    manner.


CLS 119/758
TXT Animal-carried hook or extension for engaging and preventing breaching or
    lifting of fence or barrier (e.g., poke, drag hook, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 712 wherein the limiting means includes an
    animal-supported projection (i.e., extension) having a proximal portion
    supported from an animal and a distal portion protruding away from or
    dragged by the animal, the distal portion being constructed and arranged to
    contact, hook onto, or otherwise interact with a barricade (e.g., fence,
    etc.) in order to either stop the progress of the animal or otherwise
    discourage the desire of the animal to pass through or over (i.e., breach)
    the barricade, or to prevent the animal from pushing upward (i.e., lifting)
    or otherwise tearing off a part of the barricade (e.g., fence wire, board,
    etc.).

    (1)     Note.  The extension is usually of the nature of a lever-type arm
    or hooklike member that extends from the animal in a manner so as to
    increase the apparent size of the animal as "seen" by a fence, so as to
    engage the fence as the animal attempts to breach the fence.  However, an
    extension can be in the form of, for example, an anchor like hook dragged
    by the animal via a tether so as to hook onto the fence if the animal does
    proceed to pass through or over a fence.

    (2)     Note.  A device classifiable in this subclass should be
    distinguished from:

    a)      a hitching device, where an animal is held fast to something other
    than the animal to prevent roaming; or

    b)      a head-butting device, which may engage a fence and discourage
    pushing, ramming, or butting of the fence but does not rely upon an
    extension that increases the apparent size of the animal as "seen" by the
    fence.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    769+,   for hitching or tethering an animal.

    815,    for restraining an animal from a neck lowering motion that normally
    accompanies a jumping action over a fence.

    816+,   for a leg restraint to keep an animal from jumping.

    837,    for preventing pushing or ramming of a fence by a head, face, or
    horn.


CLS 119/759
TXT Having body piercing attachment as sole support from animal (e.g., nose
    ring, pin, etc.):Subject matter under subclass 758 wherein the only means
    to support the extension from the animal is by means of an element adapted
    to protrude into the skin of the animal.

    (1)     Note.  To be proper for  this subclass, the skin piercing element
    must be for purposes of supporting the extension on or from the animal, as
    opposed to an ancillary purpose such as a punishment or pain inflicting
    means provided for elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    761,    for a rigid extension that protudes from a neck-encircling support
    with a further connection to a diverse body area, wherein the further
    connection may be skin piercing.

    767,    for a rigid extension supported from the head, face, or muzzle area
    of an animal with a further connection to the animal that may be skin
    piercing.


CLS 119/760
TXT Having rigid extension protruding from neck- encircling support (e.g., bar
    with bow or collar, etc.):Subject matter under subclass 758 wherein the
    extension is a relatively stiff member (e.g., bar) intended to be supported
    for projection from an area of an animal between its ears and shoulder
    blades, exclusive, (i.e., neck), wherein the means to support the proximal
    portion of the extension to the neck of the animal includes a neck
    surrounding member (e.g., bow, collar, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  The degree of stiffness required is only that stiffness
    necessary to stop the animal from passing through the fence, or the
    stiffness required to transmit sufficient force to, for example, a pain
    inflicting pricker or spur, as distinguished from, for example, a hook
    connected to the animal via a tether.

    (2)     Note.  To be classified herein, the extension must have its most
    distally located support attachment point to the animal at a support
    located on the neck of the animal.  That is, where an extension has plural
    points of attachment to an animal support, the most distal attachment point
    of the extension governs classification.  Likewise, when the extension is
    supported from the neck and protrudes away from the animal between its ears
    or horns, classification is proper in this subclass based upon the support
    location and is not affected by the projection of the extension from an
    area other than the neck (i.e., between the ears or horns).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    758,    for a drag hook or anchor adapted to engage a fence attached to an
    animal by a tether.

    759,    for a poke having a rigid extension or hook with a skin piercing
    attachment to an animal.

    766,    for a poke having a rigid extension supported from an animal's
    head, face, ear, or horn.

    856+,   for a collar, per se.


CLS 119/761
TXT Rigid extension having further connection to or support from diverse body
    area (e.g., nostril, leg, muzzle, etc.):Subject matter under subclass 760
    including an additional animal attachment, other than the neck-encircling
    support, at a location other than the neck area.

    (1)     Note.  For such a further attachment to a diverse body area of the
    animal to be classifiable in this subclass, it must not be the attachment
    most distally located on the extension, as set forth in the Note (2) of the
    previous subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The additional attachment generally provides, for example,
    further stability for the support structure or a means to inflict
    discomfort to the animal, such as an attachment between the extension and a
    nose ring so that the extension will pull on the nose ring when the
    extension engages a fence.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    766,    for a poke having a rigid extension supported from an animal's
    head, face, ear, or horn.


CLS 119/762
TXT Neck-encircling support having connected sections relatively pivotable upon
    fence engagement by rigid extension (e.g., jointed bow, etc.):Subject
    matter under subclass 760 wherein the neck-encircling support includes a
    plurality of joined portions (i.e., sections) that are constructed to hinge
    or bend with respect to one another when the extension engages a fence
    during an attempted breach.

    (1)     Note.  Hinging or bending may be employed to, for example, activate
    a breach discouraging element such as a pricker, spur, nostril pull, etc.;
    or to reduce the cross-sectional area of the neck-encircling support to
    apply a choking pressure to the animal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    758+,   for a poke having different construction that includes a pricker or
    spur.


CLS 119/763
TXT Rigid extension pivotally connected to neck- encircling support (e.g.,
    pivoted bar, etc.):Subject matter under subclass 760 wherein the rigid
    extension is hingeably attached to the support or is otherwise adapted to
    bend with respect to the support when the distal portion of the extension
    engages a fence during an attempted breach.

    (1)     Note.  Pivoting or bending may be employed to activate a breach
    discouraging element such as a pricker, spur, nostril pull, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    758,    for a poke having a rigid extension pivotally connected to an area
    of the body other than the neck or head.

    768,    for a poke having a rigid extension pivotally connected to a head
    support.


CLS 119/764
TXT Sole extension supported below neck or head:
    Subject matter under subclass 763 having only one extension, wherein the
    one extension is rigid and is pivotally connected to the neck-encircling
    support in a hanging manner under the animal's neck or head.

    (1)     Note.  To be classifiable in this subclass, there must be only one
    extension of any kind for engaging a fence to prevent breach of the fence.
    An extension having plural spaced bars mounted to pivot in unison is
    considered to be a sole extension.


CLS 119/765
TXT Having pricker, spur, or electric shock element:
    Subject matter under subclass 760 including a breach discouraging element
    in the form of a sharply pointed objector a means for providing electric
    current to the animal, wherein the discouraging element is adapted to
    actively interact with the animal to discourage breaching when the rigid
    extension engages a fence during an attempted breach.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is not intended to provide for all
    neck-carried breach prevention devices including a pricker, spur, or
    electric shock element.  A poke having other construction that employs a
    pricker, spur, or electric shock element is properly classified in an area
    providing for the other construction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    758+,   for a poke of different construction that includes a pricker, spur,
    or electric shock element.

    859,    for a collar including an electrical element.

    908,    for electrical animal control or handling.


CLS 119/766
TXT Having rigid extension protruding from head, face, or muzzle area of animal
    (e.g., bar and halter, etc.):Subject matter under subclass 758 wherein the
    extension is a relatively stiff member (e.g., bar, hook, etc.) having its
    proximal attachment to an animal's ear, horn, or any portion of its head
    between and including its ears and nose.

    (1)     Note.  Where a rigid extension, i.e., bar, has more than one
    proximal connection to a support, especially where the connections include
    attachments to different areas of the body, classification is proper in
    this subclass when the most distally located connection of the bar is
    attached to the head.  Likewise, if a bar attached to the head protrudes
    from another area of the body (e.g., between and through the ears or horns
    over the neck), classification is proper in this subclass based upon the
    support location and is not affected by the fact that the distal fence
    engaging portion of the bar is located closer to another area of the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    758,    for a poke having a rigid extension protruding from an area of the
    body other than the neck or head.

    759,    for a poke having a rigid extension or hook with a shin piercing
    attachment to an animal.

    760+,   for a poke having a rigid extension protruding from a neck support.


CLS 119/767
TXT Having connection to or support from nostril, horn, or ear:
    Subject matter under 766 including an attachment to a nostril, horn, or ear.


CLS 119/768
TXT Rigid extension pivotally connected to animal support:
    Subject matter under subclass 766 wherein the rigid extension is hingeably
    attached to or is otherwise adapted to bend with respect to the support
    from the animal when the distal portion of the extension engages a fence
    during an attempted breach.

    (1)     Note.  Hinging or bending may be employed to activate a breach
    discouraging element such as a pricker, spur, nostril pull, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    758,    for a poke having a rigid extension pivotally connected to an area
    of the body other than the neck or head.

    763+,   for a poke having a rigid extension pivotally connected to a neck
    support.


CLS 119/769
TXT Hitching or tethering:
    Subject matter under subclass 712 including human or animal securing or the
    fastening of a human or animal utilizing a flexible or rigid elongated
    element as a rope, strap chain, or bar to keep it within certain bounds or
    radius.

    (1)     Note.  Restraining a tail of an animal from switching back and
    forth by tethering it to a stationary object or a human is not considered
    "hitching" (see subclass 811).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    701,    for hitching means connecting an animal to a roundabout.

    811,    for inhibiting tail switching by tethering.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 115+ for a cord or rope
    holder.

    54,     Harness, subclasses 6.1+ for a bridle, subclass 34 for a hitching
    strap, subclass 64 for a hitching strap holder and subclass 69 for an
    attaching or detaching device.


CLS 119/770
TXT For a human being:
    Subject matter under subclass 769 wherein the securing means is an
    elongated element which is connected to a portion of the body of a first
    person or an item worn thereon.

    (1)     Note.  The tether may be connected at one end to the person
    directly, or to a harness, a piece of clothing, or other item worn by the
    person.  At its other end it may be connected to an anchoring structure or
    to another person in the manner of a leash.  A tether in which the person
    is instructed to grasp a portion thereof voluntarily is included herein.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is the residual location for a tether for a
    human being.  If a patent does not claim a specific use but discloses a use
    found elsewhere, e.g., in Classes 5, 128, 182, 224, 244, 280, 294, 297,
    441, 472, etc., original classification should be in that class.  A patent
    having plural disclosures, none of which are claimed, would be placed as an
    original in the superior class unless the classes involved have an
    established line therebetween which would control placement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, for a human body harness in combination with or
    constituting apparel, including a bib for an infant which may also be used
    to restrain the infant, and particularly subclasses 44 and 45 for a body
    brace or support, subclass 102 for vest apparel, and subclasses 300 through
    342 for a garment supporter or retainer, e.g., subclass 311 for a belt
    having a handle which is worn by a motorcyclist so that a motorcycle
    passenger may grasp the handle as necessary.

     5,     Beds, for a bed or bed accessory for a human body, particularly
    subclasses 600+ for a body harness used with an invalid bed or surgical
    support and subclasses 424+ for a restraint disclosed for protecting a
    person from injury or from rolling out of a bed.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, particularly subclasses 3+ for a
    torso harness disclosed for supporting a workman or for a rescue or escape
    operation and which may employ an anchoring tether.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, for a body harness for a living
    bearer combined with package and article carrying means, particularly
    subclass 158 for a carrier for a person and subclass 184 for means attached
    to a person for towing an object along a surface, e.g., a game animal, etc.

    280,    Land Vehicles, particularly subclass 290 for a body harness for
    attaching a human occupant to an occupant-propelled wheeled vehicle and
    subclasses 801.1+ for a safety belt or harness combined with significant
    vehicle structure and used to prevent, restrain, or limit movement of a
    human occupant relative to the vehicle in the event of a sudden, unexpected
    movement.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, particularly subclass 275 for a belt or garment
    restrainer with an oscillatory suspended baby jumper and subclasses 464+
    for a body restrainer disclosed for confining a seated human occupant to a
    chair or seat, wherein the seat may be in a vehicle if no significant
    vehicle structure is claimed.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, particularly subclasses 80+ for
    a water rescue or life protecting apparatus for a person which may include
    tether structure.

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclasses 32+ for a roundabout
    having a suspended occupant or article carriage swinging about a vertical
    axis.


CLS 119/771
TXT Attached to vehicle:
    Subject matter under subclass 769 wherein the limiting means is connected
    to a load carrying travel conveyance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, particularly subclass 39.2 for a body harness designed to be
    connected to a sailboard-type marine vessel.

    244,    Aeronautics, the combination of significant aircraft structure with
    body harness, particularly subclass 122 for a device for holding an
    occupant to an aircraft seat.

    280,    Land Vehicles, particularly subclass 290 for a body harness for
    attaching a human occupant to an occupant-propelled wheeled vehicle and
    subclasses 801.1+ for a safety belt or harness combined with significant
    vehicle structure and used to prevent, restrain, or limit movement of a
    human occupant relative to the vehicle in the event of a sudden, unexpected
    movement.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, particularly subclasses 464+ for a body
    restrainer disclosed for confining a seated human occupant to a chair or
    seat, wherein the seat may be in a vehicle if no significant vehicle
    structure is claimed.


CLS 119/772
TXT Releasing apparatus:
    Subject matter under subclass 769 including quick liberating apparatus for
    hitched animals.

    (1)     Note.  Such apparatus is useful in case of barn fires, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    for a confining and housing device, particularly subclass 16 for a
    barn or shed adapted to facilitate animal care and protection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    54,     Harness, subclass 69 for an attaching or detaching device.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 2 for automatic operation or
    control (e.g., trips).


CLS 119/773
TXT With heat combustible or fusible actuating element:
    Subject matter under subclass 772 wherein the releasing mechanism is set in
    motion by high temperature (i.e., a barn fire) acting upon an element
    causing it to burn or melt.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 1+ for a thermal release
    or actuator.


CLS 119/774
TXT With lead line:
    Subject matter under subclass 772 including means such as a line, chain, or
    wire for leading the liberated animals from a burning barn, for example.


CLS 119/775
TXT With sprayer:
    Subject matter under subclass 772 including a spraying system for
    contacting the animal with liquid to hasten its exit upon release from a
    barn fire, for example.

    (1)     Note.  The spraying system may serve incidentally to protect the
    animal and to extinguish an adjacent fire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    665+,   for antivermin treatment, dusting, and spraying.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, subclasses 5+ for a fluid system, including a
    stationary sprinkling system.


CLS 119/776
TXT Tether-carried remote releasing device:
    Subject matter under subclass 772 wherein a tether includes attaching
    apparatus to an animal halter or collar which is operable at a distance
    therefrom to unlock the tether.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    54,     Harness, subclass 69 for an attaching or detaching device.


CLS 119/777
TXT Reciprocating bar:
    Subject matter under subclass 772 including apparatus in which endwise
    movement of a bar, rod, wire, or similar element is effective to release a
    hitching connection to an animal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    278,    Land Vehicles: Animal Draft Appliances, subclass 28 for a sliding
    pin or rod horse detacher.


CLS 119/778
TXT With spring-biased locking member:
    Subject matter under subclass 777 including a hitch engagement element
    which is urged into its nonreleasable position by a biasing member.


CLS 119/779
TXT Rotatable shaft:
    Subject matter under subclass 772 including apparatus in which rotation of
    a shaft is effective to release a hitched tethering means.


CLS 119/780
TXT Rotary arm hitching device:
    Subject matter under subclass 769 wherein the hitching device includes a
    support such as a post or picket to which an armlike element is rotatably
    secured and to which a tether is attached for hitching purposes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 30+ for tethered fixed-wing
    aircraft.

    472,    Amusement Devices, subclasses 7+ for a toy-type roundabout having a
    rotary arm, tether, etc.


CLS 119/781
TXT With spring-biased tensioning:
    Subject matter under subclass 780 including a biasing member connected with
    the rotary arm and operable to prevent undue slackening of a tether between
    the arm and an attached tethered animal.


CLS 119/782
TXT With weight-controlled tensioning:
    Subject matter under subclass 780 including a member connected with the
    rotary arm which under gravity force is functionable to prevent undue
    slackening of a tether between the arm and an attached tethered animal.


CLS 119/783
TXT Movement permitting stall hitching means:
    Subject matter under subclass 769 for holding an animal in a protective
    chamber which includes an animal neck-engaging means connected to a movable
    or slidable means which serves to secure the animal while allowing movement
    of a portion of its body such as raising or lowering its head when standing
    or resting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    54,     Harness, subclass 34 for a hitching strap.


CLS 119/784
TXT Traveler:
    Subject matter under subclass 769 wherein a tethered animal has its tether
    connected to a track follower which may travel the length of an elongated
    track allowing a substantial range of self-imparted movement or travel to
    the animal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 87+ for track hardware.

    114,    Ships, subclasses 112 and 204 a traveler.


CLS 119/785
TXT Including rolling element:
    Subject matter under subclass 784 wherein the follower incorporates at
    least one component which travels the track while turning on an axis.


CLS 119/786
TXT Portable stake or post:
    Subject matter under subclass 769 including a movably anchored upright
    support the upper part of which is constructed to securely hold one end of
    a tether.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    780+,   for an arm support often carried by a portable stake or post.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 155+ for a piercing
    or expanding earth anchor including a pole or post so equipped.

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclass 118 for a stake used with
    portable shelter.


CLS 119/787
TXT Anti-entangling:
    Subject matter under subclass 786 including a feature or device for
    preventing an animal tether from ensnaring itself around the animals legs
    or around the stake or post.


CLS 119/788
TXT Stationary hitching post:
    Subject matter under subclass 769 including a permanently mounted upright
    support or subterranean anchor means being structured to serve as a tether
    supporting hitching device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 720.1+ for an
    elongated rigid member of more general application.


CLS 119/789
TXT Automatic take-up:
    Subject matter under subclass 788 including an automatic tether retraction
    means operable when a contained tether is pulled from a post for hitching
    use to maintain the tether taut or to withdraw it into the post.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    780+,   for means causing a rotary arm to take up slack to a tether.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 385.1+ for a reeling
    device having a spring motor and a lock against winding that is responsive
    to movement of the wound material.


CLS 119/790
TXT Disappearing:
    Subject matter under subclass 788 including a hitching post or similar
    tether supporting device which is provided with a below ground casing in
    order to retract the post below ground into the casing when not in use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 351+ for a device to hold an article or thing
    from falling against the action of gravity.


CLS 119/791
TXT Tether holding attachment:
    Subject matter under subclass 788 including means mounted upon a hitching
    post for securing a tether thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 115+ for a cord or rope
    holder.


CLS 119/792
TXT Tether and animal securing means (e.g., collar, harness, etc.):Subject
    matter under subclass 769 including a tether combined with a device or
    element which encloses and fastens the neck or body part of an animal.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are devices known as "cattle ties" which
    include a neck-engaging device with tether attached to anchor the animal
    limiting its movement.

    (2)     Note.  A tether may be disclosed in the patents found in Classes 5,
    128, 182, 224, 244, 280, 294, 297, 441, and 472, especially in the
    subclasses thereof described in the search notes of subclass 770.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    856+,   for a body- or appendage-encircling collar or band (e.g., neck
    collar, leg band, etc.).

    866,    for a nose lead ring.


CLS 119/793
TXT Unitary type:
    Subject matter under subclass 792 wherein one end portion of the unitary
    tether is structured to at least partially enclose and fasten the neck or
    body of an animal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    864,    for a slip or choke collar.


CLS 119/794
TXT With retractable-reel wound collar mounted tether:
    Subject matter under subclass 792 wherein the tether is wound on a collar
    supported spool which may be spring powered, for example, to pay out or
    retract the tether to the desired extent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 370+ for a reeling
    device of general use.


CLS 119/795
TXT Tether:
    A strap or chain, or the like, fastened to an animal and used to lead the
    animal or to secure it so as to limit its range.

    (1)     Note.  A tether may be disclosed in the patents found in Classes 5,
    128, 182, 224, 244, 280, 294, 297, 441, and 472, especially in the
    subclasses thereof described in the search notes of subclass 770.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    54,     Harness, subclass 34 for a hitching strap.


CLS 119/796
TXT Retractable-reel wound:
    Subject matter under subclass 795 wherein the tether is wound on a spool
    which may be spring powered, for example, to pay out or retract the tether
    to the desired extent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 371+ for spring wound
    reel.


CLS 119/797
TXT Adjustable length:
    Subject matter under subclass 795 including a tether having apparatus
    structured to change the animal controlling extent thereof.


CLS 119/798
TXT Extensible:
    Subject matter under subclass 795 wherein the tether may be extended along
    its length by means of a device such as a spring or the inherent
    stretchability of the tether material of manufacture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, subclasses 417+ for a means
    removably supporting a projectile (which may be tethered) in a position to
    be struck and thereby projected by a player of a playing field or court
    game, and subclasses 423+ for a practice or training device for a playing
    field or court game which involves a tethered projectile or a simulation
    thereof.


CLS 119/799
TXT Rigid type (e.g., nose ring staff, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 795 wherein the tether is substantially
    inflexible or includes structure which may transform it between a flexible
    and inflexible condition.

    (1)     Note.  A tether having a substantially rigid controlling portion
    which may be combined with a flexible portion is found here.


CLS 119/800
TXT Lip or nose twitch:
    Subject matter under subclass 712 wherein the limiting means is used to
    inhibit movement of the animal by applying pressure to a fleshy,
    mouth-surrounding area, i.e., a lip area, or a nostril area of the animal.

    (1)     Note.  While the lip or nose twitch applies pressure directly to
    the lip or nose of the animal it is used to inhibit more than just the lip
    or nose.  It is usually used to inhibit the entire animal from moving while
    it is being worked upon, e.g., during shoeing, treating, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    821+,   for an animal-carried mouth or throat restraint.

    834+,   for an animal-carried snout restraint.

    866,    for a nose ring or clip.


CLS 119/801
TXT Handheld catching and holding tool:
    Subject matter under subclass 712 wherein the limiting means is a
    hand-carried implement which may be manipulated by a human user to both
    capture and to inhibit movement of the animal.

    (1)     Note.  A catching and holding tool usually has an animal engaging
    portion which embraces some part of the animal while being readily
    removable from the animal without inflicting injury.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    717,    for a hand held catching and holding tool restricted to or
    specifically designed to catch and hold a bird.

    751+,   for a holding crate or trap for controlling an animal.

    769+,   for a hitching device used to secure or tether an animal, e.g., a
    leash, tie, staff for leading an animal by a nose ring, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, particularly subclasses
    58+ for a trap for a burglar or an animal which is not domesticated.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, particularly subclasses
    106+ for a similarly used grapple tool having a pivoted jaw.


CLS 119/802
TXT Loop:
    Subject matter under subclass 801 wherein the hand-carried implement uses
    an animal body member encircling component to capture and inhibit movement
    of the animal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    606,    Surgery, particularly subclasses 121+ for a parturition assistance
    device having a loop and subclass 136 for an animal sterilization device
    which does so by application of a looplike device which crushes when
    actuated.


CLS 119/803
TXT Having loop take-up along associated shaft:
    Subject matter under subclass 802 wherein the hand-carried implement
    includes structure which reduces the size of the body member encircling
    component, i.e., the size of the loop, by moving a portion of it in or
    adjacent to an elongated, rigid member attached thereto.

    (1)     Note.  The loop take-up is not necessarily parallel to the
    associated shaft but should be in the same general direction.


CLS 119/804
TXT Having position holding means:
    Subject matter under subclass 803 wherein the hand-carried implement
    includes structure for retaining the body member encircling component
    portion in a fixed position after it has moved in or adjacent to the
    elongated, rigid member.


CLS 119/805
TXT Lariat:
    Subject matter under subclass 802 wherein the body member encircling
    component is a long ropelike member with a running noose, e.g., a lasso,
    etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., particularly subclasses 115+ for a
    cord or rope holder.


CLS 119/806
TXT Grasping tongs:
    Subject matter under subclass 801 wherein the hand-carried implement
    employs opposing, pivotally joined arms to clasp the animal.

    (1)     Note.  A hook having a pivoted latching member to prevent escape of
    the animal being caught and held is classified elsewhere since the latching
    member pivots primarily to completely encircle the animal or part thereof
    rather than to grasp it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    799,    for a nose ring lead staff.

    808,    for a hook having a pivoted cooperating latching member for
    catching and holding an animal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, particularly subclasses 300+ for a tool jaw positioned by
    relatively movable plural handles, e.g., pliers, etc.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, particularly subclasses
    8.5, 10, 11, and 86.4+ for a tong-type implement for handling an object in
    general.

    606,    Surgery, particularly subclasses 119+ for an obstetrical tong-type
    instrument.


CLS 119/807
TXT Cable actuated:
    Subject matter under subclass 806 wherein the arms are caused to pivot
    relative to each other by pulling on a ropelike member attached to one of
    the arms.


CLS 119/808
TXT Having cooperating latching member:
    Subject matter under subclass 801 wherein the hand-carried implement has an
    interrelated fastening element for preventing escape of the captured and
    inhibited animal therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  A device of this type is often in the form of a hook having
    a cooperating latching member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    776,    for a hitching device which may have a hook-shaped portion provided
    with a releasing mechanism.


CLS 119/809
TXT For inhibiting tail switching:
    Subject matter under subclass 712 wherein the limiting means obstructs or
    discourages undesirable whipping movement of a caudal appendage, i.e., a
    tail, of an animal.

    (1)     Note.  A device of this type may be used to prevent a cow from
    striking a milk pail or a person milking the cow and thus is often called a
    "cow tail holder".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., particularly subclasses 455+ for a
    clasp, clip, support-clamp, or required component thereof in general.

    54,     Harness, particularly subclass 78 for an animal tail holder of
    general or decorative application or for inhibiting tail switching but
    combined with harness for a working animal.

    269,    Work Holders, particularly subclasses 86+ for a work holder having
    relatively movable jaws for clamping, supporting, or holding an article in
    position to be operated on or treated.  See section IV under the Class 269
    class definition for related work holder locations in other classes.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, particularly subclass 176 for a stool used when
    milking an animal combined with a tail guard or holder.


CLS 119/810
TXT Combined with leg restraint:
    Subject matter under subclass 809 wherein the means for inhibiting tail
    switching further includes means for incumbering or discouraging leg
    movement of the same animal.

    (1)     Note.  A typical use for the subject matter of this class is for
    preventing kicking or bucking during a cow milking procedure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    816,    for an animal-carried device for limiting use of a leg of an animal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    54,     Harness, subclass 78 for a harness provided for in that class
    combined with a tail holder.


CLS 119/811
TXT Having flexible band or strand portion (e.g., tail tethered to another
    object):Subject matter under subclass 809 wherein the limiting means
    includes a readily bendable, elongated component, e.g., a strap, cord,
    chain, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    769+,   for a hitching device used to limit the travel of an animal.


CLS 119/812
TXT Having one-piece clamping jaws:
    Subject matter under subclass 809 wherein the limiting means has clasping,
    tail engaging members made from a single piece of material.

    (1)     Note.  The overall device may be made from more than one piece of
    material provided the members engaging the tail are made from the same
    piece of material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., particularly subclasses 545+ for a
    clasp, clip, or support clamp having opposed engaging faces formed from a
    single piece of resilient material and subclasses 570+ if formed from a
    single rigid piece of material.


CLS 119/813
TXT Having clamping jaws biased by coil spring:
    Subject matter under subclass 809 wherein the limiting means has clasping,
    tail engaging members resiliently urged toward each other by an elongated
    filament wound or molded in the form of at least two complete, similarly
    shaped loops successively coiled around a common central axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    812,    for a tail switch inhibiting device having one piece clamping jaws
    which may be biased by a separate or integral coil spring.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., particularly subclasses 530+ for a
    clasp, clip, or support clamp having a coiled portion or member for
    resiliently biasing its opposing engaging faces.


CLS 119/814
TXT Inhibiting use or movement of specific body part other than tail by
    restraint carried solely by animal (e.g., for ear, head, foot,
    etc.):Subject matter under subclass 712 wherein the limiting means is
    supported only by the body of the animal (i.e., animal carried) for
    obstructing, discouraging, or otherwise preventing a particular portion of
    its body other than its tail from accomplishing an action involving that
    particular portion of the body.

    (1)     Note.  The animal carrying the restraining device is always the
    animal being restrained.  While the device is typically carried on a part
    of the body which is to be restrained, e.g., a mouth restraint is usually
    carried on the muzzle of the animal, etc., this subclass array also
    provides for a device which is located on another part of the body from
    that being restrained, e.g., a neck-carried mouth or leg restraint, etc.,
    the classification of which is governed by the particular area of the body
    to be restrained.  A device carried on one animal to protect it from an
    external source, e.g., dirt, a disease, an insect, another animal, etc., is
    considered to be a shield and is classified elsewhere.

    (2)     Note.  Classification should be based upon what part of the body is
    being physically restrained whenever possible.  If that is not clear, then
    the part of the body being functionally restrained should be determined.
    For example, a device that prevents the neck of an animal from being turned
    a sufficient amount to bite or nurse itself would be considered a
    neck-restraining device while a similar device which permits neck movement
    but still prevents the animal from biting or nursing itself would be
    considered a mouth restraint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    725+,   for a body sling for an animal.

    729+,   for a head or neck stock for immobilizing an animal.

    769+,   for a controlling device which restrains an animal, or specific
    body part thereof, by securing it to an anchoring structure, another
    animal, or a human being.

    800,    for a lip or nose twitch which controls an animal by applying
    pressure to its lip or nose but which is used to control more than just the
    lip or nose, such as to inhibit an entire animal from moving while it is
    being worked upon, e.g., during shoeing, treating, etc.

    809+,   for inhibiting tail switching.

    850+,   for a body-carried shield used to protect an animal from an
    external source, e.g., dirt, disease, another animal, etc.

    856+,   for a body-encircling collar or band which may be used in
    combination with another element to control or restrain.

    907,    for a harness of general utility.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 869+ for a body restrainer or immobilizer.

    606,    Surgery, subclasses 204.15+ for an external pressure applicator
    applied to the head of an animal, particularly subclass 204.55 for a horn
    bender for an animal.


CLS 119/815
TXT Neck (e.g., limiting of head lifting, turning, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 814 wherein the animal-carried limiting means
    discourages or otherwise limits an animal from bending its spine in the
    area between the shoulders and the head (i.e., neck) to prevent the animal
    carrying the limiting means from lowering, lifting, or turning around its
    head.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for prevention of neck bending to
    prevent an animal from, for example, turning its head around to bite or
    nurse itself, etc.; or to inhibit motion of the neck and head that is
    associated with other actions to be prevented such as, for example, head
    lowering prior to jumping.  Prevention of neck bending should be
    distinguished from neck shielding or protecting provided for elsewhere, as
    well as preventing, by use of a neck carried device, a leg from reaching
    past the neck to, for example, scratch an ear, which is considered to be a
    leg restraint.

    (2)     Note.  A collar, per se, which is provided for elsewhere, is not
    proper for this subclass unless it is capable of preventing neck bending.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    729+,   for a head or neck stock.

    738+,   for a stanchion.

    758+,   particularly subclasses 760+, for a poke having an extension
    supported from a neck prevent an animal from breaching a fence.

    769+,   for hitching or tethering an animal's neck to another object.

    821+,   for limiting use of a mouth or throat.

    837,    for a device to prevent an animal from using its head or face to
    butt or push.

    855,    for a neck or throat protective shield or apparel.

    856+,   for a collar, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 870+ for a body-type restrainer or immobilizer.


CLS 119/816
TXT Leg or arm (e.g., hopple, fetter, suspended trammel, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 814 wherein the animal-carried limiting means
    restricts, encumbers, discourages, or otherwise prevents full use or
    movement of an animal limb other than a wing (i.e., leg or arm), or any
    foot, toe, hand, claw, etc., appended to the limb.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are animal-carried devices in
    addition to those directly attachable to a limb, such as a weight, bar,
    etc. (i.e., trammel), attachable to an animal via a collar or the like in
    such a way that the trammel will flail about and strike the animal's legs
    or other body portion as it runs, jumps, or performs other undesired
    actions involving its limbs, to thereby discourage such actions.

    (2)     Note.  Also included in this subclass is a neck-carried barrier or
    shield for preventing a foot from reaching past the neck to, for example,
    scratch an ear, which should be distinguished from a device provided for
    elsewhere such as a neck carried device to prevent a neck from bending or a
    mouth from reaching an area of the same animal to, for example, prevent
    self biting; or a protective shield in the form of a cover for a localized
    area of the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    714,    for a restraint for a bird worn on its body.

    726,    for a body sling with a leg restraint.

    755,    for a stationary table having a distinct limb restraint.

    758,    for a poke having an animal carried extension adapted to engage a
    fence to prevent jumping over the fence.

    769+,   for hitching or tethering an animal to keep it from roaming.

    810,    for prevention of tail switching combined with leg restraint.

    815,    for prevention of neck bending.

    821,    for limiting use of a mouth.

    850,    for a protective cover or shield for a localized area of the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    54,     Harness, for a harness provided for in that class combined with a
    leg restraint.

    70,     Locks, subclasses 15+ for a fetter or shackle having a lock.

    128,    Surgery, subclass 882 for a leg or foot restraint.


CLS 119/817
TXT Joint restraint:
    Subject matter under subclass 816 wherein the animal-carried leg or arm
    limiting means is connected to an animal's limb on both sides of an
    attachment of two limb bones (i.e., joint) to discourage, inhibit, or
    otherwise limit relative pivotal movement of the two limb bones at the
    joint.


CLS 119/818
TXT Leg or arm connected to diverse area of body (e.g., to collar, halter,
    etc.):Subject matter under subclass 816 wherein the animal-carried leg or
    arm limiting means includes structure attachable both to a leg or arm and
    to a different portion of the animal other than the same leg or arm to
    limit movement of the leg or arm with respect to the different portion of
    the animal.

    (1)     Note.  Connection of a leg or arm to a different portion of the
    body may be made by tethering the leg or arm to a harness, saddle, collar,
    or other similar claimed or unclaimed diverse structure mounted on or
    supported from the different portion of the body, and the diverse structure
    may serve a purpose other than leg or arm restraint, the only requirement
    being that the leg or arm limiting structure have some capability of being
    connected to the diverse structure such as by a hook, buckle, or even by
    tying.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    815,    for a neck restraint that utilizes a connection between the head or
    neck area and a leg or arm to limit head or neck bending.

    819,    for a limb restraint that includes a connection between two or more
    limbs of the same animal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 878+ for an arm or hand restrainer or
    immobilizer, and subclasses 882+ for a leg or foot restrainer or
    immobilizer.


CLS 119/819
TXT Connected to different limb (e.g., shackle, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 818 wherein the different portion of the body
    to which the leg or arm is attached is a different limb of the same animal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    54,     Harness, subclass 72 for a harness provided for in that class
    combined with a leg spreader.

    70,     Locks, subclass 18 for a shackle having a combined lock.


CLS 119/820
TXT Pressure application (e.g., clamp for tendon, flank, hip, etc.):Subject
    matter under subclass 816 wherein the animal-carried leg or arm limiting
    means includes means for applying localized pressure to an area of an
    animal's body to limit or discourage leg or arm movement.

    (1)     Note.  Pressure application is typically performed by utilizing
    jaws of a clamp to squeeze a localized area of a body such as a tendon, etc.

    (2)     Note.  The pressure is not limited to pressure applied to a limb,
    such as a limb tendon or muscle, etc., but may be applied to an area other
    than the limb, such as a flank, hip, loin, etc., so long as it functions to
    limit or discourage movement of a limb.

    (3)     Note.  The applied pressure is the restraint and not a mere vehicle
    for attaching (i.e., clamping) a restraining means to the animal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    728,    for a clamp used to attach an animal suspending device to an animal.


CLS 119/821
TXT Mouth or throat (e.g., weaning, antibiting, anticribbing, antiwindsucking,
    etc.):Subject matter under subclass 814 wherein the animal-carried limiting
    means restricts, encumbers, discourages, or otherwise prevents full use or
    movement of a jaw, tooth, tongue, or esophagus (i.e., mouth or throat).

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter classified here and in indented subclasses
    includes, but is not limited to, such functions as prevention of biting,
    cribbing, or windsucking; regulation of grazing; weaning; etc.

    (2)     Note.  Prevention of neck bending to prevent self-biting or
    self-nursing, etc., is provided for elsewhere.  See the search notes below.

    (3)     Note.  A shield or cover for a localized area of the body which
    will prevent self- biting of the covered area as well as provide a physical
    barrier to the localized area from another element, object, or animal, is
    considered to be a protective shield provided for elsewhere and not a mouth
    restraint for this subclass.  Similarly, an udder cover for a cow is
    considered to be a protective shield and not a mouth restraint for a calf.

    (4)     Note.  A device carried by an animal to be weaned that includes a
    pricker or spur intended to prick a nursing mother and discourage her from
    allowing the animal to be weaned from approaching her is considered to be a
    mouth limiting means appropriate for this and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    815,    for prevention of neck bending to prevent self-biting,
    self-nursing, etc.

    850+,   for a protective shield, particularly subclass 852 for an udder or
    teat shield.


CLS 119/822
TXT Having magnet or electrical element:
    Subject matter under subclass 821 wherein the animal-carried mouth or
    throat limiting means employs a magnetic element or an element for applying
    electrical energy to an animal.

    (1)     Note.  The electrical energy is not necessarily applied to the
    animal wearing the limiting means.  It may, for example, be applied to
    shock the animal's mother in a weaning function.

    (2)     Note.  A magnet may be supported in front of an animal's mouth, for
    example, to catch a nail or other ferrous object to keep the animal from
    swallowing it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    859,    for an animal collar having an electrical element.

    908+,   for application of electricity to an animal to control or handle
    the animal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 9+ for application of magnetism to an animal
    for a medical purpose and subclasses 300+ for diagnostic application of
    electrical energy to an animal.

    604,    Surgery, subclass 20 for electrical application combined with
    therapeutic material introduction or removal.

    606,    Surgery, subclasses 32+ for electrical application to an animal for
    surgical purposes.


CLS 119/823
TXT Mouth obstruction responsive to head position (e.g., baffle, etc.):Subject
    matter under subclass 821 wherein the animal-carried limiting means
    includes a plate, screen, or other barrier (i.e., obstruction) mountable on
    an animal in such a way as to physically block at least a portion of the
    opening of the animal's mouth, and the obstruction is further adapted to be
    movable into or out of its mouth blocking position as a function of the
    location or elevation (i.e., position) of the animal's head.

    (1)     Note.  The mouth obstruction may move in response to gravity as the
    head raises or lowers or by, for example, structure connected between the
    obstruction and an other part of the animal to respond to head movement
    relative to the other part of the animal, for purposes such as, for
    example, allowing grazing or desired eating action in a lowered head
    position while preventing nursing, biting, crop eating, etc., in a raised
    head position.  Further, the baffle may have relatively movable sections
    that cooperate to form an obstruction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    831+,   for a static muzzle that blocks the mouth opening or limits jaw
    movement.


CLS 119/824
TXT Nostril attached:
    Subject matter under subclass 823 wherein the movable obstruction includes
    structure adapted to be positioned within the animal's nostrils or
    connected to the cartilage between the nostrils.

    (1)     Note.  There may be other diverse support structure in addition to
    the nostril attachment.

    (2)     Note.  The support structure is usually attachable to the nostrils
    or cartilage in such a way as to allow pivotal movement of the obstruction
    into or out of blocking position as the animal changes its head position,
    but is not so limited.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    758+,   for a poke having support from or attachment to a nostril.

    821,    for a mouth or throat limiting means attachable to a nostril other
    than a head responsive obstruction or one including a pricker or spur.

    830,    for a mouth or throat limiting means attachable to a nostril that
    includes a pricker or spur.

    834+,   for a snout restraint attachable to a nostril.

    866,    for a nose ring, per se.


CLS 119/825
TXT Having pricker or spur:
    Subject matter under subclass 824 wherein the nostril attachable mouth
    obstruction responsive to head position or its support structure includes a
    sharply pointed element (i.e., pricker or spur) extending therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  The pricker or spur is arranged to stab either another
    animal (e.g., animal's mother) or the animal carrying the obstruction when
    undesired behavior such as nursing is performed by the animal carrying the
    obstruction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    758+,   for a poke including a pricker or spur.

    826,    for a mouth obstruction responsive to head position that includes a
    pricker or spur and is not attached to the nostrils.

    828+,   for a mouth or throat limiting means including a pricker or spur
    other than a mouth obstruction responsive to head position.

    855,    for a neck or throat protector including a pricker or spur.

    862,    for a collar including a pricker or spur.


CLS 119/826
TXT Having pricker or spur:
    Subject matter under subclass 823 wherein the head responsive mouth
    obstruction or any other structure associated with the obstruction (e.g.,
    support structure) includes a sharply pointed member (i.e., pricker or
    spur) extending therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  The pricker or spur is arranged to stab either another
    animal (e.g., animal's mother) or the animal carrying the obstruction when
    undesired behavior such as nursing is performed by the animal carrying the
    obstruction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    758+,   for a poke including a pricker or spur.

    825,    for a mouth obstruction responsive to head position including a
    pricker or spur that is supported from a nostril.

    828+,   for a mouth or throat limiting means including a pricker or spur
    other than a head responsive mouth obstruction.

    855,    for a neck or throat protector including a pricker or spur.

    862,    for a collar including a pricker or spur.


CLS 119/827
TXT Having cage or meshlike obstruction:
    Subject matter under subclass 823 wherein the mouth obstruction is
    constructed of a plurality of bars, wires, straps, chains, or other similar
    elongated elements joined together in a spaced array (i.e., cage).

    (1)     Note.  The elongated elements may be rigid or nonrigid.

    (2)     Note.  The mouth obstruction may be a single cage movable into or
    out of blocking position or a plurality of cage sections movable into
    blocking position such as, for example, hingeably connected cage sections
    that pivot together as a function of head position to form an obstruction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    832,    for a static muzzle having a cage or meshlike construction.


CLS 119/828
TXT Having pricker or spur:
    Subject matter under subclass 821 wherein the animal-carried mouth or
    throat limiting means includes a sharply pointed element extending
    therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    758+,   for a poke including a pricker or spur.

    825,    for a mouth obstruction responsive to head position that is
    supported from a nostril and includes a pricker or spur.

    826,    for a mouth obstruction responsive to head position that includes a
    pricker or spur and is not attached to a nostril.

    829,    for a mouth or throat limiting means having a self-directed pricker
    or spur.

    855,    for a neck or throat protector including a pricker or spur.

    862,    for a collar including a pricker or spur.


CLS 119/829
TXT Self-directed:
    Subject matter under subclass 828 wherein the pricker or spur is mounted in
    such a way that its sharp point is arranged to stab or prick the animal
    carrying the mouth or throat limiting means.

    (1)     Note.  Devices in this subclass operate to stab or prick the animal
    being controlled such as during a weaning process when an animal presses
    its muzzle against the underside of its mother to nurse.

    (2)     Note.  While the self-directed pricker has a purpose of stabbing
    the animal wearing the pricker or spur, to be classifiable in this
    subclass, the pricker must be directed towards the animal as supported, as
    opposed to a pricker or spur directed away from the animal's body that is
    meant to prick the animal wearing the restraint upon conditions such as
    self nursing, self biting, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    828,    for a mouth restraint having a pricker or spur directed away from
    the animal's body that may have the purpose of stabbing the animal
    supporting it.

    829,    for a snout restraint having a self-directed pricker or spur.

    837,    for a head, face, or horn restraint having a self-directed pricker
    or spur.


CLS 119/830
TXT Having attachment to or support from nostril:
    Subject matter under subclass 828 wherein the mouth or throat limiting
    means with a pricker or spur includes structure adapted to be placed within
    an animal's nostrils or connected to the cartilage between the nostrils.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    824+,   for a nostril attachable mouth obstruction responsive to head
    position.


CLS 119/831
TXT Having muzzle-encircling jaw restraint or mouth obstruction (e.g., muzzle,
    etc.):Subject matter under subclass 822 wherein the animal-carried mouth or
    throat limiting means includes structure adapted to be mounted around or in
    front of an animal's upper and lower jaws to limit separation between the
    upper and lower jaws,or to physically block at least a portion of the mouth
    opening.

    (1)     Note.  The muzzle-encircling restraint actually performs the jaw
    restraining or mouth obstructing function, as opposed to being a mere
    support for a restraint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    823+,   for a mouth obstruction responsive to head position.


CLS 119/832
TXT Having cage or meshlike structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 831 wherein the muzzle-encircling restraint
    or mouth obstruction is constructed of a plurality of bars, wires, straps,
    chains, or other similar elongated members joined together in a spaced
    array (i.e., cage).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    827,    for a mouth obstruction responsive to head position having a cage
    construction.


CLS 119/833
TXT Mouth-inserted element (e.g., weaning bit, tooth plate, etc.):Subject
    matter under subclass 821 wherein the animal-carried mouth or throat
    limiting means includes structure intended to be placed between or inside
    of an animal's upper and lower jaws.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is a mouth-inserted element that
    may itself provide, for example:

    (a)     a mouth or throat limiting function such as, for example, a bar
    that superficially resembles a bridle bit but is designed to prevent the
    tongue from lifting or otherwise prevent creation of suction (e.g., weaning
    bit, etc.), or a tooth plate to prevent a horse from scraping its teeth on
    its stall, e.g., cribbing); or

    (b)     a function of support or retention for a mouth or throat limiting
    means such as, for example, a muzzle-encircling restraint having an
    attached bar adapted to pass through the mouth behind the teeth to keep the
    restraint from slipping off the muzzle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    822+,   for a mouth obstruction responsive to head position.

    831+,   for a muzzle-encircling restraint or mouth obstruction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    54,     Harness, subclasses 7+ for a bridle bit.

    128,    Surgery, subclass 863 for a breath deflector.


CLS 119/834
TXT Snout (e.g., antirooter, pig ring, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 814 wherein the animal-carried limiting means
    includes means for discouraging or otherwise limiting an animal from using
    the most forward portion of its muzzle at or around the nostril area an
    undesired action such as, for example, digging or rooting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    655,    for a member intended to pass through the skin of an animal to
    attach a antivermin or cleaning member to the animal: e.g., for an
    insecticide dispensing ear tag.

    758+,   for a nostril attached fence breach prevention device (e.g., poke,
    etc.).

    821+,   for a nostril attached mouth or throat limiting means.

    837,    for a head, face, or horn limiting means.


CLS 119/835
TXT One-piece element:
    Subject matter under subclass 834 wherein the animal-carried snout limiting
    means is constructed of a single (i.e., one-piece) element absent any
    relatively movable parts.

    (1)     Note.  The one-piece element can be manufactured from a plurality
    of elements brought together in such a way as to form a single element,
    such as by brazing, etc., or can be a single element that is bent into a
    desired shape.

    (2)     Note.  Relatively movable elements include, for example, an element
    that is pivotable with respect to a support element; but does not include
    an element that is bent during application of the element to the animal.


CLS 119/836
TXT Eye (e.g., blinder, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 814 wherein the animal-carried limiting means
    obstructs or discourages an eyeball of the animal from being fully used,
    e.g., by obscuring a line of sight of the animal, etc.

    (1)     Note.  A blinder attached to a bridle of an animal for a draft,
    work, or training purpose is excluded from this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  A device which obscures a line of sight of the animal is
    often used to prevent fence jumping or fighting between animals, or to
    render the animal more easily controllable in case of fire, accident, or
    when being trained.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    54,     Harness, particularly subclasses 10+ for a blind attached to a
    bridle of an animal for a draft, work, or training purpose.


CLS 119/837
TXT Head, face, or horn (e.g., prevention of butting, goring, etc.):Subject
    matter under subclass 821 wherein the animal-carried limiting means
    includes means for discouraging or otherwise limiting use of the part of
    its body on top of or in front of its neck (i.e., head), especially, but
    not exclusive to, the crown portion of the head, the facial portion
    generally including the upper muzzle between the nose and the eyes, and the
    horn or horns.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is intended to provide for limiting the part
    of the head not provided for elsewhere. See the search notes below for
    other head limiting means such as mouth, throat, eye, or snout limiting
    means.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes such a device that, for example,
    discourages or prevents an animal from using its head to push or butt, or
    from using its horn(s) to gore another animal or object.

    (3)     Note.  Devices mentioned in the preceding note should be
    distinguished from a poke provided for elsewhere that includes an extension
    from the animal that is intended to interact with a fence or barrier,
    wherein the extension increases the apparent size of the animal as "seen"
    by the fence; i.e., the extension hooks onto the fence or is otherwise
    "caught" by the fence as the animal attempts to fit through the fence or
    jump over it, due to the fact that the extension usually extends generally
    transversely to the axis of the spine of the animal; which should be
    distinguished from a device provided for in this subclass that does not
    generally extend from the body in such a manner as to increase the size of
    the animal as "seen" by the fence or other object that the animal pushes or
    butts.

    (4)     Note.  Subject matter provided for in this subclass should be
    distinguished from an animal-carried device provided for elsewhere that
    restrains the neck from bending to prevent its head from lifting or turning.

    (5)     Note.  Limiting use of a horn should be distinguished from a cover
    for a horn provided for elsewhere that protects the horn or protects others
    from the tip of the horn by, for example, blunting or softening the horn.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    729+,   for a head or neck stock.

    738+,   for a stanchion.

    758+,   for a poke having an extension connected to the head to prevent an
    animal from breaching or lifting a fence.

    815,    for an animal-carried neck limiting means to prevent head lifting
    or turning.

    821+,   for a mouth or throat limiting means (e.g., muzzle), especially
    subclass 829 for a mouth restraint that prevents the type of incidental
    head or face butting that normally accompanies nursing.

    834+,   for a snout limiting means (e.g., hog or pig ring).

    851,    for a protective cover for a horn.


CLS 119/838
TXT Male sex organ:
    Subject matter under subclass 814 wherein the animal-carried limiting means
    obstructs or discourages use of the penis of a male animal.

    (1)     Note.  A sexual restraint which is inserted into the body of an
    animal, e.g., intravaginal, surgically implanted, etc., is excluded from
    this subclass.  See the search notes below.

    (2)     Note.  A device proper for this subclass may limit reproductive or
    other related activity, e.g., copulation, masturbation, etc. of a male
    animal.  A device referred to as a stallion shield or guard which is used
    for this purpose is proper for this subclass.  A shield used to protect the
    genital area of an animal from harm from an external source, e.g., dirt,
    disease, an insect, an enemy, etc. is not considered to control the animal
    wearing it and thus is classified elsewhere.  Similarly, a shield worn by a
    female animal to act as a barrier to sexual intercourse with a male or to
    nursing is also not considered to control the female wearing it and is
    provided for elsewhere.  See the search notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    850+,   for a body-carried shield used to protect an animal from an
    external source, e.g., dirt, disease, an insect, an enemy, etc.,
    particularly subclass 852 for an animal-carried shield for covering an
    udder or teat, e.g., to prevent nursing, etc., and subclass 854 for a
    female-carried sexual barrier. See the (2) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, particularly subclasses 883+ for a sexual restraint which
    is worn on or in the body of a human or which is inserted into the body an
    animal.  See the (1) Note above.


CLS 119/839
TXT Device simulates animal (e.g., steer, calf, etc.) for training a pursuing
    or regulating horse: Subject matter under subclass 712 wherein the limiting
    means is used to imitate some feature of an animal, e.g., a calf, etc., for
    teaching a desired behavior to a chasing or controlling equine animal,
    i.e., a horse.

    (1)     Note.  The simulator may be used, for example, to train a horse how
    to guide, i.e., "cut", a steer from a herd, how to get in the proper
    position to allow the rider to rope a calf, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, particularly subclasses 359+ for a
    moving target device for an aerial projectile.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, particularly subclass 225 for subject
    matter related to teaching a human being the ccupations of farming,
    ranching, or occupations otherwise related to an animal.


CLS 119/840
TXT Stock sorting (e.g., cutting gate, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 712 for classifying, separating, or grouping
    animals (i.e., sorting) according to size or kind of animal.

    (1)     Note.  The sorting may be done manually, automatically, or by the
    animal itself, such as by use of a barrier with an opening that only a
    small animal can freely pass while leaving a larger animal confined.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses, for sorting in general.


CLS 119/841
TXT By height:
    Subject matter under subclass 840 wherein the sorting is performed based
    upon an animal's vertical extent above the ground.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is subject matter wherein sorting
    by weight is performed by estimating or assuming weight from a height
    determination.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    842,    for sorting by an actual determination of weight of an animal


CLS 119/842
TXT By weight determination:
    Subject matter under subclass 842 wherein the sorting includes a
    measurement of the heaviness of an animal.

    (1)     Note.  To be classifiable in this subclass, an actual weight
    determination must be performed as opposed to an estimation or assumption
    of weight by another factor such as width, height, etc., of an animal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    840,    for animal sorting by weight when weight is estimated or assumed by
    a factor other than the height of an animal or an actual determination of
    its weight.

    841,    for animal sorting by weight estimated or assumed by the height of
    an animal.


CLS 119/843
TXT Animal relocating, loading or unloading (e.g., gangway, chute, conveyor,
    turntable, elevator, etc.):Subject matter under subclass 712 for carrying,
    directing, or otherwise assisting or managing the movement of an animal
    from one location to another (i.e., relocating).

    (1)     Note.  Relocation involves bodily transfer of an animal, and can be
    either horizontal or vertical transfer (i.e., elevating).  Vertical
    transfer should be distinguished from mere suspension intended to support
    or hang an animal in the same geographic location, which is provided for
    elsewhere.  However, such suspension is properly cross-referenced into this
    subclass when it is combined with, for example, a turntable or conveyor to
    transfer the suspended animal to a another area or operating station.  An
    example of elevating for a relocation function is the lifting of an animal
    from the ground to a loading dock or stock car of higher elevation.

    (2)     Note.  Implicit under the class definition is the requirement that
    relocation of a live animal be performed in a manner intended to maintain
    the animal generally alive or unharmed.  However, this and indented
    subclasses are intended to provide for the removal of a sick or dead animal
    from one area to another, for example, as in the removal of a dead animal
    from living quarters for disposal.

    (3)     Note.  Relocation can be performed by physically carrying the
    animal without its assistance, or by merely providing an avenue or guide by
    which the animal may use to relocate itself, such as by walking over a
    fenced gangway, ramp, etc., or by being guided or funnelled into a chute.

    (4)     Note.  This subclass provides for loading and unloading of a crate
    or other means for relocating an animal not provided for elsewhere, but
    does not provide for a crate, housing, or vehicle, per se.  Further, while
    this subclass provides for loading or unloading an animal crate, etc., once
    the animal or animals are loaded, the crate becomes an article, the
    handling of which may become appropriate subject matter for another class
    providing for article handling, depending upon the nature of the handling.

    (5)     Note.  An animal conveyor claimed nominally as such is proper for
    this class, except for a conveyor used in a butchering operation.  A
    conveyor of general utility that is disclosed but not claimed as an animal
    conveyor is proper for an other class providing for the conveyor.  However,
    a conveyor having claimed structure that is disclosed but not claimed as
    being solely useful for contacting, controlling, handling, or otherwise
    aiding in the relocation of an animal while being conveyed is proper for
    this and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7+,     for a stock car specifically adapted to house and transport an
    animal.

    17+,    for a cage for transporting an animal, especially subclass 20 for a
    pen or rack, e.g., corral.

    200+,   particularly subclasses 201+ for transporting an aquatic animal.

    700,    for a treadmill.

    701,    for a roundabout.

    716,    for suspending a bird.

    727,    for a wheeled body sling.

    728,    for suspending an animal other than a bird.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    14,     Bridges, subclasses 69.5+ and the search notes thereto, for a
    gangway.

    114,    Ships, subclass 362 for a ship boarding aid generally limited for
    use by personnel.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, appropriate subclasses.

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, for a nonpower driven
    conveyor, chute, or skid of general utility.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, for a power driven conveyor having
    utility other than the conveyance of an animal.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 137.1 for loading of airplane cargo.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 57.1+ for a vehicle
    having a downwardly swinging end-gate usable as a loading ramp for the
    vehicle.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, for a fluid current conveyor of general
    utility other than the conveyance of an animal.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, for loading or unloading of a ship or
    other vehicle with handling of material other than an animal, such as a
    crate, etc., which may contain an animal.

    452,    Butchering, subclass 53 for conveying a live animal to slaughtering
    apparatus, and subclasses 177+ for conveying a carcass in a butchering
    operation.


CLS 119/844
TXT Fluid current conveyor (e.g., pneumatic poultry loader, etc.):Subject
    matter under subclass 843 wherein a flow of gas or liquid is employed to
    relocate an animal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, for a fluid current conveyor of general
    utility.


CLS 119/845
TXT Endless-loop conveyor:
    Subject matter under subclass 843 wherein an apparatus having a moving
    continuous surface closed upon itself (i.e.,endless-loop conveyor) is
    employed to either (a) carry an animal directly on the surface from one
    location to another,or (b) to supply movement and support for a diverse
    element adapted to carry, direct, or otherwise manage the relocation of an
    animal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    14,     Bridges, subclass 70 for a gangway or ramp of general utility
    having an endless-loop conveyor.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses, for a
    power-driven endless-loop conveyor of general utility.


CLS 119/846
TXT Wheel mounted:
    Subject matter under 845 wherein the endless-loop conveyor is mounted upon
    a wheel or wheels, or from structure supported with a wheel or wheels, so
    that the conveyor can be transported from one location to another by
    rolling of the wheel(s).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    727,    for a wheeled body sling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    14,     Bridges, subclass 72.5 for a wheeled gangway or ramp of general
    utility.


CLS 119/847
TXT Ramp:
    Subject matter under subclass 843 wherein an inclined surface (i.e.,ramp)
    is employed to relocate an animal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    845,    for an inclined endless-loop conveyor for relocating an animal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    14,     Bridges, subclasses 69.5+ for a ramp of general utility.

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, for an inclined surface
    of general utility for conveying, especially by use of gravity propulsion.


CLS 119/848
TXT Wheel mounted:
    Subject matter under subclass 847 wherein the ramp is mounted upon a wheel
    or wheels, or is supported from structure supported with a wheel or wheels,
    so that the ramp can be transported from one location to another by rolling
    of the wheel(s).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    727,    for a wheeled body sling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    14,     Bridges, subclass 72.5 for a wheeled ramp of general utility.


CLS 119/849
TXT Collapsible:
    Subject matter under subclass 847 wherein the ramp is foldable or otherwise
    constructed to enable routine conversion between a working mode and a more
    compact mode such as would be useful for storage purposes.


CLS 119/850
TXT BODY WORN PROTECTIVE SHIELD OR APPAREL:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein an animal borne guard or
    garment is used to protect or cover the animal or to protect another being
    or object from the animal.

    (1)     Note.  A body-carried shield acts as a barrier, pad, etc. for
    protecting the animal from an external source, e.g., dirt, a disease, an
    insect, enemy, etc.  It may also be used to protect another animal, human,
    or object, e.g., a stall, etc.,  from the animal carrying the shield, such
    as a cover to blunt or soften the point of a claw or horn, which is
    distinguishable from a controlling device that restrains or discourages an
    animal from using a claw, horn, etc.  A sex preventing barrier carried on a
    female animal is considered to be a shield, which is to be distinguished
    from a device to obstruct or discourage use of the penis of a male animal,
    which is considered to be a controlling device.  A weaning device carried
    by a female that covers an udder or teat is considered to be a shield,
    while a weaning device carried by an animal to limit use of its mouth to
    nurse is a controlling device.  A head-carried pick preventing device for a
    bird, or a collar barrier which prevents an animal from picking, biting,
    chewing, etc. at a portion of its body or the body of another animal, is
    considered to control the actions of the animal wearing it and is provided
    for elsewhere.  In sum, a protective shield may be distinguished from a
    controlling device since the function of a shield is to cover a localized
    area of the body, which may, for example prevent an animal from using its
    mouth to bite the localized area, while a controlling device generally
    prevents or discourages an animal from reaching to the localized area
    and/or prevents use or movement of a body part in an action other than, for
    example, biting only a localized area.  See the search notes below.

    (2)     Note.  This is the residual area for animal apparel other than a
    collar or harness not provided for elsewhere.  Such apparel, even if
    ornamental, is considered to shield an animal from temperature extremes and
    is thus appropriate for this subclass.  An animal blanket is not considered
    to be body worn apparel for this subclass even if provided with a preformed
    opening or strap for a neck or leg of an animal.  If a neck or leg
    accommodating and covering feature, e.g., a collar, sleeve, etc., extends
    along the neck or leg, i.e., is more than an opening or reinforced opening,
    then classification under this subclass (850) is considered proper.  A
    manure pouch is not considered to be a body-carried shield or apparel.  See
    the search notes below.

    (3)     Note.  A horse boot and a bonnet or shield adapted to be attached
    to a working animal, or a harness therefor, are excluded from this
    subclass.  See the search notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95,     for a manure pouch.

    712+,   for a controlling device which deters an undesired action or
    promotes a desired action of an animal wearing it, particularly subclass
    715 for a head-carried pick preventing device for a bird, subclasses 814+
    for an animal-carried device for restraining use or movement of a specific
    body part, particularly subclass 838 for a male sex organ restraining
    device for an animal, e.g., to prevent  intercourse or self abuse by an
    animal wearing it, etc., and subclasses 821+ for an animal-carried mouth or
    throat guard used to limit the use of the mouth or throat of an animal,
    e.g., a muzzle or a neck-supported barrier which prevents an animal from
    picking, biting, chewing, etc., either another animal or object or a
    portion of its own body, etc.  See the  (1) Note above.

    856+,   for a body- or appendage-encircling collar or band worn on an
    animal, particularly subclass 862 for a collar or harness having a pricker
    or spur element mounted thereon.

    907,    for a harness of general utility.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, for a garment worn by a human being.

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, particularly subclass 111 for a shoe
    for covering the foot of an animal.

    54,     Harness, for an animal harness for a draft, work, breaking, or
    training purpose, particularly subclasses 79.1+ for a animal blanket or a
    garment for a working animal, subclasses 80.1+ for a bonnet or shield for a
    working animal and subclass 82 for a horse boot.  Subclass 79.1 is the
    residual location for an animal blanket.  See the (1), (2), and (3) Notes
    above.

    128,    Surgery, particularly subclasses 846+ for a body-protecting device
    for a patient or an infant.

    168,    Farriery, particularly subclasses 1+ for an overshoe for a cattle-
    or horse-type animal and subclasses 4+ for a shoe for a cattle- or
    horse-type animal.

    604,    Surgery, particularly subclasses 358+ for an absorbent pad, e.g., a
    diaper, etc., for application to a human or an animal.


CLS 119/851
TXT Horn, spur, or claw shield:
    Subject matter under subclass 850 wherein an animal borne guard protects a
    hard, pointed member projecting from the head of an animal, i.e., a horn, a
    spinelike projection on a leg of a bird, i.e., a spur, or a sharp nail on a
    toe of an animal, i.e., a claw, from injury or from injuring another being
    or object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    715,    for a head-carried pick preventing device for controlling a bird.

    837,    for a animal-carried horn restraint.


CLS 119/852
TXT Udder or teat:
    Subject matter under subclass 850 wherein the animal borne guard or garment
    protects or covers a baglike mammary organ of an animal or a nipple
    associated therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    821+,   for an animal-carried restraining device for inhibiting use of the
    mouth of the animal, e.g., for nursing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, particularly subclass 890 for a chafing shield for
    protecting a nipple of a human.


CLS 119/853
TXT Bird:
    Subject matter under subclass 850 wherein the animal guard or garment is
    borne on the body of an animal taxonomically classified in the class Aves,
    i.e., a bird.

    (1)     Note.  A turkey saddle, breeding jacket, etc. which protects the
    bird during mating is proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    713+,   for a device which controls the action of a bird, particularly
    subclass 715 for a head-carried pick preventing device for a bird.


CLS 119/854
TXT Female-carried sexual barrier:
    Subject matter under subclass 850 wherein an animal borne guard obstructs
    access to the genitalia of a female animal wearing it to prevent copulation
    therewith.

    (1)     Note.  A sexual restraint which is inserted into the body of an
    animal, e.g., intravaginally, surgically implanted, etc., is excluded from
    this subclass.  See the search note below.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes absorbent diapers, etc., worn to
    collect waste products if also disclosed for preventing sexual intercourse.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    838,    for an animal-carried restraining device for inhibiting the use of
    a male sex organ.  While a device found in that subclass may be referred to
    as a stallion "shield" it is considered to control an action of the male
    animal and is therefor considered to be a controlling device rather than a
    shield for this subclass (854).  Also see the (2) Note thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, particularly subclasses 883+ for a sexual restraint which
    is worn on or in the body of a human or which is inserted into the body an
    animal.  See the (1) Note above.

    604,    Surgery, particularly subclasses 358+ for a body-carried urine
    absorbing pad, e.g., a diaper, etc., for an animal not disclosed for
    preventing sexual intercourse.


CLS 119/855
TXT Neck or throat protector:
    Subject matter under subclass 850 wherein an animal borne guard or garment
    protects an area of an animal's body between its shoulder blades and head
    (i.e., neck).

    (1)     Note.  A neck-carried device for preventing an animal from bending
    its neck to, for example, prevent injury from self biting, etc., or for any
    other reason, is considered to be a controlling device provided for
    elsewhere.  This is to be distinguished from a neck cover that prevents an
    animal from scratching its neck with its claws.  Such a cover is considered
    to be a shield for a localized area of the body appropriate for this
    subclass and not a leg restraint.  However, if a neck-carried device is in
    the form of a barrier that prevents an animal from reaching past its neck
    with its leg to, for example, scratch its ear, it would be considered a leg
    restraint rather than an ear shield because it functions more as a leg
    restraint than a protective ear cover.  See the search notes below for
    appropriate areas for mentioned restraints.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass generally includes subject matter for
    preventing a neck or throat area from being bitten by another animal, but
    is not limited to such purposes.  Other purposes as diverse as shielding
    the neck of a female to prevent a male's claws from gripping her neck for
    sexual mounting is proper for this subclass.  Protective construction may
    employ use of electric shock or a sharply pointed element (e.g., pricker or
    spur) to discourage an attacking animal.

    (3)     Note.  A collar, per se, is excluded from this subclass, unless it
    is capable of performing as a protective cover that provides a physical
    barrier.  As such, a collar adapted to chemically protect from fleas or
    other pest or disease is provided for elsewhere.  Similarly, a collar
    having a reflector or illuminator to protect an animal from being hit by a
    car is not considered to be a physical barrier, and is therefore provided
    for elsewhere with collar structure.  See the search notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    815,    for preventing an animal from bending its neck.

    816,    for a neck-carried shield to prevent an animal from reaching past
    its neck with its paw to scratch its head.

    821,    for a neck-carried shield to prevent an animal's mouth from
    reaching an area of its body.

    856+,   for a collar, per se, especially subclass 858 for a collar with a
    reflector, subclass 859 for a collar with an electric lamp, and subclass
    862 for a collar with a pricker or spur.


CLS 119/856
TXT BODY- OR APPENDAGE-ENCIRCLING COLLAR OR BAND (E.G., NECK COLLAR, LEG BAND,
    ETC.):Subject matter under the class definition including a belt, strap,
    chain, or similar elongated structure (i.e., collar) constructed to
    surround and be supported by or worn by an animal's neck, limb, torso, or
    other part of an animal.

    (1)     Note.  This is the residual area for animal collars not otherwise
    classifiable, and as such excludes, for example, work animal harness
    collars, garment collars, and nominal collars that are part of a greater
    combination of elements classifiable elsewhere, such as a collar in
    combination with a leash, tether, or other hitching element, or other
    restraint.

    (2)     Note.  This is also the residual area for a harness having a
    body-encircling band, not classifiable either in this or another class.
    However, it is not intended that a harness be cross-referenced into this or
    indented subclasses from another area unless the harness contains structure
    specifically provided for in the indented subclasses, since a "harness"
    cross-reference art collection is specifically provided for elsewhere in
    this class.

    (3)     Note.  This and indented subclasses are intended to provide for a
    collar or other body-encircling band having:

    (a)     a recited detail of the band or its buckle structure, per se;

    (b)     structure designed to afford a means for attaching a leash or
    tether to the band;

    (c)     a band combined with or specifically adapted to support a diverse
    "perfecting" element for the band other than a controlling (e.g., hitching,
    restraining, etc.), handling or shielding element, which are provided for
    elsewhere; or

    (d)     a subcombination device, not provided for elsewhere, that includes
    a body-encircling band but not enough element(s) of a combination for
    placement with the combination, such as a collar or harness structure
    intended to perform a controlling or protective function but does not have
    sufficiently claimed structure to perform the intended function, such as an
    electric shocking collar structure with no means claimed to control the
    shock, or a barbed choke collar with no means claimed (e.g., leash) to
    cause the barbs to prick the animal to control it.

    (4)     Note.  A harness used for a draft or work purpose is excluded from
    this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    702,    for a harness used for exercising or amusing an animal.

    712+,   for a collar in combination with an animal controlling or handling
    means, particularly subclasses 713+ for a collar designed especially to
    control or handle a bird, subclasses 725+ for a body sling, subclass 792
    for a collar combined with a leash, and subclasses 821+ for a mouth
    restraint, especially subclass 831 for a muzzle.

    850+,   for a protective shield or garment, particularly subclass 855 for a
    neck protector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 129+ for a garment collar, and subclasses 311+
    for a torso- or limb-encircling belt.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 299+ for a card,
    label, or tag, per se, which may be intended for attachment to a Class 119
    device, e.g., a collar, harness, leash, etc.  See, in particular,
    subclasses 300+ for an animal marker, subclass 303 for a harness-supported
    animal marker, subclass 304 for a leg band type animal marker, subclasses
    633+ for an identification bracelet and subclasses 642+ for a card, label,
    or tag holder.

    54,     Harness, for an animal harness provided for in that class (i.e, for
    a draft or work purpose), particularly subclass 18.1 for a harness combined
    with a collar, subclass 19.1 for a harness collar, and subclasses 71+ for
    an animal breaking or training harness, per se.

    114,    Ships, particularly subclass 39.2 for a body harness designed to be
    connected to a sailboard-type marine vessel.

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 846+ for a body protecting or restraining
    device for a patient or infant, and subclasses 875+ for a body restraining
    or immobilizing belt, strap, or harness.

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, particularly subclasses 26 and 27
    for trunk harness.

    222,    Dispensing, particularly subclass 175 for a body-carried dispenser.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, for a body harness for a living
    bearer combined with package and article carrying means, particularly
    subclass 158 for a carrier for a person and subclass 184 for means attached
    to a person for towing an object along a surface, e.g., a game animal, etc.

    244,    Aeronautics, for the combination of significant aircraft structure
    with body harness, particularly subclass 122 for a device for holding an
    occupant to an aircraft seat and subclass 151 for a device for attaching a
    parachute to a person or object being lowered slowly to the ground.

    278,    Land Vehicles:  Animal Draft Appliances, appropriate subclasses for
    a land vehicle which is pulled by a draft animal.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    516 for a signal reflector combined with a nominally recited collar.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 103+ for an illuminator having support
    from a nominally recited collar.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclass 411,
    for a nominally recited collar impregnated or coated with a body treating
    composition, e.g., flea collar, etc.

    602,    Surgery:  Splint, Brace, or Bandage, subclasses 41+ for bandage
    structure, particularly subclasses 61+ for a covering for a particular body
    area.

    604,    Surgery, subclass 308 for a bandage pad, shield, or attaching means
    extendable around a body portion for sustained application of a treating
    material to an external body surface.


CLS 119/857
TXT For a human being:
    Subject matter under subclass 856 wherein the body or appendage-encircling
    collar or band substantially encircles a portion of the body of a person.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is the residual location for a body harness
    for a human being.  If a patent does not claim a specific use but discloses
    a use found elsewhere, e.g., in Classes 5, 128, 182, 224, 244, 280, 294,
    297, 441, 482, 623, etc., original classification should be in that class.
    A patent having plural disclosures, none of which are claimed, would be
    placed as an original in the superior class unless the classes involved
    have an established line therebetween which would control placement.

    (2)     Note.  See the search class notes under subclass 856 for classes
    which are not limited to a human type of user or are limited to an animal
    type of user.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, for a human body harness in combination with or
    constituting apparel, including a bib for an infant which may also be used
    to restrain the infant, and particularly subclasses 44 and 45 for a body
    brace or support, subclass 102 for vest apparel, and subclasses 300 through
    342 for a garment supporter or retainer, e.g., subclass 311 for a belt
    having a handle which is worn by a motorcyclist so that a motorcycle
    passenger may grasp the handle as necessary.

    5,      Beds, for a bed or bed accessory for a human body, particularly
    subclasses 600+ for a body harness used with an invalid bed or surgical
    support and subclasses 424+ for a restraint disclosed for protecting a
    person from injury or from rolling out of a bed.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, particularly
    subclasses 96+ for a body harness in combination with a dryer for human
    hair.

    42,     Firearms, particularly subclass 96 for a body harness with arm rest
    used with a firearm.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, particularly subclasses 3+ for a
    torso harness disclosed for supporting a workman or for a rescue or escape
    operation and which may employ an anchoring tether.

    248,    Supports, particularly subclass 444 for an easel, book copy, or
    music score holder in combination with body harness for the user thereof.

    280,    Land Vehicles, particularly subclass 290 for a body harness for
    attaching a human occupant to an occupant-propelled wheeled vehicle and
    subclasses 801.1+ for a safety belt or harness combined with significant
    vehicle structure and used to prevent, restrain, or limit movement of a
    human occupant relative to the vehicle in the event of a sudden, unexpected
    movement.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, particularly subclass 25
    for a hand and finger attachment designed to facilitate the handling of
    articles or material and subclass 140 for a body harness having a handle
    for transporting a person therein.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, particularly subclass 275 for a belt or garment
    restrainer with an oscillatory suspended baby jumper and subclasses 464+
    for a body restrainer disclosed for confining a seated human occupant to a
    chair or seat.  The seat may be in a vehicle if no significant vehicle
    structure is claimed.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    516 for a signal reflector combined with a  nominally recited body support.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, particularly subclasses 80+ for
    a water rescue or life protecting apparatus for a person which may include
    harness structure.

    482,    Exercise Devices, particularly subclass 69 for a supporting harness
    disclosed for suspending a human user during exercise involving travel by
    foot and subclass 139 for a human user interface element in the form of a
    harness disclosed for employment while the user manipulates a force
    resisting exercise apparatus.

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, for a body harness combined with a device of that
    class.


CLS 119/858
TXT Having or specifically adapted to support a diverse element other than
    restraint or protective shield (e.g., ID tag, reflector, bell,
    etc.):Subject matter under subclass 856 wherein the collar or band
    (i.e.,collar) is combined with an additional element other than a
    controlling, handling, or protective shield means, or includes means
    specifically constructed to support such an additional element on the
    collar.

    (1)     Note.  If a collar or band is nominally recited in combination with
    a diverse element, and the diverse element combined with a body support is
    provided for elsewhere, classification is proper where the diverse element
    plus body support is located.  However, when a detail of a collar- or
    body-encircling band found in this class is present, classification of a
    collar or band in combination with a diverse element is proper in this
    class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 303 for an animal
    marker supported from a nominally recited collar or body support, and
    subclasses 642.02+ for a holder for a check, label, or tag.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 170 for a bell of an animal or
    sleigh type (e.g., cow bell).

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    516 for a signal reflector combined with a nominally recited collar.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 103+ for an illuminator combined with a
    nominally recited collar.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclass 411
    for a nominally recited collar impregnated or coated with a body treating
    composition, e.g., flea collar.

    604,    Surgery, subclass 308 for a bandage, pad, shield, or attaching
    means extendable around a body portion for sustained application of a
    treating material to an external body surface.

    606,    Surgery, subclass 116 for means for marking an animal, and subclass
    117 for means for applying an animal identification device to an animal.


CLS 119/859
TXT Electrical element (e.g., illuminator, battery, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 858 wherein the collar includes means for
    supplying, conducting, or utilizing electrical energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    712+,   for control or handling of an animal employing electricity,
    particularly subclasses 720+ for electromagnetic remote control, subclass
    765 for a neck- supported poke including an electric shocking means,
    subclass 822 for a mouth or throat control having an electrical element,
    and subclass 908 for electrical animal control or handling.

    858,    for a collar having a reflector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 103+ for an illuminator combined with a
    nominally recited collar.


CLS 119/860
TXT Releasable chemical agent (e.g., medicine, deodorant, etc.):Subject matter
    under subclass 858 wherein the collar supports or is adapted to support a
    composition (i.e., chemical agent) in such a manner that the agent can
    escape the collar to treat, protect,  or otherwise aid the animal wearing
    the collar.

    (1)     Note.  The chemical agent can escape either by volatilization or by
    direct dispensing from the collar, usually in a slow release manner to, for
    example, medicate, deodorize, repel, or kill pests.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    650+,   for antivermin treatment.

    850+,   for a protective shield or apparel, particularly subclass 855 for a
    neck or throat protector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 124+ for
    vermin destroying.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclass 411
    for a nominally recited collar impregnated or coated with a body treating
    composition, e.g., flea collar.

    604,    Surgery, subclass 308 for a bandage, pad, shield, or attaching
    means extendable around a body portion for sustained application of a
    treating material to an external body surface.

    654,    for a coller with a releasable antivermine or cleaning agent; e.g.,
    for a flea collar.


CLS 119/862
TXT Pricker or spur element:
    Subject matter under subclass 858 wherein the diverse element is a sharply
    pointed member.

    (1)     Note.  A collar which has a pricker or spur that functions to
    protect the neck or throat area from attack by another animal is provided
    for elsewhere.

    (2)     Note.  A pricker or spur, without more, is not considered to be a
    restraint or protector in itself.  A pricker or spur combined with a collar
    is considered to be a perfecting means for the collar unless the collar is
    further combined with a means such as a leash or other activator for the
    pricker or spur.  A collar which has a pricker or spur directed away from
    the animal to thwart an attacking animal is considered to be a protective
    shield.  A pricker or spur supported to be aimed, for example, at the
    shoulders of the animal wearing the collar to prevent the animal from
    laying down is considered to be an animal-controlling device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    712+,   for animal controlling or handling employing a pricker or spur.

    850+,   for a protective shield employing a pricker or spur, especially
    subclass 855 for a neck or throat protector.


CLS 119/863
TXT Having particular buckle, length-fixing, or end-joining means:Subject
    matter under subclass 856 wherein the collar is provided with a particular
    means to fasten the collar together in a manner to form a loop structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., appropriate subclasses for a
    particular fastening element, especially subclasses 307+ for a buckle, per
    se.


CLS 119/864
TXT Slip or choke-collar type:
    Subject matter under subclass 863 wherein the means for fastening the
    collar together to form a loop includes an element that is adapted to slide
    on the collar.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for what is generally known as a slip
    or choke collar, wherein a part of the collar is adapted to be pulled by a
    leash, for example, so that the sliding element will slide along the collar
    and cause the loop to decrease in circumference, causing a choking effect
    on the animal for control.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    769+,   for hitching or tethering, especially subclasses 792+ for a slip or
    choke collar combined with a leash.


CLS 119/865
TXT Breakaway release (e.g., safety collar, VelcroR, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 863 wherein the fastening means is
    constructed to separate or to open the collar loop when a sufficient force
    is applied to the fastening means that is less than that which would cause
    injury to the animal or damage to the collar.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for a breakaway or safety collar that
    opens when, for example, the collar is caught on a branch or the like, so
    that the animal may free itself or avoid injury.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass provides for a collar "buckle" that utilizes a
    mating hook and loop structure (e.g., VelcroR).


CLS 119/866
TXT NOSE RING, PER SE:
    Subject matter under the class definition consisting of a circular element
    (i.e., ring) constructed to be secured in an animal's nostril or be
    supported by a nasal septum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    712+,   for animal controlling or handling employing a nose ring,
    particularly subclasses 758+ for a poke combined with a nose ring, subclass
    792 for hitching or tethering with a nose ring, subclass 821 for mouth or
    throat limiting with a nose ring, subclass 834 for a pig ring to prevent
    rooting, and subclass 837 for a head, face, or horn limiting means
    employing a nose ring.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 705 for a pierced earring
    fastener.

    63,     Jewelry, subclasses 12+ for an earring.


CLS 119/867
TXT MOBILE EXCREMENT CATCHER; E.G., MANURE POUCH:

    Device under the class definition in the form of a pouch-like receptacle
    designed and constructed to be so placed in relation to a domestic animal
    as to receive excrement such as dung and urine therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161+,   for an animal waste toilet or related device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 317+ for an animal waste receptor not limited
    to animal husbandry.


CLS 119/868
TXT Carried totally by animal:

    Device under subclass 867 adapted to be supported only by the animal from
    which excrement is received.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    867,    for an excrement receiver supported in part by a vehicle or an
    animal containing structure.


CLS 119/869
TXT Particularly adapted to hold liquid:

    Device under subclass 868 including structure of particular specified
    utility of containing flowable excrement.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a device intended to capture pregnant
    mare's urine to recover hormonal material such as estrogen therefrom.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 119/900
TXT FEED SAVING DEVICE:

    Apparatus which is used to prevent animal nourishment from being wasted.


CLS 119/901
TXT CHAIN FEEDER:

    Apparatus consisting of an interconnected serial arrangement of rigid links
    used to convey nourishment to an animal.


CLS 119/902
TXT FEED AGITATOR:

    Apparatus used to mix or stir nourishment prior to it being given to an
    animal.


CLS 119/903
TXT POULTRY ROOST PREVENTING DEVICE:

    Apparatus used to prohibit a domesticated egg laying or meat producing fowl
    from standing in a certain location, e.g., in its feed, water, etc.

    (1)     Note.  A device of this type is often called an "antiroosting
    device".


CLS 119/904
TXT STANCHION SURE STOP:

    Apparatus used to prevent an animal from inserting its head between a head
    or neck restraining stanchion bar and a side of a stall used to house the
    animal.


CLS 119/905
TXT BREAKING OR TRAINING METHOD:
    Process used to correct an undesired behavior or teach a desired behavior
    to an animal.

    (1)     Note.  Much of the art related to breaking or training an animal is
    structurally similar to art used to simply control an animal, e.g., a
    weaning muzzle, etc. It may be difficult to determine the specific use of a
    device or, alternatively, a device may be disclosed for use both for
    breaking or training and for some other purpose.  A device, as well as the
    method of using it, which may be employed to break or train an animal is
    placed under subclass 712 as an original based upon its animal-controlling
    structure if provided for thereunder.  It may be cross-referenced here if
    it involves a breaking or training method which is considered significant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    for an animal maze combined with a significant confining or housing
    device.

    702+,   for an exercise or amusement device for an animal which may also
    break or train an animal, particularly subclasses 707+ for a toy, lure, or
    fetch device used to exercise or amuse an animal.

    712+,   for an animal-controlling device which is used to deter an
    undesired action or promote a desired action of an animal and which may
    also be used for a breaking or training purpose, particularly subclass 719
    for a sound-producing device used to control an animal, subclasses 720+ for
    electromagnetic remote control of an animal, subclasses 758+ for an
    animal-carried hook or extension for engaging and preventing breach of a
    fence or barrier, e.g., a poke, tethered fence hook, etc., subclasses 821+
    for an animal-carried mouth controlling muzzle which may be used for
    weaning an animal, and subclasses 850+, for a body-carried shield used to
    protect an animal or another being from the animal.  See the (1) Note above.

    856+,   for a body- or appendage-encircling collar or band used for
    training an animal, e.g., a choke collar, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    54,     Harness, for an animal harness for a draft, work, breaking, or
    training purpose, particularly subclasses 71+ for a harness for controlling
    a vicious or unruly animal or training an animal to trot, pace, etc.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, particularly subclasses 22+ for automatic
    and periodic actuation of a mechanical signal which may be used to frighten
    an animal.

    231,    Whips and Whip Apparatus, for a whip related apparatus which may be
    used to train an animal.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, particularly subclass 225 for subject
    matter related to teaching a human being the occupations of farming,
    ranching, or otherwise related to an animal.


CLS 119/906
TXT ANIMAL COUNTING:
    Method or apparatus used to determine the number of animals in a group of
    animals.

    (1)     Note.  Animal counting is typically performed at the time they are
    "harvested," i.e., collected and taken to market.  As such many of the
    animal counting subject matter finds original classification in areas
    related to animal relocating, where they are counted as they are being
    conveyed or loaded into a vehicle for transporting them to market.
    Similarly, animal counting may be performed during sorting, or in the stock
    yard, housing, or any other environment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    840+,   for animal sorting.

    843+,   for animal relocating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, appropriate subclasses for mechanical counter.

    346,    Recorders, appropriate subclasses for a recorder combined with a
    counter.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, appropriate subclasses for an electronic counter.


CLS 119/907
TXT HARNESS:
    A device having a plurality of straps joined together in a spaced array
    that is adapted to be supported on an animal,with at least one strap of the
    array encircling a portion of the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    702,    for a harness used for exercising or amusing an animal.

    712+,   for a collar in combination with an animal controlling or handling
    means, particularly subclasses 713+ for a collar designed especially to
    control or handle a bird, subclasses 725+ for a body sling, subclass 792
    for a collar combined  with a leash, and subclasses 821+ for a mouth
    restraint, especially subclass 831 for a muzzle.

    850+,   for a protective shield or garment, particularly subclass 855 for a
    neck protector.

    856+,   for a body- or appendage-encircling collar or band.

    857,    for a collar or harness for a human being.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, for a human body harness in combination with or
    constituting apparel, including a bib for an infant which may also be used
    to restrain the infant, and particularly subclasses 44 and 45 for a body
    brace or support, subclass 102 for vest apparel, subclasses 129+ for a
    garment collar, and subclasses 300 through 342 for a garment supporter or
    retainer, particularly subclasses 311+ for a torso- or limb-encircling
    belt, e.g., a belt having handles and which is worn by a motorcyclist so
    that a motorcycle passenger may grasp the handles as necessary.

    5,      Beds, for a bed or bed accessory for a human body, particularly
    subclasses 600+ for a body harness used with an invalid bed or surgical
    support and subclasses 424+ for a restraint disclosed for protecting a
    person from injury or from rolling out of a bed.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, particularly
    subclasses 96+ for a body harness in combination with a dryer for human
    hair.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 299+ for a card,
    label, or tag, per se, which may be intended for attachment to a Class 119
    device, e.g., a collar, harness, leash, etc.  See, in particular,
    subclasses 300+ for an animal marker, subclass 303 for a harness-supported
    animal marker, subclass 304 for a leg band type animal marker, subclasses
    633+ for an identification bracelet and subclasses 642+ for a card, label,
    or tag holder.

    42,     Firearms, particularly subclass 96 for a body harness with arm rest
    used with a firearm.

    54,     Harness, appropriate subclasses, for an animal harness provided for
    in that class (i.e, for a draft or work purpose), particularly subclass
    18.1 for a harness combined with a collar, subclass 19.1 for a harness
    collar, and subclasses 71+ for an animal breaking or training harness, per
    se.

    114,    Ships, particularly subclass 39.2 for a body harness designed to be
    connected to a sailboard-type marine vessel.

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 846+ for a body protecting or restraining
    device for a patient or infant, and subclasses 875+ for a body restraining
    or immobilizing belt, strap, or harness.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, particularly subclasses 3+ for a
    torso harness disclosed for supporting a workman or for a rescue or escape
    operation and which may employ an anchoring tether.

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, particularly subclasses 26 and 27
    for trunk harness.

    222,    Dispensing, particularly subclass 175 for a body-carried dispenser.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, for a body harness for a living
    bearer combined with package and article carrying means, particularly
    subclass 158 for a carrier for a person and subclass 184 for means attached
    to a person for towing an object along a surface, e.g., a game animal, etc.

    244,    Aeronautics, for the combination of significant aircraft structure
    with body harness, particularly subclass 122 for a device for holding an
    occupant to an aircraft seat and subclass 151 for a device for attaching a
    parachute to a person or object being lowered slowly to the ground.

    248,    Supports, particularly subclass 444 for an easel, book copy, or
    music score holder in combination with body harness for the user thereof.

    278,    Land Vehicles: Animal Draft Appliances, for a land vehicle which is
    pulled by a draft animal.

    280,    Land Vehicles, particularly subclass 290 for a body harness for
    attaching a human occupant to an occupant-propelled wheeled vehicle and
    subclasses 801.1+ for a safety belt or harness combined with significant
    vehicle structure and used to prevent, restrain, or limit movement of a
    human occupant relative to the vehicle in the event of a sudden, unexpected
    movement.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, particularly subclass 25
    for a hand and finger attachment designed to facilitate the handling of
    articles or material and subclass 140 for a body harness having handles for
    transporting a person therein.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, particularly subclass 275 for a belt or garment
    restrainer with an oscillatory suspended baby jumper and subclasses 464+
    for a body restrainer disclosed for confining a seated human occupant to a
    chair or seat.  The seat may be in a vehicle if no significant vehicle
    structure is claimed.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    516 for a signal reflector combined with a nominally recited body support.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 103+ for an illuminator having support
    from a nominally recited collar or harness.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclass 411
    for a nominally recited collar or harness impregnated or coated with a body
    treating composition, e.g., flea collar.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, particularly subclasses 80+ for
    a water rescue or life protecting apparatus for a person which may include
    harness structure.

    482,    Exercise Devices, particularly subclass 69 for a supporting harness
    disclosed for suspending a human user during exercise involving travel by
    foot and subclass 139 for a human user interface element in the form of a
    harness disclosed for employment while the user manipulates a force
    resisting exercise apparatus.

    602,    Surgery:  Splint, Brace, or Bandage, subclasses 41+ for bandage
    structure, particularly subclasses 61+ for a covering for a particular body
    area.

    604,    Surgery, subclass 308 for a bandage pad, shield, or attaching means
    extendable around a body portion for sustained application of a treating
    material to an external body surface.

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, for a body harness combined with a device of that
    class.


CLS 119/908
TXT ELECTRICAL ANIMAL CONTROL OR HANDLING:
    A method or apparatus that employs electricity to deter or promote (i.e.,
    control) an action of an animal, or otherwise manipulate an animal.

    (1)     Note.  The electrical control may be due to either direct
    application of electricity to the animal, e.g., electrically shocking the
    animal, etc. or indirect usage of electricity, e.g., by electrical control
    of a pressure applying device, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    for an animal confining or housing device which may also include an
    electrical feature to control an animal.

    51.01+, for an animal-feeding device which may also include an electrical
    feature to control an animal.

    718,    for a device responsive to the voice of an animal which may use an
    electrical shock to control the animal.

    719,    for a mechanical wave (e.g., vibration, sound, ultrasound, etc.)
    producing device for controlling an animal which may use electricity to
    emit a sound or to cause a sound to be emitted.

    720+,   for an electromagnetic remote control which may also include direct
    application of electricity to control an animal, e.g., by shocking the
    animal, etc.

    822,    for an animal-carried weaning or other mouth restraint utilizing
    electrical shock.

    859,    for a collar with an electrical element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    231,    Whips and Whip Apparatus, particularly subclass 7 for an electrical
    prod used to control an animal.


CLS 122/
TTL LIQUID HEATERS AND VAPORIZERS

CLS 122/
TXT This class relates to heating liquids, generating vapors from liquids,
    treating the vapors generated for use, such as superheating or cooling
    them, and conserving the heat remaining in the liquid or vapor after a part
    of the heat energy has been made use of for any purpose.  To bring a liquid
    heater into this class, the chamber, receptacle or conduit in which the
    liquid is heated must be fluid tight.

    This class includes combinations of steam superheaters, feed-water heaters,
    steam separators, condensers, traps, manhole-closures, safety devices,
    cleaners, and feeders with a boiler when the structure of necessity must
    form a part of the boiler structure combination, also parts of boilers
    unless they are of general application.

    This class includes water-cooled grates whether or not in connection with a
    boiler for heating the boiler water.  It also includes the boiler and
    furnace in combination or the boiler alone with the furnace alone.

    The liquid containers classified in this class may be heated by solid or
    fluid fuel burned in any type of furnace or burner, by friction, or by
    chemical action other than combustion, or by electricity.  The heat may be
    applied directly to the walls of the fluid containing chamber or indirectly
    by the interposition of a fluid in a distinct and separate chamber, which
    fluid being heated may impart its heat to the fluid to be finally heated.
    When the fluid is heated by the interposition of another fluid the heat
    generator must be a part of the unitary structure of the fluid heater, with
    one exception--to wit: devices for generating a vapor having a vapor
    separator within the fluid chamber may be heated indirectly by a fluid, the
    furnace for heating which does not form part of the unitary structure.  The
    fluid may be heated also by a heat radiating body in either a liquid, or
    solid state, which body may be either on the inside or on the outside of
    the fluid chamber; but if said heating body be inside the fluid chamber its
    nature must be such that it will not mix with the fluid to be heated.

    TERMINOLOGY

    "Water" and "steam" as used in these definitions are to be taken in a
    generic sense as meaning liquid and vapor. "Fire tubes" include both small
    and large tubes through which the products of combustion pass unless the
    term "flue" is used with them, in which case "fire tubes" would refer to
    the small tubes, and "flues" to the large tubes for the products of
    combustion.

    "Water tubes" designate tubes, both large and small, through which liquid
    or vapor passes.

    "Steam tubes" designate vapor tubes whether the vapor therein be formed
    from water or any other liquid.

    "Boiler" is used as a generic term for a liquid heater.  The nature of the
    liquid heated is immaterial.  Whether the liquid heated is conducted from
    the boiler as liquid or vapor depends upon the amount supplied and the
    degree of heat attained, and for this reason generally no distinction has
    been noted in the classification, similar structures being classified
    together regardless of the ultimate effect.  In the type of boilers known
    as "flashers" this distinction is of importance and provision has been made
    therefor.

    (1)     Note.  The distinction between water heaters in Classes 122 and 126
    is this: The water heaters in Class 122 have a closed water containing
    chamber or receptacle for holding the water while it is heated or have one
    or more closed conduits through which the water flows while being heated;
    but the water heaters in class 126 are of the open type.  In Class 122 are
    classified mechanism for regulating both the inflow of water to the boiler
    and the burning of the fuel in all cases when steam is generated and also
    in all cases when water is heated, excepting in devices for heating water
    where the opening of a valve to permit water to flow through the heater at
    the same time increases the heat of the heat generator, such devices being
    classified in Class 126, subclasses 351; but this subclass relates only to
    the controlling device for the water and fuel.  The structure of the water
    heater or boiler together with such a controlling mechanism are classified
    in Class 122.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 104.03 for pipe
    and tube cleaners generally 314, 316.1+ and 406+ for pipe and tube cleaners
    and boiler tube blowers using air or steam blast and/or suction.

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 641.1+ for power plants utilizing solar
    water heaters and steam generators and subclasses 39.05 and 39.53+ for
    processes and apparatus for addition  of steam and/or water with products
    of combustion.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 215+ for weir maters combined
    with feed water heater structures.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 276, 277 and 359+ for
    beverages and food cookers using liquid heaters pertinent to this class;
    and subclasses 468+ for treatment of dairy food which includes milk
    treating apparatus using liquid heaters.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, for signals.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 5 for combination cooking stoves and
    water heaters and steam generators; 20+ for steam heated ovens and
    generators; 33 for combination steam generators and steam tables; 31, 34,
    35 for water-backs and safety devices therefor and water heating tanks; 101
    for combination of hot air furnaces with boilers for hot water or steam;
    513+ for fireplace water heaters; 344, 345+ and 350+ for domestic water
    heaters and furnace heated kettles; 348 for steam generators and cookers;
    361 for structure of common "kitchen" or "range" stand boilers when they
    are not heated directly (stand boilers having a direct heater are
    classified in Class 122); 364+, 367, 368, and 373+ for other types of water
    heaters; 415+, 417+ and 452 for solar heaters.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 11 for processes for regulating the boiler
    water level, subclass 94 for the control of the fuel in response to boiler
    or water heater condition subclasses 156+ for gas pressure discharge of
    liquid as to a boiler, subclasses 171+ for steam traps, subclasses 386+ for
    level responsive valves, and subclasses 557 and 558 for pressure and level
    responsive signals and indicators.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, appropriate subclasses for the wall
    structure of a boiler tube or flue; subclasses 89+ for plugs for pipes; and
    subclasses 98+ for patches for pipes.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclass, for a heat exchanger, per se.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclasses 152+ for liquid volatilization
    for the purpose of recovering material from the vapor produced by
    condensation or absorption.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 196+ for
    electrolytic protection apparatus (e.g., to prevent corrosion, scale
    formation, or other objectionable action upon liquid heaters or vaporizers,
    etc.).

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 724+ for processes of electrolytic
    protection of metal objects (e.g., to prevent corrosion, scale formation,
    or other objectionable action upon liquid heaters or vaporizers, etc.).

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 175+ for a heater or
    heat exchanger combined with liquid purification means.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 281+ for water heaters and steam
    generators particularly adapted to be heated by an electric heater.

    220,    Receptacles, appropriate subclasses, for wall structures of
    containers of more general utility and for safety devices and for manhole
    covers.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 30 for furnace lining formation or repair and see the notes
    thereto.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, subclass 367 for a threaded fastener and nut
    having stay bolt spacer sleeve; subclass 370 for a threaded fastener and
    nut having a stay bolt bearing washer; subclasses 379+ for a threaded stay
    bolt, per se; and subclass 505 for an unthreaded stay bolt, per se.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 36+ for liquid level control of a pump drive
    motor, subclasses 108+ for aerated column type pumps wherein is elevated by
    alternate globules of water and steam and subclasses 118+ for pumping of
    liquid by supplying or exhausting of gaseous motive fluid to or from a pump
    chamber.

    451,    Abrading, for structural features of a cleaner for a tube or flue.

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 247+ for
    compositions for descaling steam boilers or other water containers.


CLS 122/1
TXT Combinations of elements and devices under the class definition each
    performing different functions for the conservation of the heat generated
    in the furnace, the ultimate object of which is the production of steam or
    the heating of water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for "alkali" steam generators.

    448.1,  449, 450, and 452, for regulating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, generally for devices peculiar to that class.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, for plants involving the steam
    engine structure.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 2+ for combinations of
    internal combustion motors and other engines and steam boilers.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 12.1 and 13 for vehicle plant and
    heating systems.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, for plants involving rotary
    expansible chamber structure.


CLS 122/2
TXT Plants under subclass 1 for the destruction of garbage relating either to
    the arrangement of the boiler or the boiler structure adapted for this
    special purpose.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232     and 376, for water grate structure adapted to burn garbage or other
    waste material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 234, for garbage plants with a conventional
    arrangement of a boiler therewith.


CLS 122/3
TXT Boiler plants under subclass 1 specially adapted for motor vehicles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    446+,   448.1, 449, and 452, for analogous structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 668 for a steam power system physically
    related to a vehicle.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 36+ for a motor vehicle of the steam
    traction engine type; subclasses 303+ for a motor vehicle having a traction
    motor of the kind which is driven by expansible gas from a source external
    of the motor and wherein the gas is produced by treating a volatile fluid
    (e.g., the gas is steam); and subclass 310 for a motor vehicle having means
    to generate steam for a propulsion purpose.


CLS 122/4
TXT Boilers under the class definition and parts thereof not otherwise
    classifiable.


CLS 122/5
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to combinations of a gas
    producing furnace and boiler when the structure of the boiler is intimately
    associated with the producer, so as to form a unitary structure, the gas
    from the producer being burned to heat the boiler.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6+,     for boilers heated by gas passing through a boiler from a gas
    producer, the heat of the hot gas being used for heating the boiler.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, for gas making plants including a
    boiler.

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 229, for gas producer furnaces and see the notes
    therewith.


CLS 122/5.51
TXT AIR-INJECTED:
    Devices under the class definition for vaporizing a liquid, with means for
    mingling air therewith in the vaporizer.


CLS 122/5.52
TXT Combustion gas and vapor contact:
    Devices under subclass 5.51 wherein the vapor is combined with the
    byproducts of burning fuels.


CLS 122/6
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to boilers, water
    heaters, or cooling devices for furnace walls having a closed chamber or
    conduit combined with a conventional type of furnace employed in a special
    art.

    (1)     Note.  If the cooling device is not a closed chamber or conduit, it
    will be classified in the type of furnace of the special art.  Class 122
    includes such devices known as bosh plates, water cooled walls and roofs,
    linings, and water cooled tuyeres when the cooling device is a closed
    chamber or conduit and there is otherwise no novelty in the invention.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclasses 63+ and 67, for gas
    producers using similar structure.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 190 and 241 for cooling
    features in devices of that class.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 160 for a furnace type combustion chamber
    having means directing nonliquid cooling medium across elements of a device
    dispersing fuel into a furnace.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 233+ for a residual material heating apparatus
    element having protective cooling structure.


CLS 122/6.5
TXT Subject matter under subclass 6 comprising water circulation devices
    applied to the gas or air ports of a furnace.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    431,    Combustion, subclass 160 for a fuel disperser installed in a
    combustion chamber cooled by a gas additional to the combustion materials.

    432,    Heating, subclass 173 for a specific furnace having a protective
    cooling means for combustion material feed structure.


CLS 122/6.6
TXT Subject matter under subclass 6 comprising conduits for feeding air to
    furnaces and provided with a closed water-circulation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 182.5+ for tuyeres of general application and
    for other water circulation means therefor.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclass 265+ and especially 270 for
    tuyeres used in metallurgical apparatus which may include a liquid cooled
    tuyere element where the tuyere element is combined with additional
    structure, as for example, an external gas supply pipe, means for feeding
    diverse materials, flow control valves or a tuyere cooler, Further, see
    subclasses 186+ and 218+ for tuyeres combined with the treating vessel.


CLS 122/6.7
TXT Devices under subclass 6.6 with water circulation, of a type used in a
    forge and in which the direction of the air blast is usually vertical.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 182.6 for tuyeres in forge furnaces.


CLS 122/7
TXT Devices under subclass 6 comprising combinations of a conventional type of
    industrial furnace and a boiler located so as to be heated by the waste
    heat of the furnace.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     421 and 470, for analogous devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    432,    Heating, subclasses 90+ for (1) a structure in which the waste heat
    of a nominal boiler heats a material heating chamber of the Class 432 type
    (2) a structure in which the waste heat of a specific furnace heats a
    closed water chamber or conduit or (3) for a residual combination of a
    liquid heater and a work heater of the Class 432 type in which the heated
    liquid is utilized in heating the work.


CLS 122/8
TXT Industrial boilers under subclass 6 having a water jacket firebox.


CLS 122/9
TXT Industrial boilers under subclass 8 including a firebox the walls of which
    are provided with water containing tubes.


CLS 122/10
TXT Boilers under the class definition for generating steam for feeding a fluid
    fuel burner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 207+ for a burner assembly including as an
    element a supply line in which burner feed; e.g., air, oil, or fuel
    atomizing water; is heated.


CLS 122/11
TXT Boilers under the class definition in which a substantial part or the whole
    of the fluid-containing chamber is designed to be continuously-rotated
    while heating the water or generating steam.


CLS 122/12
TXT Boilers under the class definition that are supported in bearings so that
    the whole boiler or a substantial part thereof may be turned on an axis,
    generally either vertical or horizontal, after its connecting steam and
    water pipes have been uncoupled.


CLS 122/13.1
TXT STAND BOILER:
    Subject matter under the class definition relating to closed water
    chambers, tanks or receptacles usually known in the art as "range" or
    "stand" boilers, whose structure is modified for the purposes of applying
    heat directly to the boiler.

    (1)     Note.  See also the proper structural subclass, for auxiliary
    heaters for stand boilers in this class.  For example, if it is a sectional
    water heater, that type of heater; if it is a water tube type heater,
    search the type subclass under water tube boilers.  See subclasses 210 and
    250, of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for water heaters, some of which may be connected to heat water for
    a stand boiler.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, for combinations of cooking or heating stoves,
    water or steam generators, circulating system of pipes and stand boilers
    heated by water-boilers, and solar heaters and steam; especially subclasses
    5, 34, 35, 350 and 351, for water heaters applicable to stand boilers that
    are not classified in this class (122); 361, 364+, 415+, 417+, and 452, for
    ordinary stand boilers with water heaters and circulation systems, and 363,
    for boiler supports that may have a heating burner.


CLS 122/13.2
TXT Electric:
    Devices under subclass 13.1 where the means to apply heat is an electric
    heater.


CLS 122/14
TXT Stand boilers under subclass 13 heated by fluid fuel.


CLS 122/15
TXT Stand boilers under subclass 13 having a solid fuel furnace forming a part
    of the unitary structure of the stand boiler.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for stand boilers modified to be heated by the waste heat of a
    solid fuel furnace like that of a cooking stove.


CLS 122/16
TXT Stand boilers under subclass 13 provided with both fire tubes and water
    tubes adapted to be heated by a fluid fuel burner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for steam boilers provided with fire tubes and water tubes heated
    by a solid fuel furnace.

    17,     for stand boilers provided only with fire tubes and heated by fluid
    fuel.


CLS 122/17
TXT Stand boilers under subclass 13 provided with fire tubes and heated by a
    fluid fuel burner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for stand boilers having fire tubes and heated by solid fuel.

    16,     for stand boilers provided with both fire tubes and water tubes and
    heated by fluid fuel.


CLS 122/18
TXT Stand boilers under subclass 13 provided with water tubes located below the
    boiler and heated by a fluid fuel burner.


CLS 122/19
TXT Stand boilers under subclass 13 provided with water tubes and surrounded by
    a casing and heated by a fluid fuel burner.


CLS 122/20
TXT Steam generators or water heaters under the class definition located either
    in the firebox, combustion chamber, or offtake flue of a furnace whose main
    purpose is not for the generation of steam or the heating of water in such
    boiler.  These boilers may be of any form consisting of mere pipes or
    coils, hollow plates, or cylinders with or without fire flues or tubes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6+,     10, 37, 38, 439, and 498, for analogous structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 5, 31, 34, 101, 513+, 364, and 365,
    for analogous art not of general application.


CLS 122/21
TXT Boilers under the class definition wholly or partly heated by chemical
    action other than that of the combustion of fuel.  This subclass includes
    that type of liquid heater and steam generator known in the art as "alkali"
    generators for steam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 263.01+ for chemical heaters of
    general utility.


CLS 122/22
TXT Boilers under the class definition not otherwise classifiable heated by
    solid or fluid fuel or both combined.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211,    for sectional boilers heated by solid or fluid fuel.


CLS 122/23
TXT Boilers under the class definition not otherwise classifiable that are
    heated by fluid fuel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     14, 16-19, 23, 24, 25, 41, 43, 45, 115, 156, 161, 167, 177, 179,
    183, 208, 210, 211, 216, 236, 243, 245, 248, 250, 274, 283, 308, 319, 322,
    328, 333, 348, 356, 446, 447, 448.1, and 502, for other boilers heated by
    fluid fuel.


CLS 122/24
TXT Devices under subclass 23 the fuel combustion of which is intermittent and
    explosive.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 39.07 and 722+ for devices in which the
    products of combustion enter the fluid chamber.


CLS 122/25
TXT Devices under subclass 23 provided with a plurality of fluid fuel burners
    one above the other.


CLS 122/26
TXT Boilers under the class definition heated by friction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    380,    for boilers having mechanically operated cleaning agitators.

    411,    for mechanical circulating devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 247 for other frictional heaters.


CLS 122/27
TXT Boilers under the class definition heated by a noncombustible hot material,
    such as slag, bars, or pigs of iron, or brick that does not come into
    contact with the liquid to be heated.


CLS 122/28
TXT Boilers under the class definition heated by a noncombustible hot material,
    either introduced into the water or having the water fed upon the hot
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31.1,   for fluid heated by injection of a hot fluid.


CLS 122/29
TXT Boilers under the class definition not otherwise classifiable which have an
    annular firebox.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    184, 246, 309, 323, and 335, for other boilers with an annular
    firebox.


CLS 122/30
TXT Boilers under the class definition having fuel magazines and not otherwise
    classifiable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      46, 66, 92, 117, 124, 128, 136, 157, 158, 162, 168, 212, 219, 222,
    237, 251, 272, 310, 320, 334, 339, 344, and 373, for other boilers having
    fuel magazines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 293+ and the notes thereunder for other fuel
    magazines.


CLS 122/31.1
TXT INDIRECTLY HEATED SEPARATE INJECTED FLUID:
    Devices under the class definition in which heating of a fluid is by the
    injection of a hot fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for analogous devices used for noncombustible hot material.


CLS 122/31.2
TXT Submerged flame:
    Devices under subclass 31.1 wherein the hot fluid is produced by an
    underwater combustion.


CLS 122/32
TXT Devices under the class definition having two separate compartments not in
    communication, the liquid to be vaporized being in one compartment and
    heated by a hot fluid in the other compartment.

    (1)     Note.  Slag heated boilers, where the slag heats a fluid like air
    or water which in turn imparts its heat to the water in the steam making
    chamber and water evaporating apparatus indirectly heated, provided the
    structure of such apparatus must act as a vapor or steam generator, are
    classified in this and its subsidiary subclasses.  Even sugar evaporators
    and vacuum pans are classified here if the structure is such as to be of
    general application as a steam generator and the discharge outlet for the
    syrup is only of such a character as to be equally adapted for a blow-off
    conduit for sludge in a steam generator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    483,    for superheaters indirectly heated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 45.1 for process and apparatus for
    vaporizing liquefied gas requiring steps or means involving pressure or
    temperature control special to liquefied gas and more than required for
    other liquids.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for a heat exchanger having
    two noncommunicating chambers not having a vapor separator in a heated
    chamber.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 175+ for a heater
    combined with apparatus of that (210) class.


CLS 122/33
TXT Devices under subclass 32, provided with a furnace forming a part of the
    unitary structure.


CLS 122/34
TXT Devices under subclass 32 having an internal vapor or steam separator.


CLS 122/35
TXT Boilers under the class definition provided with one or more chambers in
    which the hot boiler water or steam may be stored when less than the normal
    amount of steam is being used, which may serve as a storage reservoir for
    heat energy under abnormal demands for steam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 659 for a heat operated power system
    including a heat steam or compressed gas storage means.


CLS 122/36
TXT Boilers under the class definition having means for passing exhaust steam
    through conduits within the boiler or in surface contact therewith or for
    passing live steam generated in the same boiler or in another boiler into
    the water in the boiler.  This subclass includes processes for getting up
    steam by the injection of live steam from one boiler into another boiler.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27      and 28, for boilers heated by slag or hot brick or bars of iron.

    31.1,   for boilers heated by the injection of a liquid of a kind that does
    not mix with the water in the boiler.

    32+,    for boilers heated indirectly by another hot fluid.

    407,    for injector circulation systems.

    463,    for similar structure in steam treating superheaters.

    509,    for submerged chambers.


CLS 122/37
TXT Boilers under the class definition having separate water chambers, which
    may or may not be in communication with each other at the top of the
    boiler.  Theses boilers are designed to be used either as steam boilers for
    generating steam at different pressure or for generating steam and also for
    heating water when it is desired to have steam for one purpose and water
    heating for other purposes, as for instance, using the steam for one set of
    radiators and the water for another set, or for generating steam or hot
    water for the radiators on one floor of a building and for generating steam
    or hot water for radiators on another floor, with separate circuits to each
    compartment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for boilers provided with auxiliary water heaters, where the water
    is heated or steam generated for separate use.

    33,     for boilers having separate compartments, where the water is heated
    or steam generated indirectly by heat from water or steam heated in another
    compartment of the boiler by a furnace.

    83      and 123, for boilers with separate compartments, where the water is
    fed progressively from one compartment to the next one.

    125,    420, 421, and 439, for water heaters heated by furnace gases.


CLS 122/38
TXT Devices under subclass 37 at least one compartment being for heating water
    to operate a motor for regulating the combustion of the  boiler furnace.


CLS 122/39
TXT Boilers under the class definition in which the liquid flows over the
    heating surface of the boiler in a thin stream and occupies only a limited
    portion of the boiler space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218     and 242+, for capillary tubes.

    258,    for allied art.

    501+,   for displacing elements in tubes causing the liquid to spread in a
    thin film.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 359 for similar structure in stoves.


CLS 122/40
TXT Boilers under the class definition in which liquid is flashed into vapor as
    soon as it enters the vapor generating chamber.  The liquid may be
    preheated in a chamber forming part of the unitary boiler structure or
    preheated in a chamber separate from the main vapor generator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     242+ and 260, for progressive heaters.

    247+,   for progressively heated steam generators.

    446,    448.1, 449, and 452, for regulating devices for flashers and
    progressively heated steam generators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 39.05, 39.3, 39.53+, and 106, for devices
    of that class having flash boilers.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 271+ for electrically heated flash
    boilers.


CLS 122/41
TXT Flash boilers under subclass 40 heated by fluid fuel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     248 and 250, for progressively heated fluid by a fluid fuel burner.

    446,    448.1 and 452, for regulation of boilers.


CLS 122/42
TXT Boilers under the class definition provided with both water tubes and fire
    tubes not otherwise provided for.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    68+ and 98, for horizontal fire tube boilers with water tubes.

    113,    for analogous art.

    130+,   for vertical fire tube boilers provided with water tubes.

    138,    140+, 149+, and 152, for horizontal flue boilers with water tubes.

    153+,   and 166+, for vertical flue boilers provided with water tubes.

    195+,   for horizontal cylindrical boilers with water tubes.


CLS 122/43
TXT Devices under subclass 42 heated by fluid fuel.


CLS 122/44.1
TXT FIRE TUBE:
    Boilers under the class definition having fire tubes not otherwise
    classifiable.

    (1)     Note.  The term "fire tube" is used in a sense broad enough to
    include both small tubes and large tubes forming passages through a chamber
    when the size of the tube is immaterial to the invention claimed; but
    patents disclosing boilers provided with large fire tubes or "flues", where
    the large size of the tubes is a material feature of the structure and is
    necessary to the structure of the boiler and its combination with other
    features, are classified under the "flue" types of boilers, subclass 135,
    and the subclasses thereunder, except in that type of boiler where the
    large fire tube or flue be a subsidiary feature of the boiler, which is
    manifestly of the small fire tube type, in which case it is classified
    under the fire tube subclasses.  See for example, this class, subclasses
    47, 48, 50, and 78.

    (2)     Note.  When a large flue in a boiler is essential to the structure
    and is not a mere subsidiary feature, such patents are classified in the
    "flue" type of boiler, although small fire tubes are an essential part of
    the combination, except those type classified in this class, subclasses 47
    and 48.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for boilers having separate compartments having fire tubes.

    42+,    for miscellaneous combinations of fire tube and water tube boilers,
    but only those that are not specially provided for in the combination fire
    tube and water tube subclasses under the fire tube or the flue type.

    191     through 207,  inclusive, under horizontal cylinder, for horizontal
    cylindrical boilers having water heating structures consisting of water
    tubes, drums, water walls, and water chambers of various forms, in
    combination with the boiler or being of such a configuration as to adapt it
    for use with a horizontal cylindrical boiler provided fire tubes are not
    essential to the boiler.


CLS 122/44.2
TXT With baffle in flue:
    Devices under subclass 44.1 wherein a static structure regulates the fluid
    flow in a flue.


CLS 122/45
TXT Fire tube boilers under subclass 44 heated by fluid fuel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    156, 161, 167, 179, and 183, for other fire tube or flue boilers
    heated by fluid fuel.


CLS 122/46
TXT Fire tube boilers under subclass 44 having a fuel magazine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92,     117, 124, and 128, for other fire tube boilers with magazines.

    157,    162 and 168, for other flue boilers with magazines.

    212,    219 and 222, for sectional boilers with fuel magazines.


CLS 122/47
TXT Devices under subclass 44 having a large horizontal flue, not covered by
    the definitions of other subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50      and 78, for analogous art.

    136,    for horizontal flue boilers with transverse fire tubes.

    149,    for horizontal flue boilers with return fire tubes within the same
    part of the boiler as the flue.


CLS 122/48
TXT Devices under subclass 44 having a large vertical flue not covered by the
    definitions of other subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49      and 114+, for other vertical fire tubes.


CLS 122/49
TXT Fire tube boilers under subclass 44 having both horizontal and vertical
    fire tubes.


CLS 122/50
TXT Fire tube boilers under subclass 44 that are horizontal or somewhat
    inclined from the horizontal having fire tubes that communicate with a
    large flue within the boiler, that may serve as a firebox.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     80, 95, and 149, for special features.

    109,    for inclined fire tube boilers.


CLS 122/51
TXT Devices under subclass 44 comprising fire tube boilers that are horizontal
    not covered by other subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for fire tube boilers with a large horizontal flue.

    49,     for horizontal fire tube boilers having vertical fire tubes.

    113,    for horizontal boilers with transverse fire tubes.

    136+,   for combinations of horizontal large flue boilers with fire tubes,
    both horizontal and vertical.


CLS 122/52
TXT Devices under subclass 51 having two or more boilers arranged side by side
    or superposed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82      and 137, for horizontal flue boilers with the same arrangement.


CLS 122/53
TXT Devices under subclass 52 with water tubes in various arrangement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    for horizontal flue boilers with water tubes.


CLS 122/54
TXT Devices under subclass 51 with a firebox located midway its ends, having
    outlets for the products of combustion opposite each other.


CLS 122/55
TXT Subject matter under subclass 51 relating to the structure of single
    cylindrical boilers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    The Horizontal cylindrical subclasses for the boiler features without the
    fire tubes.


CLS 122/56
TXT Devices under subclass 51 having a separate and distinct boiler section
    provided with fire tubes, located beneath the boiler, at the rear of the
    bridge wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     85+, 110, and 191, for closely allied art.


CLS 122/57
TXT Devices under subclass 51 having a two-part water firebox or the equivalent
    thereof, with mechanism for passing the products of combustion from one
    part of the firebox to the other part, in order that the smoke may be
    consumed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for similar functions with a different structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 208+ for similar art.


CLS 122/58
TXT Devices under subclass 51 having a water firebox united to and extending
    below the main body of the boiler.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73,     74 and 76+, for return fire tube horizontal fire tube boilers with
    drop water fireboxes.

    107,    for horizontal fire tube boilers with water walls having a drop
    water firebox.

    139,    141 and 146, for horizontal large flue boilers with drop water
    fireboxes.


CLS 122/59
TXT Devices under subclass 58 with a conduit located either inside or outside
    the boiler to connect the water firebox with the opposite end of the boiler
    to help the circulation of the water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     for water conduits provided with a sediment trap and water heating
    tubes.


CLS 122/60
TXT Devices under subclass 58 made with two compartments, with means for
    alternately passing the products of combustion from one compartment to the
    other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for water fireboxes with alternate smoke return features.

    95,     for plural fireboxes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 208+ for similar functions in the furnace art.


CLS 122/61
TXT Devices under subclass 58 with a water baffle depending from the top of the
    firebox, formed either by walls spaced apart or water tubes, or water tubes
    combined with fire brick, or water walls.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188,    for analogous art.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 324+ for similar art.


CLS 122/62
TXT Devices under subclass 58 with both front and rear water baffles for the
    products of combustion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for rear baffles having water tubes on which rests brickwork.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 322+, 331+ and 336+ for similar functions in
    the combustion art.


CLS 122/63
TXT Devices under subclass 58 with a water baffle in the front of the firebox.


CLS 122/64
TXT Devices under subclass 58 with a separate combustion chamber between the
    firebox and the fire tubes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95      and 100, for other types of boilers with an interposed combustion
    chamber between the firebox and the fire tubes.


CLS 122/65
TXT Devices under subclass 58, with a water baffle in the rear of the firebox.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for analogous art.

    71,     for solid baffles, supported by water tubes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 331+ and 336+ for similar art.


CLS 122/66
TXT Devices under subclass 58 containing a water-cooled coking chamber for fuel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67      and 92, for analogous art.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 230+ for similar art.


CLS 122/67
TXT Devices under subclass 58 with a plurality of fuel chambers, one of which
    at least has a water grate, the products of combustion from the fuel
    chambers meeting each other. The fuel chambers are generally superposed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66,     for boilers of this type when the upper fuel chamber is a coking
    chamber.

    371+,   for grate structure.


CLS 122/68
TXT Devices under subclass 58 with some form of water chamber, conduits or
    tubes in the firebox.


CLS 122/69
TXT Devices under subclass 68 with check valves so arranged that water from the
    boiler circulates through the chambers, conduits or tubes until feed water
    is being fed thereto, when the boiler circulation is cut off.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118,    for similar art.

    196,    for check valved feed heaters for    horizontal cylindrical boilers.


CLS 122/70
TXT Devices under subclass 68 with air feeding conduits.


CLS 122/71
TXT Devices under subclass 68 with solid baffle brick combined with the tubes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     65, 68, and 69, for analogous art.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 324+ for similar art disclosed.


CLS 122/72
TXT Devices under subclass 51 having the end of the boiler projecting into the
    firebox or overhanging the fire grate.


CLS 122/73
TXT Devices under subclass 72 projecting into a drop water firebox.


CLS 122/74
TXT Devices under subclass 51 having a drop water firebox so arranged that the
    products of combustion pass a plurality of times through the boiler or
    underneath, through or over the boiler, and are discharged at the outlet
    flue located at the end of the boiler farthest from the firebox.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73,     for tubes merely projecting into a firebox.


CLS 122/75
TXT Devices under subclass 51 so arranged that the products of combustion pass
    through the boiler in opposite directions two or more times before they
    enter the outlet flue.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     72+, 81, and 85, for other structure which includes return features.

    87,     for horizontal fire tube boilers having U-shaped couplings for the
    fire tubes.

    149+,   for horizontal flue boilers having return fire tubes.


CLS 122/76
TXT Devices under subclass 75 having a water walled firebox depending from the
    boiler so arranged that the products of combustion pass directly through
    the lower tubes and return to the front of the boiler through the upper
    tubes and are discharged to the outlet flue at this point.


CLS 122/77
TXT Devices under subclass 76 having water tubes within some of the flues or
    fire tubes, which may extend into the firebox.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141     and 146, for allied art.


CLS 122/78
TXT Devices under subclass 75 having a water firebox of the large flue type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     for similar structure in horizontal or inclined tubes.


CLS 122/79
TXT Devices under subclass 51 having a water heating arch, formed of metal
    walls spaced apart, located beneath the boiler, extending either only over
    the firebox or along the whole combustion chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103     and 105, for subjacent water arches formed of water-tubes.


CLS 122/80
TXT Devices under subclass 51 having one or more cylindrical sections, provided
    with large flues located below the main boiler and in communication
    therewith.  The large flues generally inclose the fuel grate and serve as a
    firebox.  At the rear of the large flues there may or may not be small fire
    tubes in alinement therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50      and 241, for analogous art.


CLS 122/81
TXT Devices under subclass 51 having a water chamber depending from the main
    boiler, provided with transverse fire tubes and located in rear of the
    bridge wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     85, 86, 110, and 191, for analogous art.


CLS 122/82
TXT Devices under subclass 51 having a feed water heater located above the main
    boiler, in the combustion flue, heated by the products of combustion, and
    in open communication with the water space of the boiler.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    443,    for superposed feed heaters in communication with the boiler steam
    space.


CLS 122/83
TXT Devices under subclass 51 having compartments separated by metal diaphragms
    transversely arranged inside the boiler, or to boilers having a combustion
    chamber intermediate the ends, with transverse diaphragms at each end of
    the combustion chamber, or to separate boilers in alinement.  This subclass
    includes patents for progressively heating water fed to the boiler and also
    where the diaphragm is only for supporting the tubes to prevent vibration
    or where the diaphragms are for circulation purposes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    123, for vertical fire tube boilers with transverse diaphragms and
    having separate compartments.

    125,    151 and 425, for analogous structure.


CLS 122/84
TXT Devices under subclass 51 having two diameters, with that part of the
    boiler having the greater diameter over the firebox.  The great diameter is
    offset from the main boiler, and the offset portion has short fire tubes
    passed therethrough, while long fire tubes extend through the whole length
    of the boiler.  The products of combustion pass out of the firebox and
    return through the short tubes in the offset portion, and then pass in an
    opposite direction to the other end of the boiler, where the outlet flue is
    located, or they may return and pass through the upper short tubes and
    leave the boiler at the outlet flue located at the firebox end.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     81, 85, and 86, for similar art.


CLS 122/85
TXT Devices under subclass 51 having two diameters, the small diameter being
    over the firebox and the large diameter being beyond the bridge wall.  The
    offset portion of the large diameter is provided with longitudinally
    extending fire tubes, through which the products of combustion from the
    firebox pass and then are passed through return fire tubes extending the
    whole length of the boiler.  The products of combustion may then pass to
    the outlet flue at the front end of the boiler, or they may pass rearwardly
    above the boiler to the outlet flue located at the rear end, and in their
    final rearward passage may pass through fire tubes in an upwardly offset
    portion of the boiler.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     81, 86, 110, and 191, for analogous structure.


CLS 122/86
TXT Devices under subclass 85 having a water firebox.


CLS 122/87
TXT Devices under subclass 51 provided with U-shaped couplings connecting the
    fire tubes at the ends of the boiler, in order that the products of
    combustion may flow back and forth through the fire tubes in succession.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for miscellaneous boilers of the horizontal fire-tube type where
    the products of combustion pass back and forth through the fire tubes.

    360,    for U-couplings.


CLS 122/88
TXT Devices under subclass 51 having a superposed horizontal upper-drum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     486 and 492, for special features.


CLS 122/89
TXT Devices under subclass 51 provided with a water-cooled arch over the
    combustion chamber at the rear of the fire tubes. This arch may be formed
    of plates spaced apart or of water tubes or water tubes combined with solid
    material like firebrick.


CLS 122/90
TXT Devices under subclass 51 having a water firebox that are not otherwise
    classified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     for horizontal or inclined fire tube boilers having a large flue
    for the firebox.

    58+,    for horizontal fire tube boilers with drop water fireboxes.

    73,     for horizontal fire tube boilers with the barrel of the boiler
    projecting into the firebox, which is of the drop water firebox type.

    74      and 75+, for return fire tube boilers with water fireboxes.

    107,    for water walls with drop water fireboxes.

    139     and 141, for water fireboxes with other types of horizontal flue
    boilers.

    149,    for boilers having a large flue, with a water firebox.

    189,    193+, for water fireboxes for horizontal cylindrical boilers which
    may or may not have horizontal fire tubes.


CLS 122/91
TXT Devices under subclass 90 with some form of water heating chamber or
    conduits within the firebox, connected in circuit with the main part of the
    boiler, with some form of sediment trap in the water circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59,     for circulating conduits with water heaters in the firebox.

    202,    for horizontal cylindrical boilers having water heating tubes or
    chambers in circuit with the boiler, with a sediment trap in the circuit.

    380     and 403, for analogous art with a trapped circuit.


CLS 122/92
TXT Devices under subclass 90 provided with a fuel magazine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46      and 66, for miscellaneous fire tube boilers with a fuel magazine.


CLS 122/93
TXT Devices under subclass 90, wherein the water firebox is offset at the end
    of the boiler so that the products of combustion pass from the firebox
    directly into the fire-tubes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189     and 190, for offset water fireboxes so arranged that the products
    of combustion pass beneath the boiler upon leaving the firebox.


CLS 122/94.1
TXT Water tube type:
    Devices under subclass 93 composed of water tubes in whole or in part.


CLS 122/95.1
TXT Plural with common combustion chamber:
    Devices under subclass 90, having multiple fireboxes and in communication
    with a common combustion chamber located between the fireboxes and the fire
    tubes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     60 and 96, for horizontal fire tube boilers having a plurality of
    water fireboxes.

    64      and 100, for horizontal fire tube boilers having a water firebox,
    with a combustion chamber between the firebox and fire-tubes.


CLS 122/95.2
TXT Multiboilers:
    Devices under subclass 95.1 having multiple chambers for heating fluids.


CLS 122/96
TXT Devices under subclass 90 in which the water fireboxes are superposed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66      and 67, for special types of superposed fuel chambers.


CLS 122/97
TXT Devices under subclass 90 having a downdraft water grate.


CLS 122/98
TXT Devices under subclass 90 having an updraft water grate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    374,    377 and 378, for structure of grate.


CLS 122/99
TXT Devices under subclass 90 having water tubes therein straddling the fuel
    chamber.


CLS 122/100
TXT Devices under subclass 90 of the water tube type constructed wholly or in
    part of water tubes, with an interposed large flue between the firebox and
    the fire tubes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     94 and 95, for combustion chambers interposed between firebox and
    fire tubes.


CLS 122/101
TXT Devices under subclass 51 having a water cooled smoke-box.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151,    423, 425, and 426, for special features.


CLS 122/102
TXT Devices under subclass 51 having water tubes extending horizontally over
    the bridge wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154,    for horizontal flue boilers with water tubes over the bridge wall.

    195+,   for horizontal cylindrical boilers having fire tubes, with water
    tubes extending horizontally over the bridge wall, where it is immaterial
    whether the boiler is provided with fire tubes or not.

    263,    for water tube boilers having water tubes horizontal over the
    bridge wall.


CLS 122/103
TXT Devices under subclass 51 having water tubes in the rear of the fire tubes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89      and 195, for related art.

    150,    for closely allied art.

    153,    for horizontal flue boilers with water tubes.


CLS 122/104
TXT Devices under subclass 51 having rearwardly declined water tubes over the
    bridge wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108     and 154, for horizontal flue boilers, with water-tubes over the
    bridge wall.

    195+,   for horizontal cylindrical boilers provided with various kinds of
    water-tubes in the combustion chamber.

    291+    and 296, for rearwardly declined water-tubes over the bridge wall,
    having a longitudinally posited drum without fire-tubes over the
    water-tubes.


CLS 122/105
TXT Devices under subclass 51 having water tubes inclined rearwardly over the
    bridge wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108     and 154, for horizontal flue boilers with water tubes over the
    bridge wall.

    265,    for rearwardly inclined water tube boilers over the bridge wall.


CLS 122/106
TXT Devices under subclass 51 having water walls at the sides, front, or rear
    of the boiler, or at all of said locations.  The wall may also extend
    across the boiler below the combustion chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107     and 108, for similar art.


CLS 122/107
TXT Devices under subclass 106 having a water walled firebox depending from the
    boiler structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76      and 149, for closely related art.


CLS 122/108
TXT Devices under subclass 106 having some form of water tubes between the
    walls in the combustion chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135+,   for closely allied structure.


CLS 122/109
TXT Devices under subclass 44 placed in inclined position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     50, 51, 54, and 110, for boilers having some of the fire tubes
    inclined.


CLS 122/110
TXT Subject matter under subclass 44 relating to horizontally disposed boilers
    having transverse fire tubes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56      and 191, for analogous art.

    81,     for horizontal fire tube boilers with transverse fire tubes.

    113,    for combinations of transverse fire tubes, with water tubes.


CLS 122/111
TXT Subject matter under subclass 44 relating to vertical boilers having
    transverse fire tubes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    187,    for vertical flue boilers with transverse fire tubes.


CLS 122/112
TXT Devices under subclass 111 having a water firebox.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    187,    for vertical flue boilers having fire tubes extending from the
    inner large flue to the outside of the boiler.

    220,    for sectional boilers.


CLS 122/113
TXT Devices under subclass 44 having fire tubes extending transversely through
    the boiler and also having water tubes in communication with the boiler.


CLS 122/114
TXT Devices under subclass 44 placed in vertical position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     15, 16, and 17, for "stand boilers" or "range boilers" provided
    with vertical fire tubes.

    20,     for boilers having auxiliary water heaters.

    37,     for vertical fire tube boilers having separate boiler compartments
    which may or may not be in communication with each other (one of which
    compartments may be used as a water heater and the other as a steam
    generator.)

    40+,    for flash boilers with vertical fire tubes.

    42+,    for combinations of water tube and fire tube boilers of a
    miscellaneous character.

    48,     for combinations of fire tube boilers with vertical flue boilers or
    fire tube boilers having a large vertical flue of a miscellaneous character.

    49,     for boilers having both horizontal and vertical tubes.

    110,    for horizontally disposed boilers with transverse vertical fire
    tubes.

    115     and 119, for vertical cylindrical boilers with vertical fire tubes.

    178+,   for vertical cylindrical fire tubes above and in alinement with a
    vertical flue in the boiler.


CLS 122/115
TXT Devices under subclass 114 heated by fluid fuel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for miscellaneous boilers heated by solid or fluid fuel.

    23,     for miscellaneous boilers heated by fluid fuel.

    24,     for boilers heated by fluid fuel which is exploded while burning.

    43,     for combined fire tube and water tube boilers heated by fluid fuel
    that are of a miscellaneous nature.

    156,    for vertical flue boilers heated by fluid fuel.

    161     and 183, for other types of vertical flue boilers heated by fluid
    fuel.

    167,    177 and 179, for vertical flue boilers combined with internal water
    tubes and heated by fluid fuel.


CLS 122/116
TXT Devices under subclass 114 provided with a large space or dome at the lower
    end of the boiler, extending into the boiler, located over the firebox,
    with the tubes disposed around the dome.


CLS 122/117
TXT Devices under subclass 114 having a centrally disposed fuel magazine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for miscellaneous magazine boilers.

    128,    for vertical fire tube boilers having a water fire box and a
    central fuel magazine.

    157     and 168, for vertical flue boilers with a central fuel magazine.


CLS 122/118
TXT Devices under subclass 114 having sleeves, cylinders, or tubes arranged
    inside the boiler for aiding the boiler circulation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159,    for similar devices within a vertical flue boiler.

    408,    for similar structure in circulation devices.


CLS 122/119
TXT Devices under subclass 114 in vertical cylindrical boilers.


CLS 122/120
TXT Devices under subclass 114 having an offset firebox out of alinement with
    the fire tubes.  The firebox is generally of the water firebox type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175,    for vertical flue boilers with an offset water firebox.


CLS 122/121
TXT Devices under subclass 114 provided with fire tubes through which the
    products of combustion pass upon leaving the firebox and also fire tubes
    through which the products of combustion return to the other end of the
    boiler before they enter the outlet flue.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128,    for this type of boiler having a central magazine.

    182,    for vertical flue boilers having return fire tubes.


CLS 122/122
TXT Devices under subclass 121 having a water firebox.  The return fire tubes
    may be through the same boiler section or in another boiler section placed
    beside the other.


CLS 122/123
TXT Devices under subclass 114 provided with separate compartments either by
    diaphragms extending across the tubes or by complete boiler sections
    superposed or placed side by side, and having the feed water introduced
    into the compartment farthest from the fire box.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83,     for horizontal fire tube boilers having a progressive heating of
    the feed water.

    122     and 125, for analogous art.


CLS 122/124
TXT Devices under subclass 114 having a fuel magazine disposed on one or more
    sides of the boiler.


CLS 122/125
TXT Devices under subclass 114 having a separate water chamber above the steam
    space, through which the fire tubes pass to prevent the leaking of flue
    joints or to heat feed water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83,     123 and 164, for similar art.


CLS 122/126
TXT Devices under subclass 114 having a water firebox.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48      and 178+, for analogous structure.

    120,    for offset fireboxes.

    122,    for return fire tube vertical fire tube boilers with a water
    firebox.


CLS 122/127
TXT Devices under subclass 126 in the form of a ring or the like.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     for annular fireboxes with miscellaneous types of boilers.

    184,    for vertical flue boilers with an annular firebox.


CLS 122/128
TXT Devices under subclass 126 having a water firebox and a central fuel
    magazine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for miscellaneous vertical fire tube boilers having a central fuel
    magazine.

    157     and 168, for vertical flue boilers with a central magazine.


CLS 122/129
TXT Devices under subclass 114 having a downdraft water grate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    371,    for miscellaneous boilers with water grates.


CLS 122/130
TXT Devices under subclass 114 having some form of water tubes, not otherwise
    provided for.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166+,   for vertical flue boilers with water tubes in the flues.


CLS 122/131
TXT Devices under subclass 130 in which the water tubes are within the fire
    tubes.


CLS 122/132
TXT Devices under subclass 130 in which the water tubes are looped and arranged
    around the boiler.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185,    for vertical flue boilers with looped water tubes around a stand
    pipe within the flue.

    244     and 281, for water tube boilers having a stand pipe with water
    tubes surrounding it.


CLS 122/133
TXT Devices under subclass 130 in which the water tubes are of the spur type.


CLS 122/134
TXT Devices under subclass 44 in which the tubes are in the form of a volute.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261,    for water tubes of similar form.  (See also the search notes
    thereunder.)


CLS 122/135.1
TXT FLUE:
    Boilers under this class definition having one or more large fire tubes or
    flues wholly or partly surrounded by the water space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6+,     for industrial furnace boilers.

    20,     37, 47, and 48, for combinations of miscellaneous fire tube and
    flue boilers.

    368,    for miscellaneous water fire boxes.


CLS 122/135.2
TXT Alternative stack:
    Devices under subclass 135.1 having a substitute flue or fire tube.


CLS 122/135.3
TXT Sinusoidal flue:
    Devices under subclass 135.1 wherein the flue turns back on itself in an
    undulating manner.


CLS 122/136
TXT Subject matter under subclass 135 placed horizontally, not otherwise
    provided for.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for miscellaneous fire tube boilers having a large horizontal flue.

    78,     for horizontal return fire tube boilers with a horizontal flue
    firebox.

    80,     for horizontal fire tube boilers with a large flue boiler section
    beneath the boiler.

    409+,   for similar structure used in regulating circulation.


CLS 122/137
TXT A plurality of devices under subclass 136 either posited side by side or
    superposed one above the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     for similar arrangement of fire tube boilers.


CLS 122/138
TXT Devices under subclass 137 having water tubes in communication with the
    boilers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     102, 104, and 105, for structure including horizontal flue boilers.

    140+,   for horizontal flue boilers with internal water tubes.

    153+,   for horizontal flue boilers with water tubes exterior of the boiler.

    195,    for horizontal cylindrical fire-tube boilers with similar
    arrangement.


CLS 122/139
TXT Devices under subclass 136 with a drop water firebox at one end of the
    boiler.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58+,    for horizontal fire tube boilers with drop water firebox of
    analogous structure.

    141,    146 and 148, for other types of horizontal flue boilers with drop
    water fireboxes.


CLS 122/140.1
TXT Internal water tube:
    Devices under subclass 136 having some form of water tubes in the flues.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for horizontal flue boilers having internal water tubes heated by
    fluid fuel.

    154,    for water tubes within a large horizontal flue.


CLS 122/140.2
TXT Having water tube in flue:
    Devices under subclass 140.1 wherein the water tube is in the flue.


CLS 122/141
TXT Devices under subclass 140 having a drop water firebox with longitudinal
    water tubes in the flues.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77      and 146, for allied art.


CLS 122/142
TXT Devices under subclass 140 having return fire tubes, with some form of
    water tubes within the large flues.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for analogous art.

    147,    for horizontal flue boilers having return fire tubes, with
    transverse water tubes in the flues.

    149+,   for horizontal flue boilers with return fire tubes.


CLS 122/143
TXT Devices under subclass 140 having spur water tubes in the flue.


CLS 122/144
TXT Devices under subclass 140 having water tubes in the flue, with a firebox
    located beneath the boiler.


CLS 122/145
TXT Devices under subclass 140 having water tubes extending across the flues
    and communicating with the boiler at both ends.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143,    for spur tubes in the flue.


CLS 122/146
TXT Devices under subclass 145 having a drop-water-firebox.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for analogous art.

    141,    for the same structure with longitudinally placed water tubes in
    the flue.


CLS 122/147
TXT Devices under subclass 145 having small fire-tubes, through which the
    products of combustion pass, after leaving the large horizontal flues, in
    an opposite direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142,    146 and 149, for special features.

    143,    for large flues having spur water tubes therein.


CLS 122/148
TXT Devices under subclass 140 having a water firebox.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for similar art.

    141,    for horizontal flue boilers with a drop water firebox, with water
    tubes in the flue, running longitudinally.

    146,    for horizontal flue boilers with transverse water tubes and with a
    drop water firebox.


CLS 122/149
TXT Devices under subclass 136 having horizontally disposed small fire tubes,
    through which the products of combustion are returned through the boiler
    after leaving the large flues.  The firebox is generally located in the
    large flues.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for miscellaneous boilers having fire tubes with a horizontal flue.

    74,     76 and 107, for related art in the fire tube type of boiler.

    141,    146, 150, 151, and 410, for other types of horizontal flue boilers
    having return fire tubes.


CLS 122/150
TXT Devices under subclass 149 with water tubes at the rear of the flues and
    fire tubes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for similar art in a fire tube type of boiler.


CLS 122/151
TXT Devices under subclass 150 having a separate compartment at the rear of the
    fire tubes and flues in which feed water may be heated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    425,    for similar structure.


CLS 122/152
TXT Devices under subclass 136 with some form of water grate within the flue.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    371+,   for structure of water grates.


CLS 122/153
TXT Devices under subclass 136 having water tubes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102     through 105, for horizontal fire tube boilers with water tubes.

    138,    for plural boilers with water tubes.


CLS 122/154
TXT Devices under subclass 153 in which the water tubes extend over the bridge
    wall in the flue.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     102, 104, 105, and 108, for related structure.

    141,    for closely allied art in the horizontal flue type of boiler.


CLS 122/155.1
TXT Vertical:
    Subject matter under subclasses 135.1+ placed upright.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for miscellaneous fire tube boilers having a vertical flue.


CLS 122/155.2
TXT With flue baffle:
    Device under subclass 155.1 wherein a static structure regulates the fluid
    flow in a flue.


CLS 122/155.3
TXT Having exterior heating flue:
    Devices under subclass 155.1 wherein the flue is located on the outside of
    a fluid tank.


CLS 122/155.4
TXT Having corrugated flue:
    Devices under subclass 155.1 where the flue has parallel and alternating
    ridges and grooves.


CLS 122/155.5
TXT Having undulating flue:
    Devices under subclass 155.1 wherein the flue is shaped in wavelike or
    sinusoidal form.


CLS 122/156
TXT Vertical flue boilers under subclass 155 heated by fluid fuel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for miscellaneous boilers heated by solid or fluid fuel.

    23,     for miscellaneous boilers heated by fluid fuel.

    115,    for vertical fire tube boilers heated by fluid fuel.

    161,    167, 177, 179, and 183, for other types of vertical flue boilers
    heated by fluid fuel.


CLS 122/157
TXT Vertical flue boilers under subclass 155 having a centrally posited fuel
    magazine not otherwise provided for.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117     and 128, for vertical fire tube boilers with central magazines.

    162     and 168, for other vertical flue boilers having a central fuel
    magazine.


CLS 122/158
TXT Devices under subclass 157 in which the magazine is water jacketed.


CLS 122/159
TXT Vertical flue boilers under subclass 155 having internal tubes, cylinders,
    or sleeves inside the boiler space for increasing the circulation of water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118,    for similar art.

    408,    for circulation features of a general  character.


CLS 122/160
TXT Vertical flue boilers under subclass 155 comprising a plurality of
    concentrically posited annular water shells formed of walls spaced apart.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158,    for special forms of this type of boiler.


CLS 122/161
TXT Devices under subclass 160 heated by fluid fuel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183,    for spiral water conduits.


CLS 122/162
TXT Devices under subclass 160 having a centrally disposed fuel magazine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157+,   for more generally constructed boilers with a central fuel magazine.


CLS 122/163
TXT Vertical flue boilers under subclass 155 having a steam or water drum
    located outside of the main boiler structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for similar art.


CLS 122/164
TXT Vertical flue boilers under subclass 155 having the outlet flue through the
    steam space of the boiler provided with a heat insulator to prevent heating
    the steam space.  This insulator may be of some packing material or formed
    by an air chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    for vertical fire tube boilers with top water chambers.


CLS 122/165
TXT Devices under subclass 155 within which is some form of water heater other
    than water tubes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160     and 185, for allied art.

    166+,   for vertical flue boilers having internal water tubes.


CLS 122/166.1
TXT With internal water tube:
    Vertical flue boilers under subclasses 155.1+ having water tubes within the
    flue in communication with the boiler.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131,    for vertical water tube boilers with water tubes in the flues.

    184     through 187, for vertical flue boilers having a central standpipe
    provided with water tubes located in the vertical flue.

    468,    for boilers of that type having  steam superheater.


CLS 122/166.2
TXT Loop-type tube:
    Devices under subclass 166.1 wherein the water tube is folded back and
    joined at the ends.


CLS 122/167
TXT Devices under subclass 166 heated by fluid fuel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161,    177, 179, and 183, for other types of vertical flue boilers heated
    by fluid fuel.


CLS 122/168
TXT Devices under subclass 166 with a fuel magazine centrally located in the
    flue.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117     and 128, for vertical fire tube boilers with a central magazine.

    158     and 162, for other vertical flue boilers having a central fuel
    magazine.


CLS 122/169
TXT Devices under subclass 166 having coiled water tubes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244+    and 247+, for structure of coiled water tubes.


CLS 122/170
TXT Devices under subclass 169 in which the coils communicate with headers
    located within the flue.


CLS 122/171
TXT Devices under subclass 166, with the inlet opening to the flue of smaller
    diameter than the flue, and having water tubes within the flue.  There may
    or may not be a water firebox below the contracted inlet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175     and 179, for similar art.


CLS 122/172
TXT Devices under subclass 166 having water tubes in communication with headers
    located within the flue.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170,    for vertical flue boilers having coiled water tubes communicating
    with heaters located in the flue.

    178,    for similar structures of water tubes.


CLS 122/173
TXT Devices under subclass 166 having horizontal spur water tubes within the
    flue.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    for vertical fire tube boilers with spur water tubes.

    180     and 181, for other types of vertical flue boilers having spur water
    tubes.


CLS 122/174
TXT Devices under subclass 166 in which the water tubes are provided with
    internal fire tubes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242+,   for capillary tubes of this type.

    271     and 348, for vertical water tubes with internal fire tubes.


CLS 122/175
TXT Devices under subclass 166 provided with an offset water firebox.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for vertical fire tube boilers with offset water fireboxes.


CLS 122/176
TXT Devices under subclass 166 in which the water tubes extend transversely
    across the flue and communicating at both ends with the boiler.


CLS 122/177
TXT Devices under subclass 176 heated by fluid fuel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179     and 183, for other types of vertical flue boilers heated by fluid
    fuel.


CLS 122/178
TXT Devices under subclass 166 having small fire tubes in alinement with the
    flue.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48      and 126, for analogous structures in the fire tube art.


CLS 122/179
TXT Devices under subclass 178 heated by fluid fuel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    167 and 171, for analogous art.


CLS 122/180
TXT Devices under subclass 178 having spur water tubes within the large flue.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    for vertical fire tube boilers having spur water tubes.

    173     and 181, for vertical flue boilers having spur water tubes without
    the vertically alined fire tubes.

    186,    for vertical flue boilers having a spur water tube stand pipe
    within the flue.


CLS 122/181
TXT Devices under subclass 166 having vertical spur water tubes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    for vertical fire tube boilers, with vertical spur water tubes.


CLS 122/182.1
TXT With return fire tube:
    Devices under subclasses 155.1+ having small vertical fire tubes, through
    which the products of combustion are returned through the boiler after
    leaving the large flues.  The fire tubes may be within the same boiler
    section as the large flue or in a separate boiler section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121     and 122, for return fire tube vertical fire tube boilers.


CLS 122/182.2
TXT Having symmetrical arrangement of tubes:
    Devices under subclass 182.1 wherein the fire tubes are ordered in a
    balanced relationship.


CLS 122/182.3
TXT Having tubes offset from firebox:
    Devices under subclass 182.1 wherein the fire tubes are not directly in
    line with the combustion chamber.


CLS 122/183
TXT Devices under subclass 155 comprising one or more annular chambers having
    spiral water passages vertically posited, with or without a fluid fuel
    burner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161     and 501+, for related art.


CLS 122/184
TXT Devices under subclass 155 having a stand pipe provided with water tubes or
    merely a vertical pipe extending downwardly within the flue through the
    fuel grate to form an annular firebox.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     for miscellaneous boilers with an annular fire tube.

    127,    for vertical fire tube boilers with an annular water firebox.


CLS 122/185
TXT Devices under subclass 155 having a vertical stand pipe, with looped water
    tubes located within the flue.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215+,   for similar art in sectional boilers.

    244+    and 281, for structure of stand pipe and water tubes.


CLS 122/186
TXT Devices under subclass 155 having a stand pipe provided with spur water
    tubes located within the flue.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184,    for similar structure.

    215+,   for similar art in sectional boilers.

    307+,   for spur water tube stand pipe     structure.


CLS 122/187
TXT Devices under subclass 155 having fire tubes extending transversely through
    the annular water chamber formed by the inner and outer walls of the boiler.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111,    for vertical boilers with transverse fire tubes extending through
    the whole boiler.


CLS 122/188
TXT Horizontal cylindrical boilers under the class definition provided with a
    depending water-cooled baffle for the products of combustion, formed either
    of plates spaced apart, water tubes, or the combination of either of these
    with firebrick or some solid material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for drop baffles in the water firebox.


CLS 122/189
TXT Horizontal cylindrical boilers under the class definition having an offset
    subjacent firebox provided with a water-cooled roof. The firebox in
    addition to the water roof may also have one or more of its walls
    water-cooled, thereby forming an offset subjacent water firebox.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93+,    for offset water fireboxes for a horizontal fire tube boiler.

    190,    for offset fireboxes, for horizontal cylinder boilers.

    209     and 213, for this feature in sectional boilers.

    238,    336 and 352, for water tube boilers with offset fireboxes.


CLS 122/190
TXT Horizontal cylindrical boilers under the class definition having an offset
    subjacent firebox having water tubes surrounding the fuel space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194,    for analogous art.


CLS 122/191
TXT Horizontal cylindrical boilers under the class definition having subsidiary
    fire tube section of the boiler beyond the bridge wall.  The fire tubes may
    be either vertical or horizontal, and if horizontal may extend either
    longitudinally or transversely of the boiler.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     81 and 85+, for closely allied structure.


CLS 122/192
TXT Horizontal cylindrical boilers under the class definition having a
    water-cooled bridge wall.


CLS 122/193
TXT Horizontal cylindrical boilers under the class definition having a firebox
    located beneath one end of the boiler and having one or more water walls
    forming the sides of the firebox.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58+     and 90+, for horizontal fire tube boilers with various types of
    water fireboxes.

    139,    141 and 146, for horizontal flue boilers with water fireboxes.

    188,    for drop water baffles.

    189,    for water cooled roofs.


CLS 122/194
TXT Devices under subclass 193 having a series of water tubes either embedded
    in the walls of the firebox or located just inside the walls surrounding
    the fuel space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    190,    for offset subjacent fireboxes.


CLS 122/195
TXT Horizontal cylindrical boilers under the class definition having some form
    of water tubes, water chambers, or drums in communication therewith.  The
    cylindrical boiler may or may not be provided with fire tubes or flues.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     47, 48, 49, 50, and 51+, for various types of horizontal fire tube
    boilers provided with water tubes, waterwalls, drums, or chambers.

    136+,   for horizontal cylindrical boilers having large flues therein and
    provided with water tubes, water walls, drums, or water heating chambers.


CLS 122/196
TXT Devices under subclass 195 through which the boiler water circulates and is
    heated, with check valves so arranged that the feed water when introduced
    flows through the tubes and is heated therein and is not permitted to enter
    the boiler directly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for a similar arrangement of valves.


CLS 122/197
TXT Devices under subclass 195 extending longitudinally on the sides thereof.


CLS 122/198
TXT Devices under subclass 195 arranged vertically on the sides thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     53, 138, and 153+, for analogous art.


CLS 122/199
TXT Devices under subclass 198 in which the tubes are on each side of the
    firebox.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68      and 94, for analogous art.


CLS 122/200
TXT Devices under subclass 195 placed over the fuel grate.


CLS 122/201
TXT Devices under subclass 195 in which the water tubes are provided with
    internal fire tubes located in the combustion chamber beneath the boiler.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    267,    for internal fire tubes within the water tubes.


CLS 122/202
TXT Devices under subclass 195 having a water tube heating circuit provided
    with some form of sediment trap in the circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     398 and 404, for analogous art.


CLS 122/203
TXT Devices under subclass 195 having a down-draft water grate located beneath
    the boiler.


CLS 122/204
TXT Devices under subclass 195 provided with a plurality of fireboxes having
    fuel grates, at least one of which is a water-cooled grate, so arranged
    that the products of combustion from the fireboxes meet each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67      and 287, for analogous art.


CLS 122/205
TXT Devices under subclass 195 having a plurality of fire grates, one or more
    of which are of the water tube type and so arranged that the products of
    combustion from one grate pass over or through the other grate.


CLS 122/206
TXT Devices under subclass 195 having a fuel grate consisting of solid bars and
    water-cooled bars combined.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    375     and 377, for grate structure.


CLS 122/207
TXT Devices under subclass 195 having an updraft water grate located beneath
    the boiler.


CLS 122/208
TXT Boilers under the class definition comprising flat plates provided with
    zigzag passages heated by fluid fuel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    356,    for zigzag water tube boilers heated by fluid fuel.


CLS 122/209.1
TXT SECTIONAL:
    Boilers under the class definition made of separate parts generally formed
    of cast metal sections and not otherwise classifiable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44+,    135+ and 235+, for sectional water tube boilers having fire tubes,
    flues or water tubes.


CLS 122/209.2
TXT Feeding air:
    Devices under subclass 209.1 wherein tubes are provided to admit outside
    air and allow the escape of this air into the fire box once heated.


CLS 122/210
TXT Sectional boilers under subclass 209 heated by fluid fuel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for miscellaneous boilers heated by fluid fuel.

    211,    for sectional boilers heated by either solid or fluid fuel.


CLS 122/211
TXT Sectional boilers under subclass 209 heated by either solid or fluid fuel
    or both combined.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for miscellaneous boilers heated by both solid and fluid fuel.


CLS 122/212.1
TXT With magazine:
    Sectional boilers under subclasses 209.1+ having a fuel storage area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for miscellaneous magazine boilers and see the notes thereunder for
    subclasses of boilers with magazines.


CLS 122/212.2
TXT With return or alternate flue:
    Devices under subclass 212.1 wherein a substitute or return flue is
    provided to preheat air for combustion.


CLS 122/213
TXT Sectional boilers under subclass 209 having a plurality of fireboxes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232,    for sectional boilers having a water grate above the main grate for
    supporting waste material.


CLS 122/214
TXT Sectional boilers under subclass 209 whose sections are superimposed and
    lie substantially in a horizontal plane.


CLS 122/215
TXT Devices under subclass 214 the sections being in communication with one
    another at their centers.


CLS 122/216
TXT Devices under subclass 215 heated by fluid fuel.


CLS 122/217
TXT Devices under subclass 215 with a water firebox.


CLS 122/218
TXT Devices under subclass 214 with a water firebox.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217,    for horizontal sections centrally connected with a water firebox.


CLS 122/219
TXT Devices under subclass 218 having a central fuel magazine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212,    for miscellaneous sectional boilers with fuel magazines.


CLS 122/220
TXT Devices under subclass 214 having water tubes provided with internal fire
    tubes, with a water firebox.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266+,   for water tube boilers having internal fire tubes.


CLS 122/221
TXT Sectional boilers under subclass 209 having vertically disposed sections
    around the combustion chamber.


CLS 122/222
TXT Devices under subclass 221 with a centrally disposed fuel magazine.


CLS 122/223
TXT Sectional boilers under subclass 209 having vertical sections extending
    longitudinally of the boiler.


CLS 122/224
TXT Devices under subclass 223, having an inclosing casing spaced apart from
    the sections to allow passage for the products of combustion around the
    sections.


CLS 122/225
TXT Sectional boilers under subclass 209 having sections vertically placed
    transversely of the boiler.  A plane cutting the section and lying therein
    would be vertical and at right angles to the general course of the products
    of combustion.


CLS 122/226
TXT Devices under subclass 225 with an inclosing casing, so that the products
    of combustion come into contact with the outer edges of the sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    345,    for similar art in water tube boilers.


CLS 122/227
TXT Devices under subclass 226 having two-part vertical sections transversely
    arranged, with a casing around the sections and spaced therefrom.


CLS 122/228
TXT Devices under subclass 225 whose sections are made in two parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227,    for boilers of this type having an inclosing casing.


CLS 122/229
TXT Devices under subclass 225 provided with a water grate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232,    for miscellaneous sectional boilers with water grates.


CLS 122/230
TXT Sectional boilers under subclass 209 consisting of only two vertical
    sections.


CLS 122/231
TXT Subject matter under subclass 209 relating to specific parts, such as
    joints, fireboxes, ashpits, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    360,    for headers.

    511,    and the search notes thereunder, for  tubes and connections.


CLS 122/232
TXT Sectional boilers under subclass 209 having a water grate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229,    for vertical sectional boilers having a water grate.

    371,    for miscellaneous boilers with water grates, and see the the list
    of subclasses thereunder of boilers with water grates.


CLS 122/233
TXT Boilers under the class definition consisting of a horizontally disposed
    closed chamber.  Includes the combination of such a closed chamber with the
    furnace walls.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, appropriate subclasses for a closed tank or
    receptacle, whether used as a boiler or for other purposes.


CLS 122/234
TXT Boilers under the class definition consisting of a closed chamber
    vertically disposed, in combination with means for heating it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13+,    for stand boilers having heating furnaces or burners.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 361 for stand boiler tank structures.

    220,    Receptacles, for tank structure.


CLS 122/235.11
TXT WATER TUBE:
    Boilers under the class definition whose heating surface consists
    substantially of tubes, through which the water circulates or passes while
    being heated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for rotary water tube boilers.

    42,     476 and 477, for combined fire and water tube boilers of a
    miscellaneous character.

    53,     68+, 77, 94.1, 99, 100, 102 to 105, 113, and 130+, for fire tube
    boilers with water tubes.

    138,    140+, 153, and 166+, for flue boilers with water tubes.

    195+,   for water tubes in horizontal cylinder boilers.

    459+,   for water tube boilers with superheaters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 322+ for baffles and heat retainers in water
    tube boilers.


CLS 122/235.12
TXT Wall structure:
    Devices under subclass 235.11 having specific wall structure of the water
    tubes.


CLS 122/235.13
TXT With fuel burners having posts and tuyeres:
    Devices under subclass 235.11 having specific structure of the combustor,
    pipe, nozzle or opening through which air is forced to facilitate
    combustion.


CLS 122/235.14
TXT Tube structure:
    Devices under subclass 235.11 having specific tube structure.


CLS 122/235.15
TXT Headers and connections:
    Devices under subclass 235.11 having specific structure to the joint where
    multiple tubes come together.


CLS 122/235.16
TXT For plural fluids:
    Devices under subclass 235.11 having multiple fluids which are heated in
    the boiler.


CLS 122/235.17
TXT Having baffles:
    Devices under subclass 235.11 having a static structure to control the
    fluid flow in the water tubes.


CLS 122/235.18
TXT Having seals:
    Devices under subclass 235.11 having means to make the water tubes vapor
    tight.


CLS 122/235.19
TXT D-type tube:
    Devices under subclass 235.11 wherein the water tubes are shaped in a
    square loop pattern.


CLS 122/235.21
TXT Multiple D-type tubes:
    Devices under subclass 235.19 wherein the water tubes have plural squared
    patterns.


CLS 122/235.22
TXT Wall loop:
    Devices under subclass 235.11 wherein a plurality of tubes are connected
    together and arranged to form at least a portion of the boundary wall of a
    gas-tight enclosure.


CLS 122/235.23
TXT Having specific tube patterns:
    Devices under subclass 235.11 wherein specific arrangements of the tube are
    provided.


CLS 122/235.24
TXT Screens:
    Devices under subclass 235.11 wherein the tubes are arranged to form a
    partition in a chamber.


CLS 122/235.25
TXT Floor screens:
    Devices under subclass 235.24 wherein the tubes forming the screen are
    placed in a lower section of the chamber.


CLS 122/235.26
TXT Having slag and ash disposal:
    Devices under subclass 235.11 having means to remove left over products of
    combustion.


CLS 122/235.27
TXT Locomotive-type:
    Devices under subclass 235.11 wherein the water tubes are used in a
    railroad engine.


CLS 122/235.28
TXT Having rotary flame:
    Devices under subclass 235.11 wherein the burners are angularly spaced
    apart and all the jet axes of the burners are tangential to a vertical
    imaginary cylinder.


CLS 122/235.29
TXT Having forced circulation system:
    Devices under subclass 235.11 wherein a means other than convection is used
    to move a fluid through the tube.


CLS 122/235.31
TXT Having specific internal drum and head structure:
    Device under subclass 235.11 wherein there is specific structure to the
    steam drum and central connection for the fluid circulation system.


CLS 122/235.32
TXT With combustion:
    Devices under subclass 235.11 wherein there are specific conditions for
    burning the fuel.


CLS 122/235.33
TXT With convection zone regulation:
    Devices under subclass 235.11 wherein means are provided to control the
    flow of combustion gases.


CLS 122/235.34
TXT With parallel multiple fireboxes:
    Devices under subclass 235.11 wherein a plurality of combustion chambers
    are arranged symmetrically around a central core.


CLS 122/235.35
TXT With serial multiple fireboxes:
    Devices under subclass 235.11 wherein a plurality of combustion chambers
    are arranged in succession.


CLS 122/236
TXT Water tube boilers under subclass 235 heated by fluid fuel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     and see the note therewith for all subclasses for boilers heated by
    fluid fuel.


CLS 122/237
TXT Water tube boilers under subclass 235 provided with fuel magazines, not
    otherwise classifiable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     and see the note therewith for all subclasses for boilers having
    magazines.

    251,    272, 310, 320, 334, 339, and 344, for water tube boilers with a
    fuel magazine.


CLS 122/238
TXT Water tube boilers under subclass 235 having a firebox offset from the main
    part of the boiler structure that do not fall within the definitions of the
    other subclasses of water tube boilers having an offset firebox.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93,     94, 120, 175, 189, 190, 209, and 213, for other types of boilers
    provided with offset fireboxes.

    336,    337 and 352, for other types of water tube boilers with offset
    fireboxes.


CLS 122/239
TXT Water tube boilers under subclass 235 having a plurality of superimposed
    fireboxes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      25, 67, 204, 205, 214, 240, and 372, for boilers with fireboxes or
    fluid fuel burners superimposed one above the other.


CLS 122/240.1
TXT Having plural fireboxes:
    Water tube boilers under subclasses 235.11+ having multiple fireboxes not
    otherwise provided for.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for other types of fluid-fuel burners.

    25,     for boilers heated by a plurality of superimposed fluid-fuel
    burners.

    53,     138, 204, and 205, for other types of boilers having water tubes
    and a plurality of fireboxes.

    287,    294, 304, and 330, for water tube boilers of various types with
    plural fireboxes.


CLS 122/240.2
TXT Series-connected:
    Devices under subclass 240.1 wherein the multiple fireboxes are connected
    end to end in a sequence.


CLS 122/240.3
TXT Parallel connected:
    Devices under subclass 240.1 wherein the multiple fireboxes are connected
    inlet to inlet and outlet to outlet.


CLS 122/241
TXT Water tube boilers under subclass 235 having a drum, within which the
    firebox is located.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50      and 80, for analogous art.


CLS 122/242
TXT Devices under subclass 235 whose tube passages have an extremely small
    cross-sectional area as compared with their length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for boilers whose water is heated by passing over the heating
    surface in a thin film.

    40+,    for similar structure in flasher types boilers.

    260,    for flat-tube boilers.

    501+,   for water tubes containing a displacing element, that renders the
    tube similar in action to a capillary tube.


CLS 122/243
TXT Devices under subclass 242 heated by fluid fuel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    348,    for vertical water tube boilers having internal fire tubes.


CLS 122/244
TXT Water tube boilers under subclass 235 comprising a vertical stand pipe,
    around which extends coils or loops of tubes in either direct or indirect
    communication with the stand pipe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132,    for vertical fire tube boilers provided with radial loops.

    133,    for vertical fire tube boilers provided with radial spurs.

    169+,   for similar structure located within a vertical flue.

    185,    for vertical stand pipes provided with radial loops located in a
    vertical flue.

    186,    for stand pipes provided with radial spur tubes located within a
    vertical flue.

    245     and 246, for analogous art.

    281,    for stand pipes provided with loops over a firebox.

    307+,   for central standpipes provided with spur tubes.

    323,    for miscellaneous water tube boilers     with central stand pipes.


CLS 122/245
TXT Devices under subclass 244 heated by fluid fuel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    283,    for analogous art.

    322,    for miscellaneous central stand pipe water tube boilers heated by
    fluid fuel.


CLS 122/246
TXT Devices under subclass 244 extending below the grate and forming an annular
    firebox.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184,    for a stand pipe, provided with water tubes located in a vertical
    flue boiler and having an annular firebox.

    335,    for miscellaneous water tube boilers with an annular firebox.


CLS 122/247
TXT Water tube boilers under subclass 235 provided with coils of tubes not
    coming within the definitions of other subclasses covering water tube
    boilers of the coil type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169+,   for vertical coiled water tubes located within a vertical flue.

    244+,   248 and 249+, for various types of coil tube boilers.

    355+,   for analogous water tube boilers incorrectly said to be coil
    boilers.


CLS 122/248
TXT Devices under subclass 247 heated by a fluid fuel burner, the axes of the
    coils being horizontal.


CLS 122/249
TXT Devices under subclass 247, the axes of the coils being vertical.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183,    for flues with spiral water conduit.


CLS 122/250
TXT Devices under subclass 249 heated by fluid fuel.


CLS 122/251
TXT Devices under subclass 249 having a central fuel magazine.


CLS 122/252
TXT Devices under subclass 249 provided with a water firebox.


CLS 122/253
TXT Water tube boilers under subclass 235 whose tubes are so arranged as to
    cross one another and includes cross tube boilers that are not specially
    provided for by other subclass definitions.

    (1)     Note.  There is a close analogy between the cross loop type and the
    zigzag and the cross tube type of water tube boilers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99,     for water tubes straddling the fuel chamber.

    145,    146, 147, 176, 177, 253-257, 278, 311, 326, and 329, for different
    types of boilers provided with cross water tubes.

    355+,   for zigzag tubes.


CLS 122/254
TXT Devices under subclass 253 inclined in opposite directions over the bridge
    wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277,    for loop tubes over the bridge wall.


CLS 122/255
TXT Devices under subclass 253 in which the tubes are over the firebox,
    inclined in opposite directions longitudinally of the boiler and each bank
    of tubes being in communication with headers at each end, which headers are
    in turn in either direct or indirect communication with one or more drums.


CLS 122/256
TXT Devices under subclass 253, each bank of tubes being in communication with
    headers at each end, which in turn are in communication with a drum above
    the tubes.


CLS 122/257
TXT Devices under subclass 253 in which the tubes cross each other transversely
    of the boiler, each tube being in communication with headers at each end,
    which headers are in either direct or indirect communication with a drum
    located above the water tubes.


CLS 122/258
TXT Water tube boilers under subclass 235 provided with means for causing a
    downward flow of water in the tubes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for analogously operating boilers.

    209     and 218, for sectional boilers with a down flow of water through
    the sections.


CLS 122/259
TXT Boilers under subclass 235 composed of very large tubes or drums.


CLS 122/260
TXT Water tube boilers under subclass 235 having flat tubes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for film type boilers.

    40+,    for flasher boilers.

    242+,   for capillary tubes.


CLS 122/261
TXT Devices under subclass 260 in which the tubes are coiled about a central
    axis, each winding being spaced apart.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    for volute fire tube boilers.


CLS 122/262
TXT Water tube boilers under subclass 235 that are horizontal and do not fall
    within the definitions of other subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for horizontal fire tube boilers having horizontal water tubes over
    the bridge wall.

    197,    201, and 203 to 207, for horizontal cylindrical boilers provided
    with horizontal water tubes.

    236,    for horizontal water tube boilers heated by fluid fuel, except the
    zigzag type noted in the other notes.

    267,    for horizontal tubes provided with internal fire tubes.

    279,    for horizontally disposed looped tubes.

    285,    286, 287, 289, and 354, for horizontal water tube boilers with
    water grates.

    316,    for horizontal spur tubes over the firebox.

    353,    for water tube water grates.


CLS 122/263
TXT Devices under subclass 262 in which the tubes are over the bridge wall.


CLS 122/264
TXT Devices under subclass 262 in which the tubes are disposed over the firebox.


CLS 122/265
TXT Water tube boilers under subclass 235 not otherwise classifiable having
    water tubes inclined from a vertical or a horizontal line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266+,   275+, 290+, 305+, 324+, and 355+, for more specifically associated
    inclined water tubes.


CLS 122/266
TXT Water-tube boilers under subclass 235 provided with water tubes within
    which there is a fire tube forming an annular water space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242+,   for capillary tubes constructed in this manner.

    348,    for vertical water tubes having internal fire tubes.


CLS 122/267
TXT Devices under subclass 266 whose water tubes are horizontally disposed.


CLS 122/268
TXT Devices under subclass 266 whose water tubes are inclined.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    269,    for plural fire tubes within the water tubes.

    270,    for the tubes placed over a firebox.


CLS 122/269
TXT Devices under subclass 266 whose water tubes have a plurality of fire tubes
    within them.


CLS 122/270
TXT Devices under subclass 266 inclined toward each other over the combustion
    chamber or firebox.  The tubes are generally provided with headers at top
    and bottom, and the headers may be in communication with drums extending
    longitudinally of the boiler.


CLS 122/271
TXT Devices under subclass 266 whose tubes are in a substantially vertical
    position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    348,    for that type of boiler heated by fluid fuel.


CLS 122/272
TXT Devices under subclass 271 having a centrally disposed fuel magazine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    339,    for vertical water tube boilers provided with a centrally disposed
    fuel magazine when the water tubes do not contain fire tubes.


CLS 122/273
TXT Water tube boilers under subclass 235 having an upper longitudinal drum
    with miscellaneous types of water tubes communicating therewith not
    provided for in the definitions of other water tube boiler subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    275+,   for similar structure in looped water tube boilers.

    291+,   298, 312, 346, 347, 351, and 357, for more specifically associated
    longitudinal upper drums.

    324+,   for similar structure in straddle tube boilers.


CLS 122/274
TXT Devices under subclass 273 heated by fluid fuel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250,    283, 328, 348, and 356, for analogous art.

    331,    for transverse horizontal drum boilers.


CLS 122/275
TXT Miscellaneous water tube boilers under subclass 235 whose tubes are in the
    form of loops.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132     and 185, for other types of boilers provided with looped water
    tubes.

    244+,   for boilers of the water tube type having either looped or coiled
    tubes or both combined.

    355+,   for analogous structure.


CLS 122/276
TXT Devices under subclass 275 having a firebox located within the loops.


CLS 122/277
TXT Devices under subclass 275 in which the loops extend over the bridge wall.


CLS 122/278
TXT Devices under subclass 275 in which the loops cross each other over the
    firebox.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    311,    for crossed spur water tubes over the firebox.

    355,    for crossed zigzag tubes.


CLS 122/279
TXT Devices under subclass 275 in which the loops extend over the firebox,
    their axes being substantially horizontal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    316,    for similar boilers whose tubes are of the spur type.


CLS 122/280
TXT Devices under subclass 275 having one or more headers vertically posited at
    the bridge wall, and in which the looped tubes extend over and in rear of
    the firebox or only in the rear thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306,    for similarly constructed water tube boilers provided with spur
    tubes.


CLS 122/281
TXT Devices under subclass 275 having a stand pipe with the looped tubes over
    the firebox.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132,    for vertical fire tube boilers provided with looped water tubes.

    185,    for vertical flue boilers having a looped tube stand pipe.

    244+,   308 and 309, for spur tube boilers having a stand pipe, with tubes
    over the firebox.


CLS 122/282
TXT Devices under subclass 275 in which the looped tubes are over the firebox,
    their axis and plane being substantially vertical.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    318+,   for vertical spur tubes.

    359,    for zigzag tubes.


CLS 122/283
TXT Devices under subclass 282 heated by fluid fuel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    319,    for similar boilers having spur tubes.

    356,    for similar devices having zigzag tubes.


CLS 122/284
TXT Water tube boilers under subclass 235 having water tubes extending over the
    bridge wall and in communication with headers at each end, which are
    substantially at right angles to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    288,    for similar structure over a firebox.


CLS 122/285
TXT Water tube boilers under subclass 235 having banks of water tubes
    substantially parallel extending over the bridge wall and having a
    transverse water baffle for the products of combustion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280     and 306, for analogous art.

    293,    for water tube boilers with longitudinal water baffles between the
    tubes.


CLS 122/286
TXT Water tube boilers under subclass 235 having water tubes extending over the
    bridge wall and provided with a downdraft water grate.


CLS 122/287
TXT Water tube boilers under subclass 235 having water tubes extending over the
    bridge wall and a plurality of fireboxes, the products of combustion from
    one firebox meeting those from the other firebox and the fuel grate of at
    least one firebox being of the water grate type.  The firebox with the
    water grate is generally located above the other firebox and the draft is
    down through the water grate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67      and 204, for other types of boilers having intermediate draft water
    grates.


CLS 122/288
TXT Water tube boilers under subclass 235 having water tubes located over the
    firebox and communicating with headers at each end at right angles with
    each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284,    for similar art.


CLS 122/289
TXT Water tube boilers under subclass 235 having water tubes over the firebox
    and with an updraft water grate.


CLS 122/290
TXT Water tube boilers under subclass 235 having banks of water tubes
    rearwardly declined over the bridge wall and being in communication with a
    front header or drum and a rear header or drum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    265,    297, 331, and 474, for analogous structure.


CLS 122/291
TXT Devices under subclass 290 in which the drums are horizontally and
    longitudinally posited and are elevated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    268, 295, 472, and 473, for allied art.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 98 for baffles in furnaces of water tube boilers.


CLS 122/292
TXT Devices under subclass 291 having heating tubes extending over, through, or
    around the firebox, forming distinct circulation and heating conduits from
    the main banks of tubes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    407,    for injector type circulation means.


CLS 122/293
TXT Devices under subclass 291 having water baffles extending longitudinally of
    the water tubes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    285,    for transverse baffles over the bridge wall.


CLS 122/294
TXT Devices under subclass 291, provided with water walls on two or more sides
    of the combustion chamber, consisting of metal sheets spaced apart or
    formed of water tubes.  There may or may not be cross water tubes extending
    through the combustion chamber.


CLS 122/295
TXT Devices under subclass 290 in which the tubes have within them and spaced
    therefrom smaller tubes communicating with separate compartments of the
    headers, and such tubes not being of the spur tube or "Field" tube type.
    These headers may be in communication with longitudinally or transversely
    disposed drums.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305+,   for spur tubes.

    474,    for super heaters for water tube boilers having banks of tubes over
    the bridge wall.


CLS 122/296
TXT Devices under subclass 290 in which the front and rear headers are in
    either direct or indirect communication with one or more drums
    substantially parallel with the tubes and rearwardly declined
    longitudinally of the boiler.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    471,    for superheaters of similar construction.


CLS 122/297
TXT Devices under subclass 290 in which the front and rear headers are in
    communication, either directly or indirectly, with one or more transverse
    drums.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277,    for devices in which the water tubes are in the form of loops
    extending over the bridge wall.

    331,    for other heater tube boilers having transverse horizontal drums.

    478,    for super heaters having transverse drums.


CLS 122/298
TXT Devices under subclass 235 having banks of water tubes declined rearwardly
    over the firebox, in communication with front and rear headers, which are
    in turn in communication, directly or indirectly, with one or more
    horizontally and longitudinally fixedly positioned drums above the tubes.


CLS 122/299
TXT Devices under subclass 235 having banks of water tubes substantially
    parallel, rearwardly declined over the firebox, and in communication with
    front and rear headers, which are in turn either directly or indirectly in
    communication with one or more transversely fixedly positioned drums.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    265,    for water tube boilers in which the tubes are inclined.


CLS 122/300
TXT Devices under subclass 235 consisting of banks of water tubes rearwardly
    declined over the firebox and in communication with front and rear headers,
    which may also be in communication with some form of drums above the tubes,
    and also having banks of tubes beyond side walls of the main combustion
    chamber.


CLS 122/301
TXT Devices under subclass 235 consisting of rearwardly declined banks of water
    tubes in communication with a plurality of horizontally and transversely
    disposed drums, both at the top and at the bottom of the tubes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    352,    for analogous structures on vertical water tube boilers.

    478,    for super heaters having transverse drums.


CLS 122/302
TXT Devices under subclass 235 consisting of banks of tubes rearwardly declined
    and communicating with a plurality of upper transverse horizontal drums at
    the top and with a single transverse horizontal drum at the bottom, or the
    tubes may be in communication with a header at the bottom, which is in turn
    in communication with the lower drum.


CLS 122/303
TXT Devices under subclass 235 having banks of substantially parallel water
    tube rearwardly inclined over the firebox and in communication with front
    and rear headers, which are in turn in either direct or indirect
    communication with one or more transversely fixedly positioned drums.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    265,    for water tube boilers in which the tubes are inclined.


CLS 122/304
TXT Devices under subclass 235 provided with separate banks of water tubes over
    separate fireboxes disposed on opposite sides of the unitary boiler
    structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240,    for water tube boilers with a plurality of fireboxes that do not
    come within the definition of this subclass.


CLS 122/305
TXT Devices under subclass 235 having spur tubes projecting from a drum or
    equivalent, communicating therewith at one end and having the other end
    closed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    143, 173, 180, 181, 186, 342, and 462, for other boilers having
    spur tubes which form some substantial part of the heating surface.

    275+,   for water tube boilers of similar types having looped tubes.


CLS 122/306
TXT Devices under subclass 305 having a vertical header located at the bridge
    wall, and in which the spur tubes extending over the firebox and in rear
    thereof or extending in the rear of the firebox.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280,    for boilers of similar structure provided with looped tubes.


CLS 122/307
TXT Devices under subclass 305 having a central stand pipe in which the spur
    tubes are radial.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    for vertical fire tube boilers provided with radial spur tubes.

    143,    for horizontal flue boilers provided with spur water tubes
    internally.

    173,    for vertical flue boilers provided with internal horizontal spur
    tubes.

    180,    for vertical flue boilers with vertically aligned fire tubes and
    having spur water tubes.

    181,    for vertical flue boilers with vertical spurs.

    244+,   for stand pipes provided with coiled or looped tubes.

    281,    for stand pipe boilers of the water tube type provided with radial
    looped tubes over the firebox.

    342,    for spur tube drums.

    475,    for this type of boiler with a    superheater.


CLS 122/308
TXT Devices under subclass 307 heated by fluid fuel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    245,    for water tube boilers having a central stand pipe provided with
    coiled or looped tubes and heated by fluid fuel.

    281,    for water tube boilers having stand pipes provided with looped
    tubes.

    322,    for miscellaneous water tube boilers provided with stand pipes and
    heated by fluid fuel.


CLS 122/309
TXT Devices under subclass 307 in which the central stand pipe extends below
    the fire grate, forming an annular firebox.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186,    for vertical flue boilers with a spur tube stand pipe and an
    annular firebox.

    246,    for boilers of the water tube type provided with a central stand
    pipe having coils or loops and an annular firebox.

    323,    for miscellaneous water tube boilers with a central stand pipe and
    an annular firebox.


CLS 122/310
TXT Devices under subclass 307 having a fuel magazine within the stand pipe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168,    for vertical flue boilers with central magazines with internal
    water tubes.


CLS 122/311
TXT Devices under subclass 305 in which the spur tubes cross each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278,    for cross looped tubes.


CLS 122/312
TXT Devices under subclass 305 in which the drum is horizontal and longitudinal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195,    for horizontal cylindrical water tube boilers.

    273+,   for other boilers having longitudinal drums.

    317,    for drums provided with spur tubes that straddle the combustion
    chamber.


CLS 122/313
TXT Devices under subclass 305 in which the spur water tubes extend over the
    bridge wall.


CLS 122/314
TXT Devices under subclass 305 in which the spur tubes are located over the
    firebox on both sides of a vertical central header.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    319,    for water tube boilers having vertical spur water tubes heated by
    fluid fuel.


CLS 122/315
TXT Devices under subclass 305 in which the spur tubes are declined over the
    firebox.


CLS 122/316
TXT Devices under subclass 305 in which the spur water tubes are horizontally
    disposed over the firebox.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    279,    for horizontal loop tubes over the firebox.


CLS 122/317
TXT Devices under subclass 305 in which the spur water tubes straddle the
    combustion chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99      and 270, for spur tubes having internal fire tubes straddling the
    combustion chamber.

    324+,   for other types of water tube boilers of the straddle type.


CLS 122/318
TXT Devices under subclass 305 in which the spur tubes are vertical.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    for vertical fire tube boilers with vertical spur tubes.

    181,    for vertical flue boilers having vertical spur water tubes within
    the flue.

    271,    for internal fire-tube type water-tube boiler in which the tubes
    are vertical.

    282,    for water tube boilers having vertical looped tubes over the
    firebox.

    348,    for fluid fuel heated internal fire tube type water-tube boilers in
    which the tubes are vertical.


CLS 122/319
TXT Devices under subclass 318 which are heated by fluid fuel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179,    283, 333, and 348, for other types of vertical water tube boilers
    heated by fluid fuel.


CLS 122/320
TXT Devices under subclass 318 having a centrally disposed fuel magazine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168,    for vertical flue boilers with internal spur tubes.

    339     and 344, for other types of water tube boilers with vertical tubes
    and a central magazine.


CLS 122/321
TXT Devices under subclass 235 having a vertical pipe relatively large in cross
    section and provided with some form of water tubes and not otherwise
    provided for.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13+,    for range or kitchen boilers, called in the art "stand boilers",
    which are provided with a heater.

    132,    133, 184, 185, 186, 215+, and 218, for sectional stand pipe boilers.

    281,    307+ and 475, for stand pipes provided with spur water tubes.


CLS 122/322
TXT Devices under subclass 321 heated by fluid fuel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216,    for sectional stand pipe boilers heated by fluid fuel.

    245,    for coiled or looped tube boilers with a stand pipe and heated by
    fluid fuel.

    308,    for stand pipes provided with spur water tubes and heated by fluid
    fuel.


CLS 122/323
TXT Devices under subclass 321 in which the stand pipe extends downwardly below
    the fire grate, forming an annular firebox.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184,    246, 309, and 475, for stand pipes provided with spur tubes having
    an annular firebox.


CLS 122/324
TXT Devices under subclass 235 having water tubes that straddle the combustion
    chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99,     270 and 317, for other types of straddle water tube boilers.


CLS 122/325
TXT Devices under subclass 324 in which the tubes are either in communication
    with headers at top and bottom, which are in turn in communication with
    separate upper and lower drums, or in communication directly with separate
    upper and lower drums.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240,    for miscellaneous fire tube boilers having a plurality of fireboxes.

    351,    for vertical water tube boilers having a plurality of upper and
    lower drums.


CLS 122/326
TXT Devices under subclass 325 having the tubes cross over the combustion
    chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329,    for this type of boiler having a single upper drum.


CLS 122/327
TXT Devices under subclass 324 in which the water tubes are either in direct
    communication with a single upper drum and with a plurality of lower drums
    or in direct communication with headers, which are in turn in communication
    with the drums.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99      and 329, for boilers of this type having the tubes crossing each
    other.


CLS 122/328
TXT Devices under subclass 327 heated by fluid fuel.


CLS 122/329
TXT Devices under subclass 327 in which the tubes cross each other.


CLS 122/330
TXT Devices under subclass 327 having two or more fireboxes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240,    for miscellaneous water tube boilers having a plurality of
    fireboxes.


CLS 122/331
TXT Devices under subclass 235 having one or more transverse horizontal drums
    provided with water tubes that are not otherwise provided for.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255,    257, 277, 290, 297, 299, 301, 302, 303, 332, 346, 352, and 358, for
    water tube boilers with transverse horizontal drums.


CLS 122/332
TXT Devices under subclass 235 having vertical tubes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    171, 198, 199, 247+, 266+, 275+, and 281, for vertical columns
    provided with looped tubes extending over the firebox.

    282,    305+, for spur tube boilers.

    318,    355 and 359, for vertical columns surrounding the combustion
    chamber, with zigzag water tubes communicating with the columns.


CLS 122/333
TXT Devices under subclass 332 heated by fluid fuel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    174, 250, 283, 319, and 348, for other boilers heated by fluid fuel.


CLS 122/334
TXT Devices under subclass 332 having a fuel magazine at the side of the boiler.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    339     and 344, for other types of fuel magazines with vertical water tube
    boilers.

    373,    for analogous art.


CLS 122/335
TXT Devices under subclass 332 having an annular or surrounding firebox.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246,    for coiled or looped water tubes around a stand pipe having an
    annular firebox.

    309,    for water tube boilers having a central stand pipe provided with
    spur tubes and extending below the fire grate to form an annular firebox.


CLS 122/336
TXT Devices under subclass 332 having an offset firebox exterior of the main
    boiler structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175,    for other types.

    209,    for sectional boilers with offset fireboxes.

    213,    for sectional boilers with plural fireboxes, one of which may be
    offset.

    221,    238 and 352, for other offset  fireboxes.


CLS 122/337
TXT Devices under subclass 336 in which the offset firebox is at the top of the
    boiler.


CLS 122/338
TXT Devices under subclass 332, in which the water tubes communicate with the
    upper and the lower drums, which are of ring or equivalent form.


CLS 122/339
TXT Devices under subclass 338 having a centrally disposed fuel magazine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251,    320 and 344, for boilers of a similar type having a central
    magazine, but whose upper drum is not annular in form.


CLS 122/340
TXT Devices under subclass 338 in which the water tubes are within the space
    inclosed by the vertical tubes over the firebox.


CLS 122/341
TXT Devices under subclass 332 in which the water tubes communicate with an
    annular lower drum and with an upper drum provided with fire tubes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    342     and 343, for boilers of similar structure, but whose upper drum is
    not provided with fire tubes.


CLS 122/342
TXT Devices under subclass 332 in which the water tubes communicate with an
    annular lower drum and an upper drum provided with spur water tubes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    341     and 343, for boilers of similar structure without the spur tubes on
    the upper drum.


CLS 122/343
TXT Devices under subclass 332 in which the water tubes communicate with an
    annular lower drum and with an upper drum.


CLS 122/344
TXT Devices under subclass 343, having a central magazine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    339,    for similar boilers in which the upper drum is annular.


CLS 122/345
TXT Devices under subclass 332 in which the vertical water tubes are beyond the
    bridge wall and may or may not be around or over the firebox.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226,    for analogous art in sectional boilers.

    352,    for boilers with an offset firebox.


CLS 122/346
TXT Devices under subclass 345 having vertical water tubes beyond the bridge
    wall and above the firebox, with any type of drums or headers communicating
    with the tubes and so arranged that the products of combustion pass over
    the bridge wall and upwardly through a separate passage to the front of the
    boiler before they are discharged.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    350,    for similar art where there are boilers with vertical tubes wholly
    over the firebox and having the products of combustion pass out at one end
    of the firebox and return through the vertical tubes above the firebox.


CLS 122/347
TXT Devices under subclass 345 having vertical water tubes in the rear of the
    bridge wall and communicating with a longitudinal upper and a longitudinal
    lower drum.  There may or may not be water tubes above the firebox, but the
    products of combustion do not return.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    346,    for vertical water tube boilers having horizontal longitudinal
    upper and lower drums where the products of combustion pass also rearwardly
    through the tubes.

    444,    for miscellaneous combinations of means for heating the feed water
    in a water tube boiler either outside or inside the water space of the
    boiler.


CLS 122/348
TXT Devices under subclass 332 in which the vertical water tubes are provided
    with internal fire tubes and heated by fluid fuel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174,    for vertical flue boilers having vertical water tubes provided with
    internal fire tubes.

    243     and 271, for vertical water tube boilers provided with internal
    fire tubes and heated by solid fuel.


CLS 122/349
TXT Devices under subclass 332 in which the vertical water tubes communicate
    with drums or headers and are located over the firebox.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282,    for water tube boilers having looped tubes over the firebox, the
    axis and plane of the loop being substantially vertical.

    318,    for water tube boilers having vertical spur tubes.

    333,    for boilers with vertical water tubes heated by fluid fuel.


CLS 122/350
TXT Devices under subclass 349 in which the products of combustion pass out of
    the firebox at the rear and return over the firebox between the water tubes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    346,    for such devices in which the water tubes are located beyond the
    bridge wall and above the firebox and arranged so that the products of
    combustion pass over the bridge wall and upwardly through a separate
    passage to the front of the boiler before they are discharged.


CLS 122/351
TXT Devices under subclass 332 in which the vertical water tubes are in
    communication with a plurality of horizontally and longitudinally posited
    upper and lower drums forming a plurality of fireboxes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240,    for water tube boilers having a plurality of fireboxes not
    otherwise provided for.


CLS 122/352
TXT Devices under subclass 332 having a plurality of upper transverse drums and
    a plurality of lower transverse drums with vertical water tubes connecting
    the upper and lower drums and with a firebox offset from the main boiler
    structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238,    301 and 336, for analogous art.


CLS 122/353
TXT Devices under subclass 235 with water grates that are not otherwise
    provided for.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286,    287, 289, and 354, for other water tube boilers with water grates.


CLS 122/354
TXT Devices under subclass 353 having downdraft water grates.


CLS 122/355
TXT Devices under subclass 235 having the water tubes so arranged that the
    water passes back and forth in a zigzag manner through the tubes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247+    and 258, for zigzag tubes where the water flows downwardly through
    the tubes.

    275+,   for looped tube boilers where the water flows through one tube and
    back through another.

    305+,   for spur tube boilers provided with an internal tube or partition,
    so that the water will flow out and back through the same tube.


CLS 122/356
TXT Devices under subclass 355 heated by fluid fuel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208,    for plate boilers with zigzag conduits.

    250,    for vertical coil water tube boilers heated by fluid fuel.


CLS 122/357
TXT Devices under subclass 355 having a longitudinally posited drum above the
    tubes, which extend in a zigzag manner over the bridge wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273+,   for other types of water tube boilers having a longitudinal drum.


CLS 122/358
TXT Devices under subclass 355 having water tubes that extend over the bridge
    wall in a zigzag manner and in communication with one or more transversely
    posited drums.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331+,   for other types of water tube boilers having transversely posited
    drums.


CLS 122/359
TXT Devices under subclass 355 whose tubes are located over the firebox.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249     and 258, for zigzag boilers having tubes over the firebox when the
    flow of fluid is in a downward direction.

    356,    for zigzag boilers heated by fluid fuel.


CLS 122/360
TXT Devices under subclass 235 involving the structure of headers for water
    tube boilers; also includes the coupling connection between the headers and
    water tubes and the closures for the hand holes in the headers when the
    form of the header is involved in the claims.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    511,    for boiler tubes, flues and connections not provided for elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, for structure of boiler tubes, per se,
    particularly subclass 95 for return bend closures.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 200+ for manholes and closures of general
    application, whether applied to a boiler or boiler header, where the
    structure of the boiler or header is not involved.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 189+ for couplings and unions
    between a tube and plate of general application.


CLS 122/361
TXT Subject matter under subclass 360 comprising the structure of the header,
    with its connections, when formed for the purpose of cleaning the header or
    boiler tubes, either inside or outside.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    379+,   for the general apparatus for cleaning boilers of the kind
    classified in class 122.


CLS 122/362
TXT Subject matter under subclass 360 comprising the structure of the header
    and tube connections of specific application for a water tube boiler when
    two tubes concentrically arranged are coupled to a header.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators.


CLS 122/363
TXT Subject matter under subclass 360 comprising the structure of headers of
    the drum type and tube connections therefor and closures for the drum hand
    holes when the drum structure is involved.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    365,    for general structure of drums for water tube boilers.

    393,    for the structure of mud drums and modifications in boilers for
    their application.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 200+ for closures of general application.


CLS 122/364
TXT Subject matter under subclass 360 comprising headers and tubes provided
    with valves for closing the flow of water through the tubes or headers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    507,    for automatically closed valves classified in Class 122.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 89+ for pipe closures.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 200+ for closures of general application.


CLS 122/365
TXT Subject matter under subclass 235 comprising the structure of drums and
    couplings and unions between the drum and the header or the drum and the
    water tubes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    192,    for drums.

    363,    for headers of drum form.

    393,    for structure of mud drums unless of general application.

    434,    for special combinations of drums and feed water heaters.

    511     and 512, for couplings of specific form for boilers.


CLS 122/366
TXT Boilers under the class definition provided with an absorbent wick within
    the fluid chamber for raising water from one part of the chamber to another
    to increase the generation of vapor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 357+ for a
    strand with structure and not provided for in any other class.


CLS 122/367.1
TXT HEAT TRANSMITTER:
    Boilers under the class definition with some special heat transmitting
    structure not otherwise classifiable. Most of these devices include tubes
    or boiler walls provided with flanges or heat conducting pins.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 179 for a tube having heat transmitters
    penetrating the tube wall, and subclass 185 for a heat transmitter of more
    general application.


CLS 122/367.2
TXT Double immersed heat transmitters:
    Devices under subclasses 367.1 wherein the heat transmitting tubes have an
    inner shell and an outer shell both of which transfer heat to a fluid.


CLS 122/367.3
TXT Corrugated and finned heat transmitters:
    Devices under subclass 367.1 wherein the heat transmitting tubes have
    projecting vanes or a series of parallel and alternating ridges and grooves.


CLS 122/367.4
TXT Pebble furnaces:
    Devices under subclass 367.1 wherein the heat transmitting tube contains
    granular material to hold the heat.


CLS 122/368
TXT Boilers under the class definition not otherwise classifiable having water
    fireboxes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for garbage burning plants disclosing boilers with water fireboxes.

    8+,     for industrial furnaces having water fireboxes.

    15,     for stand boilers having water fireboxes.

    44+,    for fire tube boilers.

    135+,   for most of the patents for boilers with water fireboxes, but
    claiming or disclosing more than a water firebox.

    189,    190 and 193+, for horizontal cylindrical boilers with water
    fireboxes.

    209+,   for boilers made of separate parts.

    235+,   for special combinations of water fireboxes with water tube
    boilers, and especially subclasses 241 and 252, for water fireboxes.


CLS 122/369
TXT Subject matter under subclass 368 comprising the construction of the lower
    part of a water firebox and mud ring or spacing member forming the bottom
    of the water walls.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    385,    for boilers provided with an internal conduit located within the
    water firebox above the mud ring.


CLS 122/370
TXT Subject matter under subclass 368 comprising miscellaneous water firebox
    boilers having a plurality of water fireboxes not otherwise provided for.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     60, 95, 96, 213, 229, and 372, for other types of water firebox
    boilers having a plurality of water fireboxes.


CLS 122/371
TXT Boilers under the class definition having water grates that do not come
    within the definitions of other subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      5, 66, 67, 97, 98, 129, 152, 203-207, 229, 232, 286, 287, 289, 321,
    323, 353, and 354, for other water grates.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 267+ for progressive feed, and subclasses 298+
    for hollow air-cooled grates.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 152+ for other stove and furnace
    grates.


CLS 122/372
TXT Subject matter under subclass 371 comprising boilers not otherwise
    classified having superimposed fireboxes with at least one of the fuel
    grates of the water grate type.  This type of boilers is generally used for
    the burning of garbage or other waste material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for garbage plants having water grate boilers of this type.

    207,    232 and 353, for water tube boilers with superposed updraft water
    grates.


CLS 122/373
TXT Devices under subclass 371 having a water grate of cage-like or basket-like
    structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 294 for furnaces with a magazine the lower part
    of which has perforations or bars on opposite sides, the air entering on
    one side and the flame passing out on the other side.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 513+ for fireplace heaters that are
    provided with water or steam generating backs and designed to be connected
    up to heat radiators in distant rooms.


CLS 122/374
TXT Subject matter under subclass 371 comprising the structure of water grates
    themselves except the cage grate type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    321,    for water tube boilers having a vertical pipe relatively large in
    cross section and provided with some form of water tubes and not otherwise
    provided for.

    373     and 375, for other water grate structures.


CLS 122/375
TXT Devices under subclass 374 having both solid and water bars.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206,    for horizontal cylindrical boilers with this type of grate.

    374,    for the structure of water grates except those of the cage grate
    type.


CLS 122/376
TXT Devices under subclass 371 having a water-cooled progressive fuel feeding
    grate having means for moving the fuel along the grate.


CLS 122/377
TXT Devices under subclass 371 not otherwise provided for having a water
    firebox with an updraft fuel grate composed of both solid bars and water
    bars.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206,    213, 229, and 353, for other boilers with this type of water grate.

    375,    for the grate structure of this type of grate.


CLS 122/378
TXT Devices under subclass 371 not otherwise provided for having a water
    firebox with an updraft water grate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98,     229, 232, 289, and 353, for other boilers with water grate
    structure.


CLS 122/379
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising boilers provided with
    mechanism for cleaning the boiler or purifying the water while the boiler
    is in operation and so united therewith that it remains in position when
    the boiler is in operation, or the mechanism is of such specific
    application that it is adapted for use with no other art, and not provided
    for in other subclasses in this class.  In general, this subclass, and
    indented subclasses take cleaning apparatus combined with boiler structure
    and cleaning processes combined with steps of boiler operation, for
    example, such operations as are provided for below under the titles
    "Blow-off" and "Trapped circuit".  It also takes apparatus and processes,
    per se, for cleaning boilers not elsewhere provided for.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     for horizontal fire tube boilers with water heating circulating
    tubes with a sediment trap.

    202,    for horizontal cylindrical boilers with water heating and
    circulating tubes provided with a sediment trap.

    360,    for structure of headers for water tube boilers with hand openings
    and closures therefor, when the structure of the header is modified.

    361,    for headers provided with special boiler cleaning devices.

    364,    for headers provided with tube closures.

    429     and 433, for feed heaters with automatically operated valves for
    reversing the flow of water through the trap when the blow-off is opened.

    431,    for feed water heaters with a filter inside the boiler.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, appropriate subclasses
    for cleaning apparatus, which involve at least one of the following means.
    A gas blast or vacuum, brushing, beating, scraping, shaking, wiping,
    shotting, the use of a squeegee, with or without detergents.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, for cleaning processes and
    apparatus including the cleaning and/or pickling of metal.

    148,    Metal Treatment, appropriate subclasses for metal cleaning
    processes (1) of any kind combined with other metal treating steps.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 95 for a heat exchanger with cleaning means.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 122 for mineral oil vaporizers
    provided with means to remove carbon from the oil or from the vaporizer.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 196+ for
    electrolytic protection apparatus (e.g., to keep the surfaces of liquid
    heaters and vaporizers clean, etc.).

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 724+ for processes of electrolytic
    protection of metal objects (e.g., to keep the surfaces of liquid heaters
    and vaporizers clean, etc.).

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclass 48 for mineral oil
    conversion processes which include some procedure for preventing the
    formation of deleterious carbon accumulations or removing such
    accumulations from the equipment.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 175+ for a heater in
    combination with separating apparatus, especially subclasses 177+ having
    means to add a treating material.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 200+ for boiler manholes and closures.

    252,    Compositions, for boiler compounds or mixtures and chemicals for
    introducing into boilers for preventing the formation of scale or for
    removing the scale from the boiler when formed, and processes involving the
    mere use of the composition even though the thing or surface treated be
    specified.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, for boiler purposes.


CLS 122/380
TXT Devices under subclass 379 having mechanically operated agitators or
    circulators for the water in the boiler or scrapers so arranged that the
    sediment will be carried to the clean-out end of the boiler or mud drum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    411,    for mechanical circulating devices within the boiler.


CLS 122/381
TXT Devices under subclass 379 having means for blowing off the water both at
    the surface and at the bottom.


CLS 122/382
TXT Devices under subclass 379 provided with means for blowing off the boiler
    at the bottom and removing the sediment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    381,    for devices for blowing off the boiler both at the bottom and the
    surface of the water.


CLS 122/383
TXT Devices under subclass 382 having a conduit extending into the boiler along
    the bottom, either fixed or movable, adapted to remove the sediment.


CLS 122/384
TXT Devices under subclass 383 having one or more conduits extending along the
    bottom of the boiler, provided with a steam ejector.


CLS 122/385
TXT Devices under subclass 383 provided with an internal conduit located within
    the water firebox above the mud ring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    369     and 405, for analogous art.


CLS 122/386
TXT Devices under subclass 383 having a sediment pan or receptacle at the
    bottom of the boiler and provided with a blow-off conduit communicating
    with the pan.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    393     and 394, for pans without blow-off conduits.


CLS 122/387
TXT Devices under subclass 383 provided with scrapers for removing the
    incrustation or sediment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    379,    for scrapers attached to the boiler, but movable and not having a
    blow-off conduit,

    384,    for steam ejectors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 104.16 for
    mechanical boiler cleaners that are not attached to the boiler.


CLS 122/388
TXT Devices under subclass 383 in which the conduit is provided with one or
    more valved ports.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for conduits with washout nozzles.


CLS 122/389
TXT Devices under subclass 379 having means for blowing off or removing the
    surface water of the boiler, i.e., "skimmers".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400,    for combinations of skimmers with a trapped circulating conduit.


CLS 122/390
TXT Devices under subclass 379 comprising fluid jet cleaners for removal of
    soot and ashes when either the structure of the boiler or of the furnace is
    modified for the reception of the cleaner when in operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    361,    for structure of headers with cleaners for water tube boilers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, see the reference to
    Class 15 under "Search Class" in the class definition of this class (122).


CLS 122/391
TXT Devices under subclass 390 comprising a horizontal fire tube boiler and
    cleaner attached permanently to the boiler or to the furnace walls.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 147, 150, 188+, 199+, 296+, and 297+ for
    feeding air and steam jets that are intended to aid combustion, but which
    might also act as fluid jet cleaning devices.


CLS 122/392
TXT Devices under subclass 390 comprising a water tube boiler with the cleaner
    attached either to the furnace walls or boiler.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    361,    for structure of headers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 98, 147, 150, 188+, 199+, 296, and 297+, for
    devices for feeding air and steam to assist the combustion of fuel that
    would also serve as cleaning jets.


CLS 122/393
TXT Devices under subclass 379 comprising mud drums and the necessary
    modifications in the boiler structure for their application.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     137 and 192, for drums forming bridgewalls for horizontal
    cylindrical boilers.

    259,    363 and 365, for water tube boiler drums.

    444,    for drums for water tube boilers with special feed heating means.


CLS 122/394
TXT Devices under subclass 379 comprising receptacles, either open at the top
    or closed, but having openings for the passage of water therethrough, for
    receiving the sediment precipitated from the water.  The

    pan may have a conduit leading to the mud drum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    386,    for pans with blow-off conduits leading from the pan to the outside
    of the boiler.

    430,    for boilers provided with an internal conduit for delivering feed
    water to the mud drum.


CLS 122/395
TXT Devices under subclass 379 comprising sand blast cleaning devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, appropriate subclasses for fluid current
    conveying of solid material in general.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 75+ for a sandblast machine.


CLS 122/396
TXT Devices under subclass 379 comprising apparatus and processes for cleaning
    and filling boilers where an interchange of heat is effected between the
    blow-off water and the clean filling water.


CLS 122/397
TXT Devices under subclass 379 provided with one or more conduits, through
    which the boiler water is caused to pass, and having some form of trap or
    filter in the circuit, after passing which the water is returned to the
    boiler.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91      and 202, for boilers also having trapped circuits.

    414     and 415, for circulation features without the sediment trap.


CLS 122/398
TXT Devices under subclass 397 provided with means for introducing feed water
    into the circulating conduit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403,    for a feed water means with a heater.

    414,    for similar arrangement of conduit with feed water introduction
    without the sediment trap.


CLS 122/399
TXT Devices under subclass 397 with means for withdrawing the water from the
    boiler into the circulation conduits from the top or the bottom, or both.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202     and 381, for blow-off devices taking the water from either the
    surface or the bottom.

    382+,   for special features of outlets.

    389,    for surface blow-off devices and for "skimmers" adapted to be used
    on the surface outlets of the circuit devices of this subclass.


CLS 122/400
TXT Devices under subclass 397 in which water is caused to pass from the
    surface of the boiler through the conduits.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91      and 202, for a water tube circuit with sediment trap.

    389,    for "skimmers".

    399,    for combination of surface and bottom outlets to a trapped circuit.

    415,    for surface exit circulating circuits without a trap in the
    circuit, but having a forced circulation by means of a mechanical pump,
    with feed water introduced into the circuit.


CLS 122/401
TXT Devices under subclass 400 with means for feeding a chemical or some
    composition to the circuit for precipitating the salts in the water.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 177+ for a heater,
    chemical feeder and separator combination.  See the search notes thereunder.


CLS 122/402
TXT Devices under subclass 400 in which a circulating pump is in the circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404,    for similar arrangement of conduit and trap, with a steam jet for
    circulating the water.


CLS 122/403
TXT Devices under subclass 400 having in combination therewith a heater for the
    feed water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    415,    for allied art without the sediment trap.


CLS 122/404
TXT Devices under subclass 400 in which the circulation is aided by means of a
    steam jet located at some point of the circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    384,    for steam jet blow-offs.

    402,    for this subject matter where the circulation is maintained by a
    mechanical pump.


CLS 122/405
TXT Devices under subclass 379 comprising nozzles or conduits having one or
    more discharge orifices, either permanently attached to the inside of the
    boiler or of such structure that they are not of general application in
    other arts, for washing the sediment from the tubes or boiler walls.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    383,    for structures that are also adapted to serve as washout nozzles.

    390+,   for structure of nozzles.


CLS 122/406.1
TXT CIRCULATION:
    Devices under the class definition not otherwise classified comprising
    means for regulating the circulations of water in the boiler.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for rotary boilers.

    36      and 407, for steam and water jets that help the circulation.

    39      and 59, for horizontal fire tube boilers with a drop water firebox
    having a conduit located either outside or inside the boiler for aiding the
    circulation.

    69      and 196, where the boiler circulation ceases through certain parts
    when feed water is fed to the boiler and the parts serve as a feed water
    heater.

    83,     for horizontal boilers with fire tubes having transverse diaphragms
    for assisting the circulation.

    91,     118 and 159, for vertical fire tube and vertical flue boilers with
    internal tubes or sleeves for increasing the circulation.

    123,    for vertical fire tube boilers with transverse diaphragms.

    202,    for horizontal cylindrical boilers having a sediment trap through
    which the water circulates.

    258,    for boilers in which the circulation is downward through water
    tubes.

    292     and 366, for absorbent wicks, within the boiler space.

    379+,   for circulation devices in combination with means for cleaning the
    boiler or purifying the water.

    414,    415, 418, 419, 428+, 442, and 444, for circulation features
    combined with the heating and introduction  of feed waters.

    488,    for combined separators for steam and circulation devices.

    495,    for circulation devices for protecting the crown sheet.

    501     and 502, for displacing elements within water tubes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, appropriate subclasses for pumps, per se.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, for rotary expansible chamber
    pumps, per se.


CLS 122/406.2
TXT Having anticavitation devices:
    Devices under subclass 406.1 wherein means are provided to prevent the
    formation of a vortex in a circulating fluid.


CLS 122/406.3
TXT Having restrictors or orifices:
    Devices  under subclass 406.1 having outlets or means to confine a fluid
    during circulation.


CLS 122/406.4
TXT Once through:
    Devices under subclass 406.1 wherein the fluid is turned to steam on a
    single circuit through the heater.


CLS 122/406.5
TXT With start up operations:
    Devices under subclass 406.1 having a specific set of initial conditions.


CLS 122/407
TXT Devices under subclass 406 comprising an injector or tubes connected in
    such a manner as to act like an injector and having means for heating part
    of the water to a higher temperature in a separate compartment or conduit
    that delivers the water heated in the separate compartment to the injector
    for increasing the circulation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    384,    398 and 404, for related art on the injector action.


CLS 122/408.1
TXT Having internal conduit:
    Devices under subclasses 406.1+ comprising boilers having conduits located
    inside the boiler and generally below the water line for accelerating the
    circulation of the water in the boiler.  These conduits may consist of
    tubes, inverted bells, cylinders, or even plates spaced apart from each
    other or spaced from the boiler walls or tubes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36      and 407, for special types of circulating devices.

    59,     for conduits, either internal or external, for aiding the
    circulation of horizontal fire tube boilers with a drop water firebox.

    83,     for plates or diaphragms, arranged transversely of a horizontal
    fire tube boiler for aiding the circulation.

    118,    for internal circulation tubes, cylinders, or sleeves for vertical
    fire tube boilers.

    159,    for internal circulation tubes, cylinders, or sleeves for vertical
    flue boilers.

    379+,   for internal circulating conduits combined with water purifying and
    boiler cleaning apparatus.

    412+,   for circulation features combined with feed water heaters.

    488,    for circulation devices combined with a steam separator.


CLS 122/408.2
TXT With internal geyser tube:
    Devices under subclass 408.1 wherein a conduit is placed such that heated
    fluid at a low level is transported rapidly to a higher level.


CLS 122/409
TXT Devices under subclass 408 comprising horizontal large flue boilers.


CLS 122/410
TXT Devices under subclass 409 having return fire tubes.


CLS 122/411
TXT Devices under subclass 406 comprising mechanical devices located inside the
    boilers for circulating or agitating the water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    380,    for agitators and water circulators of a mechanical type when they
    have the additional function of removing sediment from the boiler or
    transferring it from one part of the boiler to another.


CLS 122/412
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising means for preheating
    water being fed to a boiler or principal heater.

    (1)     Note.  In order that devices for heating feed water shall be
    classified in any of the boiler subclasses they must be so intimately
    connected and combined with the boiler structure that they are inseparable
    therefrom or not of general application for heating water and not excluded
    therefrom by the main definition of this class.  Devices for heating water
    that may be used for boiler purposes or for any other purposes, are not
    classified in this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1       and 3, for combinations of feed heaters with other elements that
    form a boiler plant.

    20,     for structure of devices for heating water that could readily be
    applied for heating feed water (this is a very closely related subclass).

    36,     for boilers having means for heating the water by steam jets or
    tubes before the boiler is fired up.

    37,     for closures of boilers having separate compartments, one
    compartment being used for impure water full of mud or salt, the steam
    passing to the other compartment which contains purified water, and feed
    heaters.

    40+,    for flash boilers having a preheater for the water intimately
    associated with the flash boiler.

    62,     63 and 65, for heating water introduced into the heaters in the
    firebox.

    68+     and 196, for boilers provided with heating tubes through which the
    boiler water circulates and is heated, but when the feed water is being fed
    to the boiler the boiler circulation is stopped by means of automatically
    operated valves and the feed water is heated in the tubes before it is
    conducted to the main part of the boiler.

    82,     for horizontal fire tube boilers with superposed feed water heaters
    in open communication with the boiler, delivering water to the bottom of
    the boiler from the feed heater.

    83      and 123, for horizontal fire tube and vertical fire tube boilers,
    respectively, that have transverse diaphragms, the feed water entering the
    compartment farthest from the firebox and being progressively heated as it
    approaches the firebox.

    89,     for water arches at the rear of horizontal fire tube boilers that
    serve as feed water heaters.

    106,    for horizontal fire tube boilers having water walls that may be
    used as a feed water heater.

    118     and 159, for special types.

    125,    for similar structure for feed heaters.

    151,    for horizontal flue boilers having return fire tubes, with a
    smokebox closure having a separate comparment that may serve as a feed
    water heater.

    189,    190, 193+, and 202, for boilers where water is introduced into a
    certain part of the structure before passing to the main part of the boiler.

    192,    for water bridge walls and drums where water is introduced and
    heated.

    195+,   for means for heating feed water when it is introduced (these are
    really main boiler structures with means for incidentally heating the water
    when it is introduced before it enters the horizontal cylinder).

    371+,   for water grates (water grates used as feed water heaters will be
    found in the various types of boilers having water grates; a complete list
    of boilers with water grates is given in the "search notes" to subclass
    371).

    379+,   for feed water heaters combined with boiler cleaning devices,
    traps, and filters.

    396,    for combined cleaning and feed water heating system where the
    blow-off water is used to heat the feed water when refilling the boiler
    (especially used for cleaning and filling locomotive boilers).

    398,    for boilers having a circulating conduit provided with a sediment
    trap or filter, the water being introduced into the circulating conduit.

    403,    for feed heaters having a sediment trap (compare also subclasses 91
    and 202).

    457     and 458, for gravity boiler feeders with incidental feed water
    heater.

    477,    for combination of a water tube boiler with a steam superheater and
    a feed water heater.

    494,    for surrounding casings to prevent radiation of heat from a boiler
    which heats feed water.

    497,    for feed heating furnace and boiler front.

    498,    for water-cooled doors for heating feed water.

    499     and 500, for furnace mouths or fuel door openings provided with
    water heaters and used for heating feed water.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, appropriate subclasses for feed water heaters in
    power plants.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for a heat exchanger, per se,
    even though disclosed as a feed water heater.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 175+ for a heater or
    heat exchanger combined with a separator, and subclasses 198.1+ for a
    separator with means to add treating material, e.g., steam.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus that contact a liquid with a gas not limited to heat exchange but
    which may be disclosed as a feed water heater.


CLS 122/413
TXT Feed heaters under subclass 412 that are either located in the ash pan or
    ash box or form part of the structure thereof.


CLS 122/414
TXT Subject matter under subclass 412 in which a conduit is in circuit with a
    boiler, with means for introducing feed water into the circuit, thereby
    mixing the feed with the boiler water before introduction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    398,    403 and 415, and structural subclasses of boilers generally, for
    the special structure of boilers having means for introducing feed water
    into certain parts of the boiler circulating system.


CLS 122/415
TXT Subject matter under subclass 412 having a circulating conduit
    communicating with a boiler at the water level, having a mechanical pump in
    the circuit for withdrawing water from the boiler at the water line and
    returning it to the boiler at some other point and having means for heating
    the feed water by means of either the surface or jet type and injecting the
    feed water into the boiler or conduit, but so arranged that the water level
    in the boiler will be maintained.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    398,    402, 403, and 406, for combinations of circulating pump with boiler.

    414,    for feed water introduced into the circuit.


CLS 122/417
TXT Feed heaters under subclass 412 located in the steam space of a boiler and
    consisting of plates or receptacles superimposed in such a way that the
    feed water falls from one to the other.  The heater may or may not have
    means for trapping the sediment and blowing it out of the boiler.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    435+,   438 and 443, for other pan or tray structures used in feed heater
    structures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 198.1+ for separating
    means with means to add a treating material, e.g., steam.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, for structure of plates and
    receptacles in Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus of general utility.


CLS 122/418
TXT Subject matter under subclass 412 combined with fire engine boilers with
    the water heater attached to the boiler or some part of the engine
    apparatus for keeping the water in the boiler hot when the boiler is not
    fired up.


CLS 122/419
TXT Water heaters under subclass 412 for keeping water in a fire engine boiler
    hot when the fire engine is in the engine house and the firebox is not in
    use, which consist of a stationary water heater located in the engine
    house, adapted to be coupled to the fire engine boiler to establish a water
    circulation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    237,    Heating Systems, subclass 12.2 for combinations of this heating
    device with the heating system of the engine house.


CLS 122/420
TXT Feed water heaters under subclass 412 which are heated by furnace gases
    only.

    (1)     Note.  See the structural subclasses under the different types of
    boilers for feed heaters heated by furnace gases where the heater forms a
    part of the boiler, and boiler water circulates therethrough other than
    when the feed water is being fed to the feed water heating section and not
    merely as an alternate operation.  For certain specialized feed heaters see
    "Search this class" below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    371,    and the subclasses listed in the search notes thereunder, for water
    grates that serve as feed water heaters.

    412     and the subclasses listed in the search notes thereunder for
    further directions as to feed water heaters.


CLS 122/421
TXT Feed water heaters under subclass 420 not of general application in other
    arts for heat transference, located in the waste heat flue or "offtake"
    flue of the boiler, between the boiler and smokestack.


CLS 122/422
TXT Feed water heaters under subclass 412 heated by furnace gases and steam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403,    425, 432, and 434, for special types of heaters of this nature.


CLS 122/423
TXT Feed water heaters under subclass 412 in horizontal fire tube boilers and
    located either within the smokebox or forming a part of the smoke box
    structure.

    (1)     Note.  A "smokebox" is distinguished from a "smoke chamber" in that
    the former consists of a closed chamber at the end of the boiler, into
    which the products of combustion pass directly from the fire tubes and
    thence to the smokestack, while a "smoke chamber" is a chamber at the end
    of the boiler, into which the products of combustion enter either from the
    fire tubes or from the flue outside of the boiler and do not pass directly
    out of the chamber, but may return through other boiler flues.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151,    for a return fire tube boiler having a smoke box containing water
    tubes.


CLS 122/424
TXT Subject matter under subclass 423 comprising a water-jacketed exhaust
    "lift" pipe.


CLS 122/425
TXT Feed water heaters under subclass 423 heated both by furnace gases and by
    steam, which may or may not come into contact with the feed water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    422,    432 and 440, for other types of feed heaters heated by furnace
    gases and steam in combination.


CLS 122/426
TXT Feed water heaters under subclass 423 consisting of either water tubes
    located in smokebox or of a water walled casing, forming the smokebox,
    provided with water tubes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    465,    for similar structure used as a steam superheater.


CLS 122/427
TXT Feed heaters under subclass 412 for horizontal fire tube boilers located in
    the smoke chamber at the rear of the boiler or having one side exposed to
    the heat of the products of combustion as they pass through the chamber.

    (1)     Note.  For distinction between "smokebox" and "smoke chamber", see
    note to subclass 423, this class.


CLS 122/428
TXT Subject matter under subclass 412 comprising a conduit located inside a
    boiler for heating the water before it is finally delivered to the boiler
    from the conduit.  The feed water may or may not be mixed with boiler water
    or steam before its final delivery to the boiler.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36      and 444, for device where feed water is injected into the boiler
    water tubes for heating the water and increasing circulation.


CLS 122/429
TXT Subject matter under subclass 428 in which the conduit has a sediment trap
    provided with one or more valves automatically operated when the blow-off
    valve of the trap is opened to change the course of flow of the water and
    clear the trap of sediment.


CLS 122/430
TXT Subject matter under subclass 428 in which the conduit delivers it toward
    the blow-off end or mud drum of the boiler.


CLS 122/431
TXT Subject matter under subclass 428 in which a filter is located in the
    conduit inside the boiler.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    428     and 429, for traps inside the boiler.


CLS 122/432
TXT Subject matter under subclass 428 connected in series with a furnace, gas
    type.  That is, the water is heated in a conduit heated by products of
    combustion and then passes into a conduit within the boiler, where it is
    heated before delivery thereto, or is heated in conduits passing through
    the boiler and then in a furnace gas heated chamber or conduit and then
    delivered to the boiler.


CLS 122/433
TXT Subject matter under subclass 428 where there is a trap or filter outside
    the boiler, through which the water passes before it enters such feed
    heater.


CLS 122/434
TXT Subject matter under subclass 412 combined with the water tank of a
    locomotive tender.


CLS 122/435
TXT Subject matter under subclass 412 comprising an open receptacle or pan
    located within the steam space of the boiler, in which water is fed and
    heated. The pan may be provided with devices for intercepting the sediment
    that is precipitated and for blowing it off.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    417     and 438, for structure of pans and sprayers.


CLS 122/436
TXT Subject matter under subclass 435 with means for spraying feed water to the
    pan. The pan is generally provided with means for collecting the sediment
    and blowing it off.


CLS 122/437
TXT Subject matter under subclass 412 comprising a conduit leading from a
    boiler safety valve to a water receptacle for heating the water when the
    steam escapes from the safety valve.


CLS 122/438
TXT Subject matter under subclass 412 comprising means for spraying water into
    the steam space of a boiler.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    417     and 436, for structure of spraying devices in other types of feed
    water heaters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses
    for related spray structures which may be used to inject water into a
    boiler.


CLS 122/439
TXT Subject matter under subclass 412 wherein the feed water heater either
    forms part of a stack or is located in a smokestack.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for water heaters of general application located in the smokestack
    or chimney.

    123     and 440, for stack feed water heaters heated by both furnace gases
    and steam.


CLS 122/441
TXT Subject matter under subclass 412 comprising means for heating the feed
    water by means of live or exhaust steam.


CLS 122/442
TXT Subject matter under subclass 441 where the live or exhaust steam comes
    into contact with the water to be heated.  This is a miscellaneous subclass
    for steam injected feed water heaters not otherwise provided for.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    434,    435, 436, 437, 438, 443, and 444, for special types of heaters
    using steam.

    457     and 458, and search note thereunder, for devices mixing water with
    exhaust steam and returning it to the boiler.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 654 for devices for mixing water with
    exhaust steam and returning it to the boiler of power plants.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 198.1+ for separating
    means with means to add a treating material, e.g., steam.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, for feed water heaters and
    purifiers not connected with the boiler structure of the steam injected
    type.


CLS 122/443
TXT Subject matter under subclass 442 comprising closed chambers or receptacles
    located over a boiler in open communication with the steam space and means
    for injecting water thereto that it may be heated by contact with the steam
    before it enters the boiler.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    425     and 442, for similar parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 198.1+ for separating
    means with means to add a treating material e.g., steam.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, for gas and liquid contact
    apparatus not limited to heat exchanging.


CLS 122/444
TXT Miscellaneous subject matter under subclass 412 wherein the feed water is
    heated in a water tube boiler, whether the water be heated outside or
    inside the water space of the boiler.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    347     and 365, for disclosures of feed water heating devices within the
    steam and water drum of a water tube boiler.

    477,    for combinations of feed heaters and superheaters.


CLS 122/446
TXT Devices under the class definition for feeding both fluid fuel to the
    burner and water to the boiler that are not automatically regulated.


CLS 122/447
TXT Devices under subclass 446 with automatic mechanism for cutting off the
    fuel supply when the water level in the boiler becomes either too high or
    too low or both.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, for such controls,
    per se.


CLS 122/448.1
TXT AUTOMATIC CONTROL OF FLUID FUEL AND WATER:
    Devices under the class definition for controlling automatically both the
    feed of fluid fuel to the burner and the feed of water to the boiler.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 351 for water heaters in general
    provided with automatic control of fuel, also fuel and water when the draw
    off faucet is operated.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, appropriate
    subclass, for the control, per se, for the fuel feed.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 279+ for pumps having condition responsive
    control of the pumped fluid.


CLS 122/448.2
TXT Having fuel or feed bypass:
    Devices under subclass 448.1 wherein means are provided to deflect water
    feed or return excess fuel based on steam pressure.


CLS 122/448.3
TXT Multiple boiler regulation:
    Devices under subclass 448.1 wherein a plurality of boilers are controlled.


CLS 122/448.4
TXT Once through:
    Devices under subclass 448.1 wherein the fluid is turned to steam on a
    single circuit through the heater.


CLS 122/449
TXT Devices under the class definition for automatically controlling the
    combustion of solid fuel and the regulation of the water feed to boilers,
    depending upon the conditions within the boiler.  This is accomplished
    either by steam pressure or the temperature of the water or steam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 103 and 188 for boiler controlled fuel feeders.


CLS 122/450
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising boilers that are
    movably supported to control either the combustion of the fuel or water
    feed or both.


CLS 122/451
TXT Devices under the class definition for introducing water to boilers and
    controlling the introduction not otherwise provided for.  Those devices
    that are of general application for feeding water to tanks, either open or
    closed, whether a boiler be disclosed or claimed in a general way, are not
    classified in class 122 at all, but are placed in classes that will be
    noted below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for boiler plants having a boiler feeder in combination.

    11,     where the movement of the boiler is combined with the feeding of
    water.

    40      and 41, for boilers of the flasher type having special means for
    introducing water into the boiler combined therewith.

    365,    428 and 444, for devices disclosing feed introducing apparatus for
    water tube boilers.

    366,    for absorbent wicks for feeding water from one portion of the
    boiler to another.

    396,    for combined cleaning, heating, and feeding devices.

    398     and 403, for combined purifiers, circulators, heaters and feed
    introduction.

    406,    for feed introduction combined with circulation.

    414,    for injecting water into a circuit taking water from the boiler.

    415,    for boilers having a circuit communicating with the boiler and
    provided with a pump for withdrawing water from the water level in the
    boiler, introducing feed water, mixing it with the boiler water in the
    circuit, and maintaining the water level.

    417,    435, 436, and 438, for devices for introducing water into the steam
    space.

    431     and 433, for feed water conduits provided with traps and filters.

    446,    for combinations of fuel and water feeders.

    446     through 449, under Regulation, Fuel and Water, Automatic control
    for automatic control of both fuel and water to the boiler.

    447,    for feeders with automatic cut-off for the fluid fuel upon the
    occurrence of an abnormal water level.

    450,    where the feed is governed by the movement of the boiler itself.

    452,    for art in this class where the feed is controlled by the pressure
    inside the boiler.

    495,    when water is fed upon the crown sheet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 667 for a power plant energized by
    externally applied heat in which the boiler feed is automatically
    controlled.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 241+ for degasification of
    liquid, especially subclass 244 for plural successive degassing treatments
    of boiler feed water.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 155+ for degasifying means
    for liquid.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 351 for automatically controlled
    valves for the type of water heater known in the art as "instantaneous
    water heaters".

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 156+ for gas pressure discharge of a
    liquid as to a boiler, subclasses 171+ for steam traps, subclasses 386+ for
    liquid level responsive control of a valve.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 84 for
    electrical switches for controlling feed valves of boilers operated by a
    float.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 55-60 for
    thermostatically operated steam traps; and subclass 52 for combinations of
    thermostatic valves and float valves or pressure operated valves in steam
    traps.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 9+ for automatically controlled heating
    systems having means for introducing or controlling the introduction of
    water to boilers.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 36+ for liquid level responsive control of a
    motor driving a pump, subclass 182.5 for liquid level responsive control of
    a jet pump and subclass 211.5 for liquid level responsive control of a pump
    displacement or drive transmission.


CLS 122/451.1
TXT Devices under subclass 451 for automatically controlling flow of feed-water
    to a boiler by thermal responsive means, usually a thermostat of the
    expanding-solid type, which is exposed more or less to the steam as the
    water-level varies.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    504.2,  for thermal means which operate a valve, on drop of water-level
    below a certain limit, to operate an alarm or indicator.


CLS 122/451.2
TXT Devices under subclass 451.1 in which the controlling-valve is operated by
    fluid-pressure means, which may be the pressure generated in a thermostat
    of the expanding-fluid type.


CLS 122/452
TXT Devices under subclass 451 having means for controlling the supply by
    boiler pressure. This subclass also contains patents having claims to
    boiler structure combined with the feeding mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    448.1   and 449, for the combination of the feed water and the fuel
    controlling devices depending on boiler pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 279+ for pumps having condition responsive
    control of the pumped fluid.


CLS 122/456
TXT Devices under subclass 451 consisting of one or more closed tanks or
    receptacles having automatically controlled inlet and outlet valves for
    admitting water to the tank and discharging it therefrom, and also having
    means for equalizing the pressure between the tank and the boiler, whereby
    the water will fall by gravity into the boiler, the tank being located
    above the boiler.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 156+ for gas pressure discharge of a
    liquid in general, and subclasses 386+ for liquid level responsive valves.


CLS 122/457
TXT Devices under subclass 456 having means for heating the feed water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    458,    for hand operated gravity feeders with a heater.


CLS 122/458
TXT Gravity feeders under subclass 451 having means for heating the feed water,
    but not of the automatic type.


CLS 122/459
TXT Apparatus and methods under the class definition for treating steam or
    vapor, either by superheating or cooling it, or by expanding or compressing
    it, or by any combination of operations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    487,    for superheaters having means for injecting water into the steam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, for electric heating devices for superheating
    steam.


CLS 122/460
TXT Subject matter under subclass 459 comprising general combinations of
    boilers of a miscellaneous structure with steam superheaters, not defined
    in other subclasses.  Superheaters of use only as a steam superheater are
    classified here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    477,    for combinations of water tube boilers with steam superheaters and
    feed water heaters.

    485,    for superheaters with a separate furnace.


CLS 122/461
TXT Subject matter under subclass 459 comprising steam superheaters in
    combination with horizontal fire tube boilers or flue boilers of a
    miscellaneous character.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    469     and 481, for superheaters related to fireboxes.


CLS 122/462
TXT Devices under subclass 461 relating to the structure and arrangement of a
    steam tube superheater having steam tubes extending from the smokebox of a
    horizontal fire tube boiler into the fire tubes.


CLS 122/463
TXT Devices under subclass 461 comprising horizontal fire tube boilers having a
    steam space within the boiler separate from the main steam space, in which
    are fire tubes for superheating the steam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    482,    for boilers having fire tubes in the steam space of a boiler for
    superheating the steam.


CLS 122/464
TXT Devices under subclass 461 relating to the structure and arrangement of a
    superheater for steam having fire tubes passing through the steam chamber
    of the superheater, located at the smokebox end of a horizontal fire tube
    boiler.


CLS 122/465
TXT Devices under subclass 461 relating to the structure and arrangement of a
    steam tube superheater at the smokebox end of a horizontal fire tube boiler
    and generally located in the smokebox.


CLS 122/466
TXT Subject matter under subclass 459 comprising fire tube boilers or large
    flue boilers having both a steam superheater and a feed water heater
    combined therewith.


CLS 122/467
TXT Subject matter under subclass 459 relating to the structure and general
    arrangement of superheaters for vertical fire tube boilers, except those
    located in the firebox.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    468     and 481, for analogous superheaters.


CLS 122/468
TXT Subject matter under subclass 459 comprising vertical flue boilers having
    water tubes within the flue, in combination with a steam superheater.


CLS 122/469
TXT Subject matter under subclass 459 comprising superheaters located at the
    rear of the firebox or back of the bridge wall of miscellaneous boilers
    extending horizontally.  The boiler is generally of the horizontal
    cylindrical type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    464,    for general combination of superheater with horizontal fire tube
    boilers.

    481,    for superheaters located in the firebox.


CLS 122/470
TXT Subject matter under subclass 459 relating to the structure and arrangement
    of a superheater in the waste heat flue of a horizontally located boiler.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    412+,   and especially subclass 421 for heat exchange features in feed
    heaters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 157+ for a tube assembly in a casing or
    flue of general utility.


CLS 122/471
TXT Subject matter under subclass 459 relating to the structure and general
    arrangement of a steam superheater within the combustion space of a water
    tube boiler having banks of water tubes rearwardly declined over the bridge
    wall and in communication with front and rear headers, which are in
    communication with a declined drum posited above the water tubes.


CLS 122/472
TXT Subject matter under subclass 459 relating to the structure and general
    arrangement of a superheater in the combustion space of a water tube boiler
    having banks of water tubes rearwardly declined over the bridge wall and
    communicating with headers at each end, which headers communicate with a
    longitudinal drum posited above the water tubes.


CLS 122/473
TXT Subject matter under subclass 459 comprising superheaters for water tube
    boilers having a longitudinal drum not otherwise provided for.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    472,    for longitudinal drum superheaters.


CLS 122/474
TXT Subject matter under subclass 459 comprising superheaters for water tube
    boilers having banks of tubes over the bridge wall.


CLS 122/475
TXT Subject matter under subclass 459 relating to the structure and general
    arrangement of a steam superheater in the combustion space of a water tube
    boiler having a stand pipe provided with spur water tubes.


CLS 122/476
TXT Subject matter under subclass 459 comprising water tube boilers having
    superheaters for steam combined with the boiler in the same heating chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    474,    for superheaters for water tube boilers of a miscellaneous type,
    with water tubes over the bridge wall.

    477,    for water tube boilers having a superheater for steam and a feed
    water heater.


CLS 122/477
TXT Subject matter under subclass 459 comprising water tube boilers provided
    with both a superheater for steam and a feed water heater.


CLS 122/478
TXT Subject matter under subclass 459 relating to superheaters for water tube
    boilers having one or more transverse drums.


CLS 122/479.1
TXT Automatic heat regulation of superheater:
    Subject matter under subclass 459 relating to steam superheaters having
    means for automatically regulating the temperature of the superheated steam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    448.1,  449 and 452, for closely allied art and special features of
    controlling devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 666 for the automatic control of the by-pass
    of a superheater in a power plant.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 351, for similar controllers.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, for structure of the
    controlling device.


CLS 122/479.2
TXT Having gas recirculation:
    Devices under subclass 479.1 wherein the products of combustion are
    returned to an earlier stage of combustion.


CLS 122/479.3
TXT Having flame positioning:
    Devices under subclass 479.1 wherein the location of the combustion flow
    can be varied.


CLS 122/479.4
TXT With variable firing:
    Devices under subclass 479.1 wherein the firing order of the burners can be
    changed.


CLS 122/479.5
TXT Having dampers:
    Devices under subclass 479.1 wherein an adjustable plate controls the draft.


CLS 122/479.6
TXT Plural furnaces:
    Devices under subclass 479.1 wherein there are multiple combustion chambers.


CLS 122/479.7
TXT Once through:
    Devices under subclass 479.1 wherein the fluid is turned to steam as a
    single circuit through the heater.


CLS 122/480
TXT Subject matter under subclass 459 relating to superheaters having a damper
    for varying the amount of heat to which the superheater is subjected and
    their arrangement with the boiler.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    479.1,  for superheater automatic heat regulation.


CLS 122/481
TXT Subject matter under subclass 459 relating to superheaters located in the
    firebox of any type of boiler, or the superheater may be located around the
    firebox.


CLS 122/482
TXT Subject matter under subclass 459 relating to boilers having fire tubes in
    the steam space of the boiler for superheating the steam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    463,    for fire tubes heating a separate steam chamber in the boiler.

    486,    for superheated steam domes.


CLS 122/483
TXT Subject matter under subclass 459 relating to devices for superheating
    steam indirectly by heating a fluid or fusible solid and transferring the
    heat of the fluid or melted mass to the steam.

    (1)     Note.  Compare the subclasses, in this class, indented under
    Indirectly heated, separate fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    479.1,  for this type of superheater having an automatic temperature
    regulator.


CLS 122/484
TXT Subject matter under subclass 459 relating to superheaters provided with
    means for heating the steam in separate charges, each charge or portion
    being cut off and isolated from the main steam line while being superheated.


CLS 122/485
TXT Subject matter under subclass 459 relating to steam superheaters having a
    separate furnace for heating them.


CLS 122/486
TXT Subject matter under subclass 459 relating to steam domes provided with
    means for drying or superheating the steam, excluding mere steam separators.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    492,    for steam domes with separators.

    508,    for steam domes without separators.


CLS 122/487
TXT Subject matter under subclass 459 relating to means for injecting water
    into superheated steam or to structure of superheaters with water injection
    mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 12.1+ for
    structure of the control device.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, for desuperheating apparatus of
    this type when independent of the boiler.


CLS 122/488
TXT Devices under the class definition located within the boiler for separating
    the steam from the water as it circulates in the boiler.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    408+,   for circulating conduits with incidental steam separators.


CLS 122/489
TXT Separators under the class definition located in the steam main leading
    from the boiler with means for automatically returning the water to the
    boiler.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus for apparatus for gas separation, per se.


CLS 122/490
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to mechanism for
    preventing water being carried out of the boiler into the steam main when
    the boiler is tilted or inclined from a normal horizontal position, as, for
    instance, when a ship is pitching or rolling or when a traction engine or
    locomotive is ascending or descending a grade.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    495,    for allied art, and see the notes thereto.


CLS 122/491
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to steam separators
    located either within the steam space of a boiler or in the steam space, in
    combination with a separator in the steam dome or steam main or at the
    outlet of the boiler, so that the water will fall back into the boiler when
    steam is being discharged.  Includes separators of the nature defined,
    although they may be used in a sugar evaporator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    488,    and see the notes thereunder, for means for separating steam from
    the water circulation of the boiler.

    489,    for separators in the steam main with means for returning the water
    to the boiler.

    492,    for steam domes with separators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, for apparatus for gas separation, per
    se.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 171+ for steam and water separator traps.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 53-60,
    for steam traps.


CLS 122/492
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to steam separators
    located in the steam dome of the boiler or to the structure of the steam
    dome having steam separating apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    486,    for steam domes with superheaters.

    508,    for steam domes without steam    separators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 417 and 418+ for separators and flow
    control means combined and 440 for parallel and continuous nonplanar
    separating members.


CLS 122/493
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising miscellaneous braces
    and stays and their general arrangement with the boiler walls not included
    in the definitions of other subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83,     for supports for fire tubes for horizontal fire tube boilers.

    360+,   for braces and stays for headers and header structure.

    496,    for the general arrangement of stays and the structure of crown
    sheets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, subclasses 367 and 370, respectively, for a
    threaded fastener and nut having a stay bolt spacer sleeve or having a stay
    bolt bearing washer; and subclasses 379+ for a threaded stay bolt, per se;
    and subclass 505 for an unthreaded stay bolt, per se.


CLS 122/494
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to inclosures
    surrounding a boiler of a miscellaneous nature not specially provided for
    in other subclasses in this or any other main class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses for
    masonry or concrete constructions.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, particularly subclasses 40, 41,
    75, 86+, and 122 for insulating compositions.

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 336+ for wall structures forming part of the
    furnace which covers the boiler.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 273.5 and 375 for stoves and
    furnaces with heat accumulator.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, particularly subclasses 32-35 for
    thawing and steam protection of pipes.

    220,    Receptacles, for casing structure of general utility.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 62, for heat insulating compositions.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet, where either the material or the structure of the product may
    inherently influence the loss or gain of heat; see particularly subclasses
    304+, 426+, 457+, and 920+ (a cross-reference art collection).


CLS 122/495
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to boilers having means
    to prevent the crown sheet over the firebox from being uncovered by water
    when the boiler is tilted from the normal horizontal position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    490,    for allied art.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 39 for devices to keep the boiler of a
    steam traction engine level when going up or down grade.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 7 for means for levelling a tank or boiler
    vehicle when on uneven ground.


CLS 122/496
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating the structure of crown
    sheets and braces and stays therefor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58      and 493, for miscellaneous braces and stays.


CLS 122/497
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to water-cooled fronts
    for boilers.


CLS 122/498
TXT Subject matter under subclass 497 relating to furnace doors.  There may or
    may not be a circulatory communication with the boiler.  The door may be
    employed to heat water for any purpose or to generate steam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 180 for air-cooled furnace doors.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclasses 242+ for distillation
    apparatus closures.


CLS 122/499
TXT Subject matter under subclass 497 relating to the same structure of the
    fuel feed opening of a firebox having water heating chambers or conduits.
    The feed water may be heated in this structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93,     94, 189, 190, 193, and 194, for related art.


CLS 122/500
TXT Subject matter under subclass 499 relating to a water firebox.


CLS 122/501
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to boilers whose steam
    or water space or some part thereof contains fluid displacing elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     242, 243, 406, and 509, for related art.


CLS 122/502
TXT Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein the boiler is heated by fluid
    fuel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243     and 406, for related art.


CLS 122/503
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to the structure and
    arrangement of a water-cooled baffle, which is generally located in the
    firebox for receiving the impact of the burning fuel, either fluid or
    comminuted solid fuel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for fluid fuel burners.


CLS 122/504
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising devices not otherwise
    provided for to prevent explosions or injury to boilers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    164, 364, 437, 447, 450, and 490, for tilting boilers.

    493,    for braces and stays.

    494     and 495, for different types of safety devices in this class.

    510,    for supports.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 212+ for automatic control of gas cutoff
    or diversion and subclasses 309+ for separator bypass or gas pressure
    relief means.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 290+ for liquid level or depth
    gauges.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 35 for safety valves.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 455+ for line condition change
    responsive valves, particularly subclasses 460, 486+ and 498 for valves
    which close in response to an excessive flow as when the line breaks.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 279+ for a heat exchanger with a pressure
    or temperature responsive device, and subclass 134.1 for a heat exchanger
    with a protective device.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 84 for special
    safety switches.

    220,    Receptacles, for diaphragms for boilers and tanks that break under
    a given pressure and for boiler manholes and closures with safety
    attachments.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 53 for
    related art.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclass 80 for steam traps that are heated to
    prevent freezing.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, for safety devices for condensers.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fasteners subclasses 367 and 370, respectively, for a
    threaded fastener and nut having a stay bolt spacer sleeve or having a stay
    bolt bearing washer; and subclasses 379+ for a threaded stay bolt per se;
    and subclass 505 for an unthreaded stay bolt, per se.


CLS 122/504.1
TXT Subject matter under subclass 504 containing a fusible element which fuses,
    generally when the water-level falls below a certain limit, and sounds an
    alarm or allows the steam-pressure to fall.


CLS 122/504.2
TXT Subject matter under subclass 504 which operate an alarm or indicator
    should dangerous conditions arise in the boiler, usually by a
    thermally-operated means which is exposed to the steam when the water-level
    falls below a certain limit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    504.1,  for fusible controls.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+ for electrical
    automatic condition responsive indicating systems.


CLS 122/504.3
TXT Subject matter under subclass 504 relating to devices controlled by fusible
    means for admitting steam or water to the firebox or otherwise
    extinguishing or dampening fire.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 89.1-89.4 for frangible or fusible
    receptacle attachments.


CLS 122/505
TXT Subject matter under subclass 504 relating to float controlled devices for
    admitting steam or water to the firebox or for otherwise extinguishing or
    dampening the fire.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, for fire extinguishers, per se.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 56 for
    related art.


CLS 122/506
TXT Subject matter under subclass 504 relating to devices for extinguishing or
    dampening the fire of the boiler when a certain pressure inside the boiler
    is attained. This includes combined safety valves and fire extinguishers.


CLS 122/507
TXT Subject matter under subclass 504 relating to boilers with valves that
    close automatically when some part of the boiler bursts in order to prevent
    steam or water from escaping.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    364,    for hand operated valves for closing tubes and headers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 218+ for automatic control of separated
    constituent discharge as by a liquid responsive float in combination with a
    steam separator.


CLS 122/508
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to the structure of the
    steam receiving and storing chambers for boilers with which the steam main
    communicates which do not come within the definition of other subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88      and 305, for steam and water drums for water tube boilers.

    463     and 509, for steam collecting chambers located within the body of
    the boiler.

    486,    for steam domes or chambers having means for superheating the steam.


CLS 122/509
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to boilers provided with
    a steam chamber or receiver inside the boiler below the water line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36      and 463, for special combinations.


CLS 122/510
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to mechanism and
    structure for supporting boilers of various types when the structure of the
    boiler or the general arrangement is claimed in combination with the
    support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11      and 12, for rotatably supported boilers.

    450,    for normally supported boilers for regulating the feed water or
    heat generation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 336+ for structure of furnace walls.


CLS 122/511
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to the structure of
    tubes and flues for boilers not of general application and their connection
    with the boiler and couplings for tubes or flues, not specially provided
    for in other subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    360+    and 365, for tube couplings for headers and drums and the structure
    of the headers and drums.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 322+ for protecting devices for the ends of
    boiler tubes.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, for tubes of general utility.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 177+ for a tubular structure of more
    general utility specialized to heat exchange.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 189+ for couplings for tubes
    of boilers and condensers or feed-water heaters to the tube sheet.


CLS 122/512
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to structure of the tube
    sheet for boilers not of general application.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    365,    for drums and couplings.

    511,    for tubes and connectors.


CLS 123/
TTL INTERNAL-COMBUSTION ENGINES

CLS 123/
TXT This class contains inventions relating to prime movers or engines in which
    a combustible material is burned within an inclosed space or chamber and
    the heat energy thus developed converted into work by permitting the
    resulting products of combustion to act upon and through mechanical powers,
    the engine in question including suitable mechanism whereby the functions
    above enumerated are continually and automatically carried out, and such
    engine being designed to communicate power to some machine or device
    exterior to itself.

    The space or combustion chamber above referred to is ordinarily the
    interior of the working cylinder of the engine, the products of combustion
    acting immediately upon a reciprocating, rotating, or oscillating piston
    moving within the same chamber in which combustion takes place or in an
    extension thereof.  Some types of internal-combustion engines, however,
    besides fulfilling the conditions above mentioned, have a transfer valve
    operated by and in unison therewith located between the combustion chamber
    and the elements upon and through which the products of combustion act to
    thereby control the flow of said products, in which case the above
    mentioned transfer valve is operated to establish communication between the
    combustion chamber and the working cylinder at the instant of ignition or
    prior thereto, so that the piston is driven by burning products of
    combustion.

    The working fluid is ordinarily such as results from combustion alone; but
    in some of the engines in this class a small quantity of water is supplied
    to the engine, generally by injecting it directly into the interior of the
    combustion- chamber during or after the combustion of the combustible
    material; but in all engines using water the amount used is comparatively
    small, so that the resulting steam is necessarily in a superheated
    condition.

    This class also includes separate parts of engines coming within the above
    definition and also subordinate elements designed for use with such
    engines, and incapable of use in the manner contemplated with other devices
    or in other relations.

    From the above it will be seen that devices go into this class because of a
    function performed by a given element or combination of elements rather
    than because of any particular structure of such elements, and therefore,
    given structural features forming a machine adapted for use as an
    internal-combustion engine, may be found in any other classes having
    machines of like general structure.  Thus probably any given structure
    adapted for use as an internal-combustion engine could generally with
    slight modification be used as steam or other heat engine, and often as an
    air, gas, or water pump, a hydraulic motor, a meter, etc.  This would not
    ordinarily be the case with the subordinate or auxiliary devices included
    in this class, as from what appears above such subordinate elements as the
    class contains are adapted for use in the manner contemplated only with or
    forming a part of an internal-combustion engine.

    It therefore follows that a search for a given general mechanical structure
    adapted for use as an internal-combustion engine will generally need to be
    continued in the classes above indicated.

    Further fields of search for the various subordinate elements designed for
    and adapted to be used only with internal-combustion engines, and therefore
    included in this class, are indicated in the definitions hereinafter
    appearing of those various subclasses.

    (1)     Note.  A compilation of all types of motors will be found in the
    Notes to the class definition of Class 60.

    The following examples of terminology have been considered to be a nominal
    inclusion of an internal combustion engine and if so claimed would not
    preclude classification in Class 417:



    (a)     a cam driven pump;

    (b)     a  "crank (shaft)" driven pump;

    (c)     a  "gear" driven pump;

    (d)     a  "chain" driven pump;

    (e)     a  "belt" driven pump;

    (f)     a  "fluid" driven pump;

    (g)     an  "electrically" driven pump;

    (h)     a pump and an  "outlet"  "tube" and  "injector".

    The following pump control parameters are separately appropriate for Class
    417.  Control by both of these parameters is appropriate for Class 123;



    (a)     engine speed control;

    (b)     manifold vacuum.

    The following examples have been considered to be significant inclusion of
    an engine and if so claimed would cause classification in Class 123 if
    otherwise appropriate.



    (a)     timing of the pump relative to the engine;

    (b)     engine temperature control of the pump.

    (1)     Note.  When the pump-engine combination is claimed broadly, it is
    properly classified in 123.  When the output of the pump is not delivered
    to the engine, classification is proper in 417.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclass 198.8 for a method of
    making a fuel gas from methane using an internal combustion engine.

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 39.6+, for engines of the
    external-combustion type.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclasses.  Class 123
    takes an expansible chamber device or element thereof which is limited for
    use in an internal combustion engine.  However, since Class 123, has not
    been cleared, many expansible chamber devices which are not limited for use
    in an internal combustion engine will be found in Class 123, without any
    stated line or perceptible distinction with the subject matter found in
    Class 92.

    440,    Marine Propulsion, subclass 45, for devices utilizing an explosive
    jet to propel a vessel through the water.

    417,    Pumps, appropriate subclasses for pumps, per se, which may be
    disclosed as internal-combustion engine accessories and particularly
    subclass 34 for an internal-combustion engine driving a pump and having
    means for controlling the engine in response to a condition of the pump or
    pump fluid, subclasses 73+ for pumps in which one fluid is pumped by the
    ignition of another in direct contact therewith; subclass 364, for pumps
    driven by an internal-combustion engine; and subclass 380, for fluid motor
    driven pumps in which the motive fluid for the fluid motor is generated by
    an internal-combustion engine. Internal-combustion engine driven pumps are
    classified in Class 417 even though the pump may be solely disclosed as a
    mere accessory of or ancillary to the operation of the engine (e.g.,
    cooling fluid pump, fuel pump, etc.).  However, this class (123) takes
    those internal-combustion engine driven accessory pumps when the claims
    reflect a fluid connection between the pump and the engine, provided there
    is no additional pump fluid inlet or outlet claimed for supplying or
    exhausting fluid for use external of the engine.

    477,    Interrelated Power Delivery Controls, Including Engine Control, for
    interrelated controls between an engine and a transmission, clutch, or
    brake.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses wherein the waste is destroyed by burning it in an internal -
    combustion engine.  Also, see cross-reference art collection, subclass 900,
    for apparatus used to treat hazardous or toxic waste.


CLS 123/1
TXT Internal combustion engines not coming within the terms of the definition
    of some one of the following internal-combustion engine subclasses.  This
    subclass contains patents relating to cycles or modes of operation not
    hereinafter provided for or in which the cycle or mode of operation is not
    definitely determined by the structure disclosed and will not ordinarily
    contain patents relating to definite mechanical structure.

    (1)     Note.  Given mechanical structures not provided for in structural
    subclasses, but operating upon a definite and determined cycle of operation
    provided for in this classification, are classified in miscellaneous
    functional or cycle subclasses, such as 65, and subclasses indented
    thereunder, and 311+, and indented subclasses, etc.

    (2)     Note.  The use of unconventional fuels as found in this subclass
    are commonly hazardous and toxic waste and their destruction or containment
    is found in Class 588, Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment.


CLS 123/2
TXT Combinations not coming within the terms of the following subclasses of
    combined devices in which an internal-combustion engine, is disclosed and
    claimed in combination with some other device not in itself classifiable in
    some appropriate subclass of internal-combustion engines and which combined
    device itself is not treated as a unitary machine in the general system of
    Office classification and as such classified in some appropriate class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants, for the combination of internal
    combustion engines and dynamoelectric machines.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclass 5 for an
    horological device acted upon by an internal combustion engine.


CLS 123/3
TXT Combinations of an internal-combustion engine together with means for
    generating and supplying a combustible mixture thereto, the engine and
    generating apparatus being ordinarily capable of separation, but disclosed
    and claimed in combination, and the elements collectively forming a
    complete plant for developing and applying power.  In the power plants
    occurring herein the various elements constituting the generating portion
    of the plant are of ordinary or commercial form and if presented by
    themselves would be classified in other classes or subclasses. Patents
    covering the engine and generating device together are classified in the
    class of internal-combustion engines, because all the elements of the plant
    are so correlated as to develop and apply power by means including an
    internal combustion engine.

    (1)     Note.  The devices occurring in this subclass differ from many of
    the engines in subclasses of oil engines in that in an oil-engine the
    source of power is always a liquid hydrocarbon and the elements concerned
    with the vaporization of the oil and those constituting the engine are so
    designed with reference to each other as to form a single unitary machine
    incapable of being separated into its component sets of elements without
    defeating the operation of the engine as a whole in the manner contemplated.


CLS 123/18
TXT Internal-combustion engines irrespective of cycle or mode of operation,
    comprising a stationary inclosing casing, sections of which perpendicular
    to its axis are bounded by circular arcs concentric to said axis, and a
    movable member or piston therein moving in contact with the inner walls of
    the said casing, said piston partaking of an oscillating or swinging motion
    about the axis of the casing and, together with the walls thereof,
    inclosing a space or chamber within which the burned gases act expansively
    to impel the piston.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 223 and 339+ for
    cyclically operable expansible chamber motors of the oscillating piston
    type.


CLS 123/19
TXT Internal-combustion engines in which a body of liquid is interposed between
    the burned gases and the working piston or equivalent element, whereby
    power is communicated to the main driving-shaft of the engine, the said
    liquid preventing the burned gases within the combustion-chamber and
    working cylinder from coming into direct contact with the working piston or
    equivalent element.


CLS 123/21
TXT Internal-combustion engines having a cylinder and a working
    piston-reciprocating therein, but irrespective of other structural
    features, in which means are provided whereby the mode of operation of the
    engine may be determined and the engine caused to operate upon either a
    two-stroke or a four-stroke cycle.


CLS 123/22
TXT Engines including in their structure elements normally found only in
    hot-air engines and other elements normally found only in
    internal-combustion engines and having steps in their cycle of operation
    peculiar to both such types of engines. This subclass includes engines
    including elements selected from both the above-mentioned types and
    convertible either at will or automatically, as by a suitable governing
    device, so as to operate either as hot-air or as internal-combustion
    engines, and engines operating upon a predetermined cycle, including
    working strokes, upon which the piston is impelled alternately by gases
    heated within the working cylinder by combustion, as in internal-combustion
    engines, and by gases heated within the working cylinder by contact with
    the inner surface of said working cylinder and the clearance-space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61      and 68.


CLS 123/23
TXT Internal-combustion engines in which a solid nonexplosive fuel or
    combustible is introduced into and burned within the working cylinder of an
    internal-combustion engine or into a combustion-chamber in permanently open
    communication therewith and the energy of the resulting gases converted
    into work by permitting them to expand and act upon a piston moving in the
    said cylinder.  The solid fuel may be introduced into the working cylinder
    upon each successive cycle of operation of the engine and in quantities
    sufficient only to supply the energy required for the successive working
    strokes of the engine, or it may be introduced at comparatively long
    intervals of time and in quantities sufficient to furnish energy for
    several working strokes, in which case air only is supplied upon the
    successive cycles of operation to consume portions of the charge of fuel
    already within the engine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24      and 445+, for feeding mechanism available generally for the purpose
    of supplying solid fuel to engines of the type occurring in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 39.461, for combustion motors other than
    internal-combustion engines operable on solid nonexplosive fuel.


CLS 123/24
TXT Internal-combustion engines in which a charge of gun powder or other
    explosive substances is supplied to and exploded within the cylinder of the
    engine or combustion-chamber in communication therewith and the energy of
    the resulting gases converted into work by permitting them to act upon a
    moving part of the engine.  This subclass is intended to include all
    engines using an explosive substance as above, irrespective of other
    structural features, cycle, or mode of operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23      and 445+, for feeding mechanism available, generally for the
    purpose of supplying the explosive substance to engines of the type
    occurring in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 632+, for one shot explosion actuated
    expansible chamber type motors, and subclass 39.47 for combustion products
    generators combined with motors, other than internal-combustion engines,
    which operate on solid fuel containing an oxidizer.


CLS 123/25
TXT Internal-combustion engines having a cylinder and a working piston
    reciprocating therein, but irrespective of other structural features,
    cycle, or mode of operation, in which the combustible mixture supplied to
    and burned within the working cylinder contains a quantity of aqueous vapor
    or in which water in any form is supplied to the working cylinder after a
    charge has been ignited therein.  The water may be supplied to the air and
    hydrocarbon before the charge is ignited in which case the combustible
    charge is made up of air, hydrocarbon, and aqueous vapor, or a combustible
    mixture of air and hydrocarbon may be ignited in the working cylinder, the
    water being supplied to the expanding gases therein during the working
    stroke.  In cases where water in the form of steam is supplied to the
    combustible mixture, as above, the steam is frequently generated by means
    of heat ordinarily lost in the operation of the engine, as by the heat of
    the exhaust-gases, or the cooling-jacket may be utilized as a
    steam-generator to supply water to the combustible charge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.22,  for similar devices designed primarily to reduce the pressure of
    the cooling system and thus reduce the boiling point of the liquid coolant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 39.05 and 39.54 for a motor operated by
    externally generated combustion products in which water or steam is
    introduced into the power cylinder; and subclass 712 for an engine operated
    selectively or simultaneously by internal combustion of fuel and by
    expansion of motive fluid.


CLS 123/26
TXT Internal-combustion engines in which a combustible mixture is ignited in
    the working cylinder at the beginning of the working stroke, as in the
    ordinary operation of internal-combustion engine, after which and at some
    time before the end of the working stroke an additional quantity of
    compressed air or equivalent non-combustible gas is supplied to the working
    cylinder and mingles with the burned gases therein, the piston being
    impelled through the remaining portion of its working stroke by the
    combined action of the burned gases and the air supplied thereto.


CLS 123/27
TXT Internal-combustion engines in which air or equivalent noncombustible gas
    is supplied to the working cylinder and compressed therein by a distinct
    compression-stroke of the working piston to such a degree that the
    temperature of the gas rises to such a point that a combustible supplied
    thereto will be ignited by the highly- compressed noncombustible gas upon
    coming into contact therewith, after which and after the beginning of the
    working stroke a combustible upon being supplied to the body of the
    compressed noncombustible gas ignited as it comes into contact therewith
    and burns at constant pressure or perhaps constant temperature.  The cycle
    upon which the engines occurring in this subclass operate, is sometimes
    designated by text-writers as the "Diesel" cycle.

    (1)     Note.  For engines in which gas is burned at constant pressure, see
    this class, subclasses 61 and 68.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    495+,   for with Fuel Pump.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 86, 87, 88+, 95, 96, and 533.2+ for nozzles disclosed
    for injecting fuel into combustion chambers of internal combustion engines.

            Oil-Engines:

    The "oil-engine" subclasses contain internal-combustion engines, having a
    cylinder and a working piston reciprocating therein, but irrespective of
    other structural features, cycle, or mode of operation, which are designed
    to be operated by a liquid hydrocarbon and in which the means concerned
    with the supply and vaporization of the oil so closely associated with the
    elements constituting the engine that a true combination would appear to
    exist between the two sets of elements.  A given mechanism including an
    engine and means for supplying oil thereto to be burned therein is not
    classified as an oil-engine merely because it is designed to use oil as a
    source of power if the means whereby the oil or vapor is supplied to the
    engine is capable of separation therefrom and of use with other engines
    without affecting the operation of either the engine or the oil-supplying
    devices.  A given structure will be classified in these subclasses only in
    cases where mechanical separation of the elements concerned with the supply
    or vaporization of the oil from the elements constituting the engine is
    impossible without defeating the operation of the device as a whole in the
    manner contemplated by the inventor, and a simple pipe or equivalent
    connection through which the exhaust-gases from the engine are conducted to
    the oil-supplying or vaporizing device to heat the same is not considered
    as bringing the two sets of elements into such intimate association as to
    make the whole mechanism a single device and as such classifiable as an
    oil-engine. From these considerations it therefore ordinarily follows that
    patents disclosing both an engine and a device for supplying it with oil or
    vapor therefrom and which do not come within the terms of the above
    definition, and are therefore not classifiable in oil-engine subclasses,
    are classified and cross-referenced according to the separate groups of
    elements entering into and forming the complete device, the oil-supplying
    or vaporizing device ordinarily going into appropriate subclasses of
    Charge-forming devices and the engine into appropriate subclasses in this
    class, according to its form, mode or operation, of other distinguishing
    features.


CLS 123/37
TXT Internal-combustion engines having a cylinder and working piston
    reciprocating therein, but irrespective of other structural features,
    cycle, or mode of operation, in which two or more separate and distinct
    charges of combustible mixture are burned and act in succession upon the
    working piston during each working stroke thereof, each charge after the
    first upon ignition entering the cylinder and mingling with and tending to
    increase the pressure of the burned gases already therein.


CLS 123/38
TXT Internal-combustion engines of the reciprocating type wherein the working
    piston is permanently connected with the main driving-shaft of the engine
    in which a combustible mixture is burned within the working cylinder
    thereof and the resulting gases cooled and condensed, thereby producing a
    more or less perfect vacuum within the said working cylinder, whereupon
    atmospheric pressure acts upon the said working piston to move it through a
    working stroke.  The pressure of the atmosphere may be the only force
    acting upon the working piston, or the engine may be so designed that the
    combustible gases upon being ignited generate pressure which also acts upon
    the said working piston.


CLS 123/39
TXT Internal-combustion engines of the reciprocating type, but irrespective of
    other structural features, in which the combustible mixture is ignited in
    the working cylinder at or substantially at atmospheric pressure.  The
    combustible mixture ordinarily begins to enter the working cylinder at the
    beginning of the working stroke in which case it is ignited at atmospheric
    pressure, as above, after a definite portion of the working stroke has been
    performed and the whole charge supplied, the engine thus working upon a
    two-stroke cycle without compression.  The charge may, however, be drawn
    into the working cylinder by a distinct charging stroke, such stroke being
    followed by a stroke corresponding with the compression-stroke in four
    cycle engines during which the exhaust-valve is held open and the charge
    then ignited under atmospheric pressure at the beginning of the third or
    working stroke, in which case the engine works upon a four-stroke cycle
    without compression.

    (1)     Note.  Engines in this subclass working on the two stroke cycle
    without compression, as above, differ from the majority of the engines
    occurring in subclass 68, and engines working upon a similar cycle
    occurring in subclass 61, only in the degree of pressure under which the
    charge exists before the ignition thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38.


CLS 123/41
TXT Internal-combustion engines having a cylinder and a working piston
    reciprocating therein, but irrespective of other structural features,
    cycle, or mode of operation, in which means are provided for causing the
    engine to run in either direction at the will of the operator and
    subordinate mechanism for accomplishing the same result, but not disclosed
    in connection with all the elements necessary to form a complete and
    operative engine.

    (1)     Note.  In this connection it should be observed that engines
    working upon a two-stroke cycle are frequently capable of operating in
    either direction without addition to or change in the elements necessary to
    the operation thereof, and this especially true of the engines in
    subclasses 71, 73 and 74.


CLS 123/41.01
TXT Such miscellaneous devices for cooling the working cylinder, piston,
    piston-rod, or other element of an internal-combustion engine as do not
    come within the terms of the definition of some one of the following
    subclasses of internal-combustion engines, cooling, and accessary devices
    designed for and used with cooling systems for internal-combustion engines
    and not classified in some appropriate cooling subclass.

    (1)     Note.  The expressions "primary coolant" and "secondary coolant",
    found in the definitions of the indented subclasses, refer, respectively to
    a fluid employed to cool an engine surface by direct contact therewith and
    to a fluid employed to cool such contacting fluid.  For example, the liquid
    which flows through a radiator for an internal-combustion engine is the
    primary coolant, whereas the air passing through the radiator to cool the
    liquid coolant is a secondary coolant.

    (2)     Note.  Class 165 will receive the combination of an
    internal-combustion engine and radiator when the internal-combustion engine
    is included by name only.

    (3)     Note.  For structures including shutters for controlling the air
    flow, which devices do not include significant internal-combustion engine
    structure, search Classes 49, 180, 236, and 454.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 39.83 for cooling of parts of an engine of
    the internal combustion type; subclasses 597+ for a fluid motor driven by
    the waste heat of an internal combustion engine; subclasses 320+ for an
    internal combustion engine having a cooled exhaust or in which the exhaust
    is used as a heat source and subclass 714 for plural motors with a common
    cooling means.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 41+ for a heat exchanger installed on a
    vehicle, and subclasses 51+ for a heat exchanger installed on an engine.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 68.4 and 68.6 for motor vehicle
    combinations including radiator mountings; and subclasses 68.1+ for hoods
    and such combinations including shutters.  See (3) Note.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 34+ for
    automatic radiator cooling.  See (3) Note.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 70+, for heating system radiators, per
    se.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 53, for aircraft engine cowling or enclosure
    devices; see (3) Note to subclass 53 in Class 244 for the line; and
    subclass 57, for radiators combined with aircraft structure.

    417,    Pumps, subclass 372, for an interrelated or common cooling means
    for a pump and drive motor therefor.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 83+, for such devices
    provided with heat exchange means.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 3+ for ventilating cowls and subclasses
    284+ for registers.  See (3) Note.


CLS 123/41.02
TXT Devices under subclass 41.01 with means to sense some condition, which
    means causes operation of a control device for stopping, varying, or
    starting the flow of either the primary or secondary coolant.

    (1)     Note.  Control of replenishment from a reserve supply, which may be
    condensate, is included.

    (2)     Note.  The inclusion of significant engine structure or specific
    engine operation is the characteristic which distinguishes this type of
    device from those found in Class 236.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 351, for thermostatic valves.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 457 and 468 for valves controlled by
    change in the line temperature.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 34+, for
    automatic coolant flow control.  See (2) Note.


CLS 123/41.03
TXT Cooling systems under subclass 41.02 wherein the control of the coolant
    flow is directly or indirectly controlled by a device which floats on the
    surface of the coolant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 52, for
    float control combined with thermal sensing means.


CLS 123/41.04
TXT Cooling systems under subclass 41.02 wherein the primary or secondary
    coolant is air or gas and the device for stopping, varying, or starting the
    flow of the air or gas is a shutter, valve, damper, adjustable cowl, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclasses 74.1+ for louvers interconnected for concurrent movement.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, appropriate
    subclass, for curtains, shades or screens, for radiator protectors.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 35.2, for
    automatic shutter control.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 3+ for ventilating cowls and subclasses
    284+ for registers.


CLS 123/41.05
TXT Devices under subclass 41.04 in which the shutters are controlled by a
    temperature responsive device and also include an engine responsive device,
    e.g., an intake or exhaust manifold pressure responsive device or an oil
    pressure responsive device.

    (1)     Note.  The engine responsive device usually acts to automatically
    close the shutters upon stopping the engine and cooperates with the
    thermostat to control the shutters in response to engine temperature while
    the engine is in operation.


CLS 123/41.06
TXT Devices under subclass 41.04 wherein an operator of the servo-motor (fluid,
    electric, etc.) type is interposed between the condition sensing means and
    the shutter, valve, damper, adjustable cowl, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 35.3, for
    heat responsive control of shutters including a servo-motor within the
    control linkage.


CLS 123/41.07
TXT Devices under subclass 41.04 in which the control of the engine carburetor
    throttle valve also controls a shutter or shutters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.13,  for nonautomatic interrelated throttle and coolant flow control.


CLS 123/41.08
TXT Cooling systems under subclass 41.02 wherein the primary or secondary
    coolant is a fluid and the device for stopping, varying or starting the
    flow of liquid is a valve.


CLS 123/41.09
TXT Cooling systems under subclass 41.08 wherein the responsive valve
    interrupts the flow of fluid coolant from the engine block to a coolant
    source as in the case of a primary coolant, or from a radiator or heat
    exchanger to a coolant source in case of a secondary coolant, and directs
    the coolant to a bypass omitting the coolant source.

    (1)     Note.  The coolant source may be either an exchanger or an external
    supply, as an intake from the sea.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.25,  for systems in which a liquid coolant bypasses a vapor condenser.

    41.29,  for bypasses for pump, radiator, etc., not automatically controlled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 34.5, for
    radiator bypass valves controlled by heat responsive means.

    440,    Marine Propulsion, subclass 88, for combinations involving boat
    modification.  Inclusion of hull by name only is not sufficient to place a
    patent in Class 440.


CLS 123/41.1
TXT Cooling systems under subclass 41.09 wherein the coolant source is a
    radiator or condenser.


CLS 123/41.11
TXT Devices under subclass 41.02 wherein the primary or secondary coolant is
    air and the device for stopping, varying or starting the flow of air is an
    impeller or fan which is controlled by an automatic device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 35+, for
    automatic air impellers which are used to cool radiators.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclasses 31+ for an
    impeller, per se, controlled by an automatic device.


CLS 123/41.12
TXT Devices under subclass 41.11 in which the automatic control device is
    actuated in response to temperature.


CLS 123/41.13
TXT Cooling systems under subclass 41.01 for controlling the flow of primary or
    secondary coolant flow conjointly with the engine throttle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.07,  for automatic shutter and throttle control.


CLS 123/41.14
TXT Cooling systems under subclass 41.01 including (1) devices or arrangements
    for draining the entire cooling system or any part thereof, usually to
    prevent freezing, or (2) devices for storing heat to be returned to the
    system when the engine is stopped to prevent freezing.

    (1)     Note.  The draining devices usually include a heat insulated tank
    into which the coolant is drained and stored.

    (2)     Note.  Mere internal passages in a cooling system which are not
    closed in normal operation of the system are not considered draining
    devices, even though indented to allow complete emptying of the block or
    other port.

    (3)     Note.  Heat storing devices must include something in addition to
    mere bulk of coolant or stopping of circulation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 59+ for drain valves operated in
    response to a sensing of freeze conditions; subclass 107 for drains
    responsive to flow stoppage; and subclasses 301+ for hydrants combined with
    means to prevent freezing.

    417,    Pumps, subclass 434, for means for draining a pump or pump portion.


CLS 123/41.15
TXT Cooling systems under subclass 41.01 having means for indicating the
    condition or amount of coolant in the cooling system or any part thereof
    and devices responsive to the condition or amount of cooling fluid for
    preventing injury to the engine being cooled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.5,   for tank, radiator, or jacket constructions which permit rupture of
    easily replaced parts in case of excessive pressure or which have
    compressible means or air pockets or resilient walls to prevent damage to
    the system.


CLS 123/41.16
TXT Cylinders, pistons, or valves under subclass 41.01 with chambers containing
    a confined coolant therein which may be either a liquid, solid or gas.

    (1)     Note.  If there is also an external flow circuit, there is no
    communication between the two.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 176 for a piston provided with
    an enclosed insulating space therein.


CLS 123/41.17
TXT Cooling systems under subclass 41.01 in which the coolant, after cooling
    the engine or engine parts, discharges into the engine cylinder combustion
    space or valve passages or is merely exposed to the interior of said
    cylinder or valve passages.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for water injected into the cylinder during the working stroke,
    which water may be derived from the cooling system.

    543,    for admission of heated air to the cylinder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 310 for a motor-exhaust combination in which
    the exhaust system includes liquid contact structure and subclasses 317+
    for a system in which external fluid is mingled with exhaust gas.


CLS 123/41.18
TXT Cooling systems under subclass 41.01 which are capable of operating in more
    than one way or of changing from the use of one coolant to another, as air,
    vapor, liquid, and having means for changing the system to adapt it to the
    coolant or mode of operation selected, or having means for substituting
    tanks for radiators or making other equivalent changes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.2,   for vapor systems which are converted to liquid systems or vice
    versa merely by adding more liquid or according to the heat developed,
    without change or adjustment of the physical structure.


CLS 123/41.19
TXT Cooling systems under subclass 41.01 including a vaporized liquid other
    than water which is liquefied and then allowed to expand into gas, thus
    removing heat directly from the engine parts or from the engine coolant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.2,   for aqueous vapor systems, especially subclass 41.25, for systems
    in which all the circulating coolant is vaporized.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, for refrigerating systems, per se.


CLS 123/41.2
TXT Cooling systems under subclass 41.01 in which (1) vaporization is intended
    to occur, as evidenced by the creation of vapor in the jacket, the
    provision of vapor space therein or by a circulating system requiring vapor
    for its operation; (2) a closed system is provided which is claimed to be
    operated at pressures other than atmospheric; (3) there is manipulation to
    change the normal boiling point of the coolant in a part of the system as
    by providing a vacuum or pressurizing; or (4) a condenser is interposed in
    the system other than and/or in addition to the normal passage of the
    liquid coolant through a heat exchanging radiator, as (a) the radiator is
    vented through a condenser, or into the circulating fluid, (b) the radiator
    is modified to mix or recirculate vapors, or (c) the outlet from the water
    jacket enters the radiator at the bottom.

    (1)     Note.  Vapor type operation may occur only in the starting and
    warming up period of motor operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.19,  for refrigerating type coolers which involve vaporizing a
    nonaqueous primary coolant.


CLS 123/41.21
TXT Cooling systems under subclass 41.2 in which there is condensation of vapor
    in parts of the system external to the block or cylinder jacket and
    ultimate or immediate return of the condensate to the system.

    (1)     Note.  Condensation of vapor may be induced by passing the vapor
    through a heat exchanger, either with or without accompanying liquid, or by
    introducing it into a body of liquid either in a tank or in the circulating
    system.

    (2)     Note.  Circulation involves return of at least a portion of the
    condensate to the block or cylinder jacket, either directly or after a
    period of storage.  The path is usually circuitous, but may be a surge in
    and out through the same line.

    (3)     Note.  Condensation of vapor in a heat exchanger opening widely and
    directly into the block water cavity or cylinder jacket is considered
    circulation, but a mere tank at the top of the water space or jacket is not
    so considered.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.51,  41.53, 41.54, and 41.55, for reserve supply tanks and for radiators
    combined with cooling systems.


CLS 123/41.22
TXT Cooling systems under subclass 41.21 in which a connection to the
    combustion intake or carburetor reduces pressure in the system or a portion
    of it, usually to promote circulation or reduce the boiling point of the
    coolant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for systems in which vapor from the cooling system is drawn into
    the combustion chamber to effect combustion.

    41.17,  for systems in which coolant escapes directly into the combustion
    chamber or valve passages or is exposed thereto.


CLS 123/41.23
TXT Cooling systems under subclass 41.21 in which the vapor emitted from the
    block or jacket or a portion of it, or the condensate resulting therefrom,
    is added to or separated into a fluid circuit which does not include the
    block or jacket, i.e., a secondary cooling circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.55,  for cooling a primary liquid coolant by a secondary liquid coolant.


CLS 123/41.24
TXT Cooling systems under subclass 41.21 in which vapor and/or water flows from
    the top of the block or cylinder jacket to the bottom of the radiator.

    (1)     Note.  This usually results in the water returning to the block or
    cylinder without circulating through the heat exchanger, which is an upflow
    condenser.


CLS 123/41.25
TXT Cooling systems under subclass 41.21 in which vapor and water flow from the
    block or cylinder jacket through the same or adjacent outlets and the water
    is separated from the vapor and returned to the block or cylinder without
    passing through the condenser for the vapor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.24,  for similar systems in which the vapor and water flow from the top
    of the block or jacket to the bottom of the radiator.


CLS 123/41.26
TXT Cooling systems under subclass 41.21 in which only vapor is emitted from
    the block or cylinder jacket.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.19,  for similar systems in which the vapor is nonaqueous.


CLS 123/41.27
TXT Cooling systems under subclass 41.21 provided with an overflow vent from
    the radiator-condenser which leads to a means for condensing vapors
    escaping from the system through the overflow.

    (1)     Note.  The overflow tube may lead to a heat exchanger, a tank or
    reservoir or to a part of the system in which liquid is circulating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.54,  for cooling system vents.


CLS 123/41.28
TXT Cooling systems under subclass 41.01 having (1) conduits for furnishing
    each of a plurality of cylinders with an individual supply of coolant the
    distribution system branching either externally or internally of the
    jacket, or (2) passages within the jacket having capacities varying from
    cylinder to cylinder to produce equal cooling effects on all cylinders.

    (1)     Note.  Circulation through the head or body of the cylinder block
    or jacket with apertures individual to each cylinder for transfer of fluid
    between the head and body is not included under (1) above, but is included
    under (2) if the apertures vary in size.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.72+, for multiple cylinders having coolant circulating jackets or block
    passages where individual head chambers are supplied from the body or lower
    chambers through passages of uniform size.  See (1) Note.


CLS 123/41.29
TXT Cooling systems under subclass 41.01 in which a liquid coolant is
    circulated through plural paths which have at least some portion in common
    and which are diverse in character.

    (1)     Note.  Typical examples of art are (1) bypass circuits, whether for
    pump, radiator or jacket; (2) primary and secondary liquid coolant circuits
    having a common portion in which the fluids mingle; and (3) separate
    circuits connecting either the pump or radiator to both the top and bottom
    of the block or jacket.

    (2)     Note.  Mere circulation from one part of a cylinder block or jacket
    to another is not included, even though the connection is external.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.09+, for automatically controlled bypass for coolant.

    41.2+,  especially subclass 41.25, for plural path coolant circulators
    where vapor forming or condensing or structure especially adapted thereto
    is claimed.

    41.28,  for plural circuits to plural cylinders which are either interior
    manifolds or externally divergent or which vary the flow to different
    cylinders.

    41.72+, for plural circuits which are developed internally of cylinder
    blocks or jackets and are mere duplicates.


CLS 123/41.3
TXT Cooling systems under subclass 41.01 wherein air is admitted to coolant
    water for cooling the water and/or for circulating the water around the
    cooling system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.2+,  for vapor systems.

    41.44   and 41.45, for other circulating systems involving a gas other than
    air, such as exhaust gases.

    41.48,  for positively circulated gaseous secondary coolant.


CLS 123/41.31
TXT Cooling systems under subclass 41.01 with means for cooling such additional
    elements as spark plugs, exhaust manifolds, plural manifolds for both
    intake and exhaust, bearings, guides, transmissions, etc., or means for
    cooling substances such as exhaust gases, etc., together with the cooling
    of (1) the cylinder, (2) piston or (3) valves, or any combination thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Where the claims include exhaust manifold cooling with no
    detailed engine cooling, the patent belongs in Class 60, Power Plants,
    subclass 321, unless the exhaust gases are diverted to the engine, in which
    case the patent belongs in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    434+,   and especially subclasses 543+, for inlet manifold cooling or
    heating.


CLS 123/41.32
TXT Cooling systems under subclass 41.31 in which the additional part that is
    cooled is a spark plug.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169,    for spark plug cooling, per se.


CLS 123/41.33
TXT Cooling systems under subclass 41.31 in which the additional substance
    cooled is a lubricant.

    (1)     Note.  The passage of air through the crankcase is considered
    cooling lubricant in crankcase.

    (2)     Note.  Devices wherein the air is circulated through the crankcase
    by the pumping action of the piston are also included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.86,  for crankcase ventilation, per se.

    196,    for lubricant cooling, per se, where the lubricating system
    includes significant internal combustion engine structure.


CLS 123/41.34
TXT Cooling means under subclass 41.01 in which various movable elements of the
    engine have their inside surfaces, which are not exposed to combustion,
    cooperating surfaces, or direct atmosphere, cooled.

    (1)     Note.  Movable elements in this subclass and in indented subclasses
    comprise pistons, cylinders, valves, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.16,  for pistons and valves having a coolant sealed therein.

    41.56+, for air cooled pistons which do not have a definite fluid receiving
    compartment.

    41.76+, for valve seats and valve stem guide cooling by fluid circulating
    in a jacket.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 173 for a piston having an
    enclosed insulating space therein; subclass 186 for a piston having a
    ported chamber therein for circulating a heat exchange fluid; subclass 239
    for a piston provided with heat radiating rib means.


CLS 123/41.35
TXT Cooling means under subclass 41.34 wherein the element cooled is a piston.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 173 for a piston having an
    enclosed insulating space therein; subclass 186 for a piston having a
    ported chamber therein for circulating heat exchange fluid; subclass 239
    for a piston provided with heat radiating rib means.


CLS 123/41.36
TXT Cooling means under subclass 41.35 in which the piston has attached thereto
    a conduit, or the piston is shaped to include a conduit, which conduit
    slides in or on a stationary or fixed conduit for delivering coolant to or
    from said piston interior.


CLS 123/41.37
TXT Cooling means under subclass 41.35 wherein the piston rod is hollow or has
    passages therein for conducting coolant to and/or from the piston.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 109+ for a piston having a
    hollow piston rod.


CLS 123/41.38
TXT Cooling means under subclass 41.37 wherein the hollow piston rod is
    pivotally or otherwise nonrigidly connected with the piston to permit said
    rod to swing.


CLS 123/41.39
TXT Cooling means under subclass 41.35 wherein the piston has openings in its
    side wall or cylindrical surface which usually communicate with openings in
    the cylinder for the passage of a coolant to or from the interior or side
    of the piston.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.78,  for cylinder jackets adapted to be traversed by sidewall type
    cylinder valves.


CLS 123/41.4
TXT Cooling means under subclass 41.34 wherein the movable element cooled is a
    rotary valve.


CLS 123/41.41
TXT Cooling means under subclass 41.34 wherein the movable element cooled is a
    poppet type valve.


CLS 123/41.42
TXT Cooling systems under subclass 41.01 employing liquid coolants other than
    water or water which has been treated to prevent freezing, corroding, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.16,  for nonaqueous coolants sealed in cylinder valves or pistons.

    41.19,  for nonaqueous coolants which are vaporized and condensed in a
    refrigerating cycle.

    142.5,  for systems in which water is heated by external energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 71+, for heat exchange compositions having
    low freezing point or high boiling point, and 387+, for anti-corrosion
    agents.


CLS 123/41.43
TXT Cooling systems under subclass 41.01 employing at least one tank or
    radiator which is capable of linear or angular motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 86+ for a movably mounted heat exchanger
    not limited to use on an internal combustion engine.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 57 for radiators which may be movably mounted
    on aircraft.


CLS 123/41.44
TXT Cooling systems under subclass 41.01 having positively acting means for
    circulating a liquid coolant within the engine block, through the block to
    the head, or  through the block and head to a radiator.


CLS 123/41.45
TXT Cooling systems under subclass 41.44 wherein the circulating means comprise
    a jet or aspirating device.

    (1)     Note.  The jet may be liquid or gas operated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.2+,  particularly 41.23, for vapor type cooling systems having a jet
    type condenser.


CLS 123/41.46
TXT Cooling systems under subclass 41.44 where the device for circulating the
    liquid is a pump which is operated in conjunction with an air cooling fan.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.49,  for air cooling fans for liquid heat exchangers.


CLS 123/41.47
TXT Cooling systems under subclass 41.44 wherein the liquid coolant circulating
    means is driven from the engine shaft.

    (1)     Note.  The pump may be mounted on the engine shaft or may be on a
    separate shaft connected by some transmission to the engine drive shaft.


CLS 123/41.48
TXT Cooling systems under subclass 41.01 including devices which guide, force,
    or direct air over surfaces which enclose a liquid coolant or which
    separate the air and liquid coolant.


CLS 123/41.49
TXT Cooling systems under subclass 41.48 wherein the device which forces the
    air is of the fan type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.46,  for air cooling fans operated in conjunction with a liquid pump.

    41.48,  for driving impellers as means for forcing the air.

    41.65+, for fans which cause air to flow over air cooled engines.


CLS 123/41.5
TXT Cooling systems under subclass 41.01 having a normally rigid body, as a
    tank, radiator or jacket wall, constructed of yieldable material or
    provided with a replaceable portion weaker than the normal wall, or having
    a compressible or yieldable body within a tank, radiator or jacket, to
    prevent breakage of permanent rigid parts, particularly when the coolant
    freezes.


CLS 123/41.51
TXT Cooling systems under subclass 41.01 in which two or more heat dissipators
    and/or tanks are included in a single circulating system so that the
    coolant passes through them successively.


CLS 123/41.52
TXT Cooling systems under subclass 41.01 including a radiator or heat exchange
    for liquid coolants mounted on or integral with the engine or engine
    cylinder.

    (1)     Note.  See (2) Note under subclass 41.01.


CLS 123/41.53
TXT Cooling systems under subclass 41.52 wherein the heat exchanger or radiator
    is in the form of a tank shaped like a hopper and forming an extension of
    the block or cylinder jacket.  The hopper or tank is coextensive with the
    cylinder exchange portion of the system or opens widely into it, and there
    is no other means for dissipating heat.


CLS 123/41.54
TXT Cooling systems under subclass 41.01 having means for venting air or vapor
    to the atmosphere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.27,  for overflow type vents delivering fluid into a tank or condenser.


CLS 123/41.55
TXT Cooling systems under subclass 41.01 including matter other than heat
    exchange jackets or casings for the combustion chambers, valves, pistons or
    their immediate associated parts or the heat exchange elements of the same
    as fins or air passages.

    (1)     Note.  Included are miscellaneous heat dissipators for liquid
    coolants including those involving a secondary liquid coolant, automatic
    devices not concerned with coolant, flow, combinations with external power
    and/or heat using devices, i.e., auxiliary power plants, filters, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for internal combustion engines in which the heat energy imparted
    to the cooling medium is utilized for generating steam for general purposes.

    41.02+, for automatic coolant flow control.

    41.13,  for interrelated coolant flow and throttle control.

    41.15,  for combined indicator and safety  devices.

    41.31,  for cooling of parts in addition to cooling of cylinders, valves
    and pistons.

    41.44+, for combined flow causing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 204+, for devices in which the heat
    energy imparted to the cooling medium is utilized for warming purposes.


CLS 123/41.56
TXT Cooling means under subclass 41.01 wherein the primary coolant is air or
    other gaseous fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.19,  for nonaqueous vapor coolant.

    41.2+,  for aqueous vapor coolants.


CLS 123/41.57
TXT Cooling means under subclass 41.56 wherein a part of the engine is cooled
    by a liquid, i.e., there is a primary liquid coolant as well as a primary
    air coolant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.3,   for mixed air and water coolant.


CLS 123/41.58
TXT Cooling means under subclass 41.56 comprising means forming an air duct or
    passage for conducting cooling air to or against the engine including
    devices for controlling the flow of air through the duct or passages.

    (1)     Note.  These devices for the most part include shutters mounted in
    or on cowling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.04+, for automatic control of shutters.

    41.7,   for cowlings surrounding the engine cylinders.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclasses 74.1+ for louvers interconnected for concurrent movement.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 69.2, for hoods having adjustable shutters
    combined therewith.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 35.2, for
    automatic shutter control.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 3+ for ventilating cowls and subclasses
    284+ for registers.


CLS 123/41.59
TXT Subject matter under subclass 41.58 wherein the flow of air through the
    duct of passage is controlled by adjustable means at the discharge end of
    the duct or passage.


CLS 123/41.6
TXT Devices under subclass 41.56 for cooling a multiple cylinder engine which
    include vanes, baffles, conduits or the like, for dividing the flow of air
    into separate streams and directing said streams to different cylinders or
    portions of the cylinders of the engine.


CLS 123/41.61
TXT Subject matter under subclass 41.6 wherein the stream dividing means
    comprise deflecting baffles positioned adjacent to or attached to the
    cylinders of the engine for directing air to or about each cylinder.


CLS 123/41.62
TXT Subject matter under subclass 41.6 in which the stream dividing means
    comprises an air duct or passage having discharge ports or conduits for
    directing the air flow to or against different parts of the engine.


CLS 123/41.63
TXT Subject matter under subclass 41.56 which includes devices for impelling
    cooling air over the engine.

    (1)     Note.  The impelling means includes fans, pumps, or like devices
    but excludes cowlings, ducts, or the like which merely direct the flow of
    air over the engine due to the movement of the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.48,  for means to force or direct air over a surface of a liquid coolant.


CLS 123/41.64
TXT Cooling means under subclass 41.63 wherein the air impelling device is a
    jet pump or the like.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.45,  for jet pumps for impelling liquid coolants.


CLS 123/41.65
TXT Subject matter under subclass 41.63 in which the air impelling device is a
    fan.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.49,  for fans used to cause air to flow over radiators and/or water
    cooled engines.


CLS 123/41.66
TXT Devices under subclass 41.65 in which the air impeller is a suction fan for
    withdrawing air from the engine housing.


CLS 123/41.67
TXT Devices under subclass 41.56 comprising a jacket, casing or conduit
    supported by or enclosing an individual cylinder for directing the flow of
    air thereover.

    (1)     Note.  Various shaped baffles which cause the air flow to be
    deflected over the cylinder heads are included in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Devices in which the heat dissipating fins cooperate with
    the jacket or casing to form channels to conduct the cooling air over the
    cylinder are in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.62,  for conduits surrounding the cylinders.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 144 for a cylinder for an
    expansible chamber device encompassed by a heat exchange modifying space or
    jacket.


CLS 123/41.68
TXT Devices under subclass 41.67 in which baffle means or cylinder fins are
    formed to impart a spiral flow to the air within the jacket, casing or
    conduit as it passes over the cylinder.


CLS 123/41.69
TXT Subject matter under subclass 41.56 which includes cylinders and/or
    cylinder heads constructed with various shaped fins to increase the cooling
    area of the cylinder walls.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 51 for heat exchange means installed on an
    engine; subclasses 181+ for a tubular structure with discrete heat transfer
    means; and subclass 185 for a heat transmitter, per se.


CLS 123/41.7
TXT Devices under subclass 41.56 which comprise air ducts or passages which
    surround the engine to conduct or direct a stream of cooling air to or
    against the engine.

    (1)     Note.  These devices are usually cowling and may include structure
    for supporting the air duct or cowling on the engine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 68.1+ for similar structure combined
    with significant vehicle features.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 53, for like structures.  See (3) Note under
    definition of Class 244, subclass 53.


CLS 123/41.71
TXT Cylinder, piston or jacket construction under subclass 41.01 in which a
    plurality of materials, usually of different thermal capacity, are combined
    in a single element.

    (1)     Note.  A liner or cover permanently attached is considered a
    combined single element.


CLS 123/41.72
TXT Structures under subclass 41.01 comprising an engine part which is
    immediately connected with the combustion process, as a cylinder wall or
    head or valve seat jacketed, channeled or constructed to form a passage for
    a confined coolant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.34+, for coolant introduction into moving parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 83+, for such devices
    provided with heat exchange means.


CLS 123/41.73
TXT Structures under subclass 41.72 in which all or a portion of the coolant is
    confined in a channel within or adjacent jacket or coolant housing to a
    point immediately adjacent the part to be cooled, where it is released into
    the larger space with sufficient force to form a current, jet or spray
    directed toward said port.


CLS 123/41.74
TXT Structures under subclass 41.72 including a plurality of cylinders within
    the same jacket or cooled by the same system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52+,    for multiple cylinder engines.


CLS 123/41.75
TXT Subject matter under subclass 41.72 in which the cooling head is formed
    with an internal concave portion with which the jacket is coextensive.

    (1)     Note.  This concave portion usually constitutes the combustion
    space.


CLS 123/41.76
TXT Structures under subclass 41.72 in which the cooling chamber is especially
    adapted to cool the valve areas, i.e., passages, seats and valve stem
    guides.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.16,  for valves and cylinder ports having coolant sealed therein.

    41.34,  for means for cooling the moving parts of this area internally.

    41.4,   for internal cooling of valves combined with external cooling of
    valve seats or guides.

    41.85,  for cooling of valve seats or guides, per se.


CLS 123/41.77
TXT Cooling means under subclass 41.76 in which the valve seats or guides
    support a poppet-type valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.41,  for internal cooling of poppet type valves.


CLS 123/41.78
TXT Cooling means under subclass 41.76 in which the valve passages, etc., are
    located in the side walls of the cylinders.


CLS 123/41.79
TXT Cooling structures under subclass 41.72 in which the jacket or cylinder
    walls are constructed with channels or in such a way as to form channels,
    or baffles, fins, ribs or grooves are provided inside the coolant chamber,
    either to guide the coolant in particular paths or directions, or to
    increase the area of the wall exposed to the coolant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.67+, for air cooled cylinders having cooling passages or baffles.


CLS 123/41.8
TXT Structures under subclass 41.79 in which the path formed for the coolant is
    spiral, or forms an ascending or descending path extending around the
    cylinder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.68,  for air cooled cylinders having spiral passages or conduits.


CLS 123/41.81
TXT Structures under subclass 41.72 in which a member forming the external wall
    or walls of a coolant containing chamber are secured to the cylinder or
    cylinder block proper, so that they are carried thereby and have no other
    support or mounting means.


CLS 123/41.82
TXT Structures under subclass 41.72 involving the cylinder head cooling means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.76+, for similar constructions involving coolant chambers for valve
    seats or stem guides.


CLS 123/41.83
TXT Structures under subclass 41.72 in which the cylinder or cylinder liner is
    detachably supported within the assembly in such a way as to form one wall
    of the coolant chamber.


CLS 123/41.84
TXT Structures under subclass 41.83 in which the cylinder or liner has a flange
    by which it is engaged with or supported in the assembly.


CLS 123/41.85
TXT Structures under subclass 41.01 in which the cooling means is especially
    adapted to cool the valve areas, i.e., passages, seats or valve stem guides.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.76+, for cooling of valve areas combined with cooling of the cylinder or
    cylinder head.


CLS 123/41.86
TXT Engines under the class definition wherein air is forced through the
    crankcase by some manner other than the mere pumping effect of the engine
    pistons for ventilating or removing fumes from the crankcase.

    (1)     Note.  Air may be forced through the crankcase by the forward
    motion of the vehicle or by the fan due to the formation of a venture or
    aspirating nozzle on the crankcase.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.31+, for crankcase cooling or oil cooling by confined coolants and for
    crankcase ventilation combined with cylinder, piston or valve cooling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 78+ for a means to purify a
    fluid to or from a portion of an expansible chamber device, subclass 80 for
    a force exerting means to move fluid from a nonworking chamber of an
    expansible chamber device, and subclass 82 for a means to control the flow
    of fluid from a nonworking chamber of an expansible chamber device.


CLS 123/42
TXT Internal-combustion engines having a cylinder and working piston
    reciprocating therein, but irrespective of other structural features,
    cycle, or mode of operation, in which the working cylinder partakes of an
    oscillatory motion about a fixed axis as the piston reciprocates therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 176 and 210+ for
    expansible chamber motors of the oscillating cylinder type.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 118+ for an expansible
    chamber device having an oscillating cylinder.


CLS 123/43
TXT Internal-combustion engines having a cylinder and working piston
    reciprocating therein, but irrespective of other structural features,
    cycle, or mode of operation, in which the working cylinder partakes of a
    continuous rotary motion about a fixed axis as the working piston
    reciprocates therein and engines including a plurality of working cylinders
    each coming within the terms of this definition, the engine in question not
    coming within the terms of the definition of the subclass following this.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 176, 197 and 472+, for
    expansible chamber motors of the rotating cylinder type.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 54+ for an expansible chamber
    device having a rotating cylinder.


CLS 123/44
TXT Internal-combustion engines differing from those occurring in the preceding
    subclass in that axial lines of the rotating cylinders lie in a plane
    perpendicular to the crank-shaft of the engine and are also radial thereto,
    the cylinders or cylinder when one only is disclosed being immovable
    relatively to the member by which they are carried and with which they
    rotate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 491+, for expansible
    chamber type motors having three or more radial rotating cylinders.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 58+ for an expansible
    chamber device provided with a plurality of radially disposed rotating
    cylinders.


CLS 123/45
TXT Internal-combustion engines having a cylinder and a working piston
    reciprocating therein, but irrespective of other structural features,
    cycle, or mode of operation, in which the working piston rotates or
    oscillates upon its longitudinal axis and that of the working cylinder as
    it reciprocates therein and in so doing opens and closes in proper order
    the various ports necessary to supply combustible mixture to and to permit
    the exhaust of the burned gases from the engine, the periphery of the
    piston or an extension thereof forming a closure for the supply and exhaust
    ports when they are required to be closed.


CLS 123/46
TXT Internal-combustion engines having a cylinder and one or more reciprocating
    pistons therein, one at least of which pistons is movable freely and
    independently of the main shaft of the engine on the stroke of such piston
    immediately following the ignition of the charge, during which stroke the
    energy of the burned gases is stored and thereafter transferred to the main
    shaft of the engine.  Ordinarily the freely-movable piston is the only
    piston employed in engines in this subclass.  The energy is ordinarily
    stored by forcing the piston against the pressure of the atmosphere; and
    the stored energy is ordinarily transferred to the main shaft by securing
    the piston thereto by means of a suitable clutch provided with suitable
    converting mechanism upon its return stroke.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 595 for an internal combustion type free
    piston device supplying motive fluid to a motor and subclass 596 for an
    internal combustion type of free piston device with a pressure fluid type
    starting structure.


CLS 123/47
TXT Internal-combustion engines having a cylinder and working piston
    reciprocating therein, but irrespective of other structural features,
    cycle, or mode of operation, the said working piston being provided with a
    passage leading into the working cylinder and controlled by a valve
    depending upon the engine for its operation, said valve being concerned
    either with the supply of the successive combustible charges to the working
    cylinder or with the exhaust of the burned gases therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 222+ for cyclically
    operable, expansible chamber motors having a valved piston.


CLS 123/48
TXT Internal-combustion engines having a cylinder and a working piston
    reciprocating therein, but irrespective of other structural features,
    cycle, or mode of operation, in which means are provided whereby the volume
    of the clearance-space or combustion-chamber may be varied or adjusted
    either manually or automatically as by a suitable governing device, to
    thereby insure a proper degree of compression of the combustible charge
    before ignition thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    311+,   for internal-combustion engines in which the volume of the
    clearance-space is varied in unison with the exhaust-stroke, such action
    being a definite step in each cycle of operation of the engine.


CLS 123/50
TXT Internal-combustion engines comprising a cylinder and a piston therein, the
    cylinder being capable or reciprocatory movement in a straight line
    relatively to the piston and the piston being either immovable or adapted
    for simultaneous movement in a direction opposite to the movement of the
    said movable cylinder whereby the gases resulting from the combustion of a
    combustible mixture within the cylinder as they expand act upon the movable
    cylinder and transmit power therethrough to the main driving-shaft of the
    engine or act upon the movable cylinder and the piston, when it also is
    movable, to transmit power through both said elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 117+ for an expansible
    chamber device having a moving cylinder.


CLS 123/51
TXT Internal-combustion engines comprising two working pistons moving
    simultaneously in the opposite directions in a single cylindrical structure
    composed of two working cylinders arranged tandem with a combustion-chamber
    between and in permanently open communication with both said cylinders or
    two working pistons moving in like manner in two similarly-arranged
    cylinders whose axial lines when extended are parallel and adjacent and
    which communicate with a single combustion chamber, as above, whereby the
    gases resulting from the combustion of a combustible mixture within the
    combustion-chamber as they expand act with equal pressure upon both pistons
    and transmit substantially equal amounts of power through each piston to
    the main driving shaft of the engine, and internal-combustion engines
    comprising two or more such units as are above defined.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 170+ and 508+ for
    multi-piston or cylinder type expansible chamber motors.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 61+ for an expansible
    chamber device having relatively movable working members.


CLS 123/52.1
TXT MULTIPLE CYLINDER:

    Internal-combustion engine under the class definition having two or more
    separate and distinct cylinders and a single piston reciprocating in each
    cylinder to transmit force to a load.

    (1)     Note.  The following terms are defined as used in this subclass and
    indented subclasses.

            Charge -  a quantity of ``working fluid" intended to be ignited for
    a working stroke of the ``piston".

            Connecting Rod - The most common link for transmitting power from a
    ``piston" to a ``crankshaft".

            Combustion chamber - that volume of a ``cylinder" enclosed by the
    ``head" and the ``piston" when the piston is closest to the head.

            Crankshaft - The most common type of ``output shaft", which is
    journaled to turn about a fixed axis and including an offset portion for
    receiving energy from the piston.

            Cylinder - a member having an internally facing surface of a shape
    generated by a straight line rotating a fixed distance about an axis.

            Head - the portion of a cylinder which closes off one end thereof.

    (2)     Note.  A ``stroke" consists of a movement of the piston away from
    the cylinder head or a movement  toward the cylinder head.

    (3)     Note.  An internal-combustion engine may be defined by the number
    of strokes between ignition, the most common types are as follows:

    (a)     A ``four-stroke" engine is one which operates as follows, starting
    with the piston near ``top-dead-center":

    1.      The piston moves away from the head, for the ``power" stroke, as the
    ignited fuel expands as gases, to go to ``bottom-dead-center".

    2.      The piston moves toward the head for the  ``exhaust" stroke in which
    the
    combustion  gases are expelled.

    3.      The piston again moves away from the head for the ``intake" stroke
    in which
    air is drawn into the cylinder.

    4.      The piston moves toward the head for the ``compression" stroke, at
    the
    conclusion of which ignition will occur and the cycles start over.

            Note that a ``four-stroke" engine makes two complete revolutions
    for each power stroke.

    (b)     A ``two-stroke" engine is one which operates as follows, starting
    with the piston near ``top-dead-center":

    1.      The piston moves away from the head for the power stroke, with
    exhaust
    beginning at the bottom of the stroke.

    2.      The piston moves toward the head as exhaust completes, with the
    charge
    simultaneously being transferred to the cylinder, the latter part of the
    stroke serving to compress the charge, at the conclusion of this stroke
    ignition will occur and the cycles start over.

            Note that a ``two-stroke" engine makes one complete revolution for
    each power stroke.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 170+ and 508+ for a
    multi-piston or cylinder type, noninternal combustion, expansible chamber
    motor.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 146+ for plural unitarily
    mounted cylinders or a frame therefor for an expansible chamber device
    (that is not an engine).


CLS 123/52.2
TXT Simultaneous compression, distinct pistons, restricted communication to a
    single combustion chamber:

    Multiple cylinder engine under subclass 52.1 including at least two
    cylinders  each of which is connected to a single combustion chamber by a
    passage which is constricted to limit free flow of gasses between at least
    one of the cylinders and the combustion chamber and including means to
    coordinate movement of the pistons so as to compress the charge in the
    single combustion chamber.

    (1)     Note.  One piston of the ``at least two" cylinders may move
    somewhat in advance of the other.  There may be provision to prevent a
    fresh combustible mixture separate from the residual products of combustion
    from the previous charge, as by leading the supply-conduit into one working
    cylinder, while the exhaust-conduit leads from another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for an engine including multiple pistons that utilize a single
    combustion chamber without restriction of flow of combustion gases there
    between.  The engine of that subclass may include two oppositely moving
    pistons in a single cylinder.


CLS 123/52.3
TXT Four-stroke cycle:

    Multiple cylinder engine under subclass 52.2 wherein the pistons in the
    working cylinders operate on a four-stroke cycle.


CLS 123/52.4
TXT Multiple crankshafts:

    Multiple cylinder engine under subclass 52.3 including two output shafts,
    the first having at least one crank thereon which is drivingly connected to
    a first piston so as to convert the reciprocating motion of the piston into
    rotary motion of the first output shaft, and the second  output shaft
    having at least one crank thereon which is drivingly connected to a second
    piston so as to convert the reciprocating motion of that piston into rotary
    motion of the second output shaft.


CLS 123/52.5
TXT Two-stroke cycle:

    Multiple cylinder engine under subclass 52.2 wherein the pistons in the
    working cylinders operate on a two-stroke cycle.


CLS 123/52.6
TXT Multiple crankshafts:

    Multiple cylinder engine under subclass 52.5 including two output shafts,
    the first having at least one crank thereon which is drivingly connected to
    a first piston so as to convert the reciprocating motion of the piston into
    rotary motion of the first output shaft, and the second  output shaft
    having at least one crank thereon which is drivingly connected to a second
    piston so as to convert the reciprocating motion of that piston into rotary
    motion of the second output shaft.


CLS 123/53.1
TXT Cylinder offset from crankshaft axis:

    Multiple cylinder engine under subclass 52.1 including a crankshaft that
    turns about an axis extending generally perpendicularly to a plane passing
    through the axis of at least one cylinder the piston of which is drivingly
    connected thereto, wherein the cylinder axis, if extended, would not
    intersect the crankshaft axis.


CLS 123/53.2
TXT Multiple crankshafts:

    Multiple cylinder engine under subclass 53.1 including two output shafts,
    the first having at least one crank thereon which is drivingly connected to
    a first piston so as to convert the reciprocating motion of the piston into
    rotary motion of the first output shaft, and the second  output shaft
    having at least one crank thereon which is drivingly connected to a second
    piston so as to convert the reciprocating motion of that piston into rotary
    motion of the second output shaft.


CLS 123/53.3
TXT Cylinders opposite:

    Multiple cylinder engine under subclass 53.1 wherein the axes of a first
    and a second cylinder are spaced from each other by 180o about the
    crankshaft.


CLS 123/53.4
TXT Two-stroke cycle:

    Multiple cylinder engine under subclass 53.3 wherein the pistons in the
    working cylinders operate on a two-stroke cycle.


CLS 123/53.5
TXT Crankshaft between parallel cylinders:

    Multiple cylinder engine under subclass 53.1 wherein the axes of two
    cylinders are parallel and the axis of the crankshaft extends between the
    parallel axes.


CLS 123/53.6
TXT Cylinders having opposing heads:

    Multiple cylinder engine under subclass 52.1 wherein a first and a second
    cylinder having axes collinear and have the combustion chamber ends of the
    cylinders facing one another along their axes.


CLS 123/54.1
TXT Cylinders radiating:

    Multiple cylinder engine under subclass 52.1 including a rotary output
    shaft that turns about an axis intersected by and extending generally
    perpendicular to the axes of the first and second cylinders, the pistons of
    which are drivingly connected to the output shaft, wherein the cylinder
    axes are not parallel to each other.

    (1)     Note.  The axes of the first and second cylinders may intersect the
    rotational axis of the crankshaft at the same or at different points along
    the axis of the crankshaft.

    (2)     Note.  When viewed as a cross-section normal to the crankshaft
    axis, the first and second cylinder axes intersect at the point defining
    the crankshaft axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 148 for a plurality of
    radially disposed cylinders for an expansible chamber device that is not an
    internal combustion engine.


CLS 123/54.2
TXT Star:

    Multiple cylinder engine under subclass 54.1 wherein at least three
    cylinders are equally spaced about the centrally disposed rotary output
    shaft.


CLS 123/54.3
TXT Cam on rotary output shaft:

    Multiple cylinder engine under subclass 54.2 wherein the rotary output
    shaft includes a disk or a drum with an irregularly shaped surface which is
    engaged by a follower linkage drivingly connected to the pistons to convert
    the reciprocating motion of the pistons into rotary motion of the output
    shaft.


CLS 123/54.4
TXT ``V" type:

    Multiple cylinder engine under subclass 54.1 wherein first and second
    radially extending banks of cylinders are spaced apart by an angle of less
    than 180o.


CLS 123/54.5
TXT Odd number of cylinders:

    Multiple cylinder engine under subclass 54.4 wherein the total number of
    cylinders is not evenly divisible by two.


CLS 123/54.6
TXT Six cylinder:

    Multiple cylinder engine under subclass 54.4 including six or more
    cylinders.


CLS 123/54.7
TXT Eight cylinder:

    Multiple cylinder under subclass 54.6 including eight or more cylinders.


CLS 123/54.8
TXT More than eight cylinder:

    Multiple cylinder engine under subclass 54.7 wherein the total number of
    cylinders is an even number greater than eight.


CLS 123/55.1
TXT Semi-radial:

    Multiple cylinder engine under subclass 54.1 including at least three
    cylinders radially disposed and unequally spaced about the centrally
    disposed, rotary output shaft.


CLS 123/55.2
TXT Cylinders opposite:

    Multiple cylinder engine under subclass 54.1 wherein the first and second
    cylinder axes are spaced from each other 180o about the crankshaft axis.


CLS 123/55.3
TXT Cam on rotary output shaft:

    Multiple cylinder engine under subclass 55.2 wherein the rotary output
    shaft includes a disk or a drum with an irregularly shaped surface which is
    engaged by a follower linkage drivingly connected to the pistons to convert
    the reciprocating motion of the pistons into rotary motion of the output
    shaft.


CLS 123/55.4
TXT Four-stroke cycle:

    Multiple cylinder engine under subclass 55.2 wherein the pistons in the
    cylinders operate on a four-stroke cycle.


CLS 123/55.5
TXT Cylinders opposite and aligned:

    Multiple cylinder engine under subclass 55.4 wherein the axes of a first
    and a second cylinder are spaced from each other by 180o about the
    crankshaft and wherein the first and second cylinder axes are collinear.


CLS 123/55.6
TXT Two-stroke cycle:

    Multiple cylinder engine under subclass 55.2 wherein the pistons in the
    working cylinders operate on a two-stroke cycle.


CLS 123/55.7
TXT Cylinders opposite and aligned:

    Multiple cylinder engine under subclass 55.6 wherein the axes of a first
    and a second cylinder are spaced from each other by 180o about the
    crankshaft and wherein the first and second cylinder axes are collinear.


CLS 123/56.1
TXT Having rotary output shaft parallel to cylinders:

    Multiple cylinder engine under subclass 52.1 including an elongated rotary
    output shaft intended to turn about its axis, in which the cylinder axes
    are parallel with the rotary output shaft axis.

    (1)     Note.  In the engine of this subclass, the cylinder axes are
    usually at equal radial distances from the axis of the main shaft and are
    arranged around said shaft at equal angular intervals.


CLS 123/56.2
TXT Cam on rotary output shaft:

    Multiple cylinder engine under subclass 56.1 wherein the rotary output
    shaft includes a disk or a drum with an irregularly shaped surface which is
    engaged by a follower linkage drivingly connected to the pistons to convert
    the reciprocating motion of the pistons into rotary motion of the output
    shaft.


CLS 123/56.3
TXT Swash plate type:

    Multiple cylinder engine under subclass 56.2 wherein the cam comprises:

    (a)     a disk-shaped plate rigidly connected on an incline to the output
    shaft, the pistons engage the periphery of the disk-shaped plate with a
    follower linkage thereby converting reciprocating motion of the pistons to
    rotary motion of the output shaft; or,

    (b)     a disk-shaped plate journaled to an incline to the output shaft
    such that the plate wobbles without rotating about the output shaft, the
    pistons are linked to the periphery of the disk-shaped plate by swivel
    joints so that the reciprocating movement of the pistons produces a
    wobbling motion of the disk-shaped plate turning the inclined crank
    producing rotation motion of the output shaft.


CLS 123/56.4
TXT Single bank of cylinders:

    Multiple cylinder engine under subclass 56.3 wherein the cylinders are
    oriented in the same direction and are configured in one group equally
    spaced from and encircling the output shaft.


CLS 123/56.5
TXT Motion converting means between two banks of cylinders:

    Multiple cylinder engine under subclass 56.3 wherein the cylinders are
    separated into two groups, one on either side of the swash plate, each
    group is oriented in one direction and encircles the output shaft at equal
    spacing.


CLS 123/56.6
TXT Multiple swash plate drive:

    Multiple cylinder engine under subclass 56.3 wherein the rotary output
    shaft includes at least two disk-shaped plates inclined to the axis of the
    output shaft and at least one piston is linked to the periphery of each of
    the disk-shaped plates such that the reciprocating motion of the pistons is
    converted into rotary motion of the output shaft.


CLS 123/56.7
TXT Single bank of cylinders:

    Multiple cylinder engine under subclass 56.2 wherein the cylinders are
    oriented in the same direction and are configured in one group equally
    spaced from and encircling the output shaft.


CLS 123/56.8
TXT Motion converting means between two banks of cylinders:

    Multiple cylinder engine under subclass 56.2 wherein the cylinders are
    separated into two groups, one on either side of the swash plate, each
    group is oriented in one direction and encircles the output shaft at equal
    spacing.


CLS 123/56.9
TXT Multiple cam drives:

    Multiple cylinder engine under subclass 56.2 wherein the rotary output
    shaft includes at least two contoured disks or drums and at least one
    piston linked by a follower arrangement to the contoured surface of the
    cam, so that reciprocating motion of the pistons is converted into rotary
    motion of the output shaft.


CLS 123/57.1
TXT Shaft rotates through piston:

    Multiple cylinder engine under subclass 56.1 wherein the rotary output
    shaft extends through and is rotatable in a longitudinal bore in the piston.


CLS 123/58.1
TXT Cylinders in-line:

    Multiple cylinder engine under subclass 52.1 including a crankshaft that
    turns about an axis in the same plane with the axis of first and second
    cylinders, the pistons of which are drivingly connected to the crankshaft.


CLS 123/58.2
TXT Locked pistons:

    Multiple cylinder engine under subclass 58.1 wherein the pistons of the
    first and second cylinders are immovably secured to each other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 150 and 151+ for coaxially
    disposed cylinders for an expansible chamber device.


CLS 123/58.3
TXT Two-stroke cycle:

    Multiple cylinder engine under subclass 58.2 wherein the pistons in the
    working cylinders operate on a two-stroke cycle.


CLS 123/58.4
TXT Lengthwise charging:

    Multiple cylinder engine under subclass 58.1 including means for charging
    the working cylinders, whereby the charging travels generally along the
    length of the working cylinders.


CLS 123/58.5
TXT Step piston:

    Multiple cylinder engine under subclass 58.4 including at least one piston
    configured with at least two different cross sections along the piston's
    length, the configured piston is received in a cylinder with at least two
    different diameter bores.


CLS 123/58.6
TXT Step piston:

    Multiple cylinder engine under subclass 58.1 including at least one piston
    configured with at least two different cross sections along the piston's
    length, the configured piston is received in a cylinder with at least two
    different diameter bores.


CLS 123/58.7
TXT Cylinder supercharged by pressure pulse of released exhaust gases:

    Multiple cylinder engine under subclass 58.1 wherein prior to opening of a
    first cylinder's exhaust port, the high pressure exhaust gases of the first
    cylinder are released to push additional charge into a second cylinder
    which has already inlet charged at atmospheric pressure.


CLS 123/58.8
TXT Exhaust to next cylinder ready to fire:

    Multiple cylinder engine under subclass 58.1 wherein exhaust from a first
    cylinder is released into a second cylinder to combust the residual fuel in
    the exhaust.


CLS 123/58.9
TXT Oscillating or reciprocating, nonpoppet valve:

    Multiple cylinder engine under subclass 58.1 including a valve mechanism
    which moves to-and-fro excluding poppet valves.

    (1)     Note.  A poppet valve consists of a valve member including a
    rodlike portion (i.e., stem) connected to the center of a disk-shaped
    portion, said valve member is resiliently biased into sealing engagement
    with the rim of a hole (i.e., the seat)


CLS 123/59.1
TXT Rotary valve:

    Multiple cylinder engine under subclass 58.1 including a rotating valve
    mechanism.


CLS 123/59.2
TXT Tapered:

    Multiple cylinder engine under subclass 59.1 wherein the outer surface of
    revolution of the rotary valve includes at least one conical segment, the
    conical segment is received in a conical bore thereby sealing the conical
    portion of the rotary valve.


CLS 123/59.3
TXT Sleeve valve:

    Multiple cylinder engine under subclass 59.1 wherein the rotary valve
    consists of a hollow, thin walled surface of revolution lining or in
    surrounding relationship to at least a portion of a working cylinder.


CLS 123/59.4
TXT Disc valve:

    Multiple cylinder engine under subclass 59.1 wherein the rotary valve has
    one or more thin, circular member(s) with at least one flat surface
    perpendicular to the axis of rotation.


CLS 123/59.5
TXT Plural carburetors:

    Multiple cylinder engine under subclass 58.1 including at least two devices
    for mixing air and fuel external to the combustion chamber.


CLS 123/59.6
TXT Multiple crankshafts:

    Multiple cylinder engine under subclass 58.1 including at least two output
    shafts, each including one or more cranks, wherein the pistons are at the
    working cylinder and are drivingly connected to the cranks, thereby
    converting the reciprocating motion of the pistons into rotary motion of
    the output shaft.


CLS 123/59.7
TXT Two-stroke cycle:

    Multiple cylinder engine under subclass 58.1 wherein the pistons in the
    working cylinders operate on a two-stroke cycle.


CLS 123/60.1
TXT Locked annular piston:

    Multiple cylinder engine under subclass 52.1 including a first piston of
    circular cross section and including a second piston that is hollow and
    concentric about the first piston, wherein the two pistons are secured to
    each other so that they move together.


CLS 123/61
TXT Internal-combustion engines working on a two-stroke cycle and in which
    successive burned charges act upon opposite sides of a single piston
    reciprocating in a single cylinder, whereby the working piston is impelled
    alternately in each direction. Includes two-cycle engines operating upon
    recompression and also two-cycle engines operating upon pump-compression
    cycles, both of which terms are more fully explained hereinafter.  The
    working cylinder in the engines in this subclass is of simple cylindrical
    form, and the supply-pump for the combustible mixture is wholly separate
    and distinct from the working cylinder and is not considered in this
    definition.


CLS 123/62
TXT Internal-combustion engines working on a two stroke cycle and in which
    successive combustible charges after ignition thereof act so as to impel
    the working piston alternately in each direction, the elements of the
    engine and of the pump for supplying the combustible mixture thereto being
    all contained within a single cylinder structure and so intimately
    associated as to make mechanical separation of the two sets of elements
    impossible without defeating the operation of the engine as a whole.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66,     for combined pump and motor cylinder.


CLS 123/63
TXT Internal-combustion engines working on the four-stroke cycle, hereinafter
    defined, in which successive burned charges act alternately upon opposite
    sides of a single reciprocating piston moving in a single cylinder.


CLS 123/64
TXT Internal-combustion engines of the reciprocating type working upon a
    modified four-stroke cycle with recompression in the working cylinder, as
    defined in the definition of subclass 75, below, and in which air unmixed
    with combustible is drawn into and expelled from the working cylinder one
    or more times upon distinct suction and expelling strokes of the working
    piston after the end of the exhaust-stroke and before the beginning of the
    suction-stroke of the normal four-stroke cycle, whereby a more complete
    removal of the burned gases, from the working cylinder and
    combustion-chamber is secured.


CLS 123/65
TXT Internal-combustion engines having a single single-acting working cylinder
    and a single working piston reciprocating therein and having suitable means
    for supplying a combustible mixture thereto, such engines working on the
    two-stroke cycle and not coming within the definitions of the following
    subclasses of two-cycle engines. Internal-combustion engines are said to
    work upon the two-stroke cycle when a combustible mixture under pressure
    materially greater than atmospheric pressure is burned and the resulting
    products of combustion allowed to expand within the working cylinder upon
    every second stroke of the working piston of the engine.  The means for
    supplying  the combustible mixture to the engine ordinarily includes a pump
    operated by and in unison therewith, which pump and engine are generally
    inseparable without destroying the identity of the device as a whole.  In
    the engines occurring in two-cycle subclasses a combustible mixture is
    supplied to the working cylinder and burned therein under pressure upon
    each second stroke of the working piston, and such mixture after having
    been supplied to the working cylinder at a pressure not necessarily greater
    than is sufficient to insure its flow there into may be recompressed
    therein by the working piston or by the working and pump pistons acting
    together before ignition and the beginning of the working stroke, which is
    the more ordinary mode of operation, or the mixture may be supplied to the
    working cylinder after the beginning of the working stroke and at the
    maximum pressure under which it exists before ignition, in which case it is
    not recompressed in the working cylinder before ignition, but is ignited
    either at constant pressure as it enters or at constant volume after the
    whole charge has been supplied.  Two-cycle engines coming within the latter
    of the above cases are classified as two-cycle pump-compression engines.
    The combustible mixture is ordinarily supplied to the working cylinder by a
    pump, and in the first of the above cases, while the charge may be
    compressed to a considerable degree by the supply-pump, such charge enters
    the working cylinder only against the pressure of the atmosphere and after
    having entered must exist therein at or substantially at atmospheric
    pressure, and the initial compression of the charge upon which the
    efficiency of an internal-combustion engine so largely depends is produced
    wholly by recompression of the charge in the working cylinder while in the
    second case such initial pressure is produced wholly by the supply-pump
    which compresses the charge directly to the maximum pressure at which it
    exists before ignition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for double-acting two-cycle engines having a separate and distinct
    supply pump.

    62,     for double-acting two-cycle engines in which the engine and supply
    pump elements are contained within a single cylinder structure.


CLS 123/66
TXT Two-cycle internal-combustion engines in which separate and distinct
    working and pumping pistons operate in a single cylinder a portion of which
    together with the working piston, forms a motor, while another portion of
    such cylinder, together with the pumping-piston forms a pump for supplying
    a fresh charge to the working cylinder.  The supply-pump is operated by and
    in unison with the engine, and as the supply-pump and motor elements of the
    engine are all contained in a single cylinder the two sets of elements are
    necessarily inseparable without wholly defeating the operation of the
    engine in the manner contemplated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for combined pump and motor cylinder.


CLS 123/67
TXT Two-cycle internal-combustion engines in which the air pumped by a single
    supply-pump operated by and in unison with the engine is separated or
    divided into two separate and distinct streams, one of which passes to the
    working cylinder unchanged, while the other receives a supply of
    hydrocarbon on its way to the working cylinder. The stream to which no
    hydrocarbon is supplied ordinarily acts to more or less thoroughly expel
    the burned gases from the working cylinder prior to the formation of a new
    charge therein, and the two streams frequently reunite as they enter the
    working cylinder or shortly before entry thereinto.


CLS 123/68
TXT Two-cycle internal-combustion engines in which the combustible mixture, or
    both the constituents thereof, is supplied to the working cylinder under
    pressure materially greater than atmospheric pressure, such supply
    beginning at the beginning of the working stroke and continuing for a
    determinate portion thereof, the combustible mixture being ignited either
    at constant pressure as it enters the cylinder or at constant volume after
    the whole charge has been supplied thereto, in either case without
    recompression in the working cylinder.  The combustible mixture or the
    constituents thereof may be supplied directly to the working cylinder
    without preliminary storage or may be supplied to suitable reservoirs
    interposed between the compressing means and the working cylinder and
    within which a considerable volume of combustible mixture, or its
    constituents, is stored.  Engines in this subclass in which ignition takes
    place after the whole charge has been supplied to the working cylinder
    differ from those in subclass 39 which work upon a two-stroke cycle, only
    in the degree of compression to which the charge is subjected before
    ignition, and as some of the engines in the subclass above mentioned are
    provided with a supply-pump for forcing air through a charge-forming device
    to the cylinder of the engine the combustible mixture thus produced is
    necessarily supplied to such engines under some pressure.  However, where
    the structure and operation of the device as a whole clearly indicate that
    the pressure under which the charge is supplied is so slight as to be
    sufficient only to insure its flow into the working cylinder the engine is
    classified in subclass 39.  In engines working on the two-cycle
    pump-compression cycle the whole charge properly mixed to form a
    combustible mixture may be compressed by a single pump or the air and
    combustible may be compressed by separate pumps to be mixed on their way to
    the working cylinder or after such constituents have entered thereinto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for double-acting engines working on the two-stroke
    pump-compression cycle.

    495+    and 590+, for oil-engines operating upon a cycle similar to that
    defined by this definition.


CLS 123/69
TXT Two-cycle recompression internal-combustion engines in which air and
    combustible in the gaseous form are supplied to the working cylinder or
    combustion-chamber by separate and distinct pumps, each operated by and in
    unison with the engine, one at least of the constituents being recompressed
    within the working cylinder before the ignition of the combustible mixture.
    The air is ordinarily supplied to the working cylinder of the engine before
    the gas, and such air is frequently designed to more or less completely
    scavenge the working cylinder. In such cases a part of the air thus
    supplied remains in the cylinder to form with the gas subsequently supplied
    thereto the next following charge.  The air and gas may, however, enter the
    working cylinder simultaneously.  The air and gas are ordinarily intermixed
    within the working cylinder before the completion of the compression
    stroke, so that the complete charge is recompressed in the working cylinder
    before the ignition thereof and the beginning of the working stroke; but
    this subclass also includes engines in which one only of the constituents
    of the charge is recompressed in the working cylinder, in which case the
    other is supplied thereto under pressure during the working stroke.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61      and 68, for other internal-combustion engines having separate pumps
    for air and gas.

    590+,   for oil-engines having one pump for supplying air to the working
    cylinder thereof and another for supplying oil and air, the oil being
    frequently atomized by the air, but not vaporized prior to its entry into
    the working cylinder.


CLS 123/70
TXT Two-cycle recompression internal-combustion engines in which the working
    cylinder and the pump for supplying a combustible mixture thereto are
    located adjacent each other, axial lines through the pump and motor
    cylinders being parallel and perpendicular to the axis of the main shaft of
    the engine and both lying in a plane passing through the axis of the main
    shaft. In engines in this subclass the supply-pump is inseparable from the
    engine and may draw both air and hydrocarbon into the cylinder thereof upon
    the suction-stroke, so that the pump operated upon the whole charge to be
    supplied to the working cylinder, or the supply-pump may draw in and
    discharge air only, in which case the combustible constituent of the charge
    is supplied to the air during its passage to the working cylinder.

    SEARCH  THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for pump compression.


CLS 123/71
TXT Two-cycle recompression internal-combustion engines in which the axes of
    the working and pump cylinders form a single straight line which, if
    extended, would intersect the main shaft of the engine at right angles, the
    cylinders abutting and the working piston being prolonged and extended into
    the pump-cylinder and enlarged therein to form the pumping-piston, thereby
    forming an annular pumping-chamber which surrounds the extension of the
    working piston.  From the above it follows that the working and pump
    pistons form a single rigid structure. In engines in this subclass
    compression of the charge prior to the ignition thereof is effected by the
    joint action of the pump and motor pistons.  The arrangement above defined
    may be reversed, in which case the cylinder above described as the working
    cylinder becomes the cylinder of the supply-pump and the annular
    pumping-chamber becomes the working chamber.

    (1)     Note.  The supply-pump is inseparable from the engine and
    ordinarily operated upon the whole charge, as in engines in subclass 70.


CLS 123/72
TXT Two-cycle recompression internal-combustion engines in which the working
    piston and the pump for supplying a combustible mixture thereto are
    arranged at an angle to each other, axial lines through the pump and motor
    cylinders being perpendicular to the main shaft of the engine and lying in
    planes inclined to each other, which pass through the said main shaft.  The
    axes of the pump and working cylinder also ordinarily lie in a single plane
    perpendicular to the main shaft of the engine.

    (1)     Note.  The supply-pump is inseparable from the engine and
    ordinarily operated upon the whole charge, as in engines in subclass 70.


CLS 123/73
TXT Two-cycle recompression internal-combustion engines having a cylinder
    closed at one end and an air-tight casing inclosing the connecting-rod and
    crank and forming a closed crank-case in open communication with the other
    end of the cylinder and a piston reciprocating in the said cylinder, such
    piston performing at the same time the functions of both a working piston
    and a piston for the pump which supplies a fresh charge to the engine, one
    end of the cylinder and the corresponding end of the piston constituting
    the working cylinder and piston, while the other or rear end of the piston
    and the corresponding end of the cylinder, together with a closed
    crank-case form a pump for introducing a new charge into the working end of
    the cylinder.  In engines in this subclass the supply or exhaust ports, or
    both, are generally formed in the cylinder-wall and are then controlled by
    the piston as it reciprocates, the piston forming a closure for such ports
    when it is required that they be kept closed.


CLS 123/74
TXT Two-cycle recompression internal-combustion engines having a cylinder
    closed at both ends and a piston reciprocating therein, such piston
    performing at the same time the functions of both a working piston and a
    piston for the pump which supplies a fresh charge to the engine, one end of
    the cylinder and the corresponding end of the piston constituting the
    working cylinder and piston, while the other or rear end of the piston and
    the corresponding end of the cylinder form a pump for introducing a new
    charge into the working end of the cylinder.  In engines in this subclass
    the supply or exhaust ports, or both, are generally formed in the
    cylinder-wall and are then controlled by the piston as it reciprocates, the
    piston forming a closure for such ports when it is required that they be
    kept closed.


CLS 123/76
TXT Four-cycle internal combustion engines in which a volume of air unmixed
    with combustible is caused to pass through the working cylinder of the
    engine or the combustion-chamber thereof at any time between the end of the
    working stroke and the beginning of the next following charging stroke,
    whereby to secure a more complete removal of the burned gases of the
    previous charge from the cylinder and combustion-chamber, so that the
    successive charges will be unmixed with residual burned gases from a
    previous charge.  The scavenging action may take place before or after or
    be simultaneous with the regular exhaust stroke of the engine.  In the
    engines in this subclass a complete charge comprising all the ingredients
    necessary to form a combustible mixture enters the cylinder upon distinct
    charging stroke, the air supplied for the purpose of scavenging, not being
    necessary to form or complete the following charge.

    (1)     Note.  Engines frequently described as scavenging engines and in
    which a volume of air is caused to pass through the working cylinder and
    combustion-chamber for the same purpose as in this subclass, but in which a
    portion of such air is necessary to complete the following charge, are
    classified in this class, subclass 69. In subclass 76, the engine begins
    its suction-stroke with air in the clearance space only, while in engines
    in subclass 69, the engine begins it compression-stroke with a considerable
    volume of air in the cylinder thereof, to which a combustible is supplied
    to complete the charge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64      and 69, for six-cycle two-cycle Separate Air and Gas Pumps.


CLS 123/77
TXT Four-cycle internal-combustion engines in which a four-stroke cycle is
    carried out during a single revolution of the main shaft of the engine.
    For the purposes of this definition of continuous movement of the working
    piston in one direction is considered as two strokes and the sequence of
    the strokes is varied from that present in engines working on the ordinary
    four-stroke cycle, the working stroke being followed by the charging stroke
    as the piston moves in one direction and the exhaust and compression
    strokes taking place in the order named as the piston moves in the reverse
    direction.

    (1)     Note.  For engines working on this cycle, but having two or more
    working cylinders, see this class, subclass 53.

    (2)     Note.  For other engines in which the four strokes comprising a
    single cycle occur during a single revolution of the main shaft of the
    engine, see this class, subclass 78.


CLS 123/78
TXT Four-cycle internal-combustion engines provided with means whereby the
    clearance-space is varied in unison with the movement of the working
    piston, being as far as practicable eliminated at the end of the
    exhaust-stroke and greatest at the end of the compression-stroke, whereby
    to secure a more complete removal of the residual burned gases from the
    cylinder and combustion-chamber of the engine.  The clearance-space is
    ordinarily varied by causing the strokes of the working piston to vary in
    length, and the four strokes required for a complete cycle are frequently
    performed during a single revolution of the main shaft of the engine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 84 for an expansible chamber
    device having a resilient means interposed between the working member and a
    relatively movable power transmission element.


CLS 123/79
TXT Four-cycle internal-combustion engines in which the combustible charge
    enters the working cylinder and after ignition and expansion the burned
    gases are exhausted therefrom through a single passage controlled by a
    single positively-operated poppet or equivalent valve, said common passage
    being provided with means for directing the flow of the combustible charge
    from a supply-conduit to the common conduit and for directing the flow of
    the exhaust-gases from such common conduit into the exhaust-conduit leading
    from the engine.  The directing means ordinarily comprise a valve or valves
    operated either positively or by the suction and pressure alternately
    existing in the common conduit, and such means are protected from the
    pressure of the gases within the cylinder by the single valve.


CLS 123/80
TXT Four-cycle internal-combustion engines provided with a rotating valve for
    directly controlling the supply of combustible mixture to the working
    cylinder or the exhaust of burned gases therefrom and means operated by the
    engine for rotating the said valve to secure the continuous and automatic
    operation of the engine.  The rotating valve in the engines in this
    subclass ordinarily control both the supply to and the exhaust from the
    engine and frequently also a passage used in connection with a flame or
    incandescent igniting device, and the valve is so designed with reference
    to the particular engine with which it is used or with reference to other
    elements of the engine as to be incapable of convenient separation
    therefrom or of use with other engines.

    (1)     Note.  For rotating valves capable of general use with
    internal-combustion engines, the structure of the engine or of elements
    thereof other than the valve not being involved, see this class, subclass
    190.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144     and 151, for flame and combined Sparker and Valve.


CLS 123/81
TXT Four-cycle internal-combustion engines provided with an oscillating valve
    for directly controlling the supply of combustible mixture to the working
    cylinder or the exhaust of burned gases therefrom and means operated by the
    engine for oscillating the said valve to secure the continuous and
    automatic operation of the engine.  The oscillating valve ordinarily
    controls both the supply to and the exhaust from the engine and frequently
    also a passage used in connection with a flame or incandescent igniting
    device, and the valve is so designed with reference to the particular
    engine with which it is used or with reference to other elements of the
    engine as to be incapable of convenient separation therefrom or of use with
    other engines.

    (1)     Note.  For oscillating valves capable of general use with
    internal-combustion engines, the structure of the engine or of elements
    thereof other than the valve not being involved, see this class, subclass
    190.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144,    for flame.


CLS 123/82
TXT Four-cycle internal-combustion engines having a rotating shaft driven from
    the crank-shaft thereof and extending parallel to the axis of the working
    cylinder and ordinarily along the side of the engine, said shaft being
    provided with means, generally in the form of cams, for operating in the
    proper order one or more of the valves, the igniting device or other
    element necessary for the continuous automatic operation of the engine, and
    mechanism including a rotating shaft located as above set forth and
    designed to operate the valves or other elements of the engine, but not
    shown in connection with all the elements necessary to form a complete and
    operative engine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for cylinders tandem.


CLS 123/83
TXT Four-cycle internal-combustion engines having a rotating shaft driven from
    the crank-shaft thereof and extending transverse to the axis of the working
    cylinder and clear across the engine, said shaft being provided with means,
    generally in the form of cams, for operating in the proper order one or
    more of the valves, the igniting device, or other element necessary for the
    continuous automatic operation of the engine, and mechanism including a
    rotating shaft located as above set forth and designed to operate the
    valves or other elements of the engine, but not shown in connection with
    all the elements necessary to form a complete and operative engine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     for engines coming within the terms of this definition, except that
    the transverse shaft does not extend clear across the engine, the axis of
    such shaft lying in a plane passing through the axis of the working
    cylinder.


CLS 123/84
TXT Four-cycle internal-combustion engines having the supply and exhaust valves
    thereof located adjacent and in a single valve-chamber, the axes of such
    valves being parallel with the axial line of the working cylinder and both
    valves being positively operated, and reciprocating rods extending
    longitudinally of the engine and operated by and in unison therewith for
    operating such valves in the proper order to secure the continuous
    automatic operation of the engine, and similar arrangements of valves and
    operating means therefor but not shown in connection with all the elements
    necessary to form a complete and operative engine.


CLS 123/85
TXT Four-cycle internal-combustion engines having the supply and exhaust valves
    thereof arranged in alinement and in a single valve-chamber, the common
    axis of such valves being parallel with the axial line of the working
    cylinder, and a reciprocating rod or rods extending longitudinally of the
    engine and operated by and in unison therewith for operating one or both
    such valves in the proper order to secure the continuous automatic
    operation of the engine, and similar arrangements of valves and operating
    means therefor, but not shown in connection with all the elements necessary
    to form a complete and operative engine.


CLS 123/86
TXT Four-cycle internal-combustion engines having the supply and exhaust valves
    thereof located in separate valve-chambers upon opposite sides of the
    working cylinder, the axes of such valves being parallel with the axial
    line of the working cylinder and lying in a plane passing therethrough and
    through the axis of the crank-shaft, and a reciprocating rod or rods
    extending longitudinally of the engine and operated by and in unison
    therewith for operating one or both of such valves in the proper order to
    secure the continuous automatic operation of the engine, and similar
    arrangements of valves and operating means therefor, but not shown in
    connection with all the elements necessary to form a complete and operative
    engine.


CLS 123/87
TXT Four-cycle internal-combustion engines having the supply or exhaust valve
    thereof, or both, located in the cylinder head and disposed longitudinally
    to the working cylinder, the movement of such valve or valves being along a
    line parallel with the axial line of the working cylinder, a lever disposed
    transverse to the working cylinder and a reciprocating operating member
    operated by and in unison with the engine for operating such valve or
    valves in the proper order to secure continuous operation thereof, and
    similar arrangements of valves and operating means therefor, but not shown
    in connection with all the elements necessary to form a complete and
    operative engine.


CLS 123/88
TXT Four-cycle internal-combustion engines having the supply or exhaust valve
    thereof, or both, disposed transverse to the working cylinder, the axis of
    such valve or valves lying in a plane perpendicular to the axial line of
    the working cylinder, and a lever extending longitudinally of the engine
    and operated by and in unison therewith for operating the valve or valves
    aforesaid in the proper order to secure the continuous automatic operation
    thereof, and similar arrangements of valves and operating means therefor,
    but not shown in connection with all the elements necessary to form a
    complete and operative engine.


CLS 123/89
TXT Four-cycle internal-combustion engines having the supply or exhaust valve
    thereof, or both, disposed transverse to the working cylinder, the axis of
    such valve or valves lying in a plane perpendicular to the axial line of
    the working cylinder, and a bell-crank lever operated by and in unison with
    the engine for operating such valve or valves in the proper order to secure
    the continuous automatic operation thereof, and similar arrangements of
    valves and operating means therefor, but not shown in connection with all
    the elements necessary to form a complete and operative engine.


CLS 123/90.1
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to mechanism
    intermediate the crank-shaft and the poppet-type intake or exhaust valve of
    an internal combustion engine for operating at least one such valve.

    (1)     Note.  If the mechanism operates a reciprocating valve of a type
    other than a poppet valve, a body of art of such mechanism--as well as the
    valve that it operates--has evolved in subclass 188.

    (2)     Note.  The majority of the valve operating devices of this subclass
    are disclosed in connection with four-stroke-cycle engines; however, the
    devices occurring herein are not dependent upon the mode of operation of
    the engine, and are ordinarily capable of operating a poppet-type valve of
    an engine functioning upon a cycle of some other number of strokes.  Valve
    operating mechanism especially designed for use with an engine of a
    particular form or mode of operation will be found in the subclasses
    pertaining to that engine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for valve operating mechanism rendering the engine reversible.

    64,     for valve operating mechanism peculiar to a six-cycle engine.

    65+,    for valve operating mechanism peculiar to a two-cycle engine.

    152,    for valve operating mechanism combined with sparker operating
    mechanism.

    179+,   (particularly subclass 182), for valve operating mechanism related
    to facilitating engine starting.

    188,    for valve operating mechanism peculiar to reciprocating valves not
    of the poppet-type; see (1) Note above.

    311+,   (particularly subclasses 79 through 89), for valve operating
    mechanism peculiar to a four-cycle engine.

    319+,   for valve operating mechanism peculiar to the regulation of engine
    speed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, appropriate subclasses for the
    actuation of valves of more general utility.


CLS 123/90.11
TXT Device under subclass 90.1 wherein electrical energy provides the source of
    power for at least one direction of movement of the valve.


CLS 123/90.12
TXT Device under subclass 90.1 wherein a liquid under pressure provides an
    essential link in the valve operating mechanism for at least one direction
    of movement of the valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 12+, for a valve of more
    general utility which is opened or closed by fluid pressure.


CLS 123/90.13
TXT Device under subclass 90.12 wherein the liquid under pressure is cyclically
    delivered through a manifold by an engine-driven distributor.


CLS 123/90.14
TXT Device under subclass 90.1 wherein positive or negative pressure of a gas
    provides the source of power for at least one direction of movement of the
    valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90.32,  for a pneumatically-controlled interruption in the drive train of a
    valve that is not pneumatically actuated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 12+, for a valve of more
    general utility which is opened or closed by fluid pressure.


CLS 123/90.15
TXT Device under subclass 90.1 wherein means provided to vary the time, extent
    of duration of valve opening relative to the operating cycle of the engine.

    (1)     Note.  In the art herein the timing is varied to maximize engine
    efficiency, whereas in that of subclasses 319+ it is varied for the purpose
    of speed regulation or braking.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, subclasses 1+ for a speed responsive device for adjusting
    the relative rotational position of coupled members.


CLS 123/90.16
TXT Device under subclass 90.15 wherein the means is located between a cam and
    the valve actuated thereby and serves to modify the operational
    relationship of the one to the other.


CLS 123/90.17
TXT Device under subclass 90.15 wherein the means varies the structure or the
    axial disposition of a camshaft or its cam.


CLS 123/90.18
TXT Device under subclass 90.17 wherein the means provides for displacing the
    camshaft in the direction of its longitudinal axis, thereby bringing a
    different cam contour into play.


CLS 123/90.19
TXT Device under subclass 90.1 wherein means is provided to compensate for
    structural deformation in an element of the operating mechanism occurring
    as a result of a change in the ambient temperature of the element.


CLS 123/90.2
TXT Device under subclass 90.1 wherein means in the form of a groove, or its
    equivalent, in the outer surface of a revolving drum is provided to
    displace the cam follower both axially and radially of the camshaft.

    (1)     Note.  The groove is usually in the form of two, intersecting
    loops, of different effective elevations, and the effect of the axial
    displacement of the follower from one loop to the other is to impart a
    valve-actuating movement to it upon every other revolution of the camshaft.

    (2)     Note.  In a device of this nature, the crankshaft frequently serves
    as the camshaft.


CLS 123/90.21
TXT Device under subclass 90.1 wherein means is provided, usually in the form
    of lobes perpendicular to the principal surface of a rotating disc, to
    displace a cam follower in a direction parallel to the longitudinal axis of
    the camshaft.


CLS 123/90.22
TXT Device under subclass 90.1 wherein one actuating element (cam) operates one
    or more other elements (followers, rods, rockers, etc.), in the valve
    trains of two or more valves of a cylinder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90.4,   for plural valves operated by a single train having a forked or
    branched rocker.


CLS 123/90.23
TXT Device under subclass 90.22 wherein the two or more valves control the
    intake and the exhaust passages of the cylinder.


CLS 123/90.24
TXT Device under subclass 90.1 wherein means is provided to mechanically drive
    the valve in its closing (i.e., seating) direction of travel.

    (1)     Note.  While correctly identified as Desmodromic actuation, this
    aspect of valve operation frequently is termed "positive closing" (as
    contrasted with "spring return").


CLS 123/90.25
TXT Device under subclass 90.24 wherein the driving means is the rocker that
    opens the valve.


CLS 123/90.26
TXT Device under subclass 90.24 wherein the driving means is a follower that is
    joined to the cam in such fashion as to partake of the total range of
    movement of the cam.

    (1)     Note.  By virtue of their marked similarity, eccentric-actuated
    unitary followers are included herein.


CLS 123/90.27
TXT Device under subclass 90.1 wherein the shaft carrying the actuating element
    (cam) of the operating mechanism is located in proximity to, and generally
    somewhat above, the valve-containing head of an engine cylinder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193,    for structural features of an engine cylinder.


CLS 123/90.28
TXT Device under subclass 90.1 wherein means is provided for movement of the
    valve in addition to that of opening and closing.

    (1)     Note.  Ordinarily this movement is in the form of rotation of the
    valve about the principal axis of its stem for such purposes as random
    seating surface engagement, seat cleaning, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 330+, for nonvalving motion in a valve
    of more general utility.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 56, for a pressure actuated
    valve of more general utility having plural motions of the valve, and
    subclasses 215+, for a mechanical movement actuated valve of more general
    utility having plural motions of the valve.


CLS 123/90.29
TXT Device under subclass 90.28 wherein means is provided within the operating
    mechanism to convert the oscillation imparted to the valve by the
    compression and decompression of its return spring into unidirectional
    movement (i.e., rotation).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90.28+, for devices generally similar to those of this subclass but
    involving (e.g., by attachment thereto) an element external to the
    operating mechanism.


CLS 123/90.3
TXT Device under subclass 90.28 wherein means is provided within the operating
    mechanism to rotate the valve.

    (1)     Note.  A device of this subclass is often referred to as a positive
    rotator, and usually comprises a self-contained, insertable unit.


CLS 123/90.31
TXT Device under subclass 90.1 wherein means is provided to drive a member
    (normally a rotating shaft) carrying the actuating element (cam) of the
    operation mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses for a specific
    power transfer means.


CLS 123/90.32
TXT Device under subclass 90.1 wherein means is provided in an element (e.g.,
    push rod, tappet, etc.), between the cam and the valve rendering that
    element ineffective--and interrupting the valve actuation--during alternate
    revolutions of the crankshaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90.31,  for a cam that is driven in such fashion as to produce alternate
    interruption of actuation.


CLS 123/90.33
TXT Device under subclass 90.1 wherein means is provided for supplying, or
    controlling a supply of, lubricant to one or more elements of the operating
    mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196,    for lubricating means in general for internal combustion engines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    184,    Lubrication, subclasses 6, for lubricating systems for machines,
    particularly the bearing parts thereof, where no special combination exists
    between the system and the machine.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 355, for lubricating a valve
    of more general utility.


CLS 123/90.34
TXT Device under subclass 90.33 wherein a lubricant supply means directs
    lubricant under pressure to the camshaft and its cams.


CLS 123/90.35
TXT Device under subclass 90.33 wherein a lubricant supply means directs
    lubricant under pressure through a tappet to another element of the
    operating mechanism.


CLS 123/90.36
TXT Device under subclass 90.33 wherein a lubricant supply means directs
    lubricant under pressure through a rocker fulcrum (sometimes a tubular
    rocker support shaft) to another element of the operating mechanism.


CLS 123/90.37
TXT Device under subclass 90.33 wherein a lubricant control means is provided
    to restrict, confine or direct a supply of lubricant for the operating
    mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are valve stem seals or shields which are
    movable with the operating mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188.6,  for a valve stem seal or shield fixed to the engine (e.g., fixed to
    the valve stem guide, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 500+ for a dynamic, circumferential contact seal for
    other than a piston, especially subclass 502 for a valve stem seal for an
    internal combustion engine.


CLS 123/90.38
TXT Device under subclass 90.33 wherein means is provided to enclose a portion
    of the operating mechanism which is subject to unrestrained lubricant flow.

    (1)     Note.  Ordinarily the means is detachable, and frequently is serves
    as an access opening cover.


CLS 123/90.39
TXT Device under subclass 90.1 comprising a pivoted element, usually directly
    engaging a valve stem, which transmits the motion developed in the
    operating mechanism to the valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 519+ and 559, for linkage
    system elements in the form of a lever and a rocker arm, respectively.


CLS 123/90.4
TXT Device under subclass 90.39 wherein the rocker element includes means to
    transmit motion to more than one valve.


CLS 123/90.41
TXT Device under subclass 90.39 wherein the pivot means provided for the rocker
    element is separate form and independent of the pivot means provided for
    any like, pivoted element.


CLS 123/90.42
TXT Device under subclass 90.41 wherein means is provided to restrict the
    pivotal movement of a rocker element to a plane defined by the pivot and by
    the stem of the valve which the rocker element engages.


CLS 123/90.43
TXT Device under subclass 90.41 wherein means is provided in the region of the
    pivot to vary the relationship of the rocker element to other elements of
    the operating mechanism in order to create, modify or eliminate clearance
    (lash) in the mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  In most instances the lash adjusting means of a device of
    this subclass is of the self-operating kind; i.e., it functions on its own
    initiative in response to the presence of an incorrect amount of lash.


CLS 123/90.44
TXT Device under subclass 90.39 wherein the rocker element is in direct contact
    with the actuating element (cam) of the operating mechanism.


CLS 123/90.45
TXT Device under subclass 90.39 wherein the rocker element is provided (other
    than at its pivot) with means to create, modify or eliminate clearance
    (lash) in the operating mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 522, for a linkage system
    element in the form of an adjustable lever.


CLS 123/90.46
TXT Device under subclass 90.45 wherein the lash adjusting means is of the
    reciprocating hydraulic chamber type.


CLS 123/90.47
TXT Device under subclass 90.39 wherein means is provided to afford a degree of
    resilience to the transmitting of motion by the rocker element.

    (1)     Note.  In keeping any clearance or slack taken up (although not
    eliminated), the resilient means also serves to reduce the noise of
    operation.


CLS 123/90.48
TXT Device under subclass 90.1 comprising an element which is in direct contact
    with the actuating element (cam) and which transmits (ordinarily by
    reciprocatory movement) the motion of that element to other components of
    the operating mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  Occasionally a tappet is more descriptively referred to as a
    cam follower.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 569 for a mechanism element
    in the form of a cam follower.


CLS 123/90.49
TXT Device under subclass 90.48 wherein the tappet element includes a
    nonmetallic insert or yieldable clearance take-up means to soften and/or
    reduce the noise of its transmitting of motion.


CLS 123/90.5
TXT Device under subclass 90.48 wherein means provided to restrict the movement
    of the tappet element to the reciprocatory one intended to be imparted to
    it by the actuating element (cam).

    (1)     Note.  This provision is most likely to be found where the tappet
    includes a roller for engagement by the cam.


CLS 123/90.51
TXT Device under subclass 90.48 wherein the composition of material or the
    surface treatment or the process of manufacture, or more than one of them,
    of a tappet element is of primary concern.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 888.43, for a process of making a tappet.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 544+ for stock
    materials, e.g., of indefinite length, which are all metal or have adjacent
    metal components.


CLS 123/90.52
TXT Device under subclass 90.48 wherein the tappet element is provided with
    means to create, modify or eliminate clearance (lash) in the operating
    mechanism.


CLS 123/90.53
TXT Device under subclass 90.52 wherein the adjusting means of the tappet
    element functions on its own initiative in response to the presence of an
    incorrect amount of clearance (lash) in the operating mechanism.


CLS 123/90.54
TXT Device under subclass 90.53 wherein the self-operating adjusting means is
    of the mechanical screw type.


CLS 123/90.55
TXT Device under subclass 90.53 wherein the self-operating adjusting means is
    of the reciprocating hydraulic chamber type.

    (1)     Note.  Requisite to a device of this nature is the presence, within
    the tappet element, of a reservoir, a pressure (or power) chamber, and a
    check valve to isolate the chamber from the reservoir.


CLS 123/90.56
TXT Device under subclass 90.55 wherein the reciprocating hydraulic adjusting
    means has its pressure chamber located above (gravity-wise) its reservoir.


CLS 123/90.57
TXT Device under subclass 90.55 wherein the reciprocating hydraulic adjusting
    means has a fluid vent from its pressure chamber.

    (1)     Note.  This characteristic is in contrast with the provision of
    such an outlet from the reservoir, which is relatively common.

    (2)     Note.  The presence of an anti-pump-up provision may be indicated
    where the medium vented is a liquid; the venting of a gas, on the other
    hand, indicates merely a provision to maintain the hydraulic fluid in a
    noncompressible (liquid) state.


CLS 123/90.58
TXT Device under subclass 90.55 wherein the reciprocating hydraulic adjusting
    means is precharged with fluid and usually sealed; consequently, it does
    not require a continuous, external fluid supply (e.g., the lubricating
    system of an engine).


CLS 123/90.59
TXT Device under subclass 90.55 wherein the reciprocating hydraulic adjusting
    means is modified in such fashion as to maintain the reservoir sufficiently
    charged that the check valve will be kept submerged while the means
    reciprocates in a generally horizontal plane.


CLS 123/90.6
TXT Device under subclass 90.1 comprising a noncircular or eccentrically
    disposed surface formed on a rotating element, which constitutes the
    initial actuating means of the operating mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 567, for a mechanism element
    in the form of a cam.


CLS 123/90.61
TXT Device under subclass 90.1 comprising an elongated, reciprocating element
    located between a tappet and a rocker or valve and serving to transmit the
    motion of the tappet thereto.

    (1)     Note.  An element of the kind contemplated here may include means
    whereby its length can be changed manually in order to create, modify or
    eliminate clearance (lash) in the operating mechanism.  In some types of
    mechanism (e.g., cam-engaged rocker), the element is not utilized.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 579+, for a mechanism
    element in the form of a rod.


CLS 123/90.62
TXT Device under subclass 90.61 wherein the rod element includes a
    length-changing means which functions on its own initiative in response to
    the presence of an incorrect amount of clearance (lash) in the operating
    mechanism.


CLS 123/90.63
TXT Device under subclass 90.62 wherein the self-adjusting means of the rod
    element is of the reciprocating hydraulic chamber type.


CLS 123/90.64
TXT Device under subclass 90.61 wherein the rod element is subjected to tension
    while performing its operational function.

    (1)     Note.  This characteristic is in contrast with the arrangement
    found with most rod elements, which are of the "push" type and therefore
    function in compression.  In a few instances the pull-type rod directly
    engages the valve, thereby eliminating the rocker element.


CLS 123/90.65
TXT Device under subclass 90.1 comprising a resilient element which is utilized
    to bias a valve toward its normal (usually closed) position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 337, for a valve spring and
    for means for associating a spring with a valve where the valve is of more
    general utility.

    267,    Spring Devices, appropriate subclasses for a spring device of more
    general utility.


CLS 123/90.66
TXT Device under subclass 90.65 wherein means is provided to dampen or
    otherwise regulate the rate at which the spring element imparts to the
    valve the potential energy that it received through the operation of the
    valve mechanism.


CLS 123/90.67
TXT Device under subclass 90.65 wherein means is provided for receiving the
    fixed end portion of a spring element and/or for retaining the other end
    portion thereof in engagement with a valve or its operating mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90.28+, for a spring seat or a retainer comprising a portion of a device
    having to do with nonvalving motion of a valve.


CLS 123/142.5
TXT Devices under the class definition not provided for in any of the preceding
    subclasses or in other classes including (1) the combination of an
    internal-combustion engine with means for supplying external energy to heat
    the engine, or (2) the combination of an internal combustion engine and
    means supplying external energy to heat some part or adjunct of the engine
    such as a radiator, or (3) internal-combustion engines having means using
    heat from one part to heat another part by exchanging heat between the
    parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.01+, for internal combustion engine cooling systems and devices and see
    notes thereto. Such systems and devices including means to heat the
    radiator and/or other parts of the cooling system are classified in this
    subclass (142.5).

    179,    for starting devices there provided for combined with heating means
    where some starting feature other than heating is claimed.

    196,    for internal combustion engine lubricators there provided for
    combined with means for heating and/or cooling the lubricant or lubricator
    only, including such devices using the engine cooling fluid for lubricant
    or lubricator heating and/or cooling.

    543+,   for charge-forming devices there provided for combined with heating
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, particularly subclass 23 and see
    notes thereto for field of search for fluid fuel heaters not in combination
    with an internal-combustion engine.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 19.5, for ovens using rejected heat
    from internal combustion engines; 93, for heating stoves having detachable
    hoods which are placeable over internal-combustion engines; 350, for liquid
    heaters and vaporizers there provided for.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 51+ for an engine installed heat
    exchanger that does not include significant internal-combustion engine
    structure.

    184,    Lubrication, subclasses 6 and 104.1+, for lubricators combined with
    heating means there provided for.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 2, 5, 12.3, and 12.4+ for vehicle
    heating systems using rejected heat of internal combustion engines.

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants, particularly subclass 2, for prime mover
    dynamo systems producing heat, and subclass 38, for prime mover dynamo
    systems having an electric motor for starting the prime mover.

    392,    Electric Resistance Heating Devices, subclasses 311+ for electric
    heaters for heating fluids not limited to an internal-combustion engine
    combination.

    432,    Heating, subclass 230, for heating apparatus mounted or installed
    on an internal-combustion engine element.


CLS 123/143
TXT Miscellaneous devices not coming within the terms of the definitions of the
    following subclasses of igniters for igniting the successive combustible
    charges supplied to and burned within an internal-combustion engine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184,    for devices for igniting the charge within the working cylinder at
    starting and designed for temporary use at such times.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 118+ for spark
    plugs of the jump spark type.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 247+ for
    electric igniters and igniter systems.


CLS 123/144
TXT Igniting devices for internal-combustion engines comprising a burner
    located without the working cylinder and means for igniting the combustible
    charge in the working cylinder from the flame of the burner either by
    causing the flame itself to come into direct contact with the combustible
    charge within the working cylinder or by causing the flame to ignite an
    auxiliary volume of combustible gas, which burning gas is then moved into
    direct contact with the combustible charge within the working cylinder.
    Also contains patents in which a flame-igniting device as above defined is
    disclosed and claimed in combination with the supply or exhaust valve of
    the engine or with a valve controlling both the supply and exhaust ports.
    Flame-igniting devices capable of use only with internal-combustion engines
    operating upon noncompression cycles are when disclosed or claimed in
    patents claiming also a complete noncompression engine, considered as a
    part of such an engine and are not cross-referenced into this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     noncompression.


CLS 123/145
TXT Igniting devices for internal-combustion engines comprising an igniting
    member maintained at a temperature sufficient to ignite the combustible
    mixture when it comes into contact therewith and heating means for
    maintaining such igniting member at a high temperature, generally at
    incandescence, whereby the combustible charge will be ignited upon coming
    into contact with the igniting member.

    (1)     Note.  The igniting member may extend without the working cylinder
    or combustion-chamber of the engine, in which case it is generally
    maintained at a high temperature by means of an external heating-burner or
    the said igniting member may be located wholly within the working cylinder
    or combustion-chamber, in which case it is ordinarily maintained in a
    heated condition by the burning gases within the engine.  The heating means
    for the igniting devices ordinarily forms no part of the igniting device
    itself; but such burners as are especially designed for and adapted to be
    used with an incandescent igniting device and are disclosed in connection
    with such a device are classified in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250+,   and indented subclasses, and 146, for other patents relating to
    devices located within the working cylinder or combustion-chamber of an
    internal combustion engine and designed to or which in fact would both
    vaporize oil supplied to the engine and ignite the resulting combustible
    mixture.


CLS 123/146
TXT Incandescent igniting devices differing from those in the preceding
    subclass in that a valve operated by and in unison with the engine is
    provided for controlling the flow of the combustible charge to the igniting
    elements, whereby the time at which ignition of the charge takes place may
    be determined.


CLS 123/146.5
TXT Devices for igniting the successive combustible charges supplied to and
    burned within an internal-combustion engine, comprising electrodes
    extending into the space occupied by the charge to be ignited and
    electrical means for producing a spark or a series of sparks between the
    said electrodes, whereby the charge is ignited and subordinate and
    auxiliary devices designed and especially adapted for use with igniting
    devices of the type set forth above and incapable of use in the manner
    contemplated in other relations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 19, and
    indented subclasses, for intermittent circuit-closers which include
    distributors for internal-combustion engine ignition.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses, for electrical, systems for supplying electric energy to
    electric space discharge devices of the arc or spark type.  Merely claiming
    the spark or arc system as an ignition system will not exclude the system
    from class 315, provided that the claims are not otherwise limited by
    claimed subject matter to use with an internal-combustion engine.  Such
    systems which include a periodic switch driven by the engine for timing the
    spark with reference to the engine cycle are in this subclass (146.5) or
    the indented subclasses of this class (123).  Merely calling the discharge
    device a "spark plug" will not exclude the patent from Class 315.  Note
    especially subclass 209 and indented subclasses of class 315, which provide
    for systems having a periodic switch in the supply circuit of the discharge
    device, and subclass 211, where the system includes a plurality of
    discharge devices and a distributor switch for distributing the energy to
    the discharge devices in sequence.


CLS 123/147
TXT Miscellaneous sparking devices for internal-combustion engines in which a
    current of electricity of low electromotive force is employed, thus
    necessitating the use therewith of electrodes normally out of contact with
    each other and which must be brought into contact and separated to produce
    a spark, as in the following make-and-break subclasses of electrical
    igniting devices, and subordinate and auxiliary devices designed for use
    with and to form a part of such an igniting device and incapable of use in
    the manner contemplated, in other relations, the device in question in
    either case not coming within the terms of the definition of some one of
    the following sparker subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 247+ for
    electric igniting devices.


CLS 123/149
TXT Mechanism whereby a dynamo-electric machine is operated by an engine and is
    adapted to furnish a current of electricity for the purpose of igniting the
    successive, combustible charges supplied thereto and patents disclosing and
    claiming a dynamo in combination with igniting mechanism, which, considered
    by itself, would be classifiable in some one of the following igniter
    subclasses, the connection between the two being other than by means of
    mere conducting-wires, and patents disclosing and claiming dynamo-electric
    machines having features of construction or peculiarities in mode of
    operation particularly adapting them for use with internal-combustion
    engines for the purposes of igniting the successive combustible charges
    supplied thereto and rendering their use in other relations or with other
    devices impossible, or at least unlikely.  Dynamo coming within the last of
    the above cases are generally so intimately associated with or built into
    the elements constituting the engine with which they are used as to be
    incapable of separation therefrom and of operation or existence as separate
    mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  Dynamo-electric machines complete in themselves having no
    element in common with an internal-combustion engine and capable when put
    in operation of furnishing a current of electricity available for any
    purpose to which the current produced by the said dynamo is suitable are
    classified in suitable subclasses of Class 310, Electrical Generator or
    Motor Structure, according to the type of device in question, and neither a
    positive statement in the specification to the effect that the device in
    question is intended to be used to furnish current for the igniting device
    of an internal-combustion engine nor the fact that a claim positively
    includes an internal-combustion engine or its igniting device in general
    terms will be sufficient to cause a patent for such a dynamo to be
    classified as an igniting device for internal combustion engines.

    (2)     Note.  Mechanism interposed between an internal combustion engine
    and a dynamo driven thereby and designed to furnish current for the
    igniting device of such engine, the purposes of said mechanism being to
    maintain a constant speed of the dynamo irrespective of variations in speed
    of the engine, are not classified in this subclass.  For such devices see
    Class 188, Brakes, subclasses 180+; Class 192, Clutches and Power-Stop
    Control, subclasses 103, 104 and 105 and Class 310, Electrical Generator or
    Motor Structure, subclasses 75+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147     and 594+, for low tension and high tension ignition systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants.


CLS 123/150
TXT Manually operated means used in connections with sparking devices for
    determining the time in the cycle of operation of the engine at which the
    charge will be ignited, in combination with means for acting upon the
    exhaust-valve of the engine to regulate the said valve, said last-mentioned
    means ordinarily operating either to cause the exhaust-valve to be opened
    upon the compression-stroke of the engine to thereby facilitate the
    starting thereof or to maintain the exhaust-valve in a partially or wholly
    open position thereby acting as a manually controlled speed-regulator.


CLS 123/151
TXT Devices comprising a valve for controlling the supply of combustible
    mixture to the working cylinder or combustion-chamber of an
    internal-combustion engine or the exhaust of burned gases therefrom, or
    both the supply and exhaust, together with a sparking device one or both
    the electrodes of which is carried by and moves with the said valve.


CLS 123/152
TXT Valve-operating mechanism and sparker-operating mechanism in combination
    and either with or without speed-controlling mechanism.  In such of the
    devices occurring in this subclass as include speed-controlling mechanism
    the speed-regulator is frequently of the charge-omitting type, and the
    combined valve and sparker operating mechanism then takes the form of means
    operating to interrupt the operation of the igniting device of the engine
    while the supply of combustible charges thereto is suspended.  The valve
    acted upon may be the supply, exhaust, fuel, or other valve upon which the
    operation of the engine depends, and the sparking device is always of the
    make-and-break type, hereinafter defined.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include devices in which the only
    connection between the valve-operating mechanism and the igniting device is
    that the valve-operating mechanism controls a circuit-closing device,
    whereby a circuit included in the sparking device is controlled.  Such
    devices are classified in subclass 146.5, in this class.


CLS 123/153
TXT Sparking devices comprising relatively fixed and movable electrodes
    normally out of contact with each other and mechanically-operated means
    adapted to move the movable electrode into contact with the fixed electrode
    shortly before and to separate the electrodes when the combustible charge
    is to be ignited, whereby an electric circuit in which the electrodes are
    included is alternately made and broken and a spark produced, and
    subordinate and auxiliary devices designed and especially adapted for use
    with sparking devices of the type above set forth and incapable of use in
    the manner contemplated in other relations, the device in question in
    either case not coming within the definition of some one of the following
    make-and-break subclasses.  The make-and-break subclasses include sparking
    devices in which the time during which the electrodes are in contact with
    each other is much greater than the time during which they are separated,
    the normal condition of electrodes which must be brought into contact and
    then separated to produce a spark being considered as out of contact with
    each other.


CLS 123/154
TXT Sparking devices differing from those defined in the preceding definition
    in that the operating means for the movable electrode includes an
    electromagnet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 247+ for
    electric ignitors and ignitor systems.


CLS 123/155
TXT Sparking devices differing from those defined in the second preceding
    definition in that the means whereby the movable electrode is actuated and
    is dependent for its operation upon a gas under pressure.


CLS 123/156
TXT Make-and-break sparking devices in which the movable electrode partakes of
    a reciprocating motion of translation, the relatively fixed electrode being
    either rigid or yieldable.


CLS 123/157
TXT Make-and-break sparking devices in which the movable electrode is carried
    by a rock-shaft and the electrodes separated by a reverse movement of the
    movable electrode, the relatively fixed electrode being rigid and
    unyielding the operating means to the movable electrode including a hammer
    element adapted to separate the electrodes by delivering a blow to the
    movable electrode, whereby a more sudden separation of the electrodes is
    secured and a more effective spark produced.

    (1)     Note.  For other sparking devices in which the means for separating
    the electrodes include an element designed to deliver a blow to the movable
    electrode, but which do not have the structural features enumerated in this
    definition, see the preceding subclass.


CLS 123/158
TXT Make-and-break sparking devices in which the movable electrode is carried
    by a rock-shaft and the electrodes separated by a reverse movement of the
    movable electrode, the relatively fixed electrode being rigid and
    unyielding.


CLS 123/159
TXT Make-and-break sparking devices in which the movable electrode is carried
    by a rock-shaft and the electrodes separated by a reverse movement of the
    movable electrode, the relatively fixed electrode being yieldable, so as to
    move slightly after contact of the electrodes and during the slight further
    movement of the movable electrode.


CLS 123/160
TXT Make-and-break sparking devices in which the movable electrode is carried
    by the rock-shaft and the electrodes separated by a farther movement of the
    movable electrode in the same direction.


CLS 123/161
TXT Make-and-break sparking devices in which the movable electrode is carried
    by the rotating shaft driven continuously or intermittently in one
    direction.


CLS 123/162
TXT Sparking devices comprising an electric circuit including relatively fixed
    and movable electrodes, the movable electrode being adapted to make and
    break the circuit, as in the preceding make-and-break subclasses, and the
    operation thereof depending immediately upon the piston of the engine with
    which the device is used. In the devices in this subclass the movable
    electrode is either carried by the working piston or is located in the
    clearance space of the engine, and said electrode when not carried by the
    piston is generally operated directly by the piston or by a projection
    thereon as it comes into contact with the movable electrode near the end of
    the compression-stroke.


CLS 123/163
TXT The form of construction of the stationary electrode designed for use with
    and to form a part of a sparking device including relatively fixed and
    movable electrodes, as in the preceding make-and-break subclasses, such
    stationary electrodes being ordinarily capable of use with and as forming a
    part of any sparking device which includes fixed and movable electrodes.

    (1)     Note.  It is intended that patents classifiable in other
    make-and-break subclasses, but which disclose specific stationary-electrode
    structure shall appear in this subclass as cross-references.  Inasmuch,
    however, as all make-and-break sparking devices necessarily include a
    stationary electrode, a search involving stationary-electrode structures
    may sometimes extend to all make-and-break subclasses.


CLS 123/164
TXT Inventions relating to manually-operated means used in connection with
    make-and-break sparking devices for determining the time in the cycle of
    operation of the engine at which the electrodes shall be separated and the
    combustible charge ignited.  Includes manually-operated devices for
    temporarily delaying the ignition of the combustible charge when the engine
    is to be started for the purpose of preventing a reversal of rotation of
    the engine at such times.

    (1)     Note.  Patents disclosing devices designed for use with and to form
    a part of a high-tension electric igniting system for internal-combustion
    engines and including an electric circuit having suitable means therein for
    making and breaking such circuit and also means for adjusting the circuit
    making and breaking mechanism to vary the time at which the ignition of the
    charge takes place do not appear in this subclass as cross-references. For
    such devices see this class, subclass 146.5, and indented subclasses, and
    Class 200, Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 22, 25,
    29, and 31.

    (2)     Note.  For devices for regulating the speed of an
    internal-combustion engine by automatically varying the time at which the
    charge therein is ignited, see this class, subclasses 406+.

    (3)     Note.  For devices for determining the time at which the ignition
    of the charge shall take place in combination with means designed to act
    upon and regulate the exhaust-valve of the engine, generally for the
    purpose of facilitating the starting thereof, see subclass 150 in this
    class.

    (4)     Note.  Patents classifiable in other make-and-break subclasses but
    which discloses specific spark adjusting or timing mechanism, appear in
    this subclass as cross-references. Inasmuch, however, as make-and-break
    sparking devices ordinarily include means for varying the adjustment
    thereof, so that the charge will be ignited at the proper time, a search
    involving an adjusting or timing mechanism may extend to all make-and-break
    subclasses.


CLS 123/169
TXT Combinations of a jump spark ignitor with internal combustion engine
    structure or an internal engine and spark plug accessory which is
    especially designed for use with an internal combustion engine.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to the combination of a
    spark plug and a cylinder head; the combination of a plug and cylinder
    space in which the interior of the skirt has a special claimed relationship
    to the cylinder volume; the combination of a spark plug with an adaptor of
    the screw coupling type (which, for example, permits a small plug to be
    inserted in a large hole or which acts to extend the shell skirt to provide
    a chamber for the spark), etc. Also included are accessories designed to
    fit onto the engine and also provided with means to hold the spark plug
    which are not of general utility.

    (2)     Note.  Class 313, Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, provides for
    the structure of spark plugs, per se.  See especially subclasses 11.5 and
    118+ and the subclasses mentioned in the Notes thereto for the subclasses
    to be searched for spark plugs.  Note also the classes listed under "SEARCH
    CLASS" in Class 313, subclass 118 for other classes which provide for parts
    of spark plugs and accessories used with spark plugs.

    (3)     Note.  Class 315, Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems,
    subclass 32 and indented subclasses, for electric space discharge devices
    of the spark plug type and other electric space discharge devices which
    have combined therewith an electric circuit element, such as a resistance
    inductance, or condenser, the discharge device and the circuit element
    being structurally united so as to form a unitary device.


CLS 123/179.1
TXT STARTING DEVICE:
    Apparatus under the class definition, for starting an internal combustion
    engine from a condition of rest or for facilitating the starting of such an
    engine (i.e., starter) or accessory device designed to facilitate the
    starting of such an engine and incapable of use in the manner contemplated
    in other relations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142.5,  for internal combustion engine combined with heating means where no
    starting features are claimed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 632+, for one shot explosion actuated
    expansible chamber-type motor.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 53 for expansible motor
    of the engine rotating or starting type.

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants, subclasses 10+, 22+, 30, 31+, 36+, 38,
    46, 47, and 48 for an electric starting motor and for an electric generator
    used as a starting motor.


CLS 123/179.11
TXT Manual pump device or squeeze bulb:
    Apparatus under subclass 179.9 wherein the primer is a hand-operated fluid
    transfer means.


CLS 123/179.12
TXT Condition responsive:
    Apparatus under subclass 179.9 wherein the primer operates in response to a
    sensed parameter.


CLS 123/179.13
TXT Temperature:
    Apparatus under subclass 179.12 wherein the sensed parameter to which the
    primer responds is temperature.


CLS 123/179.14
TXT Condition responsive:
    Apparatus under subclass 179.7 wherein the means for supplying a mixture
    operates in response to a sensed parameter.


CLS 123/179.15
TXT Temperature:
    Apparatus under subclass 179.14 wherein the sensed parameter to which the
    means for supplying a mixture responds is temperature.


CLS 123/179.16
TXT With fuel or intake air control:
    Apparatus under subclass 179.1 wherein the starter regulates hydrocarbon
    delivery or incoming air.


CLS 123/179.17
TXT Fuel injection pump:
    Apparatus under subclass 179.16 wherein the hydrocarbon regulating means is
    a fluid transfer means which delivers hydrocarbon directly into a cylinder
    of the engine.


CLS 123/179.18
TXT Intake air control:
    Apparatus under subclass 179.16 wherein a means regulates the flow of
    incoming air.


CLS 123/179.19
TXT Includes auxiliary internal combustion engine:
    Apparatus under subclass 179.1 wherein the starter is an additional or
    another engine.


CLS 123/179.2
TXT Remote control:
    Apparatus under subclass 179.1 having a means separated from the engine
    which directs the operation of the starter (e.g., radioed instruction).


CLS 123/179.21
TXT With charge or cylinder heating:
    Apparatus under subclass 179.1 wherein an accessory device increases the
    temperature of the hydrocarbon in a combustion chamber or cylinder which
    makes up a combustion chamber.


CLS 123/179.22
TXT Inertia type:
    Apparatus under subclass 179.1 wherein the energy for the starter is
    obtained from a moving mass (e.g., flywheel).


CLS 123/179.24
TXT Either power or manual starting device:
    Apparatus under subclass 179.1 having a starter which can be manipulated by
    hand or by an application of energy.


CLS 123/179.25
TXT Having specific mounting or drive connection for electric starter
    motor:Apparatus under subclass 179.1 having detail to an electric motor
    support or to its linkage between the starter and the internal combustion
    engine.


CLS 123/179.26
TXT For nonoperator supporting wheeled platform:
    Apparatus under subclass 179.25 wherein the internal combustion engine and
    starter are mounted on a distinct wheeled platform such as a mower which is
    not intended to support a human.


CLS 123/179.27
TXT For airplane:
    Apparatus under subclass 179.1 wherein the starter is especially adapted
    for use with an aircraft (e.g., toy airplane).


CLS 123/179.28
TXT With electric generating means:
    Apparatus under subclass 179.1 wherein the starter is equipped with a
    producer of electricity.


CLS 123/179.29
TXT Auxiliary magneto:
    Apparatus under subclass 179.1 wherein the electric producer generates
    alternating current with small magnets.


CLS 123/179.3
TXT Condition responsive control of starting device:
    Apparatus under subclass 179.1 having means to regulate operation of the
    starter in response to a sensed parameter.


CLS 123/179.31
TXT Having fluid-driven starting motor:
    Apparatus under subclass 179.1 wherein the starter includes a motor which
    is powered by pneumatic or hydraulic means.


CLS 123/179.4
TXT Including automatic engine stop:
    Apparatus under subclass 179.3 wherein the regulation of the engine is a
    ceasing operation for the engine.


CLS 123/179.5
TXT Control of spark ignition during starting:
    Apparatus under subclass 179.1 wherein a means is provided to regulate
    intermittent firing of the igniter when the engine is starting.


CLS 123/179.6
TXT Control of glow plug during starting:
    Apparatus under subclass 179.1 wherein a means is provided to regulate a
    small heating element used to start ignition, when the engine is starting.


CLS 123/179.7
TXT Auxiliary fuel supply device:
    Apparatus under subclass 179.1 wherein the accessory device comprises means
    for supplying a combustible mixture of air and hydrocarbon directly to the
    working cylinder of the engine, together with means for igniting the
    mixture within the working cylinder after the mixture is supplied to the
    cylinder, and the accessory devices being separate and distinct from the
    elements constituting the engine and not involved in its normal operation.

    (1)     Note.  The accessory device for this and the indented subclasses
    include means for supplying an easily vaporized fluid to the engine when it
    is to  be started, whereby the initial combustible charge is more easily
    formed, the engine being afterwords operated by a less volatile fluid, the
    means not coming within the terms of subclass 127 definition.  The means
    for igniting the combustible mixture is frequently the regular igniting
    device of the engine or such device with suitable auxiliary appliances to
    adapt it to use in a starting device of the type occurring in the subclass.
     The essential features in the devices is that a combustible mixture is
    supplied directly to the interior of the working cylinder and ignited to
    start the engine by power generated within itself.  Such mixture may be
    supplied at substantially atmospheric pressure or at a comparatively high
    pressure, and it may or may not be compressed in the working cylinder by a
    movement of the working piston before ignition.

    (2)     Note.  Inventions limited to a mechanism for igniting a combustible
    mixture as above where the engine is to be started are classified in this
    class, subclass 184.1, notwithstanding the fact that the starting devices
    occurring in this subclass are necessarily provided with some type of
    igniting device or the fact that the igniting device in question may be
    designed for use with a starting device of the type occurring in this
    subclass.

    (3)     Note.  For internal combustion engines which are self-starting
    because of the cycle upon which they operate, a combustible mixture being
    supplied to the working cylinder under pressure, see this class, subclass
    68.


CLS 123/179.8
TXT Starting fluid:
    Apparatus under subclass 179.7 having a separate distinct liquid or gas,
    such as alcohol or acetylene, used to initiate ignition.


CLS 123/179.9
TXT Priming means:
    Apparatus subclass 179.7 having means to prepare the engine for ignition by
    adding an initial amount of priming fuel to a carburetor or cylinder.


CLS 123/182.1
TXT Compression relieving type:
    Apparatus under subclass 179.1 wherein the accessory device comprises means
    for permitting a portion of the combustible charge in the working cylinder
    to escape during a part of the compression stroke of the engine, whereby
    the volume of the combustible charge compressed and ignited upon the
    initial strokes of the engine is reduced and the external work necessary to
    start the engine is lessened.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150,    for combined adjusting and exhaust regulating.


CLS 123/183.1
TXT Gunpowder type:
    Apparatus under subclass 179.1 wherein the accessory device utilizes a
    charge of gunpowder or other explosive substance which is exploded and the
    resulting gases act upon the working piston of the engine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 632+ for one shot explosion activated
    expansible chamber-type motors.


CLS 123/184.1
TXT With auxiliary igniters:
    Apparatus under subclass 179.1 wherein the engine is started by introducing
    and burning a combustible mixture within the working cylinder, and the
    starting means includes either (1) a supplemental igniting device separate
    and distinct from the regular igniting device of the engine and designed
    for temporary use at starting or (2) a device independent of the engine for
    actuating the regular igniting device.

    (1)     Note.  The combustible mixture may be supplied to the working
    cylinder by separate and distinct means as in subclasses 179.7+, or it may
    reach the cylinder by way of the regular supply passage and inlet valve of
    the engine in their ordinary manner.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not include a device for delaying the
    ignition of the combustible mixture to facilitate the starting of the
    engine, but which device is not in itself capable of igniting the charge.
    For such device, if manually operated, see subclass 164, and if
    automatically operated, see subclasses 406+ in this class.

    (3)     Note.  For electrical igniting devices provided with
    interchangeable sources of electricity, one for use at starting and the
    other in the normal operation of the engine, see this, class subclasses 147
    and 594+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179.7+, for combustible mixture supplying means.


CLS 123/184.21
TXT INTAKE MANIFOLD:

    Internal-combustion engine component under the class definition including
    at least one passage in fluid communication with an inlet port of the
    engine through which working fluid (i.e., air, air and fuel mixture, etc.)
    is distributed to the engine.

    (1)     Note.  A manifold that conveys intake gases to an engine and also
    conveys exhaust gases away from an engine is included herein.  Preheating
    of intake gases may be done by the exhaust gases in such a manifold.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 323 for an exhaust manifold, per se, or in
    combination with a power plant.


CLS 123/184.22
TXT Passage to crankcase:

    Intake manifold under subclass 184.21 wherein the chamber enclosing the
    crankshaft is connected to the intake manifold to draw working fluid
    therethrough.


CLS 123/184.23
TXT For use with carburetor upstream of manifold:

    Intake manifold under subclass 184.22 which communicates between the engine
    and a device for mixing air with fuel working fluid.


CLS 123/184.24
TXT Manifold having plenum:

    Intake manifold under subclass 184.22 including a chamber in which the
    working fluid is contained at a pressure different from the pressure
    surrounding the chamber.


CLS 123/184.25
TXT Plural plenums:

    Intake manifold under subclass 184.24 including more than one chamber in
    which the working fluid is contained.


CLS 123/184.26
TXT Interconnection between plenums:

    Intake manifold under subclass 184.25 wherein the plenums communicate with
    one another so that working fluid may pass between the plenums.


CLS 123/184.27
TXT Multiple passage leading to inlet of one cylinder head:

    Intake manifold under subclass 184.22 including more than one passage
    communicating with inlet ports at the end of a single cylinder in the
    closed end of a single cylinder so that working fluid is distributed
    therethrough.


CLS 123/184.28
TXT For engine having radiating cylinders:

    Intake manifold under subclass 184.21 adapted to be used on an engine which
    includes a rotary output shaft that turns about an axis intersected by and
    extending perpendicular to the axes of first and second cylinders, the
    pistons of these cylinders are drivingly connected to the rotary output
    shaft, wherein the cylinder axes are separated at an angle with respect to
    one another.


CLS 123/184.29
TXT Star-type engine:

    Intake manifold under subclass 184.28 wherein the engine includes at least
    three cylinders which are equally spaced about the centrally disposed
    rotary output shaft.


CLS 123/184.31
TXT For V-type engine:

    Intake manifold under subclass 184.28 wherein the engine has first and
    second cylinders with axes spaced apart by an angle less than 180o.


CLS 123/184.32
TXT For use with carburetor upstream of manifold:

    Intake manifold under subclass 184.31 which communicates between the engine
    and a device for mixing air with fuel working fluid.


CLS 123/184.33
TXT Inlet manifold heated by outlet manifold:

    Intake manifold under subclass 184.32 wherein the engine also includes at
    least one exhaust passage intermingling with or in thermal communication
    with at least a portion of the intake manifold.


CLS 123/184.34
TXT Manifold having plenum:

    Intake manifold under subclass 184.31 including a chamber in which the
    working fluid is contained at a pressure different from the pressure
    surrounding the chamber.


CLS 123/184.35
TXT Plural plenums:

    Intake manifold under subclass 184.31 including more than one chamber in
    which the working fluid is contained.


CLS 123/184.36
TXT Interconnection between plenums:

    Intake manifold under subclass 184.35 wherein the plenums communicate with
    one another so that working fluid may pass between the plenums.


CLS 123/184.37
TXT Multiple passage leading to inlet of one cylinder:

    Intake manifold under subclass 184.31 including more than one passage
    communicating with inlet ports at the end of a single cylinder in the
    closed end of a single cylinder so that working fluid is distributed
    therethrough.


CLS 123/184.38
TXT For in-line engine:

    Intake manifold under subclass 184.21 wherein the engine has first and
    second cylinders with axes coplanar with the axis of the rotary output axis.


CLS 123/184.39
TXT For use with carburetor upstream of manifold:

    Intake manifold under subclass 184.38 which communicates between the engine
    and a device for mixing air with fuel working fluid.


CLS 123/184.41
TXT Intake manifold heated by outlet manifold:

    Intake manifold under subclass 184.39 wherein the engine also includes at
    least one exhaust passage intermingling with or in thermal communication
    with at least a portion of the intake manifold.


CLS 123/184.42
TXT Manifold having plenum:

    Intake manifold under subclass 184.38 including a chamber in which the
    working fluid is contained at a pressure different from the pressure
    surrounding the chamber.


CLS 123/184.43
TXT Plural plenums:

    Intake manifold under subclass 184.42 including more than one chamber in
    which the working fluid is contained.


CLS 123/184.44
TXT Interconnection between plenums:

    Intake manifold under subclass 184.43 wherein the plenums communicate with
    one another so that working fluid may pass between the plenums.


CLS 123/184.45
TXT Multiple passage leading to inlet of one cylinder:

    Intake manifold under subclass 184.38 including more than one passage
    communicating with inlet ports at the end of a single cylinder in the
    closed end of a single cylinder so that working fluid is distributed
    therethrough.


CLS 123/184.46
TXT For use with carburetor upstream of manifold:

    Intake manifold under subclass 184.21 which communicates between the engine
    and a device for mixing air with fuel working fluid.


CLS 123/184.47
TXT Manifold having plenum:

    Intake manifold under subclass 184.21 including a chamber in which the
    working fluid is contained at a pressure different from the pressure
    surrounding the chamber.


CLS 123/184.48
TXT Plural plenums:

    Intake manifold under subclass 184.47 including more than one chamber in
    which the working fluid is contained.


CLS 123/184.49
TXT Interconnection between plenums:

    Intake manifold under subclass 184.48 wherein the plenums communicate with
    one another so that working fluid may pass between the plenums.


CLS 123/184.51
TXT Adjustable plenum:

    Intake manifold under subclass 184.47 wherein the volume of the plenum
    chamber is variably controlled.


CLS 123/184.52
TXT Multiple passage leading to inlet of one cylinder:

    Intake manifold under subclass 184.21 including more than one passage
    communicating with inlet ports at the end of a single cylinder in the
    closed end of a single cylinder so that working fluid is distributed
    therethrough.


CLS 123/184.53
TXT Manifold tuning, balancing, or pressure regulating means:

    Intake manifold under subclass 184.21 including means to:

    (a)     select the resonant frequency of the chamber for desired flow of
    the working fluid;

    (b)     optimally vary the passage to one cylinder with respect to another;

    (c)     control the pressure of the working fluid therein.


CLS 123/184.54
TXT With back flow prevention valve:

    Intake manifold under subclass 184.53 including a one-way valve for
    restricting the flow of working material to one direction.


CLS 123/184.55
TXT Adjustable length passage:

    Intake manifold under subclass 184.53 including a means for changing the
    length of the work fluids path to the engine.


CLS 123/184.56
TXT Adjustable cross section passage:

    Intake manifold under subclass 184.53 including a means for reversibly
    blocking a portion of the flow path of the working fluid.


CLS 123/184.57
TXT Resonator  chamber:

    Intake manifold under subclass 184.53 including an enclosed portion that is
    tuned to convert the pressure pulses of the pistons sucking in air into
    resonating waves which facilitates more efficient charging of the cylinders.


CLS 123/184.58
TXT Return loop to inlet:

    Intake manifold under subclass 184.53 including a recirculation passage
    which allows a portion of the working fluid to bypass the engine cylinder
    and return to the inlet of the manifold.


CLS 123/184.59
TXT Interconnection between passages:

    Intake manifold under subclass 184.53 wherein the inlet passages
    communicate with one another allowing working fluid to pass there between.


CLS 123/184.61
TXT Manifold material or composition:

    Intake manifold under subclass 184.21 wherein the material or composition
    of the manifold is specifically claimed.


CLS 123/185.1
TXT Mechanical:
    Apparatus under subclass 179.1 wherein the starter includes mechanical
    means forming a connection between the mainshaft of the engine and starting
    force input operating member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 6, and indented subclasses
    for engine starters, per se.


CLS 123/185.11
TXT Includes worm gear in linkage:
    Apparatus under subclass 185.1 wherein the mechanical means connecting the
    operating member to the main shaft includes a threaded shaft and a wheel
    with teeth that mesh into the threads.


CLS 123/185.12
TXT Including crank-type handle:
    Apparatus under subclass 185.1 wherein the operating member for the
    mechanical means consists of a hand operated lever or arm attached at a
    right angle to the engine or a linking shaft which it revolves.


CLS 123/185.13
TXT Means provided to prevent counter rotation of crank:
    Apparatus under subclass 185.12 having a means to preclude the lever or arm
    from revolving in a direction opposite its normal direction of operation.


CLS 123/185.14
TXT Includes mechanical potential motor (e. g., spring motor):
    Apparatus under subclass 185.1 wherein the starter includes a motor which
    is powered by means which stores mechanical energy.


CLS 123/185.15
TXT Operated by wheels of vehicle:
    Apparatus under subclass 185.14 wherein the energy input source for the
    energy storing means is a wheel of a vehicle.


CLS 123/185.2
TXT Includes cable:
    Apparatus under subclass 185.1 wherein the operating member or mechanical
    means includes an elongated flaccid member (e.g., cord, chain, etc.) which
    the operator uses to revolve the main shaft of the engine.


CLS 123/185.3
TXT Including recoil mechanism:
    Apparatus under subclass 185.2 which also includes a grooved wheel around
    which the elongated flaccid member is turned and a resilient coil which
    draws the cord tight.


CLS 123/185.4
TXT Lever connected to the cable:
    Apparatus under subclass 185.3 having a rigid rod pivoted on a fixed
    fulcrum attached to the elongated flaccid member which assists the operator
    in revolving  the mainshaft of the engine.


CLS 123/185.5
TXT Includes lever or slide linkage:
    Apparatus under subclass 185.1 wherein the mechanical means includes a
    rigid rod pivoted on a fixed fulcrum or a rod that glides along a guide and
    is used to revolve the main shaft of the engine.


CLS 123/185.6
TXT Lever or slide actuates a gear segment:
    Apparatus under subclass 185.5 wherein the rod moves a toothed machine
    element to revolve the mainshaft of the engine.


CLS 123/185.7
TXT Manual type:
    Apparatus under subclass 179.27 wherein starting means is hand-operated.


CLS 123/185.8
TXT Includes friction means in linkage:
    Apparatus under subclass 185.1 wherein the mechanical means connecting the
    operating member to the main shaft includes means which transmits power to
    the main shaft solely by rubbing contact between two or more of its
    components.


CLS 123/185.9
TXT Includes coaxial cooperating threaded members in linkage:
    Apparatus under subclass 185.1 wherein the mechanical means connecting the
    operating member to the main shaft includes means which transmits power to
    the main shaft when two helical or spiral ridged members rotate relative to
    each other about the same axis.


CLS 123/186.1
TXT Spark delaying:
    Apparatus under subclass 179.1 having means for acting upon the electrical
    discharge device of the engine in such a manner as to postpone the ignition
    of the combustible  charge while the operating  member is engaged by a
    human operator.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the patents within the subclass operate during the
    act of starting the engine by hand and automatically move an element of the
    sparking device, so as to delay the ignition of the charge, to thus prevent
    injury to the operator by the engine starting in the wrong direction.


CLS 123/188.1
TXT VALVE:
    Apparatus under the class definition relating to either (1) the intake,
    exhaust, or fuel valve of an internal-combustion engine having a stationary
    opening (i.e., seat) and moving closure (i.e., head) or (2), a component
    thereof (e.g., a valve-seat), or (3), an adjunct accessory (e.g., supply
    conduit for valve) solely for use with the supply, exhaust or fuel valve of
    an internal combustion engine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.16,  for valve having coolant sealed therein.

    41.34,  for internal cooling of moving valve parts.

    41.76+, for valve seats and guide with cooling means.

    144+,   for supply or exhaust valves or a single valve controlling both the
    supply and exhaust ports of the engine, in combination with a flame
    igniting device.

    434+,   for valves used in connection with charge-forming devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, appropriate subclasses for valves claimed broadly
    by name only and defined significantly or broadly solely by their metal or
    alloy compositions and including a specific Class 148 treatment of the
    metal or alloy, or for products distinguished only by the internal
    structure or characteristics of the metals, metallic compositions or alloys
    comprising such structures.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, particularly subclasses 251+ for cam
    actuated valves.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, appropriate subclasses for valves
    claimed by name only and defined solely by their metal or alloy composition.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 544+ for valve
    element or adjunct having only nominally claimed structure, that is, one
    insufficiently defined in its ultimate use form, comprised all of metal or
    having metal components.


CLS 123/188.11
TXT Wear feature:
    Apparatus under subclass 188.1 wherein a feature or means is provided to
    compensate for changes or deterioration of a valve component or accessory
    caused by prolonged use.


CLS 123/188.12
TXT For spring:
    Apparatus under subclass 188.11 wherein the component or accessory
    compensated is a resilient element.


CLS 123/188.13
TXT Including attaching means:
    Apparatus under subclass 188.12 having means to hold spring in place.


CLS 123/188.14
TXT Valve head cooperates with manifold:
    Apparatus under subclass 188.1 wherein the valve head has a specific form
    to engage an aperture of the manifold.


CLS 123/188.15
TXT Shepherd  type:
    Apparatus under subclass 188.4 having two valve heads one on top of the
    other with concentric valve stems.


CLS 123/188.16
TXT Pivoted:
    Apparatus under subclass 188.2 wherein there is a hinge member between the
    stem and the valve head.


CLS 123/188.17
TXT Having actuation springs concentric with valve stem:
    Apparatus under subclass 188.1 wherein a valve return spring encircles the
    valve stem and is centered around the same axis.


CLS 123/188.2
TXT Poppet:
    Apparatus under subclass 188.4 wherein the valve head has a flat disk shape
    on the end of a  vertically set stem.


CLS 123/188.3
TXT Material or structure:
    Apparatus under subclass 188.2 having specific substance, or arrangement
    (e.g., ceramic) of the valve.


CLS 123/188.4
TXT Reciprocating valve:
    Apparatus under subclass 188.1 wherein the valve head slides to and fro
    during an opening and closing operation.


CLS 123/188.5
TXT Sleeve:
    Apparatus under subclass 188.4 wherein the valve head consists of a thin
    cylindrically shaped sheet having an inlet or outlet port.


CLS 123/188.6
TXT Packing:
    Apparatus under subclass 188.1 having a sealing means located around a
    valve stem.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90.37,  for a poppet valve mechanism's lubrication system including a seal
    or shield that may include a valve stem seal or shield movable with the
    operating mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclass 502 for a valve stem seal for an internal combustion
    engine.


CLS 123/188.7
TXT Combustion improving accessory:
    Apparatus under subclass 188.1 having adjuncts for the valve (e.g., vanes)
    for enhancing the combustion process.


CLS 123/188.8
TXT Valve seat relation:
    Apparatus under subclass 188.1 having specific characteristics of a
    stationary opening with which the valve head cooperates.


CLS 123/188.9
TXT Guide, lubricant or coolant:
    Apparatus under subclass 188.1 either (1) having means to direct the motion
    of a valve stem or (2) having a substance to reduce friction or (3) has a
    substance to dissipate heat.


CLS 123/189
TXT Conveniently disassembled valves and accessories thereof and ordinarily
    comprises means for attaching the supply or exhaust conduit to the engine
    in such a way as to be readily disconnected therefrom, thereby permitting
    the convenient inspection and generally the removal of the valve located at
    the end of the conduit in question.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclass 454, for expansible chamber type pumps having means
    to facilitate assembly or disassembly of a pump valve.


CLS 123/190.1
TXT Rotary:
    Apparatus under subclass 188.1 having a valve that rotates, or revolves
    during opening and closing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     for rotating valve, specific to a 4 cycle engine.


CLS 123/190.11
TXT In horizontal plane on the side of the cylinder:
    Apparatus under subclass 190.4 wherein the rotary valve lies in a plane
    perpendicular to the  cylinder axis and is located  at the side of the
    cylinder.


CLS 123/190.12
TXT Sleeve:
    Apparatus under subclass 190.1 wherein the rotary valve comprises a thin
    cylindrical sheet which rotates on an axis which is the same axis as the
    central axis of the cylinder.


CLS 123/190.13
TXT With lubrication means:
    Apparatus under subclass 190.12 having a means to reduce the friction of
    the valve.


CLS 123/190.14
TXT Disc, cone, or sphere shaped:
    Apparatus under subclass 190.1 wherein the rotating valve body is in the
    form of either (1) a thin flat rotor; (2) a surface generated by a straight
    line passing through a fixed point and moving along the intersection with a
    fixed curve; or (3) a three-dimensional surface all points of which are
    equidistant from a fixed point.


CLS 123/190.15
TXT Controls plural cylinders:
    Apparatus under subclass 190.14 wherein the valve controls the intake,
    exhaust or fuel to more than one cylinder.


CLS 123/190.16
TXT Lubricant:
    Apparatus under subclass 190.1 having means to reduce the friction of the
    rotary valve.


CLS 123/190.17
TXT Seal:
    Apparatus under subclass 190.1 having means to prevent leaking of fluids
    around the rotary  valve.


CLS 123/190.2
TXT Single function, (i.e., exhaust and intake by separate tube):Apparatus
    under subclass 190.1 wherein the rotary valve moves between individual
    distinct ducts.


CLS 123/190.3
TXT For crankcase:
    Apparatus under subclass 190.1 wherein fuel and combustion products enter
    or leave the crankcase through a rotary valve.


CLS 123/190.4
TXT Double function type:
    Apparatus under subclass 190.1 wherein a single rotary valve handles both
    intake and exhaust gases for cylinder.


CLS 123/190.5
TXT For two or more cylinders:
    Apparatus under subclass 190.4 wherein a single multi-passage rotary valve
    handles both intake and exhaust gases for multiple cylinders.


CLS 123/190.6
TXT Elongated rotary double-function valve:
    Apparatus under subclass 190.4 wherein a cross section of the rotary valve
    perpendicular to its rotational axis is significantly smaller than the
    dimension of the valve parallel to its rotational axis.


CLS 123/190.7
TXT Tapered:
    Apparatus under subclass 190.6 wherein the cross section of the rotary
    valve becomes gradually narrower along the rotational axis.


CLS 123/190.8
TXT In horizontal plane above cylinder:
    Apparatus under subclass 190.4 wherein the rotary valve lies in a plane
    which is perpendicular to the cylinder axis and located over the top of the
    cylinder.


CLS 123/190.9
TXT Tapered:
    Apparatus under subclass 190.8 wherein the cross section of the rotary
    valve perpendicular to the rotational axis becomes gradually narrowed along
    the rotational axis.


CLS 123/192.1
TXT VIBRATION COMPENSATING DEVICE:
    Apparatus under class definition having a stabilizing device adapted only
    for use with an internal combustion engine, which renders the force
    transmitted to the main driving shaft of the engine more uniform and
    minimizes or counteracts a shaking or oscillating motion caused by the
    reciprocation of engine parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 6.01 for crankshaft making

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 66+ for testing instruments for
    determining imbalances including arrangements employing compensating
    countershafts.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 36, for overcoming dead
    centers and 573 for balanced flywheels.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 7 for an expansible chamber
    device having an over center means to bias the working member in opposite
    directions over different portions of the stroke.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, subclass 180 for shafting having particular balancing or
    vibration dampening structure.


CLS 123/192.2
TXT Balancing arrangement:
    Apparatus under subclass 192.1 wherein the stabilizing device comprises
    means to establish equilibrium using equal opposing forces.


CLS 123/193.1
TXT PARTICULAR PISTON AND ENCLOSING CYLINDER CONSTRUCTION:
    Apparatus under the class definition including a specific detail of either
    a piston (e.g., shape, material, construction) or a guiding chamber
    cooperating with and surrounding the piston, the piston or guiding chamber
    being adapted soley for use with an internal combustion engine or having a
    feature, construction, or peculiarity in mode of operation rendering its
    use in other relations or with other devices either impossible, or
    improbable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.01+, for cylinder or piston cooling arrangement, especially subclass
    41.16, for those having coolant sealed inside; subclass 41.34 for cooling
    of a piston and moving cylinder; and subclasses 41.67+ and 1.72+, for a
    jacketed or finned cylinder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 169.1+ for cylinder details
    for an expansible chamber device, subclasses 172+ for a piston for an
    expansible chamber device.


CLS 123/193.2
TXT Cylinder detail:
    Apparatus under subclass 193.1 having a specific detail of the chamber in
    which a piston moves.


CLS 123/193.3
TXT Having detail of connection to other cylinder structure:
    Apparatus under subclass 193.5 having specific means which is utilized in
    fastening the structures to the upper end of the chamber.


CLS 123/193.4
TXT Having detail to guiding structure cooperating with cylinder:Apparatus
    under subclass 193.6 wherein the piston has a specific surface or formation
    cooperating with the chamber.


CLS 123/193.5
TXT Cylinder head:
    Apparatus under subclass 193.1 having structure which is utilized in an
    assembly which fits on the upper end of the combustion chamber and which
    may have provision for valves, spark plugs, etc.


CLS 123/193.6
TXT Piston:
    Apparatus under subclass 193.1 having a structure, shape, material or
    construction which is utilized in a piston (i.e, a solid cylinder or disk
    fitting snugly in a cylinder and reciprocating).


CLS 123/195
TXT The form, construction, or other features of the casing, frame, or
    bed-plate which supports the various elements necessary to form a complete
    internal-combustion engine and maintains them in proper operative relation
    with one another and includes such constructions of the cylinder as relate
    to the means of attachments to the bed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 606+.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 146+ for a plurality of
    unitarily mounted cylinders or frame therefor for an expansible chamber
    device, subclass 161 for a support or frame for an expansible chamber
    device, and subclass 261 for a crankcase, per se, for a crank associated
    with an expansible chamber device.


CLS 123/196
TXT Lubricating means for internal-combustion engines, the device in question
    being designed and adapted for use only with such an engine and being
    dependent for its action upon peculiarities of operation present only in
    internal-combustion engines.

    (1)     Note.  Lubricating means capable of use with engines generally,
    irrespective of the fluid by which they are operated, and capable of use
    with air, steam, internal-combustion, or other engines are classified in
    Class 184, Lubrication appropriate subclasses, notwithstanding they may be
    designed with reference to use with internal-combustion engines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 153+ for lubricating means
    for an expansible chamber device.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 153+ for a structural
    installation of a separator, especially subclasses 167 and 171 wherein an
    internal-combustion engine may be broadly recited as the source of the
    material to be treated.


CLS 123/197.1
TXT TRANSMISSION MECHANISM FROM PISTON:
    Apparatus under the class definition having a mechanism intermediate the
    working piston and the main driving-shaft of the engine through which power
    is transmitted to the shaft.

    (1)     Note.  A patent proper for this and the indented subclasses may
    have ordinary parts of the engine mentioned broadly in the claims, provided
    no specific construction of such parts is involved.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46      and 78, for a transmission-mechanism involved in the cycle upon
    which the engine operates.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses according to
    the character of the device in question.


CLS 123/197.2
TXT With particular piston:
    Apparatus under subclass 197.1 provided with specific details to the
    working piston.


CLS 123/197.3
TXT Particular connecting rod:
    Apparatus under subclass 197.4 wherein the transmitting mechanism includes
    specific details to the reciprocating rod.


CLS 123/197.4
TXT Crankshaft and connecting rod:
    Apparatus under subclass 197.1 wherein the transmitting mechanism includes
    a reciprocating rod linking rotating parts and one of the rotating parts is
    a shaft that has a handle or arm attached at right angles.


CLS 123/197.5
TXT Including clutch:
    Apparatus under subclass 197.1 wherein the transmitting mechanism includes
    a device to engage or disengage it from a drive shaft.


CLS 123/198
TXT Miscellaneous accessory device designed for use with internal-combustion
    engines not otherwise provided for in this classification.

    (1)     Note.  For thermometers combined with internal-combustion engine
    structure wherein no more of said internal combustion engine is included
    than is necessary to locate the thermometer, see Class 374, Thermal
    Measuring and Testing, subclass 144, and indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  Cleaning apparatus and processes are for the most part
    provided for elsewhere, see class:



    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, for cleaning apparatus
    which involve at least one of the following means or operations:  a gas
    blast or vacuum, brushing, beating, scraping, wiping, shotting, the use of
    a squeegee, with or without a detergent.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, for processes of cleaning
    engines or parts thereof even though claimed in combination with steps of
    engine operation, when only such engine operation steps are claimed as are
    necessary for the cleaning operation claimed and also for apparatus for
    cleaning engines when a combination with the engine is not claimed.

    148,    Metal Treatment, for metal cleaning or pickling processes combined
    with other metal treating steps.

    181,    Acoustics, subclass 204 for acoustical machine type enclosures
    specifically adapted for internal-combustion engines.

    252,    Compositions, for detergent compositions and for cleaning processes
    limited to the mere use of a detergent even though the thing or surface
    cleaned be specified.


CLS 123/200
TXT ROTARY:

    Apparatus under the class definition having a cylinder structure enclosing
    a piston structure wherein the piston structure cooperates with the
    cylinder structure and one or more other elements to constitute an enclosed
    space for burning the combustible material wherein the piston structure and
    cylinder are capable of relative rotary movement.

    (1)     Note.  A rotary expansible chamber device having only nominally
    claimed air or fuel supply, air or fuel modifying means or ignition means
    without recitation of any other combustion aspects such as stratification,
    charge forming, scavenging, compression, etc., is properly classified in
    Class 418.

    (2)     Note.  Included in these subclasses are engines wherein a gas is
    transferred or moved from one variable volume to another.  Transfer of gas
    after being acted upon by one surface of said piston to a point where said
    gas acts upon another surface of said piston is considered to be a transfer
    to a different volume.

    (3)     Note.  The majority of the engines found within this and indented
    subclasses are of the type in which the cylinder structure is stationary
    and the piston structure rotates; however, also included are engines
    wherein the cylinder structure rotated and the piston structure remains
    stationary, such engines being treated as kinematically inverted.

    (4)     Note.  The term "rotor" herein is synonymous with "piston
    structure"; the term "enclosed space" is synonymous with "working chamber".
     The term "rotation" herein includes "plantation".  The term "partition
    structure" and "vane" are synonymous and refer to the generally long, thin
    platelike elements capable of reciprocation and designed to form working
    chambers within the engine by the separation of one volume of the
    piston-cylinder volume from others.

    (5)     Note.  Further included in these subclasses, from Class 60 (old
    subclass 39.61) are rotary engines provided with a volume structure
    external to the enclosed space for burning and with means for
    intermittently communicating the enclosed space with the external volume
    structure such that the combustion may occur either within the enclosed
    space or the external volume structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43+,    for internal-combustion engines comprising a cylinder or cylinders
    having a continuous rotary movement, and pistons having reciprocating
    movement relative to the cylinder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclasses for
    devices with similar structure but without significant internal-combustion
    features. See Class Definition, section III, miscellaneous class notes of
    Class 418, and (1) Note above in this subclass for statements of the line
    between Class 123 and Class 418.


CLS 123/201
TXT Reversible:

    Apparatus under subclass 200 provided with means to allow the burning
    material to act on the piston structure or elements to produce rotary
    motion in either direction.

    (1)     Note.  An example of reversing arrangements not included within
    this subclass is reverse gearing to reverse the direction of rotation of
    the output while the direction of rotation of the engine remains unchanged.
     See Class 74, Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 810.2.


CLS 123/202
TXT With means to control degree of compression:

    Apparatus under subclass 200 provided with distinct means to vary the level
    of pressure of the air or combustible material prior to combustion.

    (1)     Note.  The means of this subclass is distinct structure, such as a
    bypass valve, e.g., and excludes the cooperating elements which normally
    and inherently produce compression in a rotary engine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclass 283 for a rotary expansion chamber device having a
    condition responsive bypass or relief valve.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 159 for a rotary
    expansible chamber device provided with means adjacent to the fluid inlet
    or outlet for controllably modifying the flow of fluid.


CLS 123/203
TXT With combusted gas treatment or handling means:

    Apparatus under subclass 200 provided with means for treating or handling
    the burning combustible material within the volume where the burning occurs
    during the expansion or exhaust phase of operating cycle.

    (1)     Note.  The treatment or handling of the combusted material is in
    addition to the expansion occurring in the working chamber and includes air
    injection, scavenging, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 272+ for an engine in which combusted
    gases are treated or handled after exhausting from the working chamber.


CLS 123/204
TXT With compression volume means in uninterrupted communication with expansion
    volume means:

    Apparatus under subclass 200 wherein the piston structure cooperates with
    one or more other elements or with another piston structure or with the
    cylinder structure such that an unobstructed passageway always exists
    between the volume in which the air or combustible material is compressed
    and the volume in which the combustible material is burned.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes engines operating on the Brayton
    (constant pressure) cycle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 39.01 for nonpositive displacement engines
    operating on the same cycle.


CLS 123/205
TXT With fuel injection means:

    Apparatus under subclass 200 provided with means for introducing liquid
    combustible material under pressure into an air supply to form a
    combustible mixture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32+,    for other types of internal-combustion engines provided with fuel
    injectors.


CLS 123/206
TXT And pump or control means:

    Apparatus under subclass 205 further provided with distinct means to either
    increase the pressure of the fuel being injected or to modify the amount of
    the fuel being injected into the combustion space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139+,   for a fuel injection pump, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, appropriate subclasses for generic pump structure.


CLS 123/207
TXT Into intake port:

    Apparatus under subclass 205 wherein the fuel injector is located so as to
    inject the fuel into the passageway leading to the working chamber of the
    engine.


CLS 123/208
TXT Into intake chamber:

    Apparatus under subclass 205 wherein the fuel injector is located so as to
    inject the fuel directly into the working chamber during the air and fuel
    induction stroke of the operating cycle.


CLS 123/209
TXT Into prechamber:

    Apparatus under subclass 205 wherein the fuel injector is mounted for
    feeding fuel into a cavity structure external to but communicating with the
    working chamber via a passageway.


CLS 123/210
TXT With ignition means:

    Apparatus under subclass 200 provided with a source of heat energy for
    initiating the combustion reaction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143+,   for ignition structure, per se.


CLS 123/211
TXT Plural:

    Apparatus under subclass 210 provided with a plurality of ignition means.


CLS 123/212
TXT With plural compression volume means:
    Apparatus under subclass 200 provided with a plurality of means to
    pressurize and deliver air or combustible material to the enclosed space.

    (1)     Note.  The volume designated for compressing the air or combustible
    material inherent in the operating cycle of most rotary piston engines is
    included as one of the compression volume means for this subclass.


CLS 123/213
TXT In series:

    Apparatus under subclass 212 wherein the plural compression volume means
    are arranged such that the pressurized air or combustible material is
    passed directly in line from one compression volume means to the next.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119+,   for other types of internal-combustion engines provided with
    serially arranged superchargers.


CLS 123/214
TXT With plural expansion volume means:

    Apparatus under subclass 200 provided with a plurality of space means
    capable of enlargement to receive the combusted material from the
    combustion space such that the reception of the combusted material causes
    the space means to enlarge.

    (1)     Note.  The volume designed for receiving the combusted material
    inherent in the operating cycle of most rotary piston engines is included
    as an expansion volume means for this subclass.


CLS 123/215
TXT In series:

    Apparatus under subclass 214 wherein the plural expansion volume means are
    arranged such that the combusted material is passed directly in line from
    one expansion volume means to the next.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 623 for a rotary motor driven by waste heat
    or exhaust energy.


CLS 123/216
TXT With charge treatment means:

    Apparatus under subclass 200 provided with means to modify or prepare the
    combustible material prior to or during its delivery to the combustion
    space.

    (1)     Note.  Charge treatment means includes, e.g., preparation means
    such as mixing means for the fuel and air, or for a plurality of substances
    to form a combustible mixture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    434+,   for charge forming devices, per se.


CLS 123/217
TXT Exhaust gas recirculation:

    Apparatus under subclass 216 wherein the treatment means consists of
    structure returning a portion of the combusted material to the air or fuel
    being delivered to the combustion space.


CLS 123/218
TXT Rotor  shape:

    Apparatus under subclass 216 wherein the treatment means consists of a
    cavity structure integral to the piston structure for creating turbulence
    so as to mix the air and fuel during the compression phase of the operating
    cycle in preparation for combustion.


CLS 123/219
TXT Stratification:

    Apparatus under subclass 216 wherein the treatment means consists of
    structure for feeding air or air/fuel mixtures having different air/fuel
    ratios into the working chamber.


CLS 123/220
TXT Preheating:

    Apparatus under subclass 216 wherein the treatment means consists of
    structure for raising the temperature of the air or combustible material
    prior to delivery to the combustion space.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 86 for a rotary
    expansible chamber device provided with heat exchange means wherein the
    heating of the working fluid is an ancillary function to the cooling of the
    rotary device.


CLS 123/221
TXT With transfer means intermediate single compression volume means and single
    expansion volume means:

    Apparatus under subclass 200 having a singular space means to pressurize
    the combustible material and a singular space means capable of enlargement
    to receive the combusted material and with means, located therebetween, to
    deliver the pressurized combustible material to the receiving space means.

    (1)     Note.  Combustion of the gas mixture may occur in the transfer
    passage means, in the expansion volume means, or in both.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass and indented subclasses include engines having
    an unequal number of compression volumes and expansion volume, wherein each
    compression volume serves only a single expansion volume at any one time.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, and appropriate subclasses for
    similar rotary expansion chamber device.


CLS 123/222
TXT Isolated charge in movable transfer element:

    Apparatus under subclass 221 provided with means to isolate and physically
    move a quantity of combustible material from a source to the space in which
    it may be burned, there being no volumetric change in the material as it is
    being moved.


CLS 123/223
TXT Reciprocating or oscillating compression volume means:

    Apparatus under subclass 221 wherein the means to pressurize the
    combustible material has a member capable of moving alternately backward
    and forward thereby pressurizing the combustible material.


CLS 123/224
TXT Radially spaced from expansion volume means:

    Apparatus under subclass 223 wherein the compression volume means is spaced
    from the combusted material receiving means on a line radiating from the
    center or approximate center of rotation of the combusted material
    receiving means.


CLS 123/225
TXT Abutment acts as compression means:

    Apparatus under subclass 224 wherein the means to receive the combusted
    material is formed in part by a first portion of a partition structure
    mounted within the cylinder structure for oscillation or reciprocation
    relative thereto during rotation of the piston structure, wherein the first
    portion of the partition structure engages the periphery of the piston
    structure to form a seal therebetween, and further wherein a second portion
    of the partition structure acts as a means to compress the air or
    combustible material.


CLS 123/226
TXT Compression means disposed in rotor:

    Apparatus under subclass 224 wherein the compression volume means is
    mounted on the rotary piston structure.


CLS 123/227
TXT Vane acts as compression means:

    Apparatus under subclass 226 wherein the means to receive the combusted
    material is formed in part by a first portion of a partition structure
    mounted within the piston structure for oscillation or reciprocation
    relative thereto during rotation of the piston structure, wherein the first
    portion of the partition structure engages the inner periphery of the
    cylinder structure to form a seal therebetween, and further wherein a
    second portion of the partition structure acts as a means to compress the
    air or combustible material.


CLS 123/228
TXT Compression volume means circumferentially disposed relative to expansion
    volume means:

    Apparatus under subclass 221 wherein the means to pressurize the
    combustible material is distally located from the means to receive the
    combusted material on a closed curvilinear boundary about the axis of
    rotation of the piston structure.


CLS 123/229
TXT Transfer means in rotor:

    Apparatus under subclass 228 wherein at least a portion of the means to
    transfer the pressurized material is composed of the rotary piston
    structure.


CLS 123/230
TXT Compression volume is also expansion volume:

    Apparatus under subclass 228 wherein the singular space means to pressurize
    the combustible material acts alternately as the singular space means to
    receive the combusted material, the combustible material being confined in
    the transfer means after compression and prior to expansion.


CLS 123/231
TXT Vane:

    Apparatus under subclass 228 wherein the means to pressurize the
    combustible material and the means to receive the combusted material are
    formed in part by a partition structure mounted within the piston structure
    for oscillation or reciprocation relative thereto during the rotation of
    the piston structure wherein the partition structure engages the inner
    periphery of the cylinder structure to form a seal therebetween.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 259+ for vane-type
    rotary chamber devices.


CLS 123/232
TXT Interengaging rotors:

    Apparatus under subclass 228 wherein the means to pressurize the
    combustible material and the means to receive the combusted material are
    separated by a seal produced by the engagement of a rotatable element
    structure with the periphery of the piston structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 191+ for gear-type
    rotary chamber devices.


CLS 123/233
TXT Nonparallel axes:

    Apparatus under subclass 232 wherein the piston structure and the partition
    structure are mounted for rotation about lines of center that are at an
    angle relative to each other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 195 for a gear-type
    rotary chamber device having nonparallel axes.


CLS 123/234
TXT Compression volume means axially disposed relative to expansion volume
    means:

    Apparatus under subclass 221 wherein the means to pressurize the
    combustible material is spaced from the means to receive the combusted
    material on the line of center of rotation of the piston structure.


CLS 123/235
TXT Transfer means in rotor:

    Apparatus under subclass 234 wherein at least a portion of the means to
    transfer the pressurized material is disposed within the rotary piston
    structure.


CLS 123/236
TXT Vane:

    Apparatus under subclass 234 wherein the means to pressurize the
    combustible material and the means to receive the combusted material are
    formed in part by a partition structure mounted within the piston structure
    for oscillation or reciprocation relative thereto during the rotation of
    the piston structure, wherein the partition structure engages the inner
    periphery of the cylinder structure to form a seal therebetween.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 259+ for a vane-type
    rotary chamber device.


CLS 123/237
TXT Abutment:

    Apparatus under subclass 234 wherein the means to receive the combusted
    material is formed in part by a first portion of a partition structure
    mounted within the cylinder structure for oscillation or reciprocation
    relative thereto during rotation of the piston structure, wherein the first
    portion of the partition structure engages the periphery of the piston
    structure to form a seal therebetween.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 243+ for
    abutment-type rotary chamber devices.


CLS 123/238
TXT Interengaging rotors:

    Apparatus under subclass 234 wherein the means to receive the combusted
    material is formed in part by a seal produced by the engagement of a
    rotatable element structure with the periphery of the piston structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 191+ for gear-type
    rotary chamber devices.


CLS 123/239
TXT Compression volume means radially disposed relative to expansion volume
    means:

    Apparatus under subclass 221 wherein the means to pressurize the
    combustible material is spaced from the means to receive the combusted
    material on a line radiating from the center or approximate center of the
    combusted material receiving means.


CLS 123/240
TXT Concentric:

    Apparatus under subclass 239 wherein the means to pressurize the
    combustible material and the means to receive the combusted material both
    are essentially toroidally, and further wherein one of the means encircles
    the other, with a common center, such that the air or combustible material
    is transferred from one toroidal shaped means to the other.


CLS 123/241
TXT With compression, combustion, and expansion in a single variable volume:

    Apparatus under subclass 200 wherein the pressurization of the combustible
    material, the ignition of the combustible material, and the expansion of
    the combusted material all occur within the same enclosed space.


CLS 123/242
TXT Planetating rotor:

    Apparatus under subclass 241 wherein the geometric center of the piston
    structure rotates about an axis noncoincident with said center.

    (1)     Note.  The term "planetating" includes both the rotary motion of an
    object about an axis other than its own geometric axis with or without
    rotary motion about its own geometric axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 54+ for planetating
    working member rotary chamber devices.


CLS 123/243
TXT Vane:

    Apparatus under subclass 241 wherein the enclosed space is formed at least
    in part by a partition structure mounted within the piston structure for
    oscillation or reciprocation relative thereto during the rotation of the
    piston structure, wherein the partition structure engages the inner
    periphery of the cylinder structure to form a seal therebetween.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 259+ for vane-type
    rotary chamber devices.


CLS 123/244
TXT Abutment:

    Apparatus under subclass 241 wherein the enclosed space is formed at least
    in part by a partition structure mounted within the cylinder structure for
    oscillation or reciprocation relative thereto during rotation of the piston
    structure, wherein the partition structure engages the periphery of the
    piston structure to form a seal therebetween.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 243+ for
    abutment-type rotary chamber devices.


CLS 123/245
TXT Alternately approaching and receding elements:

    Apparatus under subclass 241 wherein the enclosed space is formed by the
    simultaneous combined movement produced by the rotation of a plurality of
    elements or piston structures and the oscillation of two or more of the
    elements or piston structures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43+,    for an internal-combustion engine wherein the piston reciprocates
    relative to a toroidal cylinder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 33+ for alternating
    piston-type rotary chamber devices.


CLS 123/246
TXT Eccentric interengaging rotors:

    Apparatus under subclass 245 wherein the peripheries of the elements or
    piston structures cooperate to form a seal therebetween thereby forming the
    enclosed space.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 191+ for gear-type
    rotary chamber devices.


CLS 123/247
TXT Only combustion and expansion of charge in engine:

    Apparatus under subclass 200 wherein the piston structure, the cylinder
    structure, or the other elements cooperate to form an enclosed space in
    which only burning of the combustible mixture and the enlargement of the
    combusted material occurs, the compressed combustible material being
    supplied from an undefined source.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is limited to patents which do not claim the
    kinetic compressor or other source of the compressed air or fuel mixture.
    Patents claiming such a compressor or source have been classified in
    subclasses 221+.


CLS 123/248
TXT Abutment:

    Apparatus under subclass 247 wherein the enclosed space is formed at least
    in part by a partition structure mounted within the cylinder structure for
    oscillation or reciprocation relative thereto during rotation of the piston
    structure, wherein the partition structure engages the periphery of the
    piston structure to form a seal therebetween.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 243+ for
    abutment-type rotary chamber devices.


CLS 123/249
TXT Interengaging rotors:

    Apparatus under subclass 247 wherein the enclosed space is formed at least
    in part by a seal produced by the engagement of a rotatable element
    structure with the periphery of the piston structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 191+ for gear-type
    rotary chamber devices.


CLS 123/250
TXT ENGINE MEANS HAVING INTERNAL VAPORIZING IN PRECHAMBER WITH ALL COMBUSTION
    IN MAIN CHAMBER:

    Subject matter under the class definition having a main combustion chamber
    in which all combustion takes place and an auxiliary chamber (prechamber)
    that is used only to vaporize liquid fuel or thoroughly mix a fuel-air
    mixture before it is burned in the main combustion chamber.


CLS 123/251
TXT Whirling in prechamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 250 in which means is provided to effect
    swirling of the fuel or fuel-air mixture in the prechamber to more
    thoroughly vaporize or mix the fuel.


CLS 123/252
TXT Vaporizing by a hot surface of prechamber: Subject matter under subclass
    250 in which the fuel in the prechamber is vaporized by heat stored in a
    surface (e.g., wall) of the prechamber.

    (1)     Note.  The heat is usually obtained from combustion in the main
    chamber.


CLS 123/253
TXT PRECOMBUSTION AND MAIN COMBUSTION CHAMBERS IN SERIES:
    Subject matter under the class definition having at least two distinct
    physical volumes or chambers in which combustion occurs.  The combustion is
    multi-stage and is initiated in a first chamber, known as a prechamber or
    auxiliary combustion chamber, and spreads into a final or "main" combustion
    chamber where combustion is complete and expansion occurs.

    (1)     Note.  The prechamber must be a volume that is physically provided
    for and distinct from the main combustion space and must have at least
    intermittent fluid communication with the main chamber.

    (2)     Note.  Multiple prechambers may be provided for, emptying serially
    into each other and then into the main chamber, or each emptying in
    parallel into the main chamber.


CLS 123/254
TXT Chamber temperature control means:

    Subject matter under subclass 253 in which means is provided to adjust,
    maintain, heat, cool, or otherwise control the temperature of the main
    combustion chamber or prechamber.

    (1)     Note.  The means may include particular positioning or construction
    of a chamber.


CLS 123/255
TXT Vaporizing in precombustion chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 253 in which means is provided in the
    prechamber to aid in the vaporization of fuel droplets to promote complete
    and smooth burning.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254,    for an engine in which the vaporization is aided by heating.


CLS 123/256
TXT Plural precombustion chambers:

    Subject matter under subclass 253 in which more than one prechamber is
    provided.

    (1)     Note.  They may empty separately into the main chamber, serially
    into each other then into the main chamber, or both.


CLS 123/257
TXT Two-cycle:

    Subject matter under subclass 253 in which the engine operates on the
    two-stroke cycle principle.

    (1)     Note.  An engine operating in the two-stroke cycle principle
    completes its operating cycle in one crankshaft revolution.


CLS 123/258
TXT Having timed valves to precombustion and main combustion chambers:

    Subject matter under subclass 253 in which the main and prechamber each
    have at least one intake valve, with significance attributed to the
    relative valve timing.


CLS 123/259
TXT Having volumetric relation between precombustion and main combustion
    chambers:

    Subject matter under subclass 253 in which a specific ration of the volumes
    of the main and prechamber is specified.


CLS 123/260
TXT With ignition means particularly positioned relative to precombustion and
    main combustion chambers:

    Subject matter under subclass 253 in which significance is attributed to
    the location of the ignition means in relation to the pre and main chambers.


CLS 123/261
TXT With injection means particularly positioned relative to precombustion and
    main combustion chambers:

    Subject matter under subclass 253 in which significance is attributed to
    the location of the injection means in relation to the pre and main
    chambers.


CLS 123/262
TXT Having fluid whirling means:

    Subject matter under subclass 253 wherein means is provided to cause
    whirling of the fluid in the pre or main chamber or in the intake manifold
    adjacent a pre or main chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280,    for atomizer, deflector, or shield in prechamber.

    290,    for positioning of connecting passage to cause whirling.


CLS 123/263
TXT Whirling in precombustion chamber only:

    Subject matter under subclass 262 wherein the means causes whirling of the
    fluid only in the prechamber.


CLS 123/264
TXT Precombustion chamber is carried by a valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 253 in which the prechamber is attached to or
    formed as an integral part of an engine valve.


CLS 123/265
TXT Precombustion and main chambers form an "L" head: Subject matter under
    subclass 253 in which the main and prechamber are so located relative to
    each other than their cross section is in the shape of an "L".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    658,    for "L" shaped combustion chamber, per se.


CLS 123/266
TXT Precombustion chamber assembly inserted in spark plug hole:

    Subject matter under subclass 253 in which the prechamber is attached to
    the engine by insertion into the hole provided for the spark plug.

    (1)     Note.  This type of prechamber is usually used as a retrofit device
    on an engine not normally having a prechamber.  The displaced spark plug is
    usually screwed into a hole provided for in the prechamber assembly.

    (2)     Note.  Prechamber usually screws in.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273,    for other prechamber mounting means.


CLS 123/267
TXT Separate fuel or combustible mixture added to precombustion chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 266 in which fuel or air-fuel mixture is
    added to the prechamber in addition to the fuel or mixture obtained from
    the main chamber.


CLS 123/268
TXT Valveless precombustion chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 253 in which the prechamber contains no
    valving of any type.


CLS 123/269
TXT Piston shape complements precombustion chamber discharge:

    Subject matter under subclass 253 in which an engine piston is shaped to
    conform to the shape or direction of the discharge from the prechamber
    outlet and allows free flow therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  The piston may also be further shaped to direct the flow
    from the prechamber to a particular part of the main combustion chamber.


CLS 123/270
TXT Precombustion chamber liner or coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 253 in which a surface of the prechamber is
    provided with a coating or liner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280,    for deflector or shield.


CLS 123/271
TXT With liner mounting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 270 in which means is disclosed to secure the
    coating or liner within the prechamber (glue, screw, friction fit, etc.).


CLS 123/272
TXT Including combustion catalyst liner or coating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 270 in which the liner or coating contains a
    catalytic agent that aids or enhances the combustion in the prechamber.

    (1)     Note.  The catalyst may even initiate combustion in the prechamber.


CLS 123/273
TXT Precombustion chamber mounting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 253 wherein some specific structure or method
    is disclosed for fastening or removing the prechamber body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266,    for a prechamber mounted in a spark plug hole.


CLS 123/274
TXT Having combustible mixture forming means: Subject matter under subclass 253
    wherein specific means is disclosed to provide an air-fuel mixture for the
    pre or main combustion chamber.


CLS 123/275
TXT By fuel injection into precombustion or main combustion chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 274 wherein fuel at a pressure greater than
    atmospheric is introduced into either the pre or main combustion chamber.


CLS 123/276
TXT Fuel injected into precombustion chamber formed in piston:

    Subject matter under subclass 275 where fuel under pressure greater than
    atmospheric is introduced into a prechamber which is located in the engine
    piston.


CLS 123/277
TXT By fuel injection into precombustion chamber with carbureted main chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 275 wherein fuel is introduced under pressure
    greater than atmospheric into the prechamber and the main chamber is fed
    with an aspirated or carbureted mixture of air and fuel.


CLS 123/278
TXT By fuel injection into main chamber with carbureted precombustion chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 275 wherein the main chamber is charged with
    fuel at a pressure greater than atmospheric and where the  prechamber is
    fed with an aspirated or carbureted mixture of air and fuel.


CLS 123/279
TXT Piston carried precombustion chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 253 wherein the prechamber is carried by and
    mounted on the engine piston.

    (1)     Note.  The prechamber may be fueled from the combustion chamber, or
    through the piston, and/or cylinder wall.


CLS 123/280
TXT Atomizer, deflector, or shield in preccombustion chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 253 wherein the prechamber or prechamber
    throat contains an atomizer, deflector, or shield mounted in the path of
    the fuel or air-fuel mixture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270+,   for prechamber with a liner.


CLS 123/281
TXT Precombustion chamber shape is a figure of revolution: Subject matter under
    subclass 253 wherein the three-dimensional shape of the precombustion
    chamber can be formed by rotating a single planar shape, formed from a
    combination of straight or curved lines, through 360o about an axis.

    (1)     Note.  Connecting throats are not considered as part of the figure
    of revolution.

    (2)     Note.  An example would be to rotate a semicircle about a straight
    line connecting its free ends (diameter) thus forming a sphere.


CLS 123/282
TXT Figure of revolution is multishaped to form a precombustion chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 281 wherein the three-dimensional shape of
    the prechamber can be formed by rotating a plurality of separated planar
    shapes  through 360o about an axis.

    (1)     Note.  The resulting separate volumes generally have an
    interconnecting passage.


CLS 123/283
TXT Cylindrical:

    Subject matter under subclass 281 wherein the resulting 3-D shape is a
    cylinder.


CLS 123/284
TXT Spherical:

    Subject matter under subclass 281 wherein the resulting 3-D shape is a
    sphere.


CLS 123/285
TXT Precombustion chamber having a specific shape:

    Subject matter under subclass 253 wherein the prechamber has a shape
    disclosed as critical to the engine operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281+,   for a prechamber having a shape that can be formed by a figure of
    revolution.


CLS 123/286
TXT Having specific connecting passage means between precombustion and main
    combustion chambers:

    Subject matter under subclass 253 wherein significance is attributed to the
    design of the passage between the pre and main combustion chambers.

    (1)     Note.  The design is usually disclosed as being critical to the
    combustion process.


CLS 123/287
TXT With ignition means in connecting passage: Subject matter under subclass
    286 wherein combustion initiating means is employed in the connecting
    passage.


CLS 123/288
TXT Having fuel, a combustible mixture, or air added in the connecting passage:

    Subject matter under subclass 286 wherein either fuel, air, or a mixture of
    both is supplied in the connecting passage.


CLS 123/289
TXT Fluid flow through passage controlled by working piston:

    Subject matter under subclass 286 wherein the flow or fluid in the
    connecting passage between the main and pre chamber is valved or otherwise
    controlled by some portion of or attachment to the engine working piston.


CLS 123/290
TXT With whirling:

    Subject matter under subclass 289 wherein means is provided for swirling
    the fluid contained in the pre or main chamber, or the connecting passage.


CLS 123/291
TXT Multiple connecting passages:

    Subject matter under subclass 289 wherein there are multiple connecting
    passages or divisions of a single passage between the pre and main chambers.


CLS 123/292
TXT With valve means or variable orifice means in the passage:

    Subject matter under subclass 286 wherein the means is provided in the
    connection between the pre and main chambers to vary the flow path
    therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    289+,   for piston-controlled connected passage.


CLS 123/293
TXT Having multiple passages:

    Subject matter under subclass 286 wherein there are multiple connecting
    passages or divisions of a single passage between the pre and main chambers.


CLS 123/294
TXT COMBUSTION CHAMBER MEANS HAVING FUEL INJECTION ONLY:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which all fuel, liquid or
    gaseous, and unmixed with air, is supplied under pressure to the interior
    of the combustion or working chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    495+,   for a fuel pump available for supplying fuel to form the
    combustible charge in an engine of the type in this subclass.

    531+,   for engines having air-fuel mixture injected into combustion
    chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 533.2+ for
    injection nozzle structure, per se.

    417,    Pumps, subclass 364 for a fuel pump available for supplying fuel to
    form the combustion charge in an engine of the type in this subclass.


CLS 123/295
TXT Combustible mixture stratification means:
    Subject matter under subclass 294 in which means is provided to
    deliberately create a nonhomogeneous mixture charge within the combustion
    chamber.


CLS 123/296
TXT Injector is an integral part of engine valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 294 in which the fuel injector is mounted on,
    carried by, or otherwise an integral part of an engine intake or exhaust
    valve.


CLS 123/297
TXT Combination igniting means and injector:
    Subject matter under subclass 294 wherein an engine spark plug or external
    ignition device and an engine fuel injection nozzle or valve are at least
    in part combined in one structural unit.


CLS 123/298
TXT Injection of fuel onto igniter, deflector, heater, or atomizer:

    Subject matter under subclass 294 wherein the injected fuel spray pattern
    or some part of the pattern in the combustion chamber impacts on a heater,
    igniter, deflector, or atomizer.


CLS 123/299
TXT Using multiple injectors or injections:
    Subject matter under subclass 294 wherein, a plurality of injectors or a
    plurality of distinct spray patterns from the same injector are employed in
    each engine cylinder.

    (1)     Note.  This includes simultaneous or sequential injections.


CLS 123/300
TXT Alternating multiple injectors (e.g., series injection):

    Subject matter under subclass 299 wherein multiple injectors make their
    injections, one following the other, with no overlap of their injection
    periods (e.g., series injection).


CLS 123/301
TXT Injected fuel spraying into whirling fluid:
    Subject matter under subclass 294 wherein the injected fuel is sprayed into
    a whirling, swirling, or rotating fluid mass in the engine cylinder.


CLS 123/302
TXT Air entering combustion chamber through plural inlets:

    Subject matter under subclass 294 wherein the combustion chamber has plural
    separate air or oxidant inlet ports.


CLS 123/303
TXT Having inlet uncovered by working piston: Subject matter under subclass 302
    wherein at least one of the inlet ports is valved by a part of the engine
    piston during some portion of its working stroke.


CLS 123/304
TXT Injecting diverse fuels or different states of same fuel:

    Subject matter under subclass 294 wherein at least two different types of
    fuel or the same fuel in two or more different states (e.g., liquid and
    gas, are injected directly into a combustion chamber).


CLS 123/305
TXT Having a particular relationship between injection and ignition
    characteristics (e.g., nozzle location, spray pattern, timing relative to
    igniter location, timing):

    Subject matter under subclass 294 in which significance is attributed to
    the relationship between the functional or structural characteristics of
    injection and ignition.


CLS 123/306
TXT MEANS TO WHIRL FLUID BEFORE, UPON, OR AFTER ENTRY INTO COMBUSTION CHAMBER:

    Subject matter under the class definition which employs a combustion
    chamber and some means either in the inlet or outlet of the combustion
    chamber or within the chamber itself to whirl the engine fluid so that some
    fluid whirling results in the combustion chamber itself.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262+    and 290, for fluid whirling means with a prechamber.


CLS 123/307
TXT Structural projection on working piston causes whirling:

    Subject matter under subclass 306 wherein the engine working piston
    includes some form of projection which induces whirling of the engine fluid
    in the combustion chamber.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include a piston projection which
    merely directs the fluid along some nonrotary path. Whirling is rotary
    motion and is generally about the cylinder axis.


CLS 123/308
TXT Having multiple oxidant inlet means:
    Subject matter under subclass 306 wherein the combustion chamber has a
    plurality of separate air or oxidant inlet members.


CLS 123/309
TXT Specific spark plug location:

    Subject matter under subclass 306 wherein significance is attributed to the
    specific location of the spark plug with respect to the whirling fluid.


CLS 123/310
TXT COMBUSTION CHAMBER HAVING MULTIPLE SPARK GAPS:

    Subject matter under the class definition which employs a plurality of
    spark plugs per engine combustion chamber or which employs a plurality of
    spark gaps per combustion chamber with the spark gaps extending beyond the
    diameter of spark plug hole.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169+,   for multiple gap spark plug.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electrical Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 123+ for multiple
    gap spark plug.


CLS 123/311
TXT FOUR-CYCLE:

    Subject matter under the class definition having a single-acting working
    cylinder and a single working piston reciprocating therein and in which
    compression takes place in the working cylinder before ignition, said
    engine working upon a cycle comprising four distinct strokes, namely, an
    expansion stroke following ignition of the charge, followed by exhaust,
    intake, and compression strokes.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and those indented hereunder are intended to
    include four-stroke cycle engines in which at least one of the cycles is
    varied or modified from the conventional four-stroke cycle engine.  A
    nominally claimed four-stroke cycle is not sufficient for classification in
    this and indented subclasses, if there is significant disclosure for
    classification elsewhere in the class, unless there is a claim for a
    specific four-stroke engine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    559+,   for a super-charged four-cycle engine.


CLS 123/312
TXT Engine cylinder having a reciprocating sleeve valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 311 in which the four-stroke engine utilizes
    a reciprocating sleeve to valve the intake or exhaust port.  The sleeve is
    reciprocated in timed relationship with the movement of the piston in the
    cylinder.

    (1)     Note.  The sleeve valve is usually cylindrical in shape.


CLS 123/313
TXT Having a junk ring seal:

    Subject matter under subclass 312 in which a sealing ring is provided
    between the sleeve valve and cylinder head.

    (1)     Note.  The ring is referred to as a junk ring, and is usually
    located between the head and the inside surface of the sleeve valve.

    (2)     Note.  The junk ring is usually provided to prevent combustion
    residue from entering the space provided for sleeve valve and interfering
    with the operation of said valve.


CLS 123/314
TXT Having sleeve valve lubrication means:
    Subject matter under subclass 312 including means to provide for
    lubrication of the sleeve valve.


CLS 123/315
TXT Multiple exhaust:

    Subject matter under subclass 311 wherein said exhaust means comprises a
    plurality of exhaust apertures.


CLS 123/316
TXT Having subcharger associated with the cylinder:

    Subject matter under subclass 311 wherein some part of the charge is bled
    from the cylinder upon compression, stored and then returned to the system
    upon a subsequent intake stroke.


CLS 123/317
TXT Crankcase compression of air or combustible mixture to be subsequently
    pumped into the working cylinder:

    Subject matter under subclass 311 wherein the charge or any part of the
    charge is compressed at least partially in the chamber housing the engine
    crankshaft upon the downstroke of the engine working piston; the
    pressurized air or mixture is then pumped into the cylinder to insure
    complete filling.


CLS 123/318
TXT Rear compression of air or combustible mixture to be subsequently pumped
    into the working cylinder:

    Subject matter under subclass 311 wherein the charge or some part of the
    charge is compressed by the engine working piston on its downstroke in a
    volume other than that of the engine crankcase.

    (1)     Note.  This volume is generally immediately adjacent the connecting
    rod side of the engine piston and is sealed at the passage of the
    connecting rod to the crankcase.  The pressurized air or mixture is pumped
    into the cylinder to insure complete filling.


CLS 123/319
TXT ENGINE SPEED REGULATOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which the output shaft speed
    of an internal combustion engine is controlled (i.e., accelerate,
    decelerate, or maintain constant R.P.M.) by varying the power input thereto.

    (1)     Note.  The primary purpose of a speed regulator is to regulate the
    shaft speed of the engine and includes feedback or nonfeedback types.
    Since fuel injection pump governors almost always regulate the engine shaft
    speed by varying the amount of fuel injected, they have been included in
    the speed regulating subclasses.  The primary purpose of the charge former
    is to form a combustible charge to be fed to the engine at any given
    operating condition.  Charge former may utilize sensed engine parameters to
    adjust the quality of the mixture formed.  The parameters may include
    engine speed, vacuum (load), air flow, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclasses 144+ and 180.1+.

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 39.03 and 39.2+ for regulation of the
    power output of a power plant employing products of combustion.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 488+ for a speed-responsive
    device to general application.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 47+ for speed-responsive valve control.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 170+ for vehicle speed-responsive
    regulators.

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 266+ for internal resistance brakes of the fluid
    type in which no significant internal combustion engine is claimed.

    477,    Interrelated Power Delivery Controls, Including Engine Control, for
    interrelated controls between an engine and a transmission, clutch, or
    brake.


CLS 123/320
TXT Responsive to deceleration mode (e.g., engine acting as a brake):

    Subject matter under subclass 319 wherein the speed regulator senses high
    manifold vacuum, closed throttle, and rpm above idle and responds to cause
    or attempt to cause a further reduction in engine rpm.

    (1)     Note.  In many instances, the speed regulator includes means to
    reduce pollutants in the exhaust gas causes by the deceleration condition.


CLS 123/321
TXT Valve timing altering means (e.g., axially sliding cam shift):

    Subject matter under subclass 320 in which a device is provided to alter
    the instant at which opening or closing of an engine valve begins, to cause
    the engine to act as a brake.


CLS 123/322
TXT Electrical means adapted to alter valve timing:

    Subject matter under subclass 321 having means to change the amount of time
    the intake or exhaust valve is open, each cycle wherein said means is
    electric.


CLS 123/323
TXT Exhaust throttling or blocking:

    Subject matter under subclass 320 to throttle or block the exhaust as the
    engine acts as a brake.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclass 273 for a brake on an internal combustion engine
    acting by restricting the exhaust from said engine.


CLS 123/324
TXT Part of the air or combustible mixture to the engine cylinder omitted:

    Subject matter under subclass 320 that includes means to omit a portion of
    the engine input air or charge, further decelerating the motor or clean the
    exhaust of the already decelerating motor.


CLS 123/325
TXT Deceleration responsive cutoff of fuel to engine (e.g., pollution control):

    Subject matter under subclass 320 including means to stop fuel flow of the
    engine to decal the engine or clean up the emissions of the already
    decelerating engine.


CLS 123/326
TXT Rich resupply of fuel at end of deceleration:

    Subject matter under subclass 325 to deliver a squirt of fuel to the engine
    to facilitate a burst of power for an impending acceleration.


CLS 123/327
TXT Auxiliary air fed to the engine:

    Subject matter under subclass 320 wherein means are provided to supply
    additional air to the engine cylinder in response to a deceleration
    condition.


CLS 123/328
TXT Idle jet bypassed by a slight opening of the throttle:

    Subject matter under subclass 320 in which the speed regulator includes
    means to open the throttle butterfly slightly when the engine is in a
    deceleration condition to prevent an excessive amount of fuel from being
    drawn from the idle jet.


CLS 123/329
TXT Having means to retard spark (e.g., ignition timing):

    Subject matter under subclass 320 in which the speed regulator includes
    means to retard the spark firing instant so that the plug fires closer to
    or after top dead center.


CLS 123/330
TXT Engine speed reduction by overriching the combustible mixture (e.g.,
    choking engine): Subject matter under subclass 319 to regulate the engine
    speed by adding more fuel to the mix or otherwise providing less air per
    part of mix, thus producing a choking effect on the engine, resulting in
    engine speed reduction.


CLS 123/331
TXT By electric means:

    Subject matter under subclass 330 wherein said engine speed regulating
    means is electrical or is an electrically actuated mechiready decelerating
    engine.


CLS 123/332
TXT Engine speed reduction by fuel cutoff:
    Subject matter under subclass 319 to regulate the engine speed by stopping
    the fuel supply to the engine.


CLS 123/333
TXT By electric means:

    Subject matter under subclass 332 including means to stop fuel flow to the
    engine wherein said means is electric or is an electrically actuated
    mechanical or fluidic means.


CLS 123/334
TXT Engine speed reduction by partial or complete omission of the ignition:

    Subject matter under subclass 319 in which a means to regulate engine speed
    is operative to prevent ignition in at least one engine cylinder.


CLS 123/335
TXT By electric means:

    Subject matter under subclass 334 in which a means to prevent ignition is
    electrically operated.


CLS 123/336
TXT Having plural throttle valve structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 319 having more than one butterfly valve in
    the engine intake (e.g., carburetor).


CLS 123/337
TXT Specific throttle valve structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 319 wherein the carburetor or engine intake
    has a unique butterfly configuration that is significant to its operation
    as a speed regulating device.


CLS 123/338
TXT Fuel injection pump bypass control:

    Subject matter under subclass 319 having a fuel injection pump bypass
    governor so that fuel is diverted from the pumping chamber during the pump
    intake stroke, or part of the fuel delivered past the pump outlet valve is
    diverted from delivery to the associated engine.

    (1)     Note.  The fuel diverted is usually conducted back to the supply
    tank or inlet of the pump.


CLS 123/339.1
TXT Idle speed control:

    Subject matter under subclass 319 (a) wherein the output shaft has a varied
    minimum operating speed, and (b) comprising a manual input member and means
    for adjusting the minimum operating speed of the shaft while maintaining
    the manual input member (e.g., accelerator pedal, hand control) at a
    minimum position.

    (1)     Note.  An engine idle speed control responsive to a signal
    indicative of an engine operating condition or indicative of an external
    load applied to the engine (e.g., power steering pump, lights, electric
    generator) is provided for here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants, appropriate subclasses, especially
    subclasses 40+ for engine idle speed control responsive to a sensed
    parameter of an electric generator.

    477,    Interrelated Power Delivery Controls, Including Engine Control,
    appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 34+ for an engine idle speed
    control responsive to a signal indicative of a transmission, clutch, or
    brake condition.


CLS 123/339.11
TXT By regulating spark ignition timing:

    Subject matter under subclass 339.1 comprising a combustion chamber, a
    combustible mixture, a piston traveling in the chamber, a rotatable
    crankshaft, and means creating a short pulse or flow of electric current
    for causing the combustible mixture to burn in the combustion chamber
    wherein the minimum output shaft operating speed is adjusted by varying the
    point of piston travel or crankshaft rotation at which the short pulse or
    flow of electric current occurs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    418+,   for an internal combustion engine spark ignition timing control
    adjusted in response to sensed engine shaft output speed.


CLS 123/339.12
TXT And air-fuel ratio feedback controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 339.1 comprising a combustion chamber having
    a space therein, a combustible mixture containing an oxidant and a fuel,
    and wherein the minimum output shaft operating speed is adjusted and the
    relative proportion of oxidant and fuel in the combustible mixture which is
    fed to the combustion space or chamber is varied according to a sensed
    parameter indicative of the proportion of oxidant in the mixture.

    (1)     Note.  The parameter sensed may be indicative of an amount of a
    component of the combustible mixture fed to the combustion chamber or an
    amount of a component of the exhaust gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    344,    for a device for controlling the engine speed by varying the
    air-fuel ratio.

    680,    for a charge-forming device which is responsive to engine exhaust
    gas condition and idling condition.

    704,    for a charge-forming device which is responsive to a sensed
    air-fuel ratio prior to combustion.


CLS 123/339.13
TXT Manual adjustment:

    Subject matter under subclass 339.1 wherein the means for adjusting the
    minimum output shaft operating speed of the internal combustion engine is
    adjusted by hand or through use of a hand-manipulated tool.

    (1)     Note.  The manual adjustment may be combined with an electrically
    operated control device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    carburetor adjustments, per se.


CLS 123/339.14
TXT Electrically operated control means:

    Subject matter under subclass 339.1 wherein the means for adjusting the
    minimum output shaft operating speed of the internal combustion engine is
    powered by electrical energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    350+,   for electrical sensing or regulating of engine speed with the
    engine being part of a closed loop condition responsive feedback system.

    395+,   for an open loop condition responsive speed regulator for an engine.


CLS 123/339.15
TXT With fail-safe, backup, or malfunction detecting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 339.14 and wherein the electrically powered
    adjusting means includes an electrical circuit having a circuit element and
    wherein the electrically powered adjusting means (a) upon sensing failure
    in the circuit element shifts operation (1) into a substitute circuit, or
    (2) to a substitute mechanism to accomplish the same function, or (b)
    senses functioning of the circuit or circuit element outside of acceptable
    parameters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    479,    for a charge-forming device having an electrically actuated fuel
    injector and an actuator circuit including a fail-safe, backup, or failure
    indicator.

    690,    for an exhaust gas condition responsive charge-forming device
    including a fail-safe, backup or malfunction means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, appropriate subclasses for an
    electrical alarm or indicating system.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, appropriate
    subclasses for an electrical fail-safe or backup system without significant
    internal combustion engine structure.

    701,    Data Processing, Navigation, and Relative Location, subclasses 99+
    for control means for an internal-combustion engine including specific
    computer or data processing details.


CLS 123/339.16
TXT External load condition responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 339.14 wherein the electrically powered
    adjusting means is adjusted or modified in response to a signal from a
    transducer responsive to a parameter indicative of the resistance to
    rotation of the output shaft of the engine by a device driven by the engine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 69.3 for a motor vehicle having means to
    increase the idle speed of an internal combustion engine to compensate for
    an accessory load.


CLS 123/339.17
TXT Air conditioner operating  mode responsive (i.e., compressor on-off):

    Subject matter under subclass 339.16 including (1) an apparatus (a) for
    lowering a temperature and humidity of an enclosed space, and (b) having a
    clutch compressor and (2) wherein the minimum engine output shaft operating
    speed is adjusted in response to a parameter indicative of the state of
    engagement (i.e., on or off) of the compressor clutch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.19,  for an internal combustion engine cooled by a refrigeration cycle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 323.1+
    for engine idle speed control in response to a specific air conditioner
    parameter (e.g., refrigerant pressure).


CLS 123/339.18
TXT Accessory load (e.g., lights, heater blower motor, radiator fan motor,
    generator) on engine electrical system responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 339.16 comprising an ancillary device that
    induces a resistance to rotation of the output shaft and wherein the
    electrically powered means for adjusting the minimum engine output shaft
    operating speed responds to a condition indicative of the resistance to
    rotation of the output shaft induced by the ancillary device.

    (1)     Note.  An internal combustion engine idle speed control electric
    generator combination in which the electric generator is merely a nominal
    load driven by the internal combustion engine is found here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants, subclasses 40+ for the combination of an
    internal combustion engine idle speed control and an electric generator in
    which is included (a) any detail of the generator, (b) any relationship
    between a generator part and an internal combustion engine, or (c) any
    control of the internal combustion engine in response to the electricity
    produced by the generator.


CLS 123/339.19
TXT By engine speed error feedback:

    Subject matter under subclass 339.14 wherein the electrically powered
    adjusting means (a) measures an actual minimum engine output shaft
    operating speed, (b) compares the measured output shaft operating speed to
    a target minimum output shaft operating speed, and (c) adjusts the measured
    output shaft operating speed to achieve the target minimum output shaft
    operating speed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    352+,   for electrical sensing or regulating of engine speed with the
    engine being part of a closed loop condition responsive feedback system and
    an error signal producing circuit.

    395+,   for an open loop condition responsive speed regulator system for an
    engine.


CLS 123/339.2
TXT Dynamic state variable model:

    Subject matter under subclass 339.19 wherein the electrically powered
    adjusting means (a) has a preprogrammed memory of stored values from a
    previous test phase (e.g., bench test), (b) compares actual engine
    condition values to the stored values, and (c) anticipates adjustments
    necessary to control the minimum output shaft operating speed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    350+,   for electrical sensing or regulating of engine speed with the
    engine being part of a closed loop condition responsive feedback system.

    395+,   for an open loop condition responsive speed regulator for an engine.

    418+,   for a spark ignition timing control responsive to engine output
    shaft operating speed.

    480,    for an electrically actuated fuel injector actuator circuit having
    a microprocessor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    701,    Data Processing, Navigation, and Relative Location, subclasses 101+
    for control means for an internal-combustion engine including specific
    computer or data processing details.


CLS 123/339.21
TXT And integral or derivative control:

    Subject matter under subclass 339.19 and wherein the electrically powered
    adjusting means (a) receives a signal indicative of an engine operating
    parameter, and (b) either (1) determines on a continuous basis the total
    value of the parameter being measured as a function of time or (2)
    determines a rate of change of the parameter being measured as a function
    of time, and (c) uses the result to vary the minimum engine shaft operating
    speed.


CLS 123/339.22
TXT And temperature responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 339.19 and wherein the electrically powered
    adjusting means additionally adjusts the minimum engine shaft operating
    speed in response to changes in temperature (e.g., temperature of an engine
    component, engine fluid, or the ambient environment).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    362,    for electrical sensing or regulating of engine speed of a cold
    engine with the engine being part of a closed loop condition responsive
    feedback system having an error signal producing circuit.

    588,    for a charge-forming device having the quantity of auxiliary air or
    oxygen added to the combustible mixture controlled by engine temperature.


CLS 123/339.23
TXT Controlling throttle bypass:

    Subject matter under subclass 339.19 comprising a combustion mixture
    forming conduit having a means for varying its cross-sectional area and
    wherein (a) a fluid passage extends from a location upstream from the means
    for varying the cross-sectional area of the mixture forming conduit to a
    location downstream from the means for varying the cross-sectional area of
    the mixture forming conduit, and (b) a device controls the flow of fluid
    through the fluid passage to vary the minimum engine output shaft operating
    speed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    585+,   for a charge-forming device having a quantity of auxiliary air or
    oxygen added to the combustible mixture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, appropriate subclasses for specific
    details of a valve of general utility.


CLS 123/339.24
TXT Temperature responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 339.14 wherein the electrically powered
    adjusting means adjusts the minimum engine shaft operating speed in
    response to changes in temperature (e.g., temperature of an engine
    component, engine fluid, or the ambient environment).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179.16+, for an engine starting device with fuel or intake air control.

    588,    for a charge-forming device having the quantity of auxiliary air or
    oxygen added to the combustible mixture controlled by engine temperature.


CLS 123/339.25
TXT Including rotary actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 339.14 wherein the electrically powered
    adjusting means includes a member which is turned about an axis by a source
    of electrical energy.

    (1)     Note.  The member may turn about its axis less than 360 degrees and
    still be proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    361,    for electrical sensing or regulating of engine speed with the
    engine being part of a closed loop condition responsive feedback system and
    an engine speed error producing circuit controlling an electric throttle
    operator.

    399,    for an open loop condition responsive engine speed regulator having
    an electrical device between the input and the speed regulator.

    585+,   for a charge-forming device having a quantity of auxiliary air or
    oxygen added to the combustible mixture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, appropriate subclasses for a valve of
    general utility and a valve actuator therefor, and especially subclasses
    129.01+ for an electrically actuated valve.


CLS 123/339.26
TXT Stepping motor type:

    Subject matter under subclass 339.25 comprising (a) a device which converts
    electrical energy into mechanical energy which tends to assume a
    predetermined angular position in response to being continuously energized,
    and indexes in discreet angular increments of essentially uniform magnitude
    as a function of electrical pulse inputs, and (b) wherein the member which
    is turned about its axis is driven by the device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 49+ for a specific rotary step-by-step motor of
    general utility, per se.


CLS 123/339.27
TXT Including linear reciprocating solenoid control device:

    Subject matter under subclass 339.14 wherein the electrically powered
    adjusting means comprises an actuator which uses electrical energy to
    change the position of a movable element to regulate the minimum output
    shaft operating speed, the actuator having a coil and an armature, and the
    coil and armature being mounted for relative movement in a straight line
    back and forth along its axis when the coil is energized.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    339.25, for an idle speed control including a device having a rotary
    actuator.

    585+,   for a charge-forming device having a quantity of auxiliary air or
    oxygen added to the combustible mixture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, especially subclasses 129.09+ for
    plural solenoid valve arrangements, and subclasses 129.15+ for solenoid
    valves, per se.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 15+ for an
    electromagnetic reciprocating motor, of general utility, in which the
    elements move in a straight line.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 220+ for specific details of an electromagnet
    having an armature.


CLS 123/339.28
TXT Having valve controlled vacuum actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 339.27 wherein the electrically powered
    adjusting means controls the flow of a fluid through a passage connected to
    an expansible chamber of negative fluid pressure, and the negative fluid
    pressure in the chamber is used to actuate the movable element that varies
    the minimum output shaft operating speed.


CLS 123/339.29
TXT By overriding injection pump governor:

    Subject matter under subclass 339.1 (a) comprising a fuel pressurizing and
    metering device, a mechanical fuel quantity regulator that varies the
    amount of fuel fed to the engine from the fuel pressurizing and metering
    device at all operating speeds, and (b) wherein the means for adjusting the
    minimum output shaft operating speed of the internal combustion engine
    modifies operation of the mechanical fuel quantity regulator when the
    engine is at the minimum output shaft operating speed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    339.13, for an idle speed control having manual adjustment.


CLS 123/342
TXT Regulator changes length of accelerator linkage:

    Subject matter under subclass 319 having means to change the length of the
    linkage connecting the engine throttle valve and the operating lever or
    pedal.

    (1)     Note.  Changing the linkage length changes the amount that the
    throttle valve may be opened.


CLS 123/343
TXT Regulator accessory (e.g., cleaner, adjusting tool, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 319 for use with an engine speed regulator
    not provided for elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  Including accessory safety device, cleaner, tool.


CLS 123/344
TXT Charge proportion varying (e.g., the fuel-air ratio is varied):

    Subject matter under subclass 319 including means for regulating the speed
    of an engine by automatically varying the relative amount of air and fuel
    forming the combustible charge.

    (1)     Note.  The volume of each successive charge remains constant and
    the pressure thereof being at or substantially at atmospheric pressure at
    the beginning of the compression stroke.  The proportion of air and fuel
    may be varied by (a) controlling the flow of both air and fuel, (b)
    controlling the flow of one constituent, leaving the other uncontrolled, or
    (c) supplying variable and regulated quantities of an air-fuel mixture to
    the working cylinder along with an additional amount of fluid as is
    necessary to fill the cylinder at atmospheric pressure.


CLS 123/345
TXT By changing valve lift:

    Subject matter under subclass 319 in which the speed regulator acts to
    alter the lift of a cyclically operated valve controlling the flow of the
    fuel-air mixture to or from the combustion chamber.

    (1)     Note.  A device which shuts this value or which holds it to a
    constant lift less than full lift is also properly classified in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    347     and 348, for a device which holds the valve at full open position.


CLS 123/346
TXT Intake valve lift altered:

    Subject matter under subclass 345 in which the regulated valve is the
    mixture inlet valve.


CLS 123/347
TXT By changing valve timing:

    Subject matter under subclass 319 in which the speed regulator acts to
    alter the timing of a cyclically operated valve controlling the flow of the
    fuel-air mixture to or from the combustion chamber.

    (1)     Note.  Such a device which shuts the valve or which holds its lift
    to a constant valve less than full lift is classified in subclass 345.  A
    device which holds the valve at full open is properly classified in this
    subclass.


CLS 123/348
TXT Intake valve timing altered:

    Subject matter under subclass 347 in which the cyclically operated valve is
    the mixture inlet valve.


CLS 123/349
TXT Having condition responsive means with engine being part of a closed
    feedback system (e.g., cruise control):

    Subject matter under subclass 319 in which the speed regulator (a) responds
    to an engine parameter and produces an initial speed control output to
    alter the present speed of the engine, (b) monitors the engine's response
    to this initial speed control output, and (c) if necessary, modifies the
    speed control output of the regulator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicle, subclasses 170+ for a vehicle speed regulating
    system.


CLS 123/350
TXT Electrical sensing or regulating:

    Subject matter under subclass 349 in which the parameter is electrically
    sensed or in which the regulating action is electrically effected.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 170+ for an electrical vehicle speed
    regulator.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 30.01 for electromagnetically
    actuated fluid pressure pilot valve, and subclasses 129.01+ for
    electrically operated valves.

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants, subclasses 40+ for general purposes
    speed regulating systems for generators.


CLS 123/351
TXT Engine overspeed sensing with an indicator or alarm and speed regulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 350 in which the engine speed is sensed and
    the speed regulated to decrease rpm when the engine speed is higher than a
    predetermined limiting speed, and combined with an overspeed alarm or
    indicator.


CLS 123/352
TXT Engine speed sensing having an error signal producing circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 350 in which the regulator employs a specific
    type or design of circuit to (a) compare the actual engine speed with a
    desired or preset speed, and (b) produce an output signal when the two
    speeds are unequal.


CLS 123/353
TXT Having variable duty cycle multivibrator (e.g., length of "time on" in each
    cycle): Subject matter under subclass 352 in which the regulator employs an
    output of a variable duty cycle controlled oscillator to effect the speed
    regulation.

    (1)     Note.  The oscillator or multivibrator operates at a constant
    frequency with regulation effected by varying the length or "on" time of
    the output control pulse.


CLS 123/354
TXT Having variable frequency multivibrator (e.g., number of "time ons" per
    unit of time):

    Subject matter under subclass 352 in which the regulator includes a
    variable frequency oscillator or multivibrator having a constant length
    output pulse.


CLS 123/355
TXT Having phase difference detector:

    Subject matter under subclass 352 in which the error signal producing
    circuit has means to compare an electrical signal representative of the
    desired engine speed with an electrical signal representative of the actual
    engine speed in order to determine if the two signals are coincident in
    time (in phase) with each other, thereby producing an error signal if the
    signals compared are found not to be coincident in time (out of phase).


CLS 123/356
TXT Circuit resonates (e.g., tuned) at governed speed:

    Subject matter under subclass 352 in which the error signal producing
    circuit has means to compare the actual engine speed to the desired engine
    speed and contains means to tune the circuit so that the circuit resonates
    or oscillates, producing no error signal output when the speeds compared
    are the same.


CLS 123/357
TXT Electric fuel injection pump governor:
    Subject matter under subclass 352 in which the output of the error signal
    producing circuit is used to control the engine speed by controlling the
    fuel delivery of a fuel injection pump.


CLS 123/358
TXT Max-min governor (i.e., no control in between):

    Subject matter under subclass 357 in which the circuit output regulates the
    fuel injection pump output to maintain a minimum engine speed and prevent
    engine speed from exceeding a maximum value.


CLS 123/359
TXT Fail-safe feature (e.g., cuts off fuel pump):

    Subject matter under subclass 357 in which safety means is provided to
    effect backup control when part of the electric regulator fails.

    (1)     Note.  The said safety means may cut off the pump, reduce the pump
    output to effect engine idling, etc.


CLS 123/360
TXT Circuit controls a fluid throttle operator (e.g., vacuum):

    Subject matter under subclass 352 in which the output of the circuit is
    used to control a throttle valve or speed adjusting mechanism that is fluid
    powered.

    (1)     Note.  The fluid may be air (vacuum or pressurized), lubricating
    oil, fuel, etc.


CLS 123/361
TXT Circuit controls an electric throttle operator:

    Subject matter under subclass 352 in which the output of the circuit is
    used to control a throttle valve or speed adjusting mechanism that is
    electrically powered.


CLS 123/362
TXT Cold engine control:

    Subject matter under subclass 350 in which the regulator includes means to
    effect special control of engine speed during engine starting or warm-up
    conditions.


CLS 123/363
TXT Mechanical sensor or regulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 349 in which the sensor or regulator is a
    mechanical device, e.g., lever, gear, cam.


CLS 123/364
TXT Fuel injection pump governor (e.g., diesel):

    Subject matter under subclass 363 in which the engine employs a fuel
    injector regulator to control the speed of the engine by adjusting the
    amount of fuel fed to the engine by its fuel injection pump.

    (1)     Note.  The regulator usually controls the position of a pump "rack"
    or control rod to regulate fuel quantity in response to at least engine
    speed, and may be responsive to other engine parameters as well.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    375,    for fuel delivery rate controlled by fuel pressure.


CLS 123/365
TXT Governor override:

    Subject matter under subclass 364 in which means is provided to prevent or
    modify normal action of the regulator.

    (1)     Note.  The means may be provided for as an integral part of the
    speed regulator.


CLS 123/366
TXT Engine starting or warm-up control:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 in which the means for modifying normal
    action of the injection pump governor is operative during starting or
    warm-up of the associated engine.


CLS 123/367
TXT Variable throttle or control rod stop:
    Subject matter under subclass 365 in which the means for modifying normal
    action of the injection pump governor operates to limit the distance that
    the governor can move the control rod (rack) of the pump.


CLS 123/369
TXT Three-dimensional cam control:

    Subject matter under subclass 364 in which the governor includes a rotary
    cam whose profile is such that axial movement of the cam is effective to
    alter the cam lift action (e.g., at one axial extreme the cam provides
    maximum lift to a valve while at the other extreme minimum lift is
    produced).


CLS 123/370
TXT Acceleration responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 364 in which the governor includes means for
    special adjustment of the pump output in response to a sudden demand for an
    increase in the power output of the engine (acceleration).


CLS 123/371
TXT Deceleration responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 364 in which the injector pump governor is
    responsive to (a) high manifold vacuum, (b) closed throttle, and (c) rpm
    above idle.


CLS 123/372
TXT Biased axial link (e.g., sliding rod with spring return):

    Subject matter under subclass 364 in which the governor regulation is
    effected through a biased axially moving rod or link.

    (1)     Note.  One end of the link is connected to the fuel pump rack,
    i.e., member which determines pump delivery, the other end of the link is
    acted upon by at least one engine parameter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    373+,   for axial link devices in which the parameter end of the link is
    acted on by a pivoted link.


CLS 123/373
TXT Pivoted link connected to pump rack:
    Subject matter under subclass 364 in which the governor regulation is
    effected by a pivoted lever one end of which is connected to the fuel pump
    rack (member which controls pump delivery amount).

    (1)     Note.  The lever is pivoted somewhere along its length  at a
    fulcrum or pivot and the other end of the lever is acted upon by at least
    one engine parameter.


CLS 123/374
TXT Movable fulcrum (e.g., slot and pin):
    Subject matter under subclass 373 in which the point at which the lever is
    pivoted (fulcrum point) is movable.


CLS 123/375
TXT Fuel injection pressure governor:

    Subject matter under subclass 363 wherein speed regulation is effected by
    means that controls the fuel injection pressure.


CLS 123/376
TXT Throttle positioning:

    Subject matter under subclass 363 in which the speed regulator is effected
    by means controlling the position of an engine intake throttle.


CLS 123/377
TXT Safety override of dangerous manual position:

    Subject matter under subclass 376 wherein feedback means is provided to
    override a manually positioned throttle so as to prevent an unsafe or
    undesired engine operating condition.


CLS 123/378
TXT Fluidic sensor or regulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 349 wherein the engine speed or other
    parameter sensed, the sensing action, the regulator, or the output control
    actuator is fluidic.

    (1)     Note.  The term fluidic is intended to include pneumatic or
    hydraulic controls or a fluidic amplifier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 479+ for combustion engine
    induction-type valves which are responsive to changes in line condition.


CLS 123/379
TXT Fuel injection pump governor:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 in which the fuel for the engine is
    provided to an engine cylinder or intake manifold by a fuel injection pump
    and in which the speed of the engine is regulated by varying the delivery
    amount of the pump.

    (1)     Note.  The system must include a speed input to a speed regulator
    and must be fluidic.  The system is generally used on diesel or a
    compression ignition engine but can include Otto or a spark ignition engine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    390,    for fuel delivery rate controlled by fuel pressure.


CLS 123/380
TXT Barometric sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 379 wherein atmospheric pressure is an input
    parameter to the injection pump governor.


CLS 123/381
TXT Fuel viscosity sensor (e.g., temperature sensing):

    Subject matter under subclass 379 wherein the viscosity of the injected
    fuel is an input parameter to the injection pump governor.

    (1)     Note.  This input may be fuel temperature.


CLS 123/382
TXT Manifold pressure sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 379 where the engine intake manifold pressure
    is a parameter input to the fuel injection pump governor.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes sensing the pressure at a venturi in
    the intake manifold.


CLS 123/383
TXT Supercharger:

    Subject matter under subclass 382 where a supercharger or other means of
    pressurizing the engine intake air is employed.


CLS 123/384
TXT Floating piston-type governor (e.g., Bessiere):

    Subject matter under subclass 379 in which the injection pump governor
    includes a freely floating piston whose position within the pumping
    cylinder is determined by (a) the amount of fluid trapped between said
    floating piston and a second driving piston, and (b) the position of the
    driving piston, and in which the effective pumping stroke may be controlled
    by varying the amount of trapped fluid during part or all of the pumping
    cycle.


CLS 123/385
TXT Liquid fluid governor:

    Subject matter under subclass 379 in which the sensor or regulating action
    of the governor is provided by means that makes use of a liquid fluid.


CLS 123/386
TXT Lubrication pressure sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 385 in which the governor control means is
    responsive to the pressure of the fluid used to lubricate the engine.


CLS 123/387
TXT Fuel pressure sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 385 in which the fluid is the fuel that is to
    be burned in the engine.


CLS 123/388
TXT Override for basic mechanical governor:
    Subject matter under subclass 385 in which liquid fluid means acts to
    modify or prevent operation of a mechanical governor. This may occur during
    starting, cold engine operation, etc.


CLS 123/389
TXT Intake manifold vacuum responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 where the speed regulator utilizes engine
    intake manifold vacuum as in input.


CLS 123/390
TXT Fuel injection pressure governor:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 wherein speed regulation is effected by
    means that controls the fuel injection pressure.


CLS 123/391
TXT Responsive to intake airflow:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 in which engine speed is regulated in
    response to the output from a device sensing the flow of air being inducted
    into the engine air intake.


CLS 123/392
TXT Responsive to cooling fan airflow:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 in which engine speed is regulated in
    response to the output from a device sensing the flow of air past or
    through the engine cooling means.

    (1)     Note.  Including airflow through radiator of water-cooled engine.


CLS 123/393
TXT Responsive to exhaust gas:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 wherein the fluid sensed is the engine
    exhaust gas.


CLS 123/394
TXT By combustion air or air-fuel mixture cutoff:

    Subject matter under subclass 349 wherein the flow of the engine's intake
    air or air-fuel mixture is throttled or cutoff by a valve means in the
    engine intake (other than the engine throttle) acting in response to engine
    speed.

    (1)     Note.  The valve means may itself sense the engine rpm by
    responding to airflow rate.


CLS 123/395
TXT Open loop condition responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 319 in which speed regulating means responds
    to (a) an engine parameter, or (b) an environmental condition to alter the
    present engine speed without regard to the resulting engine speed.


CLS 123/396
TXT Resistance or override acts on input connection to regulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 395 in which condition responsive means are
    provided to alter or override the action of a speed control of the engine.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are devices that act to override a
    closed-loop device but do not themselves have a feedback system.


CLS 123/397
TXT Shutdown safety device:

    Subject matter under subclass 396 which acts to place the speed regulator
    at idle or full stop position when a condition indicating an unsafe or
    otherwise undesirable engine condition occurs.


CLS 123/398
TXT Throttle position lock:

    Subject matter under subclass 396 that act in response to a sensed
    condition to lock the speed regulator at a particular throttle position.


CLS 123/399
TXT Having an electrical device between input and speed regulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 395 in which there is some electrical device
    in the control path between the sensed engine condition and the actual
    engine speed regulator.

    (1)     Note.  This includes any condition sensor, comparison circuitry, or
    output actuator.  This subclass includes any system in which only a part of
    the control path is electrical.


CLS 123/400
TXT Mechanical connection between input and speed regulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 395 in which the control path between the
    sensed engine condition and the actual engine speed regulator is mechanical.


CLS 123/401
TXT Fluidic device between input and regulator: Subject matter under subclass
    395 in which there is some fluidic device-hydraulic or pneumatic-in the
    control path between the sensed engine condition and the engine speed
    regulator.

    (1)     Note.  This includes any condition sensor, comparison device, or
    output actuator.  This subclass includes any system in which only a part of
    the control path is fluidic.


CLS 123/402
TXT Charge volume varying (e.g., total amount of mixture fed to engine is
    varied; relative amounts of air and fuel are fixed): Subject matter under
    subclass 319 for regulating the speed of an internal combustion engine by
    varying the volume at constant pressure of successive charge of air-fuel
    mixture fed to the working cylinder.

    (1)     Note.  The relative amount of air and fuel is fixed.


CLS 123/403
TXT Throttling (e.g., volume varying using throttle valve):

    Subject matter under subclass 402 in which the flow of fuel, oxidant, or
    combustible mixture to the engine or mixing chamber is controlled by
    varying the cross-sectional area of the mixture conduit or of the conduits
    of the components of the mixture, thereby varying the volume of charge for
    induction into the engine cylinder.


CLS 123/404
TXT Suction operated supply valve lift regulating:

    Subject matter under subclass 402 in which the volume of the charge of
    combustible mixture to the engine is varied by controlling the degree of
    opening or amount of lift of an intake valve whose operation is dependent
    on the suction created in the cylinder during the intake stroke.


CLS 123/405
TXT By engine operated valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 402 in which said device includes an engine
    driven valve and acts either to open the valve to a variable degree during
    the entire engine intake stroke, or open the valve during variable portions
    of the intake stroke.

    (1)     Note.  The regulator may include a valve to control the flow of
    mixture or valves to individually control the flow of the mixture
    constituents.


CLS 123/406
TXT SPARK IGNITION TIMING CONTROL:

    Subject matter under the class definition which adjust or control the
    timing of the ignition spark.  "Timing" is defined as the point of piston
    travel or crankshaft rotation at which the igniting spark occurs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146.5   and 164, for ignition distributors having adjustable timing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 19+ for
    adjustable ignition distributor or breaker points.


CLS 123/407
TXT Vacuum timing control:

    Subject matter under subclass 406 in which the motor or other means
    controlling the timing uses a vacuum as its motive or actuating power
    source.


CLS 123/408
TXT Multiple diaphragms:

    Subject matter under subclass 407 in which the vacuum actuated control
    means utilizes a plurality of diaphragms.


CLS 123/409
TXT Fluid delay in fluid path line from vacuum source:

    Subject matter under subclass 407 in which the fluid path to the actuating
    motor or means contains a fluid delay means, e.g., restrictive orifice.


CLS 123/410
TXT Including sensor responsive to barometric pressure to alter vacuum level:

    Subject matter under subclass 407 wherein means responsive to barometric or
    atmospheric pressure acts to vary the pressure or level of the actuating
    vacuum.


CLS 123/411
TXT Increasing vacuum retards the spark:
    Subject matter under subclass 407 wherein the actuating means acts to
    retard the ignition spark timing upon an increasing vacuum signal.


CLS 123/412
TXT Barometric pressure responsive controller: Subject matter under subclass
    406 wherein the ignition timing control means is responsive to barometric
    or atmospheric pressure.


CLS 123/413
TXT By mechanical or hydraulic link to throttle valve or accelerator:

    Subject matter under subclass 406 wherein the timing is controlled at least
    in part by mechanical or hydraulic linkage between the engine throttle
    valve or accelerator and an ignition timing control member.


CLS 123/414
TXT Having engine shaft position sensor:
    Subject matter under subclass 406 in which the timing control means has an
    engine shaft (crank, cam, etc.) position sensor that is significantly
    claimed.


CLS 123/415
TXT Analog electronic control:

    Subject matter under subclass 406 wherein the timing control utilizes some
    electrical or electronic means which functions in analog manner where the
    data used or calculations made are represented by analogous physical
    magnitudes or electrical signals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    701,    Data Processing, Navigation, and Relative Location, subclass 101
    for electronic control of internal-combustion engines.


CLS 123/416
TXT Digital electronic control:

    Subject matter under subclass 406 wherein the timing control utilizes a
    digital memory, digital counting operation, or other digital decision
    making circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    701,    Data Processing, Navigation, and Relative Location, subclasses 102+
    for digital or programmable data processors which control
    internal-combustion engines.


CLS 123/417
TXT Having microprocessor:

    Subject matter under subclass 416 wherein the system employs a solid-state
    digital logic device that uses a prestored "program"  (internal or
    external) to change or generate certain output signals in response to
    changes in the input signal(s).


CLS 123/418
TXT Speed responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 406 wherein the ignition timing control
    responds to engine rpm.


CLS 123/419
TXT Responsive to instantaneous changes in engine speed (e.g., roughness):

    Subject matter under subclass 418 in which the timing control is responsive
    to instantaneous changes in engine speed, which signal at least partial
    misfires in combustion.

    (1)     Note.  A detector usually measures speed changes at the engine
    crankshaft.


CLS 123/420
TXT Centrifugal timing mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 418 wherein the engine spark timing control
    responds to a speed signal generated by a centrifugal device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 31 for
    centrifugal advance mechanisms for ignition distributors.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, subclasses 1+ for a speed responsive device for adjusting
    the relative rotational position of coupled members.


CLS 123/421
TXT Ambient or engine temperature responsive: Subject matter under subclass 406
    in which the means that controls the spark timing is responsive to ambient
    or engine temperature other than combustion temperature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    425,    for combustion temperature-responsive devices.


CLS 123/422
TXT Acceleration responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 406 in which the spark timing control device
    includes means to sense a demand for increased power output from the engine.


CLS 123/423
TXT Deceleration responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 406 in which the spark timing control device
    includes means to sense a decrease in the power output from the engine,
    i.e., the engine acts as a brake.


CLS 123/424
TXT Starting or cold running condition responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 406 in which the means that controls the
    spark timing detects, and is responsive to, at least one engine or
    environmental parameter which indicates the engine's condition during or
    before a starting attempt or during the engine warm-up period after
    starting.


CLS 123/425
TXT Cylinder pressure or cylinder temperature responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 406 in which the spark timing control means
    includes an input from a cylinder combustion temperature or a cylinder
    combustion pressure sensor.


CLS 123/426
TXT Feedback correction:

    Subject matter under subclass 406 in which means is provided to measure the
    spark timing instituted by the output (desired timing) of the control means
    and compare this measured timing with the desired timing and, if necessary,
    correct the measured timing so that it equals the desired timing.


CLS 123/427
TXT Timing control derived from ignition capacitor:

    Subject matter under subclass 406 in which the timing control means
    includes a circuit that charges and discharges a capacitor.

    (1)     Note.  There may be more than one capacitor used.


CLS 123/428
TXT Having circuit that alters response of an oscillatory engine shaft position
    sensing circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 406 in which the timing control means
    includes an oscillatory circuit responsive to the engine shaft position and
    further means to modify the position response of this circuit, to thereby
    adjust the ignition timing.


CLS 123/429
TXT COMBUSTION CHAMBER MEANS COMBINED WITH AIR-FUEL MIXTURE FORMING MEANS:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which a combination of
    combustion chamber means and charge-forming means is claimed.

    (1)     Note.  A particular relationship between the cyclic movement of the
    piston within the cylinder or the design of the combustion chamber and the
    formation or disposition of the mixture charge within the combustion
    chamber is usually disclosed.

    (2)     Note.  The charge-forming means may be of any type except direct
    fuel injection of  "all" fuel into the combustion chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    294,    for a combination of a combustion chamber and direct injection of
    all fuel.


CLS 123/430
TXT Stratification in combustion chamber:
    Subject matter under subclass 429 in which the combination of combustion
    chamber and charge-forming device is designed to produce a nonhomogeneous
    combustible mixture or charge in the combustion chamber.


CLS 123/431
TXT Having a single combustible mixture inlet combined with means for injecting
    additional fuel into the combustion chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 429 in which the combustion chamber has a
    single inlet passage for mixture entry and also has an injector means for
    injecting additional fuel directly into the combustion chamber.


CLS 123/432
TXT Air or combustible mixture entering the combustion chamber through plural
    inlets: Subject matter under subclass 429 in which the combustion chamber
    contains more than one inlet port for air or the combustible mixture.


CLS 123/433
TXT One inlet is uncovered by piston travel:
    Subject matter under subclass 432 in which one of the air or mixture inlet
    ports is constructed so as to be controlled by the engine piston.


CLS 123/434
TXT CHARGE-FORMING DEVICE (E.G., POLLUTION CONTROL):

    Subject matter under the class definition including means for forming a
    mixture of fuel and an oxidant, or an accessory therefor not provided for
    elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  The device may use airflow through it to entrain the fuel
    (carburetor) or may force the fuel under pressure into the air (fuel
    injection).  Fuel may be injected into the air intake or directly into the
    combustion chamber of an associated engine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 482 for control of fuel supply in response
    to variations of barometric pressure in combustion engine induction type
    flow control.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 38+ for carburetors,
    per se, including those with thermostatic or vacuum controls.


CLS 123/435
TXT Including cylinder pressure or temperature responsive means:

    Subject matter under subclass 434 in which the air-fuel mixture is adjusted
    in the charge former in response to cylinder pressure or temperature.


CLS 123/436
TXT Including means responsive to the instantaneous change in engine speed:

    Subject matter under subclass 434 in which the charge-forming device
    includes means to determine instantaneous changes in engine speed
    (roughness) and adjust the quality of the air-fuel mixture accordingly.


CLS 123/437
TXT Auxiliary control of carburetor fuel metering:

    Subject matter under subclass 434 in which the charge-forming device is a
    carburetor in which fuel flow is primarily controlled or adjusted by
    venturi metering means with auxiliary fuel flow control means responsive to
    engine parameters other than vacuum or temperature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 38+ for carburetors
    having auxiliary metering control means responsive to vacuum or temperature.


CLS 123/438
TXT By electrical or electronic control system:
    Subject matter under subclass 437 wherein the auxiliary control means
    utilizes some form of electrical or electronic circuitry in its sensing or
    controlling action.


CLS 123/439
TXT Variable venturi carburetor:

    Subject matter under subclass 438 in which the carburetor is of the type
    having an airflow venturi that is variable in size.


CLS 123/441
TXT By mechanical speed sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 437 in which the means used to adjust fuel
    flow is mechanically responsive to engine speed.


CLS 123/442
TXT Injection or carburetion system having a series of throttle valves:

    Subject matter under subclass 434 in which the charge-forming device has
    more than one throttle valve in series flow relation in the engine intake.


CLS 123/443
TXT Alternate or simultaneous lean-rich:
    Subject matter under subclass 434 in which the charge-forming device
    alternately or simultaneously supplies rich mixture to some of the engine
    cylinders and lean mixture to the remaining engine cylinders.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also includes those charge-forming devices
    which switch from a lean or rich mixture to all cylinders to a lean or rich
    mixture to less than all cylinders.


CLS 123/444
TXT Having fluidic logic control means:

    Subject matter under subclass 434 wherein the charge-forming device
    includes some type of fluidic logic or fluidic amplifying device.


CLS 123/445
TXT Fuel injection system:

    Subject matter under subclass 434 in which the charge-forming device is of
    the type that forces the fuel under pressure into the air to form the
    mixture.


CLS 123/446
TXT Fuel pump flow regulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 445 in which means is provided between the
    output of a fuel injector supply pump and a fuel injector nozzle to control
    or adjust the amount of fuel delivered to the engine.


CLS 123/447
TXT With accumulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 446 wherein the means used to regulate the
    flow includes some type of fuel accumulator used to store some quantity of
    fuel generally under system pressure.

    (1)     Note.  These accumulators are commonly of the spring or
    air-compressing type.


CLS 123/448
TXT Sequential distributor:

    Subject matter under subclass 446 in which the means between the pump and
    injector is a device that directs the fuel to the engine cylinders in a
    predetermined sequence.


CLS 123/449
TXT Rotary and reciprocating distributor:
    Subject matter under subclass 448 wherein the distributor valving member
    rotates and reciprocates with one of these motions performing the
    distributing of the fuel.

    (1)     Note.  Generally the rotary motion distributes the fuel and the
    reciprocating motion is a fuel-pumping stroke, or an injection-timing or
    fuel quantity-metering adjustment.


CLS 123/450
TXT Rotary distributor:

    Subject matter under subclass 448 in which the device contains a valving
    member that rotates about its axis to sequentially direct the fuel to the
    engine cylinders.


CLS 123/451
TXT Reciprocating distributor:

    Subject matter under subclass 448 in which the device contains a valving
    member that reciprocates to sequentially direct fuel to the respective
    engine cylinders.


CLS 123/452
TXT Nonsequential distributor:

    Subject matter under subclass 446 wherein fuel is delivered to all said
    engine injectors simultaneously.


CLS 123/453
TXT Enrichment of the combustible mixture for cold starting or cold running:

    Subject matter under subclass 452 containing means to effect mixture
    enrichment during engine cold starting or running conditions.  Said means
    to enrich the mixture may be part of the distributor or a separate device.


CLS 123/454
TXT Equal pressure valve type:

    Subject matter under subclass 452 wherein the distributor includes fuel
    metering valves that are operated by a difference in pressure.

    (1)     Note.  This difference in pressure is the same for all metering
    valves. Pressurized fuel is usually used as the pressure source.


CLS 123/455
TXT Distributor and metering unit are in common housing:

    Subject matter under subclass 452 wherein the distributor that directs the
    fuel to the individual injectors and the fuel flow metering unit that
    determines how much fuel will flow to the injectors are contained in a
    common enclosure.


CLS 123/456
TXT Common rail system:

    Subject matter under subclass 452 wherein the distributor is a fuel supply
    conduit containing outlets for fuel to flow to all the injectors.

    (1)     Note.  Pressurized fuel is always present in the conduit.


CLS 123/457
TXT Regulating means adjusts fuel pressure:
    Subject matter under subclass 446 wherein the flow rate of the fuel is
    regulated by controlling the fuel pressure in the system.


CLS 123/458
TXT Electric regulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 457 wherein the regulator means is
    electrically operated or electrically controlled to adjust the fuel
    pressure.


CLS 123/459
TXT Bleed off valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 457 wherein the pressure regulator adjusts
    the fuel pressure by bleeding some of the fuel.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the bleed fuel is returned to the tank or pump inlet.


CLS 123/460
TXT Series regulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 457 wherein said regulating means is between
    the pump and injector, and all fuel pumped flows through the regulator.

    (1)     Note.  The regulator adjusts or throttles the fuel flow by changing
    the area of the fuel flow path.


CLS 123/461
TXT Having vapor returned to tank or pump inlet:

    Subject matter under subclass 457 including means to recycle fuel vapor to
    the fuel tank or to the inlet of the fuel pump.

    (1)     Note.  The vapor returned means may or may not be part of the
    pressure regulator.


CLS 123/462
TXT By throttle control:

    Subject matter under subclass 457 including means to adjust fuel pressure
    in accordance with the position of the engine throttle valve.


CLS 123/463
TXT Manifold pressure responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 457 including means to adjust the fuel
    pressure in accordance with the pressure in the intake manifold of the
    engine.


CLS 123/464
TXT Temperature responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 457 wherein said regulating means is a
    temperature sensor.


CLS 123/465
TXT Barometric responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 457 wherein the regulating means responds to
    barometric or atmospheric pressure.


CLS 123/466
TXT Having an antitampering device:

    Subject matter under subclass 457 wherein said regulating means includes
    means to sense or determine if said regulating means has been tampered with.

    (1)     Note.  The device may sense abnormal fuel pressure and take
    corrective action, such as engine shutoff, or may only indicate that the
    regulating means has been tampered with.


CLS 123/467
TXT Drip prevention means at injector nozzle: Subject matter under subclass 445
    wherein the system includes means to prevent drip or drool at the nozzle
    when injection is not occurring.

    (1)     Note.  The device may, for example, positively hold the injector
    closed, or bleed excess fuel from the injector or fuel line to a fuel
    storage tank means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 533.02+ for
    injector nozzle structure.


CLS 123/468
TXT Having a specific shape, material, or location of the fuel line:

    Subject matter under subclass 445 wherein significance is attributed to the
    construction, material, or position of the fuel line.


CLS 123/469
TXT Specific fuel line mounting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 468 wherein means is provided for fastening
    or mounting said fuel line.


CLS 123/470
TXT Injection nozzle mounting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 445 including means to secure the injection
    to the engine.


CLS 123/471
TXT Nozzle isolated from manifold vacuum effect:

    Subject matter under subclass 470 wherein said injection nozzle is secured
    to the engine in a manner that prevents manifold vacuum from sucking fuel
    from the nozzle, or otherwise modifying fuel flow from said nozzle.


CLS 123/472
TXT Electrically actuated injector:

    Subject matter under subclass 445 in which the fuel injection system
    includes a valve means that is electrically actuated to control the flow of
    pressurized fuel into the engine intake or combustion chamber, and further
    includes switching means to direct electrical current to actuate the
    injection valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    478+,   for subcombinations that include electronic calculating or
    computing circuitry between the switching means and a nominal injector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 585.1+ for
    electromagnetic injector valves, per se.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 129.01+ for electromagnetic
    valves, per se.


CLS 123/473
TXT Mechanically actuated switching:

    Subject matter under subclass 472 having means whereby the switch means
    which controls the fuel valve-actuating current is mechanically actuated,
    e.g., by a cam.


CLS 123/474
TXT Ignition distributor used as a switch:
    Subject matter under subclass 473 in which the switching means is the
    distributor switch used to direct the electrical energy to the individual
    spark plugs of the engine.


CLS 123/475
TXT Actuated by ignition pulse:

    Subject matter under subclass 472 in which the injector valve actuating
    current is controlled by means that senses current flow in the primary or
    secondary of the engine ignition coil.


CLS 123/476
TXT Magnetically actuated switching:

    Subject matter under subclass 472 in which magnetic means is used to effect
    switching of the electrical current to actuate the injector valve.


CLS 123/477
TXT Radiation actuated switching:

    Subject matter under subclass 472 in which the injector valve-actuating
    current is switched by a radiation actuated device (e.g., light, etc.).


CLS 123/478
TXT Actuator circuit (e.g., engine condition responsive electronic circuit
    actuates injector valve):

    Subject matter under subclass 472 wherein the said fuel injector valve is
    controlled by an electronic circuit having at least one engine parameter
    sensing means to determine the correct amount of fuel to be metered to the
    engine.


CLS 123/479
TXT Backup systems, fail-safe, and failure indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 478 wherein the system includes means to
    provide backup operation, or physical indication upon failure of any part
    of the system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    701,    Data Processing, Navigation, and Relative Location, subclass 114
    for backup, interrupt, reset, test of internal-combustion engines which
    include digital or programmable data processors.


CLS 123/480
TXT Having microprocessor:

    Subject matter under subclass 478 wherein the injector valve-actuating
    circuit includes a microprocessor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    701,    Data Processing, Navigation, and Relative Location, particularly
    subclass 102 for microprocessor control of a power plant.


CLS 123/481
TXT Engine cylinder cutout:

    Subject matter under subclass 478 in which fuel injection to some portion
    of but not all of the engine cylinders is interrupted in response to a
    predetermined condition.

    (1)     Note.  The condition is usually low load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198,    for other devices which cutout one or more cylinders.


CLS 123/482
TXT Circuit activates valve for continuous fuel flow:

    Subject matter under subclass 478 wherein said circuit controls the
    injector valve for metered continuous fuel flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    497+,   for a circuit that generates a continuous output signal that drives
    an electric pump.


CLS 123/483
TXT Having plural multivibrators:

    Subject matter under subclass 478 wherein said injector valve control means
    includes a circuit having more than one multivibrator circuit therein.


CLS 123/484
TXT Having single multivibrator:

    Subject matter under subclass 478 wherein said injector valve control means
    includes a circuit which employs a single monostable, bistable, or a stable
    multivibrator circuit at some stage between the input parameter sensor and
    a means motivating the injector valve.


CLS 123/485
TXT Having ramp generator:

    Subject matter under subclass 478 wherein said injector valve control means
    includes a circuit which utilizes a ramp or staircase generator in a
    computing or decision making process.


CLS 123/486
TXT Having a digital memory addressed by an engine parameter:

    Subject matter under subclass 478 wherein a digital memory is addressed by
    the output of an engine parameter sensor to retrieve a stored valve
    corresponding to the correct fuel output for each particular input from the
    sensor, thereby actuating the injector valve to provide the correct amount
    of fuel to the engine.


CLS 123/487
TXT Having an up or up-down counter in circuit: Subject matter under subclass
    478 wherein said injector valve control means includes up or up-down
    counter means.


CLS 123/488
TXT Subcircuit operates on a parameter sensor output before input to main fuel
    control (e.g., function generator):

    Subject matter under subclass 478 wherein the circuit employs a subcircuit,
    generally a type of function generator, between the engine parameter sensor
    and the input to the decision making or computing section of the circuit,
    so that for every input to the subcircuit there is a predetermined output
    to the injector fuel control valve.


CLS 123/490
TXT Injector solenoid drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 478 wherein said circuit has a decision
    making or computing section and employs a particular subcircuit connected
    to the output of that section to amplify or alternatively switch the output
    of said circuit to a particular injector valve or group of valves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ for
    circuits for driving electromagnetic devices.


CLS 123/491
TXT Starting condition responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 478 wherein said circuit responds to an
    engine-starting condition or engine warm-up period to alter the fuel
    metering accordingly.


CLS 123/492
TXT Acceleration or full load condition responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 478 wherein said circuit responds to (a) an
    engine acceleration (rapid load or power output increase), or (b) full load
    operating mode to alter fuel metering accordingly.

    (1)     Note.  This usually enriches the mixture.


CLS 123/493
TXT Deceleration condition responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 478 wherein said circuit responds to an
    engine "deceleration" condition, generally denoted by high manifold vacuum
    and rpm above idle, signifying a rapid power decline of the engine, or
    where the engine is driven by the load.


CLS 123/494
TXT Having specific transducer:

    Subject matter under subclass 478 in which the construction or other
    feature of a sensor or transducer used in the system is significantly
    claimed.


CLS 123/495
TXT With fuel pump:

    Subject matter under subclass 434 (a) for supplying fuel to a
    charge-forming device, or (b) for supplying fuel directly to the working
    cylinder or combustion chamber of an engine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    184,    Lubrication, subclasses 26+ for lubricating oil pumps.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 34.1+ for accelerator
    pumps for carburetors.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 236+ and 321+ for pumps, per se, and pumps with
    nominal engine recitation for a statement of the line between Class 123 and
    Class 417; see the search note to Class 417 in the class definition of this
    class.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 40+ for rotary
    expansible chamber devices, per se.


CLS 123/496
TXT Variable rate of injection stroke:

    Subject matter under subclass 495 wherein the pump includes means to vary
    the speed of a pump working member so as to vary the rate at which fuel is
    forced from the pump chamber.


CLS 123/497
TXT Electric fuel pump:
    Subject matter under subclass 495 wherein the pump is electrically driven
    or its operation is electrically controlled.


CLS 123/498
TXT Piezoelectric drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 497 wherein the pump has a working member
    which is driven by a piezoelectric crystal or the crystal itself is the
    pump working member.


CLS 123/499
TXT Solenoid drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 497 wherein the pump has a working member
    which is driven by an electromagnetic solenoid.

    (1)     Note.  Pump working member may be the solenoid armature.


CLS 123/500
TXT Variable beginning and ending of pumping stroke:

    Subject matter under subclass 495 wherein the pump has a working member
    having constant length strokes and a control means to vary the points
    during the travel of working member pumping stroke where pumping action
    will both begin and end.


CLS 123/501
TXT Variable beginning of pumping stroke:
    Subject matter under subclass 495 wherein the pump has a working member
    having constant length strokes and a control means to vary the point during
    the travel of the working member pumping stroke where pumping action will
    begin.

    (1)     Note.  Control means may vary the angular relationship between pump
    drive shaft and the driven shaft powered by the engine to control timing.


CLS 123/502
TXT Fluid pressure control:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein said control means utilizes fluid
    pressure in its operation, e.g., air, lubricant, fuel.


CLS 123/503
TXT Variable ending of pumping stroke:

    Subject matter under subclass 495 wherein the pump has a working member
    having constant length strokes and a control means to vary the point during
    the travel of the working member pumping stroke where pumping action will
    end.


CLS 123/504
TXT Variable stroke:

    Subject matter under subclass 495 wherein the actual physical stroke length
    of the pump may be varied to control fuel delivery, e.g., as with a
    variable stop which limits the pump piston travel.


CLS 123/505
TXT Fuel pump and intake air controls interconnected:

    Subject matter under subclass 495 in which means is provided to associate
    the engine air intake control means with the pump output control means to
    provide a desired relationship between fuel and air flow.


CLS 123/506
TXT Having pressure relief valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 495 wherein valve means is provided to
    relieve the pump output pressure under certain conditions.

    (1)     Note.  This means may be incorporated in the pump or may be located
    externally.


CLS 123/507
TXT Pumping member driven by a piston or valve of the internal combustion
    engine:

    Subject matter under subclass 495 in which the pump has a working member
    which is driven either by (a) a working piston, or (b) a valve of the
    associated internal combustion engine.


CLS 123/508
TXT Pumping member driven by the internal combustion engine valve operating
    mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 495 wherein the pump has a working member
    which is actuated by some part of the engine intake or exhaust valve
    driving mechanism, e.g., injection pump piston is driven by rocker arm or
    intake valve actuating mechanism.


CLS 123/509
TXT Specific location or mounting of pump:
    Subject matter under subclass 495 in which a special (a) location, or (b)
    mounting means for the pump is claimed.


CLS 123/510
TXT Fuel flow regulation between the pump and the charge-forming device:

    Subject matter under subclass 434 having regulator means located in a fuel
    flow path between a pump discharge and a charge-forming device (e.g.,
    carburetor) to modify or control the fuel pressure or rate of flow to said
    device.

    (1)     Note.  The device may be a simple pressure-regulating valve
    controlled by a spring or a regulator controlled by engine parameters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 455+ for pressure regulators and
    flow-regulating devices, per se.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 34.1+ for
    condition-responsive control of fuel flow into a carburetor float bowl.


CLS 123/511
TXT Regulator means adjusts fuel pressure:
    Subject matter under subclass 510 wherein means in the fuel path regulates
    the pressure of the fuel delivered to the charge former.


CLS 123/512
TXT Engine parameter responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 511 in which the regulating means adjusts
    fuel pressure in response to an operating condition of the associated
    internal combustion engine.


CLS 123/513
TXT Environmental condition responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 511 wherein the regulator responds to some
    environmental condition such as ambient air temperature or pressure.


CLS 123/514
TXT Excess fuel returned to tank:

    Subject matter under subclass 510 in which the regulator includes means to
    return excess fuel delivered by the pump to the fuel tank or pump inlet.

    (1)     Note.  The means to return excess fuel may be a single constant
    bleed-off orifice.


CLS 123/515
TXT Regulator controls flow of a plurality of fuels:

    Subject matter under subclass 510 in which the regulator means controls the
    flow of more than one type of fuel or different qualities of the same fuel
    to the charge-forming device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    575+,   for a charge-forming device that may be operated with diverse fuels.


CLS 123/516
TXT Air or fuel vapor purging system:

    Subject matter under subclass 510 wherein the regulator has means to purge,
    or store air bubbles or fuel vapor; the purging or storage means may itself
    be considered the means to regulate fuel flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    518+,   for fuel vapor storage systems with subsequent feed to engine.


CLS 123/517
TXT Carburetor float bowl drain:

    Subject matter under subclass 510 in which the charge-forming device is a
    carburetor which has a fuel receiving float bowl and a means to drain the
    fuel from said bowl.


CLS 123/518
TXT Having fuel vapor recovery and storage system:

    Subject matter under subclass 434 in which means is provided to collect
    fuel vapor from a fuel tank, float bowl, etc., store it in a tank,
    canister, or equivalent storage means, and then feed the stored vapor to
    the associated engine during its operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    525,    for a vapor converting system that feeds vapor to the engine
    without storage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 749+ for vapor recovery and vapor storage
    systems, respectively.


CLS 123/519
TXT Having an adsorbent canister:

    Subject matter under subclass 518 wherein the fuel vapor storage means is a
    container enclosing a material that will collect condensed fuel on a
    surface.

    (1)     Note.  Generally the adsorbent material is activated charcoal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 108+ for solid sorbent
    apparatus, per se.


CLS 123/520
TXT Purge valve controlled by engine parameter: Subject matter under subclass
    519 in which a valve means (purge valve) is provided between the canister
    and the engine, said valve being operable to control the rate at which
    stored vapors are drawn from the canister in response to an operating
    condition or parameter of the associated engine.


CLS 123/521
TXT Responsive to secondary air pressure:
    Subject matter under subclass 520 wherein the engine parameter controlling
    the purge valve means is the pressure of the air injected into the engine
    exhaust, i.e., secondary air pressure.


CLS 123/522
TXT Liquid fuel evaporating by submerged air supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 434 having means wherein at least part of the
    air supply for the engine is bubbled through a volume of fuel to form at
    least part of the combustible charge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    530,    for means to evaporate fuel by passing it in the form of a
    continuous stream across an engine air intake conduit.


CLS 123/523
TXT Liquid fuel evaporating by extended fuel film:

    Subject matter under subclass 434 includes means for spreading the fuel
    over a relatively large surface area to provide a film of fuel to enhance
    evaporation when contacted with air.


CLS 123/524
TXT Screen or mat:

    Subject matter under subclass 523 wherein the surface on which the fuel is
    spread is porous or sievelike.


CLS 123/525
TXT Combined liquid and gaseous fuel:

    Subject matter under subclass 434 having means by which the charge-forming
    device may produce a mixture of air, gaseous fuel, and liquid fuel, or may
    be switched to operate with either gaseous or liquid fuel.


CLS 123/526
TXT Diesel engine convertible from liquid to gas:

    Subject matter under subclass 525 in which the associated engine is of the
    compression ignition type and having means to convert the engine to operate
    on either liquid or gaseous fuel.


CLS 123/527
TXT Gaseous fuel and air mixer:

    Subject matter under subclass 434 having means by which the charge-forming
    device mixes air and gaseous fuel to form a combustible mixture which is
    fed to the associated engine.


CLS 123/528
TXT Supercharged engine:

    Subject matter under subclass 527 having means by which the associated
    engine, fed by the mixer, receives its combustion air under pressure
    greater than atmospheric.


CLS 123/529
TXT Safety device (e.g., cutoff):

    Subject matter under subclass 527 wherein the gaseous fuel and air mixer
    includes a safety device that cuts off the flow of fuel or air-fuel mixture
    in the event of leaks, accidents, etc.


CLS 123/530
TXT Constant flow fuel supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 434 in which the charge-forming device has
    means to pass a continuous stream of fuel across the air intake conduit
    whereby the air evaporates or atomizes a portion of the fuel; the liquid
    fuel not evaporated by the air is drained from the device for subsequent
    recycling.


CLS 123/531
TXT Auxiliary air or gas used to inject fuel:
    Subject matter under subclass 434 in which means is provided that uses a
    small amount of pressurized air or other gas, insufficient to form a
    combustible charge, to force the liquid fuel into the combustion air.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for a two-stroke engine having separate pumps for air and gaseous
    fuel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 19+ for carburetors
    using auxiliary air.


CLS 123/532
TXT Air is bled from the cylinder on the compression stroke in that cylinder:

    Subject matter under subclass 531 in which means is provided to bleed a
    small amount of air or other gas from the cylinder to which it will be fed
    during that cylinder's compression stroke.


CLS 123/533
TXT Having a separate pump for the air or gas: Subject matter under subclass
    531 having means whereby the air or other gas used to atomize or inject the
    fuel is compressed by pump means.


CLS 123/534
TXT Air is bled from another engine cylinder:
    Subject matter under subclass 531 in which means is provided to bleed the
    air or other gas to be used for injecting fuel from any engine cylinder,
    except the cylinder to which the air will be fed, during the compression
    stroke of said any engine cylinder.


CLS 123/535
TXT Constant fuel level:

    Subject matter under subclass 531 including means to provide a constant
    level (e.g., reservoir) of fuel to be atomized, vaporized, or injected by
    the auxiliary air or gas.


CLS 123/536
TXT Combustible mixture ionization, ozonation, or electrolysis:

    Subject matter under subclass 434 having treating means whereby the charge
    or any component of the charge is subjected to ionization, or wherein ozone
    is generated from the charge, or wherein electrolysis is utilized to form
    any component of the charge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    585,    for ozone from a separate source which is added to the charge.


CLS 123/537
TXT Before intake valve (e.g., in manifold):
    Subject matter under subclass 536 wherein the treatment occurs before the
    charge component reaches the engine intake valve.


CLS 123/538
TXT Fuel only:

    Subject matter under subclass 536 in which said means operates on the fuel
    only.


CLS 123/539
TXT Air only:

    Subject matter under subclass 536 wherein said means operates on the air
    for the charge only.


CLS 123/540
TXT Cooling of combustible mixture:

    Subject matter under subclass 434 including means for cooling (a) the
    charge-forming device or a part thereof, (b) for cooling the combustible
    mixture formed by the charge-forming means, or (c) those elements (e.g.,
    fuel, air, etc.) as they are fed to the charge former to form the charge.

    (1)     Note.  Any cooling combined with supercharging should be classified
    in subclass 563 below.

    (2)     Note.  If the cooling is done to the exhaust gas to be recycled to
    the engine, classification should be in subclass 570 below.


CLS 123/541
TXT Fuel only:

    Subject matter under subclass 540 wherein the engine fuel alone is cooled.


CLS 123/542
TXT Air only:

    Subject matter under subclass 540 wherein only the air is cooled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    559,    for air coolers between a supercharger and an internal-combustion
    engine.


CLS 123/543
TXT Heating of combustible mixture:

    Subject matter under subclass 434 including means for heating (a) the
    charge-forming device or a part thereof, (b) for heating the combustible
    mixture formed by the charge-forming means, or (c) those elements (e.g.,
    fuel, air, etc.) as they are fed to the charge former to form the charge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 127+ for devices for
    mixing and heating liquid and gas.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 207+ for a fuel burner of general
    application with means for heating its feed line.


CLS 123/544
TXT Lighter fuel is used during starting:
    Subject matter under subclass 543 in which the charge-forming devices uses
    a lighter, more easily vaporized fuel which is heated and utilized during
    starting of the associated internal-combustion engine.


CLS 123/545
TXT Heating medium surrounds combustible mixture:

    Subject matter under subclass 543 wherein the heating medium completely
    surrounds a conduit or passage containing the combustible mixture.


CLS 123/546
TXT Combustible mixture surrounds heating medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 543 in which a passage or conduit that
    conveys the air-fuel mixture to the engine completely encircles or
    surrounds the source of heat.


CLS 123/547
TXT Combustible mixture and heating medium adjoin one another:

    Subject matter under subclass 543 wherein the passages carrying the heating
    medium and the mixture are integral or adjoining at some point for heat
    transfer.


CLS 123/548
TXT Trap for liquid particle vaporization:
    Subject matter under subclass 543 in which means is provided to trap, heat,
    and vaporize liquid particles of fuel present in the air fuel mixture
    before they are inducted into the engine combustion chamber.


CLS 123/549
TXT Electric heater:

    Subject matter under subclass 543 wherein the means for heating is
    electrically powered.


CLS 123/550
TXT Combustion heater:

    Subject matter under subclass 543 in which the means for heating uses
    combustion of a fuel as the source of heat.


CLS 123/551
TXT Part of combustible mixture is burned:
    Subject matter under subclass 550 wherein a means is provided to draw off a
    portion of the normal fuel-air mixture to be combusted externally of the
    combustion chamber to supply heat for the remaining mixture.

    (1)     Note.  The combustion products from this process may be exhausted
    or reintroduced into the charge.


CLS 123/552
TXT Automatic control:

    Subject matter under subclass 543 in which an engine temperature sensor or
    other condition-responsive means is provided to control the operation of
    the heating means.


CLS 123/553
TXT Intermediate fluid used for heating:
    Subject matter under subclass 543 in which the source of heat is used to
    heat an intermediate fluid (other than engine coolant, lubricant, or
    exhaust gas) that is in heat transfer relationship with the fuel, air,
    combustible mixture, or charge-forming device.


CLS 123/554
TXT Combustible mixture, air, and fuel are heated separately:

    Subject matter under subclass 543 in which separate means is provided to
    heat each of the air, fuel, and mixture.


CLS 123/555
TXT Air and fuel heated separately:

    Subject matter under subclass 543 having means wherein the air alone and
    fuel alone are heated separately before they are mixed.


CLS 123/556
TXT Air only:

    Subject matter under subclass 543 in which the heating means is used to
    heat the engine combustion air only.


CLS 123/557
TXT Fuel only:

    Subject matter under subclass 543 in which the heating means is used to
    heat the fuel only.


CLS 123/558
TXT Fuel is heated to ignition temperature:
    Subject matter under subclass 557 in which the heating means heats the fuel
    to the temperature at which it will spontaneously ignite when exposed to
    air at ambient temperature.


CLS 123/559.1
TXT Supercharger:

    Subject matter under subclass 434 wherein means is employed to increase the
    pressure of the inlet air or charge over that which would be present in a
    normally aspirated (piston suction alone) engine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 598+ for exhaust gas driven superchargers.


CLS 123/559.2
TXT Pressure exchange with exhaust gas:

    Subject matter under subclass 559.1 wherein the means to increase the
    pressure of the intake air is a pressure exchange wherein the engine
    exhaust gas directly contacts the intake air.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclass 64 for pressure exchanges, per se.


CLS 123/559.3
TXT With clutch:

    Subject matter under subclass 559.1 wherein the supercharger is connected
    to the engine by a clutch.


CLS 123/560
TXT Two-cycle compressor feeds a four-cycle engine:

    Subject matter under subclass 559 having a two-cycle compressor which is
    used to feed air or mixture at a pressure greater than atmospheric to an
    associated four-cycle internal-combustion engine.


CLS 123/561
TXT Variable ratio compressor driven supercharger:

    Subject matter under subclass 559 having a compressor to supercharge the
    air or mixture wherein the drive ratio between the compressor and its
    driving means (generally the engine) is capable of being varied.


CLS 123/562
TXT Multiple superchargers:

    Subject matter under subclass 559 having more than one pump or compressor
    which are used to feed air or mixture under pressure to a common
    internal-combustion engine.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes plural stage compressors.

    (2)     Note.  Multiple superchargers with intercooling are properly
    classified in subclass 563.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    563,    for an intercooler between an engine and single supercharger.


CLS 123/563
TXT Intercooler:

    Subject matter under subclass 559 wherein means is employed to lower the
    temperature of the air or mixture leaving the supercharger before its entry
    into the engine or another supercharger.

    (1)     Note.  Any cooling combined with nonsupercharged charged forming
    should be classified in subclasses 540+ above.


CLS 123/564
TXT Boost control:

    Subject matter under subclass 559 including manual or condition responsive
    means to control the degree of pressurization of the air or mixture by the
    supercharger.


CLS 123/565
TXT Supercharger is driven independently of the engine:

    Subject matter under subclass 559 wherein the supercharger is driven by
    means other than the associated engine or its exhaust gas (such as an
    electric motor).


CLS 123/566
TXT Funnel-type supercharger (e.g., ram-air):
    Subject matter under subclass 559 in which the pressure-increasing means is
    a funnel-shaped conduit into which air is forced, e.g., ram-air effect.

    (1)     Note.  The air is fed from the funnel outlet to the engine.


CLS 123/567
TXT Oxidant is solely oxygen:

    Subject matter under subclass 434 wherein the fuel (which may be a gas) is
    mixed or burned solely in oxygen and no gas other than fuel or oxygen is
    present.


CLS 123/568
TXT Exhaust gas used with the combustible mixture (e.g., emission control
    e.g.r. valve):

    Subject matter under subclass 434 in which means is provided to return part
    or all of the products of combustion exhausted from the engine to the
    intake manifold or directly to the combustion chamber for subsequent
    reburning.


CLS 123/569
TXT Diesel engine:

    Subject matter under subclass 568 wherein the engine involved in the
    recycling is a Diesel or compression ignition engine.


CLS 123/570
TXT Exhaust gas cooled before recirculation:
    Subject matter under subclass 568 in which means is provided to cool the
    returned products of combustion before they are directed to the intake
    manifold or combustion chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    540+,   for cooling of air, fuel, or mixture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 272+ for means to treat
    internal-combustion engine exhaust which is not (a) to be recycled to the
    engine intake, or (b) to be used to treat the engine intake.


CLS 123/571
TXT Electrical control of e.g.r. valve (e.g., between exhaust gas and intake
    manifold):Subject matter under subclass 568 having a valve means
    controlling the exhaust gas recirculation (E.G.R.) controlled or actuated
    electrically.


CLS 123/572
TXT Crankcase vapor used with combustible mixture:

    Subject matter under subclass 434 in which means is provided to introduce
    part or all of the crankcase blow by gases to the engine intake manifold or
    directly to the combustion chamber for burning.


CLS 123/573
TXT Vapor treated before mixing with combustible mixture (e.g., cooling):

    Subject matter under subclass 572 in which means is provided to cool or
    otherwise treat the crankcase vapors before they are mixed with the charge.


CLS 123/574
TXT Specific control valve (PCV valve):

    Subject matter under subclass 572 wherein said means include a valve having
    a specifically disclosed construction.

    (1)     Note.  The valve is often referred to as a PCV (positive crankcase
    ventilation) valve.


CLS 123/575
TXT Diverse fuel supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 434 wherein the engine may be operated from
    different qualities of fuels.


CLS 123/576
TXT Fuel switched in response to engine starting condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 575 in which means are provided for switching
    from one fuel to another in response to a starting condition of the
    associated engine.


CLS 123/577
TXT Fuel switched, condition responsive to load:

    Subject matter under subclass 575 wherein the separate fuel supplies are
    switched or alternated in response to the engine load condition.


CLS 123/578
TXT Fuel switched in response to engine temperature:

    Subject matter under subclass 575 in which means are provided for switching
    from one fuel source to another in response to a temperature of the
    associated engine.


CLS 123/579
TXT Multiple carburetors:

    Subject matter under subclass 434 wherein said charge-forming device
    includes a plurality of separate means, each of which employs a moving
    stream of oxidant (e.g., air) to aspirate a fluid fuel into the oxidant
    stream.

    (1)     Note.  Each carburetor is operative to independently meter fuel
    into the air flowing therethrough.

    (2)     Note.  The carburetors need not be identical in construction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclass 23.1 for a single
    carburetor with multiple barrels.


CLS 123/580
TXT Each carburetor feeds a cylinder or group of cylinders (e.g., split engine):

    Subject matter under subclass 579 wherein a separate fuel aspirating means
    feeds a particular cylinder or group of cylinders.


CLS 123/581
TXT Separate carburetor for starting:

    Subject matter under subclass 579 in which one of the fuel aspirating means
    is designed particularly for or is operative only during starting and
    warm-up of the associated engine.


CLS 123/582
TXT Separate carburetor for high load:

    Subject matter under subclass 579 wherein one of the fuel aspirating means
    is utilized for high load operation of the associated engine.


CLS 123/583
TXT With linkage between carburetor throttle valves:

    Subject matter under subclass 579 in which means is provided to
    interconnect the throttle valves of multiple fuel aspirating means to
    effect coordinated movement thereof.


CLS 123/584
TXT Staged opening of carburetor throttle valves:

    Subject matter under subclass 583 wherein the mechanical means is arranged
    so that the opening of the throttle valves is not coincident, or the rates
    of movement of the throttle valves are unequal.


CLS 123/585
TXT Auxiliary air or oxygen added to combustible mixture:

    Subject matter under subclass 434 in which means is provided to add an
    additional oxidant to the combustible mixture produced by a charge-forming
    device before the mixture is fed to the engine cylinders.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 480 for the control of an auxiliary inlet
    to a combustion engine induction line in response to variations in engine
    inlet pressure.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 38+ for carburetor air
    bypasses.


CLS 123/586
TXT Oxidant controlled by throttle:

    Subject matter under subclass 585 in which an auxiliary device providing
    additional oxidant includes control means responsive to the position of the
    engine throttle valve.


CLS 123/587
TXT Oxidant controlled by intake manifold vacuum:

    Subject matter under subclass 585 in which the means for providing
    additional oxidant is controlled in response to the pressure in the engine
    intake manifold.


CLS 123/588
TXT Oxidant controlled by engine temperature: Subject matter under subclass 585
    in which the device for providing additional oxidant includes control means
    responsive to engine temperature.


CLS 123/590
TXT Charge-mixing device in intake (e.g., device which insures the atomization
    of the combustible mixture):

    Subject matter under subclass 434 including means to further commingle
    oxidant and the fuel mixture produced by a charge-forming device before the
    mixture is inducted into the engine cylinder.


CLS 123/591
TXT Having liquid fuel collector:

    Subject matter under subclass 590 in which the device includes means to
    collect liquid fuel which has not been completely atomized.


CLS 123/592
TXT By fan means:

    Subject matter under subclass 590 in which the means to commingle is a
    rotating device carrying fluid reactive blades thereon which is mounted in
    the intake pipe of the engine.


CLS 123/593
TXT By screen means:

    Subject matter under subclass 590 in which the device is a foraminous
    member disposed across the intake of the engine.


CLS 123/594
TXT HIGH TENSION IGNITION SYSTEM:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means for supplying
    high voltage electricity to a mixture-igniting means associated with an
    internal-combustion engine and for subcombinations particular thereto where
    not provided for elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 209+ for
    general use systems.


CLS 123/595
TXT Retrofit conversion ignition unit:

    Subject matter under subclass 594 in which the ignition system or some
    component thereof is designed to replace or add to an existing system or
    component which is different in construction or effect.

    (1)     Note.  This includes conversion of cam and breaker point timers to
    photoelectric, magnetic, etc., pickups.


CLS 123/596
TXT Using capacitive storage and discharge for spark energy:

    Subject matter under subclass 594 in which the ignition system include a
    capacitor, means to charge the capacitor, and means to discharge the
    capacitor through an ignition coil primary thereby creating the high
    voltage used for mixture ignition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    653     and 654, for an ignition system having an auxiliary capacitor,
    other than a breaker point capacitor, that does not discharge into an
    ignition coil primary to create a high voltage.


CLS 123/597
TXT Regulating sensed ignition capacitor voltage:

    Subject matter under subclass 596 in which means is provided to sense or
    measure the voltage across the ignition capacitor.


CLS 123/598
TXT Having an oscillator:

    Subject matter under subclass 596 in which the capacitor is charged by a
    voltage produced in an oscillator circuit which is either continuously or
    intermittently operative.


CLS 123/599
TXT Having a magneto:

    Subject matter under subclass 596 in which the capacitor is charged by a
    voltage produced by an inductive generator called a magneto.

    (1)     Note.  Usually of the rotary type.


CLS 123/600
TXT Triggering voltage obtained from capacitor charging winding:

    Subject matter under subclass 599 in which means is provided to trigger the
    discharge of the capacitor across the coil primary, wherein the trigger
    voltage is derived from the magneto winding that charges the capacitor.


CLS 123/601
TXT Specific design of charge or trigger winding core:

    Subject matter under subclass 599 in which significance is attributed to
    the particular core structure for the capacitor charging or trigger winding.

    (1)     Note.  Both windings on a single magnetic core, etc.


CLS 123/602
TXT Having controllable timing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 599 in which means is provided to regulate or
    adjust the timing of the discharge of the capacitor relative to the angular
    position of the engine crankshaft.

    (1)     Note.  Adjustable trigger circuits, voltage delays to the trigger
    circuits.etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    406+,   for ignition timing control systems of general type.


CLS 123/603
TXT Antireverse protection:

    Subject matter under subclass 599 in which means is provided in the
    ignition system to prevent running of the engine in the reverse direction.


CLS 123/604
TXT Inductive capacitive discharge system:
    Subject matter under subclass 596 in which a capacitor is charged by a
    voltage produced in an inductive circuit other than a magneto or oscillator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    599,    for magneto capacitor discharge devices.


CLS 123/605
TXT Having a specific capacitor, ignition coil means, or switching element
    circuit path: Subject matter under subclass 596 in which significance is
    attributed to the ignition capacitor, ignition coil, or capacitor discharge
    switching means.


CLS 123/606
TXT High frequency ignition system:

    Subject matter under subclass 594 in which the ignition system includes
    means to generate a high frequency train of distinct sparks at a spark gap.


CLS 123/607
TXT Free running oscillator supplies coil primary:

    Subject matter under subclass 606 in which the means to generate the high
    frequency train is a free running oscillator that supplies an oscillating
    voltage to the primary of the ignition coil.


CLS 123/608
TXT Having a specific spark plug:

    Subject matter under subclass 606 in which significance is attributed to
    the design or construction of a spark plug to be used in the high frequency
    system.


CLS 123/609
TXT Having dwell control:

    Subject matter under subclass 594 in which the ignition system includes
    means to adjust or control the amount of time that current flows through
    the primary of an ignition coil.

    (1)     Note.  This amount of time is called "dwell time" or "dwell angle"
    and is measured in degrees of distributor shaft rotation.  For a system
    having breaker points, the dwell is the amount of time that the points are
    closed.


CLS 123/610
TXT Using a monostable multivibrator:

    Subject matter under subclass 609 in which the means to adjust or control
    the dwell time includes an oscillator circuit having one stable state,
    i.e., the circuit remains in a condition having a given output level (e.g.,
    logical zero) until receiving a trigger signal, at which time the circuit
    will switch to its other output level (logical 1) and after a
    predeterminable time returns to its original level (logical zero).


CLS 123/611
TXT Dwell maintained at constant value:

    Subject matter under subclass 609 in which dwell adjusting means function
    to keep the dwell time at a constant value.


CLS 123/612
TXT Having engine component position sensor:
    Subject matter under subclass 594 in which the ignition system includes
    means to determine the position of one engine component relative to another.

    (1)     Note.  The means usually determines the angular position of the
    distributor shaft, camshaft, or crankshaft of the associated engine.


CLS 123/613
TXT Optical sensing:

    Subject matter under subclass 612 in which the position transducer is light
    activated.


CLS 123/614
TXT Including a zero crossing detector:

    Subject matter under subclass 612 in which the position sensor includes
    means to detect a change in polarity of the voltage signal from the
    transducer, i.e., crosses a "zero" reference value.


CLS 123/615
TXT Including an oscillator:

    Subject matter under subclass 612 in which the position sensor is provided
    with or which controls an oscillator from which a control signal is derived.

    (1)     Note.  The oscillator is usually repeatedly turned on and off to
    indicate position.


CLS 123/616
TXT Piezoelectric sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 612 wherein the position sensor is a device
    in which charges of electricity are induced in a crystalline substance by
    pressure.


CLS 123/617
TXT Inductive or magnetic sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 612 in which the position sensor includes
    magnetic or inductive means that produces a control signal.


CLS 123/618
TXT Having specific trigger circuitry:

    Subject matter under subclass 594 in which the ignition system includes
    trigger circuit means to shape the output signal of a position sensor for
    subsequent use in the system.


CLS 123/619
TXT Oscillatory trigger circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 618 in which the trigger circuit means is
    constructed as an oscillatory circuit.


CLS 123/620
TXT Additional spark energy supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 594 in which the ignition system includes a
    device, in addition to an ignition coil, that adds energy to the discharge
    at the spark plug.

    (1)     Note.  Said device may be inductive in design.  Said additional
    energy may be used to extend the duration of the spark or merely increase
    the sparking voltage.


CLS 123/621
TXT Having an ignition coil with multiple primary or secondary windings:

    Subject matter under subclass 594 in which the ignition system includes an
    ignition coil constructed to have more than one primary or secondary
    winding.


CLS 123/622
TXT Separate circuit for each winding:

    Subject matter under subclass 621 in which each primary winding or
    secondary winding has an associated circuit to deliver energy to or to take
    energy from an ignition coil.


CLS 123/623
TXT Having supply voltage regulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 594 in which means is provided in the system
    to compensate for changes in, or to hold supply voltage constant.

    (1)     Note.  The supply voltage source is usually a battery.


CLS 123/624
TXT Having ballast resistor cutout or control:
    Subject matter under subclass 594 in which the system includes a resistor
    to limit ignition coil primary current and has means to cut the resistor in
    and out of the system, or otherwise control the effect the resistor has on
    the operation of the system.


CLS 123/625
TXT Responsive to engine or environmental condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 594 in which the ignition system includes
    means responsive to an engine parameter or an environmental condition.


CLS 123/626
TXT Oscillator or trigger circuit responsive to engine condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 625 in which the means is an oscillatory
    circuit or trigger circuit which is responsive to an engine parameter.


CLS 123/627
TXT Having auxiliary spark ionization gap in series or parallel with the coil:

    Subject matter under subclass 594 in which the system includes an auxiliary
    spark air gap or gaseous ionization gap in addition to the usual spark plug.

    (1)     Note.  The auxiliary gap may be in series or parallel with an
    ignition coil primary or secondary and can be a neon tube.


CLS 123/628
TXT Having a continuous high voltage output to the high voltage distributor:

    Subject matter under subclass 594 in which the system produces a continuous
    sparking voltage output which is directed to a high voltage distributor.


CLS 123/629
TXT Monostable multivibrator controls timing of coil primary current:

    Subject matter under subclass 594 in which the system includes an
    oscillatory circuit having one stable state (e.g., low output level), that
    is capable of being triggered into a second state (high output level) for a
    predeterminable time before reverting to its original state; the output of
    this circuit is used to control the flow of electrical current through the
    primary of an ignition coil.


CLS 123/630
TXT Safety device:

    Subject matter under subclass 594 in which the ignition system includes an
    accessory device to prevent operation of the system when an unsafe
    condition is detected.


CLS 123/631
TXT Reverse engine rotation protection:

    Subject matter under subclass 630 in which the accessory device prevents
    reverse operation of the engine.


CLS 123/632
TXT Ignition switch opened when engine stops: Subject matter under subclass 630
    in which the accessory device opens the ignition switch to protect the
    ignition system components when the engine stops.


CLS 123/633
TXT Radio interference protection:

    Subject matter under subclass 594 including means which shield or otherwise
    prevent electrical noise generated by the ignition system from adversely
    affecting other electrical devices.

    (1)     Note.  The protection device must be attached to or be part of the
    ignition system.


CLS 123/634
TXT Having a specific ignition coil:

    Subject matter under subclass 594 wherein significance is attributed to the
    construction of an ignition coil.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 199+ and 225+ for coils, per se.


CLS 123/635
TXT Specific coil location:

    Subject matter under subclass 594 in which significance is attributed to
    mounting or location of an ignition coil.


CLS 123/636
TXT Multiple spark ignition system:

    Subject matter under subclass 594 wherein the ignition system induces a
    plurality of separate sparks per complete engine operating cycle in each
    cylinder.


CLS 123/637
TXT System fires single spark plug per cylinder:

    Subject matter under subclass 636 wherein an engine cylinder has a single
    spark plug and means are provided to induce a plurality of separate
    multiple sparks in that plug.


CLS 123/638
TXT System fires multiple spark plugs per cylinder:

    Subject matter under subclass 636 wherein an engine cylinder contains more
    than one spark plug, each plug fired once each complete engine operating
    cycle.


CLS 123/639
TXT System using vibrator for multiple sparks upon starting:

    Subject matter under subclass 636 wherein the multiple sparks are generated
    only at start-up using an electromechanical or electronic vibrator.


CLS 123/640
TXT Dual systems:

    Subject matter under subclass 594 wherein the ignition system employs a
    plurality of independent ignition systems each of which is capable of
    producing an ignition spark.

    (1)     Note.  These systems may operate in phase adding their outputs to
    produce a single spark, or may operate out of phase to produce multiple
    sparks in a single cylinder per combustion cycle.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass may also include ignition systems with a
    separate system for each cylinder in a multicylinder engine.


CLS 123/641
TXT One for starting:

    Subject matter under subclass 640 in which one of the systems is designed
    for use during starting of the associated engine.

    (1)     Note.  The remaining system(s) may or may not be cutoff when the
    starting system is operative.


CLS 123/642
TXT Piezoelectric voltage generator:

    Subject matter under subclass 594 in which primary or secondary ignition
    coil voltage is derived from a crystalline or other pressure sensitive
    device.

    (1)     Note.  Generally the crystal is compressed by a rotating engine
    member at the proper time to produce the main ignition energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    616,    for piezoelectric devices used as position sensors.


CLS 123/643
TXT Electronic cylinder sequencing:

    Subject matter under subclass 594 in which the ignition system employs an
    electronic sequencing device for directing voltage from an ignition coil
    secondary to the respective engine cylinders.


CLS 123/644
TXT Current or voltage sensing in coil primary: Subject matter under subclass
    594 wherein the ignition circuit includes means to sense the voltage or
    current level in an ignition coil primary.


CLS 123/645
TXT Maverick spark suppressor:

    Subject matter under subclass 594 wherein the ignition circuit contains
    means which act to suppress or eliminate unwanted or out-of-time sparks due
    to interference, noise, power supply connections and disconnections, etc.


CLS 123/646
TXT Point bounce or arc suppression system:
    Subject matter under subclass 645 wherein said means is generally located
    between the ignition breaker points and the main ignition circuit, to
    suppress, shape, or filter the signal from the points to eliminate
    interference or false triggering due to bouncing of the ignition breaker
    points.


CLS 123/647
TXT Having a specific mounting of system component:

    Subject matter under subclass 594 wherein significance is attributed to the
    mounting or location of an ignition system component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    635,    for special ignition coil mounting.


CLS 123/648
TXT Having SCR triggered by lowering cathode voltage below ground:

    Subject matter under subclass 594 wherein the ignition circuit uses a
    silicone control rectifier (SCR) to conduct the ignition coil primary
    current and wherein the SCR is triggered by lowering the cathode potential
    below ground (i.e., by applying a negative cathode potential).


CLS 123/649
TXT Multiple primary current interrupters:

    Subject matter under subclass 594 wherein there are at least two switching
    elements carrying all or part of the ignition coil primary current.

    (1)     Note.  These switching elements may be in series or in parallel and
    may be in circuit before or after the coil.


CLS 123/650
TXT Power supply, ignition coil primary, and interrupter element all in series:

    Subject matter under subclass 594 in which the ignition system includes an
    interrupter means located in series with the power supply and the primary
    of the ignition coil, the interrupter means starting and stopping current
    flow through primary coil.


CLS 123/651
TXT Interrupter is multiple transistor circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 650 in which the interrupter means is a
    circuit containing more than one transistor, e.g., multistage switching
    current.


CLS 123/652
TXT Interrupter is single transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 650 in which the interrupter means is a
    transistor that starts and stops current flow in the coil primary.


CLS 123/653
TXT Additional capacitor other than breaker point capacitor is in series with
    coil primary or secondary:

    Subject matter under subclass 650 in which a capacitor, other than the
    conventional breaker point capacitor, is placed in series with the primary
    or secondary of the ignition coil.


CLS 123/654
TXT Additional capacitor other than breaker point capacitor is in parallel with
    coil primary or secondary:

    Subject matter under subclass 650 in which a capacitor, other than the
    conventional breaker point capacitor, is placed in parallel with the
    primary or secondary of the ignition coil.


CLS 123/655
TXT Diode is in series with coil primary or secondary:

    Subject matter under subclass 650 in which a diode is placed in series with
    the primary or secondary of the ignition coil.


CLS 123/656
TXT Diode is in parallel with coil primary or secondary:

    Subject matter under subclass 650 in which a diode is placed in parallel
    with the primary or secondary of the ignition coil.


CLS 123/657
TXT COMBUSTION CHAMBER:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein significance is
    attributed to the form, construction, or other feature of the volume
    enclosed by the engine cylinder head, piston bore, and the top of the
    piston when ignition of the combustible mixture takes place or when the
    piston is at top dead center.

    (1)     Note.  Includes relation of engine parts such as intake, exhaust,
    or igniting device to the combustion chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for a combustion chamber with means to vary the volume thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 39.6+ for external combustion engines
    including a combustion chamber separated from the working cylinder by a
    transfer valve or equivalent means, communication between the combustion
    chamber and working cylinder being established subsequent to ignition with
    the combustion chamber.


CLS 123/658
TXT L- or T-shaped:

    Subject matter under subclass 657 wherein the combustion chamber in the
    cylinder head extends laterally on one side of the top of the engine
    cylinder with the extension and cylinder bore in cross section forming an
    "L" shape, or two lateral extensions which in cross section with the
    cylinder bore form a "T" shape.


CLS 123/659
TXT Having groove to aid combustion:

    Subject matter under subclass 657 in which at least one groove is provided
    on part or all of the surface of the combustion chamber.

    (1)     Note.  The groove may be provided on the top, or the crown, or the
    piston.


CLS 123/660
TXT An acoustic cavity used to attenuate detonation shock waves (e.g., bodine):
    Subject matter under subclass 657 in which an especially designed cavity or
    recess is provided in the combustion chamber to reduce or attenuate the
    force of a shock wave produced when the mixture detonates (engine knock).


CLS 123/661
TXT Having squish area:

    Subject matter under subclass 657 in which part of the combustion chamber
    surface of the head extends toward the top of the piston so that when the
    piston reaches top dead center, only mechanical clearance space is left
    between the extended surface and piston and any fluid between said surface
    and piston top is squeezed out and into the remaining combustion chamber
    volume.


CLS 123/662
TXT Multiple annular combustion chambers:
    Subject matter under subclass 657 wherein the combustion chamber is formed
    by rotating a plurality of noncontiguous planar shapes through 360o about a
    fixed central axis to form a plurality of ringlike or annular chambers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    663,    for rotated shapes that are connected or touching.


CLS 123/663
TXT Annular combustion chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 657 wherein the combustion chamber is formed
    by rotating a planar shape through 360o about a fixed central axis to form
    a ringlike or annular chamber.


CLS 123/664
TXT Combustion chamber shape is a figure of revolution:

    Subject matter under subclass 657 wherein the combustion chamber is of a
    shape which may be formed by rotating at least one planar shape through
    360o about a fixed central axis with the resulting volume being symmetrical
    about the central axis.


CLS 123/665
TXT Spherical:

    Subject matter under subclass 664 in which the figure of revolution is
    ball-shaped.


CLS 123/666
TXT Hemispherical:

    Subject matter under subclass 664 in which the figure of revolution is
    dome-shaped.


CLS 123/667
TXT Asymmetric combustion chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 657 in which the combustion chamber is
    asymmetrical.


CLS 123/668
TXT Having coating or liner:

    Subject matter under subclass 657 in which at least part of the combustion
    chamber has a lamina on its inner surface.

    (1)     Note.  Coating or liner may be Teflon, gold, etc.


CLS 123/669
TXT With means for mounting, coating, or liner: Subject matter under subclass
    668 including a liner or coating-securing means.


CLS 123/670
TXT Having catalytic combustion aid:

    Subject matter under subclass 657 in which some part of the combustion
    chamber contains a catalytic material which acts as an aid to combustion.


CLS 123/671
TXT Cylinder head shape conforms to piston shape:

    Subject matter under subclass 657 in which the general shape or contour of
    a significant portion of the cylinder head follows the piston shape.


CLS 123/672
TXT Including exhaust gas condition responsive means:
    Subject matter under subclass 434 wherein the means for forming the mixture
    of fuel and oxidant senses at least one characteristic or parameter of the
    products of combustion (e.g., composition, or temperature or pressure,
    etc.) and uses such information to modify the relative proportion or ratio
    of fuel and oxidant in the mixture supplied to the internal combustion
    engine.

    (1)     Note.  A combination of an internal combustion engine with an
    exhaust treating or exhaust handling means in more than name only recited
    in the claims is classified in Class 60.  An internal combustion engine
    with the exhaust handled or treated only as necessary to evacuate the
    combustion chamber or to modify operation of the engine recited in the
    claims is found in Class 123.

    (2)     Note.  A computer or digital control system recited in the claims
    in combination with an internal combustion engine in more than name only or
    wherein the control system includes an algorithm peculiar to subject matter
    under the class definition by claim disclosure is classified in Class 123.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205+,   for rotary-type internal combustion engines with charge forming
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 272+ for an engine in which combusted
    gases are treated or handled after exhausting from the "working chamber".

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 23.31+ for analysis of combustion
    gases composition, per se.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 406+ for exhaust
    gas sensors, per se.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    carburetors, per se.

    701,    Data Processing, Navigation, and Relative Location, subclasses 101+
    for control means for internal-combustion engines including specific
    computer or data processing details.


CLS 123/673
TXT With sensor controlling each cylinder individually:
    Subject matter under subclass 672 wherein a transducer is located in the
    flow path of the products of combustion which is sensitive to a particular
    component of the products of combustion, the engine has a plurality of
    cylinders or combustion chambers and the charge forming device responds to
    signals from the transducer to modify the ratio of fuel and oxidant
    supplied individually to the cylinders or combustion chambers.  (i.e., the
    mixture ratio supplied to each cylinder or combustion chamber may be
    different)

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    691,    for multiple transducers located in the exhaust flow path
    controlling the air/fuel ratio conducted to the engine cylinders as a group.


CLS 123/674
TXT With modifying or updating memory (i.e., learning):
    Subject matter under subclass 672 wherein a control means for the charge
    forming device has an information storage section for storing values at a
    plurality of memory locations for influencing fuel and oxidant mixture
    ratios and wherein the stored values may be replaced by newly determined
    values which will produce the desired products of combustion composition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    693+,   for exhaust condition responsive charge forming devices with
    compensation for sensor output and having an information storage section
    with a single memory location.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    701,    Data Processing, Navigation, and Relative Location, subclasses 103+
    for control means for internal-combustion engines including specific
    computer or data processing details.


CLS 123/675
TXT Acceleration or deceleration responsive:
    Subject matter under subclass 674 wherein a control means for the charge
    forming device is responsive to a sudden demand for an increase or decrease
    in the power or torque output of the engine.


CLS 123/676
TXT Exhaust gas temperature or pressure responsive:
    Subject matter under subclass 672 wherein the mixture forming means has
    control means which varies the composition of the mixture of fuel and
    oxidant dependent upon the temperature or pressure of the products of
    combustion.


CLS 123/677
TXT Combined with ambient condition responsive means (e.g., pressure):Subject
    matter under subclass 672 wherein the control means is also responsive to
    an atmospheric characteristic or parameter.

    (1)     Note.  The ambient characteristic or parameter transducer may be
    located in an engine air/fuel mixture intake upstream of a throttling
    device.


CLS 123/678
TXT Ambient temperature responsive:
    Subject matter under subclass 677 wherein the control means is responsive
    to the atmospheric temperature.


CLS 123/679
TXT Combined with engine condition responsive means:
    Subject matter under subclass 672 wherein the mixture forming means
    additionally has control means responsive to an operational parameter of
    the internal combustion engine.


CLS 123/680
TXT Idling responsive:
    Subject matter under subclass 679 wherein the control means is responsive
    to a no-load or minimum speed condition of the internalcombustion engine.


CLS 123/681
TXT Engine load responsive:
    Subject matter under subclass 679 wherein the control means is responsive
    to a parameter indicative of the resistance to rotation of an output shaft
    of the engine.


CLS 123/682
TXT Acceleration or deceleration responsive:
    Subject matter under subclass 681 wherein the control means is responsive
    to a sudden demand for an increase or decrease in the power or torque
    output of the engine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    492     and 493, for charge forming devices having actuator circuits
    responsive to an acceleration or deceleration condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    701,    Data Processing, Navigation, and Relative Location, subclasses 101+
    for control means for internal-combustion engines including specific
    computer or data processing details and responsive to an acceleration or
    deceleration condition.


CLS 123/683
TXT Throttle position responsive:
    Subject matter under subclass 681 wherein the control means is responsive
    to means for varying the cross-sectional area of a mixture forming conduit.


CLS 123/684
TXT Pressure downstream of throttle valve responsive:
    Subject matter under subclass 681 wherein the control means is responsive
    to means for detecting the pressure of fluid downstream from means for
    varying the cross-sectional area of a mixture forming conduit.


CLS 123/685
TXT Starting or warmup responsive:
    Subject matter under subclass 679 wherein the control means detects and is
    responsive to at least one engine or environmental parameter which
    indicates the engine's condition (1) during or before a starting attempt or
    (2) during a period before the engine reaches normal operating temperature
    after starting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    491,    for charge forming devices with actuator circuits responsive to a
    starting condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    701,    Data Processing, Navigation, and Relative Location, subclass 113
    for control means for internal-combustion engines including specific
    computer or data processing details and responsive to a starting or warmup
    condition.


CLS 123/686
TXT Engine coolant temperature responsive:
    Subject matter under subclass 685 wherein the control means is responsive
    to the temperature of a heat exchange cooling fluid circulating through the
    internal combustion engine.


CLS 123/687
TXT Speed responsive:
    Subject matter under subclass 679 wherein the control means is responsive
    to the rate of rotation of the output shaft of the engine or of a component
    driven by the output shaft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    701,    Data Processing, Navigation, and Relative Location, subclass 110
    for control means for internal-combustion engines including specific
    computer or data processing details and responsive to engine speed.


CLS 123/688
TXT Inoperative sensor responsive:
    Subject matter under subclass 679 wherein malfunction of the control means
    is prevented by the detecting of an abnormality of operational readiness in
    the functioning of a constituent transducer in the outflow of the products
    of combustion.


CLS 123/689
TXT Engine fluid or engine component temperature responsive:
    Subject matter under subclass 679 wherein the control means is responsive
    to the temperature of a fluid within the engine or an engine component.


CLS 123/690
TXT With fail-safe, backup, or malfunction means:
    Subject matter under subclass 672 in which the control means upon detecting
    failure in a circuit or circuit element shifts (1) operation into a
    substitute circuit to accomplish the same function or (2) indicates
    functioning of the circuit or circuit element outside of acceptable
    parameters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    479,    for charge forming devices with actuator circuits having backup,
    fail-safe or failure indicator systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    701,    Data Processing, Navigation, and Relative Location, subclass 114
    for control means for internal-combustion engines including specific
    computer or data processing details and having backup systems.


CLS 123/691
TXT Multiple sensors controlling group of cylinders:
    Subject matter under subclass 672 wherein a plurality of transducers are
    located in the flow path of the products of combustion, which are sensitive
    to a particular component of the products of combustion for adjusting the
    ratio of fuel and oxidant supplied to a plurality of combustion chambers or
    cylinders of the engine.


CLS 123/692
TXT Controlling plural groups of cylinders:
    Subject matter under subclass 691 wherein there are a plurality of banks of
    cylinders, each bank having its own combustion products flow path and the
    transducers transmit signals to the mixture control means for adjusting the
    fuel and oxidant ratio for each bank of cylinders.


CLS 123/693
TXT With compensator for sensor output (e.g., current or voltage):Subject
    matter under subclass 672 wherein a signal from a transducer is adjusted or
    modified before being received by a control means for the mixture forming
    means.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes modification or adjustment to the
    sensor output signal before it is produced by the transducer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 23.21+ for gas composition
    analysis with compensation for error or drift correction of a sensor or
    transducer.


CLS 123/694
TXT Output fed to compensating circuit:
    Subject matter under subclass 693 wherein the signal is adjusted or
    modified after being produced by the transducer.


CLS 123/695
TXT Variable reference value:
    Subject matter under subclass 694 wherein the output signal from the
    transducer is compared to a signal which is variable.


CLS 123/696
TXT Proportional or integral circuit:
    Subject matter under subclass 694 wherein (1) the output signal of the
    transducer is a predetermined ratio of its input or (2) wherein the output
    signal of the transducer is fed to a circuit the output of which increases
    or decreases at a predetermined rate with respect to time.


CLS 123/697
TXT Heater for sensor or sensor environment:
    Subject matter under subclass 693 wherein separate means is provided for
    raising the temperature of the products of combustion in the region of the
    transducer or of the transducer itself.


CLS 123/698
TXT With addition of secondary fluid (e.g., fuel or exhaust gas):Subject matter
    under subclass 672 wherein means is provided to add an additional fluid to
    the combustible mixture produced by the charge forming device before the
    mixture is fed to the engine cylinders.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217,    for rotary-type internal combustion engines having charge forming
    devices with exhaust gas recirculation.

    568+,   for charge forming devices wherein at least some of the exhaust gas
    products are added to the combustible mixture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    701,    Data Processing, Navigation, and Relative Location, subclasses 108+
    for control means for internal-combustion engines including specific
    computer or data processing details and exhausted gas recirculation.


CLS 123/699
TXT Secondary fluid is auxiliary air or oxygen (e.g., carburetor air
    bleed):Subject matter under subclass 698 wherein the additional fluid is an
    oxidant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    585,    for charge forming devices having auxiliary air or oxygen added to
    the combustible mixture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    701,    Data Processing, Navigation, and Relative Location, subclasses 103+
    for control means for internal-combustion engines including specific
    computer or data processing details.


CLS 123/700
TXT Fed to air/fuel mixture:
    Subject matter under subclass 699 wherein the additional oxidant is added
    to the combustion supporting and combustible fluid mixture.


CLS 123/701
TXT With auxiliary control of carburetor:
    Subject matter under subclass 672 wherein the means for forming the charge
    forming mixture is a carburetor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    carburetors, per se.


CLS 123/702
TXT Variable venturi carburetor:
    Subject matter under subclass 701 wherein the carburetor is of the type
    having a throat which is variable in cross-sectional area.


CLS 123/703
TXT Exhaust gas composition sensor:
    Subject matter under subclass 672 wherein the transducer senses a
    constituent in the products of combustion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    494,    for charge forming devices having an actuator circuit and specific
    features of a system sensor or transducer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 406+ for exhaust
    gas sensors, per se.


CLS 123/704
TXT Air/fuel ratio prior to combustion responsive means:
    Subject matter under subclass 434 wherein the means for forming the mixture
    of fuel and oxidant (1) senses the relative proportion of oxidant and fuel
    in the mixture at a first location in an intake manifold prior to
    combustion and (2) uses such information to modify the relative proportion
    of oxidant and fuel at a second downstream location supplied to the engine.


CLS 124/
TTL MECHANICAL GUNS AND  PROJECTORS

CLS 124/
TXT This class includes the various forms of projectile-throwing or impelling
    apparatus in which the propelling agent is nonexplosive.  The apparatus
    must carry or hold the projectile so that it may be used for aerial
    projection.  This class also includes devices which actually expel the
    projectile, but have the projectile tethered to the projector to prevent
    loss of the projectile; and some devices having the structure of
    projectors, but having means at the end of a barrel to prevent actual
    expulsion of the projectile.

    NOTES



    (1)     PROJECTORS

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, for projecting devices using explosive charges to provide
    the projecting force.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 135 for a
    combination with the swatting element for swatting insects, in which a
    swatting element is projected by spring means.

    89,     Ordnance, for projecting devices using explosive charges to provide
    the projecting force.

    114,    Ships, subclasses 238+ for launching devices for self-propelled
    torpedoes.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, appropriate subclass for a means for
    driving or impacting a tool or the like, and particularly subclasses 90+
    and see the search notes therein for an impacting device.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 642 for
    devices and methods of throwing and projecting articles through space and
    for separately collecting the articles which take different paths.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for article dispensers
    not otherwise provided for, and see particularly subclasses 208+ for
    article dispensers having a source of supply and a discharge assistant
    means to remove articles therefrom, and subclass 24 for article dispensers
    in forms simulating objects, including firearms.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 79 for devices simulating firearms or other
    projectors which project a stream of liquid.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 5, 39+,
    274, and 275 for devices for projecting material to effect the comminution
    thereof.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 63 for aircraft launching devices.

    258,    Railway Mail Delivery, subclasses 5+ for devices combined with a
    vehicle or devices peculiarly adapted for throwing or projecting a mailbag
    or the like to or from a moving vehicle.

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 108+ for an implement or
    device (either, per se, or in combination with other game apparatus) for
    projecting a game projectile during play of a surface projectile game so
    that it travels upon a surface at all times in its course of travel, and
    subclasses 317+ for an implement or device combined with other game
    apparatus for projecting a game projectile into the air during play of an
    aerial projectile game.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 112 for light projectors combined with or
    simulating firearms.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, for a toy combined with a with a
    projector, particularly subclass 11 for a toy money box; subclass 45 for an
    autogyro; subclasses 63+ for a glider; subclass 308 for a figure toy;
    subclass 399 for a detonating projector and subclasses 429+ for a toy
    vehicle launcher.

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, for a device or implement for
    impelling, launching, or otherwise projecting a game projectile in which
    the following applies:

    (a)     Any projector device or implement which is combined with any other
    game device or apparatus so as to constitute a game or sport.

    (b)     A striking type of projector device or implement, per se, which is
    used for a game or sporting purpose (such as a club, bat, racket, paddle,
    mallet, stick, etc.) and which is carried by (e.g., handheld) and manually
    manipulated by a user to strike and thereby project a game projectile such
    that substantially all of the force used to project the projectile is
    supplied by the user.

    (c)     A combined projector-catcher device, per se, which is used for a
    game or sporting purpose to fling or throw a projectile into the air, and
    to also catch a game projectile already moving through the air after it has
    been projected.

    (d)     Any projector device or implement, per se (other than one which is
    operated by explosive means) which is used for a game or sporting purpose
    and which is specifically adapted and intended to project a game projectile
    so that it travels upon a playing surface substantially at all times (i.e.,
    the projectile is in contact with and moving over the playing surface
    either upon or immediately after projection).

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 150+ for high temperature (Tc greater than 30 K) superconducting
    systems or devices, particularly subclass 164 for projectile or launching
    device or system.

    D22,    Arms, Pyrotechnics, Hunting and Fishing Equipment, subclasses 103+
    for ornamental designs for firearms.

    (2)     TARGETS

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 427 for devices for holding and
    releasing live objects to be used as targets.

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 108+ for a target (either per
    se or combined with any other game apparatus) which is used to play a
    surface projectile game and subclasses 317+ (either per se or combined with
    any other game apparatus) which is used to play an aerial projectile game.

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, for a target (either per se or
    combined with any other game apparatus) which is used to play a game which
    uses a tangible projectile.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 150+ for high temperature (Tc greater than 30 K) superconducting
    systems or devices, particularly subclass 164 for projectile or launching
    device or system.

    D22,    Arms, Pyrotechnics, Hunting and Fishing Equipment, subclasses 113+
    for designs for targets.



    (3)     PROJECTILES

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 1.1 for means for making metal projectors.

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 233+ for gun sights.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 6, for harpoons
    and spears.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 501+ for a projectile
    explosively fired from a gun; and particularly subclass 529 for a gun
    barrel cleaning projectile.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, appropriate subclass for a
    projectile for boring or penetrating the earth, which may be combined with
    a projector therefor.

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 108+ for a game projectile
    combined with any other game apparatus for playing a surface projectile
    game, subclasses 317+ for a game projectile combined with any other game
    apparatus for playing an aerial projectile game, and particularly
    subclasses 362+ thereunder for a target which also acts as a projectile by
    virtue of its being projected into the air (e.g., a clay pigeon which is
    projected into the air by a target-throwing trap).

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, for a tangible game projectile
    (either per se or combined with any other game apparatus) used in the play
    of a game or sport.


CLS 124/1
TXT Device under the class definition not classifiable above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes means for imparting rapid rotation to
    a propellor-like object which propels itself through the air because of its
    shape and rotation, or a device wherein gravity or a weight facilitates the
    launching of a missile.


CLS 124/2
TXT Devices under the class definition having combined therewith means for
    exploding a cap or other explosive noise making device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, subclasses 54+ for devices made to imitate firearms which
    explode a cap, but do not expel a projectile.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 397+ for a device which
    explodes a cap, but does not simulate a firearm; especially subclass 399
    for a device in which the explosion of a cop projects an element for the
    detonator.


CLS 124/3
TXT Devices under the class definition for projecting missiles through the air
    by means of electromagnetic impulses applied to the projectile during its
    progress through the barrel of the projecting device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for apparatus wherein an electrically- actuated striker causes a
    projectile to be impelled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 12+ for linear
    electric motors, per se, though disclosed for electromagnetic guns.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 38 for plural linear
    movement electric motor systems and subclass 135 for linear movement
    electric motor systems.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for apparatus wherein an electrically-actuated striker causes a
    projectile to be impelled.


CLS 124/4
TXT Devices under the class definition for projecting missiles through the air
    by means of a centrifugal or swinging movement, as distinguished from a
    straight line impulsion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 7, 650+,
    appropriate subclasses, 214+ and 380+ for methods and apparatus for
    scattering fluent material by centrifugal force.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 275, for
    comminutors embodying centrifugal projecting means for the material.


CLS 124/5
TXT Devices under subclass 4, which are held in the hand and caused to throw a
    missile by a swinging movement of the human arm.  They may be assisted by a
    spring or flexible element in the throwing device but this must merely add
    to the effect of the throwing action of the human arm.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7+,     for devices wherein the spring is the primary projecting means,
    even though the device is held in the hand.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 358+ for pyrotechnic devices
    combined with throwing devices, and subclass 486 for grenades combined with
    a handle, hand-grip or strand to assist throwing.

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, subclasses 505+ for a player held
    or attached implement for both projecting (often by a centrifugal flinging
    movement of a player's arm) a projectile into the air and catching a
    projectile already moving through the air (e.g., a lacrosse stick, etc.),
    and subclass 615 for a player held or worn means for enhancing subsequent
    movement of a projectile that is thrown or otherwise projected by the
    player (e.g., a handheld or handworn means to assist a player to pitch a
    baseball that will have an enhanced curve during flight thereof, etc.).


CLS 124/6
TXT Devices under subclass 4, in which the throwing movement is produced by
    mechanical means.  Includes devices for mechanically pitching a baseball.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, subclass 421 for a batting
    backstop or cage (used in a playing field or court game or used to practice
    or train therefor) which may be combined with a projector which uses a
    centrifugal throwing movement to mechanically pitch a ball, and subclasses
    422+ for a device (used to practice or train for the playing of a playing
    field or court game) which may be combined with a projector which uses a
    centrifugal throwing movement to mechanically pitch a ball.


CLS 124/7
TXT Devices under subclass 6 in which the mechanical throwing device is
    actuated by a spring.  Includes devices for mechanically pitching a
    baseball.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 72+ for closing devices using
    springs of a similar nature.


CLS 124/8
TXT Devices under subclass 7 in which a mechanical throwing arm is rotated
    about a vertical axis by means of a spring, usually clay target throwing
    devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for the clips or holders for clay targets on the throwing arm.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 362+ for the clay targets,
    per se.

    D22,    Arms, Pyrotechnics, Hunting and Fishing Equipment, subclasses 113+
    for designs for targets.


CLS 124/9
TXT Devices under subclass 8, in which the angle at which the projectile is
    thrown is varied automatically, usually for the purpose of introducing an
    element of uncertainty.


CLS 124/10
TXT Devices under the class definition in which a pinching or squeezing force
    is applied, usually to curved surfaces of a projectile.


CLS 124/16
TXT Devices under the class definition in which the impelling force is the
    action of a spring applied either directly or through a plunger or similar
    means to the projectile. Includes devices impelled by a spring for sliding
    projectiles off a smooth plate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66+,    for projecting devices in which a spring drives a plunger which
    creates a quantity of compressed air, in which the air is the impelling
    agent for the projectile.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, especially subclasses 69, 70, and 71 for spring
    devices of general application.


CLS 124/17
TXT Devices under subclass 16 in which the impelling spring is a band or strip
    of elastic material, usually rubber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     for trigger and releasing mechanism for this type of projector in
    which the elastic band drives the projectile directly.

    37+,    for devices in which the elastic band drives a plunger which in
    turn drives the projectile.


CLS 124/18
TXT Devices under subclass 17, in which the elastic propelling spring is also
    itself the projectile.


CLS 124/19
TXT Devices under subclass 18, having provision for releasing a plurality of
    self-projected elastic bands in succession.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for a repeating projector using fluid pressure.


CLS 124/20.1
TXT Having handle (e.g., crotch type slingshot):
    Device under subclass 17 including an elastic projector attached to the end
    of an extension from a handle and so arranged as to be capable of
    propelling a projectile through space.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also includes handles having multiple elastic
    projects which are separately attached to ends of a bifurcated extension,
    e.g., a common slingshot.


CLS 124/20.2
TXT Magazine handle:
    Device under subclass 20.1 in which the portion of the device adapted for
    being grasped has means for storing additional projectiles.


CLS 124/20.3
TXT Arrow or dart projector:
    Handle having an elastic band under subclass 20.1 specifically adapted to
    project an elongated member having a tipped end and a fletched end adapted
    for stabilizing its flight.


CLS 124/21
TXT Devices under subclass 17, in which the starting path of the missile is
    directed through a tubular barrel or along a grooved track or the
    equivalent thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26+,    for similar devices using springs other than elastic bands as the
    projecting force.


CLS 124/22
TXT Devices under subclass 21, in which the structure is peculiarly adapted to
    the projection by elastic bands of long-shafted projectiles, such as darts
    or arrows.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23.1+,  for bows and the like.

    26+,    for projectors similar to those in this subclass, but using springs
    other than elastic bands.


CLS 124/23.1
TXT Bow:
    Device under subclass 16 in which the straightening of a bowed elongated
    spring provides the projecting force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35.1,   for a trigger or releasiong mechanism for a bowstring.

    86+,    for an archery projector element.


CLS 124/24.1
TXT Having projectile guide:
    Device under subclass 23.1, having some means for directing the initial
    path of a projectile along a desired trajectory.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for similar devices using the contracting force of an elastic
    member as the propelling force for a dart or arrow.


CLS 124/25
TXT Devices under subclass 24, in which the guide for the projectile is an
    elongated member at right angles to the bow spring. These are the devices
    commonly known as crossbows.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21+,    for similar devices, having two rigid cross arms, with the
    propelling force provided by elastic bands.

    26,     for similar devices in which the propelling force is provided by
    other types of springs.


CLS 124/25.5
TXT Having projectile supply:
    A bow having a projectile guide under subclass 24.1, having support means
    for holding one or more quarrels in ready reserve, e.g., a quiver.

    (1)     Note.  The quarrels in the ready reserve are in addition to and
    separate from any such projectile being held in or on the bow in a state of
    readiness.

    (2)     Note.  The term quarrel, as used herein, includes, but is not
    limited to including such terms as bolt, shaft, arrow, and dart.


CLS 124/25.6
TXT Compound bow:
    Apparatus under subclass 23.1 in which the bow has either (1) a fixed or
    variable mechanical advantage means for decreasing the force required to
    hold the bow at full draw, or (2) means for accelerating the projectile
    during launch at an increasing rate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    900,    for specific pulley structure.


CLS 124/25.7
TXT Having projectile supply:
    A bow under subclass 23.1, having support means for holding one or more
    arrows in ready reserve, e.g., a quiver.

    (1)     Note.  The arrows in the ready reserve are in addition to and
    separate from any such projectile being held in or on the bow in a state of
    readiness.

    (2)     Note.  The term arrow, as used herein, includes, but is not limited
    to including such terms as bolt, shaft, quarrel, and dart.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25.5,   for the combination of a projectile guide and a quiver.


CLS 124/26
TXT Devices under subclass 16, in which the starting path of the projectile is
    directed along a desired path, usually by means of a tubular barrel or
    grooved track or the equivalent thereof.  This includes devices in which
    the projectile travels along an internal guide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37+,    for the trigger and releasing mechanism for this type of projector.

    45+,    for the magazine structure for these projectors.


CLS 124/27
TXT Devices under subclass 26, having the appearance of a firearm or piece of
    ordnance, and having an actual barrel for guiding the projectile and a
    trigger for releasing the projectile.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for similar devices, which explode a cap, as well as expel a
    projectile.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 348+, particularly subclasses
    355+, 357, and 405 for projectors of this type combined in a shooting
    gallery, or with target structure.


CLS 124/28
TXT Devices under subclass 27, in which an actual firearm or piece of ordnance
    is converted into a spring projector by the use of some temporary
    converting structure. Includes the converting structure, per se. In many
    cases the projecting structure acts only to expel means to mark a target
    adjacent the muzzle of the firearm or piece of ordnance, and the marking
    device is not intended to completely leave the projector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 11+ for devices for
    teaching the handling of firearms, in which no projection of a missile or
    marking device takes place.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for an adapter for converting a firearm into a fluid-pressure gun.


CLS 124/29
TXT Devices under subclass 27, which are supported or mounted on some fixed or
    movable structure, as distinguished from devices to be carried in the hand
    or supported by the human body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, subclass 55 for toy cannons, used only for firing caps,
    but having similar mounting means.

    89,     Ordnance, for mounting or supporting means for actual pieces of
    ordnance.


CLS 124/31
TXT Devices under subclass 80 for releasing the force which impels or throws
    the projectile.

    (1)     Note.  Trigger mechanisms limited to their application to a
    specific type of projector have not been cross referenced here, and should
    be searched with the type of projector to which they are limited.  For
    example, trigger mechanism for air pressure projectors, such as those in
    this class, subclasses 11+ consisting usually of valve operating means, has
    not been cross referenced here unless obviously capable of more general
    application.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41+,    for devices to release the projectile itself from its holding or
    carrying means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machines Element or Mechanism, subclass 2, for tripping mechanism
    in general.


CLS 124/32
TXT Devices under subclass 31, in which some electrical device is used.

    (1)     Note.  For electric firing devices for firearms and ordnance, see
    Class 42, Firearms, subclass 84, and Class 89, Ordnance, subclasses 28.05+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for an electrically-actuated valve in a fluid pressure projector.


CLS 124/33
TXT Devices under subclass 31, in which an element of chance is introduced,
    usually to make the time at which the release takes place uncertain or
    unpredictable.


CLS 124/34
TXT Devices under subclass 31 for releasing the propelling force from a
    location remote from the actual projector.


CLS 124/35.1
TXT Cord or band:
    Trigger or release mechanism under subclass 31, particularly adapted to
    release a flexible cord or elastic band from a stressed state to either
    transfer or provide the force to impel a projectile.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for the release of a series or succession of elastic bands which
    propel themselves through the air.


CLS 124/35.2
TXT Bow lock or archery trigger for compound or long bow:
    Device under subclass 35.1, wherein the release means is particularly
    adapted to be grasped by an archer and to permit a smooth, controlled,
    repeatable mechanized release of the bow string when shooting an arrow.


CLS 124/36
TXT Devices under subclass 31 for releasing a swinging arm which throws or
    impels a projectile.


CLS 124/37
TXT Devices and mechanism under subclass 31, for releasing a plunger which is
    driven by a spring or other means to impel a projectile.


CLS 124/38
TXT Devices under subclass 37 in which the force with which the plunger moves
    may be varied.  For example, the releasing mechanism may be caused to
    operate upon a different point or notch on the plunger.


CLS 124/39
TXT Devices under subclass 37 for projecting a succession of missiles, as long
    as the mechanism is operated or until the supply in the projector is
    exhaused.  Usually a resetting of the impelling plunger is alternated with
    the release.


CLS 124/40
TXT Devices under subclass 31 for preventing the premature discharge or
    impelling of the projectile.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, subclass 70 for safety locks on firearms.


CLS 124/41.1
TXT Projectile holder or carrier:
    Apparatus under subclass 80 specifically adapted for positioning or
    transporting a projectile in association with the projector while the
    combination is in a ready-to-fire state.

    (1)     Note.  A projectile holder or carrier may also include a trigger or
    lock in association therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25+,    for crossbows, per se.

    31+,    for devices for releasing the projecting force.


CLS 124/42
TXT Devices under subclass 41, particularly adapted to hold or carry
    projectiles of disk shape.


CLS 124/43
TXT Devices under subclass 42, where the projectiles are targets usually of
    clay or other easily frangible material.  Includes devices to release the
    projectile at the desired point.


CLS 124/44
TXT Devices under subclass 41, particularly adapted to carry or hold
    projectiles of shapes commonly known as boomerangs.


CLS 124/44.5
TXT For a longbow or compound bow:
    Projectile holder or carrier under subclass 41.1, particularly adapted for
    holding or positioning the unlocked portion of an elongated projectile
    adjacent the projector prior to release of the projectile, e.g., an arrow
    rest.

    (1)     Note.  Crossbows are excluded from this subclass.


CLS 124/44.6
TXT Magnetic restraint:
    Projectile holder or carrier under subclass 41.1, wherein a magnet is used
    to position or retain a projectile prior to firing.


CLS 124/44.7
TXT Fluid overcomes restraining force:
    Projectile holder or carrier under subclass 41.1, wherein a pressurized
    fluid is used to overpower the positioning or retaining means and thereby
    fire the projectile.

    (1)     Note.  The pressurized fluid may be produced by actuating a plunger
    or it may be released from a pressure vessel.


CLS 124/45
TXT Devices under subclass 80 for holding or carrying a supply of projectiles
    in or on the projecting devices, usually in such a way that they are fed
    automatically into position to be thrown or impelled.  The relation of the
    magazine structure to such other parts of the projector as the projectile
    guiding barrel, may be set forth provided those other elements are recited
    or described only to show the arrangement or relationship of the magazine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, subclasses 49+ for magazines on firearms.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for article dispensing
    not otherwise provided for, and especially subclasses 208+ for such
    dispensers incorporating discharge assistant means. See the Notes to the
    definitions of Class 221 for the disposition of other related disclosure.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclasses 107+ for combined
    apparatus for positioning a member, e.g., a nail, in alignment with a
    driver, and for applying such member to work.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 35+ for cabinet structure
    broadly, for holding articles of various types similar to projectiles.


CLS 124/46
TXT Devices under subclass 45, particularly adapted to hold or carry a supply
    of disk targets.


CLS 124/47
TXT Devices under subclass 46, in which the feeding of the projectiles to the
    projector takes place by the action of gravity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for gravity fed magazines in general.


CLS 124/48
TXT Devices under subclass 45, in which the magazine is rotated step by step,
    supplying a projectile at each step in its rotation.


CLS 124/49
TXT Devices under subclass 45, in which the feeding of the projectiles takes
    place by the action of gravity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for gravity fed magazines particularly adapted for use with disk
    targets.


CLS 124/50
TXT Devices under subclass 49, in which the continuous feeding of projectiles
    is prevented by some means which permits them to pass into position only at
    a certain desired period or position of the other parts of the projector.
    This cut-off must be something other than the driving or impelling member
    of the projector.


CLS 124/51.1
TXT Mechanical projectile feed:
    Subject matter under subclass 45, in which a projectile is moved from a
    magazine to the ready-to-fire position by means of a chute, ramp, conveyor,
    linkage, or other mechanical means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, subclasses 49.01+ for magazines of similar nature for use
    with a firearm.


CLS 124/52
TXT Devices under subclass 51.1, operated or driven by a spring.


CLS 124/53
TXT Devices under subclass 52, in which the continuous feeding of projectiles
    is prevented by some means which permits them to pass into position only at
    a certain desired period or position of the other parts of the projector.
    This cut-off must be something other than the driving or impelling member
    of the projector.


CLS 124/53.5
TXT Fluid projectile feed:
    Subject matter under subclass 51.1, in which a projectile is moved from a
    magazine to the ready-to-fire position by hydraulic or pneumatic means.


CLS 124/54
TXT Apparatus under the class definition wherein an object or missile is
    impelled by a member impacting said object or missile, which member derives
    its impacting force by electrical energy applied to said member.

    (1)     Note.  See the (1) Note under subclass 56 for discussion of "impel"
    and "propel".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for apparatus wherein electromagnetic impulses applied to the
    projectile itself causes the projectile to be propelled.


CLS 124/55
TXT Apparatus under the class definition wherein no more than a blast or volume
    of gaseous material is impelled, said blast or volume having dimensions
    that are small relative to the distance to which the blast is impelled.

    (1)     Note.  The puff of gas (usually air) acts as a projectile that
    impacts against a target that moves to indicate that the puff has struck
    its target.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass provides for a projector that, as claimed in a
    patent to the projector, impels a burst of gaseous material or a burst of
    fluid material that is not further characterized as being clearly liquid or
    clearly gas.  For a projector that impels a burst of liquid material, see
    the reference to Class 222 below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 79 for a water gun wherein a blast of liquid
    is impelled.


CLS 124/56
TXT Apparatus under the class definition wherein an object or missile is
    propelled or impelled by energy applied thereto, which energy is exerted by
    way of a force tending to compress or expand the volume of a liquid or a
    gaseous material.

    (1)     Note.  As used in this and the subclasses indented hereunder (and
    also in those subclasses of this Classification Order which refer to this
    Note for a discussion of the terms), the terms "propel" and "impel", have
    the following meanings and connotations.  Both terms have a similar meaning
    of causing an object to move rapidly by exerting a force thereon.  However,
    PROPEL has the connotation of exerting a sustained force on the object,
    whereas IMPEL has the connotation of exerting an impulse of force thereon.

    (2)     Note.  The pressurized fluid generated by the force described in
    the definition is usually a gas, such as air.  The force defined may be
    that which compresses or tends to compress the fluid at the moment of use,
    or that which compresses the fluid for storage and subsequent use when the
    user of the apparatus causes a projectile to be launched.  The source of
    pressurized fluid may also be a cartridge containing gas under pressure, in
    which instance the force is that exerted by the expansion of the gas from a
    punctured cartridge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    89,     Ordnance, subclass 7 for guns, in which the pressure of a gas is
    used to expel the projectile, in which the pressure is created by the
    explosion of a charge of vapor or other explosive mixture.

    114,    Ships, subclasses 238+ for pneumatic devices for launching
    self-propelled marine torpedoes.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclasses 9+ for a member,
    e.g., stud, driving device using an explosive force.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, appropriate subclases for specific
    valve structure.


CLS 124/57
TXT Apparatus under subclass 56 wherein a missile is caused to move by
    discharge of fluid from a pressurized chamber, in which apparatus, either
    a) the missile holds the chamber therein for discharge of pressurized fluid
    therefrom as the missile is propelled, or b) the missile is held by the
    chamber and forms a seal to hold the pressurized fluid in the chamber until
    the moment of discharge, and at discharge the missile is impelled by the
    pressurized fluid from the chamber.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note of subclass 56 for discussion of "propel" and
    "impel".

    (2)     Note.  The chamber of (a) above is not necessarily separable from
    the missile, but can comprise a volume integral with and contained within
    the missile, which volume is charged with compressed gas just before the
    moment that the missile is launched, after which the discharge of gas from
    the missile propels the missile.


CLS 124/58
TXT Apparatus under subclass 56 wherein significance is attributed to means
    whereby the apparatus may be changed, a) from an apparatus using other than
    fluid-pressure energy to an apparatus using fluid-pressure energy, or b)
    from an apparatus projecting one type or size of missile to an apparatus
    projecting another type or size of missile.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus described in (a) above is especially adapted for
    converting a firearm structure using explosive energy into projector
    structure using fluid-pressure energy.  The claims in patents for such
    apparatus recite the firearm in terms of the environment that the adapter
    is to operate in rather than in terms of the firearm.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, appropriate subclasses for a projector using an explosive
    charge to provide the projecting force.


CLS 124/59
TXT Apparatus under subclass 56 provided with two or more tubes, any of which
    tubes guides the launching of a missile while the missile is within the
    confines of the apparatus, and provided with means to connect the same
    source of pressurized fluid to any or all of the tubes selectively.


CLS 124/60
TXT Apparatus under subclass 56 wherein the energy to impel a missile is
    applied by removing from a chamber a quantity of gas, and the missile is
    subsequently released to be projected through and out of the chamber under
    the urging of ambient gas behind the missile suddenly filling the chamber.


CLS 124/61
TXT Apparatus under subclass 56 provided with a component located between the
    missile and a source of pressurized fluid, which component is pushed by the
    pressurized fluid into impacting contact with the missile, thereby to impel
    the missile.


CLS 124/62
TXT Apparatus under subclass 56 wherein the source of pressurized fluid for
    impelling a missile is the respiratory system of a person using the
    apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  The apparatus is usually a tube that guides a missile for
    launching therefrom, into which tube the user exhales to produce the
    pressure that impels the missile.


CLS 124/63
TXT Apparatus under subclass 56 provided with a component that is carried by
    the apparatus and is driven relative to the apparatus by an action of the
    user of such apparatus, wherein the driving of said component pressurizes
    the fluid that impels a missile.

    (1)     Note.  The user's action may be applied to the pressurizing
    component directly to cause a momentary pressure that is used immediately,
    or may be applied indirectly by an intermediate member that transmits the
    user's force into a pressurizing force.  Moreover, the user's energy may be
    stored in a spring member that will subsequently drive the pressurizing
    component, or stored in a container of pressurized fluid.


CLS 124/64
TXT Apparatus under subclass 63 wherein the driving of said component generates
    a sudden rush of pressurized fluid that impels the missile as the component
    is driven.


CLS 124/65
TXT Apparatus under subclass 64 wherein the component is a piston having a
    periphery substantially conforming to the interior surface of a tube, and
    the piston reciprocates inside of the tube to pressurize fluid within the
    tube.

    (1)     Note.  The cylinder in which pressure is created may be the barrel
    that guides the missile to be impelled or may be an auxiliary cylinder that
    confines the pressurized fluid for release into the barrel that guides the
    missile.


CLS 124/66
TXT Apparatus under subclass 65 wherein the driving of said piston is caused by
    a resilient element.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the user's energy is usually stored in a
    spring (usually by compressing the spring) which is subsequently released
    to drive the piston that pressurizes the impelling fluid.


CLS 124/67
TXT Apparatus under subclass 66 wherein the piston reciprocates inside of a
    first tube and the missile is impelled from a second tube, and wherein the
    inside diametral dimension of said first tube is greater than the inside
    diametral dimension of said second tube, and wherein the tubes are
    connected for passage of fluid, whereby pressure generated in said first
    tube is used to impel the missile from said second tube.

    (1)     Note.  The first tube is the auxiliary cylinder referred to in (1)
    Note of subclass 65.


CLS 124/68
TXT Apparatus under subclass 67 wherein the action force that drives the piston
    for pressurizing the fluid creates a reaction force, which apparatus is
    provided with means to consume or compensate for the reaction force.


CLS 124/69
TXT Apparatus under subclass 63 wherein the driving of said component generates
    pressurized fluid that is held in a chamber, which chamber is provided with
    means for a) closing the chamber to hold pressurized fluid therein or b)
    opening the chamber to permit the pressurized fluid to be discharged or
    recharged.


CLS 124/70
TXT Apparatus under subclass 56 provided with a chamber for containing the
    pressurized fluid, which chamber includes a check valve whereby pressurized
    fluid admitted to the chamber, and also includes a control valve whereby
    pressurized fluid released from the chamber to impel a missile.

    (1)     Note.  The term "check valve" refers to a device in a conduit or
    passageway for fluid, which device permits the passage of fluid in one
    direction of fluid movement through the device, but does not permit the
    passage of fluid in the opposite direction of movement.

    (2)     Note.  The term "control valve" refers to a device in a conduit or
    passageway for fluid, which device may be closed to prevent the passage of
    fluid therethrough, or may be opened to a regulated degree to permit the
    passage of fluid therethrough to a degree of fluid flow limited only by the
    area of the opening.


CLS 124/71
TXT Apparatus under subclass 56 provided with means for regulating the release
    of pressurized fluid from a chamber that contains said pressurized fluid,
    which means is triggered by a user of the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the apparatus includes a gas cartridge with
    pressurized fluid therein, and means for puncturing the cartridge to
    release the fluid to impel the missile.


CLS 124/72
TXT Apparatus under subclass 71 wherein significance is attributed to a manner
    of operating the apparatus such that a single actuation of a control member
    causes a plurality of missiles to be launched in quick sequence.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for repeated launching of elastic-band projectiles.


CLS 124/73
TXT Apparatus under subclass 71 wherein the regulating means is a control valve
    which may be opened to release pressurized fluid to impel a missile.

    (1)     Note.  See the (1) Note under subclass 70 for further discussion of
    the meaning of "control valve".


CLS 124/74
TXT Apparatus under subclass 73 wherein a chamber that may be put into and
    taken out of the apparatus is the source of pressurized fluid, which
    apparatus is provided with a control valve coacting with said chamber
    containing pressurized fluid to regulate the release of fluid from the
    chamber.


CLS 124/75
TXT Apparatus under subclass 73 wherein the control valve includes a member,
    which member is triggered by a user to be moved by pressurized fluid to
    regulate release of pressurized fluid to impel a missile.


CLS 124/76
TXT Apparatus under subclass 73 wherein the control valve includes a member,
    which member is triggered by a user to be moved by a resilient element to
    regulate release of pressurized fluid to impel a missile.


CLS 124/77
TXT Apparatus under subclass 73 wherein the control valve includes a member,
    which member is triggered to be moved by electrical energy to regulate
    release of pressurized fluid to impel a missile.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for an electrically-released trigger device.


CLS 124/78
TXT Apparatus under the class definition provided with two drums rotating on
    parallel axes in opposite rotational directions so that their adjacent
    peripheries are moving in the same direction, the drums being spaced apart
    so that their adjacent peripheries are separated by a distance
    substantially equal to or slightly less than a cross-sectional dimension of
    a missile that will pass between the drums, whereby as the missile passes
    between the drums in tangential relation thereto, the missile will be
    accelerated by contact with the peripheries of the rotating drums.


CLS 124/79
TXT Apparatus under the class definition provided with a member for impacting
    against a missile when the member is moved, which member is impacted by a
    user of the apparatus and transmits the motion of the user into motion of
    the member to impact against and impel the missile.


CLS 124/80
TXT Device under the class definition wherein significance is attributed to a
    particular portion of the structure or operating mechanism of a
    projectile-throwing or impelling apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, appropriate subclasses for elements similar to those in
    this group, when used in connection with firearms.

    89,     Ordnance, appropriate subclasses for elements similar to those in
    this group when used in connection with ordnance.


CLS 124/81
TXT Device under subclass 80 which imparts a rapid rotation to a missile about
    an axis that is substantially coincident with the line of movement of the
    missile, or which diverts a moving missile from one trajectory to a
    different trajectory as it is being impelled from a projectile-impelling
    apparatus.


CLS 124/82
TXT Device under subclass 80 which moves a missile relative to a projector
    thereof before it is impelled therefrom, such movement being for the
    purpose of locating the missile in proper position to be impelled, or which
    removes from a projector the cartridge of a projectile-carrying cartridge
    after the launching of a missile from the cartridge.

    (1)     Note.  The term "projectile-carrying cartridge" is defined in part
    (b) of the definition of subclass 57 above.


CLS 124/83
TXT Device under subclass 80 in which the particular portion is a tube on the
    projectile-impelling apparatus, which tube guides a missile during the
    short time that the missile is within the apparatus just before it is fully
    launched therefrom.


CLS 124/84
TXT Device under subclass 83 in which one tube can be exchanged for another
    tube, or in which a tube can be varied in dimension, whereby missiles of
    varying dimensions can be launched from a particular projectile-impelling
    apparatus, or in which a particular tube may be mounted on one form of
    stock (e.g., to simulate a hand gun) or mounted on another form of stock
    (e.g., to simulate a rifle).


CLS 124/85
TXT Device under subclass 83 in which the tube that guides the missile is
    enclosed along substantially its entire length by a second tube spaced
    radially from the guiding tube.


CLS 124/86
TXT Device under subclass 80 in which the particular portion is part of an
    apparatus wherein a user impels an arrow from a bow.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of the subclasses indented hereunder, a "bow"
    is defined as a strip of elongated resilient material, usually curved or
    bent, having a "string" connecting the two ends of the strip.  In use, the
    bow is grasped by a "handle" and a portion of the string is pulled away
    from the handle with an arrow between the string and the handle.  A groove
    or "nock" in the rear end of the arrow is fitted to the string so that when
    the string is released energy which has been stored in the bow by pulling
    apart is released and the arrow is impelled.


CLS 124/87
TXT Device under subclass 86 in which the particular portion is a component
    that aids a user to properly aim an arrow towards its target.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 265 for a sighting means, per se.


CLS 124/88
TXT Device under subclass 86 in which the particular portion is a bow handle,
    or a component fastened thereto.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note to subclass 86 for a discussion of the terms
    "bow" and "handle" in relation to other archery terms.


CLS 124/89
TXT Device under subclass 88 in which the portion or component tends to prevent
    excess motion of the bow, especially during launching of an arrow therefrom.


CLS 124/90
TXT Device under subclass 86 in which the particular portion is a bow string,
    or a component fastened thereto.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note to subclass 86 for a discussion of the terms
    "bow" and "string" in relation to other archery terms.


CLS 124/91
TXT Device under subclass 90 in which the portion or component serves to
    position the nock of an arrow relative to its correct position on the
    strings to properly launch the arrow.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note to subclass 86 for a discussion of the terms
    "nock" and "string" in relation to other archery terms.


CLS 124/92
TXT Device under subclass 90 in which the portion or component tends to reduce
    the noise that normally is caused by vibration of a string after release
    thereof.

              CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTION


CLS 124/900
TXT LIMB TIP ROTATABLE ELEMENT STRUCTURE:
    Collection of documents disclosing reels, cams, eccentrics, pulleys,
    wheels, etc., which are mounted at or near an extreme end of a bow stave in
    such fashion as to be operatively associated with a means for increasing
    the shooter's mechanical advantage, e.g., the pulleys of a compound bow.


CLS 125/
TTL STONE WORKING

CLS 125/
TXT This class includes machines, tools, and processes not otherwise classified
    for operating upon stone or stone-like substance, which has previously been
    removed from its native position in the earth, and also some miners'
    hand-tools. This class does not include:



    (1)     Inventions classifiable in Class 299, Mining or In Situ
    Disintegration of Hard Material, for mining valuable material or
    disintegrating hard material in situ .

    (2)     Inventions classifiable in Class 451, Abrading, for operating upon
    the surface of the material with an abradant;

    (3)     Processes and apparatus for comminuting stone and stone-like
    substance, classifiable in Class 241, Solid Material Comminution or
    Disintegration.  See sections 4 and 5 of the main class definition of that
    class (241) for the line.  Class 125 includes some patents for working
    stone or stone-like comminuting elements (e.g., millstones) to prepare them
    for use.  See particularly subclasses 27+ and 42.

    (4)     Inventions which are equally useful for operation upon metal and
    are classifiable in Classes 29, Metal Working; 82, Turning; 83, Cutting;
    408, Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool; and 409, Gear Cutting,
    Milling, or Planing.

    (5)     Inventions which are equally useful for operation upon softer
    material, like wood and are classifiable in Classes 83, Cutting, 142, Wood
    Turning; 144, Woodworking;

    (6)     A process or means for boring into the earth, concrete, stone or
    the like in situ is classified in Class 175, Boring or Penetrating the
    Earth.  A hammer or impact device for impacting an earth penetrating means
    is classified in Class 175 subclass 135.  (See section IV and V of the
    class definition of Class 175 for the line between Class 125 and Class 175).

    (6A)    Class 173, Tool Driving or Impacting provides for subject matter
    directed to driving or impacting a tool, when such subject matter includes
    combined features peculiar to tool driving, but which does not include
    features limiting the subject matter to a specific tool art, such as
    specific shape of the work contacting portion of a tool, related tools, or
    an opposed work support.  Class 125 has not been cleared as to subject
    matter in conflict with this line.

    (7)     Tools in which the invention resides merely in the means for
    securing the operating portion of the tool to the handle or holder.  These
    are classified in Class 279, Chucks or Sockets.

    (8)     Note.  Class 134, Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, for the
    subcombination of cleaning stone or brick by detergent action.

    (9)     Note.  See  Class 30, Cutlery, subclass 164.5, for ice picks and
    chippers.


CLS 125/1
TXT Inventions relating to the stone-working art are not otherwise classifiable.


CLS 125/2
TXT Mechanically operating upon stone to cut, chip, or otherwise remove
    material from the surface thereof in such a manner as to produce a surface
    of definite form, the tool having a cutting movement independent of the
    relative feeding movement between the tool and the stone.


CLS 125/3
TXT The stone is operated upon by the rotation of a cutter other than a
    grinding-wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, appropriate
    subclasses, for drilling machines which feed the work or tool or both
    relative to one another along the axis of the tool; and, see the Notes
    thereto for other machines in which a rotating tool is fed relative to work.


CLS 125/4
TXT Machines in which the cutter-support is given a feeding movement during
    operation of the cutting-tool.


CLS 125/5
TXT Rotary power-operated tools adapted to be interchangeably secured to
    power-driven arbors of stone-dressing machines.


CLS 125/6
TXT The stone is operated upon by the continuous operation of a picking-tool.


CLS 125/7
TXT Machine in which the picking-tool support is given a feeding movement
    during operation of the picking-tool.


CLS 125/8
TXT Machines in which a tool capable of independent operation is supported on
    the end of an arm which extends considerably beyond the main frame of the
    machine.


CLS 125/9
TXT Material is removed from a stone-surface by movement of a tool with a
    cutting edge along the surface of the stone.


CLS 125/10
TXT The stone is given a continuous rotary movement against a tool.


CLS 125/11.01
TXT Grinding-wheel dressing:
    Subject matter under subclass 10 in which the wheel is sharpened by cutting
    away its glazed or loaded grinding surface, thereby exposing sharp new
    cutting grains to the work.

    (1)     Note.  For ease of cutting and proper chip removal, voids are
    provided in the grinding wheel.  As cutting proceeds, some chips become
    firmly lodged in the voids.  This reduces grain clearance and cutting
    efficiency.  This condition is called "loading".


    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, subclass 442 for an accessory  having a function
    supplemental to grinding such as ``truing," subclass 72 for a combined
    abrading machine with dressing, subclasses 21 and 22 for a grinding machine
    with grinding wheel wear compensation, and subclass 56 for a method of
    grinding and tool forming.


CLS 125/11.02
TXT Indexing of tool point:
    Subject matter under subclass 11.01 in which a dressing tool for truing up
    the grinding wheel has a plurality of cutting edges and is secured to a
    tool holder for a movement which causes a change from one cutting edge to
    another.

    (1)     Note.  The dressing tool may include a truing head consisting of a
    cylinder provided with a series of separate retractable diamond tools each
    of which is capable of being rigidly locked.

    (2)     Note.  The dressing tool may include a body having a shank, an
    insert holder and an indexable head diamond insert press fitted into the
    insert holder.


CLS 125/11.03
TXT Rotary or crush dressing:
    Subject matter under subclass 11.01 for dressing the grinding wheel surface
    by use of a (heavy crushing) pressure between the tool and the grinding
    wheel to break the grinding wheel


            abrasive bond or by the use of a dressing tool which rotates during
    dressing.


CLS 125/11.04
TXT Contouring of grinding wheel face:
    Subject matter under subclass 11.01 to produce a form other than flat on
    the wheel surface.

    (1)     Note.  This form may be a curve or radius, an angle, indentation or
    serration (tooth), or any type of profile other than straight.


CLS 125/11.05
TXT Cam controlled:
    Subject matter under subclass 11.04 for forming a shape on the grinding
    wheel with a relative movement between the grinding wheel and dressing
    tool, the path of which is guided or controlled by a rotatable, pivotal or
    rockable member having a contour.

    (1)     Note.  Three generic types of cam are:  face, cylindrical, and
    plate.



    (1)     The face cam consists of a cam track cut into the periphery of a
    wheel.

    (2)     The cylindrical cam has the cam track cut into the face of a
    cylinder.

    (3)     The plate cam use the periphery of edge of a longitudinal member.
    The cam follower presses against the edge of a plate cam and is held there
    by pressure from a spring or the pressure of the grinding wheel itself.

    (2)     Note.  In cam controlled, the dressing tool is mounted in a
    floating holder that is actuated by a cam to produce required shape in the
    wheel.


CLS 125/11.06
TXT Templet-or pattern-controlled:
    Subject matter under subclass 11.04 which includes an original or model
    form contour for imitation and a stylus.  The point of the stylus following
    the form contour activates the dressing tool to duplicate the form contour
    on the periphery of the grinding wheel.



    (1)     Note.  The device duplicates the motion path of a tracer moving
    over a templet, but does so with a reduction in motion in proportion to the
    pantograph ratio.  The templet is the exact form that is required on the
    grinding wheel but is enlarged by an amount equal to the pantograph ratio.


CLS 125/11.07
TXT Hydraulically actuated:
    Subject matter under subclass 11.06 in which the dressing motion is
    imparted by fluid acting on a piston.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11.20,  for dressing tool motion controlled by fluid actuated drive means.


CLS 125/11.08
TXT Pantograph:
    Subject matter under subclass 11.06 in which the dressing tool is operated
    by a device, having a stylus for tracing and copying, mounted on multiple
    jointed members in the form of a parallelogram.


CLS 125/11.09
TXT Fulcrum bar:
    Subject matter under subclass 11.06 which includes a single lever or arm
    having one end journaled for universal movement and the other end operating
    over a form template.

    (1)     Note.  The arm or lever has a single support which may be a
    spherical bearing, a gimble mechanism, a ball or roller type bearing or
    other similar means which permits the lever movement.


CLS 125/11.1
TXT Tangent bar forms arcuate surface:
    Subject matter under subclass 11.04 in which the dressing tool is guided by
    an elongate bar which is transversely rotated around a curved surface.


CLS 125/11.11
TXT Forming arcs and tangents thereto:
    Subject matter under subclass 11.04 in which the wheel dresser produces a
    surface of curved form on the grinding wheel and also a planer surface
    which intersects the curved form.



CLS 125/11.12
TXT Generation of arc or bevel by two or more tools:
    Subject matter under subclass 11.04 in which a curved or bevel surface on a
    grinding wheel is accomplished by two or more dressing tools.

    (1)     Note.  Both tools may produce bevel surface on each side of a wheel
    or one tool may produce a bevel surface and the other tool may produce a
    curved surface.


CLS 125/11.13
TXT With compound motion of tool:
    Subject matter under subclass 11.04 in which the dressing tool is moved in
    a main dressing motion and also has an additional or separate motion which
    motion together produces the desired shape.


CLS 125/11.14
TXT Arc forming by swinging tool:
    Subject matter under subclass 11.04 in which a swinging arm that carries
    the dressing tool pivots in an arc or radius about an axis to form a curved
    shape on the grinding wheel.


CLS 125/11.15
TXT Forming bevel:
    Subject matter under subclass 11.04 in which the dressing tool cuts an
    inclination that forms an angle other than a right angle with respect to
    the grinding wheel axis of rotation.


CLS 125/11.16
TXT By swinging tool:
    Subject matter under subclass 11.15 in which the dressing tool swings about
    an axis to form an angle on the grinding wheel face.


CLS 125/11.17
TXT Transverse swinging motion to form planar surface:
    Subject matter under subclass 11.01 which forms a linear grinding surface
    across the grinding wheel by a dressing tool pivoting in a plane generally
    parallel to grinding wheel surface.


CLS 125/11.18
TXT Peripheral grinding face:
    Subject matter under subclass 11.01 in which the tool is especially adapted
    for dressing of a grinding wheel which is used in grinding the internal
    bore of a workpiece.


CLS 125/11.19
TXT Radial grinding face:
    Subject matter under subclass 11.01 which  provides for movement of
    dressing tool across the side face of the grinding wheel, i.e., the dresser
    acts along the radial face of the grinding.


CLS 125/11.2
TXT Hydraulic tool traversing means:
    Subject matter under subclass 11.01 in which the dressing tool is moved
    across the grinding wheel by fluid actuated drive means.


CLS 125/11.21
TXT Rectilinearly reciprocating tool:
    Subject matter under subclass 11.01 in which the dressing tool traverses
    back-and-forth in a straight line across the face of the grinding wheel.

    (1)     Note.  The dressing tool may dress the wheel during forward
    movement or during backward movement.


CLS 125/11.22
TXT Coolant supply:
    Subject matter under subclass 11.01 in which a coolant fluid or similar
    means is provided to cool the dressing tip.

    (1)     Note.  The life of the dressing tip is extended by preventing it
    from becoming overheated during the wheel dressing and truing operation.



CLS 125/11.23
TXT With compensator for tool wear:
    Subject matter under subclass 11.01 including a supplementary mechanism
    responsive to the operation of means for dressing the wheel and effective
    to adjust the distance between the wheel and the dressing tool by a
    predetermined fixed amount to offset the reduction in the dressing tool
    which results from the dressing operation.


CLS 125/12
TXT The stone is divided into two or more smaller stones by sawing a kerf
    either entirely through the stone or to a sufficient depth to permit the
    portions to be readily broken apart.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 166, is the generic place for hand manipulable
    saws and see (3) Note thereto for other classes where hand manipulated saws
    and sawing machines will be found.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 875+ and 915.3 for ice-cutting machines.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 91 for earth boring means
    including a continuously rotating bit describing a noncircular
    cross-sectional bore.


CLS 125/13.01
TXT Rotary:
    Subject matter under subclass 12 in which sawing of stone or similar
    material is accomplished by rotation of a circular saw in the plane of the
    kerf.

    (1)     Note.  The device usually comprises a blade which is held between a
    pair of plates or supported by a frame assembly or similar support means
    and operatively connected to a drive means to rotate at a very high speed.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 347 for rotary blades.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 409+ for cutting by using rotatable-disc tool
    pair or tool and carrier.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 91 for rotating cutters
    forming circular bores.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, appropriate
    subclasses for drilling machines which feed the work or tool or both
    relative to one another along the axis of the tool; and, see the notes
    thereto for other machines in which a rotating tool is fed relative to work.


CLS 125/13.02
TXT Having internal cutting edge:
    Subject matter under subclass 13.01 including a rotary blade having an
    opening with a cutting edge on the internal edge of the opening, the
    workpiece being projected into the opening for cutting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, subclass 180 for an abrading machine in which grinding is
    done by the internal peripheral face of an annular tool having rotary
    motion.


CLS 125/13.03
TXT With pivoted frame:
    Subject matter under subclass 13.01 in which the saw blade is mounted for
    movement on a swingable arm adjacent to the workpiece.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 490 for cutting by saws mounted on a rotatable
    carrier movable during cutting.

    451,    Abrading, subclass 236 for abrading machines in which the tool is
    mounted on a swinging carrier, permitting its application to and removal
    from the work, as desired.


CLS 125/14
TXT Machines in which the saw-support is given a feeding movement during the
    operation of the saw.


CLS 125/15
TXT Rotary disk saws adapted to be interchangeably secured to power-driven
    arbors of stone-sawing machines.


CLS 125/16.01
TXT Reciprocating:
    Subject matter under subclass 12 wherein the cutting blade moves back and
    forth in a straight line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 746, for cutting by tool reciprocable along
    elongated edge and by rectilinearly reciprocating tool.

    451,    Abrading, subclass 164 for abrading machine having rectilinearly
    reciprocating tool.


CLS 125/16.02
TXT Having saw with supply and take-up means:
    Subject matter under 16.01 having means to feed a fresh portion of the saw
    for cutting to the workpiece and to move the used portion of the saw away
    from the workpiece.


CLS 125/16.03
TXT Lever-operated saw:
    Subject matter under subclass 16.01 in which the saw blade is supported by
    pivoting members for its cutting movement.


CLS 125/16.04
TXT Angular cutting saws:
    Subject matter under subclass 16.01 in which a plurality of saws are
    arranged to cut the workpiece in blocks or slabs of tapering form.


CLS 125/17
TXT Frames in which the saws are mounted and which reciprocate with the saws
    during operation.


CLS 125/18
TXT Reciprocating saw-blades adapted to be interchangeably secured to the other
    parts of the machine for receiving a reciprocating movement.


CLS 125/19
TXT Sawing stone by the oscillation of a saw-blade in the plane of the kerf.


CLS 125/20
TXT Cutting of a cylindrical kerf by rotary movement of a saw in a closed path
    around the periphery of the disk.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 403+ for a core forming
    type earth boring bit.


CLS 125/21
TXT Sawing stone by the continuous travel of an endless flexible member along
    its own length while in contact with the stone.


CLS 125/22
TXT Abrading or cutting units adapted to be independently secured to or formed
    along the edge of a saw-blade at spaced-apart points.


CLS 125/23.01
TXT SPLITTING, SHEARING AND PUNCHING:
    Subject matter under the class definition for shearing, splitting, or
    punching of stone by the application of opposing forces to different
    portions of an integral stone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, subclasses 93+ for breaking or
    tearing apparatus.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 4 which
    includes physical steps of separation of the laminations of materials (such
    as mica) when combined with the comminuting or disintegrating step.


CLS 125/23.02
TXT Roller-type cutters:
    Subject matter under subclass 23.01 in which a working force is applied by
    at least one member having a cutter in the form of a rotatable element
    which is traversed across the workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  Cutting to a desired size or shape is usually accomplished
    by scoring the surface of the workpiece.


CLS 125/24
TXT Separating mica or mica-like substance along its planes of cleavage.


CLS 125/25
TXT Dressing the surfaces of slates or thin slabs of stone.


CLS 125/26
TXT Removing foreign material adhering to bricks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, for processes of cleaning
    brick by detergent action.


CLS 125/27
TXT Cutting or cleaning the grooves or millstones or like objects.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 291+ for
    comminuting elements (e.g., millstones).  Patents including claims to both
    the comminuting element and the process or apparatus for dressing or
    fashioning it are classified in class 241 on the basis of the article.


CLS 125/28
TXT Operating upon the grooves of millstones by the continuous rotation of a
    cutter other than a grinding-wheel.


CLS 125/29
TXT Operating upon the grooves of millstones by the continuous operation of a
    picking-tool.


CLS 125/30.01
TXT PRECIOUS STONE WORKING:
    Subject matter under the class definition for working various minerals,
    such as diamond, emerald, ruby, or sapphire, valued for their rarity or
    appearance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 25.35 for piezoelectric device making.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 434 for an earth boring
    bit which includes a diamond on its cutting edge.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 30 which includes claims
    for nominal cutting of crystal to prepare it for optical examination.


CLS 125/30.02
TXT Wire drawing die making:
    Subject matter under subclass 30.01 for forming or reconditioning the hole
    in a wire drawing die.


CLS 125/35
TXT Supporting structures for holding stones in place while being operated upon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses. Class 269 is the residual
    locus for patents to a device for clamping, supporting and/or holding an
    article (or articles) in position to be operated on or treated.  See notes
    thereunder for other related loci.


CLS 125/36
TXT Tools for operating upon stone not otherwise classifiable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 164.5+ for ice picks and chippers.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 327+ for an earth
    boring bit or bit element.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 79.1+
    for a cutter head or tooth for mining or disintegrating hard material in
    situ.


CLS 125/37
TXT A freely rotatable wheel adapted to wear down the surface of the stone by
    traveling across the same.


CLS 125/38
TXT The cutting portions are rigidly held in place and are adaped to be moved
    along the stone-surface to remove material therefrom.


CLS 125/39
TXT The cutting portion consists of a diamond rigidly held in place.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 434 for an earth boring
    bit which includes a diamond on its cutting edge.


CLS 125/40
TXT For dressing stone by striking against the stone-surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclass 463, and see the notes thereto for other impact
    tools.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 414+ for an impact type
    earth boring bit.


CLS 125/41
TXT Provided with a plurality of closely-arranged projections upon the
    stone-striking portion.


CLS 125/42
TXT For cleaning and cutting the grooves of millstones.  The cutting element
    usually consists of a blade with its cutting edge extending laterally and
    transversely of the handle.

    (1)     Note.  See the note under subclass 27.


CLS 125/43
TXT Adapted to be used upon comparatively soft material or ordinary earth.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTION


CLS 125/901
TXT FORMING PIEZOELECTRIC CRYSTALS:
    Apparatus under the class definition having means to form an element which
    has ability to generate voltage when mechanical force is applied or to
    produce mechanical force when a voltage is applied.


CLS 126/
TTL STOVES AND FURNACES

CLS 126/
TXT This class includes, generally, apparatus for the application of heat.  It
    comprises cooking and heating stoves, hot-air furnaces, and accessories;
    hot-air radiators and heating drums; open water heaters, steaming
    apparatus, dampers, fireplaces, and stovepipes.  It includes the fuel
    burner when combined with the stove or furnace structure; combinations of a
    particular stove or furnace structure of the type classified in this class
    (126) with a closed water heater or steam generator; water heaters of only
    the nonpressure type unless they are structurally tied to the stove or
    furnace or form a necessary part thereof, and grates of general use in
    stoves, hot-air furnaces, or boiler furnaces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclass 540 for a fuel composition
    combined with an incombustible carrier, e.g., a torch, etc.

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, appropriate subclasses for closures
    of the type provided for and see the search notes thereto in section IV of
    Class 49 for the loci of closures in other classes.

    110,    Furnaces, for the broad art of combustion of solid or combined
    solid and fluid fuel.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, for the structure of a water heater
    or steam generator with its heating means.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, for devices (1)
    in the form of panels in which flexible fabrics or other flexible sheet
    material forms the panel portion, (2) in the form of panel units formed of
    plural strips, slats or panels interconnected for relative motion
    (excluding those connected only by a common operator or mounted on a common
    support), (3) panels in the form of portable partitions or (4) parts
    (1)-(3) combined with each other or with rigid closures or other rigid
    panels, even though combined with only those features of the fire place,
    stove or furnace which pertain to the mounting and for operating of the
    flexible or portable panels.

    219,    Electric Heating, for the generation of heat by electricity, and
    the utilization of the heat similarly to this class (126) as in fluid,
    oven, tool, etc., heating wherein there is involved electrical
    characteristics or structure.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, for means to
    accomplish the function of the class wherein there is not involved
    structure which forms the basis of classification in this class (126).

    237,    Heating Systems, for heating systems using air, steam, or water as
    the distributing agent to the heat dispersing means.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 30 for furnace lining formation or repair and see the notes
    thereto.

    431,    Combustion, appropriate subclass for a residual combustion
    apparatus or process, per se.

    432,    Heating, appropriate subclass for the apparatus or method for the
    application of heat to materials not specifically provided for in the
    subclasses of Class 126, or elsewhere.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for processes wherein toxic or hazardous waste is burned in a
    stove or furnace.  See cross-reference art collection, subclass 900, for
    apparatus useful in the destruction of hazardous or toxic waste.


CLS 126/1
TXT Subject matter under the class definition generally of cast or sheet metal,
    wire, or rod construction, adapted to culinary heating purposes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19.5,   for combustion engine heated cooking stoves and ovens.

    100,    for cooking stoves combined with hot air furnaces.

    218,    for attachments used on the top of heating stoves adapting such
    stoves to cooking.

    222+,   for trash burning cooking stoves.

    263.01+, for cooking stoves in which heat is generated by noncombustion
    chemical reactions.

    506,    for cooking or oven attachments used in fireplaces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 324+ for mass or
    machine type cookers and for vessels with heating means, which are
    particularly adapted to the cooking of foods or the preparation of
    beverages.


CLS 126/2
TXT Cooking stoves under subclass 1 that have two or more fire pots related to
    a single structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111,    for this structure in a hot air furnace.


CLS 126/3
TXT Devices under subclass 2 comprising a combined cooking and heating stove.


CLS 126/4
TXT Cooking stoves under subclass 1 adapted to heating for purposes other than
    cooking. In this subclass will be found what are generally known as "parlor
    cooking stoves".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for such stoves having double fire pots.

    100,    for hot air furnaces adapted to cooking.

    218,    for heating stoves having lid or tops or attachments for the lid or
    top to adapt it for cooking.


CLS 126/5
TXT Combined cooking and heating stoves under subclass 4 provided with steam or
    hot water generators for house heating, power, or cooking.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    344+,   for domestic water heaters in general and see the notes thereunder.


CLS 126/6
TXT Combined cooking and heating stoves under subclass 4 which have means for
    heating and circulating a current of air.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58+,    for detail air heating features.


CLS 126/7
TXT Combined cooking and heating stoves under subclass 4 which contain a
    magazine or self- feeder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     and see the notes thereunder, for other magazine feeds.


CLS 126/8
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 in a masonry setting, permanent in
    character.


CLS 126/9
TXT Devices under subclass 1 structurally adapted to be folded or the several
    parts separated, so as to allow for its easy transportation from place to
    place.  The stoves in this class are usually termed "portable furnaces".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25+,    59 and 275, for other stoves having knock-down or separable
    features.


CLS 126/10
TXT Devices under subclass 1 that are provided with magazines or self-feeding
    coal devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      68, 73, 74, 107, and 501, for other stoves having magazine feed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 293+ for magazine fed furnaces.


CLS 126/11
TXT Subject matter under subclass 10 in which the magazine or coal-receptacle
    is removably placed in the stove-holes and provided with means for feeding
    the coal to the fire-pot.


CLS 126/12
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 relating to hearths and to means for
    attaching the hearth to the stove.


CLS 126/13
TXT Devices under subclass 12 that are provided with fire pots for cooking or
    broiling purposes.


CLS 126/14
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 including attachments for broiling purposes
    which are inseparable from the stove structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for gas stove broilers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 385, 444, 450, and any
    indented subclasses for food broiling apparatus.


CLS 126/15
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 including means for the preliminary heating
    of air before its introduction into the combustion chamber or flues.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 201 for a locomotive furnace provided with an
    air preheater; subclass 254 for a refuse incinerator provided with an air
    preheater; and subclasses 302+ for other types of solid fuel furnaces
    provided with an air preheater.


CLS 126/16
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 with means for cleaning the flues, also
    combined scrapers and soot-receptacles applicable to this class of stove.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280,    for forms of soot-receptacles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, appropriate subclasses
    for a flue cleaner, particularly subclasses 104.066+ for a brush or broom
    implement; subclasses 104.068+ for a scraper flue implement; subclass 249.1
    for a brush or broom implement intended to be left attached (i.e., at work
    and at rest) to a flue; subclasses 249.2+ for a scraper implement intended
    to be left attached (i.e., at work and at rest) to a flue.


CLS 126/17
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 that have ovens supported by a stove-pipe
    above the top plate of the stove and heated thereby. In this subclass will
    be found warming-ovens that are stovepipe heated.


CLS 126/18
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 in which an oven is elevated above and
    supported by the stove-top.


CLS 126/19
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 relating to the structure of the chamber
    used for baking or roasting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19.5,   for ovens heated by the waste heat of combustion engines.

    273+,   for various species of ovens as indicated by the subclass titles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 606+ for
    metallic stock material in the form of foil.


CLS 126/19.5
TXT Subject matter under the class definition consisting of domestic heating
    vessels and/or heat exchangers used for heating in the manner of a cooking
    stove or oven which are heated by the waste heat of a combustion engine as
    contained in its exhaust products or cooling fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    271.1+, for surfaced heaters, some of which utilize heat from the exhaust
    or cooling fluid of engines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 320+ for an internal combustion engine in
    which an exhaust system element is nominal means for heating.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 12.1+ for heating systems utilizing the
    waste heat of power plants.


CLS 126/20
TXT Subject matter under subclass 19 in which the oven is heated by steam or
    hot water, either where the steam or hot water surrounds the oven or where
    the steam enters the oven.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    369+,   for steaming apparatus.

    377+,   for vessels in which liquids are heated by steam.


CLS 126/20.1
TXT Devices under subclass 20 consisting of two or more compartments each (1)
    constituting a distinct oven or (2) having separate means of access thereto.


CLS 126/20.2
TXT Devices under subclass 20.1 in which means are provided to control the
    supply of heating fluid, at will, to less than all of the ovens.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    369.3,  for selective supply of steam to a plurality of steaming units.


CLS 126/21
TXT Subject matter under subclass 19 where means are provided for heating a
    current of air, circulating it through the oven, and usually feeding it to
    the combustion chamber or flues.


CLS 126/22
TXT Subject matter under subclass 19 including devices to be used in the oven
    for the purpose of protecting articles to be baked therein.  Some of these
    devices are provided with air-moistening means.


CLS 126/23
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 that are convertible into a right and left
    hand stove; also, where the smoke-collar is interchangeable from the back
    to the top plate, or vice versa.


CLS 126/24
TXT Cooking stoves under subclass 1 counterbalanced or suspended to maintain
    their equilibrium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclasses 188+ for ships furnishings which may include
    stoves of this type limited to ship board use.


CLS 126/25
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 that is portable in character, usually
    employed in outdoor work, and adapted to burn charcoal or light fuel.
    These stoves are frequently called "braziers".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for other knockdown or portable stoves.

    227,    230 and 236, for similar devices for heating flat irons or
    soldering irons respectively.


CLS 126/26
TXT Subject matter under subclass 25 comprising fire-pot structures adapted to
    be supported in and cooperate with the stove-hole of ordinary cooking
    stoves.


CLS 126/27
TXT Subject matter under subclass 25 designed to be supported upon the top
    plate of an ordinary kitchen-stove, with the smoke-outlet in communication
    with the stove proper through the medium of the stove-lid opening.  These
    devices are frequently termed "portable furnaces".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for field cooking stoves with detachable fire pots.


CLS 126/28
TXT Devices under subclass 27 in which the smoke-outlet has direct connection
    with the stove-pipe or smoke-flue of the stove.


CLS 126/29
TXT Stoves under subclass 25 designed to be employed in the open air and are
    what may be termed "bottomless", the fire being built upon the ground.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59,     for camp heating stoves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 239 for stoves to be placed around a stump to
    burn it.


CLS 126/30
TXT Devices under subclass 29 in the nature of supports and tripods designed to
    suspend or support cooking utensils over the fire.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses for mere supports even though
    described as for use in supporting an article over an open fire.


CLS 126/31
TXT Stoves under subclass 1 in which a tank containing water to be heated is
    placed in an extension-chamber through which the products of combustion
    pass.  This type of stove is generally known as "reservoir cooking-stove".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    364,    for similar structures in a smoke stack.


CLS 126/32
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 in the nature of attachments for spittoons.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 258+ for spittoons.


CLS 126/33
TXT Devices under subclass 1 that are in the form of shallow chambers provided
    with means for causing a circulation of steam or hot water therein, whereby
    the top plates or receptacles placed thereon are heated, e.g.,
    candy-tables, carving-tables, food-warming vessels, and similar devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    369+,   for steamers.

    377+,   for steam heated vessels.


CLS 126/34
TXT Stoves under subclass 1 provided with generators, steam or hot-water,
    located in or adjacent to the combustion-chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      53 and 365, for other stove or stove pipe water heaters.


CLS 126/35
TXT Stoves under subclass 34 provided with means for preventing the bursting of
    the water-back, due to excessive internal pressure as the result of
    overheating or the freezing of the water.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 504+ for safety devices
    on steam generators in general.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 59+ for valves controlled by means
    sensing freezing conditions, subclasses 67+ for valves controlled by a
    destructible element, and subclasses 455+ for valves responsive to changes
    in line conditions, particularly subclasses 457 and 468 responsive to a
    change in thermal condition.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 366.1 and 367.1+ for vent means in a
    closure.


CLS 126/36
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising combined coal and gas stoves
    where the gas-stove is a permanent part of the cooking stove or range.


CLS 126/37
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising cabinets or inclosing casings
    that are structurally designed to inclose or conceal gas or liquid-fuel
    stoves when not in use. The cabinets are usually provided with compartments
    wherein articles of food and the like may be placed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports: Cabinet Structure, subclass 236 for cabinets having both
    storage space and a stove where no structural characteristics of the stove
    or the control thereof are claimed.


CLS 126/38
TXT Devices under subclass 1 adapted to be folded or slipped together and
    designed as such to contain the heating element and as a rule, the article
    acted upon by the heating element.  These devices are frequently termed
    "pocket-stoves".


CLS 126/39
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising improvements in the ordinary
    commercial gas-stove.


CLS 126/40
TXT Devices under subclass 39 in the nature of combined burner and stand, that
    are portable in character, and as such are designed to be placed upon a
    table or similar article of support.  These devices are usually of the
    "single-burner" variety.


CLS 126/41
TXT Devices under subclass 39 comprising gas-stove structures with broiling
    attachments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for other broiling attachments.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 385+, 444+ and 450 for
    food broilers designed to treat the food by more or other than mere heating.


CLS 126/42
TXT Devices under subclass 39 that are designed to simultaneously close the
    valves in branch pipes when the valve in the main gas supply is closed,
    also valve-locking means that will prevent the accidental opening of the
    valves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    351,    for automatic means on fluid fuel water heaters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclass 178 for valve encasing locks designed to prevent
    unauthorized operation of the encased valve.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 153 for residual combustion apparatus having
    structure preventing the feeding of gaseous or liquid fuel when the
    apparatus is in a condition in which operation would be unsafe.


CLS 126/43
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 which employ alcohol burners.


CLS 126/44
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising liquid-fuel cooking-stoves of
    the well known retort vapor-burner type.


CLS 126/45
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising liquid-fuel cooking-stoves of
    the wick burner type.


CLS 126/46
TXT Liquid-fuel wick-type stoves under subclass 45 where the improvement
    resides in the means for giving the top an enlarged or extended
    cooking-surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216,    for other domestic heaters which burn gas or liquid fuel and have
    an extended top.


CLS 126/47
TXT Devices under subclass 45 where the heater is of the ordinary lamp or
    illuminating type structure.


CLS 126/48
TXT Devices under subclass 47 having a combined top, chimney, and burner.
    These devices are frequently termed "drums" in the art.


CLS 126/49
TXT Liquid-fuel wick-stove under subclass 45 in which a combined supporting-top
    and burner are supported in an elevated position from and above the
    oil-reservoir.


CLS 126/50
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising gas, liquid-fuel, and vapor
    stove frames, usually of skeleton form, provided with liquid or gaseous
    fuel heating-burners and designed to support the ordinary kitchen utensils.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211+,   especially subclass 215 for elevated supports for other fluid fuel
    stoves.


CLS 126/51
TXT Devices under subclass 1 that are in the form of pans or receptacles so
    attached to liquid or vapor stove supporting frames that they will catch
    the oil dripping or overflowing from a burner or burners. Means are
    sometimes provided for conducting the accumulated oil from the pans to a
    receptacle.


CLS 126/52
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 burning fluid fuel and having fuel control
    valves that are opened by the weight of the article to be heated and closed
    through the medium of a weight or spring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    234     and 238, for stove shelves which may operate valves.


CLS 126/53
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising gas or vapor stove structures
    that are provided with water-backs designed to heat water for domestic
    purposes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     39 and 44, for stove and detail water-back features.


CLS 126/54
TXT Subject matter under subclass 53 in which the burner structures and
    water-heating means are integral.


CLS 126/55
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising devices that are designed to
    support the stove or range from the floor.  It is usual to provide the base
    with what may be termed a warming or hot closet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277     and 305, for other platforms and base supports respectively.


CLS 126/56
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising stoves that are
    specially designed for use on railroad-cars and similar structures.


CLS 126/57
TXT Car-stoves under subclass 56 wherein the improvement resides in means to
    make it safe in case of derailment, collision, or other accident to the
    car.  The means may be an inclosing casing, an automatically-operated
    closing casing, or automatic means for closing the inlet and outlet
    openings of the stove.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202,    for fire screens and guards, per se.


CLS 126/58
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to usually cast or sheet
    metal, heat generators that are direct-heat radiating.


CLS 126/59
TXT Heating stoves under subclass 58 of the knock-down type, specially designed
    for tent heating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for other knock-down stoves.

    65+,    for other sheet metal stoves.


CLS 126/59.5
TXT Portable devices under subclass 58 for generating heat or smoke for
    protecting orchards from frost.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 2 for frost preventing means for plants,
    not otherwise provided for.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 467+ for smoke
    generators combined with food treating apparatus.

    110,    Furnaces, appropriate subclasses, where the invention is merely a
    means for combustion of solid fuel.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 331+ for a pot forming a liquid fuel holding
    and burning unit not having a stove or heat transfer feature.


CLS 126/60
TXT Heating stoves under subclass 58 having horizontally elongated fire-boxes
    or combustion-chambers.


CLS 126/61
TXT Devices under subclass 60 which are provided with means for heating and
    circulating a current or air.


CLS 126/64
TXT Heating stoves under subclass 58 having walls or earthenware refractory
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98      and 119, for related subject matter, involving stove or hot air
    furnace joints.


CLS 126/65
TXT Heating stoves under subclass 58 the outer walls of which are formed of
    sheet metal. These stoves are of the wood-burning type, having generally no
    separate or distinct fire-pot.


CLS 126/66
TXT Devices under subclass 65 provided with air heating and circulating
    features.


CLS 126/67
TXT Heating stoves under subclass 58 which are provided with means for heating
    and circulating a current of air and are not more specifically classified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for combined cooking and hot air stoves.

    61,     for horizontal body hot air stoves.

    63,     for open front hot air stoves.

    66,     for sheet metal wood burning hot air stoves.

    88      through 90, for gas burning hot air stoves.

    93+,    for liquid fuel burning hot air stoves.

    99+,    for hot air furnaces and see the notes thereunder to Class 432,
    Heating.

    500+,   for hot air fireplaces, and see the  notes thereunder.


CLS 126/68
TXT Devices under subclass 67 provided with magazines or self-feeders.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for other magazine feeds.


CLS 126/69
TXT Devices under subclass 67 provided with means for giving the products a
    direct or indirect course to the outlet-flue.  When an indirect course is
    employed, it heats the base of the stove.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74      and 75, for revertible-draft features.


CLS 126/70
TXT Devices under subclass 67 in which the air heating chamber is located
    centrally relative to the combustion chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for hot air radiating stoves in which the air heating chamber is a
    central, vertical tube.


CLS 126/71
TXT Devices under subclass 67 in which an air-tube passes vertically and
    centrally through the heater.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for central chamber hot air radiating stoves.

    72,     for tubular chamber hot air radiating stoves.

    109,    for hot air furnaces having tubular air passages.


CLS 126/72
TXT Devices under subclass 67 provided with a series of air-tubes which are
    passed vertically, horizontally, or diagonally through the combustion
    chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for central chamber hot air radiating stoves.

    71,     for hot air radiating stoves having central, vertical tubes.

    109,    for hot air furnaces having tubular air passages.


CLS 126/73
TXT Heating stoves under subclass 58 that are provided with magazines or
    self-feeders.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for other magazine feeds.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 255+ for a refuse incinerator provided with
    feeding means; and subclasses 267+ for a furnace provided with fuel feeding
    means.


CLS 126/74
TXT Devices under subclass 73 that are provided with a direct or indirect
    course to the outlet-flue.  When an indirect course is employed, it heats
    the base of the stove.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69      and 75, for other revertible draft features.


CLS 126/75
TXT Heating stoves under subclass 58 having means to give a direct or an
    indirect course to the products of combustion.  The indirect course causes
    the heating of the base.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     and 74, for other revertible-draft features.


CLS 126/76
TXT Heating stoves under subclass 58 in which the draft is downward through the
    fuel.


CLS 126/77
TXT Heating stoves under subclass 58 having means for heating and introducing
    air to the zone of combustion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for air feeding cooking stoves.

    112,    for air feeding means for hot air furnaces.

    146,    for firepots provided with air feeding means.

    163,    for grates having air feeding features.

    193,    for stove doors and windows having air feeding provisions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 201 for a locomotive furnace provided with an
    air preheater; subclass 254 for an incinerator provided with an air
    preheater; and subclasses 302+ for other types of solid fuel furnaces
    provided with air preheaters.


CLS 126/78
TXT Heating stoves under subclass 58 having steam feeding devices that are
    specially applicable and structurally related to such stoves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, appropriate subclasses for steam and air feeding devices.


CLS 126/79
TXT Heating-stoves under subclass 58 that are provided with means for returning
    the gases or products of combustion from the smoke-outlet to the
    combustion-chamber of the stove.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, particularly subclasses 203+ for furnaces having similar
    means.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 171+ for lanterns in which a portion of
    the products of combustion is led back to the flame.


CLS 126/80
TXT Heating-stoves under subclass 58 that are provided with special ventilating
    attachments or features.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     84, 198, 293, and 316, for stoves having ventilating features.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    454,    Ventilation, particularly subclasses 1+ for other ventilating means
    associated with heaters.


CLS 126/81
TXT Heating-stoves under subclass 58 having ornamental and name plates; and
    means employed for attaching them to the outer surfaces of stove-bodies.


CLS 126/82
TXT Heating-stoves under subclass 58 having a back plate carrying the
    pipe-collar, and capable of variable adjustments relative to the
    flue-opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315,    for adjustable flue collars.


CLS 126/83
TXT Heating-stoves under subclass 58 having retarding plates so formed and
    arranged as to give the products of combustion a circuitous course to the
    exit flue.


CLS 126/84
TXT Heating-stoves under subclass 58 of the liquid and gaseous fuel type that
    are structurally adapted to both heat and ventilate the room in which they
    are located.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     94 and 97, for related subject matter.


CLS 126/85
TXT Heating-stoves under subclass 58 of the gaseous fuel type that do not fall
    under more specific subclasses.


CLS 126/86
TXT Devices under subclass 85 of the open-front type that are adapted for the
    burning of gaseous fuel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97      and 512, for related subject matter.


CLS 126/87
TXT Devices under subclass 86 where the back plate or wall is provided with
    asbestos fiber and adapted to be heated to incandescence.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400,    for heat accumulator structures.


CLS 126/88
TXT Devices under subclass 87 that are provided with specific air heating
    features.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    512,    for asbestos fire-backs of the liquid or gaseous type for
    fireplaces.


CLS 126/89
TXT Devices under subclass 86 that are provided with specific air heating
    features.


CLS 126/90
TXT Devices under subclass 85 that are provided with various forms of air
    heating means.


CLS 126/91
TXT Devices under subclass 85 that have the structural form of tubular
    radiators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 339+ for electrically heated radiators.


CLS 126/92
TXT Devices under subclass 85 that are adapted to receive or hold substances
    which are heated to incandescence by gas or similar burners.  These devices
    are usually employed in fireplaces or in open-front heaters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86+,    for related subject matter.

    SEARCH  CLASS:

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 326+ for a radiant surface burner and
    subclasses 347+ for a burner having an incandescing or reflecting component.


CLS 126/93
TXT Heating stoves under subclass 58 that are structurally adapted for the
    burning of liquid fuel.


CLS 126/94
TXT Devices under subclass 93 that are provided with means for connecting them
    with chimney or flue openings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     for liquid and gaseous fuel heating stoves having heating and
    ventilating provisions.


CLS 126/95
TXT Devices under subclass 93 that are provided with liquid-fuel retort
    vapor-burners.


CLS 126/96
TXT Devices under subclass 93 that are of the wick type and those that are
    provided with specific air heating features.  These devices are usually
    termed "lamp-stoves".


CLS 126/97
TXT Devices under subclass 96 in which the stove proper is provided with an
    open front and adapted to receive an illuminating-lamp as the heater.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86+,    294 and 512, for detail stove features.

    248,    for drum features.


CLS 126/98
TXT Heating-stoves under subclass 58 comprising the structural features of
    stove joints.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64      and 119, for similar structures.


CLS 126/99
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to furnaces which heat
    air in an inclosing case or jacket to be distributed to points remote from
    the furnace.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for combined cooking and hot air stoves.

    67+,    for hot air stoves.

    500+,   for hot air fireplaces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    432,    Heating, subclasses 222+ for means heating air by mixing it with
    combustion products, and subclass 219 for a residual apparatus for heating
    a gaseous or liquid material.


CLS 126/100
TXT Hot air furnaces under subclass 99 that are provided with cooking-stove or
    oven attachments.


CLS 126/101
TXT Hot air furnaces under subclass 99 combined with steam, or water heaters,
    generally known in the art as "hot-air furnaces, steam".


CLS 126/102
TXT Hot air furnaces under subclass 99 in which the radiating drum encircles
    the fire-pot or combustion-chamber.


CLS 126/103
TXT Hot air furnaces under subclass 99 in which the products of combustion are
    caused to pass in a downward direction through the fuel.


CLS 126/104
TXT Hot air furnaces under subclass 99 which are provided with horizontal or
    elongated fire-boxes or combustion-chambers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     61 and 108, for related subject matter.


CLS 126/105
TXT Hot air furnaces under subclass 99 having devices for equally distributing
    heated air to the several apartments of a building.


CLS 126/106
TXT Hot air furnaces under subclass 99 in which an air heating chamber is
    centrally situated as respects the combustion-chamber and provided with
    passages which connect the chamber with the space formed by the inclosing
    case or jacket.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     71 and 109, for air heating structures.


CLS 126/107
TXT Hot air furnaces under subclass 99 that are provided with magazines or
    self-feeders.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for other magazine feeds.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 255+ for an incinerator provided with feed
    means; and subclasses 267+ for other solid fuel furnaces provided with feed
    means.


CLS 126/108
TXT Hot air furnaces under subclass 99 in which the radiating devices are
    located at the rear of the furnace proper and within the air-casing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for related subject matter.


CLS 126/109
TXT Hot air furnaces under subclass 99 which have air-tubes passed vertically,
    horizontally, or diagonally through the combustion-chamber and which
    communicate with the space formed by the inclosing case or jacket.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     72 and 106, for similar air heating arrangements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    454,    Ventilation, appropriate subclasses for building ventilation, per
    se.


CLS 126/110
TXT Hot air furnaces under subclass 99 for heating air under compression, as
    distinguished from devices for compressing the air to heat it.


CLS 126/111
TXT Hot air furnaces under subclass 99 that are provided with two or more
    firepots and structural features by which the firepots are capable of
    separate or joint use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for double fire-pot cooking stoves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 208+ for multiple firebox furnaces provided
    with exhaust gas treatment means; and subclasses 295+ for other types of
    multiple firebox solid fuel furnaces.


CLS 126/112
TXT Hot air furnaces under subclass 99 having devices formed and arranged for
    heating and introducing air into the combustion-chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     77, 78, 146, and 193, for related subject matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 201 for a locomotive type furnace provided with
    an air preheater; subclass 254 for an incinerator provided with an air
    preheater; and subclasses 302+ for other types of solid fuel furnaces
    provided with air preheaters.


CLS 126/113
TXT Hot air furnaces under subclass 99 having a water pan so formed and
    arranged as to produce vapor which moistens the air heated by the furnace.


CLS 126/114
TXT Hot air furnaces under subclass 99 having an inclosing furnace-casing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for preliminary air heating devices.


CLS 126/115
TXT Hot air furnaces under subclass 99 provided with means for conveying the
    dust resultant from raking the fire to the smoke-pipe or fire-pot.


CLS 126/116
TXT Hot-air furnaces under subclass 99 in which the heating agent is either a
    liquid or gaseous fuel burner or combined coal and liquid or gaseous fuel
    burner.  Also included here are attachments independent of the main
    furnace, but connected thereto, and floor-register attachments.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 284+ for register features.


CLS 126/117
TXT Hot air furnaces under subclass 99 having devices for heating the air
    before it is conveyed to the space formed by the surrounding jacket or
    casing of a furnace.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for hot air furnace casings.


CLS 126/118
TXT Hot air furnaces under subclass 99 having flanges or pins which are
    attached to furnace sections and drums for increasing their
    radiating-surfaces.


CLS 126/119
TXT Hot air furnaces under subclass 99 comprising the structure of the joints
    of the furnace or casing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64      and 98, for joints in heating stoves.


CLS 126/144
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to firepots and linings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152+,   for grates.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 317+ for solid fuel furnace firebox structure.


CLS 126/145
TXT Subject matter under subclass 144 adapted to be adjusted so as to fit
    stoves of various sizes; includes linings that are provided with breakable
    grooves.


CLS 126/146
TXT Subject matter under subclass 144 provided with air-feeding means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     77 and 112, for similar air feeding means.


CLS 126/147
TXT Subject matter under subclass 144 that is provided with means to divide
    them or adjust the fuel capacity of the fire-pot.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25+,    for summer cooking stoves.

    154,    for vertically adjustable grates.


CLS 126/148
TXT Subject matter under subclass 144 that is provided with plates to limit or
    confine the fuel-space, and thereby regulate the combustion.


CLS 126/149
TXT Subject matter under subclass 144 relating to fire boxes adapted to inclose
    the fuel, whereby the fire box can be given a complete rotation on a
    horizontal axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181,    for horizontal axis rotary grates.


CLS 126/150
TXT Subject matter under subclass 144 relating to firepots that are provided
    with means for imparting to the fire-pot a complete rotation on a vertical
    axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170,    for vertical axis oscillatory grates.


CLS 126/151
TXT Subject matter under subclass 144 composed of sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145,    for adjustable firepots.


CLS 126/152
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to furnace, stove and
    range grates that do not fall under more specific subclasses, and not
    specifically classified in other classes.  Includes all grate structures,
    per se, that are of general application to furnaces and stoves.

    (1)     Note.  For grates that are adapted to specific application of the
    heat of combustion, search should be made in the class including such
    applications.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 267+ for progressive feed grates, and subclass
    298 for hollow air-cooled grates.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 371+, and the subclasses
    referred to in the notes thereunder, for water grates.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses, especially subclasses 198.1+, for similar structures
    functioning as comminutors but which have no burning charge or fuel
    supporting function.


CLS 126/153
TXT Devices under subclass 152 adapted to fit different-sized firepots.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144,    for fire pots and linings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 320 for adjustable fire box furnace structure.


CLS 126/154
TXT Devices under subclass 153 adapted to vertical adjustment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159,    for pocket agitating grates.


CLS 126/155
TXT Devices under subclass 152 adapted to be shaken or agitated for the
    clearance of ashes.


CLS 126/156
TXT Devices under subclass 155 that are provided with means for imparting
    vibrating or rocking motion in opposite directions to adjacent grate-bars.


CLS 126/157
TXT Devices under subclass 155 that are constructed with alternate immovable
    and movable grate-bars and means for imparting vertical motion to the
    alternate movable bars.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173,    for raking attachments.


CLS 126/158
TXT Devices under subclass 155 that are provided with dumping means or sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162,    for other dumping grates.


CLS 126/159
TXT Devices under subclass 155 that are provided with means for giving a
    varying depth to the fuel over the grate-surface. The means employed are
    usually pockets or depressions in the grate surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154,    for vertically adjustable grates.


CLS 126/160
TXT Devices under subclass 152 provided with means for regulating the
    grate-openings, whereby the draft may be full, reduced, or closed.


CLS 126/161
TXT Devices under subclass 152 provided with means closely related to the grate
    structure for retaining a portion of the fuel in the fire-pot, thus
    permitting the removal of the bottom portion or ash.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 117 and 118 for similar furnace fuel feeders.


CLS 126/162
TXT Devices under subclass 152 that are provided with special dumping means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 33+ for furnace progressive feed grate
    structure.


CLS 126/163
TXT Devices under subclass 152 provided with air feeding features.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 182, 270+ and  288 for similar furnace air
    feeding structure.


CLS 126/166
TXT Devices under subclass 152 that are designed to be passed through or
    inserted in the fuel above the grate in order to sustain the main body of
    the fuel, and thus permit the removal of ashes and cinders. These devices
    are independent of the fuel-support or grate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161,    for cut off grates.


CLS 126/167
TXT Subject matter under subclass 152 relating to the form of the bar.  These
    bars are known as stationary or immovable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179,    for this structure in a rocking bar grate.


CLS 126/168
TXT Devices under subclass 167 that are provided with removable fuel-supporting
    devices.


CLS 126/169
TXT Devices under subclass 152 designed for the operation or moving of the
    grates and grate-bar structures in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 268+ for a furnace provided with a movable
    grate; and subclasses 328+ for movable grate structure, per se.


CLS 126/170
TXT Devices under subclass 152 arranged horizontally on a vertical axis and
    adapted to be given a to-and-fro motion.  These structures are sometimes
    termed "rotary".


CLS 126/171
TXT Devices under subclass 170 that are provided with a pivoted dumping section
    or sections.


CLS 126/172
TXT Devices under subclass 170 that are provided with a sliding ash-discharge
    section.


CLS 126/173
TXT Subject matter under subclass 152 relating to attachments to grates
    designed to rake and free the grate from ashes and clinkers.  As a rule
    these devices are inseparable from the grate structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclass 85.2 for cupola gas
    generators with fuel stirrers.

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 285 for a solid fuel furnace provided with a
    raking grate.


CLS 126/174
TXT Devices under subclass 152 designed to be given a horizontal to-and-fro end
    movement, as distinguished from the oscillatory or rotary type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 281+ for solid fuel furnaces provided with
    reciprocating grates; and subclass 328 for movable grate structure, per se.


CLS 126/175
TXT Devices under subclass 174 where the alternate bars are given an opposite
    to-and-fro end movement or where the bars are moved in reverse horizontal
    direction.


CLS 126/176
TXT Devices under subclass 152 in which the grates and grate bars are
    horizontally-pivoted and are provided with means for giving them a
    to-and-fro or rocking motion, but not adapted to be given a complete
    rotation or revolution.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 278 for a solid fuel furnace provided with a
    rocking grate; and subclass 328 for movable grate structure, per se.


CLS 126/177
TXT Devices under subclass 176 that are provided with dumping means or
    dumping-sections.


CLS 126/178
TXT Devices under subclass 176 where different fuel-supporting faces may be
    employed; includes grates designed for the burning of coal or wood
    combining coal and wood bearing faces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181,    for horizontal axis rotary grates.


CLS 126/179
TXT Subject matter under subclass 176 relating to the form or character of the
    rocking bar.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167+,   for other grate bars.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 278 for a solid fuel furnace provided with a
    rocking grate; and subclass 328 for movable grate structure, per se.


CLS 126/180
TXT Devices under subclass 179 provided with removable fuel-bearing faces.


CLS 126/181
TXT Devices under subclass 152 that are horizontally pivoted and are
    structurally adapted to be given a complete rotary motion; also, means for
    imparting this motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176,    for rocking bar grates.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 226 for an incinerator provided with preliminary
    refuse dryer in the form of a rotary drum; subclass 246 for an incinerator
    in the form of a rotary drum; and subclass 276 for a solid fuel furnace
    provided with a horizontal rotary grate.


CLS 126/182
TXT Devices under subclass 152 that are horizontally arranged, mounted upon a
    vertical pivot, and means for imparting to the grate a full and complete
    revolution upon its axis or pivot.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150,    for vertical axis rotary fire pots and linings.

    170+,   for vertical axis oscillatory grates.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 247 for an incinerator in the form of a vertical
    axially mounted rotary grate; and subclasses 275 and 277 for a solid fuel
    furnace provided with a vertically mounted rotary grate.


CLS 126/190
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to stove doors and
    windows applicable to heating and cooking stoves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, appropriate subclasses for closures
    of the type provided for and see the search notes thereto in section IV of
    Class 49 for the loci of closures in other classes.

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 173+ for furnace doors.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 149 for stove doors or
    windows combined with and modified to receive thermometers, and wherein no
    more of the door or window is claimed than is necessary to provide a locus
    or support for the thermometer.


CLS 126/191
TXT Devices under subclass 190 that are provided with weights or springs
    designed to aid in opening or closing the door; also, to prevent the sudden
    closing of the door.


CLS 126/192
TXT Devices under subclass 190 provided with door opening or closing devices.
    Devices known in the art as "kicker-latches".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 324+ for other closure
    operators.


CLS 126/193
TXT Devices under subclass 190 designed to admit a current of air into the
    combustion chamber above the fuel-level.  In some instances the object
    sought is to prevent the blackening of the transparent door-panel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163,    for air feeding grates.


CLS 126/194
TXT Subject matter under subclass 190 relating to hinges that are peculiarly
    applicable to domestic stoves and furnaces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 128 for other hinges.


CLS 126/197
TXT Subject matter under subclass 190, including a latch and an operator.


CLS 126/198
TXT Devices under subclass 190 comprising oven-doors provided with means for
    ingress and egress of air.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193,    for feeding air features in other doors.


CLS 126/200
TXT Devices under subclass 190 that have a glass or mica panel therein.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include illuminating devices in
    bakers' ovens and similar devices, or what is known in the art as
    "peep-holes".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193,    for feeding air-doors. 213, for illuminating stove tops.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 341 for food cooking
    apparatus combined with observation means.

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 82, and see the notes thereto, for structures
    wherein a transparent panel is mounted in a wall.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 92+ for oven illuminating means.


CLS 126/201
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to guards and
    protectors. Includes stove foot rails or guards.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    298,    for fire dogs.


CLS 126/204
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to body, hand and foot
    warmers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263.01+, for chemical or lime heaters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclass 2.6 for boots, or shoes having
    heating means designed to warm the foot.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 46 for a flexible envelope or cover type of
    heat exchanger.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, appropriate subclasses, for receptacles of glass,
    ceramic or similar material for retaining and heating or cooling medium.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 211 for electrically heated devices for
    applying heat to the body.

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 577 for a rigid heat transfer container.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 901 for bags of flexible materials known in
    the  art as hot-water and ice bags.


CLS 126/205
TXT Body warmers under subclass 204 adapted for heating beds, and analogous
    devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 529+ for vapor and
    hot air baths which accommodate the user in a recumbent position.

    5,      Beds, subclass 284 for bedsteads with heating or cooling means,
    subclasses 421+ for heating means, and subclass 422 for heating a waterbed
    mattress.


CLS 126/206
TXT Body warmers under subclass 204 structurally adapted to burn composition
    fuel, notably what is known in the art as "Japanese punk".


CLS 126/207
TXT Body warmers under subclass 204 structurally adapted to be heated by a hot
    blank, such as iron, soapstone, and similar substances.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246,    for dish heaters.

    400,    for heat accumulator blocks, per se.


CLS 126/208
TXT Body warmers under subclass 204 structurally adapted for the burning of
    liquid or gaseous fuel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 26 for friction generators.


CLS 126/209
TXT Devices under subclass 208 adapted to be employed both as heater and
    lantern.

    (1)     Note.  This is a combined subclass, and the detail features of both
    heater and lantern should be searched for in appropriate classes and
    subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    267,    for combined lunch bucket and lantern burning liquid or gaseous
    fuel.


CLS 126/210
TXT Devices under subclass 208 that are structurally related to or are combined
    with water heating devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    237,    Heating Systems, subclass 12.3 for vehicle heating systems.


CLS 126/211
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to improvements on the
    top plate of stoves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227     and 230, for flatiron heaters.

    338,    for a rotary oven, shelf or rack.


CLS 126/212
TXT Subject matter under subclass 211 relating to improvements on stove centers
    or cross-pieces, generally employed in cooking-stoves.


CLS 126/213
TXT Subject matter under subclass 211 relating to illuminating and
    heat-reflecting devices placed on or secured to the top portion of a stove.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200,    for stove doors with a transparent panel.


CLS 126/214
TXT Subject matter under subclass 211 which are peculiarly adapted to the
    burning of liquid or gaseous fuel.


CLS 126/215
TXT Devices under subclass 214 designed to be placed on the stove top for
    supporting the ordinary kitchen utensil or article spaced from the top.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     for other utensil supports.


CLS 126/216
TXT Subject matter under subclass 214 in which the tops are designed to have an
    enlarged working surface.  In most instances they are adapted to utilize
    the heat from a single burner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for extension tops on liquid fuel wick-type cooking stoves.


CLS 126/217
TXT Subject matter under subclass 211 relating to heating stoves.  As a rule
    they relate to the means for opening or closing the magazine feed-opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    335,    for door operated drop shelves for stoves.


CLS 126/218
TXT Heating-stove tops under subclass 217 that are provided with means to adapt
    them to be employed in cooking.


CLS 126/219
TXT Subject matter under subclass 217 pertaining to top ornaments and urns.


CLS 126/220
TXT Subject matter under subclass 211 relating to improvements in the lids.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227+    and 230, for attachments for heating flatirons.


CLS 126/221
TXT Subject matter under subclass 211 relating to mats designed to be placed
    upon the stove-top, usually formed of asbestos and metal, or asbestos
    having metal-bound edges.


CLS 126/222
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to cooking-stoves
    adapted for the burning of straw, hay, sawdust, and similar material as
    fuel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 196 and 197 for furnaces employing straw as a
    fuel, and fuel feeders therefor.


CLS 126/223
TXT Subject matter under subclass 222 relating to the fuel feeding attachments,
    usually of magazine form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for portable coal magazines for cooking stoves.


CLS 126/224
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to refuse or "garbage"
    burner attachments structurally related to the cooking or heating stove art.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for portable magazines for cooking stoves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 235+ for a refuse incinerator not structurally
    related to cooking or heating stoves.


CLS 126/225
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to heating-stoves
    structurally adapted for the burning of hay, straw, sawdust and similar
    material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 196 and 197 for furnaces employing straw as a
    fuel, and fuel feeders therefor.


CLS 126/226
TXT Subject matter under the class definition designed for the heating of
    various types of tools.


CLS 126/227
TXT Subject matter under subclass 226 specially designed for the heating of
    flatirons or "sadirons".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for portable cooking stoves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    38,     Textiles: Ironing or Smoothing, subclasses 74+ for sadirons and
    flatirons.


CLS 126/228
TXT Devices under subclass 227 relating to portable or independent heating
    devices structurally designed to be employed in connection with stove
    structures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211+,   for stove lids and tops.

    505,    for shelves adapted to fireplace grates.

    540+,   for fireplace grates.


CLS 126/229
TXT Devices under subclass 226 adapted to the burning of gaseous or liquid fuel.


CLS 126/230
TXT Devices under subclass 229 specially designed for the heating of flatirons
    or "sadirons".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227,    for other flatiron heaters.


CLS 126/231
TXT Devices under subclass 229 designed to be attached to gas-brackets.  This
    subclass includes mainly curling iron heaters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235,    for tool heating devices adapted to be attached to lamps.


CLS 126/232
TXT Devices under subclass 231 in which the heating-burner is supplied with gas
    through the medium of a bypass without affecting the operation of the
    lighting burner.  As a rule one may be employed to the exclusion of the
    other, or both at one and the same time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254,    for heating and lighting burners used in connection with a gas
    bracket attachment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 390+ for a
    fluid distributor having plural interchangeable discharge modifiers, outlet
    arrangements or coupling means, and subclasses 436+ for a fluid distributor
    having selectively usable or variable diverse terminal outlets, even though
    the distributor may be disclosed as a burner.


CLS 126/233
TXT Devices under subclass 231 provided with specific gas and air mixing means
    whereby the illuminating-flame is converted into a heating-flame.


CLS 126/234
TXT Devices under subclass 231 provided with tool controlled valve mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     for article controlled valve mechanism.

    238,    for soldering iron controlled valve    mechanism.


CLS 126/235
TXT Devices under subclass 229 designed to be attached to lamps, but mainly the
    lamp chimney.  In this subclass will be found curling iron heaters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231,    for gas burner attachments.


CLS 126/236
TXT Devices under subclass 226 that are portable in character and provided with
    special means for retaining a soldering iron in the furnace.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for portable cooking stoves.


CLS 126/237
TXT Devices under subclass 236 heated by gaseous fuel.


CLS 126/238
TXT Devices under subclass 237 provided with special forms of automatic gas
    supply and cut-off devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     for article controlled valve mechanism.

    234,    for other tool controlled valve    mechanism.


CLS 126/239
TXT Devices under subclass 236 heated by liquid fuel.


CLS 126/240
TXT Devices under subclass 239 designed for the combined heating of soldering
    irons and the melting or solder pot.


CLS 126/241
TXT Devices under subclass 239 in which the heating means employed is a lamp.


CLS 126/242
TXT Subject matter under the class definition designed for the handy removal
    and collection of ashes from domestic stoves and furnaces. In most
    instances the devices have direct connection with the stove ash-pit and are
    in the form of chutes leading to receptacles and provided with
    gravity-traps.  The chutes may also be provided with screens for separating
    the cinders from the ashes.  Includes also receptacles and
    ash-pit-attaching means and means for removing ashes from the pit into the
    receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 165+ for ash receiving and handling devices of
    that class.

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, subclass 34 for
    vertical wall chutes.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 233+ for
    sifters.

    220,    Receptacles, appropriate subclasses for containers of more general
    utility.


CLS 126/243
TXT Devices under subclass 242 employed in stove or furnace ashpits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 166 for other ashpans.


CLS 126/244
TXT Devices under subclass 243 provided with sifting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, particularly
    subclasses 376 and 377 for other sifters.


CLS 126/245
TXT Devices under subclass 242 that include some special feature of stove
    structure which cooperates with the pan to produce the intended result.


CLS 126/246
TXT Heaters under the class definition for warming dishes or other articles or
    for keeping warm food-containing vessels after removal from the stove and
    in which a heat-retaining substance, either liquid or solid, adapted to be
    preheated is employed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for steam tables.

    207,    for block heated body warmers.

    262,    for combined lunch can and heater.

    400,    for heat accumulator blocks, per se.


CLS 126/247
TXT Heaters under the class definition designed to generate heat by friction.


CLS 126/248
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to drum attachments
    adapted for use with heating or illuminating burners.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97,     for heating and illuminating liquid fuel stoves.


CLS 126/249
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to attachments in the
    form of brackets or supports not directly supported by a gas-bracket
    designed to sustain articles over a flame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses for mere supports and brackets not
    limited by structure to use in supporting articles over a flame, even
    though disclosed as for supporting an article over a flame.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 453+ for combined socket attached shade
    and bowl supports.


CLS 126/250
TXT Devices under subclass 249 relating to air heating attachments adapted for
    use with the ordinary house gas-bracket.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248,    for drum attachments.


CLS 126/251
TXT Devices under subclass 250 provided with means for mixing gas and air in
    advance of the flame-point.


CLS 126/252
TXT Devices under subclass 249 directly attached or connected to the ordinary
    gas-bracket.


CLS 126/253
TXT Devices under subclass 252 provided with means for mixing gas and air in
    advance of the flame-point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233     and 251, for other jet mixers.


CLS 126/254
TXT Devices under subclass 249 relating to combined heating or lighting burners
    which are so related that they can be used jointly or separately.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232,    for other combined lighting and heating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 390+ for a
    fluid distributor having plural interchangeable discharge modifiers, outlet
    arrangements or coupling means, and subclasses 436+ for a fluid distributor
    having selectively usable or variable diverse terminal outlets, even though
    the distributor may be disclosed as a burner.


CLS 126/255
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to attachments designed
    for use with lamp or wick burners.


CLS 126/256
TXT Devices under subclass 255 relating to article supporting attachments that
    are supported upon the lamp-body independent of the lamp-chimney.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses for mere supports and brackets not
    limited by structure to use with a lamp.


CLS 126/257
TXT Devices under subclass 255 relating to air-heaters, usually of drum form,
    specially applicable to lamp-chimneys.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248,    for drum heater attachments.


CLS 126/258
TXT Devices under subclass 255 relating to article supporting brackets that are
    specially designed to be supported upon lamp-chimneys.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235,    for other lamp attachments.


CLS 126/259
TXT Devices under subclass 255 relating to air or drum heaters that are
    supported by stands, over and independent of the lamp structure.


CLS 126/260
TXT Devices under subclass 255 relating to article supporting stands that are
    employed in connection with lamp-heaters, and they are independent of the
    form or character of the heater.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 127+ for stands not limited by structure to
    the above, even though disclosed as for use in supporting articles over a
    lamp.


CLS 126/261
TXT Heaters under the class definition designed for warming and keeping warm
    articles of food.  Includes nursery or hot-water bags provided with bottle
    receptacles or pockets combined with heating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 901 for hot water bags.


CLS 126/262
TXT Devices under subclass 261 relating to closed receptacles containing food
    products that are provided with permanently attached heaters.


CLS 126/263.01
TXT Chemical:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising an apparatus for
    applying heat resulting from a first substance being brought into contact
    with a second substance, thereby, generates a chemical reaction which
    produces heat without producing a flame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204+,   for body warmers, the containers of which are of particular
    configuration or structure for adaptation to the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclasses 250+ for flammables or
    glowless fuel compositions, per se, and in containers used for packaging or
    transportation only and subclasses 901+ for a collection of patents having
    heating means combined with exemplary material to be heated.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 4 for means using a chemical reaction to
    produce a refrigeration effect.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 21 for boilers having
    chemical heaters.

    132,    Toilet, subclass 220 for hair curlers including chemical heaters.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, appropriate
    subclasses for explosive compositions and particularly subclasses 37+ for
    compositions containing a metallic fuel and an oxygen supplying compound.

    166,    Wells, subclass 58 for a chemical heater adapted for use in a well.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 56.1+ for a single or plural layer
    metal article useful as a filler material in a metal fusion bonding
    operation combined with a thermic segment.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 70 for reversibly exothermic-endothermic
    compositions, per se, and in containers used for packaging or
    transportation only.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 113+ for a package of food combined with means to heat the food.


CLS 126/263.02
TXT Oxidation with air:

    Subject matter under subclass 263.01 wherein the first substance is brought
    into contact with oxygen of the atmosphere, thereby, generating the
    chemical reaction which produces heat without producing the flame.


CLS 126/263.03
TXT Crystallization of supercooled liquid:

    Subject matter under subclass 263.01 wherein the first substance is in a
    liquid state and when it is cooled below its freezing temperature and the
    second substance is brought into contact with it, the first substance
    changes to crystals.


CLS 126/263.04
TXT By escape of reactant from container within
    liquid:

    Subject matter under subclass 263.03 wherein the second substance is
    located within a container and the crystallization is caused by the second
    substance escaping from the container into the liquid while the container
    is located within the liquid.


CLS 126/263.05
TXT Liquid in contact with solid (e.g., water and lime):

    Subject matter under subclass 263.01 wherein the first substance which is
    in a liquid state such as water brought into contact with the second
    substance which is a solid-state such as lime, thereby, generating the
    chemical reaction which produces heat without producing the flame.


CLS 126/263.06
TXT Including separate solid and liquid compartments:

    Subject matter under subclass 263.05 wherein the liquid substance and the
    solid substance are kept in separate containers.


CLS 126/263.07
TXT Flexible wall compartment (e.g., flexible plastic bag):

    Subject matter under subclass 263.06 wherein a portion of an outer wall of
    one of the containers for the solid and the liquid substances is made of a
    pliable material.


CLS 126/263.08
TXT Including means to rupture or open solid or
    liquid compartment:

    Subject matter under subclass 263.07 wherein one of the containers includes
    a device which is capable of piercing or opening the outer wall of the
    container so as to bring the solid substance into contact with the liquid
    substance to generate a chemical reaction.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is intended to include means other than merely
    a characteristic of the flexible material which can cause rupture or
    opening of the container. The container merely having a weakened area of
    the flexible material which is joined with glue or such similar material is
    not included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263.09, for means to rupture or open a compartment of a solid or liquid
    substance.


CLS 126/263.09
TXT Including means to rupture or open solid or
    liquid compartment:

    Subject matter under subclass 263.06 wherein one of the containers includes
    a device which is capable of piercing or opening an outer wall of one of
    the containers so as to bring the solid substance into contact with the
    liquid substance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263.08, for means to rupture or open a compartment having a flexible wall.


CLS 126/263.1
TXT Including time release coating on solid in contact with liquid:

    Subject matter under subclass 263.06 wherein the solid substance includes a
    covering made of material which when brought into contact with the liquid
    substance slows down a rate of penetration of the liquid substance into the
    solid substance, thereby, prolonging a duration of release of heat.


CLS 126/265
TXT Devices under subclass 261 employing liquid or gaseous fuel as the heating
    medium.


CLS 126/266
TXT Devices under subclass 265 known as dinner pail or buckets.


CLS 126/267
TXT Devices under subclass 266 structurally adapted to be employed as lanterns.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209,    for liquid or gaseous fuel burning body warmers adapted to be
    employed both as heater and lantern.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, appropriate subclasses for other combined light and
    structure devices.


CLS 126/268
TXT Devices under subclass 261 relating to vehicles, sometimes designated
    "caterers' wagons", designed to keep food at a predetermined temperature
    while conveying the same to customers or dining room.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    276,    for ovens adapted to be mounted on wheeled structures.


CLS 126/269
TXT Devices under the class definition specially adapted for the thawing of
    explosives, such as powder, dynamite, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284,    for glue pots.

    377+,   for steam or water heated vessels in  general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 13 for double boiler type receptacles.


CLS 126/271.1
TXT Miscellaneous devices under the class definition for applying heat to
    surfaces and generally adapted to be moved over the surface.  Includes
    devices for heating surfaces by steam, that either comes in contact with
    the surface to be heated or is applied by a radiator.  Includes devices for
    thawing frozen earth in placer mining, melting snow and ice, burning weeds
    or stubble, heating ground for cultivation, and solid fuel paint breamers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 227+ for devices for excavating and melting
    the excavated snow.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 144 for surface
    heaters having added features for seeking out insects for destruction, and
    even though additionally disclosed as weed burners.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 128+ and 146+
    for wheeled carts having a heating means and a nozzle structure for
    discharging steam or a heated fluid, and see the class definition of Class
    239, section III (h), for the line between Classes 126 and 239.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclass 77 for a process of
    in situ heating of earth or road surface, subclasses 79+, a process of
    heating earth or road surface and subclass 95 for means to heat earth or
    road surface.


CLS 126/271.2
TXT Devices under subclass 271.1 for applying the products of combustion of
    fluid fuel, hot air heated by fluid fuel, steam in combination with either
    the products of combustion or hot air.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    431,    Combustion, subclass 344 for a flame holder-fuel tank assembly not
    particularly adapted for heating a surface (e.g., gasoline blow torch,
    etc.) and subclass 345 for a flame holder having an attached handle.


CLS 126/271.3
TXT Devices under subclass 271.1 for applying the products of combustion of
    solid fuel or the radiant heat thereof, of hot air, or steam in combination
    with products of combustion or hot air.


CLS 126/273
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising ovens of the household type
    that do not fall under more specific classes and subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      4, 9, 19, 19.5, 198, 218, 337, and 506, for other devices including
    oven structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 391 for electrically heated ovens.


CLS 126/273.5
TXT Ovens under subclass 273 provided with means to store or retain a
    substantial quantity of heat to be given up to the contents of the oven
    over an extended period of time.  So called "Fireless Cookers" are here
    classified.  The oven is frequently heat insulated to conserve heat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207,    for heated block type of body warmer.

    375,    for vessels having heat accumulators.

    400,    for heat accumulator blocks, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 9+ for insulated vessels in general.


CLS 126/274
TXT Domestic ovens under subclass 273, portable in character, having an open
    side and adapted to receive radiated heat from an open fireplace or stove.


CLS 126/275
TXT Domestic ovens under subclass 273 structurally independent of stove
    structure and designed to be placed upon stove-surfaces.  This subclass
    includes those devices that are known in the trade as portable gas and
    vapor stove ovens.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    369+,   for similar devices placed over a steam generator.


CLS 126/276
TXT Ovens under the class definition specially adapted to be mounted upon
    wheeled structures.  These devices are usually termed traveling kitchens.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    268,    for vehicles, for keeping food warm while conveying same to
    customers or dining room.


CLS 126/277
TXT Devices under the class definition, usually platforms, designed to support
    stove-bodies.  The platform may be provided with means for sustaining it in
    an elevated position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55      and 305, for other structures for supporting stoves.


CLS 126/278
TXT Platforms under subclass 277 designed to rest flat upon the floor-surface
    and to protect the floor from the heat of a stove resting thereon.


CLS 126/279
TXT Devices under subclass 278 so constructed as to allow for a free
    circulation of air beneath or through them.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500+,   for fireplace bases or hearths having air feeding or ventilating
    features therein.


CLS 126/280
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising receptacles designed to be so
    placed or suspended that they will catch or receive the soot falling from
    stovepipe or chimney openings.


CLS 126/281
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising pans or trays designed for
    the raising of dough and usually provided with means for heating and
    maintaining the heat of the pan or tray at a uniform temperature in excess
    of that of the surrounding atmosphere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports: Cabinet Structure, subclass 236 for cabinets having both
    storage and heating means not special to this class.


CLS 126/282
TXT Dough-raising devices, under subclass 281, having a heater of the
    liquid-fuel-burner type.


CLS 126/283
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising fuel-holding cabinets
    provided with means for permitting the withdrawal of small quantities of
    fuel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting, Solids, subclass 377 for
    enclosed sifters adapted for operation in connection with or within stoves
    or furnaces.

    312,    Supports: Cabinet Structure, subclass 236 for cabinets having both
    storage and heating means not special to this class.


CLS 126/284
TXT Devices under the class definition primarily designed for the melting of
    glue and analogous substances.  The pots are usually water or steam
    jacketed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     282 and 377+, for steam or water jacketed vessels.


CLS 126/285
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising miscellaneous dampers not
    classifiable otherwise.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 192 for a solid fuel furnace or incinerator
    provided with a timer to control all or a portion of the furnace or
    incinerator.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 322+ for damper details of registers.


CLS 126/285.5
TXT Device under subclass 285 comprising means controlling time as which the
    damper is either opened or closed, or the length of time between the
    opening and closing of the damper.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 192 for a solid fuel furnace or incinerator
    provided with a timer to control all or a portion of the furnace or
    incinerator.


CLS 126/286
TXT Devices under subclass 285 including operating means located at a distance
    and designed to operate smoke, air-flue, and stove draft-dampers.


CLS 126/287
TXT Damper-operating devices under subclass 286, that are coupled up or
    connected to stove-doors and designed to operate the damper upon the
    opening or closing of the stove-door.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 158 for devices for admitting air to a furnace
    smoke box where the air opening valve is controlled by movement of the
    furnace door.


CLS 126/287.5
TXT Dampers under subclass 285 for stoves or furnaces with fusible means for
    holding them in inoperative position, but which when the temperature
    reaches a certain limit fuses and allows the damper to move in position to
    check the fire.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 72+ for valves controlled by a fusible
    or heat destructible element.


CLS 126/289
TXT Dampers under subclass 285 structurally adapted for use with heating or
    cooking stoves.


CLS 126/290
TXT Dampers under subclass 289 designed to control the admission of air to the
    combustion-chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193,    for doors designed to admit a current of air into the combustion
    chamber above the fuel level.


CLS 126/291
TXT Dampers under subclass 289 designed to replace broken or worn-out dampers
    and adjustable to stoves of different sizes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145,    for adjustable stove linings.

    153,    for adjustable grates.


CLS 126/292
TXT Devices under subclass 285 comprising miscellaneous stovepipe and air-flue
    dampers.


CLS 126/293
TXT Damper devices under subclass 292 where the smoke-controlling damper and
    the ventilating-damper are so connected that the movement of one operates
    to move the other.


CLS 126/294
TXT Dampers under subclass 292 in the form of a sectional truncated cone.  One
    or both of its sides are usually movable, so as to cause direct or retarded
    draft in the pipe.


CLS 126/295
TXT Dampers under subclass 292 provided with means for locking or holding the
    damper in a predetermined position, also devices for indicating their
    position.


CLS 126/296
TXT Dampers under subclass 292 composed of two or more plates connected by a
    common operating-rod, so as to receive simultaneous action, thereby
    affecting the direct or indirect draft of the pipe.


CLS 126/297
TXT Devices under subclass 292 comprising single-spindle-operating pipe-dampers
    that have retarding means for giving a circuitous course to the products.


CLS 126/298
TXT Devices under the class definition generally known as andirons.  Some of
    these devices are provided with a shelf or support, also a fender.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    505,    for shelves adapted to fireplace grates or any open grate structure.

    544+,   for fireplace screens, guards and hearth structure.


CLS 126/299
TXT Miscellaneous devices under the class definition, commonly known as
    stove-hoods, designed to carry off odors from kitchen ranges, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    389,    for vent devices for liquid heating vessels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 52 for smoke removers for use in roundhouses and
    locomotive sheds over locomotive smoke stacks.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 49+ for hoods and off takes for conducting
    away fumes, vapors, steam, dust, etc., from various places.


CLS 126/300
TXT Stove-hoods under subclass 299 that discharge into the stove-body proper.


CLS 126/301
TXT Stove-hoods under subclass 299 provided with means for connecting them with
    stovepipes and flues.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312,    for stovepipes with ventilators.


CLS 126/302
TXT Stove-hoods under subclass 301 designed to inclose a stove; the casing acts
    as a heat-fender and is provided with ventilating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    544+,   for devices designed to screen and guard stove and fireplace
    openings.


CLS 126/303
TXT Stove-hoods under subclass 301, designed to inclose the top plate of a
    stove.  The casing is usually provided with ventilating means.


CLS 126/304
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising stove-legs and the
    means for attaching them to stove-bodies.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclass 594 for bath tub
    legs.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 188.2+ for furniture leveling devices and
    subclasses 188.8+ for pads and feet for furniture.


CLS 126/305
TXT Devices under subclass 304 in the form of a ring or base, to which the
    stove-leg is attached, and designed to support the stove-body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55      and 277+, for other supporting structures for stoves and subclass
    57, for protective casings for car stoves.


CLS 126/306
TXT Devices under subclass 304 comprising sheet-metal stove-legs.


CLS 126/307
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising miscellaneous smoke-flues,
    designed to convey smoke and waste gases from the fire-pot.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, appropriate subclasses for pipe and
    conduit structures generally.


CLS 126/312
TXT Subject matter under subclass 307 having devices designed to carry off
    vitiated air and odors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    293,    for damper devices where the smoke controlling damper and the
    ventilating damper are interconnected.

    301,    for stove hoods with means connecting them with stove pipes or
    flues.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    454,    Ventilation, subclass 43 for ventilating devices for buildings in
    which an outlet current of air is heated to increase its velocity.


CLS 126/313
TXT Devices under subclass 307 including open vessels containing a liquid and
    so connected to a stovepipe as to be heated thereby and designed to moisten
    the air in the room.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 110, 157, 223, 291, 328, and 337 for
    analogous devices for moistening air in ventilating structures.


CLS 126/314
TXT Devices under the class definition adapted to be applied to flue and
    similar openings, forming a lining therefor, and designed to receive a
    stove or similar pipe.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    301,    Land Vehicles: Wheels and Axles, subclasses 108.1+ for vehicle
    wheels provided with hub caps.


CLS 126/315
TXT Devices under subclass 314 capable of vertical adjustment to suit the
    height of a stovepipe to obviate the necessity of cutting the same to fix
    the stove-hole of the chimney; also adjustable thimbles adapted to receive
    different-size stove-pipes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     for stoves in which the back plate carries a pipe collar which is
    capable of adjustment relative to the flue opening.


CLS 126/316
TXT Devices under subclass 314 comprising thimbles designed to ventilate.


CLS 126/317
TXT Devices under subclass 314 comprising collar and thimble devices designed
    for use in connection with pipes which pass through the floors or ceilings
    of buildings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 404+ for similar devices adapted to be
    applied to the pipe or conduit of brackets or chandeliers where they are
    secured to a wall or ceiling in order to hide the juncture.


CLS 126/318
TXT Devices under subclass 314 for locking the inserted end of a stove-pipe in
    a flue or thimble opening.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 189+ for sheet metal pipe to
    plate joints generally.


CLS 126/319
TXT Devices under subclass 314 designed to close flue and thimble openings.


CLS 126/332
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising shelves or racks peculiarly
    applicable to stoves and as a rule self-supporting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    190,    for miscellaneous stove doors and windows.

    214,    for lid and top structure for liquid or gaseous fuel burning stoves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports: Cabinet Structure, subclass 351 for cabinets with fixed
    or removable shelves or other article supports.


CLS 126/333
TXT Stove-shelves under subclass 332 supported by a bracket or stand above the
    stove-top.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses for mere stands or brackets for
    supporting a stove shelf, unless limited by structure to use with a stove.

    312,    Supports: Cabinet Structure, subclass 280 for cabinets with
    continuously external racks or shelves.


CLS 126/334
TXT Shelves under subclass 332 so hung as to form when in operative position an
    extension of the stove top or oven-bottom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    190,    for stove doors and windows.


CLS 126/335
TXT Shelves under subclass 334 so hung as to form an extension of the
    oven-bottom when the oven-door is open and thrown into operative or
    inoperative position by the opening or closing of the oven door.


CLS 126/337
TXT Subject matter under subclass 332 comprising improvements in the form of
    the oven-rack or shelf.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273,    for miscellaneous domestic ovens.


CLS 126/338
TXT Oven shelves or racks under subclass 337 adapted to be revolved or rotated
    in the oven.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports: Cabinet Structure, subclass 305 for cabinets with
    continuously housed rotary shelves or racks.


CLS 126/339
TXT Oven shelves or racks under subclass 337, adapted to be withdrawn from the
    oven and means for holding the shelf in its extended horizontal position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports: Cabinet Structure, subclasses 330.1+ for cabinets with
    sliding shelves or racks.


CLS 126/340
TXT Sliding oven shelves or racks under subclass 339 moved out or in by the
    opening or closing of the oven-door.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports: Cabinet Structure, subclass 273 for cabinets with
    horizontally slidable shelves or racks interconnected with a rigid housing
    wall or closure for relative motion.


CLS 126/343.5
TXT Heaters under the class definition specially adapted for melting substances
    by the application of heat to a receptacle, conduit, or support for the
    material to be melted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    271.1+, for portable apparatus for applying heat to surfaces generally,
    whether for the purpose of melting snow and ice, thawing frozen ground,
    burning weeds or stubble, or preparing ground for cultivation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 227+ for analogous construction.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 128+ and 146+
    for wheeled carts having a heating means and a nozzle structure for
    discharging steam or a heated fluid, and see the class definition of Class
    239, section III(h), for the line between Classes 126 and 239.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclass 13 for a residual
    process of melting material.


CLS 126/344
TXT Devices under the class definition for heating water, other liquid, or bulk
    fluent material, for domestic or cooking purposes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for combined cooking and heating stoves with steam or hot-water
    generators.

    20,     for ovens of the cooking stove type heated by steam or hot water.

    31,     for cooking stoves having a water tank in an extension chamber
    through which products of combustion pass.

    33,     for shallow chambers (steam tables) provided with means for
    circulating steam or hot water therein.

    34,     for cooking stoves provided with steam or hot water generators
    located in or adjacent the combustion chamber.

    53,     for gas or vapor fuel cooking stoves that have water backs.

    101,    for hot air furnaces combined with boilers.

    113,    for hot air furnaces with water pans.

    210,    for body warmers having liquid or gaseous fuel water heaters.

    508,    for air moistening attachments to fireplaces or open front heaters.

    513+, for fireplaces having water or steam generating backs.

    561+    and 569+, for devices for heating    water by solar energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, for closed receptacle type water
    heaters.

    219,    Electric Heaters, subclasses 281+ for electrically heated water
    heaters.


CLS 126/345
TXT Devices under subclass 344 comprising open-tank or boiler structures
    beneath which is located the furnace or heater. These devices have
    heretofore been termed "agricultural boilers".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 453 for temperature
    modification of dairy foods.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclasses 32+ for open pan liquid
    concentrators.


CLS 126/346
TXT Kettle-furnaces under subclass 345 provided with special means for treating
    food products other than in the art of preserving, and includes tray
    elevating and lowering means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 359+ for heated
    receptacles modified to contain jars or cans of food, and subclasses 403+
    for heated vessels modified to contact a food material with a heated liquid
    contained therein.


CLS 126/347
TXT Kettle-furnaces under subclass 345 in which there is a horizontal extension
    of the main combustion chamber.


CLS 126/348
TXT Devices under subclass 345 comprising combined kettle furnace
    steam-generators and steam-cookers.  These devices are designed for
    cooking, by steam, food products in an open tank or receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    360,    366, 367, and 368, for submerged water heaters.

    373+,   for liquid heating vessels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers; for steam-boiler features.


CLS 126/349
TXT Devices under subclass 345 comprising water heating kettle-furnaces in
    which the kettle is pivoted or trunnioned, so as to permit the ready
    dumping of the contents of the kettle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 164+ for dispensing vessels which are
    tiltably supported.


CLS 126/350
TXT Miscellaneous devices under subclass 344 that are heated by liquid or
    gaseous fuel burners.


CLS 126/351
TXT Devices under subclass 350 in which the flow of fluid fuel to the burner is
    automatically cut off when the temperature of the water reaches a certain
    limit.  The device ordinarily must be reset by hand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    374,    for automatic control of the heating of a liquid containing vessel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 448.1+ for automatic
    control of fluid fuel and water in boilers.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 20+ for
    devices for controlling the temperature of a heated fluid.


CLS 126/355
TXT Devices under subclass 350 in which the water is admitted into the top
    portion of the heater and descends to the bottom portion thereof through
    the medium of shallow pans or suspended metal strips, the water coming in
    direct contact with the ascending gaseous product of combustion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359,    for similar water heaters in which the water is sprayed from the
    top.


CLS 126/357
TXT Devices under subclass 350 in the nature of water-backs and designed to be
    employed with liquid or gaseous fuel cooking-stoves. These devices may be
    hinged to or be a separate part of the stove proper.


CLS 126/358
TXT Devices under subclass 350 which are structurally related to the lamp or
    wick type burners.  The chimney or combustion flue of lamps is as a rule
    surrounded by the water or liquid contained vessel.


CLS 126/359
TXT Devices under subclass 350 comprising portable water heaters in which the
    supply-pipe leads into and discharges in the upper portion of the water
    receptacle or heater and the water is sprayed and caused to flow downward
    over the heated cylinders and in a reverse direction to the flame.


CLS 126/360
TXT Devices under subclass 350 comprising submerged heaters.  This subclass
    includes both the stationary and portable type of heater.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    348,    and see the note therewith for other submerged devices.


CLS 126/361
TXT Devices under subclass 344 comprising water-holding tanks or boilers,
    indirectly associated with significant burner and/or burner control
    structure.  These devices are termed generally "kitchen-range boilers", or
    "stand boilers".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, for pressure boilers, particularly
    subclasses 13.1+ for stand boilers having significant structure
    transferring heat from the combustion chamber to the water chamber.


CLS 126/362
TXT Devices under subclass 361 where the improvements reside in specific
    water-circulating means.


CLS 126/363
TXT Devices under subclass 361 relating to their supports.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 128+ and 146+ for stands for supporting
    receptacles.


CLS 126/364
TXT Devices under subclass 344 through which some portion of a stove smoke-pipe
    passes to heat the water therein.


CLS 126/365
TXT Devices under subclass 364 which are provided with circulation-pipes
    between the heater and an adjacent tank or reservoir. These heaters have
    the character and function of "water-backs".


CLS 126/366
TXT Devices under subclass 344 comprising steam or hot-water pipes submerged in
    a closed liquid-heating system and designed to heat the same.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    378,    for liquid containing vessels heated by a steam or water coil or
    chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 316+ for similar structure in electric
    heaters for fluids.


CLS 126/367
TXT Devices under subclass 344 comprising solid-fuel stove structures designed
    to be submerged in an open tank of liquid for heating the same.  The stove
    structure does not form a permanent part of the tank, but is readily
    removable from the tank.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 316 for electric heaters for fluids.


CLS 126/368
TXT Devices under subclass 344 comprising solid-fuel stove structures adapted
    to be submerged in an open tank of liquid for heating the same.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 316 for electric heaters for fluids.


CLS 126/369
TXT Devices under subclass 344 comprising steam boxes or receptacles designed
    for steaming or cooking food products.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for cooking ovens heated by steam or hot water.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, for analogous devices
    used for drying.

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 300+ for tobacco steaming apparatus.


CLS 126/369.1
TXT Steaming apparatus under subclass 369, including means for utilizing a
    second heating fluid, other than steam, for heating material.  The steam
    and the additional fluid, which is usually combustion products, may be used
    jointly or selectively to treat the same material or may be used
    independently to treat different materials.


CLS 126/369.2
TXT Steaming apparatus under subclass 369 consisting of two or more
    compartments each, (1) constituting a distinct steaming chamber, or (2)
    having separate means of access thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20.1+,  for plural steam ovens.


CLS 126/369.3
TXT Steaming apparatus under subclass 369.2, in which means are provided to
    control the supply of steam, at will, to less than all of the steaming
    units.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20.2,   for the selective supply of steam to a plurality of steam ovens.


CLS 126/373
TXT Devices under subclass 344 adapted to contain an unconfined bulk of fluent
    material and modified to facilitate the heat treatment of the contents
    thereof. The heat generator may or may not be included.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 316+ and 403+ for
    heating vessels combined with a food treating feature other than mere
    heating.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, appropriate subclasses for devices
    that heat confined liquids.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclass for a liquid containing vessel
    with heat exchange means not specialized to heating the liquid in the
    vessel.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 280+ for similar devices combined with
    significant electrical heating means.

    220,    Receptacles, appropriate subclasses for heating or cooking
    receptacles having no heating or cooking feature.


CLS 126/374
TXT Devices under subclass 373 provided with means to sense a change of
    condition and to initiate, maintain, and/or terminate the heating of the
    liquid upon the change of condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    351,    for automatic control of liquid or gaseous fuel devices.


CLS 126/375
TXT Devices under subclass 373 in which means are provided to retain or store
    heat to be given up to the contents of the vessel over a period of time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273.5,  for ovens provided with heat accumulators.


CLS 126/376
TXT Devices under subclass 373 in which the means to facilitate the heat
    treatment includes apparatus for confining or directing a confined heated
    fluid or vapor about or into the vessel or a space in heat exchange
    relationship with the contents of the vessel or for shielding all or a
    portion of the contents from the action of the heated fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273+,   for similar constructions in which there is a complete enclosure of
    the vessel.

    390+,   for heating surface construction and arrangement for vessels which
    are heated by an unconfined fluid.


CLS 126/377
TXT Devices under subclass 376 in which the fluid or vapor is steam or a heated
    liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20+,    33, 281+, and 284, for other devices which are similarly heated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 9+, particularly subclass 13 for jacketed
    or spaced wall receptacles, per se.


CLS 126/378
TXT Devices under subclass 377 in which the steam or heated liquid is in, or
    passes through, a chamber or coil which is in heat exchange relationship
    with the contents of the vessel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    366,    for steam or hot water pipes submerged in a closed liquid heating
    system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 325, 326 and 381 for electric heaters
    immersed in liquid to be heated.


CLS 126/379
TXT Devices under subclass 377 arranged to direct steam into the body of liquid
    contained in the vessel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    348,    for steam generators combined with similar cooking tanks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 467+ for subjecting
    food to an enclosed modified atmosphere and 516+ for applying a fluid to
    food.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclass 77 for gas and liquid
    contact devices, per se.


CLS 126/380
TXT Devices under subclass 370 provided with a source of liquid and means for
    delivering the liquid to the heating vessel.  The added liquid is usually
    to replace that lost from the vessel by evaporation or is that used to
    condense vapors within the vessel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 451+ for boiler feeders.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 386+ for liquid level maintaining or
    responsive systems.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 135 for feed devices for oil
    distillation apparatus.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 262 for feed devices for
    distillation apparatus.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 36+ for a motor driven pump having means for
    controlling the motor in response to liquid level of the pump fluid.


CLS 126/381
TXT Devices under subclass 373 combined with structure providing a heat
    exchange relationship between the vapors evolved in the vessel and a cooler
    body or fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 293+ and 347 for
    condensers combined with infusing or cooking vessels.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclasses 185+ for stills having
    condensers.


CLS 126/382
TXT Devices under subclass 381 in which the evolved vapors are in heat exchange
    relationship with a body of confined liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    380,    for vessels in which the condensing liquid is supplied to the
    vessel.


CLS 126/383
TXT Devices under subclass 373 in which there is provided means to collect
    and/or dispose of fluent material escaping from the confines of the vessel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 4+ for side wall extensions to a vessel for
    preventing escape of material and subclass 85 for shields which are not
    coextensive with the rim of the vessel.


CLS 126/384
TXT Devices under subclass 383 in which the collection or disposal means is
    located in the lid or cover of the vessel.


CLS 126/385
TXT Devices under subclass 383 which are provided with a trough or receptacle
    encircling an opening of the vessel to receive the material which overflows
    or which would otherwise overflow from the vessel.


CLS 126/386
TXT Devices under subclass 385 provided with means to conduct the overflowed
    material back to the vessel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    384,    for overflow returns located in the receptacle closure.


CLS 126/387
TXT Devices under subclass 373 including means for vibrating, or creating or
    directing fluid currents within, the contents of the vessel by means of a
    thermosiphonic or other heat resultant condition of the contents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    379,    for devices wherein agitation is produced incidentally by jets of
    heating fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 287 and 348 for
    infusing and cooking devices having agitating or stirring means.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 108 for a heat exchanger vessel with
    recirculation not specialized to heating.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 144+ for agitating combined with heating.


CLS 126/388
TXT Devices under subclass 373 including means for signalling or indicating the
    existence or occurrence of some condition, usually related to the heating
    operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 285 and 342+, and see
    the search notes included thereunder, for signals and indicators on cooking
    apparatus.


CLS 126/389
TXT Devices under subclass 373 provided with means establishing communication
    between the interior of the vessel, above the material therein, and an
    exterior remote point.  The purpose of the communication means may be to
    direct fluid or vapor either to or from the vessel and is usually arranged
    to terminate exteriorly of the bottom of the vessel adjacent a heating
    surface or for communication with a stove hole.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    275,    for ovens which have bottom openings.

    299+,   for similar devices in combination with a stove.


CLS 126/390
TXT Devices under subclass 373 in which the bottom or walls of the vessel are
    so constituted, configured, or disposed as to modify the heat conductivity,
    heating area or heat distribution of the vessel relative to an unconfined
    heating fluid or a primary source of heat.  Included in this subclass are
    arrangements for the transmission or distribution of heat through an
    extended surface of a material heating plate or vessel, not necessarily a
    part of a liquid containing vessel, such as a hot plate or griddle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    360,    366, 367, and 368, for vessels heated by a confined heating fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for a heat exchange device
    having a wall structure modified for heat transmission purposes.


CLS 126/391
TXT Devices under subclass 390, including a reentrant tube or passage for the
    heating fluid completely encircled by the fluent contents of the vessel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    389,    for vent passages passing through or adjacent liquid to be heated.


CLS 126/392
TXT Devices under subclass 390 including a projecting tube or hollow leg
    containing the fluent material to be heated and completely encircled by the
    heating fluid.


CLS 126/400
TXT Devices under the class definition consisting of bodies which are so
    constituted or constructed as to be capable of absorbing quantities of heat
    energy large relative to their mass or volume and being adapted for use as
    either a source or reservoir of heat energy.  These bodies are frequently
    the heat sources in so-called "Fireless Cookers" and body warmers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for gas stoves combined with "Fireless Cookers".

    87+,    92 and 512, for gas or liquid burning heating stoves or fireplaces
    having elements against which the flames impinge.

    204     and 263, for heating devices including means undergoing a chemical
    change, other than combustion, to give off heat.

    207,    for block type body warmers.

    246,    for dishes having heat accumulators, either liquid or solid.

    273.5,  for fireless cookers.

    375,    for heat accumulator bodies    incorporated in a liquid heater.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 293 for a hand manipulable cooling tool,
    subclass 437 for a refrigeration system with a nonliquid heat accumulator,
    and subclass 530 for an envelope type refrigerant container.

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 322+ for baffles and heat retainers.

    132,    Toilet, subclass 117 for toilet combs with a removable heat
    accumulator, and subclasses 233+ for hair curlers comprising a tube acting
    as a mandrel around which hair is wound, a jaw clamping the hair to the
    mandrel, and a rod separately heatable and insertable in the mandrel to
    heat it.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 4+ for a regenerative heat exchange
    having heat accumulator structure.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 44 and 75 for car heating systems and
    steam radiators with heat accumulators.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 67+, 70 and 71+ for compositions which
    absorb and give off heat without undergoing a chemical change.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 170 for a furnace in which the fuel nozzle
    feeds into a permeable mass within the furnace.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, subclasses 94+ for refractory compositions.


CLS 126/401
TXT Miscellaneous tool under the class definition having a work engaging member
    which is heated by a fluid fuel combustion device integral with the work
    engaging member.


CLS 126/402
TXT Tool under subclass 401 adapted to making distinctive marks by burning a
    surface.


CLS 126/403
TXT Branding iron under subclass 402 employing gaseous fuel.


CLS 126/404
TXT Branding iron under subclass 402 provided with a liquid fuel holding
    receptacle, usually in the handle, for supplying fuel to the heating burner.


CLS 126/405
TXT Tool under subclass 401 employed in the burning of wood and other
    substances.


CLS 126/406
TXT Tool under subclass 405 burning gas.


CLS 126/407
TXT Tool under subclass 405 provided with a liquid holding receptacle for
    supplying fuel to the heating burner.


CLS 126/408
TXT Tool under subclass 401 used to set the curl in hair by heat.


CLS 126/409
TXT Curling iron under subclass 408 provided with means to utilize liquid fuel
    as a heating agent.


CLS 126/410
TXT Subject matter under subclass 401 including a burner combined with and
    heating and ironing roll, burnishing-machine, or similar structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the notes thereunder.


CLS 126/411
TXT Subject matter under subclass 401 comprising a movable heavy smooth planar
    surface adapted to be heated and used for "pressing".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    38,     Textiles: Ironing or Smoothing, subclasses 74+, and the notes
    thereunder, for other flatirons.


CLS 126/412
TXT Sadiron under subclass 411 structurally adapted to the use of liquid fuel
    and provided with an attached liquid fuel reservoir.


CLS 126/413
TXT Tool under subclass 401 adapted to melt solder and apply it between
    surfaces of parts to joint them.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 227+ for a soldering iron having
    electrical structure or characteristics.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclass 53 for a soldering iron having means
    to heat the iron and combined with means to handle flux or solder.


CLS 126/414
TXT Soldering iron under subclass 413 provided with a liquid fuel holding
    receptacle, usually in the handle, for supplying fuel to the heating burner.


CLS 126/500
TXT FIREPLACES OR ACCESSORIES:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising structure for
    providing a flame within an inhabitable enclosure and which, in one
    condition of operation, provides visibility of the flame to inhabitants in
    the enclosure; or auxiliary devices particularly intended to be used with
    such structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    298,    for andirons used in a fireplace.


CLS 126/501
TXT Hopper feed of solid fuel:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein means are provided to dispense
    solid combustible material to the flame from a receptacle spaced from the
    flame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     and see the notes thereunder for other hopper feeds.


CLS 126/502
TXT Condition responsive control:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 including means to sense a condition or
    change of condition in the environment or in the operation of said
    structure or device; and said means effects a control function on the
    operation of said structure or device.


CLS 126/503
TXT Of fluid fuel feed:

    Subject matter under subclass 502 wherein a combustible material providing
    the flame is a liquid or gas, and wherein said control function affects the
    rate of flow of said liquid or gas.


CLS 126/504
TXT Of flue damper:

    Subject matter under subclass 502 including an adjustable closure plate in
    a channel leading from the flame to the exterior of the enclosure, and
    wherein said control function affects the degree of closure of said channel
    by said plate.


CLS 126/505
TXT With article warming shelf on grate:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 including a ledge for supporting an
    object, said ledge being attached to means for holding solid fuel so that
    said object may be heated by the flame.


CLS 126/506
TXT With food cooker:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 including means supporting or otherwise
    facilitating the heating of a solid edible material by said flame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    505,    for a shelf attached to a grate to heat objects placed on the shelf.


CLS 126/507
TXT With filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 including means to separate solid
    particles from a fluid entering or leaving the vicinity of the flame.


CLS 126/508
TXT With room humidifier:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 including means to add moisture in the
    form of vapor to the environment within said inhabitable enclosure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113     and 313, for other air moistening devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, for humidifiers, per se.


CLS 126/509
TXT For heating plural rooms:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 including means to direct heat from said
    flame to another inhabitable enclosure.


CLS 126/510
TXT Fireplace in dividing wall:

    Subject matter under 509 wherein said flame is located in a partition
    separating said inhabitable enclosures.


CLS 126/511
TXT Rotatable fire chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 510 wherein means supporting said flame is
    movable about a vertical axis to permit said flame to be viewed selectively
    by inhabitants in one or the other of said inhabitable enclosures.


CLS 126/512
TXT Fluid fuel:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein a primary combustible material
    providing said flame is in the form of a liquid or gas.

    (1)     Note.  While many of the patents relating to open front liquid and
    gaseous fuel heating stoves in subclasses 86+ and 93+ of this class (126)
    may belong under subclasses 500+ of this class in a hierarchical placement
    of patents, subclasses 86+ and 93+ were not made a part of or screened in
    this project gathering art relating to fireplaces.  Thus, subclasses 86+
    and 93+ must be searched for patents relating to viewable fires having a
    liquid or gaseous fuel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    503,    for condition responsive control of the rate of flow of fluid fuel.


CLS 126/513
TXT With liquid heater:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein means to hold a liquid is located
    near the vicinity of said flame to heat said liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    508,    for a heated liquid holder to add humidity to a room.


CLS 126/514
TXT And means conducting liquid to room heater:

    Subject matter under subclass 513 including a conduit providing a flow path
    for said liquid from said flame vicinity to a heat exchanger located within
    said inhabitable enclosure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    509+,   for structure for heating plural rooms by a liquid heated in a
    fireplace.


CLS 126/515
TXT Inlet air supply from outside fireplace room:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 including means providing a flow path for
    air leading to the vicinity of said flame from a location remote from said
    inhabitable enclosure.


CLS 126/516
TXT With air pump:

    Subject matter under subclass 515 including a device for moving the air
    along said flow path.


CLS 126/517
TXT And air flow regulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 516 including means to control the amount of
    air reaching same flame from said flow path.


CLS 126/518
TXT With air flow regulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 515 including means to control the amount of
    air reaching same flame from said flow path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    517,    for a flow regulator associated with a pump supplying exterior air.


CLS 126/519
TXT Circular viewability of flame:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein same flame is viewable by
    inhabitants within said enclosure at any point along a 360o arc surrounding
    the flame.


CLS 126/520
TXT Insertable into existing window:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 including means accommodating a firebox
    structure for positioning it in a pre-existing opening constructed to admit
    light or air to said inhabitable enclosure.


CLS 126/521
TXT With air pump:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 including a device for moving air from an
    air inlet to the vicinity of the flame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    516,    for an air pump associated with a remote air supply.


CLS 126/522
TXT Tubular heat exchanger:

    Subject matter under subclass 521 including a conduit, generally circular
    or square in cross-section, in fluid flow communication with same device;
    said conduit being positioned in proximity to said flame or to hot
    combustion gases to provide heat exchange between said flame and air
    flowing through said conduit.


CLS 126/523
TXT With heat exchanger for room heating air:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 including structure for directing inlet
    air along a defined flow path in contact with a surface heated by the flame
    or combustion gases, then directing the heated air to the inhabitable
    enclosure; or structure for directing hot combustion gases through a
    conduit within the inhabitable enclosure to a heat transmitting surface
    remote from the flame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    521+,   for heat exchangers associated with an air pump.


CLS 126/524
TXT Tubular:

    Subject matter under subclass 523 wherein said heated surface is generally
    circular or square in cross-section.


CLS 126/525
TXT Secondary outlet leads air to flame:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 including means defining an opening along
    said flow path in the vicinity of the flame for injecting air into the
    flame to aid in combustion.


CLS 126/526
TXT With air flow regulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 including means to control the amount of
    air flowing through said flow path.


CLS 126/527
TXT Secondary outlet leads air to flame:

    Subject matter under subclass 523 including means defining an opening along
    said flow path in the vicinity of the flame for injecting air into the
    flame to aid in combustion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    525,    for secondary outlet associated with a tubular heat exchanger.


CLS 126/528
TXT Air flow path between exterior surface of heat exchanger and facing
    building surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 523 wherein said heated surface is positioned
    in a location opposite a building wall surface so that said flow path is
    defined by the building wall surface and the heated surface.


CLS 126/529
TXT And additional flow path through hollow walled heat exchanger:

    Subject matter under subclass 528 wherein structure around said flame
    includes a wall having plates spaced apart from each other to define a
    conduit for receiving air from said flow path and directing the air to flow
    between the plates.


CLS 126/530
TXT With air flow regulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 528 including means to control the amount of
    air flowing through said flow path.


CLS 126/531
TXT Hollow side walls in heat exchanger:

    Subject matter under subclass 523 wherein said structure includes spaced
    apart plates along each side of the flame, and said spaced apart plates
    define a flow path for air along opposite sides of the flame.


CLS 126/532
TXT With means facilitating ash removal:

    Subject matter under subclass 523 and further including a device to
    facilitate the removal of solid products of combustion from a location
    beneath the flame.


CLS 126/533
TXT With air flow regulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 523 including means to control the amount of
    air flowing through said flow path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    517,    518, 526, and 530, for air flow regulation in the specific
    structure provided for therein.


CLS 126/534
TXT And adjustable flue damper:

    Subject matter under subclass 533, and further including a closure plate in
    a channel leading from the flame to the exterior of the enclosure, and
    wherein means is provided for moving said plate to affect the amount of
    combusted gases passing through said channel.


CLS 126/535
TXT And adjustable flue damper:

    Subject matter under subclass 523 and further including a closure plate in
    a channel leading from the flame to the exterior of the enclosure, and
    wherein means is provided for moving said plate to affect the amount of
    combusted gases passing through said channel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    534,    for an adjustable flue damper combined with an air flow regulator.


CLS 126/536
TXT Adjustable flue damper:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 including a closure plate in a channel
    leading from the flame to the exterior of the enclosure, and means for
    moving said closure plate to affect the amount of combusted gases passing
    around said plate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    504,    for a condition responsive flue damper; and subclasses 534 and 535
    for an adjustable flue damper associated with a fireplace having a heat
    exchanger.


CLS 126/537
TXT Screw operator:

    Subject matter under subclass 536 wherein said means for moving said
    closure plate comprises interengaging helical threads relatively rotatable
    by an inhabitant in said closure.


CLS 126/538
TXT Variable predetermined positions:

    Subject matter under subclass 536 including means holding said closure
    plate in a plurality of preset positions.


CLS 126/539
TXT From exterior of front face of fireplace:

    Subject matter under subclass 536 wherein said means for moving same
    closure plate extends into said closure plate extends into said inhabitable
    enclosure from a position in said channel.


CLS 126/540
TXT Grate structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 including means to support a solid
    combustible material above a floor beneath the flame.


CLS 126/541
TXT Relatively movable parts:

    Subject matter under subclass 540 wherein said combustible material support
    is formed of plural parts movable with respect to each other for assembly
    of said support or for adjusting the position or size of said support; or
    wherein said support is mounted so as to facilitate movement of said
    support relative to said floor.


CLS 126/542
TXT Including means facilitating ash removal:

    Subject matter under subclass 541 wherein said parts are movable to and fro
    to dislodge solid products of combustion from said support; or wherein said
    support is mounted in a manner capable of being tilted to dislodge the
    products of combustion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    532,    for means facilitating ash removal in combination with heat
    exchanger structure in a fireplace.


CLS 126/543
TXT With removable ash pan:

    Subject matter under subclass 542 including a receptacle slidable into and
    out of a position below the combustible material support to facilitate
    removal of the solid products of combustion.


CLS 126/544
TXT Front barrier or guard:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 including protection means positioned
    between the flame and the inhabitable enclosure to protect the inhabitable
    enclosure or inhabitant thereof from the flame, smoke or embers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    298,    for andirons used in a fireplace.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, appropriate
    subclasses for barriers or partitions wherein specific fireplace features
    or relationships are not claimed.


CLS 126/545
TXT With particular seal:

    Subject matter under subclass 544 wherein significance is attributed to
    means for preventing air or smoke seepage between abutting surfaces on said
    protection means and structure surrounding said flame.


CLS 126/546
TXT Vertically adjustable:

    Subject matter under subclass 544 wherein said protective means is provided
    with structure to alter the vertical distance between a bottom edge of said
    protective means and a hearth portion extending from beneath the flame.


CLS 126/547
TXT Solid front cover:

    Subject matter under subclass 544 wherein said protection means comprises
    an imperforate barrier between the flame and the inhabitable enclosure.


CLS 126/548
TXT And perforated screen:

    Subject matter under subclass 547 and further comprising an apertured
    barrier between the flame and the inhabitable enclosure.


CLS 126/549
TXT And auxiliary air flow adjuster:

    Subject matter under subclass 547 wherein a wall portion beneath said
    imperforate barrier includes means to regulate the amount of air admitted
    to the flame when the barrier is closed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    517     and 518, for air flow regulators used in conjunction with exterior
    air, and subclasses 526, 530 and 533+ for air regulators used to adjust
    flow through a heat exchanger.


CLS 126/550
TXT Smoke collecting hood:

    Subject matter under subclass 544 wherein said protection means comprises
    means extending into the inhabitable enclosure from the front,


    upper face of structure surrounding the flame to prevent smoke from
    dispersing into the enclosure.


CLS 126/551
TXT Screen slidable on track:

    Subject matter under subclass 544 wherein said protection means comprises a
    barrier supported for opening and closing movement along a horizontally
    extending guideway.


CLS 126/552
TXT Heat reflecting structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein significance is attributed to the
    material or configuration of a wall surface for throwing heat from the
    flame into the inhabitable enclosure.


CLS 126/553
TXT Adjustable:

    Subject matter under subclass 552 wherein said wall surface is movable into
    any of a plurality of positions.


CLS 126/554
TXT With means facilitating ash removal:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 including a device to facilitate removal
    of solid products of combustion from a location beneath the flame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    532,    for ash removal facilities in a heat exchanger fireplace
    environment, and subclasses 542+ for ash removal facilities in combination
    with a grate.


CLS 126/555
TXT Removable ash pan:

    Subject matter under subclass 554 wherein said device comprises a
    receptacle slidable into and out of a position below the flame.


CLS 126/561
TXT SOLAR HEAT COLLECTOR FOR POND OR POOL:
    Apparatus under the class definition wherein a device to collect the heat
    of solar radiation includes means to transfer the heat from the device to
    an open body of liquid in the ground (i.e., pond) or to a body of water
    normally used for swimming (i.e., pool).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 487 and 488+ for
    pool structure, per se.


CLS 126/562
TXT Including auxiliary source for adding heat to pool:
    Apparatus under subclass 561 and further including a heater other than
    solar for providing additional heat to water in the pool.


CLS 126/563
TXT Remotely located from pool:
    Apparatus under subclass 561 in which the device is spaced away from the
    pool.


CLS 126/564
TXT Within pool water:
    Apparatus under subclass 561 wherein the device is totally submerged in the
    pool water.


CLS 126/565
TXT On pool water surface:
    Apparatus under subclass 561 wherein at least a portion of the device
    contacts the surface of the pool water.


CLS 126/566
TXT Pool cover is collector:
    Apparatus under subclass 565 wherein the device serves an additional
    function of concealing or protecting the pool.

    (1)     Note.  Pool cover may cover or protect only part of the pool area.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 498+ for pool
    cover, per se.


CLS 126/567
TXT With means to extract heat from pond liquid:
    Apparatus under subclass 561 and further including means to transfer heat
    from the liquid in the pond to a heat utilization area.


CLS 126/568
TXT In contact with pond liquid:
    Apparatus under subclass 561 wherein the device touches the liquid in the
    pond.


CLS 126/569
TXT SOLAR HEAT COLLECTOR:
    Apparatus under the class definition having (1) means to direct solar
    radiation and support means for an article to be heated by the directed
    radiation or (2) means to convert solar radiation to heat.

    (1)     Note.  The "means" of clause (2) may be combined with (a) means to
    concentrate or direct solar radiation to the converting means, or (b) a
    spaced cover or enclosure for the converting means, or (c) a means to
    utilize the heat to heat a fluent medium (i.e., a gas, liquid, or a
    flowable solid), or (d) a support for the converting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400,    for means, per se, for storing heat which may have been derived
    from a solar collector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, subclass 295 for subject matter
    utilizing solar energy for crystallizing a substance.

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 890.033 for making solar energy device.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 93 for
    subject matter utilizing solar energy to dry material.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclasses 17, 59, and 65 for a greenhouse or
    other structure with specific means for holding or growing a plant in
    combination with solar heating means for the greenhouse or plant.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), for a building structure, per
    se.

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 641.1+ for a power plant operated by means
    of heat from the sun.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 235.1 for a refrigeration system utilizing
    solar energy.

    136,    Batteries, Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclass 206 for
    electric power generator utilizing solar energy; and subclasses 243+ for a
    solar concentrator, orientator, or reflector in combination therewith which
    changes solar radiation into electrical energy.  Where the sole disclosure
    of the collector is a Class 136 device and is claimed broadly,
    classification is in Class 136.  For a disclosure of diverse collectors
    classifiable in different classes and claimed merely as a collector,
    classification is in Class 126.  When a Class 136 collector is claimed,
    classification is in Class 136.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclasses 1.1 and 902+ for a
    concentrator utilizing solar energy.

    165,    Heat Exchange, especially subclasses 48+ for a combined heating and
    cooling means which utilizes solar energy.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 234 for distillation by solar
    energy.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, Digest 1 and subclasses 10
    and 100 for a distillation process utilizing solar energy.

    237,    Heating Systems, for a method, apparatus for heating a room,
    chamber, house, or other enclosing structure wherein the source of heat
    claimed is other than a solar collector.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 168 for control of attitude of a spacecraft
    by solar pressure.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 906 for
    subject matter utilizing solar energy.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    619+ and 642+ for a lense; and subclasses 871+ for a reflector, per se,
    used to concentrate solar energy.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 22+ for subject matter utilizing
    solar energy.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, for a particular coating
    or surface preparation for absorbing solar energy.


CLS 126/570
TXT Having external damage preventor:
    Apparatus under subclass 569 having a structure designed to withstand or
    otherwise obstruct the impact of a means external of the converting means
    which might damage the converting means were it not for the presence of the
    structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    572+,   for internal damage prevention, e.g., pressure, temperature, etc.


CLS 126/571
TXT Comprising movable support:
    Apparatus under subclass 570 wherein the structure to withstand or
    otherwise obstruct impact carries the weight of the converting means and is
    designed to permit physical adjustment of the converting means.


CLS 126/572
TXT With control means energized in response to actuator stimulated by
    condition sensor:Apparatus under subclass 569 having a device for sensing
    ambient condition, condition within the converting means, or sensing a
    condition of a fluent medium as it passes into, through, or from the
    converting means and operates to affect the fluent in some manner (e.g., as
    by affecting its flow, pressure, or temperature) or to operate a structure
    to block or permit more or less of the available solar radiation to reach
    the converting means or to move the converting means depending on the
    position of the sun.


CLS 126/573
TXT Including sun position tracking sensor:
    Apparatus under subclass 572 including a supporting base wherein the
    sensing means is adapted to follow the sun and activate structure to move
    the converting means with respect to the base according to the position of
    the sun.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    600,    for a device for repositioning of solar collector for optimum
    radiation exposure without a condition responsive control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 203.4 for a tracking system, per se, which
    may be used for moving a solar collector to follow the sun.

    353,    Optics: Image Projectors, subclass 3 for a heliostat.


CLS 126/574
TXT With computer:
    Apparatus under subclass 573 which further includes a unit capable of
    processing, retrieving, and storing programmed information.


CLS 126/575
TXT With timer:
    Apparatus under subclass 573 which further includes an instrument for
    measuring intervals of time to move the converting means.


CLS 126/576
TXT With motor:

    Apparatus under subclass 573 wherein means to operate the structure
    includes an engine.


CLS 126/577
TXT With gear:

    Apparatus under subclass 576 wherein means to operate the structure
    includes an input member which transmits motion to an output member by
    rolling contact between surfaces of the members, and wherein the input
    member is driven by an engine.


CLS 126/578
TXT Electronic sensor:

    Apparatus under subclass 573 wherein the sensing means includes a device
    that determines or measures change in the electrical property of a material.


CLS 126/579
TXT Fluid expansion sensor:

    Apparatus under subclass 573 wherein the sensing means includes a device
    which detects change in volume of a liquid or gas.


CLS 126/580
TXT Gas:
    Apparatus under subclass 579 wherein the device detects change in volume of
    a gas.


CLS 126/581
TXT Solid expansion sensor:
    Apparatus under subclass 573 wherein the sensing means includes a device
    which detects change in the volume of a solid material.


CLS 126/582
TXT Phase change sensor:
    Apparatus under subclass 573 wherein the sensing means includes a device
    which detects a transformation of state of substance (e.g., from solid to
    liquid or from liquid to gas).


CLS 126/583
TXT Of fluent medium:
    Apparatus under subclass 572 wherein the sensing means operates a device to
    affect the fluent medium.


CLS 126/584
TXT Pressure responsive:
    Apparatus under subclass 583 wherein the sensed condition is the pressure
    of the fluent medium.


CLS 126/585
TXT Temperature responsive:
    Apparatus under subclass 583 wherein the sensed condition is the
    temperature of the fluent medium.


CLS 126/586
TXT Set point control:
    Apparatus under subclass 585 wherein at a predetermined temperature of the
    fluent medium, the fluent affecting device is operated.


CLS 126/587
TXT Differential temperature control:
    Apparatus under subclass 585 wherein a difference between two temperatures
    is measured and in response to such measurement, a device is actuated to
    operate a function of the converting means.


CLS 126/588
TXT Freezing prevention:

    Apparatus under subclass 585 wherein in response to the sensed temperature
    condition, a device is actuated to prevent the fluent medium from changing
    to its solid state.



CLS 126/589
TXT Overheating prevention:

    Apparatus under subclass 585 wherein in response to the sensed temperature
    condition, a device is actuated to prevent the fluent medium from getting
    overheated.


CLS 126/590
TXT Fluid level responsive:

    Apparatus under subclass 583 wherein the sensed condition is the location
    of the surface of the fluent medium relative to its container.


CLS 126/591
TXT Of fluid flow:

    Apparatus under subclass 583 wherein in response to the sensed condition
    the fluid is affected in some manner (e.g., as by affecting its flow or
    temperature or pressure).


CLS 126/592
TXT Liquid:

    Apparatus under subclass 591 wherein the fluent medium is liquid.


CLS 126/593
TXT Of collector:

    Apparatus under subclass 572 wherein the sensing means operates a device to
    affect the solar heat unit.


CLS 126/594
TXT Pressure responsive:

    Apparatus under subclass 593 wherein the sensed condition is the pressure
    within the apparatus.


CLS 126/595
TXT Temperature responsive:
    Apparatus under subclass 593 wherein the sensed condition is the
    temperature within the apparatus.


CLS 126/596
TXT Set point control:
    Apparatus under subclass 595 wherein at a predetermined temperature within
    the apparatus, the apparatus affecting device is operated.


CLS 126/597
TXT Differential temperature control:
    Apparatus under subclass 595 wherein a difference between two temperatures
    is measured and in response to such measurement, a device is actuated to
    operate a function of the apparatus.


CLS 126/598
TXT Freezing prevention:
    Apparatus under subclass 595 wherein in response to the sensed temperature
    condition, a device is actuated to protect the apparatus against damage due
    to cold weather.


CLS 126/599
TXT Overheating prevention:
    Apparatus under subclass 595 wherein in response to the sensed temperature
    condition, a device is actuated to protect the apparatus from damage due to
    excessive heat build-up within the apparatus.


CLS 126/600
TXT With means to reposition solar collector for optimum radiation
    exposure:Apparatus under subclass 569 wherein an actuating device moves the
    apparatus to permit a desired amount of solar radiation to be received by
    the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  The actuating device does not include sensor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    573,    for sun's position tracking using sensor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 203.4 for tracking systems, per se, which
    may be used for moving a solar collector to follow the sun.

    353,    Optics: Image Projectors, subclass 3 for a heliostat.


CLS 126/601
TXT Computer:
    Apparatus under subclass 600 wherein the actuating device is a unit which
    is capable of processing, retrieving, and storing programmed information.


CLS 126/602
TXT Timer:
    Apparatus under subclass 600 wherein the actuating device includes an
    instrument which measures interval of time to move the apparatus an
    incremented amount.


CLS 126/603
TXT Electric:
    Apparatus under subclass 602 wherein the instrument is powered by
    electricity.


CLS 126/604
TXT Having fluid power:
    Apparatus under subclass 600 wherein the force for moving the actuating
    device is from a liquid or gas.


CLS 126/605
TXT Motor:
    Apparatus under subclass 600 wherein the actuating device includes an
    engine.


CLS 126/606
TXT Gearing:
    Apparatus under subclass 605 wherein the actuating device includes an input
    member which transmits motion to an output member by rolling contact
    between surfaces of the members, and wherein the input member is driven by
    an engine.



CLS 126/607
TXT Gearing:
    Apparatus under subclass 600 wherein the actuating device includes an input
    member which transmits motion to an output member by rolling contact
    between surfaces of the members.


CLS 126/608
TXT Manual:
    Apparatus under subclass 600 wherein the actuating device is operated
    through application of force exerted by a human operator.


CLS 126/609
TXT With auxiliary heat source for fluent medium:
    Apparatus under subclass 569 which further includes a heater other than
    solar to add thermal energy to the fluent medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 235.1 for a solar heater providing a heat
    sink for a heat pump or providing a heat source required for refrigeration
    (e.g., boils refrigerant in an absorption system).

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 48+ and other appropriate subclasses for
    a combined heating and cooling means wherein the heating means may be a
    solar heater.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclass 1 for methods and apparatus for heating
    rooms, chambers, houses, and other enclosing structures where the source of
    heat claimed is other than a solar collector.



CLS 126/610
TXT In a tank:
    Apparatus under subclass 609 wherein the heater is located within a storage
    reservoir containing the fluent medium.


CLS 126/611
TXT In a heat exchanger:
    Apparatus under subclass 609 wherein the heater is located within a device
    that transfers heat from one fluid to another without mixture of the fluids.


CLS 126/612
TXT In the collector:
    Apparatus under subclass 609 wherein the heater is located within the
    enclosure for the converting means.


CLS 126/613
TXT Heat pump:
    Apparatus under subclass 609 wherein the heater is a device that has both a
    refrigerating mode and a heating mode, and the heating  mode of the device
    is used as the heater for the fluent medium.


CLS 126/614
TXT Fireplace:
    Apparatus under subclass 609 wherein the heater includes structure for
    providing a flame within an inhabitable enclosure and which, in one
    condition of operation, provides visibility of the flame to inhibitants in
    the enclosure and heat to the fluent medium.




CLS 126/615
TXT Water heater:
    Apparatus under subclass 609 wherein the  heater is a device that has an
    additional function of providing heated water for heating an inhabitable
    enclosure.


CLS 126/616
TXT Hot air furnace:
    Apparatus under subclass 609 wherein the heater is a device which has an
    additional function of providing heated air for heating an inhabitable
    enclosure.


CLS 126/617
TXT With heat storage mass:
    Apparatus under subclass 569 which further includes a quantity of solid
    material which is heated by the fluent medium during periods when solar
    radiation is received and which, in turn, liberates its heat at other
    periods of time.


CLS 126/618
TXT Phase change:
    Apparatus under subclass 617 wherein the material undergoes change in state
    from solid to liquid or from liquid to solid.


CLS 126/619
TXT Specific chemical:
    Apparatus under subclass 617 wherein significance is attributed to the
    elemental composition of the material.

    (1)     Note.  A patent proper for this subclass will have at least one
    claim wherein the material is identified by its chemical name.


CLS 126/620
TXT Rocks or soil:
    Apparatus under subclass 617 wherein the material includes a relatively
    hard naturally formed mass of mineral or petrified matter or earth.

    (1)     Note.  A patent proper for this subclass will have at least one
    claim wherein the material is identified as being rocks or stones, or being
    a combination, or fragmented rocks (i.e., sand or gravel), or soil.


CLS 126/621
TXT Solar collector forms part of building roof:
    Apparatus under subclass 569 wherein the converting means is made an
    integral part of a structure which provides a top cover of a building.


CLS 126/622
TXT Solar collector includes roof shingles or tiles:
    Apparatus under subclass 621 wherein the structure includes a plurality of
    overlapping pieces of material laid in rows.


CLS 126/623
TXT Solar collector supported on existing roof structure:
    Apparatus under subclass 569 wherein the converting means is completely
    mounted on a roof exterior of the building.


CLS 126/624
TXT Rollable or foldable collector unit of nonrigid material:
    Apparatus under subclass 569 wherein the converting means is made of a
    pliable material which may be overlapped upon itself for storage.


CLS 126/625
TXT Fluent medium is gas:
    Apparatus under subclass 624 wherein the fluent medium is a gaseous
    substance.


CLS 126/626
TXT Fluent medium is water:
    Apparatus under subclass 624 wherein the fluent medium is water.


CLS 126/627
TXT Foldable collector unit of rigid material:
    Apparatus under subclass 569 wherein adjacent parts of the converting means
    are made of inflexible material and are connected to each other, and having
    structure permitting the parts to be doubled upon themselves for storage.


CLS 126/628
TXT Including means to utilize fluent medium from collector to heat interior of
    building:Apparatus under subclass 569 having a means by which the heat of
    solar radiation is transferred via the fluent medium to heat the space
    enclosed by a building.


CLS 126/629
TXT With device to circulate air from room of building through
    collector:Apparatus under subclass 628 which includes a machine to move air
    from the space enclosed by the building through the converting means.


CLS 126/630
TXT Plural circulators:
    Apparatus under subclass 629 which includes more than one machine.


CLS 126/631
TXT Circulator located in collector:
    Apparatus under subclass 629 wherein the machine is located within an
    enclosure for the converting means.


CLS 126/632
TXT Circulator located in building:
    Apparatus under subclass 629 wherein the machine is located within the
    building.


CLS 126/633
TXT With fluent medium passage in floor or wall of room:
    Apparatus under subclass 628 in which a conduit is provided in a floor or
    wall of a building, and the fluent medium is moved through the conduit for
    the purpose of heating the enclosed building space.


CLS 126/634
TXT With means to convey fluent medium through collector:
    Apparatus under subclass 569 having means by which the fluent medium is
    moved through the converting means and in doing so absorbs heat to be
    transferred elsewhere.


CLS 126/635
TXT Having evaporator and condenser sections (e.g., heat pipe):
    Apparatus under subclass 634 having a closed conduit to convey the fluent
    medium between a section heated by solar radiation and a cooled section
    whereby it is caused to change from liquid to gaseous state because of the
    absorption of solar radiation and subsequently change back to its liquid
    state as the heat of the gas is dissipated in the cooled section.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 641.1+ for a power plant operating by
    means of heat evolved from the sun.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 104.21+ for a condensing and evaporating
    heat exchange system.


CLS 126/636
TXT Particular fluid:
    Apparatus under subclass 635 wherein significance is attributed to a
    specific kind of fluent medium.


CLS 126/637
TXT Gas:
    Apparatus under subclass 636 wherein the fluent medium is a gas.


CLS 126/638
TXT Thermosyphonic fluid circulation:
    Apparatus under subclass 634 in which the fluent medium is a fluid which
    completely fills a closed circuitous conduit extending between a low and a
    high elevation, and having a first section which passes through the
    converting means whereby the fluent medium is heated and rises in the
    conduit from the low to the high elevation, and a second section wherein
    the heat of the fluent medium is dissipated causing the cooled medium to
    descend into the second section and return to the first section.


CLS 126/639
TXT Liquid:
    Apparatus under subclass 638 wherein the fluent medium is a liquid.


CLS 126/640
TXT With storage tank for fluent medium:
    Apparatus under subclass 634 having a container in which the fluent medium
    from the converting means is accumulated.


CLS 126/641
TXT Having heat exchanger within storage tank:
    Apparatus under subclass 640 which includes a device that transfers heat
    from one fluid to another fluid without mixture of the fluids and is
    positioned inside the container.


CLS 126/642
TXT Tank is heat exchanger:
    Apparatus under subclass 640 wherein the heat is transferred from the
    fluent medium via a wall of the fluent container to a heat utilization
    location.


CLS 126/643
TXT With heat exchanger:
    Apparatus under subclass 634 which includes a device that transfers heat
    from one fluent medium to another fluent without mixture of the fluents.


CLS 126/644
TXT With solid phase change:
    Apparatus under subclass 643 wherein the fluent medium in the heat
    transferring device undergoes change in state from fluent to solid.


CLS 126/645
TXT With liquid phase change:
    Apparatus under subclass 643 wherein the fluent medium in the heat
    transferring device undergoes change in the state from solid or gas to
    liquid.


CLS 126/646
TXT Pump:
    Apparatus under subclass 634 including a machine for forcing the fluent
    medium through the converting means.


CLS 126/647
TXT Blower:
    Apparatus under subclass 646 wherein the machine is a gas-moving device.


CLS 126/648
TXT With radiation trap:
    Apparatus under subclass 634 having a device which captures randomly
    reflected solar radiation which would otherwise escape or unintentionally
    be directed away from that portion of the converting means where the
    radiation is to be absorbed by the converting means.


CLS 126/649
TXT Plural traps:
    Apparatus under subclass 648 and further including another device which
    captures randomly reflected solar radiation which would otherwise escape or
    unintentionally be directed away from that portion of the converting means
    where the radiation is to be absorbed by the fluent medium.


CLS 126/650
TXT Particular material:
    Apparatus under subclass 648 wherein significance is attributed to a
    substance from which the device is made.


CLS 126/651
TXT Conduit absorber structure:
    Apparatus under subclass 634 wherein the fluent medium is located within a
    fluent confining means which surrounds and provides an axial flowpath for
    the fluent medium through the converting means.


CLS 126/652
TXT Surrounded by transparent enclosure:
    Apparatus under subclass 651 having a transparent means which completely
    envelops, in spaced relation to, and extends along an axial length of the
    fluent confining means.


CLS 126/653
TXT Sealed chamber between enclosure and absorber contains vacuum promoter
    (e.g., getter):Apparatus under subclass 652 wherein a negative pressure
    exists in a space between an enclosure and an absorber conduit and wherein
    a substance is added to enhance the negative pressure.


CLS 126/654
TXT Sealed chamber between enclosure and absorber contains gas for promoting
    heat transfer:Apparatus under subclass 652 wherein a sealed chamber between
    an enclosure and an absorber conduit contains a gaseous fluid which
    enhances the conduction of heat between the enclosure and the absorber
    conduit.


CLS 126/655
TXT Plurality of conduit absorbers:
    Apparatus under subclass 652 which includes more than one fluent confining
    means.


CLS 126/656
TXT Axis of conduit is curved (e.g., helical or   serpentine):
    Apparatus under subclass 652 wherein the fluent confining means is shaped
    in such a manner that the fluid follows a circuitous path.


CLS 126/657
TXT With reflector:
    Apparatus under subclass 652 which further includes a nontransparent
    surface to redirect solar radiation as the solar radiation travels toward
    the fluent confining means.


CLS 126/658
TXT Having heat-absorbing fin or plate:
    Apparatus under subclass 651 having a projecting vane or a sheet secured to
    or integrally formed with the fluent confining means to effectively
    increase the heat transfer area beyond that which the confining means would
    otherwise have available.


CLS 126/659
TXT With fastener to secure fin to conduit:
    Apparatus under subclass 658 wherein an attaching device is used to connect
    the vane to the fluent confining means.


CLS 126/660
TXT Plate integral with conduit:
    Apparatus under subclass 658 wherein the sheet is manufactured
    simultaneously as a complete unit with the fluent confining means.


CLS 126/661
TXT Plate surface with conduit secured thereto:
    Apparatus under subclass 658 which includes means for connecting the fluent
    confining means to the sheet.


CLS 126/662
TXT Conduit positioned in a groove in the plate:
    Apparatus under subclass 658 wherein the sheet is provided with a channel
    to receive the fluent confining means.


CLS 126/663
TXT Plural conduits:
    Apparatus under subclass 651 wherein the fluent confining means provides
    two or more side by side axial flowpaths for either series or parallel flow
    of the fluent medium.


CLS 126/664
TXT Noncircular conduit:
    Apparatus under subclass 663 wherein the fluent confining means defines a
    flowpath which has a cross-sectional shape other than a circle.


CLS 126/665
TXT Flexible conduit:
    Apparatus under subclass 663 wherein the fluent confining means is formed
    of a pliable material.


CLS 126/666
TXT Rectangular metallic conduit:
    Apparatus under subclass 651 wherein the fluent confining means is made of
    metal and defines a flow chamber which has a rectangular cross-sectional
    shape.


CLS 126/667
TXT Having internal partition:
    Apparatus under subclass 666 in which the flow chamber includes a baffle
    which redirects the flow through the chamber.


CLS 126/668
TXT Rectangular nonmetallic conduit:
    Apparatus under subclass 651 wherein the fluent confining means is made of
    material other than metal and defines a flow chamber which has a
    rectangular cross-sectional shape.


CLS 126/669
TXT Having internal partition:
    Apparatus under subclass 668 in which the fluent chamber includes a baffle
    which redirects the flow through the chamber.


CLS 126/670
TXT Circular metallic conduit:
    Apparatus under subclass 651 wherein the fluent confining means is made of
    metal and defines a flow chamber which has a circular cross-sectional shape.


CLS 126/671
TXT Having internal partition:
    Apparatus under subclass 670 in which the fluent chamber includes a baffle
    which redirects the flow through the chamber.


CLS 126/672
TXT Circular nonmetallic conduit:
    Apparatus under subclass 651 wherein the fluent confining means is made of
    material other than metal and defines a flow chamber which has a circular
    cross-sectional shape.


CLS 126/673
TXT Having internal partition:
    Apparatus under subclass 672 in which the fluid chamber includes a baffle
    which redirects the flow through the chamber.


CLS 126/674
TXT Absorber having extended surface:
    Apparatus under subclass 651 wherein the fluent confining means is formed
    so that it has a heat exchange surface area which is greater than that
    which would be formed by a fluent confining means having a smooth surface
    and occupying a similar area of the converting means.


CLS 126/675
TXT Corrugated surface:
    Apparatus under subclass 674 wherein the heat exchange surface is formed
    into parallel and alternating ridges and grooves.


CLS 126/676
TXT Particular absorber material:
    Apparatus under subclass 651 wherein significance is attributed to a
    substance from which the fluent confining means is made.


CLS 126/677
TXT Metal:
    Apparatus under subclass 676 wherein the fluent confining means is made of
    metal.


CLS 126/678
TXT Particular fluent medium including radiation absorbing material:Apparatus
    under subclass 569 wherein significance is attributed to the material
    forming the fluent medium and especially to properties of the material
    which enhance heat transfer.


CLS 126/679
TXT Specific chemical:
    Apparatus under subclass 678 wherein significance is attributed to the
    elemental composition of the matter.

    (1)     Note.  A patent proper for this subclass will have at least one
    claim wherein the matter is identified by its chemical name.


CLS 126/680
TXT Energy concentrator with support for material heated:
    Apparatus under subclass 569 having means to carry the weight of an article
    to be heated and having means to focus solar radiation on the article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    684,    for a reflector.

    698,    for a lens for concentrating solar energy on an absorber for
    heating a fluid.


CLS 126/681
TXT Solar oven:
    Apparatus under subclass 680 wherein the article to be heated is within an
    enclosed compartment.


CLS 126/682
TXT Having foldable energy concentrator:
    Apparatus under subclass 681 wherein the focusing means has structure
    permitting it to be doubled  upon  itself.


CLS 126/683
TXT With concentrating reflector and concentrating lens:
    Apparatus under subclass 569 wherein said concentrating or directing means
    includes a first nontransparent surface which acts to redirect the solar
    radiation and increases the brightness of solar radiation and also includes
    a refractor; the combination of the nontransparent surface and the
    refractor causes the solar radiation to converge to the converting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    680,    for energy concentrator with support for material heated.


CLS 126/684
TXT With concentrating reflector:
    Apparatus under subclass 569 wherein said means to concentrate or direct
    solar radiation includes a first nontransparent surface which acts to
    increase the brightness of the solar radiation and directs the solar
    radiation to the converting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    680,    for energy concentrator with support for material heated.


CLS 126/685
TXT Plural reflectors in optical series:
    Apparatus under subclass 684 which further includes an additional
    nontransparent surface to receive solar radiation from the first surface
    and wherein said additional surface and first surface redirect the solar
    radiation to the converting means.


CLS 126/686
TXT Flat and curved:
    Apparatus under subclass 685 wherein one of said surfaces is planar and
    wherein the other of said surfaces deviates from planarity in a smooth,
    continuous way.


CLS 126/687
TXT Flat:
    Apparatus under subclass 685 wherein one of said surfaces is planar.


CLS 126/688
TXT Spot focus:
    Apparatus under subclass 684 wherein the first surface is arranged to
    concentrate the solar radiation at a point.


CLS 126/689
TXT Spherical:
    Apparatus under subclass 688 wherein the first surface is shaped in a
    manner that all points on the surface are equidistant from a fixed point.


CLS 126/690
TXT Parabolic:
    Apparatus under subclass 688 wherein the first surface is shaped like a
    plane curve generated by a point so moving that its distance from a fixed
    point divided by its distance from a fixed line is equal to one.


CLS 126/691
TXT Elliptical:
    Apparatus under subclass 688 wherein the first surface is shaped like a
    closed plane curve generated by a point so moving that its distance from a
    fixed point divided by its distance from a fixed line is a positive
    constant less than one.


CLS 126/692
TXT Line focus:
    Apparatus under subclass 684 wherein the first surface has a length larger
    than the width and is arranged to direct solar radiation at a series of
    spot foci located along a line.


CLS 126/693
TXT Circular:
    Apparatus under subclass 692 wherein perimeter of the first surface forms a
    circle.


CLS 126/694
TXT Parabolic:
    Apparatus under subclass 692 wherein the first surface is shaped like a
    plane curve generated by a point so moving that its distance from a fixed
    point divided by its distance from a fixed line is equal to one.


CLS 126/695
TXT Elliptical:
    Apparatus under subclass 692 wherein the first surface is shaped like a
    closed plane curve generated by a point so moving that its distance from a
    fixed point divided by its distance from a fixed line is a positive
    constant less than one.


CLS 126/696
TXT Reflector support:
    Apparatus under subclass 684 wherein a structure is provided to carry the
    weight of the first surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    700,    for lens support.


CLS 126/697
TXT Inflatable reflector:
    Apparatus under subclass 684 wherein the first surface is made of a
    material which expands when filled with fluid.


CLS 126/698
TXT With concentrating lens:
    Apparatus under subclass 569 wherein said concentrating or directing means
    includes a refractor to receive solar radiation and causes the solar
    radiation to converge or diverge as the solar radiation travels to the
    converting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    680,    for energy concentrators with support for material heated.


CLS 126/699
TXT Circular lens:
    Apparatus under subclass 698 wherein the perimeter of the refractor forms a
    circle.


CLS 126/700
TXT Lens support:
    Apparatus under subclass 698 wherein a structure is provided to carry the
    weight of the refractor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    696,    for reflector support


CLS 126/701
TXT Controlling solar radiation:
    Apparatus under subclass 569 wherein said means to concentrate or direct
    solar radiation includes a device which regulates the amount of solar
    radiation received by the converting means.


CLS 126/702
TXT Interconnected slats (e.g., blinds, shutters):
    Apparatus under subclass 701 wherein the device includes a plurality of
    thin strips joined with one another by a linking mechanism.


CLS 126/703
TXT Manual:
    Apparatus under subclass 701 wherein the device is operated through
    application of force exerted by human operator.


CLS 126/704
TXT Collector housing:
    Apparatus under subclass 569 having an enclosure for the converting means.



CLS 126/705
TXT Cover:
    Apparatus under subclass 704 wherein significance is attributed to a
    structure that forms the uppermost part of the enclosure.


CLS 126/706
TXT Insulation:
    Apparatus under subclass 705 wherein the structure includes or is formed of
    a material that precludes escape of heat from the space within the
    enclosure.


CLS 126/707
TXT Plastic:
    Apparatus under subclass 705 wherein the structure is made of polymeric
    material.


CLS 126/708
TXT Glass:
    Apparatus under subclass 705 wherein the structure is made of glass.


CLS 126/709
TXT Insulation:
    Apparatus under subclass 704 wherein the enclosure includes or is formed of
    a material that precludes escape of heat from space within the enclosure.


CLS 126/710
TXT Particular material:
    Apparatus under subclass 704 wherein significance is attributed to a
    specific kind of material from which the enclosure is made.


CLS 126/711
TXT Plastic:
    Apparatus under subclass 710 wherein the enclosure is made of polymeric
    material.


CLS 126/712
TXT Glass:
    Apparatus under subclass 710 wherein the enclosure is made of glass.


CLS 126/713
TXT Metal:
    Apparatus under subclass 710 wherein the enclosure is made of metal.


CLS 126/714
TXT PROCESS OF HEATING BY USING SOLAR HEAT:
    Methods under the class definition of heating by use of solar heat.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 126/903
TXT SOLAR COLLECTOR CLEANING DEVICE:
    A collection of patents disclosing means by which a solar collector is kept
    free from dirt or foreign matter.


CLS 126/904
TXT ARRANGEMENTS FOR SEALING SOLAR COLLECTOR:
    A collection of patents disclosing a structure for preventing foreign
    matter from entering a housing of a solar collector.


CLS 126/905
TXT PREVENTING CONDENSING OF MOISTURE IN SOLAR COLLECTOR:
    A collection of patents disclosing means to keep dew from forming or means
    to remove dew from a structure of a solar collector.


CLS 126/906
TXT CONNECTING PLURAL SOLAR COLLECTORS AS A UNIT:
    A collection of patents disclosing means by which at least two solar
    collectors, each of which could function individually, are fluidly
    connected to operate together so as to increase the capacity.


CLS 126/907
TXT ABSORBER COATING:
    A collection of patents disclosing coatings for use on a collector surface
    to convert solar radiation into heat.


CLS 126/908
TXT Particular chemical:
    A collection of patents under subclass 907 wherein a specific chemical or
    chemical composition is named as forming a part of the coating.


CLS 126/909
TXT LINEAR CONCENTRATING LENS:
    A collection of patents disclosing a refractor which receives solar
    radiation and causes the solar radiation to converge or diverge as the
    solar radiation travels to the converting means, and the refractor has a
    length much greater than its width, and the length extends along an axis
    perpendicular to the axis along which the solar radiation travels.


CLS 126/910
TXT HEAT STORAGE LIQUID:

    A collection of patents disclosing a liquid which remains in a compartment
    and is heated by the fluent medium during periods when solar radiations are
    received and which, in turn, liberates its heat at other periods of time.



CLS 127/
TTL SUGAR, STARCH, AND  CARBOHYDRATES

CLS 127/
TXT This class is designed to include apparatus and processes peculiar to the
    manufacture of carbohydrates and the products of such processes when not
    more specifically provided for elsewhere.

    Inventions peculiar to the extraction, purification, and crystallization of
    sugars and the extraction, purification, and treatment of starch, as such,
    are found here, as well as the manufacture of sugars by hydrolysis of
    carbohydrates.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 162, Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses
    1+ for processes of liberating cellulosic fibers from natural sources which
    processes involve some chemical action.

    (2)     Note.  Processes generally for the hydrolysis of carbohydrates,
    including their conversion to sugar by other than biochemical hydrolysis,
    where the process either stops with such conversion or is followed by the
    steps of purification, concentration, or crystallization of the sugar or
    sugar solution thereby produced, are found in this class.  Processes of
    hydrolysis of carbohydrates which include the action of diastase or other
    biochemical steps are for the most part in Class 435, Chemistry:  Molecular
    Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 93, and 98-105, and are included here
    only when such hydrolysis is followed by steps of concentration,
    purification, or treatment (such as crystallization) to make a sugar or
    syrup.  Hydrolysis of carbohydrates to sugar by any method when followed by
    alcoholic fermentation or when directed specially to preparation for
    alcoholic fermentation is in Class 435.  The chemical manufacture or
    synthesis of sugar or carbohydrates by any other process than that of
    hydrolysis is not included in this class.  Molecular rearrangement of one
    carbohydrate to form any other carbohydrate is excluded.  For such
    processes search Class 260, Chemistry of Carbon Compounds.

    935,    Genetic Engineering:  Recombinant DNA Technology, Hybrid or Fused
    Cell Technology, and Related Manipulations of Nucleic Acids, which provides
    a search collection for processes of altering the genetic structure of
    micro-organisms; genes and methods of modifying genes and their expression;
    vectors and methods of modifying vectors; methods of introducing DNA into a
    cell; micro-organisms, per se, which have had their genetic sequence
    altered by recombinant DNA techniques or by cell fusion or by uptake of
    DNA; testing; separation techniques; apparatus; and methods of use of
    vectors or of the genetically engineered microorganims; methods of gene
    therapy or genetic modification of living organisms.

    (3)     Note.  Process of making sugar foods, per se, or the sugars
    combined with a preservative, including hydrolysis of starch to sugar, are
    placed in this class.  Foods which contain sugars combined with nonsugars
    (other than a preservative) and processes of making them are in Class 426,
    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products.



    935,    Genetic Engineering:  Recombinant DNA Technology, Hybrid or Fused
    Cell Technology, and Related Manipulations of Nucleic Acids, which provides
    a search collection for processes of altering the genetic structure of
    micro-organisms; genes and methods of modifying genes and their expression;
    vectors and methods of modifying vectors; methods of introducing DNA into a
    cell; micro-organisms, per se, which have had their genetic sequence
    altered by recombinant DNA techniques or by cell fusion or by uptake of
    DNA; testing; separation techniques; apparatus; and methods of use of
    vectors or of the genetically engineered microorganims; methods of gene
    therapy or genetic modification of living organisms.

    (4)     Note.  Mere processes of making, separating, or purifying sugars,
    starches, celluloses, or other carbohydrates, by operations that include
    fermentations, and compositions and apparatus that are specialized for use
    therein, and processes of making such compositions for such use, are
    classified in Class 435, Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes and non-coating apparatus for
    growing therein-defined single-crystal of all types of materials, including
    sugar, starch, or carbohydrates.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclass for heat exchange apparatus,
    per se.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting, Solids, appropriate
    subclasses, for separating constitutents of a mixture by liquid suspension,
    sifting, and stratifying.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses for
    filtration or gravitational separation apparatus, especially subclasses
    360.1+ for a centrifugal extractor.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses, for processes and apparatus for comminuting sugar, starch, and
    carbohydrate bearing material.  See section 10 of the main class definition
    of Class 241, for a statement of the line.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, for apparatus not provided for elsewhere, for
    carrying out a chemical or physical reaction or for performing an analysis
    involving a chemical or physical reaction.

    424     and 514, Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions,
    particularly Class 424, subclasses 418, 461+, 479+, 488, 493+, and 499,
    Class 514 subclasses 777+ and 970 for a composition of that class
    containing a sugar, starch or carbohydrate.

    (5)     Note.  For electrical or wave energy methods for the preparation of
    sugars, starches, and carbohydrates involving chemical reactions other than
    those which result merely from the thermal effects of the electrical or
    wave energy, see Class 205, Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used
    Therein, and Methods of Preparing the Compositions, especially subclass 697
    for electrolytic treatment of sugar and Class 204, Chemistry: Electrical
    and Wave Energy, especially subclasses 450+ for electrophoretic and
    electro-osmotic processes (e.g.,  separation of sugars, starches, and
    carbohydrates, etc.).


CLS 127/1
TXT Apparatus particluarly designed for the treatment of carbohydrates with
    chemical reagents to effect hydrolysis of sugar.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 93 and
    98-105, for apparatus for hydrolyzing carbohydrates by diastatic mashings
    or other fermentations.


CLS 127/2
TXT Miscellaneous apparatus for treating sacchariferous material falling within
    the class definition, but not within any of the subclasses indented
    hereunder.


CLS 127/3
TXT Apparatus peculiarly designed for the separation of sugar from solid
    material by lixiviation, leaching, or diffusion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 104+ for presses, not elsewhere provided for,
    having drain means for expressed liquids.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 261+ for leaching apparatus not
    peculiar to the extraction of sugar.


CLS 127/4
TXT Having means for disintegrating the sacchariferous material.


CLS 127/5
TXT Means is provided for positively moving the solid material with respect to
    the container for the leaching liquid.


CLS 127/6
TXT The apparatus through which the solid material progresses comprises a
    plurality of containers connected in series for the leaching liquid.


CLS 127/7
TXT The apparatus through which the sacchariferous solid material progresses is
    tubular.


CLS 127/8
TXT The apparatus comprises a system or plurality of cells adapted to receive
    the material to be leached and connected for circulation of the liquid from
    cell to cell.  No means is provided for moving the solid material with
    respect to the containers for the leaching liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23      and 68, for apparatus and processes for steeping grain.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 261 for leaching apparatus not
    peculiar to the extraction of sugar.


CLS 127/9
TXT Means particularly designed for the treatment of sugar-bearing solutions
    for purification or concentration or for separation of the sugar in solid
    form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, for concentrating apparatus of general
    application.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for heat exchange apparatus
    of general utility.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 360.1+ for a filter
    of the centrifugal type.


CLS 127/10
TXT Apparatus peculiarly adapted for the separation of impurities from sugar
    solutions by differential diffusion comprising a permeable membrane or
    partition forming a common wall to two chambers.


CLS 127/11
TXT Apparatus peculiarly designed for the precipitation or separation of solid
    impurities from sugar solutions.


CLS 127/12
TXT Apparatus in which the precipitation or separation of impurities from sugar
    solutions is caused or furthered by the introduction of gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for gas
    and liquid contact of general application.


CLS 127/13
TXT Vessels particularly designed for permitting or promoting the separation or
    precipitation of solid impurities from sugar solutions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for starch-settling tanks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 155+ for
    separating tanks.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 294+ for a decanter
    and filter combination, subclasses 322+ for plural distinct decanters, and
    subclasses 513+ for a gravitational separator.


CLS 127/14
TXT Vessels especially adapted for mixing sacchariferous solutions with other
    liquids or with solids (as chemicals).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 109 for a heat exchange vessel of general
    application with a stirring device.

    366,    Agitating, for mixing devices of general utility.


CLS 127/15
TXT Apparatus peculiarly adapted for controlling or assisting the formation of
    crystals from a solution of sugar.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     58-62.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes and non-coating apparatus for
    growing therein-defined single-crystal of all types of materials, including
    sugar, starch, or carbohydrates.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 245.1+ for non-coating crystallizer
    apparatus having means for only a physical reaction not provided for
    elsewhere and subclasses 129+ for non-coating crystallizer apparatus
    providing means for a chemical reaction not provided for elsewhere.


CLS 127/16
TXT Evaporating apparatus peculiarly designed to effect or control the
    evaporation to crystallization of sugar solutions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, appropriate subclasses, for
    concentrating apparatus generally.


CLS 127/17
TXT Apparatus peculiarly designed for the treatment of sugar crystals.


CLS 127/18
TXT Apparatus comprising a mold provided with means to effect the removal of
    adhering liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for vessels peculiarly designed to permit or promote
    crystallization of sugar.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 113 for mold with foraminous liner, and 141
    for mold having auxiliary port.


CLS 127/19
TXT The molds are mounted on a centrifugal apparatus and provided with outlets
    to permit the discharge by centrifugal force of the purging liquor or of
    the liquor adhering to the crystals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 360.1+ for
    centrifugal filters or strainers.

    494,    Imperforate Bowl:  Centrifugal Separators, appropriate subclasses,
    for apparatus for breaking up a mixture of fluids or fluent substances into
    two or more components by centrifuging within a generally solid-walled,
    receptacle-like member.


CLS 127/20
TXT Apparatus peculiarly designed to free sugar crystals of impurities by
    draining or washing without destroying the crystals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 104+ for presses, not elsewhere provided for,
    having drain means for expressed liquids.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 348+ for apparatus to
    separate liquid and solid by filtration or draining.


CLS 127/21
TXT Apparatus comprising a mixing device and peculiarly designed to dry or size
    the sugar grains after they are formed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate
    subclasses, for the drying process or apparatus subcombination.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses for comminuting apparatus.


CLS 127/22
TXT Apparatus peculiarly adapted to liquefying crystalline sugars whether by
    heating or dissolving.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 310+ for
    dissolvers and mixers for discharging the solution or mixture through a
    terminal nozzle element.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 256+ and 261+ for leaching,
    dissolving, and extracting apparatus.


CLS 127/23
TXT Apparatus peculiarly designed for the separation or purification of starch
    or the treatment of pure starch.


CLS 127/24
TXT Apparatus peculiarly designed for the separation of starch from
    starch-bearing raw material or for the treatment and purification of
    starch-containing substances.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses, for apparatus for separating and purifying grain.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses for grain comminutors.


CLS 127/25
TXT Apparatus designed particularly for the bolting or washing of
    starch-bearing material to separate impurities, as the hulls and chaff of
    the grain, from the starch or starch liquor.


CLS 127/26
TXT Apparatus comprising an inclined plane or a run adapted to receive the
    starch deposited thereon from the starch liquor as it flows there-over.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting, Solids, subclass 458, and
    indented subclasses, for stationary troughs and tables.


CLS 127/27
TXT Vessels particularly designed for permitting or promoting the separation by
    gravity of starch from liquid or solid impurities.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for vessels adapted to separate solid impurities from sugar
    solutions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 294+ for a decanter
    and filter combination, subclasses 322+ for plural distinct decanters, and
    subclasses 513+ for a gravitational separator.


CLS 127/28
TXT Apparatus peculiarly designed to cook or cook and prepare starch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for hydrolyzing apparatus.


CLS 127/29
TXT Sugars, starches, dextrines, and miscellaneous carbohydrates, not provided
    for in the subclasses indented hereunder, together with processes
    peculiarly directed to their production.

    (1)     Note.  Processes when claimed or disclosed as having a more general
    character than the production of a special product are cross-referenced
    into the process subclasses below.

    (2)     Note.  For electrical or wave energy methods for the preparation of
    sugars, starches, and carbohydrates involving chemical reactions other than
    those which result merely from the thermal effects of the electrical or
    wave energy, see Class 205, Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used
    Therein, and Methods of Preparing the Compositions, especially subclass 697
    for electrolytic treatment of sugar and Class 204, Chemistry: Electrical
    and Wave Energy, especially subclasses 450+ for electrophoretic and
    electro-osmotic processes (e.g.,  separation of sugars, starches, and
    carbohydrates, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     31, 32, and 33, see also subclass 71 for processes of treating
    starch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclasses 5, 31.24, 31.26, 31.68, 31.94 617, 674, 687, 726,
    729+, 779+, 804+, 123.12, 124.51, 124.61, 124.81, 125.1+, 135.1+, and
    162.1+, for carbohydrate containing coating or plastic compositions.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 70+ especially 103, and 213+ for edible products containing
    sugars, carbohydrates, admixed with other substances.

    536,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 1.11+ and indented subclasses for
    carbohydrate derivatives which are not carbohydrates.

    (4)     Note.  For electrical or Wave Energy methods, for the preparation
    of sugar, starches and carbohydrates, involving chemical reactions other
    than those which result merely from the thermal effects of the electrical
    or wave energy, see Class 204, Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy,
    particularly subclasses 138 and 180.


CLS 127/30
TXT Pure sugar products and processes peculiar to their manufacture.  Includes
    mixtures of pure sugars.


CLS 127/31
TXT Milk sugar and processes peculiar to its manufacture.


CLS 127/32
TXT Starches which have been chemically modified or incipiently hydrolyzed
    either by the action of added reagents or by cooking or special heat
    treatments, but which still give a blue or violet reaction with iodine, and
    processes of making them.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     and indented subclasses, for hydrolysis of starch where it is
    carried to a point where the blue or violet reaction with iodine is no
    longer obtained.


CLS 127/33
TXT Starches which have been chemically modified or hydrolyzed by the action of
    added reagents, but which give a blue or violet reacton with iodine and
    processes of making them.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses 145.1+,
    162.51, 162.81, and 206.1+, for starch containing coating or plastic
    compositions.


CLS 127/34
TXT Processes peculiar to the extraction, purification, and treatment of
    carbohydrates.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 1+ for the chemical
    extraction or purification of cellulose fiber.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for synthetic manufacture of
    carbohydrates and for molecular rearrangement of one carbohydrate to form
    another.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 277+ for
    purification or separation of cellulose and subclass 276 for purifying or
    separating dextrine by processes that include fermentations.


CLS 127/36
TXT Designed to include processes broadly for the hydrolysis of carbohydrates
    by nonbiochemical methods where the process either stops with such
    hydrolysis or is combined with steps of purification concentration, or
    crystallization of the sugar or sugar solution thereby produced.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for apparatus for hydrolysis, and subclasses 32 and 33, for partial
    hydrolysis directed to making modified starch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 93 for
    diastatic hydrolysis of carbohydrates, and subclasses 98-105 for other
    fermentative hydrolysis of carbohydrates.


CLS 127/37
TXT Processes directed toward the manufacture of sugar products from cellulose
    or cellulose-containing substances by hydrolysis of the cellulose.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 38 and 41.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 1+ for the chemical
    extraction or purification of cellulose fiber.


CLS 127/38
TXT Processes directed toward the manufacture of conversion products from
    starch or starch-bearing substances by hydrolysis of the starch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32      and 33.


CLS 127/39
TXT The starch is separated from the other constituents of the amylaceous
    material before hydrolysis.  The resulting sugar may be purified.

    (1)     Note.  Actual separation of the starch is effected, not merely
    preliminary treatments, as mashing or disrupting cells.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses.


CLS 127/40
TXT The amylaceous material is treated for hydrolysis without purification or
    separation of the starch, and the resulting sacchariferous product is
    purified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38      and 39, and subclass 42 and indented subclasses for sugar
    purification.


CLS 127/41
TXT Processes directed toward the manufacture of invert sugar by the inversion
    or hydrolysis of sucrose.


CLS 127/42
TXT Processes peculiar to the treatment of sacchariferous material and to the
    extraction, purification, and crystallization of sugar.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 276 for
    purifying or separating sugars by processes that include fermentations.


CLS 127/43
TXT Processes peculiar to the separation or lixiviation of sugar from solid
    material, as plants.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 35+ for methods of pressing, not elsewhere
    classified, and particularly subclass 37 for such methods involving the
    separation of expressed liquid from the material compacted.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 255+ for leaching apparatus.


CLS 127/44
TXT A chemical reagent is present during the separation or lixiviation.


CLS 127/45
TXT The solid material under treatment and the leaching or lixiviating liquid
    are moved in opposite directions.


CLS 127/46.1
TXT Treatment of sacchariferous solutions:
    Processes under subclass 42 for treating sugar solutions for purification
    or crystallization.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for the hydrolysis of starch to sugar and purifying sugar solutions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, especially subclasses 450+
    for electrophoretic and electro-osmotic processes (e.g., separation of
    sugars, starches, and carbohydrates, etc.).

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, especially subclass 697 for electrolytic
    treatment of sugar.


CLS 127/46.2
TXT Involving ion manipulation, e.g., ion exchange, etc.:

    Processes under subclass 46.1 involving use of ion exchange material or
    other ion manipulation material to treat the solution.


CLS 127/46.3
TXT For ion exclusion:

    Processes under subclass 46.2 wherein the material functions to hold back
    the sugars and passes ionic species.


CLS 127/47
TXT The sucrose is precipitated from the solution in chemical combination,
    e.g., saccharate.


CLS 127/48
TXT Processes peculiar to the precipitation of impurities from solutions
    containing sugars.  Precipitation may be effected by heat or by added
    reagents provided a rearrangement of molecules is effected.


CLS 127/49
TXT The precipitation of the impurities is effected by the addition of an
    absorbent for impurities, the absorbent being impregnated with the
    precipitating reagent.


CLS 127/50
TXT The impurities are precipitated by the addition of a reagent to a solution
    previously treated with an alkali or with a reagent having an alkaline
    reaction.


CLS 127/51
TXT The precipitation of impurities is effected by the addition of a
    precipitating reagent to a solution previously treated with an acid or with
    a reagent having an acid reaction.


CLS 127/52
TXT The precipitation of impurities involves the addition of a reagent in
    gaseous form.


CLS 127/53
TXT Processes directed to the separation of impurities from sugar solutions by
    mechanical processes.


CLS 127/54
TXT The separation of impurities from the sugar solution is effected by
    differential diffusion through a permeable membrane or partition.

    (1)     Note.  When the membrane is the cellular plant structure.  Search
    this class, subclass 43, and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 518+ for
    electrophoretic or electro-osmotic barrier separation (e.g.,
    electrodialysis of sugars, starches, or carbohydrates, etc.).

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, appropriate subclasses for electrolytic
    treatment involving the use of a membrane, especially subclass 697 for
    electrolytic treatment of sugar.


CLS 127/55
TXT Filtering or sorption:
    Processes under subclass 53 for separating impurities from solutions by
    filtration or selective sorption, or both, which are peculiar to sugar.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 518+ for
    electrophoretic or electro-osmotic barrier separation (e.g.,
    electrodialysis of sugars, starches, or carbohydrates, etc.).

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, appropriate subclasses for electrolytic
    treatment involving the use of a membrane, especially subclass 697 for
    electrolytic treatment of sugar.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 660+ for a process of
    purification by ion exchange or sorption, subclasses 702+ for a
    purification process including precipitation, and subclasses 767+ for a
    purification process including separating, especially subclasses 781+ and
    787+ for centrifugal extraction.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, for a composition comprising a catalyst or sorbent, per se.


CLS 127/56
TXT Processes peculiar to the separation of impurities from sugar solutions of
    greater or less specific gravity than the impurities by centrifugal force.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 781+ and 787+ for a
    purification process comprising centrifugal extraction.

    494,    Imperforate Bowl:  Centrifugal Separators, subclass 37 for a
    process for breaking up a mixture of fluids or fluent substances into two
    or more components by centrifuging within a generally solid-walled,
    receptacle like member.


CLS 127/57
TXT Processes peculiar to the separation of impurities from sugar solutions of
    greater or less specific gravity than the impurities by the action of
    gravity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     27 and 69.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses indented under subclass 155.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 800+ for a
    purification process involving gravitational force.


CLS 127/58
TXT Processes peculiar to the treatment of sugar solutions to effect
    crystallization or solidification of the contained sugars.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, subclass 295 and indented
    subclasses for crystallization of inorganic chemicals.

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes and non-coating apparatus for
    growing therein-defined single-crystal of all types of materials, including
    sugar, starch, or carbohydrates.

    532     through 570 Series of Classes, Organic Compounds, appropriate
    subclasses for the crystallization  of a specific organic compound.


CLS 127/59
TXT Processes directed to the crystallization of sugar in molds.


CLS 127/60
TXT Sugar crystallizing processes in which the crystallization is promoted or
    controlled by the addition to the solution under treatment of crystals from
    another solution.


CLS 127/61
TXT Processes in which the crystallization of the sugar is effected or promoted
    by the concentration of the sugar in solution by evaporation.


CLS 127/62
TXT Processes directed to the systematic treatment of sugar solutions to effect
    crystallization by evaporation in which a product separated at an
    intermediate stage of the process is returned into the process at either an
    earlier or a later stage.


CLS 127/63
TXT Processes peculiar to the treatment of crystallized sugar.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15      and 16.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, subclasses 295+ for processes of
    crystallizing in general.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses indented
    under subclass 233 for sifting apparatus.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate process
    subclasses, for processes of comminuting sugar.


CLS 127/64
TXT Processes peculiar to the freeing of sugar crystals of impurities or
    adhering liquid or to the bleaching of sugar crystals.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 17+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 781+ and 787+ for a
    purification process comprising centrifugal extraction, and subclasses
    360.1+ for centrifugal extractors.


CLS 127/65
TXT Processes peculiar to the treatment of amylaceous material and to the
    extraction, purification, and preparation of starch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 275 for
    purifying or separating starch by processes that include fermentations.


CLS 127/66
TXT Processes peculiar to the extraction of starch from plant roots or tubers.


CLS 127/67
TXT Processes peculiar to the treatment of material having starch as one of its
    constituents and designed to effect or to expedite the extraction of the
    starch.  The material treated may be the plant itself or grain or may be an
    intermediate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 6+ for
    processes involving comminution of grain and the like.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    appropriate subclasses, especially 288, and 482+, for processes of removing
    husks from grain.


CLS 127/68
TXT Processes involving the cooking or softening of grain or amylaceous plant
    material by liquid or steam treatment.  The liquid may or may not contain
    an added chemical.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    appropriate subclasses, especially 506+ for processes involving the
    treatment of an edible material with an aqueous material.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 435 for
    processes that include steeping seeds or grain.


CLS 127/69
TXT Processes peculiar to the treatment of liquids containing starch or starchy
    matter for the recovery or purification of the starch.


CLS 127/70
TXT The treatment of the starch containing liquid involves the addition of a
    chemical or involves some chemical action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     and indented subclasses, for purification and treatment of sugar
    solutions.


CLS 127/71
TXT Processes peculiar to the treatment of starch which fall short of chemical
    modification.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32      and 33, for modified starches and processes of making, including
    cooking, and 36, and indented subclasses for treatments of starch for
    conversion to nonstarch products.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids.


CLS 128/
TTL SURGERY

CLS 128/
TXT This class includes methods of treatment of the living body and apparatus
    used in the inspection and treatment of diseases, wounds, and other
    abnormal conditions of the bodies of humans and lower animals.

    This class includes methods and means for manufacturing surgical appliances
    which are not classifiable in other classes.

    NOTES

    (1)     Note.  This class appropriate subclasses, provides for a method of
    blood transfusion or artificial inseminations.

    (2)     Note.  This class includes methods and apparatus wherein specific
    structure, adapted to be placed on or in the living body, is claimed, and
    further includes diagnostic or therapeutic methods and apparatus wherein no
    such specific structure is claimed, when the only disclosed utility is for
    diagnosis or treatment of a living body. In addition, subcombinations of
    surgical treatment or testing apparatus are classified in the class when
    not specifically provided for elsewhere.

    (3)     Note.  Class 604, Surgery, is an integral part of Class 128,
    Surgery, and all notes and class lines of Class 128 apply to Class 604.
    Class 604 follows the hierarchy of Class 128, Class 604 merely replaces the
    Medicators and Receptors portion of Class 128. For the purpose of
    convenience, Class 604 is referred to as a separate Class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, for a bathing device
    generically disclosed and claimed which does not provide medical treatment
    to the body for a named ailment or injury thereof.  Generic terms such as
    "treatment'', "therapy'', "massage'', "hydrotherapy'', "hydromassage'',
    etc., are to be interpreted broadly for placement in Class 4 lacking a
    disclosed body treatment for a named medical condition or physical injury.
    Exceptions to this rule comprise generically disclosed and claimed
    hydrotherapy of the genitalia or any internal body tissues, or a device for
    applying a force which imparts a specific motion to the body or portion
    thereof, or a device which is disclosed as providing treatment resulting in
    an internal action on the body which shall be classified in Class 128 or
    one of its 600 series trailer classes as provided for therein.

    5,      Beds, subclasses 630+ for a table designed to serve as a support
    for an animal during surgical operations, especially  for a device attached
    to or combined with a table comprising a mere body support for surgical
    operations.

    27,     Undertaking, for means for embalming or otherwise caring for the
    dead body.

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, appropriate subclasses for foot
    coverings and foot devices for general use.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 863+ for samplers; and
    particularly subclasses 864.01+ for a pipette (e.g., syringe, hollow
    needle, etc.) which does not contact the living body.

    81,     Tools, subclass 9.22 for a tattooing device including means to
    reciprocate (e.g., vibrate) a perforating tool and to discharge coloring
    material into the perforations.

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 1+ for a
    horizontally supported surface which is tiltable.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, for means for the treatment and general care of
    livestock, subclass 14.21 for milking catheters disclosed for that purpose
    and subclasses 712+ for body harness of general application.  See the
    search notes thereunder.

    132,    Toilet, appropriate subclasses for methods and devices used by
    persons in making their toilet, particularly subclasses 212+ for devices
    for treating, dressing, or manipulating the hair, and subclasses 73+ for
    devices for manicuring the nails and for removing corns and other
    callosities by abrasion.

    168,    Farriery, for means for the care of the feet of animals.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, for a spray head,
    including the massaging type generically disclosed and claimed which does
    not provide medical treatment for a named ailment or injury.  Generic terms
    such as "treatment'', "therapy", "massage", "hydrotherapy'',
    "hydromassage'', etc. are to be interpreted broadly for placement in class
    239 lacking a disclosed body treatment for a named medical condition or
    physical injury.  Exceptions to this rule comprise generically disclosed
    and claimed hydrotherapy of the genitalia or any internal body tissues, or
    a device for applying a force which imparts a specific motion to the body
    or portion thereof which shall be classified in Class 128 or one of its 600
    series trailer classes as provided for therein.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 414+ for such devices used as sensors (e.g., chemical sensors,
    pressure sensors, etc.), that are small enough to be inserted in a body to
    be used for measuring and testing.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, appropriate subclasses for a chair whose
    component parts may be manipulated to place an occupant in a desired
    position to facilitate examination or treatment, but which have no
    examination or treatment means combined therewith.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 209 for cabinets specially
    designed for laboratory, dental, barber or medical use.

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclasses
    1+ for optical eye examining and vision testing instruments; and subclasses
    41+ for spectacles and eyeglasses.  See also section III of the Class 351
    Class Definitions and (1) Note under subclasses 200+ of this class for
    statements as to subject matter classified in this class and Class 128.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclass 28 for a multiple
    (massaging) tip, multiple discharge implement adapted to be applied to the
    human body.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclass for a medicinal composition or process of use of a compound or
    composition and particularly subclasses 467 for a composition of that class
    comprising a structural feature and see the definition of that class for
    the line between Class 128 and Class 424.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet, and subclasses 364+ for a structurally defined (e.g., crimped,
    particular cross-section) or coated rod, strand, fiber or filament.

    433,    Dentistry, appropriate subclasses for subject matter restricted to
    (sole disclosure) specific dental steps or means.Apparatus wherein a
    specific nondental surgical use is disclosed and are classified as
    originals in Class 128.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 1 and 2
    for a method of maintaining the viability of an animal tissue or cell,
    e.g., bone, blood or sperm.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing for processes of
    chemical testing, processes of an vitro antigen-antibody testing and
    compositions therefore.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, especially Class 523,
    subclasses 105+ for nonmedicated compositions containing a synthetic resin
    or natural rubber having utility specifically intended to be for contact
    with living animal tissue; and subclass 111 for a composition which is to
    be used in a protective bandage for an open wound or as a tape adhesive,
    binder, or impregnate for a body absorbent device; or to processes of
    preparing said compositions.

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefore, for prosthetic devices.

    935,    Genetic Engineering:  Recombinant DNA Technology, Hybrid or Fused
    Cell Technology, and Related Manipulations of Nucleic Acids, which provides
    a search collection for processes of altering the genetic structure of
    microorganisms; genes and methods of modifying genes and their expression;
    vectors and methods of modifying vectors; methods of introducing DNA into a
    cell; microorganisms, per se, which have had their genetic sequence altered
    by recombinant DNA techniques or by cell fusion or by uptake of DNA;
    testing; separation techniques; apparatus; and methods of use of vectors or
    of the genetically engineered microorganisms; methods of gene therapy or
    genetic modification of living organisms.


CLS 128/95.1
TXT TRUSS:

    Surgery under the class definition in which an appliance presses on or
    treats a portion(s) of the body for supporting and protecting.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also includes covers for truss belts, frames
    and pads.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    450,    Foundation Garments, subclasses 7+ for breast bandages or
    brassieres combined with abdominal supporter or bandages wherein the latter
    has no claimed pressure pads or claimed means for holding or retaining such
    a pad and subclasses 94+ for abdominal supporters or bandages having no
    claimed pressure pad or claimed means for holding or retaining such a pad.

    602,    Surgery:  Splint, Brace, or Bandage, subclasses 32+ for skeletal
    traction applicator.


CLS 128/96.1
TXT Abdominal:

    Subject matter under subclass 95.1 having a truss pad which covers or
    supports a large section of that portion of the body lying between the
    thorax and the pelvis.


CLS 128/97.1
TXT Head:

    Subject matter under subclass 95.1 for exerting pressure on the uppermost
    or foremost portion of the body.


CLS 128/98.1
TXT Perineal:

    Subject matter under subclass 95.1 for exerting pressure on that portion of
    the body having a pelvic region containing urogenital and rectal passages
    which are bounded in part by a pubic arch, in the back by a cocyx, and
    laterally by a portion of a hip bone.


CLS 128/99.1
TXT Support:

    Subject matter under subclass 95.1 in which belt or frame means functions
    to both maintain a truss pad against a particular portion of the body and
    aids in applying pressure to said truss pad.

    (1)     Note.  Back support members for trusses are cross-referenced in
    this subclass because of their support nature.


CLS 128/100.1
TXT Belt wholly flexible:

    Subject matter under subclass 99.1 wherein the pad maintaining and
    pressuring means is a long, narrow strip of pliable material capable of
    being bent to the shape of the body.


CLS 128/101.1
TXT Elastic in part:

    Subject matter under subclass 100.1 wherein a portion of the pliable
    material is resilient and capable of returning to its original shape or
    form after deformation.


CLS 128/102.1
TXT Belt and frame:

    Subject matter under subclass 99.1 wherein a long, narrow strip of pliable
    material capable of being bent to the shape of the body has structure mad
    of metal or equivalent stiff material which holds the pad.


CLS 128/103.1
TXT Frame hinged:

    Subject matter under subclass 99.1 in which the pad holder structure is of
    several parts which parts (which parts) are joined in such a way as to
    permit relative rotation or pivoting with respect to one another.


CLS 128/104.1
TXT Frame wholly metallic:

    Subject matter under subclass 99.1 wherein the pad support is metallic.

    (1)     Note.  Parents disclosing metallic pad supports covered with,
    lacquer, shellac, rubber, plastic, etc. would be classifiable here.


CLS 128/105.1
TXT Frame with auxiliary straps:

    Subject matter under subclass 99.1 wherein the support means is provided
    with flexible straps which aid in positioning the support upon the body.


CLS 128/106.1
TXT Pad carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 99.1 wherein significance is attributed to
    the belt or frame support means is separable from the belt or frame support.


CLS 128/107.1
TXT Detachable:

    Subject matter under subclass 106.1 wherein the pad support means is
    separable from the belt or frame support.


CLS 128/108.1
TXT Pivoted:

    Subject matter under subclass 106.1 wherein the pad support means is
    capable of rotating or swinging motion about a fixed point on the frame or
    belt on which it is supported.


CLS 128/109.1
TXT Resilient:

    Subject matter under subclass 108.1 wherein the pivotable pad support is
    flexibly or yieldably mounted on the belt or frame support means.


CLS 128/110.1
TXT Clamped:

    Subject matter under subclass 108.1 wherein the pivoted member is secured
    to the belt or frame support means by a gripping means.


CLS 128/111.1
TXT Resilient:

    Subject matter under subclass 106.1 wherein the pad support means is
    flexibly or yieldably mounted on the belt or frame support means.


CLS 128/112.1
TXT Pad:

    Subject matter under subclass 95.1 wherein significance is attributed to
    the pressing or pressure applying element.


CLS 128/113.1
TXT Composition:

    Subject matter under subclass 112.1 wherein significance is attributed to
    the component materials or make up of the pressing or pressure applying
    element.


CLS 128/114.1
TXT Medicating:

    Subject matter under subclass 112.1 wherein the pressing or pressure
    applying element is provided or pressure applying element is provided with
    a portion or portions which contain or carry a medicament.


CLS 128/115.1
TXT Rigid:

    Subject matter under subclass 112.1 wherein the pressing or pressure
    applying element is inflexible.


CLS 128/116.1
TXT Adjustable center:

    Subject matter under subclass 112.1 wherein the pressing or pressure
    element has a middle or core portion which is capable of being reoriented
    in respect to the body of the pressing or pressure element.


CLS 128/117.1
TXT Resilient:

    Subject matter under subclass 112.1 wherein the pressing or pressure
    element is, at least in part, flexible or yieldable.


CLS 128/118.1
TXT Inflated:

    Subject matter under subclass 117.1 wherein the flexible or yieldable
    portion of the pressing or pressure element is capable of being expanded or
    distended by air pressure.


CLS 128/119.1
TXT Spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 117.1 wherein the flexible or yieldable
    pressing or pressure element is means which is capable or regaining its
    original shape after being compressed or extended beyond its elastic limit.


CLS 128/120.1
TXT Stuffed:

    Subject matter under subclass 117.1 wherein the flexible or yieldable
    portions of the pressing or pressure element is packed with a material.


CLS 128/121.1
TXT Connections:

    Subject matter under subclass 112.1 wherein significant is attributed to an
    element which secures the pressing or pressure element or pressure pad upon
    a pad carrier or other pad support means.


CLS 128/122.1
TXT Ball and socket:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.1 wherein the securing means is a
    spherical element which is designed to fit into an opening or cavity which
    permits rotation of said element relative to said opening or cavity.


CLS 128/123.1
TXT Hinged:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.1 wherein the securing element is a
    jointed or flexible means which permits turning or pivoting relative to a
    stationary member.


CLS 128/124.1
TXT Clamped:

    Subject matter under subclass 121. wherein the securing element is a
    gripping means.


CLS 128/125.1
TXT Resilient:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.1 wherein the securing element is a
    flexible or yieldable means.


CLS 128/126.1
TXT Spring only:

    Subject matter under subclass 125.1 wherein the flexible or yieldable means
    is capable or resuming its original shape or position upon being compressed
    or extended beyond its elastic limit.


CLS 128/200.11
TXT MEANS FOR PASSING RESPIRATORY GAS THROUGH BODY OF LIQUID BEFORE INHALATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition for releasing into a body of
    liquid a breathable gas that is thereafter inhaled by a living thing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200.14+, for atomizers or sprayers.

    200.24, for respiration devices, per se.

    200.29, for means for releasing exhaled gas in finely divided form from a
    diving mask or helmet to reduce the possibility of bubbles of the gas being
    detected.

    203.12, for other means for mixing an agent with breathed gas.


CLS 128/200.12
TXT Pocket type:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.11 comprising a self-contained means
    intended to be carried in a pocket of a garment.


CLS 128/200.13
TXT Plural orifice means passing gas into liquid:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.11 including plural orifice means passing
    the gas into the body of liquid.


CLS 128/200.14
TXT LIQUID MEDICAMENT ATOMIZER OR SPRAYER:

    Subject matter under the class definition which reduces a liquid medicament
    (e.g., water, disinfectant, decomgestant, etc.) to minute particles, or
    which produces a diffused spray of such liquid (e.g., shower head-type
    diffusers, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Atomizers or sprayers, per se, are classified in other
    classes (e.g., Class 239, Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing) when
    no means particularly adapting them for use on or in a living body is
    claimed, or when no structure adapted to be connected to a respiratory
    device for a living thing is claimed and something other than a medicament
    is atomized or sprayed.

    (2)     Note.  Atomizers for dispensing adhesive to body tissue, either
    internally or externally, are classified in Class 604 when the atomized
    adhesive is not inhaled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200.11, for devices passing gas through a body of liquid before inhalation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 131+ for combustion charges
    atomized devices.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, for other than
    medicating atomizers and sprayers.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 78+ for atomizer type
    contact devices.

    604,    Surgery, subclass 94 for dual nozzles inserted into nasal passages;
    subclasses 212+ for collapsible material reservoir structure such as
    squeeze bulbs; and subclasses 264+ for nozzles inserted in the body.


CLS 128/200.15
TXT With tongue depressor:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.14 including means for depressing the
    user's tongue so that it will not occlude the gas passage to the lungs.


CLS 128/200.16
TXT Ultrasonic:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.14 including a means for atomizing or
    spraying a liquid by producing a vibratory frequency therein higher than
    that detectable by the human ear.


CLS 128/200.17
TXT Rotating:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.14 including a rotating means (e.g., a
    spinning disk from which liquid is discharged by centrifugal force, etc.)
    for atomizing or spraying.


CLS 128/200.18
TXT Spray impinged against baffle in or adjacent flow conduit:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.14 including a baffle in a flow conduit
    or adjacent the outlet of a flow conduit, upon which baffle the atomized or
    sprayed fluid impinges.

    (1)     Note.  The baffle in this subclass must be an additional element in
    or adjacent the flow conduit, not merely a wall portion of the conduit.


CLS 128/200.19
TXT Means for selectively dispensing different fluids:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.14 including means for selectively
    dispensing different fluids, e.g., air or water.


CLS 128/200.21
TXT Gas stream aspirating medicament from reservoir:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.14 including means for sucking a
    medicament from a reservoir.


CLS 128/200.22
TXT Gas flow induced by expansion chamber device (e.g., piston/cylinder ram,
    squeeze bulb, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 200.21 including an expansion chamber means
    for inducing gas flow.


CLS 128/200.23
TXT Pre-pressurized container holding medicament:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.14 including a pre-pressurized container
    holding the medicament.

    (1)     Note.  Devices found in this subclass are usually of the "aerosol"
    type wherein the container holding the medicament is pressurized, during
    manufacture, with a gas which acts to expel the medicament during use.


CLS 128/200.24
TXT RESPIRATORY METHOD OR DEVICE:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to the supply of a
    breathable gas to, or exhaust of such gas from, a living body.

    (1)     Note.  Respirators claiming a breath flow meter are classified here
    where the breath flow indication is merely for monitoring the proper
    operation of the respirator.  Breath flow measurement devices for
    diagnostic purposes are found in Class 600, subclasses 538+.

    (2)     Note.  Respiratory gas includes gas taken into the body through the
    skin.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200.11+, for respiration devices claiming means  for passing a breathable
    gas through a   body of liquid.

    200.14+, for respiration devices claiming atomizer or sprayer means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, for processes of gas separation, per se.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, for apparatus for gas separation, per
    se.

    137,    Fluid Handling, appropriate subclasses for valves and flow
    regulating means not combined with body accommodating means.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, for a valve, per se.

    452,    Butchering, subclass 66 for gas chambers used in killing animals
    for food.


CLS 128/200.25
TXT Artificial gill, or means for separating entrained air from liquid stream:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.24 including an artificial gill or a
    means for separating entrained air from a liquid stream.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 155+ for degasifying means
    for a liquid, per se.


CLS 128/200.26
TXT Means placed in body opening to facilitate insertion of breathing tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.24 including means placed in a natural or
    previously formed opening in the body to facilitate the insertion of a
    breathing tube therein.

    (1)     Note.  Classifiable here are respiration devices including an outer
    tube which may be inserted prior to insertion of a coaxial inner tube,
    e.g., devices including coaxial tubes where the inner tube may be removed
    (as for cleaning, etc.), since the outer tube is inherently a means to
    facilitate insertion of a breathing tube even if not so disclosed.  Also
    classifiable here are devices insertable into a breathing tube to
    facilitate insertion of the latter within the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207.14+, for respiratory gas supply means entering the mouth or a
    tracheotomy incision.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 264+ for nozzles, trocars, and catheters
    inserted into the body for therapeutic purposes.


CLS 128/200.27
TXT Gas stream directed away from face mask to penetrate contaminated
    atmosphere:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.24 wherein a gas stream is directed away
    from a face mask to penetrate a contaminated atmosphere, usually for the
    purpose of enabling the user of the face mask to see clearly.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 205.25 for the definition of a face mask.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 88+ for protective air currents used in a
    ventilating system.


CLS 128/200.28
TXT Body or head supported means, other than face mask or hood, with gas stream
    to screen face or penetrate contaminated atmosphere:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.24 including means, other than a face
    mask or hood, with a gas stream to screen the user's face or penetrate a
    contaminated atmosphere.

    (1)     Note.  A "hood" as used herein is a cover for the scalp and face.
    See subclass 205.25 for the definition of a face mask.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 88+ for protective air currents used in a
    ventilating system.


CLS 128/200.29
TXT Underwater exhalation dispersing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.24 for dispersing exhaled gas from a
    diver's mask, helmet, or other underwater apparatus into ambient water in
    finely divided form.

    (1)     Note.  Devices in this subclass are usually for preventing
    detection of the diver or for decreasing the noise caused by exhalation
    into water to improve communication between divers.


CLS 128/201.11
TXT Draw-type snorkel:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.24 for use under water including means
    extending to the surface of the water to allow the user to draw air from
    the atmosphere with no means to supply respiratory gas under positive
    pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201.27, for diving or swimming devices including a head cover.

    204.18+, for diving or swimming devices supplying respiratory gas under
    positive pressure.


CLS 128/201.12
TXT Corrective or magnifying lens combined with face mask having eyepiece or
    transparent viewing portion:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.24 including a face mask with an eyepiece
    or transparent viewing portion and an additional corrective or magnifying
    lens.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 205.25 for the definition of a face mask.


CLS 128/201.13
TXT Inhaled gas heated or humidified by exhaled gas:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.24 wherein the inhaled gas is heated or
    humidified by exhaled gas.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, inter alia, devices including merely
    a filter means functioning as a heat exchanger or humidifier by trapping
    warm water vapor present in the exhaled gas and subsequently transferring
    the heat and water vapor to gas inhaled through the filter. Similar filter
    means are placed elsewhere under subclass 200.24 where no heat exchange or
    humidifying feature is disclosed (see especially subclasses 205.27+).


CLS 128/201.14
TXT Viewing strip slidable relative to mask:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.24 including a viewing strip slidable
    relative to a face mask so that a portion of the strip that has become
    damaged or soiled during use of the mask can be replaced by a clear portion
    of the strip.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 205.25 for the definition of a face mask.


CLS 128/201.15
TXT Means for keeping viewing member (e.g., eyeglass, transparent face shield,
    etc.) clear:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.24 including means for keeping a viewing
    member clear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206.22, for means for handling liquid (e.g., saliva, breath condensation,
    etc.) accumulated in a mask.


CLS 128/201.16
TXT Wiper:

    Subject matter under subclass 201.15 including a wiper for keeping the
    viewing member clear.


CLS 128/201.17
TXT Mask with porous lower filtering portion and impervious upper portion
    shielding user's eyeglasses from exhaled breath:

    Subject matter under subclass 201.15 including a mask with a porous lower
    filtering portion and an impervious upper portion shielding the user's
    eyeglasses from the exhaled breath.

    (1)     Note.  Devices in this subclass are usually a "surgical-type" mask
    formed entirely of cloth, etc., with an impervious upper portion.


CLS 128/201.18
TXT Means for preventing nasal inhalation:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.24 including means for preventing nasal
    inhalation


CLS 128/201.19
TXT Means for transmitting, or facilitating, voice communication from face
    mask, hood, or helmet:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.24 including means for transmitting, or
    facilitating, voice communication from a face mask, hood, or helmet.

    (1)     Note.  A patent is placed here when merely a means adapted to hold
    a voice transmitting means is claimed. See subclass 205.25 for the
    definition of a face mask, and (1) Note under subclass 200.28 for the
    definition of a hood.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200.29, for a device for dispersing exhaled gas from a diver's mask or
    helmet into ambient water in finely divided form.


CLS 128/201.21
TXT Using liquified oxygen:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.24 using liquified oxygen, usually as a
    source of gas for breathing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, for devices for manufacturing and handling liquified
    gas.


CLS 128/201.22
TXT Including body or head supported means covering user's scalp:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.24 including a means which covers the
    user's scalp and which is supported by the head or other portion of the
    user's body.

    (1)     Note.  Straps extending over or around the head to attach a face
    mask are not considered a scalp cover for this subclass.


CLS 128/201.23
TXT And nose and mouth also covered:

    Subject matter under subclass 201.22 wherein a portion of the scalp
    covering means, or a face mask associated therewith, overlies the nose and
    mouth.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 205.25 for the definition of a face mask.


CLS 128/201.24
TXT Face mask, visor, or  like face-covering means hinged to scalp covering
    means:

    Subject matter under subclass 201.23 wherein a face mask, visor, or like
    face-covering means is hinged to a means covering the user's scalp.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 205.25 for the definition of a face mask.


CLS 128/201.25
TXT Means for removing substance from respiratory gas:

    Subject matter under subclass 201.23 including means for removing a
    substance from the respiratory gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204.16, 205.12, and 205.27+, for other means for removing a substance from
    respiratory gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation: Apparatus, for apparatus for gas separation, per se.


CLS 128/201.26
TXT Including means inserted in mouth:

    Subject matter under subclass 201.23 including means held in the user's
    mouth.


CLS 128/201.27
TXT Diving or swimming apparatus:

    Subject matter under subclass 201.23 for use in diving or swimming.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200.11, for draw-type snorkeling devices.

    204.18+, for diving or swimming devices supplying respiratory gas under
    positive pressure where no head cover, or associated face mask, overlying
    the nose and mouth is claimed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 2.18+ for guards and protectors, diving type,
    for diving apparel where no respiration means is claimed.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 418 for
    diver decompression computers.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 186+ for diving suits
    including Class 405 structure and where no respiration means is claimed.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclasses 55+ for swimming aids
    or buoyant devices where no respiration means is claimed.


CLS 128/201.28
TXT Having valve, or valve control, structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 201.23 including a valve, or valve control,
    structure.

    (1)     Note.  A patent is placed as an original in this subclass only if
    it claims structural details of a valve, (i.e., a mere nominal recitation
    of a valve is insufficient to place a patent here.


CLS 128/201.29
TXT Garment associated with head cover:

    Subject matter under subclass 201.23 including an item of clothing (e.g., a
    diving suit, etc.) associated with the head cover.


CLS 128/202.11
TXT Flight suit:

    Subject matter under subclass 201.29 wherein the garment is a flight suit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 2.11+ for an astronaut's body covering and
    subclass 2.14 for an aviator's body covering.


CLS 128/202.12
TXT Hypobaric body chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.24 including a chamber for subjecting the
    body to less than atmospheric pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205.26, for atmosphere enclosures, such as oxygen tents and chambers, for
    pressurizing the whole body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 70, 238, 255, and 340 for living enclosures
    having automatically controlled pressure conditions without the addition of
    medicaments or other surgical treatment.


CLS 128/202.13
TXT Combined with or convertible to a nonrespiratory device, or having a
    nonrespiratory function other than hyperbaric treatment:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.24 combined with or convertible to a
    nonrespiratory device, or having a function not involved with breathing or
    with hyperbaric treatment (i.e., application of pressure to the body, as in
    diver decompression, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205.26, for an enclosure wherein gas such as air is placed under pressure
    to apply force against a person's body, the gas also simultaneously being
    used for respiration by the person in the enclosure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 23+ for gas introduced or removed from the body
    for therapeutic purposes other than breathing or inhaling.


CLS 128/202.14
TXT Having buoyancy chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 202.13 including a buoyancy chamber.


CLS 128/202.15
TXT Having means for facilitating ingestion of food or drink:

    Subject matter under 202.13 including a means for facilitating intake of
    food or drink by a user of the apparatus.


CLS 128/202.16
TXT Means effecting nonrespiratory medical treatment:

    Subject matter under subclass 202.13 including means for medical treatment
    which does not involve respiration.


CLS 128/202.17
TXT Device usable either as inhaler or means for rubbing medicament on body
    surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 202.16 including a means usable either for
    inhaling breathed gas (usually mixed with a medicament) or for rubbing
    medicament on a body surface.


CLS 128/202.18
TXT Pillow or other support exclusively for head:

    Subject matter under subclass 202.13 including a pillow or other support
    exclusively for the head, e.g., a pillow provided with means for releasing
    a treating agent into air breathed by a person using the pillow.


CLS 128/202.19
TXT Garment:

    Subject matter under subclass 202.13 including an item of clothing.


CLS 128/202.21
TXT Smoking device simulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.24 including structure simulating a
    smoking device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203.12+, for specific means for mixing treating agent with breather gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 171+ for smoking devices.


CLS 128/202.22
TXT Means for indicating improper condition of apparatus:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.24 for indicating an improper operating
    condition of the apparatus.


CLS 128/202.23
TXT Means for preventing electric shock or arcing:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.24 including means for preventing
    electric shock or arcing.


CLS 128/202.24
TXT Means for protecting user from pressure wave or flame resulting from gas
    ignition:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.24 for protecting a patient from a
    pressure wave or a flame resulting from gas ignition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclass 192 for similar safety
    devices.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 189.01 for dispensing means having a flame
    arrester.


CLS 128/202.25
TXT Ozone or ion generation:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.24 including means for producing ozone or
    ions for inclusion in breathed gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207.27, for devices, other than respiration devices, for applying ozone to
    the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 186.07+ for devices producing ozone
    by electrostatic field or electrical discharge.


CLS 128/202.26
TXT Gas produced by electrolysis or chemical reaction:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.24 including means for producing the
    respiratory gas by electrolysis or by chemical reaction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 120+ for devices for chemically
    purifying and generating respiratory gas.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 579+ for oxygen
    generating chemicals.


CLS 128/202.27
TXT Means for quickly connecting or disconnecting apparatus components:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.24 including means for quickly joining or
    releasing apparatus components.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, for quick release-type pipe joints or
    couplings.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 190+ for electrical connectors
    with fluid passageways.


CLS 128/202.28
TXT Means using rescuer's breath for supplying respiratory gas to another
    person:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 200.24 comprising a means using one
    person's breath to effect flow of breathable gas into another person's
    lungs.

    (1)     Note.  Under this subclass, a rescuer's breath may enter the lungs
    of another person in need of resuscitation, or may be used to force
    atmospheric air or other breathable gas into such person.


CLS 128/202.29
TXT Movable wall separating breath of rescuer and victim:

    Subject matter under subclass 202.28 including a movable wall preventing
    the breath of one person from reaching the lungs of other person, generally
    for the purpose of preventing cross-contamination.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    909,    for means for preventing patient cross-contamination.


CLS 128/203.11
TXT Valved:

    Subject matter under subclass 202.28 including valve means.


CLS 128/203.12
TXT Means for mixing treating agent with respiratory gas:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.24 including means for mixing a treating
    agent with gas breathed by a living thing.

    (1)     Note.  A mere chamber, such as the interior of a face mask, with
    separate means supplying a treating agent and a respiratory gas thereto, is
    considered a means for mixing under this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Under this subclass, substances other than oxygen or
    atmospheric air (e.g., helium, carbon-dioxide, nitrogen, anesthetic, water
    vapor, etc.) are considered treating agents, with the exception that CO2 or
    nitrogen exhaled and then rebreathed with additional O2 or air are not
    considered treating agents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200.14+, for atomizers or sprayers.


CLS 128/203.13
TXT Means for supplying anesthetic under patient's control:

    Subject matter under subclass 203.12 including means for supplying
    anesthetic under a patient's control.

    (1)     Note.  A patent is placed in this subclass only when disclosed as
    having a means (e.g., a valve or regulator, etc.) operated by the patient's
    hand or other body member to control his supply of anesthetic gas. Devices
    merely responsive to a patient's breathing, for example, are found
    elsewhere.


CLS 128/203.14
TXT Control means responsive to condition other than user's airway pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 203.12 including a control means responsive
    to a condition other than the patient's airway pressure.


CLS 128/203.15
TXT Particulate treating agent carried by respiratory gas:

    Subject matter under subclass 203.12 wherein a particulate treating agent
    is carried by the respiratory gas.


CLS 128/203.16
TXT Means for mixing respiratory gas with water vapor and another treating
    agent:

    Subject matter under subclass 203.12 including a means for mixing the
    respiratory gas with water vapor and another treating agent.


CLS 128/203.17
TXT Electrically heated means producing water vapor:

    Subject matter under subclass 203.16 including an electrically heated means
    producing water vapor.


CLS 128/203.18
TXT Means for mixing treating agent with oral exhalation and directing mixture
    into nasal passage:

    Subject matter under subclass 203.12 including means for mixing treating
    agent with gas exhaled from the mouth and directing the mixture into a
    nasal passage.


CLS 128/203.19
TXT Means for controlling gravity flow of treating agent from holder:

    Subject matter under subclass 203.12 including a means for controlling
    gravity flow of a treating agent from a holder.


CLS 128/203.21
TXT Means broken or pierced to supply treating agent:

    Subject matter under subclass 203.12 including a means that is broken or
    pierced to supply a treating agent, e.g., a glass container easily broken
    to release an anesthetic therefrom.


CLS 128/203.22
TXT Means for supplying, or permitting inhalation of, separate streams of
    treating agent/respiratory gas mixture through nasal passages:

    Subject matter under subclass 203.12 including means for supplying, or
    permitting inhalation of, separate streams of treating agent/respiratory
    gas mixture through air passage of the nose.

    (1)     Note.  Methods and apparatus in this subclass usually include a
    pair of nozzles or treating agent holders which are respectively inserted
    into the nasal passages.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207.18, for devices including a respiratory gas supply means entering a
    nasal passage with no means for mixing a treating agent with the
    respiratory gas.


CLS 128/203.23
TXT Pocket-type draw tube having discharge aperture for air/treating agent
    mixture at end thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 203.12 comprising a tube having a discharge
    aperture for a mixture of air and treating agent at one end thereof, the
    tube being of such size that it can be conveniently carried in a pocket of
    a garment and air being sucked through the tube by the user.


CLS 128/203.24
TXT With gas flow control means other than pivotal or removable closure:

    Subject matter under subclass 203.23 including a gas flow control means
    other than a pivotal or removable closure.


CLS 128/203.25
TXT Means for varying treating agent/respiratory gas ratio:

    Subject matter under subclass 203.12 including a means for varying the
    amount of treating agent added to respiratory gas.


CLS 128/203.26
TXT Means for heating treating agent, respiratory gas, or mixture thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 203.12 including a means for heating the
    treating agent, the respiratory gas, or a mixture thereof.


CLS 128/203.27
TXT Electric:

    Subject matter under subclass 203.26 including an electric heating means.


CLS 128/203.28
TXT Including expandable bag, bellows, or squeeze bulb:

    Subject matter under subclass 203.12 including an expandable bag, bellows,
    or a resilient squeeze bulb.


CLS 128/203.29
TXT Including face mask covering nose and mouth:

    Subject matter under subclass 203.12 including a face mask covering the
    nose and mouth.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 205.25 for the definition of a face mask.


CLS 128/204.11
TXT Treating agent holder solely supported by head:

    Subject matter under subclass 203.12 including a treating agent holder
    solely supported by the user's head.


CLS 128/204.12
TXT Holder solely supported by nose:

    Subject matter under subclass 204.11 wherein the holder is supported by the
    user's nose.


CLS 128/204.13
TXT Treating agent evaporated from extended surface absorbent (e.g., sponge,
    fibrous wick, screen, etc):

    Subject matter under subclass 203.12 wherein the treating agent is
    evaporated from an absorbent having a large surface area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202.21, for smoking device simulators with extended surface absorbents.


CLS 128/204.14
TXT Respiratory gas passed over surface of liquid treating agent in reservoir:

    Subject matter under subclass 203.12 wherein the respiratory gas is passed
    over the surface of liquid treating agent in a reservoir.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200.11, for means for passing the respiratory gas through a body of liquid
    before inhalation.


CLS 128/204.15
TXT Means for cooling respiratory gas or respiration device:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.24 including a means for cooling
    respiration gas or the device supplying such gas.


CLS 128/204.16
TXT Substance removed from respiratory gas by cooling:

    Subject matter under subclass 204.15 wherein a substance is removed from
    the respiratory gas by cooling the latter.

    (1)     Note.  The term "respiratory gas" includes inhaled or exhaled gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205.12  and 205.27+, for other means for removing a substance from
    respiratory gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, for apparatus for gas separation with
    cooling means.

    165,    Heat Exchange, for apparatus where only indirect heat exchange is
    involved.


CLS 128/204.17
TXT Means for heating respiratory gas or respiration device:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.24 including a means for heating
    respiratory gas or the device supplying such gas.


CLS 128/204.18
TXT Means for supplying respiratory gas under positive pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.24 including a means for supplying a
    breathed gas to a living thing under pressure greater than ambient pressure.

    (1)     Note.  A patent is placed in this subclass, or in an indent
    thereunder, even when the only claimed gas supply means is an expandable
    bag, bellows, or the like, on the ground that such a means holds gas under
    greater than ambient pressure when it is expanded against ambient pressure,
    as for example, when gas is exhaled by a person into the means and expands
    it.


CLS 128/204.19
TXT Permanent magnet included in gas flow control means:

    Subject matter under subclass 204.18 wherein a gas flow control means
    includes a permanent magnet.


CLS 128/204.21
TXT Electric control means:

    Subject matter under subclass 204.18 including an electric means for
    controlling operation of a respiration device.


CLS 128/204.22
TXT Means for sensing partial pressure, or amount, of component in gas mixture:

    Subject matter under subclass 204.21 including a means for sensing the
    partial pressure, or amount, of a component in a gas mixture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 23+ for other gas analysis
    devices.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 83+ for gas analysis apparatus, per
    se.


CLS 128/204.23
TXT Means for sensing condition of user's body:

    Subject matter under subclass 204.21 including a means for sensing a
    condition of the body of the living thing receiving the respiratory gas.


CLS 128/204.24
TXT Fluidic control device utilizing coanda effect or jet impingement to alter
    fluid flow:

    Subject matter under subclass 204.18 including a fluidic control device
    utilizing the "Coanda" effect or jet impingement to alter fluid flow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 803+ for fluidic devices, per se.


CLS 128/204.25
TXT Gas stream passed through jet nozzle or venturi passage:

    Subject matter under subclass 204.18 wherein a gas stream is passed through
    a jet nozzle or venturi passage.


CLS 128/204.26
TXT Gas supply means responsive to breathing:

    Subject matter under subclass 204.18 wherein the gas supply means is
    responsive to the user's breathing.


CLS 128/204.27
TXT Snap action toggle included in control mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 204.26 including a snap-action toggle in the
    gas supply control mechanism.


CLS 128/204.28
TXT Bag or bellows included in control mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 204.26 including a bag or bellows in the gas
    supply control mechanism.


CLS 128/204.29
TXT Control means responsive to variation in ambient pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 204.18 including control means responsive to
    a variation in the ambient pressure.


CLS 128/205.11
TXT Means for varying air/oxygen ratio:

    Subject matter under subclass 204.18 including a means for varying the
    amount of oxygen added to air breathed by the user.


CLS 128/205.12
TXT Means for removing substance from respiratory gas:

    Subject matter under subclass 204.18 including means for removing a
    substance from gas breathed by a living thing.

    (1)     Note.  The term "respiratory gas" includes inhaled or exhaled gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204.16, for devices for removing a substance from respiratory gas by
    cooling.

    205.27+, for other means for removing a substance from respiratory gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, for apparatus for gas separation, per
    se.


CLS 128/205.13
TXT Respiratory gas supplied from expandable bag, bellows, or squeeze bulb:

    Subject matter under subclass 204.18 wherein respiratory gas is supplied
    from an expandable bag, bellows, or squeeze bulb.

    (1)     Note.  Included here as a bellows is a piston movable within a
    cylinder and a flexible tube one end of which is attached to the piston and
    the other end of which is attached to the cylinder, thus providing a seal
    between the upper and lower portions of the cylinder.


CLS 128/205.14
TXT Means for adjusting gas volume delivered to user from bag, bellows, or bulb
    during inflation-deflation cycle:

    Subject matter under subclass 205.13 including means for adjusting the
    volume of respiratory gas supplied to the user from the bag, bellows, or
    bulb during the inflation-deflation cycle of the latter.


CLS 128/205.15
TXT Held in pressurizable housing:

    Subject matter under subclass 205.13 wherein the bag, bellows, or squeeze
    bulb is held in a pressurizable housing.


CLS 128/205.16
TXT Biased to contracted or expanded position by mechanical means (e.g.,
    weight, spring, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 205.13 where in the bag, bellows, or squeeze
    bulb is urged to a contracted or expanded position by a mechanical means.


CLS 128/205.17
TXT Rebreathing bag or bellows:

    Subject matter under subclass 205.13 wherein an expandable bag or bellows
    enables the user to rebreathe a portion of the exhaled gas.

    (1)     Note.  A rebreathing bag, even when claimed alone, is placed under
    subclass 205.17 on the basis that, in use, the fully expanded rebreathing
    bag holds exhaled gases under greater than ambient pressure. Therefor the
    bag is, at least initially, a means for supplying breathed gas under
    positive pressure.


CLS 128/205.18
TXT Gas supplied by piston pump:

    Subject matter under subclass 204.18 wherein the respiratory gas is
    supplied by a pump comprising a piston movable within a cylinder.


CLS 128/205.19
TXT Suction means for assisting exhalation:

    Subject matter under subclass 204.18 including a suction means for
    assisting exhalation.


CLS 128/205.21
TXT Means broken or pierced to supply gas:

    Subject matter under subclass 204.18 including a means which is broken or
    pierced to supply the breathed gas.


CLS 128/205.22
TXT Gas container supported on body:

    Subject matter under subclass 204.18 wherein a container for respiratory
    gas is supported on the user's body.


CLS 128/205.23
TXT Indicator structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 204.18 including structure for indicating
    something about a condition of the respiratory gas or the respiration
    device supplying such gas.

    (1)     Note.  A patent is placed as an original in this subclass only if
    it claims structural details of an indicator, (i.e., a mere nominal
    recitation of an indicator is insufficient to place a patent here).


CLS 128/205.24
TXT Valve, or valve control, structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 204.18 including valve, or valve control,
    structure.

    (1)     Note.  A patent is placed as an original in this subclass only if
    it claims structural details of a valve, (i.e., a mere nominal recitation
    of a valve is insufficient to place patent here).


CLS 128/205.25
TXT Face mask covering a breathing passage:

    Subject matter under subclass 204.18 including a wall-like structure
    covering a breathing passage plus a portion of the face.


CLS 128/205.26
TXT Atmosphere enclosure (e.g., oxygen tent, hyperbaric chamber for
    pressurizing whole body, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 204.18 including means enclosing a portion
    (e.g., the head) or all of the user's body and providing a breathable
    atmosphere.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are devices intended merely for
    pressurization of the whole body, with no disclosure of a specific
    breathing apparatus.  Since all such devices which enclose the entire body
    for an extended period of time must supply a breathable atmosphere, they
    are properly placed in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202.12, for body chambers applying less than atmospheric pressure to the
    body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclasses 87+, for portable
    shelters of general utility.


CLS 128/205.27
TXT Means for removing substance from respiratory gas:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.24 including means for removing a
    material from respiratory gas.

    (1)     Note.  The term "respiratory gas" in this subclass includes both
    inhaled and exhaled gas. Therefor, devices removing a substance from either
    inhaled or exhaled gas are classified here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204.16, for devices for removing a substance from respiratory gas by
    cooling.

    205.12, for other devices for removing a substance from respiratory gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, for apparatus for gas separation, per
    se.


CLS 128/205.28
TXT Carbon dioxide:

    Subject matter under subclass 205.27 for removing carbon dioxide from the
    respiratory gas.


CLS 128/205.29
TXT Particulate filtering:

    Subject matter under subclass 205.27 for filtering solid particles from
    respiratory gas.


CLS 128/206.11
TXT Including means inserted in nasal passage:

    Subject matter under subclass 205.29 including a means inserted into an air
    passage of the nose.


CLS 128/206.12
TXT Face mask covering a breathing passage:

    Subject matter under subclass 205.29 including a wall-like structure
    covering a breathing passage plus a portion of the face.


CLS 128/206.13
TXT Mask attached to ear:

    Subject matter under subclass 206.12 wherein the mask is attached to an ear
    of the user.


CLS 128/206.14
TXT Mask adhesively attached to face:

    Subject matter under subclass 206.12 wherein the mask is secured to the
    user's face by means of adhesive.


CLS 128/206.15
TXT With gas flow control valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 206.12 including a gas flow control valve.


CLS 128/206.16
TXT With frame, shaping means, reinforcement, or filter formed of wire:

    Subject matter under subclass 206.12 including wire used as a filter (e.g.,
    wire mesh through which air passes before it is inhaled, etc.) or as a
    frame, shaping means, or reinforcement for the face mask.


CLS 128/206.17
TXT With separate filter encircling element, or housing, securing filter on
    mask:

    Subject matter under subclass 206.12 including a separate filter encircling
    element, or housing, securing the filter on the mask.


CLS 128/206.18
TXT Covering nose only:

    Subject matter under subclass 206.12 wherein the mask overlies the nose
    only.


CLS 128/206.19
TXT Body of mask, other than viewing means, formed of porous filter material
    (e.g., surgical mask formed entirely of cloth, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 206.12 wherein the body of the mask, other
    than a viewing means, is formed of foraminous filter material.


CLS 128/206.21
TXT Face mask covering a breathing passage:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.24 including a wall-like structure
    covering a breathing passage plus a portion of the face.


CLS 128/206.22
TXT Means for handling liquid (e.g., saliva, breath condensation, etc.)
    accumulated in mask:

    Subject matter under subclass 206.21 including a means for handling liquid
    accumulated in the mask, e.g., a receptacle formed in the lower portion of
    the mask to receive liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201.15+, for means for clearing a viewing member of breath condensation.


CLS 128/206.23
TXT Mask/eyepiece sealing structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 206.21 including structure for sealing the
    contact area between a mask and an eyepiece carried thereby.

    (1)     Note.  A patent is placed as an original in this subclass only if
    it claims structural details of the mask/eyepiece sealing means, (i.e., a
    mere nominal recitation of a mask/eyepiece sealing means is insufficient to
    place a patent here).


CLS 128/206.24
TXT Mask/face sealing structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 206.21 including structure for sealing the
    contact area between a mask and the user's face.

    (1)     Note.  A patent is placed as an original in this subclass only if
    it claims structural details of the mask/face sealing means, (i.e., a mere
    nominal recitation of a mask/face sealing means is insufficient to place a
    patent here).


CLS 128/206.25
TXT Adhesive:

    Subject matter under subclass 206.24 wherein the sealing structure includes
    a material that will cause the mask to stick to the user's face.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206.14, for a face mask adhesively attached to the user's face and
    associated with a means for removing a substance from the respiratory gas.


CLS 128/206.26
TXT Closed air-filled passage adjacent mask edge (e.g., tubular bead, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 206.24 wherein the sealing structure includes
    a closed air-filled passage adjacent the mask edge.


CLS 128/206.27
TXT Means holding mask readily accessible for use:

    Subject matter under subclass 206.21 including means holding the mask in a
    position where it can be easily reached by a person for use.


CLS 128/206.28
TXT Covering nose and mouth:

    Subject matter under subclass 206.21 wherein the mask overlies the nose and
    mouth.


CLS 128/206.29
TXT Including means inserted in mouth:

    Subject matter under subclass 206.28 including a means held in the user's
    mouth.


CLS 128/207.11
TXT Structure of means securing mask to head:

    Subject matter under subclass 206.28 including structure of means securing
    the mask to the head of the user.

    (1)     Note.  A patent is placed here as an original only if structural
    details of the securing means are claimed, (i.e., a mere nominal recitation
    of means securing the mask to the head is insufficient to place a patent
    here).


CLS 128/207.12
TXT Valve for controlling gas flow:

    Subject matter under subclass 206.28 including a valve for controlling gas
    flow.


CLS 128/207.13
TXT Covering nose only:

    Subject matter under subclass 206.21 wherein the mask overlies only the
    nose.


CLS 128/207.14
TXT Respiratory gas supply means enters mouth or tracheotomy incision:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.24 wherein the breathed gas supply means
    is placed in the mouth or a tracheotomy incision.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200.26, for means for inserting or guiding a breathing tube into the body.

    202.21, for smoking device simulators where respiratory gas enters the
    mouth.


CLS 128/207.15
TXT Breathing passage occluder:

    Subject matter under subclass 207.14 including means for closing the user's
    esophagus so that only the gas supply means communicates with the user's
    lungs.


CLS 128/207.16
TXT Valve for controlling gas flow:

    Subject matter under subclass 207.14 including a valve for controlling gas
    flow.


CLS 128/207.17
TXT Holding strap extending circumferentially of head or neck:

    Subject matter under subclass 207.14 wherein a holding strap extends
    circumferentially of the user's head or neck.


CLS 128/207.18
TXT Respiratory gas supply means enters nasal passage:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.24 wherein the respiratory gas supply
    means is placed in an air passage of the user's nose.


CLS 128/207.29
TXT Device for creating a tracheotomy incision:

    Subject matter under subclass 207.14 wherein the gas supply means either
    (a) forms the incision, or (b) has an incision forming device associated
    therewith to form the incision.


CLS 128/830
TXT FEMALE REPRODUCTORY TRACT SHIELDS, SUPPORTS, OR BIRTH CONTROL DEVICES
    (E.G., PESSARIES, CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES):

    Surgery under the class definition for internal use designed to support,
    occlude or guard the female reproductory organs (e.g., consisting of
    uterus, ovarys, fallopian tubes and vagina) including preventing conception
    or pregnancy from occurring, and also including a means for insertion
    thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Devices under the generic heading of mechanical birth
    control devices for females as well as  pessary appliances for preventing
    uterine prolapse are classified herein.


CLS 128/831
TXT Fallopian occluders:

    Subject matter under subclass 830 which functions to close or seal off the
    slender tubes which connect the uterus with the ovaries to prevent the
    passage of sperm therein to.

    (1)     Note.  These devices can include clamps, plugs, constrictive rings
    or shields.


CLS 128/832
TXT With contraceptive, spermicidal or antifertility agent:

    Subject matter under subclass 830 wherein the supporting, occluding or
    guarding means contain an active agent thereon which functions to change
    the environmental conditions within the female reproductory tract so as to
    inhibit or prevent conception.

    (1)     Note.  These agents may act to kill immobilize, block or otherwise
    prohibit sperms from fertilizing or reaching the egg.


CLS 128/833
TXT Intrauterine:

    Subject matter under subclass 832 wherein the contraceptive, spermicidal or
    antifertility agent is inserted within the uterus or cervix uteri.


CLS 128/834
TXT Pessaries:

    Subject matter under subclass 830 for internal vaginal use as a support for
    the uterus against prolapse.


CLS 128/835
TXT External supporters:

    Subject matter under subclass 834 wherein the uterus support means is held
    in place by a means external to the vagina.


CLS 128/836
TXT Inflatable:

    Subject matter under subclass 834 wherein the uterus support means is
    distended or expanded by the application of fluid pressure thereto in order
    to hold itself in place within the vagina.


CLS 128/837
TXT Diaphragms:

    Subject matter under subclass 834 comprising a thin flexible disk of
    natural or synthetic rubber or similar resilient material which is inserted
    into the vagina to cover the uterine opening or cervix.


CLS 128/838
TXT Inserters and removers:

    Subject matter under subclass 837 comprising means specifically adapted for
    placing the diaphragm within or extracting it from the vagina.


CLS 128/839
TXT Intrauterine:

    Subject matter under subclass 834 wherein the uterus support means is
    inserted within the cervix uteri or the uterus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    833,    for intrauterine spermicidal, contraceptive or antifertility agents.


CLS 128/840
TXT Inserters and removers:

    Subject matter under subclass 839 comprising means specifically adapted for
    placing a uterine support within or extracting it from the uterus.


CLS 128/841
TXT With cervical cap:

    Subject matter under subclass 839 wherein a cup shaped means is
    specifically shaped to fit against or over the cervix of the uterus.


CLS 128/842
TXT MALE REPRODUCTORY TRACT SHIELDS OR BIRTH CONTROL DEVICES (E.G.,
    PROPHYLACTICS, VAS DEFERENS VALVES, ETC.):

    Surgery under the class definition for internal or external use which is
    designed to safe-guard or occlude the male reproductory organs from
    sexually transmitted disease or for preventing the passage of sperm.

    (1)     Note.  Receptacle devices used to receive the male urethral
    discharge for collection purposes are classified in Class 604/347+.


CLS 128/843
TXT Vas occluders (implants, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 842 wherein an internal device is surgically
    implanted which blocks, either permanently or temporarily, the passage of
    male sperm from the reproductory organs.

    (1)     Note.  The devices in this subclass usually take the form of a
    plug, pinch clamp or a reversible valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    887,    for other body inserted or implanted occluders.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 30-32 for incontinent occluders.


CLS 128/844
TXT Condoms:

    Subject matter under subclass 842 wherein the external shield or device is
    a penile sheath usually made of thin, flexible, natural or synthetic rubber
    material for use during sexual intercourse to prevent disease and to
    receive male sperm.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    604,    Surgery, subclass 349 for male organ worn receptacles for urine
    collection.


CLS 128/845
TXT BODY REST, SUPPORTS OR POSITIONERS FOR THERAPEUTIC PURPOSES (E.G., SEXUAL,
    POSTURAL, HEAD, ETC.):

    Surgery under the class definition which includes a device for holding,
    situating or resting the body or a portion thereof, during therapeutic
    activity or treatment.

    (1)     Note.  These devices usually act to merely support, position or
    stabilize a user rather than restrain, protect or shield.

    (2)     Note.  These devices are not to be confused with the subject matter
    found in Class 264/322+ which relates basically to surgical tables for
    supporting a patient against the force of gravity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    846     and 869, for shields and restrainers for protecting and
    immobilizing patients which have a purpose analogous to the devices found
    in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 712+ for a controlling device which
    may support or position an animal for a therapeutic or other purpose,
    particularly subclasses 722+ for a device having a tiltable support for the
    animal.


CLS 128/846
TXT BODY PROTECTING OR RESTRAINING DEVICES FOR PATIENTS OR INFANTS (E.G.,
    SHIELDS, IMMOBILIZERS):

    Surgery under the class definition including means to be worn or placed
    over the body for safeguarding the form injury from objects external to the
    body or for restraining a medical patient or a body from self injury or
    from annoying or injuring others.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, a various subclasses for other body guards that are worn
    for protection during nonmedical usage.


CLS 128/847
TXT With fluid supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 846 wherein the restraining or protective
    means has means associated therewith to provide a fluid screen to ventilate
    or for fluid removal of contaminants.


CLS 128/848
TXT Antisnoring device:

    Subject matter under subclass 846 wherein the protector prevents mouth
    breathing or breathing through the mouth and nose which generates a noise
    caused by soft palate vibration while sleeping.


CLS 128/849
TXT Drapes:

    Subject matter under subclass 846 wherein the means placed over a patients
    body or a portion thereof, is a flexible covering or sheeting placed
    thereon during a surgical procedure to protect or isolate the particular
    area of the body being treated.

    (1)     Note.  The protective covering can be made of cloth or other
    flexible synthetic material, e.g., plastic, and can be reusable or
    disposable.


CLS 128/850
TXT Incision or cavity inserted:

    Subject matter under subclass 849 wherein the drape is specifically
    designed to be employed within a natural or surgically made body opening.


CLS 128/851
TXT With handle or applicator means:

    Subject matter under subclass 849 wherein the drape has a means to be held
    by the hand to grip, apply, place or facilitate spreading the drape on or
    over the desired area of the body to be protected thereby.


CLS 128/852
TXT With surgical implement retaining means:

    Subject matter under subclass 849 having means to hold or retain surgical
    instrument or articles on the drape and to prevent slippage of the
    instruments from the drape during treatment.


CLS 128/853
TXT Fenestrated:

    Subject matter under subclass 849 wherein the drape is provided with a
    window or opening to permit a line of sight into the surgical area.


CLS 128/854
TXT With cover (flap):

    Subject matter under subclass 853 wherein the window or opening is provided
    with a removable flap.


CLS 128/855
TXT Folded or stacked:

    Subject matter under subclass 849 wherein the drape is in a bent over or
    doubled up condition such that one part lies in contact with another part
    of the same drape or in an orderly pile arranged by layers prior to use in
    surgery.


CLS 128/856
TXT Tubular:

    Subject matter under subclass 849 wherein the drape is in a cylinder-like
    shape or sleeve-like configuration usually for fitting around appendages of
    the body.


CLS 128/857
TXT Head or face protectors (e.g., lips, ears, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 846 including shields or guards for
    protecting head and face areas of the body, including its organs of sight,
    speech and hearing from injury.


CLS 128/858
TXT Eye or nose protectors:

    Subject matter under subclass 857 wherein the protector is for use in and
    around the ocular or nasal portions of the head.


CLS 128/859
TXT Oral cavity protectors:

    Subject matter under subclass 857 for use in or affecting protection of the
    body's oral cavity.


CLS 128/860
TXT Tongue:

    Subject matter under subclass 859 designed for use in protecting the lingua
    in the oral cavity.


CLS 128/861
TXT Teeth protectors (e.g., mouthpieces):

    Subject matter under subclass 859 designed for use in protecting the dental
    and gum area of the oral cavity.


CLS 128/862
TXT Thermoplastic or thermosetting type:

    Subject matter under subclass 861 wherein the dental protector is
    constructed of plastic material which either deforms under body temperature
    to fit the individual's teeth or permanently hardens or solidifies when
    heated to the shape of an individual's particular mouth configurations.


CLS 128/863
TXT Breath or contaminated air deflectors:

    Subject matter under subclass 857 having means for preventing one person
    from breathing into anothers face, or from breathing in contaminated air
    from another source.


CLS 128/864
TXT Aural protector (e.g., ear):

    Subject matter under subclass 857 having means for protecting the organ of
    hearing particularly its entrance canal from entrance of foreign matters,
    injurious sounds or harmful pressure waves.


CLS 128/865
TXT Inflatable or expandable:

    Subject matter under subclass 864 wherein the ear protector means within
    the ear canal is distended or expanded by the application of fluid pressure
    to seal said canal or retain the protector within the canal.


CLS 128/866
TXT External ear or head mounting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 864 having an ear protector which is
    externally mounted on or over the ear usually by a means attached to the
    head.


CLS 128/867
TXT With noise or pressure attenuating means (e.g., dampening, filtering, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 864 including an ear protector having means
    to prevent injurious sound or a force of air waves from damaging the organ
    of hearing or means for normalizing pressure within said organ of hearing
    (e.g., ear cavity).

    (1)     Note.  The means here usually includes noise dampening devices and
    filters.


CLS 128/868
TXT Valve means (e.g., diaphragm):

    Subject matter under subclass 867 wherein the ear protecting means is a
    membraneous structure which prevents the entrance of noise into the ear
    canal.


CLS 128/869
TXT Restrainers and immobilizers (e.g., strait jackets, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 846 for preventing a medical patient or baby
    from being injured or annoying or injuring another.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter includes devices and techniques for
    immobilizing the patients or infants body, or portions thereof, as well as
    merely restraining or limiting movement thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    482,    Exercise Devices, particularly subclasses 93+ for a belt or harness
    accessory used when lifting a weight for exercise and subclass 106 if the
    weight being lifted is disclosed as a bar bell.


CLS 128/870
TXT Body type (e.g., backboards):

    Subject matter under subclass 869 for restraining or limiting the movement
    of all of or a greater part of the body, either by securing the body and
    limbs of the patient or baby to a bed or other support or by securing their
    arms to their body.

    (1)     Note.  Garments and sleeping bags having means to secure them to a
    fixed support, as a bed, and bed covers having means secured to the body
    and to the bed are included in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 712+ for body harness of general
    application.


CLS 128/871
TXT Antisupination:

    Subject matter under subclass 870 to prevent a person from lying on his or
    her back.


CLS 128/872
TXT Crib, blankets, sheets and covers:

    Subject matter under subclass 870 wherein the body restrainer is a thick or
    thin piece of fabric used upon a bed which is anchored to both the bed and
    patient to restrain said patient.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclass 336 for sheet secured to the bed but not the body.


CLS 128/873
TXT Garment type (e.g., sleeping bags):

    Subject matter under subclass 870 wherein the restraining means is a piece
    of clothing or a large zippered bag into which the patient is placed to
    anchor the patient to the bed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 69.5 for sleeping bags and baglike garments.

    5,      Beds, subclass 343 for sleeping bags having bed adjuncts.


CLS 128/874
TXT Vest or shirt type for upper torso:

    Subject matter under subclass 873 wherein the restrainer is a garment, with
    or without sleeves, for the upper portion of the body usually having an
    opening for placement on the body.


CLS 128/875
TXT Harness:

    Subject matter under subclass 874 wherein the restraining means for the
    upper body is a harness or vest constructed of belts.


CLS 128/876
TXT Belt or strap:

    Subject matter under subclass 870 wherein the body restraining means
    consists of an elongated strip of material with or without securing means
    or a band in the form of a closed loop or a girdle-like strip or strap.


CLS 128/877
TXT Intravenous limb restrainers/supports (e.g., armboards, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 869 wherein the restrainer is an appendage
    immobilizer, such as an armboard, to prevent injury to a patient during
    intravenous injections.


CLS 128/878
TXT Arm or hand:

    Subject matter under subclass 869 for use in restraining or limiting
    movement of a patients or infants arm or hand.


CLS 128/879
TXT Hand:

    Subject matter under subclass 878 for use in restraining, immobilizing or
    protecting the hand.


CLS 128/880
TXT Thumb/finger (e.g., antithumb sucking, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 879 for use in restraining a digit or digits
    of the hand.

    (1)     Note.  Also included herein are devices for preventing
    thumb-sucking.


CLS 128/881
TXT Elbow:

    Subject matter under subclass 878 for use in protecting or immobilizing a
    joint located between the upper arm and the forearm.


CLS 128/882
TXT Leg or foot:

    Subject matter under subclass 869 for use in restraining, immobilizing or
    protecting the leg or foot.


CLS 128/883
TXT Sexual restraints:

    Subject matter under subclass 869 for preventing nocturnal emissions,
    masturbation, copulation or other sexual activity or abuse.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, particularly subclass 838 for a sexual restraint
    for a male animal and subclass 854 for a female-carried sexual barrier for
    an animal.


CLS 128/884
TXT Intravaginal (e.g., antirape devices):

    Subject matter under subclass 883 for use within the vagina to prevent
    penile penetration thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are so called "antirape" devices which are
    placed within the vagina to inflict injury to a rapist.


CLS 128/885
TXT Incontinent  type:

    Subject matter under subclass 869 for external use to control urinary
    dysfunction and protecting against bladder malfunction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 29+ for body inserted or implanted devices for
    controlling incontinence.


CLS 128/886
TXT With detector or alarm:

    Subject matter under subclass 885 for controlling urinary restraint by
    means of a sensor which detects or sounds an alarm thereby warning the
    patients of the onset of bladder leakage


CLS 128/887
TXT Nonabsorbent body opening occluders, seals or supporters (e.g., surgical or
    natural orifice occluders):

    Subject matter; not elsewhere classifiable, under subclass 846 for use in
    closing, sealing or supporting body openings.

    (1)     Note.  Included are nonabsorbent devices such as plugs, expandable
    seals, valved orifice closures or caps, clamp type occluder devices or
    insertable support members for piles, etc.  These devices can serve to
    prevent leakage from the body, prevent infection tracking into the body, or
    support the internal walls of the body opening from prolapsing.

    (2)     Note.  The devices herein can be inserted into natural or
    surgically constructed body openings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    831,    834+, 842+, 864+, and 884, for other body inserted nonabsorbable
    occluders specifically designed for use in particular areas of the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclass 32 for stomach closures.

    604,    Surgery, subclass 900 for absorbent plugs, e.g., tampons, inserted
    into a body cavity.


CLS 128/888
TXT Wound shields (e.g., vaccination):

    Subject matter under subclass 846 for use in protecting and preventing
    injury to recently treated injured surface portions of the body, (e.g.,
    vaccinations, surgical wounds, boils, ulcers and sores).


CLS 128/889
TXT Chafing shields (e.g., decubitus pads, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 846 for use in preventing irritation and
    rubbing of portions of the body including the prevention of irritating
    wound contact by wound protective bandaging or dressing.


CLS 128/890
TXT Nipple:

    Subject matter under subclass 889 for use in preventing chafing or
    irritation of the teat portion of the female mammary gland.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    450,    Foundation Garments, subclasses 1+ for brassieres.

    604,    Surgery, subclass 347 for lacteal cups.


CLS 128/891
TXT Crotch or thigh:

    Subject matter under subclass 889 for use in preventing chafing or
    irritation to the region of an angle formed by junction of two leg
    extremities of the body or that portion of the body located between hip and
    knee.


CLS 128/892
TXT Joint or limb (e.g., foot, elbow, heel, knee, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 889 having means for preventing chafing or
    irritation to points of bone articulation or extremities.

    (1)     Note.  These body areas include the foot, elbow, heel, knee, arm,
    toe, etc.


CLS 128/893
TXT Foot/toe (e.g., corn, bunion, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 892 having means for preventing chafing or
    irritation to the foot or its digits.

    (1)     Note.  Commonly devices herein are referred to as corn or bunion
    pads.


CLS 128/894
TXT Padded or cushioned:

    Subject matter under subclass 893 wherein the means for preventing chafing
    is a thin cushion-like mass of soft material or a compressable filling
    contained in a soft material covering.


CLS 128/897
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition including surgical appliances,
    methods of making appliances and method of treatment not classifiable in
    any of the previous subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, for artificial body members in general.


CLS 128/898
TXT Methods:

    Subject matter under subclass 897 for miscellaneous processes not elsewhere
    classifiable.


CLS 128/899
TXT Devices placed entirely within body and means used therewith (e.g.,
    magnetic implant locator):

    Subject matter under subclass 897 including devices not elsewhere
    classifiable which are placed entirely within the body either through
    insertion through natural body openings or by surgical implantation and
    means used therewith such as for example, an implant locator for an implant
    that has been placed within the body.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 128/900
TXT BLOOD PRESSURE RECORDER:

    Apparatus for recording blood pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, appropriate subclasses for registers, per se.

    346,    Recorders, appropriate subclasses for recorders, per se,
    particularly subclass 33.


CLS 128/901
TXT SUPPRESSION OF NOISE IN ELECTRIC SIGNAL:

    Apparatus provided with means for suppressing extraneous noise in an
    electric signal.


CLS 128/902
TXT BIOLOGICAL SIGNAL AMPLIFIER:

    Amplifier for electric signal generated by the body.


CLS 128/903
TXT RADIO TELEMETRY:

    Transmission of medical information by radio.


CLS 128/904
TXT TELEPHONE TELEMETRY:

    Transmission of medical information by telephone.


CLS 128/905
TXT FEEDBACK TO PATIENT OF BIOLOGICAL SIGNAL OTHER THAN BRAIN ELECTRIC SIGNAL:

    Means for bringing to the attention of a patient a signal indicative of
    some physical condition of his body, other than an electric signal
    generated by the brain.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclass 545 for a diagnostic testing apparatus which
    apprises a patient of an electric signal generated by the brain.


CLS 128/906
TXT MULTIPHASIC DIAGNOSTIC CLINIC:

    A clinic with means for facilitating diagnosis of different physical
    conditions of a patient.


CLS 128/907
TXT ACUPUNCTURE:

    Medical treatment effected by puncturing the body at selected points.


CLS 128/908
TXT PATIENT PROTECTION FROM ELECTRIC SHOCK:

    Equipment for protecting a patient from electrical shock during medical
    diagnosis or treatment.


CLS 128/909
TXT BREATHING APPARATUS WITH MEANS FOR PREVENTING PATIENT CROSS-CONTAMINATION:

    Means in a breathing apparatus for protecting a user from contamination
    from another simultaneous or previous user of the apparatus.


CLS 128/910
TXT ANESTHESIA GAS SCAVENGING SYSTEM:

    Means for removing escaped anesthesia gas from the vicinity of the patient
    to a remote location.


CLS 128/911
TXT UNILIMB INHALATION-EXHALATION BREATHING TUBES:

    Apparatus used in a respiratory device including one tube disposed within
    another tube, one of which tubes provides an inhalation passageway and the
    other of which tubes provides an exhalation passageway.


CLS 128/912
TXT CONNECTIONS AND CLOSURES FOR TUBES DELIVERING FLUIDS TO OR FROM THE BODY:

    Tubular apparatus for transporting fluids to or from the body and including
    particular joints or closure devices for such apparatus.


CLS 128/913
TXT BREATHABLE LIQUIDS:

    Liquids which when administered to the lungs will exchange oxygen and
    carbon dioxide in a manner similar to breathable air.


CLS 128/914
TXT REBREATHING APPARATUS FOR INCREASING CARBON DIOXIDE CONTENT IN INHALED GAS:

    Breathing systems wherein the system includes an arrangement for
    rebreathing exhaled gas and which further includes means to increase the
    carbon dioxide content of such rebreathed gas.


CLS 128/915
TXT ULTRASOUND MAMMOGRAPHY:

    Subject matter related to ultrasonic diagnostic systems or portions thereof
    or to procedures for use of such systems or portions for examination of the
    female breast.


CLS 128/916
TXT ULTRASOUND 3-D IMAGING:

    Subject matter related to the production of three dimensional images, for
    example images in perspective, using ultrasound as the data acquisition
    mode.


CLS 128/917
TXT BODY FLUID, DEVICES FOR PROTECTION THEREFROM (E.G., AIDS, HEPATITIS, ETC.):

    Subject matter related to protecting a person from infectious diseases
    carried by the fluids of the body.


CLS 128/918
TXT Condoms and shields:

    Device or shield made of thin, flexible, natural or synthetic rubber
    material worn on the body to prevent disease transmission.


CLS 128/919
TXT Syringe, means to protect user:

    Subject matter related to protect the person using the syringe from the
    transmission of a body fluid transmitted disease.


CLS 128/920
TXT COMPUTER ASSISTED MEDICAL DIAGNOSTICS:

    Collection of art wherein a programmable data processing machine is
    directly utilized to make a decision regarding the nature of a patient's
    malady, or for validating the verity of such decision made by a person.

    (1)     Note. This subclass is not intended to accumulate cross reference
    patents to a medical diagnostic device wherein a computer is utilized
    merely for the purpose of data correction or for aiding in the relative
    placement of patient and medical equipment.  Such use of computers
    generally will be found in the subclass providing for the treatment device
    or method.

    (2)     Note. Included herein are cross reference patents which use a
    computer to  prescribe a medical treatment for a malady wherein the
    decision regarding the nature of the malady is implied and the decision is
    not ancillary to the operation of a particular treating device, such as a
    computer controlled pacemaker.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 300+ for diagnostic testing.


CLS 128/921
TXT Diet management:

    Collection of art under subclass 920 wherein the decision is made regarding
    nutritional intake.

    (1)     Note. This subclass is intended to collect cross reference patents
    disclosing apparatus and method for determining proper nutritional intake
    based on patient data and not mere calorie counters nor recorders.


CLS 128/922
TXT Including image analysis:

    Collection of art under subclass 920 wherein the data processing machine
    accesses pictorial information of a patient or portion thereof in order to
    make the decision.

    (1)     Note. The pictorial information may be from a real time or stored
    source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    382,    Image Analysis, subclasses 110 and 128+ for image analysis  which
    neither makes nor implies a diagnosis.


CLS 128/923
TXT By comparison of patient data to other data:

    Collection of art under subclass 920 wherein the data processing machine
    contrasts data obtained from a patient having an unknown malady with data
    correlating to a known condition  in order to make the decision.


CLS 128/924
TXT Using artificial intelligence:

    Collection of art under subclass 923 wherein the data processing machine
    utilizes a mathematically defined set of rules in order to make the
    decision.

    (1)     Note. This subclass is intended to collect cross reference patents
    disclosing data processing machine or method using a specific algorithm for
    making a diagnosis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 1+ for
    specific types of artificial intelligence used for making a decision other
    than patient diagnosis, particularly  subclass 924 for a similarly
    maintained cross reference art collection.


CLS 128/925
TXT Neural network:

    Collection of art under subclass 920 wherein the data processing machine
    comprises either plural interconnected processors or a software emulation
    thereof which combine to process data according to the strengths of their
    interconnections which are generally determined during a training phase.


CLS 131/
TTL TOBACCO

CLS 131/
TXT

    This class includes:



    (1)     Products containing tobacco or tobacco substitutes intended for
    personal use for smoking or chewing or for use as snuff.

    (2)     Processes and apparatus for manufacturing the products set forth in
    paragraph (1) where not elsewhere provided for.

    (3)     Processes and apparatus for treating tobacco preliminary or
    subsequent to manufacturing into products of paragraph (1) where not
    elsewhere provided for.

    (4)     Appliances peculiarly adapted to use by smokers where not elsewhere
    provided for.

    NOTES



    (1)     Note.  The word "TOBACCO", as used in this class, is considered
    generic to any material which may be smoked, or may be substituted for real
    tobacco.

    (1.5)   Note.  Tobacco product manufacturing apparatus may be claimed in
    combination with apparatus of another classified art.  When such is the
    case, the combination will be found with the other classified art, if the
    tobacco product manufacturing apparatus is in name only, or no more of the
    apparatus is claimed than is necessary to support the operation of the
    other classified art device.

    (2)     Note.  For hand manipulable cigar tip cutters, see Class 30,
    Cutlery, subclass 109 and indented subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  For apparatus for drying tobacco or tobacco articles, see
    Class 34, Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate
    subclasses.  The line between Classes 34 and 131 is as follows:  Tobacco
    drying apparatus,  per se, is in Class 34.  (1) Tobacco drying apparatus
    combined with means to perform other operations and (2) tobacco drying
    processes are in Class 131.

    (4)     Note.  For cigars and cigarettes carrying indicia wherein the only
    modification of these products is to receive the indicia.  See Class 40,
    Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 321 and subclasses 299+, and in
    particular 638 and 670 for labels for tobacco products as well as Class
    283, Printed Matter, subclass 71 for revenue stamps, etc., where the
    invention is in the stamp, per se.

    (5)     Note.  For tobacco plant husbandry, see Class 47, Plant Husbandry,
    appropriate subclasses.

    (6)     Note.  For cigarette tube or continuous tobacco rod cutters with
    sharpening means of the grinding type see Class 451, Abrading, subclasses
    419+ and indented subclasses.

    (6.5)   Note.  For methods of and apparatus for encompassing or encasing
    goods or materials with a separate cover or band which serves as means for
    identifying, protecting or unit handling the goods or material see Class
    53, Package Making, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 396+
    and 582+, for band type encasing, and subclasses 148+ and 236 for packing
    long, slender articles (e.g., cigars, cigarettes).

    (6.7)   Note.  See Class 55, Gas Separation, for gas or smoke filters of
    general utility and in which neither the disclosure nor a claim is directed
    solely to a filter for a tobacco users' appliance.

    (7)     Note.  For tobacco harvesting, see Class 56, Harvesters, subclass
    27.5.

    (8)     Note.  For tobacco spinning, see Class 57, Textiles: Spinning,
    Twisting, and Twining, particularly subclass 28 and indented subclasses.

    (9)     Note.  For a burner assembly having an igniter and a cover, and
    that is generally used for lighting a cigar or cigarette, see Class 431,
    Combustion, subclasses 129+.

    (9.5)   Note.  Search Class 83, Cutting, for cutting of tobacco, except for
    that which is provided for in this class (131), subclasses 252, 253, and
    313+. It should also be noted that apparatus to perforate an article will
    be found in Class 83.  However, due to the uniqueness of the subject
    matter, apparatus and methods to perforate tobacco or a tobacco product
    will be found in this class (131).

    (11)    Note.  This class includes apparatus and processes for making
    cigarette mouthpieces and cigarette tubes, for which see particularly
    subclasses 77-83.

    (12)    Note.  See Class 118, Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    coating apparatus, per se.

    (13)    Note.  Search Class 460,  Crop Threshing or Separating, subclasses
    123+ for the concept of removing a tobacco leaf from the stalk.

    (14)    Note.  See Class 156, Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical
    Manufacture, appropriate subclasses for assembling, per se, of mouthpiece
    sheets and wrapper webs.

    (15)    Note.  See Class 162, Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses
    100+ for paper made from tobacco which is not disclosed as being for
    personal use as defined in Class 131.

    (16)    Note.  For tobacco extracts made by fermentations, and processes
    for their manufacture, see Class 435, Chemistry: Molecular Biology and
    Microbiology, appropriate subclasses.

    935,    Genetic Engineering:  Recombinant DNA Technology, Hybrid or Fused
    Cell Technology, and Related Manipulations of Nucleic Acids, which provides
    a search collection for processes of altering the genetic structure of
    microorganisms; genes and methods of modifying genes and their expression;
    vectors and methods of modifying vectors; methods of introducing DNA into a
    cell; micro-organisms, per se, which have had their genetic sequence
    altered by recombinant DNA techniques or by cell fusion or by uptake of
    DNA; testing; separation techniques; apparatus; and methods of use of
    vectors or of the genetically engineered micro-organisms; methods of gene
    therapy or genetic modification of living organisms.



    (17)    Note.  For destructive distillation processes for solid
    carbonaceous material see Class 201, Distillation: Processes, Thermolytic
    and for apparatus for destructive distillation apparatus, see Class 202,
    Distillation:  Apparatus.

    (18)    Note.  For pocket and personal use receptacle for cigars and
    tobacco, see Class 206, Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 85+ for a
    tobacco container combined with an igniter means for the tobacco,
    subclasses 96+ for a match container including smoking debris receiver
    means, subclasses 236+ a pocket or personal use container for a tobacco
    product and some other article or material-which combination is not
    elsewhere classified and subclasses 242+ for a container for tobacco, pipe,
    cigar or cigarette.  Where significant tobacco product structure or
    composition is claimed, classification is in the appropriate subclass of
    this (131) class.

    (19)    Note.  For sorting, per se, of leaf tobacco or tobacco products,
    see Class 209, Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses.

    (20)    Note.  For pipe racks, see Class 211, Supports: Racks, particularly
    subclass 70.3.

    (21)    Note.  For tobacco stringing and unstringing, see Class 414,
    Material or Article Handling, subclass 26.

    (22)    Note.  For cigar banding see Class 53, Package Making, subclass 198.

    (22.5) Note.  For devices for dispensing tobacco  products either as
    individual entities or in packages see appropriate subclasses of Class 221,
    Article Dispensing. Classification is in Class 221 when no tobacco users'
    appliance is claimed in combination therewith.  A cigar or cigarette end
    cutter is considered to be a tobacco users' appliance in this connection
    and attention is directed to subclass 250.1 of this class (Class 131).

    (24)    Note.  For cigar, cigarette or tobacco wrappers, see Class 229,
    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard boxes, subclasses 87.12 - 87.14.

    (24.5) Note.  The indiscriminate cutting or comminution of tobacco is
    included in Class 241, Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, when
    the comminutor is of that class (241) type.

    (25)    Note.  For nicotine containing extracts in general and processes of
    making, see Class 546, Organic Compounds, particularly subclass 282.

    (26)    Note.  For tobacco sticks and hangers, see Class 294, Handling:
    Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 5.5.

    (27)    Note.  For static type humidifying receptacles for tobacco or
    tobacco products, see Class 312, Supports: Cabinet Structure, subclasses
    31+; for static type humidifiers (slow diffusers), without a receptacle,
    see Class 239, Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 34+
    for dynamic type humidifying apparatus, see Class 261, Gas and Liquid
    Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses, and Class 239, appropriate
    subclasses, particularly subclasses 340+ and 398+.  For such devices
    combined with tobacco handling means, see this class (131), subclasses 133+.

    (27.5) Note.  for a tobacco pouch, per se, see Class 383, Flexible Bags,
    appropriate subclasses.

    (28)    Note.  See Class 424 and 514, Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating
    Compositions, appropriate subclasses and especially Class 424, subclass 197
    and Class 514, subclass 343 for a composition of that class including a
    product obtained or extracted from tobacco.

    (29)    Note.  See 426, Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions,
    and Products, subclasses 3+, for chewing gum containing no tobacco fiber.

    (30)    Note.  Process or apparatus for making reconstituted tobacco, per
    se, is found in this class (Class 131).  Process or apparatus for cigarette
    filter making in which reconstituted tobacco is used as the filter material
    is properly classified in Class 493, Manufacturing Container or Tube From
    Paper; or Other Manufacturing From a sheet or Web, e.g., subclasses 39+
    unless it is disclosed that the filter itself can be smoked.  Such
    disclosure would cause placement in class 313.


CLS 131/27.1
TXT Including cooperating surfaces to induce rolling:

    Subject matter under subclass 280 having coactive elements which act to
    revolve the tobacco or tobacco substitute during the manufacture of the
    smoking product, e.g., to form a cigar or cigarette, place a wrapper
    thereon, or preform analogous operations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 211+ for apparatus which forms a package
    by rotating the contents to bring together the edges which make up the
    longitudinal seam of the cover material and subclasses 528+ for cigar
    banding apparatus.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 155+ for concurrent pressing and conveying
    devices of the roll type, not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 131/28
TXT Devices for rolling cigars or cigarettes under subclass 27.1 combined with
    devices for performing other operations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 102 for presses combined with other features and
    not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 131/29
TXT Combinations under subclass 28 including distinct means for either applying
    a tip or mouthpiece or for forming a tip or mouthpiece.

    (1)     Note.  Where the tip forming means is merely an integral part of
    the rolling means, classification is below in subclasses 47+, 55, 56, and
    57.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61.1,   71, 72, 76, and 88+, for tip or mouthpiece applying or forming
    operations.


CLS 131/30
TXT Combinations under subclass 29 provided with a tip forming means comprising
    a tip smoothing device having stationary parts.


CLS 131/31
TXT Combinations under subclass 28 in which the rolling mechanism is provided
    with means to treat the tobacco to change its physical or chemical
    character.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     63, 64.1, 79, and 290+, for tobacco treatment, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 70+ for presses not elsewhere provided for
    combined with means to treat the material pressed.


CLS 131/32
TXT Combinations under subclass 28 in which the tobacco article is subjected to
    further forming or wrapping operations subsequent to the rolling operation.


CLS 131/33
TXT Combinations under subclass 28 in which the rolling device is provided with
    means to cut the wrapper either prior to or during the rolling operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     73 and 97+, for wrapper cutters, per se.


CLS 131/34
TXT Combinations under subclass 33 provided with mechanism which severs
    wrappers from a continuous sheet.


CLS 131/35
TXT Combinations under subclass 33 in which there is provided means for
    supplying or applying adhesive to the wrapper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for similar organizations combined with continuous wrapper cutters.

    37,     69 and 90, for adhesive supply or applier means in other cigar or
    cigarette making organization.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 35+ for coating apparatus of general
    application combined with cutting means.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 207.1+ for coating processes in
    general wherein an adhesive coating is used.


CLS 131/36
TXT Combinations under subclass 28 in which the rolling device is provided with
    (1) means to feed precut wrappers thereto, (2) means to hold a portion of
    the wrapper during the rolling operation or (3) means to smooth the wrapper
    prior to rolling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33+,    for wrapper feeders combined with wrapper cutters.

    105,    for leaf transfer and/or holder, per se.

    315+,   324 and 325, for leaf smoothers or ironers, per se.


CLS 131/37
TXT Combinations under subclass 28 in which the rolling device is provided with
    means to supply or apply adhesive to the wrapper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     and the search notes appended to the definition thereof.


CLS 131/38
TXT Combinations under subclass 28 provided with means to feed the tobacco or
    tobacco bunch to the rolling apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for wrapper feeders.

    81.1    and 108+, for tobacco feeders, per se.

    904     and 910, for tobacco feeders with automatic control of weight or
    density.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses subclass 173 for roll type concurrent pressing and
    conveying devices, not elsewhere provided for, having means for guiding or
    handling the material.


CLS 131/39
TXT Combinations under subclass 38 provided with a plurality of tobacco or
    bunch feeders.  This includes means for feeding a plurality of grades of
    tobacco to a common feed means for the machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 92+ for article dispensers having
    plural sources and means to dispense articles therefrom.

    222,    Dispensing, for plural feeders, per se, particularly subclasses
    129+.


CLS 131/40
TXT Combinations under subclass 38 in which the tobacco feeder is provided with
    means to separate the tobacco into bunches.


CLS 131/41
TXT Combinations under subclass 40 in which the tobacco bunch is subjected to
    compression, usually for the purpose of preshaping it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for precompressors in organizations having no filler or bunch
    feeder.

    77,     for cigar and cigarette molding, per se.


CLS 131/42
TXT Combinations under subclass 41 in which tobacco is fed to the bunch
    separator in the form of a shallow stream.  The width of the stream usually
    represents the length of the tobacco article to be formed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60      and indented subclasses, for devices for forming tobacco articles
    in which filler material is formed into a rod.

    84.1+,  for continuous rod forming, per se.


CLS 131/43
TXT Combinations under subclass 41 in which the compression takes place against
    the apron supporting table.


CLS 131/44
TXT Combinations under subclass 40 in which the bunch separator cooperates with
    a hopper provided with means to cause discharge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses, for hoppers or other supply
    containers with means for discharging the contents, and see the search
    classes listed in the main class definition.


CLS 131/45
TXT Combinations under subclass 28 including means for subjecting the tobacco
    bunch to compression prior to the rolling operation usually to preshape it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41      and indented subclasses, for precompressors combined with filler or
    bunch separators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 139+ for plural diverse presses, not elsewhere
    provided for.


CLS 131/46
TXT Combinations under subclass 28 in which the rolling mechanism is provided
    with means to trim the ends of the tobacco.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     64.1+, 65, 83.1, and 91, for trimmers or completed article cutters
    in other cigar or cigarette making organizations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 109+ for end or tip cutters.

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses for a cutter of that class (83)
    type which may include end cutters.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 635+ for food end or
    tip removers.

    100,    Presses, subclass 94 for presses not elsewhere provided for,
    combined with means for cutting, breaking, piercing or comminuting the
    material.


CLS 131/47
TXT Rolling devices under subclass 27.1 including an apron member which
    substantially encloses the tobacco in a single loop or bight during the
    rolling operation.  End shaping means consisting of means which merely
    change the conformation of the apron or form a part of other members such
    as rollers which contact the apron are here included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29      and 30, for apron type devices combined with distinct tip forming
    means.

    43      and 45, for apron supporting surfaces embodying a mold.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclass 215 for apparatus for wrapping packages in
    which the rotation of the contents and cover material is occasioned by a
    flexible band which partially encircles the contents.  For cigar banding
    apparatus, see subclass 198.

    100,    Presses, subclass 87 for presses having means for winding or
    folding a sheet, web or strand, not elsewhere provided for, where such
    winding or folding means is of the embracing belt loop type.


CLS 131/48
TXT Devices under subclass 47 in which the bight in the apron rests upon a
    moving platform or table during the rolling operation.  Includes endless
    belts as tables.


CLS 131/49
TXT Devices under subclass 48 in which the table has a rotating or oscillating
    motion in completing a cycle of operation.


CLS 131/50
TXT Devices under subclass 47 in which the bight supporting member comprises a
    stationary platform or table.


CLS 131/51
TXT Devices under subclass 50 in which the bight of the apron is formed between
    the table and a roll or equivalent member which moves relative to the table
    to carry out the rolling operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for roller elements, per se.


CLS 131/52
TXT Devices under subclass 51 in which the movable roll member is supported by
    a member which pivots about one or more axes to move the apron bight across
    the table.


CLS 131/53
TXT Devices under subclass 52 in which the swinging roll support pivots about a
    vertical axis or axes.


CLS 131/54
TXT Improvements under subclass 47 in the apron element of apron type rolling
    machines. Hand manipulated aprons which comprise in themselves the rolling
    device are here included.


CLS 131/55
TXT Devices under subclass 27.1 in which one of the cooperating rolling
    surfaces is an endless belt.  Belts are distinguished from aprons
    classified above in that the former, unlike the latter, do not enclose the
    bunch in a single loop or bight.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 151 for concurrent pressing and conveying presses
    of the endless conveyer type, and not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 131/56
TXT Devices under subclass 27.1 in which the cooperating rolling surfaces
    comprise a plurality of rollers.  Tip forming devices are included when
    they are connected to or form a part of the forming rolls.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57      for rollers, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 155 for roller type presses of the concurrent
    pressing and conveying type, not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 131/57
TXT Improvements under subclasses 27.1+ in the roller element, per se.  Rollers
    of apron machines are here included.  The rolls may be provided with tip
    shaping means when said means is part of the roll or is integrally
    connected thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29      and 30, for rolling surfaces combined with tip formers not parts of
    the rollers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the notes thereunder.


CLS 131/57.5
TXT Drum and concave surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 27.1 wherein the coactive elements include a
    cylinder cooperating with an associated inwardly curving, i.e., concave,
    element.


CLS 131/58
TXT Devices under subclass 280 including means for applying a wrapper to a
    cigarette or cigar not elsewhere classified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27.1+,  for devices wherein the wrapping is effected by cooperating rolling
    surfaces.

    285,    for devices wherein the wrapping is effected by sectional members
    which alternately release and engage the cigarette or cigar.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, appropriate subclasses particularly subclasses 396+
    and 582+ for band type encasing, for methods of and apparatus for
    encompassing or encasing goods or materials with a separate cover or band
    which serves as means for identifying, protecting or unit handling the
    goods or materials.


CLS 131/59
TXT Devices under subclass 58 in which the tobacco to be wrapped is presented
    to a continuous wrapper which is fed angularly of the stream of tobacco to
    form a spiral wrapper.

    (1)     Note.  For spiral wrapping, per se, of more general application,
    see Class 57, Texiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining subclasses 3 and
    160 and their indented subclasses; 493, Manufacturing Container or Tube
    From Paper; or Other Manufacturing From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 299+ .

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 582+ for apparatus to apply a cover
    member, consisting of a band or tube, to a contents to form a package.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding subclasses 430+ for a process or
    apparatus for forming a composite article by wrapping material around a
    core, particularly subclasses 441+ for distributing the material along the
    core.


CLS 131/60
TXT Devices under subclass 58 in which the tobacco to be wrapped is presented
    to a continuous wrapper which is fed longitudinally of the stream of
    tobacco. These machines are those usually referred to as "continuous rod"
    machines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclass 302 for paper tube manufacturing apparatus
    and processes including advancing of tube axially.


CLS 131/61.1
TXT With tip or mouthpiece applier or former:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 including means to affix or configure
    either end, i.e., apply or form a tip or mouthpiece, of a cigar or
    cigarette.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29+,    71+, 76, and 88+, for other tip or mouthpiece applying or forming
    operations.


CLS 131/62
TXT Devices under subclass 60 including means for treating the tobacco to
    change its physical or chemical character.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     79 and 290, for tobacco treatment, per se


CLS 131/63
TXT Devices under subclass 62 provided with means to cut a completed cigarette
    or cigar from the wrapped tobacco rod.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65,     for similar organizations without means for tobacco treatment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, for a cutter of that class (83) type which may include a
    cigarette or cigar rod.


CLS 131/64.1
TXT With tobacco rod preshaper:

    Subject matter under subclass 63 including means to compress or shape the
    tobacco before it is enclosed in the wrapper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66.1+,  for preshaping not combined with tobacco treatment.

    84.1+,  for tobacco rod formers, per se.


CLS 131/64.2
TXT With transverse or longitudinal compression:

    Subject matter under subclass 64.1 wherein the means to compress or shape
    the tobacco includes means for applying a compacting force perpendicular to
    or along the long axis of the tobacco being shaped.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66.2,   for similar compression means not combined with tobacco treatment.

    84.2,   for a continuous rod or ribbon former with transverse compression
    means.


CLS 131/65
TXT Devices under subclass 60 provided with means to cut a completed cigarette
    or cigar from the wrapped tobacco rod.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63      and 64.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, for a cutter of that class (83) type wherein a cigarette
    or cigar rod may be included.


CLS 131/66.1
TXT With tobacco rod preshaper:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 including means to compress or shape the
    tobacco before it is enclosed in a wrapper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64.1+,  for tobacco rod preshaping combined with tobacco treatment.

    84.1+,  for tobacco rod formers, per se.


CLS 131/66.2
TXT With transverse or longitudinal compression:

    Subject matter under subclass 66.1 wherein the means to compress or shape
    the tobacco includes means for applying a compacting force perpendicular to
    or along the long axis of the tobacco being shaped.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64.2,   for similar compression means combined withg tobacco treatment.

    84.2    for a continuous rod or ribbon former with transverse compression
    means.


CLS 131/67
TXT Devices under subclass 60 provided with means to permanently seal the
    wrapper about the tobacco.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses, for seaming or sealing apparatus.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 272+ for forming and coating a tube.


CLS 131/68
TXT Devices under subclass 67 provided with means for furnishing heat to the
    sealing means.


CLS 131/69
TXT Devices under subclass 67 provided with means for supplying or applying
    adhesive to the wrapper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     35, 37, and 90, for other cigar and cigarette machines having
    adhesive applying means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses, for coating apparatus,
    per se.


CLS 131/70
TXT Devices under subclass 58 in which the tobacco is placed in a wrapper tube
    which is formed prior to the filling operation.


CLS 131/71
TXT Devices under subclass 70 provided with means for either applying or
    forming a tip or mouthpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     30, 61, 76, and 88 and indented subclasses, for tip or mouthpiece
    applying or forming operations.


CLS 131/72
TXT Devices under subclass 71 provided with means for inserting a plug into the
    end of a cigar or cigarette.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94,     for plug attaching or inserting, per se.


CLS 131/73
TXT Devices under subclass 70 provided with means other than the tobacco former
    for making the wrapper tubes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 269+ for a tube making device or method in
    general.


CLS 131/74
TXT Devices under subclass 70 provided with hopper means for feeding the
    tobacco tubes to the filling device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for article dispensers
    not otherwise provided for, and see the class definition of Class 221 for a
    statement of the class lines and for the disposition of related disclosures
    or article and strip feeding processes and apparatus.


CLS 131/75
TXT Devices under subclass 70 in which the filler former member is adapted to
    be encircled by the wrapper tube or a portion thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Devices of this type have been placed in this subclass
    whether or not the placing of the tobacco in the wrapper tube is claimed.


CLS 131/76
TXT Devices under subclass 58 provided with means for either applying or
    forming a tip or mouthpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     30, 61.1, 71, 72, 88, and 285 and indented subclasses, for other
    cigar or cigarette machines having tip or mouthpiece appliers or formers.


CLS 131/77
TXT Devices under subclass 280 comprising means for molding or otherwise
    forming the tobacco in the manufacture of cigarettes and cigars not
    elswhere classified.

    (1)     Note.  For sectional, alternate release and engaging devices which
    shape as well as wrap the bunch, see this class, subclass 285.

    (2)     Note.  See this class, subclass 27.1 and indented subclasses, for
    forming by rolling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27.1    and indented subclasses, for forming by rolling.

    285,    for sectional, alternate release and engaging device which shape as
    well as well as wrapp the bunch.

    906,    for structure sensing the condition or characteristic of a
    continuous tobacco rod.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses for methods of compacting material
    and for presses not otherwise provided for.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    appropriate subclasses for molding apparatus for shaping or reshaping
    nonmetallic material not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 131/78
TXT Combinations under subclass 77 in which the molding or forming device is
    combined with another device.  Combinations with supporting racks or tables
    are here included.  For purposes of this classification the "other device"
    may be means for performing additional molding or forming operations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for combinations including formers adapted to be encircled by a
    wrapper tube.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 102 for presses combined with other features, and
    not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 131/79
TXT Combinations under subclass 78 including means to treat the tobacco to
    change its physical or chemical characteristics.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     62, 63, 64.1, and 290 and indented subclasses for tobacco
    treatments, per se.


CLS 131/80
TXT Combinations under subclass 78 including means for carrying out a plurality
    of molding or forming operations on the tobacco.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     41-43 and 45, for similar subject matter involving rolling of the
    tobacco.

    86,     and 87 for means for simultaneously molding a plurality of cigars.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 193+ for plural presses not elsewhere provided
    for.


CLS 131/81.1
TXT With tobacco or bunch feed:

    Subject matter under subclass 78 including means to deliver the tobacco or
    a grouped amount of tobacco to the molding or forming device to be formed
    into a cigar or cigarette.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are means for separating bunches
    from ribbons even though no molding is claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38+,    108+ and 280+, for tobacco feeders, and particularly subclass 42
    for ribbon feed of tobacco to a bunch separator combined with structure
    having cooperating surfaces to induce rolling or the tobacco.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 215 for reciprocating platen presses, not
    elsewhere provided for, having means to deposit material on the means
    supporting the material during the compressing operation.


CLS 131/82
TXT Combinations under subclass 78 in which the mold is provided with means to
    remove or eject the tobacco therefrom and/or means to transfer the formed
    bunch elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41      through 43 and 45, for devices including this combination where the
    bunch is transferred to a rolling device.

    70      and indented subclasses, for such devices which insert tobacco into
    a wrapper tube.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 218 for reciprocating platen presses, not
    elsewhere provided for, combined with means for discharging material from
    the press.


CLS 131/83.1
TXT With trimmer, perforator or slitter:

    Subject matter under subclass 78 including means for (1) removing a portion
    of the cigar or cigarette, i.e., a trimmer, (2) puncturing or, (3) making a
    narrow cut in, i.e., slitting, the end thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     63+, 65, and 91, for other cigar or cigarette machines combined
    with end trimmers, perforators, or slitters.

    233,    for the combination of an end cutter and an ash receptacle.

    248+,   for an end cutter.


CLS 131/84.1
TXT Continuous rod or ribbon former:

    Subject matter under subclass 77 including means for shaping the tobacco
    into an unbroken shaft or thin band, i.e., ribbon, of indefinite length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for  ribbon feed of tobacco into a bunch separator combined with
    devices for rolling cigars or cigarettes.

    66.1+,  for a tobacco rod preshaper used with a wrapping device having a
    longitudinally fed continuous wrapper.


CLS 131/84.2
TXT With transverse compression:

    Subject matter under subclass 84.1 wherein the means for shaping includes
    the application of compacting pressure perpendicular to the longitudinal
    axis of the shaft or thin band.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64.2    and 66.2, for transverse or longitudinal compression means, (1)
    combined with or, (2) without tobacco treatment, respectively.


CLS 131/84.3
TXT With pneumatic assist for tobacco movement:

    Subject matter under subclass 84.1 wherein the means for shaping includes a
    blown or pressurized gas used for transferring or separating the tobacco.

    (1)     Note.  Pneumatic condition or characteristic sensing means alone
    are not considered to be pneumatic assist proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    904,    for pneumatic means for sensing a condition or characteristic.


CLS 131/84.4
TXT With trimmer for rod or ribbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 84.1 wherein the means for shaping includes
    structure for removing tobacco from the shaft or thin band.


CLS 131/85
TXT Improvements in the mold members of devices under subclass 77.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for molds or formers which are adapted to be encircled by a wrapper.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, appropriate subclasses, for molds, per se.


CLS 131/86
TXT Devices under subclass 85 in which there is provided a plurality of
    cigarette or cigar molds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80      for machines for performing a plurality of molding or forming
    operations successively.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 119+ for plural article forming molds.


CLS 131/87
TXT Devices under subclass 86 in which the mold members are carried in whole or
    in part on rotary or endless members.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 178 for concurrent pressing and conveying presses
    of the moving compression chamber type, not elsewhere provided for, having
    a platen or piston in the chamber, and subclass 222 for reciprocating
    platen presses having a belt indexing to forward plural material supports,
    and subclass 223 for reciprocating platen presses having a rotary support
    for plural or indexing material supports.


CLS 131/88
TXT Devices under subclass 280 for either applying or forming a tip or
    mouthpiece on a cigarette or cigar.  The application of ignition tips is
    here included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     30, 61.1, 71, 72, and 76, for cigarette making including tip or
    mouthpiece applying or forming.


CLS 131/89
TXT Devices under subclass 88 comprising means to tuck, fold, crimp, or smooth
    the ends of cigarettes or cigars.


CLS 131/90
TXT Devices under subclass 89 provided with means to supply or apply adhesive.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     35, 37, and 69, for adhesive appliers with other cigar or cigarette
    making organizations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses, for coating apparatus,
    per se.


CLS 131/91
TXT Devices under subclass 89 provided with a cutter or trimmer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     63, 64.1, 65, and 83.1, for end trimmers in various cigar and
    cigarette making organizations.


CLS 131/92
TXT Devices under subclass 89 provided with a heater and/or an end punch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83.1,   233, 252, and 253, for end punches.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, for driers, per se.


CLS 131/93
TXT Devices under subclass 89 embodying rotating parts which contact the
    cigarette or cigar to carry out the tip forming function.


CLS 131/94
TXT Devices under subclass 88 comprising means for attaching or inserting a
    plug of material different from the remainder of the cigarette or cigar.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72.


CLS 131/95
TXT Devices under subclass 88 comprising means for attaching a sheet material
    tip to a cigar or cigarette.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for processes and apparatus for making laminated
    sheet material stock for use in tipping cigars and cigarettes.


CLS 131/96
TXT Processes and apparatus under subclass 280 for recovering tobacco from
    cigars and cigarettes.  Usually the outside wrapper is cut to liberate the
    enclosed tobacco.


CLS 131/105
TXT Devices under subclass 280 per se for holding or carrying a wrapper for a
    cigar or cigarette.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33      through 36, 58 and 97, and their indented subclasses, for these
    devices claimed in combination with various cigar and cigarette making
    organizations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, appropriate subclasses for
    transferring devices in general.


CLS 131/106
TXT Processes and apparatus under subclass 280 for applying tags or labels to
    cigars to cigarettes and not provided for specifically elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280+,   for such apparatus combined with cigar or cigarette making
    organizations.

    347+    and 368, for tobacco products combined with labels or tags.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 428+ for a residual method of assembly
    not more specifically provided for elsewhere, and subclasses 505+
    thereunder for joining two parts by deforming one around another.  For
    binding and covering apparatus, see subclasses 243.57+, and when combined
    with a diverse means, as for cutting, see subclasses 33.5+.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 2 and indented
    subclasses, for tags or labels, per se.

    53,     Package Making, Subclasses 137 for machines to form a package and
    to apply to the cover thereof a strip, stamp, gap filler ar label,
    subclasses 396+ snd 582+ for banding, per se, and subclassrs 179 and 449
    for plural layer cover application where at least one layer is a band.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses, for methods and apparatus for wrapping and seaming,
    per se.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, appropriate subclasses, for
    apparatus for applying a member, e.g., staple, to work.


CLS 131/107
TXT Processes an apparatus under subclass 280 for compacting or tying cigars or
    cigarettes into bundles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    113 and 114, for bundling plug tobacco shapes.

    282     and 283, for bundling combined with cigar or cigarette making
    organizations.

    327,    for tobacco leaf bundling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, appropriate subclasses for methods of and apparatus
    for encompassing or encasing goods or materials with a separate cover or
    band which serves as means for identifying, protecting or unit handling the
    goods or materials, and see (40) and (41) Notes to the class definition for
    other methods and apparatus for bunching and banding or binding.

    100,    Presses, subclasses +1 for binding apparatus and methods not
    elsewhere classified.


CLS 131/108
TXT Processes and apparatus under subclass 280 for feeding tobacco not
    specifically provided for elsewhere.  These devices usually are for the
    purpose of securing a uniform feed of granular tobacco to a cigar or
    cigarette machine.

    (1)     Note.  For mere hopper discharging, see Classes 198, Conveyors:
    Power-Driven, subclasses 329, 540+, 550.01+; 222, Dispensing, subclass 251,
    and 414, Material or Article Handling, subclasses 226+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     38-44, 60-69, 79, 81.1, and 280+, for tobacco feeding in
    combination with cigar and cigarette making organizations.


CLS 131/109.1
TXT With brushing, carding, or picking means:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein tobacco is separated from a mass
    by a device in a bit by bit fashion, i.e.,  by a brushing, carding, or
    picking means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for tobacco feeding including separating tobacco fibers of
    different character.

    311+,   for tobacco treatment including leaf disintegration.

    321,    for stemming tobacco by carding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses 65+ and particularly
    subclasses 80+ and 98+ for picking and carding of fibers in general.


CLS 131/109.2
TXT With separator for tobacco dust, stems, or foreign material:

    Subject matter under subclass 109.1 including means for separating offal
    type material from the tobacco being fed.


CLS 131/109.3
TXT With vibration tamper or rake:

    Subject matter under subclasss 109.1 including an agitating packer or comb
    for manipulating the tobacco being fed.


CLS 131/110
TXT Tobacco feeding under subclass 108 wherein tobacco fibers of different
    character are separated or wherein a suction device is employed to assist
    the feeding operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312,    for separation combined with leaf disintegrating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses, for separation, per se.


CLS 131/111
TXT Processes and apparatus under the class definition for making tobacco plugs
    or compressed shapes.  These plugs or shapes are usually for use as chewing
    tobacco, but shaping of unwrapped pipe cartridges, snuff tablets and the
    like is here included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77+     for molding or forming cigars or cigarettes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 28+ for
    apparatus for spinning ropes of tobacco.

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses, for methods of compacting and for
    presses not otherwise provided for.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses, for molding and shaping processes within the class
    definitions.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 394+ for preform reshaping or resizing apparatus for nonmetals
    not otherwise provided for, and subclasses 406+ for a press forming
    apparatus for shaping nonmetallic plastic or fluent materials; see the
    search notes thereunder.


CLS 131/112
TXT Processes and apparatus under subclass 111 including packing the plugs or
    shapes in groups or bundles.  This packing usually involves compressing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for cigar and cigarette bundling.

    111,    and the other subclasses indented thereunder for simultaneous
    molding of a plurality of plugs or shapes.

    282     and 283, for packing and arranging cigars and cigarettes combined
    with cigar or cigarette making.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 443+ for processes and subclasses 147+
    for apparatus for forming a group of contents portions and subsequently
    packaging same.


CLS 131/113
TXT Plug making under subclass 112 involving the fastening of a tag or label to
    the plug or shape.  The embossing of a tag or label directly into the
    material is here included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    and the search notes appended thereto, for cigar tagging or
    labeling.

    368,    for plug tobacco products combined with identifying labels or tags.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclass 137 for machines to form a package and to
    apply to the cover thereof a strip, stamp, gap filler or label.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, appropriate subclasses, for
    apparatus for applying a member, e.g., a tack, to work by driving.


CLS 131/114
TXT Plug making under subclass 113 including the making of the tag or label to
    be attached to the plug or shape.


CLS 131/115
TXT Plug making under subclass 111 involving the use of a plurality of molding
    means arranged on a turret.  The turret may rotate on either a horizontal
    or vertical axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 193+ for plural presses not elsewhere provided
    for.


CLS 131/116
TXT Plug making under subclass 111 wherein the tobacco is molded into a sheet
    of indefinite length from which the plugs may be separated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324,    325 and 326, for tobacco leaf rolling.


CLS 131/117
TXT Plug making under subclass 116 including the cutting of the plugs or shapes
    from the sheet.


CLS 131/118
TXT Plug making under subclass 111 including separately cutting the molded
    material into plugs or shapes.  If the cutting is accomplished by the mold
    parts during molding, it is not here included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for continuous sheet molding with cutting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 94 for presses combined with means for cutting,
    breaking, piercing or comminuting the material, and not elsewhere provided
    for.


CLS 131/119
TXT Improvements under subclass 111 in the molds, per se, for molding the
    tobacco into plugs or shapes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 240+ for reciprocating platen presses, not
    elsewhere provided for, of the box and piston type.

    249,    Static Molds, for molds, per se.


CLS 131/173
TXT Smoking devices under subclass 330 wherein the smoke is passed through a
    liquid, usually for purposes of cooling or washing the smoke.  Devices
    commonly known as kookahs are here included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331+    for smoke treating means.


CLS 131/174
TXT Smoking devices under subclass 330 having means to shield the smoker from
    windblown ash, or provided with means to receive the ash or prohibit its
    inadvertent removal from the burning zone by action of wind or from any
    other cause.

    (1)     Note.  Compare smoking tubes in this class, subclass 191.

    (2)     Note.  Compare base burner type, this class, subclass 193.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    349,    for cigarettes with nonburning wrappers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 242+ for a container for
    tobacco, pipe, cigar or cigarette and see (18) Note in the main class
    definition of this (131) Class for pocket receptacles for containing partly
    consumed cigars and cigarettes.


CLS 131/175
TXT Smoking devices under subclass 174 having a socket or receiving portion to
    receive and hold an end of a cigarette or cigar in position to be smoked,
    the socket communicating with a passage for the smoke.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174,    for smoking tubes with guards.

    179,    combined pipes and cigar or cigarette holders.

    182,    cigar and cigarette holders with ejectors.

    187,    and indented subclasses for cigar or cigarette holders, per se.

    260,    for mere cigar or cigarette supports, i.e., those not having a
    smoke passage.


CLS 131/176
TXT Smoking devices under subclass 174, commonly known as pipes, provided with
    covers or screens to preclude escape of ash from the bowl portion.


CLS 131/177
TXT Smoking devices under subclass 176 wherein the cover or screen is provided
    with a tamper or may be employed as a tamper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184.1,  243 and 247, for pipe tampers.

    193,    for closures for base burner type smoking devices.


CLS 131/178
TXT Smoking devices under subclass 330 (a) convertible to other uses, including
    convertible to other forms of smoking devices; (b) combined with other
    tobacco users' appliances, or (c) those combinations of smoking device and
    other apparatus not elsewhere provided for.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174     and indented subclasses for combinations of smoking devices with
    wind or ash guard or ash receivers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclass 47 for combinations of
    smoking devices with canes sticks.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 236+ for a pocket or
    personal use container for a tobacco product and some other article or
    material.  Where significant tobacco product structure or composition is
    claimed, classification is in this (131) class.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclass 15 and indented subclasses, for
    combinations of smoking devices with soap bubble devices.


CLS 131/179
TXT Combinations under subclass 178 involving more than one pipe, or cigar or
    cigarette holder, or involving combinations thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175     and 187, and indented subclasses for other cigar or cigarette
    holders.


CLS 131/180
TXT Combinations under subclass 178 of (a) a smoking device and means for
    storing tobacco, or means for feeding fresh tobacco to the smoking zone, or
    (b) smoking devices provided with a plurality of bowls or smoking
    compartments.

    (1)     Note.  Compare with subclass 179 of this class.


CLS 131/181
TXT Combinations under subclass 180 of a smoking device with a follower adapted
    to eject the tobacco, cigar or cigarette progressively as it is smoked.

    (1)     Note.  Compare with subclasses 182 and 183 of this class.


CLS 131/182
TXT Combinations under subclass 178 of a smoking device and means to eject the
    burned tobacco, cigar or cigarette from the smoking zone.

    (1)     Note.  Compare with subclass 181 of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    190,    for smoking devices with releasable means for gripping a cigar or
    cigarette.


CLS 131/183
TXT Combinations under subclass 182 wherein the ejector is of the type which
    normally supports the tobacco during combustion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205,    206 and 224, for tobacco supports.


CLS 131/184.1
TXT With cleaner, stirrer, or tamper:

    Subject matter under subclass 178 wherein the smoking device is combined
    with means to help rid the smoking device of unwanted debris, residues or
    tobacco, i,e., cleaning means, or to mix or compact the tobacco in the
    smoking zone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177,    for pipe covers combined with tampers or employed as tampers.

    182     and 183, for a smoking device combined with means for ejecting the
    tobacco, cigar, or cigarette from the smoking zone.

    200+    and 216+, and particularly subclasses 209 and 217, for a removable
    insert in the smoke passage which will incidently clean on removal but have
    no additional cleaning structure.

    232     and 243-246, for a smoking device cleaner, per se.

    247,    for a tamper per se for a smoking device.


CLS 131/184.2
TXT Pipe bowl type:

    Subject matter under subclass 184.1 wherein the cleaning, mixing or
    compacting means is used in the tobacco holding receptacle of a reusable
    smoking device, i.e., the bowl of a pipe.


CLS 131/184.3
TXT With cleaner extending or operable through external passage:

    Subject matter under subclass 184.1 wherein the smoking device is combined
    with cleaning means within, or manipulated via structure in, an outside
    opening in the smoking devices other than the opening  through which
    tobacco is inserted or burned or through which smoke is inhaled by the user.


CLS 131/185
TXT Combinations under subclass 178 of smoking device with means to ignite the
    charge therein or means upon which to scratch a match.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    351,    for tobacco products combined with igniting means.


CLS 131/186
TXT Combinations under subclass 178 of smoking device and means to support the
    device. This subclass includes combinations of smoking device with means to
    support the device upon the chin of the user.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240.1   and 257, and their indented subclasses for supports, per se, for
    cigars, cigarettes appliances.


CLS 131/187
TXT Smoking devices under subclass 330 having a socket or receiving portion to
    receive and hold an end of a cigar or cigarette in position to be smoked,
    the socket communicating with a passage for the smoke.

    (1)     Note.  The patents are placed here only when the socket or
    receiving portion is claimed.  Where only the characteristics of the stem
    or mouthpiece are claimed, since they are identical with the corresponding
    parts of other smoking devices, classification is in appropriate following
    subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  For holders or mouthpieces permanently attached to cigars
    and cigarettes or otherwise adapted to be discarded with the cigar or
    cigarette, see this class, subclass 361 and indented subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  Compare with subclass 191 of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175,    for cigar or cigarette holders equipped with wind guards, ash
    guards, or ash receivers, subclass 178 and indented subclasses, for
    combinations there provided for, particularly subclass 182, for combination
    with an ejector.

    240.1   and 257, for mere cigar or cigarette supports, i.e., holders not
    equipped with a smoke passage.


CLS 131/188
TXT Cigar or cigarette holders under subclass 187 equipped with means to pierce
    the cigar or cigarette.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233,    252 and 253, and indented subclasses for cigar slitters or
    perforators, per se.

    363,    for mouthpiece end structures permanently attached to a cigar or
    cigarette and penetrating the filler.


CLS 131/189
TXT Cigar or cigarette holders under subclass 188 wherein the piercing means is
    provided with smoke conducting passages.


CLS 131/190
TXT Cigar or cigarette holders under subclass 187 wherein the socket or
    receiving portion is provided with a movable means for gripping or holding
    the cigar or cigarette.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182,    for cigar or cigarette holders combined with means to eject the
    cigar or cigarette.


CLS 131/191
TXT Smoking devices under subclass 330 commonly known as smoking tubes.  These
    usually comprise a mouthpiece and a tubular compartment in substantial
    alinement therewith to receive loose tobacco.

    (1)     Note.  Compare with subclass 187 and indented subclasses of this
    class.

    (2)     Note.  Compare the base burner type in subclass 193 of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174,    such devices having means for guarding against the action of wind
    or receiving the ash.

    181,    for tubes equipped with a follower.


CLS 131/192
TXT Smoking devices under subclass 330 adapted to be folded or collapsed.
    These are usually to make the device smaller so that it may be more readily
    inserted in a pocket for carrying.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 199.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181     and 182, for holders which may be telescoped to feed or eject
    tobacco.


CLS 131/193
TXT Smoking devices under subclass 330 arranged to burn the charge from the
    bottom upwardly.

    (1)     Note.  Compare smoking tubes, subclass 191 of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176     and 177, for wind or ash guarding covers.


CLS 131/194
TXT Smoking devices under subclass 330 provided with means either (1) to
    exchange heat between the burning charge and/or the smoke and some fluid
    (usually air), or (2) to heat insulate the burning charge and/or the smoke.

    (1)     Note.  The mere provision of elongated passageways, even though
    claimed as being for smoke cooling, where no heat exchange means is
    provided, are not placed in this group, but in subclass 200 and indented
    subclasses, and 216 and indented subclasses of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173,    for the smoke washing type.


CLS 131/195
TXT Smoking devices under subclass 194 provided with passages for air to flow
    in heat exchange relation with the container for the burning charge and/or
    with the smoke conducting passages.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198.1+, for devices having special air inlets to either the burning charge
    or to the smoke conducting passages.


CLS 131/196
TXT Smoking devices under subclass 194 in which a tobacco charge containing
    bowl is mounted in spaced relation within an outer bowl.

    (1)     Note.  Compare with subclass 220 of this class.


CLS 131/197
TXT Smoking devices under subclass 196 having a plurality of smoke passages
    connected, in series, arranged to extend in substantially opposite
    directions, so that the smoke reverses its direction of travel.  This is
    generally stated to be for providing an elongated smoke passage to give the
    smoke time to cool and/or to cause precipitation of suspended solids or
    liquids due to their inertia when the direction of motion of the smoke
    changes.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 212.1+, 213 and 218.


CLS 131/198.1
TXT Supplemental or substitute air inlet:

    Subject matter under subclass 330 provided with an air intake passageway in
    addition to, or in place of, the opening through which tobacco is inserted
    into the smoking device.

    (1)     Note.  The air may be admitted to the burning tobacco or to the
    smoke conducting passages only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176,    for pipe covers with air inlets.

    191     and 193, for a smoking device having a smoking tube or burning
    tobacco from the bottom upwardly.


CLS 131/198.2
TXT Adjustable air inlet type:

    Subject matter under subclass 198.1 wherein the air intake passageway, or
    structure therein, may be altered to vary the air flow.

    (1)     Note.  A supplemental or substitute air inlet covered, at least in
    part, by a smoker's finger or having a valve therein controlled by a
    thermostat are included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270+,   and particularly subclass 272 for an antismoking product or device
    which may vary the amount of air flowing through the smoking device.

    336,    for a smoke treater or separator which adds air to the smoke stream.


CLS 131/199
TXT Smoking devices under subclass 330 which are divided longitudinally, i.e.,
    along the axis.

    (1)     Note.  The bowl only or the stem only may be so divided.

    (2)     Note.  Compare with foldable or collapsible devices in subclass 192
    of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175,    for longitudinally divided cigar and cigarette holders with ash
    retainers.


CLS 131/200
TXT Smoking devices under subclass 330 provided with means for treating the
    smoke.

    (1)     Note.  Included under this definition is means for only treating or
    medicating the smoke as well as for treating or medicating together with
    removing or separating a constituent material from the smoke.

    (2)     Note.  Compare subclass 173 of this class for smoking devices
    having means for washing the smoke.

    (3)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 194 and indented subclasses,
    for smoking devices having means for cooling the smoke or for insulating
    either the burning charge or the smoke to prevent cooling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198,    for smoke diluting means.

    331+,   for cigars and cigarettes having smoke treating means therein.

    352,    for tobacco compositions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 203.12+ for inhalers.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclass for a medicinal composition and especially subclasses 441+ and
    443+ for a carrier or vehicle impregnated with such a composition.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for a stock material in the form of a single or plural layer web or sheet,
    and especially subclasses 292.1+ for a composite web or sheet including a
    layer containing structurally defined fibers, and subclasses 364+ for a
    fiber or filament which is structurally defined (e.g., crimped, specific
    cross-section) or is coated.


CLS 131/201
TXT Smoking devices under subclass 200 comprising means for separating and
    retaining a constituent from the smoke.

    (1)     Note.  The patents in this and the indented subclasses must provide
    a trap chamber.  Where only the structure of the smoke passage is claimed,
    even though such smoke passage is disclosed as providing for the separation
    of ingredients from the smoke, but no trap chamber for the separated
    ingredients is used, the patents are placed in this class, subclasses 216+.
     A filter or absorber is considered to be a trap chamber for this
    definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331+    for smoke separators or treaters.


CLS 131/202
TXT Smoking devices under subclass 201 provided with a filter or an absorber,
    or both.

    (2)     Note.  For a smoke treater or separator device, per se, disclosed
    for use with a smoking device or product, see this class, subclasses 261+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for cigars and cigarettes having filters or absorbers therein.

    261,    for smoke treater or separator device, per se, disclosed for use
    with a smoking device or product.


CLS 131/203
TXT Smoke devices under subclass 202 provided with an absorber which performs
    no filtering operation.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes arrangements of smoke outlets to
    provide an absorbent layer of tobacco which will not be burned.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207,    where the absorbent materials is so arranged in the device as also
    to perform a filtering function.

    230,    for absorbent pipe bowl materials and compositions.


CLS 131/204
TXT Smoking devices under subclass 203 in which the absorbent material is in
    the form of a lining or a coating for either the bowl or the smoke passage
    in the stem.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219     and 220, for other linings or coatings.


CLS 131/205
TXT Smoking devices under subclass 202 in which the filter, filtering absorber,
    or trap supports the tobacco charge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183     and 224, for other tobacco supports.

    193,    for grates for supporting the burning  charge in base burner type
    devices.


CLS 131/206
TXT Smoking devices under subclass 205 which are also provided with a valve in
    the smoke- conducting passage or with a passage communicating with the
    smoke-conducting passage in addition to the charge inserting opening or the
    mouthpiece outlet, extending to the exterior of the smoking device and
    having a removable closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215.1+  and 223, for other smoking devices having a valve or external
    passage closure.


CLS 131/207
TXT Smoking devices under subclass 202 in which a filter made of absorbent
    material or made of granular or other finely divided material is provided.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203     and 204, where the absorbent material is not arranged in the
    smoking device to perform a filtering function but is so arranged as to
    provide an absorbing function only.

    205     and 206, for absorbent tobacco supports.


CLS 131/209
TXT Smoking devices under subclass 201 having a spiral passage for the smoke.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 217.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    339,    for cigars or cigarettes having spiral passages for the smoke.


CLS 131/210
TXT Smoking devices under subclass 201 having two or more devices arranged in
    the smoke passage in series to check or baffle the flow of smoke.


CLS 131/211
TXT Smoking devices under subclass 201 in which the trap chamber has extended
    into it at least one tube or nipple forming a continuation of the smoke
    passage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    339     for cigars or cigarettes having interior surfaces (e.g., baffles)
    predetermining smoke streak flow characteristics.


CLS 131/212.1
TXT Smoke direction changing:

    Subject matter under subclass 322 in which the path of the smoke through
    the smoking device is altered by (1) at least two tubes or nipples either
    extending into the trap chamber or overlapping one another, or (2) the
    position of a single tube or nipple with respect to the smoking passage.


CLS 131/212.2
TXT Concentric dusts:

    Subject matter under subclass 212.1 wherein one or more tubes are inserted
    in a trap chamber and arranged such that there is one common axis of
    symmetry for causing fluid cross-flow of smoke along the pathways formed
    thereby (i.e., alternate dirctions of flow along adjactent cocentric
    pathways).


CLS 131/213
TXT Smoking devices under subclass 201 having a plurality of smoke passages,
    connected in series, to extend in substantially opposite directions, so
    that the smoke reverses its direction of travel.

    (1)     Note.  Compare also with subclasses 212.1+ of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    197     and 218, for similarly arranged passages.


CLS 131/214
TXT Smoking devices under subclass 201 in which the charge receiving bowl in
    which the charge is burned is caused to be detachable from the neck cup.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222,    for other like devices.


CLS 131/215.1
TXT With valve in smoke path or removable, external passage closure:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the smoking device (1) is
    provided with a smoke regulating means in a smoke conducting passageway
    thereof, or (2) has a separate, detachable plug, cap, or cover for a
    passageway (in addition to any tobacco receiving inlet or mouthpiece outlet
    passageway) which communicates with the smoke conducting passageway and
    extends to the exterior of the smoking device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206     and 223, for other valve or external passage closures for a smoking
    device.


CLS 131/215.2
TXT With filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 215.1 wherein the smoking device includes
    means  for preventing the passage of certain components in the smoke.


CLS 131/215.3
TXT Valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 215.1 wherein the smoking device is provided
    with a smoke regulating means in a smoke conducting passageway thereof.


CLS 131/216
TXT Smoking devices under subclass 330 claiming the construction of the smoke
    passage.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 201 and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for a stock material in the form of a single or plural layer web or sheet,
    and especially subclasses 292.1+ for a composite web or sheet including a
    layer containing structurally defined fibers, and subclasses 364+ for a
    fiber or filament which is structurally defined (e.g., crimped, specific
    cross-section) or is coated.


CLS 131/217
TXT Smoking devices under subclass 216 in which the smoke passage or some part
    thereof is of spiral formation.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 209 and 339.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198.1+, for special air inlets to the smoke passage.


CLS 131/218
TXT Smoking devices under subclass 216 having a plurality of smoke passages,
    connected in series, arranged to extend in substantially opposite
    directions, so that the smoke reverses its direction of travel.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 197, 212.1+, and 213.


CLS 131/219
TXT Smoking devices under subclass 330 provided with either a lining for the
    interior or a coating for either the interior or exterior parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204,    for absorbent linings.


CLS 131/220
TXT Smoking devices under subclass 219 in which the bowl is either lined or
    coated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183,    for bowl linings removable for ejection of charge.

    196     and 197, where an inner bowl is provided spaced from the outer
    walls of the bowl.


CLS 131/221
TXT Smoking devices under subclass 330 in which the charge receiving bowl is
    constructed to be reversible in position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180,    for smoking devices having more than one bowl.


CLS 131/222
TXT Smoking devices under subclass 330 in which the bowl is constructed to be
    detachable from the neck cup.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 214.


CLS 131/223
TXT Smoking devices under subclass 330 provided with a valve in the
    smoke-conducting passage or having a passage communicating with the
    smoke-conducting passage in addition to the charge receiving inlet and the
    mouthpiece outlet, extending to the exterior of the smoking device and
    having a removable closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176,    for valved pipe covers.

    198.1+, for valved special air inlets.

    206     and 215.1+, for other like devices.


CLS 131/224
TXT Smoking devices under subclass 330 claiming the means by which the tobacco
    charge is supported.

    (1)     Note.  Where the support is constructed and arranged to eject the
    charge from the smoking device, see this class, subclass 183, and where the
    support is of the filter type, see this class, subclasses 205 and 206.


CLS 131/225
TXT Smoking devices under subclass 330 claiming the joints or connections
    between the parts.

    (1)     Note.  For pipe and rod joints of general application, see Classes
    277, Joint Packing, for joint packing, 285, Pipe Joints or Couplings, and
    403, Joints and Connections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    192,    for joints and connection permitting folding or collapsing of the
    smoking device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 108 and 109 for ferrules, rings
    and thimbles.


CLS 131/226
TXT Smoking devices under subclass 330 claiming the bowl structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191,    for smoking-tube bowls.

    196     and 197, for spaced bowls.

    199,    for longitudinally divided bowls.

    204     and 220, for lined or coated bowls.

    214     and 222, for bowls detachable for neck cups.


CLS 131/227
TXT Smoking devices under subclass 330 claiming the structure of the stem,
    including the mouthpiece or only the structure of either the external
    portion of the mouthpiece, namely, the bit, or the smoke discharging tip of
    the mouthpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199,    for longitudinally divided stems.

    204,    for stems with absorbent linings.

    219     and 220, for lined or coated stems.

    361,    and indented subclasses for tips and mouthpiece ends of cigars and
    cigarettes.


CLS 131/228
TXT Smoking devices under subclass 227 having a sleeve or cap for the bit or
    tip.


CLS 131/229
TXT Smoking devices under subclass 227 claiming merely the shape of the portion
    which is placed in the mouth or only the orifice structure or arrangement.


CLS 131/230
TXT Smoking devices under subclass 330 in which no significant structure of the
    smoking device is claimed but only the materials or compositions used.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    352,    for tobacco compositions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, and the notes to the class
    definition thereof, for other coating or plastic compositions.


CLS 131/231
TXT Appliances under subclass 329 combined with a receiver for smokers' refuse.

    (1)     Note.  Since most receptacles are capable of containing smokers'
    refuse, ash receptacles, per se, are classified in the appropriate
    receptacle classes. This subclass includes ash receivers only in
    combination as stated above.  For other combinations, see the remaining
    search notes to this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Exceptions are made in the case of subclasses 233 and 234,
    indented hereunder.  Although tip cutters, igniters, and scratching
    surfaces are not, per se, classified in Class 131 as tobacco-users'
    appliances, the combinations thereof with ash receivers are classified in
    subclasses 233 and 234 respectively where there is no subclass specifically
    providing therefor elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclass 258+, for spittoons.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 19.5, 117, 120, 125, 130,
    132, 135, and 136 for various combinations of a match packet (container or
    holder) with a debris receiver and subclass 496 for a pocket or personal
    use container for debris, per se.

    220,    Receptacles, particularly subclasses 501+, for intercommunicable
    compartment receptacles of general application.

    232,    Deposit and Collection Receptacles, subclasses 43.1+ for ash
    receivers of the deposit and collection type.


CLS 131/232
TXT Combinations under subclass 231 wherein the appliance is a smoking device
    cleaner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184.1+, and 243-246, for smoking device cleaners.


CLS 131/233
TXT Combinations under subclass 231 wherein the appliance is a device for
    perforating or slitting a cigar, or for removing the end therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248,    and indented subclasses, for tip cutters in other combinations.

    253,    and indented subclasses, for tip perforators or slitters, per se,
    and in other combinations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 109 and indented subclasses, for tip cutters, per
    se.


CLS 131/234
TXT Combinations under subclass 231 wherein the appliance is a means to ignite
    a tobacco article or with means providing a scratching surface for matches
    and the like.

    (1)     Note.  See note (2) under subclass 231 of this class.

    (2)     Note.  For combinations of igniters or scratching surfaces with
    smoking devices, see this class, subclass 185, and with cigar tip cutters,
    see this class, subclass 249.

    (3)     Note. For pocket and personal use receptacles having igniters, see
    Class 206, Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 98+, 108+, 112+, and
    137+ for a match packet (container or holder) with striker structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclass 643 for scratching
    surfaces, per se.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 136+ for article dispensing devices
    including igniting means.

    431,    Combustion, appropriate subclass, for a burner assembly, per se.


CLS 131/235.1
TXT Extinguisher:

    Subject matter under subclass 231 wherein the appliance is particularly
    adapted to terminate the burning of a lighted tobacco article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256,    for an extinguisher, per se.


CLS 131/236
TXT Combinations under subclass 235.1 wherein the extinguisher includes a body
    of liquid or a moistened member.


CLS 131/237
TXT Combinations under subclass 235.1 wherein the extinguisher includes at
    least one member which is movable relative to the receiver to carry out the
    extinguishing operation.


CLS 131/237.5
TXT Split tube type:

    Subject matter under subclass 235.1 wherein the appliance in made from a
    plurality of individual arcuate segments which form a longitudinally
    divided conduit to help terminate the burning of the lighted tobacco
    article.


CLS 131/238
TXT Combinations under subclass 231 in which in addition to the tobacco users'
    appliance, the ash receiver is combined with a device having independent
    utility.


CLS 131/239
TXT Combinations under subclass 238 wherein the device combined with the ash
    receiver and tobacco users' appliance comprises a match receptacle or means
    for mounting a match holder.

    (1)     Note.  For other match holders or receptacles, see this class,
    subclass 251, and Class 206, Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 117,
    120, 125, 130, 132, 135, and 136 for a match packet (container or holder)
    with a debris receiver.


CLS 131/240.1
TXT Cigar, cigarette, or smoking device rest or holder:

    Subject matter under subclass 231 wherein the appliance is a means to
    support a smoking device or lighted tobacco artical.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257+,   for a cigar, cigarette, or smoking device support, per se.


CLS 131/241
TXT Combinations under subclass 240.1 provided with special means for
    supporting the receiver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 25+ for a
    horizontal planar supporting surface combined with a receptacle.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 19.5 for vehicle attached
    receptacles.

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses for receptacle stands and
    brackets, per se.


CLS 131/242
TXT Combinations under subclass 240.1 wherein the ash receiver includes a
    closure or a covered compartment.

    (1)     Note.  For compartmented receptacles, see Class 220, Receptacles,
    subclasses 500 and indented subclasses, particularly subclasses 501+.
    Tobacco users' appliances, Smoking device cleaners.  Devices under subclass
    329 peculiarly adapted for use in cleaning smoking residue from smoking
    devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184.1+,  for smoking devices comined withe cleaners and subclass 232 for
    smoking device cleaners in combination with ash receivers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, for cleaning implements
    in general and subclasses 104.03+ in particular.


CLS 131/242.5
TXT With cigar or cigarette ejector, dumper, or advancer:

    Subject matter under subclass 240.1 wherein the appliance includes means to
    force, drop, or propel a lighted tobacco article into or towards the refuse
    reciever.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237,    for a member which moves to carry out an extinguishing operation.


CLS 131/242.6
TXT With grid or grille:

    Subject matter under subclass 240.1 wherein the appliance includes a
    grating type structure through which ashes may fall.

    (1)     Note.  If the grid or grille is also used as a rest or holder it
    must be capable of supporting the cigar, cigarette, or smoking device at
    three or more spaced locations to be properly considered a grid or grille
    hereunder.

    (2)     Note.  Spiral shaped coils which support a cigar, cigarette, or
    smoking device along the coil axis or tangential to the surface of the
    coils are proper for this subclass but coils which only support the cigar,
    cigarette, or smoking device between the individual coils (i.e., transverse
    to the coil axis) are not proper hereunder.


CLS 131/243
TXT Smoking device cleaners combined with devices having other uses, and
    combinations of a plurality of types of smoking device cleaners.


CLS 131/244
TXT Smoking device cleaners for cleaning by means of fluid flow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 304, 316.1+,
    395+, and 406+ for air blast and/or suction devices for cleaning hollow
    work other than smoking devices.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclass 8 for a coupling comprising
    means to connect a faucet to a member of a smoking device (e.g., pipe bowl
    or stem), and subclasses 148.22+ for serial diverse couplings of diverse
    size or shape (e.g., reducer).


CLS 131/245
TXT Smoking device cleaners comprising means to be passed through a smoking
    device stem to clean residue therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243,    for stem cleaners in combination.


CLS 131/246
TXT Smoking device cleaners comprising means for cleaning the bowl of a smoking
    device. These are for the most part reamers or scrapers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243,    for bowl cleaners in combination.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 104.09 and
    236.01+ and appropriate indented subclasses for pipe reaming or scraping
    devices or general applications.


CLS 131/247
TXT Devices under subclass 329 comprising means for compacting material within
    the bowl of a smoking device and combinations including such devices, not
    otherwise provided for.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177     and 184.1+, for combinations of smoking device and tamper.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacles and Packages, subclass 41.1, for tobacco
    dispensing receptacles having means to eject tobacco from the receptacle
    into a pipe, which ejectors may be employed to tamp.

    81,     Tools, subclass 488 for miscellaneous hand tools, including tampers.


CLS 131/248
TXT Combinations under subclass 329 including as one element means for cutting
    the end from a cigar or cigarette.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     63, 64, 65, 83, and 91, for cigar and cigarette making machines
    equipped with tip cutters.

    233,    for cigar and cigarette end cutters combined with means to receive
    ashes and/or the cut off portion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 109+ for tip cutters, per se.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 461 for changing
    exhibitors operated by a cigar cutter or lighter.

    83,     Cutting, for cutters of that class (83) type which include cigar
    end cutters.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 635+ for food ends
    cutters.


CLS 131/249
TXT Combinations under subclass 248 wherein the tip cutter is combined with
    means to ignite a tobacco article or with means providing a scratching
    surface for matches and the like.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    234.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclass 48 for scratching surfaces,
    per se.

    431,    Combustion, appropriate subclass for a burner assembly, per se.


CLS 131/250
TXT Combinations under subclass 248 in which the tip cutter is combined with a
    receptacle or holder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 238+ for pocket and
    personal use tobacco receptacles provided with cutters other than cigar or
    cigarette end cutters.


CLS 131/250.1
TXT Combinations under subclass 250 in which the receptacle or holder is
    provided with a discharge means which separates a single or a limited
    number of articles from the supply in said receptacle or holder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for article dispensing
    in general and including the cigar or cigarette dispensing means, per se,
    which is a subcombination of the subject matter of this subclass.


CLS 131/251
TXT Combinations under subclass 250 in which the receptacle combined with the
    tip cutter is a match receptacle or holder.

    (1)     Note.  For other match holders or receptacles, see this class,
    subclass 239, and Class 206, Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 96+.


CLS 131/252
TXT Combinations under subclass 248 wherein the tip cutter is combined with a
    cigar tip perforator or slitter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    253,    for cigar tip perforators, per se, and in other combinations.


CLS 131/253
TXT Devices under subclass 329 comprising means for perforating or slitting
    cigar tips and combinations including such devices not elsewhere provided
    for.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83.1,   for combinations of molding and perforating.

    92,     for means to tuck, fold, crimp, or smooth a cigar or cigarette tip
    combined with means to perforate the end thereof.

    188,    for a cigar or cigarette holder combined with a tip perforator.

    233,    for combinations of ash receivers with perforators or slitters.

    347     and 363, for cigars with end protectors having pins to enter the
    cigar end.


CLS 131/254
TXT Devices under subclass 253 comprising pin or drill means to perforate the
    cigar tip.

    (1)     Note.  See the search notes under subclass 253 of this class.


CLS 131/255
TXT Devices under subclass 253 wherein the perforator comprises a punch which
    removes a core from the tobacco article.

    (1)     Note.  See the search notes under subclass 253 of this class.


CLS 131/256
TXT Devices under subclass 329 comprising means particularly adapted to
    extinguish a lighted tobacco article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235.1+, for extinguishers combined with ash receivers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 144+ for an extinguisher for a fuel burner
    or candle.


CLS 131/257
TXT Devices under subclass 329 comprising means for supporting a single smoking
    device or providing a rest or holder for lighted tobacco articles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240.1+, for supports and rests combined with ash receivers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 3.1+ for article holders
    in general.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 60+, and 70 for slender article
    supports of general utility.


CLS 131/258
TXT Devices under subclass 257 in which the support, rest or holder is mounted
    on a finger encircling member.

    (2)     Note.  Compare with Class 294, Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line
    Implements, subclass 25.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, appropriate subclasses for finger
    attached package and article carriers.


CLS 131/259
TXT Devices under subclass 257 in which the support, rest or holder is mounted
    on or forms a part of a staff member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 19.1+, for
    staff type handling devices in general.


CLS 131/260
TXT Devices under subclass 257 comprising means to support a single smoking
    device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186,    for the combination of a smoking device with means to support the
    device upon the chin of a user.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, particularly subclasses 60 and 70 for racks for
    supporting a plurality of smoking devices.


CLS 131/270
TXT ANTISMOKING PRODUCT OR DEVICE, I.E., DETERENT:

    Product or device under the class definition which discourage, break, or
    otherwise deter the smoking habit.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes concepts relating to breaking of the
    smoking habit utilizing such concepts as of messages, shocking the user by
    means of electricity, smoke cartridges, tobacco volatilization, i.e., no
    combustion, and smoking materials which leave an undesirable taste.  This
    subclass also includes the method of using such devices or products.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Composition, appropriate
    subclasses for a composition for treating the human body for addiction to
    tobacco.


CLS 131/271
TXT No smoke to user:

    Device or product under subclass 270 wherein smoke is produced, but such
    smoke does not reach the mouth of the user.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 24+ for smoke-producing toys.


CLS 131/272
TXT Smoke to air ratio controlled:

    Device or product under subclass 270 wherein the air component of the
    smoke-air mixture reaching the user, is gradually increased in order to
    reduce the amount of smoke inhaled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198.1+, for a smoker's appliance having controlled air inlets.

    331,    for smoke separation and treating.


CLS 131/273
TXT Smoking simulator:

    Device or product under subclass 270 wherein the smoking of a smoking
    device is simulated or pretended by the use of an inhaler resembling a
    cigar, cigarette, or pipe.

    (1)     Note.  The inhalers of this subclass may include flavoring agents,
    aromatization agents, medicaments, etc., but do not employ a lighted
    product or smoke of any kind.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    274,    for tobacco products including flavoring agents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, appropriate subclasses for medicament inhalers not
    employed in the breaking of the smoking habit.


CLS 131/274
TXT PRODUCT OR DEVICE HAVING IDENTIFIABLE CONSTITUENT TO FLAVOR OR ENHANCE
    FLAVOR:

    Product or device under the class definition having a chemically definable
    or identifiable constituent or component which is present to flavor or
    enhance the flavor of the tobacco.

    (1)     Note.  Nicotine, in any form, is not considered a flavorant or
    flavor enhancer.


CLS 131/275
TXT Naturally occurring or synthetic duplicate:

    Product or device under subclass 274 wherein the flavorant or flavor
    enhancer occurs naturally, or is a synthetically produced duplicate of that
    which occurs naturally.


CLS 131/276
TXT Organic compound:

    Product or device under subclass 274 wherein the flavorant or flavor
    enhancer is a carbon containing compound.


CLS 131/277
TXT Heterocyclic:

    Product or device under subclass 276 wherein the organic compound is
    characterized by a ring composed of atoms of more than one kind.


CLS 131/278
TXT Containing nitrogen as a hetro atom:

    Product or device under subclass 277 wherein one of the atoms in the ring
    is a nitrogen atom.


CLS 131/279
TXT Containing a sulphur atom:

    Product or device under subclass 276 wherein the organic flavorant or
    flavor enhancer contains sulphur.


CLS 131/280
TXT CIGAR OR CIGARETTE MAKING:

    Process or apparatus under the class definition relating to the manufacture
    of smoking products commonly known as cigars or cigarettes, or like tobacco
    or tobacco substitute products, and subcombinations thereof not elsewhere
    provided for.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290,    for the treatment of finished tobacco products.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, for methods and apparatus for encompassing or
    encasing goods or materials with a separate cover or band which serves as
    means for identifying, protecting, or unit handling of the goods so
    packaged.  See particularly subclasses 396+ and 582+ for band type and
    casing.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for methods and
    apparatus for measuring or testing cigars, cigarettes, or like tobacco
    products.

    177,    Weighing Scales, appropriate subclasses for devices which weigh
    tobacco or tobacco products.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, for devices of that
    class relating to cigars or cigarettes.

    222,    Dispensing, for tobacco dispensing or feeding devices, per se.


CLS 131/281
TXT Including perforating:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 280 including means for penetrating,
    slitting, or otherwise perforating the tobacco product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    350,    for a hand held or manipulated tobacco product perforator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclasses for perforating by
    inductive heating, microwave heating, and capacitive dielectric heating.


CLS 131/282
TXT Including arranging, collecting, or delivering:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 280 including means to manipulate the
    cigar or cigarette product in a way so as to arrange the product in a given
    manner, collect the product in a given way, or deliver the product to a
    given station.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses for a power-driven
    conveyor in combination with a nominally recited tobacco product-making
    apparatus.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, appropriate subclasses for article
    piling or arranging means in combination with a nominally recited tobacco
    product-making apparatus.


CLS 131/283
TXT And packing:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 282 including means to pack or package
    the tobacco product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses
    137, 148, and 444, each relating to cigarette-type articles.


CLS 131/284
TXT With coating or printing:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 280 including means to perform a
    printing or coating operation on the tobacco product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88+,    for coating the tip of a cigar or cigarette.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, appropriate subclasses for printing apparatus in
    combination with a nominally recited tobacco product-making apparatus.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for coating apparatus,
    per se.


CLS 131/285
TXT Including fingerlike member which alternately engages and releases product:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 280 in which one or more fingerlike
    members alternately engage and release the tobacco product or part thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The devices of this subclass usually perform a shaping,
    wrapping, or similar function on the tobacco product.


CLS 131/286
TXT With cleaning away unwanted product component, e.g., gum or adhesive:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 280 including means to cleanse the
    tobacco product-making apparatus of unwanted contaminations such as gum or
    adhesive.


CLS 131/287
TXT By pneumatic means:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 286 wherein the cleansing involves a
    blown or pressurized gas.


CLS 131/288
TXT By liquid means:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 286 wherein the cleansing involves a
    liquid.


CLS 131/289
TXT By scraping, wiping, etc.:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 286 wherein the cleansing involves a
    physical act of removal, such as scraping, wiping, or the like.


CLS 131/290
TXT TOBACCO TREATMENT:

    Process or apparatus under the class definition relating to the physical or
    chemical treatment of tobacco, either prior or subsequent to the
    manufacture thereof into a tobacco product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     62+ and 79, for cigar and cigarette making combined with a tobacco
    treatment.

    281,    for cigar and cigarette making including the step of perforating.

    286,    for cigar and cigarette making including the step of cleaning away
    an unwanted tobacco product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses
    for the drying of tobacco, per se.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, appropriate subclasses for tobacco plant husbandry.

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 27.5 for tobacco harvesting.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 28+ for
    tobacco spinning.

    432,    Heating, subclass 500 for tobacco barns.

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, subclasses 123+ for the stripping of
    tobacco leaves from the stalk.


CLS 131/291
TXT Puffing:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 290 designed to effect an increase in
    the volume of the tobacco.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 323.4+ for puffing
    apparatus.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 445+ for the puffing of food by heating.


CLS 131/292
TXT Including freeze drying:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 291 including the step of drying the
    tobacco in a frozen state under high vacuum.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 245+ for
    drying by subjecting material to electrical energy; and subclasses 266+ and
    519+ for the use of radiant energy in drying.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 451 for treating of food
    with radiant energy.


CLS 131/293
TXT By chemical reaction:

    Process or Apparatus under subclass 291 wherein puffing is accomplished by
    a chemical reaction within or on the tobacco.

    (1)     Note.  The chemical reaction can be the result of the particular
    reactant or reactants reacting with each other or with the tobacco.


CLS 131/294
TXT By radiant energy:

    Process and apparatus under subclass 291 wherein the puffing is
    accomplished by subjecting the tobacco to electromagnetic wave energy.


CLS 131/295
TXT By high frequency field:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 291 wherein puffing is accomplished by
    induction or dielectric heating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 600+ for inductive heating, subclasses
    678+ for microwave heating, and subclasses 764+ for capacitive dielectric
    heating.


CLS 131/296
TXT By contact with hot gaseous medium:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 291 wherein the puffing is accomplished
    by contacting the tobacco with a hot gas.


CLS 131/297
TXT Extraction of component, other than moisture, by contact with diverse
    medium:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 290 wherein components or ingredients
    of tobacco, other than moisture or water, are extracted or absorbed, by
    contacting the tobacco with a separate and distinct medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    308,    for treating tobacco with a particular enzyme.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry:  Analytical and Physical Processes, subclass 295 for
    extraction by a crystallization technique.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, appropriate
    subclasses for the involvement of fermentation.

    546,    Organic Compounds, subclass 279.4 for the production of nicotine
    containing extracts from tobacco.


CLS 131/298
TXT By organic solvent:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 297 wherein the diverse medium is a
    solvent containing a carbon compound.


CLS 131/299
TXT With electrical or radiant energy:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 290 wherein the tobacco treatment
    includes the application of electrical or radiant energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses  93, 245+,
    266+, and 519+, for drying including the use of electrical or radiant
    energy.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 451 for apparatus to
    treat food with electric or radiant energy.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 688+ for the
    electrolytic treatment of organic materials.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, appropriate subclasses for the preserving,
    disinfecting, and sterilizing of organic plant material.


CLS 131/300
TXT With fluid or fluent material:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 290 for treating by subjecting the
    tobacco to the action of a flowing or flowable material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 359 for
    treating in a fluidized bed; and appropriate subclasses for tobacco drying.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 5+ for treating
    textiles with gas, steam, or mist.

    99,     Food and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 323.1+ for gas treating
    of food.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for coating
    or impregnating cigars or cigarettes with flavoring materials.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses
    for fluid applying apparatus, per se.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 31+ for cabinet structures
    including the gas or vapor treatment of material.


CLS 131/301
TXT Including means to create a vacuum:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 300 including means to create a
    negative atmospheric pressure.


CLS 131/302
TXT Including means to circulate fluid:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 300 wherein means is provided to
    circulate the fluent material.


CLS 131/303
TXT And temperature or humidity control of fluid:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 302 including means to control or
    regulate the temperature or humidity of the fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, appropriate
    subclasses for systems to regulate temperature or humidity in general.


CLS 131/304
TXT Including means to convey tobacco:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 302 including means to convey the
    tobacco to, through, or from the treating zone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304+,   for similar conveying structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, for power-driven conveyors, per se.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, for article handling, per se.


CLS 131/305
TXT Within rotary drum-type apparatus:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 300 wherein the treatment takes place
    within a drum which rotates to agitate the materials and produce intimate
    association.


CLS 131/306
TXT Including means to convey tobacco:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 300 including means to convey the
    tobacco, into, through, or from the treatment zone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302,    for conveying means employed with fluid circulation.


CLS 131/307
TXT Including expressing rolls:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 306 wherein the tobacco is conveyed
    through rolls after the fluid treatment to express the excess fluid
    therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 104+ for presses having drain means for the
    expressed fluid; subclass 138 for fluid expressing while conveying; and
    subclasses 155+ for roll-type presses.


CLS 131/308
TXT Containing enzymes to cause fermentation:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 300 wherein the treating fluid contains
    any one of a number of complex proteins commonly known as enzymes, to cause
    or aid in fermentation.


CLS 131/309
TXT Other than water, steam, or air:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 300 wherein the fluid or fluent
    material is a material other than water, steam, or air.


CLS 131/310
TXT Organic:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 309 wherein the fluid or fluent
    material contains a carbon compound.


CLS 131/311
TXT Including leaf disintegration:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 290 wherein means are employed to break
    the tobacco into small particles or otherwise destroy the unity or
    integrity thereof.


CLS 131/312
TXT And separation of fibers of different character:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 311 including means to separate fibers
    of known or identifiable character.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for fiber separation combined with tobacco feeding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses for separating, per se.


CLS 131/313
TXT Leaf stemming:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 290 for removing the stem from a
    tobacco leaf.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes a process or apparatus for reducing
    the leaf stem by abrading or attrition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    311+,   for stemming by disintegration.


CLS 131/314
TXT With stem cleaning:

    Product or apparatus under subclass 313 wherein the stem is cleansed before
    or after removal.


CLS 131/315
TXT And straightening, smoothing, flattening, or cleaning:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 313 wherein the tobacco leaf is further
    treated by a straightening, smoothing, flattening, or cleaning action.


CLS 131/316
TXT Booking:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 315 wherein the tobacco leaves are
    superposed to form a stack commonly known in the art as a book.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    326,    for booking a tobacco leaf that has not been stemmed.


CLS 131/317
TXT Stemmed by rotary or endless cutter:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 316 wherein the stem is removed by a
    cutter which is endless in form or which rotates.


CLS 131/318
TXT By fluid current:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 313 wherein the stem is removed from
    the tobacco leaf by a blast of fluid current.


CLS 131/319
TXT By tearing:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 313 wherein the stem is removed from
    the tobacco leaf by a tearing or ripping operation.


CLS 131/320
TXT Including transverse stem cutting:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 319 wherein the stem is severed
    transversely by a cutting device.


CLS 131/321
TXT Card clothing type:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 319 wherein the tobacco leaf stem is
    held and the leaf portion is torn away from the stem by means of rotating
    fingerlike devices.


CLS 131/322
TXT By cutting:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 313 wherein the stem and leaf material
    are separated by a cutting action.


CLS 131/323
TXT Stem die type:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 322 wherein the stem is severed from
    the leaf by die cutters which approximate the cross-sectional shape of the
    stem.


CLS 131/324
TXT Leaf straightening, brushing, smoothing, rolling, corrugating, or
    flattening with or without stem crushing:

    Process and apparatus under subclass 290 for performing operations on leaf
    tobacco such as straightening, smoothing, brushing, rolling, or stem
    crushing, corrugating, flattening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    307,    for process and apparatus for moistening tobacco and subsequently
    expressing the excess moisture therefrom the use of rolls.

    315+,   for process and apparatus for smoothing or cleaning leaf tobacco in
    combination with the removal of stems therefrom.


CLS 131/325
TXT And cleaning:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 324 wherein the tobacco leaf is
    cleansed.


CLS 131/326
TXT Booking:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 324 wherein the leaves are superposed
    to form a stack commonly known in the art as a book.


CLS 131/327
TXT Leaf associating or disassociating:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 290 for bringing together and bundling
    leaf tobacco or for separating or segregating masses of leaves.

    (1)     Note.  The association of leaves may be for the purpose of blending
    tobaccos.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses for leaf sorting.


CLS 131/328
TXT MAKING OR USING TOBACCO USERS' APPLIANCE:

    Process or apparatus under the class definition specifically designed to
    make or use an appliance, e.g., pipe or cigarette holder, which is normally
    used by a use of tobacco.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes devices for and methods of breaking
    in or presmoking pipes.  Also included herein are miscellaneous apparatus
    and process of manufacturing tobacco users' appliances not elsewhere
    provided for.


CLS 131/329
TXT TOBACCO USERS' APPLIANCE:

    Device under the class definition peculiarly adapted for use by a user of
    tobacco.


CLS 131/330
TXT Device used for smoking:

    Appliance under subclass 329 designed to burn tobacco or a substitute
    material, and delivers the products of combustion to the appliance user.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this and the indented subclasses are devices for
    receiving or holding tobacco or a substitute material in loose or cartridge
    form, means for burning the material, and means for conveying the product
    of combustion, usually to the mouth of the user, and subcombinations of
    such devices not elsewhere provided for.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329,    for devices which distill rather than burn tobacco or a tobacco
    substitute.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclass 6 for bubble blowing pipes.


CLS 131/331
TXT SMOKE SEPARATOR OR TREATER:

    Product or process under the class definition comprising (a)  means for
    removing or separating a constituent material from tobacco smoke, or (b)
    means for adding a constituent or otherwise treating tobacco smoke.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is stock material which is solely
    disclosed as being filter material for a smoking product or device.  Such
    material requiring no treatment other than cutting or altering to proper
    size.

    (2)     Note.  Also included in this subclass is a special arrangement of
    tobacco in a portion of the cigar or cigarette which is disclosed as a
    smoke separator or filter, but which may be burned, provided this portion
    is distinguished from the remainder of the cigar or cigarette as a separate
    segment or mass.

    (3)     Note.  The method of making a smoke separator, e.g., filter, and
    apparatus for practicing the method are not included under this subclass
    and will be found in the manufacturing class appropriate to the method,
    apparatus, or material involved.


CLS 131/332
TXT Having a polymer:

    Product or process under subclass 331 wherein the means comprises a
    chemical composition comprising the union of a considerable number of
    repeated structural units.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses for the
    specific polymer.


CLS 131/333
TXT By electric, magnetic, or radioactive action:

    Product or process under subclass 331 wherein separation is effected due to
    the presence of a charged electric field, magnetic field, or the presence
    of alpha, beta, or gamma rays.


CLS 131/334
TXT By chemical reaction, e.g., ion-exchange, chelating, catalytic, etc.:

    Product or process under subclass 331 wherein separation is effected by a
    chemical reaction which includes the tobacco smoke.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of chemical reactions which will be found under
    this subclass are ion-exchange reactions, chelating reactions, catalytic
    conversions, and oxidation reduction systems, etc.


CLS 131/335
TXT By adding constituent to smoke stream:

    Product or process under subclass 331 wherein the separator or treater is a
    means which allows the addition of a heretofore not present constituent to
    the smoke stream.


CLS 131/336
TXT Air:

    Product or process under subclass 335 wherein the constituent added is air.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198.1+, for air inlets in a cigar holder, cigarette holder, or pipe.

    272,    for antismoking devices wherein the smoke to air ratio is
    controlled.


CLS 131/337
TXT Having destructible, fusible, soluble, or deformable container for
    treatment material:

    Product or process under subclass 335 wherein a container is provided for
    the constituent, at least a portion of a wall of the container being
    intended to be destroyed, melted, dissolved, or otherwise deformed, in
    order to release the contents into the product.


CLS 131/338
TXT Having means to vary smoke flow rate:

    Product or process under subclass 331 having means to cause variations in
    the smoke stream velocity.


CLS 131/339
TXT Interior surface causes particular flow characteristic:

    Product or process under subclass 331 wherein the means has an internal
    cavity through which the smoke passes, the cavity having a surface on which
    the smoke impinges, the surface causing the smoke to assume a preset or
    prearranged flow path, or flow in a prescribed manner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209     through 213, 217, and 218, for smoking device, e.g., pipe, having a
    similar structure for separating the constituent of the smoke.


CLS 131/340
TXT By use of specific filter mass:

    Product or process under subclass 339 wherein the surface is part of a
    particular filter mass, the mass being specifically disclosed in an
    arrangement to cause the flow of smoke to follow a predetermined or
    prearranged path.


CLS 131/341
TXT Plural diverse elements:

    Product or apparatus under subclass 331 wherein the means comprises at
    least two components which differ from each other in either composition,
    shape, or form.


CLS 131/342
TXT Including particulate material:

    Product or process under subclass 341 wherein at least one of the elements
    comprises a plurality of small particles.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is tobacco in flake form.


CLS 131/343
TXT Plasticizer or adhesive coating:

    Product or process under subclass 341 wherein one element is a coating or
    covering for another element, the coating or covering serving to soften,
    bond, bind, or enhance filtration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    355,    for tobacco compositions in which the tobacco fibers carry an
    adhesive coating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclass 524 for gas separating media of general
    utility comprising a coating impregnant or bonding agent.

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclasses.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a coated or impregnated strand or fiber.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, appropriate subclasses for ceramic
    compositions.


CLS 131/344
TXT Occupying plural, separate, distinct zones:

    Product or process under subclass 341 wherein the diverse elements occupy
    separate and distinct clearly identifiable areas.


CLS 131/345
TXT Including a cellulose ester or ether:

    Product or process under subclass 331 including (a) cellulose which has
    been treated with an acid to form a cellulose ester, or (b) cellulose which
    has been treated with an alcohol to form a cellulose ether.


CLS 131/346
TXT With indicator or inspection means:

    Product or process under subclass 331 including means to indicate to the
    user that deleterious material has been separated from the smoke screen, or
    means to inspect the deleterious material that has been separated.


CLS 131/347
TXT TOBACCO OR TOBACCO SUBSTITUTE PRODUCT OR COMPONENT PART THEREOF:

    Products under the class definition which contain tobacco or a tobacco
    substitute, and are intended for personal use for smoking, chewing, or for
    use as snuff.

    (1)     Note.  Component parts of tobacco products will be found in this
    and the indented subclasses when such component parts are not elsewhere
    classifiable.


CLS 131/348
TXT Pipe cartridges:

    Product under subclass 347 specifically designed to form a charge for a
    smoking pipe.


CLS 131/349
TXT With ash retainer or means to prevent or retard burning:

    Product under subclass 347 including means to retain or receive the burnt
    ash of the consumed tobacco product or means to prevent, retard, or
    extinguish combustion.


CLS 131/350
TXT With means to pierce or protect cigar end structure:

    Product under subclass 347 including means to form a hole in the end of a
    cigar or protect the end of the cigar from accidental damage.


CLS 131/351
TXT With means to facilitate ignition:

    Product under subclass 347 including means to facilitate the ignition
    thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are smoking products combined with
    pyrophoric or easily ignitable material and products combined with match
    scratchers or analogous means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for the application of ignition tips to cigars or cigarettes.


CLS 131/352
TXT Compositions, e.g., smoking or chewing mixture or medium:

    Products under subclass 347 useable for smoking, chewing, or as snuff.


CLS 131/353
TXT Reconstituted tobacco:

    Compositions under subclass 352 comprising sheet, strip, or leaflike
    products formed from a combination of two or more pieces of tobacco in any
    form, such pieces being united by adhesive or cohesive forces.


CLS 131/354
TXT Material coated with tobacco dust or particle:

    Compositions under subclass 353 wherein a substraight or web is coated with
    tobacco dust or particles.

    (1)     Note.  The tobacco substrate or web may be of tobacco or nontobacco
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    371,    for the dust impingement method or apparatus for making
    reconstituted tobacco.


CLS 131/355
TXT Tobacco particles bonded by nontobacco adhesive:

    Reconstituted tobacco under subclass 353 wherein the adhesive used is
    derived from a nontobacco source.


CLS 131/356
TXT Having tobacco extracts or tobacco paste:

    Compositions under subclass 353 wherein a substrate is treated with a
    substance that has been extracted from tobacco or with a paste made from
    tobacco particles.

    (1)     Note.  The substrate may be tobacco or nontobacco material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    373,    for method or apparatus of impregnating a web with tobacco paste.


CLS 131/357
TXT Tobacco sheet formed from wet ground or wet beaten tobacco:

    Compositions under subclass 353 wherein tobacco is ground or beaten in or
    underwater to produce a gelatinous mass, the mass then being formed and
    dried into a reconstituted product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370,    374 and 375, for process and apparatus for making reconstituted
    tobacco of this type.


CLS 131/358
TXT Wrapper:

    Reconstituted tobacco under subclass 353 used as a wrapper for a tobacco
    product, e.g., cigar wrapper.


CLS 131/359
TXT Tobacco substitute, i.e., nontobacco:

    Compositions under subclass 352 which are of a composition other than
    tobacco.


CLS 131/360
TXT Cigar or cigarette:

    Product under subclass 347 which are tubular in physical shape, and are
    designed to be ignited at one end and having the smoker draw the smoke
    through to the other end.


CLS 131/361
TXT End structure:

    Product under subclass 360 wherein significance is attributed to the
    structure at either end of the cigar or cigarette.


CLS 131/362
TXT Coated or impregnated:

    Products under subclass 361 wherein the end structure has been treated by
    coating or impregnating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290+,   for process and apparatus for treating tobacco products.


CLS 131/363
TXT Filler penetrating:

    Products under subclass 361 wherein the end structure is at least partially
    surrounded by a portion of the filler.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188+,   for cigar and cigarette holders with end perforators.


CLS 131/364
TXT Blank or filler:

    Product under subclass 360 wherein significance is attributed to that
    portion of the cigar or cigarette which is left when the wrapper material
    is removed.


CLS 131/365
TXT Wrapper or binder:

    Product under subclass 360 wherein the significance is attributed to that
    portion of the cigar or cigarette which wraps the blank or filler material.


CLS 131/366
TXT Plug tobacco:

    Product under subclass 347 wherein tobacco has been compressed into a dense
    mass commonly known as a plug.

    (1)     Note.  Tobacco in this form is usually known as chewing tobacco and
    is not intended for smoking.


CLS 131/367
TXT Having specific shape:

    Plug tobacco under subclass 366 wherein significance is attributed to the
    shape of the plug.


CLS 131/368
TXT With identification, marking, label, or tag:

    Plug tobacco under subclass 366 wherein the plug is provided with some form
    of marking, label, tag, or other identification.


CLS 131/369
TXT METHOD OR APPARATUS FOR MAKING TOBACCO SUBSTITUTE:

    Method or apparatus under the class definition for making particles, or
    sheet, strip, or leaflike products from nontobacco material wherein the
    nontobacco material is to be used as a substitute for tobacco.


CLS 131/370
TXT METHOD OR APPARATUS FOR MAKING RECONSTITUTED TOBACCO:

    Method or apparatus under the class definition for making sheet, strip, or
    leaflike products from a combination of two or more pieces of tobacco in
    any form, such pieces being united by adhesive or cohesive forces.


CLS 131/371
TXT Dust impingement:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 370 wherein ground tobacco is applied
    to a surface having adhesive thereon, and then allowing the mixture to dry.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    354,    for compositions of this type, per se.


CLS 131/372
TXT Slurry:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 370 wherein tobacco particles are mixed
    into a flowable solution, the solution then being poured out onto a surface
    and allowed to dry.

    (1)     Note.  The solution may contain adhesive, reinforcing fibers, etc.


CLS 131/373
TXT Impregnation of web:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 370 wherein a web of material is
    impregnated with a tobacco paste and allowed to dry.

    (1)     Note.  The paste is usually a suspension of tobacco dust or
    particles and other additives such as adhesive.


CLS 131/374
TXT Paper process:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 370 wherein the reconstituted tobacco
    is manufactured by a paper-making method or apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, appropriate subclasses for the
    particular paper-making process or apparatus.


CLS 131/375
TXT Extrusion:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 370 wherein tobacco particles are mixed
    with an adhesive and pushed or forced through an orifice onto a sheet for
    drying.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 131/900
TXT LIQUIFIED GAS EMPLOYED IN PUFFING TOBACCO:

    Process or apparatus related to the puffing of tobacco wherein a gas in
    liquid form is employed.


CLS 131/901
TXT ORGANIC LIQUID EMPLOYED IN PUFFING TOBACCO:

    Process or aparatus wherein a liquid containing a carbon compound is
    employed in the puffing of tobacco.


CLS 131/902
TXT INORGANIC CHEMICAL AGENTS EMPLOYED IN PUFFING TOBACCO:

    Process or apparatus wherein noncarbon containing chemical agents are
    employed in the puffing of tobacco.


CLS 131/903
TXT FIXING THE PRODUCT AFTER PUFFING:

    Process or apparatus wherein previously puffed tobacco is treated to allow
    it to retain its puffed structure and preclude shrinking.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    292,    for a freeze drying step in a puffing treatment.


CLS 131/904
TXT PNEUMATIC MEANS FOR SENSING CONDITION OR CHARACTERISTIC:

    Process or apparatus relating to the manufacture of a tobacco product
    wherein a particular characteristic or condition is sensed, the sensing
    means being wholly or partly pneumatic.

    (1)     Note.  Means responsive to the condition or characteristic sensed
    to control the operation of the product maker is also included herein.


CLS 131/905
TXT RADIATION SOURCE FOR SENSING CONDITION OR CHARACTERISTIC:

    Process or apparatus relating to the manufacture of a tobacco product
    wherein a particular condition or characteristic is sensed by means
    employing an element which emits alpha, beta, or gamma rays.


CLS 131/906
TXT SENSING CONDITION OR CHARACTERISTIC OF CONTINUOUS TOBACCO ROD:

    Process or apparatus relating to the manufacture of a tobacco product
    wherein a condition or characteristic of a continuous tobacco rod, usually
    of cigarette material, is sensed.


CLS 131/907
TXT EJECTION OR REJECTION OF FINISHED ARTICLE DUE TO DETECTED OR SENSED
    CONDITION:

    Process or apparatus relating to the manufacture of a tobacco product
    wherein a means is employed to sense a particular condition, and a reaction
    means ejects or rejects the finished tobacco product due to the condition
    sensed.


CLS 131/908
TXT SENSING UNIQUE CHARACTERISTIC OR SPECIFIC CONDITION OF FINISHED PRODUCT:

    Process or apparatus relating to the manufacture of a tobacco product
    wherein means are employed to sense a particular characteristic or a
    specific condition of a finished product, examples of such characteristics
    are conditions being, moisture content, weight, length, all of which may be
    measured against a standard, or one product relative to another.


CLS 131/909
TXT SENSING CONDITION IN FEED HOPPER FOR CIGAR OR CIGARETTE MAKING:

    Product or apparatus relating to the manufacture of a tobacco product
    wherein a sensor is employed to sense a particular condition in a hopper
    which feeds tobacco to the cigar or cigarette maker.


CLS 131/910
TXT SENSING OR DETECTING MALFUNCTION IN CIGAR OR CIGARETTE MAKER:

    Process or apparatus relating to the manufacture of tobacco products
    wherein means are employed to sense or detect any operation or machine
    malfunction.


CLS 132/
TTL TOILET

CLS 132/
TXT This is a residual class for devices and methods used by persons in making
    their toilet (i.e., for personal grooming and hygiene).  It also includes
    closely related professional devices and methods for treating or grooming
    hair.  It includes but is not limited to:  devices for holding the mustache
    out of the way during eating; combs, curlers, barbers' hair cutting guides;
    switch, puff and wig making machines and processes, hat fasteners;
    manicuring devices and toothpicks (including dental floss).  This class
    also includes toilet kits such as shaving kits and powder compacts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, appropriate subclasses for shields attached to the person
    to protect the person or clothing during toilet making operations,
    particularly subclass 50 for barbering aprons and subclass 174 for head
    coverings for shielding the eyes and face during hair cutting, shampooing
    or the like.

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, appropriate subclasses for
    the devices named in the class title.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, appropriate subclasses,
    for hair, tooth, shaving, blacking, and clothes brushes, per se,
    andshoe-blacking stands.

    30,     Cutlery, appropriate subclasses, for
    pocket-knives, razors, and hairclippers.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 77.1 for a soap container
    provided with means to facilitate the lifting or removal of a piece of soap
    from the container.

    220,    Receptacles, appropriate subclasses for shaving cups.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 111-119 for bootjacks, shoehorns, and
    other dressing and undressing aids.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 200+ for a bracket type soap holder,
    subclasses 317+ for a suspended type soap holder and subclasses 683+ for a
    holder which supports the soap while in storage position and remains with
    the soap while in use.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 351 for a soap dish provided
    with means to support the soap in spaced relation to the bottom wall of the
    structure.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 136+ for illuminating devices combined
    with toilet cases.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 49+ for a
    lipstick, or the like, cosmetic device; subclasses 88+ for a soap holder
    which holds the soap in such a manner that a portion of the soap may be
    directly  rubbed on the body; subclasses 123+ for a cosmetic kit, including
    a supply of cosmetic material and an applicator supported out of
    communication with the supply; and subclasses 126+, for a compact,
    including an applicator overlying, or depending from a closure into, a
    supply material; particularly subclass 130, wherein the applicator is a pad
    (e.g., puff) overlying a supply of powder or paste.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 70+
    for a composition for treating hair on a living body.


CLS 132/53
TXT Devices under subclass 9 consisting of switches, puffs, rolls, wigs, and
    hair-supporting frames, usually of metal, used in dressing the hair.
    Includes artificial eyelashes, and means for securing a wig to the head.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    for combs with false hair attached thereto.

    201,    for a method of attaching a wig to the head.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclass 394 for patents relating to toy
    doll hair.

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, appropriate subclasses for other devices for
    supplying a bodily defect for taking the place of missing members of a
    human body.


CLS 132/54
TXT Devices under subclass 53 on which the wearer's hair or false hair is
    supported.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    for combs with a hair foundation frame mounted on the comb back.


CLS 132/55
TXT Devices under subclass 54 formed in roll shape.


CLS 132/56
TXT Devices under subclass 53 consisting of machines specially designed for
    making wigs, switches, rolls, or other hair-structures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, subclass 80.02 for and embroidering, tufting device which
    roots hair in doll or wig.


CLS 132/57.1
TXT Hat fastening device:

    Device under the class definition for holding a hat onto the head of its
    wearer.

    (1)     Note.  The line between this class (132), Class 2 Apparel, and
    Class 24 Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., in relationship to a device for
    holding a hat onto the head of its wearer is as follows:

    (1)     Class 2 provides for a hat fastening device claimed in combination
    with more hat structure than is necessary for mere mounting of or
    cooperation with the device;

    (2)     Class 24 provides for a hat fastening device which structurally
    fits the  requirements of one of its existing mainline subclasses when the
    device is not (a) affixed to the hat by mounting means, (b) cooperating
    with specific means attached to the hat (e.g., a pin guard), (c) shaped to
    conform to the contour of either a portion of the hat or its wearer, or (d)
    claimed in combination with another Class 132 Toilet Device (e.g., hair
    comb); and

    (3)     Class 132 provides for all other hat fastening devices not proper
    for the other two classes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 706+ for hat pins which
    are detached from the hat.


CLS 132/58
TXT Device under subclass 57.1 in which the hat is held on by a depending strap
    or band that engages under the chin or against the back of the head of the
    wearer.


CLS 132/59
TXT Device under subclass 57.1 carried by the hat which clamp or bind upon the
    head of the wearer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 181+ for sweat bands.


CLS 132/60
TXT Device under subclass 57.1 to which the hat is detachably fastened and
    which are either worn in the hair as an ornament after the hat is detached
    or are first secured in the hair and the hat afterward fastened to them.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    for combs used to anchor hats on the head.


CLS 132/61
TXT Device under subclass 57.1 comprising pendant cords or loops, usually one
    on each side of the hat, adapted to be fastened to the hair of the wearer
    by hairpins.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    for combs for hat anchoring.


CLS 132/62
TXT Device under subclass 57.1 comprising hook or spiral shaped prongs carried
    by a shaft which projects outside the hat and adapted to be rotated to
    carry the prongs into the hair of the wearer.


CLS 132/63.1
TXT Includes pivotally mounted hair engaging element:

    Device under subclass 57.1 including an element which (1) enter into and
    contacts the hair of the wearer when holding the hat and (2) is directly
    attached to either (i) the hat or (ii) a linking framework which is mounted
    to, or conforms to the contour of, the hat in a manner allowing the element
    to both (a) swing in an arcuate path about a constantly contacted
    connection point or region located on the hat or framework and (b) maintain
    movement between the contacting surfaces at the point or region of their
    contact when the element swings toward or away from the hair of the wearer.


CLS 132/64.1
TXT And similar opposed element linked therewith:

    Device under subclass 63.1 including an additional element entering the
    hair which (1) works in conjunction with the first hair engaging element to
    hold the hat, (2) is positioned on the opposite side of the hat therefrom,
    (3) is shaped and attached like the first element, and (4) shares either a
    common supporting framework or a common actuation means therewith.


CLS 132/65.1
TXT Includes slidably guided hair engaging element:

    Device under subclass 57.1 including an element which both (1) enters into
    and contacts the hair of the wearer when holding the hat and (2) is
    directed by structure either (i) attached to the hat or (ii) to a linking
    framework mounted to, or conforming to the contour of, the hat, the
    directing structure limiting the element to a fixed path as it slides
    therethrough when moving toward or away from its hair contacting position.


CLS 132/66.1
TXT And similar opposed or skewed element linked therewith:

    Device under subclass 65.1 including an additional element entering the
    hair which (1) works in conjunction with and moves toward the first element
    when the hat is held thereby, (2) is positioned on the opposite side from
    or at an oblique angle to the first element, (3) is shaped and attached
    like the first element, and (4) shares either a common supporting framework
    or a common actuation means therewith.


CLS 132/68.1
TXT Having pointed tip (e.g., attached pin):

    Device under subclass 65.1 wherein the end of the element passing into the
    hair is sharp.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 706+ for hat pins which
    are detached from the hat.


CLS 132/69.1
TXT And tip holding or protecting means:

    Device under subclass 68.1 having means intended to cooperate with the
    sharp end of the element after it enters the hair to either (a) constrain
    the motion of this end (e.g., prevent its withdrawal from the hair) or (b)
    shield it from harmful contact with other objects (e.g., the wearer).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 706.3 for guiding, holding
    or protecting means for the tip of a pin when both the pin and means are
    detached from the hat.


CLS 132/71.1
TXT And position holding means for element:

    Device under subclass 68.1 having means cooperating with the element to
    restrict its movement and keep the element at either a particular location
    or orientation.


CLS 132/72.1
TXT Includes holding or protecting means for tip of hair engaging element:

    Device under subclass 57.1 including means cooperating with the end of an
    elongated element which enters the hair of the wearer during the hat
    holding operation, the means is intended to either (a) constrain the motion
    of this end of the element (e.g., prevent its withdrawal from the hair) or
    (b) shield this end of the element from harmful contact with the wearer of
    the hat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 706.3 for guiding, holding
    or protecting means for the tip of a pin when both the pin and means are
    detached from the hat.


CLS 132/73
TXT Devices under the class definition for manicuring the nails and for
    removing corns and other callosities by abrasion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, appropriate subclasses
    for cleaning apparatus in general.

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 26+ for manicuring cutters, per se.

    128,    Surgery, subclass 355 for surgical devices designed to be used in
    the treatment of the skin by removing comedones, hairs and extraneous
    matter from the skin.


CLS 132/73.5
TXT Devices under subclass 73 combined with other structure.  Includes
    manicuring devices with supporting structure, mere handles being excluded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75.3+,  for compound manicuring tools.

    76.2,   for sheaths for manicuring tools, claimed alone or in combination
    with the tool.


CLS 132/73.6
TXT Devices under subclass 73.5 in combination with a motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75.8,   for manicuring devices adapted to be driven by manual or motor
    means.


CLS 132/74.5
TXT Devices under subclass 73.5 combined with means for feeding or controlling
    the flow of fluent material usually for delivery to the working end of a
    tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for manicure devices combined with a storage cavity usually for the
    reception of manicuring tools or supplies.

    112,    for combs with an orifice for applying fluent material to the hair.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 104+ for hand
    propelled material applicators of general utility.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for devices for the guided
    feeding of fluent material from a supply container.

    401,    Coating Implement With Material Supply, subclasses 28, 261+ and
    268+, wherein the implement has a work engaging portion which,
    respectively, is a brush or brush-like, or is a pad or blade, subclasses
    17+ and 37+ for a device which includes an applying tool and a tool for
    contacting and treating (e.g., spreading, smoothing) the applied material;
    and subclasses 118+ for a manicuring kit consisting of a supply of material
    and an applicator removable therefrom for application to the nails.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclass 61 for
    a composition used in a manicure or pedicure or for a method of mere use
    (applying) of such a composition.


CLS 132/75
TXT Devices under subclass 73.5 where there is included in the body or handle a
    storage cavity, usually for the reception of manicuring tools or supplies.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74.5,   where the cavity holds and feeds fluent material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 110.5 for handles which also serve
    as receptacles.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclass 61 for
    a composition for a manicure or pedicure or for a method involving mere use
    or application of such composition.


CLS 132/75.3
TXT Tools under subclass 73 having more than one manicuring part or surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73.5+,  for manicuring devices combined with other structure than a handle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, appropriate subclasses, for miscellaneous compound
    tools.


CLS 132/75.4
TXT Devices under subclass 75.3 which comprise a cutter combined with some
    other form of manicuring device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 26+ for manicuring cutters, per se, and
    subclasses 123+ as the general locus of cutlery implements combined with
    other structure.

    433,    Dentistry, subclass 144 for cutters used in dentistry.


CLS 132/75.5
TXT Devices under subclass 75.4 in which two or more blades cooperate to
    perform a cutting operation.  These devices are usually called nippers and
    shears.


CLS 132/75.6
TXT Devices under subclass 75.3 which have a file or other abrading or
    polishing surface.  Includes devices having multiple characters of
    abrading, filing and polishing surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76.4+,  for those devices having single characters of surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclass 104.5 for hand manipulable tools for
    severing the ends of fasteners on the inside of shoes.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, particularly subclasses
    208+ for cleaning tools similar to buffers.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 76.1+ for metal files.

    168,    Farriery, subclasses 48.1+ for cleaners and trimmers for hoofs of
    horses.

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 125, 142, and 166 for tooth abrading or
    polishing apparatus.

    451,    Abrading, for an abrading tool, generally.


CLS 132/75.8
TXT Single manicuring tools under subclass 73 which are adapted to be driven by
    manual or motive power.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73.6,   for manicuring devices combined with motors.

    75.5,   for clippers of the driven type.


CLS 132/76.2
TXT Tools under subclass 73 where a portion of the device is folded, withdrawn
    or otherwise sheathed when not in use. Includes sheaths, per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73.5+,  for manicuring devices combined with other structure.

    90,     for folded or housed toothpicks.

    104,    for combs combined with a manicure device.

    143,    for combs combined with a teeth guard or sheath.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 151+ for cutlery having similar structure.


CLS 132/76.4
TXT Tools under subclass 73 which have a file or other abrading or polishing
    surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75.6,   for compound tools including an abrader, file or buffer.

    75.8,   for driven devices of this type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 236.01+ for
    scrapers of general cleaning utility, and see the Notes thereto for
    miscellaneous scrapers of more specialized application.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 76.1+ for files of general utility.


CLS 132/76.5
TXT Tools under subclass 76.4 in which there is a separable holder for the file
    or other abrader or polisher.


CLS 132/101
TXT Devices under subclass 11 having means for securing it to a covering for
    the head in the hair of which the comb is insertable.


CLS 132/102
TXT Devices under subclass 11 combined with a smooth surfaced device which
    forms images by reflection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79+,    for toilet kits having a mirror combined with a receptacle and
    another toilet implement.


CLS 132/103
TXT Devices under subclass 102 in which the reflecting device is mounted on
    means for enclosing or protecting the teeth of the comb.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143,    for combs having a teeth guard or sheath.


CLS 132/104
TXT Devices under subclass 11 combined with means for treating the nails.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76.2,   for nail files combined with a receptacle or holder for the file.


CLS 132/105
TXT Devices under subclass 11 having means for mounting thereon locks of
    artificial hair or natural hair separate from the body which originated it,
    in such manner that the comb may be used to secure the hair to other hair
    for inclusion therewith in dressing the hair.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for hair structures.

    120+,   for combs combined with a brush or bristles for treating the hair.

    146,    for combs having an attaching clasp or loop.


CLS 132/106
TXT Devices under subclass 11 combined with a support over which the hair is
    dressed to give an appearance of fullness to the hair.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54+,    for foundation frames.

    146,    for combs with an attaching clasp or  loop.


CLS 132/107
TXT Devices under subclass 11 having the teeth disposed in an endless row
    around an axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    for plural combs pivoted end on end in which the free ends of the
    combs have means to secure them together releasably.


CLS 132/108
TXT Devices under subclass 11 combined with a sheet, strand or mass of porous,
    fibrous or spongy material to be applied to the hair and having the ability
    to absorb liquid.

    (1)     Note.  The absorbent material may be impregnated with liquid and
    then applied to the hair or it may be applied dry to the hair for removing
    liquid therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120+,   for combs combined with brushes or bristles to be applied to the
    hair.

    124,    for combs having a hair smoothing bar or pin.

    125,    for combs having a cavity disposed relative to a tooth in such
    position that as the comb is progressed through the hair matter foreign to
    the hair will be moved into or out of the cavity.


CLS 132/109
TXT Devices under subclass 108 in which the absorbent material abuts a surface
    that is a part of a tooth.


CLS 132/110
TXT Devices under subclass 109 in which the surface abutted by the absorbent
    material is located where the tooth is secured to the back.


CLS 132/111
TXT Devices under subclass 110 in which there is a hole through the tooth where
    the tooth and back join and the absorbent material is in the hole.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the absorbent material is a cord or ribbon passing
    through the teeth for the length of the comb.


CLS 132/112
TXT Devices under subclass 11 having a hole for passing flowing material onto
    or off of the hair in which the teeth are inserted.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes combs for withdrawing fluid from the
    hair by suction.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes combs for placing on the hair
    comminuted material, liquid, vapor, or gas where there is an outlet hole
    for the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    for combs which have a concavity from which material is removed by
    the hair during passage of the comb through it.

    147,    for combs having a back hollowed to form a storage receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 344 for
    operator supported air draft applying apparatus, and subclass 402 for air
    blast or suction cleaning machines with a stationary agitator of the comb
    type.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for devices having guided or
    assisted discharge of fluent material from a supply container.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclass 28 for a
    hand-manipulated multiple-tip, multiple discharge coating device.


CLS 132/113
TXT Devices under subclass 112 in which the hole is through the wall of a tooth
    having an annular cross-section.


CLS 132/114
TXT Devices under subclass 113 in which the hole is axially of the tooth at the
    free end of the tooth.


CLS 132/115
TXT Devices under subclass 114 in which there extends through the hole a member
    about which the applied material must pass to flow through the hole.


CLS 132/116
TXT Devices under subclass 112 in which the back of the comb has a fluent
    material passing hole in it, intermediate locations at which teeth are
    secured to the back.


CLS 132/117
TXT Devices under subclass 11 having means to maintain removably in heat
    conducting relation to the teeth a quantity of preheatable solid or liquid
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118,    for combs combined with heaters which convert energy or fuel into
    heat.

    147,    for combs having a back hollowed to form a receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 400 for heat accumulator structures,
    and see the Notes thereto for devices elsewhere classified employing heat
    accumulators.


CLS 132/118
TXT Devices under subclass 11 having means to convert energy or fuel into heat
    and apply it to increase the temperature of the teeth.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are "hair styling" combs in which
    hot air is directed over the comb teeth, as well as comb attachments for
    such devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36+,    for hair curlers or crimpers having a mandrel about which the hair
    is wound or woven and a surrounding heater.

    117,    for combs combined with means to secure releasably in a position
    fixed and heat conducting relative to the teeth a quantity of preheatable
    solid or liquid material.

    143,    for combs with a teeth sheath or guard.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 160 for heated
    brushes.


CLS 132/119
TXT Devices under subclass 11 having means movable relative to the comb for
    removing foreign matter or loose hairs from between the teeth of the comb.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120+,   for combs combined with a brush or bristles.

    154,    for combs having separably mounted teeth projecting through
    apertures in a back member.


CLS 132/119.1
TXT Motor driven:

    Device under subclass 219 including a working member powered by energy
    transducing or storing means to drive the teeth of the comb.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 22.1+ for a
    motor driven toothbrush.


CLS 132/120
TXT Devices under subclass 11 combined with projecting flexible filamentary
    members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    for combs combined with false hair to be included in the hair in
    dressing the hair.

    108+,   for combs having a web, cord or pad of absorbent material to be
    applied to the hair.

    119,    for combs combined with means to clean the teeth of the comb.

    124,    for combs having a hair smoothing bar or pin.

    125,    for combs having a cavity from which material foreign to the hair
    is removed by the passage of the comb through the hair.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 85 for currycomb combined with brush.


CLS 132/121
TXT Devices under subclass 120 in which the filaments project from a back and
    there is a cavity in the back or a handle attached thereto for receiving
    the teeth of the comb for disuse storage of the comb.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143,    for combs having a teeth guard or sheath.

    313,    for a toilet kit comprising a brush and either a nominally recited
    comb or a receptacle for carrying a comb.


CLS 132/122
TXT Devices under subclass 11 combined with means serving as a core about which
    the hair may be coiled and so constructed as to be removable from within
    the coil axially.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262,    for a curling mandrel having teeth fixed on its periphery.


CLS 132/123
TXT Devices under subclass 122 in which the core means is hollow and a row of
    teeth is movable from a position in which they project from the core to a
    position within the core.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143,    for combs combined with means for enclosing the teeth for
    protecting them.

    147,    for combs having a back hollowed to form a receptacle.


CLS 132/124
TXT Devices under subclass 11 having an elongated member with an even surface
    adapted to lie across and be moved along the hair after combing for
    exerting a smoothing action thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108+,   for combs with an absorbent material to be moved along the hair.

    120+,   for combs with a brush or bristles to be moved along the hair to
    smooth it.

    125,    for combs having a concavity disposed relative to a tooth in such
    position that matter foreign to the hair will be moved into or out of the
    cavity as the comb is progressed through the hair.


CLS 132/125
TXT Devices under subclass 11 having a concavity disposed relative to a tooth
    in such position that as a tooth is progressed through the hair matter
    foreign to the hair will be moved into or out of the concavity by the
    passing of the hair thereby.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108+,   for combs with absorbent material to be applied to the hair.

    112+,   for combs having a hole for passing flowing material onto or off of
    the hair.

    120+,   for combs with a brush or bristles.

    124,    for combs with a bar or pin to be rubbed on the hair to smooth it.

    147,    for combs having a storage cavity in  in the back.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 626 for a currycomb for trapping dust or
    vermin during the process of currying or grooming.


CLS 132/126
TXT Devices under subclass 11 in which there are plural backs or back portions
    to each of which a row of teeth is secured and such rows are spaced from or
    movable relative to one another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146,    for combs having an attaching clasp or loop.


CLS 132/127
TXT Devices under subclass 126 having between the rows a swinging member or
    clasp for securing the device to the hair.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144+,   for single combs combined with means to secure the comb to the hair
    in which it is inserted.


CLS 132/128
TXT Devices under subclass 126 having more than one elastically extensible or
    filament type element connecting the plural backs together and such
    elements are attached to at least one of the backs at points spaced apart
    along the back.


CLS 132/129
TXT Devices under subclass 126 in which the back portions are movable relative
    to one another arcuately or rectilinearly while joined together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145,    for combs having means for maintaining the comb and the hair in
    which it is inserted secured to one another, such means being pivoted on
    the comb.


CLS 132/130
TXT Devices under subclass 129 in which the back members are movably attached
    to an elongated member arched to receive the head of a person and extend
    from one side of the head to the other.


CLS 132/131
TXT Devices under subclass 129 in which the plural backs are connected
    pivotally at the ends of spaced parallel bar-like members.


CLS 132/132
TXT Devices under subclass 129 in which the back members are connected to each
    other between the ends of tooth rows so that one row can swing transversely
    of another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145,    for combs with a hair engaging member for retaining the comb in
    position on the hair, pivotally connected to the comb.


CLS 132/133
TXT Devices under subclass 132 in which the free ends of the back members have
    means which engage to secure them together releasably.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for combs having teeth disposed in an endless row around an axis.


CLS 132/134
TXT Devices under subclass 132 in which the swinging is about an axis extending
    in the direction that the teeth project.


CLS 132/135
TXT Devices under subclass 129 in which the plural backs are swingable relative
    to one another about an axis extending in the direction of the length of
    one of the rows of the teeth.


CLS 132/136
TXT Devices under subclass 129 in which one of the plural back members is
    shiftable relative to another in the direction of the length of one of the
    rows of teeth.


CLS 132/137
TXT Devices under subclass 126 in which there are side-by-side rows of teeth
    and successive teeth occurring in the direction the rows extend are in
    different rows.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142,    for combs with side-by-side rows of teeth.


CLS 132/138
TXT Devices under subclass 126 in which the teeth on one back extend between
    those on another back.


CLS 132/139
TXT Devices under subclass 126 in which the teeth of one row project in a
    direction contrary to that in which those of another row project.


CLS 132/140
TXT Devices under subclass 126 in which the rows of teeth extend in the same
    direction and are spaced longitudinally of one another along a continuous
    back which is bent between successive row ends.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141,    for combs in which there are rows of teeth spaced apart endwise
    along a continuous straight back.


CLS 132/141
TXT Devices under subclass 126 in which the rows of teeth are spaced apart
    endwise along a continuous back.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140,    for combs having rows of teeth extending in the same direction and
    spaced longitudinally of one another along a continuous back which is bent
    between successive row ends.

    155,    for combs having a single row of teeth and a channel encased back.


CLS 132/142
TXT Devices under subclass 126 in which the rows are parallel with teeth
    projecting in the same direction and are located transversely of one
    another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137,    for combs having side by side rows of teeth in which successive
    teeth in the direction in which the rows extend are in different rows.


CLS 132/143
TXT Devices under subclass 11 having means enclosing the teeth or extending
    along a row of teeth at the teeth tips for protecting the teeth.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the protecting means is applied to the teeth for
    storage of the comb and is removable from the teeth when the comb is to be
    inserted in the hair.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76.2,   for manicuring tools where a portion of the device is folded,
    withdrawn or otherwise sheathed when not in use.

    103,    for combs combined with a mirror in which the mirror is mounted on
    a comb teeth sheath or guard.

    117     and 118, for combs with heaters, or heat accumulators, for the
    teeth and guards to prevent the hot teeth from touching the skin adjacent
    the hair in which the comb is inserted.

    121,    for combs combined with brushes and the comb is sheathed within the
    brush back or handle.

    123,    for combs combined with hollow winding mandrels into which the comb
    is retractable.

    146,    for combs with a clasp or loop for securing the comb to another
    member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 151+ for sheathed cutlery implements which are
    foldable or otherwise retractable into the handle or have some other form
    of sheath to protect the blade when not in use, and see the Notes thereto
    for other sheathed implements.


CLS 132/144
TXT Devices under subclass 11 having means for maintaining the comb and the
    hair in which it is inserted secured to one another, such means being other
    than or in addition to the interaction of the comb teeth with one another
    due to their configuration or resilient relation.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes comb teeth with loss preventing hook
    elements thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51      and 52, for hair pins with means for retaining them in the hair.

    127,    for plural combs or spaced tooth rows with a hair gripping retainer
    member between them.

    146,    for combs with a clasp or loop for attaching them to another member.

    156,    for combs in which the teeth are spreadable by flexing the back.

    157,    for comb teeth configured so as to constrict the space between the
    teeth.

    160,    for combs with bent or slanted teeth.


CLS 132/145
TXT Devices under subclass 144 in which the securing means swings on a pivot
    relative to the back.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129+,   for pivotally connected plural combs or spaced tooth rows.


CLS 132/146
TXT Devices under subclass 11 having a gripping member or a perforation by
    means of which the comb and another member may be secured together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for bow and ribbon holding hair fasteners.

    101,    for hat anchoring combs.

    105,    for combs with false hair attached.

    106,    for combs with a foundation frame mounted on the back.

    126+,   for plural combs having means to secure them together.

    143,    for combs having means to secure them to protective guards or
    sheaths.

    144+,   for combs having means for maintaining the comb and the hair in
    which it is inserted secured to one another.


CLS 132/147
TXT Devices under subclass 11 having a back hollowed to form a receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112+,   for combs with an orifice for applying fluent material from a
    supply within a hollow back.

    117,    for combs with a hollow back for holding a removable heat
    accumulator.

    123,    for combs combined with a hollow winding mandrel into which the
    comb is retractable.

    125,    for combs having a cavity so disposed relative to the teeth that
    matter foreign to the hair will be moved into or out of the cavity as the
    comb is passed through the hair.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 110.5 for handles containing a
    receptacle.


CLS 132/148
TXT Devices under subclass 11 having features in addition to a row of teeth
    connected to a back by means of which the device may be manipulated.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, combs combined with a
    thermometer, a shoe horn, a hair pin spreader, a scissors locating
    abutment, a tooth adjustable along the back, means integral with the comb
    for supporting the comb edgewise or endwise as by suspension.


CLS 132/149
TXT Devices under subclass 11 in which the back has a depression or a
    perforation of such size as to receive a finger of a person to aid in
    manipulating the device.


CLS 132/150
TXT Devices under subclass 11 in which the back has an extension beyond the end
    of the tooth row or transversely of the tooth row suitable for gripping by
    the hand for manipulating the device.


CLS 132/151
TXT Devices under subclass 11 in which the teeth are secured to the back in
    such manner that they may swing or revolve relative to the back.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    for combs with teeth mounted so as to be individually separable
    from the comb.


CLS 132/152
TXT Devices under subclass 11 in which there are surfaces which abut to locate
    separate teeth relative to one another and releasable means for holding
    such surfaces in abutment, the teeth when released being removable from the
    back.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151,    for combs having separate teeth which are individually pivoted or
    rotatable relative to a back.

    155,    for combs in which a back is made of separate toothed portions
    permanently secured together and such back is within a casing.


CLS 132/153
TXT Devices under subclass 152 in which the locating surfaces are between back
    portions to each of which a tooth is secured and the means for holding them
    in abutment includes a tensioned elongated member extending through aligned
    holes in such back portions.


CLS 132/154
TXT Devices under subclass 152 in which the teeth are located by holes in the
    back through which the teeth are releasably held projecting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    for combs in which the teeth project through a perforated member
    movable lengthwise of the teeth for cleaning them.


CLS 132/155
TXT Devices under subclass 11 in which a back portion is held within a groove
    in a back covering.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141,    for longitudinally spaced plural combs supported by a common
    channel back.

    152+,   for combs with separable teeth demountably held within a channel
    covering.

    162,    for combs in which the back is reinforced by a strip secured
    thereto rather than by a channel casing.


CLS 132/156
TXT Devices under subclass 11 in which the teeth are secured upon a resilient
    back so that bending the back increases the space between the teeth.

    (1)     Note.  This structure is usually given the comb so that while
    spread the comb may be inserted into the hair and the elastic return of the
    back will cause the teeth to reapproach and grip the hair between them.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144+,   for combs having means additional to the resiliency or conformation
    of the teeth for retaining the comb in the hair.

    157,    for combs in which the space between the teeth is constricted so as
    to grip the hair, and see the Notes thereto for other combs with features
    employed for securing the comb and hair together.


CLS 132/157
TXT Devices under subclass 11 in which the space between adjacent teeth narrows
    in the direction in which the teeth project from the back.

    (1)     Note.  This construction is usually given the teeth so that the
    hair may be gripped between the teeth to secure the comb thereto.  To
    promote this purpose the teeth often have a hole through them so as to
    provide resilient side portions bowed toward adjoining teeth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144+,   for combs having means other than or in addition to the interaction
    between adjoining comb teeth due to their configuration or resiliency for
    maintaining the comb and the hair in which it is inserted secured together.

    156,    for combs in which the teeth are mounted upon a resilient back so
    that on bending the back the teeth spread apart and on releasing the back
    after insertion in the hair the teeth return to grip the hair between them.

    160,    for combs having teeth obliquely relative to the line of the row or
    in which a tooth is curved or angled along its length.


CLS 132/158
TXT Devices under subclass 11 in which a portion of the back between spaced
    locations at which teeth are secured to the back has an angled or curved
    surface.

    (1)     Note.  This expedient is often used to expedite cleaning of the
    kerf.

    (2)     Note.  This structure is sometimes employed so that there will be
    no corners in the kerf such as would pull on the hair as the comb is used.
    Often the angle or arch surface will continue down the sides of adjoining
    teeth.


CLS 132/159
TXT Devices under subclass 11 in which the free end of a tooth is a surface or
    edge curving continuously and evenly in the same direction from one side of
    the tooth to the other.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes combs in which a tooth includes a
    loop of wire forming the tooth end.


CLS 132/160
TXT Devices under subclass 11 in which there are teeth oblique to the direction
    of the row or in which a tooth is curved or angled along the length of the
    tooth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144+,   for combs having means additional to the conformation or resiliency
    of the teeth of the comb for holding the comb secured to the hair in which
    the comb is inserted.

    157,    for combs in which a tooth is so bent relative to an adjacent tooth
    that the space between them narrows in the direction in which the teeth
    project.


CLS 132/161
TXT Devices under subclass 11 in which some teeth project from a back for a
    different length than others.

    (1)     Note.  The length of a tooth is regarded as the distance along the
    tooth from the tip of the tooth to the back on which the tooth is mounted.


CLS 132/162
TXT Devices under subclass 11 which are of several layers or parts joined face
    to face or which have an adhered layer of covering material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes combs in which the back is reinforced
    by the application thereto of a metal bar either along side of the back or
    in a groove or in a channel down the back.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155,    for combs reinforced by placing a casing over the back so as to
    partially enclose it.


CLS 132/163
TXT Devices under subclass 11 which include specific material or chemical
    compositions in their structure.

    (1)     Note.  Patents claiming combs merely by the composition of which
    they are made, i.e., with the comb being included in the claims by name
    only, are classified in the composition classes where a composition class
    provides for such composition even though there is no claim to the
    composition, per se.  See Class 106, Compositions:  Coating or Plastic,
    class definition for the classification of various compositions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Composition:  Coating or Plastic, See (1) Note, above.


CLS 132/200
TXT METHODS:

    Process under the class definition.


CLS 132/201
TXT Artificial hair structure making or attaching:

    Process under subclass 200 of making wigs, switches, rolls or other
    representation of hair or of fixing the same to the head.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclass 394 for wigs and artificial hair
    structure limited to use on dummies, dolls, display forms, or the like.


CLS 132/202
TXT Hair treatment by application of specific chemical composition:

    Process under subclass 200 which includes a significant step of contacting
    the hair with a named composition.

    (1)     Note.  The mere recitation of "a  treating solution" or "moistening
    the hair with water" is not sufficient to cause classification in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, especially
    subclass 62 for a hair bleaching composition and subclasses 70.1+ for a
    hair treating composition, e.g., waving lotion, etc., and a method
    involving no more than mere application of the composition.


CLS 132/203
TXT For deformation, setting or holding (e.g., curling, waving):

    Process under subclass 202 wherein the composition is applied either to fix
    or to hold the hair in a particular configuration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing, Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclass 127.51 for a similar method involving the
    mere application of the compositions to the hair.


CLS 132/204
TXT Relaxing or reducing agent followed by fixing or neutralizing agent (e.g.,
    "permanent"):

    Process under subclass 203 wherein a first composition is applied to break
    or weaken the disulfide bonds of the hair protein (keratin) and a second
    composition is subsequently applied to neutralize the first composition or
    cause the bonds to be reformed.


CLS 132/205
TXT Including specified treatment interval:

    Process under subclass 204 wherein one of the treating compositions is left
    in contact with the hair for a specified length of time.


CLS 132/206
TXT And application of heat:

    Process under subclass 203 including a step of heating the hair.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211,    for patents which claim a step of heating the hair combined with a
    step of applying a nonspecified composition (e.g., "a treating agent," or
    shampooing the hair").

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 283 for hair
    drying processes.


CLS 132/207
TXT And use of specific device:

    Process under subclass 203 including a step which employs the use of a
    named device to effect or assist in shaping the hair.


CLS 132/208
TXT Dyeing or bleaching:

    Process under subclass 202 wherein the composition either imparts color to
    the hair or removes color from the hair.


CLS 132/209
TXT Plural separately applied or supplied named compositions:

    Process under subclass 202 wherein either (a) a second discrete composition
    is applied to the hair during or after the first composition is applied, or
    (b) a second discrete composition is mixed with the first composition just
    prior to the application of the resultant mixture to the hair;  wherein the
    constituents or characteristics of both compositions are specified in each
    case.

    (1)     Note.  A step of shampooing the hair is not considered to be
    separately applied "named" composition, unless the composition or type of
    shampoo is specified.


CLS 132/210
TXT Hair deformation or set (e.g., curling waving):

    Process under subclass 200 including a step either to fix or to hold the
    hair in a particular configuration.


CLS 132/211
TXT And application of heat:

    Process under subclass 210 including a step of heating the hair.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying, and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 283 for hair
    drying processes, per se.


CLS 132/212
TXT HAIR DEVICE:

    Device under the class definition specifically adapted for treating,
    dressing or manipulating the hair.

    (1)     Note.  Toilet kits which include a hairbrush or a nominally recited
    comb have been classified in subclass 313 and generally have not been
    cross-referenced in this or indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    313,    for a toilet kit including a hairbrush and a nominally recited comb.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 104.001+ for
    hand propelled material applicators of general utility.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids subclasses 96+ for hair
    drying apparatus.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 600+ for a device for treating the
    hair of lower animals.

    128,    Surgery, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for massaging or
    applying medicament to the scalp.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses for
    cleaning of other than hair on the human body.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 28 and 268+ for
    a hand manipulated brush-type coating device with material supply which may
    be used to treat (e.g., massage, dress) the scalp or hair.


CLS 132/213
TXT Dressing or cutting guide or gauge:

    Device under subclass 212 including a template or other means providing a
    reference for cutting or arranging the hair.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes guides for parting the hair.


CLS 132/213.1
TXT Including comb or means to mount comb:

    Device under subclass 213 wherein the template or other reference means
    includes a comb as defined in subclass 219, or structure specifically
    provided for mounting a comb thereof.


CLS 132/214
TXT Trim gauge or guide:

    Device under subclass 213 wherein the template or other reference means is
    employed to position a hair cutting implement with respect to the hair.


CLS 132/215
TXT Mustache:

    Device under subclass 212 specifically adapted for use on the hair on the
    upper lip.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for artificial mustaches and machines for making them.


CLS 132/216
TXT Eyelash or eyebrow:

    Device under subclass 212 specifically adapted for use on the hair growing
    from either an eyelid or the skin immediately above the eyelid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for an artificial eyelash or eyebrow.

    313,    for a toilet kit which includes a mascara brush.


CLS 132/217
TXT Crimper or curler:

    Device under subclass 216 including a surface or group of elements against
    which the hair growing from an eyelid is placed to impart a change in shape
    to individual hair strands by bending or straightening, wherein the new
    shape is intended to remain after treatment of the hair by the device.


CLS 132/218
TXT Including cosmetic applicator (e.g., mascara applier):

    Device under subclass 216 including means for applying a beautifying or
    protecting substance to the hair growing from or immediately above an
    eyelid.

    (1)     Note.  To be proper for this class, a cosmetic applicator must
    include additional eyelash treating means, such as a shaping surfaces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, appropriate subclasses for
    a cosmetic applier without claimed shaping means, particularly subclass 118
    for a container and independent applicator.


CLS 132/219
TXT Device under subclass 212 having more than three teeth projecting from a
    back in a row and so secured to the back as to be maintained by it, spaced
    from one another in generally aligned relationship and designed to be used
    by inserting the teeth into the hair on a person.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213.1,  for a comb combined with a dressing or cutting guide.

    271,    for a hair styler or attachment therefor.

    280+,   for hair pins having 3 or fewer teeth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, subclass 136 for combined tools in which one of the
    tools is a pair of scissors and one a comb and the two are independently
    used.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 142 for devices
    having gratings or teeth like those of combs especially adapted for
    removing foreign matter from material having strands or fibers such as
    fringes or brushes and generally by the application of the work to the
    implement by entering between and passings along the sides of the strands
    or fibers.

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses 115+ for devices for
    disentangling, cleaning, straightening or performing other operations on
    fibers to place them in condition for use, which have comb-like teeth past
    which the fibers are drawn at a moderate speed, there being means to retain
    the fibers in the straightened or parallel positions thus produced.

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclass 212 for devices for assembling
    yarns or threads into warps and the manipulations leading up to and
    including the placing of the warps in the looms, such devices having the
    structure of a comb, and subclasses 217+ and especially 222 for devices for
    removing bunches or imperfections, and for smoothing, polishing or glossing
    and other mechanical operations employed in finishing braids, yarns,
    threads, or similar strands in which the thread is subjected to a brushing
    or combing action.

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 30 for devices having a sharp cutting edge
    utilizing guards having elongated teeth projecting beyond the edge which
    prevent cutting the hair adjacent the skin, many of which devices involve
    the combination of a conventional comb and a blade or such a comb modified
    to hold a blade; subclasses 32+ for razors for shaving off the beard or
    hair close to the skin, particularly subclass 53 for longitudinal or "old
    style" razors having either a single or multiple guarding edge; subclasses
    200+ for shears having a plurality of positions for simultaneously cutting
    material at all such positions which are provided with some means whereby
    the length of cut maybe regulated, and in which the majority of patents are
    for hair clippers and the lengths of cut are regulated by means contacting
    the head of the person whose hair is being cut; and subclass 233.5 for
    single shears combined with a hair comb in such a manner that the comb acts
    as a guide, guard or gauge for material being cut.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclass 27 for fur treating apparatus for
    smoothing, combing, carding or otherwise orienting the fiber of the fur or
    pelt.

    84,     Music, subclass 94 for musical combs.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 618+ for a device for grooming the
    coat of an animal, particularly subclasses 611+ and 613+ for a currycomb
    combined with another grooming device, and subclasses 625+ for a currycomb
    which is adapted to comb and scrape the coat of an animal.

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 26 for a special woodworking machine designed
    to cut comb teeth in the manufacture of combs.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclass 79
    for devices for applying light or analogous rays to the body or modifying
    the temperature of the body or applying electricity to the body, which are
    limited by claimed structure to therapeutic use and which are combined with
    brushes and combs.


CLS 132/220
TXT Having heat generating composition:

    Device under subclass 212 including a supply of a chemical composition
    which releases heat through an exothermic reaction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 263.01+ for a chemical heater, in
    general.


CLS 132/221
TXT Having hair treating composition:

    Device under subclass 212 including a supply of a chemical composition
    which is adapted to contact the hair to the effect a change in the physical
    state or appearance of the hair.

    (1)     Note.  The treating composition must be supplied with the device
    (e.g., sachet) for classification in this subclass.  Absorbent wraps to
    which a hair treating composition is to be subsequently applied are
    classified in subclass 222.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222,    for absorbent flexible wraps to which a setting lotion is to be
    applied.


CLS 132/222
TXT Flexible wrap for curl:

    Device under subclass 212 including a generally planar piece of pliant
    material for enveloping a tress of hair.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220,    for a flexible wrap having a heat releasing composition.

    221,    for a flexible wrap having a hair treating composition.


CLS 132/223
TXT Having hair shaping surface or form (e.g., crimper or curler):

    Device under subclass 212 including a surface or a group of elements
    against which the hair is placed for imparting a change in the shape to
    individual hair strands by bending or straightening, wherein the new shape
    is intended to remain after treatment of the hair by the device.

    (1)     Note.  A mere clamp to hold, a previously formed curl is excluded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273+,   for a hair fastener (e.g., clip) which merely holds the hair after
    it has been formed (e.g., curled) by other means.


CLS 132/224
TXT Having cooperating crimping jaws:

    Device under subclass 223 including a plurality of fluted, curved, or
    offset relatively movable hair engaging surfaces which impart corresponding
    waves, curls or bends to the hair by applying stress thereto during said
    relative movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254+,   for a winding form or mandrel having a hair retaining jaw.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 35+ for implements for fluting or
    crimping apparel.


CLS 132/225
TXT Including plural grooved jaw:

    Device under subclass 224 wherein one of the relatively moving hair
    engaging surfaces includes a plurality of distinct concavities for
    imparting a compound curve to the hair during a single engagement between
    the surfaces.


CLS 132/226
TXT Having winding form or mandrel (e.g., curler):

    Device under subclass 223 wherein the surface for imparting a change in
    shape to the hair is located on a structure about which wisp is woven or
    wound.

    (1)     Note.  Heaters and protectors which are specifically adapted to be
    used with curling mandrels have been classified in subclasses indented
    hereunder, even though the mandrel may not be claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122+,   for a winding mandrel combined with a comb.


CLS 132/227
TXT With heater, fluid supply, or surrounding fluid housing:

    Device under subclass 226 including either (a) means to generate or to
    store heat for application to the hair (b) a reservoir or passageway for
    supplying a gas or liquid (e.g., air, water) to the winding form of
    mandrel, or (c) fluid confining structure which substantially encloses the
    winding form or mandrel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220,    for hair devices employing an electrolytic heater, usually in the
    form of a flexible pad or envelope.

    222,    for a flexible wrap having a foil sheet which is employed as a
    heater, or as a heat shield.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 408+ for a tool used to set the
    curl in hair by heat and having a liquid or gaseous fuel burner.


CLS 132/228
TXT Including fluid supply or inlet for introducing fluid (e.g., steam) into
    surrounding housing:

    Device under subclass 227 including a reservoir or passageway for supplying
    a liquid or gas to an enclosed mandrel.

    (1)     Note.  The passageway may be an opening in the housing which
    permits ambient air to enter upon creation of a vacuum in the housing,
    often caused by a suction device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 97+ for a
    hair dryer which directs gas or vapor to the hair, but which does not
    include a grooming or shaping means.


CLS 132/229
TXT Electrical heater:

    Device under subclass 227 including means for converting electrical energy
    to heat for application to the hair.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 221+ for electrically heated tools and
    implements, particularly subclasses 222+ for curling irons provided with
    specific electric heating means.


CLS 132/230
TXT Having end outlet for hair:

    Device under subclass 229 including a housing surrounding the winding form
    or mandrel and having an opening at an axial end of the form or mandrel
    through which a tress of hair passes.


CLS 132/231
TXT Separable squeeze-open clip:

    Device under subclass 229 wherein the heat applying means is carried by two
    relatively movable arms between which the form or mandrel is clamped, and a
    portion is associated with each arm such that when the portions are engaged
    by the hand and moved toward each other the clamping arms move apart.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227,    for a squeeze-open hair clip.


CLS 132/232
TXT And transversely pivoted jaw for clamping hair to mandrel (e.g., curling
    iron):

    Device under subclass 229 including an element which is mounted by means of
    bearing surfaces which permit swinging movement toward the shape imparting
    structure about an axis perpendicular to the axis of the shape imparting
    structure to hold a tress of air therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263,    for a similar device without the heater.


CLS 132/233
TXT Including heat storage means heated prior to application:

    Device under subclass 227 including a mass of material whose temperature is
    increased by an external source of heat and which is then placed in contact
    with the hair to apply heat thereto.


CLS 132/234
TXT And pivoted hair fastening jaw or clip:

    Device under subclass 233 including a distinct element for clamping the
    hair wisp to the form or mandrel, and swingably connected to either the
    form or mandrel or to another cooperating clamping element by means of
    bearing surfaces.

    (1)     Note.  The heat storage means may form part of the form or mandrel
    or a separate, squeeze-open clip.


CLS 132/235
TXT Having end outlet for hair:

    Device under subclass 227 including fluid confining structure which
    substantially encloses the winding form or mandrel except for an opening at
    the axial end of the form or mandrel through which a tress of hair is
    adapted to enter the enclosing structure.


CLS 132/236
TXT Including hair clamp spaced laterally from mandrel (e.g., scalp protector):

    Device under subclass 227 including two jaws movable toward and away from
    each other along a line spaced from the form or mandrel, and means to move
    or hold the jaws into cooperative engagement with a tress of hair to secure
    the tress therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241,    for a similar clamp having a rotatable form or mandrel.

    244,    for a similar device without a heater or housing.


CLS 132/237
TXT Rotatable form or mandrel:

    Device under subclass 226 wherein the shape imparting structure about which
    the hair is wound is carried by or attached to a hand engaged portion in a
    manner that permits the shape imparting structure only to rotate to wind
    the hair thereupon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266,    for a stationary form or mandrel having a rotatable winder.


CLS 132/238
TXT Including motor, or mechanical rotating means:

    Device under subclass 237 including either (a) means which converts energy
    into work to rotate the form or mandrel, or (b) mechanism to multiply the
    force input from an operator to rotate the form or mandrel.


CLS 132/239
TXT Including clutch or ratchet:

    Device under subclass 237 including either (a) means to selectively enable
    or disable the relative rotation between the shape imparting structure and
    the other portion, or (b) a pawl and detent arrangement which allows
    relative rotation between the portions in one direction, but connects them
    for common rotation in the other direction.


CLS 132/240
TXT And spaced scalp protector:

    Device under subclass 239 including a discrete element spaced from the axis
    of the form or mandrel and which is positioned between the form or mandrel
    and the head to protect the scalp from heat or chemicals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241     and 243+, for other scalp protectors.


CLS 132/241
TXT And laterally spaced clamp or pad (e.g., scalp protector):

    Device under subclass 237 including two jaws movable toward and away from
    each other along a line spaced from the axis of the form or mandrel, or an
    offset portion lying in a plane spaced from the axis of the form or mandrel
    adapted to form a barrier between the form or mandrel and the scalp.


CLS 132/242
TXT Including means to accommodate separable curl retainer (e.g., bobby pin):

    Device under subclass 237 including structure adapted to encompass or
    retain a removable discrete element to be applied to the wound tress of
    hair to hold its imparted shape when the form or mandrel is removed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264,    for a similar device having a nonrotatable form or mandrel.


CLS 132/243
TXT Having scalp protector:

    Device under subclass 226 including a discrete portion positioned between
    the form or mandrel and the head to protect the scalp from heat or
    chemicals.


CLS 132/244
TXT Laterally spaced clamp having pivoted jaws:

    Device under subclass 243 including two jaws swingable toward and away from
    each other in a plane spaced from the form or mandrel.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes protectors specifically for use with
    a winding form or mandrel, regardless of whether the form or mandrel is
    actually claimed.


CLS 132/245
TXT Hair retained:

    Device under subclass 226 including means for supporting or fastening the
    device in contact with the hair.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252,    for plural telescoped rollers, one of which prevents the hair from
    unwinding about the other.


CLS 132/246
TXT Including bendable wire fastener, form or mandrel:

    Device under subclass 245 wherein either the form or mandrel, or an
    additional metallic element, is formed of a pliable material and is
    plastically deformed to retain the form or mandrel in the hair.


CLS 132/247
TXT Pliant form or mandrel having connectable ends:

    Device under subclass 245 wherein the form or mandrel is formed of a
    flexible material and includes cooperating fastening structure formed at or
    adjacent opposite ends whereby the ends of the form or mandrel may be
    brought together and fastened after the wisp of hair is wound thereon.


CLS 132/248
TXT Including string or elastic band fastener:

    Device under subclass 245 wherein the element for holding the hair wisp in
    contact with the form or mandrel is greatly elongated and is either flaccid
    or elastically deformable in the direction of its length.


CLS 132/249
TXT And discrete clasp or pivoted mandrel portions:

    Device under subclass 248 wherein either (a) a pivoted or spring biased
    hair clamping tongue is connected to the form or mandrel or (b) the form or
    mandrel comprises two swingably connected sections between which the wisp
    of hair is clamped.

    (1)     Note.  The string or elastic band is often used to secure the
    pivoted clasp or mandrel portion in its hair clamping position.


CLS 132/250
TXT Cylindrical or hollow form or mandrel:

    Device under subclass 248 wherein the structure about which the hair is
    woven or wound either (a) defines a cavity extending along substantially
    the entire length of the structure's central longitudinal axis or (b) has a
    substantially constant circular cross section along the entire length of a
    central longitudinal axis.

    (1)     Note.  Forms or mandrels comprised of a flat sheet of material
    (e.g., foam) which is rolled into a cylindrical shape during use are
    excluded from this subclass.


CLS 132/251
TXT And separable fastener:

    Device under subclass 245 wherein the fastening structure comprises a
    discrete element for holding the wisp in contact with the form or mandrel,
    and including structure which facilitates removal and replacement of the
    holding element on the form or mandrel.

    (1)     Note.  The separable fastener may remain tethered to the form or
    mandrel.

    (2)     Note.  The separable fastener may comprise a second superimposed
    roller.


CLS 132/252
TXT Circumferential clamp:

    Device under subclass 251 wherein the discrete removable element
    substantially surrounds the form or mandrel and exerts a radially inward
    force to hold the hair against the form or mandrel.


CLS 132/253
TXT Including pliant fastener or connection to mandrel:

    Device under subclass 245 wherein the supporting or fastening structure
    comprises an element which is relatively movable with respect to the form
    or mandrel and either (a) is formed of a supple elastically deformable
    material, or (b) is attached to the mandrel by hinge strip formed of a
    supple elastically deformable material.


CLS 132/254
TXT Including relatively movable hair fastener attached to form or mandrel:

    Device under subclass 245 wherein the supporting or fastening structure
    comprises a distinct element or portion for holding the hair wisp in
    contact with form or mandrel, and which is mounted for relative movement
    with respect to the form or mandrel.

    (1)     Note.  A mere slot through which is wisp of hair is inserted before
    it is wound about the mandrel is not considered to be a fastener.

    (2)     Note.  Forms and mandrels which employ VelcroTM type hair fastening
    fabric on their surface are not classified in this subclass on that basis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 455+ for similar clasps
    of a more general utility.


CLS 132/255
TXT Pivoted to form or mandrel:

    Device under subclass 254 wherein the distinct element or portion for
    holding the hair wisp is connected to the shape imparting structure by
    means of bearing surfaces which permit relative swinging movement of the
    element and the shape imparting structure.

    (1)     Note.  The hair holding element may comprise a distinct portion of
    the form or mandrel which is pivoted to the remainder of the form or
    mandrel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    234,    for similar devices which include a mass for storing heat to be
    applied to the hair.


CLS 132/256
TXT Plural pivoted fasteners or fastener sections:

    Device under subclass 255 including a second distinct element for holding
    the hair wisp and which is connected either to the shape imparting
    structure or to the first element by means of bearing surfaces which permit
    swinging movement of the second element relative to the shape imparting
    structure.


CLS 132/257
TXT Including pivoted bail:

    Device under subclass 256 wherein one of the distinct elements for holding
    the hair wisp comprises a U-shaped element swingably connected at each of
    its free ends to the shape imparting structure, and which is adapted to
    swing into an operative position wherein it surrounds a wound tress of hair.


CLS 132/258
TXT Pivoted bail:

    Device under subclass 255 wherein the distinct element for holding the hair
    wisp comprises a U-shaped element swingably connected at each of its free
    ends to the shape imparting structure and which is adapted to swing into an
    operative position wherein it surrounds a wound tress of hair.


CLS 132/259
TXT Including retaining clasp:

    Device under subclass 255 wherein either (a) the pivoted hair holding
    element or portion includes structure which may be selectively engaged with
    cooperating structure to secure the element or portion in its hair holding
    position, or (b) a discrete retainer element is provided to engage the
    distal end of the pivoted element or portion to secure it in its hair
    holding position.


CLS 132/260
TXT Including retaining clasp:

    Device under subclass 254 wherein either (a) the movable hair holding
    element or portion includes structure which may be selectively engaged with
    cooperating structure to secure the element or portion in its hair holding
    position, or (b) a discrete retainer element is provided to engage the
    distal end of the movable element or portion to secure it in its hair
    holding position.


CLS 132/261
TXT Plural forms or mandrels:

    Device under subclass 245 including a plurality of spaced elements or
    portions, each having a surface about which a hair wisp is woven or wound.


CLS 132/262
TXT Having peripheral projections:

    Device under subclass 245 including a plurality of elements distributed
    across the shape imparting surface and extending outwardly therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    268,    for a form or mandrel having ridges and grooves on the surface,
    without structure for retaining it in the hair.


CLS 132/263
TXT Having pivoted hair clamping jaw or plural pivoted mandrels:

    Device under subclass 226 which includes either (a) an element connected to
    the shape imparting structure by means of bearing surface which permit
    relative swinging movement of the element and the shape imparting structure
    to hold a tress of hair therebetween, or (b) a second discrete shape
    imparting structure about which a hair wisp is woven or wound and which is
    swingably attached to the first shape imparting structure by means of
    bearing surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224+,   for pivotally connected hair crimping jaws.

    232,    for an electric curling iron having a pivoted hair clamping jaw.

    234,    for a curling iron having a hair clamping jaw and a claimed heat
    storing mandrel.

    255+,   for a curler retained in the hair by a pivoted fastener.


CLS 132/264
TXT Having means to accommodate separable curl retainer (e.g., bobby pin):

    Device under subclass 226 including structure adapted to encompass or
    retain a removable discrete element to be applied to the wound tress of
    hair to hold its imparted shape when the form or mandrel is removed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242,    for a similar device having a rotatable form or mandrel.


CLS 132/265
TXT Having movable or collapsible handle or mandrel sections:

    Device under subclass 226 wherein either (a) a portion is provided by which
    the device is intended to be supported by the hand and which is movably
    attached to form or mandrel, or is formed of foldable or nestable segments
    which may be arranged into or from a compact position, or (b) the shape
    imparting means comprises two discrete sections which may be moved relative
    to each other into a more compact position.


CLS 132/266
TXT Including relatively movable hair contacting element (e.g., curl ejector or
    winder):

    Device under subclass 226 including an element which is mounted for
    movement with respect to the form or mandrel and is caused to engage the
    hair during said movement.


CLS 132/267
TXT Including end plate:

    Device under subclass 226 including a thin relatively planar portion
    attached at approximately a right angle to an end of the form or mandrel.


CLS 132/268
TXT Including grooved form or mandrel surface (e.g., spiral rib):

    Device under subclass 226 wherein the surface about which the hair is woven
    or wound has a recess formed or defined thereon and extending
    circumferentially about the structure.


CLS 132/269
TXT Having electrical heater:

    Device under subclass 223 including means which converts electrical energy
    supplied to the device into heat which is adapted to be utilized in
    conjunction with the operation of the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229+,   for electrical heaters combined with or adapted to be used with
    curlers.

    271+,   for other electric heaters combined with hair grooming means,
    (e.g., hair brush).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 222+ for electric hair heating devices
    without a hair brush, curler or other treating or grooming means, or having
    a nominal treating or grooming means and specific electrical circuitry.


CLS 132/270
TXT Having means to isolate or part a tress of hair for chemical treatment
    (e.g., frosting, cap or purse):

    Device under subclass 212 including means to segregate a group or section
    of hair strands to permit selective treatment by a composition which is
    subsequently applied.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216,    for an eyebrow mask.

    319,    for other masks for applying cosmetics.


CLS 132/271
TXT Electrical appliance or attachment therefor (e.g., hair styler or
    attachment):

    Device under subclass 212 which requires an input source of power in the
    form of electricity to operate, or an appurtenance which is readily
    attachable to such a device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118,    for a comb combined with a heater.

    119.1,  for a motor driven comb.

    229+,   for a hair curler combined with an electric heater.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 160 and 21.1+
    for brushes combined with heating means for use other than on the hair.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 97+ for a
    hair dryer which directs gas or vapor to the hair, but which does not
    include a grooming or shaping means.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 222+ for electric hair heating devices
    without a hair brush, comb or other treating or grooming means.


CLS 132/272
TXT Including liquid or vapor reservoir or outlet:

    Device under subclass 271 comprising either (a) a container for holding a
    supply of a liquid or vapor to be dispensed on the hair, or (b) a
    passageway and opening through which a liquid or vapor is dispensed on the
    hair.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227+,   for a curling iron having a misting feature.


CLS 132/273
TXT Hair fastener:

    Device under subclass 212 for holding the hair in position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144+,   for a comb having a hair engaging retainer or gripper member.

    215,    for mustache clips.


CLS 132/274
TXT Hairnet or cage:

    Device under subclass 273 comprising a portion of open mesh fabric or
    strips adapted to be placed over the head to hold the hair in position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223,    for a device which covers the head and includes structure for
    forming waves in the hair.


CLS 132/275
TXT Ornament holding (e.g., bow or ribbon):

    Device under subclass 273 including a decorative element or portion, or
    structure that facilitates the attachment of a decorative element or
    portion to the fastener of the hair.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    63,     Jewelry, subclass 20 for ornamental pins.


CLS 132/276
TXT Clip or hairpin:

    Device under subclass 273 wherein the means for holding the hair comprises
    either (a) plural relatively movable cooperable arms between which the hair
    is clamped, or (b) an elongated thin rod or pick adapted to be inserted
    into the hair.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223+,   for a clip through which the hair is woven to form waves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 455+ for similar clasps
    of a more general utility, and subclasses 150+ for pin fasteners of general
    utility.


CLS 132/277
TXT Squeeze-open clip:

    Device under subclass 276 including two relatively movable cooperable arms
    between which the hair is clamped, and a portion associated with each arm
    such that when the portions are engaged by the hand and moved toward each
    other, the clamping arms move apart to permit entry of the hair.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255+,   for a hair curler having a squeeze-open clip pivoted thereto.


CLS 132/278
TXT Including retaining clasp (e.g., barrette):

    Device under subclass 276 wherein the hair holding device comprises a
    plurality of movable cooperable arms between which the hair is clamped, and
    either (a) one arm includes structure which may be selectively engaged with
    the other arm to secure the two arms together against the hair or (b) a
    discrete retainer element is provided to engage the distal end of the arms
    to secure them together against the hair.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259     and 260, for a similar device holding a hair fastener mounted on a
    curler in its operative position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 455+ for similar clasps
    of a more general utility.


CLS 132/279
TXT Pivoted arms:

    Device under subclass 278 wherein one arm is mounted to the other by means
    of bearing surfaces which permit relative swinging movement about an axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259     and 260, for a similar device or structure holding a hair fastener
    pivoted on a curler in its operative positioner.


CLS 132/280
TXT Hairpin having plural prongs (e.g., bobby pin):

    Device under subclass 276 wherein the means for holding the hair includes
    two thin rod or pick-like portions adapted to be inserted into the hair.

    (1)     Note.  The rod or pick-like portions may be formed by a single bent
    piece of wire or the like, as a bobby pin.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219+,   for a hair holding comb comprising more than three teeth projecting
    from a back in a row.


CLS 132/281
TXT And third prong, discrete retainer, or opener:

    Device under subclass 280 further comprising either (a) a third thin rod or
    pick-like portion connected to the first and second, or (b) an individually
    distinct part adapted to hold the device in the hair, or (c) a movable
    element or portion adapted to move the prongs apart or to hold them apart.

    (1)     Note.  Mere bends or offset portions on the prong are not
    considered to be "discrete retainers".  On the other hand, a hook-like
    member protruding from a prong to prevent the hairpin from dislodging is
    considered to be a "discrete retainer".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 155 for analogous
    structure employed for the purpose of preventing loss of pin fasteners.

    63,     Jewelry, subclass 25 for similar structure in automatically
    operated guards designed to prevent loss of the watch from the pocket.


CLS 132/282
TXT Pivoted or sliding:

    Device under subclass 281 wherein the third prong, discrete retainer or
    opener is either (a) mounted by a pin or ball for swinging movement with
    respect to the first two prongs, or (b) mounted for guided to and from
    movement with respect to the first two prongs.


CLS 132/283
TXT Crossed prongs:

    Device under subclass 280 elongated, wherein one of the rods or picks or a
    portion thereof crosses the other in the general plane defined by the two
    rods or picks.


CLS 132/284
TXT Contacting prongs:

    Device under subclass 280 wherein the two thin rod or pick-like portions
    are biased into contact with each other when not in use.


CLS 132/285
TXT Template or mask:

    Device under subclass 73 including either (a) an edge to guide a tool or
    cosmetic applier during a manicure or pedicure operation or (b) a surface
    to prevent cosmetic material from coming into contact with a portion of the
    body while being applied to an adjacent nail.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213+,   for a template used for cutting or grooming hair.

    216,    for a template used in applying cosmetics to an eyelash or eyebrow.

    319,    for templates and masks of the class type and not relating to the
    hair or nails.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclass 127 for stencils of general application.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 504+ and see the notes thereunder for
    coating apparatus having a mask or shield.


CLS 132/286
TXT Toilet kit:

    Device under the class definition and comprising either (a) an article used
    in completing a person's toilet and combined with a receptacle or article
    receiver, or (b) an assemblage of a plurality of such toilet articles, or
    (c) a receptacle or receiver for a toilet article and which includes a
    mirror.

    (1)     Note.  "Receptacle" is not intended to include a holder/applicator
    (e.g., lipstick holder) with which an enclosed cosmetic is applied to the
    body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73.5+,  for manicuring devices combined with other structure, particularly
    subclass 75 for manicuring tools combined with a storage cavity usually for
    the storage of manicuring tools or supplies.

    219+    for combs combined with other structure, particularly subclasses
    102+ for combs combined with a mirror, subclasses 120+ for combs combined
    with a brush, and subclass 147 for combs combined with storage cavities.

    324+,   for tooth picks with a thread supply container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 581 for a cosmetic or
    toilet kit combined with a disparate art device.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 13.1+ for special article racks, per
    se.


CLS 132/287
TXT Having sliding drawer:

    Kit under subclass 286 wherein a receptacle is formed in a member which is
    mounted for guided movement into and out of a surrounding supporting
    structure to provide access to the contents of the receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 330.1+ for cabinet drawers
    in general.


CLS 132/288
TXT Illuminated:

    Kit under subclass 286 including means for supplying a source of visible
    electromagnetic radiation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 113 for illuminated dispensers.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 223.5 for cabinets with
    illuminating means.


CLS 132/289
TXT Shaving:

    Kit under subclass 286 wherein the device for completing a person's toilet
    is specifically employed in the process for cutting off hair close to the
    skin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 34 for razors combined with other things and not
    otherwise provided for; subclass 41 for razors combined with means to
    dispense lather on the face, subclass 535 for razors with a receptacle
    formed within the handle and subclass 541 for a razor storage receptacle.


CLS 132/290
TXT Having brush and soap receptacle or receiver:

    Device under subclass 289 comprising a bristled applicator for applying a
    preparatory foam or cream to the skin to be shaved, and a compartment or
    other structure for accommodating either the foam or cream or a solid from
    which the foam or cream is derived.

    (1)     Note.  The brush may have the receptacle in its handle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 110.5 for handles which also serve
    as receptacles.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 123+ for a kit
    which includes a supply of material and an applicator (e.g., brush)
    supported out of communication with the material, but no claimed article
    (e.g., mirror, comb) to make the kit peculiar to Class 132.


CLS 132/291
TXT Having mirror:

    Device under subclass 289 including a polished or smooth surface for
    forming an image by reflection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 224+ for a cabinet having
    a mirror.


CLS 132/292
TXT Having blade conditioning means:

    Kit under subclass 289 including means to improve the cutting edge of the
    cutting part of an implement used to cut off hair close to the skin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclasses 81.3+ for the
    combination of a razor strop and a receptacle therefor.


CLS 132/293
TXT Powder box and applicator (e.g., compact):

    Kit under subclass 286 wherein the receptacle is specifically adapted to
    hold pulverized particulate material either in loose or caked form which is
    adapted to be applied to the body, and including a device for applying the
    material to the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, appropriate subclasses, for the powder box receptacle,
    per se.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclass 130, for a powder
    box and applicator having no "kit" feature (e.g., mirror).


CLS 132/294
TXT Combined, or having plural cosmetic or applicator compartments or receivers:

    Kit under subclass 293 provided with either (a) another toilet article, or
    (b) a second receptacle or other structure specifically adapted to
    accommodate an additional substance for beautifying the face or an
    additional element for applying such a substance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 500+ for compartmented receptacles in
    general.


CLS 132/295
TXT Pivoted compartments or receivers:

    Kit under subclass 294 wherein two of the receptacles or accommodating
    means are swingably connected by bearing surfaces.


CLS 132/296
TXT And mirror pivoted between covers:

    Kit under subclass 295 wherein the receptacles or article accommodating
    means are enclosable within two swingably connected outer casings, and an
    additional element is swingably mounted between the outer casings and
    includes a polished or smooth surface for forming an image by reflection.

    (1)     Note.  The casings themselves may define one or more of the
    cosmetic or applicator receptacles.


CLS 132/297
TXT Including compartment or receiver for stick applicator (e.g., lipstick):

    Kit under subclass 294 which includes or is specifically adapted to
    accommodate an elongated element which consists of or includes along its
    length a cosmetic substance, wherein an end of the element is used to apply
    the substance to the body.


CLS 132/298
TXT Having powder dispenser:

    Kit under subclass 293 wherein the powder receptacle includes an outlet,
    and further comprising either (a) means to move or to assist in moving the
    powder toward or through the outlet, or (b) a valve for selectively
    permitting powder to pass through the outlet.

    (1)     Note.  A movable closure to prevent the powder from spilling or to
    merely permit its removal from the receptacle is not considered to be a
    valve as specified above.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes contractable or squeezable powder
    containers with applicators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses, for a powder dispenser, per se.


CLS 132/299
TXT Including discharge assistant:

    Device under subclass 298 including means to move or to assist in moving
    powder toward or through the outlet.


CLS 132/300
TXT Having plural closures:

    Kit under subclass 293 wherein the powder receptacle is provided with two
    movable or removable covering elements, each of which prevents passage of
    powder when in a closed position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    294+,   for a kit having plural cosmetic compartments having separate
    closures.


CLS 132/301
TXT Having mirror:

    Kit under subclass 293 provided with a polished or smooth surface for
    forming an image by reflection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102+,   for a comb combined with a mirror.

    291,    for a shaving kit provided with a mirror.

    309,    for a toilet kit including a toothbrush and a mirror.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    838+ for mirrors or reflectors.


CLS 132/302
TXT And wiper for mirror:

    Kit under subclass 301 including an element adapted to move across the face
    of the reflective surface to remove any powder accumulated thereon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 30+ for a dental mirror combined with means
    to clear or clean the surface.


CLS 132/303
TXT And cake holding, mounting, or ejecting means:

    Kit under subclass 301 wherein the pulverized particulate material is in
    solid or caked form, and specific structure is provided for either
    retaining the powder cake with the receptacle, or for pushing the powder
    cake from the receptacle.


CLS 132/304
TXT Particular mirror mounting:

    Kit under subclass 301 wherein significance is attributed to the structure
    for retaining or supporting the reflecting surface.


CLS 132/305
TXT Circular powder box:

    Kit under subclass 304 which has a round cross-section.


CLS 132/306
TXT And powder sifter:

    Kit under subclass 301 including a perforated or mesh partition through
    which the powder is caused to pass.


CLS 132/307
TXT Having powder sifter:

    Kit under subclass 293 including a perforated or mesh partition through
    which the powder is caused to pass.


CLS 132/308
TXT Including toothbrush:

    Kit under subclass 286 including a bristled device for cleaning natural or
    artificial teeth.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes toothbrushes combined with either a
    receptacle or another toilet device.  The other toilet device may be
    another instrument for cleaning the teeth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120+,   for the combination of a toothbrush and a comb.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 22.1+ for
    motor driven toothbrushes, and subclass 167 for other toothbrushes.  Class
    132 takes toothbrushes combined with a receptacle or another toilet device.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 268+ for a
    toothbrush having a receptacle for a fluent material and an outlet through
    which the material (e.g., dentifrice) is applied to the teeth.  Class 132
    also includes these types of toothbrushes when combined with any of the
    following:  (a) An additional toilet device or substance, or (b) a
    transporting or storage receptacle for the toothbrush (which may be in the
    handle).

    601,    Surgery:  Kinesitherapy, subclasses 136+ and 160+ for a nominal
    toothbrush claimed in combination with a gum messager or a water pic,
    respectively.


CLS 132/309
TXT And pick, scraper, floss or mirror:

    Kit under subclass 308 which includes either (a) a pointed portion for
    cleaning the interstices between adjacent teeth, (b) a sharp edge for
    scraping foreign material from a tooth surface, (c) filamentary material
    for cleaning between adjacent teeth, or a holder for such material, or (d)
    a polished or smooth surface for forming an image by reflection.


CLS 132/310
TXT Plural toothbrushes or receivers therefor:

    Kit under subclass 308 including either (a) a second discrete bristled
    device for cleaning teeth, or (b) a plurality of distinct means for
    accommodating a bristled device for cleaning teeth.


CLS 132/311
TXT Having receptacle in toothbrush handle:

    Kit under subclass 308 including a hollow portion adapted to be engaged by
    the hand when supporting or manipulating the bristled portion, wherein a
    closure or outlet is provided for the hollow portion for removal or
    placement of a substance or article therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290,    for a shaving brush having a receptacle in the handle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 110.5 for a handle which also
    serves as a receptacle.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 123+ for a kit
    which includes a supply of material and an applicator (e.g., a brush)
    supported out of communication with the material, but with no claimed
    article (e.g., mirror, comb) to make the kit peculiar to Class 132.


CLS 132/312
TXT Having flexible carrying case:

    Kit under subclass 286 including a receptacle having sides formed of a
    pliant sheet or web.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, subclasses 112+ for a
    compartmented purse or handbag.


CLS 132/313
TXT Including brush:

    Device under subclass 286 including a bristled device for grooming or
    cleaning.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120+,   for a comb combined with a brush.

    290,    for a shaving kit having a brush.

    308,    for a toilet kit having a toothbrush.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, appropriate subclasses
    for tooth, hair, shaving or clothes brushes, per se.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 234 for a pocket or
    personalized container for a tool and other device.

    248,    Supports, subclass 110 for supports in general for a brush or broom.


CLS 132/314
TXT Having plural compartments or receivers:

    Kit under subclass 286 having a first receptacle or article restraining
    means, and a second of which is specifically adapted to accommodate a
    toilet article or a substance for beautifying the face.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 581 for a toilet kit
    provided with disparate device. A mirror is not considered to be a
    disparate device, but rather an adjunct for the purpose of this line.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 20+ for compartmented receptacles, in
    general.


CLS 132/315
TXT In case having hinged or pivoted closure:

    Kit under subclass 314 including an enclosure for accommodating the two
    compartments or receivers and having one side or a portion thereof
    swingably mounted to permit access to the contents of the enclosure.


CLS 132/316
TXT Including mirror:

    Kit under subclass 286 provided with a polished or smooth surface for
    forming an image by reflection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 224+ for cabinets having a
    mirror.


CLS 132/317
TXT Including cosmetic applicator:

    Kit under subclass 286 including a device for applying a substance for
    beautifying the face.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, appropriate subclasses,
    for a brush, pad or other applicator structure, per se.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 118+ for a kit
    including a supply of coating material and an applicator removable
    therefrom for independent application to work; see, particularly,
    subclasses 123+ wherein the applicator is retained out of communication
    with the supply, and 126+ wherein the applicator overlies the material
    (e.g., subclass 130, wherein a pad overlies a supply of face powder or
    paste).


CLS 132/318
TXT Stick applicator:

    Kit under subclass 317 wherein the applicator is in the form of an
    elongated element which consists of or includes along its length a cosmetic
    substance, wherein an end of the element is used to apply the substance to
    the body.


CLS 132/319
TXT Template or mask:

    Device under the class definition including either (a) an edge which serves
    as a guide for a cosmetic applier or other tool during an operation of the
    class type, or (b) a surface which prevents unwanted contact of a cosmetic
    with a specific area of the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73.5+   and 75.3+, for a template for manicuring combined with other
    manicuring means.

    213,    for a dressing or cutting guide or gauge for the hair.

    216,    for a template used in applying cosmetics to an eyelash or eyebrow.

    270,    for means to prevent contact between a treating liquid and selected
    portions of the hair.

    285,    for a manicure template.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclass 127 for stencils of general application.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 504+ and see the Notes thereunder for
    coating apparatus having masks or shields.


CLS 132/320
TXT Shaped cosmetic applier:

    Device under the class definition having means for contacting the skin to
    apply a cosmetic thereto, and having a peculiar shape to aid in applying
    the cosmetic in a definite form or pattern.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73+,    for a similar device used for a manicure or pedicure.

    218,    for a shaped implement for applying cosmetic material to the
    eyelash or eyebrow.  Eyeliner applying implements are classified in
    subclass 320.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, appropriate subclasses
    particularly subclasses 208+ for cosmetic appliers in the form of brushes,
    wipers, etc., not shaped as above.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 19+ and 49+
    wherein the implement includes a piece of cosmetic material or an
    applicator (with supply) not shaped as required by subclass 88.7.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 63+
    for a live skin coloring composition, e.g., lipstick, rouge, etc.


CLS 132/321
TXT Toothpick:

    Tool under the class definition for removing particles of food, etc., from
    the teeth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 380 for a subclass 104 for
    a toothpick packet of the matchbook type, for toothpicks or stick matches
    grouped in a box for sale, storage or access and subclass 134 for
    toothpicks loosely supported.

    433,    Dentistry, subclass 143 for scalars.


CLS 132/322
TXT And motor driven mechanism or fluid applicator:

    Tool under subclass 321 including either (a) a mechanical movement powered
    by energy transducing or storing means, or (b) means by which a liquid or
    gas is applied to the body or the tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 22.1+ for a
    motor driven toothbrush.


CLS 132/323
TXT Having thread holder (e.g., flossing implement):

    Tool under subclass 321 including means by which an elongated flaccid
    element is supported while drawing it between adjacent teeth.


CLS 132/324
TXT And container or support for thread supply:

    Tool under subclass 323 including a compartment or holder for a quantity of
    flaccid material and from which the flaccid element is fed or drawn as
    needed.


CLS 132/325
TXT Including rotatably mounted thread spool:

    Tool under subclass 324 wherein the quantity of flaccid material is wound
    about the periphery of a holder mounted for rotation, whereby the flaccid
    material may be fed or drawn off the holder in a radial direction as the
    holder rotates.


CLS 132/326
TXT Including relatively movable thread clamping surfaces:

    Tool under subclass 324 including a first surface selectively movable
    toward or away from a second surface to prevent or retard movement of the
    elongated flaccid element between the two surfaces, or to release the
    flaccid element for movement, respectively.


CLS 132/327
TXT Including relatively movable thread clamping surfaces:

    Tool under subclass 323 including a first surface selectively movable
    toward or away from a second surface to prevent or retard movement of the
    enlarged flaccid element between the two surfaces, or to release the
    flaccid element for movement, respectively.


CLS 132/328
TXT Folded or housed in tool handle:

    Tool under subclass 321 including a portion adapted to be gripped by the
    hand while using the tool, wherein the tooth engaging portion of the tool
    is swung, slid or otherwise retracted into the hand-gripped portion when
    not in use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76.2,   for manicuring devices including a folding, retractable or sheathed
    tool.

    143,    for combs with a teeth guard or sheath.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 151+ for cutlery implements such as pocket
    knives which are foldable or otherwise retractable into the handle or have
    some other form of sheath to protect the blade while not in use.


CLS 132/329
TXT Having specified shape:

    Tool under subclass 321 wherein significance is attributed to the
    particular shape of the pick.

    (1)     Note.  Where the pick is claimed with no significant pick shape but
    merely in terms of the composition or material of which it is composed it
    will be classified in the appropriate composition or material class even
    though there is no claimed to the composition, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, appropriate subclasses for articles defined solely by their metal
    or alloy composition.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 544+ for stock
    materials, e.g., of indefinite length which have all metal or have adjacent
    metal components.


CLS 132/330
TXT Spreader or manipulator for hair fastener (e.g., bobby pin opener):

    Device under the class definition including either (a) means for moving or
    holding the arms of a clip away from one another or (b) means for holding a
    clip or pin and by which the clip is applied to or removed from the hair,
    wherein the clip or pin is adapted to engage the hair to hold it in
    position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242,    for a device having a rotatable hair curler, and means to
    accommodate a clip (e.g., bobby pin) to be applied to the hair once it is
    curled.

    264,    for a nonrotatable curler combined with means to accommodate a clip
    (e.g., bobby pin).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 700+ for resilient clip appliers, in
    general.


CLS 132/331
TXT Body worn:

    Device under subclass 330 wherein means are provided by which the spreader
    or manipulator may be supported on the body of the user.

    (1)     Note.  A device which is supported by gripping a handle portion is
    not considered to be "body worn".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclasses 101+ and see the Search
    Notes thereunder for various means for attaching devices to the body.


CLS 132/332
TXT Including dispenser or ejector:

    Device under subclass 330 including either (a) means to sequentially
    separate or present one clip or pin from a supply, or (b) means to move a
    clip or pin out of the device, or partially out of the device, to either a
    working position or a position which permits ready removal of the clip or
    pin from the device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 811+ for other hand held clip applying
    tools having magazines.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 33+ for other dispensers wherein the
    dispensed article is distorted or changes form concurrently and
    incidentally with separation from the dispenser, and subclasses 135+ for
    other dispensers having article treatment means.


CLS 132/333
TXT Miscellaneous:

    Device under the class definition and not provided for in the subclasses
    above.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 132/901
TXT Comb tooth shape:

    Cross reference art collection of documents relating to the particular form
    or outline of one of the projections of an implement having many such
    projections extending from a back in generally aligned relationship and
    adapted to be inserted into the hair.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219+,   and the Search Notes thereunder for combs.


CLS 132/902
TXT Liquid treating forms and mandrels:

    Cross reference art collection of documents relating to hair curlers having
    means for storing or passing a liquid hair treating composition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221,    for a form or mandrel claimed in combination with a supply of hair
    treating composition.

    227+,   for a form or mandrel having a surrounding fluid housing.


CLS 134/
TTL CLEANING AND LIQUID CONTACT  WITH SOLIDS

CLS 134/
TXT

    I.      This is the generic class for:

    (1)     Cleaning, i.e., the separation or removal of adherent dirt, scale,
    tarnish, impurities or any other foreign or undesired matter (as
    distinguished from solid-material working to obtain desired shapes or new
    surfaces or removal of a constituent part of the base material of a solid)
    from solid materials or objects whether or not the resultant separated
    ingredients are recovered in whole or in part for subsequent use.  This
    includes the pickling of metal.  By materials or objects are meant any
    solid material or object, whether a machine or any other solid in either a
    naturally occurring or manufactured state and includes the living body.

    (2)     The contacting of solids with liquids for any purpose not provided
    for in other classes.

    II.     This class has processes and apparatus for the purposes of section
    (1) above, not elsewhere provided for, as pointed out in the appended
    notes, but not the resultant products.  When the product is claimed, it is
    classified in the class appropriate thereto and cross-referenced here for
    the process or apparatus disclosed or claimed.

    III.    Cleaning may be performed by, or may involve as a part thereof,
    contacting solids with liquids.  The contacting of solids with liquids may
    be for purposes other than cleaning.  Where the contacting of solids with
    liquids is for some purpose other than cleaning and some other class
    provides for processes or apparatus for such purpose, the patent is in
    general placed in such class even though a combination with cleaning steps
    is claimed, see the notes below for variations of this line with particular
    other classes.

    IV.     Steps or means for cleaning and/or for liquid contact with solids
    are frequently claimed in combination with steps or means for some
    additional purpose.  Such processes and apparatus are in general classified
    in the class appropriate to the steps or means for the additional purpose.
    In other words, this class takes the subcombination for cleaning and/or
    liquid contact with solids, with steps or means to promote, facilitate, or
    perfect the cleaning or liquid contact.  Most manufacturing classes involve
    cleaning of, or contacting the product being manufactured with, liquids.

    V.      This class dominates over the compounds and compositions used for
    cleaning or liquid contact with solids.  Therefore, where a process or
    apparatus for this class is claimed and also a compound or composition used
    therein, the patent is classifiable in this class with a cross-reference to
    the appropriate compound or composition class. For further particulars as
    to this line with particular classes, see note [3] below.

    NOTES



    (1)     PAPER, TEXTILES, FIBERS, HIDES, SKINS, FEATHERS, AND ANIMAL TISSUES.

    This class (134) does not have processes restricted to either cleaning or
    contacting with liquids the materials, paper, hides, skins, feathers, and
    animal tissues either, per se, or combined with other treatments. Class 134
    has processes of cleaning of textiles and fibers not involving fluid
    treatment.  Processes of mechanical cleaning (nonsolvent, nonreactive) of
    textiles and fibers by a gas blast or by suction is not considered a fluid
    treatment and has been placed in Class 134.  Class 134 has, however,
    apparatus for cleaning and contacting with liquids the above named
    materials where not provided for in other classes.  For subject matter
    excluded from Class 134:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, which is the class for processes of the following
    types; bleaching and dyeing materials of any kind; treating of hides,
    skins, and other animal tissues with chemicals or fluids; liquid and
    chemically reactive treatments of feathers; and treatment of textiles and
    fibers to chemically modify the same and some additional special treatments
    with fluids.  The mechanical cleaning of textiles and fibers by a gas blast
    or by suction is not considered a fluid treatment and such processes have
    been placed in Class 134.  The notes to Class 8 should be consulted for
    related art. Class 8 takes patents limited to such subject matter and also
    patents disclosing only such subject matter even though the claims are
    broad.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, for apparatus there
    provided for even though for operating on vegetables, fruits, textiles,
    etc., and see following note [5] of Class 134 for a more complete statement
    relative to Class 15.

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, for processes and apparatus for
    liberating fibers, working fibers, or assembling fibers, even though
    involving cleaning or contacting the same with liquids.

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, for processes and apparatus for
    finishing cloth, even though involving cleaning or contacting the cloth
    with liquids (e.g., shrinking, subclass 18.5)

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, for processes and apparatus for
    performing textile making operations, even though involving cleaning or
    contacting the textile with liquids.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, particularly
    subclasses 280+ for feather drying and nonreactive gas or vapor treatments
    of feathers, and other appropriate subclasses for drying, per se, of
    textiles, fibers, and other materials (see note [5] for a further
    statement).

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 58 or processes of preparing vegetable
    seed for planting, including liquid application.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, which is the generic class for
    apparatus for the fluid treatment of textiles and fibers, and which takes
    such apparatus disclosed only for such purpose and disclosed for such
    purpose even though other purposes (as dishwashing, etc.) are disclosed.

    69,     Leather Manufactures.

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, which is the generic class for
    apparatus for preparing and treating food and beverages involving more than
    mere cleaning, apparatus for merely cleaning fruits, vegetables, etc.,
    being in Class 134 or other classes in accordance with the lines there
    between.  Class 99 has apparatus for separating, mechanically and such
    apparatus combined with cleaning and liquid contact means. Apparatus for
    cleaning with liquids or chemicals or liquid contact, per se, for other
    purposes in not in Class 99, but in Class 134 or other appropriate classes,
    even though for the purpose of removing naturally occurring parts of the
    work (as shells, fuzz, skins, etc.), there being no mechanical agent for
    cutting or comminuting the work (as a cutter, abrader, etc.).  However,
    Class 99, subclasses 518+ and 600+, provides for devices in which grain is
    subjected to an appreciable abrading or rubbing in cleaning.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 1+ and 233+ for
    processes and apparatus respectively for chemically liberating fibers from
    fibrous material (paper pulp digestion) and for chemically purifying or
    refining the liberated fibers.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 34+ for diagnostics of a residual
    toner removal system, subclass 245 for self-cleaning with electrodes a
    liquid development application member, and subclasses 343+ for cleaning of
    an image surface, per se.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    which is the generic class for processes of preparing foods involving
    cleaning or liquid contact with solids.  The mere cleaning of food or
    edible material i.e., the removal of naturally occurring substances on food
    (e.g., dirt, smut, etc.) are provided for in Class 134.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 262+ for
    processes of cleaning, liberating or purifying bodies or materials, which
    include fermentations.

    452,    Butchering, has apparatus and processes for cleaning and dressing
    of animals for food, including cleaning and contacting the same with
    liquids.

    935,    Genetic Engineering:  Recombinant DNA Technology, Hybrid or Fused
    Cell Technology, and Related Manipulations of Nucleic Acids, which provides
    a search collection for processes of altering the genetic structure of
    microorganisms; genes and methods of modifying genes and their expression;
    vectors and methods of modifying vectors; methods of introducing DNA into a
    cell; microorganisms, per se, which have had their genetic sequence altered
    by recombinant DNA techniques or by cell fusion or by uptake of DNA;
    testing; separation techniques; apparatus; and methods of use of vectors or
    of the genetically engineered microorganisms; methods of gene therapy or
    genetic modification of living organisms.



    (2)     COATING AND IMPREGNATING:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply.

    427,    Coating Processes.

    The application of liquids or other materials to a base to impregnate the
    same for retention therein, or for obtaining a surface coating (either type
    of which may be permanent or transitory) is not provided for in this class
    (134), the above noted classes being the generic classes for apparatus and
    processes, respectively, for such purposes, notes to the definitions
    thereof referring to related art.  This class (134) provides for cleaning
    and for liquid contact with solids for purposes other than coating and
    impregnating, with the following exceptions:

    (a)     Application of a detersive material which forms a solidified or
    hardened coating on the solid material and which is to be subsequently
    removed whether or not the removal is claimed, including those which bind
    the undesired or foreign material and remove the same from the base when
    stripped off.

    (b)     The application of detersive materials for cleaning and pickling of
    metal which detersive materials have admixed therewith a material (such as
    oil) which may be left behind on the metal cleaned.

    The above classes have processes and apparatus for coating and impregnating
    even though combined with either or both precedent cleaning of the work to
    be coated or subsequent cleaning of the coating.  This class (134) has the
    cleaning subcombination.

    (3)     COMPOUNDS AND COMPOSITION:

    Compounds and compositions and their manufactures (including purification)
    are in the classes appropriate to the compound or composition claimed, made
    or purified, or in the class appropriate to the manufacturing apparatus or
    process claimed.  In general, where both a process for this class (134) and
    a compound or composition used in such process are claimed, classification
    is in this class (134) with a cross-reference to the appropriate compound
    or composition class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, which is the generic class for the
    treatment and manufacture of inorganic chemicals by a physical process.

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclass 640 for composition for
    wall deposit prevention and removal.

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, for an
    abrasive tool making process, material, or composition.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, for processes of recovering or producing metals which include
    contacting solids with liquids.  Class 75 is the generic class for
    processes of separating metal from metal or metal from nonmetal for use of
    the metal in a metallurgical process.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, for such compositions and
    processes of making same.

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, for processes of, and apparatus
    for, leaching purging or contacting liquids with solids used in connection
    with making, extracting or purifying carbohydrates.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 22+ for compositions for treating solid
    metal other than for cleaning and pickling.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, for products solely
    disclosed as made by a Class 204 process except for those listed in the
    Class 204 definition under I (B).

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 14+ for mineral
    oil products and compositions.

    252,    Compositions, which is the generic class for compositions of
    matter.  It has cleaning compositions and processes of cleaning involving
    the mere use of detergents, even though the surfaces so treated are
    specified, see particularly subclasses:

    80+,    for compositions containing descaling agents.

    88,     for sweeping or dust-or-particle adherent compositions.

    89.1+,  for detergents.

    175+,   for water-softening or purifying or scale-inhibiting compositions.

    364,    for solvents.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, which is the generic class for such
    compounds.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, which is the generic class for chemical
    apparatus.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, for manufacturing inorganic
    compounds by chemical reaction and processes for extracting, leaching or
    dissolving inorganic compounds and nonmetallic elements.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, for a medicinal
    or biocidal composition or a composition for enhancing the appearance of a
    living body or for a process of mere use of such a composition, which may
    be a liquid.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 265 for
    ferment containing compositions and for materials to be used in
    fermentation processes.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses for
    synthetic resins or natural rubber or compositions thereof.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, for hydrocarbon compounds,
    processes for their synthesis or purification, and certain compositions
    containing a hydrocarbon.



    (4)     MATERIAL MIXING, SEPARATING, CLASSIFYING, OR ASSORTING:

    This class (134) has cleaning and liquid contact combinations having the
    above subcombinations but does not take the above subject matter, per se,
    even though involving the cleaning of the apparatus used or involving the
    contacting of solids with liquids as part of the mixing, separating,
    classifying, or assorting operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, for apparatus for separating materials from gases,
    including combinations with liquid treatment, see particularly subclasses
    282+ for separating media cleaning means and 242+ for liquid cleaning or
    flushing means for an apparatus part.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, for processes of gas separation in
    combination with the regeneration of the separating media by cleaning or
    liquid contact with the separating media.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, for apparatus for gas separation in
    combination with means to regenerate the separating media by cleaning or
    liquid contact with the separating media.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 104+ for presses not elsewhere classified,
    having drain means for expressed liquid.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, which has apparatus for recovering a
    liquid from a solid and/or other liquids by evaporation and condensation
    thereof. Class 134 takes claimed combinations of work handling or
    supporting means or steps, with means or steps to apply a liquid to the
    work, as by spraying or immersion, where said liquid is distilled or
    evaporated, whether or not the resulting vapor is (a) directly connected
    with the work or (b) condensed for reuse to contact the work.  Such
    disclosures have been excluded from Class 134 if only the liquid
    distillation subcombination or the vapor-phase work contact subcombination
    has been claimed.  For the latter subcombinations, see the line between
    Classes 34 and 202 as stated in section III B in the last sentence of (1)
    Note in the Class definition of Class 202.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, which has processes for
    distilling a liquid.  For the line between this class (134) and Class 203,
    see section III C in the class definition of Class 203.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, for separation of
    solids in accordance to their size or other differing physical
    characteristics, including the use of liquids to assist in such operations
    (for example, the liquid suspension and other liquid treatment subclasses)
    excepting processes and corresponding apparatus of cleaning work of dirt or
    foreign matter, which is adherent thereto (as distinguished from being
    merely mixed therewith as by being derived from a natural source, e.g.,
    clay gravel beds); and see particularly subclasses 379+ for clearers for
    keeping open passages in sifters and subclass 487 for cleaners for
    stratifiers. Processes and apparatus in which the liquid used to promote
    separation of the solids into grades is disclosed and/or claimed as also
    treating the solids for purposes in addition to separation is not provided
    for in Class 134, but in Class 209 or other appropriate class.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 670+ for a process
    including rehabilitation of ion exchange or sorption material, subclasses
    791+ for a process of rehabilitation of a filter medium in situ, and
    subclasses 106+, 158, 159, 225, 269+, 276, 298, 327, 332, 353, 355, 391+,
    and 407 for the combination of filter means and means for cleaning the
    filter medium in situ.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 302+, 398+ and 549 for multiple fluid sprayers.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, for gas and liquid contact, per
    se.  Where gas and liquid contact is claimed in combination with means for
    holding or handling a solid which is to be cleaned or contacted by the gas
    and liquid mixture, classification is in Class 134 or other class
    appropriate to the combination.

    366,    Agitating, for agitators, per se, and includes the combination of
    means for feeding to and discharging from the agitator.  Containers having
    a chamber and an agitating element therein to cause mixing and agitation of
    a mixture of liquids and solids in the container are in Class 366.  Where
    there is a carrier mounted in the container to merely convey solid work
    therethrough in contact with the liquid in the container, classification is
    in Class 134, even though the carrier causes agitation of the liquid that
    contacts the carried solid work, Class 134 also having means for agitating
    liquid materials when claimed in combination with a separate means for
    holding or handling a solid which is to be cleaned or contacted by the
    liquid.  Liquid contacting agitators combined with other devices not
    provided for as combinations in Class 366 (see the class definition of that
    class) e.g., means to separate the contact liquid from the treated solid,
    are provided for in this class (134) or other appropriate class according
    to the lines therebetween.

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating.

    494,    Imperforate Bowl:  Centrifugal Separators, subclasses 27+ for a
    separator of that class provided with means for furnishing auxiliary fluid
    to the material or the apparatus and wherein the fluid is liquid in nature.



    (5)     INDEX TO PRECEDING NOTES AND:

    Other classes having subject matter, per se, within the definitions of this
    class, combinations of which such subject matter is a part, and
    subcombinations of such subject matter, considered worthy of special
    mention:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, which has such subject
    matter, per se, and combined with means or steps to clean the same or to
    contact the same with liquids for various purposes, such as cleaning and
    disinfecting, and see particularly subclasses 538 through 660 for shower
    baths, basins, tubs and sinks, particularly designed for human use,
    subclasses 538 through 660; 637, 638 and 656, having drain boards and drain
    racks combined with sinks, or having features claimed adapting them to be
    mounted on or in, or to engage sink structures.

    5,      Beds, appropriate subclasses. Class 269 is the residual locus for
    patents to a device for clamping, supporting and/or holding an article (or
    articles) in position to be operated on or treated.  See notes thereunder
    for other related loci.  See especially subclass 606 for a surgical table
    combined with drainage means.

    7,      Compound Tools, for combinations of plural tools one of which may
    be a cutter, scraper, or other tool useful for cleaning.

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, see note (1).

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, which takes such subject matter even though
    combined with Class 134 subject matter.  See particularly subclasses:

    18.2    and 148, shoe filling machines and processes.

    41.3    pliabilizing soles, with fluid treatment.

    70+     and 104, burnishing machines and tools (closely related to
    cleaning).

    79.5,   waxing and polishing.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, see note (1).  Where a
    process which may use the apparatus of such class in its practice is also
    claimed, the patent is classified in some other class appropriate to the
    process, the apparatus being cross-reference to Class 15, Class 134 taking
    all such processes as are limited to cleaning or to liquid contact with
    solids not otherwise provided for, even though Class 15  apparatus is
    required for its practice. Class 15 takes apparatus in which a brush,
    beater, scrapers, shaker, eraser, wiper, shotter, or squeegee operates
    directly on the work, even though liquids are applied to the work at the
    same or a different station.  Where the apparatus is disclosed for removing
    materials from the work by a gas or vapor blast action, or by a suction
    cleaner action, Class 15 has such apparatus even though liquids are applied
    to the work at a different station, while Class 134 has such apparatus
    where liquids are applied to the work at the same station.

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, see note (1).

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, see note (3).

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, see Note (1).

    27,     Undertaking, particularly subclasses 21.1+ for embalming.

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, see Note (1).

    29,     Metal Working, see particularly subclasses:

    76.1+,  filing.

    81.01+, scale removers and preventers.

    89.5,   burning in, wearing in, and oil burnishing.

    90.01+, burnishing.

    30,     Cutlery, which has cutlery implements that may be used for cleaning
    purposes; and cleaning devices attached to and forming part of a cutlery
    combination, see particularly subclasses 41 and 124+.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, see also note( 1),
    which is the generic class for drying, per se, and the generic class for
    gas or vapor contact with solids.  Class 134 takes processes limited to
    cleaning even though such processes involve only the contact of gases or
    vapors with solids, and also combined cleaning and drying processes, while
    Class 34 takes all processes limited to drying, per se, even though
    involving liquid contact, and also processes of gas or vapor contact with
    solids for purposes other than cleaning, Class 34 takes apparatus disclosed
    for applying gases or vapors only to the work and even though the apparatus
    is disclosed for cleaning, while Class 134 takes apparatus disclosed for
    contacting solid work with liquids only,  both liquids and gases or vapors,
    or with fluids disclosed generically only.  Class 34, subclasses 90+, takes
    apparatus for removing liquid from work by contacting the work with solid
    material which removes the liquid by absorption, absorption or adhesion
    (e.g., blotting devices).

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 199+ and 227+ having combined snow
    excavators and melters, and for hydraulic excavating or dredging in
    subclasses 466 and 307+.

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, see note (1).

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, see note (3).

    47,     Plant Husbandry, see particularly subclasses 27, 48.5 and 79+ for
    plant irrigators.

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 37 for a window frame
    with a cleaner's hook, subclass 168 for a building with a protective liquid
    supply, and subclasses 171.3+ for residual constructions of a window with
    treating means for it.

    55,     Gas Separation, see note (4).

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 395 for horse rake clearers; subclasses
    400.08+ for hand rakes with cleaner, and subclass 448 for binder needle
    cleaners.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, see note (1).

    62,     Refrigeration, for processes of cooling articles by contact with a
    liquid (see subclass 64) and apparatus for cooling an article by contact
    with a liquid having specific defined means for cooling the liquid (see
    subclasses 373+).

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 27 for a glassworking or treating
    process combined with the step of repairing or cleaning of apparatus;
    subclass 116 for processes of tempering glass by quenching a liquid bath;
    and subclass 168 for glassworking or treating apparatus combined with
    positive apparatus cleaning means.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, see note (1).

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, see note (1).

    69,     Leather Manufactures, see note (1).

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 38, 39+ and 46+ for a plastic-metal
    shaping apparatus combined with means to vapor-contact, lubricate or coat
    the work, and see the notes thereto.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, which is the generic class for processes and
    apparatus for measuring and testing, and see the notes to the class
    definition for other measuring and testing.  Class 73 has measuring and
    testing involving liquid contact with the test specimen. Process and
    apparatus for cleaning or liquid contact with solids for purposes other
    than measuring or testing combined with measuring or testing are in Class
    134, the measuring or testing being in Class 73, along with measuring or
    testing devices with a built in cleaning attachment, see subclass 324 for
    sight glasses with cleaner.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, see appropriate subclasses for
    machine elements and mechanisms, per se, useful for operating apparatus of
    the type classified in Class 134.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, see note (3).

    83,     Cutting, subclass 168 for means to clean the tool or work.

    84,     Music, subclass 64 for cleaning pneumatic piano actions.

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, see notes (1) and
    (2).

    99,     Foods and Beverages:   Apparatus, see note (1).

    100,    Presses, see note (4).

    101,    Printing, subclasses 423-425, having cleaning combinations.

    104,    Railways, subclasses 279+ for track clearers.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, see note (3).

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclass 24 for a
    horizontal planar supporting surface member combined with drainage means.

    111,    Planting, subclasses 6+ for devices having earth working implements
    and adapted to deliver liquid or gas for contact with the soil.

    114,    Ships, subclass 222 for hull cleaning implements.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, see (2) Note.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, particularly subclasses 83+ for grooming devices
    and subclass 158 for anti-vermin dipping and washing.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 361 and 379+ for
    combinations of water heaters with means to clean same.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 198; processes of cleaning
    engines or parts thereof are in Class 134 even though claimed in
    combination with engine operation, where only such steps of engine
    operation are claimed as are necessary for the cleaning operation claimed,
    but engines claimed in combination with an engine cleaning attachment are
    in Class 123.

    125,    Stone Working, Class 134 has the subcombination of cleaning stone
    and brick by detergent action.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 16 for stoves with flue cleaners.

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, see note (3).

    131,    Tobacco, particularly subclasses 300, 314 and 324 for tobacco
    cleaning treatment with fluids and brushing; 184.1+ for smoking devices
    (pipes, cigar or cigarette holders) with cleaner; 232 for ash receivers
    combined with a smoking devices cleaner and subclasses 243 through 246 for
    smoking device cleaners.

    132,    Toilet, subclass 7 for processes of treating (including cleaning)
    human hair upon the body; subclasses 9+ for devices for treating the hair;
    subclasses 112+ for combs with an orifice for applying fluent material;
    subclass 119 for combs combined with a teeth cleaner; subclasses 31+ for
    devices for curling hair with or without liquid contact; and subclasses 73+
    for manicure devices.

    137,    Fluid Handling, appropriate subclass for fluid handling apparatus,
    including tanks, etc., which do not have means for applying liquids to
    solids, particularly subclasses 237+ for fluid handling apparatus combined
    with cleaning means, and subclass 357 for apparatus used for washing or
    applying fluid to vehicles when no means for containing, conveying, or
    supporting or guiding the movement of such vehicles or objects is claimed,
    and when the supply line is supported by part of the building.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, see note (1).

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    for processes and apparatus for filling receivers with fluent material, per
    se, and combined with precedent or subsequent cleaning.

    148,    Metal Treatment, see also note (3). This is the generic class for
    processes of treating metal.  Class 134 has only the subcombination, the
    cleaning and pickling of metal, per se, (not involving any other character
    of metal treatment), including the use of detersive materials which include
    an ingredient (such as oil) which is left behind on the metal cleaned.
    Class 148 has various fluid and chemical treatments of solid metal to
    change the chemical or physical properties of the metal, as distinguished
    from cleaning and pickling thereof.  Class 148, subclasses 240+ have
    processes for coating of metal in which an element of the coating is
    supplied by the metal base coated, Class 134, having no processes of this
    type.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, has
    subject matter pertaining to differential etching apparatus and etching
    methods, per se, see subclasses 345 and 625+, respectively; for apparatus
    for moistening the flap of an envelope and causing the flap to adhere to
    the body of the envelope see subclasses 441.5+, and for apparatus having
    means for shaping, scarifying or cleaning joining surface only see subclass
    535.

    157,    Wheelwright Machines, subclass 7 for tire setters combined with
    liquid tanks for cooling the tire.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclass 11 for
    combinations with a cleaner and subclass 44 for combinations with liquid
    applying means.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 344+ and subclasses 401+ for apparatus
    for disintegrating a sand mold or core while in molding association with
    (a) a flask, or (b) a casting even though involving Class 134 subject
    matter, except abrading means (Class 51, Abrasive Tool Making Process,
    Material, or Composition) or an agitating screen (Class 209, Classifying,
    Separating and Assorting Solids) functioning as the sole means for
    disintegration.  Also, see Class 164, subclasses 131+ for corresponding
    methods.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 95, for a heat exchange device with a
    cleaning means.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 311+ for well cleaning processes and appropriate
    subclasses for well cleaning apparatus.

    168,    Farriery, subclasses 48.1+ for hoof cleaning tools.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclasses 12, 13 and 52 for
    devices for cleaning or stripping material from the working surfaces of
    buried object recovery devices.  See also subclass 25 for unearthing
    devices combined with a brushing or wiping means for cleaning the undesired
    adhering material from the surface of a recovered plant or like object; and
    see subclasses 14 and 17 for devices which may be combined with recovered
    object cleaning means or may include, as an inherent part of the unearthing
    of the objects, a means which incidentally causes a cleaning of said
    recovered object.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 606+ and the subclasses there noted for
    an earth working implement with a cleaner.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, appropriate subclass for a means to
    drive or impact a tool or the like, and particularly subclasses 197+ for
    such means having a work cleansing modification.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 8+ for those
    using fluids and subclass 211 for insulators with dirt or moisture removing
    means.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating The Earth, subclasses 207+ for means
    utilizing fluid to remove cuttings from a hole which is being formed in the
    earth.

    184,    Lubrication, Class 134 has no lubrication, per se.  Class 184,
    subclass 1.5 has cleaning by flushing of automobile crank, transmission or
    differential casings combined lubricating and see the note to Class 184,
    subclass 1.5 for a complete statement of the line.

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, subclass 62 for trolley
    heads with ice clearers or preventers.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 122 for mineral oil vaporizers
    having means to remove carbon.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven for conveyors, per se, and in subclasses
    494+, a conveyor having installed as part of its structure a means for
    cleaning a component of the conveyor.

    199,    Type Casting, subclass 62 for cleaning attachments for casting
    mechanism of integral line machines.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, for processes for
    destructively distilling solid carbonaceous material, particularly subclass
    2 for a process for cleaning a coke oven and subclass 39, for a process
    including quenching char.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, see note (4) for processes and apparatus
    for separation of either solids or liquids by this operation.  Subclass 241
    has processes and apparatus for cleaning and decarbonizing coke ovens,
    retorts or stills, subclasses 227+, has coke quenching, and subclass 170
    has apparatus for vaporizing liquids and condensing the vapors on solid
    bodies in the upper part of the still.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, for processes for vaporizing
    and condensing liquids.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclasses for
    processes which include steps coming within Class 204 combined with
    cleaning of any kind or by any means or apparatus therefor and cleaning
    processes or apparatus therefor which include chemical action by electrical
    or wave energy. Class 134 has the subcombination of contacting solids with
    liquids.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, for electrolytic treatment combined with
    cleaning of any kind (e.g., subclasses 210+ for liquid treatment of a
    substrate followed by electrolytic coating, etc.) or by any means or
    apparatus therefor and for electrolytic cleaning (e.g., subclasses 705+ for
    electrolytic removal of foreign material from metal or metal alloy,
    subclasses 766+ for electrolytic treatment of other solid material in
    general, etc.). Class 134 has the subcombination of contacting solids with
    liquids.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclass 48, for processes
    of chemically converting hydrocarbons combined with a step of removing
    deleterious carbon accumulations formed on the equipment.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, see (4) Note.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, see (4) Note.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, appropriate subclasses for racks for supporting
    articles and even though the rack has features for draining, Class 134,
    having the combination of cleaning apparatus with a rack for holding
    articles either during or after cleaning.

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, for material removal involving
    etching to form a desired shape, a new surface or removal of a constituent
    part of the base material of a solid.

    220,    Receptacles, for receptacles for holding articles or materials even
    though having features for draining, there being no means for cleaning or
    applying liquids to the work, particularly subclasses 485+ for the
    sectional type, 500+ for the wire type 600+ for the compartment type, 668+
    for bottom structure, for skeleton frame type, and see subclasses 695+ for
    scraping attachments.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for article dispensers,
    not otherwise provided for, not claimed in combination with means or steps
    for cleaning or contacting with liquids the articles dispensed.

    222,    Dispensing, for liquid dispensers, per se, and subclasses 148+, and
    see the notes thereto for dispensers with a cleaning attachment.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 11 for apparatus for removing water and
    size from hat bodies; subclass 23 for hat cleaning apparatus.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 19+ for apparatus for and subclass
    125 for method of bonding and removing excess flux or solder from a bonded
    joint; subclasses 201+ and 205+ for bonding combined with cleaning.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, (see also note 4) for
    such subcombinations, particularly subclasses 146+ for mobile or ambulant
    devices for applying liquids to railroads, streets, etc., other appropriate
    subclasses for miscellaneous fluid supplying devices (e.g., subclasses
    208+) for washing or applying fluids to vehicles or other objects when no
    means for containing, conveying, supporting or guiding the movement of such
    vehicles or objects is claimed; and subclasses 104+ for nozzle cleaners or
    flushers.  Liquid applicators such as sprayers supported upon or guided by
    a track or conduit have been placed in Class 134 (or Class 118) where
    liquid application is limited essentially to the track or conduit and in
    Class 239 where an area (such as a street or field) is sprayed even though
    this area may incidentally include a track, conduit or guide.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 15+ and
    38+ for processes and apparatus for the purpose of the class combined with
    means to contact the work with fluids.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 134, for ice prevention.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclasses 428 and 444, for track
    switches having snow removal and automatic dirt removal means.

    248,    Supports, for article supports even though features for draining
    are provided.

    252,    Compositions, see note (3).

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, see note (3).

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, see note (4).

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    for processes within the class definition which may be combined with a
    Class 134 step, e.g., subclass 39 which includes the step of cleaning,
    polishing or preconditioning apparatus for use, and subclass 233, providing
    for subsequent washing of a molded article.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, for apparatus for treating solid metal
    with liquids and see the note to Class 266, subclass 114 for the line.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 855+ for wheel scrapers and cleaners.

    291,    Track Sanders, subclass 12 for fluid delivery type blast nozzles
    with cleaners, subclasses 42+ for sand pipe cleaners and subclass 48 for
    sand screens.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 50+ for
    fork-tine or shovel clearers, and also for hand and hoist-line implements
    for picking up material, as subclasses 49+ for hand forks and shovels, 61
    for spears, 65.5 for magnets, 67.1 for frames and cages, 68.22+ for
    hoisting bucket type, and 86.4+ for grapples.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 3+
    for a process or apparatus for melting or dissolving material for the
    recovery of valuable material from an in situ location in the earth.

    312,    Supports: Cabinet Structure, for draining cabinets, and for
    cabinets having washing apparatus as a part of the combination.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 22 for such devices with fluent material feed to the discharge,
    and subclasses 23+ for combinations with a cleaner.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 285+ for magnets which may be used to remove or
    pick up magnetic material from a surface.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 458 for burner tip cleaners.

    366,    Agitating, see note (4), for mere agitating, as distinguished from
    agitating to grind.  Note that cleaning by tumbling involving liquid
    contact is in Class 134.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 72+ for record
    cleaning combined with record use.

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 137 and 384 for bearing with cleaning means.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses:

    191+,   inking devices.

    695+,   erasing device attachments.

    701+,   cleaning devices.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, appropriate subclasses,
    wherein subclasses, 196+ and 261+, are to implements whose tool is
    blade-like or pad-like and subclasses 268+ wherein it is a brush, broom or
    mop; hence, each of these loci is likely to include cleaning implements.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, appropriate subclasses for hydraulic
    conveyors.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, appropriate subclasses for handling
    apparatus and processes in general not claimed in combination with means or
    steps for cleaning or contacting with liquid the work handled; see such
    subclasses as 146, 147+, and 288+ for a chamber or static receptacle and
    means to charge, discharge or move material therewithin; subclasses 217+
    for moving material between zones of different pressures; subclasses 222+
    for charging a load-supporting element from a source and moving it to a
    working, treating, or inspecting station, and subclass 287 for a static
    receptacle of a material conditioning type and means to move material to,
    within, or from the receptacle.

    417,    Pumps, for pump structure, including jet pumps.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, for rotary expansible chamber
    devices, per se.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, appropriate subclasses for processes of
    disinfecting, deodorizing, preserving, or sterilizing, also for like
    apparatus not elsewhere provided for, for such subject matter, per se.
    Class 134 takes cleaning even though an agent for disinfecting,
    deodorizing, preserving, or sterilizing is used.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 67+ for a filament or film extrusion device discharging directly
    into a liquid bath or shower means, subclass 71 for shaping or reshaping
    means combined with means advancing a continuous length work through a
    downstream liquid bath or shower means, and subclasses 225+ for shaping or
    reshaping apparatus for nonmetals combined with apparatus cleaning means;
    see the search notes thereunder.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    see note (1).

    427,    Coating Processes, see note (2).

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process Composition, or Product
    Thereof, appropriate subclasses for combination of cleaning and a step(s)
    provided for in the class.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 121+ for a residual combustion device having
    cleaning, purging or scavenging means.

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 80+ for dentists' cleaning apparatus which
    include a dispensing outlet; and subclass 216 for teeth cleaning methods.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, see notes (1) and
    (3).

    440,    Marine Propulsion, subclass 73 for self-clearing propellers.

    451,    Abrading, (see also Note 3), for a process or apparatus for
    abrading or cleaning or liquid contact with solids involving use of an
    abradant, with or without use of a detergent.  Search Class 51, subclasses
    32+ for a process of or subclasses 326+ for apparatus for abrading or
    cleaning in which plural workpieces are caused to tumble or rub against
    each other, with or without use of an abradant or, without use of a liquid
    when no abradant is utilized.  Note that cleaning by tumbling, without an
    abradant, involving liquid contact is in Class 134.

    452,    Butchering, see note (1).

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 83, 93, 121+, and 198 for window
    condensation precenters.

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, see Note (4).

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclass 92
    for belt and pulley transmission with a cleaning device for the belt or
    pulley.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 19+ for medicators.


CLS 134/1
TXT Processes under the class definition which include applications of
    electric, wave, ray or radiant energy to the work, other than radiant heat
    energy broadly recited.

    (1)     Note.  Radiant heat energy broadly recited should not be placed in
    this subclass, but the limitation to particular wave lengths or wave bands
    should be placed herein.

    (2)     Note.  The use of electric, wave, or radiant energy to destroy
    hazardous or toxic waste is found in Class 588, appropriate subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclass 103 for processes using wave energy in
    bleaching.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 245+ and
    266+ for processes involving applying electrical or radiant energy to the
    work.

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclasses for
    processes and apparatus for causing chemical reactions by electrical or
    wave energy action.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, especially subclasses 705+ for electrolytic
    cleaning of a metal or metal alloy and 766+ for electrolytic treatment of
    other solids, in general.

    219,    Electric Heating, for the miscellaneous processes and apparatus for
    application of electrical energy for heating and welding.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 428+ for methods and apparatus involving
    a fluent material container support or transfer device with or without an
    irradiating source for the material, subclasses 453.11+ for methods and
    apparatus for supports for irradiating objects with or without an
    irradiating source and subclasses 492.1+ for methods and apparatus for
    irradiating objects or materials generally.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, for furnace structure and
    processes which involve applications of electric energy to work for heating
    the same.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 34+ for diagnostics of a residual
    toner removal system, subclass 245 for self-cleaning with electrodes a
    liquid development application member, and subclasses 343+ for cleaning of
    an image surface, per se.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 22+ for process of using electrical
    or wave energy for purposes of disinfecting, deodorizing, preserving, or
    sterilizing.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 237+ for process of treating foods with electrical or wave
    energy.


CLS 134/1.1
TXT Plasma cleaning:

    Process under subclass 1 which includes treating the work with a plasma.

    (1)     Note.  Plasma for purposes of this subclass is a gas that is
    sufficiently ionized for its properties to depend on the ionization. It
    contains approximately equal numbers of positive ions and electrons so the
    mixture is electrically neutral, highly conductive and affected by magnetic
    fields.  A thermal plasma is produced by temperatures above 20,000 degrees
    centigrade.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, for etching processes involving
    the use of a plasma.


CLS 134/1.2
TXT Semiconductor cleaning:

    Process under subclass 1.1 wherein the work is a  semiconductive precursor,
    substrate, or device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, for (a) combined
    processes and (b) unit operations not elsewhere provided for manufacturing
    a semiconductive substrate or device.


CLS 134/1.3
TXT Semiconductor cleaning:

    Process under subclass 1 wherein the work is a semiconductive precursor,
    substrate, or device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, for (a) combined
    processes and (b) unit operations not elsewhere provided for manufacturing
    a semiconductive substrate or device.


CLS 134/2
TXT Processes under the class definition in which the work has a metallic,
    siliceous or calcareous base, and is subjected to a bleaching, oxidizing or
    reducing action, usually to remove color, dirt, or impurities or other
    foreign matter from the base.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 101+ for processes of bleaching of other
    materials.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 6+ for the oxidation of solid metal to
    form an adherent coating.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, especially subclasses 12 and 20+ for a process of removing
    contaminants, foreign or undesired matter from a catalyst or sorbent.


CLS 134/3
TXT Processes under subclass 2 which include treating the work with a substance
    having an acid reaction.

    (1)     Note.  The use of acidic agents is common to many of the processes
    in this class, and for those excluded by the definition of subclass 2, the
    appropriate following subclasses must be investigated, some subclasses
    being set forth in the following notes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for sequential treatments in which an acidic agent is neutralized
    or is used to neutralize another agent.

    28,     for sequentially used fluid agents one of which is acidic.

    41,     for acidic agents applied to metallic work.

    42,     for miscellaneous fluid agents used to remove particular materials
    including acid agents to remove materials from nonmetallic work.


CLS 134/4
TXT Process under the class definition in which a coating is applied to the
    work, which coating solidifies or hardens thereon, in which the coating is
    for cleaning purposes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses for processes within the class definition for
    molding or casting of films of continuous and/or finite length.  For
    casting on a supporting surface followed by removal therefrom see
    particularly subclasses 165, 212+ and 239+, particularly subclasses 283,
    298 and 299+.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 224 for apparatus comprising means casting fluent stock associated
    with a shaping surface to form an indefinite length product; see the search
    notes thereunder.

    427,    Coating Processes, coating processes combined with a cleaning step
    performed either before or after the coating operation.  Note especially
    subclass 299 for treating a base prior to coating and subclass 331 for
    processes of treating a coating subsequent to application.

    452,    Butchering, subclass 72 for processes of removing hair or feathers
    from carcasses by  use of a solidifiable composition.


CLS 134/5
TXT Processes under the class definition which include removing material from
    the work, which removal comprises melting the material to be removed while
    it is on the work.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not have the emptying of receptacles by
    melting of the contents, for which see the appropriate other classes as set
    forth in the notes below.  It does, however, have the removal of solid
    residues adhering to the walls of containers, or adhering to other surfaces
    by processes including melting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105+,   for apparatus with heating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, subclass 308 for processes of
    separating relative fusible material from other solid material by melting.

    37,     Excavating (e.g., subclasses 227+ and subclass 195), for processes
    which include melting to remove material.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 401+ for metallurgical processes that include treating
    multi-component metal-comtaining scrap having an integral substrate to
    separate metal therefrom by melting wherein at least one metal remains
    solid during separation.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 92+ for presses, not elsewhere classified,
    having in addition means to heat or cool the material pressed.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 343.5 for melting furnaces including
    means for melting tar and similar materials in order to cause the same
    discharge from a container.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 773 for a separating
    process including preliminary conversion to liquid state.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, for apparatus for treating metallic ores,
    including melting and separating.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 3+
    for a process or apparatus for recovering valuable material from the earth
    which includes melting.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, appropriate subclasses, especially 285+ for
    apparatus including a melting feature.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 1+ for a process of generating and applying
    heat even through for the purpose of removal of material from a solid base
    by melting, where there are no operations additional to melting.


CLS 134/6
TXT Processes under the class definition, involving treating the work with a
    mechanically acting solid agent, either alone or in addition to the
    application of fluids, as, for example, use of solid absorbents, brushing,
    wiping, scraping, use of a squeegee, cutting, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Solid Materials in solution, solid materials as part of a
    paste-like composition, and solid materials in the melted state, when used
    for treatment have been treated as fluids.

    (2)     Note.  The feeding, causing motion or distorting of the work, the
    solid agent performing no other function on the work, is not in this or the
    indented subclasses, but in other appropriate subclasses below, see
    particularly subclasses 14, 15, 16, 23, and 32+.

    (3)     Note.  Manufacturing processes which remove an integral portion of
    the work by cutting, etc., rather than extraneous or foreign material, are
    not in this class.

    (4)     Note.  For the distribution of art in treating of paper, textiles,
    fibers, hides, skins, feathers, and animal tissues, see note (1) to the
    main class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     15, 16, 23, 32, see note (2) above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, for apparatus for
    brushing, beating, scraping, shaking, wiping, shotting, or for using a
    squeegee, with or without the use of liquids.  Class 134 is the generic
    class for the cleaning and liquid contact processes performed by the
    apparatus of Class 15.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 76.1+ for metal filling processes and
    apparatus, subclasses 81.01+ for processes and apparatus for scale removing
    operating by scraping, flexing, etc., 90.01+ for processes and apparatus
    for compacting, condensing, smoothing, or polishing the surface of either
    metallic or nonmetallic articles.

    30,     Cutlery, for hand manipulable cutting implements capable of use in
    cleaning processes.  This class has extensive notes on manufacturing
    apparatus involving a cutting operation (including boring, drilling,
    chiseling, filing, planing, shaving, etc.).

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 40 for a process of or apparatus for
    mechanically cleaning metal work in connection with plastically shaping the
    work, e.g., rolling it.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 100+ and 200+ for coating apparatus
    having a solid member for modifying the coating on the work or applying a
    coating to the work.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 600+ for a device for animal grooming.

    125,    Stone Working, subclass 26 for cleaning brick and subclasses 27+
    for millstone cleaning by solid work treating agents.  Class 134 has
    cleaning of these materials by detergent action.

    168,    Farriery, subclasses 48.1+ for hoof cleaners.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 19+ for apparatus for and subclass
    125 for method of bonding and removing excess flux or solder from a bonded
    joint; subclasses 201+ and 205+ for bonding combined with cleaning.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, appropriate subclasses
    (subclasses 49+, however, being inappropriate), for a hand-manipulable
    coating implement including either a self-contained supply of fluent
    coating material or means for attachment to an external source of fluent
    material; subclasses 196+ and 261+ being the residual loci's for such
    implements having a padlike or blade-like tool, and subclasses 268+ for
    such implements wherein the tool is of the brush, broom or mop type.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 355+ for coating combined with
    treating the coating by contacting it with a solid treating member.

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 80+ for dentists' teeth cleaning apparatus
    which include a dispensing outlet; and, subclass 216, for teeth cleaning
    methods.

    451,    Abrading, for a process of or apparatus for cleaning (with or
    without the use of detergent or other liquid) involving use of an abradant.


CLS 134/7
TXT Processes under subclass 6 in which the solid agent that treats the work is
    in particulate or comminuted form, such as pieces of sponge balls,
    absorbent powders, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 95+ for
    shotting apparatus, subclasses 3.5, 302 and 320 for the type of particulate
    material application there provided.

    451,    Abrading, particularly subclasses 29+ for a process of abrading
    using a shield, subclasses 32+ for a process of tumbling to abrade, and
    subclasses 36+ for a process of abrading using a fluent abradant.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, subclasses 400+ for a sorbent composition.


CLS 134/8
TXT Processes under subclass 6 which include treating work (such as bottles,
    tubes, or other work having cavities or other interior surfaces) by
    application of the solid treating agent to the interior surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      where the solid treating agent is in particulate or comminuted form.

    22.1+,  for processes of treating interior surfaces of hollow work not
    involving the use of a solid work treating agent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, for apparatus for
    cleaning hollow articles by means of an air blast and/or suction,
    particularly subclasses 304, 316+, 395, and 406+ for apparatus for
    introducing a brush or wiper into the interior of hollow articles
    particularly subclasses 22.1+, 56+, 101, and for apparatus for cleaning
    tubular work by the passage therethrough of a solid or comminuted cleaning
    instrumentality carried in a fluid stream, see subclasses 3.5+.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 104+ and
    437+ for processes and apparatus for treating hollow work.


CLS 134/9
TXT Processes under subclass 6 in which the work is of bar, strip, strand,
    sheet or web form and the work travels longitudinally while being operated
    upon by the solid agent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for related processes not involving a solid work treating agent.

    64      and 122, for related apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclass 151, for processes involving running fabric,
    etc., lengths.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 77, 88, 100,
    and 101, for apparatus for brushing or wiping longitudinally traveling work
    of bar, strip, strand, sheet, or web form.

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 90.5 for burnishing of both metallic and
    nonmetallic longitudinally traveling work.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, particularly
    subclasses 306, 359, 414, 419, 444, and 519 for processes and subclasses
    94, 110+, 525, and 611+ for apparatus for treating longitudinally traveling
    work of strip, strand, sheet or web form.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.


CLS 134/10
TXT Processes under the class definition in which the treating agent used is
    subjected to a treatment after use to (1) regenerate the same, (2) purify
    the same in any way, (3) recover the same, or (4) separate the same from
    contaminants derived from any source (usually the work treated whether the
    agent is to be reused or not, and even though the ingredients separated
    from the work are recovered for use).  The removal of the work from the
    treating agent is not considered as any of such operations.

    (1)     Note.  For combinations not involving the above subject matter but
    involving the removal of the agent from, or neutralizing or destroying the
    agent while on the work, or the removal of the work from the agent, and
    also for processes involving the admixing of materials to form the desired
    agent, see coordinate following subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  Where treatment of the work is not involved in the process,
    the process being directed only to the regeneration, separation, etc.,
    subcombination, the patent is in the class appropriate to the
    subcombination, see notes (3) and (4) to the main class definition of this
    class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26+,    for the sequential application of different treating fluids to work.

    36,     for the admixing of materials to form the treating fluids,
    including where one or more solid materials are dissolved.

    109+,   for apparatus having treating fluid purifying, separating, or
    treating means.


CLS 134/11
TXT Processes under subclass 10, where, in addition to the subject matter there
    stated, the process includes exposing the work to a gaseous or vapor
    treating agent so that the same will condense on or be absorbed by the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for similar processes not involving regeneration, purification,
    recovery or separation of the agent used.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 145+ for treating of textiles or fibers
    with gases or vapors to clean or chemically modify the same.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, for processes of
    contacting solids with vapors for purposes other than cleaning.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 5+ for apparatus
    for treating textiles and fibers with gas, steam, or a mist.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 170, for apparatus suitable for
    carrying out this process.


CLS 134/12
TXT Processes under subclass 10 which include either or both (1) distilling the
    used agent, or (2) liquefying vapors arising from a liquid agent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for processes where, in addition to treatment of a used agent
    including distillation thereof and/or condensation of evolved vapors, there
    is also condensation or absorption of the vapors on the work.  This
    subclass (11) also has processes which evolve liquefying evolved vapors
    which would otherwise escape and be lost.

    31,     for processes where the only vapor liquefaction claimed is that
    which takes place on the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, appropriate subclasses for a
    process of carbonizing solid carbonaceous material and recovering a liquid
    product.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, appropriate subclasses for a
    process of distilling a liquid.


CLS 134/13
TXT Processes under subclass 10 which include any one or any combination of:
    crystallizing, precipitating, or otherwise removing part or all of
    dissolved, undesired solid matter from a used agent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for physical separation of solids not in a dissolved state that
    contaminate the used agent.

    12,     for such separation involving distilling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, appropriate subclasses, for the
    separation of an inorganic chemical from a mixture, and subclasses 295+ for
    miscellaneous processes of crystallizing.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, appropriate subclasses for the
    separation of an organic compound from a mixture, and subclass 707 for
    processes of crystallizing organic compounds.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclass 812 for a
    crystallization process to recover a hydrocarbon.


CLS 134/14
TXT Processes under the class definition which include applying treating agents
    to the work while it is in coiled form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for processes which involve uncoiling work or recoiling work before
    and/or after treatment by the agent, the work not being in coiled form
    during such treatment.


CLS 134/15
TXT Processes under the class definition in which the work is of bar, strip,
    strand, sheet, or web form, and the work travels longitudinally while being
    acted upon during treatment.

    (1)     Note.  In many of these processes, the work is bent, looped, or
    otherwise distorted or deformed during treatment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for this subject matter having in addition a solid work treating
    agent and see the notes thereto.

    14,     for a strip or strand work that is in the form of a coil during
    treatment, including winding and rewinding where the coils are subjected to
    treatment.

    16+,    for miscellaneous processes that include distorting or deforming
    the work.

    64      and 122, for related apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.


CLS 134/16
TXT Processes under the class definition in which the work undergoing treatment
    is so operated upon during the treatment as to have at least a momentary
    change in shape (other than by mere removal of material therefrom or
    addition of material thereto) to facilitate or improve the cleaning or
    liquid contact operation.

    (1)     Note.  The change of shape may be due to shaking, mechanical
    hammering, or vibrating, bending, crushing, or pressing the work, or by the
    operations provided for in the indented subclass, and maybe due to action
    of feeding or moving the work.

    (2)     Note.  The various classes for manufacturing of articles by a
    plastic shaping operation, as by molding, drawing, rolling, bending, etc.,
    should be consulted.  This class does not take distorting or deforming for
    the purpose of manufacturing, but only for purpose of perfecting the
    cleaning or liquid contact operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9       and 15, for distortion of bar, strip, strand, sheet, or web form
    work.

    14,     for distortion of coil form work.


CLS 134/17
TXT Processes under subclass 16 which include distorting the work by
    temperature change, centrifugal force, or fluid pressure caused shock or
    vibration.

    (1)     Note.  The temperature change may be due to the temperature of the
    applied treating fluids, and shock or vibration is due to suddenly applied
    fluid pressure or water hammer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19+,    for heating processes with or without the application of treating
    fluids at a temperature different from the work, when the process is not so
    carried out as to cause significant distortion or deformation of the work.

    26+,    for application of diverse, sequential treating fluids to the work,
    and in which the difference between sequential fluids may be temperature
    where the operation is not so carried out as to cause significant
    distortion or deformation of the work.

    32+,    for processes which include imparting motion to the work for
    purposes other than distorting or deforming.


CLS 134/18
TXT Processes under the class definition claiming one or more steps other than
    or in addition to (1) the feeding, (2) handling during treatment, (3)
    discharging, (4) heating of either the work or the treating agent, or (5)
    the use of vacuum, suction, or in inert atmosphere, and not provided for in
    preceding subclasses.

    (1)     Note.  For example, in this subclass are weighing the work,
    automatic control of the processes, measuring or testing combinations,
    cutting combination, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Processes involving drying by heating or contacting the work
    with gases, vapors or liquids, are not considered combinations and are in
    appropriate following subclasses.


CLS 134/19
TXT Processes under the class definition in which the work is either (1)
    contacted by hot products of combustion, or (2) heated in any way other
    than or in addition to contacting the work with heated cleaning or liquid
    contact agents.

    (1)     Note.  The use of heated cleaning or liquid contact agents (other
    than  products of combustion) including heating such agents while work is
    immersed therein, are in other appropriate subclasses of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      where the heating is done by the application of electrical energy
    to the work, as by conduction or induction, or by application to the work
    of radiant energy of particular wave lengths or wave bands.

    4,      for processes including melting of the material to be removed.

    17,     for heating or combined heating and cooling designed to cause
    significant distortion or deformation of the work.

    26+,    for sequential application to the work of treating agents of
    different temperatures.

    105,    for apparatus combined with heating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 223+ for coating combined with
    contacting the base or the coating with a flame.


CLS 134/20
TXT Processes under subclass 19 in which carbon is removed from the work.

    (1)     Note.  For example, this subclass includes internal combustion
    engine cleaning, in which the engine is operated to heat the same.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for oxidative removal of carbon.

    39,     for miscellaneous carbon removal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, for processes of engine operation,
    even though including cleaning, where steps of engine operation are claimed
    which are not necessary to the cleaning process claimed.


CLS 134/21
TXT Processes under the class definition in which the work is subjected to a
    vacuum or to suction during treatment, or an inert atmosphere is provided
    for the work, or any combination between the foregoing operations are used.

    (1)     Note.  The vacuum or suction may be for the purpose of removing
    liquids or other materials from the work.

    (2)     Note.  Steam is a common treating agent, and patents claiming steam
    are placed in this subclass only if the process is limited to the steam
    providing an inert atmosphere.

    (3)     Note.  The use of vacuum or suction to feed and/or mix treating
    agents, where the work is not subjected to a vacuum or suction action, is
    not in this subclass, but in other appropriate subclasses, see particularly
    subclass 36.

    (4)     Note.  The use of a vacuum to destroy hazardous or toxic waste is
    found in Class 588, appropriate subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for contacting the work with products of combustion.

    36,     see note (3) above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 300.1+, for
    air blast and/or suction cleaning apparatus.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 402+, for
    processes of drying and processes of contacting solids with gases or vapors
    (for purposes other than cleaning), and which include use of a vacuum,
    subclass 92, having corresponding apparatus.


CLS 134/22.1
TXT Hollow work, internal surface treatment:

    Processes under the class definition which include treating work such as
    bottles, tubes, or other work having cavities or other interior surfaces by
    application of the treating agent to the interior surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for this subject matter involving in addition, the use of a solid
    work treating agent and see the notes thereunder.

    14,     for treating of work in coil form.

    43,     53, 54+, 62, 152, and 166+, or other appropriate apparatus
    subclasses, for apparatus for treating the interior of hollow work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclasses 311+, for methods of cleaning wells.


CLS 134/22.11
TXT Pipe, tubing, hose, or conduit:

    Subject matter under subclass 22.1 wherein the hollow work being treated
    has the shape of a relatively long and thin cylinder.


CLS 134/22.12
TXT With pressurized fluid or fluid manipulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 22.11 wherein the fluid treating agent is
    under superatmospheric pressure and/or there is disclosure of significant
    manipulation of the flow of the fluid.


CLS 134/22.13
TXT With inorganic alkaline material treating agent:

    Subject matter under subclass 22.11 wherein the fluid treating agent
    comprises an nonorganic basic material.


CLS 134/22.14
TXT With organic treating agent (e.g., solvent, surfactant, or reactant
    yielding soluble product, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 22.11 wherein the fluid treating agent is an
    organic substance.

    (1)     Note.  The organic substance may be, e.g., a solvent for the
    substance to be removed from the work, a surface active material, or a
    substance which chemically reacts with the substance to be removed from the
    work to form a material which is soluble in a later treating step, etc.


CLS 134/22.15
TXT With steam utilization:

    Subject matter under subclass 22.11 wherein the process includes at some
    stage the use of water in its gas or vapor form.


CLS 134/22.16
TXT With inorganic salt treating agent:

    Subject matter under subclass 22.1 wherein the treating agent includes an
    inorganic salt.


CLS 134/22.17
TXT With inorganic alkaline material treating agent:

    Subject matter under subclass 22.1 wherein the fluid treating agent
    comprises an inorganic alkaline material.


CLS 134/22.18
TXT With pressurized fluid or fluid manipulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 22.1 wherein the fluid treating agent is
    under superatmospheric pressure and/or there is a disclosure of significant
    manipulation of the flow of the fluid.


CLS 134/22.19
TXT With organic treating agent (e.g., solvent, surfactant, or reactant
    yielding, soluble product, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 22.1 wherein the fluid treating agent is an
    organic substance.


CLS 134/23
TXT Processes under subclass 22 in which either (1) the hollow work moves
    during treatment, or (2) the hollow work has relatively movable parts at
    least of which moves during treatment (e.g., engines where the piston moves
    during treatment).

    (1)     Note.  Motion of plural work pieces sequentially to the work
    treating station where it is stationary during work treatment is included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for internal combustion engines operative as such with resultant
    heating, and with application of treating agents during or after engine
    operation.

    32+,    for similar subject matter for the other than hollow work having
    steps for treating an interior surface.


CLS 134/24
TXT Processes under subclass 22 having either (1) the nozzle which applies the
    agent movable to properly distribute the agent, or (2) involving the
    plugging or sealing of passages or openings in the hollow article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172,    and notes thereto for apparatus having movable nozzles.


CLS 134/25.1
TXT Work handled in bulk or groups:

    Processes under the class definition in which the work is treated in bulk
    or in groups, as distinguished from the handling and treatment of single
    articles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 675+, for a process
    of rehabilitation of ion exchange or sorption material by transfer of
    granules to another chamber or zone when combined with a liquid treatment
    step.


CLS 134/25.2
TXT Kitchen or tableware:

    Processes under subclass 25.1 in which the work treated comprises dishes,
    utensils, culinary articles, etc.


CLS 134/25.3
TXT Food:

    Processes under subclass 25.1 in which the work treated comprises fruits,
    vegetables, eggs, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for cleaning of food material including using solid work-treating
    agents, e.g., brushes.


CLS 134/25.4
TXT Manufactured articles:

    Processes under subclass 25.1 in which the work treated comprises
    manufactured articles.

    (1)     Note.  Articles included herein are intended to be used
    individually although they are cleaned or contacted by liquid in bulk form.


CLS 134/25.5
TXT Work stationary or moved countercurrently:

    Processes under subclass 25.1 in which the work remains relatively
    stationary during contact or is moved countercurrently to the fluid stream.


CLS 134/26
TXT Processes under the class definition in which two or more treating agents
    are sequentially applied to the work.

    (1)     Note.  One of the agents may be for the purpose of drying work.

    (2)     Note.  Neither the application of mixed treating fluids to the
    work, nor the simultaneous application of plural treating fluids to the
    work is in this or the indented subclasses, see particularly subclass 36.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      where a solidified or hardened coating is formed on the work for
    subsequent removal.

    6+,     where a treating agent is in solid form, when it contacts the work,
    even though subsequently dissolved.

    10+,    for the regeneration, purification, recovery or separation of
    treating agents when not on the work.

    19+,    where products of combustion contact the work.

    36,     see also note (2), for plural separately fed and simultaneously
    applied treating agents and processes which involve premixing of plural
    treating agents.

    61,     84+, and 94+, for apparatus for applying different fluids
    sequentially.


CLS 134/27
TXT Processes under subclass 26 in which a subsequently applied agent operates
    to chemically neutralize a previously applied agent, e.g., where an
    alkaline agent operates to neutralize a previously applied acidic agent.

    (1)     Note.  Even though the actual application of the first agent is not
    claimed, where the subsequently applied agent is claimed as neutralizing or
    being neutralized by such a previously applied agent, the patent is here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for sequential treatments, at least one being a treatment by an
    acid agent, but having no neutralizing treatment.

    29,     for sequential treatments, at least one being a treatment by an
    alkaline agent, but having no neutralizing treatment.

    41,     for treatments of metal bases with acid agent, not involving the
    use of a sequentially applied treating agent.


CLS 134/28
TXT Processes under subclass 26 which include treating the work with either an
    acid or an acid salt.

    (1)     Note.  Included are those having an alkaline reaction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for such treatments followed by a neutralizing treatment, or for
    the use of such treatment to neutralize a material already applied.

    41,     for acid treatments of metal base work, per se.


CLS 134/29
TXT Processes under subclass 26 which include treating the work with a fatty
    acid soap, rosin soap, soap of unspecified constitution, or a substance
    which has an alkaline reaction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for processes in which an alkaline agent is neutralized by another
    agent or is used to neutralize another agent.


CLS 134/30
TXT Processes under subclass 26 which include treating the work with steam or
    gas, or heating or cooling the work or treating it at specified
    temperatures or with an agent which has a specified temperature or with
    plural agents at different temperatures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     28, and 29, for the subject matter of this subclass (30) utilizing
    the particular agents specified in such subclasses.

    37,     for use of gas or vapor blasts alone.


CLS 134/31
TXT Processes under the class definition in which a gas or a vapor is caused to
    be condensed upon or absorbed on the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for such subject matter combined with regeneration, purification,
    recovery, or separation of the treating agent other than when on the work,
    and see the notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 170 for apparatus suitable for
    carrying out this process.


CLS 134/32
TXT Processes under the class definition in which (1) the work moves during
    treatment, or (2) the work has relatively movable parts at least one of
    which moves during treatment.  The motion may be caused by fluid contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9       and 15, where work of bar, strip, strand, sheet, or web form moves
    longitudinally.

    14,     for work in coil form movable during treatment.

    16+,    for miscellaneous processes in which motion of the work causes it
    to be distorted or deformed, as by shock or vibration.

    23,     for hollow work that has an interior surface treated and is movable
    during treatment.

    25.1+,  for work handled in bulk or in groups, accompanied by motion during
    treatment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 32+ for a process of abrading in which plural
    workpieces are caused to tumble against each other to promote cleaning
    thereof.


CLS 134/33
TXT Processes under subclass 32 in which the work is subjected to centrifugal
    force and/or the work is rotated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     where work in coiled form is rotated during treatment.

    17,     where work is subjected to centrifugal force which is so applied as
    to distort or deform the work.

    23,     for rotary hollow work that has an interior surface treated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 58 and
    312+, for processes and apparatus involving use of centrifugal force.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 240+ for processes of coating by
    using centrifugal force.


CLS 134/34
TXT Processes under the class definition in which the treating fluid has motion
    during the work treatment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22+,    for processes of introducing agents into the interior of hollow
    work, subclass 24 having those using movable fluid applying nozzles.

    31,     where the treating agent is a gas or vapor that is absorbed or
    condensed on the work.

    32+,    where the work is also movable during treatment.


CLS 134/35
TXT Processes under subclass 34 in which the treating fluid motion is caused by
    heating.

    (1)     Note.  The motion may be caused by vapors generated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for use of steam or other gases.

    36,     for use of steam to feed and admix with other treating materials.

    106,    for apparatus for producing liquid flow by heating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 191+, for textile
    apparatus in which thermal means causes liquid flow.


CLS 134/36
TXT Processes under subclass 34 which include treating the work with a
    plurality of fluids fed from separate sources.  The plurality of fluids may
    be of diverse or similar types, as substances in both liquid and vapor
    phases (such as liquid water and steam) two or more liquids from different
    sources, or a liquid and air or other gas, either simultaneously applied or
    admixed prior to application.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11      and 31, for processes in which the work is treated simultaneously
    with a vapor and a liquid, the liquid being the vapor condensate which
    condenses on the work.

    26+,    for processes involving sequential application of fluids.

    31,     see preceding reference to subclass 11.

    50+     and 94+, for apparatus for applying plural fluids together or
    separately.


CLS 134/37
TXT Processes under subclass 34 which include treating the work with a gaseous
    or vaporous blast or a gaseous or vaporous current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for sequentially applied fluid agents, one being a gas or vapor
    current or blast.

    36,     for gas or vapor currents or blasts used to admix with other
    treating agents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, the subclasses
    starting with subclass 283 for processes of treating solids with gases or
    vapors for drying or for purposes other than cleaning.


CLS 134/38
TXT Processes under the class definition in which paints, varnishes, lacquers,
    or enamels are removed from the work.


CLS 134/39
TXT Processes under the class definition in which carbon is removed from the
    work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for oxidizing of carbon to remove the same from metallic,
    calcareous or silicious base work.

    20,     where the work is also heated by modes other than the fluids
    applied or is, contacted by combustion products (e.g., by operating an
    internal combustion engine with resultant heating).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclass 2 for a thermolytic
    distillation process including the step of cleaning the apparatus or
    removing adherent char.


CLS 134/40
TXT Processes under the class definition in which oils, waxes, tars, or greases
    are removed from the work by solvent, action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11      and 31, for solvent removal of such materials which operate by
    solvent vapor condensation on the work.

    39,     for carbon removal, carbon deposits frequently having oils or
    greases admixed therewith.


CLS 134/41
TXT Processes under the class definition which include treating metallic base
    work with acids.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for acid treatments of metal base work which treatment includes
    oxidation, reduction, or bleaching.

    27,     for acid treatments when the acid is neutralized or is used to
    neutralize another agent.

    28,     for acid treatments preceded or followed by another treatment.


CLS 134/42
TXT Miscellaneous processes under the class definition not provided for in
    preceding subclasses.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass are collected as originals or as cross
    references, disclosures of the particular contaminants removed from the
    work, and/or the particular chemicals or fluids, used, except for the
    characters of subject matter provided for in the below noted subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for carbon removal where the process includes heating or contact
    with combustion products.

    38,     for removal of paints, varnishes, lacquers, or enamels.

    39,     for miscellaneous carbon removal.

    40,     for oil, grease, tar, or wax removal by dissolving.

    41,     for acid treating metal base work.


CLS 134/43
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which there is a station having
    both (1) means movable relative to the work (a finder) so as to enter an
    aperture or passage in the work, and (2) means to support the work so as to
    move (orient) the work by hand or power at the station until a passage or
    aperture out of line with the finder is moved to a position in line
    therewith and the finder does so enter (i.e., move the work at the station
    from a position where the aperture or passage is improperly positioned to a
    position where the aperture or passage is in a position in which the finder
    enters the same).

    (1)     Note.  For example, barrels which are rotated at the station until
    the finder enters the bunghole are here.

    (2)     Note.  The finder may be a fluid delivery conduit or a separate
    element.

    (3)     Note.  Guide means in line with a fluid delivery means so as to
    guide the work thereto, so that the fluid delivery means enters an aperture
    or passage, there being no means to orient the work relative to the guide,
    are not in this or the indented subclasses, but appropriate following
    subclasses, as are conveyors which convey the work to fluid applying means
    but having no means to orient the work relative to the conveyor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8       and 22.1+, for processes of treating hollow work.

    53,     54+, 62, 152, and 166+, or other appropriate following subclasses
    for other apparatus for treating hollow work not having the features
    provided for in subclass 43.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power Driven, subclasses 383+, for a conveyor having a
    significantly-shaped portion that cooperates with a significantly-shaped
    load to orient the latter.


CLS 134/44
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which some element or control of
    the apparatus is operated or controlled by engagement with the work or by a
    holder for the work that is separate from the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus having interconnected or interengaging parts so
    that motion of one part causes motion of another, is not in this and the
    indented subclasses, but is in appropriate following subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  In this subclass, for example, are devices in which relative
    motion between the work and fluid applying means causes sliding or
    rectilinear motion of the member immediately moved to operate or control a
    fluid controlling valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56+,    for other forms of automatic controls.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 668+, for coating apparatus having
    means to control the application of coating material by the work presence
    or absence.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 156 for receptacle operated
    valves.


CLS 134/45
TXT Apparatus under subclass 44 in which the work is a vehicle of any kind (as
    automobile, locomotive, etc.) or in which the work is a wheel for any
    purpose.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the patents in this subclass are arrangements by
    which the vehicle engine drives the cleaning or liquid contact apparatus
    either directly or through the medium of the vehicle wheels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123,    for other vehicle or wheel form work, the apparatus not having work
    or separate work holder operated devices.


CLS 134/46
TXT Apparatus under subclass 44 in which the device operated or controlled is
    other than a fluid controlling valve, e.g., power stop controls, trips,
    work counters, switches, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 116.5+ for stop
    mechanism, particularly subclasses 125+ for material control.


CLS 134/47
TXT Apparatus under subclass 46 in which the device operated or controlled is a
    pump.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, appropriate subclasses for pumps, per se.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices for rotary expansible chamber
    devices, per se.


CLS 134/48
TXT Apparatus under subclass 44 in which there is either an endless belt type
    or rotary type work carrier or conveyor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67+,    70+ and 124+, for other endless belt type work carrier combinations.

    78+     and 157+, for other rotary work carrier or conveyor combinations.


CLS 134/49
TXT Apparatus under subclass 44 having means for conveying the work, or
    separate work holders, by movable carriers or by guides through the
    apparatus without return movement to the point of entry over the same path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for endless belt and rotary type carriers.

    82      and 165, for other combinations with guide rails.


CLS 134/50
TXT Apparatus under subclass 44 having two or more means to supply two or more
    different fluids.

    (1)     Note.  The different fluids may be mixed prior to application to
    the work or may be separately applied to the work either sequentially or
    simultaneously.

    (2)     Note.  Where there is but a single fluid supply claimed, even
    though disclosed or claimed as having a fluid mixture, the patent is not in
    this subclass unless plural means for supplying the fluids separately for
    admixture are claimed.

    (3)     Note.  Means for applying plural streams of the same fluid to the
    work are in other appropriate subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94.1+,  for other apparatus not having the work or separate work holder
    operated devices.


CLS 134/51
TXT Apparatus under subclass 44 in which the organization is such that fluids
    impinging against either the work or the work holder cause the same to move.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138+,   for such apparatus not having work or separate work holder operated
    devices.


CLS 134/52
TXT Apparatus under subclass 44 in which the member immediately engaged by
    relative motion between it and the work or separate work holder and moved
    thereby has rotary, swinging, rocking or pivotal motion.

    (1)     Note.  The valve may be directly or indirectly operated or
    controlled by such movable member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     and other appropriate indented subclasses for apparatus in which
    the element immediately moved has sliding or rectilinear motion.


CLS 134/53
TXT Apparatus under subclass 52, in which fluids are applied to work having
    hollows or passages, both internally and externally.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166+,   and see the notes thereto for other apparatus for hollow work.


CLS 134/54
TXT Apparatus under subclass 44 in which fluids are applied to work having
    hollows or passages, both internally and externally.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166+,   and see the notes thereto for other apparatus for hollow work.


CLS 134/55
TXT Apparatus under subclass 54 in which there are means for applying a jet of
    fluid to the exterior of work.


CLS 134/56
TXT Apparatus under the class definition claiming some character of automatic
    control.

    (1)     Note.  By automatic control is meant the provision of means to
    sense a condition (for example, means to sense a temperature, pressure,
    rate of motion, viscosity, specific gravity, etc.) which automatic sensing
    means operates or controls some device that in turn performs some character
    of control function.

    (2)     Note.  The above definition is intended to exclude valves,
    closures, and nozzles directly operated by fluid pressure (e.g., check
    valves, safety valves).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for finders and orienters for passages and apertures in work.

    44+,    for controls operated by the work or by a separate work holder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 524+ for
    automatic controls of such apparatus.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 663+ for coating apparatus having
    automatic controls.


CLS 134/57
TXT Apparatus under subclass 56 in which the automatic control system involves
    the use of electrical energy in performing a control function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for electric controls not having automatic features.


CLS 134/58
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having electrical control means.

    (1)     Note.  Electric motor operated apparatus is included in this
    subclass only when some electrical control means other than the motor
    itself is claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for automatic electric controls.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 663+ for coating apparatus having
    electrical controls.


CLS 134/59
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means for assembling the
    several separated parts of the work, or having means for operating on the
    work to separate the several separable parts thereof or a combination of
    these two means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23      and 32+, for processes involving work having parts movable during
    treatment.


CLS 134/60
TXT Apparatus under the class definition which include means for conveying or
    allowing flow of work-treating or other fluid from one work-treating
    station to another work-treating station, either in or out of contact with
    work-treating fluid at one or both stations, other than fluid carried by
    the work, and other than direct fall of work-treating spray at one
    work-treating station into a work immersion vat at another work-treating
    station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135,    and other appropriate subclasses for work draining which is not
    considered to be treating.


CLS 134/61
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having two or more distinct work
    treating receptacles, treating stations, or fluid applying devices, and
    having, in addition, means that carries, conveys, or transfers the work
    from one such receptacle or station to another, or transfers the
    receptacles or fluid applying devices from one location to another so as to
    afford sequential treatment of the work with different fluids.

    (1)     Note.  The term "treating" excludes mere draining of liquids from
    the work, while on the carrier, conveyor, or transfer means, for which see
    appropriate following subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  One work treating station may be for purposes other than
    liquid treating.

    (3)     Note.  The application of the same fluid to plural parts of the
    same work piece or to plural work pieces where there is either a single
    fluid applying means or plural fluid applying means grouped to form a
    single station has not been placed in this or the indented subclasses.
    There should be two or more separate station for performing either the same
    or different functions upon the work, and where plural stations each apply
    fluids, there must be at least two different fluid sources.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26+,    for related processes.

    84+,    for other plural work treating receptacles or treating stations
    having no means operated as part of the apparatus for transferring the work
    from one to another, i.e., those in which the work is manually transferred.

    137+,   and see the notes thereto for apparatus having means to movably
    mount, convey, or transfer the work where there is but a single work
    treating receptacle or treating station, even though the work is moved to a
    liquid draining position.


CLS 134/62
TXT Apparatus under subclass 61 in which, at the entrance or work feeding part
    of the machine, there is a station having means (1) to initially empty work
    (in the form of receptacles or work having hollows or passages therein), or
    (2) to invert, or (3) to orient, or (4) to puncture the work; which station
    has no means for applying fluid to the work, and which station is
    considered to be one of the work treating stations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for orienters combined with a finder for an aperture in the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 344, 345, and 373+ for a
    conveyor having means for orienting the conveyed load relative to the
    conveyor, and subclasses 402+ for a conveyor having means to invert the
    conveyed load.


CLS 134/63
TXT Apparatus under subclass 61 in which means are provided for treating the
    work in some manner other than by fluids, by draining the work, or by
    heating the work (e.g., grading, classifying, sifting, weighing, wringing,
    etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for finders of apertures in the work.

    59,     for work assembling or disassembling means.

    62,     for means for emptying, inverting, or orienting the work prior to
    fluid treatment.


CLS 134/64
TXT Apparatus under subclass 61 having means to treat work in the form of a
    strip, bar (e.g., log), strand, or web traveling longitudinally of itself.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9       and 15, for related processes.

    122,    for other apparatus for treating sheet, web, strand or bar form
    work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material or Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.


CLS 134/65
TXT Apparatus under subclass 61 in which at least one work conveyor is of the
    screw conveyor type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132,    for corresponding single station apparatus and see the notes
    thereto for related art.


CLS 134/66
TXT Apparatus under subclass 61 in which there are at least two movable work
    carriers or conveyors (i.e., movable to convey the work or work holder-not
    merely movable for adjustability of detachability of same) and means are
    provided to transfer the work from one to another in its travel through the
    machine from one work treating receptacle or station to another.

    (1)     Note.  The plural movable work carriers may have separate or common
    drive means or may be rigidly connected (as by mounting on a common drive
    shaft) if there are provided means for transferring the work from one to
    another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 564 through 571 for types
    of combined carriers.


CLS 134/67
TXT Apparatus under subclass 66 in which at least one of the work carriers is
    of the endless belt conveyor type.


CLS 134/68
TXT Apparatus under subclass 67 in which at least one fluid applying station
    has one or more of the following types of fluid applying means (1) a
    splasher, (2) a sprayer, or (3) means to jet the fluid against the work.


CLS 134/69
TXT Apparatus under subclass 66 in which there are at least two carriers rotary
    about the same axis, with means to transfer the work from one to the other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 328+ for plural tumbling drums for cleaning or
    abrading with means to transfer work from one drum to another.


CLS 134/70
TXT Apparatus under subclass 61 in which the means to transfer, carry, or
    convey the work from one work treating receptacle or station to another is
    of the endless belt type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for endless belt type with work operated valve.

    67+,    for plural conveyors (one endless) with work transfer means.

    124+,   for single station apparatus with endless belt conveyor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses for endless belt
    type conveyor structures in general.


CLS 134/71
TXT Apparatus under subclass 70, in which the carrier belt guides (whether
    stationary or rotary) have a horizontal axis.


CLS 134/72
TXT Apparatus under subclass 71 in which at least one fluid applying station
    has one or more of the following types of fluid applying means, (1) a
    splasher, (2) a sprayer, or (3) means to jet the fluid against the work.


CLS 134/73
TXT Apparatus under subclass 72 in which at least one fluid applying station
    applies liquids by immersing the work therein.


CLS 134/74
TXT Apparatus under subclass 73 having means, in addition to the movable work
    support, for causing fluid motion at the immersing station (e.g.,
    splashers, pumps, or agitators).


CLS 134/75
TXT Apparatus under subclass 71 in which the same endless belt type work
    carrier is sequentially immersed in liquids in at least two different
    liquid holding receptacles, to thus immerse the work therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67+,    for plural carriers, at least one being of the endless belt type,
    with work transfer means.

    71,     for endless carriers that carry the work to two or more immersing
    tanks but in which the endless conveyor element is not immersed.


CLS 134/76
TXT Apparatus under subclass 61 in which a movable work carrier is moved from
    one treating receptacle or station to another by means of the traversing
    hoist-type, i.e., means which elevates the carrier, translates the same to
    the next station, and lowers the same again if necessary.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70      through 74, for traversing hoist type devices in which endless
    belts are provided for the traversing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    212,    Traversing Hoists.


CLS 134/77
TXT Apparatus under subclass 76 in which the traversing means is adapted to
    move the work in a curved on nonrectilinear path (e.g., swingable on a
    vertical axis).


CLS 134/78
TXT Apparatus under subclass 61 in which the means to transfer, carry, or
    convey the work from one work treating receptacle or station to another is
    mounted for rotary or swinging motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65,     69 and 77, for other rotary or swinging carriers for sequential
    work treating station type apparatus.

    134,    for rotary or swinging work feeding and/or discharging means.

    137+,   for single station type apparatus with rotary or swinging types of
    work holders or carriers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclasses 441, 450, 480+, 608, 611+, 803, and others, for rotary conveyors
    in general.


CLS 134/79
TXT Apparatus under subclass 78 in which the transfer means rotates about an
    axis passing through the approximate center thereof, the work holding means
    being distributed about the axis of rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65,     for the screw conveyor type.

    142,    for ferris-wheel type single station apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 328+ for tumbling drum-type apparatus for
    cleaning or abrading.


CLS 134/80
TXT Apparatus under subclass 79 in which the axially rotary transfer means is
    of the turntable type, i.e., pivoted to rotate about a substantially
    vertical axis.


CLS 134/81
TXT Apparatus under subclass 80 in which valve mechanism for controlling fluids
    is operated synchronously or in coordination with the turntable, as by
    having a common drive, or being connected to or engaged by some turntable
    part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44+,    for work operated valves.


CLS 134/82
TXT Apparatus under subclass 61 having guide rails or rods engageable by the
    work or separate work holder or carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     125 and 165, for guide rails in other combinations.


CLS 134/83
TXT Apparatus under subclass 82 in which the guide rails or rods are vertical,
    inclined, curved, or movable or are provided with rollers or adapted for
    immersion of work in a liquid.


CLS 134/84
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having any one or any combination of
    the following features:  (1)  two or more fluid holding receptacles or
    chambers, each of which is for the fluid treating of work and in which the
    plural chambers may be formed by partitions in a larger chamber; (2) two or
    more fluid treating stations with means to selectively deliver fluids to
    one at a time, or to less than all at a time; (3) a liquid applying
    receptacle or station and a second receptacle or station for drying,
    draining, or the application of vapors or gases, and under (1) to (3) the
    work itself being manually transferred from one station to another, as
    distinguished from moving a work holder from one place to another.

    (1)     Note.  Single or plural means to apply fluids to a plurality of
    parts of the same work or to a plurality of work pieces, where such fluid
    applying means are grouped together to form a single station (with or
    without plural separately movable work supports) will not cause
    classification in this or the indented subclasses, but are in appropriate
    following subclasses. There must be, in addition, one or more of the
    features above set forth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61+,    for plural work treating receptacles or stations having, in
    addition, means to transfer the work from one to another.

    135,    for combinations involving a liquid holding tank, a work holder
    used therein, the work holder being movable to a position other than the
    position it has during liquid contact operations, with means for holding
    the same in such position.

    137+,   for apparatus having a single work station and means to movably
    mount the work or work support, even though the device is organized to move
    the work away from the liquid applying means to permit the same to drain,
    there being no station distinct from the liquid applying station having
    features specialized to care for the drainage.


CLS 134/85
TXT Apparatus under subclass 84 in which at least one station has a movably
    mounted work holder or work receptacle connected for motion relative
    thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92,     for workholders or compartments detachably associated with other
    parts of the combination, but not connected thereto for relative motion.


CLS 134/86
TXT Apparatus under subclass 85 in which the movably mounted workholder or
    receptacle is designed for motion during fluid application to cause or
    assist in application of fluids to the work.


CLS 134/87
TXT Apparatus under subclass 86 in which there are two or more workholders or
    supports which are supported so that the weight of one and work therein
    would be partly or wholly counterbalanced or counterpoised by the weight of
    at least one of the others and work therein.  This includes, for example,
    the two types (1) in which two workholders are supported on a walking beam
    at opposite sides of the supporting pivot of the beam so that one
    workholder moves up when the other moves down, and (2) two workholders
    which are supported by and on opposite sides of a movable column, but in
    which the two workholders are not necessarily arranged to move one upwardly
    when the other moves downwardly, but both may move up simultaneously or
    down similarly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76+,    for traversing hoist type devices for transferring work from one
    station to another.


CLS 134/88
TXT Apparatus under subclass 84 having either, or both, (1) means to supply
    fluids to one or more of the work treating receptacles or stations, or (2)
    movable means to apply fluids to the work at one or more of the stations,
    e.g., pumps or splashers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86,     where the workholder or fluid holding receptacle moves during fluid
    application.


CLS 134/89
TXT Apparatus under subclass 88 having means (such as a pump, splasher, or
    agitator) to cause fluid motion, to either supply fluids to a fluid holding
    receptacle or to apply fluids to the work.


CLS 134/90
TXT Apparatus under subclass 88 having either a heater or a heat exchanger
    associated therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105+,   for other heater combinations.


CLS 134/91
TXT Apparatus under subclass 84 having a drain for draining liquids from one or
    more of the stations, which drain is valve controlled.


CLS 134/92
TXT Apparatus under subclass 84 in which (1) one work station or compartment is
    detachably associated with another, or (2) there is a workholder detachably
    associated with at least one work station so that it may be removed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85+,    where one workholder or receptacle is interconnected for motion
    with another, as distinguished from being merely detachable or has means
    for moving the same during fluid application.


CLS 134/93
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means to supply to the treating
    fluids a solid agent to be dissolved therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94.1+,  for means for feeding liquid detergents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 3.5+ for
    patents disclosing and claiming systems in which a mechanical cleaning is
    effected by a solid agent carried through tubular work in a fluid stream
    provided for this purpose.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 17 for such machines
    combined with soap supplying means.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 268 for fluid distribution systems
    including a holder for a solid material to be dissolved or entrained.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass .5 for receptacles
    containing detergents which are infusible directly from or through the
    receptacle walls.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 310+ and 336
    for spraying apparatus having means to mix, dissolve or entrain a material
    (which may be a solid) in a flowing liquid stream prior to discharge
    through a nozzle member; also subclasses 303+, 340+ and 398+ for other
    spray devices in which the entrained or dissolved material is usually
    another fluid.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 261+ for extracting, leaching, or
    dissolving apparatus.


CLS 134/94.1
TXT With plural means for supplying or applying different fluids at the same
    workstation:

    Apparatus under the class definition having one work treating station which
    includes either plural means for treating a work product with different
    fluids at the workstation.

    (1)     Note.  The difference between the fluids may be merely temperature.

    (2)     Note.  The different fluids may be fed to a common conduit or other
    mixing means prior to application to the work; or the different fluids may
    be fed at different times through the same or different conduits to the
    work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26+     and 36, for related processes.

    50,     for corresponding apparatus having an operating or controlling
    device engaged and moved by the work or a separate workholder.

    57      and 58, for the subject matter of this and indented subclasses
    95-98, wherein the ordering or coordinating means is an electrical timer or
    programming circuit means.


CLS 134/95.1
TXT Means for sequentially applying different fluids:

    Apparatus under subclass 94.1 which includes means for successively
    applying two or more different fluids to the work.


CLS 134/95.2
TXT With drying means:

    Apparatus under subclass 95.1 combined with means for drying the work.


CLS 134/95.3
TXT Fluid spraying means:

    Apparatus under subclass 95.1 comprising means for applying one or more of
    the fluids to the work in the from of a spray.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating apparatus, subclasses 300+ for coating apparatus in which
    the coating material is flung, projected or sprayed onto the work.


CLS 134/96.1
TXT With nonimpelling plural way liquid outlet (e.g., two way valve) or
    nonimpelling liquid outlet control coordinated with other control:

    Apparatus under subclass 94.1, combined with (1) two or more passages for
    passively directing fluids from a working-treating chamber or (2) means for
    coordinating or operatively interconnecting a passive outlet control and
    some other control.


CLS 134/97.1
TXT Coordinated inlet nonimpelling control and noninlet control:

    Apparatus under subclass 94.1 which has means coordinating or operatively
    interconnecting a passive work-treating chamber fluid inlet control and
    some other kind of device.


CLS 134/98.1
TXT With coordinated or multiple valves:

    Apparatus under subclass 94.1  combined with (1) interconnected,
    coordinated, or multiwayvalves for controlling flow of the plural fluids or
    (2) means to selectively direct or divert liquids to any one of plural
    conduits or courses used to conduct the liquid from the work.


CLS 134/99.1
TXT Plural fluids applying conduits:

    Apparatus under subclass 94.1 which includes two or more conduits for
    applying two or more fluids to the work.


CLS 134/99.2
TXT With means for supplying an additive (e.g., liquid detergent):

    Apparatus under subclass 99.1 comprising means for supplying a small amount
    of a product which supplements or improves the performance of the
    work-treating fluid.

    (1)     Note.  The amount of the additive is small in relation to the
    amount of the fluids.

    (2)     Note.  The product may be a fluid or a nonfluid.


CLS 134/100.1
TXT With means for mixing or contacting fluids with each other before applying
    them:

    Apparatus under subclass 99.1 which includes means for blending two or more
    fluids together or for impinging one fluid upon another prior to applying
    them to the work.


CLS 134/102.1
TXT Having steam, air or gas applying conduit:

    Apparatus under subclass 100.1 wherein one of the fluids being applied to
    the work through a conduit is steam, air or gas.


CLS 134/102.2
TXT With pressurized air or gas supplying means for fluid movement:

    Apparatus under subclass 102.1 combined with a source of air or gas, under
    pressure, for agitating or propelling the work treating fluid.


CLS 134/102.3
TXT With drying means:

    Apparatus under subclass 102.1 combined with means for drying the work.


CLS 134/103.1
TXT Having means for recirculating or reversing fluid flows:

    Apparatus under subclass 94.1 which includes means for sending one or more
    of the fluids back through one or more of their respective  conduits.


CLS 134/103.2
TXT Fluid spraying means:

    Apparatus under subclass 94.1 comprising means for applying one or more of
    the fluids to the work in the form of a spray.


CLS 134/103.3
TXT Movable:

    Subject matter under subclass 103.2 wherein the position of one or more
    parts of the spraying apparatus can be changed.

    (1)     Note.  The position change may range from merely rotating the
    nozzle to moving the entire spraying apparatus.


CLS 134/104.1
TXT Having self cleaning means:

    Subject matter under the class definition having means for cleaning the
    cleaning apparatus itself.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 3.51+ for
    apparatus for cleaning tubular work by passing a fluid carried
    instrumentality therethrough, and having means for collecting or retrieving
    the cleaning agent for reuse, at the end of a cleaning operation.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 513 for the
    same subject matter applied to the apparatus of that class.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 17, 70, 104, 203, 302, and 429 for
    coating apparatus having cleaning or conditioning means.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 494+ for a conveyor having
    installed as part of its structure a means for cleaning a component of the
    conveyor.


CLS 134/104.2
TXT With means for collecting escaping material:

    Subject matter under the class definition having means to collect material
    that departs from the desired path through the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  Such escaping material may be either the work or work
    treating material or both.


CLS 134/104.3
TXT Cleaned material:

    Subject matter under subclass 104.2 in which material that has been cleaned
    is collected.


CLS 134/104.4
TXT Foreign material separated from liquid:

    Subject matter under subclass 104.2 in which material other than the
    cleaned material is separated from a liquid.


CLS 134/105
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means in one of the following
    forms or some combination thereof:  (a) a heating means, (b) a cooling
    means, or (c) a heat exchange means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90,     for heaters, or heat exchangers in other combinations.

    94.1+,  for fluid injection heaters or coolers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 58+ for coating apparatus combined
    with heating or cooling means for the work.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 121+ for apparatus for heating
    solid metal combined with separate means for applying fluids to the metal
    after heating.


CLS 134/106
TXT Apparatus under subclass 105 which includes means for producing flow of a
    liquid through a conduit by pressure in the liquid or by pressure of a
    fluid there against, generated by heating the liquid or the fluid or both.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     for related processes.


CLS 134/107
TXT Apparatus under subclass 105 which includes heat-exchange means external to
    the work treating chamber, vat, or zone.


CLS 134/108
TXT Apparatus under subclass 105 which includes means for recirculating the
    work treating liquid through a conduit and through the work-treating
    chamber, vat, or zone.


CLS 134/109
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means for separating
    contaminants from the treating fluids, so that the fluids free from such
    separated contaminants may be applied to the work.

    (1)     Note.  The separating means must be means in addition to the main
    tank for the work, e.g., a separate decanting chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10+,    for related processes.

    105+,   for apparatus employing a heating and/or cooling means (as, for
    example, a still) to separate contaminants from the treating liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, and see the notes to the main
    class definition for other classes having separation and purification of
    materials.


CLS 134/110
TXT Apparatus under subclass 109 in which the fluid purifying or separating
    means operates by filtering or straining contaminating solids therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  Foraminous workholders, which permit the passage of fluids
    for, or the escape of fluids after, application to the work, are not
    included, even though disclosed or claimed as a filter or strainer.  The
    fluid filter or strainer must be in addition to the work holder.

    (2)     Note.  Foraminous structures through which fluids are delivered
    against the work in the form of a spray or plural jets are not considered
    to be filters or strainers. The filter or strainer must be in addition to
    such structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109,    for filters or strainers combined with other types of purifiers or
    separators and for such other types, per se.


CLS 134/111
TXT Apparatus under subclass 110 which includes means for recirculating the
    work-treating liquid through a strainer.


CLS 134/112
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which either (1) a brake is
    provided for any moving part of the apparatus, (2) a clutch is provided
    between any two moving parts of the apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control.


CLS 134/113
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having any one or any combination of
    the following: indicating means; signalling means; alarm means; means to
    display the treating fluids or the work; means to inspect the interior of
    the apparatus (other than mere closures); means to illuminate the apparatus
    or a part thereof; or means to perform a test.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for counters and other devices operated by the work or a separate
    workholder.

    56+,    for automatic controls.

    63,     for combinations including weighing, wringing, classifying,
    sifting, etc., with sequential work stations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, and see the notes to the main class
    definition for the distribution of art on measuring and testing, per se.

    116,    Signals and Indicators.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 712+ for coating apparatus having
    testing, inspecting, measuring, signal or indicator means.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, appropriate subclasses.  Note
    especially subclasses 500+ for electrically operated alarms automatically
    responsive to a condition.

    362,    Illumination.


CLS 134/114
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having a liquid trap seal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 402+, and
    see the notes thereto for other processes and apparatus using liquid seals.


CLS 134/115
TXT Apparatus under the class definition where some apparatus feature is
    claimed in addition to:  (1) means for introducing the work into, holding
    or conveying the work within, or discharging the work from the apparatus,
    or (2) means for feeding, discharging, holding, directing, or agitating the
    treating fluids, or (3) means for collecting or discharging treating fluid
    drainage; or apparatus which, by manipulation of its parts (including
    addition, removal, or change of position), may be converted from apparatus
    of one character to apparatus of a second character, other than the
    combinations provided for in preceding subclasses.


CLS 134/116
TXT Apparatus under the class definition for treating work having two or more
    relatively movable parts, the apparatus having means to cause at least two
    such parts to move relative to each other during operation of the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59,     for work assembling or disassembling.


CLS 134/117
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which there is a receptacle for the
    treating fluid, which receptacle is mounted for motion during the normal
    cycle of operation of the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  In this apparatus, the work is usually (but not always)
    placed in such receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150,    for movably mounted receptacle form work constituting the sole
    treating liquid holder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclasses 139+ for textile tumbling apparatus.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 421 for immersion coating apparatus
    having movably mounted immersion receptacles.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 128+ for miscellaneous stands for movable
    receptacles.

    366,    Agitating, particularly subclasses 219+ for an agitator with a
    movable mixing chamber.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 328+ for a tumbling drum.


CLS 134/118
TXT Apparatus under subclass 117 having means constructed at the bottom of the
    receptacle (including the formation of the receptacle bottom) for
    permitting rocking or rolling thereof, so that the axis of rocking or
    rolling shifts transversely thereof during such motion.


CLS 134/119
TXT Apparatus under subclass 117 in which the fluid holding chambers or
    receptacles are mounted, or designed for rotary or swinging motion.


CLS 134/120
TXT Apparatus under subclass 119 in which the rotary or swinging motion is on a
    substantially horizontal axis only.


CLS 134/121
TXT Apparatus under subclass 119 in which the rotary or swinging motion is on a
    substantially vertical axis only.


CLS 134/122
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means to handle work of sheet,
    strand, web, or bar (e.g., log) form, travelling longitudinally of itself.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      15, for related processes.

    64,     for apparatus having sequential work       treating receptacles or
    stations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 611+, and
    see the notes thereto for sheet, web, or strand handling apparatus.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 419, and see the notes thereto for
    apparatus for coating running length work.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.


CLS 134/123
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the work is a vehicle of any
    kind or in which the work is a wheel for any purpose.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for such apparatus having work or separate workholder operated
    devices.


CLS 134/124
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having an endless conveyor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     67+ and 70+, for other combinations with an endless belt type
    conveyor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 239, 322, 324, and 423+ for coating
    apparatus having endless work conveyors.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, for endless conveyor structure, per se.


CLS 134/125
TXT Apparatus under subclass 124 having guide rails directly engaged by the
    work or work holding means (as distinguished from the guide rails
    frequently provided for the endless conveyor).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for guide rails combined with work operated controls.

    82,     for guide rails where there are sequential work treating stations.

    165,    for guide rails in other combinations.


CLS 134/126
TXT Apparatus under subclass 124 in which, in addition to the endless belt,
    there is another work conveyor or a work manipulator to operate upon the
    work precedent to delivery to the endless conveyor, after delivery from the
    endless conveyor or while on the endless conveyor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67+,    for work transfer from one movable carrier to another, at least one
    being an endless belt type, there being sequential work stations.

    125,    Where there are guide rails for the work or workholder.

    128,    for endless belts with means to hold the work thereon and means to
    release the work held.


CLS 134/127
TXT Apparatus under subclass 124 in which there are two or more endless belts.

    (1)     Note.  They may, for example, be arranged in series, in parallel,
    or in face to face relation throughout parts of their lengths.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    for combinations with guide rails.

    126,    for combinations with a nonendless-belt conveyor.


CLS 134/128
TXT Apparatus under subclass 124 in which the endless-belt conveyor has either
    or both (1) means operable after work deposition for holding the work
    thereon, or (2) means to release such holding means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    where the endless-belt is associated with guide rails and the work
    is held therebetween.

    126,    where the work is held between an endless-belt and a
    nonendless-belt conveyor.

    127,    where the work is held between two facing endless conveyors.


CLS 134/129
TXT Apparatus under subclass 124 in which (1) at least one of the fluid
    delivery conduits or nozzles is movably mounted, or (2) the endless-belt is
    interconnected with a fluid controlling valve for operation so that either
    (a) motion of one causes motion of the other, or (b) one is required to be
    in a preselected position before the other can move.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for processes of treating hollow work using a movable nozzle.

    44+,    144+, 167+, and 172+, for movable nozzles in other combinations.


CLS 134/130
TXT Apparatus under subclass 124 having means, in addition to the endless
    conveyor, for causing fluid motion (e.g., pump, agitator, or splasher).

    (1)     Note.  Such additional means must not be mounted on the conveyor,
    but there may be a common drive.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147,    where the movable work support is other than an endless conveyor.


CLS 134/131
TXT Apparatus under subclass 124 having fluid delivery conduits or nozzles for
    spraying or applying jets to the work.

    (1)     Note.  The conduits may be for delivering the fluids either to the
    work or to fluid holding receptacles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     68, 72+, and 129, for other endless belt with spray or jet
    combinations.


CLS 134/132
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the work passes along a
    spiral path and/or the work conveyor is of spiral form (for example, a
    screw conveyor).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65,     for related plural treating station apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 715 for conveyors such as belts
    and rollers moving the load on a helical path, and subclasses 475.1, 513,
    545, 548, 550.6, 550.10, 582, 608, 611+, 625, 657+, and others for a screw
    conveyor.

    366,    Agitating, particularly subclasses 318+ for casings having a screw
    conveyor therein, for agitating the contents, as distinguished from this
    subclass which has either casings containing a liquid and a screw conveyor
    in a separate, foraminous casing mounted in the first or which handle the
    solid work as individual articles.

    451,    Abrading, subclass 327, and see the reference to Class 451 in the
    (5) note of the main class definition of Class 134.


CLS 134/133
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having either, or both, (1) means to
    feed work in to, or (2) means to discharge work from, the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass, the feeding means and/or the discharging
    means must be in addition to the means that holds or manipulates the work
    during the fluid treating operation and the means for moving the same to or
    from fluid treating position (i.e., such means as conveyors, chutes, etc.,
    for delivering work to the preceding apparatus, or receiving work
    discharged therefrom).

    (2)     Note.  The preceding subclasses have special combinations involving
    this subject matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses and see the reference to
    Class 221 in the class definition of this class for a statement of the
    class lines.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, appropriate subclasses.  See the
    reference to Class 414, in Note (5) of the class definition of this class
    (134) for a statement of the class lines.


CLS 134/134
TXT Apparatus under subclass 133 in which the feeding or discharging means is
    adapted to convey the work or workholder and to rotate or swing, or is
    pivoted other than a mere gate or stop.


CLS 134/135
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which a workholder that may be
    moved into and out of fluid contacting position, has some means in addition
    to the means for so moving the work  holder to hold the work holder in a
    draining position above the treating liquid in the liquid holding
    receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 410+ for boiler or deep
    fat fryer type cooking apparatus with elevated draining position.


CLS 134/136
TXT Apparatus under the class definition which includes a workholder which is
    adapted to act as a plunger, or pump piston and which has a valve for
    allowing fluid flow in one direction but not in the opposite direction.


CLS 134/137
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having either means to movably mount
    the work, or means to movable mount the work support.

    (1)     Note.  Where the work or work support is not movably mounted, but
    motion is only incidental due to operation of a fluid agitator or other
    fluid currents, the patents are not in subclasses 137+, but in appropriate
    following subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  This subject matter appears in numerous special forms and
    combinations in the preceding subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166+,   for apparatus having manually insertable and removable workholders
    for work having hollows or passages, there being no mounting means
    providing for guided relative motion between the work support and the
    remainder of the apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, subclass 327, and see the reference to Class 451 in the
    (5) note of the main class definition of Class 134.


CLS 134/138
TXT Apparatus under subclass 137 in which a work holder or support is mounted
    for motion (e.g., rotary, swinging or oscillatory motion) and there are
    means for directing a fluid current against either the work or the
    workholder to cause either or both to move.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for such apparatus having also a work or separate
    workholder-operated device.

    140+,   for motor operated means to move the work or work support.


CLS 134/139
TXT Apparatus under subclass 138 which includes a movably mounted means, in
    addition to the device, for moving the work for splashing or pumping a
    fluid.


CLS 134/140
TXT Apparatus under subclass 137 claiming a motor for operating any part of the
    apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56+,    for automatically controlled motors.

    58,     for electrically controlled motors.

    188,    for similar subject matter having no movable work support.


CLS 134/141
TXT Apparatus under subclass 140 in which the motor is a turbine or other type
    of fluid operated motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51      and 138+, for devices for moving (e.g., rotating) work by impact of
    a liquid jet thereagainst.

    129,    144+, 167+, and 172+, for jet or spray nozzles caused to move by
    reaction of the fluid discharged.


CLS 134/142
TXT Apparatus under subclass 137 in which two or more immediate work carriers
    are separately and movably mounted on a common support so that the carriers
    are capable of motion relative to each other, and the common support is
    also movably mounted.

    (1)     Note.  For the most part, motion of the common support results in
    both relative motion between each of the work carriers and between the
    carriers and the common support, e.g., a "ferris-wheel" type.

    (2)     Note.  The preceding work conveyor subclasses have special types of
    such apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158+,   for apparatus in which there are plural work holders or chambers
    which move together without relative motion.

    161,    for apparatus in which a single workholder has a compound motion.


CLS 134/143
TXT Apparatus under subclass 137 in which a tank closure is interconnected with
    any one of any combination of (a) a valve, (b) a movable work support, (c)
    a fluid agitator, splasher or pump, or (d) a movably mounted spray or jet
    applying conduit or nozzle, so that either (1) motion of one causes motion
    of the other, or (2) one is required to be in a preselected position before
    the other can move.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162,    for work support driving or journaling means mounted on or
    extending through the cover and having no other interconnecting means as
    above defined.

    177,    for tank closures interconnected with movable nozzles.


CLS 134/144
TXT Apparatus under subclass 137 having fluid nozzles or jet forming means for
    applying fluids to the work, which devices are mounted for motion relative
    to the other portion of the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44+,    where the nozzle of jet forming means is moved by the work or
    separate work holder.

    129,    167+ and 172+, for movable nozzles in other combinations.


CLS 134/145
TXT Apparatus under subclass 144 in which the jet or spray applying conduits or
    nozzles are mounted on and move with the movable work support, but have no
    motion relative to the work support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144,    where a nozzle, even though mounted on a movable work support is so
    mounted as to be movable relative thereto.


CLS 134/146
TXT Apparatus under subclass 137 in which a movable mounted work support is
    interconnected with a valve so that (1) motion of one imparts motion to the
    other, or (2) one is required to be in a preselected position before the
    other can be moved.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44+,    for work operated valves.

    81,     for turntable operated valves.

    129,    for endless conveyor operated valves.

    145,    for interconnected valve and work support in which the work support
    also carries jet or spray applying conduits or nozzles.


CLS 134/147
TXT Apparatus under subclass 137 having means, in addition to a movable work
    support, for causing fluid motion (e.g., pump, agitator, splasher).

    (1)     Note.  Such additional means must not be mounted on the movable
    work support, but there may be a common drive.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130,    where the movable work support is an endless conveyor.


CLS 134/148
TXT Apparatus under subclass 147 in which fluids are discharged from a spray
    nozzle or a jet conduit directly onto the work.

    (1)     Note.  The pump may deliver only to the spray nozzle or jet that
    applies them to the work and also there may be a splasher or agitator to
    separately apply fluids to the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147,    where an agitator or splasher is the only means to apply fluids to
    the work, even though the agitator or splasher receives fluids from a
    conduit.


CLS 134/149
TXT Apparatus under subclass 137 in which the work holder is an axially rotary
    chuck mandrel, rod or axle that passes into or through the work to mount
    the same.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137,    or other appropriate indented subclasses, particularly subclasses
    144 and 152, for means for mounting work having hollows or passages, which
    mounting means do not pass into or through the work even though a treating
    fluid delivering means does pass into or through the work.


CLS 134/150
TXT Apparatus under subclass 137 in which the work is of receptacle form, means
    are provided for mounting the same for motion, the receptacle-form work
    constituting the sole treating liquid holding means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for movably-mounted fluid-holding receptacles in which the work is
    placed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 408 for coating apparatus in which
    hollow work is filled with coating material.


CLS 134/151
TXT Apparatus under subclass 137 having fluid nozzles or jet forming means for
    applying fluids to the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 300+ for coating apparatus in which
    the coating material is flung, projected or sprayed onto the work.


CLS 134/152
TXT Apparatus under subclass 151 in which the apparatus is specially
    constructed to introduce fluids into passages or hollows in the work, other
    than by mere immersion.

    (1)     Note.  Numerous preceding subclasses have apparatus for movably
    mounting and treating hollow work classified on other special features.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     53 through 55, 62, 166+, for other types of apparatus for hollow
    work.


CLS 134/153
TXT Apparatus under subclass 151, in which the workholder is mounted for
    rotation or swinging, or is pivoted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157+,   and see the noted thereto for other rotary, pivoted or swinging
    work supports.


CLS 134/154
TXT Apparatus under subclass 137 having a baffle or deflector which is not
    operable to impel fluids, and which will engage fluids impelled by other
    means to change their direction of motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147,    for fluid impelling means not forming a part of the movable work
    support.

    163,    for fluid impelling means mounted on the movable work support.

    182+,   for other combinations having a nonimpelling fluid baffle or
    deflector.


CLS 134/155
TXT Apparatus under subclass 137 having means for feeding liquid to and/or
    draining liquid from the tank with which the movable work support is
    associated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     for valved liquid drains from at least one of plural stations.

    144,    151+, for spray of jet applying conduits or nozzles that both apply
    liquids to the movably mounted work and supply liquids to the tank.


CLS 134/156
TXT Apparatus under subclass 137 in which there is a spring to drive or bias
    the movable work support to some position and/or a float is connected to
    the movable work support to exert a buoying action in the liquid.


CLS 134/157
TXT Apparatus under subclass 137 in which the work support is mounted so as to
    have rotary, revolving, swinging or oscillating motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     65, 69, 77, 78+, 138+, 142, 149, 150, and 153, for other rotary or
    swinging work carriers.

    67+,    70+ and 124+, for endless belt type carriers.


CLS 134/158
TXT Apparatus under subclass 157 in which the movable work support has (1) two
    or more chambers or compartments to receive the work, (2) two or more
    separate means to hold the work on the work support and/or (3) a single
    work receiving chamber with a removable cover which cover may be positioned
    either at the entrance to the chamber or within the chamber.

    (1)     Note.  The plural chambers may be formed between the movable work
    support and the walls of the tank.


CLS 134/159
TXT Apparatus under subclass 158 in which the work support is mounted for
    rotation, revolving or swinging on a horizontal axis.


CLS 134/160
TXT Apparatus under subclass 157 in which the movable work support is carried
    by one or more pivoted links or levers or strands. The work support may
    have a compound motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164,    for other link, lever, or strand mounted work supports.


CLS 134/161
TXT Apparatus under subclass 157 in which the work support has some additional
    motion (e.g., combined rotary and reciprocating). The motions may be
    simultaneous or sequential.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76+,    for traversing hoist type conveying means for transferring work
    from one station to another.

    142,    for apparatus having plural work holders mounted for motion
    relative to each other on a common movably mounted support.


CLS 134/162
TXT Apparatus under subclass 157 in which the actuating means for the work
    holder either extends through or is carried by the cover for a tank with
    which the work support is associated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    192     and 197, for pumps, splashers, or agitators, for moving fluids
    having actuating means extending through or carried by a tank cover.


CLS 134/163
TXT Apparatus under subclass 157 in which some means specially designed to
    impell fluids is mounted on and thus movable with the pivoted work support.


CLS 134/164
TXT Apparatus under subclass 137 in which the work support is reciprocatable by
    strands or is carried by links or levers that are pivoted to some means
    that imparts reciprocatory motion to the work support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137,    for miscellaneous reciprocatory work supports.

    156,    for movable work supports carried by springs.

    160,    for other link, lever, or strand mounted work supports.


CLS 134/165
TXT Apparatus under subclass 137 having guide rails or rods directly engaged by
    the work or workholding means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49      and 82+, for other guide rail combinations.

    125,    for guide rails of this type combined  with an endless conveyor.


CLS 134/166
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the apparatus is specially
    constructed to introduce fluids into passages or hollows in the work, other
    than by mere immersion.

    (1)     Note.  The preceding subclasses have special forms of apparatus for
    treating hollow work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      20 and 22.1+, for processes of treating hollow work.

    43,     for apparatus for orienting hollow work with a finder for an
    aperture therein.

    53      and 54+, for hollow work operated valves.

    62,     for hollow work emptying, inverting, orienting, or puncturing
    combined with treating.

    152,    for miscellaneous apparatus having means to movably mount hollow
    work and apply sprays or jets thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 3.5+ for
    apparatus for cleaning tubular work by the passage therethrough of a solid
    or comminuted mechanical cleaning instrumentality carried in a fluid
    stream, and subclasses 104.03+ for pipe and tube cleaning implements, per
    se.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 104+ for
    hollow work treatment.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 317+, and see the notes thereto, for
    apparatus for coating the inside of hollow work.

    166,    Wells, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for cleaning or washing
    wells.


CLS 134/167
TXT Apparatus under subclass 166 in which at least one fluid discharge means is
    movably mounted, including those movable due to flexibility.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for processes for treating hollow work using a movable nozzle.

    44+,    129, 144+, and 172+, for other combinations using a movable nozzle.


CLS 134/168
TXT Apparatus under subclass 167 having means for generating pressure in the
    fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    for generating fluid pressure by heating.

    184,    and see the notes thereto for other combinations involving fluid
    pressure generating means.


CLS 134/169
TXT Apparatus under subclass 166 having means for generating pressure in the
    fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184+,   and see the notes thereto for other combinations involving this
    subject matter.


CLS 134/170
TXT Apparatus under subclass 166 having means for applying fluids externally of
    the work in addition to introducing fluids into passages or hollows.

    (1)     Note.  The external fluid applying means may be a collar or flange
    to direct the fluids emitted from the interior of the work over the
    exterior thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53      and 54+, for this subject matter combined with a work operated
    valve.


CLS 134/171
TXT Apparatus under subclass 166 which has a plurality of pipes for supplying
    fluid in parallel.


CLS 134/172
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which at least one fluid spray or
    jet applying conduit or nozzle is movably mounted, including those movable
    due to flexibility.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for processes of treating hollow work using a movable nozzle.

    44+,    129, 144+, and 167+, for other combinations using a movable nozzle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 307 for railway vehicles having nozzle
    means to spray a coating liquid onto the railway track rails.


CLS 134/173
TXT Apparatus under subclass 172 in which the movable nozzle or conduit is
    adapted to function as a pump or which is an element of a pump.


CLS 134/174
TXT Apparatus under subclass 172 which includes a pump, fluid splasher, or
    agitator, separate from, or in addition to, the movable nozzle or conduit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173,    where the movable conduit or nozzle functions as a pump or is an
    element of a pump.


CLS 134/175
TXT Apparatus under subclass 174 in which the nozzle or conduit is attached to
    or operatively interconnected with a work treating chamber closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143,    for combinations where the work or work support is movable mounted.

    177,    for miscellaneous combinations not involving a separate pump,
    splasher, or agitator.


CLS 134/176
TXT Apparatus under subclass 174 in which a nozzle is adapted to be moved by
    reaction of a fluid issuing therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179,    for fluid discharge reaction nozzles in other combinations.


CLS 134/177
TXT Apparatus under subclass 172 in which the nozzle or conduit is attached to
    or operatively interconnected with a work treating chamber closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143,    for combinations with means to movably mount the work.

    175,    for combinations with a separate pump, splasher, or agitator.


CLS 134/178
TXT Apparatus under subclass 172 in which the motion of the nozzle or conduit
    is coordinated or operatively interconnected with a valve for controlling
    fluid flow thereto.


CLS 134/179
TXT Apparatus under subclass 172 in which a nozzle is adapted to be moved by
    reaction of a fluid issuing therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176,    for fluid discharge reaction nozzles combined with a separate pump,
    splasher, or agitator.


CLS 134/180
TXT Apparatus under subclass 172 which has guiding means to restrict motion of
    a movably-mounted nozzle or conduit to rotation, swinging or movement in a
    closed annular path of any form, or to a curved path.


CLS 134/181
TXT Apparatus under subclass 180 which includes a motor moving the nozzle or
    conduit.


CLS 134/182
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having a baffle or deflector which is
    not operable to impel fluids, and which will engage fluids impelled by
    other means to change the direction of motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154,    for combinations involving both means to movably mount or support
    the work and a nonimpelling fluid baffle or deflector.


CLS 134/183
TXT Apparatus under subclass 182 in which the baffle or deflector is
    movably-mounted, adjustable, or removable.


CLS 134/184
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which some movable device or means
    is operative on fluids to cause the same to move.

    (1)     Note.  Various special combinations involving this subject matter
    appear in the preceding subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for work operated pumps.

    68,     72+, 89, 130, 136, 139, 140+, 147+, 163, 168, 169, 173, and 174+,
    for other combinations involving this subject matter.

    106,    where fluid pressure is generated by heat.


CLS 134/185
TXT Apparatus under subclass 184 in which the means for causing fluid motion
    has a compound motion (e.g., combined rotary and reciprocating motion).


CLS 134/186
TXT Apparatus under subclass 184 having either means to supply liquids to
    and/or drain liquids from the tank with which the movable means that causes
    fluid motion is associated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     96 and 155, for drains in other combinations.


CLS 134/187
TXT Apparatus under subclass 184 in which means that moves fluids is pivoted so
    as to have rotary, swinging, or oscillating motion.


CLS 134/188
TXT Apparatus under subclass 187 in which a motor for operating some part of
    the apparatus is claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140,    for motor operated apparatus having a movable work support.


CLS 134/189
TXT Apparatus under subclass 187 in which the pivoted fluid moving means is so
    configured and/or mounted as to move in an annular path that surrounds the
    work-space.  The motion may be rotary, swinging, or oscillating.


CLS 134/190
TXT Apparatus under subclass 187 in which the fluid moving means operates to
    cause the fluids to move into and through an annular, work-space
    surrounding conduit which delivers to the work space.


CLS 134/191
TXT Apparatus under subclass 187 in which the fluid moving means is adapted to
    deliver to a nozzle or conduit.


CLS 134/192
TXT Apparatus under subclass 187 in which operating means for the fluid moving
    device extends through or is carried by a work treating chamber cover.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162,    for rotary, revolving, or swinging work holders having actuating
    means extending through or carried by a tank cover.

    197,    for vertically reciprocable fluid moving devices whose actuating
    means extends through or is carried by a cover.


CLS 134/193
TXT Apparatus under subclass 187 in which there are two or more separate fluid
    moving devices as distinguished from two or more vanes or paddles attached
    to the same shaft.


CLS 134/194
TXT Apparatus under subclass 187 in which the fluid moving device is mounted
    for rotation or swinging on a horizontal axis.


CLS 134/195
TXT Apparatus under subclass 184 which includes a fluid moving means which is a
    pump adapted to take in fluid at one point and discharge the fluid at
    another point.


CLS 134/196
TXT Apparatus under subclass 184 which includes a dasher or fluid moving device
    which is mounted for being reciprocated vertically.


CLS 134/197
TXT Apparatus under subclass 196 in which operating means for fluid-moving
    device extends through or is carried by a work treating chamber cover.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162,    for rotary revolving or swinging workholders having actuating means
    extending through or carried by a tank cover.

    192,    for rotary or swinging, agitating means which extends through or is
    attached to a tank cover.


CLS 134/198
TXT Apparatus under the class definition which includes means for supplying or
    applying a spray or jet.

    (1)     Note.  Numerous preceding subclasses have this subject matter in
    special combinations.


CLS 134/199
TXT Apparatus under subclass 198 which includes means for applying sprays or
    jets to the work which is adapted to surround the work, or apply fluid from
    opposite sides of the work, or which has a plurality of fluid supplying
    pipes operable in parallel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     55, 122, 170, and 171.


CLS 134/200
TXT Apparatus under subclass 198 which includes a closable work treating
    chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143,    162, 175, 177, 192, and 197, for other subject matter classified on
    the basis of a closure combination.


CLS 134/201
TXT Apparatus under the class definition for which none of the preceding
    subclasses provide.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 134/900
TXT PAINT ROLLER:

    Apparatus under the class definition including means to contact the paint
    roller with a liquid.


CLS 134/901
TXT CONTACT LENS:

    Apparatus under the class definition including means to contact contact
    lens with a liquid.


CLS 134/902
TXT SEMICONDUCTOR WAFER:

    Apparatus under the class definition including means to contact a
    semiconductor wafer with a liquid.


CLS 135/
TTL TENT, CANOPY, UMBRELLA,  OR CANE

CLS 135/
TXT This class comprises portable coverings, formed of flexible material, for
    protection from mosquitoes, flies, and other insects, and from the weather,
    frames and supports for the same, and canes and other sticks or staffs used
    as aids to locomotion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 2.11+  for a
    shelter, building, or building component strengthened by fluid pressure,
    subclass 63 for a residual enclosure with flaccid type surfacing,
    subclasses 74+ for a rigid type awning, subclass 83 for a roof or enclosure
    suspended by flexible means, and see the class definition of Class 52 for a
    statement of the line.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 45+
    for awnings of flexible material or of plural strips, slats, or panels
    interconnected for relative motion.

    D3,     Travel Goods and Personal Belongings, subclasses 5+ for umbrellas
    and 7+ for canes.

    D21,    Games, Toys, and Sports Goods, subclasses 253+ for tents.


CLS 135/15.1
TXT UMBRELLA:

    Subject matter under class definition  comprising an easily-portable canopy
    type having a cover, a stick, and a framework comprising stick-supported
    ribs and stretchers for supporting or shaping the cover.

    (1)     Note. The canopy may or may not be foldable about the stick.
    Subcombinations and appurtenances peculiar to umbrellas are included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88.03+, for canopies for bicycles.

    98,     for umbrella-type tents and canopies.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers,  appropriate subclasses, particularly
     subclasses 181, 185, and 186+ for body attached umbrella-supports.

    248,    Supports, for supports of general utility.


CLS 135/16
TXT Subject matter under the class definition combined together or with
    articles classified elsewhere.


CLS 135/17
TXT Subject matter under subclass 16 wherein one of the articles is a cane,
    usually comprising an enclosing case used as a stick and having a slide and
    adjustable runner upon it.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclass 102 for umbrellas combined with illuminators.


CLS 135/18
TXT Devices under subclass 16 relating to cane-like cases which are removed
    when the umbrella is to be used.


CLS 135/19
TXT Devices under subclass 16 in which the entire umbrella is placed within the
    cane-case when not in use, but is mounted upon it for use.  The invention
    generally lies in the method of mounting the umbrella-stick upon the end of
    the cane. The umbrella-runner in no instance travels upon the cane.


CLS 135/19.5
TXT Umbrellas, under the class definition, usually constructed of paper which
    include features that render them very inexpensive to manufacture, and
    especially adapt them for being conveniently stored and finally assembled
    or erected by the user.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15.1+,  for umbrellas of paper or similar fragile material, but completely
    assembled in folded-about-the-stick-form and needing only an opening
    operation before use.


CLS 135/20.1
TXT Nonsymmetrical, axially offset or inclined canopy:

    Umbrella under subclass 15.1 wherein: (1) the canopy is axially offset
    relative to the axis of the stick, or (2) the canopy is inclined at an
    angle relative to the stick, or (3) the umbrella has more than one canopy.


CLS 135/20.2
TXT Inflatable:

    Umbrella under subclass 15.1 wherein the cover, stick, or both are shaped
    or strengthened by inclosed fluid pressure, i.e., the canopy is open by
    inflation and collapsed by the release of inflating fluid from the canopy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22+,    for containers of compressed gas used to automatically open and
    close an umbrella.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 2.11+ for shelter,
    building, or building component strengthened by fluid pressure.


CLS 135/20.3
TXT Mechanically operated:

    Umbrella under subclass 15.1 including a gear, crank, lever, cable, or
    other mechanism for mechanically opening and closing the cover, or
    mechanically controlling the movement of the ribs.

    (1)     Note. This subclass includes mechanism for tilting an umbrella top.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22+,    for an umbrella having a spring or other source of stored
    mechanical energy to automatically open and close the umbrella.


CLS 135/21
TXT Umbrellas under subclass 15.1 which are supported from a point above or
    within the raised frame, as by a projecting stick-tip or an extended rib.


CLS 135/22
TXT Umbrellas under subclass 15.1 which are automatically opened or closed
    usually by a spring within or surrounding the stick and acting upon the
    runner.


CLS 135/23
TXT Self-opening and closing umbrellas under subclass 22 wherein the means of
    operation is by a tension device operating upon the ribs or stretchers to
    draw them toward and hold them in position.


CLS 135/24
TXT Self-opening and closing umbrellas under subclass 22 in which the catch
    which retains the frame in its open or closed position is released by
    mechanism operated from a distant point, usually at or near the handle.


CLS 135/25.1
TXT Collapsible in length:

    Umbrella under subclass 15.1 in which the ribs, stretchers, or stick
    includes structure by which it is specifically designed to be reduced in
    length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143+,   for frameworks capable of being folded or collapsed into a more
    compact arrangement.


CLS 135/25.2
TXT Lazy tong:

    Umbrella under subclass 25.1 in which the collapsible frame consisting of a
    series of diagonal pairs of crossing members, each pair being pivoted
    together between their ends and connected with the next pair at the ends so
    that the arrangements, as a whole, can be extended or retracted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145,    for portable shelter framework of lazy-tong type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 109 for static
    structure having lazy-tong type framework.


CLS 135/25.3
TXT Including three segment rib:

    Umbrella under subclass 25.1 wherein each rib is formed of three foldable
    sections.


CLS 135/25.31
TXT Including pivoted rib having two segments:

    Umbrella structure under subclass 25.1 wherein each rib is formed of two
    foldable sections connected together by a hinge joint.


CLS 135/25.32
TXT Two pivot link:

    Umbrella under subclass 25.31 wherein the two foldable sections are
    connected together by a small connecting member having two ends each
    pivotally connected to one of the adjacent ends of the two foldable
    sections.


CLS 135/25.33
TXT Multiple sliders:

    Umbrella under subclass 25.31 including a plurality of runners which attach
    either a set of ribs and a set of stretchers to the stick in a slidable
    manner or plural sets of stretchers to the stick in a slidable manner.


CLS 135/25.34
TXT Folding stretcher:

    Umbrella under subclass 25.31 in which the stretcher comprises two segments
    connected to each other at a pivot point.


CLS 135/25.4
TXT Handle or stick:

    Umbrella under subclass 25.1 wherein significance is attributed to
    structure of the stick or a handle which permits the stick to be reduced in
    length.

    (1)     Note. Many umbrellas in subclasses 25.1 through 25.34 have a
    collapsible stick or handle, many of which have not been cross-referenced
    to this subclass.

    (2)     Note. This subclass takes subcombinations of an umbrella handle or
    stick.


CLS 135/25.41
TXT Hollow handle case:

    Umbrella under subclass 25.4 including a hollow handle which receives all
    or part of the ribs and cover of the umbrella.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17+,    wherein the handle also serves as a cane or walking stick.


CLS 135/26
TXT Folding umbrellas under subclass 25.1 in which the shortening of the rib is
    accomplished by forming it in sections which slide one upon or within the
    other. Locking mechanisms for the rib-sections are also included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for stick-shortening mechanisms.


CLS 135/27
TXT Devices under subclass 15.1 having structures in addition to or independent
    of the ordinary complement of ribs and stretchers used for the purpose of
    stiffening the frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25.1+,  for locking mechanisms for rib-sections of folding umbrellas.

    31,     for tensioned rib or stretcher devices.


CLS 135/28
TXT Devices under subclass 15.1 relating to the structure of the cylindrical
    movable and fixed supports to which the inner ends of the stretchers and
    ribs are respectively pivoted.  They are entirely independent of said
    pivot-joint or merely for the purpose of mounting the parts forming the
    joint without restricting its character.


CLS 135/29
TXT Devices under subclass 15.1 relating to the mechanisms by which ribs and
    stretchers are connected at their inner ends to the notches and runners,
    respectively, with such modifications of the meeting parts as contribute to
    the joint.


CLS 135/30
TXT Devices under subclass 29 comprising joints in which a slot or other
    opening in the runner or notch receives and retains a T-head mounted upon
    the inner end of the stretcher or rib, while permitting motion of the
    stretcher or rib along the length of the slot.  Modifications of the
    meeting parts to form the joint are also included.


CLS 135/31
TXT Devices under subclass 15.1 comprising structures of the body of the rib or
    stretcher as distinguished from rib-tips and from such modifications as are
    necessary to form a joint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33.41,  for removable rib-tips.

    33.5,   for permanently attached rib-tips.


CLS 135/32
TXT Devices under subclass 15.1 relating to the attachment to or formation of
    the rib at or near its center to provide for a joint with the stretcher.
    Includes also the joints themselves and such modifications of the rib or
    adjoining end of the stretcher as are made necessary by the joint.


CLS 135/33.2
TXT Cover or lining feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 15.1 wherein significance is attributed to
    the umbrella's cover or to a lining attached to the umbrella's cover.


CLS 135/33.4
TXT Fastener:

    Umbrella under subclass 33.2 having means for attaching the umbrella cover
    upon the framework.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33.41,  for rib tips of a detachable cover or lining.

    33.5,   for rib tips having a means to    attach the cover to the ribs.

    119,    for means to facilitate securing one position of the cover to
    another position of the cover material to a support member or peg.


CLS 135/33.41
TXT For detachable cover or lining:

    Umbrella under subclass 33.4 wherein the means for attaching the umbrella
    cover upon the umbrella frame includes structure which permits the cover to
    be readily connected and disconnected from the framework.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes rib tip fasteners for a detachable
    cover.


CLS 135/33.5
TXT Rib tip fastener or structure:

    Umbrella under subclass 33.2 wherein significance is attributed to either:
    (1) a means to attach the periphery of the umbrella's cover to a rib tip or
    (2) the specific structure of the rib tip.


CLS 135/33.6
TXT Having protector for cover at rib-to-stick joint:

    Umbrella under subclass 33.2 including means which covers and seals the
    joint area where the ribs of the umbrella join the stick.

    (1)     Note. The protector is usually attached to the stick.

    (2)     Note. This subclass contains tip elements for use when the closed
    umbrella is used as a walking stick.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for cane tips.


CLS 135/33.7
TXT With ventilator or viewing window:

    Cover under subclass 33.2 including: (1) a means in the cover for venting
    or releasing the air pressure beneath the umbrella's cover or (2) a means
    in the cover to enable the  user to have vision through the covering.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93,     for closures with ventilating function.

    117,    for door, flap, viewing window.


CLS 135/33.71
TXT Transparent:

    Device under subclass 33.7 wherein the cover is made of transparent
    material or including a transparent component for viewing.


CLS 135/34.2
TXT Having storing case:

    Structure under subclass 15.1 designed to enclose or receive an umbrella
    when not in use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for cane or walking stick which is hollow and serves as a case for
    receiving an umbrella.


CLS 135/37
TXT Devices under subclass 15.1 by which the umbrella is held in an open or
    closed position, usually engaging the rib or stretcher frictionally or by
    spring tension.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for retaining means in the form of a spring which acts also to open
    or close the frame.


CLS 135/38
TXT Devices under subclass 37 which prevent movement of the runner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for means which also acts to open or close the umbrella.


CLS 135/39
TXT Devices under subclass 38 comprising a sleeve mounted upon or within the
    runner and moved longitudinally to release the retaining-catch.


CLS 135/40
TXT Devices under subclass 38 comprising spring-catches placed usually in the
    stick.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for catches operated at or near the umbrella handle.

    25.4,   for these devices used for retaining telescopic stick-sections.


CLS 135/41
TXT Devices under subclass 40 in which the runner is modified in some other way
    than to permit turning and so as to accommodate the catch or releasing
    mechanism.


CLS 135/42
TXT Devices under subclass 38 in which the runner can pass a hinge in the
    supporting-rod freely when the sections are in line, but is retained by a
    projecting part of the lower member when the hinge is turned.


CLS 135/43
TXT Devices under subclass 38 in which either the runner or a sleeve upon it is
    turned to set or open the runner-fastening or to lock or unlock the same in
    any position.


CLS 135/44
TXT Devices under subclass 37 annular in form and surrounding the rib-tips when
    the umbrella is closed.  Usually rigid and permanently attached, they are
    sometimes mounted upon the runners, are frequently spring-actuated, and
    slide or turn to place.  They are distinguished from umbrella-ties in that
    the latter are of general belt form, loosely attached or separate, and
    embrace the cover as well as the ribs.


CLS 135/48
TXT Devices under subclass 15.1 comprising receptacles carried upon the
    umbrella for the purpose of catching the drip from the cover.


CLS 135/65
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to cane, stick, crutch
    or like structure designed to aid in human locomotion, and to similar
    structure in umbrella shafts and swagger sticks when equally useful
    therefor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 155+ for a stool or stand convertible to a
    cane.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 7.1 for a wheeled walker propelled by a
    seated occupant and convertible to a different device, such as a stroller;
    subclasses 812 and 826 for skater's appliances and attachments and for ski
    poles; subclasses 43+ for a walker having retractable wheels; subclasses
    87.021+ for a wheeled walker propelled by a seated occupant and
    unrestricted as to path, excepting by wheels or wheel mountings.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclass 5 for a walker with a seat, either (1)
    nonwheeled, or (2) wheeled and not propelled by a seated occupant and
    unrestricted as to path excepting by wheels or wheel mounting.

    472,    Amusement Devices, subclasses 1+ for a roundabout skater support or
    walker restricted to a circuitous path, particularly subclasses 14+ for an
    occupant propelled roundabout device.

    482,    Exercise Devices, subclasses 51+ for a support used to aid a human
    user while moving about a floor or land surface in a step by step manner,
    e.g., skating, walking, etc., but not lifted from, moved across and
    replaced upon the floor or land surface in the manner of a cane, stick,
    crutch, or walker of this Class 135, particularly subclasses 66+ for an
    occupant propelled support frame having a movement facilitating feature,
    e.g., runners, nonretracting wheels, etc., for foot travel and subclass 69
    for apparatus suspending an occupant thereof from above, e.g., by a body
    harness, etc., for foot travel.  Also see the Search Class notes under
    subclass 51 thereof.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclass 1
    for canes and sticks in combination with means for applying to the body any
    one or combination of light or analogous rays, electricity or thermal
    treatments, which are limited to structure to therapeutic uses.


CLS 135/66
TXT Devices under subclass 65 wherein the structure is (1) associated with,
    supports or houses a disparate article or (2) is so modified or modifiable
    as to function as a disparate article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for umbrellas combined with canes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 110.5 and the Notes thereto
    appended, for handles which also serve as receptacles.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 317 for umbrellas and
    canes having tags, indicia, flags or banners carried thereon or thereby.

    42,     Firearms, subclass 52 for cane guns.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclass 407 for an article carrier
    attached to a vehicle for use by an invalid, where the vehicle is nominally
    recited in the claim.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 102 for canes  combined with illuminators.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 402+ for a toy cane or stick
    having a cap detonator.


CLS 135/67
TXT Devices under subclass 65 wherein the aid to locomotion is a free standing
    support having two handles by which it is gripped and is operated by
    lifting from, moving across and replacing on the ground, floor or the like.


CLS 135/68
TXT Structure under subclass 65 comprising shaft structure wherein the lower
    end engages the walking surface, the upper end engages the user at the
    armpit or arm above the wrist, and handhold structure is provided between
    the upper and lower ends.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes crutch parts and also crutch
    accessories when claimed in combination therewith.


CLS 135/69
TXT Crutches under subclass 68 wherein the length of the staff between the arm
    engaging portion and the ground engaging portion being adjustable to
    accommodate the device to persons of different heights.


CLS 135/70
TXT Crutches under subclass 68 having more than one ground engaging tip and
    operator means located at a point remote from the tip end, usually at or
    near the handhold, by which the desired tip may be brought into ground
    engaging position.


CLS 135/71
TXT Crutches under subclass 68 wherein the upper extremity of the crutch
    engages the arm of the user between the hand and armpit.


CLS 135/72
TXT Devices under subclass 68 relating to the portion gripped by the user's
    hand, and also to such handpiece together with its connection to the crutch
    shaft.


CLS 135/73
TXT Devices under subclass 68 relating to the portion engaging the arm or
    armpit of the user, and also such rest together with its connection to the
    crutch shaft.


CLS 135/74
TXT Shafts under subclass 65 which fold from a condition of use to a more
    compact or smaller nonuse form, for ease of storage or carrying.


CLS 135/75
TXT Shafts under subclass 65 which are made of a plurality of sections, each
    section being radially smaller than its preceding section and able to fit
    longitudinally therein, thereby making the shaft shorter in length for ease
    of carrying or storage in its nonuse condition.


CLS 135/76
TXT Shafts under subclass 65 relating to the separability of the handle from
    the shaft.


CLS 135/77
TXT Structure under subclass 65 relating to the extremity of the shaft which
    engages the ground, floor or the like.


CLS 135/78
TXT Structure under subclass 77 provided with two or more distinct ground or
    floor engaging tips and means to alternatively place the desired tip into
    ground or floor engaging position.

    (1)     Note.  The patents in this and the indented subclasses are
    primarily drawn to means to convert a conventional crutch into one which
    will traverse ice without slipping.


CLS 135/79
TXT Tips under subclass 78 wherein a single member carries a different and
    distinct tip on each end or side thereof, such member being reversible or
    able to be turned end-for-end to bring the tip desired into ground engaging
    position.


CLS 135/80
TXT Tips under subclass 78 wherein the crutch has both a spiked tip and a
    conventional tip mounted thereon, one in a ground engaging position and the
    other in a nonground engaging position, and one tip will move relative to
    the other tip during the exchange of positions.


CLS 135/81
TXT Tips under subclass 80 wherein the spiked element is housed within the
    conventional element when not in the ground engaging position.


CLS 135/82
TXT Structure under subclass 77 including structure interposed between the
    surface engaging face of the tip and the body of the shaft to take up shock
    incident to positioning the shaft in contact with the surface traveled over.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68+,    for shock-absorbing devices combined with crutch structure.

    86,     for tips made at least in part of yieldable material, which by
    their inherent nature will absorb some shock.


CLS 135/83
TXT Structure under subclass 82 wherein the shock absorber includes fluid means.


CLS 135/84
TXT Structure under subclass 77 including connecting means between the surface
    engaging face of the tip and the shaft permitting the shaft to pivot, rock
    or swivel relative to said face.


CLS 135/85
TXT Structure under subclass 77 including rollers, balls or wheels adapted to
    roll along the surface traveled over.


CLS 135/86
TXT Structure under subclass 77 relating to the yieldable type of material used
    for the ground or floor contacting element.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also includes the means for connecting such an
    element to the shaft.


CLS 135/87
TXT PORTABLE SHELTER, I.E., TENT OR CANOPY:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to a portable shelter,
    i.e., tent or canopy, for protecting animate or inanimate objects from the
    weather or environment by at least partially covering or enclosing the
    objects or to a subcombination peculiar to such a shelter. These shelters
    essentially comprise (a) a cover or enclosure made of flaccid material and
    (b) a means for supporting the flaccid cover or enclosure which means is
    not part of or supported by the object which is to be protected.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 2.11+ for a
    structure, or a component thereof, of that class which is shaped, supported
    or strengthened by  an enclosed fluid, and see (1) Note of subclass 2.11
    for other locations of inflatable devices, elements, members, structures,
    etc., subclasses 3+ cover which is supported by an article or body of
    material to be covered, e.g., haystack covers, subclass 63 for a residual
    enclosure with flaccid type surfacing but having an in situ erected
    preformed rigid panel, and subclasses 74+ for a rigid type awning.

    128,    Surgery, subclass 205.26 for oxygen tents.

    150,    Purses, Wallets and Protective Covers, subclasses 154+ for a
    flaccid protective cover which is configured for and supported by the
    article it protects.

    256,    Fences, subclass 12.5 for barriers designed to regulate wind and
    air currents so that driftage of snow or sand will be controlled; subclass
    25 for fence panels hingedly connected to form an enclosure.


CLS 135/88.01
TXT Canopy supported by vehicle:

    Shelter under subclass 87 consisting of an open-sided rooflike structure
    having a flaccid roof element which is at least partially supported by a
    movable frame (e.g., boat, motorcycle).

    (1)     Note.  For a shelter in which the vehicular structure forms part of
    the shelter (e.g., shelter frame, wall, or floor), see the appropriate
    vehicle class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    54,     Harness, subclasses 80.1+ for canopies particularly adapted to be
    attached to the animal or to the harness for protecting the animal from
    sun, rain, etc.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclasses 30+ where the vehicle is a
    bicycle, subclasses 400+ for shelter carriers attachable to a vehicle,
    subclasses 309+ where the carrier is attached to roof or trunk lid of
    vehicle.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 202 for velocipedes having shelter carriers
    combined therewith and subclass 288.4 for attachments for canopies carried
    on a vehicle.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 156+ for camping bodies
    having a tent or canopy, and subclasses 98 through 136 for tops adapted to
    be attached to a vehicle.


CLS 135/88.02
TXT Carriage:

    Vehicle supported canopy under subclass 88.01 which is connected to an
    animal draft-type or push-type movable frame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    278,    Land Vehicles:  Animal Draft Appliances, subclass 1 for canopies
    attached to the draft appliance.


CLS 135/88.03
TXT Self-propelled vehicle:

    Vehicle supported canopy under subclass 88.01 which is attached to a
    movable frame with wheel(s), set in motion by pedals (e.g., unicycle,
    bicycle, tricycle).


    (1)     Note.  Umbrella-type canopies combined with nonclass articles,
    other than self-propelled vehicles, can be found with the umbrellas in
    subclasses 15.1+.


CLS 135/88.04
TXT Carrier associated with handle bar or front frame post:

    Canopy supported by self-propelled vehicle under subclass 88.03 which is
    connected at the leading section of the vehicle.


CLS 135/88.05
TXT Automobile:

    Vehicle supported canopy under subclass 88.01 which is attached to a four
    wheeled vehicle designed for passenger transportation and propelled by an
    engine.


CLS 135/88.06
TXT Structure associated with wheel:

    Canopy supported by automobile under subclass 88.05 wherein the frame is in
    direct contact with the automobile tire, rim, etc.


CLS 135/88.07
TXT Carrier associated with roof or trunk lid:

    Canopy supported by automobile under subclass 88.05 in which a connector is
    directly in contact with the passenger compartment top or storage
    compartment top.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88.14+, for roof or trunk carriers associated with tents.


CLS 135/88.08
TXT Carrier associated with bumper:

    Canopy supported by automobile under subclass 88.05 in which a connector is
    in direct contact with the back or front protecting guard.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    for connectors for covers.


CLS 135/88.09
TXT Canopy protects exposed interior section of automobile structure:

    Canopy supported by automobile under subclass 88.05 which covers an open
    area of the passenger compartment.

    (1)     Note.  A tent forming part of the vehicle is not included in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 98 through 136 for tops
    adapted to be attached to a vehicle.


CLS 135/88.1
TXT Travel trailer (e.g., passenger-vehicle-pulled type) with awning:

    Canopy under subclass 88.01 attached to a camper, trailer, van, etc.,
    consisting of an open-sided rooflike structure extending over or before the
    camper, trailer, van, etc.

    (1)     Note.  An awning attached to a structure that has to be altered in
    order to provide support for the awning is not included in this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 74+ for an  awning
    made of rigid material.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 45+
    for an awning designed to be mounted upon a support surface and have an
    outrigger.

    296,    Land Vehicles: Bodies and Tops, subclass 163 for a canopy adapted
    to be attached to a camper-type vehicle.


CLS 135/88.11
TXT Carrier including roller:

    Travel trailer awning under subclass 88.1 in which a cylinder or rod-type
    member assists in extending and retracting the flaccid roof element from an
    opened and closed position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 398+ for a reeling
    device with a particular frame or frame carrier.


CLS 135/88.12
TXT Roller extends with awning:

    Travel trailer awning with roller under subclass 88.11 wherein the cylinder
    or rod-type member is connected on the end of the flaccid roof element that
    extends the furthest away from the closed position.


CLS 135/88.13
TXT Tent supported by vehicle:

    Shelter under subclass 87 wherein a collapsible structure, consisting of
    stretched material sustained by poles, is at least partially supported by a
    vehicular structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 156+ for a tent
    supported by an automobile, trailer, camper, van, etc.


CLS 135/88.14
TXT Carrier associated with roof or trunk lid:

    Tent supported by vehicle under subclass 88.13 in which a connector is in
    direct contact with the passenger compartment top or storage compartment
    top.


CLS 135/88.15
TXT Tent detachable from vehicle:

    Tent supported by vehicle roof or trunk lid carrier under subclass 88.14
    wherein the tent structure is stored or erected on the roof or trunk lid,
    but placed elsewhere during use (e.g., on the ground).


CLS 135/88.16
TXT Tent structure associated with roof or trunk lid:

    Tent supported by vehicle under subclass 88.14 which is located on the
    passenger compartment top or storage compartment top.


CLS 135/88.17
TXT And adjunct structure:

    Tent supported by vehicle under subclass 88.16 which is additionally
    supported by a means other than the vehicle (e.g., tent pole, ladder).


CLS 135/88.18
TXT Forming multiple enclosure (e.g., additional enclosure):

    Tent supported by vehicle under subclass 88.17 wherein the additional
    support means sustains another tentlike structure.


CLS 135/90
TXT Shelter suspended for diverse support means:

    Shelter under subclass 87 which are at least partially suspended from a
    support external of and distinct from the shelter, e.g., hung from a tree
    which provides a suspension point located above and beyond the shelter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for suspended umbrellas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclass 414 for suspended canopies or enclosures supported
    by a bed.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 83 for a nonflaccid
    cover, roof or enclosure suspended by a flexible device attached to
    supporting structure.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 137.4 for a suspended covers
    or cargo loading tents to shield apparatus against the weather.


CLS 135/91
TXT With heating, lighting or ventilating:

    Shelter under subclass 87 have; (a) means to elevate the temperature of the
    interior of the shelter, (b) means to artificially illuminate the shelter,
    or (c) means for supplying, removing or treating air for the shelter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, for heaters which do not form part of a
    combination with the shelter structure, particularly subclasses 314+ for
    stove-pipe thimbles not intended to act also as ventilators.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 145 for illuminating means in a static
    structure.


CLS 135/92
TXT Heating:

    Apparatus under subclass 91 having means to elevate the temperature of the
    interior of the shelter.


CLS 135/93
TXT Ventilating:

    Apparatus under subclass 91 for supplying, removing or treating air for the
    shelter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 237+ for means for admitting and exhausting
    air from a building and subclasses 254+ for means for admitting air to a
    building.


CLS 135/94
TXT Of shelter-roof:

    Apparatus under subclass 93 in which the ventilating means is located in or
    is part of the shelter roof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33.7,   for umbrella covers with ventilating means.


CLS 135/95
TXT Convertible, i.e., from shelter to diverse object or from one type shelter
    to another type of shelter:

    Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein the shelter is so constructed that
    it can be changed from one type to another type of shelter, or changed from
    a shelter to another structure having a different function or purpose.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 89 for garments convertible to a tent.

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclass 494 for swimming
    pool covers whose functions is convertible to a secondary function, e.g.,
    cover to a sun screen.

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclass 12 for baggage
    convertible to camp-kits, e.g., tents.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclass 154 for a backpack, all or a
    portion of which is convertible into a tent or a component thereof.


CLS 135/96
TXT Combined:

    Shelter under subclass 87 claimed in combination with a means for
    performing some function, in addition to or for perfecting the basic
    purpose of providing shelter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclass 113 for beds or cots provided with canopies and
    requiring some significant change therein or folding with a camp bed or cot
    structure, subclass 121 for canopies attached to a hammock and having some
    particular modification adapting it to use with the hammock body, subclass
    413 for a sleeping bag combined with tent or canopy structure, subclasses
    414, 416, 418 for canopies with adjusting devices and supports whereby the
    latter form a part of the bedstead or involve some modification of the bed.

    27,     Undertaking, subclass 9 for coffins or burial-caskets having
    canopies or canopy tops for receiving draperies or the like.

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclass 50.12 for tables
    or other planar surfaces combined with canopies.

    114,    Ships, subclass 361 for boat canopies.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 19.1 for shelters combined with runners
    slidably engaging the supporting surface over which the vehicle moves.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 184.1+ for chair provided with a net
    or canopy.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 137.4 for weather covers
    shielding the handling devices combined with features of ships.


CLS 135/97
TXT Plural shelters, shelter having plural compartments or plural sectional
    covering:

    Subject matter under subclass 87 relating to multiple shelters or to a
    shelter having two or more compartments, e.g., a modular arrangement or to
    a shelter having a composite sectional covering, e.g., a circus tent.


CLS 135/98
TXT Umbrella-type:

    Shelter under subclass 87 in which the flaccid cover is supported by a
    central standard and is held extended by pivoted ribs attached to the
    standard.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15.1+,  for umbrellas.


CLS 135/99
TXT Center-pole supporting-type:

    Shelter under subclass 87 in which the support means comprises a main
    central standard.


CLS 135/100
TXT Cone-shaped type, e.g., tepee:

    Shelter under subclass 87 which is formed in the shape of an inverted cone.


CLS 135/114
TXT Shelter pole:

    Subject matter under subclass 87 which takes the form of a long, slender,
    usually cylindrical, member which is used as a support means for the cover.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98,     for umbrella-type shelter standards, 99 for center-poles, and 65+
    for canes and sticks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 632 for axially
    extensible shafts or openwork, and subclasses 726.1+ for axially aligned
    connected sections forming a pole or shaft.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 52+ for articulated poles.


CLS 135/115
TXT Cover for shelter:

    Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein significance is attributed to the
    flaccid covering material forming the skin of the shelter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 498+ for a
    protective cover or screen which acts to prevent unwanted objects from
    entering a pool or tank.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclasses 20+ for covering enclosing or shading
    trees, subclasses 26+ for plant covers, shades, and screens.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 2.11+ for  an
    inflatable structures, or a component thereof, of that class, and subclass
    3 for a cover which is   supported by the article or material which it
    covers.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclass 49.5 for
    shielding from projectiles.

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, subclasses 154+ for a
    flaccid protective cover which is configured for and supported by the
    article it protects.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclass 136 for inclosing or
    covering means adapted to protect the top from dust.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, e.g., subclass 919 for
    camouflage articles.

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, subclass 504 for protective covers
    for a playing field or court.


CLS 135/116
TXT Floor or base structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein significance is attributed to the
    shelter floor or base member.


CLS 135/117
TXT Closure, viewing window, awning, or sunshade:

    Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein significance is attributable to
    (a) a door, flap, or similar barrier, (b) a transparent viewing port, (c)
    an auxiliary open-sided structure having a flaccid roof or (d) means for
    obscuring the sun.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33.7,   for umbrellas with closures to increase the view or for better
    circulation of air.

    93,     for closures with ventilating functions.


CLS 135/118
TXT Stake:

    Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein significance is attributed to a
    peg disclosed for use with portable shelters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    under the class definition with means for fastening the covers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 155+ for a piercing
    or expanding type earth anchor, subclass 166 for a "deadman" type anchor.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 6+ for
    structurally related means acting to ground an electric charge to the earth.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, subclasses 15-80 for an anchor in the form of an
    expansible member.


CLS 135/119
TXT Cover fastening:

    Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein significance is attributed to
    devices attached to or formed in the flaccid cover material to facilitate
    securing one portion of the cover material to another portion or for
    securing the cover material to a support member or peg.


CLS 135/120.1
TXT Accessory or adjunct:

    Subject matter under subclass 87 which comprises miscellaneous items which
    are disclosed for use with a shelter.


CLS 135/120.2
TXT Adjusting means:

    Accessory or adjunct under subclass 120.1 involving a structural element
    which permits movement (i.e., springs, joints, rollers).


CLS 135/120.3
TXT Connector:

    Accessory or adjunct under subclass 120.1 involving a fitting designed to
    hold sections of pipes, shafts, bodies, or parts together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    for connectors for covers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 52+, 169+, and 217+ for
    articulated members, branched members, and plural members connected at
    single locus.


CLS 135/120.4
TXT For ropelike structure:

    Connector under subclass 120.3 for flexible structure (e.g., cable, wire).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    for connectors for covers.


CLS 135/121
TXT Framework:

    Subject matter under subclass 87 which comprises a structure which gives
    support and shape to the flaccid shelter covering, the supporting structure
    consisting of plural rigid elements which are connected and joined to form
    a skeletal-type frame.

    (1)     Note. Supporting means consisting of a single pole, spaced plural
    poles which are not connected by rigid elements, or flexible cables or
    cords are not included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98,     for shelter support means of the umbrella type.

    99,     for shelter support means using a center pole support.

    114,    for other types of shelter supporting poles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 648.1, 653.1+, and
    655.1+ for openwork frame structure.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 180 for support means for a screen or
    curtain to shield a rack, subclasses 189+ for construction of a built-up
    open framework structure for supporting an article, where the structure is
    readily assembled or collapsed.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 3 for a cabinet-type
    structure having a canopy or curtain-type enclosure.


CLS 135/122
TXT Truss type:

    Framework under subclass 121 including a section consisting of an
    assemblage of members forming a rigid support.


CLS 135/123
TXT Having integral tensioning member:

    Framework under subclass 121 wherein tightening means (e.g., spring,
    cables) is provided on or within the rigid elements to keep the elements
    securely connected to each other.

    (1)     Note. Cover tensioning means and guy ropes are not included in this
    subclass.


CLS 135/124
TXT Arch-shaped or dome type:

    Framework under subclass 121 wherein the structure consists of a plurality
    of vertical, inverted, U-shaped bows.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 81.1+ for bearing
    construction which forms a geodesic shape, and subclass 86 for load bearing
    construction which forms a curved arch.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclass 132 for
    pivotally mounted bow or U-shaped strips, slats, or panels.


CLS 135/125
TXT Flexible structure:

    Arch-shaped or dome-type framework under subclass 124 wherein the bows are
    capable of being bent from a flat position to a curved, U-shaped
    configuration.


CLS 135/126
TXT Collapsible as a unit:

    Flexible arch-shaped or dome-type framework under subclass 125 wherein the
    structure is capable of being folded into a more compact arrangement (e.g.,
    for transportation).


CLS 135/127
TXT Hollow rod section (e.g., for internal cord means):

    Flexible arch-shaped or dome-type framework under subclass 125 made of
    tubular members.


CLS 135/128
TXT Collapsible:

    Arch-shaped or dome-type framework under subclass 124 wherein the structure
    is capable of being folded into a more compact arrangement (e.g., for
    transportation).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126,    for collapsible, arch-shaped framework made of flexible bows.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclass 39 for
    hoods or canopies extensibly mounted.


CLS 135/129
TXT Having guide rail means:

    Collapsible arch-shaped or dome-type framework under subclass 128 wherein
    the arched bows move along a track.


CLS 135/130
TXT Having link means:

    Collapsible arch-shaped or dome-type framework under subclass 128 wherein
    two collapsible sections are connected together by at least one small
    connecting member having either: (a) both ends of one connecting member
    pivotally connected to two adjacent collapsible sections or (b) one end of
    one member pivotally connected to a collapsible section while another
    section or the other end of the member is pivotally connected to another
    connecting member which has its other end or section connected to another
    collapsible section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144,    for similarly hinged parts for general frames.


CLS 135/131
TXT Lazy tong type:

    Collapsible arch-shaped or dome-type framework with link means under
    subclass 130 wherein the two collapsible sections are connected together by
    a series of pairs of diagonally crossing links, each pair being pivoted
    together at their midpoints and connected with the next pair at the ends so
    that the arrangement, as a whole, can be extended or retracted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145,    for similarly hinged parts for general frames.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 109 for lazy-tong
    extension unit.


CLS 135/132
TXT Bows pivot on central axis:

    Collapsible arch-shaped or dome-type framework under subclass 128 wherein
    each bow rotates about a single horizontal axis (e.g., to form a more
    compact arrangement).


CLS 135/133
TXT Multiple bows connected at substantially one point:

    Collapsible arch-shaped or dome-type pivoting framework under subclass 132
    wherein each arch member rotates about the same central connector (e.g., to
    form a more compact arrangement).


CLS 135/134
TXT Having folding base:

    Collapsible arch-shaped or dome-type framework under subclass 132 wherein
    the bows are connected to a base which consists of hingedly connected
    members.


CLS 135/135
TXT Having central hub:

    Collapsible arch-shaped or dome-type framework under subclass 128 wherein
    sections of the U-shaped bows pivot about a central connector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147,    for plate or hub pivoting means used in general framework.


CLS 135/136
TXT Arch member:

    Collapsible arch-shaped or dome-type framework under subclass 128 wherein
    the U-shaped bow is capable of being folded (e.g., for transportation).


CLS 135/137
TXT Having floor or base member:

    Framework under subclass 124 wherein the arch-shaped or dome-type structure
    is mounted to a particular structure between a user and the ground.

    (1)     Note.  An arch-shaped or dome-type structure inserted into the
    ground is not included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161,    for framework with connecting means attached to a disparate
    article.


CLS 135/138
TXT Break-down type arch member:

    Arch-shaped or dome-type framework under subclass 124 wherein the arch
    member is capable of being disassembled into a more compact arrangement
    (e.g., for transportation).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128+,   for an arch member consisting of sections which remain connected
    while in a folded state.


CLS 135/139
TXT Telescoping and foldable:

    Framework under subclass 121 wherein the structure comprises both (a)
    members which slide axially, relative to one another, and (b) members which
    are pivoted or hinged to reduce the overall length of the structure.


CLS 135/140
TXT Having adjustable locking means:

    Telescoping and foldable framework under subclass 139 wherein the axially
    slidable members contain means to retain the members at various positions.


CLS 135/141
TXT Telescoping:

    Framework under subclass 121 wherein the structure comprises members which
    slide axially, relative to one another.


CLS 135/142
TXT Having adjustable locking means:

    Telescoping framework under subclass 141 wherein the axially slidable
    members contain means to retain the members at various positions.


CLS 135/143
TXT Foldable:

    Framework under subclass 121 wherein the structure is comprised of
    collapsible members (i.e., pivot or hinge jointed members).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98,     for umbrella tents that are collapsible by pivoted or hinged means.

    128+,   for arched bows which are pivoted.


CLS 135/144
TXT Having link means:

    Foldable framework under subclass 143 wherein two collapsible sections are
    connected together by one or more small connecting members having either:
    (a) both ends of one connecting member pivotally connected to two adjacent
    collapsible sections, or (b) one end of one member pivotally connected to a
    collapsible section while another section or the other end of the member is
    pivotally connected to another connecting member which has its opposite end
    or section connected to another collapsible section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130,    for similarly hinged parts for arch or dome-type frames.


CLS 135/145
TXT Lazy tong type:

    Foldable framework with link means under subclass 144 wherein two
    collapsible sections are connected together by a series of pairs of
    diagonally crossing links, each pair being pivoted together at their
    midpoints and connected with the next pair at the ends so that the
    arrangement, as a whole, can be extended or retracted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131,    for similarly hinged parts for arch- shaped frames.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 109 for lazy-tong
    extension unit.


CLS 135/146
TXT With stopping means:

    Foldable framework with link means under subclass 144 wherein the
    connecting links contain means (e.g., notch, overlapping pipe section) to
    prohibit motion.


CLS 135/147
TXT Having plate or hub pivoting means:

    Foldable framework under subclass 143 wherein multiple sections pivot on a
    connector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135,    for a central hub means for arched framework.


CLS 135/148
TXT Having floor or base member with pivot means therein:

    Foldable framework under subclass 143 including structure to movably mount
    the framework.


CLS 135/149
TXT Base member pivotable:

    Foldable framework with base and pivot under subclass 148 wherein one or
    more hinge joints are provided on the mounting structure to provide
    collapsibility to the structure.


CLS 135/150
TXT Forming case:

    Base member under subclass 149 which forms a carrying means when in a
    folded position.


CLS 135/151
TXT Having supporting member with pivot means therein:

    Foldable framework under subclass 143 wherein at least one of the supports
    contains a means to provide collapsibility.


CLS 135/152
TXT Means rotates on vertical axis:

    Foldable framework with pivot under subclass 151 in which the folding means
    moves the support members in a horizontal direction.


CLS 135/153
TXT Member swings to supporting position:

    Foldable framework with pivot under subclass 151 in which an upwardly
    extending support member is folded by pivoting.


CLS 135/154
TXT Single pivot:

    Foldable framework under subclass 153 in which an upwardly extending
    support member is folded by swinging the member about one joint or hinge
    means.


CLS 135/155
TXT Having additional frame (e.g., shades) tilting relative to member:

    Foldable framework under subclass 151 in which the folding means provides
    further adjustability.


CLS 135/156
TXT External-type frame:

    Framework under subclass 121 which is located or positioned outside the
    shelter covering.


CLS 135/157
TXT Parallelogram type:

    Framework under subclass 121 in which the members take the form of a
    quadrilateral having opposite pairs of members parallel to each other.


CLS 135/158
TXT Upwardly extending roof structure:

    Parallelogram framework under subclass 157 which contains structure forming
    a top portion.


CLS 135/159
TXT Having central hub:

    Roof structure under subclass 158 wherein the frame sections meet at a
    single connector.


CLS 135/160
TXT Inclined top cover:

    Roof structure under subclass 158 consisting of rafters which are at an
    angle (above zero) to a horizontal plane.


CLS 135/161
TXT Having means engaging disparate article:

    Framework under subclass 121 which is attached to a nonclass structure by a
    connecting means (e.g., rope, clamp).

    (1)     Note. Vehicle connectors are not found in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88.01+, for canopy or tent connected to a vehicle.

    90,     for shelter suspended from diverse support means.

    96,     for combined structure.

    137,    for arch-shaped framework connected to a floor or base member.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 135/900
TXT WORKER OR SPECTATOR SHELTER:

    Portable shelters intended to provide a covering for either laborers
    working in the open or for people watching an open air sporting or similar
    event.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 32.5 for vehicles with worker support or
    shade.


CLS 135/901
TXT HUNTING BLIND OR ICE-FISHING SHELTER:

    Portable shelters designed to obscure hunters from their prey or for
    providing cover for anglers fishing on frozen bodies of water.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 1 for Hunting
    Blinds.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 19.1 for Shelter Type Sleds.


CLS 135/902
TXT DRESSING SHELTER, E.G., BEACH OR BATHING:

    Portable shelters intended to shield a person from view while the person is
    changing into or out of swimming gear, e.g., cabana.


CLS 135/903
TXT ROLLER-OPERATED CANVAS:

    Portable shelters designed to be stored on and deployed from a turn table
    cylindrical body about which the flaccid cover is wound.


CLS 135/904
TXT SEPARATE STORAGE MEANS OR HOUSING FOR SHELTER:

    Devices designed to store portable shelters when they are not in use.


CLS 135/905
TXT METHOD OF ERECTING SHELTER:

    Processes for deploying portable shelters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 745.05+ for methods
    of erecting buildings.


CLS 135/906
TXT ARCHED STRUCTURE:
    Cross-reference art collection concerned with framework having one or more
    bowed shaped members for supporting a cover.


CLS 135/907
TXT COVER STRETCHER:
    Cross-reference art collection concerned with devices designed to provide
    tension to a flexible cover or structure intended to hold the cover in a
    taut condition over a framework.


CLS 135/908
TXT SUPER TENT OR CANOPY:
    Cross-reference art collection concerned with supporting framework having
    flexible covering designed to enclose large areas such as an outdoor
    skating rink, stadium, shelter, market area, etc.


CLS 135/909
TXT FITTING:
    Cross-reference art collection concerned with structural coupling
    connectors designed to hold sections of pipes, shafts, bodies, or parts
    together in assembled relation.


CLS 135/910
TXT ILLUMINATED CANE OR UMBRELLA:
    Cross-reference art collection concerned with a cane or umbrella disclosed
    as having a light-emitting source such as flashlight or lamp which is
    particularly useful when used at night.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclass 102 for umbrellas combined with
    illuminators.


CLS 135/911
TXT CANE FOR THE BLIND:
    Cross-reference art collection concerned with device designed for
    assisting, guiding, or supporting a blind person in detection of walking
    hazards in his path of movement.


CLS 135/912
TXT WHEELED FRAMEWORK:

    Cross-Reference Art Collection concerned with portable framework having at
    least one circular rotating member for transporting a tent.


CLS 135/913
TXT FLACCID COVER MADE OF NETTING:

    Cross-Reference Art Collection concerned with a shelter cover made of
    mesh-type material.


CLS 136/
TTL BATTERIES: THERMOELECTRIC       AND PHOTOELECTRIC

CLS 136/
TXT This class is the generic class for primary, secondary, and thermal
    batteries.  It includes the structure of the generator or battery itself,
    the elements thereof, the methods of preparation, operation, and details,
    and accessories not provided for in other classes.

    (1)     Note.  Pyromagnetic generators are found in Class 310, Electrical
    Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 306.

    (2)     Note.  The application and use of the battery in combination with
    other devices should be searched for in the appropriate art classes.

    (3)     Note.  For cells specialized for carrying out electrolytic chemical
    processes, see Class 204, Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass
    242 and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 2 for battery-grid making; and subclasses
    700+ for apparatus for the assembly of plural parts.

    53,     Package Making, appropriate subclasses for methods of and apparatus
    for encompassing or encasing goods or materials with a separate cover or
    band which serves as means for identifying, protecting or unit handling the
    goods or materials.

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes and non-coating apparatus for
    growing therein-defined single-crystal of all types of materials, including
    the subject matter of Class 136.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 1.1 for mechanical process, and subclasses 32+ for apparatus for
    filling battery grids and receptacles, and pasting the same.

    164,    Metal Founding, appropriate subclasses for processes of casting
    metal grids and subclass 109 for uniting spaced battery plates by metal
    casting.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 500+ for electrically conductive
    compositions and electrical devices defined solely in terms of the
    composition of which they are composed such as electrodes not provided for
    in Class 136, Class 204, or Class 429.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses for processes of molding or shaping plastic
    substances within the class definition.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass for a method or apparatus for charging or discharging
    a voltaic battery or cell.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    220-354 for systems for controlling the voltage or current in a single
    circuit.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 425+ for the
    testing of electrolyte properties.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, for electrical telemetering, signaling
    and alarm systems of general application. Note especially subclass 636 for
    such systems responsive to the condition of a battery.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for joints in
    general.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, for inorganic compounds, per se.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 58+ for processes of coating
    electrical products.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet, especially subclasses 457+ for a nonstructural composite web or
    sheet including at least one layer of metal.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product and
    Process for fuel cells and electrochemical batteries.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for an electrical
    connector, per se, and see subclasses 754+ for a battery post clamp type
    connector.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 343 for a battery or battery saving
    means combined with a radio receiver.


CLS 136/200
TXT Process or apparatus under the class definition directed to the conversion
    of heat directly to electricity.

    (1)     Note.  A device which structure-wise could convert heat to
    electricity but which is intended to operate vice-versa is included herein
    (see subclasses 203+).

    (2)     Note.  Subcombinations of thermal generators which are specifically
    designed to be used therewith (e.g., thermo-couple housings, wells, etc.)
    are included herein (see subclass 242).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, particularly subclasses 592.1+ for methods of
    mechanically manufacturing electrical devices.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 3.1+ for Peltier effect refrigeration
    apparatus; also, see note to Class 62 in subclass 203 below.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal  Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, and 420, Alloys or Metallic Compositions, for thermoelectric
    alloys.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 33+ for barrier layer stock material.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 196 for object
    protection systems utilizing a thermoelectric battery.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 336.1+ for invisible radiant energy
    responsive electric signalling devices which detect the presence of, or
    measures the quantity or quality of invisible radiation and subclasses 200+
    for visible radiation pyrometers including circuit structure for the
    generated voltage.

    252,    Compositions, for thermoelectric compositions particularly subclass
    62.3 for barrier layer device compositions and subclasses 500+ for
    electrically conductive and emissive compositions.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 53-56, 108, 414, and 467-470 for such as temperature responsive
    devices, per se.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 306 for thermal
    or pyromagnetic generating devices wherein there is additional control
    means for the generated power current.  Also, subclass 306 for thermionic
    device, per se, or in combination with a thermoelectric device.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 2 for generating
    systems including thermoelectric device.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, for electrical measuring
    devices including a thermoelectric generator.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 512+ for miscellaneous thermally effected circuits.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 161+ for
    electric circuits for relays and electromagnets which may include a thermal
    battery.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 135+ for electric
    furnace with control system employing a thermoelectric generator.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, for a thermal battery combined with
    a measuring circuit, particularly subclasses 179+ for a thermocouple
    thermometer.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, appropriate subclasses for
    thermoelectric alloys.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 615+ for a
    metallic composite defined in terms of the composition of its components.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 80 for a thermoelectric current generator
    operated by a burner and having the burner controlled by the generated
    current.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, subclasses 54+ for
    processes of making a thermoelectric semiconductor device.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing;
    subclasses 1+ for a miscellaneous process of making a space discharge
    device.


CLS 136/201
TXT Processes under subclass 200.

    (1)     Note.  All patents which claim a thermoelectric device for the
    class and also claim a method of making the device are placed in this
    subclass as a cross-reference.


CLS 136/202
TXT Apparatus under subclass 200 wherein nuclear energy other than that
    resulting from an induced nuclear reaction is used as a heat source for the
    generator or comprising a thermoelectric device designed to be employed as
    an ancillary unit in a nuclear reactor system.

    (1)     Note.  Nuclear energy of this subclass type may be that which
    results from radioactive decay.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 336.1+ the detection or measurement of
    nuclear radiation as opposed to using such energy for generating an
    electric current.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements, for
    nuclear energy source systems in general; and subclasses 320+ for the
    combination of a nuclear reactor and direct conversion means.


CLS 136/203
TXT Apparatus under subclass 200 wherein the device is intended to have a
    current applied to it to effect a temperature change.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 3.1+ for thermoelectric cooling devices
    wherein the device is more than a battery-like assemblage and contains some
    structure peculiar to refrigeration by Peltier effect, e.g., a current
    source is claimed.


CLS 136/204
TXT Apparatus under subclass 203 which includes means to transfer heat from one
    material to another.


CLS 136/205
TXT Apparatus under subclass 200 wherein the generator produces electric energy
    to do useful work.

    (1)     Note.  Generally in a power generator the heat source is constant
    rather than a variable source which is to be measured.


CLS 136/206
TXT Apparatus under subclass 205 wherein the thermogenerator is intended to be
    activated by heat from the sun.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213+,   for radiation pyrometers.


CLS 136/207
TXT Apparatus under subclass 205 which includes an electrical heat source for
    the thermogenerator.


CLS 136/208
TXT Apparatus under subclass 205 which has two or more junctions of the same
    type (hot or cold) positioned around or partially around a single point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224+,   for thermopiles in general.


CLS 136/209
TXT Apparatus under subclass 208 which includes two or more liquid or gas
    conduits having a common axis.


CLS 136/210
TXT Apparatus under subclass 209 wherein at least one of the conduits is to
    convey a liquid coolant.


CLS 136/211
TXT Apparatus under subclass 205 which has two or more junctions of the same
    type (hot or cold) positioned only in a single line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224+,   for thermopiles in general.


CLS 136/212
TXT Apparatus under subclass 205 which has two or more junctions of the same
    type (hot or cold) positioned so that a common plane passes through the
    junctions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224+,   for thermopiles in general.


CLS 136/213
TXT Apparatus under subclass 200 wherein the battery is to be heated
    substantially entirely by radiations from a body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206,    for solar energy type power generators.

    243+,   for photoelectric primary batteries.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 336.1+ for detection of invisible
    radiant energy and subclasses 200+ for light responsive photocell circuits
    and apparatus.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 121+ for such subject
    matter combined with a measuring circuit.


CLS 136/214
TXT Apparatus under subclass 213 which includes some means to cause the rays
    from the source to be focused or reflected to increase their strength per
    unit area.


CLS 136/215
TXT Apparatus under subclass 214 wherein the concentrator is a ray transmitting
    and bending lens.


CLS 136/216
TXT Apparatus under subclass 213 wherein the pyrometer contains a sealed space
    which is at substantially less than atmospheric pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223,    for thermoelectric generators in general containing an evacuated
    space.


CLS 136/217
TXT Apparatus under subclass 200 which includes a control burner for heating a
    junction.

    (1)     Note.  The burner merely acts as a heat source for the
    thermoelectric generator rather than performing general heating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 66 for a thermoelectric current generator
    controlling a valve and heated by a burner controlled by the valve.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 79 for a thermoelectric generator heated by a
    pilot burner that has a distinct orifice heating or igniting other
    structure.


CLS 136/218
TXT Apparatus under subclass 217 which includes a forced fluid means (gas or
    liquid) for removing heat from the cold junction of a couple.


CLS 136/219
TXT Apparatus under subclass 217 wherein the thermocouples or the leads thereto
    are surrounded by the carrier means for the pilot burner fuel.


CLS 136/220
TXT Apparatus under subclass 217 which includes two or more thermocouples.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224,    for thermopiles generally.


CLS 136/221
TXT Apparatus under subclass 200 which includes a means to resiliently press a
    sensor against a body to be sensed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229,    for a thermoelectric device which has additional contact means for
    sensing solid work.


CLS 136/222
TXT Apparatus under subclass 200 which includes a heating or cooling means for
    a junction of a couple which does not sense heat quantities.


CLS 136/223
TXT Apparatus under subclass 200 which includes a sealed space which is at
    substantially less than atmospheric pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216,    for evacuated radiation pyrometers.


CLS 136/224
TXT Apparatus under subclass 200 which includes two or more couples.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208     through 212, for plural junctions in a power generator.

    220,    for a pilot burner type thermopile.


CLS 136/225
TXT Apparatus under subclass 224 wherein the thermopile is composed of plate,
    film or strip type thermocouples.


CLS 136/226
TXT Apparatus under subclass 224 wherein the thermopile is composed of a wire
    formed of turns around an axis.


CLS 136/227
TXT Apparatus under subclass 224 wherein plural couples have a composition
    which differs.

    (1)     Note.  The thermopile may have one couple element common to two
    different couples.


CLS 136/228
TXT Apparatus under subclass 200 wherein one element of a couple is inside the
    other element of a couple.


CLS 136/229
TXT Apparatus under subclass 200 which includes a sensing means for
    transmitting or conducting qualities of a solid member in contact therewith
    to a thermoelectric junction.


CLS 136/230
TXT Apparatus under subclass 200 having a thermoelectric device which includes
    a housing, mounting or support.


CLS 136/231
TXT Apparatus under subclass 230 which housing for the thermoelectric element
    contains an entrance for a portion of the material the qualities of which
    are to be determined.


CLS 136/232
TXT Apparatus under subclass 230 wherein the junction of a thermoelectric
    member is surrounded by a covering and sealed from the immediate atmosphere.


CLS 136/233
TXT Apparatus under subclass 232 in which the covering is against the junction.


CLS 136/234
TXT Apparatus under subclass 232 wherein the thermoelectric device is to be
    immersed in molten metal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 140 for a thermometer
    including a molten metal lance.


CLS 136/235
TXT Apparatus under subclass 230 wherein the thermocouple leads have
    mechanically forced, releasable, contact means for forming an electrical
    junction with an external circuit.


CLS 136/236.1
TXT Having particular thermoelectric composition:

    Apparatus under subclass 200 wherein a thermoelectric composition is
    claimed.

    (1)     Note.  To be placed herein rather than in a composition class, a
    thermoelectric device defined by composition only must claim at least two
    elements of the thermoelectric device, e.g., two junction elements of a
    couple.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 615+ for
    metallic composite defined in terms of the composition of its components.


CLS 136/237
TXT Apparatus under subclass 236.1 which includes a particular uniting
    composition for the elements of a couple.


CLS 136/238
TXT Apparatus under subclass 236.1 wherein the composition contains sulphur,
    oxygen, tellurium or selenium.


CLS 136/239
TXT Apparatus under subclass 236.1 wherein the composition contains carbon,
    silicon, titanium, germanium, zirconium, tin, hafnium or lead.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 641 for a
    metallic composite in which a component has a silicon or germanium base.


CLS 136/240
TXT Apparatus under subclass 236.1 wherein the composition contains vanadium,
    arsenic, niobium, antimony, tantalum, or bismuth.


CLS 136/241
TXT Apparatus under subclass 236.1 wherein the composition contains copper,
    silver or gold.


CLS 136/242
TXT Apparatus under subclass 200 directed to accessories for thermoelectric
    devices.


CLS 136/243
TXT PHOTOELECTRIC:

    Device under the class definition which generates an electric potential
    upon exposure to light, by the direct conversion of the light to electrical
    energy, i.e., photovoltaic.

    (1)     Note.  Similar structures may be disclosed as having other
    functions, e.g., rectifying, photoconductive, etc., and some of these
    photoelectric devices may be disclosed as having several functions.  A
    patent which discloses or claims only a photovoltaic use will be placed
    here.  A patent which claims other uses or which is claimed generically
    will be placed in another pertinent class, e.g., Class 250, Radiant Energy,
    or Class 257, Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State
    Diodes).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200,    for a similar device which directly converts heat to electricity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for circuits and applications which
    incorporate a photoelectric cell.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 10, 11, 21, 53-56, 72, 80-85, 113-118, 184-189, 225-234, 257,
    258, 290-294, 414, and 431-466 for light responsive active semiconductor
    devices.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, subclasses 57+ for
    processes of making a radiation responsive photovoltaic device of the
    semiconductor barrier layer type.


CLS 136/244
TXT Panel or array:

    A photoelectric cell under subclass 243 combined with (a) at least one
    other photoelectric cell, or (b) a different electric generating means
    (e.g., galvanic), or (c) distinct perfecting means for the photocell (e.g.,
    cooling means).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   for a thermocouple which may be combined with a photocell.


CLS 136/245
TXT Lightweight and collapsible or foldable:

    Device under subclass 244 which includes means to associate various parts
    or elements in a first compact arrangement for storage and/or transport and
    also in a second operative arrangement for accepting radiation, said device
    also utilizing materials and structures designed to decrease the mass or
    gravitational attraction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    292,    for a cross-reference art collection of space or satellite
    applications.


CLS 136/246
TXT With concentrator, orientator, reflector, or cooling means:

    Device under subclass 244 which includes means to intensify, direct, or
    redirect light rays with respect to the active elements or which includes
    means to lower the temperature of the device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, for
    optical devices of general utility.


CLS 136/247
TXT Fluorescent concentrator:

    Device under subclass 246 in which the light energy is absorbed and
    re-emitted at a different wave length by the concentrator.


CLS 136/248
TXT Hybrid conversion system:

    Device under subclass 246 which includes at least one other source of
    electric energy (e.g., galvanic, etc.) or means to utilize heat energy.

    (1)     Note.  Using the sun's rays for both heat and electric power is a
    hybrid system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 561+, 569+ and 714, for means, per
    se, designed to utilize the heat energy of the sun.


CLS 136/249
TXT Monolithic semiconductor:

    Device under subclass 244 in which the same semiconductor layer is common
    to two or more individual cells.


CLS 136/250
TXT Particulate or spherical semiconductor:

    Device under subclass 244 in which the semiconductor exists is a state of
    fine subdivision or is in the shape of a sphere.


CLS 136/251
TXT Encapsulated or with housing:

    Device under subclass 244 in which the photocells are embedded in one
    fluent, but now solidified material or are contained within a framework.


CLS 136/252
TXT Cell:

    Device under subclass 243 directed to the details of an individual cell
    and/or associated perfecting or enabling elements.


CLS 136/253
TXT Radioactive, ionic, or thermo photo:

    Photocell under subclass 252 in which the light which generates the
    photovoltaic effect is produced by radio activity, ions, or heat (e.g.,
    scintillation or incandescence, etc.).


CLS 136/254
TXT Photoemissive, capacitive, magnetic, or ferroelectric:

    Device under subclass 252 in which the light (a) causes emission of
    electrons from a cathode, (b) alters the capacitance, (c) acts in a
    magnetic field, or (d) utilizes the ferroelectric property of said device.


CLS 136/255
TXT Shottky, graded doping, plural junction or special junction geometry:

    Device under subclass 252 which includes a free metal semiconductor
    junction, more than one junction or a junction claimed in terms or specific
    shape or dimensions.


CLS 136/256
TXT Contact, coating, or surface geometry:

    Device under subclass 252 in which the claims recite the material, size or
    configuration of a contact, a covering film or the surface of the photocell.


CLS 136/257
TXT Luminescent layer or optical filter:

    Device under subclass 256 in which a coating has the property of absorbing
    light of selected frequency or of re-emitting absorbed light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247,    for a photocell with a fluorescent concentrator.


CLS 136/258
TXT Polycrystalline or amorphous semiconductor:

    Device under subclass 252 in which the semiconductor material is claimed or
    solely disclosed as being polycrystalline or amorphous.


CLS 136/259
TXT With concentrator, housing, cooling means, or encapsulated:

    Device under subclass 252 in which the photocell is embedded in once fluid,
    but now solidified, material or is contained within a framework or includes
    means to lower the temperature of the device or means to intensify the
    light.


CLS 136/260
TXT Cadmium containing:

    Device under subclass 252 in which an active layer includes a cadmium
    compound.


CLS 136/261
TXT Silicon or germanium containing:

    Device under subclass 252 in which an active layer includes silicon or a
    silicon or germanium compound.


CLS 136/262
TXT Gallium containing:

    Device under subclass 252 in which an active layer includes a compound of
    gallium.


CLS 136/263
TXT Organic active material containing:

    Device under subclass 252 in which an active layer includes a carbon
    compound classifiable in Class 260, Chemistry of Carbon Compounds or the
    Class 532 - 570 series, Organic Compounds.


CLS 136/264
TXT Selenium or tellurium containing:

    Device under subclass 252 in which an active layer contains either selenium
    or tellurium as an element or an inorganic compound.


CLS 136/265
TXT Copper, lead, or zinc containing:

    Device under subclass 252 in which an active layer includes an inorganic
    compound of copper, lead, or zinc.

               CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 136/290
TXT TESTING, CALIBRATING, TREATING (E.G., AGING, ETC.):

    A collection of art disclosing methods of checking, adjusting, modifying
    and/or perfecting photovoltaic cells.


CLS 136/291
TXT APPLICATIONS:

    A collection of art disclosing methods of using or apparatus incorporating
    photovoltaic cells.


CLS 136/292
TXT Space-satellite:

    A collection of art under subclass 291 in which the use or apparatus
    involves space or satellites.


CLS 136/293
TXT Circuits:

    A collection under subclass 291 including details of electrical circuits.


CLS 137/
TTL FLUID HANDLING

CLS 137/
TXT OUTLINE OF NOTES



    I.      PLAN OF CLASS

    II.     DEFINITION OF TERMS

    III.    AUTOMATIC CONTROL

    IV.     PLURAL VALVES

    V.      MANUAL CONTROL, RESETTING AND ADJUSTING DEVICES

    VI.     INDEX TO SEARCH NOTES AND SEARCH CLASSES

    This is the residual class for fluid material handling, and takes
    processes, systems, combinations, subcombinations and certain elements
    pertaining thereto not otherwise classified.

    Fluid materials include gas and liquids primarily, but the handling of
    other flowable materials, as fluent granular solids, is also found.

    Handling for this class comprises the transfer of fluent material by flow,
    as by confining, directing, causing and/or controlling the flow, and
    includes making the material available for flow or separating a smaller
    from a larger body of fluid material, as by tanks, containers, receivers,
    traps, etc., or pipes or conduits, with or without siphons, pumps, pressure
    or displacing fluids or other flow imparting means.

    I.      PLAN OF CLASS

    The class is divided into two groups, subclasses 1+ for processes, and
    subclasses 38 to 616 for automatic or condition change responsive devices,
    special types and combinations of the necessary elements of the class with
    the subject matter of other classes or with features added to perfect the
    operation of the material handling means, and the more complex devices of
    the class generally grouped under the title "systems."  Class 251, Valves
    and Valve Actuation, provides for valves and valve actuation not otherwise
    classified. Subclasses 777 to 802 comprise subcombinations and elements
    pertaining to fluid handling not particularly related to any of the special
    types and not otherwise classified.

    Automatic or condition change responsive systems and devices of this class
    are discussed more at length in section III below, plural valves in section
    IV, and valve actuation in section V.

    II.     DEFINITION OF TERMS

    Special type categories:  Those comprising a group of related patents
    directed toward solving a problem in one specific field of activity, which
    have been classified on the basis of and under a title reflecting that
    activity rather than on a generalized basis. Examples of special type
    categories are 94, Fuel controlled by boiler or water system condition;
    108, Pump unloader type (indented under Self-proportioning or correlating
    systems).

    System:  A term applied to any apparatus of the class which comprises more
    than a single flow path and/or a single valve unit.  It may include only an
    unvalved branched flow path or a single flow path having two or more valve
    units. In some instances subcombinations or elements having special utility
    in the combination and having no other classification have been included in
    the group of subclasses pertaining to the system, as subclasses 777-802,
    Expansible Chamber Devices.

    Valves and Valve Actuation:  The term "valve unit," as used above, is
    applied to either a single or multiway valve. In the multiway type plural
    passages are controlled by valve means having plural flow closing areas or
    points, but the entire means is housed in a single casing or organized as a
    body or unit.  Valve units as such are classified in subclasses 625+.  The
    class also provides for some valve units under the special titles. Radiator
    vent check valves, Reversing cokes and valves, Flush or water closet
    valves, Drain valves, Float valves, Temperature operated cut-off valves,
    Safety valves, and certain analogous types.  The class also takes valves
    combined with other structure, as the tire inflation type combined with or
    adapted for connection with inflation means and/or the inflatable article.
    Class 251, Valves and Valve Actuation provides for valves combined with
    certain actuators, particularly the fluid and electric motors and the more
    complex mechanical movement actuators.

    The term "Valves" includes variable restrictors, which frequently cannot be
    distinguished as claimed, and have been set apart only in certain
    subclasses having the term restrictor or choke in the title, as subclasses
    436+, and 475+, primarily because of their special function as silencers.
    Closures are also frequently indistinguishable from valves, particularly as
    used and claimed in fluid handling systems.  In some instances they have
    been classified with valves, as in subclasses 613+, Single flow path with
    plural serial valves and/or closures and Class 251, Valves and Valve
    Actuation, provides for restrictors or flow guides in subclasses 118.01+.

    III.    AUTOMATIC CONTROL

    Devices and systems in which the presence or absence of, or a change in, a
    condition is sensed and control exercised as a result thereof are commonly
    called automatic, and in this class form the basis of a number of "special
    type" and general categories.

    Line condition change response refers to control exercised over the
    material being handled in the system as a result of a change in the
    condition of that material, as temperature, quantity, pressure or rate of
    flow.  Condition change response does not include the mere fact of flow or
    those fluid pressure operated devices where change does not affect the
    operation of the device, nor those where the flow is changed by external
    means for the purpose of causing operation of the control means or with
    that result.

    Combinations of an automatic valve with a nonautomatic valve have been
    excluded for line condition change responsive groupings because the system
    comprising such combinations is not primarily automatic.

    Fluid actuated or retarded valves which have not been considered automatic
    even though they depend on the presence of fluid flowing in the line, and
    have been classified in the following subclasses in Class 251; are (1)
    fluid actuated valves with compulsory cut-off after a flow period
    (subclasses 15+), (2) dash-pot or fluid controlled timers and retarders for
    valves, operating fluid for which is derived from the line controlled
    (subclasses 50+).

    The following subclasses and groups of subclasses in this class are wholly
    or partly of automatic or closely related types.  In each instance the
    search notes in the definitions of the particular subclasses should be
    consulted for related art.

    Atmospheric

    78+,    for atmospheric condition change responsive controls.

    482,    combustion engine induction type governor with suction compensator.



    Boiler - see temperature

    11,     Processes of regulating boiler feed water level.

    65+,    combustion failure responsive fuel safety cut-offs for burners.

    94,     fuel controlled by boiler or water system condition.

    156+,   gas pressure discharge of liquid feed traps to boilers.

    171+,   fluid separating traps or vents.

    213+,   liquid level responsive gas vent or whistle.

    344+,   heating, especially subclasses 335+ burner type.

    346,    locomotive boiler or steam dome associated systems.

    386+,   liquid level responsive or maintaining systems.

    455+,   line condition change responsive valves, especially 469+, pop
    valves.



    Combustion - see temperature

    6,      processes of mixing controlled by heat of combustion of mixture.

    40+,    marine governors.

    65+,    combustion failure responsive fuel safety cut-offs for burners.

    67+,    destructible or deformable element control, especially subclasses
    72+, heat destructible or fusible.

    94,     fuel controlled by boiler or water system condition.

    309+,   regenerative furnace type reversing valves.

    334+,   heating, especially subclasses 335+, burner type.

    345+,   locomotive associated systems.

    405,    oil burner fuel overflow preventing safety cut-offs operated by
    weight of accumulated fuel.

    479+,   combustion engine induction type gover                    nors.



    Discriminating Valves - see level response.

    171+,   fluid separating traps and vents.



    Failure Responsive and Testing Devices

    52,     speed responsive valve control with governor drive failure control.

    65+,    combustion failure responsive cut-off for burner fuel.

    67+,    frangible, soluble, deformable or fusible control elements, the
    failure of which caused operation of safety means.

    522+,   for safety valves with testing means.



    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 27 for servo failure
    responsive control of a fluid servo operated valve and 69, for electrical
    trip actuated valves with trip operation on failure of electric power.



    Freeze - see temperature.



    Heating - see Temperature.



    Inertia or Position Change

    38+,    for change of altitude as reflected by change in air pressure, see
    subclass 81.



    Level Response or Maintenance, Floats, Gravitating Tanks

    A.      By pressure connection at liquid level

    158,    gas pressure discharge of liquid feed trap controlled by level in
    boiler or receiver

    213+,   liquid level responsive gas vent or whistle

    393,    liquid level control or maintenance



    B.      By gravitating vessel

    129,    163, 190, 401, and 404, sinking or  bucket type floats

    120,    161, 162+, 189, 402, and 403+, especially subclass 408, gravitating
    tanks



    C.      By floats

    This class is the generic place for floats, per se, and systems controlled
    by floats are classified in various appropriate groups, the following
    subclasses providing especially for float control or operation:

    41,     float controlled marine governors

    120     and 122, filling successive tanks by float controlled receiver

    129,    sinking float operated siphons

    129,    163, 190, 401, and 404, for sinking or bucket type floats:  see
    level response

    131,    float controlled discharge from a siphon to a receiver

    135,    float operated inlet for siphons

    137,    for float operated vents for   trapped air in a siphon

    163,    165+, 185+, 192+, and 202, for float control in diverse fluid
    containing pressure systems

    185+,   for gas collecting floats, e.g., inverted bucket type

    397,    398+, 401, 404, and 409+, for float control in liquid level
    responsive or maintaining systems



    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 11 for buoyancy motor
    actuators for valves.



    D.      Miscellaneous

    11,     processes of regulating boiler water level

    96+,    control of pump-motive fluid by    level of pumped liquid

    101.25+,        for self-proportioning systems with liquid level sensing
    means



    Line Condition Change Response.  See the definition, second paragraph of
    this section, and listings under Plural heading below

    2+,     for processes of controlling a flow by condition or characteristic
    of a fluid, especially subclasses 3+ for mixture control

    87.01+, plural flows, especially subclasses

    88+,    apparatus for controlling mixtures

    98+,    self-proportioning flow systems,

    109+,   self-controlled branch flow systems

    154+,   diverse fluid containing pressure systems, especially subclass 155,
    gas lift valves for wells, 180, 183, 199, 204, 213+.

    215+,   back flow prevention by vacuum breaking.

    220,    line condition change responsive valves of the Larner-Johnson type.

    230,    stem attached relief valves for tires.

    455+,   line condition change responsive valves

    624.14, for self-cycling flows.

    624.27, for line condition change responsive release of valve.



    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 12+, for fluid actuated or
    retarded valves, especially subclasses 15+ for compulsory cut-off after
    flow period, and subclass 50 for line pressure connected chambers for
    retarding or timing valves.



    Periodic or Cyclic

    103+,   vacuum or suction pulsator type systems.

    106,    reversing or 4-way valve systems

    132+,   periodic or accumulation responsive siphon discharge

    154+,   for diverse fluid containing pressure systems which repeatedly
    discharge gas and/or liquid upon accumulation thereof, especially
    subclasses 155, 156+; accumulation responsive gas pressure discharge of
    liquid feed traps to receivers under pressure, 183+, 199+.

    171+,   accumulation responsive fluid separating traps and vents.

    396+,   for self-emptying tanks responsive to level of accumulated liquid.

    624.13+,        for repeating cyclic control.



    Plural

    For a discussion of plural valves as such, see following section 4.  In
    this category, plural flow controllers, valves, or condition responsive
    means may be (1) plural valves controlling different flows, (2) plural
    valves controlling the same flow, (3) one valve responding to changes in
    plural conditions, or (4) plural valves each responding to a different
    condition change.

    A.  Plural Flows

    3+,     processes of mixing plural fluids of diverse characteristics or
    conditions

    87.01+, self-proportioning or correlating systems

    154+,   diverse fluid containing pressure systems, especially subclasses
    156+, gas pressure discharge of liquid feed traps to receivers under
    pressure and 173+, plural discriminating outlets for diverse fluids in
    pressure systems



    B.  Plural Condition Responses

    39,     control by change or position or  inertia of system with second
    control.

    50      and 51+, speed responsive control with other condition responsive
    valve control.

    73,     heat destructible of fusible element control with second sensing
    means.

    80,     atmospheric temperature change responsive control with additional
    diverse control

    98+,    self-proportioning flow systems

    173+,   plural discriminating outlets for diverse fluids in pressure systems

    184,    plural successively opened discriminating fluid responsive valves
    for liquid in diverse fluid containing pressure systems

    214,    high and low level responsive gas vents or whistles for diverse
    fluid containing pressure systems

    218,    back flow preventing air vent in liquid line with coacting valve in
    liquid flow path

    226,    coaxial inflation and relief valves for tire inflation with
    pressure-responsive pressure-control means

    389,    liquid level responsive systems with a second diverse control

    391,    control of both inflow and outflow of a tank by liquid level
    responsive means

    458,    safety cut-offs responsive to both high and low pressure or velocity

    482,    combustion engine induction type

    493,    line condition change responsive valves of the bidirectional type
    governor with suction compensator

    506     and 512+, plural line condition change responsive valves



    C.  Plural Controls, One Condition Responsive

    Where the controls are separate valves controlling the same flow and one is
    not automatic or line condition responsive the patent is excluded from line
    condition responsive categories. See section 2, definitions.  Such patents
    may appear in the earlier special type groups of subclasses, however:

    39,     control by change of position or inertia of system with second
    control.

    49,     speed responsive valve control with manual control.

    76      and 77, heat destructible or fusible control elements with external
    closing means.

    80,     atmospheric temperature change responsive control with additional
    diverse control.

    133,    periodic siphons with manual control.

    223+,   tire filling chuck and stem type connectors.

    390,    liquid level responsive systems with manual control.

    436+,   float arm operated valves with restrictors, e.g., silencers.

    475+,   pop valve with adjustable choke

    481,    combustion engine induction type governor with manual modifier.

    495,    line condition responsive valves with a separate connected fluid
    reactor surface and manual or external control for the valve.

    598,    hill holders for hydraulic brake lines.

    625.61+,        for variable orifice modulator for pilot valve of supply
    and exhaust valve.



    Pressure Modulating

    82+,    pressure modulating relays or followers



    Pump

    8,      processes for producing uniform flow

    13,     processes for affecting flow by the  addition of energy

    224+,   pressure-responsive pressure-control means for tire inflation
    devices



    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, for pumps, per se.  For distinction of the line between
    Classes 137 and 417, see the class definition



    Respiration



    Safety cut-offs

    For resetting operations see section V, especially subsection B.

    43,     vent closing in overturned containers.

    50      and 57, excess speed responsive controls.

    65+,    combustion failure responsive fuel       safety cut-off for burners.

    75+,    heat destructible or fusible safety  cut-off elements.

    399,    low level safety cut-off of tank  outflow.

    456+,   line condition change responsive safety cut-off valves requiring
    resetting.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 16+ for main line cut-off
    after flow period reset by operation of serial main valve.



    Speed Responsive Control

    10,     processes of flow control by speed of fluid.

    47+,    speed responsive valve control.

    115.03+,        by-pass or relief responsive to change in rate or main line
    flow in self-controlled branch systems.

    458     and 459+, line condition change responsive valves of the safety
    cut-off type responding to velocity or rate of flow.

    486+,   for pilot or servo-controlled valves responsive to change in rate
    of fluid flow.

    497+,   for valves with separate connected fluid reactor surface responsive
    to change in rate of fluid flow.



    Temperature.  See Boiler, Combustion

    13,     processes of affecting flow by the addition of heat.

    59+,    freeze condition responsive safety cut-off.

    65+,    combustion failure responsive fuel       safety cut-off for burners

    72+,    heat destructible or fusible element control

    79+,    atmospheric temperature change  responsive control

    90,     mixture condition maintaining or  sensing by temperature or heat
    content

    94,     fuel controlled by boiler or water  system condition

    238+,   steam sterilizing

    297,    hydrant casing with heater

    301+,   hydrant protection against freezing

    310,    regenerative furnace type reversing      valves with cooling means

    334+,   heating or cooling of fluid handling systems

    457,    safety cut-offs responding to thermal conditions and requiring
    resetting

    468,    line condition thermal change responsive valves



    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 11 for heat motor actuators
    for valves.



    IV.     PLURAL VALVES

    Control means for plural flow paths comprising a single movable body having
    plural seats or plural port obstructing positions have been classified as
    multiway valve units in subclasses 625+.  Valves associated with dispensers
    have been classified in Class 222, Dispensing.  See especially the Search
    Notes in the appropriate subclasses of these classes and in the main class
    definitions, as well as the Search Notes to the subclasses listed below.

    In Class 137 devices for controlling plural flows have been regarded as
    comprising a system (1) if additional flow confining means was claimed to a
    greater extent than as a mere mounting for the valves, (2) if some definite
    significant relation between fact of flow and/or the direction of flow in
    the plural flow paths exists, or (3) if one or more conduits or passages
    have two or more valves or cut-off devices which function to control the
    flow of the fluid by means of the valves.  Some plural flow path controls
    of various automatic or condition change responsive types are also found in
    the earlier subclass groups, but on that basis rather than as systems in
    and of themselves.

    Plural valves having a common means for simultaneous or alternating
    actuation, are for the most part in appropriate subclasses under subclass
    561.  Some valves, because of motor or complex mechanical actuation, have
    been classified in Class 251, Valves and Valve Actuation, under the type of
    actuation.

    For plural automatic or condition responsive valves, see section III,
    Plural B.

    For plural valves, one automatic or condition responsive and one or more
    mechanically or manually actuated, see section III, Plural C.

    229,    selectively connected gauge and inflow or relief passages in tire
    inflation devices

    255+,   plural tanks or compartments with parallel flow

    285,    299 and 300, serial valves in hydrants

    289,    balanced valves in hydrants

    309,    regenerative furnace type reversing valves

    571+,   plural tanks or compartments  connected for serial flow

    583,    systems with plural openings, one a gas vent or access opening

    595,    601, 607, 609, 888+, and 896+, plural valves with common operator
    in plural flow paths, either separate or branching

    596,    stop and waste systems

    606     and 861+, flow control means for plural flows in distribution
    systems

    613+,   distribution systems comprising a single flow path with plural
    serial valves and/or closures

    622+,   multiple valve type fluid distributors for plural chamber servo
    motors

    625+,   multiway valve units.



    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses:

    16+     for serial main line cut-off and manual valves, the cut-off
    operating after a predetermined flow and being reset only by closing the
    serial manual or mechanically operated valve;

    117     for valve and restrictors in parallel flow passages;

    118+    for valves and serial restrictors;

    129+    for valve actuators comprising plural solenoids, which may operate
    separate valves; and

    281+    for balanced valves.



    V.      MANUAL CONTROL, RESETTING AND ADJUSTING DEVICES

    See section III, Plural C, for notes on manual control of valves which are
    also condition responsive and for manual valves combined with automatic or
    condition responsive valves.

    The term "manual" in some instances includes nonautomatic valve actuation
    of other types, as by mechanical movements or even motors.

    The term "control" or "actuation" as applied to the operation of valves
    does not include the resetting of valves which are either condition
    responsive or trip actuated to move from a preset position and which do not
    return to that position when the operating force is removed or reversed,
    but require intervention of an external independent agency to restore them
    to their set position.  Mere adjustment of bias, spacing, seating or
    actuator connection of a valve is not included in these terms.

    A.      Flow Control or Valve Actuation

    See section III, Plural C, for manual and automatic actuation of valves,
    and section IV for plural valves, including actuation.

    169,    manual control of gas pressure in discharging liquid feed traps to
    boilers.

    274,    286+, 614+, and 616, valve actuators comprising movable flow pipes.

    290,    291+, and 298, hydrant valve actuators.

    586,    access opening interlock with outlet valve actuator.

    624.11+,        for timer controlled flow.



    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses:

    3,      for pattern tracer controlled actuators.

    11,     for heat or buoyancy motor actuators.

    12+,    for fluid actuators or retarder.

    64,     for nonfluid retarder.

    65,     for permanent magnet actuators.

    66,     for biased trip actuators.

    75,     for snap action actuators.

    76,     for impact type actuators.

    77+,    for actuators with lost motion.

    89,     for means for holding an actuator in set position.

    128     and 335, for seals for actuator connecting means.

    128     and 291+, for detachable actuators.

    129+,   for electrical actuators.

    149+    and 149.8, for valves operated by conduit motion.

    213+,   for mechanical movement actuators.

    289,    for actuation from plural position.

    290,    for plural neutral positions of an actuator.

    293,    for actuator extensions.

    294,    for flexible actuators.

    295,    for pedal actuators.

    339,    for actuators extending through fluid flow path.

    340,    for actuators surrounding flow  pipes.

    341     and 349, for valve actuators wherein part of the valve body is
    movable.



    B.      Cut-Offs with Resetting

    See section III, Safety Cut-offs

    50      and 57, excess speed cut-offs.

    65+,    combustion failure responsive  safety cut-offs for burners.

    75+,    heat destructible or fusible safety cut-offs.

    399,    float operated low level safety  cut-offs.

    405,    oil burner fuel overflow preventing safety cut-offs operated by
    accumulated fluid weight.

    456+,   line condition change responsive safety cut-offs requiring
    resetting.

    624.22, for time cam-operated trips.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses:

    15+,    for fluid actuated valves with compulsory cut-off after a flow
    period.

    48+,    for fluid retarders or timers for valves.

    64+,    for nonfluid retarders for valves.

    66+,    for biased trip valve actuation.



    C.      Adjustment

    270     and 271, valve units oriented in plural positions or changed
    between locations.

    315+,   repair, holding and assembling means associated with valves.

    524,    bias adjustment indicator for direct acting check valves.

    530,    cam means for fixing and adjusting the bias of reciprocating check
    valves.

    531,    varying effective lever arm for reciprocating check valves.

    533+,   position or extent of motion indicators for fluid handling
    apparatus.



    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses:

    35,     for choked pressure type servo-motors  for valve actuation with
    choke passage variable according to valve position

    42      and 60, for adjustable limit stops in fluid actuated valves

    84,     for valve heads movable connected for accommodation to seat

    120+,   for movable restrictors with valves

    233,    for valve lever actuators with  leverage variable during operation

    234,    for valve lever actuators with adjustable leverage.



    VI.     INDEX TO SEARCH NOTES AND SEARCH CLASSES

    Class 4

    Search notes to Class 4 in Class 137,

    subclasses 123, 135, 136, 145, 148, 247, 268, 302, 398, 409, 410, 434, 441,
    583

    Search notes in Class 4 to Class 137, class definition (2) Note and
    subclasses  211, 249, 255.01, 337, 339, 353, 368, 369, 373, 375, 426, 668,
    671, 675, and 679

    "Class 8"

    Search notes to Class 8 in Class 137, subclass 238

    "Class 15"

    Search notes to Class 15 in Class 137, subclasses 238, 241, 242, 268, 344,
    357, 577.5, 590.5, 616

    Search notes in Class 15 to Class 137, class definition (3) Note and
    subclass 130.5

    "Class 17"

    Search notes in Class 17 to Class 137, subclass 11.2

    "Class 21"

    Search notes in Class 21 to Class 137, subclass 104

    "Class 23"

    Search notes to Class 23 in Class 137, subclasses 93, 268

    Search notes in Class 23 to Class 137, subclasses 230, 253

    "Class 24"

    Search notes in Class 24 to Class 251, subclass 115

    "Class 29"

    Search notes to Class 29 in Class 137, subclasses 316 and 833.

    "Class 31"

    Search notes in Class 31 to Class 137, class definition and subclasses 2, 3

    "Class 33"

    Search notes to Class 33 in Class 137, subclass 45

    "Class 34"

    Search  notes to Class 34 in Class 137, subclasses 171, 268

    Search notes in Class 34 to Class 137, subclass 125

    "Class 46"

    Search notes to Class 46 in Class 137, subclass 213

    "Class 48"

    Search notes to Class 48 in Class 137, subclass 268

    Search notes in Class 48 to Class 137, subclasses 180, 190

    "Class 52"

    Search notes to Class 52 in Class 137, subclasses 234.6, 357 and 373

    Search notes in Class 52 to 137, subclasses 1, 98, 127, 168, 169, 192, and
    220

    "Class 55"

    Search notes in Class 55 to Class 137, subclasses 319, 420, and 421.

    "Class 58"

    Search note to Class 58 in Class 137, subclass 552.7.

    Search note in Class 58 to Class 137, subclass 152.

    "Class 60"

    Search notes to Class 60 in Class 137, subclasses 101, 598, 803.

    Search notes in Class 60 to Class 137, and subclass 231.

    "Class 62"

    Search Notes to Class 62 in Class 137, subclasses 59, 210, 238, 314, 334,
    347, 374, 386, 453, 624.11.

    Search Notes in Class 62 to Class 137, class definition, subclasses 45, 51,
    55, 77, 122, 125, 132, 188, 189, 231, 259, 260, 294, 303, 306, 317, 358,
    390, 391, 397, 462.

    "Class 68"

    Search notes to Class 68 in Class 137, subclasses 238, 387

    Search notes in Class 68 to Class 137, subclasses 12, 17, 207, 208

    "Class 70"

    Search notes to Class 70 in Class 137, subclass 383

    Search notes in Class 70 to Class 137, class definition

    "Class 73"

    Search notes to Class 73 in Class 137, subclasses 47, 49, 51, 52, 53, 98,
    132, 227, 262, 364, 500, 502, 551, 557, 558, 559, 561, 624.14, 779.

    Search notes in Class 73 to Class 137, class definition (4) Note, (5) Note
    and subclasses 194, 195, 197, 198, 201, 202, 215, definition following 216,
    222, 226, 251, 279, 290, 305, 307, 332, 333, 390, 406, 408, 410, 488, 508,
    509, 510, 513, 514, 521, 535, 863, 863.01, 863.71, and 863.85

    "Class 74"

    Search notes to Class 74 in Class 137, subclasses 352, 784

    Search notes in Class 74 to Class 137, class definition and subclasses 18,
    625

    "Class 77"

    Search notes to Class 77 in Class 137, subclasses 318, 319

    Search notes in Class 77 to Class 137, subclass 37

    "Class 88"

    Search notes to Class 88 in Class 137, subclass 93

    "Class 90"

    Search notes to Class 90 in Class 137, subclass 619

    "Class 91"

    Search notes to Class 91 in Class 137, subclasses 58, 82, 83, 101, 102,
    412, 413, 803

    Search notes in Class 91 to Class 137, class definition (I), (2) Note, III,
    V subclasses 3, 170, 221

    "Class 95"

    Search notes in Class 95 to Class 137, class definition.

    "Class 96"

    Search notes to Class 96 in Class 137, subclasses 170.3, 171, and 197.

    Search notes in Class 96 to Class 137, class definition.

    "Class 98"

    Search notes to Class 98 in Class 137, subclasses 81, 345, 347

    Search notes in Class 98 to Class 137, subclasses 1.5, 117

    "Class 105."

    Search notes to Class 105 in Class 137, subclasses 345, 347, 348, 351

    "Class 109"

    Search notes in Class 109 to Class 137, class definition (1) Note and
    subclasses 27, 29, 33.

    "Class 110"

    Search note to Class 110 in Class 137, subclass 624.11.

    "Class 114"

    Search notes to Class 114 in Class 137, subclasses 334, 351, 388

    "Class 116"

    Search notes to Class 116 in Class 137, subclasses 47, 57, 72, 213, 227,
    524, 551, 553, 557, 558, 803

    Search notes in Class 116 to Class 137, class definition and subclasses
    109, 110

    "Class 117"

    Search notes in Class 117 to Class 137, class definition II Note.

    "Class 118"

    Search notes in Class 118 to Class 137, class definition section IX,
    subclasses 400, 401, 429

    "Class 119"

    Search notes to Class 119 in Class 137, subclasses 103, 624.11, 777.

    Search notes in Class 119 to Class 137, class definition section I,
    subclasses 14.01, 14.05, 14.14, 14.26, 14.27, 14.28, 14.44, 14.46, 73, 74,
    77, 78, 81

    "Class 122"

    Search notes to Class 122 in Class 137, subclasses 11, 94, 156

    Search notes in Class 122 to Class 137, class definitions and subclasses
    451, 456, 491, 504

    "Class 123"

    Search notes to Class 123 in Class 137, subclasses 59, 281, 334, 338, 627,
    803

    Search notes in Class 123 to Class 137, subclasses 41.02, 41.14, 97, 98,
    102, 103, 119, 124

    "Class 124"

    Search notes in Class 124 to Class 137, subclass 11.

    "Class 126"

    Search note to Class 126 in Class 137, subclass 624.11.

    Search notes in Class 126 to Class 137, subclasses 35, 287.5, 380.

    "Class 128"

    Search note to Class 128 in Class 137, subclass 803

    "Class 134"

    Search notes to Class 134 in Class 137, subclasses 238, 268

    Search notes in Class 134 to Class 137, class definition (5) Note

    "Class 136"

    Search notes to Class 136 in Class 137, subclass 260

    Search notes in Class 136 to Class 137, subclass 162

    "Class 138"

    Search notes to Class 138 in Class 137, subclasses 207, 223, 232, 281, 297,
    301, 315, 334, 341, 372, 504, 544, 568, 593, 599, 600, 800, 803

    Search notes in Class 138 to Class 137, class definition and subclasses 27,
    32, 37, 89.1

    "Class 141"

    Search notes to Class 141 in Class 137, subclasses 454, 614.02, and 614.05.

    Search notes in Class 141 to Class 137, subclasses 348 and 351.

    "Class 152"

    Search notes to Class 152 in Class 137, subclasses 223, 233

    Search notes in Class 152 to Class 137, class definition (6) Note, (11)
    Note and subclasses 415, 427, 428

    "Class 159"

    Search notes in Class 159 to Class 137, subclass 44

    "Class 160"

    Search notes to Class 160 in Class 137, subclass 388

    Search notes in Class 160 to Class 137, subclass 84

    "Class 165"

    Search notes to Class 165 in Class 137, subclasses 334 and 340

    Search notes in Class 165 to Class 137, class definition and subclass 110.

    "Class 166"

    Search notes to Class 166 in Class 137, subclasses 1, 15, 67, 205, 272,
    315, 363, 409, and 515.

    Search notes in Class 166 to Class 137, class definition, sections, V and
    VI, and subclasses 54, 55, 72, 85, 95, 97, 105, 165, 205, 218, 224 through
    227, 277, 311, and 314.

    "Class 169"

    Search notes to Class 169 in Class 137, subclasses 79, 357

    Search notes in Class 169 to Class 137, class definition (2) Note, and
    subclass 19.

    "Class 174"

    Search notes in Class 174 to Class 137, subclasses 8, 11, 12, 14, 37, 48

    "Class 177"

    Search notes to Class 177 in Class 137, subclasses 161, 403 and 778

    Search notes in Class 177 to Class 137, subclasses 60 and 254

    "Class 180"

    Search notes to Class 180 in Class 137, subclasses 57, 344

    Search notes in Class 180 to Class 137, subclass 82.1

    "Class 181"

    Search notes in Class 181 to Class 137, subclasses 35, 37

    Search notes to class 181, in Class 137, subclass 828

    "Class 182"

    Search notes to Class 182 in Class 137, subclass 342

    Search notes in Class 182 to Class 137, class definition and subclasses 51
    and 82.

    "Class 184"

    Search notes in Class 184 to Class 137, subclass 9

    "Class 192"

    Search notes to Class 192 in Class 137, subclass 625

    Search notes in Class 192 subclasses 87.13 and 87.18 to Class 137,
    subclasses 625+

    "Class 193"

    Search notes to Class 193 in Class 137, subclasses 573, 610, 615

    Search notes in Class 193 to Class 137, class definition (4) Note and
    subclass 31.

    "Class 195"

    Search notes in Class 195 to Class 137, subclasses 127, 138, 139

    "Class 196"

    Search notes in Class 196 to Class 137, subclass 135

    "Class 200"

    Search notes in Class 200 to Class 137 subclasses 81, 81.9

    Search notes to Class 200, in Class 137 subclass 803

    "Class 201"

    Search notes in Class 201 to Class 137, subclasses 1, 4, 9.

    "Class 202"

    Search notes in Class 202 to Class 137, subclasses 81, 151, 160, 181, 193,
    196

    "Class 203"

    Search notes in Class 203 to Class 137, subclasses 1, 2, 3, 20, 40

    "Class 204"

    Search notes to Class 204 in Class 137, subclass 260

    "Class 210"

    Search notes to Class 210 in Class 137, subclasses 1, 87, 98, 140, 171,
    172, 247.11, 247.33, 247.39, 268, 544, 546, 577.5, 590, 590.5, 624.11

    Search notes in Class 210 to Class 137, subclasses 9, 59, 99, 101, 109,
    119, 143, 148, 153, 170, 194, 198, 201, 232, 241, 257, 278, 390, 418, 449,
    513, 539

    "Class 213"

    Search notes to Class 213 in Class 137, subclass 347.

    "Class 217"

    Search notes to Class 217 in Class 137, subclasses 317, 320

    Search notes in Class 217 to Class 137, subclasses 4, 98, 99, 101

    "Class 219"

    Search notes in Class 219 to Class 137, subclass 38

    "Class 222"

    Search notes to Class 222 in Class 137 subclasses 1, 8, 38, 43, 67, 68.11,
    72, 87, 111, 113, 121, 123, 130, 137, 142, 145, 150, 152, 153, 154, 157,
    170, 172, 177, 178, 187, 192, 194, 197, 206, 209, 212, 213, 223, 237, 240,
    244, 247, 251, 255, 257, 259, 262, 264, 266, 268, 278, 279, 304, 305, 307,
    312, 318, 324, 334, 335, 342, 343, 344, 351, 356, 357, 373, 375, 376, 377,
    379, 381, 382, 383, 386, 391, 398, 399, 403, 408, 409, 411, 423, 434, 451,
    453, 454, 455, 499, 511, 525, 544, 551, 552, 553, 555, 556, 557, 558, 559,
    560, 561, 563, 565, 566, 568, 569, 571, 577, 581, 583, 585, 586, 587, 588,
    590, 594, 596, 602, 608, 609, 613, 615, 616, 624.11, 626, 628, 797, 800,
    801, 802

    Search notes in Class 222 to Class 137, class definition section 4, 7, 8,
    9, 11, 12, 15, 19, 22, 24

    subclasses 3, 4, 6, 23, 25, 39, 41, 42, 47, 51, 52, 54, 56, 57, 58, 59, 61,
    62, 63, 64, 66, 67, 68, 72, 76, 81, 108, 113, 129, 131, 134, 145, 146, 148,
    149, 153, 154, 160, 173, 176, 178, 179, 182, 183, 188, 189, 192, 204, 209,
    251, 255, 318, 330, 372, 375, 394, 395, 396, 397, 399, 400.7, 416, 424.5,
    425, 437, 442, 445, 446, 453, 457, 464, 478, 483, 485, 486, 490, 491, 498,
    500, 501, 502, 504, 505, 510, 511, 522, 526, 541, 544, 545, 547, 559, 562,
    564, 564.5, 566, 575

    "Class 224"

    Search notes to Class 224 in Class 137, subclass 355

    "Class 233"

    Search notes in Class 233 to Class 137, subclass 16

    "Class 235"

    Search notes to Class 235 in Class 137 subclass 778, 803

    Search notes in Class 235 to Class 137 class definition, 200

    "Class 236"

    Search notes to Class 236 in Class 137, subclasses 59, 82, 90, 171, 173,
    177, 183, 195, 457, 468

    Search notes in Class 236 to Class 137, class definition and subclasses 12,
    21, 25, 45, 53, 54, 79

    "Class 237"

    Search notes to Class 237 in Class 137, subclass 59.

    Search notes in Class 237 to Class 137, class definition (3) Note, Search
    Class, and subclasses 13, 65, 66, 80

    "Class 239"

    Search notes to Class 239 in Class 137, subclasses 83, 236, 268, 343, 345,
    351, 355.12, 355.16, 355.2, 357, 363, 580, 600, 601, 602, 604, 627, 633,
    801, 803, 822

    Search notes in Class 239 to Class 137, class definition sections IIIb,
    IIId, Search Class and subclasses 39, 63, 66, 67, 72, 73, 120, 128, 129,
    195, 196, 202, 208, 209, 271, 286, 288, 310, 313, 317, 601, 624.11

    "Class 241"

    Search notes in Class 241 to Class 137, subclasses 31, 59.

    "Class 244"

    Search notes to Class 244 in Class 137, subclasses 344, 351, 614.02.

    "Class 248"

    Search notes to Class 248 in Class 137, subclasses 316, 343, 359

    Search notes in Class 248 to Class 137, subclasses 49, 53

    "Class 250"

    Search notes to Class 250 in Class 137, subclass 93

    Search notes in Class 250 to Class 137, subclass 45

    "Class 251"

    Search notes to Class 251 in Class 137, class definition, sections I, II,
    III, IV, V subclasses 46, 52, 58, 66, 67, 75, 76, 77, 82, 87, 104, 105,
    175, 191, 195, 196, 215, 219, 221, 222, 231, 237, 243, 246, 254, 269, 270,
    271, 272, 286, 288, 289, 290, 292, 298, 299, 302, 303, 306, 312, 316, 317,
    321, 322, 330, 331, 341, 343, 353, 354, 355, 355.18, 362, 365, 368, 377,
    378, 381, 382, 382.5, 386, 387, 394, 396, 403, 410, 412, 413, 414, 415,
    416, 418, 419, 420, 421, 422, 426, 431, 434, 435, 436, 442, 445, 446, 447,
    448, 449, 450, 451, 454, 455, 456, 462, 463, 465, 470, 474, 475, 485, 488,
    489, 490, 494, 496, 499, 502, 504, 507, 511, 514, 515, 517, 519, 522, 523,
    525, 527, 528, 529, 530, 531, 532, 535, 536, 538, 539, 548, 561, 570, 573,
    574, 582, 584, 585, 590, 599, 600, 614.05, 614.06, 616, 624.11, 624.12,
    624.22, 625.37, 625.38, 625.39, 628, 630, 630.13, 637.1, 777, 778, 781,
    783, 784, 788, 790, 792, 798, 799, 801, 803,

    Search notes in Class 251 to Class definition subclasses 11, 12, 15, 16,
    24, 25, 26, 28, 31, 33, 34, 37, 38, 39, 43, 44, 45, 48, 49, 53, 56, 57, 58,
    59, 61, 64, 66, 69, 70, 73, 74, 75, 77, 84, 89, 89.5, 117, 118, 120, 122,
    123, 127, 128, 129, 135, 139, 140, 142, 143, 144, 145, 147, 148, 149,
    149.1, 149.8, 153, 154, 155, 157, 158, 161, 190, 205, 210, 215, 221, 225,
    247, 281, 298, 299, 301, 303, 324, 325, 332, 359, 360, 368

    "Class 252"

    Search notes in Class 252 to Class 137, subclass 361

    "Class 258"

    Search notes to Class 258 in Class 137, subclass 351

    "Class 259"

    Search notes in Class 259 to Class 137, subclasses 148, 154, 168

    "Class 260"

    Search notes in Class 260 to Class 137, subclass 698

    "Class 261"

    Search notes to Class 261 in Class 137, subclasses 98, 211

    Search notes in Class 261 to Class 137, subclasses 19, 803, 806

    "Class 267"

    Search notes to Class 267 in Class 137, subclass 537

    "Class 280"

    Search notes to Class 280 in Class 137, subclasses 344, 351

    Search notes in Class 280 to Class 137, class definition section VII,
    subclass 421

    "Class 285"

    Search notes to Class 285 in Class 137, subclasses 223+, 798

    Search notes in Class 285 to Class 137, class definition and subclasses
    1-3, 10, 13, 15, 23, 41, 46, 55, 61-63, 80, 81, 95, 117,  120.1+, 121.3+,
    129.1+, 137.1, 154.1+, 179.1+, 225, 226, 272, 307

    "Class 290"

    Search notes in Class 290 to Class 137, subclass 2

    "Class 291"

    Search notes to Class 291 in Class 137, subclasses 344, 345, 351

    "Class 292"

    Search notes to Class 292 in Class 137, subclasses 359, 380, 383, 384

    "Class 294"

    Search notes to Class 294 in Class 137, subclass 577.5.

    "Class 297"

    Search notes in Class 297 to Class 137, class definition

    "Class 302"

    Search notes to Class 302 in Class 137, subclasses 170, 268, 610, 615

    Search notes in Class 302 to Class 137, subclasses 14, 17

    "Class 303"

    Search notes to Class 303 in Class 137, subclass 598

    Search notes in Class 303 to Class 137, class definition

    "Class 314"

    Search notes in Class 314 to Class 137, subclass 61

    "Class 315"

    Search notes in Class 315 to Class 137, subclass 110

    "Class 318"

    Search notes in Class 318 to Class 137, class definition section IV,
    subclass 159

    "Class 340"

    Search notes to Class 340 in Class 137, subclass 551, 554

    Search notes in Class 340 to Class 137, class definition

    "Class 343"

    Search notes in Class 343 to Class 137, class definition section VIII

    "Class 346"

    Search notes to Class 346 in Class 137, subclass 778

    Search notes in Class 346 to Class 137, class definition (2) Note, (3) Note
    and subclasses 6, 36, 72

    "Class 364"

    Search notes to Class 364 in Class 137, subclasses 38, 47.

    Search notes in Class 364 to Class 137, subclass 100.

    "Class 399"

    Search notes to Class 399 in Class 137, subclasses 1, 38, 47, 82, 87.01,
    123, 154, 215, 219, 234.6, 236.1, 237, 247, 312, 386, 544, and 561.

    "Class 404"

    Search notes to Class 404 in Class 137, subclass 363

    "Class 405"

    Search notes to Class 405 in Class 137, subclasses 236, 363

    Search notes in Class 405 to Class 137, subclasses 37, 53.

    "Class 414"

    Search notes to Class 414 in Class 137, subclasses 1, 344.

    Search notes in Class 414 to Class 137, class definition, sections III, V,
    VI.

    "Class 417"

    Search notes to Class 417 in Class 137, subclasses 38, 81.5, 155, 156, 205,
    206, 207, 454.4, 565, 568, 569, 570, 593, 803, 842

    Search note in Class 417, to Class 137, subclass 151

    "Class 431"

    Search notes to Class 431 in Class 137, subclasses 6, 65, 66, 72, 405, 602,
    624.11

    Search notes in Class 431 to Class 137, class definition and subclasses 1,
    2, 3, 12, 13, 21, 42, 60, 64, 65, 75, 77, 80, 86, 88, 90, 119, 121, 122,
    123, 160, 207, 208, 278, 350, 354

    "Class 432"

    Search notes in Class 432 to Class 137 subclasses 35, 46, 54, 219

    "Class 440"

    Search notes to Class 440 in Class 137, subclass 40

    Search notes in Class 440 to Class 137, subclass 74.

    "Class 523"

    Search notes to Class 523, in Class 137, subclass 13.


CLS 137/1
TXT Processes under the class definition.

    (1)     Note.  All patents containing method claims drawn to the method of
    operation of any of the systems or parts thereof involved in the class are
    included in this and the indented subclasses, but methods of making parts
    of the system are not included.  They will be found in the subclass
    providing for the system or part.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, methods of operation of
    speed regulators for prime movers, valves, fluid motors; methods of
    developing fluid pressures by series parallel combinations of pumps, tanks
    or pipes; methods for affecting fluid flow by using pipe sections of
    varying diameter or joined at critical angles, or by slugging.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclasses 244.1+ for process of flowing or treating a well;
    and particularly subclasses 373+ for a method of operating a valve,
    closure, or changeable restrictor in a well wherein some significant
    manipulative step regarding the well is recited.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 606, 631, 632, 639,
    663+, 696+, 702+, and 749+ for a process comprising the step of adding a
    chemical to a liquid with treatment of the liquid.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 1 for processes of dispensing.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 237+ for liquid developer applied to
    a latent image within an electrophotographic device.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 786 for processes of
    material and article handling.


CLS 137/2
TXT Processes under subclass 1 in which one or more conditions or
    characteristics of a fluent material are determined and used to control the
    system in such a manner as to cause delivery of controlled quantities of a
    fluent material at a part of the system.

    (1)     Note.  See the main class definition, section 3, for collected
    search notes on automatic fluid handling devices of this and related
    classes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    455+,   for line condition change responsive valves, and see the search
    notes to subclass 455.


CLS 137/3
TXT Processes under subclass 2 in which two or more fluent materials of
    different conditions or characteristics are mixed and the determined
    condition or characteristic may be taken from any or all the fluent
    materials and used to control the quantitative flow in any or all the
    branches or in the mixed channel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87.01+, for self proportioning or correlating systems, especially
    subclasses 88+ for those involving mixture condition maintaining or sensing.


CLS 137/4
TXT Processes under subclass 3 in which the determined condition is the
    consistency of the mixture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92,     for systems for mixture condition maintaining or sensing by
    viscosity or consistency.

    467.5,  for line consistency responsive flow controller.


CLS 137/5
TXT Processes under subclass 3 in which the determined condition is the
    conductivity of the mixture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93,     for systems for maintaining or sensing a mixture condition by
    optical or chemical properties.


CLS 137/6
TXT Processes under subclass 3 in which the determined condition or
    characteristic is the heat of combustion of the mixture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90,     for systems of mixture condition maintaining or sensing by
    temperature or heat content.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    431,    Combustion, subclass 12 for a process of combustion involving the
    control or proportioning of burner feed.


CLS 137/7
TXT Processes under subclass 3 in which the determined condition or
    characteristic is a pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87.01+, for self-correlating or proportioning flow systems controlled by
    the pressure in one or more flow lines or branches.


CLS 137/8
TXT Processes under subclass 2 in which one or more characteristics or
    conditions of a fluent material is determined and used to control the
    system in such a manner as to cause a uniform flow of a fluent material
    through a part of the system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    494+,   particularly subclasses 505+ for pressure regulators having a
    separate connected reactor service.

    517+,   for direct response condition change controlled valves of the
    pressure regulating type, and see the search notes to subclass 517.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 55 for dispensers which maintain a constant
    weight, volume or pressure by means controlled by the output.


CLS 137/9
TXT Processes under subclass 2 in which one or more conditions of a fluent
    material is determined and used to produce or control the flow of a fluent
    material at a part of the system, which flow is regulated by the condition
    or conditions sensed so as to vary proportionally therewith.

    (1)     Note.  The flow in which the condition is sensed may be the
    controlled flow or a different flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82+,    for pressure modulating relays or followers, per se.

    98+,    for self-proportioning flow systems.

    109+,   for self-controlled branched flow     systems.


CLS 137/10
TXT Processes under subclass 2 in which the condition or characteristic
    determined is the speed of the fluent material of the system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    497+,   for line condition responsive valves which are responsive to a
    change in the rate of fluid flow, and see the search notes to subclass 497.


CLS 137/11
TXT Processes under subclass 2 in which one or more conditions or
    characteristics of a fluent material is determined and used to control the
    flow of boiler feed water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94,     for fuel control devices for boilers responsive to boiler or water
    system conditions.

    156+,   for gas pressure discharge of liquid feed traps to boilers.

    386+,   for liquid level responsive or maintaining systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 451+ for boiler feeders
    combined with boilers, and subclasses 412+ for boiler feed heaters.


CLS 137/12
TXT Processes under subclass 2 in which the condition or characteristic which
    is determined is a fluid pressure and the determination is used to cause
    delivery of controlled quantity of a fluent material at a part of the
    system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for processes of mixture control depending on pressure sensing.

    455+,   for line condition change responsive valves, and see the search
    notes to subclass 455.


CLS 137/12.5
TXT Processes under subclass 1 for handling potable liquids which are
    impregnated with gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154+,   for systems which contain, under pressure, a plurality of diverse
    type fluids, as gas and liquids, and especially 170.1+ for apparatus for
    controlling foam in handling such liquids, and 206+ for gas pressure
    storage over or displacement of liquids in such systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 1 for dispensing methods and subclasses 394
    and 396 to 402 for apparatus for dispensing liquids under fluid (gas)
    pressure.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    appropriate subclasses, especially 474+ for process involving gas-liquid
    contact including preparation of carbonated beverages.


CLS 137/13
TXT Processes under subclass 1 in which the flow of fluent material is
    facilitated by the addition of material which affects the flow
    characteristics of the fluent material, or by the application of heat or
    other forms of energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclass 370 for
    miscellaneous treatments of mineral oils during transportation.

    507,    Earth Boring, Well Treating, and Oil Field Chemistry, subclass 90
    for compositions for preventing contaminant deposits in petroleum oil
    conduits and methods of preventing such deposits involving no significant
    manipulative steps.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Class 523, subclass 175 for a composition containing a
    synthetic resin or natural rubber having utility related to improving drag
    reduction formation or systems which are effective for reducing the dynamic
    drag of a turbulent fluid in contact with a surface or to processes of
    preparing said composition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for processes of mixing plural fluids with automatic control.

    88+,    for automatic mixture condition maintaining by the addition of
    materials, etc.

    334+,   for fluid handling means combined with heating means, and see the
    search notes thereto.

    565+,   for distribution systems comprising pumps, and see the search notes
    thereto.

    803+,   for a pure fluid device or system capable of performing the process
    of this subclass (13).


CLS 137/14
TXT Processes under subclass 1 in which the pressure of the fluent material is
    reduced for the purpose of facilitating handling of the material or
    avoiding damage to the equipment, or equalized with the pressure in another
    part of the system or a container to facilitate transfer of the fluent
    material or of control thereof, or regulated to maintain the pressure of
    the fluent material at a desired value.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for processes of mixing fluids automatically controlled by pressure.

    12,     for processes for controlling the flow of material by sensing the
    pressure thereof.


CLS 137/15
TXT Processes under subclass 1 involving the connection of main or branch line
    channels to a tank or pipe under pressure without loss of any of the
    contents, or for the removal of undesirable material from the system or for
    the restoration of the system to a sound condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237+    and 315+, for apparatus employed for these purposes, and see the
    search notes to subclasses 237 and 315.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclass 277 for processes of repairing wells, subclasses
    311+ for processes of cleaning wells, and subclasses 378+ for processes of
    assembling wells.


CLS 137/15.1
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising intake means described for
    use in an ambient gaseous medium to gather a portion of that medium, said
    incoming medium moving at a relatively high speed with respect to the
    intake means, said intake means comprising a flow passage for the incoming
    medium, said flow passage disclosed as having at least (1), a portion which
    converges in the direction of flow or (2), a portion which diverges in the
    direction of flow or (3), an enlarged portion downstream of the intake end.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the patents herein disclose the intake means as
    being used to convert a portion of the kinetic energy of the incoming gas
    into static pressure energy.

    (2)     Note.  A claim to merely recite the wall structure of a tubular
    member, or to a mere tubular member with a restricting or baffle means for
    facilitating or restricting flow of fluid is classifiable in Class 138,
    Pipes and Tubular Conduits.  For classification in Class 137, some
    additional fluid handling features must be claimed.  See the reference to
    Class 137 under "SEARCH CLASS" in the definition of subclass 37 in Class
    138.

    (3)     Note.  A claim with a nominal recitation of the apparatus to which
    the incoming gaseous medium is being delivered, (e.g., jet engine, pump),
    in combination with the intake means, does not preclude classification in
    Class 137.


CLS 137/15.2
TXT Apparatus under subclass 15.1 having means sensing a condition of the
    ambient medium, or of the medium flowing through the intake means, said
    sensing means controlling operation of a control means for the medium
    flowing through the intake means, or for a separate fluid.


CLS 137/38
TXT Apparatus under the class definition wherein a flow of fluid is controlled
    in response to (1) the shifting of the position of the system as a whole
    relative to gravitational field or to a body of liquid in which the system
    exists or (2) the inertia or dislocation of the system as a whole.

    (1)     Note.  Systems which are controlled by overflow pipes or
    arrangements are excluded from this and indented subclasses and are
    classified on a basis appropriate to the system claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for systems wherein the control is in response to the inertia or
    position of a speed responsive element (e.g., fly ball governors).

    581,    for distribution systems comprising a movable tank.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    184,    Lubrication, subclass 26 for lubricating pumps operated by the
    vibration of a machine.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 203.19+ for a receptacle closure comprising
    a pressure responsive vent or valve which is also responsive to tilting of
    the receptacle.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 160+ for movably mounted supply containers
    for dispensers; subclasses 454+ for dispensers which have a trap which is
    filled and emptied solely by the tilting motion of the assembly, and
    subclasses 500+ for dispensers having gravity or inertia operated outlet
    elements.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 509 and
    510 for the application of a computer in the measuring of a fluid or fluid
    flow.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 237+ for liquid developer applied to
    a latent image within an electrophotographic device.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 231+ for pumps operated by a vehicle.


CLS 137/39
TXT Apparatus under subclass 38 which includes, in addition to the control
    responsive to the position or inertia of the system as a whole, a second
    means for operating the control means.

    (1)     Note.  The second control may be manual or operated in response to
    some other condition, such as pressure, temperature, etc.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass also provides for systems including means to
    neutralize or overcome the effect of a change of position on a second flow
    control.

    (3)     Note.  See the class definition, section 3, for search notes on
    combined automatic and manual control of fluid handling systems.


CLS 137/40
TXT Apparatus under subclass 38 wherein the flow is controlled in response to
    the position of the system as a whole relative to a body of water in which
    the system is located.

    (1)     Note.  To be classifiable in this or indented subclass the
    apparatus must include some means for sensing the position of the system
    relative to the body of water.

    (2)     Note.  Marine governors operated in response to the shifting of the
    position of the system relative to gravity (due to ocean wave motion for
    example) but which do not include means for sensing the position of the
    system relative the water are found in other subclasses of this group.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146,    for the plunge or immersion starting of siphons.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    440,    Marine Propulsion, subclass 74 for marine propulsion screw type
    propellers combined with propeller brakes to prevent racing of the
    propeller.


CLS 137/41
TXT Apparatus under subclass 40 which includes a float means for sensing the
    position of the system relative the body of water in which the system
    exists.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    386+    and Notes thereto for other float controlled apparatus.


CLS 137/42
TXT Apparatus under subclass 40 which includes means to sense the pressure or
    head of the body of water in which the system exists.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403+,   for liquid level responsive or maintaining systems in which the
    level is determined by head or pressure.


CLS 137/43
TXT Apparatus under subclass 38 including means to close or open a vent opening
    on a container when the position of the container is varied, e.g., when the
    container is tipped.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    583+,   for distribution systems having plural flow passages, one of which
    is a gas vent, and see the search notes to subclass 583.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 500 for gravity or inertia actuated outlet
    elements for dispensers.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process, subclasses 84+ for vents combined with battery structure and
    battery vents, per se, of the nonspill type.


CLS 137/44
TXT Apparatus under subclass 38 wherein the control is effected by a change in
    a level of a liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40+,    where the control is in response to a change or shift in the level
    of a body of water in which the system is located relative to the system.

    45,     for similar devices in which a liquid is employed as a shifting
    weight in combination with a pendulum or swinging member.

    386+,   for liquid level responsive systems which are not inertia
    controlled.


CLS 137/45
TXT Apparatus under subclass 38 wherein the flow is controlled by means of a
    pendulum or other pivoted member swinging about its pivot in response to a
    change of position of the system or to the inertia of the system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 391+ for pendulum type levels
    or plumbs.


CLS 137/46
TXT Apparatus under subclass 45 in which the pendulum or pivoted member
    controls the application of another source of power for operating the
    control instead of by acting directly through a mechanical connection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 25+ for fluid servo or pilot
    operated valves, and see the search notes to subclass 25.


CLS 137/47
TXT Systems under the class definition including the combination of a valve or
    valves and an actuator therefor, the actuator including a driven means
    which changes its position or produces a regulating pressure which varies
    in accordance with the speed at which it is driven.

    (1)     Note.  The driven means may comprise one or more governors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 488+ for a speed responsive
    device, per se.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 37+ and 57 for vehicle speed
    responsive indicators and subclasses 200+ for speed limit indicators.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 558
    and 565 for the application of a computer in the measuring of pressure or
    speed.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 237+ for liquid developer applied to
    a latent image within an electrophotographic device.


CLS 137/48
TXT Control systems under subclass 47 wherein the driven means changes its
    position in accordance with the rate of change of speed at which it is
    driven.


CLS 137/49
TXT Control systems under subclass 47 including additional means whereby the
    valve or valves may be manually operated.

    (1)     Note.  Manually operated means to modify the response setting of
    the speed responsive means or to reset the trip latch, are not deemed to
    constitute a manual control within the definition of this subclass.
    However, if the manual reset means also actuates the valve or valves, the
    device would be considered as being manually operated for classification
    herein. See the class definition, section 3, for search notes on combined
    automatic and manual control means for fluid handling systems, and Section
    5, for a listing of manual control, resetting and adjusting devices in this
    class.

    (2)     Note.  The term "manual" as used herein includes both hand and foot
    actuated means.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass includes manual valve actuating means in which
    a speed responsive device become effective at a predetermined speed of the
    engine or vehicle, either (1) to disconnect the mechanical movement of the
    manual actuator, and in some instances also to operate a trip mechanism to
    permit a biasing means to close the valve, or (2) to act as a limit stop to
    prevent further valve opening by the manual actuator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for excess speed responsive control, and see the search notes
    thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 513 for a speed responsive device
    combined with manual control.


CLS 137/50
TXT Control systems under subclass 47 wherein the driven means is operable to
    vary the extent of opening of the valve or valves in response to changes in
    speed and to effect closing of the valve or valves in response to a speed
    above a predetermined speed.

    (1)     Note.  The driven means may comprise one or more governors which
    may control a single valve or a plurality of valves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for excess speed responsive valve control of the centrifugal mass
    type, and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 137/51
TXT Control systems under subclass 47 including additional means responsive to
    another operating condition which may actuate the same valve which is
    actuated by the speed responsive means, or another valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 509 for a speed responsive device
    that is also responsive to a nonspeed condition.


CLS 137/52
TXT Control systems under subclass 51 wherein the additional condition
    responsive means comprises a control device responsive to the breaking or
    failure of the driving means for the speed responsive governor to effect
    closing or substantial closing of a valve.

    (1)     Note.  The valve which is closed or substantially closed on failure
    of the driving means may be the valve controlled by the speed responsive
    governor or another valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 508 for a governor having drive
    failure responsive means.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 27 for fluid pressure servo
    operated valves having means to close the valve on failure of the servo
    means, and subclass 69 for biased trip valves having the trip actuated on
    failure of the electric power.


CLS 137/53
TXT Control systems under subclass 47 wherein the speed responsive means
    comprises a rotating or revolving weight or weights, the position assumed
    by such weight or weights due to centrifugal force varying as a function of
    the speed at which they are rotated or revolved.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 535+ for a centrifugal type speed
    responsive device, per se.


CLS 137/54
TXT Control systems under subclass 53 wherein two or more valves are provided,
    at least one of said valves being actuated by the speed responsive means.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition, section 3, for search notes on
    plural automatic valves in this and related classes.


CLS 137/55
TXT Control systems under subclass 53 wherein the valves or valve are
    periodically and continually opened and closed, the governor being
    effective to vary the period and/or the extent of opening.

    (1)     Note.  The valves are usually disclosed for use in a reciprocating
    type of expansible chamber motor, the valves being periodically actuated
    for admitting motive fluid to the power cylinder and the governor varies
    the quantity of motive fluid in accordance with the motor speed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    631+,   for nonautomatic cyclically operated valves, and see the search
    notes to subclass 631.


CLS 137/56
TXT Control systems under subclass 53 wherein the speed responsive means and
    the valve or valves are combined to comprise a continuously rotating
    construction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for valves connected with a speed responsive governor to rotate
    therewith in order to periodically open and close the valve, the governor
    producing an axial motion of the valve to control the period and/or extent
    of valve openings.


CLS 137/57
TXT Control systems under subclass 53 wherein the speed responsive means is
    effective to actuate the valve or valves only at speeds above a
    predetermined speed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     for speed change and excess speed valve control.

    456+,   for safety cut-offs of general utility which respond to line
    condition and require resetting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 57 and 62.1+ for vehicle speed
    limit indicators and alarms.


CLS 137/58
TXT Control systems under subclass 53 wherein the speed responsive means
    transmits its regulating motion to the valve or valves by means of a fluid
    type servo-motor mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 366 and 458 for speed
    governor operated expansible chamber motors.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 25+ for fluid pressure
    actuated valves of the pilot or servo-motor type, and see the search notes
    to subclass 25.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 40+ for speed
    controlled rotary expansible chamber devices.


CLS 137/59
TXT Apparatus within the class definition which includes means which senses the
    existence of conditions which would cause the freezing of liquid within the
    system and in response thereto exercises a control to protect the liquid
    from freezing or to safeguard the system as a whole from the effects of
    freezing of a part thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72+,    for valves controlled by heat destructible or fusible means.

    79+,    for devices responsive to atmospheric temperature not amounting to
    a freeze condition.

    107,    for apparatus wherein a waste valve opens in response to the
    stopping of flow through the line, disclosed as preventing freezing.

    118.01+, for branched flow systems responsive to temperature of the system.

    301+,   for hydrants with means to prevent freezing.

    457,    for safety cut-offs requiring reset and responsive to thermal
    conditions in a fluid line.

    468,    for other valves controlled in response to thermal conditions in a
    fluid line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 132+ for condition sensing controls for a
    refrigeration system, particularly subclasses 139+ for control by
    accumulation on a freezing surface.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 41.14, 41.15, 41.42, 41.5,
    and 142.5 for devices for protecting the cooling systems of internal
    combustion engines against cold.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 27+ for freeze protecting
    pressure compensators, and subclasses 32+ for freeze protection for pipes
    and tubular conduits.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, appropriate
    subclasses.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclass 80 for heating radiators having means for
    preventing freezing.


CLS 137/60
TXT Apparatus under subclass 59 which includes means to protect the liquid from
    freezing by responding to the freezing of the liquid in a chamber.

    (1)     Note.  The freeze chamber may be in the main flow line or may be an
    auxiliary control chamber which is more exposed to the low temperature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67+,    for frangible control elements not responsive to a freeze condition.


CLS 137/61
TXT Apparatus under subclass 59 which closes the system to liquid flow and
    opens a waste outlet so that at least part of the liquid in the system is
    drained or wasted in response to the sensing of low temperature or freezing
    conditions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for opening fluid waste passage in response to stopping of the main
    flow.

    596+,   for stop and waste devices not responsive to change in condition,
    and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 137/62
TXT Apparatus under subclass 59 which operates to open an outlet so that at
    least part of the system is drained or emptied of liquid in response to the
    sensing of low temperature or freezing conditions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    570,    for drain valve actuator combined with a pump.

    596+,   for distribution systems comprising a drain which is not automatic,
    and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 137/65
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising a flow control device
    or safety valve in the fuel supply to a burner which is automatically
    actuated to discontinue the fuel flow in response to the extinguishment of
    the main or pilot burner.

    (1)     Note.  These devices are not self-opening, but must be manually
    reset, usually requiring that the pilot burner be lighted first.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    405,    for cut-offs responsive to an accumulation of unburned fuel oil
    delivered to a burner.

    456+,   for safety cut-offs responsive to a change in line condition, which
    also require resetting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 42+ for a burner system in which the sensor
    of a first burner controls a second burner and subclasses 77+ for a burner
    shutdown by a means sensing a failure of the burner flame.


CLS 137/66
TXT Control systems under subclass 65 wherein the safety valve is retained in
    its set or open position under the action of a solenoid, which solenoid is
    energized by the electric current generated by a thermoelectric element,
    e.g., a thermocouple, subject to the heat of the pilot burner or main
    burner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 11 for heat motor acutated
    valves of general utility, and subclasses 68+ for electrical trip actuation
    of biased valves, including electrical resetting.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 80 for a burner assembly including a shutdown
    control responsive to combustion failure or overheat having a
    thermoelectric combustion sensor.


CLS 137/67
TXT DESTRUCTIBLE OR DEFORMABLE ELEMENT CONTROLLED:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which the flow of fluid is
    controlled in response to the destruction, fusion or permanent deformation
    of an element or body.

    (1)     Note.  The destruction, fusion or deformation may result
    automatically in response to the existence of some condition causing
    destruction, fusion or deformation (e.g., heat), or may be deliberately
    brought about by external means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    318,    for tapping a system under pressure by making an aperture therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclasses 316+ for closures used in wells and destructible
    by drilling.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 54 for automatic control of dispensers by
    fusible or soluble means; subclasses 80+ for dispensers having a cutter or
    punch associated therewith; subclasses 541.1+ for dispensers having a
    frangible outlet element.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 1.2 for a blowout preventer
    having a deformable annulus.


CLS 137/68.11
TXT Destructible element:

    Subject matter under subclass 67 in which the fluid flow control element is
    physically broken by having a force acting directly upon it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    797,    for frangible elements, the breaking of which do not control any
    flow of fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 80+ for dispensers having a cutter or punch
    associated therewith.


CLS 137/68.12
TXT Combined destructible and fusible element:

    Subject matter under subclass 68.11 in which the element breaks and melts
    at a specific temperature to control the fluid flow or has, in addition to
    the destructible element, a separate element which melts at a specific
    temperature to control the fluid flow.


CLS 137/68.13
TXT Explosive actuation:

    Subject matter under subclass 68.11 which includes means capable of
    detonation for creating a force for breaking or deforming the destructible
    element (e.g., an explosive element moves a plunger or creates a pressure
    surge to break the element).


CLS 137/68.14
TXT Separable valve coupling or conduit:

    Subject matter under subclass 68.11 where the destructible element is a
    fluid-conveying assembly such as a nipple, valve assembly, or hose that
    disconnects at a specific joint when an excessive force is applied to it.


CLS 137/68.15
TXT Tensile or sheer pin or bolt:

    Subject matter under subclass 68.14 where the destructible element is a pin
    or bolt that holds the coupling together and destructs when a perpendicular
    or axial excessive force is applied to the coupling.


CLS 137/68.16
TXT Tensile or sheer pin or bolt:

    Subject matter under subclass 68.11 where the destructible element is a pin
    or bolt that destructs when an excessive force is applied.


CLS 137/68.17
TXT Pressure causes pin or bolt to destruct:

    Subject matter under subclass 68.16 that destructs when the applied
    excessive force that fractures the pin or bolt is applied over the surface
    of the pin or bolt.


CLS 137/68.18
TXT With alarm or indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 68.11 that includes a sensing means that
    sends a signal when the element breaks.


CLS 137/68.19
TXT Rupture disc:

    Subject matter under subclass 68.11 where the destructible element is a
    diaphragm or seal that holds fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for a fluid-controlled fusible diaphragm.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 89.2+ for a receptacle that is a frangible
    diaphragm within a container or vessel.


CLS 137/68.21
TXT Means for holding entire disc after rupture:

    Subject matter under subclass 68.19 that has a specific means for
    preventing the rupture disc from tearing away (e.g., hinge-reinforcing
    member).


CLS 137/68.22
TXT Disc burst after destruction of additional element:

    Subject matter under subclass 68.19 that includes a second frangible
    element in a system which destructs before the rupture disc.

    (1)     Note. This subject matter would include a system with two or more
    rupture discs in a flow passage.


CLS 137/68.23
TXT Direct pressure causes disc to burst:

    Subject matter under subclass 68.19 wherein the destructable element is
    destroyed by excessive pressure exerted by the fluid flow.


CLS 137/68.24
TXT Two-way rupture disc:

    Subject matter under subclass 68.23 that is designed to break either in the
    direction of or opposite the direction of the fluid flow when an excessive
    pressure differential exists.


CLS 137/68.25
TXT Dome shape:

    Subject matter under subclass 68.23 that is specifically designed to be
    hemispherical to enable the disc to more easily rupture as pressure builds.


CLS 137/68.26
TXT Reverse buckling:

    Subject matter under subclass 68.25 which has excessive pressure at the
    convex side of the disc to cause the disc to reverse its concavity and
    burst.


CLS 137/68.27
TXT Specific weakening point:

    Subject matter under subclass 68.19 specially modified to have an area of
    varied thickness creating a vulnerable section to enable the pressure disc
    to more easily break.


CLS 137/68.28
TXT Integral disc assembly:

    Subject matter under subclass 68.19 including a support member welded or
    bonded with adhesive to the rupture disc or the rupture disc is directly
    bonded or welded to the assembly.


CLS 137/68.29
TXT Knife or cutter causes disc to break:

    Subject matter under subclass 68.19 penetrated by a piercing device to
    enable the disc to more easily break when the internal pressure in the
    system becomes excessive.


CLS 137/68.3
TXT Movable knife or cutter:

    Subject matter under subclass 68.29 wherein the piercing device is
    positionable.


CLS 137/69
TXT With counterbalancing element:

    Apparatus under subclass 68.12 which includes means for applying a force or
    bias to the frangible means in a direction opposing the force (usually
    fluid pressure) which tends to break the frangible element.


CLS 137/70
TXT Frangible element returns pressure responsive valve:

    Apparatus under subclass 68.12 in which a valve which opens in response to
    increased pressure is retained in closed position by means of a frangible
    element, opening of the valve resulting from the breaking of the frangible
    element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    455+,   for line condition responsive valves not opposed by frangible means.


CLS 137/71
TXT Having pressure responsive valve:

    Apparatus under subclass 68.12 including a pressure responsive valve
    controlling the fluid flow in response to the pressure thereof in addition
    to the control in response to the breaking of the frangible element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    511+,   for direct pressure responsive valves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 203.08 for a vent or valve in a removeable
    closure, said vent or valve designed to rupture when exposed to excessive
    pressure.


CLS 137/72
TXT Apparatus under subclass 67 in which the flow is controlled in response to
    an element which is fusible or destructible by heat (e.g., combustible).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79+,    for atmospheric temperature responsive flow control.

    457,    for safety cut-off valves controlled by a thermal condition of the
    line.

    468,    for other valves controlled by a thermal condition of a fluid line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 217+ for indicators of the
    fusible type.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 504.1 for safety device for
    a boiler with fusible control and subclass 504.3 for a fusible type safety
    device extinguishing a fire under a boiler.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 54 for dispensers having a fusible controller.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 21 for a burner assembly controlled by a
    combustion destructible element.


CLS 137/73
TXT Apparatus under subclass 72 which includes a means for controlling the
    fluid flow in response to a change in condition in addition to the control
    in response to the fusion or destruction of the heat destructible element.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition, section 3 for search notes on
    plural automatic controls in fluid handling devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75+,    for safety cut-offs operated by fusible means but without
    responding to a second sensing means.


CLS 137/74
TXT Apparatus under subclass 72 in which the fusible or heat destructible
    element is in the passage carrying the flow controlled and functions as a
    barrier or stop member for such flow.

    (1)     Note.  The fusion of the fusible element may result in either the
    opening or closing of the passage carrying the fluid flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251+,   for liquid valves or barriers.


CLS 137/75
TXT Apparatus under subclass 72 in which the valve controlling the fluid flow
    is biased toward a closed position but is held open by a restraining means,
    the fusion or destruction of the heat destructible or fusible means causing
    a release of the restraining means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    457,    for other cut-offs which are operated in response to a change in
    thermal condition in the fluid within the controlled line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 66+ for biased trip valve
    actuators not responsive to a condition change.


CLS 137/76
TXT Apparatus under subclass 75 which includes a heating means for the fusible
    or heat destructible element.

    (1)     Note.  The heating element is usually for the purpose of fusing or
    otherwise destroying the destructible element to control the operation of
    the valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    468,    for line condition responsive valves controlled by thermal
    conditions, and see the search notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 11 for heat motor actuators
    for valves.


CLS 137/77
TXT Apparatus under subclass 75 including a means for closing the valve by
    manual or external means in addition to the operation in response to the
    fusible or heat destructible element.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition, Section 3 for search notes on
    combined automatic and nonautomatic control of a fluid handling device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76,     for manual or external closing by heating the fusible or heat
    destructible element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 66+ for biased trip valve
    actuators not responsive to a condition change.


CLS 137/78.1
TXT AMBIENT CONDITION CHANGE RESPONSIVE:

    Apparatus under the class definition which controls a flow of a fluid in
    response to a variation in a condition of, or in the surrounding
    environment.

    (1)     Note.  To be classifiable in this or indented subclasses the
    apparatus must include a sensing means responsive to changes in
    environmental conditions and there must be a disclosure that the control is
    in response to such changes.  Devices which employ a sensing means using
    environmental pressure merely as a standard against which some internal
    pressure or condition is measured are not classified in this or indented
    subclass but are classified elsewhere on a basis appropriate to the system.

    (2)     Note.  This and indented subclasses include devices which include
    means for sensing changes in an environmental condition and exercising a
    compensating effect so as to neutralize any effect the change in
    environmental condition would otherwise have on the operation of the device.

    (3)     Note.  See the class definition, section 3, for search notes on the
    automatic control of fluid handling systems.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59+,    for device which sense the existence of freeze condition in the
    atmosphere and in response thereto operate to prevent freezing of liquid in
    the system.


CLS 137/78.2
TXT For controlling soil irrigation:

    Apparatus under subclass 78.1 in which flow of water to the ground is
    controlled by means responsive to an environmental condition.


CLS 137/78.3
TXT Coil moisture sensing:

    Apparatus under subclass 78.2 in which flow of water to the ground is
    controlled in response to a change in moisture content of the ground.


CLS 137/78.4
TXT Burner gas cutoff:

    Apparatus under subclass 78.1 in which flow of flammable gas to a burner is
    stopped in response to a sensed environmental extinguishing action to the
    flame of the burner.


CLS 137/78.5
TXT Atmospheric:

    Apparatus under subclass 78.1 in which control of a flow of fluid is
    responsive to a variation in a condition of, or in surrounding atmosphere.


CLS 137/79
TXT Apparatus under subclass 78.5 which controls a fluid flow in response to
    variations of temperature in the surrounding atmosphere.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes apparatus which sense the presence of
    a fire in the atmosphere and exercise a control in response thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59+,    for freeze condition responsive safety devices.

    67+,    for systems controlled by a heat destructible or fusible means.

    468,    for thermally responsive valves responding to line condition
    change, and see the search notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, subclasses 56+ for fire extinguishers including
    valves responsive to the occurrence of fire conditions.


CLS 137/80
TXT Apparatus under subclass 79 which also includes, in addition to the
    atmosphere temperature responsive element, an additional means for
    operating the control means.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition, Section 3 for search notes on
    automatic and combined automatic and nonautomatic control of fluid handling
    systems.


CLS 137/81.1
TXT Pressure:

    Apparatus under subclass 78.5 in which a fluid flow is controlled in
    response to variations of atmospheric pressure.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note and (2) Note to the definition of subclass 78.1.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    455+,   for valves controlled by changes in line pressure, especially
    subclass 482 for suction compensators for combustion engine induction type
    line conduction change responsive valves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 70+, 238, 255, and 340 for apparatus for
    maintaining a pressure in enclosure including means responsive to air
    conditions either in the atmosphere or in the enclosure.


CLS 137/81.2
TXT Underwater:

    Apparatus under subclass 78.1 in which control of a flow of fluid is
    responsive to a variation in a condition of, or in an environment beneath
    the surface of a body of water.


CLS 137/82
TXT Apparatus under the class definition which continuously varies or modulates
    a fluid in response to a varying control condition. The modulation is
    usually accompanied by varying a pressure bleed.

    (1)     Note.  Only the subcombination, without a pressure responsive
    device, and a main valve controlled thereby is classified in this subclass;
    for the combination search appropriate succeeding subclasses, as indicated
    below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for pressure regulators which regulate by supply and exhaust valves
    to maintain a pre-set pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus under this definition combined with the expansible chamber motor
    which is operated by the fluid pressure.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 79+ for
    temperature control systems utilizing pressure modulators to operate fluid
    pressure motors.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 25+ for apparatus which by
    means of a pilot valve controls the application of fluid pressure to an
    expansible chamber motor which in turn controls a main line valve.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 237+ for liquid developer applied to
    a latent image within an electrophotographic device.


CLS 137/83
TXT Apparatus under subclass 82 which utilize a fluid jet and one or more jet
    receiving orifices with the control condition varying the pressure in the
    orifices by varying the amount of jet fluid entering the orifices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    625.6,  for a jet control type pressure modulator combined with a pilot
    valve and a supply and exhaust valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 3 for expansible chamber
    motors combined with a jet type control therefor.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 505+, 518+ and 587.1+ for jet producing discharge
    members, per se.


CLS 137/84
TXT Apparatus under subclass 82 wherein a plurality of modulating relays on
    followers are connected in series; the output pressure of one controlling
    the modulation in the next.


CLS 137/85
TXT Apparatus under subclass 82 in which the modulated pressure is utilized in
    a feedback arrangement to counterbalance the modulating control element.


CLS 137/86
TXT Apparatus under subclass 85 in which the modulated pressure is utilized in
    a second feedback arrangement to counterbalance the counterbalance of the
    modulating control element.


CLS 137/87.01
TXT SELF-PROPORTIONING OR CORRELATING SYSTEMS:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a fluid flow in a first
    flow line is proportioned or correlated with the fluid flow in a second
    fluid flow line by a movable means, which is positioned in one of the fluid
    flow lines and controlling the fluid flow in the other fluid flow line in
    response to a sensor detecting a variable condition or characteristic of
    the fluid in the other fluid flow line.

    (1)     Note. The flow proportioning or correlating may constitute plural
    separate flow lines, branches of the same flow and a branch thereof.

    (2)     Note. The proportioning and correlating of the fluid flows may be
    continuous or discontinuous and may vary directly or inversely and
    according to any ratio or in any manner.

    (3)     Note. Systems that rely on static means (e.g., a jet pump) to
    produce a correlated flow are excluded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155,    for gas lift devices for wells including a valve between a gas line
    and a liquid column responsive to the pressure differential between the gas
    and the liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 198.1+ for a system
    including a chemical feeder and a separating means.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 57 for dispensing of one material controlled
    by the weight, volume, or pressure of a second dispensed material.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 12+ for mere fluid pressure
    actuated valves, even though the flow through the valve may be disclosed as
    being related or proportioned to the pressure in the fluid pressure
    actuator line.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 237+ for liquid developer applied to
    a latent image within an electrophotographic device.


CLS 137/87.02
TXT Liquid level responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 87.01 wherein the sensor is detecting the
    variation in an uppermost horizontal surface of the liquid in one of the
    flow lines and in response thereto the sensor controls the flow in the
    other flow line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101.25, for a self-proportioning flow system with liquid level sensing.

    386+,   for a liquid level responsive means without proportionate or
    correlated flow.


CLS 137/87.03
TXT Flow rate responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 87.01 wherein the sensor is detecting the
    variation in the amount of fluid flowing in one of the flow lines in a set
    period of time or is detecting the variation in fluid pressure (i.e.,
    pressure differential) along the flow line and in response thereto the
    sensor controls the flow in the other flow line.


CLS 137/87.04
TXT Pressure differential:

    Subject matter under subclass 87.03 wherein the sensor is detecting the
    variation of the fluid pressures at two distinct points along one of the
    flow lines and in response thereto the sensor controls the flow in the
    other flow line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    for the self-proportioning flow system responsive to flow
    comparison or pressure differential.


CLS 137/87.05
TXT Plural sensors:

    Subject matter under subclass 87.01 including two or more sensors for
    detecting two distinct or similar conditions or characteristics of the
    fluid in one of the flow lines and in response thereto the sensors control
    the flow in the other flow line.


CLS 137/87.06
TXT For single valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 87.05 comprising one valve element and
    wherein the sensors operate only one valve element to control the flow.


CLS 137/88
TXT Systems under subclass 87.01 in which a condition of a fluid mixture is
    maintained by controlling the flow of at least one of the fluids mixed in
    response to a means which sense the condition of the mixture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3+,     for the corresponding processes.


CLS 137/89
TXT Systems under subclass 88 in which a fluid flow is divided into a plurality
    of flow paths which are subsequently recombined, the ratio of the flows
    thus divided and recombined being controlled in response to a means sensing
    a condition to be maintained.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, systems in which one of
    the plurality of flow paths pass through a means to treat the fluid to
    restore the property to be maintained, the amount of fluid passing through
    the treating means being controlled by the condition sensing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    599+,   for systems involving dividing into parallel flow paths with
    recombining, without automatic control.


CLS 137/91
TXT Systems under subclass 88 in which the condition maintained or sensed is
    specific gravity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403+,   for systems in which a single flow is controlled by weight of an
    accumulated fluid, and see the search notes to subclass 403.


CLS 137/92
TXT Systems under subclass 88 in which the condition maintained or sensed is
    viscosity or consistency.

    (1)     Note.  Due to their similarity with systems classified in this
    subclass, systems are also included in which the viscosity or consistency
    of a stream is sensed and in response thereto the subsequent addition of
    water is controlled in order to produce a predetermined or desired
    viscosity or consistency.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for the corresponding process.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 258 and 380 for
    systems for maintaining the consistency or viscosity of paper making pulp
    combined with paper making apparatus.


CLS 137/93
TXT Systems under subclass 88 in which the condition maintained or sensed is an
    optical or chemical property.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for processes of controlling flow according to the conductivity of
    the mixture.

    392,    for control of a single fluid flow by sensing electrical
    characteristics.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for photocell circuits.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, for examination of material by
    light for optical properties particularly subclasses 128+ for refraction
    tests, subclasses 410+ for shade or color tests involving flowing liquids,
    and subclasses 432+ for light transmission tests involving gases or liquids.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 50+ for chemical analyzers; and
    subclasses 105+ for apparatus operating in response to a sensed condition.


CLS 137/94
TXT Subject matter under subclass 87.01 in which a condition of the fluid in a
    boiler or water heating system controls the flow of fuel used for heating
    the boiler or water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    386+,   for liquid level responsive or maintaining systems.

    468,    for thermally responsive controllers, and see the search notes
    thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 448.1 and 449 for water
    heaters and boilers with automatic regulation of the fuel and water.


CLS 137/98
TXT Systems under subclass 87.01 in which the control means maintains a
    predetermined ratio between flows in a plurality of flow lines.

    (1)     Note.  The flows may be separate or may subsequently be combined or
    may be branches from a single source of a fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    561+,   particularly subclasses 577+, 599+ and 861+ for devices in which
    flow is proportioned by means of stationary weirs, overflow pipes, etc.,
    and not having a sensing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 195+ for rate of flow meter
    systems employing two or more meters usually for measuring and comparing a
    plurality of flows.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 101 for proportionate
    feed means combined with separating means.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclass for gas and
    liquid contact devices including means for maintaining a proportional flow
    between a gas and liquid; see particularly subclasses 69.1+ for systems in
    which the flow of liquid is controlled in response to the rate of flow in
    the gas line as measured by means of a venturi in the gas line.


CLS 137/99
TXT Systems under subclass 98 in which the proportioning or correlating means
    includes mechanically interconnected flow displacement elements.

    (1)     Note.  Flow displacement elements include primarily pump and meter
    arrangements and vanes or other elements exposed to the flow and shifted in
    response to variations therein, such shifting elements usually acting both
    as controlling and detecting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    565+,   for nonautomatic distribution systems including pumps.


CLS 137/99.5
TXT Subject matter under subclass 99 wherein the flow displacement element
    comprises a bodily movable measuring chamber which provides continuous flow
    with increment feeding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101.31, for a stationary measuring chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 344+ for systems wherein the movable
    discharge assistant is not related to a continuous flow, and see the search
    notes thereunder.


CLS 137/100
TXT Systems under subclass 98 in which the sensing means is sensitive to the
    differences between the rates of flow or pressure difference along the line
    in a plurality of flow lines or at spaced points along one line.

    (1)     Note.  Means sensing changes in the difference between the flows
    may control the flow in a third flow line or may exercise a control on the
    flows compared.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    497+,   for line change condition responsive valves controlled by change in
    the rate of flow, and see the search notes to subclass 497.


CLS 137/101
TXT Systems under subclass 100 in which a flow is divided into a plurality of
    flow paths and the ratio between the flow in each branch maintained in
    response to means sensing differences in flow or pressure in each branch by
    throttling one branch an amount equal to the amount the other branch is
    opened.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the patents in this subclass are for systems in
    which a single pressure fluid is employed to supply a plurality of fluid
    pressure motors with means to automatically maintain the amounts of fluid
    fed to each motor proportional.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 420+ for automatic control of a plurality
    of fluid motors.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclasses and
    especially subclasses 165+ and 508+ for automatic control of a plurality of
    expansible chamber motors.


CLS 137/101.11
TXT Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein a shunt line having a reservoir
    therein relies on the pressure difference between its connection to the
    main line to cause flow therethrough to entrain material in the reservoir,
    or to displace the reservoir material or an intermediate distinct fluid
    layer or expansible chamber device whereby the reservoir material is forced
    into the main line without mixing with the flow while in the shunt.


CLS 137/101.19
TXT Subject matter under subclass 100 comprising an electrical controller
    responsive to the sensing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 129+ for an electrical valve
    actuator.


CLS 137/101.21
TXT Subject matter under subclass 98 comprising an electrical controller
    responsive to a flow displacement element.


CLS 137/101.25
TXT Subject matter under subclass 98 comprising at least one means which senses
    the level of a liquid in means to receive an accumulation thereof and in
    response thereto exercises a control of the flow in one or more of the flow
    lines.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    386+,   for liquid level responsive means without proportionate or
    correlated flow.  See the search notes thereunder.


CLS 137/101.27
TXT Subject matter under subclass 101.25 wherein a weir or valve is responsive
    to the level sensing means.


CLS 137/101.29
TXT Subject matter under subclass 101.25 wherein a swinging outlet pipe
    controls the flow from an accumulator or tank responsive to the level
    sensing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    577+,   for a tank with a movable or adjustable outlet or overflow pipe.


CLS 137/101.31
TXT Subject matter under subclass 98 comprising a measuring type discharge
    assistant in one flow line responsive to a flow displacement element in
    another flow line or by the weight of accumulated fluid of a proportionate
    part of the flow in another line to provide continuous flow through the
    system with increment feeding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 261+ for dispensing apparatus with discharge
    assistants.


CLS 137/102
TXT Systems under subclass 87.01 in which an outlet or receiver alternatively
    receives a fluid from a source of supply and drains the fluid to an
    exhaust, the flow of fluid from the supply or to the exhaust, being
    controlled in response to a means sensing a change in condition.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the patents classified in this subclass are drawn to
    distributer valves for fluid motors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224+,   for tire inflation apparatus which may have condition responsive
    filling and relief valves

    596+,   for distribution systems involving stop and waste arrangements, and
    see the search notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus under this definition combined with an expansible chamber motor
    which is controlled thereby.


CLS 137/103
TXT Systems under subclass 102 in which an outlet or receiver is alternately
    connected to a source of suction or vacuum and a source of fluid under
    pressure or vent (usually the atmosphere).

    (1)     Note.  Many of the patents classified in this subclass are for
    milking machine pulsators.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    526,    for vacuum relief valves of the type responding to fluid pressure
    exerted directly on the valve face.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 14.01+ for milking machines.


CLS 137/104
TXT Apparatus under subclass 103 which include a snap acting or trip linkage in
    the control system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 66+ for valves with biased
    trips, and see the search notes to subclass 66, and subclass 76 for snap
    action valves, per se, and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 137/105
TXT Apparatus under subclass 103 wherein the flow controlling valve is moved by
    a fluid servo under control of a second valve which is itself fluid
    operated under control of the first valve, there being no mechanical
    linkage between the two valves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    488+,   for line condition change responsive fluid pressure type servo or
    pilot controlled valves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 28+ for fluid servo or pilot
    actuated valves having fluid actuated pilot valve.


CLS 137/106
TXT Systems under subclass 102 which include two outlets or receivers, one
    outlet or receiver being connected to the supply while the other is
    connected to the exhaust, the connections being reversed or changed in
    response to a means sensing a change in condition.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the patents classified in this subclass are drawn to
    distributor valves for plural expansible chamber motors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    625+,   for multiway valve units and their acutators, and see the search
    notes to subclass 625.


CLS 137/107
TXT Systems under subclass 102 wherein a waste or drain is opened in response
    to the stopping of the fluid flow from the supply to the outlet or receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for stop and waste systems which are responsive to means sensing
    freeze conditions.

    596+,   for stop and waste systems not responsive to any change in a
    condition, and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 137/109
TXT Systems under subclass 87.01 in which a single flow is divided into a
    plurality of flow paths or a plurality of flow paths are combined into a
    single flow path or in which a single flow path is divided and then
    recombined, and in which the flow in one branch or line is controlled in
    response to a change in a condition in another branch or line.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses takes only those systems which
    include some significant branched structure such as having a valve and/or
    sensing means in a plurality of the branches or which require branched flow
    in order to be operative.  For example, a pressure flow line having a mere
    relief valve or pressure relief passage mounted in the side is not
    classifiable as a branched system, because the outflow end of the line is
    not necessary for the operation of the pressure relief valve; such valves
    operate in the same manner when applied to a tank.

    (2)     Note.  Plural relief valves opening into the atmosphere or the same
    tank or source are not branched flow systems, nor is a valve in which the
    flow is divided and recombined within the same valve body a branched flow
    system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    455+,   for relief and other condition responsive valves whether mounted in
    a flow line or in a container.  (See (1) Note.)

    561+,   for branched flow distribution systems in which there is no control
    of a flow in response to a change in a sensed condition.


CLS 137/110
TXT Systems under subclass 109 in which a single flow path is divided into a
    plurality of branch flow paths which are in turn recombined into a single
    flow path and in which at least one branch flow path is controlled in
    response to a sensing means which is at least partially affected by a
    condition in another branch flow path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89,     for mixture condition maintaining or sensing systems involving
    dividing and recombining the flow.

    115.01+, for by-pass or relief flows controlled by main line condition.

    599+,   for distribution systems which are not self-correlating but involve
    flow dividing and recombining.


CLS 137/111
TXT Systems under subclass 109 in which a plurality of flows from separate
    sources are joined, or are provided with a common outflow, and in which at
    least one flow path is controlled in response to a sensed condition change.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88+,    for system in which a plurality of fluids are mixed and the flow of
    at least one of the fluids is controlled in response to a change in a
    sensed condition of the mixture.

    98+,    for self-proportioning systems involving mutual control features in
    plural lines.

    480,    for combustion engine induction type governor valves controlling
    one or more auxiliary inlets, the main flow also being controlled in some
    instances.

    602+,   for branched flow distribution systems with multiple inlets and a
    single outlet in which there is no control of a flow in response to a
    change in a sensed condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 57 for control of a dispensed material by the
    weight, volume or pressure of a second dispensed material.


CLS 137/112
TXT Systems under subclass 111 in which flow in one inlet is alternated with
    the flow in a second inlet or is substituted therefor in response to a
    sensing of a changed condition.


CLS 137/113
TXT Systems under subclass 112 in which the control is in response to a failure
    or depletion of the source of the flow in one of the inflow.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the patents in this subclass are drawn to bottled
    gas handling devices for substituting a second source of gas for the first
    when the pressure in the first drops below a satisfactory value.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 6 for gas or vapor dispensing of this type.


CLS 137/114
TXT Systems under subclass 111 in which one inflow is added to or supplements
    the second flow and is in response to a sensed condition change such as
    reduction in pressure or flow in the second inflow or in the combined flow
    or in the level of accumulated fluid derived from the second or combined
    flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98+,    for self proportioning flow systems involving the uniting of a
    plurality of inflows with mutual control effects.


CLS 137/115.01
TXT Bypass or relief controlled by main line fluid condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 109 including a flow line with an inlet and
    outlet for a main flow and an outlet branch or bypass in which the flow is
    controlled in response to a variation in the fluid condition (e.g., fluid
    level, flow rate or pressure, or the like) in the main flow line detected
    by a sensor.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223+,   for inflatable article filling means having a back pressure cut-off
    or relief means.

    455+,   for relief and other condition responsive valves whether mounted in
    a flow line or container, in which there is no significantly claimed
    branched flow structure.

    599+,   for bypasses in distribution systems, and see the search notes to
    subclass 599.

    SEARCH CLASS,

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 96.1+ for a liquid
    purification or separation responsive to a variation of constituents in a
    liquid mixture.


CLS 137/115.02
TXT Liquid level responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 115.01 wherein the sensor is detecting the
    variation in the levels of the liquid in the main line and in response
    thereto the sensor controls the flow in the bypass or relief.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87.02,  for a self-proportioning and correlating having a liquid level
    sensor.

    101.25+, for a self-proportioning flow system having a liquid level sensor.


CLS 137/115.03
TXT Flow rate responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 115.01 wherein the sensor is detecting the
    variation in the quantity of the fluid flowing in the main flow line in a
    set period of time and in response thereto the sensor controls the flow in
    the bypass or relief.

    (1)     Note. This subclass also includes a flow measurement by a pressure
    differential along the main line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87.03+, for a self-proportioning and correlating system having a flow rate
    sensor.

    107,    for supply and exhaust-type waste valves opening in response to the
    stoppage of the main line flow.

    118.04+,        for flow rate responsive plural outflows.

    215+,   for back flow prevention by vacuum breaking.

    455+,   for line condition responsive valves which respond to a change in
    the flow rate.


CLS 137/115.04
TXT Including controlling main line flow:

    Subject matter under subclass 115.03 wherein the sensor is regulating the
    flow in the main line in response to the variation in the flow rate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    596.12, for supply and exhaust system with bypass.


CLS 137/115.05
TXT Relief or bypass closes as main opens:

    Subject matter under subclass 115.04 wherein the sensor, in response to the
    change in the flow rate, is simultaneously opening a main line valve and
    closing a relief valve in a branch line or vice versa.


CLS 137/115.06
TXT Bypass or relief valve biased open:

    Subject matter under subclass 115.03 comprising a valve means for
    permitting the flow to the bypass or relief valve is held open in absence
    of the flow by a flexibly adjustable device (e.g., a weight of the valve
    body itself, or a spring or such similar flexible means).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115.16+,                for pressure responsive biased open bypass or
    relief valve.


CLS 137/115.07
TXT Pilot valve operated:

    Subject matter under subclass 115.03 comprising an auxiliary valve control
    and wherein the bypass or relief valve is controlled by the auxiliary
    control valve in response to the variation of the flow rate in the main
    line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300,    for a supplemental valve independent of a main valve for
    hydrant-type fluid handling.


CLS 137/115.08
TXT Carried choke:

    Subject matter under subclass 115.03 wherein the sensor is a fluid flow
    restricting element which is an integral part of the bypass or relief valve
    and the element is moving with the bypass or relief valve to restrict the
    flow.


CLS 137/115.09
TXT Choke:

    Subject matter under subclass 115.03 wherein the sensor includes a device
    for restricting the flow of the fluid in the main flow line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclasses 316+ for changeable chokes.


CLS 137/115.1
TXT Variable choke resistance:

    Subject matter under subclass 115.09 wherein the choke is adjustable to
    provide different flow resistances without requiring disassembly of the
    sensor.


CLS 137/115.11
TXT Venturi:

    Subject matter under subclass 115.03 wherein the sensor includes a device
    which is a part of the main flow passage having a cross section of the part
    gradually constricted to a throat between two ends of the part and
    gradually expanded from the throat to the cross section of the passage.

    (1)     Note. The device is used with a pressure tap at the throat and
    another pressure tap at the normal flow passage to register the pressure
    differential at the throat relative to a pressure in the normal passage and
    signals the sensor which in turn exercises the control of the flow in the
    bypass or relief.


CLS 137/115.12
TXT Flapper:

    Subject matter under subclass 115.03 wherein the sensor includes a member
    supported at one end and moving by the momentum of the fluid in the flow
    line to operate the bypass or relief valve.


CLS 137/115.13
TXT Pressure responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 115.01 wherein the sensor is detecting the
    pressure of the fluid

    in the main flow line and in response thereto controls the bypass or relief
    valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118.06+ and 119.08+, for self-controlled pressure responsive plural
    outflows and pressure responsive alternate and substituted plural outflows
    respectively.


CLS 137/115.14
TXT Common sensor for both bypass or relief valve and other branch valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 115.13 comprising an additional valve in
    another flow path and wherein the sensor which controls the bypass or
    relief valve also controls the additional valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    488+,   for fluid pressure-type pilot valves.


CLS 137/115.15
TXT Bypass or relief valve opens as other branch valve closes.

    Subject matter under subclass 115.14 wherein the sensor opens the bypass or
    relief valve in the main line while it closes the additional valve in the
    main line or vice versa.


CLS 137/115.16
TXT Bypass or relief valve biased open:

    Subject matter under subclass 115.13 wherein the bypass or relief passage
    is held open in absence of the fluid pressure by a flexibly adjustable
    device (e.g., a weight of the valve body itself, or a spring, or such
    similar flexible means).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115.06, for flow rate responsive biased open bypass or relief valve.


CLS 137/115.17
TXT Increasing pressure progressively closes then reopens bypass or relief
    valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 115.16 wherein the increase in the fluid
    pressure progressively closes the bypass or relief valve and reopens at
    still higher pressure.


CLS 137/115.18
TXT Bypass or relief valve responsive to pressure downstream of outlet valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 115.13 wherein the outlet branch includes a
    valve which is located before the bypass or relief valve and the bypass or
    relief valve is controlled by the fluid pressure between the outlet valve
    and the bypass or relief valve.


CLS 137/115.19
TXT Pilot valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 115.18 comprising an auxiliary control valve
    and wherein the bypass or relief valve is controlled by the auxiliary
    control valve in response to the  pressure in the main flow line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    488+,   for a fluid pressure-type pilot control.


CLS 137/115.2
TXT Outlet valve carried by bypass or relief valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 115.18 wherein the outlet valve is an
    integral part of the bypass or relief valve and the outlet valve moves with
    the bypass or relief valve.

    (1)     Note. The outlet valve in this subclass is located between the
    pressure sensor and the bypass or relief valve.


CLS 137/115.21
TXT Plural sensors for single bypass or relief valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 115.13 comprising at least two pressure
    sensors for controlling either the bypass or relief valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115.03+, for a flow responsive bypass or relief valve.


CLS 137/115.22
TXT Sensors interconnected by timing or restrictive orifice:

    Subject matter under subclass 115.21 wherein the pressure sensors are
    connected to each other directly by means of a restrictive passage in order
    that all the sensors react to the same pressure, but with a different speed
    of response.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 109+ for fluid
    retarders.


CLS 137/115.23
TXT Pilot valve operated:

    Subject matter under subclass 115.13 comprising an auxiliary control valve
    and wherein the bypass or relief valve is controlled by the


    auxiliary control valve in response to the  pressure in the main flow line.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115.07, for a pilot valve responsive to a fluid flow rate.


CLS 137/115.24
TXT Mechanical movement between sensor and valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 115.13 wherein the sensor and the bypass or
    relief valve are so interconnected that the sensor is moving at a different
    rate and in different direction than the movement of the bypass or relief.


CLS 137/115.25
TXT Electrical control:

    Subject matter under subclass 115.13 comprising an electrical element and
    wherein the sensor controls the bypass or relief by means of the electrical
    element.


CLS 137/115.26
TXT Sensor rigid with valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 115.13 wherein the sensor is either (a)
    assembled as an integral part of the bypass or relief valve, or (b)
    attached inflexibly to the bypass or relief valve.


CLS 137/115.27
TXT Flexible sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 115.26 wherein the sensor is constructed of a
    thin pliable or resilient material such as used in a diaphragm or bellows
    or the like.


CLS 137/115.28
TXT Pressure responsive outlet valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 115.26 comprising a valve on the outlet
    branch and wherein the valve is responsive to a pressure being sensed in
    the outlet branch.


CLS 137/116.3
TXT Devices under subclass 115 with a correlated fluid pressure responsive
    regulator or pressure reducing valve controlling the inlet branch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    505.11, for pressure regulators with independently operable relief valves.


CLS 137/116.5
TXT Devices under subclass 116.3 in which a common sensing means for both inlet
    control and relief control has a valve controlled outlet or relief passage.


CLS 137/118.01
TXT Plural outflows:

    Subject matter under subclass 109 comprising a sensor and wherein the flow
    is from a single source and is divided in to a plurality of paths which the
    flow may take to separate destinations and the flow is controlled by the
    sensor in response to the change in the condition (e.g., fluid level, flow
    rate, or pressure, or the like), or a  characteristic of the fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98+,    for plural flow systems with mutual control devices.

    115.01+,        for branch flow systems in which a bypass is controlled in
    response to a change in condition.

    455+,   for pressure relief valve which may be mounted on the side of the
    flow line in which there is no branched flow characteristics claimed.

    861+,   for nonautomatic distribution systems having a plurality of
    controlled outflows.


CLS 137/118.02
TXT Single actuator operates plural outlets simultaneously:

    Subject matter under subclass 118.01 comprising an outlet valve in each
    outflow and wherein the outlet valves are opened or closed at the same time
    by only one sensor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    625+,   for noncorrelated multiway valves.

    862+,   for plural outlet valves controlled by a single operator without
    correlation control.


CLS 137/118.03
TXT Biased open isolation valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 118.01 comprising an outlet valve in each
    outflow and wherein each outlet valve is held open in the absence of a
    fluid pressure by a flexibly adjustable device (e.g., a weight of the valve
    body itself, or a spring) and at least one valve closes in response to a
    sudden pressure drop or flow increase in the outlet line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    458     through 466, for valves on a single line (one inlet and one outlet)
    serving the same purpose, but requiring reset.

    498     and 517+, for valves on a single line that are biased open and shut
    when the downstream line has a sudden pressure drop.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    303,    Fluid-Pressure Brake and Analogous Systems, subclass 84.2 for a
    flow retarding isolation valves.


CLS 137/118.04
TXT Flow rate responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 118.01 wherein the sensor is detecting a
    change in the quantity of the fluid flowing in the main line in a set
    period of time and in response thereto controls the outflows.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115.03+,        for bypass or relief controlled by the flow rate in
    self-controlled branch flow system.


CLS 137/118.05
TXT Primer valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 118.04 wherein the change in the   fluid flow
    rate in the main line actuates an outlet leading to a liquid trap seal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247+,   for liquid trap seals or liquid valves.


CLS 137/118.06
TXT Pressure responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 118.01 wherein the sensor detects a change in
    the fluid pressure in the main line and in response thereto controls the
    outflows.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115.13+,        for a similar device controlling a bypass or relief valve.

    119.08+,        for self-controlled pressure responsive alternately or
    successively substituted plural outflows.


CLS 137/118.07
TXT With external control for correlating valve (e.g., manual):

    Subject matter under subclass 118.06 wherein, in addition to the pressure
    responsive sensor, the outflows are controlled by a device independent of
    the condition of the flow line.

    (1)     Note. Modifiers which merely vary the loading are not deemed to
    constitute external control means within this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    481,    for suction controlled valves which are manually modified or
    adjusted.

    522+,   for direct response valves in combination with external means for
    opposing the closing bias.

    613+,   for system comprising plural valves arranged in series in the
    flowline wherein manual or external means operate one valve to produce a
    change in the condition in the flowline  in order to utilize such changed
    condition to effect  automatic operation of the other valve in the flowline.


CLS 137/119.01
TXT Alternately or successively substituted outflow:

    Subject matter under subclass 118.01 wherein (a) the fluid is flowing first
    through one outlet and then changed to another  outlet, or (b) more than
    two outlets are substituted for each other in sequence; in response to the
    change in the condition or characteristic of the main line flow detected by
    the sensor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160+,   for plural feed traps alternately filled and alternately discharged
    by gas pressure.

    625+,   for multiway valve unit actuation which is not responsive to a
    change in condition.


CLS 137/119.02
TXT Four port reversing valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 119.01 including a four way valve having an
    inlet port, an outlet port and two intermediate ports, the valve being
    selectively movable into two positions, in one position the inlet port
    being connected to the first intermediate port and the second intermediate
    port being connected to the outlet port, and in the other position the
    inlet port being connected to the second intermediate port and the first
    intermediate port being connected to the outlet port.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    309+,   for reversing valves in connection with a regenerative type of
    furnace.

    625.43, for four port reversing valve not of the correlating type.


CLS 137/119.03
TXT Responsive to pressure or flow interruption:

    Subject matter under subclass 119.01 comprising a valve and wherein the
    alternately or successively substituted outflow is controlled by the valve
    in response to a break in the pressure of the fluid or a break in the flow
    of the fluid being detected by the sensor.


CLS 137/119.04
TXT Plural outlets control with automatic reset:

    Subject matter under subclass 119.03 wherein the valve is regulating more
    than one outlet; said valve opens one outlet in response to the pressure or
    flow interruption and closes that outlet and opens another outlet when the
    pressure or flow is restored.

    (1)     Note. The valves in this subclass are diverter valves that operate,
    for example, when a valve in a rinse sprayer is manually opened.


CLS 137/119.05
TXT Manually set to a single outflow position:

    Subject matter under subclass 119.03 wherein the sensor causes the valve to
    move from a first position to a second position to open or close one
    outlet, but the valve is moved back to the first position by an application
    of a force exerted by a living being.


CLS 137/119.06
TXT Flow rate responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 119.01 wherein the alternately or
    successively substituted outflow is responsive to a change in the amount of
    fluid flowing in the flow line in a set period of time being detected by
    the sensor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87.03+, for a flow rate responsive bypass or relief.

    118.04+,        for flow rate responsive plural outflows.


CLS 137/119.07
TXT Flow sensing turbine:

    Subject matter under subclass 119.06 wherein the sensor comprising a member
    pivoted for oscillation or rotation, and having blades, vanes or surfaces
    which are exposed to the flow and rotating or tending to rotate the member.


CLS 137/119.08
TXT Pressure responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 119.01 wherein the change in the condition is
    a fluid pressure detected by the sensor for controlling the alternately or
    successively substituted outflow of the fluid in the main flow line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87.04,  for a pressure differential sensor controlling the flow.

    118.06+,        for pressure responsive plural outflows.


CLS 137/119.09
TXT Responsive to outlet pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 119.08 wherein in response to the change in
    the fluid pressure in the outlet branch the sensor controls the outflow of
    the fluid.


CLS 137/119.1
TXT Electrical control:

    Subject matter under subclass 119.01 comprising an electrical element and
    wherein the sensor controls the outlet by means of the electrical element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    596.16, for an electric pilot-actuated supply and exhaust system.


CLS 137/120
TXT Systems under subclass 119 in which the control of the flow is in response
    to a filling of a separate or auxiliary tank of the gravitating or float
    operating type.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the patents in this subclass are drawn to rain
    spouts in which the initial flow is wasted to remove dirt before the rain
    water is fed to the cistern or storage vessel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    386+,   for other liquid level responsive flow control, especially subclass
    408 for gravitating tank devices and subclasses 409+ for float operated
    valves, and see the search notes to subclasses 386, 403, 408, and 409.


CLS 137/121
TXT Systems under subclass 119 in which the control of the flow is in response
    to a filling of a tank or receivers receiving fluid from an outflow of the
    system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115.01+, for by-pass control in response to a change in main line condition.

    386+,   for other liquid level responsive flow control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 198+ for filling devices controlled by the quantity in a
    separable receiver.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 56 for delivery from a dispenser controlled by
    the quantity in a discharging receiver.


CLS 137/122
TXT Systems under subclass 121 in which the filling of the tank or receiver is
    sensed by means of a float.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    386+,   particularly subclasses 397, 398+ and 409+ for other flow control
    responsive to a float, and see the search notes to subclass 409.


CLS 137/123
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having a flow passage comprising two
    branches or legs of unequal effective length by which a liquid can be
    transferred to a lower level over an intermediate elevation by the pressure
    of the atmosphere in forcing the liquid up the shorter branch or leg
    immersed in it while the excess of weight of the liquid in the longer
    branch (when once filled) causes a continuous flow.

    (1)     Note.  This group of subclasses is directed to the siphon
    subcombination, i.e., the siphon element, per se, and this element
    associated with supply and/or receiver chambers and/or such other adjuncts
    as are commonly found in this class combined with the basic subject matter
    of the class.  Patents for combinations of siphons with other art devices
    are classified with the art device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    591,    for tanks with internally extending inverted U passage, which are
    not intended to operate as siphons even though of the proper design for it.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 368+ for water
    closet flushing tanks having an outlet siphon and subclasses 421+ for
    siphon bowls.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 230 for siphon tube filling of separable receivers, and see the
    search notes thereto.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 204 for dispenser type siphons with external
    starting means and subclass 416 for dispensing siphons, per se.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 237+ for liquid developer applied to
    a latent image within an electrophotographic device.


CLS 137/124
TXT Apparatus under subclass 123 including a plurality of siphons.


CLS 137/125
TXT Apparatus under subclass 124 in which the siphons are connected to the
    compartments of a tank truck to discharge the liquid contained therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    267,    for tank trucks having a plurality of compartments with manifold or
    grouped outlets arranged for parallel flow.

    899+,   for vehicle supported fluent material handling systems, and see the
    search notes to subclasses 351 and 899.


CLS 137/126
TXT Apparatus under subclass 124 in which the plural siphons operate
    successively to produce plural discharges from the same or from different
    supply chambers.  Means are usually provided whereby the termination of the
    discharge of one of the siphons initiates the discharge of a subsequently
    operated siphon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    627,    627.5 and 628+, for sequentially actuated valves, and see the
    search notes thereto.


CLS 137/127
TXT Apparatus under subclass 126 in which at least some of the siphons are
    supplied from different chambers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256+,   for sequentially filled and emptied plural tanks in parallel
    relation.


CLS 137/128
TXT Apparatus under subclass 124 having a main siphon through which the major
    portion of the fluid is discharged and an auxiliary siphon which operates
    to start or stop fluid flow through the main siphon, or, after discharge of
    the main siphon, restores some or all of the main siphon operating means to
    a position permitting a subsequent discharge.

    (1)     Note.  In series arrangements of plural tanks and siphons wherein
    one siphon discharges into a tank which is emptied by a second siphon, the
    first siphon is not regarded as a starter for the second when discharge of
    the second siphon results merely upon accumulation of sufficient fluid in
    the tank to permit such discharge, and patents for this subject matter are
    not included in this or the indented subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132+,   for periodic siphons, or those which discharge as often as a supply
    sufficient for starting is accumulated.

    142+,   for other siphon starting means.


CLS 137/129
TXT Apparatus under subclass 128 having a float which fills with liquid and
    sinks to initiate discharge through the main siphon, the auxiliary siphon
    then emptying the float.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404,    for liquid level responsive control means comprising a sinking or
    bucket type float, and see the search notes thereto.

    427,    for float controlled valves with float leakage disposal.


CLS 137/130
TXT Apparatus under subclass 123 having a receiver for the discharge of the
    siphon, the siphon discharge being controlled by a condition in the
    receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121,    for self correlating systems controlled by a filled receiver.

    453+,   for liquid level maintaining systems including barometric control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 230 for siphon tube filling of separable receivers, and see the
    search notes thereto.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 56 for automatic control of dispensing by the
    quantity in a receiver which is also discharging.


CLS 137/131
TXT Apparatus under subclass 130 in which a float responsive to a condition in
    the receiver controls discharge of the siphon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135+,   for siphon discharge controlled by float means responsive to liquid
    accumulation in the system.

    409+,   for float operated valves of general utility, and see the search
    notes to subclass 409.


CLS 137/132
TXT Apparatus under subclass 123 having means responsive to a condition or
    characteristic of the fluid in the system whereby the siphon is caused to
    discharge at recurrent intervals, i.e., as often as a certain level of tank
    contents is reached.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130+,   for apparatus in which siphon discharge is controlled by a
    condition in a receptacle into which the siphon discharges.

    396+,   for self-emptying tanks of other types which empty in response to
    liquid level as often as filled, and see the search notes to subclass 396.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 222 and 226 for tank type meters
    with siphon discharge.


CLS 137/133
TXT Apparatus under subclass 132 having means whereby the siphon may be
    discharged either by manual operation or by a condition or characteristic
    of the fluid in the system, the manual control being either auxiliary to
    the automatic or the control being convertible from one type to the other.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition, section 3 for search notes on
    combined automatic and nonautomatic controls in this and related classes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    269+,   for convertible fluid handling systems.


CLS 137/134
TXT Apparatus under subclass 132 having an additional accumulation receptacle
    arranged to discharge recurrently into the siphon chamber, such recurrent
    discharge initiating discharge of the siphon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142+,   for other siphon starting means.


CLS 137/135
TXT Apparatus under subclass 132 having a float responsive to the accumulation
    of liquid in the siphon chamber in which the float actuates means for
    admitting liquid to the siphon element to initiate liquid flow there
    through.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    409+,   for float controlled valves of general utility, and see the search
    notes to subclass 409.


CLS 137/136
TXT Apparatus under subclass 132 in which the liquid accumulating in the siphon
    chamber traps air in the siphon element and means is provided to release
    such trapped air to initiate liquid flow through the siphon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143,    for siphon venting or breaking.

    144,    for removal of the air which accumulates in siphons during use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 369+ for water
    closet flush tanks having an outlet siphon which is prevented from
    discharging until air is positively release therefrom.


CLS 137/137
TXT Apparatus under subclass 136 in which the trapped air releasing means is
    actuated by a float responsive to accumulation of liquid in the siphon
    system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202     and 213+, for liquid level responsive vents for gas in diverse
    fluid containing pressure systems.

    409+,   for float operated valves of general utility and see the search
    notes to subclass 409.

    583+,   for distribution systems having a gas vent and other flow passages,
    and see the search notes to subclasses 583 and 587.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 69 for float operated vents in dispensers.


CLS 137/138
TXT Apparatus under subclass 136 in which the trapped air releasing means
    comprises a liquid trap seal, which may be formed by suitable configuration
    of the discharge end of the siphon element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247+,   for combinations of liquid trap seals with fluid distribution
    apparatus other than siphons, and see the search notes to subclass 247.


CLS 137/139
TXT Apparatus under subclass 138 in which the air releasing seal comprises a
    second liquid trap seal in addition to the air trapping seal necessarily
    present at the discharge end of the siphon element.


CLS 137/140
TXT Apparatus under subclass 123 combined with a strainer, filter, separator or
    sediment trap.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    544+,   for other fluid distribution apparatus combined with means for
    separating solid material from the fluid, and see the search notes to
    subclass 544.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 416.1+ for filter
    means of that class (210) combined with means providing a suction.


CLS 137/141
TXT Apparatus under subclass 123 combined with a recorder, register, signal,
    indicator or inspection window.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    551+,   for other fluid distribution apparatus combined with the listed
    devices, and see the search notes to subclass 551.


CLS 137/142
TXT Apparatus under subclass 123 having means for applying pressure to
    initiate, stop or maintain liquid flow, to vent air for starting, stopping
    or maintaining siphon flow, or for controlling the flow by opening, closing
    or variably restricting the main flow path of the siphon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128+,   for siphons with auxiliary starting siphon.

    130+,   for siphon discharge controlled by the receiver.

    132+,   for periodic discharging or level responsive siphons.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 204 for dispenser siphons with auxiliary
    starting means and subclass 416 for dispenser siphons.


CLS 137/143
TXT Apparatus under subclass 142 in which the siphon is provided with means for
    stopping or regulating the flow through the siphon by admitting air into
    the siphon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151,    for apparatus including siphons having a valve or closure for
    controlling the flow of liquid therethrough.

    215+,   for apparatus for preventing reverse flow siphoning action in
    apparatus not normally operating by siphon action.

    583+,   for distributing systems including a gas vent and at least one
    other flow opening, and see the search notes to subclasses 583 and 587.


CLS 137/144
TXT Apparatus under subclass 142 having means for removing air which
    accumulates in the siphon while it is discharging liquid, such means
    comprising a positively acting eductor connected at one or more high points
    of a siphon and having either a separate or a line jet operated pumping
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136+,   for release of trapped air to start a siphon of the periodic type.

    143,    for siphon venting means which operate to reduce or stop the flow
    in the siphon.


CLS 137/145
TXT Apparatus under subclass 142 in which pressure either of liquid or a
    displacing gas is developed in that part of the system which holds the
    material into which the inlet end of the siphon dips to fill the siphon and
    start the flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130,    for siphons started by controlling the position or pressure
    condition of the receiver.

    206+,   for gas pressure displacement of a liquid, and see the search notes
    to subclass 206.

    565+,   for distribution systems having a pump as part thereof, and see the
    search notes to subclass 565.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclass 375 for water
    displacer starters for siphons in water closet tanks.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 204 for siphons combined with discharge
    assistants in dispensers.


CLS 137/146
TXT Apparatus under subclass 142 in which a movable siphon is provided with an
    enlarged entrance chamber whereby when the chamber end is rapidly
    introduced into the supply a surge of fluid through the line results, which
    fills the siphon and initiates flow.


CLS 137/147
TXT Apparatus under subclass 142 in which the means comprises a pump mounted in
    or on the siphon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    565+,   for distribution systems with pumps, and see the search notes to
    subclass 565.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 42+ for siphon
    starters for water closet tanks.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 204 for siphons with pump or other discharge
    assistant type starter.


CLS 137/148
TXT Apparatus under subclass 147 in which the pump includes a piston.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclass 373 for water closet
    flushing tanks having a siphon outlet which is started by a piston or its
    equivalent.


CLS 137/149
TXT Apparatus under subclass 148 in which the piston is moved in the flow
    passage of the siphon.


CLS 137/150
TXT Apparatus under subclass 147 in which the pump comprises a collapsible bulb.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 209 for collapsible bulb fluid pressure
    generators in dispensers.


CLS 137/150.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 142 in which the siphon is movably mounted so that
    the inlet end comes into contact with the supply chamber wall when flow is
    cut off, the contact either operating a valve or directly blocking flow
    through the siphon.


CLS 137/151
TXT Apparatus under subclass 142 having a flow controlling stopping means which
    comprises a valve or closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131,    for float-operated valves in receivers controlling the discharge of
    siphons.

    135,    for float-operated valves for inlets to siphons of the level
    responsive type.


CLS 137/152
TXT Apparatus under subclass 123 in which the siphon is provided with means for
    mounting and/or positioning it relative to the chamber from which liquid is
    supplied to the siphon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 416 for dispensing siphons, per se.


CLS 137/153
TXT Apparatus under subclass 123 comprising the siphon passage forming means,
    per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 416 for dispenser siphons, per se.


CLS 137/154
TXT Apparatus under the class definition which contain under pressure a
    plurality of fluids having diverse characteristics such as fluid phase
    (i.e., gas and liquid) or specific gravity, and which fluids are in contact
    in at least a part of the system.

    (1)     Note.  The pressure need not exist continuously in the system, but
    must be present at least some of the time.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not include systems in which diverse
    fluids as steam and water are utilized merely for heating purposes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241,    for steam sterilization in fluid handling systems.

    246,    for liquid supplied at a valve interface, which liquid may be
    different from the fluid handled in the system.

    334+,   for gas and liquid containing systems for heating, as by mixing
    steam and water.  See Note (1) above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 394+ for dispensers with fluid pressure
    discharge assistants, and see the search notes to subclass 394.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 237+ for liquid developer applied to
    a latent image within an electrophotographic device.


CLS 137/155
TXT Apparatus under subclass 154 which controls a gas to be injected or
    introduced into the liquid column of well to elevate the liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclass 109 for aerated column type pumps combined with
    valve means for a controlling a gas inlet.


CLS 137/156
TXT Apparatus under subclass 154 which includes a receiving chamber which holds
    a liquid for subsequent discharge to a receiver at a higher pressure, which
    discharge is controlled or enabled by the controlled application of a gas
    pressure over the liquid equal to or greater than the pressure to which the
    liquid is discharged.

    (1)     Note.  The discharge may be to a closed receiver at higher pressure
    than the trap filling pressure, which may be at atmospheric pressure, or
    the discharge may be to atmosphere or an open receiver from a vacuum system.

    (2)     Note.  A feed or discharge trap in the fluid handling art is an
    auxiliary chamber which collects or portions out a separated quantity of
    fluid which is to be added to or removed from the quantity in the container
    to which it is auxiliary.  It may discharge the separated quantity or
    merely make it accessible.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177+,   for gas traps which may utilize internal uncontrolled pressure for
    liquid discharge.

    206+,   for gas pressure discharge of non feed trap type containers.

    571+,   for plural tanks or compartments connected for serial flow, and see
    the search notes to subclass 571.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 451+ for feed-traps of
    particular application to boilers.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 118+ for liquid pumping by supplying or
    exhausting gaseous motive fluid to or from a liquid pumping chamber.


CLS 137/157
TXT Feed-traps under subclass 156 wherein the application of gas pressure is
    controlled by the amount of liquid in the discharge receiving receptacle,
    as the boiler.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130+,   for siphon discharge controlled by the receiver.

    205,    for liquid filling by evacuating a container and see the search
    notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 39+ for diverse fluid containing pressure filling systems
    wherein the filling means is controlled by the gas condition in the
    receiver.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 56 for automatic dispensing controlled by the
    quantity in a discharging receiver.


CLS 137/158
TXT Feed-traps under subclass 157 which include a gas pressure connection at
    the desired liquid level in the discharging receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    393,    for level controlled valves having a control fluid connection at
    the desired liquid level in nonpressure systems.


CLS 137/159
TXT Feed-traps under subclass 156 wherein the application of gas pressure is
    controlled by the amount of liquid in the feed-trap chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183+    and 199+, for fluid responsive valves in fluid separating traps in
    diverse fluid containing pressure systems.


CLS 137/160
TXT Feed-traps under subclass 159 which include a plurality of trap chambers.

    (1)     Note.  The plural trap chambers may be arranged serially or in
    parallel, as for alternating use.


CLS 137/161
TXT Feed-traps under subclass 160 wherein alternately acting feed traps are
    moved by gravity to discharge their contents and the lowering of one trap
    raises the other trap.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403+,   for liquid level responsive or maintaining control systems operated
    by the weight of accumulated fluid, especially subclass 408 for
    accumulation in the gravitating tank, and see the search notes to
    subclasses 403 and 408.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclass 90 for weighing apparatus in which
    alternating weight chambers control flow of the material being weighed.


CLS 137/162
TXT Feed-traps under subclass 159 wherein liquid accumulates in a vessel which
    lowers by gravity upon the accumulation of a predetermined amount of liquid
    therein to control the admission of gas pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189+,   for separating traps of the gravitating type in diverse fluid
    containing pressure systems.

    408,    for liquid level responsive devices of the gravitating tank type,
    and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 137/163
TXT Feed-traps under subclass 162 wherein the vessel is an open-topped float
    which floats in liquid and sinks when filled with liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404,    for sinking floats in liquid level responsive or maintaining
    systems, and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 137/164
TXT Feed-traps under subclass 162 wherein the vessel is pivoted and a fluid
    passage is provided through the pivot.


CLS 137/165
TXT Feed-traps under subclass 159 wherein the gas pressure application is
    controlled by a float in the feed-trap chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    192+    and 202, for float responsive fluid separating traps and vents in
    diverse fluid containing pressure systems.

    409+,   for float operated valves of general utility, and see the search
    notes to subclass 409.


CLS 137/166
TXT Feed-traps under subclass 165 wherein a valve in the liquid flow line to or
    from the trap is actuated by a distinct positively acting mechanism in
    conjunction with the float control of the gas inlet.

    (1)     Note.  Self actuating valves such as check valves are not
    "positively" actuated.

    (2)     Note.  See the class definition, section 3 for search notes on
    automatic valves combined with other actuating means.


CLS 137/167
TXT Feed-traps under subclass 165 which are not provided with a gas outlet, as
    the gas applied to discharge the trap is in the form of a readily condensed
    vapor such as steam which condenses to eliminate the gas pressure after
    discharge to allow subsequent filling of the trap.


CLS 137/168
TXT Feed-traps under subclass 165 provided with gas inlet and outlet valves
    which are integrally mounted on a single actuating stem.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition, section 4 for search notes on
    plural valves in the fluid handling systems of this and related classes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    411,    for liquid level responsive or maintaining systems in which plural
    valves are controlled by one float.


CLS 137/169
TXT Feed-traps under subclass 156 wherein the gas pressure application to the
    feed-traps controlled by manual or cyclic means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    631+,   for cyclic actuation of valves, and see the search notes to
    subclass 631.


CLS 137/170
TXT Feed traps under subclass 169 wherein the feed trap is moved into discharge
    relationship with the receiver for discharge and the controlling gas
    pressure is the pressure in the discharge receiver which may enable
    discharge of the liquid by the mere flow connection of the trap chamber to
    the receiver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 636 for fluid flow discharge from a movable
    trap chamber and subclasses 344+ for dispensers with movable trap chambers.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclasses 63+ for material intake into
    a fluid current conveyor and comprising successively registering pockets.


CLS 137/170.1
TXT Apparatus under subclass 154 in which the fluids comprise a liquid and a
    gas which has been intentionally and desirably entrained in the liquid to
    form a mixture which is subject to frothing under certain conditions and
    having means for preserving or modifying the pressure of gas in the
    mixture, thereby controlling the amount of froth released, retained or
    formed in the handling of the mixture.

    (1)     Note.  Disclosures of froth or foam control functions for
    structures of general utility in the fluid handling arts does not result in
    classification in this or the indented subclasses unless there is a claimed
    disclosure of a combination of handling features which specialize the
    overall apparatus to a foam controlling function and for which no suitable
    general classification exists elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.5,   for methods of controlling foam in handling carbonated liquids.

    206+,   for gas pressure storage over or displacement of liquids in diverse
    fluid containing pressure systems, and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 137/170.2
TXT Apparatus under subclass 170.1 having means for sensing a force exerted by
    the mixture or of either of its component parts, or means for sensing a
    fluid level, such means causing operation of a control device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    386+,   for liquid level responsive or maintaining systems of general
    application.


CLS 137/170.3
TXT Apparatus under subclass 170.1 having means apart from the mixture handling
    means for treating or disposing of the froth while it remains in the frothy
    state either by discharging said froth, by extracting liquid from it, or by
    storing or retaining it in a separate chamber.

    (1)     Note.  Structures involving foam control within the meaning of
    subclass 170.1 have been placed in this subclass where the claimed
    structure includes a passageway for the discharge of foam on the basis of
    the applicant's disclosure that foam is so discharged rather than gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170.4+, for similar structures where only liberated gas is separately
    handled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 155+ for degasifying means
    for liquid, per se.


CLS 137/170.4
TXT Apparatus under subclass 170.1 wherein the means for preserving or
    modifying the pressure of the gas includes an enclosed vessel through which
    such fluids pass and in which they are retained for a time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    571+,   for plural tanks or compartments, including traps, connected for
    serial flow.

    613+,   for single flow path devices with serial valves which may comprise
    alternately seated inlet and outlet valves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 424.5+ for dispensers including stationary
    trap chambers, and especially subclass 442 for such arrangements in which a
    vent is provided for the trap chamber.  See also section 11 of the class
    definition of Class 222 for a discussion of the disposition of stationary
    trap chamber structures and for a listing of other classes containing
    similar structures.


CLS 137/170.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 170.4 having means associated with the vessel for
    withdrawing evolved gas from the mixture and means whereby some or all of
    such evolved gas may be returned to the mixture for reentrainment therein
    before being discharged by the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    599+,   for fluid handling means in which the fluid flow is divided into
    parallel flow paths and then recombined.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    devices for contacting liquids and gases, generally.


CLS 137/170.6
TXT Apparatus under subclass 170.4 having conduits or passages so connecting
    portions of the apparatus that the mixture may be directed to a point of
    discharge without passing through the vessel so that it is possible to
    discharge either material which has been held or treated in the vessel,
    material which has not been so treated, or a desired combination of such
    materials.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    599+,   for fluid handling means in which the fluid flow is divided into
    parallel flow paths and then recombined.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 318 for dispensers having means to by-pass or
    to otherwise return the material to the source.


CLS 137/171
TXT Apparatus under subclass 154 which separates and provides for the removal
    of one or more of the diverse fluids from the system.

    (1)     Note.  The material may be collected in an auxiliary chamber or
    trap prior to discharge, or it may be vented directly through a controlled
    or restricted outlet in the system.  In either case, a given discharge
    means is intended to relieve the system of one fluid but not others.

    (2)     Note.  Mere vents for gas in diverse fluid containing pressure
    systems are found in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213+,   for venting gas from the supply stored over or used to displace a
    liquid.

    312+,   for collection of external condensate or drip.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 125 for
    liquid removal devices for steam drying apparatus.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, for apparatus for gas separation, per
    se, particularly subclasses 155+ for degasifying means for liquid, per se.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses for
    separation of liquids from liquids or solids.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, appropriate
    subclasses, especially subclasses 41 and 53-60 for thermally operated or
    responsive traps or vents in fluid handling system for automatic
    temperature regulation.


CLS 137/172
TXT Separating traps under subclass 171 wherein the diverse fluids are liquids
    of different specific gravity.

    (1)     Note.  Systems containing diverse fluids which are liquids will be
    found in subclass 154 of this group where discrimination is not involved.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 513+ for liquid
    separating decanters, and see the search notes thereunder.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 62 and 395 for dispensers having a liquid
    pressure fluid for displacing the material to be dispensed.


CLS 137/173
TXT Separating traps under subclass 171 which are provided with plural
    discriminating outlets each of which permits outflow of one fluid and
    prevents outflow of other diverse fluids.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 53 for
    traps having a float controlled liquid outlet and a thermostatic air valve.


CLS 137/174
TXT Separating traps under subclass 173 wherein the outlets are valve
    controlled and the valves have a common actuator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    595,    601, 607, and 862+, for distribution systems having plural valved
    branches with a common operator for two or more valves, and see the search
    notes to subclass 862.


CLS 137/175
TXT Separating traps under subclass 173 wherein one of the discriminating
    outlets is a restricted gas bleed, which by its small size acts or tends to
    act as a discriminating gas outlet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179+,   for a discriminating liquid outlet with a nondiscriminating gas
    vent in a diverse fluid containing pressure system.

    583+,   for distribution systems having a gas vent and at least one other
    flow passage, and see the search notes to subclasses 583 and 587.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 117 for valves having a
    restrictor in parallel flow relation thereto, and subclasses 118+ for
    valves combined with material guides or restrictors, and see the search
    notes to subclass 118.


CLS 137/176
TXT Separating traps under subclass 175 wherein the gas bleed has its inlet
    above the normal maximum liquid level in the trap chamber.


CLS 137/177
TXT Separating traps under subclass 171 wherein the separating trap is provided
    with a discriminating outlet which permits outflow of liquid but prevents
    outflow of gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159+,   for traps having discriminating liquid outlets, the liquid in the
    trap controlling gas pressure application to the trap for discharging the
    liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 66 for empty container cut-offs for dispensers.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 53
    through 60 for temperature responsive liquid separating traps.


CLS 137/178
TXT Separating traps under subclass 177 further provided with a valve
    controlling a trap chamber inlet which is operated alternately with the
    outlet valve.

    (1)     Note.  See the main class definition, section 4 for search notes on
    plural valves in fluid handling systems.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    596+,   for distribution systems having alternately seated stop and waste
    valves, and see the search notes thereto.

    602+,   627.5 and 861+, for other alternately seated valves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 425+, especially subclasses 445+ and 450+
    for dispensers with stationary traps and cut-offs for inlet and outlet,
    which are ordinarily alternately seated.


CLS 137/179
TXT Separating traps under subclass 177 provided with a nondiscriminating gas
    vent, an additional nondiscriminating liquid outlet or an additional
    control of the discriminating liquid outlet, the additional control being
    such as to give a nondiscriminating action to the discriminating outlet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175,    for plural discriminating outlet trap devices in which one outlet
    is a choked or restricted passage gas bleed.

    583+,   for distribution systems with plural openings, one of which is a
    gas vent, and see the search notes to subclasses 583 and 587.


CLS 137/180
TXT Separating traps under subclass 179 wherein the additional liquid outlet or
    additional control of the liquid outlet responds to a system pressure
    either above or below the normal operating pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    493,    for line condition change responsive valves operated by flow in
    either direction, i.e., high or low pressures on either side.


CLS 137/181
TXT Separating traps under subclass 179 wherein the nondiscriminating fluid
    discharge is manually controlled.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition, section 5 for search notes on
    manual valve actuation in this and related classes.


CLS 137/182
TXT Separating traps under subclass 177 further provided with a
    nondiscriminating valve in the trap inlet or a valve providing a by-pass of
    the trap.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    597     and 602+, for distribution systems having multiple inlets with
    multiple and single outlets respectively, and see the search notes to
    subclass 602.

    599+,   for distribution systems including by-passes, and see the search
    notes thereto.


CLS 137/183
TXT Separating traps under subclass 177 wherein the discrimination is obtained
    by an outlet valve which is responsive to a fluid condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    455+,   for line condition change responsive valves of the safety cut-off,
    pop, pressure regulating, safety or check types, and see the notes to
    subclass 455 for search notes on condition responsive valves in this and
    related classes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 53
    through 60 for temperature responsive liquid separating traps in devices
    for automatic temperature regulation.


CLS 137/184
TXT Separating traps under subclass 183 having a plurality of successively
    opened liquid outlet valves.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition, section 4 for search notes on
    plural valves in this and related classes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    628+,   for sequentially progressive actuation of plural valves to opening
    or closing position, and see the search notes to subclass 628.

    861+,   for distribution systems having plural valved branches, and see the
    search notes to subclass 861.


CLS 137/185
TXT Separating traps under subclass 183 wherein the valve closes in response to
    the collection of gas in an open-bottom float.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    409+,   for float operated valves, and see the search notes to subclass 409.


CLS 137/186
TXT Separating traps under subclass 185 wherein the float is located downstream
    from the valve.


CLS 137/187
TXT Separating traps under subclass 183 wherein the valve is controlled by the
    level of liquid in the trap.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159+,   for liquid level control of gas pressure discharge type feed-traps.

    386+,   for liquid level responsive valves for other and general uses, and
    see the search notes to subclass 386.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 64+ for dispensers controlled by material
    level.


CLS 137/188
TXT Separating traps under subclass 187 wherein the valve is responsive to the
    weight or pressure of accumulated liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403+,   for control devices responsive to the weight of accumulated liquid,
    and see the search notes to subclass 403.


CLS 137/189
TXT Separating traps under subclass 188 wherein liquid accumulates in a vessel
    which lowers in response to the weight of the liquid which lowering
    controls the valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161     and 162+, for similar subject matter with a control for applying
    gas pressure to the trap to force the discharge thereof as to a boiler.

    408,    for gravitating tank devices responsive to and controlling liquid
    level, and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 137/190
TXT Separating traps under subclass 189 wherein the vessel is an open-topped
    float which floats in liquid and sinks when filled with liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404,    for liquid level responsive or maintaining systems controlled by a
    sinking or bucket type float, and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 137/191
TXT Separating traps under subclass 190 wherein the float operates a
    servo-mechanism or pilot valve controlled device which in turn operates the
    valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195,    for-servo control with level responsive means of the float type in
    these devices.

    412+,   for-servo relay operation of control in float controlled valves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 25+ for fluid pressure type
    servo-motors for valve actuation, and see the search notes to subclass 25
    and subclasses 129+ for electrical actuators for valves.


CLS 137/192
TXT Separating traps under subclass 187 wherein the level responsive means is a
    float.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    386+,   for liquid level responsive or maintaining systems, especially 409+
    for float controlled valves, and see the search notes to subclasses 386 and
    409.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 67+ for float operated flow controllers in
    dispensers.


CLS 137/193
TXT Separating traps under subclass 192 wherein the trap chamber is provided
    with an inlet for gas and liquid, a discriminating outlet for liquid and a
    nondiscriminating outlet for the main flow of the gas to a gas distribution
    system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173,    for devices having a gas and liquid inlet and discriminating
    outlets for both fluids.

    179,    for devices having a discriminating outlet for liquid and a
    nondiscriminating vent for gases, i.e., one which does not discharge the
    main flow of the material being handled.


CLS 137/194
TXT Separating traps under subclass 192 wherein the discriminating liquid
    outlet pipe rises above the normal liquid level in the trap chamber, thus
    requiring the gas pressure in the chamber to discharge the liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206+,   for diverse fluid containing pressure systems in which gas is used
    as a liquid displacing means, and see the search notes to subclass 206.

    590+,   for distribution systems having internally extending pipes, and see
    the search notes to subclass 590.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 373 for fluid pressure discharge of material
    from a dispenser trap.


CLS 137/195
TXT Separating traps under subclass 192 wherein the liquid outlet valve is
    controlled by a servo mechanism or pilot valve operated means which is in
    turn controlled by the float.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191,    for similar devices in which the level responsive means responds to
    weight or pressure of the accumulated fluid, and see the search notes
    thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 55 for a
    float controlled pilot with a thermostatically controlled trap in automatic
    temperature regulation devices.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 25+ for fluid pressure
    servo-motors for valve actuation, and see the search notes to subclass 25.


CLS 137/196
TXT Separating traps under subclass 192 wherein a plurality of co-acting liquid
    outlet valves are arranged to act in opposition or a single outlet valve is
    provided with opposed surfaces to cancel out the effect of internal
    pressure on the valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 281+ for balanced valves of
    general utility and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 137/197
TXT Separating traps under subclass 171 wherein the trap is provided with an
    outlet through which outflow of a gas is permitted but outflow of a liquid
    or diverse gas therethrough is prevented.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173+,   for diverse fluid containing pressure systems having plural
    discriminating outlets or vents, especially subclasses 175+ for traps
    having a choke or restricted gas bleed.

    213+,   for liquid level responsive gas vents for boilers or other gas
    pressure over liquid devices which may also be utilized as safety or
    warning devices or whistles.

    386,    for liquid level responsive or maintaining devices involving
    hygroscopic means.

    388,    for liquid excluding devices for gas inlets or outlets in systems
    which are not diverse fluid containing pressure systems.

    583+,   for distribution systems having plural passages, one of which is a
    gas vent, and see the search notes to subclasses 583 and 587.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, for apparatus for gas separation, per
    se, particularly subclasses 155+ for degasifying means for liquid, per se.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 69 for float operated controllers for
    dispensing container vents.


CLS 137/198
TXT Separating traps under subclass 197 further provided with a pressure
    responsive valve in the gas outlet which prevents reverse flow or regulates
    the system gas pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    455+,   for line condition change responsive valves, especially subclass
    496 for those having separate reactor surface and closing in response to
    reverse flow, subclass 505 for the pressure regulating type, and subclasses
    511+ for check valves, especially subclasses 517+ for those biased open.


CLS 137/199
TXT Separating traps under subclass 197 wherein the discrimination is obtained
    by an outlet valve which is responsive to a fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183+,   for fluid responsive valves comprising discriminating outlets for
    liquids.

    455+,   for line condition change responsive valves of general types, and
    see the search notes to subclass 455.


CLS 137/200
TXT Separating traps under subclass 199 wherein the valve or an additional
    device functions to stop normally liquid fluid which is vaporized, such as
    steam, in the system.


CLS 137/201
TXT Separating traps under subclass 200 wherein a separate return path is
    provided from the trap to the system for condensed vapor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156+,   for devices of this type where the condensed vapor is returned to a
    boiler or other receivers under higher pressure.


CLS 137/202
TXT Separating traps under subclass 199 wherein the valve is responsive to a
    float member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    192+,   for devices of this type which are discriminating for liquids.

    409+,   for float controlled valves, and see the search notes to subclass
    409.


CLS 137/203
TXT Separating traps under subclass 171 wherein the provision for removal of a
    fluid from the system is a nondiscriminating liquid outlet.

    (1)     Note.  Nondiscriminating outlets for gas in systems of this type
    have been placed in the subclass under which this subclass is indented.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179+,   for systems of this type having both discriminating and
    nondiscriminating outlets for liquid.

    861+,   for distribution systems having plural valved outlets, and see the
    search notes to subclass 861.


CLS 137/204
TXT Separating traps under subclass 203 wherein the outlet empties the system
    of liquid of its own volition, as when the system pressure is removed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183+    and 199+, for fluid responsive valves in diverse fluid containing
    pressure systems.

    396+,   for self-emptying tanks which are level responsive.


CLS 137/205
TXT Apparatus under subclass 154 providing means whereby a container may be
    filled with a liquid by evacuating the container either prior to or
    simultaneously with the liquid filling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130+,   for siphon systems with discharge controlling receiver.

    571+,   for distribution systems comprising plural tanks connected for
    series flow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 59+ for filling devices in which a separable receiver is placed
    under vacuum for filling.

    166,    Wells, subclass 165 and the subclasses there noted for receptacles
    used in wells and filled by liquid because the receptacle has been
    evacuated or is filled with air at a pressure lower than the surrounding
    liquid.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 118+ and particularly subclasses 148+ for means
    for pumping a liquid by exhausting a gaseous motive fluid from the liquid
    pump chamber.


CLS 137/205.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 154 including a shunt line having a reservoir
    therein containing a fluid diverse from that in the main line and wherein
    the reservoir material is fed into the main line, without mixing with main
    line material in the reservoir, by main line flow into the shunt due to
    differential pressure along the main line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    268,    for means to entrain a solid material into a fluid handling system
    and see the search notes thereunder.

    564.5,  for a line responsive follower type feeder in a shunt line.


CLS 137/206
TXT Apparatus under subclass 154 wherein a gas under pressure is provided over
    a body of liquid or is utilized to displace a liquid and a definite
    coaction exists between the gas and liquid which affects the system.

    (1)     Note.  The usual purpose for mere storage of gas over liquid is for
    an air cushion or surge eliminating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145,    for application of pressure to liquid in a siphon chamber to
    initiate a flow through a siphon connected thereto.

    156+,   for liquid feed traps utilizing a gas pressure for discharge.

    170.1+, for diverse fluid containing pressure systems in which the fluids
    are in the form of a liquid impregnated with gas and there are means for
    controlling the degree of froth or foam formed in the handling of such
    fluids.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 61+, 258, 261 to 263 and 396+ for dispensers
    with fluid pressure discharge assistants.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 118+ for liquid pumping by supplying or
    exhausting gaseous motive fluid to or from a liquid pumping chamber.


CLS 137/207
TXT Apparatus under subclass 206 wherein the gas is trapped in a dome over a
    liquid from a liquid distribution system to suppress or absorb pressure
    surges in the liquid system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    568     and 593, for surge chambers for distribution systems in which a
    head of liquid supplies the cushion or bias in the system.  The chamber may
    be closed, but air pressure is not relied on for surge suppression.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 26+ for pressure
    compensators for pipes and tubular conduits.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 543+ for expansible chamber type pumps having a
    pulsation damping means of the direct contact compressible fluid type.


CLS 137/207.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 206 in which the liquid in one part of the system
    is allowed to flow back, is forced back, or is by-passed back to the source
    of supply, in order to empty the system for cleaning, storage, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239,    for fluid handling systems of general application having means for
    reversing the normal direction of flow of the fluid for assisting in the
    cleaning of such systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 318 for dispensing devices embodying discharge
    assisting means and having a by-pass or return to supply.


CLS 137/208
TXT Apparatus under subclass 206 wherein a plurality of similarly functioning
    gas pressure over liquid units are provided.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255+,   for fluid handling systems comprising plural tanks with parallel
    outflow, and see the search notes to subclass 225.


CLS 137/209
TXT Apparatus under subclass 206 wherein means are provided to maintain or
    apply the gas pressure over or to the liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145     and 147+, for pressure fluid supply for starting siphons.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 19 for puncturing gas pressure reservoirs for filling dispensers.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 209 for resilient wall fluid pressure
    generating pump or pulsator for dispensers, subclasses 399 for gas pressure
    supplying reservoirs and 401+ for container mounted fluid pressure
    generating pump or pulsator.


CLS 137/210
TXT Apparatus under subclass 209 in which the gas is derived from a liquid not
    necessarily the liquid over which the gas acts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 45.1+ for process and apparatus for
    handling liquefied gas as a commodity including steps or means involving
    pressure or temperature control special to liquefied gas and more than
    required for other liquids under gas pressure.


CLS 137/211
TXT Apparatus under subclass 210 with a device to add or inject gas into the
    liquid of the system to replenish the gas over the liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    carbonators, per se.


CLS 137/211.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 209 including means to apply gas pressure over the
    liquid said means utilizing the pressure of flow of the liquid to apply the
    gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211,    for gas injectors utilizing the pressure or flow of the liquid in
    which the gas is carried into the storage tank by the liquid.


CLS 137/212
TXT Apparatus under subclass 209 wherein the gas pressure inlet and liquid
    outlet have a common mounting adapted for manipulation as a unit for
    positioning or removal from a gas and liquid container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    317+,   for devices for tapping a container under pressure which frequently
    comprise the liquid outlet subcombination of the subject matter under this
    definition.

    594+    and 625.18+, for fluid distribution systems including
    noncommunicating flow paths where one flow path may be for gas and the
    other for liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 394+ for dispensers having fluid pressure
    discharge assistants, especially subclass 399 for those having a gas
    reservoir and subclasses 401+ for those having a pressure generating pump
    mounted on the supply container, and see the search notes to subclass 394.


CLS 137/213
TXT Apparatus under subclass 206 wherein a gas vent or whistle is opened in
    response to a predetermined liquid level.

    (1)     Note.  An example of such apparatus is a low water level steam
    exhaust and signal for a boiler.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    197+,   for discriminating gas outlets or vents which may be liquid level
    responsive.

    386+,   for liquid level responsive or maintaining systems.

    558,    for liquid level indicators involving release of a separate gas for
    their operation, or of internal gas pressure when gas is the only fluid in
    the system.  The use of whistles with gas exhaust devices as found in
    diverse fluid containing pressure systems is so common in the art that no
    cross reference is made of patents involving such subject matter to
    subclass 558. The search note under subclass 558 directs that search be
    made in subclasses 213+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 137+ for whistles, per se.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 39 for audible signals for dispensers and
    subclass 69 for float controlled vents for dispensers.

    446,    Amusement Device:  Toys, subclasses 204+ for a sounding toy
    comprising a whistle.


CLS 137/214
TXT Apparatus under subclass 213 wherein the gas vent or whistle is opened in
    response to a high and low liquid level.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    391,    for liquid level control of both inflow and outflow in a tank.


CLS 137/215
TXT Apparatus under the class definition which stop reverse flow of a liquid in
    a distribution system by preventing or eliminating the vacuum condition
    which would cause the reverse flow, such as a condition which would start
    siphoning.

    (1)     Note.  The normal flow in these systems is not of the siphon type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143,    for breakers in flow devices which are intended to act as siphons.

    441,    for refill pipes which may act as vacuum breakers.

    526,    for vacuum relief valves, per se.

    583+,   for distribution systems having plural openings, one of which is a
    gas vent, and see the search notes to subclasses 583 and 587.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 34 for reverse flow prevention
    in choked pressure type servo motors which actuate valves.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 237+ for liquid developer applied to
    a latent image within an electrophotographic device.


CLS 137/216
TXT Apparatus under subclass 215 wherein the back flow is prevented by an air
    vent or gap in the liquid flow line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143,    for vent type breakers in flow devices which are intended to act as
    siphons.

    583+,   for distribution systems having plural flow passages, one of which
    is a gas vent, and see the search notes to subclasses 583 and 587.


CLS 137/216.1
TXT Apparatus under subclass 216 including a liquid seal means in the liquid
    flow line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247+,   for liquid seals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 211, 218 and 219
    for ventilation of house plumbing or sewers.


CLS 137/216.2
TXT Subject matter under subclass 216.1 including an automatic valve in the
    vent line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217,    for valved vents without a liquid seal means.


CLS 137/217
TXT Apparatus under subclass 216 wherein the air vent is provided with a valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216.2,  for valved vents in a flow line of the instant type including a
    liquid seal.

    526,    for vacuum relief valves, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclass 426 for vented
    siphon bowls.


CLS 137/218
TXT Apparatus under subclass 217 wherein a valve is provided in the liquid flow
    path which operates in conjunction with the air vent valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    861+,   for distribution systems having plural valved flow paths, and see
    the search notes to subclass 861.


CLS 137/219
TXT Flow control devices under the class definition comprising a flow line
    having a contracted portion, a valve seat adjacent said contracted portion
    and an internal coaxial valve part comprising telescoping members, one of
    which is a movable needle or valve head which engages said seat.

    (1)     Note.  These valves are commonly known as Johnson or Larner-Johnson
    valves, and are used principally in water conduits providing for very large
    flow, as in dams and hydraulic installations associated therewith.

    (2)     Note.  In addition to one or two moving valve heads or needles the
    internal part of the device comprises one or more stationary members around
    which flow occurs.  The stationary members may be merely guides for the
    needles or they may complete a pressure chamber arrangement in cooperation
    with the movable member or members, but in either case a flow channel must
    be formed around a stationary member and between it and the wall of the
    flow line; i.e., the parts of the internal device must be surrounded by
    flowing fluid, except for the supports or connections between the
    stationary member and the wall.

    (3)     Note.  The contracted portion of the flow line constitutes a region
    of relatively low fluid pressure, and the usual streamlining of the needle
    or stationary part, or both, provides a balanced or easily controlled valve
    suitable for controlling large flows.

    (4)     Note.  The inner valve element frequently comprises a closed
    top-shaped body having fluid pressure chambers therein, but may comprise
    annular members having annular chambers therebetween, or less streamlined
    forms.  In any form the valve head always lies in an enlarged portion of
    the flow line.

    (5)     Note.  The valve may be operated (1) by fluid pressure derived
    either from the line or from an external source, the expansible chambers
    comprising (a) the telescoping valve body (b) a separate motor within the
    valve body or (c) a mechanical movement connected fluid pressure motor
    external to the line, (2) by mechanical movement or electric motor means
    either within or outside of the flow line; or (3) by combinations of fluid
    pressure operating means and nonfluid operated means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    455+,   for line condition responsive valves of other types.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, appropriate subclasses for valves and
    valve actuation generally, especially subclasses 12+ for fluid actuated or
    retarded valves of other types, and subclasses 123+ for combined valves and
    restrictors in which the valve is located at the point of greatest
    restriction in the line.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 237+ for liquid developer applied to
    a latent image within an electrophotographic device.


CLS 137/220
TXT Flow control devices under subclass 219 in which the valve is actuated in
    response to a change in condition of the fluid handled.

    (1)     Note.  Such devices as pressure regulators and excess or reverse
    flow responsive valves, and combinations of the above with each other or
    with manual or other external controls, are included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    455+,   for line condition responsive valves of other types, especially
    subclasses 485+ for pilot or servo-controlled condition change responsive
    valves.


CLS 137/221
TXT Flow control devices under subclass 219 in which a controlled motor device
    comprising a pilot operated or servo-mechanism is involved, the motor
    device and its pilot or control valve being located within the internal
    part of the valve, i.e., the part comprising the telescoping support and
    the needle or movable valve head lying within the flow passage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 25+ for valve actuation
    involving fluid type pilot or servo type motors, and see the search notes
    to subclass 25.


CLS 137/222
TXT Flow control devices under subclass 221 in which the pilot valve controls a
    passage through the needle or movable part of the valve means internal to
    the flow line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 38+ for choked pressure type
    servo motors for valve actuation in which the pilot valve is  seated in the
    motor or valve element.


CLS 137/223
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising valved inflation stems of
    the type attached to pneumatic tires and analogous inflatable articles,
    including filling and/or relief extensions of such stems, valved filling
    chucks or the type attached to pressure fluid supplying conduits and
    employed to inflate such articles by means of the inflation stems, and
    combinations of such inflation stems and filling chucks.

    (1)     Note.  Relief and filling extensions to be attached to inflation
    stems have means to hold open the valve normally present in such stems.

    (2)     Note. The claiming of a source of supply of inflating fluid by name
    only does not exclude patents otherwise classifiable herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    320+,   for means comprising a tap or other attachable flow conduit which
    can be applied to a container under pressure to open a valve therein for
    transfer of fluids.

    455+,   for line condition change responsive valves, e.g., safety and check
    valves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 89.1 to 89.4 for inflation
    stem closures and caps.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 4 for methods of charging separable receivers with gas, subclass
    38 for filling apparatus for filling tires with gas and liquid, and
    appropriate subclasses for charging tires with gas, comprising in addition
    to the chuck and/or stem a significantly claimed source of supply, means
    for holding or supporting the tire or other Class 141 feature.

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclasses 415+ for tire inflating
    devices combined with vehicle or wheel structure.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 3+ for gas dispensers.


CLS 137/224
TXT Apparatus under subclass 223 having fluid pressure responsive means
    permanently associated therewith for controlling the pressure therein or in
    the inflatable article during the inflating operation or while the
    inflatable article is in use.

    (1)     Note.  If the pressure responsive control device is associated with
    the stem and controls the article in use, it does not interfere with the
    inflation operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230,    for relief valves adapted to be mounted on the end of a
    conventional inflation stem, and not having a filling passage.  See (1)
    Note.

    494+,   particularly subclasses 505+ and 511+ for pressure regulators and
    relief valves of general utility with and without separate reactor
    surfaces, respectively.


CLS 137/224.5
TXT Devices under subclass 224 wherein the fluid is dispensed in successive
    charges until the predetermined pressure is reached.


CLS 137/225
TXT Apparatus under subclass 224 having a diaphragm, bellows or expansible tube
    as the pressure responsive means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    510,    for relief valves of general utility closing in the direction of
    fluid flow and having a reactor surface comprising flexible diaphragm or
    bellows.

    777+,   for expansible chamber devices, per se, and see the notes to
    subclass 777.

    793+,   for diaphragms and bellows, per se, and see the notes to subclass
    793.


CLS 137/226
TXT Apparatus under subclass 224 having inflation and relief valves on a common
    axis.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition, Section 4 for search notes on
    plural valves in this and related classes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228     and 230, for other relief valves associated with inflation stems.

    493+,   for line condition responsive valves of the bi-directional type,
    including plural valves of which one may relieve high pressure and another
    relieve vacuum or reverse pressure.

    505.11, for combined pressure regulators and relief valves of general
    utility.

    512.2,  614.16+, 630+, and 637.2+, for other valves mounted on a common
    axis.


CLS 137/227
TXT Apparatus under subclass 223 having a fluid pressure gauge or indicator
    combined therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224+,   for inflation devices having fluid pressure responsive pressure
    control means in association with a fluid pressure gauge or indicator or
    wherein the pressure responsive means is also a gauge or indicator or part
    thereof.

    557,    for combinations of fluid delivery systems other than inflatable
    article filling chucks or stems with fluid pressure responsive gauges or
    indicators.

    524,    for check and safety valves having means to adjust and indicate the
    setting of the biasing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 146.2+ for fluid pressure gauges
    connected to a tire value stem and mounted on the stem or a vehicle
    carrying the stem and subclasses 700+ for fluid pressure gauges, per se.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 34 for signals, indicators and
    alarms for indicating when tire pressure is different from a desired valve.


CLS 137/228
TXT Apparatus under subclass 227 having means for releasing fluid from the
    article being inflated while the gauge or indicator remains combined with
    the filling chuck and/or stem.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230,    for stem attached relief valves.

    511+,   for relief valves of general utility in which the pressure fluid
    acts directly on the valve head, without separate reactor surfaces.


CLS 137/229
TXT Apparatus under subclass 227 having means whereby the gauge or indicator
    may be selectively placed in or out of communication with the filling
    passage of the chuck or stem.


CLS 137/230
TXT Valved devices under subclass 223 which are adapted to be mounted in the
    end of a conventional pneumatic tire inflation stem to relieve excess
    pressure.

    (1)     Note.  These valves each include a projection which holds the
    conventional valve open when it is in place.

    (2)     Note.  Since these valves do not include an inflow passage, they
    must be removed during inflation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224+,   for tire pressure relief valves integral with tire inflating stems
    and/or chucks, and intended to remain in place during inflation.  See (2)
    Note.

    320+,   for tapping connections to valved containers which are under
    pressure, the connection comprising or carrying means for opening the valve
    after or during the connecting operation.

    494+    and 511+, for relief valves with and without separate reactor
    surfaces, respectively some of which are disclosed for use with inflatable
    articles.


CLS 137/231
TXT Apparatus under subclass 223 having significant structure for connecting a
    filling chuck to an inflation stem, or an inflation stem to a second
    inflation stem or filling tube, the second stem or tube usually being
    permanently associated with a tire.

    (1)     Note.  The mere statement that a chuck or stem is screw threaded or
    flanged for coupling is not regarded as significant coupling structure for
    this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    614.02+ and 614.05, for a valve operated by coupling motion of the flow
    path sections.

    798+,   for nonvalved couplings joining two or more flow lines in fluid
    connecting relation, and see the search notes to subclass 798.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 383+ for couplings between a separable dispenser and receiver,
    and see the search notes to subclass 223 of this class (137).

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 142+ for a valve associated
    with a flow path, particularly subclasses 149+ wherein the valve is
    operated by the act of joining flow path sections.


CLS 137/232
TXT Apparatus under subclass 223, usually of the inflation stem type, having a
    cap or closure for protecting and/or sealing the end thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    800,    for closures associated with devices of this class, and see the
    search notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, appropriate subclasses, for closures
    of the type provided for, and see the search notes thereto in section IV
    for the loci of closures in other classes.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 89.1 to 89.4 for inflation
    stem type closures and plugs.


CLS 137/233
TXT Apparatus under subclass 232 in which the cap is provided with means for
    actuating, locking in place, or assembling a valve located in an inflation
    stem.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315+,   for repair, tapping or assembly means of general fluid handling
    types.

    613+,   for a flow path with serial valves and/or closures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclass 431 for combined valve stem
    caps and tools, the tool usually being employed to manipulate a valve in
    the stem.


CLS 137/234
TXT Apparatus under subclass 233 in which the valve which is actuated, locked
    or assembled is seated by manual manipulation.

    (1)     Note.  The valve may also be provided with biasing means tending to
    seat it.


CLS 137/234.5
TXT Devices under subclass 223 comprising one or more valve heads and their
    cooperating seats formed in a sleeve or similar structural unit which is
    removable as such from a tire stem.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    283+    and 454.2+, for similar structure removable from other fluid
    handling devices.


CLS 137/234.6
TXT Fluid handling system under the class definition combined with means for
    supporting, guiding or confining a vehicle relative to fluid handling means
    which supples a fluid to the vehicle, e.g., lubricant or fuel.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are a fluid system which services
    vehicles, which system has a defined relationship to an area or body of
    land or water or a vehicle support or guide even though a nozzle or
    metering device such as those used in a Class 141, 222 or 239 system is
    defined.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236,    for other fluid handling systems involving geographic features.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 169.1+ for a
    building defined as having a specific relationship to the adjacent terrain,
    and subclass 174 for a static structure, combined with a defined traffic
    confining or directing feature wherein no fluid handling feature is defined.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 260 for such apparatus related to the
    terrain.

    184,    Lubrication, particularly subclass 1.5 for an automobile gear and
    crank case system having means specifically related to the crank case.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 170 for such a system
    having defined features related to the terrain.

    222,    Dispensing, for a dispensing device with a casing or support not
    related to a guide or support for a vehicle being serviced.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 237+ for liquid developer applied to
    a latent image within an electrophotographic device.


CLS 137/236.1
TXT DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS INVOLVING GEOGRAPHIC FEATURES:

    Fluid handling systems under the class definition including or specifically
    related to a particular geographic feature, e.g., a hill, river, ocean
    shore, city street, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Mere location of a fluid handling system or a portion
    thereof below the surface of the ground is not sufficient for inclusion in
    this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The geographic feature may be either natural or artificial,
    but must be a clearly defined area on or below the surface of the earth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272+,   for hydrant type devices including water cranes, which usually have
    a connection to a water main and a valve located below the surface of the
    ground.  See (1) Note, above.

    363+,   for casings for fluent material handling devices which separate the
    device from the ground and support the adjacent earth, as valve and meter
    wells and pipe line housings.  See (1) Note, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 201+ for
    ground or floor embedded sprinkler systems.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 237+ for liquid developer applied to
    a latent image within an electrophotographic device.


CLS 137/237
TXT Fluid handling systems under the class definition having (1) devices to
    render the system or parts thereof free from undesirable material, or (2)
    devices for lubricating the system or parts thereof by adding a lubricating
    medium to the stream of fluent material carried by the system or (3)
    devices for preventing leakage between the valve and a solid valve seat by
    introducing a liquid between the valve and its seat.

    (1)     Note.  Cleaning means for this group requires the installation of
    additional means or connections to treat the apparatus, not the material
    being handled, or the manipulation of the system in some special way to
    secure the cleaning effect.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for processes of cleaning.

    247+,   for liquid valves, i.e., those having liquid seats.

    544+,   for screens, filters, etc., for physically separating solid or
    unwanted materials from the material being handled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 148+ for dispensers with installed cleaning
    means.

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, subclasses 12+ for installed beer
    pipe cleaners.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 355 for lubrication of
    actuators or parts of a valve in which the lubricant does not enter the
    flow path.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 237+ for liquid developer applied to
    a latent image within an electrophotographic device.


CLS 137/238
TXT Systems under subclass 237 containing a means other than those causing or
    controlling the normal or unmodified flow of the fluent material of the
    system for removing germs or other undesirable internal or extraneous
    material from the system itself or parts thereof, as distinguished from
    treating the material being handled to remove undesirable material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171+,   for traps for separating or venting either gas or liquid from a
    pressure system containing both materials.

    312+,   for leakage or drip collecting in fluid handling devices.

    387,    for washing machine cycle control involving liquid level response
    or maintenance.

    544+,   for screens, filters, sediment, traps, etc., for removing undesired
    particles from the material being handled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 137+ for cleaning and laundering processes
    for textiles and fibers.  147+ for manipulative fluid treatment processes
    for textiles and fibers.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, appropriate subclasses
    for fluid blast or suction cleaning and mechanical cleaning with or without
    the addition of liquid.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 303 for a refrigerator combined with
    cleaning means.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    fabric cleaning by liquid contact.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses for
    cleaning by liquid contact.


CLS 137/239
TXT Systems under subclass 238 in which the cleaning device includes a means
    for causing a fluid to flow in the reverse direction to the normal flow
    path to remove undesirable material from the system or parts thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102+,   for reversing valves in supply and exhaust type self-regulating
    systems, especially subclasses 103+ for the suction pulsator type and 106
    for 4-way valve systems.

    207.5,  for diverse fluid containing pressure systems having means to
    return fluid contained in the system to the source of supply.

    249+    and 309+, for reversing valves of the regenerative furnace type.

    627,    for sequential distributing valves.


CLS 137/240
TXT Systems under subclass 238 in which a separate material such as steam, air,
    water, valve grinding compounds or other chemical or physical agents are
    introduced into the fluent material of the system to clean parts of the
    system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255+,   for systems having parallel discharge from plural tanks.

    268,    for systems with holders for solid, flaky or pulverized material to
    be dissolved or entrained, and see the search notes thereto.

    602+,   for systems having plural inflows and a single outflow, and see the
    search notes to subclass 602.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 129+ for dispensers in which plural diverse
    fluids from plural sources are discharged either separately or together.


CLS 137/241
TXT Systems under subclass 238 in which steam is used as a medium for cleaning
    germs or other infective agents from parts of the system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13      and 565+, for processes and systems using steam as a propelling
    fluid.

    334+,   for systems using influent gas or vapor for heating fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 316.1+ for
    cleaning by gas blast only.


CLS 137/242
TXT Systems under subclass 238 in which the undesired material is removed from
    the device or system or parts thereof by the physical interaction of two or
    more parts of the device or system, not including relations or operations
    which are part of or necessary for flow handling.

    (1)     Note.  One or more of the interacting parts may be parts present
    solely for cleaning purposes, or all may have utility as flow handling
    means provided the two modes of operation are present.

    (2)     Note.  This and the first indented subclass include disclosures
    relating to valve grinding only where the assembled system is described as
    having a specific nonvalving member or motion which produces valve grinding
    action or where the system or part when disassembled has a specific member
    that facilitates valve grinding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315+,   for systems having features related especially to disassembly and
    repair.

    330+,   for systems having nonvalving motion of the valve or valve seat for
    purposes other than cleaning or disassembling, though the motion may
    prevent fouling or dislodge material tending to settle on the valve parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 104.31+ for
    sewer cleaners.


CLS 137/243
TXT Systems under subclass 242 in which the fluent material system or a part
    thereof has means for giving the valve or its seat a motion which produces
    cleaning or grinding of the valve and/or its seat.

    (1)     Note.  This motion must be one not contemplated or normally
    occurring in the fluid controlling movement of the valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240,    for this subject matter wherein a separate material (e.g., grinding
    compound) is added at the grinding zone.

    330+,   for other nonvalving motion of valves or valve seats.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 215+ for plural motions of
    mechanically actuated valves.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 115+ for grinding a valve on a seat by use of
    plural workholders, without an abrading tool.


CLS 137/243.1
TXT Devices under subclass 243 in which the actuator is made up of an axial rod
    mounted within a sleeve.


CLS 137/243.2
TXT Devices under subclass 243 provided with a spring which permits regrinding
    of the valve head on its seat.


CLS 137/243.3
TXT Devices under subclass 243 provided with lost motion which permits the
    valve to rotate on its seat before it leaves the seat upon opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243.2,  for such connections which use a spring.


CLS 137/243.4
TXT Devices under subclass 243 in which a normally swiveled connection between
    the head and stem is blocked to cause the head to rotate on the seat as the
    stem rotates.


CLS 137/243.5
TXT Devices under subclass 243 comprising screw actuated valves in which the
    nut is disconnected from the body or the stem, or both, to permit the valve
    head to rotate without reciprocating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243.2,  for valves in which a spring permits limited movement between the
    nut and the body or stem.


CLS 137/243.6
TXT Devices under subclass 243 which are provided with means in addition to and
    independent of the normal valve actuator for imparting the grinding motion
    to the valve.


CLS 137/243.7
TXT Devices under subclass 243.6 in which the grinding means is normally
    removed from the valve.


CLS 137/244
TXT Systems under subclass 242 in which the fluent material system has a member
    which has a reciprocating movement to enter a restricted passage of the
    system to clean either or both parts, either the member, the passage or the
    movement being nonworking characteristics of the system; i.e., not
    contributing to the fluid flow causing or controlling function of the
    system, though the member or passage may be carried by a working part of
    the system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    22,     Dispensing, subclasses 149+ for dispensers in which a cleaning
    element enters the container outlet.


CLS 137/245
TXT Systems under subclass 244 in which the reciprocating member cleans a
    branch channel.

    (1)     Note.  The branch channel may comprise a diverting passage for
    fluid to be used to operate a valve, pilot valve, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    599+,   for by-passes in fluid handling systems, and see the search notes
    thereto.


CLS 137/245.5
TXT Devices under subclass 244 wherein the means to actuate the cleaning means
    is independent of the valve actuator.


CLS 137/246
TXT Systems under subclass 237 in which a separate fluid is applied between the
    valve and its seats to seal the valve against passage of the fluent
    material carried by the system.

    (1)     Note.  The sealing material may be a lubricant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247+,   for liquid valves and liquid trap seals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 355 for lubrication in which
    the lubricant does not enter the flow path.


CLS 137/246.11
TXT Valves under subclass 246 wherein plural feed means (other than gravity)
    are provided for the sealing liquid to cause flow thereof.


CLS 137/246.12
TXT Valves under subclass 246 wherein line pressure is used to feed the sealing
    liquid.


CLS 137/246.13
TXT Valves under subclass 246 wherein the feed means is actuated by the valve
    actuator or is so interrelated therewith that feeding of sealing liquid is
    dependent on valve actuation.


CLS 137/246.14
TXT Valves under subclass 246 having means to control or prevent the loss of
    sealing means to the line flow.


CLS 137/246.15
TXT Valves under subclass 246 having a screw means (e.g., screw fed plunger)
    for feeding the fluid.


CLS 137/246.16
TXT Valve under subclass 246.15 having check valve means in the lubrication or
    sealing system.


CLS 137/246.17
TXT Valves under subclass 246.16 having means to permit escape of the sealing
    liquid from its flow system to prevent excessive pressure therein or as an
    indication of complete flow therein.


CLS 137/246.18
TXT Valves under subclass 246.16 wherein the valve is lifted from its seat to
    aid actuation by the pressure of the lubricant.


CLS 137/246.19
TXT Valves under subclass 246.15 wherein the lubrication pressure lifts the
    valve from its seat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246.18, for "jacking" with a check valve in the lubrication system.


CLS 137/246.2
TXT Valves under subclass 246.15 wherein the lubrication pressure aids in
    seating of the valve.


CLS 137/246.21
TXT Valves under subclass 246 wherein the lubricant feed means is a spring
    biased piston.


CLS 137/246.22
TXT Valves under subclass 246 wherein the sealing material is introduced into
    the valve under pressure from some means such as a grease gun or oil pump.


CLS 137/246.23
TXT Valves under subclass 246 wherein the lubricant flows by gravity or by
    capillarity.


CLS 137/247
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which a liquid, maintained at the
    desired location by some form of reservoir, is used as a seal or closure
    between adjacent parts of a system containing either a gas or a liquid
    which is lighter than the sealing liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138+,   for periodic siphon discharge by release of trapped air through a
    liquid trap seal.

    154+,   for diverse fluid containing pressure systems, especially
    subclasses 154 and 172 for those containing plural liquids and 171+ for
    fluid separating traps and vents.

    246+,   for liquid sealing at the valve interface by supplying the sealing
    liquid to the flow path or directly to the valve interface.

    505.31  and 505.4, for reactor surface of the inverted cup type having
    liquid seal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, appropriate subclasses for
    liquid trap seals and valves combined with the subject matter of the class.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 188 for fluid trap seals for dispenser inlets
    and outlets, including vents.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 237+ for liquid developer applied to
    a latent image within an electrophotographic device.


CLS 137/247.11
TXT Apparatus under subclass 247 comprising a U-shaped flow passage which
    retains a portion of a line flow liquid to provide a gas seal in the said
    line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138+,   for periodic siphon discharge through liquid trap seals.

    171+,   for diverse fluid containing pressure systems with fluid separating
    traps, especially subclasses 177+ for a discriminating outlet for liquid.

    216.1+, for a vented siphon breaking system including a liquid seal.

    251,    for seals utilizing a diverse liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses for
    separation apparatus comprising liquid seals, particularly subclasses 163+
    for grated inlet surface drains, subclasses 295+ for grated inlet catch
    basins, subclasses 116 and 119 for the same with a backflow preventing
    float or filtrate accumulation responsive valve, respectively, and
    subclasses 532.1+ for catch basins with gravitational separation.


CLS 137/247.13
TXT Apparatus under subclass 247.11 having a valve in the liquid flow line in
    or adjacent to the seal.


CLS 137/247.15
TXT Apparatus under subclass 247.13 in which the valve is responsive to a
    change in the condition of the liquid in the flow line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    386+,   for liquid level responsive valves where no liquid seal is present,
    and particularly subclasses 409+ for float controlled valves.

    455+,   for other line condition change responsive valves.


CLS 137/247.17
TXT Apparatus under subclass 247.15 having a plurality of line condition
    responsive valves or having such a valve which seats alternatively on one
    of a plurality of seats.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    512+,   for plural direct response valves.

    516.25, for check valves having serially arranged plural seats.

    613+,   for systems with plural serial valves in a single flow path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 211 for a valve, per se,
    having serial alternately closed ports.


CLS 137/247.19
TXT Apparatus under subclass 247.15 in which the valve is pivoted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    517+,   for a biased opened direct response valve.

    527+,   for a pivoted check valve.


CLS 137/247.21
TXT Apparatus under subclass 247.15 in which the valve is a substantially
    spherical element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    409+,   especially subclasses 433 and 449 for float responsive ball valves.

    519.5,  for weight biases open direct response valves of the ball type.

    533.11, for a weight biased ball check valve.

    539+,   for a spring biased ball check valve.


CLS 137/247.23
TXT Apparatus under subclass 247.21 having a seat lying in a general horizontal
    plane above the valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    519.5,  for ball valves which are weight biased open.


CLS 137/247.25
TXT Devices under subclass 247.11 having (1) a distinct compartment with a
    restricted orifice which stores flow line liquid during flow and discharges
    it into the seal after the flow ceases in order to assure a seal or replace
    lost seal liquid, or (2) a connection to an outside source of seal liquid
    for the same purpose.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114     and 118, for valves providing correlated flow in seal replenishing
    apparatus of the (2) type.

    240,    for means to add a cleaning material to a fluid handling system.


CLS 137/247.27
TXT Devices under subclass 247.11 having connections for a plurality of inlet
    pipes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216.1+, for liquid seals with plural connections one of which is for an
    external vent means.

    602+,   for systems having multiple inlets and a single outlet, and see the
    search notes thereunder.


CLS 137/247.29
TXT Devices under subclass 247.11 having divided and recombined passage means
    for flow liquid and/or air, for preventing seal loss by forward siphonage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247.25, for divided and recombined passages where a seal replenishing
    chamber is included.

    599+,   for systems with divided and recombined flow paths.


CLS 137/247.31
TXT Devices under subclass 247.11 wherein the flow enters a leg of the U-shaped
    passage tangentially to the axis of the leg.


CLS 137/247.33
TXT Seals under subclass 247.11 in which the U-shaped passage is formed by a
    chamber having a downwardly extending partition comprising an inverted cup
    and a distinct outlet pipe which projects up into the cup.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 163+ and 247 for
    grated inlet surface drains with similar liquid seal means where the
    inverted cup functions as a filtrate splash plate or deflector.


CLS 137/247.35
TXT Seals under subclass 247.11 comprising a chamber having a distinct inlet
    pipe projecting thereinto and an outlet at a higher lever than the inlet
    pipe end opening.


CLS 137/247.37
TXT Seals under subclass 247.35 wherein the chamber comprises an overflow seal
    bowl hinged for movement into and out of seal forming position.


CLS 137/247.39
TXT Seals under subclass 247.35 wherein the chamber comprises a distinct
    overflow seal bowl within a flow line connected closed casing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 247 for devices of
    similar structure including separation means.


CLS 137/247.41
TXT Seals under subclass 247.11 wherein the U-shaped passage comprises a U-bend
    of which one leg thereof is an inlet pipe and constitutes the downflow
    column and the other leg is distinct and externally spaced from the first
    leg and constitutes the upflow column.


CLS 137/247.43
TXT Apparatus under subclass 247.41 installed beneath a surface and having a
    top side access means located beneath an opening in the surface, the
    opening being provided with a removable cover plate.


CLS 137/247.45
TXT Seals under subclass 247.41 wherein the upflow leg or a portion thereof
    ahead of the overflow into the outlet is transversely larger than the
    downflow (inlet) leg.


CLS 137/247.47
TXT Seals under subclass 247.45 with a top side access means located above the
    liquid seal level.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247.43, for the same apparatus positioned beneath a surface, such as a
    floor, having a covered access opening therein.


CLS 137/247.49
TXT Seals under subclass 247.41 wherein both legs of the U-bend have
    substantially uniform and like internal cross sections.


CLS 137/247.51
TXT Seals under subclass 247.49 having access means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 92 for lateral plugs and
    closures.


CLS 137/248
TXT Apparatus under subclass 247 in which the liquid is used to seal a gap
    between relatively movable valving parts of a valve in at least one
    position of the valve, the liquid pool comprising in effect the seat for
    the movable valve element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246+,   for liquid sealing at a valve interface where the liquid is
    supplied to seal the crack and is washed away when the valve is opened.


CLS 137/249
TXT Apparatus under subclass 248 in which the movement of the valve has a
    component in a horizontal plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    309+,   for reversing valves of the regenerative furnace type which do not
    have a liquid seat.


CLS 137/250
TXT Apparatus under subclass 249 in which the movement in a horizontal plane is
    rotary.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    311,    for rotary reversing valves of the regenerative furnace type which
    do not have a liquid seat.


CLS 137/251.1
TXT Liquid valves:

    Apparatus under subclass 247 in which the sealing liquid alone performs a
    valving function in response to either external control means or to fluid
    pressure in the flow path, i.e., no flow conduit is withdrawn from the
    liquid to open a flow path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    455+,   for line condition responsive valve comprising solid material valve
    parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 188 for fluid trap seals for dispenser inlets
    and outlets, including vents.


CLS 137/252
TXT Apparatus under subclass 251 in which at least one side of the liquid valve
    is provided with a branching path whereby as the sealing liquid rises on
    that side beyond a predetermined point it divides into a plurality of
    branches.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    472,    for pop safety valves in which the top pressure reactor is in a
    branched released path.


CLS 137/253
TXT Apparatus under subclass 251 including auxiliary means independent of the
    flow path for adjusting or varying the height of the liquid in the valve.


CLS 137/254
TXT Apparatus under subclass 251 in which one or more baffles is provided
    either in or above the liquid of the valve, usually to restrict, deflect,
    or slow up sudden rising of the valving liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 118+ for devices having flow
    restrictors, especially subclass 127 for restrictors comprising baffles,
    and see the search notes to subclasses 118 and 127.


CLS 137/255
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having two or more tanks or
    compartments so connected that (1) fluid from the same or different sources
    is separately supplied to different tanks or compartments, and/or (2) the
    tanks or compartments discharge separate fluid flows externally of the
    system or to parts of the system other than one another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87.01+, for self proportioning or correlating systems involving plural
    fluid sources.

    124+,   for plural siphons, especially subclass 127 for sequential parallel
    discharge from plural tanks.

    208,    for plural units in pressure systems having gas pressure stored
    over or displacing liquids.

    571+,   for plural tanks or compartments connected for series flow, i.e.,
    discharging into one another, and see the search notes to subclass 571.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 129+ for dispensers having plural sources,
    compartments and containers.


CLS 137/256
TXT Apparatus under subclass 255 having means for successively filling the
    tanks and means for subsequently emptying the filled tanks in succession.
    Many of the patents in this group of subclasses are directed to milk
    pasteurization tank systems, wherein milk at pasteurization temperatures is
    retained in a tank for a period of time before the tank is emptied.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119.01+, for alternately substituted outlets of a line, as to plural tanks,
    in a self controlled system.

    127,    for siphon discharge of plural tanks in sequence.

    160+    and 169+, for plural traps sequentially filled and emptied by gas
    pressure into a pressure chamber such as a boiler.

    266+,   for plural tanks discharging, receiving or vented through a
    manifold or through grouped outlets and 263 for similar devices in which
    the manifold is a tank.

    627,    for sequential distributor or collector type valve actuation.


CLS 137/257
TXT Apparatus under subclass 256 in which a group of tanks or compartments and
    the filling means therefor are mounted for rotation with respect to one
    another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    581,    for movable tanks, and see the search notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 129+ for apparatus for filling separable receivers having means
    to supply and position successive receivers relative to the filling means.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 144 for rotatably mounted assemblies of plural
    dispensing containers.


CLS 137/258
TXT Apparatus under subclass 257 in which the filling means rotates with
    respect to the tank group and the filling means also includes means for
    emptying the tanks.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    627,    for sequential operation of distributing and collecting valves, and
    see the search notes thereto.


CLS 137/259
TXT Apparatus under subclass 255 having means for enclosing some or all of the
    tanks or compartments, means for positioning the tanks or compartments with
    respect to a supporting surface or member other than the tanks or
    compartments themselves, or constructional features specially designed to
    permit stacking one upon another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264,    for parallel discharging tanks positioned one within another.

    356+,   for static constructional installations of fluid handling devices,
    especially subclasses 357+ for buildings.

    376,    for supported tanks other than those arranged for parallel flow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 503+ for a receptacle
    having feature or element intended to facilitate stacking.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 143 for packing or stacking arrangements for
    plural dispensing containers and subclasses 173+ for dispenser supports and
    casings.


CLS 137/260
TXT Apparatus under subclass 255 in which the tanks or compartments are storage
    battery or electrolytic cells and means is provided for supplying liquid
    thereto, usually to maintain a constant liquid level in the cells.

    (1)     Note.  Patents for subcombinations specialized for use in battery
    or cell filling apparatus are classified herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    386+,   for liquid level responsive or maintaining systems other than those
    for storage batteries electrolytic cell, especially subclasses 453+ for
    barometric type level maintenance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 285+ for battery filling
    devices which are not continuously associated with a particular battery.

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 263 and see the
    note thereto for electrolytic cells provided with means for feeding and/or
    withdrawing material therefrom.

    429,    Chemistry: Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product and
    Process, subclasses 72+ for battery having means feeding electrolyte
    thereto.


CLS 137/261
TXT Apparatus under subclass 260 in which the supply means comprises a closed
    container elevated with respect to the cells and adapted to be placed in
    continuous communication therewith, whereby, upon lowering of the liquid
    level in the cell, liquid is supplied thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    453+,   for tank level responsive or maintaining systems of the barometric
    type wherein the tank is other than a battery or an electrolytic cell, and
    see the search notes to subclass 453.


CLS 137/262
TXT Apparatus under subclass 255 in which fluid from a single source is
    supplied to a plurality of compartments, each of which has a normally open
    outlet, for the purpose of proportionally dividing the single flow into a
    plurality of flows.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    561+,   for distribution systems comprising plural flow paths, and
    especially subclass 561 for those comprising an inlet and a plurality of
    flow dividing outlets which have no valves and do not accumulate any liquid
    at the entrance to the flow path.

    861+,   for fluid distribution systems having a plurality of branches with
    means for stopping or controlling fluid flow in at least one of the
    branches.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 215+ for weir type meters.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 330 for dispensers having plural outlets from
    a discharge assistant and subclasses 478+ for supply containers having
    plural outlets or discharge guides.


CLS 137/263
TXT Apparatus under subclass 255 in which one tank or compartment is arranged
    to supply to and/or receive from a plurality of additional tanks or
    compartments, with or without the intervention of a manifold.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266+,   for tanks arranged for parallel flow having a filling and/or
    emptying manifold which does not supply to or receive from a tank or
    compartment in addition to those arranged for parallel flow, and see the
    definition of subclass 266 for the meaning of the term "manifold".

    571+,   for plural tanks arranged for serial flow only.


CLS 137/264
TXT Apparatus under subclass 255 in which one tank is positioned within another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259,    for tanks with stacking or superposing means.

    340,    for jackets forming a flow path in heat-exchange type fluid
    handling systems.

    375,    for jacketed containers in a fluid handling system.  The jacket may
    be spaced and disclosed for holding fluid, for storage, heat exchange or
    any other purpose, but the inlet and/or outlet is not claimed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 131 for dispensers comprising a supply
    container and a spaced, nondispensing jacket and subclass 183 for dispenser
    supply containers with nonspaced jackets.


CLS 137/265
TXT Apparatus under subclass 255 having a connecting passage whereby fluid may
    flow between the tanks or compartments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    571+,   for plural tanks connected for flow only from tank to tank, and see
    the search notes on serial tanks and/or traps collected in the definition
    of subclass 571.


CLS 137/266
TXT Apparatus under subclass 255 having (1) a filling and/or emptying or
    venting manifold or (2) separate outlet conduits from plural tanks or
    compartments arranged to terminate adjacent one another, usually for
    convenience in discharging the contents of the several compartments.

    (1)     Note.  In this and the indented subclasses, the term "manifold"
    includes any arrangement in which flow conduits to or from two or more
    tanks or compartments arranged for parallel flow merge into a common flow
    passage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262,    for flow dividing compartments.

    263,    for plural tanks in parallel having a filling and/or emptying
    manifold which is itself a tank or for plural tanks or compartments
    arranged for parallel flow which discharge into or are supplied from at
    least one other tank by means of a manifold.

    561+,   especially subclasses 597, 599+, 602+, and 861+ for distribution
    systems having branched flow lines, including manifolds, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 145.1+ for dispensers having plural sources,
    compartments or containers and a common discharge.


CLS 137/267
TXT Apparatus under subclass 266 in which the plural compartments are of the
    type commonly mounted on a truck or other vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    for plural compartment tank trucks having siphon discharge outlets.

    899+,   for other fluid delivery systems combined with vehicles, especially
    subclasses 351+ for automobile type vehicles, and see the search notes to
    subclasses 351 and 899.


CLS 137/268
TXT Fluid handling devices under the class definition including a member for
    holding and bringing a fluent material and a material to be dissolved or
    entrained into contact with the fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101.11, for self proportioning systems comprising differential response
    means with means to entrain material from a reservoir.

    205.5,  for a diverse fluid containing pressure system including means for
    main line flow to displace material from a shunt reservoir into the main
    line.

    240,    for cleaning means involving the supplying for cleaning purposes of
    material other than and in addition to the material handled by the system.

    255+,   for systems having parallel discharge from plural tanks.

    564.5,  for a follower type feeder in a shunt line responsive to mainline
    flow.

    602+,   for systems having plural inflows and a single outflow, and see the
    search notes to subclass 602.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 222+ for chemical
    holders in water closets.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 302 and 320
    for air blast or suction cleaners with liquid or other cleaning material
    application to the work.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses
    for material handling in contact with gas or vapor for drying, and also for
    such other purposes as are not otherwise classified.

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclasses 38+ for carbide feeders
    for acetylene generators.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 17 for soap supply
    means for significantly included fluid treating apparatus for textiles.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses for
    the application of liquid to solids for cleaning and also for other
    miscellaneous purposes.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, subclass 15 for fluid systems having means to
    add a chemical (e.g., extinguishing agent) to a flow line.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 77.1 for a soap container
    provided with means to facilitate the lifting or removal of a piece of soap
    from the container.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 198.1+ for a
    separating means combined with means to add a treating material and see the
    search notes thereunder.

    220,    Receptacles, appropriate subclasses for shaving cups.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 133 for a measuring dispenser for one supply
    receiving an indeterminate flow from another, and subclasses 630+ for fluid
    flow dispensing of an entrained material.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 310+ for
    spray discharging apparatus with dissolving means.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 200+ for a bracket type soap holder,
    subclasses 317+ for a suspended type soap holder, and subclasses 683+ for a
    holder which supports the soap while in storage position and remains with
    the soap while in use.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 351 for a soap dish provided
    with means to support the soap in spaced relation to the bottom wall of the
    structure.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 88+ for a soap
    holder which holds the soap in such a manner that a portion of the soap may
    be directly rubbed on the user's body or on a surface; subclass 261 for a
    porous applicator pad wherein the soap is retained in a pocket of the pad
    through which it seeps when fluidized; and subclass 268 for a device
    wherein soap is help in direct contact with and for application to, an
    applicator of the brush, broom or mop type.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclasses 108+ for material intake
    apparatus for fluid current conveyors.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 261+ for dissolvers, extractors, and
    leachers including those having a holder for nonliquid material for making
    solutions wherein the holder as disclosed is incapable of retaining a
    liquid, where dissolving takes place in the holder and may thereafter be
    added to a stream, and the handling of liquids being restricted to the
    purpose of dissolving.


CLS 137/269
TXT Apparatus under the class definition so designed that its mode of operation
    can be changed by reassembling all or some of its parts in a different
    relationship to each other or by the addition or omission of a part.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus in which a change in direction of an outlet nozzle
    or spout is accomplished by disassembly and reassembly are classified here.

    (2)     Note.  See the class definition, Section 5 for search notes on
    fluid handling systems having adjusting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315+,   for systems having provision for assembly, disassembly and repair,
    especially subclasses 329+ for devices embodying plural areas or parts
    which are duplicates or equivalents, used successively or alternatively to
    distribute wear or for replacement of a worn part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 290 for a valve or actuator
    having plural selective neutral positions.


CLS 137/269.5
TXT Devices under subclass 269 comprising check valves mounted in alternately
    positionable carriers whereby a carried valve may check fluid flow in
    either of two directions by repositioning the carrier.


CLS 137/270
TXT Apparatus under subclass 269 in which a part or a unitary subassembly of
    parts may be assembled with the remainder of the apparatus in only one
    location, but plural relative angular positions or orientations with
    respect thereto are possible with corresponding changes in the mode of
    operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329+,   for devices in which parts may be shifted to replace a worn area,
    but without any change in the mode of operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 290 for a valve or actuator
    having plural selective neutral positions.


CLS 137/270.5
TXT Devices under subclass 270 comprising stop and vent or waste valve units
    having means to associate the waste port with either principal port.


CLS 137/271
TXT Apparatus under subclass 269 in which the mode of operation can be changed
    by interchanging plural parts or unitary subassemblies.  One of the parts
    interchanged may be a mere plug or closure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 290 for valve parts, handles
    or actuators which may be applied in different positions with relation to
    the devices without any change in the mode of operation.


CLS 137/272
TXT Fluid distributors under the class definition characterized by a vertical
    delivery riser with a valve at the bottom, to avoid freezing when installed
    below the frost line, and an extended actuator for the valve, usually for
    actuating the valve from a point adjacent the outlet from the riser or an
    extension thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The common form of this device is the fire hydrant, but
    railway water cranes, outdoor toilet installations and frost-proof
    irrigation outlets are included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    364+,   for valve and meter wells in which an underground pipe is tapped or
    controlled, but no flow occurs using the well or a pipe extending
    vertically through it as a flow path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclasses 72+ for a well with an above ground means for
    actuating means in the well.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 142+, especially subclasses
    145+ and 148+ for well pipe drain valves, many of which have an actuator
    extending vertically along the pipe to be accessible from the ground level.


CLS 137/273
TXT Apparatus under subclass 272 including a laterally extending delivery spout
    at the top of the riser for delivery of liquid, usually to movable tanks,
    e.g., water to railroad locomotive tenders or gasoline to tank trucks.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    615+,   for distribution systems having articulated and swinging flow
    conduits, and see the search notes to subclass 615.

    801,    for nozzles and spouts, per se, and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 137/274
TXT Apparatus under subclass 273 in which the valve is actuated by movement of
    the spout into delivery position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    616+,   for distribution systems having valves controlled by articulated or
    swinging flow conduits, and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 137/275
TXT Apparatus under subclass 273 in which the riser is rotatable about its axis
    to position the spout for delivery of water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286+,   for rotating risers in hydrants, i.e., those vertical discharge
    pipes which lack lateral extensions.


CLS 137/276
TXT Apparatus under subclass 275 in which the spout is attached to the
    rotatable riser by a flexible joint providing for movement of the spout in
    at least one plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    279,    for water cranes having a spout articulated to a stationary or
    movable but nonrotating riser.

    615+,   for articulated or swinging flow conduits in distribution systems,
    and see the search notes to subclass 615.

    801,    for nozzles or spouts, per se, and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 137/277
TXT Apparatus under subclass 275 in which the riser is movable vertically as
    well as rotatably.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    287+,   for hydrants having vertically reciprocating risers which may also
    rotate.


CLS 137/278
TXT Apparatus under subclass 273 in which the spout is extensible in a lateral
    direction from the riser to vary its length.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 522+ for dispensers having axially slidable
    tubes or sleeves.


CLS 137/279
TXT Apparatus under subclass 273 in which the spout is attached to the riser by
    a flexible joint providing for movement of the spout in at least one plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    276,    for similar spouts associated with rotating risers.

    615+,   for articulated or swinging flow conduits in distribution systems,
    and see the search notes to subclass 615.

    801,    for nozzles or spouts, per se, and see the search notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 526+ for movable material discharge guides
    for dispensers.


CLS 137/280
TXT Apparatus under subclass 272 in which at least part of the riser is divided
    into plural parallel fluid flow passages.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    294+,   for hydrant risers having a casing or housing which is not a flow
    path but merely a support or protector.


CLS 137/281
TXT Apparatus under subclass 272 including an expansible chamber near the
    bottom of the riser and operated by movement of the riser and/or valve
    actuator to evacuate water from the riser as the valve is closed or receive
    the drain or waste after the valve is closed, and to refill the riser as or
    before the valve is opened.

    (1)     Note.  These are primarily anti-freeze devices for storing the
    water trapped in the riser at the lowest point above the valve, and
    returning it to the flow path at the start of the next discharge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for low temperature responsive drains.

    301+,   for other antifreeze protection of hydrants.

    568,    for reserve or surge receiving means for distribution systems
    having pumps.

    596+,   for distribution systems provided with stop and waste means or
    drains.

    777+,   for expansible chamber devices, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 41.14 for means for
    withdrawing and storing the water from the cooling system of an internal
    combustion engine when the engine is not operating.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 27+ for freeze protecting
    expansible chambers for pipes and tubular conduits.


CLS 137/282
TXT Apparatus under subclass 272 combined with a pump or ejector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    575+,   for distribution systems embodying pumps, and see the search notes
    to subclass 565.


CLS 137/283
TXT Apparatus under subclass 272 in which a valve and its valve seat are so
    arranged as to facilitate removal, usually where the valve opens downwardly.

    (1)     Note.  The valve and valve seat concerned may be either the main
    valve or the drain valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    234.5   and 454.2+, for other removable units.

    326,    for foot valve extraction through a tank.

    327,    for disassembly tool engaging features in fluent material handling
    systems.

    439,    for float arm operated valves which may be removed by working from
    the outside of the tank, leaving the actuating mechanism in the tank.


CLS 137/284
TXT Apparatus under subclass 283 in which the valve seat is provided with an
    extension independent of the riser, to facilitate its removal.


CLS 137/285
TXT Apparatus under subclass 272 in which the main valve is arranged to be
    removable, and a supplemental check valve is provided, biased closed by a
    spring or by fluid pressure and normally held open by a projection on the
    main valve or its actuator when the main valve is in place.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223+,   for inflation stems having a valved extension which comprises means
    for opening the valve in the main stem.

    283+,   for hydrants having the valve and valve seat removable.

    320+,   for devices for tapping a system under pressure, the system having
    a valve actuated by the separable tapping device or by means carried
    thereby.

    326,    for foot valve extraction through a tank.

    327+,   for systems having means provided for engagement by tools for
    assembling and disassembling the system.

    329.1   and 329.2+, for repair check type valves held inactive except at
    times of repair.

    613+,   for distribution systems having serial valves in a single flow line.


CLS 137/286
TXT Apparatus under subclass 272 in which the riser serves as the actuator for
    the valve, i.e., movement of the riser in a predetermined manner actuates
    the valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    274,    for spout-operated valves in water cranes.

    275+,   for rotating risers having laterally extending spouts.

    616+,   for distribution systems in which an articulated or swinging flow
    conduit actuates the valve, and see the search notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 341+ and 349+ for valves
    operated by moving the casing or an extension thereof, including inlets and
    outlets.


CLS 137/287
TXT Apparatus under subclass 286 in which reciprocating movement of the riser
    actuates the valve.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes those hydrants in which a combination
    of reciprocating movement and rotary movement of the riser actuates the
    valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277,    for water crane risers which reciprocate and rotate.


CLS 137/288
TXT Apparatus under subclass 287 in which the valve is a piston cooperating
    with one or more ports in a cylindrical valve seat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 318+ for reciprocating
    valves of general utility, and see the search notes thereto, and subclasses
    324+ for piston valves, per se.


CLS 137/289
TXT Apparatus under subclass 272 in which the valve is balanced, i.e., has
    opposed surfaces of equal or nearly equal area exposed to the line fluid
    pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 281 for balanced valves of
    general application and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 137/290
TXT Apparatus under subclass 272 in which the valve actuator has at least one
    element projecting in a generally horizontal direction adjacent the bottom
    of the riser, or comprises a linkage such that the resultant movement of
    the valve is in a generally horizontal direction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 213+ for mechanical movement
    valve actuators, especially subclass 279 for actuating linkages.


CLS 137/291
TXT Apparatus under subclass 272 in which the extended valve actuator does not
    extend longitudinally through the flow path or riser, but is located
    entirely outside the riser.

    (1)     Note.  The valve may have a spindle or stem which serves as a
    mounting for the valve disk or plug and extends through the top of the
    valve body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    364+,   for valve and meter wells which house an actuator for an
    underground valve which has no vertical flow path.


CLS 137/292
TXT Apparatus under subclass 291 in which the valve actuator includes a lever.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 231+ for valve actuators of
    general utility which includes a lever, and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 137/293
TXT Apparatus under subclass 291 with a ground supporting casing for at least
    the upper end of the riser whereby the discharge end of the riser can be at
    or below the surface of the ground or pavement where it is installed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    295,    for other types of hydrants with a casing flush with ground or
    pavement.

    363+,   for apparatus of this class in general combined with a ground
    supporting casing, especially subclasses 363+ for valve and meter wells
    which house a valve for underground flow lines and a vertically extending,
    usually removable, actuator.


CLS 137/294
TXT Apparatus under subclass 272 combined with an external enclosure for the
    riser, valve casing or valve actuator or for a part thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    343+,   particularly subclasses 364+ and 375 for other apparatus of this
    class combined with an external enclosure or casing, and see the search
    notes on casings generally under subclass 375.


CLS 137/295
TXT Apparatus under subclass 294 in which at least a portion of the casing
    provides a ground supporting recess for the discharge end of the riser
    whereby the discharge opening can be at or below the surface of the ground
    or pavement where it is installed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    293,    for hydrants with actuator outside riser and with casing flush with
    ground or pavement.

    364+,   for ground supporting casings for valves and their actuators or for
    meters.


CLS 137/296
TXT Apparatus under subclass 294 in which the casing includes a cap, cover or
    hood for the top or discharge outlet of the riser.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300,    for valves at the outlet of a hydrant.

    371,    for covers for valve and meter wells.

    800,    for closures for fluent material handling systems, and see the
    search notes thereto.


CLS 137/297
TXT Apparatus under subclass 294 which includes a heating means, e.g., a heat
    exchange device or a gas or oil burner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281     and 301+, for other means for protecting hydrants against freezing.

    334+,   for other apparatus of this class combined with a heating or
    cooling means, especially subclass 338 for hydrant and meter wells having
    passages for thermal circulation of air and see the search notes to
    subclass 334.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 32+ for thawing and freeze
    protection of pipes and tubular conduits.


CLS 137/298
TXT Apparatus under subclass 272 which includes means for lubricating the valve
    actuator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 355 for valve actuator
    lubrication of general utility, and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 137/299
TXT Apparatus under subclass 272 which includes one or more valves at outlets
    from the riser, either in the riser or in a discharge spout, and provided
    in addition to the main or foot valve of the riser.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    613+,   for systems involving a single flow path with plural serial valves,
    and see the search notes to subclass 613.

    861+,   for systems involving flow control means for plural passages, and
    see the search notes to subclass 861.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 147 for pipe terminal
    mountings for valves.


CLS 137/300
TXT Apparatus under subclass 272 which includes an additional valve independent
    of the main valve and exposed to fluid upstream of the main valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290,    for hydrants having a single main valve which is located upstream
    from the base of the riser.

    613+,   for systems including a single flow path with plural serial valves,
    and see the search notes to subclass 613.


CLS 137/301
TXT Apparatus under subclass 272 which makes some provision for preventing
    freezing of water in the riser or around the valve, by providing for its
    removal from the hydrant, by arrangement of the connection to the water
    main or by means provided inside the flow path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59+,    for freeze condition responsive safety systems, especially subclass
    61 for low temperature responsive cut offs, and 62 for low temperature
    responsive drains.

    68.11+, for system control by frangible means.

    107,    for systems where a waste or drain valve opens in response to
    stoppage of flow.

    272,    for arrangements for getting water out of frozen hydrants.

    281,    for prevention of freezing by providing an expansible chamber for
    draining water from the riser and retaining it below the frost line for
    later use.

    297,    for hydrant casings with heater.

    338,    for system installations providing for circulation of air from
    below to above ground for freeze protection purposes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 32+ for thawing and freeze
    protection for pipes and tubular conduits.


CLS 137/302
TXT Apparatus under subclass 301 in which freezing of water in the riser is
    prevented by providing an auxiliary valve operated in at least one
    direction by the actuator of the main valve for draining the riser when the
    main valve is closed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for low temperature responsive stop and waste devices.

    102+,   for self correlating systems of the supply and exhaust type,
    especially subclass 107 for waste responsive to flow stoppage.

    281,    for expansible chambers for draining water from the riser and
    retaining it.

    596+,   for stop and waste and drain valves in other types of fluent
    material handling apparatus, and see the search notes thereto.

    625.2,  for stop and waste valve units.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 337 and 339 for
    water closets having antifreeze drain means in riser pipes.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 143+ for drains for well
    pipes, etc.


CLS 137/303
TXT Apparatus under subclass 302 including selective means for preventing
    operation of the auxiliary or drain valve.

    (1)     Note.  These devices are usually operative during the summer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 89+ for means for disabling
    or preventing operation of a valve of general utility, and see the search
    notes thereto.


CLS 137/304
TXT Apparatus under subclass 302 in which the control valve and the drain valve
    are relatively movable but are operated by a single actuator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 445+ for nonrigidly connected cut-offs for
    stationary measuring traps in dispensers.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 631+ for cyclic valves, and
    see the notes to the definition of subclass 631.


CLS 137/305
TXT Apparatus under subclass 304 in which the drain valve is operated in only
    one direction by abutment of a part thereof with the control valve or a
    projection thereon or on the valve actuator, operation in the other
    direction being by weight or spring bias.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 231 for free engagement connection between
    successive agitators and discharge assistant and/or interconnected valve,
    and subclass 446 for free engagement interconnection between trap chamber
    cut-offs in dispensers.


CLS 137/306
TXT Apparatus under subclass 304 in which the valve actuator includes a screw
    or gear interposed between the main valve and the waste valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 215+ and 264+ for valve
    actuators of general application involving a screw, and subclasses 248+ for
    valve actuators of general application including a gear.


CLS 137/307
TXT Apparatus under subclass 302 in which the control valve and drain valve are
    relatively fixed and comprise a reciprocating body.  A unitary body,
    usually cylindrical, and cooperating with plural ports to accomplish the
    stop and waste function is included in this subclass.

    (1)     Note.  Screw actuated valves are considered reciprocating for the
    purposes of this subclass when the rotary component of the valve movement
    is not necessary to the valving function.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing subclass 453 for axially slidable rigidly connected
    valves for stationary measuring traps for dispensers.


CLS 137/308
TXT Apparatus under subclass 307 in which the drain passage is through a guide
    channel for a valve extension or the valve stem or actuator projection and
    below the normal travel limits of the valve.


CLS 137/309
TXT Fluid handling devices under the class definition comprising four-way
    reversing valves disclosed for fluid distribution in connection with a
    regenerative type of furnace, gas generator, or similar circuit having two
    connections to two heat exchangers or regenerators, a connection for
    incoming air or fuel or both, and a connection to the exhaust stack, the
    valve being selectively movable into two positions; in one position the
    incoming air or fuel is passed through a first heat exchanger or
    regenerator to the furnace or gas generator, the exhaust gases passing
    through the second heat exchanger or regenerator to the exhaust stack; and
    in the other position of the valve the incoming air or fuel is passed
    through said second heat exchanger or regenerator, to the furnace or gas
    generator, and the exhaust gases pass through said first heat exchanger or
    regenerator to the exhaust stack.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248+,   for reversing valves of this type having liquid trap seals.

    631+,   for cyclically actuated valves, and see the search notes to
    subclass 631.


CLS 137/310
TXT Reversing valves under subclass 309 wherein a coolant, such as air or
    water, is circulated in heat exchange relation with the valve, valve seat,
    or operating parts thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334+,   for fluid handling systems having heating or cooling means and see
    the search notes to subclass 334.


CLS 137/311
TXT Reversing valves under subclass 309 wherein the valve is mounted for
    rotating or oscillating motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250,    for rotary reversing valves of this type having liquid trap seals.


CLS 137/312
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which means are provided to catch
    or otherwise dispose of material dripping, leaking or being discharged as
    waste material.

    (1)     Note.  By drip, leakage or waste is meant material which escapes to
    the exterior of the normal flow path and which is not caught or received by
    the intended receiver, including condensate and water derived from melting
    ice, for example.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144,    for siphons having means to remove air leakage.

    427,    for float leakage disposal.

    596+,   for distribution systems having drain and stop and waste devices,
    and see the search notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 108+ for drip, leakage or waste catching or
    disposal in dispensers.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 128 for valves having
    detachable actuators and means to prevent leakage when the actuator is
    detached.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 237+ for liquid developer applied to
    a latent image within an electrophotographic device.


CLS 137/313
TXT Apparatus under subclass 312 in which either a receptacle or a pipe means
    is provided to collect the fluid dripping from an outlet after cessation of
    normal flow, the collecting means and the outlet being relatively movable.


CLS 137/314
TXT Apparatus under subclass 312 in which a collecting or drain means is
    provided for a liquid which is derived from a solid, gas, or vapor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171+,   for diverse fluid containing pressure systems providing for the
    collection of one of the diverse fluids with discriminating outlets for
    said diverse fluids.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 272+ for atmospheric condensate handling,
    subclass 391 for a withdrawable liquid receiver, subclasses 420+ for an air
    cooler utilizing ice, and subclasses 459+ for an enclosure with ice
    supports.


CLS 137/315
TXT Fluid handling devices under the class definition in which parts of the
    device are equipped with means, other than the parts making up the flow
    confining or controlling assembly and the means for securing them together
    in operative relation, to aid in assembling the parts to form the device or
    a subcombination thereof, or for disassembling the device or its parts; or
    in which the device, or parts of the device, are equipped with means to
    restore, or aid in restoring the device to its former condition after
    decay, injury or partial destruction.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include devices having means to
    facilitate adjustment of the parts of the device.  Such device may be found
    in the subclasses involving the member made adjustable.  See the main class
    definition, section 5 for search notes on adjustments in fluid handling
    devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for processes of repairing and assembling fluid handling devices.

    242+,   for valve devices having special features to facilitate valve
    grinding, and see the search notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 97+ for processes and means
    for repairing pipes.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 85.1+ for above ground well apparatus with
    assembly or disassembly means.


CLS 137/316
TXT Devices under subclass 315 having combined with a part of the device a
    fixture, attachment, support, or stop, which is inoperative in the
    assembled operating device, for (1) supporting and/or aligning parts of the
    device during assembly or disassembly, or (2) for immobilizing a moving
    part of the device other than an actuator or taking the pressure off a wear
    surface to permit transportation or safe storage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 700+ for assembling or disassembling
    apparatus of general application.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 89+ for devices having means
    to hold an actuator in a desired position to prevent accidental or unwanted
    movement of the valve or controller.

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses for workholders of general
    application.


CLS 137/317
TXT Devices under subclass 315 in which access is gained to a closed container
    or system by means of a connectable device or tap which comprises a flow
    passage to receive material from the system and means to form an opening in
    or open a closed passage of the system, either by removing a plug or by
    opening a valve which has no other actuating means, the connection being
    made in a manner which prevents loss of material from the system and/or
    admission of extraneous matter to it.

    (1)     Note.  The connectable flow passage forming element is usually a
    tap for a beer keg, but irrigation system couplings and other analogous
    devices are included, the source being a stationary type and the tap being
    portable or in the nature of an attachment.

    (2)     Note.  Antisplash guards comprising baffles or packing means around
    the entering portion of the tap are included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209+,   for means for supplying gas to pressure systems containing gas and
    another fluid, especially subclass 212 for beer taps with gas pressure
    inlets.

    453+,   for barometric liquid level maintaining systems, especially
    subclass 454 for those having a removable font provided with a cut-off
    operable by engagement with the support-receiver, and see the search notes
    to subclass 454.

    614.02+ and 614.05, for separable, valved, flow path sections, at least one
    of the valves being operated by the joining of the sections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 213.1+, for structure for assembling
    valve parts, including assembling by use of a pressurized container.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 329+ for puncturing type connecting means and, subclasses 346+
    for filling devices for receivers having keyed or other special coupling
    means.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses 98+ for barrel bungs, especially
    subclasses 99+ for valved bungs.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 89.5 and subclasses 149+ for a
    valved flow path section joined to another section, the act of joining
    causing the valve to open, subclass 89.5 also including features of the
    joint which may block or disable the valve actuator.


CLS 137/318
TXT Devices under subclass 317 in which the connectable means carries a cutter
    or punch for making the opening in the closed system through which flow
    will occur.  The aperture may be formed at the time the connection is
    placed, or subsequently by operation of means carried by the connectable
    means.



    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 80+ for dispensers having means to form an
    aperture in the supply container or receiver, and see section 19 of the
    main class definition for collected notes on this subject matter.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, appropriate
    subclasses for cutting in that class manner in the absence of fluid
    handling structure, except when fluid handling is ancillary to the cutting
    operation.  For cutting of Class 408 combined with ancillary fluid
    handling, search subclasses 56+ of Class 408.


CLS 137/319
TXT Devices under subclass 317 in which the system has an opening closed by a
    plug, cap, cork or other imperforate closure, and the connectable part has
    means to engage, completely remove and hold the closure, which may or may
    not be replaced in closing position upon disconnection of the parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    320+,   for screw or friction held closures which have flow passages
    therein, so that when partially displaced they serve as valves.

    324+,   for taps and related devices which merely push the bung or cork out
    of the opening, allowing it to fall inside the keg or container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 38 for devices for removing and holding tire valve cores while
    water is forced into the tire.


CLS 137/320
TXT Devices under subclass 317 in which the system is provided with a valved
    opening, the valve having no externally operable actuator, and the
    connectable means either opens the system valve as the coupling is made or
    carries an actuator which engages the valve as a result of the coupling,
    being manipulated subsequently to open and close the valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223+,   for inflatable article filling chuck and/or stem.

    454,    for removable barometric reservoirs having valves which are
    operated by engagement with the receiving and supporting receptacle and see
    the search notes thereto.

    614,    for disconnectable flow pipe sections with plural serial valves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 346 for filling devices for receivers having keyed or other
    special coupling means.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses 99+ for barrel bungs of the valved
    type.


CLS 137/321
TXT Devices under subclass 320 in which the valve means of the system comprises
    a head which moves axially and rotationally with respect to its seat,
    usually as a result of being engaged with a screw type actuator or tap.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 215+ for valves of general
    utility operated by a mechanical movement which imparts plural movements to
    the valve head.


CLS 137/322
TXT Devices under subclass 320 in which the valve opens with a straight line
    motion with reference to the axis or the outlet when engaged by the
    connectable device or the actuator carried thereby.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 318+ for reciprocating
    valves and their actuators, and see the search note thereto.


CLS 137/323
TXT Devices under subclass 320 in which the valve rotates around the axis of
    the flow path when actuated by engagement with the connecting means at the
    attached flow device or by the actuator carried thereon.


CLS 137/324
TXT Devices under subclass 317 in which the system is closed by a bung or cork
    or other frictionally held closure and the connectable part has a portion,
    usually tapered, which enters the opening so closed and pushes or drives
    out the closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS SUBCLASS:

    319,    for similar devices in which the closure though driven entirely
    from the opening, remains impaled on or secured to the tapping device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 80+ for similar devices comprising
    dispensers.


CLS 137/325
TXT Devices under subclass 324 in which the connectable or tapping member is
    forced into the opening by blows delivered by a means which is ordinarily
    not part of the system, the member being provided merely with a surface
    designed to receive the blow.


CLS 137/326
TXT Devices under subclass 315 comprising a container having an access opening
    at the top and a valve located in a part of the container remote from the
    access opening usually at the bottom, with means for disassembling and
    removing the valve and/or its seat through the access opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    283+,   for hydrants having a removable valve and valve seat.

    584+,   for dispensing systems comprising a tank having an access opening
    and a fluid inlet or outlet, and see the search notes to subclass 584.


CLS 137/327
TXT Devices under subclass 315 one or more parts of which have a member for
    interlocking with a tool for disassembling the part or disengaging the part
    from the device.

    (1)     Note.  The member must be something in addition to the
    configuration of the part or of means used to secure parts together.


CLS 137/328
TXT Devices under subclass 327 in which the interlocking means are projections
    or ears for engaging the jaws of a wrench.


CLS 137/329
TXT Devices under subclass 315 having a part or parts made in attached
    duplicate form or of extensive area movably mounted in such a manner the
    worn or injured part may be replaced by a duplicate part or another unworn
    surface to restore the device to its former condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    269+,   for devices which by movement of a part to a different orientation
    change the mode of operation of the device.


CLS 137/329.01
TXT Devices under subclass 329 relating to valve heads and/or seats.


CLS 137/329.02
TXT Devices under subclass 329.01 having oppositely disposed duplicate surfaces
    forming a unitary structure.


CLS 137/329.03
TXT Devices under subclass 329.02 relating to an homogeneous material forming
    the surfaces and their intermediate support.


CLS 137/329.04
TXT Devices under subclass 329.03 relating to valve heads.


CLS 137/329.05
TXT Devices under subclass 329.01 in which different portions of the same
    surface are adjusted to a certain position to form a valve interface.


CLS 137/329.06
TXT Devices under subclass 329.01 in which are stored adjacently a plurality of
    separate elements forming duplicate surfaces successively used.


CLS 137/329.1
TXT Apparatus under subclass 315 in which the main valve is arranged to be
    removable and a supplemental check valve is provided upstream, biased to
    close by fluid pressure and/or a spring; the check-valve being maintained
    inoperative in normal use of the main valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    285,    300 and 301+, for similar devices in hydrants.

    512+    and 613+, for serial valves wherein one valve is a supplemental
    valve to permit the repair of another valve.


CLS 137/329.2
TXT Devices under subclass 329.1 in which the check valve is biased opened by a
    part of the main valve which is movable in normal usage of the main valve.
    Usually a spacer or projection between the check valve and main valve is
    provided.


CLS 137/329.3
TXT Devices under subclass 329.2 in which the check valve is of the ball-check
    type.


CLS 137/329.4
TXT Devices under subclass 329.2 having a spring bias to close the check valve
    or to supplement the bias of the fluid.


CLS 137/330
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which means is provided for moving
    either a valve or a valve seat with respect to its cooperating member
    independently of opening or closing movement in such a direction or between
    such limits as to be ineffective to open or close the valve, usually to
    reduce friction or to prevent sticking or to equalize wear.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include a rotation of a reciprocating
    valve after it is seated merely for the purpose of perfecting the seating
    of the valve or any other movement which is performed as a part of the
    normal actuation of the valve.  Such patents are classified on the basis of
    the actuator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242+,   for movements of valves in mechanical cleaning.

    315+,   for valve movements associated with repair or tapping, especially
    subclass 329 for arrangements for bringing a new wearing surface of a valve
    or valve seat into operative position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 56 for pressure actuated
    valves with plural motions of the valve, and subclasses 215+ for mechanical
    movement actuated valves with plural motions of the valve, and see the
    search notes thereto.


CLS 137/331
TXT Apparatus under subclass 330 which provides means for imparting rotary
    motion to a reciprocating valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for reciprocating valves which continuously rotate with a speed
    responsive actuator.

    243,    for valve grinding movement of a reciprocating valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 215+ for valves and their
    actuators in which the valves have plural diverse motions, as rotating and
    reciprocating.


CLS 137/332
TXT Apparatus under subclass 331 in which the rotating means is a turbine
    mounted on the valve or valve stem.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    499,    for condition responsive valve actuation by a turbine reactor
    connected to the valve, and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 137/333
TXT Apparatus under subclass 331 in which a manual actuator is provided for
    rotating the valve.


CLS 137/334
TXT Fluent material device under the class definition to which has been added
    means for heating or cooling the device or the fluent material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include heating or cooling of the
    system by the transfer of heat between the fluent material and the device
    or from one part of the fluent material to another except where a part of
    the fluent material is diverted to heat or cool the device or where part of
    the fluent material in a separate channel is placed in heat exchange
    relationship with respect to other parts of the fluent material under
    conditions of difference in temperature.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not include heating or cooling to cause
    actuation of a valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for processes of affecting flow by the use of heat.

    241,    for steam sterilizing in flow handling systems.

    297,    for hydrants with heaters.

    468,    for thermally responsive valves, and see the search notes thereto.

    564,    for thermal type closed circulating systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclasses for refrigeration processes
    and apparatus for cooling a material, particularly subclasses 45.1+ for
    process and apparatus for handling liquefied gas as a commodity including
    steps or means involving pressure or temperature control special to
    liquefied gas and more than required for other liquids, and subclasses 389+
    for a withdrawable liquid cooler and subclass 404 for a gas (air) cooler.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 142.5 for internal combustion
    engines with heating means.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 32+ for devices for thawing
    pipes and tubular conduits.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for means for handling fluid
    for heat exchange purposes.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 113 for dispensers with burners and subclass
    146 for dispensers with other heating and cooling means.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 11 for heat motor actuated
    valves.


CLS 137/335
TXT Apparatus under subclass 334 in which the source of heat for the device
    includes a burner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 113 for dispensers with burners.


CLS 137/336
TXT Apparatus under subclass 335 in which an enclosed passageway for gases and
    flames from the burner extends through the fluid.


CLS 137/337
TXT Fluid handling systems under subclass 334 comprising hot and cold water
    systems having a cross connection from the hot water channel to the cold
    water channel to permit flow of hot water to the cold water channel.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes antifreeze thermosiphons and no-drain
    devices for hot water tanks.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59+     and 118+, for flow diverting means responsive to freezing or other
    temperature variations.

    563+,   for distribution systems providing continuous circulation of fluid
    therein, especially subclass 564 for thermal circulating systems.

    602+,   for systems comprising multiple inlets with a single outlet,
    especially subclasses 888+ and 896+ for mixing valves; and see the search
    notes to subclasses 888 and 896.


CLS 137/338
TXT Fluid handling systems under subclass 334 in which (1) air as a heating or
    cooling fluid for the system has a thermally caused movement through
    channels whereby it is warmed by contact with the earth and/or an object
    buried in the earth, such as a pipe line; or (2) the fluent material system
    or a part thereof is equipped with a fan or fins to aid in the heating or
    cooling of the device or the fluid by heat exchange with the air.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    564,    for distribution systems involving closed circulating systems of
    the thermal type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 41 and 52.1+ for air cooled
    internal combustion engines.


CLS 137/339
TXT Apparatus under subclass 334 in which a part of the fluid is diverted in a
    separate channel to heat or cool the device or a part thereof, or to heat
    or cool another part of the fluid that has assumed a different temperature.

    (1)     Note.  See the definition of subclass 334, (1) Note.


CLS 137/340
TXT Apparatus under subclass 334 in which a heating or cooling medium
    circulates in a channel which is in heat exchange relationship with the
    fluent material device or part thereof.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes only devices in which the heating or
    cooling medium is maintained separate from the fluent material normally
    operated on by the device.  There is no mixing of the medium and the fluent
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    375,    for jacketed flow devices in which the jacket may contain heating
    or cooling means or fluid, but in which there is no means for causing or
    directing circulation within the jacket.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for fluid handling means as
    an adjunct to heat exchange means.


CLS 137/341
TXT Apparatus under subclass 334 in which an electric heating element is used
    to heat the fluid or the device or a part thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Electric elements used to actuate parts of the fluent
    material device, such as a valve, and which are in the flow path of the
    fluent material, are not included in this subclass even though they
    incidentally may heat the fluent material as an inherent part of their mode
    of operation, since they are not effective as heat exchange means except
    during valve actuation.  Such devices have been classified as valve
    actuators.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66,     for thermoelectric combustion failure responsive fuel safety
    cut-offs for burners.

    76,     for heaters for destructible or fusible elements in safety cut-offs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 33 for electric thawing and
    freeze protection for pipes and tubular conduits.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 628+ for inductive fluid heating,
    subclasses 687+ for microwave fluid heating, and subclass 772 for the
    capacitive dielectric heating of fluent materials, and subclasses 280+ for
    other electric fluid heating apparatus.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 11 for electrical heat motor
    valve actuators, and subclasses 139 and 140 for solenoid operated valves
    where the solenoid is within or surrounds the flow path.  See (1) Note
    above.


CLS 137/342
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a fluent material handling
    device combined with a fixture or attachment carried by the device or a
    part thereof exterior of the flow path for supporting material or articles
    that may be used in conjunction with the device or its contents or for
    supporting persons, usually workmen who are tending the fluent material
    handling device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    268,    where the material is held within the flow to be dissolved or
    entrained.

    374,    for fluid handling systems combined with articles of furniture
    where no specific support for other articles or material, such as a shelf,
    is claimed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclass 52 for a fluid conduit
    serving as a support for a ladder or scaffold.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 192 for dispensers combined with supports for
    additional articles, as tools, oil cans, mirrors, or advertising material.


CLS 137/343
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising (1) fluid handling devices
    combined with means for supporting the device or a part thereof relative to
    means external to the device; (2) the combination of such devices or parts
    thereof with an enclosing member, fixture, or attachment to (a) protect the
    device or part thereof from soil, contamination, injury, theft or loss; or
    (b) protect persons or things from injury through contact with the system
    or a part thereof.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include supports or connectors
    between parts of the same fluent material system.  The combination of such
    supports with elements of the system may be found in the subclass involving
    the pertinent elements of the fluid distributing system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    342,    for systems having supporting means for material or things external
    to the system, including workmen's supports.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 201 for meter boxes.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 102, 131, 142.2, 142.3, 144, 160+, and 173+
    for dispensers having casings and/or external supports, and see the notes
    to subclass 173.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 130+ and 146+
    for spray apparatus having mobile supply and discharge, subclasses 722+ for
    sprayers having ambulant discharge and stationary supply, subclasses 200+,
    225.1+ and 273+ for devices having nonambulant supply and discharge,
    subclass 168 for fluid sprinklers having hose holders and a fluid supply,
    and subclasses 288+ for guards and/or protectors for the apparatus or for
    the operator.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 49+ for pipe and cable supports, 75+ for hose
    and nozzle supports, 102+ for nursing bottle supports, 108+ for past tube
    supports, 128+ for movable receptacle supports and 146+ for supports for
    stationary receptacles.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 143+ for the mounting of
    valves on other parts of a fluid handling device.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 19, 131.1 and 136.1+ for pipe
    and plate or box couplings, 149.1+ for pipe and box couplings, and 189+ for
    pipe and plate couplings.


CLS 137/345
TXT Apparatus under subclass 899 in which the casing, support or protector is a
    locomotive or a part thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156+,   for gas pressure discharge of liquid feed-traps to boilers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 26+ for locomotives, especially
    subclasses 37+ for steam locomotives.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 173 and 174
    for sprayers attached to track guided cars and locomotive cabs.

    291,    Track Sanders, subclasses 3+ for fluid delivery in track sanders.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 84+ for locomotive cab ventilation.


CLS 137/346
TXT Apparatus under subclass 345 in which the casing or protector is the boiler
    or steam dome of a locomotive.


CLS 137/347
TXT Apparatus under subclass 899 in which the casing support or protector is a
    railroad car or a part thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 239+
    for a refrigerated vehicle.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 238.1+ for a special railway car
    body, especially subclasses 358+ for tank cars.

    213,    Railway Draft Appliances, subclass 76 for the combination of a car
    coupling and a train line (fluid conduit) coupling.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 83+ for ventilation of railway cars.


CLS 137/348
TXT Apparatus under subclass 347 in which the supports, casing or protector is
    the car frame or a part thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 396+ for car framing.


CLS 137/349
TXT Apparatus under subclass 347 in which the support casing or protector is
    the end or end wall of car.


CLS 137/350
TXT Apparatus under subclass 347 in which the support, casing or protector is
    the roof, wall or floor of a railroad car.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247.11+, especially subclasses 247.33, 247.35, 247.37, and 247.39 for
    liquid sealed refrigeration car drain installations.

    354,    for fluid handling devices installed in the floor of a vehicle.

    360+    and 362, for fluid handling devices installed in the wall or floor
    of a building.


CLS 137/351
TXT Apparatus under subclass 899 in which the casing, support or protector is a
    self propelled land vehicle that contains within itself means of motion and
    direction control.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38+,    for fluent material handling devices controlled by the position or
    inertia of the system, especially subclass 43 for safety oventurn valves.

    47+,    for speed responsive valve control.

    345+    and 347+, for fluid handling means installed in railway rolling
    stock.

    479+,   for combustion engine type valves responsive to suction in the
    intake system.

    598,    for hill holders in fluid pressure braking systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 239+ for dump type car bodies and
    subclasses 358+ for tank cars.

    114,    Ships, subclass 74 for tankers and subclasses 232+ for oil
    distributors for ships.

    222,    Dispensers, subclasses 608+ for ambulant dispensers, and see the
    search notes to subclass 608.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 130+ and 146
    for sprayers having ambulant supply and discharge, and subclasses 722+ for
    spraying devices having ambulant discharge and stationary supply.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 136 for material discharging and diffusing
    from aircraft.

    258,    Railway Mail Delivery, appropriate subclasses, especially
    subclasses 1.2+ for refueling aircraft in flight.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 830+ for tank type land vehicles.

    291,    Track Sanders, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 3+ for
    the fluid delivery type.


CLS 137/352
TXT Apparatus under subclass 351 in which a fluid control means or fluid
    delivery device is mounted on or associated with the steering post or
    steering wheel of the vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 491+ for hand controlled
    lever and linkage systems, and 552+ for hand wheels.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 78 for a motor vehicle having a
    controlling device which is mounted on the steering post or handle.


CLS 137/353
TXT Apparatus under subclass 351 in which the fluid handling device is mounted
    on or associated with the dashboard of automobile.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 289 and 295 for valves
    provided with actuating means operable from stations more or less remote
    from the valve, and see the search notes to these subclasses.


CLS 137/354
TXT Apparatus under subclass 351 in which the fluid handling device is mounted
    on or associated with the floor or frame of the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    348     and 350, for fluid handling devices associated with the frame or
    floor of a railway car.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 295 for pedal operated valve
    devices, and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 137/355
TXT Apparatus under subclass 351 in which the fluid handling device is mounted
    on or associated with the fender or running board of the vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclasses 42.32+ for vehicle fender
    attached package and article carriers.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 289 and 295 for valves
    provided with actuators having extensions or remote or plural terminals
    which might extend from a valve mounted on a vehicle to a fender or running
    board, and see the search notes to these subclasses.


CLS 137/355.12
TXT Apparatus under subclass 899 having a revolvable means for storing a
    flexible flow line mounted on the vehicle or on a part thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 199 for
    ambulant reel and ground supported frame for flexible flow line storage
    including nozzle detail.


CLS 137/355.16
TXT Apparatus under subclass 343 comprising a storage type, use and nonuse
    holding and supporting means, and/or rewind or retracting means for a
    flexible conduit combined with some element or elements of the fluid supply
    means.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are hose brackets adapted to be released by
    distension or inflation of the hose under pressure of fluid contents.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 239, Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing,
    section III(b) of the class definition for a statement regarding various
    subcombinations of the above subject matter as related to Class 242,
    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, Class 248, Supports, Class 251, Valves and
    Valve Actuation, and Class 285, Pipe Joints or Couplings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 195+ for
    combinations of this subject matter and specific nozzle or outlet
    arrangement at the terminus of the fluid handling elements.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 370+ for a reeling
    device for handling elongated material including a hose without a specified
    coupling between a fluid supply and hose.


CLS 137/355.17
TXT Apparatus under subclass 355.16 provided with means for accommodating a
    plurality of flow line conduits.


CLS 137/355.18
TXT Apparatus under subclass 355.16 provided with a connection between the flow
    control means for the fluid and the flow conduit or the storing means
    therefor whereby movement of the conduit or its storing means to flow
    discharging position actuates the flow control means to fluid transmitting
    position.

    (1)     Note.  Flow regulation does not include valves operated by the
    jettisoning or uncoupling of the flow line from the storage or fluid
    handling system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 149.8 for a valve operated by
    motion of the flow path.


CLS 137/355.19
TXT Apparatus under subclass 355.18 in which the flow line storing means is a
    spool or drum and movement of the storing means as a consequence of flow
    line movement actuates the flow regulating means.


CLS 137/355.2
TXT Apparatus under subclass 355.16 provided with means in addition to the hose
    support or storage means and its associated support against gravity means
    whereby the flow line conduit is returned to its nonuse or stored position.

    (1)     Note.  A crank mechanism which is connected to the storing means by
    a force of speed varying mechanism is considered to be a return means for
    this subclass.  A mere crank fixedly attached to a spool or reeling
    mechanism is considered as no different from direct contact with such
    retrieval mechanism and does not qualify as the additional means required
    in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 197 for a
    corresponding field of search involving a specific terminal member.


CLS 137/355.21
TXT Apparatus under subclass 355.2 provided with an arresting or checking means
    acting on the return mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  A dashpot which slows down the final movement of the return
    means is considered to be a power stop or brake for this subclass.


CLS 137/355.22
TXT Apparatus under subclass 355.21 in which the actuation of the arresting or
    checking element for the return mechanism responds to the position of the
    flexible flow line conduit in its housing, or storage encasing means.


CLS 137/355.23
TXT Apparatus under subclass 355.2 provided with additional means which tends
    to return the flexible conduit to its nonuse or stored position.


CLS 137/355.24
TXT Apparatus under subclass 355.23 having a relatively long spar or beam to
    which at least a portion of the flexible conduit is attached and which is
    mounted for movement relative to its support.


CLS 137/355.25
TXT Apparatus under subclass 355.23 in which the means tending to return the
    flexible flow line to nonuse or stored position is a weight.


CLS 137/355.26
TXT Apparatus under subclass 355.16 having a spool or drum on which the flow
    line is wound or coiled and provided with structure to support the spool or
    drum.

    (1)     Note.  The flow conduit which is ultimately connected to the
    flexible flow line conduit may also serve as part of or all the bearing or
    support surface for the spool or drum.


CLS 137/355.27
TXT Apparatus under subclass 355.26 in which the spool or drum is carried by a
    frame in contact with and supported by the ground or floor or other similar
    substantially horizontal surface.


CLS 137/355.28
TXT Apparatus under subclass 355.16 in which the means for storing the flexible
    conduit comprises a frame having a bottom and sides whereby the conduit may
    be looped back and forth or convoluted on itself, in both cases each loop
    or convolution being contiguous to the next adjacent.

    (1)     Note.  For classification herein, the hose must not be suspended
    but must be in a housing having a bottom on which the first loop or coil is
    laid and must have upstanding walls or elements to retain the folded or
    coiled hose within the confines of the holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    335.16, where the hose is folded and suspended from a single peg or link.


CLS 137/356
TXT Apparatus under subclass 343 in which the support is a structural member
    immovably joined to the ground, or in which the casing or protector is
    immovably joined to and partially or wholly embedded in the ground.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219+,   for Larner-Johnson valves, which are commonly used in underground
    water systems.

    236,    for distribution systems involving geographic features.

    272+,   for hydrants and railway water cranes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 173+ for dispenser supports and subclass 192
    for dispensers combined with buildings.


CLS 137/357
TXT Apparatus under subclass 356 in which the fluid handling device is mounted
    in or associated with a building.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 301+ for
    installed systems for air blast and suction cleaning.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 11+ for a cover
    with an eave or valley gutter, subclasses 131+ for a burial vault with
    fluid guiding feature, subclass 168 for a building with a protective liquid
    supply, subclasses 192+ for a liquid or fluent material container with a
    single port, subclasses 198+ for an enclosure with fluid guiding port to a
    usable space, subclass 218 for a flue with a fluid directing feature,
    subclass 219 for a flue connected to a building structure, subclasses
    220.1+ for a service duct within a barrier of a building construction, and
    subclasses 302.1+ for a residual building construction or component with a
    plugged vent or passage between its interior and the ambient.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses
    16+ for fluid distributing systems.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 192 for dispensers combined with building
    structures.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 200+, 225.1+
    and 273+ for installed systems of that class, especially subclasses 209+
    for vehicle washers with overhead fixed supply pipes.


CLS 137/358
TXT Apparatus under subclass 357 in which the building has an external casing
    or pit connected to the building serving as a housing or a support for part
    or all of the fluent material device, and having an opening exterior of the
    building providing admittance to portions of the system.


CLS 137/359
TXT Apparatus under subclass 357 in which the fluid handling system includes a
    member which surrounds a pipe or pipes and covers the opening through which
    the pipe or pipes pass through a wall or floor.

    (1)     Note.  The supports, casings, or protectors found in this subclass
    close the opening around the pipe and provide an ornamental appearance for
    the arrangement, as well as supporting and/or centering the pipe in the
    opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    296,    for caps or covers for hydrant casings.

    371,    for closures for valve and meter wells.

    380,    for covers for beer cooler faucet apertures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 241+ for closures of the face plate type.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 49+ for pipe and cable supports, especially
    subclasses 56+ for the through-plate type.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclass 357 for escutcheon plates applied to
    closure latch devices.


CLS 137/360
TXT Apparatus under subclass 357 in which the fluid handling device is mounted
    on or associated with the wall of a building.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    350,    for fluid handling devices associated with the wall of a railway
    car.

    359,    for escutcheon type supports for pipes, etc.


CLS 137/361
TXT Apparatus under subclass 360 in which the support, casing or protector is a
    covered space in the wall of building used for concealing the outlet of a
    gas main.


CLS 137/362
TXT Apparatus under subclass 357 in which the floor of the building or a part
    thereof acts as a support, casing or protector, the relation being other
    than that involved in merely setting the device on the floor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247.43, for floor installed liquid seal traps.

    350     and 354, for fluid handling systems mounted on or associated with
    the floor of a vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 295 for pedal type valve
    actuators passing through the floor of a building.


CLS 137/363
TXT Apparatus under subclass 356 in which the support, casing or protector is a
    means covering at least a portion of a fluent material system and acting as
    a support for the ground around the part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219+,   for Larner-Johnson valves.

    236,    for distribution systems involving geographic features.

    272+,   for hydrants and railway water cranes, especially subclasses 291+
    and 294+, for vertical casings enclosing a water column and/or a valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, appropriate subclasses for wells comprising casings
    enclosing valves and/or tubing.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 201+ for
    ground installed or embedded spray systems.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 2+ for a drain
    associated with road structure and subclasses 25+ for a vault cover-closure
    associated with pavement structure.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 36+ for below ground
    irrigation systems; subclasses 132+ for tunnels and methods and apparatus
    for constructing the same; subclasses 154+ for pipe and cable laying
    apparatus and methods; and subclass 272 for earth shoring structures.


CLS 137/364
TXT Apparatus under subclass 363 in which the support, casing or protector is
    an apertured vertical casing partially or wholly surrounding and providing
    access to a valve or meter connected to a buried pipe line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291+    and 294+, for hydrant casings, especially subclass 295 for hydrant
    casings flush with the ground.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 201 for meter casings or supports,
    and subclass 277 for frostproof meter constructions.


CLS 137/365
TXT Apparatus under subclass 364 in which the apertured vertical casing, valve
    or pipe line has a means to cause coincidence of the axis of the valve
    actuator and the casing, to enable a person applying a removable actuator
    to locate the valve connection easily.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 291+ for detachable
    actuators for valves, and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 137/366
TXT Apparatus under subclass 365 in which the vertical well-forming casing or
    tube rests on a base plate or section which lies beneath the valve in the
    pipe, the pipe being held in place between the base plate and the upper
    section of the casing with the valve centered in the well.


CLS 137/367
TXT Apparatus under subclass 365 in which the top of the valve casing has means
    engaging the well-forming casing to insure assembly in proper alignment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277     and 287, for vertical fluid channels of the hydrant type with
    telescopic casings.

    315+,   for fluid systems having means for facilitating assembly of the
    parts of the system, but not including means which hold the system together
    or in alignment when in operative condition.

    369     and 370, for telescoping valve and meter wells.


CLS 137/368
TXT Valve wells under subclass 364 in which an operating member for the valve
    extends through the vertical column and terminates at or near the surface
    of the ground.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272+,   for hydrants, most of which have a vertically extending actuator.

    570,    596+ and 625.2+, for drain valves which have vertically extending
    actuators, especially pump drains and stop and waste devices located in
    inaccessible places.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 291+ for valves provided
    with detachable actuators and subclass 293 for valves with extensible
    actuators.


CLS 137/369
TXT Valve wells under subclass 368 in which the vertical column is divided into
    sections slidable one within the other, which sections may be locked
    together to fix the height of the column.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    287,    for vertically mounted fluid channels of the hydrant type having
    telescopic casings, movement of the conduit actuating the valve.

    370,    for telescopic casings comprising valve and meter wells, no valve
    actuator being claimed.


CLS 137/370
TXT Valve wells under subclass 364 in which the vertical column is divided into
    movable sections slidable one within the other, which sections may be
    locked together to fix the height of the casing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277,    for a rotatable water crane having a vertically movable riser.

    369,    for telescoping casing combined with valve actuator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 3.92, 3.94, and 4.01+ for sectional and
    telescoping containers of general application.


CLS 137/371
TXT Devices under subclass 364 comprising closures for the upper ends of the
    valve or meter wells.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    295     and 296, for hydrant casings flush with ground and/or covers or
    caps for hydrants.

    800,    for closures in fluid handling devices, and see the search notes
    thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 200+ for receptacle closures of general
    application.


CLS 137/372
TXT Apparatus under subclass 363 in which the fluent material system is a pipe
    line.

    (1)     Note.  Pipe systems having means or arrangements to compensate for
    thermal expansion are found here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for processes relating to pipe line flow.

    236,    for distribution systems including pipe lines where special
    accommodation to geographical features is involved.

    317+,   for pipe line repair involving tapping a line under pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 105 for pipes in a trench;
    subclass 108 for underground conduits for supporting cables therein;
    subclass 113 for underground conduits for supporting pipes therein; and
    subclasses 124+, 131, 137+, and 140+ for composite pipes and conduits.


CLS 137/373
TXT Apparatus under subclass 356 in which the longitudinal dimension of the
    support, casing or protector extends upwardly and is reduced in
    cross-section at successively higher levels; or in which the support,
    casing or protector is designed primarily with a view to elevation by
    making its height greater than its diameter or making its height relatively
    great by positioning the support on another structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    376,    for tank supports of other types.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 40 for a specific
    tower or shaft supporting another device, e.g., a tank.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 173+ for dispenser supports.


CLS 137/374
TXT Apparatus under subclass 343 in which the support, casing or protector is
    the whole or a part of one of the articles of convenience or decoration
    used to furnish a house or apartment.

    (1)     Note.  The term furniture refers to the movable articles such as
    chairs, tables, beds, desks, cabinets, stoves, used in a house or apartment
    as distinguished from the permanent fixtures such as plumbing, and the term
    house furnishings means small articles such as kitchen utensils or lamps.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247.11+, especially subclasses 247.33, 247.35, 247.37, and 247.39 for
    liquid sealed refrigerator drains.

    312+,   for fluid handling systems comprising refrigerator drip catchers.

    342,    for fluid handling devices associated with items of furniture which
    claim article supporting surfaces other than a mere top surface, as a shelf.

    562,    for distribution systems comprising faucet connected, sink drained
    devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 261 for a refrigerator combined with
    furniture.


CLS 137/375
TXT Apparatus under subclass 343 in which the fluent material device is
    completely or partially surrounded by a layer of heat exchange or non
    conducting material to promote or prevent heat radiation or absorption, or
    by a protective cover or layer which may be either outside the fluid
    confining member or inside it, being in fact a liner in the latter case,
    the layer or cover being more or less similar in shape or proportions to
    the enclosed device.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes fluent material devices enclosed in a
    casing to confine air or a vacuum as a heat insulating material means for
    the fluent material device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264,    for plural tanks having outlets which provide for flow other than
    from one tank to another, one of which tanks may be a cooling or insulating
    jacket for another, but which must have a claimed outlet or inlet for
    fluent material.

    334+,   for heat exchange means involving jackets and casings, especially
    subclass 336 for flues extending through a casing for heating the contents
    and subclass 340 for jacket-type heat exchangers with means to cause or
    direct flow in the fluid heat exchange material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, subclass 156 for a flaccid
    protective cover for a faucet.

    220,    Receptacles, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 415+ for
    spaced wall or jacket type and 470 for linings.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 131 for dispensers having a spaced,
    nondispensing jacket and subclass 183 for other jacketed dispensers.


CLS 137/376
TXT Apparatus under subclass 343 in which the fluent material device includes a
    tank and the support, casing, or protector holds the tank in position with
    reference to an external area or point of reference.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    373,    for tapering or tower type supports.

    374,    for systems which are associated with furniture or other house
    furnishings.

    453+,   for barometric type systems.

    899+,   for vehicular supports, and see the search notes to subclasses 899
    and 351 respectively.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 160+ for dispensers which are movably
    mounted with respect to their supports, and subclasses 173+ for other
    dispenser supports.


CLS 137/377
TXT Devices under subclass 343 in which the fluent material handling device or
    a part thereof is totally or partially surrounded by a casing (1) to
    prevent damage to an object external to the device, (2) to seal the device
    against leakage to or from the device outside the normal fluid path, (3) to
    protect the device or parts thereof or the contents against damage or
    contamination by contact with external objects, dirt or germs, or (4) to
    prevent unauthorized use.

    (1)     Note.  The guard or protector must be external to the system, so
    that it does not serve to confine or control the material in the system nor
    to close the flow openings of the system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    294+,   for hydrant casings, especially subclass 296 for a cap, cover or
    hood used as a guard on a hydrant.

    317,    for antisplash shields used to prevent escape of fluid when a
    pressure system is tapped.

    375,    for casings which are close fittings or of a shape generally
    corresponding to that of the device, and substantially complete, and see
    the search notes thereto.

    383+,   for locks or seals to prevent unauthorized use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 182 for covers for the operating parts of
    dispensers; subclass 192 for bumpers and guards for dispensers.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 89+ for valves provided with
    actuator disabling means to prevent unintentional operation.


CLS 137/378
TXT Guards or shields under subclass 377 in which a spigot or faucet of a
    fluent material device is provided with a shock absorbing fixture or
    attachment which will be struck by a container when moved into position for
    filling from the spigot or faucet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 149 for receiver lift means with additional cushioning means,
    subclass 289 for laterally shiftable vent tubes, and subclasses 351+ for
    receiver actuated discharge means.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 156 for receptacle operated
    nonstop valves.


CLS 137/379
TXT Guards or shields under subclass 377 in which a nozzle of a fluent material
    device is provided with an attachment or fixture to prevent scratching of
    the surface of a container into which the nozzle is inserted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    801,    for nozzles and spouts in fluid handling systems, and see the
    search notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensers, subclass 566 for nozzles, spouts and pouring devices
    for dispensers.


CLS 137/380
TXT Guards or shields under subclass 377 in which a closure member seals the
    opening between the spigot and refrigerator casing of a beer cooler.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    317,    for shields for sealing the opening between a beer keg and spigot
    of the tapping type.

    359,    for escutcheon type supports for pipes passing through the walls of
    buildings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclass 357 for escutcheons for closure
    fastener elements.


CLS 137/381
TXT Guards and shields under subclass 377 which comprise (1) a cylindrical or
    conical member attached to the spout of the fluent material device to
    prevent contamination of the spout either during or after the flow of
    fluent material; or (2) a movable shield that covers the outlet area or
    spout when not in use.

    (1)     Note.  Where the movable guard covers only the outlet end of the
    spout and actually closes it against flow, it is considered to be a valve
    or closure and classification is on that basis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    800,    for closures in fluid handling systems, and see the search notes
    thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 182 for guards or covers for operating parts
    of a dispenser.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 155 for arrangements wherein a
    valve or closure covers a spout.


CLS 137/382
TXT Guards and shields under subclass 377 in which the valve member of a fluent
    material device (1) is enclosed in a casing which is locked against
    unauthorized use of the valve; or (2) has an internal key which is fastened
    to another object to prevent movement of the valve to an unauthorized
    position; or (3) in which the valve is totally or partially enclosed in a
    casing or shield or has casings covering all or part of the operating
    handle or stem or a valve to protect the stem or operating handle against
    damage or unintentional movement to or from a desired position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312+,   for valves combined with casings which act as drip catchers.

    383+,   for valves with locks but without casings totally or partially
    enclosing the valve.

    586,    for distribution systems in which there is an interlock between a
    valve actuator and a closure for an access opening.

    613+,   for closures used in series with a valve in distribution systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 173+ for dispenser guards in the nature of
    casings.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 89+ for valve actuator
    holding means and subclass 297 for detents which are not enclosing devices.


CLS 137/382.5
TXT Devices under subclass 382 wherein there is a particularly shaped aperture
    in the casing to accommodate a detachable actuator having a particular
    shape and being adapted to engage the valve stem inside the casing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 291+ for other valves with
    detachable actuators.


CLS 137/383
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a lock means which prevents
    unauthorized use or adjustment or a sealing means the breaking of which
    indicates unauthorized use or adjustment.

    (1)     Note.  To be classified here the lock means must be a lock as
    defined in Class 70 and not merely a latch or detent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    382,    for valve guards and shields, including boxes which are locked.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, appropriate subclasses for locks, per se.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 346+ for combined filling devices and receivers having
    interlocked discharge means, support or coupling, and subclasses 348+ for
    supply means carried receiver flow control opening means.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 153.01+ for dispenser locks or fastening
    seals.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclasses 307+, 327 and 328+ for seals of the
    closure fastening type.


CLS 137/384
TXT Apparatus under subclass 383 which uses a seal as a means for preventing
    and/or indicating unauthorized use or adjustment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 153.05+ for dispenser fastening seals.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclasses 307+ for seals of the closure
    fastener type, subclass 327 for seal bolts and subclasses 328+ for shackles
    for seals.


CLS 137/384.2
TXT Devices under subclass 383 in which the structure which is employed to
    actuate the lock also actuates the valve.


CLS 137/384.4
TXT Devices under subclass 384.2 in which the lock comprises an element which
    is, or a plurality of elements which are, manually manipulable in a
    predetermined sequence, or to a predetermined position to effect the
    operation of the lock.


CLS 137/384.6
TXT Devices under subclass 384.2 in which the valve head is biased to or from
    the open position.


CLS 137/384.8
TXT Devices under subclass 384.2 in which the valve head is connected to the
    lock and actuated therewith by means comprising two or more fixed and
    movable parts so combined that the motion of one compels or completely
    controls or constrains motion of the other according to a law of operation
    inherent in and depending on the nature of the combination.


CLS 137/385
TXT Apparatus under subclass 383 with a lock means the proximate effect of
    which is to prevent rotation of a rotatable element.


CLS 137/386
TXT Apparatus under the class definition which includes an element which senses
    the level of a liquid in means to receive an accumulation thereof and in
    response thereto exercises a control of the flow of fluid or acts to
    maintain that level of the liquid.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus which maintains the liquid level by means of
    overflow pipes or arrangements only is excluded from this and indented
    subclasses, since there is not change in the operation or relative position
    of any of the parts of the system which is caused by or related to the
    maintenance of or failure to maintain the level.

    (2)     Note.  Valve actuating means operated by diverting a part of the
    flow into a metering device have been classified as valve actuators, even
    though the metering device is a level responsive type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101.25+,for a self-proportioning system with liquid level sensing.

    132+,   for periodic siphons, i.e., those which discharge as often as a
    certain level is reached in the supply container or receiver.

    154+,   for pressure systems containing diverse fluids which include a
    control of fluid in response to a liquid level, especially subclasses 197+
    for the hygroscopic type of discriminating outlet for gas.

    213+,   for diverse fluid containing pressure systems having level
    responsive gas vents or whistles.

    262,    for flow dividing compartments, the outlet from one of which may be
    a level maintaining overflow.

    561+,   for apparatus which maintains a desired level in a container by a
    continuous over-supply, especially subclasses 563+ for such systems which
    return the overflow to the supply and 577+ for tanks with movable or
    adjustable overflow including float supported tank outlets in subclass 578.
     See (1) Note.

    624.14, for repeating cycle valves actuated by line fluid only.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 188 and 218+ for refrigeration means
    having liquid level control.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 52+ for automatic dispensers, especially
    subclass 62 for those having a float controlled pressure liquid and
    subclasses 64+ for material level control.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 12+ for valves actuated by
    flow metering arrangements, and subclasses 15+ for valves having compulsory
    cutoff after a flow period.  See (2) Note, above.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 237+ for liquid developer applied to
    a latent image within an electrophotographic device.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 36+ for control of a pump drive motor in response
    to liquid accumulation of pump fluid.


CLS 137/387
TXT Apparatus under subclass 386 in which the cycle of operation of a washing
    machine is controlled in response to a change in liquid level.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240,    for the addition of separate material in an installed cleaning
    system.

    268,    for the addition of nonfluid material to a flow system.

    331+,   for cyclic or program type actuation of valves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    automatic washing machines, especially subclasses 12.01+ for single tub
    machines with automatic sequential operation.


CLS 137/388
TXT Apparatus under subclass 386 wherein a liquid level responsive device is
    provided to exclude an external liquid from a gas inlet or outlet such as a
    shipboard ventilator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40+,    for marine governors, i.e., control by position of a device
    relative to a body of water.

    45+,    for control by a pendulum or swinging member responsive to position
    or inertia of a system.

    197+,   for discriminating outlets for gas in fluid separating traps or
    vents for diverse fluid containing pressure systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 21+ for a closure
    responsive to or directly actuated by ambient fluid.

    114,    Ships, subclass 212 for ship ventilating valves.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclass 5 for
    weather initiated automatic control of flexible closures and panels, e.g.,
    screens, awnings, etc.


CLS 137/389
TXT Apparatus under subclass 386 wherein the level responding or maintaining
    flow is increased or diminished by an external means or in response to a
    change in condition other than liquid level, either by a means acting upon
    the liquid level responsive control means or by a second means in series or
    parallel therewith.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition, section 3 for collected search
    notes on automatic and combined automatic and nonautomatic controls in this
    class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    410,    for valves which are opened by external means and closed by float
    means.


CLS 137/390
TXT Apparatus under subclass 389 in which the second control is a manual
    control.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181,    for traps in diverse fluid containing pressure systems having
    automatic liquid discharge control with an auxiliary manual control.


CLS 137/391
TXT Apparatus under subclass 386 which includes means responsive to variations
    of the level of the accumulated liquid to control both the inflow to and
    outflow from an accumulation of liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    214,    for high and low level response associated with gas vents or
    whistles in diverse fluid containing pressure systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 68 for plural float operated flow controllers
    in dispensers.


CLS 137/392
TXT Apparatus under subclass 386 in which the liquid level is sensed by sensing
    an electrical characteristic of a liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for processes of fluid mixing controlled by the conductivity of the
    mixture.

    93,     for self correlating systems controlled by optical or chemical
    properties of the ingredients.


CLS 137/393
TXT Apparatus under subclass 386 wherein the level to be controlled is in a
    pressure tank, as a boiler, and a separate control chamber is provided to
    control a liquid inflow or outflow line of the tank.  The control chamber
    is provided with a connection to the tank at the desired liquid level so
    that when the liquid is above this level the chamber is filled with liquid
    by the tank pressure and when the liquid is below the desired level the
    liquid in the control chamber is drained to the pressure tank.  The
    presence or absence of liquid in the control chamber causes the control of
    the liquid inflow or outflow line of the tank.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158,    for other liquid level devices of this type which further control
    the application of a gas pressure to a feed trap to discharge the same to a
    boiler.


CLS 137/395
TXT Apparatus under subclass 386 which include means to control the outflow
    from the accumulation thereof in response to an element sensing the level
    of the accumulated liquid.

    (1)     Note.  A patent to be classified in this or indented subclass must
    claim control of the outflow.  Level responsive valve control which may
    control either an inflow or outflow and claimed broadly is classified in
    later subclasses of this group.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165+,   for float operated discharge of liquid feed traps to boilers.

    192+,   for float operated discriminating outlets for liquids in diverse
    fluid containing pressure systems.

    202,    for float operated discriminating outlets for gas in diverse fluid
    containing pressure systems.


CLS 137/396
TXT Apparatus under subclass 395 in which a means sensing a predetermined,
    usually high, liquid level or a full condition of a tank which is
    accumulating liquid controls the opening of the tank outlet, allowing the
    liquid to discharge, and the closing of the outlet at a low level or when
    the tank is empty, the cycle being repeated as long as liquid is supplied
    to the tank.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102+,   for the supply and exhaust type of self-controlling system, e.g.,
    hydraulic cycle devices and pulsators.

    132+,   for tanks which are periodically discharged by means of a siphon.

    156+,   for self emptying tanks, usually comprising boiler feed traps,
    emptied by gas pressure, especially subclasses 165+ for those controlled by
    floats.

    391,    for tanks with liquid level responsive control of both inflow and
    outflow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 12+ for fluid actuated or
    retarded device receiving liquid diverted from the main line and
    controlling a valve in the main line in accordance with the quantity of
    diverted liquid accumulated.


CLS 137/397
TXT Apparatus under subclass 396 in which the means sensing the liquid level
    floats in the liquid and is buoyed up thereby.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    398+,   for float control of the outlet to an accumulation of liquid in
    tanks which are not self-emptying.

    409,    for float control of valves not necessarily outlet valves, and see
    the search notes thereto.


CLS 137/398
TXT Apparatus under subclass 395 which includes one or more floats responsive
    to a change in the level of the accumulated liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    391,    for level responsive control of both inflow and outflow of a tank.

    409+,   for similar devices in which the valve is not necessarily an outlet
    valve, and see the search notes to subclass 409.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 9+ for water
    closet tanks and bowls having float control means, especially subclasses
    331 and 353+.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 64+ for level responsive control of
    dispensers.


CLS 137/399
TXT Apparatus under subclass 398 wherein the outflow is closed in response to
    the presence of a low level in the liquid accumulation.

    (1)     Note.  The float control in patents placed in this subclass is not
    intended to regulate liquid level but is designed to function as a safety
    control to prevent an undesired occurrence in the outlet pipe, such as
    entrance of air or sediment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 66 for dispenser type material level control
    comprising an empty container cut-off.


CLS 137/400
TXT Apparatus under subclass 386 which (1) includes the application of a
    supplemental force or bias that will insure the closing of the valve
    controlled by the liquid level responsive means, or (2) is combined with
    means to insure that the flow is stopped, in case the valve fails to close
    properly when urged in closing position by the liquid level sensing means.


CLS 137/401
TXT Apparatus under subclass 400 in which the means sensing the liquid level is
    an open or bucket type float which floats to urge the valve closed, and in
    the event that the valve controlled thereby does not properly close the
    continued rise of liquid level will cause the float to fill with liquid and
    sink in the liquid to apply the supplemental safety closing bias or means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404,    for other open or bucket type floats, and see the search notes
    thereto.


CLS 137/402
TXT Apparatus under subclass 400 wherein the supplemental closing bias or means
    responds to or is actuated by a gravitating tank.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403+,   for level control by means of the weight of accumulated liquid, and
    see especially the search notes to subclass 408.


CLS 137/403
TXT Apparatus under subclass 386 in which the liquid level is sensed by means
    responsive to the weight or pressure head of the accumulated liquid.

    (1)     Note.  The receptacle which accumulates the pressure head to be
    sensed must be specifically related to the particular sensing means.  A
    general statement that the sensing means is responsive or is merely
    connected to some receptacle, e.g., a tank, is insufficient basis for
    classification here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129     and 134, for weight or fluid operated devices associated with
    siphons.

    161,    162+, 189+, and 204, for weight of fluid operated devices
    associated with diverse fluid containing pressure systems.

    188+,   for fluid separating traps with discriminating outlet for liquid
    controlled by weight or pressure of the accumulated liquid.

    396,    for apparatus controlling the outflow from a self-emptying tank by
    weight of accumulated liquid.

    402,    for gravitating tank as a supplemental or safety closing means or
    bias.

    455+,   for line pressure responsive valves not specifically related to a
    particular accumulating receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclasses 60+ for weigher responsive material
    control of general application.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 52+ especially subclasses 56-58 for similar
    arrangements in dispensers.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 12+ for fluid pressure
    actuated valves which are not condition responsive.

    417,    Pumps, subclass 38 for a liquid pressure sensor for sensing liquid
    accumulation to control a pump drive motor.


CLS 137/404
TXT Apparatus under subclass 403 in which the liquid level is sensed by an open
    or bucket type element which floats on the liquid accumulation when empty
    and subsequently is filled with the liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129,    for plural siphons with the main siphon operated by a sinking or
    bucket type float.

    163,    for gas pressure discharge of liquid feed traps with the gas
    pressure controlled by sinking or bucket type float.

    185,    for an inverted bucket or gas collecting float controlling a
    discriminating outlet for liquid in a diverse fluid containing pressure
    system.

    190+,   for fluid separating traps with discriminating outlets with fluid
    responsive valve with sinking or bucket type float control.

    401,    for tank outflow control comprising supplemental or safety closing
    bias or means and a sinking float.


CLS 137/405
TXT Apparatus under subclass 403 including a valve arranged to cut off the fuel
    supply to an oil burner or the like in response to a predetermined
    accumulation of unburned liquid fuel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for control of branched flow by filling auxiliary tank.

    121,    for control of branched flow by filling outlet tank or receiver.

    456+,   for line condition responsive safety cut-offs requiring resetting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 198+ for filling devices having feed cut-off responsive to
    accumulation in the receptacle being filled.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 65 for a burner assembly having a control
    responsive to collected fuel overflow cutting off feed to the burner head.


CLS 137/406
TXT Apparatus under subclass 403 in which the weight or pressure head of the
    liquid is sensed in a vessel which is separate from the liquid accumulation
    but is in communication therewith.

    (1)     Note.  Both auxiliary gravitating tanks and stationary devices for
    measuring a static head are included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for alternate or successively substituted flows from a source with
    control by filling an auxiliary gravitating tank.

    134,    for an auxiliary receptacle accumulator for starting a siphon.

    154+,   for diverse fluid containing pressure system traps, which are in
    effect communicating measuring vessels, though not necessarily concerned
    with level.

    393,    for level responsive devices including a liquid weight or pressure
    sensing chamber connected to a tank at the desired liquid level.


CLS 137/407
TXT Apparatus under subclass 406 in which the separate measuring vessel is
    provided with connections with the liquid accumulation at both the top and
    bottom of the measuring vessel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    563+,   for distribution systems of the closed circulation type.


CLS 137/408
TXT Apparatus under subclass 403 in which a single gravitating tank, with or
    without its mounting means, constitutes both the liquid accumulating means
    and the liquid level sensing means.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also takes the subcombination in which the
    valve or flow controlling means operated by the gravitating tank is not
    claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for control of branched flow by filling of an auxiliary gravity
    tank.

    161     and 162+, for gas pressure discharge of liquid feed-traps with gas
    pressure controlled by amount of liquid in trap by gravitating vessel, and
    189 for valves in diverse fluid containing pressure systems controlled by
    gravitating vessels.

    189,    for fluid separating traps with discriminating outlet for liquid
    controlled by gravitating vessel.

    402,    for gravitating tank controlled tank outflow when supplemental or
    safety closing bias or means is involved.

    404,    for sinking or bucket float type gravitating tanks, and see the
    search notes thereto.

    406+,   for level response control means comprising an auxiliary
    gravitating tank.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclasses 60+ for a gravitating tank in an
    automatic weigher.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 52+ especially subclasses 56-58 for
    dispensing controlled by quantity or weight.

    417,    Pumps, subclass 37, for a movable liquid receptacle for sensing
    liquid accumulation to control a pump drive motor.


CLS 137/409
TXT Apparatus under subclass 386 wherein the element which senses the liquid
    level floats on the liquid and is buoyed up thereby.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for float controlled marine governors.

    131,    for siphon discharge receiver with float control for siphon.

    135,    for float operated inlets to siphons.

    137,    for float operated vents in periodic siphons.

    165+,   192+ and 202, for float controlled traps and valves in diverse
    fluid containing pressure systems.

    247.21, for a ball-type float in combination with a liquid seal means.

    397,    for float control in self emptying tanks.

    398+,   for control of the outflow from the liquid accumulation in response
    to a float.

    404,    for bucket type floats, and see the search notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, appropriate subclasses for
    float operated devices of that class.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 322.5 for floats, per se.

    166,    Wells, subclass 54 for automatically operated well apparatus
    comprising float controlled valves.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 62, 66 and 67+ for float controlled
    dispensers.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 40+ for a float which senses liquid accumulation
    to control a drive motor.


CLS 137/410
TXT Apparatus under subclass 409 wherein the flow controlling valve is opened
    by external means and its closing is in response to or is controlled by a
    float.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    389,    for float controlled valves having external means either assisting
    or substituted for the float operation.

    456+,   for condition change responsive valves which must be reset by
    external means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 381+ for tank
    outlet valves which are latched open and released by a float.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 15+ for apparatus for flush
    type valves which are opened by external means, the closing being delayed
    or controlled by fluid pressure operated member, and subclasses 66+ for
    biased trip valves which are not released or reset by condition responsive
    means.


CLS 137/411
TXT Apparatus under subclass 409 in which a single float controls a plurality
    flow controlling means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168,    for float responsive unitary inlet and outlet valves in gas
    pressure discharge of liquid feed traps to boilers.

    391,    for the control of both the inflow and outflow from the liquid
    accumulation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 67 for plural float operated flow controllers
    in dispensers.


CLS 137/412
TXT Apparatus under subclass 409 in which the float controls the application of
    another source of power for operating the flow controlling means rather
    than acting directly through a mechanical connection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191     and 195, for servo control with sinking type floats in pressure
    systems containing diverse fluids.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclasses for fluid
    servo-motors.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 25+ for fluid pressure
    servo-motor operation of valves (and see the search notes to subclass 25),
    subclasses 68+ for electrical actuation of biased trip type valves, and
    subclasses 129+ for electrical actuation of valves, especially subclass 131
    for remote control of such actuators.


CLS 137/413
TXT Apparatus under subclass 412 in which the float controls the application of
    fluid pressure for operating the flow control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclasses for fluid
    servo-motors.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 25+ for fluid pressure servo
    valve actuation which are operated by external means or in which the
    operating means is not specifically claimed, and see the search notes to
    subclass 25.


CLS 137/414
TXT Apparatus under subclass 413 in which the flow control means is a valve
    comprising a flexible diaphragm.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    777+,   for expansible chamber devices, especially subclasses 784+ for the
    flexible wall type, and subclasses 793+ for diaphragms, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 25+ for fluid servo-motor
    actuation of valves, and especially subclasses 45 and 46 for those
    involving diaphragm valves and/or motors.


CLS 137/415
TXT Apparatus under subclass 413 in which the source of fluid pressure is the
    tank holding the liquid accumulation to the level of which the float
    responds.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the patents in this subclass utilize the steam
    pressure in a boiler for operating a valve controlling the flow of water
    into the boiler.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156+,   for gas pressure discharge of liquid feed traps to a boiler.

    192+    and 202, for float controlled discriminating outlets for liquid and
    gas in diverse fluid containing pressure systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 33+ for valves actuated by
    fluid servo-motors deriving working fluid from the line controlled by the
    valve.


CLS 137/416
TXT Apparatus under subclass 409 in which the float and/or the flow control
    means is operated during a shorter length of time than would be the case if
    the float and valve were free to respond continuously to the change in
    liquid level.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 75 for valve actuation of the
    snap action type, and see the search notes thereto, subclass 76 for valve
    actuators of the impact type, and see the search notes thereto, and
    subclasses 77+ for valve actuation involving lost motion, and see the
    search notes thereto.


CLS 137/417
TXT Apparatus under subclass 416 in which the float operating the flow
    controlling means is restrained from freely responding to the changing
    liquid level and is released from restraint by a second or auxiliary float.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    420+,   for other trip mechanisms for float controlled valves.


CLS 137/418
TXT Apparatus under subclass 416 in which the quick action of the flow
    controlling means is obtained by use of a mechanism which has a faster or
    accelerated rate of motion after it passes a center position than its rate
    of motion before attaining the center position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 75 for snap acting valves not
    of level or condition responsive types, and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 137/419
TXT Apparatus under subclass 418 wherein the change in rate of motion is
    obtained by the use of a shifting weight.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    424+,   for float controlled valves with counterbalance means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 338 for weight biased valves,
    and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 137/420
TXT Apparatus under subclass 416 in which the flow control means is provided
    with a biasing means urging it in one direction which means is restrained
    by a latch or similar element, which latch is released by means of the
    float.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    463,    for safety cut-offs responsive to a line condition and employing
    fluid released trips.

    467,    for fluid released latches responsive to a line condition to allow
    the valve to open.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 66+ for biased trips
    controlling valves and operated at will, and see the search notes to
    subclass 66.


CLS 137/421
TXT Apparatus under subclass 420 which includes a weight or spring as the
    biasing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 66+ for biased trip actuated
    valves, especially subclass 72 for weight biased trips, and see the search
    notes to subclass 66.


CLS 137/422
TXT Apparatus under subclass 416 in which during a part of its travel the float
    moves without producing a corresponding movement of the flow control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 77+ for valve actuators
    including a lost motion mechanism, and see the search notes to subclass 77.


CLS 137/423
TXT Apparatus under subclass 409 which includes a plurality of floats.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    391,    for apparatus including plural floats which control the inlet to
    and outlet from a tank.

    411,    for a single float controlling plural valves.

    417,    for apparatus including a pilot or auxiliary float for releasing a
    float controlling the flow control means to provide a quick acting
    mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 68 for plural float actuated valves in
    dispensers.


CLS 137/424
TXT Apparatus under subclass 409 in which the float is provided with means to
    apply a force which at least partially counterbalances the weight of the
    float and valve assembly or which partially counterbalances the buoyancy of
    the float.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    419,    for quick acting float valves having an over center mechanism with
    a shifting weight.


CLS 137/425
TXT Apparatus under subclass 424 in which the counterbalancing means is within
    the tank holding the liquid accumulation.


CLS 137/426
TXT Apparatus under subclass 409 in which the valve operating mechanism can be
    preset to respond at any one of a plurality of levels, by making
    appropriate changes in the connections between the valve and the float or
    any intermediate linkage or mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 234 for adjustable lever type
    actuators for valves, and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 137/427
TXT Apparatus under subclass 409 in which means is provided for removing from
    the interior of a float material which may leak into it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312+,   for means for collecting material which escapes from the desired
    flow path and either returning it to the system or disposing of it, and see
    the search notes to subclass 312.


CLS 137/428
TXT Apparatus under subclass 409 where the float is in a chamber separate from
    the holder for the liquid accumulation, but which chamber is connected
    therewith so that the variation in liquid level in the chamber corresponds
    to that in the holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    406+,   for communicating measuring vessels responding to weight or head of
    accumulated fluid.

    571+,   for plural tanks connected for serial flow, and see the search
    notes to subclass 571.


CLS 137/429
TXT Apparatus under subclass 409 in which the float is guided or so constructed
    and mounted that its path of movement will necessarily be along a straight
    line.


CLS 137/430
TXT Apparatus under subclass 429 in which the path of travel of the float is
    co-axial with the valve or part controlled in response to the float.


CLS 137/431
TXT Apparatus under subclass 430 in which the float acts as spreading,
    distributing or antisplash means for the liquid flow controlled thereby.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    436+,   for flow guides or restrictors for float arm operated valves.

    582,    for distribution systems having anti splash means not in the flow
    passage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 118+ for valves combined
    with material guides or restrictors in the flow passage which may function
    to reduce turbulence or splashing.


CLS 137/432
TXT Apparatus under subclass 430 in which the float surrounds the inlet pipe
    for the fluid the flow of which is controlled by the valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    431,    for similar arrangements in which the float comprises a spreader or
    anti-splash means.


CLS 137/433
TXT Apparatus under subclass 430 in which the float and valve controlled
    thereby are rigidly connected together.


CLS 137/434
TXT Apparatus under subclass 409 in which the float responding to variations in
    liquid level is connected to the flow control means by means of a rod or
    arm which is pivoted at an end thereof and the arm turns about the pivot
    during operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, appropriate subclasses for
    water closet tanks and bowls with float controlled valves.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 64+ for dispensers with float arm operated
    valves.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 213+ for mechanical movement
    valve actuators, especially subclasses 231+ for lever type mechanical
    movements.


CLS 137/435
TXT Apparatus under subclass 434 which includes in addition to the float
    mechanism, means to retard or cushion the rate of closing or opening of the
    flow controlling valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    470,    for line pressure responsive valves which have a reactor component
    tending to close them as soon as they open.

    624.11+, for a time controlled valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 12+ for fluid retarded
    valves, subclass 64 for valves with nonfluid retarders, and subclasses 118+
    for valves with material guides or restrictors which retard the operation
    of a valve to which they are connected.


CLS 137/436
TXT Apparatus under subclass 434 including means to restrict or act as a guide
    for the flow of liquid to or from the valve controlled by the float.

    (1)     Note.  Many of these restrictors have the effect of silencing the
    fluid flow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 117 and 118+ for other
    valves combined with flow guides or restrictors, and see the search notes
    to subclass 118.


CLS 137/437
TXT Apparatus under subclass 436 in which the restrictor or flow guide is an
    external hood or deflector or annular outlet surrounding the inlet pipe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    431     and 432, for floats surrounding the flow pipe and acting as
    spreaders or deflectors.


CLS 137/438
TXT Apparatus under subclass 434 wherein the float means moves the nozzle or
    inlet terminal for controlling the flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    578,    for float supported movable outlet elements.

    592,    for internally extending inlet pipes in distribution systems, and
    see the search notes thereto.

    615+,   for articulated or swinging flow conduits in distribution systems,
    and see the search notes to subclass 615.


CLS 137/439
TXT Apparatus under subclass 434 in which the valve controlled by the float is
    removable from outside the container holding the liquid accumulation.

    (1)     Note.  In the arrangements classifiable in this subclass the valve
    is usually removable for replacement or repair purposes, the float means
    and linkage remaining in the tank.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315+,   for apparatus including repair or assembling means, especially
    subclass 326 for valve removal through the interior of a tank, and see the
    search notes to subclasses 315 and 326.


CLS 137/440
TXT Apparatus under subclass 434 in which the inlet pipe is reversed upon
    itself in substantially a "U" shape and is provided with the float operated
    valve on the terminal thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123+,   for siphons.

    215+,   for back flow prevention in flow lines of inverted U shape which
    are not primarily intended to operate as siphons.

    442+,   for other inlet terminal float arm operated valves.

    591,    for tanks having internally extending flow pipes of inverted U
    shape.


CLS 137/441
TXT Apparatus under subclass 434 which includes a pipe carrying a part of the
    flow through the float arm controlled valve out of the tank holding the
    liquid accumulation the level of which controls the float.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the patents in this subclass are for refilling a
    toilet trap.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    561+,   for distribution systems involving branch flow, especially
    subclasses 608+ for those having a single inlet and plural outlets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 300+ for water
    closets of the tank type.


CLS 137/442
TXT Apparatus under subclass 434 in which the float arm, the valve operated
    thereby and the connections therebetween comprise an assembly which is
    mounted on the inlet pipe and in which the valve element reciprocates
    co-axially with respect to the inlet pipe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    440,    for U-shaped inlet pipes having terminal valves of this type.

    592,    for distribution systems having internally extending inlet pipes,
    and see the search notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 147 for valve mountings of the
    terminal type, and subclasses 318+ for reciprocating valves of this class,
    and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 137/443
TXT Apparatus under subclass 442 in which the inlet pipe is horizontal or
    enters the tank holding the liquid accumulation laterally.


CLS 137/444
TXT Apparatus under subclass 442 in which the inlet pipe is vertical and enters
    the tank holding the liquid accumulation from the bottom thereof.


CLS 137/445
TXT Apparatus under subclass 434 in which there is a second lever or toggle
    connecting the float arm with the valve controlled thereby.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 75 for valve actuators of the
    toggle or snap acting type, and subclasses 279+ for valve actuators
    comprising linkage.


CLS 137/446
TXT Apparatus under subclass 434 in which the connection between the float arm
    and the valve controlled thereby comprises a cam or gear or a screw thread
    type mechanical motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    447,    for a rotary valve element screw threaded to the float arm, no
    motion of the valve relative to the valve casing resulting from the screw
    arrangement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 213+ for mechanical movement
    valve actuators.


CLS 137/447
TXT Apparatus under subclass 434 including a valve which rotates on its axis to
    control the valve part or parts and is connected to the float arm for
    operation thereby.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    446,    for valves which rotate only as a means to secure longitudinal
    valving motion of the valve as by a screw type mechanical movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 304+ for rotary valves, per
    se.


CLS 137/448
TXT Apparatus under subclass 434 in which the valve controlled by the float arm
    is pivoted to swing about an axis for controlling the fluid flow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 84 for valve heads which are
    movably connected to their stem or actuator for accommodation to their
    seats, and subclasses 298+ for pivoted valves.


CLS 137/449
TXT Apparatus under subclass 434 in which the valve controlled by the float arm
    is spherical in shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    539+,   for spring biased ball valves which yield to direct pressure, e.g.,
    check or safety valves.


CLS 137/450
TXT Apparatus under subclass 434 in which the valve controlled by the float arm
    is designed in such a manner that fluid pressure is exerted on opposing
    surfaces of the valve so that the forces acting on the valve as a result of
    flow or pressure in the line are neutralized or balanced, and thus a
    smaller force is necessary to actuate the valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 281 for balanced valves with
    or without actuators therefor, and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 137/451
TXT Apparatus under subclass 434 in which the valve controlled by the float arm
    is made of or includes material which flexes during the closing action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    525,    for resilient material valves of the line condition responsive type.

    793+,   for diaphragms, per se, some of which constitute valve elements,
    and see the search notes to subclass 793.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 490 for dispenser outlets comprising slitted
    resilient diaphragms or nipples, and see the search notes thereto.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 4+ for valves comprising
    flexible tubes and collapsing means therefor.


CLS 137/453
TXT Apparatus under subclass 386 in which atmospheric pressure is utilized for
    maintaining a liquid level by balancing such pressure against a hydrostatic
    head.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     for apparatus intended to exercise a control of fluid flow in
    response to variations in atmospheric pressure.

    261,    for replenishment of liquid in a plurality of battery or
    electrolytic cells by barometric supply.

    571+,   for plural tanks or compartments connected for serial flow, and see
    the search notes to subclass 571.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 397 for a withdrawable liquid cooler with a
    barometric feed type container.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 437 and 457 for dispensers comprising a
    barometric trap chamber, and see the search notes to subclass 457.


CLS 137/454
TXT Apparatus under subclass 453 which includes means for closing the fluid
    connection between a supply container and a receiving vessel.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the devices classified in this subclass are provided
    with cut-offs which close where the connection between the supply and
    receiver is disassembled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    320+,   for attached flow devices for tapping a source under pressure where
    the attachment comprises or carries means for opening a valve in the source
    container, which valve has no other actuator.

    614.02+ and 614.05, for separable, valved, flow path sections wherein at
    least one of the valves is operated by the act of joining or disconnecting
    the sections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 335, 336, 348+, and 351+ for a valved joint between a supply and
    a receiver, the valve being operated by the act of connecting or
    disconnecting them.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 165 for dispensers which have the supply
    container removable for refilling, and subclasses 437 and 457 for
    barometric type trap chamber dispensers and see the search notes to
    subclass 457.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 89.5 and 149+ for valved
    pipe joints wherein the valve is operated by the coupling act.


CLS 137/454.2
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising one or more valve heads and
    their cooperating seats, with or without actuating means, formed in a
    sleeve, bonnet or similar structural unit which is removable as such from a
    valve body or housing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223+,   particularly subclass 234.5 for inflatable article valves having a
    removable core unit provided with a head and seat.

    283+,   for removable units in hydrant valves.

    493.1+, 512.2 and 614.19, for one valve head and seat carried by, and
    therefore removable with, another valve head.

    515+,   for removable head and seat units in valve couplings or unions.

    525.1,  for combined lip-like heads and seats.


CLS 137/454.4
TXT Devices under subclass 454.2 which are designed to be used as inlet or
    outlet valves, or both, of fluid compressors or pumps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclass 454 for an expansible chamber type pump having
    means for facilitating assembly or disassembly of a pump valve to or from
    the pump.


CLS 137/454.5
TXT Devices under subclass 454.2 in which the seat carrying portion is
    threadably secured in the valve casing.


CLS 137/454.6
TXT Devices under subclass 454.2 in which the unit is retained in position by a
    valve bonnet or access-opening closure.


CLS 137/455
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which a valve is controlled in
    response to a change in the fluid condition, occurring within the system or
    line including the valve, which change has not been effected by external
    means for the express purpose of controlling the operation of the valve.

    (1)     Note.  The ultimate function of these devices is to control the
    flow by its own characteristics. Where the ultimate purpose of the system
    goes beyond this field, classification is in the subclass appropriate to
    the system, even though one or more line condition change responsive valves
    are included in it.  For example, a closed circulating distribution system
    is classified in subclasses 563+ even if it has check valves in one of more
    flow passages.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38+,    for gravity or inertia operated flow controllers.

    47+,    for speed responsive valve control, and see the search notes to
    subclass 47.

    59+,    for freeze condition responsive valves.

    67+,    for fusible, frangible or soluble flow controllers.

    78+,    for atmospheric condition change responsive valves.

    154+,   for condition change responsive valves in diverse fluid containing
    pressure systems.

    220,    for condition responsive valves of the large streamlined co-axial
    needle type used in hydraulic engineering, i.e., Larner-Johnson.

    386+,   for liquid level responsive or maintaining systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 212 and 237 for general fluid conducting and
    pressure relief valves.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 491+ for dispenser outlet valves operated by
    pressure of the material, and see the search notes thereto.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 15+ for flush type valves
    the closing of which is delayed by means of a pressure chamber in the line,
    and subclasses 25+ for fluid pressure pilot or servo operation of a valve.


CLS 137/456
TXT Apparatus under subclass 455 in which a valve closes in response to a
    change in internal condition of the line fluid but does not open when the
    line condition returns to its previous state, the necessary reopening or
    resetting operation being performed by an external operator, usually
    manually.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50      and 57, for excess speed responsive cut-offs.

    65+,    for fuel safety cut-offs responsive to combustion failure in a
    burner.

    405,    for oil burner fuel overflow preventing safety cut-offs.

    467,    for line condition change opened valves which require resetting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 198+ for cut-off valves operated by means responsive to level in
    a receptacle being filled, said means not including mere increase in line
    pressure.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 15+ for valves which are
    opened by manual or mechanical means and closed by line fluid reaction
    after a predetermined flow period.


CLS 137/457
TXT Apparatus under subclass 456 in which the valve is closed in response to a
    change in temperature in the line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59+,    for freeze condition responsive valves.

    65+,    for fuel safety cut-offs responsive to combustion failure in a
    burner.

    72+,    for flow control devices which includes a heat fusible or
    destructible element for sensing the thermal condition.

    79+,    for valves controlled in response to variations in atmospheric
    temperature.

    468,    for valves operated in response to changes in thermal condition in
    the line but not requiring reset, and see the search notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, appropriate
    subclasses, especially subclass 21 for safety cut-outs and subclass 89 for
    motor safety cut-outs in automatic temperature regulation.


CLS 137/458
TXT Apparatus under subclass 456 in which the valve member is provided with a
    means to close the valve in response to a predetermined low pressure or
    velocity of line fluid at a point in the line, and also with means to close
    the valve in response to a predetermined high internal pressure or velocity
    occurring in the line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180,    for diverse fluid containing pressure systems in which a liquid
    drain is provided responsive to abnormal pressures.

    493+,   for bi-directional flow responsive valves.


CLS 137/459
TXT Apparatus under subclass 456 which includes a mechanism which senses and is
    responsive to variations in the velocity of the fluid flowing through the
    line.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes apparatus in which the sensing means
    is inherently responsive to fluid velocity regardless of how the sensing
    means is described or claimed by the inventor.

    (2)     Note.  If a device is described as flow responsive but is equally
    responsive to static pressure, it is classified on the latter basis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    483,    for suction flow governors with reactors sensing changes in flow or
    pressure differential in the line.

    486,    for pilot or servo controlled valves which sense changes in flow or
    pressure differential in the line.

    497,    for valves having a separate fluid reactor surface which responds
    to changes in flow or pressure differential in the line.


CLS 137/460
TXT Apparatus under subclass 459 in which the valve closes in response to an
    increased velocity beyond a predetermined value.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the patents classified in this subclass close in
    response to excess velocity occasioned by a break in the line beyond the
    valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for excess speed responsive valve control, and see the search notes
    thereto.

    498,    for valves having separate reactor surfaces and closing in response
    to excess velocity but not requiring reset.


CLS 137/461
TXT Apparatus under subclass 456 in which the valve is closed in response to an
    increase in pressure beyond a maximum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    505+,   for line condition responsive valves which have separate connected
    reactor surfaces and are biased open.

    517+,   for line condition responsive valves of the direct acting type
    which are biased open.


CLS 137/462
TXT Apparatus under subclass 456 in which the valve is reopened or reset by use
    of by-passes and/or valves which equalize the pressure on both sides of the
    main or cut-off valve, thereby permitting or causing the cut-off valve to
    open by fluid pressure alone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    599+,   for distribution systems comprising by-passes, and see the search
    notes to subclass 599.

    629+,   for plural valve organizations of the pressure equalization type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 281+ for balanced valves of
    general utility, and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 137/463
TXT Apparatus under subclass 456 in which the valve is biased toward the closed
    or cut-off condition but is restrained from closing by a latch or similar
    means, which latch will release the valve for closing in response to a
    change in fluid condition within the apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 73 for fluid pressure trip
    actuation wherein the source of fluid for actuating the trip is not
    necessarily the line which is controlled, and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 137/464
TXT Apparatus under subclass 456 in which the valve is urged or biased, as by
    gravity or a spring means, toward a closed or cut-off position and this
    bias is opposed by the fluid pressure within the apparatus, a lowering in
    the fluid pressure permitting the valve to seat or close, the arrangement
    being such that the valve does not return to open position on subsequent
    increase of fluid pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    511+,   especially subclasses 522 to 543 for direct response valves opened
    by line flow and biased to closed position, where the valve shifts freely
    to and from closed position on change of fluid pressure condition.


CLS 137/465
TXT Apparatus under subclass 464 including a mechanical means which prevents
    the valve from reopening after seating or closing in the event the fluid
    pressure is reestablished.

    (1)     Note.  In the valves classified herein the resetting operation must
    include the removal of the mechanical means from the stop position.

    (2)     Note.  Magnetic detent is included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    522+,   for direct response valves with external means for opposing the
    bias.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 89+ for means for blocking
    or disabling an actuator for a valve which is not condition responsive.


CLS 137/466
TXT Apparatus under subclass 464 in which the incoming pressure urges the
    cut-off valve toward its seat or holds it closed after the valve has closed
    in response to the decrease in pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    462,    for this type of safety cut-off valves including pressure
    equalization valves or by-passes or venting valves for resetting the valve.


CLS 137/467
TXT Apparatus under subclass 455 in which a valve opens in response to a change
    in internal fluid condition and will not return to its closed operative
    position on removal of the change in condition until a closing or resetting
    of the valve and/or a trip device is performed by an external operator,
    usually manually.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for valve in which the valve is opened in response to a freeze
    condition and remains open until reset.

    456+,   for valves which close in response to condition change and require
    resetting, and see the search notes to subclass 456.


CLS 137/467.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 455 which responds to a change in consistency of
    the fluent material in the line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for processes of this type.

    92,     for similar sensing means in mixture control.

    109+,   particularly subclasses 115.01+ and 118.01+, for line consistency
    responsive control in a system which includes a constant level overflow.


CLS 137/468
TXT Apparatus within subclass 455 in which a valve is controlled in response to
    a change in the thermal condition of the fluid within the apparatus.

    (1)     Note. This subclass includes devices which sense changes in thermal
    conditions of the fluid and exercise a compensating effect so as to
    neutralize any effect the change in thermal condition of the fluid would
    otherwise have on the operation of the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for processes of mixing controlled by heat of combustion of the
    mixture.

    59+,    for freeze condition responsive controls.

    65+,    for fuel safety cut-offs responsive to combustion failure.

    72+,    for similar apparatus which includes a heat fusible or destructible
    element for sensing the thermal condition.

    79+,    for valves controlled in response to variations in atmospheric
    temperature.

    90,     118 and other appropriate subclasses of this group for
    self-proportioning systems having temperature responsive or maintaining
    aspects.

    334+,   for systems involving heating, heat exchange and cooling, and see
    the search notes to subclass 334.

    457,    for safety cut-off valves which respond to temperature changes in
    the line and require external reset.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, appropriate
    subclasses for thermally controlled valves, per se, especially subclasses
    53 through 60 for temperature responsive liquid separating traps.


CLS 137/469
TXT Valves under subclass 455 which are biased closed and are forced open by
    fluid pressure, the fluid flowing through the valve after the initial
    opening movement thereof acting on an auxiliary reactor surface to affect
    the valve opening and/or closing motion.

    (1)     Note.  The auxiliary reactor surface may be either (a) a surface
    configuration of the valve sensitive to fluid flow, (b) a distinct surface
    affected by fluid which has passed through the valve or (c) a distinct
    surface located upstream of the relieved fluid flow and affected by the
    pressure condition created by the flow.

    (2)     Note.  Pop relief valves are classified in this and indented
    subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    494+,   for condition responsive valves in which the initial opening
    movement of the valve is caused or assisted by pressure on a separate but
    connected reactor surface.

    511+,   for condition responsive valves of the check valve type, i.e.,
    directly responsive.


CLS 137/470
TXT Valves under subclass 469 in which the auxiliary reactor surface aids in
    valve closing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 15+ for valves opened by
    external means with compulsory cut-off after a flow period by the effect of
    the flowing liquid on an auxiliary surface, and subclasses 48+ for valve
    actuators with dashpot or fluid controlled retarders or timers.


CLS 137/471
TXT Valves under subclass 469 in which the reactor is in the inlet to the valve
    seat.


CLS 137/472
TXT Valves under subclass 469 in which the fluid is released in a plurality of
    paths, the reactor surfaces being located in one or more of the branches.


CLS 137/473
TXT Valves under subclass 472 in which the flow in each path is initiated or
    controlled by a separate valve or valve area, at least one of which is of
    the pop reactor and/or huddling chamber type.


CLS 137/474
TXT Valves under subclass 469 in which the reactor moves relative to the valve
    parts and is capable of motion in some part of its range without causing
    movement of the valve.

    (1)     Note.  The movable reactor usually imparts a "hammer blow" to free
    the valve parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 76 for impact type valve
    actuators of general application, and see the search notes thereto, and
    subclasses 77+ for valves with lost motion between actuator and valve, and
    see the search notes to subclass 77.


CLS 137/475
TXT Valves under subclass 469 in which the flow path giving access to the
    auxiliary reactor is controlled by an adjustable choke.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 118+ for flow restrictors or
    chokes in combination with valves of general application, especially
    subclass 121 for the adjustable type; and see the search notes to subclass
    119.


CLS 137/476
TXT Valves under subclass 475 in which the adjustable member is an annular lip
    or baffle concentric with the valve inlet passage.


CLS 137/477
TXT Valves under subclass 476 in which the annular adjustable lip is on a
    movable valve part.


CLS 137/478
TXT Valves under subclass 476 in which the annular adjustable lip is screw
    threaded for axial adjustment along the valve inlet passage.


CLS 137/479
TXT Apparatus under subclass 455 comprising governor valves or induction
    controlled inlets associated with internal combustion engines, in which a
    valve responds to a pressure differential proportional to changes to an
    outlet at sub-atmospheric pressure, i.e., the induction manifold of the
    engine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    494+,   for reactor surface controlled valves of this type controlled by
    super-atmospheric pressure rather than sub-atmospheric pressure.

    511+,   for condition responsive valves of the direct response type,
    especially subclasses 517+ for direct response valves which are biased open
    and subclass 526 for vacuum relief type, and see the search notes to
    subclass 517.


CLS 137/480
TXT Apparatus under subclass 479 in which the valve controlled is a second or
    auxiliary inlet to the line-carrying the suction induced flow.

    (1)     Note.  Many of patents classified in this subclass include valves
    for supplying additional fuel, air or other fluid to the flow through the
    intake passage of an internal combustion engine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111+,   for self-correlating branched flow systems having plural inflows,
    especially subclass 114 for those in which one flow supplements another.


CLS 137/481
TXT Apparatus under subclass 479 which includes a manual means which modifies
    the action of the valve responsive to the flow of fluid.

    (1)     Note.  This does not include devices in which the manual or
    external means are mere setting or adjusting means.  See section 5, of the
    class definition for search notes on manual actuation, resetting and
    adjustment of valves and valve actuators.

    (2)     Note.  See the class definition, section 3 for search notes on
    plural actuators including at least one automatic actuator and section 4,
    for plural valves and plural nonautomatic actuators.


CLS 137/482
TXT Apparatus under subclass 479 which includes means to compensate for
    atmospheric pressure differential in addition to flow responsive means
    within the flow line.

    (1)     Note.  The valves are usually an unbalanced butterfly with a
    pressure reactor in the wall of the flow line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     for system control responsive to changes in atmospheric pressure.

    111+,   for self-controlled branched flow systems having plural inflows.

    484,    for unbalanced butterfly valves without suction compensation means.


CLS 137/483
TXT Apparatus under subclass 479 which includes a separate reactor surface
    which is responsive to the pressure differential between the interior and
    exterior of the inlet manifold.

    (1)     Note.  See notes to subclass 494 for definition of "separate
    reactor surface".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    494+,   for condition responsive reactor surface controlled valves of
    general utility.  See (1 Note).


CLS 137/484
TXT Apparatus under subclass 479 in which a biased valve having at least a flat
    center area is mounted in the fluid flow path and moves about a pivot
    located between its edges, said valve having a dynamic unbalance to fluid
    flow causing a torque which proportionally governs the position of the
    valve.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter comprises some modification of or
    addition to the conventional butterfly valve mounted at its center,
    designed to control or extend its quality of unbalance throughout its range
    of movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    482,    for similar valves with means for compensating for atmospheric
    pressure differential.


CLS 137/484.2
TXT Devices under subclass 455 in which the valve controlling forces are
    altered by a force resulting from a fluid pressure derived for variations
    in the flow of fluid in the line acting on a reactor surface other than the
    valve head.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 24 for similar structure in
    valves not responsive to line condition.


CLS 137/484.4
TXT Devices under subclass 484.2 in which the reactor surface is normal to the
    line flow of fluid and is in a chamber off-set from co-axial inlet and
    outlet flow ports so that the reactor movement is parallel to the line flow.


CLS 137/484.6
TXT Devices under subclass 484.2 in which the reactor surface is in a chamber
    distinct from the outlet chamber and in direct fluid communication
    therewith by means of an aperture through a partition or wall through the
    chambers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    505.26+, for similar structure in reactor surface operated valves
    unassisted by additional line flow effect.


CLS 137/484.8
TXT Devices under subclass 484.6 having an additional aperture for the
    accommodation of the valve stem.


CLS 137/485
TXT Apparatus within subclass 455 in which the means sensing a change in fluid
    condition within the apparatus controls the application of another source
    of power for operating the flow control valve rather than acting directly
    through a mechanical connection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 25+ for fluid servo-motors
    for nonautomatic valve operation, and see the search notes to subclass 25.


CLS 137/486
TXT Apparatus under subclass 485 in which the valve is operated in response to
    the sensing of the velocity of the fluid flow or to the pressure
    differential along the flow line under flow condition.

    (1)     Note.  This sensing may occur after the valve opens in response to
    line pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    458     and 459+, for flow responsive valves of the safety cut-off type.

    483,    for suction flow governor valves of the combustion engine type with
    a reactor responsive to flow or pressure differential along the line.

    497+,   for valves with separate connected fluid reactor surface sensing
    flow either directly or by determining pressure differential or drop along
    the line.


CLS 137/487
TXT Apparatus under subclass 486 in which the flow pressure drop across the
    flow line valve is used to control the flow line valve pilot or servo
    system.

    (1)     Note.  The main line valve serves as a variable flow line
    restrictor for deriving a pressure difference proportional to rate of flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    503,    for similar flow responsive means in line condition responsive
    valves having a reactor surface.


CLS 137/487.5
TXT Devices under subclass 485 in which the valve is electrically actuated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 129+ for electrically
    actuated valves.


CLS 137/488
TXT Apparatus under subclass 485 in which the means sensing a change in fluid
    condition controls the effectiveness of a fluid pressure which is employed
    for controlling the operation of the flow controlling valve.

    (1)     Note.  The source of fluid pressure for operating the flow
    controlling valve may be external or may be the main flow line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    for suction operated pilot controlled valves where the pilot valve
    is itself responsive to line suction.  These are mainly milker pulsators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 25+ for fluid pressure servo
    type valve actuators which are operated by external means or do not include
    means sensing a change in fluid condition, and see the search notes to
    subclass 25.


CLS 137/489
TXT Apparatus under subclass 488 which includes a pressure chamber having both
    a valved passage and an unvalved passage for ingress and egress of fluid,
    the relative sizes of the passages being such that a different pressure may
    be maintained in the chamber when the valve passage is open than is the
    case when it is closed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 33+ for choked or throttled
    pressure type servo actuated valves which do not include means sensing a
    change in fluid condition in the line, and see the search notes to subclass
    33.


CLS 137/489.3
TXT Devices under subclass 489 in which the unvalved passage is between the
    piston and the cylinder walls.


CLS 137/489.5
TXT Devices under subclass 489 in which the valved passage is so positioned
    that the pilot valve controls the ingress of the pressure fluid to the
    pressure chamber.


CLS 137/490
TXT Apparatus under subclass 489 in which the valve controlling the servo fluid
    pressure is physically located within the main or flow controlling valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 38 for this subject matter
    wherein the valve actuation is not responsive to line condition.


CLS 137/491
TXT Apparatus under subclass 489 in which the restricted and unvalved passage
    passes through the main or flow controlling valve.


CLS 137/492
TXT Apparatus under subclass 488 in which the fluid pressure servo-motor
    operates the flow controlling valve in one direction only, the valve being
    operated the other direction by a constantly acting pressure or bias.


CLS 137/492.5
TXT Devices under subclass 492 in which the constantly acting pressure or bias
    is a spring.


CLS 137/493
TXT Apparatus under subclass 455 in which a valve means opens in response to
    excess pressure over a selected maximum and also opens in response to
    pressure below a selected minimum, usually to admit atmospheric air, or
    opens in response to a pressure applied to either side of the valve means.

    (1)     Note.  The valve means may comprise a simple valve to relieve both
    pressure and vacuum or reverse pressure or the combination of both a valve
    for relieving high pressure and a valve for relieving a vacuum, or pressure
    on the opposite side.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180,    for diverse fluid containing pressure systems having a
    discriminating and an abnormal pressure responsive liquid outlet.

    226,    for tire inflation stems and/or chucks having plural pressure
    responsive valves arranged on a common axis, one opening to admit inflation
    fluid under pressure and the other opening to relieve excess pressure in
    the chuck, stem or tire.

    458,    for safety cut-off valves requiring reset which are responsive to
    both high and low pressures or velocities.

    512+,   for other plural direct response valves, especially subclass 513
    for those mechanically interconnected.


CLS 137/493.1
TXT Apparatus under subclass 493 wherein one valve head carries the head and
    seat of a second valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    512.2,  for other plural direct response valves having this relationship.

    614.17, for similar structure in serial flow valves.


CLS 137/493.2
TXT Apparatus under subclass 493.1 wherein only the carrying valve is provided
    with spring biasing means.


CLS 137/493.3
TXT Apparatus under subclass 493.1 wherein the spring for the carried valve is
    mounted on the supporting valve.


CLS 137/493.4
TXT Apparatus under subclass 493.3 wherein the spring of the carried valve
    abuts a stop (e.g., a collar) on the carried valve stem.


CLS 137/493.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 493.3 wherein the spring of the carried valve
    abuts the guide for the stem of the carried valve.


CLS 137/493.6
TXT Apparatus under subclass 493.1 wherein both the carried and carrying valves
    are spring biased.


CLS 137/493.7
TXT Apparatus under subclass 493 wherein the axis of one valve port is
    perpendicular to the axis of the second valve port.  Port as used herein is
    the inlet or outlet provided with the valve seat.


CLS 137/493.8
TXT Apparatus under subclass 493 wherein the axis of one valve port is parallel
    to the axis of the second valve port.  See the definition of valve port
    under subclass 493.7.


CLS 137/493.9
TXT Apparatus under subclass 493 wherein the axis of one valve port is co-axial
    with that of the second valve port.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    493.1,  for coaxial ports where one valve assembly is carried by the head
    of another.


CLS 137/494
TXT Apparatus under subclass 455 in which a flow controlling valve is connected
    to a separate movable nonvalving surface so as to be operated thereby, the
    fluid flowing in the apparatus and being controlled by the valve reacting
    on said surface, which moves in response to variations in fluid condition
    in the apparatus, the motion being transmitted to the valve.

    (1)     Note.  The separate reactor surface may be integral with the
    valving surface, as for example, in a valve with a surface greater than
    that necessary to provide its valving function, where the excess surface is
    subject to the pressure of the flowing material and acts as a reactor
    surface to operate or to assist in the operation of the valve.

    (2)     Note.  Surfaces which are subject to the line fluid for the purpose
    of retarding the operation of a valve (e.g., dashpots) are not treated as
    separate reactor surfaces.  See search notes below to subclass 514.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    458,    for safety cut-off valves requiring reset which are responsive to
    both high and low pressure or velocity.

    461,    for safety cut-off valves requiring reset which are beyond a
    maximum.

    469+,   for pop valves in which the initial flow of fluid after opening in
    response to fluid pressure reacts against a surface to effect the further
    opening or the closing operation.

    479+,   for governor valves which respond proportionally to induction
    pressures in internal combustion engines.

    511+,   for valves which respond to variations in fluid conditions acting
    directly on the valves, per se, especially subclass 513 for plural direct
    responsive valves mechanically connected, in which one valve may have an
    actuating effect on another, and subclass 514 for line condition direct
    responsive valves having dashpots using line fluid.

    613+,   for distribution systems comprising plural valves arranged in
    series in the flow line wherein manual or external means operate one valve
    which causes a change in the condition in the flow line in order to utilize
    such changed condition to effect automatic operation of the other valve in
    the flow line, i.e., for systems not primarily condition change responsive,
    which involve such response means incidentally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 15+ for valves which are
    closed by fluid flow reacting means after an interval having been opened by
    other external means.


CLS 137/495
TXT Apparatus under subclass 494 which include in addition to the fluid
    actuated reactor surface, a manual or other external means for operating or
    for causing the operation of the same valve.

    (1)     Note.  Modifiers, which merely vary the loading or response of the
    reactor surface, are not deemed to constitute manual or other external
    means within this definition.  For such modifiers search should be made in
    the subclass receiving the particular type of fluid actuator.  See the
    class definition, section 3 for search notes on plural actuators including
    at least one automatic actuator and section 5 for search notes on manual
    actuators and adjusting and resetting devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115.01+, for systems having a valve controlled surge relief by-pass
    operated by a means to sense a change in pressure (surge) in the main flow
    line such as may be caused by the operation of a controlling valve.

    481,    for suction controlled valves which are manually modified or
    adjusted.

    522+,   for direct response valves in combination with external means for
    opposing the closing bias.

    613+,   for systems comprising plural valves arranged in series in the flow
    line wherein manual or external means operate one valve to produce a change
    in the condition in the flow line in order to utilize such changed
    condition to effect automatic operation of the other valve in the flow line.


CLS 137/496
TXT Apparatus under subclass 494 in which the flow controlling valve is
    disclosed or claimed as being closed in response to the reversal of the
    fluid flow or to its tendency toward reversal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    for self-controlled branched flow systems having reversing valves.

    198,    for reverse flow stops in discriminating outlets for gas in diverse
    fluid containing pressure systems.

    215+,   for back flow prevention by vacuum breaking, especially subclasses
    217+ for valved air vents.

    239,    for cleaning by reversing fluid flow.


CLS 137/497
TXT Apparatus under subclass 494 in which the separate reactive surface which
    controls the valve is responsive to variations in the rate of flow of fluid
    through the apparatus or to variations in the pressure differential along
    the line under flow conditions.

    (1)     Note.  If a valve is described as flow responsive but is equally
    responsive to static pressure, it is classified on the latter basis.
    Typical examples of control means responsive to changes in the rate of
    fluid flow are:  (a) a swinging vane or turbine subject to fluid flow, (b)
    comparison of the pressures or pressure differences across a fixed choke in
    the flow line or across the throttle valve which regulates the flow; (c)
    comparison of the pressures or pressure differences at the throat of a
    Venturi and at a point upstream or downstream from such throat, (d) a
    deflector subject to fluid flow and movable in a straight line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for processes of fluid handling control by the speed of the flow.

    115.03+, for self-controlled branch flow systems in which a by-pass or
    relief path is controlled by change in rate of main line flow.

    220,    for Larner-Johnson type valves which are condition responsive.

    459+,   for safety cut-offs responsive to changes in rate of flow and which
    require an external reset.

    483,    for suction flow governor valves of the internal combustion engine
    type with a reactor responsive to changes in rate of flow or pressure
    differential along the line as determined under flow conditions.

    486+,   for pilot or servo controlled valves responsive to variations in
    rate of flow or pressure differential along the line as determined under
    flow conditions, the pilot valves being the flow responsive member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 15+ for valves which
    compulsorily close after a predetermined time or quantity of flow of fluid,
    which flow was initiated by other means.


CLS 137/498
TXT Apparatus under subclass 497 in which the flow controlling valve is closed
    in response to an increase in the rate of flow beyond a predetermined
    maximum.

    (1)     Note.  The excessive flow is usually caused by a break in the flow
    line.

    (2)     Note.  The control mechanism herein, in addition to acting to close
    the valve in response to an excessive flow may also provide a pressure
    regulation in which the valve is moved toward closed position at fluid
    flows above normal but less than the maximum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    460,    for safety cut-off valves which are responsive to excessive flow
    and require resetting.

    499     through 504, for fluid flow regulators in which there is not
    disclosure that the control valve closes in response to an excessive flow.


CLS 137/499
TXT Apparatus under subclass 497 wherein the separate reactor surface is a
    member pivoted for oscillation or rotation, having blades, vanes or
    surfaces which are exposed to the fluid flow and rotating or tending to
    rotate the member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47+,    for speed responsive governors for valves having, as driving means
    for the governor, a turbine exposed to the fluid flow in a conduit, in
    which the turbine is not a prime mover.

    332,    for valves having a nonvalving motion imparted by a turbine on the
    valve, as for friction reducing or antifouling purposes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 59+ for dispensers having cut-offs operated
    by rate of flow responsive means.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 15+ for valves which are
    closed after a flow period by fluid actuated means, and subclasses 48+ for
    valve retarders or timers of the fluid controlled type.


CLS 137/500
TXT Apparatus under subclass 497 in which the valve is operated by a movable
    reaction member such as a piston or diaphragm working in an expansible
    chamber under the influence of two  pressures taken at spaced points in the
    flow line which vary as a function of the rate of fluid flow through the
    line.

    (1)     Note.  The movable reaction member mentioned above may be integral
    with the controlling valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    777+,   for expansible chamber devices, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 861.42+ for pressure differential
    type meters.


CLS 137/501
TXT Apparatus under subclass 500 in which the pressures to which the movable
    reaction member is subject are taken on opposite sides of a fixed choke or
    flow restrictor placed in the flow line.

    (1)     Note.  The fixed choke or flow restrictor may be adjustable, either
    manually or by a condition unrelated to flow in the line.


CLS 137/502
TXT Apparatus under subclass 500 in which the pressures to which the movable
    reaction member is subject are taken at the throat of a Venturi placed in
    the flow line and at another point upstream or downstream of said throat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219+,   for Larner-Johnson hydraulic valves, which are located at a point
    of line restriction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 861.63+ for meters of the Venturi
    type.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 24 for fluid actuated or
    retarded valves with Venturi assisting means, and subclasses 123+ for a
    valve located at a point of restriction in the line.


CLS 137/503
TXT Apparatus under subclass 500 in which the pressures to which the movable
    reaction member is subject are taken on opposite sides of the throttle
    valve which is operated by the reaction member and which valve regulates
    the fluid flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    487,    for pilot or servo-controlled line condition responsive valves in
    which control is by differential pressures across the flow line valve.


CLS 137/504
TXT Apparatus under subclass 497 in which the separate reactive surface which
    controls the valve includes a choke, restriction, or deflector, in the
    fluid flow line and subject to the flow of fluid, such choke, restriction,
    or deflector being mounted as to be moved by the fluid proportionally to
    the rate of fluid flow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 40+ for flow restrictors in
    pipes, especially subclasses 43, 45 and 46 for variable restrictors.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 120+ for movable or
    resilient guides or deflectors combined with valves.


CLS 137/505
TXT Apparatus under subclass 494 in which the flow controlling valve is biased
    toward an open position and a change in fluid condition tends to close the
    valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224+,   for pressure regulators of the tire inflation type.

    479+,   for biased open valves responsive to pressure differential caused
    by suction in a combustion engine flow line.

    517+,   for biased open valves responsive to variations of the fluid
    pressure acting directly on the valves, and see the search notes to
    subclass 517.


CLS 137/505.11
TXT Devices under subclass 505 having a port leading from the low pressure side
    of the valve to waste and controlled by a normally closed pressure
    responsive valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for correlated supply and exhaust valves.

    116.3+, for correlated supply and by-pass or relief valves.


CLS 137/505.12
TXT Devices under subclass 505 in series with another line pressure responsive
    valve to produce plural stage reduction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    512+,   for plural serial direct response, reducing valves.


CLS 137/505.13
TXT Devices under subclass 505 in which the fluid reactor surface, in
    communication with tie inlet side of the valve, responds to changes in
    inlet fluid pressure.


CLS 137/505.14
TXT Devices under subclass 505 with means for automatically varying the opening
    bias on the valve, so that a variation of fluid condition through the valve
    (without closing the valve) may be obtained, (e.g., gas supply regulators
    which permit a greater flow during the high demand period).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    468,    for similar devices which vary the bias in response to change in
    thermal conditions of the fluid.

    484.2,  for similar devices which vary the bias by variation of flow.


CLS 137/505.15
TXT Devices under subclass 505.14 in which the bias is varied by an ancillary
    reactor surface which responds to fluid pressure at the inlet.


CLS 137/505.16
TXT Devices under subclass 505.14 in which the pressure of the fluid is exerted
    upon the surface of a liquid free to move in such manner that fluctuations
    in the pressure of the fluid will transfer the liquid from one receptacle
    to another or from one portion of a receptacle to another portion thereof,
    and thereby operate the regulating valve.


CLS 137/505.17
TXT Devices under subclass 505.14 in which the means comprises a weight varied
    in accordance with the pressure of the line fluid.


CLS 137/505.18
TXT Devices under subclass 505 in which the valve is so related to the fluid
    controlled that the pressure bias imparted by the line pressure is balanced
    by means connected to but not forming a portion of the valve itself, so
    that the effect of line pressure tending to open or close the valve is
    cancelled out at least in part.


CLS 137/505.19
TXT Devices under subclass 505 in which the reactor surface is a liquid
    transferable between plural chambers and in which the valve is actuated by
    means responsive to the variation of liquid level in one chamber.


CLS 137/505.2
TXT Devices under subclass 505 relating to the control of gas or vapor and
    having a distinct reactor surface chamber and connecting passage to the
    flow line whereby a liquid seal is provided which prevents line gas or
    vapor from directly contacting the reactor surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    505.19, for liquid level type reactor surfaces which inherently protect the
    valve actuator.


CLS 137/505.21
TXT Devices under subclass 505 wherein the flow line comprises sequentially,
    the valve chamber, a flow line or passage distinct from the outlet of the
    valve chamber, and a remote isolated reactor surface chamber the reactor
    surface of which is mechanically connected to the valve.


CLS 137/505.22
TXT Devices under subclass 505 in which the pressure fluid is communicated to a
    chamber enclosing the reactor surface through a pipe external of the
    chamber.


CLS 137/505.23
TXT Devices under subclass 505.22 in which the valve casing is modified to
    receive the external pipe.


CLS 137/505.24
TXT Device under subclass 505.22 in which a lever extending out of the casing
    provides the means of connecting the reactor and valve head, and also
    provides an adjustable biasing means.


CLS 137/505.25
TXT Devices under subclass 505 in which the flow line passes through the
    reactor surface.


CLS 137/505.26
TXT Devices under subclass 505 in which the reactor surface is in a chamber
    distinct from the outlet chamber and in direct fluid communication
    therewith by means of an aperture through a partition or wall between the
    chambers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    484.6+, for similar devices, when combined with reactor chamber aspirating
    means.


CLS 137/505.27
TXT Devices under subclass 505.26 in which the passage to the reactor surface
    chamber is through the valve stem.


CLS 137/505.28
TXT Devices under subclass 505.27 in which said passage further extends through
    the reactor surface so as to apply pressure to the rear of the reactor
    surface.


CLS 137/505.29
TXT Devices under subclass 505.26 in which the valve stem passes through the
    communicating aperture.


CLS 137/505.3
TXT Devices under subclass 505.29 wherein the reactor surface is in the form of
    an expansible chamber having at least two flexible walls.


CLS 137/505.31
TXT Devices under subclass 505.29 wherein the reactor surface is in the form of
    a bell or inverted cup floating in a liquid which forms a liquid seal for
    the reactor surface chamber.


CLS 137/505.32
TXT Devices under subclass 505.31 in which the inverted cup has additional
    members, or is purposefully shaped, to dampen or retard its movement.


CLS 137/505.33
TXT Devices under subclass 505.31 in which the valve head is in the inlet
    chamber.


CLS 137/505.34
TXT Devices under subclass 505.29 in which the valve head is in the inlet
    chamber.


CLS 137/505.35
TXT Devices under subclass 505.34 in which the valve stem through the aperture
    is straight and rigidly joins the reactor to the valve which has at least
    one head in the inlet chamber.


CLS 137/505.36
TXT Devices under subclass 505.26 in which the reactor surface is in the form
    of a flexible diaphragm.


CLS 137/505.37
TXT Devices under subclass 505.36 in which the valve head is provided with a
    bias which opposes the opening bias but is of less strength.


CLS 137/505.38
TXT Devices under subclass 505 in which the reactor surface is in the outlet
    chamber and forms an imperforate wall thereof.


CLS 137/505.39
TXT Devices under subclass 505.38 in which the valve head is in the inlet
    chamber and has a stem, or connector, passing through the valve part and
    connected with and usually attached to, the reactor surface.


CLS 137/505.4
TXT Devices under subclass 505.39 in which the reactor surface is a bell or
    inverted cup floating in a liquid seal.


CLS 137/505.41
TXT Devices under subclass 505.39 in which the valve stem comprises a
    rectilinear rod rigidly connected to the reactor surface.


CLS 137/505.42
TXT Devices under subclass 505.39 in which the valve is urged towards its seat
    in opposition to the opening bias.

    (1)     Note.  The stem is usually not attached to the reactor surface,
    hence a valve returning force is required when fluid pressure moves the
    reactor surface from the stem.


CLS 137/505.43
TXT Devices under subclass 505.42 in which the bias tending to close the valve
    is located in the reactor surface, or outlet, chamber.


CLS 137/505.44
TXT Devices under subclass 505.38 in which the valve head is connected to the
    reactor surface by a yoke.


CLS 137/505.45
TXT Devices under subclass 505.44 wherein the valve is urged toward its seat in
    opposition to the opening bias by a force of less strength.


CLS 137/505.46
TXT Devices under subclass 505.38 wherein a mechanical movement is interposed
    between the fluid pressure reactor and the valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    685,    for similar mechanical movements, and see the search notes
    therewith.


CLS 137/505.47
TXT Devices under subclass 505 wherein a mechanical movement is interposed
    between the actuator and the valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    685,    for similar mechanical movements, and see the search notes
    therewith.


CLS 137/506
TXT Apparatus under subclass 494 which include a plurality of biased closed
    valves responsive to variations in fluid condition, at least one of which
    utilizes a separate connected reactor surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    512+,   for plural line condition responsive valves of the direct response
    type.

    631+,   for cyclic valves or closures and their actuators, and see the
    search notes to subclass 631.


CLS 137/507
TXT Apparatus under subclass 494 combined with means for mounting the apparatus
    on or connecting it with the system from which the apparatus derives its
    fluid.

    (1)     Note.  Merely naming a conventional coupling such as an internally
    threaded collar is insufficient for classification in this subclass.  There
    must be a recitation of the relationship of the mounting or connecting
    means to the system which is the fluid source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 143+ for mountings or
    supports for valves, and see the search notes to subclass 143.


CLS 137/508
TXT Apparatus under subclass 494 in which the separate reactor surface
    comprises a movable member in which is located an orifice to be controlled,
    the closure for which is either fixed with respect to the valve casing, or
    has movement which is different from or less than the possible movement of
    the orifice member, whereby the controlled orifice is opened by movement of
    the orifice member beyond a predetermined point.

    (1)     Note.  Certain valves included herein have a movable flow passage
    forming tubular member or sleeve, the end surface of which comprises a seat
    or passage closing part to control fluid entering the sleeve flow path, and
    also comprises the surface exposed to and reacting to the fluid pressure.
    Since these sleeves may or may not have the end surface extended by a
    flange or diaphragm without changing their other characteristics, all such
    devices have been classified together herein, regardless of the presence or
    absence of means to increase the exposed end area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    511+,   for annular type pressure responsive valves which have an annular
    cooperating seat or flow passage, but which do not meet the requirements of
    (1) Note as to reactor surface components; i.e., the exposed surface could
    not be extended by enlarging the casing and increasing the area of the
    exposed part of the movable member.


CLS 137/509
TXT Apparatus under subclass 494 wherein the valve controlling the fluid flow
    is seated by moving in the direction of flow of the fluid.


CLS 137/510
TXT Apparatus under subclass 509 in which the reactor includes a member having
    a flexible wall which is subject to the pressure of the fluid in the line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    784+,   for flexible wall expansible chambers, and see the search notes
    thereto.

    793+,   for diaphragms or bellows, per se, and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 137/511
TXT Valves under subclass 455 which are responsive to pressure of the line
    fluid on the face of the valve disc or plug itself.

    (1)     Note.  Since they have no other actuator, their movement from a
    normal or neutral or biased position is caused solely by change in the
    fluid flow or pressure in the line, and they return to their original
    position when the original condition is restored.

    (2)     Note.  Mere check valves are included in this group of subclasses,
    but a system which is not primarily condition change responsive is not
    classified herein  merely because it includes one or more check valves.
    Instead, it is placed in a subclass appropriate to the system claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    508,    for valves in which a tubular passage forming member moves in
    response to pressure of the line fluid and is biased closed, the tubular
    member having an exposed end comprising a separate reactor surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 490 and 491+ for dispenser outlet elements
    operated by pressure of the contents.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, appropriate subclasses for valves which
    have motor, mechanical, fluid pressure or manual means for opening or
    closing, but are biased to the other position by springs, weights, internal
    fluid pressure, etc., particularly.  See (1) Note above.  See also
    subclasses 336+ for biased valves, per se, and see the search notes to
    subclass 336.


CLS 137/512
TXT Apparatus under subclass 511 including more than one valve of the type.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition, section 3 for search notes on
    plural automatic valves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247.17, for plural direct response valves combined with liquid seal means.

    506+,   for plural line condition responsive valves including at least one
    valve which has a separate connected fluid reactor surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 631+ for cyclic valves and
    their actuators, and see the search notes to subclass 631.


CLS 137/512.1
TXT Devices under subclass 512 in which the valves are arranged in a single
    flow path and divide the flow into parallel paths which recombine after
    passing through the valves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    516.11, for dividing and recombining effected by plural ports in a seat and
    a single valve head.

    599.1,  for dividing and recombining systems of the nonautomatic type.


CLS 137/512.15
TXT Valves under subclass 512.1 controlled by an integral resilient member
    mounted so that portions of the said member provide separate valve heads.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    512.4,  for other plural direct response valves provided by an integral
    resilient member.


CLS 137/512.2
TXT Devices under subclass 512 in which one of the valves carries the seat for
    at least one other valve and also serves as the support for the other valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    493.1,  for bi-directional flow valves of this type.


CLS 137/512.3
TXT Devices under subclass 512 in which the valves are of different types,
    e.g., disc valves and ball valves, or are of different size so that they
    operate at different pressures.


CLS 137/512.4
TXT Devices under subclass 512 in which the valves are integral resilient
    members which are attached to the valve body in such a manner as to provide
    separately operating resilient portions which control separate ports in the
    valve body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    512.15, for plural direct response valves provided by an integral resilient
    member characterized by dividing and recombining in a single flow path.

    525,    for single valves of this type.


CLS 137/512.5
TXT Devices under subclass 512 in which the valves are urged toward or away
    from their seats by the same biasing means.


CLS 137/513
TXT Apparatus under subclass 512 in which there is a mechanical interconnection
    between two of the valves such that the movement of one valve relative to
    its seat in response to variation in the line condition is transmitted to
    the other thereby to move it relative to its seat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    493+,   for valve means oppositely acting to open for either excessive
    pressures or pressures below standard.

    494+,   for condition responsive valves having a reactor surface which is
    not primarily a valve, though it may have the effect of a variable
    restrictor.


CLS 137/513.3
TXT Devices under subclass 511 in which means are provided to permit limited
    flow through the valve when the valve is closed, or nominally closed.


CLS 137/513.5
TXT Devices under subclass 513.3 in which the nominally engaging surfaces of
    the head and/or seat elements are so constructed or arranged that when the
    valve is closed, a limited flow passage exists between said surfaces.


CLS 137/513.7
TXT Devices under subclass 513.3 in which a passage permitting limited flow
    around the head and seat elements is provided in the valve body structure.


CLS 137/514
TXT Valves under subclass 511 provided with a dashpot or other retarding means
    to prevent or reduce chattering or hunting of the valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    494+,   for valves having separate connected reacting surfaces which have a
    positive relation to the operation of the valve, i.e., assist in or cause
    either the opening or closing movement of the valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 297+ for a dashpot of general utility.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 15+ for flow responsive
    valves having a timing retarding chamber to cut off flow after a
    predetermined flow period, subclasses 48+ for valves with fluid operated
    retarding means, and see the search notes to subclass 48, and subclass 64
    for valve actuators with retarding means other than the fluid type.


CLS 137/514.3
TXT Devices under subclass 514 wherein the end of the valve has a dashpot
    chamber therein.


CLS 137/514.5
TXT Devices under subclass 514 in which the end of the valve reciprocates in a
    dashpot chamber.


CLS 137/514.7
TXT Devices under subclass 514.5 wherein an enlarged member on the end of a
    valve stem reciprocates in a dashpot chamber.


CLS 137/515
TXT Valves under subclass 511 in which the valve is associated with or mounted
    in a housing provided with means for joining it with pipe at both ends, the
    three elements being longitudinally aligned when connected.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the patents classified in this subclass are for use
    in a drill string.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155,    for gas lift valves for wells.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclasses 86.1+ for a well pipe having an anchor or seal
    with a valve, subclass 97.1 for a well cap or head with a valve, and
    subclasses 316+ for valves, closures, or changeable restrictors down in a
    well

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 148+ for valves contained in
    a pipe line or coupling, and see the search notes to subclass 148.


CLS 137/515.3
TXT Devices under subclass 515 in which a separate valve seat element is
    threaded into one of the coupling elements

    (1)     Note.  The valve head may be carried by the removable seat element
    or may be attached elsewhere in the coupling.


CLS 137/515.5
TXT Devices under subclass 515 in which the valve seat element is formed as an
    integral part of one of the coupling elements or is separate but carried by
    one of the coupling elements.


CLS 137/515.7
TXT Devices under subclass 515 in which the valve seat element is clamped
    between separable elements of the coupling means.


CLS 137/516
TXT Valves under subclass 511 provided with means for selecting one of a
    plurality of diverse effective areas for the valve by selecting from a
    plurality of preselected valve elements, i.e., from a plurality of valves
    or from a plurality of valve seats to vary the responsiveness of the valve.

    (1)     Note.  The plurality of elements are usually present in the system
    at all times.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329+,   for devices embodying a plurality of alternate wear parts, one of
    which may be substituted for another when required by wear or injury.

    512+,   for means for varying the responsiveness of the condition response
    device by selecting one of plural valves of different responsiveness.

    529,    for selectively usable diverse biasing means for a single condition
    responsive valve.


CLS 137/516.11
TXT Valves under subclass 511 wherein a single valve head controls a plurality
    of ports in a single seat, whereby the flow is subjected to an action of
    dividing and recombining by its flow through the seat member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    512.1,  for plural direct response valves providing dividing and
    recombining a single flow line.


CLS 137/516.13
TXT Valves under subclass 516.11 wherein the ports are arranged concentrically.


CLS 137/516.15
TXT Valves under subclass 516.11 wherein the valve head is annular in form.


CLS 137/516.17
TXT Valves under subclass 516.15 wherein the seat supports a post, the said
    post being substantially concentric with the annular head.


CLS 137/516.19
TXT Valves under subclass 516.17 wherein the post provides a valve stop or
    support such a stop.


CLS 137/516.21
TXT Valves under subclass 516.19 wherein the post also provides guide means for
    the valve.


CLS 137/516.23
TXT Valves under subclass 516.17 wherein the post provides guide means for the
    valve head.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    516.21, for guides in combination with valve stops.


CLS 137/516.25
TXT Valves under subclass 511 comprising a single flow path provided with a
    plurality of serially arranged sealing surfaces which cooperate with a
    single head element.

    (1)     Note.  A single sealing surface or head and seat interface
    comprises a single surface which is either planar or the resulting surface
    formed by the rotation of either a straight line or a smoothly curved line
    about the axis of the valved port.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247.17, for a plural seating valve combined with liquid seal means.


CLS 137/516.27
TXT Valves under subclass 516.25 wherein the seating is sequential.


CLS 137/516.29
TXT Valves under subclass 516.27 wherein a resilient gasket is provided at the
    seating surface and the deformation of the gasket provides one seating.


CLS 137/517
TXT Valves under subclass 511 in which a bias means is provided to maintain the
    valve normally open against fluid pressure on the valve itself tending to
    close or partly close the valve.  The bias means may be the weight of the
    valve body itself.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    409+,   for normally open float valves.

    479+,   for governor valves biased normally open to control the flow in a
    combustion engine suction line.

    505+,   for valves with a separate connected fluid reactor surface in which
    the bias tends to open the valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 336+ for biased valves, per
    se, and see the search notes to subclass 336.


CLS 137/518
TXT Valves under subclass 517 comprising a pair of edge-pivoted vanes biased in
    opposite directions, the pivot means comprising closely adjacent parallel
    axes or both vanes being pivoted on the same axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    499,    for line condition change responsive valve with a swinging vane
    reactor.


CLS 137/519
TXT Valves under subclass 517 in which the bias means is a weight which may be
    the weight of the valve body itself.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 338 for weight biases valves,
    per se, and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 137/519.5
TXT Valves under subclass 519 wherein the moving element is substantially
    spherical.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    533.11, for normally closed ball valves.


CLS 137/520
TXT Valves under subclass 519 in which the valve body is pivoted about an axis
    at or closely adjacent one of its edges.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247.19, for a liquid seal combined with a pivoted valve.

    521,    for other direct response pivoted valves which are biased to open
    position.

    527,    for pivoted condition responsive valves which are biased closed.


CLS 137/521
TXT Valves under subclass 517 in which the valve body is pivotally mounted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247.19, for a pivoted valve combined with liquid seal means.

    518,    for oppositely swinging vanes comprising valve bodies.

    520,    for weight biased, edge pivoted condition responsive valves.

    527,    for pivoted condition responsive valves which are biased closed.


CLS 137/522
TXT Valves under subclass 511 provided with means external to and independent
    of the flow path of the fluid controlled for opening the valve against its
    bias or for relieving the valve of the effect of the bias so that normal
    fluid pressure will open the valve.

    (1)     Note.  The relief of bias classifiable herein is for the purpose of
    permitting the valve to blow off a normal pressure which the valve would
    otherwise contain.

    (2)     Note.  Where a bias adjusting means positively opens the valve,
    classification is in this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  See the class definition, section 3, for search notes on
    plural valves, at least one of which is automatic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    456+,   for safety cut-off valves requiring the use of external means to
    open them.

    481,    for suction flow governor valves with manual modifier for the valve.

    495,    for line condition responsive valves with separate connected fluid
    reactor surface and having manual or external control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, appropriate subclasses for valves which
    are regularly operated by means other then the pressure of fluid in the
    line, but where the fluid in the line may cause return to the original
    position, especially subclasses 12+ for fluid pressure actuators and
    retarders.


CLS 137/523
TXT Valves under subclass 522 provided with means for maintaining the bias
    relieving or valve opening means in the bias relieving or valve opening
    position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 89+ for valves with means
    for blocking or disabling the valve actuator, which means may hold the
    valve open, and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 137/524
TXT Valves under subclass 511 provided with means for indicating the adjustment
    of the biasing means, usually in terms of the pressure at which the valve
    will open.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227+,   for inflation valve combinations or subcombinations provided with
    indicators.

    551+,   for valves provided with indicating means, especially subclass 556
    for indicator elements rigidly carried by the element position of which is
    indicated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 227 for valve position indicators
    where the valve is not significantly claimed.


CLS 137/526
TXT Valves under subclass 511 which open in response to an excessive decrease
    in pressure, e.g., to admit atmospheric air.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217,    for back-flow prevention by vacuum breaking.

    479+,   for suction flow governor valves associated with internal
    combustion engines.

    493+,   for plural valves, one of which opens in response to excessive
    decrease in pressure.


CLS 137/527
TXT Valves under subclass 511 in which the valve disc or plug swings around the
    means by which it is mounted in the valve seat or casing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247.19, for a pivoted valve and liquid seal means combined.

    448,    for pivoted valves operated by float drains.

    484,    for unbalanced pivoted valves of the combustion engine induction
    type.

    520     and 521, for pivoted direct response valves which are biased open.


CLS 137/527.2
TXT Devices under subclass 527 in which the valve casing is provided with a
    removable closure element which retains the valve head in assembled
    relation with its seat.


CLS 137/527.4
TXT Devices under subclass 527 in which the mounting of the valve permits
    motion of the valve head, in addition to pivoting, in order to allow the
    head to adjust itself to the valve seat.


CLS 137/527.6
TXT Devices under subclass 527 which provide means for mounting the valve on
    the end of a pipe.


CLS 137/527.8
TXT Devices under subclass 527 which are provided with means having sufficient
    mass to maintain the valve in the desired position in response to gravity.


CLS 137/528
TXT Valves under subclass 511 in which the movable member of the valve moves
    substantially rectilinearly between its extreme positions.  Ball valves are
    included although their motion may not be strictly rectilinear.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 318+ for reciprocating
    valves of general utility, and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 137/529
TXT Valves under subclass 528 in which the biasing means comprises more than
    one bias force providing element exclusive of the weight of the valve body
    itself.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 336+ for biased valves, and
    see the search notes to subclass 336.


CLS 137/530
TXT Valves under subclass 528 having a cam member associated with a biasing
    means to determine the effect of the bias.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    524,    for bias adjustment means and indicator for condition responsive
    valves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 336+ for biased valves, and
    see the search notes thereto.


CLS 137/531
TXT Valves under subclass 528 in which the bias is applied through a lever the
    effective length of which varies as the valve opens or closes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 233 for lever actuated valves
    in which the leverage varies during actuation.


CLS 137/532
TXT Valves under subclass 528 in which the force of gravity is utilized to bias
    the valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    519+,   for valves of the check valve type which are weight biased to an
    open position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 338 for valves having a
    mechanical actuator and weight biasing means for maintaining the valve in
    position.


CLS 137/533
TXT Valves under subclass 532 in which the weight of the valve itself is
    utilized as the biasing means.


CLS 137/533.11
TXT Valves under subclass 533 in which the moving element is substantially
    spherical.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247.21, for a ball valve combined with liquid seal means.

    519.5,  for normally open ball valves.


CLS 137/533.13
TXT Valves under subclass 533.11 in which the means for controlling the
    movement of the valve element is separable from the valve body.


CLS 137/533.15
TXT Valves under subclass 533.11 in which the valve seat is separable from the
    valve body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    533.13, for separable seats combined with separable ball valve cages.


CLS 137/533.17
TXT Devices under subclass 533 in which means are provided to guide the head to
    or from its seat.


CLS 137/533.19
TXT Devices under subclass 533.17 in which the valve head is guided by means
    stationary with respect to the seat and engagable with the outer periphery
    of the valve head.


CLS 137/533.21
TXT Devices under subclass 533.17 in which there is provided a rod-like guiding
    element usually substantially smaller in diameter than the head.


CLS 137/533.23
TXT Devices under subclass 533.21 in which nonvalving structure carried by the
    head engages a stop or abutment when the valve closes.

    (1)     Note.  Pump valves having a resilient or deformable head or seat
    sealing member are found here.  Valves in which the stop structure is also
    a nonresilient valving structure which seats in sequence with a valve
    having a resilient seat are found in subclass 516.29.


CLS 137/533.25
TXT Devices under subclass 533.21 in which there are a plurality of rodlike
    elements projecting from opposite faces of the valve head.


CLS 137/533.27
TXT Devices under subclass 533.21 in which the valve head is apertured and
    slides on the stationary rod-like element extending through the aperture.


CLS 137/533.29
TXT Devices under subclass 533.21 in which the valve seat and the guide for the
    rod-like element constitute a unit.


CLS 137/533.31
TXT Devices under subclass 533.21 in which the casing closure and the guide for
    the rod-like element constitute a unit.


CLS 137/534
TXT Valves under subclass 532 in which the weight is coaxial with the valve
    disc or plug.


CLS 137/535
TXT Valves under subclass 528 in which the elasticity of a resilient element is
    used to provide the biasing force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    525,    for resilient material valves of the direct response type and see
    the search notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 336+ for spring biased
    valves of this class, and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 137/536
TXT Valves under subclass 535 provided with means preventing or reducing the
    impingement of the pressure fluid on the spring, usually a flexible wall,
    deflecting baffles or a telescoping enclosure for the spring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    790,    for expansible chamber devices with additional biasing means.

    793+,   for diaphragms and bellows, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 335.1 for valves provided with
    a hermetic flexible wall seal which separates the valve actuator from the
    controlled fluid.


CLS 137/537
TXT Valves under subclass 535 in which the resilient member is placed under
    tension to hold the valve normally closed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 69+ for elastic extension devices, per
    se, especially subclasses 73+ for tension springs.


CLS 137/538
TXT Valves under subclass 535 in which the valve is a cylindrical plug
    cooperating with a hollow cylindrical valve seat, there being ports in the
    cylindrical wall of either piston or seat which are opened and closed by
    reciprocating movement of the piston in the cylindrical seat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    792,    for piston type expansible chamber devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 62+ for piston type fluid
    pressure actuators for valves, and subclasses 318+ for reciprocating valves
    of this class, and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 137/539
TXT Valves under subclass 535 in which the moving element is substantially
    spherical.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247.21, for a ball valve combined with liquid seal means.

    449,    for float arm operated ball valves.

    519.5,  for normally open ball valves.


CLS 137/539.5
TXT Valves under subclass 539 wherein a follower (e.g., reciprocating rod) is
    interposed between the spring and the ball.


CLS 137/540
TXT Valves under subclass 535 in which the spring is coaxial with the valve.


CLS 137/540.11
TXT Valves under subclass 540 having retaining means for broken valve parts,
    e.g., an auxiliary chamber or stop on the valve stem by means of which
    broken valve parts are prevented from entering the cylinder of compressors,
    etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    343+,   for means to protect a person or thing from injury through contact
    with the system or parts thereof.


CLS 137/541
TXT Valves under subclass 540 in which the spring is located on the side of the
    valve which is exposed to the fluid pressure to which the valve is to be
    responsive, i.e., the spring and valve are on opposite sides of the valve
    seat and the spring is in the fluid conduit or container.


CLS 137/542
TXT Valves under subclass 540 in which the valve has a stem which passes
    through the biasing spring, which is mounted between abutments one of which
    is fixed and comprises a guide for the stem and the other of which is
    carried by or comprised in the valve head and/or stem.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    541,    for valves of this type in which the spring is in contact with the
    pressure fluid, the spring and valve head being on opposite sides of the
    valve seat.


CLS 137/543
TXT Valves under subclass 542 which provide a transverse support for the valve
    stem, spaced from the valve and supported in its location by a plurality of
    elongated, circumferentially spaced members parallel to the valve stem, the
    support usually comprising a spring abutment.


CLS 137/543.13
TXT Valves under subclass 540 wherein the head and spring are on the same side
    of the seat and the spring abuts a removable guide for the valve stem.


CLS 137/543.15
TXT Valves under subclass 540 wherein the head slides on a guide-rod which is
    concentric with the spring.


CLS 137/543.17
TXT Valves under subclass 540 wherein the spring guides the head to its seat.


CLS 137/543.19
TXT Valves under subclass 540 wherein the guide is cage-like and guides a
    stemless valve by sliding contact with the outer periphery thereof.


CLS 137/543.21
TXT Valves under subclass 540 wherein a guide means integral and coplanar is
    provided on the stemless valve disk, said guide means contacting the walls
    of the valve casing.


CLS 137/543.23
TXT Valves under subclass 540 wherein the head is provided with a guide and the
    spring is on the side of the head opposite the guide.


CLS 137/544
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means for separating one or
    more materials from a fluid mixture either by providing a physical barrier
    to the passage of particles over a given size or by providing a trap where
    heavier material may be deposited.

    (1)     Note.  Means for separating solid material from fluid in pressure
    fluid valve actuating means or in servo-motor supply lines are excluded
    from this subclass.  Patents which include such separating means in
    pressure fluid valve actuation or servo-motor operating systems are
    classified on the basis of those other features, for which classification
    has been provided, but cross referenced here when useful disclosures are
    present.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140,    for siphons with strainers, filters, separators or sediment traps.

    237+,   for distribution systems having positively acting cleaning means.

    583+,   for distribution systems with cleanout openings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, appropriate subclasses for screens in
    pipes and conduits, especially subclass 41 for restrictors combined with
    screens.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 418+ for means to
    filter a liquid combined with a flow controller for the material being
    treated and see the search notes thereunder.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 189.06+ for dispensers combined with
    screens, strainers and foraminous guards.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 237+ for liquid developer applied to
    a latent image within an electrophotographic device.


CLS 137/545
TXT Apparatus under subclass 544 in which the separating means includes plural
    elements.

    (1)     Note.  The separating means may be of similar or dissimilar types,
    and may be positioned in the same or in different flow passages.


CLS 137/546
TXT Apparatus under subclass 544 in which the separating means includes a
    chamber for trapping sediment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237+,   for distribution systems embodying positively acting cleaning means.

    583+,   for distribution systems in which there is an access opening for
    cleaning purposes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 294+ for fluid
    handling means combined with diverse means for liquid separation,
    especially subclasses 302 and 313; and subclasses 513+ for flow controller
    combined with a gravitational separator, especially subclasses 533+.


CLS 137/547
TXT Apparatus under subclass 544 in which the separating means is a strainer
    which is movable with respect to the flow path without being removed from
    the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes strainers which may be moved from one
    position to another in the system, e.g., may be selectively positioned in
    one flow path or in another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    861+,   for spouts, valves or deflectors at the junction of three flow
    paths, shiftable from one to another of two outlets.


CLS 137/549
TXT Apparatus under subclass 544 in which the separating means is a foraminated
    or porous body or hollow strainer arranged with the fluid inlet in an axial
    direction and the outlet in a generally radial direction or vice versa.


CLS 137/550
TXT Apparatus under subclass 544 in which the separating means is a strainer
    defining a substantially plane surface and disposed perpendicular to flow
    path.


CLS 137/551
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising fluid handling means
    combined (1) with an indicator, register, recorder, or alarm responsive to
    a condition or position of a part of the apparatus or of the fluid in the
    apparatus or (2) with means which permits inspection of normally hidden
    parts of the apparatus or of the fluid inside the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  A movable element performing a blocking, disabling or
    actuating function is not considered to be an indicator unless it or a
    cooperating member has some indicia with position indicating significance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213+,   for liquid level responsive whistles in diverse fluid containing
    pressure systems.

    227+,   for inflating stems and/or chucks with gauge or indicator.

    524,    for direct responsive valves biased closed with bias adjustment
    indicator.

    586,    for telltales which have no indicia associated therewith and which
    also serve as blocking means for access opening covers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for pressure, level,
    temperature, etc., measuring and indicating means, per se.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclasses for mechanical
    signals and indicators.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 23+ for recorders, signals indicators, etc.,
    in dispensers and subclasses 154+ for inspection devices in dispensers.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 297 for detents that
    inherently give an audible signal or click.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 870.01+ for quantitative
    electric telemetering systems of general application, and subclasses 603+
    for  nonquantitative electric alarms responsive to fluent material
    condition, such as level.


CLS 137/552
TXT Apparatus under subclass 551 comprising more than one indicator, register,
    recorder, alarm or inspection means or more than one of the beforementioned
    types of subcombinations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 25+ for plural indicators, etc., in
    dispensers.


CLS 137/552.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 552 wherein the information conveyed by the
    indicators is in some code not obvious to an uninformed operator, whereby
    the operation is similar to that required by combination locks in that the
    indicators must be positioned in a predetermined relationship to allow flow
    through the system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    383+,   for apparatus including a lock or seal.

    613+,   for mere serial valves in a single flow path.


CLS 137/552.7
TXT Apparatus under subclass 551 calibrated in time.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, appropriate
    subclasses for time indicators, per se.


CLS 137/553
TXT Apparatus under subclass 551 comprising an indicator which gives
    information as to the position or range of motion of a movable or
    adjustable part of the apparatus, e.g., a valve or adjustable wall.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the indicator is a scale and pointer but an edge or
    other distinct line on an element of the apparatus may serve as the pointer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227+,   for gauge or indicator with means for inflating or deflating
    inflatable articles.

    524,    for bias adjustment indicators for safety valves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 200+ for scale and pointer
    subcombinations, especially subclass 277 for valve position indicators.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 41+ for means for indicating position and/or
    extent of motion in dispensers.


CLS 137/554
TXT Apparatus under subclass 553 in which electrical signal system means are
    used to sense and/or indicate the position or extent of motion in valves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    392,    for electrical characteristic sensing in level responsive or
    maintaining systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 870.01+ for quantitative
    electric telemetering systems of general application.


CLS 137/555
TXT Apparatus under subclass 553 in which the indicator shows the position or
    selection for use of one of a plurality of paths.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 42 for indicators showing selection from
    plural dispenser outlets.


CLS 137/556
TXT Apparatus under subclass 553 in which an element of the indicator is an
    integral part of, or is rigidly carried by, the movable or adjustable part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 47+ for similar indicators in dispensers.


CLS 137/556.3
TXT Devices under subclass 556 wherein the movable indicator element comprises
    a pointer.


CLS 137/556.6
TXT Devices under subclass 556.3 wherein the pointer is an integral part of the
    valve handle.


CLS 137/557
TXT Apparatus under subclass 551 provided with a visual indicator, audible
    alarm or recorder which is responsive to the pressure of the fluid in the
    flow path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213+,   for liquid level responsive whistles in diverse fluid containing
    pressure systems.

    227+,   for pressure gauges or indicators combined with inflatable article
    (e.g., tire) filling chucks and/or stems.

    524,    for means for indicating the bias adjustment of a safety valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 700+ for fluid pressure gauges,
    per se.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 264+ for fluid flow indicators.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 23+ for dispensers having pressure
    responsive indicators, especially subclass 39 for audible signals.


CLS 137/558
TXT Apparatus under subclass 551 provided with a visual indicator, audible
    alarm or recorder which is responsive to the level of the liquid in some
    part of the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  An indicator comprises means which has at least an
    indicating and a nonindicating position, or a plurality of indicating
    positions, and does not require inspection of the material in the system to
    establish the distinction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213+,   for whistles used as liquid level responsive indicators in systems
    involving gas pressure storage over or displacement of liquid.

    559,    for sight glasses. See (1) Note.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 290+ for liquid level and depth
    gauges, particularly subclass 322.5 for floats, per se.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 227+ for liquid level indicators.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 51 for float level indicators for dispensers.


CLS 137/559
TXT Apparatus under subclass 551 which provides means which permit or
    facilitate observation or inspection of the fluid inside the apparatus or
    of normally invisible parts of the apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 323 for sight glasses, per se.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 154+ for dispenser combined inspection
    devices comprising gauge tubes, sight openings, transparent flow line
    sections or graduated transparent containers.


CLS 137/560
TXT Apparatus under the class definition which comprises devices or parts in
    addition to or combined with distribution systems and (1) having functions
    other than material handling or (2) which serve to perfect the material
    handling apparatus for its intended purpose.

    (1)     Note.  For a definition of a distribution system, see subclass 561.

    (2)     Note.  Subcombinations otherwise classifiable in Class 251, Valves
    and Valve Actuation, have been included herein if combined with subject
    matter of the types defined in (1) and (2) of the subclass definition above.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass includes for example, Fluid supply or valve
    actuation to or from diving bells, drinking troughs or cups not part of the
    flow system, carburetor mount protection, testing devices, anti-freeze
    liquid chambers and control means for devices or operations not a part of
    the material handling system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 192 for dispensers with miscellaneous combined
    features and the preceding subclasses for particular combinations provided
    for therein.


CLS 137/561
TXT Systems under the class definition comprising means for confining flowable
    material during its flow or making it available for flow and either causing
    or controlling its flow or potential flow, which means is (1) a combination
    of material containing or confining means, such as tanks or conduits, in
    flow relation with flow causing means, such as pumps, (2) combinations of
    two or more material confining devices in flow relation, including branched
    flow lines and hydrostatic devices, such as standpipes or vertically
    adjustable outlet and overflow conduits in open communication with the
    confined body of flowable material; and (3) combinations of material
    confining devices with flow controlling means when more of the material
    confining device is claimed than is necessary to mount the flow controlling
    means.

    (1)     Note.  Flow controlling means comprise valves with or without
    actuating means, closures for flow passages, flow restrictors, baffles and
    guides.

    (2)     Note.  Passages which divert material from the flow system for the
    purpose of actuating or controlling a pump or valve or similar part which
    is solely concerned with the mechanics of handling the main flow of the
    material are not considered flow confining means.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass provides for flow dividers of the nonautomatic
    nonvalved, nonaccumulating type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115.01+ and 118.01+, for self controlled branching systems having plural
    outflows.  See (3) Note.

    262,    for flow dividing by passage through or overflow from plural
    compartments. See (3) Note.

    597,    599+ and 608, for flow dividing with combining or with valved
    passages.  See (3) Note.

    631+,   for cyclically actuated valves.  See the class definition, Section
    4 for search notes on plural nonautomatic valves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 863+ for a sampling system which
    obtains a predetermined portion of a mass of material to be tested.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses, for subject matter which
    comprises distribution systems as defined above, but which has in most
    instances particular application to the problems of vending or handling
    fluent solids.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 12+ for valve actuators
    which divert and use a part of the material being handled in the system to
    actuate or retard valves controlling the fluid flow in such systems.  See
    (2) Note, above.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 237+ for liquid developer applied to
    a latent image within an electrophotographic device.


CLS 137/562
TXT Systems under subclass 561 including means whereby a tank may be filled
    from a faucet and drained into a sink or basin associated with the faucet.

    (1)     Note.  The tank is usually a dish or clothes washer or some
    equivalent device which receives and discharges a quantity of water, which
    may be used either in the tank or during the process of discharge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    357+,   for static structural installations of fluent material handling
    means in buildings.

    374,    for fluent material handling means combined with house furnishings.

    603,    for distribution systems comprising attachments of the mixing type
    for two conventional faucets.


CLS 137/563
TXT Systems under subclass 561 including a flow path in which at least a
    portion of the fluent material is continuously circulated in a closed
    circuit.  Such system may comprise (1) one or more return by-passes in
    which a portion of the fluent material in a flow line is diverted from and
    returned to the flow line at a point upstream from the point of diversion,
    or (2) a system in which the main portion of a flow continuously returns to
    the starting point, and one or more branches are provided for tapping and
    removing from the circuit a portion of the fluent material or one or more
    branches are provided for admitting fluent material from an outside source
    into the circuit, or (3) all the material circulates in a confined path
    without addition or removal of material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115.01+, for by-passes controlled by condition change in the main line.

    407,    for level responsive systems in which an auxiliary measuring
    chamber is connected at its top and bottom to the accumulation chamber the
    level in which is to be controlled or sensed.

    599+,   for fluid flow which is divided and recombined, and see the search
    notes on by-passes under subclass 599.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 318 for dispenser systems involving return of
    material to the supply.


CLS 137/564
TXT Systems under subclass 563 comprising a circulating system in which the
    thermal characteristics of the system are such that temperature differences
    exist at spaced points in the device and cause flow of the fluent material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334+,   especially subclasses 337 and 340 for similar structure in which
    heat exchange is the primary consideration, and see the definition of
    subclass 334 for collected search notes on fluent material handling systems
    involving heat or heating means.


CLS 137/564.5
TXT System under subclass 561 including an additive reservoir in a shunt on a
    main line, the reservoir including noncommunicating compartments defined by
    a blind follower actuated by main line pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205.5,  for an intermediate fluid layer as a follower in a similar shunt
    feeder system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 386+ for a dispenser having a discharge
    assistant comprising a container with a follower. See the notes thereunder.


CLS 137/565
TXT Systems under subclass 561 including pump means for supplying energy to the
    flowing fluid for building up, or at least preventing decrease in, the
    force with which it travels in the system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for processes for adding energy to flowing fluid.

    95+,    for systems including a pump in which the motive fluid for a motor
    which operates the pump is controlled in response to means which senses a
    condition in the fluid being pumped or to be pumped.

    108,    for pump unloaders comprising self-proportioning or correlating
    systems.

    147+,   for pumps for starting siphons.

    206+,   for gas and liquid containing systems in which gas under pressure
    is employed to displace liquid.

    282,    for hydrants with pump or ejector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 372+ for pump type dispensers, and see the
    search notes to subclass 372.

    417,    Pumps, appropriate subclasses for pumps, per se.  For an
    elaboration of the line between this class and Class 417, see the Class 417
    class definition.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclasses, for
    rotary expansible chamber pumps, per se.


CLS 137/565.1
TXT Systems under subclass 565 in which there is provided distributor means
    downstream of the pump discharge valve, driven in synchronism with the pump
    means and operating to divide or distribute the fluid discharged by the
    pump into at least two separate flow paths leading to points of fluid
    utilization.


CLS 137/565.2
TXT Systems under subclass 565.1 wherein an element of the distributor means is
    integral with a movable member of the pump means.


CLS 137/566
TXT Systems under subclass 565 having two or more pumps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 255 for dispensers having plural discharge
    assistants all of which are pumps.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 2+ for plural motor driven pumps having control
    of a pump drive motor in response to a condition of the pump or pump fluid.


CLS 137/567
TXT Systems under subclass 566 in which the pumps discharge separate fluid
    flows to parts of the system other than one another.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes plural parallel pump systems regardless
    of whether the pump outputs are supplied to separate devices or are
    combined.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255+,   for plural tanks or compartments having parallel outflows or
    inflows.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 3+ for plural motor driven pumps in parallel in
    which the drive motor of at least one is controlled in response to a
    condition of at least one of the pumps or fluid handled thereby.


CLS 137/568
TXT Systems under subclass 565 comprising a pump and (1) a reservoir under
    atmospheric pressure usually at an elevation above the pump, and in open or
    check-controlled communication with the pump outlet line to receive surplus
    fluid for storage or surge relief, or (2) a parallel supply from a
    different line or from a container supplied from a source other than the
    pump.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 26+ for pressure
    compensators for conduits.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 129+ for dispensers having plural sources or
    supply containers.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 540+ for an expansible chamber type pump and
    pulsation dampening means associated therewith.


CLS 137/569
TXT Systems under subclass 565 having means whereby fluid in the system may
    either pass through the pump or be caused to flow around the pump.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115.01+, for by-passes controlled by main line condition.

    563,    for systems wherein a pump circulates fluid in a closed circulating
    system, as in returning surplus pumped fluid to the source of supply, and
    see the search notes thereto.

    568,    for surge tanks, pulse eliminators and surplus or drain storage
    devices combined with pumps.

    599+,   for by-passes in distributing systems, and see the search notes to
    subclass 599.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 318 for dispenser pump by-passes.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 279+ for a pump provided with condition
    responsive by-pass control, and subclass 440 for an expansible chamber type
    pump provided with by-pass valve means.


CLS 137/570
TXT Systems under subclass 565 having a pump associated with fluid delivery
    tubing, usually vertically positioned in a well, the tubing being provided
    with a drain valve which has an actuator mounted on or supported by the
    pump housing, the pump mounting or a part thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 145+ for apparatus
    comprising a pipe having a valve mounted on the side thereof, including
    structures disclosed for use as well tube drains, in which an actuator for
    the valve is mounted on the tube.

    417,    Pumps, subclass 434 for a pump provided with a port or noncyclic
    valve for draining the pump or portion thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206+,   for reservoirs under gas pressure, especially subclass 207 for air
    chambers for surge suppression.

    593,    for head establishing standpipes or surge tanks in nonpump
    distribution systems.


CLS 137/571
TXT Systems under subclass 561 in which two or more tanks or compartments are
    connected in such manner that all tanks except the last in the flow
    sequence deliver fluid only to one other tank and to no other type of
    receiver.

    (1)     Note.  The containers other than the last in the series may have
    plural outlets but all the outflow of one must be to one other container,
    and all may have additional inflow from sources other than a tank.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130+,   for siphons with discharge controlling receivers.

    255+,   for plural tanks of which two or more have outflows to receivers
    other than to successive tanks, and see subclasses 263 and 265 for plural
    tanks connected for series-parallel flow.

    406+,   for communicating measuring vessels for sensing weight of
    accumulated fluid.

    428,    for float valves in separate communicating float chambers.

    453+,   for series flow by barometric feed between a supply tank and a
    receiver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 133 for dispensers having a separate inflow
    line connected to a tank and measuring trap system, and subclasses 424.5+
    for dispensers having plural series connected compartments where the second
    one is a trap, i.e., a measuring or separating means receiving or
    segregating material from the first.


CLS 137/572
TXT Systems under subclass 571 in which the plural tanks are so constructed
    that they may be separated from one another and in which the passage by
    which the tanks are connected contains a valve or closure.

    (1)     Note.  The separation is not in the normal use of the apparatus,
    but is usually for cleaning or replacement of parts of a system without
    loss of the main body of fluid, as in a transformer radiator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    320+,   for devices for tapping a pipe, keg or apertured tank under
    pressure, wherein the pipe, etc., has a valved outlet, the valve being
    actuated by the tapping device.

    454,    for series tanks of the barometric type with a shut-off between the
    supply tank and receiver.

    614,    for a flow device having serial valves and/or closures and a
    disconnectable coupling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 22+ and 110+ for receivers removably associated with a filling
    supply for discharge.


CLS 137/573
TXT Systems under subclass 571 in which fluid passes through the tanks or
    compartments in a zigzag path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334+,   for heating exchange systems having convoluted flow paths.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, subclasses 27+ for
    zigzag conveyor chutes.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 127 for flow paths with valves
    and zigzag type flow restrictors.


CLS 137/574
TXT Systems under subclass 571 comprising a container having plural
    compartments formed by plates or walls in the flow path but only partially
    closing it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262,    for plural flow dividing compartments formed by weirs, baffles, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 127 for baffles in a valve
    inlet or outlet for restricting flow through the valve.


CLS 137/575
TXT Systems under subclass 571 in which a flow passage leads from the top of
    one tank to the bottom of the next tank in the series.


CLS 137/576
TXT Systems under subclass 571 in which the tanks or compartments are connected
    by an opening in a wall common thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    406+,   for systems controlled by the weight of accumulated fluid which is
    sensed in a communicating chamber.

    428,    for liquid level responsive or maintaining systems having a control
    float in a separate communicating float chamber.


CLS 137/577
TXT Systems under subclass 561 comprising a tank having a discharge passage
    which may be moved or adjusted with respect to the tank to (1) remove
    material from a particular part of the tank, or (2) determine the level of
    material retained in the tank and/or the amount withdrawn from the tank.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101.29, for a swinging outlet pipe controller in a self proportioning
    system.

    152,    for means for mounting siphons.

    395+,   for apparatus for controlling outflow from a tank which is liquid
    level responsive or liquid level maintaining.

    438,    for float arm operated valves associated with a movable nozzle or
    inlet terminal.

    590+,   for tanks with internally extending flow guides or pipes which are
    not movable.

    615+,   for articulated or swinging spouts or discharge outlets for
    distributing systems where the flow conduit is not mounted on a tank.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 434+ for adjustable overflow and/or outlet
    pipes for varying trap chamber volume in dispensers.


CLS 137/577.5
TXT Systems under subclass 577 including a conduit placed or adapted to be
    placed within a receptacle, e.g., tank, reservoir or swimming pool, and
    means arranged to traverse the inlet end of the conduit in a generally
    horizontal direction, usually to remove sediment from the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    565+,   for similar systems including pumps.

    590.5,  for nondraining overflow type liquid removers which have inlet
    conduits extending to the bottom of the receptacle.

    899+,   for vehicle mounted fluid handling means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 1.7 for
    submerged devices having cleaning means for that class, and subclass 246.5
    for tanks with attached cleaners for that class.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 523+ for
    gravitational separators and mechanical liquid removers.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 68.22+ for
    hoisting buckets or bailers.


CLS 137/578
TXT Systems under subclass 577 in which the intake end of the movable outlet is
    supported by a float.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    for siphons in which the intake end is supported by a float in the
    supply tank.

    386+,   especially subclasses 409+ for float controlled valves in liquid
    level responsive or maintaining systems.


CLS 137/579
TXT Systems under subclass 577 in which the movable outlet comprises a pipe or
    spout which is mounted to swing with respect to the tank to control the
    level within the tank.

    (1)     Note.  The outlet pipe may be external or internal with respect to
    the tank, but control of fluid flow depends on movement of the pipe rather
    than on valves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    615+,   for articulated or swinging flow conduits, and see the search notes
    to subclasses 615 and 616.


CLS 137/580
TXT Systems under subclass 561 comprising a relatively movable fluid supply and
    fluid receiver normally joined by rotating or longitudinally sliding or
    telescoping elements forming a shifting flow passage at right angles to the
    direction of movement of the elements to allow fluid flow between the
    supply and receiver during relative movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257+,   for the combination of a relatively rotatable tank group and
    filling head in which the tank group and filling head are connected by a
    running joint.

    277+,   for hydrants of the water crane type having a rotatable riser which
    is also vertically movable the connection between the riser and its supply
    frequently including a running joint.

    355.16+, for running joints between parts of the system, usually between
    the inlet and discharge portions of a hose wound on a reel and permitting
    fluid flow during relative movement.

    581,    for distribution systems comprising a movable tank, and see the
    search notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 195+ for
    sprinkler devices having a hose holder or reel and a running joint between
    parts of the system to permit fluid flow during relative movement.


CLS 137/581
TXT Systems under subclass 561, including a tank mounted for movement with
    respect to supporting means, the supporting means not being positively
    recited in the claims, but movement of the tank being inherent in the
    operation of the device or required in causing or controlling flow of
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38+,    for systems with flow control by inertia or change of position of
    the system.

    170,    for feed traps movable into discharge relationship with a
    pressurized receiver.

    257,    for rotatable tank groups for sequential filling and discharge.

    313,    for leakage or drip collectors comprising a relatively movable
    receptacle and drain pipe or outlet.

    376,    for tanks with supports.

    408,    for gravitating tanks in liquid level responsive systems, and see
    the search notes thereto.

    899+,   for systems with vehicular supports, and see the search notes to
    subclasses 351 and 899.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 160+ for dispensers having a movably mounted
    supply container, and subclasses 608+ for ambulant dispensing systems.


CLS 137/582
TXT Systems under subclass 561 having means for preventing splashing of a
    liquid stream located in the path of flow of the liquid but not located in
    the conduit which carries the liquid, i.e., usually mounted in the tank
    receiving the liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    592,    for tanks having internally extending inlet pipes, and see the
    search notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 118+ for valves combined
    with a material guide or restrictor in the flow passage which may reduce
    turbulence of the liquid, and see the search notes to subclass 118.


CLS 137/583
TXT Systems under subclass 561 having two or more openings at least one of
    which functions to vent gases to or from the system or serves as an opening
    permitting access thereto of persons or of tools other than those
    contributing to the intended fluid handling operation of the system.

    (1)     Note.  An opening through which a valve actuator extends is not
    considered an opening in the system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for vent opening or closing on tipping container.

    136+,   143 and 144, for vents and air release means for siphons.

    154+,   especially subclasses 173+, 179+ and 197+, for gas release from
    diverse fluid containing pressure systems, and 213+ for liquid level
    responsive gas vents or whistles in systems having gas pressure stored or
    maintained over liquid.

    216+,   for back flow prevention by provision of air vents in liquid flow
    lines.

    223+,   for means to relieve excess pressure in tires, especially in
    connection with inflation means.

    237+,   for devices having openings for the introduction of cleaning fluids
    or claimed cleaning tools.

    283+,   for hydrants having removable valves and valve seats.

    326,    for containers in which a valve in the bottom can be removed
    through an opening in the top of the container.

    327+,   for devices having disassembly tool engaging features.

    364+,   for valve and meter wells.

    597,    for apparatus having a plurality of inlets with a plurality of
    outlets.

    602+,   for apparatus including tanks having a plurality of inlets and a
    single outlet.

    613+,   for tanks having an inlet and an outlet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 209+, especially
    subclasses 211, 218 and 219+ for ventilation means for house plumbing or
    sewers.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 442 for dispenser supply container and
    measuring trap combinations having a vent passage for the trap; subclasses
    478+ for dispensers having plural fluid flow openings, including vents.


CLS 137/584
TXT Systems under subclass 583 in which one of the openings is an access
    opening and another is an outlet for fluid contents of the system.

    (1)     Note.  The access opening admits tools other than those
    contributing to the intended operation of the device, as for cleaning or
    removal of parts, or allows workmen to reach into or enter the container.

    (2)     Note.  Openings to admit an actuator or drain an actuator housing
    are not considered openings in the system nor access openings for this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237+,   for devices having openings for the introduction of cleaning fluids
    or claimed cleaning tools.

    283+,   for hydrants having removable valves and valve seats.

    326,    for containers having means by which a valve in the bottom can be
    removed through an opening in the top of the container or by which such
    removal is facilitated.

    327+,   for devices having disassembly tool engaging features.

    342,    for systems providing support for a workman.

    364+,   for valve and meter wells.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 291+ for detachable valve
    actuators, and see the search notes thereto and (2) Note, above.


CLS 137/585
TXT Systems under subclass 584 in which the access opening is formed in a tank,
    such as a tank car, usually comprising a manhole, and in which the outlet
    is at the bottom of the tank.

    (1)     Note.  The patents herein are directed for the most part to
    structures comprising a tank car having a valved outlet in the bottom
    therein and a dome having a manhole at the top of the tank which allows
    manual access to the valve actuator and/or removal of valve parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    283+,   for hydrants having the valve and valve seat removable through the
    casing.

    326,    for containers having means by which a valve at the bottom of a
    tank can be removed through an opening in the top or by which such removal
    is facilitated.  See (1) Note.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 510 for tanks having an outlet element in the
    bottom and a controller therefor extending through the tank and operated
    from the top.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 144+ for tanks having the
    valve actuator passing through the tank, but not emerging through an inlet
    or manhole.


CLS 137/586
TXT Systems under subclass 585 in which the actuator for the valved outlet
    performs an additional function in the system by interengaging with or
    extending into the access opening in one position of the valve thereby
    preventing the application of a closure to the access opening while the
    bottom valve is open and/or indicating the open condition of the valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    553+,   for indicators for fluid delivery systems comprising means having
    indicia or attention attracting means other than the mere position of the
    part for indicating the position or extent of motion of valves or other
    system parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 483 for plural interlocked controllers and/or
    closures for plural openings in a dispensing system.


CLS 137/587
TXT Systems under subclass 583 in which one of the openings is a gas vent for a
    tank and another is a liquid inlet and/or outlet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136+,   143 and 144, for vents and air release means for siphons.

    154+,   for gas release from diverse fluid containing pressure systems,
    especially subclasses 197+ for discriminating outlets for gas in diverse
    fluid containing pressure systems.

    213+,   for gas vents in systems utilizing a gas pressure over a liquid in
    which the vent opens or closes in response to liquid level, the gas escape
    frequently producing a signal whistle.

    215+,   for air vents in liquid lines comprising vacuum breakers for back
    flow prevention.

    469+    and 511+, for safety valves, and see the search notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 366.1 for vents in metallic and other
    receptacles, subclass 86.1+ for filling attachments for receptacles.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 39 for audible signals in dispensers,
    subclasses 478+ for gas vents combined with other openings in dispensing
    systems, especially subclass 479 for vent pipes substantially coterminous
    with an outlet pipe, as in barometric devices, and subclass 481.5 for
    dispensing systems having movable, flexible or remotely connected vent
    pipes.


CLS 137/588
TXT Systems under subclass 587 in which the vent and the liquid passage are
    formed in a common mounting adapted to be attached to or removed from the
    supply container as a unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212,    for unitary mountings for gas and liquid fluid flow passages where
    the liquid passage is an outlet and the vent is an inlet for gas under
    pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 400.7+ for unitary mountings applied to
    dispensers, the vent being a gas inlet for a displacing fluid, and
    subclasses 478+, especially subclass 479 for vents combined with dispensed
    material inlets or outlets.


CLS 137/589
TXT Systems under subclass 583 having a valved discharge conduit and means
    connecting such conduit with the atmosphere downstream of the valve,
    whereby the conduit may be drained of liquid after the valve has been
    closed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215+,   for air vents in liquid lines comprising siphon breakers for back
    flow prevention.

    312+,   for apparatus for collecting leakage or drip.

    596+,   for apparatus comprising stop and waste valves, and see the search
    notes thereto.


CLS 137/590
TXT Systems under subclass 561 comprising a tank having a material guide or
    flow pipe extending into the interior of the tank.

    (1)     Note.  Valved flow conduits which extend into the tank only far
    enough to provide for lateral flow passages and/or receive fastening or
    mounting means are not included in this group of subclasses, but are
    classified on the basis of the valve and/or actuator in succeeding
    subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  Interiorly extending flow pipes and conduits are included
    when in addition to the fact of interior extension some result or function
    of the extension is expressed or is inherent, as (1) to prevent or minimize
    freezing, (2) for the purpose of decanting the liquid contained in the
    tank, (3) for deriving a representative sample of the fluid in the tank,
    (4) to admit fluid below the liquid level, (5) to provide an outlet for
    pump or fluid displacement discharge, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    434+,   especially subclasses 437, 438, 440, and 442+ for float arm
    operated inlet valves at the inlet end of an internally extending inlet
    pipe.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 308+ for filters with
    upwardly extending internal flow guides.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 382 and 464.1+ for dispensers having an
    internally extending outlet pipe, and subclasses 547 and 564 for dispensers
    having a flow guide or restrictor within the supply container.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 118+ for valves with
    material guides in the flow line, subclass 144 for a tank comprising a
    single flow path device provided with a single valve, and subclass 339 for
    valved devices wherein the valve actuator extends through a fluid inlet or
    outlet.


CLS 137/590.5
TXT Systems under subclass 590 in which the material flow or guide means has
    laterally spaced inlet and outlet portions with (1) the end of the outlet
    portion positioned above the end of the inlet portion, (2) means, such as a
    vent, positioned relative to the end of the outlet portion so as to cut-off
    flow at an upper level.

    (1)     Note.  These devices are intended to withdraw sediment and liquid
    from the bottom of the tank but to stop discharge when the liquid level
    drops to the outlet of the external portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123+,   for siphons.

    577.5,  for pipes having positioning means for a traversing inlet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 1.7 for
    submerged cleaners there provided for, and subclass 246.5 for tanks and
    attached cleaners there provided for.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 523+ for
    gravitational separators and mechanical constituents movers, and subclasses
    532.1+ for gravitational separators having heavier constituent traps.


CLS 137/591
TXT Systems under subclass 590 in which the internally extending pipe comprises
    a conduit of inverted U-shape.

    (1)     Note.  In order that the conduit be considered U-shaped, the
    shorter leg must be of substantial length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123+,   for siphon type fluid handling devices.

    216+,   for antisiphon devices wherein an inverted U-shaped pipe is
    provided with a vent at the highest point to prevent back flow, the normal
    use of the device not being as a siphon.

    440,    for float arm operated valve associated with a U-shaped inlet,
    usually mounted in a tank.


CLS 137/592
TXT Systems under subclass 590 in which the internally extending pipe is a
    fluid inlet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    434+,   for float arm operated valves mounted on flush tank inlets,
    especially subclasses 437, 438, 440, and 442+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 86.1+ for inlet attachments for receptacles.


CLS 137/593
TXT Systems under subclass 561 comprising an expansion chamber or a vertically
    extending pipe or tank adapted to be placed in open communication with a
    source of liquid and functioning as a storage or pressure-maintaining
    reservoir or to increase the head against which liquid from the source must
    exert pressure.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes patents for extensions attached to
    the vertical outlets of irrigation pipelines whereby a greater head of
    water to be discharged may be maintained without overflow, and risers to be
    attached to basement drains whereby the overflow level of water backing
    into the drain may be raised.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207,    for apparatus for suppressing surges in a liquid in which gas is
    trapped in a dome over the liquid.

    272+,   for valved vertically extending delivery risers of the hydrant type.

    568,    for distribution systems comprising pumps combined with means for
    reducing surge or pulsations in the liquid being pumped.

    777+,   for expansible chamber devices, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 26+ for conduits combined
    with pressure compensators.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 540+, for an expansible chamber type pump having
    fluid pulsation dampening means associated therewith.


CLS 137/594
TXT Systems under subclass 561 involving two or more fluent material flow lines
    which do not unite within the scope of the combination of elements claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87.01+, for systems involving plural noncommunicating flow paths with
    automatic control of one flow path in accordance with a condition in the
    other flow path.

    127,    for plural siphons discharging in parallel from plural tanks.

    255+,   for plural tanks with parallel outflows.

    625.18+, for valve units having noncommunicating flow paths.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 129+ for dispensers having plural sources.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 418+ for
    fluid distributors having separately supplied plural flow paths, the fluids
    combining downstream of the outlet, and subclass 549 for a distributor
    having plural outlet, each supplied by a separate fluid, the distributor
    being of general utility even though disclosed as a burner.


CLS 137/595
TXT Systems under subclass 594 having at least one valve in each of two or more
    noncommunicating flow lines, the valves in the noncommunicating flow lines
    being connected to a single operating means so as to be operated thereby.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    601,    607 and 862+, for distribution systems comprising branched flow
    lines with a common operator for valves in plural branches.

    627,    627.5 and 628+, for plural valves of selective or sequential types
    having a single actuator, and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 137/596
TXT Device under subclass 561 comprising a valve controlled flow line and valve
    controlled exhaust passage connected to the line downstream of the flow
    control valve, whereby the supply through the flow line may be cut off and
    the downstream portion of the line may be drained through the exhaust
    passage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for low temperature responsive supply and exhaust.

    62,     for low temperature responsive drains.

    74,     for drain outlets with heat fusible closures.

    102+,   for supply and exhaust type self-correlating systems, especially
    subclass 107 for waste valves responsive to flow stoppage.

    143,    for vent type siphon breakers.

    216+,   for air vents in liquid flow line for back flow prevention.

    226,    for coaxial inflation and relief valves for pressure controlled
    tire inflation.

    281     and 302+, for supply and exhaust valves associated with hydrants.

    312+,   for apparatus for collecting leakage or drip.

    570     and 733+, especially subclasses 735+ and 738+ for drain valves
    mounted on well pipes and similar valve mountings.

    589,    for outlet lines extending downwardly from a valve and vented for
    draining.

    599+,   for systems comprising a flow passage which is divided and
    recombined, including by-passes, and see the search notes thereto.

    625.2+, for valve units of the supply and exhaust stop and vent or drain
    types.

    627.5,  for supply and exhaust valves having an intermediate position in
    which both valves are closed.

    631+,   for valves with cyclic action or actuators, and see the search
    notes to subclass 631.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 424.5+ for measuring traps of the stationary
    type which are filled and drained through multiple or multiway valves.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, appropriate subclasses, especially
    subclasses, 23, 89, 94, 110 for valves of the stop and waste, stop and
    vent, or drain types.


CLS 137/596.1
TXT Devices under subclass 596 in which the exhaust valve is biased toward one
    of its positions.


CLS 137/596.12
TXT Device under subclass 596 including an additional valve to connect the
    upstream side of the main valve directly to exhaust so that the fluid does
    not pass through a downstream port of the main valve.


CLS 137/596.13
TXT Device under subclass 596.12 wherein the supply and exhaust valve controls
    the fluid flow to or through the by-pass valve.


CLS 137/596.14
TXT Device under subclass 596 in which the valves are actuated by fluid
    pressure motive means controlled by an auxiliary or pilot valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 25+ for pilot valve
    controlled fluid actuated valves.


CLS 137/596.15
TXT Device under subclass 596.14 in which a single pilot valve controls a
    plurality of valve actuating motor chambers.


CLS 137/596.16
TXT Device under subclass 596.14 in which the pilot valve is operated by
    electric motive means.


CLS 137/596.17
TXT Device under subclass 596 in which a valve is operated by a power driven
    actuating means.


CLS 137/596.18
TXT Device under subclass 596.17 in which the motor is actuated by a fluid.


CLS 137/596.2
TXT Devices under subclass 596.1 in which the exhaust valve is biased to closed
    position.


CLS 137/597
TXT Systems under subclass 561 comprising a fluent material branched flow line
    having two or more inlets or admission passages and two or more outlets or
    exhaust passages, such admission passages and exhaust passages being joined
    by one or more fluent material flow lines, i.e., flow combining followed by
    flow dividing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    563+,   for closed circulating systems which may be comprised of plural
    inlets, outlets and connecting flow lines.

    599+,   for a part of a system comprising a main passage and connections
    for a disclosed by-pass.

    625+,   for valve units having similar passages.


CLS 137/598
TXT Systems under subclass 561 comprising a liquid flow passage between the
    master cylinder and the brake or slave cylinder, including means in the
    line to control the flow of fluid between said cylinders.

    (1)     Note.  This is essentially a residual subclass for systems not
    provided for in Class 303, Fluid-Pressure and Analogous Brake Systems, and
    Class 60, Power Plants, subclasses 54.5+, and consists principally of flow
    control means, generally termed "hill holders", which trap a column of
    liquid in the brake line to maintain the brake cylinder in its expanded
    position with the brakes engaged, together with means to permit an increase
    in the volume of the trapped liquid to intensify the braking effort.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    303,    Fluid-Pressure and Analogous Brake Systems, appropriate subclasses
    for braking systems of the fluid pressure type.  See (1) Note.


CLS 137/599
TXT Systems under subclass 561 including a fluent material branched flow line
    having a single inlet or admission passage and a single outlet or exhaust
    passage, said admission and exhaust passages being joined by two or more
    flow lines or valve controlled passages.

    (2)     Note.  It is not necessary that all the parallel flow passages be
    open simultaneously.  One may even be broken or severed as for repair
    purposes.

    (3)     Note.  By-passes established for power or control purposes in the
    system are not considered to constitute a parallel flow path within the
    flow system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89,     for self-correlating systems involving mixture condition
    maintenance in which the flow is divided and recombined.

    108,    for pump unloader type self-correlating systems.

    110,    for self-controlled branch flow systems providing for dividing and
    recombining the flow.

    115.01+, for self-correlating systems comprising a by-pass controlled by a
    main line condition.

    170.5,  for apparatus for controlling degree of frothing or foam formation
    in the handling of gas charged liquids, said apparatus including a trap for
    effecting the separation of gas from such liquids and reintroducing the gas
    into the flow path.

    170.6,  for apparatus for controlling the degree of frothing or foam
    formation in the handling of gas charged liquids, said apparatus including
    a conditioning trap and means to by-pass the trap.

    171+,   for fluid separating traps and vents, especially subclasses 175 and
    197+ for restricted outlets for gas in diverse fluid containing pressure
    systems.

    247.29, for divided and recombined passages in a liquid seal apparatus.

    462,    for safety cut-off valves reset by pressure equalizing by-pass.

    563+,   for by-passes establishing a closed circulating path, and see the
    search notes to subclass 563.

    569,    for systems involving pump by-passes, and see the search notes
    thereto.

    596.12+, for supply and exhaust valves having a by-pass around the motor
    ports.

    597,    for distribution systems which first combine flows and then divide.

    625.28+, for valve units having similar passages.

    629+,   for sequentially operated valves for main and pressure-equalizing
    shunt valves.

    801,    for nozzles, spouts and terminal deflectors the mounting of which
    may involve a spider or bar in the flow path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 40+ for flow line
    restrictors which may involve dividing the line longitudinally.

    166,    Wells, subclass 148 for a well conduit with a packer, the well
    conduit carrying a check valve and there being another valve means carried
    by the conduit for by-passing the check valve.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 318 and 443 for discharge assistant and
    stationary measuring trap by-passes.

    251,    Valves and Valves Actuation, subclasses 12+ for flow connected
    lines for diverting fluid for valve actuating power or control devices,
    especially subclasses 51 and 55 for by-passes for fluid dashpots or
    pressure chambers for valve actuation or retarding, subclass 117 for valve
    devices having a flow restrictor in a flow path parallel to another
    controlled path, and subclasses 118+ for material guides and restrictors
    which may comprise separation of a flow passage into plural parallel
    passages.


CLS 137/599.1
TXT Apparatus under subclass 599 comprising a flow passage with connections in
    addition to those for the inlet and outlet to provide for dividing and
    recombining, e.g., a main passage with a connection for diverting flow to a
    device other than a valve and a connection for returning the flow to the
    main passage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    625.29, for valve units having similar passages.


CLS 137/599.2
TXT Systems under subclass 599 wherein a valve head carries the head and seat
    of another valve assembly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    493.1+, for similar structure in bidirectional valves.

    512.2,  for other plural direct response valves having the same
    relationship.


CLS 137/600
TXT Subject matter under subclass 599 having a dividing and obstructing member
    in the flow path to cause and/or control foaming of the fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    896+,   for foam controlling devices having plural inlet passages.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 40+ for flow restrictors in
    pipes.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 463+ and 552
    for sprayer devices having an obstructing element inserted in the fluid
    line for the purpose of inducing or minimizing rotation of the fluid.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 118+ for valved flow
    passages having a restrictor in the flow passage.


CLS 137/601
TXT Systems under subclass 599 having at least one valve in each parallel flow
    path, said valves being connected to a single operating means so as to be
    operated thereby.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    595,    607, 614.11+, 627, 627.5, 628+, 636, and 862+, for other
    distribution systems having a single operator for plural valves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 414, 415,
    445, 446+, 527, and 528 for plural flow paths having individual valves for
    each path and a single operator for the valves.


CLS 137/602
TXT Systems under subclass 561 including a fluent material branched flow line
    having two or more inlets or admission passages connected to a single
    outlet or exhaust passage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88+     and 111+, for systems which include a self proportioning or
    correlating feature and have plural inlets and a single outlet.

    155,    for gas lift devices for liquid columns which include a gas
    injecting means.

    247.27, for liquid seal devices with plural inlets.

    263     and 266+, for plural tanks having a common outflow path.

    564.5,  for a follower type feeder responsive to main line flow.

    597,    for multiple inlet systems with multiple outlets.

    625.4+, for valve units performing this function.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclasses 180+ for a device mixing
    gases, the mixed product being a heating or illuminating gas.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 145.1+ for dispensers comprising plural
    sources having a common discharge.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses
    under 303, 310, 340, 398, and 486 for spray devices having plural fluid
    inlets, where the mixing is effected prior to discharge through a single
    outlet nozzle passage.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclass for
    apparatus specially adapted to produce an intimate contact between gases
    and liquids to exchange properties or mutually modify conditions.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 159+ for a furnace comprising a combustion
    chamber element with structure feeding fuel and air to form a shaped,
    distributed or directed flame within the chamber, and subclass 354 for a
    fuel and air mixer with an immediately associate unshaped flame holding
    fuel discharge structure.


CLS 137/603
TXT Systems under subclass 602 comprising means at each inlet for attachment to
    a faucet, whereby the efflux from the respective faucets, usually hot and
    cold water, may be mixed prior to discharge from the single outlet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    337,    for hot and cold water systems having a connection from the hot to
    the cold channel, usually for antifreeze purposes.

    342,    for mixing valves with soap dish, etc., supports.

    562,    for systems comprising a receiving means, usually a dish washer or
    clothes washer, to be filled from a sink faucet arrangement and emptied
    into the sink.


CLS 137/605
TXT Systems under subclass 602 having means to stop or to regulate the flow of
    fluent material in one or more branches.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    631+,   for valves of the cyclical type and see the search notes to
    subclass 631.


CLS 137/606
TXT Systems under subclass 605 in which the flow control means comprises one or
    more valves in each inlet branch.

    (1)     Note.  Mixing faucets for hot and cold water, which do not claim
    additional means to promote mixing, are classified herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    603,    for valve devices of the plural inflow-single outflow type
    attachable to conventional hot and cold water faucets, i.e., mixing
    attachments for faucets.

    888+,   for valve devices comprising means for promoting mixing of the
    plural inflows.  See (1) Note.

    896+,   for valve devices comprising means for promoting mixing of the
    plural inflows.


CLS 137/607
TXT Systems under subclass 606 in which at least one valve in each inlet branch
    is connected to a single operating means so as to be operated thereby.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    631+,   for cyclical valves and actuators, and see the search notes thereto.

    862+,   for distribution systems plural branches and plural valves having a
    single actuator, and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 137/613
TXT Systems under subclass 561 comprising a single flow path for a fluent
    material having two or more spaced valves, flow controllers or closures
    therein through which the fluent material passes serially.

    (1)     Note.  A tank with claimed inlet and outlet, each with valve or
    closure, is here.

    (2)     Note.  See the class definition, section 4, for search notes on
    plural valves and their actuators.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232,    for tire stems with inflation check valve and cap.

    247.17, for plural serial valves combined with liquid seal apparatus.

    269,    for serially arranged valves, flow controllers, or closures,
    wherein one of these is a removable closure which is entirely separated
    from the remaining structure in order that a flow section may be attached
    in place thereof.

    285,    299 and 300, for hydrants including a main valve and a serially
    arranged supplemental valve.

    391,    for liquid level control of both inflow and outflow of a tank.

    583+,   for systems with plural openings, one of which is an access opening
    or a gas vent.

    596+,   for drain and stop and waste valves, and see the search notes
    thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 445+ and 450+ for measuring traps with
    valved inlets and outlets and subclasses 478+ for dispensing containers
    with plural openings.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 118 for a valve in series with
    a restrictor.


CLS 137/614
TXT Systems under subclass 613 in which the flow path includes joined,
    disconnectible, sections; one of the valves, flow controllers or closures
    being retained with each section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    572,    for series connected tanks with valved separable connections, and
    see the search notes thereto.

    637.05, for serial valves with actuators correlated across a separable
    joint in the flow path.


CLS 137/614.01
TXT Systems under subclass 614 in which (1) the faces which seat the valves,
    flow controllers, or closures, when the sections are disjoined, abut each
    other when the sections are joined, (2) the valves, flow controllers, or
    closures, have integral with them that structure which joins the flow path
    sections.


CLS 137/614.02
TXT Systems under subclass 614 in which actuation of each of the valves, flow
    controllers, or closures is simultaneous with the joining or disconnecting
    of the flow path sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223+,   for systems including coupling operated serial valves in which one
    of the valves is an inflation stem for a pneumatic tire or other inflatable
    article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 348+ for supply means carried receiver flow control opening
    means wherein receiver actuated supply discharge means may also be included.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 135 for arrangements for storing and feeding
    fuel on aircraft, or for supplying fuel to or removing fuel from aircraft.


CLS 137/614.03
TXT Systems under subclass 614.02 in which the joining or disconnecting
    includes a linear component of motion of the flow path sections with
    respect to each other, which linear component results in the operation of
    both valves, flow controllers or closures.


CLS 137/614.04
TXT Systems under subclass 614.03 in which the force which moves the valves,
    flow controllers, or closures is transmitted from one to the other and vice
    versa.


CLS 137/614.05
TXT Systems under subclass 614 in which actuation of one of the valves, flow
    controllers or closures is simultaneous with the joining or disconnecting
    of the flow path sections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 89.5 for a valve related to
    separable flow path sections wherein blocking of the valve actuator is
    related to the joint between the sections, and subclass 149.9 for a valve
    related to separable flow path sections wherein blocking of the coupling
    operation is related to the valve or its actuator.


CLS 137/614.06
TXT Systems under subclass 614 in which the act of joining the flow path
    sections and the act of operating one of the valves, flow controllers, or
    closures must be performed in a predetermined sequence.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 335, 336, 348+, and 351+ for a valved joint between a portable
    supply and a receiver, the valve being operated by the act of connecting or
    disconnecting them.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 89.5 and 149+ for a valve
    operated by coupling motion of flow path sections, subclass 89.5 also
    including features of the coupling which may block or disable the valve
    actuator.


CLS 137/614.11
TXT Systems under subclass 613 in which the several valves are operated by a
    single actuator.


CLS 137/614.12
TXT Systems under subclass 614.11 comprising a faucet-type cock having a
    closure which coacts with either the inlet or outlet end of the cock and is
    connected with the main cock valve for simultaneous actuation therewith.


CLS 137/614.13
TXT Systems under subclass 614.11 wherein as one valve is moved toward its
    closed position, another valve is simultaneously moved toward its open
    position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329.1   and 329.2+, for valves having a supplementary valve which is
    normally held open but closes upon disassembly of the main valve to prevent
    loss of fluid during repair of the main valve.


CLS 137/614.14
TXT Systems under subclass 614.13 in which at least one valve is biased by
    spring means, gravity or fluid pressure.


CLS 137/614.15
TXT Systems under subclass 614.11 in which the valve heads are simultaneously
    moved toward or away from oppositely directed seats by a common actuator
    through a right and left hand screw relationship.


CLS 137/614.16
TXT Systems under subclass 613 in which the movable element of one valve forms
    the seat for the movable element of another valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    637.5,  for concentric rotary plug type valves having co-axial stems, the
    inner valve being removable without disturbing the outer valve.


CLS 137/614.17
TXT Systems under subclass 614.16 in which a valve comprising a head and seat
    is carried by and movable with the head of another valve.


CLS 137/614.18
TXT Systems under subclass 613 in which the head portion of one valve is
    carried by and movable with the head of another valve.


CLS 137/614.19
TXT Systems under subclass 613 in which at least one of the valves is biased by
    spring means, gravity or fluid pressure and which is also provided with an
    operator therefor which is manually actuatable from outside the system.


CLS 137/614.2
TXT Systems under subclass 613 in which at least one of the valves is of the
    check valve type, thereby preventing flow in one direction.


CLS 137/614.21
TXT Systems under subclass 613 in which two valve seats are provided in coaxial
    relationship, each seat having a separately actuatable head associated
    therewith.


CLS 137/615
TXT Systems under subclass 561 comprising a spout, nozzle or similar fluid flow
    conduit having two or more sections joined for relative angular movement in
    one or more planes whereby the device may be swung or otherwise caused to
    assume various delivery or nonuse positions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    274,    for water cranes having a valve operated by the spout.

    276,    for water cranes having a spout articulated to a rotating riser.

    279,    for water cranes having a spout articulated to nonrotating risers.

    438,    for movable inlet terminals in float arm operated valve control of
    liquid level.

    577+,   for tanks combined with a movable outlet pipe or spout when level
    or quantity discharged is regulated thereby, especially subclass 579 for
    swinging spouts or pipes, and see the search notes to subclass 577.

    801+,   for fixed or flexible nozzles or spouts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 16, 17+, 22, and 23 for swinging conveyor chutes.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 526+ for dispensers having movable material
    discharge guides, especially subclasses 533+ for swingable discharge guides.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclasses 113+ and 114+ for a fluid
    current conveyor having a movable inlet or movable outlet, respectively.


CLS 137/616
TXT Systems under subclass 615 in which relative movement of the sections of
    the flow conduit actuates a valve which controls flow through the conduit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    274,    for water cranes having a valve operated by the spout.

    286+,   for hydrants having a valve actuated by movement of the riser.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 318 for air
    blast cleaners in which the air supply control is interlocked with nozzle
    motion means.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 519+, 522+ and 526+, especially subclasses
    528, 529, 531+, 536, and 537 for dispensers having movable material
    discharge guides associated with closures.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 149 for single flow path
    devices having a single valve contained in a pipe coupling or union in
    which the valve is operated by motion of the coupling or conduit, and
    subclasses 341+ and 349+ for valves having a casing, inlet or outlet which
    is also an actuator for the valve.


CLS 137/616.3
TXT Devices under subclass 616 wherein the movement of the flow conduit
    produces plural motions of the valve or valve components.


CLS 137/616.5
TXT Devices under subclass 616 wherein the movement of the flow conduit
    produces reciprocating motion of the valve or valve components.


CLS 137/616.7
TXT Devices under subclass 616 wherein the movement of the flow conduit
    produces rotary motion of the valve or valve components.


CLS 137/624.11
TXT Subject matter under subclass 561 in which an actuating means provides (1)
    a continuously repetitive operation of one or more valves, (2) a single
    cycle of operation terminating in a position to restart an additional
    cycle, which cycle is more complex than a mere opening and closing of a
    single valve, or (3) a valve operation brought about at a particular time
    of day, or after a particular time delay period, following initiation of a
    nonfluid timer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169,    for cyclic gas pressure control of liquid feed traps to boilers.

    387,    for washing machine cycle control by level responsive means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 231 for time or program actuation of a
    refrigeration device.

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 55 for timer control of a furnace door.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 51.11+ for a timer controlled feeding
    device.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 285.5 for a timer controlled damper.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 138+ for timer
    controlled liquid treatment and subclasses 141+ for programmer controlled
    liquid treatment.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 14+ for a dispenser having a cut-off
    operated by a selectively preset volume or rate of flow responsive
    mechanism, and subclasses 638+ for a timer controlled dispenser.  Class 222
    takes those patents which significantly claim a supply container.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 66 for serially
    operated means distributing fluid to a diffuser, and subclasses 67+ for
    selectively preset means serving to cut off flow to a diffuser.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 48+ for a fluid dashpot,
    controlled valve or fluid controlled valve timer.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 18+ for a burner assembly having a timer,
    programmer, or condition responsive control.


CLS 137/624.12
TXT Subject matter under subclass 624.11 with means utilized for valve control
    independent of the programmer or timer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 289 for a valve actuatable
    from any of a plurality of positions.


CLS 137/624.13
TXT Subject matter under subclass 624.11 in which the actuating means is
    capable of causing a cycle of operation of one or more valves to be
    repeated.


CLS 137/624.14
TXT Subject matter under subclass 624.13 powered by the fluid controlled by the
    valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132+,   for a periodically operated siphon.

    386+,   for a liquid level responsive or maintaining system where the
    control is related to an accumulated quantity of the main flow.

    396+,   for a tank which empties itself as often as filled to a given level.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 232+ for a material operated
    expansible chamber self cycling valve in a meter.


CLS 137/624.15
TXT Subject matter under subclass 624.13 in which means is provided for
    changing the cycle of operation.


CLS 137/624.16
TXT Subject matter under subclass 624.15 in which the change is brought about
    by either attaching or removing an element of the device.


CLS 137/624.17
TXT Subject matter under subclass 624.15 in which the change is brought about
    by shifting the position of a cam element with respect to another portion
    of the device.


CLS 137/624.18
TXT Subject matter under subclass 624.11 in which the actuating means causes
    sequential operations of a single valve or an operation of each of a
    plurality of valves in sequence.


CLS 137/624.19
TXT Subject matter under subclass 624.18 in which the valve or valves, are each
    biased toward one position and are latched against the bias, and a trip or
    trips, are controlled for releasing the latch.

    (1)     Note.  Where a single trip is involved, the trip must be operated a
    plurality of times.


CLS 137/624.2
TXT Subject matter under subclass 624.18 in which the sequential operations
    complete a single cycle of operation (e.g., open and close a valve) and
    means is provided for changing the cycle.


CLS 137/624.21
TXT Subject matter under subclass 624.11 in which the actuating means includes
    the alarm mechanism of an alarm clock.


CLS 137/624.22
TXT Subject matter under subclass 624.11 including means biasing the valve in
    one direction, biased means latching the valve against its bias, and a cam
    for moving the latching means against its bias to free the valve for
    movement under its bias.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 66+ for a biased valve
    latched against the bias and having means to trip the latch so as to
    release the valve.


CLS 137/624.27
TXT Device under subclass 561 wherein an impediment means is provided to
    maintain a valve in one position of adjustment, and wherein a means
    responsive to a change in the fluid condition is effective, upon such
    change, to remove or disable the impediment means or to override its
    holding action to permit movement of the valve from the one position.


CLS 137/625
TXT Subject matter under subclass 561 in which a single valve controlling
    communication with three or more flow lines, has its actuator or actuator
    so arranged or related as to determine or aid in the determination of the
    relative order, duration or magnitude of flow through each of the several
    flow lines.

    (2)     Note.  See the class definition, Section 4 for collected search
    notes on plural actuators for valves and actuators for plural valves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    506,    for plural condition responsive valves, at least one of which has a
    separate reactor surface.

    512+,   for plural condition responsive valves of the direct acting type.

    561+,   for distribution systems involving plural valves, with or without
    their actuators, in combination with flow containing means more extensive
    than that required to mount the valves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 87.13 and 87.18 for a
    multiway valve used to distribute fluid pressure to multiple clutches.


CLS 137/625.11
TXT Devices under subclass 625 in which a valve unit has a number of outlet
    ports and a lesser number of inlet ports, usually one, or a number of inlet
    ports and a lesser number of outlet ports, some of the ports being opened
    or closed as others close or open.


CLS 137/625.12
TXT Devices under subclass 625 in which a plurality of ports are sequentially
    progressively opened or closed by a valve unit.


CLS 137/625.13
TXT Devices under subclass 625.12 in which the first opened port is
    subsequently closed by continued movement of the valve unit.


CLS 137/625.14
TXT Devices under subclass 625.13 comprising two or more inlets or admissions
    passages and two or more outlets or discharge passages wherein there is
    flow combining followed by flow dividing.


CLS 137/625.15
TXT Devices under subclass 625.13 which comprise valve units which only rotate.


CLS 137/625.16
TXT Devices under subclass 625.15 comprising rotary plugs.


CLS 137/625.17
TXT Devices under subclass 625 in which control of flow passages may be
    obtained by reciprocation or rotation of the valve.


CLS 137/625.18
TXT Devices under subclass 625 having a plurality of distinct conduits or
    passages, flow through which is so controlled by a single valve unit that
    flow lines never unite.


CLS 137/625.19
TXT Devices under subclass 625.18 wherein the valve unit is of the rotary type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    587+,   for tank systems where one passage is a vent.


CLS 137/625.2
TXT Devices under subclass 625 comprising a flow line controlled by a valve
    unit which has a passage connectible between atmosphere and the downstream
    portion of the line, whereby that portion may be completely drained or
    fluid therein may escape to waste.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    307+,   for similar structure in hydrant valves.

    589     and 596+, for systems which are vented or drained.


CLS 137/625.21
TXT Devices under subclass 625.2 in which the valve unit rotates.


CLS 137/625.22
TXT Devices under subclass 625.21 in which the valve unit is a rotary plug.


CLS 137/625.23
TXT Subject matter under subclass 625.22 wherein a plurality of lines
    downstream of the valve will be drained.


CLS 137/625.24
TXT Subject matter under subclass 625.22 having radially and longitudinally
    extending passages in the plug.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 310 for plugs with axial and
    radial flow in a single flow line.


CLS 137/625.25
TXT Devices under subclass 625.2 wherein the valve unit reciprocates
    rectilinearly.


CLS 137/625.26
TXT Devices under subclass 625.25 wherein the valve unit comprises a disk or
    plug for controlling one port and a gate or piston for controlling another
    port.


CLS 137/625.27
TXT Devices under subclass 625.25 wherein the valve unit comprises a plurality
    of disk or plug faces, each controlling a different port.


CLS 137/625.28
TXT Devices under subclass 625 comprising a single inlet or admission passage
    and a single outlet or exhaust passage, the passages being joined by a
    plurality of flow lines or passages controlled by a valve unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    309,    for regenerative furnace reversing valves which similarly control
    flow.


CLS 137/625.29
TXT Devices under subclass 625.28 in which the valve has connections in
    addition to those for the inlet and outlet to provide for dividing and
    recombining, e.g., a main passage with a connection for diverting flow to a
    device other than a valve and a connection for returning the flow to the
    main passage.


CLS 137/625.3
TXT Devices under subclass 625.28 having means to vary the flow through the
    parallel paths.


CLS 137/625.31
TXT Devices under subclass 625.28 in which the valve unit rotates.


CLS 137/625.32
TXT Devices under subclass 625.31 in which the valve unit is a rotary plug.


CLS 137/625.33
TXT Devices under subclass 625.28 wherein the valve has a linear motion to and
    from flow obstructing position.


CLS 137/625.34
TXT Devices under subclass 625.33 having a spool type valve (i.e., two port
    controllers immovably mounted on a single valve stem, said controllers
    coacting with co-axial seats).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    628+,   especially subclasses 630.19+ for spool type valves having heads
    with relative movement with respect to each other.


CLS 137/625.35
TXT Devices under subclass 625.34 wherein one flow path is through the
    longitudinal axis of the spool, e.g., a hollow spool with flow therethrough.


CLS 137/625.36
TXT Devices under subclass 625.34 having port controllers of unequal size
    generally to partially balance the valve.


CLS 137/625.37
TXT Subject matter under subclass 625.33 wherein the valve is of the piston
    type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    538,    for line condition change responsive piston valves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 190 for piston valves with
    means to increase the head and seat contact pressure to reduce wear upon
    operation.


CLS 137/625.38
TXT Subject matter under subclass 625.37 wherein the piston provides an
    internal flow passage for the line fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 325 for other piston valves
    providing an internal flow passage.


CLS 137/625.39
TXT Subject matter under subclass 625.38 including sequential opening or
    closing of serial ports in a single flow line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 210 for sequential opening or
    closing of serial ports without dividing and recombining the flow.


CLS 137/625.4
TXT Devices under subclass 625 wherein a branched flow line has two or more
    controlled inlets connected to a single outlet.


CLS 137/625.41
TXT Devices under subclass 625.4 comprising a rotary valve.


CLS 137/625.42
TXT Devices under subclass 625 in which one direction or kind of movement of
    the valve unit from an intermediate closed position will open one or a
    reduced number of a plurality of ports, and another direction or kind of
    movement of the valve unit will open another, the remaining, or all the
    ports.


CLS 137/625.43
TXT Devices under subclass 625 comprising four way valves having an inlet port,
    an outlet port and two intermediate ports, the valve being selectively
    movable into two positions, in one position the inlet port being connected
    to the first intermediate port and the second intermediate port being
    connected to the outlet port, and in the other position the inlet being
    connected to the second intermediate port and the first intermediate port
    being connected to the outlet port.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    309+,   for reversing valves, regenerative furnace type.

    625.29, for this structure when used in dividing and recombining structures.


CLS 137/625.44
TXT Devices under subclass 625 in which the valve disk or plug unit swings
    around the means by which it is mounted with respect to the valve seats or
    casing and thereby controls two or more branched flow passages.


CLS 137/625.45
TXT Devices under subclass 625.44 in which the valve moves transversely of the
    controlled flow passages.


CLS 137/625.46
TXT Devices under subclass 625 comprising a valve head which rotates about its
    axis and has a flow passage within it, and wherein two or more branched
    flow passages are controlled.


CLS 137/625.47
TXT Devices under subclass 625.46 comprising a plug type body in which the flow
    passage has an inlet or outlet transverse to the axis of rotation and which
    forms a seat contacting portion.


CLS 137/625.48
TXT Devices under subclass 625 in which the valve unit moves rectilinearly to
    and from seats of controlled passages and thereby controls two or more
    branched flow passages.


CLS 137/625.49
TXT Devices under subclass 625.48 wherein the valve unit comprises a disk or
    plug for closing one port and a gate or piston for closing another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    625.17, for similar structure wherein the operation is by selective
    reciprocation or rotation.


CLS 137/625.5
TXT Devices under subclass 625.48 comprising oppositely facing seating surfaces
    for co-axially aligned seats.


CLS 137/625.6
TXT Device under subclass 625.2 in which the valve unit is actuated by a fluid
    pressure motive means controlled by an auxiliary or pilot valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 25+ for pilot valve
    controlled fluid actuated valves.


CLS 137/625.61
TXT Device under subclass 625.6 wherein the valve actuating mechanism is
    connected to a fluid pressure line and responsive to pressure differentials
    therein to move the valve, and wherein the pilot includes a constantly
    discharging opening connected to the line, and a modulating restrictor
    adjacent the opening and movable to and from the opening to vary the rate
    of flow and modify the pressure to thereby actuate the valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83,     for a jet control modulator, per se.


CLS 137/625.62
TXT Device under subclass 625.61 having two lines, each having an opening
    discharging toward the other, and wherein the restrictor is located between
    the orifices and movable to lower the pressure in one line and increase the
    pressure in the other.


CLS 137/625.63
TXT Device under subclass 625.6 in which a single pilot valve controls a
    plurality of valve actuating motor chambers.


CLS 137/625.64
TXT Device under subclass 625.6 in which the pilot valve is operated by
    electric motive means.


CLS 137/625.65
TXT Device under subclass 625.2 in which the valve unit is operated by a power
    driven actuating mechanism.


CLS 137/625.66
TXT Device under subclass 625.65 in which the motor is actuated by a fluid.


CLS 137/625.67
TXT Device under subclass 625.25 wherein the valve unit is a reciprocating
    piston.


CLS 137/625.68
TXT Device under subclass 625.67 wherein the piston has a flow passage within
    it for the line fluid.


CLS 137/625.69
TXT Device under subclass 625.67 wherein an annular exterior flow passage for
    the line fluid is provided between adjacent seat engaging heads.


CLS 137/626
TXT Subject matter under subclass 561 in which two or more valves of the type
    normally actuated by turning a relatively small thumb piece have means
    interrelating the motions of these thumb pieces.

    (1)     Note.  The pet cocks may be arranged at different levels on a fluid
    receptacle to serve as a test for maximum and minimum fluid levels in the
    receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    595,    for distribution systems having a common valve operator for valves
    in noncommunicating flow paths.

    861+,   for distribution systems having a single inlet and plural outlets
    in which at least one flow control means is provided and at least two
    passages are controlled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 485+ for dispensers having plural discharge
    outlets with interconnected or integral flow controllers.


CLS 137/627
TXT Subject matter under subclass 561 in which the plural valves are of the
    distributor type, i.e., comprise a number of valve-controlled outlets and a
    lesser number of inlets, usually one, or a number of valve-controlled
    inlets and lesser number of outlets, some of the valves of the larger
    number opening or closing as others close or open.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255+,   for plural tanks with parallel flow, especially subclass 256 for
    sequentially filled and emptied tanks.

    262,    for plural tanks comprising flow dividing compartments.

    263     and 266, for manifold type flow.

    602+,   for distribution systems having plural inlets and a single outlet.

    861+,   for distribution systems having a single inlet and plural outlets,
    in which at least one flow control means is provided and two or more
    passages are controlled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 449 and 450 for rotary
    distributing valves for fuel to internal-combustion engines.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 66 for
    sprinkling and spraying devices having serial discharge.


CLS 137/627.5
TXT Devices under subclass 561 wherein an actuator moves one valve from an open
    to a closed position after which the same actuator moves another valve from
    a closed to an open position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    627,    for sequential alternately seating valves of the mixing or
    distributing type.


CLS 137/628
TXT Subject matter under subclass 561 in which two or more valves are so
    arranged or actuated that one valve starts to open or close prior to
    another concurrently opening or closing valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184,    for successively opened fluid responsive valves for venting liquid
    in a diverse fluid containing pressure system.

    625.12, for mixing valves in which sequential flow is produced by a valve
    unit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 486 for plural outlet valves in a dispenser
    having actuating means for variable operation of the valves.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 77+ for lost motion
    arrangements between a single valve and its actuator.


CLS 137/629
TXT Subject matter under subclass 628 in which the valves are located in flow
    passages which are connected in parallel.

    (1)     Note.  The effect of the prior opening of one valve may be to admit
    fluid pressure to the down stream side of the other valve to more nearly
    balance the pressure acting on the same and thus reduce the effort required
    to open the same.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    513.3,  for direct response valves having a permanently open bleed port.

    599+,   for distribution systems involving dividing a flow path into
    parallel flow paths and recombining the flows, and see the search notes to
    subclass 599.


CLS 137/630
TXT Subject matter under subclass 629 in which one valve is arranged to control
    a passage through the other valve element.

    (1)     Note.  The valves are frequently arranged so that they are
    concentric and the smaller valve, which is the first to open, seats against
    the larger valve.

    (2)     Note.  Frequently, the initially opened supplemental valve is
    mounted on and seats against the main valve and is termed a "pilot" valve
    although no servo-motor action is present because the supplemental valve
    merely tends to partly equalize the pressures on opposite sides of the main
    valve so that the main valve may be opened more easily against line
    pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    630.21  and 637.5, for other concentric valves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 38+ for fluid actuated or
    retarded valves in which a pilot valve is seated on the motor or valve
    element.


CLS 137/630.11
TXT Systems under subclass 630 which are disclosed, or structurally limited,
    for use in steam locomotives to control the feeding of steam to the motor
    means.


CLS 137/630.12
TXT Systems under subclass 630 in which at least one of the valves has a
    reciprocatory, rectilinear motion substantially normal to the fluid path.


CLS 137/630.13
TXT Systems under subclass 630 in which a pilot valve controls line pressure in
    a separate chamber which balances, or tends to balance the pressure
    differential across the second opened valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 38+ for pilot valve
    controlled choked pressure type servo-motor valve actuators in which the
    pilot valve is seated in the motor or main valve element.


CLS 137/630.14
TXT Systems under subclass 630 in which a structure rigidly connected to a
    first opened valve head engages structure rigidly connected to a second
    valve head so that continued motion of the first valve operator
    subsequently causes the second valve head to be positively opened.


CLS 137/630.15
TXT Systems under subclass 630 in which a continuous motion of the actuator
    causes the actuator to engage and open one valve and then to engage and
    open a second valve.


CLS 137/630.16
TXT Systems under subclass 630 in which, after the sequentially actuated valves
    are opened, the first opened valve is closed.


CLS 137/630.17
TXT Systems under subclass 630.16 in which the valves are so related to each
    other that motion of one is necessarily accompanied by motion of the other,
    or others.


CLS 137/630.18
TXT Systems under subclass 628 in which (1) at least one of the valves is screw
    actuated and the remaining valve or valves are biased so that as the screw
    is actuated one of the valves is moved to or from its seated position and
    further actuation of the screw in the same direction then moves the
    remaining valve or valves, against the bias, to or from the seated
    position, or (2) both valves are screw actuated by a common operator and a
    lost motion connection is provided between the two movable valve elements
    or between one of the valve elements and its screw actuator.


CLS 137/630.19
TXT Systems under subclass 628 in which there is provided a lost motion
    connection between the actuating means and one or more of the valves so
    that a continuous motion of the actuating means causes first one and then
    other valves to sequentially open or close.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    630.16, for sequentially progressive opening of plural valves with
    subsequent closing of the first opened passage in which there is lost
    motion between the actuator and the valves.


CLS 137/630.2
TXT Systems under subclass 630.19 in which cam means, usually between the
    actuator and the valves, compels the sequential actuation of the valves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    630.16+, for cam actuated sequentially operated valves in which the first
    opened port is subsequently closed after another port has been opened.


CLS 137/630.21
TXT Systems under subclass 630.19 in which the valves rotate about a common
    axis, one valve having relative motion with respect to and within the
    other, and having a lost motion connection between one of the valves and
    the actuator, or the other valve.


CLS 137/630.22
TXT Systems under subclass 630.19 in which a subsequently operated valve is
    actuated by being contacted by the first or prior actuated valve, but not
    by the prior valve's actuator.


CLS 137/635
TXT Subject matter under subclass 561 in which a preliminary adjustment of the
    actuator mechanisms, not a part or its actuating motion, determines the
    number or sequence of valves to be actuated.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition, section 5 for search notes on
    manual valve actuating, selecting and adjusting mechanism.


CLS 137/636
TXT Subject matter under subclass 561 in which one direction or kind of
    movement given a single actuator will operate one or a reduced number of a
    plurality of valves in either an opening or closing direction and another
    direction or kind of movement given the actuator will operate another, the
    remaining or all the valves in either an opening or closing direction.


CLS 137/636.1
TXT Devices under subclass 636 which select by means of oppositely movable or
    usable cam or eccentric surfaces.


CLS 137/636.2
TXT Devices under subclass 636 in which the movements are rotation of the
    actuator arm about either of two pivots or pivotal axes.


CLS 137/636.3
TXT Devices under subclass 636 in which one movement is rotation of the
    actuator arm about its pivot and another is rotation about its axis.


CLS 137/636.4
TXT Devices under subclass 636 in which the movements are reciprocation of the
    actuator along, and rotation of it, about its axis.


CLS 137/637
TXT Subject matter under subclass 561 in which a plurality of valves or valve
    groups each are provided with individual, but particularly related actuator
    mechanisms.


CLS 137/637.05
TXT Subject matter under subclass 637 wherein the valves, or valve groups, are
    located at opposite sides of a separable joint in the flow path, and the
    particular relationship between the actuators includes a feature of
    separability of the joint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    614.02+, for similar structure wherein the parts which cause the valves to
    operate are so intimately related to the separable joint structure that the
    joining and disconnecting action both cause simultaneous actuation of the
    valve.


CLS 137/637.1
TXT Devices under subclass 637 having plural actuators with interlocking means
    therebetween, whereby the actuation of one valve is prerequisite to the
    actuation of another or additional valves, or whereby the opening of one
    valve precludes the opening of another until such time as the first opened
    valve has been closed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    383+,   for valves in combination with a lock or seal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 89+ for valves with means
    for blocking or disabling the actuator.


CLS 137/637.2
TXT Subject matter under subclass 637 in which at least two independently
    actuable valves are provided with stem type actuators, each of which move
    about or along a common axis.


CLS 137/637.3
TXT Subject matter under subclass 637.2 in which at least one of the coaxial
    stem valves pivots about a fixed axis to open or close a fluid path or
    paths (e.g., plug valves, butterfly valves, etc.).


CLS 137/637.4
TXT Subject matter under subclass 637.3 in which the other coaxial stem valve
    has a rectilinear motion with respect to its seat or port.


CLS 137/637.5
TXT Subject matter under subclass 637.3 in which a rotary plug valve is within
    an outer concentric, separately actuated, rotary plug valve and so
    constructed that the central valve may be removed for repair or other
    purposes without disturbing the outer valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    614.16+, for a single flow path having plural serial valves in which one
    valve head provides a seat for another valve head.


CLS 137/797
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the device includes an
    element designed to rupture or break where a force of a magnitude greater
    than a predetermined value is applied thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68.11+, for devices in which some operation to control the system is caused
    by failure of the frangible part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 541.1+ for dispensers with frangible outlet
    elements.


CLS 137/798
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the device includes a
    connecting means to join two or more flow lines in fluid conducting
    relation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 148 for couplings combined
    with valves and see the search notes to subclass 148.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, for pipe couplings, per se.


CLS 137/799
TXT Subject matter under subclass 798 wherein the coupling is capable of
    flexing, bending or bowing.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes articulated and swivelly mounted
    couplings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    615+,   for articulated or swiveled conduits in distribution systems, and
    see the search notes to subclass 615.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 150 for valve devices
    associated with a flexible or expansible coupling.


CLS 137/800
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the device is provided
    with removable cap or similar closing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232+,   for tire valve stems with cap.

    296     and 371, for covers for hydrants and valve and meter wells.

    377+,   for guards and shields associated with distribution systems,
    especially subclass 382 for valve guards which prevent access to the valve
    but do not cut off fluid flow.

    583+,   for closures for access openings for distribution systems.

    613+,   for single flow path devices with serial valves and/or closures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 89+ for closures and plugs
    for pipes.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 200+ for receptacle closures and see the
    notes collected in the definition of subclass 200 for a complete search on
    closures.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 544+, especially subclasses 546, 551, 552,
    and 554 for flow controllers or closures for dispenser openings.


CLS 137/801
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the device is provided
    with a fluid inlet or outlet in the form of a nozzle or spout which
    discharges the effluent in a desired direction or with a desired pattern or
    admits and directs it into a receiver of which it forms a part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    615+,   for articulated or swiveled nozzles or spouts, and see the search
    notes thereto for movable devices of this type.

    800,    for nozzles or spouts provided with a removable closure member.

    861+,   for deflector type spouts forming a branch outlet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 519+, 522+, 526+, and 565+ for dispensing
    nozzles and spouts, and see section 19, of the class definition of Class
    222 and search notes therein.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses
    for specific nozzle structures for sprinkling or spraying fluids.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 153+ for valves combined
    with inlet or outlet structure comprising a single flow path, especially
    155 for valves associated with nozzles or spouts, subclass 340 for a valve
    actuator surrounding a nozzle, and subclass 349 for inlet or outlet element
    which serves as a valve actuator.


CLS 137/802
TXT Devices under the class definition not hereinbefore provided for.

    (1)     Note.  For example, in this subclass are found dummy valves and
    outlet and conduit forms and materials, including valve bodies, per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    561,    for systems for branch flow without valves.

    594+,   for plural noncommunicating flow path systems.

    799,    for flexible couplings for conduits, and see the search notes
    thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 575 for miscellaneous dispenser devices,
    especially for particular outlet shapes.


CLS 137/803
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein movement of a stream of
    fluid is controlled by one or more devices, at least one of the devices
    having the following characteristics:

    A)      the stream is caused to flow into the device through a passage or
    along a path of flow, or the stream is caused to flow in a predetermined
    condition or amount of flow into the device;

    B)      the stream is caused to flow out of the device through a passage or
    along a path of flow, and the stream is diverted to flow out of the device
    through a different passage or along a different path of flow, or the
    stream is caused to flow in an altered condition or amount of flow out of
    the device;

    C)      the diversion of alteration (referred to in (B) above) is caused by
    one or more of the following,



    1)      direct contact of at least one other stream of fluid with the
    inflow stream, or

    2)      application of an energy field directly to the inflow stream, or

    3)      application of the Coanda effect.

    (1)     Note.  Devices known in the art as "pure fluid devices" or "fluid
    amplifiers" and which act to control or vary high energy flows by
    relatively low energy flow or fields are here included.

    (2)     Note.  The phenomenon known as the Coanda effect occurs when a jet
    of fluid is injected into a wide container and due to some disturbance in
    flow or shape of the container the jet stream moves to one wall or other of
    the container and continues to flow along that wall.  As long as the flow
    is not otherwise disturbed the flow remains "locked" onto the wall of the
    container.  Patents having claims directed to subject matter involving this
    effect will be found in this subclass even though no means is claimed to
    provide for an additional control of the stream by another stream or an
    energy field.

    (3)     Note.  GLOSSARY:  For purposes of simplification, the following
    terms will be used in the definitions hereafter, and the definitions of
    these used terms will not require repetition in the subclass definitions
    that follow:

    "POWER INPUT" is the stream, referred to in (A) above, that flows into the
    devices;

    "POWER OUTPUT" is the stream, referred to in (B) above, that flows out of
    the device;

    "CONTROL INPUT" is the stream or energy field, referred to in (C) (1) and
    (C) (2) above, that causes the diversion or alteration of the output stream.

    "PASSAGE" is the channel or duct that surrounds and guides a stream of
    fluid or energy in a desired path or direction.

    (4)     Note.  As a general rule, the device of this and indented
    subclasses have no moving parts for effecting the control function.
    Necessary exceptions to the "no-moving-parts" rule are in the use of valves
    to regulate the amount or direction of control input fluid, or in the use
    of mechanism to cause the generation of control input energy field, or in
    the use of a surface or element extending generally along or adjacent the
    path of any of the streams in the device, which surface or element is moved
    to cause a diversion or variance of the power output relative to the power
    input by the "Canada" or "locking" effect referred to in (2) Note above.
    See subclasses 829+ for devices referred to herein.

    (5)     Note.  Line between Class 235 subclass 200+ and Class 137
    subclasses 803+. Patents in Class 235 subclasses 200 and 201 were screened
    for inclusion into these subclasses (803+) as original patents.  Those
    patents having structural characteristics of a fluidic device as defined in
    this subclass (803) and/or provided for in the subclasses hereunder were
    transferred into the appropriate subclasses in accordance with their
    structure.  The functional characteristics of said patents were further
    indexed into the coordinate index dual system in accordance with their
    named function(s).  Patents claiming significant computer structure or
    function were excluded from Class 137 and were retained in Class 235.
    Examples of what is "not significant" and "significant" will help to
    clarify the line dividing the classes.  The mere statement in a claim of "a
    binary counter" or "a half-adder", or "converter" comprising one or more
    fluidic devices is "not-significant" (and thus is proper for subclasses
    803+) even though the fluidic devices are described by such exemplary
    fluidic terms as "logic element", "bi-stable or flip-flop element", "and
    element" (as well as similar "logic" terms) and "amplifier".

            Such terms have acquired acceptance in the fluidic arts as well as
    the electronic and computer arts.  However, the further inclusion in such a
    claim of mathematical functions performed by the circuit, (e.g.,
    "exponential function", "square-root", "integration") or mathematical
    equations or numerical values of results achieved by the device or circuit,
    would be "significant" computer terminology, and thus be not proper for
    Class 137.  Note, however that a claimed equation defining the
    configuration of fluidic passages or walls does not define a mathematical
    result achieved, thus the patent containing such equation is proper for
    Class 137; and further note that the specific binary numbers "one" and
    "zero" define merely conditions of "on" and "off" in a fluidic device, thus
    the patent containing such numbers is also proper for Class 137.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 231+ for a reaction motor having fluidic
    means to deflect the jet stream of the motor.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 3 for an expansible
    chamber motor controlled by a fluidic device or system.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, especially subclasses 137+ for sound
    generating apparatus including a fluidic device or system therein.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, especially subclasses 378+ for an
    engine having a fuel supply and a fluidic device for controlling the fuel
    supply to thereby regulate the engine speed.

    128,    Surgery, especially subclass 204.24 for a forced-inhalation
    respirator having a fluidic device to control the respirator.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, especially subclasses 37+ for a flow
    regulator.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, especially subclasses
    81+ for an electric switch actuated by fluid pressure.

    235,    Registers, subclasses 200+ for a computer using a fluidic device or
    system, and see (5) Note above for a line between Class 235 and Class 137.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, especially subclasses
    265.19+, 398+, and 533.1 for apparatus having a discharge nozzle from which
    nozzle a discharge stream issues and the discharge stream is varied, (e.g.,
    as to its direction or amount) by a stream of control fluid, wherein the
    discharge stream and the control fluid, or the control fluid alone, pass
    through a fluidic device.  The fluidic device, per se, is found in Class
    137 subclasses 803+, but the combination of fluidic device and discharge
    nozzle is properly in Class 239.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 12+ for a valve that is
    actuated by a fluidic device.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, especially subclass 36 for an
    apparatus having a carburetor for mixing liquid fuel and air to form a fuel
    vapor, in which carburetor either fluid passes through a fluidic device.

    417,    Pumps, especially subclasses 151+ for a jet pump used for pumping
    fluid.


CLS 137/804
TXT Device or system under subclass 803 which senses or detects or which is
    provided with additional means to sense or detect, a characteristic or
    state of the environment outside of said device or system, and which
    generates a signal or impulse as a result of such sensing or detecting.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses provide a locus for patents
    wherein a condition of fluid is sensed, such as, for example, the level of
    liquid in a tank, or the speed of fluid flow, or the temperature of fluid
    (as reflected in the frequency of pulses therein). In the patents of this
    subclass (804) a signal indicating the condition is sent.  In the patents
    of the indented subclass (805) the signal activates mechanism to change or
    correct the sensed condition.  Thus, it is apparent that this subclass
    (804) and the indented subclass (805) provide for a fluid-handling system
    classifiable in Class 137 which system includes a subcombination (e.g., a
    valve, tank, etc.) that, per se, is not proper for original classification
    in subclasses 803+.  However, the patent to the system is classifiable
    herein due to the inclusion of a fluidic device as a subcombination of a
    fluid-handling system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 118 for a temperature
    responsive fluidic oscillator combined with an indicating device.


CLS 137/805
TXT Device or system under subclass 804 wherein the signal or impulse activates
    said device or system or activates another mechanism for the purpose of
    varying the characteristic or state of the environment or for the purpose
    of restoring the characteristic or state of the environment to that which
    is desired.


CLS 137/806
TXT Device or system under subclass 803 involving the use therein of two or
    more different fluids or of fluids having different characteristics.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    815+    and 822+, for a device or system involving use of two or more
    sources of the same kind of fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclass 36 for apparatus having
    a carburetor for mixing liquid fuel and air to form a fuel vapor, in which
    carburetor either fluid passes through a fluidic device, and subclasses 75+
    for a device producing intimate contact between gases and liquids.


CLS 137/807
TXT Device or system under subclass 803 involving the use therein of a specific
    fluid or a fluid having specific characteristics.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    806,    for a device or system involving use of two or more different
    fluids.


CLS 137/808
TXT Device or system under subclass 803 provided with means to compel any of
    the streams of fluid to turn about an axis in a generally circular (i.e.,
    "vortex") path.

    (1)     Note.  The "means to compel" referred to above is usually a
    circular or elliptical interior wall of a chamber through which the fluid
    stream passes, but may also comprise a helical or spiral passage for the
    fluid.


CLS 137/809
TXT Device or system under subclass 808 provided with two or more of said means
    for a corresponding number of streams.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is for disclosures of two or more vortex
    generators regardless of whether the plural generators are applied to a
    single device or are applied to plural devices of a fluidic system.


CLS 137/810
TXT Device or system under subclass 808 wherein said means is a
    subcombinational element in an array of fluidic devices forming a fluidic
    system, and said means regulates the inflow or outflow of fluid to or from
    said array.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    814+,   for a system comprising two or more fluidic devices or stages.


CLS 137/811
TXT Device under subclass 808 wherein said means is part of the common zone
    referred to in the definition of subclass 834 or subclass 841.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note of subclass 834 for further discussion of
    "interaction chamber".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    839,    for a fluidic device having an enlarged interaction chamber.


CLS 137/812
TXT Device under subclass 808 wherein the flow of fluid into the device is
    along a straight line that is substantially perpendicular to a radius line
    from said axis, and the flow of fluid out of the device is along said axis.

    (1)     Note.  The term "input" includes a stream of subatmospheric
    pressure (i.e., suction) that causes fluid to enter the device tangentially.


CLS 137/813
TXT Device under subclass 812 provided with means to alter the flow of any of
    the streams of fluid into or out of the device.

    (1)     Note.  The alteration is usually of the amount of fluid flow, but
    may also be an alteration of path or direction or other condition of flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    825+,   for a fluidic device having means to vary the operation of the
    device.


CLS 137/814
TXT Subject matter under subclass 803 provided with two or more devices of the
    type defined in subclass 803, or provided with a housing having therein two
    or more groups of passages for fluid flow, each of which groups acts as a
    fluidic device.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass (814) are patents wherein plural
    devices are arranged in series or cascaded array and are supplied by a
    single power input.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    806,    for a device or system using two or more different kinds of fluids.

    810,    for a system wherein a vortex generator is used as a control
    therefor.


CLS 137/815
TXT System under subclass 814 provided with two or more passages for a
    corresponding number of streams of power input fluid, each said passage
    leading to its own device.

    (1)     Note.  The term "power input" is defined in (3) Note in the
    definition of subclass 803.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass 815 are systems wherein a power
    stream supplied from a source is split by a passage common to all the
    devices supplied therefrom.


CLS 137/816
TXT System under subclass 815 wherein at least one of the streams of power
    input fluid can be regulated or altered relative to another, or wherein at
    least one of the streams is unequal to another.

    (1)     Note.  The regulation of, or difference between, the streams can be
    with respect to degree of flow, frequency of pulsation, amplitude, phase
    relationships, etc., these being only exemplary of the characteristics
    found in the systems of this subclass.


CLS 137/817
TXT System under subclass 816 wherein at least one of the streams of power
    input fluid is in the form of a series of short bursts of fluid timed in a
    predetermined sequence or duration, and at least another of the streams is
    an uninterrupted stream of power input fluid, the two different streams
    being applied simultaneously to the system.


CLS 137/818
TXT System under subclass 815 provided with a supply of control input fluid for
    at least one of said devices, which supply can be regulated or altered, or
    wherein the supply that is used for control purposes can be chosen from a
    plurality of supplies available.

    (1)     Note.  For a definition of "Control input", see (3) Note of
    subclass 803.


CLS 137/819
TXT System under subclass 815 provided with two or more fluidic devices
    arranged in a series array, and also provided with a connection from a
    power output passage of a first of said devices to a control input passage
    of a second of said devices that is downstream of said first device.

    (1)     Note.  The connection described may be direct (as via a passage
    with two ends, one to a power output and the other to a control input) or
    may be indirect (as via a restrictor or storage tank) or may be
    supplemental (as via a second passage to the second device that adds to the
    effect of a primary control input to the second device).


CLS 137/820
TXT System under subclass 819 further provided with a connection from a power
    output passage of said second (i.e., downstream) device to a control input
    passage of said first device, whereby at least a portion of the power
    output fluid of the second device will affect the control input of the
    first device.

    (1)     Note.  The comments relative to the cascade connection referred to
    in (1) Note of subclass 819 apply also to the feedback connection of this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    835,    for a fluidic device having feedback means internal to the device.


CLS 137/821
TXT System under subclass 819 wherein at least one of the fluidic devices has
    control input that is in the form of a series of short bursts of fluid
    timed in a predetermined sequence or duration.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the devices of this subclass are known as "fluidic
    oscillator" devices or systems.


CLS 137/822
TXT Device under subclass 803 provided with only one (as claimed in the patent
    thereto) fluidic device, and further provided with two or more passages
    each supplying a stream of power input fluid to that device.

    (1)     Note.  A careful distinction should be made between patents
    disclosing a stream of power input fluid and at least one stream of control
    input fluid, and patents (provided for in this and indented subclasses)
    disclosing two streams of power input fluid.  The first category is usual
    and found in many subclasses, see especially subclasses 834+ and 841.  To
    fit the second category and be proper for original classification herein,
    the claimed disclosure of the patent should be clear that two power input
    streams are provided.  Further disclosure of a control input will not bar
    classification herein.  For further comment on this point, see (2) Note in
    the definition of subclass 824.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    806,    for a device or system using two or more different kinds of fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 543+ for a
    fluid sprinkling system wherein one fluid stream impinges upon another.


CLS 137/823
TXT Device under subclass 822 wherein each said passage lies along a separate
    line, and said lines converge at a zone common to all the lines, and the
    streams are directed toward said common zone.

    (1)     Note.  The device of this subclass is sometimes referred to as a
    "comparator", especially if the characteristics of two power streams are
    compared.  Such characteristics may include pressure, density, temperature,
    velocity, viscosity, etc., of the fluid of the streams.

    (2)     Note.  See (1) Note of subclass 834 for further discussion of
    "interaction region".


CLS 137/824
TXT Device under subclass 823 wherein said separate lines merge into a single
    line common to both said passages, and said streams impinge against one
    another coaxially in said common zone.

    (1)     Note.  The device of this subclass is usually referred to as
    "impact modulator".

    (2)     Note.  This subclass provides for an exception to the statement in
    (1) Note of subclass 822 that two power input streams are provided.  A
    patent having claimed disclosure of only two co-lineal passages for input
    of oppositely-directed fluid will be originally classified in this subclass
    824 even if one of such inputs is termed a "control stream", since it is
    clear that the "control stream" is effectively equivalent to a power input.


CLS 137/825
TXT Device under subclass 803 provided with means that is additional to the
    fluidic device, which means causes a change in the output stream of the
    device.

    (1)     Note.  The regulation is usually applied to the control input
    passage, but is not limited thereto.  In some instances the regulating
    means is applied to a feedback passage, or to an output passage, or within
    an interaction chamber.  To be proper for this and indented subclasses,
    however, it should be clear that the regulating means is not inherent in
    the passages of the device or their configuration but rather is added to
    the device for purpose of regulation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    813,    for a fluidic device comprising a vortex generator and means to
    vary operation of the device.


CLS 137/826
TXT Device under subclass 825 wherein the output stream of the device is in the
    form of a succession of bursts of fluid issuing from a single outlet or
    issuing alternatively from two or more outlets, and wherein the change that
    is produced is a change in the time interval of or between said bursts of
    fluid.


CLS 137/827
TXT Device under subclass 825 wherein said means causes the generation of force
    other than the force of a stream of fluid, said force causing a change in
    the output stream.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass (827) the power or energy is often that of
    electricity. See (1) Note to the definition of subclass 831 for a
    distinction between the subclasses involved.

    (2)     Note.  The described device, which converts electrical energy or
    signals into fluid energy or signals, is often termed a "transducer".


CLS 137/828
TXT Device under subclass 827 wherein the force comprises sound waves or heat
    waves.

    (1)     Note.  The generation of "compressional" waves by a vibrating
    diaphragm has been considered as equivalent to the generation of sound
    waves, and patents have been placed herein on that basis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, for means generating acoustical signals.


CLS 137/829
TXT Device under subclass 825 wherein said means is a member that can move
    relative to the passages provided for flow of fluid.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses are those which provide for
    the exceptions to the "no-moving-parts" rule referred to in (4) Note to the
    definition of subclass 803.


CLS 137/830
TXT Device under subclass 829 wherein the movement of said member occurs at a
    particular frequency to cause a succession of bursts of fluid to be emitted.


CLS 137/831
TXT Device under subclass 829 wherein the movement of the member is caused by
    electrical energy.

    (1)     Note.  The distinction between the patents of this subclass (831)
    and those of subclass 827 above is that in subclass 827 energy is directly
    applied to the fluid with no intervening structure, and in this subclass
    (831) the electrical energy causes the movement of a member which affects
    the fluid.


CLS 137/832
TXT Device under subclass 829 wherein said member is a means located in or
    adjacent to the control input passage that supplies fluid for diverting the
    power input stream (referred to in definition of subclass 803).

    (1)     Note.  the term "control input" and "power input" are defined in
    (3) Note to the definition of subclass 803.

    (2)     Note.  The member is often a valve that turns on or shuts off the
    flow of control input fluid, but can also be a piston in a chamber through
    which the control input fluid passes before entry into the interaction
    chamber, the movement of the piston thus causing regulation of frequency of
    resonant pulses in the control input stream.


CLS 137/833
TXT Device under subclass 803 wherein the device is provided with a housing
    having passages therein for guiding the flow of fluid from input to output
    and wherein the claimed disclosure of the patent pertains to the
    manufactured elements that comprise the device or the manner in which the
    elements are assembled to form the device.

    (1)     Note.  In the patents of this subclass (833) it is clear from the
    disclosure that a fluidic device is involved, but in many patents the
    emphasis of the claims is more on the component parts that comprise the
    device than on the way the device operates fluidically.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, especially subclasses 890-890.15 for a process of
    making a gas and water device.


CLS 137/834
TXT Device under subclass 803 provided with at least five passages joined at a
    zone common to all the passages, including a first passage permitting entry
    into said common zone of a power input stream of fluid, a second passage
    and a third passage permitting entry into said common zone of control input
    signals (i.e., stream of fluid or energy field), said second and third
    passages being substantially opposed to one another and substantially
    perpendicular to said first passage and the three passages thus forming
    approximately a letter "T"; and also including a fourth passage and a fifth
    passage permitting exit from said common zone of power output fluid, said
    fourth and fifth passages diverging substantially oppositely away from said
    first passage and said common zone and thus forming approximately a letter
    "V"; the overall arrangement of passages thus forming a "V" joined to a "T"
    at the common juncture of zone.

    (1)     Note.  The common zone described is known as an "interaction
    chamber" or "interaction region", and is referred to in subclasses 811 and
    823 above, as well as being the subject matter of subclass 839 below.

    (2)     Note.  The arrangement defined permits a control-input signal to
    enter the interaction chamber via either the second passage or the third
    passage thereby to divert or deflect a stream of fluid that is entering the
    common zone via the first passage.  The stream, which has been exiting via
    one of the passages (i.e., either the fourth or the fifth) is thus caused
    to switch (in full or in part) to thereafter exit via the other of the
    passages (i.e., either the fifth or the fourth) until another control input
    signal causes another switch.


CLS 137/835
TXT Device under subclass 834 further provided with means permitting at least a
    portion of the fluid exiting from said common zone via said fourth or fifth
    passage to be diverted from its exit passage and returned to said common
    zone.

    (1)     Note.  The feedback fluid may flow via a passage provided therefor,
    or may flow in a path along one of the walls of an enlarged interaction
    chamber. Moreover, the feedback fluid may enter the interaction chamber via
    a port in the chamber, or may enter the chamber via a port in the control
    input passage.  Both "negative" feedback and "positive" feedback are
    provided for in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    820,    for a fluidic system having feedback means from a downstream (i.e.,
    succeeding) device to an upstream (i.e., preceding) device.


CLS 137/836
TXT Device under subclass 834 wherein said second and third passages have
    special structure or configuration or peculiarity of operation.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass (836) are patents claiming the
    control inlet as being supplied with subatmospheric or suction pressure, or
    claiming an elongated passage to produce a delayed signal.


CLS 137/837
TXT Device under subclass 836 wherein the special structure includes a
    plurality of second passages or a plurality of third passages, the number
    of passages permitting control-input signal to enter the common zone thus
    being three or more.


CLS 137/838
TXT Device under subclass 834 provided with a plurality of fourth passages or a
    plurality of fifth passages, the number of passages diverging away from
    said common zone permitting fluid to exit from said zone being three or
    more, or provided with fourth and fifth passages that come to a second
    common zone downstream of the first common zone.

    (1)     Note.  In the case of the rejoined outlet passages, one of the
    passages is usually longer than the other so that a pulse of fluid through
    the longer passage will be delayed in its arrival at the second zone
    relative to the pulse through the shorter passage.


CLS 137/839
TXT Device under subclass 834 wherein said common zone is greater in size than
    would normally be required for passage of fluid therethrough, or wherein
    the walls forming the common zone are particularly disclosed as having a
    specified configuration.

    (1)     Note.  The enlargement in the interaction chamber is often
    disclosed as being for the purpose of preventing boundary-layer attachment
    or "lock-on" of the fluid passing therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    811,    for a fluidic device having a vortex generator in the interaction
    chamber.


CLS 137/840
TXT Device under subclass 834 further provided with a sixth passage joining any
    of said other passages or said common zone to ambient surroundings for the
    purpose of "bleeding" excess pressure within the device.


CLS 137/841
TXT Device under subclass 803 provided with at least four passages joined at a
    zone common to all the passages, including a first passage permitting entry
    into said common zone of a power input stream of fluid and a second passage
    permitting entry into said common zone of control input signals (i.e.,
    stream of fluid or energy field), said first and second passages being
    angularly related and thus forming approximately ar (Greek letter  "Gamma")
    or an inverted letter "L"; and also including a third passage and a fourth
    passage permitting exit from said common zone of power outlet fluid, said
    third and fourth passages diverging substantially oppositely away from said
    first passage and said common zone and thus forming approximately a letter
    "V"; the overall arrangement of passages thus forming a "V" joined to ar at
    the common juncture or zone.

    (1)     Note.  The common zone described is known as an "interaction
    chamber" or "interaction region", as discussed in (1) Note to subclass 834.

    (2)     Note.  The arrangement defined is similar to that defined in
    subclass 834, and further discussed in (1) Note to that subclass, with the
    exception that devices in this subclass have control-input signal applied
    from only one side of the power input.  Thus it is often used as a
    "monostable amplifier", especially when the power output "locks on" to a
    wall of one passage only when a control-input signal is applied.


CLS 137/842
TXT Device under subclass 803 provided with at least two passages joined at a
    zone common to both passages, including a first passage permitting entry
    into said common zone of a power input stream of fluid and a second passage
    permitting exit from said common zone of a power output stream of fluid,
    said passages each extending along a line common to both passages.

    (1)     Note.  The diversion or alteration required by the definition of
    subclass 803 is not referred to in the definition of this subclass because
    there are many different ways of accomplishing the diversion in the devices
    of this subclass, but the diversion nevertheless is present. Among the ways
    of accomplishing the diversion are an enlarged interaction chamber, a
    passage for control-input signal, a plurality of power output passages
    lying in a common plane and a passage for control-input signal
    perpendicular to said common plane, and a restricted interaction region to
    which control-input signal is applied, these being only exemplary of
    devices found.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, especially subclasses 151+ for a jet pump used for pumping
    fluid.


CLS 137/843
TXT Valve under subclass 511 in which the valve member or the valve seat is
    made of resilient easily deformable material which yields in response to
    pressure to open the valve.  The restoring force of the resilient material
    constitutes a major component of the biasing means.

    (1)     Note.  The use of resilient sealing means (e.g., rubber washer) at
    the valve seat does not make the arrangement classifiable herein.  The use
    of such sealing means is conventional throughout the class.


CLS 137/844
TXT Valve under subclass 843 wherein the valve member comprises a resilient
    body which has a passage therethrough which passage expands to an open
    position when fluid pressure is applied to the body and retracts upon
    itself into a closed position when pressure is removed to thus seal the
    passage against fluid flow.


CLS 137/845
TXT Valve under subclass 844 wherein the resilient body is a substantially flat
    plate-like member having an expansible orifice formed therethrough.


CLS 137/846
TXT Valve under subclass 844 wherein the resilient body has a fluid passage
    therethrough a portion of which is substantially nondeformable, which
    passage terminates in an expansible port at the point where the fluid flows
    from the body.


CLS 137/847
TXT Valve under subclass 846 wherein closing of the exit lip is effected or
    facilitated by an additional force applying means.


CLS 137/848
TXT Valve under subclass 846 wherein the fluid passage is provided with a
    laterally disposed outlet port.


CLS 137/849
TXT Valve under subclass 846 wherein the expansible port is formed as a
    plurality of cuts in the resilient body.

    (1)     Note.  The cuts may intersect one another thus forming multiple
    exit flaps or the cuts may be spaced from and open independently of one
    another.


CLS 137/850
TXT Valve under subclass 846 wherein the nondeformable portion of the passage
    has a rigid tubular supporting element inserted therein.


CLS 137/851
TXT Valve under subclass 843 wherein the resilient material valve includes an
    elongated member which is confined or retained at each of its ends to thus
    limit deformation to its central region.


CLS 137/852
TXT Valve under subclass 843 wherein a portion of the resilient member is fixed
    to a substantially rigid mounting means about which at least part of the
    remainder of the resilient member bends or distorts towards or away from
    contact with a valve seat with which the resilient member coacts to produce
    a desired valving action upon variations in fluid pressure.


CLS 137/853
TXT Valves under subclass 852 in which the resilient member is an axially
    extending tubular element which flexes radially with respect to its
    mounting means.


CLS 137/854
TXT Valves under subclass 852 in which the resilient member is secured at its
    center and the periphery flexes about said securement.


CLS 137/855
TXT Valve under subclass 852 wherein the resilient member is fixed at a single
    location along its periphery and wherein the free portion of the member
    bends about this location to produce the desired valving action.


CLS 137/856
TXT Valve under subclass 855 wherein an abutment is located in close proximity
    to said resilient member to restrict the travel of said member as it moves
    from a closed to an open position.


CLS 137/857
TXT Valve under subclass 855 wherein a resilient, energy storing, bias means is
    provided.


CLS 137/858
TXT Valve under subclass 855 which, in addition to the restoring force of the
    resilient material is provided with a mass of material which due to the
    force of gravity acts to bias the resilient member towards its valve seat.


CLS 137/859
TXT Valve under subclass 852 wherein said valve member is in the form of a
    resilient disc which is secured around its entire periphery.


CLS 137/860
TXT Valve under subclass 843 wherein the resilient member is in the form of a
    ring which is carried by but not secured to a mounting and which either
    slides along or freely expands with respect to the mounting.

    (1)     Note.  The ring does not need to be continuous, thus valves
    employing expansible or contractable split rings will be found herein.


CLS 137/861
TXT With flow control means for branched passages:

    System under subclass 561 wherein an array of branched fluent material flow
    passages is provided with means to stop or regulate the flow in more than
    one branch, which means may comprise (1) multiple valves, (2) a deflector
    or valve located at a junction and operable to open one passage and close
    or restrict the flow from the other, or (3) a single valve controlling one
    outlet flow path, the hydrostatic characteristics of the system being such
    that the entire flow passes through the valved line when it is fully open.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition, section 4 for search notes of
    plural valves and their actuators.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255+,   for plural tanks or compartments having parallel outflows.

    280     and 299, for hydrants having plural risers and/or outlets.

    594+,   for distribution systems comprising two or more noncommunicating
    flow paths.

    602+,   for distribution systems having plural inflows and a single outflow.

    625+,   for valves and valve actuation involving multiway valve units in
    which there is a pattern or special flow relation, and see the search notes
    thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 482+ for dispensers having plural openings
    or discharge guides with discharge control means for plural outlets.


CLS 137/862
TXT With common valve operator:

    Systems under subclass 861 wherein a plurality of branches in the branched
    array are each provided with a separate flow control means and means to
    coordinate the actuation of the separate flow control means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    595,    601, and 607, for other distribution systems having plural valves
    with a common actuator.

    631+,   for valves of the cyclical type, and see the search notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 485+ for interconnected or integral flow
    controllers for plural dispenser outlets, and subclasses 488+ for
    controllers for a single passage into which plural passages merge.


CLS 137/863
TXT For valve having a flexible diaphragm valving member:

    Systems under subclass 862 in which at least one flow control means
    comprises a pliant member which flexes relative to a rigid surface to
    control flow therebetween.


CLS 137/864
TXT For valve having a ball head:

    Systems under subclass 862 comprising at least one flow control means which
    employs a substantially spherical member to regulate flow.


CLS 137/865
TXT With gearing:

    Systems under subclass 862 wherein the means to coordinate the actuation of
    the flow control means includes relatively movable toothed members which
    transmit motion to the flow control means by meshing of the teeth during
    travel of the members.


CLS 137/866
TXT Threaded actuator:

    Systems under subclass 862 wherein the means to coordinate the actuation of
    the flow control means includes a member having a helical rib, which member
    reciprocates as a result of rotary motion applied thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 248+ for gear-actuated
    valves, per se.


CLS 137/867
TXT Pivoted or rotary motion converted to reciprocating valve head motion:

    System under subclass 862 comprising a flow control means in which swinging
    or turning motion of a member is mechanically converted to rectilinear
    movement of a flow control member.


CLS 137/868
TXT Spring biased:

    System under subclass 867 wherein a resilient mass is provided to urge
    either the flow control means or coordinating means to a desired position.


CLS 137/869
TXT Having fluid actuator:

    System under subclass 862 wherein the coordinating means includes a
    hydraulic or pneumatic motor.


CLS 137/870
TXT With electrical actuation:

    System under subclass 862 wherein the coordinating means includes means
    utilizing electrical energy to effect actuation of a flow control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 129+ for electrically
    actuated valves, per se.


CLS 137/871
TXT Spring biased:

    System under subclass 862 wherein a resilient mass is provided to urge
    either the flow control means or coordinating means to a desired position.


CLS 137/872
TXT With valve or movable deflector at junction:

    System under subclass 861 wherein a fluent material flow regulating means
    or fluent material diverting means is provided at the junction of the inlet
    branch with two or more outlet branches, the fluent material flow
    regulating means or movable diverting means being selectively operable to
    direct the effluent from the inlet branch into an desired outlet branch or
    branches.

    (1)     Note.  The deflector, when discharging directly to the ambient
    space or atmosphere, is also considered an outlet passage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119.01+, for downspouts having automatic means to shift the flow between
    branches, especially subclass 120 for valves or deflectors at the junction
    of a rain downspout in which the valve or deflector is shifted in response
    to the collection of a predetermined quantity of rainfall in an auxiliary
    timing tank.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, subclasses 13, 14, 23,
    28, 29, and 31 for switches and multiple point discharge for chutes.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclasses 117+ for a conveyor having
    plural intakes; subclasses 155+ for a conveyor having plural outlets; and
    subclasses 181+ for a flow diverter, divider, or combiner, per se.


CLS 137/873
TXT Movable deflector spout in lateral port:

    System under subclass 872 in which an opening in the side wall of the
    fluent material flow line provides a branched discharge line, there being
    provided a pipe which may be moved into position in the flow line to
    deflect the fluent material through the opening in the side wall, the pipe
    being effective to guide or to conduct the diverted fluent material to a
    point beyond the opening.


CLS 137/874
TXT Valve or deflector is tubular passageway:

    System under subclass 872 in which the fluent material flow control means
    or diverting means comprises, at least in part, a movable tubular switching
    passageway.


CLS 137/875
TXT Pivoted valve or deflector:

    System under subclass 872 in which fluent material flow control or
    diverting means swings about an axis other than its axis of symmetry.


CLS 137/876
TXT Rotary valve or deflector:

    System under subclass 872 in which at least one fluent material flow
    control or diverting means only rotates about its axis of symmetry.


CLS 137/877
TXT Biased valve:

    System under subclass 861 in which at least one of the flow passages is
    provided with a fluent material flow control means which is urged by a
    spring, gravity, or fluid pressure means either toward or away from its
    seat.


CLS 137/878
TXT Spring bias:

    System under subclass 877 wherein a resilient mass is provided to urge the
    flow control means to a desired position.


CLS 137/879
TXT For valve having a ball head:

    System under subclass 878 wherein fluent material flow control means
    employs a substantially spherical member to regulate flow.


CLS 137/880
TXT With threaded actuator:

    System under subclass 878 wherein the means to actuate the fluent material
    flow control means has a helical rib by which the actuating means
    reciprocates as a result of rotary motion applied thereto.


CLS 137/881
TXT Spring coaxial with valve:

    System under subclass 878 wherein the axis along which the resilient mass
    is compressed is coincident with the axis along which the fluent material
    flow control means moves.


CLS 137/882
TXT Biased open:

    System under subclass 881 wherein the resilient means is provided to urge
    the flow control means to an open position.


CLS 137/883
TXT Single inlet with multiple distinctly valved outlets:

    System under subclass 861 having two or more outlets or exhaust passageways
    connected to a single inlet or admission passage, there being a separate,
    distinct, and independently operable material flow regulating means in each
    outlet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    602+,   for system with plural inflow and a single outflow.


CLS 137/884
TXT Sectional block structure:

    System under subclass 861 wherein the flow passages are formed in modular
    pieces facilitating assembly or disassembly of the array.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    269+,   for valves convertible by reassembling or by adding or omitting a
    part.


CLS 137/885
TXT With fluid actuator:

    System under subclass 861 in which a fluent material flow regulating means
    is actuated, at least in part, by a fluid pressure motive means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 12+ for fluid-actuated
    valves, per se.


CLS 137/886
TXT With threaded actuator:

    System under subclass 886 comprising a fluent material flow regulating
    means having an operator with a helical rib, which operator reciprocates as
    a result of rotary motion applied thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 213+ for valves with
    threaded actuators, per se.


CLS 137/887
TXT Containing rotary valve:

    System under subclass 861 in which a fluent material flow control means
    rotates about its axis of symmetry.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 304+ for rotary valves, per
    se.


CLS 137/888
TXT Combining by aspiration:

    System under subclass 602 in which a fluid flowing from a first inlet flow
    line causes or facilitates the flow of a fluid from a second inlet flow
    line so that the fluids are combined prior to leaving the single outlet or
    exhaust passage, the fluid flowing from the first inlet flow line serves as
    the motivating or aspirating fluid while the fluid in the second inlet flow
    line serves as the aspirated fluid; whereby, the motivating or aspirating
    fluid imparts energy to the aspirated fluid by the action of entrainment.

    (1)     Note.  In regard to the classification of an aspirator between
    Class 417, Pumps, and this class (137), subclasses 888+, and aspirator in
    which the disclosed function is to mix or combine together two or more
    fluids is classified in Class 137, whereas an aspirator in which the sole
    disclosed function is to pump one fluid by means of entrainment with
    another is classified in Class 417.  In the case of dual disclosed
    functions, if an aspirator has a disclosed function of pumping one fluid by
    entraining it with another and a disclosed function of mixing or combining
    together two or more fluids to produce a mixture, the classification is in
    Class 137.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101.11, 205.5, and 564.5, for mixing or combining of fluids in which one
    fluid is added to another by means of differential pressure existing along
    a main line which has a shunt line leading to a reservoir containing a
    fluid to be added to the main line downstream of the shunt line; many of
    these devices may include an aspirating effect.

    268,    for devices including a holder for solid, flaky, or pulverized
    material to be dissolved or entrained.

    896+,   for mixing or combining of plural fluids by means other than
    aspiration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 129+ for dispensers comprising plural
    sources which may also have a common discharge, and particularly indented
    subclasses 145.1+ for dispensers comprising plural sources having a common
    discharge.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 310+, 335+,
    337+, and 398+ for spraying devices having additional means to promote
    mixing of a plurality of different streams.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus for mixing a liquid with a gas.

    366,    Agitating, appropriate subclasses for devices adapted to promote
    mixing of plural fluent materials by means other than aspiration.

    417,    Pumps, appropriate subclasses for aspirators having a sole
    disclosed function of pumping of one fluid by entrainment with another, and
    see Note (1) above.


CLS 137/889
TXT Combining of three or more diverse fluids:

    System under subclass 888 wherein the branched flow line has three or more
    inlets or admission passages connected to the single outlet or exhaust
    passage; and wherein the system includes three or more fluids, each fluid
    having a characteristic which is diverse from or different from the
    characteristic of at least two other of the fluids such as different
    composition, different phase (i.e., gas and liquid), different temperature,
    or different viscosity.

    (1)     Note.  All of the three or more diverse fluids do not necessarily
    need to be flowing simultaneously; the system may include means to
    selectively control one or more of the flow paths.


CLS 137/890
TXT Plural motivating fluid jets:

    System under subclass 888 in which the fluid flowing from the motivating
    fluid inlet line is divided into a plurality of streams prior to combining
    with the aspirated fluid; or in which the motivating fluid acts to entrain
    the aspirated fluid and then, the motivating fluid again, or the combined
    motivating and aspirated fluid stream acts to further entrain additional
    fluid to be aspirated at a point downstream of the first entrainment.


CLS 137/891
TXT Flow control by varying position of a fluid inlet relative to entrainment
    chamber:

    System under subclass 888 wherein at least one of the inlets or admission
    passages is movable relative to the portion of the system in which the
    fluids are entrained and combined so that, by altering the position of the
    movable inlet relative to the entraining portion of the system, the flow of
    one or more of the incoming fluids may be controlled.


CLS 137/892
TXT With selectively operated flow control means in inlet:

    System under subclass 888 including means located in an inlet flow line or
    in an admission passage to selectively control the flow of fluid flowing
    from the inlet flow line into the portion of the system in which the fluids
    are entrained and combined.

    (1)     Note.  The means for selectively controlling flow in an inlet flow
    line or admission passage may comprise control means for venting the inlet
    flow line or admission passage, as, for example, for allowing a portion of
    the motivating fluid located upstream of the admission passage to escape
    from the motivating fluid inlet line or for allowing air to be admitted
    into the aspirated fluid inlet line.


CLS 137/893
TXT Flow control means is located in aspirated fluid inlet:

    System under subclass 892 wherein the means to selectively control the flow
    of fluid is located in the aspirated fluid inlet flow line or in the
    aspirated fluid admission passage so as to control the flow of aspirated
    fluid from the aspirated fluid admission passage into the entraining and
    combining portion of the system.


CLS 137/894
TXT Single actuator operates flow control means located in both motivating
    fluid and aspirated fluid inlets:

    System under subclass 893 wherein additional means to selectively control
    the flow of fluid is located in the motivating fluid inlet flow line or
    admission passage so as to control the flow of motivating fluid from the
    motivating fluid admission passage into the entraining and combining
    portion of the system; and wherein a single, selectively controlled
    actuator is operatively connected to both the flow control means located in
    the aspirated fluid inlet flow line or passage and to the flow control
    means located in the motivating fluid inlet flow line or passage, so that
    whenever the actuator is selectively operated, the flow control means
    located in both the aspirated and motivating fluid inlet flow lines or
    admission passages are operated to alter the flows of the respective fluids
    into the entraining and combining portion of the system.


CLS 137/895
TXT With condition responsive valve:

    System under subclass 888 including a movable valve connected to a flow
    line, which valve is operated to move in response to a change in the
    condition of the fluid located within the system.


CLS 137/896
TXT With means to promote mixing or combining of plural fluids:

    System under subclass 602 including means to promote admixing or combining
    together of the fluids leaving the admission passages prior to discharge
    from the single outlet so as to provide a single, combined, or uniformly
    mixed output stream.

    (1)     Note.  Mere plural inlets to a combining chamber is insufficient
    for causing classification in this subclass.  The means to promote
    combining of plural fluids must include structure for bringing the fluids
    into contact in a particular manner such as baffles or other means to cause
    turbulence, flow-shaping or fluid-guiding means to cause the fluids to be
    combined in a particular manner, etc.

    (2)     Note.  In regard to the classification of a system having two or
    more inlets connected to a single outlet, which system including means to
    promote "mixing" of two or more fluids, classification in Class 366,
    Agitating, is proper if the plural fluids to be mixed are liquids and the
    means to promote mixing of the liquids is something other than an
    aspirator.  A mixing system is properly classified in this class (137),
    either (a) in subclasses 888+ if the fluids (including liquids) are mixed
    by aspiration, or (b) in these subclasses 896+ if the fluids to be mixed
    are other than two or more liquids.  A system including means to promote
    "combining" of two or more fluids, as opposed to means to promote "mixing"
    of two or more fluids, is classifiable in this class (137), subclasses 888+
    or 896+ even if the fluids are liquids since Class 366 requires a means to
    promote "mixing" of the fluids.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    603,    for faucet attachments wherein water from hot and cold water
    faucets is mixed or combined to provide a single output stream of
    intermediate temperature.

    605+,   for mixing faucets for hot and cold water which do not claim
    additional means to promote mixing.

    888+,   for mixing or combining of plural fluids by aspiration means
    wherein a fluid is mixed or combined with another by the action of
    entrainment, and see the search notes under subclass 888.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 129+ for dispensers comprising plural
    sources which may also have a common discharge, and particularly indented
    subclasses 145.1+ for dispensers comprising plural sources having a common
    discharge.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 310+, 335+,
    337+, and 398+ for spraying devices having additional means to promote
    mixing of a plurality of different streams.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus for mixing a liquid with a gas.

    366,    Agitating, appropriate subclasses for devices adapted to promote
    mixing of plural fluent materials by means other than aspiration, and see
    note (2) above.


CLS 137/897
TXT With selectively operated flow control means:

    System under subclass 896 including means located in a flow line, admission
    passage, or the outlet passage to selectively control the flow of the fluid
    in one or more of the flow lines.


CLS 137/898
TXT Single actuator operates plural flow control means:

    System under subclass 897 wherein there are a plurality of means to
    selectively control the flow of fluid within the system, which means to
    control the flow of fluid is located in any combination of two or more
    locations including the flow lines, admission passages, or the outlet
    passage; and wherein a single, selectively controlled actuator is
    operatively connected to the plural flow control means, so that whenever
    the actuator is selectively operated, the plural flow control means are
    operated to alter the flows of the fluids within the system.


CLS 137/899
TXT Vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 343 in which the casing, support, or protector is
    a vehicle or a part thereof, which vehicle or part thereof supports and
    enables movement of the fluid-handling device or part thereof relative to
    means external to the fluid-handling device or part thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The term "vehicle" includes water, rail, and airborne
    carriers as well as land vehicles.

    (2)     Note.  In regard to the line between Class 137 and Class 239 (as
    specified in the class definition of Class 239, section III, subsection g,
    under the Search Class note), the placement of documents within Class 137,
    these subclasses (899+) and Class 239, subclasses 726+, represents ]an
    exception to the specified class line. This exception to the line between
    Classes 137 and 239 relates  "only " to the placement of documents between
    subclasses 899+ of Class 137 and subclasses 726+ of Class 239.
    Specifically, any document which discloses a portable, overhead type of
    irrigating or other sprinkling apparatus, which is supported upon vehicular
    means, which has some form of sprinkler or other spray outlet means secured
    thereto for sprinkling or spraying fluid onto a surface supporting the
    apparatus, and which claims subject matter encompassed by the definitions
    of Class 239, subclasses 726+, has been placed in the appropriate subclass
    of Class 239, subclasses 726+, regardless of whether or not a sprinkler or
    other spray outlet means was specified in the claims.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38+,    for movable systems controlled by the position or inertia of the
    system, especially subclass 43 for tanks having means for closing vents if
    the tank overturns.

    125,    for tank truck mounted plural siphons.

    223+,   for tire filling chucks or stems.

    267,    for tank truck mounted plural tanks.

    580,    for transfer of fluid to a moving    receiver by means of a running
    joint.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 313 for vacuum
    cleaners installed in vehicles.

    114,    Ships, subclass 74 for tankers; and subclasses 232+ for oil
    distributors for ships.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 54.1+
    for power plants.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 608+ for ambulant dispensers, and see the
    search notes to subclass 608.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 726+ for
    portable, overhead-type of irrigating apparatus supported upon vehicular
    means, and see the search notes to subclasses 726+, and see (2) Note above.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 136 for material discharging and diffusing
    from aircraft.

    280,    Land Vehicles, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 830+
    for tanks or boilers associated with land vehicles.

    291,    Track Sanders, subclasses 3+ for fluid delivery in track sanders.


CLS 137/899.1
TXT Guided by means of track or guideway:

    Apparatus under subclass 899 including rail means, guide wire means, or
    some other predetermined and established pathway which constrains the
    vehicle or a part thereof to be bodily movable along the rail means, guide
    wire means, or other pathway.


CLS 137/899.2
TXT Aerial or water-supported (e.g., airplane or ship, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 899 in which the casing, support, or protector is
    either (a) an aerial vehicle or part thereof, which aerial vehicle is
    freely movable through the air, or (b) a buoyant vehicle or a part thereof,
    which buoyant vehicle is buoyantly supported by a body of water.

    (1)     Note.  The buoyant vehicle may be submerged within the body of
    water during use of the fluid-handling device attached thereto or supported
    thereon, but must be also capable of being buoyantly supported by a body of
    water.


CLS 137/899.3
TXT With retractable or nonuse-positionable support wheel:

    Apparatus under subclass 899 in which the vehicle or a part thereof
    comprises a wheel which is positionable between an in-use supporting
    position and a storage position, so that (a) in the in-use position, the
    wheel supports and enables movement of the fluid-handling device or part
    thereof relative to the means external to the device, and (b) in the
    storage position, the wheel no longer supports or enables movement of the
    fluid-handling device or part thereof relative to the means external to the
    device.


CLS 137/899.4
TXT Vehicle supports fluid compressor and compressed fluid storage tank:

    Apparatus under subclass 899 in which the fluid-handling device or a part
    thereof comprises (a) a compressing means to induct and to compress an
    ambient, compressible fluid, such that the resulting compressed fluid is at
    a greater pressure than the ambient, uncompressed fluid, and (b) a tank or
    receiver means, adapted to be fluidly connected to the compressing means,
    to receive and store the compressed fluid under a higher-than-ambient
    pressure; and wherein both the compressing means and the tank or receiver
    means are supported as a whole by and movable as a whole by means of the
    vehicle or part thereof.

    (1)     Note.  These fluid-handling devices are generally ambulant air
    compressor units mounted upon wheeled trucks.

               CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS



    THE DOCUMENTS IN THE FOLLOWING COLLECTIONS CONTAIN ONLY CROSS-REFERENCES
    WHICH HAVE BEEN PLACED WITHOUT REGARD TO THEIR ORIGINAL CLASSIFICATION OR
    TO THEIR CLAIMED SUBJECT MATTER AND THEREFORE ARE ONLY REPRESENTATIVE OF
    THE ART OR SUBJECT MATTER.  CONSEQUENTLY, A COMPLETE SEARCH FOR ART OR
    SUBJECT MATTER PROVIDED FOR HERE WOULD REQUIRE A REVIEW OF THE HIGHER
    PORTIONS OF THE CLASSIFICATION SCHEDULE.


CLS 137/900
TXT BUMPLESS MANUAL TO AUTOMATIC RELAYS:

    Art collection under the class definition drawn to bumpless manual to
    automatic relays.


CLS 137/901
TXT BIASED BALL VALVES WITH OPERATORS:

    Art collection under the class definition drawn to biased ball valves with
    operators.


CLS 137/902
TXT SLUSH PUMP CHECK VALVES:

    Art collection under the class definition drawn to slush pump check valves.


CLS 137/903
TXT RUBBER VALVE SPRINGS:

    Art collection under the class definition drawn to rubber valve  springs.


CLS 137/904
TXT CUSHION CHECK VALVES:

    Art collection under the class definition drawn to cushion check valves.


CLS 137/905
TXT ROTARY VALVES FOR MULTIPLE GAS BURNERS:

    Art collection under the class definition drawn to rotary valves for
    multiple gas burners.


CLS 137/906
TXT VALVES BIASED BY FLUID "SPRINGS":

    Art collection under the class definition drawn to valves biased by fluid
    "springs".


CLS 137/907
TXT VACUUM-ACTUATED VALVES:

    Art collection under the class definition drawn to vacuum-actuated valves.


CLS 137/908
TXT RESPIRATOR CONTROL:

    Art collection under the class definition drawn to respirator control.


CLS 137/909
TXT MAGNETIC FLUID VALVE:

    Art collection under the class definition drawn to magnetic fluid valve.


CLS 137/910
TXT DESTRUCTIBLE OR DEFORMABLE ELEMENT CONSTRUCTED OF SPECIFIC MATERIAL:

    Art collection under the class definition drawn to destructible or
    deformable elements constructed from a unique material to enable the
    element to destruct under specified temperature or pressure constraints.


CLS 138/
TTL PIPES AND TUBULAR CONDUITS

CLS 138/
TXT

    I.      This class includes:

    A.      Tubular members of definite or indefinite length including wall
    structure of the tubular members, the end structure of the tubular members
    of definite length, if not elsewhere classifiable.

    B.      Fluid pressure compensators (e.g., accumulators or cushioning
    devices), flow regulators, or baffles not restricted by structure to use
    with any particular art.

    C.      Devices for thawing frozen fluid in pipes, for preventing the fluid
    in the pipes from freezing and for preventing the pipe from bursting if the
    fluid freezes.

    D.      Pipes with closures and plugs where tied with the structure of the
    pipe or limited by structure to use with a pipe.

    E.      Methods and apparatus for repairing pipes where not elsewhere
    classifiable.

    (1)     Note.  For articles embracing a short length of a tube having some
    added feature which makes them into a shot shell, box, can or other
    article, the proper article class should be searched.

    (2)     Note.  Includes conveyor pipes comprising the mere tube.  If the
    device is an open chute, is more than a mere pipe, or is otherwise limited
    to use as a conveyor, see Classes 193, Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides,
    and Ways; 198, Conveyors:  Power Driven, and 406, Conveyors:  Fluid Current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 11+ for a roof with
    an eave or valley gutter, subclasses 220.1+ for a service duct within a
    building barrier, subclasses 245+ for buildings with a curved barrier,
    subclasses 716.1+ for an in situ attached type channel or trim strip,
    subclass 722.1 for a stone-like conduit, and subclass 731 for load-bearing
    members forming a hollow column or beam and see the reference to Class 138
    in the class definition of Class 52.



    (4)     Note.  For tubular textile fabric for use in making hose, see Class
    66, Textiles:  Knitting, subclasses 169+, Class 87, Textiles:  Braiding,
    Netting, and Lace Making, subclasses 6 and 9, Class 57, Textiles:
    Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, appropriate subclasses, and Class 139,
    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 387+.

    (5)     Note.  For pipe joints and couplings, see Class 285, Pipe Joints or
    Couplings.  The combination of pipe wall structure and a coupling is
    classified in Class 285.

    II.     Methods of, and apparatus for, manufacturing tubes are not
    classifiable in this class but are found in the various manufacturing
    classes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 104.03+ for
    pipe cleaning.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 890.03+ for processes of making metal
    tubes, subclasses 700+ for apparatus for applying tubes to and removing
    tubes from the device with which they are associated, subclass 435 for
    processes of making flexible tubing, subclass 455.1 for processes of making
    tubular elements having concentric walls spaced from each other.  See
    subclasses 700+ for a residual apparatus not elsewhere classified which
    assembles component parts into a tube by means other than welding them.

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 335+ for pipe supports and couplings for
    dredgers.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses for
    buildings with internal passages or conduits or hollow structures which are
    more than a mere tubular structure capable of use as a pipe or conduit and
    see the reference to Class 138 in the class definitions of Class 52.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, (See I (4) Note, above).

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, appropriate subclasses for a process of, or
    apparatus for making, reshaping or treating glass tubular stock.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, (See I (4) Note above).

    72,     Metal Deforming, and particularly subclasses 367.1+, for a method
    or a means for making a metal tube by plastically deforming the metal.

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses and particularly subclasses 54 and
    178+ for tube punching methods and apparatus.

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, (See I (4) Note,
    above).

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 184 for furnace smokestacks.

    114,    Ships, subclass 187 for ship's smokestacks.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 511 for tubes and
    connections limited by structure to use with liquid vaporizers.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 307+ for pipes limited by structure
    to use as stove pipes.

    137,    Fluid Handling, appropriate subclass for pipes and conduits
    combined with other fluid handling features, and subclasses 317+ for
    apparatus and processes for tapping pressurized containers or mains.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, (See I (4) Note above).

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for methods and apparatus for manufacturing pipes
    and tubular conduits by a laminating operation.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 177+ for a tube limited by structure to
    heat exchange.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 75.11+ for well heads or closures having some
    fluid handling feature, subclass 91.1 for well head structure with flow
    resisters, subclasses 192+ and subclass there noted for plugs inserted into
    a prepositioned well conduit, and subclasses 242.1+ for conduit wall
    structure specialized to use in wells.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, particularly subclasses
    8+, and 68.1+ for conduits limited to electrical use.  Conduits disclosed
    for electrical use even though the tube is made of or lined with insulating
    material, unless there are claimed features in addition to the conduit
    structure which limit the same to electrical use, such as junction boxes,
    the contained electrical conductors, grounds, etc., are in this Class (138).

    181,    Acoustics, for speaking-tubes, mufflers, and sound filters.

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, (See I (2) Note above).

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, (See I (2) Note above).

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 59.1+ for methods of an apparatus for
    welding tubes, which involve significant electric heating.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 200+ for pipes with closures and plugs when
    not tied with the structure of the pipe or not limited by structure to use
    with a pipe.

    222,    Dispensing, particularly subclasses 92+ for containers having
    collapsible walls of a particular character. Structures disclosed as
    dispensing containers and having collapsible walls are classified in Class
    222, collapsibility per se being a dispensing feature.  On the other hand,
    mere tubular collapsible members not disclosed or claimed as containers or
    receptacles are classified in this class (138).

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 126+ for the process of encasing a
    rod or tube with a separate tube or sheath and bonding the parts together.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclass 4.5 for a
    cylindrical paperboard container having an open end, and subclass 93 for a
    paperboard tube intended for mailing drawings or similar articles, which
    tube may have an open end or ends.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 33 for portable
    drinking tubes and straws; subclass 145 for porous hose or pipe; and
    subclasses 266+ for sprinkler pipes.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 49+ for pipe supports.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses for processes within the class definition, for
    molding and shaping plastic substances.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings.  See I (5) Note above.

    291,    Track Sanders, subclasses 41+ for sand delivery pipes for track
    sanders limited by structure to that use.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 239+ for wave
    guides which claim significant wave propagation characteristics, and
    subclasses 1+ for plural channel systems of such guides.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus subclasses 2+ for road drain
    or gutter structure.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 43+ for porous or
    apertured pipes, flumes, or tile ways for drainage or irrigation;
    subclasses 119+ for a flume or attachment; and subclasses 124+ for culverts.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclasses 191+ for conveyor conduits
    (see I (2) Note, above).

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    appropriate subclasses for apparatus for shaping or reshaping nonmetallic
    pipe, especially subclasses 131+ for extrusion shaping means fed from
    plural sources to form a composite pipe; subclass 380 for an extrusion
    shaping apparatus, subclasses 392+ for a tubular preform reshaping means;
    and subclass 414 for a plunger-mold press shaping apparatus including means
    to insert or remove a core.

    427,    Coating Processes, for coating processes of general application and
    note especially subclasses 230+ for coating the interior of hollow articles.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet, and subclass 586 for a metallic workpiece for making tubular stock,
    which has a longitudinal passageway or stop weld material, and subclass 598
    for metallic stock material having a T- or X-type cross section.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 1+ for ventilating chimneys.

    473,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 316+ for tubular golf club
    shafts.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 269+ for making a tube from a nonmetal
    sheet or web.


CLS 138/26
TXT Devices under the class definition, in the pipe line, attached thereto, or
    adapted to be attached thereto, for allowing expansion of the conducted
    fluid upon change in temperature, for receiving and delivering energy from
    and to the conducted fluid to maintain a more nearly constant pressure of
    the fluid and for dampening pulsations in pressure caused by a
    quick-shutoff of flow or by the nonuniform action of a pump.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 277 for such devices tied up with
    the structure of a water meter or its casing, and subclasses 700+, where
    tied up with pressure gauges.

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 212+ for similar structures in mufflers and
    sound filters.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 540+ for such devices in combination with a
    significantly claimed pump.


CLS 138/27
TXT Devices under subclass 26 intended to prevent the bursting of the pipe when
    the fluid therein freezes by providing an air pocket or other chamber into
    which the fluid can flow when it expands.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 41.5, for similar devices
    tied up with the structure of an internal combustion engine cooling system.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 59+ for fluid handling system including
    safety devices responsive to freeze conditions, subclasses 301+ for
    hydrants having means for preventing freezing, subclasses 334+ for fluid
    handling devices including heating means to prevent freezing, subclass 375
    for jacketed or insulated fluid handling apparatus and subclass 593 for
    fluid distribution systems provided with expansion chambers.


CLS 138/28
TXT Devices under subclass 27 in which the tube itself or a part thereof is
    expansible or an element in the tube is compressible to allow for the
    expansion of the fluid when it freezes.


CLS 138/30
TXT Devices under subclass 26 in the form of a chamber whose capacity is
    variable usually by means of a flexible diaphragm or sliding plunger.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 89 and 96 for
    accumulator chambers which store fluid under pressure for subsequent
    delivery to a nozzle.


CLS 138/31
TXT Devices under subclass 30 in which the chamber is of variable capacity by
    reason of a slidable piston or plunger.


CLS 138/32
TXT Devices under the class definition for thawing the frozen fluid in pipes or
    pipes having means for preventing the fluid from freezing or for preventing
    the bursting of the pipe when the fluid freezes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27+,    where the device allows for the expansion of the fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 277 for similar devices tied up
    with the structure of a water meter or its casing.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 41.5, for similar devices
    tied up with the structure of an internal combustion engine cooling system.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 59+ for fluid handling systems including
    safety devices responsive to freeze conditions, subclass 107 for drain or
    waste valves responsive to the stopping of the main line flow, subclasses
    301+ for hydrants having means for preventing freezing, subclasses 334+ for
    fluid handling devices including heating means to prevent freezing,
    subclass 375 for jacketed or insulated fluid handling apparatus and
    subclass 596 for stop and waste devices.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 134.1 for a heat exchanger with a protector.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclass 80 for similar devices tied up with a
    heating system.


CLS 138/33
TXT Devices under subclass 32 which are in the form of an electric heater.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 535 for the electric heaters, per se,
    adapted for use in thawing pipes.


CLS 138/34
TXT Devices under subclass 32 which have means for putting an antifreeze
    substance into the fluid in the pipe.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclass 190 for the addition of
    combustible, antifreeze solutions to gaseous fuels.

    252,    Compositions, for antifreeze compounds.


CLS 138/35
TXT Thawing apparatus under subclass 32 which is portable and not elsewhere
    classifiable as a stove or heater.


CLS 138/36
TXT Pipes under the class definition having means whereby they will be caused
    to leak when worn so as to need replacing and other wear indicating means.


CLS 138/37
TXT Pipes or pipe fittings under the class definition having baffles or other
    means for changing the direction or rate of flow of fluid in the pipe or
    for governing the degree of turbulence of the flowing fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclasses 180+ for conduits having
    mixing means for fuel gases.

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 324+ for baffles or heat retainers
    structurally defined for engaging pipe structure.

    137,    Fluid Handling, appropriate subclasses for processes and apparatus
    having means for controlling the flow of fluid therein and multiple valves,
    per se, and particularly subclasses 98+ for baffles employed for securing
    self-proportioning flow, subclass 505+ for pressure regulators where the
    regulation is varied by the pressure in the pipe, subclass 574 for baffles
    employed to form plural compartments for serial flow, subclasses 610+ for
    deflectors forming a flow control device at the junction of a plurality of
    flow passages.

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 212+ for similar structures in mufflers and
    sound filters.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, appropriate subclasses for valves where
    the flow may be shut off, particularly subclasses 118+ (and the search
    notes thereto) for other fluid handling devices with baffles or other
    material guide structure.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclass 92 for conduit having means to
    create whirling motion in a conveying fluid current; subclasses 155+ for
    proportional flow distributors; and subclasses 191+ for a conduit having a
    flow regulator or baffle therein, and some structural feature peculiar to
    the conveying of solids in a fluid current.


CLS 138/38
TXT Pipes under subclass 37 in which the baffle or other means is designed to
    facilitate a transfer of heat between fluids inside and outside of the pipe.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 177+ for a pipe or tubular conduit
    limited by structure on its exterior for use as a heat exchanger;
    particularly subclass 181+ for such an element with exterior fins.


CLS 138/39
TXT Pipes under subclass 37 in which the baffles or other means are designed to
    facilitate the flow of fluid in the pipe.


CLS 138/40
TXT Pipes under subclass 37 in which the means restricts the flow in the pipe,
    but does not cut off entirely.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and the indented subclasses include some
    devices disclosed for the purpose of forming a mixture or emulsion of a
    plurality of fluids but in which the claims are limited to the structure of
    the conduit and the flow restrictor.  See Class 99, Foods and Beverages:
    Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for apparatus other than a mere mixer,
    for treating foods and beverages and not elsewhere provided for.  See Class
    241, Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate subclasses
    for apparatus for forming suspensions of solids in liquids.  See Class 366,
    Agitating, subclasses 336+ for mixing devices having features additional to
    merely a conduit and flow restrictor for effecting agitation in a liquid
    flowing therethrough, and subclasses 176.1+ for a similar device including
    force applying feed means to effect emulsification.  See Class 252,
    Compositions, subclasses 302+ for processes used and apparatus for forming
    stable colloidal suspensions or emulsions not elsewhere provided for.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 511 and 527+ for restrictors tied up with
    a refrigerating system.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 707 for restrictors for protecting
    gages and claimed in combination therewith or otherwise tied up with the
    gage structure, and subclasses 861.42+, where the restrictor is tied up
    with connections to a flow meter.

    166,    Wells, subclass 91.1 for well head apparatus with chokes or beans.

    184,    Lubrication, subclasses 6+ and subclass 52 for restrictors tied up
    with a lubricating system.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 118 for the combination
    of a separator and a variable restrictor responsive to a condition,
    subclasses 418+ for a filter and flow controller combination, and
    subclasses 435+ for strainers in pipes which incidentally restrict.


CLS 138/41
TXT Pipes under subclass 40 which have a screen in the line of flow in addition
    to the restrictor.


CLS 138/42
TXT Devices under subclass 40 in which the path of flow of the fluid is
    tortuous.


CLS 138/43
TXT Devices under subclass 42 wherein the device is adjustable to vary the
    restriction.


CLS 138/44
TXT Devices under subclass 40 in which the path of flow of the fluid is
    centrally of the tube.


CLS 138/45
TXT Devices under subclass 44 wherein the restrictor is adjustable to vary the
    restriction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Photography, subclass 64 for camera diaphragms.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 408+ and 451+
    for spray nozzles having adjustable restrictions.


CLS 138/46
TXT Devices under subclass 40 in which the restrictor is adjustable to vary the
    restriction.


CLS 138/89
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to pipes or pipe
    fittings having closures or plugs, or closures and plugs limited by
    structure to use with pipes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98+,    for patches.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 286+ for bath,
    closet, and sink closures.

    89,     Ordnance, subclass 31 for plugs or other devices for closing the
    gun-muzzle or other opening in the barrel of a gun.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 360+ for closures and
    couplings for water tube boilers.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 247.11+ for liquid seals including
    access openings and closures therefor, especially subclasses 247.47 and
    247.51.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    294 and 423 for processes and apparatus for inserting a core within a tube
    in combination with a laminating step.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 75.11+ for well head closures having some fluid
    handling feature and subclasses 192+ and the subclasses there noted for
    plugs inserted into a prepositioned well conduit.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors, and Insulators, subclasses 20, 22 and 23,
    for fluid stops associated with electrical conduits, cables, end structures
    or joints.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclasses 242+ for closures for
    distillation apparatus.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 37+ for closures for bottles and jars.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses 56+, subclasses 76+ and subclasses
    98+ for closures for wooden receptacles.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 200+ for closures and plugs having a more
    general use.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclass 126.1 for couplings having an
    access opening with closure means.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 42 for an end closure for
    irrigation or drainage conduit.


CLS 138/89.1
TXT Closures under subclass 89 for pipes of the inflation stem type comprising
    an air cap which closes the end of the pipe and a dust cap which shrouds
    the air cap and a portion of the pipe.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 232+ for inflation stems combined with
    cap or closure for protecting and/or sealing the end thereof.

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclass 428 for one or both of the
    caps combined with the inflation stem and the attachment to the wheel, rim,
    felly, or tire.


CLS 138/89.2
TXT Closures under subclass 89.1 in which the air cap and dust cap are combined
    in one structure.


CLS 138/89.3
TXT Closures under subclass 89 for pipes of the inflation stem type comprising
    air caps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclass 431 for combined caps and
    deflating tools.


CLS 138/89.4
TXT Closures under subclass 89 for pipes of the inflation stem type comprising
    dust caps.


CLS 138/90
TXT Plugs under subclass 89 for pipes having provisions whereby a fluid may be
    introduced into the pipe through the plug or for the attachment of a gauge
    for the purpose of testing the pipe for leaks.


CLS 138/91
TXT Plugs under subclass 89 for pipes wherein both ends of the pipe are plugged
    by connected plugs.


CLS 138/92
TXT Closures and plugs under subclass 89 designed to close an opening in the
    side of a pipe.


CLS 138/93
TXT Plugs under subclass 89 for pipes having an inflatable member to seal
    against inside of the pipe opening.


CLS 138/94
TXT Closures and plugs under subclass 89 for the inside opening of a pipe which
    are insertable through a lateral opening in the pipe.


CLS 138/94.3
TXT Closures under subclass 94 of the type generally known as "line blinds"
    which are of platelike form.

    (1)     Note.  These devices differ from valves in that they have no
    surrounding housing to prevent leakage of fluid when the closure and seat
    are moved relative to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44+,    for line blinds combined with flow restrictors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 167+, 193+ and 326+ for
    reciprocating gate valves, and see (1) Note above.


CLS 138/94.5
TXT Closures under subclass 94.3 in which the plates are pivoted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 177+ and 301+, for pivoted
    gate valves.


CLS 138/95
TXT Closures and plugs under subclass 89, specially designed to be used with a
    return bend fitting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 360 for return bend
    fittings, for boilers combined with the connection to the tubes and the
    closures.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 135.1+ for return bend
    fittings.


CLS 138/96
TXT Devices under the class definition for protecting the ends of pipes,
    usually threaded, from damage when not in use as while being shipped or
    handled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 2.1+ and 108+ for thimbles.


CLS 138/97
TXT Processes and apparatus under the class definition for repairing leaks in
    pipes and hose and not otherwise classifiable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 15.2+ for tire repairing tools.

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 83+, particularly subclass 90 for molds
    for repairing leaks in pipes.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 154+ for a process or
    apparatus for laying a pipe or cable into a submerged or subterranean
    location; and subclass 188 for an apparatus or method for enabling
    personnel to work on a section of submerged pipeline.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 11+ for a product or preform repair or restoring means
    comprising a molding apparatus for shaping or reshaping nonmetals.


CLS 138/98
TXT Subject matter under subclass 97, relating to patches for leaky pipes or
    hose.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclasses 227+ for leak stoppers for ships.

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclasses 367+ for pneumatic tire
    patches.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 243+ for patches for metal pipe which are
    inserted through an opening in the pipe wall and having clamp members
    gripping the wall between them.


CLS 138/99
TXT Patches under subclass 98 which are applied externally of the pipe and
    usually have a clamp band encircling the pipe.


CLS 138/100
TXT Subject matter under the class definition where in joints transverse to the
    length of the pipe are staggered or in break-joint relation to other joints
    in the pipe wall make-up which are also transverse to the length of said
    pipe.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 245+ for in-site
    erected type tubular structures of longitudinally juxtaposed modules.


CLS 138/101
TXT Device under subclass 100 wherein the pipe wall comprises more than one
    layer, one layer having transverse joints that break joint relative to
    transverse joints of another layer.


CLS 138/102
TXT Device under subclass 100 wherein the pipe comprises base sections, joined
    to adjacent base sections, the joints of said sections being staggered in
    relation to joints of other sections which make up the pipe wall or parts
    thereof.


CLS 138/103
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising structure in addition
    to or combined with the wall structure of the pipe or tube.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 47 for the
    combination of a fluid conduit and an electrical conductor.


CLS 138/104
TXT Device under subclass 103 including indicating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for a wear indicator.


CLS 138/105
TXT Device under subclass 103 including a trench in which the pipe lies or is
    received.


CLS 138/106
TXT Device under subclass 103 including means externally of the pipe for
    supporting same.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111+,   for one pipe supported within another pipe or a casing, by a means
    external of said one pipe so as to form plural ducts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 80+ for a stand for supporting pipe.


CLS 138/107
TXT Device under subclass 106 wherein the pipe is suspended by the supporting
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 58+ and 65+ for a suspended support for pipe.


CLS 138/108
TXT Device under subclass 103 including means in the pipe to support a
    disparate element therein; which, per se, is subject matter for other
    classification.


CLS 138/109
TXT Device under subclass 103 having structure at an end portion thereof which
    is not other where classifiable

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89+,    for a pipe with a closure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 600+ for a pipe having at least one closed
    end.


CLS 138/110
TXT Device under subclass 103 including structure for protecting a pipe from
    kinking, being bent too abruptly, or from wear due to its coming in contact
    with other objects.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     for an end protector.


CLS 138/111
TXT Device under the class definition having a plurality of unconnected
    passageways extending completely through the pipe.


CLS 138/112
TXT Device under subclass 111 supported by spacer elements and having a duct
    encircling member which is not fully coextensive with said duct.


CLS 138/113
TXT Device under subclass 111 wherein an inner duct is surrounded by a
    coextensive duct and radially spaced therefrom by a plurality of axially
    spaced support members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for a duct having means therein to support an element which, per
    se, is subject matter for other classification.


CLS 138/114
TXT Device under subclass 111 wherein one duct lies coaxially within another
    duct.


CLS 138/115
TXT Device under subclass 111 having a longitudinally extending element therein
    which constitutes a common wall for more than one passageway.


CLS 138/116
TXT Device under subclass 115 wherein the element is separable from the duct.


CLS 138/117
TXT Device under subclass 115 comprising complementary sections, at least one
    of the sections having the common wall integral therewith.


CLS 138/118
TXT Device under the class definition wherein the pipe wall is readily moved
    transversely of its longitudinal axis.


CLS 138/118.1
TXT Device under subclass 118 in the form of a casing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 802 for a Cross-Reference
    Art Collection of shirred casings.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Articles Shaping or Treating:  Process,
    appropriate subclasses, especially 183+, for processes of making
    artificial, nonedible casings.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus:
    appropriate subclasses, for apparatus for forming artificial nonedible
    casings.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 138+ for edible casing or container and 276+ for processes of
    making edible casings.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 35 and 36 for
    an inedible food casing having a closed end.

    452,    Butchering, subclasses 21+ for a method or appartus for shirring a
    casing.


CLS 138/119
TXT Device under subclass 118 having a crease or other means in the pipe wall
    for facilitating collapsing of the pipe.


CLS 138/120
TXT Device under subclass 118 wherein the tube wall is made up of jointed,
    short and tubular, relatively movable sections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclass 78.1 for a pipe the
    sections of which constitute chain links.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 144.1+ for movable joints.


CLS 138/121
TXT Device under subclass 118 having folds or corrugations in the wall thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 174+ for a
    single or plural layer stock material product embodying a nonplanar (e.g.,
    corrugated or pleated) component.


CLS 138/122
TXT Device under subclass 121 wherein the folds are found in the shape of a
    spiral or helix.


CLS 138/123
TXT Device under subclass 118 comprising braided, interlaced, knitted or woven
    material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    148+ and 393 for processes and apparatus for forming tubes, etc., by
    laminating in combination with a braiding step.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 175+, 190,
    193, and 196+ for a single or plural layer stock material product embodying
    a component having mechanically interengaged strands or strand-portions
    (e.g., woven, knitted).

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 59+ for a coated or impregnated fabric, subclasses 181+ for a
    woven fabric, and subclasses 304+ for a knit fabric.


CLS 138/124
TXT Device under subclass 123 wherein there is more than one layer in the pipe
    wall make-up.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    for distinct layer break-joint pipe.


CLS 138/125
TXT Device under subclass 124 wherein at least one of said layers includes a
    plastic material.


CLS 138/126
TXT Device under subclass 125 wherein said material is rubber.


CLS 138/127
TXT Device under subclass 126 including metal.


CLS 138/128
TXT Device under subclass 118 having a longitudinally extending seam therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    203 and 466 for forming tubes, etc., by longitudinally bending a web to
    form a tube and laminating the edges.


CLS 138/129
TXT Device under subclass 118 wherein at least one spirally wound layer
    constitutes the wall structure or a part thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    for spirally corrugated flexible pipe.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 207 and 210+
    for a strand comprising a core with a spirally wound constituent.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for apparatus and processes for forming tubes, etc.,
    by a laminating operation and see especially subclasses 169+, 184+ and 425+
    for forming tubes etc., by a winding operation.  See also subclasses 143+
    for processes of reinforcing a flexible tube with a helical wire coil or
    wire rings.


CLS 138/130
TXT Device under subclass 129 wherein there are plural layers of material
    spirally wound in opposite directions.


CLS 138/131
TXT Device under subclass 129 wherein the spirally wound material constitutes a
    metallic core or innermost part of the pipe wall.


CLS 138/132
TXT Device under subclass 129 which is embedded in the pipe wall or enclosed
    between two or more layers of the pipe.


CLS 138/133
TXT Device under subclass 132 comprising metal.


CLS 138/134
TXT Device under subclass 129 comprising metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for distinct layer with metal.

    131,    for a metal core.

    133,    for embedded metal.


CLS 138/135
TXT Device under subclass 134 wherein a spiral edge is interlocked with an
    adjacent spiral edge.


CLS 138/136
TXT Device under subclass 135 having a packing or sealing material between the
    interlocked or clamped edges.


CLS 138/137
TXT Device under subclass 118 wherein the pipe wall is made up of more than one
    layer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    for distinct layer pipe wherein at least one of the layers is
    braided, interlaced, knitted or woven.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for processes and apparatus for forming tubes, etc.,
    with distinct layers by a laminating operation.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet, and especially subclasses 457+, for a nonstructural plural layer web
    or sheet including at least one layer of metal.


CLS 138/138
TXT Device under subclass 137 having a metallic element embedded in one of the
    layers or positioned between at least two layers.


CLS 138/139
TXT Device under subclass 137 wherein at least one of the distinct layers is a
    metal liner.

    (1)     Note.  The liner includes a metal sleeve or axially spaced metal
    elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for a metal liner in distinct layer braided, interlaced, knitted or
    woven pipe.

    131,    for a spirally wound metal core.

    134+,   for a spirally wound metal liner.


CLS 138/140
TXT Device under the class definition having more than one layer in the pipe
    wall make-up.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    for distinct layer pipe wherein the transverse joint of one layer
    breaks joint with the transverse joint of another layer.

    124+,   for a distinct layer pipe wherein at least one layer is braided,
    interlaced, knitted or woven.

    137+,   for a flexible distinct layer pipe.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for a stock material product including a coating, impregnation or bonded
    preformed layer, especially subclasses 411+ and 615+ for nonmetallic and
    metallic composites, respectively, defined in terms of the composition of
    their components.


CLS 138/141
TXT Device under subclass 140 wherein at least two contacting layers are bonded
    to each other, by an intermediate layer.


CLS 138/142
TXT Device under subclass 141 wherein the bonding means is a braze, solder or
    weld.


CLS 138/143
TXT Device under subclass 141 wherein at least one of the contacting layers is
    metal.


CLS 138/144
TXT Device under subclass 141 wherein at least one layer is spirally wound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    169+, 184+ and 425+ for processes and apparatus for forming tubes, etc., by
    a winding operation in combination with a laminating step.


CLS 138/145
TXT Device under subclass 140 wherein the pipe has one or more layers of
    material deposited thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for flexible distinct layer pipe including metal.

    134,    for flexible, spirally wound, metal pipe.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses for
    plastic coating composition.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 400+ for a nominal pipe made of
    metallic stock material appropriate to that subclass, e.g., heat reheated,
    etc.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, appropriate subclasses for a
    nominal pipe claimed in terms of the alloy or metallic composition from
    which it is made.


CLS 138/146
TXT Device under subclass 145 wherein at least one coated layer is of a
    material different from the material of another coated layer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129+,   for flexible pipe spirally wound.


CLS 138/147
TXT Device under subclass 140 wherein mechanical means, such as clips, clamps,
    bolts, rivets, etc., are used to hold one layer within or on another layer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 594 for
    composite metallic stock having plural layers discontinuously bonded, e.g.,
    by spot welds or mechanical fasteners.


CLS 138/148
TXT Device under subclass 140 wherein at least one layer is spaced from an
    adjacent layer to form an enclosing chamber therearound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for radially spaced plural ducts.


CLS 138/149
TXT Device under subclass 140 wherein there is an intermediate layer of
    insulation material.


CLS 138/150
TXT Device under subclass 140 wherein at least one layer has a spiral seam
    therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129+,   for spirally seamed flexible pipe.

    144,    for a spirally seamed, bonded, plural layer pipe.


CLS 138/151
TXT Device under subclass 140 wherein at least one layer has a longitudinally
    extending seam therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128,    for longitudinally seamed flexible pipe.


CLS 138/152
TXT Device under subclass 151 wherein the edges of at least one layer are
    spaced from each other and another layer has a part thereof extending into
    said space.


CLS 138/153
TXT Device under subclass 140 wherein one of said layers is reinforced.


CLS 138/154
TXT Device under the class definition having a spirally extending seam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129+,   for flexible pipe having a spiral seam.

    144,    for a distinct layer pipe wherein at least one layer is spirally
    wound.

    150,    for a distinct layer wherein at least one layer has a spiral seam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 592 for metallic
    stock which is helical or has a helical component.


CLS 138/155
TXT Device under the class definition wherein the pipe wall is made up of short
    tubular sections which are rigidly joined to each other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, appropriate subclasses, for similar
    structure involving in the joint the internal wall structure of the tube.


CLS 138/156
TXT Device under the class definition having a longitudinally extending seam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128,    for a flexible pipe with a longitudinal seam.

    151+,   for a distinct layer pipe wherein one layer is longitudinally
    seamed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 677+ for containers having a longitudinally
    extending seam.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 583 for a
    metallic intermediate article held together by bonding at the edges only.


CLS 138/157
TXT Device under subclass 156 having more than one longitudinal seam so as to
    comprise longitudinal sections which are secured one to another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for sectional break-joint pipe.

    117,    for sectional plural duct pipe.

    155,    for joined sections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 101 for removable
    wall electric conduits.


CLS 138/158
TXT Device under subclass 157 wherein said longitudinal sections have distinct
    mechanical means, cooperating with the pipe wall, for securing said
    sections together.


CLS 138/159
TXT Device under subclass 158 having bolts, nails, rivets or screws securing
    them together.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclass 410 for a bolt or screw utilized
    to form a joint.


CLS 138/160
TXT Device under subclass 159 extending radially through the pipe wall.


CLS 138/161
TXT Device under subclass 158 comprising an external element encircling or
    partially encircling the pipe.


CLS 138/162
TXT Device under subclass 157 wherein there is a tongue in one section which
    passes through a slot in an adjacent section to secure said sections
    together.


CLS 138/163
TXT Device under subclass 157 wherein at least one of said longitudinal
    sections has a bent over lip or flange.


CLS 138/164
TXT Device under subclass 156 including packing to prevent leakage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 681 for a container having a longitudinally
    extending seam with a packing.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 602+ for a static contact seal intended for use on a
    pipe, conduit, or cable.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 335+ for a pipe coupling with
    a packing.


CLS 138/165
TXT Device under subclass 156 having a wedge locking together the adjacent
    edges thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclass 421 for a joint including a
    wedge type clamp means.


CLS 138/166
TXT Device under subclass 156 wherein there is a tongue or projection received
    in a slot to lock together adjacent edges of the seamed pipe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162,    for tongue and slot locking means in a sectional conduit.


CLS 138/167
TXT Device under subclass 156 having different structural means holding
    together adjacent longitudinal edges of the seamed pipe.


CLS 138/168
TXT Device under subclass 156 wherein the adjacent longitudinal edges of the
    pipe have hook-like formations which interlock to form a seam.


CLS 138/169
TXT Device under subclass 156 wherein the seam forming structure changes its
    character somewhere along the length of the seam.


CLS 138/170
TXT Device under subclass 156 wherein the seam is permanently formed or locked.


CLS 138/171
TXT Device under subclass 170 wherein the forming or locking means is a braze,
    solder or weld.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144,    for brazed, soldered or welded distinct layer pipe.


CLS 138/172
TXT Device under the class definition wherein the wall structure of the pipe is
    reinforced either by the shape of the wall or by at least one element
    applied to said wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153,    for a pipe having more than one layer in the pipe wall make-up, one
    of said layers being reinforced.


CLS 138/173
TXT Device under subclass 172 wherein the reinforcement is in the form of
    corrugations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121+,   for corrugated flexible pipe.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 174+ for a
    single or plural layer stock material product embodying a nonplanar (e.g.,
    corrugated, pleated) component.


CLS 138/174
TXT Device under subclass 172 wherein the pipe wall is reinforced by an
    embedded element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146,    for a tube that is coated on one side with a coating material that
    is different from the coating material on the other side of said tube.


CLS 138/175
TXT Device under subclass 174 wherein said wall is clay, concrete or masonry.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    particularly subclasses 30, 31+, 228, and 603+ .


CLS 138/176
TXT Device under subclass 175 wherein the reinforcement is tensioned to
    prestress the clay, concrete or masonry.


CLS 138/177
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to the make-up of the
    pipe wall and not otherwise classifiable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses for the
    composition of plastic pipe.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, appropriate subclasses for the
    composition of metal pipe.


CLS 138/178
TXT Subject matter under the class definition not classifiable in any of the
    other subclasses.


CLS 139/
TTL TEXTILES:  WEAVING

CLS 139/
TXT The manufacture of fabrics having one set of threads arranged transversely
    to another set and interlaced therewith, each thread of one set lying above
    some and below the remaining threads of the other set.  Does not include
    the diagonal arrangement produced by braiding.


CLS 139/1
TXT Inventions falling within this class, but not more specifically provided
    for.


CLS 139/2
TXT Means for knotting or intertwining an extra set of threads with either the
    warp or weft at the fell of the cloth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    452     and 453, for analogous methods of color change.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 80.01+ for an apparatus for inserting and
    locking pile tufting in a fabric by means of a stitching operation, and
    subclass 475.23  for a corresponding method.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    72 and 147+ for pile tufting and weaving processes, respectively, when
    combined with a laminating step.


CLS 139/3
TXT The tufts are intertwined with the warp.


CLS 139/4
TXT The tuft passes around two threads, at least one end projecting up between
    them.


CLS 139/5
TXT The warp threads are given a lateral movement during the operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     and indented subclasses, for other warp traversing.


CLS 139/6
TXT The tuft-yarn packages are moved bodily to bring about tuft change.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.


CLS 139/7
TXT The tuft-yarn packages are moved bodily to bring about tuft change.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332,    for analogous mechanisms that support long pattern chains.


CLS 139/8
TXT Includes means for supplying the knotting or intertwining apparatus with
    yarn.


CLS 139/9
TXT Limited to the means for supplying the knotting or intertwining apparatus
    with yarn.


CLS 139/10
TXT Limited to a single unit for supplying the tuft yarn.


CLS 139/11
TXT Looms which depart from what may be regarded as a standard type.  A
    standard loom is one in which the warp passes horizontally through the same
    and in which the warp and weft manipulating mechanisms are not peculiarly
    adapted to cooperate with each other, but either one might be used with
    various types of the other.  Hand looms are placed in this group.


CLS 139/14
TXT The warp spools or warp ends are moved bodily to open the shed instead of
    moving a portion of the threads between the warp spool or warp ends and the
    fell of the cloth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for similar sheds that are noncircular.


CLS 139/15
TXT The undulatory closing of the shed behind the shuttle propels the shuttle
    or else the forward movement of the pointed shuttle forces the shed to open.


CLS 139/16
TXT The warp heddles move in a plane transverse to the tube being woven.


CLS 139/17
TXT Looms having sheds formed by moving the warp spools or ends bodily instead
    of moving a portion of the threads between the warp spools or warp ends and
    the fell of the cloth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for similar sheds in a circular loom.


CLS 139/17.5
TXT The shed is open at the back on certain picks, thereby permitting weft
    inserting means to project into the shed from the rear and travel across
    the same, in addition to regular closed-back shed weaving.


CLS 139/18
TXT The harnesses are moved in horizontal planes.


CLS 139/19
TXT Ears of corn constitute the weft.


CLS 139/20
TXT The warp bank is split into three or more groups, so formed into two or
    more sheds, which may converge to a common fell to form a single fabric or
    to more than one fell to form a plurality of fabrics.


CLS 139/21
TXT Used for weaving fabric having loops or ends standing out from the surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     and indented subclasses, for single- shed pile.


CLS 139/22
TXT The shuttle is longer than the width of the warp and is always connected
    with an actuating means which does not enter the shed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135,    for single-shed looms of this type.


CLS 139/23
TXT The shuttle is driven through pinions acting on a rack attached to the
    shuttle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136     and 137, for single-shed rack and pinion shuttle motions.


CLS 139/24
TXT The warp is fed through the loom at a rate that varies with different picks
    to produce special effects in the fabric.


CLS 139/25
TXT Two warp supplies are employed, a few picks of weft are deposited a short
    distance from the fell of the cloth, these picks are then forced up to the
    fell with the warp supplies under different tension, whereby the weft
    slides over one of the warps and the other warp is forced up in loops.


CLS 139/26
TXT Limited to means for forcing the weft up to the fell of the cloth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188,    and the subclasses indented thereunder, especially subclass 190.


CLS 139/27
TXT The peculiar terry effect is produced by a special motion of the reed
    rather than the entire lay.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189     and 191, for similar reeds not used in terry.


CLS 139/28
TXT Heddle eyes are not employed, but members merely contact with the warp
    strands and push them out of line.  Usually operates on stiff resilient
    material.


CLS 139/29
TXT Looms that differ from the conventional power loom by being hand driven,
    usually without any hand crank.

    (1)     Note.  Some are almost entirely automatic, and some are mere
    fragments of looms in which nearly all the operations are accomplished
    manually.


CLS 139/30
TXT The harnesses are directly pushed by rigid members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57      and 58.


CLS 139/31
TXT A cam is used to actuate the push members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32      and 58.


CLS 139/32
TXT The harnesses are actuated by cams.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31      and 79.


CLS 139/33
TXT The shedding mechanism is propelled directly by hand or foot and is not
    driven by mechanical connection to some other part of the loom.


CLS 139/33.5
TXT Peculiarly adapted for weaving over a hole in a fabric.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 100 for related devices which do not
    have means for controlling interlacing of threads in definite order.


CLS 139/34
TXT Frames, usually rectangular for holding warp strands and involving some
    means peculiar to weaving.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclasses 151+ for thread frames that do
    no more than hold an array of threads.


CLS 139/35
TXT Supplying tensioning, shedding, in some instances traversing, or otherwise
    handling the warp threads until they reach the fell of the cloth.


CLS 139/36
TXT Means for applying a fluid to the warp threads while in the loom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for coating apparatus,
    per se, and see section III of the class definition of Class 118 for the
    line between Class 118 and Class 139.


CLS 139/37
TXT Means for manipulating the warp threads so that they will stand out from
    the surface of the fabric in the form of loops or ends.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      and indented subclasses for pile that is not formed from warp or
    weft threads.

    116.5   and 116.6, for pile produced from weft threads, and 21.


CLS 139/38
TXT Hooks near the fell of the cloth by which part of the warp threads are
    caused to stand out until the beat-up occurs.


CLS 139/39
TXT Wires for causing the warp threads to stand out are woven in as wefts, but
    only allowed to remain in the fabric temporarily.


CLS 139/40
TXT Limited to means for moving and guiding the wires.


CLS 139/41
TXT Mechanism which thrusts the wires end-wise into the shed and pulls the
    wires out of the woven fabric, with means for otherwise manipulating the
    wires.


CLS 139/42
TXT Limited to the means for thrusting the wires into the shed and pulling them
    out.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141,    431, 437, 440, and 443, for similar actuating mechanism that
    propels needles, tweezer sticks, and shuttle push rods.


CLS 139/43
TXT Any cutting arrangement other than a knife on the end of the pile wire for
    cutting the loops.


CLS 139/44
TXT Limited to the structure of the wires.


CLS 139/45
TXT Means for placing oil on the wires.


CLS 139/46
TXT The pile loops are formed by cross weaving or traversing the threads over
    wires which lie parallel to the warp threads, which wires do not
    participate in the take-up advancement and end a few picks beyond the fell
    of the cloth.  The wires may or may not have a knife at the end to cut the
    loops.


CLS 139/47
TXT That type of longitudinal wire in which the forward end of the wire is fast
    to the frame of the loom.

    (1)     Note.  This type necessarily carries cutting knives, otherwise the
    loops could not pass the anchorage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116.6,  for similar devices for weft pile.


CLS 139/48
TXT Means for causing warp threads to be moved transversely.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.


CLS 139/49
TXT Means for traversing warps comprising needle-eye heddles placed in front of
    the reed.


CLS 139/50
TXT Special harness mechanism causes parts of the warp threads to cross others
    and hold them in that position until the pick has been laid.


CLS 139/51
TXT Shedding mechanism having a loop running through a special heddle eye and
    around the thread to be crossed, said loop being so placed as to pull the
    thread sidewise past some other warp threads.


CLS 139/52
TXT Limited to the loop and eye as an element.


CLS 139/53
TXT The heddle eyes are placed in the ends of rigid rods, the same resembling
    sewing-machine needles.  After these needles are withdrawn from the shed
    and before reinsertion they are shogged sidewise.


CLS 139/54
TXT Cross weaving placed only at the edge of the fabric for selvage purposes or
    in the body of the fabric where it is intended to slit the same.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55.1,   455 and 456, for independent harness actuating selvage warps.

    117,    for special treatment of weft selvages, and 430+.


CLS 139/55.1
TXT Apparatus under subclass 35 which separates the warp threads into two
    layers with a weft receiving space therebetween and which periodically
    moves warp threads from one layer to the other.


CLS 139/56
TXT Means to interrupt the driving connection between the shedding mechanism
    and other moving loom parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156     and 328, for clutches and disconnecting means.


CLS 139/57
TXT The harnesses are directly pushed by rigid members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30.


CLS 139/58
TXT Cams are employed for moving the rigid members in both directions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31      and 81.


CLS 139/59
TXT Peculiarly adapted for independent control of individual threads.  There
    are laterally-movable members harnessed to the threads adapted to engage a
    vibrating actuator and a bank of needles each connected to one of the
    laterally-movable members and with their ends in position to be engaged by
    a pattern which may be reciprocated to be pressed against them.


CLS 139/60
TXT The actuator is a trap board having holes and slits therein, the
    laterally-movable members being knotted cords and the pattern exercising
    its control to cause the knots to catch in the slits.


CLS 139/61
TXT Two or more pattern cylinders control a single set of hooks, as each hook
    has feelers which extend to the several cylinders.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322,    for details of the cylinders and feelers alone.


CLS 139/62
TXT An auxiliary pattern controls entire groups or rows of hooks independent of
    or in opposition to the indications of the main pattern.


CLS 139/63
TXT A jacquard so arranged that extra rests or knife-edges will keep any hooks
    from lowering between two successive picks.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72.


CLS 139/64
TXT The threads move in opposite directions from a central point when the shed
    is split open.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69.


CLS 139/65
TXT Each harness cord is attached to two hooks, the hooks of a given pair being
    actuated by oppositely-moving griff bars.


CLS 139/66
TXT A pattern-controlled shedding motion for actuating heddle frames.


CLS 139/67
TXT The power is supplied by a constantly- reciprocating knife bar, and the
    pattern determines which one of a number of hooks shall be caught on the
    bar.


CLS 139/68
TXT Uses pattern cards that require to be brought up to the feelers with a
    right-line motion.


CLS 139/69
TXT The threads move in opposite directions from a central point when the shed
    is split open.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64.


CLS 139/70
TXT The griff bars move in an arc of a circle.


CLS 139/71
TXT Two griffs are constantly reciprocating in opposite directions.


CLS 139/72
TXT Latches keep the heddles in open position when change is not desired.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63.


CLS 139/73
TXT Motion is readily transmitted from the griff bars to the heddle frames, but
    not in the opposite direction.


CLS 139/74
TXT A two-arm lever is attached directly to two hooks and so arranged that when
    the hooks are reciprocated in opposite directions by the griff bars the
    harness attached to its middle point will remain stationary.


CLS 139/75
TXT A means for bringing all the harness to the same level when the loom is
    stopped, so that repairs to the warp threads can be made.


CLS 139/76
TXT The actuator to which the harness-moving members are connected at the call
    of the pattern rotates.


CLS 139/77
TXT The actuators are toothed drums and the harnesses are moved by gears which
    are moved edgewise by the pattern for engagement with the toothed drums.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180.


CLS 139/78
TXT The pattern is strong enough to actuate the harness by means contacting
    directly with the pattern.


CLS 139/79
TXT The harnesses are actuated by cams.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for similar shedding in a hand loom.


CLS 139/80
TXT There is means to control the arrangement of the cams either automatically
    or by hand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    156 and 320, for other axial-shift cams.


CLS 139/81
TXT The harness is positively moved both ways.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58.


CLS 139/82
TXT Limited to connections between the shedding motions and the warp threads.


CLS 139/83
TXT Two trains of transmission extend from the shedding motion to both the tops
    and bottoms of the harness frames.


CLS 139/84
TXT A single train of transmission extends from the shedding motion to the top
    only of the harness frame.


CLS 139/85
TXT The transmission from the jacquard motion to the heddle eyes.


CLS 139/86
TXT The guides which position the harness cords over the proper warp threads.


CLS 139/87
TXT Means for transmitting motion from one harness frame to another independent
    of the shedding motion.


CLS 139/88
TXT Means for connecting the transmission straps to the harness frames.


CLS 139/89
TXT Springs or their equivalent to pull heddles in the reverse direction to
    that imparted by the shedding motion.


CLS 139/90
TXT Weights used to pull down individual heddle eyes.


CLS 139/91
TXT Groups of heddles supported from bars in order to move in unison.


CLS 139/92
TXT Main bars support smaller rods to which the heddles are attached.


CLS 139/93
TXT The elements which directly engage with the warp threads and past which the
    threads move in shedding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    368.


CLS 139/94
TXT A member separate from the rest of the heddle is used in forming the
    thread-engaging eye.


CLS 139/95
TXT Heddles constructed of twisted wires.


CLS 139/96
TXT Heddles constructed of a strip which has been perforated to form the heddle
    eye.


CLS 139/97
TXT Advancing the warp threads properly arranged and tensioned to the
    interweaving mechanism of the loom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.


CLS 139/98
TXT Means inserted in the plane of the warp threads for holding the juxtaposed
    threads apart to prevent entangling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclass .48 for apparatus and
    processes for separating or aligning substantially parallel continuous
    filaments before stabilizing such filaments.


CLS 139/99
TXT Means for paying out the warp threads and means for taking up the fabric,
    having part of their mechanism in common.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    and indented subclasses, and 304, and the indented subclasses.


CLS 139/100
TXT Means for paying out warp with sufficient retarded speed to keep the warp
    threads under tension while they are being woven.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99.


CLS 139/101
TXT There are a plurality of warp banks with a separate let-off for each.


CLS 139/102
TXT The warp threads are used in a pile fabric.


CLS 139/103
TXT The rate of let-off is determined by the strain on each of the warps.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109     and 110.


CLS 139/104
TXT The let-off is applied to the threads after they have left their carriers
    and not to the carriers themselves.


CLS 139/105
TXT Means for varying the rate of feed.


CLS 139/106
TXT The rate of turning of the warp beam is in increased as the amount of warp
    left thereon decreases.


CLS 139/107
TXT Means contacting with the surface of the warp on the beam determines the
    rate at which the beam turns.


CLS 139/108
TXT A positive actuator is controlled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310.


CLS 139/109
TXT The rate is determined by the strain on the warp threads.


CLS 139/110
TXT A positive actuator is controlled.


CLS 139/111
TXT Means actuated by a loom part for preventing let-off usually when the stop
    motion detects a weft failure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    314.


CLS 139/112
TXT Actuated at the time of beat-up.


CLS 139/113
TXT Means to facilitate manual movement of the warp back and forth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    316     and 328, for clutches and disconnective means.


CLS 139/114
TXT Means, usually serving as a back rest, pressing against the warp threads
    and capable of movement to maintain desirable tension notwithstanding the
    fluctuations in warp tension produced by the shedding and beat-up.


CLS 139/115
TXT There is a connection with a moving part of the loom to decrease the
    tension at the proper time.


CLS 139/116.1
TXT WEFT MANIPULATION:
    Apparatus or method under the class definition for laying threads known as
    the weft across a series of substantially parallel threads known as the
    warp, and wherein (a) the warp threads are successively divided between an
    upper plane and a lower plane, thereby forming sheds, and (b) a weft thread
    is passed through and laid into each shed.


CLS 139/116.2
TXT Means for withdrawing defective weft:
    Apparatus under subclass 116.1 comprising a mechanism for withdrawing a
    weft, which has been detected as being faulty, from a shed.


CLS 139/116.5
TXT Means for manipulating the weft threads so that they will stand out from
    the surface of the fabric in the form of loops or ends.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for weft pile produced in multished looms.

    37,     and indented subclasses, for pile produced from warp threads.


CLS 139/116.6
TXT The weft is laid over wires which are parallel with the warp, the front
    ends of the wires being fast to the frame of the loom.

    (1)     Note.  This type usually carries cutting knives.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for similar devices for warp pile.


CLS 139/117
TXT The length of the weft in any one shed being appreciably greater or less
    than the width of the completed fabric.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for cross-woven selvage.


CLS 139/118
TXT The weft extends appreciably farther than the width of the warp, thereby
    projecting beyond the edge of the fabric when completed.


CLS 139/119
TXT There is means for inserting shuttles into and withdrawing them from a shed
    at points intermediate the edges of the shed for the purpose of depositing
    weft between said points.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135,    for analogous ways of propelling small shuttles.


CLS 139/120
TXT Includes the mechanism for alternating the main-shuttle flight with the
    action of the swivel shuttles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     156 and 320, for axial-shift cams.

    137,    for ways of raising and lowering small shuttles.


CLS 139/121
TXT Swivel shuttles in which the positive motion drive consists of racks
    attached to the shuttles and pinions to drive the same.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136,    and indented subclasses.


CLS 139/133
TXT Means for propelling the weft-thread-carrying members through the shed so
    constructed that the thread-carrying member may remain at either side of
    the shed while the shed changes.


CLS 139/134
TXT Means employing a magnet for propelling a shuttle.


CLS 139/135
TXT The shuttle is longer than the width of the warp and is always connected
    with an actuating means which does not enter the shed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22      and 119, for analogous motions.

    143,    for fly-shuttle arrangements for weaving fabrics edge to edge.


CLS 139/136
TXT The drive is through pinions acting on a rack attached to the shuttle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23      and 121.


CLS 139/137
TXT Employing a plurality of shuttles for use with the same set of warp threads
    for the purpose of changing the weft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23      and 120, for ways of raising and lowering small shuttles.

    171,    and indented subclasses, for weft- change means for the ordinary
    fly- shuttle loom.


CLS 139/138
TXT Limited to the means for driving the pinions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121.


CLS 139/139
TXT The shuttle is at one or the other of its ends connected with an actuating
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141.


CLS 139/140
TXT There is a single fabric, and therefore a single shuttle.


CLS 139/141
TXT The shuttle is always connected at one or the other of its ends with an
    actuating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     42, 139, 440+ and 445, for mechanisms that include actuating means
    that could be used for actuating a shuttle push rod.


CLS 139/142
TXT Means for imparting to a shuttle sufficient momentum to carry it through
    the shed.


CLS 139/143
TXT Means to enable fly shuttles to be projected through two or more sheds
    placed in alignment (edge to edge).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135,    and indented subclasses, for positive shuttle motions where fabrics
    are woven edge to edge.


CLS 139/144
TXT The impulse is caused by air pressure.


CLS 139/145
TXT The impulse is caused by releasing a spring that has been placed under
    tension.


CLS 139/146
TXT A shuttle-propelling stick is mounted on the beat-up framework instead of a
    stationary part of the loom.


CLS 139/147
TXT A bell crank rocks about a horizontal pivot, one end being connected to the
    picker stick and the other being actuated by the picker cam.


CLS 139/148
TXT The power is transmitted to the stick through a means which is part of or
    forms a socket for the lower part of the stick.


CLS 139/149
TXT The construction of the pivot of or support for the stick.  Often includes
    means to give the top of the stick a straight-line motion.


CLS 139/150
TXT The bottom of the foot comprises a curved rolling surface.


CLS 139/151
TXT A straight pull member for connecting the picker stick with the rest of the
    motion.


CLS 139/152
TXT The member being supported from the stick foot rather than from the stick
    directly.


CLS 139/153
TXT A substantially U-shaped loop of flat material adapted to pass around the
    picker stick and be connected to the lug stick. They are designed to be
    used on standard looms interchangeably.


CLS 139/154
TXT Means for keeping the strap from sliding down the stick.


CLS 139/155
TXT Means to place the shuttle away from the picker, so that the point will not
    catch in the picker when the shuttle is shifted for purposes of weft change
    or the like.

    (1)     Note.  Compare with this class, subclass 252.


CLS 139/156
TXT Means to disengage some part of the picker-actuating mechanism, so that the
    shuttle motion on that side of the loom will not act.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     119, 120, and 320, for axial shift cams, and 225.

    182,    for supporting instrumentalities for mechanisms requiring
    disconnecting to prevent box-change smash.


CLS 139/157
TXT The construction of the bar for actuating the picker, the picker being
    mounted on or connected to the same.


CLS 139/158
TXT A rod on which the picker slides.  Not used in all looms.


CLS 139/159
TXT The members which contact directly with the ends of the shuttle to propel
    it.


CLS 139/160
TXT Those pickers which are adapted to slide on spindles.


CLS 139/161
TXT Means adapted to contact with the picker or picker stick and retard the
    same.


CLS 139/162
TXT The checks are so arranged as to be engaged at a point remote from the
    shuttle boxes or are connected to some part of the loom in such a way as to
    have their action modified.


CLS 139/163
TXT The resistance of one surface on another is employed as a checking action.


CLS 139/164
TXT One of the rubbing surfaces is the picker or picker stick or a part bodily
    carried thereby.


CLS 139/165
TXT The movement of one of the surfaces in checking in one direction leaves
    that surface in position for checking in the opposite direction.


CLS 139/166
TXT Checking by impact against material other than metal springs.


CLS 139/167
TXT Checking by impact against the resilience of springs.


CLS 139/168
TXT The blow is received by a strap stretched at right angles to the path of
    the blow.


CLS 139/169
TXT The check having a pivoted impact member extending into the path of the
    stick or picker.


CLS 139/170
TXT There is an impact member with straight-line motion extending into the path
    of the stick or picker.


CLS 139/170.3
TXT Means under subclass 116 for preventing inactive weft threads from being
    drawn into the shed simultaneously with the active weft during the
    operation of multiple-shuttle looms.

    (1)     Note.  Such devices, sometimes called filling locks or sideline
    eliminators, commonly function to maintain the length of inactive weft
    extending from its shuttle in a position in which it cannot be contacted by
    the active weft or shuttle.

    (2)     Note. While devices which are mounted near the fell (as on the
    breast beam or temple support) may exert little more restraint on the
    inactive weft than that imposed by such weft's attachment to the fabric,
    they are included in this and indented subclasses since they are most
    frequently found in conjunction with inactive weft cutters (in which case
    they supply the support and restraint which can no longer be provided by
    the fabric itself) and since the additional function performed by those
    such devices not associated with cutters is the further removal of the
    inactive weft from the path of the active shuttle.  (See patent 2,219,794
    to Turner in subclass 170.6 indented hereunder).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184,    for multiple shuttle boxes, per se.


CLS 139/170.4
TXT Apparatus under subclass 170.3 provided with additional means for severing
    the inactive weft between its shuttle and the selvage of the fabric being
    woven.

    (1)     Note.  Cutters associated with inactive-filling restrainers often
    are mounted jointly with the loom temples.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263+,   for weft end cutters associated with filling replenishing mechanism.

    302+,   for loom-mounted selvage trimmers, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclass 10.4 for cutters not mounted
    on a loom and adapted to sever weft loops floating along the selvage of
    fabric woven on multiple-shuttle looms.


CLS 139/170.6
TXT Apparatus under subclass 170.3 in which the functioning of the restrainer
    or restrainers with respect to any particular weft is related to the
    position, relative to the shuttle race, of the shuttle box holding the
    package of such weft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171+,   for box change motions for multiple-shuttle looms.


CLS 139/170.7
TXT Apparatus under subclass 170.6 comprising flexible strand or strand-like
    members disposed substantially parallel to the warps of the fabric being
    woven but outside the selvage thereof, and provided with means for raising
    and lowering such members for the purpose of disposing the inactive wefts
    above or below the path of travel of the active shuttle.

    (1)     Note.  When the strand member employed is taken from the loom warp
    supply (later to be returned thereto for weaving into the fabric) it is
    referred to as a displaced warp.  Strand or strandlike restraining members
    which are extraneous to the fabric being woven are known as dummy warps.


CLS 139/171
TXT Means for moving a set of multiple shuttle boxes to bring the desired one
    into picking position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      126, 127 and 137, for color change and weft change other than for
    fly-shuttle mechanism.

    184,    for the structure of the boxes.


CLS 139/172
TXT The boxes being arranged to move in a circular path.


CLS 139/173
TXT The power means moves to and fro and transmits motion to a wheel by
    engaging the wheel at various points along its periphery.


CLS 139/174
TXT The actuator and wheel are connected by gear teeth.


CLS 139/175
TXT A member constantly moving to and fro is adapted to selectively engage
    members to be moved thereby.


CLS 139/176
TXT When the amount of movement given the engaged member is not always the same.


CLS 139/177
TXT The engageable member has a series of notches or steps any one of which may
    be caused to be caught and carried along with the actuator.


CLS 139/178
TXT The pattern causes selective engagement between a gear and a rotating
    actuator by shifting a part of or the entire gear or a jaw clutch forming
    part of the gear.


CLS 139/179
TXT The part moved to cause engagement is shifted axially.


CLS 139/180
TXT The actuator and actuated members are gears so arranged that
    pattern-selective engagement can take place by the displacement of the
    selected gear bodily in a radial or a radial or edgewise direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77.


CLS 139/181
TXT Means for modifying and transmitting the motion produced by some of the
    above pattern-controlled mechanism and capable of being interchangeably
    used with different types.


CLS 139/182
TXT Devices upon which the boxes rest which are connected to and adapted to be
    raised or lowered by the various motions classified above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156,    for means to protect the box-change mechanism against smash.


CLS 139/183
TXT Receptacles at the ends of the lay to receive and hold the shuttle while
    not in flight.


CLS 139/184
TXT A shuttle box containing a plurality of shuttle compartments, so that by
    moving a different compartment into the picking position different shuttles
    can be employed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156,    for means to prevent smashes in changing these boxes.

    171,    and the subclasses indented thereunder, for means to move the boxes.


CLS 139/185
TXT Means carried by the shuttle box for engaging directly with the shuttle and
    adapted to retard the shuttle on its entry.


CLS 139/186
TXT Means actuated by the entrance of the shuttle into the box for throwing a
    checking means into operation.


CLS 139/187
TXT Action of the check against the shuttle is relieved at the time the shuttle
    is picked from the box.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    347.


CLS 139/188
TXT Means which forces the weft thread into place against the fell of the
    cloth; usually consists of a comb or reed properly held and actuated and
    often includes a shelf on which a fly shuttle can slide.


CLS 139/189
TXT Reeds which will become detached or unlocked from the shuttle raceway in
    case the shuttle is trapped between the reed and fell of the cloth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for similar structure used in terry looms.


CLS 139/190
TXT The mechanism for imparting the to-and-fro motion to the lay or beat-up.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for special motions used in terry weaving.


CLS 139/191
TXT Reeds that have a beat-up motion independent of or in addition to that of
    the shuttle raceway.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for similar structure used in terry looms.


CLS 139/192
TXT A comb located between the shedding mechanism and the fell of the cloth,
    the teeth of which extend or may be inserted through the warp threads in
    the shed area for the purpose of moving the weft thread against the fell of
    the cloth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for very unusual traversing reeds.

    48,     for converging reeds.


CLS 139/193
TXT Means placed adjacent the path of the shuttle to prevent hitting the
    operator if the shuttle flies out.


CLS 139/194
TXT Means for applying tension to the weft and not carried by the shuttle.


CLS 139/195
TXT Means other than selvage warp thread for holding the loop of weft by the
    shuttle until the beat-up occurs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    430+.


CLS 139/196.1
TXT Device under subclass 116 comprising means which carries a weft thread
    through an open shed which means is not attached to its propelling
    apparatus.


CLS 139/196.2
TXT Device under subclass 196.1 wherein the shuttle is provided with a clamping
    or guide means which engages a weft thread and draws it through an open
    shed from a stationary supply located adjacent the shed.


CLS 139/196.3
TXT Device under subclass 196.1 wherein the shuttle is adapted to carry a
    length of weft thread sufficient for only one pass through the shed, which
    weft may or may not be spool carried.


CLS 139/196.4
TXT Device under subclass 196.1 limited to the structure of the tip portion of
    shuttles.


CLS 139/197
TXT It is found that many of the patents in the group of "Shuttles" cover
    merely elements found in the interior of what may be considered the
    standard type of "fly" shuttle, in which a bobbin or skewer holds a package
    of thread supported near one end of the shuttle cavity, the thread to be
    pulled off endwise toward the other end and out through an eye in the side
    of the shuttle near the delivery end, the outside of the shuttle being
    smooth and tapered at both ends.  Inventions which are not details of this
    so-called standard type are placed in this group of shuttle types.


CLS 139/198
TXT Wherein the supply is engaged on the exterior instead of carried by a
    spindle.


CLS 139/199
TXT Shuttles in which an arch containing the thread outlet eye extends from the
    side of the shuttle next the fell of the cloth, so as to lay the weft near
    the fell; usually used on narrow-ware shuttles.


CLS 139/200
TXT The thread is fed out from a rotating bobbin, and the tension is created by
    a friction brake applied to any part of the bobbin, which part may be the
    wound-thread surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 421+, 422+, and 156+
    for tensioning a running material.


CLS 139/201
TXT Tension is created by leading the thread over a zigzag path with several
    sharp bends, these bends being in addition to those that are needed to
    carry the thread from the cop or bobbin to the outlet eye.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    214,    and indented subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 541+ and 153 for a
    tensioning a running material.


CLS 139/202
TXT Shuttles the weight of which is supported on rolls as they make their
    flight across the lay.


CLS 139/203
TXT Means carried by the shuttle adapted to be affected by a change of warp
    thread or weft thread conditions for actuating a signal or a train of
    mechanism for stopping or controlling the loom action.


CLS 139/204
TXT Means affected by presence of warp threads in the shed.


CLS 139/205
TXT Means affected by the substantial exhaustion of the weft-thread package
    carried by the shuttle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    275     and 371, for the combination with stopping means and replenishing
    means, respectively.


CLS 139/206
TXT Means for holding the thread supply while it is being delivered in the
    usual type of shuttle in which the weft is drawn from a nonrotating thread
    package by unwinding from the exterior of the same.


CLS 139/207
TXT Shuttles and cop carriers so constructed that the cop with its carrier can
    be changed by mechanical means while the shuttle remains in the loom.


CLS 139/208
TXT The support is pivotally attached, so that the end may be swung out of the
    shuttle cavity to permit change of bobbins.


CLS 139/209
TXT Spindles having the pivoted end so constructed that it is unlocked and can
    be detached when the other end is swung out of the shuttle cavity.


CLS 139/210
TXT Spindles that actuate means to increase the hold or grip of the spindle on
    the cop as the free end of the spindle is swung into the shuttle.


CLS 139/211
TXT Spindle-actuated means to take hold of the exterior of the bobbin as the
    free end of the spindle is swung into the shuttle.


CLS 139/212
TXT Means for controlling the thread from the time it leaves the thread package
    until it leaves the shuttle.


CLS 139/213
TXT The means contacts with the thread as it leaves the bobbin or package.


CLS 139/214
TXT Guides in which tension is created by leading the thread over a zigzag path
    with several sharp bends, these bends being in addition to those that are
    needed to carry the thread from the cop or bobbin to the outlet eye.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 160+ and 205 for a metal working
    machine which provides an undulating path for successively presented
    portions of running length work.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 541+ and 153 for a
    tensioning a running material.


CLS 139/215
TXT Guides that include tortuous-course tensions and have a slot through the
    shuttle wall extending from the eye to the thread cavity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201     and 222.


CLS 139/216
TXT A spring pressed toward an opposing surface and contacting directly with
    the thread held there between.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 419.4+ and 149+ for a
    clamp-type tension for running material.


CLS 139/217
TXT Spring clamps included in guides and tensions having a slot through the
    shuttle wall extending from the eye to the thread cavity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222.


CLS 139/218
TXT The thread is drawn over rough or clinging material such as felt, to create
    resistance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 522+ and 147+ for a
    clamp-type tension for running material.


CLS 139/219
TXT Friction-material tensions that occur in guides having a slot through the
    shuttle wall extending from the eye to the thread cavity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222.


CLS 139/220
TXT Friction-material tensions that occur in guides in which the slot will
    thread from the to-and-fro motion of the shuttle across the loom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223.


CLS 139/221
TXT Means carried by the shuttle to facilitate starting the thread through the
    thread outlet.


CLS 139/222
TXT The thread undergoes a side displacement through a slot into the thread
    outlet of the shuttle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215,    217, and 219.


CLS 139/223
TXT Threading slots so arranged that the thread will be drawn into its regular
    channel by the to-and-fro motion of the shuttle across the loom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220.


CLS 139/224
TXT Means for supplying new weft by either refilling or replacing the running
    shuttle.

    (1)     Note.  Includes means wherein there is a special cooperation
    between the replenishing mechanism and other parts of the loom.


CLS 139/225
TXT Wherein there is special cooperation between the replenishing mechanism and
    other parts of the loom.


CLS 139/226
TXT The other parts of the loom being rendered inoperative.


CLS 139/227
TXT Including stopping of the main shaft.


CLS 139/228
TXT The action of the stopping means is nullified or delayed.


CLS 139/229
TXT In which the weft carrier passes through the replenishing position one or
    more times after detection of depletion and before replenishment takes
    place.


CLS 139/230
TXT Means for preventing premature actuation.


CLS 139/231
TXT In which the operation has already been initiated.


CLS 139/232
TXT Means in looms using more than one character of weft for renewing at least
    one of the wefts.


CLS 139/233
TXT Means for ascertaining the condition of the shuttle contents in the
    shifting shuttle boxes which cooperate therewith.


CLS 139/234
TXT Wherein exhausted shuttles are replaced.


CLS 139/235
TXT The operation being initiated by the operative.


CLS 139/236
TXT The full shuttle being inserted at one end of the lay and the exhausted
    shuttle being discharged at the other end of the lay.


CLS 139/237
TXT The exhausted shuttle being deflected while in flight off the raceway of
    the lay.


CLS 139/238
TXT The exhausted shuttle being pushed out by the pressure of the incoming full
    shuttle.


CLS 139/239
TXT The shuttle box being temporarily displaced.


CLS 139/240
TXT A series of shuttle boxes being moved in the same direction.


CLS 139/241
TXT Wherein the exhausted shuttles are refilled.


CLS 139/242
TXT A moving element projecting a full bobbin into the shuttle.


CLS 139/243
TXT The moving transferrer is set in operation by the lay.


CLS 139/244
TXT Limited to bobbin-engaging features of the transferrer.


CLS 139/245
TXT Means for holding and presenting the full bobbins to transfer position.


CLS 139/246
TXT Wherein there is means for taking care of the yarn ends previous to the
    transferring operation.

    (1)     Note.  Devices which control the yarn ends collectively and are
    features of the bobbin supply are classified here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256,    257, 258, and 259.


CLS 139/247
TXT The bobbins being fed to transfer position by gravity.


CLS 139/248
TXT The bobbins being carried by a magazine which rotates to feed them.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249,    for other rotary batteries


CLS 139/249
TXT The bobbins being carried by a magazine which rotates to feed them.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248,    for other rotary batteries. See this class, subclass 248.


CLS 139/250
TXT Means for rotating the battery.


CLS 139/251
TXT Means for holding the bobbin in transfer position or guiding it during
    transfer.


CLS 139/252
TXT Means for placing an improperly-positioned shuttle in position in the
    shuttle box.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155.


CLS 139/253
TXT Positioning means which act on the shuttle tip adjacent the fabric.


CLS 139/254
TXT Means for engaging a bobbin imperfectly positioned in the shuttle to
    prevent the entrance of the shuttle into the shed or to press the bobbin
    into its proper place.


CLS 139/255
TXT Means for disposing of the bobbin after its discharge from the shuttle.


CLS 139/256
TXT Means for manipulating an individual thread after the transferring
    operation has been initiated.

    (1)     Note.  Devices for controlling a yarn end individually even though
    the bobbin from which it extends be in the bobbin supply are classified
    here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246,    and indented subclasses.


CLS 139/257
TXT Wherein the thread extends from the new bobbin.


CLS 139/258
TXT The end being attached to the magazine.


CLS 139/259
TXT Means for guiding the incoming thread into the shuttle.


CLS 139/260
TXT Means for placing the thread extending from the substantially exhausted
    bobbin in position to be cut by the cutting mechanism.


CLS 139/261
TXT Means for withdrawing the thread extending from the discharged bobbin out
    of the shuttle eye.


CLS 139/262
TXT Wherein the bobbin is given a definite movement, is stripped, or otherwise
    manipulated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclasses 292+, for bobbin stripping
    apparatus.


CLS 139/263
TXT Means set in operation by the replenishing action for cutting the thread.
    Frequently a clamp is provided for carrying the cut end forward.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170.4,  for inactive-weft cutters associated with means for preventing the
    extending end of such weft in a multiple-shuttle loom from becoming fouled
    with the active weft supply or otherwise drawn into the shed.

    302+,   for loom-mounted selvage trimmers not associated with filling
    replenishing mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclass 10.4 for weft end cutters
    which are not loom mounted.


CLS 139/264
TXT The cutter being located on the shuttle feeler.


CLS 139/265
TXT The cutter being located on the lay.


CLS 139/266
TXT The cutter being located on the temple.


CLS 139/267
TXT Wherein actual transfer of a bobbin is required to effect the cutting.


CLS 139/268
TXT Means for preventing premature actuation.


CLS 139/269
TXT Means for ascertaining the condition of the working-shuttle contents and
    when a predetermined exhaustion thereof is reached for initiating a change.

    (1)     Note.  Feeler mechanisms, per se, are classified here whether
    intended to replenish or to stop the loom.


CLS 139/270
TXT The complete functioning being suspended temporarily during the further
    depletion of the shuttle contents.


CLS 139/271
TXT Means for positively withdrawing the feeler from the shuttle box.

    (1)     Note.  The withdrawal is usually to permit the picking of the
    shuttle, the transfer of the bobbin, or the shifting of the shuttle boxes.


CLS 139/272
TXT The feeler being located on the lay.


CLS 139/273
TXT An electric circuit being utilized.


CLS 139/274
TXT Wherein a magnetic body within and a magnetized body without the shuttle,
    or vice versa, are attracted to each other.


CLS 139/275
TXT The initiating element is carried in the shuttle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205     and 371, for detecting devices where not combined with replenishing.


CLS 139/276
TXT The yarn contact member being vibrated at each detecting beat of the lay,
    failure to vibrate effecting the change.


CLS 139/277
TXT Wherein there is also a bobbin or shuttle contact member contacting at each
    detecting beat.


CLS 139/278
TXT Wherein there is a member which contacts with the yarn surface and another
    member normally inactive which is engaged by the shuttle or other part of
    the lay for effecting the change.


CLS 139/279
TXT Wherein there is a member which contacts with the yarn surface and another
    member which penetrates through the yarn to feel for the bobbin surface.


CLS 139/280
TXT A member is held from rotation on a detecting beat by the yarn on the
    bobbin, but upon substantial exhaustion of the yarn is permitted to rotate.


CLS 139/281
TXT A toothed element is held from movement longitudinally of the bobbin on a
    detecting beat by the yarn on the bobbin, but upon substantial exhaustion
    of the yarn slips.


CLS 139/282
TXT A resilient means causes the slipping action.


CLS 139/283
TXT A toothed element is supported on a pivoted carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    285.


CLS 139/284
TXT The toothed element is supported on a rectilinearly-movable member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286.


CLS 139/285
TXT The toothed element is supported on a pivoted carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    283.


CLS 139/286
TXT The toothed element is supported on a rectilinearly-movable member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284.


CLS 139/287
TXT Limited to the yarn engaging features of the feelers.


CLS 139/288
TXT Means for placing the feeler mechanism in proper position with relation to
    the shuttle.


CLS 139/289
TXT Bobbins provided with features or elements for cooperating with the feeler.


CLS 139/291
TXT Means carried by the loom for removing the cloth as it is woven or
    otherwise operating upon the cloth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclasses 13+ for cutters adapted to
    sever the connecting strands of two-ply fabric; and subclasses 87+ for
    spreader structure which maintains lateral tension on a running web of
    cloth.


CLS 139/292
TXT Means to engage the cloth near the fell to maintain a lateral tension on
    the same.


CLS 139/293
TXT A pincerlike means is provided, and in most instances it reciprocates with
    each beat up of the lay.


CLS 139/294
TXT The means rotates.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the notes thereunder.


CLS 139/295
TXT The cloth is brought into engagement with a roller, the axis of which is
    substantially parallel with the weft, by means of a nonrotating shield or
    guide which partially embraces the roller.


CLS 139/296
TXT Limited to the cloth-engaging portion of the roller.


CLS 139/297
TXT Limited to that portion of the roller mounting which facilitates rotation
    of the roller.


CLS 139/298
TXT Limited to the means for connecting the cloth-engaging portion of the
    temple with the loom; usually a bracket fastened to the breast beam.


CLS 139/299
TXT Yielding to the beat-up movement is permitted by a sideway part of the
    support.


CLS 139/300
TXT Means to facilitate moving the temple away from the cloth-engaging position.


CLS 139/301
TXT Means to facilitate accurate locating of the temple with relation to the
    cloth.


CLS 139/302
TXT Means to sever weft threads that may project from the edge of the cloth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170.4,  for inactive-weft cutters associated with means for preventing the
    extending end of such weft from becoming fouled with the active weft supply
    or otherwise drawn into the shed of a multiple-shuttle loom.

    263+,   for weft end cutters associated with filling replenishing mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclass 10.4 for apparatus and
    processes for the same purpose as those of this subclass, the severing
    means of which is not loom-mounted.


CLS 139/303
TXT The means is actuated by contacts from the lay.


CLS 139/304
TXT Means for pulling the cloth away as it is woven; usually includes means for
    winding it up.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99.


CLS 139/305
TXT The rate of take-up is not uniform from edge to edge of the cloth.


CLS 139/306
TXT A lateral to-and-fro motion is given either to the receiver or to the cloth.


CLS 139/307
TXT The cloth is pulled along by contact with advancing friction or clamping
    surfaces, the packaging, if any, being a separate operation.


CLS 139/308
TXT The material is wound on a beam which is pressed against the sand roll and
    is driven thereby.


CLS 139/309
TXT Means is provided to determine the rate at which the cloth-advancing
    mechanism moves.


CLS 139/310
TXT The cloth roll is slowed down as the mass of cloth thereon accumulates.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108.


CLS 139/311
TXT The rate of movement is determined by the tautness of the cloth.


CLS 139/312
TXT The rate is determined by an adjustment made by the operator.


CLS 139/313
TXT Means to permit the take-up to move a certain distance in the reverse
    direction, usually when the stop motion detects a weft failure.


CLS 139/314
TXT Means that stops the take-up when the stop motion detects a weft failure
    without awaiting the coming to rest of the heavy parts of the loom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111.


CLS 139/315
TXT Means to prevent manual interference with some mechanical actuator for the
    take-up while the loom is in motion.


CLS 139/316
TXT Means to facilitate the movement of the cloth back and forth by the
    operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113     and 328, for clutches and disconnective means.


CLS 139/317
TXT Means of the type peculiarly adapted for controlling the order in which
    selective power-transmitting mechanisms are thrown into and out of action:
    comprises patterns having indicators and feelers affected by the
    indicators, but does not include the power-transmission devices which are
    connected or disconnected by the feelers. They are employed in producing
    complicated designs having a great variety of changes and are to be
    distinguished from cams, cranks, and the like, which are intended to
    transmit power directly and are practical only when few changes are
    required.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclasses 231+ for pattern control systems
    and storage devices for use with knitting machines.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 46 for systems
    of electric circuit makers and breakers in which individual circuits are
    made and broken in a pattern-transmitted predetermined order.


CLS 139/318
TXT A pattern which has not been broken up into definite portions to correspond
    to each feeler.


CLS 139/319
TXT Patterns in which the indicators and feelers are operative electrically.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    455,    for devices that use electricity to lift the heddles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 46 for systems
    of electric circuit makers and breakers in which individual circuits are
    made and broken in a pattern-transmitted predetermined order.


CLS 139/320
TXT A plurality of patterns are arranged in parallel rows lengthwise of the
    chain, so that a change from one to the other can be effected by shifting
    the cylinder axially relative to the feelers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     120 and 156, for lateral-shifting cams.


CLS 139/321
TXT Portions of the pattern chain are passed without being utilized.


CLS 139/322
TXT Two or more pattern cylinders act on the same set of hooks or other power
    connective devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for the complete shedding mechanism that employs multiple cylinders.


CLS 139/323
TXT There is an extra pattern for selecting the main pattern that is to be used.


CLS 139/324
TXT Means for causing the pattern to travel in the opposite direction.


CLS 139/325
TXT An extra pattern is used to determine the time or point of reverse.


CLS 139/326
TXT Extra patterns which move while the main patterns are stationary to count
    the number of picks before the main patterns are to be started again.


CLS 139/327
TXT Means driven by the take-up roll or some loom part to determine the length
    of dwell or repetition of the pattern at any given point.


CLS 139/328
TXT Means to enable the pattern to be moved to the correct position for
    starting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113     and 316, for clutches and disconnecting means.


CLS 139/329
TXT Mechanisms for turning the cylinder and also in the jacquard type the means
    for pressing the cylinder against the feelers.


CLS 139/330
TXT A prism or barrel on which the chain is mounted to advance it step-by-step
    and also to hold the card or link that is being pressed against the ends of
    the feelers.


CLS 139/331
TXT The fingers or detectors which are controlled by the perforations, risers,
    or other indicators on the pattern chain or its equivalent for connecting
    or disconnecting the power-transmission devices under their control.


CLS 139/332
TXT Devices to support the length of cards or chain that is not on the cylinder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for analogous mechanism that supports, long chains of tube frames.


CLS 139/333
TXT Limited to the surfaces or chains having indicators which affect the
    feelers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclasses 231+ for patterns for knitting
    machines.


CLS 139/334
TXT Patterns in which the indicators are pins that can be placed in inoperative
    position either with or without entire removal from the pattern chain.


CLS 139/335
TXT Patterns of the paper card type; usually perforated.


CLS 139/336
TXT Mechanism adapted to throw the loom out of operation.


CLS 139/336.4
TXT Stopping under subclass 336 which is effected by improper functioning of
    means for replenishing the active filling supply or of an instrumentality
    associated with such replenishment, or by the absence of an adequate supply
    of reserve filling carriers.

    (1)     Note.  An instrumentality associated with replenishment of the
    active filling supply may be, for instance, a filling thread cutter and
    clamp.


CLS 139/336.6
TXT Stopping under subclass 336.4, which is effected by means detecting the
    presence of a shuttle improperly positioned (or the absence of a shuttle in
    proper position) for replenishment by a fresh bobbin or for ejection of the
    shuttle coincident to the supply of a fresh shuttle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    341+,   for shuttle position detectors not related to weft replenishment.


CLS 139/337
TXT Abnormal condition of the harness mechanism causes stopping.


CLS 139/338
TXT Improper action of the pattern mechanism causes stopping.


CLS 139/339
TXT Improper action of the take-up mechanism causes stopping.


CLS 139/340
TXT A fixed extent of operation causes stopping.


CLS 139/341
TXT An improperly-positioned shuttle causes stopping.


CLS 139/342
TXT The shuttle not having been picked out of the shuttle box.


CLS 139/343
TXT Shuttles are in both running shuttle boxes.


CLS 139/344
TXT The shuttle being positively driven.


CLS 139/345
TXT A rocking rod extending longitudinally of the lay carries fingers which
    contact with the shuttle checks and also carries means adapted to engage
    and actuate the stop mechanism when the rod is not rocked by the pressure
    of a shuttle check on one of the fingers.


CLS 139/346
TXT A slidable member transmits movement from the protector rod to the stopping
    means.


CLS 139/347
TXT The pressure of the protector mechanism against the shuttle is suspended,
    but allowed to function at the appropriate instant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167.


CLS 139/348
TXT A thin place in the fabric causes stopping.


CLS 139/349
TXT The occurrence of a fault in the warp, usually the breakage of a thread,
    causes stopping.


CLS 139/350
TXT In combination with means for holding juxtaposed warp threads apart to
    prevent entangling.


CLS 139/351
TXT The locality of the fault being indicated.


CLS 139/352
TXT The fault being detected by mechanism other than elements arranged to
    contact one with each thread.


CLS 139/353
TXT The fault being detected by an individual thread detector which affects an
    electric circuit on being displaced.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclass 161 and the classes referred to in
    the notes thereto.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.13+ for
    electrical switches which are controlled by threads or strands; see
    subclass 61.14 where the switch is controlled by a knot or change in
    diameter of the thread or strand, and subclass 61.18 where the switch is
    controlled by the slack, breakage, run out or failure to travel along its
    intended path.


CLS 139/354
TXT The detectors do not move bodily, but angularly.


CLS 139/355
TXT The detectors either form the shed or the principle of operation depends on
    their being raised in the formation thereof.


CLS 139/356
TXT The lay being utilized to actuate the stopping mechanism.


CLS 139/357
TXT The lay being utilized to actuate the stopping mechanism.


CLS 139/358
TXT Limited to means for supporting the thread-feeling elements of an
    electrical warp stop motion.


CLS 139/359
TXT Individual thread detectors are displaced into the path of a to-and-fro
    moving member and are carried along therewith.


CLS 139/360
TXT Individual thread detectors are displaced into the path of a to-and-fro
    moving member, which is stopped thereby.


CLS 139/361
TXT The detectors do not move bodily, but angularly.


CLS 139/362
TXT The lay being utilized to actuate the stopping mechanism.


CLS 139/363
TXT Wherein the detectors either form the shed or the principle of operation
    depends upon their being raised in the formation thereof.


CLS 139/364
TXT The lay being utilized to actuate the stopping mechanism.


CLS 139/365
TXT The vibrator moves transversely of the lay.


CLS 139/366
TXT The lay being utilized to actuate the stopping mechanism.


CLS 139/367
TXT The lay being utilized to actuate the stopping mechanism.


CLS 139/368
TXT Limited to the structure of the detector, per se.


CLS 139/369
TXT Means for supporting the thread-feeling elements and closely associated
    parts of the warp stop motion.


CLS 139/370.1
TXT Stopping under subclass 336 wherein the absence of, substantial exhausting
    of or a fault in the weft thread causes the loom to be thrown out of
    operation.


CLS 139/370.2
TXT Stopping under subclass 370.1 wherein the weft thread is drawn from a
    thread package which is fixed relative to the frame of the loom.


CLS 139/371
TXT The detection being made by means within the shuttle.


CLS 139/372
TXT A member having tines is given relative movement across the weft path.


CLS 139/373
TXT Provided with means for bringing the fork to rest after striking the weft.


CLS 139/374
TXT The fork is carried by the lay.


CLS 139/375
TXT The fork is moved by gravity on its detecting stroke.


CLS 139/376
TXT Means is provided to assist the action of gravity.


CLS 139/377
TXT The fork is tiltable on a member which slides when the fork fails to be
    tilted.


CLS 139/378
TXT Limited to the structure of the fork.


CLS 139/379
TXT Limited to the features of the element which cooperates with the prongs of
    the fork or the devices for cleaning the same.


CLS 139/380
TXT Accessories only of use in aiding an attendant to operate the loom.


CLS 139/381
TXT Devices entirely detached from the shuttle to aid the attendant in
    threading the shuttle.


CLS 139/382
TXT Suction or compressed air is used.


CLS 139/383
TXT Product of a method or apparatus provided for in this class and having at
    least one set of constituent strands arranged transversely to at least one
    other set and interlaced therewith, each strand of one set lying above some
    and below the remaining strands of the other set.

    (1)     Note.  A patent directed to a woven product possessing coated or
    impregnated constituents will be placed in this subclass, or the
    appropriate indented subclass, where the sole disclosure is to coating or
    impregnation of the constituents prior to assembly thereof to form the
    product.

    (2)     Note.  A patent directed to a woven product, by name only
    consisting of twisted or twined constituents (e.g., yarn) will be placed in
    Class 57, Textiles: Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, in the absence of the
    particular interengagement (assembly relationship) of said constituents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for methods and apparatus for weaving in combination
    with laminating.  See also subclasses 166+ and 433+ for methods and
    apparatus for forming weftless fabrics by adhesively uniting filaments.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web
    embodying a woven component and not provided for in this class (139) or any
    other class. See the main definition of Class 428, section VI A 1,
    reference to Class 139.

    492,    Roll or Roller, subclass 48 for a roll cover, per se, not elsewhere
    provided for.


CLS 139/384
TXT Wherein the outline of the texture is other than flat straight webs or
    stock peculiarly adapted for producing structures of this nature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 98+ for a
    structurally defined web or sheet which may include a woven component, and
    subclasses 221+ for a web or sheet which includes a structurally defined
    component which may be woven, and especially subclasses 175+, 190, 193, and
    196+ for a product embodying a component of mechanically interengaged
    strands or strand-portions (e.g., woven).

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 181+ for a woven  fabric and subclasses 304+ for a knit fabric.


CLS 139/385
TXT Parts of the elements extending from the texture and being loose and
    unwoven.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 115 for a stock
    material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or sheet and
    having a fringe, where the manufacture thereof goes beyond the limits of
    the methods of manufacture provided for in this class (139).


CLS 139/385.5
TXT Which are designed for use as collars for human apparel.


CLS 139/386
TXT The texture being uniformly bent either in or out of its plane, but not
    forming complete tubes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 174+ for a
    stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet, and embodying a nonplanar woven layer but where the manufacture
    thereof goes beyond the limit of any process provided for in this class
    (139).


CLS 139/387
TXT The texture forming a hollow tube or tubes with either closed or unclosed
    ends. Either the sides or the ends of the tubes may be connected together.

    (1)     Note.  For woven tubular fabrics having something additional such
    as a rubber lining which makes them into a hose, see Class 138, Pipes and
    Tubular Conduits, subclasses 123+ for woven tubular fabric having something
    additional, such as an impregnation or a lining which makes it into a hose.


CLS 139/388
TXT Wherein a single tube is formed of regular shape and texture.


CLS 139/389
TXT Wherein the tube is peculiarly adapted to serve as a receptacle.


CLS 139/390
TXT The bag or pocket being integral with its supporting texture.


CLS 139/391
TXT Wherein the foundation texture has threads projecting therefrom after the
    manner of hair or loops to form the surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclasses 191 and 194 for a knitted fabric
    including a fleece or pile type surface.

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 410+ for a pile fabric formed by securing the
    pile elements to a base by a stitching operation.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 85+ for a
    stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or sheet
    having a pile or nap type surface and not provided for in this class (139)
    or any other class.


CLS 139/392
TXT The projecting threads being weft.


CLS 139/393
TXT Wherein the projecting threads extend from the surface of the weft.


CLS 139/394
TXT The structure comprising more than a single weft plane.


CLS 139/395
TXT Weft texture for a chenille fabric formed by cutting between separated warp
    threads of a woven fabric, wherein the warp threads form the core thereof
    and the cut weft ends extend therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 24, 203 and
    362 for chenille strand structures and machines and processes for making
    the same.


CLS 139/396
TXT These are the products of the terry operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25.


CLS 139/397
TXT The projecting threads being formed by severing the warps running between
    the layers of a fabric woven parallel to each other and as a unit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclasses 13+ for cutters adapted to
    sever the connecting strands of two-ply fabrics.


CLS 139/398
TXT Wherein the structure of each layer comprises more than a single weft plane.


CLS 139/399
TXT The projecting threads being neither warp nor weft, but extra threads
    incorporated into the foundation texture during the weaving.


CLS 139/400
TXT Wherein the projecting threads are secured by completely encircling the
    retaining thread or threads.


CLS 139/401
TXT Wherein the structure comprises more than a single weft plane.


CLS 139/402
TXT The projecting threads being formed by raising the pile warps uniformly
    over the pile wires.


CLS 139/403
TXT Wherein the structure comprises more than a single weft plane.


CLS 139/404
TXT The projecting threads being formed by raising up from the foundation
    texture warp ends selected from a series.


CLS 139/405
TXT Wherein the structure comprises more than a single weft plane.


CLS 139/406
TXT The weft planes being separated by a plane of buried warp threads.


CLS 139/407
TXT Wherein the texture is peculiarly adapted to be severed into sections.


CLS 139/408
TXT Wherein the structure comprises more than a single weft plane.


CLS 139/409
TXT The weft planes being separate and distinct cloths united by binder threads.


CLS 139/410
TXT Wherein the number of plies is two.


CLS 139/411
TXT The number of weft planes being three.


CLS 139/412
TXT Wherein each weft is in a separate and distinct shed.


CLS 139/413
TXT The number of weft planes being two.


CLS 139/414
TXT Wherein each weft is in a separate and distinct shed.


CLS 139/415
TXT The weft planes being separated by a plane of buried warp threads.


CLS 139/416
TXT Wherein the invention relates to the production of a design and employs
    only a single weft plane.


CLS 139/417
TXT The ornamentation being in the form of stripes.


CLS 139/418
TXT The ornamentation being on both faces.


CLS 139/419
TXT Wherein warp threads are deflected laterally.


CLS 139/420
TXT Product under subclass 383 wherein one or more of the constituent strands
    (1) is of a particular composition (natural or otherwise) (2) possesses
    structure (e.g., particular linear or cross-sectional configuration) or (3)
    have a particular relationship relative to other strands of the product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 137+ for
    fabrics comprising an element which is woven into the texture for the
    purpose of imparting electrical insulating qualities to the fabric.


CLS 139/421
TXT Wherein the texture contains elements such as rubber or springs for
    returning it to its original form after stretching.


CLS 139/422
TXT The elastic elements being omitted in certain areas.


CLS 139/423
TXT The structure comprising more than a single weft plane.


CLS 139/424
TXT Straw or vegetable stalks being used in the texture.


CLS 139/425
TXT Metal being used in the texture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 68.1+, for
    electrical conductors which may include a metallic fabric.  The mere
    recitation of a woven fabric as being of or including conducting material
    is not sufficient for classification in Class 174.  For classification
    there significant conductor details must be claimed.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 545, for electric heaters which may
    include a woven fabric as a heating element.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 208, for resistors having a mesh,
    woven, or braided resistance element.  The mere recitation of a woven
    fabric as being of or including resistive material is not sufficient for
    classification in Class 338.  For classification there significant resistor
    details must be claimed.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 897 for mesh, woven,
    braided or multiple strip type antennas.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 544+ for stock
    materials, e.g., of indefinite length, which are all metal or have adjacent
    metal components.


CLS 139/426
TXT The fabric is composed entirely of threads formed by spinning or twisting.


CLS 139/427
TXT Wherein animal fibers which do not have felting properties are used in the
    texture.


CLS 139/428
TXT Silk being used in the texture.


CLS 139/429
TXT Device under subclass 116 in which the weft is drawn from a bulk supply
    means which means does not pass through the shed.


CLS 139/430
TXT Device under subclass 429 wherein means control the weft thread end or the
    weft thread and a part of the warp to form a binding zone in the formed
    fabric, usually along the fabric edge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for cross weaving selvage forming.


CLS 139/431
TXT Device under subclass 430 wherein the zone is formed by engaging the weft
    with a knitting needle.


CLS 139/432
TXT Device under subclass 431 wherein means are provided to incorporate an
    additional thread into the knitting zone.


CLS 139/433
TXT Device under subclass 430 wherein a selvage shuttle or similar device
    passes a thread through a looped end portion of a double weft.


CLS 139/434
TXT Device under subclass 430 wherein means are provided to bend a cut weft end
    back into a subsequent shed.


CLS 139/435.1
TXT Weft inserted by fluid jet from nozzle:
    Device under subclass 429 wherein a weft thread is projected into and
    through the shed by a pressurized stream of a gas or a liquid, which stream
    is formed by a nozzle.

    (1)     Note.  A main nozzle is a nozzle which is located outside the shed
    and operates both outside of and within the shed, whereas an auxiliary
    nozzle is located, and operates, within the shed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, may include a nominal
    recitation of a supply or take-up coil (e.g., less than a support for such
    a coil or a cooperative relationship between a tension or exhaust detector
    and reel driving or reel stopping means, etc.), subclass 97.4 for a vacuum
    jet to advance the strand.


CLS 139/435.2
TXT With means for controlling flow from nozzle:
    Device under subclass 435.1 provided with means for controlling (a) the
    sequence of activation of the pressurized streams from a plurality of
    auxiliary nozzles, (b) the duration of operation of a pressurized stream,
    or (c) the velocity of a pressurized stream.

    (1)     Note.  "Auxiliary nozzle" is discussed  in (1) Note. of subclass
    435.1, above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    435.6,  for a guide for a fluid jet which guide functions to confine a
    weft-carrying pressurized stream.


CLS 139/435.3
TXT Including plural main nozzles and positioning means therefor:Device under
    subclass 435.1 which includes two main nozzles, each developing a
    pressurized stream, a weft thread for each stream, and means for locating,
    or for redirecting the flow from, one of the main nozzles.

    (1)     Note.  "Main nozzle" is discussed in (1) Note. of subclass 435.1,
    above.


CLS 139/435.4
TXT Main nozzle:
    Device under subclass 435.1 comprising the structure of a nozzle of the
    kind which is located outside of the shed.


CLS 139/435.5
TXT Auxiliary nozzle:
    Device under subclass 435.1 comprising the structure of a nozzle of the
    kind which is located within the shed.


CLS 139/435.6
TXT Fluid jet guide:
    Device under subclass 435.1 comprising structure which extends across at
    least a portion of a shed and which functions to confine a weft-carrying
    pressurized stream during the projection of a weft thread into the shed.

    (1)     Note.  The confining of the stream is for the purpose of conserving
    as much as possible of the stream's velocity.

    (2)     Note.  The claims of the art of this subclass occasionally are
    limited to the guide, per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    435.2,  for flow control means which includes means for controlling the
    velocity of a pressurized stream.


CLS 139/436
TXT Device under subclass 429 wherein the weft is inserted through a warp shed
    which is of substantially the length of the inserting member and which
    moves across the warp with the inserting member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196.1,  for inserting member, per se.


CLS 139/437
TXT Device under subclass 429 wherein the weft is drawn through the shed by a
    shuttle which is projected or carried.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196.1,  for shuttle structure, per se.


CLS 139/438
TXT Device under subclass 437 wherein the shuttle grasps an end of weft to draw
    it through the sheds.


CLS 139/439
TXT Device under subclass 438 wherein the shuttle enters the shed from only one
    side of the loom.


CLS 139/440
TXT Device under subclass 429 wherein the weft is a continuous strand which is
    inserted across the length of the shed and is doubled back on itself.


CLS 139/441
TXT Device under subclass 440 wherein the inserter comprises a needle having an
    eye, which is continuously supplied with thread, which needle moves back
    and forth along a rectilinear path.


CLS 139/442
TXT Device under subclass 440 wherein the inserter comprises a needle having an
    eye, which is continuously supplied with thread, which needle swings about
    an axis.


CLS 139/443
TXT Device under subclass 429 wherein the weft is inserted as a single strand.


CLS 139/444
TXT Device under subclass 443 wherein the insertion means comprises a needle
    having a portion which grasps the weft end and carries it through the shed
    from the side which the needle enters the shed.


CLS 139/445
TXT Device under subclass 443 wherein the insertion means comprises a needle
    which enters the shed empty, grasps a weft thread and inserts it into the
    shed as the needle exists therefrom.


CLS 139/446
TXT Device under subclass 443 wherein the insertion means comprises a pair of
    needles which operate simultaneously to meet at the center of the shed, the
    weft being brought to the shed center by one needle, transferred to the
    other needle to be drawn the remainder of the distance through the shed.


CLS 139/447
TXT Device under subclass 443 limited to the constructional features of the
    thread engaging portion of weft inserting needle.


CLS 139/448
TXT Device under subclass 447 wherein the thread engaging portion grasps the
    weft end.


CLS 139/449
TXT Device under subclass 429 to impart motion to a weft inserting needle or to
    control the direction of movement of said needle.

    (1)     Note.  Needle guides, mounts, etc., not specifically provided for
    may be considered as part of the drive mechanism and be placed in this
    subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The term "Needle", as employed herein, is intended to
    include both flexible tapes and rigid rod-like inserting members.


CLS 139/450
TXT Device under subclass 429 including means which control the movement of
    weft between its storage and the weft inserting member.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is means to mount a weft supply package.


CLS 139/451
TXT Device under subclass 450 having means specialized to store or handle weft
    of hair, cane, straw or slats.


CLS 139/452
TXT Device under subclass 450 including means for drawing off a measured length
    of weft to be inserted into a warp shed.

    (1)     Note.  The drawing means may be in combination with storage means
    and a cutting means.  Storage means independent of drawing means are also
    proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, may include a nominal
    recitation of a supply or take-up coil (e.g., less than a support for such
    a coil or a cooperative relationship between a tension or exhaust detector
    and reel driving or reel stopping means, etc.), subclass 117 plural
    material mover including an intermittent and continuous material-mover, or
    subclasses 118.1+ for intermediate storage means between plural material
    moving means.


CLS 139/453
TXT Devices under subclass 450 wherein means operate to choose between a
    plurality of weft threads to present a desired one to the weft inserting
    member.


CLS 139/454
TXT Device under subclass 429 wherein at least certain weft are inserted to lie
    at an oblique angle to the warp threads.


CLS 139/455
TXT Apparatus under subclass 55.1 wherein the shedding mechanism operates in
    response to (1) variations in electrical impulses, or (2) variations in
    magnetic lines of flux.


CLS 139/456
TXT Apparatus under subclass 55.1 wherein the shedding mechanism operates in
    response to hydraulic or pneumatic pressure.


CLS 139/457
TXT Circular, progressive shedding:

    Subject matter under subclass 11 wherein the special-type loom is one in
    which the warp is arranged in a circular manner and a section of the warp
    threads, of substantially the length of the shuttle, is moved to the
    open-shed condition and this open shed, in which the shuttle travels, is
    caused to move transversely of the warp, wherein the weft is laid in a
    circular course.

    (1)     Note.  A loom of this subclass performs an operation which may be
    described as circular weaving with progressive shedding.


CLS 139/458
TXT Longitudinal shedding:

    Subject matter under subclass 457 wherein the shed forming means, i.e., the
    heddles, of the loom move in a plane parallel to the plane of the fabric
    being woven.


CLS 139/459
TXT Shuttle:

    Subject matter under subclass 457 limited to the structure of a shuttle
    which is peculiar to a loom of that subclass.


CLS 139/460
TXT Longitudinal moving shed:

    Subject matter under subclass 11 wherein the special-type-loom includes a
    plurality of sheds which are simultaneously maintained in an open condition
    and caused to move in the warp direction.


CLS 140/
TTL WIREWORKING

CLS 140/
TXT This class definition and Notes are divided into the following sections:



    I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    II.     DEFINITION OF TERMS USED

    III.    COMBINED WIREWORKING

    IV.     MAKING ARTICLES FROM WIRE

    V.      APPLYING WIRE

    VI.     ASSEMBLING AND UNITING WIRE

    VII.    CUTTING WIRE

    VIII.   SHAPING WIRE

    IX.     HANDLING WIRE

    X.      MAKING WIRE

    XI.     MISCELLANEOUS NOTES AND INDEX TO CLASSES REFERRED TO HEREIN

    (1)     Note.  References under each section have been assigned
    coordinating nomenclature.  Every reference is given a two digit number.
    The tens digits are the Arabic equivalents of the Roman Numerals applied to
    the sections of the class definitions under which they are listed.  The
    unit digits are assigned as follows:

    0 - 7 (using decimals, if necessary) for Notes 8 for  SEARCH THIS CLASS,
    SUBCLASS 9 for SEARCH CLASS

    e.g., under section VIII, Notes will begin with number (80) and may run
    through (87), SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS will be given number (88) and
    SEARCH CLASS will be given number (89).

    I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    1.  This is the generic class of:

    a.      Assembling and uniting, shaping and/or deforming wire.

    b.      Assembling and uniting one or more lengths of wire with other
    material.

    c.      Assembling and uniting plural lengths of wire.

    d.      Shaping or deforming lengths of wire by twisting, bending, kinking
    and looping.

    e.      Wireworking apparatus, i.e., machines and implements.

    Patents for processes are classifiable along with the apparatus in all
    subclasses in this class where the participle form is used, e.g., subclass
    93 "applying wire".  However, subclasses not so limited, e.g., subclass 1
    "combined machines" have no process patents therein.

    2.      Because certain elongated or attenuated elements, not meeting the
    definition of a wire, can be both handled and worked like wire, such
    working of such elements is included in this class (140).  For such
    apparatus combined with nonwireworking apparatus, see (110) Note, below.



    II.     DEFINITIONS OF TERMS USED.

    (20)    Note.  The definitions of terms in the class definitions of Class
    29, Metal Working, apply in this class unless otherwise noted.

    WIRE -  a wire (for the purpose of this class (140), is an elongated or
    attenuated metal or metal-based material, wherein all the diameters of the
    cross-sectional area taken at right angles to its length are of
    substantially the same dimension, and the cross-sectional area is small
    enough to allow substantial flexibility or resiliency and permit bending or
    flexing without substantial metal flow.  A wire may be stranded, cored,
    coated or covered.

    WIREWORKING - The term wireworking includes the shaping and deforming of
    wire and/or the assembly and uniting of wire with wire or nonwire material
    by twisting, bending, kinking, looping, etc.

    III.    COMBINED WIREWORKING

    (30)    Note.  Mere transient wireworking, solely for the purpose of
    mounting or supporting the wire during nonwireworking (and after which the
    wire is substantially restored to its initial condition), combined with the
    nonwireworking is classified with the nonwireworking, the transient working
    not being considered wireworking for this class.

    (38) SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for wireworking apparatus combined with nonwireworking apparatus.



    (39) SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 592+ for wireworking processes combined
    with nonwireworking processes.

    148,    Metal Treatment, appropriate subclasses for processes of metal
    wire-working in combination with a significant heat treatment to modify or
    maintain the internal physical property (i.e., microstructure) or chemical
    property of the metal. See section III, A, of the Class 148 definition to
    determine what constitutes significant heat treatment.

    483,    Tool Changing, generally for a process or apparatus including a
    tool transfer means combined with a tool support or storage means.



    IV.     MAKING ARTICLES FROM WIRE

    (40)    Note.  The making of textile-like fabrics from wire is classified
    both in this class (140) and in various textile classes.  When the process
    of making includes a wire-working operation, classification is generally in
    class (140), where only textile-like operations are involved,
    classification is generally in the various textile classes (see (49) SEARCH
    CLASS below).

    (41)    Note.  The winding or wire on forms or frames (i.e., as a template)
    is found in this class (140), subclass 92.1 when the article made does not
    include the template (or core) as a part thereof; except that the making of
    an electric lamp or electric space discharge device electrode will be
    classified in subclass 71.5 whether or not the core remains with the wound
    material as a part of the electrode. Other winding of wire will be found in
    Class 242, Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, particularly subclasses 430+.

    (48)    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3+,     for processes and apparatus for manufacturing fabrics by
    wireworking operations, and see (40) Note, above.

    71+,    and see the Notes thereto for processes and apparatus for
    manufacturing articles.

    92.1,   and see (41) Note, above.



    (49)    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 700+ and 400.1+, and see the Notes
    thereto for processes and apparatus of assembly.  See also subclasses 432+
    for a method of driving a wire staple into work either to assemble the
    staple to the work or to join two workpieces.

    57,     Textiles: Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, for twisting of wire by
    a textile-like process, especially for the making of wire rope,
    particularly subclasses 9 and 311 for wire preforming or shaping prior to
    twisting into rope form, and subclass 362 for wire rope making methods
    involving twisting, and see (40) Note, above.

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclasses 1+ for chain
    making, and subclasses 71+ for staple making.

    87,     Textiles: Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, appropriate
    subclasses for braiding of wire by a textile-like process, and see (40)
    Note, above.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, appropriate subclasses for weaving of wire
    generally by a textile-like process, and see (40) Note, above.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclasses 82+ for combined
    apparatus for making and applying a member, e.g., nail.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, see (41) Note, above.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and Apparatus
    subclasses 121+ for making wire nails.



    V.      APPLYING WIRE

    (58) SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93,     for apparatus and processes for applying wire.

    123,    for miscellaneous wireworking implements.



    (59) SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, appropriate subclasses for special hand tools for applying
    wire.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 1+ for binding by means of wire.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus for applying a member, e.g., staple, to work.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 134.3+ for wire or strand placing.



    VI.     ASSEMBLING AND UNITING WIRE

    (60)    Note.  Uniting wires by soldering, welding and brazing will be
    found in this class (140), subclasses 111 and 112 when peculiarly related
    to wireworking.  Class 228, Metal Fusion Bonding is generic to bonding of
    metal by a metallurgical bond and includes welding, brazing and soldering
    except when performed in a Class 219 manner. Electric bonding apparatus and
    methods will be found in Class 219, Electric Heating, subclasses 605 and
    50+.  Note especially indented subclasses 51+, 56+ and 78.01+.

    (68)    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111+,   for joining wire, and see (110) Note, below.



    (69)    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 4+ and 10, and see (60) Note, above.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for apparatus and method for laminating in general
    and see especially subclasses 166+ and 433+ for uniting indefinite length
    strands.  See also subclasses 47+ as the generic home for processes of
    making indefinite length conductors not elsewhere provided for.

    219,    Electric Heating, see (60) Note, above.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding and see (60) Note above.



    VII.    CUTTING WIRE

    (79)    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, and see the Notes thereto for cutting implements, per se
    adapted for cutting wire.

    82,     Turning, and see the Notes thereto for turning wire.

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses for cutting wire or other strand
    material.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, for the cutting of
    wire by a tool that twines about an axis and moves along that axis toward a
    workpiece with no additional motion during operation.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, for milling or planing of wire.

    451,    Abrading, for grinding wire.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, subclasses 8+ for methods of threading wire and 57+ for machines
    for threading wire except as provided for in Class 408.


    VIII.   SHAPING WIRE

    (80)    Note.  See section VII for cutting wire.

    (81)    Note.  Forging or swaging of wire is classified in Class 72, Metal
    Deforming.  Plastic deformation of metal wire and wire-like material will
    be found in both this class (140) and Class 72, which provides residually
    for any plastic metal-working operation, such as straightening,
    corrugating, stretching, coiling, drawing, rolling, etc., which does not
    involve assembly.  Appropriate subclasses in Class 72 must therefore be
    investigated in connection with any plastic metal-shaping operation or
    apparatus.  For instance, subclass 302 provides for linearly stretching a
    workpiece between two end clamps, and subclass 138 provides for a method of
    or an apparatus for deflectingly deforming metal into a conical spring
    element.

    (82)    Note.  Shaping wire by working it (other than by cutting) will also
    be found in certain functional or art classes; see the "SEARCH CLASS" notes
    below.

    (83)    Note.  Twisting of wire will be found in this class, subclass 149,
    and in Class 72; see (81) Note above.  For intertwisting of wire, see
    sections IV and VI, above.

    (88)    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92.1+   and 117+, for coiling of wire for joining and subclass 124 for an
    implement therefor.

    123.5,  for an implement for stretching wire.

    139+    and 147, for straightening of wire.

    149,    for twisting of wire and see (83) Note above.

    (89)    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses for any plastic
    metal-shaping operation not involving assembly, and see (81) Note above.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 430+ for making a
    composite article in which an elongated material is permanently wound onto
    a core.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and Apparatus
    appropriate subclasses for making and/or heading nails, screws and bolts by
    forging or swaging.



    IX.     HANDLING WIRE

    (91)    Note.  For winding of wire see (41) Note.

    (99)    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses for a method of or an
    apparatus for plastically shaping metal and including a step of or means
    for handling or guiding the work or product.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 430+, 25, and 360+ for
    wire winding or loop forming for a storage coil.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, subclasses 164+ and the notes thereto for machines for feeding
    discrete lengths of wire.



    X.      MAKING WIRE

    (100) Note.  The making of wire is not here (Class 140), but is found in
    various classes listed in (109) SEARCH CLASS below.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 33+ for apparatus for making wire by
    combining two or more metal working steps separately classified.

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses for making wire by
    plastically reshaping a metal work piece.  See subclasses 199+ for rolling,
    253.1+ for extruding, and 274+ for drawing.

    75,     Specialized Metallurigical Processes, Compositions for use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 200+ for making wire by powder metallurgy.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 82+ for processes of making running or
    indefinite length products by continuous metal casting and subclass 423 for
    apparatus for casting wire.

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclass 76 for electroforming of wire.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes, for
    processes, within the class definition, for molding or shaping plastic
    substances. For forming indefinite length filament like articles which may
    be electrical conductors see subclasses 171.1+, especially subclasses
    171.26+, and for other electrical devices, see subclasses 29.1+ and 104+,
    in particular.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    appropriate subclasses especially subclasses 67+ for plastic filament
    former comprising an immersed shaping orifice discharging directly into a
    liquid bath, and subclass 461 for a filament spinning nozzle, per se; see
    the search notes thereunder.

    XI.     MISCELLANEOUS NOTES AND INDEX TO CLASSES REFERRED TO HEREIN

    (110) Note.  Certain subclasses in this class (140) have subject matter
    which is also classified in other main classes.  Whether such subject
    matter constitutes wireworking for this class, so that such subject matter
    combined with nonwire-working apparatus will be classified in this class
    (140), subclass 1, depends upon the status of the art.  See Notes (60),
    (81), (82), (83) and (91).

    (111)   Note.  For wire stock, see Class 428, Stock Material or
    MiscellaneousArticles, subclasses 577+ and the Notes thereto.

    (118)   SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      and see (110) Note, above.


    (119)   SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working (20) (39) (49) (60) (69) (109) (111).

    30,     Cutlery (79).

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining (49).

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making (49).

    72,     Metal Deforming (81) (83) (89) (99) (109).

    75,     Specialized Metallurigical Processes, Compositions for use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, (109).

    81,     Tools (59).

    82,     Turning (79).

    83,     Cutting (79).

    87,     Textiles: Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making (49).

    100,    Presses (59).

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving (49).

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture (69).

    164,    Metal Founding (109).

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy (109).

    219,    Electric Heating (60)

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length (99).

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus (49).

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding (60) (69).

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, (41), (49), (89) (99).

    254,    Pushing and Pulling Implements (59).

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling and Planing (79).

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    (109).

    451,    Abrading (79).

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, (949) (79) (81) (99).

    483,    Tool Changing, (39).


CLS 140/1
TXT Inventions in the working of wire in which other features not specific to
    wire-working are claimed in combination therewith or such inventions, as do
    not come within the terms of the subclasses hereinafter defined because of
    the inclusion of elements, combinations, or features not in themselves
    classifiable in such subclasses, but usually in some other class.

    Also inventions in wire-working or in elements of combinations specific to
    this class in combination with features or means specific to metal casting,
    swaging, welding, metal-rolling, nailing, stapling, painting, etc., of
    wire, or at the joint between a wire and a nonwire since in these instances
    the class of Wire-Working is made superior.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 33+ and see the Notes thereto, for
    combined machines, and subclasses 592+ and see the Notes thereto, for
    combined methods including a step of wireworking, and see (110) Note to the
    class definition of this class (140).

    483,    Tool Changing, subclasses 16+ for a machine tool combined with a
    tool transfer means.


CLS 140/2
TXT Miscellaneous inventions in wire-working not classifiable in any of the
    other subclasses of this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 90.01+ and 451, Abrading, for a device
    for burnishing or burnishing wire.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 76, 77, and 138 for electrolytic
    methods of producing wires.


CLS 140/3
TXT Miscellaneous fabric-making inventions not classifiable in the subclasses
    hereunder. Wire-fabric making devices classifiable in this class are
    divided into two main groups, including, respectively, looms or stationary
    machines and portable or field machines.  Each of these groups is redivided
    into other groups, including, respectively, devices for making a mesh
    fabric in which continuous wire or wires are interwoven or united with the
    warp wires and devices in which the completed fabric shows separate cross
    wires or stays. Devices of the latter type are classifiable under the
    stay-applying group defined below.

    (1)     Note.  Inventions in wire-fabric making classifiable in this class
    are characterized by working in the wires by twisting, coiling, or by some
    bending operation which is not characteristic or usual in the ordinary
    weaving machines that operate upon cotton, wool, silk, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 700+ for assembly apparatus and 428 for
    methods of assembly not elsewhere classified, e.g., subclass 243.56 for a
    means to join two elements by applying a clip thereabout.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, for looms for making the ordinary straight
    weave all-wire fabrics.


CLS 140/4
TXT Fabric-making machines comprising a rotary device, as a drum or wheel, upon
    which the fabric wires or elements are secured together during its rotation.


CLS 140/5
TXT Making an all-wire fabric in which a plurality of warp or runner strands
    are secured together, usually by twisting, to form a cable, and to which
    the woof, stay, or cross wires are secured.


CLS 140/6
TXT Making an all-wire fabric having hexagonal meshes, like chicken wire or
    poultry netting.  In the mesh made by the devices of this subclass the
    cross wires are continuous and are not cut.

    (1)     Note.  Search this class, the stay-applying subclasses, for
    machines in which the cross wires are cut, thus forming separate woof-wires
    or stays.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, for machines
    producing similar fabrics of wire or other strand material but involving no
    wire working operation other than strand interrelating.


CLS 140/7
TXT Making all-wire net fabric having quadrangular or four-sided meshes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4       and 5, for fabric making machines in which the warps or runners are
    composed of a plurality of strands secured together, for example, by
    twisting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, subclass 24 and
    indented subclasses, for machines for making similar textile fabrics.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 91+ and particularly subclass 110 for
    processes of joining wires by metal casting operations.


CLS 140/9
TXT Making wire netting having diamond or V-shaped meshes, the cross wire or
    wires being continuous in distinction from those inventions for the making
    of diamond mesh fabric where the wires are not continuous.

    (1)     Note.  Search this class, the Fabric-making, Stay-applying
    subclasses, for inventions involving cutting the wires to form stays or
    working in separate wires as stays.


CLS 140/10
TXT Securing wire stays or separate cross wires to the runners, strands, or
    warp wires of wire netting not classifiable in the subclasses of this group
    defined below.

    (1)     Note.  In this group are classifiable all devices wherein the
    so-called "stays" are formed by cutting the cross wire at the edges of the
    fabric.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      7, 8, and 9, for mesh-making machines employing continuous cross or
    woof wires, etc.


CLS 140/11
TXT Applying clips, tie-wires, or equivalent, whether of wire or sheet metal,
    to the intersecting wires of a wire fabric and by which they are secured
    together.  Also magazines for clips or feeding devices relating to all-wire
    fabric-making.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     54 and 55, for clip-affixing implements.

    116,    for dies employed in machines for applying the wires to
    intersecting wires, as in fence fabrics.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 428+, and particularly subclasses 505+
    indented thereunder, for a process of deformably applying a clip to work,
    and subclasses 700+ for apparatus for doing the same, particularly subclass
    243.56.


CLS 140/12
TXT Making-all-wire fabric by wrapping or otherwise securing suitable loops
    formed in stay wires about the strand wires.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21.


CLS 140/13
TXT Making an all-wire quadrangular, usually square, mesh fabric in which the
    cross wires or stays are composed of short lengths each connecting a
    plurality of strands, usually two, said lengths together forming a
    "sectional stay".

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is intended to include all looms or fixed
    machines utilizing short stays or cross wires of short length.


CLS 140/14
TXT Fabric-making in which suitable loops are formed in the warp or strands,
    usually for the purpose of securing the stays therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22.


CLS 140/15
TXT Making fabric by wrapping or coiling the stay wires successively around the
    strands, usually commencing at one of the edge strands, and coiling the
    stay successively about each runner and securing the end of the stay to the
    strand on the opposite edge of the fabric.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53      and 54, for implements employed in making fabrics in this manner.

    117,    for hand tools for coiling or winding one wire about another, as in
    successively wrapping a stay about the several fence strands.


CLS 140/16
TXT Portable machines for making all-wire netting.  For example, all machines
    employed in the field are classifiable in this group.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     for devices adapted to be held in the hand or partially supported
    by the work.

    117,    and indented subclasses, for devices of more general application,
    as in joining wires.  Subclass 117 includes all implements for coiling one
    wire about another, as in successively wrapping stays.


CLS 140/17
TXT Portable all-wire fabric-making machines that make an all-wire netting in
    which the wires employed are practically continuous and separate or
    so-called stays are not separately interwoven or secured to the strands or
    the cross wires or in which the cross wire is not subsequently cut at the
    edge of the fabric.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6       and 7, for looms or stationary machines for making similar fabrics.


CLS 140/18
TXT Portable machines for securing separate wires or stays to the warp,
    strands, or runners and not classifiable in the minor subclasses of this
    group.  Stay-applying machines operate to secure separate cross wires or
    stays to the warp wires or strands or the cross wires are cut at the edge
    of the fabric thus forming separate stays.


CLS 140/19
TXT Portable stay-applying machines that twist or unite a plurality of strands
    together either in making and securing a multistrand stay to the warp wires
    or for securing wire stays, single or multiple, to a multistrand runner or
    warp.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for fixed machines or looms that secure stay wires to a multistrand
    runner or warp.


CLS 140/21
TXT Portable stay-applying machines that secure the stays in place by wrapping
    or coiling loops suitably formed in the stay about the strand wires.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for similar features in looms.


CLS 140/22
TXT Portable fabric-making machines that form loops or kinks in the strands or
    warps and by which the stays are secured in place, each loop usually
    embracing a stay.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for looms having like features.


CLS 140/23
TXT Portable fabric-making machines that secure the stays to the strands by
    wrapping or coiling operations, each stay being successively wrapped around
    the strands in crossing the fabric, thus securing them in place.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for looms that operate in like manner.

    53      and 54, for implements employed in making fabrics in this manner.

    117,    for hand tools for coiling or winding one wire about another, as in
    successively wrapping a stay about the several fence strands.


CLS 140/24
TXT Inventions in making selvages or binding the edge strands or in coiling or
    knotting the ends of the stays to the edge strands of the fabric, and
    machines and attachments for, or specific structures or combinations in,
    all-wire fabric making devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for similar features.


CLS 140/25
TXT Inventions in or devices, looms, or stationary machines for making a
    slatted wire-fabric--such as a picket or slatted wire fence, barrel fabric,
    basket fabric, etc.--and not classifiable in the minor subclasses defined
    below.  The term "slat" is used in a generic sense to include wood, metal,
    etc., or any other material except wire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    Appropriate subclasses of all-wire machines, for machines for forming wire
    pickets or stays into a fabric; subclass 3, and those indented under
    Fabric-making, All-wire, for such similar structural features as are also
    characteristic of looms; the search note to subclass 28 for slat-and-wire
    fabric-weaving machines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving.


CLS 140/26
TXT Slat-and-wire fabric making involving the cutting of the slats to determine
    lengths or trimming or shaping the same.


CLS 140/27
TXT Slat-and-wire fabric-making machines provided with hoppers or any type of
    magazine for holding, supplying, or feeding the slats or pickets to the
    machine.


CLS 140/28
TXT Slat-and-wire machines having means for forming spaces between the slats at
    predetermined points by the omission of a slat or by the prevention of
    slat-feeding at the proper time.  This subclass includes machines
    particularly adapted to the manufacture of barrel fabric.


CLS 140/29
TXT Machines having lifting frames or other movable carriages for relatively
    and periodically placing the slats, strands, or operating mechanism in
    securing relation--for example, moving the strand-twisting heads
    periodically into engagement with the strands to be twisted or coiled about
    the slats.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32      and 44, for slat "beaters" or slat-placing mechanism.


CLS 140/30
TXT Inventions in fabric-making wherein the slats are secured by the mutual
    twisting together of the two or more strands of which a warp or runner is
    composed and not classifiable in the minor subclasses defined below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for machines for coiling one of the strands about another or
    winding a continuous binding wire around a strand.

    52,     for implements specific to wire-fabric making.

    118,    and indented subclasses, and 121 for implements employed in uniting
    intersecting fence strands by coiling in the making of slatted wire fabrics.


CLS 140/31
TXT Looms or stationary machines having means for embedding the fabric wires or
    stays in the slats, usually by the provision of suitable pressure rollers
    or hammers.


CLS 140/32
TXT Strand-twisting slat-and-wire fabric machines provided with means for
    beating or hammering the slats to place in the crotch between the strands.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for beaters in portable machines; and 31.


CLS 140/33
TXT Devices, usually separate from and employed in connection with
    strand-twisting machines, for separating or keeping the strands apart or
    from twisting exterior to or in advance of the twister-heads during the
    twisting operation.


CLS 140/34
TXT Making slatted wire fabric in which the slats are secured to the strands by
    the coiling or winding of one strand about the other, one only of the
    runner strands being bent or coiled, the other remaining substantially
    straight, or a smaller so-called "binding" or continuous tie-wire may be
    used and coiled about the strand between the slats, thus securing the
    latter in place.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for machines that operate to secure the slats by securing separate
    pieces of wire or "tie-wires" to the strands embracing the slats.

    57,     for implements for the same purpose.


CLS 140/35
TXT Looms for making slatted wire fabric or fencing by wire-crossing mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  See Search Notes under subclass 25.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving for devices for ordinary weaving in the making
    of an all-wire fabric.


CLS 140/36
TXT Twister-heads of the kind employed in wire-fabric making machines.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    115 and 119, for similar heads employed in machines for twisting or
    coiling the ends or wires together.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclass 154.

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 132, 133, 451+, 458+.


CLS 140/37
TXT Portable devices or machines employed in the field (mostly fence machines)
    for making slatted wire fabric and not classifiable in the minor subclasses
    defined below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     and indented subclasses, for implements or tools adapted to be held
    in the hand or partially supported by the work.


CLS 140/38
TXT Portable machines having slat holders, hoppers or equivalent magazine for
    the supply of slats.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27.


CLS 140/39
TXT Portable machines having strand-twisting devices for mutually twisting the
    strands together to secure slats in place between them.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30+,    for similar features in looms.


CLS 140/40
TXT Machines provided with means for placing the slats in definite relation
    either laterally, longitudinally, or angularly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for portable machines having plumbing or leveling devices.


CLS 140/41
TXT Portable slat-and-wire fabric-making machines having strand-twisters in
    which means are provided for the angular adjustment thereof or for
    positioning the slats relatively to the surface of the ground, whereby the
    slats may be secured in a vertical position or plumb.


CLS 140/42
TXT Portable machines provided with distinct means for beating the slat to
    place in the shed or crotch between the strands.  The beating of the slat
    to place by the periodic movement of the machine itself does not place it
    in this subclass.  The beaters employed are usually auxiliary and operate
    in a vibratory manner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for beaters in looms.


CLS 140/43
TXT Portable slat-and-wire machines having provision for adjusting the twisting
    devices vertically to secure a desired space relation between the strands
    or runners.


CLS 140/44
TXT Portable slat-and-wire fabric machines having twisters comprising a
    suitable carrier provided with guides, clamps, or holders for the strand
    wires, which are eccentrically mounted at one side of and revoluble upon or
    within a ring or substantially annular guide forming a sort of eccentric
    strap.  The carrier holds the strand wires at one side of the strap center
    and revolves or turns within it, so as to move the wires in a circular path
    to the opposite side to cross them.  This is repeated to produce the
    desired number of twists.


CLS 140/45
TXT Portable slat-and-wire fabric-making machines which operate to effect a
    simple or single cross in the strand wires between the pickets or slats,
    distinguising these machines from such as produce more than a simple cross.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     for portable devices for producing mere relative separation or
    displacement and crossing of the strands by horizontal movement thereof and
    in a few instances by vertical movement.


CLS 140/46
TXT Portable slat-and-wire fabric machines provided with wire-crossers having
    an oscillatory strand holding and crossing member, which either
    structurally or functionally is of the nature of a compound lever.


CLS 140/47
TXT Portable slat-and-wire machines having means for coiling or wrapping one
    strand of the warp or runner around the other in securing the slats or for
    coiling a binding or continuous tie-wire around a strand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for loom machines.


CLS 140/48
TXT Portable machines for making slatted wire fabrics by weaving processes, the
    strands being separated and crossed usually by imparting to one or both of
    them horizontal movement, in some cases vertical movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, for stationary machines or looms employed for
    ordinary weaving in the making of all-wire fabrics, and for looms employing
    other material than wire.


CLS 140/49
TXT Portable slat-and-wire machines for applying a separate tie-wire to the
    strand in securing each slat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for tie-wire applying implements.

    116,    for dies employed in machines for applying tie-wires.


CLS 140/50
TXT Devices used in connection with fabric- making machines for placing strands
    or runners in desired relative position or spacing them one from another.


CLS 140/51
TXT Devices for holding or clamping the strand wires, slats, or pickets in
    attaching the latter or while effecting repairs, splicing, twisting, etc,;
    also structural details of fabric machines for clamping the fabric wires
    while making the fabric.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 132+ for wire
    engaging and clamping means for use with fence wire-tensioning apparatus.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclass 206 for Joints and connections in general.


CLS 140/52
TXT Miscellaneous wire-working tools or devices not otherwise classifiable
    adapted to be held in the hand or partially supported by the work, which
    are employed in making or repairing fabrics.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102.5,  for looping and twisting implements employed in stretching or
    tightening fence wires.

    117,    or indented subclasses for tools for joining wire by twisting,
    coiling, etc.

    123,    for wire-working implements of more general application.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, appropriate subclasses.


CLS 140/53
TXT Fabric-making implements having a wire supply or reel from which the cross
    or stay wire is drawn; also implements having magazines for the supply of
    clips, lock-plates, etc.  Most of the fabric-making implements of magazine
    type are employed in supplying and successively wrapping a wire about the
    strands, which may be subsequently cut to form a stay.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for looms, employed in similarly wrapping stays.

    23,     for portable machines.

    117,    for implements employed for this purpose.


CLS 140/54
TXT Fabric-making implements of the magazine type having a rotary member or
    head that in operation wraps or twists the cross wire, clip, or the
    tie-wire around the strand.


CLS 140/56
TXT Fabric-making implements for securing slats, pickets, etc., to the strands
    by the usual wire-working operations, but not staplers for driving pointed
    structures.


CLS 140/57
TXT Slat-attaching implements for applying a tie-wire to a strand, so as to
    embrace and thereby secure the slat in place.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for portable machines employed in applying tie-wires.

    117     and particularly 119 and 122 for implements employed in splicing
    wire having similar coiling or twisting elements.


CLS 140/58
TXT Miscellaneous inventions in barbing wire, applying barbs, making barb-wire
    fences, etc., not classifiable in the minor subclasses defined below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66,     for machines employed in applying sheet-metal barbs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 7.1+ for processes and devices for
    cutting barbs of barb-wire fencing, subclass 9 for barbing fishhooks, and
    subclass 23.1 for barbing cylindrical bodies.

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclass 73 for barbing
    staples.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 184+ for notching and burring wire by
    rolling.


CLS 140/59
TXT Machines having means for the infeeding of the barb-wire from which the
    barbs are formed.

    (1)     Note. This particular subclass (59) with subclasses 64 and 65,
    includes all barbing machines for forming or applying other than
    four-pointed barbs to strands by means of dies or oscillating formers,
    which shape and clamp the barb in place.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.


CLS 140/60
TXT Barbing machines having means for feeding and applying the barb-wire and
    employing twisting devices for twisting a plurality of runner strands,
    usually two, into a cable, and thereby securing the barbs thereto.  Means
    are also usually provided for coiling the barb-wire, cutting and forming
    barbs.

    Search this class, subclasses defined  below or details of coiling,
    cutting, and barb-forming.


CLS 140/61
TXT Machines for applying-four-point wire barbs by other processes than coiling
    or strand crimping.

    (1)     Note.  In this miscellaneous subclass are all machines having dies
    or formers for applying four-point barbs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59,     for machines for applying other than four-point barbs.


CLS 140/62
TXT Machines for applying four-point barbs having means for crimping the
    strands or runners.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for machines for applying two-point barbs to and crimping the
    runners.

    105,    for crimping features.

    106,    for crimping implements.


CLS 140/63
TXT Machines having rotary heads or coiling devices for applying four-point
    barbs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65,     for specific coiling features or elements in two-point barb
    machines.


CLS 140/64
TXT Machines for applying two-point barbs having means for crimping the strands
    to which the barbs are secured.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for similar crimping features in four-point barbing machines.

    105,    for crimping features.

    106,    for crimping implements.


CLS 140/65
TXT Machines for making two-point barbs in which the barbs are secured to the
    strands by means of rotary coiling heads.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     for similar coiling devices employed in applying four-point barbs.


CLS 140/66
TXT Applying barbs of sheet-metal to wire strands.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 7.1+ for processes and devices for
    cutting barbs or barb-wire fencing.


CLS 140/67
TXT The making or applying of separate barbs of wire and barb-applying machines
    distinguished by the absence of barb-wire feeding mechanism.


CLS 140/69
TXT Hand tools employed in barbing operations, usually for forming and applying
    barbs to wire.


CLS 140/70
TXT Barbing implements having a rotary member or jaw for coiling, winding, or
    clamping a barb upon a wire.


CLS 140/71
TXT Making articles from wire stock not classifiable otherwise.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, appropriate subclasses
    for wire-rope and cord making.

    72,     Metal Deforming, for mere metal shaping.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    47+ as the generic home for processes of making indefinite length
    electrical conductors not elsewhere provided for.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclasses 82+ for combined
    apparatus for making and driving a member, e.g., nail.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 430+ for permanently
    winding elongated material; e.g., wire, on a core to make certain articles;
    subclasses 360+ for forming loops usually of wire into a storage coil, and
    subclasses 25+ for winding wire onto a storage spool.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 209+ for electromagnets.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for the structure of
    inductive devices (e.g., transformers and inductive regulators).

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, subclasses 121+.


CLS 140/71.5
TXT Subject matter under subclass 71 where the article made is an electric lamp
    or electric space discharge device electrode or electrode assembly.

    (1)     Note.  Electric space discharge devices include spark plugs, radio
    tubes, X-ray tubes, cathode ray tubes and similar electric space discharge
    devices.

    (2)     Note.  The electrode made may be a grid, filament, or any other
    electrode which is made of wire, and the manufacture of the article may
    include mounting the electrode upon its support where only wireworking
    operations are included in the claims.

    (3)     Note.  Devices, see Class 445, Electric Lamp or Space Discharge
    Component of Device Manufacturing, subclasses 35+, 46+ and 66+ and the
    search notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses for
    electric lamps and electric space discharge devices.  Note subclass 326 for
    the electrodes for electric lamps and electric space discharge devices, per
    se, and subclasses 542+ for photo cathodes, per se, or combined with a
    phospher or a envelope.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    subclasses 35+, 46+ and 66+ and the search notes thereunder for other
    classes which provide for processes or apparatus for the manufacture of
    electric lamps or electric space discharge devices.


CLS 140/71.6
TXT Subject matter under subclass 71.5 where the process or apparatus includes
    mounting a filament upon its supports.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111,    and indented subclasses for processes and apparatus for joining
    wire.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 271 for electric
    lamps and electric space discharge device filaments in combination with the
    supporting structure for the filament.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Devices,
    Manufacturing, subclasses 29+ and 67+ and the search notes thereunder for
    the methods of and apparatus for mounting the electrodes of an electric
    lamp or an electric space discharge device upon their supports.


CLS 140/72
TXT Making wire heddles or heddle eyes for weavers' harness employed in weaving.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 4.6 for methods and apparatus for making
    cord heddles.


CLS 140/73
TXT Making wire bale-ties for baling or bundling, eyes or hooks being formed at
    the ends of the tie during its formation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     for specific hook-forming devices.

    93.2,   for tools for tightening and joining bale bands, and see the Notes
    thereto for other binding devices.

    102,    for specific loop-forming devices.

    104,    for specific eye-forming devices.

    115,    for machines for splicing or twisting  the ends of bale-ties
    together.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 16, and indented
    subclasses for the article of manufacture; 27 and 29 for illustrated
    methods of making or tying.

    81,     Tools, subclass 9.3.


CLS 140/74
TXT Making wire into articles known to the trade as "box-straps" or "bundling
    wire," usually comprising strands having eyes or loops formed at intervals
    throughout the length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102     and 104, for miscellaneous loop and eye forming devices
    respectively.


CLS 140/75
TXT Making wire bails for pails, boxes, etc., and for supplying handles
    thereto, most of which include means for forming hooks or eyes in the ends
    of the bail.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for loop-forming devices.

    104,    for eye-forming devices.


CLS 140/76
TXT Making ferrules of wire by coiling, and generally including means for
    soldering the convolutions into an integral structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 108, for the article.

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses for a method of or means
    for convoluting a metal strip.


CLS 140/77
TXT Bending and shaping wire into forms suitable for use in hats and hat frames.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 17 for inserting wires in hat brims.


CLS 140/80
TXT Making wire hooks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 7 and 9.


CLS 140/81
TXT Making wire garment hooks or garment hooks and eyes.


CLS 140/81.5
TXT Subject matter under subclass 80 where the article made is a hanger for a
    coat or other garment.

    (1)     Note.  The hanger usually consists of a generally triangular wire
    frame having a hook formed at the apex thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83,     for the making of wire clothespins.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 85 for the article.


CLS 140/82
TXT Inventions for making wire clips or fasteners not otherwise classifiable.
    Includes devices for the making of unpointed staples or those not
    especially adapted to be driven.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for search data for staple making, forming, and driving devices
    wherein the staple made or employed is adapted to be driven.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 13 for devices for making paper-fastener
    clips designed to perforate the paper; and 5, for clips of that type.  See
    the appropriate subclasses under 592+ for a method of making and/or
    applying a ring, clip, etc., to livestock, e.g., a hog, and subclasses 33+
    and 243.5+ for a means to do so.

    72,     Metal Deforming, for making an article by a mere metal-shaping
    operation.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, especially subclasses 375+ for pin ticket making and
    an attaching device for applying a clip to a tag.


CLS 140/83
TXT Making wire clips designed for temporarily securing clothing or the like to
    a clothes-line.


CLS 140/84
TXT Making wire lacings for securing the ends of belts or the edges of fabrics
    together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93,     for coiling devices for forming and applying belt fasteners or
    lacings comprising wire coils.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 31, and indented
    subclasses for the article.


CLS 140/85
TXT Making wire articles adapted to be subsequently applied to bottles or
    stoppers for securing the latter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94,     for machines for applying wire to bottles and corks for stoppering
    the bottle.


CLS 140/86
TXT Making wire cork or stopper extractors of spiral form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 66 and 135+ for coiling a metal
    workpiece, and subclasses 64+ and 299 for twisting such.

    81,     Tools, subclass 3.45 for corkscrews wherein the method may be
    illustrated in the article.


CLS 140/87
TXT Making hairpins from wire stock by bending or twisting.

    (1)     Note.  Mere coating, enameling, soldering, or like operations
    foreign to those characterizing wire-working are excluded from this
    subclass unless combined with operations or means for bending or twisting
    wire.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclasses 71+ for making or
    forming staples generally U-shaped, having legs substantially equal in
    length and adapted to be driven into wood or other material.

    163,    Needle and Pin Making, subclasses 6 and 7, and note the lines of
    division set forth by definitions.


CLS 140/88
TXT Making or forming wire rings, hoops, or closed loops of wire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     104 and 115, for machines for splicing the ends of a wire hoop
    together.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 7 for making eyebolts and hooks, subclass 8
    for making finger rings, and subclasses 592+ for methods of making rings,
    loops, etc.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 21, 201, and
    362 for endless bands made by twisting or twining operations and machines
    and processes for making them.

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclasses 16+ for combined
    machines for making chain devices.

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses for plastically working an
    annular metal workpiece.

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 268, for coiling wooden hoops.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 51+ for ring or loop making, involving
    electric welding.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 6 and 27 for hoop-skirt making
    machines.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclass 77 for apparatus for
    deforming a member, e.g, ring, remote from the work-surface.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, subclasses 87+.


CLS 140/89
TXT Setting coil springs or causing them to conform to predetermined length or
    shape, generally by compressing them to produce uniformity of product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 215 and 225.


CLS 140/90
TXT Making wire stays as a separate article of manufacture, principally the
    stays or cross wires employed in making fabrics or fences.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    245,    Wire Fabrics and Structure, for fabric stays.

    256,    Fences, subclass 35 for the manufactured stay.


CLS 140/91
TXT Making crimped or bent wire stays employed as stiffeners in garments,
    particularly corset stays.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 259+, especially subclass 264 for metal stays
    for corsets.

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 465+ for wire and metal stays used in
    brassieres, including stays, per se, for brassieres only; and subclasses
    567+ for wire and metal stays used in corsets.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 6 and 27 for machines for making or
    applying types of garment-stiffeners other than bent or crimped wire.


CLS 140/92
TXT Making spiral studs--for example, shirt-studs--comprising a tapering or
    conical coil of wire and terminating in an axially alined shank or end at
    right angles to the plane of coiling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 138+ for an apparatus for forming a
    metal coil of varied pitch or diameter.


CLS 140/92.1
TXT Limited to devices on or by which material, generally wire, is wound to
    produce a coil of predetermined form or shape, comprising mostly formers
    for winding armature coils.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses involving wrapping metal
    around a form or core, for combined apparatus including such a core, and
    subclasses 462+ for a form or core, per se.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 430+ for winding
    elongated material on a core to provide a composite article and 360+ for
    forming loops usually of wire into a storage coil.


CLS 140/92.2
TXT Forms or frames that are adapted to be rotated for winding the material to
    shape or in combination with the devices or machines for rotating them.


CLS 140/92.3
TXT Methods and apparatus in which a helix rotated about its axis adjacent a
    row of loops or holes threads itself through the loops or holes
    successively.

    (1)     Note.  Included here, and in the indented subclasses, are processes
    and apparatus involving the mere juxtapositioning of elements plus the
    necessary manipulation required to interlace a helix with said elements to
    form a unitary web, fabric, or assembly.  The absence of wire deformation,
    cutting and/or tensioning will not exclude processes and apparatus
    otherwise within the scope of this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Included here, for example, is the application of helices to
    the edges of perforated sheets or leaves so as to make a "spiral" bound
    book (see particularly subclass 92.93), the joining of coil elements by
    helices or the mutual intercoiling of helices to form spring fabrics, and
    the linking of belt ends by helices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 240.5 for means to insert and/or remove a
    helix by rotation and subclass 456 for related methods.

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclass 20 for apparatus
    wherein a continuous rod or wire is coiled into a helix cut into sections
    to form links, and said links assembled and united into a completed chain.

    245,    Wire Fabrics and Structure, subclass 6 for fabrics comprising a
    plurality of intercoiled helices.

    281,    Books, Strips, and Leaves, subclass 25 for a plurality of sheets
    secured together by means of a helix interlaced through aligned
    perforations along a margin of said sheets.


CLS 140/92.4
TXT Processes under subclass 92.3.


CLS 140/92.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 92.3 including means for repeated interlacing of
    helices through a particular aligned loop row without intervening shifts in
    relative position between fabric and helix projecting means, such repeated
    interlacing occurring periodically in response to a predetermined sequence.

    (1)     Note.  The plural helices or "cords" are usually to delineate the
    borders of desired lengths of fabric and also serve as reinforcements for
    said borders.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclass 260 for "cords" in the margin or rim of a bed bottom
    fabric.


CLS 140/92.6
TXT Apparatus under subclass 92.3 characterized by two or more helix projecting
    means positioned and operatively linked as to effect a mutual intercoiling
    of the helices concurrently with helix projection.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are the devices which simultaneously form and
    intercoil all the helices comprising the full width of a fabric the axial
    length of the helices ordinarily fixing the extent of the fabric length.

    (2)     Note.  Interlacing of plural helices without mutually intercoiling
    said helices is not classified in this subclass and is to be found
    throughout subclasses indented under 92.3.


CLS 140/92.7
TXT Devices under subclass 92.3 with features other than and in addition to
    means for providing a helix and applying it by axial rotation to successive
    loops, means for positioning said loops, and interrelating control means.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass, for example, are combinations with means
    to shape the selvage edges of the assembled fabric, combinations with means
    to deform the helix after intercoiling, and combinations with automatic
    control means.

    (2)     Note.  Helix providing includes means for forming a helix with or
    without subsequent cut-off or means for supplying prepared or preformed
    helices with or without subsequent cutting means.  Coiling, per se, with or
    without subsequent cut-off is classified in Class 72, Metal Deforming,
    subclasses 135+; the additional step of guiding and/or positioning or
    interlacing placing the combination within the scope of subclasses 92.3+.
    See Class 83, Cutting, for cutting, per se.

    (3)     Note.  Helix applying includes helix guide means as well as means
    to shift the helix along, and rotate it about the cylindrical axis of said
    helix. Both shift and rotation may be an inherent function of a helix
    forming means.  The axial shift may be effected solely by engagement of a
    positively rotated helix with aligned loops.

    (4)     Note.  Positioning includes clamping, guiding, and/or supporting
    means for successive loops and/or assembled fabric of which said loops form
    a working edge and means for reeling assembled fabric and/or feeding said
    fabric from an assembly or working zone.  In addition to the shifting means
    set forth in (2) Note, above, positioning includes means for relatively
    shifting a loop row and/or assembled fabric with respect to helix applying
    means.

    (5)     Note.  Interrelating control includes cyclic interlock means; that
    is, means for periodic or sequential operations in which the same series of
    operations on the material are repeated unchanged, in the absence of
    adjustments of the machine under a particular stimulus such as the presence
    or absence of material or the application of power to the drive shaft.
    Interrelating control does not include automatic control, as to which see
    (6) Note, below.

    (6)     Note.  Automatic control includes means to sense a condition or
    change of condition which means effects a control operation on the
    apparatus.  In this subclass the condition or change of condition is
    usually a misalignment, tangling, and/or breaking of a projected helix.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92.5,   for automatic control combined with pattern or cording means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, see (2) Note.

    83,     Cutting, see (2) Note.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 116.5+ for control
    mechanism, per se, usually automatic in operation, for stopping a machine
    when some part of the machine fails to function, or the material fails or
    is disarranged.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.


CLS 140/92.8
TXT Apparatus under subclass 92.3 including means for shifting rows of loops or
    openings successively into position for application of a helix.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes means which in addition effect a
    relative shift along the cylindrical axis of a projected helix, in
    increments of half the helix pitch, between the projector and a row of
    loops, said shift occurring between successive interlacing operations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.


CLS 140/92.9
TXT Apparatus under subclass 92.3 characterized by the shifting of helix
    rotating means along a path substantially parallel to the cylindrical axis
    of a rotated helix during the intercoiling of the helix.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are devices wherein shifting is
    effected solely by screwing action of a helix with respect to a row of
    loops or with respect to a fixed abutment in line with and in front of said
    row, the screwing action being imparted by positive rotation of a helix
    gripping chuck.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92.8,   for axially shifting of helix rotation means combined with loop row
    shifting means.


CLS 140/92.93
TXT Apparatus under subclass 92.3 including a plurality of axially parallel,
    radially spaced, grooved rollers, through which a helix is simultaneously
    guided, rotated, and advanced.


CLS 140/92.94
TXT Apparatus under subclass 92.3 including channel or grooved means through
    which a helix is projected, with or without helix deflecting elements,
    which fix the path along which the helix travels.

    (1)     Note.  Included are helix guide means which serve to juxtaposition
    portions of a loop row with respect to another loop row and the path of a
    projected helix.

    (2)     Note.  Included are channel or grooved means positioned about both
    helix and loop row.


CLS 140/93
TXT Applying wire to articles--such as making and applying belt-lacings, wire
    couplings, clips, or joints, wiring nursery tags, making folding partition
    box packing, fastening springs to articles and the like the wire being
    bent, coiled, or twisted in a manner characteristic of wire-working
    devices, but excluding wire-winding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 243.5+ for overedge assembly apparatus,
    e.g., a machine for applying belt books to a belt, in subclass 243.51.

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 67+, 131+ and 432+.

    81,     Tools, subclass 9.3 for applying wire rings and clamps to hose
    couplings.

    128,    Surgery, subclass 332.

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 25 for a box hooping machine.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclass 82 for combined
    apparatus for forming and applying a member, e.g., nail.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 375+ for applying wire to a tag, usually
    involving feeding, cutting, twisting, or knotting.


CLS 140/93.2
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93 by which a flexible filament strand or band
    encircling the material is tensioned to increase its tightness about the
    material and while so tensioned has spaced portions secured together, such
    apparatus being supported manually or on the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123.6,  for stretching implements having a cutting feature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 29 for binder applying and securing apparatus,
    not otherwise provided for, such apparatus not being supported by the work
    or supported manually.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 199+ for portable implements or apparatus for tensioning
    flexible material (e.g., tightening cord around a box) from which the
    implements or apparatus are detached after tensioning.


CLS 140/93.4
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93.2 in which the means to secure together the
    spaced portions of the binder includes means to deform a sleeve, a U-shaped
    clamp member within which the portions are received.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 30 for binder applying and securing apparatus,
    not otherwise provided for, the securing being by the deformation of a
    sleeve or U-shaped clamp about the said portions, such apparatus not being
    supported by the work or supported manually.

    150+,   for a sleeve of clamp deforming tool, per se, joining the ends of
    binder strip or wire.


CLS 140/93.6
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93.2 in which the tensioning of the binder about
    the material involves the intertwisting of the local spaced portions of the
    binder, such twisting being employed for joining the binder portions
    together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118+,   for wire joining twister implements, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 31 for binder applying and securing apparatus not
    otherwise provided for, and including means for joining spaced portions of
    the binder element by the intertwisting of such spaced portions, such
    apparatus not being supported by the work or supported manually.


CLS 140/94
TXT Wiring corks and bottles to provide suitable fastenings for securing the
    corks or stoppers to the bottles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for devices including more than the operation of wiring, as corking
    and wiring, etc.


CLS 140/95
TXT Devices for wiring bottles and corks having means for rotating the bottle.


CLS 140/97
TXT Applying wire to a suitable back, producing what is technically known as
    card-clothing, employed in carding machines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclass 114 for the article and its
    structural features, construction of teeth, etc.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    devices for forming wire pins and inserting them into work, subclasses 79+
    for devices for inserting wire into work and severing the inserted portion,
    and subclass 77 for devices for inserting card teeth and bending the
    inserted ends to engage the wool.


CLS 140/100
TXT Applying or inserting a single row of teeth or combing needles in a narrow
    back or holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97.


CLS 140/101
TXT Inventions in what is technically known as "knotting"--i.e., securing the
    ends of a spiral wire spring either to itself or to another spring.  The
    subclass, however, is intended to receive all miscellaneous patents
    involving wire-knotting devices not directly classifiable elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93.2,   for apparatus supported manually or on the work and tightening and
    joining a flexible binder therearound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 257, 271, and 272 for illustrated methods of
    "knotting".

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 433, and indented subclasses for machines for
    knotting cord or wire.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 29+ and 32 for binding devices not elsewhere
    classified, having means to join the ends of the binder.

    289,    Knots and Knot Tying, subclass 2 and indented subclasses, to and
    including subclass 12.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 375+ for applying wire to a tag, usually
    involving feeding, cutting, twisting, or knotting.


CLS 140/102
TXT Inventions for forming loops in or doubling wire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    when the loop is formed into an eye; and 88.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 5.

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 138, 139, 142, 145, 147, 150, 151, and 433
    and indented subclasses.

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclasses 21, 22 and 71.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclass 77 for applying a
    member, e.g., wire, to work and deform an end portion, e.g., to form a loop.

    289,    Knots and Knot Tying, subclass 2 and indented subclasses, to and
    including subclass 12.


CLS 140/102.5
TXT Loop-forming implements for operating upon a wire strand intermediate its
    ends for the purpose of taking up slack, the implement being then removed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 71.1. and indented
    subclasses for permanent tighteners applicable to a strand intermediate its
    ends.


CLS 140/103
TXT Coiling the ends of wire loops or other portions thereof.


CLS 140/104
TXT Forming eyes or closed loops in wire, generally by bending or twisting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73,     88, 102, and 114.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 7 for eyebolt and hook making devices;  9
    for fish-hook making, and 20, for forming eyes in spectacle frames.

    79,     Button Making, subclass 2 for forming eyes in wire button shanks.

    163,    Needle and Pin Making, subclass 7.


CLS 140/105
TXT Forming crimps or kinks in wire or wire fabrics.  This subclass includes
    all but the implements which are classified in the subclass immediately
    following.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses for a method of or means
    for corrugating a metal workpiece, for instance (but not exhaustively),
    subclass 196, for shaping by a "flying tool" engaging moving work, and
    subclass 385 for corrugating a stationary work-piece between bending dies.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    339+ for processes for reshaping or deforming sheets or webs of paper or
    paper like material.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 369 for an endless surface (e.g., roll, etc.) type means having
    structure for corrugating a preform, and subclass 391 for a preform
    convoluting or twisting means not otherwise provided for.


CLS 140/106
TXT Hand tools specially adapted for crimping wire.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, particularly subclasses 300+ for tool-jaw(s) positioned by
    relatively movable plural handles (e.g., pliers).


CLS 140/107
TXT Wire-working operations upon wire fabrics or in finishing the same by
    gaging, straightening, leveling, compressing, cutting, forming, or shaping
    by dies, etc., and not classifiable in the minor subclasses below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses for mere bending or
    straightening of a metal workpiece.


CLS 140/108
TXT Devices for stretching wire fabric, but not devices for stretching
    individual wires, nor permanent, portable or removable fence stretchers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123.5   and indented subclass for wire-working implements for stretching
    individual wires.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclasses 71+ for apparatus to stretch
    natural and plastic cloth, as running webs; and see subclasses 51+ for the
    combination therewith of a diverse operation.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclass 46.

    112,    Sewing, subclass 119 for quilting-frame structure.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 199+ for portable implements or apparatus for tensioning
    flexible material (e.g., wire fence fabric, fence wires) from which the
    implements or apparatus are detached after tensioning.

    256,    Fences, subclass 37 and indented subclasses for permanently mounted
    fence stretchers.


CLS 140/109
TXT Stretchers specially adapted for use in attaching wire fabrics to frames,
    such as screen, door, and window frames.


CLS 140/110
TXT Frame-attaching devices particularly adapted for securing wire-mattress
    fabric to bed frames.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclass 211, and indented subclasses for permanent
    stretchers attached to the frame.


CLS 140/111
TXT Miscellaneous devices and processes for joining or uniting wires not
    classifiable in the minor subclasses below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 282 for a means to join wires by crimping a
    sleeve around them, subclasses 432+ for a method including a step of
    driving a nail or staple into work and not elsewhere classified, subclass
    461 for processes of joining wire cables which include a step of spreading
    the strands of the cables to provide larger surface contact, and subclasses
    517+ for processes of joining wires together by deforming a hollow sleeve
    around them.

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 432 for means mounted on a harvester and
    operatively connected therewith for forming compact bundles of stalks and
    binding them as the harvester travels through the field, particularly
    subclasses 451+ wherein the bundle is encircled by wire or the like, and
    the ends of the wire twisted together, and subclasses 464+ for such devices
    wherein a cord binder is used the ends of which are clamped together by a
    clip.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    49 for processes for splicing indefinite length electrical conductors not
    elsewhere provided for.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 91+ and particularly subclass 110 for
    processes of joining wire by metal casting operations.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, appropriate subclasses for making a joint by
    soldering, brazing or welding.

    289,    Knots and Knot Tying, appropriate subclasses for devices for
    joining cords or strands wherein the portions of the parts joined are not
    held together by reasons wholly of the rigidity of the material.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for joints of
    general utility.


CLS 140/112
TXT Joining wire by the process of electric welding, particularly in
    fabric-making.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 617 and 50+ for electric welding.
    Note particularly indented subclasses 51+, 56+, 605, and 636.


CLS 140/113
TXT Machines for tying, splicing, or otherwise securing the ends of wires
    together or securing one wire to another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93.2,   for apparatus for tensioning and joining a flexible binder in which
    the apparatus is supported manually or on the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 131, and indented subclasses.

    100,    Presses, subclass 33 for apparatus not elsewhere classified for
    joining the ends of a binder in which the apparatus has a support for the
    material to be bound.


CLS 140/114
TXT Machines for forming eyes in the ends of wires and interlocking the same in
    the process of forming, consisting principally of devices for making
    check-row wire, but not limited thereto.


CLS 140/115
TXT Wire-splicing machines having a revoluble head or jaw for twisting-or
    coiling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for twister-heads.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclass 154 for twisting-heads.


CLS 140/116
TXT Dies employed in machines for splicing or joining wires.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     20 and 113, for the machines in which the dies are used.


CLS 140/117
TXT Miscellaneous hand tools for splicing or securing wires together and not
    classifiable in the subclass defined below. Includes all implements for
    coiling or winding one wire about another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124,    for implements employed in making a wire coil rather than in
    joining wires.


CLS 140/118
TXT Implements for mutually twisting two wires together a twist being imparted
    to wire, so that they are intertwisted.

    Most of the implements of this subclass are employed in the manufacture of
    slatted wire fabrics.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102.5,  for implements employed in looping and twisting fence strands for
    the purpose of taking up slack and stretching them, and 117, if the tool
    operates to coil or wind one wire about another which remains straight.


CLS 140/119
TXT Wire-splicing implements having a rotary jaw or head for receiving the
    wires to be intertwisted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for twister-heads, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclass 154 for twisting-heads.


CLS 140/120
TXT Wire-twisting tools having means for separating the wires to be twisted or
    spreading them apart adjacent to the point of twisting.


CLS 140/121
TXT Wire-joining tools of the plier type, particularly adapted either for
    coiling or twisting wires together.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, subclasses 125+ for compound tools of the plier
    type.

    81,     Tools, subclasses 300+ for miscellaneous tools of plier type.

    433,    Dentistry, subclass 4 for orthodontic wireworking pliers.


CLS 140/122
TXT Implements provided with a rotary coiler or winder for splicing wires
    together by winding or coiling one wire about another.


CLS 140/123
TXT Miscellaneous hand tools specially adapted for working wire not
    classifiable in the other subclasses of implements in this class or which
    include other matter not classifiable in such classes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, and 81, Tools for specific structural features.

    81,     Tools, particularly subclass 300 for tool-jaw(s) positioned by
    relatively movable plural handles (e.g., pliers).

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 3+ for orthodontic implements for working
    with arch wire.


CLS 140/123.5
TXT Wire-working implements including means for stretching the wire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102.5,  and for fabric stretchers subclasses 108+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing of Pulling Force,
    subclasses 199+ for portable imlements or apparatus for tensioning flexible
    material (e.g., wire fence fabric, fence wires) from which the implements
    or apparatus are detached after tensioning.


CLS 140/123.6
TXT Wire-stretching implements, including means for severing the wire.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 32 for apparatus, not provided for elsewhere, by
    which a binder encircling material is tensioned to increase its tightness
    about the material.


CLS 140/124
TXT Hand tools for making wire coils, but not tools for coiling one wire about
    another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117+,   for tools for coiling one wire about another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses for an apparatus for
    convoluting metal work.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 439.3, 442, and 916 for
    hand tool for winding wire coils on a core of comparatively short length.


CLS 140/139
TXT Devices that both straighten and cut wire.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    153,    Metal Binding, subclass 89 for devices which straighten and cut
    wire in which the straightening is by bending the metal back and forth and
    proceeding with such work continuously along the metal to treat each
    successive portion similarly.


CLS 140/140
TXT Wire straightening and cutting devices having means to produce straight
    wires of given length, the cutting mechanism usually being actuated by the
    wire to be cut.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    devices for applying nails, staples and clips by driving and/or clenching
    in combination with means to form the element to be applied including
    cutting predetermined lengths of wire.


CLS 140/147
TXT Devices specially adapted for straightening wire.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, and see (81) Note herein-above.


CLS 140/149
TXT Miscellaneous wire-twisting devices not classifiable in other subclasses of
    this or other arts under appropriate titles.

    (1)     Search this class, particular groups under Article making or
    forming.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 132, 133, 451+, and 458.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, appropriate subclasses.

    72,     Metal Deforming, and see (81) and (83) Notes hereinabove.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 375+ for devices for applying wire to tags,
    usually involving feeding, cutting, twisting, or knotting devices.


CLS 140/150
TXT SEAL APPLYING OR BAND FASTENING:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising a manually manipulatable or
    work supported apparatus for applying a tag or fastener to or otherwise
    securing the end portions of a flexible strand or band.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 30 for binder tightening and securing apparatus,
    not elsewhere provided for, and including means to secure the spaced
    portions of the binder by deforming a sleeve or a U-shape clamp member,
    within which the said portions are received.


CLS 140/151
TXT By device having magazine for seals or fastener:

    Apparatus under subclass 150 further including means to store a supply of
    the tags or fasteners and to dispense or present one of the tags or
    fastener upon demand.


CLS 140/152
TXT By device having cutting edge:

    Apparatus under subclass 150 including a work contacting portion which
    penetrates the work to separate one portion from another.


CLS 140/153
TXT By device having single throw lever:

    Apparatus under subclass 150 including a force multiplying actuator bar
    comprising an elongated pivoted bar adapted to be moved about a pivot by
    hand whereby a single sweep of the bar causes the apparatus to apply the
    tag or fastener, or otherwise secure the end portions of the strand or band.


CLS 140/154
TXT Including pivoted force multiplier between die and lever:

    Apparatus under subclass 153 including a second bar or link pivotally
    connected to a work contacting portion and to the actuator bar to further
    increase the force applied by hand through the actuator bar.


CLS 141/
TTL FLUENT MATERIAL HANDLING,  WITH RECEIVER OR RECEIVER  COACTING MEANS

CLS 141/
TXT OUTLINE OF NOTES



    I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    II.     DEFINITIONS OF TERMS USED

    III.    COMBINATIONS OF FILLING APPARATUS WITH TREATING OR MANUFACTURING
    DEVICES

    IV.     INDEX AND MISCELLANEOUS CLASS NOTES

    I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    (1)     This class provides for the transfer of fluent material, gaseous,
    liquid or flowable granular solids, through a flow confining system, the
    source and terminal or receiver parts of which are normally separable,
    i.e., one or both parts are portable or are otherwise capable of or
    intended to have a utility in their separated condition.  Such utility
    ordinarily lies in portability of a separated part, either for use of the
    contents material in another place, or for use of one of the system parts
    with another complementary part.  Each part therefore must comprise an
    entity capable of use independent of the other, and together the parts
    provide a flow path from a source or dispenser to a terminal part or
    receiver, thereby comprising a filling system.

    (2)     This class takes a mere dispenser-receiver combination where
    separability is claimed or is inherent, and also takes means to deliver
    material to a receiver when there is claimed some system characteristic
    which peculiarly relates the receiver to the dispenser to define a coaction
    of one with the other to complete the dispenser-receiver relationship; as
    for example, guiding or confining means for the receiver, related conveying
    means for either the receiver or dispenser or both, or a receiver support
    which is not merely a support for the dispenser but is some member or
    modification beyond the structural requirements therefor.

    (3)     The scope of this class does not include method and apparatus for
    handling fluent material except in a manner characteristic of fluid flow.
    For the most part the material supply processes and apparatus involve
    discharge assistants and fluid flow guiding means of the Class 222 type.

    (4)     This class takes systems as above defined including receivers which
    close (i.e., self-closing) upon separation or uncoupling from the supply.

    (5)     This class also includes processes of varying gaseous conditions in
    a vessel or container, i.e., evacuating or maintaining a vacuum in a
    container, by sorption or gettering means incased in such container where
    the claims are silent respecting any sealing off, or do not include steps
    of closing and additionally where the sorption or gettering is not of the
    kind provided for elsewhere.

    (6)     This class also includes certain combinations and subcombinations
    which appear to fall short of the receiver coacting means requirement set
    out above, as in the last four "first line" subclass groups of this class.
    Though they require no more than what might be considered to be Class 222
    subject matter, the concept of a normally detached, readily connectable,
    dispenser-receiver relation (see I (2) above) is satisfied.

    II.     DEFINITIONS OF TERMS USED

    CUT-OFF

    The term as used in this class means some mechanically operative element or
    device (not gas pressure) which arrests flow of material.

    CYCLICAL OPERATION

    This term describes a filling system in which no operator intervention is
    required from the time a receiver is placed in filling position at least
    until the receiver is filled and ready to be removed.  The flow of contents
    material may be cut off by a movement of the receiver which occurs in the
    sequence of events in the machine.

    DISPENSER

    A mechanism which affirmatively effects or permits separation of a portion
    of the contents material supply thereof and discharge in a definite
    direction or path.

    FILLING HEAD

    The portion of a dispenser or source part of the system which comprises the
    flow outlet or flow confining terminus and other flow confining structure
    which may be in advance (up-stream) of it back to the supply.

    FUNNEL

    A fluid handling device of increasingly restricted capacity in the
    direction of flow and having its free end arranged to enter into the inlet
    of a receiver, being ordinarily designed to collect an unconfined flow and
    channel it into a narrower flow path or one which is out of line with the
    previous path or flow direction.  The material may be retained in the
    funnel body by valve means, and the funnel may comprise the only claimed
    supply means of the filling system or an intermediate or final receiver,
    and may be supported by either the preceding or succeeding flow confining
    means, or by a means external to the flow system.

    MANUFACTURE

    In order to draw a line with the manufacturing classes which may include
    filling, the term is used here as meaning an operation on material, or
    apparatus for operating on material, to effect a permanent or irreversible
    change in the physical character of the material, e.g. cutting, crushing,
    shaping and boring, or to arrange the parts of an article of manufacture
    into their desired relation, i.e., assembling.

    MATERIAL GUIDE

    Means other than funnels to direct material from supply to receiver without
    forming a flow-confining connection between them.  Examples of material
    guides in this class are:  (1) A nonflow support for contents material
    associated with a receiver support over which the material can be pushed or
    moved manually into the receiver; (2) A flow directing detachable extension
    of a receiver inlet which may be either tubular or channel-shaped in
    cross-section.  If tubular and tapering, it must either engage the receiver
    externally or be located entirely within the receiver.  Cf funnel, above;
    or (3) An extension of a supply container which is hand held, the extension
    being designed to engage the receiver and direct the flow thereto.

    RECEIVER

    A device which accepts the material from the dispenser and is capable of
    confining fluids within a predetermined or predescribed volumetric
    configuration, and does not therefore rely upon surface tension or
    molecular cohesive forces to preclude escape of material therefrom.

    SUPPLY MEANS

    The contents material confining means of the dispenser.

    SYSTEM

    The combination of dispenser and receiver in flow exchange relation with
    any or all appurtenances thereof.

    TREATMENT

    With respect to the treatment classes, treatment as here construed is
    concerned with reversible changes in the physical characteristics of
    contents material such as exemplified by agitating, heating, cooling,
    sorting and the like.

    III.    COMBINATIONS OF FILLING APPARATUS WITH TREATING OR MANUFACTURING
    APPARATUS

    (1)     As between this class (141) and Class 53, Package Making, Class 53
    takes methods of and apparatus for packaging where some manufacturing
    operation as to either the package or its contents material is included
    anywhere along the line.  Class 53 includes among other packaging
    inventions the following:

    Chemical packaging

    The selection of materials for cover and/or lining compatible with chemical
    or reactive contents material for package making is considered a type of
    manufacture, and is included in Class 53.

    Article packaging

    Methods of packaging articles and apparatus for packaging articles not
    however those which rely upon fluid-flow handling methods or apparatus.

    Contents treating and packaging

    Methods of and apparatus for packaging with or without closing if the
    contents material is treated or prepared by processes or apparatus
    involving an irreversible operation more commonly known as manufacture.

    Filling with fluent material

    Filling with fluent materials where an arrangement not obtainable by fluent
    material flow results.  Mere compacting is not included, but the packaging
    of a compacted charge which is subsequently handled as an article is, and
    also compacting to produce a package of a definite predetermined shape.

    Receiver or cover making and filling Methods of and apparatus for forming a
    cover or receiver and filling with fluent material or articles with or
    without closing including opening the receiver, e.g., a collapsed bag, or
    any covered receiver.  Opening self-closing type receivers and filling with
    fluents is excepted. See I(4) above.

    Receiver filling and closing

    Methods of and apparatus for filling receivers with articles and/or fluent
    materials and closing such receivers.

    Receiver filling

    Filling apparatus including additional means claimed in combination
    therewith having utility only in a closing or closure applying or
    associating function is included in Class 53, for example, relative to
    "jetting", such structure for supporting closure means and moving same
    through a jetting stream or the like with an associated filled receiver
    even though the step of or means for depositing the closure on the receiver
    is omitted, or receiver spacing or holding means after filling for cover
    application or a closing operation without applying the closure or closing.

    (2)     As to the treatment classes, the line is whether or not there is
    present some handling operation other than supplying material to or
    removing it from the treatment area or chamber.  Those patents which claim
    more than the handling incidental to treatment are placed in the
    appropriate material handling class, including this one, as they are also
    in many instances where the treatment device is claimed by name only, with
    incidental handling means and no other.

    (3)     SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclasses 118+ and 121+ for processes of
    or apparatus for compacting loose fibers in a tampon or wad and inserting
    the same into a sheath or applicator device.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 742.1+ for a
    process of filling a preformed cavity in an in situ erected type structure
    with a flowable material.

    53,     Package Making, appropriate subclasses for methods or and apparatus
    for encompassing or encasing goods or materials and see III (1) above.

    86,     Ammunition and Explosive-Charge Making, for processes and apparatus
    there classified on an art basis.

    100,    Presses, for methods and apparatus for compacting material in
    filler receivers where feeding of fluent material into the receiver is not
    involved and see section V of that class (100).

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 235 for a filter and
    coacting receiver, and subclasses 473+ for a filter-receiver combination.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, for comminutors
    claimed in combination with means to discharge the material therefrom into
    a portable receptacle.  See particularly subclass 100 and section 9 of the
    class definition of that class (241).

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 428+ for ray energy generators there
    classified including means to admit vapor or gas into, or to withdraw gas
    or vapor from the interior of the envelope of the X-ray generator.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, or the appropriate composition
    class, for processes of storing chemicals when a chemical combination is
    involved from which the chemicals may be subsequently released, even though
    the storing takes place in a container or the initial reaction and/or the
    decomposition reaction is claimed.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    appropriate subclasses, for processes within the class definition, in which
    plastic material may be shaped or molded in a receptacle and subsequently
    removable therefrom, said receptacle acting as a mold. For treatment of a
    mold to facilitate removal thereof from the contained molded material, see
    subclasses 39, 213, 221, 224, 264, 300, 313+, 338, and 353.5.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, particularly subclasses 7,
    545, 546, 547+ and 552 for evacuating pumps and gas or vapor generating or
    pressure regulating means.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclasses 108+ for
    confined gas or vapor type load device with pressure regulating means.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, for process and apparatus appropriate to that
    class and see this class (141) particularly subclasses 11, 70 and 85.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 447+ for the combination of means providing a shaping surface
    (e.g., a mold, etc.) and means feeding fluent stock thereto; see the search
    notes thereunder.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 392+ for food working operations combined with packaging.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    for methods of manufacture and apparatus for electric lamp devices,
    particularly subclasses 38+, 53+, 70 and 73 for combined operations.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, especially subclasses 2+, 15
    and 899 for processes which may involve the storage of hydrocarbons.



    IV.     INDEX AND MISCELLANEOUS CLASS NOTES

    5,      Beds, subclasses 671+ for filling or draining a waterbed bladder.

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclasses 118+ and 121.      (III) (3)

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 58 for miscellaneous processes of
    packaging or potting plants and the like and subclass 1.01 for
    miscellaneous apparatus therefor.

    53,     Package Making, General (III)(I), (3)

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 864.01+ for a pipette, per se.

    86,     Ammunition and Explosive-Charge Making, General (III) (3)

    100,    Presses, General        (III) (3)

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclasses for indicators and
    mechanically produced signals.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 14.01+ for milking machines involving
    vacuumizing the receiver.

    137,    Fluid Handling, for methods of and apparatus for handling fluid
    materials, appropriate subclasses, where "normally detached, connectable
    supply and receiver" does not predominate, and  particularly 154+ for
    diverse fluid containing pressure systems; 223+ for inflatable article
    filling chuck and/or stem; 263 and 571+ for fluent material handling
    systems comprising plural tanks connected for serial flow; 317+ for means
    for tapping systems under pressure; and 386+ for liquid level responsive or
    maintaining systems.

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclasses 52+ for a weigher correlating the
    movement of a series of receivers with respect to the weigh station,
    subclass 59 for a weigher correlated with a receiver, subclasses 60+ for
    weigher responsive material control without handling or treatment in
    addition to supplying, filling, weighing, removing material from the
    weigher or removing a receiver from filling-weighing position, and
    subclasses 253+ for load holders, particularly subclasses 262+ for scale
    pans.

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, appropriate subclasses
    particularly 2+ for loading and unloading chutes for conveying material by
    gravity flow.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, for a power-driven conveyor, or for such
    a conveyor combined with a gravity conveyor.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, appropriate subclasses for a
    container particularly configured to hold a specific article or material
    including an article (s) or material (s) put up as a mercantile unit.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 235,
    473.+        (III) (3)

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 86.1+ for attachments which serve as
    filling devices, such as attached funnels.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 96 for receptacle dispensers combined
    with a fluent material dispenser where the relationship is nominal and does
    not qualify under Section (I)(2) e.g., the receiver is not supplied to,
    guided into, or supported at the fluent material dispenser for filling by
    the receptacle dispensing means.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for dispensers, and subclass 130
    for plural compartments, one defining a dispensing means, the other storage
    means for cups or receptacles and not qualifying as an article dispenser
    for Class 221.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, for receptacles of that
    material.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass
    100.     (III) (3)

    248,    Supports, subclasses 94 and 95+ for strainer or funnel type and bag
    supports respectively wherein the strainer, funnel spout etc., are claimed
    by name only and wherein the means supporting the bag is not modified to
    hold and fill the bag and where flow control is not claimed.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses
    428+.           (III) (3)

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, for actuators there classified.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds,
    General         (III) (3)

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes, III
    (3)

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 7 and 545, 546,
    547+,552                        (III) (3)

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 108+.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, appropriate subclasses for electric
    signaling.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 118+ for a
    container for a supply of coating material in combination with a separable
    applicator (which may be a part of the closure for the container) which
    transports the material from the container and applies it to a work surface
    by rubbing contact therewith; provided that force-applying means to move
    material from the container to the applicator is either entirely absent
    from the combination or is present in the applicator only.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 404+ for a device for
    emptying the contents of a portable receptacle into a portable receiving
    means, and wherein the transfer is accomplished by mutually inverting both
    the receiver and the same.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 40+ for process involving protective
    layers.     (III) (3)

    426,    Food or Edible Material:        Processes, Compositions, and
    Products   (III) (3)

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    subclasses 38+, 53+, 70, and 73.

    452,    Butchering, subclasses 35+ for apparatus dealing with sausage
    stuffing.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, appropriate subclasses 164+ for distributors and feeders.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon
    Compounds       (III) (3)


CLS 141/1
TXT Processes under the class definition.

    (1)     Note.  All patents containing method claims drawn to the method of
    operation of any of the systems or parts thereof involved in the class are
    included in this and the indented subclasses, but methods of making parts
    of the systems are not included.  They will be found in the subclass
    providing for the system or part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 396+ for methods pertaining to the
    subject matter of that class, but including methods of this class with the
    additional step of closing or otherwise manipulating for the purposes of
    Class 53.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 1+ for processes analogous to the
    processes of this class but not involving the feature of separability of
    the system components.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 1 for processes of dispensing.


CLS 141/1.1
TXT Processes under subclass 1 for filling battery grids or electrodes with
    fluent material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for the corresponding apparatus.


CLS 141/2
TXT Processes under subclass 1 in which a dispenser type receiver is filled by
    steps involving manipulation of the dispenser as an incident to or aid to
    refilling or filling the supply chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18+,    for apparatus for filling or refilling dispensers and involving the
    use of dispenser parts in connection with or as an aid to the operation of
    the apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, for processes of dispensing.


CLS 141/3
TXT Processes under subclass 2 in which the dispenser receiver is of the
    aerosol type, i.e., the material to be dispensed, powder or liquid, is
    dissolved in or carried by a vaporizing propellant which forms the charge
    of the dispenser.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for apparatus for filling or refilling aerosol type dispensers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 394+ for aerosol type dispensers.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 8+ for
    processes of mixing a material with a fluid and then spraying; subclasses
    337+ for apparatus spraying a plurality of materials and comprising a
    holder for one material to be entrained or dissolved in a gas; subclass 372
    for aerosol type spray holders with a specifically claimed nozzle;
    subclasses 398+ for mixing and discharging a plurality of fluids; and
    subclass 573 for a discharge nozzle having a valve providing an expansion
    chamber of the aerosol type.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 302+ for colloid compositions and methods
    of making the same.


CLS 141/4
TXT Processes under subclass 1 which include steps relating to the presence,
    absence or manipulation of gas in connection with the receiver.

    (1)     Note.  Processes of treating the contents of the receiver while in
    the receiver, and also processes of pretreating the receiver with gaseous
    fluid are included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5+,     for processes of filling receivers with gas and nongaseous fluent
    materials.

    8,      for processes for evacuating receivers and subsequently filling
    with gas.

    37+,    for apparatus pertaining to the filling of receivers under
    conditions involving gas and contents material other than gas in a confined
    system, and see the search notes to subclass 37 for other apparatus in this
    and other classes for filling apparatus involving gaseous modification or
    application.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclass 403 for processes for filling a receiver
    with gas with subsequent closing, and subclasses 432+ for processes in
    which vacuum treatment or gas treatment is applied for contents treatment.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, for processes of gas separation, per se.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 154+ for fluid handling pressure systems
    containing diverse fluids, subclasses 1+ for fluid handling processes
    involving gases, especially subclass 12.5 for processes for handling
    carbonated beverages.


CLS 141/5
TXT Processes under subclass 4 in which fluent material other than gaseous
    material is handled in connection with the filling operation.

    (1)     Note.  The materials other than gaseous may be either liquid or
    fluent solids.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37+,    for apparatus for filling with gas and fluent material other than
    gas, and see the search notes to subclass 37 for additional search fields.


CLS 141/6
TXT Processes under subclass 5 in which gaseous material is introduced into the
    receiver ahead of nongaseous material in order to equalize pressure between
    receiver and supply prior to filling with the main contents material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37+,    for apparatus for carrying out the processes of this subclass.


CLS 141/7
TXT Processes under subclass 5 in which gaseous material is withdrawn from the
    container before, during or after filling of the container with nongaseous
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59+,    for apparatus for filling receivers with evacuation of gaseous
    material from the receiver before or during filling with other material.

    64,     for gas treatment of filled receivers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, for processes for contents treating with vacuum or
    gas in processes of that class, which may be the processes of Class 141
    with additional steps pertaining to the manufacture of either the contents
    or the receiver.


CLS 141/8
TXT Processes under subclass 4 in which gaseous material is removed from a
    receiver.

    (1)     Note.  The product of this operation is a receiver more or less
    completely evacuated and with or without a refilling of gaseous material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for filling with gas without evacuating steps.

    65+,    for evacuation apparatus, and see the search notes to subclass 65
    for additional search field.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclass 405 for processes of gas evacuation and
    closing, and subclass 408 for gas evacuation followed by gas filling and
    closing.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 7 and 174+ for
    evacuating pumps and with getter gas or vapor generating means or pressure
    regulating means there classified.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    subclasses 38+, 53+, 70, and 73 for methods of manufacture and apparatus
    for electric lamp devices including evacuation and degasification combined
    with other operations.


CLS 141/9
TXT Processes under subclass 1 in which plural fluent materials are supplied to
    the receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100+,   for apparatus for filling receivers with plural fluent materials.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 470+ for processes of filling receivers
    with articles and fluent materials.


CLS 141/10
TXT Processes under subclass 1 in which the receiver is a bag, i.e., a
    receptacle of nonself-sustaining material, the manipulation of which is not
    characteristic of the handling of preformed rigid receivers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114+,   for apparatus for filling flexible or collapsible receivers in
    which there is manipulation of the receivers to change its shape or
    dimensions, and see the search notes to subclass 114 for additional search
    fields.


CLS 141/11
TXT Processes under subclass 1 involving alteration of a physical
    characteristic of the contents material before, during, or after filling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69+,    for apparatus for carrying out the processes of this subclass.

    82,     for apparatus for heating or cooling contents material before,
    during or after filling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclass 428 for processes which in addition to the
    material of Class 141 include additional steps pertaining to the
    manufacture of either the contents or the receiver.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 392+ for packaging processes involving the treatment of food.


CLS 141/12
TXT Processes under subclass 11 in which the treatment involved increases the
    density of the charge within the receiver.

    (1)     Note.  The steps which result in compacting must be other than or
    in addition to the compacting effect of certain discharge assistants, the
    operation of which may or may not compact the material according to the
    nature of the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73+,    for apparatus for compacting material in the receiver, and subclass
    81 for discharge assistants of the trap type which compact the charge after
    it has been separated from the main supply.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclass 436 for processes of packaging with
    compacting which involve in addition to the steps of Class 141 additional
    steps relating either to the manufacture of the contents or the manufacture
    or closing of the receiver.


CLS 141/13
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which a method of operation,
    characteristic of the filling of a single receiver or several receivers, is
    modified during the opening or closing period of operation of the mechanism
    for the purpose of allowing coordination of operations some of which may be
    delayed proportionally to others at such periods of beginning and ending
    operation of the mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  Such factors as those essential to the operation of the
    machine as a supply of contents material or of receivers are not considered
    to be modifying factors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139     and 153, for automatic control of the operation of successive
    receptacle type fillers by contents material.

    140+,   for interrupted or irregular cycle of operation involving no can-no
    fill devices.

    155,    for safety stops in successive type receptacle fillers.

    156+,   for filling systems involving successive receivers where filling is
    triggered by the receiver.


CLS 141/14
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means for filling or
    refilling bottles of the pressure fluid discharge type.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this subclass more than a mere
    reference to apparatus for use for a siphon bottle filling is required,
    e.g., a claimed support or guide means for the siphon bottle, combined
    siphon bottle valve operator and bottle holding arrangement, interacting
    fill valve and dispenser operators, or siphon bottle dispensing nozzle and
    means to press the said nozzle to a filling pipe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18+,    for other apparatus for filling or refilling dispensers, especially
    subclass 20 for apparatus for filling aerosol dispensers, which are
    distinguished by the fact that the propellant is supplied in liquid form,
    the device usually not being refillable.


CLS 141/15
TXT Devices under subclass 14 in which the bottle is provided with a filling
    opening which is distinct from its dispensing opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    325+,   for receivers with plural openings.


CLS 141/16
TXT Apparatus under subclass 14 having plural filling means either at the same
    or different locations or wherein there is provided means whereby different
    charges or substances may be delivered to the bottle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100+,   for other filling apparatus involving plural materials, material
    supplies or charges in a receiver.

    234+,   for apparatus including plural filling heads.


CLS 141/17
TXT Apparatus under subclass 14 including means for handling (e.g., piercing),
    or supporting a separable gas supply cartridge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for filling dispensers with gas from a gas pressure cartridge
    including a cutter or punch.

    329,    for filling means requiring puncturing type connections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 119+ for liquids
    contained in receptacles in contact with gases.


CLS 141/18
TXT Apparatus under the class definition defining a source of supply and
    filling means claimed in combination with a receiver having some
    characteristic recognized as a dispenser, or claimed as having features of
    utility only in connection with receivers of the dispensing type.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this subclass there must be claimed a
    receiver with some dispensing part which cooperates with the filling means
    or there must be dispenser structure (other than force-producing means
    confined to a fountain applicator) claimed, the reverse operation of which
    assists in the filling thereof.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass and those indented thereunder may define the
    characteristics of the receiver-dispenser and not necessarily the supply
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for methods relating to the filling of dispensers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 149+ for cleaners where provided which may
    extend through the dispenser outlet nozzle.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclass 119 for the
    combination of (a) a source of supply and filling means with (b) an
    applicator with material supply (e.g., fountain pen), in which combination
    means to produce force to move coating material from the source of supply
    to the applicator is either entirely absent or is present in the applicator
    only.


CLS 141/19
TXT Apparatus under subclass 18 including a piercing or penetrating means for
    cooperation with a gas capsule.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329+,   for filling means with receiver coacting means requiring a
    puncturing type connection, and see the search notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, subclasses 85+ for portable fire extinguishers
    involving gas pressure discharge.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 5 for gas or vapor dispersers including a
    cutter or punch.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 271 and 309
    for piercing means combined with a nozzle apparatus for discharging fluids,
    and other appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 337+ and 398+ for
    apparatus which sprays one fluid by the pressure differential caused by the
    flow of another.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 121+ for gas and
    liquid contact apparatus involving cutter or punch.


CLS 141/20
TXT Apparatus under subclass 18 in which the dispenser is of the aerosol type,
    i.e., the material to be dispensed is dissolved and/or carried by a
    vaporizing propellant which forms the charge of the dispensing container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for processes involving the filling of aerosol type dispensers, and
    see the search notes thereto.

    14+,    for apparatus for filling or refilling siphon bottles with gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 337+ and 398+ for apparatus which sprays one fluid by
    the pressure differential caused by the flow of another.


CLS 141/20.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 18 in which the receiver dispenser is a manually
    manipulated device (e.g., fountain pen) used for applying or spreading a
    coating material on a work surface by contact therewith, and in which the
    source of supply includes means, other than or in addition to that inducing
    gravity or capillary flow, for producing a force to move the material from
    the source to the dispenser.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 257.072 for the
    subcombination of a source of supply, which source includes resilient
    means, adapted to be actuated by a coating implement, for producing a force
    on the coating material to move the material from a supply zone to a
    coating-implement-receiving-and-loading zone; and see (1) Note thereto for
    the distinction between the subject matter of that subclass and that of
    Class 222, Dispensing.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 576+ for a dispensing inkwell; i.e., one
    which includes a trap chamber from which ink is removed by contact with the
    pen point of a pen.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 118+ for the
    combination of a supply source and a coacting receiver which is an
    independent applicator, in which combination material-moving
    force-producing means is either entirely absent or is present in the
    receiver only.


CLS 141/21
TXT Apparatus under subclass 18 which cooperates in some way with the dispenser
    being filled, some part or parts of the dispenser, ordinarily relied upon
    for separating a portion of the material from the supply, being operated or
    manipulated to accomplish the filling operation.


CLS 141/22
TXT Devices under subclass 21 in which the dispenser is characterized as a
    closing or capping means removably associated with the supply container of
    which it is a part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322,    for combined supply closures and traps which are manually coupled
    to the supply container and thereafter filled by inverting the resulting
    organization.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 864.01+ for a pipette, per se.


CLS 141/23
TXT Devices under subclass 22 in which the dispenser is characterized by a
    means capable of establishing a volumetric change effective to control
    dispensing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 206+ for resilient wall dispensers, per se,
    and see the search notes to subclass 206 for additional search fields.


CLS 141/24
TXT Devices under subclass 23 having one or more walls or portions thereof
    which may be distorted or deflected by application of a force and which
    return to their original position when the force is removed.


CLS 141/25
TXT Devices under subclass 21 in which the means causing or controlling
    dispensing comprises a volumetric change affecting means or comprises some
    nonsolid means for exerting a force upon the materials to be dispensed.


CLS 141/26
TXT Dispensers under subclass 25 in which the volumetric change effecting means
    is attached to the dispenser.


CLS 141/27
TXT Devices under subclass 25 in which the volumetric change effecting means
    comprises a follower, i.e., some solid means for exerting a force directly
    upon all the contents material to move it toward and through the dispensing
    opening.


CLS 141/28
TXT Devices under subclass 25 in which the fluid pressure applying or
    controlling means is a jet pump which is attached to the dispenser.


CLS 141/29
TXT Dispensers under subclass 18 comprising means defining a cover or cap for
    the supply source container and having a nondispensing outlet open to
    atmosphere, which is controlled by hand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22+,    322 and 381, for other closure type receivers mounted on the supply
    container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 864.01+ for a pipette, per se.


CLS 141/31
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the receiver has an inlet or
    an interior dimension of capillary size, i.e., so small that ordinary
    methods of filling as by gravity flow or forced feed will not suffice to
    introduce material thereinto.


CLS 141/32
TXT Apparatus under the class definition for filling battery grids or
    electrodes with fluent material.

    (1)     Note.  This is an art collection of devices for applying or
    impressing Faure paste into battery grids.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    for apparatus for removing overfill by wiping, scraping or
    spatulating means.

    280,    for apparatus in which a filled receiver is scraped or leveled by
    lateral relative movement of the supply means and the receiver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process, subclasses 209+ for electrodes having grid structure, especially
    subclasses 233+.


CLS 141/33
TXT Apparatus under subclass 32 in which the material applied to the opposite
    sides of the grid is derived from separate sources or separate conduits
    from the same source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100+,   for other plural filling material types, especially subclass 102
    for plural charges from the same source in a single receiver.


CLS 141/34
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the filling operation
    involves the centrifugal distribution of materials either in the dispensing
    means whereby the material is distributed into receivers, or in the
    receiver itself whereby material in the receiver is distributed.

    (1)     Note.  The speed of the rotary movement must be sufficient to impel
    or distribute the material by a positive motion as by throwing or
    accelerating gravity flow.

    (2)     Note.  There must be an action on the contents material for at
    least a part of the filling or separating operations.  The essence here is
    the resulting distribution of material in the receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    283,    for apparatus in which there is means to move the receiver in a
    rotary fashion during the filling operation or in connection therewith.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 262 for distribution systems involving
    flow dividing compartments.


CLS 141/35
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which plural receivers are supplied
    with contents material at least a portion of which first enters one
    receiver and then is caused to flow to another receiver.


CLS 141/36
TXT Apparatus under subclass 35 in which a receiver adjacent the main filling
    station receives overflow from material which has passed through the first
    receiver, and is subsequently advanced to the main filling position for
    completion of its contents charge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 571+ for fluid distribution systems
    comprising serially connected tanks.


CLS 141/37
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising filling systems dealing
    with a plurality of contents materials, at least one of which is a gas, and
    which deal with the receiver gas content under conditions which must
    necessarily be other than atmospheric.

    (1)     Note.  The provision of plural diverse paths for gaseous fluid
    between the receiver and either or both the supply or the atmosphere is
    considered without more to characterize a system of this type.  The diverse
    paths may be either branched or noncommunicating.

    (2)     Note.  The filling of an inverted receiver is included when the
    liquid content is displaced by gas and no confined flow path for the liquid
    is provided.

    (3)     Note.  Included are

    (a)     gas pumps, including siphon starting pumps for receiver air, liquid
    displacement by gas and evacuation means claimed broadly where liquid flow
    will not otherwise occur.

    (b)     gas storage, comprising either a supply separate from the other
    material supply, which gas supply is either connected directly to the
    receiver or is connected to a supply which is vented to the receiver, or
    storage of gas displaced from the receiver, including temporary confinement
    of such gas in a material-handling trap.

    (c)     plural or variable cycles in handling receiver gas content.

    (d)     plural diverse gas passages.

    (e)     use of the gaseous contents    material as servo fluid or seal.

    (f)     automatic control of liquid flow by gas condition in receiver, but
    not including mere equilibrium states where a vent is closed.

    (g)     sequential operation of diverse valves only in apparatus having
    filling during lateral travel of registering head and receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4+,     for processes relating to the filling of receivers under conditions
    or with steps which involve provision of a nonatmospheric or variations in
    the gaseous state in the receiver.

    70,     for material treatment with fluid contact, i.e., those devices
    where gas is introduced into an open container which is already filled, or
    in connection with the filling thereof.

    91+,    for treatment by fluid of the receiver or of the filling or
    dispensing apparatus, especially subclass 92 for gaseous pretreatment of
    the receiver, connection between which and the nongaseous supply apparatus
    is broken between the cleaning operation and the filling operation.

    93,     for suction hoods and off-takes for soil removal or preventing.

    115+,   for drip prevention or over-fill removal by evacuation or suction,
    especially subclass 127 for over fill removal in gas filled receivers.

    285+,   for multiple passage filling means or filling heads for diverse
    material or flows, and see the search notes to subclass 285.

    323,    for residual siphon type filling apparatus, and see the search
    notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 403+ for package making processes
    involving gas filling and/or evacuating and closing; subclass 432 for
    package making processes with contents material treating by vacuum or gas;
    subclasses 79+ for package making apparatus for gas filling and/or
    evacuating receptacle and closing; and subclass 510 for package making
    apparatus with contents material treating by vacuum or inert atmosphere.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 154+ for fluid handling pressure systems
    containing diverse fluids.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 394+ for dispensers with fluid pressure
    discharge assistants, and see the search notes to subclass 394.


CLS 141/38
TXT Apparatus under subclass 37 for filling tires.

    (1)     Note.  Included with patents claiming filling with both liquids and
    gas are those subcombinations relating to filling with one or the other but
    including such limitations as to restrict the utility of the subcombination
    to devices in which filling with the other of the two materials is a
    necessary accompaniment.

    (2)     Note.  Tire inflation with gas alone is not specifically provided
    for in this schedule but the patents relating to the combination with the
    source of supply of the inflating fluids have been distributed in
    appropriate subclasses according to the means for causing the connection to
    be made, the means for supporting one or the other of the supply and
    receiver elements in relation to the other and similar relationship
    provided for in this class.

    (3)     Note.  Tire or tube deflation accomplished by evacuation apparatus
    where other necessary characteristics of this class are present, are
    included in subclass 65.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 223+ for apparatus comprising valved
    inflation stems of the type attached to pneumatic tires and analogous
    inflatable articles, including filling and/or release extensions of such
    stems, valved filling chucks of the type attached to pressure fluid
    supplying conduits and employed to inflate such articles by means of the
    inflation stems, and combinations of such inflation stems and filling
    chucks, including the source of supply also when claimed by name only.  See
    also the search notes under subclass 223.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 92+ for devices for deflating tubes by
    collapsing the walls thereof by applying force exertive means to the
    exterior portions of the tube.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 44+ for reshaping, resizing or vulcanizing apparatus for a tire
    tube including means to apply fluid pressure directly thereto.


CLS 141/39
TXT Apparatus under subclass 37 in which the filling means for the nongaseous
    content material is controlled by or operates as the result of the
    establishment of a desired gas condition in the receiver.

    (1)     Note.  This includes equilibrium conditions as well as those in
    which there is a condition responsive means controlling the operation of
    the filling means provided that positive flow control means is included,
    such as valves or servo operated discharge assistants.  Flow by barometric
    or vacuum influences is not sufficient to cause classification in this
    subclass, and equilibrium conditions in which the vent is closed by float
    or pressure are not included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    197,    for automatic control of filling in gas-filled receiver systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 154+ for level control to vent gases or
    liquids from a fluent material handling system.


CLS 141/40
TXT Apparatus under subclass 39 in which the establishment of a desired gas
    condition in the receiver is controlled by the level of contents material
    other than the gas in the receiver.

    (1)     Note.  The apparatus here included does not necessarily predicate
    an air tight connection with the receiver, but rather requires a change in
    the gas condition in the receiver by some outside interference.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    192+,   for automatic control of flow cut-off or diversion means responsive
    to the level of the contents material in a receiver.


CLS 141/41
TXT Apparatus under subclass 40 in which air is supplied to the receiver by an
    air pressure producing means external to the flow line which is supplying
    the other fluid material to the receiver.

    (1)     Note.  The air pressure producing means need not be claimed if the
    device will not operate without it.


CLS 141/42
TXT Apparatus under subclass 41 in which the system is additionally provided
    with a negative pressure line and a buoyant means which at some
    predetermined level of material in the receiver, effectively disconnects
    the said negative pressure line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    303,    for multiple passage filling means for diverse materials or flows
    having a float operated vent cut-off.


CLS 141/43
TXT Apparatus under subclass 42 in which the negative pressure supply means is
    effectively removed by opening the negative pressure to the ambient air.


CLS 141/44
TXT Apparatus under subclass 37 in which gas and other material are flowing
    together, usually as a result of overflow from a filled receiver, and a
    passage or chamber is provided in which the gas is separated from the other
    material.

    (1)     Note.  A mere enlargement of a vent passage, whether for overfill
    material or not, is not included.  Other features characteristic of diverse
    fluid systems must be present, as filters, gas separating baffles, pressure
    equalizing means or pumps, separate outlets for gas and liquid, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86+,    for drip collecting in filling systems.

    307+,   for nonpressure type vents having a trap or chamber therein.  See
    (1) Note.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 171+ for fluid separating traps or vents
    in fluid handling systems of general utility, and see the search notes to
    subclass 171.


CLS 141/45
TXT Apparatus under subclass 44 in which the separated nongaseous material is
    returned to the supply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290,    for multiple passage filling heads having a flue or vent externally
    returning to the supply.


CLS 141/46
TXT Apparatus under subclass 37 in which the same gas or source of gas which
    comprises one of the diverse fluids is used in the apparatus to seal joints
    or to operate valves or other moving parts of the system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    287,    for multiple passage filling head having a gas expanded seal.

    347,    for interlocked apparatus components responsive to material flow,
    the material being in some instances a gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 171+ for separate outlets for one of
    plural diverse fluids controlled by the presence of the other in fluid
    handling systems of general utility.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 129.2 for dispensing systems in which
    dispensed one fluid operates dispensing means for another.


CLS 141/47
TXT Apparatus under subclass 37 in which plural gas flows to or from the
    receiver occur other than or in addition to the displacement of gas from
    the receiver by the nongas material, or the control of a single gas flow to
    or from the receiver is operated during the cycle of filling the receiver
    in some way other than by merely turning it on and/or off.  The special
    operation may involve repeating any gas control operation, changing
    pressure or quantity, shifting the gas supply to another use, or changing
    sources during the filling operation.

    (1)     Note.  Manual operation of the gas control apparatus is not
    included even though the sole disclosure is that repeated operations for
    the same receiver occur.

    (2)     Note.  Apparatus which during the cycle changes the gas condition
    to change the equilibrium requirements of the system is included.


CLS 141/48
TXT Apparatus under subclass 47 in which the gas cycle which is characteristic
    of this group is used to pretreat either the receiver or the contents
    material.

    (1)     Note.  This cycle is distinguished from mere counter pressure or
    vacuum application to establish a condition in the receiver by the fact
    that some step intervenes which either changes the gas condition or
    replaces one gas with another prior to the filling operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63+,    for gas pretreatment of receiver or contents material without
    special control of gas etc. as required by subclass 47.

    92,     for fluid pretreatment of a receiver where pressure conditions are
    not maintained between the pretreatment and the filling operation.


CLS 141/49
TXT Apparatus under subclass 47 in which a gassing and filling cycle is
    repeated during the filling of one receiver.

    (1)     Note.  Manual operation of the control means is not included even
    though the sole disclosure is of repeated operations in filling a receiver.


CLS 141/50
TXT Apparatus under subclass 47 in which a source of pressure, either positive
    or negative, is shifted from one use such as pressurizing or evacuating a
    receiver to another flow line which is a vent or fill pipe, usually for the
    purpose of emptying such pipe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for a vent to drain a fill pipe in diverse fluid filling systems.


CLS 141/51
TXT Apparatus under subclass 37 in which a pressure tight housing is provided
    for the receiver and means is provided to control the gas condition within
    said housing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    390,    for miscellaneous external forms or protectors for receivers, and
    see the search notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 86+ for package making apparatus having
    gas filling and/or evacuating of the package within an enclosure.


CLS 141/52
TXT Apparatus under subclass 37 in which the system includes a chamber for
    storing the gas displaced from the receiver.

    (1)     Note.  The stored gas may be disposed of at the end of each filling
    cycle, as to atmosphere, to the supply or to the next receiver.  It may
    also be stored in the succeeding receiver during the filling cycle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35+,    for apparatus which transfers overflow nongaseous material to a
    succeeding receiver.


CLS 141/53
TXT Apparatus under subclass 52 in which the pressure in the receiver is
    relieved to a material handling trap for the contents material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 332 for discharge assistant type dispensers
    with vent passage for movable trap chamber and subclass 442 for dispensers
    having a stationary trap with a vent passage.


CLS 141/54
TXT Apparatus under subclass 37 in which the filling head comprises plural
    diverse gas passages.

    (1)     Note.  The diverse passages are provided for incoming or outgoing
    gases or for gases supplied at different times or for different purposes.

    (2)     Note.  The gas passages may be either branched or noncommunicating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    285+,   for filling means or heads having multiple passages, one of which
    usually comprises a vent which provides for the passage of gaseous material
    to or from a receiver being filled under atmospheric pressure conditions or
    conditions indistinguishable from such. Sequential operation of the valves
    for gas and nongas materials is not considered significant except in
    lateral travel filling assemblies.


CLS 141/55
TXT Apparatus under subclass 54 in which one of the passages comprises a vent
    allowing the filled pipe to be drained of material at the termination of
    the filling operation.

    (1)     Note.  A pressure other than atmospheric may be connected to the
    vent provided no change is made in another line carrying such pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     for diverse fluid systems in which a gas supply is shifted to the
    fill pipe at some time during a receiver filling cycle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 589 for vented outlet flow lines in fluid
    handling systems of general utility.


CLS 141/56
TXT Apparatus under subclass 54 comprising three or more diverse gas passages
    in the filling apparatus head.


CLS 141/57
TXT Apparatus under subclass 54 in which the receiver is vented to atmosphere
    before it is separated from the filling head.

    (1)     Note.  This is to assist in removing the receiver from a vacuum
    head or to prevent surge of material under pressure in the receiver when
    the connection with the head is broken.


CLS 141/58
TXT Apparatus under subclass 57 in which the vent to atmosphere remains open
    continuously during the operation of the apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 513.3+ for valves having a bleed or
    continuously open passage.


CLS 141/59
TXT Apparatus under subclass 37 in which means for removing the gaseous
    contents of the receiver is combined with or comprises means for filling
    the receiver with a nongaseous material.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus claiming evacuation means broadly is included if a
    cyclically operating machine having no other means for transferring the
    nongaseous material is claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for corresponding processes.

    42+,    for vacuum line cut-off by a float in a filled receiver.

    65,     for evacuation apparatus, per se.

    66,     for evacuating and filling with gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclass 510 for packaging apparatus having
    contents material treatment involving vacuum or inert atmosphere.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 205 for fluent material handling systems
    in which a chamber is filled by evacuation.


CLS 141/60
TXT Apparatus under subclass 59 in which the means for joining the receiver to
    the said apparatus includes a movable displacement means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for means comprising an expanding chamber in a disengaged head to
    reverse the flow for drip prevention or overfill removal.


CLS 141/61
TXT Apparatus under subclass 59 in which the means for evacuating the receiver
    ceases to operate to increase the vacuum before the filling material is
    admitted to the receiver.


CLS 141/62
TXT Apparatus under subclass 37 in which registering head and receiver means
    have a lateral motion during the filling of the receiver.

    (1)     Note.  Filling systems having only one gas passage per filling head
    are included if they are of the successive receiver, lateral travel type,
    since different vents are in different stages of operation at any one time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135+,   for filling systems having conveying means to supply successive
    receivers and having lateral motion of registering heads and receivers, and
    see the search notes to subclass 135.


CLS 141/63
TXT Apparatus under subclass 37 in which the gaseous component in the receiver
    is supplied as a treatment for the receiver or the contents thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for a separate gas cycle for a receiver pretreatment.

    70,     for contents material treatment by a gaseous fluid in a system
    which is not closed, and see the notes to subclass 70.


CLS 141/64
TXT Apparatus under subclass 63 in which the receiver has been filled with a
    nongaseous material prior to the gas treatment.

    (1)     Note.  The apparatus has features which lack utility except when
    the receiver is filled with nongaseous material, such as means for holding
    or compacting such material, or for mixing the gas with it, as by agitating
    or by injecting the gas below the surface of the contents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclass 510 for package making devices having
    means for treating the contents material with vacuum or inert atmosphere.


CLS 141/65
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which gaseous content is removed
    from receivers, with or without subsequent refilling with another gaseous
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for corresponding processes.

    59+,    for such exhausting followed by filling the receiver with
    nongaseous material.

    64,     for evacuation of filled receivers when there is some adaption to
    the presence of nongaseous material in the receiver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 79+ for gas filling and/or evacuating of
    receptacles with closing.

    417,    Pumps, appropriate subclasses for gas pumps, per se, and combined
    with a space being evacuated in a nonseparable system.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, for rotary expansible chamber
    devices, per se.


CLS 141/66
TXT Apparatus under subclass 65 in which the receptacle is filled with gas in
    connection with or subsequent to evacuation.


CLS 141/67
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which a fluent material is
    introduced into the receiver by means of an impeller or a fluid current
    conveyor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37+,    for such devices operating in a closed system in which the gaseous
    condition in the receiver is affected by the operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 638+ for power driven
    conveyors of the thrower type.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, appropriate subclasses for fluid current
    conveyors for solid materials.


CLS 141/68
TXT Apparatus under subclass 67 in which the receiver is a valve bag, i.e., a
    bag having an inlet in the folded corner thereof, the corner usually
    providing a self-closing valve when the bag is detached from the filling
    spout.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315,    for valve bag clamps or chairs comprising a filling means system
    with receiver or receiver coacting means, and see the search notes to
    subclass 315 for other subclasses of an art character involving valve bags.


CLS 141/69
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the material contents is
    subjected to a special operation not merely the incidental result of
    handling, usually for purposes of preserving or preparing it for handling
    or storage, but not amounting to operations for effecting permanent or
    irreversible changes in physical character such as are commonly called
    manufacturing.

    (1)     Note.  See the main class definition for lines.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11+,    for corresponding processes.

    48,     for pretreatment of material by gas in a diverse fluid containing
    pressure system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 111+ for packaging with contents
    material treating, the added operation in that class being sometimes a
    manufacturing step.


CLS 141/70
TXT Apparatus under subclass 69 in which a receiver having a material content
    is supplied with a fluid which comes into contact with the material in the
    receiver.

    (1)     Note.  If the first material in the receiver is a gas, the treating
    material must be something other than air.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37+,    for similar apparatus comprising a closed system.

    91+,    for treatment of an empty receiver or other parts of the filling
    system by fluid.


CLS 141/71
TXT Apparatus under subclass 69 in which the density of the fluent charge in
    the receiver is increased (1) by compacting or agitating within the
    receiver or (2) by increasing the density of the contents charge after it
    has been separated from the supply, the material being confined until it
    enters the receiver.

    (1)     Note.  Deaerating of fluent materials is considered a compacting
    operation.

    (2)     Note.  The many discharge assistants and agitating type dispensers
    which inevitably produce a compaction of loose material as an incident to
    handling have not been made a basis for classification in this class but
    have been cross referenced to appropriate subclasses in Class 222,
    Dispensing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for corresponding processes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses
    for degasifying or denuding means for fluent solids.

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 523+ for package making involving
    compacting contents material.


CLS 141/72
TXT Apparatus under subclass 71 in which compacting is accomplished by
    agitation, jarring or vibration of the receiver and parts of the supply
    apparatus associated therewith.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses, especially 226+ for dispensers
    having agitating means combined with discharge assistants and subclasses
    251+ for other agitating means of a dispensing type and material handling
    devices such as conveyors, pumps, ejectors, and movable trap chambers, etc.


CLS 141/73
TXT Apparatus under subclass 71 in which the density of the material is
    increased by treatment within the receiver.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is a collection of packing augers,
    per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193+    and 251+, for filling systems having relatively receding discharge
    assistant and receiver engaging means, the said relative movement taking
    place during the filling operation, which is sometimes referred to as
    "uniform density" filling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses for means compacting contents
    material in a filled receiver.


CLS 141/74
TXT Apparatus under subclass 73 in which the density is increased by jarring or
    vibrating or otherwise agitating the material in the receiver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 108+ and 208+ for jarring and vibrating means
    for mixing chambers of general utility.


CLS 141/75
TXT Apparatus under subclass 74 in which the receiver is supported mainly by
    means engaging the top or sides thereof.

    (1)     Note.  An additional support may be provided at the bottom, as in
    the case of valve bag chairs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    314+,   for filling means having bag or liner securing means, and see the
    search notes to subclasses 314 and 315 for miscellaneous bag supports and
    valve bag supports respectively.


CLS 141/76
TXT Apparatus under subclass 75 in which the bag is supported on a chair as
    well as on a bag supporting nozzle, the agitation being supplied through
    the chair.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315,    for valve bag clamps or chairs associated with filling means and
    see the search notes to subclass 315 for other subclasses of an art nature
    pertaining to valve bag filling.


CLS 141/77
TXT Apparatus under subclass 74 in which the agitation is provided by, or
    involves, distortion of or blows or jarring imparted to the receiver side
    walls.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for material filling systems which necessarily involve deformation
    or yielding of receiver walls.


CLS 141/78
TXT Apparatus under subclass 74 in which the means for jarring or vibrating the
    receiver and its contents is carried by or coacts with the conveying means
    for the receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129+,   for filling systems having conveying means to supply successive
    receivers.

    250+,   for filling systems having means to move the receiver to, from or
    during flow relation.


CLS 141/79
TXT Apparatus under subclass 78 in which the conveyor is a rotary type.


CLS 141/80
TXT Apparatus under subclass 73 in which the compacting takes place in a
    receiver which has previously been completely filled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses for means compacting contents
    material in a filled receiver not combined with filling means for the
    receiver or means coacting therewith.


CLS 141/81
TXT Apparatus under subclass 71 in which the material is supplied to the
    receiver in charge form, the charge having been compacted in a dispensing
    type trap after separation from the source and handled subsequently under
    continuously confined conditions.

    (1)     Note.  Charge forming requires that the charges thus formed travel
    as a body without relative flow (except by friction) among the particles
    after the charge has been formed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 523+ for package making involving a
    compacted charge which is handled as an article subsequent to compaction,
    i.e., without being continuously confined.


CLS 141/82
TXT Apparatus under subclass 69 in which the contents material is subjected to
    a treatment which either raises or lowers its temperature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for corresponding processes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclass 127 for package making devices involving
    contents material treating by heating or cooling.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 146+ for dispensers having heating or
    cooling means, and see the search notes to subclass 146 for other search
    classes on heating and cooling subject matter.


CLS 141/83
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means for testing contents
    material, for determining the amount of the contents material in the
    receiver by weighing or means for determining whether or not the proper
    amount of material has been placed in the receiver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclasses 52+ for receivers successively handled
    relative to a weigher, subclass 59 for a weigher correlated with a
    receiver, and subclasses 60+ for weigher responsive material control
    comprising supplying, filling, removing material from the weigher or
    removing a receiver from filling-weighing position.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 77 for dispensers involving weighing features
    and see the search notes to that subclass for miscellaneous material
    handling type involving weighing.


CLS 141/84
TXT Apparatus under the class definition which can by an adjustment, addition,
    removal or reassembly of one of more of its parts be caused to serve as one
    of two or more distinctly different filling devices having a different mode
    of operation or adapted to handle different contents or different receivers
    requiring changes in the modes of handling or operation.

    (1)     Note.  Mere adjustability or rearrangement of the apparatus to
    accommodate receivers of different size even though involving a
    rearrangement of the apparatus is not here if the mode of operation of the
    apparatus remains unchanged.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    378+,   for adjustable supports for receivers, and see the search notes to
    subclass 378.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclass 201 for convertible package making devices.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 282+ for variable volume dispensers.


CLS 141/85
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising fluent material filling
    systems having means not directed to filling receivers for applying or
    removing fluent material to or from parts of the system. The material may
    be contents material which has escaped from the system or it may be an
    added material for coating, lubricating, sterilizing or drying the system
    parts.  If the material is contents material, it may be removed from the
    system where it constitutes a soiling or contaminating agent or it may be
    prevented from reaching parts of the system to soil or contaminate them
    after it has escaped from its normal confined path or failed to enter the
    intended receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115+,   for drip prevention by flow reversing and for overfill removal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 237+ for fluid handling systems having
    installed cleaning means and see the search notes to that group of
    subclasses for related art in other classes.


CLS 141/86
TXT Apparatus under subclass 85 in which means is provided to catch or
    otherwise dispose of or direct material dripping, leaking or being
    discharged as waste material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106     and 364, for draining means supporting supply containers previously
    emptied by other operations.

    158,    for filling systems of the successive receiver type in which a
    charge is disposed of by special means when the intended receiver is not
    available.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 312+ for fluid handling systems with
    leakage or drip collecting features.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 108+ for fluent material dispensers having
    drip collectors and see the search notes to that subclass for additional
    fields of search.


CLS 141/87
TXT Apparatus under subclass 86 in which the means for receiving the drip is
    movable from a position beneath the supply outlet where it will receive the
    prospective discharge or drip to a position where it will not interfere
    with the presentation of a receiver or to a position where it is disabled.


CLS 141/88
TXT Apparatus under subclass 86 in which the drip collector is supported by or
    located in a definite relation adjacent the receiver support.


CLS 141/89
TXT Apparatus under subclass 85 in which a wiper or applicator comes into
    contact with parts of the system or a fluid blast impinges on the system
    for the purpose of removing foreign material or applying a noncontents
    material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 238+ for cleaning or steam sterilizing
    installation in fluid handling systems.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 148+ for cleaning means in fluent material
    dispensers, and see the search notes to subclass 148.


CLS 141/90
TXT Apparatus under subclass 89 in which the system treating means comprises
    means operating on the outlet of the supply means in the area where it
    comes in to close relation with the receiver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 149+ for dispenser cleaners operating
    through the dispenser outlet.


CLS 141/91
TXT Apparatus under subclass 89 in which the treatment is effected by the
    application of a blast or stream of fluid either gaseous or liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37+,    for closed systems in which a treating fluid is one of diverse
    fluids in a receiver.

    70,     for treatment of receiver contents by contact with a fluid.


CLS 141/92
TXT Apparatus under subclass 91 in which a receiver is treated by fluid prior
    to filling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48      and 63, for gaseous or liquid pretreatment of a receiver in
    connection with filling a receiver with diverse materials in a closed
    system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclass 141 for packaging machines providing
    fugitive pretreatment of cover material.


CLS 141/93
TXT Apparatus under subclass 85 in which dust, soil, fumes or escaped contents
    are removed from the filling area by means of passages or enclosures
    subjected to negative pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclass 167 for suction hoods and off-takes in
    connection with package making of that class.

    144,    Woodworking subclass 252 for a suction hood or off-take in
    connection with woodworking machinery and see the search notes to that
    subclass.


CLS 141/94
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having signals, indicators, registers,
    recorders, gauges or display devices for indicating a condition or
    performing a measuring function, such devices consisting of relatively
    movable, changeable or audible information giving parts, or having means
    permitting inspection of the contents of the system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83,     for devices for testing or weighing the receiver contents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 507+ for packaging apparatus having
    alarms, signals, indicators, inspection means or counters.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 551+ for fluid handling systems with
    indicator, register, recorder, alarms or inspection means.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 23+ for dispensers with recorder, register,
    indicator, signal or exhibitor, subclasses 54+ for dispensers having
    inspection means.  See the search notes to subclass 23 and 154 of that
    class.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+ for electrical
    automatic condition responsive indicating system.


CLS 141/95
TXT Apparatus under subclass 94 in which the information conveyed is in
    connection with the level or pressure of the receiver contents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 557 and 558, for fluid pressure and
    liquid level responsive indicators, recorders or alarms.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 40 for flow or overflow indicators and
    subclass 51 for float level indicators.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 612 to 626 for electrical
    automatic fluent material level or pressure responsive indicating systems.


CLS 141/96
TXT Apparatus under subclass 95 in which the level or pressure indicating means
    is mounted on the outlet portion of the supply means, as on a hose nozzle
    or faucet.


CLS 141/97
TXT Apparatus under the class definition provided with means surrounding or
    adjacent to the operating area of the machine for protecting a person
    standing nearby from splashing or injury from escaping material or broken
    parts.

    (1)     Note.  An enclosure for the receiver in the nature of a housing is
    not regarded as a guard or screen for the operator even though composed of
    mesh material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for housings for receivers in diverse fluid containing pressure
    systems.

    390,    for external forms or protectors for receivers and see the search
    notes to that subclass.


CLS 141/98
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means associated therewith for
    performing some function in addition to or in perfecting the basic
    operation of transferring material from a supply to a receiver and not
    provided for in the preceding subclasses.

    (1)     Note.  Filling systems comprise the containers, flow lines and
    receivers in which the contents material is confined at any time during the
    operation, means supporting either or both the supply container and the
    receiver before, during or after the filling operation, and the flow
    controlling means for the contents material including valves and flow
    restrictors, screens being included as flow restrictors.

    (2)     Note.  Included are, for example, filling systems combined with
    illumination, display means for signs or merchandise, labeling or printing;
    static electricity or heat conducting means; holders for tools, nonsystem
    devices or adjuncts or removed system parts other than the normally
    separable components; tools or punches not a part of the flow system;
    system parts usable as tools; ventilating; lubricating; agitating for
    purposes other than compacting material in the receiver; sorting; installed
    systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclass 167 for miscellaneous combined features of
    that class.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 560 for miscellaneous combined features of
    fluid handling systems generally.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 192 for combined features connected with
    dispensers, and see (1) Note for a definition of supply container structure
    and features considered to be characteristic of dispensing and accordingly
    of the supply means of Class 141.


CLS 141/99
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which two or more concurrent series
    of filling operations involving successive receivers are carried out, the
    operation in the separate series being diverse as to some characteristic.

    (1)     Note.  Features establishing dissimilarity of the series or lines
    may comprise alternate filling operations in different lines, use of one
    line as a control or test line for the others, lines of different lengths
    or container spacing as successive concentric circle on a turret, or any
    other deviation from mere duplication of filling operations as to material
    supply and receiver handling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    178+,   for filling successive groups of receivers as in trays or crates.

    186,    for plural lines of successively supplied receivers or plural
    filling stations.

    234,    for plural filling heads.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclass 168 for packaging machinery having
    selective or alternate supply of plural covers and/or plural contents,
    subclass 202 for plural lines packaging.


CLS 141/100
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the contents material is
    derived from plural sources or is comprised of two or more diverse
    materials, or is placed in the receiver in multiple charges from different
    charging heads or is placed in the receiver in multiple charges from the
    same head, not however resulting merely from the inherent intermittent flow
    caused by the nature of the discharge assistant or flow controller.

    (1)     Note.  For inclusion in this subclass plural material supplies must
    be entirely distinct when stored as bulk. Material derived from these
    supplies may be used concurrently, successively or alternately.

    (2)     Note.  Compartmented receivers for which separate charges are
    provided are included if the receiver is claimed or special features are
    present.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for corresponding processes.

    37+,    for filling with diverse materials in a closed system.

    99,     for multiple filling lines of diverse characteristics.

    178+,   for successive receiver systems for plural receivers in crates or
    trays.

    186,    for plural lines or stations in filling systems having means to
    supply successive receivers.

    234+,   for plural filling heads, and see (1) Note in the definition of
    subclass 234 for the line.  See also (2) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclass 202 for plural line packaging; 237+ for
    plural filling stations or contents sources for a single package; subclass
    246 for successive deposits in a compartmented receptacle; subclass 263 for
    packaging machines which arrange material in receivers by means of dividers.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 255+ for plural tanks having parallel
    flow relation in fluid handling systems.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 129+ for plural sources in dispensing
    devices.


CLS 141/101
TXT Apparatus under subclass 100 in which the unit comprising a filling means
    outlet and a receiver move together during flow relation in a direction
    transverse to the direction in which the filling means and receiver move
    into filling relation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135,    for such lateral motion devices with means to supply successive
    receivers, and see the search notes to subclass 135.


CLS 141/102
TXT Apparatus under subclass 100 in which a single receiver is supplied with
    multiple charges of the same material from the same source.

    (1)     Note.  Filling systems having a discharge assistant type dispenser
    which normally operate to deposit plural increments of material as a single
    charge, as expansible chamber pumps or rotors with plural traps have been
    classified in later subclasses on the basis of the filling relation and
    cross-referenced into Class 222 if appropriate to the dispenser disclosed
    or claimed.


CLS 141/103
TXT Apparatus under subclass 100 in which a single receiver is supplied with
    plural material charges at separate points of deposit.


CLS 141/104
TXT Apparatus under subclass 100 in which multiple material supplies are
    provided, with means whereby a desired one of the sources may be used for
    filling a given receiver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclass 168 for packaging devices having selective
    supply of one of plural contents.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 144.5 for dispensers comprising plural sources
    of materials with selecting means for one desired source.


CLS 141/105
TXT Apparatus under subclass 100 in which materials from two or more sources
    pass into the receiver through a common flow line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 602+ for fluid distribution systems
    having multiple inlet with a single outlet.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 145.1+ for plural source dispensers having
    common discharge outlet for the plural sources.


CLS 141/106
TXT Apparatus under subclass 105 having means for holding supply containers in
    inverted position, the containers being of the type which has no discharge
    assistant and in which emptying is completed by one outflow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    364,    for means for dumping and/or draining single receivers.

    375,    for supports for supply containers which are removable from the
    filling head through which they discharge their contents into a receiver.


CLS 141/107
TXT Apparatus under subclass 105 in which at least one of the materials which
    forms the charge is delivered to a measuring trap and the second material
    is either added to the first in the trap or follows it through the trap.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 888+ and 896+ for fluid distribution
    systems having multiple inlets and a single outlet with means for
    positively mingling the materials in the course of their flow.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 133 for dispensers of this type.

    366,    Agitating, appropriate subclasses for material mixing and agitating
    means of general utility.


CLS 141/108
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the filling means is a
    material handler or confining means designed to be filled by being thrust
    into a supply of fluent material and to be manipulated to discharge the
    material so picked up into a receiver which is attached to and carried by
    or otherwise associated with the filler.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    319+,   for receiver and supply means which are manually coupled and
    inverted.

    328,    for supply means which provides a manually engageable handle for
    the receiver when associated therewith.

    380+,   for dispensers comprising material supply and handling means or
    receptacles which are associated in nonuse relation, so that the means or
    receptacle, which may comprise a scoop or cup, must be separated from the
    supply before it can be filled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 27+ and other
    appropriate subclasses for receptacle holders having handles thereon, and
    subclass 55 for scoops, per se.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 276+ for a scoop type shaping means arranged to be filled by
    being thrust into a bulk source (e.g., ice cream disher, etc.).


CLS 141/109
TXT Apparatus under subclass 108 in which the receiver is associated with the
    scoop by being placed therein so that the material picked up by the scoop
    is at the same time deposited within the receiver.


CLS 141/110
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which (1) the material transfer
    from the supply to the receiver is effected by a wick or other absorbent
    material which is located either in the receiver or in the supply at the
    point of transfer of the material from one to the other, or (2) the
    receiver has its inlet partly submerged below the surface of the supply at
    some period in the operation of filling so that all or part of the charge
    flows into the receiver by gravity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    319+,   for apparatus in which the dispenser and receiver are manually
    coupled and the system inverted for filling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 137+ for means
    to move work through liquid contact or cleaning apparatus.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 187 for dispensers utilizing a wick or
    absorbent feed, and see the search notes to that subclass for additional
    search field.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 118+ for a
    container for a supply of coating material in combination with a separable
    applicator which transports the material from the container and applies it
    to a work surface by contact therewith; and see section IV, "Search Class",
    in the definition of this class (141) for the line with Class 401.


CLS 141/111
TXT Apparatus under subclass 110 having means for moving the receiver into,
    during or out of filling relations.  The receiver supply may or may not be
    of the successive receiver type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129+,   for filling systems having conveying means to supply successive
    receivers.

    250+,   for filling systems with means to move the receiver to, from or
    during flow relation.


CLS 141/112
TXT Apparatus under subclass 110 in which the receiver is secured to a closure
    for a supply chamber and is stored in immersed (i.e., filling) position
    between operations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108+,   for scoop type filler with associated receiver.

    322,    for manually coupled and inverted supply and receiver means wherein
    the receiver is combined with the supply closure means.

    358,    for receiver operated discharge means of the scoop or drawer type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 126+ for
    containers for a supply of coating material in combination with a separable
    applicator-and-closure unit which transports the material to and applies it
    on a work surface; and see the "Search Class" note in section IV of the
    definition of this class (141) for the line with Class 401.


CLS 141/113
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the flow of contents material
    into the receiver is in an upward direction and in which the system
    includes support means for the receiver in filling relation.  The receiver
    may be filled through an aperture at its bottom or it may be inverted for
    filling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18+,    for filling or refilling of dispensers, especially subclass 30 for
    fountain pen type filling arrangements.

    108+,   for scoop type in which the receiver may be supported in inverted
    position.

    163,    for successive receiver type filling systems in which the conveyor
    rotates on a horizontal axis so that the receiver may be inverted at some
    time during the filling cycle though not necessarily so.

    164,    for successive receiver type filling systems in which the receiver
    is supported on its side during filling.

    274,    for gravity sealed valves operative upon inversion of the receiver
    and including a swinging support for the receiver.

    325+,   for filling means for receivers having plural openings, especially
    subclass 124 for receivers opened at both ends.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 242+ for package making devices of the
    bottom filling type.


CLS 141/114
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which some portion of the mechanism
    is useful only and thereby requires in its normal operation that the walls
    of the dispenser or receiver be distortable or capable of being pushed out
    of one position into another except as a mere incident to affixing the
    receiver to the filling head. Pre-shaping of the receiver prior to placing
    same on the filling head is here included.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of such essential flexibility or yielding character
    are automatic control of a filling operation by expansion of the receiver
    being filled and excess material removal by contraction of the receiver,
    and delivery of contents material by collapsing walls of the supply
    container.

    (2)     Note.  Motion of a foldable flap about its hinge line being
    analogous to the motion of other closure elements, is not included in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154,    for successive receiver type filling systems in which the receivers
    have flap closed inlets, see (2) Note.

    166,    for successive receiver type filling systems for bags or similar
    receivers.

    312,    for expansible centering or holding means for receivers which may
    or may not be of the bag type.

    313,    for miscellaneous flexible or collapsible receiver coacting means
    in filling devices.

    314+,   for bag or liner securing means in filling systems.

    350,    for coupling controlled receiver inlet flow in which the inlet has
    an externally engaged flap or closure member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 570+ for a packaging machine for forming
    and filling a bag, subclasses 373.3+ for closing a package or filled
    receptacle by means adapted to engage a closure flap, and subclasses 381.1+
    for package making including means to open or erect a receptacle.


CLS 141/115
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means (1) to obviate spillage
    or escape of material from the system after the separation or disconnection
    of the receiver from the filling means or (2) for the removal of contents
    material from the receiver.  The means to obviate spillage or escape of
    material from the system may act either through the filling head means,
    i.e., by reversal of operation, or by pouring off or extracting contents
    material already in the receiver, the means acting in either event beyond
    the last point of stoppage of flow by the filling head means.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include apparatus for simultaneously
    filling and overflowing the receiver unless a flow line is provided, (i.e.,
    spilling out) nor for overflowing and collecting spilled contents material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35+,    for arrangements for directing overfill to the succeeding receiver.

    70,     for material treatment apparatus comprising fluid contact means for
    jetting and/or bubble removing, for example.

    86+,    for overflow collecting means.

    285+, for filling heads having plural flow passages, one of which may
    provide for outflow of overfill material.  In these subclasses no means for
    positive action to withdraw contents material is provided.


CLS 141/116
TXT Apparatus under subclass 115 in which the contents material beyond the last
    point of stop-page is removed from the receiver or dispenser outlet means
    by returning such contents material to the supply through the filling means.


CLS 141/117
TXT Apparatus under subclass 116 in which the means reversing direction of flow
    includes a volume increasing means for such purpose carried by the filling
    means and operative upon disconnection from the receiver.

    (1)     Note.  The referred to head is of telescoping or equivalent-type
    chamber and becomes compressed when engaged with the receiver.  Disengaging
    the head and receiver permits the head to expand and act as a vacuum pump.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for a vacuum pump means comprising a receiver coupling portion of
    the system.


CLS 141/118
TXT Apparatus under subclass 116 in which the contents material is caused to
    flow in a reverse direction by means effective to tilt or tip the receiver
    and connected filling means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 403+ for receptacle
    emptying devices, particularly subclasses 404+ and 425 for dumping and
    upending devices respectively.


CLS 141/119
TXT Apparatus under subclass 116 in which flow reversal is caused by a negative
    pressure means which is controlled by a means simultaneously operative with
    the contents material supply control means.


CLS 141/120
TXT Apparatus under subclass 116 in which the filling means is provided with a
    flow line which is operative as a siphon after filling to return contents
    material from the receiver or from the shorter leg of such siphon to the
    supply source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230,    for apparatus which halts flow of contents material in a siphon
    filling arrangement.

    323,    for siphon type filling apparatus.


CLS 141/121
TXT Apparatus under subclass 115 having an overfill removal location which is
    distinct from the filling location.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     for combined overflowers and packers or toppers which compact
    material in a filled receiver and are structurally similar to displacement
    means for removing overfill from receivers.


CLS 141/122
TXT Apparatus under subclass 121 having means to continue the filling operation
    at the same or different station following contents material overfill
    removal.


CLS 141/123
TXT Apparatus under subclass 121 in which the removal means comprises a device
    which forces contents material out of the receiver by its weight or by
    change in volume, combined with means for establishing subatmospheric
    pressure on such contents material in said device.


CLS 141/124
TXT Apparatus under subclass 121 in which the removal station comprises means
    to invert or tip the receiver to spill excess material therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163,    for horizontal axis conveyors.

    171,    for filling apparatus comprising means changing the receiver
    orientation.


CLS 141/125
TXT Apparatus under subclass 121 including means such as a rolling contact
    wiper or brush, a spatula or skimmer, or a scraper for movement across or
    into the mouth of a receiver for removal of excess material therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89,     for cleaning apparatus for use in filling arrangement wherein the
    contents material has escaped from the confining means of the receiver.

    280,    for devices in which relative lateral movement of head and receiver
    has a scraping or leveling effect on the receiver contents.


CLS 141/126
TXT Apparatus under subclass 115 having means for adding and extracting
    contents material to and from the receiver at the same station at the same
    time.

    (1)     Note.  The simultaneous filling of and removing from the receptacle
    does not necessarily commence at the very  beginning of the filling cycle,
    i.e., a certain level of contents material will first have been reached in
    the receiver before the removal means becomes effective.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86+,    for means simultaneously filling and collecting overflow and see
    the note to subclass 115 above.


CLS 141/127
TXT Apparatus under subclass 126 in which simultaneous filling and removing is
    accomplished by plural fluid flow causing devices or by a fluid flow device
    which when acting in one direction causes filling and when acting in the
    opposite direction causes removal of contents material.


CLS 141/128
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the flow of contents material
    is diminished at the end of a cycle, usually for the purpose of more easily
    controlling the exact level in the receiver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclasses 122+ for plural feed to a weigher.


CLS 141/129
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising filling systems of one or
    more filling stations or heads and conveying means for receivers by which
    the filled receivers are replaced by empty ones progressively, i.e., the
    filled receiver does not move through the same path as the empty one and
    succession is insured by some means or mode of operation of the machine.

    (1)     Note.  The conveying means may comprise any device within the class
    definition of Classes 193, 198, 214, and related classes.  If the conveyor
    is a mere guide it must be possible to move the filled receiver by pushing
    on the succeeding empty one.

    (2)     Note.  Multiple-headed machines of the progressive type, i.e.,
    having plural receivers in different stages of filling during rotation or
    translation of the group, are included even though the receivers are places
    and removed by hand at the beginning and end of the course.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for plural stations filling operations in which a manual filling
    operation may be involved.

    391,    for miscellaneous aids to manual filling, and see the search notes
    to that subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package making, subclasses 250+ for package making machines for
    articles and specially arranged materials with means to supply successive
    receptacles.


CLS 141/130
TXT Apparatus under subclass 129 in which a series of receivers is presented to
    a continuous flow in such a way that small amounts, usually separated at
    intervals for sampling purposes, are removed from the flow stream and
    filled in successive receivers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184,    for successive receiver type filling systems in which operation is
    stopped after a predetermined number of filling cycles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 864.24+ for an analogous
    apparatus for removing fluid from successive receivers.


CLS 141/131
TXT Apparatus under subclass 129 in which the flow from the contents supply is
    not cut off between the filling of successive receivers by any means
    carried by the contents-supplying part of the system, but is diverted from
    one receiver to another or checked between receiver filling points or
    operations by some characteristic of the receiver or by the receiver
    carrier.


CLS 141/132
TXT Apparatus under subclass 131 in which the successive receivers do not form
    a continuous surface opposed to or receiving the flowing material when they
    are in normal side by side relationship and means is provided to adjust the
    receivers vertically or laterally into closer or overlapping relation, or
    shields are applied to the receivers to fill the spaces normally occurring
    between them.


CLS 141/133
TXT Apparatus under subclass 131 in which the means for supplying the
    successive receivers constitutes a means for occupying space between
    receivers and opposes the flow of material to points other than receiver's
    inlet.

    (1)     Note.  The receiver carrier or conveyor must have a translating
    motion with respect to the contents outlet during material flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135+,   for receivers and filling heads moving laterally as a unit during
    flow relation.


CLS 141/134
TXT Apparatus under subclass 131 in which spaced outlets are provided and the
    continuous contents flow as to any one outlet is shifted in the direction
    of the line of receivers so that the flow alternately follows a given
    receiver and shifts backward to another outlet above a succeeding receiver.


CLS 141/135
TXT Apparatus under subclass 129 in which the unit comprising a filling means
    outlet and a receiver move together during flow relation in a direction
    transverse to the direction in which the filling means and receiver move
    into filling relation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for diverse fluid containing filling systems of the closed type
    having lateral travel of registering head and receiver.

    101,    for filling systems providing plural materials, plural material
    supplies or plural charges in a receiver and having lateral travel of
    registering head and receiver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 276+ for machines for filling preformed
    receptacles and closing in which diverse heads are rotatively indexing and
    progressively acting.


CLS 141/136
TXT Apparatus under subclass 135 in which the filling means comprises siphon
    type heads which are progressively entered into and removed from the
    receivers by a swinging or lifting action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230,    for filling systems with siphon flow control by level in the
    receiver, and see the search notes to that subclass for other siphon type
    fillers or dispensers.


CLS 141/137
TXT Apparatus under subclass 135 in which a head or filling device after
    traveling with an associated receiver until filling is accomplished returns
    along that path to meet the succeeding receiver and again reverses its
    direction to accompany that receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    for successive receiver type filling systems having a continuous
    flow redirected between spaced outlets.


CLS 141/138
TXT Apparatus under subclass 135 in which the repeated operation of the cycle
    of filling receivers is discontinued or interrupted because of some
    undesired condition in the machine or because of the failure to supply
    contents material or a receiver.

    (1)     Note.  The change may include stopping the machine or merely
    skipping one operation connected with the missing charge or receiver, but
    if it is caused by lack of a receiver that lack must be at a filling
    station or corresponding conveyor position, and not merely failure to
    supply the machine with receivers at the beginning of the conveyor line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for modifications of the filling cycle useful in starting and
    stopping an operation consisting of an undetermined number of cycles.

    83,     for filling systems with testing or weighing of the receiver
    contents, with or without subsequent automatic control.

    156+,   for other successive receiver type filling means in which the
    filler is triggered by the receiver.

    184,    for successive receiver type filling systems having a
    self-terminating operation after a predetermined period or number of
    filling operations.

    192+,   for automatic control of flow cut-off or diversions in filling
    devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 52+ for automatic or triggered control
    in filling machine of the packaging type.


CLS 141/139
TXT Apparatus under subclass 138 in which the control of the cycle is effected
    by the contents material, means being provided to sense the lack of, or
    some irregularity in the feed of, the contents material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153,    for automatic control by contents material in other filling systems
    of the successive receiver type.

    192+,   for automatic control of flow cut-off or diversion in other filling
    systems, and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 141/140
TXT Apparatus under subclass 138 having a series of progressively acting heads
    and characterized by the fact that failure to provide a receiver at any
    given head inactivates that head for the particular cycle in which no
    receiver is supplied.

    (1)     Note.  The charge intended for the receiver may either be retained
    in the supply system or diverted to another point, or other means may
    operate to prevent the formation of the charge.

    (2)     Note.  In this subclass are those patents where the valve or trap
    is operated by contact with the receiver, there being obviously no
    operation of the valve or trap if there is no receiver present at the
    station.

    (3)     Note.  Machines having this character of operation are known in the
    art as no-can-no-fill type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157+,   for other successive receptacle type filling machines with receiver
    triggering.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 67+ for packaging machines in which the
    operation is responsive to the presence or absence of the preformed
    receptacle; 351+ for supply means with receiver actuated discharge means,
    and see the search notes thereto for other coupling operated flow
    controllers.


CLS 141/141
TXT Apparatus under subclass 140 in which a trip, linkage, latch or servo motor
    is activated by the presence or absence of the receiver either to cause the
    charge to be filled into the receiver or to prevent the charge being
    supplied as the case may be.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159+,   for other successive receptacle type filling machines with receiver
    triggered operation through power control.


CLS 141/142
TXT Apparatus under subclass 141 in which the control means comprises a cam or
    other track of a contour calculated to cause or control a cycle of
    operation for a particular head and the means responsive to the presence or
    absence of a receiver for this head causes a follower or control element to
    take different paths with respect to the track in accordance with the
    presence or absence of a receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159,    for other successive receiver type filling systems having power
    control involving cam track switching.


CLS 141/143
TXT Apparatus under subclass 141 in which the control means comprises a trigger
    moving about a vertical axis under the influence of the receiver.


CLS 141/144
TXT Apparatus under subclass 135 in which the progressively acting set of heads
    travels in a rotary path about an axis.


CLS 141/145
TXT Apparatus under subclass 144 in which the rotary set of heads and the
    conveyor for the rotating set of receptacles have a common vertical axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183,    for other successive receiver type filling systems having a rotary
    conveyor, and see the search notes to that subclass.


CLS 141/146
TXT Apparatus under subclass 145 in which each filling head has a vertically
    reciprocating member connected therewith and causing or controlling the
    filling operations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 168.5 for dispensing devices of this type.


CLS 141/147
TXT Apparatus under subclass 145 in which each of the heads is provided with a
    valve, guide or other means related to the filling operation which means is
    operated by contact with a stationary part of the filling apparatus
    comprising a shaped track or projection so disposed as to operate the part
    at the desired point.


CLS 141/148
TXT Apparatus under subclass 145 in which means is provided for elevating the
    receiver into position associated with the head from which it is to receive
    its charge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172,    for filling systems of the successive receiver type having plural
    conveyors one of which is a means for lifting or lowering a receiver.

    275+,   for receiver lifts or lowering means for filling purposes.


CLS 141/149
TXT Apparatus under subclass 148 in which the lift is provided with means for
    bringing the receiver into filling relation in such a way that
    discrepancies in size are accommodated by a lost motion or other cushioning
    effect.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278,    for other receiver lifts or lowering devices with yielding features.


CLS 141/150
TXT Apparatus under subclass 148 in which the lifting or lowering of the
    receiver is controlled by a projection or cam follower traveling on a
    shaped track.


CLS 141/151
TXT Apparatus under subclass 145 in which the receivers are placed in the
    entrance position to the filling circle by hand.

    (1)     Note.  Removal may be manual or by ejecting means provided in the
    machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    391,    for miscellaneous aids to manual filling operations or steps, and
    see the search notes thereto for related search fields.


CLS 141/152
TXT Apparatus under subclass 145 in which the machine comprises parts
    adjustable for the accommodation of receivers of different sizes.

    (1)     Note.  The adjustment must be to the physical size of the receiver
    such as in the receiver support, in the position of the head or in some
    other capacity than mere quantity of the charge as determined by the supply
    means independently of its contact with a receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177,    for filling systems of the successive receiver type having a
    nozzle, guide or conveyor adjustable to the receiver size.

    266,    for adjustable, movable components in filling systems having means
    to move the supply and receiver to, from or during flow relation.

    376,    for filling systems having an adjustable support for the supply.

    378+,   for filling systems having an adjustable support for the receiver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 282+ and 434 for variable volume dispensers.


CLS 141/153
TXT Apparatus under subclass 129 in which the filling of the successive
    receivers or any one of them is responsive in some way to the presence,
    absence or some varying condition of the contents material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139,    for automatic control of filling systems having lateral motion of
    the registering head and receiver in response to a condition of the
    contents material.

    192+,   for automatic control of flow cut-off or diversion in filling
    systems generally, and see the search notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 52+ for automatic or triggered
    controlled of package making systems and especially subclasses 56+, 73, 74,
    and 493 for triggering or control by presence of contents.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 52+ for automatic control of dispensing
    systems.


CLS 141/154
TXT Apparatus under subclass 129 in which the filling system is combined with
    or possesses features having special utility in connection with receivers
    which have an inlet alined with the flow path of the entering material,
    which inlet is not symmetrically placed with reference to the dimension of
    the receiver, transverse to the inlet axis or which have an inlet closed by
    a flap attached to the margin of the inlet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for filling systems involving the manipulation of flexible or
    collapsible receivers or supply containers.


CLS 141/155
TXT Apparatus under subclass 129 in which (1) two or more portions of the
    apparatus having distinct functions each have the regulating elements
    therefor so arranged as to require one element to assume a desired position
    simultaneously or in proper sequence with the positioning of another
    element, whereby the operation of one part is directly dependent upon the
    correct positioning of the regulated element of another part, this
    arrangement being something other than or in addition to the normal
    operating mechanism of the parts, or (2) some nonautomatic mechanism is so
    arranged as to prevent operation of parts or all of the machine when such
    operation would (a) endanger the person of an operator or (b) injure some
    part of the machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97,     for filling systems having a guard or screen for the operator.

    156+,   for filling systems having successive receivers supplied thereto
    where the filling operation is triggered by the presence of a plurality of
    receivers.

    346+,   for other interlocks in filling systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclass 77 for interrelated or safety control in
    packaging machines.

    100,    Presses, subclass 63 for presses not elsewhere provided for which
    have interrelated or safety controls.


CLS 141/156
TXT Apparatus under subclass 129 in which means is provided for sensing a
    normal or desired condition or position of the receptacle, an abnormal or
    undesired condition or position of the receptacle, or the absence of the
    receptacle, and as a result of this sensing and without external
    intervention, bringing about an alteration in the operation or control of
    the filling system.

    (1)     Note.  The control operates through the starting or stopping of the
    drive of the system or some component part thereof so as to correct, avoid
    damage from or mitigate the effects of such condition, or to cause the
    normal operation or cessation of operation of the system or some parts
    thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140+,   for no-can-no-fill systems of the turret type and other laterally
    moving head and receiver unit.

    351+,   for filling systems in which the discharge means is actuated by
    some motion of or by the presence of the receiver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 52+ for package making machine having
    automatic or triggered control, especially subclasses 63 and 67+ for
    control by the receiver.


CLS 141/157
TXT Apparatus under subclass 156 in which the control over a single filling
    operation is exerted by the receiver which is intended to receive that
    particular charge.


CLS 141/158
TXT Apparatus under subclass 157 in which receivers are supplied with
    successive premeasured charges and in which a unit designed to form the
    charge for the missing receiver is either prevented from operating to
    receive a charge or is operated to dispose of its charge in some way other
    than the normal path.


CLS 141/159
TXT Apparatus under subclass 157 in which the control on the system is exerted
    by some linkage, latch, clutch, trip or servo system which is either
    operated by the presence of the receiver or prevented from operating by its
    absence.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141+,   for similar systems with laterally moving registering head and
    receiver units.

    359,    for receiver weight operated discharge means in other filling
    systems.


CLS 141/160
TXT Apparatus under subclass 159 in which the responsive member comprises or
    operates an auxiliary valve or switch which in turn controls the operation
    of a motor or transducer connected to the related filling unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    361,    for servo system filling devices having an actuator juxtaposed to
    the outlet for contact with the receiver.


CLS 141/161
TXT Apparatus under subclass 159 in which the responsive means operates to
    engage or disengage a clutch comprised in the operating means for the
    filling unit related to the receiver position.


CLS 141/162
TXT Apparatus under subclass 157 in which power is transmitted from the
    conveyor to the supply units by the lateral motion of the receiver which is
    imparted to it by the conveyor and transmitted by it either directly to the
    supply unit or to a latch, mechanical movement, etc., which operates the
    supply unit.


CLS 141/163
TXT Apparatus under subclass 129 in which the conveyor, either endless or
    rotary, has a horizontally placed arbor or axis adjacent the filling
    position so that the receiver changes its orientation in connection with
    the filling operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113+,   for receivers which are filled through the bottom or while inverted.

    118     and 124, for drip prevention and overfill removal by tilting a
    receiver.

    171,    for conveyors for successive receivers which change the orientation
    of the receivers.


CLS 141/164
TXT Apparatus under subclass 129 in which the receiver is supported on its side
    on the conveyor and is filled while occupying a horizontal or substantially
    horizontal position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67+,    for filling systems in which a fluent charge is impelled or blown
    into a receiver.

    113,    for filling systems in which the receiver is filled through the
    bottom or while inverted.

    163,    for horizontal axis conveyors to supply successive receivers.


CLS 141/165
TXT Apparatus under subclass 129 in which a conveyor is provided with movable
    means to center or guide the receiver into position for accurate alignment
    with the supply outlet, or movable means is provided either on the filling
    head or on the conveyor to engage the receiver by friction or compression,
    (e.g. spring clip) and support it against gravity or against shifting from
    proper position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    269,    for filling systems in which a clamp or the receiver is
    interconnected with a movable supply head or receiver lift.


CLS 141/166
TXT Apparatus under subclass 165 in which the support is specially adapted to
    support a receiver of the bag type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    313+,   for filling means with receiver or receiver coacting means
    especially adapted for flexible or collapsible receivers, and see the
    search notes to this group of subclasses.


CLS 141/167
TXT Apparatus under subclass 129 in which the speed of travel of the receiver
    is varied during its course through the machine while on a single conveyor.

    (1)     Note.  Travel through successive circular paths of different radii
    is included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168+,   for plural conveyors operating in series, the relative speed of
    which may differ.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses for receiver
    drives of similar characteristics.


CLS 141/168
TXT Apparatus under subclass 129 in which the receiver handling means comprises
    plural conveyors operating sequentially to transport each receiver, or a
    conveyor and (1) additional means for raising the receiver above the
    conveyor or lowering it from that position to the conveyor, or (2) means
    for otherwise manipulating the receiver as by supplying it to or removing
    it from the conveyor.

    (1)     Note.  Manipulating means includes means to lift, lower, dispense
    or discharge a receiver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses for systems of
    plural conveyors successively carrying the same load.


CLS 141/169
TXT Apparatus under subclass 168 in which the successive receivers are
    rearranged to or from a single line from or to plural lines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 434+ for a system of plural
    conveyors for arranging or rearranging a stream, or streams, of items.


CLS 141/170
TXT Apparatus under subclass 168 in which the receiver is shifted transversely
    from one conveyor to another which is in a generally parallel relation to
    the first, the filling operation taking place in connection with the shift.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 367+, 370.07 through 370.09,
    370.1, 370.11 through 370.13, 426+, 463.1+, 597+, 599, 637, and others for
    means for moving a load off a conveyor.


CLS 141/171
TXT Apparatus under subclass 168 in which a receiver is stored, dispensed or
    entered into the conveyor system with its major axis in a different
    position from which it occupies in receiving its charge, or in which a
    change in position occurs after filling and prior to or during the removal
    of the receiver from the conveyor system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for receivers filled by being dipped or immersed in the supply
    material.

    113,    for receivers filled through the bottom or while inverted.

    163,    for receiver filled on a conveyor having a horizontal axis.

    164,    for receivers supported on their side during the filling operation.


CLS 141/172
TXT Apparatus under subclass 168 in which at least one power driven or other
    type of conveyor is combined with means for elevating the receiver above
    the conveyor line, usually for the purpose of bringing it in contact with
    the filling head.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    275+,   for filling systems in which the receiver is raised or lowered with
    reference to the filling means in connection with the filling operation,
    and see the search notes to subclass 275.


CLS 141/173
TXT Apparatus under subclass 168 in which a receiver supply is provided from
    which receivers are transferred to the filling system proper either at the
    filling station or to the conveyor at some point prior thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses.


CLS 141/174
TXT Apparatus under subclass 173 having means especially adapted to feed cups
    to a filling station one at a time from a nested or stacked arrangement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, particularly subclass 96 for dispensers of cup
    type receivers in combination with fluent material dispensers wherein the
    organization includes a mere support for the cup in filling position at
    most, i.e. no means for guiding or bringing the dispersed cup into filling
    relation with the fluent material dispenser.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 129+ for plural compartment dispensers there
    provided in which a second compartment may be included for supporting a
    stack of cups, the relation not being appropriate to the article dispensing
    nor the filling with fluent material classes.


CLS 141/175
TXT Apparatus under subclass 173 in which successive receivers are advanced by
    being pushed a distance equal to the transverse dimension of the receiver
    in the direction of its advance, a pause usually for filling intervening
    between successive strokes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173,    for similar apparatus in which the initial push imparted to a
    receiver is a dispensing operation for that receiver, and subsequent
    strokes dispense another receiver while advancing the preceding receiver.


CLS 141/176
TXT Apparatus under subclass 168 in which means is provided to separate the
    filled receiver from that part of the system in which it receives its
    charge either by removing it from the conveying system entirely or by
    transferring it to another conveyor, said means being relatively movable
    with respect to the filling conveyor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281+,   for filling systems with means for manipulating a filled receiver
    for separation from its support or filling head, and see the search notes
    to subclass 281.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 367+, 370.07 through 370.09,
    370.1, 370.11 through 370.13, 426+, 463.1+, 597+, 599, 637, and others for
    means for moving a load off a conveyor.


CLS 141/177
TXT Apparatus under subclass 129 in which the filling means outlet and the
    conveyor support for the receiver are relatively adjustable to provide for
    receivers of different sizes or heights and/or either the filling head or
    the receiver seat on the conveyor is adjustable for receivers of different
    sizes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    for turret type filling systems having means for adjustment to
    receiver size.

    235,    for plural filling means comprising heads which are adjustably
    spaced one from another.

    266,    for filling systems having supply means or receiver supports which
    are relatively movable during or in connection with flow relation and
    having an adjustable, movable component.

    367+,   for filling means having adjustable contact area or size filling
    heads.

    376,    for filling systems having an adjustable support for the contents
    supply.

    378,    for adjustable support for receivers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 117+ for adjustable conveyors.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 282+ for dispensers of the discharge
    assistant type with discharge volume varying means, subclasses 434+ for
    trap type dispensers with discharge volume varying means.


CLS 141/178
TXT Apparatus under subclass 129 in which multiple receivers are handled as an
    individual unit in other than side by side (duplicate) filling arrangement
    or in single sequential arrangement.

    (1)     Note.  Handling plural receivers in crates or trays for filling is
    here classified only if the tray or crate is handled as a single unit and
    does not merely become part of the conveyor system to feed a side by side
    (duplicate) line of receivers to duplicate heads.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179,    for filling systems in which multiple receivers are filled at one
    cycle but in which the plurality of receivers is handled individually being
    separated into appropriate groups from a compacted line.

    183+,   for conveying means to supply successive receivers in trays or
    crates with conveyor interconnected contents discharge means and see (1)
    Note above.

    234+,   for plural filling heads or means either in columns or rows, i.e.
    side by side or in depth.


CLS 141/179
TXT Apparatus under subclass 178 in which multiple filling heads operate on
    corresponding multiple receivers, said receivers being supplied in a single
    line which advances in multiple spaces corresponding to the number of
    filling heads, and the receivers being counted off or grouped as needed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186,    for filling systems of the successive receiver type comprising
    plural lines or stations, and see the search notes to that subclass.


CLS 141/180
TXT Apparatus under subclass 129 in which a moving conveyor slides beneath a
    receiver in filling position, the receiver being detained by appropriate
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172,    for means for lifting a receiver from a conveyor which may or may
    not continue to move.


CLS 141/181
TXT Apparatus under subclass 129 in which the supply manifold or one or more
    filling heads are shifted vertically to bring them into coacting relation
    with receivers supplied by the conveyor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250,    for filling systems in which movement of a head or tube to filling
    position operates in connection with the movement of a trap or valve.

    279,    for supply systems having a movable head or supply and provided
    with a movable support therefor and a hose type connection to some
    preceding source or supply.

    284,    for filling systems having a movably mounted supply, the movement
    being connected with the filling operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 160+ for dispensers having a movably mounted
    supply.


CLS 141/182
TXT Apparatus under subclass 181 in which the movable means for bridging the
    gap between a stationary supply manifold, measuring chamber, etc., and the
    receiver supplied by the conveyor comprises a noncontrolling type of sleeve
    or funnel which is movable or removable with respect to the preceding
    section of the supply means.


CLS 141/183
TXT Apparatus under subclass 129 in which the supply of the contents and the
    supply of the successive receivers are interconnected or sequentially
    related in the cyclical operation of the machine.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition for the meaning of cyclical
    operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144+,   for filling systems of the successive receiver type having a rotary
    set of progressively acting heads.


CLS 141/184
TXT Apparatus under subclass 183 in which a filling system designed to perform
    at least two cycles, that is, to fill at least two successive receivers, is
    arranged to cease operation after a predetermined number of cycles or after
    filling a predetermined number of receivers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for filling systems which have a modified cycle in the initial or
    closing part of a more or less prolonged period of operation.

    155,    for filling systems which cease to operate under emergency
    conditions, i.e., those relating to failure which cannot be foreseen.  Thus
    the exhausting of a limited supply of contents material or the completion
    of filling of a definite number of receivers is not an unforeseen condition.


CLS 141/185
TXT Apparatus under subclass 184 in which receivers are filled as a group a row
    at a time, the filling of a row comprising a cycle.


CLS 141/186
TXT Apparatus under subclass 183 in which two or more units are provided each
    of which comprises a head and means for supplying successive receivers and
    is capable of operating as a filling system if separated from the other
    units.

    (1)     Note.  The lines are substantial duplicates although they may be
    set up as entirely separate structures or as mere multiple heads on the
    same source of supply or multiple lines of receivers on the same conveyor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for corresponding processes.

    16,     for siphon bottle filling with plural heads, stations or materials.

    35+,    for plural connected receivers filled by serial flow.

    59,     for filling systems operating with diverse fluids under pressure
    and involving an exhausting operation applied to sets of receivers.

    99,     for plural filling lines which are differentiated as to some
    characteristic.

    100+,   for filling systems having plural materials or material supplies or
    placing plural charges in a receiver.

    234+,   for filling systems comprising plural filling means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 168+ for selective or alternate supply
    of plural covers and/or plural contents in package making machinery
    subclass 202 for plural line packaging.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 129 for dispensers involving plural sources,
    subclasses 265+ for discharge assistant operating in sets.


CLS 141/187
TXT Apparatus under subclass 183 in which the contents handling means operates
    by engaging the sides of a moving column of material frictionally or by
    entering partially into the moving column of material to advance it in the
    direction of the supply outlets.

    (1)     Note.  The means must not be continuous so as to comprise a cut-off
    or separating element between successive charges.  If separation of charges
    occurs it must be at least partly a breaking away of the column of material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 235+ for packaging machines in which a
    charge separated from a moving column is subsequently handled as an
    article, i.e., by means which do not confine it laterally to a flow path.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for material handling means which advance a cord, strand or other column of
    material by engaging the sides thereof.


CLS 141/188
TXT Apparatus under subclass 183 in which the timing of a cycle of operations
    involving at least one valve can be changed, usually for the purpose of
    varying the amount of material supplied to a given receiver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 287 for dispensers having an adjustment in a
    relatively movable actuator for a discharge assistant, subclass 309 for
    adjustable stroke pump, piston, pulsator or follower, subclass 310 for
    variable volume dispensers having a discharge assistant combined with a
    discharge controller.


CLS 141/189
TXT Apparatus under subclass 183 in which the contents discharge means is
    controlled by a protuberance on the upper or receiver-supporting portion or
    face of the conveyor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162,    for transfer of power from the conveyor to the supply means through
    the receiver as a link in the transmission.


CLS 141/190
TXT Apparatus under subclass 183 having a ratchet type drive for the conveyor.


CLS 141/191
TXT Apparatus under subclass 183 having a cam drive for one (either the
    discharge means or conveyor) and a gear drive for the other.


CLS 141/192
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having some element of control which
    operates in response to a condition in or about the receiver either to
    divert the material of the system elsewhere or to terminate its flow to the
    said receiver.

    (1)     Note.  Where the bringing together of parts of the system
    establishes a flow path and subsequent flow of materials the system is not
    deemed automatic.

    (2)     Note.  Establishing or maintaining a state of equilibrium (i.e.
    without flow cut-off) is not automatic control.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for filling systems which have a modified cycle in the initial or
    closing part of a more or less prolonged period of operation.

    39,     for diverse fluid pressure containing systems wherein the filling
    means is controlled by a gas condition in the receiver.

    83,     for filling apparatus including testing or weighing receiver
    contents.

    95,     for filling apparatus including signals, indicators and the like
    which are responsive to level or pressure in the receiver.

    138+,   for filling systems with means to supply successive receivers
    including means for interrupting a cycle.

    153,    for automatic control of filling cycle by contents material.

    155,    for filling systems which cease to operate under emergency
    conditions.

    156+,   for filling systems wherein the filling means is triggered by the
    presence of the receiver.

    184+,   for filling apparatus arranged to cease operation after a
    predetermined number of cycles or after filling a predetermined number of
    receivers.

    285+,   for appropriate subclasses, wherein equilibrium of the system may
    be established or maintained by claimed means.

    291+,   for supply valves operated by receiver engaging means.

    351+,   for receiver actuated discharge means for establishing a flow path
    and subsequent flow of material.


CLS 141/193
TXT Apparatus under subclass 192 in which the element of control responds to
    the relative movement away from each other of the supply means and some
    means for engaging the receiver, the relative recession being due to or
    controlled by the state of the filling operation as revealed by the amount
    of material in the receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251     and 263+, for nonautomatic systems in which there is a relatively
    receding motion between some supply means and receiver engaging means
    during a flow relation.


CLS 141/194
TXT Apparatus under subclass 193 additionally comprising means to separate a
    filled receiver from the supply means flow relationship.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176,    for apparatus comprising conveying means to supply successive
    receivers and which include conveying means for removing or ejecting a
    filled receiver.

    272,    for a tilting type receiver support for separating the receiver
    from the filling head.

    281,    for means manipulating a filled receiver for separating it from the
    head or support.


CLS 141/195
TXT Apparatus under subclass 193 including a means which causes separation of
    material from the supply and which responds to the level of contents
    material in such receivers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198+,   for other level or overflow responsive means, such means responding
    to a condition in a receiver.


CLS 141/196
TXT Apparatus under subclass 192 in which the element of control responds (1)
    to a condition in a receiver other than that which is at the filling
    station or in a chamber of a volume equivalent to the receiver or designed
    to receive overflow, or (2) to the level of material in the receiver being
    filled to cause the filling means to divert the material being delivered
    thereby to some other point in the system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 119.01+ for fluent material handling
    systems in which flow to alternate or successively substituted paths is
    self-controlled.


CLS 141/197
TXT Apparatus under subclass 192 especially designed for operation in receivers
    being filled or having been filled with gaseous material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, for inflatable article filling chucks and stems,
    many of which have automatic control features.


CLS 141/198
TXT Apparatus under subclass 192 in which the element of control is responsive
    to the presence of contents material in the receiver being filled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 386+ for liquid level responsive or
    maintaining systems.


CLS 141/199
TXT Apparatus under subclass 198 having a funnel type supply means with a flow
    controlling arrangement which is responsive to a buoyant element which
    arrangement causes termination of flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    297+    and 331+, for other funnel type filling means.


CLS 141/200
TXT Apparatus under subclass 199 in which the flow controlling means is held in
    open position during the filling operation against a bias toward closing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218+,   for other level or overflow responsive valves of the latched type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 66+ for trip control of
    biased valves.


CLS 141/201
TXT Apparatus under subclass 199 in which the supply means has a flow
    controlling means which is normally held in open position and in which the
    element of control operates to hold the said flow controlling means closed
    after a predetermined level of material has been reached in the receiver.


CLS 141/202
TXT Apparatus under subclass 199 in which the supply means is provided with at
    least two serially arranged flow controlling means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210+,   for plural series arranged valves with manual and level control,
    and see the search notes to subclass 210.


CLS 141/203
TXT Apparatus under subclass 199 in which the flow controlling means is
    provided with a handle or guide which is operative from the upper portion
    of the said supply funnel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 470+ for dispensers having a flow controller
    associated with the supply container handle.


CLS 141/204
TXT Apparatus under subclass 203 in which the guide or handle mounts both the
    flow controlling means and the level responsive means.


CLS 141/205
TXT Apparatus under subclass 199 having a flow controlling means which is
    constrained to move in hinge fashion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 448 for float arm operated pivoted valves.


CLS 141/206
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 198 including a flow controlling means
    which is opened by hand for commencement of flow to the receiver and having
    (1) means responsive to a predetermined quantity of contents material in
    the receiver and (2) some hand controlled means for terminating the flow to
    such receiver.  The manual means and the level responsive means do not
    necessarily act to control the same valve.

    (1)     Note.  In this and the indented subclasses are classified for the
    most part filling station dispensing nozzles which are hand held and/or
    supported and controlled for at least a portion of the filling period and
    such subcombinations thereof which include claims to the level or overflow
    responsive means and which have the readily separable dispenser-receiver
    disclosure.

    (2)     Note.  With reference to (1) Note above, and subclasses 210+ it
    should be noted that many of the patents in the fore said group claim only
    for example, the self-opening and level responsive valve means and make no
    mention of the manually initiated or controlled valve serially preceding
    such valve.  Stated differently many of the patents in subclasses 210+
    disclose the required combination for the group; however, they claim only
    an attachment for the ordinary manually controlled dispensing nozzle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199+,   appropriate subclasses for funnel type supply means having a
    manually opened flow controller and level responsive cut-off means.

    387+,   for filling heads shiftably or separately connected to a supply
    means, which heads may be hand held.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 390 for fluent material handling means
    comprising a level responsive flow controller having a second manual
    control.


CLS 141/207
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 206 having means which precludes
    commencement of filling until the positioning of the filling means is
    satisfactorily established with the receiver, such means being more than a
    mere valve operator involved in the positioning operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    346,    for filling means having interlocked discharge means supporting
    means and/or coupling means.


CLS 141/208
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 206 having means effective to cause
    stoppage of flow as a result of disconnection of the filling means from the
    receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    347,    for discharging means having coupling means responsive to material
    flow.


CLS 141/209
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 206 in which the level responsive means
    operates to render the hand controlled flow cut-off means inoperative.

    (1)     Note.  The usual arrangement in this type of filling organization
    is to have a flow controller which is spring biased to closed position, the
    disabler or disconnecting means rendering the biasing means effective to
    close the valve and terminate flow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 89+ for details of means for
    blocking or disabling a valve actuator.


CLS 141/210
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 206 in which there is claimed or disclosed
    diverse controls for diverse flow controlling means which latter means are
    serially arranged in the liquid flow path to the receiver.

    (1)     Note.  See the reference to the limitation of this and indented
    subclasses in subclass 206 above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228,    for similar arrangements wherein the manually initiated valve of
    this and the indented subclasses is replaced by an externally initiated
    valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 637+ for separate actuators for plural
    valves; 613 for distribution systems comprising plural serially arranged
    valves.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 6+ for serial meter-operated
    and manual flow line controllers.


CLS 141/211
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 210 in which one of the flow controlling
    means is normally biased to noncut off position.


CLS 141/212
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 211 in which the normally inoperative flow
    controlling means is started toward cut-off position by some buoyant means.


CLS 141/213
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 212 in which the buoyant means has a lever
    pivotally attached thereto and which lever moves to close the flow
    controlling means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 434+ for float arm operated valves, per
    se.


CLS 141/214
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 211 in which the flow control cut-off
    means is started toward operative position by means responsive to a change
    in fluid pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 393 for level control means operated by
    pressure change in an outlet or inlet at liquid level in a fluid handling
    system of the nonseparable type; subclass 413 for fluid-pressure
    servo-relay operation of the level responsive valve.


CLS 141/215
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 214 in which fluid in the flow line means
    behind

    the flow cut-off means operates to seat the said cut-off means.


CLS 141/216
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 210 in which one of the means controlling
    flow in the flow line to the receiver comprises a buoyant means movement of
    which operates to directly apply a force to the flow cut-off means.


CLS 141/217
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 206 in which at least two distinct means
    effect operation of a single flow line cut-off means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 390 for liquid level responsive valves
    having manual control also.


CLS 141/218
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 217 in which the cut-off means is
    mechanically held by a stop means (not by weight or gravity or vacuum) in
    open position during normal operation of the filling means against a
    closing bias.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200,    for a funnel valve similarly arranged.

    217,    for valve means held open by its weight or gravity or by vacuum
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 420+ for trip mechanism in
    float-controlled valves.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 66+ for trip control of
    biased valves generally.


CLS 141/219
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 218 in which the holding means is rendered
    ineffective by electrically controlled magnetic means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 68+ for electromagnetically
    operated trip means in valves generally.


CLS 141/220
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 218 in which the holding means is rendered
    ineffective by a buoyant means.


CLS 141/221
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 220 including additional means for varying
    the effectiveness or responsiveness of the buoyant means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 416+ for quick-acting float controls for
    valves; 424+ for counter-balance means for float-controlled valves; 426 for
    level adjustment in float controls for valves.


CLS 141/222
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 221 in which the effectiveness of the
    buoyant responsive means is changed by adjusting the operative position of
    the filling means relative to the receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    368,    for adjustable gage collars relating the receiver to the filling
    means.


CLS 141/223
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 220 in which the flow cut-off means is
    urged to closing position by some additional resilient means.


CLS 141/224
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 223 in which the cut-off means partakes of
    a reciprocating movement.


CLS 141/225
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 218 in which the holding means is rendered
    ineffective by some means which responds to the change of the gaseous
    condition in the system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39+,    for diverse fluid containing pressure filling systems wherein the
    filling means is controlled by a gas condition in the receiver.

    214,    for pressure control in one of plural series valves one of which is
    level responsive, and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 141/226
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 225 in which the last mentioned means
    becomes operative upon an increased pressure condition in the receiver.


CLS 141/227
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 198 having a cut-off means in addition to
    the level or overflow responsive means which is rendered ineffective
    through linkage or the like operated by means exterior of the filling means.

    (1)     Note.  The exterior means may comprise the receiver, the cut-off
    being rendered inoperative through some linkage means which react to the
    presence of or because of the reactive force exerted by the receiver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 389+ for nonseparable fluid handling
    systems having level responsive valves with a second diverse control;
    subclass 410 for liquid level responsive or maintaining systems including
    float control valves which valves may be opened by external means.


CLS 141/228
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 227 which includes at least two fluid flow
    line cut-off means serially arranged.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210,    for similar arrangements including a manually operated valve for
    initiating flow, and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 141/229
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 228 in which one of the means controlling
    fluid flow is responsive to a buoyant means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 409+ for float controlled valves in
    nonseparable fluid handling systems, and see the search notes to subclass
    409.


CLS 141/230
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means which halts flow of
    contents material in a siphon filling arrangement by filling a receiver to
    a level corresponding to that level maintained in the supply means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for overfill removal by siphonic return to supply.

    136,    for bodily lifted or swinging siphon filling means in a filling
    system for successive receivers.

    323,    for siphon type filling means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 123+ for fluent material handling
    systems comprising siphons, and see the search notes to subclass 123.


CLS 141/231
TXT Apparatus under the class definition for supporting the system to enable it
    to be readily conveyed, or for supporting the supply means on a track-like
    mount.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284,    for movably mounted supply means, and see the search notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 899+ for fluent material handling
    systems mounted on vehicles.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 608+ for ambulant dispensers.


CLS 141/232
TXT Apparatus under subclass 231 comprising guide or rail means for supporting
    the filling system or the supply means for movement in a generally
    horizontal plane.


CLS 141/233
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 232 in which the rail or guide means is
    carried by the means which supports the receiver.


CLS 141/234
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising at least two separate or
    distinct means arranged in some unitary or cooperative manner whereat
    material may be delivered to receivers.

    (1)     Note.  Plural heads for filling compartmented receivers are
    considered to place plural charges in the receiver only if the receiver is
    included in the combination or some means is provided in the system which
    has utility only in that connection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99,     for filling arrangements comprising diverse filling lines of heads
    and receivers.

    100+,   for filling arrangements comprising plural materials or material
    supplies or charges in a receiver, particularly subclasses 103+ where there
    is provided separate stations for a single receiver.  See (1) Note.

    178+,   for conveying means to supply successive receivers the successive
    receivers being arranged in crates or trays.


CLS 141/235
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 234 wherein the several filling means may
    be spaced at various distances from each other or wherein the receivers may
    be adjustably spaced one from the other for purposes of accommodating one
    to the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177,    for means for adjusting successive-receiver type filling mechanisms
    to receiver size, and see the search notes for additional search fields on
    the various adjustment problems.


CLS 141/236
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 234 having laterally spaced outlet or
    distributing means provided with separate means for conducting fluids
    having diverse characteristics or diverse flows to or from receivers, the
    plural flows of any one type having a common source or destination.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37+,    for apparatus for diverse fluid containing pressure filling systems
    involving receiver gas content modification, especially subclass 62 for
    annular type manifolds in turrets of the progressively indexing and filling
    type.

    285+,   for multiple passage filling means or filling heads for diverse
    materials or flows.


CLS 141/237
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 234 having means by which a number of
    receivers are filled at the same time from the same principal source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    for plural heads for filling plural compartments of a single
    receiver when the receiver is claimed or the heads have means of utility
    only in this connection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 265+ for dispensers having discharge
    assistants operating as sets; subclasses 426+ for plural nonserial traps in
    dispensers.


CLS 141/238
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 237 in which the entire contents material
    is divided into units corresponding to the number of receivers before the
    commencement of the filling of the said receivers.

    (1)     Note.  The positioning of a manifold between a supply means and
    delivery means whereby the material delivered to the manifold may be
    divided into equal units is not considered subject matter for this group of
    subclasses but will be found in subclasses 244+ below. This line is
    followed even though the main supply is not claimed, when the manifold is
    disclosed as refillable by flow from a supply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244+,   for filling arrangements having a manifold or divider to apportion
    a part of the supply prior to delivery and see (1) Note above.


CLS 141/239
TXT Filling means under subclass 238 arranged or supported for pivotal motion
    such means in one position acting as a divider and in a second position
    acting to deliver the divided material to the receivers.


CLS 141/240
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 238 in which a grid-like or cell-like
    member is applied to or pushed into the contents material to apportion such
    material.


CLS 141/241
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 238 requiring the inversion of the filling
    means and receiver for delivery of the contents material to the receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    319,    for filling arrangements for a single receiver wherein the receiver
    and filling means are manually coupled and inverted.


CLS 141/242
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 237 comprising means effective to separate
    a quantity of contents material from the supply.

    (1)     Note.  The discharge means must at least comprise a valve or valved
    trap, but discharge assistants of the Class 222, Dispensing, subclasses
    251+ type are included.


CLS 141/243
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 242 which permits some freedom of choice
    in the operation of the several filling means, not all filling means being
    necessarily operated simultaneously.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 266 for sets of dispensing units with
    selecting means; subclasses 278+ for alternatively usuable discharge
    assistants in dispensers; subclasses 426+ for stationary traps not
    necessarily operated simultaneously.


CLS 141/244
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 242 having a chamber-like means with
    laterally spaced outlets or delivery means in the flow path between the
    supply means and the filling head means, which acts to distribute or feed
    material to the several filling heads.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238+,   for divider type means not however in a fixed system between supply
    source and delivery means.


CLS 141/245
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 244 in which the manifold or divider is of
    the displacement type, e.g., wherein a means decreasing the chamber volume
    causes the liquid level to rise and overflow into the outlet means which
    were previously above the level in the chamber or manifold.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 319 for dispensers of this type.


CLS 141/246
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 237 having means effective to
    affirmatively separate the receiver from its supporting or holding means or
    in which the supporting or holding means for the receiver may be adjusted
    for different sizes of receivers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194,    for automatic control involving the ejection or release of a filled
    receiver and see the Search Notes to that subclass for other ejectors.

    378,    for plural interchangeable, selective, or adjustable receiver
    supports, and see the search notes to that subclass for adjustable supports
    of various types.


CLS 141/247
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 234 comprising means to assist hand
    filling of receivers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    391,    for other aids to manual filling, and see the search notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 390+ for apparatus which are aids to
    manual packing where closing of the package is included or wherein articles
    are placed in receivers.


CLS 141/248
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 234 in which two filling means operate out
    of phase, e.g., one is necessarily inoperative for filling while the other
    is operating to fill a receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99,     for filling apparatus comprising plural diverse filling lines, one
    line being out of phase or out of step with the other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 265+ for sets of discharge assistant units
    which may operate alternately; subclass 278 for alternatively usable units
    in sets of dispensers.


CLS 141/249
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means to confine, compress
    or change the shape of material by closing or contracting an open or
    too-large form or the like about the material in a direction normal to the
    material's direction of movement or flow, whereby expansion if any is
    permitted longitudinally of the said flow path.

    (1)     Note.  This operation normally affects the entire supply or charge
    and is basically the transformance of a supply holder which is open or
    enlarged for convenience in refilling into a closed or confined flow path
    corresponding to the shape and/or size of the receiver, the shaping or
    compressing, if any, depending on the nature of the material in the charge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     for apparatus including means for contracting a trap to form a
    compacted charge, the trap being of the solid trap type.


CLS 141/250
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means defining a source of
    contents material and means defining a receiver engaging means, said means
    having movement relative to each other which motion is concerned with the
    filling relation and may occur before, after, or at the time of the said
    filling relation.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass comprises chiefly those devices in which the
    filling head is lowered into engagement with the receiver, and since this
    is the usual purpose for lowering material outlets with respect to the
    supply, subcombinations have been included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129+,   for filling systems having conveying means for supplying successive
    receivers, especially subclasses 147 and 181 for head or manifold lowering
    means, including systems having separate movable sleeve or funnel means
    between the outlet and receiver.

    311+,   for movable receiver supports to which movement may be imparted by
    manually moving the receiver, as subclasses 371+ and 377 and see subclasses
    346+ for interlocked discharge means, support and/or coupling not having
    means to move the supply, or receiver to, from or during the flow relation.

    348+,   for supply means carried receiver flow control opening means.


CLS 141/251
TXT Apparatus under subclass 250 comprising means to support a receiver against
    gravity and separate means assisting the flow of contents material from a
    supply source, said means being so related as to require relative motion of
    receiver and flow assisting means away from each other during normal
    filling operation.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses take all discharge
    assistant-type fillers, which qualify under subclass 250 even where no
    source of supply is claimed.

    (2)     Note.  This type of filling operation is frequently referred to as
    "uniform density" filling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193+,   for such systems having control means responsive to the degree of
    filling or to the filling head or receiver position resulting from the
    desired degree of filling.


CLS 141/252
TXT Apparatus under subclass 251 comprising means encompassing a receiver for
    the purpose of maintaining the said receiver against spillage, rupture or
    any other undesired collapse during filling thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    316     and 390, for other external forms or protectors for the receiver,
    and see the search notes to subclasses 316 and 390.


CLS 141/253
TXT Apparatus under subclass 251 having means other than manual means for
    applying motive force to the means supporting the receiver.


CLS 141/254
TXT Apparatus under subclass 251 having means for positioning the receiver with
    respect to the discharge assistant, from which it recedes, the resistance
    against movement of said positioning means being varied throughout the
    range of movement thereof.


CLS 141/255
TXT Apparatus under subclass 251 having some means in addition to the discharge
    assistant at the terminus of the flow path to slow down or to otherwise
    change the character of the flow pattern of the contents material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264,    for filling tubes having no discharge assistant but having flow
    stops, retarders, or severers.


CLS 141/256
TXT Apparatus under subclass 251 having means for feeding contents material
    during filling without interruption.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131+,   for continuous flow type apparatus having conveying means to supply
    successive receivers.


CLS 141/257
TXT Apparatus under subclass 256 in which the means for sustaining the receiver
    against gravity has movement away from the discharge means during the
    filling operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 245 and 535+ for supports for lowering a
    receptacle during package filling operations.


CLS 141/258
TXT Apparatus under subclass 251 having means for assisting the movement of
    contents material from a source to a receiver by an action which partakes
    of a recurring back and forth linear motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71+,    for compacting strokes of a member which may pass through the
    supply flow path, but not at a time when material is or could be present
    therein.


CLS 141/259
TXT Apparatus under subclass 258 in which the reciprocating discharge assistant
    partakes of motion about its longitudinal axis as well.


CLS 141/260
TXT Apparatus under subclass 258 in which the axially reciprocating discharge
    assistant is a flow path conduit or tube means having the dual function of
    conducting the flow and assisting the movement thereof as well.


CLS 141/261
TXT Apparatus under subclass 258 in which a flow controlling means is caused to
    operate in step with some portion of the reciprocating motion of the
    discharge assistant.


CLS 141/262
TXT Apparatus under subclass 258 in which the means for sustaining the receiver
    against gravity has movement away from the discharge assistant during the
    filling operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257,    for receding receiver support or engaging means combined with
    continuous contents feeding during filling.


CLS 141/263
TXT Apparatus under subclass 250 having means such that during the filling
    operation a flow path means and a receiver supporting or sustaining means
    have relative motion away from each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251+,   for filling arrangements having relatively receding discharge
    assistant and receiver engaging means.


CLS 141/264
TXT Apparatus under subclass 263 which includes some means either (a) for
    terminating the flow from the filling tube located at the terminus of the
    said tube or (b) for striking off or wiping the flow across the end of the
    fill tube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255,    for discharge assistant and fill tube with additional flow modifier
    at the foot of the said fill tube.

    280,    for filling means having means for scraping or leveling material in
    the receiver by a lateral relative movement of supply means and receiver.


CLS 141/265
TXT Apparatus under subclass 250 provided with means for insertion into a
    receiver for sustaining or protecting it, or for giving shape to a receiver
    of flexible nature and including means for removing or assisting in the
    removal of the receiver after filling thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for flexible or collapsible receiver manipulation before or during
    filling.

    262,    for relatively receding discharge assistant and receiver engaging
    means having a receding receiver support which may involve an internal form
    being separated while being filled.

    281+,   for means for manipulating a filled receiver for separation from
    its support.


CLS 141/266
TXT Apparatus under subclass 250 in which the means for moving the supply or
    the receiver or both into, during or from the flow relation is alterable as
    to stroke, size, or other accommodating feature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    378,    for adjustable receiver supports, and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 141/267
TXT Apparatus under subclass 250 having a unitary means for sustaining a
    receiver against gravity and for controlling the flow of material from the
    supply to the said receiver.

    (1)     Note.  The receiver must be entirely supported against gravity
    before movement to operate the flow controller is begun.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291+,   for multiple passage filling means for diverse materials or flows
    with flow controlling valve operated by receiver engaging means.

    319+,   for supply and receiver which are manually coupled and inverted for
    material transfer.

    351+,   for receiver actuated discharge means wherein coupling and valve
    operation proceed together.

    357,    for filling by applying a receiver to a plunger type follower.


CLS 141/268
TXT Apparatus under subclass 267 in which the unitary receiver support and flow
    controlling means partake of an oscillating or rotating motion about a
    fixed point.


CLS 141/269
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 250 having a receiver gripping means or
    hold-down means which becomes operative for its intended purpose by the
    motion of or with the motion of a filling means or receiver elevator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165+,   for conveying means to supply successive receivers and having
    movable receiver grip or conveyor associated receiver centering means or
    clamp.


CLS 141/270
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 250 having means to move to position or
    support against gravity both the supply means and the receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251+    and 263+, for receiver engaging means and supply or supply
    discharging means relatively receding during the filling operation.


CLS 141/271
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 250 provided with means which pivotally
    supports a receiver and includes means for moving the support relative to
    its pivot to move the said receiver to, from or during the flow relation.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is not intended to take simple pivoting
    supports in the absence of means to cause the swinging of the support.  A
    mere pivoted support means without means to cause movement, i.e., (a
    mounting means which merely permits swinging movement) is found in this
    class, subclass 377 below.

    (2)     Note.  Simple swinging movement or pivotal movement for moving the
    support and the receiver into flow relation or from flow relation, that is
    to say where there is relative movement between the receiver support and
    the filling means, is here classified, even in the absence of additional
    means to cause movement of the receiver and support relative to the filling
    means.

    (3)     Note.  The movement of the receiver must be more than mere
    simultaneous coupling and valve operating movement. Flow controls operated
    by moving the receiver during coupling of the supply and receiver, are in
    subclasses 304 and 351 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for receivers filled through bottom or while inverted.

    304,    for plural diverse passage filling heads with swingable nozzle
    operated valves.  See (3) Note.

    351,    for receiver actuated discharge means where coupling or pressure
    applied by manual or unclaimed means controls flow.  See (3) Note.

    377,    for filling arrangements in which the supporting means permits
    pivotal movement of the receiver while being so supported.  See (1) Note.


CLS 141/272
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 271 in which the support for the receiver
    swings about a generally horizontal axis especially to separate the
    receiver from the head or support means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281+,   for means for separating a receiver from its support when relative
    movement of supply and receiver is involved, and see the search notes
    thereto.


CLS 141/273
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 271 for turning the receiver and its
    supporting means through 180o to thereby up-end the receiver or to reverse
    its position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113+,   for means filling receivers while inverted.

    163,    for filling systems having a conveyor operating about a horizontal
    axis and supplying successive receivers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclass 392 for aids to manual filling comprising
    receptacle turnover devices.


CLS 141/274
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 273 for use with receivers having
    internally stoppered means which seat by gravity upon inversion and
    thereafter are held seated by the internal pressure in the receiver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Packing Making, subclass 264 for filling and closing means for
    internally stoppered bottles having means for applying such closures.


CLS 141/275
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 250 which includes means for raising or
    lowering a receiver whereby to bring such receiver into the flow
    relationship.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148+    and 172, for filling systems having conveyors supplying successive
    receivers to filling relation by a combination of lateral and vertical
    movements.

    251+    and 263+, appropriate subclasses for relatively receding discharge
    and receiver support means during filling.

    281,    for filling apparatus which include means for manipulating a filled
    receiver in order to separate the receiver from its supporting means or
    head.


CLS 141/276
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 275 in which the means for lifting or
    lowering the receiver has interconnected therewith additional means to
    control the discharge from the supply means, such means being external of
    the receiver, i.e. the receiver is not a necessary link in transmitting the
    motion or power.


CLS 141/277
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 275 in which the lifting of the receiver
    is accomplished through fluid pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149,    for progressively acting turret-type machines having yielding or
    fluid lift means providing vertical movement of the receivers.


CLS 141/278
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 275 in which the means for raising or
    lowering the receiver for filling includes a resilient or spring biased
    support or element whereby to effect raising or lowering of the said
    receiver or permit a resilient or lost motion connection between the
    receiver support and the filling means.


CLS 141/279
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 250 having a supply means and a filling
    head which are connected by means of a flexible coupling section or hose
    and which includes means for movably supporting the filling head for
    coaction with the receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    387+,   for filling apparatus having filling heads shiftably or separably
    connected to the supply.


CLS 141/280
TXT Apparatus under subclass 250 comprising means to cause lateral motion
    between the receiver and the filling head so as to effect a wiping action
    across the surface of the contents to thereby level or scrape said surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    for filling apparatus including overfill removal by wiping,
    scraping or spatulating means.

    283,    for apparatus in which the receiver is moved laterally with respect
    to the head.


CLS 141/281
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 250 which includes means for moving or
    otherwise handling a receiver which has been filled for the purpose of
    separating the receiver from the filling head or support or other means
    which has related the receiver to the filling means during the filling
    operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176,    for apparatus comprising conveying means for receivers and means
    for removing or ejecting a filled receiver.

    194,    for automatic control involving ejection or release of a filled
    receiver.

    246,    for plural receiver filling means having ejecting means therefor.

    265,    for means to separate a filled receiver from an internal form.

    272,    for tilting type support for separating a receiver from the filling
    head.


CLS 141/282
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 281 in which the manipulation is for the
    purpose of separating the filled receiver from a form which is externally
    arranged with respect to the receiver during filling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    316     and 390, for other externally arranged forms for filling purposes.


CLS 141/283
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 250 in which the receiver partakes of
    motion in a horizontal plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for centrifugal filling means.

    280,    for apparatus in which relative lateral motion of the head and
    receiver serves to scrape or level material at the receiver mouth.


CLS 141/284
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 250 including means to support or position
    the supply means for movement to, from or during the flow relation with the
    receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231+,   for track mounted supply means.

    375,    for supports for a removable supply.

    376,    for adjustable supports for a supply.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 581 for movably mounted tanks.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 160 for movably mounted dispensers.


CLS 141/285
TXT Filling apparatus under the class definition having at least two fluid flow
    lines or passageways each one being for a fluid having a different physical
    characteristic or flowing in a different direction or for a different
    purpose, i.e. one flow not being for filling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37+,    for filling apparatus comprising diverse fluids under pressure and
    involving receiver gas content modification, and see the Search Notes
    thereto, especially subclass 54.


CLS 141/286
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 285 which additionally includes one or
    more of means defining a baffle, spreader, displacer, drip ring, filter or
    screen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44+,    for filling apparatus involving diverse fluids under pressure and
    which include gas and other material separating passages or chambers.


CLS 141/287
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 285 provided with means for effecting a
    seal between the filling means and the receiver and which seal is caused to
    expand by the presence of a gaseous material in the filling means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for diverse fluid containing pressure filling systems in which the
    system fluid is used in a sealing operation.


CLS 141/288
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 285 including an adjustably mounted or
    sectioned outlet means which controls the relationship of the receiver to
    the filling means to thereby determine the contents material level in the
    receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    368,    for filling means having adjustable gage collars but not involving
    multiple passages for diverse materials.


CLS 141/289
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 285 having a fluid conduit means which is
    open to the ambient air or to the supply means and which means has freedom
    of movement transversely of the direction of coupling movement of the
    receiver and filling means.


CLS 141/290
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 285 having a passage for gas or vapor
    which is external to the liquid line to the receiver and which terminates
    in the supply container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 481.5 for flexible or remotely connected vent
    pipes which merely lead to the supply and have no receiver relationship.


CLS 141/291
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 285 including flow controlling means
    operated by receiver contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    192+,   for automatic control of flow cut-off or diversion of supply means
    which may involve operators which are responsive to receiver contact.

    351+,   for receiver actuated supply means wherein diverse materials or
    flows are not involved, and see the search notes to subclass 351.


CLS 141/292
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 291 in which the flow control means
    actuator has a portion which contacts the receiver filling inlet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140     and 159, for filling apparatus having means to supply successive
    receivers and wherein the receiver inlet means may act on the valve
    controlling means.

    182,    for conveying means to supply successive receivers including head
    or manifold lowering means and a separate movable sleeve or funnel between
    the outlet means and the receiver.

    353+,   for receiver actuated supply means including flow paths which
    telescope during the act of coupling.

    360+,   for receiver actuated supply means having a part of the actuator
    located adjacent the outlet for contact by the receiver.


CLS 141/293
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 292 having at least two flow controlling
    means which are caused to function by means contacting the receiver.


CLS 141/294
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 293 in which the operating linkage has
    movement which takes up slack before it becomes effective to act as an
    actuator for at least one of the valves.


CLS 141/295
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 292 having an opening to the ambient air
    defined by a means which encircles the contents material flow line to the
    receiver or lies within and is coaxial with the contents material flow line.


CLS 141/296
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 291 in which the fluid outlet means and
    the flow cut-off means operator are substantially concentric and in which
    the flow cut-off means is urged toward closed position.


CLS 141/297
TXT Filling devices under subclass 285 in which the filling means comprises a
    funnel.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition, section II, for the definition of
    a funnel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199+,   for automatic control of flow cut-offs involving funnel-type supply
    means in which control is by a float means.

    331+,   for other funnel type filling devices not involving plural passages
    for diverse materials.


CLS 141/298
TXT Filling devices under subclass 297 having a flow controller and stem
    therefor and in which the means defining the said stem is concentric with
    the outlet conduit and forms a passage open to the ambient atmosphere at
    least while the supply outlet is open.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    295,    for concentric open vents in diverse passage heads having a
    receiver-operated supply valve.


CLS 141/299
TXT Filling devices under subclass 297 having a flow conduit which encircles
    the contents material outlet conduit of the funnel and which is open to the
    ambient atmosphere at least while the material outlet is open.

    (1)     Note.  Both vent and supply passages may be uncontrolled, or either
    or both may be valved.


CLS 141/300
TXT Filling devices under subclass 297 having a flow conduit openable to the
    ambient atmosphere, located adjacent the wall of the supply portion of the
    funnel and extending to the top thereof.


CLS 141/301
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 285 which includes a flow cut-off means.


CLS 141/302
TXT Filling devices under subclass 301 having flow cut-off means for each of at
    least two flow passages.


CLS 141/303
TXT Filling devices under subclass 302 in which one of the passages is openable
    to the ambient atmosphere and in which the flow cut-off means therefor is
    controlled by a buoyant element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42+,    for filling means controlled by gas condition in a receiver wherein
    a vacuum line is cut off by a float valve means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 202 for float-operated discriminating
    valves for the release of gas from a diverse fluid containing pressure
    system.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 69 for float controlled cut-off for dispenser
    vent.


CLS 141/304
TXT Filling devices under subclass 302 in which the liquid supply cut-off means
    is operated by the pivotal movement of the outlet conduit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    268,    for unitary oscillating receiver support and cut-off.

    271+,   for swinging supporting means carrying a receiver into or out of
    flow relation, with or without interrelated flow control.


CLS 141/305
TXT Filling devices under subclass 302 in which the several cut-off means are
    either fixedly connected together or are formed as a single member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 625 for valve units for control of
    multiple passage flow.


CLS 141/306
TXT Filling devices under subclass 302 in which the flow cut-off means is urged
    to cut-off position by the weight of the means itself and which means is
    rendered inoperative by turning the said device through 180#o from its
    normal operative position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241,    273+ and 319+, for other filling devices which depend upon
    inversion of the said device for operation, especially subclass 274 for
    swinging receiver supports for receivers with gravity-operated valves.


CLS 141/307
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 301 having a vent passage which is
    provided with a trap or chamber for the accumulation of contents material
    which enters after the receiver is filled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for plural connected receivers in which a second receiver is
    supplied with material overflowing from the first receiver simultaneously
    with continued filling of the first receiver.

    44+,    for diverse fluid pressure systems having means to separate
    entrained liquids or foam from escaping gas, such means sometimes including
    a trap, and see the search notes to subclass 44.

    303,    for similar arrangements including a float valve in the chamber
    which cuts off the vent passage.


CLS 141/308
TXT Filling devices under subclass 301 having a conduit which is open to the
    supply container and the ambient atmosphere within the receiver, together
    with a separate liquid conduit leading from the supply means, and in which
    liquid in the filled receiver acts to block the flow of air to the supply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    309,    for similar apparatus, not including a liquid flow line valve.


CLS 141/309
TXT Filling devices under subclass 285 having plural passage means which extend
    substantially side by side with outlets extending to approximately the same
    terminus, one said passageway, being for the flow of air into the supply
    container and the other for the flow of liquid therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  The filling relation arises from the fact that flow from the
    supply is stopped when the level of liquid in the receiver rises to the
    bottom of the vent passage.  Complete closing of the receiver inlet except
    for the flow passages is not required.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    308,    for similar arrangements; however, where the liquid flow line
    additionally contains a flow controlling means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 479 for dispensers having coterminously
    arranged flow paths where the air to the supply is not blocked by the level
    of material in the receiver.


CLS 141/310
TXT Apparatus under subclass 285 in which the second of the diverse material
    passageways is formed by some means which holds the supply outlet means in
    spaced relation to the receiver inlet means so that air for example may
    escape therebetween.

    (1)     Note.  In order to qualify for this subclass there must be some
    modification of the area which defines the supply outlet means in the
    region of the receiver inlet whereby to define a passageway when the
    receiver is in filling position.


CLS 141/311
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a supply outlet or filling
    head claimed in combination with a receiver or including some means which
    especially cooperates with a receiver in a filling relationship beyond the
    mere requirement of a dispenser, i.e., means which perform their function
    only in connection with some independent receiver.

    (1)     Note.  A tapered flow-path member comprising a funnel or material
    guide is considered to be filling means even though the taper is slight.


CLS 141/312
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 311 in which the supply means is provided
    with an expandable filling tube or coupler means which enters the receiver
    whereby the said receiver is centered or held with respect to the supply
    means by the expansion of the said means internally of the receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    265,    for means to separate a filled receiver from an internal form.

    316,    for inserted or externally applied forms for flexible or
    collapsible receivers where such form is neither extensible nor expansible.

    390,    for inserted or external forms for receivers to aid in filling
    operations, and see the search notes thereto.

    391,    for material guides supported on receivers where the guide is not
    tapered.  See (1) Note.


CLS 141/313
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 311 for filling receivers which are
    readily bendable, foldable or of distortable character, generally of the
    nonmetallic type and not shape sustaining as compared for example with
    bottle, jars or cans.

    (1)     Note.  The receiver must be claimed or the supply outlet or
    receiver support must have features not usable in the same way with rigid
    receivers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     68, 77, 114, 166, and 337, for methods and apparatus there
    classified in which the receiver is of flexible or collapsible character.


CLS 141/314
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 313 provided with means for affixing the
    receiver or a liner for the receiver to some portion of the filling
    apparatus whereby it is held or supported relative to the said filling
    apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 570+ for means to form and fill a bag
    and subclasses 382.1+ for a package making device having means to open a
    hinged closure.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 95+ for bag supports and see (2) Note to that
    subclass of that (248) class for a statement of the line.


CLS 141/315
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 314 including a chair-like support and/or
    a clamp especially adapted to cooperate with a valve bag.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for filling arrangements involving valve bag type receivers there
    classified.

    83,     for other valve bag type filling means there classified.


CLS 141/316
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 314 comprising means either encompassing
    or entering a receiver or receiver inlet means for the purpose of
    maintaining the said receiver against collapse during the filling thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    390,    for receiver forms to aid in filling operations, and see the search
    notes thereto.


CLS 141/317
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 314 which include means for controlling
    the flow to the receiver as by a discharge assistant, trap or valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses, for specific discharge
    assistants, traps and/or discharge controllers.


CLS 141/318
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 311 in which the filling is accomplished
    by movement of the receiver or the like relative to the filling means such
    that the receiver and filling means are in a cylinder and piston like
    relationship.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21+,    for means for filling or refilling dispensers by the operation of
    means causing or controlling dispensing.

    251+,   for systems in which the supply and/or receiver are supported for
    relative receding motion during filling.


CLS 141/319
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 311 in which the supply means and receiver
    are brought together by hand for connected flow relation and the resulting
    organization or system is thereafter inverted to effect filling of the said
    receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    271+,   for swinging supports for receivers, especially subclasses 273+ for
    supporting means for inverting a receiver, and see the search notes to
    subclass 271.


CLS 141/320
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 319 which includes means for (1)
    affirmatively segregating some portion of the supply from the remaining
    supply, (2) trapping off a portion of the supply or (3) controlling flow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses, for specific discharge
    assistants, traps, and/or discharge controllers.


CLS 141/321
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 320 in which the discharge assistant,
    trap, or valve is caused to become operative by means contacting the
    receiver to be filled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    351+,   for receiver operated discharge means, and see the search notes to
    Class 351.


CLS 141/322
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 320 in which the supply means is capped or
    closed by a means which is also the contents material trapping or
    segregating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22+,    for apparatus for filling or refilling dispensers which comprise a
    removable closure for the supply container.

    379+,   for nonuse covers or receivers supported by the supply container
    requiring removal for use.


CLS 141/323
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 311 in which the filling action results by
    the delivery of material from the supply chamber to the receptacle through
    a siphonic action, i.e., a flow line means having a delivery tube which has
    one short leg and one long leg, necessary differential flow pressure being
    maintained after it has once been established by the atmosphere and gravity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230,    for filling means having siphon flow control means and see the
    search notes thereto.


CLS 141/324
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 311 having a supply delivery means but not
    including flow cut-off means, contents material constantly flowing from
    said supply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131+,   for continuous flow type filling arrangements including means to
    supply successive receivers.


CLS 141/325
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 311 for filling cooperation with receivers
    having plural openings, at least one of which is a filling opening, or
    having plural compartments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for siphon bottle filling apparatus having diverse filling openings.

    18+,    for filling apparatus for dispensers.

    100,    for apparatus for placing separate charges in compartments of a
    receiver where a compartmented receiver is claimed or where the filling
    system has features having utility only in connection with compartmented
    receivers.


CLS 141/326
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 325 including additional means to cap or
    close one of the openings of the receiver.


CLS 141/327
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 326 for receivers further characterized by
    having a tubular configuration open at both ends.


CLS 141/328
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 311 in which the filling means or the
    support therefor has a handle or hand grip and is additionally provided
    with special receiver grasping or engaging means whereby the said filling
    means or the support therefor comprises a handle or lifting means for the
    resulting system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    363+,   for receivers having means to support the filling supply, and see
    the search notes to subclass 363.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 323 and 465 for dispensers having handles or
    handgrips on the supply container.


CLS 141/329
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 311 which involve a penetrating or
    piercing means, which is supply means carried, receiver carried or a
    receiver adjunct means carried for piercing some part of the system to
    thereby establish a flow path between the supply means and the receiver.

    (1)     Note.  A knife-edged valve has been classified on the basis of
    other claimed features.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for the filling or refilling of dispensers involving a cutter or
    punch for a gas pressure cartridge.

    98,     for filling combinations including a separate punch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 513+ for package making machines having
    means to cut the contents material.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 80+ for dispensers having cutters and/or
    punches, especially subclass 80 for means for cutting the contents
    material, and see the search notes to subclass 80 and section 19 of the
    class definition of Class 222.  See also (1) Note above.


CLS 141/330
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 329 in which the said penetrating or
    piercing means is carried by the receiver.


CLS 141/331
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 311 which comprises a funnel, i.e., a
    fluid supporting and guiding means, gravity discharged, which generally
    speaking has an inlet opening of greater extent than its outlet opening,
    with or without additional flow controlling means.

    (1)     Note.  A funnel is intended to receive an unconfined flow, and its
    outlet is to be inserted within the receiver inlet.  In the combinations
    herein claimed the funnel may be a first, second or third separable portion
    of a filling system, and may be claimed in any combination with a preceding
    supply or succeeding receiver or both, or as a subcombination.

    (2)     Note.  So-called funnels with dispensing-type discharge assistants,
    e.g., movable traps, antibridging screw conveyors etc., have been placed in
    Class 222 in appropriate subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    365+    and 391, for material guides for filling and see the class
    definition, section II for the distinction between a material guide and a
    funnel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses and see (1) Note above.

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 105+ for funnel-type filling means with
    mold receiver.


CLS 141/332
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 331 which includes means serving as a
    connector, a guide or a support whereby the said funnel may be removably
    related in flow relation to a supply source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    342+,   for nonuse support means for funnels especially subclass 343 for
    funnels supported on a supply means and requiring separation therefrom for
    use.


CLS 141/333
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 331 in which the supply portion of the
    funnel or the outlet thereof is asymmetrically arranged with respect to the
    inlet of the receiver when the said funnel and receiver are in filling
    relationship.


CLS 141/334
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 333 in which the funnel outlet means
    comprises a nozzle or spout, a portion at least of which extends at right
    angles to the vertical when the funnel and receiver are in normal filling
    position.


CLS 141/335
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 331 in which the funnel has a flow
    controlling means which opens to permit discharge of material when the said
    funnel is in position on the receiver to fill same.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    351+,   for receiver actuated discharge means, and see the search notes to
    subclass 351.


CLS 141/336
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 331 in which the funnel is provided with a
    valve and a supporting bail or handle, lifting of the said funnel bail or
    handle closing the valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    328,    for apparatus in which the filling means or support provides a
    handle for the receiver.


CLS 141/337
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 331 in which the funnel is constructed,
    arranged and intended to be foldable, bendable, collapsible or flexible.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    313+,   for other filling systems involving flexible receivers, and see the
    search notes to subclass 313.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 92+ for collapsible wall dispensers;
    subclass 206+ for resilient wall dispensers; subclasses 527+ for dispensers
    having foldable, collapsible or flexible outlet extensions.


CLS 141/338
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 337 in which the funnel when not in use
    for filling is supported for storage in or on the receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    342+,   for other support means for funnels when such funnels are not in
    use and including storage on the supply container.


CLS 141/339
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 331 in which the funnel is provided with
    means to prevent swirling or splashing of the contents material or wherein
    the funnel has a cover or shielding means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 192 for splash preventers in the supply
    containers of dispensers.


CLS 141/340
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 331 including means to relate the funnel
    to the receiver to position it against the effect of gravity by means other
    than or in addition to the basic funnel elements so that the said funnel
    may be supported on the receiver through interposed means or may be
    supported by means apart from the receiver or may be supported in nonuse
    relation.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the funnel is provided with legs, collars,
    etc., usually engaging the receiver outside the inlet, in addition to the
    funnel outlet entering the receiver inlet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    375,    for support means for removable supply containers,

    376,    for means adjustably supporting the supply.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 173+ for supports for dispensers.

    248,    Supports, subclass 94 for supports for funnels, the funnel claimed
    by name only.


CLS 141/341
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 340 for supporting the funnel means
    otherwise than directly on the receiver.


CLS 141/342
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 341 having supporting means for the funnel
    when not used as a filling means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    379+,   for nonuse supporting means for filling apparatus there classified.


CLS 141/343
TXT Apparatus under subclass 342 having a funnel so combined with the supply
    container as not to be usable until separated therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332,    for funnels with connector, guide or support means for removably
    relating the said funnel to a supply source in flow relation.

    380+,   for other nonuse supported receivers requiring separation from the
    supply container for use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Separation or Purification, particularly subclasses 155+ for
    strainers (including funnel type) detachably mounted on containers whose
    contents are to be strained.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 460 for containers having funnel type outlets.

    248,    Supports, subclass 94 for strainer or funnel type supports
    including nominally claimed funnels.


CLS 141/344
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 331 in which the funnel is provided with a
    flow controlling means having an actuator or extended stem or handle means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203+,   for funnel arrangements which are level or overflow responsive
    being closed by a float in which the valve stem is accessible at the top of
    the said funnel.

    298,    for funnels in which a concentric valve forms a valve stem.


CLS 141/345
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 344 in which the actuating means is so
    connected to the valve actuator as to have movement relative thereto when
    operated.


CLS 141/346
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 311 which requires the proper positioning
    of a receiver with respect to the supply in order to unblock the
    discharging means or permit the operation of the discharge means or
    coupling effecting means.

    (1)     Note.  The purpose of this subclass is to collect art which
    represented something more than complicated valve operators.  The apparatus
    should comprise means preventing operation of the flow controlling valve or
    the like until the coupling is effectively made and/or precluding
    disconnection until a flow line valve is closed.  In other words the valve
    can be operated only when the coupling is made or after the coupling has
    been made.  This concept requires an additional blocking element in the
    train of establishment of the flow relation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155,    for in interlock means between a discharge means and a conveyor for
    supplying successive receivers which means is not part of the operating
    means to establish flow relation.

    207,    for automatic control of flow or cut-off including receiver
    positioned interlock means and subclass 208 for coupling dislodgment trip
    means.


CLS 141/347
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 346 in which the coupling effecting means
    remains operative to continue the coupled relation during the flow of
    contents material to the receiver.


CLS 141/348
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 311 which includes supply attached means
    for engaging a receiver inlet-controlling means for opening the same.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329,    for puncturing type connecting means carried by the supply means to
    form a flow passage or inlet in the receiver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 614.02+ for separable flow path sections
    with a valve in each, the valves being operated by the act of joining or
    disconnecting the sections.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 149+ for separable flow path
    sections with a valve in one section, the valve being operated by the act
    of joining or disconnecting the sections.


CLS 141/349
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 348 in which the inlet flow control means
    of the receiver is opened by the supply means and receiver coupling motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    351+,   for supply means flow controllers which are actuated by the
    relative movement between the supply means and receiver.


CLS 141/350
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 349 in which the receiver is provided with
    a flow inlet means having a hinged covering or closing means which may be
    contacted externally of the said inlet means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 382.1+ for a package making device
    having means to open a hinged closure.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 149+ for dispensers having means constructed
    to pass through the dispenser outlet passage to clean the same.


CLS 141/351
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 311 comprising a receiver and supply means
    in which the relative movement between the receiver and supply means in
    bringing them into coupling or flow interchange relation either permits or
    causes discharge of contents material to the said receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21+,    for means for filling or refilling dispensers by the operation of
    means causing or controlling dispensing.

    318,    for filling a receiver which is telescoped over the filling head
    and withdrawn.

    330,    for puncturing means on the receiver to open the supply.

    335,    for funnel type filling apparatus with a valve which opens when the
    funnel rests on the receiver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 614.02+ for separable flow path sections
    with a valve in each, the valves being operated by the act of joining or
    disconnecting the sections.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 149+ for separable flow path
    sections with a valve in one section, the valve being operated by the act
    of joining or disconnecting the sections.


CLS 141/352
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 351 in which the supply means is moved
    bodily relative to a fixed receiver to effect discharge of material after
    the coupling or flow path is established.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains many of the patents pertaining to
    lubricating guns which are hand held and manipulated, the motion of the
    supply source or gun relative to the grease receiver or fitting causing
    flow of the lubricant from the said supply means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    267+,   for unitary receiver support and flow controller in which the
    support is mounted fo and/or has means for causing movement of the receiver
    into flow relation.

    353+,   for receiver actuated supply means in which motion of the receiver
    into coupling relationship with the supply means telescopes the flow paths
    elements.


CLS 141/353
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 351 in which the act of bringing the
    receiver into flow relation with the supply means effects the sliding or
    interfitting movement of the terminal flow path elements into one another
    to thereby permit flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140     and 157, for filling systems having conveyor means to supply
    successive receivers and no-can-no-fill arrangements comprising head
    elements moved by receiver pressure in filling position.

    291+,   for multiple passage filling means for diverse materials having
    valves operated by engagement with a receiver.

    352,    for receiver actuated supply means in which the supply or head is
    movable and which movement may result in the telescoping of the flow path
    elements.


CLS 141/354
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 353 wherein (1) the connection between the
    receiver contacting means and the supply discharge control means is such
    that during part of the actuating means travel the receiver contacting
    means has movement without producing any movement of the supply discharge
    control means, or (2) the telescoping parts are connected by links or other
    mechanical movements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    294,    for other mechanical or lost motion connections in arrangements
    having multiple passage filling means wherein plural valves are operated by
    a receiver.


CLS 141/355
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 353 having a connection from the receiver
    to the supply discharge means which is external to the flow confining
    elements.


CLS 141/356
TXT Filling devices under subclass 353 in which control of the supply means is
    effected through contact of its terminal flow path element with the
    receiver base or bottom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    374,    for supply means having a filling tube extending to or nearly to
    the bottom of the receiver.


CLS 141/357
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 351 in which the receiver is applied as a
    handle or operator to a plunger type follower, i.e., a means which applies
    force upon or through all of the material in the supply to urge said
    material toward and through the outlet of the said supply means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for filling dispensers having followers, the filling being effected
    by the operation of the means which causes or controls dispensing.


CLS 141/358
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 351 in which the receiver is in the form
    of a scoop or cabinet type drawer, said receivers in general being gravity
    filled as for example by bottom discharge from a bin or hopper.  In general
    also the scoop or drawer is a removable part of the cabinet or bin and its
    exterior configuration corresponds to that of the cabinet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108+,   for scoop-type filling means.

    110,    for scoop-type receivers filled by immersing or dipping them into
    the supply container.

    369+,   for filling means including guides and the like and not involving
    dipping, immersing, or receiver actuated flow controlling means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 27.1+ and
    other appropriate subclasses for supports for engaging receptacles and
    having handles whereby the receptacle may be manipulated in the same manner
    as a scoop, the support not serving as a material flow path, and subclass
    55 for scoops, per se.


CLS 141/359
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 351 in which the supply discharge means is
    actuated by the force of gravity upon the receiver when said receiver is in
    contents material receiving position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83+,    for filling apparatus involving the weighing of contents material.

    139     and 153, for filling apparatus involving conveying means to supply
    successive receivers including automatic control which may involve weight
    of contents material.


CLS 141/360
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 351 in which the discharge operator is
    positioned proximate the supply means outlet for ready access thereto by
    the receiver.


CLS 141/361
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 360 in which there is included some motive
    means which becomes operative for assisting in the actuation of the supply
    means in accordance with the demands made thereon by the receiver and
    transmitted through a switch or pilot valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for diverse fluid containing pressure systems in which system fluid
    is used to perform valving or lifting operations.

    141     and 160, for filling systems involving successive receivers and
    no-can-no-fill means therefor which includes servo mechanisms.

    219,    for automatic control for cut-off means including electromagnetic
    trips.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 25+ for valve operating
    servo systems generally.


CLS 141/362
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 360 in which the actuating means is so
    connected to the supply controlling means as to move relative thereto when
    operated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 213+ for mechanical movement
    valve actuators.


CLS 141/363
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 311 having means to substantially support
    the weight of this supply means against gravity on the receiver.

    (1)     Note.  In this and in the indented subclasses will be found supply
    means with some added member or configuration which bears on the receiver
    without however involving a flow intercommunicating securing means.  See
    for example subclass 383 for receiver and supply securing means wherein
    joining into flow relation is of the essence rather than the support of the
    supply means against gravity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331+,   for funnel type filling means which means in general are supported
    by the receiver.

    375,    for filling supply means having the supply container removable from
    the outlet or head.

    383+,   for supply and receiver joined by a flow-confining connection.  See
    (1) Note.


CLS 141/364
TXT Apparatus under subclass 363 in which the supply means requires inversion
    thereof in order to establish a flow relation or transfer of material from
    the supply to the receiver, there being no further control of flow or
    interposed head as part of the supply means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    for apparatus for dumping or draining plural supply holders into a
    common receiver.

    319+,   for filling arrangements involving manually coupling and inverting
    the supply and receiver means.


CLS 141/365
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 363 in which the filling supply is in the
    form of a contracting flow path or flow guiding means comprising (1) a
    funnel-shape member lying entirely within the receiver or secured to the
    receiver externally of the inlet, or (2) a modification of or attachment to
    the supply outlet whereby part at least of the weight of a hand-held supply
    can be supported by the receiver.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition, section II, for definitions of the
    terms "funnel" and "material guide".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    391,    for manual filling means including material guides.


CLS 141/366
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 365 in which the supply means is
    maintained in part at least against the force of gravity by the receiver
    and is manipulated by the hand of the operator.


CLS 141/367
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 311 including means to alter or vary the
    size of the filling head or of its receiver contact area or including at
    least two separately usable filling head means any one of which may be
    substituted for the other or be available as desired for use at one time.


CLS 141/368
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 311 provided with (1) an adjustable
    collar-like member which serves to variously position the receiver with
    respect to the outlet nozzle of the filling means, or (2) having a member
    which has movement with respect to the outlet means of the filling head and
    which acts either to permit "leak proof" engagement between the receiver
    and said filling means or as a means to occupy a portion of the volume of
    the receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222,    for automatic control means having an adjustable receiver engaging
    or coacting means.

    287,    for multiple passage filling means having a gas expanded seal.

    288,    for multiple passage filling means having an adjustable outlet
    element which controls the level and the receiver.


CLS 141/369
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 311 including some means for supporting a
    receiver, means for directing the receiver into filling relationship, or
    means for shielding or protecting the receiver from drip, condensate, or
    the like from the filling means.

    (1)     Note.  Centering bells, drip shields and guide means in general are
    found in this and in the indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  The receiver support must be some additional nonstructural
    portion of the system supporting member.  It must be a member readable as
    more than a portion of the dispenser or dispenser support even though such
    portion may be claimed as a receiver support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129+,   for conveying means to supply successive receivers to filling means.

    250+,   for supports for moving receivers into, out of or during flow
    relation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 343+ for supports for fluent material
    handling systems.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 173+ for dispenser supports.


CLS 141/370
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 369 having (1) means for guiding,
    centering or directing the receiver during coupling movement into filling
    relation with the dispenser whereby the receiver will be in proper
    relationship with the dispenser or (2) shielding or protecting means to
    guard the receiver against dispenser condensate, run-off and the like.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    390,    for external forms or protectors for receivers to aid in filling
    operations.


CLS 141/371
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 370 in which the guard or guide means has
    a back and forth movement usually axially of the dispenser outlet nozzle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291+,   for multiple passage filling means in which a valve is operated by
    a receiver engaging means.

    353+,   for filling arrangements in which the supply means is actuated by
    the motion of the receiver and in which the act of coupling telescope the
    flow path elements.


CLS 141/372
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 370 having a supporting means for the
    receiver which is configurated to contact the neck portion of the receiver
    or its inlet rim portion.

    (1)     Note.  Most of the patents in this group comprise a combined guide
    and supporting means whereby the receiver is directed toward that portion
    of the means which engages the receiver neck or inlet rim.


CLS 141/373
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 370 including means for directing the
    receiver to pass beneath the dispenser outlet in a plane which is generally
    normal to the longitudinal axis of the dispenser outlet means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    358,    for scoop or drawer type receivers which are gravity filled from a
    supply source, the supply source control means being actuated by the
    movement of the receiver laterally of the outlet thereof.

    360+,   for filling apparatus wherein the supply means is actuated by the
    movement of the receiver and wherein such movement may be transverse to the
    delivery outlet means.


CLS 141/374
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 369 in which the filling head means is
    provided with a terminal element which in the filling operation extends
    interiorly of the receiver and terminates proximate the bottom thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    356,    for supply control means which contacts the bottom of a receiver.


CLS 141/375
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 369 which additionally includes means for
    removably positioning and maintaining a supply container means against the
    effect of gravity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    340,    for funnel type filling means having an additional support.


CLS 141/376
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 369 which additionally has means for
    adjustably positioning the supply against the effect of gravity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284,    for a supply support movable to, from or during flow relation with
    a receiver.

    363+,   for filling arrangements in which the filling supply is supported
    by the receiver.

    375,    for filling arrangements including means for supporting a removable
    supply container.


CLS 141/377
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 369 in which (1) the supporting means
    permits pivotal movement of the receiver while being so supported or (2)
    the receiver is supported by means cooperating with the receiver bail.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    271+,   for means moving the supply means and/or receiver into, from or
    during flow relation including a swinging support for the receiver.

    372,    for filling apparatus wherein the receiver neck or inlet rim is
    engaged by the supporting means.


CLS 141/378
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 369 having means to variously position the
    receiver to be filled against the force of gravity including positioning
    means which may be substituted one for the other or may be chosen as
    desired from at least two separately usable positioning means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    for turret type supports for successive receivers, the conveyor
    elements being adjustable to containers of different sizes.

    177,    for other conveyors for successive receivers which are adjustable
    to receiver size.

    246,    for adjustable receiver supports with plural filling heads.

    266,    for adjustable supports which are movable to bring the receiver to
    filling position, remove it or manipulate it during filling.

    278,    for yielding lift type supports for receivers.

    367,    for adjustable contact area or plural interchangeable or
    selectively usable coupling means or flow paths.

    376,    for adjustable means supporting the supply.


CLS 141/379
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 369 in which some system part is provided
    with a supporting means or closure means for application thereto when the
    said system or system part is not serving its function as filling apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    342,    for funnel type nonuse nonsystem supports.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 530 for nonuse supports for dispenser hose,
    etc; subclasses 538+ for nonuse housing or securing means for discharge
    guides.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 95+ for bag supports and see (2) Note to that
    subclass of that (248) class for a statement of the line.


CLS 141/380
TXT Apparatus under subclass 379 having a receiver so combined with the supply
    container as not to be usable until separated therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    343,    for funnels supported on a supply container so as not to be usable
    until separated therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 517+ for
    containers for a material supply in combination with a separable
    applicator, which may be a part of the closure for the container, which
    transports the material from the container and applies it to a work surface.


CLS 141/381
TXT Apparatus under subclass 380 in which the receiver is designed to act as a
    closure for an opening of the supply container.

    (1)     Note.  Most of these devices are secured to the under side of the
    closure means and are for measuring or for dose-measuring and must be
    removed from the main container before material can be poured thereinto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    for receivers attached to a supply closure and stored therein in at
    least partly immersed (i.e. filled) position. See (1) Note.

    319+,   for manually coupled and inverted supply and receiver combinations.

    358,    for scoop or drawer type receivers stored within a casing or
    otherwise supported in flow receiving position on the supply.


CLS 141/382
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 311 having a flexible conduit for
    conducting contents material from the supply source to the receiver the
    said conduit having a terminus which is provided with some means for
    holding the said conduit in contact with the receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    363+,   for filling apparatus wherein the filling supply is supported by
    the receiver.

    383+,   for filling apparatus including means for securing the receiver and
    supply together.

    387+,   particularly subclass 389 for hand held filling means which are
    shiftably connected to the supply means.


CLS 141/383
TXT Apparatus under subclass 311 including a receiver or receiver coacting
    means having a readily separable means for fixedly coupling the receiver
    and supply means together.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this group the securing means for
    joining receiver and supply must be set forth by more than name only, i.e.,
    the specific end configuration must be set out, not a mere statement that
    it is a coupling. Screw threaded or friction held couplings are not
    considered sufficient for classification in this class in the absence of a
    claimed receiver-dispenser combination.

    (2)     Note.  Most of the patents in this and the indented subclasses
    relate to hand held and supported supply means of the grease gun type.  The
    receiver and supply securing means is not intended to be a coupling means
    whereby the supply means after coupling is supported by the receiver but
    rather a pressure retaining connecting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    311,    for special receiver-dispenser coacting means as for example,
    critical angles, sharp edges, and other such special configurations.

    363+,   for filling arrangements wherein the filling supply is supported by
    the receiver as by suspension means for example.

    382,    for supply means having flexible hoselike conduit means provided
    with receiver engaging means.

    392,    for filling heads, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, appropriate subclasses for means for
    joining or coupling flow line sections wherein significant internal wall
    structure of one section is involved.


CLS 141/384
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 383 in which the coupling securing means
    is in the form of a rotatable terminal sleeve like element which has
    freedom of movement with respect to a supply conduit means generally about
    the longitudinal axis thereof.


CLS 141/385
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 383 in which the coupling securing means
    comprises a fixed jaw-like member and a movable jaw- like member, the
    receiver being clamped between the said jaws.


CLS 141/386
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 383 in which the coupling securing means
    is defined by a flange-like element or finger which is adapted to grip or
    slip over some suitably arranged fixed abutment or groove on the receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    383,    for bayonet type coupling means.


CLS 141/387
TXT Filling apparatus under the class definition comprising arrangements
    effective to permit shifting or separation of the filling head means from
    the supply means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    279,    for movable support means for a hose connected head or supply.

    352,    for movable supply means receiver actuated to establish flow.

    367,    for adjustable size filling heads with plural interchangeable
    coupling means or flow paths.

    382,    for flexible hose terminals with receiver engaging means.


CLS 141/388
TXT Apparatus under subclass 387 in which a flexible or collapsible section is
    provided in the flow path between the supply means and the receiver
    engaging element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182,    for separate movable sleeves between the outlet of the filling
    means and the receiver combined with supply lowering means and successive
    receiver conveying means.


CLS 141/389
TXT Filling apparatus under subclass 388 in which the head means is supported
    by hand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206+,   and see (1) Note in the search notes thereto.

    366,    for supply containers supported at least in part by the receiver
    and manipulated by hand.


CLS 141/390
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means either encompassing
    or entering a receiver or receiver inlet means for the purpose of
    maintaining the said receiver against spillage, rupture or any other
    unwanted collapse during the filling thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The patents forming this subclass generally relate to
    subcombinations of the class subject matter, i.e., without filling means;
    however, disclosed in a filling organization for the purposes set forth
    above and not otherwise classifiable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for housings for receivers in diverse fluid containing pressure
    systems for filling.

    97,     for filling arrangements which include protectors or guards for
    operators.

    109,    for scoop type filling means having a separable receiver within the
    scoop.

    252,    for other external forms for receivers including means to move the
    supply and/or the receiver into, from or during the flow relation.

    265,    for filling means which include means to separate a filled receiver
    from an internal form.

    272     and 281, for other filling means combined with means to separate a
    filled receiver from a filling head or support.

    282,    for filling means having external forms including means for
    positively separating a filled receiver from the form.

    312,    for extensible or expansible centering means or inserted holding
    means for the receiver.

    316,    for filling apparatus including inserted or external forms for
    flexible or collapsible receivers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 255+ for package making devices having
    guide or inserted form or support for article contents.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 27.1+ and
    other appropriate subclasses for receptacle grapples and lifters with
    handles thereon.


CLS 141/391
TXT Filling apparatus under the class definition comprising supply guide or
    supply containing means having receiver supporting means arranged as an aid
    to manual filling, gravity flow not being involved, but rather, mere hand
    placing or dropping into the receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for apparatus for filling receivers with plural materials at
    separate stations, one station being arranged for manual filling.

    151,    for filling apparatus including conveying means to supply
    successive receivers involving rotary heads and including manually placed
    receivers.

    247,    for aids to manual filling in plural filling means apparatus.

    314,    for filling apparatus for flexible or collapsible receivers having
    receiver securing means.

    365+,   for material guides which are supported at least in part by the
    receiver, and see subclass 365 and the class definition, section II, for
    the meaning of the term.

    369+,   for filling means with receiver coacting means including receiver
    supports, in other than the manual filling apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 390+ for aids to manual packing,
    particularly subclass 391 for power driven conveyors for the manual filling
    apparatus there classified.


CLS 141/392
TXT Miscellaneous filling apparatus under the class definition not otherwise
    classifiable herein.

    (1)     Note.  Miscellaneous filling heads are found here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    234+,   for plural filling heads.

    250     and 279, for filling heads movable to, from or during flow relation
    to a receiver.

    285+,   for multiple passage filling heads for diverse passages or flows.

    329,    for puncturing type heads.

    367,    for adjustable area heads.

    368,    for heads with adjustable gage collar,displacement member or seal.

    374,    for heads with elongated fill tube.

    382     and 383+, for heads with receiver engaging means.

    387,    for heads shiftably or detachably    connected to the supply.


CLS 142/
TTL WOOD TURNING

CLS 142/
TXT Wood-turning includes inventions for reducing sticks of wood to a desired
    form by means of rotary or non-rotary cutters brought into engagement with
    the circumference of the continuously-rotating stick or by means of rotary
    or non-rotary cutters revolving circumferentially around and in engagement
    with the stick or that portion of the stick to be reduced.

    Wood-turning also includes machines provided with work-holders which hold
    several sticks arranged axially in or near the circumference thereof to
    form a cylinder of such sticks to be operated upon by the cutter as though
    it were a single stick.  These machines are for producing sticks of
    polygonal section by turning the sticks in the work-holder to successively
    present new surfaces to the cutter.

    In this class of machines rotating saw-cutters which engage with the sticks
    while secured in the lathe-chuck or between the centers are regarded as a
    species of rotary cutters and are not clasified with saws in Class 83,
    Cutting.

    Wood-turning does not include machines comprising a relatively-rotating
    cutter and table or support upon which blocks or segmental strips of wood
    are so secured that they may be brought into engagement with the cutter
    which stands transversely to the sticks and feeds longitudinally thereof.
    See the Search Note to Class 144 below for the locus of such machine
    intended to shape wood.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    82,     Turning.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 134.1+ for shaping of wood.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, for cutting of that
    class type.  The cutting of rotating wood, including boring and drilling,
    is to be found in this class (142).

    483,    Tool Changing, subclasses 17+ for a rotating work machine tool
    combined with a tool transfer means.


CLS 142/1
TXT Wood-turning machines which comprise features of construction not elsewhere
    specifically classified.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 47 for a combined machine for turning and
    polishing and subclass 48 for a combined machine for turning and sawing.


CLS 142/2
TXT Machines comprising a cutter and work-holders adapted to secure several
    sticks together in the form of a hollow cylinder to be rotated in contact
    with the cutter.  After the cylinder has been reduced by the cutter the
    sticks are turned upon their axes in the work-holder and the cylinder again
    submitted to the action of the cutter.  This operation is continued until
    as many sides have been produced upon the sticks as desired.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 138 for a wood shaping machine which uses a
    pattern to generate a polygonal form as a workpiece is indexed.


CLS 142/3
TXT Machines for reducing sticks to other than a circular cross-section,
    comprising a plurality of turning spindles whereby several sticks are
    simultaneously under different stages of completion.  The stock may be
    supplied to the spindles successively or simultaneously.


CLS 142/4
TXT Machines comprising a plurality of turning spindles whereby several sticks
    are simultaneously under different stages of completion.  The stock may be
    supplied to the spindles successively or simultaneously.


CLS 142/5
TXT Many-spindle lathes which comprise mechanism for separating the pairs of
    spindles to facilitate the removal of finished sticks and the supply of new
    stock and mechanism for causing the spindles of each pair to approach each
    other to engage the new stock.


CLS 142/6
TXT Machines for reducing a stick to other than a circular cross-section,
    wherein the cutter is given a simultaneous longitudinal and transverse
    movement relative to the axis of the stick, the transverse movement of the
    cutter being controlled by a rotary cam.


CLS 142/7
TXT Machines for reducing a stick to other than a circular cross-section,
    wherein the cutter is made to advance toward or recede from the axis of the
    stick by means of a rotating pattern-guide.  Simultaneously with its
    transverse movements the cutter is given a movement lengthwise of the stick.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.


CLS 142/8
TXT Machines for reducing a stick to other than a circular cross-section by
    means of a chisel-cutter which is caused to move longitudinally and around
    the clamped stick and is controlled in its movement toward or from the axis
    of the stick by a pattern-guide.


CLS 142/9
TXT Machines for reducing a stick to other than a circular cross-section by
    means of rotary cutters having their bearings carried in movable supports,
    the supports being controlled in their movements by mechanism other than a
    cam or pattern-guide.


CLS 142/10
TXT Machines for reducing a stick to other than a circular cross-section,
    wherein a pattern-cutter rotates in fixed bearings and the rotating stick
    is caused to approach or recede from the cutter by means of a cam carried
    by the spindle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.


CLS 142/11
TXT Machines for reducing a stick to other than a circular cross-section,
    wherein the rotary cutter is mounted in fixed bearings and the stick is
    caused to move endwise and at the same time transversely of its axis toward
    and from the cutter by means of a rotating pattern-guide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 81 for a "pattern" controlled metal
    spinning machine.

    82,     Turning, subclass 165 for pattern controlled machine lathes.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 85+ for a pattern
    controlled milling machine.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 1+ for a pattern controlled automatic abrading
    machine.


CLS 142/12
TXT Machines for reducing a stick to other than a circular cross-section,
    wherein the cutter moves transversely to the axis of the rotating stick and
    is guided toward and from such axis by a rotary cam.  While being operated
    upon by the cutter the stick moves longitudinally.


CLS 142/13
TXT Machines for reducing a stick to other than a circular cross-section,
    wherein the cutter is made to advance toward or recede from the axis of the
    stick by means of a rotating pattern-guide and the stick is carried endwise
    past the cutter.


CLS 142/14
TXT Machines for reducing a stick to other than a circular cross-section,
    wherein the cutter moves longitudinally of the stick and the stick is given
    a simultaneous transverse movement by means of a rotary cam.


CLS 142/15
TXT Machines for reducing a stick to other than a circular cross-section,
    wherein the cutter moves longitudinally along the stick and the axis of the
    stick is caused to approach or recede from the cutter by means of a
    rotating pattern-guide.


CLS 142/16
TXT Mechanisms for guiding work-holding chucks in elliptical or oval paths.


CLS 142/17
TXT Turning-lathes which comprise mechanism for periodically separating and
    drawing togther the spindles, whereby they release the finished material
    and engage the new stock to be turned.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    82,     Turning, subclasses 165+ for work drivers in metal turning machines
    to form elliptically shaped work.


CLS 142/18
TXT Automatic spindle-lathes in which the stock is fed to the spindles by
    endless conveyer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.


CLS 142/19
TXT Automatic spindle-lathes in which the stock is fed to the spindles by a
    rotating disk having conveying notches or pockets in its periphery.


CLS 142/20
TXT Automatic spindle-lathes in which the stock is fed to the spindles through
    a chute or over a table or platform.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 245.1+ for a blank feeder for a feeder or
    presser.


CLS 142/21
TXT Wood-turning machines for reducing a stick to a circular section by means
    of two chisel-cutters, one of which rough-cuts the stick to approximate its
    finished shape and comprises a plain cutter guided toward and from the axis
    of the stick by a pattern. The other is a pattern-cutter which makes a thin
    smoothing or finishing cut.


CLS 142/22
TXT Wood-turning machines for reducing a stick to a circular section by means
    of two cutters having pattern-cutting edges, one of which cutters is rotary
    and the other is a chisel.  The rotary cutter rough-cuts the stick to
    approximate its finished form and the chisel makes a thin finishing cut.


CLS 142/23
TXT Machines for reducing a stick to a circular section having a spiral groove
    in its circumference by passing the stock axially through a rotary hollow
    cutter-head having a chisel-cutter projecting through its circumference
    toward the axis of the stick.


CLS 142/24
TXT Machines for reducing a stick to a circular section and producing a spiral
    groove in its circumference by means of a rotary cutter which is guided to
    move toward and from the axis of the stick by a relatively-moving pattern.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 67+ for a machine for
    milling a thread or helix, which machine is provided with a pattern control
    mechanism.


CLS 142/25
TXT Machines for reducing a stick to a circular section and producing a spiral
    groove in its circumference by means of a rotary cutter.  The stick is
    controlled in its movements by a rotating hollow mandrel.


CLS 142/26
TXT Machines for reducing a stick to a circular section and producing a spiral
    groove in its circumference by means of a rotary cutter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 65+ for a machine for
    cutting a thread or helix by milling.


CLS 142/27
TXT Machines for reducing a stick to a circular section by a hollow
    cutter-head, in which the chisel-cutter is made to reciprocate through the
    side of the cylinder of the cutter-head and is guided to approach or recede
    from the axis of the stick by a pattern.


CLS 142/28
TXT Machines for reducing a stick to a circular section by a hollow
    cutter-head, in which the chisel-cutter is made to reciprocate through the
    side of the cylinder of the cutter-head and is guided to approach or recede
    from the axis of the stick by a rotary pattern.


CLS 142/29
TXT Machines for reducing a stick to a circular section by a hollow
    cutter-head, in which the chisel-cutter is made to reciprocate through the
    side of the cylinder and is provided with a plain edge.


CLS 142/30
TXT Machines for reducing a stick to a circular section by a hollow
    cutter-head, in which the chisel-cutter is made to reciprocate through the
    side of the cylinder and is provided with a pattern edge.


CLS 142/31
TXT Machines for reducing a stick to a circular section by a hollow
    cutter-head, in which the chisel-cutter projects through the cylinder
    toward its axis.


CLS 142/32
TXT Machines for reducing a stick to a circular section by means of a rotating
    cylinder having a chisel cutting edge at one end. The stick to be reduced
    is forced against the cutting edge of the cylinder, and the reduced portion
    passes through the cylinder and out at the end opposite the cutter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 23 for a woodworking machine for cutting a
    disk by a rotary tubular cutter.


CLS 142/33
TXT Machines for reducing a stick to a circular section and producing a spiral
    groove in its circumference by means of a rotary cutter.  The relative
    movements of the stick and the cutter are controlled by a rack and pinion.


CLS 142/34
TXT Machines for reducing a stick to a circular section and producing a spiral
    groove in its circumference by means of a rotary cutter.  The movements of
    the stick past the cutter are controlled by positively-driven feed-rollers.


CLS 142/35
TXT Machines for reducing a stick to a circular section and producing a spiral
    groove in its circumference by means of a chisel-cutter.


CLS 142/36
TXT Wood-turning machines for reducing a block of cork or other soft wood to a
    circular section by rotating it in contact with a longitudinally-moving
    cutter-blade which reduces the block with a slicing action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40.


CLS 142/37
TXT Wood-turning machines which reduce a stick to a circular section by
    rotating the stick on its axis and in contact with a rotary cutter which is
    guided toward and from the axis of the stick by a relatively-moving pattern.


CLS 142/38
TXT Wood-turning machines which reduce a stick to a circular section by means
    of a narrow plain chisel-cutter guided toward and from the axis of the
    stick by means of a relatively-moving pattern.


CLS 142/39
TXT Wood-turning machines which reduce a stick to a circular section by means
    of a narrow plain chisel-cutter guided toward and from the axis of the
    stick by means of a rotating pattern.


CLS 142/40
TXT Wood-turning machines which reduce a stick to a circular section by
    rotating the stick on its axis and in contact with a rotary cutter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      20, and the several subclasses of Pattern-section.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 451+ for a pencil-sharpening implement whose
    cutter and work holder or work-guide parts are statically related for the
    cutting operation.

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 28.8+ for a pencil-sharpening machine
    including a cutter and a work holder or work guide, each of which is
    rotatable relative to supporting structure therefor; also see subclasses
    209.1+.


CLS 142/41
TXT Wood-turning machines which reduce a stick to a circular section by
    rotating the stick on its axis and in contact with a broad-faced rotary
    cutter having other than a plain cutting edge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      5, 33, 34, and 52.


CLS 142/42
TXT Wood-turning machines which reduce a stick to a circular section by
    rotating it in contact with a plain chisel carried by an adjustable
    tool-rest, whereby the chisel may be directed by hand to properly shape the
    stick.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 594+ for rotating an
    article of food while removing the skin with a cutting tool.


CLS 142/43
TXT Wood-turning machines which reduce a stick to a circular section by
    rotating it in contact with a chisel having other than a plain cutting
    edge.  The cutter may be of sufficient width to cut the entire length of
    the stick or may be narrow and make successive cuts along the stick.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      5 and 20.


CLS 142/44
TXT Wood-turning machines which reduce a stick to a circular section by
    rotating it in contact with a disk provided with a chisel edge having a
    pattern outline.  As the cutter is moved longitudinally along the stick the
    disk is rotated to present the entire contour of the cutter to the stick.


CLS 142/45
TXT Machines for reducing the ends of sticks while clamped to prevent rotation
    thereof by means of a hollow cutter-carrying head having a cutter
    projecting within the shell thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    indented under subclass 27.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 495.


CLS 142/46
TXT Machines for reducing the ends of sticks to a circular section by means of
    a cutter carried in a frame which revolves around the axis of the clamped
    stick and comprises mechanism for moving the cutter longitudinally in the
    frame.


CLS 142/47
TXT Mechanism for controlling the movements of the carriage or tool-rest.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     24, 26, 46, and the several subclasses of Pattern-section.


CLS 142/48
TXT Tool-rests provided with an extension adapted to support the turned portion
    of the stick near the cutter and prevent it from springing therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     37, 43, and 44.


CLS 142/49
TXT Supports within which wood-turning cutter-tools are adjusted and secured.


CLS 142/50
TXT Yielding rests or supports for sticks having irregular cross-section.
    These supports are for preventing the stick from springing away from the
    cutter.


CLS 142/51
TXT Oval or elliptically-guided work-holder chucks provided with weights or
    counter-poises to balance the reciprocating parts of the chuck.


CLS 142/52
TXT Chucks for holding sticks together in the form of a hollow cylinder.


CLS 142/53
TXT Center spindles provided with one or more spurs for engaging the end of a
    stick of wood or other soft material to be turned.


CLS 142/54
TXT Longitudinally-perforated rotary spindles or work-carriers through which
    the sticks feed endwise.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 28+.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 14+ for devices for
    pushing or pulling stock or a workpiece relative to a machine of the type
    provided for in Class 142.


CLS 142/55
TXT Devices to be attached or secured to wood-turning machines to be used
    therewith or wood-turning machines designed to be attached to the frames of
    machines which comprise cylinders for the purpose of resurfacing the
    cylinders.


CLS 142/56
TXT Cutting-tools peculiarly adapted for use in connection with wood-turning
    machines.


CLS 142/57
TXT Socket-chucks for securing a stick to the live-spindle of a wood-turning
    machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses. Class 269 is the residual
    locus for patents to a device for clamping, supporting and/or holding an
    article (or articles) in position to be operated on or treated.  See notes
    thereunder for other related loci.


CLS 144/
TTL WOODWORKING

CLS 144/
TXT This class includes any machine or process for working in wood not
    classified elsewhere under a more specific title.



    GLOSSARY:

    BARK

    The peripheral natural covering of a tree*.

    GRAIN

    Fibers of wood* that extend along the length of a tree*.

    LOG

    A longitudinal section cut from a tree*, generally cut normal thereto at
    both ends.

    LUMBER

    Building material cut from a tree*, generally cut from a log*, generally
    without bark*.

    SLAB

    A portion of a log* comprising a longitudinally extending section cut from
    the side of a log*, similar to lumber*, but with the bark* side uncut.

    TREE

    A plant large enough to serve as a source of lumber*.

    WOOD

    The fibrous material of a tree*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, for cutting, shaping, or grooving a wooden
    heel where means is provided to hold or position the work, which means is
    configured or modified to engage a particular heel structure.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 428+ and 700+ for an assembly method or
    apparatus respectively not more specifically provided for elsewhere.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, for subject matter directed to driving
    or impacting a tool, when such subject matter includes combined features
    peculiar to tool driving, but which does not include features limiting the
    subject matter to a specific tool art, such as the specific shape of the
    work-contacting portion of a tool, related tools, or an opposed work
    support.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, for a process or apparatus for
    boring a hole in the Earth.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, for applying a member (e.g.,
    dowel).

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, especially subclass
    28 for a processor apparatus for performing a nonshaping comminuting
    operation on wood; see section 4 of the class definition of Class 241 for
    the line.

    269,    Work Holders, for a device for clamping, supporting, or holding an
    article (or articles) in position to be operated on or treated. See notes
    thereunder for other related loci.

    483,    Tool Changing, generally for a process or apparatus including a
    tool transfer means combined with either a tool support or storage means.


CLS 144/1.1
TXT COMBINED MACHINE:

    Apparatus under the class definition including a first structure for
    performing an operation of this  class on a workpiece, and including a
    second structure for performing a second, distinct, operation on the same
    or a second workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  The first operation under this definition must be
    woodworking, the second must be distinct from the first and may comprise a
    woodworking operation or a nonwoodworking operation.  Also, the "second"
    operation may be simultaneous with the first, in sequence thereto, or
    completely independent thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.1+,   for a machine for making a particular article and not readily
    adaptable to general use.


CLS 144/2.1
TXT SPECIAL-WORK MACHINE:

    Machine under the class definition adapted to perform some particular
    operation or make some particular article and which, unless modified to a
    considerable degree, would not be useful for a general woodworking
    operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 1+ for a method or
    apparatus for cutting a gear, including cutting a gear of wood.


CLS 144/3.1
TXT Combined:

    Special-work machine under subclass 2.1 including a first structure for
    performing an operation of this class on a workpiece and including a second
    structure for performing a second, distinct, operation on the same or a
    second workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  The first operation under this definition must be
    woodworking, the second must be distinct from the first and may comprise a
    woodworking operation or a nonwoodworking operation.  Also, the "second"
    operation may be simultaneous with the first, in sequence thereto, or
    completely independent thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.1+,   for a combined machine under the class definition, generally.


CLS 144/3.5
TXT Wheel facing or hub boring:

    Special work machine under subclass 3.1 particularly adapted to (a) cut a
    planar surface on a wheel normal to its axis or (b) cut a cylindrical
    passage along the axis of the wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 894+ for a method of making a wheel other
    than of wood.

    157,    Wheelwright Machines, for means to treat a wheel, particularly
    subclass 2 for a rim tightener and subclasses 3+ for a spoke setter.

    301,    Land Vehicles: Wheels and Axles, for a wheel made by the apparatus
    of this subclass.


CLS 144/4
TXT Circular section:

    Machine under subclass 3.1 particularly adapted to work on spindles,
    balusters, and similar work which is circular in cross-section.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    142,    Wood Turning, for the cutting of a rotating workpiece or of a
    nonrotating workpiece by a cutter that orbits thereabout with movement of
    the cutter other than axially with respect to the workpiece.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating, Axially Moving Tool, for cutting by
    relative rotation of a tool and workpiece with only axial movement
    therebetween.


CLS 144/4.1
TXT Timber cutting and handling:

    Special work machine under subclass 3.1 particularly adapted to (a) bring a
    tree down and manipulate a portion, (b) remove and manipulate the branches
    from a trunk of a tree, (c) remove and manipulate the bark from a tree or
    log without substantial shaping, or (d) treat a tree or product incidental
    to any of the above and manipulate a component thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34.1,   for a tree felling means, generally.

    335+,   for a method of tree harvesting or processing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 165+ for a cutting tool which may be capable of
    severing a tree from the ground, but without limitation that would limit it
    to timber harvesting or processing (e.g., without means to push the trunk
    of a tree as it is severed from the stump.  More particularly, search
    subclasses 90.1+ for means for cutting a tree by a constricting band,
    search subclasses 166.3+ of Class 30 for a saw capable of cutting timber,
    still more specifically, search subclasses 381+ for a chain saw and
    subclasses 388+ for a rotary saw.


CLS 144/4.2
TXT Assembly-line type:

    Special work machine under subclass 3.1 including a first working station
    and a distinct, second working station and including means to transport the
    work from the first station to the second station.


CLS 144/4.3
TXT Pivoted travelling:

    Special work machine under subclass 3.1 adapted to perform more than a
    single operation including support means for a tool comprising an arm on
    which at least one tool is supported for sliding movement therealong,
    wherein that arm is, in turn, supported for movement about an axis.

    (1)     Note.  A "radial-arm" saw is a "pivoted travelling" woodworking
    machine.


CLS 144/4.4
TXT Tie gaining and boring:

    Special work machine under subclass 3.1 including structure particularly
    adapted to cutting a groove in a workpiece of lumber at substantially right
    angles to the grain combined with structure particularly adapted to forming
    or enlarging an opening within the workpiece; wherein the workpiece
    comprises a rail supporting tie to be used on a railroad.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133.1,  for gaining a railroad tie, generally; see the notes thereunder for
    a discussion of "gaining."


CLS 144/4.5
TXT Carried by tract car:

    Special work machine under subclass 3.1 adapted to perform more than a
    single operation, which machine is supported to ride on a vehicle that, in
    turn, is guided to move along a rail.


CLS 144/4.6
TXT Splitting:

    Special work machine under subclass 3.1 adapted to perform more than a
    single operation, including a member having a sharp edge and two sides
    tapering therefrom, which sharp edge is intended to be forced between the
    grains of a wood workpiece such that the tapering sides force one grain
    from the other thereby separating one portion of the workpiece from another
    in the direction of the grain of the wood.


CLS 144/4.7
TXT Assembling connector to wood strip for subsequent assembly with another
    wood strip:

    Special work machine under subclass 3.1 adapted to perform more than a
    single operation, including means to bring together or secure together a
    wood member with a member intended to hold the wood member to an adjacent,
    similar, wood member.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is means for making a parquet flooring
    subassembly.


CLS 144/4.8
TXT Printing or marking:

    Special work machine under subclass 3.1 wherein the second structure is
    particularly adapted to placing an identifying coating on a workpiece,
    which coating may comprise recognizable indicia.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, for a process of or apparatus for placing a recognizable
    indicia on a workpiece, generally.

    Generally speaking, the recording of intelligence by cutting is proper
    subject matter for Class 101, Printing. More particularly, individual cases
    of cutting machines or method may be tested for aptness to Class 101 by
    reference to the following statements:

    a.      A patent for a machine or process for cutting on or adjacent the
    printed or written matter on a document to prevent unauthorized or
    fraudulent alteration of such matter due to the proximity of the cut
    surfaces to the printed or written matter (e.g., check protecting) will be
    placed originally in Class 101, subclasses 3.1+.

    b.      A patent for a machine or process for cutting work in the form of a
    character, a design, or a pattern which will impart information to an
    observer is proper for Class 101, subclasses 3.1+, if a cut is disclosed as
    extending only part way through the thickness of the work (e.g.,
    embossing). If all of the cuts forming such character, design, or pattern
    are disclosed as extending all the way through the thickness of the work,
    and the work is of wood, the patent will be found in Class 144.

    c.      If in addition to a cutting machine or process of this class 144
    there is claimed a means or step peculiar to Class 101 (e.g., the
    application of ink to the cutting tool to additionally outline or mark an
    aperture made by the punch), such an addition has been considered
    sufficient to place a patent directed to such combination in Class 101,
    subclasses 3.1+. This is in accordance with the general rule that a patent
    for a combination of cutting with another treatment of the work will be
    placed in the class of the other treatment.

    d.      An original patent claiming both the process and apparatus for the
    manufacture of stencils by cutting, or only such process, will be found in
    Class 101, subclass 128.4.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, for means to place a coating on a workpiece.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, for a pencil which may be
    used to mark a wood workpiece.


CLS 144/4.9
TXT Slabbing-off, log squaring:

    Special work machine under subclass 3.1 including (a) means for slicing off
    a side wall (i.e., parallel to the grain) of a log to make a planar surface
    and including means for performing a second operation or (b) means for
    slicing off a side wall (also parallel to the grain) normal to the surface
    of a previously sliced off side wall.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 703+ for cutting a rectilinearly reciprocating
    workpiece by making plural passes of a diminishing workpiece through a work
    station (e.g., for cutting lumber out a log).


CLS 144/5
TXT Blind or sash cutting:

    Machine under subclass 3.1 adapted to perform two or more operations in the
    making of a wood component of a window covering which (a) blocks out light
    or (b) which includes a transparent component which transmits light.

    (1)     Note.  A machine for performing a single operation in the
    manufacture of a window blind or sash -- such as planing, tenoning,
    shaping, etc.-- is classified under these various headings with a general
    operation machine.


CLS 144/6
TXT Relishing:

    Machine under subclass 5 adapted to the frame of a blind or sash by more
    than a single operation.


CLS 144/6.5
TXT Box making:

    Special work machine under subclass 3.1 particularly adapted to assemble
    the components of a container of wood or to perform more than a single
    operation in fabricating such a container.

    (1)     Note.  Assembling plus another operation of fabricating a container
    is included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24.03,  for means for making a box of wood, generally.

    25,     for a box hooping means.

    135,    for a box trimming means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    147,    Coopering, for assembling the components or fabricating a wood
    barrel or bucket, generally.


CLS 144/7
TXT Box blank making:

    Machine under subclass 3.1 adapted by more than one operation to cut a
    planar member to later be formed into a box.

    (1)     Note. A machine for performing a single operation in the production
    of box-blanks is classified with the general machine performing such
    respective operations.


CLS 144/8
TXT Chair-round trimming and tenoning:

    Machine under subclass 3.1 adapted to cut off the end of a chair frame
    structure intended to extend from one chair leg to the other and form a
    tenon at the end of such frame structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205,    for a machine which makes a tenon by turning.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    142,    Wood Turning, for cutting a rotating wood workpiece, generally.


CLS 144/9
TXT Clothespin making:

    Machine under subclass 3.1 adapted to perform two or more operations in the
    manufacture of a clip member intended to hold fabric to a suspending strand
    or bar.


CLS 144/10
TXT Conveyor flight making:

    Machine under subclass 3.1 adapted to perform two or more operations in the
    manufacture of a conveyor flight.


CLS 144/11
TXT Handle making:

    Machine under subclass 3.1 adapted to perform two or more operations in the
    manufacture of a handle for use on any of various implements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196+,   for a device for punching a hand hole in a handle.


CLS 144/12
TXT Pin making:

    Machine under subclass 3.1 adapted to perform two or more operations in the
    manufacture of wooden pins.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for pin making by a single operation.

    196,    for woodworking by a punching cutter.


CLS 144/13
TXT Shingle making:

    Machine under subclass 3.1 adapted to perform two or more operations in the
    manufacture of shingles.

    (1)     Note.  A "shingle" in this subclass comprises a thin, oblong
    (usually rectangular) sheet of wood intended to be laid in overlapping rows
    to cover the roof or side of a house.

    (2)     Note.  The art of this subclass includes making:

    a "shingle" which is sometimes limited to such member that is sawn on top
    and bottom to taper from one end to the other,

    a "shake" which is split on the top edge and sawn on the bottom edge, and

    a "board" which is split on both the top and bottom edge.


CLS 144/14
TXT Spool making:

    Machine under subclass 3.1 adapted to perform two or more operations in the
    manufacture of a wood member intended to have strand material wrapped
    thereabout.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24.07,  for a woodworking machine for making a bobbin, generally.


CLS 144/15
TXT Wheel spoke tenoning and hub or felly boring:

    Machine under subclass 3.1 adapted to form a tenon on the end of wheel
    spoke and bore a hole in the wheel hub or felly to receive that tenon.

    (1)     Note.  A conventional wood wheel consists of a hub, the portion
    nearest the axle which receives either the "web" or the "spokes," depending
    on the type wheel.  The spokes extend to the outer periphery of the wheel
    where they are received by the "felly," a wood band having sockets for the
    ends of the spokes.  An iron band called a "tire" holds the components of
    the felly against radial movement and acts as the surface of the wheel to
    engage the ground.


CLS 144/16
TXT Wheel hub making:

    Machine under subclass 3.1 adapted to perform two or more operations in
    making a wheel hub.

    (1)     Note.  For a discussion of the components of a wheel, see the
    definition of subclass 15, (1) Note.


CLS 144/18
TXT Wheel spoke trimming and tenoning:

    Machine under subclass 3.1 adapted to perform two or more operations to cut
    a wheel spoke to a desired length and form a tenon at the end thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205,    for a machine which makes a tenon by turning.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    142,    Wood Turning, for cutting a rotating wood workpiece, generally.


CLS 144/19
TXT Window-stile-pocket cutting:

    Machine under subclass 3.1 adapted to cut a mortise in the frame of a
    window for receipt of a tenon by means of two or more operations.


CLS 144/20
TXT Disk cutting and boring:

    Machine under subclass 2.1 particularly adapted to perform two or more
    operations to cut out a cylindrical blank and to cut the interior thereof
    to form or enlarge an opening therein.


CLS 144/21
TXT Disk cutting:

    Machine under subclass 2.1 adapted to cut out or otherwise shape a very
    short cylinder.

    (1)     Note.  The machine of this subclass is commonly used to make a
    cork, bung, etc.


CLS 144/23
TXT By rotary tubular cutter:

    Machine under subclass 21 for cutting a disk by means of a cylindrical
    cutter which is rotated about its central axil as the end thereof is
    brought into contact with the work in order to obtain a shearing cut.

    (1)     Note.  The workpiece of this subclass may be cork.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    142,    Wood Turning, subclasses 32+ for wood turning by a tool having a
    hollow cutting head.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating, Axially Moving Tool, for cutting a
    workpiece by a tool that moves axially with respect to the workpiece
    without additional relative motion; particularly subclasses 229+ for a
    cutting tool of that class having an axially extending relief channel.


CLS 144/24
TXT By sweep cutter:

    Machine under subclass 21 having a cutting blade mounted in a rotating
    block adapted to turn about an axis through the block, such that the blade
    penetrates the workpiece, then, by rotation of the block, is orbited about
    a path to cut a circle of product away from the remaining work.

    (1)     Note.  In most cases, the device of this subclass has means for
    setting the blade at varying distances from the center and may have means
    for setting the blade at an angle in order to cut a tapering cork or bung.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 310+ for a sweep cutter of general utility.


CLS 144/24.02
TXT Core or panel machine:

    Machine under subclass 2.1 particularly adapted to making a member to be
    enclosed by another member or a planar member to be encircled by a casing.


CLS 144/24.03
TXT Box making:

    Machine under subclass 2.1 particularly adapted to manufacture a container
    of wood.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6.5,    for combined machines for making a box of wood.

    25,     for a box hooping machine.

    135,    for a box trimming means.


CLS 144/24.04
TXT Box hinging:

    Machine under subclass 24.03 particularly adapted to preparing a container
    for receipt of a hinge to be assembled therewith or for assembly of such a
    hinge and container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6.5,    for a combined machine for making a box.

    7,      for a combined machine for making a box blank.

    27,     for a machine for cutting the seat for a hinge, including the seat
    for a box hinge.


CLS 144/24.05
TXT Block surfacing:

    Machine under subclass 2.1 particularly adapted to smooth an outer surface
    of a six-sided member the sides of which meet, generally, at right angles.


CLS 144/24.06
TXT Stopper making:

    Machine under subclass 2.1 intended to form a member intended to be used to
    plug a hole in a container.


CLS 144/24.07
TXT Bobbin making:

    Machine under subclass 2.1 intended to form a member intended to be used to
    form a spoollike device for storing thread for use in a textile
    manufacturing operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for a combined machine for making a spool.


CLS 144/24.08
TXT Bowling pin making:

    Machine under subclass 2.1 intended to form a member intended to be used as
    one of the targets in a game of "bowling."


CLS 144/24.09
TXT Bowling ball making:

    Machine under subclass 2.1 intended to form a spherical member intended to
    be used as the rolling projectile in a game of "bowling."

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclass 16 for
    means for drilling a finger hole in a bowling ball, including gauge means
    to establish the angle and direction of the hole.


CLS 144/24.1
TXT Log punching:

    Machine under subclass 2.1 intended to pierce radially through a log*.


CLS 144/24.11
TXT And expanding:

    Machine under subclass 24.1 intended to also force the grain of the wood
    apart in the area pierced.


CLS 144/24.12
TXT Stump removing:

    Machine under subclass 24.1 intended to in situ destroy the portion of a
    tree remaining in the earth after the trunk has been removed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334,    for a method of removing a stump.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, for digging a stump out of the ground, generally;
    particularly subclass 195 for such a process.


CLS 144/24.13
TXT Tree delimbing:

    Machine under subclass 2.1 adapted to remove the branches from a standing
    tree intended to be felled or from a felled tree at the site of felling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34.1+,  for tree felling means combined with delimbing means.

    208.1+, for a debarking means combined with a delimbing means.

    343,    for a method of tree delimbing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, for a randomly manipulated implement for pruning,
    generally; particularly subclasses 166.3+ for a saw, with or without a
    drive motor, for cutting the limbs off any plant; and subclasses 173+ for a
    tool having plural blades with or without a drive motor.  More
    particularly, search subclasses 175+ for a nipper, especially subclass 180
    for motorized nipper; and subclasses 194+ for a shear, especially subclass
    228 for a motorized shear.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 1.01 for pruning the branches off a
    particular variety of plant (e.g., off a palm).


CLS 144/24.14
TXT Lumber deknotting:

    Machine under subclass 2.1 intended to remove irregularities from lumber.


CLS 144/24.15
TXT Ring jointing:

    Machine under subclass 2.1 intended to connect a first wood member to an
    overlying second wood member by grooving the first generally annularly, and
    grooving the second such that an intermediate annular flange will prevent
    relative lateral motion therebetween.

    (1)     Note.  Commonly a bolt will secure the wood members from movement
    away from each other.


CLS 144/24.16
TXT Patch cutting:

    Machine under subclass 2.1 intended to either (a) remove undesired material
    from lumber or other wood in anticipation of insertion of replacement
    material or (b) cut such replacement material.


CLS 144/24.17
TXT Using rattan:

    Machine under subclass 2.1 intended to work with material from a vine or
    climbing Asian palm.

    (1)     Note.  Making of wickerwork is included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333,    for a process of making a product of rattan.


CLS 144/24.18
TXT Ladder making:

    Machine under subclass 2.1 intended to construct a portable member intended
    to be climbed.


CLS 144/24.19
TXT Rack or grid making:

    Machine under subclass 2.1 intended to construct a compartmented support or
    framework.


CLS 144/24.20
TXT Staglike handle making:

    Machine under subclass 2.1 intended to carve a handle of wood in a manner
    to cause the handle to appear as if it is of the horn of a deer or similar
    animal.


CLS 144/24.21
TXT Oil cake trimming:

    Machine under subclass 2.1 intended to remove surplus material from the
    edge of a wood block, which wood block is used as a filler in a press which
    expresses oil from an oil bearing product (e.g., from cotton seed).


CLS 144/24.22
TXT Wood shoe or wood shoe last making:

    Machine under subclass 2.1 intended to construct, of wood, a member
    intended to be worn on the foot of a man; or to make, of wood, a member to
    become a foot underlying, stiffening part of a member intended to be worn
    on the foot of a man.

    (1)     Note.  A wood shoe may be called a sabot.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134.2,  for a shaping machine of general utility especially adapted to
    making a wooden shoe or wood last.


CLS 144/24.23
TXT Garment hanger making:

    Machine under subclass 2.1 intended to construct a removable member
    intended to storingly support an article of apparel.


CLS 144/24.24
TXT Golf club making:

    Machine under subclass 2.1 intended to construct an implement intended to
    propel a ball in the game of golf.


CLS 144/24.25
TXT Lifter:

    Machine under subclass 2.1 comprising means to raise a a workpiece against
    gravity in the performance of a woodworking operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force, for
    a lifting device, generally.


CLS 144/25
TXT Box hooping:

    Machine under subclass 2.1 adapted to apply a band around a small box,
    wherein the band is usually made of wire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6.5,    for a combined machine for making a box.

    24.03,  for box making, generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    147,    Coopering, subclasses 7 through 12 for a machine for assembling a
    hoop on a wood barrel or bucket and subclasses 43 through 46 for means
    related to making the hoop.


CLS 144/26
TXT Comb-teeth cutting:

    Machine under subclass 2.1 adapted to cut comb-teeth in the manufacture of
    combs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 86+ for a currycomb.

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 219+ for a toilet comb.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus, for
    a means to shape the teeth of a comb from plastic material.


CLS 144/27
TXT Hinge-seat cutting:

    Machine under subclass 2.1 adapted to cut the mortise or bed in the wood in
    which a hinge is to be placed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6.5,    for a combined machine for making a box, which may include cutting
    the seat for a hinge.

    24.04,  for means for performing an operation for hinging a box, other than
    hinge seat cutting.


CLS 144/28
TXT Pencil-wood making:

    Machine under subclass 2.1 adapted to perform such operations in the
    manufacture of pencil-wood as are not elsewhere specifically classified.

    (1)     Note.  A machine for performing one of such operations as
    splitting, slicing, sawing, planing, turning, etc., is placed in the
    respective class of a machine of general utility.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for a combined machine for shaping and dividing, generally.


CLS 144/28.1
TXT Pencil sharpening:

    A machine under subclass 2.1 including (a) a holder or guide for a
    workpiece, which workpiece consists of or includes a piece of attritable
    marking material and (b) either a cutting tool, or a cutting tool and means
    engaging the tool to retain it on the machine, said tool being movable with
    respect to the work holder or guide, or to the tool-engaging means, for
    removing a portion of the material from the end of the workpiece to form a
    point or beveled edge thereon.

    (1)     Note.  A patent to a guide and tool subcombination disclosed only
    as being used in a machine, or to a disclosed combination of this class in
    which a "sharpener" is claimed broadly, will be placed in this, or an
    indented, subclass rather than in Class 30, Cutlery, subclasses 451+.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass, rather than any subclass indented hereunder,
    is the locus of patents to devices wherein the tool and tool support are
    stationary relative to a support for the machine so that the workpiece must
    be manually carried to and associated with the machine for the
    material-removing operation, and wherein the tool (generally of the face
    type) as defined in Class 30, subclass 462, is stationary relative to the
    tool-engaging means so that the work holder or guide must be movable
    relative thereto for material-removing contact of the workpiece with the
    tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for a machine for pointing a wooden workpiece other than a pencil.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 451+ for a pencil-sharpening implement (i.e.,
    one having a static work holder or guide and a static tool, including
    indented subclass 462, wherein the tool is of the face type).

    142,    Wood Turning, subclasses 4 through 57 for cutting a circular
    section of a rotating workpiece or of a stationary workpiece by an orbiting
    tool, generally.


CLS 144/28.11
TXT Hand manipulable:

    Machine under subclass 28.1 in which the tool, along with any additional
    structure movable therewith, and the remaining structure of the machine
    which is movable relative to the tool for the material-removing operation,
    are manually supported and controlled in the hands of the user for said
    operation.

    (1)     Note.  The remaining structure may be manually supported through
    the workpiece.


CLS 144/28.2
TXT Including elongated work holder or guide for edge-beveling:

    Machine under subclass 28.1 in which one tool-confronting dimension of the
    holder or guide is substantially greater than another such dimension in
    order to present a correspondingly long edge portion of a workpiece to the
    tool for an edge-tapering operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124     through 127, for a planing machine adapted to produce a bevel on
    work.


CLS 144/28.3
TXT Movable tool:

    Machine under subclass 28.1 including means to move, or to guide the
    movement of, the tool relative to the workpiece and to the tool-retaining
    means, for the material-removing operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    82,     Turning, subclass 101 for means to hold, maintain, or revolve a
    workpiece in a turning machine.

    142,    Wood Turning, subclasses 4 through 57 for cutting a circular
    section of a rotating workpiece or of a stationary workpiece by an orbiting
    tool, generally, including cutting by use of a moving tool.


CLS 144/28.4
TXT Work actuated tool drive:

    Machine under subclass 28.3 wherein force applied directly to the workpiece
    while in the machine puts the workpiece in motion and thereby supplies the
    energy for operating said means to move the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28.7,   for an orbiting pencil-sharpener cutter that is rotated about its
    own axis directly by engagement with the work.


CLS 144/28.5
TXT Work controlled switch for tool drive:

    Machine under subclass 28.3 including means to connect the means for moving
    the tool to, and to disconnect it from, a source of energy, and wherein the
    means to connect and disconnect is actuated by movement of the workpiece.


CLS 144/28.6
TXT Rotatable or revolvable:

    Machine under subclass 28.3 wherein the movement of the tool is through an
    arc of at least 360 degrees about an axis extending therethrough or spaced
    therefrom.


CLS 144/28.7
TXT Planetary:

    Machine under subclass 28.6 including means to rotate the tool on its own
    axis and simultaneously to revolve it about another axis through the
    workpiece so as to maintain it in material-removing contact with the
    workpiece.


CLS 144/28.71
TXT Plural tools:

    Machine under subclass 28.7 including more than one planetary cutting tool,
    each of which rotates about its own axis.


CLS 144/28.72
TXT Including orbital or electric motor drive:

    Machine under subclass 28.6 including means for rotating the tool, which
    means either (a) includes a pair of rotatable elements having peripheral
    surfaces in continuous engagement with, and movable relative to, one
    another for transfer of motive force between said elements or (b) is
    powered by electrical energy.


CLS 144/28.8
TXT Work holder or guide also rotary:

    Machine under subclass 28.6 wherein the work holder or guide is movable
    about its own internal axis and relative to the tool during the
    material-removing operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    82,     Turning, subclass 101 for means to revolve work in a turning
    machine.

    142,    Wood Turning, subclass 57 for a socket work holder of a
    wood-turning machine.


CLS 144/28.9
TXT Rotary work holder or guide:

    Machine under subclass 28.3 wherein the work holder or guide is movable
    about its own internal axis and relative to the tool during the
    material-removing operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    82,     Turning, subclass 101 for means to revolve work in a turning
    machine.

    142,    Wood Turning, subclass 57 for a socket work holder of a
    wood-turning machine.


CLS 144/29
TXT Piano-hammer felting:

    Machine under subclass 2.1 adapted to fold glue-covered felt about and
    secure it by pressure to a piano-hammer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    349+ for surface laminating apparatus, in general.


CLS 144/30
TXT Pin pointing:

    Machine under subclass 2.1 adapted to sharpen the end of a wood stick.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is the placement of a point on a
    fence-picket, skewer, shoe-peg, hop-pole, dowel-pin, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28.1+,  for a pencil-sharpening machine (i.e., including a dynamically
    related cutter and work holder or work guide element).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 451+ for a pencil-sharpening implement
    including a statically related cutter and work holder or work guide element.

    142,    Wood Turning, subclasses 27, 28, 29, 30, and 32 for a hollow cutter
    chisel which could be used to sharpen a stick.

    168,    Farriery, subclass 46 for a device to sharpen the calk of a
    horseshoe, except by a grinding operation.

    451,    Abrading, subclass 346 for a device to sharpen the calk of a
    horseshoe by grinding.


CLS 144/33
TXT Tray making:

    Machine under subclass 2.1 for cutting out a veneer dish, or a wooden bowl
    or tray of greater thickness than veneer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    147,    Coopering, subclass 36 and indented subclasses for miscellaneous
    barrelhead making.


CLS 144/34.1
TXT Tree felling:

    Various apparatus under subclass 2.1 for cutting down a tree.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.1,    for a special work machine "particularly" adapted to both timber
    cutting and handling.

    193,    for a device for splitting a stump in situ, (i.e., in the earth).

    335+,   for a method of tree harvesting or processing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 95+ for a work-supported, strand encircling,
    contractile cutter; subclasses 166.3+ for a saw, generally, that is
    randomly manipulated, particularly subclass 379 for a vehicle-mounted saw
    wherein the saw support and vehicle are moved together randomly with
    respect to the work during cutting, subclass 379.5 for a vehicle-mounted
    saw wherein the saw support structure moves relative to the vehicle and
    randomly relative to the work during cutting, and subclasses 381+ for a
    chainsaw. Note the cutter device of Class 30 may be used to cut a tree, but
    the combination of a Class 30 cutter with additional structure to direct
    the fall of a tree is to be found in Class 144.

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 229+ for a harvesting device supported on
    the ground and specialized to the cutting or mowing of small grain, grass,
    and the like.

    83,     Cutting, cross-reference art collection 928 for an art collection
    of cutting machines, each of which includes a work support mounted on a
    vehicle.


CLS 144/34.2
TXT Tree puller or pusher:

    Tree felling means under subclass 34.1 including means to draw or shove the
    tree away from the standing position.


CLS 144/34.3
TXT Antisplit clamp:

    Tree felling under subclass 34.1 with means to grip the trunk of the tree
    or stump to prevent longitudinal subdividing thereof.


CLS 144/34.4
TXT Burning or charring means:

    Tree felling means under subclass 34.1 including means to consume a portion
    of the tree or bark by fire.


CLS 144/34.5
TXT Shear:

    Tree felling means under subclass 34.1 including a pair of blades adapted
    to slide past each other; one blade approaching the wood of the tree from
    one side, the other blade engaging the tree from the other side to sever
    the wood therebetween.


CLS 144/34.6
TXT Single blade and pass means:

    Tree felling means under subclass 34.1 including a cutting member and
    additional structure to cause that member to pass through the trunk of a
    tree in a single encounter.

    (1)     Note.  The blade of this subclass is commonly attached to the blade
    of a bulldozer and serves to slice through the trunk of a tree just above
    the ground.  Normally this would be done at a single pass; however, it is
    noted that if the tree is too large or the device carrying the blade is too
    small, the action may take more than a single encounter.


CLS 144/35.1
TXT Boring and sawing:

    Combined machine under subclass 1.1 including apparatus to cut a workpiece
    by relative rotary plus axially moving tool and including apparatus to
    subdivide a workpiece by a planar, toothed cutter that moves parallel to
    the plane to cut .


CLS 144/35.2
TXT Attachment for converting one tool to other:

    Boring and sawing machine under subclass 35.1 comprising structure that
    allows the same cutter to perform both boring and sawing.


CLS 144/36
TXT Planing and matching:

    Machine under subclass 2.1 for surfacing the edges of lumber, comprising
    means for forming a tongue on one edge and a tongue receiving groove on the
    other edge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117.1+, for a rotary cylindrical cutter, the type commonly used by the
    device of this subclass.


CLS 144/37
TXT Planing, matching, and dividing:

    Machine under subclass 1.1 for surfacing wide boards, dividing them
    longitudinally into two or more strips, and tonguing and grooving each
    strip.


CLS 144/38
TXT Planing and polishing:

    Machine under subclass 1.1 adapted to plane lumber and then further smooth
    it by means of a polisher.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, for polishing or grinding by use of abrasive material.


CLS 144/39
TXT Planing and sawing:

    Machine under subclass 1.1 adapted to dress flat-surface lumber and to use
    a saw to cut the lumber to length.


CLS 144/40
TXT Riving and shaving:

    Machine under subclass 1.1 for controlled splitting and scraping away the
    surface of rattan, hoop-poles, or the like in one operation.


CLS 144/41
TXT Shaping and dividing:

    Machine under subclass 1.1 for giving some predetermined contour to several
    parallel pieces of work and simultaneously dividing them from a common
    piece of stock and from each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136.1+, for grooving a wood workpiece.


CLS 144/42
TXT Slicing and scoring:

    Slicing machine under subclass 1.1 which has a device for scoring the face
    of the bolt from which the slices are cut.


CLS 144/43
TXT Slicing and shaving:

    Machine under subclass 1.1 which cuts slices from a block of wood and then
    shaves the surfaces smooth.


CLS 144/44
TXT Converging knives:

    Combined slicing and shaving machine under subclass 43 in which the severed
    slice is simultaneously shaved and beveled by a pair of converging knives.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126,    for a bevelling planer that uses a longitudinal, shifting cutter.


CLS 144/46
TXT Turning and boring:

    Combined machine under subclass 1.1 including a lathe and a boring machine.


CLS 144/47
TXT Turning and polishing:

    Combined machine under subclass 1.1 including a lathe and a polishing
    machine.


CLS 144/48
TXT Turning and sawing:

    Combined machine under subclass 1.1 including a lathe and a sawing machine.


CLS 144/48.1
TXT Turret tools:

    Combined machine under subclass 1.1 including plural tools for distinct
    purposes mounted in a single tool support that is pivotable to implement
    each tool.


CLS 144/48.2
TXT Coaxial tools, different work levels:

    Combined machine under subclass 1.1 including plural tools for distinct
    purposes, mounted to turn about the same axis, but spaced along that axis.


CLS 144/48.3
TXT Tippable frame:

    Combined machine under subclass 1.1 including underlying structure intended
    to be repositioned about an axis to present the tool to the work from a
    different direction.


CLS 144/48.4
TXT Combined band-saw:

    Combined machine under subclass 1.1 wherein one of the tools is in the form
    of a single band of material connected to itself as an endless loop.


CLS 144/48.5
TXT Hand-held:

    Combined machine under subclass 1.1 intended to be supported by the hand of
    an operative, when in use.


CLS 144/48.6
TXT Attachments to hand-held:

    Combined machine under subclass 48.6 including a component that is readily
    secured thereto and serves to augment the use of the machine or to allow
    use of the machine in a distinct way.


CLS 144/48.7
TXT Different motor positions:

    Combined machine under subclass 1.1 wherein the woodworking tool is
    intended to be caused to move by a prime mover, which machine further
    includes distinct locations intended to supportingly receive that prime
    mover.


CLS 144/49
TXT MISCELLANEOUS SINGLE-OPERATION:

    Machine under the class definition performing only one operation, as
    distinguished from a combined machine, and not otherwise specifically
    classified.


CLS 144/50
TXT MATCH MAKER:

    Machine under the class definition which severs splints and then carries
    them through one or more of the processes necessary for the production of
    matches or which takes the splints already severed and passes them through
    one or more of the operations involved in the conversion of the splints
    into matches.

    (1)     Note.  A machine for boxing the finished matches is also included
    in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, for a method of or apparatus for encompassing or
    encasing goods or materials with a separate cover or band which serves as
    means for identifying, protecting, or unit handling the goods or materials;
    search particularly subclasses 394+ for making matchbooks.


CLS 144/51
TXT Wax or paper:

    Machine under subclass 50 for the manufacture of matches from paperboard or
    waxed cord instead of wooden splints.

    (1)     Note.  This is an exception to the workpiece of this class is of
    wood.  The wax or paper art is collected here because the operation is so
    similar to that of making a match of wood.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 394+ for a method of or apparatus for
    making matchbooks.


CLS 144/52
TXT Cutting, framing, and dipping:

    Machine under subclass 50 which severs splints from blocks or veneers and
    carries them through all the operations necessary for the production of the
    finished matches.


CLS 144/53
TXT Die punch:

    Cutting, framing, and dipping machine under subclass 52 in which the
    cutting of the splints is done by a reciprocating die-punch which carries
    the severed splints to and inserts them into the dipping-frames.


CLS 144/54
TXT Cutting and framing:

    Machine under subclass 50 which cuts the match-splints from veneers or
    blocks and mounts the splints in frames or conveyors for dipping.


CLS 144/55
TXT Die punch:

    Cutting and framing machine under subclass 54 which severs the splints from
    the block by means of reciprocating die-punches which carry the splints to
    the frames and inserts them therein.


CLS 144/56
TXT Fixed die punch:

    Cutting and framing machine under subclass 55 including use of a punch that
    is fixed in position and the block is fed to it, the splints being severed
    at each movement, forcing out of the punch those cut at a preceding stroke.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    197,    for a punching-cutter in which the wood is forced down upon a fixed
    die.


CLS 144/57
TXT Cutting and coiling:

    Machine under subclass 50 which severs the splints from blocks or veneers
    and winds them into coils for dipping.


CLS 144/58
TXT Framing and dipping:

    Machine under subclass 50 which inserts the severed splints or
    splint-blocks into a dipping-frame or conveyor and dips the splints into
    the baths necessary to form the heads.

    (1)     Note.  In most of these machines the splints are fed from a hopper
    to some form of conveyor.


CLS 144/59
TXT Coiling:

    Machine under subclass 50 wherein the match-splints are fed from a hopper
    or some other holding means to a device which coils the splints into
    bunches by means of tapes or cords.


CLS 144/60
TXT Dipping:

    Machine under subclass 50 which forms the head upon the framed or coiled
    match-splints, but which does not insert the splints into frames or
    conveyors.

    (1)     Note.  Features of conveyor construction are sometimes shown on the
    devices found herein.


CLS 144/61
TXT Box filling:

    Machine under subclass 50 for boxing matches or other small splints and not
    including a mechanism for performing any of the operations involved in the
    manufacture of the matches or the boxes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191,    for a receiving and handling device used in slivering.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, for a method of or apparatus for encompassing or
    encasing goods or materials with a separate cover or band which serves as
    means for identifying, protecting, or unit handling the goods or materials;
    especially subclasses 558+ for apparatus to form or partly form a
    receptacle and to subsequently fill the same and subclass 236 for
    depositing long, slender articles (e.g., matches) in a preformed receptacle.


CLS 144/62
TXT Emptying:

    Machine under subclass 65 which expels the matches from a dipping-frame or
    conveyor after the completion of the dipping process.


CLS 144/63
TXT Filling:

    Machine under subclass 65 for inserting match-splints into a dipping-frame
    or conveyor or interweaving them with cords, wires, or tapes which serve in
    lieu of a frame.


CLS 144/64
TXT Hopper feed:

    Machine under subclass 63 for filling a dipping-frame in which the splints
    are fed from a hopper to the inserting device.


CLS 144/65
TXT Dipping frame:

    Machine under subclass 50 for holding a match-splint during the operation
    of dipping and methods of interweaving match-splints with cords, wires, or
    tapes to serve in lieu of frames.

    (1)     Note.  A subcombination of a dipping frame for use with a machine
    of subclass 50 is included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52+,    for match making including cutting, framing, and dipping.

    58+,    for match making including framing and dipping.

    60,     for match making including dipping.


CLS 144/66
TXT Splint feed mechanism:

    Device for feeding the match-splints to the machines of subclass 50 which
    convert them into finished matches, including a hopper, a conveyor belt,
    and means for communicating motion to the belt.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, for article dispensers (feeders) not otherwise
    provided for; see the class definition of Class 221 for a statement of the
    class lines and for the disposition of related disclosures of article and
    strip feeding processes and apparatus.


CLS 144/67
TXT Multiple chisel:

    Chisel mortising machine under subclass 75 in which there are several
    chisels with means for operating them.


CLS 144/68
TXT Portable:

    Multiple-chisel mortiser under subclass 67 adapted to be moved about or
    placed upon the work, generally clamped thereto, and driven by a hand-crank.

    (1)     Note.  The cutter-carriage is usually fed along instead of feeding
    the work as in stationary machines.


CLS 144/69
TXT Auger cutter:

    Mortising machine under subclass 82 including a rotary cutter having side
    and end cutting edges adapted to first bore into the wood workpiece and
    then move sideways to cut any width of mortise desired.


CLS 144/70
TXT Portable:

    Auger-cutter mortiser under subclass 69 adapted to be moved about and
    placed upon the work, generally clamped thereto, and driven by a hand-crank.

    (1)     Note.  In the machine of this subclass, the cutter-carriage is
    usually fed into the work instead of the work being fed as in a stationary
    machine.


CLS 144/71
TXT Automatic step feed:

    Auger-cutter mortiser under subclass 69 having a step-feed, and also a
    diagonal feed, by which a succession of inclined mortises are formed in a
    blind-stile to take the ends of the slats.


CLS 144/72
TXT MORTISING MACHINE HAVING CHAIN-TYPE CUTTER:

    Machine under the class definition adapted to cut a mortise by means of
    series of chisel-cutters carried by a moving endless chain, supported on a
    frame by pulleys, which is presented to the work at the pulley end.


CLS 144/73
TXT Portable:

    Chain mortising machine under subclass 72 adapted to be moved about and
    placed upon the work, generally clamped thereto and driven by a hand-crank.

    (1)     Note.  In the machine of this subclass, the cutter-carriage is
    usually fed into the work instead of the work being fed as in a stationary
    machine.


CLS 144/74
TXT Boring cutter and mortising chisel cutter:

    Mortising machine under subclass 82 including a rotary, boring cutter
    combined with an elongated cutter having a sharp, leading cutting edge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     for a square cross-section mortising chisel with an auger passing
    through its center.


CLS 144/75
TXT MORTISING MACHINE HAVING CHISEL:

    Machine under the class definition which cuts a groove for receipt of a
    cooperating portion of another member by means of an elongated cutter
    having a sharp leading cutting edge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, for grooving, other than in woodworking.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 326+ for a planing
    machine having a reciprocating cutter infeed.


CLS 144/76
TXT Portable:

    Chisel mortising machine under subclass 75 which is adapted to be moved
    about and placed upon the work, generally clamped thereto.

    (1)     Note.  The cutter-carriage is usually fed along instead of feeding
    the work, as in a stationary machine.


CLS 144/77
TXT Chisel reverser:

    Mortising machine under subclass 75 having means for reversing the chisel
    in order to square the mortise at each end.


CLS 144/78
TXT Hollow chisel and bit:

    Mortising-machine under subclass 75 having a hollow square chisel with a
    boring-bit operating inside thereof.


CLS 144/79
TXT Portable:

    Hollow-chisel and bit machine under subclass 78 adapted to be moved about
    and placed upon the work, generally clamped thereto.

    (1)     Note.  The cutter-carriage is usually fed along instead of feeding
    the work, as in a stationary machine.


CLS 144/80
TXT Oscillating chisel:

    Machine under subclass 75 which has a bar upon the end of which is a
    pivoted chisel having its edge at right angles to the bar and which is
    oscillated and cuts its way into the wood to form a mortise.


CLS 144/81
TXT Portable:

    Oscillating-chisel mortiser under subclass 75 which is adapted to be moved
    about and placed upon the work, generally clamped thereto.

    (1)     Note.  The cutter-carriage is usually fed along instead of feeding
    the work, as in a stationary machine.


CLS 144/82
TXT MORTISING MACHINE HAVING ROTARY CUTTER:

    Machine under the class definition adapted to for cut a groove for receipt
    of a cooperating portion of another member by means of a tool that turns
    about its central axis.


CLS 144/83
TXT Portable:

    Rotary cutter mortiser under subclass under subclass 82 adapted to be moved
    about and placed upon the work, generally clamped thereto, and driven by a
    hand-crank.

    (1)     Note.  In the machine of this subclass, the cutter-carriage is
    usually fed into the work, instead of the work being fed as in a stationary
    machine.


CLS 144/84
TXT WORK SUPPORT FOR MORTISING MACHINE:

    Clamp under the class definition for holding the work, device for elevating
    and feeding the carriage, or a stop or gauge for locating a groove for
    receipt of a cooperating portion of another member, wherein it forms part
    of the machine structure.

    (1)     Note.  A gauge which is a mere tool is classified as a measuring
    instrument.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, for a gauge which is a mere tool.


CLS 144/85
TXT DOVETAILING MACHINE:

    Machine under the class definition specialized for forming an undercut
    groove, not otherwise classifiable.


CLS 144/86
TXT Consecutive cutters:

    Machine under subclass 85 in which the dovetailed groove is formed by the
    successive action of two or more dissimilar cutters.


CLS 144/87
TXT Frusto-conical bit:

    Machine under subclass 85 in which the undercut groove is formed by the
    relative lateral movement of a bit broader at the point than at the shank.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86,     for consecutive cutters used to form an undercut groove.


CLS 144/88
TXT Inclined chisel:

    Machine under subclass 85 having pairs or sets of chisels reciprocating at
    an angle to each other and the work to produce undercut recesses.


CLS 144/89
TXT Inclined rotary disk:

    Machine under subclass 85 producing undercut-grooves by means of toothed
    disks having an inclination to each other or to the work-support, which is
    less than a right angle.


CLS 144/90.1
TXT MATCHING MACHINE:

    Machine under the class definition for producing a tongue along one edge
    and a tongue receiving groove along the other edge of a piece of lumber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for a machine for planing and matching lumber.

    37,     for a machine for planing, matching, and dividing lumber.


CLS 144/91
TXT End:

    Machine under subclass 91.1 for producing a tongue across one end of a
    piece of lumber and a groove across the other end of a piece of lumber.

    (1)     Note.  The lumber finished by the machine of this subclass may
    comprise flooring material, etc.


CLS 144/91.2
TXT Matching cutter:

    Machine under subclass 90.1 including particular limitations in the cutter
    bit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    407,    Cutters, for Shaping, subclasses 34+ for a rotary cutting tool for
    a face or end mill which may be capable of cutting a tongue or a groove in
    a workpiece, generally.


CLS 144/92
TXT BORING MACHINE:

    Machine under the class definition for cutting to form or to enlarge an
    opening particularly in a wood workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  Boring a felly or tenoning a spoke is included herein. Note
    that boring and mortising are in this class under their various subclass
    titles.

    (2)     Note.  The tool used in the machine of this subclass rotates with
    respect to the workpiece and may move radially or axially with respect
    thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97+,    indented hereunder for means for boring a wheel hub.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 162 and the search there
    noted for an earth boring device provided with means to feed the tool, and
    subclasses 70+ for a tool drive prime mover or mechanical motion converting
    drive means for an earth boring device.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, for boring (or
    other cutting) of wood (or other material) by a tool which turns about an
    axis and moves along that axis relative to a workpiece, wherein no
    additional motion is imported to the tool during operation.


CLS 144/93.1
TXT Special work:

    Machine under subclass 92, not otherwise classified, designed to work on
    some special article (e.g., to bore a chair-seat, spool, or shoe-lasts) and
    not adapted, without modification, for a general boring purpose.


CLS 144/93.2
TXT Last:

    Machine under subclass 93.1 particularly adapted to support a member, which
    member is intended to be used as a form on which a shoe for use by a human
    is to be built.


CLS 144/96
TXT Tilting work holder for brush:

    Machine under subclass 92 in which a more or less flat brush-block is
    successively tilted to the various angles desired for the holes to be bored
    so that the bristles when inserted will have the proper flare.


CLS 144/97
TXT Wheel hub:

    Machine under subclass 92 adapted to bore spoke-holes in the hub.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for a combined special work machine for wheel tenoning and boring.


CLS 144/98
TXT Axially using stationary bitstock:

    Machine under subclass 97 in which the work is rotated while the bit-stock
    remains stationary.


CLS 144/99
TXT Axially using stationary workholder:

    Machine under subclass 97 in which the work is stationary and the bit is
    made to rotate.


CLS 144/100
TXT Inclined bitstock:

    Machine under subclass 99 in which the bit-stock is adapted to work, in
    reaming out the hub, at an angle to the hub-axis.


CLS 144/103
TXT Swinging:

    Machine under subclass 92 pivoted, usually overhead, and adapted to be
    freely swung to any operative position within their radius.

    (1)     Note.  The bit-stock is usually also free to be moved to any angle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 490 for a rotating or oscillating tool carrier
    for a cutting machine.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 139, 174+, 236, 280, and 310 for an abrading
    machine in which the tool is mounted in a swinging carrier permitting its
    application to and removal from the work as desired.


CLS 144/104
TXT Handheld portable:

    Hand-machine under subclass 92 for general use adapted to be carried from
    place to place by the operator.


CLS 144/106
TXT Angularly adjustable:

    Machine under subclass 104 which can be adjusted to bore at any desired
    angle with respect to the surface of the work.


CLS 144/108
TXT Hand-operated step feed of long work:

    Machine under subclass 92 in which the work-carriage is adapted to be
    moved, from one position for boring to the next, by manually operating some
    catch or other holding device.

    (1)     Note.  The carriage usually has notches or other gauge upon it to
    indicate how far it is to be moved, and the catch falls successively into
    the notches.


CLS 144/114.1
TXT PLANER:

    Machine under the class definition having a cutter for smoothing the
    surface of lumber.

    (1)     Note.  A machine for producing a planar surface on rough lumber is
    included herein, and may simply comprise a machine made into a "planar" by
    the mere substitution of a straight knife for one of irregular outline.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for a machine for planing and matching.

    134.1+, for a machine for the miscellaneous shaping of wood.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 475+ for a hand-manipulable powered planer.

    83,     Cutting, for a machine for subdividing work by a sharp cutting
    edge, generally.

    125,    Stone Working, subclass 9 for a planer for smoothing the surface of
    stone.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 288+ for a planer of
    general utility.


CLS 144/115
TXT Scraper:

    Machine or device under subclass 114.1 in which the face of the knife is
    nearly at right angles to the work while acting, so that there is no true
    cutting action.


CLS 144/116
TXT Double surfacer:

    Machine under subclass 117.1 of the rotary-cylinder type adapted to plan
    both sides of the work simultaneously.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for a machine for planing and matching.


CLS 144/117.1
TXT Rotary cylindrical cutter

    Machine under subclass 114.1 in which the knife-edges describe a
    cylindrical surface in contact with the rectilinearly moving work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for combined planing and matching.

    37,     for combined planing, matching, and dividing.


CLS 144/117.2
TXT Inclined:

    Machine under subclass 117.1 including a work support or work carriage
    having a generally planar upper surface on which a workpiece is intended to
    rest; and including a cutter positionable to cut a planar surface on the
    opposite side of the workpiece such that the cut surface is sloped with
    respect to the planar surface of the support or carriage.


CLS 144/117.3
TXT Edge trimmer:

    Machine under subclass 117.1 particularly adapted to plane the narrow,
    longitudinally extending side of lumber.


CLS 144/117.4
TXT Traveling:

    Machine under subclass 117.1 particularly adapted to move with respect to
    stationary work during the planing operation.


CLS 144/118
TXT Rotary disk cutter:

    Machine under subclass 117.1 including a cutting knife set in the face of a
    disk which describes a circular path in contact with the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 477 for a hand-manipulable, powered, planing
    device with a rotary cutter axis perpendicular to the work.

    451,    Abrading, for finishing the surface of a workpiece by a tool
    comprised of naturally occurring crystals, particularly subclasses 259+ for
    such a machine which uses a rotary disc tool.


CLS 144/119.1
TXT Traveling:

    Disk machine under subclass 118 in which the disk has motions of both
    rotation and translation laterally of its axis with respect to the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 259+ for an abrading machine that uses a
    rotary disk.


CLS 144/119.2
TXT Bowling alley:

    Disk machine under subclass 119.1 particularly adapted to plane the surface
    of a wood lane used in the game of "bowling."

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, subclass 353 for a machine intended to polish or grind
    the surface of a floor with a disc-shaped abrading tool.


CLS 144/120
TXT Stationary cutter:

    Machine under subclass 114.1 in which a knife of the general bench plane
    type is fixed and the work forced past it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155,    for a fixed knife shaver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    125,    Stone Working, subclass 9 for planing of stone.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 321+ for a planing
    machine, generally, with a reciprocating cutter infeed.


CLS 144/121
TXT Reciprocating cutter:

    Machine under subclass 114.1 in which the work is held stationary or slowly
    fed while the cutter cyclically starts from a point, then moves over the
    work, returns along generally the same path to a point near the starting
    point, only to then advance progressively further along the work .

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147,    for a wood shaping machine that uses a reciprocating cutter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    409,    Gear-Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 288+ for planing that
    is not restricted to work on a workpiece of wood.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 162+ for finishing the surface of a workpiece
    by a tool comprised of naturally occurring crystals, particularly
    subclasses 162+ for such machine which uses a reciprocating tool.


CLS 144/122
TXT Laterally reciprocating:

    Machine under subclass 121 in which the cutter reciprocates at right angles
    to the direction of progression.


CLS 144/123
TXT Endless cutter carrier:

    Machine under subclass 114.1 in which a series of cutters are connected to
    each other to form a continuous loop and pass the work always in one
    direction and return out of contact with the work.


CLS 144/124
TXT Laterally beveling:

    Machine under subclass 114.1 for surfacing work one side of which is
    thicker than the other (i.e., for beveling work in a plane at right-angles
    to the direction of feed).


CLS 144/125
TXT Longitudinally beveling, inclined work pocket:

    Machine under subclass 114.1 which bevels in the direction of the grain or
    feed, the work meanwhile resting in a recess deeper at one end than at the
    other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for a woodworking machine which both slices and shaves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclasses 9+ for a machine for splitting or
    beveling leather.


CLS 144/126
TXT Longitudinally beveling, shifting cutter:

    Machine under subclass 114.1 surfacing work thicker at one end than at the
    other by moving the cutter in a path substantially at right angles to that
    of the travel of the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for a woodworking machine which both slices and shaves by use of
    converging knives.


CLS 144/127.1
TXT Longitudinally beveling, shifting work support:

    Machine under subclass 114.1 for surfacing work thicker at one end than at
    the other by moving the work holder or guide with reference to the cutter
    at substantially a right angle to the path of travel of the work.


CLS 144/127.2
TXT Shingle planer:

    Machine under subclass 127.1 particularly adapted to form a tapered surface
    on a roofing board.


CLS 144/128
TXT Endless work carrier:

    Machine under subclass 114.1 in which the work is carried past the cutter
    by chain feed or by connected or disconnected sections continually returned
    to the front of the machine-frame.


CLS 144/129
TXT Adjustable work support:

    Device under subclass 114.1 for varying the position of the work-supporting
    bed with reference to the machine-frame and cutter.


CLS 144/130
TXT Adjustable cutter:

    Means under subclass 114.1 for varying the position of the cutter with
    reference to the path of the work or to the machine-frame.


CLS 144/130.2
TXT Planer sharpener:

    Machine under subclass 114.1 combined with means to restore the sharp
    cutting edge of the cutter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclasses 81 through 89.2 for
    making and then sharpening a tool.

    451,    Abrading, for a tool sharpener of general utility.


CLS 144/131
TXT Bearings:

    Machine under subclass 117.1 including specific reference to the
    journal-bearing which supports the cylindrical cutter of a wood-planer.


CLS 144/132
TXT Bit adjustment:

    Means under subclass 120 for varying the position of the knife of a
    stationary cutter with reference to the holding-stock or to the work.


CLS 144/133.1
TXT GAINING MACHINE:

    Machine under the class definition for cutting a groove in lumber at
    substantially right angles to the grain.

    (1)     Note.  Gaining is, broadly, the cutting of a notch in a board to
    receive another part.  However, more specifically, it is a technique for
    using lumber of irregular thickness  by notching it more deeply at the
    thicker joints with connecting members.  For example, a machine for
    notching the bottoms of irregular thickness flooring joists where they rest
    on the sill so that the tops of all joists are level with each other is
    included herein.

    (2)     Note.  Gaining, of this subclass, is usually by means of a rotary
    cutter.


CLS 144/133.2
TXT Tie gaining, ties (skepers) pass through machine:

    Machine under subclass 133.1 for gaining a wood member intended to rest on
    railway ballast and support a railway rail by allowing the wood member to
    move relative to the gaining tool and relative to the support structure
    thereof.


CLS 144/133.3
TXT Traveling on railway track:

    Machine under subclass 133.1 supported and transported by wheels adapted to
    roll along a railroad.


CLS 144/134.1
TXT SHAPING MACHINE:

    Machine under the class definition for producing product of predetermined
    shape or outline in which the depth of the cut is not limited, and in which
    structural modification other than a mere change of cutter outline is
    necessary to adapt the device for finishing plane surfaces.

    (1)     Note.  The product of this subclass is usually of irregular shape
    or pattern.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203+,   for tenoning by use of a rotary, gaining cutter, particularly
    subclass 204 for cutting multiple tenons.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclasses 42+ for a heel machine under that
    class, particularly subclass 46 for seal cutting, subclasses 47+ for
    breasting, and subclasses 85+ for a sole or heel edge trimming machine.

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 131+ for a hand- manipulated shear for cutting
    the end of a bamboo phonograph needle at a definite angle.


CLS 144/134.2
TXT Wooden shoe or wood shoe last making:

    Machine under subclass 134.1 intended to construct, of wood, a member
    intended to be worn on the foot of a man; or to make, of wood, a member to
    become a foot underlying, stiffening part of a member intended to be worn
    on the foot of a man.

    (1)     Note.  A wood shoe may be called a sabot.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24.22,  for a special work machine for making a wooden shoe or wood last.


CLS 144/134.3
TXT Heel forming:

    Machine under subclass 134.1 particularly adapted to shaping the exposed
    underlayment at the rear of a shoe to be worn by a human being.


CLS 144/135
TXT Box trimming:

    Machine under subclass 134.1 for planing a side or trimming the cover of a
    small container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6.5,    7 and 24.03+, for a special work machine for making a box.


CLS 144/135.2
TXT Vertical spindle:

    Machine under subclass 134.1 including a supporting base having a tool
    support that turns about an axis that extends up and down.


CLS 144/135.3
TXT Overhanging cutter:

    Machine under subclass 134.1 including a work support and including a tool
    support, wherein the tool support is configured to suspend the tool above
    the workpiece.


CLS 144/135.4
TXT Overhanging, horizontal swinging cutter:

    Machine under subclass 134.1 wherein the tool support is further
    constructed to allow the tool to move with respect to the work during
    performance of the shaping operation.


CLS 144/136.1
TXT Grooving machine:

    Machine under subclass 134.1 for longitudinally scoring or corrugating a
    wooden work surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 875+ for grooving, generally (i.e., when not
    particularly adapted to grooving of wood).


CLS 144/136.2
TXT Grooving gunstock:

    Machine under subclass 136.1 intended to shape the wood portion of a
    manually supported firearm intended to support the firearm against gravity
    or recoil.


CLS 144/136.3
TXT Grooving battery spacer:

    Machine under subclass 136.1 particularly adapted to scoring a member
    intended to isolate a plate of an electricity storing electric cell.


CLS 144/136.4
TXT Grooving umbrella stick:

    Machine under subclass 136.1 particularly adapted to scoring the wooden
    central support of an umbrella.


CLS 144/136.5
TXT Grooving core box:

    Machine under subclass 136.1 particularly adapted to score a container
    intended to receive the green sand to be used in a casting operation.


CLS 144/136.6
TXT Grooving stairway stringer:

    Machine under subclass 136.1 particularly adapted to score a structural
    member of a building stairway.


CLS 144/136.7
TXT Grooving log:

    Machine under subclass 136.1 particularly adapted to score a generally
    straight section of wood, as cut off the trunk of a tree.


CLS 144/136.8
TXT Forming hand hold:

    Machine under subclass 136.1 adapted make a member adapted to be manually
    supported during operation.


CLS 144/136.9
TXT Forming corner groove:

    Machine under subclass 136.1 particularly adapted to scoring the juncture
    of intersecting grooves in a wood workpiece.


CLS 144/136.95
TXT Hand tool means:

    Machine under subclass 136.1 intended to be supported or manipulated by an
    operative during use.


CLS 144/137
TXT Pattern:

    Machine under subclass 134.1 for working to pattern or for producing
    predetermined figures and not otherwise classifiable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclass 85 and indented subclasses for a
    shoe sole or heel edge trimming machine.


CLS 144/138
TXT Polygonal form, indexed work:

    Machine under subclass 137 for forming work of regular polygonal
    cross-section (e.g., a baluster) by a cutter or by a plurality of cutters
    acting successively on the sides of the work, the work being turned through
    equal angles by the supporting mechanism to present each side in turn to
    the cutters and then held stationary during the action of the cutter.


CLS 144/139
TXT Rotating table, shifting cutter:

    Machine under subclass 137 in which definitely-recurring figures are
    produced by the combined movements of a rotating worktable and a guided
    cutter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154,    for a wood shaping machine including a rotary work carrier.


CLS 144/140
TXT Gear-guided cutter:

    Machine under subclass 137 which the shaping cutter moves transversely and
    is controlled by a gear-train or system of change-gears.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    147,    Coopering, subclass 45 for a barrel hoop making machine which
    unites the ends of the hoop by lapping and pointing and subclass 46 for a
    barrel hoop making machine which unites the ends of the hoop by lock
    cutting.


CLS 144/141
TXT Crank-guided cutter:

    Machine under subclass 137 for producing recurring figures in which the
    transverse cutter motion is controlled by a crank.


CLS 144/142
TXT Cutter guiding cam:

    Machine under subclass 137 for producing definitely-recurring figures by
    the combined motion of the work and cutter, the latter being given its
    motion of a translation by a cam.


CLS 144/143
TXT Work guiding cam:

    Machine under subclass 137 similar to the last preceding except that the
    cam shifts the work transversely with reference to the cutter.


CLS 144/144.1
TXT Cutter guiding templet:

    Machine under subclass 137 particularly adapted for following a guide form
    for directing the machine to cause the cutter to move and produce a defined
    figure.


CLS 144/144.2
TXT Shaping stringed musical instrument :

    Machine under subclass 144.1 particularly adapted to shape a component of a
    readily transportable device having strings under tension intended to
    produce musical tones when vibrated.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is shaping a wood component of a violin,
    guitar, mandolin, etc., but not shaping a component of a piano.


CLS 144/144.3
TXT Shaping propeller:

    Machine under subclass 144.1 particularly adapted to shape a member
    intended to turn in a fluid or gas to develop driving force by reaction
    therewith.


CLS 144/144.4
TXT Shaping oar:

    Machine under subclass 144.1 particularly adapted to shape a member
    intended to be manually maneuvered in a fluid to develop driving force by
    reaction therewith.


CLS 144/144.41
TXT Horizontally swingable tool support:

    Machine under subclass 144.1 including a member which holds the cutter
    against gravity and turns about an axis that extends vertically.


CLS 144/144.51
TXT Templet, per se:

    A templet for use in the machine of subclass 144.1.


CLS 144/144.52
TXT Guide track:

    Templet under subclass 144.51 including a slot or a rail used to direct the
    operation of a woodworking machine.


CLS 144/145.1
TXT Work guiding templet:

    Machine under subclass 137 particularly adapted for following a guide form
    for directing the machine to cause the work to move and produce a defined
    figure.


CLS 144/145.2
TXT Vertical spindle cutter:

    Machine under subclass 145.1 including a cutter that turns about an axis
    that extends up and down.


CLS 144/145.3
TXT Including work engaging, antifriction collar:

    Machine under subclass 145.2 including a work engaging member riding on the
    cutter spindle, which member is rotatable with respect to the spindle,
    wherein the member is intended to rollingly engage the workpiece and guide
    the cutter relative to the workpiece.


CLS 144/145.4
TXT Shaping last:

    Machine under subclass 145.1 particularly adapted to shape a form on which
    a shoe for a human being is to be made.


CLS 144/146
TXT Oscillating knife:

    Machine under subclass 134.1 for shaping work by means of a pivoted
    knife-arm.


CLS 144/147
TXT Reciprocating knife:

    Machine under subclass 134.1 in which a straight or pattern knife is
    reciprocated along a straight line.


CLS 144/148
TXT Plural reversible cutters:

    Machine under subclass 134.1 having double cutters, one idle while the
    other is cutting, and means for reversing both the position of the cutters
    and their direction or rotation with reference to the feed as may be
    required by the character of the work.


CLS 144/149
TXT Pattern knife, swinging frame:

    Machine under subclass 134.1 in which an outlined or pattern knife is
    mounted after the manner of a swinging saw.


CLS 144/150
TXT Rotary disk cutter, end thrust:

    Machine under subclass 134.1 having rotary cutter of the disk type, usually
    with pattern knives, and arranged to give relative movement between cutter
    and work in the direction of the axis of the cutter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, for a drilling
    machine in which a rotating drill is fed along the axis of rotation of the
    drill relative to the work.


CLS 144/151
TXT Universally jointed cutter shaft:

    Machine under subclass 134.1 in which the cutter-shaft is so mounted as to
    allow the rotary cutter to have movement of translation in more than one
    plane.


CLS 144/152
TXT Shaping of curved-work guide:

    Machine under subclass 151 having such arrangement of guide-rollers or
    outline of guides as permits the shaping of circular and similar curves.


CLS 144/153
TXT Curved-bar work support:

    Machine under subclass 134.1 usually of the vertical-spindle type, having a
    curve-topped work supporting bar instead of a work supporting table,
    permitting work to be swung in more than one plane.


CLS 144/154
TXT Rotary work carrier:

    Machine under subclass 134.1 having a work-support capable of carrying a
    workpiece in a circular path past one or more cutting-tools.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139,    for a shaping machine including a rotating table and a pattern
    controlled shifting cutter.


CLS 144/154.5
TXT Hand tool:

    Machine under subclass 134.1 adapted to be randomly manipulated during
    operation by the hand of the operative.


CLS 144/155
TXT FIXED KNIFE SHAVER:

    Machine under the class definition for producing a smooth surface on wood,
    cane, or rattan and at the same time gaging the thickness of the dressed
    piece by forcing the material under a fixed knife.

    (1)     Note.  Somewhat similar machines may be found in this class,
    subclass 120, in which subclass is classified a machine otherwise
    resembling a shaving-machine, but having several plane bits mounted in
    blocks in order to remove the surface material by several successive
    shallow cuts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for a planer having a stationary cutter.

    175,    for a slicer having a fixed knife.

    184,    for a riving machine having a fixed knife.


CLS 144/156
TXT Circular knife block rattan shaver:

    Machine under subclass 155 for shaving rattan which has knives set radially
    in a circular knife-block, through which the rattan is forced.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    142,    Wood Turning, subclass 29 for means for cutting a rotating
    workpiece by a cutter chisel and subclass 31 for such a device wherein the
    cutter chisel is radially movable.


CLS 144/157
TXT Drum feed:

    Shaving machine under subclass 155 in which the work is caught by a
    gripping device on the surface of a drum and drawn under the knife.


CLS 144/158
TXT Roller feed:

    Shaving machine under subclass 155 in which feed-rolls are employed as
    means to convey the work to the knife.


CLS 144/159
TXT KNIFE PAIR SHAVER:

    Shaving machine under the class definition provided with a pair of fixed
    knifes, between which the work is fed by various means.


CLS 144/160
TXT Gripper:

    Machine under subclass 159 in which the end of the work is clamped by a
    gripping mechanism and drawn between the shaving-knives.


CLS 144/161
TXT Roller feed:

    Shaving machine under subclass 159 in which feed-rolls force the work
    between the pair of fixed knives.


CLS 144/162.1
TXT SLICER:

    Machine under the class definition for cutting up wood by knife action
    without following the grain.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is dividing of lumber into boards, blocks,
    or strips.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182+,   for a riving machine.

    192,    for a splitting and bundling machine.

    193+,   for a splitting machine, especially subclasses 194+ for a
    self-feeding splitting machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclasses 9+ for a machine for splitting or
    beveling leather.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, for apparatus for
    reducing wood to nonshaped particles.  See the line stated in section 4 of
    the main class definition of Class 241.


CLS 144/163
TXT Re-slicer:

    Machine under subclass 162.1 which severs a slice from a block and then
    divides the slice into smaller pieces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195,    for a self-feeding splitting machine that uses a roller or belt.


CLS 144/164
TXT Strip cutting by converging knives:

    Machine under subclass 162.1 whereby strips are severed from a log by
    knives whose edges are set approximately at right angles.

    (1)     Note.  No special form of knife and no special kind of feed is
    required for the machine of this subclass.


CLS 144/165
TXT Lathe feed:

    Slicing machine under subclass 164 including means for supporting a
    workpiece comprising a log which is centered between chucks and rotated,
    wherein one knife cuts tangentially and another radially, the former knife
    cutting continuously during the rotation of the log and the latter knife
    cutting only at intervals to divide the veneer severed from the log by the
    former knife.


CLS 144/166
TXT Strip cutting by lathe feed:

    Slicing machine under subclass 162.1 including means for supporting a
    workpiece comprising a log which is mounted between a pair of chucks and
    rotated step by step by ratchet mechanism, the strips being cut by knives
    mounted in a block which reciprocates longitudinally of the log.


CLS 144/167
TXT Arc cut:

    Slicing machine under subclass 162.1 wherein the work rests upon a fixed
    table and is sliced by an oscillating knife, or the work rests upon an
    oscillating table which forces the work against a fixed knife.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for a machine for making a tray.

    146,    for a shaping machine which uses an oscillating knife.

    177,    for a slicer with an oscillating log stay.


CLS 144/168
TXT Beveling machine having means for alternate end feed:

    Slicing machine under subclass 162.1 wherein the block to be sliced is fed
    to a reciprocating knife by a mechanism which causes each end to be
    alternately advanced farther than the other so that the slices severed by
    the knife shall be thicker at one end than the other.


CLS 144/169
TXT Beveling machine having shifting, knife guide:

    Slicing machine under subclass 162.1 wherein the inclination of the
    knife-guard to the work-supporting table is changed at each stroke of the
    knife in order to impart a bevel to the slice cut off.


CLS 144/170
TXT Beveling machine having tilting gauge:

    Slicing machine under subclass 162.1 wherein the thickness of the slice
    severed is determined by a tilting gauge against which the block is pressed
    before each cut.


CLS 144/171
TXT Beveling machine having tilting table:

    Slicing machine under subclass 162.1 wherein the bevel is imparted to the
    slice by tilting the worktable at each stroke of the knife to change the
    inclination of the table to the plane of the knife.


CLS 144/172
TXT Cylindrical cutter:

    Slicing machine under subclass 162.1 wherein the slicing-knives are mounted
    upon the curved surface of a rotating cylinder and the work is fed to the
    knife in any way desired.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 91 and 93
    for a similar device adapted for comminution.


CLS 144/173
TXT Grooving:

    Machine under subclass 172 having a cutting mechanism consisting of one or
    more cylinders provided with circumferential ribs which divide a sheet of
    veneer passed under or between them.


CLS 144/174
TXT With radial knife:

    Machine under subclass 172 including a rotating cylinder having radial
    knives divides a veneer into strips, or scores the surface of a log
    preparatory to the action of a veneer-shaving knife.


CLS 144/175
TXT Fixed knife:

    Slicing machine under subclass 162.1 wherein the block is cut into slices
    by being forced by hand or otherwise forced against a fixed knife.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    155 and 184, for other woodworking by a fixed knife.

    178,    for a machine in which the work is clamped upon a reciprocating
    carriage which carries it over a knife.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 95 for a
    similar device adapted for comminution.


CLS 144/176
TXT Rotary disk:

    Slicing machine under subclass 162.1 wherein the cutting-knives are set in
    an approximately radial position upon a rotary disk and cut in a plane
    parallel with that of the disk.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 92 for a
    similar device adapted for comminution.


CLS 144/177
TXT Oscillating log stay:

    Slicing machine under subclass 162.1 wherein the work is clamped by a
    stay-log which oscillates over or in front of a fixed knife.

    (1)     Note.  Either the knife block or stay-log may be fed forward by any
    desired means.


CLS 144/178
TXT Reciprocating log stay:

    Slicing machine under subclass 162.1 wherein the stay-log is caused to
    reciprocate above or in front of a fixed knife.

    (1)     Note.  Either the knife block or stay-log may be fed forward by any
    desired means.


CLS 144/179
TXT Screw fed log stay:

    Slicing machine under subclass 162.1 wherein a reciprocating knife severs
    the slices from a block held by a stay-log which is fed forward by a screw
    mechanism.


CLS 144/180
TXT Hopper feed:

    Slicing machine under subclass 162.1 wherein a slicing-knife reciprocating
    beneath a hopper in which the block to be sliced is placed.

    (1)     Note.  The block may be fed downward by its own weight, or pressure
    may be employed to force it down.


CLS 144/181
TXT Roller feed:

    Slicing machine under subclass 162.1 wherein the work is fed to the cutting
    mechanism by rollers which also gauge the thickness of the slice.


CLS 144/181.2
TXT Bottom cutting:

    Slicing machine under subclass 162.1 wherein the support structure for the
    cutting means is physically located below the work.


CLS 144/181.3
TXT Tapered product:

    Slicing machine under subclass 162.1 for making a product that is wider at
    one end than at the other.


CLS 144/182
TXT RIVING MACHINE:

    Machine under the class definition which divides lumber into approximately
    equal pieces by means of a knife which cuts with the grain.

    (1)     Note.  The machine of this subclass differs from a
    splitting-machine in that it actually cuts the material instead of rending
    it by wedge action, as is done in splitting.


CLS 144/183
TXT Beveling machine:

    Riving machine under subclass 182 in which the knife may be shifted with
    relation to the work-guide so as to divide the stock into tapered pieces.


CLS 144/184
TXT Fixed knife:

    Machine under subclass 182 for dividing wood work (e.g., rattan,
    hoop-poles, whalebone, or the like) by forcing the work against a fixed
    knife.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155     and 175, for other woodworking by a fixed knife.


CLS 144/185
TXT SLIVERING MACHINE:

    Machine under the class definition for cutting wood to form a thin, strip
    product (e.g., excelsior, a match-splint, or toothpick).

    (1)     Note.  The component of a slivering machine is included herein,
    even in the absence of a claimed cutter for forming a sliver.  For example,
    a subcombinational structure for receiving or handling the product of the
    operation of this subclass (e.g., without claiming the cutter) may be found
    here if there are sufficient limitations to place such a device in this
    class.

    (2)     Note.  The product of this subclass may be called, for example, a
    sliver or a splint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50+,    for match making for the operation of this class combined with an
    additional operation (e.g., forming a match head) in the formation of an
    ignitable match.

    196     and 197, for woodworking by a punching cutter.


CLS 144/186
TXT Scoring plane:

    Slivering machine under subclass 185 wherein the cutting mechanism consists
    of a block provided with two sets of cutters, one for scoring the surface
    and one for severing the slivers from the block.


CLS 144/187
TXT On endless belt:

    Slivering machine under subclass 186 wherein the scoring-plane is attached
    to an endless belt or chain which carried it forward, the block being held
    stationary.


CLS 144/188
TXT Rotary:

    Slivering machine under subclass 186 wherein the scoring-planes are fixed
    upon a rotating disk or platform, the block being held stationary.


CLS 144/189
TXT Gang saw:

    Machine under subclass 185 including a gang of saws.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is dividing match cards, cutting wooden
    pins, etc.

    (2)     Note.  The saws of this subclass may be circular or reciprocating.


CLS 144/190
TXT Plunger and fixed knife:

    Slivering machine under subclass 185 wherein the cutting mechanism consists
    of a fixed knife or pair of knives over which a sheet of veneer is fed and
    a reciprocating plunger which severs the slivers by driving the veneer down
    upon the knives.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    197,    for a punching cutter including a fixed die.


CLS 144/191
TXT Receiving and handling device:

    Slivering machine under subclass 185 including a chute or other device for
    attachment to a slivering-machine to receive, straighten, or assemble
    slivers for packing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50+,    for match making generally and subclass 61 indented thereunder for
    matchbox filling.


CLS 144/192
TXT SPLITTING AND BUNDLING MACHINE:

    Machine under the class definition which split a block of wood along the
    grain and also binds the split pieces into bundles.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is splitting of wood by hand or other power.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182+,   for riving

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 463+ and see the notes thereto for other impact
    tools.


CLS 144/193.1
TXT SPLITTING MACHINE:

    Machine under the class definition for splitting a block of wood whether
    operated by hand or other power.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 463+; see the notes thereto for other impact
    tools.


CLS 144/193.2
TXT Tapered or wedge shaped product:

    Machine under subclass 193.1 intended to form a product that is
    progressively thicker at one end than at the other.


CLS 144/194
TXT Self-feeding:

    Splitting machine under subclass 193.1 provided with a mechanism for
    feeding a block to the blades.


CLS 144/195
TXT Roller or belt:

    Splitting machines having a roller or endless belt to feed the block to the
    splitting-blades.


CLS 144/195.1
TXT To be driven by fluid pressure:

    Splitting machine under subclass 193.1 including a member that is
    hydraulically caused to approach a coacting member to split a wood
    workpiece therebetween, wherein one of the members is a tapered splitting
    implement or wherein one is a movable pushing member intended to move a
    wood workpiece toward a tapered splitting implement.


CLS 144/195.2
TXT Drop type:

    Splitting machine under subclass 193.1 including means to lift the wood
    workpiece and allow it to fall on a surface to subdivide the workpiece.


CLS 144/195.3
TXT Splitting gun:

    Splitting machine under subclass 193.1 adapted to use explosive material to
    directly effect the splitting, wherein the machine is supported manually or
    by the work during use.


CLS 144/195.4
TXT Hand-operated fixed splitting machine:

    Splitting machine under subclass 193.1 that is base mounted for support,
    wherein splitting is effected by energy input thereto by the operative.


CLS 144/195.5
TXT Hand tool:

    Splitting machine under subclass 193.1 intended to be supported or
    manipulated manually when in use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195.8+, for a wedge used for splitting or lifting a component of wood.


CLS 144/195.6
TXT With adjustable work support:

    Splitting machine under subclass 193.1 including means to maintain the
    workpiece against gravity during operation, which means is repositionable
    with respect to the splitting means.


CLS 144/195.7
TXT To be driven by impacting member:

    Splitting machine under subclass 195.8 wherein the splitting member is
    moved by a freely swung hammer during use.


CLS 144/195.8
TXT Wedge:

    Splitting machine under subclass 193.1 including a specifically recited
    splitting member comprised of a leading sharp edge and an attached cam
    surface intended to penetrate a wood workpiece and shove one portion
    thereof from another portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195.5,  for a wedge including a handle for manual support or manipulation
    thereof.


CLS 144/195.9
TXT Anvil, chopping, or splitting block:

    Splitting machine under subclass 193.1 including specific details of a
    horizontal reaction member, a vertical reaction member, or of the structure
    intended to effect splitting.


CLS 144/196
TXT PUNCHING CUTTER:

    Machine under the class definition including a cutter for cutting out
    pieces or simply cutting holes by mere punching action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53      and 55, for making matches by use of a die punch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, relating to blanking out products from or punching holes
    in solid material, generally.


CLS 144/197
TXT Fixed die:

    Punching-cutter under subclass 196 in which the wood is forced upon a fixed
    die.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56      and 190, for other cutting by a fixed die.


CLS 144/198.1
TXT TENONING MACHINE:

    Machine under the class definition for making a tenon at the end of a piece
    of wood.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for relishing in blind and sash cutting.

    133.1+, for gaining.


CLS 144/199
TXT Blind slat:

    Machine under subclass 198.1 adapted to tenon blind-slats.


CLS 144/200
TXT Machine having rotary cutter:

    Machine under subclass 198.1 adapted to form a tenon by some sort of a
    rotary cutter.


CLS 144/201
TXT Rotary gaining cutter:

    Machine under subclass 200 for forming a tenon by a rotary gaining-cutter.


CLS 144/202
TXT Chisel pair:

    Machine under subclass 198.1 with oppositely-placed chisel-cutters which
    simultaneously cut both shoulders of the tenon.


CLS 144/203
TXT Rotary gaining cutter:

    Machine under subclass 198.1 which is adapted to cut a tenon by a rotary
    gaining cutter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 870+ for a process of or apparatus for cutting
    a tenon cut by grooving apparatus.


CLS 144/204
TXT Multiple tenon:

    Machine under subclass 203 adapted to simultaneously gain two or more
    tenons.


CLS 144/204.2
TXT Attachment to a table saw:

    Tenoning machine under subclass 198.1 comprising subcombination of elements
    intended to be physically and functionally secured to a conventional
    base-mounted wood sawing machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, for a base-mounted sawing machine of general utility,
    particularly subclasses 438+ for a table saw with means to guide moving
    work and subclasses 469+ for a "radial arm saw."


CLS 144/205
TXT TENON TURNING MACHINE:

    Machine under the class definition adapted to make a tenon by turning.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199     for means for making a tenon in a slat of a window blind.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    82,     Turning, for cutting a workpiece which rotates and moves radially
    with respect to a cutter, generally.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, for cutting a
    workpiece by a tool that rotates with respect thereto without radial
    movement between the tool and the workpiece.


CLS 144/206
TXT Wheel spoke:

    Machine under subclass 205 for turning a spoke-tenon.


CLS 144/207
TXT OSIER PEELER:

    Machine under the class definition for removing the bark from a wither or
    osier by scraping or rubbing.

    (1)     Note.  A "wither or osier" comprises a branch (or "slender trunk"
    of any of several willow trees.)  The product of this subclass is commonly
    used in basket making.

    (2)     Note.  Included here is a device for extracting source material for
    the manufacture of aspirin.


CLS 144/208.1
TXT BARK ROSSER:

    Machine under the class definition for cutting the bark from a workpiece
    comprising a log, slab, or tree.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a machine which leaves the bark in
    sheets, as well as a machine which cuts the bark up into small bits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 121 for a hand manipulated tree hack for rossing
    bark.


CLS 144/208.2
TXT Tree climber:

    Rosser under subclass 208.1 particularly to engage a standing tree and move
    up the tree as it cuts the bark therefrom.


CLS 144/208.3
TXT Hydraulically driven cutter or hydraulic jet:

    Rosser under subclass 208.1 wherein (a) a cutter is caused to move and
    perform the cutting operation by the action of fluid pressure or (b)
    cutting is performed by the direct engagement of a fluid blast.

    (1)     Note.  The hydraulic jet of this subclass may (a) coact with an
    opposing cutting edge, (b) coact with an opposing fluid blast, or (c) act
    directly without any deliberate application of opposing force to the
    workpiece.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 177 for cutting a workpiece by use of a fluid
    blast where there is a reactive surface or a reactive blast, generally.


CLS 144/208.4
TXT Including means to simultaneously rotate and advance log:

    Rosser under subclass 208.1 wherein the work comprises a log, including a
    log supporting member adapted to transport the log and, at the same time,
    cause that log to turn about its longitudinal axis as it is engaged by a
    rossing cutter.


CLS 144/208.5
TXT Including means to sequentially advance work:

    Rosser under subclass 208.1 including a log, slab, or tree engaging member
    which serves to move the log, slab, or tree step-by-step with respect to
    the rossing cutter.


CLS 144/208.6
TXT Nontraveling work:

    Rosser under subclass 208.1 wherein, during rossing the work is not being
    transported.


CLS 144/208.7
TXT Tethered percussive tool (e.g., chain, cable, flail, hammer):

    Rosser under subclass 208.1 including means for cutting the bark from a
    workpiece is loosely secured, either directly or by an intermediate member,
    to the periphery of a rotary driver.


CLS 144/208.8
TXT Hollow head cutter:

    Rosser under subclass 208.1 including means for cutting the bark from a
    workpiece is cylindrical and has a peripheral axially extending cutting
    edge.


CLS 144/208.9
TXT Drum or tank:

    Machine under subclass 208.1 including means for cutting the bark from a
    workpiece comprising a cylindrical member having a cutting edge extending
    therealong, and exposed for cutting engagement with the workpiece either
    radially outwardly or radially inwardly.


CLS 144/208.91
TXT Disk knife:

    Machine under subclass 208.1 including means for cutting the bark from a
    workpiece comprising a platelike, circular member with a sharp peripheral
    edge.


CLS 144/208.92
TXT Handtool:

    Rosser under subclass 208.1 adapted to be supported during use by the hand
    of an operative.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 121 for a hand-manipulated tree hack for rossing
    bark.


CLS 144/209.1
TXT VENEER LATHE:

    Machine under the class definition for shaving a thin layer of wood from
    the surface of a log which is centered between chucks and rotated against a
    knife.


CLS 144/210
TXT Convertible:

    Veneer-lathe under subclass 209.1 including a stay-log which may be given a
    reciprocating or oscillatory instead of a rotary motion.


CLS 144/211
TXT Inclined knife:

    Lathe under subclass 209.1 in which the cutting-knives are set at an angle
    to the axis of the rotating log.


CLS 144/212
TXT Knife or knife block:

    Lathe under subclass 209.1 including a knife of peculiar form or mechanism
    for supporting and shifting the knife while cutting the veneer.


CLS 144/213
TXT Presser bar or roll:

    Lathe under subclass 209.1 including a device for gaging the thickness of
    the veneer cut from the log and for preventing the checking or splintering
    of the veneer under the action of the knife.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243,    for a presser bar, for use in woodworking, generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    82,     Turning, subclasses 142+ for a lathe headstock of generally utility.


CLS 144/214
TXT Log stay:

    Means under subclass 209.1 for supporting the log in the lathe.

    (1)     Note.  A support means extending the length of a wood workpiece
    (e.g., log, cant, or billet) as veneer is cut therefrom is included in this
    subclass.


CLS 144/215
TXT Strip-cutting attachment:

    Means under subclass 209.1 including a device to be attached to the lathe
    for dividing the sheet of veneer into strips as it is severed from the log.

    (1)     Note.  This does not include rollers with radial knives which score
    the log before the veneer is cut off. Such devices are classified in this
    class, subclass 174.


CLS 144/215.2
TXT Log loading or centering:

    Veneer lathe under subclass 209.1 including means to assist in positioning
    the log in the lathe or including means to locate the log to be equidistant
    from the ends of the lathe.


CLS 144/215.3
TXT Eccentric curved cut:

    Veneer lathe under subclass 209.1 wherein the cutting blade is caused to
    follow an arc with respect to the work that is other than about the center
    of the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    214,    for a support means extending the length of a wood workpiece (e.g.,
    log, cant, or billet) as veneer is cut therefrom.


CLS 144/215.4
TXT Diagonal cut by curved cutting edge:

    Veneer lathe under subclass 209.1 including means to cause the cutter to
    travel in an arcuate path along the log.


CLS 144/216
TXT MITER CUTTER:

    Machine under the class definition for cutting a miter by means of a knife.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 749 for a miter saw, generally, combined with a
    tool of another type.


CLS 144/217
TXT Angle knife:

    Machine under subclass 216 for cutting a miter by means of an angular knife
    which is forced against the material.


CLS 144/218
TXT ROTARY CUTTER:

    Device under the class definition directed to a cutter-head for wood
    adapted to turn about an axis during operation, not elsewhere classifiable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    407,    Cutters, for Shaping, subclasses 30+ for a rotary cutter not
    limited to cutting of wood.


CLS 144/219
TXT End thrust:

    Rotary cutter under subclass 218 to which pressure is applied in the
    direction of its axis of rotation and having cutting parts for its face.

    (1)     Note.  The cutter of this subclass may have also a side-cutting
    edge so that after boring its way in by end pressure it can then be moved
    sideways to enlarge the cut.

    (2)     This class includes principally carving and routing cutters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for a mortising machine having a rotary auger-type cutter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    407,    Cutters, for Shaping, subclasses 30+ for a rotary cutter not
    limited to the cutting of wood.

    433,    Dentistry, subclass 165 for a rotary dental cutter.


CLS 144/220
TXT Frusto-conical:

    Rotary cutter under subclass 218 in the form of an inverted cone.

    (1)     Note.  The cutter of this subclass may be used for cutting a
    dovetail in the edge of a board.


CLS 144/221
TXT Cylindrical cutter having spiral bit:

    Rotary cutter under subclass 218 formed by twisting a long blade spirally,
    with or without a core-piece.


CLS 144/222
TXT Double saw having intermediate cutter:

    Rotary cutter under subclass 218 comprising two or more saws spaced apart
    on a common arbor and having the intermediate space filled by a cutter
    which removes the material between the saw-kerfs.

    (1)     Note.  In this class a disk with a saw-section secured at its edge
    is considered a saw.


CLS 144/223
TXT Single saw with side cutter:

    Rotary cutter under subclass 218 comprising a saw having at one side a
    cutter which removes the material to make a wider cut than the thickness of
    the saw-blade.

    (1)     Note.  In this class a disk with a saw-section secured at its edge
    is considered a saw.


CLS 144/224
TXT Polygonal rotary cutter having T-slot bit clamp:

    Rotary cutter under subclass 218 comprising a built-up cutter in which the
    bits are secured by clamps sliding in T-slots formed in the faces of a head
    of polygonal cross-section.

    (1)     Note.  On the cutter of this subclass, a number of bits are
    frequently used to produce a pattern.


CLS 144/225
TXT Polygonal rotary cutter having plane bit seat:

    Rotary cutter under subclass 218 comprising a built-up cutter in which bits
    are clamped upon the plane faces of a head of polygonal cross-section.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclasses 91+ for a shoe sole or heal edge
    trimming machine which includes a rotary cutting head.


CLS 144/226
TXT Polygonal rotary cutter having convex bit seat:

    Rotary cutter under subclass 218 comprising a built-up cutter in which the
    bits are curved and are secured on a convex face of a head having a
    polygonal cross-section.


CLS 144/227
TXT Polygonal rotary cutter having concave bit seat:

    Rotary cutter under subclass 218 comprising a built-up cutter in which the
    bits are curved in transverse section and are secured in concave recesses
    formed in a head of polygonal cross-section.


CLS 144/228
TXT Plane bit seat in radial arm of cutter:

    Rotary cutter under subclass 218 comprising a built-up cutter to which the
    bits are secured upon plane faces formed on radial arms of a head which is
    secured to an arbor.


CLS 144/229
TXT Slotted bit seat in radial arm of cutter:

    Rotary cutter under subclass 218 comprising a built-up cutter in which the
    bits are secured in slots cut in radial arms of a head which is secured to
    an arbor.


CLS 144/230
TXT Having slotted bit seat:

    Rotary cutter under subclass 218 comprising a built-up cutter formed by
    inserting blades into longitudinal slots in the periphery of a cylindrical
    head.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclasses 94+ for a shoe sole or heal edge
    trimming machine which includes a rotary cutting head which uses inserted
    cutters.

    407,    Cutters, for Shaping, subclasses 33+ for a rotary cutter including
    inserted cutting teeth and subclasses 66+ for a cutter, generally,
    including inserted cutting teeth, wherein the cutter is not limited to the
    cutting of wood.


CLS 144/231
TXT Disk cutter including multiple clamping disks, tangential bit:

    Rotary cutter under subclass 218 comprising a built-up cutter in which the
    bits are clamped edgewise between two or more disks carried on a shaft and
    are placed in a tangential or chordal relation to the cylinder of rotations.


CLS 144/232
TXT Disk cutter including multiple clamping disks, pivoted bit:

    Rotary cutter under subclass 218 comprising a bit clamped between two disks
    in such a manner that it may be moved about an axis eccentric to that of
    the cutter-shaft for the purpose of adjusting its edge toward and from the
    cutter-axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226,    for a polygonal rotary woodworking cutter having a concave bit seat.


CLS 144/233
TXT Disk cutter including multiple clamping disks, shank bit:

    Rotary cutter under subclass 218 comprising a built-up cutter-head in which
    bits have shanks formed thereon and are clamped between disks which are
    strung on an arbor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232,    for a rotary woodworking cutter having a pivoted bit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclasses 94+ for a shoe sole or heal edge
    trimming machine which includes a rotary cutting head which uses inserted
    cutters.

    407,    Cutters, for Shaping, subclasses 33+ for a rotary cutter including
    inserted cutting teeth and subclasses 66+ for a cutter, generally,
    including inserted cutting teeth, wherein the cutter is not limited to the
    cutting of wood.


CLS 144/234
TXT Disk cutter including eccentric segmental bit:

    Rotary cutter under subclass 218 comprising a built-up cutter in which an
    annular segmental bit is clamped between two disks near the periphery
    thereof or bolted in the same location on the side of a single disk.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclasses 94+ for a shoe sole or heal edge
    trimming machine which includes a rotary cutting head which uses inserted
    cutters.


CLS 144/235
TXT Disk cutter including side attached, edge cutting bit:

    Rotary cutter under subclass 218 comprising a built-up cutter in which bits
    having shanks are bolted on the side of a disk, extend beyond the
    periphery, and cut with their projecting ends.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclasses 94+ for a shoe sole or heal edge
    trimming machine which includes a rotary cutting head which uses inserted
    cutters.


CLS 144/236
TXT Arranged in a pattern:

    Rotary cutter under subclass 217 comprising a gang of toothed disks of
    various diameter strung on a shaft in close proximity to each other so that
    their teeth will present an irregular longitudinal contour corresponding to
    a predetermined pattern.


CLS 144/237
TXT Gang of disk cutters:

    Rotary cutter under subclass 218 comprising a gang of cutter-disks clamped
    on a shaft.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a gang of disks which may be beveled and
    used to cut out beveled slats from a plank by operating first on one side
    and then on the other. Also included herein is a grooving-cutter.


CLS 144/238
TXT Wobble saw:

    Rotary cutter under subclass 218 comprising a saw secured on a shaft in
    such a manner that it lies in a plane which cuts the axis of the shaft at
    an angle other than a right angle.

    (1)     Note.  The saw of this subclass is used for cutting a groove wider
    than the thickness of the saw-blade and, also, for cutting a dovetail notch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201,    for a chisel pair used for tenoning.


CLS 144/239
TXT Distorted saw:

    Rotary cutter under subclass 218 comprising a saw in which a portion of the
    periphery is twisted out of its original plane so that it stands at an
    angle thereto and in rotating cuts a groove of a width greater than the
    thickness of the saw-plate.


CLS 144/240
TXT Solid:

    Rotary cutter under subclass 218 comprising single integral cutters, not
    including saws which are intended merely for severing, and including saws
    for cutting beveled grooves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclasses 91+ for a shoe sole or heal edge
    trimming machine which includes a rotary cutting head.

    407,    Cutters, for Shaping, subclasses 30+ for a rotary cutter not
    limited to cutting of wood.


CLS 144/241
TXT Bit:

    Rotary cutter under subclass 240 comprising a blade to be secured to a
    rotary head.

    (1)     Note.  The combination of a cutter bit with a feed or presser
    mechanism therefor is included herein. For example, a device for moving
    work to a cutter or for holding it against spring or vibration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188,    for a rotary bit for cutting excelsior.


CLS 144/242.1
TXT FEEDER OR PRESSER:

    Mechanism under the class definition including means for moving the work to
    the cutting-tool and for holding it to the machine-bed, not otherwise
    classifiable.


CLS 144/243
TXT Presser bar or chip breaker:

    Mechanism under subclass 242.1 comprising a fixed bar which, like a
    presser-roll, holds down work while being acted on by the cutter or extends
    under the cutter to prevent the wood from slivering into the uncut portion.


CLS 144/244
TXT Sectional:

    Presser-bar or chip-breaker under subclass 243 divided transversely into
    several parts to allow lumber of irregular thickness or several pieces of
    varying thickness to pass thereunder.


CLS 144/245.1
TXT Blank feeder:

    Mechanism under subclass 242.1 including means for successively feeding
    small similar detached workpieces thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles: Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 268+ for a
    carriage for doffing or donning, under that class definition.

    86,     Ammunition and Explosive-Charge Making, subclasses 23+ for
    ammunition loading.

    101,    Printing, subclasses 35+ for a machine for printing on a special
    article.

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 104+ for sewing, including attaching an article.

    142,    Wood Turning, subclass 20 for an automatic spindle wood turning
    lathe with a chute feed.


CLS 144/245.2
TXT Endless:

    Mechanism under subclass 245.1 wherein portions of the feeder are connected
    to each other, such that each travels along an continuous loop during
    operation.


CLS 144/245.3
TXT With work clamp:

    Mechanism under subclass 245.2 combined with means to grippingly secure the
    work to the feeder.


CLS 144/245.4
TXT Intermittent feed chain drive:

    Mechanism under subclass 245.2 comprised of a band of rigid, concatenated
    members pivotally connected to each other, to follow each other around the
    continuous loop, which mechanism is intended to feed work part of the time
    and be stationary part of the time.


CLS 144/245.5
TXT Stacker or unstacker:

    Mechanism under subclass 245.1 intended to place one product of the
    operation on top of the previous procedure thereof or to remove one
    workpiece of the operation from the top of another such workpiece.


CLS 144/245.6
TXT Pusher having retractable dog:

    Mechanism under subclass 245.1 comprised of a member intended to propel a
    first workpiece from behind, then drop down for return to the starting
    position to then propel a second workpiece.


CLS 144/245.7
TXT Feed from top of stack:

    Mechanism under subclass 245.5 intended to lift the uppermost workpiece
    from a vertical column of succeeding workpieces.


CLS 144/246.1
TXT Feed roll:

    Mechanism under subclass 242.1 including as a significant component
    thereof, a positively-driven work-moving roller.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein as a "significant component" are structural
    details of a roll, arrangement of a roll, gear connections, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not  provided for elsewhere;
    see the notes thereunder.


CLS 144/246.2
TXT With feeler or presensing device:

    Feed roll under subclass 246.1 combined with a detector device intended to
    detect a physical or other condition.


CLS 144/247
TXT Spring pressed:

    Feed-roll under subclass 246.1 held to the work by means of resilient
    support structure.


CLS 144/248
TXT Weighted:

    Feed-roll under subclass 246.1 pressed upon the work by a weighted lever.


CLS 144/248.2
TXT With oblique means urging work laterally:

    Feed roll under subclass 246.1 combined with an inclined guide means
    intended to direct the work to one side.


CLS 144/248.3
TXT Resilient feed roll:

    Feed roll under subclass 246.1 which is intended to yield within its
    elastic limit during use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247,    for a feed roll that is mounted on a resilient support member.


CLS 144/248.4
TXT On overhanging arm:

    Feed roll under subclass 246.1 supported on a beam suspended over the work
    being engaged thereby.


CLS 144/248.5
TXT Work centering and feeding:

    Feed roll under subclass 246.1 intended, in addition to advance the work,
    to cause the work to follow a prescribed path.


CLS 144/248.6
TXT Roll feeds in direction of cut:

    Feed roll under subclass 246.1 intended to cause the work to move along a
    path, which path is parallel to the path cut by a cutter.


CLS 144/248.7
TXT Special shaped roll:

    Feed roll under subclass 246.1 of a particular, claimed physical
    configuration.


CLS 144/250.1
TXT Sectional roll:

    Feed or presser roll under subclass 242.1 made up of independently yielding
    parts to accommodate work irregular in cross-section.


CLS 144/250.11
TXT Rigid assembly:

    Feed or pressure roll under subclass 250.11 comprised of plural components
    secured together so that there is no relative movement therebetween during
    operation.


CLS 144/250.12
TXT Nonfeeding presser:

    Means under subclass 242.1 intended to hold the work against a work support
    or feeder without causing the work to be advanced.


CLS 144/250.13
TXT Presser roll:

    Roll under the subclass 250.12 which serves only to hold the work from
    springing, lifting, or vibrating and which have no feeding action.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not  provided for elsewhere;
    see the notes thereunder.


CLS 144/250.14
TXT Urged by variable fluid pressure:

    Pressure roll under subclass 250.13 having means to move the roll toward
    the work by hydraulic force, wherein the hydraulic force can be changed.


CLS 144/250.15
TXT Laterally acting:

    Pressure roll under subclass 250.13 intended to engage the workpiece from
    the side.


CLS 144/250.16
TXT Roll:

    Pressure roll under subclass 250.13 including structural details of the
    rolling device.


CLS 144/250.17
TXT Chain:

    Presser under subclass 250.12 comprised of a series of links of material
    joined together to form a strand intended to rest on the work.


CLS 144/250.18
TXT Foot:

    Means under subclass 250.12 wherein the member engaging the work and
    holding it, extends from above; engaging the work with a generally planar
    surface thereof of limited extent.


CLS 144/250.19
TXT Four motion foot:

    Means under subclass 250.18 wherein the foot member is intended to move
    forwardly and backwardly and laterally to and fro.


CLS 144/250.2
TXT Laterally acting:

    Means under subclass 250.12 intended to engage the workpiece from the side.


CLS 144/250.21
TXT With reverse feeder:

    Means under subclass 242.1 combined with means to cause the work to move
    opposite to the direction of infeed.


CLS 144/250.22
TXT Reverse feed starter:

    Means under subclass 250.21 wherein the means to reverse infeed serves to
    effect the beginning of reverse movement.


CLS 144/250.23
TXT L-feed:

    Means under subclass 242.1 wherein the work is advanced in a first
    direction, then in another direction normal to the first direction.


CLS 144/250.24
TXT Turnover:

    Means under subclass 242.1 comprising means to invert the workpiece.


CLS 144/250.25
TXT Lifter:

    Means under subclass 242.1 comprising means to raise the workpiece of a
    work support or carrier.


CLS 144/250.26
TXT Fluid pressure driven:

    Means under subclass 242.1 having means to move the work by hydraulic force


CLS 144/251.1
TXT CUTTER GUARD:

    Structure under the class definition for preventing injury to the workman
    from contact with the cutter of a machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 440.2, 544+, and 814+ for tool guard means.


CLS 144/251.2
TXT Vertical spindle:

    Cutter guards under subclass 251.1 particularly adapted to prevent injury
    to a workman from contact with a cutter that turns about an axis that
    extends up and down.


CLS 144/251.3
TXT Laterally urged:

    Cutter guard under subclass 251.1 intended to be moved to one side for
    access to the cutter.


CLS 144/252.1
TXT CUTTER HOOD OR DUST CONVEYOR:

    Device under the class definition for catching and confining the flying
    shavings or dust from a cutting-machine and for conveying them away from
    the machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, subclasses
    300+ for a device for clearing dust from an abrading machine.

    57,     Textiles: Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 300+ for a
    spinning, twisting, or twining machine combined with a device for catching
    or clearing away lint.


CLS 144/252.2
TXT With sifter, sorter, or separator:

    Device under subclass 252.1 combined with (a) means to prevent passage of
    large material through the hood or conveyor, (b) means to segregate
    material passing therethrough, or (c) means to collect desired material
    from undesired material.


CLS 144/253.1
TXT WORK GUIDE:

    Machine under the class definition including means to be engaged by the
    work, to define the path of work movement to approach a woodworking station.


CLS 144/253.2
TXT Vertical spindle:

    Work guide under subclass 253.1 intended for use with a woodworking machine
    having a tool that turns about an axis extending up and down.


CLS 144/253.3
TXT Roll or collar coaxial with cutter:

    Work guide under subclass 253.1 intended to move the work toward the
    woodworking cutter along the axis of that cutter, which work guide is
    annular in shape and allows therethrough.


CLS 144/253.4
TXT Work held by corner or diagonal work:

    Work guide under subclass 253.1 wherein (a) the work has an edge formed by
    the intersection of two side walls approximately normal to each other
    gripped by the work guide or (b) the work is guidingly supported by a pair
    of intersecting, inclined supports.


CLS 144/253.5
TXT Simultaneous adjustments along length:

    Work guide under subclass 253.6 of elongated configuration with means to
    reposition the guide member at all points along its longitudinal extent at
    the same time.


CLS 144/253.6
TXT Work urged laterally:

    Work guide under subclass 253.1 including means to forcefully engage the
    work from the side thereof to direct the work to the woodworking station.


CLS 144/253.7
TXT Centering:

    Work guide under subclass 253.6 intended to align the work from both sides
    as it approaches the woodworking station.


CLS 144/253.8
TXT Adjustable inclined work-engaging face:

    Work guide under subclass 253.1 comprising a sloping surface intended to
    engage the work, which surface is repositional.


CLS 144/253.9
TXT Side or edge evener:

    Work guide under subclass 253.6 intended to align the edge of the work with
    a portion of the woodworking machine or with an additional workpiece.


CLS 144/253.91
TXT Knife edge:

    Work guide under subclass 253.1 comprising a thin, bladelike member.


CLS 144/254
TXT With dryer:

    Wood-bending machine under the subclass 256.1 including means to stress the
    work to change its shape and including a heating device for drying the wood
    in its stressed shape.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 92+ for a press not elsewhere provided for,
    combined with means for heating the material.


CLS 144/255
TXT Including bending roller:

    Machine under subclass 254 comprising a rotating roller which forces the
    wood against a yielding or an unyielding reaction member (e.g., another
    roller, a belt, or a shoe) to crimp the wood without securing it to a
    former.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 153 for a press of the concurrent pressing and
    conveying type having a roll cooperating with an endless conveyor and
    subclasses 155+ for a roll-type concurrent, conveying, and pressing press,
    particularly subclass 156 for a press in which the roll cooperates with a
    nonrotary pressing surface.


CLS 144/256.1
TXT WOOD BENDING PRESS:

    Apparatus under the class definition including two opposing work engaging
    surfaces and means whereby one surface may be forced toward the other
    surface, whereby a wooden part located between said surfaces is forced
    into, or from, a curved and angular shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    381,    for a method of bending wood.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, for a generic press, particularly subclass 211 for a press
    having a flexible or deformable pressure surface and subclasses 92+ for a
    press having heating, cooling, or drying means.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    580+ for a bonding press or press platen structure, per se.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    subclass 411 for a generic shaping press having opposed shaping surfaces
    for shaping plastic material.


CLS 144/256.2
TXT End compressor:

    Apparatus under subclass 256.1 wherein the two opposing work engaging
    surfaces are arranged to engage the wooden part at either end to force it
    into a curved or angular shape.


CLS 144/256.3
TXT Having opposed contoured rigid platens:

    Apparatus under subclass 256.1 wherein the two opposing work engaging
    surfaces have a nonplanar profile and are formed of a material which does
    not yield during the bending operation, wherein the nonplanar profile is
    imparted to the wooden part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 412+ for a press having nonplanar
    pressing surfaces.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    581 for a surface bonding press having configured pressing faces.


CLS 144/256.4
TXT Three contoured rigid platens:

    Apparatus under subclass 256.3 including a third discrete work-engaging
    surface having a nonplanar profile and formed of a material which does not
    yield during the bending operation, wherein the nonplanar profile is
    imparted to a wooden part.

    (1)     Note.  The third work-engaging surface may operate either
    simultaneously, or sequentially with the first and second surfaces, and may
    work on the same, or a different wooden part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 381 and 394+ for metal bending
    apparatus having three or more relatively movable coating work engaging
    surfaces.


CLS 144/258
TXT WITH HOOP GAUGE:

    Machine under the class definition for stretching a previously-formed hoop
    to a desired size by means of an expansible former.


CLS 144/259
TXT FIXED WOOD BENDING FORM:

    Device under the class definition including a fixed former about which the
    wood is bent and secured until set.

    (1)     Note.  The wood is usually bent around the former by hand.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 127+ for a method or machine for
    wrapping an elongated metal workpiece around a form or core (e.g., to
    produce a helical coil). For a form, per se, refer to subclasses 462+.

    147,    Coopering, subclass 48 for basket-forming.


CLS 144/260
TXT Collapsible form:

    Device under subclass 259 including a knockdown form about which the wood
    is bent and secured until set.


CLS 144/261
TXT End thrust:

    Device under subclass 259 in which sticks of wood are thrust by endwise
    pressure into the form and kept there until the wood has taken a permanent
    set.


CLS 144/262
TXT With sweep arm and roller:

    Device under subclass 259 in which the form is fixed combined with a
    concentrically-arranged swinging beam carries a roller about the form to
    force the wood workpiece into engagement with the form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 217 for a sweep-arm bender provided with
    a work-contacting roller.


CLS 144/263
TXT Strap moved by windlass:

    Device under subclass 266 having a windlass or equivalent device connected
    with an end of the strap to draw the strap against the wood workpiece and
    force it against the form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 211 for presses with a flexible pressure surface,
    not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 144/264
TXT Strap moved by lever:

    Device under subclass 266 having a bar intended to urge the strap against
    the wood workpiece to, in turn, urge the workpiece against the form.


CLS 144/265
TXT Strap moved by screw:

    Device under subclass 266 having a helically ribbed drive member intended
    to urge the strap against the wood workpiece to, in turn, urge the
    workpiece against the form.


CLS 144/266
TXT And cooperating strap:

    Device under subclass 259 wherein the wood workpiece is held to the form by
    means of a strap.

    (1)     Note.  The strap prevents the wood from splintering opposite the
    convex portions of the form.


CLS 144/267
TXT PIVOTAL WOOD BENDING FORM:

    Device under the class definition including a pivotal form which when
    rotated draws the wood there-around.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes a device for bending wood workpiece
    which comprises a lever provided at one end with a form, to which one end
    of the workpiece is secured, and in which the form rests upon the
    workpiece, acting as the fulcrum as the lever is turned to draw the
    workpiece closely against the form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 127+ for shaping of metal work by
    deflecting, including drawing the work about a rotating form.


CLS 144/268
TXT Coiling:

    Device under subclass 267 for bending wood which comprises a revolving
    form, to which one end of the wood to be bent is secured and which, as the
    form is rotated, draws the wood workpiece closely there-around.

    (1)     Note.  The machine may include a flexible apron which presses the
    wood workpiece firmly against the cylinder or former.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 211 for a press having a flexible or deformable
    pressure surface, not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 144/269
TXT WOOD BENDING CLAMP:

    Device under the class definition for securing wood in its bent form until
    it is dried and set.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., for a clamp of general utility.


CLS 144/270
TXT WOOD BENDING, BENDER:

    Device under the class definition comprising structure adapted to engage a
    wood workpiece and exert force thereagainst to stress the workpiece beyond
    its elastic limit, without any severing thereof.


CLS 144/271
TXT WOOD BENDING STEAMER:

    Steam chamber or retort under the class definition especially designed for
    steaming wood to soften it preparatory to bending.


CLS 144/278.1
TXT MACHINE WORK CLAMP:

    Device under the class definition for gripping work upon a moving bed or
    while operated upon by a traveling cutter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclass 19 for a presser for
    holding a file blank upon the bed of a file cutting machine and subclass 20
    for a bed for supporting a file blank for cutting and for a clamp for
    securing said blank to the bed.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 401+ for a cutting machine with a work feed
    gripper and subclasses 451+ for a cutting machine with a work immobilizer.

    269,    Work Holders, for a device for clamping, supporting, or holding an
    article (or articles) in position to be operated on or treated. See notes
    thereunder for other related loci.


CLS 144/278.2
TXT Last or heel:

    Work clamp under subclass 273.1 particularly adapted to engage the form on
    which a shoe is to be shaped or adapted to engage the ground engaging the
    rearmost part of a shoe.


CLS 144/278.3
TXT Vacuum operated:

    Work clamp under subclass 273.1 including means utilizing negative
    atmospheric pressure to cause the clamp to grip the workpiece.


CLS 144/284
TXT CORK (OR BUNG) PRESS:

    Apparatus under the class definition for compressing the end of a cork or
    bung to make it tapered, so as to be more readily inserted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, for a press not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 144/285
TXT COMBINED WORKBENCH AND TOOL CHEST:

    Device under the class definition comprising a tool chest modified to also
    serve as a workbench; also, a cover for a school desk which adapts it to be
    used as a workbench.

    (1)     Note.  The desk cover of this subclass may be provided with a
    receptacle for a tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 349+ for a container for
    a tool or appliance; see the notes thereunder for the loci of other similar
    tool holders.

    312,    Supports: Cabinet Structure, for a tool chest, per se.


CLS 144/286.1
TXT WORKBENCH:

    Device under the class definition comprising a work underlying support.

    (1)     Note.  A carpenter's workbench or sawhorse is included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28.2,   for a pencil sharpening machine with an elongated work holder or
    guide for edge beveling.

    28.8    and 28.9, for a pencil sharpening machine having a movable tool and
    a rotary work holder or guide.

    96,     for a tilting work holder used with a brush boring machine.

    99,     for a work support for use with a wheel hub boring machine.


CLS 144/286.5
TXT Of special shape or structure:

    Workbench under subclass 286.1 of a particular physical shape or
    configuration to perform a prescribed, limited function.


CLS 144/287
TXT Having adjustable stock rest:

    Workbench under subclass 286.1 having an adjustable device applied thereto
    support one end of a workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  The other end of the workpiece is generally held in the
    ordinary bench vise.


CLS 144/288.5
TXT LATH HOLDER:

    Device under the class definition for holding or spacing a lath in position
    to be secured.


CLS 144/306
TXT BENCH DOG:

    Device under the class definition comprising a stop set in a workbench to
    oppose the end-wise movement in one direction of a workpiece (e.g., a board
    or other article) which is being operated upon.


CLS 144/307
TXT Clamping:

    Bench dog under subclass 306 adapted to grip the work which rests upon a
    workbench between two opposing jaws.

    (1)     Note.  One of the gripping jaws may comprise an ordinary bench stop.


CLS 144/308
TXT Removable:

    Bench dog under subclass 306 which is a removable device provided with
    sharp spurs.

    (1)     Note.  The bench dog of this subclass may be set in the desired
    position and secured by driving the spurs into the bench.


CLS 144/329
TXT PROCESS:

    Process under the class definition of working with wood.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, for wood dyeing and bleaching.

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclass 146 for a process of making a wooden
    last or last blank and subclass 147 for a process of making a wooden heel
    or heel blank. (The corresponding apparatus is classified elsewhere in
    Class 144 without regard to the article produced.).

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, for a process of
    treating wood by gas, or vapor, or for drying in any way.

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclass 506 for a method of
    assembling a closure on a portal frame.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 35+ for a method of pressing not elsewhere
    provided for.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, for a
    process or apparatus for laminating, per se. Class 144 takes patents,
    claiming the combination of laminating with significant physical deforming
    of wood by cutting, forming, bending, or compressing.

    201,    Distillation: Processes, Thermolytic, for a process of destructive
    distillation of wood.

    427,    Coating Processes, for a coating process of general application.

    530,    Chemistry: Natural Resins or Derivatives; Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclass 202 for extraction of resins
    from cut wood.


CLS 144/330
TXT Repairing or reconstructing:

    Process under subclass 329 for restoring an article after use has caused
    wear, or for correcting imperfections and including (a) reshaping the
    article or a portion thereof; (b) substituting or adding a preformed part
    or piece; or (c) adding supplemental or original material in a plastic or
    moldable state so as to fill out or otherwise alter the form of the article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclass 146 for a process of repairing a
    shoe last.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 402.01+ for a generic or residual method
    of repairing not elsewhere provided for.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, for a
    process or apparatus for laminating in general and especially see
    subclasses 94+ for a process for repairing an article involving laminating.


CLS 144/331
TXT Bowling pin:

    Process under subclass 330 wherein the article being restored comprises a
    wooden target used in the game of bowling.


CLS 144/332
TXT Plywood, veneer, or board:

    Process under subclass 330 wherein the article being restored comprises
    either (a) several sheets of wood glued or cemented together with the
    grains of adjacent layers arranged at right angles, (b) a thin sheet of
    wood, or (c) a piece of finished dressed lumber.


CLS 144/333
TXT Rattan or bamboo working:

    Process under subclass 329 of working with the wood of a rattan palm or of
    bamboo.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.1+,   for a special machine for working bamboo.

    24.17,  for a special machine for working rattan.


CLS 144/334
TXT Stump removing:

    Process under subclass 329 for removing from the earth the part of a plant
    attached to the root after the trunk has been removed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24.12,  for a stump removing machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclass 195 for a process for digging a stump out of
    the ground.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, for a process or
    apparatus for grinding or tearing material into bits, generally,
    particularly subclasses 101.71+ for a machine of that type combined with a
    support vehicle allowing the machine to be moved about.


CLS 144/335
TXT Timber harvesting or processing:

    Process under subclass 329 including (a) bringing a tree down, (b) removing
    the branches from the trunk of a tree, (c) removing the bark from a tree or
    log without substantial shaping, or (d) treatment or handling incidental to
    any of the above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.1,    for apparatus for timber harvesting or processing.

    363+,   for a method of shaping a felled tree or log with incidental bark
    removal.


CLS 144/336
TXT Tree felling:

    Process under subclass 335 including bringing down a tree.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.1,    for apparatus particularly adapted to both cutting and handling
    timber.

    34.1,   for tree felling apparatus, generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 165+ for a cutting tool which may be capable of
    severing the trunk of a tree from the ground, but without limitation that
    would limit it to timber harvesting or processing (e.g., without means to
    push the trunk of a tree as it is severed from the stump).  More
    particularly, search subclasses 90.1+ for means for cutting a tree by a
    constricting band.  Search subclasses 166.3+ of Class 30 for a saw capable
    of cutting timber; still more specifically, search subclasses 381+ for a
    chain saw and subclasses 388+ for a rotary saw.

    56,     Harvesters, for apparatus for cutting down plants other than trees.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 13+ for a method of cutting, generally,
    including cutting a tree with a saw; also search Class 83 for apparatus for
    cutting, generally, with a base mounted machine, especially subclasses 835+
    for a saw blade, per se, or the component parts thereof.  Note that Class
    83 does not include a limitation of the operation to timber harvesting,
    such as cutting combined with pushing a tree over.


CLS 144/337
TXT And chipping:

    Process under subclass 336 which further includes reducing the felled tree
    to a multitude of small pieces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, for a process or
    apparatus for grinding or tearing material into bits, generally.


CLS 144/338
TXT And delimbing and cutting trunk to length:

    Process under subclass 336 combined with removing the branches from a trunk
    and subdividing the trunk of the tree by severing it transversely.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, for a process of or apparatus for transversely subdividing
    a tree or board without felling.


CLS 144/339
TXT By shearing:

    Process under subclass 336 wherein the tree is brought down by a cutting
    apparatus having opposed cutting edges, or a cutting edge and opposing work
    engager, which approach the trunk from opposite directions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, particularly subclasses 165+ for a randomly manipulated
    cutting device, generally.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 13+ for a process of shearing, generally,
    including cutting a tree trunk from a stump, without additional limitations
    to felling.


CLS 144/340
TXT Debarking:

    Process under subclass 335 including separating from a tree its external
    rind or outer sheath.

    (1)     Note.  The separation may include the cambium layer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207,    for an osier peeler.

    208.1+, for apparatus for rossing bark.


CLS 144/341
TXT Mechanically (e.g., by engaging a friction, impact, or cutting member):

    Process under subclass 340 wherein the external rind or outer sheath is
    separated by physically contacting the tree or log with an instrument.


CLS 144/342
TXT With pretreatmenting:

    Process under subclass 341 combined with subjecting the rind or sheath to
    the action of an agent, environment, or organism to facilitate its removal
    by the bark-removing instrument.


CLS 144/343
TXT Delimbing:

    Process under Class 335 including removing the branches from the trunk of a
    tree.


CLS 144/344
TXT Securing:

    Process under subclass 329 which includes (a) fastening one work part to
    another or (b) fastening one portion of a work part to another portion of
    the same part.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are processes for joining parts
    by a metal working operation, and processes for joining a wooden part to a
    nonwooden part and working the latter.

    (2)     Note.  At least one work part being secured is made of wood or
    woodlike material (e.g., made from a composition of wood chips).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 428+ for an assembly or joining method
    involving metal working, subclasses 592+ for assembly combined with working
    of a nonwooden part, and subclasses 700+ for apparatus for securing two
    distinct elements together.


CLS 144/345
TXT And cutting or shaping:

    Process under subclass 344 combined with physically penetrating a wooden
    part without substantial material flow, producing a change in dimension or
    contour of a wooden part.

    (1)     Note.  The cutting or shaping may occur before, during, or after
    fastening.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 592+ for a process of assembling two work
    parts (one of which may be wood) and working the nonwooden part.


CLS 144/346
TXT Surface bonding:

    Process under subclass 345 wherein the work parts are fastened by cement,
    glue, or other adhesive, or by use of cohesive characteristics of the work
    parts to effect an autogenous bond.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    250+ for a process of laminating nonwooden parts combined with cutting, or
    a process of laminating wooden parts combined with nominal cutting, wherein
    the process is not peculiar to wood working.


CLS 144/347
TXT Of interengaging work parts (e.g., dovetail):

    Process under subclass 346 wherein a portion of a first work part is
    configured to fit within a portion of a second work part.


CLS 144/348
TXT Including heat applying:

    Process under subclass 346 wherein heat is applied to a bonding agent or a
    wood part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    364,    for a wood cutting process including heating the wood.

    380,    for a wood shaping operation including heating the wood.


CLS 144/349
TXT With bending concurrent or subsequent to bonding:

    Process under subclass 346 combined with forcing the work parts into or
    from a curved or angular shape while the adhesive is setting or after the
    adhesive has set.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    381,    for a method of bending wood, per se.


CLS 144/350
TXT Cutting or shaping subsequent to bonding:

    Process under subclass 346 wherein physically penetrating or producing a
    change in dimension or contour of a wooden part or portion occurs after the
    parts have been fastened by adhesive.


CLS 144/351
TXT Followed by additional bonding:

    Process under subclass 350 wherein physically penetrating or producing a
    change in dimension or contour of the bonded work parts is followed by
    fastening two work parts, at least one of which is a product of the shaping
    or cutting operation, using cement, glue, or other adhesive, or by use of
    cohesive characteristics of the work parts that effect an autogenous bond.


CLS 144/352
TXT Including pressure applying:

    Process under subclass 346 wherein the bond between the work parts is fixed
    or stabilized by subjecting the area of the bond to compressive force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    349,    for a process including applying pressure to bend the bonded wood
    parts (the adhesive need not be dried before application of the bending
    pressure).


CLS 144/353
TXT By separate mechanical fastener:

    Process under subclass 345 wherein the work parts or portions thereof are
    fixed in relative position by a discrete securing element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 428+ for an assembling or joining method
    not involving woodworking and not otherwise provided for.


CLS 144/354
TXT Interengaging work parts:

    Process under subclass 345 wherein a portion of a first work part is
    configured to fit within a portion of a second work part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67+,    for a mortising machine.

    75,     for a dovetailing machine.


CLS 144/355
TXT Shaping by cutting:

    Process under subclass 345 wherein a dimension or the contour of a wood
    part is altered by physically penetrating and removing a portion or section
    of the wood part.


CLS 144/356
TXT Including monitoring of operation:

    Process under subclass 329 wherein either the process or an indicator is
    controlled by means which senses a condition or occurrence in a work part,
    product, machine, or environment.

    (1)     Note.  A process performed by a cyclically operating machine is not
    classified in this subclass on that basis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 72+ for a generic cutting apparatus having
    means to monitor and control the operation and subclasses 360+ for a
    generic cutting apparatus having its operation controlled by detector means
    responsive to the work. See subclasses 13+ for a generic cutting process
    involving monitoring and control.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for a photocell circuit or
    apparatus.

    356,    Optics: Measuring and Testing, for an optical system, per se, for
    measuring or determining a particular dimension or condition of the work or
    product.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, for generically
    claimed electrical data processing apparatus, and particular applications
    of those apparatus, when the operation to which the data processor or
    computer is applied is only nominally recited.


CLS 144/357
TXT By means which determines dimension of work:

    Process under subclass 356 wherein the process, or indicator is controlled
    by means which measures the size of the work part along a particular
    direction.

    (1)     Note.  A specific dimension must be determined for placement in
    this subclass. Therefore, processes employing static means which allow only
    those pieces over or under a particular size to pass are excluded.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics: Measuring and Testing, for an optical system, per se, for
    measuring a particular dimension of the work or product.


CLS 144/358
TXT Embossing or imprinting:

    Process under subclass 329 on impressing, indenting, or otherwise relieving
    a wood surface for ornamentation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclass 32 for a process of forming characters or
    designs by embossing.


CLS 144/359
TXT Mechanical cutting or shaping:

    Process under subclass 329 for physically penetrating, without substantial
    material flow, or producing a change in dimension or contour of a wooden
    part, with or without material removal, by relative movement of a tool and
    workpiece.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 592+ for a process of mechanically
    shaping material other than wood, not otherwise provided for.


CLS 144/360
TXT Combined cutting and shaping:

    Process under subclass 359 including physically penetrating the material to
    effect a change in dimension or contour of a wooden part, and including an
    operation which effects a change in dimension or contour of the wooden part
    without material removal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for a machine for cutting and forming wood.


CLS 144/361
TXT Fiber working or reorienting:

    Process under subclass 359 including subjecting the wooden part to a force
    which, as claimed, acts in a specific relation to the fiber or fiber
    structure within the wooden part or causes relative motion between the
    fibers in the wooden part.

    (1)     Note.  For placement in this subclass, a claim should contain a
    limitation such as crushing, mashing, tearing, or separating the fibers.


CLS 144/362
TXT Roller movement parallel to grain:

    Process under subclass 361 wherein the wooden part is subjected to a fiber
    reorienting force through rolling contact with a rotating annular or
    cylindrical element which translates relative to the wooden part in the
    same direction as the fibers are originally oriented in the wooden part.


CLS 144/363
TXT Cutting:

    Process under subclass 359 for physically penetrating a wooden part without
    substantial material flow.


CLS 144/364
TXT Including heating, cooling, or fluid applying:

    Process under subclass 363 including removing or applying heat to the tool
    or wooden part, or of contacting the tool or wooden part with a liquid or
    gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    348,    for a method of bonding wooden parts combined with cutting, or
    shaping, and heating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 14+ for a generic cutting method including a
    preparatory, or simultaneous treating the work.


CLS 144/365
TXT Turning, boring, or drilling:

    Process under subclass 363 wherein the material is removed by (a) reducing
    the diameter of the wooden part by engaging the periphery thereof with a
    tool and rotating the work, or circumrotating the tool about the work or
    (b) enlarging the cross-section of an existing hole by a relatively
    rotating cutter or (c) producing a hole by a relatively rotating cutter.


CLS 144/366
TXT Including splitting:

    Process under subclass 363 wherein the wood is penetrated by a nontoothed
    tool which is forced into the wood and forces two portions apart.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193+,   for splitting apparatus.


CLS 144/367
TXT Plural discrete diverse cutting operations:

    Process under subclass 363 including two different and individually
    distinct operations or steps for penetrating a wooden part.

    (1)     Note.  A method of chipping using a rotating tool having plural
    diverse cutting edges (e.g., a first set of cutting edges for scoring
    alternately arranged with a second set of cutting edges for slicing)
    whereby each chip is formed by two successive cuts is not considered to
    represent individually distinct cutting operations.

    (2)     Note.  The operations must be accomplished by different cutters or
    cutter combinations, or if similar cutters are employed, they must shape
    the wood differently.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.1+,   for combined woodworking.


CLS 144/368
TXT Including grooving:

    Process under subclass 367 including removing material from the wooden part
    to form a channel of limited depth along the surface.

    (1)     Note.  Cutting a "V" notch in a log prior to sawing the log into
    one or more boards is not considered to be "grooving" as defined above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370,    for a method including chipping a "V" notch in the surface of a log
    prior to sawing boards therefrom.

    371,    for a method of grooving, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 880 for a generic grooving process.


CLS 144/369
TXT Including slicing, slitting, chipping, or planing:

    Process under subclass 367 wherein one of the discrete operations involves
    (a) severing a thin flat portion from the wooden part by forcing a knife
    through the wood, (b) forming a long narrow cut or opening by forcing a
    cutting edge through the wood, (c) reducing the wooden part or a portion
    thereof to a multitude of small pieces, or (d) smoothing or shaping the
    wooden part by shaving a surface thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    363,    for a process of slicing or slitting, per se.


CLS 144/370
TXT Chipping:

    Process under subclass 369 wherein one of the discrete operations comprises
    reducing the wooden part or a portion thereof to a multitude of small
    pieces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    337,    for a method of felling a tree and reducing it to chips.


CLS 144/371
TXT Routing or grooving:

    Process under subclass 363 including relieving a surface of a wooden part
    by traversing parallel to the surface a rotating cutter which has a cutting
    edge formed on its periphery, or of forming a channel of limited depth
    across a surface of the wooden part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136,    for grooving apparatus.

    368,    for a woodworking method including plural discrete diverse cutting
    operations, one of which is grooving.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 880 for a generic grooving process.


CLS 144/372
TXT Using template or pattern:

    Process under subclass 363 wherein a gauge or form is used which
    corresponds in shape to the desired profile of a product and along which a
    cutter or an element attached to the cutter is translated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144+,   for a woodworking machine employing a template or pattern.


CLS 144/373
TXT Chipping or planing:

    Process under subclass 363 including either (a) reducing the wooden part or
    a portion thereof to a multitude of small pieces or (b) smoothing or
    shaping the wooden part by shaving the surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114.1+, for a wood planer generally.

    337,    for a tree felling method including chipping the felled tree.

    370,    for a woodworking method including two discrete, diverse cutting
    operations, at least one of which employs a chipper.


CLS 144/374
TXT Using ganged cutting discs:

    Process under subclass 373 wherein the work is reduced to a multitude of
    small pieces, or is smoothed or shaped using a plurality of discs, each of
    which is provided with a cutting edge on its periphery, and which are
    arranged axially side by side along a rotating shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237,    for a woodworking cutter comprising ganged discs.


CLS 144/375
TXT Using cylindrical tool:

    Process under subclass 373 wherein the work is reduced to a multitude of
    pieces, or is smoothed or shaped by a cutter whose periphery defines a
    cylinder having at least one cutting edge formed or located thereon.


CLS 144/376
TXT Longitudinal sawing:

    Process under subclass 363 wherein the wooden part is penetrated by
    relative movement between the wooden part and a thin cutting tool in the
    direction of the length of the work, wherein the thin cutting tool is of
    the type provided with a plurality of teeth along its edge which are caused
    to successively engage the wood to form a kerf as the tool progresses along
    the wooden part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 13+ for a generically claimed sawing process
    (i.e., not specifically for sawing wood), especially subclasses 44+ for
    longitudinally sawing combined with transverse sawing.


CLS 144/377
TXT Longitudinally tapered work or product:

    Process under subclass 376 wherein the width or thickness of the wooden
    part varies linearly along the length of the wooden part either before or
    after the sawing operation.


CLS 144/378
TXT Log or cant sawing:

    Process under subclass 376 wherein the wood part comprises an unshaped
    length of timber or an arc segment thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 703+ for a cutting machine with means to
    sequentially convey a workpiece there past such that the workpiece is
    progressively diminished.


CLS 144/379
TXT Transverse sawing:

    Process under subclass 363 wherein the wooden part is penetrated by
    relative movement between the wooden part and a thin cutting tool in the
    direction of the work, wherein the thin cutting tool is of the type
    provided with a plurality of teeth along its edge which are caused to
    successively engage the wood to form a kerf as the tool progresses across
    the wooden part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 166.3+ for a randomly manipulated saw of
    general utility.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 13+ for a generically claimed sawing process
    (i.e., not specifically for sawing wood), especially subclass 42 for a
    method including repetitive transverse sawing.


CLS 144/380
TXT Including heating, cooling, or fluid applying:

    Process under subclass 359 including removing or applying heat to the tool
    or wooden part, or contacting the tool or wooden part with a liquid or gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    342,    for a method of pretreating bark prior to its removal.

    364,    for a method including cutting combined with heating, cooling, or
    fluid treatment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 14+ for a generic cutting method including a
    preparatory or simultaneous step of treating the work.


CLS 144/381
TXT Bending:

    Process under subclass 359 including forcing the wooden part into or from a
    curved or angular shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254+,   for wood bending apparatus.


CLS 144/382
TXT WITH USE OF CONTROL MEANS ENERGIZED IN RESPONSE TO ACTIVATOR STIMULATED BY
    CONDITION SENSOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means, or a step of
    using means, for (a) detecting any of the following characteristics: a
    state or property, a change in a state or property, or the occurrence of a
    predetermined event, in any of the following:  the work*, the product of a
    machine, the machine itself, any part of the machine, or the environment of
    the machine affecting the operation thereof; (b) initiating (as a direct
    result of such detection) a force or impulse other than that generated or
    transmitted by the detecting means; and (c) regulating or modifying (as a
    direct result of such initiation) the operation of said machine.

    (1)     Note.  This definition requires a patent to claim at least four
    instrumentalities (or the use thereof) for original placement herein.  One
    of these must be a woodworking machine or a device (e.g., work feeder, work
    heater, product handler) necessary to the proximate function of
    woodworking.  The other three are (a) a sensor (e.g., photocell system,
    trip lever, pressure diaphragm) to detect a condition as stated in (a) of
    the definition, (b) an activator (e.g., an element to make or break an
    electric circuit, a clutch, a valve) to cause a release of energy more
    than, or different from, that accounted for by mere change in condition
    (e.g., position or movement) of the sensor while it is functioning, and (c)
    a controller (e.g., a motor or driver for said machine or device) to change
    or cause the operation of said machine or device.  Therefore, a cam
    follower (or sensor) directly linked to a controller, whereby follower
    movement directly effects controller movement, is not proper subject matter
    for this subclass due to lack of an activator as defined.  On the other
    hand, disclosure of a cam follower that makes and breaks an electrical
    circuit that energizes a motor may be placed herein.

    (2)     Note.  A voluntary act of the person operating the machine is not
    proper subject matter for this subclass.  For example, disclosure of an
    on/off switch on a woodworking machine manipulated by an operative to start
    and/or stop the machine (even though the switch initiates a release of
    energy), should be considered for subclass 1, but is not classified herein.

    (3)     Note.  The machine that is regulated by the control means is not
    limited to a woodworking machine of this class.  It can be another machine
    associated with the woodworker if the claim reciting the other machine and
    woodworker is acceptable for original placement into Class 72.

    (4)     Note.  The control system disclosed in the patents of this and
    indented subclasses are similar in concept to control systems of other
    classes, particularly Class 226, Advancing Material of Indeterminate
    Length, and Class 83, Cutting.  The total operations and the claimed
    combinations are, of course, different, but the control systems, per se,
    found in Classes 226 and 83 are usually analogous to those herein, and may
    be applicable to the machines of Class 72.  In the "SEARCH CLASS" notes for
    the subclasses indented hereunder, reference to the (4) Note indicated that
    the other class and subclass should be considered because the control
    system, per se, of a patent in the other class may be similar to a control
    system, per se, of Class 72.  The notes to Class 83, subclass 399,
    summarize all the subclasses in Class 83 pertaining to "control" subclasses
    therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 72+ for a cutting machine with means to monitor
    and control that machine.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, see (4) Note above.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses
    474.01+ for a control system for a machining device.  Note that the
    combination of a woodworking machine with a control system is to be found
    in Class 144.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    subclasses 135+ for apparatus to shape or reshape nonmetals combined with
    control means responsive to, or actuated by, means sensing or detecting a
    condition; see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 144/383
TXT Including use of sensor responsive to information carried by removable
    auxiliary record (e.g., recording disk, tape, or card):

    Subject matter under subclass 382 including using a separate device
    inserted into, attached to, or applied to, the machine, and detecting
    physical characteristics of the device to control the operation of the
    machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    66,     Textiles: Knitting, subclasses 215+ for knitting by use of a
    pattern-responsive control means which may be removable from a knitting
    device.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 76.1+ for cutting with use of a control means
    responsive to a replaceable information program.  Also, see the (4) Note
    under the definition of Class 72, subclass 382.

    139,    Textiles: Weaving, subclasses 317+ for pattern-responsive control
    means.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclass 9; see the (4)
    Note under the definition of Class 72, subclass 382.


CLS 144/384
TXT Including plural sensors or sensor responsive to comparison between plural
    conditions:

    Subject matter under subclass 383 including using (a) multiple detecting
    means to discern a corresponding number of characteristics or (b) a single
    detecting means to discern multiple characteristics; in either case, then
    comparing the characteristics and generating a resultant impulse
    representing the similarities or differences between the detected
    characteristics, whereby the regulating means governs the machine in
    accordance with the resultant impulse to correct incipient errors in the
    machine or to maintain operation of the machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    391,    for other woodworking including multiple sensing with comparison of
    impulses from the sensors.

    403+,   423 and 425, for woodworking including multiple sensing but without
    comparison of impulses from the sensors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 72+ for "self-regulating" or "feedback" control
    means; see the (4) Note under the definition of Class 72, subclass 382.


CLS 144/385
TXT Utilizing "memory" to store information on tool or tool-linked part:

    Subject matter under subclass 384 including use of structure having an
    impressible media capable of holding data which is part of the
    instrumentality for engaging the work for woodworking or is fixedly
    attached thereto.


CLS 144/386
TXT Sensing "pattern":

    Subject matter under subclass 384 including using a contoured guide engaged
    by a traversing follower connected to a woodworking tool such that the tool
    follows a path identical to the contours of the guide as the tool engages
    the wood for working thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The term "pattern" (in the title) refers to a model or
    prototype insertable into and removable from the machine and having a shape
    or configuration exactly similar or proportional to the shape or
    configuration of the desired product.  A cam or eccentric or other object
    which is distorted with respect to the desired product is not considered to
    be a pattern, and control disclosures of such objects may be found in other
    subclasses appropriate to the woodworker.


CLS 144/387
TXT Sensing work or product (e.g., by X-ray):

    Subject matter under subclass 384 including detecting a characteristic of
    the work* for, or the product* of, the machine.

    (1)     Note.  Sensing a "Blank Holder"* or a work* holder is included
    herein.

    (2)     Note.  A woodworking tool* is not considered to be a "detector";
    therefore, detecting a tool* in direct engagement with the work is not
    considered to be detecting the "work or product" for placement in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    392+    and 402+, for other control by sensing of work or product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 79+, 211, 286+, 358+, and 360+ for a control
    system responsive to work for, or product of, a cutting machine; see the
    (4) Note under the definition of Class 72, subclass 382.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 10+ for a
    control system responsive to work for feeding the work; see the (4) Note
    under the definition of Class 72, subclass 382.


CLS 144/388
TXT Sensing lead end or tail end:

    Subject matter under subclass 387 including detecting the forward edge or
    the trailing edge of moving work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    397,    407 and 414, for other sensing of the lead end or tail end of work
    or product.


CLS 144/389
TXT Sensing cross sectional dimension:

    Subject matter under subclass 387 including moving the work in a given
    direction and detecting the extent of the work at right angles to such
    direction.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes patents disclosing the measurement of
    work thickness by electrostatic, magnetic, or radiant energy (e.g.,
    "X-ray") detecting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    398+,   408+ and 416+, for other sensing of cross sectional dimension of
    work or product.


CLS 144/391
TXT Including plural sensors or sensor responsive to comparison between plural
    conditions:

    Subject matter under subclass 382 including using (a) multiple detecting
    means to discern a corresponding number of characteristics or (b) a single
    detecting means to discern multiple characteristics; in either case, then
    comparing the characteristics and generating a resultant impulse
    representing the similarities or differences between the detected
    characteristics, whereby the regulating means governs the machine in
    accordance with the resultant impulse to correct incipient errors in the
    machine or to maintain operation of the machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    384+,   for woodworking including multiple sensing with comparison of
    impulses from the sensors.

    403+,   423 and 425, for woodworking including multiple sensing but without
    comparison of impulses from the sensors.


CLS 144/392
TXT Sensing work or product (e.g., X-ray):

    Subject matter under subclass 391 including detecting a characteristic of
    the work* for, or the product* of, the machine.

    (1)     Note.  Sensing a "Blank Holder"* or a work* holder is included
    herein.

    (2)     Note.  A woodworking tool* is not considered to be a "detector";
    therefore, detecting a tool* in direct engagement with the work is not
    considered to be detecting the "work or product" for placement in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    387+    and 402+, for other control by the sensing of work or product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 79+, 211, 286+, 358+, and 360+ for a control
    system responsive to work for, or product of, a cutting machine; see the
    (4) Note under the definition of Class 72, subclass 382.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 10+ for a
    control system responsive to work for feeding the work; see the (4) Note
    under the definition of Class 72, subclass 382.


CLS 144/393
TXT Sensing performance of work or product:

    Subject matter under subclass 392 comprising use of detecting means
    responsive to the capability of the work* or product* when subjected to its
    intended use.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a woodworking device for shaping an
    aircraft wing wherein air is passed over the wing to determine turbulence
    generated thereby and wherein the woodworking device is modified
    accordingly.


CLS 144/394
TXT Work and product:

    Subject matter under subclass 392 including detecting a characteristic of
    the work* for the machine and detecting a characteristic of the product* of
    the same machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404,    for other sensing of both work and product.


CLS 144/395
TXT Sensing temperature:

    Subject matter under subclass 392 including detecting the degree of heat
    content in the work* or the product*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    405     and 412, for other sensing of temperature.


CLS 144/396
TXT Sensing slack or tension (e.g., by use of dancer):

    Subject matter under subclass 392 including (a) detecting the lateral
    movement of a flexible portion of an elongated workpiece or (b) detecting
    the degree of tautness in an elongated workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  A typical disclosure found in this subclass comprises a
    system including two woodworking mills through which the work passes
    sequentially.  In the space between the woodworking mills, the work is
    engaged by a detecting means urged against the work along a line
    substantially at right angles to the direction of work movement.  The
    position of said means along that line indicates the tautness of the work
    passing between the mills, and this position is used to control the
    tautness.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    406     and 413, for other sensing of slack or tension in work or product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclass 44 for a
    "dancer" controlling feed of material; see the (4) Note under the
    definition of Class 72, subclass 382.


CLS 144/397
TXT Sensing lead end or tail end:

    Subject matter under subclass 392 including detecting the forward edge or
    the trailing edge of moving work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    388,    407 and 414, for other sensing of the lead end or tail end of work
    or product.


CLS 144/398
TXT Sensing cross sectional dimension:

    Subject matter under subclass 392 including moving the work in a given
    direction and detecting the extent of the work at right angles to such
    direction.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes patents disclosing the measurement of
    work thickness by electrostatic, magnetic, or radiant energy (e.g.,
    "X-ray") detecting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    388,    408+ and 416+, for other sensing of cross sectional dimension of
    work or product.


CLS 144/399
TXT Sensing thickness:

    Subject matter under subclass 398 wherein the work includes a greater and a
    lesser lateral dimension and wherein the detecting discerns the extent of
    the lesser dimension.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    410,    for other sensing of work thickness to control a metal woodworking
    machine.


CLS 144/400
TXT Sensing tool or tool-linked part:

    Subject matter under subclass 392 including detecting a condition of a
    tool* or of a machine element connected to the tool for movement therewith.

    (1)     Note.  Original placement of a patent in this or a subclass
    indented hereunder requires that the machine element partakes of tool
    movement, either directly or proportionately, whether the element is fixed
    to the tool or connected thereto by a linkage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401,    411 and 420+, for other sensing of a tool or tool-linked part.


CLS 144/401
TXT Sensing tool or tool-linked part:

    Subject matter under subclass 391 including detecting a condition of a
    tool* or of a machine element connected to the tool for movement therewith.

    (1)     Note.  Original placement of a patent in this or a subclass
    indented hereunder requires that the machine element partakes of tool
    movement, either directly or proportionately, whether the element is fixed
    to the tool or connected thereto by a linkage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400,    411 and 420+, for other sensing of a tool or tool-linked part.


CLS 144/402
TXT Sensing work or product (e.g., by X-ray):

    Subject matter under subclass 382 including detecting a characteristic of
    the work* for, or the product* of, the machine.

    (1)     Note.  Sensing a "Blank Holder"* or a work* holder is included
    herein.

    (2)     Note.  A woodworking tool* is not considered to be a "detector";
    therefore, detecting a tool* in direct engagement with the work is not
    considered to be detecting the "work or product" for placement in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    387+    and 392+, for other control by sensing of work or product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 79+, 211, 286+, 358+, and 360+ for a control
    system responsive to work for, or product of, a cutting machine; see the
    (4) Note under the definition of Class 72, subclass 382.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 10+ for a
    control system responsive to work for feeding the work; see the (4) Note
    under the definition of Class 72, subclass 382.


CLS 144/403
TXT Including plural sensors or sensor responsive to plural conditions:

    Subject matter under subclass 402 including using (a) multiple detecting
    means to discern a corresponding number of characteristics or (b) a single
    detecting means to discern multiple characteristics.

    (1)     Note.  The detecting means fitting part (a) of this definition
    differ from those of subclass 8.1 in that those of this subclass are not
    necessarily related, nor is a comparison made between the impulses
    generated thereby. The detecting means fitting part (b) of this definition
    may, for example, detect the leading and the trailing edges of a workplace,
    or detect the presence and the temperature of a workplace.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    384+    and 391+, for woodworking including multiple detecting but with
    comparing of the impulses received.

    423     and 425, for woodworking including multiple sensing without
    comparison of impulses from the sensors.


CLS 144/404
TXT Work and product:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 including detecting a characteristic of
    the work* for the machine and detecting a characteristic of the product* of
    the same machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    394,    for other sensing of both work and product.


CLS 144/405
TXT Sensing temperature:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 including detecting the degree of heat
    content in the work* or the product*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    395     and 412, for other sensing of temperature.


CLS 144/406
TXT Sensing slack or tension (e.g., by use of dancer):

    Subject matter under subclass 403 including (a) detecting the lateral
    movement of a flexible portion of an elongated workpiece or (b) detecting
    the degree of tautness in an elongated workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  A typical disclosure found in this subclass comprises a
    system including two woodworking mills through which the work passes
    sequentially.  In the space between the mills, the work is engaged by a
    detecting means urged against the work along a line substantially at right
    angles to the direction of work movement.  The position of said means along
    that line indicates the tautness of the work passing between the mills, and
    this position is used to control the tautness.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    396     and 413, for other sensing of slack or tension in work or product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclass 44 for a
    "dancer" controlling feed of material; see the (4) Note under the
    definition of Class 72, subclass 382.


CLS 144/407
TXT Sensing lead end or tail end:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 including detecting the forward edge or
    the trailing edge of moving work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    388,    397 and 414, for other sensing of the lead end or tail end of work
    or product.


CLS 144/408
TXT Sensing cross sectional dimension:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 including moving the work in a given
    direction, and detecting the extent of the work at right angles to such
    direction.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes patents disclosing the measurement of
    work thickness by electrostatic, magnetic, or radiant energy (e.g.,
    "X-ray") detecting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    388,    398+ and 416+, for other sensing of cross sectional dimension of
    work or product.


CLS 144/409
TXT Sensing flatness (e.g., crown):

    Subject matter under subclass 408 wherein the work includes a greater and a
    lesser lateral dimension and wherein the detecting discerns the planar
    characteristic of one of the greater surfaces.


CLS 144/410
TXT Sensing thickness:

    Subject matter under subclass 408 wherein the work includes a greater and a
    lesser lateral dimension and wherein the detecting discerns the extent of
    the lesser dimension.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    399,    for other sensing of work thickness to control a woodworking
    machine.


CLS 144/411
TXT Sensing tool or tool-linked part:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 including detecting a condition of a
    tool* or of a machine element connected to the tool for movement therewith.

    (1)     Note.  Original placement of a patent in this or a subclass
    indented hereunder requires that the machine element partakes of tool
    movement, either directly or proportionately, whether the element is fixed
    to the tool or connected thereto by a linkage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400,    401 and 420+, for other sensing of a tool or tool-linked part.


CLS 144/412
TXT Sensing temperature:

    Subject matter under subclass 402 including detecting the degree of heat
    content in the work* or the product*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    395     and 405, for other sensing of temperature.


CLS 144/413
TXT Sensing slack or tension (e.g., by use of dancer):

    Subject matter under subclass 402 including (a) detecting the lateral
    movement of a flexible portion of an elongated workpiece or (b) detecting
    the degree of tautness in an elongated workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  A typical disclosure found in this subclass comprises a
    system including two woodworking mills through which the work passes
    sequentially.  In the space between the mills, the work is engaged by a
    detecting means urged against the work along a line substantially at right
    angles to the direction of work movement.  The position of said means along
    that line indicates the tautness of the work passing between the mills, and
    this position is used to control the tautness.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    396     and 406, for other sensing of slack or tension in work or product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclass 44 for a
    "dancer" controlling feed of material; see the (4) Note under the
    definition of Class 72, subclass 382.


CLS 144/414
TXT Sensing lead end or tail end:

    Subject matter under subclass 402 including detecting the forward edge or
    the trailing edge of moving work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    388,    397 and 407, for other sensing of the lead end or tail end of work
    or product.


CLS 144/415
TXT Including sensor responsive to infeeder or outpuller:

    Subject matter under subclass 402 wherein the detector senses the device
    for causing material to move into or away from the woodworking device.


CLS 144/416
TXT Sensing cross sectional dimension:

    Subject matter under subclass 402 including moving the work in a given
    direction and detecting the extent of the work at right angles to such
    direction.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes patents disclosing the measurement of
    work thickness by electrostatic, magnetic, or radiant energy (e.g.,
    "X-ray") detecting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    388,    398+ and 408+, for other sensing of cross sectional dimension of
    work or product.


CLS 144/417
TXT To control operation of deformer directly by sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 416 including use of a detector means, an
    initiator, and a regulator which governs or causes the operation of the
    woodworking device as the immediate result of detecting the lateral extent
    of the work.


CLS 144/418
TXT Including use of sensor responsive to energy input to tool or tool driver:

    Subject matter under subclass 382 including detecting a variation in the
    power required to drive a woodworking tool*.


CLS 144/419
TXT Sensing pressure of tool actuating fluid:

    Subject matter under subclass 418 wherein the tool is driven by a pneumatic
    or hydraulic system including detecting the force per unit of area in that
    system.


CLS 144/420
TXT Sensing tool or tool-linked part:

    Subject matter under subclass 382 including detecting a condition of a
    tool* or of a machine element connected to the tool for movement.

    (1)     Note.  Original placement of a patent in this or a subclass
    indented hereunder requires that the machine element partakes of tool
    movement, either directly or proportionately, whether the element is fixed
    to the tool or is connected thereto by a linkage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400,    401 and 411, for other sensing of a tool or tool-linked part.


CLS 144/421
TXT To control predetermined sequence of operating movements (e.g., of one tool
    operating on work):

    Subject matter under subclass 420 including regulating the succession of
    function or movement of one or more operating assemblages.

    (1)     Note.  The term "operating assemblage" is intended to include a
    tool, or any element or group of elements, acting together, which performs
    an action or produces an effect upon the work or product; or which causes a
    tool movement necessary to working of the work; or which is ancillary to a
    woodworking instrumentality.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is the locus of patents disclosing control of
    a sequence of operations or movements of a single operating assemblage. For
    example, a disclosure wherein a tool advances toward and retracts from the
    work, under control of switches positioned at the limits of travel of the
    tool, would be placed herein.  See subclasses below for control of
    different mechanisms.


CLS 144/422
TXT Of different operating assemblages:

    Subject matter under subclass 421 including regulating the functioning of
    at least two disparate operating assemblages.

    (1)     Note.  See the (1) Note under subclass 421 for an explanation of
    "operating assemblage."

     (2)    Note.  This subclass is the locus of patents disclosing control of
    a sequence of operations performed by different operating assemblages
    responsive to a tool.  For example, a device wherein a woodworking tool
    strikes a limit switch causing a cutter to cut the product of the tool,
    and/or causing a handler to discharge the product from the machine, would
    be found in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    429,    for woodworking generally wherein the operation of a plurality of
    operating assemblages is responsive to a device other than a woodworking
    tool.


CLS 144/423
TXT Including plural sensors or sensor responsive to plural conditions:

    Subject matter under subclass 422 including using (a) multiple detecting
    means to discern a corresponding number of characteristics or (b) a single
    detecting means to discern multiple characteristics.

    (1)     Note.  The detecting means fitting part (a) of this definition
    differ from those of subclass 8.1 in that those of this subclass are not
    necessarily related, nor is a comparison made between the impulses
    generated thereby. The detecting means fitting part (b) of this definition
    may, for example, detect the leading and the trailing edges of a workplace,
    or detect the presence and the temperature of a workplace.

    (1)     Note.  The detecting means fitting part (a) of this definition
    differ from those of subclass 391 in that those of this subclass are not
    necessarily related, nor is a comparison made between the impulses
    generated thereby. The detecting means fitting part (b) of this definition
    may, for example, detect the leading and the trailing edges of a workplace,
    or detect the presence of, and the temperature of, a workplace.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    384+,   for woodworking including multiple detecting but with comparing of
    the impulses received; see the (1) Note above.

    403+    and 425, for woodworking including multiple sensing without
    comparison of impulses from the sensors.


CLS 144/424
TXT Including work handling or product handling:

    Subject matter under subclass 422 including regulating an operating
    assemblage which moves, guides, or affects the motion of work* or product*.


CLS 144/425
TXT Including plural sensors or sensor responsive to plural conditions:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 including using (a) multiple detecting
    means to discern a corresponding number of characteristics or (b) a single
    detecting means to discern multiple characteristics.

    (1)     Note.  The detecting means fitting part (a) of this definition
    differ from those of subclass 8.1 in that those of this subclass are not
    necessarily related, nor is a comparison made between the impulses
    generated thereby. The detecting means fitting part (b) of this definition
    may, for example, detect the leading and the trailing edges of a workplace,
    or detect the presence and the temperature of a workplace.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    384+,   for woodworking including multiple detecting but with comparison of
    the impulses received.

    403+,   423 and 425, for woodworking including multiple sensing without
    comparison of impulses from the sensors.


CLS 144/426
TXT To control operation of interlock:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 provided with a mechanism to prevent
    movement of an element or a portion of a machine, and further provided with
    a device for disabling the movement-preventing mechanism comprising
    regulating the disabling device.


CLS 144/427
TXT To stop machine:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 comprising terminating or tending to
    terminate the operation in response to a predetermined position of a tool.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is not intended to include, for original
    placement, a patent claiming an operation wherein a cam surface (on or
    linked to a tool) directly causes movement of a clutch element to disengage
    a tool from its drive.  Such a patent lacks the teaching of an initiating
    means and will be placed on the basis of the woodworking structure and
    found in this subclass (427) only as a cross-reference.


CLS 144/428
TXT Sensing force on tool:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 including detecting the pressure applied
    to the tool or tool-linked part.


CLS 144/429
TXT By sensing hydraulic pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 428 including detecting the pressure on the
    tool by a detector responsive to liquid head.


CLS 144/430
TXT To control different operating assemblages:

    Subject matter under subclass 382 provided with a plurality of diverse
    operating assemblages wherein the regulating means governs the functioning
    of the various operating assemblages.

    (1)     Note.  The term "operating assemblage" is intended to include a
    tool, or any element or group of elements, acting together, which performs
    an action or produces an effect upon the work or product; or which causes a
    tool movement necessary to work the wood; or which is ancillary to a
    woodworking instrumentality.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is the locus of woodworking including control
    of a sequence of operations performed by different operating assemblages
    except those responsive to tool movement (for which see subclass 422).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    422,    for woodworking including control of a sequence of operations
    performed by different operating assemblages including those responsive to
    tool movement; see the (2) Note above.


CLS 147/
TTL COOPERING

CLS 147/
TXT Includes machines which are used exclusively in the manufacture of wooden
    barrels, fruit-boxes, baskets, or crates.  Coopering does not include
    machines for sawing, bending, or planing staves or machines for sawing,
    splitting, cutting, or coiling hoops, except such as separate the hoops
    from a scored rod by racking or abruptly bending the rod or which combine
    two or more operations in the production of hoops, as planing and bending
    or planing and lapping or pointing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 592+ for a method of, and subclasses 700+
    for a machine for, assembling articles, as those indicated in the note to
    Class 227 below, not elsewhere classified.

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses for stave-cutting devices.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 114.1+ for a machine for planing staves,
    subclasses 182+ for a machine for skiving or splitting hoops, and
    subclasses 254+ for a machines for bending staves.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus for assembling a basket or barrel combined with means to apply a
    member, e.g., nail, thereto.


CLS 147/1
TXT Machines which perform some operation not specifically classified and those
    which do more than merely set up and truss a barrel. They usually croze,
    howel, and head the barrel and sometimes plane it off.


CLS 147/2
TXT Two circularly-grooved end plates into which the staves are fed until the
    grooves are filled.  Most of them shape the barrel, and the staves are
    secured by truss-hoops.


CLS 147/3
TXT Frames within or around which the staves are arranged on end and then
    confined by truss-hoops.


CLS 147/4
TXT Machines for compressing the staves of barrels to receive the truss-hoops.


CLS 147/5
TXT Machines for compressing the staves of a barrel by means of conical formers
    forced upon the ends of the barrel.  In some instances hoops are driven by
    the conical formers.


CLS 147/6
TXT Machines which place the heads in the barrel and in some instances form the
    barrel and insert the head.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 54+ for portable receptacle lid applying
    presses not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 147/7
TXT Machines or implements which force hoops upon barrels by mechanism, not
    otherwise specifically classified.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses for presses not elsewhere provided
    for.


CLS 147/8
TXT Machines which force the hoops upon barrels by means of cam-gearing presses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 291+ for reciprocating platen presses, not
    elsewhere provided for, and in which a cam acts directly to actuate a
    platen.


CLS 147/9
TXT Machines which comprise hydraulic or steam presses for forcing hoops upon
    the barrel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 269.01+ for fluid actuated reciprocating platen
    presses, not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 147/10
TXT Machines which force hoops upon barrels by lever or crank gearing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 293 for reciprocating platen presses, not
    elsewhere provided for, in which a lever acts directly upon a platen to
    actuate it.


CLS 147/11
TXT Machines which force hoops upon barrels by screw-gearing presses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 289+ for reciprocating platen presses having a
    screw and a nut actuator and not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 147/12
TXT Machines in which the hoops are forced upon barrels by the impact of a
    falling weight.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 265+ for reciprocating platen presses, not
    elsewhere provided for, having a spring or weight actuator.


CLS 147/13
TXT The barrel is clamped in a nonrotating clamp, and a rotary cutter-head
    carried by a frame which rotates on an axis concentric with the axis of the
    barrel cuts the croze, howel, or chamfer.


CLS 147/14
TXT Machines in which the barrel is rotated on its axis and while rotating
    cutting-tools are projected radially from a fixed head to croze, howel, or
    chamfer the staves.


CLS 147/15
TXT Machines in which the staves of the rotating barrel are successively
    brought into engagement with a rotary cutter-head for cutting the croze,
    howel, or chamfer.


CLS 147/16
TXT Machines in which the cutter is carried upon a slide or rest and which is
    projected into the rotating barrel for cutting the croze, howel, or chamfer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14.


CLS 147/17
TXT Machines in which a tool carried by a swinging rest is brought into
    engagement with the staves of the barrel as it is rotated on its axis for
    cutting the croze, howel, or chamfer.


CLS 147/18
TXT Machines which are designed for cutting the croze, howel, or chamfer of
    staves before the barrel is formed and which are not otherwise specifically
    classified.


CLS 147/19
TXT Machines having an endless feeding device for feeding the staves against a
    rotary cutter journaled in fixed bearings.


CLS 147/20
TXT Machines in which the stave is carried upon a sliding support into
    engagement with a rotary cutter.


CLS 147/21
TXT Machines in which the stave is carried into engagement with a rotary cutter
    by means of a swinging stave-supporting frame.


CLS 147/22
TXT Machines in which the crozing, howeling, or chamfering cutter is journaled
    in a swinging support.


CLS 147/23
TXT Machines for crozing staves in which the stave is immovably supported and
    the croze, howel, or chamfer is cut by a knife carried in a reciprocating
    carrier.


CLS 147/24
TXT Short curved places constructed to cut the croze, chamfer, or howel in
    trussed barrels.


CLS 147/25
TXT Machines for beveling and tapering the adjoining edges of barrel-staves by
    jointing-machines not otherwise designated.


CLS 147/26
TXT Machines for beveling and tapering the adjoining edges of staves by
    mechanism which lowers and raises the work-carrying platform as it passes
    between inclined or tapered revolving cutters.


CLS 147/27
TXT Machines for beveling and tapering the adjoining edges of barrel-staves by
    means of rotary cutters mounted in movable bearings controlled by
    reciprocating patterns or rotating cams.


CLS 147/28
TXT Machines for beveling and tapering the adjoining edges of barrel-staves by
    means of saws placed at an inclination to each other.


CLS 147/29
TXT Machines for beveling and tapering the adjoining edges of barrel-staves by
    means of large rotating disks provided with knives in their faces.


CLS 147/30
TXT Machines for beveling and tapering the adjoining edges of barrel-staves in
    which the stock is supported by a movable carriage controlled in movement
    past a single saw by a guiding-track.

    (1)     Note.  Stave-jointing machines in which the stock slides past a
    single saw and in contact with an adjustable guide are included in this
    subclass.


CLS 147/31
TXT Machines for beveling and tapering the adjoining edges of barrel-staves in
    which the stock is supported by a longitudinally-movable carriage capable
    of being tilted on trunnions which are located in the extended plane of the
    saw.


CLS 147/32
TXT Machines for beveling and tapering the adjoining edges of barrel-staves by
    means of a suitable guiding-support and a reciprocating slicing-knife.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 162.1+ for a wood slicer, generally.


CLS 147/33
TXT Machines for beveling and tapering the adjoining edges of barrel-staves by
    means of reciprocating planes or shaving-tools which are made to follow the
    contour of a templet or pattern.


CLS 147/34
TXT Machines for beveling and tapering the adjoining edges of barrel-staves by
    means of a saw journaled in a movable frame controlled in its movement by a
    curved guide.  The stock is clamped to a stationary support while being
    operated upon.


CLS 147/35
TXT Machines for beveling and tapering the adjacent edges of laterally-fed
    barrel-staves by knives placed longitudinally in the periphery of a
    rotating cylinder.


CLS 147/35.5
TXT Machines for finishing staves with convex outer and concave inner surfaces;
    also, machines for reducing the thickness of staves between their ends, so
    that they may be more readily bent to give the proper bulge to the barrel.


CLS 147/36
TXT Machines for cutting out barrel-heads and shaping the edge thereof to fit
    the barrel-croze.  A few of these machines also plane the heads or bore the
    joints for dowel-pins.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass comprises machines for forming barrel-heads
    which are not otherwise specifically classified.


CLS 147/37
TXT Machines for holding barrel-head stock concentric with a knife or
    cutting-tool carried on a rotary arm.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 150 for woodworking by a rotary disk cutter
    of the end thrust type.


CLS 147/38
TXT Machines in which the stock is carried by a rotating chuck into engagement
    with a rotary saw (plane or dished).


CLS 147/39
TXT Lathe-like machines exclusively adapted for forming barrel-heads.


CLS 147/40
TXT Machines in which the stock is carried by a rotary chuck and is operated
    upon by rotating molding-cutters.


CLS 147/41
TXT Cutting-tools comprising a radial arm carrying at one end a centering-pin
    and near its outer end a cutting-tool to be operated by hand.


CLS 147/42
TXT Tools for chamfering the staves when set up in barrel form.


CLS 147/43
TXT Machines which perform two or more consecutive operations peculiar to the
    production of hoops, as planing and bending, planing and lapping, or
    planing and pointing

    SEARCH CLASS:

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 41 for a machine for sawing and planing of
    wood, generally.


CLS 147/44
TXT Machines in which bars of wood, checked or split at one end, are separated
    into hoops by abruptly bending the bars progressively from the checked ends
    toward the opposite ends.


CLS 147/45
TXT Machines which cut the bevels and point the ends of hoops.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 147 for woodworking shaper machine which uses
    a reciprocating knife.


CLS 147/46
TXT Machines which cut the notches near the ends of hoops, whereby the ends may
    be interlocked.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 75+ for a woodworking mortising machine
    having a chisel and subclasses 147 for a woodworking shaping machine having
    a reciprocating knife.


CLS 147/48
TXT Forms, male and female, for shaping baskets.  Formers for shaping
    fruit-boxes and crates are also included.


CLS 147/49
TXT Temporary hoops forced upon the barrel to secure the staves in barrel form
    until they become permanently bent and seasoned or dried.


CLS 148/
TTL METAL TREATMENT

CLS 148/
TXT
    INDEX TO CLASS DEFINITION:

    I.      Statement of Class Subject Matter

    II.     Rules of Patent Placement

    III.    Notes to Related Classes
    A.      Metal casting, metal fusion bonding, machining or
    working classes

    B.       Chemical processes of manufacturing metals or alloys, metallic
    composition and metallic stock classes in order of superiority

    C. Chemical coating,cleaning, etching and manufacturing classes

    D. Semiconductor device making and semiconductor stock

    IV.     Glossary

    V.      Index to Search Class Notes

    I.      STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER:

    A.      This is the generic class in the art of treating metal to modify or
    maintain the internal physical structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical
    properties of metal.  Most process subject matter under this class relates
    to treating solid or semisolid metal with heat, without melting a
    substantial portion thereof, and also includes the combination of
    significant heating and working not provided for in other metal working
    classes.  However, casting or casting and working of molten metal, if
    combined with significant heat treatment to change the microstructure of
    the solid metal resulting therefrom is acceptable in this class.  Cooling
    of metal to produce microstructure change is proper for this class.  For
    amplification of this statement, see the notes under subclass 95 of this
    class.

    B.      This class includes processes of treating metal to intentionally
    develop, improve, modify, or preserve the magnetic properties of a free
    metal or alloy, occurring alone or mixed with one or more components.  For
    amplification of this statement, see the notes under subclass 100 of this
    class.

    C.      This class includes processes of reactive coating of metal wherein
    an externally supplied carburizing or nitriding agent is combined with the
    metal substrate to produce a carburized or nitridized or carbonitrided
    coating thereon or a uniformly carburized, nitrided, or carbonitrided metal
    alloy containing a metal element from said substrate.  For amplification of
    this statement, see notes under subclass 206 of this class.

    D.      This class includes processes of reactive coating of metal wherein
    an externally supplied agent combines with the metal substrate to produce a
    coating thereon which contains at least one element from said metal
    substrate (e.g., oxidizing, boronizing, etc.).  For amplification of this
    statement, see subclass 240 of this class.

    E.      This class includes processes of chemical-heat removing (e.g.,
    flame cutting, etc.) or burning (i.e., oxidizing) to remove a portion of a
    metal workpiece.  For amplification of this statement, see subclass 194 of
    this class.

    F.      This class includes: (1) elemental metal, alloy or metallic
    composition which is a product of a process under section I, A, of this
    class; (2) elemental metal, alloy, or metallic composition or multi-layered
    products under section I, B, or section I, C, of this class; (3) elemental
    metal, alloy, or metallic composition which is the product of a significant
    Class 164 metal founding step; (4) elemental metal, alloy, or metallic
    composition which is the product of the dispersion of particulate matter in
    molten metal which particulate matter retains its identification in the
    final state; and (5) elemental metal, alloy, or metallic composition which
    contains an amorphous or shape memory property.  For amplification of this
    statement, see subclass 400 of this class.

    G.      This class includes compositions employed in the treatment of solid
    metal and processes for preparing the same when not otherwise classifiable.
     For amplification of this statement, see subclass 22 of this class.

    H.      This class includes electrically conductive semiconductor stock
    which is essentially homogeneous and has at least two contiguous layers
    differing in the number of unbound electrons and/or differing in energy gap
    levels which exhibit a junction between layers (e.g., P-N type, etc.).  For
    amplification of this statement, see subclass 33 of this class.

    II.     RULES OF PATENT PLACEMENT:

    Patents have been placed in this class employing the so-called
    "genus-species" rule.  Following this rule as between a generic subclass
    and its indents, a species unprovided in any indented subclass is
    specifically classified in the generic subclass.  Thus, a patent containing
    claims to both a provided species and an unprovided species is placed as
    original in the generic subclass as the first (i.e., highest) appearing
    subclass and cross-referenced to the indented subclass having the provided
    species.  A  patent containing claims only for species having provided
    subclasses is placed as original in the first (i.e., highest) appearing
    provided subclass and cross-referenced to the other (i.e., lower) appearing
    subclasses.

    Following the "genus-species" rule, all mandatory original and
    cross-references only appear in the highest subclasses providing therefor.
    The claims identify the mandatory original and cross-references.  However,
    if the claims are all generic, the specification is used to determine
    mandatory placement of the disclosed species, only if related to features
    in the claim language.

    III.    NOTES TO RELATED CLASSES:

    A.      Metal casting, metal fusion bonding, machining, or working classes

    For purposes of distinguishing over the metal casting, metal fusion
    bonding, machining, or working classes, significant heat treatment must be
    present to be proper for Class 148.  Significant heat treatment occurs when
    temperature or heating or cooling rate is provided in a nonworking,
    noncasting, nonfusion-bonding, or nonmachining related step or when
    microstructure description is utilized in the claim to describe the result
    of the heating or cooling treatment of solid or semisolid metal.  Working
    at a specified temperature without mention of microstructure is not
    significant heat treatment for Class 148.  The mere use of the term
    "ageing" or "tempering" will be considered significant heat treatment.
    Except for "workhardening", the use of the term "hardening" will be
    considered significant heat treatment.  "Quenching" will be considered
    significant heat treatment lacking an indication that it means simply
    returning to a convenient working temperature.  "Stress-relief-annealing"
    will remain in the metal working classes.  Working metal in the
    "superplastic" state or during "dynamic-recrystallization" remains in the
    working classes unless a temperature is provided.  "Ion implantation" of a
    metal substrate will be a sufficient indication of microstructural change
    to place classification in Class 148.  High frequency vibration of solid
    metal for purposes of changing the microstructure thereof is sufficient to
    take a combination thereof with the above operations to Class 148 as an
    original. When combined with working, "annealing", per se, will remain in
    the metal working classes.  However, annealing at a specified temperature
    goes in Class 148.  Merely, heating or cooling a metal to a working
    temperature is not significant heat treatment.  In summary, the presence in
    any step of a significant heat treatment as hereinabove described is
    sufficient to place the classification in Class 148.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, appropriate subclasses for processes having combined
    operations involving metal working, machining, metal fusion bonding, or
    casting class and treating not provided for in the metal working,
    machining, welding, or casting classes. Since Class 29 is a residual metal
    treating class and Class 148 is also a residual metal treating class, the
    relationship established makes Class 148 superior in all cases wherein
    significant heat treatment as defined in section III, A, hereinabove first
    paragraph is included.  However, Class 29 is also a generic mechanical
    assembly class.  See section III, (2) Note of the Class 29 definition, (7)
    Note under Class 29, subclass 592, and the Class 29, subclass 428,
    definition.  Wherein Class 29 mechanical assembly is involved, placement in
    Class 148 as original is proper over Class 29, if significant heat
    treatment as described in section III, A, is included.  In all other
    situations, mechanical assembly operations remain in Class 29.  The
    combination of reactive coating or chemical heat removing (e.g.,
    flame-cutting, etc.) or burning (i.e., oxidizing) to remove a portion of a
    metal workpiece, with a Class 29 metal working, machining, fusion bonding,
    casting, or mechanical assembly operation goes as an original to Class 148.

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses for processes of deforming
    metal by working that involve the use of heat.  Class 148 is superior to
    Class 72, if significant heat treatment is present before, after, or during
    the deforming operation.  Significant heat treatment is defined under the
    first paragraph of section III, A, hereinabove.  See section VI, C, 2, (c),
    of the Class 72 definition.

    164,    Metal Founding, appropriate subclasses for processes of casting
    molten metal.  Combinations of casting and working are located in Class 29.
     However, combinations of casting and heat treatment for purposes of
    modifying or maintaining the internal physical structure (i.e.,
    microstructure) or chemical properties of metal go as original to Class
    148.  Combinations of casting and metal fusion bonding, machining, or
    working go to Class 148, if there is significant heat treatment as defined
    hereinabove. In continuous casting operations, wherein the contiguous
    product is still connected to the casting surface, a step involving
    significant heat treatment of the solid or semi-solid metal which occurs
    outside or away from the molding surface goes to Class 148.  However,
    chemical heat removing (e.g., flame-cutting, etc.) or burning (i.e.,
    oxidation) of a continuously cast metal goes to Class 164, if some of the
    continuously cast and contiguous product is connected to the shaping
    surface.  Cutting operations in the mold go to Class 164.  Combinations of
    reactive coating, ion implantation or high frequency vibration to change
    microstructure and casting go to Class 148 if they occur outside the mold.

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclasses for processes of electric
    heating of metal for metal fusion bonding, machining, or working of metal
    and for processes of heating metal, per se.  If the Class 219 metal fusion
    bonding or working of metal is combined with significant heat treatment of
    metal as hereinabove defined, placement goes to Class 148.  Lacking a step
    of metal fusion bonding, machining, or working of metal, an electric
    heating to perform an operation falling under the Class 148 definition will
    go to Class 148.  Class 219 includes processes utilizing an arc, plasma,
    laser, or other electrically generated heat to cut metal.  In general, the
    combination of electric heat cutting and chemical-heat removing or burning
    of metal will go to Class 148.  However, an exception evolved in Class 219
    wherein there is a simultaneous chemical-heat removing or burning and
    arc-cutting in which air or oxygen assisted the cutting (see Class 219,
    subclass 69.1, (1) Note.  Surface melting of a solid or semi-solid metal
    workpiece for purposes other than metal fusion bonding, and consistent with
    the Class 148 definition, are provided for in Class 148, even if by
    electric heating.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, appropriate subclasses for processes of metal
    fusion bonding or welding of metal. A combination of metal fusion bonding
    with a separate step involving significant heat treatment as hereinabove
    defined will go to Class 148.  Thus, a subsequent step of heat treating to
    perfect the solid fusion bond left by the fusion bonding step as, for
    example, by diffusion or by tempering goes to Class 148.  However, nominal
    annealing with no mention of the annealing temperature remains with Class
    228.  Combinations of metal fusion bonding and a separate step of surface
    melting of metal which is distinct and nonpreparatory to the fusion bonding
    step go to Class 148.  Combinations of reactive coating of metal or
    chemical-heat removing (i.e., flame-cutting) or burning of metal with metal
    fusion bonding go to Class 148.  Combinations of high frequency vibration
    in a separate step for purposes of changing microstructure and metal fusion
    bonding go to Class 148.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    appropriate subclasses for processes of producing an assembled electric
    lamp or space discharge device wherein final manufacturing steps involve
    Class 148 heating or Class 148 coating treatment of solid metal electrodes
    or filiaments within the completely assembled device, in which case a
    cross-reference is placed in Class 148.  However, any Class 148 treatment
    of a metal electrode, per se, goes as an original in Class 148, regardless
    of intended use in an electric lamp or space discharge device.  Thus,
    carburizing, decarburizing, or hardening of a metal electrode or metal
    filament, per se, goes in Class 148 as original.


    B.      Chemical processes of manufacturing metals or alloys, metallic
    compositions and metallic stock classes in order of superiority.

            Historically, placement of originals among the classes for chemical
    processes of manufacturing metals or alloys, metallic compositions classes
    and metallic stock classes did not depend upon the most comprehensive
    claims and did not follow superiority of statutory categories of invention
    (i.e., process of using, product or manufacture, process of making,
    apparatus for performing a process and material).  Within these
    metallurgical processes, metallic composition and metallic stock classes,
    placement depends upon complex lines established through experience.  To
    simplify placement, the following hierarchy containing the essence of
    historical placement for these classes was previously established to settle
    conflicts between the classes listed thereunder with the first listed or
    higher class controlling placement, if claims are present therefor and
    regardless of statutory category.  If a class other than those listed
    hereinunder is involved, consideration of the other class is based upon
    relevant lines, comprehensiveness, and superiority of statutory categories
    of invention only with respect to the other class.  Having determined the
    controlling class, placement of the original goes by the hierarchy within
    the class and not according to the following list.


            The superiority among the various metal, alloy, and metal stock
    areas, and chemical methods of manufacturing them, is provided in order
    under the search class notes as follows:


    419,    Powder Metallurgy, appropriate subclasses for processes of treating
    metal powder utilizing a sintering or compacting operation and including
    post-treatment operations if combined with the sintering or compacting
    operation.  If the starting material is preconsolidated, and there is no
    actual sintering or consolidating step present, placement goes as original
    to Class 148, subclass 514 provided hierarchically hereinbelow.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 22-30 for compositions for treatment of
    solid metal.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 300, 301, and 303+ for gaseous, liquid, or solid
    treating compositions for liquid metal or charges, and subclass 302 welding
    rod defined by composition.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 228-250, consolidated metal powder compositions and
    subclasses 252-255, loose metal particulate mixtures.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, claimed as products.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 95-122, 194-287, and 500-714 providing
    for processes of modifying or maintaining the internal physical structure
    (i.e., microstructure) or chemical properties of metal, processes of
    reactive coating of metal and processes of chemical-heat removing (e.g.,
    flame-cutting) or burning of metal.  However, if metal casting, fusion
    bonding, machining or working is involved, there is a requirement of
    significant heat treatment as described in section III, A, of the Class 148
    definition.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 33-33.6, barrier layer stock material
    and subclasses 300-337 and 400-442, stock.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 331+, processes of making solid particulate alloys
    directly from liquid metal, and subclasses 343+, processes of producing or
    purifying alloys in powder form.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 10.1+ and 10.67+, processes of making alloys by
    electrothermic, electromagnetic, or electrostatic processes.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, for processes of manufacture.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 330+, processes of making metal and processes of
    treating liquid metals and liquid alloys and consolidating metalliferous
    material.

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, particularly for processes of electrocoating of
    metal.  At this time, Class 205 is a subdivision of Class 204 and therefore
    all notes concerning Class 204 should be consulted when determining the
    relationship to Class 148.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, processes.  Combinations of
    reactive coating of metal and electrocoating of metal go to Class 204 as
    original.  See section III, C, below for the line between Class 148 and
    Class 204.  If metal casting, fusion bonding, machining, or working is
    included see section III, A, above to determine if this is proper for Class
    148.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 1+, processes.  See the line between
    Class 164 and Class 148 under section III, A, above.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 44+, processes of operating
    metallurgical apparatus.

    C.      Chemical coating, cleaning, etching and manufacturing classes.

            If there is a combination of chemical coating, cleaning, etching or
    chemical treating of metal and metal casting, fusion bonding, machining, or
    working with significant heat treatment in any step of metal to modify or
    maintain the internal physical structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical
    property of metal, the combination goes in Class 148 as an original.  To
    determine what constitutes significant heat treatment refer to section III,
    A, above.  In the absence of casting, welding, machining, or working, the
    combination of treating metal with chemicals or chemical compositions and a
    separate step heat treatment to modify or maintain the internal physical
    structure or chemical property of metal, placement as an original goes to
    Class 148 except as indicated in the following lines.  It is noted that
    heat treatment includes a cooling of metal for Class 148 purposes.  If
    chemical heat-cutting (e.g., flame cutting) or burning (i.e., oxidizing),
    ion implantation, high frequency vibration to change microstructure,
    carburizing, nitriding, or reactive coating of metal is claimed,
    combinations with other classes involving treating metal with chemicals or
    chemical compositions will go to Class 148, subject to the following
    exceptions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes and non-coating apparatus for
    growing therein-defined single-crystal of all types of materials, including
    metal, alloy, or intermetallic single-crystal (except those proper for
    Class 164, subclass 122.2).  Class 117 is proper for metal, alloy, or
    intermetallic single-crystal growing in any physical state, including solid
    phase recrystallization.  Class 117 is proper for metal, alloy, or
    intermetallic single-crystal growing and such combined with perfecting
    operations for the growing step, except that Class 148 provides for
    single-crystal growing combined with a subsequent step of heat treatment
    (which herein includes controlled cooling) when the purpose of the heat
    treatment (or controlled cooling) is to modify the internal physical
    structure or chemical property of a metal, alloy, or intermetallic
    material.  When the subsequent heat treatment (or controlled cooling)
    merely operates on the single-crystallinity, such as stress or strain
    annealing or to remove point defects, the combined process is proper for
    Class 117; when the subsequent heat treatment (or controlled cooling)
    operates to effect significant metal, alloy, or intermetallic material heat
    treatment (or controlled cooling) purposes, such as solutionizing,
    homogenizing, or precipitation hardening, then the combined process is
    proper for Class 148.  Class 117 provides for simultaneous or prior
    perfecting operations combined with single-crystal growing.  See Class 117
    definition, section C, (4) Note, for discussion of perfecting operations.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses for
    process of metal cleaning and pickling, per se, Combinations with a Class
    148 operation go as original to Class 148.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, for
    adhesive bonding and chemical etching.  Combinations of adhesive bonding or
    chemical etching with treatment of metal to modify or maintain the internal
    physical structure or chemical properties of metal go as original in Class
    148.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclasses for
    processes of electrocoating or sputter-coating that result in a metal layer
    being formed or in metal being electrocoated by another material and
    combinations of electrocoating or sputter-coating with other chemical
    treating operations that (1) involve preparatory treatment of metal
    substrates including heat-treatment which if claimed alone would be proper
    for Class 148 and (2) post-treatment solely of the electrocoated or
    sputter-coated layer including heat-treatment which if claimed alone would
    be proper for Class 148.  However, if the subsequent treatment modifies the
    original substrate or a combination of the original substrate and the
    electrocoated or sputter-coated layer, placement goes elsewhere.


            Thus, Class 148 takes as original in combination with an
    electrocoating or sputter-coating step only processes of post-treating
    electrocoated or sputter-coated article or stock having an original
    substrate which is post-treated and having present therewith a
    nonelectrocoated or nonsputter coated solid or semi-solid metal portion or
    layer to modify the internal physical structure (i.e., microstructure) or
    chemical properties of metal. In combinations, including electrocoating or
    sputter-coating which have post-treatments, that also include metal
    casting, fusion bonding, machining, or working; it is necessary to have
    significant heat treatment as defined in section III, A, of Class 148
    before placement as original in Class 148.  Combinations that involve
    reactive coating as defined in Class 148, subclasses 240+, and a Class 204
    electrocoating or sputter-coating operation go to Class 204.

            Carburizing or nitriding of metal operations as defined in Class
    148, subclasses 206+, if combined with a Class 204 operation go in Class
    148 as original regardless of the order of the treatment and whether or not
    the coating or substrate is treated.


            Since Class 148 is superior to Class 204, if claims are present
    which independently are classifiable in both classes, placement goes as
    original to Class 148.

    (1)     Note.  Interdiffussion of the electrocoated or sputter-coated layer
    occurring during the coating operation or during the post-treatment
    operation is proper for Class 204 if limited to the interfacial region
    between the coating and the substrate as a perfecting of the bond between
    the coating and substrate. If the electrocoated or sputter-coated layer is
    completely melted in the post-treatment operation to perfect the bonding of
    the coating, this is proper for Class 204.  If multiple electrocoated or
    sputter-coated regions are interdiffused to the extent of completely
    alloying with loss of layer identity, this is proper for Class 204.
    However, if the coating is completely interdiffused into a metal substrate
    to completely alloy, leaving no identifying layer on the substrate,
    placement goes to Class 148.

    (2)     Note.  While the combination of etching and electrocoating or
    sputter-coating or the combination of electrocoating or sputter-coating and
    a Class 427 coating operation is proper for Class 204, the inclusion of a
    post-treatment involving a separate Class 148 operation to modify or
    maintain the internal physical structure or chemical properties of metal
    deposited by the Class 427 operation takes the overall combination to Class
    148 as original.


            It is further noted that the other areas of Class 204, follow a
    different line than the electrocoating or sputter-coating with respect to
    Class 148.  The presence in any step of an operation proper for Class 148,
    if claimed independently, is sufficient to take the noncoating Class 204
    operation to Class 148 as original.  In the context of Class 204,
    electrorefining to recover metal from solution is not considered
    electrocoating even though an electrode is plated.


    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, particularly subclasses for processes of
    electrocoating of metal.  At this time, Class 205 is a subdivision of Class
    204 and therefore all notes concerning Class 204 should be consulted when
    determining the relationship to Class 148.

    427,    Coating Processes, for processes of coating, per se.  However,
    Class 148 provides for certain coating processes, per se, if the substrate
    is metal.  The species of coating, per se, proper for Class 148 include
    carburizing, nitriding, carbonitriding, or reactive coating of a metal
    substrate.  If there is a combination coating operation for Class 427 and a
    Class 148 treatment of solid or semi-solid metal in a step separate from
    the coating step to modify or maintain the internal physical structure
    (i.e., microstructure) or chemical properties of metal, the combination
    goes as original to Class 148 whether or not the treatment is preparatory
    to the Class 427 coating operation or is a post-treatment of the coating or
    substrate or both.  The line to Class 204 as hereinabove discussed must be
    followed as between Class 427, Class 204, and Class 148.  Moreover, if
    metal casting, fusion bonding, machining, or working is involved in the
    combination, placement goes to Class 148 only if the heat treatment is a
    significant heat treatment as defined under section III, A, of the Class
    148 definition.  A combination of a metal working step proper for one of
    the metal working classes and ion implantation for coating purposes will be
    proper for Class 148.  See particularly subclass 239 of Class 148 for ion
    implantation of a metal substrate according to these distinctions. See also
    section III of the Class 427 definition under the "Search Class" note.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor: Product or Process of
    Making, for processes of treating metal for purposes of enhancing it's
    catalytic function or to make it more durable for catalytic operation even
    if a class 148 operation is involved.  However, if heat treatment is
    involved to modify or maintain the microstructure or chemical properties of
    solid or semi-solid metal, a cross-reference to Class 148 is mandatory.


    D.      Semiconductor device making and semiconductor stock


            Class 438 is the residual class for (a) multiple operations (steps)
    for producing a semiconductor having a junction or semiconductor device
    having a junction, usually between P-type and N-type material or (b) an
    unit operation involving semiconductor material, not elsewhere provided.
    Class 438, subclasses 795+, provides for processes of heat treatment of
    semiconductor material to change some characteristic thereof. Since in
    certain instances semiconductor material could include metallic
    compositions containing metal, placement goes to Class 438 as original over
    Class 148 if during the heat treatment there is either a change in the
    internal physical structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical properties
    since that is in essence a change in the property of the semiconductor
    materials overall properties whether those properties are expressed in
    terms of a change in conductance or not. However, it is required that the
    metal composition undergoing the heat treatment must be identified or
    perceived as semiconductor material. If perceived, a mandatory cross is
    made in Class 148.


            Semiconductor stock in Class 148, subclasses 33-33.6, must be
    essentially homogeneous and have at least two contiguous layers differing
    in the number of unbound electrons and/or differing in energy gap levels,
    which exhibit a junction between the layers.  Class 252, subclass 62.3, is
    the location of compositions specialized and designed for use as one layer
    which when combined with another such layer would provide an interface
    exhibiting barrier layer properties (e.g., as could exist in Class 148,
    subclasses 33-33.6, stock, if the junction thereof were between P-type and
    N-type semiconducting materials, etc.).


    IV.     GLOSSARY:

    AGING OR AGEING
    Also termed precipitation hardening or strengthening.  A process whereby
    the hardness/strength of a metal alloy may be increased by subjecting a
    supersaturated solid solution to elevated temperature to precipitate out a
    secondary phase containing the solute.  Aging may also be manifested as a
    spontaneous increase in hardness at room temperature.  Aging for a longer
    time than that corresponding to maximum hardness at the particular
    temperature is termed overageing.  Aging after or during straining is known
    as strain aging.  Maraging steels are a specific group of high nickel
    (i.e., greater than ten percent Nickel), low carbon martensitic steels
    which can be fabricated while in a comparatively ductile martensitic
    condition and later strengthened by aging treatment.

    AMORPHOUS
    A term signifying a lack of regular crystalline order, much like the
    absence of long-range crystalline order in glass.

    ANNEALING
    A single thermal heat treatment wherein the heating of a metal workpiece to
    a temperature results in improved formability.

    AUSTEMPERING
    A procedure that involves preliminary quenching of austenized metal to a
    temperature in the lower bainite range, usually in a molten salt bath,
    holding at this temperature until transformation is complete, and quenching
    or air cooling to room temperature.  If desired, a lower hardness level may
    be produced by including an additional tempering step.

    AUSTENIZING
    A process of heating to an elevated temperature within the austenitic
    range.

    BLUEING
    A process of forming a protective oxide coating on ferrous metal.

    CARBURIZING
    A process wherein a metal substrate is treated with an externally supplied
    source of carbon resulting in the carburization of the metal by chemical
    reaction or diffusion.

    CASE HARDENING
    A term most often applied to carburizing or nitriding processes which
    result in a hardened surface on the workpiece.

    MALLEABLEIZING
    A process applied to cast irons whereby the combined carbon in the as-cast
    microstructure is graphitized to form temper carbon.  When combined with
    decarburization of the surface, the resulting product is termed white-heart
    malleable iron.

    MARTEMPERING
    A process which involves preliminary quenching of austenized metal to a
    temperature just above the Ms temperature and holding until the temperature
    is equalized throughout the metal, followed by air cooling through the
    martensite transformation range and subsequent reheating to produce
    tempered martensite of the desired strength level.

     NITRIDING
    A process wherein a metal substrate is treated with an externally supplied
    source of nitrogen resulting in an increased nitrogen content of the metal
    by chemical reaction or diffusion.

    NORMALIZING
    A process of heating the metal above it's critical temperature range and
    cooling in air thereby establishing a fine uniform grain size and improving
    microstructural uniformity.

    PATENTING
    A continuous process consisting of heating the metal to a temperature well
    above the upper critical temperature, then rapidly cooling through the
    critical temperature at a comparatively rapid rate to a predetermined
    elevated temperature, the cooling step being commonly effected in a fused
    metallic bath.

    PRECIPITATION HARDENING
    See definition for ageing above.

    RECRYSTALLIZATION
    A thermal treatment of previously worked metal to effect an equiaxed
    microstructure through the nucleation of strain free grains and the gradual
    consumption of the worked matrix by the growth of these grains.

    SOLUTION TREATING
    A process whereby an alloy system possessing decreasing solute solidity
    with temperature is treated to dissolve said solute in the parent phase.
    Subsequent quenching results in solute supersaturation and thus places the
    metal alloy in a condition for age hardening.  Also applied to heating a
    multi-phase metal alloy to an elevated temperature to dissolve one or more
    phases.

    STRESS RELIEVING OR STRESS RELIEF ANNEALING
    The heating of metal to a comparatively low temperature to relieve
    microstructural strain induced by working.

    TEMPERING
    Involves the heating of previously quenched or normalized metal alloy to an
    elevated temperature, and then cooling under suitable conditions to obtain
    the desired mechanical properties.

    V.      INDEX TO SEARCH CLASS NOTES:

            Refer to        Refer to
            Class 148       Other Class
    Class   Section   Subclass       Section      Subclass
    ____    _______  _________   _______     ____________

      8             244


     29     III, A  23, 96,         I       81.01, 400.1,
                    100,101,                402.1, 402.2
                    515, 538,               421.2, 527.1,
                    527.1, 602.1,           602.1,
                    607


     30                     Note.(4)


     65                     Part IV, A      32.1


     72     III, A  564     VI, C, 2 (c)    362


     73             508     (3), B


     75     III, B  23, 24,         III, C  342, 392,
                    100, 101,               433, 507
                    206, 240,
                    512 - 514,
                    400


    106             22, 24, 240


    117     III,C   562     I,C and D;      3,939
                            III, A and
                            B


    126             105


    134     III, C  240


    140                     III

            Refer to        Refer to
            Class 148       Other Class
    Class   Section   Subclass       Section      Subclass
    ____    _______  _________   _______     ____________

    156                     47


    164     III, A  194, 400,       III, B  66.1, 71.1,
                                                91,     and C       538     and
    C   475, 478, 501


    166             194


    175                             11


    204     III, B  239, 240,       (4) and 1.5
            and C   518     (10)


    205     III, B                  224
            and C


    219     III, A  194, 520,       II      50, 234,
                    521, 524,               244
                    538, 565


    228     III, A  512, 521        VI, B, (1)      1.1, 228, 227


    237                     Notes   79


    241                             (1)


    250             239


    252     III, D  22, 27,                 262
                    100, 101,
                    104, 240,
                    300


    266     III, B          (6)     44, 48, 51, 54,
                                    102, 114,

                                    120, 121,
                                    124-126,
                                    249, 259,
                                    261


    295                             30


    324             308             203, 224

            Refer to        Refer to
            Class 148       Other Class
    Class   Section   Subclass       Section      Subclass
    ____    _______  _________   _______     ____________

    335             100, 103


    336             100, 104, 308


    357             33


    361             100, 103


    384                             276, 625


    419     III, B  400, 514        II, 6   31, 35, 57
                            II, C


    420     III, B  300, 400,       IV, B
                    564


    423             206


    427     III, C  22, 33, 206,     III    58, 104, 127,
                            239, 240,       248.1, 318,
                    512             372.2, 383.7


    428             24, 33, 100,    VI, C, 6        420, 450, 548,

                    240, 400                553, 570, 610,
                                    620, 621, 627,
                                     666, 674,
    680,                         681, 684, 685,
       940


    432                             1, 8, 10, 13


    437     III, D  33, 239


    445     III, A  240             1, 9, 14, 18,
                                    19, 22, 40, 49,
                                            53, 57, 58, 72


    502     III, C  513


    505             96


    520             240


CLS 148/22
TXT Compositions under the class definition employed in the treatment of solid
    metal and processes for preparing same when not otherwise classifiable.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass are collected, for example, compositions
    specialized for use in masking areas of metal surface to protect said areas
    during the metal treatment, e.g., the use of protective paint on localized
    areas during carburizing or nitriding treatments.

    (2)     Note.  A list of superiority of some composition classes appears in
    the main class definition of Class 252, Compositions (5) Note.  This note
    in Class 252 explains classification of a generic composition with several
    disclosed uses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, for coating or plastic
    compositions in general.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 259 for a coating process including
    utilizing a masking coating.

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 245+ for
    metal cleaning compositions, particularly subclasses 258+ and 269+ for
    pickling compositions.


CLS 148/23
TXT Compositions which contain a substance which facilitates uniting by fusion
    in such processes as welding, soldering and coating.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and indented subclasses 24 to 26, also take
    methods of fluxing using a particular composition, even when that method is
    designated as a method of soldering, brazing or welding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, appropriate subclasses for fluxing compositions specialized for
    use in metallurgical processes.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 214+ for methods of soldering,
    brazing or welding which include, but are not restricted to, the step of
    fluxing by the use of a particular composition.


CLS 148/24
TXT The composition as applied contains metal particles.

    (1)     Note.  Compare Class 228, Metal Fusion Bonding, subclass 56.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 252+ for a loose mixture of metal particles and
    nonmetal particles which may be fluxing agents. Where such a mixture is
    claimed, and the mixture is disclosed of use only for fluxing of solid
    metal and only in combination with a vehicle, that is, a binder, slurrying
    agent, etc., the patent is placed here and cross-referenced in Class 75,
    subclasses 252+.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclass 1.05 for
    metal-depositing compositions which may contain metal particles, a flux and
    a vehicle.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 558 and 560+
    for metallic stock material which often contains fluxing ingredients.


CLS 148/25
TXT The composition contains an oil or fat.


CLS 148/26
TXT Composed wholly of inorganic substances when applied to the metal.


CLS 148/27
TXT Compositions for treating solid metal when in a heated condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13.1+,  for heat treatment processes utilizing special compositions.

    27+,    for heat treating compositions applied to the surface of the metal
    work in the nature of a granular deposit or coating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, for heat exchange and related compositions, per se.
    This and indented subclasses of Class 148 provide for patents directed to
    metal heat treating compositions where, in addition to the heat exchange
    function the composition, or any of its constituents, reacts chemically,
    with the metal or any of its alloy constituents to form coatings, metal
    compounds, etc., or to case harden the work.


CLS 148/28
TXT The composition is in a liquid condition when brought into contact with the
    hot metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18      and 20.6, for processes of heat treating while contacting the metal
    with a liquid.


CLS 148/29
TXT The liquid composition contains an oil or fat.


CLS 148/30
TXT The composition contains available carbon, which it gives up to the heated
    metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for processes of heat treating ferrous alloys for heat treating
    while contacting the metal with a carbonaceous solid.


CLS 148/33
TXT Electrically semiconductive stock under the class definition which is
    essentially homogeneous and has at least two contiguous layers differing in
    the number of unbound electrons and/or differing in energy gap levels,
    which exhibit a junction between the layers.

    (1)     Note.  A semiconductive material is an electronic conductor whose
    resistivity at room temperature is in the range 10-2 to 10-9 ohm-cm (which
    is between metals and insulators), in which the electric charge carrier
    concentration increases with increasing temperatures over some temperature
    range.  Certain semiconductive material possess two types of carriers,
    namely negative electrons and positive holes.  The essential difference
    between a semiconductor and a metal is that the number of free electrons in
    the former is very small, the energy band being either entirely full or
    entirely empty, except for a few electrons and holes created by thermal
    excitation (intrinsic semiconductor) or by the presence of impurities.  By
    energy gap is meant the energy range between the bottom of the conduction
    band and the top of the valence band.  The vacant energy levels in the
    valence band are defined as holes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    117,    SINGLE-CRYSTAL, ORIENTED-CRYSTAL AND EPITAXY GROWTH PROCESSES:
    NON-COATING, particularly subclasses 22+ for liquid phase single
    crystallization techniques of the melt-pull type which produce adjoining
    crystals of different composition (i.e., junction formation), subclasses
    56+ for liquid phase epitaxial growth techniques involving a change in a
    growth-influencing parameter (e.g., multilayer or junction or superlattice
    formation), subclasses 89+ for chemical vapor deposition techniques of
    forming a single crystal involving a change in a growth-influencing
    parameter (e.g., multilayer or junction or superlattice formation), and
    subclass 105 for vapor deposition techniques of forming a single crystal
    involving a change in a growth-influencing parameter (e.g., multilayer or
    junction or superlattice formation).

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclasses 236.1+ for
    thermoelectric compositions wherein at least two elements of a battery are
    claimed; particularly subclasses 238 and 239 for semiconductive materials.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 62.3 for compositions specialized and
    designed for use as one member of two whose interface exhibits barrier
    layer properties, e.g., either P-type or N-type.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses for an active solid-state devices many of which
    include a barrier layer.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 615+ for a
    metallic composite defined in terms of the composition of its components,
    especially subclass 620 for such composite having a semiconductor
    component, but no P-N junction.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, for methods of making
    semiconductor structures possessing a barrier layer; see the search notes
    therein.



CLS 148/33.1
TXT Stock under subclass 33 which has two contiguous layers of semiconductive
    material doped to degeneracy.

    (1)     Note.  The term "degenerate" indicates a sufficiently high
    concentration of carriers so that the material acts essentially like a
    conductor rather than a semiconductor.

    (2)     Note.  The contiguous degenerate doped layers exhibit a junction
    width on the order of 200 angstroms.


CLS 148/33.2
TXT Stock under subclass 33 in which at least one layer contains voids,
    dislocations, grain boundaries or channel openings.

    (1)     Note.  The structural characteristics referred to in this subclass
    may be present in the semiconductive material by design prior to formation
    of contiguous layers or subsequent to the formation thereof.


CLS 148/33.3
TXT Stock under subclass 33 combined with a nonsemiconductive coating.


CLS 148/33.4
TXT Stock under subclass 33 in which the material in at least two contiguous
    layers, which are considered the semiconductors, is of different
    compositions.


CLS 148/33.5
TXT Stock under subclass 33 comprising three or more contiguous layers of
    semiconductive material.


CLS 148/33.6
TXT Stock under subclass 33.5 including at least one alloyed layer of
    semiconductive material having named impurities.


CLS 148/95
TXT PROCESS OF MODIFYING OR MAINTAINING INTERNAL PHYSICAL STRUCTURE (I.E.,
    MICROSTRUCTURE) OR CHEMICAL PROPERTIES OF METAL, PROCESS OF REACTIVE
    COATING OF METAL AND PROCESS OF CHEMICAL-HEAT REMOVING (E.G.,
    FLAME-CUTTING, ETC.) OR BURNING OF METAL:Subject matter under the class
    definition which relates to (1) a process of modifying or maintaining the
    internal physical structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical properties
    of metal not elsewhere provided, (2) a process of reactive coating of
    metal, and (3) a process of chemical-heat removing (e.g., flame-cutting,
    etc.) or burning (i.e., oxidizing) of a portion of a metal workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  Most subject matter herein will relate to processes of
    treating solid or semisolid metal with heat without melting a substantial
    portion thereof and will also include the combination of significant
    heating and working not provided for in the other metal working classes.
    However, casting or casting and working of molten metal, if combined with
    heat treatment to change the microstructure of a solid metal resulting
    therefrom, is acceptable to this class.

    (2)     Note.  For purposes of distinguishing over the metal working
    classes, significant heat treatment occurs when the temperature or heating
    or cooling rate is provided for in a nonworking treating step or when
    microstructure description is utilized in the claim.  Working at a
    specified temperature is not a significant heat treatment  without mention
    of microstructure.  The mere use of the term "ageing" or "tempering" will
    be considered significant heat treatment.  Except for "work hardening", the
    use of the term "hardening" will be considered significant heat treatment.
    "Quenching" will be considered significant heat treatment lacking an
    indication that it means simply returning to a convenient working
    temperature.  "Stress-relief-annealing" will remain in the metal working
    classes.  Working metal in the "superplastic" state or during
    "dynamic-recrystallization" remains in the working classes unless a
    temperature is provided.  "Ion implantation" will be a sufficient
    indication of microstructural change to place classification in Class 148.
    When combined with working, "annealing", per se, will remain in the metal
    working classes.  However, annealing at a specified temperature goes in
    Class 148.  Merely, heating or cooling a metal to a working temperature is
    not significant heat treatment.  However, the presence in any step of a
    significant heat treatment as hereinabove described is  sufficient to place
    the classification in Class 148.

    (3)     Note.  The presence of carburizing, nitriding, or reactive coating
    is sufficient to place the classification in Class 148, even if a metal
    working step is present.


CLS 148/96
TXT Superconductive metal or alloy (i.e., superconductive Tc at or below 300
    K):Process under subclass 95 wherein a metal or an alloy of metal that
    develops zero resistance to electrical current flowing therethrough at or
    below 300 Kelvin is the metal being treated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 599 for processes of producing
    superconductor without microstructural change or alloying (e.g., by
    diffusion) and having superconductive Tc at or below 300 K.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    appropriate subclasses for a process of treating metal or metal alloy that
    becomes superconducting above 300 Kelvin and for cross-reference art
    collections relating to superconducting technology.


CLS 148/97
TXT Particle (e.g., ion, neutron, etc.) bombardment or electromagnetic wave
    energy (e.g., laser, etc.):Process under subclass 96 wherein a
    superconducting precursor or superconducting metal is subjected (1) to
    particle (e.g., ion, neutron, etc.) bombardment for  purposes other than
    implantation or (2) to electromagnetic wave energy (e.g., laser, etc.).


CLS 148/98
TXT Producing or treating an A3B (e.g., Nb3Sn, V3Ga, Nb3Al, etc.)
    superconducting alloy:Process under subclass 96 wherein an intermetallic
    superconducting alloy having three parts of metal A to one part of metal B
    present, often identified as an A3B  (e.g., Nb3Sn, V3Ga, Nb3Al, etc.), and
    said to have an A-15 crystal structure is produced or treated.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass accepts implantation of another metal or
    element into the A3B structure.


CLS 148/99
TXT Treating in extraterrestrial environment (e.g., space, moon, etc.) or zero
    gravity environment:Process under subclass 95 wherein a metal or metal
    alloy is treated at any stage in an environment outside of the atmospheric
    mantel surrounding earth (e.g., space, moon, etc.) or in a zero gravity
    environment.


CLS 148/100
TXT Processes under subclass 95 which include developing, improving, modifying,
    or preserving the magnetic properties of a free metal or alloy, occurring
    alone or mixed with one or more other components.

    (1)     Note.  Most of the patents in subclasses 100 through 122 relate to
    the production of stock material such as billets, rods, dust cores, powder,
    etc., having magnetic properties which are different from those of the
    starting material.

    (2)     Note.  Subclasses 100 through 122 take all types of processes of
    the type defined therein except those restricted to changing the magnetic
    properties of a metal, and wherein such change is effected by:

    (a)     electrolysis, provided for in 205, Electrolysis:  Processes,
    Compositions Used Therein and Methods of Preparing the Compositions.

    (b)     casting a metal and treatment of the metal before removal from a
    mold, provided for in Class 164, Metal Founding.

    (c)     Class 335, Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets,
    and Electromagnets, subclasses 209+ for magnets and electromagnets in
    general especially subclass 284 for patents relating to magnetizing or
    demagnetizing, also Class 336, Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses.

    (d)     the formation of a coating on a metal base provided for in
    subclasses 240+ of this class or Class 427, Coating Processes, appropriate
    subclasses, respectively, depending on whether the coating is accomplished
    with or without a chemical reaction with the metal base.

    (3)     Note.  The material being treated must contain a free metal or
    alloy component which is intentionally included therein.  Treatment of such
    material, except as indicated in (2) Note, will result in classification in
    Class 148 unless there is a clear indication that such treatment has no
    effect upon the internal structure of the metal.  This factor is of
    particular importance in connection with subclass 104.

    (4)     Note.  Processes reciting some step in addition to heat treatment
    and/or working are classified in this subclass, rather than in one of
    subclasses 120, 121 or 122, e.g., combined processes reciting heat
    treatment and/or working combined with any of the steps of manipulation,
    pickling, impregnating, etching, winding, broad magnetizing, etc., are
    placed in this subclass and cross-referenced to the appropriate one of
    subclasses 120 to 122.  However, some operations which amount to no more
    than that of "providing" the material, such as a broad casting of the metal
    or the mere alloying of specified metals making up the material whose
    magnetic properties are to be altered, are not sufficient, by themselves,
    to place a combined process in this subclass.  In such cases classification
    will be in the appropriate indented subclass.

    (5)     Note.  Processes of producing metal powder, of the type
    classifiable in Class 420, Alloys or Metallic Compositions, accompanied by
    broad treatment in a magnetic field, not carried out simultaneously with
    another operation, are classified in Class 148 subclass 100 and in indented
    subclass 108 when such treatment is significantly recited. Where the
    material has permanent magnet properties, such processes are classified in
    subclasses 101+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300+,   for magnetic stock resulting from processes of subclasses 100
    through 122, not recited in terms of significant external structure.  A
    claim reciting a particular orientation of crystals relates to internal
    structure and belongs in subclasses 300+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 602.1+, for (1) methods of manufacturing
    magnets or parts thereof, having metallic material as an active magnetic
    component which, in addition to the manufacturing steps, recite no
    procedure other than broad treatment in a magnetic field, for intentionally
    modifying the magnetic properties of the work, or (2) methods of
    manufacturing magnets from nonmetallic materials which recite some step in
    addition to one or more of the following:  making the composition, molding,
    heat treatment, magnetizing. Processes restricted to any or all of the four
    named operations are classified in Class 252, Compositions, subclasses
    62.51+, unless the molding is recited significantly in which case the
    process is classified in Class 264, Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping
    or Treating:  Processes, subclasses 427+.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 343+ for processes of preparing free metals or alloys,
    or mixtures thereof in powder form, where the process does not modify any
    inherent magnetic properties that may be present in the material or where
    the magnetic properties of the material produced are due entirely to the
    size and/or shape of the particles.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 62.51+ for processes of preparing magnetic
    compositions and the compositions resulting therefrom as well as such
    processes combined with heat treating, magnetizing and broad molding, taken
    singly or in combination, except where a metallic component is
    intentionally present in the composition and the magnetic properties of
    such component are modified by some step of the process, in which case the
    process belongs in Class 148, Metal Treatment, subclasses 100+.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 296+ for magnets or electromagnets with
    significant structural details.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for inductor devices with
    significant structural details.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 267 for
    demagnetizing methods and apparatus.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, appropriate subclasses for alloys
    designated as "magnetic" or "permanent magnet" where no more specific
    designation of their magnetic properties is set forth.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 611 for metallic
    stock material having magnetic properties coordinated with its shape.


CLS 148/101
TXT Processes under subclass 100 carried out with material intended for use as
    a permanent magnet.

    (1)     Note.  Processes conforming to the above definition, including
    broad treatment in a magnetic field or broad magnetizing, not carried out
    simultaneously with another operation, are placed in this subclass.  Such
    processes including a specific step of treatment in a magnetic field or of
    magnetizing, are placed in subclass 103 unless age hardening is included,
    in which case the patent is placed in subclass 102 and cross-referenced in
    subclass 103.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass and the indented subclasses 102 and 103 take
    processes of treating magnetic material under the definition thereof,
    wherein the material at some stage of the process is in comminuted form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300+,   for permanent magnetic material resulting from processes
    classifiable in subclasses 101 to 103, not recited in terms of significant
    external structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 607 and 608 for processes of
    manufacturing permanent magnets not coming within the definitions of Class
    148, subclasses 101 to 103, or Class 252, Compositions, subclasses 62.51+.
    The line involving these three classes is stated in (3) Note and in the
    search note to Class 29 under the definition of subclass 100 of Class 148.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 62.51+ for processes as described in the
    search note to Class 252 under the definition of subclass 100 of Class 148,
    where the products are permanently magnetic.


CLS 148/102
TXT Processes under subclass 101 which include age hardening.


CLS 148/103
TXT Processes under subclass 101, including a significant treatment in a
    magnetic field.

    (1)     Note.  The processes of this subclass include at least one step of
    magnetizing or other treatment in a magnetic field, e.g., making the
    material magnetically anisotropic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for methods of modifying the magnetic properties of a metal not
    capable of use as a permanent magnet, and not classifiable in subclasses
    104 or 105, involving the significant application of a magnetic field to
    the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 284 for devices for magnetizing or demagnetizing
    magnets or electromagnets.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 267 for
    demagnetizing methods and apparatus.


CLS 148/104
TXT Processes under subclass 100 in which comminuted metallic material, the
    particles of which are usually separated from each other by electrically
    insulating material, is compacted into self-sustaining form, or in which a
    previously produced dust core is subjected to a treatment not classifiable
    elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  For the line involving Classes 29, 148 and 252 relative to
    methods of producing magnetic material or stock, see (3) Note and the
    search notes following the definition of subclass 100 of this class.

    (2)     Note.  To be classified in this subclass, a process must recite a
    treatment in addition to that of compacting, which alters or preserves the
    magnetic properties of the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    513,    for processes of heat treating particulate metal not involving
    altering the magnetic properties thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 62.51 for processes of making magnetic
    compositions, including the steps of magnetizing and/or broad molding, even
    though a metallic component is intentionally included in the composition
    providing the composition is not subjected to a heat treatment which alters
    the internal structure of such component.  See the search note to Class 252
    under Class 148, subclass 100.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 223 and 234 for dust cores recited in
    terms of significant structure.


CLS 148/105
TXT Processes under subclass 100 wherein the material is in particulate form at
    the time its magnetic properties are altered, as well as at the end of the
    process.

    (1)     Note.  The products of processes of this subclass are in the form
    of powder, granules, flakes, lumps, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    513,    for processes of heat treating particulate metal not involving
    altering the magnetic properties thereof.


CLS 148/108
TXT Processes under subclass 100 including the significant application of a
    magnetic field to the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    for combined processes not classifiable in subclasses 101 through
    105, reciting a broad step of magnetizing which is not performed
    simultaneously with another operation.

    103,    for processes involving the significant application of a magnetic
    field to permanent magnet material.


CLS 148/110
TXT Processes under subclass 100, restricted to the treatment of steel having
    at least 0.4% silicon.

    (1)     Note.  A process reciting "silicon steel", and not specifying the
    silicon content, will be placed in this subclass if it comes within the
    definition of subclass 100.

    (2)     Note.  The patents of this subclass embrace a larger combination of
    steps than those which are classified in indented subclasses 111 to 113,
    e.g., many of the patents of this subclass recite coating, pickling or
    manipulation in addition to working and/or heat treatment.  However, some
    operations which amount to no more than that of "providing" the material,
    such as a broad casting of the metal or the mere alloying of specified
    metals making up the material whose magnetic properties are to be altered,
    are not sufficient, by themselves, to place a combined process in this
    subclass.  In such cases, classification will be in the appropriate
    indented subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120+,   for processes not classifiable in subclasses 100 to 108 for
    altering the magnetic properties of metallic material other than silicon
    steel.

    579+,   for processes of treating silicon steels which do not alter the
    magnetic properties of the material.


CLS 148/111
TXT Processes under subclass 110 restricted to working or working and heat
    treatment.


CLS 148/112
TXT Processes under subclass 110 restricted to heating and/or cooling.


CLS 148/113
TXT Processes under subclass 112 wherein in the work is in contact with a
    special composition or atmosphere which does not form a reactive coating
    with the base, and wherein the work is not subjected to a mechanically
    applied force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for processes wherein silicon steel is subjected to a substantial
    force, as by clamping, while in contact with a special material or
    composition without effecting any change in shape or dimensions.

    240+,   for processes wherein the only treatment employed, to alter the
    magnetic properties of a metallic material, is a reactive coating of a
    metal base.

    625+,   for other heat treating of ferrous metal with special compositions.


CLS 148/120
TXT Processes under subclass 100 restricted to working, or working and heat
    treatment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111,    for processes of the type defined above when the material being
    treated is a silicon steel.


CLS 148/121
TXT Processes under subclass 100 restricted to heating and/or cooling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    for processes of the type defined above when the material being
    treated is a silicon steel.


CLS 148/122
TXT Processes under subclass 121 wherein the work is in contact with a special
    composition or atmosphere which does not form a reactive coating with the
    base and wherein the work is not subjected to a mechanically applied force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    for processes wherein the work is subjected to a substantial force,
    as by clamping, while in contact with a special material or composition.

    240+,   for processes wherein the only treatment employed, to alter the
    magnetic properties of a metallic material, is a reactive coating of a
    metal base.


CLS 148/194
TXT Chemical-heat removing (e.g., flame-cutting, etc.) or burning of
    metal:Process under subclass 95 which is directed to utilizing chemically
    generated heat to remove or sever a portion from a solid or semisolid metal
    workpiece by localized burning (i.e., oxidization) or by localized melting
    (e.g., flame-cutting, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, particularly subclass 460, wherein there is
    flame-cutting of a cast product while a continuous portion of the cast
    product is still associated with the casting mold and see (2) Note
    thereunder.

    166,    Wells, particularly subclass 297 for a process of in situ
    chemical-heat cutting of metal structures in the earth.

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclasses for the utilization of
    arc, plasma, laser or other electrically generated heat cutting and
    particularly subclass 69.1 for oxygen assisted arc cutting, per se.

    (1)     Note.  In general, heat cutting and chemical-heat removing or
    burning of metal will go to Class 148.  A special line evolved in Class 219
    wherein arc-cutting in air or with Oxygen assisted arc-cutting (see Class
    219, subclass 69.1, (1) Note) remained in Class 219 regardless of the
    oxidation reaction involved.


CLS 148/195
TXT Control responsive to sensed condition of workpiece:
    Process under subclass 194 including sensing or determining a variable
    condition of a metal workpiece and controlling the process in response to
    the sensed or determined condition.


CLS 148/196
TXT Program or pattern control:
    Process under subclass 194 wherein a template or program generated function
    controls a cutting action by causing a chemical-heating means to move in
    response to the template or program.


CLS 148/197
TXT Utilizing fluid contact other than flame:
    Process under subclass 194 wherein an auxiliary gas or liquid, utilized for
    purposes other than chemical generation of heat, is brought into contact
    with a workpiece for any reason; such as, for collecting or ensnaring solid
    refuse or waste material produced by the removing or burning process or for
    quenching or cooling operations.


CLS 148/198
TXT With solid additive:
    Process under subclass 194 wherein a solid treating agent is utilized on a
    workpiece or within a flame to assist removing material from or burning of
    a workpiece.


CLS 148/199
TXT Metal powder:
    Process under subclass 198 wherein a solid agent is in the form of free
    metal powder.


CLS 148/200
TXT Of edge or corner (e.g., deburring, etc.):
    Process under subclass 194 wherein an edge or corner of a workpiece is
    subjected to chemical-heat removing or burning, per se, of all or a portion
    of an existing edge or corner of a workpiece.



CLS 148/201
TXT Cylindrical workpiece:
    Process under subclass 194 wherein a workpiece is of circular cross-section
    (e.g., rod, roll, tube, etc.).


CLS 148/202
TXT Scarfing (e.g., desurfacing, planing, gouging, etc.):
    Process under subclass 194 wherein a surface of a metal workpiece is
    subjected to chemical-heat to remove shards or small protuberances
    therefrom in a desurfacing, planing, or gouging operation.


CLS 148/203
TXT Simultaneous removing or burning of multiple sides of workpiece:Process
    under subclass 202 wherein a removing or burning heat concurrently impinges
    plural faces of a workpiece.


CLS 148/204
TXT Flame piercing:
    Process under subclass 194 wherein a metal workpiece is subjected to
    chemical-heat to form an aperture or opening by completely burning away a
    portion that initially resided at the location of an aperture or opening
    without actually providing plural pieces.


CLS 148/205
TXT Plural nozzles or plural work-contacting jets:
    Process under subclass 194 wherein plural nozzles or plural gaseous jets
    contact a workpiece for purposes of chemical-heat cutting or other
    treatment thereof.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass excludes gaseous jets either as surrounding or
    combining  gaseous streams which mix or combine in a single nozzle or which
    result in only one gaseous stream that contacts the workpiece.


CLS 148/206
TXT Carburizing or nitriding using externally supplied carbon or nitrogen
    source:Process under subclass 95 wherein a metal substrate or workpiece is
    treated with an externally supplied source of carbon or nitrogen or both
    resulting in the carburization or nitriding of a metal by chemical reaction
    or diffusion.

    (1)     Note.  Carburizing or nitriding most often results in a chemical
    reaction forming a metal compound.  However, if there is a positive
    indication of merely diffusion into the metal substrate without a chemical
    reaction (e.g., carbide or nitride  formation, etc.) placement is proper
    hereinunder if from an external supply of carbon or nitrogen.

    (2)     Note.  Carburizing or nitriding combined with a step of melting a
    metal surface is  proper hereinunder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278,    for processes of reactive coating wherein a carbide coating is
    obtained by  reaction of a noncarbon containing external reactive agent
    (e.g., metal, etc.) which deposits on a metal alloy base and carbon in the
    alloy base out-diffuses or reacts with the agent to form a metal carbide
    coating on said base.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, etc., appropriate subclasses for
    processes of reacting a carbon or nitrogen source with a molten mass of
    metal to increase the carbon or nitrogen content of the metal.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses for
    processes of producing a metal carbide or metal nitride (i.e., not a coated
    metal), per se, by reacting a metal with a source of carbon or nitrogen.

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclasses for processes, per se, of
    depositing a carbide or nitride on a metal or metal alloy base wherein the
    base does not supply the source of the carbon or nitrogen or the metal
    which forms the carbide or nitride (e.g.,chemical vapor  deposition of a
    metal carbide on a metal base).

    (1)     Note.  A metal layer on a metal oxide layer if completely reacted
    with an external source of carbon to provide a metal carbide layer on the
    metal oxide layer goes as original to Class 427 since no metal layer
    remains adjacent the metal carbide layer and there was no metal substrate
    directly carburized.  To simplify the line remember that, if coating is
    involved, the carburized or nitridized reaction product must remain
    adjacent or contiguous with a metal substrate for the process to remain in
    Class 148.  This will apply whether or not the metal substrate remaining
    after reaction was the source of the metal in the reacted layer.  Also, if
    no metal substrate remains with the product, placement goes to Class 427
    even if the reaction product was produced from a metal substrate.


CLS 148/207
TXT Carburizing or nitriding uniformly throughout the entire mass (i.e.,
    internal carburizing):Process under subclass 206 in which carburizing or
    nitridizing is not limited to the  surface of a metal or metal alloy and
    which occurs throughout the entire metal substrate.

    (1)     Note.  This is not to be confused with carburizing or nitriding
    which produces a case or layer of increased carbon or nitrogen content on
    the external surface of a metal or metal alloy substrate.


CLS 148/208
TXT With decarburizing or denitriding:
    Process under subclass 206 which includes at some stage in the process a
    procedure for elimination or reduction of the carbon content or the
    nitrogen content of a metal substrate by chemical or physical-chemical
    procedures and does not include mechanical procedures (e.g., grinding) for
    removal of the carbon or nitrogen containing metal.


CLS 148/209
TXT Utilizing particulate fluid bed:
    Process under subclass 206 in which a particulate fluid bed is utilized at
    any stage in a process of treating a metal or metal alloy for purposes of
    heat transfer or carburization or nitridization or both.


CLS 148/210
TXT Of selected surface area (e.g., zone, top only, etc.):
    Process under subclass 206 wherein only a partial area (e.g., zone, etc.)
    or portion (e.g., top only, etc.) of a workpiece surface is subjected to
    carburization or nitridization.

    (1)     Note. During carburizing or nitridizing, penetration of carbon or
    nitrogen into the metal substrate or reaction therewith creates  what is
    often referred to as a gradient referring to variation in composition with
    depth.  This should not be confused with the zone or portion of the surface
    referred to in this subclass.


CLS 148/211
TXT With working, machining, or cutting:
    Process under subclass 210 which includes a step of deforming a solid metal
    or  mechanically cutting or grinding away of portions of a solid metal to
    produce a desired shape or form.


CLS 148/212
TXT Nitriding:
    Process under subclass 210 which involves exposing a metal substrate or
    workpiece to an external reactive agent containing nitrogen that causes
    formation of a nitrogen enriched layer by reacting with the metal substrate
    or workpiece at any stage in the  process.


CLS 148/213
TXT Utilizing attached protective shield, mask or coating:
    Process under subclass 210 wherein a portion of a workpiece is covered with
    a temporary protective shield, mask or coating that prohibits the
    carburizing or nitridizing action in an area to which it is attached and
    which is not intended to remain a part of the final product and acts in
    transitory manner to achieve the carburizing or nitridizing of a selective
    surface area.


CLS 148/214
TXT With noncarburizing or non-nitriding coating:
    Process under subclass 213 which includes a coating step other than
    carburizing or nitriding.


CLS 148/215
TXT Measuring, sensing, or testing:
    Process under subclass 206 which includes a recited step of measuring,
    sensing, or testing at any stage in the process.


CLS 148/216
TXT Of gas composition (e.g., carbon content, etc.):
    Process under subclass 215 which includes a step of measuring, sensing, or
    testing of the composition of a gaseous environment or of input or exhaust
    gases of the process.


CLS 148/217
TXT With noncarburizing or non-nitriding reactive coating (e.g., oxidizing,
    siliconizing, boronizing, etc.):Process under subclass 206 which includes a
    distinct and separate operation involving coating of a metal or metal alloy
    substrate with a material that reacts with the metal to provide a coating
    thereon containing the reaction product of the metal with an externally
    supplied reactant other than a carburizing or nitriding reactant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240     through 297, for processes of reactive coating of metal not
    involving carburizing or nitriding.


CLS 148/218
TXT Combined carburizing and nitriding (e.g., carbonitriding, nitrocarburizing,
    etc.):Process under subclass 206 wherein a carburizing and a nitriding
    reaction occurs in the same process.


CLS 148/219
TXT With working, machining, cutting, or post-carburizing and post-nitriding
    heating or quenching:Process under subclass 218 which includes either (1) a
    step of deforming solid metal or mechanically cutting or grinding away of
    portions of solid metal to produce a desired shape or form, or (2) a
    post-carburizing or post-nitriding heating or sudden cooling (i.e.,
    quenching) operation.


CLS 148/220
TXT With producing or treating of workpiece having plural noncarburized or
    non-nitrided layers or mechanically engaged article or stock:Process under
    subclass 206 which includes producing or treating of (1) a workpiece
    having plural noncarburized or non-nitrided layers, or (2) mechanically
    engaged article or mechanically engaged stock.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    516,    for noncarburizing or non-nitriding processes of producing or
    treating of layered, bonded, welded, or mechanically engaged stock or
    article.


CLS 148/221
TXT With casting or solidifying from melt:
    Process under subclass 206 wherein a metal or metal alloy is cast or a
    total mass (i.e., not just a portion or coating) of metal is solidified
    from a melted state.

    (1)     Note.  Coating from a melt is excluded from this subclass even
    though the coating is solidified.


CLS 148/222
TXT Utilizing ionized gas (e.g., plasma, etc.) or electron arc or beam:Process
    under subclass 206 which uses at any process stage an ionized gas (e.g.,
    plasma, etc.) or an electron arc or beam.


CLS 148/223
TXT Including use of vacuum:
    Process under subclass 206 which includes use of a vacuum at any stage in
    the process.


CLS 148/224
TXT Utilizing wave energy (e.g., laser, etc.) or electric heating with work as
    conductor:Process under 206 which uses wave energy (e.g., laser, etc.) or
    electric heating with a metal workpiece as a conductor by passing a current
    of electricity through the workpiece to cause heating thereof at any stage
    in the process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222,    for a process which uses ionized gas (e.g., plasma, etc.) or an
    electron arc or beam.


CLS 148/225
TXT Iron(Fe) or iron base alloy:
    Process under subclass 206 wherein a metal workpiece undergoing carburizing
    or nitriding is iron or an iron alloy containing greater than 50 percent
    iron.


CLS 148/226
TXT With working, machining, or cutting:
    Process under subclass 225 which includes a step of deforming the solid
    metal or  mechanically cutting or grinding away of portions of the solid
    metal to produce a desired shape or form.


CLS 148/227
TXT Utilizing fused agent or media:
    Process under subclass 225 wherein an agent or media in the melted or
    molten state is utilized at any stage in the process for any purpose.


CLS 148/228
TXT Nitriding:
    Process under subclass 227 which involves exposing a metal substrate or
    workpiece to an external reactive agent containing nitrogen that causes
    formation of a nitrogen enriched layer by reacting with the metal substrate
    or workpiece at any stage in the  process.


CLS 148/229
TXT With post-carburizing quenching:
    Process under subclass 227 which includes a post-carburizing sudden cooling
    (i.e., quenching) operation.


CLS 148/230
TXT Nitriding:
    Process under 225 which involves exposing a metal substrate or workpiece to
    an external reactive agent containing nitrogen that causes formation of a
    nitrogen enriched layer by reacting with the metal substrate or workpiece.


CLS 148/231
TXT Utilizing nitrogen containing agent other than ammonia or elemental
    nitrogen:Process under subclass 230 wherein a nitrogen containing agent
    other than ammonia or elemental nitrogen is utilized.


CLS 148/232
TXT With post-nitriding heating or quenching:
    Process under subclass 230 which includes a post-nitriding heating or
    sudden cooling (i.e., quenching) operation.


CLS 148/233
TXT With post carburizing heating or quenching:
    Process under subclass 225 which includes a post-carburizing heating or
    sudden cooling (i.e., quenching) operation.


CLS 148/234
TXT Utilizing agent containing cyano (CN) radical or halogen (X) radical or
    metal carbonate:Process under subclass 225 which utilizes at any stage an
    agent containing a cyano (CN) radical or halogen (X=Fluorine, Chlorine,
    Bromine or Iodine) radical or a metal carbonate.


CLS 148/235
TXT Utilizing hydrocarbon, oil or oxygenated hydrocarbon (e.g., alcohol, furan,
    carbohydrate, etc.):Process under subclass 225 wherein hydrocarbon, oil or
    oxygenated hydrocarbon (e.g., alcohol, furan, carbohydrate, etc.) is
    utilized at any stage in the process.


CLS 148/236
TXT Utilizing solid carbonaceous material containing free carbon, coal, peat,
    or coke:Process under subclass 225 wherein a solid carbonaceous material
    containing free carbon, coal, peat, or coke is utilized at any stage in the
    process.


CLS 148/237
TXT Refractory metal (i.e., Ti, V, Cr, Zr, Nb, Mo, Hf, Ta, W) or refractory
    base alloy:Process under 206 wherein a metal workpiece undergoing
    carburizing or nitridizing is a refractory metal (i.e., Ti, V, Cr, Zr, Nb,
    Mo, Hf, Ta, W) or alloy thereof containing greater than 50 percent of any
    one of the refractory metals.


CLS 148/238
TXT Nitriding:
    Process under subclass 206 which involves exposing a metal substrate or
    workpiece to an external reactive agent containing nitrogen that causes
    formation of a nitrogen enriched layer by reacting with the metal substrate
    or workpiece at any stage in the  process.


CLS 148/239
TXT With ion implantation:
    Process under subclass 95 wherein an ionic species is directed at a
    substrate with sufficient energy to be deposited within the microstructure
    or intersticial spaces of a metal substrate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206+,   for ion implantation of carbon or nitrogen which combines with the
    metal or metal substrate to form a coating thereon or to affect a
    composition change throughout.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclasses for
    processes of coating a substrate utilizing ionic bombardment and sputtering
    from a target wherein the sputtered material becomes deposited on a metal
    substrate to form a coating thereon.

    (1)     Note.  There is no intent to take sputter coating in this
    particular subclass of Class 148.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 492.3 for processes of, per se, ion or
    electron beam irradiation.

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclasses for processes of ion
    implanting, per se, or ion plating of the near surface region of substrates
    in general to provide a coating thereon.

    (1)     Note.  There is no intent to take ion plating in this subclass of
    Class 148.

    (2)     Note.  Class 427 will take simultaneous ion implantation and
    diffusion as proper for Class 427 if coating is present. However, inclusion
    of a separate step which by itself would be classifiable in Class 148 is
    enough to place the combination in Class 148.  Moreover, a combination of a
    metal working step proper for one of the metal working classes and ion
    implantation for coating purposes will be proper for  this subclass.  Ion
    implantation throughout a metal substrate is not merely coating for Class
    427 and since microstructural change is involved, placement will be
    considered proper for Class 148.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, appropriate subclasses
    for ion implantation of a semiconductor substrate (e.g., for gettering,
    amorphousizing, or doping of semiconductor material to alter electrical
    characteristics, etc.).


CLS 148/240
TXT Processes of coating utilizing a reactive composition which reacts with
    metal substrate or composition therefore:Processes under subclass 95
    involving forming a layer of a coating on an elemental or alloyed metal
    substrate by applying thereto a material which reacts with the metal
    substrate to form a     layer in whole or part thereon distinct from the
    metal, per se, to a composition which reacts with a metal substrate to form
    a coating thereon and to processes of preparing said reactive coating
    compositions.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also includes compositions and processes of
    preparing same and methods of use which are not specifically provided
    elsewhere and which perfect the reactive coating processes.  The perfecting
    of the reactive coating process may be either prior or subsequent to the
    coating process.  Included herein are subcombinations where the reactive
    coating step is not claimed, per se, or wherein the composition or
    treatment involves a prior reacted metal substrate.  In all instances there
    must be disclosure consistent with a coating process proper for this
    subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Coating for purposes of this subclass is consistent with the
    definition of coating as elaborated in Class 427, Coating Processes.

    (3)     Note.  Each of the subclasses under subclass 240 also provides for
    compositions.  In those instances where the process of coating is not
    claimed or wherein a composition is claimed which is not coextensive with
    the coating process it is incumbent for proper placement to analyze the
    claim from the perspective of the step which allows the claim to be proper
    in subclass 240.

    (4)     Note.  Unless specifically noted as, for instance, that the
    material is reactive (subclasses 252, 254, and 256) or nonreactive
    (subclass 248) the material in the coating composition may or may not be
    reactive with the metal substrate.  There must be, however, at least one
    material in the composition which reacts with the base.  For instance, a
    composition containing a nonreactive dicarboxylic acid and a reactive
    inorganic phosphorus material is classified in subclasses 253+.

    (5)     Note.  Included herein are processes of coating a nonmetallic
    material with a metal or alloy coating and subsequently forming a base
    supplied reacted coating thereon.

    (6)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses do not include case
    hardening, i.e., carburizing or nitriding processes and compositions
    therefore.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206     through 238, for carburizing, nitriding, or both (e.g.,
    carbonitriding) using an externally supplied source of carbon or nitrogen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclass for a
    coating composition which does not react with a metal substrate to form a
    coating thereon and wherein the metal substrate does not supply an
    ingredient of the formed coating.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclass for
    processes of cleaning a metal surface.

    204,    Chemistry, Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 471+ for
    electrophoretic or electro-osmotic coating and subclasses 192.12+ for glow
    discharge sputter deposition.  Plural coating processes wherein a Class 148
    process precedes or is subsequent to a Class 204 process are proper in
    Class 204.  A process involving electrophoresis, electro-osmosis, or
    cathode sputtering and wherein a chemical reaction between a metal
    substrate and a reactive coating material is involved is proper in Class
    204.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 67+ for electroforming and
    subclasses 80+ for electrolytic coating.  Plural coating processes wherein
    a Class 148 process precedes or is subsequent to a Class 205 process are
    proper in Class 205.  A process involving electrolysis and wherein a
    chemical reaction between a metal substrate and a reactive coating material
    is involved is proper in Class 205.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 79.1+ for compositions for treating a
    metal substrate and wherein the disclosure is silent as to a subsequent
    chemical reaction with a reactive coating composition and which may react
    with a metal surface and subclasses 387+ for anticorrosion compositions
    which may react with a metal surface and which are added to a metal surface
    indirectly as through a circulating system rather than directly surface
    treating the metal with a composition.

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclass for plural coating,
    processes wherein none of the steps involves a reaction of a metal or metal
    substrate with an exteriorly applied chemically reactive coating material.
    All combinations of plural coating methods, one of which is applied by a
    Class 148 method, are provided for in Class 148.  Metals merely applied to
    a metal base unless otherwise stated are not considered to result in a
    reaction and are thus proper for Class 427.  Nonmetals, e.g., C, B, Si, P,
    etc., applied to a metal substrate are considered to result in a chemical
    reaction unless otherwise stated are proper for Class 148.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclass for
    a coated metal product formed by a process of this subclass, and in
    particular, subclasses 472.1, 472.2 and 473.3.

    445,    Electrical Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device
    Manufacturing, subclasses 9+ for creating a deposition layer within a space
    discharge device by reaction with a gaseous material or aerosol and
    subclass 14 for coating on a particular base material part or place.

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses, particularly subclasses 245+ for compositions for cleaning a
    metal substrate and wherein the disclosure is silent as to a subsequent
    chemical reaction with a reactive coating composition and which may react
    with a metal surface.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclass for a
    coating composition containing a synthetic resin or natural rubber and
    which composition does not react with a metal substrate to form a coating
    thereon and wherein the metal substrate does not supply an ingredient of
    the formed coating.


CLS 148/241
TXT Testing or electrical or wave energy utilized:

    Subject matter under subclass 240 wherein a test, or electrical or wave
    energy is involved.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass the test or the use of
    electrical or wave energy need not be part of the actual coating process.
    It is sufficient if any part of the claim involves a test, or involves
    electrical or wave energy.


CLS 148/242
TXT Molten bath or molten surface utilized during reaction:

    Subject matter under subclass 240 wherein the coating material is a solid
    at ambient temperature but is in a partially or fully melted state or
    wherein the normally solid metal substrate is in a partially melted
    condition.


CLS 148/243
TXT Liquid reactive coating composition utilized:

    Subject matter under subclass 240 wherein a material which is in liquid
    form contacts a metal substrate and reacts at the surface therewith to form
    a layer on the substrate which is distinct from the substrate.

    (1)     Note.  The material need not be liquid at ambient conditions, it
    must, however, be liquid under the conditions of use, e.g., molten, etc.

    (2)     Note.  A liquid for purposes of the subclass can contain solid
    materials, e.g., suspensions, slurries, dispersions, etc.  The material
    must, however, have a continuous phase that allows it to flow readily and
    assume the form of its container.

    (3)     Note.  A solid reactant material which is to be dissolved in a
    liquid dispersant is proper for this subclass, additionally, a concentrate
    of a material which is to be applied to a metal substrate upon further
    dilution or which must be dissolved in a liquid for application is proper
    herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242,    wherein a reactive solid material in molten form is applied to a
    substrate.


CLS 148/244
TXT Dye or organic pigment containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein the reactive liquid coating
    composition contains an organic colorant, e.g., organic, dye, etc.

    (1)     Note.  The organic colorant can be applied simultaneously with the
    reactive coating material or can be the reactive material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, in particular subclasses 506+, for processes of dyeing
    nontextile materials, and for processes of dyeing previously modified metal
    surfaces wherein the surface has been modified so as to be no longer in a
    free metal or alloyed state, and no claim exists as to the metal
    modification step.


CLS 148/245
TXT Electrically insulating coating formed which is more than mere oxide
    formation:

    Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein the reaction product of the metal
    substrate and the reactive material is claimed or disclosed as being
    electrically insulating and is more than the formation of an oxide, per se.

    (1)     Note.  Processes wherein a material reacts with a metal substrate
    to provide a nonoxide coating are proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284+,   for the formation of an oxide disclosed or claimed as being
    electrically insulating.


CLS 148/246
TXT Contains lubricant or oil or overcoat thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein the coating composition contains
    an oil, or a material disclosed or claimed as a lubricant wherein the
    reacted product's surface is overcoated with an oil or a material disclosed
    or claimed as a lubricant.

    (1)     Note.  In a reactive coating composition containing an oil or
    lubricant material it is possible for the oil or lubricant to be reactive
    with the metal substrate.


CLS 148/247
TXT Contains an atom of hafnium, titanium or zirconium (excludes activating
    composition):

    Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein the reactive liquid coating
    composition contains at least one atom of hafnium, titanium or zirconium in
    either elemental or compound form and wherein said materials are not
    activators.

    (1)     Note.  The hafnium, titanium or zirconium materials need not be
    reactive with the substrate to be proper for placement in this subclass.


CLS 148/248
TXT Contains nonreactive organic liquid at ambient temperature (e.g., solvent,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein the liquid reactive coating
    composition contains a nonreactive organic material which is normally
    liquid at ambient temperature (e.g., solvents, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259,    for a liquid organic material at ambient temperature which is
    disclosed as being a reactant with the metal substrate, and for solid
    organic materials at ambient temperature which may or may not react with
    the metal substrate.


CLS 148/249
TXT Nonreactive halogenated hydrocarbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 248 wherein the nonreactive liquid contains
    only atoms of carbon, hydrogen and halogen or atoms of halogen and carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Halogen for purposes of this subclass is limited to
    fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine and astatine.


CLS 148/250
TXT Contains organic phosphorus or organic chromium compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein the liquid reactive coating
    composition contains at least one atom of phosphorus or chromium as part of
    an organic compound and which organic compound may or may not be chemically
    reactive with the metal substrate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258+,   for a liquid reactive coating composition containing elemental
    chromium or an inorganic chromium compound.


CLS 148/251
TXT Contains solid synthetic polymer:

    Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein the liquid reactive coating
    composition contains a solid synthetic polymer which may or may not be
    chemically reactive with the metal substrate.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 520 for a definition of the term "solid synthetic
    polymer".


CLS 148/252
TXT Contains dicarboxylic acid or salt thereof which reacts with metal
    substrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein the liquid reactive coating
    composition contains a dicarboxylic acid compound or salt thereof which
    must be chemically reactive with the metal substrate.

    (1)     Note.  A dicarboxylic acid compound for purposes of this subclass
    requires the presence of two carboxylic acid groups.



    A.A carboxylic acid denotes:

    (A1)    The  C-  C  -OH structure wherein n is one or greater and the  C-
    atom is not double bonded to oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium, or is
    not triple bonded to nitrogen.

    (A2)    The -C-  C-  C-OH structure wherein n is an integer, e.g., oxalic
    acid when n=1



    B.      The salt of a carboxylic acid denotes the structure:

    (B1)    C-  C  -O-X wherein n is one or more and the ( C-C-O-) group and
    the X component are held together primarily by ionic forces; the carbon
    atom bonded to the -C- group is not double bonded to oxygen, sulfur, or
    tellurium, or triple bonded to nitrogen.

    (B2)    The structure Z-  C  -C-O-X wherein n is an integer, Z  is -C-OH or
    a derivative as defined in the (1) Note of this subclass and wherein the X
    component and the (Z-  C  -O-) component are held together primarily by
    ionic forces.


CLS 148/253
TXT Contains phosphorus:

    Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein the liquid reactive coating
    composition containing elemental phosphorus or an inorganic phosphorus
    compound is applied to a metal substrate and reacts therewith.

    (1)     Note.  In most instances the phosphorus material reacts with the
    metal substrate.  This is not a necessary criteria for classification in
    this area.  It is possible that a composition containing a phosphorus atom
    will react with the metal wherein the phosphorus atom itself does not
    react.  In subclasses 254, 256 and 257 the phosphorus must react.


CLS 148/254
TXT Liquid composition applied prior to reaction of metal substrate with
    phosphorus (e.g., cleaning, activating, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 253 wherein a liquid composition is applied
    to the metal substrate prior to the application of the liquid reactive
    composition containing a phosphorus atom in either an elemental or compound
    form which is reactive with the metal substrate.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes liquid preparatory treatments of the
    metal substrate prior to reaction with the metal substrate.  In certain
    instances, however, the step prior to reaction with phosphorus can involve
    an additional reaction with the substrate.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass provides for processes and compositions
    wherein the preliminary step of applying a material to the substrate prior
    to reaction is claimed and no claim provides for the subsequent reaction
    with phosphorus.


CLS 148/255
TXT With additional coating composition containing an atom of chromium,
    phosphorus or sulfur:

    Subject matter under subclass 253 wherein the process involves two or more
    coating steps, at least one step involves a coating composition containing
    a phosphorus atom, and at least one of the two or more coating steps
    requires a composition containing chromium or sulfur or an additional
    phosphorus atom.

    (1)     Note.  The requirement for this subclass is met as long as one of
    the coating steps involves a liquid coating composition containing
    phosphorus.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass provides for processes and compositions
    wherein the step of utilizing a coating composition containing phosphorus,
    chromium, or sulfur is claimed and no claim specifically provides for a
    preliminary coating process of using a coating composition containing at
    least one phosphorus atom.  (It must be disclosed as a preliminary
    treatment of the substrate.)


CLS 148/256
TXT Specified liquid or gaseous coating composition applied after reaction with
    phosphorus:

    Subject matter under subclass 253 wherein a specified liquid or gaseous
    coating composition is applied subsequent to the process of coating the
    metal substrate with a liquid coating composition containing a reactive
    phosphorus atom in either elemental or compound form.

    (1)     Note.  Specified for purpose of this subclass requires that at
    least one chemical atom of the coating material be identified in the
    claims.  The term "organic" is not sufficient to be considered as being
    specified.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass provides for processes and compositions
    wherein the actual step of chemically modifying a base substrate with a
    phosphorus containing reactant is not claimed and the claim itself is to
    the treating of a base which has already been reacted with a phosphorus
    material.


CLS 148/257
TXT Specified coating composition contains organic material:

    Subject matter under subclass 256 wherein at least one of the atoms in the
    liquid or gaseous coating composition is part of an organic compound.


CLS 148/258
TXT Contains an atom of chromium:

    Subject matter under subclass 253 wherein the liquid reactive coating
    composition contains at least one atom of phosphorus and at least one atom
    of chromium.


CLS 148/259
TXT Contains organic additive other than for pH control:

    Subject matter under subclass 253 wherein the liquid reactive coating
    composition contains at least one phosphorus atom and at least one organic
    compound and which organic compound is more than merely an agent for
    controlling the acidity or basicity of the coating composition.

    (1)     Note.  The organic compound may or may not be a reactant with the
    metal substrate.


CLS 148/260
TXT Nitrogen-containing organic compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 259 wherein the organic compound contains at
    least one nitrogen atom.


CLS 148/261
TXT Contains an atom of arsenic, boron or metal atom other than alkali metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 253 wherein the liquid reactive coating
    composition contains at least one phosphorus atom and at least one atom of
    arsenic, boron or of a metal atom other than alkali metal.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded herefrom as alkali metals are lithium, sodium,
    potassium, rubidium, cesium and francium.


CLS 148/262
TXT Contains an atom of iron or manganese or a group II metal atom (Be, Ca, Sr,
    Ba, Zn, Cd, Hg):

    Subject matter under subclass 261 wherein the metal atom is iron or
    manganese or a group II metal atom (i.e., Be, Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba, Ra, Zn, Cd,
    Hg).


CLS 148/263
TXT Contains an atom of calcium:

    Subject matter under subclass 262 wherein the group II metal atom is
    calcium.


CLS 148/264
TXT Contains an atom of chromium:

    Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein a reactive liquid composition
    containing elemental chromium or inorganic chromium compound is applied to
    a metal substrate.

    (1)     Note.  The chromium in elemental form or as part of an inorganic
    compound may or may not be reactive with the metal substrate.


CLS 148/265
TXT Post chromium treatment with specified material (other than mere air
    drying):

    Subject matter under subclass 264 wherein the process includes a treatment
    with a specified composition subsequent to the treatment with the chromium
    containing composition and wherein said specified composition involves more
    than air, per se.

    (1)     Note.  Specified, for purposes of this subclass, requires at least
    one chemical atom of the material to be identified in the claims.  The term
    "organic" is not sufficient to be considered as "specified".

    (2)     Note.  This subclass provides for processes and compositions
    wherein the actual step of chemically modifying the substrate with a
    chromium containing composition is not claimed and the claim is to the
    treating of a base which has already been reacted with a composition
    containing chromium.


CLS 148/266
TXT Contains an atom of sulfur, selenium or tellurium:

    Subject matter under subclass 264 wherein the liquid reactive coating
    composition contains at least one atom of chromium and at least one atom of
    sulfur, selenium or tellurium.


CLS 148/267
TXT Contains trivalent chromium ion or reducing agent or an organic additive:

    Subject matter under subclass 264 wherein the liquid reactive coating
    composition contains at least one atom of chromium in trivalent form or
    contains a material disclosed or claimed as a reducing agent or contains an
    organic additive.


CLS 148/268
TXT Contains an atom of boron, silicon or metal atom other than alkali metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 264 wherein the liquid reactive coating
    composition contains at least one atom of chromium and at least one atom of
    boron, silicon or of a metal atom other than an alkali metal atom.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded herefrom as being alkali metals are Li, Na, K, Ru,
    Cs and Fr.


CLS 148/269
TXT Metal substrate contains elemental Ti, Zr, Hf, Cu, Ta, or Th or alloy
    thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein a liquid composition is applied
    to a metal substrate containing at least one elemental or alloyed form of
    Ti, Zr, Hf, Cu, Ta or Th and reacts therewith.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for a metal substrate containing any
    of the above elements regardless of the amounts of those elements therein.

    (2)     Note.  The particular elements enumerated above need not be
    involved in the reaction process.  It is sufficient for purposes of the
    subclass if the particular element is present in the substrate.


CLS 148/270
TXT Contains an atom of sulfur, selenium or tellurium:

    Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein a reactive liquid composition
    containing an atom of sulfur, selenium or tellurium is applied to a metal
    substrate.

    (1)     Note.  The sulfur, selenium or tellurium, required for this
    subclass may or may not be reactive with the metal substrate.


CLS 148/271
TXT Contains organic sulfur compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 270 wherein sulfur is in the form of an
    organic compound.


CLS 148/272
TXT Coating or treating a metal oxide with a specified composition:

    Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein the process includes a subsequent
    treatment of a disclosed or claimed metal oxide layer with a specified
    composition.

    (1)     Note.  Specified for purposes of this subclass requires that at
    least one chemical atom of the composition be identified in the claims.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass provides for processes and composition wherein
    the actual step of producing the metal oxide is not claimed and the claim
    itself is to treating the metal oxide disclosed as formed by a process
    proper under subclass 243 with a "specified" composition.


CLS 148/273
TXT Contains an atom of arsenic or metal atom other than alkali metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein a reactive liquid composition
    containing an atom of arsenic or a metal atom other than an alkali metal is
    applied to a metal substrate and reacts therewith.

    (1)     Note.  The arsenic or metal atom other than alkali metal required
    for this subclass may or may not be reactive with the metal substrate.

    (2)     Note.  Excluded herefrom as being alkali metals are Li, Na, K, Ru,
    Cs, and Fr.


CLS 148/274
TXT Contains organic material:

    Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein a reactive liquid composition
    containing an organic compound is applied to a metal substrate.

    (1)     Note.  The organic compound required for this subclass may or may
    not be reactive with the metal substrate.


CLS 148/275
TXT Metal substrate contains elemental aluminum or magnesium or alloy thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein a reactive liquid composition is
    applied to a metal substrate containing at least one elemental or alloyed
    form of aluminum or magnesium.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for a metal substrate containing any
    of the above elements regardless of the amounts of those elements therein.

    (2)     Note.  The particular elements enumerated above need not be
    involved in the reaction process.  It is sufficient for purposes of this
    subclass if the particular element is present in the metal substrate.


CLS 148/276
TXT Coating during or after metal oxide formation:

    Subject matter under subclass 240 wherein a reactive composition is applied
    to a metal substrate and reacts at the surface to form an oxide layer and
    wherein concurrent with or subsequent to said oxide formation an additional
    coating process is involved.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for processes and compositions
    wherein the initial step of forming the metal oxide is not claimed (it must
    be disclosed as formed by a process proper under subclass 240) and the
    claim itself is to the other coating steps required for this subclass and
    compositions therefore.


CLS 148/277
TXT Metal oxide formed after applied coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 240 wherein a reactive material is applied to
    the surface of a modified substrate and a reaction is caused thereby to
    convert the previously formed surface into an oxide layer.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for processes and compositions
    wherein the initial step of treating the elemental metal or alloy
    containing substrate with a chemical reactant is not claimed (it must be
    disclosed as a process proper for subclass 240 and the claim is to the
    treating step of forming the metal oxide and to compositions therefore.


CLS 148/278
TXT Carbide formation, decarburization or carbonizing:

    Subject matter under subclass 240 wherein a carbide is formed,
    decarburizing occurs, or a carburizing reaction is involved.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206     through 238, for carburizing, nitriding, or both (e.g.,
    carbonitriding) using an external source of carbon or nitrogen.  (1) Note.
    Thus, for this subclass the carbide formation or carbonizing requires an
    external noncarbon or nonnitrogen containing external reactant and the
    source of the carbon is the substrate.  Metallization of high carbon
    content alloy substrate by vapor deposition of a metal without diffusion of
    carbon to form a carbide containing coating thereon is an example of the
    type reactive coating provided in this subclass.


CLS 148/279
TXT Contains an atom of boron or silicon that reacts with metal substrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 240 wherein a reactive material containing at
    least one atom of boron or silicon is applied to the metal substrate and a
    silicon or boron atom is disclosed or claimed.


CLS 148/280
TXT Reactive material applied nonuniformly or reacted selectively:

    Subject matter under subclass 240 wherein the reaction with the metal
    substrate is of a nonuniform nature.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein, but not limited thereto, are metal
    treatments utilizing a mask to shield a portion of the metal surface and to
    expose a portion of the surface to be treated or chemical treatments
    involving a single side of a sheet material.


CLS 148/281
TXT Metal substrate contains elemental Ti, Zr, Nb, Ag, Ta or W or alloy thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 240 wherein the metal substrate contains
    elemental or an alloyed form of titanium, zirconium, niobium, silver,
    tantalum or tungsten.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for a metal substrate containing any
    of the above elements regardless of the amount of those elements therein.

    (2)     Note.  The particular elements enumerated above need not be
    involved in the reaction process.  It is sufficient for purposes of this
    subclass if the particular element is present in the substrate.


CLS 148/282
TXT Metal substrate contains elemental copper or alloy thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 240 wherein the metal substrate contains
    elemental copper or an alloy thereof.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for a copper containing substrate
    regardless of the amount of copper.

    (2)     Note.  The copper need not be involved in the reaction process.  It
    is sufficient if copper is merely present in the metal substrate.


CLS 148/283
TXT Contains an atom of halogen, organic material or gaseous sulfur:

    Subject matter under subclass 240 wherein the material which reacts with
    the metal surface contains at least one halogen atom (F, Cl, Br, I, At) or
    is an organic material, or is gaseous sulfur.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 260, Chemistry of Carbon Compounds for a
    definition of the term "organic".


CLS 148/284
TXT Coating composition applied forms oxide coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 240 wherein an oxide of a metal is formed on
    a metal containing substrate.


CLS 148/285
TXT Oxide of aluminum, beryllium or magnesium formed:

    Subject matter under subclass 284 wherein an oxide layer of aluminum,
    beryllium or magnesium is formed on an aluminum, beryllium or magnesium
    containing substrate.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for oxide formation, regardless of
    the degree of oxide formation or the amount of aluminum, beryllium, or
    magnesium in the metal containing substrate.


CLS 148/286
TXT Oxide of cobalt, chromium or nickel formed:

    Subject matter under subclass 284 wherein an oxide layer of chromium,
    cobalt, or nickel is formed on a chromium, cobalt or nickel containing
    substrate.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for oxide formation, regardless of
    the degree of oxide formation, or the amount of chromium, cobalt, or nickel
    in the metal containing substrate.


CLS 148/287
TXT Oxide of iron formed:

    Subject matter under subclass 284 wherein an oxide layer of iron is formed
    on an iron containing substrate.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for iron oxide formation regardless
    of the degree of oxide formation or the amount of iron in the metal
    containing substrate.


CLS 148/300
TXT Magnetic:

    Stock material under subclass 400 for magnetic material which is claimed as
    resulting from a Class 148 treatment, as having an internal structure which
    resulted from a Class 148 treatment, which is claimed in terms of a
    specified magnetic property, e.g., coercive force, etc., or for coated
    magnetic material wherein the coating is followed by a Class 148 treatment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100+,   for processes of developing, improving, modifying or preserving the
    magnetic properties of metallic material by a Class 148 process.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 62.51+ for magnetic compositions which do
    not contain a continuous phase of metal.  The recitation that metallic
    particles are present in a nonmetallic (e.g., resinous) vehicle, matrix or
    binder will be taken as meaning that no continuous phase of metal is
    present.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, appropriate subclasses for alloys
    or metallic compositions defined only as "magnetic", "magnetized" or
    "permanent magnet", material even though disclosed as resulting from a
    Class 148 treatment as well as alloys or metallic compositions claimed, per
    se, which are inherently magnetic.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 127+ for coating processes, per se,
    wherein the base or coating are magnetic and wherein there is no separate
    step of modifying or maintaining the internal physical structure (i.e.,
    microstructure) or chemical properties of the metal.


CLS 148/301
TXT Rare earth and transition metal containing:

    Stock material under subclass 300 which contains both a rare earth metal
    and a transition metal, e.g., Co5 Sm etc.


CLS 148/302
TXT Boron containing:

    Stock material under subclass 301 which additionally contains boron.


CLS 148/303
TXT Copper containing:

    Stock material under subclass 301 which additional contains copper.


CLS 148/304
TXT Amorphous:

    Stock material under subclass 30 which has no regular crystal structure but
    rather has a series of noncrystalline areas much like a glass.

    (1)     Note.  The recitation that a material is "glassy" will be taken as
    an indication of amorphous structure.

    (2)     Note.  Amorphous Structure is usually created by cooling certain
    alloys at extremely high rates of speed such that the alloy can be cooled
    before having a chance to crystallize.


CLS 148/305
TXT With inclusion:

    Amorphous stock material under subclass 304 which internal structure
    interspersed within an amorphous matrix.

    (1)     Note.  These inclusions may be formed within the amorphous matrix
    or caused to form by later treatment, e.g., precipitate, etc.


CLS 148/306
TXT Iron base (i.e., ferrous):

    Stock material under subclass 306 which contains over 50 percent iron.


CLS 148/307
TXT Silicon containing:

    Stock material under subclass 306 which additionally contains silicon.


CLS 148/308
TXT Specific crystallographic orientations:

    Stock material under subclass 307 wherein the material is defined as having
    its crystals oriented in a particular manner, e.g., by Miller indicies,
    "cube on edge" etc.

    (1)     Note.  A specification of random orientation is excluded and placed
    in subclasses 307 or 309.


CLS 148/309
TXT Containing over 1 percent aluminum:

    Stock material under subclass 307 which additionally contains more than 1
    percent aluminum.


CLS 148/310
TXT Nickel containing:

    Stock material under subclass 306 which additionally contains nickel.


CLS 148/311
TXT Cobalt containing:

    Stock material under subclass 306 which additionally contains cobalt.


CLS 148/312
TXT Nickel base:

    Stock material under subclass 300 which contains over 50 percent nickel.


CLS 148/313
TXT Cobalt base:

    Stock material under subclass 300 which contains over 50 percent cobalt.


CLS 148/314
TXT Manganese base:

    Stock material under subclass 300 which contains over 50 percent manganese.


CLS 148/315
TXT No single metal over 500 percent:

    Stock material under subclass 300 which contains 50 percent or less of any
    single metal, i.e., no base metal.


CLS 148/316
TXT Carburized or nitrided:

    Stock material under subclass 400 wherein the surface of the material
    contains additional carbon or nitrogen diffused therein.

    (1)     Note.  So called "case hardened" material is presumed to have
    carbon only diffused into the surface unless indicated to the contrary.


CLS 148/317
TXT Nitrided:

    Stock material under subclass 316 wherein the surface of the material
    contains additional nitrogen diffused therein.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclass contain patents to so called
    "carbonitrided" material wherein both carbon and nitrogen have been
    diffused into the surface.


CLS 148/318
TXT Ferrous (i.e., iron base):

    Stock material under subclass 317 which contains over 50 percent iron.


CLS 148/319
TXT Ferrous (i.e., iron base):

    Stock material under subclass 316 which contains over 50 percent iron.


CLS 148/320
TXT Ferrous (i.e., iron base):

    Stock material under subclass 400 which contains over 50 percent iron.


CLS 148/321
TXT 1.7 Percent or more carbon containing (e.g., cast iron):

    Stock material under subclass 320 which additionally contains 1.7 percent
    or more carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Most so called "cast iron" contains over 1.7 percent
    carbon.A patent claiming " cast iron" will be placed in this or indented
    subclasses in the absence of a specific disclosure that the carbon content
    is less than 1.7 percent.


CLS 148/322
TXT Malleabilized:

    Stock material under subclass 321 which is chill cast iron (see subclass
    323 for definition) which has been subsequently heat treated to allow the
    combined carbon of the white chill cast iron to substantially precipitate
    as fine globules of graphite in a matrix of iron of much lower carbon
    contact (usually in the range of .4 to .6 percent).

    (1)     Note.  The terms "malleabilized" or "malleable iron" will be taken
    as meaning a patent is proper for this subclass in the absence of
    disclosure that the carbon content is less than 1.7 percent or the
    disclosure that the heat treatment of white cast iron is not intended.


CLS 148/323
TXT Chill cast:

    Stock material under subclass 321 which has been cast in such a manner that
    substantially all the carbon in the iron is combined with the iron rather
    than allowed to precipitate out as inclusions of free graphite carbon.

    (1)     Note.  The presence of combined carbon and absence of free graphite
    causes the chill cast iron to have a white rather than a grey appearance
    when fractured.  The recitation that a cast iron is "white" will be taken
    to mean that it has been chill cast.  So called "mottled iron" which
    contains areas of white iron mixed with grey iron will also be classified
    hereunder.


CLS 148/324
TXT Six percent or more group IV, V or IV  transition metal containing:

    Stock material under subclass 321 which additionally contains one or more
    of the elements titanium, zirconium, hafnium, vanadium, niobium, tantalum,
    chromium, molybdenum or tungsten in a total amount of 6 percent or more.


CLS 148/325
TXT Nine percent or more chromium containing:

    Stock material under subclass 320 which additionally contains 9 percent of
    more chromium.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains most so called stainless steels.  The
    recitation that a stock material is "stainless steel" will cause it to be
    placed in this or indented subclasses unless it is clear that the material
    does not contain 9 percent or more chromium.


CLS 148/326
TXT Age or precipitation hardened or strengthened:

    Stock material under subclass 325 which has been first heated to a
    relatively high temperature to cause ingredients thereof to dissolve to
    form a solid solution and then aged, or heated to a lower temperature for
    an extended period of time whereby phases are precipitated which increase
    the hardness, or strength of the material.

    (1)     Note.  Often after the first high temperature heating "solution
    treatment" the material is quenched to room temperature before being heated
    to age or precipitate.

    (2)     Note.  The aging, or precipitation may take place at room
    temperature for some material, but there must be a positive recitation of
    "aging", or "precipitation", or words to that effect in the claims to place
    a material here.

    (3)     Note.  "Solution" treated material which has not been positively
    claimed as given an aging, or precipitation treatment is excluded herefrom
    and placed in subclasses 325 or 327 as appropriate.


CLS 148/327
TXT Eight percent for more total content of nickel and/or manganese:

    Stock material under subclass 325 which additionally contains a combined
    total of 8 percent or more.

    (1)     Note.  The stock material need not contain any nickel or manganese
    at all if the content of the other element is 8 percent or more.


CLS 148/328
TXT Age or precipitation hardened or strengthened:

    Stock material under subclass 320 which has been first heated to a
    relatively high temperature to cause ingredients thereof to dissolve to
    form a solid solution and then aged, or heated to a lower temperature for
    an extended period of time whereby phases are precipitated which increase
    the hardness, or strength of the material.

    (1)     Note.  Often after the first high temperature heating "solution
    treatment" the material is quenched room temperature before being heated to
    age, or precipitate.

    (2)     Note.  The aging, or precipitation may take place at room
    temperature for some material, but there must be a positive recitation of
    "aging", or "precipitation", or words to that effect in the claims to place
    a material here.

    (3)     Note.  "Solution" treated material which has not been positively
    claimed as given an aging, or precipitation treatment is excluded herefrom
    and placed in appropriate subclasses below.


CLS 148/329
TXT Eight percent or more manganese containing:

    Stock material under subclass 320 which additionally contains 8 percent or
    more manganese.


CLS 148/330
TXT Beryllium or boron containing:

    Stock material under subclass 320 which additionally contains beryllium or
    boron.


CLS 148/331
TXT Rare earth metal containing:

    Stock material under subclass 320 which additionally contains scandium,
    yttrium or a lanthanide metal.


CLS 148/332
TXT Copper containing:

    Stock material under subclass 320 which additionally contains copper.


CLS 148/333
TXT Chromium containing, but less than 9 percent:

    Stock material under subclass 320 which additionally contains chromium in
    an amount of less than 9 percent.


CLS 148/334
TXT Molybdenum containing:

    Stock material under subclass 333 which additionally contains molybdenum.


CLS 148/335
TXT Nickel containing:

    Stock material under subclass 334 which additionally contains nickel.


CLS 148/336
TXT Nickel containing:

    Stock material under subclass 320 which additionally contains nickel.


CLS 148/337
TXT Three percent or more manganese containing or containing other transition
    metal in any amount:

    Stock material under subclass 320 which additionally contains at least one
    of 3 percent or more manganese or any amount of one or more other
    transition metals not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  Transition metals are those elements with atomic numbers 21
    through 30, 39 through 48 and 57 through 80.


CLS 148/400
TXT Stock:

    Elemental metal, alloys or metallic compositions which (a) are the product
    of a process or this class (148) e.g, heat treated, age hardened etc., (b)
    are claimed in terms of specific magnetic properties, (c) are amorphous,
    (d) possess the property of shape memory, (e) are the product of
    significant Class 164, Metal Founding, step, e.g., chill cast,
    directionally solidified etc., or (f) are the product of the dispersion of
    particulate matter in molten metal which particulate matter retains its
    identity in the final product, e.g., dispersion strengthened.

    (1)     Note.  An alloy or metallic composition defined solely in terms of
    its elemental constituents is classified in Class 420, Alloys or Metallic
    Compositions, whether or not such a claim includes a recitation of physical
    or chemical properties such as noncorrosiveness, hardness or ductility
    which are inherent in the alloy or metallic composition.

    (2)     Note.  As to (a) of this subclass definition the recitation of
    chemical or physical properties which are the result of a Class 148 process
    of treatment is proper for this or indented subclasses.  As to (e) of this
    subclass definition a significant Class 164 step is one in which there is a
    particular Class 164 manipulation intended to control the internal
    structure of the product.  The recitations "chill cast" and "directionally
    solidified"  are considered to be significant Class 164 manipulations.  As
    to (f) of this subclass definition there must be a clear disclosure that
    the particles remain as such in the product for placement hereunder. Cases
    of doubt will be resolved by placement in Class 420.

    (3)     Note.  The order of superiority among various alloy, metallic
    composition and metal stock areas and methods of manufacture involving them
    is as follows:

    1.      Class 419, Powder Metallurgy Processes.

    2.      Class 75, Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use
    Therein, Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, etc., subclasses 228+,
    consolidated metal powder composition.

    3.      Class 420, Alloys or Metallic Compositions, claimed as products.

    4.      Class 148, Metal Treatment, subclasses 2 through 30 in class
    schedule
    order, providing for methods of treatment of solid metal.

    5.      Class 148, Metal Treatment, subclasses 400+, stock.

    6.      Class 420, Alloys or Metallic Compositions, processes of making
    including melting.

    7.      Class 164, Metal Founding.

    This list is not complete but may be added to as the proper relationship of
    other areas is determined.  For a more comprehensive discussion of other
    metallurgical areas and the relationship among them see the definition, of
    Class 420, Alloys or Metallic Compositions.

    (4)     Note.  In general, no cross-references have been placed in this, or
    indented subclasses based on disclosure from Class 420, Alloys or Metallic
    Compositions.  Thus a search for unclaimed disclosure of stock for this and
    indented subclasses should be made in the appropriate subclasses of Class
    420 based on the composition of the material.  The only exception of this
    rule is subclasses 402 to 404 of this class which serve as digests for
    their subject matter disclosed in Class 420 original patents.  Also, in
    general no cross-references have been placed in Class 420 from this and
    indented subclasses based on disclosure of the composition of the stock in
    this and indented subclasses.  The only exception to this rule is the
    cross-reference are collections of Class 420, subclasses 901 to 903 which
    also serve as a collection point for pertinent disclosure from this and
    indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 411.1+ and
    615+ for nonmetallic and metallic composites, respectively, defined in
    terms of the composition of their components, and the main Class Definition
    of the class (428), sections VI, B, VI, C4 and VI, C6, for the distinction
    between stock materials for that class (428) and a "stock" classified
    herein.


CLS 148/401
TXT Radioactive:

    Stock material under subclass 400 which is claimed as being radioactive,
    containing an isotope of an element which is radioactive, or containing an
    element of which all the known isotopes are radioactive.

    (1)     Note.  The elements of which all known isotopes are radioactive are
    technetium, promethium, and all the elements of atomic number 84 and higher.


CLS 148/402
TXT Mechanical memory:

    Stock material under subclass 400 which when shaped at a first temperature,
    and reshaped at a different temperature resumes its first shape when
    returned to the first temperature, or at some intermediate temperature.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is placed in this class since this "memory" of
    the first shape is believed to occur due to changes of crystal form at
    different temperatures.  However, all metallic stock possessing mechanical
    memory is placed hereunder no matter what the disclosed theory may be.


CLS 148/403
TXT Amorphous, i.e., glassy:

    Stock material under subclass 400 which has no regular crystal structure,
    but rather has a series of noncrystaline areas much like a glass.

    (1)     Note.  This structure usually is created by cooling certain alloys
    at extremely high rates of speed, such that the alloy can be solidified and
    cooled before having a chance to crystallize.


CLS 148/404
TXT Directionally solidified:

    Stock material under subclass 400 in which solidification of the alloy, or
    metallic composition has been carried out along one plane only, usually
    resulting in a "columnar" crystalline structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 611 for metallic
    stock material with preformed fibers which have an orientation coordinate
    with the shape of the body.


CLS 148/405
TXT Age or precipitation hardened or strengthened:

    Stock material under subclass 400 which has been first heated to a
    relatively high temperature to cause ingredients thereof to dissolve to
    form a solid solution and then aged, or heated to a lower temperature for
    an extended period of time whereby phases are precipitated which increase
    the hardness, or strength, of the material.

    (1)     Note.  Often after the first high temperature heating "solution
    treatment" the material is quenched to room temperature before being heated
    to age, or precipitate.

    (2)     Note.  The aging, or precipitation may take place at room
    temperature for some material, but there must be a positive recitation of
    "aging", or "precipitation", or words to that effect in the claims to place
    a material here.

    (3)     Note.  "Solution" treated material which has not been positively
    claimed as given an aging, or precipitation treatment is excluded herefrom
    and placed in appropriate subclasses below.


CLS 148/406
TXT Magnesium base:

    Stock material under subclass 405 which contains over 50 percent magnesium.


CLS 148/407
TXT Refractory metal base:

    Stock material under subclass 405 which contains over 50 percent by weight
    of a single metal selected from titanium, vanadium, chromium, zirconium,
    niobium, molybdenum, hafnium, tantalum, or tungsten.


CLS 148/408
TXT Cobalt base:

    Stock material under subclass 405 which contains over 50 percent of cobalt
    by weight.


CLS 148/409
TXT Nickel base:

    Stock material under subclass 405 which contains over 50 percent of nickel
    by weight.


CLS 148/410
TXT Chromium containing:

    Stock material under subclass 409 which additionally contains chromium.


CLS 148/411
TXT Copper base:

    Stock material under subclass 405 which contains over 50 percent of copper
    by weight.


CLS 148/412
TXT Tin containing:

    Stock material under subclass 411 which additionally contains tin.


CLS 148/413
TXT Zinc containing:

    Stock material under subclass 411 which additionally contains zinc.


CLS 148/414
TXT Nickel containing:

    Stock material under subclass 411 which additionally contains nickel.


CLS 148/415
TXT Aluminum base:

    Stock material under subclass 405 which contains over 50 percent of
    aluminum.


CLS 148/416
TXT Copper containing:

    Stock material under subclass 415 which additionally contains copper.


CLS 148/417
TXT Magnesium containing:

    Stock material under subclass 416 which additionally contains magnesium.


CLS 148/418
TXT Vanadium, niobium or tantalum containing: Stock material under subclass 417
    which additionally contains at least one of the metals vanadium, niobium,
    or tantalum.


CLS 148/419
TXT Containing over 50 percent metal, but no base metal:

    Stock material under subclass 405 which contains over 50 percent of total
    metal by weight, but wherein no single metal is present in an amount over
    50 percent by weight.


CLS 148/420
TXT Magnesium base:

    Stock material under subclass 400 which contains over 50 percent of
    magnesium.


CLS 148/421
TXT Titanium, zirconium or hafnium base:

    Stock material under subclass 400 which contains over 50 percent of
    titanium, over 50 percent, zirconium or over 50 percent hafnium by weight.


CLS 148/422
TXT Vanadium, niobium or tantalum base:

    Stock material under subclass 400 which contains over 50 percent vanadium,
    over 50 percent niobium, or over 50 percent tantalum by weight.


CLS 148/423
TXT Chromium, molybdenum or tungsten base: Stock material under subclass 400
    which contains over 50 percent of chromium, over 50 percent of molybdenum,
    or over 50 percent of tungsten by weight.


CLS 148/424
TXT Manganese base:

    Stock material under subclass 400 which contains over 50 percent of
    manganese by weight.


CLS 148/425
TXT Cobalt base:

    Stock material under subclass 400 which contains over 50 percent of cobalt
    by weight.


CLS 148/426
TXT Nickel base:

    Stock material under subclass 400 which contains over 50 percent of nickel
    by weight.


CLS 148/427
TXT Chromium containing:

    Stock material under subclass 426 which additionally contains chromium.


CLS 148/428
TXT Aluminum containing:

    Stock material under subclass 427 which additionally contains aluminum.


CLS 148/429
TXT Aluminum containing:

    Stock material under subclass 426 which additionally contains aluminum.


CLS 148/430
TXT Noble metal base:

    Stock material under subclass 400 which contains over 50 percent by weight
    of a single metal selected from ruthenium, rhodium, paladium, osmium,
    iridium, platinum, gold, or silver.


CLS 148/431
TXT Silver base containing in situ formed oxides:

    Stock material under subclass 430 which contains over 50 percent of silver
    by weight and additionally contains metal oxides formed in the silver
    containing the material by chemical reaction.

    (1)     Note.  The oxide may be formed, e.g., by reaction of a metal oxide
    with another to produce a different metal oxide, e.g., AgO + Cd --- CdO +
    Ag, or by reaction of silver base alloy with elemental oxygen to oxidize
    part of the alloy, etc.


CLS 148/432
TXT Copper base:

    Stock material under subclass 400 which contains over 50 percent of copper
    by weight.


CLS 148/433
TXT Tin containing:

    Stock material under subclass 432 which additionally contains tin.


CLS 148/434
TXT Zinc:

    Stock material under subclass 432 which additionally contains zinc.


CLS 148/435
TXT Nickel containing:

    Stock material under subclass 432 which additionally contains nickel.


CLS 148/436
TXT Aluminum containing:

    Stock material under subclass 432 which additionally contains aluminum.


CLS 148/437
TXT Aluminum base:

    Stock material under subclass 400 which contains over 50 percent of
    aluminum by weight.


CLS 148/438
TXT Copper containing:

    Stock material under subclass 437 which additionally contains copper.


CLS 148/439
TXT Magnesium containing:

    Stock material under subclass 438 which additionally contains magnesium.


CLS 148/440
TXT Magnesium containing:

    Stock material under subclass 437 which additionally contains magnesium.


CLS 148/441
TXT Zinc base:

    Stock material under subclass 400 which contains over 50 percent of zinc by
    weight.


CLS 148/442
TXT Containing over 50 percent metal, but no base metal:

    Stock material under subclass 400 which contains over 50 percent of total
    metal by weight, but wherein no single metal is present in an amount of
    over 50 percent by weight.


CLS 148/500
TXT Utilizing disclosed mathematical formula or relationship:
    Process under subclass 95 wherein a mathematical formula or relationship
    containing variables is disclosed and utilized in the claimed process.


    (1)     Note.  The mere use of constants or percentages, per se, does not
    meet the criteria for this subclass.


CLS 148/501
TXT Nonferrous metal, nonferrous alloy or no-base alloy:
    Process under subclass 500 wherein the metal is a nonferrous metal, an
    alloy having greater than 50 percent of one of the nonferrous metals or an
    alloy having no one metal present in an amount greater than 50 percent.


CLS 148/502
TXT Aluminum(Al) or aluminum base alloy:
    Process under subclass 501 wherein aluminum or an alloy containing greater
    than 50 percent aluminum is the nonferrous based metal.


CLS 148/503
TXT Utilizing therein symbol for temperature:
    Process under subclass 500 which utilizes, in a mathematical formula or
    relationship therein, a symbol to represent temperature other than
    abbreviations representing the temperature scale (e.g., C for centigrade,
    etc.).

    (1)     Note. Utilization of a temperature or temperature range, per se, is
    not proper  hereinunder unless the temperature or temperature range is part
    of the mathematical formula or relationship.


CLS 148/504
TXT With working step:
    Process under subclass 503 which includes a working step.


CLS 148/505
TXT Utilizing therein factors or percentages related to metal or metal alloy
    composition (i.e., including carbon content):Process under subclass 500
    wherein a mathematical formula or relationship utilizes factors or
    percentages related to a metal or alloy composition including all materials
    whether metal or not (e.g., carbon content).

    (1)     Note.  For this subclass, the mere use of percentages or moles
    utilized to define a metal or metal alloy composition is not sufficient by
    itself for placement herein.  An actual mathematical formula or
    relationship must be present which includes as a part thereof factors or
    percentages related to the composition.


CLS 148/506
TXT With chromium(Cr) in the mathematical relationship:
    Process under subclass 505 wherein a factor or percentage related to
    Chromium(Cr) content is utilized in a mathematical formula or relationship.


CLS 148/507
TXT With titanium(Ti) in the mathematical relationship:
    Process under subclass 505 wherein a factor or percentage related to
    Titanium(Ti) content is utilized in a formula or mathematical relationship.


CLS 148/508
TXT With measuring, testing, or sensing:
    Process under subclass 95 which includes a step involving measuring,
    testing, or sensing of a reaction condition.

    (1)     Note.  The adjustment of a condition to a specified level (e.g.,
    temperature) is not proper hereinunder unless there is an actual recitation
    in the claim of measuring, testing or sensing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for processes of
    measuring or testing, per se.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for
    processes of determining electrical properties by electrical means, per se,
    even though nonelectrical values are derived from the electrical values
    determined.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for
    processes which utilize visible light to measure optical properties, per
    se, or for processes of testing visible light for optical properties and
    which utilize visible light to test for nonoptical properties, per se, when
    not elsewhere provided.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for thermal
    testing, per se, or the combination of thermal testing and nonthermal
    testing, per se.


CLS 148/509
TXT Magnetic or electrical property:
    Process under subclass 508 wherein a magnetic or electrical property is
    measured, tested, or sensed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100+,   for processes which include the intent of developing, modifying or
    preserving the magnetic properties, per se, of a free metal or alloy.

    (1)     Note.  In many cases of metal treatment, magnetic properties are
    inherently changed.  The mere use of magnetic property changes to determine
    other microstructural changes or to follow the course of the process is
    proper hereinunder  unless the emphasis and intent is consistent with
    subclasses 100+.  If there is any doubt as to intent, hierarchy prevails
    and a cross-reference to other parts of this class is advisable.


CLS 148/510
TXT Change in dimension (e.g., expansion, elongation, distortion, etc.):Process
    under subclass 508 wherein a change in dimension (e.g., expansion,
    elongation, distortion, etc.) of a treated metal or alloy is measured,
    tested or sensed.


CLS 148/511
TXT Temperature:
    Process under subclass 508 wherein there is an actual step of measuring,
    sensing, or testing of temperature.


CLS 148/512
TXT Surface melting (e.g., melt alloying etc.):
    Process under subclass 95 wherein only a surface of the solid or semisolid
    metal is melted during the process.

    (1)     Note.  Alloying a melted metal surface by application of
    nonreactive alloying ingredients (e.g., other free metals, etc.) which
    diffuse into the melted metal to form an alloyed (i.e., not chemically
    reactive coating) surface composition including the ingredients of the
    melted metal surface and the infused ingredients is one of the species
    acceptable hereinunder.

    (2)     Note.  Some other species of surface melting involve purposes of
    hardening or relieving stress.

    (3)     Note.  Surface melting, per se, utilizing a heat source for
    purposes of sealing or reflowing the metal to close pores or remove cracks
    goes to the appropriate heating class.  If homogenizing, alloying, or other
    modifying of metal microstructure (e.g., rehardening, diffusing, etc.) is
    present, this subclass is proper.

    (4)     Note.  There is no intent to take casting or melt coating, per se,
    into this subclass which relates only to melting of a solid metal substrate
    surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206+,   for processes of carburizing or nitridizing a metal substrate from
    an external source of carbon or nitrogen.

    240+,   for processes of reactive coating a metal substrate an externally
    supplied reactive ingredient as defined thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, etc., particularly subclass 10.11
    for processes of zone melting or fractional crystallization wherein solid
    metal is traversed by a melt zone causing migration of the impurities
    within the metal resulting in purification of the metal or for processes of
    refinining (e.g., smelting) molten metal zones by selective crystallization
    and separation of the crystallization phase from the melt to effect
    purification (i.e., fractional crystallization) thereof.


    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, appropriate subclasses for processes of
    welding or joining of metal preforms by fusion bonding wherein there may be
    surface melting.

    (1)     Note.  The combination of metal fusion bonding, as in Class 228
    with processes acceptable under the Class 148 definition, is proper for
    Class 148.  However, this subclass specifically is excluding  metal fusion
    bonding of the type found in Class 228.  See particularly subclasses 516+
    hereinunder for the combination of metal fusion bonding with processes
    acceptable under the Class 148 definition.

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclasses for processes including
    applying a melted metal coating, per se, to a solid metal substrate.

    (1)     Note.  The distinction for Class 427 is that the total composition
    of the applied  coating comes from an external source as opposed to any
    portion thereof, except for the interface therewith, coming from the metal
    substrate to which the coating is applied. Also, in Class 148 coating, the
    metal substrate is not in a molten condition when the coating is applied.
    However, if a melted metal substrate has a nonreactive coating or alloying
    material applied to it, placement is proper in this subclass if the
    resultant coating includes ingredients of the melted substrate and infused
    alloying ingredient. Moreover, if coating of a solid substrate by a Class
    427 operation is involved in a combined process, melting of the metal
    coating surface occurring during a melting step separate from the coating
    operation must also include melting of the substrate to be proper in this
    subclass of Class 148.


CLS 148/513
TXT Treating loose metal powder, particle or flake:
    Process under subclass 95 wherein (1) loose metal or metal alloy powder,
    particle or flake in a solid or semisolid state is cooled or heat treated
    to modify or maintain the internal physical structure (i.e.,
    microstructure) or chemical properties and not elsewhere provided or (2)
    solid or semisolid metal or metal alloy is cooled or heat treated to modify
    or maintain the internal physical structure  (i.e., microstructure) or
    chemical properties and loose metal powder, particle  or flake is produced
    therefrom (e.g., comminuting).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, etc., appropriate subclasses for
    processes of producing or purifying loose metal or metal alloy powder or
    for loose metal powder compositions.

    (1)     Note.  Class 75 takes purification of metal powder compositions
    that involve washing or cleaning operations and includes utilization of a
    vacuum, per se, therefor.  However, Class 148 takes heat-treatment of solid
    or semi-solid metal powder involving chemical or physio-chemical operations
    to alter the metal composition (e.g., decarburizing, dehydrogenating,
    denitridizing, etc.).

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent or Support Therefor:  Product or Process of
    Making,  particularly subclasses 300+ for process of making metal
    catalysts.  The line to other classes are expressed in Class 502.


CLS 148/514
TXT Treating consolidated metal powder, per se (i.e., no sintering or
    compacting step present):Process under subclass 95 wherein a metal or metal
    alloy powder in a preconsolidated state is treated and there is no
    sintering or no consolidating step present.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, etc., subclasses 228+ for
    consolidated metal powder compositions.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, appropriate subclasses for processes
    of consolidating metal powder  compositions having a sintering or
    compacting step therein and which may additionally have post-consolidating
    treatment therein.

    (1)     Note. If a sintering or compacting step is present, placement goes
    to Class 419 even if there is a subsequent treatment controlling the
    microstructure or chemical properties.  However,if in the recited process
    the starting material is preconsolidated and no further sintering or
    consolidating is included, Class 148 will  control.


CLS 148/515
TXT With explosive or exothermic agent:
    Process under subclass 95 wherein an explosive or exothermic chemical agent
    is  utilized to treat a metal article or stock.

    (1)     Note.  Since the use of an explosive agent may be considered to
    involve working, the metal working classes provide for the use of an
    explosive agent.  It is emphasized here that the line between Class 148 and
    the metal working classes  requires that there be a separate step from the
    explosion in which there is a change in the internal physical structure
    (i.e., microstructure) or chemical properties or that the explosive force
    changes the microstructure without deforming of the metal to be  placed in
    this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The use of the exothermic agent must be to produce heat for
    modifying or maintaining the internal physical structure or chemical
    properties of the metal which is in a separate step from the step of
    bonding by fusing or welding which is provided for in the mechanical
    treating classes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 421.2 for a process using an explosive
    agent to shape metal.


CLS 148/516
TXT Producing or treating layered, bonded, welded, or mechanically engaged
    article or stock as a final product:Process under subclass 95 wherein a
    layered, bonded, welded, or mechanically engaged (e.g., inserts, etc.)
    article or stock having at least one layer or integral portion thereof made
    of metal or metal alloy is the product of a process consistent with the
    class definition.

    (1)     Note.  To remain in this subclass, it makes no difference whether
    layered, bonded, welded, or mechanically engaged article or mechanically
    engaged stock is the starting material of  the process.  It is however
    essential that the final product of the process be layered, bonded, welded,
    or mechanically engaged.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    538+,   particularly subclasses 582, 591, 596, 606, 615, 625, 703, or 708,
    if the layer is a treating agent (e.g., protective annealing shield such as
    CaO, CaCO3, etc.) which is intended as a temporary layer but not part of
    the final product.


CLS 148/517
TXT Subambient temperature:
    Process under subclass 516 wherein any metal portion of the article or
    stock undergoing treatment is actually cooled to a temperature identified
    as either below ambient temperature or below 20_C to control the internal
    physical structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical properties thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    577,    for processes of treating nonlayered metal or metal alloy at
    subambient temperature.


CLS 148/518
TXT With electrocoating (e.g., electroplating, anodizing, sputtering,
    etc.):Process under subclass 516 which includes a step of electrocoating
    (e.g., electroplating, anodizing, etc.) by application of an externally
    supplied electrical current or by sputtering.

    (1)     Note.  If during a post-treatment operation the substrate becomes
    subjected to a Class 148 treatment that goes beyond the mere interdiffusion
    at the interface to perfect the coating, placement goes in this subclass
    whether or not the  coating layer is involved.  However, an electrocoating
    step must be present for this  subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, appropriate subclasses for processes involving
    electrocoating of metal substrates and which include Class 148 operations
    as herein defined which are preparatory to the electrocoating or are
    posttreatment operations limited to the coating layer or involving
    diffusion affecting only the interface.  Electrorefining is not considered
    to be electrocoating in Class 205 or for this subclass in Class 148.


CLS 148/519
TXT Pipe or tube:
    Process under subclass 516 wherein a pipe or tube is produced or treated.



CLS 148/520
TXT With induction heating:
    Process under subclass 519 which includes a step of heating the metal
    workpiece by utilizing a magnetic field to induce a flow of electrons in
    the workpiece that results in production of heat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclasses for induction heating, per
    se, of a metal or for working and induction heating of metal which does not
    meet the criteria for significant heating as described under the notes in
    subclass 95 of Class 148.


CLS 148/521
TXT With metal fusion bonding:
    Process under subclass 519 which includes a step of metal fusion bonding of
    metal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclasses for processes of fusion
    bonding of metal, per se, by electric heating without a separate step
    involving significant heat treatment as defined in the notes under subclass
    95 of Class 148.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, appropriate subclasses for processes of
    welding metal, per se, without a separate step involving significant heat
    treatment as defined in the notes under subclass 95 of Class 148.


CLS 148/522
TXT With casting or solidifying from melt:
    Process under subclass 516 wherein a metal or metal alloy, article or stock
    is subjected to a casting operation or a total metal mass (i.e., not just a
    portion or coating) is solidified from a melted state.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    538,    for casting or solidifying from a melted state nonlayered, bonded,
    welded or  mechanically engaged stock or article.  See the notes thereunder
    for locations of related classes.


CLS 148/523
TXT Of aluminum(Al) or aluminum alloy:
    Process under subclass 522 wherein a metal or metal alloy being cast or
    solidified is aluminum or an alloy containing greater than 50 percent
    aluminum.


CLS 148/524
TXT With metal fusion bonding step utilizing electron arc or beam:Process under
    subclass 516 which utilizes an electron arc or beam for fusion bonding
    metal to metal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclasses for processes of metal
    fusion bonding which use an electron arc or beam, per se, without a
    separate significant heating step as defined in the notes of subclass 95 of
    Class 148.


CLS 148/525
TXT Utilizing wave energy (e.g., laser, electromagnetic wave energy, etc.)
    plasma or  electron arc or beam:Process under subclass 516 which utilizes
    wave energy (e.g., laser, electromagnetic wave energy, etc.), plasma or an
    electron arc or beam for (1) modifying or maintaining the internal physical
    structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical properties of metal or a metal
    alloy or (2) in a combined process that includes a step of modifying or
    maintaining the internal physical structure or chemical properties of metal
    or a metal alloy, the use of electromagnetic wave energy, plasma, electron
    arc or beam for any purpose.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    565,    for processes of treating nonlayered metal with electromagnetic
    wave energy or electron arc or beam.


CLS 148/526
TXT Electric heating with work as electrical conductor (e.g., alternating
    current, induction, etc.):Process under subclass 516 wherein an electrical
    current passes through the workpiece or is made to flow in a workpiece or
    through induction to cause the heating thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    566+,   for processes of electric heating with nonlayered metal as an
    electrical conductor.


CLS 148/527
TXT With metal next to or bonded to metal:
    Process under subclass 516 wherein the article or stock being produced or
    treated has a metal layer or part next to or bonded to an adjacent metal
    layer or  part.


CLS 148/528
TXT With brazing or soldering:
    Process under subclass 527 wherein a step of brazing or soldering is
    present or wherein brazed or soldered article or stock is being treated.


CLS 148/529
TXT Iron(Fe) or iron base alloy present:
    Process under subclass 527 wherein at least one of the layers or parts is
    iron(Fe) or an iron alloy containing greater than 50 percent iron.


CLS 148/530
TXT Next to nonferrous metal or nonferrous base alloy:
    Process under subclass 529 wherein the iron or iron base alloy is next to a
    second layer or part which is identifiable as a nonferrous metal or
    nonferrous base metal alloy containing greater than 50 percent of any one
    of the nonferrous metals.


CLS 148/531
TXT Aluminum(Al) or aluminum base alloy:
    Process under subclass 530 wherein the nonferrous metal is aluminum(Al) or
    the nonferrous base alloy has greater than 50 percent aluminum.



CLS 148/532
TXT Copper(Cu) or copper base alloy:
    Process under subclass 530 wherein the  nonferrous metal is copper(Cu) or
    the nonferrous base alloy contains greater than 50 percent copper.


CLS 148/533
TXT Zinc(Zn), zinc base alloy or unspecified galvanizing:
    Process under subclass 530 in which the  nonferrous metal is zinc(Zn) or
    the nonferrous base alloy contains greater than 50 percent zinc or in which
    there is a galvanizing step that does not specify the coating metal.


CLS 148/534
TXT With working:
    Process under subclass 529 in which there is a metal deforming step.


CLS 148/535
TXT Aluminum(Al) or aluminum base alloy present:
    Process under subclass 527 wherein at least one of the layers or parts is
    aluminum(Al) or an aluminum alloy containing greater than 50 percent
    aluminum.


CLS 148/536
TXT Copper(Cu) or copper base alloy present:
    Process under subclass 527 wherein at least one of the layers or parts is
    copper or copper alloy containing greater than 50 percent copper.


CLS 148/537
TXT With coating step:
    Process under subclass 516 which includes a coating step.


CLS 148/538
TXT With casting or solidifying from melt:
    Process under subclass 95 which includes a step of casting metal or
    solidifying a total metal mass (i.e., not just a portion or coating) from a
    melted condition.

    (1)     Note.  Class 148 will take all processes of casting and significant
    heating with working or casting and heating wherein a change in
    microstructure occurs during a   post-casting operation.  In Class 148,
    both electrical and nonelectrical heating is acceptable.  See the notes
    under the Class 148 definition to determine what constitutes significant
    heating for distinguishing over the other metal working and heating classes.

    (2)     Note.  Treating of a cast or solidified metal starting material
    without an actual recitation of the casting or solidifying step is improper
    for this subclass and the subclasses indented hereinunder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221,    for processes of casting combined with carburizing or nitriding.

    512,    for processes of treating metal by melting only the surface thereof.

    522+,   for processes of producing or treating layered, bonded, welded or
    mechanically engaged article or stock as a final product when combined with
    a casting operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, appropriate subclasses for a process combining
    casting and working of metal.

    164,    Metal Founding, appropriate subclasses for a process of casting,
    per se, of metal.

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclasses for processes of casting,
    per se, or casting and working involving nonsignificant heat treating using
    electrical heating.


CLS 148/539
TXT Centrifugal casting:
    Process under subclass 538 wherein melted metal is cast from a rotating
    means by centrifugal force (e.g., spin casting).


CLS 148/540
TXT Iron(Fe) or iron base alloy:
    Process under subclass 538 wherein the metal being cast is iron(Fe) or an
    iron alloy containing greater than 50 percent iron.



CLS 148/541
TXT Continuous casting:
    Process under subclass 540 wherein the metal being cast is continuously
    cast in an endless manner without interruption from the casting apparatus.


CLS 148/542
TXT Containing at least nine percent chromium(Cr) (e.g., stainless steel,
    etc.):Process under 540 wherein the iron alloy contains at least nine
    percent chromium(Cr) (e.g., stainless steel, etc.).


CLS 148/543
TXT Containing at least 1.5 percent carbon:
    Process under subclass 540 wherein the iron alloy contains at least 1.5
    percent carbon.


CLS 148/544
TXT With working:
    Process under subclass 543 which involves a metal deforming step.


CLS 148/545
TXT With tempering, ageing, solution treating (i.e., for hardening),
    precipitation hardening or strengthening, or quenching:Process under
    subclass 543 which includes a step of tempering, ageing, solution treating
    (i.e., for hardening), precipitation hardening or precipitation
    strengthening, or quenching as a literally expressed operation.


CLS 148/546
TXT With working:
    Process under subclass 540 which includes a metal deforming step.


CLS 148/547
TXT With tempering, ageing, solution treating (i.e., for hardening),
    precipitation hardening or strengthening, or quenching:Process under
    subclass 546 which involves a step of tempering, ageing, solution treating,
    precipitation hardening or precipitation strengthening, or quenching as a
    literally expressed operation.


CLS 148/548
TXT With tempering, ageing, solution treating (i.e., for hardening),
    precipitation hardening or strengthening, or quenching:Process under
    subclass 540 which involves a step of tempering, ageing, solution treating
    (i.e., for hardening), precipitation hardening or precipitation
    strengthening, or quenching as a literally expressed operation.


CLS 148/549
TXT Aluminum(Al) or aluminum base alloy:
    Process under subclass 538 wherein the metal being cast is aluminum(Al) or
    an aluminum alloy containing greater than 50 percent aluminum.


CLS 148/550
TXT With extruding or drawing:
    Process under subclass 549 wherein there is a step of extruding or drawing
    of the  aluminum or aluminum alloy.


CLS 148/551
TXT Continuous casting:
    Process under subclass 549 wherein the metal being cast is continuously
    cast from the casting apparatus in an endless manner without interruption.


CLS 148/552
TXT With working:
    Process under subclass 549 which involves a metal deforming step.


CLS 148/553
TXT Copper(Cu) or copper base alloy:
    Process under subclass 538 wherein the metal being cast is copper(Cu) or a
    copper alloy containing greater than 50 percent copper.


CLS 148/554
TXT With working:
    Process under subclass 553 which involves a metal deforming step.


CLS 148/555
TXT Nickel(Ni) or nickel base alloy:
    Process under subclass 538 wherein the metal being cast is nickel(Ni) or a
    nickel alloy containing greater than 50 percent nickel.


CLS 148/556
TXT With working:
    Process under subclass 555 which involves a metal deforming step.


CLS 148/557
TXT With working:
    Process under subclass 538 which involves a metal deforming step.


CLS 148/558
TXT With vibration (e.g., mechanical, sound, etc.):
    Process under subclass 95 which involves the use of mechanical vibration
    (e.g., high frequency sound, etc.) to modify the microstructure of the
    metal without deformation  of the metal in the vibrating operation.



CLS 148/559
TXT Heating or cooling of solid metal:
    Process under subclass 95 wherein metal remaining in the solid or semisolid
    state (i.e., unmelted) throughout the entire process is subjected to a
    heating or cooling operation.


CLS 148/560
TXT Actinide or trans-actinide metal or alloy having greater than 50 percent
    actinide or trans-actinide metals:Process under subclass 559 wherein the
    metal undergoing treatment is a metal or metal alloy having greater than 50
    percent of actinide or a trans-actinide metal or greater than 50 percent of
    a combination of different actinide and/or trans-actinide metals in the
    alloy.

    (1)     Note.  The  actinide  or  trans-actinide metals   include:
    actinium(Ac),thorium(Th), protactinium(Pa),uranium(U),
    neptunium(Np),plutonium(Pu), americium(Am),curium(Cm),
    berkelium(Bk),californium(Cf), einsteinium(Es),fermium(Fm),
    mendelevium(Md),nbelium(No), and lawrencium(Lr).


CLS 148/561
TXT Passing through an amorphous state or treating or producing an amorphous
    metal or alloy:Process under subclass 559 wherein a metal or metal alloy
    having no regular crystalline structure or periodicity (i.e., amorphous) in
    any amount is produced or  treated by a process under the class definition
    or wherein a metal or metal alloy passes through a physical state having no
    regular crystalline structure or periodicity during the treatment of the
    metal or metal alloy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    for a process of developing, improving, modifying, or preserving
    the magnetic properties of an amorphous metal or metal alloy.

    403,    for stock material which is in an amorphous state.


CLS 148/562
TXT Treating single crystal:
    Process under subclass 559 wherein a single crystal metal or metal alloy is
    the material being treated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes and non-coating apparatus for
    growing therein-defined single-crystal of all types of materials, including
    metal, alloy, or intermetallic single-crystal (except those proper for
    Class 164, subclass 122.2).  Class 117 is proper for metal, alloy, or
    intermetallic single-crystal growing in any physical state, including solid
    phase recrystallization.  Class 117 is proper for metal, alloy, or
    intermetallic single-crystal growing and such combined with perfecting
    operations for the growing step, except that Class 148 provides for
    single-crystal growing combined with a subsequent step of heat treatment
    (which herein includes controlled cooling) when the purpose of the heat
    treatment (or controlled cooling) is to modify the internal physical
    structure or chemical property of a metal, alloy, or intermetallic
    material.  When the subsequent heat treatment (or controlled cooling)
    merely operates on the single-crystallinity, such as stress or strain
    annealing or to remove point defects, the combined process is proper for
    Class 117; when the subsequent heat treatment (or controlled cooling)
    operates to effect significant metal, alloy, or intermetallic material heat
    treatment (or controlled cooling) purposes, such as solutionizing,
    homogenizing, or precipitation hardening, then the combined process is
    proper for Class 148.  Class 117 provides for simultaneous or prior
    perfecting operations combined with single-crystal growing.  See Class 117
    definition, section C, (4) Note, for discussion of perfecting operations.


CLS 148/563
TXT Mechanical memory (e.g., shape, heat-recoverable, etc.):
    Process under subclass 559 wherein a metal or metal alloy having the
    ability when originally shaped at a first temperature and reshaped at a
    second temperature to undergo a reversible thermoelastic transition and
    resume its original shape when returned to the first temperature or an
    intermediate temperature is produced or treated in a process under the
    Class 148 definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402,    for stock material exhibiting a mechanical memory effect.


CLS 148/564
TXT Superplastic (e.g., dynamic recrystallization, etc.):
    Process under subclass 559 wherein a metal or metal alloy possessing the
    characteristic of not rupturing or "necking down" when extensively deformed
    is produced or treated by a process under the class definition and wherein,
    if metal working is part of the process, a working temperature is provided
    as an indication of significant heating.

    (1)     Note.  The term "superplastic" or "dynamic recrystallization hot
    working" is indicative of microstructural change.  However, if  a metal
    working step is present, placement goes to the metal working classes,
    unless the operation provides a working  temperature which in combination
    with said terms will be sufficient criteria for placement in Class 148.
    Moreover, a combination of (1) the metal class working of "superplastic"
    metal or metal alloy at a nonspecified temperature and (2) a Class 148
    operation goes in Class 148.

    (2)     Note.  Superplastic deformation (1) is often induced by heating and
    working a metal or metal alloy, possessing a very fine grain structure,
    resulting in deformation exceeding 100 percent (i.e., based on elongation)
    and (2) is associated with phase change or allotropic transformation during
    the deformation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses for a process of working a
    metal undergoing dynamic-recrystallization or plastic deformation, if no
    temperature is provided.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, subclass 902 for metal alloys
    exhibiting  superplastic behavior.


CLS 148/565
TXT Utilizing wave energy (e.g., laser, electromagnetic, etc.), plasma or
    electron arc or beam:Process under subclass 559 which utilizes wave energy
    (e.g., laser, electromagnetic, etc.), plasma or electron arc or beam for
    (1) modifying or maintaining the internal physical structure (i.e.,
    microstructure) or chemical properties of metal or metal alloy or (2) in a
    combined process including a step of modifying or maintaining the internal
    physical structure or chemical properties of a metal or metal alloy, the
    use of wave energy, plasma, electron arc, or beam for any purpose.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    512,    for process of using wave energy wherein the surface of the metal
    is melted as defined for the purposes thereunder.

    525,    for processes of utilizing electromagnetic wave energy or electron
    arc or beam to treat layered metal workpieces or articles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclasses for process of heating
    metal, per se, or for process of working metal that utilizes nonsignificant
    heating of the metal as set forth hereinabove in the line to the metal
    working classes.


CLS 148/566
TXT Electric heating with work as conductor (e.g., alternating current,
    induction, etc.):Process under subclass 559 wherein an electric current
    from an external source is passed through a metal or metal alloy workpiece
    or is made to flow in a metal or metal alloy workpiece through induction to
    cause heating thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    526,    for processes of electric heating wherein an electric current is
    passed through a layered metal or metal alloy workpiece or article.


CLS 148/567
TXT Induction:
    Process under subclass 566 wherein electricity is caused to pass through
    the workpiece by inducing current flow through influence of an external
    electrical field

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    509,    for processes of measuring or testing of electrical or magnetic
    properties utilizing induction therefor or coincident with the heating of a
    metal workpiece for Class 148 purposes.

    526,    for processes of inductively heating a layered metal or metal alloy
    workpiece or article.


CLS 148/568
TXT Wire or filament:
    Process under subclass 567 wherein the metal or metal alloy workpiece
    undergoing treatment is a wire or filament.


CLS 148/569
TXT Railway stock (e.g., rails, wheels, axles, etc.):
    Process under subclass 567 wherein the metal or metal alloy workpiece being
    treated is stock including rails, wheels, axles, or other metal parts
    utilized with a railway system.


CLS 148/570
TXT Of hollow bodies  (e.g., pipe, sphere, etc.):
    Process under subclass 567 wherein the metal or metal alloy workpiece being
    treated is hollow.


CLS 148/571
TXT Inside only:
    Process under subclass 570 wherein the hollow workpiece being treated is
    heated by induction applied only from the inside thereof.


CLS 148/572
TXT Rod, axle, shaft, or roller:
    Process under subclass 567 wherein the metal or metal alloy workpiece
    undergoing treatment is a rod, axle, shaft, or roller.



CLS 148/573
TXT Gear, threaded article, drill or serrated work surface (e.g., saw blade,
    etc.):Process under subclass 567 wherein the metal or metal alloy workpiece
    undergoing treatment is a gear, threaded article, drill or serrated work
    surface (e.g., saw blade, etc.).


CLS 148/574
TXT And cooling with fluid contact:
    Process under subclass 567 which includes a step of cooling the metal or
    metal alloy by contacting the same with a fluid cooling agent or medium.


CLS 148/575
TXT Iron(Fe) or iron base alloy:
    Process under subclass 574 wherein the metal or metal alloy workpiece
    undergoing treatment is iron(Fe) or an iron alloy containing greater than
    50 percent iron.


CLS 148/576
TXT Wire or filament:
    Process under subclass 566 wherein the metal or metal alloy workpiece
    undergoing treatment is a wire or filament.


CLS 148/577
TXT Chilling to subambient temperature:
    Process under subclass 559 wherein the metal is subjected to treatment at
    below ambient temperature (i.e., below 20_C).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    517,    for processes using subambient temperature to treat a layered
    workpiece or article.


CLS 148/578
TXT Iron(Fe) or iron base alloy:
    Process under subclass 577 wherein the metal undergoing treatment is
    iron(Fe) or an iron alloy containing greater than 50 percent iron.


CLS 148/579
TXT Iron(Fe) or iron base alloy:
    Process under subclass 559 wherein the metal being treated is iron(Fe) or
    an iron alloy containing greater than 50 percent iron.


CLS 148/580
TXT Spring or spring material:
    Process under subclass 579 wherein the metal being treated is described as
    a spring or spring material (e.g., coils, leaf, etc.).


CLS 148/581
TXT Railway stock (e.g., rails, wheels, axles, etc.):
    Process under subclass 579 wherein the metal being treated is indicated to
    be stock including rails, wheels, axles, or other metal parts utilized with
    a railway system.


CLS 148/582
TXT Treating with specified agent (e.g., heat exchange agent, protective agent,
    decarburizing agent, denitriding agent, etc.) or vacuum:Process under 581
    wherein a vacuum or a treating agent (e.g., heat exchange agent, protective
    agent, decarburizing agent, denitriding agent, etc.) specified as an
    element, compound or composition other than air or water is utilized to
    treat the iron or iron alloy.


CLS 148/583
TXT Wheel:
    Process under subclass 581 wherein the metal being treated is a wheel.


CLS 148/584
TXT With working:
    Process under subclass 581 which includes a step of deforming the metal.


CLS 148/585
TXT With work handling:
    Process under subclass 581 wherein a metal workpiece is manipulated for
    positioning or moving about during any stage of the process.


CLS 148/586
TXT Gear:
    Process under subclass 579 wherein the metal undergoing treatment is a
    part, which is usually toothed or spiraled and referred to as a gear, by
    which motion is transmitted from one portion of machinery to another.


CLS 148/587
TXT Threaded article (e.g., screws, drill bits, etc.):
    Process under subclass 579 wherein the metal being treated contains a
    threaded portion (e.g., screws, drill bits, etc.).


CLS 148/588
TXT Serrated work surface (e.g., saw blades, etc.):
    Process under subclass 579 wherein there is a serrated surface portion on
    the metal (e.g., saw blades, etc.) being treated.


CLS 148/589
TXT Ring:
    Process under subclass 579 wherein the metal undergoing treatment is in the
    shape of an annular band of limited length (i.e., ring).


CLS 148/590
TXT Pipe or tube:
    Process under subclass 579 wherein a hollow elongated cylinder (i.e., pipe
    or tube) is the metal undergoing treatment.


CLS 148/591
TXT Treating with specified agent (e.g., heat exchange agent, protective agent,
    decarburizing agent, denitriding agent, etc.) or vacuum:Process under
    subclass 590 wherein a vacuum or treating agent (e.g., heat exchange agent,
    protective agent, decarburizing agent, denitriding agent, etc.) specified
    as an element, compound or composition other than air or water is utilized
    to treat the iron or iron alloy.


CLS 148/592
TXT Nine percent or more chromium(Cr) (e.g., stainless steel, etc.):Process
    under subclass 590 wherein the pipe or tube is an iron alloy containing
    nine percent or more chromium(Cr) (e.g., stainless steel, etc.).


CLS 148/593
TXT With working:
    Process under subclass 590 which includes metal deforming.


CLS 148/594
TXT With work handling:
    Process under subclass 590 wherein a metal workpiece is manipulated for
    positioning or moving about during any stage of the process.


CLS 148/595
TXT Wire, rod, or filament:
    Process under subclass 579 wherein the workpiece undergoing treatment is a
    wire, rod, or filament.

    (1)     Note.  The diameter of the rod makes no difference to this
    subclass.


CLS 148/596
TXT Treating with specified agent (e.g., heat exchange agent, protective agent,
    decarburizing agent, denitriding agent, etc.) or vacuum:Process under
    subclass 595 wherein a vacuum or a treating agent (e.g., heat exchange
    agent, protective agent, decarburizing agent, denitriding agent, etc.)
    specified as an element, compound, or composition other than air or water
    is utilized to treat the wire, rod, or filament.


CLS 148/597
TXT Nine percent or more chromium(Cr) (e.g., stainless steel, etc.):Process
    under subclass 595 wherein the wire, rod, or filament is an iron alloy
    containing nine percent or more chromium(Cr) (e.g., stainless steel, etc.).



CLS 148/598
TXT With working:
    Process under subclass 595 which includes metal deforming.


CLS 148/599
TXT With working at or below 120oC or unspecified cold working:
    Process under subclass 598 wherein there is a metal deforming operation
    that occurs from below 120_C down to 20_C or reciting a cold working at an
    unspecified temperature.


CLS 148/600
TXT With work handling:
    Process under subclass 595 wherein the wire, rod, or filament is
    manipulated for positioning or moving about at any stage of the process.


CLS 148/601
TXT With coiling or treating of coiled strip:
    Process under subclass 579 which includes a coiling step or treating of a
    coiled strip.


CLS 148/602
TXT With working:
    Process under subclass 601 which includes a metal deforming step in
    addition to the coiling step.


CLS 148/603
TXT With working at or below 120oC or unspecified cold working:
    Process under subclass 602 wherein there is a metal deforming operation
    that occurs from or below 120_C down to 20_C or reciting cold working at an
    unspecified temperature.


CLS 148/604
TXT Of stacked plural workpieces:
    Process under subclass 579 wherein plural workpieces are vertically
    stacked, one above the other.

    (1)     Note.  Side-by-side or other arrangements for treating plural
    workpieces are not provided in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The presence of inserts or spacers between the plural
    workpieces for facilitating the treatment is acceptable for this subclass.


CLS 148/605
TXT Nine percent or more chromium(Cr) (e.g., stainless steel, etc.):Process
    under subclass 579 wherein the Iron alloy undergoing treatment contains
    nine percent or more chromium(Cr) (e.g., stainless steel, etc.).



CLS 148/606
TXT Treating with specified agent (e.g., heat exchange agent, protective agent,
    decarburizing agent, denitriding agent, etc.) or vacuum:Process under
    subclass 605 wherein a vacuum or treating agent (e.g., heat exchange agent,
    protective agent, decarburizing agent, denitriding agent, etc.) specified
    as an element, compound, or composition other than air or water is utilized
    to treat the iron or iron alloy.


CLS 148/607
TXT Ageing, solution treating (i.e., for hardening), precipitation
    strengthening or precipitation hardening:Process under subclass 605 which
    includes operations designated as ageing, solution treating (i.e., for
    hardening), precipitation strengthening or precipitation hardening.

    (1)     Note.  See the main lines for Class 148 to determine placement
    herein, over the metal working classes, if metal working is present.
    Specifically, the presence of the terms ageing, solution treating, or
    precipitation strengthening or precipitation hardening are sufficient for
    placement in Class 148, over the metal working classes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    545,    547, 548, or 622 for other Class 148 processes treating iron alloys
    by ageing, solution treating, precipitation strengthening or precipitation
    hardening.


CLS 148/608
TXT With working:
    Process under subclass 607 which includes a metal deforming step.


CLS 148/609
TXT With working:
    Process under subclass 605 which includes metal deforming.


CLS 148/610
TXT With working at or below 120oC or unspecified cold working:
    Process under subclass 609 wherein there is a metal deforming operation
    that occurs from below 120_C down to 20_C or cold working at an unspecified
    temperature.


CLS 148/611
TXT Austenitic phase structure:
    Process under subclass 605 wherein there is an Austenitic phase structure
    identified as present in the iron alloy.


CLS 148/612
TXT Starting material contains 1.7 percent or more carbon (e.g., cast iron,
    etc.):Process under subclass 579 wherein the iron alloy contains 1.7
    percent or more carbon (e.g., cast iron, etc.).


CLS 148/613
TXT Decarburizing:
    Process under subclass 612 which includes a treatment that reduces the
    carbon content present in the workpiece.


CLS 148/614
TXT Starting material is spherulitic (i.e., spheroidal) or vermicular (i.e.,
    wormlike):Process under subclass 612 wherein there is a spherulitic (i.e.,
    spheroidal) or vermicular (i.e., wormlike) carbon state present in the
    starting iron alloy undergoing treatment.


CLS 148/615
TXT Treating with specified agent (e.g., heat exchange agent, protective agent,
    decarburizing agent, denitriding agent, etc.) or vacuum:Process under
    subclass 612 wherein a vacuum or treating agent (e.g., heat exchange agent,
    protective agent, decarburizing agent, nitridizing agent, etc.) is
    specified as an element, compound, or composition other than air or water
    is utilized to treat the iron or iron alloy.


CLS 148/616
TXT Treating or producing white or malleable cast iron:
    Process under subclass 612 wherein the iron alloy undergoing treatment is
    white or malleable cast iron or wherein the product of the process is white
    or malleable cast iron.


CLS 148/617
TXT Producing malleable cast iron:
    Process under subclass 616 wherein the product of the process is a
    malleable cast iron.


CLS 148/618
TXT With spheroidal graphite production:
    Process under subclass 617 for producing a malleable cast iron product,
    also includes the production of spheroidal graphite.


CLS 148/619
TXT Containing 10 percent or more manganese(Mn) (e.g., Hadfield steel,
    etc.):Process under subclass 579 wherein the iron alloy undergoing
    treatment contains 10 percent or more manganese(Mn) (e.g., Hadfield steel,
    etc.).


CLS 148/620
TXT With working:
    Process under subclass 619 which includes metal deforming.


CLS 148/621
TXT Highly alloyed (i.e., greater than 10 percent alloying elements):Process
    under subclass 579 wherein the iron based alloy contains greater than a
    total of 10 percent alloying elements.

    (1)     Note.  Steels of the types referred to as high speed tool alloys,
    maraging alloys, and iron-based super alloys are assumed to be highly
    alloyed for this subclass lacking an indication to the contrary.


CLS 148/622
TXT Ageing, solution treating (i.e., for hardening), precipitation
    strengthening or precipitation hardening:Process under subclass 579 which
    includes operations designated as ageing, solution treating (i.e., for
    hardening), precipitation strengthening or precipitation hardening.

    (1)     Note.  See the main Class 148 lines to determine placement herein
    over the metal working classes if metal working is present.  Specifically,
    the presence of the terms ageing, solution treating, or precipitation
    strengthening or precipitation hardening are sufficient for placement in
    Class 148 over the metal working classes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    545,    547, 548, or 607 for other Class 148 processes or treating iron
    alloys by aging, solution treating, or precipitation strengthening or
    precipitation hardening as a literal expression.


CLS 148/623
TXT Overageing:
    Process under subclass 622 which defines the aging operation as
    "overageing".


CLS 148/624
TXT With working:
    Process under subclass 622 which includes metal deforming.


CLS 148/625
TXT Treating with specified agent (e.g., heat exchange agent, protective agent,
    decarburizing agent, denitriding agent, etc.) or vacuum:Process under
    subclass 579 wherein a vacuum or a treating agent (e.g., heat exchange
    agent, protective agent, decarburizing agent, denitriding agent, etc.)
    specified as an element, compound, or composition other than air or water,
    per se, to treat the iron or iron alloy.


CLS 148/626
TXT With preserving, recovering, separately treating or handling of the
    specified treating agent:Process under subclass 625 which includes
    preserving, recovering, separately treating or manipulating for positioning
    or moving about of the specified treating agent.


CLS 148/627
TXT With localized or zone heating or cooling:
    Process under subclass 625 wherein a heating or cooling operation is
    applied to a  discontinuous area of the metal workpiece to provide
    treatment limited to one or several local areas or zones and not to other
    adjacent areas.


CLS 148/628
TXT Using vacuum:
    Process under subclass 625 which involves the use of a vacuum at any stage
    of the process.


CLS 148/629
TXT Decarburizing or denitriding:
    Process under subclass 625 which includes a step decarburizing or
    denitriding.


CLS 148/630
TXT Utilizing particulate fluid bed:
    Process under subclass 625 which involves the use of a bed of particulate
    material in gaseous suspension serving as the treating agent.


CLS 148/631
TXT Fused treating agent:
    Process under subclass 625 wherein the treating agent is fused.


CLS 148/632
TXT With working:
    Process under subclass 631 which includes metal deforming.


CLS 148/633
TXT Gaseous agent:
    Process under subclass 625 which includes the use of a specified gaseous
    agent other than air or water.


CLS 148/634
TXT Hydrogen:
    Process under subclass 633 wherein the gaseous treating agent contains
    molecular hydrogen gas and excluding air.

    (1)     Note.  While water is excluded as a treating agent for this
    subclass, the presence of molecular hydrogen, as may be found in
    equilibrium in steam, is acceptable if the specification discloses the use
    thereof for molecular hydrogen content.

    (2)     Note. Although there is molecular hydrogen present in air, the mere
    use of air is not intended as proper for this subclass.


CLS 148/635
TXT With working:
    Process under subclass 633 which includes metal deforming.


CLS 148/636
TXT Liquid agent:
    Process under subclass 625 wherein the specified treating agent is a liquid
    other than liquid air, per se, or water, per se.


CLS 148/637
TXT And cooling or quenching:
    Process under subclass 636 which includes a cooling or quenching operation.



CLS 148/638
TXT Treating composition contains water:
    Process under 637 wherein the treating agent composition includes water,
    but is not water, per se.


CLS 148/639
TXT Localized or zone heating or cooling:
    Process under subclass 579 wherein a heating or cooling operation is
    applied to a discontinuous area of the metal workpiece to provide treatment
    limited to one or several local areas or zones and not to another adjacent
    area.


CLS 148/640
TXT Utilizing protective or insulating shielding from heat:
    Process under subclass 639 wherein a mechanical barrier or shield is
    utilized to protect or insulate the local area or zone of metal from heat.


CLS 148/641
TXT Simultaneous heating and cooling treatment:
    Process under subclass 639 which includes a step of simultaneous heating
    and cooling.


CLS 148/642
TXT Heating with flame treatment:
    Process under subclass 639 which involves use of a flame to heat a metal
    workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194+,   for a process of flame cutting or burning of a metal workpiece.


CLS 148/643
TXT With working:
    Process under subclass 639 which involves metal deforming.


CLS 148/644
TXT Cooling:
    Process under subclass 639 which includes cooling of metal.


CLS 148/645
TXT With flattening, straightening or tensioning by external force:Process
    under subclass 579 wherein the metal workpiece is subjected to a
    flattening, straightening, or tensioning operation which utilizes an
    external force.

    (1)     Note.  The tensioning applies external pulling force in diverse
    directions to the metal workpiece without any actual bending or plastic
    deformation of the workpiece during the tensioning step.


CLS 148/646
TXT With restraining of metal from expanding or contracting during heating or
    cooling:Process under subclass 579 wherein the expansion or contraction of
    the metal workpiece creates a force which is opposed by a holding or
    confining means to restrain the metal workpiece from expanding or
    contracting.


CLS 148/647
TXT Die quenching:
    Process under subclass 646 wherein the workpiece is restrained in a die
    while undergoing a rapid cooling (i.e., quenching) operation.


CLS 148/648
TXT With working:
    Process under subclass 579 which includes metal deforming.


CLS 148/649
TXT Forging:
    Process under subclass 648 which includes a metal deforming operation by
    heating and hammering (i.e., forging).


CLS 148/650
TXT With working at or below 120oC or unspecified cold working:
    Process under subclass 648 wherein there is a metal deforming operation
    that occurs at a temperature from below 120_C down to 20_C or cold working
    at an unspecified temperature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    577,    for processes of treating a metal or metal alloy at temperatures
    below 20_C.


CLS 148/651
TXT Heating step follows cold working:
    Process under subclass 650 wherein at least one heating operation follows a
    cold working operation.


CLS 148/652
TXT Separate cooling step follows cold working step:
    Process under subclass 651 wherein there is a separate cooling operation
    performed subsequent to the cold working step.


CLS 148/653
TXT With additional nonworking heating step:
    Process under subclass 648 wherein in addition to the step in which metal
    working occurs, there is a separate step of heating for modifying the
    microstructure of a metal workpiece.


CLS 148/654
TXT Including cooling (e.g., quenching, etc.):
    Process under subclass 648 which includes, in addition to the metal working
    step, a separate cooling operation (e.g., quenching, etc.).


CLS 148/655
TXT With separate handling or treating of the air, water, or unspecified fluid
    treating media:Process under subclass 579 wherein air, water, or an
    unspecified fluid treating media is subjected to a separate step of
    manipulation or treating outside of the metal treating operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    625,    for process of treating the metal workpiece with a specified
    treating agent.


CLS 148/656
TXT Work handling:
    Process under subclass 579 wherein a metal workpiece is manipulated for
    positioning or moving about at any stage in the process.


CLS 148/657
TXT Continuous strip or sheet:
    Process under subclass 656 wherein the workpiece is in the form of a
    continuous strip or sheet of metal.


CLS 148/658
TXT During cooling step:
    Process under subclass 656 wherein the handling of the workpiece takes
    place during a cooling step.


CLS 148/659
TXT Including spheroidizing:
    Process under subclass 579 which involves production of spheroidal
    microstructural components.


CLS 148/660
TXT Including cooling (e.g., quenching, etc.):
    Process under subclass 579 which includes a cooling step (e.g., quenching,
    etc.).


CLS 148/661
TXT Strip, sheet, or plate:
    Process under subclass 660 wherein the metal workpiece is in the form of a
    strip, sheet, or plate.


CLS 148/662
TXT Heating step follows cooling step:
    Process under subclass 660 in which a heating step follows a cooling step.



CLS 148/663
TXT Tempering:
    Process under subclass 662 which includes a tempering heat treatment at any
    stage whereby a crystal structure such as martensite is transformed to
    carbides residing in austenite.


CLS 148/664
TXT Multiple cooling steps:
    Process under subclass 660 wherein there are multiple cooling steps.



CLS 148/665
TXT Beryllium(Be) or beryllium base alloy:
    Process under subclass 559 wherein the metal being treated is beryllium(Be)
    or a beryllium alloy containing greater than 50 percent beryllium.


CLS 148/666
TXT Magnesium(Mg) or magnesium base alloy:
    Process under subclass 559 wherein the metal being treated is magnesium(Mg)
    or a magnesium alloy containing greater than 50 percent magnesium.


CLS 148/667
TXT With working:
    Process under subclass 666 wherein there is a step of metal deforming.


CLS 148/668
TXT Refractory metal (i.e., titanium(Ti), zirconium(Zr), hafnium(Hf),
    vanadium(V), niobium(Nb), columbium(Cb), tantalum(Ta), chromium(Cr),
    molybdenum(Mo), tungsten(W)), or alloy base thereof:Process under subclass
    559 wherein the metal being treated is titanium(Ti), zirconium(Zr),
    hafnium(Hf), vanadium(V), niobium(Nb), columbium(Cb), tantalum(Ta),
    chromium(Cr), molybdenum(Mo), tungsten(W), or an alloy thereof containing
    greater than 50 percent of one of said metals.


CLS 148/669
TXT Titanium(Ti) or titanium base alloy:
    Process under subclass 668 wherein the metal being treated is titanium(Ti)
    or titanium alloy containing greater than 50 percent titanium.


CLS 148/670
TXT With working:
    Process under subclass 669 which includes a step of metal deforming.


CLS 148/671
TXT With ageing, solution treating (i.e., for hardening), precipitation
    hardening or strengthening:Process under subclass 670 which includes a step
    of ageing, solution treating (i.e., for hardening), precipitation hardening
    or precipitation strengthening as a literally expressed condition.

    (1)     Note.  See the main definition for Class 148, section III, A, to
    determine placement over the metal working classes, if metal working is
    present.  Specifically, the presence of the terms  aging, solution
    treating, for precipitation strengthening or precipitation hardening are
    sufficient for placement in Class 148 over the metal working classes.


CLS 148/672
TXT Zirconium(Zr) or zirconium base alloy:
    Process under subclass 668 wherein the metal being treated is zirconium(Zr)
    or a zirconium alloy containing greater than 50 percent zirconium.


CLS 148/673
TXT Tungsten(W) or tungsten base alloy:
    Process under subclass 668 wherein the metal being treated is tungsten(W)
    or a tungsten alloy containing greater than 50 percent tungsten.


CLS 148/674
TXT Cobalt(Co) or cobalt base alloy:
    Process under subclass 559 wherein the metal being treated is cobalt(Co) or
    a cobalt alloy containing greater 50 percent cobalt.


CLS 148/675
TXT Nickel(Ni) or nickel base alloy:
    Process under subclass 559 wherein the metal being treated is nickel(Ni) or
    a nickel alloy containing greater than 50 percent nickel.


CLS 148/676
TXT With working:
    Process under subclass 675 which includes a metal deforming step.


CLS 148/677
TXT With ageing, solution treating (i.e., for hardening), or precipitation
    hardening or strengthening:Process under subclass 676 which includes a step
    of ageing, solution treating (i.e., for hardening), or precipitation
    hardening or precipitation strengthening as a literal expression.

    (1)     Note.  See the main definition for Class 148, section III, A, to
    determine placement over the metal working classes, if metal working is
    present.  Specifically, the presence of the terms ageing, solution
    treating, or precipitation strengthening or precipitation hardening are
    sufficient for placement in Class 148 over the metal working classes.


CLS 148/678
TXT Noble metal (i.e., silver(Ag), gold(Au), osmium(Os), iridium(Ir),
    platinum(Pt), ruthenium(Ru), rhodium(Rh), palladium(Pd)) or alloy base
    thereof:Process under 559 wherein the metal being treated is silver(Ag),
    gold(Au), osmium(Os), iridium(Ir), platinum(Pt), ruthenium(Ru),
    rhodium(Rh), palladium(Pd), or an alloy base thereof containing greater
    than 50 percent of any one of said metals.


CLS 148/679
TXT Copper(Cu) or copper base alloy:
    Process under subclass 559 wherein the metal being treated is copper(Cu) or
    a copper alloy containing greater than 50 percent copper.


CLS 148/680
TXT With working above 400oC or nonspecified hot working:
    Process under subclass 679 wherein there is a metal deforming step that
    takes place at a temperature above 400_C or there is nonspecified hot
    working.

    (1)     Note.  See the main definition for Class 148, section III, A, to
    determine placement over the metal working classes, if metal working is
    present.


CLS 148/681
TXT Multiple working steps:
    Process under subclass 680 which includes plural metal deforming steps and
    wherein at least one of said metal deforming steps is performed above
    400_C  or  is  a  nonspecified hot working.


CLS 148/682
TXT With ageing, solution treating (i.e., for hardening), precipitation
    hardening or strengthening:Process under subclass 681 which includes a step
    of ageing, solution treating (i.e., for hardening), or precipitation
    hardening or precipitation strengthening as a literally expressed
    expression.

    (1)     Note.  See the main definition for Class 148, section III, A, to
    determine placement over the metal working classes, if metal working is
    present.  Specifically, the presence of the terms ageing, solution
    treating, or precipitation strengthening or precipitation hardening are
    sufficient for placement in Class 148 over the metal working classes.



CLS 148/683
TXT With ageing, solution treating (i.e., for hardening), precipitation
    hardening or strengthening:Process under subclass 680 which includes a step
    of ageing, solution treating  (i.e., for hardening), or precipitation
    hardening or precipitation strengthening as a literally expressed
    expression.

    (1)     Note.  See the main definition for Class 148, section III, A, to
    determine placement over the metal working classes, if metal working is
    present.  Specifically, the  presence  of  the  terms  ageing, solution
    treating, precipitation strengthening or precipitation hardening are
    sufficient for placement in Class 148 over the metal working classes.



CLS 148/684
TXT With working:
    Process under subclass 679 which includes a metal deforming step at from
    400_C down to 20_C or cold working at an unspecified temperature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    577,    for processes treating solid or semi-solid metal at temperatures
    below 20_C.


CLS 148/685
TXT With ageing, solution treating (i.e., for hardening), precipitation
    hardening or strengthening:Process under subclass 684 which includes a step
    of ageing, solution treating (i.e., for hardening), or precipitation
    hardening or precipitation strengthening as a literally expressed condition.

    (1)     Note.  See the main definition for Class 148, section III, A, to
    determine placement herein over the metal working classes if metal working
    is present.  Specifically, the presence of the terms ageing, solution
    treating, or precipitation strengthening or precipitation hardening are
    sufficient for placement in Class 148 over the metal working classes.


CLS 148/686
TXT With ageing, solution treating (i.e., for hardening), precipitation
    hardening or strengthening:Process under subclass 679 which includes a step
    of ageing, solution treating (i.e., for hardening), or precipitation
    hardening or precipitation strengthening as a literally expressed condition.

    (1)     Note.  See the main definition for Class 148, section III, A, to
    determine placement over the metal working classes, if metal working is
    present.  Specifically, the presence of the terms aging, solution treating,
    or precipitation strengthening or precipitation hardening are sufficient
    for placement in Class 148 over the metal working classes.


CLS 148/687
TXT Treating with specified agent (e.g., heat exchange agent, protective agent,
    decarburizing agent, denitriding agent, etc.) or vacuum:Process under 679
    wherein a vacuum or a treating agent (e.g., heat exchange agent, protective
    agent, decarburizing agent, denitriding agent, etc.) specified as an
    element, compound, or composition other than air or water is utilized to
    treat the copper or copper alloy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206,    for carburizing or nitriding of metal using an externally supplied
    source.

    240,    for processes of coating metal utilizing a reactive agent that
    reacts with the metal substrate.


CLS 148/688
TXT Aluminum(Al) or aluminum base alloy:
    Process under subclass 559 wherein the metal being treated is aluminum(Al)
    or an aluminum alloy containing greater than 50 percent aluminum.


CLS 148/689
TXT With extruding or drawing:
    Process under subclass 688 wherein the metal is extruded or drawn through a
    shaping orifice for purpose of shaping the metal.


CLS 148/690
TXT And ageing, solution treating (i.e., for hardening), precipitation
    hardening or strengthening:Process under subclass 689 which includes a step
    of ageing, solution treating (i.e., for hardening), precipitation hardening
    or precipitation strengthening as a literally expressed condition.

    (1)     Note.  See the main definition for Class 148, section III, A, to
    determine placement over the metal working classes, if metal working is
    present.  Specifically, the presence of the terms ageing, solution
    treating, or precipitation strengthening or precipitation hardening are
    sufficient for placement in Class 148 over the metal working classes.


CLS 148/691
TXT With working above 400oC or nonspecified hot working:
    Process under subclass 688 wherein there is a metal deforming step that
    takes place at a temperature above 400_C or there is nonspecified hot
    working.


CLS 148/692
TXT Multiple working steps:
    Process under subclass 691 which includes plural metal deforming steps and
    wherein at least one of said metal deforming steps is performed above 400_C
    or at an unspecified hot working temperature.


CLS 148/693
TXT With ageing, solution treating (i.e., for hardening), precipitation
    hardening or strengthening:Process under subclass 692 which includes a step
    of ageing, solution treating (i.e., for hardening), or precipitation
    hardening or precipitation strengthening as a literally expressed condition.

    (1)     Note.  See the main definition for Class 148, section III, A, to
    determine placement over the metal working classes, if metal working is
    present.  Specifically, the presence of the terms ageing, solution
    treating, or precipitation strengthening or precipitation hardening are
    sufficient for placement in Class 148 over the metal working classes.


CLS 148/694
TXT With ageing, solution treating (i.e., for hardening), precipitation
    hardening or strengthening:Process under subclass 691 which includes a step
    of ageing, solution treating (i.e., for hardening), or precipitation
    hardening or precipitation strengthening as a literally expressed condition.

    (1)     Note.  See the main definition for Class 148, section III, A, to
    determine placement over the metal working classes, if metal working is
    present.  Specifically, the presence of the terms ageing, solution
    treating, or precipitation strengthening or precipitation hardening are
    sufficient for placement in Class 148 over the metal working classes.


CLS 148/695
TXT With working:
    Process under subclass 688 which includes a metal deforming step at 400_C
    down to 20_C.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    577,    for processes treating solid or semi-solid metal at temperatures
    below 20_C.


CLS 148/696
TXT Multiple working steps:
    Process under subclass 695 which includes plural metal deforming steps and
    wherein each of said metal deforming steps are performed at from 400_C down
    to 20_C.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    577,    for processes treating solid or semi-solid metal at temperatures
    below 20_C.


CLS 148/697
TXT With ageing, solution treating (i.e., for hardening), precipitation
    hardening or strengthening:Process under subclass 696 which includes a step
    of ageing, solution treating (i.e., for hardening), precipitation hardening
    or precipitation strengthening as a  literally expressed condition.

    (1)     Note.  See the main definition for Class 148, section III, A, to
    determine placement over the metal working classes, if metal working is
    present.  Specifically, the presence of the terms ageing, solution
    treating, or precipitation strengthening or precipitation hardening are
    sufficient for placement in Class 148 over the metal working classes.


CLS 148/698
TXT With ageing, solution treating (i.e., for hardening), precipitation
    hardening or strengthening:Process under subclass 688 which includes a step
    of ageing, solution treating (i.e., for hardening), or precipitation
    hardening or precipitation strengthening as a literally expressed condition.

    (1)     Note.  See the main definition for Class 148, section III, A, to
    determine placement over the metal working classes, if metal working is
    present.  Specifically, the presence of the terms ageing, solution
    treating, or precipitation strengthening or precipitation hardening are
    sufficient for placement in Class 148 over the metal working classes.


CLS 148/699
TXT Copper(Cu) containing:
    Process under subclass 698 wherein the aluminum alloy contains copper(Cu)
    in any amount.


CLS 148/700
TXT Magnesium(Mg) containing:
    Process under subclass 699 wherein the aluminum alloy contains copper(Cu)
    and magnesium(Mg) in any amount.


CLS 148/701
TXT Zinc(Zn) containing:
    Process under subclass 700 wherein the Aluminum alloy contains copper(Cu),
    magnesium(Mg), and zinc(Zn) in any amount.


CLS 148/702
TXT Magnesium(Mg) containing:
    Process under subclass 698 wherein the aluminum alloy contains
    magnesium(Mg) in any amount.


CLS 148/703
TXT Treating with specified agent (e.g., heat exchange agent, protective agent,
    decarburizing agent, denitriding agent, etc.) or vacuum:Process under
    subclass 688 wherein a vacuum or a treating agent (e.g., heat exchange
    agent, protective agent, decarburizing agent, denitriding agent, etc.)
    specified as an element, compound, or composition other than air or water
    is utilized to treat aluminum or aluminum alloy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206,    for carburizing or nitriding of metal using an externally supplied
    source.

    240,    for processes of coating metal utilizing a reactive agent that
    reacts with the metal.


CLS 148/704
TXT In fused state:
    Process under subclass 703 wherein the specified agent is in a fused or
    melted  state.


CLS 148/705
TXT Zinc(Zn) or zinc base alloy:
    Process under subclass 559 wherein the metal being treated is zinc(Zn) or
    zinc alloy containing greater than 50 percent zinc.


CLS 148/706
TXT Lead(Pb) or lead base alloy:
    Process under subclass 559 wherein the metal being treated is lead(Pb) or a
    lead alloy containing greater than 50 percent lead.


CLS 148/707
TXT Over 50 percent metal, but no base:
    Process under subclass 559 wherein the metal alloy being treated contains
    over 50 percent metal and in which there is no one metal present over 50
    percent.


CLS 148/708
TXT Treating with specified agent (e.g., heat exchange agent, protective agent,
    decarburizing agent, denitriding agent, etc.) or vacuum:Process under
    subclass 559 wherein a vacuum or treating agent (e.g., specified heat
    exchange agent, protective agent, decarburizing agent, denitriding agent,
    etc.) is specified as an element, compound, or composition other than air
    or water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206,    for carburizing or nitriding of metal using an externally supplied
    source.

    240,    for processes of coating metal utilizing a reactive agent that
    reacts with the metal.


CLS 148/709
TXT With preserving, recovering, or separately handling or treating of the
    agent:Process under subclass 708 wherein the specified treating agent or
    composition is itself treated (e.g., preserving, recovering, regenerating)
    in an operation distinct from the metal treating operation.


CLS 148/710
TXT Utilizing particulate form in fluid bed:
    Process under subclass 708 wherein the specified agent is utilized in
    particulate form in a fluid bed to treat the metal or metal alloy.

    (1)     Note.  Utilizing a particulate material for heat exchange purposes
    is acceptable for this subclass, if a fluid bed is involved.


CLS 148/711
TXT In fused state:
    Process under subclass 708 wherein the specified agent is utilized in a
    fused or melted state to treat the metal or metal alloy.


CLS 148/712
TXT In gaseous state:
    Process under subclass 708 wherein the specified agent is utilized to treat
    the metal or metal alloy is in the gaseous state during the treatment
    operation.


CLS 148/713
TXT In liquid state:
    Process under subclass 708 wherein the specified agent is in the liquid
    state during the treatment of the metal or metal alloy.


CLS 148/714
TXT Localized or zone heating or cooling treatment:
    Process under subclass 559 wherein a portion or several portions but less
    than the total of a metal workpiece is subjected to a heating or cooling
    treatment that limits the change in microstructure to localized areas or
    zones as opposed to the entire workpiece.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS
    PERTAINING TO SUBCLASSES 400+ STOCK


CLS 148/900
TXT Ion implanted:

    Art collection pertaining to subclasses 400+ wherein the metal is treated
    by being bombarded by high velocity ions to drive them into the surface of
    the metal stock.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is most closely related to subclasses 316+
    since it is possible to use ion implantation rather than thermal diffusion
    to increase the carbon or nitrogen content of a metal surface.


CLS 148/901
TXT Surface depleted in an alloy component (e.g.,decarburized):

    Art collection pertaining to subclasses 400+ wherein the surface of the
    metallic stock has been intentionally depleted in an alloy component, e.g.,
    decarburized.


CLS 148/902
TXT Having portions of different metallurgical properties or characteristics:

    Art collection pertaining to subclasses 400+ wherein different parts of the
    metal stock have different metallurgical characteristics, usually as the
    result of differing Class 148 treatments.

    (1)     Note.  The stock material generally has the same composition
    throughout as differentiated from stock for Class 428, Stock Material or
    Miscellaneous Articles which has plural identifiable components, usually of
    different composition.


CLS 148/903
TXT Directly treated with high energy electromagnetic waves or particles (e.g.,
    laser, electron beam):

    Art collection under subclass 902 for stock material which has been treated
    with high energy electromagnetic waves or particles.  This usually causes
    the surface of the stock to be suddenly heated, the mass of the stock then
    quickly cools the surface giving  the effect of a quench resulting in a
    hardened surface.


CLS 148/904
TXT Crankshaft:

    Art collection under subclass 902 wherein the stock material is a
    crankshaft.


CLS 148/905
TXT Cutting tool:

    Art collection under subclass 902 wherein the stock material is a cutting
    tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 350 for blades wherein the cutting edge is
    treated in different manner than the rest of the blade.


CLS 148/906
TXT Roller bearing element:

    Art collection under subclass 902 wherein the stock material is a roller
    bearing element e.g., race, ball, roller, etc.


CLS 148/907
TXT Threaded or headed fastener:

    Art collection under subclass 902 wherein the stock material is a threaded
    or headed fastener, e.g., bolt, nut, nail etc.


CLS 148/908
TXT Spring:

    Art collection under subclass 902 wherein the stock material is a spring,
    e.g., coil, leaf, etc.


CLS 148/909
TXT Tube:

    Art collection under subclass 902 wherein the stock material is tubular.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is not limited to tubular conduits, e.g.,
    steam pipe, but also includes hollow tubular articles, e.g., internal
    combustion engine wrist pins, etc.


CLS 148/910
TXT In pattern discontinuous in two dimensions (e.g., checkerboard pattern):

    Stock material which the portions of differing metallurgical properties
    vary in two different directions, e.g., checkerboard pattern.


CLS 149/
TTL EXPLOSIVE AND THERMIC  COMPOSITIONS OR CHARGES

CLS 149/
TXT

    This class includes:

    (A)     Compositions which are:

    (1)     Explosive; explosive compositions for the purpose of this class are
    those containing both a fuel and sufficient oxygen or an oxidizer so that,
    upon initiation, they are capable of undergoing a chemical change at a
    relatively high rate of speed, or a speed approaching instantaneous,
    resulting in the production of usable force through chemical change in the
    composition to produce gaseous products and usually heat, and are used for
    blasting, firearms, jet propulsion of rockets, vehicles, etc., rapidly
    filling automotive passenger-restraining gas-bags, etc. See (1) Note, below.

    (2)     "Thermite"; "Thermite-type" compositions for the purpose of this
    class include; (a) a consumable fuel component which is any of metal (alloy
    and intermetallic compounds), metal-metalloid compounds, metalloids, and
    hydrides of metals or metalloids; (b) and in combination therewith an
    oxidant component which is either a metal oxide, inorganic oxygen salts and
    organic metal salts capable of yielding a metal oxide on decomposition,
    which components, depending upon the manner reacted, produce quantities of
    heat and chemical by-products, either solid or fluid which by-products may
    be recoverable.  These compositions, by way of examples, are employed to
    produce usable heat and light, chemical products and especially metals, in
    pyrotechnics and incendiary, match compositions and smokes and for
    explosive priming or as additives for explosive compositions.

    Included within this definition, are unreacted mixtures of metals with
    metalloids because, though they contain no oxidant, they nevertheless react
    similarly to "Thermites" to yield usable heat. Also included are thermite
    compositions which contain an additive designed to prolong heating effects,
    reduce the production of gas or other by-products or otherwise moderate the
    exothermic activity of the composition.

    (3)     Fuel specialized for jet-rocket engine and intended for reaction
    with an oxidant therein, excluding air, in order to provide thrust for
    motive power purposes.

    (4)     For use in neutralizing the poisonous gases of explosives.

    (B)     Methods of preparing or treating such compositions not otherwise
    provided for. The classification of processes is based upon particular
    components of the explosive or thermic composition.

                       NOTES



    (1)     Note.  GLOSSARY OF TERMS EMPLOYED



    a.      CHARGE:  As used herein refers to a mixture of ingredients
    producing a composition of this class or a definite quantity of shapeless
    or structureless material forming a composition of this class; or at least
    two compounds or compositions or any mixtures of these associated together
    or composited but in an unmixed condition, e.g., a primary explosive
    associated but not intermixed with a secondary explosive, or those
    compositions including only nominal structure or form.

    b.      EXPLOSIVE OR THERMIC COMPONENT:  As used in this class covers (1)
    explosive or thermic compositions, per se, (2) the oxidant portion, (3) the
    fuel portion of such compositions.  See also (4) Note class definition.

    c.      EXPLOSIVE COMPOSITIONS:  Are classified (a) as HIGH EXPLOSIVE,
    which, for the purpose of this class, is one whose rate of reaction is
    substantially instantaneous or detonating in character, and is either (1)
    an extremely sensitive or highly reactive or detonating chemical compound
    which is known as a PRIMARY EXPLOSIVE and is used to initiate the secondary
    or other explosive component of the charge; or (2) is a composition of a
    combination of two or more primary explosives and as such is known as a
    SECONDARY or other DERIVED  EXPLOSIVE.  Such an explosive reacts with
    detonating force or brisance which is sufficient to shatter the surrounding
    medium; (b) as LOW EXPLOSIVE, which for the purpose of this class, is
    controlled to some time interval, less than instantaneous, and as compared
    to that of high explosive, is slow or deflagrating (burning) in character.
    It has the property or power to displace the surrounding medium.  Although
    it may be used for certain blasting purposes it is used principally as
    PROPELLANT to set in motion bullets, missiles or similar devices regardless
    of size.

    d.      FUEL COMPONENT:  For the purpose of this class is a material
    intended for reacting, or to be used in combination, with an oxidant
    component and includes such finely divided materials as metals (including
    alloys and intermetallic compounds), metalloids, metal-metalloid compounds,
    hydrides of metals or metalloids, carbon, sulfur, vegetable material,
    carbohydrates, hydrocarbons and nitrogen containing organic compounds
    generally.  (Certain substances as gels, paraffins, sulfur, etc., need not
    be finely divided.)

    e.      GRAIN OR POWDER:  In the armament arts refers to a charge
    exhibiting certain definite structural characteristics, but as used in this
    class the mere reference to "grain" or "powder" without recitation of
    definite structure, or with reference merely to nominal shape, will be
    construed as being virtually synonymous with the term "granule" and with
    finely divided "particulate" or "powdered" material.

    f.      MATRIX:  As used in this class refers to a shapeless mass resulting
    by solidifying at least one component from either its liquid or molten
    state in more or less a continuous phase and wherein there is dispersed
    throughout at least a second component in particulate form and in
    substantially a discontinuous phase.

    g.      NITRATE V. NITRO:  The term "nitrate" is generally used as a suffix
    in the name of an organic compound, e.g., an ester containing the -ONO2
    radical, e.g., guanidine nitrate, while "nitro" is generally used as a
    prefix to designate an organic compound having the -NO2 radical, e.g.
    nitro-guanidine.  The art, however has not maintained this distinction in
    all cases and thus compounds having the -ONO2 radical which should be
    known, more properly, as "nitrates", instead, have been known through the
    years as "nitro" compounds.  No attempt is made in this class to correct
    this situation and the terms as applied to these compounds in this class
    are the same as are currently accepted and used in this and related arts.
    For example, the nitrates of such compounds as cellulose, glycerine and
    starch, among others, are commonly known as "nitro-cellulose",
    "nitroglycerine" and "nitro-starch" respectively, and when they so appear
    in this class, the reference, in spite of the inconsistency, is to a
    compound of the -NO3 radical or -ONO2.

    h.      NITRATED:  As used in this class, unless otherwise specified, is
    intended as a generic expression for compounds or substances both organic
    and inorganic which contain at least one of the empirical radical
    (s)-(ONOx)y or -(NOx)y, wherein "x" and "y" are whole numbers.
    Predominately, in this class "x" is 2 and "y", where the compound permits,
    is 3 or more.

    i.      OXIDANT COMPONENT:  As used in this class relates to that portion
    of a composition which carries sufficient available oxygen to oxidize at
    least a substantial portion, if not all, of the fuel component of the
    composition, and includes metal oxides, and organic compounds capable of
    yielding metal oxide, nitrogen-oxygen or oxygen-halogen salts which are
    either organic or inorganic, including the oxides and acids of
    nitrogen-oxygen, liquefied gaseous material, and in the case of "Thermites"
    only, any inorganic oxygen salt.

    j.      THERMIC COMPONENT:  (See explosive component) is similar to an
    explosive component as defined above except that the component may not
    react quite with the speed or power of an explosive and includes such
    compositions or components thereof as "Thermite", pyrotechnic, incendiary,
    fuse, match, smoke, or those compositions or components thereof which react
    or are capable of reacting to yield usable quantities of heat with or
    without desired chemical products.

    (2)     Note.  Compositions are in this class when defined as charges or
    forms which, in addition to the composition, set out nominal structure or
    shape of the charge or component thereof, unless the structure and/or size
    is such that there is imparted to the charge or component the capacity to
    function, as an individual unit to produce or alter a particular explosive
    or thermic effect, for which structure or form see Class 102.  However,
    plural components associated as layered charges are in Class 149 if no
    particular structure and/or size of any of the layers is set forth.

    (3)     Note.  Jet and rocket engine fuels are classified in this class
    when (a) the fuel component includes an oxidant component in sufficient
    quantity to provide the major portion of oxygen necessary for its
    combustion, or (b) when the fuels are specialized for jet and rocket use
    only and are contemplated to be combined with an oxidant other than air,
    except that included herein are those fuels which are known to be, or are
    disclosed as being, hypergolic even with air as the oxidant.

    Conventional fuels, including those disclosed as being capable of use in
    turbo, ram or pulse jet power plants and which include such additives as
    anti-corrosion substances or ignition promotors, are in Class 44.

    (4)     Note.  Compositions claimed as fuels and disclosed as being capable
    of functioning either with air or with other oxidants are classified in
    Class 44; see also "(5) Note" and "(6) Note" below with respect to the
    "Search" references involving Classes 44 and 75.

    (5)     Note.  See the class definition of Class 252, Compositions, under
    "(5) Note" for a listing of the principal composition classes on the bases
    of their relative superiority.

    (6)     Note.  For Related Subject Matter

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses.

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, for fuels, composition for producing
    heat without flames or glowing, and certain products, e.g, matches, etc.,
    which use the compositions of this class.

    60,     Power Plants, for rocket motors, especially subclasses 205+ for
    propulsion methods utilizing compositions of this class (149).

    71,     Chemistry:  Fertilizers, appropriate subclasses for components of
    this class (149) used in fertilizer compositions.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclass 27 for processes of producing metals utilizing thermite
    compositions.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, for ammunition and related devices
    utilizing the compositions of this class.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses for
    coating compositions, per se, and particularly subclasses 139.1+, 162.7+,
    and 169.01+ and indented subclasses for pyroxylin containing compositions
    for additions to nitrocellulose other than for explosive purposes.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 263.01+ for heaters utilizing
    compositions of this class for heat source.

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 185 for tobacco products utilizing composition of
    this class for igniting purposes.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclass 56.3 for a single or plural layer
    metal article useful as filler material in a metal fusion bonding operation
    combined with a thermite segment; and, subclasses 227 and 234.3+ for a
    process of welding using chemical heating compositions.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses, especially subclass 31, for processes and apparatus for
    comminuting explosive materials.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 70 for a composition which may release heat,
    due to a readily reversible chemical reaction and subclass 305 for
    artificial smoke and fog producing compositions by colloidal dispersion or
    by reactions other than by combustion or "Thermite-type", and subclasses
    182+ for composition useful for hydrogen generation, reducing or oxidizing
    but having no disclosed Class 149 Utility.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for organic explosive compounds and
    processes of producing or treating them.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses for processes within the class definition, for
    shaping and molding plastic compositions, in particular subclass 3.1
    pertaining to shaping of explosives or propellants.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 728.1+ for airbag type passenger safety
    guard attachments.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 525 for a self-destructive composition in combination
    with a circuit board.

    366,    Agitating, for treating methods limited to agitation, and
    appropriate apparatus.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, appropriate subclasses for alloys
    or metallic compositions, per se, which may be useful as a fuel in a
    composition of this class (149).

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, for inorganic compounds, per se,
    and processes for their production by a chemical reaction.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    appropriate subclasses for apparatus to shape or reshape plastic
    compositions.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet which may be structurally defined, and not specifically provided for
    elsewhere.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 357+ for an illuminating flash device
    burning a charge of thermic or explosive material.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Class 523, subclass 180 for a composition containing a
    synthetic resin or natural rubber having utility as a binder in a solid
    propellant composition or to processes of preparing said composition.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclass 202
    for the destruction of explosives, propellants, and pyrotechnics.


CLS 149/1
TXT Compositions or charges under the class definition in which the oxidant
    and/or fuel component are in a liquefied state.

    (1)     Note.  These are materials that are normally gaseous, e.g., oxygen,
    air, ozone or certain hydrocarbons.

    (2)     Note.  The liquefied material may be contained as an impregnant of
    an absorbent substance usually carbonaceous in nature, e.g., carbon,
    sawdust or other vegetable matter.

    (3)     Note.  For definition of "fuel" and "oxidant", see the class
    definition under "(1) Note", d. and i.; and see a. under the same note for
    definition of "charge".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, for a catalyst on a carrier which may include carbon and
    subclasses 400+ and 526 for a sorbent, per se, for liquified fuel or oxygen.


CLS 149/2
TXT Compositions or products under the class definition which define (1) the
    particular shape or structure of at least one ingredient of the composition
    or product or the nominal shape and/or physical characteristic of the
    composition or product or nominal shape of the container therefor; (2) a
    solid-solid suspension, (a solid dispersed within a solidified matrix
    material); (3) a compacted or bonded mass of ingredients; (4) products
    wherein at least one ingredient of the composition or charge is coated; and
    (5) at least two separate contacting layers or bodies and in which each
    layer or body is composed of a different ingredient or ingredients each
    having different properties or different compositions.  See "(2) Note" of
    the class definition.

    (1)     Note.  Designation of an ingredient or composition as granular or
    particulate is not considered as defining a particular shape or structure
    for this and indented subclasses.  See (1) Note, e. under the class
    definition.

    (2)     Note.  A particular shape for this and indented subclasses is, for
    example, globular, needle, spherical, rectangular, sheet, cast body,
    pellet, etc.  A physical characteristic is stating the particle size of an
    ingredient or the density of a composite.  Defining the composite by
    differences in its internal and external density or defining the composite
    as "puffed" is considered "nominal" structure for this and indented
    subclasses.  See (1) Note, e. under the class definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclasses 506+ for a solid fuel
    combined with a composition of this class, subclasses 520+ and 530+ for a
    solid fuel product having a defined shape or structure and subclasses 542+
    for a solid fuel composition coated or impregnated for easier ignition.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, appropriate subclasses, for the
    combination of an explosive charge or composition within a container the
    latter defined either structurally or by dimension; and subclasses 283+ for
    charges (grains) defined by particular shape or structure or dimension,
    e.g., grains or charge of a specified size or grains having specified web
    or perforations. See also "(2) Note", of this subclass.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, subclass 527 for an art collection of sorbents or catalysts
    having particular shape or structure.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Class 523, subclass 180 for a composition containing a
    synthetic resin or natural rubber having utility as a binder in a solid
    propellant composition or to processes of preparing said composition.


CLS 149/3
TXT Compositions or products under subclass 2 in which at least two of the
    components are associated together such that one constitutes a coating and
    the other a base or support for the coating.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses take patents relating to coated
    explosive or thermic compositions or products and to components thereof
    under the definition of this class and to coating processes when intended
    to aid or otherwise beneficially modify the explosive or thermic properties
    of the material.  The coating, per se, of nonexplosive or nonthermic
    material or of explosive compounds for such purposes as preservation, or to
    render the material insensitive, is in the appropriate material class or
    coating class.

    (2)     Note.  The term "coating" as used in this and indented subclasses
    has the same scope as that found in the class definition of Class 427,
    Coating Processes, except that "impregnation" is not considered to be
    "coating" for these subclasses unless the patent makes it clear that the
    characteristics of only the surface of the material is modified.
    Generally, patents are not considered for this and indented subclasses
    which involve merely the addition of a liquid portion to an adsorbent
    portion or to a composition or product that contains or serves as an
    adsorbent.

    (3)     Note.  Patents for products or charges which are defined by
    composition and structure, even though the structure is only nominally
    recited are classified in Class 102, Ammunition and Explosives, when the
    overall charge or unit is claimed as being coated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17+,    for products having a portion in the form of particles which are
    dispersed throughout a more or less continuous solidified or matrix portion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    86,     Ammunition and Explosive-Charge Making, appropriate subclasses, for
    combined processes of explosive charge making which include a coating step.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, appropriate subclasses, and particularly
    subclasses 283+ for coated preshaped explosive charges, grains or units,
    and see "(3) Note" to this subclass, (of Class 149).

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, its daughter Classes 530-570, and
    Class 585, Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, appropriate subclasses for
    organic compounds, including explosive compounds, when treated with a
    preservative unless the "preservative" is disclosed as further aiding the
    explosive or thermic properties of the compound.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclass 274, for inorganic
    compounds coated with a preservative.

    427,    Coating Processes, for processes of coating in general.


CLS 149/4
TXT Compositions or products under subclass 3 in which the base (or support)
    contains both organic and inorganic explosive or thermic materials.

    (1)     Note.  For definition of "explosive or thermic materials", see the
    class definition under "(A)" and "(1) Note", b. and j.


CLS 149/5
TXT Compositions or products under subclass 3 in which the base (or support) is
    an inorganic explosive or inorganic thermic compound or element.

    (1)     Note.  See "(1) Note" under the definition of subclass 4.


CLS 149/6
TXT Compositions or products under subclass 5 in which the coating is organic
    material.


CLS 149/7
TXT Compositions or products under subclass 6 in which the base (or support) is
    an organic explosive or inorganic thermic compound.


CLS 149/8
TXT Compositions or products under subclass 7 in which the coating is an
    organic explosive or organic thermic material.


CLS 149/9
TXT Compositions or products under subclass 3 in which the base or support is
    an organic explosive or organic thermic compound.

    (1)     Note.  See "(1) Note" under the definition of subclass 4.


CLS 149/10
TXT Compositions of products under subclass 9 in which the base or support is a
    composition containing both nitrocellulose and nitroglycerine.

    (1)     Note.  See "(1) Note" under the definition of subclass 47.


CLS 149/11
TXT Compositions or products under subclass 9 in which the coating contains
    organic matter.


CLS 149/12
TXT Compositions or products under subclass 11 in which the coating contains an
    organic explosive or organic thermic compound.


CLS 149/13
TXT Compositions or products under subclass 12 wherein the coating contains
    nitrotoluene.

    (1)     Note.  See "(1) Note" under the definition of subclass 47.


CLS 149/14
TXT Products under subclass 2 which include at least two separate and distinct
    superimposed or contiguous layers or forms of different components or of
    components having different properties; e.g., one layer may constitute the
    base charge and a second layer the primer charge.

    (1)     Note.  The layers or forms may be in loose particulate form or in a
    solid or compacted form.

    (2)     Note.  The layers or forms must be in direct contact and must not
    be separated by space or other nonexplosive or nonthermic body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, appropriate subclasses and particularly
    subclasses 200+, 320, 338, 352, 360, and 443, among others, for ammunition
    devices utilizing the subject matter of this and indented subclasses.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for a stock material product of general utility and in the form of a single
    or plural layer web or sheet.


CLS 149/15
TXT Composite charges under subclass 14 wherein at least one of the layers of
    the composite contains an inorganic explosive or inorganic thermic material.

    (1)     Note.  See "(1) Note" under the definition of subclass 4.


CLS 149/16
TXT Composite charges under subclass 15 wherein at least one of the layers of
    the composite contains an inorganic azide and/or fulminate and/or
    phosphorus or binary compound of phosphorus (excluding oxides of
    phosphorus).


CLS 149/17
TXT Product under subclass 2 containing particulate material dispersed
    substantially entirely within a solidified or matrix medium and which
    products are characterized by dispersed phase within a continuous phase.

    (1)     Note.  See part "(2)" of the definition of subclass 2 and see also
    "(1)" Note", f. of the class definition.

    (2)     Note.  The product for this and indented subclasses is usually
    obtained by (a) forming a dispersion of particles (and maintaining them as
    such) in a liquid followed by solidifying the liquid to yield a homogeneous
    two phase mass or by melting at least one phase of a solid multiphase
    system followed by solidifying, e.g., freezing, setting, curing, solvent
    removal, etc., or (b) similarly forming a homogeneous two phase mass by
    mixing at least two liquids having different solidification temperatures,
    the first to solidify being formed into granules and dispersed in the last
    liquid to solidify the latter serving as the matrix and (c) milling or
    kneading a plastic, stiff paste or dough material containing a particulate
    material to form a two phase homogeneous mass. Excluded however, are those
    products or compositions wherein the "particulate material" is a filler,
    color, dye or similarly nonexplosive material.  For the purpose of this and
    indented subclasses the presence of at least 10% of the matrix-phase
    material is arbitrariconsidered to be a sufficient quantity to inherently
    form the matrix in continuous phase unless the patent specifically teaches
    to the contrary.

    (3)     Note.  Patents are not classified within this and indented
    subclasses which involve merely the addition of a liquid to particulate
    material where the latter serves as a carrier or adsorbent for the liquid
    (even though the liquid is said to be a binder) where such liquid is, for
    example, either fugitive, remains as liquid or evaporates leaving a solid
    particulate residue.


CLS 149/18
TXT Products under subclass 17, wherein the continuous phase contains an
    organic material.


CLS 149/19.1
TXT Products under subclass 18 wherein the organic material is a synthetic
    resin or a polysaccharide resin or a derivative of a polysaccharide resin.


CLS 149/19.2
TXT Products under subclass 19.1 in which the organic material comprises a
    metal or a silicon or a boron atom bonded directly to a carbon atom.


CLS 149/19.3
TXT Products under subclass 19.1 comprising a resin containing fluorine,
    bromine, or iodine.


CLS 149/19.4
TXT Products under subclass 19.1 wherein the backbone chain of the resin
    contains a recurring group of the urethane linkage


CLS 149/19.5
TXT Products under subclass 19.1 wherein the resin is formed by a reaction
    between a polyhydric alcohol and a polybasic carboxylic acid or anhydride
    to yield what is commonly known as a polyester.


CLS 149/19.6
TXT Products under subclass 19.1 wherein either (1) the resin contains more
    than one oxirane group or (2) the interunit linkages of a recurring group
    within the backbone chain of the resin is an ether linkage.


CLS 149/19.7
TXT Products under 19.6 wherein the resin is a polymerized polysaccharide or a
    derivative thereof.


CLS 149/19.8
TXT Products under subclass 19.7 wherein the polysaccharide resin is
    nitrocellulose.


CLS 149/19.9
TXT Products under subclass 19.1 wherein the resin is a polymerized conjugated
    diene.


CLS 149/19.91
TXT Products under subclass 19.1 wherein the resin is a polymerized vinyl
    compound.


CLS 149/19.92
TXT Processes under subclass 19.1 for the preparation of products containing
    the resin which do not claim a definite resin.

    (1)     Note.  Where only a process is claimed, the product of which is
    provided for in a product subclass above, and the process is capable of
    more general application, the original has been placed in appropriate
    product subclass and a cross reference placed in the process subclass.


CLS 149/19.93
TXT Processes under subclass 19.92 wherein the dispersed particles are treated
    prior to mixing with the continuous phase.


CLS 149/20
TXT Products under subclass 18 wherein the solid particles dispersed in the
    matrix contain an inorganic explosive or an inorganic thermic ingredient.

    (1)     Note.  See "(1) Note" under the definition of subclass 4.


CLS 149/21
TXT Compositions or products under subclass 2 which are composed of at least
    two particles differing in size, shape, structure or some physical
    characteristic, particularly the density, the above difference affecting
    the ultimate properties of the composition or product.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass are generally directed to blending
    of ingredients having the mentioned differences in order to control the
    burning rate.

    (2)     Note.  A recitation that a portion of a component is held back or
    passes a given screen mesh is not a recitation of particles of two or more
    sizes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    Appropriate subclasses, for similar blends or mixtures wherein similar
    burning rate control results by varying the chemical properties of at least
    one ingredient.


CLS 149/22
TXT Compositions under the class definition containing elemental boron, or a
    binary boron compound (excluding those with oxygen) or organic boranes.


CLS 149/23
TXT Compositions under the class definition containing a nitrated metal organic
    compound.

    (1)     Note.  For definition of the term "nitrated" see the class
    definition, under "(1) Note", g. and h., and see also "(1) Note" under the
    definition of subclass 47.


CLS 149/24
TXT Compositions under subclass 23 wherein at least one of the nitrated metal
    organic compounds is a compound of lead.


CLS 149/25
TXT Compositions under subclass 24 containing an additional nitrated metal
    organic compound.


CLS 149/26
TXT Compositions under subclass 24 containing an inorganic metal azide or an
    inorganic metal fulminate compound.


CLS 149/27
TXT Compositions under subclass 24 containing an organic explosive or organic
    thermic component.

    (1)     Note.  See "(1) Note" under the definition of subclass 4.


CLS 149/28
TXT Compositions under subclass 27 containing also an inorganic explosive or
    inorganic thermic component.


CLS 149/29
TXT Compositions under the class definition wherein at least one of the
    explosive or thermic materials is elemental phosphorus or a binary compound
    of phosphorus, (excluding those with oxygen).


CLS 149/30
TXT Compositions under subclass 29 containing metal or metal alloy or metalloid.

    (1)     Note.  Included under the term "metalloid" are the elements:
    selenium, silicon and tellurium.


CLS 149/31
TXT Compositions under subclass 29 containing at least one inorganic
    oxygen-halogen salt.


CLS 149/32
TXT Compositions under subclass 31 wherein at least a portion of the phosphorus
    is in the form of a binary compound, (excluding those with oxygen).


CLS 149/33
TXT Compositions under the class definition wherein at least one of the
    explosive or thermic materials is an inorganic metal fulminate compound.

    (1)     Note.  See "(1) Note" under the definition of subclass 4.


CLS 149/34
TXT Compositions under subclass 33 containing at least one inorganic nitrate
    salt or inorganic oxygen-halogen salt.


CLS 149/35
TXT Compositions under the class definition wherein at least one of the
    explosive or thermic materials is an inorganic metal azide compound.

    (1)     Note.  See "(1) Note" under the definition of subclass 4.


CLS 149/36
TXT Compositions under the class definition containing hydrazine or derivative
    thereof containing a hydrazine radical.


CLS 149/37
TXT Compositions under the class definition which contain at least one metal or
    metalloid and at least one oxygen supplying material which may be a metal
    oxide, an inorganic metal or ammonium salt, or an oxygen-containing organic
    salt and the resulting mixture must be capable of reacting to yield heat
    and reaction by-products.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses include patents to compositions
    which have become known as "Thermite" or "Thermite type" or compositions
    containing "Thermite" or similar mixtures as constituent material.  See
    "(A) (2)" and (1) Note, j. under the class definition.

    (2)     Note.  Included under the term "metalloid" are the elements:
    selenium, silicon and tellurium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclasses 3.6+ for water-activated
    compositions which may be otherwise similar to those contained herein.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclass 27 for processes of
    producing metals utilizing compositions of this and indented subclasses,
    subclasses 228+ for a composition having a continuous phase of free metal
    made by consolidating metal particles, and subclasses 252+ for a loose
    metal particle composition, mixed with particles of nonmetal.

    104,    Railways, subclass 15 for track welders using compositions of this
    and indented subclasses.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 263.01+ for heaters or stoves
    utilizing the compositions of this class as the means for producing heat.
    Patents including the composition in combination are also classified in
    this subclass (of Class 126).

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 53+ for metal casting utilizing a
    reactive heating composition.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 101+, especially subclasses 234.3+
    for soldering, welding or brazing wherein bonding heat results from the
    reaction of a composition of this or the indented subclasses.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 546+ for stock
    material manufactured from particulate metal or a mixture of metal and
    nonmetal particles.


CLS 149/38
TXT Compositions under subclass 37 containing, as an additional ingredient, a
    nitrated organic compound.

    (1)     Note.  See "(1)" and "(2) Note" under the definition of subclass 47.


CLS 149/39
TXT Compositions under subclass 38 wherein at least one of the nitrated organic
    compounds is aromatic.


CLS 149/40
TXT Compositions under subclass 37 which contains at least two oxygen yielding
    compounds.

    (1)     Note.  For the purpose of this and related subclasses a mixture of
    like compounds which differ in say, degree of oxidation, is not considered
    as being different oxygen supplying compounds under the definition of this
    subclass (e.g., a mixture of Fe2O3 and Fe3O4 is regarded as one compound).


CLS 149/41
TXT Compositions under subclass 40 wherein at least one of the oxygen yielding
    compounds is an inorganic salt containing nitrogen and available oxygen.


CLS 149/42
TXT Compositions under subclass 37 which contain an inorganic oxygen-halogen
    salt. This compound serves as the only oxygen supplying material.


CLS 149/43
TXT Compositions under subclass 37 which contain an inorganic salt having
    nitrogen and available oxygen in its molecule.  This compound serves as the
    only oxygen supplying material.


CLS 149/44
TXT Compositions under subclass 37 which contain at least one organic substance
    which, of itself, is not regarded as explosive or thermic substance under
    the class definition, even though the substance may be combustible
    (fuel-like) or in some way aid, or modify the ballistic or other property
    of the composition.


CLS 149/45
TXT Compositions under the class definition containing a metal nitrogen-oxygen
    salt including ammonium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for compositions containing (1) nitrogen oxides which are usually
    liquid under normal conditions or (2) acids of oxygen and nitrogen.


CLS 149/46
TXT Compositions under subclass 45 in which the inorganic nitrogen-oxygen salt
    is ammonium nitrate.


CLS 149/47
TXT Compositions under subclass 46 containing at least one nitrated organic
    compound.

    (1)     Note.  As generally occurs in the nitration of polyhydroxy
    compounds, the resulting product may be a mixture of compounds of varying
    degrees of nitration.  Accordingly, where appropriate in this class such
    terms as nitrocellulose, nitroglycerine, nitrotoluene, etc., include not
    only such mixtures, but also where specified, compounds of a particular
    degree of nitration, e.g., trinitroglycerine, dinitroglycerine,
    trinitrotoluene, 12.6% nitrocellulose, etc.

    (2)     Note.  For definition of the term "nitraded" see the class
    definition, under "(1) Note", g. and h.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88+,    for compositions containing nitrated organic compounds in the
    absence of an inorganic explosive or thermic salt.


CLS 149/48
TXT Compositions under subclass 47 wherein at least one of the nitrated organic
    compounds is nitrocellulose included in amounts under 10% of the total
    composition.


CLS 149/49
TXT Compositions under subclass 47 wherein at least one of the nitrated organic
    compounds is nitrocellulose, and it is present in amounts of 10% or more of
    the total composition.


CLS 149/50
TXT Compositions under subclass 49 which contain at least one additional
    nitrated organic compound.


CLS 149/51
TXT Compositions under subclass 47 wherein at least one of the nitrated organic
    compounds is nitroglycerine.


CLS 149/52
TXT Compositions under subclass 51 containing at least one additional explosive
    or thermic substance.

    (1)     Note.  See "(1) Note" under the definition of subclass 4.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for patents containing a metal or metalloid as the "additional
    explosive or thermic substance".


CLS 149/53
TXT Compositions under subclass 52 which contain, as an additional explosive or
    thermic material, at least one other nitrated organic compound.


CLS 149/54
TXT Compositions under subclass 51 containing vegetable matter in some form
    e.g., wood pulp, sawdust, grain, fiber, etc., or their by-products but not
    including by-products in the form of chemical compounds or extracts such as
    oils, juices, etc.

    (1)     Note.  The vegetable matter is generally used in these compositions
    to serve as the adsorbent for the liquid portion of the explosive e.g.,
    nitroglycerine.


CLS 149/55
TXT Compositions under subclass 47 wherein at least one of the nitrated organic
    compounds is aromatic.


CLS 149/56
TXT Compositions under subclass 55 containing at least one additional explosive
    or thermic substance.

    (1)     Note.  See "(1) Note" under the definition of subclass 4.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for patents containing a metal or metalloid as the "additional
    explosive or thermic substance".


CLS 149/57
TXT Compositions under subclass 55 which contain at least one organic substance
    which is of itself not regarded as an explosive or thermic component for
    the purpose of this subclass even though the substance may be combustible
    (fuel-like) or in some way aid, effect, or modify the ballistic or other
    property of the composition.


CLS 149/58
TXT Compositions under subclass 47 wherein at least one of the nitrated organic
    compounds is either a nitrated starch or nitrated sugar.


CLS 149/59
TXT Compositions under subclass 58 containing at least one additional explosive
    or thermic substance.

    (1)     Note.  See "(1) Note" under the definition of subclass 4.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for patents containing a metal or metalloid as the additional
    explosive or thermic substance.


CLS 149/60
TXT Compositions under subclass 46 containing at least one substance from the
    following groups:  resin, either natural or synthetic, rubber and vegetable
    matter, the latter in some form e.g., wood pulp, sawdust, grain, fiber,
    etc., or their by-products not including by-products in the form of
    chemical compounds or extracts such as oils, juices, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18+,    for compositions containing ammonium nitrate dispersed within a
    resin or rubber matrix.


CLS 149/61
TXT Compositions under subclass 45 in which the inorganic nitrogen-oxygen salt
    is an alkali metal nitrate or alkaline earth metal nitrate.


CLS 149/62
TXT Compositions under subclass 61 containing a nitrated organic compound.

    (1)     Note.  See "(1)" and "(2) Note" under the definition of subclass 47.


CLS 149/63
TXT Compositions under subclass 62 wherein at least one of the nitrated organic
    compounds is nitrocellulose.

    (1)     Note.  For the scope of the term "nitrocellulose" see "(1) Note"
    under the definition of subclass 47.


CLS 149/64
TXT Compositions under subclass 63 containing at least one additional explosive
    or thermic component.

    (1)     Note.  See "(1) Note" under the definition of subclass 4.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for patents containing a metal or metalloid as the additional
    explosive or thermic substance.


CLS 149/65
TXT Compositions under subclass 64 wherein at least one of the additional
    explosive or thermic components is nitroglycerine.

    (1)     Note.  See "(1) Note" under the definition of subclass 4.


CLS 149/66
TXT Compositions under subclass 62 wherein at least one of the nitrated organic
    compounds is nitroglycerine.


CLS 149/67
TXT Compositions under subclass 62 wherein at least one of the nitrated organic
    compounds is aromatic.


CLS 149/68
TXT Compositions under subclass 67 wherein the nitrated aromatic compound is a
    nitrated phenol, e.g., picric acid.


CLS 149/69
TXT Compositions under subclass 67 wherein the nitrated aromatic compound is
    nitrotoluene.

    (1)     Note.  For the scope of the term "nitrotoluene" see "(1) Note"
    under the definition of subclass 47.


CLS 149/70
TXT Compositions under subclass 61 which include also a metal oxygen-halogen
    salt, e.g., an inorganic chlorate or perchlorate.


CLS 149/71
TXT Compositions under subclass 70 containing carbon or sulfur.  The carbon
    used is in one of its oxidizable forms, e.g., blacks, graphite, charcoal
    and coal.


CLS 149/72
TXT Compositions under subclass 61 containing carbon and sulfur.  The carbon
    used is in one of its oxidizable forms, e.g., blacks, graphite, charcoal
    and coal.


CLS 149/73
TXT Compositions under subclass 72 which contain at least one organic substance
    which, of itself, is not regarded as explosive or thermic substance under
    the class definition, even though the substance may be combustible
    (fuel-like) or in some way aid or modify the ballistic or other property of
    the composition.


CLS 149/74
TXT Compositions under the class definition containing as an oxygen supplying
    compound an oxide of nitrogen or an acid thereof.


CLS 149/75
TXT Compositions under the class definition containing at least one inorganic
    salt containing both oxygen and halogen atoms within a radical, e.g., a
    chlorate or perchlorate compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for "Thermite type" compositions containing an inorganic
    oxygen-halogen salt as defined in this subclass.

    70+,    for compositions containing an alkali metal or an alkaline earth
    metal nitrate salt and an inorganic oxygen-halogen salt of this subclass.


CLS 149/76
TXT Compositions under subclass 75 wherein at least one of the inorganic
    oxygen-halogen salts is ammonium perchlorate.


CLS 149/77
TXT Compositions under subclass 75 wherein at least one of the inorganic
    oxygen-halogen salts is a salt of an alkali metal.


CLS 149/78
TXT Compositions under subclass 77 which contain at least one nitrated organic
    compound.

    (1)     Note.  See "(1) Note" and "(2) Note" under the definition of
    subclass 47.


CLS 149/79
TXT Compositions under subclass 78 wherein at least one of the nitrated organic
    compounds is nitrocellulose.


CLS 149/80
TXT Compositions under subclass 78 wherein at least one of the nitrated organic
    compounds is a nitrotoluene or a nitrophenol.


CLS 149/81
TXT Compositions under subclass 77 containing iodine either free or in the form
    of an iodide.


CLS 149/82
TXT Compositions under subclass 77 containing carbon or sulfur.  The carbon
    used is in one of its oxidizable forms, e.g., blacks, graphite, charcoal
    and coal.


CLS 149/83
TXT Compositions under subclass 77 containing at least one added organic
    substance which, of itself, is not regarded as explosive or thermic
    substance under the class definition, even though the substance may be
    combustible (fuel-like) or in some way aid or modify the ballistic or other
    property of the composition.


CLS 149/84
TXT Compositions under subclass 83 wherein the organic substance is a dye or
    coloring agent.


CLS 149/85
TXT Compositions under subclass 83 containing at least one inorganic substance
    which, of itself, is not regarded as explosive or thermic under the class
    definition, even though the substance may be combustible (fuel-like) or in
    some way aid or modify the ballistic or other property of the composition.


CLS 149/86
TXT Compositions under subclass 85 wherein at least one inorganic substance is
    a cyanide compound, or one of the oxides of iron, chromium and manganese.


CLS 149/87
TXT Compositions under the class definition wherein the fuel component contains
    metal or metalloid or a hydride of metal or metalloid with a hydrocarbon or
    a halogenated hydrocarbon.

    (1)     Note.  Included under the term "metalloid" are the elements:
    selenium, silicon and tellurium.

    (2)     Note.  For definition of "fuel component" see the class definition
    under "(1) Note", d.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 252+ for a loose metal particle composition containing
    nonmetal particles.


CLS 149/88
TXT Compositions under the class definition including at least one nitrated
    organic compound.

    (1)     Note.  For definition and scope of "nitrated" see "(1) Note" and
    "(2) Note" under the definition of subclass 47.


CLS 149/89
TXT Compositions under subclass 88 wherein at least one of the nitrated organic
    compounds is a nitroparaffin, e.g., a paraffin having at least one -NO2
    radical.


CLS 149/90
TXT Compositions under subclass 89 containing at least two nitroparaffin
    compounds.


CLS 149/91
TXT Compositions under subclass 89 containing at least one additional nitrated
    organic compound.


CLS 149/92
TXT Compositions under subclass 88 which contain nitrated amines which by
    chemical structure are limited to those which are straight chain, branched
    chain, contain a non-aromatic ring, or a heterocyclic ring.

    (1)     Note.  An amine containing any aromatic group in the molecule is
    excluded from this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  For the definitions of "acyclic", "alicyclic", "aromatic"
    and "heterocyclic", see under "Definition of Terms Employed in This Class"
    in the class definitions of Class 260.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105+,   for compositions containing nitrated aromatic amines.


CLS 149/93
TXT Compositions under subclass 88 wherein at least one of the nitrated organic
    compounds is pentaerythritol.


CLS 149/94
TXT Compositions under subclass 88 wherein at least one of the nitrated organic
    compounds is nitrocellulose in amounts under 10% of the total composition.


CLS 149/95
TXT Compositions under subclass 94 containing nitroglycerine.


CLS 149/96
TXT Compositions under subclass 88 wherein at least one of the nitrated organic
    compounds is nitrocellulose in amounts of at least 10% of the total
    composition.


CLS 149/97
TXT Compositions under subclass 96 containing nitroglycerine.


CLS 149/98
TXT Compositions under subclass 97 containing at least one organic substance
    which, of itself, is not regarded as an explosive or thermic substance
    under the class definition, even though the substance may be combustible
    (fuel-like) or in some way aid or modify the ballistic or other property of
    the composition.


CLS 149/99
TXT Compositions under subclass 96 containing a nitrated aromatic compound.


CLS 149/100
TXT Compositions under subclass 96 containing a substance which, of itself, is
    not regarded as explosive or thermic under the class definition even though
    the substance may be combustible (fuel-like) or in some way aid or modify
    the ballistic or other property of the composition.


CLS 149/101
TXT Compositions under subclass 88 wherein at least one of the nitrated organic
    compounds is nitroglycerine.


CLS 149/102
TXT Compositions under subclass 101 containing at least one additional nitrated
    organic compound.


CLS 149/103
TXT Compositions under subclass 102 wherein at least one of the additional
    nitrated organic compounds is aromatic.


CLS 149/104
TXT Compositions under subclass 102 in which the additional nitrated organic
    compound is a glycol.


CLS 149/105
TXT Compositions under subclass 88 wherein at least one of the nitrated organic
    compounds is aromatic.


CLS 149/106
TXT Compositions under subclass 105 containing at least two nitrated aromatic
    compounds.


CLS 149/107
TXT Compositions under subclass 106 wherein at least one of the nitrated
    aromatic compounds is nitrotoluene.


CLS 149/108
TXT Compositions under subclass 88 wherein at least one of the nitrated organic
    compounds is a nitrated starch or a nitrated sugar.


CLS 149/108.2
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which the composition contains
    free (elemental) metal or free (elemental) carbon.

    (1)     Note.  See section A, 2 (b) of the class definition.

    (2)     Note.  Patents classified in this class, subclasses 30, 37+ or 87
    as originals or cross-references are not cross-referenced here except for
    claims or disclosure which go beyond subject matter proper for those
    subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 252+ for a loose mixture of metal and nonmetal
    particles.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 546+ for stock
    material manufactured from particulate metal or a mixture of metal and
    nonmetal particles.


CLS 149/108.4
TXT Subject matter under the class definition drawn to control of the smoke or
    gas (including coloring, minimizing, etc.) produced by the use of an
    explosive or thermic composition or charge or to the control of liquid or
    solid wastes produced in such use.  The subject matter includes
    compositions as well as processes not elsewhere classifiable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 301+, for blasting methods
    which include procedures for fume or waste control which are not dependent
    upon the composition of the explosive.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses,
    for procedures for removing explosive residues from containers therefor.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 126, for apparatus of that class having a
    flame-coloring additive.


CLS 149/108.6
TXT Subject matter under the class definition specialized for use in initiating
    an explosive or thermic reaction, such as frictionally or
    electrically-activated blasting agents, fuses, etc.


CLS 149/108.8
TXT Subject matter under the class definition containing a gelling, thickening,
    thinning, liquifying, etc., agent, a stabilizer or unstabilizer
    (activator), a burning rate modifier, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclasses 265+, for solidified
    liquid fuels.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 302+, for colloids, including gels, and
    methods for making and resolving them, including the use of particular
    dispersing, gelling or resolving agents.


CLS 149/109.2
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising compositions having a
    particular fuel component and a particle oxidizer component, neither of
    which is provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also serves as a collection place for gas
    generation methods and propulsion methods drawn to the use of a particular
    fuel with a particular oxidizer, neither of which is provided for above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109.4,  for fuel compositions of this class not provided for above, and
    also for monopropellant compounds.

    119,    for a collection of compounds usable as oxidizers with a plurality
    of fuels, and not provided for above.

    120+,   for a collection of high energy fuel compounds usable with a
    plurality of oxidizers, and not provided for above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 186.1+, for oxidizer compositions.


CLS 149/109.4
TXT Compositions under the class definition not provided for above.  This
    subclass also serves as a collection place for monopropellanet compounds,
    that is, compounds which, in themselves, have explosive, gas-generating or
    propulsion properties without admixture with another fuel or oxidizing
    agent component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, its daughter Classes 530-570, and
    Class 585, Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, appropriate subclasses, for
    organic compounds, per se, and admixtures of such compounds with agents
    designed to improve the stability or other properties of said compounds,
    said admixture not being restricted to an improvement in the explosive or
    related properties of the compound.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 265+ for an inorganic
    compound admixed with an agent designed to improve the stability or other
    properties of said compound, said admixture not being restricted to an
    improvement in the explosive or related properties of the compound.


CLS 149/109.6
TXT Processes under the class definition which are generic to the preparation
    of compositions of this class, that is, are suitable for the manufacture of
    compositions classifiable in more than one subclass of this class, and not
    otherwise provided for.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19.92+, for processes, e.g., polymerization, for making compositions of
    this class (149) which involve synthetic resins.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 3 for methods of shaping explosive articles.

    427,    Coating  Processes, appropriate subclasses, for coating processes,
    whether applied to explosive or other materials.

               CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS

            The following subclasses represent at least a substantial
    collection of patents found elsewhere in the classification of this class
    but merit isolation for search aid purposes.


CLS 149/110
TXT Compositions or processes as provided for in this class wherein there is
    either recited or disclosed a reference to a particular size or dimension
    of the particles of at least one of the ingredients or the size or
    dimension of all or part of the composition in particulate form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 323+ for a
    plural layer web or sheet in which one component embodies structurally
    defined particles (e.g., size, shape, arrangement), and subclasses 402+ for
    a structurally defined particle, or mass thereof.


CLS 149/111
TXT Compositions or processes under subclass 110 in which the component defined
    as having particular particle size is a nitrated organic compound.


CLS 149/112
TXT Compositions or processes under subclass 110 in which the component defined
    as having a particular particle size is an inorganic nitrogen-oxygen salt.


CLS 149/113
TXT Compositions or processes under subclass 110 in which the component defined
    as having a particular particle size is an inorganic oxygen-halogen salt.


CLS 149/114
TXT Compositions or processes under subclass 110 in which the ingredient which
    is of a specific particle size is an inorganic fuel.

    (1)     Note.  For definition of "fuel" as generally contemplated for this
    subclass see the class definition under "(1) Note", d.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclass .5 for the production of metals in particulate form.


CLS 149/115
TXT Compositions or processes under subclass 110 in which the ingredient which
    is of a specific particle size is an organic fuel.

    (1)     Note.  For definition of "fuel" as generally contemplated for this
    subclass see the class definition under "(1) Note", d.


CLS 149/116
TXT Subject matter disclosing a flare composition containing a resin.


CLS 149/117
TXT Subject matter disclosing a smoke generating or weather modifying
    composition containing a resin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 2 for a process
    causing changes in atmospheric conditions.


CLS 149/118
TXT Subject matter disclosing a composition containing a resin wherein the
    resin is dissolved in the continuous phase to form a gel.


CLS 149/119
TXT Cross-reference collection drawn to compounds of use as oxidizing agents in
    compositions of this class.

    (1)     Note.  Where a patent is placed in a subclass of this class which
    provides for a liquified or named oxidizing agent, it is not
    cross-referenced here except for a disclosure of other oxidizers not
    provided for in the subclasses above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 186.1+, for mixtures which constitute an
    oxidizing agent.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, its daughter Classes 530-570, and
    Class 585, Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, appropriate subclasses, for
    organic compounds, per se, and admixtures of such compounds with agents
    designed to improve the stability or other properties of said compounds,
    said admixture not being restricted to an improvement in the explosive or
    related properties of the compound.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 265+, for an inorganic
    compound admixed with an agent designed to improve the stability or other
    properties of said compound, said admixture not being restricted to an
    improvement in the explosive or related properties of the compound.


CLS 149/120
TXT Cross-reference collection drawn to compounds of use as a high energy fuel
    component in a composition of this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, its daughter Classes 530-570, and
    Class 585, Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, appropriate subclasses for
    organic compounds, per se, and admixtures of such compounds with agents
    designed to improve the stability or other properties of said compounds,
    said admixture not being restricted to an improvement in the explosive or
    related properties of the compound.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 265+ for an inorganic
    compound admixed with an agent designed to improve the stability or other
    properties of said compound, said admixture not being restricted to an
    improvement in the explosive or related properties of the compound.


CLS 149/121
TXT Compounds under subclass 120 which contain boron, phosphorus or sulfur.


CLS 149/122
TXT Compounds under subclass 121 which contain nitrogen, without boron,
    phosphorus or sulfur.


CLS 149/123
TXT TAGGED COMPOSITIONS FOR IDENTIFYING PURPOSES:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the composition contains
    a material whose presence permits the detection of the composition prior
    to, or after use or the source of supply or manufacturing.


CLS 149/124
TXT METHODS FOR RECLAIMING OR DISPOSING OF ONE OR MORE MATERIALS IN A
    COMPOSITION: Subject matter under the class definition wherein methods are
    disclosed for reclaiming or modifying one or more components for reuse, or
    methods for disposing in a safe and/or nonpolluting manner, e.g.,
    compositions have aged, degraded, or otherwise proved hazardous to the
    environment.

    (1)     Note.  The disposing of or destroying of explosive hazardous or
    toxic waste is provided for in Class 588, Hazardous or Toxic Waste
    Destruction or Containment, subclass 202.


CLS 150/
TTL PURSES, WALLETS, AND  PROTECTIVE COVERS

CLS 150/
TXT This is the generic class for receptacles which are used to carry money,
    credit cards, or items of identification on the person.  This is the
    residual class for protective covers for articles.

    (1)     Note.  The purses, handbags and wallets of this class are
    distinguished from the suitcases and briefcases of Class 190 by both (1)
    the type of personal items they normally carry (e.g., money, credit cards,
    identification items versus clothes, books, papers) and (2) their proximity
    to the person (e.g., kept on or near the person versus left in the hotel or
    office room).

    (2)     Note.  Class 206, Special Receptacle or Package, is the residual
    class for a packet, compact or case carried on the person of a user (e.g.,
    a pocket carried receptacle).  Class 206 is also the residual class for a
    receptacle which includes claimed specific retainer structure for contents.
     Class 206 further provides for claimed disclosure of contents in a
    receptacle.

    (3)     Note.  Class 383, Flexible Bags, is the residual class for a
    receptacle of general utility made of flaccid or flexible material.

    (4)     Note.  A protective cover for this class is:  (a) made of flaccid
    material, (b) supported by the article it covers, (c) configured to cover a
    specific article, and (d) removed before the article is used.

    A protective cover may be secured and carried by an article while the
    article is being transported, but does not function to carry or support the
    article, as would an article carrier or receptacle.  Rather, it functions
    to protect the covered article from its external environment, or to protect
    the environment from the article.

    See the line notes to Class 52, Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), Class
    135, Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, Class 229, Envelopes, Wrappers, and
    Paperboard Boxes, Class 383, Flexible Bags, and Class 428, Stock Material
    and Miscellaneous Articles for similar structures made of flaccid material.

    Most protective covers are classified in the same class as the article to
    be covered.  See the "SEARCH CLASS", notes under subclass 154 and the
    Alphabetical Index following the notes, which contains an alphabetical
    listing of article covers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 110+ for a handle, per se.

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., for a fastener per se, particularly
    subclass 3 for an article holder, and subclasses 3 and 243+ for a money
    clip or clasp.

    29,     Metal Working, for methods of assembly in general.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 2+ for a check, label
    or tag combined with means to attach it to an article, subclasses 124+ for
    a display type card holder (not pocket or purse type), subclass 625 for a
    permanent identification article with attaching means, and see the note to
    Class 283.

    70,     Locks, for a lock of that class type (e.g., key combination, etc.),
    which may be claimed in combination with a diverse article, such as a
    purse, so long as the claimed article features are nominal or limited to
    those which cooperate with or accomodate the lock.

    106,    Composition:  Coating or Plastic, for flexible material of that
    class type nominally claimed as a purse or wallet.  This Class, 150,
    provides for specific material combined with significant container
    structure.

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 475.01+, for methods of stitching.

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 79+ for personal grooming toilet kits.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, for
    adhesive bonding in general.

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, for traveling containers of that
    class type, and see (1) Note under the class definition, above.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, for a receptacle having specific
    retainer structure for contents (e.g., subclasses 0.8+ for coins and 37.1+
    and 38.1 for key case), or for a receptacle intended to be carried in the
    pocket for a user (e.g., subclass 39 for a postage stamp holder, and see
    subclasses 0.8+, 37+, 38+, and the notes thereunder), or for a receptacle
    having contents therein (e.g., subclass 581 for cosmetic or toilet kits
    which include items in addition to the personal grooming type found in
    Class 132, subclasses 79+).

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, particularly subclasses 202+,
    217-222, 229, 252, and 253 for wrist wallets, money belts, wallet hoisters,
    and other body attached receptacles.  This Class,  150, includes purses
    having a shoulder strap or hand grip.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, for envelopes and other
    article receptacles of that class type.

    252,    Compositions, for compositions of that class type nominally claimed
    as a purse, wallet, card holder, etc.

    281,    Books, Strips, and Leaves, for checkbooks and checkbook covers.

    283,    Printed Matter, for an indentification card per se, and see the
    note to Class 40.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, Digest 50 for purse clasps.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 137+ for hand
    carried article carriers which are not provided for in this class (purses,
    wallets, etc.) or another class.  See the notes under Class 294 for a
    listing of related classes.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 154+ for a wallet or purse combined with a
    light wherein the claimed disclosure is limited to nominal receptacle
    structure or structure specialized to the illumination, in combination with
    the illumination means.

    383,    Flexible Bags, for a receptacle of general utility made of flaccid
    or flexible material.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    and in particular, subclass 52 for stock fabric from which a purse or
    wallet may be made.

    453,    Coin Handling, subclasses 18+ for coin deliverers.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, appropriate subclasses for a method or apparatus of
    that class type of making a purse or wallet.  See the notes in Class 493
    for other manufacturing classes.

    D3,     Travel Goods, Personal Belongings, and Storage or Carrying
    Articles, subclasses 42+ for purses and 56+ for wallets or card cases.


CLS 150/100
TXT PURSE OR HANDBAG TYPE:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a receptacle which is
    configured to be carried by a shoulder strap or held in the hand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131+,   for subject matter under the class definition which is of such a
    size that it can be carried in a person's pocket or purse.


CLS 150/101
TXT With means to deter theft of contents (e.g., puzzling closure or secret
    compartment):

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the receptacle includes (1)
    closure structure which is intended to baffle an unauthorized individual to
    preclude him from opening it or (2) structure which precludes an
    unauthorized individual from discovering a content item.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclass 120 for hand luggage
    having means to prevent inadvertent or unauthorized opening of the luggage.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 5 for a flexible bag having means to
    indicate tampering.


CLS 150/102
TXT Theft or loss resistant:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein means are provided to prevent or
    inhibit the receptacle from being separated from the person of a user.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    for similar subject matter combined with a wallet or billfold.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 3.1 for article retaining
    means, per se.

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclass 101 for similar subject
    matter combined with suitcase, briefcase, etc.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, particularly subclasses 202+,
    217-222, 229, 252, and 253 for wrist wallets money belts, wallet holsters,
    and other body attached receptacles.  This Class, 150, includes purses
    having a shoulder strap or hand grip.


CLS 150/103
TXT Changeable decorative appearance (e.g., color, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the receptacle includes means for
    altering its outwardly visible ornamental wall features.


CLS 150/104
TXT Removable element:

    Subject matter under subclass 103 wherein the receptacle includes a part
    which may be dissociated (disunited) therefrom and replaced by the
    different part or reversed and reassociated (reunited) with the remainder
    of the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for a purse or handbag which is reversible without the dissociation
    of parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclass 116 for an article of
    hand luggage having a detachable handle.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 13, for a flexible bag having a detachable
    handle, and subclass 111 for a multilayer flexible bag having a removable
    ply.


CLS 150/105
TXT Cover:

    Subject matter under subclass 104 wherein the removable element is a layer
    of material which overlies substantially the entire receptacle exterior.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 111 for a multilayer flexible bag having a
    removable ply.


CLS 150/106
TXT Combined:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 in combination with structure whose
    proximate function does not contribute to the holding or carrying function
    of the purse or handbag.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112+,   for a purse or handbag which has two or more compartments.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclass 102 for an article of
    hand luggage having means for securing an accessory.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 156 for a purse combined with a light,
    wherein the claim recites nominal receptacle structure or structure
    specialized to the illumination means or function.


CLS 150/107
TXT With handle or carrying strap:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the receptacle includes an
    element which is to be grasped by the hand or placed over part of the
    user's body in order to lift, carry or otherwise move it.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Laggage, subclasses 115+ for an article of
    hand luggage combined with a handle.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, particularly subclasses 202+,
    217-222, 229, 252, and 253 for wrist wallets, money belts, wallet holsters,
    and other body attached receptacles.  This Class, 150, includes purses
    having a shoulder strap or hand grip.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 6+ for a flexible bag combined with a
    handle.


CLS 150/108
TXT Adjustable:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein the handle includes means for
    changing the length or configuration of that portion which is to be grasped
    by the hand or placed over part of the user's body.


CLS 150/109
TXT Handle includes secondary receptacle:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein (1) the handle, itself, forms a
    container or (2) a container (other than the purse) is secured to the
    handle.


CLS 150/110
TXT Single:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein the receptacle has only one
    handle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 25+ for a flexible bag having a single
    handle element.


CLS 150/111
TXT Plural:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 comprising two or more independently
    usable receptacles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for a purse or handbag having a removable compartment or
    compartment forming member.

    115,    for a purse or handbag having hinged mouth frame elements combined
    with an additional, nonremovable purse or handbag formed by an attached
    auxiliary frame element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclass 108 for plural articles
    of hand luggage.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 37 for plural flexible bags.


CLS 150/112
TXT Compartmented:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the receptacle includes means for
    forming two or more content holding sections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclasses 109+ for compartmented
    article of hand luggage.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 38+ for a compartmented flexible bag.


CLS 150/113
TXT Removable (detachable) compartment or compartment-forming member:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein the means for forming the
    content-holding sections is either unattached or releasably secured to the
    receptacle so that it may be dissociated therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    for a purse with a removable cover.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclass 110 for an article of
    hand luggage having a removable compartment or compartment-forming member.


CLS 150/114
TXT Secondary compartment integral with purse overlapping closure flap:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein the receptacle has an access
    opening which is closable by a piece of material which extends from one
    wall of the receptacle, across the access opening (when closed), and
    overlies a portion of the opposed receptacle wall, and an additional
    compartment is part of or attached to the piece of material.

    (1)     Note.  An "access opening" is an opening which is intended for the
    insertion or removal of contents into or out of the receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 84+ for a flexible bag having a closure
    flap and, in particular, subclasses 86+ for a bag having a reusable closure
    flap.


CLS 150/115
TXT Compartment mouth-frames hinged along common axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein at least two compartments have
    access openings surrounded by relatively rigid elements which are pivotally
    secured together, and the pivot axes of the compartment elements are the
    same.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111,    for two or more independently usable purses or handbags.

    120,    for other purses or handbags having a hinged mouth frame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclasses 121, 122, and 123 for
    articles of hand luggage having mouth frames.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 34+ for a flexible bag having hinged
    mouth stiffeners.


CLS 150/116
TXT Including means permitting limited movement of an interior compartment
    between storage and loading positions:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein a compartment normally stored
    inside the receptacle is attached to an element or mechanism which allows
    it to be moved from a storage to a loading/unloading position, and back,
    while still being attached to the receptacle.

    SEARCH THE CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111,    for two or more independently usable purses.

    113,    for a purse or handbag having a removable compartment or
    compartment forming member.

    115,    for a compartment having a mouth frame attached along the pivot
    axis of an encompassing enclosure, which compartment may inherently move to
    a loading/unloading position when the enclosure is opened.


CLS 150/117
TXT Independently closable compartment:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein the receptacle includes at least
    two closure members each of which can be used to open or close its
    associated compartment(s) without opening or closing the compartment that
    is associated with the other closure member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclass 111 for an article of
    hand carried luggage having independently closable compartments.


CLS 150/118
TXT With closure:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the receptacle includes means for
    preventing insertion or removal of content through an access opening.

    (1)     Note.  An "accessing opening" is an opening which is intended for
    the insertion or removal of content into or out of the purse or handbag.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclasses 119+ for an item of
    hand luggage having fastening means.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 42+ for closures for flexible bags.


CLS 150/119
TXT Lid type:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein the access opening has an open
    mouth and the closure overlies and covers the open mouth.


CLS 150/120
TXT Hinged mouth-frame elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein the receptacle includes two or
    more elongated relatively rigid elements (i.e., mouth-frames) pivotally
    secured together and extending along substantially the entire periphery of
    the receptacle access opening.

    (1)     Note.  A mouth-frame, per se, is proper for this and indented
    subclasses, if it is disclosed as being associated with a purse or handbag.

    SEARCH THE CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    for a compartmented receptacle having mouth-frames hinged along a
    common axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclasses 121, 122, and 123 for
    articles of hand luggage having mouth frames.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 34+ for a mouth-frame, per se, or a mouth
    frame combined with a flexible bag.


CLS 150/121
TXT Four or more hinged elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 120 wherein there are four or more relatively
    rigid mouth-frame elements articulated at four or more joints.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 34.1 for a bag having four or more hinged
    mouth stiffeners.


CLS 150/122
TXT Six or more hinged elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein there are six or more relatively
    rigid mouth-frame elements articulated at six or more joints.


CLS 150/123
TXT Including means for releasably securing closed frame elements together:

    Subject matter under subclass 120 wherein the frame elements include
    structure which permits them to be selectively fastened together or
    separated from one another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclass 121 for an article of
    hand luggage having a mouth frame and a fastener.


CLS 150/124
TXT Including separate element for securing purse or handbag material to frame:

    Subject matter under subclass 120 wherein there is included initially
    unattached means for attaching the receptacle body to the frame elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    190,    Trunks or Hand-Carried Luggage, subclass 123 for an article of hand
    luggage having means to faciliate attachment of a mouth frame.


CLS 150/125
TXT Insert for channeled frame element:

    Subject matter under subclass 124 wherein a frame element has a generally
    U-shaped or groove-like depression for the reception of an element to which
    the receptacle body is attached.


CLS 150/126
TXT Channeled frame element:

    Subject matter under subclass 120 wherein the mouth-frame element has a
    substantially U-shaped lateral cross section.


CLS 150/127
TXT Wall detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the receptacle wall includes a
    specified feature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclasses 124+ for wall details
    of an article of hand luggage.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 105+ for wall details of flexible bags.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    and in particular, subclass 52 for stock fabric from which a purse may be
    made.


CLS 150/128
TXT Specified seam structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 127 including details of a joint which
    connects two parts of the receptacle material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclass 126 for an article of
    hand luggage having specified seam structure.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 107+ for a flexible bag having specified
    seam structure.


CLS 150/129
TXT Multilayer or ply:

    Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein there is more than one layer of
    material over substantially the entire surface area of the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103+,   for a receptacle having multilayers and in which one of the layers
    is used to modify the external appearance of the receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclass 125 for an article of
    hand luggage having multiple layers or plies.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 109+ for a flexible bag having multiple
    layers or plies.


CLS 150/130
TXT Reinforced:

    Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein the receptacle includes means for
    strengthening it.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 119 for a reinforced flexible bag.


CLS 150/131
TXT POCKET OR PURSE-CARRIED CONTAINER (E.G., WALLET, BILLFOLD, CARD OR COIN
    CONTAINER, ETC.):

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a receptacle which is
    of such a size that it can be carried in one's pocket or purse and is
    intended for the reception of relatively small personal items such as
    money, credit cards, driver's license, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100+,   for subject matter under the class definition of the purse or
    handbag type, or for a wallet combined with a purse.

    132+,   for a receptacle which is disclosed for carrying paper currency.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps etc., subclasses 3.1 and 243+ for a money
    clip or clasp, per se.

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 286+ for a receptacle claimed in combination
    with a toilet article, particularly subclass 312 for those having flexible
    receptacles.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, for a receptacle which includes
    claimed specific retainer structure for contents (e.g., subclasses 37.1+
    and 38.1 for a key case), for a receptacle intended to be carried in the
    pocket of a user (e.g., subclass 39 for a postage stamp holder, and see
    subclasses 0.8+, 37+, 38+, and the notes thereunder), or for a receptacle
    which includes claimed contents (e.g., package); and not provided for
    elsewhere.

    281,    Books, Strips, and Leaves, for checkbooks, per se, and checkbooks
    with covers.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 118+ for a kit
    including a supply of coating material and an applicator removable
    therefrom for independent application to work (e.g., compact having face
    powder and pad).


CLS 150/132
TXT Paper money container (e.g., wallet, billfold):

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the receptacle is intended to
    hold paper currency (e.g., a paper money bill).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 3.1 and 243+ and a money
    clip or clasp, per se.


CLS 150/133
TXT With means to deter theft of contents (e.g., secret compartment):

    Subject matter under subclass 132 wherein the receptacle includes structure
    which precludes an unauthorized person from discovering or removing a
    content item.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    for a purse or handbag having a secret compartment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 5 for a flexible bag having means to
    indicate tampering.


CLS 150/134
TXT Theft or loss resistant:

    Subject matter under subclass 132 wherein means are provided to prevent or
    retard the receptacle from being separated from the person of a user.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for simlar subject matter combined with a purse or handbag.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 3.1 for article retaining
    means, per se.

    63,     Jewlery, subclass 24 for means to prevent the loss of a watch from
    the pocket of a user.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, particularly subclasses 202+,
    217-222, 229, 252, and 253 for wrist wallets, money belts, wallet holsters,
    and other body attached receptacles.


CLS 150/135
TXT With means for holding a pad of checks:

    Subject matter under subclass 132 wherein the receptacle has means to
    secure a checkbook.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    281,    Books, Strips, and Leaves, subclass 34 for a checkbook cover or
    checkbook, per se.


CLS 150/136
TXT Combined with coin receiver:

    Subject matter under subclass 132 wherein the receptacle includes means for
    holding coins.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    for a purse combined with a coin container.

    150+,   for a coin container, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, for a receptacle which includes
    claimed retainer structure for contents (e.g., subclasses 37.1+ and 38.1
    for key case), for a receptacle intended to be carried in the pocket of a
    user (e.g., subclass 39 for a postage stamp holder, and see subclasses
    0.8+, 37+, 38+, and the notes thereunder), or for a receptacle which
    includes claimed contents (e.g., package); and not provided elsewhere.


CLS 150/137
TXT Including resilient or biased clip for retaining bills:

    Subject matter under subclass 132 wherein resilient or spring biased
    structure is provided which aids in the securement of an item of paper
    money.

    (1)     Note.  A mere pocket or compartment is not considered to be a
    retaining element.  However, in the case of a folded, bill-holding panel
    having a flap or strap which overlies a bill for the purpose of keeping it
    in position, the flap or strap is considered to be a retaining element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143,    for a closure which retains receptacle contents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 3.1 and 243+ for a money
    clip or clasp, per se.


CLS 150/138
TXT Including separable content-holding structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 132 wherein the receptacle includes a
    content-holding portion or compartment which is either unattached or
    releasably secured to the remainder of the receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  The separable compartment may be for holding content other
    than paper money.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147+,   for a card container which is intended for releasable securement
    within a wallet or billfold.

    148,    for a card container having a removable compartment.


CLS 150/139
TXT Including content-holding section movable relative to paper money
    compartment:

    Subject matter under subclass 132 wherein the receptacle includes a
    content-holding portion or section which is slidable or pivotable relative
    to a billholding section.

    (1)     Note.  The unfolding of the paper money holding (billholding)
    section of the wallet does not constitute relative movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    for a purse or handbag having a interior compartment movable
    between storage and loading positions.

    138,    for a wallet or billfold having a relatively movable
    content-holding section which is separate or detachable from the remainder
    of the wallet or billfold.


CLS 150/140
TXT Including means for separating two or more paper money bills from one
    another:

    Subject matter under subclass 132 wherein at least one divider is provided
    which functions to set apart at least two pieces (bills) of the paper
    currency.


CLS 150/141
TXT Including means permitting removal of paper money while folded:

    Subject matter under subclass 132 wherein the receptacle structure includes
    a modification which makes it possible to withdraw a folded paper bill
    without first unfolding the paper bill.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    for a wallet or billfold having a separable content holding section.


CLS 150/142
TXT Including relatively slidable container wall sections to accommodate
    thicker contents or prevent buckling while folded:

    Subject matter under subclass 132 wherein a wall of a paper money section
    of the receptacle includes portions which slide relative to each other to
    accommodate different thicknesses of contents or to prevent bulging or
    buckling when the receptacle is folded.


CLS 150/143
TXT With closure:

    Subject matter under subclass 132 wherein the receptacle includes means to
    maintain the receptacle in a folded configuration or for preventing
    insertion or removal of a content item into or out of one or more
    compartments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118+,   for a closure for a purse or handbag.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 42+ for closures for flexible bags.


CLS 150/144
TXT Including expandable pocket:

    Subject matter under subclass 132 wherein a compartment of the receptacle
    has structure which permits enlargement of the compartment for
    accommodating bulky contents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142,    for a wallet or billfold having a paper money section which is
    expandable because of relatively slidable portions.


CLS 150/145
TXT With transparent portion or window:

    Subject matter under subclass 132 wherein a part of the receptacle is cut
    away or is transparent to allow a portion of the contents to be seen.


CLS 150/146
TXT Joint or seam structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 132 including details of a permanent
    connection between two parts of the receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  Two parts are considered to be "permanently connected" when
    they are not intended to be separated during normal use of the receptacle,
    even if the connecting elements are capable of being separated (e.g.,
    tongue and slot).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclass 126 for an article of
    hand luggage having specified seam structure.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 107+ for a flexible bag having specified
    seam structure.


CLS 150/147
TXT Card container (e.g., for credit or fare card, identification or driver's
    license, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the receptacle is intended to
    hold a flat, relatively stiff and usually small and rectangular piece of
    paper, thin paperboard, or plastic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, CUBCLASS:

    132+,   for a wallet or billfold having a pocket for holding a card.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 124.2 for a card rack
    which includes compartments for displaying cards, but which is not intended
    to be carried in a purse or pocket.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 37+ for similar subject
    matter combined with claimed specific content retainer structure.


CLS 150/148
TXT Removable compartment:

    Subject matter under subclass 147 wherein the receptacle includes a
    card-holding section which is releasably secured to the remainder of the
    receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    for a wallet or billfold combined with a removable card container.


CLS 150/149
TXT With closure:

    Subject matter under subclass 147 wherein the receptacle includes an
    element which prevents insertion or removal of a card into or out of one or
    more compartments.


CLS 150/150
TXT Coin container (i.e., for holding coins in bulk):

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the receptacle is intended for
    holding coins.

    (1)     Note.  A receptacle for coins and an additional, diverse article,
    not provided for elsewhere, is included here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 0.8+ for a receptacle
    which includes claimed specific retainer structure for holding a coin, or
    which includes a coin as content.


CLS 150/151
TXT Having means permitting insertion of coin into closed container:

    Subject matter under subclass 150 wherein the coin receptacle has a
    closable access opening and additional structure through which a coin can
    be placed in the receptacle while the access opening is closed.


CLS 150/152
TXT Flap-tape closure:

    Subject matter under subclass 150 wherein the receptacle has an access
    opening which is closable by a piece of material which extends from one
    side of the receptacle wall, across the access opening (when closed), and
    overlies a portion of the opposed receptacle wall.

    (1)     Note.  An "access opening" is an opening which is intended for the
    insertion or removal of contents into or out of the receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 84+ for a flexible bag having a closure
    flap.


CLS 150/153
TXT Flap forms support for display and selection of coins:

    Subject matter under subclass 152 wherein the piece of material (closure
    flap) includes means to temporarily restrain the coins in an exposed
    position which facilitates the viewing and/or removing of the coins.


CLS 150/154
TXT PROTECTIVE COVER MADE OF FLACCID MATERIAL:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising supple material which
    is configured to cover and be supported by a specific type of article for
    the purpose of protecting it from its external environment, or protecting
    the environment from the article, and which is intended to be removed
    before the article is used.

    (1)     Note.  Most protective covers are classified in the same class as
    the article to be covered.  See the "SEARCH CLASS", notes below and
    particularly the Alphabetical Index following the notes, which contains an
    alphabetical listing of article covers.

    (2)     Note.   A protective cover for this class is configured into a
    particular two or three dimensional shape to cover all or part of a
    specific article.  See the line notes to Class 52, Static Structures (e.g.,
    Buildings), and Class 428, Stock Material and Miscellaneous Articles,
    below, for covers which are not configured for a specific article.

    (3)     Note.  A protective cover for this class must be supported by the
    article it covers, and may remain with the article while the article is
    being transported.  However, it must be removed before the article is used,
    and may not function to carry or support the article.  See the line notes
    to Class 135, Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, Class 224, Package and
    Article Carriers, Class 383, Flexible Bags and Class 206, Special
    Receptacle or Package.

    (4)     Note.  A protective cover is distinguished from a wrapper provided
    for in Class 229, Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, in that a
    wrapper is a single-use paper-type covering for a mercantile unit, and is
    intended to be discarded when removed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, appropriate subclasses for a hat, coat, etc.  See Class
    66, Textiles: Knitting, for knit wearing apparel.

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, various subclasses for a
    swimming pool cover, subclasses 245.1+ for a toilet seat cover, and
    subclass 901 for a toilet tank cover.

    5,      Beds, subclasses 482+ for a bed cover (e.g., sheet, blanket,
    bedspread, pillow case, etc.).  See Class 219, Electric Heating, subclass
    212 for an electric blanket.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 244.1+ and
    247 for a cover for a device provided for in that class, (e.g., sponge,
    broom, brush, etc.).

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 250 for a hinge cover, and DIG 12
    for a hand grip.

    27,     Undertaking, subclass 19 for a coffin cover.

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 326 for a spoon cover, and subclass 504 for a
    rigid guard for a hand saw or blade.

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 244 for a gun sight hood or cover.

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclasses 72+ for a cover for
    protecting a shoe during manufacture and subclass 1.5 for a detachable
    cover for a leg.

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclass 140 for an ironing board
    cover.

    42,     Firearms, subclass 74 for a protective cover for a gun stock, and
    sublcass 96 for a gun barrel cover.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclasses 20+ and 23+ for a tree cover,
    subclasses 28+ for a plant cover, subclass 54 for a sap bucket cover, and
    subclass 72 for a decorative flower pot cover.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 3 for an article or
    material supported cover which is not configured for a specific article and
    subclass 23 for a cover with an exterior hold-down.  A tarpaulin is found
    in subclass 3 because it is used to cover a pile, bundle or plurality of
    articles whereas Class 150, Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers provides
    for a flaccid cover configured for a specific article.

    53,     Package Making, for a method for applying a cover, particularly
    subclass 204 for an annular package.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclass 170 for a knit cover, and subclasses
    171+ for knit wearing apparel.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 196 for a washing
    machine cover.

    70,     Locks, subclass 55 for a cover for a lock.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 551.9 for a handhold or grip
    for a handlebar, subclass 558 for a cover for a steering wheel, subclass
    558.5 for a cover or protector for the operating end of a lever or handle
    for a mechanism, subclass 563 for a pedal cover, and subclasses 608+ for a
    machine mechanism guard.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 450 for a step cover for a railway
    car.

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclass 90 for a table
    cover.

    114,    Ships, subclass 361 for a boat cover.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 504+ for a paint mask which may be
    flaccid.

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclasses 87+ for a flaccid cover
    which is supported by means which is not part of or supported by the object
    which is to be protected (e.g., tent, canopy, etc.), subclasses 33+ for an
    umbrella cover, and subclass 119 for a device, attached to or formed in
    flaccid cover material, which facilitates securing the cover material in
    position.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 296 for a hydrant cover and subclass 375
    for a jacketed fluid handling device.

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, subclasses 103+ for a
    decorative cover for a purse.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses
    370.21+ for a windshield cover having structure (e.g., rigid section,
    roller curtains, etc.) beyond that provided for in this Class 150, Purses,
    Wallets, and Protective Covers, subclass 168 (i.e., flaccid).

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 307 for a cutting edge
    cover for an earth boring or penetrating element.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 69.1 for an automobile diaper.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 333 for a cover
    for a switch actuator.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, for a container (e.g., a flexible
    case) specifically adapted to contain a particular item.  Note, in
    particular:



            subclass 5 for a container for eyeglasses,



            subclasses 278+ for a container for apparel,



            subclasses 301+ for a container for a time mechanism,



            subclasses 304+ for a container for a tire,



            subclass 306 for a container for a thermometer,



            subclasses 314+ for a container for a musical instrument,



            subclasses 315.1+ for a container for a sport implement,



            subclass 315.2 for a container for a golf club,



            subclasses 315.9+ for a container for a ball,



            subclass 315.91 for a container for a bowling ball,



            subclasses 316+ for a container for a camera or camera element,



            subclass 317 for a container for a weapon,



            subclass 319 for a container for a motor or engine,



            subclass 320 for a container for a household appliance, (e.g., a
    radio, tape player, etc.),



            subclass 326 for a container for furniture,



            subclass 335 for a container for a vehicle,

            subclass 423 for a container for a potted, freshly cut, or
    artificial plant, flower or tree, and



            subclass 424 for a container for a book.



    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclass 81 for a barrel cover, and subclass 3
    for other wooden receptacle covers.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 212 for an electric bed covering (e.g.,
    electric blanket).

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 98 for a garment hanger cover.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclass 42.2 for a vehicle-attached
    cover or casing for a rim, tire or wheel and subclass 328 for a
    vehicle-attached article carrier having an enclosure or cover.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 87.01+ for a
    single use covering having a structural element (e.g., fastener, seal,
    etc.) or a specified shape adapting it for wrapping a mercantile unit, and
    being made of paper or paper-substitute material.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass for a fender cover, subclass 507 for a ball
    hitch cover, subclass 770 for protective attachments for a vehicle body,
    subclass 811 for a cover or protector for an ice or roller skate, and
    subclass 814 for skis having an attached clamp or tie which may include a
    cover.

    281,    Books, Strips, and Leaves, subclasses 4, 17, 19, and 29+ for a
    removable book cover.

    283,    Printed Matter, subclass 64 for a book cover.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, Digest 2 for an auxiliary knob cover, Digest 11
    for a cover fastener, and Digest 48 for a camera cover fastener.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 137+ for an
    article carrier having structure specifically adapted to be grasped and
    supported by the hand of the bearer, particularly subclass 138 for a book
    or sheet cover having a carrying handle.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclass 95.1 for a windshield
    cover permanently mounted to a vehicle or claimed in combination with
    vehicle structure, subclasses 98 and 100+ for a vehicle load cover, and
    subclass 136 for a dust cover for a convertible top.  See Class 160,
    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 370.21+ for a
    windshield screen having structure (e.g., rigid sections, roller curtains,
    etc.) beyond the flaccid covers provided for in Class 150, Purses, Wallets,
    and Protective Covers, subclass 168.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 218.1+ for an upholstery cover
    detachably connected to a chair or seat frame and subclasses 219.1+ for a
    slip cover for a chair or seat.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, for covers attached to equipment
    housings, particularly subclasses 208.3, 223.1+.

    366,    Agitating, subclass 349 for a protective cover for a stirrer when
    not in use.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 158 and 209 for a
    removable probe cover.

    383,    Flexible Bags, various subclasses for a receptacle made of flaccid
    material which may be similar in construction to a cover, and in particular
    subclass 111 for a flexible bag having a removable ply.  A receptacle for
    Class 383 functions to hold and support contents, whereas a flaccid cover
    for this Class, 150, Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers is supported by
    the covered article.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 141 for a cover for a ship
    loading/unloading device.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating, for a dosage unit having a
    soluble cover.

    428,    Stock Material and Miscellaneous Articles, various subclasses for
    sheet material which may be used as a cover, and particularly subclass 33
    for a cover comprising a plurality of pieces having complimentary
    connection areas, subclasses 99+ for sheet material including a fastener,
    subclasses 131+ for sheet material having an aperture, subclasses 192+ for
    sheet material having an edge feature, and subclass 904.4 for wall and
    shelf coverings.

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, subclass 504 for a cover for a
    playing field or court.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 192+ and 263 for a cover or protector for a
    body entering conduit, and subclass 287 for a soluble cover for a body
    inserted treating element.  See Class 374, Thermal Measuring and Testing,
    for a thermal probe cover.  See Class 424, Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body
    Treating, for a dosage unit having a soluble cover.

    D2,     Apparel and Haberdashery, subclass 891 for a hat cover.

    D3,     Travel Goods, Personal Belongings, and Storage or Carrying
    Articles, subclasses 263+ for a photographic or optical equipment case
    (e.g., camera, projector, eyeglasses, etc.), and subclasses 254+ for a
    sports equipment cover.

    D6,     Furnishings, subclasses 610+ for a furniture cover, subclasses 617+
    for a table cover, and subclass 618 for a card table cover.

    D12,    Transportation, subclasses 401+ for a load cover, and subclass 202
    for a tire cover.

    D15,    Machines Not Elsewhere Specified, subclass 75 for a sewing machine
    cover.

    D18,    Printing and Office Machinery, subclass 12 for an office machine
    cover (e.g., typewriter, adding machine, etc.).

    D19,    Office Supplies; Artists' and Teachers' Materials, subclass 26 for
    a book cover.

    D23,    Environmental Heating and Cooling; Fluid Handling and Sanitary
    Equipment, subclass 311 for a seat or cover for a commode, and subclass 313
    for a tank cover.

    D29,    Equipment for Safety, Protection, and Rescue, subclasses 100+.

    D30,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 144+ for an animal body protective
    covering.

    Alphabetical index - Flaccid Protective Covers (by article to be covered)

    Ampoule stem            81/3.4+

    Article carrier (vehicle attached)      224/42.2

    Roof or trunk           224/328

    Automobile                      150/166

    Engine attached drip catcher type       180/69.1

    Ball hitch                      280/507

    Barrel                  217/81

    Baseball field          273/27

    Bed (sheet, blanket, bedspread, etc.)   5/482+

    Electric blanket type           219/212

    Beverage container              428/various

    Insulating jacket type          220/903

    Bicycle                 150/167

    Boat                    114/361

    Body entering conduit           604/192+

    Body treating insert            604/287

    Boiler                  122/494

    Book                    281/29+

    Design of cover         D19/26

    Indicia on cover                283/64

    Boring bit (earth penetrating)  175/307

    Broom                   15/247

    Brush                   15/247

    Building (materials cover, ground

    anchored, etc.)         52/3, various

    Button                  24/113

    Camera                  206/316.2

    Can beverage            428/various

    Insulating jacket type          220/903

    Car                     150/166

    Christmas tree          206/423

    Clothesline                     211/119.18

    Coffin                  27/19

    Corset                  2/110

    Design of cover         D2/122

    Cutlery                 30/326

    Cutting bit (earth penetrating) 175/307

    Cutting blade           30/504

    Dentist's engine hand piece

    (during use)                    433/116

    Engine or motor         150/157

    Engine attached         180/69.1

    drip catcher type

    Filter type cover               55/490+

    for liquid purification         210/500.1+

    Fishing rod or reel             43/26

    Floor (carpet)          428/85+

    Flower pot (decorative wrapper) 47/72

    Fluid handling device           137/377+

    Faucet                  150/156

    Furniture                       150/158

    Armrest                 297/227+

    Bed (sheet, blanket, bedspread,

    etc.)                   5/482+

    Electric blanket type           219/212

    Billiard or pool table          473/34

    Chair or seat           297/219+

    Design or cover         D6/617+

    Table                   108/90

    Garment hanger          223/98

    Golf bag or cart                150/159

    Gun                     206/317

    Barrel                  42/96

    Sight                   33/244

    Stock                   42/74

    Hand grip                       16/DIG 12

    Handle of operating mechanism   74/558.5

    Handlebar                       74/551.9

    Hand tool                       150/161

    Headlight                       150/166

    Hinge                   16/250+

    Hitch ball                      280/507

    Hot water bag           383/901

    Therapeutic structure           128/403

    Hydrant                 137/296

    Ice bag                 383/901

    Ice skate                       206/315.1

    Boot attached cover             280/811

    Scabbard                        280/825

    Ironing board           38/140

    Keyhole                 70/455

    Knob on a closure fastener      292/DIG 2

    Lamp shade                      362/351+

    Lock                    70/55

    Luggage                 190/26

    Machine mechanism guard type    74/608+

    Motor                   150/157

    Engine attached drip catcher type       180/69.1

    Motorcycle                      150/167

    Paint mask type         118/504+

    Person (hat, coat, etc.)                2/various

    Design of cover         D2/various

    Knit wearing apparel type       66/171+

    Leggings type           36/1.5

    Tent or canopy type             135/87+

    Piano                   84/177

    Pillow                  5/490

    Pipe end (conduit type)         138/96+

    Plant                   47/28+

    Cut or artificial plant         206/423

    Playing field (baseball)                273/27

    Pool table                      473/34

    Purse (decorative cover)                150/105

    Racquet                 150/163

    Including press         273/74

    Radiator                        237/79

    Railcar step                    105/450

    Receptacle                      150/154

    Roller skate                    206/315.1

    Boot attached cover             280/811

    Scabbard                        280/825

    Sap bucket                      47/54

    Saw                     150/161

    Rigid guard type                30/504

    Sewing machine          150/164

    Design of cover         D15/75

    Housing attached cover          312/208

    Shelf (covering)                428/904.4

    Shoe (during manufacture)       36/72+

    Bag type                        383/various

    Special receptacle type         206/278+

    Skate (roller or ice)           206/315.1

    Boot attached cover             280/811

    Scabbard                        280/825

    Ski                     206/315.1

    Binding                 150/154

    Body supported          224/191+

    Vehicle supported               224/309+

    Attached clamp or tie           280/814+

    Soap (porous cover)             401/201

    Sponge                  15/244

    Spoon                   30/326

    Steering wheel          74/558

    Stirrer                 366/349

    Suitcase                        190/26

    Surgical device         128/132+

    Thermal probe           374/209

    Swimming pool           4/various

    Building type           52/various

    Switch actuator         200/333

    Table                   108/90

    Tarpaulin                       52/3

    Telephone                       379/451+

    Tent or canopy          135/115

    Thermal probe           374/209

    Tire or inflated inner tube     206/304+

    Design of cover         D12/202

    Vehicle attached tire           224/42.2

    Toilet (seat or tank)           4/661

    Design of cover         D23/311

    Seat                    4/242+

    Trailer hitch ball              280/507

    Tree                    47/20+

    Trunk guard type                47/23+

    Christmas tree bag type         206/423

    Typewriter                      150/165

    Design of cover         D18/12

    Housing attached cover          312/208

    Umbrella                        135/33+

    Vehicle                 150/166

    Body (while in operation;

    including a "bra")              280/770

    Engine attached drip catcher

    type                    180/69.1

    Load                    296/100+

    Design of cover         D12/156

    Motorcycle or bicycle           150/167

    Roll up type                    296/98

    Tire                    206/304+

    Design of cover         D12/202

    Vehicle attached tire           224/42.2

    Window                  15/168

    Rigid cover sections            160/370.2

    Vehicle combined                296/95.1

    Wall (wallpaper)                428/904.4

    Washing machine         68/196

    Water heater

    Tank                    220/various

    Boiler structure                122/494

    Electrical                      219/various

    Windshield                      150/168

    Rigid cover sections            160/370.2

    Vehicle combined                296/95.1

    Wire coil                       206/303

    Wooden container                217/3

    Barrel                  217/81

    Coffin                  27/19


CLS 150/155
TXT For a door knob or handle:

    Subject matter under subclass 154 wherein the cover is for a door handle
    which is grasped to open the door.


CLS 150/156
TXT For a faucet:

    Subject matter under subclass 154 wherein the cover is for a valved outlet
    for liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 375 for a jacketed fluid handling device.


CLS 150/157
TXT For an engine or motor:

    Subject matter under subclass 154 wherein the cover is for an energy
    conversion mechanism, (e.g., electrical to mechanical as an electric motor,
    mechanical to electrical as a generator, or heat to mechanical as a steam
    or gasoline engine).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    901,    for a cross-reference art collection of insulating covers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 319 for a container for, or
    a package containing, an engine or motor.


CLS 150/158
TXT For furniture:

    Subject matter under subclass 154 wherein the cover is for (a) structure
    which supports the human body, (e.g., chair, bed, stool) or (b) a movable
    article of convenience for living quarters (e.g., chair, bed, bureau,
    sideboard, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  A protective cover for this class must be removed before the
    article is used.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclass 90 for a table
    cover.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 326 for a container for, or
    a package containing furniture.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 218.1+ for an upholstery cover
    detachably connected to a chair or seat frame and subclasses 219.1+ for a
    slip cover for a chair or seat.


CLS 150/159
TXT For a golf cart or bag:

    Subject matter under subclass 154 wherein the cover is for a wheeled
    vehicle which transports a golf bag or for a bag for carrying golf clubs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 315.3+ for a golf bag,
    and subclass 335 for a container for, or a package containing, a golf cart.


CLS 150/160
TXT For a golf club (e.g., head cover):

    Subject matter under subclass 154 wherein the cover is for an instrument
    used to strike a golf ball.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 315.2 for a container for,
    or a package containing, a golf club; subclass 315.4 for a golf bag
    combined with a club head protector or cover; and subclass 315.6 for a golf
    bag combined with means for separating golf club shafts.


CLS 150/161
TXT For a hand tool:

    Subject matter under subclass 154 wherein the cover is for an instrument or
    implement which is used for performing work by hand.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 504 for a rigid guard for a hand saw.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 349+ for a container for,
    or a package containing a tool.


CLS 150/162
TXT For a musical instrument:

    Subject matter under subclass 154 wherein the cover is for an implement
    used to produce music.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, appopriate subclasses for a musical instrument, per se.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 314 for a container for, or
    a package containing, a musical instrument.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclass 910 for a cross-reference
    art collection of musical instrument carriers.


CLS 150/163
TXT For a racquet:

    Subject matter under subclass 154 wherein the cover is for a hand-held
    implement having netting stretched across an open-frame head with attached
    handle and which is used for striking a ball in a game such as tennis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 315.1 for a container for,
    or a package containing a racquet.

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, subclass 554 for a device which
    holds a tennis racquet and presses it to prevent warping.


CLS 150/164
TXT For a sewing machine:

    Subject matter under subclass 154 wherein the cover is for a machine used
    for stitching material (e.g., cloth, leather, paper) and usually having a
    needle and shuttle to carry thread, and powered by a foot treadle or
    electricity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 208.5, 208.6 for a
    structure of that class type having means for housing or supporting a
    sewing machine.


CLS 150/165
TXT For an appliance (household or office):

    Subject matter under subclass 154 wherein the cover is for a mechanism,
    intended to be used in a home or business establishment, to enhance,
    sustain, or facilitate functions or operations therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 320 for a container for, or
    a package containing a household or office appliance.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 451+ for a protective cover
    for a telephone.


CLS 150/166
TXT For a vehicle exterior:

    Subject matter under subclass 154 wherein the cover is for the outside of a
    mechanical conveyance used for transporting one or more persons.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclass 361 for a protective cover for a boat.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 100+ for a cover for a
    vehicle load.


CLS 150/167
TXT Motorcycle or bicycle:

    Subject matter under subclass 166 wherein the vehicle has two wheels, one
    behind the other, a steering handle and a seat.


CLS 150/168
TXT Window (only):

    Subject matter under subclass 166 wherein the cover is only for one or more
    of the transparent glass screens of the passenger compartment of a vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  The cover may extend past the perimeter of a window for the
    purpose of securing it in position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses
    370.21+ for a windshield cover having nonflaccid structure provided for in
    that class (e.g., rigid sections, roller curtains, etc.).

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclass 95.1 for a windshield
    cover permanently mounted to a vehicle or claimed in combination with
    vehicle structure, and subclass 136 for a dust cover for a convertible top.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 150/900
TXT MEANS BIASING MOUTH IN OPEN OR CLOSED CONFIGURATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the receptacle includes
    means which force the access opening to remain either open or closed.

    (1)     Note.  An "access opening" is an opening which is intended for the
    insertion or removal of contents into or out of the receptacle.

    (2)     Note.   The "means" may be an inherent resiliency of the receptacle
    material.


CLS 150/901
TXT INSULATING FLACCID COVER:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a cover is made of supple
    material which retards the transfer of heat through the cover.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 494 for a nonelectric water
    heater having an insulating cover.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclass 12.1 for multilayer barrier structure
    for a bottle or jar which may retard the transfer of heat.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 281+ for an electric water heater
    having an insulating cover.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 415+ for multi-layer barrier structure
    which may be insulating, subclass 470 for a lining which may be insulating,
    and subclass 903 for a cross-reference art collection of insulating jackets
    for beverage containers.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 901 for a cross-reference art collection of
    hot water or ice bag covers.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, various subclasses for
    sheet material which may retard the transfer of heat.


CLS 152/
TTL RESILIENT TIRES AND WHEELS

CLS 152/
TXT This class includes (1) spring wheels for land vehicles; (2) resilient
    tires for land vehicle wheels; (3) patches for pneumatic tires; (4)
    anti-skid devices for resilient tires; (5) devices for securing tires to
    wheels, and (6) pneumatic tire inflating devices combined with the vehicle
    or wheel or remaining with a particular tire between periods of inflation,
    or designed to fill one tire from another.



    (2)     Note.  Wheels or pneumatic tires in combination with inflating
    valves are included in this class, under the appropriate tire subclass.
    See particularly subclasses 415-431, and subclasses 337.1, 338.1, 341.1,
    and 342.1.

    (3)     Note.  Devices where the invention lies solely in the connection of
    the valve to the tire have been placed in this class, subclasses 429 and
    430.

    (4)     Note.  For tire making limited to vulcanization alone or to
    vulcanization with mere preparation therefor, see Class 520, Synthetic
    Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 1 and indented subclasses.  See also
    Class 264, Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses for processes within the class definition, for
    shaping or molding of plastic materials which may involve a vulcanization
    step.  For specific processes employing a toroidal mold bag or producing a
    toroidal product, see subclasses 315 and 326, respectively, and Class 425,
    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus, subclasses
    28+ for apparatus for reshaping, resizing or vulcanizing a tire or tire
    tube.

    (5)     Note.  For the making of leather tires, see Class 69, Leather
    Manufactures, subclass 21.

    (6)     Note.  For devices for giving a warning when the pressure within a
    pneumatic tire is either raised above or reduced below normal;

    (a)     If mechanical, see Class 116, Signals and Indicators, subclass 34.
    This subclass includes such devices incorporated in pneumatic tires but is
    not limited to devices on the tire or wheel.

    (b)     If electrical, see Class 340, Communications:  Electrical, subclass
    442+.

    For devices under (a) wherein a pressure gage is combined with a valved
    inflation stem or valved filling chucks see Class 137, Fluid Handling,
    subclasses 227+, and for other valves and other fluid handling devices
    covered with a pressure gage see subclasses 551+, particularly subclass 557.

    For devices under (b) wherein the invention is in a circuit breaker, see
    Class 200, Electricity: Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.22+.

    For devices under (b) wherein the invention is in the electrical resistor
    combined with an inflation sensing actuator, see Class 338, Electrical
    Resistors, subclass 37.

    (7)     Note.  For tire making processes and apparatus, see Class 156,
    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses 110+
    and 394+, respectively.

    (8)     Note.  For devices for applying and removing resilient tires from
    wheels, see Class 157, Wheelwright Machines, subclasses 1.1 and 11.  For
    other tools specialized to use in working on and repairing tires, see Class
    81, Tools, appropriate subclasses.

    (9)     Note.  For mileage registers incorporated in resilient tires, see
    Class 235, Registers, subclasses 1 and 95.

    (9.5)   Note.  For resilient aircraft tires and wheels having fins, vanes,
    or other means to cause the wheel to be rotating when the wheels strike the
    ground, see Class 244, Aeronautics, subclass 103.

    (10)    Note.  For resilient tires and wheels for railways vehicles, see
    Class 295, Railway Wheels and Axles, subclasses 11+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, for inflated pillows and mattresses.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 146+ for a pressure gauge in a
    tire or wheel installation, and subclasses 700+ for a pressure gauge of
    general utility.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 223+ for tire filling chucks and/or
    stems (see (6) Note above), and subclasses 355.16+ for hose holders and
    hoses disclosed for inflating tires.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    appropriate subclasses for filling with gas, particularly subclass 38 for
    inflating tires with gas and water.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 3+ for means for dispensing gases including
    those disclosed for inflating tires but not restricted in utility thereto.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, for valves, per se.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 201 for combinations of inflating means
    with a velocipede including a modified velocipede frame as part of the
    combination.

    305,    Wheel Substitutes for Land Vehicles, subclasses 124+ for spring
    wheels or resilient tires especially modified to be used in flexible track
    apparatus for land vehicles.  To be placed in Class 305 the wheel as
    disclosed must include structure which coacts with a flexible track, such
    as a flanged rim or a grooved rim which structure is adapted to interengage
    with a portion of a flexible track.  Spring wheels or resilient tires which
    do not incorporate such structure, even though disclosed as being flexible
    track supporting wheels are classified in Class 152.

    417,    Pumps, for air pumps, per se, and especially subclasses 229+ for
    combinations of an inflating pump and a vehicle which operates the pump but
    not operating to inflate the tire while the vehicle is in motion.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet including strips, strands or fibers, and especially subclasses 105+
    for a composite web or sheet in which elements or constituents, (e.g.,
    fibers, strands) in one layer are disposed at an angle to those in another
    layer, and subclass 114 for such a web or sheet in which a parallel
    relationship exists between the constituents of the layers.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the notes thereunder.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Class 523, subclass 166 for a composition containing a
    synthetic resin or natural rubber having utility as a puncture sealant for
    a pneumatic tire or for use in emergency repair of vehicular tires or to
    processes of preparing said composition.


CLS 152/1
TXT Wheels for land vehicles whereby the vehicle is resiliently supported on
    the roadway by means within the wheel structure other than a resilient
    tire.  For definition of a resilient tire, see the definition of this
    class, subclass 151 and subclass 375, Note (1).


CLS 152/2
TXT The spring wheel is combined with devices for lubricating moving parts of
    the wheel or for oiling to prevent rusting of springs.


CLS 152/3
TXT The lubricant for the spring wheel is introduced into a closed chamber
    containing the springs.


CLS 152/4
TXT The lubrication for the spring wheel is directed solely to cylinders and
    pistons therein.


CLS 152/5
TXT Spring wheels in which the portion bearing upon the roadway yields locally
    under load so that the wheel as a whole does not retain its circular form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 543 for a rolling earth working tool with
    spring teeth and subclass 544 for a rolling earth working tool with spring
    mounted teeth.

    305,    Wheel Substitutes for Land Vehicles, subclass 6 for spring biased
    elements movably mounted on the rim of a wheel forming ground engaging feet
    as the wheel rotates.


CLS 152/6
TXT The resiliency of the spring wheel with deformable ground engaging part is
    provided by combined springs of different types, for example, leaf and coil.


CLS 152/7
TXT The resiliency of the spring wheel with deformable ground engaging part is
    provided by rubber or its equivalent.


CLS 152/8
TXT The resiliency of the spring wheel with deformable ground engaging part is
    provided by a chamber or chambers filled with fluid under pressure greater
    than atmospheric, whether under load or not.


CLS 152/9
TXT The pneumatic spring providing the resiliency of the deformable grounding
    engaging part of the spring wheel forms a continuous ring about the wheel
    center.

    (1)     Note.  For annular air chambers so combined with cylinders and
    pistons that the air of the chamber is in direct contact with the piston,
    see this class, subclass 8.


CLS 152/10
TXT The annular pneumatic spring of the spring wheel with deformable ground
    engaging part comprises an air chamber in free and unobstructed
    communication with an annular resilient tire on the wheel so that the
    pressure of the air in the chamber is applied to such tire.  The chamber
    may or may not be annular.  The tire may be pneumatic and the communication
    with the air chamber direct and continuous throughout the rim zone of the
    tire so that the chamber formed by the tire is combined with the air
    chamber to form a continuous single chamber.

    (1)     Note.  For similar devices wherein the air in the chamber is fed to
    the tire at reduced pressure, see this class, subclass 418.

    (2)     Note.  For similar devices constituting a sectional pneumatic tire,
    see this class, subclass 345.1.

    (3)     Note.  For similar devices constituting a combined cushion and
    pneumatic tire, see this class, subclasses 155+.


CLS 152/11
TXT The resiliency of the spring wheel with deformable ground engaging part is
    provided by leaf springs.

    (1)     Note.  For similar structure in a spring tire, see this, subclasses
    253+ and 270+.


CLS 152/12
TXT The leaf springs providing the resiliency of the deformable ground engaging
    part of the spring wheel have their inner ends positively secured in fixed
    relation to the wheel center.  The outer ends may or may not be secured but
    the springs are secured at no points but their ends.


CLS 152/13
TXT The resiliency of the spring wheel with deformable ground engaging part is
    provided by coil springs.

    (1)     Note.  For similar structure in a spring tire, see this class,
    subclasses 261+ and 284+.


CLS 152/14
TXT The coil springs providing the resiliency of the deformable ground engaging
    part of the spring wheel are arranged with their axes extending radially of
    the axis of the wheel.

    (1)     Note.  For similar structure in a spring tire, see this class,
    subclasses 262 and 289 and their indented subclasses.


CLS 152/15
TXT The radial coil springs providing the resiliency of the deformable ground
    engaging part of the spring wheel are each combined with a cylinder and
    piston, the coil being either enclosed within the cylinder or encircling
    the assembled cylinder and piston.


CLS 152/16
TXT The radial coil springs providing the resiliency of the deformable ground
    engaging part of the spring wheel have rods extending through them
    lengthwise.


CLS 152/17
TXT Spring wheels having an annular inflexible portion which extends about the
    wheel outside of the springs.  The springs are located radially inwardly of
    the annulus and resiliently support the annulus against radial motion
    relative to the wheel center.


CLS 152/18
TXT The spring wheel with spring encircling rigid annulus is provided with
    means independent of the springs whereby radial motion of the rigid annulus
    relative to the wheel center is positively limited.

    (1)     Note.  For resilient overload stops, see this class, subclass 29
    and appropriate indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  For overload stops inside the structure of a pneumatic tire,
    see this class, subclass 158.

    (3)     Note.  For overload stops on the outside of the structure of a
    pneumatic tire, see this class, subclasses 165 and 166.

    (4)     Note.  For overload stops associated with a pneumatic tire, but
    separate therefrom, see Class 301, Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles,
    subclasses 39.1+.


CLS 152/19
TXT The spring wheel with spring encircling rigid annulus is provided with
    means to secure said rigid annulus rigidly to the wheel center.  This
    converts the spring wheel into a rigid wheel and is for temporary use when
    springs are broken.


CLS 152/20
TXT The spring encircling rigid annulus in the spring wheel is resiliently
    supported against radial motion relative to the wheel center by a flexible
    strap, bank, cable or chain extending about the wheel.  The flexible
    element is not a spring in the ordinary sense of the term.

    (1)     Note.  For rubber springs extending continuously about the wheel,
    see this class, subclasses 40 and 47 and indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  For pneumatic springs extending continuously about the
    wheel, see this class, subclass 56 and indented subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  For leaf springs extending continuously about the wheel, see
    this class, subclass 69.

    (4)     Note.  For coil springs extending continuously about the wheel, see
    this class, subclass 92.


CLS 152/21
TXT The spring encircling rigid annulus in the spring wheel is resiliently
    supported against radial motion relative to the wheel center by mechanism
    wherein thrust or tension is applied to the springs laterally of the wheel.


CLS 152/22
TXT The lateral thrust or tension mechanism supporting the spring encircling
    rigid annulus comprises devices wherein friction between two moving
    elements is increased by spring pressure.


CLS 152/23
TXT In a spring wheel having a spring encircling rigid annulus supported by
    lateral thrust or tension mechanism involving combined spring and friction
    devices, the springs are coil springs.


CLS 152/24
TXT The lateral thrust or tension mechanism supporting the spring encircling
    rigid annulus comprises combined coil springs and friction devices so
    arranged that the springs are acted upon in both directions at once
    transversely of the wheel.


CLS 152/25
TXT The lateral thrust or tension mechanism supporting the spring encircling
    rigid annulus comprises coil springs.


CLS 152/26
TXT The lateral thrust or tension mechanism supporting the spring encircling
    rigid annulus comprises coil springs having rods extending through them
    lengthwise.

    (1)     Note.  For such structure wherein the spring encircles the hub, see
    this class, subclass 25.


CLS 152/27
TXT The lateral thrust or tension mechanism supporting the spring encircling
    rigid annulus comprises force transmitting balls.


CLS 152/28
TXT The spring encircling rigid annulus in the spring wheel is resiliently
    supported against radial motion relative to the wheel center by devices
    wherein friction between two moving elements is increased by spring
    pressure.

    (1)     Note.  For single end secured leaf springs wherein the free end may
    have some friction, see this class, subclass 81.


CLS 152/29
TXT The spring encircling rigid annulus in the spring wheel is resiliently
    supported against radial motion relative to the wheel center by combined
    springs of different types, for example, rubber, leaf and coil.


CLS 152/30
TXT In a spring wheel having a spring encircling rigid annulus supported by
    plural spring types, said types are limited to rubber and pneumatic springs.


CLS 152/31
TXT In a spring wheel having a spring encircling rigid annulus supported by
    plural spring types, said types are limited to rubber and leaf springs.


CLS 152/32
TXT In a spring wheel having a spring encircling rigid annulus supported by
    plural spring types, said types are limited to rubber and coil springs.


CLS 152/33
TXT In a spring wheel having a spring encircling rigid annulus supported by
    plural spring types limited to rubber and coil springs, the rubber spring
    forms a continuous ring about the wheel center.


CLS 152/34
TXT In a spring wheel having a spring encircling rigid annulus supported by
    plural spring types, said types are limited to pneumatic and leaf springs.


CLS 152/35
TXT In a spring wheel having a spring encircling rigid annulus supported by
    plural spring types, said types are limited to pneumatic and coil springs.


CLS 152/36
TXT In a spring wheel having a spring encircling rigid annulus supported by
    plural spring types limited to pneumatic and coil springs, the pneumatic
    spring forms a continuous ring about the wheel center.


CLS 152/37
TXT In a spring wheel having a spring encircling rigid annulus supported by
    plural spring types, said types are limited to leaf and coil springs.


CLS 152/38
TXT In a spring wheel having a spring encircling rigid annulus supported by
    leaf and coil springs only the leaf springs have their centers positively
    secured in fixed relation to the rigid annulus or to the wheel center.
    This subclass includes leaf springs which are additionally secured at their
    ends.


CLS 152/39
TXT In a spring wheel having a spring encircling rigid annulus supported by
    leaf and coil springs only, the leaf springs have their opposite ends
    positively secured in fixed relation to the rigid annulus and the wheel
    center, respectively, or one end only so secured to the rigid annulus or
    wheel center.


CLS 152/40
TXT The spring encircling rigid annulus in the spring wheel is resiliently
    supported against radial motion relative to the wheel center by rubber or
    its equivalent.  This subclass includes closed rubber chambers wherein the
    pressure is atmospheric.

    (1)     Note.  For closed rubber chambers wherein the pressure is more than
    atmospheric, see this class, subclass 53 and indented subclasses.


CLS 152/41
TXT The rubber spring supporting the spring encircling rigid annulus in the
    spring wheel is so constructed and arranged that the rubber is subjected to
    angular distortion when the wheel is under load.

    (1)     Note.  For spring wheels wherein rubber block or balls are so
    arranged that they are placed under shear when positioned adjacent the
    horizontal center line of the wheel, but which take vertical thrust without
    shear when positioned adjacent the vertical center line, see this class,
    subclasses 44-46.


CLS 152/42
TXT The rubber springs supporting the spring encircling rigid annulus in the
    spring wheel are cylindrical in the ordinary sense of the term and have
    flat ends.  They may be tubular and may surround bolts or spokes.


CLS 152/43
TXT The cylindrical rubber springs supporting the spring encircling rigid
    annulus in the spring wheel are arranged with their axes extending
    crosswise of the wheel.

    (1)     Note.  For similarly constructed and arranged pneumatic springs,
    see this class, subclass 53.


CLS 152/44
TXT The rubber springs supporting the spring encircling rigid annulus in the
    spring wheel consist of individual rubber blocks or balls as distinguished
    from sheets, cords or annular formations.


CLS 152/45
TXT In a spring wheel having a spring encircling rigid annulus supported by
    rubber blocks or balls, said rigid annulus is held against rotation
    relative to the wheel center, either by modification of wheel or spring
    elements or by additional means.  This subclass includes drive through the
    springs.

    (1)     Note.  For patents wherein the drive is by means of friction,
    cement or vulcanization and involves no modification of wheel or spring
    elements, see this class, subclasses 40-44.


CLS 152/46
TXT In a spring wheel having a spring encircling rigid annulus supported blocks
    or balls and having drive means, the rigid annulus is held against lateral
    movement relative to the wheel center by means other than the springs.
    This includes devices which hold the rigid annulus against lateral movement
    in one direction only.


CLS 152/47
TXT The rubber spring supporting the spring encircling rigid annulus in the
    spring wheel forms a continuous ring about the wheel center.


CLS 152/48
TXT The annular rubber spring supporting the spring encircling rigid annulus in
    the spring wheel completely encloses said rigid annulus either by embedding
    or by enclosure in an annular chamber.

    (1)     Note.  For similar arrangement of an annular pneumatic spring, see
    this class, subclass 57.

    (2)     Note.  For similar devices wherein the spring encircling annulus is
    not rigid, see this class, subclass 251.


CLS 152/49
TXT In a spring wheel having a spring encircling rigid annulus supported by an
    annular rubber spring, there are more than one of such springs.


CLS 152/50
TXT In a spring wheel having a spring encircling rigid annulus supported by an
    annular rubber spring, said rigid annulus is held against lateral movement
    relative to the wheel center by means other than said spring.  This
    includes devices which hold the rigid annulus against lateral movement in
    one direction only.


CLS 152/51
TXT In a spring wheel having a spring encircling rigid annulus supported by an
    annular rubber spring and having guide means, said rigid annulus is held
    against rotation relative to the wheel center, either by modification of
    wheel or spring elements or by additional means.  This subclass includes
    drive through the springs.

    (1)     Note.  For patents wherein the drive is by means of friction,
    cement or vulcanization, and involves no modification of wheel or spring
    elements, see this class, subclasses 47-50.


CLS 152/52
TXT In a spring wheel having a spring encircling rigid annulus supported by an
    annular rubber spring, said rigid annulus is held against rotation relative
    to the wheel center, either by modification of wheel or spring elements or
    by additional means.  This subclass includes drive through the spring.

    (1)     Note.  For devices wherein the drive is by means of friction,
    cement or vulcanization, and involves no modification of wheel or spring
    elements, see this class, subclasses 40-42 and 47.


CLS 152/53
TXT The spring encircling rigid annulus in the spring wheel is resiliently
    supported against radial motion relative to the wheel center by a chamber
    or chambers filled with fluid under pressure greater than atmospheric,
    whether under load or not, with the exception of subclass 55 indented
    hereunder, wherein the pressure may at times be atmospheric or less.

    (1)     Note.  For spring wheels with chambers having elastic walls wherein
    the pressure is atmospheric, see this class, subclass 40 and indented
    subclasses.


CLS 152/54
TXT The pneumatic springs supporting the spring encircling rigid annulus in the
    spring wheel are combined with movable rigid links which transmit force to
    or from the springs.  The links are usually pivotally connected to wheel or
    spring parts but may merely bear upon the combined parts without positive
    connection.


CLS 152/55
TXT The pneumatic springs supporting the spring encircling rigid annulus in the
    spring wheel each consists of a cylinder and piston wherein air in the
    cylinder cushions the piston against telescoping action.


CLS 152/56
TXT The pneumatic spring supporting the spring encircling rigid annulus in the
    spring wheel forms a continuous ring about the wheel center.

    (1)     Note.  For such structure wherein the pneumatic spring is fixed to
    the rigid annulus, thereby forming a positive driving connection through
    the spring, see this class, subclasses 60 and 67.

    (2)     Note.  For similar structure in a pneumatic tire, see this class,
    subclasses 159 and 161.

    (3)     Note.  For annular chambers combined with cylinders and pistons,
    see this class, subclass 55.


CLS 152/57
TXT The annular pneumatic spring supporting the spring encircling rigid annulus
    in the spring wheel completely encloses said rigid annulus, either by
    embedding or by enclosure in an annular chamber.

    (1)     Note.  For similar arrangement of an annular rubber spring, see
    this class, subclass 48.

    (2)     Note.  For similar devices wherein the spring encircling annulus is
    not rigid, see this class, subclass 200.


CLS 152/58
TXT In a spring wheel having a spring encircling rigid annulus supported by an
    annular pneumatic spring, there are more than one of such springs.


CLS 152/59
TXT In a spring wheel having a spring encircling rigid annulus supported by an
    annular pneumatic spring, said rigid annulus is held against lateral
    movement relative to the wheel center by means other than said spring. This
    includes devices which hold the rigid annulus against lateral movement in
    one direction only.

    (1)     Note.  For similar structure in a pneumatic tire, see this class,
    subclasses 162-164.


CLS 152/60
TXT In a spring wheel having a spring encircling rigid annulus supported by an
    annular pneumatic spring and having guide means, said rigid annulus is held
    against rotation relative to the wheel center, either by modification of
    wheel or spring elements or by additional means.  This subclass includes
    drive through the springs.

    (1)     Note.  For such devices wherein the drive is by means of friction,
    cement or vulcanization and involves no modification of wheel or spring
    elements, see this class, subclasses 56-59.


CLS 152/61
TXT In a spring wheel having a spring encircling rigid annulus supported by an
    annular pneumatic spring with guide means and combined drive, the drive is
    cushioned.

    (1)     Note.  For annular pneumatic springs in combination with springs of
    different types which act as both support and drive springs, see this
    class, subclasses 30, 34 and 35.


CLS 152/62
TXT In a spring wheel having a spring encircling rigid annulus supported by an
    annular pneumatic spring, with guide means and combined drive, the drive
    consists of a link or links pivotally or flexibly connecting said rigid
    annulus to the wheel center.


CLS 152/63
TXT In a spring wheel having a spring encircling rigid annulus supported by an
    annular pneumatic spring, with guide means and combined drive, the drive
    consists of fixed radially extending elements on the rigid annulus engaging
    an element on the wheel center or vice versa.


CLS 152/64
TXT In a spring wheel having a spring encircling rigid annulus supported by an
    annular pneumatic spring, with guide means and combined drive, the drive
    consists of a laterally extending stud on the rigid annulus engaging an
    element on the wheel center of vice versa.


CLS 152/65
TXT In a spring wheel having a spring encircling rigid annulus supported by an
    annular pneumatic spring, with guide means and combined drive, the drive
    consists of a bolt or its equivalent passing through both the rigid annulus
    and a part fixed to the hub or axle, one of said elements having a
    clearance for the bolt to allow relative radial movement between the parts.


CLS 152/66
TXT In a spring wheel having a spring encircling rigid annulus supported by an
    annular pneumatic spring, with guide means and combined drive, the drive
    consists of interfitting irregularities of the contacting annular surfaces
    of the rigid annulus and the annular spring, or of irregularities upon the
    rigid annulus which indent the spring.

    (1)     Note.  For anti-creep devices to prevent creeping of pneumatic
    tires on their rims, see this class, subclass 384.


CLS 152/67
TXT In a spring wheel having a spring encircling rigid annulus supported by an
    annular pneumatic spring, said rigid annulus is held against rotation
    relative to the wheel center, either my modification of wheel or spring
    elements or by additional means.  This subclass includes drive through the
    springs.

    (1)     Note.  For such devices wherein the drive is by means of friction,
    cement or vulcanization and involves no modification of wheel or spring
    elements, see this class, subclasses 56-59.


CLS 152/68
TXT In a spring wheel having a spring encircling rigid annulus supported by an
    annular pneumatic spring, with drive, the drive consists of interfitting
    irregularities of the contacting annular surfaces of the rigid annulus and
    the annular spring, or of irregularities upon the rigid annulus which
    indent the spring.


CLS 152/69
TXT The spring encircling rigid annulus in the spring wheel is resiliently
    supported against radial motion relative to the wheel center by leaf
    springs.


CLS 152/70
TXT The leaf spring support for the spring encircling rigid annulus in the
    spring wheel has its springs supported intermediate their points of
    securement to the wheel center and said rigid annulus. The second-mentioned
    support may be by way of attachment of the springs to each other
    intermediate their length or by way of elements extending radially from the
    hub or rim and bearing upon the springs either laterally or
    circumferentially.  The supports act directly upon the springs and may be
    either rigid or spring.

    (1)     Note.  For leaf springs attached to each other at their ends, see
    this class, subclass 69.

    (2)     Note.  For elements extending radially from the hub and bearing
    laterally upon the rim, see this class, subclasses 77, 78, 82, and 83.


CLS 152/71
TXT The leaf springs supporting the spring encircling rigid annulus in the
    spring wheel are combined with movable rigid links which transmit force to
    or from the springs.  These links are usually pivotally connected but may
    merely bear upon the combined parts without positive connection.


CLS 152/72
TXT The leaf spring support for the spring encircling rigid annulus in the
    spring wheel consists of a plurality of leaf springs some of which are
    arranged within the wheel differently from others.  The difference must be
    such that each spring arrangement would fall in a different subclass
    hereunder.


CLS 152/73
TXT Each of the leaf spring supports for the spring encircling rigid annulus in
    the spring wheel consists of one or more springs formed into an element
    with a substantially cylindrical periphery.  This includes cylindrical
    springs which extend about the wheel.

    (1)     Note.  For continuous or endless springs of irregular formation,
    see this class, subclass 69.

    (2)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 20.


CLS 152/74
TXT The leaf spring supports for the spring encircling rigid annulus in the
    spring wheel extend crosswise of the plane of the wheel.  This includes
    springs extending diagonally laterally of the wheel.


CLS 152/75
TXT The leaf spring supports for the spring encircling rigid annulus in the
    spring wheel are without curvature and arranged either radially or
    tangentially with respect to the wheel center.


CLS 152/76
TXT The leaf spring supports for the spring encircling rigid annulus in the
    spring wheel have their centers positively secured in the fixed relation to
    said rigid annulus or to the wheel center.  This subclass includes leaf
    springs which are additionally secured at their ends.

    (1)     Note.  For similarly secured leaf springs in a spring tire, see
    this class, subclasses 255 and 272.

    (2)     Note.  For wheels wherein the springs are not positively secured in
    place, see this class, subclass 69.


CLS 152/77
TXT In a spring wheel having a spring encircling rigid annulus supported by
    center secured leaf springs, said rigid annulus is held against lateral
    movement relative to the wheel center by means other than the springs.
    This includes devices which hold the rigid annulus against lateral movement
    in one direction only.

    (1)     Note.  For similar structure in a pneumatic tire, see this class,
    subclasses 162-164.


CLS 152/78
TXT In a spring wheel having a spring encircling rigid annulus supported by
    center secured leaf springs, with guide means, said rigid annulus is held
    against rotation relative to the wheel center by means other than said
    springs, or in addition thereto.


CLS 152/79
TXT Each of the center secured leaf spring supports for the spring encircling
    rigid annulus in the spring wheel is reversely curved.  This subclass
    includes springs having straight portions.


CLS 152/80
TXT The leaf spring supports for the spring encircling rigid annulus in the
    spring wheel have their opposite ends positively secured in fixed relation
    to said rigid annulus and the wheel center, respectively.

    (1)     Note.  For end secured leaf springs also secured at their centers,
    see this class, subclass 76 and indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  For leaf springs secured to each other or to supports, see
    this class, subclass 70.

    (3)     Note.  For similarly secured leaf springs in a spring tire, see
    this class, subclasses 256 and 273.

    (4)     Note.  For wheels wherein the springs are not positively secured in
    place, see this class, subclass 69.


CLS 152/81
TXT The end secured leaf spring supports for the spring encircling rigid
    annulus in the spring wheel are fixedly secured at one end only.

    (1)     Note.  For single end secured leaf springs also secured at their
    centers, see this class, subclass 76.

    (2)     Note.  For similarly secured leaf springs in a spring tire, see
    this class, subclasses 257 and 274.


CLS 152/82
TXT In a spring wheel having a spring encircling rigid annulus supported by end
    secured leaf springs, said rigid annulus is held against lateral movement
    relative to the wheel center by means other than said springs.  This
    includes devices which hold the rigid annulus against lateral movement in
    one direction only.

    (1)     Note.  For similar structure in a pneumatic tire, see this class,
    subclasses 162-164.


CLS 152/83
TXT In a spring wheel having a spring encircling rigid annulus supported by end
    secured leaf springs, with guide means, said rigid annulus is held against
    rotation relative to the wheel center by means other than the springs or in
    addition thereto.


CLS 152/84
TXT The end secured leaf spring supports for the spring encircling rigid
    annulus in the spring wheel are at least in part curved, and arranged in
    pairs wherein one spring of each pair curves oppositely from the other.
    This subclass includes springs having straight portions.

    (1)     Note.  For center secured oppositely curved pairs, see this class,
    subclasses 76-79.


CLS 152/85
TXT Each of the end secured leaf spring supports for the spring encircling
    rigid annulus in the spring wheel is reversely curved.  This subclass
    includes springs having straight portions.

    (1)     Note.  For such springs arranged in pairs with opposite curvature,
    see this class, subclass 84.


CLS 152/86
TXT The end secured leaf spring supports for the spring encircling rigid
    annulus in the spring wheel are curved from end to end substantially on an
    arc of a single circle.

    (1)     Note.  For such springs arranged in pairs with opposite curvature,
    see this class, subclass 84.

    (2)     Note.  For similar springs having straight portions, see this
    class, subclasses 80-83.


CLS 152/87
TXT The spring encircling rigid annulus in the spring wheel is resiliently
    supported against radial motion relative to the wheel center by coil
    springs.  The term "coil" is used to include coil, helical and volute
    springs.


CLS 152/88
TXT The coil springs supporting the spring encircling rigid annulus in the
    spring wheel are combined with movable rigid links which transmit force to
    or from the springs.  These links are usually pivotally connected to wheel
    or spring parts but may merely bear upon the combined parts without
    positive connection.  The links are located outside of the springs as
    distinguished from spring encircled links.

    (1)     Note.  For spring encircled links, see this class, subclasses 103
    and 104.


CLS 152/89
TXT The coil spring support for the spring encircling rigid annulus in the
    spring wheel consists of a plurality of coil springs, some of which are
    arranged within the wheel differently from others.  The difference must be
    such that each spring arrangement would fall in a different subclass
    hereunder.

    (1)     Note.  For coil drive springs arranged differently from supporting
    springs, see this class, subclasses 101, 104 and 107.


CLS 152/90
TXT The coil spring support for the spring encircling rigid annulus in the
    spring wheel consists of a plurality of springs, some of the springs being
    arranged with their axes extending tangentially to the axis of the wheel
    and the remainder of the springs being arranged with their axes extending
    radially of the axis of the wheel.

    (1)     Note.  For tangential drive springs, see this class, subclasses
    101, 104 and 107.


CLS 152/91
TXT The coil springs supporting the spring encircling rigid annulus in the
    spring wheel have their axes extending diagonally laterally of the wheel.


CLS 152/92
TXT The coil springs supporting the spring encircling rigid annulus in the
    spring wheel have their axes extending circumferentially of the wheel,
    arcuately parallel to the wheel periphery.


CLS 152/93
TXT The coil springs supporting the spring encircling rigid annulus in the
    spring wheel are arranged with their axes extending tangentially to the
    axis of the wheel.


CLS 152/94
TXT The coil springs supporting the spring encircling rigid annulus in the
    spring wheel are arranged with their axes extending crosswise of the wheel.


CLS 152/95
TXT The transverse coil springs supporting the spring encircling rigid annulus
    in the spring wheel are constructed and arranged so that one end of the
    spring is supported at or adjacent the axis of the spring coil.


CLS 152/96
TXT The title defines the subclass.


CLS 152/97
TXT The coil springs supporting the spring encircling rigid annulus in the
    spring wheel are arranged with their axes extending radially of the axis of
    the wheel.


CLS 152/98
TXT The radial coil spring supporting the spring encircling rigid annulus in
    the spring wheel consist of sets of two or more springs, one spring of each
    set being arranged radially outwardly of another with a fixed bearing
    between their adjacent ends.  The bearing may be fixed with relation to
    either the rigid annulus or the wheel center.


CLS 152/99
TXT The radial coil springs supporting the spring encircling rigid annulus in
    the spring wheel are each combined with cylinders which telescope one
    within another, the coil being either enclosed within the cylinders or
    encircling the assembled cylinders.


CLS 152/100
TXT The radial coil springs supporting the spring encircling rigid annulus in
    the spring wheel are each combined with a cylinder and piston, the coil
    being either enclosed within the cylinder or encircling the assembled
    cylinder and piston.


CLS 152/101
TXT In a spring wheel having a spring encircling rigid annulus supported by
    radial coil springs with cylinders and pistons, said rigid annulus is held
    against rotation relative to the wheel center by means other than the
    springs, cylinders and pistons, or in addition to such springs, cylinders
    or pistons.


CLS 152/102
TXT In a spring wheel with cylinder and piston supported radial coil springs
    supporting a spring encircling rigid annulus the construction and
    arrangement is such that each spring acts both in compression and tension.
    In another species included in this subclass the springs are limited to
    compression or tension but act whether the local space between the rigid
    annulus and the wheel center is increased or decreased, that is, they act
    whether at the temporary top or bottom of the wheel.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 98.


CLS 152/103
TXT The radial coil springs supporting the spring encircling rigid annulus in
    the spring wheel have rods or links extending through them lengthwise.


CLS 152/104
TXT In a spring wheel having a spring encircling rigid annulus supported by
    radial rod encircling coil springs, the rigid annulus is held against
    lateral movement relative to the wheel center by means other than the rods
    and springs and is held against rotation relative to the wheel center by
    means other than the rods and springs, or in addition to such rods and
    springs.


CLS 152/105
TXT In a spring wheel having a spring encircling rigid annulus supported by
    radial coil springs, said rigid annulus is held against lateral movement
    relative to the wheel center by means other than the springs.  This
    includes devices which hold the rigid part against lateral movement in one
    direction only.

    (1)     Note.  For similar structure in a pneumatic tire, see this class,
    subclasses 162-164.


CLS 152/106
TXT In a spring wheel having a spring encircling rigid annulus supported by
    radial coil springs, with guide means, said rigid annulus is held against
    rotation relative to the wheel center by means other than said springs, or
    in addition thereto.


CLS 152/107
TXT In a spring wheel having a spring encircling rigid annulus supported by
    radial coil springs, with guide means and combined drive, the drive is
    cushioned.

    (1)     Note.  For radial coil springs in combination with differently
    arranged coil springs which act as both support and drive springs, see this
    class, subclasses 89 and 90.

    (2)     Note.  For radial coil springs in combination with springs of
    different type which act as both support and drive springs, see this class,
    subclasses 32, 35 and 37-39.

    (3)     Note.  For tangential coil springs which act as both support and
    drive springs, see this class, subclass 93.

    (4)     Note.  For circumferential coil springs which act as both support
    and drive springs, see this class, subclass 92.


CLS 152/108
TXT In a spring wheel having a spring encircling rigid annulus supported by
    radial coil springs, with guide means and combined drive, the drive
    consists of a link or links pivotally or flexibly connecting said rigid
    annulus to the wheel center.


CLS 152/109
TXT In a spring wheel having a spring encircling rigid annulus supported by
    radial coil springs, with guide means and combined drive, the drive
    consists of fixed radially extended elements on the rigid annulus engaging
    an element on the wheel center, or vice versa.


CLS 152/110
TXT In a spring wheel having a spring encircling rigid annulus supported by
    radial coil springs, with guide means and combined drive, the drive
    consists of a laterally extending projection on the rigid annulus engaging
    an element on the wheel center, or vice versa.


CLS 152/111
TXT In a spring wheel having a spring encircling rigid annulus supported by
    radial coil springs, with guide means and combined drive, the drive
    consists of a bolt or its equivalent passing through both the rigid annulus
    and a part fixed to the hub or axle, one of said parts having a clearance
    for the bolt to allow relative radial movement between the parts.


CLS 152/112
TXT In a spring wheel having a spring encircling rigid annulus supported by
    radial coil springs, said rigid annulus is held against rotation relative
    to the wheel center by means other than the springs, or in addition thereto.


CLS 152/151
TXT Devices for application outside the periphery of that fixed rigid element
    of a land vehicle wheel generally known as a rim or tire, to absorb road
    shocks.

    (1)     Note.  Any combinations of spring wheel and resilient tire will be
    found in this class, under "Spring wheels", subclasses 1-112.

    (2)     Note.  For resilient tires specially adapted for use with railway
    vehicles, see Class 295, Railway Wheels and Axles, subclass 11 and indented
    subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  Nonresilient tires are in Class 301, Land Vehicles:  Wheels
    and Axles, subclass 86 and indented subclasses.

    (4)     Note.  For a rolling earth working tool with a yieldable rim see
    Class 172, Earth Working, subclass 519.


CLS 152/152
TXT Resilient tires constructed and arranged for rapid and convenient manual
    application upon a rim to replace temporarily the ordinary tire.  These are
    usually cushion tires intended to replace temporarily punctured pneumatic
    tires.

    (1)     Note.  For circumferentially adjustable securing means to bind the
    tire on the rim, see this class, subclasses 279, 283, 307, 388, and
    indented subclasses, and 399.

    (2)     Note.  For tires constructed and arranged for use with or in
    addition to the ordinary tire for emergency purposes, see Class 301, Land
    Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclasses 39.1+.


CLS 152/152.1
TXT With electrical conducting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 151 wherein means are provided integral or
    permanently associated with the resilient tire in order to conduct an
    electrical current in, on or through the resilient tire.

    (1)     Note.  The electrical conducting means may possess heat dissipating
    characteristics.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153,    for resilient tires with cooling devices and subclass 521 for a
    pneumatic tire with means enabling restricted operation in damaged or
    deflated condition which is further provided with internal lubrication or
    cooling.



CLS 152/153
TXT Structure built into the tire or wheel and arranged to cool the tire when
    in use.

    (1)     Note.  For brake cooling devices, see Class 301, Land Vehicles:
    Wheels and Axles, subclasses 6.1+.


CLS 152/154
TXT Resilient tires having devices integral therewith or permanently attached
    thereto for preventing the tire from splashing mud or water.

    (1)     Note.  For splash guards attached to the wheel or rim, see Class
    280, Land Vehicles, subclass 156.


CLS 152/154.1
TXT With balancing feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 151 wherein the resilient tire is provided
    with means integral therewith or permanently associated therewith or
    attached thereto for statically or dynamically balancing the resilient tire.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    75 for surface bonding processes involving balancing of the resultant
    product.

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclasses 5.21+ for a balancing
    device for a vehicle wheel.


CLS 152/154.2
TXT With wear indicating feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 151 wherein the resilient tire is provided
    with means integral therewith or attached thereto to indicate tire
    abrasion, (e.g., by abrasion of specified tire portion or material.


CLS 152/155
TXT The tire comprises both cushion tire features and pneumatic tire features.


CLS 152/156
TXT The cushion feature comprises metal springs.

    (1)     Note.  For metallic spring cushion tires, per se, see this class,
    subclass 247 and indented subclasses.


CLS 152/157
TXT The cushion tire feature of the combined cushion and pneumatic tire is
    completely enclosed.

    (1)     Note.  For tires embodying an enclosed cushion, but without the
    pneumatic feature, see this class, subclass 310 and indented subclasses.


CLS 152/158
TXT Protruding into the chamber constituting the pneumatic means is an element
    which takes the load only when the pneumatic means is deflated or is
    distorted beyond the normal amount, such as by hitting a rock or other
    obstruction.

    (1)     Note.  For devices for the same purpose on the exterior of the
    tire, see this class, subclasses 165 and 166.

    (2)     Note.  For devices for the same purpose separate from the tire and
    attached to the wheel, see Class 301, Land Vehicles: Wheels and Axles,
    subclasses 39.1+.


CLS 152/159
TXT The cushion means and the pneumatic means are superimposed upon each other
    radially of the wheel but are not united by vulcanization or equivalent
    means, and neither encloses the other.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 175 and indented subclasses, and
    187 and indented subclasses.


CLS 152/160
TXT Independent tread elements project through a rigid element and are
    superimposed upon pneumatic means to reciprocate under load.


CLS 152/161
TXT The cushion means is located radially outwardly of the pneumatic means and
    its edges are secured to the wheel so that the cushion reciprocates in its
    middle zone only, under load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164,    327 and 345.1


CLS 152/162
TXT The cushion means is located radially outwardly of the pneumatic feature
    and is guided by flanges so that it reciprocates under load.  A plurality
    of cushion means may be present. The flanges may be on either the wheel or
    the cushion means. They hold the cushion against lateral displacement and
    may be the sole means securing the tread to the wheel.


CLS 152/163
TXT Stops are provided which limit the radial reciprocal movement of the
    cushion feature.


CLS 152/164
TXT Bolts or studs are provided to act as stops against radial or
    circumferential movement of the cushion means, or against both.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161.


CLS 152/165
TXT Inventions under subclass 155 in which all elements of the tire proper are
    united by vulcanization or equivalent means, such as cementing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158.


CLS 152/166
TXT The integral tire is provided with, or obviously intended for use with, a
    removable inner tube, and encloses at least the tread and side walls
    thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158.



    Tires resilient, Armored.  The tire is provided with devices protecting all
    or substantially all of the tread portion of the tire against wear or
    puncture.  Where the device is sectional, the sections must substantially
    abut or be directly connected to each other by their own integral elements,
    or overlap, or be external and so thick as to raise the tire body above
    ordinary danger of puncture.

    (1)     Note.  For analogous body armor, see Class 89, Ordnance, subclass
    36.09 and see the notes thereto for other armor.


CLS 152/167
TXT Devices protecting all or substantially all of the tread portion of the
    tire against wear or puncture, either integral with the tire or applied
    thereto, and so constructed and arranged as to tend to prevent slipping or
    skidding of the tire on the roadway, and performing the anti-skid function
    either alone or in combination with other elements.  Anti-skid armor is
    necessarily wholly or partially external.

    (1)     Note.  For similar anti-skid devices which do not fall within the
    definition of armor, see this class, subclass 208 and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 98+ for a
    single or plural layer stock material product which is structurally defined
    (e.g., size or shape) and subclasses 221+ for such a product having a
    component or element which is structurally defined (e.g., size,
    arrangement, shape); and subclass 911 (a cross-reference art collection)
    for a product having a penetration resistant layer.


CLS 152/168
TXT The anti-skid armor comprises fibers, cords, wires or fabric extending
    radially or substantially radially of the tire as viewed in lateral section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212.


CLS 152/169
TXT The anti-skid armor, being external, is secured to the tire by means of
    rivets, bolts or the like extending into or through the tire casing, or a
    portion of the armor itself is embedded in the casing.

    (1)     Note.  For anti-skid devices with embedded anti-skid for use with
    footwear, see Class 36, Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclass 59 and
    indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210,    211 and 222.


CLS 152/170
TXT The anti-skid armor is detachable from the tire.  This subclass consists
    principally of woven metal anti-skid armor.


CLS 152/171
TXT The detachable anti-skid armor consists of either open or imperforate metal
    links connected to each other directly or by rods or cables in the nature
    of hinge pintles. The mat must extend for more than one link laterally of
    the wheel.

    (1)     Note.  For the metal linked mat, see this class, subclass 201.

    (2)     Note.  For detachable anti-skid armor consisting of links, and of
    single-link width, see this class, subclass 178 and indented subclasses.


CLS 152/172
TXT The linked mat detachable anti-skid armor is secured to the wheel by
    intermediation of the tire, having no direct connection to the wheel,
    felly, or rim.

    (1)     Note.  For the metal linked mat, see this class subclass 201.

    (2)     Note.  For the securing means, see this class, subclasses 175, and
    indented subclasses, 179, 182 and indented subclasses, 187 and indented
    subclasses, 191, 225 and indented subclasses, 233, 241 and 242.


CLS 152/173
TXT The detachable anti-skid armor comprises a nonsectional band which extends
    continuously about the major circumference of the tire.  This band may be
    split.  This subclass consists principally of such armor secured to the
    wheel, felly, or rim.


CLS 152/174
TXT The detachable anti-skid armor with circumferential band is secured to the
    wheel by means of a binding or strap around the felly.

    (1)     Note.  For the securing means, see this class, subclasses 181, 186,
    190, 220- 230, 237, and 373.


CLS 152/175
TXT The detachable anti-skid armor with circumferential band is secured to the
    wheel by intermediation of the tire, having no direct connection with the
    wheel, felly, or rim.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 159 and 187 and indented
    subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  For the securing means, see this class, subclasses 172, 179,
    182, 183, 187, 188, and 191.


CLS 152/176
TXT The detachable anti-skid armor comprises a band constituting a tread and
    wholly or partially inlaid in a groove or grooves in tread zone of the
    casing.

    (1)     Note.  For the securing means, see this class, subclass 172, 179,
    182, and indented subclasses, 191, 225 and indented subclasses, 233 and 241.


CLS 152/177
TXT The tire secured detachable anti-skid armor with circumferential band is
    held to the tire by rings of smaller diameter than the tire tread, which
    rings are not secured to the wheel or tire but extend about the wheel at
    each side of the tread with the anti-skid armor attached thereto.  The ring
    may be sectional but does not include any part of the armor.  This subclass
    includes rings consisting entirely of chain.

    (1)     Note.  For the securing means, see this class, subclasses 172, 179,
    184, 189, 191, 225 and indented subclasses, and 242.


CLS 152/178
TXT The detachable anti-skid armor is sectional.  The sections must
    substantially abut, or be directly connected to each other by their own
    integral elements, or overlap, or be so thick as to raise the tire above
    ordinary danger of puncture.

    (1)     Note.  For similar anti-skid devices which do not fall within the
    definition of armor, see this class, subclass 208 and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189.


CLS 152/179
TXT The sectional detachable anti-skid armor is held to the wheel by
    intermediation of the tire, having no direct connection with the wheel,
    felly or rim.

    (1)     Note.  For the securing means, see this class, subclasses 172, 175
    and indented subclasses, 182 and indented subclasses 187 and indented
    subclasses, 191, 225 and indented subclasses, 233, 241, and 242.

    (2)     Note.  For similar structures where the armor is wholly metallic,
    see this class, subclass 182 and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS,  SUBCLASS:

    191.


CLS 152/180
TXT The sectional detachable anti-skid armor itself comprises no material but
    metal. The securing means may be of other materials.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    190.


CLS 152/181
TXT The wholly metallic sectional detachable anti-skid armor is secured to the
    wheel by means of a binding or strap around the felly.

    (1)     Note.  For the securing means, see this class, subclasses 174, 186,
    190, 220- 230, 237, and 373.


CLS 152/182
TXT The wholly metallic sectional detachable anti-skid armor is held to the
    wheel by intermediation of the tire, having no direct connection with the
    wheel, felly or rim.

    (1)     Note.  For the securing means, see this class, subclasses 172, 175,
    176, 179, 183, 187, 188, 225, and indented subclasses, 233, and 241.


CLS 152/183
TXT The wholly metallic sectional detachable anti-skid armor is bound to the
    tire (generally by inflation expansion of the tire within the armor), the
    adjacent armor sections being connected to each other at, or close to,
    their corners only, to form a circular series of sections.  The connection
    may be direct or by means of links.

    (1)     Note.  For the securing means, see this class, subclasses 179 and
    191.


CLS 152/184
TXT The tire secured wholly metallic sectional detachable anti-skid armor is
    held to the tire by rings of smaller diameter than the tire tread, which
    rings are not secured to the wheel or tire, but extend about the wheel at
    each side of the tread with the anti-skid armor attached thereto.  The ring
    may be sectional but does not include any part of the armor.  This subclass
    includes rings consisting entirely of chain.

    (1)     Note.  For the securing means, see this class, subclasses 172, 177,
    179, 189, 191, 225, and indented subclasses, and 242.


CLS 152/185
TXT External devices protecting all or substantially all of the tread portion
    of the tire against wear or puncture, either integral with the tire or
    applied.

    (1)     Note.  See also this class, subclass 53 and indented subclasses,
    for annular external armor which is rigid and forms an outer rim.


CLS 152/185.1
TXT Track for single wheel:

    Apparatus under subclass 185 comprising either (a) one or more endless
    members having traction enhancing portions thereon, or (b) an endless
    member made up of a plurality of parts at least some of which having
    traction enhancing portions thereon, the member or members closely
    surrounding the tire about its periphery.

    (1)     Note.  A tire having a track or tread member as either an integral
    part thereof or otherwise being rigidly connected thereto even though
    separable therefrom is not deemed proper for classification here.  Such
    devices are found in other subclasses in Class 152, especially subclasses
    170+.


CLS 152/186
TXT The external armor is secured to the wheel by means of a binding or strap
    around the felly.

    (1)     Note.  For the securing means, see this class, subclasses 174, 181,
    190, 220- 230, 237, and 373.


CLS 152/187
TXT The external armor is held to the wheel by intermediation of the tire,
    having no direct connection to the wheel, felly, or rim.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 159 and 175 and indented
    subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  For the securing means, see this class, subclasses 172, 175,
    179, 182, 183, 191, 225, and indented subclasses, 233, and 241.

    (3)     Note.  For sectional external armor, see this class, subclass 191.


CLS 152/188
TXT The tire secured external armor comprises a band constituting a tread and
    wholly or partially inlaid in a groove or grooves in the tread zone of the
    casing.

    (1)     Note.  For the securing means, see this class, subclasses 172, 176,
    179, 182, and indented subclasses, and 191.


CLS 152/189
TXT The tire secured external armor is held to the tire by rings of smaller
    diameter than the tire tread which rings are not secured to the wheel or
    tire but extend about the wheel at each side of the tread with the armor
    attached thereto.  The ring may be sectional but does not include any part
    of the armor.  This subclass includes rings consisting entirely of chain.

    (1)     Note.  For the securing means, see this class, subclasses 172, 177,
    179, 184, 191, 225, and indented subclasses, and 242.


CLS 152/190
TXT The external armor is sectional.  The sections must substantially abut, or
    be directly connected to each other by their own integral elements, or
    overlap.

    (1)     Note.  For sections so far separated as not to protect the entire
    tire tread, see this class, subclass 225 and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    178,    180 and 181.


CLS 152/191
TXT The sectional external armor is secured to the wheel by intermediation of
    the tire, having no direct connection to the wheel, felly, or rim.

    (1)     Note.  For the securing means, see this class, subclasses 172, 175
    and indented subclasses, 179, 182 and indented subclasses, 187 and indented
    subclasses, 225 and indented subclasses, 233, 241, and 242.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179.


CLS 152/192
TXT The tire armor is an element of a single tube tire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196     and 197.


CLS 152/193
TXT The single tube tire armor comprises metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198,    200, 201, 202, and 205 and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 411+ for a
    stock material product in the form of a plural layer web or sheet, but not
    structurally defined, and which may have a metal layer; and especially
    subclasses 457+ for such a plural layer product including a metal layer
    next to a non-metal layer.


CLS 152/194
TXT The single tube tire armor comprises metal plates.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199.


CLS 152/195
TXT The tire armor is an element of the inner tube construction.  The armor may
    be embedded in the body of the tube or be secured to its surface.

    (1)     Note.  For reinforced inner tubes, see this class, subclasses 510+.


CLS 152/196
TXT The tire armor is an element of the casing construction.  This subclass
    consists of armor secured to the inner surface of the casing, principally.

    (1)     Note.  If secured to the outer surface, see this class, subclass
    185 and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    192     and indented subclasses.


CLS 152/197
TXT The armor is embedded in the body of the casing of the tire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    192.


CLS 152/198
TXT The casing embedded armor comprises metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193,    205 and 206.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 411+ for a
    stock material product in the form of a plural layer web or sheet, but not
    structurally defined, and which may have a metal layer; and especially
    subclasses 457+ for such a plural layer product including a metal layer
    next to a nonmetal layer.


CLS 152/199
TXT The casing embedded armor comprises metal plates.  These may extend from
    bead to bead.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194,    205 and 206.


CLS 152/200
TXT The casing embedded armor comprises a flexible annular metal element
    extending about the major circumference of the tire. Such elements may be
    transversely split.

    (1)     Note.  For rigid wheel encircling hands embedded within a pneumatic
    tire, see this class, subclass 57.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193     and 207.


CLS 152/201
TXT The casing embedded armor comprises either open or imperforate metal links
    connected to each other either directly or by rods or cables in the nature
    of hinge pintles.  The mat must extend for more than one link laterally of
    the wheel.

    (1)     Note.  For the metal linked mat, see this class, subclasses 171 and
    172.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193     and 205.


CLS 152/202
TXT The casing embedded armor is composed of woven fabric comprising metal
    strands.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193     and 205.


CLS 152/203
TXT The tire armor is a readily removable separate annular element extending
    about the major circumference of the tire and interposed between the inner
    tube and casing.  This is generally known as a "liner" or "interliner".

    (1)     Note.  For such armor permanently secured to the outer surface of
    the inner tube, see this class, subclass 195.

    (2)     Note.  For such armor permanently secured to the inner surface of
    the casing, see this class, subclass 196.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    371     and indented subclasses.


CLS 152/204
TXT The tire armoring interliner is composed of cotton fabric or rubber or
    both.  Since cotton fabric is conventional in pneumatic tires, this
    subclass includes such patents as mention fabric without specifying the
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    371     and indented subclasses.


CLS 152/205
TXT The interliner comprises metal as an armoring element.  This subclass
    consists of plate armor, principally.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 193, 194, 198, 199, 201, and 202.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    371     and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 411+ for a
    stock material product in the form of a plural layer web or sheet, but not
    structurally defined, and which may have a metal layer; and especially
    subclasses 457+ for such a plural layer product including a metal layer
    next to a nonmetal layer.


CLS 152/206
TXT The tire armoring metal interliner comprises plates overlapping in
    fish-scale fashion, either longitudinally or laterally.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 194 and 199.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    371     and indented subclasses.


CLS 152/207
TXT The tire armoring interliner comprises a metal annulus.  This may be split.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 193 and 200.


CLS 152/208
TXT Devices arranged upon a tire so as to give with the flexure of the tire and
    so constructed and arranged as to tend to prevent slipping or skidding of
    the tire on the roadway.

    (1)     Note.  For anti-skid devices in combination with or forming tire
    armor, see this class, subclass 167 and indented subclasses.  See the
    definition of Tires, resilient, Armored, following subclass 166.

    (2)     Note.  For anti-skid devices for use with footwear, see Class 36,
    Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclasses 7.6, 7.7, and 59 and indented
    subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  For anti-slipping pulleys, see Class 474, Endless Belt Power
    Transmission Systems or Components, particularly subclasses 177+ and 190+
    for pulleys with a material on the belt-engaging surface which may be
    effective to reduce slippage.

    (4)     Note.  For anti-skid devices attached to portions of the vehicle
    which do not rotate with the wheel, see Class 188, Brakes, subclasses 4, 5
    and 6.

    (5)     Note.  For traction mats which facilitate extraction of motor
    driven vehicles when stalled in mud or sand, see Class 238, Railways:
    Surface Track, subclass 14.

    (6)     Note.  For anti-skid devices which do not give with the flexure of
    the tire, see Class 301, Land Vehicles: Wheels and Axles, subclasses 41.1+.

    (7)     Note.  See Class 305, Wheel Substitutes for Land Vehicles,
    appropriate subclasses for flexible tracks for land vehicles.  Class 305
    takes devices where the sole specific disclosure or a claim is directed to
    an anti-skid device which is adapted to be trained about a pair of
    longitudinally spaced resilient tires and intended to operate as a flexible
    track apparatus.

    (8)     Note.  See Class 520, Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers,
    appropriate subclasses, particularly Class 523, subclass 152 for a
    composition containing a synthetic resin or natural rubber having utility
    as a friction element for automobiles, trains, trailers, roller skates,
    skateboards, or other wheeled vehicles or to processes of preparing said
    composition.


CLS 152/209
TXT The tread of the tire constitutes an anti-skid device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324     and 325, for cushion tires having recesses which are inherently
    anti-skid, and subclasses 324, 325 and 454 for the external tire shape
    other than the anti-skid tread surface.  Recesses in the tire tread,
    primarily to increase tire resilience, are in subclasses 324 and 325.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    D12,    Transportation, subclasses 136+ for tire tread designs.


CLS 152/210
TXT The tread of the tire constitutes an anti-skid device by virtue of
    anti-skid elements embedded therein.  This subclass includes anti-skid
    elements, per se, when it is disclosed that they are for use in a tire.

    (1)     Note.  For anti-skid devices with embedded anti-skid for use with
    footwear, see Class 36, Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclass 59 and
    indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  For horseshoe calks, see Class 168, Farriery, appropriate
    subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169     and 222.


CLS 152/211
TXT The tread of the tire constitutes an anti-skid device by virtue of
    anti-skid elements embedded therein and flush with the surface thereof.

    (1)     Note.  For anti-skid compositions, see Class 106, Compositions:
    Coating or Plastic, subclass 36.

    (2)     Search this class, subclasses 169 and 222.


CLS 152/212
TXT The tread of the tire constitutes an anti-skid device by virtue of
    anti-skid elements embedded therein and consisting of fibers, cords, wires,
    or fabric extending radially or substantially radially of the tire as
    viewed in lateral section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168.


CLS 152/213
TXT Devices embodied in anti-skid devices to facilitate their mounting upon or
    removal from the tire, or for carrying such anti-skid devices upon the
    vehicle in position for ready mounting upon the tire, or both.

    (1)     Note.  For separate tools to apply chains, see Class 81, Tools,
    subclass 15.8.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 199+ for portable implements or apparatus for tensioning
    flexible material (other than tire chains) from which the implements or
    apparatus are detached after tensioning.


CLS 152/214
TXT The applying and removing device for anti-skid devices is carried upon the
    vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  For article carriers, see Class 224, Package and Article
    Carriers, subclasses 400+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 398+ for a reel carrier.


CLS 152/215
TXT The applying and removing devices for anti-skid devices are carried upon
    the running board of the vehicle.


CLS 152/216
TXT The applying and removing devices for the anti-skid devices are carried
    solely upon the wheel and rotate therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    214,    for such devices supported partly by the wheel and partly by the
    vehicle body or running board.


CLS 152/217
TXT The anti-skid device is secured in place by means including a spring,
    constantly tending to bind the anti-skid device down upon the tire.  This
    subclass takes such tensioning devices, per se, when specially adapted to
    this purpose, where no other securing means is combined therewith.

    (1)     Note.  For the securing means without the continuing tension
    feature, in combination with the anti-skid device, see this class,
    subclasses 233-242.

    (2)     Note.  For securing means, per se, with combined tightening
    functions, without the continuing tension feature, see appropriate
    subclasses in Class 24, Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., especially,
    subclasses 68-70.

    (3)     Note.  For tightening devices for use in application of the
    anti-skid device to the tire, and not having the continuing tension
    feature, see Class 81, Tools, subclass 15.8 for tools to apply chains.

    (4)     Note.  For such tensioning devices, per se, of more or less general
    application, see Class 267, Spring Devices, subclass 69 and indented
    subclasses.


CLS 152/218
TXT The anti-skid device tightener exerts its force upon the device radially of
    the wheel.


CLS 152/219
TXT The anti-skid device tightener exerts its force upon the device
    circumferentially of the wheel.


CLS 152/220
TXT The anti-skid device is designed for use upon two or more tires mounted
    side by side.


CLS 152/221
TXT The anti-skid device comprises anti-skid elements consisting of flexible
    straps or cords extending across the tread of the tire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    178,    179, 190, 191, and 373.


CLS 152/222
TXT The flexible straps or cords of the anti-skid device have metal projections
    or combined chains to prevent slipping.

    (1)     Note.  For the metal projections, see this class, subclasses 169
    and 210.

    (2)     Note.  For anti-skid devices with embedded anti-skid for use with
    footwear, see Class 36, Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclass 59 and
    indented subclasses.


CLS 152/223
TXT The anti-skid devices comprise anti-skid elements consisting of chains, and
    additional such elements consisting of plates or bars.  Each chain consists
    of a connected series of links extending across the tread of the tire, and
    the plates or bars extend across or substantially across the tread of the
    tire.


CLS 152/224
TXT The combined cross chains and plates or bars in the anti-skid device are
    positioned one upon the other.


CLS 152/225
TXT The anti-skid device comprises anti-skid elements consisting of plates or
    bars extending across or substantially across the tread of the tire.

    (1)     Note.  Where the plates are so small as to be in the nature of
    links, see this class, subclass 244.

    (2)     Note.  For securing devices, see this class, subclasses 233, 241
    and 242, and notes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220.


CLS 152/226
TXT The plates or bars of the anti-skid device are provided with projections to
    prevent slipping.

    (1)     Note.  For similar projections on horseshoes, see Class 168,
    Farriery, appropriate subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220.


CLS 152/227
TXT The traction lugs on the plate or bar type anti-skid devices are projecting
    edges or ribs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220.


CLS 152/228
TXT The flanges serving as traction lugs on the plate or bar type anti-skid
    device are integral therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220.


CLS 152/229
TXT The traction lugs on the plate or bar type anti-skid devices are
    symmetrical and taper toward a point, substantially.

    (1)     Note.  For horseshoe calks, see Class 168, Farriery, appropriate
    subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220.


CLS 152/230
TXT The calks serving as traction lugs on the plate or bar type anti-skid
    device are integral therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220.


CLS 152/231
TXT The anti-skid device comprises anti-skid elements consisting of a connected
    series of links extending across the tread of the tire.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 59, Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making,
    appropriate subclasses.


CLS 152/232
TXT The cross chain type anti-skid devices are of less than wheel encircling
    dimensions and are secured to the wheel independently of each other.  Such
    devices may be used singly upon the wheel.

    (1)     Note.  For chain arrangement, see this class, subclass 217 and
    indented subclasses, and 239.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 59, Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making,
    appropriate subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclass 42.


CLS 152/233
TXT Devices for securing independent section, cross chain type, anti-skid
    devices to the wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172,    175, 176, 179, 182, 183, 187, 188, 191, 220-230, and 373.


CLS 152/234
TXT The securing device for the independent section, cross chain type,
    anti-skid device is secured to the wheel felly and spoke.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220     through 230.


CLS 152/235
TXT The felly and spoke securing device for the independent section,
    cross-chain type, anti-skid device is clamped to a spoke.

    (1)     Note.  For clamping devices, per se, see Class 24, Buckles,
    Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 455+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220     through 230.


CLS 152/236
TXT The independent section, cross chain type, anti-skid device is secured only
    to the felly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220     through 230.


CLS 152/237
TXT The independent section, cross chain type, anti-skid device is secured to
    the wheel by means passing around the felly and without the aid of bolts,
    screws or the like secured to any part of the wheel.

    (1)     Note.  For the securing means, see this class, subclasses 174, 181,
    186, 220- 230, and 373.


CLS 152/238
TXT The independent section, cross chain type, anti-skid devices are secured
    only to the spoke of the wheel.

    (1)     Note.  For clamping devices per se, see Class 24, Buckles, Buttons,
    Clasps, etc., subclasses 455+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220     through 230.


CLS 152/239
TXT The cross chain anti-skid device is a unit extending about the wheel when
    in assembled relation thereto and which may remain a unit during its
    removal from the wheel. This subclass is largely composed of devices
    wherein the cross chain tread elements are disposed other than in the
    conventional straight across manner, or are arranged in specifically
    designed groups, or both.

    (1)     Note.  For the chain arrangement, see this class, subclass 217 and
    indented subclasses, 231 and 232.


CLS 152/240
TXT The annular, cross chain type, anti-skid device is provided with anti-skid
    elements at its sides to prevent lateral skidding or to engage in deep mud.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232.


CLS 152/241
TXT The annular, cross chain type, anti-skid device in combination with means
    for maintaining the anti-skid device in operative position, or such means,
    per se, when specially adapted to this purpose.

    (1)     Note.  For securing devices, per se, see Class 24, Buckles,
    Buttons, Clasps, etc., especially subclasses 68, 69, 70, 116, 598.1, and
    698.1 and indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  For chain links used as securing devices, see Class 59,
    Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, especially subclass 84 and indented
    subclasses, and subclass 93.

    (3)     Note.  For turnbuckles and other adjustable length securing
    devices, see Class 403, Joints and Connections, subclasses 43+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174,    175, 179, 182, 183, 187, 188, 191, 225, and indented subclasses,
    233, 257 and 323.


CLS 152/242
TXT Devices under subclass 241 wherein the annular, cross chain type, anti-skid
    device is held to the tire by rings of smaller diameter than the tire
    tread, which rings are not secured to the wheel or tire, and which extend
    about the wheel at each side of the tire with the cross chains attached
    thereto.  This subclass includes rings consisting entirely of chain.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172,    177, 179, 184, 189, 191, and 225 and indented subclasses.


CLS 152/243
TXT The cross chains of the anti-skid device comprise a link or links differing
    from the usual or conventional link.

    (1)     Note.  Patents are classified herein rather than in Class 59,
    Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, where the inventor states that the
    device may be used for anti-skid purposes and it is clear that the chain or
    link is modified to adapt it particularly for such use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171,    172, 232, 239, and 240.


CLS 152/244
TXT The cross chains of the anti-skid device comprise a link or links, the
    ground contacting surface of which is substantially unbroken throughout.
    These links are in the nature of plates.

    (1)     Note.  Where the plates are large enough to extend across or
    substantially across the tread of the tire, see this class, subclass 225
    and indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 59, Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making,
    appropriate subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171,    172, 232, 239, and 240.


CLS 152/245
TXT The modified links of the cross chains are provided with separately formed
    devices tending to protect them against wear.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 59, Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making,
    appropriate subclasses.


CLS 152/246
TXT The tires are resilient and absorb road shocks by other than pneumatic
    means.

    (1)     Note.  Tread surfaces of wood have been regarded as resilient, and
    placed in this class.

    (2)     Note.  For cushion tires specially adapted for use with railway
    vehicles, see Class 295, Railway Wheels, and Axles, subclasses 11+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    112+ and 404 for processes and apparatus for making nonpneumatic cushion
    tires.


CLS 152/247
TXT The tire cushions the wheel by means of metallic springs.  Such springs may
    be combined with rubber.

    (1)     Note.  For combined pneumatic and metallic spring tires, see this
    class, subclass 156.


CLS 152/248
TXT The springs consist of one or more tubular annuli extending about the
    wheel.  These may be sectional.  The tube as a whole may have apertures or
    slots or notches therein.


CLS 152/249
TXT Where the tire is a single metallic tubular annulus consisting of an
    integral element. The tube may be open at its rim zone and may have slots
    or notches therein.


CLS 152/250
TXT The metallic spring tire consists of one or more woven tubes.  The tube may
    be open at the rim zone.  Either warp or weft may be nonmetallic.


CLS 152/251
TXT Devices under subclass 247 in which one or more flexible spring bands
    extend about the wheel in spaced relation thereto.  The bands may be
    composed of connected sections.  A mere wire is considered to be a band,
    but where elements do no more than connect the outer ends of springs, they
    are not regarded as bands; nor is the provision of overlapping sections not
    connected to each other regarded as a band.


CLS 152/252
TXT The flexible wheel encircling band of subclass 251 is supported by metal
    springs.

    (1)     Note.  For flexible wheel encircling bands supported by an annular
    solid rubber element, see this class, subclass 302;  for such bands
    supported by rubber sections, see subclass 303; for such bands described or
    claimed as armor and supported by an annular solid rubber element or by a
    pneumatic element, see subclass 185 and indented subclasses; for such bands
    built into the carcass of a pneumatic tire, see subclass 200.

    (2)     Note.  For rigid wheel encircling bands supported by metal, rubber,
    or pneumatic resilient elements, or enclosed by or embedded within a
    pneumatic tire construction, see this class, subclass 17 and indented
    subclasses, even though the device is built into the form and semblance of
    a tire.

    (3)     Note.  A thin flat metallic band spaced from the rim of a
    conventional wheel is assumed to be flexible, in the absence of positive
    evidence that it is rigid.


CLS 152/253
TXT The flexible wheel encircling band is supported by leaf springs.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 270.


CLS 152/254
TXT The leaf springs extend circumferentially of the wheel.  This subclass
    includes springs having no positive securing means, being held in place by
    devices such as flanges, enclosures or encircling bands. This subclass also
    includes continuous endless leaf springs, however secured.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 271.


CLS 152/255
TXT The circumferentially extending leaf springs are secured at or adjacent
    their center.  This subclass includes leaf springs which are additionally
    secured at their ends.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 272.


CLS 152/256
TXT The circumferentially extending leaf springs are secured at their ends only.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 273.

    (2)     Note.  Search this class, subclass 255.


CLS 152/257
TXT The leaf springs are secured at one end only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255,    256 and 274.


CLS 152/258
TXT The leaf springs extend transversely of the plane of the wheel.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 275 and 276.


CLS 152/259
TXT The transverse leaf springs are completely enclosed in an enclosure common
    to all. This enclosure may consist of a plurality of elements.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 277 and indented subclasses.


CLS 152/260
TXT The transverse leaf springs are secured to a rim by means other than an
    enclosure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259     and 280, and indented subclasses.


CLS 152/261
TXT The flexible wheel encircling band is supported by coil springs.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 284-288.


CLS 152/262
TXT The coil springs extend radially substantially in the plane of the wheel.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 289-292.


CLS 152/263
TXT Devices under subclass 262 in which the flexible wheel encircling band, the
    band-supporting radial coil springs, and all radially reciprocating
    elements except the tread are completely enclosed in an enclosure common to
    all.  This enclosure may consist of a plurality of elements.

    (1)     Note.  For similar devices without the wheel encircling band,
    having unconnected shoes between the springs and enclosure, whether the
    shoes are overlapped or not, see this class, subclass 293.


CLS 152/264
TXT The enclosure about the radial coil springs comprises a tread which is a
    separate element free to move radially and guided by annular flanges
    extending about the wheel. These flanges may be on either the wheel or the
    tread.  They hold the tread against lateral displacement and may be the
    sole means securing the tread to the wheel.

    (1)     Note.  For similar devices without the wheel encircling band,
    having unconnected shoes between the springs and enclosure, whether the
    shoes are overlapped or not, see this class, subclasses 294 and 295.


CLS 152/265
TXT The enclosure about the radial coil springs consist of a single element.

    (1)     Note.  For similar devices without the wheel encircling band,
    having unconnected shoes between the springs and enclosure, whether the
    shoes are overlapping or not, see this class, subclasses 296 and 297.


CLS 152/266
TXT The interior surface of the integral enclosure about the radial coil
    springs presents an arcuate cross-section throughout, except that there may
    be some departure from the arcuate in providing wheel securing means
    adjacent the rim.

    (1)     Note.  For similar devices without the wheel encircling band,
    having unconnected shoes between the springs and enclosure whether the
    shoes are overlapping or not, see this class, subclasses 298 and 299.


CLS 152/267
TXT Inventions under subclass 251 in which the flexible spring bands are
    completely encased in an enclosure common to all.


CLS 152/268
TXT The enclosure about the flexible spring band consists of a single element.


CLS 152/269
TXT The interior surface of the integral enclosure about the flexible spring
    band presents an arcuate cross-section throughout, except that there may be
    some departure from the arcuate in providing wheel securing means adjacent
    the rim.


CLS 152/270
TXT The cushioning springs are leaf springs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    253.


CLS 152/271
TXT The cushioning springs are leaf springs arranged so that they extend in the
    direction of the circumference of the wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254.


CLS 152/272
TXT The circumferentially extending cushioning springs are leaf springs secured
    at or adjacent their center.  This subclass includes leaf springs which are
    additionally secured at their ends.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255.


CLS 152/273
TXT The circumferentially extending leaf springs are secured at their ends only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256     and 272.


CLS 152/274
TXT The circumferentially extending leaf springs are secured at one end only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257.


CLS 152/275
TXT The cushioning springs are leaf springs extending transversely of the plane
    of the wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258.


CLS 152/276
TXT The transversely extending leaf springs are embedded in cooperating
    structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258.


CLS 152/277
TXT The transversely extending leaf springs are completely enclosed in an
    enclosure common to all.  This enclosure may consist of a plurality of
    elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259.


CLS 152/278
TXT The enclosed transversely extending leaf springs are secured to a rim by
    means other than the enclosure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259.


CLS 152/279
TXT The enclosed transversely extending leaf springs are secured to the wheel
    by a circumferential ring.  The ring may be either inside or outside of the
    enclosure.

    (1)     Note.  For securing rings to bind the tire on the rim, see this
    class, subclasses 152, 307, 388 and indented subclasses, and 399.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259,    262 and 283.


CLS 152/280
TXT The transversely extending springs are secured to a rim by means other than
    an enclosure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259,    260 and 278.


CLS 152/281
TXT The rim secured transversely extending leaf springs are secured to the rim
    by engagement with flanges thereon.

    SEARCH  THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259,    260 and 278.


CLS 152/282
TXT The rim secured transversely extending leaf springs are secured to the rim
    by means other than flanges, extending radially in a plane or planes
    parallel to the plane of the wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259,    260 and 278.


CLS 152/283
TXT The rim secured transversely extending leaf springs are secured in place by
    a circumferential ring or rings.  The rings may be either inside or outside
    the tire.

    (1)     Note.  For securing rings to bind the tire on the rim, see this
    class, subclasses 152, 307, 388 and indented subclasses, and 399.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259,    260 and 278.


CLS 152/284
TXT The cushioning springs are coil springs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261.


CLS 152/285
TXT The cushioning springs are coil springs, one or more of which extends about
    the wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261.


CLS 152/286
TXT The circumferentially extending coil springs are embedded in cooperating
    structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261.


CLS 152/287
TXT All the circumferentially extending coil springs are completely enclosed in
    an enclosure common to all.  This enclosure may consist of a plurality of
    elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261.


CLS 152/288
TXT The interior surface of the enclosure about the circumferentially extending
    coil springs presents an arcuate cross section throughout, except that
    there may be some departure from the arcuate in providing wheel securing
    means adjacent the rim.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261.


CLS 152/289
TXT The cushioning springs are coil springs extending radially substantially in
    the plane of the wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262.


CLS 152/290
TXT The tire consists of individual radially extending coil spring cushioning
    units each forming a section of the tire and acting independently of the
    others.

    (1)     Note.  Compare subclasses 292 and 295 of this class, wherein tread
    elements coact with each other, either directly or through the springs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262.


CLS 152/291
TXT Inventions under subclass 290 having radially extending spring pressed
    plungers each with a shank extending through a wall of the tire and rim
    assembly and each being part of a tire section acting independently of
    other tire sections.  The shank extends outwardly to carry or constitute a
    tread section and may also extend inwardly through the rim.

    (1)     Note.  For spring pressed plungers carrying tread sections which
    coact with each other, see this class, subclass 292.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262.


CLS 152/292
TXT Inventions under subclass 289 having radially extending spring pressed
    plungers, each with a shank extending through a wall of the tire and rim
    assembly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262     and 291.


CLS 152/293
TXT The radial coil springs and all radially reciprocating elements except the
    tire tread, are completely enclosed in an enclosure common to all.  This
    enclosure may consist of a plurality of elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263.


CLS 152/294
TXT The enclosure about the radial coil springs comprises a tire tread which is
    a separate element free to move radially and guided by annular flanges
    extending about the wheel. These flanges may be on either the wheel or
    tread.  They hold the tread against lateral displacement and may be the
    sole means securing the tread to the wheel.  This subclass includes
    unconnected shoes between the springs and enclosure and these shoes may
    overlap.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162     and indented subclasses, and 264.


CLS 152/295
TXT The flange guided tire tread comprised in the enclosure about the radial
    coil springs is sectional and the tread elements coact with each other
    either directly or through the springs.  Compare subclass 290 of this class
    wherein there is no such coaction. This subclass may have unconnected shoes
    between the springs and enclosure, and these shoes may overlap.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264.


CLS 152/296
TXT The enclosure about the radial coil springs consists of a single unit.
    This subclass may have unconnected shoes between the springs and enclosure
    and these shoes may overlap.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    265.


CLS 152/297
TXT Devices under subclass 296 having a nonmetallic band encircling the radial
    coil springs inside the integral enclosure. This band may be sectional.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    265.


CLS 152/298
TXT The interior surface of the integral enclosure about the radial coil
    springs presents an arcuate cross section throughout, except that there may
    be some departure from the arcuate in providing wheel securing means
    adjacent the rim. This subclass may have unconnected shoes between the
    springs and enclosure, and these shoes may overlap.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266.


CLS 152/299
TXT Devices under subclass 298 in which a nonmetallic band encircles the radial
    coil springs inside the integral arcuate-surfaced enclosure.  This band may
    be sectional.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266.


CLS 152/300
TXT The cushion tires are nonmetallic and consist of sections either abutting
    each other or otherwise so constructed and arranged as to provide
    continuous or substantially continuous smooth rolling road contact.  This
    group includes tires having sectional tread surfaces of wood.

    (1)     Note.  For sectional rigid tires and for resilient anti-skid lugs
    on rigid tires, see Class 301, Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles,
    appropriate subclasses.


CLS 152/301
TXT The sections extend annularly about the wheel.

    (1)     Note.  For such sections secured together by vulcanization or
    similar means, see this class, subclass 323.


CLS 152/302
TXT The annular sections are superimposed upon each other radially of the wheel.

    (1)     Note.  For tires where the outer section encloses the inner section
    laterally, search this class, subclass 310 and indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  For superimposed annular sections joined by vulcanization or
    otherwise to form an integral tire, search this class, subclass 323 and
    indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157     and 315.


CLS 152/303
TXT Sections of the tire are superimposed upon each other radially of the
    wheel.  The outer sections may be nonresilient.


CLS 152/304
TXT The tire sections are secured to the wheel by bands or plates which are
    apertured for the tread portion of each section to project therethrough.


CLS 152/305
TXT The tire sections are secured to the wheel by radial bolts, or their
    equivalents, which directly engage the sections.  A mounting to which the
    cushion tire section is permanently fixed is considered to be a part of the
    section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    386.


CLS 152/306
TXT The cushion tire sections abut each other at their ends.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152     and 316.


CLS 152/307
TXT An annulus extends about the wheel within the sectional tire and binds the
    tire upon the wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    279, 283, 316, 388, and indented subclasses, and 399.


CLS 152/308
TXT The tire sections have projections and recesses at opposite ends which fit
    the ends of the abutting sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    316     and 335.


CLS 152/309
TXT The abutting tire sections are so shaped and arranged as to provide
    indentations or recesses in the assembled tire at the joints between the
    sections.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 316.


CLS 152/310
TXT The cushion tire consists of a casing enclosing a core.  Where the core is
    integral with the casing the two must be distinct by reason of differing
    materials or arrangement.

    (1)     Note.  For integral cushion tires with no distinct core, see this
    class, subclass 323.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for laminating in general, and see especially
    subclasses 112 and 404 for the lines between the various classes with
    regard to processes and apparatus for filling tires.


CLS 152/311
TXT The enclosed core is not attached to the casing.

    (1)     Note.  For tire filling compositions, see Class 106, Compositions:
    Coating or Plastic.


CLS 152/312
TXT The separate enclosed core is removable from the casing.  This includes
    structure where the casing and rim together enclose the core.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157     and 158.


CLS 152/313
TXT The removable separate enclosed core is sponge rubber.


CLS 152/314
TXT The removable separate enclosed core is mounted upon the wheel in
    combination with means compressing it.


CLS 152/315
TXT The removable separate enclosed core consists of a plurality of rings
    superimposed upon each other in such fashion that they are positioned
    directly radially outward of each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157     and 302.


CLS 152/316
TXT The removable separate enclosed core is divided transversely into sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300     and 306, and indented subclasses.


CLS 152/317
TXT The transversely sectioned removable enclosed core consists of balls.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    336.1.


CLS 152/318
TXT The removable enclosed core is all of one piece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157     and 323.


CLS 152/319
TXT The integral separate enclosed core is provided with recesses.  This
    includes recesses of large circumferential extent and they may be grooves
    extending entirely around the tire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157     and 324.


CLS 152/320
TXT The recessed integral separate enclosed core is provided with enclosed
    chambers. Such chambers may be formed by the combined tire and rim.  This
    subclass includes chambers of large circumferential extent, and they may
    extend entirely around the tire.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 157, 322, 325, 327, and indented
    subclasses, 333.1, 338.1, 339.1, and 342.1.


CLS 152/321
TXT The integral separate enclosed core has holes extending through it
    transversely.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157     and 326.


CLS 152/322
TXT The integral separate enclosed core is provided with enclosed chambers.
    Such chambers may be formed by the combined tire and rim.  This subclass
    includes chambers of large circumferential extent, which may extend
    entirely around the tire.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 157, 320, 325, 327 and indented
    subclasses, 333.1, 338.1, 339.1, and 342.1.


CLS 152/323
TXT The cushion tire is composed of a single element.

    (1)     Note.  For laminated cushion tires, see this class, subclass 300
    and indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  For integral cushion tires with a distinct core, see this
    class, subclass 310.

    (4)     Note.  For caster tires, see Class 16, Miscellaneous Hardware,
    subclass 45 and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    318.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    112+ and 404 for processes and apparatus for making nonpneumatic cushion
    tires.


CLS 152/324
TXT The integral cushion tire is provided with surface depressions or
    indentations.  This includes recesses of large circumferential extent, and
    they may be grooves extending entirely around the tire.

    (1)     Note.  Indentations in the tire tread to prevent skid are in this
    class, subclass 209.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    319.


CLS 152/325
TXT The recessed integral cushion tire is provided with an enclosed hollow
    place or places.  Such chambers may be formed by the combined tire and rim.
     This subclass includes chambers of large circumferential extent, and they
    may extend entirely around the tire.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 157, 320, 322, 327, and indented
    subclasses, 333.1, 338.1, 339.1, and 342.1.


CLS 152/326
TXT The integral cushion tire has holes extending through it transversely.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    321.


CLS 152/327
TXT The integral cushion tire is provided with an enclosed hollow place.  Such
    chambers may be formed by the combined tire and rim. This subclass includes
    chambers of large circumferential extent, which may extend entirely around
    the tire.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 157, 161, 320, 322, 325, 333.1,
    338.1, 339.1, and 342.1.


CLS 152/328
TXT The chambered integral cushion tire is provided with two or more chambers.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 157, 320, 322, 325, 333.1, and
    338.1.


CLS 152/329
TXT The multiple chambers in the integral cushion tire are annular.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 157, 320, 322, 325, 339.1, and
    342.1.


CLS 152/331.1
TXT Multiple chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 450 wherein the pneumatic tire consists of a
    plurality of enclosed hollow places.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    320,    322, 325, 328, and 329, for other  multiple chamber constructions.


CLS 152/332.1
TXT Cylinder and piston:

    Subject matter under subclass 331.1 wherein the multiple chambers comprise
    cylinders in which pistons work against air under pressure to carry the
    load.


CLS 152/333.1
TXT Transverse walls:

    Subject matter under subclass 331.1 wherein the multiple chambers are
    provided with walls which extend transversely of the tire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    320,    322, 325, and 328, for chamber structure.


CLS 152/334.1
TXT Mutually free walls:

    Subject matter under subclass 333.1 wherein the transverse end walls of
    successive chambers are not united.


CLS 152/335.1
TXT Interfitting:

    Subject matter under subclass 334.1 wherein the mutually free adjacent
    transverse end walls have projections and recesses which fit into each
    other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    308,    for interfitting abutting section.


CLS 152/336.1
TXT Balls:

    Subject matter under subclass 334.1 wherein the mutually free transverse
    walled multiple chambers are spherical, or substantially so, in their
    assembled relation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    317,    for additional spherical structure.


CLS 152/337.1
TXT With simultaneous inflating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 334.1 wherein the tire and hub assembly are
    provided with means whereby the mutually free transverse walled chambers
    are inflated simultaneously from a single inlet.


CLS 152/338.1
TXT With simultaneous inflating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 333.1 wherein tire and hub are in an
    assembled relation such that the transverse walled chambers are inflated at
    the same time from a single inlet.


CLS 152/339.1
TXT Annular chambers:

    Subject matter under subclass 331.1 wherein the multiple chambers of the
    pneumatic tire are circular in form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    320,    322, 325, and 329, for annular chambers.


CLS 152/340.1
TXT Mutually free walls:

    Subject matter under subclass 339.1 wherein the walls of the annular
    multiple chambers are not united to each other.


CLS 152/341.1
TXT With simultaneous inflating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 340.1 wherein the hub and tire are in an
    assembled relation such that the annular chambers with mutually free walls
    are inflated simultaneously from a single inlet.


CLS 152/342.1
TXT With simultaneous inflating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 339.1 wherein the hub and tire are in an
    assembled relation such that the annular chambers are inflated at the same
    time from a single inlet.


CLS 152/343.1
TXT Sectional castings:

    Subject matter under subclass 450 wherein the pneumatic tire casing is
    composed of segments adapted to enclose an annular inner-tube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331.1,  and indented subclasses for multiple chamber pneumatic tire.


CLS 152/344.1
TXT Circumferential:

    Subject matter under subclass 343.1 wherein the pneumatic tire casing is
    circumferentially divided elsewhere than in the rim zone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56      and 67, for spring wheels involving similar structure.


CLS 152/345.1
TXT Rigid inner sections:

    Subject matter under subclass 344.1 wherein the pneumatic tire casing is
    composed of sections which are circumferentially divided and the inner
    section is inflexible.

    (1)     Note.  Where the rigid inner section of the tire extends
    substantially to the hub, it constitutes a wheel and is classified as a
    spring wheel which is classified in subclasses 8+ of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161,    for similar rigid inner section structures.


CLS 152/367
TXT Devices for application to a tire surface for covering a puncture or
    blowout therein. They may or may not be cemented to the tire or seal the
    puncture.



    Where the claims involve a superficial fixing of the tire and do not
    involve a substantial removal of the material of the tire to permit a
    rebuilding, this subclass takes method claims except where heat is applied
    for vulcanization purposes.



    This subclass includes the combined tire and patch as well as the patch,
    per se.

    (1)     Note.  For patches and reinforcements around valve stems, see this
    class, subclass 430.

    (3)     Note.  For patch applying tools, see Class 81, Tools, subclasses
    15.5, 15.6 and 15.7.

    (4)     Note.  For other patches, see Class 138, Pipes and Tubular
    Conduits, subclass 97 and indented subclasses.

    (5)     Note.  Wherein the repair of the casing a substantial part of the
    casing where it is damaged is removed and by the use of a special patch or
    otherwise the tire casing built up to the form and semblance of an original
    casing, see Class 156, Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical
    Manufacture, subclasses 94+.

    (6)     Note.  For processes and apparatus for patching a tire by a
    laminating operation see Class 156, Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous
    Chemical Manufacture, appropriate subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses for methods of molding or shaping plastic materials
    within the class definition and which may include a vulcanization step,
    especially subclass 36 for processes for repairing or restoring articles
    for use.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 11+ for tire repairing apparatus, including vulcanizing means
    especially subclasses 17+ for tire recapping, rebeading or sidewall
    replacing means; and subclasses 28.1+ tire or tire tube reshaping, resizing
    or vulcanizing means.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Class 523, subclass 166 for a composition containing a
    synthetic resin or natural rubber having utility as a puncture sealant for
    a pneumatic tire or for use in emergency repair of vehicular tires or to
    processes of preparing said composition.


CLS 152/368
TXT The patch is secured to the tire or rim by means other than the usual
    cementing, such as bolts, rivets, hooks, brads, or sewing.


CLS 152/369
TXT Patches on both the inside and outside of the tire are connected and bound
    to the tire by a bolt or bolts or equivalent.


CLS 152/370
TXT The patch is combined with an element that extends into or through and
    fills the puncture.  The patch and plug are generally both rubber and
    homogeneous.  Mere bolts connecting inner and outer patches are not
    included.


CLS 152/371
TXT The tire patch, including its securing means, extends at least from bead to
    bead of the casing, or from rim flange to rim flange, or encircles the
    inner tube.

    (1)     Note.  Where the bandage is internal, see this class, subclass 203,
    and indented subclasses.


CLS 152/372
TXT The bandage is secured in place by means other than friction or cement.

    (1)     Note.  Where the bandage is internal, see this class, subclass 203
    and indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  For devices securing together the edges of the tire, search
    this class, subclass 364.


CLS 152/373
TXT The bandage is mechanically secured to the felly or rim.

    (1)     Note.  Where the bandage is internal, see this class, subclass 203
    and indented subclasses.


CLS 152/375
TXT Devices whereby resilient tires are held secured to vehicle wheels or rims.

    (1)     Note.  Where the tire is held secured substantially directly to the
    hub or axle, it constitutes a wheel.  For such structure see this class,
    subclasses 7-10.

    (2)     Note.  For demountable rims for resilient tires, see class 301,
    Land Vehicles: Wheels and Axles, subclasses 10.1+.  See this class, (152)
    subclass 402 for line with Class 301.


CLS 152/376
TXT The wheel securing means is adapted to mount more than one tire.

    (1)     Note.  For demountable plural rims, see Class 301, Land Vehicles:
    Wheels and Axles, subclasses 13.1+.

    (2)     Note.  For plural-tire wheel securing means involving one tire
    which comes into service only in emergencies, see Class 301, Land Vehicles:
     Wheels and Axles, subclasses 39.1+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
    220.


CLS 152/377
TXT A section of the wheel or rim is adapted to be moved radially inwardly to
    enable the tire to be removed.

    (1)     Note.  For similar devices enabling removal of the rim, see Class
    301, Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclass 16.


CLS 152/378
TXT The wheel securing means consists of a wheel rim constructed in a single
    piece and without cooperating means other than the tire.


CLS 152/379.3
TXT Interlocking tire and rim:

    Apparatus under subclass 378 wherein the wheel or rim comprises projections
    engageable with the bead of a tire to prevent lateral movement of the tire
    relative to a bead flange on the wheel or rim.

    (1)     Note.  The projection may be mechanically secured to the wheel or
    rim.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    307,    for resilient tires having abutting sections having annular
    internal binders.


CLS 152/379.4
TXT With elongate bead guard:

    Apparatus under subclass 379.3 wherein the projections comprise rodlike
    elements extending through the rim.

    (1)     Note.  The rodlike elements may be removably attached to the wheel
    rim.


CLS 152/379.5
TXT Bead and rim interlock:

    Apparatus under subclass 379.3 wherein the rim engaging part of the tire
    and the corresponding tire engaging part of the wheel rim are provided with
    parts which interengage to positively secure the tire to the wheel.


CLS 152/380
TXT The edges of the tire extend down over the laterally outer surface of the
    rim and the tire is secured to the rim by virtue of such extension.
    Various specific securing means may be employed on the tire.  For example,
    the tire edges may be laced together under the rim, or inextensible beads
    in the tire edges may be actuated to grip the rim by the pneumatic pressure
    in the tire.

    (1)     Note.  For tires embracing the rim and secured thereto by virtue of
    external clamps, see this Class, subclasses 397 and 398.


CLS 152/381.3
TXT Deep channel rim:

    Apparatus under subclass 379.3 comprising a rim for mounting resilient
    tires provided with radially, outwardly extending flanges at its edges of
    greater diameter than the tire beads, and a depression extending radially
    inwardly for a distance such that a portion of the bead of the tire may be
    dropped into the depression for enough to allow a diametrically opposite
    portion of the bead to pass over the rim flange to operative position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    345.1,  for pneumatic tires having circumferential sectional casings with
    rigid inner sections.


CLS 152/381.4
TXT With elongate circumferential bead guard:

    Apparatus under subclass 381.3 wherein the rim comprises a circumferential
    projection at least substantially paralleling the rim flange, the
    projection engaging the tire bead to prevent the bead from shifting
    laterally away from the rim flange.


CLS 152/381.5
TXT With channel cover:

    Apparatus under subclass 381.3 wherein one or more articles is (are) placed
    over the depression in the wheel rim so as to completely overlay the
    depression.

    (1)     Note.  The article is generally an elongate metallic strap means of
    substantially the same or slightly greater width as the depression at its
    widest, the article being wrapped around and overlying the depression of
    the wheel rim.


CLS 152/381.6
TXT With channel fillers:

    Apparatus under subclass 381.3 wherein one or more articles is (are) placed
    into the depression of the wheel rim, the article or articles at least
    substantially reaching the level of the wheel rim.


CLS 152/382
TXT Circumferential flanges upon the integral wheel or rim are directed
    laterally inwardly and engage the tire.



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
    400.


CLS 152/383
TXT The clincher rim is used with a pneumatic tire.  The tire bead contour in
    combination with the rim flanges is included in this class.

    (1)     Note.  For the tire beads, see this class, subclasses 539+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400.


CLS 152/384
TXT Lugs on the tire engage depressions in the rim, or vice versa, to prevent
    circumferential movement of the tire on the rim.


CLS 152/385
TXT Securing means extend through the tire parallel to the wheel axis.



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
    398.


CLS 152/386
TXT Devices extending substantially radially in the plane of the wheel or
    parallel thereto and securing the tire to the wheel.  This includes radial
    expansion devices.



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
    305.


CLS 152/387
TXT The radially extending devices cooperate with the elements within the tire
    and extend circumferentially of the wheel and act as clamping means.  These
    elements need not be annular.  The tire is adapted to carry the clamp,
    whether on or off the wheel.


CLS 152/388
TXT An annulus within the tire extends about the wheel and binds the tire upon
    the wheel.  The tire is adapted to carry the clamp, whether on or off the
    wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    279, 283, 307, and 399.


CLS 152/389
TXT The annulus has ends secured together mechanically.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    279, 283, 307, and 399.


CLS 152/390
TXT The mechanical securing means under subclass 389 is adjustable to regulate
    the size of the annulus.

    (1)     Note.  For turnbuckles and other adjustable length joints, see
    Class 403, Joints and Connections, subclasses 43+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    279, 283, 307, and 399.


CLS 152/391
TXT The adjustable clamp is used with a pneumatic tire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    279, 283, 307, and 399.


CLS 152/392
TXT The clamps under subclass 388 are adjustable to regulate the size of the
    annulus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    279, 283, 307, and 399.


CLS 152/393
TXT The portion of the tire which seats upon the wheel is reinforced to aid in
    holding the tire secured to the wheel.

    (1)     Note.  For reinforced pneumatic tire beads, search this class,
    subclasses 539+.


CLS 152/394
TXT There is a metallic annulus secured to the surface of the base of the tire,
    frequently by vulcanization, to aid in holding the tire secured to the
    wheel.


CLS 152/395
TXT An annulus extends outside the tire and about the wheel and cooperates with
    the reinforced tire base structure to bind the tire upon the wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304     and 397.


CLS 152/396
TXT The wheel securing means consists of more than one element besides the
    elements incorporated in the tire.  All elements except those incorporated
    in the tire are considered to be rim parts, and these rim parts may be
    separated from each other.


CLS 152/397
TXT Comes under subclass 396 and includes means for securing a pneumatic tire
    to a wheel comprising a device bearing on an exterior portion of the tire
    and clamping said portion against the rim or felly, either alone or in
    combination with cooperating modifications of the tire, rim, or felly. The
    clamp is usually annular.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304     and 395.


CLS 152/398
TXT Devices under subclass 397 in which the exterior clamp for securing a
    pneumatic tire to a wheel acts laterally only, and clamps the portion of
    the tire upon which it bears to the rim or felly, or clamps two such
    portions against each other.


CLS 152/399
TXT Means under subclass 396 for securing a pneumatic tire to a wheel
    comprising a device applied to an interior portion of the tire and clamping
    it to a rim.  The clamp may be annular.  It may be actuated by the air
    pressure in the inflated tire.

    (1)     Note.  For securing rings to bind the tire on the rim, see this
    class, subclasses 152, 279, 283, 307, and 388 and indented subclasses.


CLS 152/400
TXT The interior clamps act laterally or laterally and downwardly to clamp
    adjacent portions of the tire against flanges on the rim.

    (1)     Note.  For bridge washers, see this class, subclass 430.


CLS 152/401
TXT The spreader under subclass 400 is combined with separable rim parts
    consisting of annular or arcuate sections of the rim provided with radially
    outwardly projecting tire retaining flanges.  Said sections form a rim
    having a substantially smooth outer surface throughout, which supports the
    spreader and the tire.


CLS 152/402
TXT The separable rim parts consist of annular or arcuate sections of the rim
    provided with radially outwardly projecting tire retaining flanges.  The
    combined sections form a rim having a substantially smooth outer surface
    throughout, upon which the tire rests.

    (1)     Note.  The distinction between this class and the demountable rims
    of Class 301, Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, is this:

            Class 301, appropriate subclasses, takes claims to or including
    rims which may be removed with the tire from the wheel, and are adapted to
    carry the resilient tire in operative position either on or off the wheel,
    together with the necessary elements of such constructions.  Otherwise the
    claims come to this class (152).  Elements which are capable of use both in
    the demountable rim structure of Class 301, and in the rim structure of
    this class for securing the tire to the rim are placed in this class (152).

    (2)     Note.  For demountable sectional channel rims, see Class 301, Land
    Vehicles: Wheels and Axles, subclasses 35.1+.

    (3)     Note.  For wheels comprising separable disk or annular wheel
    sections consisting of more than a rim and having peripheries providing a
    sectional channel supporting the tire, see Class 301, Land Vehicles:
    Wheels and Axles, subclasses 9.1+.  For such wheel sections permanently
    secured together, see said Class 301, subclasses 63.1+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401.


CLS 152/403
TXT The sectional channel comprises duplicate sections upon opposite sides of
    the rim for securing the tire in place.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401.


CLS 152/404
TXT The duplicate sections are constructed and arranged for use with a
    pneumatic tire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401.


CLS 152/405
TXT The sectional rim parts are constructed and arranged for use with a
    pneumatic tire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401.


CLS 152/406
TXT One of more of the rim sections, with its tire securing flange, is
    transversely divided to facilitate its assembly with the rest of the rim,
    and fits behind a projection on a fixed rim section or other part of the
    wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401.


CLS 152/407
TXT The ends of the split side flange are connected together either directly or
    by the intermediation of a second element not a part of the fixed rim.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    397     and 401.


CLS 152/408
TXT The ends of the split side flange are provided with lugs engaging a fixed
    section of the rim or other part of the wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401.


CLS 152/409
TXT One or more of the rim sections is secured in place by a ring which is in
    turn supported by a fixed rim section, the felly, or the wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401.


CLS 152/410
TXT The locking ring is transversely divided to facilitate its application to
    the wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401.


CLS 152/411
TXT Parts of the sectional rim overlap each other transversely of the wheel.
    One may be entirely supported by the other, or overlap for its whole width.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401.


CLS 152/412
TXT One or more of the overlapping rim sections is jointed to the wheel by
    means in the general nature of a bayonet joint.  That is, the section is
    applied by transverse motion followed by rotary motion, or by a combination
    of the two.  This includes screw threaded sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401.


CLS 152/413
TXT One or more of the rim sections is joined to the wheel by means in the
    general nature of a bayonet joint.  That is, the section is applied by
    transverse motion followed by rotary motion, or by a combination of the
    two.  This includes screw threaded sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401.


CLS 152/414
TXT One or more of the sections of the rim, bearing a tire retaining flange, is
    hinged to a fixed section of the rim or other part of the wheel, so that it
    may be swung away from the remainder of the rim to facilitate removal of
    the tire.

    (1)     Note.  For similar devices to facilitate removal of the rim, see
    Class 301, Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclass 32.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
    401.


CLS 152/415
TXT Devices under the class definition combined with vehicle or wheel structure
    for inflating pneumatic tires, filling attachments adapted to remain with a
    particular wheel between periods of inflation and means for inflating one
    tire from another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 223+ for valved inflation stems or
    valved filling chucks for tires.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 4+ for processes of filling receivers involving gas or variation
    of gaseous conditions in the receiver, and subclass 38 for tire inflating
    apparatus involving plural fluids. Patents disclosing and/or claiming
    apparatus or processes for filling tires with any material are
    cross-referenced to the subclass if they involve manipulation of the tire
    or apparatus other than the conventional chuck and tire valve.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 3+, for gas dispensers of general utility
    even though disclosed for inflating tires.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 149+ for valved inflating
    chucks.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 201, for combination of an inflating means
    with a velocipede including a modified velocipede frame as a part of the
    combination.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, appropriate subclasses, especially
    subclasses 196, 304, 338 and 345+ for inflating chucks.

    417,    Pumps, for air pumps, per se, and especially subclasses 229+, for
    combinations of an inflating pump and a vehicle which operates the pump,
    but not operating to inflate the tire while the vehicle is in motion.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Class 523, subclass 166 for a composition containing a
    synthetic resin or natural rubber having utility as a puncture sealant for
    a pneumatic tire for use in emergency repair of vehicular tires or to
    processes of preparing said composition.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 264+ for devices in the form of the inflating
    needles, but intended for surgical use.


CLS 152/416
TXT Where the inflating device is for inflating pneumatic tires while the
    vehicle is in motion and comprises an air supply source as a pump or a tank
    carried by a portion of the vehicle other than the wheels or tires, and is
    combined with air lines to the tires.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 231+, for vehicle mounted or attached pumps
    operated by the vehicle.


CLS 152/417
TXT Joints for transferring air under pressure from the vehicle body to a
    rotating wheel.


CLS 152/418
TXT The inflating means is for inflating pneumatic tires while the vehicle is
    in motion, and comprises an air supply source carried by a wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 458 to 466 for pressure regulators in
    combination with cut-off, and subclasses 505+ for pressure regulators, per
    se.


CLS 152/419
TXT Devices in which the air supply source carried by the wheel is a pump and
    means are provided for positive operation thereof.


CLS 152/420
TXT The pump operating means comprises a gear.


CLS 152/421
TXT The pump operating means comprises a cam.


CLS 152/422
TXT The pump operating means comprises an eccentric bearing.


CLS 152/423
TXT The pump operation involves contact of an element on the rotating wheel
    with an obstacle.


CLS 152/424
TXT The operating obstacle is the ground.


CLS 152/425
TXT The tire casing is interposed between the pump operating element on the
    rotating wheel and the ground, the ground serving as the operating obstacle.


CLS 152/426
TXT The pump is enclosed within the casing and the ground serves as the
    obstacle for its operation.


CLS 152/427
TXT The inflating valve stem is secured to the wheel or rim or to the wheel and
    tire and may include in the claims a valve.

    (1)     Note.  For this combination further combined with a multiple
    chamber tire, see this class, subclasses 331.1+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 223+ for valved inflation stems for
    tires.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, for valves, per se.


CLS 152/428
TXT Devices coming under subclass 427 which include also a dust cap.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 232+ for valved inflation stems or
    filling chucks for tires combined with caps for protecting or sealing the
    ends thereof.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 89.1 to 89.4 for caps for
    inflation stems.


CLS 152/429
TXT The inflating valve stem is secured to the tire and may include in the
    claims a valve.

    (1)     Note.  See notes to this class, subclass 427.

    (2)     Note.  For this combination further combined with a multiple
    chamber tire, see this class, subclass 331.1 and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    427     and 428.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclass 200 for a coupling between a
    pipe and flexible plate.


CLS 152/430
TXT Inventions under subclass 429 directed to modifications of the stem
    structure or to patches or reinforcement of the tire. These are intended to
    effect a better union of the tire and stem.

    (1)     Note.  For other reinforced inner tubes, see this class, subclasses
    511 and 512.

    (2)     Note.  For tire patches in general, see this class, subclasses 367+.

    (3)     Note.  For valve casings, per se, see Class 138, Pipes and Tubular
    Conduits, subclasses 100-178, especially subclass 177 for valve casings,
    per se.


CLS 152/431
TXT Closure for the open end of a pneumatic tire valve casing, generally known
    as a valve cap, in combination with a tool for manipulation of the valve.

    (1)     Note.  For such tools, per se, see Class 81, Tools, subclass 15.4.

    (2)     Note.  For valve caps, per se, or combined valve bodies or stems
    and dust caps, and for combined valve caps and dust caps, see Class 138,
    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 89.1 to 89.4 indented under subclass
    89.


CLS 152/450
TXT Pneumatic tire or inner tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 151 wherein a tire casing structure contains
    a chamber or chambers or a flexible closed annular element carried in said
    chamber whereby said chamber or annular element is filled with fluid under
    pressure greater than atmospheric pressure to sustain the tire in inflated
    shape upon a hub or rim element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331.1,  for multiple chamber tires; subclasses 343.1+ for pneumatic tire
    casings having sections adapted to enclose an inner tube; subclasses 317,
    320, 322, 325, and 327+ for resilient tires having chambers with elastic
    walls wherein the pressure is atmospheric; subclass 195 for armored inner
    tubes; and subclasses 510+ for inner tubes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    110.1+ and 394.1+ for processes and apparatus for making pneumatic tires.

    295,    Railway Wheels and Axles, subclass 12 for pneumatic tires used on
    railway vehicles.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclass for
    stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or sheet
    including strips, strands or fibers, and especially subclasses 105+ for a
    composite web or sheet in which constituents or elements (e.g., fibers,
    strands) in one layer are disposed at an angle to those in another layer;
    and subclass 114 for such products in which a parallel relationship exists
    between the constituents of the layers.


CLS 152/451
TXT Tire cord reinforcement materials, per se:

    Subject matter under subclass 450 wherein significance is attributed to the
    strengthening material or its structure and not the location of its
    application or use in the tire casing.

    (1)     Note. The cord materials in this subclass are materials for tire
    reinforcement which are not claimed as specific components of the belt,
    breaker, bead or carcass portions of a tire.  Because of the nature of
    these materials, this subclass is exclusive in nature rather than inclusive
    in order to collect materials used in tire casings which are of a general
    nature and not specifically claimed for use in particular portions of the
    tire casing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    526+,   539+ and 548+, for reinforcing materials used in belt, breaker,
    bead and carcass portion of the tire.


CLS 152/452
TXT Cordless tires (e.g., cast tires):

    Subject matter under subclass 450 wherein the pneumatic tire lacks
    substantial cord reinforcement in the structure of the tire casing.

    (1)     Note.  The use of bead reinforcements or breaker/belt reinforcement
    without carcass reinforcements constitutes a pneumatic tire without
    substantial cord reinforcement for the purposes of this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    125 for a process of making tires wherein outer layers are injection molded.


CLS 152/453
TXT Tire characterized by closed annular transverse cross section:

    Subject matter under subclass 450 wherein a cross section defined by a
    plane passing through the axis of the pneumatic tire defines a continuous,
    circular-type configuration.

    (1)     Note.  Such tires are often referred to as closed-torus tires.
    Closing of the cross section of the tire via the use of discrete flaps or
    the like that are not integral and contiguous with the remainder of the
    tire is not included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    501,    513, 514, and 515, for casing closures, flaps and the like, that
    are used to close an otherwise open-belled pneumatic tire.


CLS 152/454
TXT Tire characterized by the dimension or profile of the cross sectional shape:

    Subject matter under subclass 450 wherein the pneumatic tire is
    distinguished by a mathematical relationship (e.g., equation, ratio, etc.)
    or absolute dimension (e.g., radius of curvature) which mathematical
    relationship or absolute dimension describes the cross-sectional profile
    (e.g., profile of neutral axis of carcass reinforcement) or cross-sectional
    shape (e.g., aspect ratio or transverse tread curvature) of the pneumatic
    tire.


CLS 152/455
TXT Asymmetric tire:

    Subject matter under subclass 450 wherein the pneumatic tire, either by
    virtue of its reinforcing material or its cross-sectional shape, does not
    present two mirror image halves when transverse cross-section thereof is
    longitudinally bisected.

    (1)     Note.  Asymmetry in the breaker or belt structure due to the
    angular orientation of the cord of the ply or plies therein is not provided
    for in the subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209,    for a resilient tire having an asymmetric tire tread and subclasses
    530 and 534 for pneumatic tires having belt or breaker layers wherein
    asymmetry may result due to the angular orientation of the cords of the ply
    or plies in the breaker or belt layers.


CLS 152/456
TXT Asymmetry due to cross sectional profile:

    Subject matter under subclass 455 wherein the asymmetry in the pneumatic
    tire is a result of the transverse cross-sectional shape or profile of the
    pneumatic tire.


CLS 152/457
TXT Tire foldable into storage or nonuse condition (e.g., collapsible space
    saving spare tire):

    Subject matter under subclass 450 wherein the pneumatic tire in the
    inflated condition has a conventional toroidal shape but while in a
    deflated condition assumes a shape wherein a portion of the tire, e.g., the
    sidewalls or tread, are folded to decrease the overall dimensions of the
    deflated tire relative to its overall dimension in the inflated state.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    for emergency resilient tires which are constructed and arranged
    for rapid and convenient manual  application upon a rim to temporarily
    replace the ordinary tire and subclass 522 for pneumatic tires having means
    facilitating folding between sidewall portions during pneumatic tire
    operation.


CLS 152/458
TXT Tire reinforcement material characterized by short length fibers or the
    like:

    Subject matter under subclass 450 wherein the tire casing contains
    strengthening material in the form of short, discrete and discontinuous
    filaments.


CLS 152/500
TXT With means restricting relative movement between tire and inner tube (e.g.,
    anti-creep feature):

    Subject matter under subclass 450 wherein the pneumatic tire casing or the
    inner tube is provided with means which tend to keep them from slipping
    relative to one another.


CLS 152/501
TXT With means to protect inner tube from rim:

    Subject matter under subclass 450 wherein an annular band extending around
    the rim and interposed between the inner tube and the rim is designed to
    protect the inner tube from contact with the rim.

    (1)     Note.  The band is generally wide enough to overlap the tire beads
    and the overlap extends inside the casing between the inner tubes and
    beads.  The band may be loose or secured to a portion of the tire/tube/rim
    assembly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    514,    for flaps or bands attached to the tire casing; subclass 512 for
    reinforcement in the rim zone of the inner tube serving the protective
    purpose of a tire flap or band and subclasses 400 and 401 for devices for
    spreading beads apart which may also serve to protect the inner tube from
    the rim.


CLS 152/502
TXT Automatic sealing of punctures (e.g., self-healing):

    Subject matter under subclass 450 wherein the pneumatic tire or inner tube
    is provided with a self-healing feature comprising material provided in the
    pneumatic tire or inner tube or within cavities or chambers defined by said
    pneumatic tire or inner tube, which material is of such a nature as to tend
    to seal breaks made in the pneumatic tire or inner tube surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, cross-references art
    collection 912 for puncture healing layers generally.

    523,    Synthetic Resin or Natural Rubber, subclass 166 for the puncture
    sealants.


CLS 152/503
TXT Using flowable coating or composition:

    Subject matter under subclass 502 wherein the sealing of punctures in a
    pneumatic tire or inner tube is effected by the use of a coating or
    composition which is capable of fluid motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    521,    for internal lubricating or cooling compositions that may also
    possess sealant properties.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclass 33 for leak stopping
    coating or plastic compositions.

    523,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 166 for tire puncture
    sealants.


CLS 152/504
TXT On inner surface of tubeless tire:

    Subject matter under subclass 503 wherein the pneumatic tire is tubeless
    and the flowable coating or compositions is provided on the interior
    surface of the pneumatic tire.

    (1)     Note.  The coating or composition may be provided on the interior
    of a tubeless tire inner liner in the tire.


CLS 152/505
TXT Sealant in plural layers or plural pockets:

    Subject matter under subclass 504 wherein the flowable coating or
    composition provided on the inner surface of the tubeless tire is separated
    into multiple discrete compartments which are located transversely or
    annularly of the tire.


CLS 152/506
TXT Within or part of construction of inflating inner tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 503 wherein the flowable coating or
    composition is provided as an integral part of the inner tube.


CLS 152/507
TXT Sealant in plural layers or plural pockets:

    Subject matter under subclass 506 wherein the flowable coating or
    composition is an integral part of the inner tube and is contained in
    separate multiple discrete compartments in the inner tube which are located
    transversely or annularly of the tire.


CLS 152/508
TXT By compression:

    Subject matter under subclass 502 wherein the pneumatic tire or inner tube
    contains an elastomeric element under lateral or circumferential stress or
    pressure, said elastomeric element having a tendency to close punctures as
    fluid pressure escapes from the tire.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 843+ for apertures intended for
    inflation and closed by the pressure of the surrounding material.


CLS 152/509
TXT With reinflating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 502 wherein the self-healing pneumatic tire
    or inner tube is also provided with means to generate fluid pressure to aid
    in the inflation of the pneumatic tire or inner tube after puncture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    519     and 521, for tires having run flat features that are inflated or
    expanded upon emergency or that possess internal lubrication and/or cooling
    means, respectively.


CLS 152/510
TXT Tire characterized by its air impervious liner or inner tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 450 wherein the pneumatic tire possesses an
    integral layer or coating of elastomeric material which has a relatively
    high resistance to the diffusion of air at its inner air contacting
    surfaces or wherein a flexible closed annular element is carried within the
    chamber of the tire filled with fluid under pressure which is greater than
    atmospheric pressure.

    (1)     Note.  The inner tube can be claimed alone or in combination with a
    pneumatic tire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
    450.


CLS 152/511
TXT Inner tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 510 wherein a flexible closed annular element
    is carried within the chamber of the tire filled with fluid under pressure
    that is greater than atmospheric pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
    450.


CLS 152/512
TXT With reinforcement element:

    Subject matter under subclass 511 wherein the inner tube is strengthened
    throughout at least a portion of its extent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195,    for armored inner tubes.


CLS 152/513
TXT With means to protect tire from rim:

    Subject matter under subclass 450 wherein an annular band extends around
    the rim to protect the tire from the rim.

    (1)     Note.  The band may be wide enough to overlap the tire beads, in
    which case the overlap extends underneath the beads.  The band may be loose
    or secured to the rim.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400     and 401, for devices for spreading beads apart which may also serve
    to protect the tire from the rim.  Subclass 501 for means to protect the
    inner tube from a rim.


CLS 152/514
TXT Means other than rim closing the tire opening:

    Subject matter under subclass 450 wherein means, other than a rim, are
    interlocked with, attached to, or an integral part of the pneumatic tire
    casing for closing an opening therein through which an inner tube may be
    inserted or for closing a similar opening in a tubeless tire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    501     and 513, for similar devices from the tire.


CLS 152/515
TXT Positive casing closure:

    Subject matter under subclass 514 wherein the pneumatic tire casing closure
    is actuated either by response to the inflated pressure in the tire or by
    the use of means actuated by hand and said closure performs its function
    whether the tire is on or off the rim.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    372,    for pneumatic tire bandages which may extend from rim flange to rim
    flange and are secured in place by mechanical means.


CLS 152/516
TXT With means enabling restricted operation in damaged or deflated condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 450 wherein the pneumatic tire or inner tube
    is provided with means which permit the resultant assembly to continue
    operation when the inflation pressure in the pneumatic tire or inner tube
    drops substantially below normal or when the pneumatic tire or inner tube
    is punctured or otherwise damaged.

    (1)     Note.  The means referred to herein are often called "run flat"
    devices in the art.  The means may be an integral part of the pneumatic
    tire, located within the pneumatic tire cavity or external to the pneumatic
    tire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    for temporary replacement tires and 158 for internal buffers which
    assume load when the pneumatic tire is deflated or distorted beyond the
    normal amount.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 45.6, 45.7, 48, 49, and 146 -
    146.8 for means to measure tire pressure and detect loss of tire pressure.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 34+ for tire inflation or
    deflation indicators.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 227+ for tire pressure gauges or
    indicator means.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 442+ for tire deflation
    signal systems.


CLS 152/517
TXT With sidewall insert to facilitate load support in emergency:

    Subject matter under subclass 516 wherein the structural stiffness of a
    pneumatic tire sidewall is enhanced by additional means which compensates
    for potential loss of pneumatic stiffness by deflation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    549     and 555, for cushion and sidewall stiffening means employed in the
    carcass construction of a pneumatic tire.


CLS 152/518
TXT Utilizing additional inflatable supports which become load bearing in
    emergency:

    Subject matter under subclass 516 wherein the additional means which
    permits the assembly to continue operations is a pneumatic member located
    in the chamber of the pneumatic tire which supports the pneumatic tire when
    the tire is damaged or loses inflation pressure.

    (1)     Note.  The supports in this subclass are reinflated and merely
    support the tire load on the roadway when the tire is damaged and loses air
    pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331.1+, for multiple chamber pneumatic tires and 158 for internal buffers.


CLS 152/519
TXT Inflated or expanded in emergency only:

    Subject matter under subclass 518 wherein an inflatable member carried in
    the tire chamber is inflated to support the tire in response to damage
    resulting in the loss of air pressure.


CLS 152/520
TXT Utilizing additional noninflatable supports which become load supporting in
    emergency:

    Subject matter under subclass 516 wherein the support means which permit
    the tire assembly to continue operation when its inflation pressure drops
    is an integral part of the tire either located within the tire cavity or
    external to the tire.

    (1)     Note.  Such means generally protrude from the rim portion of the
    tire to support the tire in the event of an emergency.


CLS 152/521
TXT Internal lubricating or cooling:

    Subject matter under subclass 516 wherein the support means which enables
    restricted operation of the tire in a damaged or deflated condition
    comprises a lubricating or cooling composition which is disposed in the
    pneumatic tire chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    503+,   for sealant compositions that may also possess cooling or
    lubricating properties.


CLS 152/522
TXT Means facilitating folding between sidewall portions (e.g., run flat
    sidewalls):

    Subject matter under subclass 516 wherein the tire includes sidewalls which
    are foldable on themselves at predetermined adjacent sidewall portions to
    sustain the tire in inflated condition to permit continued operation of the
    tire upon loss of inflation pressure during use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    457,    for pneumatic tires that are foldable for storage or nonuse
    condition.


CLS 152/523
TXT Arrangement of grooves or ribs in sidewall:

    Subject matter under subclass 450 which includes structure wherein the part
    of the tire between the edge of the tread and the rim which contains one or
    more sequentially adjacent arcuate modules which are either raised
    projections or furrowed and form a segmented or solid annular band
    concentric with that part of the tire extending between the rim and the
    tread edge.


CLS 152/524
TXT Having annular inlay or cover or sidewalls (e.g., white sidewalls):

    Subject matter under subclass 450 which includes the structure of that part
    of the tire between the edge of the tread and the rim which comprises a
    filled section or an applique of material in a color other than black
    thereon for the purpose of esthetic color contrast.

    (1)     Note.  Patents disclosing protective coatings for sidewalls or
    colored sidewalls will be found in this subclass.


CLS 152/525
TXT Characterized by chemical composition or physical properties of external
    sidewall materials:

    Subject matter under subclass 450 which includes structure of that part of
    the tire between the edge of the tread and the rim which comprises a
    material formed by the interaction of two or more  chemical substances or a
    combination of chemical substances exhibiting an essential or distinctive
    attribute to enhance the adhesion of the said part to the tire body or
    carcass or improve the general structural characteristics of the tire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    537,    for chemical compositions or physical properties of belt or breaker
    materials.


CLS 152/526
TXT Characterized by belt or breaker structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 450 which includes one or more relatively
    thin threads, filaments, yarns, wires, cables, bands, braids or the like
    formed into cords or reinforcing elements which are arranged parallel to
    each other to form a ply which annularly extends continuously around the
    tire casing substantially from shoulder region to shoulder region of a tire
    tread to add strength to said tire tread area or to protect the tire casing
    in this region.

    (1)     Note.  The threads, filaments, yarns, etc., may be of wire, glass,
    natural or synthetic fibers usually referred to in the art as cords.  Cords
    arranged in a substantially parallel relationship constitute a ply.

    (2)     Note.  The annular arrangement of reinforcing material in a ply
    between the tread and carcass is commonly referred to as a belt or breaker.
     Traditionally belts have been employed for reinforcement and hoopstrength
    whereas breakers have been employed for the protection of underlying
    carcass layers.  However, the terms are sometimes used interchangeably in
    the art.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    197,    and indented subclasses, for similarly located armor.


CLS 152/527
TXT Physical structure of reinforcing cords:

    Subject matter under subclass 526 wherein significance is attributed to the
    size, shape, diameter, strength, or the elongation factor of the cord
    reinforcing elements.


CLS 152/528
TXT Folded ply structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 526 wherein the annular belt or breaker is
    doubled back upon itself to enhance reinforcement of the shoulder or tread
    area in order to reduce separation tendencies and transverse stress in the
    tire.


CLS 152/529
TXT Utilizing two or more cord materials:

    Subject matter under subclass 528 wherein the folded belts or breakers have
    reinforcing elements of dissimilar materials.

    (1)     Note.  The material of the strengthening elements can be dissimilar
    between or among plies or can be dissimilar within a given folded ply.


CLS 152/530
TXT Consisting of only one ply:

    Subject matter under subclass 526 wherein a single layer of reinforcement
    material is placed between the carcass and tread area of the tire.


CLS 152/531
TXT Utilizing at least one ply the cord or which run circumferentially
    (zero-degree belt):

    Subject matter under subclass 526 wherein the cords of the belt or breaker
    material define an angle of substantially zero degrees relative to a median
    equatorial plane of the tire.

    (1)     Note.  Patents having single substantially zero degree cords are
    provided for in this subclass.


CLS 152/532
TXT With cushioning or other special rubber ply layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 526 wherein a discrete layer of natural or
    synthetic elastomeric material is provided in the belt or breaker region of
    the tire.


CLS 152/533
TXT Reinforcing plies made up from wound narrow ribbons:

    Subject matter under subclass 526 wherein the belt or breaker material is
    comprised of material formed into thin strips or bands which strips or
    bands are wrapped around the carcass in the belt or breaker region
    according to a predetermined pattern.


CLS 152/534
TXT Structure where each bias angle reinforcing cord ply has no opposingly
    angled ply:

    Subject matter under subclass 526 wherein the cords of the belt or breaker
    structure are disposed at an angle to the circumferential direction of the
    tire such that for the cords of each bias angled belt or breaker there is
    no second equal oppositely angled ply.


CLS 152/535
TXT Structure made up of two or more sets of plies wherein the reinforcing
    cords in one set lie in a different angular position relative to those in
    other sets:

    Subject matter under subclass 526 wherein the belt or breaker is composed
    of multiple plies wherein the strengthening cords of one group of plies
    cross the equatorial plane of the tire at equal but opposite angles and the
    strengthening cords of another group of plies cross the equatorial plane of
    the tire at a different, equal and opposite angle.


CLS 152/536
TXT Structure using multiple reinforcing elements made of differing materials:

    Subject matter under subclass 526 wherein the belts or breakers have
    reinforcing cords of dissimilar strengthening materials.

    (1)     Note.  The strengthening materials can be dissimilar between or
    among plies or can be dissimilar within a given ply.


CLS 152/537
TXT Breaker or belt characterized by the chemical composition or physical
    properties of elastomer or the like:

    Subject matter under subclass 526 wherein the belt or breaker region of the
    tire includes a material formed by the reaction of two or more chemical
    substances or a combination of chemical substances exhibiting an essential
    or distinctive attribute to enhance the general structural characteristics
    of the tire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    525,    for chemical compositions or physical properties of external side
    wall materials.


CLS 152/538
TXT Belt or breaker characterized by its dimensions or curvature relative to
    the carcass or any other part of the tire:

    Subject matter under subclass 526 wherein significance is attributed to the
    size relationship or the curvilinear profile or the belt or breaker in
    respect to the tire or its underlying carcass.


CLS 152/539
TXT Characterized by the structure of the bead portion of the tire:

    Subject matter under subclass 450 which includes structure of the annular
    edge of the pneumatic tire which open at the rim zone and includes annular
    reinforcing elements to anchor the tire or the tire carcass material to the
    rim.

    (1)     Note.  The annular edges of the tire are referred to in the art as
    the tire beads.  The annular reinforcing elements of the beads are referred
    to in the art as bead cores.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    391,    for similar devices in the nature of annular clamps enclosed in the
    edges of the tire.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclass 141 for
    textile grommets.

    140,    Wireworking, subclass 88 for processes of making wire tire beads.

    245,    Wire Fabrics and Structure, subclass 1.5 for wire tire bead
    grommets.


CLS 152/540
TXT Structure of inextensible reinforcing member:

    Subject matter under subclass 539 wherein the bead portion of the tire is
    characterized by, e.g., the size, shape or material of the annular
    reinforcing element which annular reinforcing element is incapable of being
    extended or stretched in the circumferential direction.


CLS 152/541
TXT Apex or filler strip:

    Subject matter under subclass 539 wherein the carcass is wound around  the
    bead anchoring annular reinforcing element which wound about portion is
    separated from the main carcass portion by a substantially wedge shaped
    insert or by a substantially triangular insert.

    (1)     Note.  The wedge shaped or triangular insert is generally disposed
    radially above the annular reinforcing element.


CLS 152/542
TXT Flipper strips:

    Subject matter under subclass 539 wherein an annular strip of cord
    reinforced elastomeric material is wrapped directly around and in contact
    with the bead anchoring reinforcing element and between the bead anchoring
    reinforcing element and the carcass material.


CLS 152/543
TXT Chafer or sealing strips:

    Subject matter under subclass 539 wherein an annular elastomeric strip that
    may include reinforcing material is disposed in the bead region of the tire
    but is not in direct contact with the annular reinforcing element.

    (1)     Note.  These annular elastomeric strips are employed to, e.g.,
    reinforce the turned up edge of the carcass, reduce chafing between the
    tire and the rim and minimize undesirable air diffusion into or out of the
    tire.


CLS 152/544
TXT Bead contour for engagement with mounting rims (e.g., lips, ribs or
    grooves):

    Subject matter under subclass 539 wherein the hub or rim contacting portion
    of the tire contains additional friction enhancing means to insure better
    grip between said rim contacting portion of the tire and the rim.

    (1)     Note.  The additional friction enhancing means result from the
    overall outer contour of the rim contacting portion of the tire.


CLS 152/545
TXT Multiple bead cores at each terminal edge or tire supporting surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 539 wherein the rim contacting portion of the
    tire contains two or more annular reinforcing elements.


CLS 152/546
TXT Bead characterized by the radial extent of apex, flipper or chafer into
    tire sidewall:

    Subject matter under subclass 539 wherein significance is attributed to the
    radial height of a wedge shaped or triangular insert, the height of a bead
    core contacting annular strip either in an absolute sense or in a relative
    sense with respect to other portions of the tire.


CLS 152/547
TXT Bead characterized by the chemical composition and or physical properties
    of elastomer or the like:

    Subject matter under subclass 526 wherein the bead portion of the tire
    comprises material formed by the interaction of two or more chemical
    substances or a combination of chemical substances exhibiting an essential
    or distinctive attribute to enhance the general structural characteristics
    of the tire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    525,    for chemical compositions or physical properties of external
    sidewall materials and subclass 537 for belt or breaker structure or
    particular chemical composition or physical properties.


CLS 152/548
TXT Characterized by the carcass, carcass material, or physical arrangement of
    the carcass materials:

    Subject matter under subclass 450 wherein the tire casing comprises a
    portion, exclusive of a tread and an external covering portion, which forms
    the body of the tire and is composed of materials, usually fabric layers
    impregnated with rubber, wherein significance is attributed to the specific
    materials or their disposition relative to each other or with respect to
    the rest of the tire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    192,    and indented subclasses and 196 and indented subclasses, for
    armored carcass construction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, appropriate subclasses
    for a web or sheet product distinguished only by the twisted, covered
    and/or wrapped strand constituents.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, appropriate subclasses, for a knitted product
    not provided for elsewhere.

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, subclasses 1 - 13
    for a stock material product including a braided, net or lace component is
    coated or impregnated.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 383+ for a stock material product
    which is in the form of a web, sheet or woven  strand and is the product of
    a method or apparatus provided for in that class (139).

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet including strips, strands or fibers, and especially subclasses 105+
    for a composite web or sheet in which elements or constituents (e.g.,
    fibers, strands) in one layer are disposed at an angle to those in another
    layer; and subclass 114 for such a product in which a parallel relationship
    exists between the constituents of the layers.


CLS 152/549
TXT Cushion means inward of outermost carcass ply:

    Subject matter under subclass 548 wherein elastomeric means is provided
    interior of the radial and axial outermost carcass ply of the tire to
    absorb shock or stress created in the carcass ply or plies.


CLS 152/550
TXT Carcass ply extends from at least one bead region without being folded
    about any bead rings:

    Subject matter under subclass 548 wherein the rim contacting portion of the
    tire includes the annular edges having annular reinforcing elements to
    anchor the tire or the tire carcass layers which terminate in spaced
    relation to one such annular reinforcing element without being wrapped
    around any annular reinforcing element.


CLS 152/551
TXT Carcass ply only folded about one bead ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 548 wherein the rim portion of the tire
    includes annular edges having annular reinforcing elements to anchor the
    tire or the tire carcass material to the rim and include carcass layers
    which are wrapped around only the annular reinforcing element or elements
    in one of the two annular edges or bead regions of the tire.


CLS 152/552
TXT Carcass ply turnup structure around bead rings:

    Subject matter under subclass 548 wherein the rim contacting portion of the
    tire includes annular edges having annular reinforcing elements to anchor
    the tire or the tire carcass material to the rim and include carcass layers
    that are wrapped around the annular reinforcing elements wherein the tire
    is characterized with regard to the manner in which the carcass layer or
    layers are folded or wrapped around the annular reinforcing elements.


CLS 152/553
TXT Folded from outside to inside of bead core:

    Subject matter under subclass 552 wherein the carcass plies are turned
    about the rings in a direction from the axial outer wall of the bead
    portion of the tire to the inner wall of the bead portion of the tire which
    direction is the reverse of the more conventional disposition of the
    carcass plies about the annular reinforcing elements.


CLS 152/554
TXT Characterized by the extent of the fold up into the sidewall of the tire
    relative to the other tire dimension:

    Subject matter under subclass 552 wherein the carcass plies turned about
    the bead rings are of such length as to extend along the side portion of
    the carcass a specified absolute extent or an extent that is relative to
    other tire dimensions, e.g., the maximum height, of the tire.


CLS 152/555
TXT Sidewall stiffening or reinforcing means other than main carcass plies or
    foldups thereof about beads:

    Subject matter under subclass 548 wherein additional reinforcing structure
    is provided in the body of the tire from or about the rim contacting
    portion of the tire to the radial outer side portions of the tire carcass
    to strengthen said side portions of the tire.


CLS 152/556
TXT Physical structure reinforcing cords:

    Subject matter under subclass 548 wherein particular significance is
    attributed to the physical characteristics of the specific material of the
    carcass ply or plies.


CLS 152/557
TXT With two or more differing cord materials:

    Subject matter under subclass 548 wherein the reinforcing materials of the
    carcass plies are of dissimilar materials.


CLS 152/558
TXT Carcass characterized by the reinforcing cords of each carcass ply being
    arranged substantially parallel:

    Subject matter under subclass 548 wherein the carcass plies are composed of
    reinforcing materials which extend in the same direction substantially
    equidistant at all points without converging or diverging from one another.


CLS 152/559
TXT Reinforcing cords run in opposite directions in successive carcass ply,
    i.e., bias plies:

    Subject matter under subclass 558 wherein the carcass reinforcing materials
    in the carcass plies are so disposed that the reinforcing cords in adjacent
    carcass plies subtend each other such that they are in a superimposed
    angular relationship relative to one another.

    (1)     Note.  Generally in order for a carcass structure to be considered
    biased, the angular orientation of the reinforcing elements with respect to
    the mid-circumferential plane of the tire is greater than about 15_ and
    more generally greater than about 30_ and less than about 60_.


CLS 152/560
TXT Reinforcing cords of at least one carcass ply extend transversely across
    the tire from bead to bead, i.e., radial ply:

    Subject matter under subclass 558 wherein the carcass plies are composed of
    reinforcing materials which are disposed in a plane that includes the axis
    of tire from one of the annular anchoring elements to the other annular
    anchoring element.

    (1)     Note.  Generally, in order for a carcass structure to be considered
    radial, the angular orientation of the reinforcing elements with respect to
    the mid-circumferential plane of the tire is about 90_ i.e., parallel to
    the tire axis, and more generally from about 90_ to about 75_.


CLS 152/561
TXT Combined with a bias angles ply:

    Subject matter under subclass 560 wherein the carcass is composed of both
    radial plies and bias plies.


CLS 152/562
TXT Cords curve from bead to bead in plural planes (e.g., S-shaped cord paths):

    Subject matter under subclass 548 wherein the reinforcing materials or
    carcass ply are disposed in the tire casing such that a trace of the
    reinforcing materials elements from one bead portion annular reinforcing
    element to the other bead portion annular reinforcing elements includes
    more than one angular orientation such that the carcass reinforcing
    elements in said ply do not lie in a single plane.

    (1)     Note.  Examples Include S-shaped cord paths and paths of minimum
    length along the curved surface of the tire.  The minimum length cord path
    is usually referred in the art as a geodesic cord path.


CLS 152/563
TXT Reinforcing cords of a carcass ply arranged in a crossing relationship
    within the ply, (e.g., woven, braided or knitted ply):

    Subject matter under subclass 548 wherein the carcass ply strengthening
    materials have been formed into an arrangement either by knitting, weaving
    or braiding.


CLS 152/564
TXT Carcass characterized by the chemical composition or physical properties of
    the elastomer or the like:

    Subject matter under subclass 548 wherein the carcass includes a material
    formed by the reaction of two or more chemical substances or a combination
    of chemical substances exhibiting an essential or distinctive attribute to
    enhance the general structural characteristics of the tire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    525,    for chemical compositions or physical properties of external side
    wall materials, subclass 537 for belt or breaker chemical or physical
    properties and subclass 547 for bead chemical or physical properties.


CLS 152/565
TXT Adhesion promoter:  rubber to rubber or reinforcement to rubber:

    Subject matter under subclass 548 wherein a means or chemical composition
    is applied between or in contiguous elastomeric layers or between or in an
    elastomeric materials as a reinforcing element therefor to insure improved
    bonding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    Cross-Reference Art Collection 910 for patents teaching means for enhancing
    adhesion between elastomeric material and reinforcing elements.


CLS 156/
TTL ADHESIVE BONDING AND  MISCELLANEOUS CHEMICAL  MANUFACTURE

CLS 156/
TXT INDEX



    I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    A.      Generic class for:

    1.      Adhesive bonding and assembly therefor

    2.      Chemical reaction step in manufacturing

    3.      Plaster board making

    4.      Conductors of indefinite length

    B.      Also provides for:

    1.      Simulations or representations, manufacture

    2.      Apparatus for shaping, per se, of dry paper.

    3.      Delaminating

    II.     GENERAL LINES WITH OTHER CLASSES

    A.      Bonding and/or assembly therefor

    B.      Laminating combined with other operations

    C.      Chemical manufactures

    D.      Single-crystal growth

    E.      Products

    III.    GLOSSARY

    I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER.

    A.      This is the generic class for:

    1.      Manufacturing processes and apparatus including a step of
    adhesively bonding parts together utilizing a nonmetallic cement or
    assembly of parts for adhesive bonding of that type.

    2.      The manufacture of articles of commerce in which one of the
    manufacturing steps includes a chemical reaction.

    3.      The manufacture of panels from settable inorganic compositions
    having adhered facing sheets (e.g., plaster board).  These processes are
    provided for in subclasses 39+ and the apparatus may be found in subclasses
    346+.  The definitions and notes to these subclasses should be examined for
    the precise limits of the subject matter provided for and for additional
    fields of search.

    4.      The manufacture of electrical conductors of indefinite length where
    not elsewhere provided for.  Subclasses 47+ provides for these processes
    and the definitions and notes thereto should be consulted for the precise
    limits of the subject matter there provided for.

    B.      Miscellaneous subject matter also provided for.

    1.      This class includes several subclasses relating to the manufacture
    of simulations or representations, that is articles which give the
    appearance of being a specific object without in fact being that object
    (subclasses 58, 59 and 61).  Also provided is a subclass (57) relating to
    the preparation of products of nature for display in their natural form.
    Subclass 62 includes processes not elsewhere provided for in which is
    recited a step of free hand drawing or shaping to produce an ornamental
    form.  The subclass definitions for all the above should be inspected and
    especially the notes thereto for the lines between these specific
    subclasses and other classes.

    2.      Apparatus for performing shaping operations, per se, on dry paper
    or paperlike materials are provided for in this class in subclasses 585+.
    The lines with various classes and analogous search fields are set out in
    these subclasses.

    3.      Delaminating.  This class provides for the separation of a bonded
    joint by destroying the bond and separating the parts.  Methods for
    delaminating are provided for in subclass 344, while the corresponding
    apparatus is in subclass 584.

    II.     GENERAL LINES WITH OTHER CLASSES.

    AA.     Special lines with Class 29, Metal  Working:

    Class 29 has several important relationships with this class (156). Both
    classes take designated single-step processes, and both are locations for
    multistep processes for manufacturing designated products or using certain
    combinations of steps.

    Single-step processes provided for in Class 29 include shaping particulate
    metal by pressure alone, burnishing, filing, mechanical joining of parts,
    etc., even when used in the manufacture of a product designated for Class
    156, in section I, above.  Likewise, where only an adhesive bonding step is
    claimed, the process is assigned to Class 156, even though a product
    designated for Class 29 is manufactured.

    Multistep processes for Class 29 are of two types:

    (1)     Those for making specified articles, enumerated in that part of the
    Class 29 subclass 401.1.

    (2)     Multistep manufacturing processes not provided for elsewhere.

    Insofar as processes of type (1) are concerned, these are assigned to Class
    29, even when an adhesive bonding step is claimed as part of the multistep
    process, except for processes classifiable in subclasses 825+, which
    follows the category (2) rule given in the next paragraph.

    Processes of type (2) are provided for in this class (156) when they claim:

    (a)     Adhesive bonding combined with shaping of nonmetals.

    (b)     Adhesive bonding combined with broad or nominally claimed metal
    shaping steps.

    (c)     Adhesive bonding including steps for assembling the parts to be
    bonded.

    Processes of type (2) are classified in Class 29 when they claim:

    (d)     Adhesive bonding combined with specified metal shaping steps.

    (e)     Adhesive bonding combined with mechanical joining, either broad or
    specific.

    A.      Bonding and/or assembly therefor.

    1.      This class provides for the adhesive securing of parts utilizing
    nonmetallic cementing media.  The adhesive may be separately applied tacky
    material, or it may be a nontacky material on application that is
    subsequently activated.  The parts joined may be inherently tacky without
    the addition of an adhesive or may be rendered tacky by the application of
    an activating material or agent.

    2.      This class provides for process for assembling adhesive coated or
    tacky parts even though the step of applying the adhesive may not be
    claimed.  Assembly or association of articles for subsequent bonding or
    adhesive applying where the subsequent bonding is not claimed is generally
    not provided for in this class.  Any step in addition to the assembly,
    however, which might be considered to be unique to adhesive bonding is
    sufficient to cause the patent to be classified in this class.

    3.      This class provides for apparatus for assembling and joining of
    parts.  Generally it is required that the apparatus include means to bring
    the parts into assembled association and that the parts have adhesive
    applied to them or means be claimed to apply adhesive or render the parts
    adhesive.  This class generally does not provide for apparatus for bringing
    parts together for subsequent adhesive application where such application
    is not claimed.  Appropriate classes listed below and especially Class 29,
    Metal Working, provide for such devices.

    4.      SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, appropriate subclasses,
    for laminating implements there provided for of the brush or wiper type.

    28,     Textiles: Manufacturing, appropriate subclass, for the formation of
    a textile product by mechanically interlocking or interengaging of threads,
    yarns, fibers or the like in a manner not provided for elsewhere, such as
    by needling (subclasses 107+).

    53,     Package Making, appropriate subclasses for laminating operations,
    per se, peculiar to package making.  That class provides for adhesively
    sealing a filled package where package handling means are claimed. Class 53
    also provides for adhering encircling sealing strips (subclass 137.2) which
    seal portions of cover, i.e., cover adjuncts.  Partial cover application,
    such as cigar bands, for example, are provided for in Class 53, subclass
    580, especially where the band is secured to itself.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 36+ for a process of bonding glass
    by glassworking operation to a formed part (and see the line note in Class
    65, subclass 36), especially subclasses 37+ for multi-focal lens making
    including fusion bonding (see the line note in Class 65 subclass 37);
    subclass 42 for a process of glassworking including bonding of a
    subassembly with subsequent assembly and bonding of formed parts only (see
    the line note in Class 65 subclass 42).

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 450.1+ for apparatus
    for making a composite edible by laminating preforms.

    100,    Presses, for press apparatus, per se, even where disclosed for
    performing a laminating function.  That class (100) can take feeding of a
    previously associated sandwich into the press couple or removal of the
    sandwich from the couple.  Mere heating in the press is also provided for
    in Class 100 (subclasses 300+) as is means placing the material pressed
    under vacuum during pressing (subclass 90).  This class (156) provides for
    pressing and for laminating not provided for in Class 100, i.e., (1)
    pressing combined with means peculiar to laminating or (2) presses modified
    uniquely for laminating.  Under (1) above, means associating or assembling
    parts before pressing, for example, is in this class (156).  In subclasses
    580+ of this class may be found certain presses, per se, or platen
    structures modified for laminating.  Thus, for example, under (2) above and
    in these subclasses may be found press platens having relieved areas
    whereby the pressed sandwich is bonded at spaced points, differentially
    heated platens to achieve the same effect.

    101,    Printing, appropriate subclasses provides for the transfer of
    sheet-like material onto a base where the transfer element is a printing
    member of the type provided for in that class.  Die printing with gold
    leaf, for example, is provided for in that class (101) when a ribbon of
    leaf is used and a portion thereof is impressed and adhered onto the base
    by a printing member.

    114,    Ships, subclass 86 for ship calking and seaming and subclass 224
    for implements performing this function.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for devices which only
    apply adhesive to parts previously associated.  Any manipulation of the
    parts to facilitate lamination or manipulations peculiar to lamination are
    excluded from this class (118).  Thus, for example, separating parts to
    insure flow of adhesive there between is provided for in Class 156.

    157,    Wheelwright Machines, subclasses 1.1+ for rubber tire mounting or
    demounting apparatus.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 123+ for processes
    for producing multilayer water-laid sheets or webs.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 91+ for processes of forming composite
    articles by a metal casting operation.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 168+ for heated surfaces or heat exchange
    members, per se, which may function to apply laminating heat to a work
    piece.

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclasses for electric heating of
    metals for welding.  That class (219) also provides for electric heaters,
    per se, which may be used for adhesive bonding and for heated couples not
    specifically modified to provide for a laminating function.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, appropriate subclasses, for
    joining by mechanical means there provided for.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, appropriate subclasses for joining of parts
    by metallurgical bonding.  See Class 219, Electric Heating, for welding of
    metals by electric heating.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    appropriate subclasses for processes within the class definition, for
    casting or molding operations which may include a uniting operation.  Class
    264 provides for casting a part onto a preform to form a composite article
    and also provides for uniting two or more spaced preforms by introducing
    fluent  material   therebe tween.  For a more comprehensive line between
    Classes 156 and 254 see the class definitions of Class 264.

    300,    Brush, Broom, and Mop Making, appropriate subclasses, for processes
    for making the finished articles there provided for by a bonding step.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, appropriate subclasses under
    72+ and 83+, for a road and pavement making process and apparatus which may
    include a step of bonding or a means for bonding.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    subclasses 110+ for apparatus uniting parts within a mold cavity or for
    making a composite article from a preform and fluent material by casting
    thereof in a mold.

    427,    Coating Processes, for coating, per se, with adhesive material even
    where the adhesive is disclosed as for the purpose of laminating. Class 427
    also provides for coating previously associated parts where association is
    not claimed.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 300+ for processes of producing high temperature (Tc > 30 K)
    superconductors.



    B.      Laminating combined with other operations

    1.      This class provides for the combination of laminating with other
    working steps, however other classes provide for laminating for the
    manufacture of specific articles, or particular operations combined with
    laminating steps as set forth below:

    2.      SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 243+ for processes for making apparel including
    a cementing step combined with other apparel manufacturing steps.

    7,      Compound Tools, appropriate subclasses for laminating tools
    combined with other working devices.

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, appropriate subclasses for shoe making
    including laminating.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 105+ for tools
    of that class when combined with some other tool even though the Class 15
    tool may be disclosed as having a laminating function.  See the search
    notes in II (A) above for the line between Class 15 and Class 156 as to
    tools, per se.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 1.1 through 25.42, 91+, 592.1 through
    623.5, and 825 through 899.1, for combined apparatus or processes for
    making specific articles set forth even though an adhesive bonding be
    claimed. This class (156) can provide for manufacture of these articles
    where a laminating step only is claimed.  Subclasses 33+ and 700+ of Class
    29 provide for assembly and shaping combined with other manufacturing means
    or steps.  See subclasses 592.1+ of Class 29 for the residual home for
    methods of making electrical devices and subclasses 729+ for corresponding
    apparatus.



    See section I of the class definition of this class (156) for those
    articles for which Class 156 is the residual manufacturing class.



    With respect to general manufacturing processes, (i.e., articles not
    specifically provided for) the lines are as follows:



    Class 156 Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture.

    (1)     Adhesive bonding combined with shaping of nonmetals.

    (2)     Adhesive bonding combined with broad or nominally claimed metal
    shaping steps.

    (3)     Adhesive bonding including assembly steps.

    Class 29 Metal Working

    (1)     Adhesive bonding combined with specific metal shaping steps.

    (2)     Adhesive bonding combined with mechanical joining, either broad or
    specific.



    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 42.53 for
    combined processes for making artificial fishing lures or bait.

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, and
    especially subclass 297 for an abrasive tool making process which may
    involve a laminating step.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 746.1+ for a
    process involving erection or assembly of a building or building component
    involving more than merely adhering a preformed sheet form member to a
    surface.

    53,     Package Making, appropriate subclasses for package making including
    a laminating step and see section II. A. above for the line with Class 53.

    57,     Textiles: Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 3+, 210, and
    362 for covering or wrapping cores of indefinite length when including or
    followed by a twisting or twining operation.

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclasses 101.1+ for metal
    tool and implement making processes which may involve a laminating step.

    131,    Tobacco, appropriate subclasses for cigar and cigarette making
    combined with laminating.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, appropriate subclasses for the
    combination of paper making and laminating.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for garment making
    apparatus which may include laminating means in combination therewith.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving  Apparatus, subclass 14 for apparatus for
    applying a member, e.g., nail, to a workpiece combined with means to apply
    cement to the workpiece for a securing purpose.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 551+ for unwinding an
    elongated material with attachment to a preceding material including means
    to unite material ends together to insure a continuous supply.  The art in
    Class 242 typically handles rolls or spools in addition to unwinding.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus appropriate subclasses under
    72+ and 83+ for a road and pavement making process and apparatus which may
    include a step of laminating or a means for laminating.

    412,    Bookbinding:  Process and Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    specific book making steps or apparatuses combined with laminating.  This
    class (156) provides for making single book elements, such as laminated
    book covers, even though the plural manufacturing steps may be claimed.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    subclasses 2, 23+, 61 and 66+ as the residual class for the manufacture of
    electric lamp and discharge devices and see especially the class definition
    thereof for the locus of other patents relating to the manufacture of these
    devices.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, appropriate subclasses for manufactures which includes
    a laminating or adhesive bonding step.  That Class 493 generally
    manufactures finished articles of commerce from paper or paperlike
    materials and is the generic class for the manufacture of the specific
    articles there provided for. Class 156 provides for subcombinations of
    laminating single seams in the manufacture of those articles and also
    provides for tube making methods involving a laminating step.  See the line
    note under the definition of Class 493 to this class (156) for further
    clarification of the lines between these classes.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 300+ for processes of producing high temperature (Tc > 30 K)
    superconductors.



    C.      Chemical manufactures

    1.      Etching apparatus in general is provided for in Class 134, Cleaning
    and Liquid Contact With Solids, except apparatus for (a) applying etchant
    to a restricted portion of a product or (b) causing the etchant to be
    applied differently to different areas of the product Class 156 (subclass
    345).  Attention is directed to the search notes of these subclasses for
    the locus of other art relating to this subject matter.  Processes and
    apparatus for electrolytic etching are provided for in Class 204,
    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy.

    2.      Class 430, Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or
    Product Thereof, Class 427, Coating Processes, and Class 264, Plastic and
    Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes, generally provide for
    chemical reactions which take place during photographic imaging, coating or
    molding steps, respectively.  Where etching is employed merely to prepare a
    surface for some subsequent operation, e.g., coating, welding, etc., the
    patent to the combination is classified with the subsequent operation.
    Also, imaging or coating combined with subsequent chemical etching is
    provided for in Class 430 or 427, while molding combined with subsequent
    reactive gas or vapor treatment is provided for in Class 264.

    3.      Class 29, Metal Working, provides for its own operations when
    combined with a coating step or a molding step.  See also section II, AA,
    above.

    4.      SEARCH CLASS:

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclasses 3+ for cloth singeing and
    general textile cloth finishing.

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, appropriate subclasses as the generic
    class for textile operations, and especially subclasses 167+, 178+, 261,
    and 265+ for significantly claimed textile operations combined with steps
    of coating, dyeing or fluid treatment.

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, for a
    process for making an abrading tool and see especially the notes therein
    for the lines with other classes.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 31 for a process involving a
    glassworking operation combined with an etching operation in any sequence.

    101,    Printing, subclass 463.1, for processes for making printing plates
    and surfaces there provided for.

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 290+ for tobacco treating processes.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, for cleaning processes and
    especially subclasses 2 and 3 for chemical bleaching, oxidation or
    reduction of a metallic, siliceous or calcareous base. That class (134)
    also provides for apparatus for contacting solid workpieces with an etchant
    fluid.  Class 156 provides for etching apparatus in which the etchant has a
    differential effect on the work.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 3.1+ for a machine for charring or burning
    wood.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 72+ for a process
    of making a roadway which may include the step of setting or curing road
    material.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, appropriate subclasses as the residual class
    for apparatus involving chemical procedures.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, as the parent class for processes
    involving a chemical reaction.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, for radiation imagery including an etching step.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, for processes and
    compositions for qualitative or quantative chemical testing especially
    subclass 4 for a chemical determination of properties of a crystal or
    crystalline materials.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    appropriate subclasses for processes there provided for which may include
    chemical manufacturing steps.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 300+ for processes of producing high temperature (Tc > 30 K)
    superconductors.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the destruction or containment of hazardous or toxic waste.

    D.      Single-crystal growth

    1.      This subject matter is located in Class 117, Single-Crystal,
    Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes; Non-Coating Apparatus
    Therefor.

    E.      Products

    1.      This class does not provide for products of manufacture.  Class
    428, Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, in appropriate subclasses
    provides for the products resulting from the processes of this class where
    not elsewhere provided for.  For the classification of other articles,
    attention is directed to the "Index to Classification".

    GLOSSARY

    ADHESIVE BOND

    The joining of parts (a) by means of a separate glue-like material or (b)
    by rendering contacting surfaces tacky by means of solvent and/or heat.

    BENDING

    Distortion of a workpiece by bodily moving a portion of it throughout its
    entire thickness relative to a second portion during which the thickness of
    the workpiece remains substantially the same and no significant plastic
    flow occurs.

    BULK DEPOSITION OF PARTICULATE   MATERIAL

    The fluent delivery of a stream of separate loose pieces onto a receiving
    surface.  The relative size of the pieces is not significant, rather it is
    the manner in which they are handled, as a mass or stream rather than each
    particle being individually manipulated.

    INDEFINITE LENGTH WORK

    A piece of material handled at points intermediate its ends whereby the
    length is immaterial to the manner of handling.

    LAMINA

    One of the component parts or layers of an adhesively bonded sandwich. Also
    an element which by disclosure is to be bonded to a separate element.


CLS 156/1
TXT Methods for the manufacture of articles under the class definition.

    (1)     Note.  Many of these subclasses have corresponding apparatus
    subclasses, therefor a complete search may involve the apparatus
    subclasses, which subclasses start at subclass 345 and continue to the end
    of the class.


CLS 156/39
TXT Processes under subclass 1 which are directed to making bodies having at
    least three layers, at least one of whose intermediate layers is composed
    of an inorganic settable material of structural strength, and whose
    outermost layers are of a sheet-like material.

    (1)     Note.  The primary function of the inorganic settable material is
    to give structural strength to the multi-layered body.

    (2)     Note.  The inorganic settable material is normally referred to as
    the core and the outer layer as the facing sheet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    346+,   for plaster board making type of apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 638+ for coating
    compositions containing an inorganic settable material.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses for processes within the class definition for
    casting a settable material onto a surface and stripping therefrom when not
    combined with the step of adhering facing sheets to the settable material.
    Subclass 333 therein pertains to processes utilizing heat or pressure
    indicating, mold or die shaping of inorganic hydraulic settable materials,
    not classifiable above.

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclass, for processes of coating a
    substrate.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 304.4+ for a
    composite stock material web or sheet including a porous or cellular layer,
    and the appropriate subclasses under subclasses 411+ for a nonstructural
    "plaster-board" plural layer product.


CLS 156/40
TXT Processes under subclass 39 combined with the step of folding and/or
    bending at least one facing sheet.

    (1)     Note.  See subclasses 196 and 226 of this class for definitions of
    the scope of the terms "bending" and "folding", respectively.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass are processes of bending a single
    facing sheet into a trough-like shape and applying the core material to the
    trough thus formed.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass also includes processes wherein a single
    facing sheet completely envelopes the core material.

    (4)     Note.  Processes wherein a facing sheet is turned about the edges
    of the core material and embedded therein are included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196+,   for processes of bending or reshaping a self-sustaining lamina.


CLS 156/41
TXT Processes under subclass 39 which include the step of coating a facing
    sheet of, the assembled body, or adding an ingredient to the core material
    which coating or added ingredient renders the plasterboard impervious to
    the passage of water.


CLS 156/42
TXT Processes under subclass 39 which include the envelopment of an additional
    element by the core material which element imparts additional structural
    strength to the completed plasterboard.

    (1)     Note.  The additional element may be fibers, rods, tubes or any
    other material which adds structural strength to the core material.

    (2)     Note.  The reenforcing elements may be added during the formulation
    of the core material.


CLS 156/43
TXT Processes under subclass 39 which include the step of causing the core
    material to become cellular in nature after association of the core
    material with at least one of the facing sheets.

    (1)     Note.  The addition of activatable foaming agents, beating, or
    heating of gas generating materials are some examples of the means used to
    cause the core to become cellular.


CLS 156/44
TXT Processes under subclass 39 in which at least one of the facing sheets is
    subjected to a mechanical and/or chemical modification prior to the
    association of the various layers.

    (1)     Note.  Trimming, roughening, perforating, application of adhesive,
    printing, and coating are some examples of the types of treatments herein
    included.


CLS 156/45
TXT Processes under subclass 39 in which the unitary body formed by the
    association of the facing sheets and core material is thereafter subjected
    to a chemical and/or mechanical modification.

    (1)     Note.  Edge smoothing, cutting, manipulative drying techniques,
    coating, printing and manipulative pressure application are some examples
    of the type of modifications herein included.


CLS 156/46
TXT Processes under subclass 45 in which the modification is the formation of
    an aperture.

    (1)     Note.  The aperture need not necessarily extend through the entire
    body but may stop short of penetrating the second facing sheet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252,    for processes of forming apertures in lamina.


CLS 156/47
TXT Processes under subclass 1 for making indefinite length electrical
    conductors or for joining, splicing or repairing the same.

    (1)     Note.  The term "conductor" as used herein, means any wire, strand,
    filament bar, rod, cable, cord, tube, or like element, of indefinite
    length, simple or compound, bare or insulated, designed and intended to
    provide an electrically conductive path between its end.

    (2)     Note.  This class is a residual class for miscellaneous patents
    pertaining to the above subject matter and which cannot be classified
    elsewhere.  The bulk of the patents relating to this subject matter is to
    be found in the various manufacturing apparatus and process classes
    referred to in the following notes.  The definitions of these classes
    should be consulted to determine the scope and limitations thereof, this
    class (156) taking only those patents which cannot be properly allocated to
    any other manufacturing class.  The following notes refer to those classes
    in which conductor manufacturing and other immediately related processes
    and apparatus are known to exist, but are probably not exhaustive.

    METAL WORKING OPERATIONS

    (3)     Note.  For the making, forming, or shaping of wires, rods, tubes,
    cables, or other metallic elements, either simple or compound, or for the
    covering or sheathing of wires, rods, etc., either insulated or not, by
    mere metal working operations; see "SEARCH CLASS" below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 400.1+, for processes of making
    miscellaneous devices; particularly subclasses 402.01+ for miscellaneous
    processes of repairing; subclass 461 for spreading cable strands and
    joining the cable to another part such as a driving block or to another
    cable; and subclasses 505+, particularly subclasses 518 and 519 for joining
    wire or cable ends together by means of a deformed surrounding sleeve.
    Search subclass 728 for apparatus for sheathing a running-length core,
    e.g., a wire, not elsewhere classified.

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses, for a method or means for
    making a metal conductor by a mere metal working operation, e.g.,
    subclasses 253.1+ for die-expressing an elongated metal product, or 274+
    for drawing a wire through a die.  Sheathing a core, e.g., a wire by
    extruding a metal blanket around it is classified in subclasses 253.1+, and
    particularly subclass 268, this being the sole exception to the general
    rule that assembly is excluded from Class 72. Other sheathing, even if a
    metal working operation is involved, is in Class 29, Metal Working.  See
    the note above to Class 29.

    140,    Wireworking, especially subclasses 71 and 149 for the making of
    conductors involving wireworking.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 462 for methods of forming conductors by
    a continuous metal casting operation and subclasses 418+ for corresponding
    apparatus.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 603+ and 50+ for making or covering
    conductors involving electric heating and working of metal.  Note
    especially indented subclasses 59.1+ and 605.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 126+ for assembling and bonding
    together a metal core and sheath.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing.

    (4)     Note.  The above classes also provide for certain subsidiary or
    miscellaneous operations encountered in the manufacture of electric
    conductors or otherwise of interest therein as set forth in "Search Class"
    under (15) note.

    (5)     Note.  For mere twisting or twining of metal strands, wires, etc.,
    or for mere coating operations with metal, see notes (9) and (12),
    respectively, below.

    (6)     Note.  In general, the above classes may be said to be restricted
    to metal working operations, or to such operations combined with certain
    subsidiary operations which are merely incidental to the metal working.
    However, exceptions are found in Class 29, Metal Working, in which
    subclasses 90.01, 400.1 and 700 and their indented subclasses are the
    generic places for the operations provided for therein regardless of the
    material worked on. Thus, for example, for the threading or assembling of
    beads, discs, or other spacer members, whether of metal or not, on wires,
    as in coaxial cables, see Class 29, subclass 729.

    (7)     Note.  Plural or combined operations, each of which is a metal
    working operation, are also included in the above classes, Class 29, Metal
    Working taking all such combined operations not provided for in the other
    metal working classes.  Accordingly, patents relating to the manufacture of
    electric conductors wherein each operation involves metal working, will be
    classified in one of the above classes, but where, in addition to the metal
    working, an operation not merely subsidiary thereto is claimed, as, for
    example, the coating or covering of a wire insulation prior or subsequent
    to the metal working, such patent will be classified in Class 156.

    TEXTILE WORKING OPERATIONS

    (8)     Note.  For the making or forming of cords, cables, or other
    strands, including conductors, or for the covering or sheathing of such
    elements by mere textile working operations; see "SEARCH CLASS" below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, especially subclass 145 for fiber
    liberation from natural sources by mechanical treatment and the assembly of
    fibers to form slivers or webs.

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, for miscellaneous textile operations not
    otherwise provided for.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, especially subclasses
    3+, 33, 261, and 362 for the manufacture of conductors by spinning or
    twisting or for covering or sheathing by wrapping.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, especially subclasses 9+, 61, 80, and 83+ for
    manufacturing or covering a conductor involving a knitting apparatus.

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, especially
    subclasses 1, 6, 23, and 29 for manufacturing or covering a conductor
    involving braiding, netting or lace making.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, for manufacturing or covering a conductor
    involving a weaving operation.

    (9)     Note.  In general, these textile classes are restricted to textile
    working operations, by which is meant the working, manipulating, or
    interengagement of fibers, filaments, strands, etc., to produce fabric
    structures.  The filaments, strands, etc., may be of metal where no
    particular metal working is involved. Thus, for example, Class 57,
    Textiles: Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, will take the mere twisting or
    twining of one or more metallic strips, tapes, wires, etc., to form
    wire-rope, cables, etc., or to cover a core therewith.

    (10)    Note.  Textile working operations combined with subsidiary or
    auxiliary operations such as, for example, coating or impregnating of the
    fibers or strands, or of the core, or of the completed article, with fluid
    or plastic material are also included.

    (11)    Note.  Plural or combined operations each of which is a textile
    working operation (e.g., twisting or twining plus braiding or knitting) are
    also included, Class 28, Textiles: Manufacturing, taking such residual
    combined operations not provided for in the other textile classes.
    Accordingly, patents relating to the manufacture of electric conductors
    wherein each operation is a textile working operation are classifiable in
    one of the above classes, but where, in addition to the textile working, an
    operation not merely subsidiary thereto is claimed, as, for example,
    applying a metallic sheath by drawing or rolling prior or subsequent to the
    textile working operation, such patent will be classified in Class 156.

    COATING, COVERING AND SHEATHING

    (12)    Note.  For coating, covering, or sheathing conductors by metal
    working operations or by textiles working operations, see the classes
    listed under these respective headings above. For other apparatus or
    processes for forming or applying a coating, sheathing, or other covering
    on a conductor, cable, or other strand; see "Search Class" below.  Classes
    118, 148, 204, and 427, include coating with metal, when applied by the
    operations provided for in these classes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 36+ for a process of bonding glass
    to a formed part by a glassworking operation; and subclasses 152+ for
    glassworking apparatus including fusion bonding means; see the "Search
    Notes" under subclass 154.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 420, and see the notes thereto for
    apparatus for coating strand form work.

    148,    Metal Treatment, particularly subclasses 206+ for processes of
    carburizing or nitriding metal, utilizing an external source of carbon or
    nitrogen, or subclasses 240+ for processes of reactive coating a metal
    surface with an externally supplied agent that combines with the metal
    substrate to provide a coating thereon containing at least one element from
    said metal substrate.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, particularly subclasses 106 and
    267+ for covering operations involving paper making or fibrous pulp molding.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, for coating by
    electrophoresis or cathode sputtering.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, especially subclasses 138+ for coating by
    electrolysis.

     264,   Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses, for processes within the class definition, for
    molding or shaping plastic materials. For forming indefinite length
    articles by extruding or molding around strand-like or filament-like
    preforms, see Class 264, subclasses 171.1+.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 113+ for covering by apparatus extruding plastic material about
    preform within a shaping cavity where the external configuration of the
    product is diverse from that of the preform.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 58+ for processes of coating, per se,
    wherein an electrical product is produced.

    STRUCTURE

    (13)    Note.  For the structure of electric conductors or for analogous
    strand structures, including pipes, hose and conduits, see Class 174,
    Electricity: Conductors and Insulators, appropriate subclasses and notes
    (2) to (14) of the class definition thereof.

    As between this class (156) and Class 174, the article controls
    classification, i.e., patents claiming both conductor structure and the
    method or apparatus for making it will be classified in Class 174 and
    cross-referenced to Class 156.

    For a stock material product, not elsewhere provided for, in the form of a
    rod, strand or fiber, having some structural feature and an impregnation or
    core, or coated, see subclasses 364+ of Class 428, Stock Material or
    Miscellaneous Articles.

    MISCELLANEOUS

    (14)    Note.  For methods or apparatus for installing or laying
    conductors, drawing them through conduits, or placing them on poles; see
    "Search Class" below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    111,    Planting, subclass 5 for apparatus and methods for planting pipe or
    cable.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 134.3+ for placing cable on poles or in conduits.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, especially subclass 19.1
    for hand and hoistline implements used in placing pipe and cable.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 154+ for apparatus or
    methods for laying cable or pipe.

    (15)    Note.  Under this note are included search notes to miscellaneous
    apparatus and processes used in the manufacture of electrical conductors or
    otherwise of interest therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166+,   for processes of associating flexible filamentary material of
    indefinite length not especially intended to provide an electrically
    conductive path between its ends.

    169+,   for processes of winding filamentary material of indefinite length
    to form electric coils.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 90.01 and 90.5 for smoothing, compacting,
    polishing etc., of bare or covered conductors or other strands (analogous
    and related operations are set forth in the notes to subclass 90.5 of Class
    29), subclasses 592.1+, for processes for forming miscellaneous electrical
    devices.

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 165+ for wire cutting tools and implements.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, especially subclasses
    245+, 414, 419, 444, 466, 519, and 611+ for the drying of sheets, webs or
    strands including conductors and cables.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 40.5 for processes and apparatus
    for testing for leaks in fluid filled cables.

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses, for method and apparatus for
    cutting a wire or strand, a cable, or an object made up of strands, or for
    cutting insulation from a wire.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, particularly subclasses 9,
    15, 38, 64, and 122 for cleaning strands including the removal of
    insulating coating.

    140,    Wireworking, subclass 92.1 for forms and frames for forming wire
    coils, such as armature coils, and subclass 147 for wire straightening.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclass 77 for electroforming a metallic
    sheet, web, wire, or filament of indeterminant length.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 430+ for forming an
    article by winding material onto a core and subclasses 18+ and 47+ for
    winding strand material onto a spool for storage.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for
    testing of conductors and insulation.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for a stock material product, especially subclasses 364+ for a structurally
    defined or coated rod, strand or filament which is useful as an electrode
    or as a filament for electric lamps or other discharge devices, and
    subclasses 411.1+ and 615+ for nonmetallic and metallic composites,
    respectively, defined in terms of the composition of their components.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 269+ for making a paper tube; and
    subclasses 405+ for making a folded paper article.


CLS 156/48
TXT Processes under subclass 47 which include flowing a substance to an
    enclosed cavity which is associated with the conductor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145,    for encapsulating of permanently fluent material in hollow or
    porous lamina or the filling of the space between laminae subsequent to
    lamination.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    appropriate subclasses for filling receivers.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, especially subclass 15.1
    for electrical cables including means to feed or circulate a fluid therein.


CLS 156/49
TXT Processes under subclass 47 for joining end-to-end of at least two
    conductors and/or their coverings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157+,   for processes of joining in an end-to-end relationship of
    indefinite length lamina not intended to provide a conductive path between
    its ends.

    502+,   for apparatus for joining flexible indefinite length bodies
    end-to-end.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 592.1+, for making of electrical devices,
    not elsewhere classified.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 22, 23 and
    362 for splicing strands by a twisting or twining operation.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 97, for processes and
    apparatus for repairing leaks in pipes and hose, including electric
    conduits.

    140,    Wireworking, subclasses 111+, for other processes and devices for
    joining or uniting wire.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 91+ for composite article forming by a
    metal casting operation and particularly subclasses 108+ for processes of
    uniting two preforms.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 21, 22 and 84+
    for the structure of conductor joints.

    219,    Electric Heating, especially subclasses  50+, 78.01, 136+, 148,
    603+, 633, and 765+ for bonding by use of electric heat.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, appropriate subclasses for joining metals by
    a metallurgical bond as well as joining a metal to a nonmetal and joining
    two nonmetals by use of a metallic filler to effect a metallurgical bond.
    Joining a metal to a metal, a metal to a nonmetal or a nonmetal to a
    nonmetal is to be found in this class if the bond is effected with a
    nonmetallic cement or by fusion of a nonmetal part.

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 83+ for molds for uniting a preform with
    molding material.

    289,    Knots and Knot Tying, for mere tying of cords or strands.


CLS 156/50
TXT Processes under subclass 47 which include the distortion or shaping of the
    conductor itself.

    (1)     Note.  Twisting, braiding and bending are some examples of the type
    of conductor manipulations contemplated for this subclass.


CLS 156/51
TXT Processes under subclass 47 which include the step of applying a material
    about or over the conductor of indeterminate-length.

    (1)     Note.  Covering materials classified herein include coatings
    applied as by an extrusion which may function as insulation or for
    mechanical protection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 517+ for processes of joining a core to a
    sheath by a deforming operation, subclass 525 for processes of force
    fitting a core in a sheath, and subclasses 527.1+ for processes of casting
    and/or coating a layer on a core followed by subsequent treatment of the
    cast or coated base.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 126+ for encasing a core with a
    sheath and bonding the parts together.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 58+ for coating processes, per se,
    wherein an electrical product is produced.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 615+ for
    metallic composite defined in terms of the composition of its components.


CLS 156/52
TXT Processes under subclass 51 in which the cover material is self-sustaining
    prior to its application to the conductor.


CLS 156/53
TXT Processes under subclass 52 which involves winding or folding the preformed
    material about the conductor and/or conductor assembly to cover the
    conductor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169+,   for processes of winding a filament.

    184,    for processes of winding a web or sheet.

    425+    and 443+, for apparatus for performing  winding operations.


CLS 156/54
TXT Processes under subclass 53 directed to longitudinally bending the sheet
    material about the conductor.

    (1)     Note.  For a definition of longitudinal bending see the definition
    of subclass 200 of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   for processes of longitudinally bending running or continuous
    length work.


CLS 156/55
TXT Processes under subclass 53 in which two or more generally parallel spaced
    conductors or conductor cables are wrapped or covered.

    (1)     Note.  The conductors herein included may be separated from each
    other merely by a covering already on one or more of the conductors prior
    to their being jointly wrapped.


CLS 156/56
TXT Processes under subclass 53 directed to sequentially applying at least two
    separate covering materials to the conductor in which at least one covering
    operation is by wrapping a sheet material about the conductor.

    (1)     Note.  Included within this subclass are processes which involve
    the enclosing of the conductor with more than one type of cover, e.g., tape
    and a coating.


CLS 156/57
TXT Processes under subclass 1 in which a plant or animal or part thereof is
    bonded to a support to maintain the natural appearance thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The combination of coating a natural plant, flower or
    biological specimen and then interposing the coated specimen between glass
    plates is classified herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclass 94.11 for reactive treatment of biological
    specimens.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, appropriate subclasses, for processes of treating
    living plants.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 271.1+ for processes in
    which a body is embedded in or surrounded by shaping material.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, appropriate subclasses for disinfecting,
    deodorizing, preserving, or sterilizing therein provided.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 4+ for coating processes for coating
    a plant member or animal specimen.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 15+ for an
    article, in the form of a three-dimensional imitation or treated natural
    product (e.g., fauna or flora).


CLS 156/58
TXT Processes under subclass 1 directed to reproducing three dimensional
    objects by taking photographs of the lineaments of said objects and (1)
    employing said photographs as guides or templates to mechanically reproduce
    the objects in three dimensions or (2) assembling said photographs to thus
    reproduce the objects in three dimensions.

    (1)     Note.  The processes in this subclass generally include the
    surrounding of the object with cameras which take photographs of the object
    from the various directions and then using the resultant photographs in
    proper sequence to reproduce the three dimensional object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59,     for processes of producing relief or intaglio representations of
    three dimensional objects which do not include the taking of a photograph
    of the object.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses, for processes within the class definition, for
    shaping plastic materials.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, appropriate subclasses for radiation imagery processes, per se.


CLS 156/59
TXT Processes under subclass 1 for making reproductions of three dimensional
    objects, which reproductions simulate the original object in appearance but
    not in function, and are shaped to approximate the contours of the objects,
    but not the full depth or front to back dimension.

    (1)     Note.  The articles produced for this subclass are shaped for
    representation on the facing surface only.  Thus the reproduction effect is
    apparent when the article is viewed from a single plane only.

    (2)     Note.  Where the manufacturing operations are, per se, classified
    in some other class, the patent is there classified even though the article
    may be a representation.  Thus, for example, Class 264, Plastic and
    Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes, in appropriate
    subclasses provides for the shaping or molding of plastic materials to make
    reproductions, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for processes involving the taking of photographs of three
    dimensional objects and the employment of said photographs to make
    reproductions of the objects.

    196+,   for processes of laminating combined with processes of permanently
    bending, reshaping or embossing of self-sustaining lamina.

    250+,   for processes of laminating combined with cutting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, appropriate subclasses for producing dyed designs on
    textiles and subclasses 114+ for processes for producing ornamental effects
    on textile materials there provided for.

    29,     Metal Working, for miscellaneous processes of mechanical
    manufacture which may result in the production of a representation.  With
    respect to representation making, the line with Class 29 is as follows:
    Class 29 takes combined processes including metal working steps where no
    laminating is recited in the claims.  Where adhesive bonding is present the
    line is that set out between the two classes in section II A above the
    class definition of Class 156.

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 2+ for processes for laying out
    patterns for apparel making.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 616 for relief or
    intaglio signs.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 42.53 for
    processes for making artificial bait.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 66+ for a process of forming an
    article from molten glass.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, appropriate subclasses for processes for
    finishing cloth to produce ornamental effects and subclasses 21+ for
    leather working processes there provided for.

    82,     Turning, subclasses 11+ and 18+ for pattern controlled turning
    operations.

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses for cutting operations, per se.

    101,    Printing, subclass 32 for embossing processes.

    125,    Stone Working, appropriate subclasses for working stone there
    provided for.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 329+ for a method of woodworking to produce
    relief or intaglio representations, particularly subclass 358 for a method
    of embossing wood.

    164,    Metal Founding, appropriate subclasses for procuring reproductions
    by casting metal.

    199,    Type Casting, appropriate subclasses for type casting.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, appropriate subclasses especially subclasses
    67+ and 120+ for electrolytic methods of producing relief and intaglio
    surfaces.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses, for processes within the class definitions, for
    shaping or molding plastic materials, per se, see particularly subclasses
    220+.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, appropriate subclasses for a
    pattern controlled milling, broaching, or planing operation; particularly
    subclasses 79+ and 289+.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 15+ for an
    article, in the form of a three-dimensional imitation or treated natural
    product (e.g., fauna or flora).

    433,    Dentistry, subclass 213 for a wax modeling in dentistry processes.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 81+ for processes for
    drawing, painting or sculpturing processes in which some aid, or guide is
    provided for the artisan.

    451,    Abrading, for an abrading process for producing an ornamental
    effect.


CLS 156/60
TXT Processes under subclass 1 involving bonding or joining discrete juxtaposed
    lamina or spaced juxtaposed areas of a single lamina by adherence or
    coherence at the interface of the juxtaposed areas.

    (1)     Note.  The adherence is usually accomplished by application of an
    adhesive composition to one or both parts and the coherence by rendering
    the one or both parts tacky, usually by solvent, heat, externally applied
    or the residual heat retained by the part from a previous operation.

    (2)     Note.  The term "adhesive" is that body of material which adheres
    to each of the parts being secured and which has no structural or
    functional characteristic other than to facilitate or effect joiner of the
    parts.

    (3)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses include patents which claim
    only assembly of parts previously coated with adhesive.  See sections II A
    and II B of the class definitions of this class for the lines with other
    classes.

    (4)     Note.  Processes of adhesively uniting together at least two lamina
    which (1) do not define by name the adhesive employed and (2) do not define
    a manipulative procedure of uniting provided for below are classified
    herein.  In this subclass may be found, for example, patents distinguished
    only by the composition of the particular laminae joined.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, appropriate subclasses for joining parts by a
    metallurgical bond.


CLS 156/61
TXT Processes under subclass 60 directed to the making of artificial
    reproductions of naturally occurring objects.

    (1)     Note.  The processes in this subclass are generally related to
    making artificial reproductions of such naturally occurring objects as
    animals, plants, flowers, trees, pearls, etc., wherein the reproduction
    itself is made by a laminating step.  Merely making a picture of such
    object and laminating said picture to a backing is not included in this
    subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Such items as inflatable toys in the shape of various
    animals are included in this subclass if a laminating step is involved in
    the making of said toy.

    (3)     Note.  Operations which are, per se, classifiable in other classes
    are there provided for even though a reproduction is made of a product of
    nature.  Thus, for example, molding a product of nature from plastic is
    generally provided for in Class 264, Plastics and Nonmetallic Article
    Shaping or Treating:  Process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59,     for processes for making relief or intaglio representations of
    three dimensional objects and see especially the notes thereto for the
    locus of other operations for shaping particular objects.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 15+ for an
    article, in the form of a three-dimensional imitation or treated natural
    product (e.g., fauna or flora).


CLS 156/62
TXT Processes under subclass 60 combined with a step of (1) sketching,
    designing or diagraming by a hand operation on a material or (2) carving by
    hand operation figures, letters or devices on a material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250+,   277 and 278+, for processes of coating or engraving other than by a
    hand operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 861 for processes of cutting other than
    completely through work thickness or through work presented.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 256+ for nonuniform coating
    processes, and note especially subclass 260 for utilizing a hand-held brush
    or absorbent applicator.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 81+ for processes involving
    drawing, sculpturing or painting there provided for.


CLS 156/62.2
TXT Processes under subclass 60 which include forming a lamina by assembling
    individually distinct particulate material from a fluent mass and
    adhesively bonding the particles to each other and then uniting the lamina
    thus formed to itself or another lamina.

    (1)     Note.  The distinguishing characteristic of this subclass is that
    the material used in forming the lamina is handled as a fluent mass as
    differing from those processes in which each particle is individually
    handled or positioned.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    279+,   for processes under subclass 60 combined with the step of mass
    application of nonadhesive fibers or particles to the surface of a lamina
    not including the step of forming a self-supporting batt or body.

    369+,   for apparatus for forming self-sustaining webs or bodies of
    particulate material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 109+ for processes of forming articles from particulate material
    when not combined with a subsequent laminating step.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, subclasses 61+ for processes for
    making articles from particulate metal containing materials using pressure
    only.


CLS 156/62.4
TXT Processes under subclass 62.2 which include the step of (1) forming the
    discrete fibers from molten plastic material (2) cutting of filaments to
    produce fibers approximating in length the staple fibers of natural origin
    or (3) liberating bonded fibers from a fiber containing material.

    (1)     Note.  Glass is considered a plastic material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370+,   for apparatus for forming self sustaining bodies combined with
    means to form particles or means to liberate particles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 376+ for processes of forming fiber
    or filaments from molten glass; subclasses 484+ for glass fiber or filament
    forming apparatus.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 115+ for formation of particles other than glass combined with a
    molding operation.


CLS 156/62.6
TXT Processes under subclass 62.2 which include the step of distorting and
    portion of the lamina with respect to another portion such that said
    portions are in contact and bonded together.


CLS 156/62.8
TXT Processes under subclass 62.2 in which both lamina have been formed by
    bonding of individually distinct particulate material only.


CLS 156/63
TXT Processes under subclass 60 directed to bonding by hand operation at least
    two parts of different colors or shaped to each other or to another part,
    which bonded parts form an ornamental pattern.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264+    and 297+, for processes of assembling plural discrete lamina to
    each other or to a single face of an additional lamina.


CLS 156/64
TXT Processes under subclass 60 combined with the step of sampling, visually,
    chemically or physically determining some chemical or physical property or
    characteristic of the lamina a part of a lamina to be joined or of the
    adhesive employed to bond the laminae together.

    (1)     Note.  The sampling or determination of a property or
    characteristic of a lamina may be by a visual inspection or by determining
    the chemical or physical property by chemical test or by some mechanical
    testing apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    378,    for laminating apparatus combined with testing, measuring and
    indicating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 407 for processes which include a step of
    testing or of indicating combined with a step of mechanical manufacture.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, for processes of determining physical
    properties of a lamina to be joined or of the adhesive not combined with
    assembly and/or joining.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 49 and 198 for
    processes of measuring, testing and/or inspecting combined with a paper
    making operation.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 1+ for
    processes of chemical testing not combined with assembly and/or joining.


CLS 156/65
TXT Processes under subclass 60 which involve positioning at least two laminae
    side by side and out of contact with each other and assembling each of the
    opposed sides which lie in the same plane of laminae to a face of an
    additional lamina such that the additional laminae are entirely out of
    facial contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    265     and 297+, for processes of joining plural discrete laminae to a
    single face of an additional lamina.


CLS 156/66
TXT Processes under subclass 60 in which one of the lamina secured to another
    lamina is a securing device or a device capable of mechanically joining the
    assembly to another part.

    (1)     Note.  The securing devices include, for example, buttons, hooks
    and eyes, slide fasteners.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91+,    for processes of assembling laminae by mechanical joining means in
    addition to utilization of an adhesive.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 265+ for methods of attaching buttons or other
    fasteners to apparel not involving use of an adhesive.

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 406+ for a web or sheet having a fastener sewn
    thereto, and subclasses 475.14+ for a method of attaching a fastener to a
    base by sewing.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 99+ for a
    stock material product resulting from the process of this subclass (66).


CLS 156/67
TXT Processes under subclass 60 which include the step of applying a
    phosphorescent, fluorescent and/or luminescent substance to either a lamina
    and/or adhesive or utilizing at least one lamina and/or adhesive containing
    such substance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 483.1+ for devices including fluorescent
    or phosphorescent material in layer form.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 301.16+ - 301.6+ for compositions
    exhibiting fluorescent or phosphorescent effects.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 157 for processes of coating utilizing
    a fluorescent or phosphorescent coating material.


CLS 156/68
TXT Processes under subclass 60 combined with the step of removing the hairy
    covering or coat from the skin of animals either prior to or subsequent to
    removal of the skin or pelt from the carcass of the animal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclass 2 for the freeing of fibers
    by mechanical means from the skin of animals.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclasses 21+ for processes of treating
    hides and skins.  See (2) Note of subclass 21 for the line between this
    class (69) and Class 156.


CLS 156/69
TXT Processes under subclass 60 for bonding a cover to a receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  The receptacle for this subclass is one having utility for
    containing goods or other material or for shipping purposes.

    (2)     Note.  The processes in this subclass are not combined with a
    packaging step but relative to the formation of the package.  For the
    combination, see the search notes below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 476+ for processes of closing a
    receptacle subsequent to filling thereof with goods or materials or to a
    filled receptacle.


CLS 156/70
TXT Processes under subclass 60 which involves assembling a part within or
    between bonded lamina the outer laminae being bonded in a manner to provide
    a tolerance of fit between the enclosed part and the outer laminae
    sufficient to permit changing the position of the enclosed part with
    respect to the bonded laminae.

    (1)     Note.  The enclosing of a drawstring within the space between
    bonded laminae is one example within the scope of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228,    for processes of enclosing a spherical part between semi-spherical
    shells.

    300+,   for processes of enclosing a plurality of discrete laminae between
    plural laminae in which the discrete lamina is bonded to one of the plural
    laminae.

    383,    for laminating apparatus including means to encase a separate
    nonadhered part between adhered lamina.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 434+ for processes of retaining clearance
    for motion between assembled parts.

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 449 and 461 for processes of encasing a
    wrapper or wrappers about goods or materials.


CLS 156/71
TXT Processes under subclass 60 in which a lamina is associated with a static
    building structure.

    (1)     Note.  The lamina in this subclass may be wall paper and the
    building structure may be a wall of a building to which the wall paper is
    adhesively united.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 390+ for a
    structure having an adhered tile type and subclasses 745.01+ for a process
    of erection or assembly of a building or building component involving more
    than merely adhering a preformed sheet form member to a surface.


CLS 156/72
TXT Processes under subclass 60 which involves bonding a cluster of flexible
    parts, to a sheetlike lamina by causing each cluster to penetrate within
    the surface of the bonding medium or lamina to maintain the cluster and
    sheet in assembled relationship.

    (1)     Note.  Processes of bonding tufts to a backing to form a pile
    fabric are classified herein.

    (2)     Note.  The flexible parts for this subclass may be hair, feathers,
    etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     for processes of manually arranging different colored or shaped
    discrete elements on to a backing to form a design.

    297+,   for processes of bonding plural discrete laminae to a single face
    of an additional lamina.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclasses 159+ for processes for pile
    tufting other than by bonding.

    300,    Brush, Broom, and Mop Making, subclass 21 for processes of making a
    brush, broom or mop which may include a laminating operation.


CLS 156/73.1
TXT Processes under subclass 60 which include the step of imparting rapid
    oscillation at a frequency of greater than 10 cycles per second to at least
    one of the laminae or adhesive either prior, during or subsequent to
    formation of the laminate.

    (1)     Note.  The vibration may be effected for the purpose of spreading
    particulate material, elimination of air pockets in the adhesive, imparting
    energy to the laminae to cause softening and bonding, etc.


CLS 156/73.2
TXT Processes under subclass 73.1 wherein at least one lamina has a width and
    thickness of the same order of magnitude and length considerably greater
    than the width or thickness.


CLS 156/73.3
TXT Processes under subclass 73.1 wherein at least one lamina is severed by use
    of a vibratory force of at least 10 cycles per second.


CLS 156/73.4
TXT Processes under subclass 73.1 wherein two laminae each having both length
    and width much greater than thickness are joined along an edge.

    (1)     Note.  The edges of the laminae may overlap providing the area of
    overlap is small compared to the area of the laminae.


CLS 156/73.5
TXT Processes under subclass 60 including a step of generating heat to effect
    bonding by either rapid relative motion of the contacting faces of the
    laminae or by the rapid relative motion of a separate part contacting the
    laminae.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 470.3 for processes of welding metal by
    friction.


CLS 156/73.6
TXT Processes under subclass 60 including a step of imparting a rapid
    oscillation or to and fro movement to at least one of the laminae or
    adhesive at a rate of less than 10 cycles per second either prior to,
    during or after the formation of a sandwich.

    (1)     Note.  The vibration may be effected for any purpose including the
    spreading of particulate material, elimination of air pockets in the
    adhesive, etc.


CLS 156/74
TXT Processes under subclass 60 which includes the rotation of a workpiece to
    cause application of centrifugal force to the bonding medium and/or a
    workpiece which force acts in a direction outwardly of the center of
    rotation.

    (1)     Note.  The force applied to the lamina may be to effect its
    separation from a forming surface, to distribute the bonding medium, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    particularly subclasses 8+, 114, 270, and 311 for processes within the
    class definition, which employ centrifugal force in the shaping or molding
    of ceramic materials.

    427,    Coating Processes, for processes of coating utilizing centrifugal
    force.


CLS 156/75
TXT Processes under subclass 60 including a step of regulating the weight
    distribution of a product about a pivot point.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 66+ for measuring or testing, per
    se, to determine the unbalance of a rotating body.


CLS 156/76
TXT Processes under subclass 60 combined with the step of treating at least one
    lamina composed of cellulosic material with a reagent either to alter the
    surface characteristic of the lamina such that it simulates the skin of an
    animal or alter the normally opaque quality of the lamina such that it has
    the property of transmitting rays of light.

    (1)     Note.  The reagent may be Zn C12, H2 SO4, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 118+ for processes of transparentizing or
    parchmentizing cellulosic fibers not combined with a liminating procedure.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclass 187, for processes
    combined with the step of gelatinizing paper.


CLS 156/77
TXT Processes under subclass 60 including the step of forming pores or other
    type of open space in situ within a lamina during or subsequent to its
    formation.

    (1)     Note.  The mechanical formation of pores within a lamina, e.g.,
    perforating, is not within the scope of this and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 20 for a process of foaming of slag,
    and subclass 22 for a glassworking or treating process including a step of
    pore forming in situ.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 122, 601+, and 672+
    for processes of making coating or plastic compositions including a step
    forming pores in situ in the composition.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclass 101 for the step of
    pore forming combined with a paper making operation.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 304.4+ for a
    composition stock material web or sheet including a porous or cellular
    component.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, subclasses 39 and 80+ for pore-forming
    ceramic compositions.

    521,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubber, subclasses 50+ for
    pore-forming, per se, in a synthetic resin composition.


CLS 156/78
TXT Processes under subclass 77 in which the step of forming the pores is
    effected by introducing a gas under pressure to the interior of at least
    one lamina or by generating a gas in-situ within such lamina.


CLS 156/79
TXT Processes under subclass 78 in which the step of foaming occurs after
    assembling of at least two laminae to form a sandwich.


CLS 156/80
TXT Processes under subclass 60 in which the work is chilled to a temperature
    below that of the normal working temperature of the surrounding atmosphere.

    (1)     Note.  The removal of heat usually effects a change of phase of a
    constituent part of the lamina and/or adhesive, e.g., solidification of a
    material which is normally in the liquid state under ambient conditions.

    (2)     Note.  Mere cooling of a previously heated workpiece to cause it to
    return to normal temperature is not included here, to be classified here
    the workpiece must be chilled to below normal temperatures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282     and 311, for other processes involving a cooling step.

    498,    for laminating apparatus provided with means to cool the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclasses for refrigeration processes
    and apparatus.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclass 54 which includes the
    step of freezing liquid employed in the fiber liberation or treatment.


CLS 156/81
TXT Processes under subclass 60 combined with the step of converting a material
    contained within a hollow imperforate body or lamina to a liquid or gas
    which is permanently retained within the hollow body in the liquid or gas
    state.


CLS 156/82
TXT Processes under subclass 60 which include the step of physically contacting
    the surface of a lamina with a body of burning gas or vapor, e.g., flame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    497,    for laminating apparatus combined with flame contact means for the
    work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclass 140 for processes of singling or carbonizing
    of textiles.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 120 for a process for flame treating
    a glass preform; and see the collection of "Search Notes" thereunder.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 47 for apparatus for subjecting a
    surface to a flame.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 329+ for flame treatment of wood.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 223+ for coating processes including
    contacting the base or coating with a flame.


CLS 156/83
TXT Processes under subclass 60 including a step of treating a lamina to cause
    it to expand or increase in volume.

    (1)     Note.  The swelling may be effected by, for example, absorption of
    a solvent by the material of the lamina thereby causing expansion thereof.
    Merely subjecting a lamina to an external force such as a compressive force
    in one direction to cause it to elongate in another direction is not
    subject matter for this subclass, nor is subjecting matter for this
    subclass, nor is   subjecting the lamina to tension to cause it to
    elongate.  Inflating a hollow article is also excluded in that the laminae
    material does not swell.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147,    for inflating a hollow core.

    156,    for fluid pressure used to prevent collapse of a hollow core.

    229,    for distorting a workpiece by stretching.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 114, 130.1+ and 175 for processes of
    treating textiles with chemicals, e.g., swelling agents.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclass 187 for processes of
    hydration or gelatinization combined with a paper making operation.


CLS 156/84
TXT Processes under subclass 60 combined with the step of treating the material
    of which the lamina is composed to decrease the volume of the material.

    (1)     Note.  The shrinking of the material of the lamina usually occurs
    by contacting the material with a liquid agent which is either (1) a
    constituent of the composition of the material or (2) is from an external
    source followed by the step of heating of the material containing the
    liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76,     for processes of shrinking a lamina in which parchmentizing or
    transparentizing also occurs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 116+ for processes including a shrinking
    operation.


CLS 156/85
TXT Processes under subclass 84 in which the step of shrinking of the lamina
    occurs after associating of at least two lamina.


CLS 156/86
TXT Processes under subclass 85 in which the step of shrinking a lamina occurs
    while the lamina is associated with a cylindrical or spherical body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165,    170, 186, 187+, and 212+, for processes in which one of the laminae
    has the shape of a cylinder or sphere.


CLS 156/87
TXT Processes under subclass 60 combined with the step of providing at least
    one lamina with passageways or channels to discharge gases generated or
    entrapped at the interface to the atmosphere.


CLS 156/88
TXT Processes under subclass 60 including a step of selectively bonding strands
    or fibers at the edges only of a textile material to prevent unraveling or
    fraying of the strands or fibers.


CLS 156/89
TXT Processes under subclass 60 which includes the step of heating a ceramic
    material of which the lamina and/or coating is composed to a temperature
    sufficient to vitrify or fire the material.

    (1)     Note.  The firing may be of a decorative vitreous layer subsequent
    to its application to another lamina in a direct transfer operation to
    remove the backing sheet, usually by burning.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 33.1+ for processes including the
    devitrification of glass or the vitrification of crystalline glass;
    subclasses 36+ for methods of bonding glass to glass or glass to metal
    involving a glassworking step.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    particularly subclasses 30, 31+, 43, 125, and 603+.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 331+ for coating processes including
    post-treatment of a coating and note especially subclasses 376.1 for heat
    fusion of an inorganic coating.


CLS 156/90
TXT Processes under subclass 60 which includes the step of providing at least
    one lamina with a material to prevent exudation or flowing of an ingredient
    from one lamina into contact with another lamina.

    (1)     Note.  The material utilized as the barrier may be a coating,
    another lamina or an ingredient of one of the lamina.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    289,    for processes of utilizing a parting or release material to prevent
    adhesion of several laminae.

    323,    for processes of interposing subsequently removed flexible element
    between lamina and pressure surface.


CLS 156/91
TXT Processes under subclass 60 combined with the step of mechanically securing
    of the parts to be joined with a mechanical fastener which constitutes a
    permanent part of the final product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclass 14 for apparatus for
    applying an adhesive coating to workpieces to be assembled as well as a
    member, e.g., nail.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 135+ for the process of surface
    bonding at least two parts metallurgically, combined with supplemental
    mechanical fastening.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 223 for a plural
    layer web or sheet with an interlaminar fasteners.


CLS 156/92
TXT Processes under subclass 91 in which the step of mechanical securing of the
    parts is by causing elongated or thin elements to penetrate through the
    parts to maintain them in assembled relationship.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 432+.


CLS 156/93
TXT Processes under subclass 92 in which the penetrating of the parts to be
    assembled is by threads or other flexible strands.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 433 for processes of assembling parts by
    passing a narrow attenuated member through a series of parts and subclass
    241 for corresponding apparatus for stringing parts.

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 475.01+ for processes of assembling parts by
    stitching operations not combined with the step of laminating.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 102+ for a
    plural layer stock material product involving a combination of sewing and
    coating or bonding.


CLS 156/94
TXT Processes under subclass 60 which are (1) combined with the step of
    recovering material utilized in a previous laminating procedure and/or (2)
    directed to restoring or rebuilding a damaged or defective article or
    material by a laminating procedure.

    (1)     Note.  The recovered material may be a constituent used in a
    laminating procedure, e.g., lamina or constituent of an adhesive or a
    reject from a previous laminating operation.

    (2)     Note.  The repaired or reclaimed article may have the same or
    different utility than that processed by the article prior to its
    reclamation or repair.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 402.01+ for processes of repairing by
    operations provided for in this class (29).

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 28 for a glassworking or treating
    process which includes the step of reclaiming, renewing, repairing or crack
    run interruption of glass.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 36 for repairing or restoring articles for use and subclass 30 for
    furnace lining formation or repair.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 140+ for processes of restoring or
    repairing by a coating operation.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process, subclass 49 for battery with repair feature.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Class 523, subclass 166 for a composition containing a
    synthetic resin or natural rubbers having utility as a puncture sealant for
    a pneumatic tire or for use in emergency repair of vehicular tires or to
    processes of preparing said composition.


CLS 156/95
TXT Processes under subclass 94 in which the article reclaimed, repaired or
    renewed is of toroidal shape.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 110.1 of this class (156) for a definition of
    the scope of the expression "toroidal shape".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 15.2+, 15.3 and 15.4 for portable tools used in
    repairing resilient vehicle tires.


CLS 156/96
TXT Processes under subclass 95 which are directed to the step of cementing an
    entirely new tread of camelback upon the worn or damaged surface of a
    pneumatic tire.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    157,    Wheelwright Machines, subclass 13 for processes for treating the
    outer surface of a tire casing by cutting, lacerating and/or rasping to
    prepare the surface for retreading.

    451,    Abrading, for an abrading process performed on a tire casing or for
    an apparatus for performing an abrading process on a tire casing.


CLS 156/97
TXT Processes under subclass 95 directed to repairing a tire or tube which has
    been rendered useless by accidental formation of an opening in the tire or
    tube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    for the step of applying puncture sealing material to the casing of
    a pneumatic tire.


CLS 156/98
TXT Processes under subclass 94 combined with the step of removing a marred or
    imperfect portion of a material prior to repairing.


CLS 156/99
TXT Processes under subclass 60 which are directed to joining in face to face
    adhesive contact at least two laminae having a glass composition by
    adhesive interlayer in which the lamina and interlayer have the property of
    transmitting rays of light so that bodies can be seen therethrough.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses is residual to treatments, per
    se, of laminated glass sandwiches not provided for in this or other
    classes, e.g., edge sealing, per se, as provided for in subclass 107 of
    this class (156).

    (2)     Note.  The sandwich is optically transparent through the adhered
    areas as distinguished from air spaced lamina adhered at the edges only of
    subclass 109 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    344,    for processes of delaminating glass sandwiches not combined with a
    laminating procedure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 36+ for a process of, and
    subclasses 152+ for apparatus for bonding glass to a preformed part by a
    glassworking operation; see the "Search Notes" thereunder.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 38 for a light
    transmissive mass (which could comprise plural layers) having a frame or
    opaque border therearound (e.g., stained glass) and subclasses 426+ for a
    plural layer stock material product including a layer of glass.


CLS 156/100
TXT Processes under subclass 99 in which the glass lamina and/or interlayer
    have their surfaces provided with (1) at least two different colors, (2) a
    single color in a restricted area or (3) a single color varying in
    intensity or gradation.

    (1)     Note.  Utilization of at least two differently colored glass
    laminae is within the scope of this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclass 134 for processes of
    treating paper to provide it with a variegated color combined with a paper
    making procedure.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 258+ for coating processes including
    forming superposed diverse nonuniform coatings on a base and note
    especially subclasses 266 to 269 for utilizing a glass base.


CLS 156/101
TXT Processes under subclass 99 combined with the step of (1) cutting the glass
    lamina and/or interlayer; (2) applying stress and/or strain to a glass
    lamina and/or interlayer to cause its separation thereof into parts; or (3)
    separating a portion of the interlayer from between the glass lamina.

    (1)     Note.  The expression "cutting" in the definition of this subclass
    has the same meaning as defined in the class definition of Class 83.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247+,   for processes of stripping an adhered lamina.  The lamina for the
    purposes of subclasses 247+ may be a coating or a preform.

    250+,   for processes of cutting without regard to the composition of the
    lamina.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 56 for a process of bonding glass to
    a formed part by a glassworking operation combined with a step of cutting,
    perforating or breaking.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 13+ and 861 for processes of cutting not
    provided for elsewhere; see the search notes.


CLS 156/102
TXT Processes under subclass 99 combined with the step of mechanically changing
    the shape, dimension or surface characteristic of the glass lamina and/or
    interlayer.

    (1)     Note.  Stretching, embossing and roughening of the surface of the
    glass lamina and/or interlayer are operations within the scope of this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160+,   184+, 196+, and 229, for other deforming processes and the search
    notes appended thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 54+ for a process of bonding glass
    to a formed part by a glassworking operation including a step of reshaping
    a glass preform prior to assembly or subsequent to bonding.


CLS 156/103
TXT Processes under subclass 99 including the step of applying separate and
    distinct forces of different magnitude at separate times to a glass
    sandwich.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312,    for processes of applying sequential different pressures without
    regard to the composition of the lamina.


CLS 156/104
TXT Processes under subclass 99 including the step of removing air from between
    the contacting faces of the glass laminae.

    (1)     Note.  The air is removed usually by vacuum treatment and for the
    purpose of perfecting the bond between the glass lamina and interlayer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286,    for similar processes without regard to composition of the lamina.

    382,    for laminating apparatus including means for enclosing work in an
    evacuated chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 34 for a process of glassworking
    which includes the step of sealing off of a gas evacuating opening, and
    subclass 270 for glassworking apparatus including means for glass envelope
    tipping off with or without exhausting means.


CLS 156/105
TXT Processes under subclass 99 including the step of applying an external
    force to the exterior faces of a glass sandwich by applying a fluid thereto
    under pressure.

    (1)     Note.  The fluid may be liquid or gaseous, which, if the latter,
    must be greater than atmospheric.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    285,    for processes of applying fluid under pressure during a laminating
    operation.

    382,    for laminating apparatus including means to apply fluid pressure to
    the work.


CLS 156/106
TXT Processes under subclass 99 in which the adhesive interlayer used to bond
    the glass lamina is a self-supporting film prior to association with the
    lamina.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306+,   for processes of autogenous bonding and/or utilizing preformed
    bonding agent.


CLS 156/107
TXT Processes under subclass 99 which are directed to filling a groove around
    the edges and between a pair of glass laminae with a calking or sealing
    material.

    (1)     Note.  Calking or sealing operations, per se, are classified herein
    even though not combined with step of assembly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for processes of sealing electrical conductors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclass 86 for methods of filling or closing seams between
    planks.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 123 for composite product making by means supporting plural
    preforms in spaced relation in a molding cavity.


CLS 156/108
TXT Processes under subclass 60 in which a lamina having the property of
    transmitting rays of light is secured over an aperture in a separate lamina.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252,    for processes of laminating including the step of forming an
    opening in a lamina.


CLS 156/109
TXT Processes under subclass 60 which are directed to bonding at least two
    transparent members while maintained in spaced relationship to each other.

    (1)     Note.  The product produced by the processes herein is usually a
    window which has an evacuated space between the transparent members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    292,    for processes of bonding of laminae having opposed facing areas out
    of contact.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 58 for a process of bonding glass to
    a formed part by a glassworking operation in which the parts have opposed
    facing areas out of contact.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclass 121 for the process of bonding
    nonmetals (e.g., glass panes) with molten metal cement.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 34 for a product
    in the form of plural, air-spaced layers of transparent or translucent
    materials sealed at their edges.


CLS 156/110.1
TXT Making flexible or resilient toroidal shape; e.g., tire, inner tube, etc:

    Process under subclass 60 for the manufacture of resilient or flexible
    ring-like body which body is uniquely adapted to be resilient without
    distortion from its general toroidal shape.

    (1)     Note.  The majority of the art in this subclass relates to
    processes for making vehicle tires and innertubes, but the subclasses are
    not so limited.  The manufacture of other similar structures by adhesive
    bonding, e.g., an "O-ring" gasket, may be found here if toroidal in shape
    and resilient.

    (2)     Note.  As a corollary to the above, a process for adhering rubber
    or rubber-like materials, where achieving a toroidal shape plays no part in
    the process, is excluded from this and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for a tire-making process which involves testing, measuring or
    inspecting.

    95+,    for a process for repairing an object which has a toroidal shape.

    136,    for tire bead-ring making by a process of this class.

    307.1   for a method of adhering together rubber materials through
    vulcanization, where the method is not restricted to materials having a
    toroidal shape.

    394+,   for tire building apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, appropriate subclasses especially
    subclasses 54 and 63 for methods of stretching endless bands for use in
    tires when not claimed in combination with an assembly step.

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclasses 165+ for treatment, e.g.,
    shrinking, of a thread-interlaced article of fabric.

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 22 for a tire upsetting, cutting, punching,
    etc., process or apparatus; subclass 159.1 for a tire manufacturing process
    which does not include a step of adhesive bonding, molding, vulcanizing,
    etc and subclass 426.1 for a disassembly process.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 863+ for a method of preparing a
    sample of a tire component for a test.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    appropriate subclasses, for filling tires with a liquid which does not
    undergo a chemical reaction or a change in physical state.

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, appropriate subclasses for resilient
    tires and see especially the notes in the class definition of that class
    (152) for the locus of other art relating to tire structures and production.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, subclasses 709+ for a rubber
    composition.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    for making tires by molding when no adhesive bonding of self-sustaining
    laminae is involved.  See particularly subclasses 501+, for tire making by
    direct pressure application, subclass 45.1 composite article making
    employing a porous component and subclasses 267+ for composite article
    making against the inner surface of a hollow body.  Subclasses 315 and 326
    therein are pertinent to employing toroidal mold bags and producing
    toroidal bodies, respectively.


CLS 156/111
TXT Processes under subclass 110.1 in which the toroidal shape travels to
    discrete work stations and different operations are performed at each
    station.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 429+ for other assembly processes in
    which the work is moved progressively to separate assembly stations.


CLS 156/112
TXT Processes under subclass 110.1 in which the resiliency of the toroidal
    shape is produced either by the resiliency of the material used, or the
    material used has entrapped gas therein, which gas is at atmospheric
    pressure or less when the shape is not under load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404,    and see the notes thereto for apparatus for making solid tires.


CLS 156/113
TXT Processes under subclass 112 in which the resilient material has apertures
    or enclosed cavities therein to increase the cushioning effect of the
    toroid.

    (1)     Note.  The articles manufactured by these processes have no means
    for retaining fluids under compression.  A disclosure that the article is a
    pneumatic pressure container is sufficient to keep it from this subclass.


CLS 156/114
TXT Processes under subclass 110 including the incorporation of a solid
    material other than rubber at least a portion of the material lying on the
    external surface of the toroidal shape.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found, for example, the
    incorporation of anti-skid materials such as textile fibers, metal springs
    or particles, abrasive granular material, etc., to the tread surface of the
    tire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     for adhesively securing retreads in the repairing processes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclasses 167+ and 208+ for resilient
    tires provided with antiskid elements embedded therein.

    157,    Wheelwright Machines, subclass 13 for processes for treating the
    outer surface of a tire by cutting or rasping to produce a nonskid surface.

    451,    Abrading, for a process for treating the outer surface of a tire by
    an abrading operation.


CLS 156/115
TXT Processes under subclass 110.1 including the step of affixing a material
    capable of filling or closing apertures occurring during use of the
    torodial article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97,     for processes for repairing tire punctures by a laminating
    operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 15.5+ for portable puncture repair tools.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 5 for processes for filling tires or tubes with nongaseous fluent
    material such as puncture sealants.

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclasses 502+ for tires provided with
    puncture sealing structures.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 72 for compositions with leak-stopping
    agents.


CLS 156/116
TXT Processes under subclass 110.1 including a step of applying a material
    differing in color from the main toroid body to a portion only of the
    toroid, which portion is located on the exterior side walls thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90,     for the utilization of a barrier layer to prevent migration or
    bleeding of materials between layers.


CLS 156/117
TXT Processes under subclass 110.1 in which the toroid is formed by directly
    applying to the building form the material of the carcass while in the form
    of cords, strands or tapes.

    (1)     Note.  Conventionally the cord structure of tire bodies are applied
    to the drum in the form of webs.  In the instant patents the cords have not
    been  assembled or woven into webs before application, rather they are
    applied while still in the form of strands.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    397,    for apparatus for building tires from strands or narrow tapes.


CLS 156/118
TXT Processes under subclass 110.1 for making toroidal shapes which are
    structurally airtight and are uniquely adapted to hold fluids under
    pressure.

    (1)     Note.  The articles produced by this process must be, per se,
    airtight, as for example, a tube for a tire.  So called "tubeless" tires
    which require the wheel to be airtight are not considered to be subject
    matter for this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclasses 510+ for pneumatic tube
    structures.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 315 and 326 pertaining to
    employing toroidal mold bags and producing toroidal bodies, respectively.


CLS 156/119
TXT Processes under subclass 118 in which the airtight tube has more than one
    airtight compartment whereby loss of pressure in a single compartment would
    not affect pressure in the other compartments.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclasses 331.1+ for multiple chamber
    tube constructions.


CLS 156/120
TXT Processes under subclass 118 including a step of applying the fitting
    whereby the pressure fluid is introduced into the airtight tube.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclasses 429+ for valved tires or
    tubes.


CLS 156/121
TXT Processes under subclass 118 including a step of applying a layer of
    material to the outer peripheral surface of the formed tube, which material
    increases the stress resistance of the tube.


CLS 156/122
TXT Processes under subclass 118 which include a step of securing the tube ends
    to each other to form a closed torus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for processes for splicing indefinite length conductors.

    157,    for processes for splicing indefinite length laminae end-to-end.

    217,    for processes for bending a one piece blank and joining the edges
    to form an article.


CLS 156/123
TXT Processes under subclass 110.1 in which the toroidal shape is built up of
    at least two layers or strata of material, which layers are adhesively
    secured together.


CLS 156/124
TXT Processes under subclass 123 in which at least one of the layers or a
    component of one of the layers includes metal in the form of strands or
    filaments.


CLS 156/125
TXT Processes under subclass 123 including a step of forming the outer layer of
    the toroid by introducing the material of the layer into a closed mold
    while under pressure in a fluent state.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242+,   for other laminating processes including a step of lamina formation
    by molding or casting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    328.1- 328.19 particularly subclasses for injection type of molding
    processes.  Subclasses 241+ therein pertain to composite, finite article
    making and subclasses 315 and 326 pertaining to employing toroidal mold
    bags and producing toroidal products, respectively.


CLS 156/126
TXT Processes under subclass 123 including a step of telescoping performed
    ring-like layers of material onto a shaping form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    293,    for laminating processes including the step of inserting a lamina
    in a hole, aperture or recess and adhering it to the walls thereof.


CLS 156/127
TXT Processes under subclass 126 in which the outer band constitutes the tread
    portion of a tire and have the tread configuration before assembly.


CLS 156/128.1
TXT Applying tread material to fully-formed carcass:

    Processes under subclass 123 including a step of applying the tire tread
    layer of material onto the outer peripheral surface of the formed toroidal
    tire body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92,     for the application of adhesively-bonded tread material to a used
    tire.


CLS 156/128.6
TXT With specified treatment of tread material before application to carcass:

    Process under subclass 128.1 in which the material of which the tread is
    made is treated, as by coating, etc., before application of the tread
    material to the tire carcass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for telescoping a preformed tread band onto a tire carcass.


CLS 156/129
TXT Processes under subclass 128.1 in which the tread surface configuration has
    been shaped before application of the tread material to the tire carcass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for telescoping a preformed tread band onto a tire carcass.


CLS 156/130
TXT Processes under subclass 128.1 in which the tread material is applied by
    bending progressively around the formed carcass or in which a lamina having
    no stretch characteristics is applied to the carcass under the tread
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184+,   for laminating processes generally for winding a lamina about a
    core.


CLS 156/130.3
TXT With specified procedure for interlocking of laminae or removal of air from
    therebetween; e.g., "stitching", etc.:

    Process under subclass 128.1 wherein a specific procedure is claimed for
    achieving an irregular interface between laminae or for removing voids from
    between laminae.


CLS 156/130.5
TXT With specified procedure for cooling or heating; e.g., for vulcanization,
    etc.:

    Process under subclass 128.1 including a step of heating or cooling the
    workpiece in which the conditions for such treatment are specifically
    claimed.

    (1)     Note.  The conditions must include more than mere nominal
    "vulcanization".


CLS 156/130.7
TXT With specified procedure for bead, carcass or sidewall formation:

    Process under subclass 128.1 including a step of bead, carcass of sidewall
    formation in which one of more specific details of such procedure is
    claimed.

    (1)     Note.  The application of the tread in these patents usually is
    nominal; where tread application is more than nominal, the patent should be
    cross-referenced to subclass 128.1.

    (2)     Note.  Patents are not cross-referenced to this subclass on the
    basis of nominal recitation of tread application, but rather
    cross-referenced to those subclasses below which are directed more
    specifically to the details of manufacture recited in the patent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131+,   for bead-applying processes.

    133+,   for carcass and sidewall building     processes.


CLS 156/131
TXT Processes under subclass 123 including a step of applying wire reinforcing
    rings defining the inner peripheral edges of the tire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136,    for processes for making tire bead rings, per se.

    403,    for apparatus for positioning tire bead rings on the peripheral
    surface of the tire carcass.


CLS 156/132
TXT Processes under subclass 131 including a step of wrapping the substance of
    the tire carcass about the wire bead ring to secure it in position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400+,   for apparatus for folding the tire carcass fabric material about
    the bead reinforcements.


CLS 156/133
TXT Processes under subclass 123 including a step of bending the material of
    the tire body around and into the configuration of the forming surface on
    which it is shaped.


CLS 156/134
TXT Processes under subclass 133 including the formation of the butt end joint
    or splice or some manner of direct treatment peculiar to the spliced or
    butt end area.


CLS 156/135
TXT Processes under subclass 110.1 limited to or uniquely adapted to the
    treatment of that portion of the tire sidewall at or adjacent the ring
    reinforced inner periphery.


CLS 156/136
TXT Processes under subclass 60 for making ring-like articles, which articles
    are particularly adapted for use as reinforcement for the inner edges of
    pneumatic tire casings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131,    for tire building processes including a step of applying the bead
    ring.

    157+,   for splicing indefinite length lamina end to end.

    217+,   for bending a one piece blank and joining the edges to form an
    article.

    422,    for apparatus for winding wire lengths to form the tire bead
    reinforcement structures.

    460,    for apparatus for folding flexible fabrics about tire bead
    structures to cover same.


CLS 156/137
TXT Processes under subclass 60 directed to making of flexible endless power
    transmission belts.

    (1)     Note.  Processes of making endless conveyor belts are excluded from
    this and indented subclasses unless the patent discloses that the belt also
    has utility as a power transmission belt. Appropriate manipulative
    subclasses below should be searched for the manufacture of other endless
    belts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 525.1+, for processes of mechanically
    uniting ends of a continuous element to produce an endless member which may
    be utilized as a drive belt.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for a plural layer stock material product not elsewhere provided for.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 237+ for structure of a friction drive belt.


CLS 156/138
TXT Processes under subclass 137 which include the step of providing the
    surface of the endless belt, which contacts the means to be driven, with
    channels, recesses or corrugations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257     and 268, for laminating processes combined with the step of cutting
    a groove in a lamina or laminated article.

    510+,   for laminating apparatus combined with cutting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 13 for processes of cutting a groove in a
    material.


CLS 156/139
TXT Processes under subclass 137 which are directed to producing drive belts of
    V or trapezoid cross-section.


CLS 156/140
TXT Processes under subclass 139 combined with the step of shaping an uncured
    or unvulcanized material to a V or trapezoid configuration by causing the
    material to flow to the configuration of a forming surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196+,   for processes of reshaping of a self-sustaining lamina.

    242+,   for processes of forming a lamina by molding or casting from a
    molten material.


CLS 156/141
TXT Processes under subclass 140 combined with the step of covering of at least
    one lamina prior to altering the shape of the assembly to a V or trapezoid
    configuration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212+,   for processes of bending a sheet to conform to the shape of a
    configured lamina while in contact therewith.


CLS 156/142
TXT Processes under subclass 139 combined with the step of removing material by
    cutting of an assembly of laminae to a V or trapeziod shape.

    (1)     Note.  The patents in this subclass mostly involve transverse
    cutting of an endless body along the width thereof to form a plurality of
    V-belts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193,    for processes of cutting a wound body.


CLS 156/143
TXT Processes under subclass 60 directed to making of flexible hollow conduits
    or hose and reinforcing the conduit or hose with either by a helical wire
    or by plural rings.

    (1)     Note.  The helical wire may be applied as a preformed coil (144) or
    may be wound with or around the tube during winding thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169+,   for processes of winding a filamentary material to form a helical
    coil.

    184,    for processes of winding of a sheet or web to form a hollow tube.

    433+,   for laminating apparatus including means to form a helical wire.

    443+,   for means to wind a sheet or web to form a hollow tube.


CLS 156/144
TXT Processes under subclass 143 in which the helical coil or plural rings
    utilized as the reinforcing means is in the form of a coil or rings prior
    to assembly with the material forming the tube or conduit.


CLS 156/145
TXT Processes under subclass 60 combined with the step of enclosing a filling
    of the space in the interior of a hollow or porous lamina or the space
    between spaced adhered lamina with a gas, vapor or liquid which remains
    permanently associated with the lamina.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass include inflating a hollow lamina
    subsequent to its assembly with another lamina.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     for processes of gasification or a liquid in situ within a hollow
    body.

    156,    for processes of utilizing fluid pressure to prevent collapse of
    hollow structure during assembly and/or joining.

    285,    for processes of using fluid pressure in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 1 for process of gas or vapor dispensing.


CLS 156/146
TXT Processes under subclass 145 in which the filling step takes place prior to
    bonding.


CLS 156/147
TXT Processes under subclass 146 in which the filling operation is of an
    impervious hollow core.

    (1)     Note.  The filling may be, for example, inflation with air of a
    football bladder.


CLS 156/148
TXT Processes under subclass 60 combined with the step of weaving, knitting,
    braiding and/or needling.

    (1)     Note.  For the scope of the textile working operations provided for
    in this subclass, see the appropriate textile working classes, e.g.,
    weaving, see Class 139, Textiles:  Weaving, and for knitting, see Class 66,
    Textiles:  Knitting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     for processes of adhesively uniting at least two laminae combined
    with the step of additionally securing them together by a sewing operation.

    393,    for laminating apparatus combined with braiding or weaving means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles: Manufacturing, subclasses 107+ for processes of and
    apparatus for producing fabrics either by punching fibers through a base
    fabric or through a batt of fibers.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclass 362 for
    processes for twisting filamentary and/or fibrous material into yarns,
    threads, cords, etc.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, appropriate subclasses, for processes and
    apparatus for knitting textiles.

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, subclasses 8+ for
    processes of braiding of strands together.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, appropriate subclasses, for processes of
    weaving strands to produce textiles.

    140,    Wireworking, subclass 149 for processes of twisting wire.


CLS 156/149
TXT Processes under subclass 148 in which the textile working operation occurs
    about a conduit or tube having an open passageway therethrough.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, subclass 9 for
    processes of braiding to produce a tubular fabric.


CLS 156/150
TXT Processes under subclass 60 combined with the step of forming or depositing
    a coating material upon a base by electrolytic action, electrophoresis or
    electroosmosis, and/or cathode sputtering.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    536,    for laminating apparatus including means to apply a coating other
    than the laminating adhesive.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 471+ for
    electrophoretic or electro-osmotic coating or forming of an object and
    subclasses 192.12+ for glow discharge sputter deposition (e.g., cathode
    sputtering, etc.).

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 80+ for processes of coating by
    electrolytic action.


CLS 156/151
TXT Processes under subclass 150 directed to electrodepositing a coating on the
    face of a first lamina which contacts the face of second lamina prior to
    its contact with the second lamina.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    314+    for processes of applying a coating to an adherent face of one
    lamina by a coating operation not involving electrodeposition.


CLS 156/152
TXT Processes under subclass 60 which includes the step of separating one
    lamina from another lamina or from an assembly of laminae, and thereafter
    bonding the separated lamina to the same lamina from which it was
    previously separated.

    (1)     Note.  The laminae need not be initially bonded.  For example, in
    this subclass may be found patents in which associated laminae are
    separated, adhesive is applied and the laminae and reunited and bonded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247+,   for processes of stripping an adhered lamina combined with a
    laminating step.

    344,    for the step of delaminating, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 426.1 for processes which include the step
    of disassociating one or more parts.


CLS 156/153
TXT Processes under subclass 60 combined with the step of removing of an
    integral portion of a material by a grinding action.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 89.5 and 90.01+ for processes of
    wearing-in or burnishing metal.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 61 for process of glassworking and/or
    treating combined with the step of grinding; see the "Search Notes"
    thereunder.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 28+ for an abrading process which is not
    combined with a laminating operation.


CLS 156/154
TXT Processes under subclass 153 in which the abrading or grinding step takes
    place after combining the laminae.

    (1)     Note.  Abrading or grinding of a lamina while associated but not
    adhesively bonded thereto is classified herein.


CLS 156/155
TXT Processes under subclass 60 combined with the steps of provisionally
    associating a part with a separate solid part or material, performing a
    laminating operation, and subsequently destroying the separate solid part
    or material.

    (1)     Note.  The destruction may be accomplished by dissolving, melting
    or breaking the part into smaller constituents which can be easily removed,
    e.g., breaking a core into small grains.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153+,   for processes of destroying a transitory material by abrading or
    grinding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclass 114.6 for processes of swelling textiles
    which includes the step of destruction of a portion of the textile.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 423+ for processes which include
    destroying separate material which has been temporarily associated to
    another part.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 23 for a process of glassworking
    combined with a step of destroying or delaminating a transitorily attached
    or associated layer.


CLS 156/156
TXT Processes under subclass 60 combined with the step of filling the space of
    a hollow lamina or of the space between spaced lamina with a temporary
    gaseous or liquid material which exerts an opposing force during assembly
    and/or joining to prevent a change in the configuration or shape of one of
    the lamina or of the assembled laminae.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 54 for cores filled with fillers, such as
    sand, liquid, etc., which are put into the tubes to support the walls
    during the bending operation.


CLS 156/157
TXT Processes under subclass 60 directed to the step of associating the ends
    only of two laminae of indeterminate length to increase the overall length
    thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The splice may be either a butt or overlap joint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304.1+  for processes of bonding laminae end-to-end without overlap.


CLS 156/158
TXT Processes under subclass 157 which are directed to splicing of laminae
    having a cross-section the dimensions of which are generally the same.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for methods of splicing electrical conductors of indefinite length.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclass 362 for
    processes of splicing strands by a twisting or twining operation.

    140,    Wireworking, subclasses 111+ for processes of joining or uniting
    wires not involving an adhesive uniting operation.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 35.6+ for means to
    unite a reserve thread to the last end of a thread on a winding bobbin in a
    winding machine.

    289,    Knots and Knot Tying, subclass 1.5 for processes of intertwining
    portions of cords, ropes or strips without unlaying the strands for the
    purpose of fastening them together.


CLS 156/159
TXT Processes under subclass 157 combined with the step of cutting the ends of
    the laminae to be joined.

    (1)     Note.  The cutting in this subclass is usually to have the abutting
    ends of the laminae mirror images of each other or to prepare the ends for
    bonding.

    (2)     Note.  The scope of the term "cutting" is determined by the
    definition of Class 83.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250+,   particularly subclass 258 for processes of cutting to shape the
    joining edge surfaces only of at least one lamina prior to assembly in
    which at least one lamina is not of indefinite length.


CLS 156/160
TXT Processes under subclass 60 which includes the step of applying an external
    force within the elastic limit of the material to at least one lamina prior
    to bonding to cause a change of form or dimension of the lamina and
    maintaining the lamina under such application of force during the bonding
    operation.

    (1)     Note.  Merely holding a lamina taut during laminating operation is
    not considered an application of stress for this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Stretching of a fabric not to place the individual strands
    or filaments under stress but to cause the individual weft and waft strands
    or filaments to come closer to one another is not considered an application
    of stress for this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  The external force may be one of tension or compression of
    the lamina. One form of tension is stretching.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     for processes of shrinking of the material of a lamina.

    229,    for processes of stretching wherein the lamina is not under a
    stress or strain during the bonding operation.

    494+,   for laminating apparatus including means to apply tension or to
    stretch the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 446+ for processes of assembling parts to
    each other in which one of the parts is under stress during assembly.


CLS 156/161
TXT Processes under subclass 160 which are directed to application of the
    external force to slender thread-like laminae.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166+,   for processes of bonding flexible filamentary material while in
    indefinite length or running length.

    296,    for processes of bonding definite length elongated filaments.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, appropriate subclasses for processes involving
    prestressing of filamentary material.


CLS 156/162
TXT Processes under subclass 160 in which the application of external force to
    the lamina occurs during winding thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 184 of this class for a definition of the term
    "winding".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184+,   for processes of bonding laminae combined with the step of winding
    a sheet or web.


CLS 156/163
TXT Processes under subclass 160 in which the lamina to which the external
    force is applied is in the form of sheet or web and the stressed sheet or
    web is bonded to another sheet or web.

    (1)     Note.  A sheet or web is for the purposes of this class very thin
    in relation to its length and breadth; as a sheet of glass or paper.


CLS 156/164
TXT Processes under subclass 163 in which the web subjected to an external
    force is moving during such application.


CLS 156/165
TXT Processes under subclass 160 in which the lamina subjected to an external
    stress is a spherical or hollow tubular body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170,    186, 187+, and 212+, for bonding processes in which one of the
    laminae is of spherical or tubular shape.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 450+ for processes of uniting mating
    parts in which one of the parts is prestressed.


CLS 156/166
TXT Processes under subclass 60 directed to the step of (1) assembling at least
    one flexible thread-like lamina with a similarly or differently shaped
    lamina while the thread-like lamina is of indeterminate length during the
    assembly operation or (2) causing a single thread-like lamina to be bonded
    to itself.

    (1)     Note.  Flexible rods of indefinite length are considered
    filamentary material for the purposes of this and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161,    for processes of bonding filaments in stressed condition.

    296,    for processes of bonding filaments of finite length and are not
    considered staple fibers.

    433+,   for apparatus for laminating an indefinite or indefinite length
    flexible strand, rod, tube or filament.


CLS 156/167
TXT Processes under subclass 166 combined with the step of continuously
    generating the continuous filaments or threads.

    (1)     Note.  The filaments herein may be formed by an extruding
    operation, for example.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for processes of forming filaments from a molten plastic material
    combined with a cutting step to form staple fibers.

    500,    for laminating apparatus combined with casting, molding or
    extruding means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 165+ for processes within the class definition, for forming
    continuous or indefinite length articles from plastic materials.


CLS 156/168
TXT Processes under subclass 166 combined with the step of removing an
    adhesively secured filamentary material from another material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153+,   for processes of removing an adhesively secured lamina by the step
    of abrading or grinding.

    155,    for processes of removing an adhesively secured lamina from another
    lamina by destruction thereof.

    247+,   for processes of stripping nonfilamemtary material previously
    adhesively adhered to another lamina.

    344+,   for delaminating processes, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 426.1+ for processes of disassembly.


CLS 156/169
TXT Processes under subclass 166 combined with the step of bending the
    filamentary material in a substantially circular path with overlap more
    than enough to merely join the ends.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143,    for processes of making helical wire reinforced flexible tubes
    which includes the step of winding a filament to form the helical wire.

    161,    for processes of winding a filament in which the filament is under
    stress during the winding operation.

    184+,   for processes of winding a sheet or web.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 430+, 18+ and 47
    through 53 for a strand article or storage package winding machine.


CLS 156/170
TXT Processes under subclass 169 which involves the step of winding of a
    filament about a globular or spherical body or lamina.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 435+ and 436 for
    winding elongated material about a spherical core without specified
    adhesive bonding.


CLS 156/171
TXT Processes under subclass 169 including a step of winding a sheet or web
    about the wound filament or about the core on which the filament is wound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162,    for processes of prestressing a sheet or web during winding thereof.

    184+,   for processes of winding a web or sheet.


CLS 156/172
TXT Processes under subclass 169 directed to winding the filament about a core
    not fabricated by a winding operation and bonding the filament to the core.

    (1)     Note.  The core may be for the purposes of this subclass of any
    configuration, for example, a sheet or tube.


CLS 156/173
TXT Processes under subclass 169 directed to winding the filament about a core
    or mandrel to support the filament during the winding operation without
    adhesively bonding the filament to the core or mandrel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172,    for processes of winding a filament about a core to which the
    filament is ultimately adhesively secured.


CLS 156/174
TXT Processes under subclass 173 combined with the step of cutting of the wound
    assembly parallel to the longitudinal axis of the core or mandrel and
    opening the cut body.

    (1)     Note.  The patents in this subclass usually relate to the
    fabrication of weftless fabrics.


CLS 156/175
TXT Processes under subclass 173 directed to the making of a product
    constituted solely of filamentary material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174,    for similar processes of bonding filamentary material only combined
    with a cutting step.

    180+,   for processes of assembly of filaments only not combined with a
    winding operation.


CLS 156/176
TXT Processes under subclass 166 which are directed to bonding of at least one
    filamentary material to a web of indeterminate length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    436,    for laminating apparatus for bonding at least one strand or
    filament to an indefinite or running length web.


CLS 156/177
TXT Processes under subclass 176 directed to bonding at least one filamentary
    material to a web while at least a portion of the filamentary material is
    disposed crosswise of the length of the web to which it is secured.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    439,    for apparatus for laminating a strand crosswise of a web.


CLS 156/178
TXT Processes under subclass 176 directed to the step of bonding at least two
    filaments to a web of indefinite length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    297+,   for processes of bonding plural filaments of finite length to a
    sheet or web.


CLS 156/179
TXT Processes under subclass 176 directed to interposing at least two filaments
    between at least two webs of indeterminate length and in which the
    filaments are in contact with the plural webs.

    (1)     Note.  The patents in this subclass usually relate to making
    reinforced paper.


CLS 156/180
TXT Processes under subclass 166 in which only filaments of indefinite or
    running length are united to form an article.

    (1)     Note.  The products formed by the processes of this subclass may be
    strands, rods or cords.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    441,    for laminating apparatus including means to gather strands or
    filaments only into an indefinite length rod, strand or web.


CLS 156/181
TXT Processes under subclass 180 in which the article made is a sheet or web.


CLS 156/182
TXT Processes under subclass 60 in which two or more intermediate laminates are
    assembled into a final laminate, usually of four or more layers.

    (1)     Note.  The claims may include the step or steps of making an
    intermediate laminate by adhesive bonding, coating, etc.

    (2)     Note.  The step of assembling a sandwich to a nonlaminated product
    or single element is not considered assembly of subassemblies for this
    subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 469 for processes of joining subassemblies
    there provided for.


CLS 156/183
TXT Processes under subclass 60 combined with the step of imparting to at least
    one lamina a crinkle or wrinkle effect, known as crepe, by the step of
    crowding a web or sheet back on itself to induce it to wrinkle.

    (1)     Note.  The step of corrugating is not considered wrinkling within
    the scope of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196+,   for combined corrugating and laminating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclass 117 for chemical processes of crinkling
    cellulosic fibers.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 111+ and 280+ for
    processes and apparatus for creping or crinkling paper.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses and especially subclass 282 for processes of
    wrinkling or creping, per se, of paper or plastic materials.


CLS 156/184
TXT Processes under subclass 60 combined with the step of moving one part of a
    single web or sheet in a substantially circular path with respect to
    another part such that at least one and one half convolutions of the web or
    sheet is formed and the one part is superimposed on the other part.

    (1)     Note.  The wound part must overlap more than enough to merely form
    a good joint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162,    for processes of winding a lamina combined with prestressing of the
    lamina.

    171,    for processes of winding a sheet or web combined with the step of
    winding a filament.

    443+,   for laminating apparatus including winding means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, for a process or apparatus for
    winding elongated material onto a core.


CLS 156/185
TXT Processes under subclass 184 in which the step of winding is about a
    separate nonwound core to which it is adhesively united.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212+,   for processes of bending a sheet to assume shape of configured
    lamina.


CLS 156/186
TXT Processes under subclass 185 in which the core is of spherical
    configuration.


CLS 156/187
TXT Processes under subclass 185 in which the core is a hollow tubular element.


CLS 156/188
TXT Processes under subclass 187 in which at least two separate webs are wound
    about a nonwound core one after the other.

    (1)     Note.  Patents which define simultaneously feeding separate webs
    and which are assembled at the point of contact with the core are
    considered within the scope of this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Winding of an assembly of webs is not considered a winding
    of at least two separated webs for the purposes of this subclass.


CLS 156/189
TXT Processes under subclass 184 in which the winding of the web or sheet is
    about a core to support the web or sheet during the winding operation
    without bonding the web or sheet to the core and a transverse cross-section
    of the core at any section along the length thereof is either (a)
    noncircular in cross-section or (b) circular in cross-section and at least
    two circular sections thereof are of different diameter.

    (1)     Note.  Cores which are circular in cross-section and of the same
    diameter throughout are excluded from this subclass.


CLS 156/190
TXT Processes under subclass 184 directed to winding at least two separate webs
    or sheets about a removable core one after the other.


CLS 156/191
TXT Processes under subclass 184 having a step of associating parts by
    manipulations other than the winding operation.

    (1)     Note.  The step of laminating two sheets and then winding the
    laminated sheets to form a wound product is included within the scope of
    this subclass.


CLS 156/192
TXT Processes under subclass 191 in which the additional assembly step occurs
    before the step of assembly by winding.


CLS 156/193
TXT Processes under subclass 184 combined with the step of cutting of the
    article produced by a winding operation.

    (1)     Note.  Cutting of the wound body along a transverse cross-section
    perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the wound body to produce a
    plurality of identical articles, e.g., cut off, is excluded from this
    subclass unless a dimension or shape of the article is defined in the claim.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250+,   for processes of laminating combined with a cutting operation.


CLS 156/194
TXT Processes under subclass 184 combined with the step of changing the shape
    of the article produced by the winding operation to a shape of different
    configuration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196+,   for laminating processes combined with a shaping operation.


CLS 156/195
TXT Processes under subclass 184 which are directed to winding a sheet or web
    about a removable core or mandrel in such manner that the longitudinal
    edges of the sheet or web overlap or abut each other at the juncture of the
    successive convolutions to form a spiral tube-like article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    425+,   for laminating apparatus including spiral winding means.


CLS 156/196
TXT Processes under subclass 60 combined with a step of (1) distorting a
    workpiece by bending to alter its shape, (2) changing the gross over-all
    shape of a self-sustaining workpiece by a deforming operation or (3)
    altering the surface configuration only of a workpiece by raising bosses or
    protuberances thereon or causing surface portions to be depressed below the
    plane of the work surface.

    (1)     Note.  The reshaping to a different configuration of a
    self-supporting workpiece may be by stretch-forming or by a drawing
    operation.

    (2)     Note.  Stretching is not considered a reshaping operation for the
    purposes of this subclass, nor is cutting considered to be a deforming
    operation. See appropriate subclasses below for this art.

    (3)     Note.  For a definition of "bending" as used in the above
    definition see the term as defined in the glossary of the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229,    for laminating combined with stretching.

    242+,   for laminating combined with the step of forming a lamina by a
    molding or casting operation.

    250+,   for laminating combined with cutting.

    443+,   for laminating apparatus combined with reshaping means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 54+ for a process of bonding glass
    to a preformed part by a glassworking operation combined with the step of
    reshaping of the glass part prior to assembly or subsequent to bonding.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 141.1+ for a process of metallic
    bonding combined with mechanical shaping.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclass, for reshaping or deforming, per se, of paper or
    plastic materials.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 98+ for a
    plural layer stock material product with structure, and especially indented
    subclasses 121+ for such a product with a fold at the edge, subclasses 156+
    for such a product embodying a component of varying thickness, and
    subclasses 174+ for such a product embodying a component of nonplanar
    uniform thickness (e.g., corrugated, pleated).


CLS 156/197
TXT Processes under subclass 196 which are directed to the steps of bonding at
    spaced secured areas only and separating, expanding or opening at least one
    portion of a lamina at the nonbonded area from its contact with another
    portion of the same or different lamina.

    (1)     Note.  Most of the patents in this subclass relate to making of
    honeycomb structures.

    (2)     Note.  Patents which claim the step of opening or separating of the
    nonadherent areas of adhesively united laminae are included herein.


CLS 156/198
TXT Processes under subclass 196 in which the step of reshaping is by causing
    at least a portion of a hollow body to move inwardly from the periphery of
    the body and into contact with another portion.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found, for example, sealing the ends
    of a tube by a pinching operation.


CLS 156/199
TXT Processes under subclass 196 in which the lamina subjected to the step of
    bending, reshaping or embossing is a flexible web of indeterminate length
    and wherein the bending, reshaping or embossing occurs during intermittent
    or continuous movement of the web.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    459+,   for laminating apparatus combined with means to bend or fold an
    indefinite or running length flexible web.


CLS 156/200
TXT Processes under subclass 199 directed to the step of bending a web along or
    parallel to its longitudinal axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    461+,   for laminating apparatus combined with longitudinal bending means.


CLS 156/201
TXT Processes under subclass 200 in which the bending step occurs either before
    or while the web is being assembled with the part to which it is to be
    adhered.


CLS 156/202
TXT Processes under subclass 200 in which the web is turned over the edge of a
    separate workpiece with which it is assembled and distorted into facial
    contact therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216,    for processes of overedge bending of a sheet about another sheet.


CLS 156/203
TXT Processes under subclass 200 in which the longitudinal edges of web are
    bent into contact with each other to overlap or abut to form a hollow
    tubular body.


CLS 156/204
TXT Processes under subclass 199 which involves bending one portion of a web
    and superimposing the bent portion of the lamina on the other portion of
    the same lamina, the two portions being in face to face contact to the
    bendline.

    (1)     Note.  Pleating that is repeated back and forth folding is within
    the scope of this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  In folding a sharp line of bend is made and the portions are
    brought into facial contact as distinguished from corrugating in which the
    product undulates and the adjacent faces are spaced after bending.


CLS 156/205
TXT Processes under subclass 199 in which the bending involves forming a web
    with alternate ridges and grooves with a component transverse to the
    longitudinal axis of the web.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204,    for transverse folding.

    470,    for laminating apparatus including corrugating means.

    590+,   for corrugating apparatus, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 286 for processes of corrugating, per se.


CLS 156/206
TXT Processes under subclass 205 in which the step of corrugating takes place
    after the step of assembling at least two laminae.


CLS 156/207
TXT Processes under subclass 205 combined with the step of changing the shape
    of one of the corrugations of a corrugated lamina and/or cutting of a
    corrugated lamina.

    (1)     Note.  The restriction of the term "cutting" is the same as stated
    in (1) Note of subclass 193 of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250,    for laminating processes combined with a step of cutting.


CLS 156/208
TXT Processes under subclass 205 in which the corrugated lamina is of incipient
    adhesiveness or has a dry adhesive thereon and the lamina is physically or
    chemically treated other than by the application of an adhesive material to
    cause the surface of the lamina or dry adhesive coating thereon to become
    tacky or sticky.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305,    for processes of applying a solvent or chemical activating agent to
    an assembly of laminae.

    306.3   for processes of autogenous bonding.


CLS 156/209
TXT Processes under subclass 199 in which the reshaping operation involves only
    the surface of the lamina and only partially through the thickness and
    wherein the overall shape of the lamina throughout its breadth and width is
    unaltered.

    (1)     Note.  Embossing of a lamina is an example of a surface deformation
    operation within the scope of this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  See the part (3) of the definition of subclass 196 of this
    class for the scope of the term "surface deformation".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219,    for processes of surface deformation of a nonrunning length lamina.

    553,    for laminating apparatus including a discontinuous or patterned
    press.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclass 32 for processes of embossing or penetrating,
    per se.

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 358 for a process of embossing wood.


CLS 156/210
TXT Processes under subclass 196 in which the reshaping operation involves
    distorting a workpiece to form alternating ridges and grooves in wave like
    shape and bonding the workpiece to a generally planar lamina whereby the
    ridges only are in contact with the lamina.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    292,    for processes of laminating, per se, of laminae having opposed
    facing areas out of contact.


CLS 156/211
TXT Processes under subclass 196 combined with the step of slitting and/or
    removal of a portion of the material at the reshaping or bending areas only
    of a lamina.

    (1)     Note.  The purpose of the slitting and/or removal of material is to
    prevent formation of undulations, gathers or bulges at the bending or
    reshaping area.


CLS 156/212
TXT Processes under subclass 196 in which a lamina is forced to assume the
    configuration of a shaped lamina as it is brought into association
    therewith; the shaped lamina serving as the form against which the other
    lamina is distorted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229,    for stretching of a lamina, per se.


CLS 156/213
TXT Processes under subclass 212 involving completely enclosing the configured
    lamina by the lamina or laminae being reshaped.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes enclosing the configured lamina by
    utilization of more than one additional lamina, e.g., enclosing a sphere by
    two semi-spherical laminae formed in situ on the sphere.


CLS 156/214
TXT Processes under subclass 212 combined with the step of shaping a body to
    form configured lamina before association with the adhered lamina.


CLS 156/215
TXT Processes under subclass 212 in which the configured lamina is cylindrical.


CLS 156/216
TXT Processes under subclass 196 in which a portion of a lamina extending
    beyond the edge of a sandwich is folded over the edge and back against the
    opposite face of the sandwich.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202,    for processes for bending a running length lamina over the edge of
    a different part.


CLS 156/217
TXT Processes under subclass 196 in which the reshaping is of a part of a
    single lamina to juxtapose marginal portions thereof in either butt or
    lapped positions and the juxtaposed portions are secured one to the other.

    (1)     Note.  The one piece blank may be composite, i.e., formed of a
    plurality of laminae or of parts integrated as a unit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 144+ for the process of
    metallurgically bonding the margins of a one-piece blank.


CLS 156/218
TXT Processes under subclass 217 in which the article produced by the reshaping
    operation is a hollow cylinder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215,    for processes of wrapping a sheet about a cylindrical core to form
    a cylindrical cover thereon which is adhesively bonded to the core.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 48+ for a method or machine within the
    scope of the class which includes a step of or means for press-seaming the
    edges of a single metal blank to form a tube.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclass 118 for processes of
    making tubes combined with paper making.


CLS 156/219
TXT Processes under subclass 196 in which the surface configuration only of a
    workpiece is altered by raising bosses or protuberances thereon or causing
    surface portions to be depressed below the plane of the workpiece surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209,    for processes of deforming a web-surface and the search notes
    therein.


CLS 156/220
TXT Processes under subclass 219 in which the step of deforming the surface
    only occurs after the parts have been brought into assembled relationship.

    (1)     Note.  Embossing of an assembly of laminae in which the adhesive
    may not be completely cured are included herein.


CLS 156/221
TXT Processes under subclass 196 in which the bending or reshaping occurs after
    the parts have been brought into assembled relationship.

    (1)     Note.  The assembled laminae need not be adhesively bonded for the
    purposes of this and indented subclasses.


CLS 156/222
TXT Processes under subclass 221 in which the assembly is composed only of
    superimposed parallel sheets in face to face contact.


CLS 156/223
TXT Processes under subclass 222 directed to the bending of only one lamina of
    the assembly of laminae.

    (1)     Note.  Processes in which one lamina of an assembly is not
    subjected to a bending operation and a sandwich associated therewith is
    subjected to a bending operation is included herein.


CLS 156/224
TXT Processes under subclass 222 in which the product produced by the bending
    or reshaping operation on a plurality of stacked sheets has a concavity or
    hollow portion.

    (1)     Note.  Processes of making semi-cylindrical products are included
    herein.


CLS 156/226
TXT Processes under subclass 221 in which the assembly of laminae is subjected
    to the step of bending at least one portion of the assembly relative to the
    remaining portion of the assembly such that the first portion is
    superimposed upon and in facial contact with the other portion in which
    this type of bending constitutes the sole bending operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202,    for processes of longitudinally folding a running length web.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    270,    Sheet-Material Associating, appropriate subclasses for folding, per
    se.


CLS 156/227
TXT Processes under subclass 196 including a step of folding a lamina.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 226 of this class for a definition of the term
    "folding" and the search notes appended thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226,    for processes of bending an assembly of laminae and search (1) Note
    above.


CLS 156/228
TXT Processes under subclass 60 directed to bonding of configured lamina
    involving the application of recessed press platens in which the shape of
    the recesses conform to the shape of the configured laminae.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass, the shaped platens impart no shape to the
    sandwich, merely applying the laminating pressure.  The platens are
    configured for the purpose of evenly pressing the sandwich.


CLS 156/229
TXT Processes under subclass 60 combined with the step of applying sufficient
    tension to a lamina to increase its effective length or breadth or both.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 160 of this class, (2) Note, for a restriction
    on the scope of the term "stretching".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160,    for processes of stretching a lamina and uniting the lamina to
    another lamina while maintained in stretch condition and see (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclass 132 for processes of stretching artificial
    fibers combined with swelling or plasticizing.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses, for processes within the class definition for
    shaping or molding which may include a stretching step, particularly
    subclasses 197, 198, 210.1, 235.6, 288.4, and 291+.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 171+ for coating combined with a
    stretching or tensioning step.


CLS 156/230
TXT Processes under subclass 60 in which a lamina bonded to a carrier is,
    assembled with a base, caused to adhere to the base and then subsequently
    the adhesive bond between the lamina and carrier is destroyed to free the
    lamina and base from the carrier.

    (1)     Note.  The step of utilizing an apparatus which includes an
    adhesive coated surface for the purpose of removing an element from a stack
    of elements and transferring the element to an adhesive coated base (e.g.,
    picker) is not considered direct transfer for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8+,     for processes of transferring a resist combined with etching.

    89,     for processes of vitrification or firing of ceramic material which
    may have been applied to a base by a transfer mechanism.

    249,    for processes wherein an adhered lamina is stripped from a base and
    subsequently adhered to a different surface.

    540+,   for apparatus used to perform a direct transfer operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclass 467 for processes of transferring dyes and
    discharges and for dye containing transfers.

    101,    Printing, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 34,
    401.1, 463 for processes utilizing transfers for preparation of printing
    surfaces; subclass 464 for film to film imbibition; and subclasses 468+ for
    copying processes (e.g., hectographic).

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 146+ for processes of making a
    transfer or copy sheet by a coating operation.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 40.1+ for a
    composite stock material product having a layer of adhesive and a covering
    therefor which must be removed or stripped to expose the adhesive and
    enable it to be adhered to a surface; subclass 352 for a composite stock
    material having an adhesive outermost surface and also having a release or
    anti-stick coating (usually on the surface opposite the adhesive surface).


CLS 156/231
TXT Processes under subclass 230 directed to the steps of forming a lamina by
    casting or molding on an endless belt or calender roll carrier, contacting
    the lamina while on the carrier with a preformed base and thereafter
    removing the lamina from the carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238,    for direct transfer processes employing a running length flexible
    web carrier.

    242+,   for laminating processes combined with molding or casting a lamina.

    500+,   for laminating apparatus including means for casting or molding a
    lamina.


CLS 156/232
TXT Processes under subclass 230 wherein the carrier, on which the lamina is
    applied or formed, has a configured surface so that the applied or formed
    lamina will be shaped or molded into a desired configuration or pattern.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    245,    for lamina formation by casting or molding in a configured mold.


CLS 156/233
TXT Processes under subclass 230 wherein the transferred lamina is of thin
    metallic sheet or foil.

    (1)     Note.  The metallic sheet or foil may be of unitary composition or
    may be metal particles sprayed or deposited on a base and treated, if
    necessary, with a suitable binder to form a cohesive layer, prior to
    transfer thereof.

    (2)     Note.  Metal layers applied to the carrier by a coating process
    (e.g., electrodeposition) shall be considered to be "foils".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150+,   for laminating processes including the production of transfer
    laminae by electrodeposition.


CLS 156/234
TXT Processes under subclass 230 wherein only a portion of the lamina on the
    carrier is transferred to the base, the remainder staying adhered to the
    carrier.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes both the processes wherein the
    transferred portion is a top section of the lamina with a continuous
    thickness remaining on the carrier, or where continuous or discontinuous
    strips or parts of the lamina through the total thickness thereof are
    transferred.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254,    for splitting of sheet lamina in plane intermediate of its faces.

    261,    for processes of punching sections through a lamina and
    simultaneously applying laminating pressure to the cutout sections with the
    same punching device.


CLS 156/235
TXT Processes under subclass 230 which include more than one direct contact
    transfer operation and/or a laminating step other than direct contact
    transfer.

    (1)     Note.  The additional lamination herein may be to the transferred
    lamina or laminae, or the base plus transferred lamina may be bonded to
    still another surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239+,   for simultaneous transfer of plural superimposed laminae by a
    single direct transfer operation.


CLS 156/236
TXT Processes under subclass 230 wherein the transfer is aided by solvent
    action to facilitate release of the lamina from the carrier, said solvent
    being a fluid other than water, per se.

    (1)     Note.  An aqueous composition containing a nonwater component is
    within the scope of this subclass.


CLS 156/237
TXT Processes under subclass 230 wherein the transferred lamina receives a
    coating subsequent to transfer thereof from carrier to base.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280,    for coating of a nonadherent surface of a lamina subsequent to
    lamination thereof.


CLS 156/238
TXT Processes under subclass 230 in which the carrier employed is a running or
    continuous length flexible web.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231,    for processes wherein the lamina is cast or molded on an endless
    belt or calender roll.


CLS 156/239
TXT Processes under subclass 230 wherein a plurality of superimposed laminae on
    the carrier are simultaneously transferred.

    (1)     Note.  Transfer of a plurality of coatings of the same composition
    is considered the same as transfer of a single coating; however, if the
    ingredients of each coating are identical but differ in proportion, the
    coatings are considered different coatings for the purposes of this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235,    for processes involving plural sequential transferring operations
    and/or with additional lamination.


CLS 156/240
TXT Processes under subclass 239 wherein the transferred laminae are in the
    form of printing or a design.

    (1)     Note.  See the search notes to this class, subclass 230 for
    processes involving transfer of resist patterns, ceramic designs, dyes and
    discharges, and/or printing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277,    for printing processes combined with a laminating step.


CLS 156/241
TXT Processes under subclass 230 wherein the lamina is transferred from the
    carrier to a base which has been previously coated with an adhesive agent.


CLS 156/242
TXT Processes under subclass 60 combined with the step of forming a lamina by a
    molding or casting operation.

    (1)     Note.  The step of simultaneously molding and uniting combined with
    a laminating step is included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231,    for molding or casting of a lamina on a carrier prior to direct
    transfer thereof.

    500+,   for apparatus including means for casting a lamina.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 45+ for a process of bonding of
    glass to a formed part by a glassworking operation combined with a step of
    forming a glass part from molten glass.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses, for processes for molding or shaping plastic
    materials within the class definition, particularly those subclasses
    pertaining to composite article formation, e.g., as by extruding a plastic
    material around a preform, see subclasses 45.1+,  112+,171.1+, 241+ and
    642+.  Class 264 further provides for uniting spaced parts by flowing a
    fluent material therebetween, even though for a processthe function of said
    material is disclosed to be merely to bond, just so long as the parts to be
    united are placed in final spaced relationship before said material is
    introduced, see particularly subclasses 261+.  For a more comprehensive
    line between Class 156 and Class 264 see the class definition of Class 264.


CLS 156/243
TXT Processes under subclass 242 directed to casting or molding plural
    continuous webs which webs are either bonded to each other or to different
    laminae or surfaces.


CLS 156/244.11
TXT By extrusion:

    Processes under subclass 242 in which the lamina formation is by extrusion
    or die expressing.


CLS 156/244.12
TXT Encapsulating or enclosing a lamina:

    Processes under subclass 244.11 wherein the lamina is completely covered or
    enclosed by another lamina, or wherein an elongated or indefinite length
    article excluding the extreme ends is enclosed.


CLS 156/244.13
TXT Hollow article or lamina:

    Processes under subclass 244.11 wherein a lamina or the article produced is
    hollow.


CLS 156/244.14
TXT Differential fluid pressure used:

    Processes under subclass 244.13 wherein a positive or negative pressure is
    applied through the medium of a liquid or gas.


CLS 156/244.15
TXT Specific nonuniform lamina or article; e.g., netting or rib and groove,
    etc.:

    Processes under subclass 244.13 wherein an article other than a continuous
    uniform thickness tube or the like is produced, or wherein a lamina is
    nonuniform.

    (1)     Note.  Netting and articles with rib and groove elements are
    included in this subclass.


CLS 156/244.16
TXT With printing:

    Process under subclass 244.11 with a printing step.

    (1)     Note.  The printing in this subclass includes the printing of an
    adhesive.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, appropriate subclasses for printing processes, per se.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclass 134 for processes of
    making paper combined with a printing step.


CLS 156/244.17
TXT Electrical, magnetic, or wave energy used:

    Processes under subclass 244.11 which include the step of (1) passing an
    electric current directly through the article or a lamina, (2) subjecting
    the article or a lamina to an electric or magnetic field, or (3) directly
    applying radiant energy to the article or a laminae.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes use of energy as a pretreatment or
    post-treatment as well as during bonding of one or more laminae.

    (2)     Note.  The wave energy applied to the work may be light, emanations
    of radioactive material, infrared rays, ion bombardment, etc.


CLS 156/244.18
TXT With cutting, severing, or perforating:

    Processes under subclass 244.11 combined with a step or (1) penetrating the
    article or a lamina to achieve at least partial separation of a portion of
    the material of the workpiece, or (2) moving one part of the article or a
    lamina relative to the other to cause separation of the parts.

    (1)     Note.  The cutting, severing, or perforating may be prior to,
    during, or after the bonding step and of any lamina.


CLS 156/244.19
TXT After bonding; e.g., as finishing step, etc.:

    Processes under subclass 244.18 wherein the cutting, severing, or
    perforating step is performed after bonding.


CLS 156/244.21
TXT Differential fluid pressure used:

    Processes under subclass 244.11 including the application of positive or
    negative pressure to the work through the medium of a liquid or gas.

    (1)     Note.  Use of steam pressure solely as a source of heat is not
    included in this subclass.


CLS 156/244.22
TXT Bonding spaced preforms:

    Processes under subclass 244.11 where laminae in spaced relationship
    (plural laminae or bonding a lamina to itself) are bonded by means of
    another element which is self-sustaining, e.g., a bead of adhesive, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are methods using a pair of spaced rollers
    through which two laminae are fed with an intermediate preform therebetween
    to effect bonding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 261+ for introducing fluent bonding material between spaced
    preforms.


CLS 156/244.23
TXT Pretreatment:

    Processes under subclass 244.11 including a treatment to prepare or adapt a
    lamina for the bonding step wherein mere heating is not sufficient.

    (1)     Note.  Mere broad recitation of heating of a lamina to render
    adhesive is not sufficient; however, detailed heating steps for such, e.g.,
    reciting conditions, degree of heating or treating segments only, etc., is
    included.


CLS 156/244.24
TXT Post-treatment:

    Processes under subclass 244.11 which includes a step of after treatment of
    the bonded article.

    (1)     Note.  Final curing of an assembled lamina to perfect or complete
    bonding is considered a part of the bonding step and not an after treatment
    for this subclass.


CLS 156/244.25
TXT Article or at least one lamina of nonuniform thickness or discontinuous:

    Processes under subclass 244.11 wherein the method includes bonding of a
    nonuniform or discontinuous lamina, or where a nonuniform article is
    produced, e.g., curved edges.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is intended to include a lamina or an article
    having a discontinuous layer, i.e., apertured or a layer formed of separate
    pieces of material, e.g., a ribbed article.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes uniform lamina but wherein the
    bonding is nonuniform, i.e., discontinuous or spot bonding.


CLS 156/244.26
TXT Bonding in specified environment (other than temperature):

    Processes under subclass 244.11 including employment of conditions other
    than ambient in the bonding step, e.g., pressure, etc., use of particular
    medium, e.g., steam or reactive vapor during the bonding, etc.


CLS 156/244.27
TXT Pressure assisted bonding:

    Processes under subclass 244.11 including positive recital of use of
    mechanical pressure to assist in the bonding step, e.g., use of platens or
    a pair of pressure rolls, etc.


CLS 156/245
TXT Processes under subclass 242 in which the lamina formation is performed in
    a configured mold to impart a desired shape or particular conformation to
    the lamina.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225,    for reshaping of at least one lamina in a closed configured mold by
    plastic flow subsequent to assembly of said lamina with at least one other
    lamina or to one other surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 47+ for a process of bonding glass
    by glassworking operation including a step of forming the glass in a mold
    cavity.


CLS 156/246
TXT Processes under subclass 242 directed to casting a film on a temporary
    flat, plane surface and thereafter stripping the film from the surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230+,   for processes wherein a lamina is formed by casting on carrier for
    direct transfer of said lamina to a different base or surface.

    249,    for stripping of an adhered lamina from one surface and applying it
    to a different surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 165, 212, 298, and 299+.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 154+ for applying a removable
    protective coating to a substrate.


CLS 156/247
TXT Processes under subclass 60 wherein a laminating procedure is combined with
    the step of removing at least one previously adhered lamina by a stripping
    or delaminating operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254,    for processes for splitting a sheet lamina in a plane intermediate
    of its faces.

    344,    for delaminating processes, per se.

    584,    for delaminating apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 154+ for processes of applying a
    removable protective coating.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 40.1+ for a
    composite stock material product having a layer of adhesive and a covering
    therefor which must be removed or stripped to expose the adhesive and
    enable it to be adhered to a surface; subclass 352 for a composite stock
    material having an adhesive outermost surface and also having a release or
    anti-stick coating (usually on the surface opposite the adhesive surface).


CLS 156/248
TXT Processes under subclass 247 combined with the step of cutting only one of
    the laminae while still adhered and prior to stripping thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    268,    for partial cutting, incising or grooving of a laminated sandwich.


CLS 156/249
TXT Processes under subclass 247 including the step of uniting the stripped
    lamina to a different element or surface other than the lamina from which
    the lamina has been stripped.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    for processes in which the stripped lamina is reunited to the same
    lamina from which it was previously separated.


CLS 156/250
TXT Processes under subclass 60 combined with a step of (1) penetrating the
    workpiece to achieve at least partial separation of a portion of the
    material of the workpiece without substantial reshaping flow of the
    material or (2) moving one part of a workpiece relative to the other to
    cause failure by tension at the point of separation.

    (1)     Note.  A disclosure that the work material flows due to melting
    will not preclude placement of the patent here where the flow merely
    accomplishes reshaping only necessary for penetration.  For example,
    cut-seaming a thermoplastic material with a hot knife is here even though
    the material may form a bead at the seam.

    (2)     Note.  The cutting need not be entirely through the thickness of
    the work, but may be only partially through the thickness e.g., grooving
    and scoring.

    (3)     Note.  Cutting of a lamina along a transverse cross-section
    perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the lamina to produce a plurality
    of identical articles e.g., cut-off, is excluded from this and indented
    subclass unless a dimension or shape of the lamina is specified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98,     for reclaiming, renewing or repairing of articles for reuse with
    removal of defective area to be repaired.

    101,    for processes of making optically transparent glass sandwiches with
    cutting of interlayer or lamina.

    142,    for processes of forming an endless drive belt and cutting the belt
    to V or trapezoid shape.

    159,    for processes of splicing indefinite length lamina end-to-end with
    cutting of joining ends.

    193,    for processes of winding a web or sheet with cutting or wound body.

    211,    for processes of laminating with permanent bending or reshaping
    which include slitting or removal of material at reshaping area prior to
    reshaping.

    510+,   for apparatus for surface bonding and/or assembly combined with
    means for cutting, punching, piercing or severing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses for processes of and apparatus for
    cutting and see especially the notes to the class definition of that class
    for the locus of other art relating to cutting and combinations of cutting
    with other operations.

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, appropriate subclasses for
    processes of severing by tearing or breaking.

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), appropriate subclasses for
    processes and apparatus for selective punching.


CLS 156/251
TXT Processes under subclass 250 in which the laminae are bonded to each other
    during the cutting operation.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass, for example, are processes which
    involve the utilization of a heated cutting implement which, during the
    cutting operation, makes thermoplastic laminae tacky, thereby causing the
    portions of the lamina on each side of the cutting tool to become
    adhesively united.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for fray prevention processes which may involve trimming and/or
    sealing of laminate edges.

    515,    for cutting apparatus which simultaneously unites the laminae.


CLS 156/252
TXT Processes under subclass 250 in which the cutting operation forms a closed
    perimeter opening extending completely through a lamina.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    513+,   for laminating apparatus having means for making a hole or aperture
    in a lamina.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 22 for tire punching.

    83,     Cutting, subclass 30 for processes of puncturing.

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), appropriate subclasses for
    selective cutting or punching, per se.


CLS 156/253
TXT Processes under subclass 252 in which the laminae are assembled prior to
    the perforating operation.


CLS 156/254
TXT Processes under subclass 250 in which a sheet-like lamina is separated
    along a plane paralleling and between the two faces of the lamina and thus
    results in at least two laminae.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 40.1+ for a
    composite stock material product having a layer of adhesive and a covering
    therefor which must be removed or stripped to expose the adhesive and
    enable it to be adhered to a surface; subclass 352 for a composite stock
    material having an adhesive outermost surface and also having a release or
    anti-stick coating (usually on the surface opposite the adhesive surface).


CLS 156/255
TXT Processes under subclass 250 in which a workpiece and cutter are rotated
    relative to one another and during rotation the workpiece is cut to produce
    therefrom a planar lamina, the line of cutting starting at the periphery of
    working and inwardly of the body toward the axis of revolution.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 207 for peeling of bark from osiers (to be
    used in making wicker furniture) and subclasses 208.1+ for peeling of bark,
    generally.


CLS 156/256
TXT Processes under subclass 250 in which the cutting, punching, tearing or
    severing is performed prior to the association of the laminae.


CLS 156/257
TXT Processes under subclass 256 in which a lamina is cut (1) only partially
    through a workpiece thickness or (2) partially along the width whereby the
    workpiece is not separated into plural discrete workpieces.

    (1)     Note.  Processes directed to scoring of a lamina to be joined with
    another lamina is within the scope of this subclass.

    (2)     Note. The partial cutting can be through an edge surface as well as
    through a facing surface of a sheet-like lamina.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    268,    for processes where the laminae are associated and then there is a
    partial cutting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 861 for processes and apparatus for cutting other
    than completely through the work.


CLS 156/258
TXT Processes under subclass 256 in which the cutting occurs only on edge
    surfaces to be bonded one to the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159,    for splicing methods in which the joining edges of indefinite
    length laminae have been cut or beveled.

    535,    for means for laminating combined with means of shaping, scarifying
    or cleaning joining surfaces.


CLS 156/259
TXT Processes under subclass 256 directed to uninterruptedly slitting a
    web-like lamina in a line parallel to its longitudinal axis.


CLS 156/260
TXT Processes under subclass 259 in which the slitting operation produces a
    plurality of laminae which are thereafter superposed so that a broad
    surface of one lamina is bonded to a broad surface of the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264+,   for processes of cutting plural laminae from single stock and
    assembling to each other not involving a continuous longitudinal cutting
    step.


CLS 156/261
TXT Processes under subclass 256 directed to cutting of a discrete product out
    of the confines of a workpiece through its thickness so that the cut does
    not intersect any edge of the workpiece and using the cutting implement to
    exert pressure upon the product in order to bring the product into
    association with another lamina.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses for processes and apparatus for
    punching.


CLS 156/262
TXT Processes under subclass 261 in which the product cut out is applied to the
    internal surface of a closure cap.

    (1)     Note.  Processes of applying a liner to bottle caps by punching the
    liner from a workpiece and applying the liner by means of the punch are
    included in this subclass.


CLS 156/263
TXT Processes under subclass 256 directed to independently cutting at least two
    sheets or webs while not in contact with each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    511,    for surface bonding apparatus combined with plural severing means
    for separate workpieces.


CLS 156/264
TXT Processes under subclass 256 in which stock material is cut into more than
    one lamina and the resultant laminae are (1) laminated to each other; or
    (2) more than one of the laminae are bonded to a separate and independent
    lamina.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    260,    for processes including a step of continuous longitudinal slitting
    followed by face to face laminating of the parts cut from the single sheet.

    512,    for apparatus under the class definition combined with severing
    followed by association of parts from the same source.


CLS 156/265
TXT Processes under subclass 264 in which the plural laminae are each applied
    to a single face of an additional lamina.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    297+,   for processes of laminating plural discrete laminae to a single
    face of an additional lamina.


CLS 156/266
TXT Processes under subclass 264 in which the extremity of one of the plural
    laminae is associated with the extremity of another of the plural laminae
    cut from the stock material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for processes of splicing indefinite length conductors.

    157+,   for processes of splicing indefinite length lamina end-to-end.


CLS 156/267
TXT Processes under subclass 250 in which the step of cutting or severing is
    performed subsequent to lamination and is for the removal of superfluous
    portions of the sandwich or removal of that superfluous portion of the
    sandwich which extends beyond the sandwich joint.


CLS 156/268
TXT Processes under subclass 250 combined with the step of (1) partially
    cutting, incising or grooving through a portion of the thickness of one
    lamina of a sandwich or (2) cutting through the entire thickness of only
    one of the laminae of a sandwich, the cutting occurring within the adhered
    area of the sandwich.

    (1)     Note.  Processes directed to scoring, grooving or incising of the
    laminated material are found in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257,    for the partial cutting of laminae prior to association.

    270,    for processes of cutting one web only in which the cutting is
    subsequent to lamination and the cutting occurs other than within the
    confines of both laminae.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 861+ for processes and means of cutting other
    than completely through the work.


CLS 156/269
TXT Processes under subclass 250 in which the severing operation is performed
    on a workpiece of indefinite length or continuously moving during the
    cutting operation.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition, Section III, for the definition of
    "INDEFINITE LENGTH WORK".


CLS 156/270
TXT Processes under subclass 269 in which only a single web is cut.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    268,    for processes of cutting one lamina only in which the cutting
    occurs within the surface area of both laminae.


CLS 156/271
TXT Processes under subclass 269 in which the laminated material is
    uninterruptedly cut in a line parallel to its major axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259,    for processes of longitudinally cutting a lamina prior to its
    lamination to another lamina.


CLS 156/272.2
TXT With direct application of electrical, magnetic, or radiant energy to work:

    Processes under subclass 60 which include the step of (a) passing an
    electric current directly through the work, (b) subjecting the work to a
    changing electric field, or (c) directly applying magnetic or radiant
    energy to the work.

    (1)     Note.  Work is the object or material which results from, or is
    intended to be subjected to, an adhesive bonding.

    (2)     Note.  The electrical energy or wave energy must act directly on
    the work and not, for example, by connection or conduction of heat from an
    element not constituting part of the work.

    (3)     Note.  The wave energy applied to the work may be light,
    ultraviolet rays, infrared rays, X-rays, cathode rays and emanations of
    radioactive material by particle emission, electron bombardment,
    electromagnetic fields, and like sources.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    379.6,  for adhesive-bonding apparatus having means applying electrical,
    electrostatic, or wave energy to work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, appropriate subclasses for processes of metal
    working or shaping comprising a plurality of operations which include an
    adhesive-bonding step along with a metal-shaping step.  Note especially
    subclass 900 for a process or apparatus for assembling articles or
    materials by means of an enduring electrostatic charging of the work; and
    subclasses 592.1+ for methods of making electrical devices which may
    include an electrostatic charging of laminate.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 715+ for coating apparatus with means
    to apply electrical energy to work and/or coating material and means to
    contact the work with coating material in a gaseous or vaporous state; and
    subclasses 620+ for coating apparatus in general provided with means to
    apply electrical energy to work and/or coating material.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 50 and 192 for
    processes of utilizing electrical energy in a paper-making operation.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 155+, 157.15,
    and 164 for electrical or wave energy treatment of surfaces to effect a
    chemical change in the surface.

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclasses for electric heating, per
    se.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 324+, for methods and apparatus for the
    corona irradiation of material; subclasses 453.11+ for methods and
    apparatus including supports for irradiating objects; and subclasses 492.1+
    for methods and apparatus for the irradiation of objects generally.

    427,    Coating Processes, search subclasses 457+ for coating processes
    utilizing the direct application of electrical, magnetic, wave, or
    particulate energy.


CLS 156/272.4
TXT Involving magnetically susceptible lamina or incorporating into the work a
    particulate susceptor material having magnetic properties:

    Processes under subclass 272.2 wherein at least one of the laminae to be
    bonded contains, or is coated with, a particulate susceptible material
    having magnetic properties, or wherein at least one of the lamina to be
    bonded is capable of being heated by a magnetic field.


CLS 156/272.6
TXT Exposure of work to corona or glow discharge:

    Processes under subclass 272.2 wherein means are provided for impacting the
    work (either before or after assembly) with ions resulting from the
    incomplete electrical discharge from an electrode.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes those processes of using corona or
    glow discharge to form a permanent bond in the work without the further use
    of other electrical, magnetic, or radiant energy and those processes of
    using corona or glow discharge to form an incomplete bond in the work
    before the further application of electrical, magnetic, or radiant energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273.1,  for processes of forming a bond by an electrostatic charge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 324+ for methods and apparatus for the
    corona irradiation of material.


CLS 156/272.8
TXT Exposure of work to laser:

    Processes under subclass 272.2 wherein said energy is applied in the form
    of natural oscillations of atoms or molecules between energy levels for
    generating coherent electromagnetic radiation in the ultraviolet, visible,
    or infrared regions of the spectrum.


CLS 156/273.1
TXT Developing electrostatic charge:

    Processes under 272.2 wherein at least one lamina is electrostatically
    charged in order to enhance the formation of a permanent bond in the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 900 for processes or means for assembling
    by charging of work.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 600+ for inductive heating, subclasses
    678+ for microwave heating, and subclasses 764+ for capacitive dielectric
    heating.

    361,    Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 225+ for a
    process of imparting an electrical charge to a material or object.


CLS 156/273.3
TXT Before final assembly; e.g., to cure lamina, etc:

    Processes under subclass 272.2 wherein electrical, magnetic, or radiant
    energy is applied to lamina prior to assembly of final work product.


CLS 156/273.5
TXT Before and after final assembly:

    Processes under subclass 273.3 wherein electrical, magnetic or radiant
    energy is applied in two different steps, one of which is prior to and the
    other after final assembly of work product.


CLS 156/273.7
TXT Applying pressure before electrical, magnetic, or radiant energy:

    Processes under subclass 272.2 wherein pressure is applied to work (either
    prior to or before final assembly of the work product) before the work is
    treated with electrical, magnetic, or radiant energy.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes those processes wherein pressure is
    applied to the work to assemble the final product, provided such pressure
    is precedent to the application of electrical, magnetic, or radiant energy.


CLS 156/273.9
TXT Work constitutes conductor or electrical circuit:

    Processes under subclass 272.2 wherein at least a portion of the work after
    final assembly is a conductor which is to be used as a component of an
    electric circuit to which an electric current is to be directly applied.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes subjecting metal work to an electric
    field which causes a current to be developed within the work, thereby
    resulting in heating of the metal work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47+,    for processes of making running or indefinite length electrical
    conductors.

    272.2   and 275.1 - 275.7, and other appropriate subclasses for a process
    of adhesive bonding which includes subjecting metal work to a radiant or
    magnetic field.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 592+ for processes of manufacturing
    devices from metal which produce or use electrical energy.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 653+ and 775+ for an article or
    material support conveyor used in a process wherein the work or electric
    field or both move relative to each other in an electric field.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 500+ for conductive and emission
    compositions and electrical devices defined solely in terms of their
    composition with no claimed significant composition with no claimed
    significant device structure. These devices include electrodes, filaments,
    or shields for electric lamps and electric space discharge devices, welding
    electrodes, contacts, switches, brushes, and resistances.


CLS 156/274.2
TXT Conductor is a coil:

    Processes under 273.9 wherein a coil conductor is incorporated into the
    work.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for electric resistance wires coiled
    around lamina before the application of said energy, said wire constituting
    part of the work.


CLS 156/274.4
TXT Exposure of work to electrode:

    Processes under subclass 272.2 wherein an electrode is used to impart
    energy to the work product after final assembly.

    (1)     Note.  An electrode is a device by which an electric current passes
    into or out of a cell, apparatus, or body, and includes a simple wire.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 500+ for electrodes defined solely in
    terms of their composition with no claimed significant device structure.


CLS 156/274.6
TXT Continuously moving work in relation to electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 274.4 in which the work moves relative to the
    electric field produced by the electrode.


CLS 156/274.8
TXT With application of adhesive:

    Subject matter under subclass 274.4 wherein an adhesive is applied to at
    least one lamina before the work is exposed to the electric field produced
    by the electrode.


CLS 156/275.1
TXT Only part of contacting lamina surfaces bonded; e.g., seaming, etc.:

    Processes under subclass 272.2 wherein bonding of contacting lamina
    surfaces occurs only at selected contacting areas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    292,    for processes for bonding two contacting laminae which have opposed
    portions out of contact or spaced from each other and which does not use
    electrical, magnetic, or radiant energy.

    308.4,  for bonding two contacting laminae without the use of an extraneous
    adhesive material at selected contacting areas without the use of
    electrical, magnetic, or radiant energy.


CLS 156/275.3
TXT With application of adhesive:

    Processes under 275.1 wherein an adhesive is applied to at least one lamina.


CLS 156/275.5
TXT To polymerize or cure material in work:

    Processes under subclass 272.2 wherein said energy is used in a bonding to
    induce a chemical reaction in which molecules are united to produce
    material of higher molecular weight than the starting material.


CLS 156/275.7
TXT With application of adhesive:

    Process under subclass 272.2 wherein an adhesive is applied to a lamina.


CLS 156/276
TXT Processes under subclass 60 in which the particulate material is applied to
    that surface of a lamina which will be bonded to a different lamina.


CLS 156/277
TXT Processes under subclass 60 combined with the step of applying a coating to
    a lamina, which coating is in the nature of a design or character and is
    applied by a member carrying the configured coating.

    (1)     Note.  The printing in this subclass includes the printing of an
    adhesive.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, appropriate subclasses, for printing processes, per se.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclass 134 for processes of
    making paper combined with a printing step.


CLS 156/278
TXT Processes under subclass 60 combined with the step of applying a coating
    material or compound to a surface of at least one lamina spaced from or
    other than that which is bonded.

    (1)     Note.  Impregnation of a part with a coating material whose sole
    function is to bond parts together is excluded from this and indented
    subclasses even though the impregnating step may incidentally apply a
    coating to the nonadherent face of the part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclasses, for processes of coating
    in general.


CLS 156/279
TXT Processes under subclass 278 in which a fluent material comprised of
    discrete particles is applied to a lamina which particles are not, per se,
    adhesive for the purpose of bonding laminae.

    (1)     Note.  The step of applying particulate material while suspended in
    a liquid is not within the scope of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26+,    for processes of associating discrete fibers or particulate
    material only to form a self-supporting lamina.

    283,    for processes of applying particles which are utilized as a bonding
    medium in assembly of plural laminae.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, subclass
    297 for a method of making abrasive particles in which a laminating step is
    employed.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 180+ for coating processes wherein
    solid particles or fibers are applied.


CLS 156/280
TXT Processes under subclass 278 directed to the step of coating of the
    nonadherent face of a lamina subsequent to its bonding to another lamina.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305,    for laminating processes whereby the adhesive, per se, is applied
    after assembly of the laminae.


CLS 156/281
TXT Processes under subclass 60 combined with a step which is, per se, (1) not
    provided for in this class and (2) performs a function other than that
    usually utilized during the fabrication of the laminated product to perfect
    the bonding between the laminae.

    (1)     Note.  The combination of assembly and/or joining by bonding with a
    step of sewing other than through the bonded joint is provided for in this
    subclass. Also included herein is application of pressure to reduce the
    overall thickness of the sandwich, the pressure being greater than that
    necessary to perfect the bond between the laminae. For sewing through a
    bonded joint see subclass 93 above.

    (2)     Note.  Operations necessary to the formation of the sandwich are
    heating, applying adhesive and applying pressure to an assembly of laminae
    to perfect the bond.  These steps are not considered to fall within the
    scope of "combined" and are provided for below.

    (3)     Note.  See section II B of the class definition of this class for
    the lines with other classes and the locus of patents relating to
    laminating combined with other operations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93,     and see (1) Note above.


CLS 156/282
TXT Processes under subclass 60 in which the lamina is subjected to the
    application of heat to one portion of the surface area thereof while
    simultaneously cooling another portion of the surface area.


CLS 156/283
TXT Processes under subclass 60 in which the bonding agent is applied to the
    adhering face of at least one of the laminae in a dry particulate state.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this and indented subclasses are bonding
    materials which are in the form of granules, pellets, beads, flakes,
    platelets or powdered state and are not dispersed in a liquid medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    279,    for the mass application of nonadhesive particles to laminae.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 180+ for coating processes wherein
    solid particles or fibers are applied.


CLS 156/284
TXT Processes under subclass 283 in which a liquid is applied to the particles
    to render said particles tacky, said liquid being applied subsequent to the
    application of the particulate material.


CLS 156/285
TXT Processes under subclass 60 in which (1) pressure less than atmospheric is
    applied to the work during the association of the laminae or (2) where a
    force is exerted by a fluent medium directly onto the work during
    association of the laminae.

    (1)     Note.  The reduced pressure or the fluid pressure may be applied to
    bring the lamina into contact or to effect more intimate contact of the
    laminae.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for the evacuation of air during the making of optically
    transparent glass sandwiches.

    381+,   for evacuated or fluid pressure chamber enclosing the work.


CLS 156/286
TXT Processes under subclass 285 in which air is removed from between the
    assembled laminae by vacuum or fluid pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 90 for presses with means to remove air from
    material while being pressed.


CLS 156/287
TXT Processes under subclass 285 in which fluid pressure or vacuum is applied
    to an element covering the inner surface of a cavity that is at least
    partially enclosed.


CLS 156/288
TXT Processes under subclass 60 in which a force is exerted simultaneously upon
    a plurality of independent assemblies or separate sandwiches which are not
    bonded one to the other.

    (1)     Note.  The separate sandwiches may be in a stacked relationship, in
    a noncontacting arrangement or in other type of relationship during the
    simultaneous application of pressure to the several sandwiches.


CLS 156/289
TXT Processes under subclass 60 in which a bond inhibiting material is used to
    prevent adhesion between laminae in areas that might otherwise bond in the
    absence of the material.

    (1)     Note.  The parting or release material may be in the form of a film
    or powder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90,     for processes using a barrier layer to prevent migration or
    bleeding between laminae.

    323,    for processes utilizing a subsequently removed flexible element
    interposed between the work and the pressure surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 40.1+, for a
    composite stock material product having a layer of adhesive and a covering
    therefor which must be removed or stripped to expose the adhesive and
    enable it to be adhered to a surface; subclass 352 for a composite stock
    material having an adhesive outermost surface and also having a release or
    anti-stick coating (usually on the surface opposite the adhesive surface).


CLS 156/290
TXT Processes under subclass 60 in which superposed laminae touching each other
    at all points are adhered to each other at a plurality of spaced
    noncontiguous areas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, for a composite stock
    material product in which components are secured together by a
    discontinuous or differential coating, impregnation or bond.


CLS 156/291
TXT Processes under subclass 290 in which the laminae are secured at spaced
    areas by an applied adhesive, the adhesive being applied at the spaced
    secured areas only.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 256+ for processes of forming
    nonuniform coatings.


CLS 156/292
TXT Processes under subclass 60 directed to bonding at least two contacting
    laminae which have opposed portions out of contact or spaced from each
    other.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes processes directed to adhering two
    hemispheres together to form a sphere and applying a flat lamina to the
    apexes of an already embossed lamina.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    197,    for processes of permanently bending or reshaping self-sustaining
    laminae by separating laminae between spaced secured areas.

    210,    for processes of forming an undulated sheet and securing said sheet
    to a base with parts of the shaped areas out of contact.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 58 for a process of bonding a glass
    part to a preformed part by a glassworking operation, where the parts have
    opposed facing areas out of contact.


CLS 156/293
TXT Processes under subclass 60 in which an element is put into an opening or
    recess in a lamina and is bonded to an internal surface of the opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98,     for repairing processes involving a step of replacing a defective
    area of a part by inserting a new piece in the aperture left by the removal
    of the defective area.


CLS 156/294
TXT Processes under subclass 293 directed to telescoping a tube or rod-like
    member within a tubular body.


CLS 156/295
TXT Processes under subclass 60 directed to applying an adhesive to a
    restricted area of a lamina and subsequent to assembly applying an external
    force to the assembly to cause the adhesive to cover a greater area of the
    lamina.


CLS 156/296
TXT Processes under subclass 60 for bonding individual laminae of finite length
    and being of great length relative to cross-section and of relatively
    regular cross-section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166+,   for processes for bonding flexible filamentary material while in
    indefinite or running length.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, appropriate subclasses for a
    processes of manufacturing a fibrous web by a process which includes water
    laying. The web may be held together by adhesive forces stemming from an
    extraneously applied material or from a component or property inherent in
    the fiber.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 109+ for a process of manufacturing an article, e.g., a web,
    from staple-length nonmetal fibers by a process which excludes a
    water-laying step.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, appropriate subclasses for methods of
    making articles from particulate metal-containing materials using pressure,
    with or without heat.


CLS 156/297
TXT Processes under subclass 60 in which at least two separate and distinct
    elements are individually and separately directly united to the same
    surface of another lamina.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    560+,   for apparatus for uniting plural discrete elements to a single base.


CLS 156/298
TXT Processes under subclass 297 in which at least two of the plural discrete
    laminae or a portion thereof are forced into the surface to which they are
    bonded.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 432+ for a method including a step of
    piercing one part by another, e.g., stapling or nailing.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 614 for metallic
    stock material comprising one component embedded in another component.


CLS 156/299
TXT Processes under subclass 297 in which all laminae including the discrete
    laminae are parallel to each other and each surface thereof has an even
    plane surface.


CLS 156/300
TXT Processes under subclass 299 directed to superposing at least one
    additional lamina over the discrete laminae.


CLS 156/301
TXT Processes under subclass 300 in which the discrete laminae are applied to a
    continuously moving web of indefinite length and thereafter superposing on
    the discrete laminae another continuously moving web of indefinite length.


CLS 156/302
TXT Processes under subclass 299 in which the plural discrete laminae are
    applied to a continuously moving web of indefinite length.


CLS 156/303
TXT Processes under subclass 302 in which the discrete laminae are supplied to
    the indefinite length web from a plurality of different sources.


CLS 156/303.1
TXT Processes under subclass 60 which include inserting a solid element into
    the surface of a preformed plastic body with no reshaping of the plastic
    body other than that which is caused by displacement of material due to the
    insertion of the solid element.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in which localized plastic reshaping occurs due to
    displacement of material in the area where the part is inserted are
    included here unless the plastic reshaping is caused by a member other than
    the part being inserted.  For patents in which the plastic body is
    simultaneously shaped by a mold element see the search notes to Class 264
    below.

    (2)     Note.  The preform or the plastic part may or may not be heated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91+,    for mechanical joining combined with laminating.

    293,    for patents in which the preform is inserted into the recess of the
    plastic part.

    298,    for patents in which multiple preforms are inserted into the
    plastic part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 271.1+ for inserting a preform part into a plastic body and
    simultaneously reshaping the body with a mold element.


CLS 156/304.1
TXT Butt edge joining of laminae:

    Processes under subclass 60 directed to uniting laminae edge to edge
    without overlapping of the edges.

    (1)     Note.  The butt joint may be reinforced by applying thereto a tape
    or additional strengthening element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for processes of joining indefinite length conductors end to end.

    157,    for processes of joining indefinite length laminae end to end.

    502+,   for apparatus for joining indefinite length laminae end to end.

    544+,   for apparatus for joining indefinite length laminae edge to edge.


CLS 156/304.2
TXT Joining of nonplanar elements; e.g., configured hollow objects, etc:

    Processes under subclass 304.1 directed to uniting laminae edge to edge
    wherein the lamina are nonplanar.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are processes of joining corrugated lamina
    and processes of assembly of containers or other finite length hollow
    elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    296,    for processes of joining tubes or filaments of indefinite length.


CLS 156/304.3
TXT With joiner member or reinforcement:

    Processes under subclass 304.1 directed to joining laminae edge to edge
    wherein an additional member is applied to add mechanical strength to the
    joint.


CLS 156/304.4
TXT Carpet or fabric joined:

    Processes under subclass 304.3 directed to the process of joining carpeting
    or fabric edge to edge and which utilize a reinforcement of the joint area.

    (1)     Note.  Typically the reinforcement is a tape.


CLS 156/304.5
TXT With preliminary edge treatment or joining of edges of irregular shape;
    e.g., tongue and groove, beveled, etc.:

    Processes under subclass 304.1 in which prior to joining the edges are
    physically or chemically treated to perfect the joining operation or in
    which the edges are nonplanar or are not perpendicular to the face of other
    the lamina.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258,    for processes of edge treatment by cutting.


CLS 156/304.6
TXT By heat:

    Processes under subclass 304.1 directed to the edge to edge joining of
    lamina including the use of increased temperature to effect joining.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 101+ for the butt joining of metal by
    means of pressure while heating by an electric current.


CLS 156/304.7
TXT Of carpet or fabric:

    Processes under subclass 304.1 in which the lamina joined is carpeting or
    fabric.


CLS 156/305
TXT Processes under subclass 60 in which bonding is effected after assembly of
    the laminae by subsequent application thereto of the adhesive, per se, or a
    solvent or other chemical activating agent to render tacky or adhesive the
    uncoated or coated contacting facing surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278+,   for processes for coating the nonadhering face of a lamina.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, appropriate subclasses for a
    process of manufacturing a fibrous web which includes water laying and the
    addition of an extraneous binder or activator to the web while still wet.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 109+ for a process of manufacturing an article, e.g., a web,
    from staple-length fibers by a process which excludes a water-laying step,
    especially subclass 128 for the addition of a liquid binder subsequent to
    fiber assembly.


CLS 156/306.3
TXT By pressure or drying only, without tack; e.g., for easy delamination, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 wherein a bond, often temporary, between
    two laminae is accomplished by pressing the laminae together without an
    adhesive and without developing tack in either lamina, or by merely
    assembling the laminae and drying the laminate in assembled condition.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the bonding is performed at ambient temperatures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 428+ for an assembly and/or joining
    process involving mechanical interlocking of parts or of a mechanical
    fastener.


CLS 156/306.6
TXT Using single, preformed, diverse bonding lamina between other laminae:


    Subject matter under subclass 60 wherein a laminate having at least three
    plies is assembled, an inner lamina being a self-sustaining sheet composed
    of a single lamina which is tackified in the process to bond the outer
    laminae together, the inner lamina having a composition different from
    either of the outer laminae.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305,    for a process in which a bonding sheet is applied to the outside of
    laminae to be bonded.

    313,    for a laminating process which uses an intermediate laminae, e.g.,
    a coated substrate, as a bonding sheet between uncoated laminae.

    325+,   for a process which uses a particular adhesive for bonding two or
    more laminae to obtain a particular three- or-more layered product, wherein
    the adhesive is introduced to the process as other than a self-sustaining
    sheet.


CLS 156/306.9
TXT Including curing of nonfully polymerized material:

    Subject matter under subclass 306.6 wherein the bonding process includes a
    chemical reaction in which molecules are united to produce material of
    higher molecular weight than the starting material.

    (1)     Note.  The reaction may be the polymerization of a monomer,
    chain-extension or cross-linking of an intermediate polymer, etc.

    (2)     Note.  When the word "curing" is used it is assumed that
    cross-linking takes place.

    (3)     Note.  The cross-linking phenomenon may involve reaction with
    functional groups forming a part of the "outside" laminae to be bonded.


CLS 156/307.1
TXT By curing of nonfully polymerized self-sustaining lamina:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 wherein at least one of the
    self-sustaining laminae to be bonded has not been completely polymerized,
    that is, it contains reactable functional groups, and the bonding process
    includes a chemical reaction in which such groups are reacted to form
    molecules of higher weight than the starting material. The reaction takes
    place within the lamina to be bonded or involves the uniting of the
    aforementioned functional groups with functional groups of another lamina
    to be bonded or of another substance which is between the laminae.

    (1)     Note.  Exemplary of functional groups in a lamina are the olefinic
    double bonds of natural rubber, the free  hydroxyl groups remaining in a
    cellulose-partial acetate ester, hydrous oxide groups on the surface of a
    metal, etc.

    (2)     Note.  The reaction may be one in which a monomeric material is
    polymerized or in which an intermediate polymer is cross-linked,
    chain-extended, etc.

    (3)     Note.  When the word "curing" is used, it is assumed that
    cross-linking takes place.

    (4)     Note.  A cross-linking reaction generally produces a so-called
    "thermoset" bond which is no longer susceptible to softening by heat.

    (5)     Note.  This subclass is limited to those processes in which at
    least some polymerization takes place at the time of bonding; final curing
    (e.g., of a coating, etc.) before assembly is not covered by this subclass.

    (6)     Note.  Curing of an adhesive only, between the laminae to be
    bonded, after assembly of the sandwich, without the involvement of
    functional groups in a lamina to be bonded, is not covered by this
    subclass.  See subclasses 325+.


CLS 156/307.3
TXT With coating or impregnating a face to be adhered:

    Subject matter under subclass 307.1 wherein at least one lamina to be
    bonded is treated with a material which penetrates the lamina at least in
    part or which forms a coating on a face to be adhered.

    (1)     Note.  The coating need not be applied as a liquid or particulate
    solid but may be a gaseous treating agent which reacts with the substance
    of the lamina to form a so-called "reaction coating".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182,    for a process of binding in which an intermediate laminate, (e.g.,
    a coated substrate, etc.), is bonded to another laminate by completing
    polymerization, e.g., vulcanization, between the intermediate laminates.

    278+,   for a process in which a nonadherent face of a lamina is coated.


CLS 156/307.4
TXT Indefinite plurality of similar impregnated thin sheets; e.g., "decorative
    laminate" type, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 307.3 wherein an unspecified number, greater
    than two, of sheets are bonded together by curing, each sheet being of
    similar material to the others and having at least one negligible
    dimension, each sheet having been impregnated with a fluid material before
    or after assembly of the stack.

    (1)     Note.  The products usually are "decorative laminates" such as are
    used for counter tops, dishes, etc., sold under trade names such as
    Formica, Melmac, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    330.9+, for other bonding processes using melamine-derived resins.


CLS 156/307.5
TXT Coating solidified; e.g., by drying, etc., before assembly:

    Subject matter under subclass 307.3 in which the material in or on the
    lamina develops the properties of a solid before being assembled with
    another lamina.


CLS 156/307.7
TXT Including uncurable lamina; e.g., metal, paper, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 307.1 wherein one of the laminae to be bonded
    has no functional groups available for chemical reaction internally or with
    a lamina bonded to it in the process.


CLS 156/308.2
TXT By tackifying substance of self-sustaining lamina to be bonded; e.g.,
    autogenous bonding, etc.: Subject matter under subclass 60 wherein bonding
    is achieved without use of an extraneous adhesive material by making a
    portion of a lamina which is to be bonded, per se, tacky.

    (1)     Note.  Tackiness is usually achieved by heat or by a swelling or
    solvent action.

    (2)     Note.  Subject matter for this subclass includes autogenous bonding
    of a  fibrous web to another lamina.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166+,   especially, subclass 181, for autogenous bonding of filaments of
    indefinite length or in the form of running lengths, to each other, to form
    a web.

    182,    for a bonding process in which one laminate (e.g., a coated
    substrate, etc.) is bonded to another laminate by tackifying a single
    lamina of one or both of the intermediate laminates.

    324.4,  for a process in which a single lamina, e.g., a coating, etc., of
    an intermediate laminate, e.g., a coated substrate, etc., is tackified for
    bonding to another lamina.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, appropriate subclasses for a
    process of manufacturing a fibrous web by a process which include water
    laying. The web may be held together by adhesive forces stemming from an
    extraneously applied material or from a component or property inherent in
    the fiber.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 109+ for a process of manufacturing an article, e.g., a web, for
    staple-length fibers by a process which excludes a water-laying step, but
    which may include autogenous bonding. See subclasses 123+.


CLS 156/308.4
TXT Only part of contacting laminae surfaces bonded; e.g., seam, seal, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 308.2 wherein precautions are taken to
    prevent bonding of contacting laminae surfaces at other than selected
    contacting areas, usually by restricting heat and/or pressure and/or
    solvent applications to the selected areas.


CLS 156/308.6
TXT With treating agent application to a surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 308.2 wherein a gaseous or liquid agent is
    applied to a surface to be bonded to improve the bonding properties of the
    surface.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the added agent is a solvent which tackifies the
    surface to be bonded.

    (2)     Note.  The process need not include a step of removing the treating
    agent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155,    for a bonding process which includes a step of removing a
    transitory solid material.

    281,    for a bonding procedure which includes a step which, per se, is
    provided for in another patent class, e.g., cleaning, etc.

    305,    for a bonding process which includes adding a treating agent to a
    laminate after assembly.


CLS 156/308.8
TXT Plural agents applied sequentially or to different laminae or using water
    as sole agent:

    Subject matter under subclass 308.6 wherein water is the sole agent used to
    cause tackiness or in which more than one of the laminae to be bonded are
    treated with different agents or in which a single lamina is treated with
    an agent and then treated with another agent.

    (1)     Note.  The water may be applied as vapor or steam and its purposes
    may be to heat a lamina.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306.3,  for a process of adhering laminae where water may be used, but in
    which the water causes no tackiness.


CLS 156/309.3
TXT Diverse laminae:

    Subject matter under subclass 308.6 in which one lamina to be bonded has a
    composition different from another lamina to be bonded.


CLS 156/309.6
TXT Involving defined plastic flow or melting of entire lamina:

    Subject matter under subclass 308.2 wherein the bonding process includes a
    specified flowing or movement of tackified interfacial lamina material or
    the melting of an entire lamina.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196+,   for a bonding process which includes permanent bending or reshaping
    or surface deformation of a self-sustaining lamina.

    306.6+, for a bonding process wherein a self-sustaining bonding sheet,
    different from and placed between other laminae, is completely melted to
    bond the other laminae.


CLS 156/309.9
TXT With heating or lamina prior to assembly:

    Subject matter under subclass 308.2 wherein a lamina is heated to
    tackifying temperature before it is assembled with the lamina to which it
    is to be bonded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322,    for adhesive bonding processes in general wherein a lamina is
    heated before the application of adhesive.


CLS 156/310
TXT Processes under subclass 60 wherein each facing surface of the laminae to
    be joined is coated with a material which differs in composition from the
    other.

    (1)     Note.  Of the different coatings employed in this subclass, one may
    be a primer for one lamina face and the adhesive applied to the other, or,
    two different reactants may be employed, one on each opposing face, which,
    after contact of the laminae, form the adhesive by reaction thereof, in
    situ.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    314+,   for processes of applying a plurality of different coatings to the
    same facing surface of one of the laminae.


CLS 156/311
TXT Processes under subclass 60 which include the step of heating and cooling
    in any sequence during the interval in which the laminating pressure is
    being maintained.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     for laminating processes which include a refrigeration or freezing
    step.


CLS 156/312
TXT Processes under subclass 60 in which the laminating pressure applied varies
    stepwise in intensity or is applied intermittently or sequentially during
    the laminating step.

    (1)     Note.  The step of subjecting a lamina to continuously increasing
    pressure is not considered sequential different pressure applying for this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for plural sequential pressures applied in optically transparent
    glass sandwich making.


CLS 156/313
TXT Processes under subclass 60 directed to interposing an intermediate
    laminate of at least two layers, e.g., a coated lamina, etc. between
    noncoated outer laminae.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    for processes wherein a preformed adhesive layer is employed in
    making glass sandwiches.

    306.6,  for a bonding process which uses a single, preformed, diverse
    self-sustaining bonding lamina (which may be an impregnated material)
    between other laminae.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 104 and 123 for
    processes involving waterlaid paper webs.


CLS 156/314
TXT Processes under subclass 60 wherein the adhering face of at least one
    lamina is treated one after the other with at least two different liquids
    or liquefiable materials.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 520, Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers,
    subclasses 1+ for a statement of material proper for Class 520.

    (2)     Note.  The use of water or other agent for the mere purpose of a
    preliminary washing or cleaning is not sufficient to place a patent in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310,    for processes in which each of the facing surfaces of the laminae
    is coated, the two coatings being of dissimilar material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 402+ for processes of applying
    superposed diverse coatings, or coating a coated base.


CLS 156/315
TXT Processes under subclass 314 wherein at least two of the sequential liquids
    are natural or synthetic rubber and/or natural or synthetic resin
    containing only liquefiable material.


CLS 156/316
TXT Processes under subclass 314 wherein the first treatment of the adhering
    surface is with an acidic or acid containing liquid or liquefiable acidic
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for etching processes in which an acidic material may be used as an
    etchant, particularly subclass 3 for etching combined with a laminating
    step.


CLS 156/317
TXT Processes under subclass 314 in which at least one liquid or liquefiable
    material is a protein containing liquid.

    (1)     Note.  Proteins are a group of nitrogenous organic compounds of
    high molecular weight which yield amino acids on hydrolysis, e.g., casein,
    animal glue, albumin, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    328     and 336, for adhesives which contain proteinaceous materials.


CLS 156/318
TXT Processes under subclass 314 in which at least one liquid is a carbohydrate
    containing liquid or carbohydrate containing liquefiable material.

    (1)     Note.  Carbohydrates are organic compounds such as are synthesized
    by plants of the general formula Cx(H2O)y, e.g., starches, sugars, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    328     and 336, for adhesives which contain carbohydrate materials.


CLS 156/319
TXT Processes under subclass 314 in which at least one liquid or liquefiable
    material is composed of inorganic constituents only.

    (1)     Note.  See note to subclass 314 above relative to the use of water
    as a washing agent only.


CLS 156/320
TXT Processes under subclass 60 in which a dry nontacky coating of adhesive on
    at least one facing surface of the laminae to be united is heated prior to
    assembly contact thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306+,   for autogenous bonding wherein one or both adhering surfaces may be
    heated prior to assembly.

    313,    for processes wherein a coated adhesive carrier is interposed
    between two outer laminae.


CLS 156/321
TXT Processes under subclass 60 wherein one lamina is heated prior to assembly
    and the heat from the lamina is utilized to heat the dry adhesive on the
    opposed lamina.


CLS 156/322
TXT Processes under subclass 60 wherein the lamina is heated after coating with
    adhesive but prior to assembly, or wherein the lamina or base is heated
    prior to application of the adhesive.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306,    for autogenous bonding which may involve heating of one or more
    laminae prior to assembly.


CLS 156/323
TXT Processes under subclass 60 in which a removable flexible and/or resilient
    element is placed between the laminae to be bonded and pressure means
    employed.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes, for example, those laminating steps in
    which the laminae are enclosed in a cellophane bag which protects the
    pressure means from extruded resin, or where pressure is transmitted
    through a resilient layer for desired effects.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90,     for barrier layers which are employed to prevent migration or
    bleeding between laminae.

    288,    for processes of making plural sandwiches simultaneously wherein a
    nonadhesive separatory layer or element is employed between sandwiches.

    289,    for processes in which a parting or release material is employed to
    prevent adhesion.


CLS 156/324
TXT Processes under subclass 60 which provide for lamination of running webs or
    sheets or those of indefinite length in a continuous operation.

    (1)     Note.  See section III of the class definition of this class for
    the definition of indefinite length work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 104 and 123+ for
    processes wherein waterlaid paper webs are employed.


CLS 156/324.4
TXT By tackifying a single lamina of intermediate laminate:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 wherein an intermediate laminate, e.g., a
    coated substrate, is bonded to a single lamina by tackifying a single
    lamina of the intermediate laminate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182,    for a process of bonding two intermediate laminates.


CLS 156/325
TXT Processes under subclass 60 in which the adhesive employed is specifically
    named or identified by composition thereof or chemical structure.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this and indented subclasses provide for use of
    specifically identified adhesives in a laminating operation involving no
    manipulative step provided for above. Individual compounds and
    compositions, per se, which may be disclosed to possess adhesive utility
    are classified on the basis of chemical structure or ingredients therein in
    Class 106, Compositions: Coating or Plastic, Class 260, Chemistry of Carbon
    Compounds and Class 423, Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds. Patents from
    these and other composition classes may be cross-referenced into these
    subclasses where a laminating process is claimed or where a specific
    example in the specification is limited to laminating. The mere reference
    in the specification to the effect that a composition is a good adhesive is
    not sufficient to place a cross-reference in these subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    283+,   for adhesives which are applied in particulate form.

    309,    for preformed intermediate layers or laminae which may be disclosed
    to have utility as a bonding agent between other dissimilar laminae.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclass 77 for
    an adhesive trapping composition.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of composite web or sheet,
    including a particular adhesive, and especially subclasses 355+ where the
    adhesive is the outermost layer and subclasses 411.1+ which provide for
    nonstructural plural layer products categorized by the composition of the
    respective layers, the adhesive employed between layers being considered as
    one of the layers.


CLS 156/326
TXT Adhesives under subclass 325 which contain or consist of organic compounds.

    (1)     Note.  Attention is directed to the definition of Class 260,
    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for the scope of the term "organic
    compounds" and of the various types of organic compounds provided for in
    the subclasses indented thereunder as well as for the scope of such terms
    as rubber, for which see specifically Class 520, Synthetic Resins or
    Natural Rubbers and the search notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclass for coating
    and plastic compositions which do not contain synthetic resins and which
    may be disclosed to possess adhesive utility.


CLS 156/327
TXT Adhesives under subclass 326 which are resinous materials produced
    synthetically.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 1+ for an
    explanation of the type of polymer which is proper for Class 520.


CLS 156/328
TXT Resins under subclass 327 which also contain as an added ingredient
    carbohydrate and/or protein ingredients or derivatives thereof.


CLS 156/329
TXT Resins under subclass 327 which contain silicon.


CLS 156/330
TXT Resins under subclass 327 which contain epoxy or oxirane groups or are
    reaction products of compounds having epoxy or oxirane groups, that is
    containing the triatomic ring



CLS 156/330.9
TXT Nitrogenous resin:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein the resin adhesive contains
    nitrogen.


CLS 156/331.1
TXT With polymerization completion, i.e., curing, after assembly:

    Subject matter under subclass 330.9 wherein the adhesive is applied in a
    nonfully polymerized state and after assembly the sandwich is exposed to a
    condition, e.g., heat, air, water, etc., sufficient to increase the
    molecular weight of at least some resin component by reaction of functional
    groups contained therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    307.1+  and 309.6, for processes in which an incompletely polymerized
    self-sustaining lamina is bonded by curing.


CLS 156/331.2
TXT N only in unlinked side-chain or side-ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 331.1 wherein the finished (e.g., cured,
    etc.) resin adhesive has a polymer backbone free of nitrogen, the nitrogen
    being found only in side-chains (e.g., polyacrylonitrile, etc.) or in
    side-rings (e.g., polyvinylpyridine, etc.) which are not cross-linked to
    other polymer backbone material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331.6,  for bonding processes using similar adhesive but without curing
    after assembly.

    327,    333 and 334, for bonding processes using other vinyl-type resins.


CLS 156/331.3
TXT Derived from aldehyde or ketone:

    Subject matter under subclass 331.1 wherein the curing or the preparation
    of the prefinal-polymer involves the reaction of an moiety.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    307.4,  for the use of aldehyde-type resins, such as urea-aldehyde resins
    or melamine-aldehyde resins in "decorative laminate" manufacture involving
    the impregnation of thin sheets followed by assembling a stack of sheets
    and curing.


CLS 156/331.4
TXT Iso- or  thio-cyanate moiety reacted in curing:

    Subject matter under subclass 331.1 wherein a -N=C=O or -N=C=S moiety in
    the resin precursor is destroyed in the curing.


CLS 156/331.5
TXT N in a ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 331.1 wherein the resin precursor contains a
    cyclic moiety and the cyclic moiety contains nitrogen.


CLS 156/331.6
TXT N only in unlinked side-chain or side-ring; e.g., polyvinyl pyridine, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 330.9 wherein the resin adhesive has a
    polymer backbone free of nitrogen, the nitrogen being found only in
    side-chains (e.g., polyacrylonitrile, etc.) or in side-rings (e.g.,
    polyvinyl pyridine, etc.) which are not cross-linked to other polymer
    backbone material.


CLS 156/331.7
TXT Derived from iso- or thio-cyanate; e.g., polyurethane, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 330.9 wherein the resin has been prepared
    from a starting material or intermediate containing the -N-C=O or -N=C=S
    moiety.


CLS 156/331.8
TXT Derived from acyclic compound containing N:

    Subject matter under subclass 330.9 wherein the resin has been prepared
    from a starting material or intermediate free from cyclic moieties and
    containing nitrogen.


CLS 156/331.9
TXT And aldehyde ketone or carbocyclic moiety-containing compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 331.8 wherein the resin has been prepared
    from a starting material or intermediate, in addition to the acyclic
    nitrogenousper- cursor, containing an

    moiety, an

    moiety or a ring containing carbon atoms only.


CLS 156/332
TXT Resins under subclass 327 which contain polycarboxylic ester groups.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes such resins as the alkyds, i.e.,
    those formed from the reaction of polybasic acids, such as terephthalic
    acid, and glycols, and those formed by polymerization of unsaturated
    mono-esters such as methyl acrylate and vinyl acetate.


CLS 156/333
TXT Resins under subclass 327 which contain at least some halogenated
    hydrocarbon.

    (1)     Note.  Synthetic rubber-like materials which are halogenated
    hydrocarbons are included herein, e.g., neoprene or other polymers of
    chloroprene, polyvinyl chloride.


CLS 156/334
TXT Resins under subclass 327 which are hydrocarbon resin containing.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are materials such as butadiene-styrene
    polymers and polyethylene.


CLS 156/335
TXT Resins under subclass 327 which contain phenol-aldehyde reaction products.


CLS 156/336
TXT Adhesives under subclass 326 which contain protein and/or carbohydrate and
    derivatives thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Animal glue and starch pastes are examples of proteins and
    carbohydrate adhesives, respectively, within the scope of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    328,    for adhesive compositions which include both synthetic resins and a
    carbohydrate and/or protein.


CLS 156/337
TXT Adhesives under subclass 326 which contain bituminous products.

    (1)     Note.  The term bituminous includes such materials as asphalt and
    other tarry residues from petroleum or coal origin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 273+ for bituminous
    containing compositions which may be disclosed to have utility as adhesives.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, Class 523, subclasses 450 and
    518, and Class 524, subclasses 59+ and 705 for nonreactant bituminous
    material admixed with a synthetic resin or natural rubbers and which
    composition may be disclosed to have utility as an adhesive.


CLS 156/338
TXT Adhesives under subclass 326 which contain natural rubber.

    (1)     Note.  Various synthetic resins are rubbery materials and these
    compositions are classified hereinabove (subclasses 327+) or in such
    classes as Class 520, Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 1 and
    indented classes thereunder, on the basis of ingredients or reactants
    contained therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, subclasses 709+ for natural rubber
    and compositions thereof, which may be disclosed to have adhesive utility.


CLS 156/344
TXT Processes under subclass 1 directed to separating at least one adhered
    layer or portion thereof from another layer at their bonding faces, per se,
    in which the layer retains its identity during separation.

    (1)     Note.  Processes for the separation of laminae in which a lamina is
    destroyed are generally classified in that class which provides for the
    operation, per se.  Thus, for example, destroying a lamina by abrading will
    be found in Class 451 Abrading; by cutting, in Class 83, Cutting,
    appropriate subclasses, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247,    for processes of delaminating combined with an assembly and/or
    joining operation.

    584,    for delaminating apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses, and see (1) Note above.

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclasses, for removing portions of
    a layer applied as a coating composition. Processes of removing portions of
    a layer applied as a coating composition not combined with a coating step
    are classified in this class (156).

    451,    Abrading, for an abrading process in general, and see the (1) Note
    above.


CLS 156/345
TXT Apparatus under the class definition for treating a base with an etchant
    fluid the device having means causing the etchant fluid to contact the base
    in discontinuous or nonuniform manner.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found, for example, devices which
    etch a taper on elongated workpieces by withdrawing at a controlled rate
    from an etching bath, devices etching through a mask, devices directing a
    thin jet of etchant at a particular spot on the workpiece to pierce the
    workpiece, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses for
    devices there provided for even though the fluid may be disclosed and
    claimed as being an etchant.  Devices peculiarly adapted to discontinuous
    or nonuniform etching are provided for in Class 156.

    366,    Agitating, appropriate subclasses for a mixing chamber with
    agitating means therefor, which may be disclosed for use with etching fluid.


CLS 156/346
TXT Apparatus under the class definition particularly adapted to making sheets
    of settable inorganic material covered on both faces with a preformed sheet
    material.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found, for example, apparatus in
    which a plastic settable material is flowed onto a backing sheet, and then
    a cover sheet is applied to the face opposite face from the backing sheet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39+,    for plaster board making processes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 123 for composite article making by means supporting plural
    preforms in spaced relation in a molding cavity.


CLS 156/347
TXT Apparatus under subclass 346 having means to alter the configuration of the
    face of the formed sheet.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found apparatus for forming and
    perforating the face of the sheet, indenting the face of the sheet, etc.


CLS 156/348
TXT Apparatus under subclass 346 having means modifying the formed sheet at or
    adjacent the edge only.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found, for example devices beveling,
    indenting, or chamfering the edge only of the sheet, folding the facing
    sheet at the edge, slitting at the edge, etc.


CLS 156/349
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having (a) means bringing adhesive
    parts into contacting relationship one with the other, (b) means bringing
    parts into contacting relationship and subsequently causing them to be
    adhered, or (c) means causing previously associated parts to be adhered one
    to the other.

    (1)     Note.  Attention is directed to the class definition of this class,
    sections IIA and section IIB, which set forth in detail the lines with
    other classes and supplementary fields of search.


CLS 156/350
TXT Apparatus under subclass 349 having (1) means to sense a condition or
    change in condition and in response thereto cause a control operation, or
    (2) means directly responsive to presence or absence of the work and
    causing a control operation.

    (1)     Note.  With respect to (1) above, the condition sensed must be
    something other than the normal cyclical operation of the machine.
    Further, a change in the normal cycle of operation caused by the
    intervention of the machine attendant would not be included.  With respect
    to (2) above, the normal cyclical operation of the machine may be
    maintained or controlled by the presence of work at the work station.

    (2)     Note.  The condition sensed may be a condition or property of the
    work (either before or after laminating), of the laminating or working
    apparatus, or any change in the environment of the apparatus, which sensing
    means stops, starts or otherwise modifies the operation of the apparatus.

    (3)     Note.  Mere sensing means alone to determine a condition or change
    thereof without in turn causing a control operation is not sufficient for
    placement in this or the indented subclasses.  A control function of the
    apparatus must be effected when the sensed condition or change of condition
    occurs for complete automatic control.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    365,    for apparatus including safety interlocks.

    367,    for devices including an electrical control means.

    378,    for means performing a sensing function and in response thereto
    causing a signal or indicating means to be actuated rather than a control
    operation for the apparatus.


CLS 156/351
TXT Apparatus under subclass 350 in which at least two sensing means are
    associated in a system whereby the control operation is determined by more
    than a single one of the sensing means.


CLS 156/352
TXT Apparatus under subclass 350 in which the control action causes the
    termination or disabling of action of the complete apparatus including the
    drive means therefor.


CLS 156/353
TXT Apparatus under subclass 350 in which the device controlled is means
    severing the workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  The material may be cut before, during or after the
    laminating or assembly step.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    510,    for laminating means having cutting means not automatically
    controlled and see the notes thereto for the locus of cutting means, per se.


CLS 156/354
TXT Apparatus under subclass 353 having structure in addition to the cutting
    means for performing the function of transporting the cut segment to that
    part of the apparatus where joining occurs, or for performing the function
    of assembling the cut portion with the workpiece to which it is to be
    adhesively bonded.


CLS 156/355
TXT Apparatus under subclass 353 in which the severing means is controlled by
    means detecting or sensing the movement through the machine of the discrete
    element to which the severed element is to be applied.

    (1)     Note.  To be included here the discrete element must move through
    and beyond the machine and not merely reciprocate relative to a portion of
    the machine.


CLS 156/356
TXT Apparatus under subclass 350 in which the element controlled comprising
    means directing or bringing a flowable or gaseous material into contact
    with the work.

    (1)     Note.  The fluent material may be, for example, adhesive material
    to provide a bond or coating material for functions other than that of
    adhering the workpieces.


CLS 156/357
TXT Apparatus under subclass 356 in which the means applying the flowable or
    gaseous material is controlled by means detecting or sensing the presence
    or absence of the work to which the material is to be applied.


CLS 156/358
TXT Apparatus under subclass 350 wherein the means controlled causes the
    surfaces of the workpieces to be forced into intimate contact one with the
    other for adhesive bonding.


CLS 156/359
TXT Apparatus under subclass 350 in which (1) the temperature of a portion of
    the apparatus is controlled and/or (2) the movement of said portion of the
    apparatus to apply or vary the degree of heat exchange is controlled.

    (1)     Note.  Mere thermostatic control to only maintain constant
    temperature of a tool, material or work is conventional and excluded from
    this subclass. Search for such subject matter should be made in various
    classes providing for heating or heat controls.


CLS 156/360
TXT Apparatus under subclass 350 wherein the sensing means (1) detects a
    variation in the heaviness or size of a workpiece or (2) measures the
    heaviness or size of a workpiece and controls an operation characterized by
    a particular reading of the measurement.

    (1)     Note.  Mere sensing or detecting the article because of weight or
    presence is not sufficient to be classified here.  The instant devices
    perform a measurement as part of the sensing step as distinguished from
    mere presence or absence response.


CLS 156/361
TXT Apparatus under subclass 350 in which the means controlled starts, stops,
    changes or otherwise effects the direction of travel and/or rate of motion
    (1) of continuously traveling work or work of unspecified length, or (2) of
    traveling flexible web carrying adhesively secured thereto a workpiece to
    be transferred to a separate phase.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    540,    for transfer apparatus which does not include an automatic control
    feature.


CLS 156/362
TXT Apparatus under subclass 350 in which the means controlled directs separate
    articles to be adhesively secured to a separate element into association
    with said element or to a position in the apparatus where the securing step
    occurs.


CLS 156/363
TXT Apparatus under subclass 362 in which the feeding means is controlled by
    means detecting or sensing the state of the workpiece to which the article
    is fed.

    (1)     Note.  The "state" of the workpiece includes, for example,
    presence, absence, alignment, or any other characteristic capable of being
    detected.  The patents of this subclass may have sensing means to determine
    the cyclical presence of the workpiece in normal operation as disclosed in
    these patents.


CLS 156/364
TXT Apparatus under subclass 363 in which the article fed has a planar surface
    and is of great length and width relative to its thickness.

    (1)     Note.  Most of the patents in this subclass are paper or paper-like
    material but the subclass is not so limited.


CLS 156/365
TXT Apparatus under subclass 349 having means to (1) prevent operation of the
    apparatus when in unguarded, abnormal or unsafe condition such as would
    injure the operator, or (2) interconnect machine parts to prevent action
    when the parts are not in proper operational condition, operation thereof
    would injure the machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclass 77 for devices there provided for having
    interrelated or safety controls.

    100,    Presses, subclass 53 for presses not elsewhere provided for having
    interrelated or safety controls.


CLS 156/366
TXT Apparatus under subclass 349 having a mechanism which limits the period of
    operation of the device on the workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  Mere cyclical operation of a machine is excluded from this
    subclass in that the majority of the devices of the subclass will serially
    laminate successive sandwiches in a definite pattern of operation.  The
    subject matter of this subclass must have the element of control in it,
    such as, for example, a variable timer that may be present for a particular
    treatment interval.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, for timers, per se.


CLS 156/367
TXT Apparatus under subclass 349 having an electrical means for causing and/or
    controlling laminating that consists of more than mere single power or
    motive means with or without a manual switch therefor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    350+,   for automatically controlled devices which may include electrical
    control means.


CLS 156/368
TXT Apparatus under subclass 367 in which the control operation results in the
    termination of the machine operation or starts the machine on its operating
    cycle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    352,    for apparatus having an automatic control for stopping the machine
    operation.


CLS 156/378
TXT Apparatus under subclass 349 having mechanism for:  (1) signalling a
    condition or property of the work or apparatus, or (2) performing a test on
    the physical or chemical state, dimension or properties of the material
    being worked.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 158 for glassworking or treating
    apparatus combined with signal, indicator, or inspection means.

    100,    Presses, subclass 99 for presses having indicating, measuring or
    testing means and see the notes thereto for the locus of other art having
    these features.


CLS 156/379
TXT Apparatus under subclass 349 having (1) mechanism modified or constructed
    to permit or perform an observation on a normally nonvisible machine or
    workpart or (2) mechanism lighting a portion of the work or machine.


CLS 156/379.6
TXT With means applying wave energy or electrical energy directly to work:

    Apparatus under subclass 349 including mechanism to treat the work with
    electrical or electrostatic wave energy.

    (1)     Note.  The energy must directly contact and treat the work in the
    form of waves, rather than be converted to some other form of energy and
    then be directed against the work.  Thus, resistance  heating of work by
    including it as part of an electric circuit and passing current
    therethrough is here, but using a separate resistance heater and applying
    the generated heat to the work by conduction is excluded.

    (2)     Note.  Mere heating of work by conduction or convection is not wave
    energy for the purpose of this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  The energy may be applied to the work, for example, in the
    form of infrared rays, X-rays, a magnetic field, etc.

    (4)     Note.  Except for those patents included in subclasses 379.7 and
    379.8, the apparatus included herein is structurally of general utility for
    heating, pressing, molding, etc., but is intended for use in laminating.
    For a complete search, the classes and subclasses which provide for the
    proximate function of the claimed structure need to be consulted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272+,   for processes involving the direct application of electrical or
    wave energy.

    580.1+, for apparatus having means to treat the work with sonic or
    ultrasonic waves or vibrations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 900 for a method of or apparatus for
    assembly of self sustaining objects by the use of electrostatic attraction;
    see the notes to these subclasses for other loci dealing with electrostatic
    forces for a method or apparatus for assembly of self-sustaining objects by
    the use of electrostatic attraction, and see the notes thereto for other
    loci dealing with electrostatic forces.

    83,     Cutting, subclass 170 for a cutting machine having means to heat
    the cutting tool or the work.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 92+ for a heated press.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 620+ for coating apparatus having
    means to apply electrical or wave energy, and see the notes thereto for the
    locus of other patents relating to this art.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 600+ for induction heating devices;
    and subclasses 200+ for radiant heating devices.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 174+ for molding or deforming machines having means for applying
    electrical or wave energy to the work.


CLS 156/379.7
TXT To an electrically conductive lamina or component incorporated into the
    work:

    Subject matter under subclass 379.6 wherein the utility of the apparatus
    depends upon including an electrically conductive member in the product,
    e.g., a metallic foil, a wire, metallic or graphite particles, etc.


CLS 156/379.8
TXT With means to assemble laminae or position them relative to each other:
    Subject matter under subclass 379.6 including a mechanism for  handling
    separately the laminae to be bonded, for holding them in an offset relation
    during bonding, for overlapping edges of a single lamina, or holding the
    edges in overlap, etc.

    (1)     Note.  A mechanism for merely holding work in place does not
    qualify a patent for classification in this or its indented subclasses.
    The criterion to be applied is as follows:  If the claimed mechanism calls
    for no more elements than can be used to heat, compress, mold, etc., a
    single article or layer of material, it is not classified in this or
    indented subclasses, even though only a portion of the article or material
    is thus treated.


CLS 156/379.9
TXT With plural diverse heating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 379.8 having mechanisms for delivering heat
    to the work by two or more different modes.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of diverse modes are (a) a radiant heating means
    and a dielectric heating means, and (b) a conductive heating means and an
    inductive heating means, etc.


CLS 156/380.1
TXT With tube-forming means:

    Subject matter under subclass 379.8 including a mechanism for forming a
    tube from planar, usually one-layer, material.

    (1)     Note.  Usually radiant heat is applied to the tube seam for bonding.

    (2)     Note.  A mechanism for performing a mere bonding operation upon
    material already in the form of a tube, e.g., seaming to make bags from a
    tube, is not included herein.


CLS 156/380.2
TXT With electrode or coil member contacting work:
    Subject matter under subclass 379.8 including a carrier of electric
    current, or its insulation, in direct physical contact with the work to be
    bonded.

    (1)     Note.  The coil is a closed, electrically conductive member
    suitable for generating a varying magnetic flux or for reception of such
    magnetic flux to produce an induced electric current.


CLS 156/380.3
TXT Electrodes on opposing sides of smallest dimension of work:

    Subject matter under subclass 380.2 wherein two or more current carriers
    face each other across the thickness dimension of the work.

    (1)     Note. Inductive coil members are not included herein.


CLS 156/380.4
TXT With means moving one electrode toward the other electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 380.3 including mechanism for shifting an
    electrode between positions closer to and farther away from another
    electrode.

    (1)     Note.  Resiliently mounted (e.g., by springs to compensate for
    varying thicknesses of moving work) electrodes, without an additional
    mechanism for moving the electrode into and out of contact with the work,
    are not included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    350,    for a similar apparatus which includes means for controlling the
    shift automatically due to a process parameter.


CLS 156/380.5
TXT With means to change the configuration of a lamina, e.g., folding,
    deforming, etc:

    Subject matter under subclass 380.4 including a mechanism for reshaping a
    lamina to be bonded.

    (1)     Note.  The shape change must be one affecting the planar
    characteristics of the lamina or a surface of a lamina; merely compressing
    the workpiece does not indicate classification in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  An electrode may comprise the reshaping means, or the means
    may be another, nonelectrically involved, element.


CLS 156/380.6
TXT With electrode having a mechanical function; e.g., pressing, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 379.6 including an electric current-carrying
    mechanism which is configured to perform a mechanical function upon the
    workpiece, that is, to change the structure of, or transport the workpiece.


CLS 156/380.7
TXT Cutting, tearing, or breaking function:

    Subject matter under subclass 380.6 including an electrode which cuts,
    tears, or breaks the workpiece.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 170+ for a cutting machine having means for
    modifying or controlling the temperature of the tool or workpiece.

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, subclass 93.5 for a breaking or
    tearing apparatus, including means to apply a thermal shock to the work.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 33 and 53 for a process of abrading which
    includes temperature modification or temperature control of the work or
    abradant.


CLS 156/380.8
TXT Shaping or deforming function; e.g., patterned electrode, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 380.6 including an electrode which shapes or
    deforms the   workpiece, giving the workpiece a configuration determined by
    the configuration of the electrode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    subclasses 405+ for a shaping or deforming process which includes the
    direct application of electrical or wave energy to the work, especially
    subclasses 449+ for direct contact of electrode or electrical wire with
    precursor or workpiece.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 174+ for cognate apparatus.


CLS 156/380.9
TXT With radiant heater not touching work:

    Subject matter under subclass 379.6 including a radiant heater mechanism
    which is out of physical contact with the work.

    (1)     Note.  Sources of radiant heat include lasers, infrared rays, heat
    radiated from heated bars or wires, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 385+ for a radiant heater combined
    with a container, enclosure, or support for material to be heated.


CLS 156/381
TXT Apparatus under subclass 349 having walls completely surrounding the work,
    which walls form a space within which the work is bonded.

    (1)     Note.  The enclosing means must be separate from laminating
    pressure surfaces.  Mere press platens which envelope the work during the
    press step are thus excluded and such structures may be found in
    appropriate subclasses below.


CLS 156/382
TXT Apparatus under subclass 381 in which the treating chamber is fluid tight
    and mechanism is provided to change the pressure relative to the ambient
    pressure.


CLS 156/383
TXT Apparatus under subclass 349 combined with means adapted to make an article
    in which a loosely held or nonbonded part is enclosed or surrounded by at
    least two parts bonded to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     for processes for encasing movable or loosely confined elements
    between adhered laminae (e.g., drawstrings).


CLS 156/384
TXT Apparatus under subclass 349 in which the assembly or bonding operation is
    combined with means to produce characters or designs on the work by
    impression of type or dies or by impression from planographic or intaglio
    surfaces.

    (1)     Note.  To be included in this subclass the printing involved must
    be of the same general scope as the printing provided for Class 101,
    Printing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277,    for corresponding methods.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, appropriate subclasses for printing, per se.

    106,    Composition:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 31.01+ for marking
    compositions and subclass 31.17 for ink compositions.


CLS 156/385
TXT Apparatus under subclass 384 in which the bonding mechanism and the
    printing mechanism are actuated at the same time.


CLS 156/386
TXT Apparatus under subclass 385 in which the member which does the printing is
    the same member that applies the laminating pressure.


CLS 156/387
TXT Apparatus under subclass 384 in which the printing is done on a surface of
    the work which is subsequently adhered to form a laminated product.


CLS 156/388
TXT Apparatus under subclass 384 in which the printing operation is performed
    subsequent to the laminating operation.


CLS 156/389
TXT Apparatus under subclass 349 which includes means to prepare the apparatus
    for the bonding or assembly operation or to place it in better condition to
    perform its function or to remove superfluous and undesirable residue of
    the assembly or bonding operation from the structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 168 for apparatus cleaning means, and
    subclasses 171+ for repair, assembly or disassembly means combined with
    glassworking or treating means.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 70 for coating devices having means to
    clean or recondition the work support surface.


CLS 156/390
TXT Apparatus under subclass 349 in which the assembly or bonding means is
    combined with a means to apply a coating to the work which coating does not
    function as an adhesive to bond the parts together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278,    for methods of coating the nonadherent face of a lamina.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for coating apparatus,
    per se.


CLS 156/391
TXT Apparatus under subclass 349 in which the means bringing the parts into
    assembled relationship is (1) secured to and supported by one of the parts
    or (2) adapted to traverse the surface of one of the parts with the
    direction of travel being controlled by the part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    523+,   for devices which traverse the work and include a cutting mechanism
    and in which the direction of travel is controlled by the operator.

    574+,   for devices which traverse the work and in which the direction of
    travel is controlled by the operator.


CLS 156/392
TXT Apparatus under subclass 391 which includes means for bonding a flexible
    covering material about and into embracing engagement with a cylindrical
    body of indefinite length.

    (1)     Note.  Most of the patents in this subclass include a wrapping
    means which is supported by the pipe and travels along the pipe during the
    wrapping operation.


CLS 156/393
TXT Apparatus under subclass 349 in which the assembly or bonding mechanism is
    combined with a braiding or weaving means.

    (1)     Note.  To be included in this subclass the braiding or weaving must
    be of the same type as defined by Classes 87 and 139 respectively.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, for braiding, per se.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, for weaving, per se.


CLS 156/394.1
TXT Tire body building type:

    Apparatus under subclass 349 uniquely adapted for assembling the various
    components in manufacturing flexible or resilient articles for use on the
    periphery or rim of a vehicle wheel to absorb shock.

    (1)     Note.  To be classified in this and indented subclasses the patent
    must claim a device, or sub-combination of a device, specifically adapted
    for assembling the elements of a tire body either into the form of an
    endless article or an article which has a circular or horse shoe shaped
    cross section.  The device does not necessarily need to form a toroidal
    shaped article but may, for example, form a flat band to be later shaped
    into the form of a toroid.  The recitation in a claim of "a drum" is
    considered sufficient to classify a patent in this and indented subclasses
    and thus tire building drums, per se, are classified herein subclasses 414+.

    (2)     Note.  This and indented subclasses do not provide for forming
    inner tubes. Such devices are classified according to their assembly
    operation.  For example, splicing inner tubes is classified in subclass 503
    and devices for cutting a hole in a tube and securing a valve in the hole
    are in subclass 514.  Also, apparatus for forming an article of toroidal
    shape which is not disclosed as a tire is not classified here but is
    classified according to the various operations of the device.  For example,
    apparatus for winding and laminating is classified in subclasses 425+ and
    443+.

    This and indented subclasses do not provide for forming stock material of
    indefinite length for use in building tires, even though assembly of tire
    components may be involved, unless the stock is either circular or horse
    shoe shaped in cross section.  Such apparatus is classified according to
    the operation of the device.  For example, uniting indefinite length webs
    is in subclasses 543+ and severing fabric and reuniting to form bias fabric
    is in subclass 512.

    (3)     Note.  This and indented subclasses do not provide for forming bead
    rings, per se.  For such apparatus see subclasses 422+.

    (4)     Note.  This and indented subclasses provide for the filling of
    tires with a liquid material only when claimed in combination with
    apparatus for forming the tire body.  If no chemical reaction or change in
    physical state is involved and there is a mechanical relationship between
    the article support and the filling means the patent is classified in Class
    141, Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means.
    Devices for filling a tire with a fluent material in which there is no
    chemical reaction or change in physical state of the liquid and no
    relationship between the tire support and the filling means are classified
    in Class 137, Fluid Handling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for processes of balancing a tire during its manufacture.

    94+,    for methods of repairing or renewing tires.

    110.1+, for methods of making tires or tubes.

    381+,   for apparatus having walls completely surrounding the work, which
    walls form a space within which the work is bonded and which are separable
    from laminating pressure surfaces.

    584,    for devices for removing tread stock, beads and piles from a tire
    carcass, or for removing adhered tires from rims.

    909,    cross-reference art collection for apparatus for laminating a new
    tread, or tire portion to a used tire carcass wherein the new tire
    component is preformed and not reshaped by the laminating apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 104+ for
    apparatus for drying a hollow article, e.g., a tire, etc.

    81,     Tools, subclasses 15.3+ for repairing tools for tires.

    137,    Fluid Handling, for filling tires with a liquid.  See (4) Note
    above for line with this and other classes.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 65 for tire deflating means which draw by vacuum from the interior
    of the tire.  See other appropriate subclasses for devices for filling
    tires with a liquid and see (4) Note above for the line with this and other
    classes so far as filling is concerned.

    157,    Wheelwright Machines, subclass 13 for devices for grooving,
    slitting, or lacerating rubber tires, or tire bodies; and subclasses 14+
    for means which hold at least one component of a wheel in a particular
    position, or orientation either relative to (a) another component of the
    wheel when the wheel is assembled, or disassembled, or (b) a repairing, or
    surfacing tool working on the tire component of the wheel.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 92 for tube deflating by applying external
    pressure to collapse the tube.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 50.1+ for devices for spreading beads, or sidewalls of a tire
    when not combined with a tire building step.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 326 for reshaping toroidal shaped work pieces.

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses for devices which during a
    work treating operation, contacts a workpiece for the purpose of supporting
    the work, or preventing the movement of the work.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, appropriate subclasses, for heated reaction
    vessels, or autoclaves.

    451,    Abrading, for an abrading process performed on a tire casing or for
    an apparatus for performing an abrading process on a tire casing.


CLS 156/395
TXT Apparatus under subclass 394.1 for separating an adhered self-supporting
    protective cover material from an element prior to uniting the protected
    surface to itself or to an additional lamina.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    584,    for apparatus for delaminating not combined with tire building.


CLS 156/396
TXT Apparatus under subclass 394.1 which includes the association of more than
    a single building drum, and/or means for moving a single building drum
    serially from one assembly or shaping station to another.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found, for example, manufacturing
    plants which continuously produce tires by an assembly line type of
    operation.

    (2)     Note.  For the definition of building drum see subclass 394.1.


CLS 156/397
TXT Apparatus under subclass 394.1 for building tires directly from strands
    and/or narrow tapes without first assembling them to form a fabric.

    (1)     Note.  A strand is any workpiece of great length relative to its
    cross section and of generally equal cross section height and width.  For
    the purpose of this subclass, a narrow tape is any workpiece of great
    length and with a width greater than its thickness, said width being such
    that several widths in side-by-side relationship are required to cover the
    total surface area being formed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for corresponding methods.


CLS 156/398
TXT Apparatus under subclass 394.1 especially designed to perform a shaping,
    cutting, uniting or assembling operation on a tire in the area of the bead.

    (1)     Note.  The mere recitation that beads are present in a tire or that
    a building form is adapted to receive a bead is not sufficient to place a
    patent in this subclass.  Such patents are classified according to their
    assembly means.  The claims must recite some specific means which
    compensates for the fact that a bead is present or is being incorporated
    into the tire. For example, a stitching element which merely traverses the
    area of the bead is placed in subclasses 408+ and not here while a
    stitching element designed to fold fabric around a bead is placed in this
    and indented subclasses.


CLS 156/399
TXT Apparatus under subclass 398 for cutting away excess fabric which extends
    beyond the bead after shaping the fabric to conform to the bead.


CLS 156/400
TXT Apparatus under subclass 398 which includes means for supporting fabric in
    the form of a cylinder with a bead ring positioned over at least one end of
    the fabric cylinder and additional means for turning the fabric back over
    the bead ring.


CLS 156/401
TXT Apparatus under subclass 400 in which an expansible impervious container
    adapted to be inflated is placed between the end of the fabric cylinder and
    the fabric support so that on inflation the bag will turn the fabric over
    the bead.


CLS 156/402
TXT Apparatus under subclass 400 in which a rotary body turns the cylinder end
    back over the bead ring.


CLS 156/403
TXT Apparatus under subclass 398 with means to aid in guiding or aligning the
    bead ring with respect to the tire body during the assembly operation.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note in subclass 398 for the line with regard to the
    degree of structure necessary to place a patent in this group of subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes means to guide a bead ring into
    position even though the assembly operation is done by hand.


CLS 156/404
TXT Apparatus under subclass 394.1 in which the resiliency of the tire is
    produced either by the resiliency of the material used in construction, or
    the material used has entrapped gases therein, which gas is at atmospheric
    pressure or less when the tire is not under load.

    (1)     Note.  For the line between this and other classes with regard to
    filling tires with liquid see (4) Note of subclass 394.1.

    (2)     Note.  Device for assembling tires which are intended to be filled
    with gas under pressure (i.e., pneumatic tires) to provide resiliency are
    classified according to the particular assembly means claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112+,   for corresponding methods.


CLS 156/405.1
TXT With fabric or tread stock feeding means:

    Apparatus under subclass 394.1 which includes specific means for feeding
    and/or controlling the feed of fabric or tread material from a supply to
    the assembly station.

    (1)     Note.  To be included here, the patent must include more than a
    nominal recitation of a fabric source.

    (2)     Note.  Where the claims do not include a laminating means or an
    assembly means for laminating, e.g., a tire-building drum, etc., the patent
    is not properly classified in this class (156).  See the notes to the
    materials-handling classes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    395,    for feeding means which include means delaminating a protective
    lamina from the fabric or tread fed to the assembly means.

    397,    for means feeding strands or narrow tapes to a tire assembly
    station.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for assembling and
    sewing together tire plies when no laminating elements are provided for.

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, appropriate subclasses
    for means for keeping a gravity-fed material on a given path of travel.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses for a driven
    conveyor made up of several elements and generally mounted on a common
    frame.

    212,    Traversing Hoists, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for lifting
    a load and shifting it laterally.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for web-feeding devices in general, which do not depend upon the leading or
    trailing edges of the web for their function.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 563+ and 564+ for means
    to control unwinding and drive means to cause unwinding, respectively, in
    general use.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or and Delivering, appropriate subclasses for sheet
    conveying, per se, and in combination with certain other operations.

    294,    Handing:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, appropriate subclasses
    for devices combined with handles, terminal elements, or attachments
    peculiarly adapted for engaging supporting articles or materials for
    handling or manipulating purposes.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, appropriate subclasses for material
    or article handling apparatus not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 156/406
TXT Apparatus under subclass 405.1 which includes more than one source of
    material and means for selecting from which source the material is to be
    supplied.

    (1)     Note.  The various sources may supply either the same or different
    types of material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 560+ for selectively
    useable elongated material supplies available for end splicing.


CLS 156/406.2
TXT For transporting discrete ring-shaped lamina:

    Subject matter under subclass 405.1 including means for feeding a lamina
    which has been formed into an endless ring.

    (1)     Note.  The ring need not be circular, but may be oval, etc.


CLS 156/406.4
TXT With cutting, heating, laminating, or shaping means upstream of assembling
    means:

    Subject matter under subclass 405.1 including means for treating the fed
    material by changing its shape, cutting it or raising its temperature, said
    treating being accomplished before the material arrives at the assembly
    station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    906,    for a collection of patents drawn to process and apparatus for the
    manufacture of tire components prior to the assembly of all components on
    the tire-buildingdrum.


CLS 156/406.6
TXT Stretching means:

    Subject matter under subclass 406.4 in which the shaping means applies
    tension to the material to elongate it.

    (1)     Note.  A means for merely tensioning a web fed to the assembly
    means does not determine a patent for this subclass unless there is a
    positive recitation that the web is stretched.

    (2)     Note.  Where the assembly means itself, e.g., a tire-building drum,
    etc., is part of the combination of elements which performs the only
    stretching; the stretching means is not considered "upstream".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclasses 71+ for a devices for
    stretching cloth, per se.


CLS 156/407
TXT Apparatus under subclass 394.1 for supporting a tire or tire building drum
    for rotation in which the rotating means either has a center of rotation
    which is eccentric to the center of rotation of the tire or drives the tire
    from its external periphery.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes devices in which the tire body is
    assembled over two or more rotating supports in such a manner that the tire
    body resembles a belt running over pulleys.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    457,    for centerless core rotating apparatus in which the article being
    formed is not a tire.


CLS 156/408
TXT Apparatus under subclass 394.1 which includes a means for supporting and
    rotating a tire and a pressing means which wipes or travels along the
    surface of the tire during rotation.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, stitching or pressing
    elements which cover substantially the width of the tire and bear against
    the tire during its rotation.


CLS 156/409
TXT Apparatus under subclass 408 in which the pressing means traverses the
    surface of the tire in more than one direction.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, stitching or pressing
    elements which bear against the surface of the tire and traverse back and
    forth across the surface always exerting pressure in the same direction
    even though the tire surface being traversed may not be flat.


CLS 156/410
TXT Apparatus under subclass 409 in which the pressing means includes means to
    change the direction in which force is applied to the pressing means.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, stitching or pressing
    elements which bear against and traverse the surface of a rotating tire and
    always exert pressure at approximately right angles to the surface being
    traversed. The stitching or pressing element is designed to change their
    direction of force as the plane of the surface being pressed changes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    398+,   and especially subclass 402, for devices for folding carcass fabric
    about a bead in which the folding and pressing means may have a changing
    direction of force.


CLS 156/411
TXT Apparatus under subclass 410 in which the force applied to the pressing
    means in the direction of rotational axis of the tire is provided by an
    operator.

    (1)     Note.  Devices in which a manual force is applied in a direction
    parallel to the axis of rotation of the tire are classified above and not
    here unless claimed in combination with a manual force toward the axis of
    rotation.


CLS 156/412
TXT Apparatus under subclass 408 in which the pressing takes the shape of the
    surface being pressed.

    (1)     Note.  The pressing surface may either be made of deformable
    material or it may be made up of a group of press elements mounted side by
    side on resilient supports such that each element can shift relative to the
    others to change the over all configuration of the press surface.


CLS 156/413
TXT Apparatus under subclass 408 which includes more than one pressing element
    positioned at spaced points around the periphery of the tire and
    simultaneously traversing the surface of the tire.


CLS 156/414
TXT Apparatus under subclass 394.1 limited to a rotatable form or support which
    is circular in cross section with respect to its axis of rotation with or
    without support or mounting means therefor and especially adapted to have
    assembled about its periphery the component elements of a tire.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note of subclass 407 for the line with regard to
    devices which use two or more rotating elements to form a single support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    157,    Wheelwright Machines, subclasses 14+ for means which hold at least
    one component of a wheel in a particular position or orientation either
    relative to (a) another component of the wheel when the wheel is assembled
    or disassembled, or (b) a repairing or surfacing tool working on the tire
    component of the wheel.


CLS 156/415
TXT Apparatus under subclass 414 which includes means to vary the width of the
    peripheral surface of the drum in a direction parallel to its axis of
    rotation which change of width may also result in a change in the diameter
    of the drum.


CLS 156/416
TXT Apparatus under subclass 414 in which the drum is either formed of
    impervious expansible or deformable material and adapted to have fluid
    applied to its interior under pressure to increase drum diameter or the
    drum is made of deformable material and adapted to temporarily change its
    shape as a result of an external force.


CLS 156/417
TXT Apparatus under subclass 414 in which the building drum is provided with
    means to reduce its diameter either by disassembling or shifting the
    relative position of the elements which make up the periphery of the drum.


CLS 156/418
TXT Apparatus under subclass 417 in which the means for shifting the relative
    position of the elements which make up the periphery of the drum include a
    toothed bar, the teeth of which engage the teeth of a gear.


CLS 156/419
TXT Apparatus under subclass 417 in which the means for shifting the relative
    position of the elements which make up the periphery of the drum include an
    elastic body which recovers its original shape when released after being
    distorted.


CLS 156/420
TXT Apparatus under subclass 417 in which the means for shifting the relative
    position of the elements which make up the periphery of the drum includes a
    mechanism in which force is applied to a joint between links.


CLS 156/421
TXT Apparatus under subclass 394.1 which is especially adapted to travel along
    the surface of a tire body and apply pressure thereto for the purpose of
    pressing superimposed layers into an adhering relationship.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include rollers, per se, or rollers
    with handles merely because they are disclosed as useful as tire stitching
    tools.  To be included here the stitcher must either include some structure
    which renders the device useful only as a tire stitching tool or it must be
    claimed in combination with some supporting or manipulating structure other
    than a handle.  This subclass includes, for example, cylindrical stitchers
    with a surface shaped to conform to the cross section of a tire or a
    stitcher especially adapted to fit over a bead.  492, Roll or Roller.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the notes thereunder.


CLS 156/421.2
TXT Tire chamber and means regulating interior casing pressure:

    Apparatus under subclass 394.1 which includes either (a) a chamber
    incompletely surrounding the tire casing, or work with a means for
    establishing pressure within the interior of the chamber, or (b) a chamber
    completely surrounding the work which is, or becomes inseparable from the
    laminating surfaces with a means for establishing pressure within the
    interior of the chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    381+    for apparatus having walls completely surrounding the work, which
    walls form a space within which the work is bonded and which are separable
    from laminating pressure surfaces.

    909,    cross-reference art collection, for apparatus laminating a new
    tread, or tire portion to a used tire carcass wherein the new tire
    component is preformed and not reshaped by the laminating apparatus

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, appropriate subclasses, for a method, or apparatus
    for filling tires with a liquid.  See (4) Note under subclass 394.1 above
    for the line with this and other classes.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 65 for tire deflating means which draw by vacuum from the interior
    of the tire.  See other appropriate subclasses for devices for filling
    tires with a liquid and see (4) Note under subclass 394.1 above for the
    line with this and other classes so far as filling is concerned.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 92 for tube deflating by applying external
    pressure to collapse the tube.


CLS 156/421.4
TXT With means for folding lamina while on drum:

    Apparatus under subclass 394.1 with a means for folding, or doubling one
    portion of a wide band, (or tread), or tube of flexible material over upon
    another portion of the band, etc., while on a drum.

    (1)     Note.  The apparatus of this subclass is used for making a
    laminated band for a pneumatic tire casing.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for the folding of an
    envelope which is placed around the external surface of a tire casing.


CLS 156/421.6
TXT Tire support with pressing or heating means:

    Apparatus under subclass 394.1 which includes a base means for supporting a
    tire and means for applying pressure, or heat to the tire.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus for holding tires in order to bond trim strips, or
    whitewalls thereto are classified herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses, for apparatus for subjecting
    material to compressive force wherein no step, or mechanism peculiar to
    laminating is recited, or claimed.

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses, for devices which, during a
    work treating operation, contacts a workpiece for the purpose of supporting
    the work, or preventing the movement of the work.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 426+ for devices
    comprising a mobile support having means for engaging the outer
    circumference of a wheel, or wheellike object to support and transport it
    in upright position and including (a) means to handle, or manipulate it
    while in upright position, or (b) means to secure the load in upright
    position during transportation thereof, or (c) means for directing, or
    loading a wheel onto said support.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, appropriate subclasses, for heated reaction
    vessels, or autoclaves.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 44+ for apparatus for molding, or vulcanizing tires in a mold
    combined with means to apply fluid pressure thereto.


CLS 156/421.8
TXT Ring-shaped lamina stretching means:

    Apparatus under subclass 394.1 which includes a mechanism to stretch a
    formed tire band, or tread, or another endless belt-type lamina.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclasses 71+ for devices for
    expanding a running web of cloth when not claimed in combination with a
    tire assembling apparatus.

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclasses 102+ for devices for
    smoothing a fabric merely by stretching wherein the fabric is held in a
    stationary, or immovable position when not claimed in combination with a
    tire assembling apparatus.


CLS 156/422
TXT Apparatus under subclass 349 having a rotating mandrel or former adapted
    for winding tire bead rings, of great diameter relative to their axial
    length and thickness, from indefinite length material and adhering the
    layers of material together.

    (1)     Note.  To be included in this subclass the ring-like article
    produced must be disclosed as useful as tire bead rings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136,    for the corresponding methods.

    433+,   for uniting strands to form articles other than tire beads.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, for winding, unwinding,
    tensioning, or guiding related structure of general use.

    245,    Wire Fabrics and Structure, subclass 1.5 for tire bead rings, and
    the method of making the same, when formed  primarily of wire and not
    involving a laminating step.


CLS 156/423
TXT Apparatus under subclass 349 having means inserting a part or portion
    thereof within enclosing or confining surfaces of a second part and causing
    the inserted part to be secured thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    293+,   for processes for inserting a lamina in a hole, aperture or recess
    of a lamina and adhering it to the sidewalls thereof.

    392,    for laminating devices of the pipe wrapping type.

    393,    for devices having means encasing a separate nonadhered part
    between adhered laminae.


CLS 156/424
TXT Apparatus under subclass 423 in which the device is peculiarly adapted for
    securing the glass body of a lamp or space discharge device to an end cap
    or closure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    subclasses 60+ for apparatus there provided for for the manufacture of
    lamps and space discharge devices.


CLS 156/425
TXT Apparatus under subclass 349 which includes means to progressively bend or
    wrap an indefinite running length work around a base in such a manner that
    convolutions are formed with each convolution axially displaced along the
    base from the preceding convolution.

    (1)     Note.  For the purpose of this subclass the base may be any
    structure upon which the material is wound regardless of its shape and
    whether it is later removed or becomes part of the article. The actual
    length of the material being wound is immaterial so long as it is handled
    as an indefinite or running length work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for methods of forming a tire by spirally winding a strand or tape.

    169+,   for methods of winding filaments.

    184+,   and especially subclass 195, for methods of winding webs or sheets.

    397,    for apparatus for forming a tire by spirally winding a strand or
    tape.

    443+,   for apparatus for winding other than spiral.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, for winding, unwinding,
    tensioning, or guiding related structure of general use.


CLS 156/426
TXT Apparatus under subclass 425 which includes means to sever the work such
    that it can be opened and removed from the base in the form of a sheet or
    web.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174,    for similar methods in which the wound material is strands.

    193,    for similar methods in which the wound material is a web or sheet.


CLS 156/427
TXT Apparatus under subclass 426 in which the material which is severed and
    removed from the base includes strands which are secured to a web or sheet.


CLS 156/428
TXT Apparatus under subclass 425 in which (1) the base is removed from the
    wound body and the article which is produced by the wound material is of
    indefinite or running length or (2) the base is itself of indefinite or
    running length and becomes part of the article being produced.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for methods of covering electrical conductors which may include a
    winding operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 3+ for
    apparatus there provided for in which one or more strands are spirally
    wound about a core to form a strand of indefinite length.


CLS 156/429
TXT Apparatus under subclass 428 in which the base on which the material wound
    is caused to rotate about an internal axis to effect the winding operation.


CLS 156/430
TXT Apparatus under subclass 428 in which more than one indefinite length
    element is wound around the base.

    (1)     Note.  The elements may be wound sequentially or simultaneously.


CLS 156/431
TXT Apparatus under subclass 430 in which the base around which the indefinite
    length material is wound is generally circular in cross section.


CLS 156/432
TXT Apparatus under subclass 431 in which more than one means is provided for
    winding the indefinite length material said means being axially spaced
    along the base.


CLS 156/433
TXT Apparatus under subclass 349 having means adhering at least one flexible
    strand, rod, tube or filament of indefinite extension to some other part or
    for adhering a portion thereof to itself.

    (1)     Note.  A flexible strand, rod, tube or filament is any workpiece of
    great length relative to its cross-section and of generally equal
    cross-section height and width.  The section size is of no particular
    significance so far as the subject matter of these subclasses in concerned
    just so long as the above qualifications are met.  Thus in this and the
    indented subclasses may be found wrapping a web about an endless flexible
    hose, gathering indefinite fibers to form a rod, applying a web to a
    running length flexible sponge rubber core.  Short finite lengths of
    filaments, handled individually as units, or alternatively, handled as a
    mass of fibers are not provided for in these subclasses and rather may be
    found in other subclasses in this class based on the particular manner of
    handling.  For example, devices for forming self-sustaining bodies of
    particulate material may be found in subclasses 369+; means  delivering
    short, individually handled rods onto a web may be found in subclasses
    552+, etc.

    (2)     Note.  The other part may itself be a flexible strand or filament.
    Note, for example, subclass 441 in which strands are united to strands only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166+,   for processes for adhering flexible filamentary material while in
    indefinite or running length

    369+,   and see (1) Note above.

    392,    for work secured or guided laminating devices of the pipe wrapping
    type.

    393,    for laminating devices combined with braiding or weaving means.

    397,    for devices building tires from strands or narrow tapes.

    422,    for strand or filament uniting devices of the ring winding type.

    425+,   for strand or filament uniting devices in which the strand or
    filament is spirally wound about a core, mandrel or workpiece.  Generally
    no cross references are made from subclasses 425+ to the instant subclasses
    so to search for spirally wound strands a search must be made in subclasses
    425+.

    502,    for means splicing flexible indefinite length bodies end-to-end
    which bodies are not strands but are rather films, tapes or belts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, for a device for winding elongated
    material.


CLS 156/434
TXT Apparatus under subclass 433 in which means place discrete elements one
    after the other and spaced from each other between and transversely of the
    axis of at least two parallel strands and adheres them thereto.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found, for example, devices for
    making spaced multiple conductor transmission lines.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65+,    for processes of assembly and bonding of multiple spaced elements
    between and transverse of parallel webs, e.g., venetian blind ladders.

    552,    for laminating devices having means bringing articles into
    association with an endless web.


CLS 156/435
TXT Apparatus under subclass 433 uniquely adapted to the manufacture of a
    textile material having short filaments extending generally perpendicular
    to the plane of the material.

    (1)     Note.  In these devices the filaments must be united or bonded
    while still of running or indefinite length.  They may then be sheared to
    produce the pile fabric.  The typical method involves steps of continuously
    looping parallel strands, bonding the loops to a backing and then shearing
    the loop tops to form the pile.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for processes for setting or embedding tufts or discrete pile
    elements onto a backing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 308+ for means projecting solid
    particulate material against work to be coated therewith (for example,
    flocking devices).


CLS 156/436
TXT Apparatus under subclass 433 in which the running length flexible strand,
    rod, tube or filament is bonded to a running length flexible web.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    425+    and other appropriate subclasses, for means spirally winding
    strands.

    543     for apparatus for bonding flexible running length web to articles
    other than those provided for here.


CLS 156/437
TXT Apparatus under subclass 436 combined with means to continually form the
    flexible web from a mass of material by a plastic working or molding
    operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500+,   for other laminating apparatus combined with molding or plastic
    shaping means.


CLS 156/438
TXT Apparatus under subclass 436 combined with means to cause the web to be
    doubled on itself, the line of fold paralleling the longitudinal axis of
    the web.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    461+,   for other laminating means combined with means folding a web
    longitudinally.


CLS 156/439
TXT Apparatus under subclass 436 in which at least a portion of the flexible
    strandlike material is disposed crosswise of the length of web to which it
    is secured.

    (1)     Note.  Diagonal or bias disposition is also considered crosswise
    for the purpose of this subclass.


CLS 156/440
TXT Apparatus under subclass 439 in which the means feeding the flexible
    strand-like material is mounted for back and forth movement transversely of
    the axis of the web.


CLS 156/441
TXT Apparatus under subclass 433 having means bringing strand-like workpieces
    only into adhered relationship one to the other.

    (1)     Note.  The product resulting from the assembly and adhering
    operation of this subclass may be subsequently adhered to some other part,
    but to be classified here, at least one of the operational steps must be
    the adherance of strand-like materials only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180+,   for process for associating filaments only to form an article.


CLS 156/441.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 349.1 uniquely adapted to adhere the flap of a
    flat flexible receptacle to the body thereof.


CLS 156/442
TXT Apparatus under subclass 441.5 combined with means for applying and
    adhering a stamp or label to the receptacle.


CLS 156/442.1
TXT Apparatus under subclass 441.5 combined with means for applying a
    distorting force to the envelope so as to permanently deflect at least a
    portion of it out of its normal plane.

    (1)     Note.  A machine which manipulates envelope flaps from an opened or
    extended position to a closed position (i.e., overlying the receptacle
    body) is considered to be bending within the scope of this subclass,
    regardless of whether the envelope has been previously creased.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    443+,   for a patent to bending and folding means combined with bonding
    means, of general utility.


CLS 156/442.2
TXT Apparatus under subclass 441.5 combined with means for feeding the
    receptacle to or through the work station.


CLS 156/442.3
TXT Apparatus under subclass 442.2 in which the feeding means moves alternately
    backward and forward in a rectilinear path for transporting the receptacle
    to the work station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    572,    for a patent to apparatus for separating articles from a bulk
    source by means of a translating picker.


CLS 156/442.4
TXT Apparatus under subclass 441.5 in which a device is particularly adapted to
    move as a unit over the surface of the receptacle being sealed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    574+,   for a patent to apparatus of the work traversing type having
    general utility.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 264+ for a moistener having a porous
    or absorbent applicator to which such work as an envelope (or stamp) is
    brought (e.g., sponge cup).


CLS 156/443
TXT Apparatus under subclass 349 having means applying a distorting force to a
    workpiece to permanently deflect at least a portion of it out of its normal
    plane.

    (1)     Note.  The temporary distortion of a workpiece due to handling is
    excluded from this subclass.  Thus, winding or unwinding a web for
    temporary storage or feed to the device, bending a web around feed rollers
    on the way to or from the work station, festooning a web for storage are
    examples of work bending excluded from this subclass in that the distortion
    is temporary.

    (2)     Note.  The devices of this and the indented subclass do not shape
    by plastically deforming the work such as by an embossing molding or
    casting operation.  In the instant subclass the work does not change
    materially in section thickness during the working operation other than by
    doubling over, etc.  This latter feature is characteristic of a bending or
    folding operation as distinguished from a shaping operation involving
    plastic flow.  For shaping operations involving plastic flow search must be
    made in appropriate subclasses below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196+,   for laminating processes involving a bending step.

    346+,   for plaster board making apparatus having folding means for a
    facing sheet.

    392,    for laminating devices of the pipe wrapping type.

    393,    for laminating devices having braiding or weaving means.

    394.1+, and other appropriate subclasses for tire building devices which
    may include means to bend or wind a lamina.

    422,    for laminating devices of ring winding type.

    425+,   for laminating devices having spiral winding means for the work.

    433,    for indefinite or running length strand or filament uniting devices
    which may have filament bending means.

    442.1,  for a patent to envelope sealing means combined with means to fold
    the envelope flap.

    500,    and see (2) Note above.

    581+,   for laminating presses, per se, having a relieved or configured
    pressing face.

    585+,   for sheet or web deforming or reshaping means, per se.


CLS 156/444
TXT Apparatus under subclass 443 in which means direct a pneumatic blast
    directly against the work to cause it to bend.


CLS 156/445
TXT Apparatus under subclass 443 in which means are provided to cause the
    workpiece being shaped to assume the shape and embrace a spherical core.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found, for example, device for
    applying cover material to playing balls.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186,    for laminating processes including a step of winding a web or sheet
    about a spherical core.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 435+ and 436 for a
    device for winding elongated material on a spherical core.


CLS 156/446
TXT Apparatus under subclass 443 in which an arbor or a workpiece is supported
    or mounted for rotation about an internal axis and means are provided to
    bend a flexible sheet about the arbor or workpiece during rotation thereof.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the rotating of the mandrel or article
    generally causes the progressive bending of the flexible material about at
    least a portion of the peripheral surface thereof.

    (2)     Note.  Most of the patents in subclasses 394+ apply a lamina to a
    rotating mandrel or an article supported thereon in building a tire.  The
    majority of these devices (subclasses 394+) are specialized to tire
    building and therefore relatively few cross-references have been placed
    between the groups of subclasses. However in some instances a complete
    search requires investigation of both groups of subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    394.1+, and see (2) Note above.


CLS 156/447
TXT Apparatus under subclass 446 having means causing the flexible sheet to be
    applied to a particular selected portion of the periphery.

    (1)     Note.  The devices of this subclass all apply the sheet to a
    pre-designated area of the rotating article as distinguished from devices
    in which the sheet is placed in a random manner and by chance to the
    periphery of the article.


CLS 156/448
TXT Apparatus under subclass 446 in which the workpiece in addition to
    rotating, has an additional motion which bodily displaces the workpiece.


CLS 156/449
TXT Apparatus under subclass 448 in which the motion of translation of the
    workpiece is caused by contact of the periphery thereof with a supporting
    surface, which surface is traversed during rotation.


CLS 156/450
TXT Apparatus under subclass 449 in which an indefinite length flexible web
    material is applied to the rotating mandrel or article and wound thereon.


CLS 156/451
TXT Apparatus under subclass 449 in which the rolling mandrel or article
    adheres to and rolls across the surface of the end sheet of a stack of
    sheets and in rolling causes the sheet to be removed from the stack.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    564,    for other devices having a magazine stack directly contacting
    separate work.


CLS 156/452
TXT Apparatus under subclass 451 in which the rolling motion is caused by
    downward passage of the workpiece under the influence of gravity.


CLS 156/453
TXT Apparatus under subclass 451 in which the rolling motion of the workpiece
    is caused by an endless belt contacting the periphery thereof.


CLS 156/454
TXT Apparatus under subclass 449 in which the rolling motion of the workpiece
    is caused by downward passage of the workpiece under the influence of
    gravity.


CLS 156/455
TXT Apparatus under subclass 449 in which the rolling motion of the workpiece
    is caused by an endless belt contacting the perihery thereof.


CLS 156/456
TXT Apparatus under subclass 448 in which the workpiece moves about an axis
    external thereof, the path of motion being curved.


CLS 156/457
TXT Apparatus under subclass 446 in which the rotating mandrel or article is
    supported at or adjacent its periphery.

    (1)     Note.  In the case of a hollow article, such as a large diameter
    pipe, it may be supported at its inner periphery rather than the outer
    peripheral surface yet still fall within the scope of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    407,    for centerless core tire building apparatus and see (2) Note of
    subclass 446.


CLS 156/458
TXT Apparatus under subclass 446 in which work handling means presents rotating
    mandrels or articles one after the other to a position where a lamina is
    secured thereto.


CLS 156/459
TXT Apparatus under subclass 443 in which the distorted work is of elongated or
    attenuated material of indeterminate or indiscriminate linear dimension.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    543+,   for devices laminating at least on indefinite or running length
    flexible web and see the notes thereto for the locus of other art.


CLS 156/460
TXT Apparatus under subclass 459 in which means apply the flexible web to an
    endless ring or belt.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found, for example, devices for
    covering tire bead rings or endless drive belts by wrapping or winding a
    fabric cover thereabout.


CLS 156/461
TXT Apparatus under subclass 459 having means bending the web, the line of the
    bend extending in the direction of the length of the web.


CLS 156/462
TXT Apparatus under subclass 461 in which means cause the web to be distorted
    in section transverse of the axis of the web into a plurality of reversing
    curves.


CLS 156/463
TXT Apparatus under subclass 461 in which separate spaced forming means act on
    the same portion of the web one after the other.


CLS 156/464
TXT Apparatus under subclass 461 having means bringing separate finite length
    articles into association with the web one after the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    552,    for apparatus having means bringing articles into association with
    a traveling flexible web.


CLS 156/465
TXT Apparatus under subclass 461 in which separate areas of a single web are
    brought into physical contact one with the other for bonding of the areas
    to each other.


CLS 156/466
TXT Apparatus under subclass 465 peculiarly adapted to make an indefinite
    length hollow body by joining the edges only of flexible web.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203,    for processes for longitudinally bending and edge joining a one
    piece blank to form a tube.


CLS 156/467
TXT Apparatus under subclass 461 for joining longitudinally aligned webs one to
    the other and in which the webs are either (1) of different widths or (2)
    displaced laterally with respect to each other so that their centers do not
    coincide.


CLS 156/468
TXT Apparatus under subclass 459 in which means cause the web to conform to and
    be bonded to a configured lamina.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    475,    for other devices bending a lamina to the configuration of the base
    to which it is bonded.


CLS 156/469
TXT Apparatus under subclass 459 in which shape determining means are removed
    from the configured web in the plane of the web and transversely of the web
    longitudinal axis.


CLS 156/470
TXT Apparatus under subclass 459 in which means direct a flexible web into
    association for bonding with the web that has been distorted.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found, for example, devices for
    corrugating a web and then bonding a facing sheet thereto.


CLS 156/471
TXT Apparatus under subclass 479 having means maintaining the distorted
    configuration of the shaped web and means directing the separate web into
    association with the distorted web while still on the distortion
    maintaining means.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found devices inserted into the
    corrugations of a web to prevent them from collapsing under laminating
    pressure.


CLS 156/472
TXT Apparatus under subclass 471 in which the shape retaining means is
    cylindrical in section and has longitudinally extending recesses in the
    outer periphery.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 604 for metallic
    stock having corrugations.


CLS 156/473
TXT Apparatus under subclass 472 having a discrete means maintaining the shaped
    web on the retaining means.


CLS 156/474
TXT Apparatus under subclass 459 having means causing the web to be
    progressively and repeatedly folded back on itself to produce a zig-zag
    folded product.

    (1)     Note.  The pleated product is generally distinguished in that the
    faces of the folded product are in contact with one another as
    distinguished from a corrugated product in which the walls of the
    corrugations are spaced.


CLS 156/475
TXT Apparatus under subclass 443 having means distorting a workpiece against
    and into the configuration of a nonplanar base lamina to which it is
    adhered.

    (1)     Note.  Shaping assembled and/or bonded laminae together is not
    provided for in this subclass.  In the subject matter of the instant group
    the base lamina remains unchanged in shape.

    (2)     Note.  Mere resilient platen surfaces to conform to surface
    irregularities of the lamina without changing its gross configuration are
    not provided for here.  The devices must change bodily the configuration of
    the lamina.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212,    for process of bending or reshaping a lamina to assume the shape of
    a configured lamina while in contact therewith.

    383,    for devices having means encasing a separate nonadhered part
    between adhered laminae.

    392,    for work secured or guided laminating devices of the pipe wrapping
    type.

    394.1   for tire body building devices which may, is some instances, have
    means to cause a lamina to assume the configuration of a base to which it
    is secured.

    446+,   for devices in which a flexible sheet is secured to and assumes the
    configuration of a rotating mandrel or article.

    459+,   for laminating devices having means shaping an indefinite or
    running length flexible web and in which the web may be caused to assume
    the configuration of the lamina to which it is secured.

    581+,   for presses or platen surfaces, per se, having a relieved or
    configured pressing face there provided for and see the notes thereto for
    the locus of other press structures, per se.


CLS 156/476
TXT Apparatus under subclass 475 in which more than one workpiece is presented
    to work stations and each workpiece is distorted or shaped by discrete work
    means.

    (1)     Note.  The work means usually act on the separate workpieces
    simultaneously but the subclasses are not necessarily so limited in that
    separate work may be alternately acted on by the separate work means.


CLS 156/477.1
TXT Plural, distinct, sequential bending or folding means:

    Apparatus under subclass 475 in which separate working elements
    sequentially bend or fold the same workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  The separate means may act on the same area of a workpiece
    to progressively shape it, or they may act on different areas of a single
    workpiece.

    (2)     Note.  A means which merely forces workpiece into assembled
    relation or holds them is such relation is not considered a bending or
    folding means. Likewise, a means which merely smooths a workpiece portion
    which has already been bent or folded out of its original plane is not
    considered a bending or folding means.  Thus, this subclass requires at
    least two folding and/or bending means, acting one after the other, other
    than whatever means are employed to push, press, hold, or smooth workpiece
    or workpiece portion. Alternatively, a pushing, pressing, holding, or
    smoothing means must also perform a bending or folding function if it is to
    considered one of the plural sequential means.


CLS 156/478
TXT Apparatus under subclass 477 in which the bending means make separate bends
    and the axis of bend or line of fold of at least two of the bends meet at a
    point.

    (1)     Note.  In this and the indented subclasses may be found, for
    example, devices for casing books covers in which a flexible sheet is bent
    around at least two contiguous edges of a board, also devices for bending
    the edges of U-shaped pocketbook frames, etc.


CLS 156/479
TXT Apparatus under subclass 478 in which the bending means causes portions of
    a sheet to be bent around the edge portion of a sheet-like lamina.


CLS 156/480
TXT Apparatus under subclass 479 have in addition means compressing the folded
    sheet at the junction of the intersecting axis.

    (1)     Note.  The devices are usually for the purpose of flattening the
    gathered folded material.


CLS 156/481
TXT Apparatus under subclass 477.1 in which the bending means act in sequence
    to effect a curvilinear contour to the part being joined.


CLS 156/482
TXT Apparatus under subclass 477.1 in which the direction of action of the
    sequential means is in separate planes which intersect.

    (1)     Note.  For example, a label is applied to the side of a box and one
    set of means bends it over the ends thereof with part of the label
    extending beyond the box.  Another set of means acting transversely thereto
    then bends the end back over the opposite side of the box.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    459,    for means bending an endless web to the configuration of a base
    which bending may result in intersecting bend axis.


CLS 156/483
TXT Apparatus under subclass 475 in which the work travels in a single
    direction through an opening or passageway, which passageway is of smaller
    linear dimension than a sheet to be applied to the work and traveling
    therethrough with the work.

    (1)     Note.  In these patents the work does not reciprocate relative to
    the passageway, rather it moves through and beyond it.  Also, the work
    moves rather than the bending means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    486+,   for apparatus in which the moving member moves past the work to
    perfect the bending.


CLS 156/484
TXT Apparatus under subclass 483 in which the sheet to be adhered and bent is
    carried on and disposed across the passageway, the work moving into contact
    therewith.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 17+ for binder applying devices in which the
    binder to be applied is supported across a passageway for the material.


CLS 156/485
TXT Apparatus under subclass 484 having means discrete from the passageway to
    perfect the bend.


CLS 156/486
TXT Apparatus under subclass 475 in which the distorting member wipes along or
    traverses the surface being shaped.


CLS 156/487
TXT Apparatus under subclass 486 in which the work contacting surface of the
    deforming means is comprised of a brush-like element.


CLS 156/488
TXT Apparatus under subclass 486 in which the distorting means comprises a
    flexible mass of material, bodily reshaped to the configuration of the work
    by pressure there against.


CLS 156/489
TXT Apparatus under subclass 486 in which the distorting means comprises at
    least two movable members urged toward one another to apply pressure to
    work positioned therebetween.


CLS 156/490
TXT Apparatus under subclass 489 in which a member is provided other than the
    work to cause separation of the biased members against the biasing force.


CLS 156/491
TXT Apparatus under subclass 490 in which a cam element between the members
    causes separation thereof.


CLS 156/492
TXT Apparatus under subclass 475 in which a rigid member is pivoted and is
    swung about the pivot to cause deformation of the lamina.

    (1)     Note.  The swinging folding member must have motion about a fixed
    pivot to be classified in this subclass.  Mere deformable pads one part of
    which has a motion relative to another part when pressed into contact with
    a base are thus excluded and provided for in subclass 493 in that the pad
    has no fixed pivot.


CLS 156/493
TXT Apparatus under subclass 475 in which the distorting means comprises a
    flexible mass of material bodily reshaped to the configuration of the work
    by pressure thereagainst.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    488,    for bodily deformable pads which wipe along the surface of the
    deformed sheet.


CLS 156/494
TXT Apparatus under subclass 349 combined with means subjecting the work to a
    stress causing or tending to cause extension of the work.

    (1)     Note.  Mere means for pulling a workpiece through a laminating
    device against the normal resistance of the device are not considered
    tensioning devices unless some specific means are present to place a drag
    on the workpiece and such devices may be found in appropriate subclasses
    below for handling the particular work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196+,   for processes for bending workpieces including a step of stretching
    the workpiece to reshape it and especially subclasses 212+ for stretch
    forming processes.

    229,    for process there provided for involving a stretching step.

    405.1+, for tensioning means in combination with means feeding fabric to a
    tire building machine.

    586,    for apparatus there provided for having stretching or tensioning
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 410+ and 147+ for a
    tension device used for regulating longitudinal stress in a running length
    of material.


CLS 156/495
TXT Apparatus under subclass 494 in which power operated means cause feed of an
    indefinite length flexible web to or from a laminating device and a drag is
    placed on the web motion to tension it.


CLS 156/496
TXT Apparatus under subclass 495 in which the tensile stress is applied in a
    direction transverse of the direction of motion of the work.


CLS 156/497
TXT Apparatus under subclass 349 having means directing work treating material
    in a gaseous or vaporous state into direct association with the work.

    (1)     Note.  Devices for merely holding the workpiece in ambient air are
    excluded from this subclass.  For such subject matter search the
    appropriate work manipulating subclass below.

    (2)     Note.  The devices of this subclass must directly contact the
    workpiece with the gas or vapor, rather than for example, applying pressure
    through a flexible diaphragm.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 47 for coating devices having means to
    contact the work with a flame and subclasses 715+ for coating devices
    having means contacting the base with a gaseous or vaporized coating
    material and see especially the search notes to subclasses 47 and 715+ for
    the locus of other patents relating to this subject matter.


CLS 156/498
TXT Apparatus under subclass 349 having means for reducing the temperature of
    the work.

    (1)     Note.  The devices of this subclass are usually for the purpose of
    setting a heat fused joint.  However, the subclass is not so limited,
    including any device for cooling the work or heat exchange means preventing
    heating of the work by abstracting heat therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89,     for laminating methods involving a refrigerating or freezing step.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclasses, for cooling devices, per se.


CLS 156/499
TXT Apparatus under subclass 349 having heating means positioned spaced from
    the press means whereby the work must be moved to get from the heating area
    to the pressing area.

    (1)     Note.  Heating is a feature common to a great number of laminating
    press platens and thus this subclass is restricted to work heating means
    where the heating means are not incorporated in press platens but rather
    are a separate means not a part of the press. Heated press platens modified
    for laminating purposes may be found in subclass 583 and see the notes
    thereto for the locus of other heated presses.


CLS 156/500
TXT Apparatus under subclass 349 having means shaping at least one of the
    laminae by plastic flow of the material of the lamina against a shaping
    surface.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found, for example, devices for
    calendering a web on a roll and directly transferring the web onto a
    backing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 156 for glassworking apparatus
    combined with article molding means.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 110+ for surface bonding of preforms by molding means casting a
    plastic composition between preforms encased within the molding means.  The
    combination of a distinct Class 156 apparatus and a Class 425 apparatus is
    classified in Class 156.  See the line note between these classes under the
    Class 425 definition.


CLS 156/501
TXT Apparatus under subclass 500 in which the shaping means is for producing an
    indefinite length web which web is stripped from the shaping means and
    maintains its integrity.


CLS 156/502
TXT Apparatus under subclass 349 uniquely adapted for joining (a) the butt ends
    of bodies of indefinite extension, or (b) the butt ends of a flexible body
    to which the ends have been brought into juxtaposition whereby an endless
    band of article is formed.

    (1)     Note.  With respect to both (a) and (b) above, the periphery only
    of the workpieces are handled to bring the parts into assembled
    relationship and thus the length can be continuous or of any desired amount.

    (2)     Note.  With respect to (b) above the device is usually for joining
    the ends of a workpiece to form an endless belt. These devices do not have
    the means bending the workpiece into the loop to bring the ends together,
    such subject matter being found in subclasses 443+ above with other patents
    relating to bending means.  Insofar as the joining or work holding features
    therefor, they may be no claimed structural differences between (a) and (b).

    (3)     Note.  Means to merely hold plural pieces (while glue is disclosed
    and/or claimed as setting) for the purpose of assembly is not considered
    appropriate for this and indented subclasses. However, the inclusion of
    claimed means to move or guide plural pieces together for the purpose of
    assembly will be placed in this or indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137+,   for methods of making endless drive belts which may include a step
    of butt joining the ends of a flexible length.

    157+,   for methods of splicing indefinite length laminae end to end.

    443+,   and see (2) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses. Class 269 is the residual
    locus of patents for a device for clamping, supporting and/or holding an
    article (or articles) in position to be operated on or treated.  See notes
    thereunder for other related loci.


CLS 156/503
TXT Apparatus under subclass 502 adapted to join flexible hollow bodies and
    maintain the hollow nature of the joint.

    (1)     Note.  The majority of the patents in this subclass relate to the
    splicing of pneumatic tire inner tubes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    for tube making methods including a step of joining the tube ends
    to form the torus.

    507,    for devices for splicing in which the web ends are moved
    longitudinally into association one with the other.


CLS 156/504
TXT Apparatus under subclass 502 adapted to joining the end of a web to another
    web which is continuously moving without interrupting the motion of the
    moving web.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes (1) devices which join the webs while
    the areas being joined are moving in the direction of the traveling web or
    (2) devices which hold the joining areas stationary during the joining
    operation while continuing the motion of the web by feeding from an
    accumulating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 551+ for web uniting
    devices in which the webs are carried on reels.  The patents are classified
    in Class 242, where means are recited for bodily displacing the web
    carrying reel even though adhesion may be claimed.  Mere rotation of the
    reel for web feed, even though reciting speed control, tension control or
    other perfecting features for the web feed are not sufficient for Class 242
    where the reel rotates at a fixed position and laminating is recited.


CLS 156/505
TXT Apparatus under subclass 502 in which means apply a separate lamina to area
    of the joint only and adheres it thereto.


CLS 156/506
TXT Apparatus under subclass 505 in which means are provided to cut off a
    portion of a joining web prior to the application of the cut off portion to
    the joining area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    517+,   for laminating devices combined with means to cut a workpiece
    before lamination.


CLS 156/507
TXT Apparatus under subclass 502 having means moving the two ends to be joined
    into juxtaposition, the motion being in the direction of the major axis of
    the stock to be joined.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    503,    for devices of the tube splicing type which move the tube ends
    longitudinally into contact.


CLS 156/508
TXT Apparatus under subclass 507 having (a) solid means to mechanically remove
    foreign material from the joining surfaces or (b) means to apply adhesive
    to the surfaces to be joined.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    535,    for other laminating means combined with means scarifying or
    cleaning the joining surface only.


CLS 156/509
TXT Apparatus under subclass 502 having (a) solid means to mechanically remove
    foreign material from the joining surfaces or (b) means to apply adhesive
    to the surfaces to be joined.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    535,    for other laminating means combined with means shaping scarifying
    or cleaning the joining surface only.

    578,    for other laminating devices having coating material applying means
    and see especially the notes thereto.


CLS 156/510
TXT Apparatus under subclass 349 combined with means to penetrate a workpiece
    for the purpose of severing or making an opening therein.

    (1)     Note.  The severing operation may take place before, during or
    after the laminating step and may be caused by means separate from the
    laminating means or the same means.

    (2)     Note.  The severing may be, for example, to shape an article from
    stock, to trim off excess, to punch out workpiece from a stock strip, etc.

    (3)     Note.  The severing is usually by means of a solid member.  Cutting
    by means of a gaseous stream is provided for in subclass 497 above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250+,   for laminating methods combined with a step of severing.

    353+,   for laminating devices having an automatic control of a cutter.

    375,    for means forming indefinite length self-sustaining webs of
    particulate material having means cutting or trimming the product.

    497,    and see (3) Note above.

    506,    for splicing devices having severing or punching means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses as the basic class for cutting
    devices, and see especially the notes to the class definition thereof for
    the locus of other patents relating to cutting devices.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 596 for metallic
    stock which is apertured.


CLS 156/511
TXT Apparatus under subclass 510 in which at least two separate severing
    devices each act on a discrete workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  The workpieces need be discrete only during one of the
    cutting operations; thus, cutting a workpiece prior to uniting and then
    separate cutting of the united sandwich is included.


CLS 156/512
TXT Apparatus under subclass 510 in which the device assembles the cut lamina
    with another lamina derived from the same workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found, for example, devices which
    slit plural strips from a single web and then join them to form a
    multilayer web.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    260     and 264+, for methods of joining laminae cut from a single sheet.


CLS 156/513
TXT Apparatus under subclass 510 in which the severing means punches or cuts an
    opening in the workpiece before lamination.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252+,   for laminating including a step of perforating one of the laminae.


CLS 156/514
TXT Apparatus under subclass 513 in which means bonds a discrete lamina across
    the aperture in the part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for processes of laminating involving the step of mounting a
    transparent lamina over a window opening.

    293,    for methods of laminating including a step of inserting a lamina in
    a hole, aperture or recess of a lamina.

    423,    for apparatus including means assembling a part within a hole or
    aperture.


CLS 156/515
TXT Apparatus under subclass 510 in which the solid severing member causes
    bonding along the line of severance at the instant of parting of the lamina.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found, for example, die cutting
    devices for stamping out patterned pieces from a stacked tacky rubber sheet
    where the die causes the cut stack edges to adhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251,    for laminating methods including a step of simultaneously severing
    and laminating.


CLS 156/516
TXT Apparatus under subclass 510 in which separate means are provided for
    positively feeding each of at least two workpieces, which feeding means
    bring the workpieces into assembled relationship with each other.


CLS 156/517
TXT Apparatus under subclass 516 in which the severing step occurs before the
    parts to be bonded are brought into assembled relationship.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256+,   for methods of laminating combined with a step of severing the work
    prior to assembly.


CLS 156/518
TXT Apparatus under subclass 517 in which the penetrating element of the
    severing means which causes parting of the material or a pressing member
    secured to and moving therewith causes bonding of the laminae.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261+,   for laminating processes including a punching step and with
    laminating pressure being applied by the punch.

    515,    for devices in which the cutting element simultaneously laminates
    the work.

    530,    for other laminating devices in which the cutter is secured to the
    laminating element.


CLS 156/519
TXT Apparatus under subclass 517 in which the feeding means moves the cut piece
    into assembled relationship with an indefinite or running length workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    552,    for laminating devices having means bringing articles into
    association with an endless web.


CLS 156/520
TXT Apparatus under subclass 519 in which the severing element transfers or
    conveys the cut piece to the article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261+,   for methods of laminating including the step of punching out a part
    and applying pressure by means of the punch.


CLS 156/521
TXT Apparatus under subclass 517 in which means move cut parts one after the
    other into assembled relationship with separate articles each of which is
    moved one after the other past the assembly point.


CLS 156/522
TXT Apparatus under subclass 516 in which a portion of an indefinite length web
    is severed from the web after it is brought into contact with a discrete
    article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    517+,   for devices in which an endless web is cut and the cut piece is
    then assembled with another workpiece.


CLS 156/523
TXT Apparatus under subclass 510 in which the laminating device is uniquely
    adapted to travel along and be supported by the workpiece to which the
    lamina handled is being secured.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    574,    for other laminating devices of the work traversing type and see
    the notes thereto for the locus of other work traversing devices.


CLS 156/524
TXT Apparatus under subclass 523 having means which direct a liquid against at
    least one of the laminae.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    575,    for other work traversing laminating devices having liquid applying
    means.


CLS 156/525
TXT Apparatus under subclass 524 having cutting means which separate the
    workpiece both longitudinally and transversely of its major axis.


CLS 156/526
TXT Apparatus under subclass 524 in which the material applied by the work
    traversing device is severed from the source after contact with the work.


CLS 156/527
TXT Apparatus under subclass 523 in which the severing means is immobile during
    the severing operation.


CLS 156/528
TXT Apparatus under subclass 510 uniquely adapted to sever a rectangular
    sheet-like workpiece from a sheet greater in extension in both dimensions
    in a single stroke of the cutter.

    (1)     Note.  The devices of this subclass are generally for the purpose
    of severing or separating an adhesive stamp from a sheet of stamps and
    include severing means and means indexing the sheet to the next position
    for severing the next stamp.


CLS 156/529
TXT Apparatus under subclass 510 having means directing a fluid material
    against at least one of the laminae.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    524,    for work traversing devices having means projecting fluid against
    the work.


CLS 156/530
TXT Apparatus under subclass 510 in which the severing means is either
    operatively connected to the laminating press element or is directly
    attached thereto whereby the two are concurrently actuated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    518,    for laminating devices having means feeding plural parts to be
    joined and in which the severing means or a member secured thereto also
    laminates.


CLS 156/531
TXT Apparatus under subclass 530 having means directing a liquid material into
    contact with a least one lamina.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found devices which sever a label
    and moisten the label.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    524,    for work traversing devices with a cutter and liquid applying means.

    529,    for laminating devices having a cutter and means projecting a
    stream or spray of fluid against the work.


CLS 156/532
TXT Apparatus under subclass 531 in which the laminating press element and the
    liquid applying means are operatively interconnected whereby the action of
    one results in the operation of the other.


CLS 156/533
TXT Apparatus under subclass 532 in which the liquid material is applied to an
    indefinite length web before a portion thereof is severed for laminating
    purposes.


CLS 156/534
TXT Apparatus under subclass 533 in which the liquid material is applied to the
    web by means of a rotary cylinder.


CLS 156/535
TXT Apparatus under subclass 349 having means limited in their action to the
    bonding area of the lamina, and physically modifying the bonding surface by
    (1) changing the shape or roughing of the joining surface to facilitate the
    bond, (2) removing foreign matter from the surface to aid the bonding
    action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    497,    for laminating devices having gas, vapor of flame contact means for
    the work.

    509,    for splicing devices having means scraping the joining surfaces to
    facilitate the bond.

    510+,   for laminating devices combined with severing means for a workpiece
    which means may incidentally shape the joining surface as well.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 72+ for coating devices having means
    to prepare the work surface for coating.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 141.1+ for a process of welding
    metal including a step of preshaping the work pieces at the joining surface
    only.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 299+, for coating processes including
    pretreatment of the base.


CLS 156/536
TXT Apparatus under subclass 349 having means associated therewith for
    performing some function in addition to the basic operation of bonding
    parts together and not provided for in the preceding subclasses or in
    which, by relative rearrangement of its parts or by the addition of or
    omission of a part, the apparatus is changed so as to become:  (a) basic
    subject matter of this class (156) of a different character or having a
    different mode of operation or, (b) basic subject matter of another class;
    thus, for example, a laminating device which, by disabling or removing a
    part, becomes a mere dispenser, etc., is subject matter for this subclass.

    (1)     Note.  Bonding means includes means assembling parts into
    relationship for bonding, applying bonding pressure, heating or cooling to
    perfect the bond and application of adhesive bonding material.

    (2)     Note.  The class definition in Section IIB sets forth the locus of
    various combinations of laminating and other devices.


CLS 156/537
TXT Apparatus under subclass 349 having solid means interposed between separate
    laminae or separate areas of a single lamina which laminae or separate
    areas which would adhere in the absence of the solid means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    289,    for method of laminating involving the use of a parting or release
    material to prevent adhesion between parts.

    323,    for method in which a subsequently removed flexible element is
    interposed between the laminae and a pressure surface.

    580+,   for platen or press, per se, which may have a facing of an adhesive
    repellent material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclasses 416+ for antismut devices (e.g., slip sheets)
    used in the printing art.


CLS 156/538
TXT Apparatus under subclass 349 having either (a) means moving parts to be
    bonded into intimate association one with the other (b) means feeding at
    least one part or lamina to the assembly point (c) means in addition to or
    separate from the press surfaces holding laminae in assembled relationship.

    (1)     Note.  With respect to (a) above only one of the parts to be bonded
    need be moved.  The other part may be held stationary on an anvil surface,
    for example.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 146+ for glassworking apparatus
    with means to feed diverse material thereto; see the "Search Notes"
    thereunder.


CLS 156/539
TXT Apparatus under subclass 538 in which (a) at least two elements to be
    bonded to each other are fed or handled or (b) separate portions of a
    unitary piece to be bonded together are fed or handled in their final
    associated relationship.

    (1)     Note.  With respect to (b) above the separate portions are
    generally in their final positional association in that bringing separate
    portions together into such relationship would probably require bending
    means for subclasses 443+.

    (2)     Note.  See subclasses 580+ for press structures, per se, with no
    work handling other than by the press surfaces and see the notes,
    especially (5) Note, to that subclass for the lines with Class 100
    including the line with respect to presses with work handling features.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    443+,   and see (1) Note above.

    507+,   for film splicing devices including means moving the film ends into
    juxtaposition.


CLS 156/540
TXT Apparatus under subclass 539 in which a lamina to be secured to a base is
    carried on and bonded to a flexible tape or sheet and is stripped from the
    carrier during the securing step.

    (1)     Note.  The devices in this and the indented subclasses are commonly
    referred to as "transfer devices".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230+,   for methods of surface bonding involving direct contact transfer of
    adhered lamina from a carrier to the base lamina and especially subclass
    238 where the carrier is a running or continuous flexible web.

    584,    for delaminating, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 90.01+ for devices for burnishing a metal
    leaf coating on a base.

    101,    Printing, appropriate subclasses for transfer printing devices
    wherein a printing die is used to cause direct transfer of a portion of a
    lamina carried on a flexible sheet.  In Class 101 may be found, for example
    gold leaf printing devices in which the leaf is directly transferred from a
    carrier to the article utilizing a die stamp acting on the back of the
    flexible sheet.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclass 118.1 for a typewriter that applies
    gold leaf, and subclass 696 for a typewriter wherein an error is corrected
    by an adhesive ribbon.


CLS 156/541
TXT Apparatus under subclass 540 in which a plurality of separate laminae not
    in contact with one another are carried on the carrier web or sheet.


CLS 156/542
TXT Apparatus under subclass 541 in which laminae are transferred successively
    from the flexible carrier to (a) separate articles presented one after the
    other to the laminating position to receive the laminae or (b) different
    areas of a single article which are successively presented to the
    laminating position.


CLS 156/543
TXT Apparatus under subclass 539 having means feeding elongated or attenuated
    material of indeterminate or indiscriminate linear dimension in a direction
    generally along said dimension.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    425+,   for devices for spirally winding and uniting running or indefinite
    length spiral workpieces.

    433+,   for apparatus for uniting indefinite or running length flexible
    strands or filaments.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, for devices, per se,
    for feeding a running or indefinite length work and see especially the
    notes thereto for other devices having similar means.


CLS 156/544
TXT Apparatus under subclass 543 having means causing indefinite or running
    work of sheet or web-like form to be bonded together by butting the
    longitudinally extending edges.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304.1,  for methods for butt edge joining of laminae.

    466,    for apparatus bending a web longitudinally and joining the edges
    thereof.

    502+,   for means splicing flexible indefinite length or endless bodies
    end-to-end.


CLS 156/545
TXT Apparatus under subclass 544 having means applying a further lamina of
    sheet-like material covering the butt edge joint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    505+,   for apparatus splicing indefinite length or endless bodies
    end-to-end and applying an adhesive tape to the splice.


CLS 156/546
TXT Apparatus under subclass 544 having means for applying fluent material to
    the contacting edge faces to cause adhesion thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    547,    and see the notes thereto for the locus of other art relating to
    the application of adhesive to the joining surfaces of laminae.


CLS 156/547
TXT Apparatus under subclass 543 having means for transferring material in a
    flowing state onto at least one of the contacting surfaces of the laminae
    to be secured together, which material causes adherence of the laminae.

    (1)     Note.  The flowing material of this and the indented subclasses may
    be either the adhesive, per se, or it may be a fluid activator for adhesive
    previously applied.  Mere heated air to render adhesive tacky is excluded
    from these subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    325,    for processes of laminating utilizing a particular adhesive and see
    the notes thereto of the locus of other laminating processes including a
    step of applying an adhesive.

    578,    and see the notes thereto for the locus of patents relating to
    laminating devices combined with adhesive or adhesive activator applying
    means.


CLS 156/548
TXT Apparatus under subclass 547 in which the fluent material is applied at
    separate points or in a discontinuous or varied pattern.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291,    for method of bonding laminae at spaced points only by nonuniform
    adhesive application.

    553     and 581+, for devices having a discontinuous or patterned press
    surface.


CLS 156/549
TXT Apparatus under subclass 547 in which the fluent material is applied to at
    least one of two or more indefinite or running length workpieces.


CLS 156/550
TXT Apparatus under subclass 549 in which the fluent material applying means is
    located at the point of convergence of two webs approaching one another for
    bonding.


CLS 156/551
TXT Apparatus under subclass 549 in which either (1) a single applying means is
    contacted by separate workpieces before association, or (2) separate
    applying means each apply material to separate workpieces.


CLS 156/552
TXT Apparatus under subclass 543 having means moving discrete, separately
    handled, finite workpieces into assembled relationship with an indefinite
    length web for bonding thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302+,   for methods for bonding plural discrete laminae to a running length
    web.

    383,    for apparatus having means encasing a separate nonadhered part
    between adhered laminae.

    390,    for laminating apparatus combined with means for applying
    particulate coating material to the work.

    464,    for devices longitudinally bending a web and feeding discrete
    articles thereto for joining to the web.

    519+,   for laminating devices having cutting means and means delivering
    the cut part to an indefinite or running length web.

    520,    for devices in which a cutter itself delivers a cut part to an
    indefinite or running length web.

    522,    for cutting a web after association with a discrete article.

    540+,   for devices in which discrete laminae are transferred to a base
    from a web-like carrier.

    556+,   for devices bringing discrete articles into association one with
    the other.


CLS 156/553
TXT Apparatus under subclass 543 in which the laminae are caused to adhere by
    being subjected to approaching pressure surfaces and in which the pressure
    surfaces are relieved, configured in outline, or intermittently contact the
    same workpiece whereby the workpieces are joined at spaced points or in an
    irregular manner.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found, for example, devices that
    transversely seam traveling webs at spaced intervals.  A longitudinal seam,
    even though narrower than the joined webs, is not provided for here where a
    continuous, even width seam is formed. Such subject matter is classified on
    other bases such as, for example, web width (subclass 554) or continuous
    press (555).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290,    for methods of bonding continuously contacting laminae at spaced
    points.

    554     and 555, and see (1) Note above.

    581+,   for laminating presses, per se, having a relieved or configured
    pressing face.


CLS 156/554
TXT Apparatus under subclass 543 having means feeding plural webs into
    association, one with the other, and in which the webs are traveling in the
    same direction and are of different dimensions in breadth transversely of
    the direction of travel.


CLS 156/555
TXT Apparatus under subclass 543 in which the work moves in uninterrupted
    manner through the press and is joined without loss of continuity of the
    bond.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324,    for methods of joining webs of indefinite length.

    580,    for press structures, per se, which have no work feeding or
    handling means other than the press elements and see the notes thereto for
    the locus of other patents relating to presses.


CLS 156/556
TXT Apparatus under subclass 539 having means causing separate workpieces to
    move into association one with the other for adhesive joining thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The devices of this subclass must have handling means for
    each of the parts joined even though only one of the parts need be moved
    for association.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    362+,   for automatic control of the feed of articles to the assembly
    station.

    369+,   for devices forming self-sustaining webs of particulate material
    where the particles are not individually handled as discrete units but are
    rather deposited in bulk or from a bulk source.

    423+,   for means assembling a part within a hole or aperture of a second
    part.

    475+,   for devices joining discrete parts wherein one part is bent into
    the configuration of the part to which it is secured during the joining
    operation.

    516+,   for laminating devices combined with severing means and having
    means feeding plural parts to be joined.

    552,    for laminating devices having means bringing discrete articles into
    association with a traveling flexible web.


CLS 156/557
TXT Apparatus under subclass 556 having (1) plural applying means each applying
    separate articles simultaneously to separate workpieces, or (2) separate
    concurrently operating lines of conveyance for workpieces, each line having
    means applying articles to the workpieces.

    (1)     Note.  With respect to (1) above, the workpiece must not merely
    progress serially to the plural applying means for the successive
    application of multiple articles.  In other words separate articles must be
    produced from separate lamina applying means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    559,    for apparatus applying at least two articles to a single base.

    561,    for devices applying plural ranks or files of articles to a base.


CLS 156/558
TXT Apparatus under subclass 556 in which all of the articles assembled to form
    a multilayered body are fed from a single bulk supply.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found, for example, devices for
    forming gear blanks by serially stacking similar blanks picked off a pile,
    or devices for producing indefinite length articles by continually adding
    laminae from a source to one edge of the previously joined laminae.


CLS 156/559
TXT Apparatus under subclass 556 in which means are provided for associating
    more than two articles for adhesive bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses provide for means
    associating the plural articles regardless of the order of association.
    The articles may all be applied face to face to form a stack of coextensive
    articles or a plurality of articles may be applied to a single base article.


CLS 156/560
TXT Apparatus under subclass 559 having means applying more than a single
    lamina to an article the applied laminae being disposed adjacent each other
    and generally disposed in the same plane.

    (1)     Note.  In this and the indented subclasses may be found, for
    example, devices for applying multiple labels to a bottle, applying sample
    swatches to a card (subclass 561).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    476,    for laminating devices having plural discrete bending means each
    acting on a separate article.  The majority of the patents in this subclass
    (476) relate to multiple labeling or applying plural laminae to a single
    base and thus a complete search must include this subclass.


CLS 156/561
TXT Apparatus under subclass 560 in which at least two rows, each row
    comprising separate laminae, are applied to the single base article.


CLS 156/562
TXT Apparatus under subclass 560 in which the plural laminae are applied to a
    planar surface base of great length and width relative to its thickness.


CLS 156/563
TXT Apparatus under subclass 559 in which the articles are consecutively
    assembled face to face to form a multilayered article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    299,    for process for assembling planar laminae face to face.


CLS 156/564
TXT Apparatus under subclass 556 in which one of the sources of discrete
    article parts comprises a container holding a pile of articles arranged in
    face-to-face contact and in which the end article of the pile is in facial
    contact with a separate workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    573,    for apparatus having a magazine stack directly contacting the work
    but having no work feeding or handling means for the base to which the
    magazine held articles are to be applied.


CLS 156/565
TXT Apparatus under subclass 564 in which the container holding the pile of
    stacked articles is mounted for motion to and from the separate workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    573,    for other magazine stack devices which may or may not be mounted
    for motion.


CLS 156/566
TXT Apparatus under subclass 556 in which a single conveyor structure has means
    simultaneously and serially moving plural articles to the  assembly point
    for assembly each with a separate workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  In this and the indented subclasses may be found, for
    example, endless belts conveying a plurality of bottles one after the other
    to a labeling station.  The conveyor need not have separate or holding
    means for each article but may merely provide discrete support areas for
    plural articles as in the case of a belt-type work conveyor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    569+,   for pickers for separating articles from a bulk source.  The
    devices there are either single pickers, or if multiple, do not present the
    work to the assembly point.


CLS 156/567
TXT Apparatus under subclass 566 in which the conveying means comprises a
    carrier having a plurality of work-holding means positioned about an axis
    of revolution and means causing the carrier to rotate about the axis.

    (1)     Note.  The carrier may move continuously or may index
    intermittently into and out of the laminating station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    571,    for rotary pickers.  The pickers separate an article from a bulk
    source and present the article to the laminating station, but do not handle
    the article after association.


CLS 156/568
TXT Apparatus under subclass 567 in which the rotary turret or drum conveyor is
    particularly adapted to handle nonrigid sheet-like articles.


CLS 156/569
TXT Apparatus under subclass 556 in which at least one of the article handling
    means includes a device which isolates and removes or causes to be removed
    an article to be laminated from a batch supply for transfer to the assembly
    point.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses, for article dispensers,
    per se, and see the notes to the class definition for the locus of other
    article dispensers.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, appropriate subclasses for devices for
    separating sheets from a supply when not combined with a laminating step.


CLS 156/570
TXT Apparatus under subclass 569 in which the bulk supply of articles comprises
    a pile of sheets arranged face to face.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    564     and 573, for devices in which a magazine stack directly contacts
    the work to which at least one of the stacked articles is to be applied.


CLS 156/571
TXT Apparatus under subclass 570 in which the means separating the articles
    from the bulk source has motion about an axis of revolution during the
    separation of the article from the source and bodily transports the article
    during separation.

    (1)     Note.  A picker must grasp or be secured in some way to the article
    it is transporting, such as by clamping, adhesion, impaling, etc.  Thus a
    device merely pushing an element off a pile would not be a picker.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    567+,   for rotary pickers which also serially convey plural articles to an
    assembly station.


CLS 156/572
TXT Apparatus under subclass 570 in which the picker moves bodily in a
    rectilinear path while transporting and separating the article from the
    sheet source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    442.3,  for a patent to reciprocating feed means to feed an envelope to or
    through a work station.


CLS 156/573
TXT Apparatus under subclass 538 in which the work feeding or handling means
    comprises a container adapted to be brought into association with a base to
    which a sheet-like article is to be laminated, the container holding a pile
    of the sheet-like articles arranged face to face and the end article of the
    pile in facial contact with the work.

    (1)     Note.  The devices of this subclass do not claim the means handling
    the base to which the stack derived article is applied.  Therefore the
    claims recite either a hand held or manipulated applier or the
    subcombination of magazine disclosed for use with a base work manipulator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    564+,   for magazine stack work carriers combined with means to manipulate
    the base to which the work is to be joined.

    570+,   for laminating apparatus having means to separate a sheet from a
    stack and present it to the laminating station.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for article dispensing
    devices, per se, and see the notes to the class definition for the locus of
    other article dispensers.


CLS 156/574
TXT Apparatus under subclass 538 in which a laminating device is particularly
    adapted (a) to move as a unit over and be supported by the surface of the
    work to which a lamina is being applied or (b) to apply a lamina to an
    installed device or portion of a building surface.

    (1)     Note.  The devices of this and the indented subclasses feed or
    handle only a single lamina in that the base to which the lamina is secured
    is of such character that it is not handled, being fixed, installed, or
    otherwise supported.  By "feeding or handling" with reference to this
    subclass, is meant some element other than the means directly applying the
    laminating pressure.  A roller support for a web being applied to a wall as
    in wall papering would be considered sufficient work handling.  Thus the
    devices of this and the indented  subclasses must have at least two
    elements, (1) a pressing or applying means and (2) a material handling,
    feeding or guiding means.  Under this restriction then, mere applying
    brushes or rollers with handles would not be provided for in these
    subclasses in that applying only with no work handling is claimed. Subclass
    579 below provides for mere handled applying elements.

    (2)     Note.  The devices of this subclass are controlled manually by the
    operator and the direction and speed are controlled by him.  For devices of
    the work traversing type in which the law of the machine and its
    relationship to the work controls the direction search must be made in
    subclasses 391+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for processes of applying a lamina to a building or installed
    structure.

    391+,   and see (2) Note above.

    442.4,  for a patent to work traversing envelope sealing means.

    523+,   for work traversing devices combined with cutting means.

    579,    and see (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses for supports for holding wall
    paper against a surface for application thereto by hand and not claiming
    any means for causing actual adherence of the paper to the surface.


CLS 156/575
TXT Apparatus under subclass 574 having means applying a liquid material to the
    work.

    (1)     Note.  The liquid material is usually a bonding agent for causing
    adhesion of the laminae and may be applied to either the surface traversed
    or the work handled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    356,    for laminating apparatus having means automatically controlling the
    application of fluent material to the work.

    390,    for laminating apparatus combined with means for coating the work
    with materials other than adhesives.

    524+,   for work traversing laminating devices combined with cutting means
    for the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 108 for work supported or guided
    coating devices.


CLS 156/576
TXT Apparatus under subclass 574 having means to grasp the end of a flexible
    sheet for positioning of the sheet for laminating.


CLS 156/577
TXT Apparatus under subclass 574 having means mounted on the traversing device
    for supporting a bulk supply of flexible web material, from which supply
    the material is fed in use.

    (1)     Note.  The supply is usually in the form of a roll or reel of the
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    523+,   for work traversing devices having a cutter and an implement
    carried supply.  The majority of the patents in these enumerated subclasses
    disclose this feature and search must be made therein to complete the
    search for this subject matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, and especially subclasses 533.8
    and 557 for a mobile carrier for a winding or unwinding device.


CLS 156/578
TXT Apparatus under subclass 538 having means contacting a lamina with a fluent
    material which material causes the laminae to be bonded together.

    (1)     Note.  The fluent material may be either an adhesive or adhesive
    activator.  Mere treatment with hot air to activate the adhesive, however,
    is excluded from this subclass; see subclass 499 for laminating devices
    combined with means separate from the laminating press for heating the
    workpiece, and subclass 497 for laminating devices having gas, vapor or
    flame contact means for the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    325,    for methods of laminating involving the use of a particular
    adhesive and see especially the notes thereto for the locus of other
    patents relating to the method of application of fluent materials to the
    materials.

    356+,   for devices having means automatically controlling the application
    of fluent material to the work.

    390,    for apparatus having coating means which coating means is for some
    purpose other than or in addition to the means applying adhesive for
    laminating.

    442,    for combined envelop sealing and stamp applying devices.

    497,    for gas, vapor or flame contact means for the work, which means may
    render tacky the work or a coating thereon.

    509,    for means splicing indefinite length or endless bodies end-to-end
    and having means for applying adhesive to the bodies.

    510+,   and other appropriate subclasses for laminating devices combined
    with cutting means and having means applying liquid material to the work.

    524+,   for such devices that traverse the work.

    529,    for means projecting the liquid against the work.

    530+,   for such devices in which the cutter is actuated by or secured to
    the laminating element.

    546,    for apparatus joining indefinite length work edge-to-edge and
    applying adhesive to the work edge.

    547+,   for means applying fluent material between the layers of indefinite
    or running length work.

    575,    for work traversing devices having means for applying a liquid to
    at least one of the laminae.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for the structure of
    coating devices, per se, or combined with means there provided for.


CLS 156/579
TXT Apparatus under subclass 349 in which the laminating device is provided
    with means adapted to be grasped by the hand of the user for the purpose of
    manipulating the device.

    (1)     Note.  The devices of this subclass are usually implements used in
    applying pressure to associated or assembled workpieces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    391+,   for work secured or work guided devices which may include a handle
    to manipulate the device.

    523+,   for work traversing laminating devices combined with severing means.

    574,    for work traversing laminating devices having means in addition to
    the pressure applying means for handling or manipulating the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, appropriate subclass, for hand tools with both a
    laminating roller and a cutting tool.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, appropriate subclasses
    for implements of the type there provided for.  Class 15 provides for
    brushing, scraping or wiping implements even when disclosed as having a
    laminating function.

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 110.5 for roll structures having a
    manipulating handle.


CLS 156/580
TXT Apparatus under subclass 349 having means including a solid surface biased
    against the work to urge the laminae into intimate association with each
    other.

    (1)     Note.  In this and the indented subclasses may be found inventions
    relating to the means clamping the work during the setting of the adhesive.
    Also included are patents in which the solid member wipes along the surface
    of a lamina to press it into intimate engagement with the base to which it
    is to be secured.

    (2)     Note.  Laminating presses, per se, of general utility are provided
    for in Class 100, Presses, appropriate subclasses.  That class also
    provides for presses that are modified by including heating means, cutting
    means and various other combined treatments provided for in that class.
    The instant group of subclasses (580+) distinguish from Class 100, Presses,
    in that the presses or platen surfaces are not of general utility.  Thus,
    included in Class 156 are; (a) relieved or discontinuous surfaces for the
    purpose of joining laminae in a configured pattern or in a hit-miss manner;
    (b) platens wherein a limited portion only of the press surface area is
    heated so that a restricted portion only of the pressed area is joined; (c)
    wiping devices for smoothing previously associated laminae.

    (3)     Note.  The energy may be applied to the work by way of example, in
    the form of infrared, X-rays, electrostatic energy or a magnetic field.

    (4)     Note.  Presses or devices for maintaining parts in assembled
    relationship during bonding when combined with assembling, work handling or
    treating means for the parts are classified in subclasses above which
    provide for the various combinations.

    (5)     Note.  Class 100, Presses, provides for laminating presses
    including working handling means moving a previously assembled sandwich
    into or out of the press.  Thus with respect to Class 100, this class (156)
    provides for (a) laminating presses combined with means to assemble or
    bring workpieces into  association one with the other (subclasses 538+) or
    (b) laminating presses in which the press has some characteristic limiting
    it to a laminating device in accordance with (2) Note above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    358,    for laminating devices having means automatically controlling the
    application of laminating pressure.

    475+,   for presses in which a part is bent to the configuration of the
    base to which it is secured.

    580.1+, for apparatus having means to treat the work with sonic or
    ultrasonic waves or vibrations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses, for presses, per se, of general
    utility, especially subclasses 300+ for a press for attaching a brake pad
    to a rotor or cylinder of a brake assembly and see (2) Note above.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 256.1+ for  press for bending wooden
    members as they are pressed but having no claimed means which adapts the
    press to use in adhesively securing to each other a plurality of
    self-sustaining articles or webs.

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclass as the residual class for work
    holders or clamps, per se.


CLS 156/580.1
TXT Apparatus under subclass 580 having means to treat the work by imparting
    rapid oscillations to the work at a frequency of 10 cycles per second or
    greater.


CLS 156/580.2
TXT Apparatus under subclass 580.1 wherein the structure of a work contacting
    surface which has means subjecting the work to sonic or ultrasonic
    vibration is specified other than merely flat.


CLS 156/581
TXT Apparatus under subclass 580 in which the working surface of the element
    which applies the pressure has either projections or portions thereof
    recessed, whereby limited portions only thereof apply pressure to the work.

    (1)     Note.  The purpose of these devices is to confine the bonding
    action to defined areas of chosen configuration by causing pressure to be
    applied at selected areas only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290+,   for methods of bonding continuously contacting laminae at spaced
    points only.

    553,    for work feeding or assembling devices having a discontinuous or
    patterned press surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 256.3+, for a woodbending press having
    opposed contoured rigid platens.


CLS 156/582
TXT Apparatus under subclass 581 in which the pressure applying element is
    cylindrical in section and rotates about the axis of the cylinder during
    the pressing step.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    555,    for presses for continuously joining indefinite or running length
    webs including work feeding or handling means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the notes thereunder.


CLS 156/583.1
TXT Heated:

    Apparatus under subclass 580 in which means are provided for raising the
    temperature of the press surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359,    for laminating devices having automatic control of the temperature
    of a heat exchange means.

    497,    for laminating devices having gas, vapor, or flame contact means
    for the work.

    499,    for laminating devices having a separate (nonpress) heating means
    for the work.

    515,    for cutting elements that simultaneously laminate including heated
    cutters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclasses 250+ for a flameless or
    glowless fuel composition, per se, which may be used in a device of this
    subclass (class 156, subclasses 583.1+).

    100,    Presses, subclasses 92+ for heated presses there provided for,
    especially subclasses 300+ for a heated press for attaching a brake pad to
    a rotor or cylinder of a brake assembly.  As between Classes 100 and 156,
    all tire tube patching presses are considered to be specialized and are
    proper for Class 156.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, for a nonpress-surface heating device, per se,
    especially subclass 263 for heating device containing an exothermically
    reacting composition.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 98 for hose patch, per se.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 254+ for press for bending wooden members
    as they are pressed but having no claimed means which adapts the press to
    use in adhesively securing to each other a plurality of self-sustaining
    articles or webs.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, subclasses 37+ for
    thermite-type compositions.

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclass 367 for a tire patch, per se.


CLS 156/583.2
TXT Impulse heating:
    Apparatus under subclass 583.1 in which heating is of the electrical pulsed
    type.


CLS 156/583.3
TXT With significantly flexible platen:
    Apparatus under subclass 583.1 in which the flexible or resilient nature of
    the press surface is specifically defined.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is flexing of the press surface by a
    pressurized fluid acting either directly or indirectly on the press
    surface.  Press surfaces indicated as merely flexible or resilient are not
    here unless the flexible or resilient surface is of a specialized nature.
    For example, alternating of pressure surface shape between planar and
    nonplanar during pressure application, plural layers of flexible or
    resilient material, portion only of press surface contains flexible
    material, etc.


CLS 156/583.4
TXT Nonuniform heating:

    Apparatus under subclass 583.1 in which the area to be bonded has a
    temperature gradient along it or the area is bonded in a discontinuous
    manner.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are pressure surfaces in which
    only limited portions of the surface area are heated, e.g., cylindrical
    rotating members, etc.  Also included are ridged pressure surfaces.


CLS 156/583.5
TXT With endless belt:

    Apparatus under subclass 583.1 which includes an endless belt.

    (1)     Note.  The endless belt may carry heating platens for contact with
    work or may carry the work through stationary heating platens.


CLS 156/583.6
TXT C-frame type:

    Apparatus under subclass 583.1 having a frame supporting a pressure surface
    and an opposed cantilever portion of the frame supporting a pressure
    surface, the reaction force of the compression operation being a thrust
    against the cantilever support and the opposed frame portion.


CLS 156/583.7
TXT Electric heating:

    Apparatus under subclass 583.6 in which electric heating means is employed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 301 for an electrically heated brake press of
    general utility.


CLS 156/583.8
TXT Hinged platen:

    Apparatus under subclass 583.1 in which the movement of one pressure
    surface to approach the other is in an arcuate or swinging motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    583.6,  for opposed pressure surfaces moving toward each other along the
    same axis where the swinging motion of the lever imparts force along the
    axis.


CLS 156/583.9
TXT Electric heating:

    Apparatus under subclass 583.8 in which an electric heating means is
    employed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 301 for an electrically heated brake press of
    general utility.


CLS 156/583.91
TXT Plural adjustable pressure points:

    Apparatus under subclass 583.1 in which varying mechanical pressure applied
    to the material to be bonded is generally applied at two locations opposite
    to each other and on opposite sides of the material being bonded.

    (1)     Note.  Varying pressure applying means are generally manual screw
    and bolt type and may include a rod, belt, or plate means therebetween to
    better distribute the pressure.

    (2)     Note.  Varying pressure application at a single point by thrust
    against a member rigidly supported at its two ends is also included in this
    subclass.


CLS 156/584
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means to positively force at
    least two layers out of bonded relationship one to the other.

    (1)     Note.  The devices must apply a separating force to the parts.  The
    mere destruction of a bond by heat or solvent treatment is not sufficient
    for this subclass, being provided for in the classes that detail the
    operation, per se.

    (2)     Note.  Where a blade or sharp tool is used acting along the plane
    of the bond to force or wedge the laminae apart, the blade must be
    free-floating to follow the plane of weakness.  A device having a rigidly
    fixed blade, set for a given thickness of cut is provided for in Class 83,
    Cutting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    344,    for delaminating processes, per se.

    510,    for cutting devices combined with    laminating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 700+ for disassembly apparatus not having
    means destroying the bond joint.

    83,     Cutting, and see (2) Note above.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 73 for dispensing devices having means
    to strip an article from a magazine strip on which it is carried.


CLS 156/598
TXT Subject matter under the class definition and not provided for in any of
    the preceding subclasses.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 156/906
TXT OFF-DRUM MANUFACTURE OF TIRE FABRIC OR PLY:

    Collection of patents which disclose a process and/or apparatus for the
    manufacture of tire components prior to the assembly of all components on
    the tire-building drum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    406.4,  for apparatus combining a drum, a conveying means to feed materials
    to the drum, and cutting, heating, laminating, or shaping means for a
    lamina upstream of the conveyor.


CLS 156/907
TXT Including assembly of bias-cut fabric:

    Subject matter under subclass 906 which includes the putting together of
    pieces of fabric which have been cut at an angle to the warp, weft, etc.,
    to form a longer web of fabric.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    397,    for apparatus for assembling pieces of bias-cut fabric on the
    tire-building drum.


CLS 156/908
TXT LAMINATING SHEET TO ENTIRE EDGE OF BLOCK AND BOTH ADJACENT OPPOSITE
    SURFACES; E.G., BOOKBINDING, ETC.:

    Cross-reference collection directed to apparatus and process designed to
    adhesively bond (a) a sheet workpiece, and (b) a block workpiece, which may
    itself be a collection of sheets held together in block form, (c) the
    workpiece being bonded along the entire length of the smallest-dimension
    side of the block, and (d) the sheet being adhesively bonded, in the
    product, to at least part of both adjacent opposite sides of the block.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    475+,   for apparatus for adhesively bonding workpieces, including means to
    configure a lamina to the shape of the part to which it is secured.


CLS 156/909
TXT APPARATUS FOR APPLYING NEW TREAD TO USED TIRE CASING; E.G., RETREADING,
    RECAPPING, ETC.:

    Apparatus for laminating a new tread, or tire portion to a used tire
    carcass wherein the new tire component is preformed and not reshaped by the
    laminating apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  This cross-reference art collection provides for generally
    annular and/or toroidal shaped envelopes, or devices placed around a
    retreaded tire to hold (but not reshape) the new tread portion against the
    tire carcass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94+,    for methods of repairing or renewing tires.

    381,    for apparatus having walls completely surrounding the work, which
    walls form a space within which the work is bonded and which are separable
    from laminating pressure surfaces.

    421.2,  for apparatus which includes either (a) a chamber incompletely
    surrounding the tire casing, or work with a means for establishing pressure
    within the interior of the chamber, or (b) a chamber completely surrounding
    the work which is, or becomes inseparable from the laminating surfaces with
    a means for establishing pressure within the interior of the chamber.

    584,    for devices for removing tread stock, beads and piles from a tire
    carcass or for removing adhered tires from rims.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 104+ for
    apparatus for drying a hollow article, e.g., a tire, etc.

    157,    Wheelwright Machines, subclass 13 for devices for grooving,
    slitting, or lacerating rubber tires, or tire bodies; and subclasses 14+
    for means which hold at least one component of a wheel in a particular
    position, or orientation either relative to (a) another component of the
    wheel when the wheel is assembled, or disassembled, or (b) a repairing, or
    surfacing tool working on the tire component of the wheel.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 326 for reshaping toroidal shaped work pieces.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, appropriate subclasses, for heated reaction
    vessels, or autoclaves.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 17+ for tire recapping, rebeading, or sidewall replacing means.

    451,    Abrading, for an abrading process performed on a tire casing (e.g.,
    as a preparation for recapping, etc.) and for an apparatus therefor.


CLS 156/910
TXT BONDING TIRE CORD AND ELASTOMER:  IMPROVED ADHESIVE SYSTEM:

    Collection of patents under the class definition which disclose improved
    systems for obtaining a bond between a textile lamina and a rubber or
    synthetic resin lamina in the manufacture of tires.

    (1)     Note.  The textile maybe a mechanically interengaged thread system
    or now oven type, may be metal or nonmetal, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    307.1+  for a process of adhesive bonding which includes vulcanization,
    crosslinking or other curing phenomenon, especially subclasses 307.3+ for
    those which include coating or impregnating a face to be adhered.


CLS 157/
TTL WHEELWRIGHT MACHINES

CLS 157/
TXT This class includes means for assembling wheels not specifically provided
    for elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  Included here (in subclass 13 as a residual or generic
    locus) are devices and processes for machining the tread portion of a
    rubber tire.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this class, under subclass 13 is a related body
    of art pertaining to the mechanical treatment of the outer periphery of
    rubber tire casings.  The presence of this body of art in this class is not
    intended to change the scope of either the class or any subclasses
    hereunder unless so specifically noted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 700+ for miscellaneous assembling
    apparatus and see the Notes thereto for other assembling.

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses for apparatus which
    performs a mere plastic metal shaping operation, and does not include
    assembly.


CLS 157/1
TXT Devices not elsewhere classifiable for assembling wheels.

    (1)     Note.  Clamps for holding wooden rims in shape while the spokes are
    being set up are included, except when accompanied by devices for screwing
    up the spoke-nipples. Such devices are found in Class 81, Tools, subclass
    53 and indented subclasses.


CLS 157/1.1
TXT Devices and methods under the class definition for setting or removing or
    for facilitating the setting or removing of a rubber tire from a rim.

    (1)     Note.  A "rim" is defined as the immediate support for a rubber
    tire and includes such elements whether integral with or detachable from
    the wheel.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is the collecting place for devices which
    cause radial motion only of a rubber tire portion, or devices for
    squeezzing the rubber tire circumferentially of its cross-section in
    connection with the operation of setting or removing the same.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass is the collecting place for holding devices
    designed merely to engage a portion of the tire and/or rim, and to maintain
    a prescribed position of the tire portions relative to each other or of the
    tire portion relative to the rim as an aid to tire setting or removing by
    other means.  The position in which the tire is held is generally one in
    which (1) the casing is deformed from its normal cross section, or (2) the
    tire and rim occupy positions other than fully assembled or fully separated.

    (4)     Note.  Devices which set or remove a tire supporting rim upon or
    from the felley of a wheel are excluded and will be found primarily in this
    Class, 157, subclass 1.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 221.5 for devices for applying or removing
    air valve stems to or from rims, subclass 235 for devices for placing and
    removing resilient articles in general.

    81,     Tools, subclass 15.3 for casing-supported devices for retaining a
    tire casing in spread condition.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 306+ for a device for holding a wheel or
    wheel portion.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    110+ and 394+ as the generic place for tirebuilding processes and apparatus.


CLS 157/1.11
TXT Devices under subclass 1.1 combined with or convertible to a vehicle
    carried bracket or support for a tire rim.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclasses 42.12+ for vehicle carried
    tire holders without tire setting or removing features.


CLS 157/1.13
TXT Devices under subclass 1.1 for operating on rubber tires that are
    circumferentially discontinuous.


CLS 157/1.14
TXT Devices under subclass 1.13 which include means to manipulate or facilitate
    the manipulation of the end portions of circumferentially extending binding
    elements associated with the tire.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    140,    Wireworking, subclass 93 for devices in general for applying wire
    and subclasses 111+ for devices for joining wire.


CLS 157/1.17
TXT Devices under subclass 1.1 having means for engaging the tire and/or rim
    and moving the tire or a portion thereof in a direction normal to the plane
    of the tire or rim.

    (1)     Note.  Devices which engage a movable flange to thereby move the
    tire are included.

    (2)     Note.  Devices which produce radial motion in addition to axial
    motion are included.


CLS 157/1.2
TXT Devices under subclass 1.17 wherein the tire engaging means is
    circumferentially continuous or consists of elements which are distributed
    with substantially uniform circumferential spacing and simultaneously
    operated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.26+,  for devices having circumferentially distributed engaging elements
    which are individually operated.


CLS 157/1.21
TXT Devices under subclass 1.2 which include means for applying pressure on the
    periphery of the tire, the pressure being directed toward the axis of
    rotation to cause the bead or beads to move axially.

    (1)     Note.  Usually, the tire is of the "tubeless" type and is
    associated with the rim of a wheel when the pressure is exerted to thereby
    cause the beads to engage the rim to facilitate inflating the tire with
    pressure fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 19+ for devices which
    exert a circumferential force around bale packages or hose.

    81,     Tools, subclass 64 for wrenches having flexible gripping means
    which surround the part being turned.


CLS 157/1.22
TXT Devices under subclass 1.17 in which a tire engaging element and the rim
    have relative movement in concentric paths, which movement effects the
    axial motion of the tire portion.

    (1)     Note.  In order to be classified in this subclass the indicated
    manner of use must be disclosed, and (1) the tire or rim engaging portion
    must be particularly designed to operate in this fashion, or (2) a
    supporting arrangement particularly designed to cause or permit movement of
    the device peripherally of the rim must be provided.


CLS 157/1.24
TXT Devices under subclass 1.22 which have a base or stand for supporting the
    tire and rim when detached from the vehicle.


CLS 157/1.26
TXT Devices under subclass 1.17 wherein the engaging members are adapted to
    engage opposite sides of a tire, or of a tire and rim, and are arranged for
    movement relative to each other.

    (1)     Note.  The essence of this subclass is the substantial opposition
    of the pushing members.  Devices, therefore, in which one of the members
    engages portions of a wheel other than the felley or tire-holding rim are
    excluded and will be found in subclass 1.17 supra.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.2,    for devices wherein the opposed engaging members are
    circumferentially distributed.

    1.22+,  for devices wherein one of the opposed engaging members is
    circumferentially traveling.


CLS 157/1.28
TXT Devices under subclass 1.26 wherein both opposing members or parts thereof
    engage the tire.

    (1)     Note.  In cases where one of the opposing members engages the rim
    in addition to the tire and where the enclosure formed by the members
    embraces the rim rather than the tire, and where the primary function of
    the rim engagement is provision of an anchor point, the simultaneous tire
    engagement of said element is regarded as incidental and patent is placed
    in subclass 1.26.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 50.1+ for similar devices used as resilient tire casing
    spreaders and compressors.


CLS 157/1.3
TXT Devices under subclass 1.17 consisting of a single lever.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is made up primarily of patents wherein the
    device is a single rigid element.  Plural element devices are also
    included, however, when the relative movement of the parts occurs merely
    (1) for the purpose of moving the lever elements to change the overall
    dimensions subsequent to the initial operation of the device in the manner
    of a lever or pry, or (2) for purposes other than tire setting or removal
    (e.g., stowage).


CLS 157/1.33
TXT Devices under subclass 1.1 which engage and remove or apply, or facilitate
    the removal or application of, an annular tire retaining element which is
    mounted on the rim as a barrier for the prevention of relative axial
    movement between the tire and rim.

    (1)     Note.  Retaining elements for the purpose of this subclass may
    include, for example, discontinuous groove-engaging lock rings as well as
    the retaining portions of rims which are separable in an axial direction.

    (2)     Note.  Loose flanges having a mere sliding fit on the rim and which
    are themselves retained in the manner of a tire do not normally furnish
    subject matter for this subclass unless the device is disclosed as
    primarily intended for their forcible application or removal.

    (3)     Note.  Devices which merely shift a flange or tire portion to
    expose the retainer prior to removal thereof are excluded and will be found
    in subclasses 1.17+.


CLS 157/1.35
TXT Devices under subclass 1.1 having means to engage and distort a
    circumferentially discontinuous rim in order to (1) contract and/or expand
    the same, or (2) to offset and/or align the rim end, or both (1) and (2).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    301,    Land Vehicles: Wheels and Axles, subclass 33 for split rims in
    which the offsetting contracting and/or expanding device is a part thereof
    intended to be retained in position thereon during normal use of the rim.


CLS 157/1.36
TXT Devices under subclass 1.35 having three or more rim-engaging elements.

    (1)     Note.  In determining the number of elements, those which are
    rigidly connected together and those which engage on opposite edges or
    faces of the rim in substantially the same radial plane, as well as those
    combinations of members which constitute a unitary rim clamping structure
    are regarded as single elements.


CLS 157/1.37
TXT Devices under subclass 1.36 in which two of the contacting elements are
    connected by a system including a movable link and/or lever for drawing the
    elements together or separating them, said link or lever having an abutment
    or hook mounted thereon for applying a force to a portion of the rim
    incident to movement of said elements and substantially perpendicular to
    the direction of said movement.

    (1)     Note.  Devices of the type having arms of substantial length which
    are designed to project in a radiating fashion are excluded from this
    subclass and will be found in subclasses 1.38 and 1.41.


CLS 157/1.38
TXT Devices under subclass 1.36 provided with at least two arrangements for
    forcibly moving certain of the rim engaging elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.44,   for plural force-mechanism devices having less than three rim
    engaging elements.


CLS 157/1.39
TXT Devices under subclass 1.38 in which at least two manually operated
    controllers for the driving arrangements are present.


CLS 157/1.4
TXT Devices under subclass 1.39 in which the force-mechanisms are readily
    divisible into two categories; i.e., main and subsidiary.

    (1)     Note.  The subsidiary mechanism is usually of a character different
    from and/or simpler than the main mechanism and can be operated for its
    purpose without substantially affecting the operation of the main
    mechanism.  The disclosed purpose for the subsidiary mechanism is
    frequently the offsetting of the rim ends, while the main mechanism is
    usually disclosed as operating to expand or contract the rim.


CLS 157/1.41
TXT Devices under subclass 1.38 having (1) a plurality of toggle
    force-mechanisms lying in planes perpendicular to that of a rim being
    operated on, or (2) a radial or face cam whose axis is perpendicular to the
    plane of the rim.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.35,   for devices having less than three rim engaging elements and
    operated by a linkage which is movable in a plane perpendicular to the
    plane of the rim.


CLS 157/1.42
TXT Devices under subclass 1.35 in which at least one of the rim-engaging
    elements consists of two or more circumferentially spaced rim contacting
    portions which are by appearance distinct, but which are in fact the
    terminal portions of integrally connected arms, thereby forming a single
    engaging element as defined for subclass 1.36 in (1) Note thereunder.

    (1)     Note.  The integral connection between the arms is sufficient for
    this subclass if the arms are so mounted that relative movement
    circumferentially of the rim in either direction is precluded when the
    device is in extended condition ready for use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.36,   for devices having similar structure, but in which relative
    movement between the arms is permitted.


CLS 157/1.43
TXT Devices under subclass 1.35 composed of a linkage designed to operate on
    the rim in response to actuation of two levers having handle portions for
    engagement by the hands of the operator.


CLS 157/1.44
TXT Devices under subclass 1.35 provided with at least two driving arrangements
    for forcibly moving the rim engaging elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.38+,  for plural force-mechanism devices having three or more rim
    engaging elements.


CLS 157/1.45
TXT Devices under subclass 1.35 wherein the mechanism for moving the rim
    engaging means includes a screw and nut.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.36,   for devices of this character having three or more rim-engaging
    elements.

    1.41,   for devices of this character where the screw and nut mechanism
    actuates an axial toggle.


CLS 157/1.46
TXT Devices under subclass 1.35 wherein the mechanism for moving the rim
    engaging means includes (1) members having sliding engagement with each
    other and/or (2) a rack and actuating means therefor (e.g., a pinion,
    pawls, or the like).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.45,   for devices including sliding members which are screw and nut
    actuated.


CLS 157/1.47
TXT Devices under subclass 1.35 made up of one or more members such as pivoted
    links and/or levers which are constrained to move in one or more planes
    substantially normal to the axis of a rim on which the device is operating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.35,   for devices having similar linkages not confined to planes normal
    to the rim axis.

    1.37,   1.38 and 1.4, for devices of this character having three or more
    rim engaging elements.

    1.43,   for devices of this character consisting of two levers each having
    a handle portion for manual actuation thereof.


CLS 157/1.48
TXT Devices under subclass 1.47 composed of two link members pivotally
    interconnected.

    (1)     Note.  Devices in which no more than one of the links are extended
    for use as a manually actuated lever are included.

    (2)     Note.  In determining the number of elements in the linkage, parts
    whose primary purpose is to effect clamping engagement with the rim are
    disregarded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.43,   for similar devices comprising two hand levers.


CLS 157/1.49
TXT Devices under subclass 1.47 comprising a single rigid lever member movable
    relative to the rim and designed to produce relative movement between the
    rim ends.

    (1)     Note.  Devices which include elements designed to be clamped to the
    rim to operate as a part thereof and to which the lever member is pivotally
    related are included.


CLS 157/1.5
TXT Apparatus under the main class definition for assembling metallic spoked
    wheels (e.g., "wire" wheels), and/or for holding the felley and hub while
    trueing the wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 894.33+, for similar methods.

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 288, see note (1).


CLS 157/1.55
TXT Apparatus under subclass 1.5 for securing a spoke to a hub or felly by
    deforming the spoke, hub, and/or felly.


CLS 157/2
TXT Devices for compressing wheel-rims to force fellies in place, etc.


CLS 157/3
TXT Devices for guiding and forcing spokes into hubs.


CLS 157/4
TXT Supports for holding the hub and guiding the spoke while it is being driven.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 206 for making a wheel spoke.


CLS 157/5
TXT Devices for forcing tires on wheel-rims.


CLS 157/7
TXT Trestles on which the wheel is mounted in combination with tanks into which
    the wheel or wheel-rim can be dipped to cool the tire.


CLS 157/8
TXT Removable devices for tightening tires without affecting the construction
    of the wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, for devices for the same purpose
    which form permanent parts of wheels.


CLS 157/9
TXT Removable jacks for tightening tires by expanding the fellies against the
    tire.


CLS 157/10
TXT Fellies are expanded by a jack which is clamped to a spoke.


CLS 157/11
TXT Presses for forcing tires off of wheel-rims.


CLS 157/12
TXT Devices for pulling spokes or spoke-tenons out of hubs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    especially subclass 18, and indented subclasses.


CLS 157/13
TXT Apparatus and processes under the class definition, for treating the outer
    periphery of a rubber tire casing by cutting, punching and/or rasping to
    produce a desired tread or traction effect in or on said periphery, or to
    prepare the periphery for treading or retreading.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is the locus of art relating to tire treading
    by a slitting or machining operation (except abrading, for which see Class
    451, Abrading) which art (in the absence of this subclass) would ordinarily
    be classified in accord with the particular machining. Both apparatus and
    process are classified here on the basis of the article worked and the
    functional utility of said working operation.

    (2)     Note.  Patents classified here as originals should always be
    cross-referenced in accord with the particular machining disclosed to other
    appropriate classes.

    (3)     Note.  See section III of the class definition of Class 29, Metal
    Working, for the definition of machining and slitting.

    (4)     Note.  This subclass does not include cutters, slitters or rasps,
    per se, even when such tools are set forth as applied to the treatment of
    rubber tires.

    (5)     Note.  Included in this subclass, because of the general similarity
    to tire treading and resurfacing, are processes and devices provided for
    (A) the removal of mold flash from either tire periphery or bead, and (B)
    the reclamation of material from tires which does not necessitate the
    destruction of the tire.  The disclosure under (B) may be limited to
    removal solely for the purpose of salvaging or reworking said material but
    unless the claims are so limited or restricted as to, of necessity, effect
    the destruction of the tire (so that it may not be regrooved or recapped)
    classification is proper in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 76.1+ for rasps or files, and subclasses
    402.01+ for the generic locus of processes of repair.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclasses 9+ for skiving or splitting
    devices.

    82,     Turning, appropriate subclasses.

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses.

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 306+ for a wheel support, generally.

    451,    Abrading, for the treatment of rubber tires by an abrading
    operation, and see (1) Note above.


CLS 157/14
TXT WHEEL HOLDING MEANS:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising means for holding at least
    one component of the wheel (e.g., rim, tire, etc.) in a particular position
    or orientation either relative to (a) another component of the wheel when
    the wheel is assembled or disassembled, or (b) a repairing or surfacing
    tool working on the tire component of the wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    414+ for tire-building drums, per se, used with tire-building apparatus.

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses for stands or supports of general
    application.

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses for work holders of general
    utility.


CLS 157/15
TXT Including inflatable wheel gripping element:

    Holding means under subclass 14 including an enclosed element having at
    least one flexible wall, a side of the element being forced into gripping
    contact with the wheel when a fluid is introduced into the element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    416 for building drums having an inflatable core.

    269,    Work Holders, subclass 22 for work holders including a
    fluid-operated, work-engaging, movable diaphragm.


CLS 157/16
TXT Including relatively movable wheel gripping jaws:

    Holding means under subclass 14 including two or more jaws movable with
    respect to each other into gripping contact with the tire.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 86+ for work holders having relatively
    movable work-engaging jaws.


CLS 157/17
TXT With screw-nut actuating device:

    Holding means under subclass 16 wherein one of the jaws is moved by a
    device which includes a threaded cylindrical rod which is either (a)
    rotated to move a mating threaded rider attached to the jaw along its axis,
    or (b) is attached to the jaw and is axially shifted by, and relative to, a
    mating threaded element which is being rotated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 240+ for work holders having relatively
    movable, work-engaging jaws which are shifted toward or away from each
    other by a screw-nut actuating device.


CLS 157/18
TXT With cam or wedge type actuating device:

    Holding means under subclass 16 wherein one of the jaws is moved by a
    device which includes either a rotatable camming or shiftable wedging
    element, a surface of which slides against and moves a cooperating surface
    on (a) the jaw, or (b) a follower element attached to the jaw when a
    rotating or shifting force is applied to the element, one of the engaged
    surfaces having an uneven contour that causes the movement transmitted to
    the cooperating surface by the element to be in a direction other than that
    of the element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 229+ for work holders having relatively
    movable, work-engaging jaws which are shifted toward or away from each
    other by a cam, eccentric, or wedge-type actuating device.


CLS 157/19
TXT Means mounted to swing between locations:

    Apparatus under subclass 14 wherein the means is supported by structure
    which allows it to swing from one definite location to another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 50 and 55+ for work holders mounted for
    movement from one position to another with respect to a base or support.


CLS 157/20
TXT Means rotates about relatively fixed axis:

    Apparatus under subclass 14 wherein the means is supported by structure
    which allows it to rotate about a relatively fixed point.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 50 and 55+ for work holders mounted for
    movement with respect to a base or support.


CLS 157/21
TXT Adjustable or adaptable for different sizes or shapes:

    Holding means under subclass 14 wherein the wheel-contacting elements of
    the means are either (a) selectively usable, or (b) adjustably movable to
    accommodate different sizes or shapes of the tire or rim components of the
    wheel.


CLS 159/
TTL CONCENTRATING EVAPORATORS

CLS 159/
TXT This class relates to apparatus and processes, which are not more
    specifically provided for elsewhere, peculiar to the concentration of
    solids held in solution or suspension, by evaporation of the liquid
    containing them in solution or suspension, and the recovery of the
    concentrate.  The concentration may be carried to the point of
    crystallization or to dryness.

    (1)     Note.  Processes involving significant chemical changes are
    excluded.

    (2)     Note.  Machines, processes, and treatments of a specialized
    character (e.g., heat treatments) directed to the preparation or
    purification of a particular substance, which are not simply a mode or
    means of concentrating by evaporation, of general application are excluded.
     However, processes and apparatus solely for concentrating by evaporation
    are here even though the particular material concentrated is specified.

    (3)     Note.  Evaporating apparatus involving the recovery or treatment of
    the vapors evolved either as vapors or condensate (e.g., stills) is
    excluded.  This does not exclude the recovery of heat in the vapors.

    (4)     Note.  This class is superior to Class 165, Heat Exchange, in that
    means for the transfer of heat for the specific purpose of concentration by
    evaporation is found here.  This class is superior to Class 122, Liquid
    Heaters and Vaporizers, in that means for vaporizing liquid for the
    specific purpose of concentration of attendant solids is found here.  This
    class is superior to Class 261, Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, in that
    means for contacting gas and liquid for the specific purpose of
    concentration by evaporation is found here.  This class is differentiated
    from Class 34, Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, in that the
    substance under treatment is initially in a liquid or fluent condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, subclasses 295+ for processes
    involving purification of salt or separation of different salts, but where
    merely the evaporation and concentration of a saline solution with
    attendant crystallization is concerned, the patents are found here.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 123+ and 532+ for separation of a
    constituent of a liquid mixture by refrigeration.

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes and non-coating apparatus for
    growing therein-defined single-crystal of all types of materials, including
    use of or means including a concentrating evaporator.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, for open water heaters having no structure
    specially directed to the concentration of the solids in solution or
    suspension.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 198+ and 285+ for concentrating
    apparatus for that class.


CLS 159/1.1
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition not provided for below or
    elsewhere.


CLS 159/2.1
TXT SUPERHEATING AND PRESSURE RELEASE:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising a closed vessel adapted to
    heat a liquid, but to maintain sufficient ebullition in communication with
    a space of less pressure into which the heated liquid is discharged to
    cause evaporation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 40 for boilers in which
    liquid is flashed into steam.


CLS 159/2.2
TXT With extruder:

    Apparatus under subclass 2.1 having means to force or press out the
    material being concentrated.


CLS 159/2.3
TXT Multistage:

    Apparatus under subclass 2.1 functioning in plural operations.


CLS 159/3
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means to spray a liquid in
    combination with a collecting chamber or receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 236 for a still having means for
    introducing the distilland in the form of a spray.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclass 90 for a process of
    introducing the distilland into the vaporization zone in the form of a
    spray.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses
    for spraying devices, per se.


CLS 159/4.01
TXT Gaseous current:

    Apparatus under subclass 3 provided with means for directing a gaseous
    current through the spray or spray chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 359 and
    576+ for proc-esses and apparatus which employ a fluid current to move the
    material being worked upon.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 74 and 347 for refrigeration processes in
    which the raw material is sprayed or dripped.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 75+ for liquids
    sprayed into contact with gases.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 289 for concentrating evaporator
    specialized to chemistry in which hot gases, etc., are contacted with
    liquids.


CLS 159/4.02
TXT Combustion product gas:

    Apparatus under subclass 4.01 wherein the gaseous current is a product of a
    combustible gas.


CLS 159/4.03
TXT Antibridging:

    Apparatus under subclass 4.01 for preventing buildup of solids on the
    evaporator wall or the inlet or outlet of the same.


CLS 159/4.04
TXT Countercurrent:

    Apparatus under subclass 4.01 for providing a gas flow counter to that of
    the spray.


CLS 159/4.05
TXT Intermediate gas outlet or inlet:

    Apparatus under subclass 4.01 having either an inlet or outlet located
    approximately on the axial center of the evaporator.


CLS 159/4.06
TXT Bottom sprayer:

    Apparatus under subclass 4.01 wherein the sprayer is located on or near the
    bottom of the apparatus and the liquid is sprayed upwardly.


CLS 159/4.07
TXT Horizontal sprayer:

    Apparatus under subclass 4.01 with means spraying the liquid on an
    horizontal plane.


CLS 159/4.08
TXT Impinging jets:

    Apparatus under subclass 4.01 wherein the liquid is introduced in several
    jets which impinge each other.


CLS 159/4.09
TXT Multistaging:

    Apparatus under subclass 4.01 for carrying out the spraying in plural
    operations.


CLS 159/4.1
TXT Heat recovery:

    Apparatus under subclass 4.01 with means to recover heat.


CLS 159/4.2
TXT Spinning sprayer:

    Apparatus under subclass 4.01 wherein the sprayer rotates.


CLS 159/4.3
TXT Rotary drum with sprayer:

    Apparatus under subclass 4.01 with a revolving drum having spray means.


CLS 159/4.4
TXT Steam drying or atomizing:

    Apparatus under subclass 4.01 using steam to dry or atomize.


CLS 159/5
TXT Apparatus under the class definition especially designed to evaporate a
    liquid in film or thin layer form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for
    applying liquid coating material to work.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 236 for a still in which the
    distilland to be vaporized is in a thin film.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclasses 72 and 89 for a
    process of introducing the distilland into the vaporization zone by
    spreading it in a thin film over a surface.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 110, 157, 223, 291, 328, and 337 for
    air-moistening attachments for registers.


CLS 159/6.1
TXT Centrifugal:

    Apparatus under subclass 5 in which the liquid is maintained as a film on a
    supporting surface by means of centrifugal force.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 52+ for coating apparatus having
    means to centrifuge the work.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 86+ for a heat exchanger having a movable
    attempering surface.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclass 85 for gas and liquid
    contact apparatus comprising rotating hollow cylinders.


CLS 159/6.2
TXT Wiped film:

    Apparatus under subclass 6.1 wherein means contact the film adjacently to
    its flow.


CLS 159/6.3
TXT Horizontally:

    Apparatus under subclass 6.2 wherein means contact the film in a horizontal
    direction.


CLS 159/7
TXT Apparatus under subclass 5 in which the film is spread or supported on a
    traveling surface for evaporation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, for driers of the
    endless carrier or rotary type.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 86+ for a movable heat exchange surface
    not specialized to the evaporation of liquid.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 223 for a flake-forming apparatus comprising means for casting a
    film on a moving endless surface and a means to remove the hardened film as
    flakes.


CLS 159/8
TXT Apparatus under subclass 7 in which a gaseous current is directed against
    or in proximity to the surface of the film on the moving support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclass 80 for gas and liquid
    contact comprising endless belts.


CLS 159/9.1
TXT Rotary drum or disk:

    Apparatus under subclass 8 in which the moving support carrying the film is
    a rotary drum or disk.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 83+ for contact
    devices having a rotary movement.


CLS 159/9.2
TXT Treated material inside drum:

    Apparatus under subclass 9.1 in which the rotary drum supports the film
    interior thereof.


CLS 159/10
TXT Apparatus under subclass 9.1 in which the rotary drum or disk supports the
    film on its exterior surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 91+ for rotating
    impellers arranged to dip in liquid to effect gas and liquid contact.


CLS 159/11.1
TXT Rotary drum or disk:

    Apparatus under subclass 7 in which the moving film support is a rotary
    drum or disk.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 108+ for
    apparatus including a hollow drum rotating about an axis through, over, by,
    or  in which the material is carried to be treated, and subclass 173 for
    apparatus of the gravity-flow type with shelf to shelf or zigzag treated
    material flow in which there is a rotary shelf or stirrer.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 89+ for a heated or cooled rotary drum
    not specialized to evaporation.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the notes thereunder.


CLS 159/11.2
TXT Internal film:

    Apparatus under subclass 11.1 wherein the film contacts the internal
    surface of the drum or disk.


CLS 159/11.3
TXT Rotary disk:

    Apparatus under subclass 11.1 consisting of a revolving disk.


CLS 159/12
TXT Apparatus under subclass 7 in which the traveling surface is enclosed in a
    chamber.


CLS 159/13.1
TXT Moving film:

    Apparatus under subclass 5 adapted to maintain the liquid to be
    concentrated in a moving film.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 39 for boilers in which
    liquid flows over the heating surface in a thin stream.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 115+ for a trickler-type heat exchanger
    of general utility.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 75+ for devices for
    contact gases and liquids.


CLS 159/13.2
TXT Contacting tube:

    Apparatus under subclass 13.1 wherein the film comes in contact with a tube.


CLS 159/13.3
TXT Outside of tube:

    Apparatus under subclass 13.2 wherein the film contacts the outer portion
    of the tube.


CLS 159/13.4
TXT With gas wiping:

    Apparatus under subclass 13.1 having means for injected vapor or generated
    vapor to flow adjacent the film and relative thereto.


CLS 159/14
TXT Apparatus under subclass 13.1 in which the moving film ascends.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 34 for devices in which the
    fluid is indirectly heated by another separate fluid and including an
    internal separator.


CLS 159/15
TXT Apparatus under subclass 13.1 in which the film follows a zigzag path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 165+,
    particularly subclasses 171+ and 178 for apparatus of the gravity-flow type
    with shelf to shelf or zigzag treated material flow.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 355 for zigzag water tubes.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 116 for a trickler of the shelf to shelf
    type of general utility.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 127+ for contact
    fluids heated through the medium of other fluids out of contact therewith,
    and subclasses 108+ for contact apparatus including stationary baffles over
    which liquid flows in contact with gases.


CLS 159/16.1
TXT GASEOUS BLAST OR CURRENT:

    Apparatus under the class definition designed to pass a current of air or
    moisture-absorbing gas over or through a body or liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 304+ for a gas-liquid contact cooler
    cooling material out of contact with the contacting fluids.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 113 for air moisteners in connection
    with hot air furnaces.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 290 for concentrating apparatus
    specialized to chemistry with similar heating means.


CLS 159/16.2
TXT Submerger combustion:

    Apparatus under subclass 16.1 providing a burning operation under the
    liquid.


CLS 159/16.3
TXT Steam injection:

    Apparatus under subclass 16.1 wherein the blast or current is injected
    steam.


CLS 159/17.1
TXT MULTIPLE EFFECTS:

    Apparatus under the class definition relating to a series of two or more
    vessels in communication, adapted to cause evaporation of their liquid
    content at unequal pressures.  The communication may be either for the
    purpose of transmitting the vapors evolved in one vessel to the heating
    element of another operating at a different pressure, or for transmitting
    liquid material from one vessel to another operating at a different
    pressure for evaporation.


CLS 159/17.2
TXT Parallel fluid flow:

    Apparatus under subclass 17.1 wherein the fluids are in whole or in part
    introduced or removed from the system in parallel streams.


CLS 159/17.3
TXT Variant multistaging:

    Apparatus under subclass 17.1 wherein the evaporation varies in kind in the
    different stages.


CLS 159/17.4
TXT Contiguous evaporators:

    Apparatus under subclass 17.1 wherein evaporators share a common wall
    structure.


CLS 159/18
TXT Apparatus under subclass 17.1 in which the vessels are placed one above the
    other, so that the vapors evolved in the lower vessel will rise by gravity
    into contact with the bottom of the heating element of the next vessel
    above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13.1+,  for superimposed films.

    21,     for combined open and closed pans.


CLS 159/19
TXT Apparatus under subclass 17.1 in which the liquid undergoing treatment is
    evaporated in both closed and open pans at unequal pressures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.1+,   for evaporators employing superheating and pressure release.

    18,     for superimposed multiple effect evaporators.

    21,     for combined open and closed pan evaporators.


CLS 159/20.1
TXT Variable or counterflow:

    Apparatus under subclass 17.1 in which the direction of flow from vessel to
    vessel of the liquid undergoing evaporation is not parallel to the flow of
    the evolved vapors or is variable with respect thereto, or the order of the
    pans in the series with respect to the flow of either vapor of liquid is
    variable.


CLS 159/20.2
TXT With effect switching means:

    Apparatus under subclass 20.1 having means to shift the flow of the
    material treated.


CLS 159/21
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the liquid undergoing
    treatment is evaporated in both closed and open pans at substantially equal
    pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.1+,   for evaporators employing superheating and pressure release.

    18,     for superimposed multiple effect evaporators.

    19,     for combined open and closed pans in which the evaporation is at
    unequal pressure.


CLS 159/22
TXT Vessels under the class definition provided with covers adapted to close
    the surface of the evaporating liquid from the atmosphere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 100, 169+, and 268+ for processes and
    apparatus utilizing vacuum to cool a product.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 198+ and 285+ for similar devices
    specialized to chemistry.


CLS 159/23
TXT Vessel under subclass 22 in which heat is conducted through the closed
    vessel to the liquid undergoing evaporation.  The vessel is heated
    otherwise than by direct communication with a primary source of heat, such
    as a furnace.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 32+ for devices in which
    the fluid is indirectly heated by a separate fluid.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 378 for an indirectly heated liquid
    containing vessel.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for a vessel having heat
    exchange means.


CLS 159/24.1
TXT Regenerative:

    Closed vessels under subclass 23 in which the temperature of the vapors
    evolved by the evaporation is raised, and the vapors are employed to
    produce further evaporation.


CLS 159/24.2
TXT Heat recovery or regeneration:

    Apparatus under subclass 24.1 having means capturing or using usually
    waster heat to preheat or reuse heat in the apparatus.


CLS 159/24.3
TXT Thermocompression:

    Apparatus under subclass 24.2 wherein the spent vapor is compressed by
    injector means employing high pressure steam as a motive agent and
    introducing the combined steam as a heating agent in the evaporator.


CLS 159/25.1
TXT Rotatable agitator or coil:

    Closed vessels under subclass 23 provided with a agitator or heating coil
    adapted to be rotated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 92 for a heat exchanger of general utility
    including an agitating or stirring coil.

    366,    Agitating, subclass 279+ for rotating agitator in a fixed
    receptacle.


CLS 159/25.2
TXT Vertical axis agitator:
    Apparatus under subclass 25.1 wherein the agitator is rotated about a
    vertical axis.


CLS 159/26.1
TXT Heated tubes:

    Closed vessels under subclass 23 comprising a tube or tubes of
    heat-conducting material heated on the exterior and through which the
    liquid undergoing evaporation is passed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for steam-heated open pans.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 235.11+ for water tube
    boilers.


CLS 159/26.2
TXT Inclined:

    Apparatus under subclass 26.1 wherein the tube structure is located on an
    inclined plane.


CLS 159/27.1
TXT Vertical:

    Closed vessels under subclass 26.1 in which the liquid-containing heated
    tube or tubes are vertically arranged.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 332+ for water tube
    boilers in which the tubes are vertically arranged.


CLS 159/27.2
TXT Detached separator:

    Apparatus under subclass 27.1 having a separator detached from the main
    apparatus.


CLS 159/27.3
TXT Multieffect in one casing:

    Apparatus under subclass 27.2 wherein the fluid flows downwardly contrary
    to the material thermosphonic flow of the heated liquid.


CLS 159/27.4
TXT Downflow:

    Apparatus under subclass 27.1 wherein the fluid flows downwardly contrary
    to the material thermosphonic flow of the heated liquid.


CLS 159/27.5
TXT Floating calandria:

    Apparatus under subclass 27.1 wherein the heat exchanger is centrally
    disposed and the downcomer is the annulus between the heat exchanger and
    the casing.


CLS 159/28.1
TXT Heating elements:

    Devices under subclass 23 relating to the means for maintaining the heating
    medium separate from, but in heating contact with, the liquid or the
    surface of the liquid container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 44.1+ for fire tube
    boilers.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses, for the attemperator, per se.


CLS 159/28.2
TXT Baffled:

    Apparatus under subclass 28.1 wherein the steam chest has obstructing means
    causing the heating medium to flow in a predetermined path among the tubes.


CLS 159/28.3
TXT Spur tubes:

    Apparatus under subclass 28.1 wherein the heat exchange tubes are closed at
    one end.


CLS 159/28.4
TXT Coils:

    Apparatus under subclass 28.1 wherein the heat exchange means is in the
    form of a coil.


CLS 159/28.5
TXT Tubular inserts:

    Apparatus under subclass 28.1 wherein the heat exchange means are space
    fillers in tubes for confining the liquid.


CLS 159/28.6
TXT Plate-type evaporators:

    Apparatus under subclass 28.1 wherein the heat exchange means is in the
    form of a platelike evaporator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 40 for boilers in which
    liquid is flashed into steam.


CLS 159/29
TXT Closed vessels under subclass 22 combined with a heat-producing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, appropriate subclasses for boilers.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 344+ for water heaters for domestic
    or cooking purposes.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 129.1 for similar apparatus used in
    the production of soaps.


CLS 159/30
TXT Closed vessels under subclass 22 in combination with means for withdrawing
    a small quantity of the liquid under evaporation for examination.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 863.81+ for a sampler designed to
    remove a sample from a closed container.


CLS 159/31
TXT Closed vessels under subclass 22 in combination with means for trapping and
    separating the entrained liquid from the vapors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, for apparatus for separating liquid
    from a gas, per se.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 34 for separators in liquid
    heaters and vaporizers.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 321 for apparatus for dispersion of gas or
    inhibiting the formation thereof in a colloid system.


CLS 159/32
TXT Vessels under the class definition particularly designed for concentrating
    liquid material by evaporation and not provided with means to prevent
    access of the atmosphere to the surface of the liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 373 for similar heating vessels to
    heat water for domestic or cooking purposes.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 175+ for a heater or
    heat exchanger in combination with a separator.


CLS 159/33
TXT Open pans under subclass 32 in combination with means to scrape from the
    interior surface of the pan solids deposited thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25.1+,  for rotating scraper arms in closed pans.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 179+ for
    contact apparatus including a stationary receptacle or tube combined with
    an agitator or conveyor.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 453 for
    rotary pans and stirrers.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 129+ and 245.1+ for non-coating
    crystallizer apparatus excluded from Class 159 and not provided for
    elsewhere.


CLS 159/34
TXT Open pans under subclass 32 so mounted or designed that they may be tilted
    in or readily removed from their supports or pans especially adapted for
    portage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 349+ for tilting water heaters.


CLS 159/35
TXT Open pans under subclass 32 provided with a liquid receptacle between them
    and a source of heat.  The liquid receptacle contains a liquid other than
    that undergoing concentration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for combined open and closed pans.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 347 for kettle furnaces with a
    horizontal extension of the combustion chamber, and subclass 377 for water
    heating vessels heated by steam or water.

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 426 for double boilers.


CLS 159/36
TXT Open pans under subclass 32 in which both steam and furnace are employed as
    heating agents.  Compare with this subclasses 17.1 and 19, where the
    evaporation is effected at unequal pressure and the heating steam is
    evolved from the liquid undergoing evaporation.


CLS 159/37
TXT Open pans under subclass 32 provided with heating elements adapted to be
    connected with a source of steam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26.1+,  for closed evaporating chambers with heated tubes.


CLS 159/38
TXT Open pans under subclass 32 combined with a furnace.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 345 for kettle furnaces.


CLS 159/39
TXT Open pans under subclass 38 in which tubes are provided for communicating
    with the interior of the pan to circulate the liquid undergoing evaporation
    through the furnace or flue.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26.1+,  for closed evaporating chambers with heated tubes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 235.11+ and 406.1+ for
    water-tube structure and arrangement.


CLS 159/40
TXT Open pans under subclass 38 in which conduits are provided communicating
    with the flue or combustion chamber for carrying the hot gases within the
    outside dimensions of the pan.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28.1,   for heating elements for closed pans.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 44.1+ for heating-tube
    structure and arrangement.


CLS 159/41
TXT Open pans under subclass 38 combined with furnaces and means to regulate or
    positively control the direction of flow of the hot gases about the pan.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 285+ for dampers generally.


CLS 159/42
TXT Subject matter under the class definition combined with strainers or
    skimmers for removing or particularly designed to remove impurities from a
    liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 175+ for a heater or
    heat exchanger in combination with a separator, especially subclasses 184+.


CLS 159/43.1
TXT FLUID FEED OR DISCHARGE DEVICES:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means specifically
    designed for feeding liquid to, or discharging concentrate from, the liquid
    container or for feeding a heating fluid to, or discharging it from, the
    container.


CLS 159/43.2
TXT With alternating operating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 43.1 with means operating either or both of
    the feed or discharge devices successively in any arrangement.


CLS 159/44
TXT Subject matter under subclass 43.1 in which the feed or discharge is
    automatically controlled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, appropriate subclasses for fluid handling devices
    of general application, particularly subclasses 386+ for the control of
    liquid flow in response to changes in liquid level.


CLS 159/45
TXT Apparatus under the class definition specifically designed for effecting
    crystallization by evaporation in combination with means for collecting the
    crystals and discharging them from the evaporator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25.1+,  for rotating scraper arms.

    33,     for rakes or scrapers for graining and raking crystals from the
    bottom of open pans.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes and non-coating apparatus for
    growing therein-defined single-crystal of all types of materials, including
    use of or means including a concentrating evaporator.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 129+ or 245.1+ for non-coating
    crystallizer apparatus excluded from Class 159 and not provided for
    elsewhere.


CLS 159/46
TXT Apparatus under the class definition combined with or specifically designed
    for use in combination with means to effect a saving of heat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17.1+,  for concentrating apparatus with multiple effects.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 412+ for feed heaters for
    boilers generally.


CLS 159/47.1
TXT PROCESSES:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to methods of
    concentration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry: Physical Processes, subclasses 295+ for processes of
    concentration by evaporation combined with significant crystallization.

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, subclasses 61+ for a
    concentration process peculiar to sugar.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 774+ for a process of
    separating combined with heating or cooling.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses for a process for producing a concentrate composition of that
    class; e.g., concentrating animal extracts such as fish liver oils to
    obtain a vitamin composition, etc.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    appropriate subclasses for a food working operation combined with the step
    concentrating.


CLS 159/47.2
TXT Involving urea:

    Processes under subclass 47.1 wherein an urea containing material is
    concentrated.


CLS 159/47.3
TXT Involving waste liquid:

    Processes under subclass 47.1 wherein a liquid by product is concentrated.


CLS 159/48.1
TXT Spraying:

    Process under subclass 47.1 in which the liquid to be concentrated is
    reduced to the form of a spray during concentration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclass 90 for a separatory
    distillation process in which the distillant is introduced into the
    vaporization zone in the form of a spray.


CLS 159/48.2
TXT Producing liquid product:

    Process under subclass 48.1 for making a product which is liquid in its
    final form.


CLS 159/49
TXT Processes under subclass 47.1 in which the liquid to be concentrated is
    spread in the form of a film or thin layer for evaporation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclasses 72 and 89 for a
    separatory distillation process in which the distilland is spread on a
    surface in a thin film.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 159/900
TXT USING VIBRATORY FORCE:

    Art collection under class definition for encouraging positive circulatory
    motion.


CLS 159/901
TXT PROMOTING CIRCULATION:

    Art collection under class definition for encouraging positive circulatory
    motion.


CLS 159/902
TXT USING NATURAL HEAT:

    Art collection under class definition for using natural heat in any of its
    forms.


CLS 159/903
TXT Solar:

    Art collection under 902 wherein the sun furnishes heat.


CLS 159/904
TXT Floating solar still:

    Art collection under 903 in the form of solar still means.


CLS 159/905
TXT SEWAGE TREATMENT:

    Art collection under class definition involving concentrating sewage.


CLS 159/906
TXT WICK:

    Art collection under class definition involving use of a wick.


CLS 160/
TTL FLEXIBLE OR PORTABLE CLOSURE, PARTITION, OR PANEL

CLS 160/
TXT
    I.      This is the generic class for:

    (a)     Devices in the form of one or more flexible panel units (see
    section II);

    (b)     Devices in the form of panel units made up for plural strips,
    slats, or panels interconnected for relative motion (see section III);

    (c)     Devices in the form of panel units or partitions, including those
    completely rigid and/or portable, having means combined therewith for
    facilitating the passage of insects therethrough in one direction and
    preventing or making their passage difficult in the reverse direction (see
    subclass 12 and the notes thereunder);

    (d)     Devices in the form of portable partitioning panel units (see
    subclass 351 and the notes thereunder);

    (e)     Combinations of (a) through (d) with each other, with rigid panel
    units, including rigid closures, or with other structure not elsewhere
    provided for (see subclass 127 and the notes thereunder).

    II.     Flexible panel units are considered to be all those in which a
    flexible fabric or other flexible sheet material forms the panel portion,
    even though it may have a rigid frame, rigid enforcements, rigid support
    means for one or more edges thereof, or combinations of these features.

    III.    Panel units made up of plural strips, slats or panels
    interconnected for relative motion include all units in which means are
    provided for directly connecting adjacent elements together to provide for
    relative motion therebetween.  The individual strip, slat or panel elements
    may be rigid.  The relative motion provided may be, for example, one or
    more relative swinging or pivotal motions, relative sliding motions, or
    combinations of such motions.

    Panel units made up of plural rigid strips, slats or panels are not
    considered to be interconnected for relative motion and are, therefore,
    excluded:

    (a)     where a single strip, slat or panel is movably connected to a
    second strip, slat or panel which is immovably mounted or supported;

    (b)     where the only connection therebetween is a common operator and/or
    a common support.

    Such common support may be a single frame having either or both (1) rigid
    strips, slats or panels immovably mounted thereon, (2) rigid strips, slats
    or panels movably mounted thereon and connected only through the frame
    and/or by common operating means.

    IV.     These devices are termed, for example, closure, partition, weather
    protective, ventilation, ornamentation and like devices, more specifically
    called awnings, curtains, shades, blinds, gates, doors, windows, shutters,
    screens, roll tops for desks, picture screens, fire place screens,
    photographic backgrounds, vehicle storm fronts, shields, visors, robes or
    aprons, etc.

    V.      Since this is the generic class, it takes the subjects matter
    specified in sections I to III only when of a character not provided for in
    some other main class, for which see the notes below.

    VI.     The devices classified in this class and detailed in sections
    I-III, supra, have been generically termed flexible and portable panels.
    In contradistinction, those closures and panels not of the flexible panel
    type, have generically been called rigid closures and rigid panels. (For
    the classification of closures in general, see Class 220, Receptacles,
    subclasses 200+ and the notes thereto).

    NOTES


    The following notes are those considered necessary to stand out in
    connection with the main class definition. Many of them are repeated in
    connection with subclass definitions, and other notes to other main classes
    occur only under the particular subclasses to which they are pertinent.

    (1)     Note. Combinations.  In general, art devices of which a flexible or
    portable panel is but a part are classified with the appropriate art and
    cross-referenced in this class when the disclosure of structure of the
    panel, its mounting and/or operating means warrants the same.

            However, combinations of flexible or portable panels as above
    defined, with other closures or panels (herein called rigid closures or
    rigid panels) are in this class, subclasses 19+ and subclasses 87+.

    (2)     Note.  Enclosures.  This class does not have flexible or portable
    panels related to each other or to other structure to form enclosures.  For
    such devices, see the class appropriate to the type of enclosure claimed,
    as the various receptacle, cabinet, building structure, tent, vehicle,
    etc., classes; and also Class 128, Surgery, subclass 205.26. Enclosures
    should be distinguished from this Class 160 subclasses 19+ and other
    nonplanar flexible and portable panel arrangements such as are in
    subclasses 45+ (including subclass 53 and subclasses 56+), 86, 88, 131+,
    183, 262, and 352.

    (3)     Note.  Support Subcombinations. Support subcombinations for
    flexible and portable panels of the hanging and drape type are classified
    as follows:

    See Classes:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 87+.  These subclasses take:
    (A) nonmovably mounted tracks, both per se and in combination with their
    supporting means; (B) travelers, per se, (except as set forth in notes (4)
    to (6), subclass 87.2) and in combination with the track as in (A);  and
    (C) either (A) or (B) in combination with the hanging fabric or other
    flexible sheet material where only those features thereof are claimed as
    pertain to connection with the travelers.  Features claimed in addition to
    those enumerated above (such as movable mounting of track, fabric operating
    means, additional characteristics of the fabric, etc.) cause classification
    in Class 160, Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, particularly subclasses 87+.  These subclasses
    take the structure of both single and plural rods or other elongated
    elements claimed in combination with mounting means (including those of the
    bracket type) constructed to movably support the elongated element and
    having operating means, and also takes nonmovably mounted single or plural
    rods where features or rod structure in addition to the connection between
    the rod and bracket are claimed (not pertaining to the means for fastening
    the hanging or drape fabric).  Features in addition to the above, claiming
    the fabric either broadly or specifically, means to fasten the fabric to
    the elongated element, means to operate the fabric, etc., cause
    classification in Class 160, Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or
    Panel or Class 16, Miscellaneous Hardware.

    248,    Supports, particularly subclasses 251+.  These subclasses take the
    bracket mountings for both single and plural poles or other elongated
    elements both, per se, and in combination with the pole or elongated
    element where only those features pertaining to the connection with the
    bracket (see the reference in this note to Class 211) are claimed, and even
    though the bracket is adjustable, where no operating means (see the
    reference in this note to Class 211) are claimed.  Where features other
    than above enumerated are claimed, see Classes 211, Supports:  Racks; 16,
    Miscellaneous Hardware, and 160, Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition,
    or Panel.

    (4)     Note.  Other Subcombinations Elsewhere Classified. In general,
    elemental parts of flexible and portable panels, which are useful in other
    relations and which have attained a separate status in the art as separate
    subjects matter for invention are provided for in other main classes.  When
    proper provision could not be found, such parts or subcombinations were
    left in this class (160).

    General notes to: Stock Material (e.g., web, sheet, strand) will be found
    in Class 428. Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles.

    (4.1)   Note.  Joints, in general, will be found in Class 403, Joints and
    Connections.  However, fabric fastening means and joints of flexible and
    portable panels are classified in this class (160), subclasses 382+ and
    related art is set forth in the notes to such subclasses.

    Strand Guides will be found in either Class 16, Miscellaneous Hardware,
    subclasses 1+, 94+, 210+, 215, and 219; Class 74, Machine Element or
    Mechanism, when used in apparatus which transmits power between element of
    a machine or an adjustable article; or Class 254, Implements or Apparatus
    for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force, subclasses 389+ when used with the
    implements or apparatus which bodily moves a load between two locations.
    See Class 15, Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 246,
    where combined with means to wipe or clean cord or rope; and Class 24,
    Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 115+ where combined with cord
    and rope holding means.

    (4.2)   Note.  Making of closures, partitions and panels, flexible and
    portable. Single step methods and single operation apparatus for making
    devices here classified, and subcombinations thereof, will be found in the
    various manufacturing classes.  Plural step methods and plural operation
    apparatus, not otherwise classified, are found in Class 29, Metal Working,
    particularly subclass 24.5 for the assembly or combined making and assembly
    of venetian blinds, and the Notes in that class (29) refer to other
    appropriate loci.

    (4.5)   Note.  For devices designed for covering a supporting surface to
    receive wear which could otherwise meet the definitions of this class, see
    classes:



    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 177+;

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 34+ for a
    pavement made of modules or blocks.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 16+ for revetments.

    (5)     Note.  Pistons and followers of the flexible panel type have been
    excluded from this class and may be found in the pertinent subclasses of
    Classes 217, Wooden Receptacles; 220, Receptacles; 222, Dispensing and 92,
    Expansible Chamber Devices.

    (6)     Note.  Where any device or combination of devices classifiable in
    this class has an associated roll or roller, the roll or roller operating
    means will be either classified or cross-referenced in subclasses 238+.

    (7)     Note.  For designs for flexible and portable closures, partitions,
    and panels, such as curtains, shades, screens, gates, etc., and for designs
    of parts usable therewith, see the appropriate design class, particularly
    classes:



    D5,     Textile or Paper Yard Goods; Sheet Material.

    D6,     Furnishings, subclasses 332+.

    D8,     Tools and Hardware.

    D25,    Building Units and Construction Elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, appropriate subclasses for flexible fabric hangings,
    drapes and fabric filled frames forming portions of apparel, subclass 2.5
    for portable body worn or carried panels which have penetrating resistive
    features.

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, particularly subclass 588,
    and subclass 608 for shower baths with curtains.

    5,      Beds, for flexible panels combined with features of bed structure;
    subclasses starting with 186.1+ for bottoms, many of which are in the form
    of flexible panels, subclass 163 for screens and curtains for upending
    bedsteads, subclass 492 for pillow-sham holders and subclass 512 for
    screens.

    14,     Bridges, Particularly subclasses 50+ for rigid bridge gates and for
    bridge gates of the flexible panel type where features of bridge structure
    or relation are claimed.

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, for miscellaneous types of subcombinations
    utilized in conjunction with flexible and portable panel combinations, see
    particularly subclasses:

    2+,     for bushing or lining thimbles.

    49+,    for combined checks and closers.

    71+,    for closers.

    82+,    for closure checks.

    86.1+   and 87+, for panel hangers,travelers and/or tracks.  The lines with
    the last group of subclasses are set forth in note (3) of the main class
    definition of this class (160).

    110+,   and the notes thereunder for handles.

    193+,   for sash, frame or panel balances.

    221+,   for hinges.

    403,    and the notes thereunder, for paper weights.

    404,    and the notes thereunder, for weights of general application.

    27,     Undertaking, subclass 27 for flexible and portable panels
    associated with casket carriers.

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, particularly subclass 66 for
    pressing machine roll or platen covers and ironing table covers and
    subclasses 102.1+ for a cloth-stretcher frame.

    40,     Card Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, for devices of the flexible or
    portable panel type specialized to display information by printing or other
    characters or combined with other card, picture or sign exhibiting features.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, particularly subclasses
    7+ for nets; subclass 59 for burglar traps; subclasses 60+ for imprisoning
    traps; subclasses 64+ for self and ever set traps and subclass 119 for
    window, screen or door insect traps.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, for flexible and portable panels specialized for
    the purposes of such class or combined with other plant husbandry features.

    55,     Gas Separation, for flexible and portable panels designed and
    disclosed for gas separation.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclasses 19.1+ for a frame type skin or
    hide stretcher.

    70,     Locks, for flexible and portable panels combined with locks, where
    only those characteristics are claimed that are required for the
    application or operation of the lock.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, for flexible and portable panels combined
    with other features of rolling stock construction; subclasses 8.1+ for such
    panels combined with vestibule connections between adjacent cars; subclass
    324 for sleeping car curtains and rods and subclasses 332+ for passenger
    cars convertible from open to closed types.

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 67+ for a
    horizontally supported planar surface having a flexible coplanar extension
    surface.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, particularly
    subclasses 10+ for flexible panels in combination with a desk, counter or
    display surface, with or without a partition, arranged for protection
    against attack or having attack actuated operating means, and in the
    appropriate subclasses for nonfabric panels of penetrating resistive types.

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 402+ for sewn stock material including edging,
    ruffles or embroidery.

    114,    Ships, subclasses 102+ for sails and rigging and subclasses 240+
    for torpedo nets, where features specialized to ships are claimed,
    subclasses 117+ for doors, subclasses 173+ for ports and subclasses 201+
    for hatches and covers of the flexible and portable panel type, where ship
    features in addition to those necessary for the mounting and operation of
    the panel are claimed.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, particularly subclasses 500+ and subclasses
    201+ for flexible and portable panels where features of fireplace, stove,
    or furnace construction or particular relations thereto are claimed.

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclasses 87+ for flexible and
    portable panels organized to form a substantially complete enclosure with
    or without a roof and also for self-supporting portable roofs of flexible
    material.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 98+ for a radiator with an adjustable
    face covering means.

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 148+ and 157+ for diaphragms and their
    mounting for acoustic purposes.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 21+ for a ladder
    convertible to a shutter.

    185,    Motors: Spring, Weight, or Animal Powered, for spring motors of
    general application.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, for flexible and
    portable panels designed for such purpose.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 483+ for a supported
    or shaped filter medium.

    220,    Receptacles, for closures not of the flexible or portable panel
    type (called rigid closures), particularly subclasses 200+ and the notes to
    the definitions thereof.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 105 for curtain rod threaders.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, especially subclasses 594+ for a
    dispensing rack with multiple coil supporting stations.

    245,    Wire Fabrics and Structure, subclasses 2+ for patches for wire
    fabrics.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 483.1+ for fluorescent and
    phosphorescent screens.

    256,    Fences, appropriate subclasses for fences made of flexible panels.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, for sheet feeding of general
    application.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 847+ for vehicle dust and mudguards in
    the form of flexible panels.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, for flexible panel type closures combined with
    closure fasteners, having those characteristics of the panel that are
    required for the fastener.

    293,    Vehicle Fenders, for vehicle fenders of the flexible panel type.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, for flexible panels combined with
    land vehicles, their bodies and tops, subclasses 97.1+ for flexible panels
    having (1) optical characteristics, (2) a particular location with respect
    to a car or its driver, or (3) in combination with auto body structure, and
    subclasses 210+ for land vehicle tops having openings therein and movable
    closures therefor; and particularly subclass 219 for closures which
    comprise hinged sections or foldable or rollable material.  See also
    subclass 218 for closures which may be removed from the vehicle.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, appropriate subclasses, for a panel used in seat
    construction wherein the panel has means limiting its use as a component of
    a seat; especially subclasses 452.1+ where a configuration is provided
    conforming to the shape of the buttocks or back of the occupant.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, for flexible panels combined with
    features of cabinet structure in addition to those necessary for the
    mounting or housing of the panel.  When the cabinet is a hood, canopy,
    shield or storage chamber whose sole function is to house the panel or a
    part thereof, it is found in this Class 160, subclasses 19+.

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, for image projection apparatus in
    combination with a viewing screen.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    443+ for projection screens, subclass 445 for those with acoustical
    properties, subclasses 591+ for panels having reflecting or refracting
    characteristics for distributing light to a building and subclasses 885+
    for optical filters.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 278, for light projectors having a foldable
    or collapsible light screen or for projectors having an operator for a
    light screen.

    396,    Photography, for flexible and portable panels (a) combined with
    features of photographic instrumentalities provided for in such class, or
    (b) having features specially adapting the same to instrumentalities of
    such class (as subclass 3 for photographic backgrounds where the surface
    characteristics or particular relation to the subject matter to be
    photographed are claimed, and subclasses 479+ for curtain-type shutters).

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclass 714, for devices for screening the
    keyboard from view.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 37 for a
    spirally flat, wound strand or strip (e.g., braided rug), subclasses 68+
    for a sheet enclosed or covered and not found in any other class,
    subclasses 98+ for a structurally defined web or sheet stock material not
    specially provided for in any other class; subclasses 221+ for a web or
    sheet stock material having a structurally defined element or component and
    not specifically provided for in any other class; and subclasses 411.1+ for
    nonstructural stock material in the form of a plural layer web or sheet.

    454,    Ventilation, appropriate subclass for flexible and portable panels
    with additional means (as pumps, valves, deflectors, etc.) for causing,
    directing or controlling air flow.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application,particularly
    subclass 96 for enclosures specially designed for sun baths even though
    formed of flexible or portable panels.


CLS 160/1
TXT Devices under the class definition having associated therewith some
    additional device for sensing a condition, e.g., temperature change, wind
    direction or velocity, rain, etc., and which sensing device in turn
    initiates operation of means which perform some controlling function.

    (1)     Note.  Devices which stop the motion of movably mounted flexible
    panels at desired positions have been placed below with their operating
    mechanisms of the appropriate type of device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 1+ for thermal releasers
    or actuators for a rigid closure and  subclasses 21+ for a rigid closure
    responsive to or directly actuated by ambient fluid.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 29.02+ for hygrometers and
    hygrostats, per se.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclass 33 for
    related art.

    200,    Electricity: Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses
    under subclasses 61.62+, for flexible and portable panels which constitute
    circuit makers and breakers.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 276, for light projectors having an
    automatically operated light dimming means.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 100+ for a thermometer.


CLS 160/2
TXT Devices under subclass 1 in which at least one sensing device operates in
    response to other than a change in temperature.


CLS 160/3
TXT Devices under subclass 2, where the sensing device is initiated by the
    application of an outside force.


CLS 160/4
TXT Devices under subclass 3 wherein the force applied to the sensing device is
    the weight of an animal, person, vehicle or other object.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 263+ for a closure
    operator initiated by an impact or by pressure on a pedal or treadle.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclasses 93 and 94, for panel and platform
    emergency operative means for closure fastener bolts.


CLS 160/5
TXT Devices under subclass 2 wherein the sensing device is initiated by either
    or both (1) a change in weather condition (e.g., rain) or (2) variations in
    light intensity, including lack of light.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 21+ for closures
    responsive to or directly actuated by ambient fluid, e.g., rain, and
    subclass 25 for radiant energy, e.g., light controlled closures.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ and the classes specified in the
    Notes thereto, for photocell electric circuits and photocell apparatus.
    Indented subclass 205 includes those in which the photocell controls a
    shutter in the path between the light source and the photocell.


CLS 160/6
TXT Devices under subclass 1 wherein the sensing device is a nonfusible,
    thermal means.


CLS 160/7
TXT Devices under subclass 1 wherein the flexible panel has a starting or
    driving means whose operation is initiated by the sensing device.


CLS 160/8
TXT Devices under subclass 1, wherein the flexible panel has a retarding means
    to limit its speed after release by the sensing device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    296,    for speed limiting mechanism for roll type devices having no
    automatic control to initiate operation.


CLS 160/9
TXT Devices under subclass 1 wherein the sensing device either (1) releases the
    bias of a counter-balance means or (2) disconnects the flexible panel
    operator, to allow the panel to move under the control of gravity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for an additional automatically controlled starter or operator to
    assist gravity.

    8,      for an additional retarding means in the combination to control the
    movement.


CLS 160/10
TXT Devices under the class definition having a signal, a sign and/or an
    indicator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, appropriate subclasses for
    devices of the flexible or portable panel type specialized to display
    information by printing or other characters, or combined with other card,
    picture or sign exhibiting features.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclasses 38+
    particularly 41-43 for flexible or portable panels in combination with
    alarm circuits and so arranged that contact, penetration and/or movement
    cause operation of the alarm.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclasses for mechanical
    signals.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, appropriate subclasses, for electrical
    signaling, especially subclasses 545+ for electrical automatic door or
    window movement and partition penetration responsive indicating systems.


CLS 160/11
TXT Devices under the class definition combined with (1) a wiping element for
    wiping some portion of the combination for either cleaning purposes, for
    material application or for both or (2) a device for cleaning some portion
    of the organization.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40+,    for filler and filler type devices which may also incidentally wipe
    some relatively movable portion of the organization.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, for cleaners, per se, of
    the type there provided for.


CLS 160/12
TXT Devices under the class definition combined with means for facilitating the
    exit of insects.  These devices are intended to prevent or make difficult
    the reentrance of the insect.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 58+ for
    devices for trapping, particularly subclasses 107+ for insect traps and
    subclass 119 for insect traps combined with a window, screen or door.


CLS 160/13
TXT Combinations under subclass 12 in which the exit is applied to slidably
    connected frame or panel sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222+,   for such organization not having insect exits.


CLS 160/14
TXT Combinations under subclass 12 in which the exit comprises a zigzag surface
    formation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for conical or prismatic formations.


CLS 160/15
TXT Combinations under subclass 12 in which the exit structure includes at
    least two panels, strips or combinations of panels and strips spaced from
    each other in any direction and/or positioned in over-lapping relationship.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13      and 130+ (especially subclasses 222+) for devices of the plural
    strip, slat or panel type having overlapping or spaced sections.

    14,     for such exit structure with a zigzag surface formation.

    179,    for single frames having plural fabrics.


CLS 160/16
TXT Combinations under subclass 12 in which the exit passage structure is of
    conical or prismatic form or is at the apex of a protuberance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for such exit structure with a zigzag surface formation.


CLS 160/17
TXT Combinations under subclass 12 in which the exit is formed by means of
    grooves or apertures in a bar member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for such structures having conical or prismatic passage form.


CLS 160/19
TXT Devices under the class definition combined with (1) a hood, canopy, shield
    or storage chamber, provided to conceal or protect flexible or portable
    panels, a part or parts thereof, or some part or device combined therewith
    or (2) an outrigged rigid closure.

    (1)     Note.  Such devices claimed for concealing or protecting a
    plurality of diverse types of flexible or portable partitions will be found
    in this subclass and in subclass 25.

    (2)     Note.  Such devices claimed in combination with means for mounting
    the flexible or portable panel are in this subclass or appropriate indented
    subclass, except subclasses 38+, which takes the structure of such hood,
    canopy, shield or storage chamber, per  se.

    (3)     Note.  See Note (3) of the class definition of this class (160) for
    the line between this subclass, Class 16, Miscellaneous Hardware,
    subclasses 87.4+ and Class 211, Supports:  Racks, subclasses 87.01+.

    (4)     Note.  For rigid outrigged closures, see particularly Class 52,
    Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 74+; Class 217, Wooden
    Receptacles, subclass 60; and Class 220, Receptacles, subclasses 200+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for plural strip, slat or panel devices in which one or more of the
    slats are constructed to form a housing or container to receive other
    strips or slats.

    87+,    for structure wherein one device within the class definition is
    positioned in front of, or otherwise shields, one or more other devices (of
    either the same or different type) within the class definition, or a rigid
    closure.

    382+,   for hollow rods having means which substantially enclose a second
    elongated element over which a fabric hangs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 147+ for housed land
    vehicle doors and windows not of flexible or portable panel type.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, for cabinets for storing things in
    addition to the flexible or portable panel, this class (160) having
    cabinets solely for the purpose of housing such a panel.


CLS 160/20
TXT Devices under subclass 19 wherein a rigid panel has an outrigger (as
    defined in subclass 45) and has associated therewith sides of flexible
    panels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45+,    for outrigged flexible or portable panels.


CLS 160/21
TXT Combinations under subclass 19 in which the hood, canopy shield, storage
    chamber, outrigged rigid panel, or some combined part, is so constructed
    that all or part of the device may be changed in size by other than motion
    to or from operative positions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for such devices when only the structure of the hood, canopy,
    shield or storage chamber is claimed with no features of the flexible or
    portable panel or its supporting means are recited.

    64,     for other changeable size devices in the class, and see the notes
    thereunder.


CLS 160/22
TXT Devices under subclass 19 wherein the flexible or portable panel or some
    combined device has an outrigger (as defined in subclass 45).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45+     for outrigged flexible and portable panels.


CLS 160/23.1
TXT For roll type:

    Combination under subclass 19 combined with a flexible panel specially
    designed to be accumulated in the form of a roll.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for an outrigged flexible panel which may be of the roll type.

    238+,   for other roll type devices and see the search notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 515+ for a changeable
    exhibitor of the single reel and web type having a reel cabinet.


CLS 160/24
TXT Devices under subclass 23.1 having means peculiarly adapted to make the
    device portable, including those having legs or bases to support the device
    in upright position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    351,    for other portable devices, and see the notes thereto.


CLS 160/25
TXT Devices under subclass 23.1 in which two or more flexible or portable
    panels are claimed.  At least one must be a roll type. The other or others
    may be of roll or other types, except outrigged, for which see subclass 22.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50+,    54+, and 87+, for other plural flexible and portable panels without
    housings, etc.


CLS 160/26
TXT Combinations under subclass 23.1 in which the roll is housed in a chamber
    formed in the frame defining the opening to be closed by the roll type
    device.


CLS 160/27
TXT Combinations under subclass 26 in which the free or leading edge of the
    fabric (i.e., material) that unwinds from the roll is secured to a movable
    rigid closure mounted in the same casement frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for other fabric free edge connected structures and see the notes
    thereunder.


CLS 160/28
TXT Combinations under subclass 23.1 in which the free or leading edge of the
    fabric (i.e., material) that unwinds from the roll is secured to a movable
    closure (other than the flexible or portable panel type) mounted in the
    same opening.


CLS 160/29
TXT Combinations under subclass 23.1 in which the hood, canopy, shield, storage
    chamber or outrigged rigid panel is movable as a unit.


CLS 160/30
TXT Combinations under subclass 29 in which the hood, canopy, shield or storage
    chamber is mounted on a movable closure, including those built into the
    movable closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for flexible panels connected to and moved by slidable rigid
    closures.


CLS 160/31
TXT Combinations under subclass 23.1 in which the fabric roll (1) is associated
    with a frame which is mountable and demountable as a unit or (2) is
    associated with guides which are mountable and demountable as a unit with
    the roll or the hood, canopy, shield, storage chamber or outrigged rigid
    panel.

    (1)     Note.  The roll may be housed in a hollow frame part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239+,   for other framed type mounted roll devices.


CLS 160/32
TXT Combinations under subclass 19 in which either (1) a pleating device as
    defined in subclasses 84.01+ or a plural strip, slat or panel type device
    as defined in subclass 130 is associated with a hood, canopy, shield,
    storage chamber or outrigged rigid panel.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes plural strip, slat and panel devices
    in which one element constitutes a substantially complete housing for
    another element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23.1+,  for plural slats or panels which are stored in the form of a roll
    and have a hood, canopy, shield or storage chamber; or are combined with an
    outrigged rigid panel.

    84.01+, for other pleating devices.

    130.1+, and see the notes thereunder for other plural strip, slat or panel
    devices.


CLS 160/33
TXT Combinations under the subclass 32 in which the device is housed in a
    chamber formed in the frame defining the opening to be closed by the device.


CLS 160/34
TXT Combinations under subclass 32 in which (1) the plural strip, slat or panel
    device is a venetian blind as defined in subclass 166.1 or (2) the strips,
    slats or panels are arranged in substantially the same plane and the unit
    area is changed by moving the elements closer together or farther apart,
    for example, as in the parallelogram type (subclasses 136+).

    (1)     Note.  The hood, canopy, shield or storage chamber must house more
    than the mere operating or adjusting means to justify classification in
    this subclass.


CLS 160/35
TXT Combinations under subclass 32 in which there is (1) a pleating type device
    as defined in subclasses 84.01+ or (2) a plural strip, slat or panel
    device, as defined in subclass 130, having its elements hinged or swingable
    interconnected along adjacent edges and gathered or accumulated into a
    stack by adjacent elements swinging together into face to face relation in
    a pleating manner with the joints between adjacent elements on alternate
    sides of the stack.


CLS 160/36
TXT Combinations under subclass 32 in which a plural strip, slat or panel
    device slides in either straight or curved guides and has the elements
    thereof hingedly or swingably interconnected in side by side relation.


CLS 160/37
TXT Combinations under subclass 19 in which the housed part slides into a
    storage chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 372+ for a closure of the
    type provided for movable into a storage housing and see the search notes
    thereto for the loci of other closures movable into a storage chamber.


CLS 160/38
TXT Devices under subclass 19 in which only the structure of the hood, canopy,
    shield or storage chamber, with or without its mounting and/or operating
    means, is claimed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 74+ for a rigid,
    fixed outrigged panel, e.g., awning.


CLS 160/39
TXT Devices under subclass 38 where such structure is extensible.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130+,   for similar structures not disclosed for the purposes shown.


CLS 160/40
TXT Devices under the class definition (1) combined with means to fill cracks
    or other spaces left when the flexible panel is mounted in position, and/or
    (2) small sized flexible or portable panels for mounting in cracks or other
    small spaces to fill same, for example, between sashes of a window. The
    usual disclosed purpose is to prevent entry of the insects through small
    spaces which are left due to structure of the panel window or other closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for wipers and/or cleaners which may incidentally function as
    fillers.

    94      and 222+, for filled combinations for the combinations and
    structures classified therein.

    375+,   for shiftable edge bar sections for frame type devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 475.1+ for a closure
    seal, e.g., strippers gasket or weatherstrip, and see the search notes
    thereto for the loci of other seals.


CLS 160/41
TXT Devices under subclass 40 associated with a roll type device.


CLS 160/42
TXT Devices under subclass 41 wherein the device spans the distance between two
    or more outrigged roll type devices.


CLS 160/43
TXT Devices under subclass 40 located in the space between two panels, which
    two panels lie in parallel planes, and at least one of which is slidable
    relative to the other.


CLS 160/44
TXT Devices under the class definition combined with (1) means provided to
    supply liquid to and/or  (2) means to drain or otherwise direct or guide
    the flow of liquid upon or from the flexible or portable panel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for wiper devices which apply a liquid.

    40+,    for fillers for cracks or spaces which direct liquids past such
    cracks or spaces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for liquid dispensing
    containers, per se.


CLS 160/45
TXT Devices under the class definition in which some portion of the device is
    designed to mount upon a supporting surface and have an outrigger; i.e.,
    some rigid bracing element which is both mounted at and contacts a portion
    of the device at a point remote from its connection with the mounting
    surface to hold such portion at an angle to such surface.

    (1)     Note.  When an "awning" is recited without any structure necessary
    for an outrigger, see the appropriate succeeding subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19+,    for outrigged rigid panels combined with a flexible or portable
    panel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 74+ for a rigid
    outrigged, fixed panel, e.g., awning.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 146.1+ for a door or
    window combined with rigid visors, and subclasses 77.1+, particularly
    subclasses 84.1+, for rigid outrigged panels, such as windshields.


CLS 160/46
TXT Devices under subclass 45 in which the outrigger engages the device and the
    floor or ground.


CLS 160/47
TXT Devices under subclass 45 having means for engaging grooves in the walls
    defining the opening in the wall structure with which the device is
    associated for mounting the same.

    (1)     Note.  These devices for the most part are mounted in the same
    grooves in which a closure slides.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    for other flexible panels mounted in sliding closure guides.


CLS 160/48
TXT Devices under subclass 45 in which the outrigged device is associated with
    a rigid closure.

    (1)     Note.  The closure may be applied to an opening in the fabric of
    the outrigged device.


CLS 160/49
TXT Devices under subclass 48 in which the outrigged device is claimed in a
    related position to a moving closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47+,    for devices wherein this relation consists in that the mounting of
    the device is in the grooves in which a movable rigid closure slides.


CLS 160/50
TXT Devices under subclass 45 where the outrigged device is combined with at
    least one other nonoutrigged flexible panel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57+,    for structure wherein the nonoutrigged flexible panel constitutes a
    side for the device.


CLS 160/51
TXT Devices under subclass 50 where at least one of the flexible panels is
    convertible to another form of device either within or without the class
    definition.


CLS 160/52
TXT Devices under subclass 50 wherein the nonoutrigged device is of the roll
    type.


CLS 160/53
TXT Devices under subclass 45 in which the fabric collapses upon a central
    rod-like support in the same manner as an umbrella.


CLS 160/54
TXT Devices under subclass 45 wherein two or more flexible panels are outrigged.


CLS 160/55
TXT Devices under subclass 54 where at least one of the outrigged panels is of
    the roll type.


CLS 160/56
TXT Devices under subclass 45 wherein the direction of the extended fabric is
    changed or may be changed to form two or more panels at an angle to one
    another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for those nonplanar devices which collapse upon a central
    supporting rod.

    66+,    for a guide roller or similar device to direct the fabric in its
    rolling and unrolling motion onto and from its roller.


CLS 160/57
TXT Devices under subclass 56 in which the additional panels extend between the
    support and the outrigged panel.


CLS 160/58.1
TXT Sides foldable, rollable, or collapsible:

    Device under subclass 57 in which the additional panels are foldable,
    rollable or otherwise collapsible.


CLS 160/59
TXT Devices under subclass 45 in which the outrigged device may be positioned
    in a plurality of different positions.


CLS 160/60
TXT Devices under subclass 45 which by manipulation of parts may be converted
    to a second character of device.

    (1)     Note.  Where the only result of the manipulation results in the
    closing of an opening in a wall, the device is not considered to be
    convertible and has been classified in the pertinent subclasses below.


CLS 160/61
TXT Devices under subclass 45 in which the fabric consists of a plurality of
    strips, slats or panels.


CLS 160/62
TXT Devices under subclass 61 in which the plurality of strips, slats or panels
    may be accumulated to occupy a less amount of surface area when in either
    an outrigged position or in a nonoutrigged position.


CLS 160/63
TXT Devices under subclass 45 wherein the outrigged fabric has portions of
    diverse area such as a slit, slot or some rigid portion, e.g., glass etc.

    (1)     Note.  The line between this subclass and subclass 237, where no
    outrigged feature is claimed, is one of disclosure.  See the notes thereto
    for other devices with diverse areas.


CLS 160/64
TXT Devices under subclass 45 having means by which the size of the outrigged
    device may be changed other than by motion to its outrigged position or to
    its nonoutrigged position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     21, 39, 221, 222+, 240, 263, and 372, for other changeable size
    devices.


CLS 160/65
TXT Devices under subclass 45 in which the outrigger is braced.


CLS 160/66
TXT Devices under subclass 45 in which the outrigged device is of the roll type.


CLS 160/67
TXT Devices under subclass 66 in which there is means for changing the position
    of the roll in addition to its rotation about its own axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242,    for nonoutrigged changeable position roll type devices.


CLS 160/68
TXT Devices under subclass 66 wherein an operating means for causing the
    rolling and/or unrolling of the fabric is connected to the fabric free or
    leading edge, i.e., the edge first to leave the roll as it unrolls.
    Included are means for operating the outrigger which in turn is connected
    to the fabric free edge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    265,    for nonoutrigged roller type with fabric free edge operation.


CLS 160/69
TXT Devices under subclass 66 in which at least one of the outriggers is
    composed of a plurality of movable parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78+,    for nonroll type multipart outriggers.


CLS 160/70
TXT Devices under subclass 69 in which the outrigger consists of two parts
    pivoted together at an intermediate point.


CLS 160/71
TXT Devices under subclass 69 wherein the outrigger consists of two or more
    telescopic members which may be extended longitudinally in a straight line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for structure wherein the outrigger as a whole telescopes into a
    guide.

    80,     for nonroll type multipart rigger.


CLS 160/72
TXT Devices under subclass 66 wherein the outrigger is pivoted to the support.


CLS 160/73
TXT Devices under subclass 72 wherein some means, other than mere friction,
    holds the outrigger in its normally extended position.


CLS 160/74
TXT Devices under subclass 72 wherein the pivot has a sliding motion along the
    support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     for nonroll type sliding pivoted outriggers.


CLS 160/75
TXT Devices under subclass 66 in which the outrigger slides relative to the
    support, without any pivotal movement.


CLS 160/76
TXT Devices under subclass 45 in which a fabric frame is outrigged.


CLS 160/77
TXT Devices under subclass 76 in which the frame is pivoted.


CLS 160/78
TXT Devices under subclass 45 in which at least one of the outriggers is
    composed of a plurality of movable parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69+,    for this device in disclosed roll type structure, whether or not
    claimed.


CLS 160/79
TXT Devices under subclass 78 in which the outrigger consists of two parts
    pivoted together at an intermediate point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for this device with roll type structure, whether or not claimed.


CLS 160/80
TXT Devices under subclass 78 in which the outrigger consists of two or more
    telescopic members which may be extended longitudinally in a straight line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for this device with disclosed roll type structure whether or not
    claimed.


CLS 160/81
TXT Devices under subclass 45 in which the outrigger is pivoted to the support.


CLS 160/82
TXT Devices under subclass 81 wherein the pivot has a sliding motion along the
    support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for this device with disclosed roll type structure, whether or not
    claimed.


CLS 160/83.1
TXT Rigid or nonmovable:

    Device under subclass 45 in which the outrigger is rigid or nonmovable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for such an outrigger which engages the ground.


CLS 160/84.01
TXT PLEATING TYPE:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which the constructive
    material for a flexible closure may be contracted or expanded by imparting
    folds therein or by straightening or tending to straighten such folds and
    where means is provided for causing such folds to occur at or along
    predetermined lines by engaging the material at points at opposite ends of
    the fold lines or by securing an elongated element at each predetermined
    fold line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130+,   for interconnected slats or panels which do not form pleats.

    340+    for devices of the hanging type which are freely suspended from
    their upper edge and also have folds imparted by lateral gathering or other
    gathering means.

    370.23, for automotive windshield weather protectors or sunshields which
    are pleated or folded.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 34+ for a bellows-type
    expansion chamber device.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 18+ for a bellows-type diaphragm
    between two articulated railroad cars.


CLS 160/84.02
TXT With power operating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 84.01 which employs electrical, pneumatic,
    hydraulic, or mechanical means to cycle a closure between an open and
    closed or closed and open position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331,    for devices of the hanging or drape type which have an operating
    means.


CLS 160/84.03
TXT Multiple section unit:

    Subject matter under subclass 84.01 in which there are two or more
    separately operable segments in a single flexible closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115+,   for plural strip, slat, or panel devices having sections separately
    operable from each other.


CLS 160/84.04
TXT With preformed pleats:

    Subject matter under subclass 84.01 in which the constructive material is a
    fabric that has creases, lines of weakening, or the like formed therein to
    facilitate forming folds in the flaccid fabric when the closure is cycled
    from closed to open.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331,    for devices of the hanging or drape type which have an operating
    means.


CLS 160/84.05
TXT Honeycomb type:

    Subject matter under subclass 84.04 in which the means for facilitating
    folding includes a series of interconnected closed cells.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115+,   for plural strip, slat, or panel devices having sections separately
    operable from each other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 116+ for
    structurally defined honeycombed webs.


CLS 160/84.06
TXT With side guides:

    Subject matter under subclass 84.01 which has means provided to maintain or
    constrain the position of (a) the traveling end of the closure, (b) the
    lateral edges of the closure, or (c) a combination of end and edge
    constraint during closure movement.


CLS 160/84.07
TXT Fan type (e.g., for arched windows):

    Subject matter under subclass 84.01 in which a flaccid fabric closure is
    arranged in a generally semicircular shape when deployed about an apparent
    center.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 116+ for
    structurally defined honeycombed webs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    for plural strip, slat, or panel devices deployable about an
    apparent pivot.


CLS 160/84.08
TXT Plural panel type:

    Subject matter under subclass 84.01 in which a single unit is formed from a
    plurality of rigid panels that are interconnected for relative flexing
    motion, but which will move as a group.


CLS 160/84.09
TXT Lazy-tong links pivot about axes transverse to panel:

    Pleating-type device under subclass 84.01 wherein the means which causes or
    straightens the folds in the fabric, during the contraction or extension
    thereof, consists of a framework in which a series of jointed bars which
    engage the fabric pivot about axes that are perpendicular to the plane
    formed by the fabric when it is fully extended (i.e., extensible
    lazy-tong-type device)  on the framework.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    for plural strip, slat, or panel devices deployable about an
    apparent pivot.


CLS 160/84.11
TXT Lazy-tong links pivot about axes parallel to panel:

    Pleating-type device under subclass 84.01 wherein the means which causes or
    straightens the folds in the fabric, during the contraction or extension
    thereof, consists of a framework in which a series of jointed bars which
    engage the fabric pivot about axes that are parallel to the plane formed by
    the fabric when it is fully extended (i.e., extensible lazy-tong-type
    device)  on the framework.


CLS 160/85
TXT Devices under the class definition in which a single flexible panel is
    looped over or under at least one pole, or other guide roller to cover the
    same or portions of the same area, and has means for moving the flexible
    panel relative to such pole roller or other guide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124     and 386, for single fabrics unmovably draped over a pole.


CLS 160/86
TXT Devices under subclass 85 having a flexible fabric in the form of an
    endless web.


CLS 160/87
TXT Devices under the class definition wherein (1) two or more flexible or
    portable panels are claimed in combination, or (2) at least one such panel
    is claimed in combination with a rigid closure or rigid panel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19+     and 45, where one or more of the panels or closures is outrigged.

    40+,    for filler type combinations.

    130+,   for structures there provided for being excluded from this subclass
    (87), except when two or more of such units are claimed in combination, or
    when one or more of such units are in combination with a rigid closure or
    panel.  The definition and notes to subclass 130 set out the line in
    greater detail.

    179,    for plural fabrics in a single frame.


CLS 160/88
TXT Devices under subclass 87 where at least two or more of the panels are
    arranged in different planes and at least two panels are not parallel.
    They are usually so arranged as to form a partial enclosure.


CLS 160/89
TXT Plural devices under subclass 87, in which at least two of the panels are
    of different types, or at least two of them are of the same type but have
    different characters of motion, e.g., one swingable and one slidable.

    (1)     Note.  Patents illustrating, but not claiming a rigid closure are
    in this subclass and are cross referenced below when it is deemed advisable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130+,   for vehicle windshields made of plural rigid panels at least two of
    which are interconnected for relative motion and have been treated as
    plural strip, slat or panel devices.  A windshield in the form of (1) a
    single rigid panel, or (2) plural rigid panels not interconnected for
    relative motion, whether rigidly or movably mounted, has been considered a
    rigid closure.


CLS 160/90
TXT Combinations under subclass 89 in which a flexible or portable panel is
    claimed in combination with a rigid closure or a rigid panel.

    (1)     Note.  A rigid closure is, by definition, a closure not of the
    flexible or portable panel type.

    (2)     Note.  Shutter, grille and register type closures, even though the
    vane elements are axially pivoted to the frame or supporting structure have
    been treated as rigid closures and are in this or the indented subclasses,
    if combined with a flexible or portable panel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19+,    for outrigged rigid closures combined with flexible or portable
    panels;

    47      and 48+, for the combination of outrigged flexible or portable
    panels with nonoutrigged rigid panels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 61+ for facially opposed
    primary and auxiliary closures of the type provided for, and see the search
    notes thereto for the loci of other facially opposed closures.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 214+ for flexible and portable panel
    devices combined with windows and with some additional means for causing,
    directing or controlling the flow of air.


CLS 160/91
TXT Combinations under subclass 90 in which there are two or more rigid
    closures.


CLS 160/92
TXT Combinations under subclass 90 in which the rigid closure or rigid panel is
    mounted for a swinging motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclass 139, for flexible panels
    in the form of automobile side curtains combined with the automobile door
    so that the curtain opens and closes with door.


CLS 160/93
TXT Combinations under subclass 92 in which the rigid closure or rigid panel is
    pivoted to swing about an axis intermediate its ends.


CLS 160/94
TXT Combinations under subclass 93 in which, when the rigid closure or rigid
    panel is in one position, a flexible panel on one side or face of said
    rigid closure or rigid panel extends from adjacent the axis to one end of
    the rigid closure or rigid panel, and a similar second flexible panel
    extends parallel to, in the opposite direction from, and on the other side
    or face of said rigid closure or rigid panel from adjacent the axis to the
    other end of the rigid closure or panel.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass may include in the above combination a filler
    type device within the meaning of subclass 40, as set forth in the search
    notes thereto.


CLS 160/95
TXT Devices under subclass 92 in which the flexible or portable panel has some
    feature designed to coact with or otherwise be related to the operating or
    fastening means of the rigid closure, e.g., apertures through which the
    handle passes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for corresponding devices associated with other types of rigid
    closure.


CLS 160/96
TXT Devices under subclass 92 in which the flexible or portable panel and the
    rigid closure or rigid panel are mounted in facing relation and are so
    mounted that they can be moved either separately or together.


CLS 160/97
TXT Devices under subclass 92 in which the flexible or portable panel closes a
    part of an opening and the rigid closure or rigid panel closes the
    remainder of the opening.


CLS 160/98
TXT Devices under subclass 90 in which the rigid closure or rigid panel is
    combined with a roll type flexible panel.


CLS 160/99
TXT Combinations under subclass 98 in which some interconnection between a roll
    type and a rigid sliding closure is claimed.

    (1)     Note.  For the most part the roll is (1) mounted on a sliding
    closure or (2) so interconnected therewith as to follow its motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29+,    for such devices having a hood, canopy, shield or storage chamber.

    242+,   particularly 243+ and 246+, for other movably mounted devices of
    the roll type.


CLS 160/100
TXT Combinations under subclass 99 in which the free or leading edge of
    material as it unrolls is connected to the rigid sliding closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27      and 28, for free edge-fastening means, when fastened to a movable
    closure.

    290.1+, for such devices when not so fastened.


CLS 160/101
TXT Combinations under subclass 90 in which the flexible panel is mounted in
    any way between two or more sliding rigid closures.


CLS 160/102
TXT Devices under subclass 90 in which the flexible panel is connected to and
    caused to move by slidable movable closure.  The connection may be through
    operating means that transmits motion between the two.


CLS 160/103
TXT Devices under subclass 90 in which the flexible or portable panel has some
    feature designed to coact with or otherwise be related to the operating or
    fastening means of the rigid closure, e.g., apertures through which the
    handle passes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95,     for other flexible or portable panels.


CLS 160/104
TXT Devices under subclass 90 in which the rigid closure or panel is of the
    grille or shutter type.


CLS 160/105
TXT Devices under subclass 90 in which the flexible or rigid panel is removably
    mounted in or on the guides that guide the rigid-closure or panel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for outrigged devices disclosed for this combination.

    375+,   for frame type devices with shiftable side bars, many of which are
    disclosed for this combination.


CLS 160/106
TXT Devices under subclass 90 in which the flexible panel is in the form of a
    fabric in a frame and the rigid closure or panel is mounted (usually
    removably) on or in the frame and over the fabric.


CLS 160/107
TXT Devices under subclass 90 in which the flexible panel is of the plural
    strip, slat or panel type in which (1) a plurality of strips, slats and/or
    panels utilizing flexible material in their construction are claimed in
    combination or (2) a plurality of rigid strips, slats and/or panels are
    interconnected with each other for relative motion and form a single unit,
    or (3) both.


CLS 160/108
TXT Diverse devices of two types only under subclass 89, one being of the roll
    type and one of the hanging or drape type.

    (1)     Note.  There may be two or more roll type and/or two or more of the
    hanging or drape type, but no other type of devices.


CLS 160/109
TXT Diverse devices under subclass 108 in which either the entire organization
    or at least one complete type of device is so mounted as to be movable as a
    unit.

    (1)     Note.  A unit is the fabric and the pole, roller, bar or other
    means which carries the fabric.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    355,    for other shiftable position devices and see the notes thereto.


CLS 160/110
TXT Diverse devices under subclass 109 in which at least one pole, roller or
    bar which carries a fabric or at least one support means for a pole, roller
    or bar is so constructed that the length thereof may be changed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for other extensible structures and see the notes thereto.

    112,    for diverse devices having an adjustable support, but not of this
    roll hanging or drape type.


CLS 160/111
TXT Diverse devices under subclass 109 in which a unit is slidable in a
    vertical direction only.


CLS 160/112
TXT Diverse devices under subclass 108 in which at least one pole, roller or
    bar which carries a fabric, or at least one support means for a pole,
    roller or bar, is so constructed that the length thereof may be changed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for this device with disclosed roll and hanging or drape type
    whether or not claimed.


CLS 160/113
TXT Plural devices under subclass 87, all of the plural strip, slat or panel
    type, in which (1) a plurality of strips, slats and/or panels utilizing
    flexible material in their construction are claimed in combination or (2) a
    plurality of rigid strips, slats and/or panels are interconnected with each
    other for relative motion and form a single unit, or (3) both.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115+,   for two or more groups or strips, slats or panels separately
    operable in a single device, which device has been treated as a plurality
    of devices of the plural strip, slat or panel type.

    130+,   for single devices of the plural strip, slat or panel type.

    136+,   for plural strip, slat or panel type devices with parallelogram
    type operators.

    137,    for a plurality of parallelogram units in which two sections
    thereof are so pivoted to a common side as to move in different manners
    when operated.


CLS 160/114
TXT Devices under subclass 113 in which at least one plural strip, slat or
    panel unit lies in a plane different from at least one additional plural
    strip, slat or panel unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     where one of the units is also nonparallel with respect to at least
    one of the others.


CLS 160/115
TXT Devices under subclass 113 wherein a single unit has a plurality of sets of
    strips, slats or panels, at least one set of which may be adjusted or
    operated separately from the others.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130+,   for single units in which all the strips, slats or panels operate
    together.


CLS 160/116
TXT Devices under subclass 115 wherein one set of strips, slats or panels
    covers a passage through the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180,    for a single strip, slat or panel covering an opening in a plural
    strip, slat or panel unit and see the notes thereto.


CLS 160/117
TXT Devices under subclass 113 wherein the units are mounted on the opposite
    sides of a single opening, these units usually being extensible toward one
    another for the purpose of closing the opening.


CLS 160/118
TXT Devices under subclass 117 where the units are guided on or in track means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201+,   for single units which are track guided.


CLS 160/119
TXT Devices under subclass 113 wherein the units are mounted to extend from
    opposite sides of a single support.


CLS 160/120
TXT Plural devices under subclass 87, all of the roll type.

    (1)     Note.  Single rollers with plural distinct fabric panels wound
    thereon are in subclass 121.1, indented hereunder, but single rollers
    having one fabric thereon are in subclasses 238+ even though such single
    fabric has different characteristics at different areas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238+,   for single devices of the roll type.

    241,    for such single devices of the roll type combined with a plurality
    of rollers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 368.6+, 35.5+, 530+,
    533+, 558+, and 594+ for a winding or unwinding device which may include
    plural roll supports.


CLS 160/121.1
TXT Single roll:

    Device under subclass 120 wherein at least two distinct panels are windable
    into a single roll and are either superimposed coextensively or overlapped.

    (1)     Note.  One or more of the separate fabrics may wind in separate
    rolls, as long as a plurality of fabrics wind into a single roll in one
    position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    for plural strips, slats or panels of the roll type in side by side
    nonoverlapping relation.

    237,    for a fabric having different characteristics in different areas
    and considered as a single fabric.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 590+ for a mounted roll
    support.


CLS 160/122
TXT Plural roll type devices under subclass 120 in which the fabrics as they
    unroll move in different directions, as one up and one down, one vertically
    and one horizontally, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    where the rolls are positioned at an angle to each other but the
    fabrics move in the same direction.

    121.1+, for fabrics movable in different directions from the same roll.


CLS 160/123
TXT Plural devices under subclass 87, in which all are of the hanging or drape
    type.

    (1)     Note.  See note (3) to the main class definition for the location
    of support subcombinations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84.01+, for hanging or drape type devices which pleat when gathered.

    85,     for fabrics looped over a pole or roller so that the fabric may be
    moved to change the area on the two sides thereof.

    327+,   for a single fabric combined with a plurality of poles.

    330+,   for single devices of the hanging or drape type, where two fabrics
    are hung from a single support means in side-by-side relationship and the
    structure does not provide for the adjacent edges to overlap, the patents
    have been treated as single devices of the hanging type.  However, if the
    structure provides for overlapping of the fabrics, if more than two fabrics
    are claimed, if two or more support means are provided, or if there is a
    relationship other than side-by-side, the patents have been classified as
    plural.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 44+, 53, 54+,
    and 57+ for plural, joined webs or sheets which make up stock material,
    rather than a "unit" of the type referred to in the definition of subclass
    130.


CLS 160/124
TXT Plural devices under subclass 123 in which one fabric hangs in front of
    another and both are supported on a single pole or track.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes single fabrics supported at an
    intermediate line so that part of the fabric hangs in front of another part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126,    where the single support constitutes both a track for one fabric
    and a pole for another fabric, or where two separate tracks are supported
    on a single pole one in front of the other.


CLS 160/125
TXT Plural devices under subclass 123 in which means are provided for changing
    the position of at least one fabric carrying pole.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333+,   for shiftable position devices of the single hanging or drape type.


CLS 160/126
TXT Plural devices under subclass 123 in which (1) some means are provided for
    causing the adjacent edges of fabrics hung from substantially the same
    height to overlap or (2) two tracks or supporting rods, whether separate or
    integral are provided at substantially the same elevation arranged parallel
    to each other.  The tracks or rods may merely overlap each other laterally
    or may be coextensive.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124,    for fabrics arranged one in front of another, instead of merely in
    laterally overlapping relation at the edges.


CLS 160/127
TXT Flexible and portable panels under the class definition in which some
    additional device or means is claimed in combination therewith, which
    device or means is in addition to mounting or supporting means, operating
    means, the structure of the flexible or portable panel, locking or latching
    means, or other features which are required for the complete and successful
    functioning of the device itself for its intended purpose and not provided
    for above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes surface simulation of house
    construction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 4 for hand screens or veils attached to or
    depending from or made a part of a hat or head covering; subclasses 15+ for
    an eye shield or goggle device, or attachment thereto.

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 50.01+ for a
    horizontally supported planar surface member which is combined with a
    flexible panel.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 2+ and subclass 180 for racks
    convertible to and combined with flexible and portable panels, and see this
    class (160), subclass 19 for the line.

    222,    Dispensing, for flexible and portable panels combined with
    dispensing structure, but a mere opening is not considered limited to
    dispensing and will be found in the pertinent subclasses in this class
    (160).

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 3+ for canopy or curtain
    type cabinets, subclass 210 for cabinets having the function of a mask or
    screen to partially enclose an independently supported object, subclasses
    271+ for cabinet components interconnected to cause constrained relative
    motion and subclass 297 for cabinets with movable components of flexible or
    fabric material or of plural strips, slats or panels connected one to
    another; and see Class 160,  subclasses 19+, for the line.

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, for an image projector in combination
    with a viewing screen.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    443+ for screens, per se, having surface characteristics especially
    designed to receive projected images.


CLS 160/128
TXT Devices under the class definition which by manipulation of parts may be
    changed to a second character of device, which second character of device
    may or may not come within the class definition.

    (1)     Note.  Structures for converting a single type of device within the
    class definition to a plural type of device, or plural types within the
    class definition to other things, are in subclasses 19+, subclass 51,
    subclass 60 or subclasses 87+ and see particularly the notes to subclass 87.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 11+ for a
    horizontally supported planar surface convertible to a flexible panel.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 21+ for a ladder
    convertible to a shutter.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 2+ for support racks convertible to
    flexible and portable panels.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 3+ for cabinets
    convertible to flexible and portable panels.


CLS 160/129
TXT Devices under subclass 128 in which the device is of the plural strip, slat
    or panel type, and the strips, slats or panels are interconnected for
    relative motion, as set forth in paragraph III of the main class definition.


CLS 160/130
TXT Devices under the class definition in which (1) a plurality of strips,
    slats and/or panels utilizing flexible material in their construction are
    claimed in combination or (2) a plurality of rigid strips, slats and/or
    panels are interconnected with each other for relative motion and form a
    single unit, or (3) both.

    (1)     Note.  Plural rigid strips, slots or panels interconnected only by
    a common operator or support (including a frame) will be found in Class 49,
    Movable or Removable Closures and Class 454, Ventilation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for similar subject matter disclosed as a hood, canopy, shield or
    storage chamber for a flexible or portable panel device.

    84.01+  and 85+, for related subject matter as defined therein.

    113+,   for the combination of a plurality of units as defined in this
    subclass (130); and see the notes to said subclass (113) for the stated
    line between these two subclasses.

    123+,   (and the notes to subclass 123), for a plurality of separate
    hanging or drape type flexible panels.

    332,    for a plurality of chain cables or strands which hang from a
    support.

    349,    for bottom holding means, per se, even if disclosed with a device
    for this subclass (130).

    353,    for plural frames for single flexible panels.

    371+,   for framed or panel type devices; usually distinguished from this
    subclass (130) in that only a single fabric is used.

    372+,   for adjustable frames for single flexible panels, including those
    slidably interconnected U-shaped frame members with a single flexible
    fabric.

    375+,   for single frame type devices with slidable rigid edge sections,
    such devices not having been treated as plural strip, slat or panel type.

    379,    for those single frame type devices with intermediate reinforcing
    bars and members where there is but a single fabric for the frame.

    380,    for single fabrics clamped between two frame elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 73.1+ for closures
    interconnected for concurrent movement. See (1) Note above.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 660+ for rigid
    fabric or lattice openwork, e.g., slatted floor covering.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 210+ for land vehicles
    having top with openings therein and movable panels as closures therefor.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 44+, 53, 54+,
    and 57+ for plural, joined webs or sheets which make up stock material,
    rather than a "unit" of the type referred to in the definition of subclass
    130.


CLS 160/131
TXT Devices under subclass 130 wherein at least one strip, slat or panel has
    its major axis in other than a straight line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32+,    where one strip, slat or panel houses another.

    57+     and subclasses 61+ for outrigged flexible panels of the plural
    strip, slat and panel type with separate side units not a part of the main
    panel.


CLS 160/132
TXT Devices under subclass 131 in which plural strips, slats or panels, each of
    bow or U-shape, have the ends of corresponding arms adjacent and pivoted
    together.


CLS 160/133
TXT Plural strip, slat or panel devices under subclass 130 in which the strips,
    slats or panels are accumulated in the form of a roll.

    (1)     Note.  Many of these devices have no roller upon which they are
    accumulated, the end bar, strip, slat or panel being the element about
    which the others are rolled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121.1+, for single roll having panels wound thereupon in superimposed or
    overlapping relation so that at least portions of adjacent panels wind up
    together.

    238+,   for other roll type devices and see the notes thereunder.


CLS 160/134
TXT Devices under subclass 130 wherein at least two of the elements are
    arranged either in the same plane or in parallel planes so that they may
    swing around a single actual or virtual pivot which is at right angles to
    such plane or planes.


CLS 160/135
TXT Devices under subclass 130 having means peculiarly adapted to make the
    device portable including those having legs or bases to support the device
    in upright position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    351,    and see the note thereto for other portable devices.


CLS 160/136
TXT Devices under subclass 130 wherein two intersecting sets of parallel
    strips, slats or panels are interconnected by pivots at their intersections.

    (1)     Note.  The parallelogram type of device may be a mere operator for
    another type of plural strip, slat or panel device.


CLS 160/137
TXT Devices under subclass 136 wherein at least two sections of a parallelogram
    unit are pivotally interconnected through a common side, and which sections
    move differently when the device is operated.  The different movements may
    take place concurrently and usually consist of pivotal movements in
    opposite directions.


CLS 160/138
TXT Devices under subclass 136 having an operator for either moving the device
    with respect to its mounting means and/or collapsing the device.

    (1)     Note.  Counterbalances have been considered as operators within
    this definition.

    (2)     Note.  Where both moving and collapsing operators are claimed, the
    patent is placed here and cross referenced into subclasses 139+.


CLS 160/139
TXT Devices under subclass 138 wherein the operator effects the collapsing of
    the device only and does not move the unit as a whole with respect to its
    support.

    (1)     Note.  Since the majority of parallelogram type devices expand in
    one direction when they collapse in another, the term "collapse" has been
    used generically in referring to any motion about the parallelogram pivots.


CLS 160/140
TXT Devices under subclass 139 where there are two diverse types of operators.


CLS 160/141
TXT Devices under subclass 140 wherein one of the operators is a spring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144+,   for other spring type operators.


CLS 160/142
TXT Devices under subclass 140 wherein one of the operators is a weight.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146+,   for other weight type operators.


CLS 160/143
TXT Devices under subclass 142 wherein an extension of one of the parallelogram
    elements is weighted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148,    for additional weighted parallelogram extensions.


CLS 160/144
TXT Devices under subclass 139 wherein the operator is a spring.


CLS 160/145
TXT Devices under subclass 144 wherein the spring is part of a brace for the
    parallelogram unit.


CLS 160/146
TXT Devices under subclass 139 wherein the operator is a weight.


CLS 160/147
TXT Devices under subclass 146 wherein the weight is carried by a strand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150,    for other operators utilizing a strand and pulley.


CLS 160/148
TXT Devices under subclass 146 wherein an extension of one of the parallelogram
    elements is weighted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143,    for this feature with disclosed diverse type of operator whether or
    not claimed.


CLS 160/149
TXT Devices under subclass 139 wherein the operator includes gearing to either
    change the mechanical advantage of the operator, or to allow the operator
    to be controlled from a remote point.


CLS 160/150
TXT Devices under subclass 139 wherein the operator includes a strand and
    pulley.


CLS 160/151
TXT Devices under subclass 139 wherein the operator is completely carried by
    the unit.


CLS 160/152
TXT Devices under subclass 136 having means to hold the unit in either
    partially or completely collapsed position.


CLS 160/153
TXT Devices under subclass 152 wherein the holding means comprises both tension
    and compression means.


CLS 160/154
TXT Devices under subclass 152 wherein the holding means is a pivoted
    compression bar.


CLS 160/155
TXT Devices under subclass 154 wherein the compression bar is frictionally
    fastened in adjustable position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158,    for similar catches for tension members.


CLS 160/156
TXT Devices under subclass 152 wherein the holding means is a tension member.


CLS 160/157
TXT Devices under subclass 156 wherein a flexible end of a tension member is
    foreshortened to change the effective length of the member.


CLS 160/158
TXT Devices under subclass 156 wherein the tension member is frictionally
    fastened in adjustable position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155,    for similar friction devices on compression members.


CLS 160/159
TXT Devices under subclass 136 wherein the unit collapses on guides.


CLS 160/160
TXT Devices under subclass 136 wherein the unit is pivoted to its support.


CLS 160/161
TXT Parallelogram structures as defined in subclass 136 wherein no structure of
    the operator or mounting means is claimed.


CLS 160/162
TXT Devices under subclass 161 wherein at least one additional set of plural
    strips, slats or panels is mounted on the device for movement therewith.


CLS 160/163
TXT Devices under subclass 162 wherein there are a plurality of diverse sets of
    plural strips, slats or panels.


CLS 160/164
TXT Devices under subclass 162 wherein one additional set is composed of
    interconnected strips, slats or panels.


CLS 160/165
TXT Devices under subclass 162 wherein the pivots of the parallelogram type are
    parallel to the plane of the unit as a whole.


CLS 160/166.1
TXT Venetian blind type:

    Plural strip, slat or panel device under subclass 130 in which the elements
    are mounted in parallel spaced relation (and in other than edge to edge or
    overlapping substantially coplanar relation) so that their surfaces may be
    projected onto a single plane so as to be either coincident or in
    overlapping relation.

    (1)     Note.  Where the elements are in edge to edge or overlapping
    substantially coplanar relation, see subclasses 130 particularly subclasses
    218+, note particularly subclasses 222+ and subclasses 229.1+.


CLS 160/167
TXT Devices under subclass 166.1 in which the position of the entire assembly
    is changeable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61+,    for similar position changes effected by means of outriggers.

    113,    for related devices and see the notes thereto.

    168+,   for such devices having means only for accumulating the slats in a
    bunch and/or for guiding the slats in unit form into and out of operative
    position.

    355,    and see the notes thereunder for other changeable position devices
    within the class.


CLS 160/168.1
TXT With accumulating means:

    Device under subclass 166.1 having means for accumulating the elements and
    decreasing the effective area of the device, i.e, moving toward each other
    to form a bunch or maintaining or holding them so accumulated.


CLS 160/169
TXT Devices under subclass 168.1 in which the elements are accumulated by first
    moving the element nearest the stationary end to the said end, and then
    repeating the process so that the nonaccummulated elements remain in their
    spaced relation at the moving end until they reach the bunched end of the
    unit.

    (1)     Note.  Where the strips, slats, or panels may be accumulated at
    either end of the panel, the patents have been placed here.


CLS 160/170
TXT Devices under subclass 168.1 in which means are accumulated by means of
    strands, which strands are wound up on drums or rollers. The drums or
    rollers may be rotated by any character of means.


CLS 160/171
TXT Devices under subclass 170 in which means are provided to cause the drum or
    roller to have axial motion during the winding or unwinding operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 158+ for a traverse
    device for shifting a drum for distributing convolutions being wound.


CLS 160/172
TXT Devices under subclass 168.1 in which means are provided to guide the ends
    of the elements during the accumulating operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266+,   for guides for roller type devices.


CLS 160/173
TXT Subject matter under subclass 168.1 relating to the structure of the plural
    strip, slat or panel unit and subcombinations thereof having claimed
    features restricting the same to devices as defined in subclass 168.

    (1)     Note.  The primary feature restricting the unit to this subclass
    are features providing for accumulation.  Slats with openings for the
    accumulating strands are considered restricted for accumulation.  However,
    where the mounting means are claimed, see subclass 168.1 or other
    appropriate preceding indented subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161+,   218+ and 236, for other type units.

    177     and 178.1+, for other venetian blind type units.


CLS 160/174
TXT Devices under subclass 166.1 in which means is provided independent of the
    accummulating means for adjusting the angular position of the strip, slat
    or panel elements.  Such means may be merely the manner in which they are
    mounted permitting such adjustment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168.1+, where the angular adjustment features have combined therewith
    features for accumulation of the slats.


CLS 160/175
TXT Devices under subclass 174, having latch or detent means for securing the
    strips, slats or panels in their angularly adjusted position.


CLS 160/176.1
TXT With angle adjusting means:

    Device under subclass 174 having operating means for performing the angle
    adjusting operation of the strip, slat or panel elements.


CLS 160/177
TXT Subject matter under subclass 174 relating to the structure of the plural
    strip, slat or panel unit and subcombinations thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The primary features restricting the unit to this subclass
    are those providing for adjustment of the unit angle.  However, where the
    mounting means are claimed, see subclass 174 or the appropriate preceding
    indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161+,   218+, and 236, for other type units.

    173     and 178.1+, for other venetian blind type units.


CLS 160/178.1
TXT Subcombination or structure thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 166.1 relating either to the physical
    structure of a venetian blind type unit or to a subcombination thereof
    having claimed features restricting the same to such a venetian blind type
    unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161+,   and subclasses 218+, for units of other than venetian blind type.

    166.1,  or the appropriate preceding indented subclasses where mounting
    means are claimed.

    173,    for slats, per se, having features for accumulation, e.g., with
    openings for accumulation stands.

    177,    for a venetian blind structure or subcombination thereof having
    features for tilting.

    236,    for strips or slats having features for tilting.


CLS 160/178.2
TXT Cord lock:

    Subcombination or structure under subclass 178.1 relating to means for
    locking the lift cord operating the accumulation means of a cord operated
    venetian blind unit so as to hold the slats at a selected elevation.


CLS 160/178.3
TXT Slat support (e.g., tape ladder):

    Subcombination or structure under subclass 178.1 relating to means
    associated with each slat of a venetian blind type unit for supporting the
    slats in suspended, vertically spaced-apart relation to one another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    139,    Textiles: Weaving, subclass 384 for woven fabric ladder webbing for
    supporting venetian blind slats.


CLS 160/179
TXT Framed type devices under subclass 130 having a single frame with plural
    fabrics therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 455+ for plural
    panels within a single frame, e.g., a plural light window sash.


CLS 160/180
TXT Devices under subclass 130 in which at least one of the strips, slats or
    panels has an opening within its confines, and there is at least one other
    strip, slat or panel movably interconnected with the first and closing the
    opening therein.  Included are those devices having an opening formed in
    two or more adjacent strips, slats or panels and a single additional one
    closing such opening.

    (1)     Note.  The opening may be permanently closed by a foraminous fabric
    or a rigid panel, e.g., glass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    where there are at least two plural strip, slat or panel units
    associated together, at least one such unit having an opening within its
    confines and the other forming a closure therefor.

    353,    for additional frames for a single fabric-filled frame, where the
    additional frames are not necessary for fastening the fabric.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 169+ for a closure
    movable with and independently of the closure on which it is mounted.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 146.1+ for a land
    vehicle door or window coming within the above definitions.


CLS 160/181
TXT Devices under subclass 130 in combination with means to mount or support
    the same.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130+,   for mounting or supporting means for the special types there
    provided for.


CLS 160/182
TXT Devices under subclass 181 in which the plural strip, slat or panel device
    is mounted or supported in a frame, which is intended for removable
    mounting on some other support.

    (1)     Note.  Two or more framed panels do not go in this subclass unless
    there is an additional mounting frame for the combination.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180,    for those in which a single strip, slat or panel closes an opening
    in one other or in a plurality of other strips, slats or panels.

    353,    for additional frames for a single fabric filled frame, where the
    additional frames are not necessary for fastening the fabric.


CLS 160/183
TXT Devices under subclass 181 in which the strips, slats, or panels are
    positioned in different nonparallel planes when in operative position
    relative to the support or mounting means.

    (1)     Note.  Those devices in which the strips, slats, or panels are in
    planar arrangement when in operative position, but fold or otherwise assume
    a nonplanar arrangement when moved to inoperative position, are in the
    appropriate subclasses below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233,    for plural strip, slat or panel units with means for maintaining
    them in other than planar forms.


CLS 160/184
TXT Devices under subclass 181 in which the strips, slats or panels are not
    interconnected for relative motion.

    (1)     Note.  These devices are plural strip, slat or panel devices
    utilizing flexible fabrics in their structure, and are usually
    interconnected only by a common operator or support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130+,   for such devices having no mounting or supporting means claimed.


CLS 160/185
TXT Devices under subclass 181 in which at least two of the elements are so
    interconnected with others or with each other as to have at least two
    different relative motions. Such different motions may be, for example, one
    pivotal and one sliding; both pivotal but about nonparallel axes; both
    slidable but along angularly related lines.


CLS 160/186
TXT Devices under subclass 181 in which the mounting or supporting means is
    such that when the device is moved from an operative or closing position to
    an inoperative or opening position at least two passageways are provided.


CLS 160/187
TXT Devices under subclass 186 in which the strips, slats or panels are
    pivotally interconnected.


CLS 160/188
TXT Devices under subclass 181 in which there are means (including
    counterbalance means) to either (1) cause motion of one or more of the
    strips, slats or panels relative to others of the unit,  (2) cause motion
    of the unit or some portion thereof relative to the support or mounting
    means or (3) both. The operating means must be more than a mere hand hold
    or handle.

    (1)     Note.  Means to force the unit against its support or against
    portions of the structure having an opening to be closed by the unit are
    not considered operators but are in appropriate coordinate subclasses
    below, e.g., subclass 209.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181+,   for the combination with operating means for the particular types
    of devices there provided for.

    218+,   for the structure of the unit both with and without means to cause
    relative motion of the strips, slats or panels where no supporting or
    mounting means are claimed.


CLS 160/189
TXT Devices under subclass 188 having both a counterbalance and some additional
    operating means which is not a counterbalance.


CLS 160/190
TXT Devices under subclass 188 having some means usually in the form of weights
    or springs to counterbalance the weight of the plural strip, slat or panel
    device, in whole or in part, or to more than counterbalance the weight of
    the device.


CLS 160/191
TXT Devices under subclass 190 in which the counterbalance means includes the
    use of springs.

    (1)     Note.  Weight means may be used in addition.


CLS 160/192
TXT Devices under subclass 188 in which the operating means involves the use of
    springs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189     and 191, for devices wherein the spring operates to counterbalance
    the weight of the device.


CLS 160/193
TXT Devices under subclass 188 in which the operating means involves the use of
    strands.


CLS 160/194
TXT Devices under subclass 181 in which the mounting or supporting means
    involves the use of a track on or by which the device is mounted or guided,
    which track or some portion of the track system is in turn mounted for
    motion relative to the support on which the track is mounted.


CLS 160/195
TXT Devices under subclass 194 in which the track is mounted for pivotal motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359,    for pivoted guides for slidable flexible or portable panels.


CLS 160/196.1
TXT Unit hung from horizontal track:

    Device under subclass 181 in which the plural strip, slat or panel unit is
    suspended from a horizontally disposed track.

    (1)     Note.  Where the unit is so suspended, there may be in addition a
    track or guide means for the bottom edge thereof.


CLS 160/197
TXT Devices under subclass 196.1 in which the strips, slats or panels are
    slidably interconnected.


CLS 160/198
TXT Devices under subclass 196.1 in which the strips, slats or panels are
    pivotally interconnected, the axes of such pivots being parallel to the
    track.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204,    for similar devices not hung from horizontal tracks.

    217,    for pivotally interconnected units where such pivotal
    interconnection is necessary for removal from the support.


CLS 160/199
TXT Devices under subclass 196.1 in which the interconnection between the
    strips, slats and panels and the track and other portions of the supporting
    means is such that the only possible motion of the strips, slats or panels,
    when moved from an operative to an inoperative position is that of pivotal
    folding.


CLS 160/200
TXT Devices under subclass 196.1 in which one of the strips, slats or panels
    may be moved independently of the other strips, slats or panels; that is,
    it may be moved while the other strips, slats or panels are maintained
    stationary.

    (1)     Note. These arrangements are usually for the purpose of providing
    an opening less in area than the total area covered by the unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    for combinations of plural strips, slats or panel units, one unit
    of which may be moved independently of another.

    205,    for similar structures where the device is not hung from a track.


CLS 160/201
TXT Devices under subclass 181 in which the strip, slat or panel unit is guided
    by tracks.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    214,    for devices where one of the strips, slats or panels is slotted and
    engages guide pins, or where one or more edges of one or more of the
    strips, slats or panels engage guide wheels or other nontrack guide means
    for sliding motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclass 278 for light projectors having a flexible
    light screen.


CLS 160/202
TXT Devices under subclass 201 in which the strips, slats or panels are
    slidably interconnected.


CLS 160/203
TXT Devices under subclass 201 in which means are provided to pivot the unit to
    a support, said pivot being displaced from the plane of the unit.

    (1)     Note.  These devices usually have arms connected at right angles to
    the plane of the individual strips, slats or panels and extending at an
    angle from the track.


CLS 160/204
TXT Devices under subclass 201 in which the interconnection pivot axis is
    parallel to the track as in subclass 198.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217,    for plural strip, slat or panel type devices where the pivotal
    connection must be used to remove the device from its support.


CLS 160/205
TXT Devices under subclass 201 in which one strip, slat or panel is mounted for
    motion independently of the other strips, slats or panels; that is it may
    be moved while the other strips, slats or panels are maintained stationary.


CLS 160/206
TXT Devices under subclass 201 in which the strips, slats or panels are so
    connected that the only possible motion of the strips, slats or panels,
    when moved from an operative to an inoperative position, is that of pivotal
    folding.


CLS 160/207
TXT Devices under subclass 206 in which at least a portion of the track is
    positioned in a substantially vertical direction.


CLS 160/208
TXT Devices under subclass 201 in which one only of the strips, slats or panels
    is connected to the track to be guided thereby.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206+,   for such devices constrained for pivotal folding.

    215+,   where the device is removable as a unit, even though it has sliding
    motion.


CLS 160/209
TXT Devices under subclass 201 having some means to force the unit against the
    structure on which it is mounted or supported and usually in a direction
    away from the track.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194+,   where the track is movably mounted for this purpose.

    206+,   for such means for devices having constrained pivotal motion.


CLS 160/210
TXT Devices under subclass 181 in which the unit or at least one strip, slat or
    panel thereof is connected for pivotal motion relative to the mounting or
    supporting means.


CLS 160/211
TXT Devices under subclass 210 in which the strips, slats or panels are
    slidably interconnected.


CLS 160/212
TXT Devices under subclass 210 in which the strips, slats or panels are
    interconnected with each other for pivotal motion and the axis of such
    interconnection pivot is at an angle to the axis of the pivot which
    interconnects the unit with the support or mounting means.


CLS 160/213
TXT Devices under subclass 210 in which the strips, slats or panels are so
    interconnected that the only possible motion, when moving from operative to
    inoperative position, is that of pivotal folding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    for fan type plural strip, slat and panel devices.


CLS 160/214
TXT Devices under subclass 181 in which the unit or at least one strip, slat or
    panel thereof is mounted to slide relative to the support or mounting means.


CLS 160/215
TXT Devices under subclass 181 in which the unit has structure providing for
    inserting into or over and removing from an opening in the mounting or
    supporting means but has no other connection for motion relative thereto.


CLS 160/216
TXT Devices under subclass 215 in which the strips, slats or panels are
    slidably interconnected.


CLS 160/217
TXT Devices under subclass 215 in which the strips, slats or panels are
    pivotally interconnected, and relative pivotal motion between two or more
    of the strips, slats or panels is necessary for the operation of removal
    and/or insertion.


CLS 160/218
TXT Devices under subclass 130 relating only to the mode of interconnecting two
    or more strips, slats or panels for relative motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130+,   for the structure of a unit formed of two or more strips, slats or
    panels utilizing flexible material where they are not interconnected for
    relative motion.

    184,    for such a unit combined with its mounting means.


CLS 160/219
TXT Devices under subclass 218 wherein the unit has portions of diverse
    characteristics.

    (1)     Note.  Units wherein the size and/or shape of the individual
    strips, slats or panels constitutes the only variation, and units in which
    the strips, slats or panels are modified only for a support fastener or
    operator are not considered to have diverse characteristics.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237,    and see the notes thereto for other devices with diverse areas.


CLS 160/220
TXT Devices under subclass 218 in which the elements are interconnected for
    plural motions relative to one another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185,    for plural strip, slat or panel devices mounted or supported for
    plural relative motions.


CLS 160/221
TXT Devices under subclass 220 in which the elements are slidably
    interconnected so that the area of the unit may be varied in more than one
    direction, such as both laterally and longitudinally, to increase or
    decrease the unit area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    374+,   for single frames having side bars so adjustable.


CLS 160/222
TXT Devices under subclass 218 in which the strips, slats or panels are
    interconnected so as to be slidable relative to each other.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes filling means (as defined in subclass
    40) between the strips, slats or panels; filling means in other relations
    will be found in subclass 40.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    197     and 202, when the device is slidable in a trackway.

    214,    for such devices when mounted or supported to be slidable relative
    to a fixed support.

    220+,   for similarly connected devices.

    372+,   for two U-shaped slidably interconnected frames with a single
    fabric covering.

    375+,   for frame type devices with slidable rigid end panels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 660+ for rigid
    fabric or lattice openwork, e.g., a slatted floor covering.


CLS 160/223
TXT Devices under subclass 222 in which two parts each constituted of two or
    more spaced strips, slats or panels, are slidably interconnected by having
    individual strips, slats or panels of one part slidable on (including
    telescoping within) individual strips, slats or panels of the second part.


CLS 160/224
TXT Devices under subclass 222 having (1) means to cause relative sliding
    motion between the elements of the unit, (2) antifriction means for the
    slidable interconnection or (3) both thereof.


CLS 160/225
TXT Devices under subclass 222 having means to prevent undesired relative
    sliding motion between the elements of the unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233+,   for means for preventing relative pivotal motion between panels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclasses 262+ for extension link type devices
    adapted to hold a closure member in adjusted position.


CLS 160/226
TXT Devices under subclass 222 in which one strip, slat or panel, or means
    secured thereto or mounted thereon, embraces the edge of a partially
    overlapping relatively slidable strip, slat or panel to effect the slidable
    interconnection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32+,    for devices in which one strip, slat, frame or panel constitutes a
    substantially complete housing for a second strip, slat, frame or panel.

    228,    where the means to effect such slidable interconnection rides in a
    slot in the side of the relatively movable strip, slat or panel, without
    embracing the edge of the relatively movable strip, slat or panel.


CLS 160/227
TXT Devices under subclass 226 in which the embracing means is integral with
    one of the elements of the unit.


CLS 160/228
TXT Devices under subclass 222 in which the slidable connection is comprised by
    a protrusion on one element entering a groove or slot in a second element
    of the unit. The protrusion may be of any form and may be either integral
    or attached.


CLS 160/229.1
TXT Edge-to-edge interconnected:

    Device under subclass 218 in which the strip, slat or panel elements are
    movably interconnected in side-by-side, i.e., edge-to-edge relation.

    (1)     Note.  The elements maybe in the form of tubes, wires or strands,
    straight or bent.

    (2)     Note. Plural strips, slats or panels having their edges formed so
    as to interengage for relative pivotal motion are here, or in the
    appropriate indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220,    for similarly interconnected strip, slat or panel elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g, Buildings), subclasses 660+ for rigid
    slatted or fabric openwork, e.g., a slatted floor covering.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclass 55 for pivotally
    interconnected sections claimed with a vehicle bed or side board for
    rearward removal.


CLS 160/230
TXT Devices under subclass 229.1 in which there is a single covering fabric for
    at least two of the elements of the unit.  The covering fabric may form the
    flexible joint between adjacent strips, slats or panels in addition to
    covering the units.  For the most part these are devices having two
    three-sided incomplete frames, the ends of the side pieces of the two
    frames abutting each other, and there being a single fabric.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231+,   for fabric joints between adjacent strips, slats or panels only.

    379,    for single frames having single fabrics with intermediate
    reinforcing bars, members or braces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 16+ for similar structures used
    as diaphragms between two articulated railroad cars.


CLS 160/231.1
TXT Interconnected by strand, fabric, rubber, or plastic:

    Plural strips, slats or panels under subclass 229.1 wherein a strand, band,
    fabric or any material made of rubber or plastic is the interconnecting
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 660+ for rigid
    fabric or lattice openwork, e.g., a slatted floor covering.


CLS 160/231.2
TXT Interconnected by rubber or plastic:

    Plural strips, slats or panels under subclass 231.1 wherein a material made
    of rubber or plastic is the interconnecting means.


CLS 160/232
TXT Devices under subclass 229.1 in which the elements have any one or any
    combination of the following features:  (1) are of hollow form, (2) are of
    hollow form with filling material or (3) are in two or more layers, i.e.,
    the basic element has some character of covering material thereon.  Fabric
    filled frames are not considered to be in layers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179,    for plural fabrics for single frames.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, appropriate subclasses.


CLS 160/233
TXT Devices under subclass 229.1 having means to prevent undesired pivotal
    motion between the panels or at least two of them.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225,    for means for preventing relative sliding motion between panels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclass 55 for vehicle end gates
    having pivotally connected sections.


CLS 160/234
TXT Devices under subclass 233 wherein the motion preventing means holds the
    panels in a planar position and does not hold them in any other position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217,    for related art.


CLS 160/235
TXT Devices under subclass 229.1 in which the side edges are bent or curled to
    form the interconnecting means.


CLS 160/236
TXT Subject matter under subclass 130 relating to the structure of the strip or
    slat, per se.

    (1)     Note.  Claims to single strips or slats of the venetian blind type
    having the special features there provided for are in subclasses 166.1+
    especially subclasses 173, 177, and 178.1+, e.g., those having features for
    guiding the same in grooves are in subclass 172; those with features of
    structure providing for accumulating the same, e.g., openings for the
    accumulating strands, are in subclass 173 and those with features of
    structure providing for angular adjustment are in subclass 177.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229.1+, for single strips or slats having features for side by side
    interconnection.

    232,    for such strips or slats which are also hollow, filled or covered.


CLS 160/237
TXT Devices under the class definition having fabrics with portions of diverse
    characteristics, including, for example, such things as a slit, a slot or
    some rigid portion, such as glass, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Where the fabric or unit is modified only for supporting or
    operating means, see the appropriate subclasses for these means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12+,    for openings in flexible and portable panels designed as insect
    exits.

    48+,    for rigid closures applied to openings in the fabric of an
    outrigged flexible panel.

    63,     for this feature with outrigged structure, whether or not claimed.

    219,    for plural strip, slat or panel units having portions of diverse
    characteristics.

    385+,   for mere hems in the edges of fabric or mere modification of the
    fabric for fastening or supporting the same.


CLS 160/238
TXT Devices under the class definition in which material is accumulated in the
    form of a roll.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66+,    for outrigged roll type devices.

    84.01+, for the pleating type.

    85+,    for the plural run type.

    87+,    for combinations of two or more flexible or portable panels,
    particularly subclasses 98+, 108+ and 120+.

    133,    for plural strip, slat or panel devices of the roll type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 348 for a copyholder
    comprising a roll to which the leading edge of copy is secured to
    accumulate the copy on the roll.

    114,    Ships, subclasses 106 and 107 for roll type sails.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 520+ for convolute
    winding on a roll.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the notes thereunder.


CLS 160/239
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 238 in which the roll together with its
    panel is associated with a frame mountable and/or demountable as a unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for corresponding devices in which there is also a housing for the
    roller.

    266+,   for roll type with guides or fabric edge holders.

    371+,   for framed type devices, particularly subclass 378.


CLS 160/240
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 239 in which the size of the frame may be
    varied.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for changeable size devices wherein there is a hood, canopy, shield
    or storage chamber for a roll.

    64,     for a changeable size outrigged device.

    372+,   for a flexible panel having an     adjustable size frame.


CLS 160/241
TXT Roller type devices under subclass 238 with means by which the fabric may
    be wound into a roll or unwound therefrom from either of two or more edges.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85+,    for devices where the single panel hangs in plural runs.

    89+,    for two or more roll type devices claimed in combination including
    particularly subclass 121.1 for two or more panels windable into a single
    roll.

    266+,   for idler rollers which guide the fabric but do not receive it.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 347, 471, 478, 483,
    and 518+ for changeable exhibitors so constructed.


CLS 160/242
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 238 having means for changing the position
    of the roll in addition to rotating about its own axis.

    (1)     Note.  Those rolls having two or more distinct types of position
    changing motion are in this subclass, even though a single one of such
    motions is below provided for.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29+,    for a roll associated with a movable hood, canopy, shield or
    storage chamber.

    99+,    for a roll mounted on a slidable rigid closure.

    109+,   for shiftable combined roll and hanging or drape types.


CLS 160/243
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 242 in which translatory motion of the
    roll causes winding or unwinding thereof; i.e., the roll has a motion at
    right angles to its own axis in addition to rotation about its axis.


CLS 160/244
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 243 in which the position of the free or
    leading edge of the fabric, i.e., the edge which is first to leave the roll
    as the fabric is unwound, maybe adjusted to various positions.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes devices so organized that in normal
    operation the roll is translated to cause winding and unwinding, but the
    leading fabric edge has means for holding it in any of a plurality of
    adjusted positions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290.1+, for other fabric free edge holding means.


CLS 160/245
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 243 in which there is a spring operated
    roller.


CLS 160/246
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 242 in which the only motion of the roll
    other than rotation about its own axis, is a straight line motion in the
    plane of the fabric that is unwound therefrom and in a direction at right
    angles to the axis of the roll.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30      and 99+, for roll type devices mounted on sliding rigid closures.

    242,    for all other single types of translatory roll motion and for all
    rolls having two or more types of translating motion.

    243+,   for arrangements in which roll-translation is necessary to cause
    the winding and unwinding operation.


CLS 160/247
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 246 in which the immediate support for the
    roll is operated for translation by means engaging said immediate support
    at a point intermediate the length of the roll.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29+,    for movable roll type devices in combination with hoods, canopies,
    shields, storage chambers or outrigged rigid panels.

    99,     for movable roll type devices in combination with nonpivoted rigid
    closures.


CLS 160/248
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 246 in which the translating means
    comprises a rack and pinion.


CLS 160/249
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 246 in which the immediate support for the
    roll is operated for the translation from one end of the roll only, by
    means other than a strand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252+,   for strand operated devices under subclass 246.


CLS 160/250
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 246 in which (1) the roller itself is
    extensible or (2) the immediate support for the roll is extensible to take
    rolls of different lengths or (3) both.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     and the subclasses there noted for other changeable size devices in
    the class.

    263,    for extensible roller structures.


CLS 160/251
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 246 in which means are provided at spaced
    points along the line of translation to secure the roll at such points.


CLS 160/252
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 246 in which strand means such as
    elongated flexible elements such as cords, ropes, tapes, chains, are used
    to cause roll translation.


CLS 160/253
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 252 in which there is a pulley or drum
    mounted on the roll supporting means which pulley or drum is necessary to
    the roll translation operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254+,   for drums not on the roll supporting means.


CLS 160/254
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 252 in which the strands which cause roll
    translation are wound upon and unwound from a drum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    253,    for pulleys or drums on the roll supporting means.


CLS 160/255
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 254 in which means to guide the roll
    during its translation are provided.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256,    259, and 260, for other roll guides.

    266+,   for fabric and stick guides.


CLS 160/256
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 252 in which the translating strands are
    provided with at least two spaced guides, so positioned that the roll which
    is intermediate these guides moves toward one in one direction of
    translation and toward the other in the other direction of translation.
    For example, where the roll is vertically translated, strand guides are
    provided both above and below the limiting positions of the roll.


CLS 160/257
TXT Devices under subclass 252 having means for holding the roll in its
    adjusted position.


CLS 160/258
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 257 in which the position holding means
    acts directly on the translating strand or strands to hold such strand or
    strands.


CLS 160/259
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 258 provided with means to guide the roll
    during its motion of translation.

    (1)     Note.  Included are devices wherein addition to the connection
    between the strands and the roll to cause translation, there is a second
    distinct interconnection so that the strands also guide the roll during
    translation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255,    256, and 260, for other roll guides.

    266+,   for fabric and stick guides.


CLS 160/260
TXT Roll devices under subclass 252 having means for guiding the roll during
    its translation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255,    256, and 259, for other roller guides.

    266+,   for fabric and stick guides.


CLS 160/261
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 246 utilizing rods for causing roll
    translation.


CLS 160/262
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 238 in which (1) the axis of the unit is
    not a straight line, (2) the roller upon which the device rolls is not
    cylindrical or (3) the roller upon which the device rolls is flexible.


CLS 160/263
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 238 in which at least one dimension of the
    roll unit is variable, other than by unrolling or rolling up the fabric.
    The change in lineal dimension may be made by permanently shortening a part
    definitely constructed to be shortened.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for extensible flexible or portable panels (including roll type
    panels) combined with hoods, canopies, shields storage chambers or
    outrigged rigid panels.

    250,    for shiftable position extensible rollers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 105.3+ for extensible rod racks.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 529, 571+, and 578+ for
    adjustable winding or unwinding spool or mandrel.


CLS 160/264
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 238 having some means for reinforcing the
    fabric panel.  Such means may be mounted on the fabric, or on the structure
    to which the roll type device is applied for engagement with the fabric.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266+,   for guide means for the fabric or means cooperating with the guide
    means where such means are the only reinforcement for the fabric.

    349.1+, for hanging or drape type with similar reinforcing means.

    379,    for framed type with similar reinforcing means.


CLS 160/265
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 238 in which an operating means for
    causing the rolling and/or unrolling of the fabric is connected to the
    fabric free or leading edge, i.e., the edge first to leave the roll as it
    unrolls.

    (1)     Note.  In some of these devices the operating means is guided and
    acts as a guide for the fabric.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for outrigged roll type with fabric leading edge operator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 110+, especially subclass 122
    for handles, per se.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 28 for a tassel,
    per se.


CLS 160/266
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 238 in which means are provided to guide
    the traveling end of the panel in its movements and/or to guide the lateral
    edges of the panel in their movements.


CLS 160/267.1
TXT Fabric side edge and stick:

    Roll type device under subclass 266 in which both the side edge of the
    fabric panel and the stick at the traveling end thereof are guided.


CLS 160/268.1
TXT Fabric side edge:

    Roll type device under subclass 266 in which the side edge of the fabric is
    guided or held.


CLS 160/269
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 268.1 in which some means is provided for
    clamping the fabric side edge.


CLS 160/270
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 268.1 in which the guide is in the form of
    a slot or channel substantially coextensive with the maximum travel of the
    fabric.


CLS 160/271
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 270 in which the fabric edge travels in
    the slot or channel.


CLS 160/272
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 271 in which there are provided channel
    means in which the grooved or channel-shaped fabric receiving guide is
    mounted.


CLS 160/273.1
TXT With interlock between fabric and guide:

    Roll type device under subclass 271 in which there is a slidable interlock
    between the fabric edge and the guide slot or channel whereby the fabric
    edge is prevented form separating laterally from the guide slot or channel
    under the influence of ordinary forces.


CLS 160/274
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 266 in which only the stick at the
    traveling end of the fabric is guided.


CLS 160/275
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 274 having some means, other than mere
    friction means, which engages the stick or some other element carried by
    the fabric or stick to hold it in adjusted position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290.1+, and the subclasses there noted for other fabric free edge holding
    means.


CLS 160/276
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 275 in which a detent element is mounted
    on the fabric or stick for reciprocating release motion.


CLS 160/277
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 274 in which the guides are in the form of
    nonchanneled bars or strands.  These strands are usually nontranslating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    265     and 319+, for strands which are anchored to the fabric free edge
    and move therewith.

    274+,   for channeled or grooved guides.


CLS 160/278
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 277 in which there is provided some
    nonpositive holding means and in addition, means for operating the holding
    means to release it.


CLS 160/279
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 277 in which the guiding strand passes
    axially through or into the stick.


CLS 160/280
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 274 having some device carried by the
    stick and movable axially thereof for holding the leading edge in adjusted
    position.


CLS 160/281
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 280 having means to operate the holding
    device to cause it to release.


CLS 160/282
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 281 in which the portions which engage the
    guides have both friction elements and rollers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284,    for similar devices without friction elements.

    285+,   for similar devices not having release mechanism.

    288,    for such devices with neither release mechanism nor rollers and
    which are axially movable.

    289,    for friction elements which do not move axially of stick.


CLS 160/283
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 282 in which there are brake means for the
    roll.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286,    for similar devices without release mechanism.


CLS 160/284
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 281 in which the portions which engage the
    guides have rollers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282+,   for devices which also disclose friction elements.

    287,    for devices having rollers but no release mechanism.


CLS 160/285
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 280 in which the portion which engages the
    guides has both rollers and friction elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282+,   for such devices which also disclose release mechanism, whether or
    not claimed.

    287,    for such devices with rollers only.

    288,    for such devices with axially movable friction elements only.

    289,    for friction elements which do not  move axially of stick.


CLS 160/286
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 285 in which there are brake means for the
    roll.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    283,    for such devices which also disclose release mechanism.


CLS 160/287
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 280 in which the portions which engage the
    guides have rollers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282+,   for such devices which also have release mechanism and friction
    elements.

    284,    for such devices which also have release mechanism.

    285+,   for such devices which also have friction elements.


CLS 160/288
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 280 in which the portions which engage the
    guides have axially movable friction elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281,    for such devices which also have release mechanism.

    282+,   for such devices having also release mechanism and rollers.

    285+,   for such devices having also rollers.

    289,    for friction elements which do not    move axially of stick.


CLS 160/289
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 274 in which the portion which engages the
    guides has friction elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281     through 283, 285+, and 288, for other devices having friction
    elements in which the friction elements move axially of the stick.


CLS 160/290.1
TXT With fabric leading edge fastening means:

    Roll type device under subclass 238 in which fastening means are provided
    for the edge of the fabric which first leaves the roll as the fabric is
    unrolled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     28 and 100, for a device in which the fabric leading edge is
    connected to a movable rigid closure.

    243+,   for fabric leading edge holding means having rolls which are
    translated for winding or unwinding.

    265,    for fastening means connecting the fabric leading edge to an
    operator.

    274+,   for a guided stick having holding means.

    327+,   for a plural-edge held nonframe type fabric.


CLS 160/291
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 268.1 having means for retarding or
    stopping the rotation of the roll, or for holding the roll to prevent
    undesired rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for retarding means combined with automatic control.

    269,    275+, 278, 281+, 288, and 289, for brake and stop mechanisms with
    guides.

    290,    and the subclasses there noted for fabric leading edge holding
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, pertinent subclasses for brakes of general utility.


CLS 160/292
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 291 in which two or more brakes or stops
    for the roll are provided.


CLS 160/293.1
TXT Limit of travel:

    Roll type device under subclass 291 in which means are provided to stop the
    fabric at the desired limit of winding travel or unwinding travel.


CLS 160/294
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 293.1 in which there is a spring operated
    roller.


CLS 160/295
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 294 in which the brake or stop is operated
    by means of a screw.


CLS 160/296
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 291 in which the brake or stop prevents
    the roll from rotating at undesired speeds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for this subcombination combined with automatic means to initiate
    operation of the device.

    300+,   for pawl or detent means which hold the roll when stopped, but are
    maintained out of engagement with keeper means during rotation.


CLS 160/297
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 291 in which the brake or stop is in the
    form of a ball or roller operating on the roll supporting means or some
    part secured to and rotating with the roll.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclass 82.84 for one-way brakes in which retrograde
    rotation is prevented by rolling an element into jamming position between
    converging surfaces one of which is the rotating member.


CLS 160/298
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 291 in which the brake or stop is in the
    form of friction means acting on the roll supporting means or on some part
    carried by the roll.


CLS 160/299
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 298 in which there is a spring operated
    roller.


CLS 160/300
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 291 in which the brake or stop is in the
    form of a pawl or detent acting on the roll supporting means or some part
    carried thereby and rotating therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    297,    for brakes or stops of ball or roller form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 82.7+ for one-way brakes in which a tongue-like
    element is mounted to swing into braking position upon retrograde motion of
    the rotating member.


CLS 160/301
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 300 in which there is a spring operated
    roller.

    (1)     Note. Includes freely or loosely mounted detents which move in an
    unrestrained manner.


CLS 160/302
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 301 in which the pawl or detent is spring
    operated.


CLS 160/303
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 301 in which the pawl or detent is not
    carried by the roll supporting means or any part which rotates with the
    roll.


CLS 160/304.1
TXT Sliding pawl or detent:

    Roll type device under subclass 301 in which the pawl or detent moves with
    a sliding motion.


CLS 160/305
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 291 in which there is a spring operated
    roller.


CLS 160/306
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 305 in which means are provided to prevent
    motion of the spring operated roller driving spindle when the roller is
    removed from its mounting means.


CLS 160/307
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 291 in which the roll is strand operated.


CLS 160/308
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 307 in which the brake or stop is also
    operated by means of a strand.


CLS 160/309
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 238 having means to operate the roll to
    cause it to rotate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243+,   for arrangements in which the roll must translate to cause it to
    rotate.

    265,    for devices in which the operator is connected to the fabric
    leading edge.


CLS 160/310
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 309 in which the rotating means is
    electrically operated or electrically controlled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331,    for similar operating and control means for hanging and drape type
    devices.


CLS 160/311
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 309 in which the rotating means is motor
    operated or fluid pressure controlled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310,    for electric motors and electrical control.

    313+    and 320, for spring and weight operators.

    331,    for similar operating and control means for hanging and drape type
    devices.


CLS 160/312
TXT Roller type devices under subclass 309 having two or more means to cause
    the roller to operate, at least two being of different kinds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    320,    for strand operators with weights or hand grips.


CLS 160/313
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 309 in which the roll is caused to rotate
    by spring means.


CLS 160/314
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 313 in which the actuating spring is
    mounted externally of the roll.


CLS 160/315
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 313 in which means other than the
    operation of the flexible or portable panels are provided for tightening or
    regulating the tension of the operating spring.


CLS 160/316
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 313 in which there are a plurality of
    helical springs one nested within another or in which the succeeding
    sections of a spring are each wound back over the previous inner section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    317,    for other plural springs.


CLS 160/317
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 313 in which there are a plurality of
    springs or spring sections for operating a single roll.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    316,    for plural nested helical springs.


CLS 160/318
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 313 in which the means for connecting an
    end of the roll actuating spring to its associated element is claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315,    for this feature in spring winding or tensioning means.


CLS 160/319
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 309 in which the means for rotating the
    roll consists of a strand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243+,   for roll type devices where the strand causes a roller to translate
    to cause winding or unwinding.

    307+,   for other strand operated rollers, which are combined with strand
    holders to hold the roller against undesired rotation.


CLS 160/320
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 319 in which the strand form rotating
    means has either a weight,  a handgrip or both.


CLS 160/321
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 319 in which the operating strand is
    endless. Includes sprocket chains.


CLS 160/322
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 319 in which a spring is provided which
    compensates for the uneven rate of winding of the fabric or absorbs shocks
    due to suddenly applied force tending to change the speed of the roll.


CLS 160/323.1
TXT With supporting or journaling means or with roller end structure:

    Roll type device under subclass 238 claiming (a) a means for supporting the
    roll, (b) the journaling means or (c) the roller end structure which
    provides for rotation in its support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242+,   for shiftable roll features.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 590+ for a mounted roll
    holder to permit winding or unwinding.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 251+ particularly subclasses 266+ for brackets
    of the shade roller type where only so much of the roller structure is
    claimed as is necessary to fit the bracket.


CLS 160/324
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 323 in which a clamp or holding means is
    provided to keep the pintle in its proper assembled relation with its
    bracket.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315,    for devices which rotate the pintle for the purpose of tensioning
    the spring.


CLS 160/325
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 323.1 in which a roller pintle is
    journaled for relative rotary movement in a roller or at one end thereof.


CLS 160/326
TXT Roll type devices under subclass 323.1 in which a roller and its gudgeon is
    claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323+,   or the preceding indented subclasses for these devices in
    combination with support means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, subclass 184 for a gudgeon, per se, and so much of roller
    structure as is necessary to support the gudgeon.


CLS 160/327
TXT Devices under the class definition in which means in the form of elongated
    elements, not a complete frame, are provided to which two or more edges of
    the fabric are attached to hold the same extended.

    (1)     Note.  The elongated element for the bottom edge may be for
    weighting purposes only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84.01+, for pleating type devices where elongated elements are found at the
    fold.

    349.1+, (1) for hanging or drape type bottom or side edge holding means not
    of elongated form, (2) for holding means intermediate the width, whether or
    not of elongated form and whether or not the hanging or drape type features
    are claimed and (3) the subcombination of bottom holding means, even if it
    is an elongated element.

    371+,   for framed type, i.e., where a complete surface is enclosed by an
    integral frame element or by interconnected frame elements, even though the
    fabric is connected thereto along fewer than all of its edges.


CLS 160/328
TXT Hanging or drape devices under subclass 327 in which means are provided for
    stretching the fabric.


CLS 160/329
TXT Hanging or drape devices under subclass 328 in which the stretching means
    are resilient devices.


CLS 160/330
TXT Devices under the class definition in which flexible fabrics hang suspended.

    (1)     Note.  Where only two fabrics are claimed, there is no overlapping
    and the devices are hung from a single support in edge to edge relation,
    the devices have been treated as single and are in this subclass (330).

    (2)     Note.  For the line between this series of subclasses and Class 16,
    Miscellaneous Hardware; Class 211, Supports: Racks; and Class 248,
    Supports; see note (3) to the main class definition of this class (160).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123+,   for plural hanging or drape type devices hung from a single support
    in side by side relationship where the structure provides for overlapping
    of the fabrics.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclass 493 for devices of this type associated with bed
    mattresses.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 105 for curtain rod threaders and
    subclass 50, for tape inserting.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 19.1+ for
    devices for handling curtain poles, with or without the curtain hanging
    thereon.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 44+, 53, 54+,
    and 57+ for plural, joined webs or sheets which make up stock material,
    rather than a "unit" of the type referred to in the definition of subclass
    130 above in this class (160).


CLS 160/331
TXT Hanging or drape type devices under subclass 330 having anyone or any
    combination of (1) motor operating means (other than mere springs or spring
    devices); (2) electric control means or (3) fluid pressure operated control
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310     and 311, for similar operating and control means for roller type
    devices.


CLS 160/332
TXT Hanging or drape type devices under subclass 330 in which the fabric is in
    the form of or is formed by chains, cables or strands of any form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 200+ for
    strand structure, per se, formed by a twisting, twining and/or untwisting
    operation.

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclasses 78+ for chain
    structure, per se.


CLS 160/333
TXT Hanging or drape type devices under subclass 330 in which the fabric is
    hung or draped from a pole, where there are means provided for changing the
    position of the pole.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 92 for rigid panels which slide
    back and forth and are supported by a link and lever.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 19.1+ for
    independent devices adapted for grasping and moving a pole (with or without
    the curtain thereon).


CLS 160/334
TXT Hanging or drape type devices under subclass 333 in which the means
    provides for the pole having at least two directions of motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242+,   for rollers having at least two directions of motion in addition to
    rotation.


CLS 160/335
TXT Hanging or drape type devices under subclass 333 in which the pole has
    swinging motion.


CLS 160/336
TXT Hanging or drape type devices under subclass 335 in which the pole swings
    about a horizontal axis.


CLS 160/337
TXT Hanging or drape type devices under subclass 335 in which means are
    provided for causing the pole to swing.


CLS 160/338
TXT Hanging or drape type devices under subclass in which the pole is
    vertically shiftable.


CLS 160/339
TXT Hanging or drape type devices under subclass 338 in which strand form means
    are provided for shifting the pole vertically.


CLS 160/340
TXT Hanging or drape type devices under subclass 330 in which means are
    provided for causing the fabric or some part thereof to move, either
    relative to itself or to a support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333+,   for devices in which the fabric motion is caused by motion of the
    pole.


CLS 160/341
TXT Hanging or drape type devices under subclass 340 in which the fabric is
    caused to gather in the plane of the fabric due to a horizontal or sidewise
    motion.


CLS 160/342
TXT Hanging or drape type devices under subclass 341 in which lazy tongs are
    used in the gathering means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130+    and especially subclasses 136+ for lazy tong structures combined
    with plural strip, slat or panel devices.


CLS 160/343
TXT Hanging or drape type devices under subclass 341 utilizing springs, screws
    and/or worms in the gathering means.


CLS 160/344
TXT Hanging or drape type devices under subclass 341 in which the gathering
    means utilizes elements of strand form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370,    for mere supports combined with strand guides.


CLS 160/345
TXT Hanging or drape type devices under subclass 344 in which the track is an
    elongated element, longitudinally slotted or hollow, in which the traveler
    portion moves and from which the panel or panel carrying portion extends to
    the exterior of the hollow or slotted elongated element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19+,    for tracks combined with shields or hoods.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 87.4+ for similar devices
    without fabric operating means, and subclass 95 for the track structure,
    per se.


CLS 160/346
TXT Hanging or drape type devices under subclass 345 having antifriction means
    between the hollow or slotted element and the portion of the traveler
    received therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    347,    for other antifriction means for travelers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 87.6 and 87.8, for travelers
    with antifriction means, per se.


CLS 160/347
TXT Hanging or drape type devices under subclass 344 having antifriction means
    between the fabric carrying travelers and the element which move along the
    travelers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 87.6 and 87.8, for travelers
    with antifriction devices, per se.


CLS 160/348
TXT Hanging or drape type devices under subclass 330 having some means engaging
    the fabric to form pleats.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84.01+, for fabrics constructed to be contracted by imparting pleats or
    folds thereto and having means to cause the folds to occur along
    predetermined lines.

    341+,   for drape type devices where the pleating is caused by lateral
    gathering means.

    349.1+, for drape type devices where the only pleating effect is caused by
    a bottom or intermediate holding means.

    385+,   for fastening means of the modified fabric type, and especially
    subclasses 388, 389, and 390 for fastening means without pleating features.


CLS 160/349.1
TXT With bottom or intermediate holding, weighting, or draping means:

    Device under subclass 330 having (a) means to engage the hanging device
    intermediate its top and bottom to hold it in place, (b) means to engage
    the  hanging device at the bottom thereof to hold it in place.

    (1)     Note.  The subcombination of a bottom held fabric is here, even
    though the holding means is of elongated form.

    (2)     Note.  Many of these devices cause the fabric to drape.

    (3)     Note.  Where the holding means, per se, is claimed, see the class
    appropriate to the form of the holding means, particularly Class 24,
    Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 1, 343+ and 455+; Class 211,
    Supports:  Racks, particularly subclasses 87+, 120 and 123+; Class 24,
    Supports, particularly subclasses 200+; and Class 411, Expanded, Threaded,
    Driven, Headed, and Tool-Deformed, or Locked-Threaded Fastener,
    particularly subclasses 373+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290.1,  for a roller type device with bottom holding means.

    327+,   for a plural-edge held nonframe type fabric.

    340+,   for operators to cause the devices to drape.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 273 for weights, per se, and weights for other
    uses.

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 404 for miscellaneous weights.


CLS 160/349.2
TXT Intermediate holding means:

    Device under subclass 349.1 having means to engage the hanging device
    either (a) intermediate its top and bottom to hold it in place or (b)
    intermediate its width.


CLS 160/350
TXT Hanging or drape type devices under subclass 330 which are portably
    mounted, as defined in subclass 351.


CLS 160/351
TXT Devices under the class definition having means peculiarly adapted to make
    the device portable, including those having legs or bases to support the
    device in upright position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     135 and 350, for other portable devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 2.5 for penetration resistive shields which are
    worn or carried by the body.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclass 49.5 for
    portable panels utilized as shields or protectors.


CLS 160/352
TXT Devices under the class definition of other than planar form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for spaced or overlapping panel with insect exits.

    53,     for an umbrella type outrigged device.

    56+,    for nonplanar outrigged device.

    88,     for nonplanar plural panels.

    114,    for nonplanar plural strip slat or panel assemblies.

    131+,   for a plural strip, slat or panel assembly with a nonplanar strip,
    slat or panel.

    183,    for a plural strip, slat or panel assembly in which the strips,
    slats or panels are positioned in different nonparallel planes in operative
    position.

    262,    for a roll type device with a nonplanar axis.


CLS 160/353
TXT Devices under the class definition wherein a single fabric filled frame is
    combined with one or more additional frames not necessary to the fastening
    of the fabric.

    (1)     Note.  The auxiliary frame may be for the purpose of causing the
    assembly to fit different sized openings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128,    for frames which may alternately receive either a fabric filled
    frame or a rigid panel.

    130+,   for plural strip, slat or panel type devices, including plural
    framed type devices, particularly subclass 180 for such devices where one
    closes an opening in another, subclass 182 for such devices mounted in a
    removable frame type support and subclass 230, for such devices having edge
    to edge movably interconnected frames having a single fabric.

    380,    for single frames made of two superimposed frame elements between
    which the fabric is secured.


CLS 160/354
TXT Framed devices under the class definition in which the frame or some
    portion thereof is claimed as made of resilient, elastic or other nonrigid
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    372+,   for extensible telescopic frames.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclass 192 for elastic or resilient side edges or bed
    bottoms.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 700+ for resilient or
    elastic picture frames.


CLS 160/368.1
TXT WITH MOUNTING, FASTENING, OR SUPPORTING MEANS:

    Devices under the class definition having mounting, supporting or fastening
    means except those provided for above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    for devices of the flexible or portable panel type removably
    mounted in sliding rigid closure guides.

    351,    for portably mounted devices.

    372+,   for adjustable size frames.  Many such devices are to cause the
    frames to fit different size openings, but are classified in subclasses
    372+ unless some means for mounting, supporting or fastening the frame in
    place (in addition to the adjustment of the frame size) is claimed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 265+ for separable hook type
    hinges, per se.


CLS 160/368.2
TXT Devices under subclass 368.1 comprising a mechanism movable to a position
    to hold and sustain a concealing mask in proper position to cover an object
    when it is not in use, and to lift and hold the mask out of the way when it
    is desired to use the object.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are pillow sham holders which support a sham
    in pillow covering position or which lift and hold the sham out of the way
    when it is desired to use the pillows.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclass 401 for a pillow sham combined with a bed.


CLS 160/369
TXT Devices under subclass 368.1 in which the supported device is of the frame
    type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182,    for a plurality of framed devices mounted in a removable frame.


CLS 160/370
TXT Devices under subclass 368.1 combined with one or more strand guides.


CLS 160/370.1
TXT Grain car type temporary closure:

    Device under subclass 368.1 comprising an auxiliary closure member
    specially adapted to be temporarily installed across a door opening of a
    freight vehicle so that bulk grain, small packages, boxes or other granular
    bulk material may be retained within the vehicle without leakage.

    (1)     Note. Generally, such inner load retaining doors also function to
    prevent the dry, flowable material within a railway box car from coming
    into contact with the permanent outside sliding door of the car.


CLS 160/370.21
TXT Automobile windshield weather protector or sunshield:

    Subject matter under subclass 368.1 comprising means readily attachable to
    and removable from an automotive-type vehicle for either (a) covering or
    shielding the outside surface of a vehicle window so as to protect it from
    accumulations of snow, frost, ice, rain, dust, etc. while the vehicle is
    parked and exposed to the weather, or (b) for shielding the vehicle
    interior from sunlight.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 97.1+ for glare screens
    or visors.


CLS 160/370.22
TXT Roll type:

    Subject matter under subclass 370.21 which is contracted or accumulated by
    coiling the shade material about itself to form a generally cylindrical
    shape, a roll.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS,  SUBCLASS:

    121.1+, for single roll-type devices having panels wound thereon in
    superimposed or overlapping relationship.

    133,    for plural strip, slat, or panel roll-type devices.

    238+,   for other roll-type devices.


CLS 160/370.23
TXT Pleating type:

    Subject matter under subclass 370.21 in which the constructive material for
    a sunshade may be contracted or expanded by imparting folds therein or by
    straightening or tending to straighten such folds and where means is
    provided for causing such folds to occur at or along predetermined lines by
    engaging the material at points at opposite ends of the fold lines or by
    securing an elongated element at each predetermined fold line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84.01+, for pleating-type devices which are normally associated with a
    static structure.


CLS 160/371
TXT Devices under the class definition either in the form of a single, flexible
    fabric filled or covered frame or a frame for such use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239+,   for framed roller type devices.

    327+,   for nonframed, plural edge held fabric type.

    383+,   for patents which disclose a framed type device but claim only a
    single side and the means for fastening a fabric thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 700+ for picture
    frames.


CLS 160/372
TXT Framed type devices under subclass 371 in which means are provided for
    adjusting the frame size, i.e., increase or decrease the outside frame
    dimension.

    (1)     Note.  Two slidaby engaged U-shaped frame type devices with a
    single fabric are here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130+,   (especially subclass 230), for two pivotally engaged U-shaped frame
    type devices with a single fabric; and (especially subclasses 218+) for two
    U-shaped frame type devices, each with its separate fabric whether slidably
    or pivotally engaged.

    353,    for devices where the fabric is attached to one frame and an
    adjustable supplementary frame surrounds the first frame.

    378,    for fabric stretching means not involving adjustable frame size.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclasses 102.4+ for a cloth
    stretcher frame including means for adjusting the frame size.


CLS 160/373
TXT Framed type devices under subclass 372 having either (1) a fabric of
    greater area than is required when the frame is of the smallest adjusted
    size or (2) a fabric which is extensible to cover the frame when adjusted.
    Many of these devices have means for taking up the excess of fabric.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31      and 240, for framed roller type devices in which the roller
    provides for excess fabric including those in which the roller is solely
    for such purpose.


CLS 160/374
TXT Framed type devices under subclass 372 in which the overall size may be
    changed both laterally and longitudinally of the frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221,    for plural strip, slat and panel units which are doubly extensible.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclasses 102.5+ for a cloth
    stretcher frame in which the overall size may be changed both laterally and
    longitudinally of the frame.


CLS 160/374.1
TXT Device under subclass 374 wherein the size adjustment of the device is
    accomplished by means associated with one or more joints of the frame to
    force the adjacent members apart.


CLS 160/375
TXT Framed type devices under subclass 372 in which an edge bar of the frame
    has a portion shiftable to change the frame size.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130+,   especially subclasses 222+ for rigid closures with shiftable side
    bars which have been considered plural strip, slat or panel devices.


CLS 160/376
TXT Framed type devices under subclass 375 having spring means to bias the
    shiftable side bar section.


CLS 160/377
TXT Framed type devices under subclass 371 having means by which they may be
    reduced to a more compact arrangement or bundle when not in operative
    position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130+,   for plural frames or panels interconnected for relative motion by
    means of which the unit or assembly may be so reduced, particularly
    subclasses 222+ for those slidably interconnected and subclasses 229.1+ for
    those pivotally interconnected at their adjacent edges.

    372+,   for framed devices having means by which the frame dimensions may
    be changed.


CLS 160/378
TXT Framed typed devices under subclass 371 having means for applying tension
    to the fabric therein.

    (1)     Note.  Since all fabric fastening means of the type in which one
    element provides a channel or groove into which a second fastening element
    is forced to have an inherent tendency to apply a stretching force to the
    fabric, such devices have not been placed here but will be found below and
    cross referenced to subclass 382 and indented subclasses (particularly
    subclasses 395+); and when the fabric fastening means, per se, (as defined
    in subclass 382 and explained in the notes) is recited, the patents have
    been placed there (subclasses 382+), as originals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239+,   for a roll type device where the fabric stretching is due to a
    roller in the frame upon and from which the fabric winds and unwinds.

    328+,   for hanging or drape type with fabric stretching means.

    354,    for devices where the fabric stretching is due to an elastic frame
    or border.

    372+,   for a framed device where the fabric stretching is due to adjusting
    the frame size.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 211+ for bed bottom tighteners.

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 5 for combined carpet fasteners
    and stretchers.

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclasses 102.1+ for a cloth
    stretcher frame.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclasses 19.1+ for a frame type skin or
    hide stretcher.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 199+ for portable implements or apparatus for tensioning
    flexible material from which the implements or apparatus are detached after
    tensioning.


CLS 160/379
TXT Framed type devices under subclass 371 in which a bar or other elongated
    member is provided to connect the intermediate portions of two sides of the
    frame.  These are usually for the purpose of either reinforcing the frame
    or preventing bulging of the fabric.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130+,   especially subclasses 130, 182 and 184 for plural frame devices of
    similar structure.  Rigid frames with cross bars and two or more fabrics
    covering different areas defined by the outer frame members and cross bars
    are classified as plural frame type.

    381,    for corner structures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclass 203 for intermediate reinforcing bars or braces in
    bed bottom frames.


CLS 160/380
TXT Framed type devices under subclass 371 in which the frame is made of two
    sections, each in the form of a complete frame, arranged in superimposed
    relation and between which a fabric is secured.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130+,   for plural strip, slat or panel type devices including plural
    framed type devices especially subclass 182 for such devices mounted in a
    removable frame type support and subclass 230, for such devices having edge
    to edge movably interconnected frames having a single fabric.

    353,    for single framed fabric filled panels with one or more additional
    frames not necessary to the fastening of the fabric.


CLS 160/381
TXT Framed type devices under subclass 371 in which the structure of a frame
    corner is claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    372+,   especially subclass 374 for corners for adjustable sized frames.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclass 231 for a frame corner joint
    wherein the end of one member is joined to the side of another and subclass
    403 for frame corner joint in general.


CLS 160/382
TXT Devices under the class definition directed to means to fasten one edge
    only of a fabric to its immediate support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, appropriate subclasses particularly
    subclasses 4+ for carpet fasteners.

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., appropriate subclasses for numerous
    types of fastening devices useful for fastening a fabric to its support,
    especially subclasses 31+ for belt fasteners; 67+, for paper clips and
    fasteners; 72.5, for bed clothes holders and subclasses 343+ for combined
    fasteners.


CLS 160/383
TXT Fabric fastening means under subclass 382 claiming a bar, rod, roller,
    stick, frame side or other elongated element with means for fastening one
    edge only of a fabric thereto, whether or not the fabric is claimed as a
    part of the combination (subclass 385 indented thereunder having both the
    elongated element claimed in combination with the fabric and the fabric,
    per se, when the fabric is modified for fastening purposes).

    (1)     Note.  Where the fastening of a fabric to a plurality of elongated
    elements is recited, but no further characteristics of the relation of the
    elements is recited, the patents have been placed here.

    (2)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses take fastening means where
    only the elongated element fastening means and/or the fabric is claimed.
    Where additional characteristics are claimed which limit the same to a type
    of flexible or portable panel, see the appropriate type group above.  The
    mere recitation that the fabric is rolled, hangs from or is stretched from
    the elongated element will not keep the patent from this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    381,    for fabric fastening means for frame corners.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 194+ for means to bind and fasten bed bottoms to
    frame rails and subclasses 402+ for means to secure an upholstery cover(s)
    to a bed bottom(s).

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 231+ for
    fabric sheet holders.

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 7, 12+ and 16, for carpet
    fasteners of elongated element form and subclasses 87.2+ for fabric
    fastening means which provide for suspending the fabric in such a way as to
    permit the fabric to travel along the length of the device from which it is
    suspended.

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclasses 66 and 140 for covers
    for ironing platens, ironing rolls and ironing tables and subclass 102.91
    for a cloth stretcher frame including means for fastening the cloth to the
    frame.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses for
    various structures which involves retaining a panel in position,
    particularly subclasses 459+ and 474+.

    55,     Gas Separation, appropriate subclasses beginning with subclasses
    482+ for reticulate screen mechanisms.

    84,     Music, subclasses 122+, (especially subclass 162) for ends and
    joints for note sheet selectors.

    101,    Printing, subclass 415.1 for flexible sheet securing means.

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclass 90 for a
    horizontally supported planar surface having a detachable enlarging or
    substitute surface which includes a flexible cover.

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, pertinent subclasses,
    particularly subclasses 124+ for fastening purse fabrics to purse frames.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 846 for means for fastening
    together opposite ends of a strip, or for fastening together a series of
    tandem strips to form an endless belt conveyor.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 389+ for a roll or reel
    package which may include means for holding material in the wound form.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 395, 399
    and 403, for attaching sifting element fabrics.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 483+ for a supported
    filter medium.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 610+, 677+ for seams and joints.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 579+ for means to
    attach an elongated material to a spool or similar take-up.

    346,    Recorders, subclasses 136 and 138 for means for gripping a web in
    combination with a recorder.

    402,    Binder Device Releasably Engaging Aperture or Notch of Sheet,
    appropriate subclasses, for a sheet binder device of that class (402) which
    may include a fastener of this class (160) for the retention of a flaccid
    sheet.

    451,    Abrading, for a holder for flexible abrading sheets.

    473,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclass 30 for a cloth securing device
    for a billiard or pool table.

    492,    Roll or Roller, subclasses 22+ for a roll, per se, not elsewhere
    provided for, having a work surface and means to hold a sheet in the roll
    assembly by gripping or impaling an edge portion of the sheet.


CLS 160/384
TXT Fastening means under subclass 383 in which two or more things are fastened
    to the same elongated member, at least one of them being a fabric.

    (1)     Note.  The additional thing fastened must be in addition to the
    bar, frame side, et cetera, and the means which fastens the fabric thereto,
    which means may itself be in the form of an elongated element engaging the
    fabric.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124,    for fastening means for side by side arranged hanging or drape type
    fabrics hung on a single elongated element.


CLS 160/385
TXT Fabric fastening means under subclass 383 in which the fabric is in some
    way modified to aid in securing the same to its elongated element.


CLS 160/386
TXT Devices under subclass 385 in which the panel portion of the fabric has a
    plurality of layers.


CLS 160/387
TXT Devices under subclass 385 wherein one edge of the fabric is folded back
    upon itself and fastened to the fabric to form a narrow elongated tube or
    pocket known as a "hem".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclass 407 for an upholstery cover held to a frame by means
    of a hem having a bead or core therein.


CLS 160/388
TXT Devices under subclass 385 where the fabric is modified by the formation of
    a series of parallel straps or loops, so that the fabric may be threaded
    onto a bar, rod or other elongated element.


CLS 160/389
TXT Devices under subclass 385 wherein the fabric is modified (1) by the
    formation of, or (2) for the attachment of, a series of strands or strips.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    293.1+, for roll type devices, where strips constitute an unwinding limit
    stop.


CLS 160/390
TXT Devices under subclass 385 wherein the fabric is modified by the formation
    of openings or pockets.


CLS 160/391
TXT Fabric fastening means under subclass 383 in which (1) the elongated
    element has a channel or grove therein exposed to the exterior of the
    elongated element, which channel or groove receives a portion of the
    fabric, or (2) the elongated element is divided longitudinally into at
    least two parts between which the fabric is received. These devices may be
    of slit tube form.


CLS 160/392
TXT Fabric fastening means under subclass 391 in which fastener members are
    used to connect the fabric and the elongated member, the groove or channel
    in the elongated member having an internal dimension parallel to and
    greater than the width of the exit of the channel or slot, the fasteners
    being positioned in the enlarged position of the groove or channel and at
    least in the fabric securing position having a dimension greater than the
    width of the exit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23.1+,  for rollers upon which the fabric winds journaled in a housing with
    an exit slot of less width than the roller diameter.

    395+,   for elongated fasteners not larger than the exit.


CLS 160/393
TXT Fabric fastening means under subclass 392 having either or both (1) caps
    positioned on and enclosing the ends of the elongated element or (2)
    sleeves (usually slotted to provide for a passage of the fabric)
    surrounding the elongated element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    396     and 401, for other end caps and sleeves.


CLS 160/394
TXT Fabric fastening means under subclass 392 in which the elongated element to
    which the fabric is secured is made of sheet material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    397,    for other sheet material elongated elements.


CLS 160/395
TXT Fabric fastening means under subclass 391 in which a fastener of elongated
    form is positioned in and extends axially of the groove or channel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    392+,   for such devices in which the fastener member is larger than the
    channel or slot fabric exit.


CLS 160/396
TXT Fabric fastening means under subclass 395 having either or both (1) caps
    positioned on and enclosing the ends of the elongated element or (2)
    sleeves (usually slotted to provide for passage of the fabric) surrounding
    the elongated element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    393     and 401, for other caps and sleeves.


CLS 160/397
TXT Fabric fastening means under subclass 395 in which the elongated element to
    which the fabric is secured is made of sheet material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    394,    for other sheet material elongated elements.


CLS 160/398
TXT Fabric fastening means under subclass 391 having any one type or any
    combination of pointed, piercing or hook elements to fasten the fabric in
    the channel or groove.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404,    for other pointed, piercing or hook elements.


CLS 160/399
TXT Fabric fastening means under subclass 391 in which a clamp, clasp, sleeve
    or end cap fits upon the exterior of the elongated element to hold the
    fabric.

    (1)     Note.  A portion of the clamp or clasp usually extends into the
    groove or slot.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    393,    396, and 401, for other sleeves or end caps.

    402,    for other externally applied clamps or clasps.


CLS 160/400
TXT Devices under subclass 383 wherein an unmodified fabric is attached to its
    mounting by strips or strands.


CLS 160/401
TXT Fabric fastening means under subclass 383 having either or both (1) caps
    positioned on and enclosing the ends of the elongated element or (2)
    sleeves (usually slotted to provide for passage of the fabric) surrounding
    the elongated  element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    393,    396, and 399, for other end caps and sleeves.

    402,    for externally applied clasps and clamps not of sleeve or end cap
    form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, subclasses 22+ for a roll, per se, not elsewhere
    provided for, having a work surface and means to hold a sheet in the roll
    assembly by gripping or impaling an edge portion of the sheet.


CLS 160/402
TXT Fabric fastening means under subclass 383 having clamps or clasps applied
    to the exterior of the elongated element for securing the fabric thereto.

    (1)     Note.  Such clasps or clamps may act to press the fabric between a
    portion of their structure and the elongated element, or may have one
    portion secured to the elongated element on the exterior thereof and
    separate clamp or clasp portion for the fabric.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    383+    and 399, for other clamps or clasps not so applied.

    393,    396 and 401, for end caps and sleeves which may clamp or clasp the
    fabric.


CLS 160/403
TXT Fabric fastening means under subclass 383 having an elongated fastener
    applied to the exterior of the elongated element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    392+    and 395+, for elongated fasteners having grooves or channels with
    elongated fasteners.


CLS 160/404
TXT Fabric fastening means under subclass 383 having any one type or any
    combination of pointed, piercing or hook elements to fasten the fabric to
    the elongated element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    398,    for other pointed piercing and/or hook elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, subclasses 22+ for a roll, per se, not elsewhere
    provided for, having a work surface and means to hold a sheet in the roll
    assembly by gripping or impaling an edge portion of the sheet.


CLS 160/405
TXT Devices under the class definition having a claim to either (1) a method of
    using, and/or (2) any devices under the class definition not otherwise
    provided for.

    (2)     Note.  For making of devices falling within the class definition,
    and see (4.5) Note to the class definition of this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 24.5 for assembling or combined making and
    assembling slats with ladders of venetian blinds.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS

    THE DOCUMENTS IN THE FOLLOWING COLLECTIONS CONTAIN ONLY CROSS-REFERENCES
    WHICH HAVE BEEN PLACED WITHOUT REGARD TO THEIR ORIGINAL CLASSIFICATION OR
    TO THEIR CLAIMED SUBJECT MATTER AND ARE THEREFORE NOT EXHAUSTIVE OF THE ART
    OR SUBJECT MATTER BUT ARE ONLY EXAMPLES THEREOF.  CONSEQUENTLY, A COMPLETE
    SEARCH FOR ART OR SUBJECT MATTER PROVIDED FOR HERE WOULD REQUIRE A REVIEW
    OF THE HIGHER PORTIONS OF THE CLASSIFICATION SCHEDULE.


CLS 160/900
TXT VERTICAL TYPE VENETIAN BLIND:

    Venetian blind type unit in which the parallel strips, slats or panels are
    suspended or supported at one end from a horizontally disposed elongated
    track or support so that the long dimensions of the strips, slats or panels
    are disposed vertically.

    (1)     Note.  In addition to the horizontally disposed track or support
    for the upper ends of the vertically disposed strips, slats or panels;
    there may be another horizontally disposed track, support or guide means
    for the bottom ends of the strips, slats or panels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172,    for an accumulation type of venetian blind unit having side guides
    by which the ends of the parallel strips, slats or panels are guided during
    the accumulating operation.

    196.1+, for the combination of a plural strip, slat or panel unit (other
    than a venetian blind type unit) and a horizontal track from which the
    strip, slat or panel unit is suspended.


CLS 160/901
TXT LAZY-TONG CONNECTED PLURAL STRIPS, SLATS OR PANELS:

    A single unit formed from a plurality of strips, slats or panels
    interconnected with each other for relative motion by a series of pivoting
    links in the manner of a lazy-tong type extensible framework.


CLS 160/902
TXT VENETIAN BLIND TYPE BRACKET MEANS:

    Bracket means specially adapted to removably engage and support the
    headrail of a horizontal type venetian blind unit (i.e., one with
    horizontal slats) from a ceiling or wall structure.


CLS 160/903
TXT ROLL TYPE BRACKET MEANS:

    Bracket means specially adapted to support a roll type device provided
    under the class definition in which material is accumulated in the form of
    a roll.


CLS 160/904
TXT ELECTRIC OR PNEUMATIC AWNING OPERATOR:

    An electrically or pneumatically operated means for causing or enabling an
    outrigger or thorn awning type device under the class definition to be
    folded, rolled up or otherwise collapsed or to be extended or unrolled.


CLS 160/905
TXT LAZY-TONG-LINK AWNING OPERATOR:

    A series of jointed bars pivoting in the manner of a lazy-tong type of
    extensible framework comprises means for causing or enabling an outrigger
    or other awning type device under the class definition to be folded, rolled
    up or otherwise collapsed or to be extended or unrolled.


CLS 160/906
TXT SCREW-THREADED AWNING OPERATOR:

    A screw-thread operated means for causing an outrigger or other awning type
    device under the class definition to be folded, rolled up or otherwise
    collapsed or to be extended or unrolled.


CLS 160/907
TXT SPRING (OTHER THAN SPRING ROLLER) AWNING OPERATOR:

    A spring or other elastically operated means for causing an outrigger or
    other awning type device under the class definition to be folded, rolled up
    or otherwise collapsed or to be extended or unrolled.

    (1)     Note.  Spring operated rollers for roll type devices are excluded
    from this cross-reference art collection.


CLS 160/908
TXT STRAND AWNING OPERATOR:

    A cord, rope, cable, chain or other flexible strand operated means for
    causing an outrigger or other awning type device under the class definition
    to be folded, rolled up or otherwise collapsed or to be extended or
    unrolled.


CLS 160/909
TXT Endless strand:

    Outrigger or other awning operator means under cross-reference art
    collection 908 in which the cord, rope, cable, chain or other flexible
    strand has its ends joined to form a closed flexible loop.


CLS 160/910
TXT Drum wound strand:

    Outrigger or other awning operator means under cross-reference art
    collection 908 in which the cord, rope, cable, chain or other flexible
    strand is wound upon a drum or roller.

    (1)     Note.  The drum or roller may be driven by an additional means.


CLS 160/911
TXT WORM GEAR AWNING OPERATOR:

    A means for causing an outrigger or other awning type device under the
    class definition to be folded, rolled up or otherwise collapsed or to be
    extended or unrolled comprises a gear system in which a peripherally
    toothed gear wheel is driven by the rotation of a screw or threaded shaft
    (the worm) whose helical thread forms a continuous tooth which meshes with
    the peripheral teeth of the gear wheel.


CLS 160/912
TXT RACK-AND-PINION AWNING OPERATOR:

    A means for causing an outrigger or other awning type device under the
    class definition to be folded, rolled up or otherwise collapsed or to be
    extended or unrolled comprises a gear system in which the teeth of a
    straight toothed bar (the rack) meshes with the teeth of a wheel having a
    toothed rim (the pinion) for the interconversion of rotary and linear
    motion.


CLS 160/913
TXT GEAR AWNING OPERATOR:

    A means for causing an outrigger or other awning type device under the
    class definition to be folded, rolled up or otherwise collapsed or to be
    extended or unrolled comprises a system of two or more toothed wheels wise
    teeth mesh with one another for the purpose of transmitting rotary motion
    or power from one shaft to another or for the purpose of changing speed or
    direction.


CLS 162/
TTL PAPER MAKING AND FIBER  LIBERATION

CLS 162/
TXT This class includes:

    A.      Processes for the liberation, recovery or purification of fibers as
    individual staple fibers or as a pulp of such fibers, including cellulosic
    fibers, from a fibrous containing material by use of a reagent which exerts
    some chemical or solvent action upon the fibrous material.

    B.      Reagent compositions employed in the processes "A" above, and
    processes of preparation of such compositions, not otherwise provided for;

    C.      Processes including the deposition of fibers from a liquid
    suspension thereof in order to form an interfelted product and processes of
    treatment of the deposited fibrous product prior to the final drying
    thereof;

    D.      Fibrous pulps and deposited fibrous webs or articles which are
    produced by processes "A" or "C" above, which are not otherwise provided
    for;

    E.      In addition to the products set forth in "D." above, subclasses
    141-181 also include any nonstructural fiber or fiber containing product
    (e.g., particular fiber blend) manufactured by any other process (e.g.,
    airlaid) where not elsewhere provided for (see Search Class Note to Class
    428 below).

    F.      Apparatus employed in carrying out processes "A" and "C" above, not
    otherwise provided for;

    G.      An endless Four drinier wire is provided for in this class.

    NOTES



    I.      FIBER PREPARATION OR TREATING PROCESSES

    Within this class processes of fiber preparation are classified in subclass
    1.

    This portion of the class is concerned with the treating of fiber and
    fibrous materials with chemicals for the purpose of making a pulp or
    suspension of individual staple fibers which may be deposited from a liquid
    suspension thereof, thus forming an interfelted fibrous product (paper) or
    the fibers may be employed for textile purposes.

    This class provides for the chemical liberation of these fibers as well as
    the purification or refining, bleaching, etc., of the fibers with a reagent
    which exerts some chemical action.

    This class is related to Class 8, Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and
    Chemical Modification of Textiles and Fibers, and Class 19, Textiles: Fiber
    Preparation, which also provide for fiber treating processes.  Class 8
    provides for processes of fluid treatment and chemical modification of
    textiles and fibers not elsewhere provided for.  With respect to pulps and
    suspension of individual fibers the line with Class 8 is as follows:

    Class 162 takes (1) processes involving liberating, purifying, bleaching or
    refining such fibers, (2) processes in which the fibers are modified by
    hydration, mercerizing or parchmentizing; Class 8 takes all processes of
    chemically modifying such fibers other than by hydration, mercerization or
    parchmentizing.  Class 162 (in subclass 100 particularly subclass 162) also
    takes dyeing of such fibers.

    Class 8 provides for purifying, bleaching, etc., of fabrics, strands,
    yarns, filaments, etc., as distinguished from fibrous pulps.  Patents to
    processes in which both a fibrous pulp and a fabric, strand, yarn, etc., is
    claimed (or disclosed if claimed only generically) are classified in Class
    8.  Combinations of a step of purifying or liberating the fiber with a step
    of modifying it, per se, belonging in Class 8, are classified in Class 162.

    Class 8, particularly in subclasses 137+ and 147+, provides for the
    cleaning and laundering of textile fabrics and fibers, that is, for the
    removal of materials not originally associated with a natural fiber and the
    removal of any material from synthetic fibers.  The treatment may be
    effected with or without chemical action. Thus, manipulative processes of
    washing pulp or fibers in bulk form are classified in Class 8, subclass 156.

    Class 19 provides for the mechanical treatment of fibers to put them in
    condition for use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 689+ for electrolytic treatment of
    organic fibrous material.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses, particularly subclasses 727+, for separating solids from fibers
    by a solids separation procedure there provided for.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses for the
    separation of liquid from fibers other than those resulting in the
    formation of a felted fibrous product.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, particularly subclass
    4 for the grinding, comminuting or heating of fibrous material, uncombined
    with any chemical treatment, in order to separate the material into smaller
    individual fibers.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 277 and
    278 for fiber treating processes involving fermentation.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclass 254
    for containment of      asbestos and subclass 255 for containment with
    polymers.

    935,    Genetic Engineering:  Recombinant DNA Technology, Hybrid or Fused
    Cell Technology, and Related Manipulations of Nucleic Acids, which provides
    a search collection for processes of altering the genetic structure of
    micro-organisms; genes and methods of modifying genes and their expression;
    vectors and methods of modifying vectors; methods of introducing DNA into a
    cell; micro-organisms, per se, which have had their genetic sequence
    altered by recombinant DNA techniques or by cell fusion or by uptake of
    DNA; testing; separation techniques; apparatus; and methods of use of
    vectors or of the genetically engineered micro-organisms; methods of gene
    therapy or genetic modification of living organisms.

    II.     FIBER TREATING AGENTS

    Chemical reagent compositions used for liberating fiber from a fiber
    containing material (e.g., wood) are included and are classified with the
    corresponding process, particularly in subclasses 70+.  This class provides
    also for processes of making or regenerating such agents, particularly in
    subclasses 29+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 186.1+ and 188.1+ for bleaching agent
    compositions even though disclosed as being useful for bleaching pulp.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses, for
    process of preparing or reclaiming inorganic compounds by a chemical
    reaction.  See especially subclasses 511+ for sulfur containing compounds;
    for the line between the classes see line note to Class 162 in definition
    of Class 423, section III, Line and Search Notes.




    III.    FIBROUS PRODUCT MAKING AND TREATING

    This class includes, in subclasses 100+ processes of forming an interfelted
    fibrous product by deposition from liquid suspension including the addition
    of other material to the fibrous suspension whether the deposition step is
    included or not. This class also includes processes for treating the
    deposited web or article prior to final drying thereof.  The fibrous
    character of the product must be retained in the final product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, appropriate subclasses for air
    felting.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 90.1+ for burnishing waterlaid products.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contacted With Solids, appropriate
    subclasses, for processes of drying a wet web or article of deposited
    fibers.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 376+ for a process of making glass
    fibers or mineral wool.

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses, for mere pressing to express
    moisture from a web or article deposited, and for pressing or calendering
    dry paper.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 4 for processes of regulating or
    maintaining the consistency of a fiber suspension by control of liquid flow.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    62.2+ for deposition of particulate material by other than water laying to
    form a self sustaining web or batt, combined with a laminating step, and
    subclasses 369+ for apparatus for forming self-sustaining webs from
    particulate material.  See the search note to Class 264 below, for
    processes of forming self sustaining webs from bulk deposited particles,
    per se.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses, for processes within the class definition, for
    shaping or molding of plastic materials including that of a dried,
    preformed blank of paper pulp, with or without remoistening thereof.  Class
    264 also generally takes processes for forming articles by uniting of
    discrete bulk assembled particles, and also forming articles by depositing
    particles other than fibers from a slurry (e.g., mica, clay, etc.).





    IV.     COMBINATIONS WITH OTHER PAPER TREATING OPERATIONS

    This class generally includes combinations of a fiber liberation or
    purification step with other fiber treating steps or of a deposition from a
    liquid suspension with other treatment of the interfelted product (in which
    the fibrous nature of the product is retained). Processes of fiber
    liberation or purification combined with processes of employing the
    liberated fibers for the manufacture of a product (other than by deposition
    from a fiber suspension) are, in general, classified in the class providing
    for the particular manufacturing operation involved.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses, for processes within the class definition, for
    molding or shaping plastic materials which may include the step of
    destroying the fibrous or felted nature of a deposited web or article.  See
    subclass 80 for flame contact or heat decomposition of work, broadly, and
    subclasses 109+ for forming articles by uniting of discrete bulk assembled
    particles, not containing free metal particles, per se.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, subclasses 61+ for processes for
    forming articles by uniting randomly associated metal particles without
    heating.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 277 for
    combination of fermentative and chemical digestion.

    536,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 30+ and 56+ for cellulose liberation
    or purification followed by conversion of the cellulose to a cellulose
    derivative which is not followed by deposition of fibers from liquid
    suspension or other step provided for in Class 162.

    935,    Genetic Engineering:  Recombinant DNA Technology, Hybrid or Fused
    Cell Technology, and Related Manipulations of Nucleic Acids, which provides
    a search collection for processes of altering the genetic structure of
    micro-organisms; genes and methods of modifying genes and of introducing
    DNA into a cell; micro-organisms, per se, which have had their genetic
    sequence altered by recombinant DNA techniques or by cell fusion or by
    uptake of DNA; testing; separation techniques; apparatus; and methods of
    use of vectors or of the genetically engineered micro-organisms; methods of
    gene therapy or genetic modification of living organisms.





    V.      PRODUCTS

    This provides for paper products resulting from processes classified
    herein. However, articles and materials having structure or other
    characteristics provided for in other classes are classified therein, even
    though made of paper, or disclosed or claimed as having been made by a
    process classifiable herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 400-696 for dyed paper, produced by the
    action of a dye upon dry paper, subclasses 115.51+ for chemically modified
    fibers, per se.

    28,     Textiles: Manufacturing, appropriate subclasses, appropriate
    subclass for textile products having significant textile characteristics or
    features not provided for in other textile classes.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclass for
    nonwaterlaid plastic and coating compositions comprising fibrous and
    inorganic materials, as well as fibrous material associated with an organic
    material, other than a synthetic resin.

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 365 for tobacco-containing paper, intended to be
    burned in smoking.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, appropriate subclasses for tube
    structure.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 52+ for impregnated paper used for
    electrolytic printing.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and paper Board Boxes, for articles of that
    type.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 567 for a paper web or sheet impregnated
    with a defined liquid dielectric.

    383,    Flexible Bags, for bags.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 14+
    and especially subclasses 16+ for a composition of that class including a
    structural feature which may included a coating or impregnation of a paper
    base.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    appropriate subclasses for paper impregnated with a food treating agent.
    See Class 162, subclasses 160 and 161 for paper impregnated for purposes of
    preserving the paper.

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclasses for processes of coating
    paper not combined with a paper making step, or where the paper is not
    still wet from the paper forming operation.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a nonwaterlaid fiber or fiber containing product as set forth in "E" in
    the class definition of this Class 162 where said product processes either
    internal structure (e.g., crimped fiber, etc.) or external structure (e.g.,
    nonplanar component, etc.).

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 496+ for paper coated with a radiation sensitive
    composition.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, for nonwaterlaid synthetic
    resin or natural rubbers containing compositions.





    VI.     APPARATUS

    This class includes in subclasses 232+ apparatus employed for carrying out
    processes classifiable herein not otherwise provided for.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, appropriate subclasses for air
    felting, per se, of fibers.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 90.1+ for burnishing apparatus employed
    for treating fibrous layers or paper.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclass
    for drying a freshly deposited fibrous layer.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 376+ for glass fibers or mineral
    wool forming.

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses for presses, per se, even though
    employed for treating paper or fibrous webs or articles.

    137,    Fluid Handling, particularly subclasses 92 and 467.5 for apparatus
    employed in the regulation or maintenance of the consistency of a fibrous
    suspension which may be disclosed as useful in making paper.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses particularly subclasses 727+ for apparatus used in separating
    nonfibrous solids (e.g., sand) from fibers.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses, for
    apparatus for separating liquid from a fibrous suspension.  Such separators
    which are designed for the laying down of a felted fibrous product, as the
    Fourdrinier type machine, are classified in Class 162 even though there is
    a separation of the liquid, usually water, from a fibrous suspension.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses for grinders, heaters, comminutors, etc., employed for treating
    fibrous material for reducing it to individual fibers.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 285 and 307+ for cookers and
    digesters other than those used for liberating or treating fibers.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 80.1+ for means forming self-sustaining bodies of  particulate
    material including an air felting type shaping means, and subclasses 84+
    for a shaping surface and means for removal of liquid vehicle or component
    as a liquid.


CLS 162/1
TXT Processes under the class definition for the liberation, recovery or
    purification of cellulose or of fibers as individual fibers or fibrous pulp
    occurring in a fibrous material by the use of a reagent which exerts some
    solvent or chemical action upon the fibrous material and the reagent
    compositions employed in such processes.

    (1)     Note.  Processes classifiable in this or indented subclasses
    include those involving the use of a material which exerts some solvent
    action or reacts with some constituent of the fibrous material, without
    destroying the fibrous characteristics of the material.  Included are
    treatments with steam and water heated above atmospheric temperature.
    Processes involving hydration, mercerizing or parchmentizing of the
    resultant liberated fiber or of an undried web of fibers freshly deposited
    from liquid suspension are also included, however other treatments of
    chemically modifying of fibers are classified in Class 8, Bleaching and
    Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of Textiles and Fibers,
    particularly subclasses 115.5+.

    (2)     Note.  Chemical reagent compositions employed in processes of
    liberating (digesting) fibers are classified with the corresponding process
    of liberating, note particularly subclasses 70+.  Processes involving
    recovering or regenerating such compositions in condition for reuse in
    digestion (liberation) are classified in subclasses 29+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29+,    for processes including the recovery, reuse or recycling of the
    digestion agent or liquor (see (2) Note).

    70+,    for processes of liberating cellulosic fiber employing a particular
    digesting composition and for the compositions employed (see (2) Note).

    100+,   for liberated fiber compositions and fiber pulps resulting from
    processes classifiable herein (subclasses 1+) not otherwise provided for.

    232+,   for apparatus employed in processes of digestion of fibrous
    material classified herein (subclasses 1+).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, appropriate subclass for chemical modification and
    fluid treatment of fibers and textiles, not otherwise provided for.
    Processes of bleaching and purifying individual fibers or fiber pulp, as
    distinguished from filaments, yarns, textiles, etc., is classifiable in
    this class (162).  Similarly, hydration, mercerization or parchmentizing
    such fibers or undried web thereof are also in this class (162).  Other
    chemical modification or fluid treatment of textiles and fibers, (e.g.,
    dyeing) are found in Class 8.  Bleaching or purifying processes which, as
    claimed, may be applied either to a fiber or fibrous pulp as well as to a
    filament yarn or textile are classified in Class 8.

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, appropriate subclasses, for the
    purification, recovery or liberation of fibers by mechanical action only.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclass 123.1 for coating or
    plastic compositions having as one ingredient thereof a cellulose
    liberation liquor.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 132+ for
    processes of liberating, recovering and/or purifying of fibers by processes
    involving electrolysis.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 28 and other
    appropriate subclasses, for processes of fiber liberation involving
    mechanical comminution only, or such comminution in the presence of water
    at ambient or lower temperatures.  The combination of mechanical
    comminution and chemical treatment or treatment of fibrous material with
    water at higher than ambient temperature, is classified in Class 162.  See
    especially subclasses 20 through 28.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 182+, particularly subclasses 186.1+,
    187.1 and 188.1+ for mere bleaching agents, even though they may be used
    for bleaching fibers as provided for herein (in Class 162).

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses, for the
    recovery of chemical elements or inorganic compounds, per se, and for the
    line between the classes, see line note to Class 162 in the definition of
    class 423, section III, Line and Search Notes.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 277 and
    278 for processes of liberating, recovering and/or purifying of fibers,
    involving fermentation.

    536,    Organic Compounds, particularly subclasses 30 and 56 for processes
    of modifying cellulose in which its fibrous nature is destroyed, e.g., in
    the production of cellulose esters.


CLS 162/2
TXT Processes under subclass 1 which include the liberation, recovery and/or
    purification of animal fibers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143+    and 151, for processes of depositing fibrous products from
    waterlaying a liquid suspension which include animal fibers, and the
    products of such processes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 94.1+ for fluid or chemical treatment of
    hides, skins, feathers and animal tissues, not otherwise provided for,
    subclass 127.5 for processes of chemically modifying proteinaceous fibers,
    and subclass 138 for processes for fluid or chemical treatment of silk for
    the removal of servicing, or other naturally occurring gum or wax.
    Processes classifiable in this subclass (2) generally include the
    production of a fiber pulp from a raw proteinaceous fibrous material,
    (e.g., leather).

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, subclasses 112+ for proteins and
    reaction products thereof.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 251 and
    252 for processes of liberation or purification of silk, keratins or
    protein involving fermentation.


CLS 162/3
TXT Processes under subclass 1 which include the purification, recovery and/or
    liberation of mineral fibers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145     and 152+, for processes of waterlaying products depositing fibrous
    products from a liquid suspension which includes mineral fibers, and the
    resulting products.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 376+ for a process of making glass
    fibers or mineral wool.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    62.2+ for laminating processes in which at least one lamina, e.g., a batt,
    is formed by bulk deposition of discrete particles.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 109+ for processes under the class definition for forming
    articles by uniting randomly associated particles, not containing free
    metal particles, particularly subclass 110 providing for mica particles.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 326+ for the chemical
    preparation of silicates not combined with a fiber liberation step; see
    also line note to Class 162 in definition of Class 423, section III, Line
    and Search Notes.


CLS 162/4
TXT Processes under subclass 1 which include the treatment of paper or textile
    waste such as old newspapers, waste rags, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the processes classifiable herein are drawn to the
    "deinking" of news print.  Many processes also include a mechanical
    defibration.  In this subclass the chemical or solvent agent may act upon
    the ink, or other material associated with the waste paper or textile.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191,    for processes including the recovery or reuse of the "broke" or
    "trim", which is the waste material from a previous waterlaying step, for
    the production of pulp for further waterlaying, which process does not
    involve any repulping with a chemical or solvent agent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, for processes of
    chemically removing coatings, such as wax, from a paper base without
    otherwise affecting the base, where the coating is not recovered.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 24+, for
    processes of recovering wax from waxed paper which does not include the
    recovery of fiber or fibrous pulp.


CLS 162/5
TXT Processes under subclass 4 in which an organic agent is employed.

    (1)     Note.  In many cases the organic agent is a solvent for the ink in
    a deinking process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72+,    for the digestion or treatment of nonwaste or unused cellulose in
    which an organic agent is employed.


CLS 162/6
TXT Processes under subclass 4 in which elemental chlorine, a chlorine
    compound, oxygen, ozone or a percompound is employed.

    (1)     Note.  Example of percompounds are hydrogen peroxide, sodium
    perborate and potassium permanganate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73,     74 and 87+, for processes of digesting or treating nonwaste or
    unused cellulose in which chlorine or a chlorine compound is employed.

    78,     for processes of digesting a treating nonwaste or unused cellulose
    in which a percompound is employed.


CLS 162/7
TXT Processes under subclass 4 in which elemental sulfur or a sulfur compound
    is employed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     for processes of digesting or treating nonwaste or unused cellulose
    with sulfur or a sulfur-containing material.


CLS 162/8
TXT Processes under subclass 4 in which an alkali metal, an alkaline earth
    metal or ammonium compound is employed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90,     for processes of digesting or treating nonwaste or unused cellulose
    in which an alkali metal, alkaline earth metal or ammonium hydroxide or
    carbonate is employed.


CLS 162/9
TXT Processes under subclass 1 combined with a chemical or physical
    modification of the liberated fiber.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of chemical or physical modifications included a
    formation of a cellulose derivative, change of shape of the fiber as
    curling, twisting, untwisting, puffing, swelling (with agent other than
    water), etc.

    (2)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are (1) dyeing, (2) removal of a
    constituent of the fiber unless accompanied by some physical deformation of
    the fiber such as curling, puffing, etc., and (3) hydration, mercerizing or
    parchmentizing of the fiber, even though combined with a digestion or
    purification of the fibrous material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     for processes of parchmentizing cellulose fibers by use of zinc
    chloride.

    82,     for processes of parchmentizing cellulose fibers by use of sulfuric
    acid.

    90,     for processes of mercerizing cellulose fibers.

    146     and 157.1+, for processes of making paper products (depositing from
    liquid suspension) in which chemically modified fibers are employed.


CLS 162/10
TXT Processes under subclass 1 combined with the addition or retention of a
    nonfibrous ingredient to or in the feltable fibrous product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158+,   for processes involving adding or retaining one or more nonfibrous
    ingredients to or in the fibrous product not combined with the digestion,
    liberation or purification of the fibers.


CLS 162/11
TXT Processes under subclass 10 in which the nonfibrous ingredient is derived
    in whole or in part from the plant or portion thereof from which the fiber
    is liberated.

    (1)     Note.  The nonfiber material may be extracted from the raw
    fiber-containing material and later added to the same batch of material
    from which it was derived, or to a different batch.  The nonfiber material
    may also be the reaction product of an original constituent of the plant,
    such as a gum, wax, resin, lignin, etc., and an externally applied reagent.
     It may also be present as the result of redistribution within the fiber,
    as where it is desired to have the constituent uniformly distributed within
    the fiber.

    (2)     Note.  A digestion process will seldom result in the removal of all
    the nonfibrous ingredients from vegetable growth.  Processes will be
    classified in this and indented subclasses only when the digestion is
    purposefully incomplete, as where it is stated that a substantial amount of
    fiber-impregnating or adhesive matter is retained.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass includes for example the combination of
    digestion and returning the waste liquor to the pulp as a nonfiber additive.


CLS 162/12
TXT Processes under subclass 10 in which the nonfiber material is added to
    self-sustaining fibrous web or body which has been deposited or formed from
    a liquid suspension of the fibers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158+,   particularly subclasses 184+, for the application of a nonfiber
    additive to a formed fibrous web or article not combined with a liberation
    or purification of the fibers.


CLS 162/13
TXT Processes under subclass 1 combined with the step of depositing or forming
    a fibrous web or article from a liquid suspension of the liberated or
    purified fibers.

    (1)     Note.  Processes including liberating or purifying fibers followed
    by forming a web or article in which the formation is set forth by name
    only, as for example, "waterlaying" without including any details of the
    waterlaying operation, are not classifiable in this subclass but elsewhere
    on the basis of the particular fiber liberation or purification.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10+,    for processes of this type also including the addition of a
    nonfiber material to the resultant web or article.


CLS 162/14
TXT Processes under subclass 1 combined with the recovery of an organic
    constituent from the raw fibrous material or a reaction product derived
    from such constituent, in addition to the liberated fiber.

    (1)     Note.  The organic material recovered must originate or be formed
    from the fibrous material.  Mere separation of the organic material is
    sufficient unless it is destroyed or discarded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29+,    for digestion or chemical treating processes in which the digestion
    liquor or treating agent is recovered or reused for treatment of further
    quantities of fibrous material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, particularly subclasses 123.11+
    for processes of preparation of plastic or coating composition wherein a
    cellulose liberation liquor is employed.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 251 and
    252 for processes of fermenting cellulose liberation waste liquor not
    combined with a fiber liberation.

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives; Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclasses 205+ for tall oil and its
    reaction products, and subclasses 500+ for lignins and reaction products
    thereof.


CLS 162/15
TXT Processes under subclass 14 in which the organic material is recovered from
    gases given off from a digester.

    (1)     Note.  An example of gas given off from a digester is that in
    relief of pressure.


CLS 162/16
TXT Processes under subclass 14 in which the organic material is recovered from
    waste fiber treating agent or liquor following its separation from the
    chemically treated fibers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29+,    for digestion or chemical treating processes in which the digestion
    liquor or treating agent is recovered or reused for treatment of further
    quantities of fibrous material.


CLS 162/17
TXT Processes under subclass 1 in which the fibrous material passes
    substantially continuously into and out of the treating zone.

    (1)     Note.  The raw fibrous material is continuously fed to, flowed
    through and discharged from the treating zone with the material normally
    being admitted and discharged at the same rates. "Continuous batch"
    processes, characterized by the passage of baskets filled with fibrous
    material, through a treating solution, are also included.


CLS 162/18
TXT Processes under subclass 17 in which the raw fibrous material is subjected
    to compression at the point of entrance to the treating zone so as to form
    a plug sealing off the zone from the exterior thereof.


CLS 162/19
TXT Processes under subclass 17 in which the fibrous material is subjected to a
    plurality of dissimilar chemical treatments.

    (1)     Note.  The treatments may be dissimilar in the composition or
    concentration of the treating medium, the temperature, pressure, or time,
    of the treatment, etc.


CLS 162/20
TXT Processes under subclass 1 combined with a step of (1) subjecting a nonwood
    fibrous material to a mechanical attrition step to strip off the husk or
    outer shell or to separate the fibrous material from nonfibrous material,
    or (2) subjecting fibrous material to be used in textile operations to a
    mechanical operation to modify or facilitate the preparation of the fibers
    for textile use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, for processes of decortication fiber
    preparation not involving any chemical treatment of the fiber.


CLS 162/21
TXT Processes under subclass 1 combined with the separation of the fibers from
    each other (1) by subjecting them to a sudden and drastic release of
    pressure, or (2) by projecting the fiber clumps against a solid surface.

    (1)     Note.  In view of the fact that steam and hot water are considered
    as chemicals for treating the fiber within the scope of subclass 1
    explosion or projection in the presence of steam or hot water is classified
    herein, even though no other digestion chemical is present.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247,    for apparatus for use in explosion or impact type defibering
    operations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 323.4+ apparatus for
    subjecting cereals to sudden changes in pressure to disrupt the same and
    produce a puffed food product.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 1 for
    processes for comminuting solid material by explosion and subclass 5 for
    processes utilizing kinetic energy of projected or suspended material.


CLS 162/22
TXT Processes under subclass 21 in which the fibrous material is treated with a
    chemical agent other than water or steam usually to facilitate the
    liberation or purification of the fibrous material.


CLS 162/23
TXT Processes under subclass 1 in which the fibrous material is subjected
    simultaneously to a mechanical disintegrating or attrition step and a
    digestion in the presence of a gas at an elevated temperature or pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for processes in which the fibrous material is subjected to a
    simultaneous chemical treatment and mechanical defibration not in the
    presence of a gas.

    63,     for processes of fiber treatment in the presence of a gas, vapor or
    mist.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 18+ for
    other disintegration or comminution processes carried out in the presence
    of a gas or vapor.


CLS 162/24
TXT Processes under subclass 1 combined with mechanical defibration step in
    which chemical treatment is initiated after the start or the completion of
    a mechanical defibration of the fibrous material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, particularly
    subclasses 15+ for processes of mechanically comminuting defibering fibrous
    materials with application of a fluid to the material not involving any
    chemical treatment of the fibrous material.


CLS 162/25
TXT Processes under subclass 24 in which the fibrous material is also subjected
    to a chemical treatment before the start of the defibering process.

    (1)     Note.  The chemical treatment prior to the mechanical defibration
    step is necessarily separate and distinct from that following the start or
    completion of the defibration, but may employ the same chemicals and
    conditions of treatment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for processes involving simultaneous chemical digestion or
    treatment and mechanical defibration of the fibrous material.


CLS 162/26
TXT Processes under subclass 1 in which the fibrous material is subjected to
    concurrent attrition or defibration and chemical digestion or treatment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17+,    for continuous processes for treating fibrous material in which the
    material is subjected to a chemical treatment and simultaneous defibration.

    23,     for processes of mechanically defibering fibrous material in the
    presence of a gas at elevated temperature or pressure.

    24+,    for processes in which the chemical treatment is initiated
    subsequent to the start or completion of mechanical defibration.

    235,    for apparatus for concurrently digesting and chemically treating
    fibrous material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, particularly
    subclasses 15+ for processes of mechanically comminuting defibering fibrous
    materials with application of a fluid to the material not involving any
    chemical treatment of the fibrous material.


CLS 162/27
TXT Processes under subclass 1 in which logs or billets of fibrous material are
    subjected to chemical treatment which does not destroy its log or billet
    form, which are then subjected to a mechanical grinding or attrition to
    convert the logs or billets into a defibered form.

    (1)     Note.  Processes in which the chemical digestion or treatment
    results in a destruction of the log or billet form followed by attrition
    are classified in the appropriate subclass below on other bases.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, particularly
    subclasses 15+ for processes of mechanically comminuting defibering fibrous
    materials with application of a fluid to the material not involving any
    chemical treatment of the fibrous material.


CLS 162/28
TXT Processes under subclass 1 combined with (1) a plurality of separate and
    distinct attrition or defibering steps, or (2) a specifically defined
    attrition or defibering step.

    (1)     Note.  Processes in which a defibering step subsequent to chemical
    treatment is claimed broadly as, for example, "defibering" "refining",
    "disintegrating", "comminuting", etc., are not classified in this subclass
    but are found in the appropriate subclass below, usually classified on the
    basis of the chemical treatment.  Processes in which subsequent plural
    distinct defibering steps are included are classified herein even though
    the defibering steps are recited broadly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70+,    for processes including a chemical treatment combined with a
    broadly recited single attrition step (see (1) Note).

    234+,   for digester apparatus combined with mechanical defibering means.

    261,    for other paper making apparatus combined with heating, refining
    and/or disintegrating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses for particular attrition processes and means, per se.


CLS 162/29
TXT Processes under subclass 1 involving (1) the regeneration, reclamation,
    reuse or recycling (to a fiber treating zone), or (2) the destruction of
    the digestion or treating fluid or chemicals after being used at least once
    for treating a fibrous material.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses include processes within the
    scope of the above when combined with a fiber treatment step or such
    processes not so combined with fiber treatment which are not provided for
    elsewhere.  The preparation of cellulose liberation agents from such waste
    liquors is found in this or indented subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     for processes for chemically treating fibrous material in which
    waste liquor from the digestion is employed solely for the purpose of
    charging or discharging the fibrous material to or from the treating zone.

    60,     for processes of chemically treating fibrous material in which the
    waste liquor is employed for washing a fibrous pulp.

    239+,   for the combination of a digester and means for recovering waste
    liquor discharged therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclass for
    processes of regenerating or treating waste cellulose liberation liquor
    electrolytically.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for
    regenerating, reclaiming, or destroying used digestion agents.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses, for the
    preparation or recovery of inorganic compounds, not combined with a fiber
    treating or liberating step and for the line between the classes see the
    note to Class 162 in the definition of Class 423, section III, Line and
    Search Notes.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 262 for
    processes for the recovery of chemicals from used cellulose digestion
    agents involving fermentation and not combined with fiber treatment steps.

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives; Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclasses 205+ and  500+, for the
    recovery of organic compound from waste fiber treating agents, not combined
    with fiber treating steps.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for destruction of hazardous digestion or treating fluid
    chemicals.


CLS 162/30.1
TXT With destruction of organic ingredient in or smelting of liquor:

    Processes under subclass 29 which include (a) the destruction of the
    organic constituent of the waste liquor, or (b) treatment of the product of
    such destruction to produce a chemical composition for further use in a
    cellulose digestion process.

    (1)     Note.  Processes of destruction of the organic constituent of waste
    liquor by oxidation, as well as such processes when accompanied by smelting
    of the inorganic constituents of the liquor, are included.  Also included
    are processes of digestion which start with smelt, or a product of the
    smelt such as an aqueous solution thereof, (e.g., green liquor).

    (2)     Note.  This and indented subclasses include the preparation of
    cellulose liberation, a treating liquor from "smelt" derived from wastes of
    cellulose treating, or liberating processes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240,    for digestion combined with means to heat the used digestion
    chemicals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for
    regenerating, reclaiming, or destroying used digestion agents.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses for the
    preparation, or recovery of inorganic compounds, not combined with a fiber
    treating, or liberating step and for the line between the classes, see the
    note to Class 162, in the definition of Class 423, section III, Line and
    Search Notes.


CLS 162/30.11
TXT Treatment of kraft pulping chemicals:

    Subject matter under subclass 30.1 wherein the waste liquor being treated
    results from the kraft (i.e., sulfate) process for paper fiber liberation.


CLS 162/31
TXT Processes under subclass 30 in which organic constituent suspended in a
    liquid is oxidized in situ, without removing all the liquid.

    (1)     Note.  This type of destruction of organic constituent is known as
    "liquid phase oxidation".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 238 for furnaces for burning wet fuel, (e.g.,
    sewage).

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 63 for processes for
    purifying a liquid by an oxidizing treatment.


CLS 162/32
TXT Processes under subclass 30 in which the original fiber liberation liquor
    contains an organic compound or an element other than sodium, calcium,
    magnesium, oxygen, carbon, hydrogen or sulfur.


CLS 162/33
TXT Processes under subclass 30 in which waste liquors from at least two
    different types of fiber digestion or treatment are mixed before or after
    destruction of the organic ingredient or smelting.


CLS 162/34
TXT Processes under subclass 30 in which a charge of fibrous material is
    subjected to two successive dissimilar chemical treatments.

    (1)     Note.  The dissimilarity may reside in any one or more of the
    following factors: composition or concentration of the treating medium, the
    temperature, pressure or time of the treatment, etc.


CLS 162/35
TXT Processes under subclass 30 in which waste liquor is subjected to a
    destruction of contained organic material or is smelted and subsequently
    the residue is reconstituted into a cellulose liberation liquor which is
    chemically different than that originally employed for treating the fibrous
    material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides, for example, for the treatment of
    the waste liquor from a "sulfate" process by smelting and converting the
    residue into a sulfite type cellulose liberation liquor.


CLS 162/36
TXT Processes under subclass 30 in which the waste liquor from a cellulose
    digestion with a sulfite or sulfur dioxide is subjected to smelting or the
    destruction of a contained organic material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83+,    for processes of digesting or treating cellulosic fibrous material
    with a sulfite or sulfur dioxide.


CLS 162/37
TXT Processes under subclass 29 in which liquor resulting from a chemical
    treatment of one batch of fibrous material is subsequently used for the
    chemical treatment of a different batch of fibrous material.

    (1)     Note.  In this and indented subclasses are placed all processes in
    which liquor or chemicals from a digestion or fiber treating operation is
    subjected to treatment which under the disclosure conditions it for reuse
    for fiber digestion or treatment, regardless of whether the reuse is
    claimed unless it is positively disclosed that it is reused on the same
    fibrous material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41+,    for processes in which used treating liquor or agent is reused on
    the same fibrous material.


CLS 162/38
TXT Processes under subclass 37 which include the addition of chemicals other
    than water or steam, to waste liquor, prior to reuse thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The purpose of the addition of chemicals to the used
    digestion fluid is of no significance.  Thus, addition may be for the
    removal of impurities, as well as for enhancing the chemical activity of
    the liquor during subsequent use.

    (2)     Note.  The added chemicals, of the above definition, may be
    previously unused materials or other regenerated waste liquor, as well as
    any other material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for the addition of fresh chemicals to digestion fluid while moving
    in a closed circuit to and from the same fibrous mass.


CLS 162/39
TXT Processes under subclass 38 in which the chemicals are added to the used
    digestion fluid in the digester in which the regenerated fluid is employed
    for digesting or treating the second batch of fibrous material.


CLS 162/40
TXT Processes under subclass 37 in which digestion fluid resulting from
    treatment of one batch of fibrous material is employed without treatment or
    modification for treatment of a different batch of fibrous material.


CLS 162/41
TXT Processes under subclass 29 in which the used fiber liberation or treating
    agent is separated from the fibrous mass and returned and reused on the
    same fibrous material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248,    for digesters with fluid circulation means.


CLS 162/42
TXT Processes under subclass 41 in which some property of the digestion fluid
    is altered during the circulation thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the patents appearing in this subclass involve
    heating the digestion fluid during circulation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249,    for digesters, combined with means for recirculating the digestion
    fluid and means for heating the fluid during recirculation.


CLS 162/43
TXT Processes under subclass 42 in which a portion of the fiber treating fluid
    is removed from the recirculating stream thereof.


CLS 162/44
TXT Processes under subclass 43 in which at least a part of the removed portion
    of fiber treating fluid is combined with the remainder of the recirculating
    fiber treating fluid before it is again brought into association with the
    fibrous mass.

    (1)     Note.  In many of the patents of this subclass, gases or vapors
    separated from the fiber treating liquid are recombined therewith.


CLS 162/45
TXT Processes under subclass 42 in which chemicals, other than water or steam,
    are added to the fiber treating fluid being recirculated.

    (1)     Note.  The "added chemicals" of the above definition have the
    significance indicated in (2) Note under the definition of subclass 38.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38+,    for the addition of chemicals to fluid which has been used in
    treating one batch of fibers, to fortify it for use on another batch of
    fibers.


CLS 162/46
TXT Processes under subclass 41 in which the fluid being circulated consists of
    steam.


CLS 162/47
TXT Processes under subclass 1 combined with a separation or recovery of heat
    from the chemical digestion or treatment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for processes of fiber digestion or treatment combined with means
    to cool the liquid so as to freeze at least a portion thereof.

    239,    for a digester combined with means to recover heat therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses, for heat exchange methods
    and apparatus not otherwise provided for.


CLS 162/48
TXT Processes under subclass 1 which involve a treatment of the apparatus
    employed to clean, preserve or condition it for use in the digestion
    operation.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes the above steps in combination with
    digestion or fiber treating steps or such cleaning, preserving, or
    conditioning steps, per se, if not otherwise provided for.  This subclass
    includes, for example, digestion in the presence of an autocorrosion agent
    or performed in such a manner as to prevent corrosion of the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199,    for processes involving the cleaning, preserving, conditioning or
    repairing apparatus used in the making of webs or articles from liberated
    fibers.

    272+,   for apparatus for performing processes classified in subclass 199.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 27 for a glassworking and/or treating
    process including a step of repairing or cleaning of apparatus.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses for
    processes of cleaning, not otherwise provided for, but not combined with
    fiber digestion.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, particularly subclasses
    141+ for processes of cleaning by electrolysis not combined with fiber
    digestion.


CLS 162/49
TXT Processes under subclass 1 combined with a step of sampling, or chemically
    or physically determining some property or characteristic of the fibers or
    treating fluid.

    (1)     Note.  The testing, etc., may be performed on fibers or treating
    fluid without disturbing their normal flow, or upon a sample extracted from
    such flow.

    (2)     Note.  Processes which are carried out at specified temperatures,
    pressures, or "until acid", for example, are not classified in this
    subclass even though a test or measurement might be necessary to determine
    the temperature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198,    for processes of chemically or physically determining some property
    or characteristic of fibers combined with a paper making operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 377+ for a glassworking and/or
    treating process including a step of testing or inspecting.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, especially subclasses 53.03+ for testing
    physical properties of pulp not combined with fiber digestion.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, for processes of
    chemical testing of fibers or digestion fluid not combined with fiber
    digestion.


CLS 162/50
TXT Processes under subclass 1 in which electrical or radiant energy is
    directly applied to fibrous material.

    (1)     Note.  Indirect electrical heating, such as by contact of fibrous
    material with an electrically heated plate, is not included.  Included are,
    for example, exposure to high frequency electric discharge, corona
    discharge, ultraviolet or infrared radiation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    192,    for processes involving the application of electrical or wave
    energy directly to an unfinished fibrous web or article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 689+ for electrolytic treatment of
    organic fibrous material.


CLS 162/51
TXT Processes under subclass 1 which include a step of controlling odors given
    off in connection with the fiber treating or digestion process.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 5 for process of deodorizing not
    otherwise provided for.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclass 76 for
    a deodorant composition, per se.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses depending on the chemical composition of the odors.


CLS 162/52
TXT Processes under subclass 1 which include a step of charging a reaction
    vessel with fibrous material or discharging it therefrom, or from another
    vessel closely associated therewith, such as a blowpit.

    (1)     Note.  A broadly recited step of "charging", "loading",
    "discharging", "blowing", etc., is not a sufficient basis for placing a
    process in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17+,    for processes involving continuous charging or discharging of
    cellulosic material into and out of a reaction vessel.

    246,    for the combination of a digester and means for charging and/or
    discharging the same.


CLS 162/53
TXT Processes under subclass 1 which include a step of subjecting the fibrous
    material and/or treating fluid to a subatmospheric pressure.

    (1)     Note.  Processes in which fibrous material is first subjected to a
    steaming treatment followed by treatment with a cold liquid which causes
    condensation of the steam, are not included in this subclass even though a
    momentary vacuum is caused to exist within the fibrous material.


CLS 162/54
TXT Processes under subclass 1 which include a step of lowering the temperature
    so as to freeze at least a portion of the liquid employed in the fiber
    liberation or treatment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for digestion processes combined with the step of recovering heat
    therefrom.

    239,    for a digester combined with means to recover heat therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclasses, for refrigeration processes
    and apparatus.


CLS 162/55
TXT Processes under subclass 1 combined with a step of separating solid
    components of the fibrous material undergoing chemical treatment, from one
    another, in grades or classes according to physical characteristics.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses, for processes for the separation of solids from solids in
    grades or classes according to physical characteristics.


CLS 162/56
TXT Processes under subclass 1 combined with a step of applying a mechanical
    force to the fibrous material, of sufficient magnitude to remove at least a
    portion of a liquid associated with such material from the cells or
    surfaces thereof, or to knead or rub the fibrous material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for processes involving compressing, squeezing or compacting of the
    fibrous material in connection with continuous digestion or continuous
    charging or discharging of the fibrous material.

    20      through 28, for processes which include a defibration or
    comminution of the fibrous material.


CLS 162/57
TXT Processes under subclass 1 which include imparting to the fibrous material
    and/or fluid treating agent some positive motion during the treating or
    digestion operation.

    (1)     Note.  Agitation caused solely by the bubbling or boiling of the
    treating liquid is not sufficient to place the process in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17+,    for processes of continuous digestion or continuous charging or
    discharging of the fibrous material.

    41+,    for processes in which the treating fluid is separated from the
    fibrous material and recirculated to the digestion operation.


CLS 162/58
TXT Processes under subclass 57 in which motion is imparted to the fibrous
    material and/or treating liquid by rotation of the treating vessel.


CLS 162/59
TXT Processes under subclass 57 in which the fibrous material and/or treating
    liquid is forced to travel in a closed path by circuit defining elements of
    the apparatus employed.


CLS 162/60
TXT Processes under subclass 1 combined with a step of passing a nonreactive
    liquid through the fibrous material so as to remove undesired material
    therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  Processes in which the washing is included only broadly, as
    by name only, are not included but are classified elsewhere on other bases.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing:  Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, particularly subclass 156 for processes of washing of
    pulp or fibers.


CLS 162/61
TXT Processes under subclass 1 directed to controlling the conditions of the
    digestion or fiber treatment, e.g., temperature, pressure, feed of fibers
    or treating agent, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Chemical treatment of fibrous material involving the use of
    a specified pressure or temperature for example is not sufficient by itself
    to justify classification in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for digestion processes combined with a sampling or testing or
    analysis step.


CLS 162/62
TXT Processes under subclass 61 in which the operating condition controlled is
    the concentration of a fiber treating agent.


CLS 162/63
TXT Processes under subclass 1 wherein the fibrous material is forcibly and
    directly contacted with a gas, vapor or mist during digestion or chemical
    treatment for some purpose other than drying.

    (1)     Note.  Admission of a gas or vapor into a portion of a reaction
    vessel in which the fibers are immersed in a liquid is not sufficient basis
    for classification in this or indented subclasses unless it positively
    appears that there is direct contact with the fibrous material.  Nor is the
    generation of a gas in situ by a chemical reaction of two liquids
    sufficient basis for classification in this group of subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  The gas, vapor or mist may be nonreactive with the fibers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for processes of digestion including a mechanical defibration in
    the presence of a gas under elevated temperatures and pressures.


CLS 162/64
TXT Processes under subclass 63 in which the gas or vapor is sulfur dioxide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83+,    for processes of digestion or treatment of fibrous material with a
    sulfite or sulfur dioxide (not involving gas-fiber contact).


CLS 162/65
TXT Processes under subclass 63 in which the gas or vapor is oxygen, ozone or
    air.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for processes of fiber digestion or treatment by percolating the
    treating fluid therethrough, even though the fibrous material may contact
    the ambient air.


CLS 162/66
TXT Processes under subclass 63 in which the gas, vapor or mist contains
    chlorine, free or combined.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87+,    for processes of digestion or treating fibrous material with a
    chlorine containing agent (not involving gas-fiber contact).


CLS 162/67
TXT Processes under subclass 66 in which the gas or vapor is chlorine dioxide.


CLS 162/68
TXT Processes under subclass 63 in which steam is the only gas or vapor coming
    into direct contact with the fibrous material.


CLS 162/69
TXT Processes under subclass 1 in which a mass of fibers is impregnated with a
    chemical agent to such a limited extent that the agent does not form a
    continuous liquid phase completely enveloping the fibrous material.

    (1)     Note.  In many of the patents, a slow digestion of the fibrous
    material takes place while the material is in storage, as by percolating
    through a fixed bed of fibrous material.


CLS 162/70
TXT Processes under subclass 1 in which the fibrous material is treated with a
    particular, identified treating agent or chemical.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses also provide for particular
    treating compositions or mixtures employed in the digestion or treatment.
    Such compositions are classified with the corresponding process.

    (2)     Note.  Processes classified in this or indented subclasses may
    involve a plurality of the same or different distinct treatment steps, the
    particular agent used must be identified in at least one step.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30.1+,  for processes of preparation of fiber treating agents from smelts
    or residues left from waste treating agent from a previous digestion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 115.5+ for chemical treatment or
    modification of dry paper.


CLS 162/71
TXT Processes under subclass 70 in which the fibrous material being treated
    includes groundwood or sawdust.


CLS 162/72
TXT Processes under subclass 70 in which an organic compound is used as the
    fiber treating agent.

    (1)     Note.  Attention is directed to the definitions of Class 260,
    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for the scope of the term "organic compound"
    and of the various types of organic compound provided for in the subclasses
    indented hereunder.


CLS 162/73
TXT Processes under subclass 72 which involve the use of inorganic chlorine
    containing material in addition to an organic compound.


CLS 162/74
TXT Processes under subclass 72 in which a chlorine containing organic compound
    is used.


CLS 162/75
TXT Processes under subclass 72 in which a fat, fatty oil or a higher fatty
    acid is employed.

    (1)     Note.  By "fats" and "fatty oils" is meant the glycerides of higher
    fatty acids, including naturally occurring mixtures thereof present in a
    single oil or fat.

            By "higher fatty acid" is meant a carboxylic acid containing an
    unbroken chain of at least 7 carbon atoms bonded to a carboxyl group, e.g.,
    lauric, palmatic, stearic, oleic, ricinoleic, linoleic, and behenolic.
    Where there are several unbroken chains of carbon atoms bonded to the
    carboxyl group, one of the chains must contain at least 7 carbon atoms.
    Included in this subclass also are salts, amides, esters and anhydrides of
    such acids.


CLS 162/76
TXT Processes under subclass 72 in which an organic acid, salt or ester thereof
    is employed.


CLS 162/77
TXT Processes under subclass 72 in which an alcohol or phenol is employed.


CLS 162/78
TXT Processes under subclass 70 in which a so- called inorganic "per" compound
    is employed.

    (1)     Note.  Includes as "per" compounds are those having oxygen atoms
    bonded to each other, as in hydrogen peroxide and sodium per perborate, for
    example, as well as other "per" compounds having oxygen containing anions
    such as perchlorates, permanganates, etc.


CLS 162/79
TXT Processes under subclass 70 in which a chemical containing aluminum or a
    metal having a specific gravity greater than four is employed.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for instance, processes of
    parchmentizing with zinc chloride.


CLS 162/80
TXT Processes under subclass 70 in which a chemical containing phosphorus,
    boron or silicon is employed.


CLS 162/81
TXT Processes under subclass 70 in which a chemical containing an oxide of
    nitrogen an acid of a nitrogen oxide or salt thereof is employed.


CLS 162/82
TXT Processes under subclass 70 in which a chemical containing sulfur is
    employed.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, processes of
    parchmentizing with sulfuric acid.


CLS 162/83
TXT Processes under subclass 82 in which a chemical containing a sulfite or
    free SO2 is employed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     processes of digesting or treating fibers in which the fibers are
    contacted with sulfur dioxide in the gaseous state.


CLS 162/84
TXT Processes under subclass 83 in which the fibrous material is subjected to a
    plurality of separate dissimilar chemical treatments, at least one of which
    involves treatment with SO2 or a sulfite.

    (1)     Note.  The separate treatments may differ in composition or
    concentration of the treating medium, temperature, or pressure, of
    treatment, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29+,    especially subclass 36 for processes of sulfite digestion in which
    the waste liquor is regenerated, reclaimed, reused or recycled.


CLS 162/85
TXT Processes under subclass 84 in which a chlorine containing material is
    employed in at least one stage.

    (1)     Note.  The chlorine containing material may be used in combination
    with the sulfite or sulfur dioxide in the same stage or in a stage separate
    therefrom in a multistage process.


CLS 162/86
TXT Processes under subclass 84 in which a hydroxide or carbonate of an alkali
    metal, ammonium, an alkaline earth metal or magnesium is employed in at
    least one of the separate treatments.

    (1)     Note.  The alkali metals are lithium, sodium, potassium, rubidium
    and cesium.

    (2)     Note.  The alkaline earth metals are calcium, strontium and barium.


CLS 162/87
TXT Processes under subclass 70 in which a chlorine containing material is
    employed.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the patents in this and indented subclasses are
    directed to the bleaching of fibrous pulps.


CLS 162/88
TXT Processes under subclass 87 in which the fibrous material is subjected to a
    plurality of separate, dissimilar chemical treatments, at least one of
    which involves treatment with a chlorine containing material.

    (1)     Note.  The separate treatments may differ in composition or
    concentration of the treating medium, temperature or pressure, of the
    treatment, etc.


CLS 162/89
TXT Processes under subclass 88 in which a hydroxide or carbonate of an alkali
    metal, ammonium, an alkaline earth metal or magnesium is employed in at
    least one of the separate treatments.

    (1)     Note.  The alkali metals are lithium, sodium, potassium, rubidium
    and cesium.

    (2)     Note.  The alkaline earth metals are calcium, strontium and barium.


CLS 162/90
TXT Processes under subclass 70 in which a hydroxide or carbonate of an alkali
    metal, ammonium, an alkaline earth metal or magnesium is employed.

    (1)     Note.  The alkali metals are lithium, sodium, potassium, rubidium
    and cesium.

    (2)     Note.  The alkaline earth metals are calcium, strontium and barium.


CLS 162/91
TXT Processes under subclass 1 directed to the digestion or chemical treatment
    of a particular species or type of cellulosic fibrous material.

    (1)     Note.  In this and indented subclasses are placed processes of
    treating and digesting fibrous material of particular specified kinds of
    sources. In view of the fact that most fiber digesting processes are
    provided for in preceding subclasses, these subclasses contain many cross
    references of patents provided for above.  Cross references of patents
    classified in subclasses 100 and 232, disclosing the use of fibers from
    particular sources, may also be found herein.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass provides for the digestion of particular
    species of wood fibers.


CLS 162/92
TXT Processes under subclass 91 directed to the digestion or chemical treatment
    of petrified vegetable material, such as peat or lignite.


CLS 162/93
TXT Processes under subclass 91 directed to the digestion or chemical treatment
    of the tissues of the woody stem which are outside the cambium layer of the
    plant, that is the bark.


CLS 162/94
TXT Processes under subclass 91 directed to the digestion or chemical treatment
    of bamboo.


CLS 162/95
TXT Processes under subclass 91 directed to the digestion or chemical treatment
    of raw staple cotton or the short fibers which adhere to cottonseed after
    the ginning operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99,     for processes of treating the hulls of cottonseeds.


CLS 162/96
TXT Processes under subclass 91 directed to the digestion or chemical treatment
    of sugar cane after the sugar has been extracted, such cane in crushed or
    other comminuted form, or is derived from cornstalk.


CLS 162/97
TXT Processes under subclass 91 directed to the digestion or chemical treatment
    of a cereal grass or straw.

    (1)     Note.  The most common cereals involved are wheat, rye, oat, barley
    and rice.


CLS 162/98
TXT Processes under subclass 91 directed to the digestion or chemical treatment
    of flax, hemp, jute or ramie.

    (1)     Note.  For the purpose of this subclass, the term "hemp" includes
    Manila hemp (Musa textilis) and sisal hemp (Agave) as well as true hemp
    (Cannabis sative).


CLS 162/99
TXT Processes under subclass 91 directed to the digestion or chemical in which
    the material treatment of fibrous material, other than a wood, not provided
    for in any of the preceding subclasses (92-98).

    (1)     Note.  Types of material, the treatment of which is classifiable in
    this subclass, are noncereal grasses such as esparto, as well as leaves,
    roots, reeds, stems, seaweed and other forms of aquatic plant life.


CLS 162/100
TXT Processes under the class definition, for depositing fibers from a liquid
    suspension thereof to form an interfelted fibrous product (paper),
    combinations of such fiber depositing steps with other treatments of the
    deposited fibrous product, treatments of the deposited product prior to the
    final drying thereof not otherwise provided for, paper treating processes
    not otherwise provided for, and products of such processes not otherwise
    provided for.

    (1)     Note.  In processes classified in this or indented subclass the
    fibrous nature of the product must be retained. Processes in which the
    fibers are converted to a nonfibrous form are classified in the appropriate
    material working class, e.g., Class 264, Plastic and Nonmetallic Article
    Shaping or Treating:  Processes.

    (2)     Note.  In this and indented subclasses the articles are usually
    classified with the corresponding processes, however, certain subclasses by
    their nature, as for example, those providing for various manipulative
    procedures, take only processes, the products being old or conventional or
    classifiable elsewhere on other bases.

    (3)     Note.  Articles and materials provided for in other classes are not
    classified in this class (162) merely because they are made of paper
    (deposited fibers).

    (4)     Note.  Indented subclasses (141-181) also, include the products
    under "E." of the class definition of this class (162).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for processes of digesting fibrous material combined with forming a
    web or article from the liberated fibers.

    232     and 252 to 411, 415 and 416, for apparatus for forming paper from
    fibrous materials.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 90.01+ for processes restricted
    burnishing or the combination of burnishing and calendering of a dried
    felted fibrous product.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate
    subclasses, for processes restricted to drying of wet felted material by
    evaporation of the moisture contained therein.

    100,    Presses, for processes restricted to mechanically expressing liquid
    from a wet felted web, and processes for calendering a dried web, with or
    without the steps of moistening and/or drying, the steps of calendering,
    moistening and drying being taken in any order.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses, for processes under the class definition for
    forming articles from rewetted paper, see note under III Search Class to
    Class 264 in the class definitions of this class (162) and (1) Note above.

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclasses, for processes of coating
    paper not combined with a paper making step, or where the paper is not
    still wet from the paper forming operation, and for processes of coating
    dried felted fibrous material.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, appropriate subclasses for making an article from
    finished paper.


CLS 162/101
TXT Processes under subclass 100 including a step of forming pores or other
    type of open space in situ within a felted body during or subsequent to the
    felting operation, and products of such processes.

    (1)     Note.  The pores are usually formed by introducing a gas under
    pressure to the interior of the felted body or by generating a gas in situ
    in such body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158+,   particularly subclass 181 for formation of porous paper by the
    addition of a porous material thereto, e.g., expanded perlite.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 601+, and 672+ for
    processes of making various types of coating or plastic compositions,
    including a step forming pores in situ in the composition.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, subclasses 39 and 80+ for pore-forming
    ceramic compositions.

    521,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 50+ for
    pore-forming, per se, in a synthetic resin composition when the composition
    in which the pores are formed is a synthetic resin.


CLS 162/102
TXT Processes under subclass 100 in which the fibers are deposited from a
    liquid other than water.

    (1)     Note.  Liquids are considered to be nonaqueous if the medium
    includes more than 50 percent of such nonaqueous liquid.  Examples of such
    nonaqueous liquids are alcohols, turpentine, toluene, gasoline, etc.


CLS 162/103
TXT Processes under subclass 100 in which a web or article deposited from a
    liquid suspension of fibers (waterlaid) is united with a solid preformed
    body not so deposited either during fiber deposition or prior to final
    drying thereof, and products of such processes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201,    for the combination of a process of this class followed by a
    laminating step such as is provided for in Class 156, Adhesive Bonding and
    Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture.

    219,    for processes of forming composite articles consisting of a
    plurality of separately waterlaid components.

    267,    for apparatus for molding pulp with a nonpulp insert or preform.


CLS 162/104
TXT Processes under subclass 103 in which the nonwaterlaid preform is
    positioned between and in contact with separately formed waterlaid webs,
    and the products thereof.


CLS 162/105
TXT Processes under subclass 103 in which the nonwaterlaid preform is a metal,
    and products of such processes.


CLS 162/106
TXT Processes under subclass 105 in which the metal is disclosed as being used
    as a conductor of electricity, and the products thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    47+ for processes of making electrical conductors of indefinite length, not
    otherwise provided for.

    174,    Electricity: Conductors and Insulators, appropriate subclasses, for
    electric conductors.


CLS 162/107
TXT Processes under subclass 103 in which the nonwaterlaid preform contains
    glass, and the products thereof.


CLS 162/108
TXT Processes under subclass 103 in which the nonwaterlaid preform is a woven
    fabric or comprises a plurality of parallel strands or filaments; and the
    products thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 181+ for a woven fabric and subclasses 304+ for a knit fabric.


CLS 162/109
TXT Processes under subclass 100 for producing an essentially flat web or sheet
    having some irregularity or variation from the plane configuration, which
    variation is slight in proportion to the web's length and width so as not
    to destroy its essentially flat condition, and the webs or sheets so
    produced.

    (1)     Note.  The irregularity may be produced during the deposition of
    the fibers or by a subsequent treatment of the undried web.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218+,   for processes for the production of discrete and finite shaped
    articles by deposition of fibers, which shaped articles may have a
    pronounced irregularity and be nonplanar.


CLS 162/110
TXT Processes under subclass 109 including a step or redistributing the fibers
    in the web or sheet or altering their configuration in a limited area of
    the web or sheet so as to produce a mark or design in the product which is
    visible when viewed by transmitted light, and the products of such
    processes.

    (1)     Note.  The watermark is most frequently produced by a raised or
    depressed pattern on a dandy roll.  In the former case, there is less fiber
    at the mark than in the balance of the sheet; in the latter case, there is
    more fiber. In either case, there is a difference in transparency between
    the area of the mark in the one hand and the balance of the sheet on the
    other.


CLS 162/111
TXT Processes under subclass 109 in which the irregularity imparted to the web
    or sheet is a crinkle, or wrinkle effect known as a "crepe", usually
    substantially over the entire surface, and the products of such processes.

    (1)     Note.  The paper treated may be dry and rewetted for the creping
    operation, or may still be wet from the papermaking operation during the
    creping operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for corrugating, crinkling, creping and embossing,
    particularly subclasses 183, 205+, 210, and 219+.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 153+ for
    creped paper, and subclasses 174+ for a stock material product embodying a
    non- planar uniform-thickness (e.g., corrugated, pleated) component with or
    without a coating.


CLS 162/112
TXT Processes under subclass 111 combined with the deposited fibrous material
    or uniting the deposited layer to a second (1) coating layer and products
    of such processes.

    (1)     Note.  The term "coating" signifies both the application of a
    surface layer to a base, and penetration of the interior of the base by
    impregnation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    265+,   for apparatus for making a paper web or article combined with a
    coating means.


CLS 162/113
TXT Processes under subclass 111 combined with a step of deforming the web or
    sheet in addition to the creping or crinkling, and the products thereof.


CLS 162/114
TXT Processes under subclass 109 in which the configuration is imparted to the
    web or sheet by formation of an opening which extends completely through
    the thickness of the web or sheet, and the products thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The opening may be formed by a suitable raised or marked
    portion on the forming means, as well as by subsequent mechanical
    penetration of the web or sheet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286,    for apparatus for forming a web or article combined with means to
    perforate the web or article.


CLS 162/115
TXT Processes under subclass 109 in which the configuration is imparted to the
    web or sheet by the direct action of a fluid under pressure thereon, and
    the products thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    297,    for apparatus for making a running or indefinite length web with
    means to treat the web with fluid pressure acting directly on the work on
    the mold surface.


CLS 162/116
TXT Processes under subclass 109 in which the configuration is imparted to the
    web or sheet by deposition of the fibers upon a forming mold having an
    irregular surface and the products thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    296,    for apparatus for forming a running or indefinite length product
    which includes an irregular or configured forming surface.


CLS 162/117
TXT Processes under subclass 109 in which an irregular configuration is
    imparted to the web or sheet subsequent to its removal from the surface
    upon which it was formed, and the products thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses, for processes within the class definition, which
    may involve the shaping, molding or embossing a preformed paper sheet
    either dry or with rewetting thereof.


CLS 162/118
TXT Processes under subclass 100 including a step of winding or wrapping a wet
    web upon itself, or upon a core to produce a multiply tubular article.

    (1)     Note.  This group of subclasses takes processes of forming tubes by
    winding followed by cutting the tube axially and flattening it out into a
    sheet. Products of processes of this and indented subclasses are classified
    on the basis of the character of the product.

    (2)     Note.  Winding can take place, for example, by (1) passing the web
    at least once about the longitudinal axis of the article being formed,
    without displacement of the web axially of such article, resulting in the
    formation of a multilayered article, with each turn in close proximity to
    the immediately preceding and immediately succeeding turns, or (2) by
    advancing the web axially of the product being made, while revolving the
    web about such axis, resulting in the formation of a single ply tube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123+,   for multilayer webs or sheets which may be produced by winding,
    followed by cutting the tube axially, and flattening it out into a sheet.

    283+,   for paper making apparatus including means for winding the paper
    product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 100-178, especially
    subclasses 129+, 144, 150, and 154 for spirally wound layers or pipes.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 520+ for convolute
    winding.


CLS 162/119
TXT Processes under subclass 118 which include the application of a coating to
    the undried web, either before, during or after winding.


CLS 162/120
TXT Processes under subclass 118 which include a step of cutting the fibrous
    material or removing a portion thereof, following winding.


CLS 162/121
TXT Processes under subclass 118 combined with a step of heating the fibrous
    material.


CLS 162/122
TXT Processes under subclass 118 combined with a step of applying mechanical
    pressure to the fibrous material.


CLS 162/123
TXT Processes under subclass 100 in which a plurality of formed fibrous webs or
    sheets are united prior to the final drying of at least one of the webs or
    sheets and the products thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The uniting may be during the formation of one or more of
    the fibrous layers or may be accomplished by the folding or lapping of an
    undried fibrous layer upon itself.  For example, the layers must be
    separately formed, or formed at different times or places, a single source
    of pulp may supply a plurality of forming means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118+,   for processes in which plural layers are formed by a winding
    operation. Layered products, not otherwise provided for are found in this
    or indented subclasses (123+).

    188,    for processes of producing from a unitary source of pulp suspension
    or from a plurality of contiguous sources of pulp suspension, a single-ply
    web or sheet, characterized by a gradual transition or other nonuniformity,
    in the nature of the fiber, in progressing from one surface of the product
    to the other.

    196,    for processes involving a step of folding, twisting or rolling,
    where the product is not a multilayered web or sheet.  Subclass 196 takes
    processes of producing pulp rovings by rolling a narrow strip of a
    waterlaid strip upon itself.

    203,    for processes of producing a homogeneous single-ply web or sheet by
    means of two forming members, in which two webs, felted on the respective
    forming means, are in contact with a common pulp bath at the time the webs
    are joined.

    298,    for apparatus for applying a plurality of separate streams of
    fibrous pulp to the same mold surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 150 and 156+ for pipes
    produced by winding a web, in a plurality of turns, to desired thickness.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses, for processes of adhesively uniting preformed
    layers of material.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet not provided for in any other class.


CLS 162/124
TXT Processes under subclass 123 in which a nonfibrous material is added
    between waterlaid webs or sheets, and the products thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The nonfibrous material may be applied in the form of a
    liquid film, or in the form of granules or flakes. For the purpose of this
    subclass water is not regarded as coming within the term, "nonfiber".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for processes wherein a solid preformed body or layer is positioned
    between formed fibrous layers.


CLS 162/125
TXT Processes under subclass 123 in which at least one layer or the fibers
    thereof differ in some property from another layer or the fibers thereof,
    and the products thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of properties in which the layers may differ,
    provided for in this subclass are:  density, thickness, width, and
    absorbency.


CLS 162/126
TXT Processes under subclass 125 in which at least two layers are of different
    colors or have different color or other type of visual effects, and the
    products thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162,    for processes of forming a single fibrous layer having a coloring
    material added thereto.


CLS 162/127
TXT Processes under subclass 125 in which at least two layers are associated
    with different amounts or types of a nonfibrous organic material, and the
    products thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The difference may reside in the fact that one layer is
    mixed with an organic material, while the adjoining layer is free of
    organic material.  The organic material need not be specifically
    identified.  It is sufficient if a functional term such as "sizing",
    indicative of the organic nature of the additive, is employed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158     through 180, for processes of adding nonfibrous organic material to
    a fiber slurry, pulp or wet web, and the resulting products.


CLS 162/128
TXT Processes under subclass 125 in which at least two layers are associated
    with different amounts of nonfibrous inorganic material, and the products
    thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182,    for processes of adding nonfibrous inorganic material to a fiber
    slurry, pulp or wet web.


CLS 162/129
TXT Processes under subclass 125 in which the fibers of at least two layers
    differ in some property, and the corresponding products.

    (1)     Note.  The making of a composite product by joining a cellulosic
    web and an asbestos or animal fiber web is included in this subclass.


CLS 162/130
TXT Processes under subclass 129 in which the fibers of one layer are of a
    different dimension or range of dimensions from those in another layer, and
    the corresponding products.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188,    for processes of preparing single ply waterlaid products having a
    nonuniform distribution of fibers.


CLS 162/131
TXT Processes under subclass 129 in which the major axis of some fibers of one
    layer are at an angle to the major axis of some fibers in another layer,
    and the corresponding products.


CLS 162/132
TXT Processes under subclass 123 in which a web or sheet is deposited on each
    of a plurality of separate forming means and subsequently united after
    substantial felting of each web or sheet has taken place.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes processes in which a plurality of
    separately formed webs are united while one of the webs is still in contact
    with its forming means, as well as those in which pressure rolls,
    momentarily in contact with the work, effect association of the webs.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not take products.  For products of
    processes classifiable in this subclass, see the appropriate one of
    subclasses 123+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123     through 131, for processes of producing multilayer waterlaid webs
    or sheets involving the use of a single forming means, or in which a second
    layer is waterlaid in situ directly on the surface of a previously formed
    layer, and for products formed by processes classified in this or indented
    subclasses (132+).

    300+,   for apparatus for carrying out processes classified in this or
    indented subclass.


CLS 162/133
TXT Processes under subclass 132 in which the separately formed webs or sheets
    are brought into association while at least one of them is supported by a
    member, other than a forming mold, which moves bodily with the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304,    for apparatus for carrying out the processes of this subclass (133).


CLS 162/134
TXT Processes under subclass 100 including a treatment of the web or sheet
    which provides it with a surface having one or more areas which are
    different from other areas in coloring or appearance and the resulting
    products.

    (1)     Note.  The treatment may take the form of agitation of a web at
    some stage of its formation, or a specialized coating operation, such as
    printing or the addition of a medium which provides a mottled or marbled
    effect.  The coating may be in the form of flakes, granules or fibers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123+,   for the formation of a multilayered web, one layer of which bears
    printing or variegated coloring on a surface.


CLS 162/135
TXT Processes under subclass 100 combined with a step of coating the deposited
    product after it has been substantially freed of the water derived from a
    paper making operation.

    (1)     Note.  The use of water alone as a moistening or humidifying medium
    on a dry sheet or web is not regarded as coating for the purpose of this
    group of subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158+,   particularly subclasses 184+, for processes of coating a web or
    sheet while it is still wet from a waterlaying operation.

    225,    for processes of board making involving moistening or
    rehumidification.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 567 for a paper web or sheet impregnated
    with a defined liquid dielectric composition.


CLS 162/136
TXT Processes under subclass 135 which include some treatment of the coating
    after application thereof to the formed paper product.

    (1)     Note.  For the purposes of classification broad references to
    drying or calendering of the coating are not regarded sufficient to cause
    classification in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 331+ for coating combined with a
    post-treatment of the coating.


CLS 162/137
TXT Processes under subclass 135 which include the application of a plurality
    of layers of dissimilar coating materials.


CLS 162/138
TXT Processes under subclass 100 for producing a product having specified
    electrical or magnetic properties, and the resulting products.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 567 for a paper web or sheet impregnated
    with a defined liquid dielectric composition.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process, subclasses 129+ and 247+ for separators combined with battery
    structure and separators, per se, respectively.


CLS 162/139
TXT Processes under subclass 100 for producing paper disclosed as being
    suitable for use as the outer covering of a cigarette or cigar, and
    products thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 365 for paper, intended for use as a covering for
    cigars or cigarettes, which contains tobacco and for cigarette or cigar
    paper of specified shape or structure specializing it for this use.


CLS 162/140
TXT Processes under subclass 100 for making (1) a product of such specialized
    structure as to enable one to identify the source or maker thereof or to
    detect attempts to reproduce such structure by unauthorized persons or (2)
    a product of such character that attempts to alter its appearance can be
    detected by visual or other type of sensing means; and resulting products.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of the type of paper forming the basis of this
    subclass are: various forms of paper produced by the Government such as
    currency, bonds, stamps, visas, and financial instruments such as checks,
    and bank notes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 199 for a stock
    material product which has a developable image or soluble portions which
    indicate when alterations are attempted, and subclass 916 (a
    cross-reference art collection) for a product which indicates attempts at
    tampering therewith.


CLS 162/141
TXT Processes under subclass 100 involving the deposition of fibers from a
    liquid suspension containing a plurality of different types of fibers, so
    as to form a single layer (web or article) in which the different fibers
    are homogeneously distributed, and the resulting products.

    (1)     Note.  Different types of fibers must be deposited to form the
    product to justify classification of processes and products in this or
    indented subclass. Thus, this group excludes processes of treating a slurry
    of two types of fibers in such a way that one type is gelatinized to the
    point where it completely loses its fibrous nature.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass (141) contains processes of forming pulps or
    paper products from mixtures of pulps from different wood sources, as well
    as pulps derived from different chemical treatments of the same or
    different woods, e.g., a mixture of kraft and sulfite pulps.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass includes the products under "E." of the class
    definition of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188,    for processes of producing a web or article having a nonuniform
    distribution of mixed fibers, and the resulting products, as where coarse
    fibers are concentrated at one portion, and fine fibers at another, with or
    without a gradual transition in respective fiber content at intermediate
    points.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses, for
    a fiber or fiber containing single or plural layer stock material product
    with either internal structure (e.g., crimped fiber), or external structure
    (e.g., corrugated sheet), where the sole disclosed method of manufacture is
    some process (e.g., air-laying), other than a process of fiber deposition
    from a liquid suspension.


CLS 162/142
TXT Processes and products under subclass 141 in which one of the fibrous
    components is undigested cellulosic fiber, such as groundwood or sawdust.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for processes involving the chemical liberation or purification of
    groundwood or sawdust.

    150,    for processes and products in which undigested cellulosic fibers
    constitute the sole fibrous component.


CLS 162/143
TXT Processes and products under subclass 141 in which one of the fibrous
    components is proteinaceous or are fibers of animal origin.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151,    for processes and products in which animal or proteinaceous fibers
    constitute the sole fibrous material.


CLS 162/144
TXT Processes and products under subclass 143 which include leather fibers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151,    for processes and products in which leather fibers constitute the
    sole fibrous material.


CLS 162/145
TXT Processes and products under subclass 141 in which one of the fibrous
    components is mineral in origin.

    (1)     Note.  The mineral fibers most frequently used are asbestos and
    glass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152+,   for processes and products in which mineral fibers constitute the
    sole fibrous material.


CLS 162/146
TXT Processes and products under subclass 141 in which one of the fibrous
    components comprise synthetically produced fibers.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of synthetic fibers are synthetic resins, cellulose
    esters and chemically modified cellulosic fibers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157.1,  for processes and products in which synthetic fibers constitute the
    sole fibrous material.


CLS 162/147
TXT Processes and products under subclass 141 in which one of the fibrous
    components comprises fabric, rags, or previously used rags.

    (1)     Note.  For the purpose of this subclass, broke, trim and wet lap
    are not regarded as waste paper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4+,     for processes for chemically liberating or purifying fiber from
    textile wastes, waste paper, etc.

    191+,   for processes of recovering pulp, in the form of broke, trim or wet
    lap.


CLS 162/148
TXT Process and products under subclass 141 in which one fibrous component
    comprises fibers from a nonwood source.

    (1)     Note.  Cotton, bagasse, straw and flax are examples of nonwood
    fibers found in this subclass.


CLS 162/149
TXT Processes and products under subclass 141 in which the fibrous component
    differ from each other in dimension.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188,    for processes of producing a web or sheet having a nonuniform
    distribution of fibers of different dimensions, and the resulting products,
    as where coarse fibers are concentrated at one portion, and fine fibers at
    another, with or without a gradual transition in respective fiber content
    at intermediate points.


CLS 162/150
TXT Processes and products under subclass 100 which include undigested
    cellulose, such as groundwood or sawdust.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes the products under "E." of the class
    definition of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142,    for processes and products which include undigested cellulose fiber
    mixed with a different fiber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses, for
    a fiber or fiber containing single or plural layer stock material product
    with either internal structure (e.g., crimped fiber), or external structure
    (e.g., corrugated sheet), where the sole disclosed method of manufacture is
    some process (e.g., air-laying), other than a process of fiber deposition
    from a liquid suspension.


CLS 162/151
TXT Processes and products under subclass 100 which include proteinaceous
    fibers or fibers of animal origin.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes the products under "E." of the class
    definition of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for processes of chemically liberating or purifying animal fibers.

    143+,   for processes and products containing animal or proteinaceous
    fibers mixed with a different fiber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses, for
    a fiber or fiber containing single or plural layer stock material product
    with either internal structure (e.g., crimped fiber), or external structure
    (e.g., corrugated sheet), where the sole disclosed method of manufacture is
    some process (e.g., air-laying), other than a process of fiber deposition
    from a liquid suspension.


CLS 162/152
TXT Processes and products under subclass 100 which contain mineral fibers.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes the products under "E." of the class
    definition of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for processes of chemically liberating or purifying mineral fibers.

    145,    for processes and products containing mineral fibers mixed with a
    different fiber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 110 for forming articles by uniting randomly associated particles
    of mica.

    428,    Stock Material Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses, for
    a fiber or fiber containing single or plural layer stock material product
    with either internal structure (e.g., crimped fiber), or external structure
    (e.g., corrugated sheet), where the sole disclosed method of manufacture is
    some process (e.g., air-laying), other than a process of fiber deposition
    from a liquid suspension.


CLS 162/153
TXT Processes and products under subclass 152 which include asbestos fiber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses dealing with asbestos.


CLS 162/154
TXT Processes and products under subclass 153 in which Portland cement is
    associated with asbestos.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclass 703 for plastic or
    coating compositions, not deposited from a suspension, which include
    Portland cement and a fibrous filler, (e.g., asbestos).


CLS 162/155
TXT Processes and products under subclass 153 which include an organic material
    in addition to asbestos.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145,    for processes and products which include a mixture of asbestos and
    an organic fibrous material.


CLS 162/156
TXT Processes and products under subclass 152 which include glass fibers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 2+ for a process of making glass
    fibers or mineral wool.


CLS 162/157.1
TXT Synthetic fiber (including chemically modified cellulose):

    Processes and products under subclass 100 which include synthetically
    produced fibers or chemically modified natural fibers.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes the formation of felted products from
    such fibers as regenerated cellulose, cellulose ethers and esters,
    synthetic resins, and wool-like cellulosic fibers, as well as such
    formation combined with the synthetic production or chemical modification
    of the fibers, in any sequence.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes the products under "E." of the class
    definition of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146,    for processes and products which include such synthetic fibers in
    admixture with other fibers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses, for
    a fiber or fiber containing single or plural layer stock material product
    with either internal structure (e.g., crimped fiber), or external structure
    (e.g., corrigated sheet), where the sole disclosed method of manufacture is
    some process (e.g., air-laying), other than a process of fiber deposition
    from a liquid suspension.


CLS 162/157.2
TXT Synthetic resin:

    Processes and products under subclass 157.1 in which the fibers consist of
    synthetic resin, that is, complex organic compounds produced from
    ingredients which are nonresinous in themselves and which compounds
    simulate natural resins in that they are usually adapted for forming films
    or fibers or for use as binders in plastic compositions.

    (1)     Note.  Fibers which are primarily carbohydrates or derivatives
    thereof are excluded from this subclass or subclasses indented hereunder.


CLS 162/157.3
TXT Polyamide, polyester or polyurethane:

    Processes and products under subclass 157.2 in which the fibers consist of
    synthetic resin containing recurring amides, ester or carbonic acid half
    amides, half ester, i.e., urethane groups in the main polymer chain.


CLS 162/157.4
TXT Polymerized unsaturated compound:

    Processes and products under subclass 157.2 in which the fibers consist of
    an addition polymer through carbon to carbon unsaturation, i.e., a double
    or triple bond linking two adjacent carbon atoms.


CLS 162/157.5
TXT Hydrocarbon or halohydrocarbon:

    Processes and products under subclass 157.4 in which the fibers are carbon
    to carbon unsaturated compounds containing only carbon and hydrogen or
    carbon, hydrogen and halogen.


CLS 162/157.6
TXT Cellulosic:

    Processes and products under subclass 157.1 in which the fibers consist of
    cellulosic material.


CLS 162/157.7
TXT Regenerated cellulose, viscose or rayon:

    Processes and products under subclass 157.6 in which the cellulosic fibers
    include regenerated cellulose, viscose or rayon.


CLS 162/158
TXT Processes and products under subclass 100 in which a nonfibrous material,
    other than the suspending water is added, either to the fibrous material
    prior to deposition, or to the deposited fibrous product prior to the final
    drying thereof, and the fibrous products so produced.

    (1)     Note.  The added material need not remain in the ultimate product,
    but may be merely transitory.  Processes and products are, in general,
    classified in this and indented subclasses on the basis of the particular
    additive, subclass 183 providing for processes which involve some
    particular manipulation of incorporation (many by way of cross references).

    (2)     Note.  The scope of indented subclasses providing for particular
    additives is determined by the definition of the class or subclass
    providing for the particular additive, per se, e.g., Classes 23, Chemistry:
     Physical Processes and 260, Chemistry of Carbon Compounds.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass includes the products under "E." of the class
    definition of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10+,    for processes of chemically liberating or purifying fiber combined
    with incorporating a nonfiber material in the final product.

    135+,   for processes of forming a fibrous web combined with incorporating
    a nonfiber material after final drying of the fibrous web or article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for a coated, impregnated, or bonded stock material product, not elsewhere
    provided for, and appropriate subclasses for a fiber or fiber containing
    single or plural layers stock material product with either internal
    structure (e.g., crimped fiber) or external structured (e.g., corrugated or
    pleated) where the sole disclosed method of manufacture is some process
    (e.g., air-laying) other than a process of fiber deposition from a liquid
    suspension.


CLS 162/159
TXT Processes and products under subclass 158 in which the additive renders the
    final fibrous product fireproof.

    (1)     Note.  Patents are placed in this subclass only when the additive
    has the specific effect of imparting fireproof qualities.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 15.05+ for
    fireproofing coating compositions.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 601+ for fire retarding agents.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 921 for an art
    collection of flameproof products.


CLS 162/160
TXT Processes and products under subclass 158 which include a nonfiber additive
    which acts as a preservative for the paper or is an agent for preventing
    oxidation.

    (1)     Note.  Processes and products which preserve paper merely by
    exclusion of the atmosphere are not included, such processes and products
    are usually classified on the basis of the identity of the nonfiber
    additive.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 380+ for preservative agents.

    426,    Foods and Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 138, 178+, for food products having antioxidants and subclass
    228, for a food antioxidant, per se.


CLS 162/161
TXT Processes and products under subclass 160 in which the additive has the
    affect of destroying living plants or animals, (e.g., a poison).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 15.05+ for biocidal
    and antifouling coating compositions.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclass for a composition for destroying an animal or micro-organism,
    i.e., a biocidal composition.  See especially subclasses 27+ for a paper
    base (carrier or vehicle) coated or impregnated with a composition of that
    class.

    504,    Plant Protecting and Regulating Compositions, subclasses 116+ for a
    composition for destroying plant life (including algae), especially
    subclasses 150+ for processes of killing algae, which may be part of a
    slime material,  which are no more involved than the mere addition of a
    compound or composition to the slime material.


CLS 162/162
TXT Processes and products under subclass 158 including the addition to the
    fibers of (1) a dye, or (2) a pigment or chemical agent which produces a
    color in the product other than white.

    (1)     Note.  If a "pigment" is claimed, there must be a positive
    disclosure that the product has a color other than white, in order to
    justify inclusion of a process or product in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126,    for processes of producing a multilayered web or sheet in which the
    layers have different colors and products thereof.

    181.1   for processes and products which include a pigment such as calcium
    carbonate, titanium dioxide, etc., which impart a white color.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, see subclasses 400-696 for processes of dyeing
    finished dry paper.


CLS 162/163
TXT Processes and products under subclass 158 in which the additive is derived
    in whole or in part from the fibers being treated.

    (1)     Note.  The nonfiber material may be extracted from the raw
    fiber-containing material and later added to the same batch of material
    from which it was derived, or to a different batch.  The nonfiber material
    may also be the reaction product of an original constituent of the plant,
    such as a gum, wax, resin, lignin, etc., and an externally applied reagent.
     It may also be present as the result of redistribution within the fiber,
    as where it is desired to have the constituent uniformly distributed within
    the fiber.

    (2)     Note.  The fact that the fiber present in a process or product
    claimed is identified as "lignocellulose" is not, by itself, a sufficient
    basis for classification in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for processes involving the steps of chemical liberation or
    purification, and adding to or retaining with the fibers, a nonfiber
    material of the type provided for in subclass 163.


CLS 162/164.1
TXT Synthetic resin:

    Subject matter under subclass 158 including a so-called synthetic resin,
    that is, complex organic compounds resembling natural resins prepared from
    nonresinous ingredients.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, particularly Classes 523 and
    524 for synthetic resin or natural rubber composition which is not
    deposited from a liquid suspension.


CLS 162/164.2
TXT Ion exchange resin or molecular sieve:

    Subject matter under subclass 164.1 wherein the synthetic resin is a
    cross-linked polymer carrying acid or basic groups which may be chemically
    reacted to substitute therefor anions or cations from other substances of
    opposite polarities, or substances such as some zeolites having channels
    within their structure large enough to admit small molecules such as water,
    but not large enough to admit larger molecules of the order of the size of
    benzene.


CLS 162/164.3
TXT Epoxy containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 164.1 wherein the synthetic resin is made in
    part from a reactant having a                 group.

    (1)     Note.  Typical disclosures classified herein recite as one of the
    resin forming reactants as epihalohydrin, such as epichlorohydrin.


CLS 162/164.4
TXT Silicon containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 164.1 wherein the synthetic resin molecules
    include the element silicon.

    (1)     Note.  Typical resins included in claims for this subclass are
    (e.g., silicones, siloxanes, etc.).


CLS 162/164.5
TXT Sulfur containing:

    Subject matter under 164.1 wherein the synthetic resin molecules include
    the element sulfur.

    (1)     Note.  The synthetic resin may be, e.g., a polysulfonium resin, etc.


CLS 162/164.6
TXT Nitrogen containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 164.1 wherein the synthetic resin molecules
    include the element nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  The synthetic resin may be, e.g., polyamide, a polyamine, a
    polyimine, etc.


CLS 162/164.7
TXT Ester type:

    Subject matter under subclass 164.1 wherein the synthetic resin is the
    reaction product of an alcohol or phenol and an organic acid.

    (1)     Note.  The synthetic resin may be e.g., vinyl acetate, an acrylate,
    a reaction product of a polyhdroxy alcohol, and a polybasic acid (such as
    the alkyd resins), etc.


CLS 162/165
TXT Processes and products under subclass 164 including a phenol-aldehyde
    reaction product resin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, particularly Classes 523 and
    524 for a synthetic resin composition which is not deposited from a liquid
    suspension.


CLS 162/166
TXT Processes and products under subclass 164 including an amine- or
    amide-aldehyde reaction product resin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, particularly Classes 523 and
    524 for a synthetic resin composition which is not deposited from a liquid
    suspension.


CLS 162/167
TXT Processes and products under subclass 166 in which the resin is prepared or
    is reacted with an organic material other than the amine or amide and
    aldehyde.


CLS 162/168.1
TXT Polymerized unsaturated compound:

    Processes and products under subclass 164.1 in which the resin has been
    prepared by polymerization of an ethylenically unsaturated organic compound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, subclass 17.4 for compositions
    including polymerized unsaturated resins and cellulose which have not been
    deposited from liquid suspension.


CLS 162/168.2
TXT Nitrogen containing compound:

    Processes under subclass 168.1 in which the unsaturated compound contains
    at least one atom of nitrogen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164.6,  for similar processes wherein the nitrogen containing compound is
    not ethylenically unsaturated.

    166+,   for similar processes wherein the nitrogen containing compound is
    an amine, or amide-aldehyde.


CLS 162/168.3
TXT Acrylamide containing:

    Processes under subclass 168.2 in which the nitrogen containing compound is
    an amide of acrylic acid, or of an analogue of acrylic acid.

    (1)     Note.  The nitrogen containing compound may be, e.g.,
    methacrylamide, etc.


CLS 162/168.4
TXT Heterocyclic N or S or epoxy component:

    Subject matter under subclass 168.3 wherein one component of the polymer
    contains a heterocylic nitrogen or sulfur containing group or an epoxy
    group.


CLS 162/168.5
TXT Heterocyclic N or S epoxy component:
    Subject matter under subclass 168.2 wherein one component of the polymer
    contains a heterocyclic nitrogen or sulfur containing group or an epoxy
        group.


CLS 162/168.6
TXT Hetero S or epoxy component:

    Subject matter under subclass 168.1 wherein the unsaturated monomer
    contains a heterocyclic sulfur containing group, or an epoxy  group.


CLS 162/168.7
TXT Ester type:

    Subject matter under subclass 168.1 wherein the unsaturated monomer is the
    reaction product of an alcohol, or a phenol with an acid.


CLS 162/169
TXT Processes and products under subclass 168.1 in which the unsaturated
    compound (monomer) which is polymerized has more than one ethylene type
    bond, e.g., butadiene.


CLS 162/170
TXT Processes and products under subclass 158 which include a natural
    hydrocarbon gum (rubber).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, particularly Class 524,
    subclasses 13 and 35+ for a rubber composition containing celluslose and
    which is not deposited from a liquid suspension.


CLS 162/171
TXT Processes and products under subclass 158 which include a bituminous
    material such as asphalt, tar, tarry residues, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, particularly subclasses 164.12,
    164.6, 166.7, 169.54, 170.56, and 196.1 for compositions comprising
    cellulose and bituminous material which are not deposited from a liquid
    suspension.


CLS 162/172
TXT Processes and products under subclass 158 which include a wax.

    (1)     Note.  The wax may be either an ester type wax, e.g., beeswax or a
    hydrocarbon wax, e.g., paraffin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 164.42, 166.51,
    166.7, 169.21, 169.54, 170.56, 196.1, and 203.3 for composition comprising
    cellulose and wax which are not deposited from a liquid suspension.


CLS 162/173
TXT Processes and products under subclass 158 which include a hydrocarbon.


CLS 162/174
TXT Processes and products under subclass 158 which include a nonfibrous
    proteinaceous material.

    (1)     Note.  Cereal flours, such as corn, oat, wheat, etc., are
    proteinaceous material for purposes of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143+,   for processes and products including cellulose and a fibrous
    proteinaceous material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 126.3, and 136.1+ for
    compositions including a protein and cellulose which are not deposited from
    liquid suspension.


CLS 162/175
TXT Processes and products under subclass 158 in which the additive is a
    carbohydrate.


CLS 162/176
TXT Processes and products under subclass 175 which include, as the additive,
    cellulose in a nonfibrous form.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of nonfibrous cellulose are regenerated cellulose
    and cork.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141+,   for processes and products which include a mixture of two or more
    types of fibrous cellulose.


CLS 162/177
TXT Processes and products under subclass 175 which include a nonfibrous
    cellulose derivative, such as a cellulose ether or ester.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146     and 157.1, for processes and products including chemically modified
    cellulosic fibers or synthetic cellulose derivative fibers.


CLS 162/178
TXT Processes and products under subclass 175 which include a carbohydrate gum,
    e.g., gum tragacanth.


CLS 162/179
TXT Processes and products under subclass 158 which include a fat, fatty oil,
    or higher fatty acid.

    (1)     Note.  A higher fatty acid is a monocarboxylic acid containing an
    unbroken chain of at least seven carbon atoms bonded to the carboxylic
    group, e.g., lauric, palmitic stearic, etc. Fats and fatty oils are
    glycerides of higher fatty acids including naturally occurring mixtures
    thereof.  This subclass includes those derivatives or modifications of
    these substances as do not involve the destruction of the carboxylic group
    and also those modifications which involve the conversion of the carboxylic
    group into derivatives which upon hydrolysis reverts to a carboxylic group,
    e.g., salts, esters, amides, acid halides, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 164.11, 164.43,
    169.22, 169.26+, 170.23+, and 179.1 for compositions including cellulose
    and a fat, fatty oil, higher fatty acid or salt which are not deposited
    from a liquid suspension.


CLS 162/180
TXT Processes and products under subclass 158 which include a natural resin or
    derivative thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the patents in this subclass include rosin or rosin
    soap sizing for the paper.  Merely stating that the paper is "sized" is
    insufficient to cause classification herein unless it positively appears
    that a natural resin is employed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 137.5, 164.41+,
    166.51, 169.18+, 170.21, 178.1, and 203.3 for compositions including a
    natural resin or derivative thereof and cellulose which are not deposited
    from a liquid suspension.


CLS 162/181.1
TXT Inorganic:

    Processes and products under subclass 158 which include an inorganic
    nonfibrous material, other than water.

    (1)     Note.  Many patent in this subclass are directed to processes and
    products which include a filler.  Mere recitation of a filler broadly
    without identifying the material is not enough to cause classification
    herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162,    for processes and products including an inorganic filler or pigment
    which imparts a color other than white to the product.


CLS 162/181.2
TXT Metal salt other than silicate:

    Subject matter under subclass 181.1 comprising a metal salt other than a
    salt of silicic acid.


CLS 162/181.3
TXT Sulfate or sulfite:

    Subject matter under subclass 181.2 wherein the salt is a salt of H2SO4 or
    H2SO3.


CLS 162/181.4
TXT Metal oxide or hydroxide:

    Subject matter under subclass 181.1 comprising a binary compound of oxygen
    and a metallic element or a metallic element connected to an -OH group.


CLS 162/181.5
TXT Metal other than alkali metal, magnesium, or alkaline earth metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 181.4 wherein the metal is not a Group IA
    metal nor Mg, Ca, Sr, or Ba.


CLS 162/181.6
TXT Silicon containing additive other than clay:

    Subject matter under subclass 181.1 comprising a silicon containing
    substance other than those substances considered to be clays.


CLS 162/181.7
TXT Alkai metal silicate:

    Subject matter under subclass 181.6 wherein the silicon containing
    substance comprises lithium, sodium, potassium, rubidium or cesium silicate.


CLS 162/181.8
TXT Clay:

    Subject matter under subclass 181.1 wherein the inorganic substance
    comprises any substance considered to be a clay.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary in the main class definition of Class 501,
    Compositions:  Ceramic, for the definition of the term clay.


CLS 162/181.9
TXT Free metal or free carbon containing:
    Subject matter under subclass 181.1 comprising a metal or carbon in
    elemental form.


CLS 162/182
TXT Processes under subclass 158 including a treatment of fibers prior to
    addition of a nonfibrous medium to a fibrous slurry, which so conditions
    the fibers that the medium will coat or impregnate them upon addition to
    the slurry.

    (1)     Note.  The treating agent usually imparts to the fiber an
    electrostatic charge opposite in polarity to that of the coating medium.

    (2)     Note.  The processes of this subclass are to be distinguished from
    coating of fibers by adding a precipitating agent to a fiber slurry after
    the nonfibrous coating medium has been associated with the slurry.

    (3)     Note.  Most of the patents in this subclass are cross references
    from subclasses 158 through 181, since in processes of the type under
    consideration, the nonfiber additive is usually specifically identified in
    the claims.


CLS 162/183
TXT Processes under subclass 158 which are drawn to a particular manipulative
    procedure of adding a nonfibrous material to pulp or a wet web, sheet or
    article.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclass are intended to be the collecting
    place for disclosures of particular manipulative procedures for
    incorporating a nonfibrous additive with the fibers during manufacture of
    fibrous webs or articles which procedures are or appear of general
    application to various types of additives.  Since most processes
    specifically identify the additive which is generally provided for in a
    prior subclass, many of the patents herein are cross references from
    previous subclasses, particularly subclasses 159 to 181.


CLS 162/184
TXT Processes under subclass 183 in which the nonfibrous material is added to a
    formed web or article after it has been deposited from the liquid
    suspension.

    (1)     Note.  The nonfibrous material may be added to the web before or
    after removal of the web or article from the forming means but must be
    prior to final drying.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for processes reciting chemical liberation or purification of
    cellulosic material followed by adding nonfibrous material to a web formed
    therefrom.

    135+,   for processes in which the web or article forming step is combined
    with the addition of a nonfibrous material after final drying.


CLS 162/185
TXT Processes under subclass 184 in which a portion of the nonfiber material
    additive is added to the fibrous material before the material is deposited
    from the liquid suspension.


CLS 162/186
TXT Processes under subclass 184 in which the nonfibrous material is added to
    the deposited web or article while it is still on the forming mold.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes the addition of nonfibrous material
    to wet fibrous material on the forming means, at any time after its initial
    contact therewith.


CLS 162/187
TXT Processes and products under subclass 100 in which the cellulosic fibers
    are chemically or physicochemically united with water to produce a hydrated
    or partially gelatinized fiber.

    (1)     Note.  The water is usually associated with the fibers by being
    agitated therewith, as in a beater or Jordan. The fibers may also be
    subjected to mechanical comminution simultaneously with the hydration.  In
    all processes in which fibers are treated in suspension or in the presence
    of water some hydration may take place. Processes of this character are not
    classified herein unless the hydration or gelatinization is distinctly
    disclosed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, subclass 37 for the hydrolysis of
    cellulose in the manufacture of other carbohydrates.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses, for processes for shaping or molding plastic
    materials within the class definition, which may involve gelatinization of
    a web or body so as to destroy the fibrous or felted nature thereof.  See
    the class definition of this class (162), sections III and IV, in the
    reference to Class 264, under "SEARCH CLASS".


CLS 162/188
TXT Processes and products under subclass 100 characterized by a difference in
    some property of the fibers between two portions of the interior or between
    a portion of the interior and a portion of the surface.

    (1)     Note.  The product must have been by a single waterlaying
    operation.  The nonuniform internal structure may be produced during
    waterlaying or by a subsequent operation.

    (2)     Note.  The most frequent types of nonuniformity encountered are
    differences in fiber orientation, fiber size, density, and amount of
    additive associated with the fibers at different portions of the thickness
    of the product.


CLS 162/189
TXT Processes under subclass 100 including a step of recovering for reuse some
    material used in the fiber deposition, or portions of the deposited product.


CLS 162/190
TXT Processes under subclass 189 involving the recovery of the aqueous fiber
    suspending medium (white water) for reuse in a subsequent fiber deposition
    or other paper making step.


CLS 162/191
TXT Processes under subclass 189 in which all or part of a body of uncured
    deposited fibrous material is recovered for reuse in a paper making
    operation usually the waste or trimmings from the formed web.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4+,     for processes of recovering paper waste which include a step of
    chemically digesting or purifying the fibrous material.


CLS 162/192
TXT Processes under subclass 100 including the step of treating the material
    directly with electrical, radiant or wave energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     for other processes for treating fibrous material with electrical
    or wave energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 620 for coating apparatus utilizing
    electrical or wave energy, and see especially the Notes thereto for the
    locus of other patents relating to this step.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 689+ for electrolytic treatment of
    organic fibrous material.


CLS 162/193
TXT Processes under subclass 100 including a step of facilitating the handling
    of a web of fibrous material by forming a narrow tongue-like portion on the
    leading end of the web or including the manipulation of such narrow tongue
    like portion through the paper making or treating device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255,    for apparatus having means automatically forming a lead strip.

    286,    for cutting means forming a lead strip.


CLS 162/194
TXT Processes under subclass 100 including a step of severing, cutting or
    slitting the fibrous product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286,    for apparatus there provided for including means to sever the
    fibrous body, and see especially the notes thereto for the locus of other
    art relating to the severing, per se, of fibrous bodies.


CLS 162/195
TXT Processes under subclass 194 in which the severing operation occurs because
    of the action of a thin fluid jet on the product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286,    for apparatus including a fluid jet for severing or slitting.


CLS 162/196
TXT Processes under subclass 100 in which the deposited web or article, is
    subjected to a folding, twisting or rolling prior to the final drying
    thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The process may include a step of unfolding, untwisting or
    unrolling, so that the web or sheet is returned to its original
    configuration but with modified properties.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118+,   for processes in which the web is wound upon itself during
    deposition so as to form a plurality of united layers.

    123+,   for processes of folding a single web or sheet into one or more
    folds, so as to produce a structure having at least two superposed layers
    united so as to form a multilayered product.


CLS 162/197
TXT Processes under subclass 100 including a step of distorting the product by
    stretching, subjecting a product to tensile force, repeatedly bending a
    product to physically modify the product without altering its shape, or
    restoring a distorted normally planar sheet to its original planar
    configuration by a mechanical shaping step.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270,    for apparatus performing similar functions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for stretching, stressing, shaping and deforming
    steps combined with laminating.  See particularly subclasses 160+, 196+ and
    229.


CLS 162/198
TXT Processes under subclass 100 combined with a step of subjecting the product
    (1) to a quantitative determinative, (2) to a visual inspection, or (3) to
    a testing procedure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for processes of fiber treatment there provided for combined with a
    testing, sampling or analyzing step, and see Notes thereto for the locus of
    patents relative to testing, per se.

    263,    for paper making apparatus combined with measuring or testing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    64 for methods of measuring, testing or inspecting, in combination with a
    laminating step.


CLS 162/199
TXT Processes under subclass 100 including a step of preparing the apparatus
    for the paper making operation or of placing it in better condition to
    perform its function or of removing undesirable residue of the paper making
    operation, from the apparatus, not otherwise provided for.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses,
    for cleaning processes not otherwise provided for.


CLS 162/200
TXT Processes under subclass 199 including a step of removing or inserting an
    endless foraminous forming surface or wire from or into a paper making
    apparatus.


CLS 162/201
TXT Processes under subclass 100 combined with a step of treating the fibrous
    material either before or after deposition not otherwise provided for.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes combinations of waterlaying with such
    operations, not provided for in this class, as mechanical comminution of
    solids (Class 241, Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration), and
    adhesively bonding the waterlaid product to a solid preform which bonding
    operation, per se, is classified in Class 156, Adhesive Bonding and
    Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture.


CLS 162/202
TXT Processes under subclass 100 peculiarly adapted to the production and/or
    treatment of endless fibrous webs.

    (1)     Note.  In this and the indented subclasses may be found (1)
    processes for producing a fibrous web from a water slurry, (2) certain
    processes not elsewhere provided for, treating a fibrous waterlaid web
    either during or after manufacture of the web, and (3) combinations of (1)
    and (2) above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218+,   for processes producing or treating discrete articles as
    distinguished from endless webs.

    289,    for paper making apparatus producing and/or treating a running
    length product.


CLS 162/203
TXT Processes under subclass 202 in which a unitary fibrous web is produced by
    continuously introducing slurry between separate face-to-face foraminous
    molds whereby formation and interfelting of the fibers occurs at both faces
    of the web.

    (1)     Note.  Merely treating a web while still on the mold surface by
    pressure means or even by means of a suction couch roll to further dewater
    the formed web is not here classified, being rather in subclass 208.  To be
    here classified the slurry must be in such condition, when contacted by
    both mold surfaces, that the fibers are still in suspension and felting
    occurs on both mold faces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208+,   and see (1) Note above.

    300+,   for paper making apparatus having plural molds.


CLS 162/204
TXT Processes under subclass 202 in which an interfelted fibrous web is
    subjected to a treatment step after removal from the mold surface on which
    it was formed either before or after final drying.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this and the indented subclasses are various
    treatments, per se, of a completely formed web not provided for in other
    classes.  For example, calendering, per se, of dry paper may be found in
    subclass 205.

    (2)     Note.  Various subsequent treatments are set out in subclasses
    above and search must be made in those subclasses for the specific
    treatment.  Thus by way of example search must be made in subclass 109 for
    after treatments which result in the formation of a non- uniform irregular
    or configured web or sheet, subclass 135 for processes of coating paper
    after drying, subclass 192 for processes involving electrical or wave
    energy treatment, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109+,   135+ and 192, and see (2) Note above.

    305     and 361+, for apparatus for subsequently treating a formed paper
    web.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 90.1+ for processes for burnishing dry
    paper.


CLS 162/205
TXT Processes under subclass 204 in which the fibrous web is subjected to
    mechanical pressure by solid surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for processes involving subsequent treatment of paper by an
    irregular or configured die.

    305     and 361+, for apparatus for treating paper with solid press means.


CLS 162/206
TXT Processes under subclass 205 combined with a step of altering the
    temperature of the treated web.


CLS 162/207
TXT Processes under subclass 204 in which the subsequent treatment is that of
    altering the temperature of the formed web and/or directing a treating gas
    or vapor into association with the web.

    (1)     Note.  Mere delivery of the web into the ambient atmosphere is not
    considered to be gas or vapor contact for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224+,   for processes for heating discrete articles.

    290,    for paper making apparatus including heat exchange means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses
    for drying, per se, of fibrous webs, and see especially subclass 23 of that
    class for gas and vapor treatment of sheets, web or strands.


CLS 162/208
TXT Processes under subclass 202 in which the slurry on the foraminous mold
    surface is subjected to a treatment in addition to the mere expression of
    liquid from the slurry.

    (1)     Note.  In this and the indented subclasses may be found, for
    example, processes in which the slurry is vibrated to facilitate felting,
    subjected to pressure to aid dewatering, compacted, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for processes producing a watermarked paper.

    186,    for processes for applying a nonfibrous additive to the slurry on a
    mold surface.

    308,    for apparatus having means to treat the slurry on the mold surface.


CLS 162/209
TXT Processes under subclass 208 in which the slurry is subjected to shaking,
    the action of a reciprocating member, or some other agitating influence.

    (1)     Note.  The agitation is usually for the purpose of aiding
    interfelting of the fibers in the slurry.


CLS 162/210
TXT Processes under subclass 208 in which the slurry is subjected to pressure
    by means of a solid member acting thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109+,   for solid means acting on the slurry on the mold surface to produce
    an irregular web.

    312+,   for apparatus having a solid member treating the slurry on the mold
    surface.


CLS 162/211
TXT Processes under subclass 202 for forming an endless web by draining the
    suspending medium through a foraminous mold and controlling the rate of
    drainage of the medium.

    (1)     Note.  Mere regular application of suction is not sufficient for
    classification in this subclass.  See subclass 217 below for such subject
    matter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217,    and see (1) Note above.

    351,    for apparatus having means retarding or controlling drainage.


CLS 162/212
TXT Processes under subclass 202 including a step of bringing the pulp slurry
    into direct contact with a foraminous molding surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315,    for paper making apparatus having means directing the pulp slurry
    into contact with the mold surface.


CLS 162/213
TXT Processes under subclass 212 in which the pulp slurry is sprayed or
    directed against the mold surface in a stream while completely unsupported
    by confining means.

    (1)     Note.  The slurry may fall freely by gravity on the mold surface or
    may be projected under pressure but it is not channelized by head box or
    other similar structures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    292,    for apparatus in which the slurry is flung or projected against the
    mold surface.


CLS 162/214
TXT Processes under subclass 212 in which the slurry is applied to the mold
    surface under pressure greater than the normal hydrostatic head of the
    slurry on the mold surface.

    (1)     Note.  The increased pressure is usually achieved by utilizing a
    seal or gland between the mold and the stock supply conduit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    317,    for pressure forming apparatus.


CLS 162/215
TXT Processes under subclass 212 in which the slurry is applied to a traveling
    mold and is directed in a direction differing for the direction of travel
    of the mold.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324,    325 and 336+, for apparatus in which the stock is applied in
    directions other than the direction of travel of a moving mold.


CLS 162/216
TXT Processes under subclass 212 in which the slurry is subjected to a
    mechanical treatment directly before application to the mold surface.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found, for example, processes for
    rectifying the stock in the head box or subjecting it to mechanical
    vibration just before application to the mold.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208,    for processes for treating the stock on the mold surface.

    341,    for apparatus for treating the slurry in the head box or approach
    flow channel.


CLS 162/217
TXT Processes under subclass 202 in which is recited a step of applying reduced
    pressure to the side of the foraminous mold to aid drawing the suspending
    medium through the pores of the mold.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    297,    for apparatus applying suction directly to the slurry on the mold.

    335     and 354+, for porous molds combined with suction means.

    363+,   for suction devices, per se, adapted for use in making paper.


CLS 162/218
TXT Processes under subclass 100 involving depositing fibers on a surface so as
    to form a product of definite and limited dimensions and shape as
    distinguished from a web of a definite length.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses relate to forming articles by
    "pulp molding".

    (2)     Note.  Processes of this group of subclasses usually result in an
    article having a nonplanar configuration, but this is not necessary.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109+,   for processes of forming webs or sheets which are irregular in
    configuration, but which irregularity is not such as to destroy its
    essentially flat condition.

    231,    for articles, produced by a process classifiable in this or
    indented subclasses (218+) and not provided for elsewhere.

    382+,   for apparatus for carrying out the processes of this group of
    subclasses.


CLS 162/219
TXT Processes under subclass 218 in which fibers are deposited from suspensions
    thereof at a plurality of different times or locations.

    (1)     Note.  One of the component layers or units of the product may have
    been previously produced by a waterlaying operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103+,   for processes of producing a composite web, sheet or article, which
    includes at least one solid nonwaterlaid component.

    123+,   for processes of making composite webs or sheets from a plurality
    of waterlaid webs or sheets.


CLS 162/220
TXT Processes under subclass 218 in which a flexible diaphragm is brought into
    contact with the deposited fibrous material at some stage of formation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401+,   for pulp molding apparatus provided with a flexible diaphragm.


CLS 162/221
TXT Processes under subclass 218 including a treatment of a pulp molded article
    after removal from the forming means.


CLS 162/222
TXT Processes under subclass 221 including a step of altering the surface
    character of at least a portion of the article.

    (1)     Note.  The surface treatment of this subclass is to be
    distinguished from the subject matter of subclass 223, which involves a
    substantial change in the overall configuration of the article.  Such
    treatments as smoothing and elimination of mold parting lines and other
    mold configurations are among the surface treatments provided for in this
    subclass (222).


CLS 162/223
TXT Processes under subclass 221 including changing the shape or configuration
    imparted to the article by the original forming means, after removal
    therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for processes of treating a web with an irregular or configured die.

    224+,   for the treatment of a pulp molded article which does not change
    its general configuration but merely densities or decreases its thickness.


CLS 162/224
TXT Processes under subclass 221 including the application of heat and/or
    mechanical pressure to the article after removal from its original forming
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223,    for processes in which the pressure causes a change in overall
    configuration (other than mere decrease in thickness) of the article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses for processes under the class definition, for
    shaping or molding which may involve reshaping of a rewetted fibrous
    article.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, for shaping a dry paper article by means of dies, and
    see the notes to the class definition thereof.


CLS 162/225
TXT Processes under subclass 224 resulting in a product which is rectangular in
    a cross-section through its thickness.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the patents in this subclass involve the
    simultaneous treatment of a plurality of boards or sheets.


CLS 162/226
TXT Processes under subclass 218 which include a step of applying heat to
    fibrous material after waterlaying, but while it is still in contact with a
    forming surface.


CLS 162/227
TXT Processes under subclass 218 which include a step of applying mechanical
    pressure to fibrous material, while it is still in contact with a forming
    surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220,    for processes wherein the pressure is applied by means of a
    flexible diaphragm.


CLS 162/228
TXT Processes under subclass 218 in which a bulk supply of pulp suspension is
    brought into association with a forming means, the fibrous material being
    deposited on the surface thereof as by withdrawal of the suspending water,
    followed by the separation of the excess pulp from the forming means with
    the deposited fibrous material thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    387+,   for corresponding apparatus.


CLS 162/229
TXT Processes under subclass 228 including a step of vibrating the forming
    means, or the pulp slurry while it is in contact with the forming surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    380     and 385, for apparatus which includes means for effecting vibration
    of a slurry in a container.


CLS 162/230
TXT Processes under subclass 218 which include a step of separating the
    deposited fibrous article from its forming surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    410,    for apparatus for ejecting or removing a deposited fibrous article
    therefrom.


CLS 162/231
TXT Products under subclass 100 which are deposited fibrous articles having
    some significant structural shape or characteristic other than a web or
    sheet.

    (1)     Note.  The significant characteristic may be surface texture or
    configuration.  This subclass does not include articles of manufacture
    having structure which is classifiable in some class providing for that
    structure, even though it be made of deposited fibrous material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109+,   for nonuniform, irregular or configured sheets or webs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclass 169, for fibrous material acoustical diaphragms.


CLS 162/232
TXT Apparatus under the class definition relating to structures or mechanisms
    for producing and/or treating water or liquid laid fibrous products and
    various combinations of such structures with other structures or devices
    not elsewhere provided for and subcombinations, per se, not elsewhere
    provided for.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition of this class (Class 162) for the
    locus of other and similar apparatus for use in making and/or treating
    waterlaid fibrous webs and articles.


CLS 162/233
TXT Apparatus under subclass 232 comprising means for bringing and/or
    maintaining fiber containing stock material in intimate association with a
    chemical treating fluid for the purpose of at least partially liberating
    discrete fibers by destroying nonfibrous bonding material in the stock.

    (1)     Note.  To be classified in this and the indented subclasses, the
    structures must include more than a mere container in which the reaction
    occurs.  Thus, containers or receptacles of general utility, or having no
    structure limiting the device to a digester and various subcombinations of
    general utility are classified in other classes as set forth below under
    "SEARCH CLASS".  The presence of means introducing a treating fluid into
    the digester structure is sufficient structure for classification in this
    class (Class 162).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses for a
    residual in situ erected type material container, particularly subclasses
    192, 223.1+, 245+, 250+, and 261+.

    220,    Receptacles, appropriate subclasses for metallic receptacles with
    or without closure members and see the class definition of that class for
    the locus of analogous structures.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 285 and 307 for cookers and
    digesters other than those used for liberating or treating fibers.


CLS 162/234
TXT Apparatus under subclass 233 combined with means to physically disrupt the
    bond material causing adherence of fibers one to the other.

    (1)     Note.  The defibering means may act on the pulp stock before,
    during or after digestion.

    (2)     Note.  Apparatus for exploding or for impinging the material after
    digestion against a target is not considered to be mechanical defiberating
    means for this subclass.  For the locust of such devices see the search
    note below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247,    for devices in which defibering occurs by explosion or impingement
    of the material against a target after digestion.

    261,    for defibering means combined with paper making apparatus other
    than digesters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses for defibering means, per se.


CLS 162/235
TXT Combinations under subclass 234 in which the digester and defiberator
    operate on the material simultaneously and under the same conditions of
    temperature and pressure.

    (1)     Note.  The defiberating means in this combination may operate only
    part of the time.


CLS 162/236
TXT Apparatus under subclass 235 in which the stock material is fed to and
    discharged from a digester and defiberating apparatus at substantially the
    same rate, whereby a more or less steady flow of material is maintained.


CLS 162/237
TXT Devices under subclass 233 provided with means to charge and discharge the
    digester at substantially the same rate, whereby a more or less steady flow
    of material is maintained through the treating device.

    (1)     Note.  The devices of this subclass may be operated intermittently
    or with separate batches just so long as the material is fed in and
    discharged from the apparatus at approximately the same rate and during the
    same time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17+,    for processes for continuous digestion.


CLS 162/238
TXT Apparatus under subclass 233 having means sensing a condition in the
    material undergoing treatment or in the treating fluid or chemical and in
    response thereto causing a control operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252+,   for apparatus other than digestion devices having automatic control
    features and see the Notes thereto for the locus of other apparatus having
    automatic control features.


CLS 162/239
TXT Apparatus under subclass 233 provided with means to salvage or make
    available for reuse heat and/or products resulting from the digestion
    process.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found, for example, apparatus in
    which materials salvaged include chemicals used to liberate or free the
    fibrous materials, or in which means are provided to utilize excess thermal
    energy that would otherwise be lost in the digestion process.

    (2)     Note.  Mere recirculation of digestion materials through the same
    batch of material to be treated is not classified in the indented
    subclasses. For such subject matter search subclass 248 below.  Also, the
    recovery of used liquor or heat by passing it directly into another
    digester containing chips to be digested is not included here. For such
    subject matter see subclass 241 below and the Notes thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     for processes including a step of recovering the digestion fluid,
    and subclass 47 for digestion processes including a heat recovery step.

    241,    and see (2) Note, above.

    248,    and see (2) Note, above.


CLS 162/240
TXT Apparatus under subclass 239 having means to apply heat to the used
    chemicals to cause a change in the state or nature of the chemicals to
    render them fit for reuse.


CLS 162/241
TXT Apparatus under subclass 233 having two or more digesters in operational
    association.

    (1)     Note.  Patents disclosing plural completely independent digesters
    are not classified in this subclass.  To be here classified the patents
    must recite some structural interrelationship or interdependency.  For
    example, in this subclass may be found digesters with connections so that
    cooking gas or liquor may be passed directly from one into the other.

    (2)     Note.  Multiple digesters arranged so that the material to be
    treated flows serially from one to the other are not provided for in this
    subclass.  For such subject matter see subclasses 243 and 246.


CLS 162/242
TXT Apparatus under subclass 233 having means combined with or in addition to
    digester structures which means either perfects the operation of the
    digester or performs some function other than digestion.


CLS 162/243
TXT Apparatus under subclass 233 having means to maintain the stock material
    undergoing digestion in a state of motion.

    (1)     Note.  The circulation is usually for the purpose of insuring
    intimate contact of the material with the chemical treating agent.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes forced circulation of the material
    being digested, but does not include mere forced circulation of the
    digestion fluid through the material being digested.  For the latter
    subject matter see subclass 248 below.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass does not include circulation caused by heating
    alone. For such subject matter see subclass 250 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    234+,   for apparatus in which the circulating means causes substantial
    defibering of the stock material.

    248,    and see (2) Note above.

    250,    and see (3) Note above.


CLS 162/244
TXT Apparatus under subclass 243 in which the agitation is caused by motion of
    the digester structure about an axis of rotation.

    (1)     Note.  Mere tilting of the digester for discharge is not included
    in this subclass.  For such subject matter search subclass 246.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246,    and see (1) Note above.


CLS 162/245
TXT Apparatus under subclass 233 having means separable from the digester for
    either (1) containing a charge of material undergoing treatment or (2)
    constraining a charge from movement within the digester.


CLS 162/246
TXT Apparatus under subclass 233 in which the body of the digester structure is
    provided with means to permit the introduction of the stock material to be
    digested, or the delivery of the material after treatment within the
    digester.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for mere means to permit
    recirculation of either material treated or the chemical treated material
    even though the material may be removed bodily from the digester.  For such
    subject matter search subclass 248 below.

    (2)     Note.  The mere provision of an inlet opening in the digester
    structure either with or without a closure member is not sufficient to
    classify the patent in this subclass where the patent in the absence of
    such opening would be classified elsewhere.  Patents claiming this subject
    matter in the absence of other features classifiable here may be found in
    classes relating to vessels of general utility, such as Class 220,
    Receptacles, for example.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     for digestion processes including a step of charging and/or
    discharging the fibrous material.

    236     and 237, for means for charging and discharging continuous
    digesters.

    239+,   for discharging means combination with recovery means.

    241,    for digesters having means for discharging material into another
    digester.

    248,    and see (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, particularly subclasses 200+ and see (2) Note above.


CLS 162/247
TXT Apparatus under subclass 246 in which the stock material is treated by (1)
    projecting it violently from the digester against a fixed abutment or (2)
    the material is caused to disintegrate by suddenly releasing the digestion
    pressures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21+,    for digestion processes including a step of defibering by
    projection or explosion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverage:  Apparatus, subclasses 323.4+ see the Notes
    thereto for other apparatus for expanding or disintegrating material by a
    sudden release in pressure.


CLS 162/248
TXT Apparatus under subclass 233 having means to positively force the flow of
    digestion chemicals through the material being treated.

    (1)     Note.  The material is usually forced through a separate conduit,
    which conduit may be entirely in the digester or may be outside of the
    digester proper.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for circulation of the
    treating chemical or stock material within the digester by heating means
    alone where the circulation is not through the separate conduit or orifice
    such as, for example circulation caused by the introduction of steam alone.
     For such subject matter search subclass 250 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243+,   for apparatus in which the circulation is caused by mechanical
    stirring of the contents of the digester.

    250,    and see (2) Note above.


CLS 162/249
TXT Apparatus under subclass 248 having means to either maintain or cause a
    rise in temperature in either stock undergoing treatment or the treating
    chemical.

    (1)     Note.  The heating means may be in the circulating circuit or in
    the digester.


CLS 162/250
TXT Apparatus under subclass 233 provided with means to cause a rise in
    temperature of either the stock material or the chemical treating fluid.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass may be found for example, means
    discharging or introducing fluids through a heating steam line.


CLS 162/251
TXT Apparatus under subclass 233 having a foraminous screen at an outlet of the
    digester to retain stock material and permit the passage of fluid
    therethrough.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 505+ for flow line end coupled filter
    units and subclasses 301+ for cohesive filter media cleaning means.


CLS 162/252
TXT Apparatus under subclass 232 having means to sense a condition and in
    response thereto cause a control operation of the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238,    for digestion apparatus having automatic control features.


CLS 162/253
TXT Apparatus under subclass 252 in which the control is of more than a single
    device.


CLS 162/254
TXT Apparatus under subclass 252 in which the control is of a means preparing
    the stock for the forming operation.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found, for example, devices to sense
    the consistency of the stock and in response thereto control a refining
    device to vary the characteristics of the stock.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 33+ for
    fibrous material comminutors having automatic control features.


CLS 162/255
TXT Apparatus under subclass 252 in which the sensing means determines the
    continuity of the fibrous web or in which the control means causes the
    actuation of a device intercepting a rupture in the formed web and
    maintains continuity thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193,    for processes for forming and/or guiding the initial strip of web
    to be trained through the web forming or treating machine.


CLS 162/256
TXT Apparatus under subclass 252 in which the control means affects the rate of
    speed or direction of motion of a moving foraminous forming surface.


CLS 162/257
TXT Apparatus under subclass 256 in which the controlled motion of the
    foraminous forming surface is in a plane normal to the length of the
    surface.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found, for example, devices for
    either causing or preventing lateral shift of a traveling Fourdrinier wire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    355,    for Fourdrinier devices having means transversely vibrating the
    wire in which no automatic control devices are present.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses
    101+, and in particular subclasses 102+ for mechanism in which the
    invention relates to devices for maintaining a flexible band in
    predetermined paths of travel.  This class (162) provides for devices in
    which positive cyclical shifting motion is imparted to a forming belt to
    prevent wear on the surface over which it slides, and in addition to
    control the tracking of the forming belt.


CLS 162/258
TXT Apparatus under subclass 252 in which the control device regulates the
    ratio of liquid to fibers of the pulp.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, appropriate subclasses and, subclasses 91 and 92 in
    particular, for consistency control devices, per se.


CLS 162/259
TXT Apparatus under subclass 252 in which the device controlled directs the
    stock onto the forming device.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found, for example, devices for
    sensing the thickness of the formed web and in response thereto regulating
    the amount of stock applied to the wire.


CLS 162/260
TXT Apparatus under subclass 252 in which the device controlled severs at least
    a portion of a shaped article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286,    for other cutting devices not having automatic control features.


CLS 162/261
TXT Apparatus under subclass 232 having means subjecting the stock material to
    an attrition step.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses for apparatus for performing an attrition step on fibrous
    material when not in combination with a chemical treatment.


CLS 162/262
TXT Apparatus under subclass 232 having electrical means for causing or
    controlling a paper making operation that consists of more than mere power
    or motive means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252+,   for automatic controls which may or may not utilize electrical
    systems in the control operation.


CLS 162/263
TXT Apparatus under subclass 232 having means (1) to detect some condition in
    the operation of the machine, the detecting means operating a visual and/or
    audible indication of the condition, (2) or to indicate or test a physical
    or chemical condition of the material under treatment, (3) or means
    permitting or peculiarly adapted to permit examination of the machine or
    the material undergoing treatment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for processes involving a step of testing, sampling or analyzing.

    252+,   for means detecting a condition and in response thereto causing a
    control operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 99 for presses having measuring, inspecting or
    testing means and see the search notes thereto for the locus of other art
    relating to these features.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+ for electrical
    automatic condition responsive indicating systems.


CLS 162/264
TXT Apparatus under subclass 232 including means (1) to enable reuse of the
    pulp slurry fluid after drainage through the forming surface during the web
    forming step, with or without means to subject the fines carrying fluid to
    a reclaiming treatment, (2) or means to collect or make available for reuse
    the freshly formed web at some point before final drying.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for liberation processes including a step of utilizing as stock
    material waste paper and textile waste.

    147,    for processes and products utilizing plural fibers at least one of
    which is waste paper or textile waste.

    189+,   for other processes including the use of white water or waste
    material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 174 for press rolls including a deflector
    adjacent the outgoing side of the roll body which deflector is so mounted
    as to direct the pressed material away from the surface of the roll body.


CLS 162/265
TXT Apparatus under subclass 232 combined with means applying a surface film
    and/or absorbed layer of material other than a fibrous water-laid substance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    for processes of forming a waterlaid product including a step of
    printing or applying a variegated coating.

    135,    for processes including a step of applying a coating after drying
    of the product.

    158+,   for processes including a step of applying a nonfiber additive to a
    fibrous product at an intermediate stage of its manufacture.

    267,    for apparatus for molding waterlaid fibrous material about or in
    contact with a nonfibrous body or material.

    298     and 300, for apparatus for producing a composite web of waterlaid
    fibrous material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses including apparatus for
    coating devices, per se.


CLS 162/266
TXT Apparatus under subclass 265 in which the coating material is applied to
    the product while still on the foraminous forming surface.


CLS 162/267
TXT Apparatus under subclass 232 in which the fibrous slurry product is formed
    in contact with or about a shaped body or member, which member is not
    waterlaid and becomes a part of the finished article or product.

    (1)     Note.  In this and the indented subclasses may be found, for
    example devices for making insulated wire by applying a fibrous waterlaid
    material about a wire core.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    298     and 300, for apparatus for forming composite waterlaid webs.


CLS 162/268
TXT Apparatus under subclass 267 in which the molded pulp article is of very
    great length relative to its width or cross-section.


CLS 162/269
TXT Apparatus under subclass 232 combined with means arranging the molded pulp
    articles in superposed relationship, or in adjacent face-to-face
    juxtaposition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, appropriate subclasses for sheet
    handling devices, per se, and see the Notes thereto for the locus of other
    art similar thereto.


CLS 162/270
TXT Apparatus under subclass 232 for treating a dried article having means for
    either (1) temporarily distorting the article within its elastic limits, or
    (2) returning a deformed or distorted article to its normal planar
    configuration.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found, for example, devices for
    decurling photographic prints, for "breaking" the coatings on flexible
    webs, or for flattening folded or creased computer cards.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    197,    for processes there provided for involving a step of stretching,
    tensioning, decurling, flexing or breaking.

    286,    for paper making apparatus combined with means for trimming,
    scoring, cutting, severing or perforating the produced product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, appropriate subclasses, for
    devices for ironing or smoothing textile materials.


CLS 162/271
TXT Apparatus under subclass 270 in which the material undergoing treatment is
    in the nature of a sheet or web.


CLS 162/272
TXT Apparatus under subclass 232 having means to prepare the apparatus for the
    paper making operation or place it in better condition to perform its
    function or to remove superfluous and undesirable residue of the paper
    making operation from the structure.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes modifications of the paper making
    machine structure whereby parts may be more readily interchanged or removed
    from the machine.  For example, in this subclass and the indented
    subclasses may be found paper making devices modified to permit replacement
    of the Fourdrinier wire or means mounting the suction boxes for ready
    removal and/or replacement.  Also in this and the indented subclasses may
    be found devices for cleaning or renewing the foraminous or porous felts or
    screens.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199,    for processes involving a step of conditioning, preparing or
    repairing the apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 402.01+, for processes of repair
    generally and see especially the notes thereto for the locus of other art
    relating to repair.


CLS 162/273
TXT Apparatus under subclass 272 in which the apparatus is structurally
    modified to permit removal and substitution of the foraminous forming
    surface or in which means are provided to maintain the proper degree of
    tension on an endless foraminous forming member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 101+ for means for adjusting belt tension.


CLS 162/274
TXT Apparatus under subclass 272 in which the part of the apparatus undergoing
    treatment is pervious and permits the passage of fluid therethrough.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass, for example, may be found devices in which
    a fibrous brush cleans the porous or foraminous member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses, and
    see especially the Notes thereto for the locus of other art relation to the
    cleaning of fabric articles.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power Driven, subclasses 494+ for a conveyor having
    installed as part of its structure a means for cleaning a component of the
    conveyor.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 391+ for filter
    cleaning devices.


CLS 162/275
TXT Apparatus under subclass 274 in which the cleaning or conditioning medium
    is a liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 380 for
    fluid jet screen cleaning devices.


CLS 162/276
TXT Apparatus under subclass 275 in which the member being treated rotates
    about an axis and is circular in transverse section, the center of the
    circular section coinciding with the axis of rotation.


CLS 162/277
TXT Apparatus under subclass 275 in which the means supplying the liquid
    translates with respect to the member being cleaned or conditioned.


CLS 162/278
TXT Apparatus under subclass 277 having in addition to the means supplying the
    liquid a source of reduced pressure acting on the surface to be treated.


CLS 162/279
TXT Apparatus under subclass 275 having in addition to the means supplying the
    liquid a source of reduced pressure acting on the surface to be treated.


CLS 162/280
TXT Apparatus under subclass 232 specifically or peculiarly adapted to produce
    an endless product that is bodily wrinkled in character.

    (1)     Note.  The product is usually produced, for example, by crowding
    the moist paper on itself to induce it to wrinkle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111+,   for processes for producing a creped or crinkled product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 369 for apparatus including an endless surface for corrugating a
    nonmetal sheet (e.g., paper, etc.), and subclass 391 for a preform
    convoluting or twisting means not otherwise provided for.


CLS 162/281
TXT Apparatus under subclass 280 in which a solid scraping means removes a web
    product from the circumference of a drum which scraping means causes
    crowding of the material on itself.


CLS 162/282
TXT Apparatus under subclass 281 in which the cylinder is provided with
    continuous recesses extending around its outer surface in planes normal to
    the axis of the cylinder.

    (1)     Note.  The circumferential grooves may be for the purpose of
    additionally longitudinally corrugating the product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    296,    for pulp web forming devices having a corrugated surface with no
    additional creping feature.


CLS 162/283
TXT Apparatus under subclass 232 combined with means to lay the product in
    turns about a mandrel or core.

    (1)     Note.  The winding device may function to form a tube-like article
    or may merely be for the purpose of winding a finished web on a roll for
    storage or transport.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118+,   for processes including a step of winding or roll forming.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 520+ for convolute
    winding.


CLS 162/284
TXT Apparatus under subclass 283 specially adapted or peculiar to forming a
    hollow cylindrical body.


CLS 162/285
TXT Apparatus under subclass 284 provided with means for severing the formed
    tubular body.

    (1)     Note.  The severing may be for the purpose of trimming the tube or
    slitting the tube so that it may be opened up and discrete sheets formed
    therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for processes of roll forming involving a step of cutting and/or
    removing material.


CLS 162/286
TXT Apparatus under subclass 232 combined with (1) means causing separation of
    a unitary portion of a web or article into separate parts, (2) means
    forming holes by piercing or perforating means or (3) means incising or
    scratching the surface of a pulp body.

    (1)     Note.  The combined means may be either a solid instrument or a
    fluid jet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109+,   for processes involving a step of making a nonuniform, irregular or
    configured web or sheet, and see especially subclass 114 for perforating
    processes.

    193,    for processes involving the formation of a lead strip.

    194+,   for forming processes combined with a step of cutting or slitting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses, for apparatus for cutting and
    slitting when not combined with a paper-making step.


CLS 162/287
TXT Apparatus under subclass 232 combined with means distorting a single
    workpiece to bring separate areas of the workpiece into face-to-face
    relationship or distorting the workpiece into a grossly altered
    configuration.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found for example, devices for
    twisting or rolling a web to form a strand of roving, or devices for
    forming a folded shaped article.

    (2)     Note.  The art in subclass 270 differs from the art herein in that
    the distortion in the instant subclass is permanent, the material is
    distorted beyond its elastic limits, whereas in subclass 270 the distortion
    is transitory or temporary.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270,    and see (2) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    270,    Sheet-Material Associating or Folding, subclass 61 for folders, per
    se.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, for making an article of commerce from sheet or web
    material such as paper involving folding where there is no thickening or
    thinning flow of the material.  Note that shaping of wet or damp paper
    usually involves thinning or thickening flow.


CLS 162/288
TXT Apparatus under subclass 232 having means to form a waterlaid felted
    product combined with a solid work piece treating member acting on the work
    piece after formation which solid member contacts the surface of the work
    piece under pressure and has a motion relative to the surface of the work
    piece to modify at least the surface characteristics of the work piece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305,    for combinations of molding devices with separate pressing means
    where no rubbing is involved.

    358,    for pressing devices including a porous or foraminous carrier to
    carry the pressed web through the pressing instrumentality.

    359,    for the combination of separate pressing and drying devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 90.01+ for burnishing, per se, and
    especially subclasses 90.1+ for the burnishing of paper.


CLS 162/289
TXT Apparatus under subclass 232 specifically adapted or peculiar to the
    handling of work of great length relative to its cross-section which work
    is continually produced or treated.

    (1)     Note.  In this and the indented subclasses may be found, for
    example, devices for producing from a slurry endless webs of paper, endless
    tubes of fiber containing material and also means specialized to this class
    for treating such products after initial forming on a foraminous forming
    surface whether or not the forming device is claimed.

    (2)     Note.  For devices producing discrete articles search must be made
    in subclass 375 or the subclasses following it in the schedule.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202+,   for running or indefinite length work forming and/or treating
    processes.


CLS 162/290
TXT Apparatus under subclass 289 having foraminous forming means and including
    in combination therewith means to alter the temperature of the formed
    article.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found, for example, the combination
    of web forming means and separate web drying means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121,    for processes for winding or roll forming including a step of
    heating the article.

    135+,   for processes involving a step of coating a product after drying.

    192,    for processes involving the application of electrical or wave
    energy to the product, which energy may heat the product.

    206     and 207, for processes for the subsequent treatment of a formed web
    including the step of heating or cooling the formed web.

    224+    and 226, for article heating processes.

    359,    for the combination of a press and felt with separate heated drying
    means.

    375+,   for apparatus including heating means for discrete articles as
    distinguished from endless webs of the instant subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate
    subclasses, for drying, per se, of formed pulp articles and especially
    subclasses 110+ for external drum type driers and subclasses 611+ for
    devices for drying sheet, web or strand form work.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 300+ for heated presses, per se.


CLS 162/291
TXT Apparatus under subclass 289 in which the fibrous pulp material is brought
    into contact with a foraminous forming surface by a solid nonporous
    transfer member which separates a film of pulp from the bulk supply and
    carries it into contact with the mold surface.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found, for example, apparatus in
    which an impermeable cylinder is immersed in the pulp supply and in
    rotating carries on its surface a film of the pulp in a manner of an
    applicator and applies it to the surface of the endless foraminous mold.


CLS 162/292
TXT Apparatus under subclass 289 in which the stock material is sprayed or
    directed in a stream against the foraminous molding surface while
    completely unsupported or unconfined.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213,    for processes for projecting or slinging the stock against a mold
    surface.


CLS 162/293
TXT Apparatus under subclass 289 in which an endless molded product is formed
    on a molding surface of a limited length.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found, for example, apparatus for
    producing an endless waterlaid tube of pulp material on a short foraminous
    core through which the carrier fluid is removed from the pulp, the endless
    tube as it is formed being continuously removed from the core.

    (2)     Note.  The means of this subclass are in some respects analogous to
    the continuous casting devices of Class 164, Metal Founding, the plastic
    metal shaping devices of Class 72, Metal Deforming, subclasses 253.1+, and
    Class 425, Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 253.1+ and see (2) Note Above.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 273+ for continuous casting devices and
    see (2) Note above.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 376.1+ for extrusion shaping apparatus for nonmetals not
    otherwise provided for; see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 162/294
TXT Apparatus under subclass 289 in which the pulp supply container and the
    mold have a stop-and-go motion relative to one another whereby an endless
    article is formed in stepwise fashion.


CLS 162/295
TXT Apparatus under subclass 289 in which the face of an endless foraminous
    forming surface is curved either transversely or longitudinally of the
    direction of motion, the low point of the curvature being on the stock
    carrying face.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found, for example, forming devices
    having an endless screen which screen is bowed transversely of its length
    to assume a trough-like configuration, perhaps to retain the material on
    the screen, or also, for example, endless screens that slump or form a
    curve between the entrance point of the stock and the web take off point.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 501 and 818+ for an endless
    belt conveyor trough-shaped in cross section.


CLS 162/296
TXT Apparatus under subclass 289 in which the foraminous molding face presents
    a grossly interrupted or broken surface or carries a design or pattern on
    its face, whereby a nonplanar surfaced product is produced.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109+,   for processes for producing nonuniform, irregular or configured
    sheets and webs and especially subclass 116 for such processes utilizing a
    configured forming mold.


CLS 162/297
TXT Apparatus under subclass 289 in which means are provided for either
    increasing or decreasing the pressure of the atmosphere immediately
    contacting the surface of the pulp on the mold.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are devices which draw a vacuum
    through the mold surface and thus act indirectly on the stock on the mold.
    For such subject matter see the various subclasses provided for below.  In
    the instant subclass the action is directly on the stock and not through
    the pervious mold surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208,    for processes for treating the slurry on the mold surface.

    308+,   for other apparatus for treating stock on the molding surface.

    335,    351 and 363+, and see (1) Note above.


CLS 162/298
TXT Apparatus under subclass 289 in which more than a single means directs the
    pulp into the immediate contact with the forming surface.

    (1)     Note.  The separate streams of this subclass are in fact discrete
    applying means as distinguished from a vaned single applying means.  For a
    single flow bow or applying means having vanes or streams splitting means
    search subclass 343 below.

    (2)     Note.  The separate streams may be positioned either transversely
    of the direction of motion of the molding surface or longitudinally thereof.


CLS 162/299
TXT Apparatus under subclass 298 in which the foraminous molding surface is
    endless and travels longitudinally of itself and the plural separate
    streams of stock applied at spaced positions along the length of the
    foraminous molding surface.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found, for example, devices for
    making endless multilayer webs by depositing stock from separate sources on
    previously formed webs on a common carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123+,   for processes for the production of plural layered webs.


CLS 162/300
TXT Apparatus under subclass 289 having plural discrete foraminous molds and/or
    discrete separated portions of a single mold against which stock is applied.

    (1)     Note.  In this and the indented subclasses either separate web
    products may be produced or the plural molds may coact to produce a single
    ultimate web.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123+,   for processes producing multilayer waterlaid webs or sheets.

    203,    for processes producing a single web between opposed forming
    surfaces.


CLS 162/301
TXT Apparatus under subclass 300 in which a single source of supply directs the
    pulp against the molding surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312,    for molds having means treating the stock on the mold surface which
    means may be in the form of an endless foraminous belt.  In the instant
    subclass the stock must have fibers in suspension while in contact with the
    plural foraminous members whereby web formation occurs at the plural
    surfaces whereas in subclass 312, the product has been formed when
    contacted by the endless treating members.


CLS 162/302
TXT Apparatus under subclass 301 in which the plural molds each comprise a
    cylinder and in which the outer circumferential surface is foraminous and
    forms the molding surface, the foraminous surfaces being in touching
    contact or closely spaced one with the other to unite the accreted webs.


CLS 162/303
TXT Apparatus under subclass 300 in which the forming surfaces of separate
    molds approach a single point in their travel to bring together the
    separate webs formed on each mold surface.


CLS 162/304
TXT Apparatus under subclass 300 in which the separate webs produced on the
    molding surface are applied to a moving additional surface in sequence so
    that they may be joined together to form a laminated product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    for processes in which separately formed webs are united on a
    common carrier.


CLS 162/305
TXT Apparatus under subclass 289 having means for compressing the work after
    removal from the foraminous forming surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205+,   for processes for pressing a web after removal from the mold.

    358,    for press and felt combinations, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses for presses, per se, and see the
    Notes thereto for the locus of other press structures.


CLS 162/306
TXT Apparatus under subclass 289 having means to displace the formed body from
    the surface on which it is felted or layed.


CLS 162/307
TXT Apparatus under subclass 306 in which the means displacing is a fluid blast
    directed through the foraminous molding surface.


CLS 162/308
TXT Apparatus under subclass 289 having means positioned adjacent the
    foraminous forming surface and acting directly on the pulp material before
    it is removed therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  In this and the indented subclasses may be found devices
    which in some way modify the characteristics of the finished product by a
    physical action on the stock either while still in a state of suspension
    (note subclass 311) or after felting but while still on the mold, but in
    either case the action on the fibers must occur adjacent the mold surface
    while the fibers are in contact with the surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208,    for processes for the treatment of the slurry on the mold surface.

    290,    for the combination of a forming mold and separate drying means for
    the product after removal from the mold.

    297,    for apparatus in which pneumatic pressure or vacuum means act
    directly on the stock mold surface.

    305,    for the combination of a foraminous mold and means subjecting the
    product to pressure after removal from the mold.


CLS 162/309
TXT Apparatus under subclass 308 in which the means acting on the pulp (1) has
    a different affect on increments of the pulp in a direction transverse of
    the produced article, (2) acts in random manner on the pulp, or (3) is
    configured to impress a particular pattern on the pulp.

    (1)     Note.  In the indented subclasses may be found, for example,
    devices for embossing the pulp layer or imparting different surface
    characteristics to the layer which characteristics are not uniform.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109+,   for processes producing a nonuniform, irregular or configured web
    or sheet.


CLS 162/310
TXT Apparatus under subclass 309 in which the means comprises a fluid stream
    directed against the pulp layer, and/or a suction nozzle locally affecting
    the pulp layer.

    (1)     Note.  The instant devices all treat the product nonuniformly as
    distinguished from the devices in subclass 297 which apply fluid or treat
    with vacuum in uniform manner over the entire product on the mold.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    for processes producing a nonuniform sheet or web utilizing fluid
    pressure.

    286,    for trimming or cutting means utilizing a fluid jet.

    297,    and see (1) Note above.


CLS 162/311
TXT Apparatus under subclass 308 in which the treating means is positioned at
    the point where the stock stream initially contacts the foraminous forming
    surface.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found, for example, rectifier rolls
    positioned adjacent the molding surface.  The position of the roll must be
    such that the fibrous material on the mold is modified in some way by the
    direct action thereon of the roll.  In subclass 342 may be found rectifier
    rolls immersed in the stock in the head box and treating the fibers while
    in suspension and before felting on the mold.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    342,    for head boxes having rectifier roll structures therein but not
    adjacent the molding surface and see (1) Note above.


CLS 162/312
TXT Apparatus under subclass 308 in which the treating means is a solid member
    as distinguished from a fluid current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286,    for paper making devices combined with means for severing the
    formed web which means may act on the pulp on the mold surface.

    300+,   and especially subclass 301 for plural opposed mold surface forming
    a web therebetween.


CLS 162/313
TXT Apparatus under subclass 312 in which the treating member is mounted for
    motion relative to the layer of pulp on the forming surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209,    for processes for treating slurry on a mold surface in which the
    treatment includes a step of vibration or agitation.


CLS 162/314
TXT Apparatus under subclass 313 in which the solid treating member has motion
    about an axis of rotation.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found, for example, "dandy" rolls
    acting on the pulp material on the mold.


CLS 162/315
TXT Apparatus under subclass 289 having means for bringing a pulp slurry into
    association with a foraminous mold whereby a fibrous body may be formed
    thereon.

    (1)     Note.  In this and the indented subclasses may be found either the
    subcombination of the stock directing means, per se, (note subclass 336,
    for example) or the directing means in operational association with the
    foraminous mold.

    (2)     Note.  The directing means may be any instrumentality for either
    bringing the pulp slurry from the supply and into association with the mold
    or merely to maintain the slurry against the mold so that felting to form a
    product can occur.  Thus even a claimed cylinder vat (subclass 323) is
    sufficient structure of a stock directing means for this subclass in that
    it maintains the stock against the mold.


CLS 162/316
TXT Apparatus under subclass 315 in which the mold surface is generally flat
    and horizontally disposed and the stock slurry contacts only the lower
    surface of the mold.


CLS 162/317
TXT Apparatus under subclass 315 in which the means directing the stock into
    contact with the forming surface is a closed conduit completely embracing
    the stock slurry and is in sealing contact with the foraminous forming
    surface.

    (1)     Note.  The devices of this subclass are known in the art as
    pressure forming devices and are for the purpose of increasing the pressure
    with which the stock is applied to the mold surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    214,    for pressure forming processes.


CLS 162/318
TXT Apparatus under subclass 315 in which the foraminous molding surface
    comprises a permeable rotary body circular in section transverse to the
    axis of rotation having trained thereabout an endless foraminous flexible
    forming member longer in length than the circumference of the cylinder and
    at least a portion of which is spaced from the cylinder at a point removed
    from the slurry supply point.

    (1)     Note.  In these devices, the article is usually formed on the area
    where the endless belt is in contact with the forming cylinder and is then
    removed from the forming cylinder and carried down the endless belt away
    from the forming cylinder.


CLS 162/319
TXT Apparatus under subclass 318 in which the forming surface forms a
    restraining wall for the stock container or supports the bulk supply of
    pulp slurry from which the article is accreted.

    (1)     Note.  In the devices of this subclass the stock slurry supply
    container is an incomplete receptacle and one wall of the receptacle is
    formed by the forming surface.  If the forming surface would be removed,
    the slurry would flow out of the receptacle.


CLS 162/320
TXT Apparatus under subclass 315 in which the forming surface forms a
    restraining wall for the stock container or supports the bulk supply of
    pulp slurry from which the article is accreted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    319,    and see (1) Note of that subclass.


CLS 162/321
TXT Apparatus under subclass 320 in which the mold is cylindrical in nature and
    the circumferential surface is foraminous.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323+,   for cylinder mold forming devices of the immersion vat type.

    357,    for cylinder molds, per se.


CLS 162/322
TXT Apparatus under subclass 315 having means for introducing material other
    than pulp slurry into the device directing the stock against the forming
    surface.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found, for example, devices for
    introducing water into the stock stream, or solid particles of nonfibrous
    material.


CLS 162/323
TXT Apparatus under subclass 315 having a complete container for the pulp
    slurry and in which the forming member dips into the pulp supply and while
    immersed therein accretes a layer of stock to form the article.

    (1)     Note.  The majority of the devices in this subclass have the
    conventional cylinder mold wherein both the forming cylinder and the
    immersion vat are recited in the claims.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    318+,   for cylinder machine devices having a forming belt thereabout.

    320+,   for forming devices of the superposed or lateral stock pool type.


CLS 162/324
TXT Apparatus under subclass 323 in which the pulp slurry container has means
    therein for diverting the stock flow in opposite directions at will or
    wherein the supply of slurry to the vat is such that the direction of flow
    may be reversed at will.


CLS 162/325
TXT Apparatus under subclass 323 in which the pulp slurry is brought into
    contact with the foraminous forming surface and sweeps across the surface
    in a direction at right angles to the direction of motion of the surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    338,    for slurry supply devices having a transversely crossed inlet into
    the flow box.


CLS 162/326
TXT Apparatus under subclass 323 in which the pulp slurry is caused to contact
    the mold surface at more than a single area on the mold.


CLS 162/327
TXT Apparatus under subclass 323 in which the immersion vat is provided with
    separate diverters in addition to the vat structure, per se, causing the
    stock slurry to flow into direct and intimate contact with the mold surface.

    (1)     Note.  Mere configuration of the vat whereby it approximates the
    shape of the mold is not sufficient to render the patent classifiable in
    this subclass.


CLS 162/328
TXT Apparatus under subclass 327 in which the baffle structure approximates the
    external configuration of the immersed cylinder mold.

    (1)     Note.  Mere vat bottoms contoured to approximate the circumference
    of the contained cylinder mold are not provided for in this subclass.  To
    be here classified the baffle must be inserted into the vat with stock on
    opposite sides of the baffle in normal operation.


CLS 162/329
TXT Apparatus under subclass 328 in which the baffle structure is adjustable or
    in which the position of the baffle may be altered at will to increase or
    decrease the space between the baffle and the cylinder mold.


CLS 162/330
TXT Apparatus under subclass 323 provided with means to regulate the height of
    the pulp slurry contained within the immersion vat.


CLS 162/331
TXT Apparatus under subclass 323 having gland structures preventing leakage of
    the pulp slurry at the points of rotary support for the cylinder mold.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 358+ for a relatively rotatable radially extending
    sealing face member (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.) or subclasses 500+ for a
    dynamic, circumferential, contact seal for other than a piston.


CLS 162/332
TXT Apparatus under subclass 323 relating to the mounting of the cylinder mold
    within the vat.


CLS 162/333
TXT Apparatus under subclass 332 wherein the rotatable cylinder mold is
    supported at its periphery rather than at the axis of rotation.


CLS 162/334
TXT Apparatus under subclass 323 provided with means to limit or control the
    area of contact or shield the contact of the pulp slurry with the
    foraminous molding surface.

    (1)     Note.  The devices in this subclass block mask off portions of the
    foraminous surface whereby no accretion occurs at these portions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109,    for processes producing a configured web or sheet.

    353,    for endless wire molds and associated mask, deckle, or apron
    structure.

    383,    for devices molding discrete articles and having masking means.


CLS 162/335
TXT Apparatus under subclass 323 provided with means to collect or guide the
    fluid material passing through the foraminous forming surface, either with
    or without suction means to impel the fluid material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264,    for apparatus for the recovery, recirculation or treatment of white
    water.  "Recovery" entails more than mere collection of the fluid in that
    the material collected must be modified in some way.

    363+,   for suction systems and devices, per se, for use in paper making
    devices.


CLS 162/336
TXT Apparatus under subclass 315 in which the directing means (1) spreads
    slurry into a thin sheet for discharge onto the mold, (2) provides a
    hydrostatic or pressure head to give the slurry the requisite speed of
    discharge onto the mold, and/or (3) keeps the slurry sufficiently agitated
    to prevent flocculation before discharge onto the mold.

    (1)     Note.  The devices of this subclass are positioned between the
    slurry producing or conditioning means and the forming means, and may be in
    the nature of a large box to steady the flow of stock, or in the nature of
    a spreading nozzle only directing the slurry on the forming means.
    Included also are subcombinations of flow arrangements into the flow box to
    produce particular effects on the slurry.

    (2)     Note.  The devices of this subclass deliver the stock onto a
    traveling endless mold, usually either an endless flexible belt or a
    foraminous cylinder.

    (3)     Note.  The subject matter of this group deals with the problem of
    transforming the relatively small cross-section output of a feed pump into
    a wide flat stream directed against the moving endless mold surface and the
    subject matter includes within its confines all structure necessary for so
    shaping the flowing fluid slurry stream.  The devices of this and the
    indented subclasses are known in the art as flow box, head box, slice,
    inlet, approach flow devices.


CLS 162/337
TXT Apparatus under subclass 336 provided with means (1) directing at least a
    portion of the stock slurry that is surplus back to the forming area, (2)
    means for removing from the forming area a layer of the pulp slurry, or (3)
    means removing surplus slurry or waste from the forming area before contact
    of the surplus material with the forming surface.

    (1)     Note.  "Surplus" or "excess" stock does not mean the white water
    drained through the forming wire.  Rather it is stock over and above that
    which is necessary to form the product.  For means removing white water
    search subclasses 335 and 348.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    335     and 348, and see (1) Note above.


CLS 162/338
TXT Apparatus under subclass 336 in which the means directing the slurry onto
    the molding surface has at least two inflow passages for the slurry, which
    passages enter on opposite sides of the directing means and the direction
    of flow of slurry through the means is toward each other.


CLS 162/339
TXT Apparatus under subclass 336 in which the container or head box for the
    stock supply directing the stock onto the forming surface is sealed against
    atmospheric pressure or contact of atmosphere with the slurry supply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    317,    for devices in which a confined stock stream is directed onto the
    forming surface and in which the confining means is in sealing contact with
    the foraminous forming surface.


CLS 162/340
TXT Apparatus under subclass 339 in which a gas under pressure higher than
    atmospheric pressure is maintained over the slurry supply within the head
    box usually to the velocity of the issuing slurry supply.


CLS 162/341
TXT Apparatus under subclass 336 having a solid body in contact with the pulp
    slurry which body is mounted for motion, the motion of the body some way
    influencing the characteristics of the stock.

    (1)     Note.  The moving body may be separate from the flow box and
    immersed in the slurry, or it may be a vibrating wall of the flow box
    itself.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216,    for processes including a step of mechanically treating the slurry
    in the head box or approach flow passage.


CLS 162/342
TXT Apparatus under subclass 341 in which the moving body is a rotating
    cylinder, immersed at least in part in the slurry.

    (1)     Note.  The rolls of this subclass are frequently called "rectifier"
    rolls and are usually perforated.


CLS 162/343
TXT Apparatus under subclass 336 (1) having means that are perforated or
    provide separate passageways for the slurry.

    (1)     Note.  The means may be a separate member immersed in the slurry
    stream so as to cause the stream to be divided. Examples of this type of
    device are immersed perforated screens, rake like members, or honeycomb
    structures.  The means may also be separating passageways or conduits for
    the slurry which are not immersed but rather comprise the conducting system
    for the slurry.

    (2)     Note.  The dividing means do not permanently divide the stock
    stream so that separate streams are applied to the mold surface, rather
    they are inserted in the slurry stream and permit the stream to recombine
    so that the unitary sheet of slurry is applied to the mold.

    (3)     Note.  In this subclass may also be found, for example, head boxes
    in which a plurality of vaned members are inserted in the stock stream to
    reduce the cross-section of the stream confining means to thereby increase
    the velocity of the stream.  Also in this subclass the vanes may, for
    example, have the function of quieting turbulence in the stream.


CLS 162/344
TXT Apparatus under subclass 336 having means to doctor or limit the thickness
    of the stock stream at the point of issuance from the supply container onto
    the foraminous forming surface.


CLS 162/345
TXT Apparatus under subclass 344 having more than a single stock thickness
    regulating means which means are separated one from the other and disposed
    in separated relationship in the direction of stock travel whereby the pulp
    slurry contacts the regulating means in sequence.


CLS 162/346
TXT Apparatus under subclass 344 in which means are provided for regulating at
    will the side-to-side span of the issuing slurry stream.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    366,    for adjustable width suction boxes.


CLS 162/347
TXT Apparatus under subclass 344 in which the spacing between the effective
    edge of the slice member and its opposed passage defining element is varied
    by either bodily distorting the adjacent portions of the slice member, or
    causing the slice member to swing about on an axis of pivot.


CLS 162/348
TXT Apparatus under subclass 289 in which the forming surface comprises a
    pervious distortable looped web, traveling longitudinally of itself.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315+,   for combinations of an endless web mold and means directing stock
    into contact with the molding surface, and especially subclasses 318+ for
    cylinder molds with an endless mold trained around the cylinder.

    323+,   for immersion vat type molding devices, most of which utilize a
    cylindrical mold.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 400+ for belt type
    filters.

    245,    Wire Fabrics and Structure, appropriate subclasses, and especially
    subclass 8 for mesh belts, per se, made of woven wire and see the notes to
    the class definition of that class (245) for the locus of other wire fabric
    structures.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet, and especially subclasses 304.4+ for a composite web or sheet in
    which one component is porous or cellular.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 237+ for a friction drive belt.


CLS 162/349
TXT Apparatus under subclass 348 in which the flexible endless band is
    supported during at least a portion of its travel by a concomitantly
    traveling foraminous or pervious flexible member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    318+,   for pervious cylinder molds with an endless pervious forming belt
    thereabout.


CLS 162/350
TXT Apparatus under subclass 348 provided with means to adjust or alter at will
    the general disposition of the foraminous forming surface relative to the
    horizontal.


CLS 162/351
TXT Apparatus under subclass 348 provided with means for regulating the
    quantity of fluid material passing through the foraminous forming surface.

    (1)     Note.  Any structure which bears against the bottom of the wire
    will in some way effect the drainage of the water through the wire, as for
    example, the table roll structures aid in removing water from the bottom of
    the wire, however for the purpose of this classification a specific
    disclosure of the influence on the drainage must be recited for
    classification in this subclass.  For details of table structure or wire
    supporting structure in which such disclosures are not present search must
    be made in subclasses 354+ below.

    (2)     Note.  The devices of this subclass are positioned on the side of
    the wire away from the molding surface as distinguished from a mask or
    apron that is positioned on the molding surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    297,    for pneumatic pressure or vacuum means acting directly on stock on
    mold surface.

    353,    for devices controlling the area of contact of the pulp with the
    mold surface and see (2) Note above.

    363,    for suction devices, per se.


CLS 162/352
TXT Apparatus under subclass 351 in which a solid member bears against the
    bottom surface of the flexible endless band for doctoring fluid material
    passing through the band.


CLS 162/353
TXT Apparatus under subclass 348 provided with means to restrict or alter the
    area of contact of the pulp slurry with the forming surface.

    (1)     Note.  The apparatus of this subclass control the application of
    slurry to the mold surface and are associated with the pulp carrying side
    of the mold as distinguished from devices under the mold and controlling
    the flow of white water or filtering medium after separation from the
    retained pulp.  For the latter type of device see subclass 351 above.

    (2)     Note.  The devices of this subclass include, for example, the
    following: deckled straps, which are endless bands traveling with the mold
    and serving to form the side dams for the molding surface; apron devices
    which usually comprise a flexible cloth attached to the head box or stock
    supply means and extending over the endless belt to help carry the stock
    onto the endless belt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334,    for cylinder molds having associated therewith mask deckle or apron
    structure.

    351,    for flexible endless band mold devices provided with means placed
    below the mold surface for collecting or controlling the flow of white
    water through the mold and see (1) Note above.


CLS 162/354
TXT Apparatus under subclass 348 having means relating to the support and
    mounting of the flexible endless band.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found, for example, table roll
    assemblies, breast roll mountings, cantilever frame structures, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273,    for endless belt mold table structures specifically adapted to
    permit changing and/or tensioning of the mold.

    332,    for mounting means for cylinder molds.


CLS 162/355
TXT Apparatus under subclass 354 provided with means imparting a shaking or
    reciprocating motion to the flexible endless band which motion is
    transverse to the general longitudinal motion of the band.

    (1)     Note.  The motion is usually for the purpose of causing better
    felting of the slurry during dewatering and forming on the mold.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209,    for processes for forming by felting and/or dewatering including
    the step of vibrating or agitating the slurry on the mold surface.

    311     and 313+, for means separate from the mold for treating the stock
    on the molding surface.


CLS 162/356
TXT Apparatus under subclass 355 in which the direction of motion is at right
    angles to the direction of extension of the molding surface.


CLS 162/357
TXT Apparatus under subclass 289 relating to the structure of a rotary
    foraminous mold member which member is circular in a plane transverse to
    the axis of rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323,    for cylinder molds in combination with immersion vats, which vat
    contains the slurry.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, subclasses 30+ for a roll, per se, not elsewhere
    provided for, having surface projections, indentations or slits.  A roll of
    Class 492 is a material working roll rather than a forming or molding roll
    as provided for in this class (162).


CLS 162/358.1
TXT Press and felt:
    Apparatus under subclass 289 comprising a means for subjecting wet formed
    paper web carried on a flexible permeable belt to solid pressure applying
    surfaces (e.g., roll pair, etc.).

    (1)     Note. In this subclass, the pressing applying surface is usually a
    roll couple and the felt is generally for the purpose of carrying, pressing
    and dewatering the fragile wet paper web or interfacing between the paper
    web and the pressing means.  Roll couples, per se, for treating webs either
    wet or dry when not in combination with a felt for the web may be found in
    the appropriate subclasses of Class 100, presses.  However, if the sole
    purpose of the roll couple is disclosed to be for operation with a felt for
    Class 162 purposes, a mandatory cross is also made in this subclass.


CLS 162/358.2
TXT With felt structure or felt composition:
    Apparatus under subclass 358.1 wherein a porous felt lying between a roll
    and the wet paper web for conveying and pressing the wet paper web has
    significant felt structure(e.g., groove, shape, dimension, etc.) or
    identified felt composition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, particularly subclass 383, for woven fabric,
    per se.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for nonwoven fabric having structure.


CLS 162/358.3
TXT Extended nip press:
    Apparatus under subclass 358.1 wherein the pressure applying surfaces
    include conforming opposing press means (e.g., roll opposing overlapping
    stationary shoe having an impermeable belt structure moving between the
    shoe and wet paper web, etc.) which increases the area of the nip
    sandwiching a continuously moving wet formed paper for dewatering thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Thus, the nip that would normally be a single line contact
    point between two rolls is said to be an extended nip due to the greater
    pressing area of the conforming overlapping opposing press means.


CLS 162/358.4
TXT With impermeable belt structure or impermeable belt composition:Apparatus
    under subclass 358.3 wherein an impermeable belt for conveying and
    contacting the wet web riding over the opposing conforming press means has
    significant belt structure(e.g., groove, shape, dimensions, etc.) or
    identified belt composition.

    (1)     Note.  The impermeable belt riding over the overlapping opposing
    press means is not to be confused with the permeable felt that lies between
    the roll and the wet paper web.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, particularly subclasses 844.1+, for
    conveyor belts, per se.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for belts with structure.


CLS 162/358.5
TXT With heating means:
    Apparatus under subclass 358.3 having separate means at the location of the
    extended nip press for directly or indirectly heating the wet paper web
    during an extended nip pressing operation.


CLS 162/359.1
TXT With separate heated drying means:
    Apparatus under subclass 358.1 having, in addition to the solid pressure
    applying surfaces, a separate means for heating to dehydrate the wet-formed
    paper.


CLS 162/360.2
TXT Plural sequential presses:
    Apparatus under subclass 358.1 in which the pressure applying surfaces are
    in spaced serially arranged relationship providing plural pressing
    locations.


CLS 162/360.3
TXT Having three or more coacting rolls (e.g., compact press, etc.):Apparatus
    under subclass 360.2 having three or more coacting rolls wherein at least
    one of the rolls is simultaneously in contact with at least two other rolls
    to form plural press surfaces for simultaneously pressing a wet paper web
    moving therethrough.


CLS 162/361
TXT Apparatus under subclass 289 in which a solid member directly contacts a
    formed web of felted fibers and directly alters or modifies the structure
    of the web in some way.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280+,   for apparatus of the web creping or crinkling type and see also
    subclass 282 for devices which additionally corrugate the crinkled web.


CLS 162/362
TXT Apparatus under subclass 361 in which the solid member is irregular in
    surface configuration or imparts different characteristics to adjacent
    areas of the web.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are devices, per se, for treating
    a felted web whether the web is dry, still damp from the water laying
    process, or rewetted to facilitate working.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109,    for processes for forming a nonuniform, irregular or configured web.

    309,    for apparatus in which an irregular treating member acts on the web
    on the forming means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working subclasses 90.01+ and especially subclasses 90.1+ for
    burnishing of paper.

    101,    Printing, subclasses 3.1+ for apparatus for embossing dry paper
    webs.


CLS 162/363
TXT Apparatus under subclass 289 provided with means operating on the web at a
    reduced pressure relative to atmospheric pressure for the purpose of
    dewatering the moist slurry web.

    (1)     Note.  The devices of this and the indented subclasses are not
    forming molds, or molds in combination with suction applying means, but are
    rather the suction means, per se, which may or may not be disclosed as
    acting through a forming mold.  Thus, the devices may act on the moist web
    either on the forming mold, or after removal from the mold.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252,    for suction means having an automatic control feature.

    278     and 279, for apparatus conditioning devices including means to
    apply suction to the apparatus being conditioned.

    297,    for vacuum means acting directly on the stock on the mold surface.

    335,    for cylinder molds combined with drain or suction means.

    351,    for flexible endless band type molding devices having drainage
    control means for white water.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 300.1+ for
    cleaning machines of the suction type.


CLS 162/364
TXT Apparatus under subclass 363 in which more than a single discrete suction
    device are associated in treating a single workpiece or in which the source
    of suction and the conduits external of the suction applying means is
    claimed.


CLS 162/365
TXT Apparatus under subclass 363 in which the suction device has a to-and-fro
    motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    355,    for devices in which an endless belt-type foraminous mold
    reciprocates transversely of the suction box.


CLS 162/366
TXT Apparatus under subclass 363 having means to alter at will the area of
    action of the device in a direction transverse of the length of the work
    piece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334     and 353, for molding devices in which a foraminous mold has masking
    means associated therewith.


CLS 162/367
TXT Apparatus under subclass 363 in which the suction device has a permeable
    work contacting surface through which the suction is drawn, which surface
    is mounted for motion.


CLS 162/368
TXT Apparatus under subclass 367 in which the moving suction device is a
    cylinder mounted for rotation about its axis and the permeable surface is
    the circumferential surface of the cylinder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    357,    for rotary pervious cylinder structures which are cylinder molds,
    that is, adapted to accrete a layer of pulp on the surface thereof.


CLS 162/369
TXT Apparatus under subclass 368 in which the active suction area of the
    pervious cylinder consists of a restricted portion of the circumference of
    the cylinder, the restriction being caused by a confined suction producing
    chamber bearing against the inner walls of the rotary pervious cylinder.


CLS 162/370
TXT Apparatus under subclass 369 in which plural discrete chambers or a single
    partitioned chamber bears against the inner peripheral wall of the cylinder
    whereby more than a single suction area is applied to the inner wall.


CLS 162/371
TXT Apparatus under subclass 369 in which the internal suction box is provided
    with glands or packing means where it bears against the inner surface of
    the rotary cylinder.


CLS 162/372
TXT Apparatus under subclass 368 in which the invention relates to the
    structure or details of the rotary pervious cylinder, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 162/373
TXT Apparatus under subclass 363 in which the contact surface of the suction
    device comprises at least one solid impermeable cylindrical member mounted
    for rotation about it symmetrical axis.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the suction is not through the rollers but
    between the rollers, the rollers being nonpervious.  Subclasses 368+
    provides for suction devices utilizing a pervious cylinder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    368+,   and see (1) Note above.


CLS 162/374
TXT Apparatus under subclass 363 in which the product bears against and slides
    relative to the suction device and some detail of the bearing surface is
    recited.


CLS 162/375
TXT Apparatus under subclass 232 having means to modify the temperature of the
    work or any portion of the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are molding devices combined with
    separate heated drying means, ovens, etc., for drying the molded product
    and also heat exchange means directly associated with the molding device
    for heating the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121,    for processes of winding or roll forming utilizing heat.

    192,    for processes utilizing electrical or wave energy, which energy may
    generate heat in the product.

    207,    for processes producing or treating running length work involving a
    heating step.

    224     and 226, for processes involving a step of heating discrete
    articles.

    290,    for the combination of means producing and endless web and separate
    heat exchange means.

    359,    for press and felt devices with separate heated drying means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses
    for drying means, per se, and see the class definition of that class (34)
    for the locus of other heating and/or drying devices.


CLS 162/376
TXT Apparatus under subclass 375 having means to increase the temperature of a
    pervious felting mold for forming the work.


CLS 162/377
TXT Apparatus under subclass 375 having a solid heated shaping member which
    contacts the work.


CLS 162/378
TXT Apparatus under subclass 377 in which the heated shaping member is brought
    into heat exchange relationship with the felted article while it is still
    on the felting form.


CLS 162/379
TXT Apparatus under subclass 378 in which more than a single heated die is
    contacted serially with the work piece.


CLS 162/380
TXT Apparatus under subclass 232 including means to prepare the stock material
    for the forming step or to maintain or continue the proper condition of the
    stock material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for various processes for preparing pulp which include a step of
    chemical liberation, recovery or purification of fibrous material and
    subclasses 233+, for corresponding apparatus.

    158+,   for processes involving a step of adding a nonfibrous material to
    the pulp.

    187,    for pulp preparation processes including a step of hydration or
    gelatinization.

    189,    for processes involving a step reclamation salvage or reuse of
    materials.

    261,    for paper making apparatus combined with beating, refining and/or
    disintegrating means.

    263,    for apparatus having measuring or testing means.

    264,    for apparatus for the recirculation or treatment of white water or
    broke.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, appropriate subclasses for devices, per se,
    controlling the consistency of the slurry stock and especially subclasses
    92 and 467.5.


CLS 162/381
TXT Apparatus under subclass 232 combined with means, per se, classifiable in
    another class.

    (1)     Note.  Search must be made in various subclasses above in the
    schedule for those combinations specifically set out therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201,    for combined processes.


CLS 162/382
TXT Apparatus under subclass 232 having a pervious die for accreting a fibrous
    article from a suspension of fibers in a liquid by draining surplus liquid
    through the pores of the die.

    (1)     Note.  The devices for this and the indented subclass produce
    discrete articles as distinguished from the devices of subclass 289 in
    which endless, running, or indefinite length article is produced.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218+,   for discrete article forming processes.

    289+,   and see (1) Note above.


CLS 162/383
TXT Apparatus under subclass 382 in which the foraminous die has separate areas
    adapted to pass therethrough different amounts of suspending fluid.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found for example, apparatus in
    which a portion of the foraminous die is masked off to prevent accretion of
    pulp in those areas or to vary the thickness of the deposited layer of
    pulp.  Also in this subclass may be found apparatus in which different
    degrees of suction are applied to various areas of the mold to increase or
    decrease selectively the amount of deposition of pulp on the mold surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109+,   for processes producing a nonuniform, irregular or configured sheet
    or web.

    334     and 353, for apparatus for producing an endless web and having
    masking means.


CLS 162/384
TXT Apparatus under subclass 382 in which the water or liquid carrying the
    fiber is caused to be expressed through the foraminous forming mold at
    least in part by the action of centrifugal force.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 286+ for centrifugal metal casting
    apparatus.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 360+ for apparatus
    having a filter medium adapted for rapid movement about an axis of rotation
    and see the Notes thereto for the locus of other centrifugal devices.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 425+ for an apparatus including mold motion to distribute or
    compact stock therein.


CLS 162/385
TXT Apparatus under subclass 382 in which the bulk supply of slurry is brought
    into contact with the forming means by bodily moving the container for the
    bulk supply into association with the foraminous forming surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    388,    for means for causing this association in which the mold moves into
    the slurry supply while the supply remains stationary.


CLS 162/386
TXT Apparatus under subclass 382 having means to grasp the foraminous forming
    mold for manipulation directly by the operator during the forming step.


CLS 162/387
TXT Apparatus under subclass 382 in which a foraminous forming surface is
    brought into contact with an excess of pulp slurry and that amount of
    fibers necessary to form the completed article are deposited on the mold by
    difference in pressure between the back surface of the foraminous mold and
    the supply of pulp, and the mold with the fiber layer thereon is then
    removed from the body of the pulp slurry.


CLS 162/388
TXT Apparatus under subclass 387 provided with means for bodily changing the
    position of the foraminous mold to bring it into and/or out of relationship
    with the bulk supply of pulp slurry.


CLS 162/389
TXT Apparatus under subclass 388 provided with concurrently moving means
    applying suction to the nonmolding side of the foraminous forming surface
    which means are separable from the mold or have a different motion
    therefrom.


CLS 162/390
TXT Apparatus under subclass 388 in which the means holding the pulp slurry is
    partitioned to provide separate areas of slurry and/or separate discrete
    pulp slurry holders are provided.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219,    for plural stage deposition processes.


CLS 162/391
TXT Apparatus under subclass 388 in which the means moving the mold is mounted
    for motion about an axis of rotation.


CLS 162/392
TXT Apparatus under subclass 391 having in addition to molding means a separate
    means for applying pressure to the felted article on the forming die or
    after removal from the forming die.


CLS 162/393
TXT Apparatus under subclass 388 having means mounting the foraminous mold for
    to and fro motion relative to the pulp supply.


CLS 162/394
TXT Apparatus under subclass 393 provided with means to apply pressure to the
    felted article either while still on the forming die or after removal
    therefrom.


CLS 162/395
TXT Apparatus under subclass 388 provided with means for applying pressure to
    the felted article either while still on the forming die or after removal
    from the forming die.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305,    for apparatus forming an indefinite length product combined with
    means to thereafter subject the product to pressure.

    415,    for compressors, per se.


CLS 162/396
TXT Apparatus under subclass 382 in which at least a portion of the liquid of
    the slurry fiber supply is expressed through the foraminous mold by a solid
    member moving toward the foraminous molding surface to increase the
    pressure of the slurry against the mold surface.

    (1)     Note.  In these devices the pressure differential between the two
    faces of the molding surface may be increased or supplemented during the
    molding step by applying a vacuum behind the mold face.

    (2)     Note.  The pressing surface opposed to the foraminous molding
    surface may itself be a foraminous molding surface.


CLS 162/397
TXT Apparatus under subclass 396 having more than a single molding set whereby
    plural discrete articles are produced.


CLS 162/398
TXT Apparatus under subclass 397 in which the opposed foraminous mold platen
    and opposed pressure surface are generally planar and quite extensive
    relative to the thickness of the article produced.


CLS 162/399
TXT Apparatus under subclass 396 in which the opposed foraminous mold platen
    and opposed pressure surface are generally planar and quite extensive
    relative to the thickness of the article produced.


CLS 162/400
TXT Apparatus under subclass 399 provided with means extending between the
    opposed molding surfaces whereby holes are formed in the article during the
    molding step.


CLS 162/401
TXT Apparatus under subclass 396 in which the pressure applying platen is an
    elastic member, which is distorted to apply pressure to the slurry on the
    mold.


CLS 162/402
TXT Apparatus under subclass 401 in which the pressure applying means surrounds
    the pulp body and a foraminous core.


CLS 162/403
TXT Apparatus under subclass 396 in which the mold surface generates a
    cylindrical cavity and pressure is exerted on the pulp slurry by causing
    the mold to contract thus reducing the cavity in volume.


CLS 162/404
TXT Apparatus under subclass 403 in which a hollow foraminous member is
    positioned within the mold and through which liquid is expressed during the
    pressure applying step.


CLS 162/405
TXT Apparatus under subclass 396 in which a core member is adapted to be
    changed in dimension in normal operation.

    (1)     Note.  The core may be expanded to exert pressure on the slurry
    material, or it may be contracted for ease of removal from the mold.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 178+ for static cores having means to
    expand or contract the core.


CLS 162/406
TXT Apparatus under subclass 396 having a mold member which forms a hole or
    cavity in the pulp product which member is foraminous so that the
    suspending fluid may be drained therethrough.


CLS 162/407
TXT Apparatus under subclass 382 having means for filling a mold cavity with
    the liquid pulp slurry.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    387,    for apparatus for moving a mold into a slurry supply.


CLS 162/408
TXT Apparatus under subclass 407 in which the means for filling the mold form a
    closed passageway interconnected with the hollow mold and further means are
    provided for increasing the pressure of the slurry within the mold.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 303+ for metal injecting apparatus.


CLS 162/409
TXT Apparatus under subclass 407 in which separate charges are applied to
    distinct areas within this mold.


CLS 162/410
TXT Apparatus under subclass 382 provided with means for bodily removing the
    formed product from the forming mold.

    (1)     Note.  To be classified in this subclass means must be present for
    positively displacing the article from the mold or mold cavity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 344+, for metal casting devices
    including product ejecting means.

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 66.1 for mold having means to apply a force
    to remove or release the product.


CLS 162/411
TXT Apparatus under subclass 382 comprising a dipping mold.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 400+ for an immersion type coating
    apparatus.

    249,    Static Molds, appropriate subclasses, for mold having a movable or
    removable foraminous liner and subclass 141 for a foraminous mold, per se.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 269+ for apparatus comprising a dipping type shaping form with
    disclosed product removal.


CLS 162/415
TXT Apparatus under subclass 232 having solid means for compacting a felted
    water-laid fibrous article.

    (1)     Note.  The devices of this subclass operate on the fibrous body
    while still moist.  The shaping or compressing of dry paper is provided for
    in other classes, such as Class 100, Presses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223,    for processes for reshaping a fibrous article.

    224+,   for processes for subjecting a fibrous article to heat and/or
    mechanical pressure.

    305,    for apparatus forming a running length product combined with
    separate pressing means.

    358+,   for press and felt devices.

    361+,   for solid means acting on a formed web.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses for presses, per se, where no
    shaping is involved.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 395+ for die shaping a sheet or web article.


CLS 162/416
TXT Apparatus under subclass 415 in which the surface of the compressor
    contacting the work is contoured or is other than flat.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 162/900
TXT PAPERMAKING PRESS FELTS:
    Cross-reference art collection of porous felts, per se, which are utilized
    to carry, press and dewater a wet paper web and which felts are defined by
    structure or composition.

    (1)     Note.  The felt usually rides between a roll and the wet paper web.
     It is not to be confused with the foraminous wet paper forming means
    (e.g., wire) on which the paper is formed from paper pulp or with the
    impermeable belt utilized to convey and press the  wet paper web or with
    the drier section fabrics which generally have higher permeability.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS SUBCLASS:

    358.2,  for press and felt combinations having significant felt structure
    or having felt    composition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, particularly subclass 388, for woven fabric,
    per se.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for nonwoven fabric having structure.


CLS 162/901
TXT IMPERMEABLE BELTS FOR EXTENDED NIP PRESS:
    Cross-reference art collection of impermeable belts, per se, defined by
    structure or composition and utilized as a wet paper web contacting,
    pressing or carrying means that rides over the opposing conforming press
    means (e.g., shoe or shoes, etc.) to form with a cooperating roll the
    extended nip for pressing the wet paper web.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS SUBCLASS:

    358.4,  a press with felt that is utilized as an extended nip press and has
    an impermeable belt with structure or composition in combination therewith.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, particularly subclasses 844.1+, for
    conveyor belts, per se.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for belts with structure.


CLS 162/902
TXT WOVEN FABRIC FOR PAPERMAKING DRIER SECTION:
    Cross-reference art collection of woven fabrics for supporting or conveying
    wet paper web through the drying section of the papermaking system, not to
    be confused with felts utilized in the pressing section or members utilized
    in the paper forming section.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, particularly subclass
    243, for drier fabrics.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, particularly subclass 383, for woven fabric,
    per se.


CLS 162/903
TXT PAPER FORMING MEMBER (E.G., FOURDRINIER, SHEET FORMING MEMBER,
    ETC.):Cross-reference art collection of foraminous papermaking members, per
    se, onto which a wet paper web is formed from a slurry of fibrous pulp with
    or without other wet end paper additives.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS SUBCLASS:

    348+,   for papermaking apparatus having as an element thereof a flexible
    endless band forming member (e.g., Fourdrinier, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, particularly subclass 425, for from woven
    fabric.


CLS 162/904
TXT WITH SPECIFIED SEAM STRUCTURE OF PAPERMAKING BELT:
    Cross-reference art collection wherein structural details of the seam which
    joins two ends of papermaking fabric to produce an endless belt are
    recited.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, particularly subclass 383, for woven fabrics
    having seam structure.


CLS 163/
TTL NEEDLE AND PIN MAKING

CLS 163/
TXT This class contains special apparatus and processes for the manufacture of
    crocheting, knitting, and sewing needles, both for hand and machine use;
    also, machines and processes for making garment-fastening pins of the
    ordinary form, as well as safety pins.  All such single operations as
    bending, swaging, groove-milling, point-grinding, turning, and the like
    will be found in appropriate subclasses under the corresponding fuctional
    title.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, appropriate subclasses for methods of and apparatus
    for encompassing or encasing goods or materials with a separate cover or
    band which serves as means for identifying, protecting or unit handling the
    goods or materials.

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses, for a specified metal
    shaping operation.

    140,    Wireworking, appropriate subclass for devices for making wire
    objects, including hair pins.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 156+ for article orienting
    dispensing and feeding subcombinations not otherwise provided for, and
    subclasses 175+ for devices for forming stacks of disarranged articles,
    included in an article dispensing or feeding combination.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 108 and 109 for needle holders.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclass 65 for apparatus for
    buckling work and inserting a member, e.g., pin, through the buckled
    portion.


CLS 163/1
TXT Miscellaneous devices for completing the manufacture or for performing two
    or more operations upon sewing-needles for either hand or machine use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, subclass 315 for a needle-eye polisher.


CLS 163/2
TXT Machines and the like for making hook-ended needles for knitting or
    crocheting fabrics.


CLS 163/3
TXT Special machines for making tongued needles for knitting-machines or for
    attaching the tongues or latches to the bodies of such needles.


CLS 163/4
TXT Needle-making machines having sets of grippers radially arranged on a
    circular carrier which has a step-by-step rotation to bring the
    needle-blanks into position to be operated upon by the various shaping
    devices.  In some cases a plurality of carriers is shown, together with
    means for transferring the blank from one carrier to another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 217+ for article dispensers, not
    otherwise classified, which have endless belt or rotary mounted
    gripper-type discharge assistants, subclasses 224+ for article dispensers
    having manipulating means subsequent to discharge from a source of supply,
    and subclasses 239 and 294 for article dispensers feeding to clamp or
    holddown means.  See the class definition of Class 221 for a statement of
    the line between the classes and for the disposition of other similar
    disclosures.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, subclass 129 for similar carriers.


CLS 163/5
TXT Miscellaneous methods of making sewing and knitting needles, both for hand
    and machine use.

    (1)     Note.  For such processes as are discernible from an inspection of
    the article itself search subclasses  116+ in Class 66, Textiles:
    Knitting;  subclasses 222+ in Class 112, Sewing; and subclasses 102-104 in
    Class 223, Apparel Apparatus.


CLS 163/6
TXT Devices for cutting, heading and pointing ordinary straight pins.


CLS 163/7
TXT Machines and processes for making sheath- pointed garment-fastening pins.
    In most cases the machines are for shaping and attaching to the wire body
    the sheet-metal point-shield.


CLS 164/
TTL METAL FOUNDING

CLS 164/
TXT CONTENTS



    I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    A.      Summary Statement

    B.      Amplified Statement



    II.     GLOSSARY

    III.    LINES WITH OTHER CLASSES

    A.      Molding Process and Apparatus Classes

    B.      Composition Classes

    C.      Composite Article Forming Classes



    IV.     SEARCH NOTES AND INDEX TO OTHER CLASSES

    V.      SUBCLASS DEFINITIONS

    I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    A.      Summary Statement of Class Subject Matter.



    This is the generic class for:



    1.      METAL* CASTING
    Process and/or apparatus for shaping of fluid metallic material.



    2.      MOLD MAKING
    Process and/or apparatus, per se, for shaping of fluent material to produce
    a forming surface to carry out 1. supra.



    3.      PATTERN MAKING
    Process and/or apparatus for shaping a fluent material to produce a form or
    pattern to be used in 2. supra.



    4.      PRODUCT TREATING
    Process and/or apparatus for treating, mixing, or mechanically working the
    metallic material while molding or while the metallic material is in a
    mold, i.e., while carrying out an operation of 1. supra.

    5.      OTHER
    Process and/or apparatus not elsewhere provided for to perfect or effect 1.
    or 2. supra.*Throughout this class, the term "metal" is to include pure
    metal, metal alloys and inter-metallic compounds.

    B.      Amplified Statement of Class Subject Matter.

    This class in general provides for the foundry operations including from
    those of making the molds and patterns to those of casting a final metal
    product. These operations, particularly that of casting the metal, do not
    have to be limited to a foundry operation in the locational sense; but may
    be performed in any physical location, e.g., cast-welding rail ends in the
    field.

    The metal casting of this class involves the shaping of a free flowing
    liquid metal and as such is distinguished from other forms of metal
    deformation such as metal bending, forging, billet extrustion, etc., where
    the metal is never free flowing.  Also a shaping surface is required for
    placement in the class.  For example, forming metal by a shot tower will be
    found in Class 264 (process) and (apparatus).  The shaping surface, though,
    may remain as part of the final product.

    The mold making procedures provided for in this class are generally of the
    sand shaping type although any fluent material is included such as metal,
    plaster of paris, ceramic materials and synthetic plastics.  There molds so
    formed are limited to use in metal casting operations and are not of
    general utility.  Making molds by shaping of solid materials are found in
    the particular shaping classes except where the operation is combined with
    a subsequent metal casting step; in such a case, the operation is provided
    for in this class.

    The pattern making procedures provided for in this class are those of
    shaping a fluent material such as wax and other plastic materials.  Shaping
    a pattern from solid material such as by cutting from wood are provided for
    in this class only when followed by a further foundry operation such as
    forming a sand mold by using the pattern.

    The metal product treating operations provided for in this class are those
    that are performed in conjunction with a metal casting operation.  Alloying
    of metals while pouring the metal into a mold or while the metal is in a
    mold is provided for in this class.  Any reshaping of the metal while in
    the mold such as cutting, or solid deforming are provided for in this
    class.  Also, particularly in the case of a continuously casting operation,
    the rolling or bending of the continuously cast product (where the casting
    is also claimed) is provided for herein if some of the contiguous product
    is still in the mold.

    Other miscellaneous adjuncts which are used to perfect a foundry operation
    are provided for in this class if there is not a specific class which
    provides for the subject matter.  The main items of this type are flasks
    (subclasses 374+), mold jackets (subclasses 394+), strippers (subclasses
    401+), and core supporting devices, e.g., chaplets, (subclasses 397+).

    II.     GLOSSARY

    ADDITION  AGENT
    In founding, any material, including principal alloying constituents,
    densifiers, fluidizers, graphitizers, grain size controllers, etc., added
    to the molten metal to produce specific effects in the solid metal.

    CAPPING
    Intentionally stopping the rimming action in steel after completion of
    teeming.

    CARBURIZING (Carbonizing)
    Introducing carbon into ferrometals by heating above the transformation
    temperature range while in contact with carbonaceous material that may be
    solid, liquid, or gaseous.

    CASTING
    The formation of an article by pouring or forcing molten metal into a mold
    or die and permitting it to solidify.

    CHAPLET
    A device for holding a core in place.

    CHEEK
    The intermediate part of a flask or mold that has more than two parts.

    CHILL
    A piece of metal applied to the casting to hasten the solidification in
    that area.

    CONTINUOUS CASTING
    Process of forming a product of indeterminate length wherein a portion of
    the product is removed from a forming mold or surface as a further
    contiguous portion is cast.

    CONTINUOUS CASTING STRAND
    Semi-solidified product of a continuous casting process or apparatus
    comprising a generally molten center contained within a cooler solidified
    shell.

    COPE
    The upper or topmost section of a flask, mold, or pattern.

    CORE
    A separable part of a mold that is used to create openings and various
    shaped cavities in the casting.

    CORE BOX
    A box or container in which foundry cores are made.

    CORE PRINT
    A special projection on a pattern for forming impressions or core seats in
    the mold into which the core itself is inserted.  Also refers to the
    projection on the core itself which fits into the core seat.

    DRAFT
    The taper that is provided on otherwise verticle faces of a pattern to
    facilitate its removal from the sand mold.

    DRAG
    The lower or bottom section of a flask, mold, or pattern.  Also referred to
    as nowel.

    DRAW BAR
    A bar used for lifting the pattern from the sand of the mold.

    DROSS
    The scum that forms on the surface of molten metals.

    FLASH
    A thin film of metal formed on a casting where the metal has flowed between
    mating parts of the mold.

    FLASK
    A box, usually of metal or wood, used to hold sand in which a mold is
    formed.

    FLUX

    (1)     A substance that, by chemical action, promotes fusion of a solid
    material.

    (2)     A material capable of forming with gangue or other earthy matter, a
    liquid melt having the fusibility and chemical characteristics suitable to
    a specific furnace process.  Also, protective flux to retard undesirable
    reactions.

    GAGGER
    A piece of metal used to support sand in deep pockets of sand molds.

    GATE
    The end of the runner where the molten metal enters the mold.

    HOT-TOP
    An insulated portion of a mold that retains metal molten in that area so
    that it can feed into the mold and alleviate shrinkage voids.

    INCLUSIONS
    Particles of dirt, slag or other impurities occurring in metals that were
    mechanically entrapped during solidification.

    INGOT
    An open-mold casting that is intended for remelting and recasting or
    reworking to form finished products. Also referred to as billet.

    INGOT MOLD
    A heavy mold, usually of cast iron, into which molten metal is teemed, as
    in the casting of ingots.

    INVESTMENT PATTERN
    A pattern of a material having a low melting point for use in processes
    employing special techniques such as precision casting where pattern
    withdrawal would be difficult.

    MATCH PLATE PATTERN
    A pattern plate with several patterns secured thereto or a plate having
    matching pattern portions mounted on opposite sides.

    MELT
    Metal that has been melted in preparation for casting.

    NOWEL
    See Drag.

    PATTERN
    A replica of an object to be cast and around which the mold is constructed.

    PATTERN PLATE
    A board to which patterns are to be attached and which extends
    substantially over the flask opening.

    PIPE
    A cavity formed in metal during the solidification of the last portion of
    liquid metal, causing by contraction.

    PREFORMED PRODUCT PART
    A self-sustaining body which is to be incorporated in the final product as
    a distinct part of the same (e.g., insert, etc.).

    RAMMING
    The operation of compacting sand into a sand mold and around a pattern.

    RISER
    A reservoir of molten metal provided for feeding into a casting as the
    metal in the mold solidifies thus preventing voids.

    SAND MOLD
    A mold made of sand and used for the making of sand castings.  A green sand
    mold is a mold used as made without any drying operations and contains the
    original moisture of the mix.

    SAND TEMPERING
    Adding moisture to molding sand to make it workable.

    SCAVENGER
    A chemically active material added to molten metal to remove oxides, gases,
    or other impurities.

    SEGREGATION
    The occurrence of impurities, inclusions, and alloying constituents in
    nonuniform distribution.

    SHELL MOLDING
    A casting process utilizing a thin shell composed of resin-bonded sand for
    the cope and drag section of the mold.

    SINGLE CRYSTAL
    A metallic mass that consists of a single crystallographic grain instead of
    the usual polycrystalline material.

    SLAG
    The nonmetallic product of refining metal ores which results from the
    reaction of the flux with gangue.

    SPRUE
    Gates and risers of a mold assembly; the hole through which molten metal
    enters the mold; also, the waste portion attached to the product.

    STOOL
    The separable base of an ingot mold.  The base provides a surface onto
    which the mold is placed, and also serves as the bottom of the mold.

    SWEEP
    A small section of a regular pattern which is generally rotated in sand to
    provide the whole mold cavity.

    TEEMING
    Pouring metal into a mold.

    VENT
    Small opening in a mold to allow trapped air to escape.

    III.    LINES WITH OTHER CLASSES

    A.      Molding Process and Apparatus Classes



    1.      Molds Without Structure.

    A mold recited only by composition with no structure recited will go to the
    appropriate composition class, e.g., Class 106, 252, 420, 423, and 520, etc.

    Patents wherein all the claims are limited to a mold mentioned by name only
    with no structure recited and defined only in terms of the composition of
    individual layers are classified in the appropriate composite layer class,
    particularly; Class 75, Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions
    for Use Therein, Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal
    Particulate Mixtures, subclasses 228+ for metal stock, blanks, or
    indeterminate articles; Class 428, Stock Material or Miscellaneous
    Articles, subclasses 411+ and 615+ for nonmetallic and metallic composites,
    respectively, defined in terms of the composition of its components.

    2.      Metal

    Class 249 provides for molds of a static character for metal shaping.
    Generally any mold having a dynamic feature of the feature of the following
    list is included in this class (164):

    (a)     A mold combined with means or pressing molding material within the
    mold.

    (b)     A mold combined with a cover having projections penetrating into
    the fluent hardenable material upon movement of the cover to its operative
    position.

    (c)     A mold combined with means for moving the mold from one side to
    another.

    (d)     A mold formed of separable and unconnected parts combined with
    means to individually handle each part for assembly.

    (e)     A mold provided with a core or ejector combined with a machine-type
    means for actuating the core or ejector.

    (f)     A mold combined with means to position the work relative to the
    mold and which means functions to release the work to permit it to fall in
    the mold.

    (g)     A mold or core combined with means for creating differential
    pressure within the mold or core for dynamically shaping a molding material.

    (h)     A mold combined with means for feeding material thereto, except
    that a mold with an integral funnel element or a mold so modified to
    provide structure especially designed for supporting a feeding means, is
    classified in Class 249.

    (i)     A mold and means to vibrate the mold.

    (j)     A segmented female mold or core, e.g., tunnel type, etc., and power
    means, i.e., motor to move the segments to inoperative or operative
    position.

    (k)     Continuous or semi-continuous forming apparatus.

    Also, Class 249 provides for all static molds for metal shaping except for
    molds made of sand or a similar particulate material which is found in this
    class (164) subclasses 349+.  A mold which by claim or disclosure can be
    either sand or metal will be found in Class 249.  Combinations of sand and
    metal molds or cores are provided for in this class (164) as are sand
    (only) mold adjuncts (such as a metal chill).

    Classes 264 and 425 provide for processes and apparatus respectively for
    metal shaping by liquid or melt comminuting.  In this operation no mold is
    employed by the particles are shaped by the cohesive nature of the
    material, e.g., solidifying of a molten metal to a round ball while in free
    fall.

    Molding processes and apparatus for metal powders are found in Classes 419
    (processes with sintering), 264 (compacting processes), and 425 (particle
    compositioning apparatus).  In these powder metallurgical operations, the
    particles retain their identity as particles in the product.  If they were
    completely fused, such operations would be provided for in this class (164).

    Class 72, Metal Deforming, provides for patents for processes and apparatus
    for deforming metal.  The metal is in a self-sustaining conditioning during
    the formation. It may be "plastic" but it is not liquid (i.e., seeks its
    own level under the force of gravity). Subclasses 253.1+ provides for
    forming by extruding through an orifice.  The metal stock may be supplied
    to the feed chamber in the form of a liquid as a convenient way of handling
    a charge, but the charge must be solidified before it is forced through a
    die for placement in Class 72.

    Class 199, Type Casting, provides for processes and apparatus for casting
    metal to form either single type or type-bars that are adapted to be set up
    as a printing form. This class (164) provides for processes and apparatus
    for casting stereotype plates.

    Class 438, Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, provides for
    processes of casting and molding material wherein a semiconductor junction
    device or material is produced by claim or disclosure.

    3.      Nonmetallic Materials

    Class 249, Static Molds, provides for static molds for the general process
    of molding nonmetallic materials of Class 264, Plastic and Nonmetallic
    Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes, while Class 425, provides for the
    dynamic molding apparatus.  A claim or, if not claimed, a disclosure of
    molding either metals or nonmetals will be classified in the nonmetallic
    class.  A combination of a nonmetallic operation followed by an operation
    of this class (164) will be found in this class (164).  An operation of
    this class (164) followed by an operation of a nonmetallic shaping class
    will be found in the nonmetallic shaping class, i.e., Classes 264 and 425.

    Class 65 provides generally for processes of molding glass.  A patent
    disclosing working of named materials for this class (164) and Class 65 is
    classified in this class (164) unless the only species claimed is glass or
    the only specific example relates to glass in which case the patent is
    classified in Class 65.  Combined processes including metal casting and
    glass working and/or treating are classified in this class (164).

    B.      Composition Classes



    For placement of patents reciting a mold by name only see Note III A 1.
    above.

    1.      Metallic

    Class 75, Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use
    Therein, Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal
    Particulate Mixtures, provides for a process of refining combined with a
    Class 164 process (significant or nominal). Class 420, Alloys or Metallic
    Compositions, provides for a process of alloying followed by casting where
    the alloying or refining step is either (1) prior to or (2) subsequent to
    the casting operation, i.e., removed from mold.  This class (164) provides
    for apparatus for alloying or refining combined with casting apparatus
    where the alloying or refining is performed prior to or during casting.
    The term metal is utilized throughout the class to encompass free metal
    alloy or intermetallic compound as designated in Classes 75 and 420.

    The order of superiority among various metal, alloy, and metal stock areas
    and methods of manufacture involving them is as follows:

    1.      Class 419, Powder Metallurgy Processes.

    2.      Class 148, Metal Treatment, subclasses 22+, compositions for
    treatment of solid metal.

    3.      Class 75, Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use
    therein, Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal
    Particulate Mixtures, subclasses 300, 301, and 303+, gaseous, liquid, or
    solid treating compositions for liquid metal or charges, and subclass 302,
    welding rod defined by composition.

    4.      Class 75, Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use
    Therein, Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal
    Particulate Mixtures, subclasses 228+, consolidated metal powder
    compositions and subclasses 255+, loose metal particulate mixtures.

    5.      Class 420, Alloys or Metallic Compositions, claimed as products.

    6.      Class 148, Metal Treatment, subclasses 95-122, 194-287, and
    500-714, in class schedule order, providing for certain processes of
    treating solid or semi-solid metal by modifying or maintaining internal
    physical structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical properties of metal,
    processes of reactive coating of metal or processes of chemical-heat
    removing (e.g., flame-cutting, etc.) or burning of metal.  However, if
    metal casting, fusion bonding, machining, or working is involved, there is
    a requirement of significant heat treatment as described in section III, A,
    of the Class 148 definition.

    7.      Class 148, Metal Treatment, subclasses 33+ barrier layer stock
    material and subclasses 400+, stock.

    8.      Class 75, Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use
    Therein, Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal
    Particulate Mixtures, subclassses 331+, processes of making solid
    particulate alloys directly from liquid metal and subclasses 343+,
    processes of producing purifying alloys in powder form.

    9.      Class 75, Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use
    Therein, Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal
    Particulate Mixtures, subclasses 10.1+ and 10.67, processes of making
    alloys by electrothermic, electromagnetic, or electrostatic processes.

    10.     Class 420, Alloys or Metallic Compositions, processes of
    manufacture.

    11.     Class 75, Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use
    Therein, Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal
    Particulate Mixtures, subclasses 330+, processes of making metal and
    processes of treating liquid metals and liquid alloys and consolidating
    metalliferous material.

    12.     Class 204, Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, processes.

    13.     Class 164, Metal Founding, subclasses 1+, processes.

    14.     Class 266, Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 44+, processes of
    operating metallurgical apparatus.

    This list is not complete and may be added to as the proper relationship of
    other areas is determined.

    2.      Nonmetallic

    This class (164) provides for a process of shaping, per se, of a mold,
    pattern or core device which is to be utilized in a metal casting
    operation, where there are significant shaping steps recited. The line with
    the various chemical composition classes, e.g., 106, 252, 423, and 520,
    etc. and this class (164) is the same generally as that set forth in class
    definitions II A of Class 264.  Clarification as to some of the technology
    peculiar to this class and any departures from the line set forth in Class
    264 will be set forth below.

    These lines are generally applicable where there is a mixing or blending of
    the  mold, pattern or core composition recited to take place prior to the
    mold-step or a chemical reaction during the molding step.  Where there is
    no claimed disclosure as to a chemical reaction, mixing or blending the
    patent is classified in this class even when only nominal shaping is
    recited.

    Unless otherwise provided for, the recitation in a claim of a significant
    molding or shaping step will bring a patent to this class. Significant
    molding operations include named shaping by compaction, centrifugal force,
    spraying or slinging material against a shaping surface, or extruding of
    mold materials to form a shaping surface, and combinations of two or more
    broad molding or shaping steps and other combinations as set forth in Class
    264.

    Patents reciting physical or mechanical treatment subsequent to a broad
    molding step, e.g., shaping or molding broadly plus cutting or removing of
    excess mold material or heating subsequent to removal of a shaped article
    from forming surface to complete the cure will be placed in this class.
    Mere stripping alone or nominal return to ambient temperature is not
    considered to be an after treatment or a subsequent treatment within the
    scope outlined above.

    C.      Composite Article Forming Classes



    1.      Coating

    The distinction between coating a metal onto a base for Class 118 or  Class
    427 and casting a metal onto the base for this class is predicated upon the
    presence of confining means for the molten metal as it solidifies on the
    base. If the melt is confined in all directions on the base against the
    force of gravity it is considered a process or apparatus appropriate for
    this class.  The confining means may be structural dams, previously
    solidified casting material, or part of the base itself.

    Also, if a metal layer is formed in a mold and another layer coated on the
    initial layer while it is still in a mold the operation is considered
    molding of plural layers for this class rather than coating since the
    operation takes place in a mold.

    2.      Fusion Bonding

    This class (164) provides for a process and apparatus for joining two or
    more preforms or portions of the same preform, where (a) a removable mold
    member is used and (b) the molten metallic material is confined in all
    directions against the force of gravity (hole filling is considered a
    joining of portions).  Class 228 provides for fusion bonding therefor, not
    meeting the above limitation.  Also, Class 219 provides for processes and
    apparatus for bonding or welding by means of electric heating.

    IV.     SEARCH NOTES AND INDEX TO OTHER CLASSES

    Only a limited amount of cross-referencing and cross-noting has been done
    between process and apparatus subclasses where the subject matter provides
    for is of comparable scope.  One is cautioned therefore, to utilize both
    the process and apparatus sections of the schedule when determining fields
    of search.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, appropriate subclasses
    for apparatus for freeing casting of residual sand, especially subclasses
    94 and 304.

    29,     Metal Working, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 527.1+
    for processes involving casting and additional treatment of the casting
    after it is removed from the mold.  This class (164) provides for operation
    of preparing, e.g., coating, cutting, shaping by deforming, etc., a preform
    for a casting operation where the preform is the casting metal or a part of
    a final composite product, or removing a portion of the preform after the
    casting operation where the removal was to perfect the casting operation,
    e.g., position preform during compositing.  See also subclasses 526.2+ in
    Class 29 for processes of separation or localization of as-cast defects in
    ingots (e.g., anti-pipe).  Also, see IIIA1, and IIIC2, supra.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses
    for, per se, drying of a formed mold, and especially subclass 437 for
    processes of treating hollow articles or articles held in or on forms.

    53,     Package Making, subclass 423 for packing operations including the
    step of confining a fluid material so as to form a closure seal by
    solidification.

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, appropriate subclasses for
    processes and apparatus for making chains in which some manufacturing
    operation more than casting and joining is involved.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, see IIIA3, supra.

    72,     Metal Deforming, see IIIA2, supra.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, appropriate subclasses depending upon the metal produced for
    combined processes involving refining operations where not performed in the
    mold or while teeming into mold.  Also, see  IIIA2, and IIIB1, supra.

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for pressing
    particulate material.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 38.2+ for
    compositions which are (a) specialized for use in making molds, (b)
    specialized for use in coating molds, or, (c) molds claimed solely in terms
    of the composition of which they are composed.  Also, see IIIA1 and IIIB2,
    supra.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for coating
    molds where no more of the casting apparatus is claimed than is necessary
    to present the mold to the coating device or station.  Also, see IIIC1,
    supra.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses for
    methods of freeing castings of residual sand only, where the cleaning is
    effected by contact with a liquid.  See subclasses 22-24 for processes of
    cleaning the internal surfaces of hollow work and subclasses 166+ for
    corresponding apparatus.

    140,    Wireworking, for process and apparatus for making wire containing
    products in which some wireworking operation more than composite casing or
    joining is involved.

    148,    Metal Treatment, particularly subclasses 538+ for combined
    processes of casting and  significant heat treatment after removal from the
    mold or shaping surface to modify or maintain   the internal physical
    structure  (i.e., microstructure) or chemical property of metal.  See
    section III, A, of the Class 148 definition to determine what constitutes
    significant heat treatment.  In continuous casting operations, wherein the
    contiguous product is still connected to the casting surface, a step
    involving significant heat treatment of the solid or semi-solid metal which
    occurs outside or away from the molding surface goes to Class 148.
    However, chemical heat removing (e.g., flame-cutting, etc.) or burning
    (i.e., oxidation) of a continuously cast metal goes to Class 164, if some
    of the continuously cast and contiguous product is connected to the shaping
    surface.  Cutting operations, in the mold, goes to Class 164.  See,
    particularly subclasses 194+ of Class 148 for processes of chemical-heat
    removing (e.g., flame cutting) or burning (i.e., oxidizing) of metal.  See
    subclasses 100+ of Class 148 for combined processes involving casting
    followed by intentional alteration of the magnetic properties of the
    casting after removal from the mold.

    163,    Needle and Pin Making, for processes and apparatus for making
    needles and pins in which some manufacturing operation more than metal
    casting is involved.

    199,    Type Casting, see IIIA2, supra.

    219,    Electric Heating, see IIIC2, supra.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for ladles, crucibles, or other
    metal containers having dispensing structure such as a pouring lip or spout.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, see IIIC2 supra.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses for processes and apparatus for disintegrating a mold or core
    not associated with a flask or casting.

    249,    Static Molds, see IIIA2 and IIIA3, supra.

    252,    Compositions, see IIIA1 and IIIB2, supra.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses for similar processes of molding and shaping
    nonmetallic materials especially subclasses 219+ for processes of mold
    making.  See also, IB, IIIA2, IIIA3, and IIIB2, supra.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for apparatus
    adapted for the treatment of metals particularly subclasses 168+ for
    apparatus for melting or otherwise treating molten metal and subclasses
    275+ for molten metal receptacles.

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 86+
    for a clamp means, per se, even if a mold or flask is named as the article
    held.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, appropriate subclasses for
    electric furnaces such as arc, induction and resistance furnaces.

    417,    Pumps, appropriate subclasses for pumps, per se, for molten metal.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, appropriate subclasses depending
    upon the metal value utilized for combined processes involving alloying
    operations where not performed in the mold or while teeming into the mold.
    Also, see II,A,1, III,A,2, and III,B,1, supra.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, See III A I and III B 2, supra

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus, see
    III A2 and III A 3.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 133+ for a process of coating a mold.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, see III A I, supra.

    433,    Dentistry, appropriate subclasses for methods and apparatus which
    effect specific dental steps (e.g., taking impressions of teeth, trial
    filling, etc.).

    451,    Abrading, for a method or apparatus for disintegrating a sand mold
    or for cleaning a casting by an abrading operation.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers.









    V.      SUBCLASS DEFINITIONS


CLS 164/1
TXT Methods under the class definition.

    (1)     Note.  Many of these subclasses have corresponding apparatus
    subclasses, therefore, a complete search may  involve apparatus subclasses,
    which subclasses start at subclass 139 and continue to end of the class.


CLS 164/2
TXT Process under subclass 1 directed to forming a surface capable of conveying
    intelligence or a design by reproducing in printed form.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is the combination of forming the mat or
    matrix and casting of metal thereagainst to form a plate.

    (2)     Note.  The step of applying a backup member to a preformed printing
    plate is not considered forming a printing plate to be incorporated herein.
     This operation is found in the composite article forming area, i.e.,
    subclasses 91+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91+,    for processes of producing composite printing plates by casting
    backup metal to a preformed printing surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 21 for processes of finishing (cutting,
    grooving, etc.) stereotype plates.

    199,    Type Casting, for processes of casting elements or bars of a
    printing form.

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclass 69 for processes of electroforming
    printing plates.

    249,    Static Molds, for static stereotype molds, particularly subclass
    138 for pivotable type stereotype molds.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclass 309 for a planing
    operation performed on a concave surface such as a stereotype plate.


CLS 164/3
TXT Process under subclass 2 wherein a dynamic pressure, e.g., vacuum,
    pneumatic, hydraulic, etc., is directly applied to a molten metal to shape
    the same.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61+,    for processes of vacuum forming.

    113+,   for pressure casting of articles in  general.


CLS 164/4.1
TXT With measuring, testing, inspecting, or condition determination:

    Process under subclass 1 which includes the step of visually, audibly, or
    chemically testing, sampling, or inspecting, or otherwise physically or
    mechanically determining some variable condition in a cast article, molding
    material, mold structure, or casting surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150.1+, for metal casting apparatus provided with inspection means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 407.01+ for processes of testing or
    indicating in a mechanical manufacturing operation.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 29.1+ and 29.12+ for processes of
    testing, inspecting, measuring, or condition determination in a glass
    forming or molding operation.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for measuring or
    testing operations, per se.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 40.1 for processes of measuring, testing or inspecting in a
    plastic molding operation.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses, for
    processes of electrical measuring and testing.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for measuring
    or testing of a thermal quantity, per se.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, for processes of
    chemical testing.


CLS 164/5
TXT Process under subclass 1 in which excess material in the form of flash,
    trim, rejected products or used mold materials resulting from an
    intermittent or continuous process or treating materials therefor, are
    recycled or reused in the molding operation with or without purification,
    reclamation or separation of the desired constituents from contaminants.

    (1)     Note.  To be placed herein, a patent must recite a recycling of
    material employed previously in the mold making or casting process.

    (2)     Note.  The use of scrap or worn materials employed in commerce are
    not considered to involve a recycling step.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92.1,   for processes of repairing or restoring articles for use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 37 for processes of recycling of plastic molding or treating
    materials.


CLS 164/6
TXT Process under subclass 1 which includes the step of producing by shaping
    (1) a mold, pattern or core device either as a, per se, operation by a
    method within the definition of this class or (2) in combination with a
    step of employing said mold or core device in the production of a cast
    product by a process classifiable in this class in which latter instance
    the mold or core device may be formed by methods provided elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  Also included herein is the shaping of a mold to be used in
    nonmetal molding of fluent or flowable materials if such shaping is
    performed on fluent metallic material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    for casting processes employing particular shaping surface material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 38.2+ for particular
    mold compositions.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 329+ for a method of wood shaping.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclass 70 for processes of electroforming
    dies.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 219+ for processes of mold forming including sand molds for
    nonmetallic shaping.


CLS 164/7.1
TXT Utilizing a vacuum during shaping:

    Process under subclass 6 in which a less than ambient pressure is employed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61+,    for processes of utilizing a vacuum in shaping metallic material.

    160.1+, for casting apparatus provided with means to shape a forming
    surface in the form of a shielding film.


CLS 164/7.2
TXT To apply consumable shielding film to shaping surface:

    Process under subclass 7.1 wherein an impervious consumable membrane is
    adhered onto a particulate shaping surface by a vacuum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160.2,  for casting apparatus provided with means to apply film or suction
    directly to mold material with a shielding film.


CLS 164/8
TXT Process under subclass 6 wherein a destructible pattern formed of frozen
    mercury is utilized in the shaping operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34+,    for processes of employing destructible patterns in general.


CLS 164/9
TXT Process under subclass 6 directed to (1) shaping the forming surface
    utilizing the material which is to be ultimately cast as the pattern or
    preform member, or (2) shaping the forming surface wherein a preform member
    which is to be integrated in the material to be cast as a final product is
    embedded in the mold material during the shaping or forming thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The product part in (2) above to be included herein must be
    one which is individually handled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23+,    for a process of forming a composite plural part or multi-layered
    mold.

    91+,    for, per se, processes of embedding a preform member in the cast
    metal.

    231,    for core shaping apparatus with means for positioning a preform
    part which is to be incorporated in the final cast product.

    236,    for a pattern member with means for holding a preform part which is
    to be incorporated in the final cast product.

    332+,   for apparatus for shaping metallic material including means to
    position a preform part.


CLS 164/10
TXT Process under subclass 9 wherein plural preform bodies, i.e., final product
    part or material, are utilized in forming or included in the shaping member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for process of uniting plural preforms.


CLS 164/11
TXT Process under subclass 10 wherein the final product parts or materials are
    embedded in or held by a core member of the mold structure.


CLS 164/12
TXT Process under subclass 6 directed to fixing or hardening a formed shaping
    surface by (1) igniting and burning the mold surface prior to pouring the
    casting or (2) by forcibly directing an inert gaseous medium against the
    shaping surface.

    (1)     Note.  The gaseous hardening agent to be included herein cannot
    chemically react with the mold materials.

    (2)     Note.  The gaseous hardening agent must be under a positive
    pressure application to be included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for process of hardening a shaping surface by treating with a
    chemically reactive gas.


CLS 164/13
TXT Process under subclass 6 directed to shaping pattern which is or is
    intended to be attached to a pattern, board or plate.

    (1)     Note.  Generally the plate or board upon which the pattern is
    attached or an integral part thereof substantially covers the open portion
    of a flask member.


CLS 164/14
TXT Process under subclass 6 directed to shaping a forming surface combined
    with the step of coating the so formed surface with a treating material for
    perfecting a subsequent casting operation.

    (1)     Note.  The primary function of the coating provided for herein is
    for treating the casting surface to perfect the casting operation, e.g.,
    release agent or lubricant to allow easy withdrawal of cast product,
    fluxing or wetting agent.  If the main purpose of the coating is to retain
    or shape the work during the casting operation and not merely to perfect
    the casting operation then the operation will be found in subclasses 23+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23+,    for process of forming composite plural part or multi-layered mold
    and especially subclass 33 wherein a mold surface is lined with mold
    material which functions to shape or retain the molten material during the
    casting operation.

    55.1+,  for process of lining or coating a casting surface with a material
    which is to be alloyed with the molten casting material.

    66.1+,  for process of coating a casting surface with a material which
    produces an inert or reducing gaseous atmosphere upon teeming of the metal.

    72+,    for process of coating-treating a casting surface combined with
    casting.

    91+,    for process of lining a casting surface with a material which forms
    a composite layer or coating with the cast material.

    138,    for casting processes employing a particular mold coating.

    473,    for continuous casting processes incorporating an addition or agent
    in a melt system.

    475,    for continuous casting processes including an inert or reducing gas
    atmosphere step.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 38.22+ for
    compositions for coating and lining molds.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 133+ for processes of mold coating,
    per se.


CLS 164/15
TXT Process under subclass 6 directed to shaping from a fluent material the
    forming surface which confines and controls the ultimate desired shape of
    the molten metal that is to be formed therein.


CLS 164/16
TXT Process under subclass 15 directed to perfecting the hardening of the
    forming surface of a mold structure by contacting the surface with a
    gaseous medium which is chemically reactive with the mold material.


CLS 164/17
TXT Process under subclass 15 directed to mechanically removing material from
    the surface of a shaped mold structure.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is the step of mechanically sub-dividing the
    mold structure, i.e., dividing a mold structure into component parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161+,   for apparatus for cutting the final mold as well as for cutting or
    sweeping to form the mold.


CLS 164/18
TXT Process under subclass 15 directed to successively shaping a plurality of
    molds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167+,   for apparatus for shaping sequential molds combined with casting
    means.


CLS 164/19
TXT Process under subclass 15 directed to applying the mold material, either in
    bulk, droplet (mist) or particulate form, by propelling the material
    through space under dynamic pressure against the shaping surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for process of spraying liquid metallic material against a shaping
    surface to form a cast product.


CLS 164/20
TXT Process under subclass 19 directed to applying the solid mold material in
    particulate form to the shaping surface.


CLS 164/21
TXT Process under subclass 20 wherein the particulate mold material that is
    sprayed against the shaping surface contains a resin material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass generally includes shell type molding
    processes where the resin material functions as a binder.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 520, Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, for a
    resin or composition containing a resin.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165+,   for shell molding apparatus.

    526+,   for processes of utilizing resin containing mold materials
    generally.


CLS 164/22
TXT Process under subclass 20 directed to employing compressed air as a ram or
    piston to force sand from a cartridge or container in which the material is
    supplied in the shape of a compacted column or the like against the shaping
    surface.

    (1)     Note.  The compressed air does not come into actual contact with
    the sand that is being forced against the shaping surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for those patents in which a stream of compressed air leaves the
    machine chamber carrying with it sand which is aerated before and during
    the blowing process.


CLS 164/23
TXT Process under subclass 15 wherein different parts or layers of mold
    materials are integrated by a shaping or forming operation.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is the non treating type coating or lining
    of the mold structure and also the impregnation of the mold structure.

    (2)     Note.  A lining which functions to retain the casting material is
    included herein.

    (3)     Note.  The mere insertion of a reinforcing member in the mold
    material is not sufficient to bring the patent here.

    (4)     Note.  If a flask is a mere container for the mold material and
    does not affect the final shaping structure, the patent will be provided
    elsewhere on other features.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for processes of mold forming plus subsequent treating coating.

    72+,    where the coating merely perfects the casting operation but does
    not itself shape the material, e.g., lubricate.


CLS 164/24
TXT Process under subclass 23 in which the different portions or parts of the
    mold are successively shaped or formed on the same mold shaping member,
    e.g., pattern member.


CLS 164/27
TXT Process under subclass 23 in which at least two different separable
    portions or parts of the mold structure are shaped or formed.


CLS 164/28
TXT Process under subclass 27 directed to shaping plural separable parts which
    includes shaping a core member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228+,   for, per se, apparatus for shaping cores.


CLS 164/29
TXT Process under subclass 27 directed to shaping cope and drag sections of the
    mold member.


CLS 164/30
TXT Process under subclass 23 in which a core is placed, disposed or sustained
    in fixed relation with the forming surface of the mold.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137,    for a process for assembling mold parts.

    340,    for apparatus, including a mold, with means to position a core.

    370,    for cores having integral aligning means.

    397+,   for core centering or supporting means, per se.


CLS 164/31
TXT Process under subclass 30 wherein a plurality of cores are utilized.


CLS 164/32
TXT Process under subclass 31 directed to process of shaping a mold wherein
    plural cores are maintained in spaced relationship within the mold cavity.


CLS 164/33
TXT Process under subclass 23 directed to forming a layer on the mold shaping
    surface which functions to shape or retain the molten material during the
    casting operation.

    (1)     Note.  Before placing a patent herein a determination must be made
    that the lining functions to shape or retain the molten cast material.
    Such guidelines as the thickness of the applied lining, whether or not
    there are means, i.e., stops or dams, for confining the lining material in
    the mold, whether or not there are significant shaping steps disclosed,
    e.g., compacting, permanency of the lining are to be considered in making
    the determination.

    (2)     Note.  The combination of shaping one layer of a multi-layered mold
    and separately forming after removal from the initial shaping member a
    lining on the preformed layer would be placed herein.

    (3)     Note.  Generally the patents found herein are those disclosing
    lining centrifugal mold flasks with mold materials.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for a process of shaping a forming surface combined with the step
    of coating the casting surface with a treating material.

    55.1+,  for a process of lining or coating a casting surface with a
    material which is to be alloyed with the molten casting material.

    66.1+,  for a process of coating a casting surface with a material which
    produces an inert or reducing gaseous atmosphere upon teeming the metal.

    72+,    for a process of coating-treating a casting surface combined with
    the step of casting.

    91+,    for a process of lining a casting surface with a material which
    forms a composite layer or coating with the cast material.

    473,    for continuous casting processes incorporating an addition or agent
    in a melt system.

    475,    for a continuous casting process with an inert or reducing gas
    atmosphere.


CLS 164/34
TXT Process under subclass 15 directed to extracting a destructable pattern
    from the mold structure by (1) a chemical change, e.g., burning, etc., (2)
    a physical change of state, e.g., liquefying, etc., or (3) by reducing a
    solid to a flowable granular material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246,    for a destructible type pattern.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 423+, for processes employing transitory
    or temporary material or parts.

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 61+ for a static shaping surface having a
    destructible feature.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 221 for processes of destroying a pattern to disassociate the same
    from a plastic shaping mold.


CLS 164/35
TXT Process under subclass 34 directed to withdrawing the pattern in the liquid
    state.


CLS 164/36
TXT Process under subclass 35 wherein a fluid medium is used to effect the
    liquid extraction of the pattern.

    (1)     Note.  The fluid medium used herein would include any solvent
    fluid, e.g., steam, hot water, etc.


CLS 164/37
TXT Process under subclass 15 directed to the step of actively pressing or
    packing the mold materials against a mold shaping surface to form a
    densified structure.

    (1)     Note.  The pressing or packing force must be greater than the force
    of gravity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 35+ for process of compressing miscellaneous
    materials.


CLS 164/38
TXT Process under subclass 37 directed to applying two or more pressure forces
    which are different in kind upon the mold material to densify the same.


CLS 164/39
TXT Process under subclass 37 wherein the active pressing or packing is
    effected by jarring the mold structure with a sudden blow or blows or by
    oscillating the structure.


CLS 164/40
TXT Process under subclass 37 directed to shaping a forming surface by
    compacting the mold material against a shaping member, e.g., pattern,
    wherein the shaping member is utilized as the primary force applying member.

    (1)     Note.  Patents directed to forming a hollow mold structure by
    exerting radial pressure to the mold material are included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    187+,   for apparatus wherein the pattern member acts as the pressing
    member and including drawing means.


CLS 164/44
TXT Process under subclass 15 directed to the extracting of patterns from a
    mold by a mechanical process.

    (1)     Note.  Stripping by name alone does not place a patent here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34+,    for processes of removing a pattern by destruction.


CLS 164/45
TXT Process under subclass 6 directed to forming patterns by shaping plastic
    mold materials.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9+,     for processes of utilizing the final product material as a pattern.

    13,     for processes of shaping a plate-type pattern.


CLS 164/46
TXT Process under subclass 1 wherein a shaped body of metallic material is
    produced by effecting a deposition of a gas, vapor or projected comminuted
    melted material, e.g., spray, etc., on a shaping surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for process of spray-shaping a forming surface from molten material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 5+ for the process of comminuting a liquid material (including
    metal) to form discrete solid particles, and subclass 309 for spraying or
    flinging plastic material against a shaping surface.


CLS 164/47
TXT Process under subclass 1 which includes the step of shaping molten metal by
    means of a molding surface.

    (1)     Note.  Metallic material to be incorporated herein must be a pure
    metal alloy, metallic composition, or intermetallic compound.  See the
    class definition of Class 420, Alloys or Metallic Compositions, for the
    general definition of the terms alloy, or metallic composition as used
    herein.


CLS 164/48
TXT Process under subclass 47 wherein an energy quantity is applied directly to
    the work material as (1) an electromagnetic wave which is included in the
    frequency spectrum including and above audio frequency range (i.e., 50
    cps), (2) an electric field or force or (3) an explosive force.

    (1)     Note.  Included are such electromagnetic waves as radio, infrared,
    light, ultraviolet and gamma rays.

    (2)     Note.  Application of sonic and supersonic wave energy are included
    herein.  The mere application of vibratory or oscillatory forces without
    effecting transmission of wave energy, e.g, subsonic, are provided for
    below on other features.

    (3)     Note.  For radiant energy to be included herein, it must be
    specifically claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for process of compacting mold materials by oscillating or
    vibrating.

    71.1,   for process of chemically treating cast material by vibrating.

    478,    for continuous or semi-continuous casting processes wherein the
    mold is vibrated or reciprocated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry, Electrical and Wave Energy, generally for processes in
    which a chemical change is effected by means of electrical or wave energy.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, for electrolytic treatment.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 324+ for methods and apparatus devoted
    to the corona irradiation of material, subclasses 432+ for methods and
    apparatus for irradiating contained, supported or transferred fluent
    material, subclasses 453.11+ for methods and apparatus including supports
    for irradiated objects with or without the irradiating source and
    subclasses 492.1+ for methods and apparatus to irradiate objects or
    material.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 405+ for processes involving the use of electrical or wave
    energy in plastic molding operations; subclass 84 for process of applying
    an explosive force to make a nonmetallic article.


CLS 164/53
TXT Process under subclass 47 wherein a chemically reactive material is
    employed in or on the body of casting material itself to raise or maintain
    the temperature thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Applying an open flame to the casting material is not
    considered a chemical reaction for this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The reactive heating does not have to be in the mold cavity
    but may be in some portion of the mold body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123,    for processes of applying an insulation to a melt surface to
    control solidification.

    124,    for processes of directly applying a flame or gas to the melt
    surface to control solidification.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclasses 250+, for a fuel
    composition intended to generate heat without light.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclass 959 for processes of thermite type reduction-treating of
    metals.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, subclasses 37+, for
    metal containing thermic compositions.


CLS 164/54
TXT Process under subclass 53 wherein an exothermic chemical reaction in the
    proximity of a metal body in solid state reduces the metal to a liquid in
    an area of composition to effect a joining.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91+,    for processes of compositing in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, appropriate subclasses for formation of a
    metallic bonded joint between parts or portions of the same part.  Molten
    filler material may be confined or retained by the shape or space between
    the parts so long as a mold device is not employed.


CLS 164/55.1
TXT Incorporating addition or chemically reactive agent to metal casting
    material:

    Process under subclass 47 wherein a material is directly added to a melt
    system to (a) either become incorporated therein physically, e.g.,
    alloying, or (b) cause a chemical reaction to affect the metallic system.

    (1)     Note.  The added material may include principal alloying
    constituent, densifiers, fluidizers, chemical graphitizers scavengers,
    grain-size controller, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, appropriate subclasses for processes for producing metals.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 1+ for processes of
    chemically treating mixtures to obtain metal containing compounds.


CLS 164/56.1
TXT To scavenge:

    Process under subclass 55.1 directed to adding a chemically active, e.g.,
    scavenger, material to the metallic casting material to remove oxides,
    gases, or other impurities therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, appropriate subclasses for processes of treating molten metal to
    remove unwanted components therefrom.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 1+ for processes of
    chemically treating mixtures to obtain metal-containing compounds.


CLS 164/57.1
TXT Adding metal-containing material:

    Process under subclass 55.1 directed to adding a metal-containing material
    to the metallic casting material.

    (1)     Note.  The metal material may be in the form of a free metal,
    alloy, compound, or composition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270.1,  for apparatus of this class combined with alloying means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, appropriate subclasses for
    alloying processes.  In Class 420, an alloying processes is classified with
    the composition of the specific alloy made.  Subclasses drawn to processes
    of making alloys are:  18+, processes of adding magnesium to cast iron;
    29+, processes of making cast iron; 71, processes of making over 9 percent
    chromium steel, e.g., stainless steel; 84+, processes of adding lead,
    bismuth, selenium, tellurium or calcium to ferrous alloys, usually to
    improve machineability; 115+, processes of making low chromium steel; 129,
    general processes of making ferrous alloys; 590, general processes of
    making alloys.


CLS 164/58.1
TXT To produce casting having nonhomogeneous composition:

    Process under subclass 57.1 wherein the addition of the metal-containing
    material to the metallic-casting material produces a casting having a
    nonuniform composition.

    (1)     Note.  To be placed herein, the patent must disclose that a
    nonhomogeneous casting is produced.  A casting having a varying alloy
    composition across a given cross section comes within the scope of this
    subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 400+ for metallic stock material
    produced by a method of this subclass (Class 164, subclass 58.1).


CLS 164/59.1
TXT Utilizing preform body:

    Process under subclass 58.1 directed to casting upon a preform body which
    remains a part of the casting product.

    (1)     Note.  To be placed herein, the preform must retain its identity in
    the cast product.

    (2)     Note.  A mere coating of the mold surface is not considered a
    preform body.

    (3)     Note.  Plural preform bodies to be encompassed herein must be
    individually handled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for coating a preform to provide a bonding-alloying layer with
    subsequently cast metal.

    91+,    for composite article formation.


CLS 164/61
TXT Process under subclass 47 directed to exhausting or partially exhausting
    air or other gases from the environment of the casting material, before,
    during or after casting by applying a pressure differential directly to the
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.1,    for processes of applying a vacuum in a mold forming operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, appropriate subclasses for vacuum treatment of metals.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 500+ for processes of vacuum forming plastic materials, and
    subclasses 101+ for processes of vacuum treating work.


CLS 164/62
TXT Process under subclass 61 directed to applying, in addition to the
    differential in pressure effected by the vacuum, a dynamic pressure medium.


CLS 164/63
TXT Process under subclass 61 wherein the pressure differential created by the
    vacuum effects the transport of the casting material to the mold cavity
    thus effecting the shaping of the material.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are those processes of applying a vacuum
    through a mold to obtain a more perfect reproduction.


CLS 164/65
TXT Process under subclass 61 wherein a vacuum is present in the mold
    environment during the introduction of the casting material into the mold.


CLS 164/66.1
TXT Applying an inert or reducing gaseous atmosphere to work:

    Process under subclass 47 wherein the work material is subjected to an
    inert or reducing gaseous environment either before, during, or after
    charging the casting material to a mold.

    (1)     Note.  An ambient atmosphere which may be inert is not included
    herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, various subclasses for processes for gaseous treating of metal.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 633+ or 712+ for combined processes of
    significant heat treatment of solid or semi-solid metal and treatment with
    a special gaseous composition.


CLS 164/67.1
TXT Atmosphere effected by chemical reaction:

    Process under subclass 66.1 wherein the inert or reducing atmosphere is
    effected by a chemical reaction involving the casting material or is
    initiated by the introduction of a reactive material into the mold
    environment.


CLS 164/68.1
TXT While melting casting material:

    Process under subclass 66.1 wherein the casting material is rendered molten
    under the affect of a inert or reducing gaseous ambient.


CLS 164/69.1
TXT With step of subdividing or removing material from product or preform
    (e.g., cutting, mechanically or by heat, sandblasting, chemical milling,
    etc.):

    Process under subclass 47 wherein (a) a portion of a preformed body or a
    body formed during the casting operation is removed, or (b) where a body is
    reduced into two or more parts.

    (1)     Note.  The body portion may be removed to reduce the size thereof
    or, as in the case of a preform, to perfect the bond between the preform
    and the metal cast, e.g., as in cutting to form interlocking means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101+,   for process of picking or cleaning a preform prior to compositing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 21 and 24 for cutting or finishing
    printing members; and subclass 527.6 for casting combined with cutting or
    finishing after removal from the mold.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 13+ for processes of metal cutting.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 138+ for process of shaping and subsequent cutting of plastic
    material.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 28+ for a process of abrading metal.


CLS 164/70.1
TXT With product trimming, cutting, or breaking prior to removal from mold:

    Process under subclass 69.1 which includes the finishing of the casting by
    trimming, cutting, or breaking before removal from the mold or mold part.

    (1)     Note.  The term "mode" as used herein includes (a) the core or
    cores, (b) corelike elements associated with gate portions of the casting
    and used for handling, and (c) conveying means serving to support a
    continuous casting while said casting is still associated with the mold.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     for processes of incorporating a product-dividing member during
    casting.

    140,    for apparatus to cast printing plates including means for cutting
    or trimming the casting.

    161+,   for apparatus for shaping a forming surface, e.g., mold, including
    cutting or sweeping means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 52 for static mold employing a static means
    to produce a groove or depression in the product to facilitate breaking or
    cutting.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 161 for flash or sprue removal in a plastic molding operation.


CLS 164/71.1
TXT With vibratory treatment of casting material:

    Process under subclass 47 directed to vibrating the casting material to
    effect an internal change in the structure of the material, e.g., by
    removing gases, inclusions, or by refining the crystalline structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for vibratory treatment of molding materials.

    260+,   for apparatus which includes a treating or nontreating operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclass 558 for processes of treating solid or
    semi-solid metal outside the mold with high frequency vibration.


CLS 164/72
TXT Process under subclass 47 which includes the step of applying a coating to
    the forming surface before the metal is introduced to the surface.

    (1)     Note.  A coating coming within the scope of this subclass is one
    which merely perfects the casting operation but does not itself shape the
    material, e.g., to lubricate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for process of forming a coating or lining on the mold shaping
    surface which functions to retain and shape the work during the casting
    operation.

    57.1+,  for processes including the coating of a mold surface with alloying
    material.

    138,    for particular materials utilized as mold coatings or linings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 38.22+, for mold
    coating compositions.

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 114.1 for static molds including a coating
    or adherent layer.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 133 for processes of mold coating, per
    se.


CLS 164/74
TXT Process under subclass 72 wherein the coating produces a gas during the
    casting operation.

    (1)     Note.  The gas may be produced by a chemical reaction, e.g.,
    burning, decomposition, etc., or by vaporization.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55.1+,  for processes of incorporating gaseous constituents in the casting
    material.

    66.1+,  for processes of forming an inert or reducing gaseous atmosphere.

    473,    for continuous casting processes incorporating an addition or agent
    in a melt system.

    475,    for continuous casting processes with an inert or reducing gas
    atmosphere.


CLS 164/75
TXT Process under subclass 47 in which a preformed base member has applied to
    it a coating to provide a layered product.

    (1)     Note.  The coating must remain as a product part or layer
    subsequent to the operation of this class to be included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100+,   for preconditioning of a preform by a coating operation where the
    coating does not remain as part of the final product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, appropriate subclasses, especially subclass 527.3
    for processes of casting with a subsequent coating step.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 134+ for processes of coating a workpiece before a nonmetallic
    molding operation.

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclasses for coating processes,
    per se.


CLS 164/76.1
TXT Combined:

    Process under subclass 47 which includes an operation which, by itself, is
    neither an operation of this class nor a perfecting step of an operation of
    this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 527.1+ for a combined casting and
    manufacturing process wherein the manufacturing step is performed after
    removing the cast product from the mold.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclass 2 for combined casting, working and heat
    treatment operations.


CLS 164/77
TXT Process under subclass 47 wherein liquid metal is placed into a mold, a
    layer of metal is solidified on the mold surface, and the excess liquid is
    removed from the mold.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 302 for slush casting type processes for nonmetallic material.


CLS 164/78
TXT Process under subclass 47 wherein a unit is incorporated into the product
    during the metal casting which provides a fracture or division plane to
    subdivide the product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 52 for static molds employing a static means
    to produce a groove or depression in the product to facilitate breaking or
    cutting.  Subclass 84 for static mold providing for a unitable preform
    which functions as a partition means.


CLS 164/79
TXT Process under subclass 47 wherein a substance is randomly incorporated into
    the metallic material to produce a porous product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclass 415 for processes of producing a metal product which has
    a mass of pores.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 41+ for processes of producing porous nonmetallic bodies.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, subclass 2 for processes for making
    porous articles from metal powders involving pressure and heat.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 613 for metallic
    stock which is porous.


CLS 164/80
TXT Process under subclass 47 wherein the metallic material is introduced into
    the shaping area in solid form.

    (1)     Note.  The solid metallic material may either be introduced
    initially into the mold or may be added to a molten charge already in the
    mold.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57.1+,  where an alloying material is added to the melt as a solid.

    473,    for continuous casting processes incorporating an addition or agent
    in a melt system.

    495+,   for processes of using a solid consumable electrode.


CLS 164/81
TXT Process under subclass 47 wherein the shaping surfaces is a molten or
    liquid layer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 298 for casting nonmetallic material on a liquid surface.


CLS 164/90
TXT Process under subclass 47 wherein the product contains at least two
    distinct parts or portions which are movable relative to each other and
    which are joined by the shaping operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9+,     for process of forming a mold and incorporating a product part
    therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 434+ for processes of assembling with
    retention of a clearance for motion between assembled parts.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 242 for similar operation when molding nonmetallic material.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 591 for metallic
    stock material having components capable of limited relative movement.


CLS 164/91
TXT Process under subclass 47 of making multi-layered articles by forming a
    metal onto a preform or casting two or more metals into contact with one
    another.

    (1)     Note.  A composite article must have at least two distinctive zones
    of metal of the same or different materials. If solids of the same metal or
    different metal are incorporated into cast molten metal and such lose their
    identity this is not a composite for this and indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein are those operations where two or more metal
    preforms are united by fusing a portion of the metal to provide a joint
    between them.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9+,     for process of shaping mold material wherein the product part is
    embedded in or surrounded by shaped material.

    23+,    for process of making composite, plural part or multi-layered mold.

    55.1+,  for processes of producing layer article by incorporating an
    addition or chemically reactive agent in the casing material.

    461,    for continuous or semicontinuous casting processes of forming a
    composite product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 428 for processes of assembling or joining
    in mechanical manufacturing operations, and subclass 527.3 for casting and
    coating manufacturing steps.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 36+ for processes for fusion
    bonding of glass to a formed part.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 241+ for processes of producing composite, plural part or
    multi-layered articles wherein the molding material is nonmetal; however
    one or more parts, portions or components of the composite may be metal,
    e.g., process of uniting two spaced metal preforms is in subclass 261.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, subclasses 5+ for powder metallurgical
    processes with sintering for forming plural metallic layers or parts.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 615+ for a
    metallic composite defined in terms of the composition of its components.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, for producing
    semiconductor junction material even when using a Class 164 operation.


CLS 164/92.1
TXT Repairing or restoring articles for use:

    Process under subclass 91 wherein a worn, damaged, or used article is
    restored for reuse in a similar capacity without altering or destroying the
    overall configuration of said article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 402.01+ for processes of mechanical
    repair.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 36 for processes of repairing or restoring nonmetallic articles by
    molding operations.


CLS 164/93
TXT Process under subclass 91 of forming a composite article wherein two or
    more different metals are poured into a mold simultaneously and wherein at
    least two of said metals are temporarily separated by a barrier means which
    is removed either physically or by melting same to allow said metals to
    come into contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     for processes of co-molding metals into direct contact.

    99,     for processes of co-molding metals and uniting to a preform.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 260 for co-molding plural fluent nonmetal materials and uniting to
    preform.


CLS 164/94
TXT Process under subclass 91 of forming a composite article by sequentially
    casting molten metal.

    (1)     Note.  The sequentially cast molten metal(s) may be cast onto and
    in contact with the previously cast metal or may be separated from one
    another by some preformed portion, part or component of the composite
    article.

    (2)     Note.  The metals cast may be of the same or different materials;
    however, if the metals cast are the same material, the prior cast metal
    must be cooled and solidified, i.e., act as a preform, before the
    subsequent metal is cast.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for processes of forming mold by separately molding different mold
    portions.

    90,     for processes of forming interconnected movable parts, e.g., chain
    links, universal joints, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 225+ for a process involving at
    least two applications of filler material to effect a single joint.
    Successive depositions of filler material may involve deposition of
    successive strata one upon the other as well as successive depositions on
    opposite sides of the joint.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 250+ for processes of separately molding different article
    portions where the material molded is other than metal; subclass 308 for
    incremental layer molding of nonmetal.


CLS 164/95
TXT Process under subclass 94 of forming composite article by casting two or
    more metals of different composition sequentially.


CLS 164/96
TXT Process under subclass 95 wherein at least two of the cast different
    metallic materials are maintained stratified although in a liquid condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93,     where simultaneously molten materials are also cast simultaneously.


CLS 164/97
TXT Process under subclass 91 wherein the composite is formed by uniting plural
    nonindividually handled pieces with the molten metal.


CLS 164/98
TXT Process under subclass 91 wherein the composite article is formed by
    shaping the metal onto a self-sustaining body.


CLS 164/99
TXT Process under subclass 98 wherein two or more different metals are
    simultaneously introduced onto a shaping surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93,     for co-molding processes wherein a temporary partition is employed.


CLS 164/100
TXT Process under subclass 98 which includes a step of treating a preform body
    prior to compositing.

    (1)     Note.  A treatment step involves, e.g., cleaning the surface of the
    preform of foreign matter such as scale, oil, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for process of coating of a workpiece before compositing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 458+ for processes of mechanically
    assembling and/or joining of previously coated parts.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 208+ for metallurgical bonding
    combined with application of a bond facilitating metal coating.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 265 for process of preconditioning of a preform in nonmetallic
    compositing operations.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, subclasses 30+ for powder
    metallurgical processes for making products including sintering and also
    including significant pretreatment of the powder prior to compacting or
    sintering; and subclasses 62+ for similar processes not utilizing heat.


CLS 164/101
TXT Process under subclass 100 of treating the surface of the preform with some
    chemically reactive agent.

    (1)     Note.  Although chemical treatment may result in the surface layer
    of the preform being chemically changed, such treatment does not involve a
    separate coating which acts as the bonding medium.


CLS 164/102
TXT Process under subclass 101 wherein the chemical treatment involves the
    application of a layer of flux.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for a process of coating a preformed workpiece where the coating
    remains as a part of the final product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 23+ for fluxing compositions.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 223+ for a process utilizing flux
    materials in a noncasting metallurgical bonding operation.


CLS 164/103
TXT Process under subclass 100 of raising the temperature of the preform prior
    to casting the molten metal thereon.

    (1)     Note.  The preheating may be by open flame contacting the preform
    surface or by hot fluid.

    (2)     Note.  Preform may be heated directly on the bonding surface or a
    face opposite the bonding face.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for a process of in situ reactive heating during formation of a
    composite.

    121,    for a process of preconditioning of apparatus including preheating.

    338.1+, for means to apply heat to a mold.


CLS 164/104
TXT Process under subclass 103 wherein the preheating is accomplished by means
    of a heating material in the liquid state which contacts either the preform
    or the mold.

    (1)     Note.  Preheating of the preform by means of the cast material
    which makes up part of the product is included herein only if it is
    specifically claimed as such.


CLS 164/105
TXT Process under subclass 103 wherein the preform is positioned in a mold when
    preheated.

    (1)     Note.  Processes are included herein of heating a mold prior to
    casting wherein the preform is incidentally or purposely heated.


CLS 164/106
TXT Process under subclass 98 wherein the cast metal acts upon the preform to
    reshape it while maintaining the preform's integrity either by the casting
    pressure or by the forces set up during cooling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 266 for simultaneous shaping of nonmetallic material and reshaping
    a preform body.


CLS 164/107
TXT Process under subclass 98 wherein a preform is united to a cast metal to
    perfect the cast metal by treating rather than to provide a united article
    as such.

    (1)     Note.  By treating is meant a change in the physical or chemical
    properties of the cast metal.


CLS 164/108
TXT Process under subclass 98 of making a composite and unitary product by
    joining together a plurality of preforms or two spaced areas of the same
    preform with cast metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9+,     for mold shaping processes utilizing a final preform part or
    material as a part thereof.

    333,    for apparatus to position plural preforms in a mold.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, appropriate subclasses for uniting surfaces
    by a metallic filler without shaping of the filler by a molding surface.


CLS 164/109
TXT Process under subclass 108 of forming a composite article by joining
    together a plurality of planar laminar preforms positioned in substantially
    parallel planes to one another and at least partially coextensive.

    (1)     Note.  The preforms may be spaced from one another or in contact
    with one another.


CLS 164/110
TXT Process under subclass 108 wherein at least two separate preforms are
    united into contacting relation by the casting.


CLS 164/111
TXT Process under subclass 98 where the preform has depressions therein or
    projection therefrom which cause the molten metal to mechanically lock with
    the preform.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 343 for cutlery implements in which the handle is
    cast onto the blade tang.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 274 for processes of embedding a preform provided with means to
    provide an interlock with nonmetallic molding material.


CLS 164/112
TXT Process under subclass 98 of positioning the preform relative to a forming
    surface prior to casting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9+,     for process of shaping a forming surface and embedding a product
    part therein

    231,    for core shaping apparatus including means to position preform
    product part.

    236,    for patterns having insert supporting means.

    332,    for apparatus including means to position a preform part in the
    shaping area.


CLS 164/113
TXT Process under subclass 47 wherein the material is forced against the
    shaping surface by a force other than gravity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for a process of applying explosive pressure directly to casting
    material.


CLS 164/114
TXT Process under subclass 113 wherein the material is impelled radially
    outwardly against the forming surface by rotation of the surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175,    for apparatus for centrifugally shaping a mold.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 311 for processes of utilizing centrifugal force in shaping
    nonmetallic material.


CLS 164/115
TXT Process under subclass 114 wherein two or more speeds of rotation are
    maintained during the centrifugal casting.

    (1)     Note.  Merely increasing or decreasing rotation to a desired speed
    is not considered plural speeds for this subclass.


CLS 164/116
TXT Process under subclass 114 wherein the angle of inclination of the axis of
    rotation is varied between the time of charging of the material and
    ejecting the product.


CLS 164/117
TXT Process under subclass 114 wherein the charge of material is introduced
    incrementally along the axis of the mold during rotation.


CLS 164/118
TXT Process under subclass 114 wherein the centrifugal mold has applied to it a
    thermal differential source.

    (1)     Note.  The source to be intended for inclusion herein must be other
    than ambient.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122+,   for processes in general of temperature control during
    solidification.


CLS 164/119
TXT Process under subclass 113 wherein the forming pressure is provided by a
    fluid acting directly on the casting material.

    (1)     Note.  The casting material itself is not included as a fluid
    within the meaning of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61+,    for processes employing a vacuum.

    66.1+,  for processes utilizing a special inert or reducing gaseous
    atmosphere.

    475,    for continuous casting processes including an inert or reducing gas
    atmosphere.


CLS 164/120
TXT Process under subclass 113 wherein a compaction of the material is
    accomplished after the primary casting material is against the forming
    surface by a separate and distinct force from that used to introduce the
    material.


CLS 164/121
TXT Process under subclass 47 wherein the apparatus is treated or readied for
    casting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for processes of forming a mold and coating the surface with
    treating material.

    55.1+,  for processes of incorporating an addition or chemically reactive
    material into casting material.

    72+,    for processes of coating-treating a mold.

    149,    for means lubricating apparatus parts.

    158,    for apparatus cleaning means.

    473,    for continuous casting processes including a step of incorporating
    an addition or agent in a melt system.


CLS 164/122
TXT Process under subclass 47 wherein the freezing of the metal is regulated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118,    for processes of heating or cooling centrifugal molds.

    297,    for centrifugal casting apparatus having coolant means.

    338.1+, for a mold with a heating means.

    348,    for a mold with a cooling means.

    352,    for a sand mold having a metal chill.

    443+,   for apparatus for cooling a continuous casting.

    486,    for processes of applying liquid to a continuous casting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 111 for static molds employing a solid heat
    conductor or insulator.


CLS 164/122.1
TXT Unidirectional solidification:

    Process under subclass 122 wherein an unidirectional temperature gradient
    is established along a mold to cause progressive solidification of molten
    metal within the mold.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes for growing therein-defined
    single-crystal of all types of materials, other than metal single-crystal
    formed in a mold proper herein, however, metals, intermetallics, and alloys
    which are semiconductors are excluded herein and are proper for Class 117.


CLS 164/122.2
TXT Single crystal formation:

    Process under subclass 122.1 which includes propagating a single
    crystallographic grain of metal within the mold.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes for growing therein-defined
    single-crystal of all types of materials, other than metal single-crystal
    formed in a mold proper herein, however, metals, intermetallics, and alloys
    which are semiconductors are excluded herein and are proper for Class 117.


CLS 164/123
TXT Process under subclass 122 wherein the regulation is effected by the
    addition of a separate layer of a heat barrier material to the free surface
    of the melt after casting.


CLS 164/124
TXT Process under subclass 122 wherein the regulation is effected by the
    application of a gas or flame to the cast material itself.


CLS 164/125
TXT Process under subclass 122 wherein the solidification is varyingly
    controlled by two or more simultaneous different rates of heat loss.


CLS 164/126
TXT Process under subclass 125 wherein the heat removal is effected by use of
    an applied liquid.


CLS 164/127
TXT Process under subclass 125 wherein the differential dissipation of heat is
    effected by means of an insert or mold section placed at the mold surface
    or embedded in the mold to provide a zone of greater heat absorption.


CLS 164/128
TXT Process under subclass 122 wherein the solidification and heat removal is
    effected by use of an applied liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126,    for utilizing a cooling liquid to obtain a differential dissipation
    of heat.


CLS 164/129
TXT Process under subclass 47 wherein two or more separate and distinct
    articles are produced by the process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    350,    for a sand type mold having plural article forming cavities.


CLS 164/130
TXT Process under subclass 129 wherein the articles are produced one after the
    other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324,    for apparatus including plural molds moving in an endless mold
    circuit.


CLS 164/131
TXT Process under subclass 47 wherein the produced product is separated from
    the surface of which it was shaped.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are patents claiming, per se, stripping
    operation, i.e., not including a forming operation.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein are generally patents which include a unique
    article removal operation.  Numerous patents which are directed to a
    particular casting operation will also disclose or claim a removal
    operation.  Such patents are cross-referenced here only where the evidence
    shows the article removal operation to be nonconventional.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    344+,   for a shaping apparatus having means to eject product.

    401+,   for strippers or ejectors, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 334+ for processes of stripping nonmetallic articles from molds.


CLS 164/132
TXT Process under subclass 131 wherein the surface is that of a separate mold
    part used to form an opening or cavity in the product, i.e., core.


CLS 164/133
TXT Process under subclass 47 wherein the material to be cast is handled with
    either a regulation or directionalization of the charge or a physical
    treatment of the charge.

    (1)     Note.  The mere teeming of metal into a mold is not included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    335+,   for shaping apparatus including ladle or crucible type receptacle.

    362,    for a sand mold having means to restrict turbulence of flow during
    casting.

    437+,   for continuous casting means having means to distribute the charge.


CLS 164/134
TXT Process under subclass 133 wherein the treatment results in a separation of
    some material from the charge, e.g., filtering.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    358,    for a sand mold with a strainer means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses for
    processes and apparatus for solid-liquid separation.


CLS 164/135
TXT Process under subclass 133 wherein the charge is brought into the shaping
    cavity as two or more separate flows.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93,     for a process of simultaneously introducing plural different metal
    streams into a mold.


CLS 164/136
TXT Process under subclass 133 wherein the control or manipulation is
    accomplished by a changing orientation or position of the shaping surface,
    introduction means or some portion of these members.


CLS 164/137
TXT Process under subclass 47 wherein two or more members of a mold are brought
    into operative casting relationship.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are generally patents which include a unique
    mold assembling operation.  Numerous patents which are directed to a
    particular casting operation will also disclose or claim a mold assembling
    operation. Such patents are cross-referenced here only where the evidence
    shows the mold assembling operation to be nonconventional.


CLS 164/138
TXT Process under subclass 47 wherein a particular material is used as a
    coating, lining or mold in the process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33+,    for process of shaping a forming surface by lining.

    72+,    for processes of coating the mold before casting.

    520+,   for process of shaping particular mold materials.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses for mold
    or coating compositions.

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 112+ for static molds employing a
    removable or movable liner.  Subclass 114.1 for static molds employing a
    coating or adherent layer.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 133+ for processes of coating, per se.


CLS 164/139
TXT Apparatus under class definition for casting a surface capable of conveying
    intelligence or design by reproducing in printed form, e.g., type and
    stereotype plates.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332+,   for apparatus specially adapted for casting a backup member to a
    preformed electrotype shell.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 21 for apparatus for finishing stereotype
    plates.

    199,    Type Casting, for apparatus for casting elements or bars of a
    printing form.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclasses for
    electrolytic apparatus for forming electrotype plates.

    249,    Static Molds, for static stereotype molds, particularly subclass
    138 for pivotable type stereotype molds.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclass 309 for apparatus for
    planing a concave surface such as the surface of a stereotype plate.


CLS 164/140
TXT Apparatus under subclass 139 including means combined with the casting
    means for cutting or trimming the cast plate while said casting is
    associated with the mold or a portion of the mold.

    (1)     Note.  The term mold as used herein includes (1) the core or cores,
    (2) core-like elements associated with gate portions of the casting and
    used for handling, and (3) conveying means serving to support a continuous
    casting while said casting is still associated with the molding means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262+,   for forming apparatus including a product cutting or trimming means.


CLS 164/141
TXT Apparatus under subclass 139 which includes a separate container for
    fluidizing or maintaining fluid for the casting material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    335+,   for forming apparatus combined with a ladle or crucible.


CLS 164/142
TXT Apparatus under subclass 141 with means for metering or controlling the
    flow of molten cast material from the melting chamber to the casting
    chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304,    for injection shaping apparatus having a valved mold gate.

    337,    for forming combined with flow control conduit means intermediate
    the mold and receptacle.


CLS 164/143
TXT Apparatus under subclasses 520+ which include a means applying pressure to
    introduce the casting material into the shaping member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284+,   for pressure forming means.


CLS 164/144
TXT Apparatus under subclass 139 including a mold with additional heating or
    cooling means therefore for treating or conditioning the metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    338.1+, for a mold including a heating means.

    348,    for a means including a means to apply a coolant thereto.


CLS 164/145
TXT Apparatus under subclass 139 which includes means for separating or
    withdrawing the cast printing plate from the shaping surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    344+,   for a mold including means to eject or separate a product.

    401+,   for strippers or ejectors, per se.


CLS 164/146
TXT Apparatus under the class definition which includes means for (1) directly
    applying magnetic forces to material which is to be a part of the product,
    e.g., metal charge, insert, etc., or for (2) applying the magnetic forces
    to move or position the shaping parts.

    (1)     Note.  To be included in (2) supra, the force to move the shaping
    part has to be generated by a magnetic force although it may be indirectly
    applied through mechanical linkages.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    492+,   for processes of directly applying magnetic energy to work.


CLS 164/147.1
TXT By electromagnetic means:

    Apparatus under subclass 146 directed to means for applying electromagnetic
    energy directly to the apparatus parts or to the work material.

    (1)     Note.  A disclosure or recitation of electromagnetic means whether
    applied to the shaping member, in a circuit, used as a switch, or as an
    element for any function in the apparatus is included herein.


CLS 164/148.1
TXT For holding or assembling shaping parts:

    Apparatus under subclass 147.1 wherein the electromagnetic means positions,
    clamps, or brings into operative relation, portions of a forming structure.


CLS 164/149
TXT Apparatus under the class definition combined with means to apply a
    lubricant between moving apparatus parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72+,    for process of coating-treating a mold.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    184,    Lubrication, apparatus subclasses for lubricating apparatus.


CLS 164/150.1
TXT WITH SIGNAL, INDICATOR OR INSPECTION MEANS:

    Apparatus under the class definition having means for visual, auditory, or
    tactile annunciation or recording of a condition therein, or means
    permitting observation of a portion thereof normally hidden from view.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are the indicia type indicators for
    imprinting reference symbols in the cast product.

    (2)     Note.   Included herein is an apparatus having a particular
    condition intended to be interpreted by human intelligence.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, for a mechanical signaling device, per se.

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 53 for static molds including a static gage,
    level, plumb, or level markings.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, appropriate subclasses for an
    electrically powered indicator, per se; see particularly subclasses 815.01+
    for a visual indicator, subclasses 384+ for an audible indicator, and
    subclass 407 for a tactile indicator; subclasses 500+ for electrical
    automatic condition responsive indicating systems.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 139+ for a thermometer
    for molten metal.


CLS 164/151
TXT Apparatus under subclass 150 wherein the means is an indicator to
    quantitatively show fluid pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 626 for electrical automatic
    fluid pressure responsive indicating systems.


CLS 164/151.1
TXT Including speed sensor:

    Apparatus under subclass 150.1 having means for detecting the velocity of
    the product, melt, or any component of the apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 488+ for a device to measure
    speed or acceleration.


CLS 164/151.2
TXT Including position or spatial dimension sensor:

    Apparatus under subclass 150.1 having means for detecting (a) the location
    of a component or product therein, (b) the relative placement between any
    two components or between a component and a product therein, or (c) the
    lineal extent of a component or product therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 483+ for straight edge rules.


CLS 164/151.3
TXT Melt level sensor:

    Apparatus under subclass 151.2 having means for detecting the height of
    liquid metal therein.

    (1)     Note.  The liquid metal detected may be in the source (e.g.,
    tundish, etc.), the mold, or any component of the apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 290+, particularly subclasses
    305+, for a device for measuring liquid level using a float.


CLS 164/151.4
TXT Including thermal sensor:

    Apparatus under subclass 150.1 having means for detecting a process
    parameter related to heat (e.g., temperature, heat transfer rate, enthalpy,
    heat capacity, etc.) of the melt, product, or apparatus, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, particularly subclasses 45+ for a
    device to determine a non-thermal property from a thermal measurement.


CLS 164/151.5
TXT For detecting or predicting breakout of continuous casting strand:

    Apparatus under subclass 151.4 having means for detecting a failure or
    imminent failure of the shell of a continuous casting strand to contain the
    molten center.

    (1)     Note.  See the GLOSSARY for a definition of "continuous casting
    strand."


CLS 164/152
TXT Apparatus under the class definition combined with means to prevent injury
    to workman or apparatus in event of malfunctioning or in the operation of
    the apparatus or a portion thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Means which merely function to aid or promote the comfort of
    the operator are not considered to come within the scope of this subclass.


CLS 164/153
TXT Apparatus under subclass 152 wherein the safety means prevent damage to the
    apparatus in the event of malfunctioning.

    (1)     Note.  Means which are used to allow each cycle of the machine to
    be completed as scheduled are not considered to be safety means responsive
    to a malfunctioning since they are actuated in the performance of every
    complete cycle.


CLS 164/154.1
TXT CONTROL MEANS RESPONSIVE TO OR ACTUATED BY MEANS SENSING OR MEASURING A
    CONDITION OR VARIABLE (I.E., AUTOMATIC CONTROL):

    Apparatus under the class definition having means to regulate the operation
    thereof influenced by means monitoring a process parameter of the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  A patent need not claim the monitoring means to be
    classified hereunder, so long as it claims the regulating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151.5,  for an apparatus having means to indicate a failure or imminent
    failure of a continuous casting strand.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, for a servo motor and
    controller, per se.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 130+
    for computer controlled systems or methods, generally, and subclasses
    475.01+ and 477.01+ particularly for control systems related to molding and
    melting, respectively.


CLS 164/154.2
TXT Responsive to position or spatial dimension:

    Apparatus under subclass 154.1 wherein the process parameter monitored is
    (a) the location of a component or product therein, (b) the relative
    placement between any two components or between a component and a product
    therein, or (c) the lineal extent of a component or product therein.


CLS 164/154.3
TXT Responsive to rate of change:

    Apparatus under subclass 154.2 wherein the process parameter monitored is a
    mathematical derivative (e.g., first, second, third, etc.) of the location
    or size of the product, melt, or any component of the apparatus with
    respect to time.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 488+ for a device to measure
    speed and subclasses 861+ for a device to measure volume or flow rate.


CLS 164/154.4
TXT Continuous casting:

    Apparatus under subclass 154.3 which produces a continuously cast product.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of "continuous casting."


CLS 164/154.5
TXT Continuous casting:

    Apparatus under subclass 154.2 which produces a continuously cast product.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of "continuous casting."


CLS 164/154.6
TXT Responsive to thermal condition:

    Apparatus under subclass 154.1 wherein the process parameter monitored is
    related to heat (e.g., temperature, heat transfer rate, enthalpy, heat
    capacity, etc.) of the melt, product, or apparatus, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, particularly subclasses 45+ for a
    device to determine a nonthermal property from a thermal measurement.


CLS 164/154.7
TXT Continuous casting:

    Apparatus under subclass 154.6 which produces a continuously cast product.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of  ``continuous casting."


CLS 164/154.8
TXT Responsive to pressure:

    Apparatus under subclass 154.1 wherein the process parameter monitored is
    force per unit area applied to the melt, the product, or any component of
    the apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 700+ for a fluid pressure gauge.


CLS 164/155.1
TXT Control of feed material enroute to shaping area:

    Apparatus under subclass 154.1 wherein the operation regulated is the
    delivery of a substance comprising (a) molten metal or additives therefor
    to a mold or (b) sand, binder, or other additives therefor to a mold
    forming means.


CLS 164/155.2
TXT Responsive to material level:

    Apparatus under subclass 155.1 wherein the process parameter monitored is
    the fill height of the substance in a supply (e.g., tundish, etc.), a mold,
    or any component of the apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 612+ for condition
    responsive indicating system responsive to material level.


CLS 164/155.3
TXT Responsive to pressure:

    Apparatus under subclass 155.1 wherein the parameter monitored is force per
    unit area applied to the melt, the product, or any component of the
    apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 700+ for a fluid pressure gauge.


CLS 164/155.4
TXT Responsive to position or spatial dimension:

    Apparatus under subclass 155.1 wherein the process parameter monitored is
    (a) the location of a component or product therein, (b) the relative
    placement between any two components or between a component and a product
    therein, or (c) the lineal extent of a component or product therein.


CLS 164/155.5
TXT Responsive to rate of change:

    Apparatus under subclass 155.4 wherein the process parameter monitored is a
    mathematical derivative (e.g., first, second, third, etc.) of the location
    or size of the product, melt, or any component of the apparatus with
    respect to time.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 488+ for a device to measure
    speed and subclasses 861+ for a device to measure volume or flow rate.


CLS 164/155.6
TXT Responsive to thermal condition:

    Apparatus under subclass 155.1 wherein the process parameter monitored is
    related to heat (e.g., temperature, heat transfer rate, etc.) of the melt,
    product, or apparatus, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, particularly subclasses 45+ for a
    device to determine a non-thermal property from a thermal measurement.


CLS 164/155.7
TXT Responsive to weight:

    Apparatus under subclass 155.1 wherein the parameter monitored is the
    gravitational force on the melt, the product, or any component of the
    apparatus, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for a device to
    measure a condition derived from a weight measurement.

    177,    Weighing Scales, for means to measure weight, per se.


CLS 164/156.1
TXT Including electrode or float sensor:

    Apparatus under subclass 155.2 including means for detecting the process
    parameter comprising either an electrically conductive probe or a buoyant
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 290+, particularly subclasses
    305+, for a device for measuring liquid level using a float.


CLS 164/157
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having a means independent of the
    apparatus work performing parts, which allows a set time period to elapse
    during an apparatus operation.


CLS 164/158
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including positive means for removing
    undesirable material from a mold making or metal casting apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, appropriate subclasses,
    for apparatus for cleaning of general application.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses,
    for a liquid contact process or apparatus for cleaning.


CLS 164/159
TXT Apparatus under the class definition for shaping a mold, pattern or core
    device.


CLS 164/160.1
TXT Including means applying vacuum directly to mold material:

    Apparatus under subclass 159 including means for directly applying a
    suction to work material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    253+,   for casting apparatus including vacuum means.


CLS 164/160.2
TXT And means to apply consumable shielding film to shaping surface:Apparatus
    under subclass 160.1 including an impervious consumable membrane adhered
    onto a particulate shaping surface by the applied suction.


CLS 164/161
TXT Apparatus under subclass 159 including mold forming means in which material
    is removed by the operation of a moving sweep, strickle, profile pattern or
    cutter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for mold shaping processes utilizing a pattern as a compaction
    means, e.g., profile pattern, etc.


CLS 164/162
TXT Apparatus under subclass 161 which includes means specially adapted to
    remove material for forming a sprue or riser in a mold structure.


CLS 164/163
TXT Apparatus under subclass 161 having means for removing surface material
    from the core as it is being rotated.


CLS 164/164
TXT Apparatus under subclass 161 wherein a revolvable pattern or pattern part
    is utilized as the sweeping member.

    (1)     Note.  A rotary cutting tool which shapes the mold is not
    considered a pattern or pattern part to be encompassed herein.


CLS 164/165
TXT Apparatus under subclass 159 with means specially adapted for shaping thin
    mold sections of resin-sand mixtures, i.e., shell molds.

    (1)     Note.  Depending upon the extent of unsupported shell sections and
    the gravity head of the liquid or molten casting metal, the shell may be
    externally backed up with steel shot, sand or similar material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for shell molding processes of spraying mold materials against a
    shaping surface.

    361,    for shell molds.

    526+,   for processes of shaping fluent mold material containing resin.


CLS 164/166
TXT Apparatus under subclass 165 which includes plural distinct stations, e.g.,
    dispensing, for compacting, curing oven, ejection means, etc., for
    performing manufacturing operations upon the shell molds being formed.


CLS 164/167
TXT Apparatus under subclass 159 for shaping a mold in combination with means
    for introducing casting material to the mold.

    (1)     Note.  Found herein are apparatus and plants for molding in which
    there is an alleged combination between mold making and metal casting.


CLS 164/168
TXT Apparatus under subclass 167 which includes assembling means for
    operatively positioning formed mold sections or parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    339+,   for a mold including assembling means.


CLS 164/169
TXT Apparatus under subclass 159 wherein the mold shaping operation is
    performed by pressure means which function to ram pack or compress the mold
    material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses, for presses.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    appropriate subclasses for means for shaping plastic or fluent material,
    especially subclasses 376.1+ for an extrusion molding machine, subclasses
    406+ for a press molding machine, and subclasses 425+ for the combination
    of a female mold and a tamper or vibrator; see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 164/170
TXT Apparatus under subclass 169 with resilient pressure exerting means for
    effecting compaction of the mold forming material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 65, for static molds having an inflatable
    element.


CLS 164/171
TXT Apparatus under subclass 170 directed to utilizing plural contiguous or
    plural independent diaphragms members.


CLS 164/172
TXT Apparatus under subclass 169 wherein two or more pressing heads are
    utilized in shaping the mold material.


CLS 164/173
TXT Apparatus under subclass 172 wherein the rammers are powered by fluid
    pressure means.

    (1)     Note.  The pressure does not have to be directly applied to the
    rammer but may be transmitted through a mechanical linkage.


CLS 164/174
TXT Apparatus under subclass 169 for shaping cores by forcing the material
    through a die orifice.


CLS 164/175
TXT Apparatus under subclass 169 wherein the mold material is impelled radially
    outwardly against the forming surface by the rotation of the surface.


CLS 164/176
TXT Apparatus under subclass 169 for forming hollow cylindrical molds which are
    to be used as pipe molds.


CLS 164/177
TXT Apparatus under subclass 176 wherein the compacting force is effected by a
    motive pattern member.


CLS 164/178
TXT Apparatus under subclass 177 wherein the compacting action is effected by
    (1) rotation of the pattern member or (2) rotation of the flask as the
    pattern member is progressively advanced therethrough.


CLS 164/179
TXT Apparatus under subclass 178 wherein a rotating former or pattern is
    utilized to form beads at the end of the pipe mold.


CLS 164/180
TXT Apparatus under subclass 169 including means operable for relatively
    drawing mold parts from the shaping member after compaction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213+,   for apparatus having withdrawing means without compacting means.

    401+,   for, per se, withdrawing means.


CLS 164/181
TXT Apparatus under subclass 180 including a distinct withdrawing station
    subsequent to the compaction station.


CLS 164/182
TXT Apparatus under subclass 180 directed to means adapted to separate a
    pattern from cope and drag members where the pattern is situated
    intermediate said members and wherein said means effects a parallel draw of
    cope and pattern respectively from each other and the drag.


CLS 164/183
TXT Apparatus under subclass 180 directed to a machine with means for turning
    the pattern, flask or shaping member.

    (1)     Note.  The inverting means may serve a dual function, i.e., invert
    the shaping member and also effect the withdrawal operation or may only
    serve to deliver the shaping member to the withdrawal station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209,    for a press molding machine having an invertible table.

    224,    for molding apparatus having an inverting means.

    402,    for, per se, means for inverting a pattern for stripping.

    409,    for, per se, means for turning a pattern plate or mold around a
    horizontal axis.


CLS 164/184
TXT Apparatus under subclass 183 wherein the inverting means rotates the entire
    mold machine, i.e., the press  head as well as the mold supporting unit.


CLS 164/185
TXT Apparatus under subclass 183 characterized by having the frame that inverts
    the pattern plate oscillatorily supported about an axis located to one side.

    (1)     Note.  The above apparatus is to be distinguished from the roll
    over type machine characterized by having a frame that carries the pattern
    plate, oscillatorily supported about a substantially central axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205,    for vibrating compaction machine of the roll or rockover type.


CLS 164/186
TXT Apparatus under subclass 180 wherein the shaped forming surface is a core
    member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228+,   for core shaping means, per se.


CLS 164/187
TXT Apparatus under subclass 180 wherein the pattern member acts as the primary
    compressing member in shaping the forming surface, i.e., the shaping or
    compacting force is transmitted through or by the pattern member.

    (1)     Note.  The pattern surface acts as the parting surface during the
    withdrawal.


CLS 164/188
TXT Apparatus under subclass 187 having a plate that fits accurately around the
    pattern and through which the patterns are drawn either by moving the
    pattern supports down or by raising the plate and the mold half upwardly
    free from the pattern.


CLS 164/189
TXT Apparatus under subclass 180 which includes a vibrator for facilitating the
    withdrawal or separation.

    (1)     Note.  The vibrating means found herein generally perfect the
    drawing operation and usually are combined with another withdrawing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223,    for molding apparatus including vibrating or rapping separation
    means.

    260+,   for general apparatus with vibrator means.


CLS 164/190
TXT Apparatus under subclass 180 having a plate member that fits accurately
    around the pattern and supports the sand of the shaped member during
    withdrawal of the pattern.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217+,   for molding apparatus including stripping plate separation means.


CLS 164/191
TXT Apparatus under subclass 180 having means for vertically downwardly
    displacing the pattern member from the shaped surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225,    for molding apparatus having a drop pattern support separating
    means.


CLS 164/192
TXT Apparatus under subclass 169 which includes means for dispensing discrete
    charges or portions of mold forming materials into a flask or receptacle
    under the influence of gravity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    appropriate subclasses, for apparatus for handling fluent material.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for fluent material dispensing
    apparatus.


CLS 164/193
TXT Apparatus under subclass 192 which includes means for discharging a
    predetermined quantity of mold forming material into a flask or receptacle.


CLS 164/194
TXT Apparatus under subclass 192 including separate and distinct means for
    charging a mold forming means with molding material and means for
    compacting the mold material.


CLS 164/195
TXT Apparatus under subclass 169 having two or more dynamic mold compaction
    means identifiable as separate units each doing a complete operation of a
    different kind, e.g., mold pressing means combined with mold vibrating
    means, blow molding means combined with mold vibrating means, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for processes of compacting mold materials utilizing diverse
    pressure applications.


CLS 164/196
TXT Apparatus under subclass 195 comprising press forming means combined with
    means to shape by vibration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203+,   for a vibrating compaction.

    207+,   for a press molding means.


CLS 164/197
TXT Apparatus under subclass 196 wherein the compacting means includes a
    pressure member which exerts a vibratory force in addition to a pressing
    type force.


CLS 164/198
TXT Apparatus under subclass 169 having means operable for mechanically
    slinging wads of sand at high velocity onto the shaping surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for processes of shaping a forming surface by spraying or slinging
    mold material.


CLS 164/199
TXT Apparatus under subclass 198 with a swinging arm including the slinging
    means which can be positioned above any portion of the flask or receptacle.


CLS 164/200
TXT Apparatus under subclass 169 comprising means utilizing a gaseous pressure
    discharge assistant for projecting mold forming material against a shaping
    surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19+,    for blow type molding processes.


CLS 164/201
TXT Apparatus under subclass 200 including means for relatively positioning the
    blow chamber and shaping member for operational engagement.


CLS 164/202
TXT Apparatus under subclass 200 combined with a perforated element to (1)
    distribute the gaseous pressure medium or (2) distribute the mold forming
    material just prior to contact with the shaping surface.


CLS 164/203
TXT Apparatus under subclass 169 wherein the compacting operation on the mold
    forming material is performed by means effecting a vibrating, jarring or
    jolting action upon the mold forming material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195+,   for plural compacting means including vibrating, jarring or jolting
    means.

    260+,   for subject matter of this class combined with vibrator means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 108+ for agitation by vibration.


CLS 164/204
TXT Apparatus under subclass 203 including a static rammer means which
    cooperates in the compaction of the mold forming material.


CLS 164/205
TXT Apparatus under subclass 203 wherein a pattern supporting frame is either
    oscillatorily supported about an axis located to one side of the machine,
    i.e., rock over type, or oscillatorily supported about a substantially
    central axis of the machine, i.e., roll over type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183+,   for rock-over and roll-over type compacting machines which include
    a pattern withdrawal means.

    209,    for a press molding machine with an invertible table.

    224,    for shaping apparatus having inverting means.

    375,    for a rock or roll-over flask.

    402,    for stripping means including pattern inverting means.

    409,    for, per se, means of inverting a pattern member.


CLS 164/206
TXT Apparatus under subclass 203 having fluid pressure actuator means for
    effecting the vibrating, jarring or jolting operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261,    for apparatus of this class including fluid pressure actuated
    vibrator means.


CLS 164/207
TXT Apparatus under subclass 169 employing a dynamic pressure member for
    shaping the mold material.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus included herein is either a press machine or press
    members to be employed therein.  A machine is an apparatus which follows a
    mechanical law defined by its structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169,    for hand held pressure applying mold shaping members.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses for residual processes and
    apparatus for subjecting material to compressive forces.


CLS 164/208
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 wherein the press member has an annular
    compacting surface which is rotated.


CLS 164/209
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 in which a planar surface which holds the work
    is capable of being turned over.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183+,   for mold shaping apparatus having means to invert the pattern,
    flask or shaping member.

    409,    for means for turning over a pattern member.


CLS 164/210
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 comprising a single plunger co-acting with
    individual molds of a group successively presented by movable mold shaping
    member support means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for processes of shaping molds sequentially.


CLS 164/211
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 wherein the pressure platen is pivoted for
    displacement transversely of the compressing direction to a nonuse
    direction.


CLS 164/212
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 including fluid pressure means moving a mold
    shaping member in an oscillatory or reciprocatory movement, generally to
    provide engagement with a substantially stationary rammer member.


CLS 164/213
TXT Apparatus under subclass 159 having means to effect a withdrawal of the
    shaped mold part from the mold shaping member or vice versa.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180+,   for compacting means including withdrawal means.

    401+,   for stripper or ejectors, per se.


CLS 164/214
TXT Apparatus under subclass 213 which includes means for withdrawing the cope
    from the pattern and the pattern from the drag in parallel relation by a
    true rectilinear movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182,    for compacting means including means for withdrawing pattern member
    intermediate the cope and drag.


CLS 164/215
TXT Apparatus under subclass 213 having means which effect withdrawal of the
    pattern by a rotational movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240,    for a rotatable or pivotal pattern plate associated with a flask
    member.

    247,    for a rotatable or pivotal pattern, per se.


CLS 164/216
TXT Apparatus under subclass 215 wherein the pattern member has a helical
    thread or groove.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 59 for nonsand type static molds which
    produce a helical or threaded type product.


CLS 164/217
TXT Apparatus under subclass 213 including a plate member surrounding the
    pattern which functions to maintain the mold material during withdrawal of
    the pattern.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    190,    for apparatus for compacting mold materials including a stripping
    plate for facilitating withdrawal of the pattern.


CLS 164/218
TXT Apparatus under subclass 217 directed to means for withdrawing the pattern
    vertically downwardly from the shaped member.


CLS 164/219
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 directed to means for withdrawing a pattern
    which effect an equal and parallel draw motion to the pattern with
    reference to at least two points.

    (1)     Note.  The withdrawing force must be applied to at least two points
    and does not include those means in which the force is applied at a single
    point and the pattern merely guided along parallel lines.


CLS 164/220
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 wherein a stool is utilized to support a
    section of the mold inside the stripping plate during the withdrawal of the
    pattern member.

    (1)     Note.  The stool generally supports a green sand core during the
    withdrawing of the pattern member.


CLS 164/221
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 directed to utilizing lever and link means to
    effect a withdrawal of the pattern member.


CLS 164/222
TXT Apparatus under subclass 213 wherein a plural movable part pattern is
    utilized as the shaping member.


CLS 164/223
TXT Apparatus under subclass 213 with means for drawing a mold shaping member
    from a mold with or without lifting the mold or stripping the pattern in
    which the operation is facilitated by means vibrating or rapping the
    shaping member or work piece either before or after the drawing operation
    commences.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are apparatus having devices adapted to be
    vibrated and to communicate vibrations to the shaping member, per se.


CLS 164/224
TXT Apparatus under subclass 213 including means for inverting or turning the
    mold shaping member upside down or vice versa to facilitate the withdrawal
    operation.


CLS 164/225
TXT Apparatus under subclass 213 which includes means for holding the flask and
    pattern while the mold is being formed and which will be capable of drawing
    the pattern downwardly from the mold.

    (1)     Note.  Generally the pattern is mounted on reciprocal pattern head
    means for positioning and stripping the pattern.


CLS 164/226
TXT Apparatus under subclass 213 with ejector pin means for contacting the mold
    part to effect a lifting of the mold part from the shaping member or vice
    versa.


CLS 164/227
TXT Apparatus under subclass 213 with means for separating the mold shaping
    member from the mold by lifting the latter off the shaping member, in which
    the shaping member has no movement during the mold lifting operation.


CLS 164/228
TXT Apparatus under subclass 159 comprising means defining a forming surface in
    which cores are shaped.


CLS 164/229
TXT Apparatus under subclass 228 wherein the core shaping means includes an
    indicia or character forming member.


CLS 164/230
TXT Apparatus under subclass 228 with a preform part, located therein, which is
    to become integrated with the core member during the shaping of the said
    member.


CLS 164/231
TXT Apparatus under subclass 230 wherein the preform part is to be incorporated
    into the final cast product.


CLS 164/232
TXT Apparatus under subclass 228 wherein the core shaping means is comprised of
    plural movable parts which are adapted to produce a cavity or undercut
    portion in the core member.

    (1)     Note.  Mere vent forming means are not considered means for forming
    a recess or cavity within the scope of this subclass.


CLS 164/233
TXT Apparatus under subclass 228 directed to a split core mold or box which is
    hinged on one side.


CLS 164/234
TXT Apparatus under subclass 228 which includes means defining venting passages
    in the core box or means for forming vents in the shaped core member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    410,    for vents or vent forming apparatus, per se.


CLS 164/235
TXT Apparatus under subclass 159 comprising a forming element, i.e., pattern or
    part of pattern, for shaping a mold.


CLS 164/236
TXT Apparatus under subclass 235 wherein the pattern is adapted to support an
    insert or chill.


CLS 164/237
TXT Apparatus under subclass 235 in combination with a container or box without
    top and without fixed bottom for confining mold material in which the same
    is being shaped.

    (1)     Note.  The flask may either consist of (1) the cope, (2) the drag
    or (3) the cope and drag.


CLS 164/238
TXT Apparatus under subclass 237 wherein the pattern or pattern holding member
    is supported by apertures in the flask wall or flask supporting member,
    e.g., follow board, etc.

    (1)     Note.  The flask supporting member may be a plate or follow board
    upon which the flask walls and pattern rest, e.g., a flask supported on a
    follow board having an aperture in which the pattern rests would be
    encompassed herein.


CLS 164/239
TXT Apparatus under subclass 237 wherein the pattern is (1) a match pattern
    plate or (2) the pattern is temporarily or permanently supported by the
    plate or board during the mold shaping operation.


CLS 164/240
TXT Apparatus under subclass 239 wherein the pattern is rotatable or pivotable
    with respect to the flask.


CLS 164/241
TXT Apparatus under subclass 235 including plate means for temporarily or
    permanently supporting patterns and parts of patterns during molding
    combined solely with the patterns themselves.


CLS 164/242
TXT Apparatus under subclass 241 which include gate former means attached to
    the pattern - match plate proper.


CLS 164/243
TXT Apparatus under subclass 241 with a cope pattern located on one side of the
    pattern plate and a drag pattern located opposite said cope pattern on the
    other side of the plate, said apparatus being an integral unit.


CLS 164/244
TXT Apparatus under subclass 235 which includes means for forming a sprue, gate
    or runner in the mold.

    (1)     Note.  The means for forming the sprue, gate or runner is generally
    attached to the pattern.


CLS 164/245
TXT Apparatus under subclass 235 wherein the pattern means is particularly
    adapted for producing undercut parts in the mold.


CLS 164/246
TXT Apparatus under subclass 245 wherein the pattern is formed of destructible
    material.


CLS 164/247
TXT Apparatus under subclass 245 wherein the pattern is adapted to be withdrawn
    solely by nonlinear movement, e.g., screw type pattern.


CLS 164/248
TXT Apparatus under subclass 245 wherein the pattern is composed of at least
    two parts which are relatively separable.


CLS 164/249
TXT Apparatus under subclass 235 for patterns defined in terms of a series of
    materials whether or not other structural features of the pattern are
    recited.


CLS 164/250.1
TXT MEANS TO DIRECTLY APPLY ELECTRICAL OR WAVE ENERGY TO WORK:

    Apparatus under the class definition which includes means to apply an
    energy quantity directly to work material either as (a) wave energy in the
    frequency spectrum above the lower audio frequency range, (i.e., fifty
    cycles per second), or (b) an electric field or force.

    (1)     Note.  In order for radiant energy to be placed herein, the radiant
    heat must be specifically claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48+,    for processes of direct application of electrical or wave energy to
    work.


CLS 164/253
TXT Apparatus under the class definition combined with means for (1) exhausting
    or partially exhausting air or other gas from the work material, (2)
    directly applying a vacuum or suction to work material either in a melting
    furnace, material receptacle, or before, during or after charging of the
    work material into a shaping member, or (3) applying vacuum or suction to
    the apparatus or portions thereof for positioning, retaining or aligning of
    parts.

    (1)     Note.  The application of the vacuum or suction may perform a dual
    function, e.g., exhaust air or other gases from the mold or work material
    and also effect movement of the work material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16+,    for process of utilizing a vacuum.


CLS 164/254
TXT Apparatus under subclass 253 wherein the vacuum or suction is directly
    applied to molten casting material.


CLS 164/255
TXT Apparatus under subclass 254 wherein the vacuum is applied to the casting
    material through a vent or minute openings in a mold wall.


CLS 164/256
TXT Apparatus under subclass 254 which includes means for directly applying a
    vacuum or suction in a closed system encompassing a receptacle and a
    casting mold.

    (1)     Note.  The closed system may include a melting furnace, an
    intermediate charging chamber and a casting chamber and the vacuum or
    suction may be applied in all or any one of them.


CLS 164/257
TXT Apparatus under subclass 256 with vacuum or suction means for feeding the
    molten metal into the charging chamber receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  The vacuum or suction effect may be created by a pressure
    cylinder which operates to force the molten metal from the charging
    receptacle to the mold.


CLS 164/258
TXT Apparatus under subclass 256 wherein the closed system includes a melting
    chamber receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  The recitation of a melting furnace without claimed heating
    means is sufficient for this subclass.


CLS 164/259
TXT Apparatus under the class definition combined with means for providing a
    special inert or deoxidizing atmosphere.

    (1)     Note.  To be within the scope of this subclass, the inert or
    deoxidizing atmosphere must be claimed as such.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66.1+,  for processes of applying an inert or reducing gaseous atmosphere
    to work.

    475,    for continuous casting processes including a reducing gas or inert
    atmosphere.


CLS 164/260
TXT Apparatus under the class definition combined with means for effecting a
    vibratory motion.

    (1)     Note.  "Vibratory" includes any form of reciprocating or
    oscillating jarring motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    478,    for processes of vibrating while continuously casting.


CLS 164/261
TXT Apparatus under subclass 260 wherein the vibrator means is actuated by
    fluid pressure.


CLS 164/262
TXT Apparatus under the class definition which includes casting means combined
    with means for cutting or trimming the casting while it is associated with
    the mold or a portion of the mold.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 52 for static molds employing a static means
    to produce a groove or depression in the product to facilitate breaking or
    cutting.


CLS 164/263
TXT Apparatus under subclass 262 which includes continuous casting means
    combined with severing means.


CLS 164/264
TXT Apparatus under subclass 262 wherein a gate forming member severs a gate
    from the cast product.


CLS 164/265
TXT Apparatus under subclass 262 directed to rod or punch means which are
    actuatable to sever the casting from the gate portion.


CLS 164/266
TXT Apparatus under the class definition which includes a means to chemically
    purify an ore or combined metal to produce a metal value.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, appropriate subclasses for processes for producing metals.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for refining
    apparatus.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 1+ for chemical
    processes of obtaining metal containing compounds from mixtures.


CLS 164/267
TXT Apparatus under the class definition which includes a means to apply a
    layer to a base by a coating operation which base and layer are to be a
    composite product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for coating apparatus.


CLS 164/268
TXT Apparatus under subclass 267 wherein the base is a continuously cast
    product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    419,    for apparatus for casting metal onto a running indefinite length
    base.

    472,    for processes of lubricating continuous casting molds.


CLS 164/269
TXT Apparatus under the class definition which includes a means for placing,
    conveying or otherwise moving in a nonmanufacturing manner the product or
    product portion of a casting operation after the product or product portion
    has been separated for the shaping surface.

    (1)     Note.  Merely ejecting or removing the product from a mold will not
    bring the patent to this subclass.  The manipulation must be more than a
    mere perfecting of the casting operation.


CLS 164/270.1
TXT COMBINED:

    Apparatus under the class definition which includes a means to perform an
    operation which is, per se, not of this class and is not a perfecting means
    for an operation of this class.


CLS 164/271
TXT Apparatus under the class definition wherein such apparatus provides a
    surface to impart a shape to molten metal as it freezes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    appropriate subclasses for molding apparatus for shaping or reshaping
    fluent or plastic material not elsewhere provided for; especially see
    subclasses 78+ for means for molding powdered metal.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 544+ for stock
    materials, e.g., of indefinite length, which are all metal or have adjacent
    metal components.


CLS 164/272
TXT Apparatus under subclass 271 wherein a means is employed to shape molten
    metallic material by peripherally confining, or engaging with a surface
    only a relatively small portion of the body of molten material, but shaping
    the entire body by moving it across the surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 21.1+ and 142+ for processes and
    apparatus respectively for particulate bead or ball making.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 5+ for molten metal comminuting and solidifying processes.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 332+ for a ball former comprising means imparting a rolling
    action to a discrete charge of nonmetallic material.


CLS 164/284
TXT Apparatus under subclass 271 wherein the means shapes by a force other than
    gravity.

    (1)     Note.  The term pressure shaping includes all force type operations
    of bringing the metal into contact with a shaping surface, e.g.,
    centrifugal force, kinetic force, fluid pressure force, etc., except those
    operations where the only force is the static head of the casting material
    acting through a riser or gate, i.e., gravity force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for processes of applying pressure to material in a mold.


CLS 164/285
TXT Apparatus under subclass 284 which includes a means for generating a
    gaseous product to provide the pressure shaping force.

    (1)     Note.  The gas is generally produced by a chemical reaction or by
    volatilization.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for processes of shaping liquid metal against a forming surface
    utilizing an explosive force.

    307,    for manually operated pressure generating means for charging molten
    metal.


CLS 164/286
TXT Apparatus under subclass 284 where the means shapes by centrifugal force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114+,   for processes of centrifugally casting metal.

    451,    for continuous or semi-continuous casting processes utilizing
    centrifugal force.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 360.1+ for liquid
    centrifugal extractors.

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 137+ for a centrifugal mold.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 425, for molding apparatus utilizing mold motion (e.g.,
    centrifugal molding, etc.), to shape a nonmetal.


CLS 164/287
TXT Apparatus under subclass 286 which includes means to compensate or correct
    a weight differential across the axis at rotation.

    (1)     Note.  To be included herein, a balancing means does not have to be
    adjustable, e.g., it may be a permanent mass diametrically opposite a mold.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    289,    for molds which may disclose the counterweight.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 573 for flywheels and rotors
    with balancing means.


CLS 164/288
TXT Apparatus under subclass 286 which includes means to present a preformed
    article part for compositing by centrifugal force.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 270 for processes
    of centrifugally lining a cavity with nonmetallic material.


CLS 164/289
TXT Apparatus under subclass 286 wherein a forming cavity is positioned so that
    the axis of rotation for centrifugal formation does not extend through it.


CLS 164/290
TXT Apparatus under subclass 289 wherein two or more separate product forming
    cavities are employed.


CLS 164/291
TXT Apparatus under subclass 286 having means to accommodate or neutralize
    deformations in the dimensions of the apparatus during the casting
    operation.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are apparatus constructions which are
    specifically determined to prevent warpage or expansion deformations from
    being detrimental even though a separate member or compensator is not
    provided.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    435,    for molds having expansible walls in continuous casting apparatus.


CLS 164/292
TXT Apparatus under subclass 286 having means to detachably force fasten either
    (1) mold parts together or (2) a mold in the rotating device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, for clamping work holders, per se.


CLS 164/293
TXT Apparatus under subclass 292 wherein a clamp is actuated by the centrifugal
    force.


CLS 164/294
TXT Apparatus under subclass 286 which includes means to stop or slow the
    rotating mold.


CLS 164/295
TXT Apparatus under subclass 286 which includes means to strip the casting from
    the forming surface.


CLS 164/296
TXT Apparatus under subclass 286 having plural cavities extending around the
    axis of rotation, each of said cavities forming a separate product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290,    for centrifugal molds having plural radially disposed molds.

    322,    for plural independent molds.

    350+,   for sand molds having plural article forming cavities.


CLS 164/297
TXT Apparatus under subclass 286 which includes means to apply to a mold or
    product a material to extract heat therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    348,    for means to apply coolant to a mold or casting.


CLS 164/298
TXT Apparatus under subclass 286 wherein a mold is adapted to be centrifugally
    turned around a generally horizontal axis.


CLS 164/299
TXT Apparatus under subclass 298 which includes a feeding channel extending
    along at least a portion of the axis of rotation inside the mold.


CLS 164/300
TXT Apparatus under subclass 299 wherein the trough is enabled to turn around
    the axis of the horizontal mold.


CLS 164/301
TXT Apparatus under subclass 299 wherein the trough is enabled to change its
    position along the horizontal axis of the mold during the filling of the
    mold.


CLS 164/302
TXT Apparatus under subclass 286 which include a separate shaping member which
    forms an aperture in the product.


CLS 164/303
TXT Apparatus under subclass 284 wherein the pressure acts upon a body of the
    charge to force it into a confined shaping area to be shaped by said
    pressure.


CLS 164/304
TXT Apparatus under subclass 303 wherein a stopper or cutoff means is present
    in the feed port of a mold for closing the opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133+,   for a process of controlling the introduction of liquid metal
    against a forming surface.

    142,    for apparatus for casting printing plates including a melting
    chamber having a valved gate.

    337,    for means to shape metallic material including a ladle or crucible
    type melt receptacle having flow control means.


CLS 164/305
TXT Apparatus under subclass 303 which includes means specifically provided for
    facilitating the removal of gas in the article forming cavity proper or the
    introduction port thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61+,    for processes of shaping liquid metal against a forming surface
    utilizing a vacuum.

    254+,   for casting apparatus of this class having means to apply vacuum or
    suction directly to the molten casting material.

    410,    for vent or vent forming apparatus, per se.


CLS 164/306
TXT Apparatus under subclass 303 wherein the injection means includes means to
    apply a gas pressure directly to the casting material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    for processes of shaping liquid metal against a forming surface by
    direct fluid pressure.

    285,    for pressure shaping apparatus including a pressure gas or pressure
    vapor generator.


CLS 164/307
TXT Apparatus under subclass 306 which includes a hand manipulated producer for
    the pneumatic charging pressure.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are those patents wherein muscle power is
    utilized in generating the pneumatic pressure force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284,    for manually operated pneumatic pressure generating means for
    applying secondary pressure.


CLS 164/308
TXT Apparatus under subclass 306 which includes a cover member for a mold
    holding means which makes a gas tight closure and contains a port through
    which the pneumatic charging pressure is introduced.


CLS 164/309
TXT Apparatus under subclass 306 wherein the pneumatic pressure means forces
    the metal directly from a melting unit or part thereof to the casting
    cavity.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus is included herein where a nozzle acceptor or
    charge form the melting unit but remains at least partially submerged in
    the molten metal of the unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    316+,   for casting apparatus of the hot chamber type which utilizes a
    piston-cylinder charger.


CLS 164/310
TXT Apparatus under subclass 309 which includes means to accept and separate a
    charging portion from the bulk source.


CLS 164/311
TXT Apparatus under subclass 310 which includes a charging chamber and spout
    having provision for introduction of the charge through the ejection end of
    the spout, i.e., through the spout port that contacts the mold gate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    336,    for means to shape metallic material which includes a rotatable or
    dipper type dispenser.


CLS 164/312
TXT Apparatus under subclass 303 wherein the injection means comprises a piston
    operating through a cylinder directly on the fluid casting material.


CLS 164/313
TXT Apparatus under subclass 312 which include at least two pistons which have
    opposed pressure faces which act to inject the casting material.


CLS 164/314
TXT Apparatus under subclass 312 wherein the piston is operated by liquid
    pressure.


CLS 164/315
TXT Apparatus under subclass 314 wherein the hydraulic piston is controlled by
    a single valve having three or more flow lines with an actuator arranged so
    as to determine the relative order, duration or flow through each of the
    several flow lines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 625+ for fluid handling systems
    employing a multi-way valve.


CLS 164/316
TXT Apparatus under subclass 312 wherein the piston means forces the metal
    directly from a melting unit or charge chamber to the casting cavity.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus is included herein where the charge is first
    segregated into a charging chamber while in the melting area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    309,    for apparatus wherein direct pneumatic charging means forces the
    metal directly from a melting unit to the casting cavity.

    335,    for means to shape metallic material including a ladle or crucible
    type melt receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for dispensing means in general.


CLS 164/317
TXT Apparatus under subclass 316 wherein the pressure piston has an opening
    through which to convey pressurized metal towards the mold.


CLS 164/318
TXT Apparatus under subclass 316 which includes a fluid pressure operated
    piston-charger.

    (1)     Note.  The piston may be directly operated by the fluid pressure or
    the operating force may be generated by fluid pressure and transmitted by
    mechanical linkages.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312,    for a cold chamber type fluid actuated piston charger.


CLS 164/319
TXT Apparatus under subclass 284 wherein the pressure shaping means is a solid
    member which is applied to the metal after it is in the mold or otherwise
    confined.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    for a process of applying direct fluid secondary pressure to
    confined metal.

    120,    for a process of applying pressure after the introduction of metal
    into a confining means.

    284,    for means to apply a pneumatic secondary pressure force to confined
    metal.


CLS 164/320
TXT Apparatus under subclass 319 wherein the pressure means is an element which
    applies a pressure acting in a radially outward direction from a cavity in
    the product.


CLS 164/321
TXT Apparatus under subclass 319 which includes a fluid pressure actuated
    piston compression means.

    (1)     Note.  The inelastic compression member may either be directly or
    indirectly actuated by fluid force.


CLS 164/322
TXT Apparatus under subclass 271 which includes two or more molds which do not
    rely upon each other for shaping a complete product and are not filled by
    the same sprue, gate or runner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for process of shaping fluent material to sequentially form
    discrete molds.

    129+,   for a process of casting plural articles.

    167,    for mold shaping including metal casting means.

    296,    for centrifugal casting means having plural mold cavities.

    350+,   for sand type molds having individual mold cavities for forming
    plural products which are filled by a common sprue, gate or riser.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 81 and 119+ for static type molds having a
    community feature.


CLS 164/323
TXT Apparatus under subclass 322 which includes means to change the loci of the
    molds.

    (1)     Note.  To be included herein the mold must leave one locus for
    another.  Mere movement at one locus is insufficient, e.g., moving mold
    parts together, tilting of a mold, etc.


CLS 164/324
TXT Apparatus under subclass 323 wherein the molds are moved, one after the
    other, in a circuit.


CLS 164/325
TXT Apparatus under subclass 324 wherein the moving means is a rigid structure
    carrying the molds in a generally circular circuit around its axis.


CLS 164/326
TXT Apparatus under subclass 325 wherein the table or wheel is mounted to turn
    around a vertical axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 20+, for
    horizontal power driven tables.


CLS 164/327
TXT Apparatus under subclass 326 wherein the molds have two or more shaping
    parts which are moved relative to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137,    for a mold assembling processes of this class.

    168,    for mold shaping and assembling means including metal casting means.

    339+,   for means to shape metallic material including means to assemble
    mold parts.

    364+,   for a sand type shaping surface comprised of separable parts.

    377+,   for a flask or flask section having size adjustable features.

    384+,   for plural part flask or flask sections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 155+, for a static container type mold
    having a size adjustable feature, subclasses 160+ for a static container
    type mold having plural mold sections and subclasses 184+ for a plural
    section static core member.


CLS 164/328
TXT Apparatus under subclass 327 which includes a cam surface which effects the
    relative movement of the separable parts.


CLS 164/329
TXT Apparatus under subclass 324 wherein the molds are moved in their circuit
    by a flexible, endlessly linked carrier.


CLS 164/330
TXT Apparatus under subclass 329 in which the serial molds each are made of two
    or more parts which are relatively movable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137,    for mold assembling processes of this class.

    168,    for mold shaping and assembling means including metal casting means.

    339+,   for means to shape metallic material including means to assemble
    mold parts.

    364+,   for a sand type shaping surface comprised of separate parts.

    377+,   for a flask or flask section having size adjustable features.

    384+,   for plural part flask or flask sections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 155+ for a static container type mold
    having a size adjustable feature, subclasses 160+ for a static container
    type mold having plural mold sections and subclasses 184+ for a plural
    section static core member.


CLS 164/331
TXT Apparatus under subclass 329 which includes a mechanical member which
    contacts the mold or product to separate the cast product from the mold.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    344+,   for means to shape metallic material including product ejection
    means; and the search notes thereto for apparatus of this class including
    ejector means.

    404+,   for, per se, means to separate a cast product from a shaping member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 66.1, for static type molds including
    product  ejecting means.


CLS 164/332
TXT Apparatus under subclass 271 which includes means for holding or
    positioning a preformed part, which is to become a part of the final cast
    product, in a mold during the casting operation.

    (1)     Note.  To be included in this and indented subclasses the preform
    must be disclosed as a desired element of the product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9+,     for process of shaping a forming surface within which is embedded a
    preform which is to become part of the final product.

    98+,    for processes of forming a composite article wherein a preform is
    incorporated into the metal cast, particularly see subclass 112 for methods
    of positioning a preform relative to the shaping surface.

    228,    for means of pressure casting including means to hold or position a
    preformed product part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 83+ for static molds means providing for
    uniting a preform with the metal being cast.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 259+, for processes of shaping and uniting material other than
    metal to a performed product part.  See subclasses 275+ for processes of
    positioning or maintaining position of preform relative to mold surface.


CLS 164/333
TXT Apparatus under subclass 332 having means for positioning plural preform
    bodies in a mold cavity.

    (1)     Note.  The plural preforms may be in contact or may be in spaced
    relationship.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10+,    for process of shaping a forming surface within which is embedded
    plural preform bodies which are to become an integral part of the final
    product.


CLS 164/334
TXT Apparatus under subclass 332 having means other than the mold (core)
    surface for supporting or holding the preform body.

    (1)     Note.  A mere clamp, e.g., a device integral with or abutting a
    molding surface which also aids in supporting the preform, is not
    considered to be "other" support means.

    (2)     Note.  A separate and distinct means employed to support a preform
    in a particular location within the mold cavity where said means becomes a
    part of the cast product is considered to be within the scope of "other"
    support means and is included herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 91+ for static type molds including means
    other than the mold surface for supporting a preform body in the mold
    cavity.


CLS 164/335
TXT Apparatus under subclass 271 including a receptacle or container for
    holding and/or dispensing the molten material into a shaping member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256,    for vacuum systems including a melt receptacle.

    437+,   for continuous casting means having means to dispense or distribute
    a metal charge.

    311,    for front loading nozzle type pneumatic injection machines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, for dispensing type metal ladles.

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 105+, for permanent-type shaping surface
    having static filling means.


CLS 164/336
TXT Apparatus under subclass 335 wherein either (1) the melt receptacle is
    rotatable together with the mold to fill same or (2) a ladle, which removes
    a portion by dipping from a larger melt receptacle, turns over to dispense
    the charge into a mold.


CLS 164/337
TXT Apparatus under subclass 335 with either a flow controller or conduit means
    located intermediate the mold and the molten metal dispenser for effecting
    discharge of the material into the mold.


CLS 164/338.1
TXT Including means to heat mold:
    Apparatus under subclass 271 including means to heat the mold.

    (1)     Note.  The heating means may be integrated within the metal-shaping
    surface or external thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103+,   for processes of preconditioning a preform by preheating said
    preform to perfect the bonding between it and the metal cast.

    121,    for processes of preconditioning apparatus by heating.

    122+,   for processes of controlling solidification by heating.

    144,    for heating means combined with means for casting printing plates.

    250.1+, for means to directly apply electrical or wave energy to work
    including for heating purposes.

    492,    for processes of heating molten metal by electrical or wave energy
    while forming said metal against a shaping surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 79 for a static metal mold having electric
    heating means; and subclass 80 for static metal mold having means within
    mold body to confine heat exchange medium.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 402+ for processes of heating nonmetal cast material by direct
    application of electrical or wave energy; and subclasses 319+ for processes
    of applying heat to a nonmetal cast material which is shaped against a
    forming surface.


CLS 164/338.2
TXT In situ chemical reactive heating means:

    Apparatus under subclass 338.1 wherein the means to heat the mold includes
    chemically reactive material contained in some portion of the mold body.


CLS 164/339
TXT Apparatus under subclass 271 which includes means for positioning or
    maintaining mold parts in operational relationship before or during casting.

    (1)     Note.  The assembling means may encompass machine elements for
    effecting and maintaining mating mold parts in working engagement or may
    merely encompass means for positioning a cope and drag assembly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137,    for processes of assembling mold parts.

    168,    for mold shaping and assembling means combined with a metal casting
    station.

    292,    for centrifugal casting means having mold or mold part clamping
    means.

    374+,   for mold flasks, per se.

    377+,   for size adjustable flasks.

    385+,   for plural part flasks having alignment means.

    394+,   for mold jackets or slip boxes, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 106+, for plural part metal molds having
    assembly means.

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses for a "clamp" means, per se,
    to grasp or draw portions of a mold or flask either together or onto a base
    or support.


CLS 164/340
TXT Apparatus under subclass 339 wherein the assembly means are for effecting
    placement of a core section into operational engagement with a mold cavity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30+,    for process of shaping a composite mold structure wherein the
    position of the core is maintained relative to the mold.

    370,    for a sand type shaping surface including a core with integral
    aligning means.

    397+,   for core centering or supporting means, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 177 for a core element of that class
    including means to attach the core to a support.


CLS 164/341
TXT Apparatus under subclass 339 having additional means for locking the
    assembled mold parts in operational engagement.

    (1)     Note.  The locking means may cooperate with the assembly means but
    must be in addition thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 167 for plural mold sections having
    removable means to maintain assembly including a clamp means and subclasses
    168+ for plural mold sections having fastening means.


CLS 164/342
TXT Apparatus under subclass 339 wherein the mold parts assembled consist of
    permanent members.

    (1)     Note.  A permanent mold is one which is reusable several times and
    is generally constructed of metal.

    (2)     Note.  Sand resin mold structures, e.g., shell molds are not
    considered permanent mold structures to be placed herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    303+,   for injection pressure shaping means.


CLS 164/343
TXT Apparatus under subclass 342 wherein fluid pressure actuated means effects
    the positioning of the permanent mold parts into assembled relationship.

    (1)     Note.  The fluid pressure may act either directly or indirectly
    upon the mold parts.


CLS 164/344
TXT Apparatus under subclass 271 including means to remove or withdraw a cast
    product from a forming surface or vice versa.

    (1)     Note.  The removal or withdrawal may be with respect to a mold or
    core or both.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131+,   for processes of removing a product from a forming surface.

    145,    for means of stripping cast printing plates.

    180,    for means to withdraw mold parts after shaping a forming surface.

    213,    for means for separating mold from shaping member subsequent to its
    formation.

    295,    for means to remove product from centrifugal casting means.

    401+,   for means, per se, to eject or strip product from shaping surface.

    441+,   for apparatus means for continuous or semi-continuous casting
    including a product withdrawal means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 66.1, for metal shaping surface including
    means to remove or release product from said surface; subclass 136, for
    static mold with a bottom movable through upstanding mold walls to aid
    product removal; subclasses 178+, for internal mold means (core) including
    means to contract core thereby aiding its removal from a product and
    subclass 183, for flexural shaping surface means which characteristic aids
    in product removal.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 334+, for processes of separating non-metal molded article from
    shaping surface.


CLS 164/345
TXT Apparatus under subclass 344 having means for separating a core from the
    cast product.

    (1)     Note.  The apparatus found herein may also effect removal of the
    cast product from the mold in addition to performing a core removal
    operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132,    for processes of core removal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 63+ for a static mold including a core and
    means to remove the core.


CLS 164/346
TXT Apparatus under subclass 345 wherein the core means utilized is constructed
    of sectional or plural parts to facilitate removal from the cast product.

    (1)     Note.  The plural parts of the core may be movably attached and
    thusly collapsible or may be composed of loose pieces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    369,    for a sand type shaping surface including a core member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 178+ for expansible and/or contractible
    metal cores and subclass 184 for plural section cores.


CLS 164/347
TXT Apparatus under subclass 344 wherein push element means, e.g., ejector
    pins, are utilized for contacting the cast product and affecting separation
    from the forming surface.

    (1)     Note.  The ejector pins may or may not be an integral part of the
    forming surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    406,    for ingot stripping pin means, per se.


CLS 164/348
TXT Apparatus under subclass 271 including means to apply coolant to mold or
    casting or means within its surface to confine a heat exchange medium.

    (1)     Note.  Coolant means may be integrated within the mold body or
    external thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122+,   for processes of controlling solidification, particularly
    subclasses 126 and 128 for processes of utilizing a cooling liquid.

    144,    for printing plate casting means having auxiliary cooling means.

    297,    for means to apply coolant to centrifugal casting means.

    443+,   for continuous or semicontinuous casting means having a casting
    material cooling means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 79+, for permanent type static metal mold
    having means within its surface to confine heat exchange medium; and
    subclass 111 for static mold including solid heat conductor, e.g, chill.


CLS 164/349
TXT Apparatus under subclass 271 wherein the shape imparting surface is
    composed of particles which retain their individual identity and are bonded
    or adhered to one another.

    (1)     Note.  The shaping surface in this and indented subclasses are
    static, i.e., the shaping surface does not move in any way, once they are
    assembled, in order to effect shaping of the cast metal.

    (2)     Note.  By the term "sand" is meant granular particles resulting
    from the breakdown of rocks.  Sand particles have refractory
    characteristics. The term includes "silica sand" from quartz and other
    siliceous rocks which comprises 50 to 95 per cent of the total material in
    any molding sand; specially sands such as zirconite and olivine.  Also
    included are other particular material such as carbon, clays, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165+,   for means to make shell type molds.

    169+,   for means to shape molds from particulate materials.

    348,    for sand mold including cooling means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, for metal molds having a sand coated shaping surface.
     The sand coating takes the shape of the metal mold and does no shaping,
    per se.


CLS 164/350
TXT Apparatus under subclass 349 wherein the sand type shaping surface has more
    than one cavity for forming a separate and distinct product.

    (1)     Note.  The plural cavities are filled through a common sprue.

    (2)     Note.  The products produced may be totally different in design.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322+,   for plural independent molds not filled through a common sprue.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 119+, for plural article forming static
    nonsand type molds.


CLS 164/351
TXT Apparatus under subclass 350 having an inner removable core in at least one
    of the mold cavities.

    (1)     Note.  The combination of a mold and internal core is found in this
    class so long as one of the elements is composed of sand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30+,    for process of forming plural part shaping surface and positioning
    core relative to a forming surface.

    98+,    for process of forming a composite article by embedding a preform
    in or surrounding it with cast metal, e.g., a metal tubular core of one
    composition could be positioned in a sand mold and metal of a different
    composition cast therearound so as to form a tubular product.

    302,    for centrifugal casting means including a core means.

    340,    for apparatus means to position core within a mold.

    345+,   for means to eject core from mold after casting has solidified.

    348,    for core member having coolant means therein.

    365+,   for plural separable part molds, e.g., sand molds comprising a cope
    and drag and numerous cores, in which intricate shapes are cast such as
    radiators and crankshafts.

    369,    for sand cores, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 63, for metal mold including core;
    subclasses 142+, for metal mold having inner removable core for forming
    recess or opening in the material cast; subclasses 175+, for metal cores
    (internal molds), per se.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 271.1 process of shaping plastic material and embedding preform
    therein.


CLS 164/352
TXT Apparatus under subclass 349 comprising a shaping surface and metal chill
    combination.

    (1)     Note.  A metal chill may be embedded within the sand-type shaping
    surface or on the surface thereof.  In the latter case, the chill aids in
    shaping the cast metal.  In the prior case the chill acts merely as a heat
    conductor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     material introduced into mold as a solid where, e.g., the purpose
    is to avoid shrinkage.

    98+,    process of casting metal into contact with preform within the mold
    cavity and embedding the preform within the shaped material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 111, for nonsand type static mold having
    solid heat conductor or insulator.


CLS 164/353
TXT Apparatus under subclass 352 where the metal chill is a part of the
    sand-type shaping surface.


CLS 164/354
TXT Apparatus under subclass 353 wherein the shaping surface of which the chill
    is a part is a surface which shapes an internal portion of a product.


CLS 164/355
TXT Apparatus under subclass 353 wherein two or more spaced chill sections act
    as part of the shaping surface.


CLS 164/356
TXT Apparatus under subclass 353 wherein the shaping surface comprises a metal
    chill which is annular and has a hole which shapes a portion of a product
    intermediate its ends.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 57 for static molds which produce a ring
    type product.


CLS 164/357
TXT Apparatus under subclass 352 wherein the chill is incorporated within the
    cast metal product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for process of making sand mold wherein product part is embedded in
    the mold material.

    80,     for process of molding metal wherein material, e.g., a consumable
    chill, is introduced into the mold as a solid.

    107,    for process of making a composite article wherein a preform is a
    chill member.

    127,    for processes of casting wherein a chill member is utilized to
    effect localized or zone heat dissipation.

    236,    for chill supporting pattern members.

    371,    for chills, per se, if the chills are used as a means to shape
    metallic material.

    412,    consumable chills, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 111 for a static nonsand mold including a
    chill member.


CLS 164/358
TXT Apparatus under subclass 349 having apertured filter means for preventing
    the inclusion of unwanted components, e.g., dross, dirt, oxides, etc., in
    the cast product.

    (1)     Note.  The strainer element to be included herein must have three
    or more apertures or openings.

    (2)     Note.  The apertured strainer element may be located in the gate,
    runner, sprue or riser portions of the mold.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61+,    for processes of casting utilizing a vacuum.

    134,    for processes of casting including the step of separating an
    unwanted component from the melt.

    254+,   for casting apparatus having means for applying vacuum directly to
    the molten casting material.

    337,    for casting apparatus including a melt receptacle having flow
    control means intermediate the receptacle and mold.

    362,    for a sand type shaping surface having nonapertured segregating
    means for separating unwanted components from the molten cast metal.


CLS 164/359
TXT Apparatus under subclass 349 having means to provide a reservoir of molten
    metal for feeding into the mold cavity proper as the metal in the mold
    solidifies to compensate for liquid shrinkage.

    (1)     Note.  The reservoir, e.g., riser, hot top sink head, etc., must be
    designed to furnish additional metal to the mold cavity proper after the
    teeming has ceased.

    (2)     Note.  In a top pouring mold the sprue, gate and riser are often
    integrated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for processes of making patterns which may have a riser shaping
    portion.

    80,     for processes of controlling pipe by insertion of solid metal into
    the mold as the cast metal solidifies.

    120,    for processes of pressure casting involving a secondary pressure
    application to densify the cast metal.

    122+,   for methods of controlling solidification of the cast metal.

    162,    for apparatus means for shaping risers.

    244,    for pattern means to shape sprue.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 82 metal mold having means to adjust mold
    volume during molding, subclasses 105+ for static filling means in contact
    with mold cavity, and subclasses 197+ for sink head or hot top, per se.


CLS 164/360
TXT Apparatus under subclass 359 wherein the feeding reservoir, i.e., riser,
    does not extend to the mold surface.

    (1)     Note.  Generally the blind risers are closed to the atmosphere by a
    cap or plug, however, the blind riser may be vented.

    (2)     Note.  The blind riser may be positioned intermediate the mold
    cavity proper and the sprue.


CLS 164/361
TXT Apparatus under subclass 349 wherein the shaping surface is a thin
    shell-like mold formed from thermosetting resin-bonded sand mixtures.

    (1)     Note.  Generally the shell mold consists of two or more parts,
    i.e., cope and drag.

    (2)     Note.  The shell mold may be externally backed up with steel shot,
    sand, or similar material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for processes of shaping shell type molds by spraying resin
    containing particulate material against a shaping surface.

    165+,   for shell type molding machine to shape a forming surface.

    520+,   for processes of shaping shell type molds.


CLS 164/362
TXT Apparatus under subclass 349 having runner or gate splash and swirl control
    means, e.g., runner bushes, runner traps, etc., for providing laminar flow
    of the molten metal into the mold cavity proper.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are molds with gates and runners having
    specific geometrical shape for reducing flow turbulence.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133+,   for processes of introduction control or manipulation of charge.

    244,    for combination pattern means including means to shape a sprue,
    gate or runner.

    337,    for metallic shaping means combined with a melt receptacle having
    flow control or conduit means intermediate the receptacle and mold.

    358,    for a sand type shaping surface including an apertured strainer
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 105+ for metal mold including static
    filling means, e.g., see subclass 107 for inlet communicating with plural
    feeding passages; and subclass 206, for a splash control for a static
    nonsand type mold.


CLS 164/363
TXT Apparatus under subclass 349 wherein the runner for feeding the molten
    metal into the mold cavity proper is located at or near the bottom of the
    cavity or is constructed so as to feed the metal in a substantially
    horizontal flow path into the cavity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242,    for gated patterns match plates.

    244,    for pattern means including means to shape gate.

    304,    for injection casting apparatus having a valved gate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 109 for nonsand static molds having material
    inlet to cavity at or near the bottom of cavity.


CLS 164/364
TXT Apparatus under subclass 349 comprising a multipart shaping surface which
    parts are relatively movable.

    (1)     Note.  A shaping surface having merely a cope and a drag is subject
    matter for these subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 64 for metal mold having plural cores;
    subclasses 142+ for permanent container type molding apparatus having an
    inner removable core; and subclasses 160+ for container type molding device
    having plural mold sections.


CLS 164/365
TXT Apparatus under subclass 364 wherein one of the separate parts is a member
    to be positioned in a mold to provide a product cavity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302,    for centrifugal casting means including core means.

    351,    for a mold having a core within each of a plurality of molding
    cavities.

    369+,   for sand cores, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 63 for nonsand type static mold including
    core and means to remove the core; and subclasses 142+ for nonsand type
    static mold including a removable core.


CLS 164/366
TXT Apparatus under subclass 365 wherein the core contains and at least
    partially surrounds an element which aids in strengthening or holding the
    core, sand or aids in positioning the core relative to a mold.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    379+,   for flasks having means to reinforce or retain mold sand.

    397+,   for core centering or supporting means, per se.


CLS 164/367
TXT Apparatus under subclass 366 wherein the embedded component is hollow.

    (1)     Note.  The component must be hollow when the core member is
    functioning as a core in a molding operation to be included herein.


CLS 164/368
TXT Apparatus under subclass 365 wherein there is included either (1) two or
    more individual cores or (2) a core which has two or more separable parts.


CLS 164/369
TXT Apparatus under subclass 349 wherein the shaping surface is a member which
    is to be positioned in a mold to provide a product cavity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30+,    for processes of maintaining position of core while shaping a
    composite, plural part or multilayered mold from fluent mold material.

    228+,   for means to form sand cores.

    302,    for centrifugal casting means including core means.

    340,    for means to position core within an assemble of mold parts.

    345+,   for means to shape metal material having in combination means to
    eject the core from the product.

    351,    for sand mold having a core within each of a plurality of molding
    cavities.

    365+,   for separable part shaping surface (including plural part cores)
    where one element is a core.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 63+ for metal molding including metal core
    means; subclasses 122+ for container-type metal molds for forming plural
    articles including a core; subclasses 142+ for container-type molding
    device having inner removable core; and subclasses 175+ for static, nonsand
    type cores.


CLS 164/370
TXT Apparatus under subclass 369 having means integral with the core so that it
    can by those means be positioned in a certain way within a mold cavity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    366+,   for a core having embedded sand reinforcing or supporting component
    in a shaping surface assembly.

    397+,   for core centering or supporting means, per se.


CLS 164/371
TXT Apparatus under subclass 271 directed to a, per se, member which forms a
    part of the mold shaping surface and which has a heat conductivity much
    greater than that of the remaining parts of the mold.

    (1)     Note.  A chill for this subclass must be disclosed for use in a
    sand-type shaping surface and must aid in the actual shaping of the cast
    material.

    (2)     Note.  The chills found herein generally comprise a formed metal
    shaping surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for process of compositing by shaping metal and uniting to a
    preform which is utilized to chill the cast metal.

    127,    for a casting process employing a chill member to control
    solidification.

    138,    for a casting process utilizing a particular shaping surface
    material.

    348,    for metal shaping apparatus including particular means to apply
    coolant.

    352+,   for sand-type shaping surface in combination with a metal chill.

    412,    for a, per se, chill member which does not form a part of the mold
    shaping surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 111 for static nonsand molds including a
    chill.


CLS 164/372
TXT Apparatus under subclass 371 wherein the chill has openings in its surface
    to allow gas to escape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    410,    for vent or vent forming apparatus.


CLS 164/373
TXT Apparatus under subclass 371 wherein the chill surface is in continuous
    arcuate form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    356,    for a sand type shaping surface including an annular chill member.


CLS 164/374
TXT Apparatus under the class definition directed to a container or box for
    confining mold material while the same is being shaped.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237+,   for patterns combined with flasks.


CLS 164/375
TXT Apparatus under subclass 374 which includes a means facilitating
    oscillatory movement of the flask about an axis through the flask or at one
    side of the flask.

    (1)     Note.  Hinged superposed flasks are not considered subject matter
    for this subclass, see subclasses 392+ below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183+,   for rock-over and roll-over type compacting machines which include
    a pattern withdrawal means.

    205,    for a vibrating molding machine with roll or rock-over feature.

    209,    for a press molding machine with an invertible table.

    224,    for shaping apparatus having inverting means.

    402,    for stripping means including pattern inverting means.

    409,    for, per se, means for inverting a pattern or mold member.


CLS 164/376
TXT Apparatus under subclass 374 wherein the flask is one in which material for
    making a precision-casting (last-wax or investment casting) mold is to be
    contained therein.

    (1)     Note.  An investment mold, which to be contained in the type of
    flask of this subclass, is characterized by the mold being formed around
    and embedding a destructible pattern.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34+,    for processes of forming molds wherein the pattern is destroyed to
    remove it.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 54 for static dental type molds.


CLS 164/377
TXT Apparatus under subclass 374 wherein the flask includes means to change the
    dimensions of the flask.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    392+,   for flasks having separable sides with various means to join the
    sides.


CLS 164/378
TXT Apparatus under subclass 377 wherein the adjustable feature of the flask
    part is for varying the size of the vertical dimension.


CLS 164/379
TXT Apparatus under subclass 374 which includes means to (1) help maintain the
    sand in the flask (2) held strengthen the sand or (3) provide for locating
    strengthening members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    411,    for reinforcement, per se, for mold material.


CLS 164/380
TXT Apparatus under subclass 379 where the sand mold retaining means is a strip
    at the base of the flask section which overlies a portion of the mold
    periphery.


CLS 164/381
TXT Apparatus under subclass 380 wherein the sand strip is removable from the
    flask by a structural element actuating the strip.


CLS 164/382
TXT Apparatus under subclass 379 wherein the reinforcement is suspended and
    extends downwardly in the flask.


CLS 164/383
TXT Apparatus under subclass 379 wherein the retention of the mold sand is
    facilitated by contiguous formations on or in the flask at the general
    parting line between the sand mold proper and the flask.


CLS 164/384
TXT Apparatus under subclass 374 wherein the flask or flask section is composed
    of more than one separable part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    364+,   for plural separable part sand type shaping surface.

    377,    for plural part flask wherein parts are assembled to vary size of
    the flask.

    379+,   for flask including means to retain or reinforce mold sand or to
    position reinforcement.


CLS 164/385
TXT Apparatus under subclass 384 having means to aid in precise adjustment or
    correct relative positioning of superposed flask section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137,    for processes of assembling mold parts.

    168,    for means to shape a forming surface combined with metal casting
    means including means for assembling shaped mold parts.

    339+,   for means to shape metallic material including means to assemble
    mold parts.


CLS 164/386
TXT Apparatus under subclass 385 which includes an actuatable means operable
    during or after assembly to fasten the superposed sections and prevent
    their relative vertical movement.


CLS 164/387
TXT Apparatus under subclass 385 wherein the guide means is contained in the
    flask walls.


CLS 164/388
TXT Apparatus under subclass 385 wherein the guide means are capable of ready
    change or easy expansion to bring the flask or contraction part to a true
    or more effective relative positioning.


CLS 164/389
TXT Apparatus under subclass 388 wherein the guide means is composed of
    expansible or contractable material.


CLS 164/390
TXT Apparatus under subclass 388 wherein the adjustability by means of a
    threaded fastening member is variably positioned in a slotted member.


CLS 164/391
TXT Apparatus under subclass 385 wherein the superposed flask sections are
    provided at a common meeting edge with a pivot means to allow relative
    swinging movement at the edge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    375,    for flask having turn over means.


CLS 164/392
TXT Apparatus under subclass 384 in which a flask section has a joint where the
    side parts are not permanently attached to one another.


CLS 164/393
TXT Apparatus under subclass 392 having a joint permitting motion in one plane
    between the adjacent panel section.


CLS 164/394
TXT Apparatus under the class definition directed to a container or enclosure
    for positioning around a sand mold to prevent the mold from spreading or
    breaking down when molten metal is poured into the cavity therein.

    (1)     Note.  The mold jacket or slip box may function to align portions
    of plural part molds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    374+,   for mold shaping flasks or flask sections.

    411+,   for internal mold reinforcement members.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses for a "clamp" means, per se,
    to grasp or draw portions of a mold or flask together.


CLS 164/395
TXT Apparatus under subclass 394 having means by which the size of the jacket
    can be altered.

    (1)     Note.  The mold jackets and slip boxes found herein are of the
    flexible or nonfixed type.

    (2)     Note.  The size of the jacket or slip box may be altered to adapt
    the same to molds having different taper or to different size molds.


CLS 164/396
TXT Apparatus under subclass 395 having panel walls thereof so joined together
    that they individually adapt themselves to the surface on which they are
    placed.

    (1)     Note.  The panel walls to be self-adjustable must act independent
    of the will of the operator.


CLS 164/397
TXT Apparatus under the class definition adapted for insertion in a mold to
    support or position a core body relative to the mold.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230+,   for means for shaping a composite core which includes means for
    positioning a preformed part.

    366+,   for separable part sand molds with a core having reinforcement.


CLS 164/398
TXT Apparatus under subclass 397 wherein the supporting or positioning means
    consists of a member which extends from a core surface to a support surface
    to space the surfaces.


CLS 164/399
TXT Apparatus under subclass 398 wherein the chaplet is positioned by a portion
    extending through the core surface or the supporting surface or by means
    associated with the core and supporting surface.


CLS 164/400
TXT Apparatus under subclass 397 wherein the core supporting means is intended
    to extend inside the core and is constructed to allow a break down or
    reduction in volume of the means.


CLS 164/401
TXT Apparatus under the class definition which has means to disassociate a
    shaping surface from the shaped product.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are patents directed to apparatus for
    stripping sand from flasks.

    (2)     Note.  The shaped produce can either be a cast product or a shaped
    mold structure.

    (3)     Note.  Included herein is, per se, apparatus utilized to
    disassociate a pattern or core member from a mold structure by fluidizing
    or liquifying.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34+,    for processes of destroying a pattern to disassociate the same from
    a shaped mold.

    44,     for mechanical pattern withdrawal processes.

    180+,   for mold material compacting apparatus having means for withdrawing
    the forming surface from the shaping means.

    213+,   for mold shaping apparatus including means for separating the
    forming surface from the shaping means.


CLS 164/402
TXT Apparatus under subclass 401 including means for inverting a pattern or
    pattern plate member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183+,   for mold material compacting apparatus including an invertible
    pattern and having pattern withdrawal means.

    205,    for vibratory mold material compacting apparatus of the roll or
    rock-over type.

    209,    for a press type compactor having an invertible table.

    224,    for mold shaping apparatus having pattern inverting means.

    409,    for, per se, means to invert a pattern plate or mold.


CLS 164/403
TXT Apparatus under subclass 401 directed to fluid pressure means for stripping
    or ejecting a pattern member.


CLS 164/404
TXT Apparatus under subclass 401 directed to per se means for stripping or
    withdrawing a cast product part from a mold or core member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131,    for a process of removing a cast article from a forming surface.

    344,    for shaping apparatus including means to eject or separate product
    from shaping surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses for method and apparatus involving the use of an agitating
    screen as the sole means for disintegrating a sand mold or core, regardless
    of whether the mold or core is in molding association with a casting or
    flask.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses for processes and apparatus for disintegrating a mold or core,
    not associated with a flask or casting and not involving abrading or a
    sifting or other assorting means.


CLS 164/405
TXT Apparatus under subclass 404 directed to means for stripping or withdrawing
    cast ingots from their molds.

    (1)     Note.  Means for stripping a cast ingot from an ingot stool is
    included herein.


CLS 164/406
TXT Apparatus under subclass 405 wherein pin or rod plunger means projecting
    through or adapted to be projected through an opening in the mold bottom
    are utilized to contact the cast ingot and to dislodge or strip the said
    ingot from its mold.


CLS 164/407
TXT Apparatus under subclass 405 directed to means which strip the mold from
    the ingot by raising or lifting the mold vertically upwardly away from
    engagement with the cast ingot.

    (1)     Note.  The molds stripped herein are generally of the big and down
    type.


CLS 164/408
TXT Apparatus under subclass 407 wherein fluid pressure actuated means effects
    the stripping of the mold from the ingot.


CLS 164/409
TXT Apparatus under the class definition directed to means actuatable for
    inverting a pattern plate shaping member or flask about a horizontal axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183+,   for molding machines including withdrawal means having means for
    inverting pattern, flask, or shaping member.

    205,    for roll or rock-over vibrator type molding machine.

    209,    for press type molding machines having an invertible table.

    375,    for roll or rock-over flasks.


CLS 164/410
TXT Apparatus under the class definition which includes or consists of either
    (1) a means for allowing otherwise trapped gases to escape from the
    apparatus or (2) means to form such escape means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    234,    for core shaping means including a vent or vent forming means.

    372,    for vented chills.

    397+,   particularly subclass 400 for vented core supporting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 141 for a static mold which includes an
    auxiliary part for transmission of fluid, i.e., vent or drain.


CLS 164/411
TXT Apparatus under the class definition which includes or consists of a member
    which is to internally support or strengthen the fluent material making up
    a mold or core.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    366,    for core reinforcement in a sand mold.

    379+,   for a flask having means to reinforce the sand.


CLS 164/412
TXT Apparatus under the class definition not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass among other apparatus are,
    consumable chills, mold weights, rapping plates and wear inserts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 403 for a paper weight and 404 for
    miscellaneous weights.


CLS 164/413
TXT Control or product withdrawal means in continuous casting apparatus:

    Apparatus under subclass 154 wherein the means controlled includes means
    for removing a continuously cast product from the mold.


CLS 164/414
TXT Control of coolant applied to continuously cast product:

    Apparatus under subclass 154 wherein the means controlled applies an agent
    to remove heat from a continuously cast product.


CLS 164/415
TXT In continuous casting apparatus:

    Apparatus under subclass 259 wherein the inert or deoxidizing atmosphere is
    provided in conjunction with a mold means which forms a portion of a
    product as a previously formed contiguous portion of the product is removed
    from the mold.


CLS 164/416
TXT In continuous casting mold:

    Apparatus under subclass 260 wherein the vibratory motion is transmitted to
    a mold means employed to form a portion of a product as a previously formed
    contiguous portion of the product is removed from the mold.


CLS 164/417
TXT Including continuous casting apparatus:

    Apparatus under subclass 270.1 including a mold means employed to form a
    portion of a product as a contiguous portion of the product is removed from
    the mold.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    413,    414 and 449.1+, for continuous casting apparatus with
    condition-responsive control means.

    415,    for continuous casting apparatus including means to provide an
    inert or reducing atmosphere.

    416,    for continuous casting apparatus with means to vibrate the mold.

    417,    for continuous casting apparatus combined with means to perform an
    operation which is, per se, not of this class and is not a perfecting means
    for an operation of this class.

    452+    and 460+, for continuous casting methods.


CLS 164/418
TXT Continuous or semicontinuous casting:

    Apparatus under subclass 271 wherein a mold means is employed to form a
    portion of a product as a previously formed contiguous portion of the
    product is removed from the mold.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    413,    414 and 449.1+, for continuous casting apparatus with
    condition-responsive control means.

    415,    for continuous casting apparatus including means to provide an
    inert or reducing atmosphere.

    416,    for continuous casting apparatus with means to vibrate the mold.

    417,    for continuous casting apparatus combined with means to perform an
    operation which is, per se, not of this class and is not a perfecting means
    for an operation of this class.

    459+,   for continuous casting methods.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 67+ for plastic filament-forming or film-casting means
    comprising a shaping orifice discharging into a liquid bath, and subclasses
    224+ for means casting fluent stock on a shaping surface with means to
    provide a continuous length product.


CLS 164/419
TXT Including means to convey preformed product part to mold:

    Apparatus under subclass 418 which includes a means to relatively advance a
    preformed article part of the mold area.

    (1)     Note.  Also included herein are those patents wherein a means is
    included to convey a mold past a preform while continuously forming a metal
    layer on the preform.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    268,    for coating a continuously cast product outside of the mold area.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 171.1+ for process of continuously forming composite nonmetallic
    products.


CLS 164/420
TXT Plural distinct shaping outlets:

    Apparatus under subclass 418 including either (1) plural mold means, or (2)
    means for simultaneously forming a plurality of products.


CLS 164/421
TXT Hollow casting:

    Apparatus under subclass 418 wherein the product formed contains a central
    cavity.


CLS 164/422
TXT Rotary mold:

    Apparatus under subclass 421 wherein the mold includes means enabling
    rotation about its axis to thus form the central cavity by centrifugal
    force upon the molten metal.


CLS 164/423
TXT Filament or wire casting:

    Apparatus under subclass 418 wherein the product formed is a strand-like
    member.


CLS 164/424
TXT Including shape-perfecting means:

    Apparatus under subclass 418 including means subsequent to the mold means
    for refining the shape of a partially solidified product.


CLS 164/425
TXT Including starter bar:

    Apparatus under subclass 418 including means to initially close the mold
    exit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    445,    for a starter bar, per se.


CLS 164/426
TXT Disconnectable:

    Apparatus under subclass 425 wherein means are provided to enable the
    starter bar to be separated from the product during the casting operation.

    (1)     Note.  A starter bar is considered to be "separated from the
    product" even though a part of the bar, or "head", remains with the casting.

    (2)     Note.  The separation must be performed prior to any severing
    operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    446,    for a disconnectable starter bar, per se.


CLS 164/427
TXT Continuously advancing mold part:

    Apparatus under subclass 418 wherein the mold means includes a shaping
    surface which moves through, and out of, the casting zone.


CLS 164/428
TXT Roll couple mold:

    Apparatus under subclass 427 wherein a pair of similar revolvable cylinders
    provides the moving shaping surface.


CLS 164/429
TXT Endless shaping means:

    Apparatus under subclass 427 wherein the moving shaping surface is carried
    on or comprises the outer peripheral surface of either (1) an annular or
    cylindrical member, or (2) an endless belt or band.


CLS 164/430
TXT Articulated segments (e.g., caterpillar type, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 429 wherein the moving shaping surface comprises a
    plurality of flexibly connected rigid elements, which, when in abutting
    relationship, define the shaping surface.


CLS 164/431
TXT With plural belts of flexible material:

    Apparatus under subclass 430 including a plurality of endless bands, each
    of which comprises a continuous strip of pliant material cooperating with
    the flexibly connected rigid elements to define the mold means.


CLS 164/432
TXT Plural belts of flexible material:

    Apparatus under subclass 429 including a plurality of endless bands, each
    formed of a continuous strip of pliant material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    431,    for plural belts of flexible material which employ caterpillar-type
    shaping means.


CLS 164/433
TXT Casting wheel and flexible band:

    Apparatus under subclass 429 wherein the endless shaping means includes an
    annular or cylindrical member with a circumferential casting groove and an
    adjacent endless band formed of a pliant material, wherein the shaping area
    is defined by the groove and band.


CLS 164/434
TXT With dispensing feature:

    Apparatus under subclass 433 wherein significance is attributed to means
    for supplying molten metal to the shaping area (e.g., adjustable tundish,
    specific pour tube structure, etc.).


CLS 164/435
TXT Having deformable mold wall or thermal expansion compensating means:

    Apparatus under subclass 418 wherein the mold wall, or a portion thereof,
    either (1) yields to accommodate casting operation forces, or (2) includes
    means specifically provided to accommodate temperature reactive forces
    during the casting operation.


CLS 164/436
TXT Adjustable mold size:

    Apparatus under subclass 418 wherein the cross-sectional area of the mold
    cavity may be selectively varied.


CLS 164/437
TXT Including means to dispense or distribute metal charge:

    Apparatus under subclass 418 including means to control or direct the
    supply of molten metal to the mold.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    449.1+, for supply means controlled in response to a variable condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 591+ for molten dispensers, per se.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 236+ for discharging vessels
    for molten metal which include means for treating the same.


CLS 164/438
TXT Movable dispenser:

    Apparatus under subclass 437 wherein the supply means is mounted for some
    form of movement (e.g., ladle car, tilting tundish, etc.).


CLS 164/439
TXT Mold contiguous with or within dispenser:

    Apparatus under subclass 437 wherein the mold is mounted inside or in
    contact with the supply means during the casting operation.

    (1)     Note.   "Supply means" includes funnels or molten metal reservoirs
    fixed to, or integral with, the mold.


CLS 164/440
TXT Dispensing into horizontal mold:

    Apparatus under subclass 439 wherein the molten metal enters and flows
    through the mold means in a substantially horizontal direction.


CLS 164/441
TXT Including product supporting or withdrawal means:

    Apparatus under subclass 418 including means subsequent to the mold means
    to remove or hold the product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    413,    for product withdrawal means controlled in response to a variable
    condition.

    447,    for product-supporting or withdrawal means, per se.


CLS 164/442
TXT Roller:

    Apparatus under subclass 441 wherein the means to remove or support the
    product includes an annular or cylindrical member which rotates and
    contacts the product at points on its periphery.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    448,    for product supporting or withdrawing rollers, per se.


CLS 164/443
TXT Having casting material cooling means:

    Apparatus under subclass 418 including means to positively apply an agent
    to remove heat from the casting material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    384,    for means to apply coolant to a mold or casting generally.

    414,    for means to apply coolant to a casting with control means
    responsive to a variable condition.


CLS 164/444
TXT Direct cooling of material:

    Apparatus under subclass 443 wherein the casting material is directly
    contacted by the cooling agent.


CLS 164/445
TXT STARTER BAR:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising means to initially close
    the exit of a continuous casting mold.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    425,    for a starter bar in combination with a mold means.


CLS 164/446
TXT Disconnectable:

    Apparatus under subclass 445 wherein means are provided to enable the
    starter bar to be separated from the product during the casting operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    426,    for a disconnectable starter bar in combination with mold means.


CLS 164/447
TXT PRODUCT SUPPORTING OR WITHDRAWAL MEANS FOR CONTINUOUS CASTING APPARATUS:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising means to remove or hold a
    product subsequent to its formation in and while still connected to a
    continuous casting mold.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    441,    for withdrawal means claimed in combination with mold means.

    (1)     Note.  For original placement in this subclass, a patent claim must
    recite a structural limitation (e.g., cooling jacket, surface coating,
    etc.) which renders the support or withdrawal means peculiar to the subject
    matter of this class.


CLS 164/448
TXT Roller:

    Apparatus under subclass 447 wherein the means to remove or hold the
    product includes an annular or cylindrical member which rotates about its
    axis and contacts the product at points on its periphery.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    442,    for roller means claimed in combination with mold means.


CLS 164/449.1
TXT In continuous casting apparatus:

    Apparatus under subclass 155.2 which produces a continuously cast product.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of "continuous casting.''


CLS 164/450.1
TXT Including sensor comprising electrode or float:

    Apparatus under subclass 449.1 including means for detecting the process
    parameter comprising either an electrically conductive probe or a buoyant
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 290+, particularly subclasses
    305+, for a device for measuring liquid level using a float.


CLS 164/450.2
TXT Including radioactive sensor:

    Apparatus under subclass 449.1 including means for detecting the level of
    molten metal in the supply, mold, or a component of the apparatus
    comprising means responsive to alpha, beta, or gamma particle emission.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 308 for apparatus to inspect solids or
    liquids including a radioactive source and subclasses 336.1+ for invisible
    radiant energy responsive electric signaling devices, per se.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 625+ for radioactive compositions, per se.

    976,    Nuclear Technology, digests 410+ for devices to convert radioactive
    energy into electrical energy.


CLS 164/450.3
TXT Including thermal sensor:

    Apparatus under subclass 449.1 having means for detecting a process
    parameter related to heat (e.g., temperature, heat transfer rate, etc.) of
    the melt, product, or apparatus, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 295 for a thermal device to measure
    liquid level.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 54 for a device to
    determine fluid volume from a thermal measurement.


CLS 164/450.4
TXT Including optical sensor:

    Apparatus under subclass 449.1 having means for detecting the level of
    molten metal in the supply or mold comprising light detection means.

    (1)     Note. This subclass includes patents directed to the detection of
    both endophotonic (i.e., light generated by the melt or mold itself) and
    exophotonic (i.e., light generated by an external source) energy.

    (2)     Note.  A patent claiming control of feed material in response to
    detection or recognition of an image related to the melt or mold is
    classified here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 293 and 323+ for a device to
    measure liquid level using illumination or sight glass.

    382,    Image Analysis, appropriate subclasses for image recognition or
    processing, per se.


CLS 164/450.5
TXT Including magnetic sensor:

    Apparatus under subclass 449.1 including means for detecting the level of
    the substance in the supply, mold, or component of the apparatus comprising
    means for detecting variation in a local magnetic field.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 290 for a device to measure liquid
    level.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 200+ for a device,
    or subcombination thereof, to sense or indicate the sensing of a magnetic
    field.


CLS 164/451
TXT Of continuous or semicontinuous casting:

    Process under subclass 4.1 wherein the testing, sampling, or inspecting or
    condition determination is performed in conjunction with casting a product
    removed from a molding surface as a further contiguous portion is cast.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    415,    for continuous casting apparatus provided with inert or reducing
    gas atmosphere means.

    416,    for a continuous casting mold provided with vibrator means.

    417,    for a continuous casting apparatus combined with other structure
    not provided for in this class.

    418+,   for continuous or semicontinuous casting apparatus, per se.

    447+,   for product supporting or withdrawal means utilized for continuous
    casting apparatus.

    459+,   for continuous or semicontinuous casting processes without
    measuring, testing, inspecting, or controlling steps.

    502+,   for continuous or semicontinuous casting apparatus including means
    to apply magnetic forces.

    505+,   for continuous or semicontinuous casting apparatus utilizing means
    to apply electrical or wave energy to work material.


CLS 164/452
TXT And regulating an operation:

    Process under subclass 451 wherein a detected variation in a casting
    parameter is utilized to affect an operation or effect a change to an
    operation in response to the variation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122+,   for casting processes controlling solidification.

    144,    for apparatus for casting printing plates including positive mold
    cooling means.

    154.1+, for casting apparatus provided with responsive control means.

    157,    for casting apparatus provided with control means responsive to an
    independent timer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 864.01+ for measuring and testing
    samplers or tollers for measuring liquid in a receptacle.


CLS 164/453
TXT Pouring:

    Process under subclass 452 wherein the effected operation or change
    includes the delivery of molten metal to a shaping or casting area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133+,   for processes of casting including an introduction control or
    manipulation of charge step.

    488+,   for continuous or semicontinuous casting processes provided with a
    specific molten metal pouring step.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 590 for processes of dispensing molten metal.


CLS 164/454
TXT Product withdrawing:

    Process under subclass 452 wherein the effected operation or change
    includes removing a continuously cast product from a molding surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    441+,   for continuous or semicontinuous casting means including a product
    supporting or withdrawal means.

    447+,   for a product supporting or withdrawal means for a continuous
    casting apparatus.


CLS 164/455
TXT Cooling:

    Process under subclass 452 wherein the effected operation or change
    includes an application of an agent to remove heat from a shaping surface
    or a continuously cast product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    443+,   for continuous or semicontinuous casting means having casting
    material cooling means.

    458,    for casting processes provided with measuring, testing, or
    inspecting steps including a cooling step.

    485+,   for continuous or semicontinuous casting processes provided with
    specific mold or product cooling steps.


CLS 164/456
TXT During foundry sand treating or mold making:

    Process under subclass 4.1 wherein the testing, sampling, or inspecting or
    condition determination is performed while foundry mold material is in the
    process of being either (a) shaped, or (b) treated (e.g., recycled).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for processes of shaping a forming surface.


CLS 164/457
TXT During feeding of metal to mold:

    Process under subclass 4.1 wherein the testing, sampling, or inspecting or
    condition determination is performed in conjunction with the introduction
    of solid or liquid metal into a mold cavity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133+,   for casting processes provided with a charge introduction or
    manipulation step.

    437+,   for continuous or semicontinuous casting means provided with means
    to dispense or distribute a metal charge.

    449.1+, for casting apparatus provided with control means responsive to
    material level in a continuous casting apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    373,    Electric Furnaces, subclasses 42 for processes of charging or
    discharging devices in electric furnaces.


CLS 164/458
TXT During cooling of mold:

    Process under subclass 4.1 wherein the testing, sampling, or inspecting or
    condition determination is associated with the removal of heat from a
    shaping surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    443+,   for continuous or semicontinuous casting means provided with
    casting material cooling means.

    485+,   for continuous or semicontinuous processes provided with a specific
    mold or product cooling step.


CLS 164/459
TXT Continuous or semicontinuous casting:

    Process under subclass 47 wherein a portion of a cast product is removed
    from a forming mold or surface as a further contiguous portion is cast.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    413,    for continuous casting apparatus provided with product withdrawal
    control means.

    414,    for continuous casting product coolant control means.

    415,    for continuous casting apparatus provided with inert or reducing
    gas atmosphere means.

    416,    for a continuous casting mold provided with a vibrator means.

    417,    for a continuous casting apparatus provided for means other than a
    perfecting feature or specifically provided for in a class other than 164.

    418+,   for continuous or semicontinuous casting apparatus.

    447+,   for a product supporting or withdrawal means in a continuous
    casting apparatus.

    449.1+, for a continuous casting apparatus provided with responsive control
    means responsive to material level.

    502+,   for continuous casting apparatus including means to directly apply
    magnetic forces.

    505+,   for continuous casting apparatus provided with means to directly
    apply electrical or wave energy to work.


CLS 164/460
TXT Including product cutting or breaking:

    Processes under subclass 459 which includes the step of finishing the cast
    product by mechanically cutting or breaking the cast product while a
    contiguous portion thereof is still associated with the forming mold.

    (1)     Note.  Refer to Class 164, class definition, part IV, reference to
    Class 29 for the line between Class 29 and Class 164.

    (2)     Note.  Flame cutting is considered mechanically cutting for
    purposes of this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  The term "mold" as used herein includes (a) the core or
    cores, (b) corelike elements associated with gate portions of the casting
    and used for handling, and (c) conveying means serving to support a
    continuous casting while said casting is still associated with the mold.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70.1,   for a casting step provided with a product trimming, cutting, or
    breaking step.

    78,     for processes of incorporating a product dividing member during
    casting.

    140,    for apparatus to cast printing plates including means for cutting
    or trimming the casting.

    161+,   for apparatus for shaping a forming surface, e.g., mold, including
    cutting or sweeping means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 527.6 for processes of metal casting
    followed by a cutting or removing step.

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 52 for static molds employing a static means
    to produce a groove or depression in the product to facilitate breaking or
    cutting.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 161 for flash or sprue removal in a plastic molding operation.


CLS 164/461
TXT Forming a composite article:

    Process under subclass 459 wherein the product is multipart or multilayered
    with at least two distinctive zones of metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91+,    for processes of producing composite article.

    496,    for casting processes directly applying electrical or wave energy
    to work by electrical discharge forming composite articles.


CLS 164/462
TXT Forming filament, wire or ribbon:

    Process under subclass 459 wherein the cast product formed is a thin rod,
    rodlike or striplike member.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are patents unique by the nature of the
    product produced.  Such patents will not generally be cross-referenced into
    following process subclasses unless a feature is disclosed or appears to
    have general utility in other continuous casting processes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    423,    for continuous or semicontinuous casting means used to form
    filaments or wires.


CLS 164/463
TXT Utilizing continuously advancing surface:

    Process under subclass 462 wherein the member is formed by a forming mold
    or surface which constantly moves into, through, and out of the molding
    area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    427,    for continuous casting apparatus provided with means to
    continuously advance a mold part.

    479+,   for other continuous casting processes utilizing a continuously
    shaping surface.


CLS 164/464
TXT Forming a hollow article:

    Process under subclass 459 wherein the cast product formed contains a
    central cavity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    421+,   for continuous or semicontinuous casting means utilized to form
    hollow castings.

    451,    for processes of continuously forming hollow products by
    centrifugal force.


CLS 164/465
TXT Using a core or mandrel:

    Process under subclass 464 wherein the central cavity is shaped by applying
    molten metal to an external surface of a forming mold.


CLS 164/466
TXT Utilizing magnetic force:

    Process under subclass 459 wherein a magnetic field is applied to work
    material or to the cast product.

    (1)     Note.  The term work material implies solid or molten metal, a
    thixotropic state thereof, i.e., solid-liquid mixture, or a slurrry of such
    metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147.1+, for casting apparatus utilizing electromagnetic means.

    498+,   for casting processes utilizing magnetic energy.


CLS 164/467
TXT Molten metal shaped by electromagnetic field:

    Process under subclass 466 wherein molten metal is contained and formed
    into a desired shape by the application of an electromagnetic field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    503,    for electromagnetic mold means in casting continuous casting
    apparatus.


CLS 164/468
TXT Applying electromagnetic stirring force to molten metal within mold or
    product:

    Process under subclass 466 wherein molten metal within a mold or entrained
    by the outer skin of a cast product is circulated by an electromagnetic
    field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    499,    for casting processes utilizing magnetic energy to stir molten
    metal.

    504,    for continuous casting apparatus utilizing electromagnetic stirring
    means.


CLS 164/469
TXT Utilizing electric arc or electron beam melting:

    Process under subclass 459 including raising the temperature of work
    material to its molten state through either (a) electric arc discharge
    between an electrode and the work material, or (b) electron beam
    bombardment upon the work material.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is the use of two electrically charged metal
    rods adapted to form an electric arc wherein both are melted to supply
    casting material and also the use of a single charged rod in a consumable
    electrode of suitable material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    494,    for casting processes utilizing electron beams to heat the work
    material.

    495,    for casting processes using electrical arc discharges to heat the
    work material.

    506,    for continuous casting apparatus utilizing electron beam melting
    means to melt the work material.

    508,    for continuous casting apparatus utilizing arc electrodes to apply
    heat to work material.

    514,    for casting apparatus utilizing arc electrodes to apply electrical
    energy to work material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    373,    Electric Furnaces, subclass 42 for electric arc furnace structures,
    per se; and subclass 68 for electron beam type electric furnaces.


CLS 164/470
TXT Electric arc melting with slag or flux:

    Process under subclass 469 wherein an electrical arc discharge is utilized
    to raise the work material to its molten state with the simultaneous
    application of slag or flux.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    497,    for casting processes utilizing electrical arc discharges for
    heating the work material with the application of slag or flux.


CLS 164/471
TXT Utilizing induction heating:

    Process under subclass 459 including raising the temperature of work
    material by placing the work material within an induction coil, the work
    material thereby constituting the secondary of a transformer or a
    continuation of the induction coil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    493,    for casting processes utilizing electrical induction heating means.

    513,    for casting apparatus utilizing coil induction heating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    373,    Electric Furnaces, subclass 140 for electrical induction furnaces,
    per se.


CLS 164/472
TXT Including lubricating of mold surface:

    Process under subclass 459 including the step of applying a lubricant to
    the forming mold or surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 169 and 213 for processes of utilizing a lubricant and
    indefinite length plastic work forming.


CLS 164/473
TXT Incorporating additional material or chemically reactive agent:

    Process under subclass 459 wherein a material is directly added to the
    molten metal to either be alloyed therewith, cause chemical reaction
    therewith, or to produce a slag.

    (1)     Note.  The added material may include principle alloying
    constituent, densifiers, fluidizers, graphitizers, scavengers, grain-size
    controllers, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55.1+,  for casting processes incorporating an addition or chemically
    reactive metal to metal casting material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, appropriate subclasses for processes for producing metals.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 1+ for processes of
    chemically treating mixtures to obtain metal-containing compound.


CLS 164/474
TXT Utilizing a vacuum:

    Process under subclass 459 including exhausting air or other gases from the
    immediate contiguous environment of a casting material to a negative
    pressure differential with respect to the surrounding ambient environment
    of the casting material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.1+,   for processes of applying a vacuum in a mold-forming operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, appropriate subclasses for vacuum treatment of metals.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 500+ for processes of vacuum forming plastic materials; and
    subclasses 101+ for processes of vacuum treating work.


CLS 164/475
TXT With inert or reducing gaseous atmosphere:

    Process under subclass 459 wherein work material is subjected to an inert
    or reducing gaseous environment.

    (1)     Note.  An ambient atmosphere which may be inert is not included
    herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, various subclasses for processes for gaseous treating of metals.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 633+ or 712+ for combined processes of
    significant heat treatment of solid or semi-solid metal and treatment with
    a special gaseous composition.


CLS 164/476
TXT With metal working:

    Process under subclass 459 which includes alteration of the size or shape
    of the cast product by deforming (e.g., rolling) while a contiguous portion
    is being cast.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 527.7+ for processes of casting,
    including a rolling operation.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 538+ for processes of casting and
    working that includes significant heat-treatment after removal from the
    mold to modify or maintain the internal physical structure (i.e.,
    microstructure) or chemical properties of the metal.


CLS 164/477
TXT With diverse treatment:

    Process under subclass 459 which includes an operation which is, per se,
    neither of this class nor a perfecting step for an operation of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270.1,  for apparatus of Class 164 combined with apparatus provided for in
    other classes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 527.1+ for a combined casting and
    manufacturing process wherein the manufacturing step is performed after
    removing the cast product from the mold.


CLS 164/478
TXT Having mold or product vibration or reciprocation:

    Process under subclass 459 wherein the forming surface is oscillated
    relative to the product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for vibratory treatment of molding materials.

    416,    for continuous casting molds including a vibrator means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclass 558 for processes of treating solid or
    semi-solid metal outside the mold with high frequency vibration.


CLS 164/479
TXT Having continuously advancing shaping surface:

    Process under subclass 459 wherein the forming mold or surface constantly
    moves into, through, and out of the molding area.

    (1)     Note.  The molding area is any or all of that contiguous portion
    between the molten metal and forming mold or surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    427,    for continuous casting apparatus provided with means to
    continuously advance a mold part.


CLS 164/480
TXT Utilizing roll couple mold:

    Process under subclass 479 wherein the forming mold or surface moving
    through the molding area is provided by a pair of similar revolving
    cylinders.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    428,    for continuous advancing mechanisms in a continuous casting
    apparatus in the form of a roll couple mold.


CLS 164/481
TXT Utilizing endless plural belts:

    Process under subclass 479 wherein the forming mold or surface moving
    through the molding area includes a plurality of endless bands of pliant
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    429+,   for continuous advancing means in a continuous casting apparatus in
    the form of endless plural belts.


CLS 164/482
TXT Utilizing wheel-band mold:

    Process under subclass 479 wherein the forming mold or surface moving
    through the molding area includes an annular or cylindrical member with a
    casting groove and an adjacent cooperating endless band of pliant material
    covering a section of the groove.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    433+,   for continuous advancing means in a continuous casting apparatus in
    the form of a cooperating casting wheel and flexible band.


CLS 164/483
TXT Starting up or ending casting process:

    Process under subclass 459 wherein significance is attributed to a step of
    either initiating or stopping the casting operation.


CLS 164/484
TXT Specific product withdrawal:

    Process under subclass 459 wherein significance is attributed to a step of
    removing the cast product from the forming mold or surface as a contiguous
    portion is being formed.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are patents which usually include a unique
    article removal operation.  Patents which incidentally disclose or claim a
    removal step are cross-referenced here only where such step appears to be
    atypical.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    413,    for a continuous casting apparatus provided with product withdrawal
    control means.

    441+,   for continuous casting apparatus provided with product supporting
    or withdrawal means.

    447+,   for product supporting or withdrawal means, per se, for continuous
    casting apparatus.


CLS 164/485
TXT Specific mold or product cooling:

    Process under subclass 459 wherein significance is attributed to a step of
    actively applying a heat exchange medium to remove heat from the forming
    mold or surface, or the cast product.

    (1)     Note.  The step of actively applying a heat exchange medium implies
    a manipulative operation of bringing into thermal contact with the work
    material a substance, generally a solid or liquid, thereby producing the
    cooling effect.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    414,    for continuous casting apparatus provided with control means
    responsive to a coolant applied to the product.

    443+,   for continuous casting apparatus having casting material cooling
    means.


CLS 164/486
TXT Directly applying liquid coolant to product:

    Process under subclass 485 wherein the cast product is cooled by having a
    cooling liquid physically contact the product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126,    and 128, for processes of controlling solidification by a cooling
    liquid.

    348,    for a shaping means including means to apply a coolant.


CLS 164/487
TXT Direct chill casting:

    Process under subclass 486 wherein the liquid impinges on the cast product
    immediately below the mold and flows downwardly over the surface of the
    cast product.


CLS 164/488
TXT Specific molten metal dispensing:

    Process under subclass 459 wherein significance is attributed to the
    dispensing of molten metal into a forming mold or surface.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein, generally, are patents which include a
    unique pouring operation, i.e., other than ordinary teeming; patents which
    incidentally disclose or claim a pouring step are cross-referenced here
    only where such step appears to be atypical.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    437+,   for continuous or semicontinuous casting apparatus including means
    to dispense or distribute a metal charge.

    449.1+, for supply means controlled in response to a variable condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 500 for processes of dispensing molten metal;
    and subclasses 591+ for molten metal dispensers, per se.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 236+ for discharging vessels
    for molten metal which include means for treating the same.

    373,    Electric Furnaces, subclass 42 for charging or discharging device
    processes in electric furnaces.


CLS 164/489
TXT Including flow stream deflection or other than vertical dispensing:

    Process under subclass 488 in which molten metal introduced into a forming
    mold or surface is either (a) deflected in a controlled manner by a
    downstream structure, or (b) dispensed at other than the usual vertical
    direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    440,    for continuous casting apparatus provided with means to dispense or
    distribute metal charge into a horizontal mold.


CLS 164/490
TXT Dispensing into horizontal mold:

    Process under subclass 489 wherein the molten metal enters and flows
    through the forming mold or surface in a substantially horizontal direction.


CLS 164/491
TXT Adjusting mold size:

    Process under subclass 459 including a step of changing the cross-sectional
    dimension of the forming mold or surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    436,    for continuous casting apparatus provided with adjustable molds.


CLS 164/492
TXT To electrically heat work material:

    Process under subclass 48 in which the electrical field or force functions
    to effect heating of the work material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 10.1+ for electrothermic processes for purification or
    melting of metals.

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclasses for processes of heating
    by electrical means.


CLS 164/493
TXT By electrical induction:

    Process under subclass 492 directed to raising the temperature of the work
    material by the electrical generation of heat within the work material
    disposed in an induction coil, the work material thereby constituting the
    secondary of a transformer or a continuation of the induction coil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    513,    for casting apparatus provided with coiled induction means to
    directly apply electrical energy to work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 600+ for electrical induction heaters,
    per se.

    373,    Electric Furnaces, subclass 140 for induction furnaces, per se.


CLS 164/494
TXT By electron beam:

    Process under subclass 492 directed to raising the temperature of the work
    material by bombardment with electron beams emitted from a source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    506,    for continuous casting apparatus provided with electron beam
    melting means.

    512,    for casting apparatus provided electron beam melting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 121.12+ for electrical heating of
    metal utilizing electron beams.

    373,    Electric Furnaces, subclass 68 for electron beam furnace heaters.


CLS 164/495
TXT By arc discharge:

    Process under subclass 492 directed to raising the temperature of the work
    material by use of an electric arc discharge between an electrode and the
    work material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    508,    for continuous casting apparatus utilizing an electrical arc
    electrode means for applying energy to work.

    514,    for casting apparatus utilizing an electric arc electrode heating
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, for metal heating utilizing arc devices.

    373,    Electric Furnaces, subclass 42 for arc furnaces structure, per se.


CLS 164/496
TXT Composite article forming:

    Process under subclass 495 in which a multilayered article having
    distinctive zones of metal is formed by either casting a metal onto a
    preform or casting two or more metals into contact with one another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91+,    for processes of compositing in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, appropriate subclasses for the formation of a
    metallic bonded joint between parts or portions of the same part.  Molten
    filler material may be confined or retained by the shape or space between
    the parts so long as a mold device is not employed.


CLS 164/497
TXT With application of slag or flux:

    Process under subclass 495 wherein a molten slag bath or flux blanket
    covers the melted metal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 73.1+ for metal heating including
    electroslag welding.


CLS 164/498
TXT Utilizing magnetic energy:

    Process under subclass 48 in which an induced positive magnetic field is
    applied to the work material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147.1+, for casting apparatus utilizing electromagnetic means to apply a
    magnetic force thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 600+ for inductive heating, subclasses
    678+ for microwave heating, and subclasses 764+ for capacitive dielectric
    heating.


CLS 164/499
TXT For stirring molten metal:

    Process under subclass 498 in which magnetic lines of force produce
    circulatory motion in a liquid metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    504,    for continuous casting apparatus provided with electromagnetic
    stirring means.


CLS 164/500
TXT In transporting molten metal:

    Process under subclass 498 wherein electromagnetic forces are used to
    convey molten metal to the mold, e.g., as a pump or valve would be used to
    convey the metal.


CLS 164/501
TXT Utilizing sonic or supersonic wave energy:

    Process under subclass 48 wherein the wave energy is specifically of the
    sonic or supersonic range.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250.1+, for casting apparatus provided with means to directly apply
    electrical or wave energy to work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclass 558 for processes of treating solid or
    semi-solid metal outside the mold with high frequency vibration.


CLS 164/502
TXT In continuous casting apparatus:

    Apparatus under subclass 147.1 wherein a mold means is employed to form a
    portion of a product as a previously formed contiguous portion of the
    product is removed from the mold.


CLS 164/503
TXT Electromagnetic mold:

    Apparatus under subclass 502 wherein the electromagnetic energy generates
    forces normal to the surface of molten metal to laterally confine the
    molten metal during solidification.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 600+ for inductive heating, subclasses
    678+ for microwave heating, and subclasses 764+ for capacitive dielectric
    heating.


CLS 164/504
TXT Electromagnetic stirring means:

    Apparatus under subclass 502 in which the electromagnetic energy is
    utilized to cause molten metal within the mold or entrained by the outer
    skin of a cast product to be circulated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 600+ for inductive heating, subclasses
    678+ for microwave heating, and subclasses 764+ for capacitive dielectric
    heating.


CLS 164/505
TXT In continuous casting apparatus:

    Apparatus under subclass 250.1 provided with a mold means employed to form
    a portion of a product as a previously formed contiguous portion of the
    product is removed from the mold.


CLS 164/506
TXT Electron beam melting means:

    Apparatus under subclass 505 wherein the means to apply an energy quantity
    comprises means for raising the temperature of work material to its molten
    state by a bombardment of an electron beam upon the work material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    512,    for casting apparatus provided with electron beam melting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 121+ for electron beam metal heaters.

    373,    Electric Furnaces, subclass 68 for electron beam furnaces.


CLS 164/507
TXT Induction heating means:

    Apparatus under subclass 505 wherein the means to apply an energy quantity
    comprises means to raise the temperature of work material by placing the
    work material within an induction coil, the work material thereby
    constituting the secondary of a transformer or a continuation of the
    induction coil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    513,    for casting apparatus provided with electrical coil induction means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 600+ for inductive heating, subclasses
    678+ for microwave heating, and subclasses 764+ for capacitive dielectric
    heating.

    373,    Electric Furnaces, subclass 140 for electrical induction furnaces,
    per se.


CLS 164/508
TXT Arc electrode melting means:

    Apparatus under subclass 505 wherein the means to apply an energy quantity
    comprises means to raise the temperature of work material to its molten
    state by the utilization of an electric arc discharge between an electrode
    and the work material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    514,    for casting apparatus provided with electrical arc heating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 121.11+ for electrical heaters for
    melting metal.

    373,    Electrical Furnaces, subclass 42 for electric arc furnaces, per se.


CLS 164/509
TXT Electroslag remelting type apparatus:

    Apparatus under subclass 508 wherein a molten slag bath or flux blanket
    covers the molten material in the mold.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    515,    for casting apparatus provided with electric arc electroslag
    remelting apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 73.1+ for metal heating including
    electroslag welding.

    373,    Electric Furnaces, subclass 42 for electric arc furnaces, per se.


CLS 164/510
TXT Electrical discharge knockout means:

    Apparatus under subclass 250.1 wherein foundry molds are stripped from
    castings by means utilizing high-voltage electrical discharges.


CLS 164/511
TXT High frequency vibration means:

    Apparatus under subclass 250.1 wherein the energy quantity applied to the
    work material is of the sonic or supersonic vibration type.


CLS 164/512
TXT Electron beam melting means:

    Apparatus under subclass 250.1 wherein the means to apply an energy
    quantity comprises means for raising the temperature of the work material
    by the utilization of a bombardment of an electron beam upon the work
    material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 121.11+ for metal heating utilizing
    electron beam heating.

    373,    Electric Furnaces, subclass 68 for electrical induction furnaces
    utilizing electron beam heating.


CLS 164/513
TXT Induction coil means:

    Apparatus under subclass 250.1 wherein the means to apply an energy
    quantity comprises a high frequency induction coil for heating the work
    material.

    (1)     Note.  The material to be heated is placed in the high frequency
    magnetic field produced by the induction coil means wherein eddy currents
    and sometimes hysteresis losses created in the work serve to heat the
    material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 600+ for inductive heating, subclasses
    678+ for microwave heating, and subclasses 764+ for capacitive dielectric
    heating.

    373,    Electric Furnaces, subclass 140 for electrical induction furnaces,
    per se.


CLS 164/514
TXT Arc electrode:

    Apparatus under subclass 250.1 wherein the means to apply an energy
    quantity comprises an electrical circuit producing an electrical discharge
    between the electrode to the work material.

    (1)     Note.  Consumable as well as nonconsumable electrodes are provided
    in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 121.11+ for electrical arc metal
    heating means.

    373,    Electric Furnaces, subclass 42 for electric arc furnaces, per se.


CLS 164/515
TXT Electroslag remelting type apparatus:

    Apparatus under subclass 514 wherein a molten slag bath or flux blanket
    covers the molten material in the mold.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 73.1+ for metal-heating means
    including electroslag welding.

    373,    Electric Furnaces, subclass 42 for electric arc furnace structure,
    per se.


CLS 164/516
TXT Utilizing aqueous slurry material:

    Process under subclass 24 wherein mold materials, at least in part, are
    suspended in a water solution.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, appropriate subclasses for process of treating metals and alloys.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 38.2+ for mold or
    mold-coating composition.


CLS 164/517
TXT With particular material for treating or perfecting casting:

    Process under subclass 516 wherein a specific mold material is utilized to
    physically or chemically treat the cast product to either physically
    enhance its properties or to prevent physical or chemical degradation of
    the cast product.


CLS 164/518
TXT With particular binder:

    Process under subclass 516 wherein significance is attributed to binding
    material utilized in shaping a mold structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    523     and 524, for synthetic resins or natural rubber having a filler
    material.


CLS 164/519
TXT With particular refractory material:

    Process under subclass 516 wherein significance is attributed to refractory
    material utilized in shaping a mold structure.


CLS 164/520
TXT Utilizing particular mold materials:

    Process under subclass 15 wherein specific mold materials are utilized in
    shaping a mold structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    for molds of a particular composition.

    516+,   for processes of forming composite molds using slurry and
    particular materials.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, appropriate subclasses for process of treating metals and alloys.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 38.2+ for mold or
    mold coating compositions.


CLS 164/521
TXT Self-hardenable molding material:

    Process under subclass 520 wherein the mold materials utilized require no
    other chemicals or additives to solidify into a solid material.


CLS 164/522
TXT Water soluble mold material:

    Process under subclass 520 wherein the molding materials are capable of
    being removed from the casting surface by dissolution in an aqueous
    solution.


CLS 164/523
TXT To perfect casting surface:

    Process under subclass 520 wherein specific molding materials are utilized
    to enhance the physical properties of the surface of the cast product.


CLS 164/524
TXT To prevent casting oxidation:

    Process under subclass 520 wherein specific mold material are utilized to
    produce a chemical reaction providing an inert or reducing environment for
    the cast product.


CLS 164/525
TXT Particular binder material:

    Process under subclass 520 wherein significance is attributed to binding
    material utilized in shaping a mold structure.


CLS 164/526
TXT Resin containing:

    Process under subclass 525 wherein a resin-containing binder is utilized in
    shaping a mold surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    523     and 524, for synthetic resins or natural rubber having a filler
    material.


CLS 164/527
TXT And inorganic material:

    Process under subclass 526 wherein the binder includes a resin and an
    inorganic material, both utilized for shaping a mold surface.


CLS 164/528
TXT Inorganic material:

    Process under subclass 525 wherein an inorganic-containing binding is
    utilized for shaping a mold structure.


CLS 164/529
TXT Particular refractory material:

    Process under subclass 520 wherein significance is attributed to refractory
    material utilized in shaping a mold structure.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTION


CLS 164/900
TXT RHEO-CASTING

    Cross-reference art collection under the class definition drawn to
    rheo-casting.


CLS 165/
TTL HEAT EXCHANGE

CLS 165/
TXT This class includes apparatus or process not provided for in other classes
    for transferring heat, or apparatus or process  not  provided for in  other
    classes relating to an auxiliary device particularly adapted to be used
    with such heat transfer apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  A patent including a claim having nominal  recitation of
    structure  external to this class in combination with  significantly
    claimed heat transfer apparatus of this class is included in this class. A
    patent including a claim having significant  recitation of structure
    external to this class is excluded from this class unless specifically
    provided for in this class. For example, subclasses 41+  in  this class
    specifically  provides  for  a combination  of a vehicle structure  and
    significantly claimed heat transfer apparatus, and subclasses 47+ in this
    class specifically provides for a combination of a building structure and
    significantly claimed heat transfer apparatus.

    (2)     Note. Method of   repairing, making, or assembling a heat exchanger
    is not provided in this class but is classified in an appropriate
    manufacturing class.

    (3)     Any process claim appropriate for this class are classified in the
    subclass providing for structure used in the process.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate
    subclasses.  See the Note to the definition of Class 34 for the line.

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclasses, for processes limited to
    refrigeration and apparatus having features specialized to refrigeration.
    In general if the heat exchanging means is such that it is adapted for
    interchangeably or convertibly heating or cooling it is not specialized to
    refrigeration.  For example, features such as ice supports, material phase
    changing means (refrigeration producers), atmospheric condensate handling
    or an article handler with means peculiar to refrigerating the article
    would be considered specialized to refrigeration.  As to structure adapted
    to both heat and cool, see subclasses 58+ of this class (165) and the
    reference to Class 62.  For the line between Classes 62 and 165, see note
    under subclasses 58 and 200 of this class (165).

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 512+ for specialized cooling of
    newly formed glass fibers or filaments; subclasses 509+ for specialized
    heating of newly formed glass fibers or filaments; subclasses 348+ for
    means specialized to the cooling of manufactured glass products; subclasses
    484+ for means specialized to exchange heat in a fiber or filament forming
    operation and appropriate subclasses for processes or means specialized to
    the application of or removal of heat in glass manufacturing.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, for processes of gas separation
    including heat exchange.  Cold wall-hot wall thermal diffusion processes
    will be found in Class 95, subclass 289.  Class 165 will take processes
    where only indirect heat exchange is involved, whether or not gas
    separation is said to occur.  See especially Class 165, subclass 3 for
    heating and cooling including addition or removal of water vapor from air.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, for apparatus for gas separation
    including a heat exchanger.  Cold wall-hot wall thermal diffusion apparatus
    will be found in Class 55, subclass 209.  Class 165 will take apparatus
    where only indirect heat exchange is involved, whether or not gas
    separation is said to occur.  See Class 165, subclasses 58+ for a heating
    and cooling system with an ancillary separator.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for food
    treating apparatus having heating or cooling means combined with additional
    apparatus specialized to food.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 92+ for presses means to heat, cool or dry the
    material.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 32+ for an indirectly
    heated closed liquid container with an internal vapor separator, and
    appropriate subclasses for a closed liquid heating vessel with a heat
    generator and for an accessory or element that of necessity must form a
    part of the liquid heating combination.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 33 for a stove with a steam table;
    subclasses 204+ for a body warmer:  subclasses 226+ for a tool heater;
    subclass 247 for a frictional heater; subclasses 263.01+ for a chemical
    reaction type heater; subclasses 561+, 569+ and 714 for a solar heater;
    subclass 343.5 for a melting furnace; and appropriate subclasses, for open
    liquid heating structures not equally adapted for cooling, for heating
    stoves, for means for the application of heat for house warming and cooking
    purposes, and for specialized accessories and elements of such means.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 334+ particularly subclass 340 for fluid
    handling apparatus combined with means to heat or cool a part of the system
    or its contents by a heat exchange.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 37+ for general utility pipe
    having flow  regulator or baffle.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, appropriate subclasses, for means for
    the generation and transfer of heat of the specific purpose of
    concentration by evaporation.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclasses 104+ for a still designed for
    mineral oil distillation and subclasses 138+ for condensing peculiarly
    adapted and limited to the mineral oil art.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclasses 163+ and 232+ for apparatus
    for volatilizing a substance for the purpose of recovering material from
    the vapor by condensation or absorption.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclasses 41 and 42, for a
    process of volatilizing a substance and recovering material from the vapor
    by some type of sorption.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 175+, 612+, 664, 737,
    742, 766, and 774 for processes and apparatus of that class with heat or
    heat exchange.

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclasses for an electric heater or
    an electrically heated tool.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 150 for subject matter of that class
    with cooling or heating.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 146 for dispensers with heating or cooling
    means.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 44 for
    automatic humidity controlling mechanism; subclass 46 for temperature or a
    humidity controlling mechanism including a timing means; and appropriate
    subclasses for a temperature or humidity control mechanism for a control of
    general utility.

            Note. The line between Class 165 and 236 is:

            Class 165 takes:

            (a) Nominal recitation of a means for heating and cooling, and a
    means  for automatically controlling the means for heating and cooling.

            (b) Specific  heat exchanger  structure in combination with  a
    means  for  automatically controlling a heat exchanger.

            (c) Specific  heat exchange  structure in combination  with  a
    means for  automatically controlling a heating and a cooling means.

            Class 236 takes:

            A patent with nominal  recitation of a heat exchanger in
    combination with  a means for automatically controlling a heating or
    cooling means.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 70+ for a heat distributing means
    peculiarly adapted for heating, and appropriate subclasses for (1) a heat
    producer combined with means for distributing a fluid heated thereby and
    (2) apparatus including systems for heating a room, chamber, house or other
    inclosing structure when such apparatus is not equally adapted for cooling.
     For the line between Classes 237 and 165, see note under subclass 200 of
    this class  (165).

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 13 and 128+
    for processes and apparatus of that class with heating or cooling.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 23 and 65+
    for processes and apparatus of that class with heating or cooling.

    252,    Compositions, particularly subclasses 67+ and 71+.  Patents are
    placed in Class 252 (1) claiming admixtures of ingredients, or claims to an
    old compound limited to use as a heat exchange agent, (2) processes of heat
    exchange comprising known heat exchange steps broadly recited and
    distinguished solely by the composition or compound used, and (3) apparatus
    with the composition or compound therein, where characteristics of
    apparatus structure are not claimed.  The preceding are placed in Class 252
    even though freezing or boiling points or temperatures of use are specified.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus specially adapted to produce an intimate contact between gases
    and liquids to exchange properties or mutually modify conditions;
    particularly, subclasses 127+ for a gas liquid contact device with an
    immediately associated means for externally supplying heat to or removing
    it from a contact fluid before, after or during contact to perfect the
    contact operation; and subclasses 158+ for a contact device in which heat
    is interchanged between contact fluids out of contact before, after or
    during contact.

    291,    Track Sanders, subclasses 19+ for subject matter of that class with
    a heater.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 236 for the combination of a
    cabinet and a heater or heat exchanger, having no feature relating to the
    promotion or control of the flow of the fluid in the cabinet relative to
    the heat exchanger.

    366,    Agitating, appropriate subclasses for agitating process or
    apparatus of general utility; subclasses 144+ for an agitator in
    combination with a heating or cooling means.

            Note. The line between Classes 165  and 366 on combined  agitator
    and heat exchanger is:

            Class 165 takes:

            (a) All  patents  with  significant  heat  exchange  structure  in
    combination  with  nominal structural recitation of an agitator.

            (b) All patents with a heat exchanger having an  agitator which
    operates on  a working  fluid (e.g., a coolant or heating fluid), whether
    or not the agitator structure is broadly or significantly claimed.

            (c) All patents with a heat exchanger having a working fluid (e.g.,
    a coolant or heating fluid) which goes through the inside of a movable
    portion of an agitator, whether or not the agitator structure is broadly or
    significantly claimed

            Exception to the above statements (b) and (c): Patents in which a
    working fluid is agitated by  an  agitator and then allowed to be mixed in
    a mixing chamber containing a material or fluid to be treated ( heated or
    cooled) are classified in Class 366.

            Class 366 takes:

            (a) Significant agitator structure in combination with significant
    structure of a heat exchanger.

            (b) Significant agitator structure in combination with nominal
    structure of a heat exchanger.

            Exception to the above statements (a) and (b): A patent with a heat
    exchanger having a working fluid (a coolant or heating fluid) which goes
    through the inside of a movable portion of an agitator is classified in
    Class 165, whether the agitator structure is significantly or broadly
    claimed. Class 366 takes a heat exchanger having an agitator which operates
    on a working fluid only if  the working fluid is then allowed to flow into
    a mixing chamber containing a material or fluid to be heated or cooled.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, appropriate subclasses for
    electrical furnaces.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclasses 210+, 298+, 322, 378+, and 402+, for heat exchange devices used
    in combination with nuclear reaction systems.

    383,    Flexible Bags, for hot water and ice bags, per se.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 305 for fume generators.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    appropriate subclasses.

    432,    Heating, appropriate subclass, for a residual material heating
    apparatus or method.

    454,    Ventilation, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for supplying air
    to, removing it from, or distributing in an enclosure with or without
    heating and without a specific heat exchange means.


CLS 165/4
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a non-fluent heat storing
    mass that in alternation has heat added to it by one fluid stream and
    removed from it by another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104.11+, for a fluent material forming part of the heat transfer apparatus
    that recycles between two zones picking up heat at one zone and discharging
    it at another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 638, 641 for a process specialized to
    liquid gas production utilizing a regenerator and subclasses 644+ for a
    liquefied gas producer having a gas treater upstream of a rectifier that
    may be of the regenerative type.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 309+ for a regenerative system
    consisting of reversing valves and only the fluid passages of the
    regenerator.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 123, for a vertical thermolytic
    retort with a regenerator and subclasses 141+, for a horizontal thermolytic
    retort having vertical flues and reversible regenerators.

    432,    Heating, subclass 39, for the automatic control of the selection or
    load balancing of furnace exhaust heated regenerators; 40, for the
    automatic control of a Cowper stove; 54, for residual heating apparatus
    with an interlocked, interconnected or multiway controller alternating flow
    of heated and heating fluid; 70, for residual heating apparatus with a slag
    or dust separator at a regenerator or recuperator; and 80 for a residual
    furnace in which the work chamber exhaust heats the work chamber feed by a
    regenerative type heat exchanger.


CLS 165/5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 4 wherein provision is made for the cleaning of
    the heat storage mass.


CLS 165/6
TXT Apparatus under subclass 4 wherein the heat storage mass is movable first
    into one of the fluid streams and then into another of the streams and
    there is an enclosing support for the mass with inlets and outlets for the
    exchanging streams.


CLS 165/7
TXT Apparatus under subclass 6 with fluid handling elements additional to the
    mass and its enclosing support.


CLS 165/8
TXT Apparatus under subclass 6 in which the two streams pass through
    circumferentially spaced parts of the mass, which is rotatable.


CLS 165/9
TXT Apparatus under subclass 8 having provisions for preventing leakage of the
    fluid flowing through the rotary mass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 95+ for a coupling with a
    fluid pressure seal, and subclasses 335+ for a packed pipe joint.


CLS 165/9.1
TXT Apparatus under subclass 4 comprising a heat storage mass made up of
    plural, shaped, modular units of refractory material arranged to form an
    openwork structure of interconnected passages; or a module, per se, if
    particularly adapted for use in such a mass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 574 for an assembly
    of alternating, reversed identical form modules of general utility;
    subclasses 578+ for a general utility assembly of modules with a discrete
    edgewise connecting feature; and subclasses 596+ for a module of general
    utility having inter-relating structure.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclasses 111, 122, 123, 130, 140, 143,
    144, 146, 148, and 267 for regenerative heating devices used in stills.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclass 139 for metallurgical apparatus
    provided with a gas heater of the heat storage type.

    432,    Heating, subclass 28 for a process of utilizing or operating a heat
    storage mass; subclass 51 for the timing, programming or cycling control of
    heat storage masses; subclass 54, for the intercontrol of heated and
    heating fluid to a heat storage mass; subclass 70, for a heat storage mass
    having a lint, dust, or slag separator or collector; subclasses 180+ for a
    combustion products heated furnace in which the chamber exhaust heats the
    chamber feed by means of a heat storage mass; subclass 214, for a heat
    storage mass of solid material combined with a heat generator.


CLS 165/9.2
TXT Apparatus under subclass 9.1 in which the modular units are (1) arranged to
    form a flow passage increasing or decreasing in size along the assembly or
    (2) are formed of different material along the direction of flow providing
    progressive resistance to damage by heat or having progressive heat storing
    characteristics.


CLS 165/9.3
TXT Apparatus under subclass 9.1 with means forming a distinct fluid
    distributing or collecting chamber at an end of the heat storage mass.


CLS 165/9.4
TXT Apparatus under subclass 9.1 in which the modular units are arranged in a
    gas confining shell.


CLS 165/10
TXT Apparatus under subclass 4 relating to the structure of the heat storing
    mass.


CLS 165/11.1
TXT WITH ALARM, INDICATOR, SIGNAL REGISTER, RECORDER, TEST OR INSPECTION MEANS:

    Apparatus under the class definition with an alarm, indicator, register,
    recorder, signal or tester; or with means which permits inspection of
    normally hidden parts of the apparatus or of the fluid inside the apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 125+ for a refrigerating system with an
    indicator or tester.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for a measuring or
    testing device, per se.


CLS 165/11.2
TXT Remotely controlled inspection means:

    Apparatus under subclass 11.1 which the inspection means is manipulated
    from outside the heat exchanger by an operator.


CLS 165/41
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having (1) means dependent on vehicle
    motion, (2) a defined vehicle traction feature, or (3) a defined vehicle
    body feature other than that merely forming the structure enclosing a space
    to be heated or cooled or supporting a heating or cooling means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202+    and 271, for control means responsive to vehicle motion.

    234+,   where the vehicle is an aircraft having means to compensate for
    variations in ambient pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 239+ for a vehicle having refrigerating
    apparatus not combined with heating apparatus.

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclass 153 for a resilient tire with
    a cooling device.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclass 12.3 for a heating system not combined
    with a cooling system for a vehicle body in which the vehicle motor serves
    as the heat generator for the system; and subclasses 28+ for a vehicle
    having heating apparatus, but not cooling.


CLS 165/42
TXT Apparatus under subclass 41 having means for both heating and cooling that
    is more than a mere carrier for heat between a source and a sink.


CLS 165/43
TXT Apparatus under subclass 42 in which there is on the vehicle a common power
    supply for the vehicle and the cooling apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 243 for a refrigeration system installed on
    a vehicle with a common power supply for the vehicle and refrigerating
    system.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclass 12.3 for a combined power plant and
    heating system for a vehicle other than a railway car and subclasses 12.4+
    for a similar structure on a railway car.


CLS 165/44
TXT Apparatus under subclass 41 including means which makes use of the motion
    of a vehicle to perform some function of heat exchange.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 241+ for a vehicle mounted refrigeration
    system utilizing the motion of the vehicle.


CLS 165/45
TXT Apparatus under the class definition wherein the structure is related to
    some feature of the earth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 641.1+ for a power plant utilizing natural
    heat.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 260 for a refrigerating apparatus having a
    geographical feature.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 561+, 569+ and 714, for a solar
    heater.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 57+ for heat exchange apparatus comprising part
    of a well apparatus for producing or treating a well.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 17 for earth boring with
    means for changing the temperature of all or a portion of a bore or boring
    equipment within the bore.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 3+
    for in situ conversion of solid to fluid for recovery of valuable material
    and including melting or other use of heat.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 56 for a method or
    apparatus relating to the heating or cooling of the earth surrounding an
    underground fluid storage cavity; and subclasses 130+ for subject matter
    relating to temperature modification of an earth formation.


CLS 165/46
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a nonrigid cover or
    applicator unit; e.g., sheet, bag, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 171.3 for a head covering with forced air
    circulator.

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 524+ for a device
    for treating the body or a body member with hot air or vapor.

    5,      Beds, subclasses 421+ for beds or mattresses with heating or
    cooling means.

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclasses 83+ for a heated boot or
    shoe.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 530 for an envelope type of cooling device.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 204+ for a body warmer.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclass 44 for
    a flexible panel with liquid supplying means.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 901 for hot water and ice bags.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a flexible single or plural
    layer web or sheet.


CLS 165/47
TXT Apparatus under the class definition with means performing an operation
    external to the subject matter of this class or with a static construction
    installation, wherein there is included only so much structure foreign to
    Class 165 to associate it with the apparatus of Class 165.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41+,    for a heat exchanger with a vehicle body or traction feature.

    45,     for a heat exchanger having a feature related to the earth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 267 for a blow mold having heating or
    cooling means; subclass 319 for a press mold having heating or cooling
    means; and subclasses 355+ for other glass manufacturing apparatus having
    heating or cooling means.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 15+ for a washing
    machine with a tank heater.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 69, 128, 200+, 286, 342, and 364, for a
    process or apparatus for modifying or maintaining the temperature of a
    machine or a metal workpiece in connection with deformation of the
    workpiece.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 58+ for a coating machine with a heat
    exchanger treating the work.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 14.09 for a milking machine with a
    cooler; subclasses 302+ for a heated incubator; subclasses 311+ for a
    heated brooder and subclass 73 for a temperature controlled watering device.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 369+ for steaming apparatus (steam
    table).

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 41.01+ for a hair device with a heater.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 105+ for a
    cleaning or liquid contact with solids apparatus with a heat exchanger.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 82 for a receiver filling device with material heating or cooling
    structure.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 15.1+ for an
    electrical conductor or insulator with cooling structure.

    184,    Lubrication, subclasses 104.1+ for a lubricator with heating or
    cooling means.

    188,    Brakes, subclass 264 for a brake with a cooling and lubricating
    means, and subclass 274 for a fluid-resistance brake with a heat exchanger
    for the fluid.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, for a clutch with a cooling and
    lubricating means.

    204,    Chemistry, Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclasses for
    electrical treatment apparatus in combination with heat exchange means;
    especially subclasses 239 and 241 for an electrolytic apparatus with a
    heater or cooler.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 11 for a
    solid separator with heat treatment means; and subclass 238 for a sifter
    with heating or cooling means.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 175+ for a liquid
    separator with an ancillary heat exchanger.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 12+ for a bottle or jar with a spaced
    wall or jacket.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 415+ for a receptacle of that class with a
    spaced wall or jacket.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 183 for dispensing apparatus wit  a jacket
    casing.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclass 46 for apparatus for metal fusion
    bonding combined with cooling means and subclasses 199+ for corresponding
    methods.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 65+ for a
    solid material comminutor with a temperature modifier for the material.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 238 for a photocell with temperature
    control means, subclass 352 for temperature controlled infrared responsive
    electric signalling means, subclass 429 for fluent material containment
    support or transfer means including temperature control of the fluent
    material, subclasses 493.1+ for invisible ray generator with cooling means.

    269,    Work Holders, subclass 7 for a work holder with means for
    solidification of the work holding medium.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, cross-reference art collection 930 for a seal having a heating or
    cooling feature.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclass 41 for a pipe joint or coupling
    with heating or cooling means.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 180.1+ for a chair or seat with a heat
    exchanger.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 52+ for a
    rotary electrical motor or generator with cooling means.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 11+ for an electric
    lamp or discharge device with a temperature modifier.  See section VIII of
    the definition of Class 313 for a statement of the line between Class 165
    and Class 313.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclasses 26+ for an electric discharge device of the consumable electrode
    type with temperature modifying means.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 69 for an oscillator housing with a
    temperature modifier and subclass 70 for an oscillator with a temperature
    modifier.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 55+ for an inductor device with
    temperature modifying means.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 53+ for an electrical resistor
    with cooling gas or liquid circulation.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 676+ and
    subclass 688 for miscellaneous electrical apparatus not elsewhere provided
    for with cooling means.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 294 for a projecting lantern with cooling
    means.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 22+ for a mortar mixer with a heat exchange
    device.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 42+ for a
    condenser in an electric furnace system.

    384,    Bearings, subclass 317 for a rotary bearing with cooling means.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclass 249 for a broaching
    machine with means to modify the temperature of the work or tool.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 186.11, 186.19 and 186.20 for
    ozonizers with heating or cooling means; and subclass 186.26 for arc or
    spark discharge reactors with cooling or pressurizing means.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus, the
    appropriate apparatus subclass for the combination of heating or cooling
    means therewith; but see especially subclass 378.1 for an extrusion shaping
    machine including heating or cooling means, subclass 384 for apparatus for
    reshaping or vulcanizing a nonmetallic preform including both heating and
    cooling means, and subclass 406 for a press molding machine for non-metals
    including both heating and cooling means; see the search notes thereunder.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 190+ for an electrical connector
    having a retainer or passageway for fluent material; and subclasses 485+
    for an electrical connector with provision to dissipate, remove, or block
    the flow of heat.

    494,    Imperforate Bowl:  Centrifugal Separators, subclasses 13+, for a
    separator of that class provided with means for exchanging heat.


CLS 165/48.1
TXT Heating and cooling:

    Apparatus under subclass 47 in which the installed heat exchange apparatus
    performs both a heating and cooling operation that is more than a mere
    carrying of heat between a source and a sink.


CLS 165/48.2
TXT Solar:

    Apparatus under subclass 48.1 including a solar heater or a solar cooler.


CLS 165/49
TXT Apparatus under subclass 48.1 wherein a heat exchanging element is
    installed as an area of a room surface.


CLS 165/50
TXT Apparatus under subclass 48.1 wherein there is a heat exchanger in each of
    a plurality of rooms and a fluid from a central heated or cooled supply
    communicates with the heat exchangers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205+,   for automatic, interlocked plural zone and central system control.


CLS 165/51
TXT Apparatus under subclass 47 in which the heat exchanger is associated with
    an engine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for a heated and cooled vehicle in which the vehicle engine
    supplies the heat and the power to operate the heating and cooling system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 320+ for treatment by heat exchange of the
    exhaust from the motor of a power plant.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 41.01 for a device limited by
    structure to use as an internal combustion engine element and having
    associated cooling means; and subclass 142.5 for an internal combustion
    engine element with means using heat from one part to heat another part by
    exchanging heat between the parts.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 19.5 for a stove oven or vessel in
    which a combustion engine serves as the heat generator.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 12.1+ for a heating system receiving
    heat from a power plant.


CLS 165/52
TXT Apparatus under subclass 51 in which one passage of the heat exchanger is
    flow connected to an engine exhaust port and another passage is flow
    connected to the engine inlet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 543+ for a heated charge
    forming device, subclasses 364+ for an internal combustion engine with a
    feed oil evaporator; and subclass 142.5 for a device limited by structure
    to use as an internal combustion engine element with means using heat from
    one part to heat another part by exchanging heat between the parts.

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 282+ for a jacket or casing, per se, for a
    muffler.


CLS 165/53
TXT Apparatus under subclass 47 in which the heat exchanger is installed on the
    wall, floor or ceiling structure of a chamber having a function external to
    the subject matter of this class and in which the heat exchange is
    incidental to the primary use of the chamber, which, for example, may be as
    a shelter or transportation unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     where the chamber has an associated vehicle feature.


CLS 165/54
TXT Apparatus under subclass 53 in which the heat exchanger is in a flow path
    that includes a passage providing communication between the inside and
    outside of the chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 46+ for a heating system with means for
    withdrawing stale air from the heated chamber.

    454,    Ventilation, appropriate subclasses for apparatus and processes for
    supplying air to or removing it from enclosures where there is neither
    particular structure of the heat exchanger nor any particular relationship
    between the heat exchanger and the enclosure ventilated.


CLS 165/55
TXT Apparatus under subclass 53 in which a covering construction is mounted on
    the enclosure forming structure with a portion projecting inwardly from the
    plane of the structure to form therewith a flow channel in which the heat
    exchanger is mounted.


CLS 165/56
TXT Apparatus under subclass 53 in which the heat exchanger is located in or is
    formed by an opening or recess in the enclosure forming structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for a radiant building panel with heating and cooling means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 451 for a refrigerator having a flow
    coolant container within the hollow wall of an enclosure.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclass 69 for a heating system in which an
    enclosure floor structure is heated.


CLS 165/57
TXT Apparatus under subclass 56 in which the opening or recess communicates
    with the chamber.


CLS 165/58
TXT Apparatus under the class definition for the treatment of material
    additional to the parts of the apparatus by (1) selectively adding heat to
    or removing it from the external material, (2) simultaneously adding heat
    to and removing it from the same external material and (3) by adding heat
    to and removing it from distinct external materials where more than a
    transfer or heat from one of the materials to the other is involved.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for heating and cooling processes.

    42+,    for a heated and cooled vehicle.

    48.1+,  for a structurally installed heating and cooling system.

    201+,   for automatically controlled heating and cooling apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 62+ and see
    the Notes thereto.

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 7,
    79, 90, 122, 159+, 173, 238.1+, 277+, and 324.1+, for combined heating and
    cooling performed by a refrigerating producing system and subclass 238.1
    for a refrigeration producer utilizing a disparate heat source as an
    operating energy source. The line between Classes 62 and 165 on combined
    heating and cooling is:

    (1)     Class 62 takes (a) a refrigeration producing system and related
    processes used for both heating and cooling even though the rejected heat
    is utilized, and (b) a refrigeration system combined with heating means for
    removing or preventing the deposition of condensate (frost) or for thawing
    a freezing mold.

    (2)     Class 165 takes (a) a refrigeration producer having means to
    convert the same to a heating system so that it no longer functions as a
    refrigeration producer (as by omitting the evaporator) and (b) a
    refrigeration producer combined with heating means not provided for under
    (1) above.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, appropriate
    subclasses, for regulating a single temperature changing element to
    maintain plural temperatures, which single element may at some times act as
    a heater and other times as a cooler; see particularly subclass 1.


CLS 165/59
TXT Apparatus under subclass 58 including means to supply fresh air to a
    chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248+,   for automatic ventilation control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 409, 410+ and 427 for refrigerated and
    ventilated enclosures.


CLS 165/60
TXT Apparatus under subclass 58 including a gas and liquid contact device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 127+ for heated or
    cooled gas and liquid contact devices; and appropriate subclasses for other
    gas and liquid contact structures.


CLS 165/61
TXT Apparatus under subclass 58 by which a material or its container can be
    both heated and cooled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254+,   for automatic selection of heating or cooling.

    259,    for devices in which a single sensor controls both heating and
    cooling.

    265,    for manual selection of heating or cooling combined with automatic
    control of the condition modifier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 62+, for a
    drier or gas or vapor contact with solids apparatus having a means cooling
    the dried solids.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 121+ for metallurgical
    apparatus for treating solid metal with both heat and a liquid.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 77+, for a residual heating apparatus combined
    with structure for merely reducing the temperature of the heated work
    toward ambient temperature.


CLS 165/62
TXT Apparatus under subclass 61 wherein a refrigeration producing system has
    means to change the same to a heating system.


CLS 165/63
TXT Apparatus under subclass 61 wherein the heating and cooling means includes
    apparatus to cause a cooling effect by producing a change in the condition
    of a material, e.g., change of phase of a material.


CLS 165/64
TXT Apparatus under subclass 61 wherein the heating and cooling means includes
    a device by which heat is produced by transformation of energy, e.g.,
    electric heater or burner.


CLS 165/65
TXT Apparatus under subclass 61 including a flow path having spaced heating and
    cooling heat exchangers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223+,   for devices in which the reheating of a cooled stream is controlled
    by a humidistat.

    263,    for devices in which the reheating of a cooled stream is controlled
    by a thermostat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 276, 277, 453+, and
    470, for heat exchange apparatus in combination with food treatment
    apparatus.


CLS 165/66
TXT Apparatus under subclass 65 wherein there is an exchange of heat between
    fluid flowing toward and fluid flowing away from a heat exchanger.


CLS 165/67
TXT Apparatus under the class definition combined with structure for supporting
    the apparatus or a component thereof relative to means external to the
    device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses for a support, per se.


CLS 165/68
TXT Apparatus under subclass 67 in which the supporting structure comprises
    elements extending downwardly from the heat exchanger for supporting it
    from a subjacent external surface or means.


CLS 165/69
TXT Apparatus under the class definition wherein resilient members are placed
    between elements of a heat exchanger and serve to dampen vibration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 295 for a resiliently supported power or
    heat rejecting element in refrigerating apparatus; and subclass 296 for a
    muffler or sound damper in a refrigerating apparatus.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 560+ for resilient supports, per se.


CLS 165/70
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means to collect material
    which leaks from the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11.1,   for a leakage indicator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 312+ for a leakage collector on a fluid
    handling system not specialized to heat exchange.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 13+ for a leakage or drip
    disposal arrangement for a pipe joint not specialized to heat exchange.


CLS 165/71
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having a discharge opening additional
    to the normal flow inlet and outlet of a heat exchanger and closed by a
    cock or plug, for removing material from a flow path of the heat exchanger.


CLS 165/72
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having an exterior opening closed by a
    releasably mounted covering section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for a removable purge or drainage plug.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, appropriate subclasses for a closure
    of the type provided for and see the search notes thereto in section IV (E)
    for the loci of closures specific to the furnace and heating classes.


CLS 165/73
TXT Apparatus under subclass 72 in which material within or flowing to or from
    the apparatus having the removable covering section is heated or cooled by
    the removable section or by a device supported by the section.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 243, for a closure for a still
    or retort cooled by a fluid within or flowing through the closure.


CLS 165/74
TXT Apparatus under subclass 73 in which the heat exchange means extends
    inwardly from the access opening and provides an exchange surface within
    the receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 17+ for an electric
    lamp or discharge device projecting into a temperature modifying jacket.


CLS 165/75
TXT Apparatus under subclass 72 in which the covered opening provides access
    from the exterior of a casing to space within it, in which the temperature
    modifying means is located.


CLS 165/76
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means, other than the parts
    making up the heat exchanger and securing them in operative relationship,
    which means aids in the assembly or disassembly, or restores or aids in
    restoring the apparatus to its former condition after injury or decay.

    (1)     Note.  Mere devices with disconnectable pipe joints are not repair
    or assembly means and are classified in appropriate subclasses below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 890.03+ for the process of making a heat
    exchanger or boiler and subclasses 726+ for apparatus for assembling and
    disassembling a heat exchanger.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 298+ for refrigerating apparatus with
    repair, assembly or disassembly means.

    901,    Robots, appropriate subcollections for a robot device in general.


CLS 165/77
TXT Apparatus under subclass 76 including a hinge upon which a part of the heat
    exchanger pivots between operative and inoperative positions.


CLS 165/78
TXT Apparatus under subclass 76 wherein a supporting structure, e.g., a
    trackway, serves as a guide during the assembly or disassembly of parts of
    the apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 303 for a refrigerator with repair or
    assembly means including sliding or rolling guides.


CLS 165/79
TXT Apparatus under subclass 76 wherein the parts are assembled by settable
    material and means is provided for guiding the settable material into
    position or retaining it in position as it sets.


CLS 165/80.1
TXT WITH RETAINER FOR REMOVABLE ARTICLE:

    Apparatus under the class definition including means maintaining a
    removable article or device in position relative to attempering structure
    or fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72+,    where the removable article or device is or includes a cover for an
    access opening.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses for work holders, per se.


CLS 165/80.2
TXT Electrical component:

    Apparatus under subclass 80.1 which the article is a current conducting
    element utilized as part of an electrical device.


CLS 165/80.3
TXT Air cooled including fins:

    Apparatus under subclass 80.2 in which heat from the electrical component
    is removed through structure which includes fins in an environment of
    stationary or moving air.


CLS 165/80.4
TXT Liquid cooled:

    Apparatus under subclass 80.2 in which cooling of the electrical component
    is effected by liquid coolant.


CLS 165/80.5
TXT Including liquid heat exchange medium:

    Apparatus under subclass 80.1 in which heating or cooling is effected by a
    liquid medium.


CLS 165/81
TXT Apparatus under the class definition with provision for dimension variation
    of a heat exchanger element produced by temperature change.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 573.1 for a building
    structure with means accommodating dimension variations due to changing
    conditions.


CLS 165/82
TXT Apparatus under subclass 81 including a non-rigid interconnection between a
    temperature modifying means and an associated casing or frame.


CLS 165/83
TXT Apparatus under subclass 82 wherein the interconnection includes a flexible
    fluid confining wall structure, e.g., a bellows.


CLS 165/84
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means by which a wall through
    which heat is transferred is intermittently flexed or distorted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 104.07 for a
    pipe and tube cleaning hammer and subclass 104.08 for a device for cleaning
    a pipe or tube by deforming it.


CLS 165/85
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which a mechanically driven
    impeller or agitator is operated by the force or pressure of the material
    or of the material with which it exchanges heat.


CLS 165/86
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a heat exchange device with
    movably supported surface means, said movable surface means being exposed
    for contact with material to be heated or cooled by the surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for a heat exchanger carried through a fluid by movement of a
    supporting vehicle.

    73,     for a temperature modifier carried by a removable cover for an
    access opening.

    84,     for a vibrating temperature modifier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 345+ for a congealed product producer
    having a freezing surface mounted for movement during freezing; subclasses
    448+ for a unit of a refrigeration producing assembly movably associated
    with an enclosure; and subclass 499 for a unitarily movable evaporator and
    condenser.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclasses 7+ for a concentrating
    evaporator with a moving support for an evaporating film.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 135+, for an apparatus including a heat
    generator and a traveling heat emitter carrying or stirring work material.


CLS 165/87
TXT Apparatus under subclass 86 wherein the movable surface means is a part of
    a hollow rotating device and said surface is in the plane of a helix about
    the axis of rotation of the device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers) subclasses 96+ for a
    hollow rotary impeller with a heat exchange medium therein.


CLS 165/88
TXT Apparatus under subclass 86 including a rotatable device having within it
    separate flow paths for exchanging fluent materials.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 130+ for a
    rotary drum drier with gas or vapor flow, and treated material flow, and
    heating means.


CLS 165/89
TXT Apparatus under subclass 86 in which the movable heat transfer surface
    means comprises a part of a wall of a cylindrical tank device mounted for
    rotation about the axis of the cylinder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 108+ for a
    rotary drum type drier.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 346 for a rotary drum type material
    concealer.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 69, 128, 200+, 286, 342, and 364 for a
    process or apparatus for modifying or maintaining the temperature of a
    machine or a metal workpiece in connection with deformation of the
    workpiece.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclass 11 for a film type
    concentrating evaporator having a rotary drum or disc.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 103+, for a tumbler type rotary drum including
    a heat generator, or otherwise specialized to the application of heat to
    work material.

    492,    Roll or Roller, subclass 46 for a roll, per se, not elsewhere
    provided for, having heating, cooling or heat transfer means.


CLS 165/90
TXT Apparatus under subclass 89 with means positioning, directing or holding an
    exchanging fluid against the exterior of the tank or cylinder.


CLS 165/91
TXT Apparatus under subclass 90 with a blade device extending along a surface
    of the tank cylinder and traversed by the surface during its movement.


CLS 165/92
TXT Apparatus under subclass 86 in which the movable heat exchange surface
    passes through a body of fluent material to give movement to parts of the
    body relative to other parts of the body or its container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    366,    Agitating, subclass 147 for heat exchange medium in stirrer of
    agitator.


CLS 165/93
TXT Apparatus under subclass 92 in which the movable attempered surfaces sweep
    across the vertically spaced shelves moving material therealong and into
    shelf openings.


CLS 165/94
TXT Apparatus under the class definition wherein a member moves along and in
    close proximity to surface of a heat exchanger to mechanically dislodge
    from the surface material undergoing heat exchange.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 342+ for a congealed product producing
    means with means for working the congealed material, and subclass 354 for a
    congealed product producing means with a moving scraper.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclass 33 for an open pan type
    concentrating evaporator with a rake means.


CLS 165/95
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means for cleaning or
    facilitating the cleaning of a part of the heat exchange apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for a regenerative type of heat exchanger with cleaning means.

    71,     for a heat exchanger with a drainage cock or plug.

    84,     for a heat exchanger with means flexing or jarring a heat exchange
    surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 301+ for
    installed cleaners involving no modification of the heat exchanger and
    subclasses 104.03+ for pipe and tube cleaning implements.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 303 for refrigerating apparatus with
    cleaning means.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 379+ for a closed liquid
    heater or vaporizer with cleaning means.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses for
    cleaning apparatus of more general utility.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 237+ for a fluid handling system not
    specialized to heat exchange with cleaning means.

    451,    Abrading, for an abradant type of scouring device.


CLS 165/96
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a movable means for
    adjusting the rate or direction of flow of heat, or of heat exchanging
    fluid, or for starting or stopping such flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   for a device in which the adjustment is automatic.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 383 for a refrigerating system with a
    movable thermal means varying heat transmission.


CLS 165/97
TXT Apparatus under subclass 96 in which the movable controller selects the
    direction of fluid flow through a temperature modifying section of the heat
    exchanger.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for a regenerative type heat exchanger having a heat storage mass
    through which flow is periodically crossed or reversed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 324.1+ for a refrigerating system in
    which the flow of refrigerant may be reversed or crossed and subclass 325
    for a system in which the flow of external fluid may be reversed or crossed.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 309 for a reversing valve of the
    regenerative furnace type, per se.


CLS 165/98
TXT Apparatus under subclass 96 in which the adjustable flow controlling means
    is positioned adjacent to and controls flow through a radiator face.


CLS 165/99
TXT Apparatus under subclass 98 in which the adjustable means is located at the
    discharge of the radiator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 284+ for a register controlling the
    discharge of air from a duct or housing.


CLS 165/100
TXT Apparatus under subclass 96 in which the movable controller apportions or
    stops flow in verging flow paths.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282+,   294 and 296+, for the automatic control of branched flow of heat
    exchanging fluid.


CLS 165/101
TXT Apparatus under subclass 100 in which the flow adjuster controls the flow
    through parallel commonly supplied paths each of which has a temperature
    modifying section.


CLS 165/102
TXT Apparatus under subclass 100 in which the movable device controls flow
    between a tortuous flow path and a direct flow path formed by baffles
    within a fluid conducting, heating or cooling vessel.


CLS 165/103
TXT Apparatus under subclass 100 in which the movable controller adjusts flow
    between a heating or cooling branch and another branch in common with the
    heating or cooling branch.


CLS 165/104.11
TXT INTERMEDIATE FLUENT HEAT EXCHANGE MATERIAL RECEIVING AND DISCHARGING HEAT:

    Apparatus under the class definition in which a retained body of material
    forming part of the apparatus acts as a heat storage or carrier means for
    the apparatus and flows from an area where heat is added to an area where
    heat is removed.

    (1)     Note.  The flowing material of this and the indented subclasses may
    serve to retain heat and transport that heat to another location.

    (2)     Note.  A heat carrier means is continuous in operation so that at
    any time a given amount of heat is added and an equal amount of heat is
    removed. A heat storage means is intermittent in operation so that heat may
    be added at a different rate than it is removed.

    (3)     Note.  Application of heat to one location of a stationary mass of
    fluid will effect flow of the fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4+,     for heating a retained solid mass to the liquid state without flow
    thereof; and for heat transfer to solid material that is caused to move
    nonfluently.

    236,    for automatic control of heat storage in a heating and cooling
    system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 430+ for refrigerating apparatus
    including an intermediate fluid container transferring heat to a heat
    absorber or holdover.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, for a heat source combined with means to
    retain a body of flowable material to distribute the heat to another
    location.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclasses 10+ for a process
    in which hot fluent material, part of the apparatus, is used to carbonize
    carbonaceous material.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 67+ for a composition to be used as a heat
    transfer agent.


CLS 165/104.12
TXT Reversible chemical reaction:
    Apparatus under subclass 104.11 wherein heat is applied to the retained
    body of material to effect electron exchange or sharing and heat is removed
    from the retained body of material to effect reverse electron exchange or
    sharing, so that the retained body of material returns to its original
    condition.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is apparatus utilizing chemical bonding as
    in adsorption and desorption if they are endothermic and exothermic
    reactions.


CLS 165/104.13
TXT Plural intermediate fluent heat exchange materials:

    Apparatus under subclass 104.11 wherein a first and a second retained body
    of material, each forming part of the apparatus, act as heat storage or
    carrier means for the apparatus and each flow from an area where heat is
    added to an area where heat is removed.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus including a retained body of Freon and a retained
    body of oil, even if in direct contact, is not included in this subclass
    unless there is a specific disclosure that the purpose of each material is
    to act as a heat storage means.  The normal purpose of the oil in such a
    mixture is to lubricate the moving parts of the apparatus.

    (2)     Note.  Each retained body of material must be of the type found in
    subclass 104.11.


CLS 165/104.14
TXT Always out of direct contact with each other:

    Apparatus under subclass 104.13 wherein the apparatus is compartmentized to
    prevent engagement of the retained bodies of material with each other.


CLS 165/104.15
TXT Solid fluent heat exchange material:

    Apparatus under subclass 104.11 wherein the retained body of material which
    acts to receive and discharge heat exists, at least during part of the
    normal operation of the apparatus, in the solid state.

    (1)     Note.  The solid heat exchange material of this subclass may be
    pelletized or particulated so that flow takes place. For placement herein,
    it is required that there be flow of the material, not just movement.  For
    example, included herein is an apparatus having a conveyor that dumps the
    heat exchange material thereby allowing it to flow, whereas an apparatus
    that carries similar material continuously is excluded since at no time is
    the material allowed to flow.

    (2)     Note.  The retained body of material may be fluent when in the
    liquid state and may be nonfluent when in the solid state but must be solid
    at least during part of the normal operation of the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4+,     for heat transfer to solid material that is caused to move under
    continuous control of the apparatus.

    104.19, for a retained body of material which is solid when not in use but
    liquid during the normal operation of the apparatus.


CLS 165/104.16
TXT Fluidized bed:

    Apparatus under subclass 104.15 wherein the retained body of material is
    supported against gravity by a flow of liquid or gaseous material passing
    therethrough such that the retained body of material is rendered fluent and
    is confined in a pool like area.


CLS 165/104.17
TXT Utilizing change of state:

    Apparatus under subclass 104.15 wherein the heat of fusion or the heat of
    vaporization of the retained body of material is intentionally used to
    assist in heat storage or in heat transportation.


CLS 165/104.18
TXT Including means to move heat exchange material:

    Apparatus under subclass 104.15 including structure to force the retained
    body of material to move from one area to another.

    (1)     Note.  Structure utilizing gravity or capillary attraction is not
    considered to be provided with means to move the retained body of material.


CLS 165/104.19
TXT Liquid fluent heat exchange material:

    Apparatus under subclass 104.11 wherein the retained body of material which
    acts to receive and discharge heat exists, at least during some part of the
    normal operation of the apparatus, in the liquid state.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104.15, for apparatus which functions with the retained body of material in
    the liquid state and at other times in the solid state during the normal
    operation of the apparatus.


CLS 165/104.21
TXT Utilizing change of state:

    Apparatus under subclass 104.19 wherein the heat of vaporization of the
    retained body is intentionally used to assist in heat storage or in heat
    transportation.


CLS 165/104.22
TXT Including means to move heat exchange material in liquid state:

    Apparatus under subclass 104.21 provided with means to act to force the
    retained body of material, while in liquid state, to flow.

    (1)     Note.  Structure utilizing gravity, steady-state centrifugal force,
    or capillary attraction is not considered to be provided with means to move
    the retained body of material.  Structure generating centrifugal force to
    cause material to flow is included herein.

    (2)     Note.  A thermosiphon for causing the material to flow is
    considered to be a means for moving heat exchange material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104.21, for similar apparatus wherein liquid heat exchange material moves
    by the effect of gravity.

    104.26, for similar apparatus wherein liquid heat exchange material moves
    by capillary attraction.

    104.28, for similar apparatus wherein the liquid heat exchange material
    does not change state during operation of the apparatus.


CLS 165/104.23
TXT By direct application of electrical energy to heat exchange material:

    Apparatus under subclass 104.22 wherein the retained body of material is of
    such composition that it can be manipulated by electrical energy applied
    thereto, and wherein the forcing means acts by applying such energy to the
    retained body of material in the liquid state.


CLS 165/104.24
TXT By application of heat other than in heat receiving area:

    Apparatus under subclass 104.22 wherein the retained body of material is
    caused to flow by means serving to apply thermal energy thereto for the
    specific purpose of causing the material to flow, which thermal energy is
    applied at a location of the apparatus remote from the locations at which
    heat is added or removed.

    (1)     Note.  While heat is added to the heat exchange material by the
    apparatus of this subclass causing the material to move, the quantity is
    generally insignificant, rather the heat is applied for the recited purpose
    of causing the material to move rather than to raise the temperature
    thereof.


CLS 165/104.25
TXT By application of mechanical energy:

    Apparatus under subclass 104.22 including means to engage the material of
    the retained body and transfer that material to effect its flow.


CLS 165/104.26
TXT Utilizing capillary attraction:

    Apparatus under subclass 104.21 including a tubelike passage for flow of
    the retained body of material while in the liquid state, wherein the
    passageway is sufficiently small such that the surface tension of the
    material serves to influence the flow of material passing therethrough.

    (1)     Note.  The capillary flow of this subclass is deemed to be inherent
    in the design of the structure, as in the case of provision for gravity
    flow, and the capillary tube is not therefore considered to be means to
    move the retained liquid material.

    (2)     Note.  A "heat pipe" with a capillary passageway or wicking
    material therein is considered to involve a change of state.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104.22, for similar structure wherein flow of the retained material is
    caused by mechanical means in engagement therewith.


CLS 165/104.27
TXT With pressurizing means or degassifying means:

    Apparatus under subclass 104.21 combined with means to alter the ambient
    pressure acting on the retained body of material or combined with means to
    separate or release vaporous material from the retained body of material.


CLS 165/104.28
TXT Including means to move heat exchange material:

    Apparatus under subclass 104.19 provided with means to act to force the
    retained body of material to flow.

    (1)     Note.  Structure utilizing gravity or capillary attraction is not
    considered to be provided with means to move the retained body of material.

    (2)     Note.  A thermosiphon for causing the material to flow is
    considered to be a means for moving heat exchange material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104.21, for similar apparatus wherein liquid heat exchange material moves
    by the effect of gravity.

    104.22, for similar apparatus wherein liquid heat exchange material is
    moved, which material changes state during operation of the apparatus.

    104.26, for similar apparatus wherein liquid heat exchange material moves
    by capillary attraction.


CLS 165/104.29
TXT Utilizing formed bubble:

    Apparatus under subclass 104.28 wherein vapor lighter than other portions
    of the material rises through the apparatus to carry liquid material along.


CLS 165/104.31
TXT By application of mechanical energy:

    Apparatus under subclass 104.28 including means to engage the material of
    the retained body and transfer that material to effect its flow.


CLS 165/104.32
TXT With pressurizing means or degassifying means:

    Apparatus under subclass 104.19 combined with means to alter the ambient
    pressure acting on the retained body of material or combined with means to
    separate or release vaporous material from the retained body of material.

    (1)     Note.  Means to force the retained body of material to flow is not
    considered to alter the environmental pressure acting on the retained body
    under the definition of this subclass.


CLS 165/104.33
TXT Cooling electrical device:

    Apparatus under subclass 104.19 particularly adapted to removing heat from
    a member, which member has been previously heated by resistance to
    electricity passing therethrough.


CLS 165/104.34
TXT Including means to move gaseous heat exchange material:

    Apparatus under subclass 104.11 with means to act to force the retained
    body of gaseous or vaporous material to flow.


CLS 165/108
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means providing for flow of
    exchange fluid in a delineated path from the discharge of a heat exchange
    zone back to the inlet of the zone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104.11, for an intermediate retained fluent material forming a part of the
    apparatus recycling in a flow path to transfer heat receiving zone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 376 for refrigerating apparatus with liquid
    contacting a discrete commodity with means for recirculating the liquid.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 406+ for a closed liquid
    heater with circulation means.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 387 for an open liquid heater with a
    heat type circulator or agitator.


CLS 165/109.1
TXT WITH AGITATING OR STIRRING STRUCTURE:

    Apparatus under the class definition including means for imparting movement
    to parts of a body of exchange material within a heat exchange structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     for means flexing, jarring or vibrating a heat exchange surface.

    85,     for an agitator or impeller having a motor operated by exchange
    fluid.

    87,     for a hollow, heating or cooling screw type impeller.

    88,     for a rotor with separate chambers for two exchanging fluent
    materials; e.g., cooled tumbling drum.

    92,     for a heat exchanger having stirrer or scraper with an internal
    passage for a heating or cooling fluid.

    94,     for a heat exchanger with a scraper removing product from a heat
    exchange surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 342+ for refrigerating means producing a
    congealed or modified product with means for working the congealed or
    modified product, and subclass 392 for a refrigerated liquid dispenser with
    an agitator for the withdrawable liquid.


CLS 165/110
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having structure within a flow path
    establishing or maintaining a body or stream of a fluid of one density in
    communication with a fluid of a second density.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for a heating and cooling system including a gas-liquid contact
    device.

    226,    for the automatic control of a gas and liquid contact device in a
    heating and cooling system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 272+ for a heat absorber with means
    handling water condensed from the air, and subclasses 304+ for means
    specialized to cooling including a gas liquid contact device.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 34 for an indirectly heated
    liquid vaporizer having an internal vapor separator; subclasses 488 to 492
    for a closed liquid vaporizer with a vapor-liquid separator; and subclass
    508 for a steam dome for a liquid vaporizer.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 113 for a hot air furnace with an air
    moistener and subclass 389 for an open liquid heating vessel with a vent.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 154+ for diverse fluid containing
    systems not specific to heat exchange.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 157+ for a liquid
    separator with an ancillary heat exchanger.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclass 78 for a heating system radiator having
    an air moistener.


CLS 165/111
TXT Apparatus under subclass 110 in which a chamber or flow passage in which
    the two fluids communicate, has a separate discharge port for separate
    withdrawal of each of the fluids.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58+,    for a combined heating and cooling system with an ancillary gas
    separator.

    71,     for a heat exchanger with a purge, or drainage, cock or plug.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 36+ for means for producing a liquefied
    gas product from a gas and subclass 475 for a refrigerant producer having
    an element separately discharging refrigerant and a separate impurity.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, for apparatus for gas separation of the
    type provided for in Class 96 combined with a heat  exchanger.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, appropriate subclasses for a
    concentrating evaporator.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for mineral oil
    separating apparatus.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 163+ for the volatilization and
    condensation of a liquid to be recovered from a mixture, especially
    subclasses 185+ for a condenser combined with a still; and subclasses 239+
    for an element specialized to distillation.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 180 for a heated liquid
    separator with vapor or gas removal means.


CLS 165/112
TXT Apparatus under subclass 111 in which there is a means for changing the
    temperature or pressure of one of the fluids separated by the withdrawal.


CLS 165/113
TXT Apparatus under subclass 112 in which the fluid modification is effected by
    a heated or cooled surface forming a part of the apparatus.


CLS 165/114
TXT Apparatus under subclass 111 having a flow directing means adjacent the
    outlet for a less dense fluid, directing such fluid into its outlet or
    directing a heavier fluid away from the outlet.


CLS 165/115
TXT Apparatus under subclass 110 including means for establishing a liquid
    layer, which layer flows by gravity along a surface confining it or drops
    from one surface to another, said surface of a separate temperature
    modifying means closely adjacent thereto serving to heat or cool the liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 39 for a closed liquid
    vaporizer of the film type.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclasses 13+ for a concentrating
    evaporator of the moving film type.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclass 153 for a gas liquid
    contact device having a gas exposed liquid body or sheet contacting a heat
    exchanger and having means promoting the contact of gas with the liquid.


CLS 165/116
TXT Apparatus under subclass 115 comprising vertically spaced shelves in a
    liquid flow path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclass 148 for a heated or
    cooled absorption or rectification column.


CLS 165/117
TXT Apparatus under subclass 115 comprising vertically spaced horizontally
    extending exchange fluid conducing pipe sections with means distributing
    liquid along the exterior of an upper pipe section for flow thereover onto
    the exterior of a lower pipe section.


CLS 165/118
TXT Apparatus under subclass 115 in which the heated or cooled surface is a
    section of a figure of revolution having a vertical axis.


CLS 165/119
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including apparatus for separating
    solid materials from a heat exchanging fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 317+ for refrigerating apparatus with a
    separator-clarifier for the cooled fluid or ice melt.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, for apparatus for gas separation of the
    type provided for in Class 96 combined with a heat  exchanger.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 153+ for a
    structurally installed liquid separator wherein there is included only
    enough heat exchange structure to associate it with the filter and
    subclasses 175+ for a liquid separator with an ancillary heater or heat
    exchanger.


CLS 165/120
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having a kinetic energy device acting
    on the material being treated to move or carry it within or through the
    apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for a device in which the motion of a vehicle causes fluid to move
    over an attemperator.

    85,     for a heat exchanger in which an agitator or impeller motor is
    operated by exchange fluid.

    86+,    for a device in which movement of material relative to an
    attempered surface is produced by movement of the attemperator.

    94,     for a heat exchanger with a scraper removing product from a heat
    exchange surface.

    107,    for a heat exchanger having a mechanical impeller pumping an
    intermediate fluid between a heat receiving and a heat rejecting zone.

    108,    for a heat exchanger with recirculation means.

    109,    for a heat exchanger with agitating or stirring structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses
    for a drier with material handling and heating structure.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 360+ for a filled
    receptacle type of food cooker with a conveyor; subclass 420 for a spit or
    impaling type of food cooker with a conveyor and subclass 443 for a food
    cooker with a conveyor; for apparatus that uses kinetic energy to aid in
    separating one portion of food from another, search subclasses 518+, 571,
    586, and 623+.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses,
    for means handling a solid material in contact with a liquid not specific
    to heat exchange.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 334+ for a fluid handling system with
    heating or cooling of the system.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 150 for an article dispenser with
    heating or cooling means.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 146 for a fluid dispenser with heating or
    cooling means.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 36 for a cabinet with a
    magazine type article discharge device having cooling means.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 121+, for a residual material heating chamber
    with heating structure having means by which the work is progressed or
    moved mechanically and subclass 230, for a residual heat emitter and means
    moving or guiding work relative to the heat emitter.


CLS 165/121
TXT Apparatus under subclass 120 wherein a motor driven means, e.g., a fan,
    moves a gaseous fluid across or through a temperature modifier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 426+ for a refrigerating device with
    means forcing air across or through an evaporator and subclasses 467+ for a
    refrigerant compressor and its connected condenser specialized for use as a
    subcombination of a refrigeration producer.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 110 for a pump moving air through a
    hot air furnace.


CLS 165/122
TXT Apparatus under subclass 121 wherein a housing surrounds both the
    temperature modifying means and the gas pump.


CLS 165/123
TXT Apparatus under subclass 122 wherein the stream from the gas pump passes
    through a device having a restricted outlet opening for increasing the
    velocity of the stream.


CLS 165/124
TXT Apparatus under subclass 122 having structure for spreading or dividing an
    impelled gas stream or uniting another stream therewith.


CLS 165/125
TXT Apparatus under subclass 124 including a temperature modifier of annular
    form having radially extending gas passages.


CLS 165/126
TXT Apparatus under subclass 124 providing a single gas inlet and structure
    within the housing for dividing the inlet stream into a plurality of
    distinct streams.


CLS 165/127
TXT Apparatus under subclass 126 having a gas pump in each outlet stream.


CLS 165/128
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which temperature change caused by
    the heat exchanger produces flow through a vertically extending passage of
    the heat exchanger.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104.21, for recirculation, including thermosyphonic, of an intermediate
    fluid between a heat source and a heat sink.

    108,    for recirculation, including thermosyphonic, of a heat exchange
    fluid.

    120+,   for a mechanical or jet means moving a material through a heat
    exchanger.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 564 for a distribution system including a
    thermosyphonic circulating means.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclass 60 for a heating system with water
    circulation of the vapor-lift pump type.


CLS 165/129
TXT Apparatus under subclass 128 wherein the flue is a housing that encloses a
    distinct temperature modifier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for a wall mounted projecting shield that forms a fluid passage for
    a temperature modifier.

    57,     for a temperature modifier mounted within a hollow in a wall that
    is in communication with the room defined by the wall.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    237,    Heating Systems, subclass 79 for a radiator shield, per se.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 43+ for a building flue enclosing a heater.


CLS 165/130
TXT Apparatus under subclass 128 in which facing structures conducting one
    fluid form between them a vertically extending flue that produces flow of a
    second fluid.


CLS 165/131
TXT Apparatus under subclass 128 in which vertically extending corrugations of
    a heat transmitting sheet secured to a heating or cooling conduit form flow
    producing flues.


CLS 165/132
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a tank and attempering means
    the tank confining a body of fluid which is in constantly open
    communication with the attempering means, the tank acting as a storage
    reservoir and the attempering means being ancillary to it.


CLS 165/133
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having a member covered by a
    conforming film of diverse material, having a polished or roughened surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclass 13 for a fog, frost or
    ice preventative coating composition; subclass 14.05 for a corrosion
    inhibiting coating composition; and appropriate subclasses for coating
    compositions of general application.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 145+ for a coated pipe not
    specialized to heat exchange.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 381+ for a protective coating composition.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 152 and 155
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet having a component which is wrinkled, cracked, crazed or slit, and
    subclasses 409+ for such a product having a particular surface
    characteristic.


CLS 165/134.1
TXT WITH PROTECTOR OR PROTECTIVE AGENT:

    Apparatus under the class definition having means to protect it from
    corrosion, wear, soil or contamination; or to prevent it from receiving or
    inflicting physical damage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for a heat exchanger with a shield projecting from a wall.

    69,     for a vibration shield.

    81+,    for protection against damage due to expansion or contraction.

    129,    for a radiator within a convective casing.

    133,    for a heat exchanger with a protective coating.

    200,    for a condition responsive control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 504+ for a closed liquid
    heater with a safety device.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 142.5 for the combination of
    an internal combustion engine and means supplying external energy to heat
    some part or adjunct of the engine such as a radiator.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 59+ for a freeze condition responsive
    safety system; subclasses 67+ for a destructible or deformable element
    control; and subclasses 343+ for a protector for a fluid handling system
    not specialized to heat exchange.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 27+ for a freeze protecting
    pressure compensator and subclasses 32+ for freezing and thawing protection
    of a tubular conduit not specialized to heat exchange.

    204,    Chemistry, Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 196+ for
    electrolytic object protection apparatus.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 724+ for electrolytic protection of
    a metal or metal alloy object.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclass 79 for a radiator shield and subclass 80
    for a heating system with an antifreeze device.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure 310, for apparatus
    specialized to the protection of an object by the application of a magnetic
    field.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 7+ for a method of protecting metal
    from tarnish or corrosion.

    432,    Heating, subclass 233, for a heating apparatus element having
    protective cooling structure.


CLS 165/135
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having structure provided to inhibit
    heat or sound transmission.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for a resilient vibration dampener isolating an exchanger element.

    133,    for a heat exchanger having a coating.

    134,    for a heat exchanger with protective means.


CLS 165/136
TXT Apparatus under subclass 135 comprising a panel having therein insulation
    and an exchange fluid conducting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for a flexible blanket or cover having a passage for an exchange
    fluid therein.

    49,     for a radiant wall panel used in a heating or cooling system.

    56,     for a constructural installation including a wall having an
    internal passage for a heating or cooling medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 220.1+ for a mere
    service duct within a building barrier.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 451 for a flowing coolant container covered
    by insulation means or within a hollow wall of a refrigerator and subclass
    458 for a refrigerator having an access surface open to the atmosphere.


CLS 165/137
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means whereby mode or
    condition of operation can be changed by shifting or rearranging all or
    some of the parts in a different relationship to each other, or by addition
    or omission of a part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for a system convertible between heating and cooling.

    97,     for a heat exchanger with means by which fluid flow may be reversed
    or crossed within a heating or cooling zone.


CLS 165/138
TXT Apparatus under the class definition combined with a device having a
    function other than heat exchanging, or serving to perfect the heat
    exchange apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  See the search notes to the class definition for other
    classes having heat exchange means.


CLS 165/139
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which (1) fluid from outside a heat
    exchanger is supplied to a single passage of the heat exchanger through at
    least two distinct inlets or (2) fluid from a single passage of the heat
    exchanger is discharged outside of the heat exchanger through at least two
    distinct outlets.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100+,   for branched flow with a variable controller.

    124+,   for a mechanical fan and temperature modifier in a housing having
    verging gas flows.

    282+,   294 and 296+, for automatic control of branched flow.


CLS 165/140
TXT Apparatus under the class definition holding three or more noncommunicating
    fluids in heat exchanging relationship.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104.11+, for means utilizing a sealed or recycling body of fluent to
    transfer heat between two other materials.


CLS 165/141
TXT Apparatus under subclass 140 in which at least two of the fluid holders are
    concentric.


CLS 165/142
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a structure secured to a
    container and projecting into the container, said structure comprising a
    tube, the projecting end of which is closed, and in which fluid is supplied
    to or removed from the projecting closed end by an interior conduit means
    running from the secured end to the closed end of the tube.


CLS 165/143
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including units, each made up of a
    conduit surrounded by a casing forming a flow passage; said units being
    connected for flow of one heat exchange fluid through said plural units.


CLS 165/144
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a plurality of unitary,
    separate and discrete assemblies connected by distinct flow means; each of
    said assemblies being (1) a conduit with distinct heat transfer structure,
    (2) a tube coil, (3) a group of assembled side by side tubes or (4) one
    casing-conduit unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143,    for interconnected plural casing-conduit units.


CLS 165/145
TXT Apparatus under subclass 144 in which the connected units are within the
    same enclosing structure.


CLS 165/146
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including structure which provides a
    progressive amount of heat transfer along a flow path by providing
    graduated surface areas, or conductivities along the flow path in the
    direction of flow.


CLS 165/147
TXT Apparatus under subclass 146 in which heat transfer takes place through the
    wall of a passage increasing progressively in cross-sectional area.


CLS 165/148
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising container structure for
    line connection to a source of a first exchange fluid, said structure being
    traversed by a multiplicity of parallel, uniformly distributed passages for
    a second fluid; said second fluid passages extending through the apparatus
    and having inlet points in common plane on one side of the container
    structure and outlet ports in a common plane on the opposite side of the
    structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128+,   for a thermosyphonic flue or convective circulation type of
    radiator.


CLS 165/149
TXT Apparatus under subclass 148 with means providing a strengthening support
    or circumferential cover for the fluid confining elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67+,    for an external support for a heat exchanger.


CLS 165/150
TXT Apparatus under subclass 148, in which the container structure comprises
    serially connected tube sections.


CLS 165/151
TXT Apparatus under subclass 148, in which the container structure comprises
    side by side tubes and the traversing passages are formed by distinct heat
    transmitters traversed by the tubes.


CLS 165/152
TXT Apparatus under subclass 148 in which the traversing passages are formed by
    a corrugated or deformed sheet or sheets interposed between side by side
    elements of the container structure.


CLS 165/153
TXT Apparatus under subclass 152 in which the side by side tubes are connected
    to a common header.


CLS 165/154
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including structure forming two
    chambers having a common axis and which do not unite.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141,    for concentric flow chambers in a means providing heat interchange
    of three noncommunicating fluids.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 282+ for a jacket or casing, per se, for a
    muffler.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 415+ for a metallic receptacle with a
    spaced wall or jacket not specialized by structure to heat exchange.


CLS 165/155
TXT Apparatus under subclass 154 with means forming a third coaxial chamber
    communicating with one only of the two chambers that do not unite.


CLS 165/156
TXT Apparatus under subclass 154 with means forming a helical flow path in the
    outer chamber.


CLS 165/157
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which a fluid conducting assembly
    is arranged inside of, but out of communication with, a housing means; said
    assembly being (1) a coiled conduit (2) a group of side by side conduits or
    (3) a conduit with distinct heat transfer structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for a conduit assembly installed in a wall traversing passage means.

    55,     for a conduit assembly within a space formed by a wall and a
    projecting shield.

    57,     for a conduit assembly in a wall defined space.

    74,     for a heat exchanging means mounted on a cover for an access
    opening and projecting into the covered chamber.

    75,     for a chamber with an internal attemperator and having a removable
    cover for an access opening.

    92,     for a vessel or housing in which the conduit assembly serves as a
    scraper or agitator.

    108,    for recirculation of a heat exchange fluid including thermosyphonic
    circulation produced by a conduit assembly within a vessel.

    122+,   for a conduit assembly and a gas pump in a common housing.

    129,    for a conduit assembly within a distinct housing forming a
    thermosyphonic type flue.

    134,    for a heat exchanger with a protector that may be a shield.

    142,    for a spur tube projecting into an enclosure.

    143,    for plural casing-conduit units that are line or common header
    connected.

    145,    for line connected conduit assemblies in a common casing.

    154,    for noncommunicating coaxial enclosures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 282+ for a jacket or casing, per se, for a
    muffler.


CLS 165/158
TXT Apparatus under subclass 157 in which the conduit assembly comprises a
    header plate and tubes, said plate forming with a section of the casing a
    manifold for the tubes.


CLS 165/159
TXT Apparatus under subclass 157 including a distinct flow director in the
    space between the casing structure and the conduit assembly elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110+,   for a heat exchanger in which a flow director forms a first fluid
    holder or collector open to a second fluid.

    124+,   for a temperature modifier and gas pump within a housing with means
    producing verging flow.

    134.1,  for a protector that may be a flow directing baffle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, appropriate subclasses for a heat exchanger with a
    gas separating type of baffle.


CLS 165/160
TXT Apparatus under subclass 159 in which the flow director extends a
    substantial distance in the direction of the center line of a casing having
    a distinct longitudinal axis.


CLS 165/161
TXT Apparatus under subclass 160 including additional flow directing means
    transversely arranged relative to the longitudinal flow director.


CLS 165/162
TXT Apparatus under subclass 157 having a distinct structure within the space
    between the conduit assembly elements and the casing holding the assembly
    in position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     for a heat exchanger with expansion relieving or absorbing means
    supporting a tube assembly within an exchanger.


CLS 165/163
TXT Apparatus under subclass 157 including a continuous conduit which is
    coiled, looped or bent within the casing stream.


CLS 165/164
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which a stream of one heat
    exchanging fluid is conducted in indirect heat exchange relationship with a
    stream of a second fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140+,   for means providing interchange of three or more fluids.

    154+,   for a device in which the exchanging streams are concentric.

    157+,   for a device in which one of the fluid streams is in a casing
    enclosing the conductor of the second stream.


CLS 165/165
TXT Apparatus under subclass 164 in which plural passages for one fluid are
    interfitted and intermingled with flow passages for another fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148+,   where the interdigitated passages form a radiator core.


CLS 165/166
TXT Apparatus under subclass 165 in which the interfitted passages are formed
    between facing sections of a plurality of thin members of considerable
    surface area stacked face to face.


CLS 165/167
TXT Apparatus under subclass 166 in which alternate interface passages of the
    stack are connected by passage means penetrating or extending through
    plates of the stack.


CLS 165/168
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which an extended surface structure
    has a fluid conductor conforming to the surface or has a passage formed
    within it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for a flexible envelope or cover type of heat exchanger.

    49,     for a heating and cooling radiant building panel.

    56,     for a heating or cooling panel making up a part of a building.

    89+,    for a rotatable drum with a heated or cooled surface.

    94,     for a heat exchange surface with a scraper.

    115+,   for a heated or cooled trickler surface.

    136,    for a heating or cooling conduit and insulation within a barrier or
    panel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 33 for a steam table.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 70+ for a heating system radiator.


CLS 165/169
TXT Apparatus under subclass 168 in which the extended surface is a part of an
    enclosure forming means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154+,   for noncommunicating coaxial enclosures that may comprise a vessel
    and its jacket.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigerator, subclasses 516+ for an enclosure forming evaporator.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 415+ for a spaced wall or jacketed
    receptacle not specialized by structure to heat exchange.


CLS 165/170
TXT Apparatus under subclass 168 in which spaced areas of facing sheet, shell
    or plate sections form a fluid conducting passage of a panel made up of
    such sections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 523 for a corrugated or embossed wall
    evaporator.


CLS 165/171
TXT Apparatus under subclass 168 comprising side by side tubes with their
    interspaces substantially covered by distinct interconnected structure.


CLS 165/172
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which two or more lengths or loops
    of tubing or two or more tubular elements are assembled alongside each
    other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for a trickler in which liquid flows across parallel horizontal
    pipes.

    130,    for facing conduits forming a thermosyphonic flue.

    144+,   for distinct conduit assemblies that are line connected.

    150,    for a radiator of the core type made up of serially connected tube
    sections.

    151,    for a radiator of the core type made up of side by side tubes
    traversing a group of fins.

    152+,   for a radiator of the core type made up of side by side tubes
    spaced by deformed passage forming sheets.

    157+,   for a tube assembly in a casing or tank.

    171+,   for a panel or wall structure made up of side by side tube elements.


CLS 165/173
TXT Apparatus under subclass 172 in which the tubular elements are
    interconnected by structure forming a part of a communicating manifold
    chamber in which fluid flow verges.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153,    for a tube manifold connecting side by side tubes in a core type
    radiator.

    158,    for encased tube assembly with a manifold formed by a tube sheet
    and casing section.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 512 for a tube sheet
    specialized for use in a boiler.


CLS 165/174
TXT Apparatus under subclass 173 wherein structure is provided for directing or
    distributing a fluid within the conduits or header chamber.


CLS 165/175
TXT Apparatus under subclass 173 including an additional manifold, the tubes
    receiving fluid from one and discharging into the other.


CLS 165/176
TXT Apparatus under subclass 175 wherein the manifolds are located at the same
    end of the apparatus.


CLS 165/177
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a hollow body of tubular
    formation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 38 for a pipe with merely
    internal baffles designed to facilitate a transfer of heat between fluids
    inside and outside of the pipe; and appropriate subclasses for a pipe not
    specialized by structure to heat exchange.


CLS 165/178
TXT Apparatus under subclass 177 with means connecting the hollow body for flow
    of fluid there-through or for supporting it in a heat exchanger.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162,    for means supporting a conduit assembly in a casing.

    173+,   for side by side tubular structures connected by a manifold type
    header.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 59+ for a pipe support of general application.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, for a pipe joint or coupling of general
    application.


CLS 165/179
TXT Apparatus under subclass 177 including external and internal heat
    transmitters projecting from the body wall.


CLS 165/180
TXT Apparatus under subclass 177 in which the tubular structure includes
    elements made of different materials.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    for a heat exchanger with a coated surface.

    134.1,  for a protector that may be a protective liner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 140+ for a pipe or tubular
    conduit of general application having distinct layers.


CLS 165/181
TXT Apparatus under subclass 177 with distinct heat conducting structure for
    enhancing the transfer of heat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151,    for a core type radiator formed by side by side tubes traversing
    fin means.

    152,    for a core type radiator formed by a heat transmitter between two
    side by side tube means.

    171,    for a heat transmitter spanning side by side tube means and forming
    a panel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 41.69 for an internal
    combustion engine with a finned cylinder or head.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, for an electric lamp or
    discharge tube with an attached radiating surface member.


CLS 165/182
TXT Apparatus under subclass 181 having spaced heat transmitting plate sections
    spaced along the hollow body and distinct structure between the plate
    sections holding them in position relative to each other.


CLS 165/183
TXT Apparatus under subclass 181 in which the longitudinal axis of the distinct
    heat conducting structure is disposed in a plane parallel to or forming a
    sharp angle with the axis of the tubular structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171,    for a panel formed by means, e.g., plate, spanning side by side
    tube elements.


CLS 165/184
TXT Apparatus under subclass 183 in which the distinct heat conducting
    structure forms a helix about the tubular structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156,    for coaxial enclosures with means forming a helical passage in the
    annular outer enclosure.


CLS 165/185
TXT Elements under the class definition for receiving heat from one material
    and conducting it for discharging to another.


CLS 165/186
TXT Apparatus under the class definition not otherwise classifiable.


CLS 165/200
TXT WITH TIMER, PROGRAMMER, TIME DELAY, OR CONDITION RESPONSIVE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein associated with the heat
    transfer apparatus there is an instrument having either:

    (a) a means for measuring or recording time; or a device for controlling
    the heat transfer apparatus at a predetermined time (e.g., a clock-
    thermostat, an oven timer, etc.); or

    (b) a  means for scheduling or coordinating the performance of a repetitive
    sequence of operations; or

    (c) a means for accepting an input signal and providing a time interval
    before initiating an output signal; or

    (4) a means to sense a randomly occurring condition or a change in
    condition of the heat transfer apparatus, wherein the sensing means
    operates to directly or indirectly effect a change in an operation of the
    heat transfer apparatus.

    (1)     Note. In many cases, a programmer controls a sequence of operations
    of a cyclic nature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 157+ for an automatically controlled
    refrigerating system with a time and program actuator; subclass 171 for
    control apparatus associated with a gas-liquid contact cooler; subclass 176
    for control of a refrigeration system by a humidity sensor; subclasses 231+
    for a refrigerating system controlled by a time or program actuator; and
    appropriate subclasses for processes limited to refrigeration and apparatus
    having features specialized to refrigeration.

            Note. The line between Classes 165 and 62 is:

            Class 165 takes:

            (a) A reversible heat pump or a refrigeration producing system that
    provides useful cooling, in combination with a supplemental heating means
    near or on a condenser for providing heat during a heating mode.

            (b) A refrigeration evaporator or condenser,  per se.

            (c) Nominal recitation of an expansion device in combination with
    specific evaporator structure.

            (d) A liquid receiver or an accumulator which is built into or as a
    part of a heat exchanger.

            (e) A refrigeration producer having means to convert the same to a
    heating system so that it no longer function as a refrigeration producer
    (e.g., by omitting the evaporator, etc.).

            Class 62 takes:

            (a) A reversible heat pump or a refrigeration producing system that
    provides useful cooling.

            (b) Specific expansion device structure in combination with an
    evaporator.

            (c) A reversible heat pump or a refrigeration producing system that
    provides useful cooling in combination with a heating means for removing or
    preventing the deposition of condensate (frost) or thawing a freezing mold.

            Note. A reversible heat pump or a refrigeration producing system
    that provides useful cooling in combination with a supplemental heating
    means at or on the condenser is classified in Class 165.

            A refrigeration producing system having means to convert the same
    to a heating system so that at one time it no longer functions as a
    refrigeration producer (e.g., omitting the evaporator, etc.) is also
    classified in Class 165.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 44 for
    automatic humidity controlling mechanism; subclass 46 for temperature or a
    humidity controlling mechanism including a timing means; and appropriate
    subclasses for a temperature or humidity control mechanism associated with
    general utility.

            Note. The line between Class 165 and 236 is:

            Class 165 takes:

            (a) Nominal recitation of a means for heating and cooling, and a
    means for automatically controlling the means for heating and cooling.


            (b) Specific heat exchanger structure in combination with a means
    for automatically controlling a heat exchanger.

            (c)  Specific heat exchange structure in combination with a means
    for automatically controlling a heating and a cooling means.

            Class 236 takes:

            A patent with nominal recitation of a heat exchanger in combination
    with a means for automatically controlling a heating or cooling means.

    237,    Heating System, subclasses 70+ for structure of a radiator of a
    heating system.

    (1)     Note. The line between Classes 165  and 237 on reversible heat pump
    or refrigeration producing system is:

            Class 165 takes:

            A reversible heat pump or refrigeration system that provides useful
    cooling in combination with a supplemental heating means on or near a
    condenser for providing heat during a heating mode.

            Class 237 takes:

            A reversible heat pump or refrigeration producing system that only
    provides useful heating.

    (2)     Note. The line between Classes 165 and 237 on radiator for heating
    is:

            Class 165 takes:

            (a) Radiator structure, per se.

            (b) Radiator structure in combination with building structure.

            Class 237 takes:

            A patent with a heating system for a habitable enclosure (e.g.,
    building structure, etc.) having a radiator in combination with a heat
    generator (e.g., boiler, steam generator, etc.) or in combination with a
    means to distribute radiator fluid to different areas of the habitable
    enclosure (e.g., piping, a plurality of connected radiators, etc.).

    366,    Agitating, appropriate subclasses for agitating process or
    apparatus of general utility; subclasses 144+ for an agitator in
    combination with a heating or cooling means.

            Note. The line between Classes 165  and 366 on combined agitator
    and heat exchanger is:

            Class 165 takes:

            (a) All patents with significant heat exchange structure in
    combination with nominal structural recitation of an agitator.

            (b) All patents with a heat exchanger having an agitator which
    operates on a working fluid (e.g., a coolant or heating fluid), whether or
    not the agitator structure is broadly or significantly claimed.

            (c) All patents with a heat exchanger having a working fluid (e.g.,
    a coolant or heating fluid) which goes through the inside of a movable
    portion of an agitator, whether or not the agitator structure is broadly or
    significantly claimed.

            Exception to the above statements (b) and (c): Patents in which a
    working fluid is agitated by an agitator and then allowed to be mixed in a
    mixing chamber containing a material or fluid to be treated (heated or
    cooled) are classified in Class 366.

            Class 366 takes:

            (a) Significant agitator structure in combination with significant
    structure of a heat exchanger.

            (b) Significant agitator structure in combination with nominal
    structure of a heat exchanger.

            Exception to the above statements (a) and (b): A patent with a heat
    exchanger having a working fluid (a coolant or heating fluid) which goes
    through the inside of a movable portion of an agitator is classified in
    Class 165, whether the agitator structure is significantly or broadly
    claimed. Class 366 takes a heat exchanger having an agitator which operates
    on a working fluid only if  the working fluid is then allowed to flow into
    a mixing chamber containing a material or fluid to be heated or cooled.

    454,    Ventilation, appropriated subclasses for ventilation means and
    related processes not including specific heat exchange means.


CLS 165/201
TXT Having heating and  cooling capability:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 including a heating and cooling system
    capable of providing heating and cooling to an area at the same time or at
    different times.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 80+ for system with defrosting or frost
    inhibiting; and subclass 90 for refrigeration system with reheating.

    99,     Foods and Beverages: Apparatus, subclasses 468, 486+ for apparatus
    with automatic control or time means; subclass 470 for apparatus with
    sequential heating and cooling; and subclass 483 for apparatus having
    noncooking heat treatment of food.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 1 for
    control of heating and cooling; subclass 91 for thermostatic control of hot
    and cold; and appropriate subclasses for automatic temperature and humidity
    control mechanisms.

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclass 760 for measuring and
    testing device with temperature control.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclass 113 for resistance
    furnace devices for cooling.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 45 for thermal testing of a
    non-thermal quantity.

    432,    Heating, appropriate subclasses for a residual material heating
    apparatus or method.


CLS 165/202
TXT Vehicle installation:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the heating and cooling   system
    is mounted in a vehicle capable of transporting an occupant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     42-43, for heat exchange apparatus combined with vehicle feature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 239, 243, 244 for refrigeration system
    combined with vehicle feature.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 202+ for heating devices combined with
    vehicle component.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 12.3+ for heating system of vehicle.

    454,    Ventilation, subclass 75 for vehicle ventilation system having
    automatic control means; subclasses 69+ for vehicle ventilation system;
    and appropriate subclasses for particular structure of ventilation system.


CLS 165/203
TXT Plural temperature regulators for plural zones:

    Subject matter under subclass 202 wherein the vehicle has a plurality of
    distinct areas which are heated or cooled; and wherein each of the distinct
    areas has its own temperature sensor and temperature setter.


CLS 165/204
TXT Flow control of chest, foot, or defrost air in vehicle:

    Subject matter under subclass 202 including means to regulate the amount of
    air discharged into the vehicle through a port located at either a chest
    level of an occupant, near a foot area of an occupant or adjacent to a
    windshield of the vehicle.


CLS 165/205
TXT Plural temperature regulators for plural zones:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 including a plurality of distinct areas
    which are heated or cooled, wherein each areas has its own area control
    means comprising a temperature sensor and a temperature setter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 1  for zone
    control for heating and cooling medium; subclass 49.3 for electrically
    actuated ventilator; and subclass 49.4 for pneumatically actuated
    ventilator.


CLS 165/206
TXT Nonbuilding system (e.g., machine tool, chemical analyzer, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 205 wherein said plurality of distinct areas
    are associated with structure other than a habitable enclosure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    392,    Electric Resistance Heating Devices, subclasses 482, 486, 490 for
    special features of electric resistance heating devices.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 305 for fume generators, appropriate
    subclasses for processes or apparatus for treating material.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    subclasses 143+ for plastic or earthenware shaping or treating apparatus
    having temperature control means.

    432,    Heating, subclass 18 for heating process wherein work is subjected
    to diverse treatment or graduated temperatures; subclasses 43+ for heating
    devices having condition responsive control.


CLS 165/207
TXT Refrigeration system having an evaporator or condenser in each zone:

    Subject matter under subclass 205 wherein the heating and cooling system
    includes a closed-flow system in which a refrigerant is compressed,
    condensed in a condenser, and expanded to produce cooling at a low
    temperature level in an evaporator; and wherein each of said distinct areas
    has its own individual evaporator or its own individual condenser.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 175 for diverse, cascade or compound
    refrigeration producing system; subclasses 198 through 200 for
    refrigeration producer having serially arranged evaporator; subclasses 203
    through 206 for plural refrigerating producing elements; and appropriate
    subclasses for processes limited to refrigeration and apparatus having
    features specialized to refrigeration.


CLS 165/208
TXT Central system prioritizes heating and cooling requests from zones:

    Subject matter under subclass 205 including a common supply source capable
    of supplying heated or cooled air to each of said distinct areas; the area
    control means of each of said distinct areas each supplying a control
    signal to said common supply source; and wherein said common supply source
    includes signal accepting means to analyze the signals from the distinct
    areas to decide which of the areas will be first heated or cooled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 1 for zone
    control for heating and cooling medium; subclass 49.3 for electrically
    actuated ventilator; and subclass 49.4 for pneumatically actuated
    ventilator; subclass 51 for distance-adjusted control devices.


CLS 165/209
TXT Supervisory central control means overrides zone controller:

    Subject matter under subclass 205 including a master control means capable
    of overruling the operation of at least two of the area control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 1 for zone
    control for heating and cooling medium; subclass 47 for high and low
    temperature alternate control devices; subclass 51 for distance-adjusted
    control devices.


CLS 165/210
TXT Heat balancing using waste heat or cold (e.g., heat reclaim, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 205 wherein the heating and cooling system
    includes a means for utilizing excess heat or cold discharged at one
    location (e.g., radiation heat from light fixture, etc.) to reduce a
    heating or cooling requirement  in another location (e.g., waste heat can
    be used to offset heating requirements in space heating, service water
    heating, air reheat in air conditioning systems, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for heat exchange apparatus combined with wall, floor, or ceiling
    structure of a chamber; subclass 909 for regeneration heat exchange
    apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 95 for refrigeration process having plural
    cooling steps; digest 22 for refrigeration system having free cooling.

    454,    Ventilation, subclass 294 for ventilation system having air passes
    over lamp; subclass 295 for ventilation system having ceiling type inlet
    airway and adjustable valve.


CLS 165/211
TXT Different conditioning means for perimeter zone and core zone:

    Subject matter under subclass 205 wherein one of said distinct areas
    comprises an inner area; another of said distinct areas comprises a
    boundary area completely surrounding said inner area; and wherein said
    inner area has one kind of heating or cooling structure (e.g., central
    system supply, etc.), and the boundary area has a diverse kind of heating
    or cooling structure (e.g., fancoil unit under window, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 1 for zone
    control for heating and cooling medium; subclass 49.3 for electrically
    actuated ventilator; and subclass 49.4 for pneumatically actuated
    ventilator.


CLS 165/212
TXT Central temperature conditioned air supplied to each zone:

    Subject matter under subclass 205 including a common air supply source
    capable of supplying heated or cooled air from the heating and cooling
    system to each of said distinct areas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 1 for zone
    control for heating and cooling medium; subclass 49.3 for electrically
    actuated ventilator; and subclass 49.4 for pneumatically actuated
    ventilator.


CLS 165/213
TXT Mixing within zone of recirculated zone air and supply air adjacent zone
    inlet(e.g., induction unit, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 212 wherein an air inlet discharges heated or
    cooled  supply air from the common air supply source to said distinct area;
    and further including means transporting used air from a location within
    the distinct area to a location at or near the air inlet for mixing the
    used air with the supply air.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123,    for heat exchange apparatus with injector-type gas pump.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 13 for
    control devices associated with plenum-type system having mixing fluid of
    dissimilar temperature.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 228 through 236 for ventilation system
    having forced recirculation; subclasses 261 through 269 for ventilation
    system having structure for mixing plural air streams together.


CLS 165/214
TXT Including a fan (e.g., fancoil unit, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass  213 wherein the transporting means includes
    a fan.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 228 through 236 for ventilation system
    having forced recirculation; subclass 269 for ventilation system having
    mixed plural air streams and an air pump.


CLS 165/215
TXT Reheat adjacent zone air inlet:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 including a heating means located at or
    near an air discharge opening (e.g.,  grill, deflector, etc.) from the
    supply source to one of said distinct areas; said heating means functioning
    to heat air from said common air supply source before being discharged into
    said distinct area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     for room heat exchangers with central fluid supply; subclass 228
    for a heating and cooling system having means to reheat cooled air down
    stream of an indirect contact cooling means; subclasses 263 + for a heating
    and cooling system having opposed and compensating heating and cooling
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS;

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 90 and 173  for refrigeration system with
    reheating; subclasses 428+ for refrigeration system having means for
    directing gas over heat rejector.


CLS 165/216
TXT Mixing of separate centrally supplied hot and cold air streams before
    discharge into each  zone (e.g., dual duct, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 212 including a means for separately
    directing heated or cooled air from said common supply air source toward
    said distinct areas; and further including means to mix said separately
    directed heated air with said separately directed cool air before being
    discharged into said distinct areas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 1 for zone
    control for heating and cooling medium; subclass 1 for heating and cooling
    control devices; subclasses 12.1+ for control devices associated with
    structure having mixing fluid of dissimilar temperature; subclass 13 for
    control devices associated with a plenum-type structure having mixing fluid
    of dissimilar temperature; subclass 49.3 for electrically actuated
    ventilator; and subclass 49.4 for pneumatically actuated ventilator.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 261 through 269 for ventilation system
    having structure for mixing plural air streams.


CLS 165/217
TXT Volume flow of discharged air at discharge into zone modulated by zone
    heating or cooling load (e.g., variable air volume, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 212 wherein a volume of air from the common
    supply air source discharged into one of said distinct areas is controlled
    by a means which regulates air flow responsive to the difference between a
    set point temperature and a measured temperature of the distinct area.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 1 for zone
    control for heating and cooling medium; subclass 1 for heating and cooling
    control devices; subclass 49.3 for electrically actuated ventilator; and
    subclass 49.4 for pneumatically actuated ventilator.


CLS 165/218
TXT Central temperature condition liquid supplied to each zone:

    Subject matter under subclass 205 including a common liquid supply source
    capable of supplying heated or cooled liquid to each of said distinct areas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 185 for control of indirect heat transfer
    liquid; subclass 201 for control of refrigeration producer by external
    cooled liquid or holdover; subclass 434 for refrigeration system having an
    intermediate fluid container and a flow line connected transfer fluid
    supply and heat exchanger; and subclass 435 for refrigeration system having
    an intermediate fluid container and an indirect fluid pump or agitator.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 34+ and
    36+ for control of cooling or heating radiators.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclass 2 for heating systems with automatic
    controls; subclasses 59+ for water circulation of heating system; and
    appropriate subclasses for a heat producer combined with means for
    distributing a fluid heated thereby, or for apparatus including systems for
    heating a room, chamber, house, or other inclosing structure when such
    apparatus is not equally adapted for cooking.


CLS 165/219
TXT Separate supply and return mains (e.g., two pipe system, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 218 including a first distinct supply conduit
    extending between the common liquid supply source and a heat exchanger in a
    distinct area for supplying liquid to the heat exchanger; and further
    including a first distinct return conduit extending from the heat exchanger
    to the common liquid supply source for returning liquid to the common
    supply source.


CLS 165/220
TXT Additional supply main (e. g., three pipe system, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 219 further including a second distinct
    supply conduit extending between the common liquid supply source and the
    heat exchanger.


CLS 165/221
TXT Additional return main (e.g., four pipe system, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 220 further including a second distinct
    return conduit extending from the heat exchanger to the common liquid
    supply source.


CLS 165/222
TXT Humidity control:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 further including means to control
    atmospheric water vapor content in the area.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 50 for drying
    apparatus with a humidity controller for the contacting gas.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 176.1+ for refrigeration system with
    humidity sensor.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 44+ for
    humidity control devices; subclass 91 for thermostatic control of hot and
    cold with humidity sensor.


CLS 165/223
TXT Humidity sensor measures humidity of air in conditioned space:

    Subject matter under subclass 222 including a first sensing means to
    determine the atmospheric water vapor content in the area to be heated or
    cooled.


CLS 165/224
TXT Additional humidity sensor(e.g., located outside of conditioned space,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 223 further including a second sensing means
    to determine atmospheric water vapor content in the area or in another
    location.


CLS 165/225
TXT Humidity sensor controls indirect-contact cooling means:

    Subject matter under subclass 223 wherein said sensing means senses a
    signal to control a humidity adjustor; said humidity adjustor comprising a
    cooling device in which a conditioning fluid flowing through the cooling
    device is separated from a fluid flowing over said cooling device by a heat
    transfer surface.


CLS 165/226
TXT Liquid spray onto indirect-contact cooling means:

    Subject matter under subclass 225 including a means to spray a liquid onto
    the heat transfer surface of the humidity adjustor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 44 for
    control of humidity with evaporator cooling spray.


CLS 165/227
TXT Air bypass of indirect-contact cooling means:

    Subject matter under subclass 225 including a means to direct a portion of
    the air through an alternative air passage around said humidity adjustor.



CLS 165/228
TXT Reheat of cooled air downstream of indirect-contact cooling means:

    Subject matter under subclass 225 including a means located downstream of
    the humidity adjustor to heat the air after the air passes through the
    humidity adjustor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 90 for refrigeration system with reheating;
    subclass 176.5 for refrigeration system with humidity sensor and control of
    air heater (e.g., reheat pump, etc.).


CLS 165/229
TXT Humidity sensor controls humidifier:

    Subject matter under subclass 223 wherein the humidity sensor controls a
    device to add moisture to the atmosphere in the area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for heating and cooling heat exchange apparatus having gas liquid
    contactor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 171 for refrigeration system having gas
    liquid contact cooler.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, appropriate subclasses for a closed
    liquid heating vessel with a heat generator.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, appropriate subclasses, for open liquid
    heating structures not equally adapted for cooling, for heating stoves, for
    means for the application of heat for house warming and cooking purposes,
    and for specialized accessories and elements of such means.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus specially adapted to produce an intimate contact between gases
    and liquids to exchange properties or mutually modify conditions;
    particularly, subclasses 129+ for gas and liquid contact apparatus having
    temperature or humidity sensor; subclass 131 for gas and liquid contact
    apparatus having control of heat supply or heat effect.


CLS 165/230
TXT Dewpoint controlled (e.g., control of cooling means by downstream
    temperature sensor to maintain controlled dewpoint of downstream air, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 222 including a means to control the
    temperature of the atmosphere so as to produce a vapor saturated or nearly
    vapor saturated atmosphere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 229 for refrigeration producer having a
    compressor or its drive controlled by external cooled gas.


CLS 165/231
TXT Congealed material (e.g., frost, etc.) or condensation removal or
    prevention:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 including a first means responsive to
    accumulation of congealed material on a surface of the system or on another
    surface of the heated or cooled area to eliminate such material;  or a
    second means to inhibit freezing or condensation of moisture on said
    surfaces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 80 through 82 for refrigeration system
    having defrosting or frost inhibiting mechanism; subclasses 150 through 156
    for refrigeration system having means for preventing, removing, or handling
    atmospheric condensate.


CLS 165/232
TXT Operated by timer or programmer:

    Subject matter under subclass 231 including a means for measuring or
    recording time; or a device for controlling the heat transfer apparatus at
    a predetermined time; or a  means for scheduling or coordinating the
    performance of a repetitive sequence of operations; wherein said means or
    device selects a period of time that said first or second means operated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 155 for refrigeration system having
    defrosting means and a time or program actuator.


CLS 165/233
TXT Operated by temperature sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 231 including a temperature sensing means for
    controlling the action of said first or second means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 156 for refrigeration system having
    defrosting means controlled by a temperature sensor.


CLS 165/234
TXT Control of static pressure of conditioned space:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 including a means to control the pressure
    within the area.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 1 for static
    structures controlled by condition responsive means.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 49.3 for
    electrically actuated ventilators.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 70 through 74 for vehicle ventilation
    system having pressure regulating means; subclasses 238, 255, 340 for
    ventilation system having pressure regulating means.


CLS 165/235
TXT Space is within aircraft:

    Subject matter under subclass 234 wherein the area is a conditioned space
    in an aircraft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 71 through 74 for aircraft cabin
    ventilation system having pressure regulating means.


CLS 165/236
TXT Control of heat storage:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the system includes a body of
    material capable of absorbing heat or cold; and a further includes a means
    to control the amount of heat or cold absorbed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 59 for refrigeration processes including
    accumulating holdover ice.


CLS 165/237
TXT Means responsive to occupancy of space:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 including means to control the system in
    response to the presence of a living being in the area.


CLS 165/238
TXT Means storing set point for particular time of day (e.g., clock thermostat,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 201 including  means for retaining an
    operating setting for the system and implementing said operating setting at
    a pre-determined time of day.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 157 and 231 for refrigeration system
    having time or program actuator.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 46 for
    temperature and humidity control devices with timing element.

    392,    Electric Resistance Heating Devices, subclass 345 for electric
    resistance heating devices with means to control heating accumulating
    medium.


CLS 165/239
TXT Means to compute time required to reach certain temperature by certain time
    of day (e.g. morning warm-up, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 238 having additional means to calculate the
    length of time necessary to attain a given temperature by the predetermined
    time of day.


CLS 165/240
TXT Heat pump and supplemental heat source:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein said system is a reversible
    vapor-compression refrigeration producer in which the heating effect of
    said refrigeration producer is augmented by an additional heat source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 151  through 56 for refrigeration system
    having defrosting means; subclass 160 for automatic control of
    refrigeration system of selective heating or cooling (reversible
    cycle-type);  subclasses 238.6  and  238.7 for heat pump.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclass 2 for automatic control of a heat pump.


CLS 165/241
TXT Change-over from heat pump operation to supplemental heat source operation
    alone:

    Subject matter under subclass 240 including means to convert operation from
    said reversible refrigeration producer, with or without operation of said
    additional heat source, to operating in a mode wherein said additional heat
    source is used exclusively.


CLS 165/242
TXT Responsive to outdoor temperature:

    Subject matter under subclass 241 wherein said converting means reacts to
    outdoor temperature.


CLS 165/243
TXT Means to reset supply air temperature or supply water temperature as
    function of heat load:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the system supplies air or water
    to heat or cool said area; and wherein means is provided to alter a preset
    temperature setting of said supply air or water in response to a change in
    heating or cooling requirement in the area.

    (1)     Note. An example of heat load: temperature difference between set
    point and measured temperature of an area, temperature difference between a
    chosen reference  temperature and a measured outdoor temperature, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 34 and 36
    for automatic control of cooling or heating radiators; subclass 91 for
    thermostatic control of hot and cold with at least one temperature sensor
    for temperature modifying media.


CLS 165/244
TXT Means to control fan or pump to regulate supply air flow or supply water
    flow:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the system supplies air by a fan
    or water by a pump to heat or cool said area; and wherein means is provided
    to alter a characteristic of the fan or pump (e.g., fan speed, volume,
    etc.) to control the rate at which air or water is delivered to said area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     for room heat exchangers with central fluid supply.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 49.3 for an
    electrically actuated ventilator.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 1+ for condition responsive control of pump drive
    motor.


CLS 165/245
TXT Low flow during heating and high flow during cooling:

    Subject matter under subclass 244 wherein the delivered rate is greater
    during a cooling mode than during a heating mode.


CLS 165/246
TXT Responsive to pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 244 wherein the delivered rate is varied
    according to a measured pressure.


CLS 165/247
TXT Responsive to temperature:

    Subject matter under subclass 244 wherein the delivered rate is varied
    according to a measured temperature.


CLS 165/248
TXT Flow of air from outdoors controlled (e.g., minimum outside air, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 201 including a means to regulate the amount
    of outdoor air admitted to the heated or cooled area.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 49.1
    through 49.5 for automatic temperature and humidity control of ventilators.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 70, 238, 255, and 340 for devices for
    maintaining the pressure in an enclosure where no specific heating or
    cooling means are included; subclasses 228+ for ventilating system having
    forced recirculation; subclass 239 for control of ventilating system having
    inlet and outlet airways; subclass 256 for control of ventilating system
    having inlet airway; and appropriate subclasses for apparatus for supplying
    air to, removing it from, or distributing air in an enclosure with or
    without heating and without a specific heat exchange means.


CLS 165/249
TXT Proportion of outdoor air and return air controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 248 including means to recycle air in the
    area; and further including means to regulate the ratio of outdoor air
    relative to an amount of recycle air.


CLS 165/250
TXT Outdoor air used in lieu  of operating heating or cooling means (e.g.,
    economy cycle, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 249 further including a control means to
    allow the admittance of substantially one hundred percent outdoor air to
    condition the area instead of operating a heating or cooling means of said
    heating and cooling system.


CLS 165/251
TXT Enthalpy sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 250 and further including a sensor which
    senses temperature and humidity of air.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, digest 13 for
    humidithermostat.


CLS 165/252
TXT Pre-heat or pre-cool of outdoor air before mixing with returned air:

    Subject matter under subclass 248 including means to recycle air in the
    area; and wherein the admitted outdoor air is heated or cooled by passing
    through a heating or cooling means before mixing with the recycle air in
    the area.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 95 for refrigeration processes including
    plural cooling  (e.g., precooling by exhaust, etc.).


CLS 165/253
TXT Temperature sensor controlling temperature:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 including  a sensing means for sensing
    temperature in said area and controlling said system in responsive to said
    sensed temperature.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, appropriate
    subclasses for automatic temperature and humidity control mechanisms.


CLS 165/254
TXT System selects heating or cooling mode automatically (e.g., responsive to
    season, ambient light, temperature in conditioned area, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 253  including a means for switching between
    heating or cooling operation without manual intervention by an operator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 1 for
    heating and cooling control devices; subclasses  91+ for thermostatic
    control of hot and cold.


CLS 165/255
TXT Dead band between heating and cooling:

    Subject matter under subclass 254 including a temperature range about a set
    point temperature in which neither a heating or a cooling means of said
    system is activated.


CLS 165/256
TXT Variable rate of heating or cooling (e.g., plural stages, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 254 wherein said system is capable of
    operating to provide variable quantity of heating or cooling energy per
    unit time to said area.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 1+ for
    multistage control devices.


CLS 165/257
TXT Room and ambient temperature sensors:

    Subject matter under subclass 254 including a temperature sensor in said
    area and further including an outdoor temperature sensor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 91 for
    automatic thermostatic control of heating and cooling; subclass 91 for
    automatic thermostat control of hot and cold for plural rooms or plural
    outside thermostats.


CLS 165/258
TXT Separate heating and cooling thermostats:

    Subject matter under subclass 254 including a first device which measures
    changes in temperature and controls a heating means; and a second device
    which measures changes in temperature and controls a cooling means to
    maintain desired temperature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 1 for
    heating and cooling control devices.


CLS 165/259
TXT Single temperature sensing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 254 wherein said switching means comprises
    only one temperature sensor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 1 for
    heating and cooling control devices.


CLS 165/260
TXT Variable rate of heating or cooling (e.g., plural stages, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 253 wherein said system is capable of
    operating to provide variable quantity of heating or cooling energy per
    unit time to said area.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 1+ for
    multistage control devices.


CLS 165/261
TXT Sequentially activated heat sources or cool sources:

    Subject matter under subclass 260 including a plurality of heating means
    initiated one after another or a plurality of cooling means initiated one
    after another.


CLS 165/262
TXT Timer:

    Subject matter under subclass 261 wherein said plurality of heating or
    cooling means are operated by a means for measuring or recording time, or
    by a device for controlling the heat transfer apparatus at a predetermined
    time.


CLS 165/263
TXT Area receives  conditioning from simultaneously operated heating and
    cooling means(e.g., opposed and compensating heating and cooling, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 253 wherein means supplying heating and means
    supplying cooling operates at the same time and both supplies their
    respective output to the same area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215,    for a heat exchange apparatus with reheat adjacent zone air inlet.


CLS 165/264
TXT Simultaneous heating and cooling only in limited range around set point
    temperature:

    Subject matter under subclass 263 wherein the area is heated and cooled at
    the same time only  when a measured temperature is within a limited range
    around a pre-determined desired temperature.


CLS 165/265
TXT Manual changeover between heating and cooling modes (e.g., manual override,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 253  including a means for allowing an
    operator to switch between heating and cooling operations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 161 through 164 for a refrigeration
    system having correlated manual or external operator and condition sensing
    means (e.g., cut off or reset, etc.).


CLS 165/266
TXT Preheat or pre-cool of space or device during start-up:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the heat transfer apparatus
    effects a temperature change in an occupied space or during use of a device
    and wherein there is further included a means to attain a pre-determined
    temperature immediately prior to occupancy of the space or use of the
    device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 46+ for
    automatic temperature and humidity control devices with timing element.


CLS 165/267
TXT Means to heat or cool for predetermined periods of time (e.g., duty cycle,
    time-temperature profiler, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein said instrument controls the heat
    transfer apparatus to cause the apparatus to operate for a pre-set interval
    of time.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 46  for
    automatic temperature and humidity control devices with timer other than
    clock.


CLS 165/268
TXT Pre-determined time variable set point:

    Subject matter under subclass 267 wherein said instrument  further includes
    a means to set a pre-determined time varying set-point for said heat
    transfer apparatus to cause the apparatus to follow the set point during
    said pre-set interval of time.


CLS 165/269
TXT Duty cycle (e.g., pulse duration or pulse frequency modulation, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 267 wherein said instrument outputs a
    plurality of electrical pulses to actuate the heat transfer apparatus in a
    pulsed manner, said pulses being of extremely short duration (e.g., less
    than one second, etc.) and the frequency, duration or ratio of on-to-off
    time of the pulse within a given time interval is controlled by the
    instrument.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic temperature and humidity regulation, subclass 46 for
    automatic temperature and humidity control devices with timer other than
    clock.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 129.05 for electrically
    actuated valves having means to produce digital pulses.


CLS 165/270
TXT Time delay:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein said instrument accepts an input
    signal and waits for a time interval before initiating an output signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 158 for a refrigeration system having time
    delay of condition sensing or control operation.


CLS 165/271
TXT Vehicle or engine speed responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein said instrument senses and reacts
    to the velocity of  a vehicle or vehicle engine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 133+ for a refrigeration system
    responsive to vehicle body motion or traction.


CLS 165/272
TXT Control of heat pipe heat transfer characteristics:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein said heat transfer apparatus
    comprises a substantially sealed cavity containing a liquid, heat being
    absorbed in one portion of said cavity by vaporization of the liquid and
    released in a second portion of said cavity by condensation of the vapor,
    the condensed vapor being recycled for subsequent evaporization; and
    further including means to control the vaporization, condensation or
    recycling.


CLS 165/273
TXT Control of quantity of inert gas:

    Subject matter under subclass 272 including a means to control the amount
    of inert gas present within said cavity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104.32, for heat exchange apparatus having intermediate liquid fluent heat
    exchange material with pressurizing or degassifying means; subclasses 281+
    for heat exchange apparatus having fluid pressure responsive or control.


CLS 165/274
TXT Control of vapor or liquid flow between evaporator and condenser sections
    (e.g., by variable restrictions, check  valves, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 272 wherein the control means controls the
    transport of vapor from said one portion to said second portion or the
    transport of recycled liquid from said second portion to said first portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104.22+, for heat exchange apparatus having intermediate liquid fluent heat
    exchange material utilizing change of state and including means to move the
    heat exchange material in liquid state.


CLS 165/275
TXT Control of amount of conductive gas in confined space   between heat source
    and heat sink:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein said heat transfer apparatus
    comprises a substantially sealed cavity containing a gas which does not
    change phase during operation of said apparatus, heat being conducted
    through said gas from one portion of said cavity to a second portion of
    said cavity; and further including means to control the quantity of said
    gas within said cavity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104.32, for heat exchange apparatus having intermediate liquid fluent heat
    exchange material with pressurizing or degassifying means; subclasses 281+
    for heat exchange apparatus having fluid pressure responsive or control;
    subclass 917 for heat exchange apparatus having pressurization and/or
    degassification.


CLS 165/276
TXT Control of variable thermal conductivity systems (e.g., heat valves, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein said heat transfer apparatus
    comprises a gaseous, liquid or solid heat conductive path between a heat
    source and a heat sink; and further including means to control the thermal
    conductivity of said path (e.g., by severing the conductive path or by
    changing its cross-sectional area, electrically charging said path, etc.)

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86+,    for heat exchange apparatus having movable heating or cooling
    surface; subclasses 96+ for heat exchange apparatus with adjustor for heat
    flow or for heat exchange material flow; subclass 185 for heat transmitter.


CLS 165/277
TXT Solid heat transfer path:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 wherein said heat conductive path is
    formed by a solid material.


CLS 165/278
TXT Vent of system (e.g., overpressure, overtemperature, removal of
    noncondensable, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein said heat transfer apparatus
    includes a confined volume containing a heat transfer fluid within; and
    further including means to allow the escape of fluid from said confined
    volume.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for heat exchange apparatus with purge, or drainage, cock or plug;
    subclass 104.32 for heat exchange apparatus having intermediate liquid
    fluent heat exchange material with pressurizing or degassifying means;
    subclass 917 for heat exchange apparatus having pressurization and/or
    degassification.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 92 for
    thermostatic control of hot and cold with diverse sensor (e.g., humidity,
    pressure, etc.).


CLS 165/279
TXT Pressure and temperature responsive or control:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the heat transfer apparatus has
    control means reacting to both pressure and temperature conditions or
    controlling both pressure and temperature conditions of the heat transfer
    apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 92 for
    thermostatic control of hot and cold with diverse sensor (e.g., humidity,
    pressure, etc.), subclass 92  for thermostatic control of heating and
    cooling.


CLS 165/280
TXT Bypass of heat exchanger responsive to both temperature  and  pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 279 wherein the heat transfer apparatus
    comprises a heat exchanger having a fluid passing through it and an
    auxiliary passageway in parallel flow connection with the heat exchanger to
    permit the fluid to go around rather than through the heat exchanger, the
    auxiliary passageway having a means to control flow through it which is
    responsive to both temperature and pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 34.5 for
    automatic temperature and humidity control of cooling radiator having
    bypass; subclasses 92+ for thermostatic control of hot and cold with
    pressure control.


CLS 165/281
TXT Fluid pressure responsive or control:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the heat transfer apparatus
    includes a heat exchange fluid, and further includes means to control the
    pressure of such fluid, or wherein the heat transfer apparatus includes a
    device responsive to fluid pressure to control the apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 92+ for
    thermostatic control of hot and cold with pressure control; appropriate
    subclasses for automatic temperature and humidity control devices.


CLS 165/282
TXT Branched flow of heat exchange material:

    Subject matter under subclass 281 wherein the heat transfer apparatus
    comprises a main conduit for the flow of a heat exchange fluid, the main
    conduit being divided at a predetermined location into at least two
    sub-conduits, each of the sub-conduits being in parallel flow relation with
    the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    for heat exchange apparatus having control of flow through parallel
    heating or cooling means.


CLS 165/283
TXT Bypass of heat exchanger:

    Subject matter under subclass 282 wherein one of the sub-conduits is
    connected to a heat exchanger and the other sub-conduit is an auxiliary
    passageway to permit the fluid to go around rather than through the heat
    exchanger.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 34.5 for
    automatic temperature and humidity control of cooling radiator having
    bypass.


CLS 165/284
TXT Differential pressure operated bypass:

    Subject matter under subclass 283 wherein the auxiliary passageway has a
    means to control flow through it which is responsive to the existence of a
    fluid pressure differential between an inlet and an outlet end of the
    auxiliary passageway.


CLS 165/285
TXT Flow of one heat exchange material controlled by  the pressure of another:

    Subject matter under subclass 281 wherein the heat transfer apparatus has
    first and second fluids flowing through it and the amount of the first
    fluid flowing through the heat transfer apparatus is controlled by the
    pressure of the second fluid.


CLS 165/286
TXT Flow of one heat exchange material controlled by its own pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 281 wherein the heat transfer apparatus has a
    fluid flowing through it and the amount of the fluid flowing through the
    heat transfer apparatus is controlled by its own pressure.


CLS 165/287
TXT Temperature responsive or control:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the heat transfer apparatus has
    control means reacting to a temperature level or controlling a temperature
    level of the heat transfer apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 91+ for
    thermostatic control of hot and cold; appropriate subclasses for automatic
    temperature and humidity control devices; subclasses 99+ for automatic
    temperature and humidity control devices associated with system having
    expanding fluid.


CLS 165/288
TXT Plural temperature sensors:

    Subject matter under subclass 287 wherein said control means is connected
    to more than one means to sense temperature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 78 for
    automatic temperature and humidity control devices associated with electric
    motors and having plural temperature sensors; subclass 80 for automatic
    temperature and humidity control devices associated with fluid operated
    motors and having plural temperature sensors; subclass 99 for automatic
    temperature and humidity control devices associated with system having
    expanding fluid and having external and internal sensors.


CLS 165/289
TXT Means to maintain a constant temperature difference between a measured
    temperature and a controlled temperature:

    Subject matter under subclass 288 wherein a first of sensor means measures
    temperature at a first location and a second of said sensor means measures
    temperature at a second location; and wherein said controller is operated
    to maintain the temperature at said second location at a pre-determined
    difference in value with respect to said temperature at said first
    location.


CLS 165/290
TXT Temperature sensor within or near an area to be  conditioned, another
    temperature sensor near the  conditioning equipment (e.g., shallow/deep,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 288 wherein one temperature sensing means is
    located at or in close proximity to an area whose temperature is to be
    controlled, and wherein another temperature sensing means is located in
    close proximity to a means used to thermally condition the temperature
    controlled area.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 91 for
    automatic temperature and humidity control devices associated with plural
    rooms or plural outside thermostats.


CLS 165/291
TXT Temperature sensor inside conditioned space, another temperature sensor
    outdoor (e.g. indoor set point adjusted by  outdoor  conditions, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 288 wherein one temperature sensing means is
    located within an area to be conditioned, and another temperature sensing
    means is located outdoors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation,  subclass 68 for
    automatic temperature and humidity control devices associated with motors
    and auxiliary heater applied to main temperature sensing means; subclass 68
    for automatic temperature and humidity control devices associated with
    motors and auxiliary heater applied to control device away from main
    temperature sensor; subclass 91 for automatic temperature and humidity
    control devices associated with plural rooms or plural outside thermostats.


CLS 165/292
TXT Temperature sensor in treated fluid, another temperature  sensor in
    treating fluid:

    Subject matter under subclass 288 wherein the heat transfer apparatus
    comprises a heat exchanger having a treated fluid and a treating fluid  in
    heat exchange relationship with one another, wherein one temperature
    sensing means measures treated fluid temperature and another temperature
    sensing means measures treating fluid temperature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 91 for
    thermostatic control of hot and cold with at least one temperature sensor.


CLS 165/293
TXT Temperature sensor prior to heat exchanger and one after:

    Subject matter under subclass 288 wherein the heat transfer apparatus
    comprises a heat exchanger having a fluid flowing through it and wherein
    one temperature sensing means is located upstream of the heat exchanger and
    another temperature sensing means is located downstream of the heat
    exchanger.


CLS 165/294
TXT Branched flow of heat exchange material:

    Subject matter under subclass 288 wherein the heat transfer apparatus
    comprises a main conduit for the flow of a heat exchange fluid, the main
    conduit being divided at a predetermined location into at least two
    subconduits, each of said subconduits being in flow relation with the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    for heat exchange apparatus having tortuous and straight through
    branches within heating or cooling drum.


CLS 165/295
TXT Including mass flow sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 287 and further including a means to measure
    the quantity of fluid flowing through or around the heat transfer apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 9 for
    combined heating and apartment control with heating medium circulation
    control.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 40 and 41 for a device
    associated with measurement of a quantity of heat which is determined by
    combining flow rate and temperature signals of a heat exchange fluid.


CLS 165/296
TXT Branched flow of heat exchange material:

    Subject matter under subclass 287 wherein the heat transfer apparatus
    comprises a main conduit for the flow of a heat exchange fluid, the main
    conduit being divided at a predetermined location into at least two
    subconduits, each of said subconduits being in flow relation with the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    for heat exchange apparatus having tortuous and straight through
    branches within heating or cooling drum.


CLS 165/297
TXT Bypass of heat exchanger:

    Subject matter under subclass 296 wherein one of the subconduits is
    connected to a heat exchanger and the other subconduit is an auxiliary
    passageway to permit the fluid to go around rather than through the heat
    exchanger.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 34.5 for
    automatic temperature and humidity control of cooling radiator having
    bypass.


CLS 165/298
TXT Mixture temperature sensing:

    Subject matter under subclass 297 wherein the auxiliary passageway branches
    ahead of, and recombined after, the heat exchanger and wherein the flow
    through the auxiliary passage or heat exchanger is controlled by the
    temperature of the recombined stream.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 88+ for a fluid handling system having
    mixture condition maintaining or sensing.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 12.1+ for
    control devices associated with mixing fluids of dissimilar temperatures.


CLS 165/299
TXT Flow of one heat exchange material controlled by  temperature  of another:

    Subject matter under subclass 287 wherein the heat transfer apparatus has
    first and second fluids flowing through it and the amount of the first
    fluid flowing through the heat transfer apparatus is controlled by the
    temperature of the second fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, appropriated
    subclasses for automatic temperature and humidity control devices.


CLS 165/300
TXT Flow of one heat exchange material controlled by its own  temperature:

    Subject matter under subclass 287 wherein the heat transfer apparatus has a
    fluid flowing through it and the amount of the fluid flowing through the
    heat transfer apparatus is controlled by its own temperature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 527, 528 for evaporator having flow
    controller or boiling expeditor.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 93+ for
    thermostatic devices associated with controlling of fluid; and appropriated
    subclasses for automatic temperature and humidity control devices.


CLS 165/301
TXT Liquid-level responsive or control means:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein said instrument senses and reacts
    to the height of liquid contained in a liquid holder or regulates said
    height.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 451+ for automatic
    control of feeders.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 11 for processes related to regulating
    boiler feed water level.


CLS 165/302
TXT Condenser or evaporator:

    Subject matter under subclass 301 wherein said heat transfer apparatus is a
    device structured to convert gas to liquid by reducing its temperature or
    to convert liquid to gas by addition of heat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110+,   for heat exchange apparatus having first fluid holder or collector
    open to second fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 527 and 528 for evaporator having flow
    controller or boiling expeditor.


CLS 165/303
TXT Cleaning:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein said instrument controls a means
    for cleaning said heat transfer apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95,     for heat exchange apparatus having cleaning means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 3.5+ for
    cleaning means having means to pass a solid cleaning agent and a fluid
    carrier through tubular work; subclasses 301+ for installed cleaners
    involving no modification of the heat exchanger; subclasses 104.03+ for
    pipe and tube cleaning implements.


    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses for
    cleaning apparatus of more general utility.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 165/900
TXT COOLING TOWERS:

    Apparatus which cool fluid by indirect heat exchange with outside air.


CLS 165/901
TXT HEAT SAVERS:

    Apparatus which heats air with the waste heat of domestic flue gases.


CLS 165/902
TXT HEAT STORAGE:

    Apparatus to store heat other than where provided in class.


CLS 165/903
TXT CONVECTION:

    Apparatus having structure peculiar to modifying convection characteristics.


CLS 165/904
TXT RADIATION:

    Apparatus having structure peculiar to modifying radiation characteristics.


CLS 165/905
TXT MATERIALS OF MANUFACTURE:

    Apparatus constructed of special materials.


CLS 165/906
TXT REINFORCEMENT:

    Apparatus having structure reinforcing an element of the heat exchanger.


CLS 165/907
TXT POROUS:

    Apparatus having a porous heat exchange element.


CLS 165/908
TXT FLUID JETS:

    Apparatus having structure to form fluid jets to enhance heat transfer.


CLS 165/909
TXT REGENERATION:

    Apparatus recovering waste heat.


CLS 165/910
TXT TUBE PATTERN:

    Apparatus having specific tube spacing relationships.


CLS 165/911
TXT VAPORIZATION:

    Apparatus having vaporization modifying structure.


CLS 165/912
TXT COMBINED OR CONVERTIBLE HAT EXCHANGE MODES:

    Apparatus which has multiple heat exchange modes.


CLS 165/913
TXT CONDENSATION:

    Apparatus having condensation modifying structure.


CLS 165/914
TXT FILMING:

    Apparatus having means to form a film on the heat exchange surface.


CLS 165/915
TXT FOAMING:

    Apparatus having means to form a foam on the heat exchange surface.


CLS 165/916
TXT OIL COOLER:

    Apparatus for cooling oil.


CLS 165/917
TXT PRESSURIZATION AND/OR DEGASSIFICATION:

    Apparatus having means to pressurize or degasify the heat exchange fluid.


CLS 165/918
TXT HEATED AND COOLED FOOD CABINETS AND/OR TRAYS:

    Apparatus for maintaining food in a heated or cooled condition.


CLS 165/919
TXT WHEELED:

    Apparatus under subclass 918 including wheeled movement means on cabinets
    or trays.


CLS 165/920
TXT PARTICULATE HEAT EXCHANGE:

    Apparatus exchanging heat indirectly with particular material.


CLS 165/921
TXT DEW POINT:

    Apparatus in which gas stream flow temperature is manipulated relative to
    the dew point of the gas stream.

    FOREIGN ART COLLECTIONS

    The definitions for FOR 100-FOR 131 below correspond to the definitions of
    the abolished subclasses under Class 165 from which these collections were
    formed.  See the Foreign Art Collections schedule for specific
    correspondences.  [Note: The titles and definitions for indented art
    collections include all the details of the one (s) that are hierarchically
    superior.


CLS 165/FOR100
TXT Foreign art collections under  the class definition.


CLS 165/FOR101
TXT Foreign art collections for  (1) heating at one time and cooling at
    another, (2) for both adding heat to and removing it from the same material
    and (3) for separarately heating and cooling distinct external materials.


CLS 165/FOR102
TXT Foreign art collections wherein water vapor is added to or removed
    from air.


CLS 165/FOR103
TXT  Foreign art collections whereby (1) the time in which, or length
    of time taken, to perform an operation is controlled, (2) there is a fixed
    continuous sequential or fixed repetitive operation by means performing a
    treating operation, or (3) there is a means terminating a single operation
    in a position to restart an additional cycle, which cycle is more complex
    than a mere starting or stopping of a single device.


CLS 165/FOR104
TXT Foreign art collections comprising means to sense an operating
    condition  or change of operating  condition and exert a control on heating
    or cooling means or on means handling material acted in or to be acted upon
    by the heating or cooling  means.


CLS 165/FOR105
TXT Foreign art collection  in which the control acts in a system
    operative to both heat and cool a material external of the system.


CLS 165/FOR106
TXT Foreign art collections in which the pressure of a heated and
    cooled enclosure is controlled.


CLS 165/FOR107
TXT Foreign art collections in which there is a control of the supply
    of fresh air.


CLS 165/FOR108
TXT Foreign art collection responsive to the accumulation of congealed
    material to eliminate such material.


CLS 165/FOR109
TXT Foreign art collections with an additional body of heat absorbing
    material spaced therefrom that controllable temporarily stores heat.


CLS 165/FOR110
TXT Foreign art collections controlling the flow of the gas or liquid
    in a gas and liquid contact device.


CLS 165/FOR111
TXT Foreign art collections responding  to water vapor in the air.


CLS 165/FOR112
TXT Foreign art collections  which senses and effects a control of the humidity.


CLS 165/FOR113
TXT Foreign art collections  wherein the interaction of the individual
    controls for a plurality of zones effects a control action on a central
    heating and cooling system.


CLS 165/FOR114
TXT Foreign art collections responsive to any  phase of motion  of a vehicle.


CLS 165/FOR115
TXT Foreign art collections  wherein manually operated means is so
    related to an automatic control as to modify the manner of operation of the
    automatic control.


CLS 165/FOR116
TXT Foreign art collections wherein the manually operated means
    modifies the automatic control in providing for heating or cooling.


CLS 165/FOR117
TXT Foreign art collections comprising a single condition sensor.


CLS 165/FOR118
TXT Foreign art collections comprising selective heating-cooling means.


CLS 165/FOR119
TXT Foreign art collections including sensors that respond to both the
    temperature within and the temperature without an enclosure.


CLS 165/FOR120
TXT Foreign art collections in which the heating effect of a heat pump
    is augmented by a heat source under the control of a condition sensor.


CLS 165/FOR121
TXT Foreign art collections in which a substance is subjected to
    simultaneous heating and cooling and in which either the heater or cooler
    is controlled by a condition sensor.


CLS 165/FOR122
TXT Foreign art collections where the control is of or by pressure.


CLS 165/FOR123
TXT Foreign art collections including pressure or temperature control
    or response.


CLS 165/FOR124
TXT Foreign art collections having a manually actuated device in the
    control structure.


CLS 165/FOR125
TXT Foreign art collections wherein the control is of the verging of
    exchange fluid.


CLS 165/FOR126
TXT Foreign art collections in which a line branches ahead of, and
    recombines after, a heat exchange section.


CLS 165/FOR127
TXT Foreign art collections in which the system is controlled by
    temperature of the recombined stream.


CLS 165/FOR128
TXT Foreign art collections also responsive to pressure.


CLS 165/FOR129
TXT Foreign art collections responsive to pressure.


CLS 165/FOR130
TXT Foreign art collections responsive to one exchanging substance
    controlling the flow of fluid with which it exchanges heat.


CLS 165/FOR131
TXT Foreign art collections responsive to a flowing stream of heat
    exchanging fluid controlling the flow  of the stream.




CLS 166/
TTL WELLS

CLS 166/
TXT OUTLINE OF NOTES



    I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    II.     DEFINITIONS OF TERMS

    III.    RELATIONSHIP TO EARTH BORING

    IV.     RELATIONSHIP TO PUMPS

    V.      WELL SHAFTS AND METHODS AND THE LIKE ELSEWHERE CLASSIFIED

    VI.     DEVICES OR PROCESSES IN WELLS OR THE LIKE ELSEWHERE CLASSIFIED

    VII.    MISCELLANEOUS SEARCH NOTES AND INDEX TO CLASSES

    I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    This class relates to processes or means not otherwise classified
    comprising (1) shafts or deep borings in the earth, commonly known as
    wells, for the extraction of fluids from the earth, (2) shafts or deep
    borings in the earth for inserting a fluid into the interstices of a porous
    earth formation, usually to enable withdrawal of fluid from a producing
    output well, (3) apparatus peculiarly adapted for treating a well or for
    use in or with a well, or (4) processes of using, making, or treating a
    well.

    This class takes combinations of elements or process steps relating to
    wells and going beyond the scope of subcombinations, such as measuring or
    testing means or pumps, classifiable, per se, in other classes.  The class
    also takes subcombinations, such as packers or expanding anchors, peculiar
    to wells. However, the class does not take various intermediate
    combinations, such as devices performing only a measuring or testing
    function or a pumping function, which may include subcombinations, such as
    packers or expanding anchors, as minor perfecting features.

    Treating a well includes various miscellaneous processes or apparatus
    relating to wells; typically, gravel layer forming, cementing, washing or
    acidizing.

    II.     DEFINITIONS OF TERMS

    CASING

    A pipe which lines all or a portion of the wall of a well.  The casing may
    be adjacent the wall of the well for only a part of its length and lie
    within another casing section for the remainder of its length.  The casing
    usually is of metal and is used with cement between it and the well wall.
    The casing is intended to form the permanent lining of the well.

    CENTRAL CHAMBER

    A generic term covering both a central conduit, as defined below, and a
    receptacle for bodily transport of fluid material from inside the well to
    the top of the well or bodily transport of material from the top of the
    well for discharge at a point in the well.  In a well device the central
    chamber is considered to be the primary locus from which or to which fluid
    is moved.  For example, the "central chamber" in a tester is the sample
    chamber receiving the test fluid, whether this be a receptacle or a tubing,
    while the "central chamber" in a liquid discharging washer is the primary
    place from which liquid flows, whether this be a tubing or a receptacle.

    CENTRAL CONDUIT

    Any passage forming conduit which extends from the top of the well into the
    well and is positioned within another conduit.  The central conduit may be,
    for example, a string of tubing positioned within another tubing or within
    the casing, or it may be a string of casing positioned within the well bore.

    FLUID

    A material capable of flowing.  It includes gases, liquids, plastics, and
    solids which can be handled in the manner of a liquid.

    LINER

    A column of casing having screen forming perforations which does not extend
    to the top of the well and which is usually the lowest column of casing in
    the well.  The liner is placed in position by lowering it from the top of
    the well through the casing sections already placed in well.  The
    perforations may be formed before the liner is run into the well or after.
    The liner is sometimes surrounded by a perforated section of casing, the
    liner then becoming a secondary lining section of the well.

    TUBING

    A pipe for conducting fluids which extends from the top of the well to some
    point below and lies within the casing or is used without a casing as a
    temporary structure.

    WELL CONDUIT

    Either (1) a well tubing, (2) a well casing, or (3) the earth or
    cementitious wall of the well.

    III.    RELATIONSHIP TO CLASS 175, BORING OR PENETRATING THE EARTH

    The relationship of Class 166 with boring or penetrating the earth,
    classified in Class 175, is close both for historical and functional
    reasons.  The lines between Class 166 and Class 175 are set forth in the
    class definition of the latter class with the exception of the below noted
    reference to cementing.  While Class 166 is generic to processes including
    earth boring or penetrating steps no general subclass has been provided in
    Class 166 for combinations with earth boring since earth boring of some
    kind is always associated with well making and the relationships expressed
    in the claims of patents were thought to be better classified on other
    bases in this class, see Class 175 subclasses 57+ and the search there
    noted for earth boring processes, per se.

    Generally in relation to apparatus Class 175 is more comprehensive than
    Class 166 and takes combinations of Class 175 and Class 166 subject matter.
     Class 166 however, takes some miscellaneous subcombinations which may be
    disclosed as used only in drilling operations but which are in fact of
    general utility in wells, particularly when there is no suitable subclass
    provided in Class 175 and a suitable subclass is provided in Class 166.

    Processes of cementing, plugging or consolidating as defined in Class 166
    subclass 21 are distinguished from drilling with fluid processes
    classifiable in Class 175 subclasses 65+ by the interruption of the actual
    earth cutting operation of the drilling process.  Thus a process which
    purports to be a drilling process but which includes in its disclosure some
    indication that the actual earth cutting has stopped to permit cementing,
    such as a statement that "drilling is resumed" or that "after the cement
    has set", will be considered a cementing process for Class 166.  The fact
    that a drilling tool stem or shaft is disclosed as the means for delivering
    the cementing materials below ground or a disclosure that drilling mud or
    drilling fluid is used as a carrier for or a constituent of the cementing
    material will not preclude classification in Class 166. Such processes in
    which drilling is interrupted to permit cementing are classifiable in Class
    166 even if the cementing step is only normally or inferentially claimed.
    See, however (1) Note in Class 166, subclass 21.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 1 for processes or
    apparatus for boring including seismic shock generation; subclasses 2+ for
    processes or apparatus for boring by below ground explosion, and including
    a device for firing a bullet or exploding a shaped charge from an
    inaccessible bore to penetrate the formation, to enlarge the bore, or form
    a bore, and including such device even when limited by disclosure to merely
    perforating or cutting a casing or other wall member in the bore if the
    device inherently causes penetration of the formation; subclasses 11+ for
    processes or apparatus for boring by directly applying heat to fluidize or
    comminute the earth; especially subclass 12 for combustion of the earth
    formation itself and subclass 16 for electrically produced heat; subclass
    17 for processes or apparatus including heating or cooling either within
    the bore or of the drilling fluid (merely using drilling fluid to cool or
    heat is not included); subclasses 40+ for processes or apparatus for boring
    including signaling, indicating, testing or measuring and especially
    subclass 45 for tool direction or inclination measuring or indicating
    within the bore; subclasses 57+ for earth boring processes, per se, and
    especially subclass 59 for processes of taking samples of solid earth
    formation including (1) retaining fluid in the solid sample or (2) taking a
    separate fluid sample (processes of taking a fluid sample only are in Class
    166, subclass 3); subclass 77 for side wall tools fed laterally of an
    existing bore hole (fluid conducting lateral probes sealed to the well wall
    are in Class 166, subclass 100); subclasses 79+ for tool shafts which are
    advanced relative to a guide (e.g., whipstock) insertable in a well bore to
    change the direction of advance (means for guiding an insertable element
    laterally of the well axis, e.g., whipstock, per se, is in Class 166,
    subclasses 117.5+); subclass 84 for boring apparatus with an above ground
    cleaner therefor; subclasses 98+ for a below ground tool drive motor with
    an expansible anchor; subclasses 207+ for boring apparatus with above
    ground means for handling drilling fluid or cuttings, especially subclasses
    209+ in which the means engages the bore entrance; subclass 230 for boring
    apparatus including an expanding anchor; subclasses 293+ for below ground
    hammer or impact devices claimed, per se, (well devices combined with a jar
    for releasing a stuck part are in Class 166, appropriate subclasses and
    subclass 178 in particular); subclass 314 for boring apparatus combined
    with a well type screen; and subclass 402 for an earth cutting casing shoe
    type bit.



    IV.     RELATIONSHIP TO PUMPS

    The general line between Class 417, Pumps and Class 166 is that if subject
    matter relating to a feature peculiar to a well is claimed in combination
    with Class 417 subject matter, classification is in Class 166.  The
    following categories of subject matter more specifically delineate this
    line.

    A.      Class 166 Subject Matter Classifiable With Class 417 Subject Matter
    in Class 417.

    (1)     Combinations of certain subcombinations, which if claimed, per se,
    are classifiable in Class 166, those with Class 417 subject matter are
    classifiable in Class 417.  A recitation of a well broadly, or with certain
    well features will not exclude a patent from Class 417. The following are
    examples of such features which would be classifiable in Class 417:

    (a)     a well tubing or conduit

    (b)     structure in well tube to support a Class 417 device

    (c)     a packer or anchor for sealing a Class 417 device in tube

    (d)     a below ground check valve in pump inlet or outlet

    (e)     a valve which drains Class 417 device

    (2)     In examples (d) and (e) it should be noted that a broadly recited
    pump or pump barrel with an anchor, packer or drain valve is classifiable
    in Class 166 in appropriate anchor, packer or valve subclasses.

    B.      Class 417 Device Combined With Below Ground Separator or Screen

    (1)     A well screen, as defined in Class 166, subclass 227, generally
    contacts the earth wall of the well bore as a continuation of a casing. A
    solids separator or inlet screen for a pump tube in a well is generally
    disposed inside the casing and well screen.  A well type screen
    specifically described as such and claimed in combination with a pump as
    more than an opening or a passage for fluid is classifiable in Class 166.
    A gas separator or anchor disclosed as in a well, even though claimed in
    combination with a Class 417 device is classifiable in Class 166 (see
    subclasses 105.5+), except as noted in section D below.  Further, a
    sediment trap or deflector (e.g., sand trap) disclosed as in a well is also
    classified in Class 166 (see subclasses 105.1+) even though claimed in
    combination with a pump.

    C.      Above Ground Well Structure Combined With Class 417 Device

    (1)     Generally the combination of a Class 417 device, whether above or
    below ground, with above ground well apparatus for handling pumped fluid or
    supporting a pump driving means is classifiable in Class 417. Note,
    however, that features which relate the well structure to the earth, such
    as placing pipes below the frost line or embedded foundation which also
    supports well casing will cause classification in Class 166.

    D.      Below Ground Fluid Entrainment Type Pumps and Flowing Wells

    (1)     Class 417 will take an aerating column, jet, gas lift or other
    entrainment type pump, per se, as defined in Class 417, subclasses 63+.

    (2)     Class 166 will take Class 417 device as set forth in paragraph (1)
    when the solely disclosed and claimed means for supplying all the motive
    fluid to the device is located in the well and collects the motive fluid by
    trapping or separating well fluid in the well (e.g., gas anchor, packer
    with gas passage to central conduit etc.).

    (3)     Class 417 will take subject matter similar to that in paragraph (2)
    above when there is a specific description of means to supply additional
    motive fluid from the earth surface or a point outside the well.  This
    classification prevails even though the additional motive fluid may have
    been originally obtained from the same well.  Obviously combinations of
    these features with other well features may cause classification in Class
    166.

    E.      Summary of Well Feature

    (1)     The following features, claimed in combination with a Class 417
    device, are representative of the type of subject matter in general which
    will cause classification in Class 166:

    (a)     Any specific relationship of the Class 417 device or other fluid
    conducting structure to the earth or earth formations as:

    (1)     Plural pumps in plural wells

    (2)     Single pump connected to a plurality of wells

    (3)     Inlets from a plurality of earth formations

    (4)     Location of parts in relation to the frost line in earth

    (5)     Lateral conduit below ground

    (6)     Earth contacting well screen

    (7)     Earth embedded support for tubing or casing



    (b)     Any specific relationship to well operation or structure, such as:

    (1)     Process steps in addition to installation, removal or operation of
    a pump

    (2)     Control of pump or pumped fluid in response to a condition sensed
    in a well

    (3)     Control or pump or pumped fluid in relation to operation of another
    device in the well, other than mere flow check valves

    (4)     Above ground separation of fluids leaving well for purposes other
    than the production or removal of pump operating or motive fluid

    (5)     Apparatus, not forming a part of the pump itself, for handling or
    manipulating pump parts

    (6)     Passages for pumped fluid specifically described as directing the
    fluid to wash, clean or otherwise treat the well

    (7)     Sediment traps or deflectors

    (8)     Gas separators (but see Section D (3) above)

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, for means for pumping liquid out of wells, especially
    subclasses 56+, for drilled well free piston type pumps, subclasses 86 and
    118+, for pneumatic displacement pumps, subclasses 90+, and 108+, for
    aerated column pumps, subclass 358, for a pump-motor unit raised in a well
    conduit by pressure fluid applied below the unit, subclass 434, for pumps
    with a separate port or noncyclic valve for draining a pump portion,
    subclasses 448+, for well pumps removable as a unit by drive rod
    manipulation and subclasses 451+, for well removable with the pumping
    member.



    V.      WELL SHAFTS AND METHODS AND THE LIKE ELSEWHERE CLASSIFIED

    Well shafts or shafts sunk in the earth and structurally similar to well
    shafts, and methods of operating wells are not all classified in Class 166.

    The classes listed below each provide for shaft structures and methods
    which are equivalent or very similar to those found in Class 166.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, subclass 232 for processes of gas
    sampling involving the use of sorbents or chemical treatments which may
    include a shaft sunk in the ground to collect gas for analysis.

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 54+ for dredgers.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 124+ for
    vermin destroying shafts sunk in the earth.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 19+, 169.1+, 192+,
    223.1, 245+, and 261 for a masonry construction surrounding an open space
    which may form a cistern or well wherein no feature peculiar to well
    operation, e.g., screens, pumps, driving points, shoes, etc., is defined.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 45+ for subject matter, including wells,
    for the use and handling of liquefied gas.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 151.01+ for subject matter
    relating to bore hole studies and subclasses 863+ for soil gas sampling
    devices.

    111,    Planting, subclasses 118+ for devices for placing fluids below the
    surface of the earth without any expectation of recovering them and
    subclasses 89+ for dibbles.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 272+ for fire hydrants and subclasses
    363+ for ground supporting enclosures.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 37+ for flow restrictors or
    pipes with flow restrictors; and subclasses 100-178 for conduit structure
    of general utility, including conduits disclosed only for use as well
    casings or tubings.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 45 for a geographically installed heat
    exchanger that may comprise a well.  Heat exchange apparatus comprising
    part of a well apparatus for producing or treating a well would be
    classified in Class 166.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, appropriate subclasses for joints between
    pipes, including tubing and casing sections of general utility.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, appropriate
    subclass for recovering hard, solid, valuable materials from the earth and
    for utilizing a tunnel (a horizontal earth passage in which a human works)
    to recover valuable fluid material from the earth.  Wells and well
    processes for extracting fluid from the earth, including petroliferous
    material such as freely flowing oil, oil adhered to the formation which
    must be recovered by secondary methods, asphalts and tars are classified in
    Class 166. Furthermore, wells and well processes for recovering
    hydrocarbons from material such as shale by treating the material in situ
    to remove only liquid or gas, or for treating or converting solid
    hydrocarbons such as coal or lignite in situ for recovery solely as a
    liquid or gas are classified in Class 166.  However, wells and well
    processes for treating or comminuting solid materials other than
    hydrocarbons (e.g., sulfur and salt) for recovery in the liquid or gaseous
    state are classified in Class 299.  Likewise, wells and well processes for
    recovering valuable solid material including hydrocarbons such as coal, oil
    shale or oil sand, where any of the valuable material is removed from the
    well in the solid state, are classified in Class 299.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 8+ for a pressurized
    caisson; subclasses 36+ for drainage systems comprising shafts sunk in the
    earth for removing surplus water from the soil; subclasses 53+ for
    underground storage of fluids; subclass 133 for methods and structure
    relating to shafts of general utility sunk into the earth, and for methods
    and apparatus for the sinking of shafts, including well shafts, by means of
    a caisson or other similar means for excavating earth beneath a shaft being
    sunk; subclass 249 for methods and structure relating to the sinking of a
    caisson or hollow shaft which is subsequently filled to form a pile or
    pier; and subclass 272 for temporary shoring means.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 50+ for apparatus for gas sampling
    involving use of sorbents or chemical treatments which may include a shaft
    sunk in the ground to collect gas for analysis.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, for processes for
    gas sampling involving the use of sorbents or chemical treatments which may
    include a shaft sunk in the ground to collect samples.



    VI.     DEVICES OR PROCESSES IN WELLS OR THE LIKE ELSEWHERE CLASSIFIED

    Class 166 provides for various well treating and flow controlling devices
    to be inserted into a well below the ground level, but other classes also
    provide for similar devices.  In cases of doubtful classification the fact
    that a device is disclosed only for use below ground in a well should
    incline classification towards Class 166.

    Class 166 provides for example, for apparatus and methods for fluid
    sampling in a well for cementing, washing, or mechanically cleaning a well,
    acidizing or otherwise treating a formation, packing, plugging, heating,
    cooling, dissolving paraffin, separating materials in a well, (including
    liquids from liquids, gases from liquids and solids from liquids),
    graveling or otherwise forming strainers in a well, and anchoring devices
    in a well.

    Other classes which take devices inserted in a well or analogous devices
    and processes relating to such devices are indicated below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, for apparatus designed
    or adapted for cleaning for other than well use subclasses 104.05+ for
    pipe, tube, or conduit cleaner, subclass 249.1 for a brush or broom flue
    cleaning implement or subclasses 249.2+ for a scraper-type cleaning
    implement.

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, subclass 232 for gas analyzing
    process for use in a gas well, involving the use of sorbents.

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 92+ for pipe cutting implements.

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, appropriate subclasses, for instruments,
    per se, for measuring distances, angles, and the like in a well, subclasses
    302 and 304+, for borehole direction or inclination sensing and indicating.

    37,     Excavating, subclass 182 and subclasses 183+ for orange peel and
    clamshell buckets, which may be inserted in a well.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses, especially
    subclasses 152.01+ for instruments, per se, (including subcombination means
    such as packers or anchors for perfecting the measuring or Testing
    Function) for bore hole studies and subclasses 863+ for fluid samplers of
    general utility.  Class 166 takes devices for taking a sample of fluid from
    a potential producing horizon of a well, but such sampling combined with
    measuring or testing or bore hole study is in Class 73.  Devices or methods
    for sampling gas from the soil by means sunk into the ground to a point not
    far from the surface of the ground are in Class 73, subclasses 863+.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 172+ for pistons, and
    particularly subclass 180, for an elongated tubular well type plunger, and
    subclasses 240+ for a piston having the side wall portion thereof provided
    with a peripheral axially extending flexible lip. A piston which is fluid
    driven for treating a well (e.g., for cementing) is classified in Class
    166, subclasses 153+.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 301+ for apparatus and
    methods for causing an explosion in a well to break up a formation, clean a
    bore, or perform other functions involving only an explosion.

    137,    Fluid Handling, appropriate subclasses for fluid handling devices
    of general application and not having a specific location in a well or
    other specific relationship to a well, especially subclasses 67+ for such
    devices with destructible or deformable element control other than valves
    or closures in wells destructible by drilling, subclass 155 for gas lift
    valves for wells and subclass 515 for direct response valves in couplings
    for co-axial conduits.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 89+ for closures and plugs
    other than plugs which are inserted into a prepositioned well conduit.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for process and apparatus for laminating in general
    and see especially subclasses 293+ and 423+ for inserting a core within a
    tube combined with a laminating step.  A process of lining a well or
    conduit in a well is classified in Class 166.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, appropriate subclasses, for
    processes and apparatus for boring or penetrating the earth, see
    particularly section III above and the search notes thereunder.

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 102+, for mechanical acoustical devices
    inserted in wells.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 459+ for filters and
    strainers which may be used in a well or as a pump intake.  See Class 166,
    subclass 227 for the line between Classes 166 and 210.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 277+ for electric heaters, per se, for
    lowering into a well.  The combination of a heater and well structure is in
    Class 166.  The well structure, for example, may be no more than a tubing
    for flowing fluid from or into the well.

    220,    Receptacles, for receptacles of general utility.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 356+ and the subclasses there noted for
    dipping type dispensers not used in a well.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 83+ for ray energy detection or
    measurement in wells.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, appropriate subclasses for valves and
    valve actuators of general application and not having a specific location
    in a well or other specific relationship to a well, especially subclass 76
    for impact actuated valves, subclasses 142+ for a flow path with a single
    valve, and subclasses 341+ for valves in which the valve actuator is the
    valve casing or a continuation thereof.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, subclasses 322+ for a seal combined
    with enough well apparatus structure to perform a sealing function (e.g.,
    tubular member supporting an annular seal, ancillary means to cause the
    annular seal to function, surrounding conduit, etc.) but excludes a seal
    combined with well apparatus having a distinct feature (e.g.; above ground
    apparatus preventing upward or downward movement of an inner pipe, rod or
    cable part descending into a well casing or tubing; above ground apparatus
    sealing the annular space between a broadly recited casing supported
    enclosure and an inner member; lateral port or valve on the tubular member
    above or below the packing; structural detail of the tubular member not
    contributing to the sealing function; etc.) other than sealing.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 68.22+ for
    hoist buckets to be inserted into a well, and subclasses 65.5 and 86.1+ for
    grappling devices for withdrawing loose or stuck objects from a well.
    Grapples for Class 294 may include means for washing dirt away from the
    object to be grappled.  Processes for withdrawing loose or stuck objects
    from a well involving the use of grappling devices are classified in
    appropriate subclasses in Class 166.  The line between hoisting buckets or
    grapples for Class 294 and receptacles for Class 166 is set forth in Class
    166, subclasses 99 and 162.  The line between grapples for Class 294 and
    expansible anchors for Class 166 is set forth in Class 166, subclass 206.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 323+ for subject
    matter relating to the determination of an electrical characteristic of the
    sub-surface of the earth, and involving devices in wells.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 853.1+ for telemetering in
    wells.

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), appropriate subclasses for radar systems in wells.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 25+ for seismic well logging; subclasses 81+ for acoustic
    wellbore telemetering; and subclass 86 for acoustic borehole testing.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 53+ for apparatus and
    processes involving means for creating a chamber in the earth for storing
    fluid, operated solely from above the surface of the ground; subclasses
    232+ for processes and apparatus for installing piles in the earth,
    especially subclasses 233+ for casting a pile of hardenable material in
    situ; subclass 234 combined with heating, cooling, or explosion; and
    subclasses 240+ combined with withdrawal of a form structure subsequent to
    placing the fluent material.

    417,    Pumps, appropriate subclasses for pumps inserted in a well.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, for rotary expansible chamber
    devices, per se.  The line between Classes 166 and 418 is the same as that
    set forth between Classes 166 and 417 for which see section IV of the main
    class definition to Class 166.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 83+ for gas analyzing apparatus for
    use in a well, involving the use of sorbents.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 230+ for processes of Coating the
    interior of hollow articles in general.

    507,    Earth Boring, Well Treating, and Oil Field Chemistry, for processes
    involving no more than placing specific compounds or compositions in a well
    using insignificant manipulative steps.  See Class 166, subclass 300, for a
    detailed discussion.



    VII.    MISCELLANEOUS SEARCH NOTES AND INDEX TO CLASSES

    After each class listed below, the notation "See-----" refers to the
    sections of the class definition, and the subclasses of Class 166 in which
    there are references to the class involved.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning.  See Class 166, section
    VI and subclasses 75.1, 82.1, 86.1, 88.1, 162, 170, and 311.

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes.  See Class 166, sections V and VI
    and subclasses 250.1, 264 and 265.

    29,     Metal Working, appropriate subclasses for processes or apparatus
    for assembling or disassembling well structures above ground, or in which
    there is no special relationship with the well.  See Class 166, subclasses
    81 and 315.

    30,     Cutlery.  See Class 166, subclasses 54.5, 55, 55.6, and 55.7.

    33,     Geometrical Instruments.  See Class 166, section VI and subclasses
    64, 66, 113, and 250.1.

    37,     Excavating.  See Class 166, sections V, VI and subclass 162.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying.  See Class 166, section V
    and subclass 54.5.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings). See Class 166, section V and
    subclasses 285 and 315.

    62,     Refrigeration.  See Class 166, section V and subclass 265.

    72,     Metal Deforming.  See Class 166, subclasses 55 and 297.

    73,     Measuring and Testing.  See Class 166, section VI and subclasses
    107, 113, 162, 250.1, and 264.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism.  See Class 166, subclass 237.

    81,     Tools.  See Class 166, subclasses 77.51, 117.7 and 315.

    83,     Cutting.  See Class 166, subclasses 55, 297 and 298.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices.  See Class 166, section VI, and
    subclasses 153, 170, 177, 179, and 202.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 241+ for degasification of
    liquid and other appropriate subclasses for processes to be used near oil
    or gas wells to separate gas from other constituents discharged from the
    well.  Claims to these processes may include a nominal recitation of the
    well process.  However, a detailed recitation of the well process or a
    recitation of an input well receiving material from the separator indicates
    classification in Class 166.  See Class 166, subclass 265.

    96,     Gas Separation: Apparatus, subclasses 155+ for degasifying means
    for liquid and other appropriate subclasses for apparatus to be used near
    oil or gas wells to separate gas from other constituents discharged from
    the well.  Claims to this apparatus may include a nominal recitation of the
    well.  However, a detailed recitation of the well or a recitation of an
    input well receiving material from the separator indicates classification
    in Class 166.  See Class 166, subclass 265.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives. See Class 166, section VI and subclasses
    54.5, 55, 63, 135, 162, 177.5, 179, 192, 241.1+, 299, 308, and 311.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic.  See Class 166, subclasses 285
    and 292.

    111,    Planting.  See Class 166, section V.

    114,    Ships.  See Class 166, subclasses 54.5 and 66.5.

    118,    Coating Apparatus.  See Class 166, section VI and subclass 285.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces.  See Class 166, subclasses 57 and 58.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids.  See Class 166, section VI
    and subclass 311.

    137,    Fluid Handling.  See Class 166, sections V and VI and subclasses
    54, 55, 72, 88.5, 95.1, 97.1, 105, 165, 205, 227, 244, 277, 311, 314, 316,
    and 327.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits.  See Class 166, sections V and VI and
    subclasses 75.1, 91.1, 135, 179, 192, 227, 242, and 316.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture.  See Class
    166, section VI and subclass 285 and 315.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, subclasses 2+ for processes for extinguishing
    or preventing well fires, and also patents for apparatus for extinguishing
    or preventing fires claiming no more of the well than cooperates with the
    fire extinguishing or preventing means and also claiming some fire
    extinguishing or prevention feature beyond a mere cap or casing head, means
    for diverting flow or means for inserting a fluid into the well.  See Class
    166, subclass 75.1.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting.  See Class 166, subclass 178.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth.  See Class 166, sections III and
    VI and subclasses 50, 55, 55.3, 55.4, 55.8, 57, 60, 63, 66, 66.5, 75.1,
    77.1, 77.51, 82.1, 85.1, 99, 100, 105, 107, 113, 117.5, 117.6, 120, 157,
    162, 170, 174, 177.6, 178, 206, 212, 222, 227, 239, 241, 242.8, 250.1,
    254.1-256, 264, 272.1, 285, 292, 296- 302, 305, 307, 308, 312, 315, and 316.

    181,    Acoustics.  See Class 166, section VI and subclass 250.1.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control.  See Class 166, subclass 237.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus.  See Class 166, subclass 265.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes Separatory.  See Class 166, subclass 77.1.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products. See Class 166, subclass 265.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 294+ for diverse
    distinct separators, subclasses 322+ for plural distinct separators,
    subclasses 348+ for a filter, and subclasses 513+ for a gravitational
    separator.  See Class 166, section VI and subclasses 162, 171, 205, 227,
    228, and 265.

    219,    Electric Heating.  See Class 166, section VI and subclasses 60 and
    315.

    220,    Receptacles.  See Class 166, section VI and subclasses 75.1, 92.1,
    93.1, 162, and 192.

    222,    Dispensing.  See Class 166, section VI and subclass 162.

    235,    Registers.  See Class 166, subclasses 64 and 250.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing.  See Class 166, subclass
    222.

    250,    Radiant Energy.  See Class 166, section VI and subclasses 66 and
    250.1.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 1.1+ for valve type blowout
    preventers, per se, on well casing heads.  See Class 166, section VI, and
    subclasses 75.1, 86.1, 88.1, 91.1, 95.1, 97.1, and 316.

    252,    Compositions.  See Class 166, section VI and subclasses 244, 268,
    285, 292, 304, 305, 307, 310, and 312.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing and Pulling Force.
    See Class 166, subclass 77.1.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds.  See Class 166, subclass 285.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    see Class 166, subclass 285.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, see Class 166, section VI and
    subclasses 82.1, 84.1, 86.1, 88.1, 179, 187 and 202.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings.  See Class 166, section V and subclasses
    75.1, 81.1, 84.1, 86.1, 88.1, 168, 179, 206, 242.3, and 315.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements.  See Class 166, section
    VI and subclasses 55, 85.1, 98, 99, 117.7, 162, 166, 178, 206, 217, 226,
    and 301.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material.  See Class 166,
    section V and subclasses 50, 177.5, 179, 206, 249, 268, 272.1, 303, 305,
    308, and 315.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing. See Class 166, section VI and
    subclasses 66 and 250.1.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical.  See Class 166, section VI and
    subclasses 66 and 250.1.

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation).  See Class 166, section VI and subclasses 66 and
    250.1.

    346,    Recorders.  See Class 166, subclass 250.1.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 422 for
    computations in the application of well logging, and subclass 804 for the
    mathematical simulation of a fluid well.

    366,    Agitating, see Class 166, subclass 177.6.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering.  See Class 166, sections V and VI
    and subclasses 50, 77.1, 242.9, 285, 286, 287, 292, 302, and 315.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, see Class 166,
    subclass 55.

    417,    Pumps.  See Class 166, sections IV and VI, and subclasses 57, 63,
    75.1, 106, 112, 142, 170, 174, 177.7, 179, 188, 202, and 206.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices. See Class 166, section VI.


CLS 166/50
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising a main vertical shaft and one
    or more conduits extending outwardly transversely into the formation for
    collecting fluid therefrom or inserting fluid thereinto.

    (1)     Note.  The transversely extending conduits of this subclass
    comprise relatively long tubes.  See subclass 100 for a short probing
    member carried by a central tube and extending transversely into the earth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 61 and 62 for processes
    of boring (1) curved or re-directed bores or (2) horizontal bores,
    respectively.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclass 19 for
    a mining plan or layout which may comprise lateral tunnels or drifts large
    enough for a person to work in extending outwardly from a vertical shaft.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 36+ for wells with
    lateral conduits for collecting surplus water from the soil.


CLS 166/51
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising means specially adapted for
    use in the operation of placing a mass of filter material, e.g., gravel, in
    final position in the well.

    (1)     Note.  Means for merely lowering a preformed screen or bed of
    filter material into the well is not included. Such filter beds may have
    means aiding to form them above ground or a contiguous reservoir for filter
    material which is intended to fall down to replenish the main filter bed.
    Also means for merely supporting filter material placed into the well are
    not included.  See subclass 228 for all these devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228,    for screens comprising filter material.

    278,    for processes of placing a bed of filter material.


CLS 166/52
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising a plurality of wells.

    (1)     Note.  One or more of the wells may be a shaft for placing fluid in
    a porous earth strata.

    (2)     Note.  Also included are wells, such as drive points, which may be
    connected below ground with a single shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     for a well comprising a single vertical shaft and plural laterally
    extending fluid collecting or discharging conduits.

    245,    for processes involving specific patterns of plural well.

    251.1   and 256+, for processes involving plural wells and in situ
    combustion.

    252     and 268+, for processes involving injection and producing wells.

    263,    for processes involving cyclic operation of plural wells.


CLS 166/53
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising means to sense a condition
    which may or may not be present or may occur spasmodically, and cause
    operation of a control device, without the intervention of a human
    operator, (e.g., liquid level or specific gravity responsive devices,
    temperature responsive devices or self-correlating devices).

    (1)     Note.  For a definition of self-correlating see Class 137, Fluid
    Handling, subclasses 87.01+.

    (2)     Note.  Control devices for signals or indicators and control
    devices comprising valves or closures across a passage operated to control
    fluid flowing in the passage by means sensing the pressure or velocity of
    the fluid flowing in said passage and control devices operated in response
    to means sensing inertia, gravity, time, the bottom of the well, an
    obstruction in the well, a break, projection, cavity or joint in a well are
    not considered automatically operated in this class and are classified on
    other features.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64+,    for well devices with means indicating time or distance or with
    counting means or temperature responsive means, the temperature responsive
    means sensing temperature as part of an operating cycle or by insertion
    into a zone of predetermined temperature which causes a predetermined
    response.

    66,     for well devices with electrical indicating means.

    113,    for well devices with mechanical indicating means.

    132,    for well devices comprising packers or plugs with expanding anchors
    and having means to sense the end of a conduit.

    206+,   and the subclasses there noted for anchor devices caused to be set
    by a means sensing a cavity, joint or break in a wall or caused to be set
    by an inertia or gravity sensing means, especially subclasses 209+ for
    anchors caused to be set by inertia or gravity sensing means and subclasses
    214+ for anchors caused to be set by means sensing a cavity joint or break
    in a well wall.

    226,    and the subclasses there noted for valves, closures or changeable
    restrictors caused to be operated by means sensing the well bottom or an
    obstruction or projection in the well.


CLS 166/54
TXT Devices under subclass 53 comprising valves controlled by a float
    responsive to the change in level or specific gravity of a fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 409+ for float controlled valves, per se.


CLS 166/54.1
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising a well having plural earth
    formations which are isolated from each other so that fluid is separately
    obtainable therefrom and in which pumping means, comprising one or more
    individual pumps, is operatively associated to pump from each formation for
    separate delivery of the fluids from the well.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     for plural wells.


CLS 166/54.5
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising means for severing a flexible
    strand such as a cable, rope or the like, the severing means being located
    in a well below ground level when performing the severing operation.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note under subclass 75.1 for the meaning of ground
    level as used in this definition.

    (2)     Note.  The cable or rope may be used to suspend a tool, such as an
    earth boring bit or the like, and the nominal recitation of a tool by name
    will not preclude classification in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55+,    for means perforating, weakening, bending or separating pipe at any
    point in a well.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 92+, and the search there noted, for pipe or
    rod cutters of general utility.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 17.2 for devices
    for cutting a fishing line near the hook or for otherwise releasing the
    hook or other fishing element.

    114,    Ships, subclasses 221+ for ship working implements including
    devices for cutting a ship's cable when the anchor is caught or for other
    reasons.


CLS 166/54.6
TXT Devices under subclass 54.5 comprising a means for causing the operation of
    the severing means which requires contact of some part of the device with a
    stationary object in the well for its operation, the stationary object
    being a member which is held in position in the well by the flexible strand
    which is to be severed.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the devices found in the subclasses noted in the
    Search Class Notes of subclass 54.5 are of this type.


CLS 166/55
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising means for perforating,
    weakening, bending or separating the side wall of a well pipe at a location
    in the pipe which has not been specially preconditioned for such action.

    (1)     Note.  A means for merely indicating the location in a pipe at
    which an operation such as cutting is to be performed is not considered a
    special preconditioning of the pipe.

    (2)     Note.  The earth wall of the well is not considered a "pipe".

    (3)     Note.  A mere pipe coupling sleeve is not a specially
    preconditioned location.

    (4)     Note.  A device to fire a bullet or explode a shaped charge to
    perforate a casing or other wall member in a bore is classified in Class
    175, even though there is no disclosure that penetration of the earth
    occurs.

    (5)     Note.  If the device functions above ground level some significant
    limitation to the well art should be present for classification under this
    definition, but if the device functions below ground level a disclosure
    line prevails, except where there is a body of art in other classes
    relating to such devices used in a well.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     for devices involving explosive apparatus similar to that found in
    subclass 55 but used for penetrating only the formation rather than a pipe
    or a pipe and the formation.

    297+,   for processes for perforating, weakening, bending or separating
    pipe at an unprepared point.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 92+ for pipe and rod cutters not disclosed as
    for use in a wall.

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 632+, for one shot explosion actuated
    expansible chamber type motors.

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclass for a pipe deforming means of
    general utility, including a pipe deforming means described as functioning
    in a well and particularly subclasses 112+ for a tool which orbits or
    rotates as it operates and subclass 391 for a tool having motion in a fixed
    path to deform fixed material.

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses, for method and apparatus for
    cutting or punching holes in a tubular workpiece.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 306+ for well torpedoes for
    breaking up formation, generating seismic sounds or cleaning the bore.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 317+, for fluid handling devices of
    general application including means for tapping, boring or drilling a
    container or main under pressure.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 2+ for a device for
    firing a bullet or exploding a shaped charge from an inaccessible bore to
    penetrate the formation and including such a device even when limited by
    disclosure to merely perforating or cutting a casing or other wall member
    in the bore, subclasses 249+ for earth boring apparatus with a core
    retaining or severing means which is movable relative to a bit and
    subclasses 263+ for an earth boring cutter element which is laterally
    shifted below ground.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 86.1+ for
    means for separating a pipe in a well by a mere grappling action.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, appropriate
    subclasses, for general utility cutting in the manner of that class.


CLS 166/55.1
TXT Devices under subclass 55 including a means for performing a function below
    ground level unlike and other than a function which directly contributes to
    the use of the device as a perforating, weakening, bending or separating
    device.

    (1)     Note.  The means for performing an unlike function comprise, for
    example, means to collect a fluid sample, insert an orifice bushing in a
    pipe wall, insert treating fluid or cement into the well or grapple or
    otherwise remove an object from the well (unless the grappling or removing
    means also performs a function which is necessary to the perforating,
    weakening, bending or separating operation, such as grappling in order to
    activate cutting means, such grappling means being found in the following
    subclasses indented under subclass 55).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 2+ for a device which
    fires a bullet or explodes a shaped charge for perforating a wall member in
    a bore which device inherently causes penetration of the formation,
    especially subclass 4.51 for such device which has a position indicating or
    orienting means and subclass 4.52 for such device which has a wall engaging
    packer or anchor.  In accordance with the line between Classes 166 and 175,
    as set forth in the class definition of Class 175, section III, and the
    definition of Class 175, subclass 2, a claim to an apparatus comprising a
    gun or shaped charge perforating means disclosed as inherently functioning
    to penetrate the earth is classifiable in Class 175, subclasses 2+ even if
    it also recites a disparate well feature.  Thus, apparatus patents of this
    type are classified as originals in Class 175 and cross-referenced to Class
    166, subclass 55.1 if appropriate while patents of this type with method
    claims are classified as originals in Class 166, subclass 35 and
    cross-referenced to a suitable apparatus subclass if appropriate.


CLS 166/55.2
TXT Devices under subclass 55 comprising a mechanical tool for forming an
    aperture or fissure in the wall of the pipe.

    (1)     Note.  An aperture or fissure formed merely by direct application
    of heat or fluid pressure is not considered an aperture formed within this
    subclass definition.


CLS 166/55.3
TXT Devices under subclass 55.2 in which the tool is forced or guided into
    engagement with the wall of the well pipe by means comprising a member
    having an angular or curvilinear surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117.5+, for means for guiding an insertable element laterally of the well
    axis (e.g., whipstocks).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 79+ for earth boring
    apparatus in which the tool shaft is advanced relative to a guide
    insertable in an inaccessible hole (e.g., well bore) to change the
    direction of advance.


CLS 166/55.6
TXT Devices under subclass 55 in which a cutting tool is revolved around the
    periphery of the well pipe and in contact therewith during the cutting
    operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 94+ for cutters, not disclosed as for use in a
    well, in which the cutting element is rotated about the exterior of a tube.


CLS 166/55.7
TXT Devices under subclass 55.6 in which the cutting tool is located inside the
    pipe and advances outwardly for cutting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 103+ for cutters, not disclosed for use in a
    well, in which the cutting element is rotated internally of a pipe.


CLS 166/55.8
TXT Devices under subclass 55.7 in which a gaseous or liquid medium under
    pressure is used to apply a radial force to the tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 267+ and the search
    there noted, for laterally shiftable earth cutting elements or other
    elements movable by fluid pressure.


CLS 166/56
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising a well screen as defined in
    subclass 227 combined with a pipe located outside of the screen for
    handling fluid to clean the screen or the bed of earth or filter material
    outside of the screen.

    (1)     Note.  The pipe may be located inside of an outer screen member so
    long as it is located outside of an inner screen member.


CLS 166/57
TXT Devices under the class definition for causing a heating, refrigerating or
    heat insulating effect.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this and indented subclasses the
    apparatus must be described as purposely intended to perform the said
    functions.  An apparatus adapted to perform some other function and causing
    a mere inherent, unclaimed heating, refrigerating or insulating effect is
    not classified in this group of subclasses.  Such apparatus is classified
    on other features.

    (2)     Note.  The mere use of the earth as an insulating means, (as when a
    tunnel is used to inject fluid in a well and the earth above the tunnel
    insulates it) is not included.  See subclasses 75.11+ (especially 90.1) for
    such devices.

    (3)     Note.  Where the sole function of an element is described as for
    supplying a heating or refrigerating or insulating effect, classification
    is in this or indented subclasses even if such function is not claimed.

    (4)     Note.  A device comprising a heating means used merely to set off
    an explosion, the explosion being intended to accomplish some function due
    to the violent pressure exerted and not due to heat is not classified in
    subclasses 57+.  See subclasses 55 and 63 for such devices.

    (5)     Note.  An internal combustion engine, per se, is not considered a
    heating means if the only use of  the engine is  for driving a shaft or the
    like.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90,     for nozzles for inserting a steam into a casing, casing head or
    tubing to extinguish a fire.

    302,    and the subclasses there noted for processes involving heating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, appropriate subclasses for heaters of general
    utility.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 11+ for processes or
    apparatus for boring by directly applying heat to fluidize or comminute the
    earth formation and subclass 17 for processes or apparatus including
    heating or cooling within the bore, or heating or cooling the drilling
    fluid.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 73+, for combustion type pumps for wells.

    431,    Combustion, appropriate subclass for a burner, per se, particularly
    subclass 202 for a burner broadly related to other structures or having a
    geographic feature.

    432,    Heating, appropriate subclasses for a residual means for
    application of heat to materials or bodies.


CLS 166/58
TXT Devices under subclass 57 comprising (1) means for supporting a supply of
    fuel in the well or (2) a heated bar or container adapted to be lowered
    into the well after it is heated or filled with a hot material.

    (1)     Note.  "Fuel" in this subclass is any material which is intended to
    enter into an exothermic chemical reaction in the well.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for pipe perforating, weakening bending or separating means
    involving exothermically reacting materials inserted in a well.

    63,     for explosive or gas generating means in a well in which the
    purpose of the explosion or gas generation is not to evolve heat, being
    usually to generate pressure or deliver a fracturing blow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, appropriate subclasses for heaters, especially
    subclasses 263.01+ for heaters, heating by reaction of chemicals in a
    container and not disclosed or claimed as only used in a well.


CLS 166/59
TXT Devices under subclass 57 comprising means for burning fuel in the well,
    the fuel being fed to the burner from a source outside of the well.


CLS 166/60
TXT Devices under subclass 57 comprising electrical heating means situated
    below ground level.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 16 for processes or
    apparatus of boring by directly applying electrically produced heat to
    fluidize or comminute the earth formation.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 277+ for electrical oil well heaters,
    per se. See the class definition of Class 166 for the line.


CLS 166/61
TXT Devices under subclass 57 in which a heating means surrounds the well
    conduit through which the earth fluid flows to the surface of the ground.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for devices in which a heater surrounds only a pump rather than the
    conduit.


CLS 166/62
TXT Devices under subclass 57 comprising pump or plunger means in the well for
    drawing well fluids out of the well or into a receptacle which is lifted
    out of the well.

    (1)     Note.  Devices in which a heated fluid is conveyed into the well so
    as to act as both a heating and a lifting means are not considered to be
    pumps for this subclass.  Such devices may be found in subclass 57.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for well devices comprising a heater surrounding a pump production
    tube.


CLS 166/63
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising an explosive means or a means
    capable of generating gas, the means in each case being located in the well
    below ground level.

    (1)     Note.  The "gas generating means" may be a closed container
    containing compressed gas which is to be released.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for explosive or gas generating devices for perforating, weakening,
    bending or separating a well pipe at any unprepared point other than
    devices for firing a bullet or exploding a shaped charge which inherently
    cause penetration of the formation for which see Class 175, subclasses 2+.

    57+,    for heating means which may cause generation of gas in the
    formation or well.

    162+,   for receptacle in which gas (e.g., air) originally not under
    pressure may be trapped by fluid rushing in, the gas thus being compressed
    and escaping.

    299,    and subclasses there noted for processes involving an explosion in
    the well.

    309,    for processes involving producing foam or gas in a well by a
    foaming or gas producing material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 632+ for one shot explosion actuated
    expansible chamber type motors.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 301+ for well torpedoes for
    use in a well to break up a formation, clean a bore, etc., and for a well
    torpedo combined with a plug which acts as a tamping means.  Class 166,
    subclass 63, however, take an explosive surrounded by material to form a
    plug when the explosion occurs.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 2+ for subject matter
    relating to a device for firing a bullet or exploding a shaped charge in an
    inaccessible bore to penetrate the earth formation or perforate or cut a
    casing or other wall member in the bore and inherently penetrate the
    formation.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 73+, for combustion type pumps for wells.


CLS 166/64
TXT Devices under the class definition combined with means for measuring time
    or distance, responding to temperature changes for performing some
    function, or counting objects such as joint couplings.

    (1)     Note.  A mere delayed action response to a condition such as
    provided by a damper is not considered time measuring.  Such devices are
    classified on other bases.

    (2)     Note.  Means with indicia to indicate the position of adjustment of
    a device such as a valve or telescoping part are not included in this
    subclass.  Such a means in combination with a well device would be
    classifiable in subclass 113.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, appropriate subclasses for means for
    measuring distance.

    235,    Registers, appropriate subclasses for counters, per se.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 556+
    for the basic measurements of temperature, distance, or time which include
    a computation.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 136 for subsurface
    temperature determination other than for strata identification.


CLS 166/65.1
TXT WITH ELECTRICAL MEANS:

    Devices under the class definition provided with a specific electrical
    component (e.g., particular electrical conductor, insulator or magnetic
    structure).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for well devices comprising electrical heaters.

    63,     for electrical means for igniting an explosive charge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators appropriate subclass for
    these types of devices which may be located in a well device or well.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclass for
    an electrical with means which may be located in a well device or well.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclass for an electrical
    connector which may be located in a well device or well.


CLS 166/66
TXT Devices under subclass 65.1 in which an electric means is used for
    furnishing information to an observer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 312, for electrical telemetering
    of sensed borehole direction or inclination.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 40+, for processes or
    apparatus for boring including signaling, indicating, testing or measuring.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 83+, for ray energy detection or
    measurement.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 1+, for apparatus
    relating to the determination of an electrical characteristic of the
    subsurface of the earth.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+ for electrical
    automatic condition responsive indicating systems.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 25+ for electro acoustic well logging; subclasses 81+ for
    electro acoustic wellbore telemetering; and subclass 86 for electro
    acoustic borehole testing.


CLS 166/66.4
TXT Electric motor (e.g., solenoid actuator):

    Devices under subclass 65.1 in which the electrical means includes
    structure to convert electrical energy into mechanical motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, appropriate subclass for
    an electric motor of general utility.


CLS 166/66.5
TXT Magnetic:

    Electrical component under subclass 65.1 including permanent magnetic or
    electromagnet structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66.4,   for well means including motor structure, the motor structure
    generally having magnetic elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, appropriate subclass for an earth
    boring bit which is magnetized or includes a magnet.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 65.5 for a
    grapple adapted to be used in a borehole and provided with magnetic means.


CLS 166/66.6
TXT Valve:

    Electrical means under subclass 65.1 for a flow regulating means operable
    in the well to effect fluid movement.


CLS 166/66.7
TXT Longitudinally movable operator:

    Valve with electrical means under subclass 66.6 in which the flow regulator
    is opened, closed, or adjusted by an element shifted parallel to the well
    pipe or casing.


CLS 166/67
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising means intended to function
    and remain above ground level combined with means intended to function in
    the well below ground level.

    (1)     Note.  Some specific feature of both the above ground level and
    below ground level means must be recited in a claim for classification of a
    patent in this or indented subclasses.  The mere recitation of a cable,
    pipe, rod, tubing or casing for insertion in a bore hole is not sufficient.
     Above ground level apparatus combined with such features will be found in
    subclasses 75.11+ or in other subclasses, according to the subject matter
    involved.

    (2)     Note.  The mere recitation by name only of a pump above ground for
    inserting a treating or circulating fluid is not sufficient for
    classification of a patent in this or indented subclasses. Such patents are
    classified on other characteristics.

    (3)     Note.  See subclass 75.11 for the meaning of ground level in this
    definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    335+,   for a well which is above ground but below water.  Note, however,
    that a well device which is disclosed as being under water but in which no
    claim is made to a feature peculiarly adapting the device to function under
    water is considered as if the water were not present and is classifiable in
    subclasses 67+ if it otherwise meets the definition of subclass 67.

    51,     for above and below ground apparatus for placing gravel.

    52,     for above and below ground apparatus associated with a plurality of
    wells.

    53+,    for above and below ground apparatus with automatic means.

    57+,    for above and below ground apparatus for heating, refrigerating or
    with heat insulating means.

    64,     for above and below ground apparatus with time or distance
    measuring, temperature responsive or counting means.

    65.1+,  for above and below ground apparatus with electrical means.


CLS 166/68
TXT Devices under subclass 67 comprising pump or plunger means situated in the
    well for drawing fluid out of the well or into a receptacle which is then
    taken out of the well.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition of Class 166 for the line with
    Class 417.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61      and 62, for well devices for heating or refrigerating combined with
    an eduction pump in a well.


CLS 166/68.5
TXT Devices under subclass 68 comprising (1) an above ground driving motor for
    actuating the below ground pump or plunger, said motor being carried on a
    ground embedded casing or an embedded foundation which supports a casing or
    (2) an above ground pump means which acts on fluid derived from the well.

    (1)     Note.  The pump means under part (2) of the above definition may be
    a pump for supplying motive fluid to a drive motor for the below ground
    pump, the main criteria being that the fluid be derived from the same well.


CLS 166/69
TXT Devices under subclass 67 comprising the combination of an above ground
    apparatus and a receptacle for insertion in the well.

    (1)     Note.  The claiming of a magazine other than the casing for
    receiving the receptacle, or a means associated with the well for engaging
    the receptacle to support or open it is sufficient for classification in
    this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  A "receptacle" is a device which discharges material in the
    well or receives fluid from the well and transports its contents between
    the top of the well and the point of use by its own bodily movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162+,   for receptacles to be inserted into the well for function therein
    and also having means which descend into the well with the receptacle but
    are intended to function only above ground.  An example is a bailing
    receptacle with a discharge valve which is intended to be opened only above
    ground.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 403+ for portable
    receptacle emptying devices, and subclasses 639+ and 657+ for means for
    lifting well buckets and discharging their contents outside of the well.


CLS 166/70
TXT Devices under subclass 67 comprising (1) above ground apparatus claimed in
    combination with a piston as defined in subclass 153 or a mechanical
    cleaner as defined in subclass 170, or (2) above ground apparatus with
    means for engaging a device to be inserted into the well to restrain the
    device against upward or downward movement.

    (1)     Note.  Under (2) of the definition the means for engaging the
    device must be something other than a supporting cable, rod or pipe
    attached to the device.

    (2)     Note.  The "device" under (2) of the definition must be something
    other than a mere tubing, casing, cable or rod extending into the well from
    above ground level.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82+,    for a sealing means on a casing head for a cable rod or pipe in
    combination with means to be engaged by a well device for causing the
    sealing means to be released or yield so that the well device may pass out
    of the well.


CLS 166/71
TXT Devices under subclass 67 in which there is an anvil, weight, pushing or
    turning means for causing a well casing to sink in the earth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    173,    Tool Driving and Impacting, appropriate subclasses for devices
    which provide mechanical movement or blows to a work contacting element
    which effect alteration in the work.


CLS 166/72
TXT Devices under subclass 67 comprising a means situated above ground for
    causing movement of means situated below ground in the well.

    (1)     Note.  A valve above ground which causes actuation of a device in
    the well by changing pressure conditions is not considered an actuating
    means for this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  A mere elongated member such as a wire, rod or pipe
    extending from inside the well to the surface is not considered an
    actuating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 272.1+ for hydrants.


CLS 166/73
TXT Devices under subclass 72 comprising a tubing or casing which is moved by
    the actuating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for above ground casing sinking means.


CLS 166/74
TXT Devices under subclass 67 comprising a well screen as defined in subclass
    227.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for wells with screens and means for placing filter material.

    56,     for wells with screens and pipes outside of the screens for
    cleaning them or the area around them.

    71,     for casings with screens and above ground casing sinking means.


CLS 166/75.11
TXT ABOVE GROUND APPARATUS:

    Device under the class definition comprising means peculiar to a well;
    e.g., recitation of a cable, pipe, rod, tubing or casing for insertion in a
    bore hole and intended to function with the means and remain at or above
    the surrounding terrain.

    (1)     Note. For purposes of this subclass ground level is either (a) the
    level at which a person may work outside the casing of the well; this
    working space being provided either in the open, by a cellar, or tunnel or
    (b) the level; e.g., in a trench, at which a laterally running pipe line
    for discharging well fluid from or inserting treating fluid into the well
    is connected to the well casing.

    (2)     Note. This subclass includes those means adjacent the defined level
    though actually below it.

    (3)     Note.  Devices dropped into or forced down along the length of the
    well conduit for functioning inside the conduit, and of a type usually used
    below ground level, are excluded even though they may function above ground
    level. Such devices are classified on other features, usually as packers,
    plugs, pistons or wipers.

    (4)     Note.  A well device which is disclosed as being under water but in
    which no claim is made to a feature peculiarly adapting the device to
    function under water is considered as if the water were not present and is
    classifiable in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for a means of placing a mass of filter material; e.g., gravel, in
    a final position in the well.

    65.1+,  for devices with electrical means.

    67+,    for above and below ground apparatus in combination.

    348,    for underwater suspension means.

    357,    for separator attached to a well under water.

    360,    for underwater assembly means.

    365,    for underwater disassembly means.

    368,    for a wellhead which is above ground but below water.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 210.1+ and
    236.01 for wipers or scrapers applied to well heads for cleaning pipes,
    rods, or cable passing to or from the well with no more of the well casing
    being claimed than is necessary to support the wiper or scraper. The wiping
    or scraping device may include lateral ports, for the purpose only of
    disposing of material removed from an inner member being wiped.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 89+ for pipes or pipe
    fittings (including well pipe and fittings) having closures or plugs, or
    closures and plugs limited by structure to use with pipes. Class 138 takes
    such devices even if named for use with a well casing but a well feature
    such as a lateral port causes classification in Class 166.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, subclass 69 for means for extinguishing well
    fires involving more than a mere cap, plug, flow diverter or means for
    inserting fluid in the well.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 207+ for earth boring
    apparatus including above ground means for handling drilling fluid or
    cuttings and especially subclasses 209+ for such apparatus in which the
    means engages the bore entrance.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 1.1+ for blowout preventers
    of the type comprising plural relatively movable flow obstructing members
    controlling flow through the annular passage between an inner rod or pipe
    and a surrounding casing or tubing head and having characteristics which go
    beyond a mere packing means.  Addition of a lateral port in a casing head
    structure for diverting flow from the well is enough to cause
    classification in Class 166,  but Class 251 takes blowout preventers or
    other valves in appropriate subclasses even though the valve is operated by
    the well fluid pressure or there are plural valves and broad recitations of
    casing or casing head structure.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 123.3+ for joints between
    concentric pipes.  Class 285 takes casing heads with means for sealing
    inner pipes which are normally stationary, including means for sealing such
    inner pipes while they are being run into the well, and/or means for
    anchoring pipes against movement up or down with the anchoring feature
    comprising more than a mere pipe coupling resting on a sealing or valve
    device.  The claiming of a fluid handling feature such as a port or valve
    will cause classification in Class 166.


CLS 166/75.12
TXT Treatment of produced fluids:

    Above ground apparatus under subclass 75.11 which the gas or oil (or water)
    is cleaned, separated, or filtered.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 207+ for earth boring
    apparatus including above ground means for handling drilling fluid or
    cuttings and especially subclasses 209+ for such apparatus in which the
    means engages the bore entrance.


CLS 166/75.13
TXT Well caps or casing heads:

    Above ground apparatus under subclass 75.11 which prevents the flow of
    fluid from or into the well.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 89+ for pipes or pipe
    fittings (including well pipe and fittings) having closures or plugs, or
    closures and plugs limited by structure to use with pipes except for a well
    feature such as a lateral port.


CLS 166/75.14
TXT Suspension means:

    Above ground apparatus under subclass 75.11 for hanging tubing within a
    well.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208,    for below ground liner hangers.


CLS 166/75.15
TXT With means for injecting solid or particulate material into the well:

    Above ground apparatus under subclass 75.11 comprising the particular
    structure or device for placing balls, cement, etc.


CLS 166/76.1
TXT Having structure for converting from one mode of operation to another;
    e.g., valve to pack-off:

    Above ground apparatus under subclass 75.11 whose function is changed (a)
    by reassembling all or some of their parts in a different relationship or
    (b) by adding or omitting a part.

    (1)     Note.  Since well casing heads are commonly arranged (e.g., with
    threaded bolts) so that parts may be interchanged, added or omitted, the
    convertability feature must be explicitly discussed in the specification
    and recited in the claim for classification here.

    (2)     Note.  The mere use of a valve to shut off flow so parts may be
    interchanged, without removal of the valve, is not considered enough for
    classification in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for a class device convertible to a nonclass device.


CLS 166/77.1
TXT Moving tubing or cable into an existing well:

    Above ground apparatus under subclass 75.11 comprising means for pushing a
    rope-like line or thin-walled pipe into a cased borehole.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for a casing sinking means with a below ground modification.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 162 for an above ground
    means to feed a boring tool into the earth.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 29+ for pipe or rod jack.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 232+ for processes and
    apparatus for installing piling.


CLS 166/77.2
TXT Coiled tubing:

    Moved tubing under subclass 77.1 wherein the thin-walled pipe is wound on a
    reel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 162+ for
    feeding material by moving a grip element engaging the material.


CLS 166/77.3
TXT Chain injector:

    Moved coiled tubing under subclass 77.2 wherein the tubing is pushed by a
    series of links or rings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 170+ for
    orbitally traveling material engaging surface on endless belt or chain.


CLS 166/77.4
TXT Piston and cylinder:

    Moved tubing under subclass 77.1 wherein the thin-walled pipe is pushed by
    an assembly including a generally tubular-shaped member confining a movable
    mass and driven by fluid pressure.

    (1)     Note.  Patents properly classifiable here must include specific
    piston and cylinder structure connections; i.e., claims properly classified
    under subclasses 77.2 and 77.3 are not classified here.


CLS 166/77.51
TXT With means facilitating connecting or disconnecting supported tubing or rod
    sections:

    Above ground apparatus under subclass 75.11 comprising a separate apparatus
    for effecting the make-up or break-up of discrete pieces of thin-walled
    pipe or tubular bar in a line being inserted or removed from the well.

    (1)     Note.  The devices classifiable in this subclass must be
    specifically described as performing one of the following functions during
    the connecting or disconnecting operation (a) rotate one section of rod or
    pipe, (b) hold one section of rod or pipe stationary or (c) temporarily
    support a section of rod or pipe.

    (2)     Note.  The separate apparatus under this definition must be
    normally separate from the device being assembled or disassembled and must
    be something more than a mere detachable section of pipe constituting a
    continuation of the line of pipe being handled.

    (3)     Note.  A mere guide for aligning a rod or pipe section to be
    connected or disconnected from another without supporting the section is
    excluded from this subclass and will be found below in subclass 85.1.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78.1,   for apparatus for rotating a tubing extending into a well.

    85.1,   for above ground apparatus for assembling or disassembling other
    well apparatus.

    377+,   for a process of disassembling a well part.

    378+,   for a process of assembling a well part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 52+ for a wrench or screwdriver, subclasses 54+
    for a mechanically operated type and especially  subclasses 57+ for use in
    well operations (pipe tongs).

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclass 164 for means to drive a tool
    about an axis and having means to hold and relatively rotate tool shaft
    sections.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 170+ for similar
    apparatus combined with a rotary drive for an earth boring tool.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 22.51+ for well pipe or
    rod racking mechanism.


CLS 166/77.52
TXT With elevator detail:

    Device for connecting sections under subclass 77.51 using a specific
    lifting device for a pipe or bar.


CLS 166/77.53
TXT Upper and lower slips:

    Device for connecting sections under subclass 77.51 including wedge-shaped
    members, usually with a serrated face, located near the pipe or bar at the
    top and bottom.


CLS 166/78.1
TXT With tube rotating means (rotary tables):

    Above ground apparatus under subclass 75.11 comprising means for turning a
    thin-walled pipe about its axis.

    (1)     Note. The tubing is usually a pump tubing which is rotated to
    distribute wear.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 195, for a boring
    apparatus with a tool rotating means.


CLS 166/79.1
TXT Cap having transporting means or ground support:

    Above ground apparatus under subclass 75.11 which prevents the flow of
    fluid from or into the well including (a) a device having wheels or skids
    or (b) structure arranged to merely rest on the area around the pipe or be
    connected to either this area or a foundation only, rather than to the
    casing or tubing of the well.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94.1,   for a laterally adjustable cap or head.


CLS 166/80.1
TXT Having retractable pipe section to allow closing of gate type valve or
    flapper valve for rod or pipe:

    Above ground apparatus under subclass 75.11 comprising (a) a discrete
    tubular member axially shiftable to enable a flow control means; e.g., gate
    valve, to stop flow or (b) a hinged plate allowing passage of a tubular
    member or bar in one direction and preventing upward flow after removal of
    a tubular member or bar.

    (1)     Note.  The axially adjustable member remains assembled with the
    rest of the device at all times.

    (2)     Note.   The pipe section does not have to actuate the valve.


CLS 166/81.1
TXT Fluid catcher around pipe coupling:

    Above ground apparatus under subclass 75.11 comprising an enclosure or
    deflecting member, other than the casing head, placed about a section of
    well pipe so that the liquid contents of the pipe may be prevented from
    being indiscriminately emitted.

    (1)     Note.  Pipe wipers or cleaners are not properly classifiable here.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80.1,   for a retractable pipe section to allow closing of gate valve or
    flapper valve for rod or pipe.

    82.1,   for a releasable seal or cleaner for an inner member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 13+ for enclosures about pipe
    couplings for collecting leakage from the couplings and subclasses 148.6+
    for a leak-gland type coupling.


CLS 166/82.1
TXT Releasable seal or cleaner disengaged by projection on inner member:


    Above ground apparatus under subclass 75.11 comprising a detachably
    connected flow preventing or enclosure device for tubing, pipe, rod, or
    wireline within a casing opened by a lug, movable rod, collar, trip member,
    or protuberance on the tubing, pipe, rod, or wireline to cause the device
    to be detached from the well.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 220.4, for
    fabric type wiper for rods, pipes or cables, subclass 236.01 for a scraper,
    and subclass 236.1 for a rotary scraper.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 322+ for a seal for well apparatus.


CLS 166/83.1
TXT Latches releasable radially inward:

    Releasable seal or cleaner under subclass 82.1 in which there are catch or
    dog members which move towards the centerline of the casing, when the
    projection contacts the device, in order to detach the enclosure or the
    flow preventing device.


CLS 166/84.1
TXT With seal for reciprocating member:

    Above ground apparatus under subclass 75.11 comprising a flow prevention
    device for rod, pipe, tubing, wireline moving into and out of a well.

    (1)     Note.  The inner member must be free to reciprocate and not
    anchored against movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82.1+,  for releasable seal or cleaner for inner member and unfastening
    means.

    86.1+,  for inner member anchor or seal with valve.

    88.1+,  for inner member anchor or seal with lateral port.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 322+ for a seal for well apparatus.


CLS 166/84.2
TXT Cooling fluid or grease supplied to seals:

    Reciprocating member seal under subclass 84.1 wherein means are provided to
    deliver (a) temperature reducing liquid or gas or (b) lubrication to the
    flow prevention device.


CLS 166/84.3
TXT Rotary blowout preventer type:

    Reciprocating member seal under subclass 84.1 wherein the flow prevention
    device is rotatable (via bearings) and is sensitive to excessive well
    bottom pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 1.1+ for blowout preventers
    of the type comprising plural relatively movable flow obstructing members
    controlling flow through the annular passage between an inner rod or pipe
    and a surrounding casing or tubing head and having characteristics which go
    beyond a mere packing means. Addition of a lateral port in a casing head
    structure for diverting flow from the well is enough to cause
    classification in Class 166, but Class 251 takes blowout preventers or
    other valves in appropriate subclasses even though the valve is operated by
    the well fluid pressure or even though there are plural valves and broad
    recitations of casing or casing head structure.


CLS 166/84.4
TXT Fluid pressure actuated seals:

    Reciprocating member seal under subclass 84.1 wherein the flow prevention
    device is moved to a pipe engaging position by liquid or gas force.


CLS 166/84.5
TXT Seal fixedly mounted to rod:

    Reciprocating member seal under subclass 84.1 wherein the flow prevention
    device is permanently attached and movable with a tubular bar.


CLS 166/85.1
TXT With assembly or disassembly means (e.g., handling, guiding or tool
    feature):

    Above ground apparatus under subclass 75.11 comprising (a) means for
    cooperating with a separate apparatus for aiding in putting together or
    taking apart a device or a part thereof or (b) means for aiding in
    inserting a member into or removing a member from the well.

    (1)     Note.  The separate apparatus under (a) of the definition must be
    normally unconnected with the device being assembled or disassembled and
    must be something more than a mere detachable section of pipe constituting
    a continuation of the line of pipe being handled.

    (2)     Note.  The aiding means under (b) of the definition must comprise
    more than a mere flared section of pipe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    377+,   for processes of placing, removing or assembling well elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 315 for fluid handling means of general
    utility with repair, tapping or assembly means.

    294,    Handling: Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 86.1+ in
    particular for grapples that are adapted to function in a well bore.


CLS 166/85.2
TXT Pitless well adapters:

    Assembling device under subclass 85.1 in which the upper end of an inner
    pipe is connected to a below ground lateral port in a casing.


CLS 166/85.3
TXT Seal or bushing insertion or removal:

    Assembling device under subclass 85.1 including means for installing or
    removing a flow prevention device or cylindrical lining from a well member.


CLS 166/85.4
TXT With blowout preventer:

    Assembling device under subclass 85.1 for connecting a flow prevention
    device, sensitive to excessive well bottom pressure, to a well member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 1.1+ for blowout preventers
    of the type comprising plural relatively movable flow obstructing members
    controlling flow through the annular passage between an inner rod or pipe
    and a surrounding casing or tubing head and having characteristics which go
    beyond a mere packing means. Addition of a lateral port in a casing head
    structure for diverting flow from the well is enough to cause
    classification in Class 166, but Class 251 takes blowout preventers or
    other valves in appropriate subclasses even though the valve is operated by
    the well fluid pressure or even though there are plural valves and broad
    recitations of casing or casing head structure.


CLS 166/85.5
TXT Guiding or aligning feature:

    Assembling device under subclass 85.1 including means for directing or
    lining up a well member.


CLS 166/86.1
TXT Inner member anchor or seal with valve:

    Above ground apparatus under subclass 75.11 comprising a flow regulating
    device in combination with a means for (a) preventing upward or downward
    movement of an inner pipe, rod, or cable member depending into a well
    casing or tubing or (b) preventing flow in the annular space between a
    casing supported enclosure and a pipe, rod, tubing, or wireline, said
    regulating device being disposed either in the well casing, tubing or pipe
    or in a conduit communicating with said well casing, tubing or pipe.

    (1)     Note.  The sealing means under (b) of this definition may be of the
    blow out preventer type which is considered a "valve" for classification in
    Class 251, subclasses 1.1+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84.1+,  for a well apparatus with a seal for a reciprocating member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 1.1+ for blowout preventers
    of the valve type.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 322+ for a seal for well apparatus.


CLS 166/86.2
TXT Annular sealing type valve:

    Inner member seal with valve under subclass 86.1 wherein the flow
    regulating device controls flow through the annulus defined between the
    pipe, rod, tubing, or wireline and casing.


CLS 166/86.3
TXT Gate type (perpendicular to pipe) valve:

    Inner member seal with valve under subclass 86.1 including a flow
    regulating device movable perpendicular to the pipe, rod, tubing, or
    wireline.

    (1)     Note.  The gate valve can only moves to the closed position after
    the inner member has been removed or disconnected.


CLS 166/87.1
TXT Axially movable type valve:

    Inner member seal with valve under subclass 86.1 comprising a flow
    regulating device which is movable in the direction of the axis of a pipe
    in order to control fluid flow in the pipe.


CLS 166/88.1
TXT Inner member anchor or seal with lateral port:

    Above ground apparatus under subclass 75.11 comprising an enclosure having
    an opening in a side wall thereof for allowing flow of fluid into the well
    or from the well for outside delivery in combination with (a) means for
    preventing upward or downward movement of a pipe, rod or cable member
    depending into the well or (b) a flow prevention device closing the annular
    space between the enclosure and an pipe, rod or cable member.

    (1)     Note. The sealing means under (b) of the definition may be a valve
    type blow out preventer classifiable, in Class 251, subclasses 1.1+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84.1+,  for a seal interposed between a casing and an inner member
    reciprocating therein and which may have a lateral port communicating with
    the casing.

    86.1+,  for a casing which may have a lateral port and an inner elongated
    member either anchored to the casing or sealed therein, in which a flow
    passage is provided with a valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 220.4, for
    fabric- type wiper for rods, pipes or cables, subclass 236.01 for a
    scraper, and subclass 236.1 for a rotary scraper.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 1.1+ for valve-type blowout
    preventers

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 322+ for a seal for well apparatus.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 123.3+ for joints between a
    well head and an inner pipe.


CLS 166/88.2
TXT Slip type well anchor:

    Inner member anchor with lateral port under subclass 88.1 wherein the means
    for preventing movement is a wedge-shaped member with a serrated face.


CLS 166/88.3
TXT Seal actuated with anchor:

    Slip type inner member anchor with lateral port under subclass 88.2 wherein
    the flow prevention device and means for preventing movement are put into
    mechanical motion simultaneously.


CLS 166/88.4
TXT With hydraulic conduit or line extending through outer member:

    Inner member anchor with lateral port under subclass 88.1 wherein the
    casing includes an opening for a pipe or tube extending therethrough.


CLS 166/89.1
TXT Plural inner pipes:

    Inner member anchor with lateral port under subclass 88.1 in which there
    are at least two conveying lines within the outermost casing.


CLS 166/89.2
TXT Parallel pipes (as opposed to concentric):

    Plural inner pipes anchor with lateral port under subclass 89.1 wherein the
    conveying lines are coaxial and side by side.


CLS 166/89.3
TXT Having slip type hanger:

    Plural inner pipes anchor with lateral port under subclass 89.1 in which a
    means for preventing movement has a wedge-shaped member with a serrated
    face.


CLS 166/90.1
TXT With means for inserting fluid into the well:

    Above ground apparatus under subclass 75.11 comprising a constricted tube
    to speed flow for introducing gas or liquid into a well casing, casing head
    or tubing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88.1+,  for well casing heads having lateral ports which may be employed to
    introduce a fluid into said casing in combination with the inner members
    sealed or anchored with respect to the casing head.


CLS 166/91.1
TXT With flow restrictors (e.g., chokes or beans):

    Above ground apparatus under subclass 75.11 comprising a head, cap, or
    system of pipes attached to a well casing or tubing in combination with a
    means for regulating the flow of fluid by presenting a predetermined
    limitation to fluid movement.

    (1)     Note.  All valves and pipes offer some restriction to flow; this
    subclass, however, is intended to take only those well devices which
    include means specially built to restrict flow and known to the art as
    "chokes" or "beans".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 40+ for flow restrictors.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 117 and 118+ for fluid
    handling systems of general utility with valves and flow restrictors.


CLS 166/92.1
TXT Cap or head pivotably attached to tube or casing:

    Above ground apparatus under subclass 75.11 comprising a cover or top plug
    type structure in which all, or a section, is hinged to a pipe or to a
    tubular member inserted in a well.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75.13,  for well caps or casing heads of general utility which do not
    require the pivoting of the caps or heads.


CLS 166/93.1
TXT Split cap or head:

    Above ground apparatus under subclass 75.11 comprising a cover or top
    plug-type structure for a well casing or tubing which is divided on a
    longitudinal plane so that it may be applied in a lateral direction to the
    casing or tubing.


CLS 166/94.1
TXT Laterally adjustable cap or head:

    Above ground apparatus under subclass 75.11 comprising a cover or top
    plug-type structure for a well casing or tubing which is adjustable for
    movement away from or over the tubing or casing in a direction
    perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the tubing or casing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79.1,   for a cap or head provided with transportation means or which is
    unconnected to the well casing or tubing.


CLS 166/95.1
TXT Central valve or closure and lateral port:

    Above ground apparatus under subclass 75.11 comprising (a) a head for
    attachment to a casing or tubing and having a flow regulating device
    operating across a vertical passage in line with the casing or tubing and
    an opening for a pipe in the side wall of the head or (b) a cap for closing
    off the tubing or casing and an opening for a pipe in the side wall of the
    tubing casing or cap.

    (1)     Note.  There must be some detail of the head or cap shown or
    claimed for classification in this subclass. A patent having mere
    conventional showing of the cap or head and claims drawn to other features
    is classifiable in subclass 75.11 or other appropriate subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  A sole disclosed use as a well casing head of a structure
    comprising a valve and a lateral port for handling fluid to or from the
    well is enough to cause classification in Class 166.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88.1+,  for devices in which an inner member is anchored or sealed with
    respect to an outer pipe and there is a port in the outer pipe.


CLS 166/96.1
TXT External anchoring or bracing means:

    Above ground apparatus under subclass 75.11 comprising a head, cap or
    enclosure for attachment to a well casing or tubing and structural
    reinforcement such as tie rods for holding or shoring the head, cap or
    enclosure to the well casing or tubing or for attaching the casing or
    tubing to the ground or to a fixed well structure.

    (1)     Note.  The anchoring or bracing means must comprise more than, or
    be additional to, a mere pipe joint or joint securing a closure to the top
    of a pipe.


CLS 166/97.1
TXT With valve on cap or head:

    Above ground apparatus under subclass 75.11 comprising a cover or top plug
    type structure for attachment to a well tubing or casing in combination
    with a flow regulating device contiguous to, or on, the cover, plug-type
    structure, tubing, or casing.

    (1)     Note.   There must be some detail of the valve structure or its
    attaching means shown for classification in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75.13,  for well caps or heads.

    80.1,   for retractable pipe section extending through a valve.

    86.1+,  for an inner member anchor or seal with a valve.

    95.1,   for a central valve and a lateral port.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 1.1+ for blowout preventers
    comprising separate sections operable to close the annulus about a pipe and
    having characteristics which go beyond a mere packing means. Provision of a
    specific means for coupling the valve to the casing or arrangements of
    valves in branch lines are examples of features which will cause
    classification of a well casing head structure in Class 166.


CLS 166/97.5
TXT Parallel pipes extending along distinct paths through wellhead:

    Above ground apparatus under subclass 75.11 including generally coaxial
    conduits which (a) are not located one within another and (b) extend from a
    position above ground to a position below ground.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54.1,   for means for separately pumping from plural sources in a well,
    which may include parallel, nonconcentric conduits extending above ground.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 124.1+ for pipe systems
    including plural noncommunication paths which are parallel and
    nonconcentric and which are of the wellhead suspension type.


CLS 166/98
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising a means which is fixed in
    position in the well combined with a means for grappling an object in the
    well and a means for lifting the object and moving it relative to the fixed
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, appropriate subclasses
    for grapples, per se, and subclasses 86.1+ in particular for grapples that
    are adapted to function in a well bore.


CLS 166/99
TXT Devices under the class definition adapted to retrieve a plurality of
    discrete objects (e.g., pieces of tools usually known as junk or fish from
    a well).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is closely related to the well grapple art in
    Class 294, Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 86.1+,
    especially subclass 86.11.  The distinction is that Class 166, subclass 99
    relates to junk retrievers which have features of fluid handling or other
    well features considered too specialized for Class 294.  Specifically, if
    junk is swept into the retrieving device by means of fluid circulated down
    the inside of a central conduit which supports the retrieving device
    classification is in Class 166, subclass 99.  On the other hand, a junk
    retrieving device (e.g., a junk basket as in Class 294, subclass 86.11) in
    which junk is swept into the basket by circulation of fluid down the
    outside of a central conduit supporting the device and then up the inside
    of the conduit, or a junk retrieving device in which junk is swept into the
    device merely by means such as a plunger causing a sudden inrush of fluid,
    is classified in Class 294.

    (2)     Note.  The devices of this subclass are intended to comprise a
    unitary means to recover junk only, as distinct from a mass of fluent
    material which may incidentally contain junk.  Thus a device for this
    subclass may consist of a receptacle with a foraminous bottom which permits
    the fluent material to drain away as distinct from a receptacle with a
    solid bottom which retains fluent material.  Receptacles for recovering a
    mass of fluent material are found in Class 166, subclasses 107+ and 162+
    and also in Class 294, Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements,
    subclasses 68.22+. Receptacles in combination with earth boring means are
    found in Class 175, Boring and Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 308+.  If
    a single device has two distinct means, one (of any type) for recovering
    junk only and one for recovering a mass of fluent material of the type
    classifiable in Class 166, subclasses 107+ or subclasses 162+,
    classification is in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107+    and 162+, for a receptacle for retrieving fluent material from a
    well which material may or may not contain junk, as distinct from a junk
    retriever for subclass 99 which may be a receptacle designed to hold only
    junk but which receptacle incidentally may also hold a small amount of
    fluent material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 244+ for a core
    removing means, which core may contain junk and subclasses 308+ for earth
    boring means with a receptacle which may be adapted to retrieve junk.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 86.1+ for a
    well grapple, especially subclass 86.11 for a well grapple of the basket
    forming type and see (1) Note above; and subclass 86.34 for a device for
    freeing a single stuck object from its environment in a well by a washover
    or cutover means and retrieving said object.


CLS 166/100
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising (1) a means pressed against
    the side wall of a prepositioned well conduit so as to form a seal around a
    port for passage of fluid or (2) a means penetrating the earthen side wall
    of the well bore so as to provide a passage for fluid between a tubular
    member in the well and the formation.

    (1)     Note.  The port is often formed in a packer sealing means.
    Separate packers which, broadly considered, form ports between them are not
    included.  See subclass 191 and the subclasses there noted for such devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223,    for nozzles which are projected against a conduit structure but
    have no sealing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 152.26 for a sealing detail in an
    apparatus for fluid flow measuring or fluid analysis combined with sampling
    wherein the test is not purely electrical or purely magnetic.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 2+, 77, 78, and 79+ for
    means insertable in an inaccessible hole (e.g., well bore) to bore into a
    sidewall thereof.


CLS 166/101
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising a packer or plug as defined
    in subclass 179 combined with a pump or plunger means for exerting outward
    fluid pressure against the wall of the surrounding conduit either in the
    space between a pair of packer or plug means or in the space beneath the
    packer or plug means.

    (1)     Note.  The pump or plunger means must be some device other than a
    packer or plug which forms a seal with the surrounding conduit specified in
    the definition.  See subclass 119 for devices which may create pressure by
    the relative movement of packer or plug sealing means.

    (2)     Note.  Cementing and washing devices and other well devices
    commonly are associated with a pump (usually at the well top) for producing
    pressure beneath a packer.  A mere broad or nominal reference to a pump
    means is therefore not sufficient for classification in this subclass.
    Such devices are classified in appropriate subclasses on other features.

    (3)     Note.  The pump or plunger means must cause a direct outward fluid
    pressure.  See subclass 106 for devices in which an eduction pump while
    withdrawing liquid may create a condition which causes outward pressure as
    defined in subclass 101.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    for a packer or plug and eduction pump means which may indirectly
    or incidentally cause pressure outwardly, while it pumps liquid out of the
    well.

    177,    for packers or plug devices reciprocated in a surrounding conduit
    to cause surging or outward pressure.


CLS 166/102
TXT Devices under the class definition used below ground level and so designed
    that (1) by working on them above ground and reassembling all or some of
    their parts, adding or omitting a part or rearranging or adjusting parts
    they are changed from devices classifiable in Class 166 to ones which
    function as devices classifiable in other classes, or (2) by working on
    them above ground and reassembling all or some of their parts or adding or
    omitting a part their mode of operation may be changed.


CLS 166/104
TXT Devices under the class definition combined with a prime mover imparting
    rotary or oscillating motion.

    (1)     Note.  A device which acts merely to rotate itself is not
    considered a rotary motor.  See subclass 223 for well devices comprising
    rotary nozzles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66.4,   for well devices with electrical rotary motors.


CLS 166/105
TXT Devices under the class definition combined with a pump or plunger means
    for drawing well fluid out of the well or into a receptacle which is to be
    taken out of the well.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition of Class 166 for the line with
    Class 417, Pumps.

    (2)     Note.  Well devices such as sampling or cementing means frequently
    are provided with means for circulating liquids (e.g., introducing a liquid
    to drive out a liquid).  Such liquid circulating means are not considered
    pumps for this subclass.  These devices are classified on other features,
    mainly, the arrangement of valves and packers as in subclasses 142+.

    (3)     Note.  Claims involving merely a pump or pump tubing carrying an
    expanding support in a well conduit, or a packer or plug structure for a
    pump and claiming the pump by name only or as a pump barrel are classified
    on the basis of the supporting or packing structure rather than in this or
    indented subclasses, the pump or pump barrel being treated as a mere pipe
    or central conduit, according to the disclosure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61      and 62, for heating, refrigerating or insulating means with an
    eduction pump or plunger in the well.

    68,     for above and below ground structure including an eduction pump or
    plunger in the well.

    176,    for brushing, scraping, cutting or punching type cleaners on a pump
    sucker or rod.

    206+,   for expansible anchor means on a pump tubing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 155 for gas lift valves for wells and
    subclass 206 for apparatus for gas displacements of a liquid.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 324 for earth boring
    apparatus having a tool shaft with means other than bit structure to induce
    fluent flow.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclass 125, for a piston-type fluid spring device
    useful in apparatus for drawing fluid from a well.


CLS 166/105.1
TXT Devices under subclass 105 including (1) a device for both separating and
    collecting sand, earth or other solid impurities from the well fluid which
    is being or has been moved by the pump or plunger, or (2) a device which
    acts as a means for diverting or deflecting impurities away from the pump
    or plunger.

    (1)     Note.  Patents which are disclosed as receptacles for elevating
    fluid and which may incidently include some earth material are not included
    here but will be found in subclasses 107+ below.


CLS 166/105.2
TXT Devices under subclass 105.1 in which the sediment collecting or deflecting
    device is attached to the plunger or plunger rod of the reciprocating type.


CLS 166/105.3
TXT Devices under subclass 105.1 in which the sediment collecting means is
    formed within the same housing which houses the pumping element of a pump
    such that the sediment is in effect collected in the pump chamber or
    housing.


CLS 166/105.4
TXT Devices under subclass 105.1 in which the collecting or deflecting means
    acts on fluid which has already been acted upon by the pumping element of
    the pump.


CLS 166/105.5
TXT Devices under subclass 105 including a device having structure to cause gas
    (1) to be separated from the liquid well fluid or (2) to be collected or
    confined by the structure.

    (1)     Note.  A packer or packers and a passage, whether valved or not, is
    not included under the definition of this subclass, see subclass 106 below.
     To be included in this definition there must be some gas directing
    structure in addition to the packer.


CLS 166/105.6
TXT Devices under subclass 105.5 in which there is a pump of the type which
    liquid is pumped by being displaced or carried by a gas (e.g., jet, aerated
    column, etc.), and the gas separating or collecting structure includes
    means for directing the gas to the pump to act as a pumping fluid for the
    liquid.


CLS 166/106
TXT Devices under subclass 105 including packers or plugs as defined in
    subclass 179.

    (1)     Note.  Claims involving merely a pump carrying a packer or plug or
    expanding support and including the pump or pump barrel by name only are
    classified on the basis of the packing, plug or support structure rather
    than in this subclass, the pump or pump barrel being treated as a mere pipe
    unless disclosed as a portion of a central conduit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    for packers or plugs and pump or plunger means exerting outward
    pressure on the space below the packer or plug, which pressure may be
    alternated with an inward eduction flow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, appropriate subclasses for pumps combined with packers or
    plugs.


CLS 166/107
TXT Devices under subclass 105 comprising a container into which a well fluid
    is drawn by the pump or plunger means, the container being lifted bodily
    out of the well to transport the fluid to the top of the well.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 864.52 for sampling devices
    comprising a receptacle with suction means.  Patents having a sole
    disclosure of or a claim to use in a well are classified in Class 166.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 308+, and the search
    there noted, for earth boring apparatus having a receptacle.


CLS 166/108
TXT Devices under subclass 107 in which a pump or plunger piston is
    mechanically connected with a valve at the bottom portion of the container
    so as to close the valve when the piston is at the end of its lifting
    stroke.


CLS 166/109
TXT Devices under subclass 107 in which the fluid is drawn into the container
    by the relative motion of telescopically related tubular parts thereof.


CLS 166/110
TXT Devices under subclass 107 in which there is an opening through the side
    wall of the container below the lowest position of the pump or plunger
    piston providing for fluid flow through the opening while the container is
    in the well.

    (1)     Note.  The opening must be more than a mere scallop on the lower
    edge of the container.


CLS 166/111
TXT Devices under subclass 107 in which a bail on the top of the container
    engages the actuating rod of the pump or plunger piston.


CLS 166/112
TXT Devices under subclass 105 comprising a pump having a means for causing a
    portion of the well fluid being pumped to flow back into the well to treat
    it (e.g., wash it) while the pump is being operated to draw a major portion
    of the well fluid out of the well.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclass 434, for pumps including a separate port or
    noncyclic valve for draining a pump portion and subclasses 443+ and 446,
    for pumps with a pressure responsive distributor (e.g., check valve) which
    may be selectively held open as, for example, to drain the pump.


CLS 166/113
TXT Devices under the class definition combined with means for other functions
    than operating, treating or making a well or a means for perfecting the
    functions of operating, treating or making a well, the said means not being
    provided for in preceding subclasses.

    (1)     Note.  Operating, treating or making a well is considered to
    include, for example, flowing, washing, acidizing, cementing, and
    connecting or disconnecting parts in a well.  Ancillary subcombination of
    such devices such as pumps for forcing fluid into a well or inflating a
    packer, clutches, detents, knives or release detents or open closures,
    means attachable or detachable in the well, bearings or jars are not
    considered subject matter for this subclass.  Devices including these means
    having been classified in appropriate subclasses according to the features
    claimed.

    (2)     Note.  Devices found in this subclass include for example,
    cementing plugs with an indicating flare fluid, a well plug with an
    indicating ball on a string, a bailer with a means for taking an impression
    of lost tools, a washing device with a camera, and cementing casing shoes
    with means for testing the casing for fluid tightness.

    (3)     Note.  While well devices with added special means for testing for
    fluid leakage are included, well devices such as packers or plugs which
    inherently are capable of use as fluid leakage testers without modification
    are not found in this subclass but are classified according to other
    features.

    (4)     Note.  It is common in the art and inherent in most devices to give
    an indication of the operation of some part by manipulating a flow
    controlling means so as to cause a change in pressure.  Devices for giving
    an indication by a change in pressure are not included unless some indicia
    means are claimed, such as a gauge, scale or pointer.

    (5)     Note.  Many well devices inherently give an indication of their
    position, as when expanding anchor means catch on conduit joints, when they
    are manipulated to operate valves or when detent or clutch means are
    operated. Well devices adapted to indicate an operation by means such as
    the position of parts or resistance to motion are not included in this
    subclass unless an indicia means such as a scale or pointer is included.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 304+, for means sensing and
    indicating borehole direction or inclination.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 152.01+, for apparatus for bore
    hole studies. Such apparatus may include a sampling device or other well
    devices such as packers in combination with means for bore hole study such
    as flow meters, temperature recorders, well pressure indicators, etc., the
    well devices being used to perfect the bore hole study means rather than
    being used for well functions such as treating the well.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 40+ for processes or
    apparatus for earth boring including signaling, indicating, testing or
    measuring.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 136 for subsurface
    temperature measurement, in general.


CLS 166/114
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising a packer or plug as defined
    in subclass 179 set in final position within a surrounding conduit, (the
    setting tool or conduit which supported the packer or plug during insertion
    into the surrounding conduit having been withdrawn) combined with a
    centrally positioned longitudinally extending member, other than the
    aforesaid setting tool or supporting conduit and not a mere retrieving
    means for the packer or plug which is run into the surrounding conduit
    after the packer or plug is set.

    (1)     Note.  The centrally positioned longitudinally extending member
    must be more than a mere piston, fluid driven into the well or plug, per
    se.  Usually the centrally positioned member is a central conduit,
    receptacle or pump barrel.  For a piston, fluid driven into the well
    cooperating with another such piston see subclass 153.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115+,   for a central chamber sealed with respect to a prepositioned
    surrounding conduit.

    179+,   and the subclasses there noted for packers or plugs assembled in a
    well.


CLS 166/115
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising a central conduit or
    centrally positioned receptacle in combination with a surrounding conduit,
    the surrounding conduit being prepositioned in final position in the earth
    before the central conduit or receptacle is associated therewith, there
    being a means sealing a portion of the annular space between the central
    conduit or receptacle and the surrounding conduit.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this subclass a patent must claim the
    surrounding conduit which may even be the earth wall of the well, with some
    particularity.  For example, the mere naming of a conduit or a conduit with
    a perforation or group of perforations is not enough, but the recitation of
    spaced perforations or groups of perforations is sufficient.  A mere
    functional claiming of a relationship is not enough.  See the search notes
    for devices having a particular relationship with a surrounding conduit.

    (2)     Note.  The sealing means of the definition is usually a packer
    carried by the central conduit or receptacle.

    (3)     Note.  A broadly recited pump barrel is not considered a central
    conduit or receptacle.  Devices comprising a pump barrel with a packer
    cooperating with a shoulder in a surrounding conduit may be found in
    subclasses 195 and 203.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for a central chamber with a packer or plug combined with a preset
    packer or plug whose setting means has been withdrawn.

    136,    for packers or plugs with expanding anchors where the expanding
    anchor is spring set and adapted to engage in a recess in the surrounding
    conduit.

    195,    for deformable packers adapted to engage a shoulder on a
    surrounding conduit.

    203,    for nondeformable packers adapted to engage a shoulder on a
    surrounding conduit.


CLS 166/116
TXT Devices under subclass 115 in which the surrounding conduit carries a
    packer or plug as defined in subclass 179.


CLS 166/117
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising a receptacle as defined in
    subclass 162 so constructed and arranged that the receptacle or a part
    thereof is left in the well and separated from its lowering means, if any,
    when performing or after performing its intended function.

    (1)     Note.  The part left in the well must comprise more than a mere
    knock out or frangible closure.

    (2)     Note.  These devices are usually intended to plug the well by
    rupturing, breaking up or parting the receptacle while releasing its
    contents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205     and 227+, for well screens or well screen parts which may be lifted
    from the well after sediment collects therein.


CLS 166/117.5
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising a means positioned in a well
    conduit and adapted to be engaged by an element or member movable in the
    well conduit so that the element or member is directed laterally of the
    longitudinal axis of the well conduit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55+,    for device for perforating, weakening, bending or separating pipe
    at any point in a well and especially subclass 55.3 for wedge or cam
    actuated pipe perforating or splitting cutters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 61 for processes of
    drilling curved or redirected bores and subclasses 79+ for earth boring
    devices in which the tool moves axially relative to means to redirect the
    tool laterally.


CLS 166/117.6
TXT Devices under subclass 117.5 in which the diverting means is secured in
    operative position in the well conduit by means movable relative to the
    diverting means and adapted to engage or cause a portion of the diverting
    means to engage the wall of the well conduit to prevent either longitudinal
    or rotary movement of the diverting means relative to the well conduit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206+,   for expansible anchors in well conduits.  See the search notes
    thereunder for other features combined with anchors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 81 for earth boring
    devices having a means to redirect the tool laterally which has a bore wall
    engaging anchor.


CLS 166/117.7
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising a means located below ground
    level in a well conduit adapted to cause relative rotary motion between one
    section of conduit and another section of conduit also located in the well,
    said means including a means movable outwardly to engage the surrounding
    well conduit section to prevent rotation of one portion of the rotating
    means in the well.

    (1)     Note.  Generally one of the sections of conduit is a pipe which is
    stuck in the well bore and held against rotation and the below ground means
    is anchored to a separate outer well conduit and engages only the uppermost
    section of the stuck section in the manner of a fishing tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98,     for a grapple with a well anchored lifting means.

    206+,   and the search there noted, for expansible well anchors or casings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 436+ for tools which have a force-exerting
    portion inserted into a cavity in the work, especially subclasses 442+ for
    expanding type portions.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 86.24+ for
    internally expanding well grapples, and subclasses 93+ for internally
    expanding grapples of general utility.


CLS 166/118
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising plug or packer means as
    defined in subclass 179 combined with expansible anchor means as defined in
    subclass 206.


CLS 166/119
TXT Devices under subclass 118 wherein there are at least two packers or plugs
    so arranged that all portions of the sealing part of one are bodily movable
    with respect to all portions of the sealing part of the other while the
    device is in unitary condition in the well.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123,    for devices having expanding anchors and packers or plugs in which
    one packer or plug is detachable from another in the well.


CLS 166/120
TXT Devices under subclass 118 in which the anchoring means is movable to set
    or inset position, all or part of the movement being due to fluid pressure.

    (1)     Note.  The whole of the movement to operative locking position is
    usually due to the fluid pressure.  Devices in which some of the movement
    to final locking position is due to some other motive power are
    classifiable here only if there is also some added modification of the
    device for the use of fluid pressure to move or tend to move the anchoring
    means.  The added modification must be supplementary to the common
    placement of a packer and expanding anchor whereby the pressure of the
    fluid being blocked acts to increase the anchoring effect.  See subclass
    140 for devices so arranged that fluid pressure increases the anchoring
    action but having no special modification for this purpose.

    (2)     Note.  Devices in which fluid pressure is used to release a latch
    so that some other means may move the anchoring means are not classified in
    this or indented subclasses.  See subclass 136 for spring set anchors with
    latches released by fluid pressure.

    (3)     Note.  The fluid pressure may be caused by movement of the device
    through or into a body of fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212,    for expansible anchors actuated by fluid pressure, the anchors
    being not disclosed as associated with packers or plugs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 99 for earth boring
    apparatus in which a below ground motor is anchored to the bore wall by a
    support having fluid operated expansible anchor.


CLS 166/121
TXT Devices under subclass 120 wherein the fluid pressure for moving the
    anchoring means is exerted on a cup type packer sealing portion of the type
    defined in subclass 202.


CLS 166/122
TXT Devices under subclass 120 wherein the fluid pressure for moving the anchor
    is applied to the sealing portion of a packer or plug in the manner defined
    in subclass 187.


CLS 166/123
TXT Devices under subclass 118 comprising means for detachably coupling the
    device to a means for lowering the device into the surrounding conduit, the
    detachable connection being such that the packer or plug may be left in the
    well while the lowering means is completely withdrawn.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181+,   and the search there noted, for other packers and plugs or other
    well elements having a detachable setting means or part.


CLS 166/124
TXT Devices under subclass 123 in which the connection comprises screw threads
    on the device engaging screw threads on the lowering means.


CLS 166/125
TXT Devices under subclass 123 in which the connection comprises a latching
    member which is movable in a direction generally radially of the well bore
    in order to unmake the connection in the well.


CLS 166/126
TXT Devices under subclass 118 with a controllable passage between a central
    chamber comprising a central conduit or a receptacle and a space below a
    packer, as set forth in subclass 142.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120+,   (especially 122), for devices as defined in subclass 126 in which
    the expanding anchor is actuated to setting position by fluid pressure.

    123,    for devices as defined in subclass 126 in which the central conduit
    is a detachable setting tool.


CLS 166/127
TXT Devices under subclass 126 in which there are packer or plug sealing
    portions spaced from each other as defined in subclass 191.


CLS 166/128
TXT Devices under subclass 126 in which the valve, closure or changeable
    restriction controlling the passage is opened, closed or held in position
    or freed for movement because the central chamber is moved.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for devices as defined in this subclass in which there are spaced
    packer blocking means.


CLS 166/129
TXT Devices under subclass 118 wherein the packer is adapted to be supported by
    a central conduit from the top of the well as it is run into the well and
    there is a fluid passage within the packer but not in communication with
    the central conduit passageway in the region of the packer, which fluid
    passage connects the space below the packer with the annular space above
    the packer, the fluid passage being controllable by a valve, closure or
    changeable restriction.


CLS 166/130
TXT Devices under subclass 129 wherein the packer blocking portion is expanded
    laterally by means of force transmitted through coacting shoulder members
    which are situated above the packer and which act to close the fluid
    passage as they expand the packer blocking portion.


CLS 166/131
TXT Devices under subclass 118 wherein there is a fluid passage between a
    central conduit which supports the packer or plug from the top of the well
    while it is being run into the well and the annular space above the packer
    or plug, between the central conduit and the surrounding conduit, the
    passage being controllable by a valve, closure or changeable restriction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123+,   for devices as defined in this subclass wherein the passage is
    opened by detaching the central conduit.

    127,    for a device comprising a central chamber expanding anchors, spaced
    packers and a controllable passage between the chamber and the space above
    a lower packer outside of the chamber.

    129+,   for devices as defined in this subclass in which the passage
    between the central conduit and the space above the packer passes through
    the packer but outside the central conduit.


CLS 166/132
TXT Devices under subclass 118 wherein the anchoring means is prevented from
    expanding till the device or a part thereof passes beyond the end of the
    surrounding well conduit.


CLS 166/133
TXT Devices under subclass 118 in which there is a fluid passage through the
    packer connecting the space below the packer with the space above the
    packer, the passageway being controllable by a valve, closure or changeable
    restriction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126+,   for devices as defined in this subclass in which the controllable
    passage through the packer is between a central chamber and the space below
    the packer.

    129+,   for devices as defined in this subclass in which the controllable
    passage is a bypass outside a central conduit.


CLS 166/134
TXT Devices under subclass 118 in which the expanding anchor comprises two
    distinct means, one being adapted to anchor the device against downward
    movement, and the other adapted to anchor the device against upward
    movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    for devices as defined in subclass 134 in which the packer or plug
    sealing portion is expanded in order to actuate the anchor means to expand
    condition.


CLS 166/135
TXT Devices under subclass 118 comprising a plug as defined in subclass 179.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132,    for plugs anchored beyond the conduit end.

    192+,   for plugs without separate expanding anchor means, these plugs
    being usually held in place by the frictional engagement of the sealing
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 301+ for well torpedoes with
    plugging means; and subclass 333 for plugs used in blasting.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 89 for closures and plugs of
    general utility (including those assembled with a conduit before the
    conduit is inserted into the well).


CLS 166/136
TXT Devices under subclass 118 in which the energy stored in a spring is used
    to move the expanding anchor outwardly to set it.

    (1)     Note.  Where a spring means forms a resilient mounting but movement
    of the anchor is due to some other means classification is not in this
    subclass. See subclasses 138+ for such devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132,    for spring set anchors which cooperate with the end edge of the
    surrounding conduit to prevent upward movement.


CLS 166/137
TXT Devices under subclass 136 in which the spring causes relative movement
    between a wedge or cam and the expanding anchor means to move the means
    outwardly.


CLS 166/138
TXT Devices under subclass 118 in which there is a friction means as defined in
    subclass 241 and a wedge or cam means engageable with the anchor means in
    order to move it outwardly.

    (1)     Note.  The friction means may be identical with the anchor means if
    the device is constructed so that the anchor frictionally resists movement
    when in the unexpanded condition in order to enable setting of the device.

    (2)     Note.  The friction means may be a packer or plug sealing means if
    this sealing means is used like a friction drag to set the anchor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121,    for packers or plugs and expanding anchors set by fluid pressure
    wherein fluid pressure acting on a cup type packer seal may cause it to act
    in a manner similar to a friction drag when setting the expanding anchor.

    129+,   for devices as defined in this subclass in which there is also a
    controllable bypass outside of a central conduit supporting the packer or
    plug.


CLS 166/139
TXT Devices under subclass 138 in which interengaging screw threads on
    different parts are relatively rotated in order to set the anchor, packer
    or plug.

    (1)     Note.  The rotation may occur as a preliminary operation or during
    the setting operation proper.


CLS 166/140
TXT Devices under subclass 138 wherein the anchoring means is positioned above
    the packer or plug blocking portion.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include those devices in which the
    anchoring means is positioned in the same zone as the packer or plug means
    so that only part of the blocking portion of the packer or plug is below
    the anchor. See subclasses 138 and 139 for such devices.


CLS 166/141
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising an expansible packer or plug
    as defined in subclass 179 in which the blocking or sealing portion of the
    packer closes a port in the side wall of the central tubular member when in
    unexpanded condition and opens the port to the space outside the packer or
    plug when expanded laterally to blocking position.

    (1)     Note.  A ring portion which is attached to the sealing part and
    handled as a unit therewith is considered part of the sealing portion.


CLS 166/142
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising (1) a packer as defined in
    subclass 179 constructed to be supported from the top of the well by a
    central conduit for insertion thereby into the well or (2) a packer as
    defined in subclass 179 for use with a centrally positioned receptacle as
    defined in subclass 162, there being a fluid passage between the central
    conduit or receptacle and the space below the packer outside of the conduit
    or receptacle, fluid flow through said passage being capable of being
    altered or affected by a valve, closure device or changeable restriction in
    subclass 224 positioned across the passage.

    (1)     Note.  The passage may include as a part thereof any space inside
    of the surrounding conduit which receives the packer.

    (2)     Note.  A packer is considered to bound a space even if unexpanded.

    (3)     Note.  The central conduit or receptacle forms a central chamber
    for the purpose of receiving or discharging fluid, as for example, in
    sampling, cementing or washing devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126+,   for devices as defined in this subclass which also comprise
    expanding anchor means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 526, 528, and 547, for piston connected to a
    hollow piston rod which acts as a discharge conduit.


CLS 166/143
TXT Devices under subclass 142 in which the central conduit is adapted to be
    readily detachable from the packer while in the well by means of a
    connection such that either the packer or conduit may be left in the well
    while the other member is completely withdrawn from the well.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123+,   for devices as defined in subclass 143 in which there are also
    expansible anchor means.

    158,    for a screen with a jetting or washing point or shoe and a
    detachable jet or wash pipe.

    181+,   for packers or plugs with detachable setting means.


CLS 166/144
TXT Devices under subclass 143 in which the central chamber is a central
    conduit and is detachably attached to the lower portion of a casing or
    screen section which carries the packer sealing portion so that the central
    conduit supports the casing or screen section against the action of gravity
    while it is being lowered into the well.


CLS 166/145
TXT Devices under subclass 142 in which there is a bypass around the packer and
    a valve or closure for the bypass, the control element for the passage
    being so interconnected with the valve or closure for the bypass that
    complete opening of the passage to upward fluid flow into the central
    chamber and closing of the bypass to upward fluid flow are constrained to
    occur together.

    (1)     Note.  A bypass is a passage through the packer that connects the
    annular space outside the central conduit or receptacle and above the
    packer with the space below the packer.

    (2)     Note.  The closing of the bypass and opening of the passage need
    not occur exactly simultaneously but may occur a short time interval apart
    as the result of an operating movement which is intended to take place
    without interruption once started.


CLS 166/146
TXT Devices under subclass 142 in which the passage connects with a space below
    a plurality of packer blocking means and there is a passageway which is
    always open to passage of fluid in either direction between the central
    conduit of receptacle and the annular space between the packer blocking
    means.


CLS 166/147
TXT Devices under subclass 142 in which the passage connects with the annular
    space between spaced packer or plug sealing portions as defined in subclass
    191.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146,    for devices in which the passage connects with a space below
    packers and a continuously open passageway connects with the space between
    the packers.


CLS 166/148
TXT Devices under subclass 142 in which there is a check valve normally
    effectively closing the passage against upward flow of fluid while the
    device is being run into the well but permitting downward flow and there is
    also a means for rendering the check valve ineffective to stop upward flow
    after the device is positioned in the well, either by opening said valve or
    providing a fluid passageway around said valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 599+ for distribution systems with
    valves in which flowing material is divided into parallel flow paths and
    recombined.


CLS 166/149
TXT Devices under subclass 142 in which there is also a passageway between the
    central conduit or receptacle and the annular space above the packer and
    outside of the central conduit or receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  The central chamber may comprise concentric conduits each of
    which forms a "chamber", one having a passage to the space beneath the
    packer and one having a passageway to the space above the packer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131     and 184, for devices in which there is a central conduit carrying a
    packer and a controllable passage between the conduit and the space above
    the packer.

    143+,   for devices as in subclass 149 comprising a passageway provided
    between a central chamber and the space above the packer due to the
    disconnection of the central chamber from the packer, or a passageway
    provided between a setting tool and a concentric screen section carrying a
    packer.

    146,    for devices as in subclass 149 and in which the passageway is
    continuously open and there is an additional packer carried by the central
    chamber above the passageway outlet.


CLS 166/150
TXT Devices under subclass 149 in which fluid flow through the passageway
    between the central conduit or receptacle and the space above the packer is
    controllable by a valve, openable closure or changeable restriction
    operated or held in position by movement of the central conduit or
    receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145,    for devices as in this subclass in which fluid flow through a
    bypass through the packer is stopped when fluid flow to the central chamber
    is permitted.


CLS 166/151
TXT Devices under subclass 149 in which fluid flow through the passageway
    between the central conduit or receptacle and the space above the packer is
    controllable by a valve, openable closure or changeable restriction which
    is  responsive to fluid pressure exerted directly upon it by contact with
    the fluid whose flow is being controlled.

    (1)     Note.  A valve, closure or changeable restriction operated by a
    dropped ball or other means acted on by fluid pressure is not considered
    within the definition of this subclass.  See subclass 149 for such devices
    used to control the passageway between the central chamber and the space
    above the packer.


CLS 166/152
TXT Devices under subclass 142 in which the valve, closure or changeable
    restriction controlling the passage is opened, closed, held in position or
    freed for movement because the central conduit or receptacle is moved.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128,    for devices as defined in subclass 152 in which there is also an
    expanding anchor means.

    143+,   (especially 144), for devices as defined in subclass 152 in which
    the central chamber (usually a setting tool) is detachable after operating
    a valve to close the passage.

    145,    for devices as defined in subclass 152 in which there is also a
    bypass around the packer which is closed when the passage to the central
    chamber is opened.

    146,    for devices as defined in subclass 152 in which there is also a
    continuously open passageway between the central chamber and a space
    between plural packers.

    148,    for devices as defined in subclass 152 in which there is also an
    upwardly biased check valve between the central chamber and the space below
    the packer.

    150,    for devices having a controllable passage between a central chamber
    and a space below a packer and also having a space below a packer and also
    having a passageway between a central chamber and the space above the
    packer in which the passageway is controlled by a valve, closure or
    changeable restriction operated by movement of the central chamber.


CLS 166/153
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising piston means adapted to be
    inserted from the top of the well into an already placed well conduit and
    to be driven down by fluid pressure acting directly on the piston.

    (1)     Note.  The piston must closely contact the wall of the casing or
    tubing as it moves down or be close enough to function as a scraper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170+,   for brushing, scraping, cutting or punching cleaners adapted to
    fall down a well by gravity.

    177.3,  for wiping means adapted to fall by gravity down the well.

    193+,   for plugs of the dropped ball type.

    291,    for processes of cementing using piston separators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 172+ for pistons for an
    expansible chamber device.


CLS 166/154
TXT Devices under subclass 153 in which a valve, closure or restriction means
    carried by the casing or tubing in which the piston operates is opened or
    released for opening by engagement of the piston with the means or an
    element connected thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194,    for sleeve valves on conduits opened by dropped ball type plugs.


CLS 166/155
TXT Devices under subclass 153 which are so constructed that fluid may flow
    downwardly past the piston at a certain period of its operation by a
    flexing of the piston sealing means or opening of a valve or closure.

    (1)     Note.  Plugs which are constructed to be drilled out in their
    entirety are not classified in this subclass but will be found in subclass
    153 or other indented subclasses.


CLS 166/156
TXT Devices under subclass 153 in which there are means in the casing or tubing
    in which the piston operates cooperating with the piston to stop its motion.

    (1)     Note.  A stop means which comprises merely the top or bottom of the
    casing or tubing (e.g., the inwardly sloping wall of a set shoe) is not
    included. See subclasses 153+ for such devices.

    (2)     Note.  A means in the tubing or casing which stops the piston only
    until fluid pressure is increased is also not included.  See subclasses
    153+ for such devices.

    (3)     Note.  The stop means may be for preventing an upward motion of the
    piston after it is driven down the well.

    (4)     Note.  The stop means must be more than merely the bottom piston of
    a pair of pistons.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154,    for pistons, fluid driven into the well, engaging a valve part
    which acts as a stop or engages some other stop means.

    155,    for pistons which allow fluid to flow past them after they contact
    a stop.

    170+,   for stops associated with brushing, scraping or cutting type
    cleaners.

    193+,   for dropped balls or plugs of the type which do not make a close
    fit with the surrounding conduit as they move downwardly combined with
    stops.


CLS 166/157
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising a conduit comprising a screen
    as defined in subclass 227 in combination with a means at the end of the
    conduit comprising a structure having a port for conducting fluid outwardly
    of the end of the conduit usually to wash the screen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327+,   for conduit shoes with check valves (usually disclosed for floating
    in and cementing a casing).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 314 for earth boring
    apparatus, including a jetting point, combined with a well type screen.


CLS 166/158
TXT Devices under subclass 157 in which there is a separate pipe associated
    with the screen for passing fluid downwardly into the well to wash the
    screen, the separate pipe being readily removable from association with the
    screen structure while the screen remains in the well.

    (1)     Note.  Wash pipes which are disclosed as merely liftable from the
    screen structure (e.g., the back pressure valve) are classified in this
    subclass if they are also disclosed as capable of being completely removed
    from the well leaving the screen in the well.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143+,   for devices as defined in this subclass in which the detachable jet
    or wash pipe is a central conduit and there is a packer carried by the
    screen.


CLS 166/162
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising a container which is bodily
    movable for transporting material from the top of the well and discharging
    the material therefrom at a point in the well or which is bodily movable
    for receiving fluid material from the well and transporting it to the well
    top.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for a receptacle used with above ground apparatus.

    99,     for receptacles combined with junk retrieving means.

    107+,   for receptacles combined with a pump or plunger mechanism for
    drawing fluid into the receptacle.

    142+,   for receptacles with packers and a controllable passage between the
    receptacle and the space below the packer.

    205     and 227+, for well screens or well screen parts which may be lifted
    from the well after sediment collects therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 1.7 for
    submerged cleaners with ambient flow guides, and subclass 246.5 for tank
    cleaners.  See the search notes thereunder.

    37,     Excavating, subclass 182 for orange peel buckets and subclass 461
    for clamshell buckets.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 152.23+ for sampling of a well
    fluid combined with flow measuring or fluid analysis wherein the test is
    not purely electrical or purely magnetic, and especially subclass 152.28
    for sampling of a well fluid combined with fluid flow measuring or fluid
    analysis by use of a downhole measuring apparatus wherein the test is not
    purely electrical or purely magnetic and subclass 864.51 for receptacles
    for taking liquid samples from locations other than wells. See the class
    definition of Class 166 for the line with Class 73 as to receptacles used
    in a well.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclass 331 for well torpedoe
    receptacles.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 308+, and the search
    there noted, for earth boring means with a receptacle for cuttings or
    sediment.  A mere dart extension to operate a bottom valve is not
    considered an earth boring means sufficient for classification in Class 175.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 523+ for
    gravitational separators, with mechanical liquid removers, and subclasses
    532+ for gravitational separators with heavier constituent traps.

    220,    Receptacles, for receptacles of general utility, especially
    subclasses 200+ for receptacle closures.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 356+ and subclasses there noted for dipping
    type dispensers.  See section 13 of the class definition of Class 222 for
    other classes relating to the subject matter.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 68.22+ for
    hoisting bucket or bailer type receptacles, and subclass 86.11 for devices
    similar to receptacles for carrying only solid objects such as junk out of
    a well. Class 294 takes dumping and bailing receptacles which are
    structurally very similar to those of Class 166, the line being that Class
    166 takes those receptacles that have some feature special to use in wells
    or are described for use in wells and are long and slender so as to adapt
    them for use in narrow diameter bored wells and also have at least one of
    the following features; a pump or plunger means for loading the receptacle,
    disclosure that the receptacle or part thereof is left in the well and
    separated from its lowering means, a separate air, gas or vacuum chamber, a
    valve and destroyable closure, a closed or valved top, valve control means
    operated by contact with the side wall, a bottom loading valve, which is
    bodily movable for discharge, a side opening for use in the well. These
    features form the subject matter of subclasses 107, 117 and 163 through 169
    of Class 166.


CLS 166/163
TXT Devices under subclass 162 in which the container has a fluid retaining
    chamber and a separate air, gas or vacuum chamber, so arranged that when a
    passage into the air, gas or vacuum chamber is opened the fluid in the well
    rushes into the fluid retaining chamber.


CLS 166/164
TXT Devices under subclass 162 in which there is a closure which is adapted to
    be broken or otherwise destroyed so that fluid in the well will enter the
    container and there is also a valve for retaining the fluid in the
    container.


CLS 166/165
TXT Devices under subclass 162 in which the top of the container is closed or
    there is a valve or openable closure closing the top or an opening adjacent
    the top.

    (1)     Note.  There may be enclosed side openings near the top; but a mere
    bail is not considered to close the top.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163     and 164, for receptacles with closed or valved tops and separate
    air chambers or destroyable closures and check valves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 205 for apparatus of general utility
    providing means whereby a container may be filled with liquid by evacuating
    the container.


CLS 166/166
TXT Devices under subclass 162 comprising a valve or closure and control means
    for the valve or closure adapted to contact the wall of the well conduit
    within which the container is positioned.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145,    for devices as defined in subclass 166 in which there is also a
    packer, a bypass around the packer and a passage between the receptacle and
    the space below the packer which is opened when the bypass is closed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 68.22+ for
    hoist buckets in which a valve may be opened by contact with the bottom or
    an obstruction across a well.


CLS 166/167
TXT Devices under subclass 162 in which there is a valve across the bottom of
    the container to admit and thereafter retain fluid from the well and there
    is also an additional valve or openable closure in the side wall of the
    container for releasing the contents of the container after the container
    is withdrawn from the well.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165,    for well containers with valves or openable closures in the side
    walls adjacent the top of the container.


CLS 166/168
TXT Devices under subclass 162 in which there is a valve across the bottom of
    the container for admitting and retaining fluid from the well, the valve
    and container being so constructed that the valve may be readily bodily
    moved from its position across the container so that the container may be
    emptied after it has been withdrawn from the well.

    (1)     Note.  In the case of a pivoted valve the "bodily movement" is such
    as to include movement of the pivot axis.

    (2)     Note.  A reciprocating type check valve readily movable only by
    means extending through the discharge opening is not included in the
    definition of this subclass.  See Class 294, subclass 72 for such devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, appropriate subclasses for a joint
    between tubular sections of the receptacle.


CLS 166/169
TXT Devices under subclass 162 in which there is an opening in the side wall of
    the container so that fluid may be discharged from or may enter laterally
    into the container while it is in the well.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the lateral port is controlled by a valve member
    operated when a part contacts the well bottom.

    (2)     Note.  The opening must be more than a mere scallop on the lower
    edge of the container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for a well receptacle with a piston or plunger and a lateral port
    for use in the well always positioned below the plunger or piston.

    165,    for openings associated with the top closing structure of the
    container.

    166,    for well receptacles with side discharge openings in which a valve
    control means contacts a well conduit wall.

    167,    for a well receptacle with a side opening for discharge of the
    contents outside of the well.


CLS 166/170
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising means for cleaning well
    conduits or other devices in a well by brushing, scraping, cutting or
    punching.

    (1)     Note.  The devices in this and indented subclasses are for removing
    only material deposited on well elements or conduits.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177.3,  for means for cleaning by wiping.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 104.05+ for devices of general utility for cleaning
    pipes and subclass 249 for flue cleaners.  Where the sole disclosure or
    claimed use of a cleaner is a use inside a well, classification is in Class
    166.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 87 for a piston for an
    expansible chamber device which includes brushing, scraping or cutting
    means.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 263+, for earth boring
    bits having cutter elements laterally shiftable below ground and subclasses
    327+ for earth boring bits, per se.

    417,    Pumps, subclass 545+, for well swabs (valved pistons reciprocated
    in a well to remove fluid therefrom).  Well swabs classifiable in Class 417
    may include scrapers.  Such patents should be cross-referenced to Class 166.


CLS 166/171
TXT Devices under subclass 170 comprising means specially adapted for cleaning
    perforations in well conduits.

    (1)     Note.  These devices either comprise means disclosed as entering
    the perforations of a well conduit, means claimed in combination with a
    perforated conduit or means claimed as adapted to be used for cleaning
    perforated conduits.  Cleaners which may be used for perforation cleaning
    but do not qualify under this note may be found in subclass 170 or indented
    subclasses other than subclass 171.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 407+ for a strainer
    of general utility combined with cleaning means and see the search notes
    thereunder.


CLS 166/172
TXT Devices under subclass 170 in which the cleaning element is supported on a
    bow spring or constitutes a bow spring.

    (1)     Note.  A bow spring is one which is supported at its ends and
    bulges outwardly at its mid-portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241.1,  for bow spring centering or friction means which do not have a
    separate cleaning element or which do not claim a cleaning function, and
    see the notes to subclass 241.1.


CLS 166/173
TXT Devices under subclass 170 comprising cleaning elements projecting
    outwardly from and supported by a tubing or casing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172,    for cleaning elements of the bow spring type supported on a tubing
    or casing.


CLS 166/174
TXT Devices under subclass 170 comprising a cleaning element so constructed
    that its effective lateral dimensions may be reduced while it is being
    lowered into a well conduit so that the cleaner may be easily inserted in
    the well and then may expand to perform its cleaning function.

    (1)     Note.  The reduction of lateral dimensions must be more than that
    brought about merely by the resilience of a bristle or wire as it is
    lowered in the well.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171,    for retractable perforation cleaners.

    172,    for bow spring type cleaners.

    173,    for retractable cleaners on a fluid conducting tubing or casing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 263+, for earth cutter
    elements which are laterally shiftable (e.g., expansible) below ground.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 454+, for well swabs.


CLS 166/175
TXT Devices under subclass 170 comprising a cleaning element which can
    reciprocate longitudinally of the well relative to a centrally positioned
    member extending down into the well from the top of the well.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the cleaning element is mounted loosely on a rod so
    that as the rod is reciprocated in the well the position of the cleaning
    element varies with respect to the rod.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172,    for bow spring scrapers reciprocable relative to their supports.


CLS 166/176
TXT Devices under subclass 170 in which the cleaning element is supported on a
    sucker rod which is used to pump the well while the scraper is on it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175,    for scrapers on sucker rods, the scrapers being reciprocable
    relative to the sucker rod.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 325.1+, and the search
    there noted, for earth boring apparatus having bore well engaging means
    carried on the tool or tool shaft.


CLS 166/177.1
TXT Sonic device:

    Apparatus under the class definition wherein acoustic energy is used for
    agitating, fracturing or vibrating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 1 for processes or
    apparatus for boring the earth combined with seismic shock generation and
    subclass 56 for processes or apparatus for boring the earth including a
    relationship between the natural vibration characteristics of one boring
    element and (a) the natural vibration characteristics of another boring
    element or (b) the frequency of an imposed motion.


CLS 166/177.2
TXT With specific downhole feature:

    Sonic device under subclass 177.1 wherein the apparatus includes a
    oscillator structure; e.g., piston, stem, nozzle, diffuser; driving
    structure; e.g., linkage; or filter below ground level.


CLS 166/177.3
TXT Wiper:

    Apparatus under the class definition having a means for cleaning the
    interior surface of a tubular well member.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this subclass as a wiper, a device
    must clearly be intended to function as removing detritus.  An incidental
    wiping action of a device intended for some other use, such as a packer or
    plug, is not sufficient to cause classification here. Classification is
    then based on the other use or the characteristics of the packer or plug.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153+,   for pistons, fluid driven into the well, which wipe the walls of
    the surrounding conduit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 172+ for a piston for an
    expansible chamber device, even though disclosed as a well plunger or swab.


CLS 166/177.4
TXT Cementing device:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising specific structure for
    agitating, vibrating or mixing a slurry used to fix or adhere a pipe to a
    formation or to another pipe in a well.


CLS 166/177.5
TXT Hydraulic fracturing device:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising specific structure for
    placing a liquid to erode a formation to increase permeability.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    for devices comprising a packer or plug and a pump or plunger means
    exerting outward fluid pressure on a conduit surrounding the packer or plug
    beneath it or between a pair of packers or plugs.

    308,    for a process of fracturing a formation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 301+ for well torpedoes.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 20+
    for an expansible breaking down device for breaking up hard material in
    situ.


CLS 166/177.6
TXT Vibrator:

    Apparatus under the class definition using rapid back and forth movement
    for loosening pipes, inserting pipes, cleaning, or stimulating flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177.1+  for sonic vibrating devices.

    178,    for devices for giving a discrete blow to a well apparatus or part
    thereof to free it from the well, any vibratory effect being merely
    incidental to the intended function rather than the principal intended
    function of the device.

    249,    for processes for vibrating the earth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 56 for processes or
    apparatus for boring the earth including a relationship between the natural
    vibration characteristics of one boring element and (a) the natural
    vibration characteristics of another boring element or (b) the frequency of
    an imposed motion.


CLS 166/177.7
TXT Agitator:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising means for generating
    irregular, quick, or violent action for cleaning or stimulating flow in a
    well.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this subclass as an agitator a device
    must clearly be intended to function as removing detritus or promoting
    fluid movement.

    (2)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass is agitation caused by the
    motion of whirling or rotary nozzles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    for eduction pumps with means to force well liquid out of the pump
    while it is operating to wash the well or agitate the liquid.

    170+,   especially subclass 174 for brushing, scraping or cutting cleaners
    which may agitate the well fluid as they brush or scrape.

    177.1,  for sonic agitating means.

    178,    for devices for giving a discrete blow to a well apparatus or part
    thereof to free it from the well, any vibratory effect being merely
    incidental to the intended function rather than the principal intended
    function of the device.

    223,    for agitation caused by the motion of whirling or rotary nozzles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    366,    Agitating,  subclasses 108+ for agitating by vibration devices.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 430+, for pumps with means to agitate the pump
    fluid or prevent foreign material settling therefrom.


CLS 166/178
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising an apparatus under the class
    definition combined with a means for giving a sharp blow to the apparatus
    or part thereof to free it from the well.

    (1)     Note.  The jarring function must be specifically described for
    classification in this subclass and not left to inference.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177.1+, for agitating, wiping, vibrating or formation fracturing apparatus.

    196+,   for packers or plugs with a telescopic central support which is
    adapted to give a jarring blow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 90+, for above or below
    ground impacting devices (other than lost motion connections in an earth
    bore) of general utility for imparting blows to a tool or the like.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 293+ for below ground
    hammer or impact members, either (1) claiming a specific earth cutting
    means or having some feature related to earth boring such as a wall
    engaging guide or packer on a shaft being used in a boring operation or (2)
    comprising a lost motion connection.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 86.18 for a
    well grapple with a releasing means responsive to a jarring force and
    subclass 86.23 for a well grapple with an impact means.


CLS 166/179
TXT Devices under the class definition insertable from the top of or well into
    a well conduit and comprising:

    (1)     Means usually known as a packer and comprising a vertical or
    longitudinally extending tubular member forming a fluid passage and an
    annular means projecting from the member and blocking fluid flow either up
    or down or both in the annular space between the tubular member and the
    surrounding well conduit, said means comprising structure which goes beyond
    a mere packing assembly or (2) means usually known as a plug and comprising
    a means for blocking the flow of fluid either up or down or both in a
    surrounding well conduit by filling the bore of the conduit.

    (1)     Note.  The device must be insertable from the top of the well to
    final position in the well, and the surrounding conduit must have been
    finally positioned in the well before the device is inserted in it.  Parts
    of the device may be inserted at different times in order to be assembled
    in the well.

    (2)     Note.  The device may be arranged to stop flow in the annular space
    between a pipe and an enclosing conduit by contacting the top of a shoulder
    (e.g., a rat hole shoulder) in the conduit. The shoulder may be disclosed
    as a flat well bottom, if a sealing function is clearly disclosed.

    (3)     Note.  An annular casing or tubing shoe is considered to be a
    packer for this and indented subclasses only if it is disclosed as having a
    blocking function, and the blocking function is claimed, or if it is
    specially modified to have a blocking function and the modification is
    claimed.

    (4)     Note.  The device must be of limited extent longitudinally of the
    well.  For example, a filling of concrete extending along distance between
    concentric pipes is a part of the pipe structure rather than a packer.

    (5)     Note. The device usually forms a tight seal with the conduit, but
    if a device is disclosed as intended to function to block fluid flow the
    seal may not be tight.

    (6)     Note. Devices usually called "cement baskets" are considered to be
    "packers" for this or indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    for a lateral probe or port sealed against a well wall.

    101,    for a packer or plug and a pump or plunger means exerting outward
    pressure.

    106,    for well devices having eduction pumps and packers or plugs.

    114,    for a central member and a prepositioned packer or plug.

    115+,   for a central chamber with a packer or plug and a modified
    surrounding conduit.

    118+,   for packers or plugs and expanding anchors.

    141,    for a packer in which the sealing portion closes a port between a
    central pipe and an outside space when the sealing portion is unexpected.

    142+,   for a central chamber with a packer and a controllable passage
    between the central chamber and the space below the packer.

    153+,   for pistons fluid driven into the well.

    170+,   for brushing, scraping, cutting, or punching cleaners adapted to
    fall down a well by gravity.

    177.1+, for agitating, wiping, vibrating or fracturing means.

    315,    for methods of placing packers or plugs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 172+ for a piston for an
    expansible chamber device even though disclosed as for use as a well
    plunger or swab.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 301+ for well torpedoes with
    plugging means; and subclass 333 for plugs used in blasting.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 89+ for closures or plugs
    for pipes in general including those placed in a well conduit before the
    conduit is lowered in the well.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 200+, for closures or plugs including those
    placed in a well conduit before the conduit is lowered into the well.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 336+ for a seal intended for use in below ground well
    apparatus.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 123.3+ for seals between
    concentric pipes other than those established below ground level as
    provided for in Class 166 subclass 179.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 20+
    for an expansible breaking down device for hard material in situ, and which
    may include or comprise an expansible packer or plug.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 545+, for valved piston including valved well
    swabs.


CLS 166/180
TXT Devices under subclass 179 comprising a laterally expansible blocking
    portion (1) intended to be positioned around and form a seal with a fluid
    conducting pipe which is already in place in the well or (2) which is so
    constructed that it may be expanded and contracted in the well to form a
    seal between the surrounding conduit and an inner concentric fluid
    conducting pipe at different positions along the pipe.


CLS 166/181
TXT Devices under subclass 179 comprising means for detachably coupling the
    device to a means for lowering the device into the surrounding conduit, the
    detachable connection being such that the packer or plug may be left in the
    well while the lowering means is completely withdrawn.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for receptacles detachable from a lowering means, the detached
    portions of the receptacle and the contents of the receptacle cooperating
    to form a plug.

    123+,   for packers or plugs with expanding anchor means and detachable
    setting means.

    143+,   for packers with a controllable passage between a central chamber
    and the space below the packer, the central chamber being detachable from
    the packer.

    158,    for a screen with a washing point or shoe having a detachable wash
    pipe.

    205,    for a screen having a portion removable in the well.


CLS 166/182
TXT Devices under subclass 181 in which the sealing portion of the packer or
    plug is maintained in laterally expanded condition after the setting means
    is detached by a ratchet, dog or latch other than an expanding anchor as
    defined in subclass 206.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123+,   for packers or plugs with detachable setting means maintained in
    expanded condition by expanding anchor means.

    198,    for packers or plugs expanded by a telescoping central support, the
    packer or plug being locked in expanded condition.


CLS 166/183
TXT Devices under subclass 179 wherein the packer is adapted to be supported by
    a central conduit from the top of the well while it is being run into the
    well, the central conduit extending through the region of the blocking
    portion of the packer, and there is a fluid passage separate from the
    central conduit passageway, and through the packer blocking portion which
    fluid passage connects the space below the packer with the annular space
    above the packer, fluid flow in the passage being controllable or
    changeable by a valve, closure or changeable restriction as defined in
    subclass 224.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129+,   for devices as defined in subclass 183 with an expanding anchor
    means.

    149+,   for devices with a controllable passage between a central chamber
    and a space below a packer or plug and also a passageway between the
    central chamber and a space above the packer or plug, the said passageway
    being outside the central chamber and through the packer or plug.


CLS 166/184
TXT Devices under subclass 179 comprising a packer or plug adapted to be
    supported from the top of the well by a central conduit for insertion
    thereby into the well and a fluid passage between said central conduit and
    the annular space above the packer or plug between the central conduit and
    the surrounding conduit, fluid flow in the passage being controllable or
    changeable by a valve, a closure or a changeable restriction, as defined in
    subclass 224.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123+,   143+ and 181+, for a central conduit detachable from a packer or
    plug, a fluid passage above the packer or plug being opened when the
    central conduit is detached.

    127,    for a device comprising an expanding anchor, spaced packer or plug
    seals and a controllable passage between a central conduit and the space
    between the packer or plug seals.

    129+    and 183, for a central conduit with a packer, the conduit passage
    being continued past the packer blocking means and there being a
    controllable bypass through the packer outside of the central conduit
    passage.

    131,    for a device comprising an expanding anchor, a packer or plug and a
    controllable passage between a central conduit and the space above the
    packer or plug.

    147,    for a central conduit with spaced packer or plug seals and a
    controllable passage between the conduit and the space between packer or
    plug seals.

    149+,   for a central conduit with a packer and a controllable passage
    between the conduit and the space above the packer and also the space below
    the packer.


CLS 166/185
TXT Devices under subclass 179 comprising a packer or plug adapted to be
    supported from the top of the well by a central conduit for insertion
    thereby into the well, and a port for the passage of fluid between said
    central conduit and the space outside the conduit adjacent the packer or
    plug.

    (1)     Note.  The port may be any side opening or a restricted open end
    portion of the central conduit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    for a lateral probe or port sealed against a well wall.

    101,    for a packer or plug and pump or plunger means exerting outward
    pressure.

    106,    for a packer or plug and an eduction pump.

    126+    and 142+, for a packer with a controllable passage between a
    central conduit and the space below the packer.

    131     and 184, for a packer or plug with a controllable passage between a
    central conduit and the space above the packer.

    141,    for a packer or plug sealing portion which closes a port between a
    central conduit and the space outside when unexpanded.


CLS 166/186
TXT Devices under subclass 185 in which the port is between spaced packer or
    plug blocking or sealing means and there is a bypass passage across both
    spaced means connecting the spaces outside the central conduit with each
    other.


CLS 166/187
TXT Devices under subclass 179 wherein the packer or plug is moved into
    expanded, blocking position by means of or with the help of fluid supplied
    from a central conduit or receptacle or forced into the packer or plug by a
    pump or plunger means, the fluid while expanding the packer or plug being
    confined within the device.

    (1)     Note.  Operation of a latch by fluid pressure whereby the packer or
    plug may be expanded by other means is not included.  Such devices are
    classified on other features.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121,    for devices in which fluid pressure on a cup shaped packer expands
    it and causes it to act on an anchor to cause expansion thereof, the fluid
    while expanding the packer or plug not being confined within the device.

    122,    for devices in which fluid from a central conduit causes expansion
    of a packer or plug which acts on an anchor to cause expansion thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 331+ for an inflatable packer type seal for well
    apparatus.


CLS 166/188
TXT Devices under subclass 179 comprising a fluid passage through the packer
    with a valve, closure or changeable restriction for controlling or altering
    flow through the passage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126+    and 142+ (especially subclasses 149+) for packers with a
    controllable passage between a central tubing or receptacle and a space
    beneath the packer.

    129+    and 183, for a packer with a controllable bypass outside a central
    conduit.

    133,    for a packer with an expanding anchor and a controllable passage
    through the packer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 545+, for valved pistons including valved well
    swabs.


CLS 166/189
TXT Devices under subclass 179 in which the packer or plug seals the space
    between the surrounding conduit and two longitudinally extending members
    which are positioned in side by side relationship (not one within the
    other).

    (1)     Note.  These devices are usually packings for a pump tube and a gas
    vent pipe.  Where more structure is involved than a mere packing such a
    device is classifiable in Class 417 as a pump venting means.


CLS 166/191
TXT Devices under subclass 179 comprising spaced sealing portions on the same
    central supporting structure.

    (1)     Note.  Sealing portions separated merely by a washer or washers so
    that the sealing portions act as a unit are not considered to be spaced in
    the meaning of the definition of this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The "sealing portion" is the part which does the actual
    blocking of flow in the surrounding conduit.  It is usually of rubber or
    deformable but may be a hard machined surface.

    (3)     Note.  The sealing portions must be spaced, from any other sealing
    portion when in set, expanded condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    for relatively movable spaced packer or plug sealing portions with
    an expanding anchor.

    127,    for spaced packer or plug sealing portions and an expanding anchor
    with a controllable passage between a central chamber and a space below a
    packer.

    146     and 147, for spaced packer or plug sealing portions with a
    controllable passage between a central chamber and a space below a packer.

    186,    for spaced packer or plug sealing means with a port between a
    central conduit and a space between the packer seals and a bypass passage
    around both packer seals.


CLS 166/192
TXT Devices under subclass 179 comprising means for blocking the flow of fluid
    either up or down or both in a surrounding well conduit by completely
    filling the bore of the conduit.

    (1)     Note.  The essential elements for filling the bore should be
    claimed. For example, if a central support member for a deformable seal is
    disclosed as a solid rod and the support member is claimed classification
    is in this subclass. However, if a central support member is disclosed as a
    pipe which is closed off at one end with a deformable or other sealing
    portion claimed, classification is based on other characteristics of the
    device if subclasses are provided for such characteristics since the device
    as claimed is indistinguishable from a packer.

    (2)     Note.  The plug member as a whole may be adapted to be drilled up
    or otherwise destroyed.  If only a central portion is destroyed or is
    intended to be destroyed first the device is classifiable in subclass 188.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for plugs formed by leaving a receptacle as defined in subclass 162
    or part thereof in the well.

    132     and 135, for plugs combined with expanding anchor means.

    153+,   for pistons, fluid driven into the well.

    187,    for plugs expanded by fluid from a central conduit, pump or plunger.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 301+ for well torpedoes with
    plugging means; and subclass 333 for plugs used in blasting.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 89 for pipe closures and plugs
    of general utility, including those placed in a well conduit before the
    conduit is lowered into the well.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 233+ for expansible plug type closures.


CLS 166/193
TXT Devices under subclass 192 comprising an element which does not closely
    contact the conduit wall and is intended to be dropped or floated down the
    surrounding conduit (rather than let down by a supporting string) till it
    strikes a shoulder on the conduit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153+,   for piston devices which closely engage the conduit wall and are
    forced down by fluid pressure.


CLS 166/194
TXT Devices under subclass 193 comprising a sleeve portion which is moved by
    the plug or is moved due to fluid pressure or other means made effective by
    the presence of the plug, the sleeve portion being carried by the
    surrounding conduit and acting to open or close ports in the conduit walls
    for fluid passage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154,    for conduit valves operated by a piston, fluid driven into the well,


CLS 166/195
TXT Devices under subclass 179 in which the expansible portion is made of a
    deformable nonmetallic or soft metallic material and is adapted to engage
    an inwardly projecting shoulder on the surrounding conduit.

    (1)     Note.  The shoulder may be the bottom of the conduit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    for a central chamber with a packer or plug claimed in combination
    with a modified surrounding conduit.

    192+,   for plugs having a deformable portion engaging a surrounding
    conduit shoulder.

    201,    for packers having a rigid ring portion which engages a conduit
    shoulder and rides up on a pipe to expand a deformable sealing portion.


CLS 166/196
TXT Devices under subclass 179 comprising either (1) a central support for the
    deformable sealing portion comprising telescoping sections whereby relative
    longitudinal movement of this section causes expansion of the sealing
    portion or (2) a central support for the deformable sealing portion having
    projecting portions relatively movable towards each other to cause
    expansion of the sealing portion.

    (1)     Note.  The central support is usually a pipe which extends beyond
    the ends of the deformable sealing portion in a longitudinal direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118+,   especially subclasses 134 through 140, for devices in which
    projecting portions on a central support, which causes expansion of a
    deformable sealing portion, comprise expanding anchor means.

    195,    for packers of the telescoping support type in which the deformable
    portion of the packer engages a shoulder on the surrounding conduit.


CLS 166/202
TXT Devices under subclass 179 in which the laterally expansible blocking
    portion of the device has one end thereof attached to and adjacent to a
    central pipe support and the other longitudinally displaced end portion
    spaced from the support axis and in which the blocking portion is flexible
    or hinged to the support whereby the fluid pressure of the fluid, the flow
    of which is being stopped, tends to cause the spaced end portion to engage
    the enclosing conduit more tightly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121,    for cup type packer seals which transmit fluid pressure to move
    expanding anchors to set position.

    153+,   for pistons, fluid driven into the well with cup type seals.

    199     and 201, for packers in which sleeve or shoulder parts spread one
    end of a deformable sealing portion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 172+, and particularly
    subclasses 240+ for a piston in which the side wall portion thereof is
    provided with a peripheral axially extending flexible lip (e.g., cup type).

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclass 335 for a seal for well apparatus having an axially
    facing cup shape.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 545+, for valved pistons including valved well
    swabs.


CLS 166/203
TXT Devices under subclass 179 comprising nondeformable portions (e.g., a hard
    metal) forming the blocking means between the inner supporting member and
    the outer conduit.

    (1)     Note.  Casing shoes or the like are classified in this subclass if
    the blocking or sealing function of the shoe is disclosed and this function
    or the structure performing the function is claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161,    for casing shoes with cutting, scraping or reaming means.

    192+,   for nondeformable plugs.

    204,    for metallic rings used to prevent extrusion of a deformable
    sealing portion of a packer or plug, such rings forming a secondary
    blocking means.


CLS 166/205
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising a screen as defined in
    subclass 227 combined with (1) a valve, closure or changeable restrictor as
    defined in subclass 224, (2) a destroyable portion or (3) a screen part
    removable from the well while the screen remains in the well.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143+,   for screens with packers and detachable setting means, there being
    a valve closure or changeable restriction between the conduit of the
    setting means and the space below the packer.

    157+,   for screens with washing point or shoes provided with valves.

    181+,   for screens with packers and detachable setting means.

    231+,   for spiral screens constructed so that the space between the
    spirals may be varied.

    296,    for processes for preventing flow into a strainer while it is being
    lowered by blocking the strainer openings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 544+ for fluid handling means of general
    utility combined with screens.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 418+ for filters of
    general utility with flow controllers, and see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 166/206
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising (1) a means attached to a
    member which is run into a well conduit already in fixed position in the
    well, the means being movable outwardly to engage and jam against the
    surrounding conduit wall or to interlock in a preformed recess in the
    conduit, the means functioning to attach the member to the conduit in the
    well so as to resist action of gravity or a lifting force or (2) a section
    of casing which is expansible in the well.

    (1)     Note.  The outwardly movable means usually have teeth that bite
    into the surrounding conduit wall and serve to fix the device in the well
    conduit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174,    for expansible brushing or scraping cleaners.

    179+,   for expansible packers or plugs.

    241,    for devices which frictionally engage or press against the wall of
    a surrounding conduit and offer some resistance to longitudinal movement
    but are not interlocked with or jammed against the wall of the conduit to
    form an anchor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 98+ for an earth boring
    means having a below ground drive motor with an expansible bore wall
    engaging anchor, subclass 230 for other earth boring apparatus with an
    expanding bore wall engaging anchor and subclasses 263+ for earth boring
    cutter elements which are laterally shiftable (e.g., expansible) below
    ground.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 123.3+ for joints between
    concentric pipes not established below ground level in a well as provided
    for in Class 166, subclass 206.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 86.24+ for
    internally expanding well grapples, and subclasses 93+ for internally
    expanding grapples of general utility.  Sole disclosure of, or a statement
    in a claim of use as a grapple is enough for classification Class 294.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 20+
    for an expansible breaking down device for hard material in situ which may
    be structurally similar to an anchor.

    417,    Pumps, appropriate subclasses for well pumps with expanding anchor
    means where there is only a nominal recitation of a pump, pump barrel or
    tubing in a claim to a device including an expanding anchor classification
    is in Class 166 in this or indented subclasses.


CLS 166/207
TXT Devices under subclass 206 in which the outwardly movable means comprises a
    section of casing which is expansible in the well.


CLS 166/208
TXT Devices under subclass 206 specifically disclosed for anchoring a liner to
    the surrounding well conduit against movement up or down or both.


CLS 166/209
TXT Devices under subclass 206 in which setting the outwardly movable means by
    engagement with an element that forces the outwardly movable means into
    contact with the surrounding conduit during running in the member by a
    quick downward motion of the member, no other motion or act of an attendant
    being required for movement of the outwardly movable means to the final
    position and the outwardly movable means being anchorable to the
    surrounding conduit at any point thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118,    for a packer or plug and expansible anchor set by a dropping
    movement only.


CLS 166/210
TXT Devices under subclass 209 which comprise a friction means with the
    outwardly movable means shiftable to the final position after or during a
    turning movement of the running in member, so that the outwardly movable
    means may be anchored either by a quick downward movement of the running in
    member or also may be anchored after or during a turning movement of the
    running in member.


CLS 166/211
TXT Devices under subclass 209 in which the stored energy of a spring is used
    to effect all or part of the movement of the outwardly movable means to the
    final position.

    (1)     Note.  A spring used only as a friction drag does not come within
    the definition.


CLS 166/212
TXT Devices under subclass 206 in which the outwardly shiftable means is
    movable to or from the final position by means of the force exerted by the
    pressure of a fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55.8,   for well pipe cutters which are moved radially outward by fluid
    pressure.

    120+,   for packers or plugs and expanding anchors actuated by fluid
    pressure.

    187,    for packers or plugs expanded by fluid from a central conduit, pump
    or plunger.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 180 for an expanding mandrel inside a hollow
    workpiece, subclass 191 for an active cutter inside hollow workpiece, and
    subclasses 639.1+ for a fluid-pressure actuated reciprocatable cutting tool.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 99 for a below ground
    drive motor for an earth boring apparatus which is anchored to the bore
    wall by a fluid operated expansible anchor, and subclasses 267+ for
    laterally shiftable cutter elements which are shifted by fluid pressure.


CLS 166/213
TXT Devices under subclass 206 in which the movable means is secured to a
    central support at each end and bowed outwardly intermediate the ends.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241.1,  for devices of similar form which are not jammed against the wall
    surrounding conduit.


CLS 166/214
TXT Devices under subclass 206 in which the energy stored in a spring is used
    to move the movable means outwardly to anchor the device in the conduit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136,    for spring set expansible anchors combined with packers or plugs.


CLS 166/215
TXT Devices under subclass 214 in which the spring causes relative movement
    between an element      that forces the outwardly movable means into
    contact with the surrounding conduit and the outwardly movable means  to
    shift the means radially.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137,    for packers or plugs combined with expansible anchors set by a
    spring causing relative movement between the anchor and a wedge or cam.


CLS 166/216
TXT Devices under subclass 206 comprising a combination of a friction means and
    an element that         forces the outwardly movable means into contact
    with the surrounding conduit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138+,   for devices comprising a friction drag, a wedge or cam moved
    expansible anchor means and a packer or plug.

    210,    for anchors set at any point by drop only and also set by a turning
    movement, the setting means comprising a wedge or cam and also a friction
    drag.


CLS 166/217
TXT Devices under subclass 206 in which the outwardly movable means is
    translated radially due to relative movement between it and an element that
    forces the outwardly movable means into contact with the surrounding
    conduit surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120+,   for wedge or cam actuated slips set by fluid pressure.

    209+,   for wedge or cam actuated expanding anchors set at any point in the
    well by a sudden lowering.

    215,    for a wedge or cam and an expanding anchor operated by a spring.

    216,    for expansible means with a wedge or cam and a friction drag.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 86.25 for cam
    spread, expanding jaw, well grapples, and subclasses 93+ for cam spread
    expanding jaw grapples of general utility.


CLS 166/222
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising means for directing fluid
    outwardly into the well from a tubing or casing, said means comprising more
    than a mere opening in a wall and (1) acting to give a whirling or
    tangential motion to the fluid, or (2) positioned in a side wall of the
    tubing or casing rather than being an end opening, or (3) said means being
    capable of being projected from the tubing or casing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99,     for junk retrieving means having nozzles for directing fluid
    outwardly from the junk catcher.

    112,    for eduction pumps with nozzles for spraying the well walls.

    157+,   for screens with washing points or shoes.

    169,    for receptacles having lateral ports for the discharge of fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 424 for earth boring
    jetting or suction nozzles.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses
    for fluid spraying and discharging devices of general utility.


CLS 166/223
TXT Devices under subclass 222 in which the means for directing the fluid turns
    about an axis on the casing or tubing or is capable of being projected from
    the tubing or casing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    for well devices with a lateral probe or port sealed against the
    well wall.


CLS 166/227
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising means, usually strainers or
    filters, for separating solids from the earth fluid flowing into a well
    conduit.

    (1)     Note.  A strainer may comprise no more than a pipe with a
    multiplicity of perforations.  The disclosed use is the important factor
    for classification herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157+,   for screens and washing points or shoes.

    171,    for screens with mechanical perforation cleaners.

    205,    for screens with a valve, closure, changeable restrictor or
    removable portion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 544+ for fluid handling apparatus of
    general utility combined with screens.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 41 for flow restrictors of
    general utility combined with screens.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 314 for earth boring
    apparatus with a well type screen including jetting or well points.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 459+ for a filter of
    general utility attached to a pipe end, subclasses 483+ for filter
    elements, and subclasses 500.1+ for filter materials.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, for rotary expansible chamber
    type pumps or motors, per se.  As between Classes 166 and 210 a patent is
    placed in Class 166 if its sole disclosed or claimed use is merely as a
    well screen or well filter for earth fluids, whether disclosed on a casing
    or tubing.  Class 210, however, takes patents for filters or screens of
    general utility and also those specifically disclosed as pump or pipe
    intakes positioned within a well and not forming a casing of the well.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 131+ for a
    stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or sheet
    in which at least one component is perforated or reticulated, and
    subclasses 304.4+ for a composite web or sheet product in which one
    component is porous or cellular.


CLS 166/228
TXT Devices under subclass 227 comprising a straining portion made up of a mass
    of material having fine, irregularly shaped or tortuous pores or channels.

    (1)     Note.  The material is usually a body of gravel, sand or porous
    concrete.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for apparatus for placing porous beds.

    230,    for screens using woven fabric (wire mesh) to form straining
    openings.

    276,    for a process for providing a porous mass of adhered filter
    material in the well.

    278,    for a process of graveling or filter forming.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 496 for shaped porous
    filter elements of general utility, and subclass 510.1 for a filter
    material comprising a porous unitary mass.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 304.4+ for a
    stock material product in the form of a composite sheet or web, in which
    one component is porous or cellular.


CLS 166/229
TXT Devices under subclass 227 comprising an element of limited extent such as
    a plug having a straining opening or openings and positioned at least
    partially within a hole or recess in a conduit wall.


CLS 166/230
TXT Devices under subclass 227 comprising a woven fabric providing straining
    openings between the element of the fabric.

    (1)     Note.  A "wire mesh screen" will be presumed to be a "woven fabric"
    unless described as not woven.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229,    for screens in which a woven fabric forms a plug member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 175+, 190,
    193, 196+ for other products comprises a layer of mechanically interengaged
    strands, which may be open mesh.

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 19, 29, 43+, and 58 for a coated or impregnated open mesh fabric.


CLS 166/231
TXT Devices under subclass 227 comprising a helically wound element which
    provides straining openings between turns of the element, or (2) has
    straining openings provided in it or (3) provides straining opening between
    itself and a base member to which it is secured.


CLS 166/232
TXT Devices under subclass 231 in which the helical element is provided with
    spaced lugs to engage an adjacent turn of the element in order to position
    the turns to form straining openings.

    (1)     Note.  The spaced lugs may be formed by spaced recesses in the edge
    of the helical element.


CLS 166/233
TXT Devices under subclass 231 combined with a pipe having solid walls formed
    with perforations cooperating with the straining openings of the helical
    element to pass the strained fluid.

    (1)     Note.  A skeleton structure built in the shape of a pipe is not
    considered a solid pipe with perforations.  See subclasses 231 and 232 for
    such structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232,    for screens having a perforated pipe and a helical element and in
    which the helical element has spacing lugs.


CLS 166/234
TXT Devices under subclass 227 comprising elongated solid elements which
    provide (1) straining openings between each other, or (2) straining
    openings between themselves and a base member to which they are secured, or
    (3) straining openings in themselves.

    (1)     Note.  The elongated solid element may be curved but is not a
    complete annulus.  However, several separate elongated elements may be
    welded or otherwise secured together to form an annular unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231+,   for screens comprising spiral elongated elements providing
    straining openings.

    235,    for screens comprising integral annular elongated elements
    providing straining openings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 105+ for a
    stock material product in the form of a composite sheet or web including
    layers of angularly related strips or strands (e.g., rods, filaments, etc.).


CLS 166/235
TXT Devices under subclass 227 comprising a vertically aligned assembly of
    annular units which provide straining openings between themselves or at
    least two of which have straining openings in themselves.


CLS 166/236
TXT Devices under subclass 227 comprising a plurality of concentrically
    positioned pipe sections at least one of which has straining openings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228,    for concentric pipes with porous material therebetween.

    230,    for screens in which a concentric pipe section is made of a woven
    fabric such as a wire mesh.

    232     and 233, for screens in which a concentric pipe section is made of
    a spiral element providing straining openings.

    234,    for screens in which one or more concentric pipes are made of
    elongated elements providing straining openings.


CLS 166/237
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising means for preventing relative
    movement between two parts and manipulable to permit relative movement, or
    means to permit relative movement and manipulable to prevent relative
    movement, the change in condition between movement prevention and movement
    permission being for the purpose of enabling operation of some device in a
    well (e.g., setting a packer) and the two parts always remaining connected
    in the well by other means.

    (1)     Note.  Devices which include mere end stops to limit motion are not
    included in this subclass.  See subclass 241.1 for centering devices which
    include stops for limiting the sliding movement of the centering means on
    their supports.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63      and subclasses there noted, for well devices with detents released
    by an explosive means.

    162+    and subclasses there noted, for well receptacles with latch devices
    for valves and closures.

    182     and 198, for detents holding the telescopic supports of packers or
    plugs locked in order to hold the packers or plugs expanded.

    206+    and subclasses there noted, for expansible anchors coacting with a
    pre-positioned conduit.

    216     for devices comprising an expanding anchor and friction drag with a
    detent means to prevent setting of the anchor till a desired location is
    reached.

    241.1+  and subclasses there noted, for centering devices.

    332.1+  and subclasses there noted, for valve devices with actuating means
    engaging the well bottom, an obstruction or wall.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 2+ and 527+ for trips and
    detents of general utility.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 30+ for clutches of
    general utility.


CLS 166/238
TXT Devices under subclass 237 in which the movement prevention means extends
    completely across a well conduit but permits fluid to flow past the means,
    the means acting to control relative movement between the conduit and
    another part.

    (1)     Note.  A separate movable part, such as a go-devil, between two
    detent means is not considered within the definition of this subclass.  See
    other subclasses in this group for such devices.


CLS 166/239
TXT Devices under subclass 237 in which the movement prevention means is set in
    operation by a falling weight (e.g., a go-devil).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153+,   for fluid driven pistons operating detent means.

    193+,   for dropped ball type plugs operating detent means.

    238,    for a weight operated movement preventing means comprising an
    element bridging a fluid conduit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 268, 270 and 271 for
    earth cutting elements which are laterally shiftable below ground (e.g.,
    expansible) by a dropped element.


CLS 166/240
TXT Devices under subclass 237 comprising a lug on one part moveable in a
    branched slot having a continuous perimeter on the other part, so that
    though the lug is always in the slot, movement of the parts (at least in
    some directions) is prevented in one position of the lug and permitted in
    another position.


CLS 166/241.1
TXT GUIDE FOR DEVICE OR CONDUIT:
    Apparatus under the Class definition comprising positioning means attached
    to and projecting laterally beyond (1) a tool; (2) a fluid moving
    structure; or (3) a fluid conveying means (i.e., tubing) to centralize
    within the well the tool, fluid moving structure, or fluid conveying means.

     (1)    Note.  Included are centralizing means that press against the inner
    wall of the conduit to form a stationary point of reference for
    manipulation of the well device, but may be moved longitudinally with
    respect to the well if enough force is applied.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass are devices for centrally
    positioning a casing during a cementing operation.

    (3)     Note. Included in this subclass are discreet guides for either
    connecting (1) two spaced well devices or fluid conveying portions, or (2)
    terminating either the device or fluid conveying means, and which require
    the well device or fluid conveying means to be fabricated for the purpose
    of holding the guide.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138+,   for a friction drag combined with a packer or plug and an
    expansible anchor.

    153+,   for pistons propelled by fluid in a well conduit.

    166,    for receptacles with centering devices engaging the wall of a well
    conduit to operate a valve.

    170+,   especially 172, for centering devices combined with scraping or
    brushing means.

    179+,   for packers or plugs.

    206+,   for an anchoring device which is jammed against the wall of a
    surrounding conduit or interlock therewith, especially subclasses 210 and
    216 for anchoring devices with wedges and friction drags and subclass 213
    for anchors similar to centering devices, but jammed against the
    surrounding conduit wall.

    332.1+, for valves in combination with friction devices engaging a well
    conduit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 325.1+ for earth boring
    apparatus having bore wall engaging means carried on the tool or tool
    shaft, particularly subclass 325.3 for bearings.

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 29+ for a cylindrical linear bearing of
    general use; if bore hole contacting structure is disclosed or claimed,
    placement is in Class 175, subclasses 325.1+.


CLS 166/241.2
TXT On sucker or pump rod:
    Apparatus under subclass 241.1 in which a fluid moving structure is
    positioned centrally within a fluid conveying means.


CLS 166/241.3
TXT Rotatable or having a rotatable element:
    Apparatus under subclass 241.2 where the centralizer includes an element
    that turns about an axis.


CLS 166/241.4
TXT Surrounding existing rod:
    Apparatus under subclass 241.2 where the centralizer encircles and is
    secured to a fluid moving structure having no alteration to accommodate the
    centralizer.


CLS 166/241.5
TXT For a wireline operation:
    Apparatus under subclass 241.1 in which the guide is peculiarly adapted to
    be employed with equipment for well logging or surveying.


CLS 166/241.6
TXT Surrounding existing device or tubing:
    Apparatus under subclass 241.1 where the guide encircles either (1) the
    fluid conveying means or (2) the tool.

    (1)     Note.  Included under tool would be, for example, cable cutters, or
    drift recorders.


CLS 166/241.7
TXT Removably secured by a fastener (e.g., pin) parallel to the
    tubing:Apparatus under subclass 241.6 in which the means holding the guide
    to the existing fluid conveying means or device is readily taken out along
    the tubing length.


CLS 166/242.1
TXT CONDUIT WALL OR SPECIFIC CONDUIT END STRUCTURE:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising (a) a particular
    modification to a pipe through the thickness or (b) means at the end of a
    conduit for facilitating entry of the conduit into the well (e.g., casing
    shoes).

    (1)     Note.  Claims to a plurality of well conduits may be classified
    here, but conduits with attachments thereon other than shoes are classified
    in subclass 243 or other subclasses according to the features claimed.

    (2)     Note.  Couplings for conduit sections are considered parts of the
    conduit wall structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227+,   for conduit structure comprising or combined with a screen or
    filter.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 100+ for pipe structure of
    general utility.


CLS 166/242.2
TXT Flexible tube or cable:

    Conduit wall structure under subclass 242.1 comprising a pliant thin-walled
    pipe; e.g., coiled tubing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77.2+,  for forcing coiled tubing into an existing well.

    385,    for a method of placing or shifting a well part using a flexible
    cable or wire.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 118+ for flexible pipe
    structure of general utility.


CLS 166/242.3
TXT Plural parallel nonconcentric conduits:

    Conduit wall structure under subclass 242.1 comprising at least two side by
    side, coaxial pipes.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are pipes of dissimilar diameter;
    e.g., hydraulic lines, control lines, flushing tubing, grouting tube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89.2,   for inner member anchor or seal with lateral port using parallel
    pipes.

    97.5,   for parallel pipes extending through distinct paths through
    wellhead.

    242.5,  for side entry.

    313,    for a method for parallel string or multiple completion of well.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 120.1+ for plural
    non-communicating paths.


CLS 166/242.4
TXT Corrosion prevention or deterring:

    Conduit wall structure under subclass 242.1 comprising specific wall
    structure for averting or slowing deterioration due to reaction with water,
    pollutants, or salt spray.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250.05, for a method of scale or corrosion determination.

    250.11, for a method of locating coupon holders.

    902,    for corrosion inhibiting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, Digest 6 for corrosion prevention.


CLS 166/242.5
TXT Side entry:

    Conduit wall structure under subclass 242.1 comprising means for
    introducing an; e.g., cable or conduit, into the conduit wall through a
    bulged or enlarged section of the conduit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65.1+,  for side entry of electrical cable.

    117.5+, for side pocket mandrel and means for guiding into a side pocket.

    255.3,  for determining location or position of whipstocks


CLS 166/242.6
TXT Downhole coupling or connector:

    Conduit wall structure under subclass 242.1 comprising a specific joining
    structure for two conduit sections.

    (1)     Note.  Couplings for conduit sections are considered parts of the
    conduit wall structure.


CLS 166/242.7
TXT Telescopic:

    Coupling for conduit wall structure under subclass 242.6 wherein the
    coupling allows relative axial movement between two conduit wall sections.


CLS 166/242.8
TXT Shoe detail:

    End structure under subclass 242.1 comprising the particular shape, design,
    construction, or configuration of the means at the terminus of a conduit
    for facilitating entry of the conduit into the well (e.g., cementing shoes).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156,    for casing shoes with stop means for pistons, fluid driven into the
    well.

    157+,   for screens with a washing point or shoe.

    203,    for conduit shoes specifically formed and claimed as packers.

    222+,   for shoes with nozzles for whirling or lateral discharge or
    projectable nozzles.

    316+,   for conduits with valves, closures or changeable restrictors,
    especially subclasses 327+ for shoes with check valves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 402 for casing shoe type
    earth cutting bits.


CLS 166/242.9
TXT Brick or cement casing liner:

    Conduit wall structure under subclass 242.1 wherein the conduit wall is
    formed of a hardened clay or powdered alumina, silica, lime, iron oxide and
    magnesia material used in; e.g., water wells.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 19+, and 169.1+,
    for a masonry construction, per se, surrounding an open space which may be
    defined as forming a cistern or well.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 132+ for tunnel
    structure and structure of shafts of general utility; and subclasses 231+
    for columnar foundation structures (e.g., pier, pile) and methods and
    apparatus for installing the same.


CLS 166/243
TXT Devices under the class definition not provided for in other subclasses.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass are found, for example, tubing supports of
    types other than those found in subclasses 206+, catchers for falling
    objects and go-devils.


CLS 166/244.1
TXT Processes:

    A process under the class definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 1 for processes of handling material in a
    pipe line including forming or maintaining a film on the interior of the
    pipe.

    507,    Earth Boring, Well Treating, and Oil Field Chemistry, subclasses
    200+ for processes involving no significant manipulative steps or
    relationship with the well and consisting only of placing a treating
    material in a well.  Examples of broadly recited steps which are not
    considered significantly manipulative are (a) generally producing the well
    or (b) broad removal of spent material.  Examples of processes classifiable
    in Class 166 rather than Class 507 are:  using pressure; introducing one
    material after another; introducing materials through separate conduits;
    introducing material at the bottom of the well or below paraffin deposits;
    contacting well fluids with an introduced material during pumping;
    producing or blowing the well; a process in which materials are introduced
    into a well to react with each other (including a process in which one
    material reacts with the product of the reaction between another material
    and a material found in the well); a process in which a material is
    introduced in a special location, as between the casing and tubing; or a
    process in which material is inserted into the pores of the earth.


CLS 166/245
TXT A process under subclass 244.1 in which an arrangement of more than two
    wells in plan view is claimed with enough specificity to indicate a pattern
    of wells (e.g., two lines of wells, one well surrounded by a ring of other
    wells, etc.).


CLS 166/246
TXT A process under subclass 244.1 in which a biological organism of
    microscopic or ultramicroscopic size (e.g., bacteria, etc.) is used.

    (1)     Note.  A process involving using a bactericide or the like to treat
    any microorganism which may be present but which is not introduced as a
    part of the process is not included under this definition.  Such a process
    is classifiable on other features.


CLS 166/247
TXT A process under subclass 244.1 comprising (1) using nuclear energy or (2)
    using radioactivity of a substance to effect some treating operation (e.g.,
    heating the formation, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Nuclear energy in this subclass is energy created by an
    induced nuclear reaction as described in the class definition of Class 376,
    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements.  Patents
    which claim well processes which recite a nuclear reactor or details of the
    nuclear explosive are provided for in Class 376, subclasses 273+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248,    for a process involving using electromagnetic waves to treat the
    earth by heating it.

    299,    for a process using a non-nuclear explosion.


CLS 166/248
TXT A process under subclass 244.1 comprising passing an electric current
    through the earth to treat it or material in the pores of the earth (e.g.,
    by heating, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Electromagnetic Waves created in the earth to treat it are
    considered to come within the definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247,    for processes for treating the earth by radioactive emissions.

    250.1+, for processes in which a current may be passed through the earth
    for the purpose of an indicating, testing, measuring or locating step.


CLS 166/249
TXT A process under subclass 244.1 in which rapidly pulsating forces of a
    mechanical nature are applied to the earth, material in the pores of the
    earth or material being injected into the pores of the earth.

    (1)     Note.  The rapid pulsations must be in the sonic or ultrasonic
    range, i.e., at least 15 cycles per second.  Some disclosures do not recite
    the rapidity of the vibrations.  If, however, it is concluded that the
    intent of the disclosure is to cover sonic or ultrasonic vibrations, the
    patent should be classified under this definition.

    (2)     Note.  A single explosion, implosion or blow may be followed by
    rapid pulsations but such subject matter is not included under this
    definition unless explosions or blows are repeated at sonic or ultrasonic
    frequencies. See subclass 299 for a process including an explosion, or
    implosion by breaking a container.

    (3)     Note.  Vibrations applied to the earth merely for measuring,
    testing, indicating, etc., are not included.  A process with such steps
    would be classifiable in subclasses 250.1+.

    (4)     Note.  A process involving incidental vibration of the earth or
    material in the earth, such as may take place when cementitious material or
    gravel in a well is vibrated are not included.  The stated purpose of the
    process must be to impart vibrations or pulsations to the earth or material
    in or being placed in the pores of the earth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286,    for a cementing process including vibrating the cement being placed
    in a well bore rather than in the pores of the earth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclass 14 for
    mining processes involving breaking down material by vibrating.


CLS 166/250.01
TXT With indicating, testing, measuring or locating:

    Process under subclass 244.1 including a step of: providing evidence of a
    condition; e.g., leak, oil-gas interface; performing an analysis; e.g.,
    downhole pressure; counting; or determining the position of an object or
    formation.

    (1)     Note.  A process including a mere step(s) of indicating, detecting,
    signaling, recording or measuring wherein the result is not related to any
    other step in the claim is not classifiable here.

    (2)     Note.  A process involving merely taking a sample of earth fluid is
    not included under this definition. See subclass 264 for such a process.

    (3)     Note.  A process in which an inherent measuring step or the like
    would take place, such as a process involving the use of a fluid at a
    certain temperature, is not classified under this definition unless a
    separate step of making the measurement, or the like, is recited in a
    claim. Further, many well processes inherently give a signal or indication
    when some well function is performed, such as a pressure rise taking place
    when a plug closes an opening in a cementing operation. Such processes,
    also, are not classified under this definition unless some added indicating
    step is claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for well apparatus combined with time or distance measuring or
    counting means.

    66,     for well apparatus combined with electrical indicating means.

    113,    for below ground devices comprising well apparatus combined with
    non-electrical indicating, testing or measuring means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 302, for processes of sensing and
    indicating borehole direction or inclination, and subclasses 717+ sounding
    devices combined with samplers not for well fluids.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 152.02+ for miscellaneous tests
    and measurements relating to wells. Class 73 takes a process relating to
    measuring or testing including steps relating to well features for
    perfecting the measuring or testing process while Class 166 takes a more
    comprehensive process relating to well conditions or structure which
    includes a measuring or testing step.


    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 4.51 for a gun or
    explosive charge perforating means or step which inherently results in
    penetration of the earth in combination with a position orienting or
    indicating means or step, contributing to the effect of the perforating or
    penetrating means or step, subclasses 40+ for processes or apparatus for
    earth boring including signaling, indicating, testing or measuring and
    especially subclass 45 for tool direction or inclination measuring or
    indicating within the bore hole.

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 101+ for acoustic devices in wells or
    seismological prospecting.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 83+ for ray energy detection or
    measurement.


    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclasses 323+ for subject
    matter relating to the determination of an electrical characteristic of the
    subsurface of the earth.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 500+ for electrical
    automatic condition responsive indicating systems, and subclasses 853.1+
    for well bore signaling systems.

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclass 22 for transmission through media other
    than air or free space, and subclass 459 for radar systems in wells.

    346,    Recorders, subclass 33 for well logging.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 422 for
    the application of well logging which requires a mathematical calculation
    and only nominal recitation to the structure of well logging, and subclass
    804 for the mathematical simulation of a fluid well.

    367,    Communications, Electrical: Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 25+ for seismic well logging; subclasses 81+ for acoustic
    wellbore telemetering; and subclass 86 for acoustic borehole testing.

    436,    Chemistry: Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 25+ for
    geochemical, geological, or geothermal exploration. A nominal step in a
    claim, reciting drilling a well or recovering fluid from the earth does not
    affect classification of a patent in Class 436.


CLS 166/250.02
TXT Permeability determining:

    Measuring under subclass 250.01 including the step(s) of ascertaining the
    ease with which a fluid can flow through a formation.


CLS 166/250.03
TXT Determining fluid interface or fluid level:

    Measuring under subclass 250.01 including the step(s) of indicating a
    liquid-gas contact or a depth of a gas or liquid within a well.


CLS 166/250.04
TXT Plug indicating or releasing:

    Indicating under subclass 250.01 including the step(s) of  monitoring the
    position or disengagement of a flow stopping device.


CLS 166/250.05
TXT Scale or corrosion determination:

    Indicating under subclass 250.01 including the step(s) of finding detritus
    or deterioration due to reaction with water, pollutants, or salt spray.


CLS 166/250.06
TXT Steam quality:

    Testing under subclass 250.01 including the step(s) of finding the degree
    of superiority of superheated water vapor.


CLS 166/250.07
TXT Bottom hole pressure:

    Testing under subclass 250.01 including the step(s) of determining weight
    per volume at the well total depth.


CLS 166/250.08
TXT Leak testing or locating:

    Testing or locating under subclass 250.01 including the step(s) of finding
    a  nongeological fault allowing the escape of fluid or solids.


CLS 166/250.09
TXT Impression means:

    Measuring under subclass 250.01 including the step(s) of taking an imprint
    of the formation.


CLS 166/250.1
TXT Fracturing characteristic:

    Measuring or indicating under subclass 250.01 including the step(s) of
    determining the orientation, width, length, or pressure of the result of
    placing a liquid or particulate material to erode a formation to increase
    permeability.


CLS 166/250.11
TXT Holder for coupon or sensor:

    Indicating under subclass 250.01 including the step(s) of using or
    installing a device to retain (a) a metal member to monitor the effect of
    corrosion or (b) a detector within a well.


CLS 166/250.12
TXT Tracer:

    Indicating under subclass 250.01 involving the use of an easily detectable
    material (e.g., dye, inert gas, halocarbons, cobalt-57, carbon dioxide).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252.6,  for tracing material with a driving fluid.


CLS 166/250.13
TXT Determining stuck point:

    Indicating under subclass 250.01 including the step(s) of finding  where an
    object (tool, tubing, etc.) is caught in a well.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98+,    for apparatus for removing objects from a well.

    301,    for method of releasing a stuck object.


CLS 166/250.14
TXT Of cementing or plugging technique:

    Measuring under subclass 250.01 including the step(s) of determining the
    quality or ingredients of (a) pipe to formation or pipe to pipe sealing or
    adhering strength or (b) pipe stopper strength.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    285+,   for a cementing process.


CLS 166/250.15
TXT Automatic control for production:

    Measuring under subclass 250.01 including the step(s) of using a sensor to
    regulate outgoing gas or oil without an operator.


CLS 166/250.16
TXT Prospecting:

    Locating under subclass 250.01 including the step(s) of finding the
    presence of hydrocarbons from water or earth samples.


CLS 166/250.17
TXT Including testing or treating tool having at least one actuatable packer:

    Testing under subclass 250.01 including the step(s) of using an apparatus
    with a single or plurality of inflatable sealing devices that reduce or
    stop flow to monitor well parameters or change a well condition.


CLS 166/251.1
TXT Including in situ combustion:

    Indicating under subclass 250.01 including a step of burning in the pores
    of the formation.

    (1)     Note.  ``Burning" under this definition is a vigorous union of a
    substance with oxygen, but does not include an explosion.


CLS 166/252.1
TXT Including production of earth fluid by driving fluid:

    Indicating under subclass 250.01 in which liquid or gas in the pores of the
    formation, before the start of the process, is caused to be pushed towards
    a well by another liquid or gas for flowing to the surface of the earth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251.1,  for an in situ combustion process involving indicating, testing,
    measuring or locating.

    268+,   for a process of flooding.


CLS 166/252.2
TXT Residual oil or oil saturation:

    Production of earth fluid by driving fluid under subclass 252.1 including
    the step(s) of determining liquid hydrocarbon remains or suffusion.


CLS 166/252.3
TXT Salinity or acidity:

    Production of earth fluid by driving fluid under subclass 252.1 including
    the step(s) of determining the amount of (a) a compound that results when,
    in an acid, the hydrogen is replaced by a metallic element or compound or
    (b) a compound containing hydrogen in a fluid.


CLS 166/252.4
TXT Flood front:

    Production of earth fluid by driving fluid under subclass 252.1 including
    step(s) of monitoring a leading fluid in a process of pushing hydrocarbons
    into a well using liquid or gas.


CLS 166/252.5
TXT Permeability or viscosity:

    Production of earth fluid by driving fluid under subclass 252.1 including
    step(s) of determining a measure of the ease with which a fluid can flow
    through a formation or a property of a fluid that causes the fluid to tend
    to hold together as during flow.


CLS 166/252.6
TXT And tracing material:

    Production of earth fluid by driving fluid under subclass 252.1 including
    step(s) of using an easily detectable composition (e.g., dye, inert gas,
    halocarbons, cobalt-57, carbon dioxide).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250.12, for a method of measuring, testing, indicating, or locating using a
    tracer not requiring the use of a drive fluid.


CLS 166/253.1
TXT Indicating the location, presence or absence of cement:

    A process under subclass 250.01 including a step of determining or
    indicating the position, diffusion or existence of plugging or
    consolidating material.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this subclass a process must have a
    step which relates directly to the subject matter rather than to some step
    from which the position, presence or absence of cement, etc., may be
    deduced. For example, a step of logging a well may indicate the location to
    receive cement after a cementing operation, or the process may include the
    step of indicating the pressure of cement being pumped from which it may be
    deduced that cement is present. Such steps are too indirect to be included.
     An example of a process under this subclass is one in which the well is
    cemented by a cement containing a radioactive material whose presence is
    sensed to thereby determine the position of the cement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for apparatus comprising means for measuring the distance to a body
    of cement.

    250.14, for a process of determining cement quality or make-up.

    285+,   for a cementing process.


CLS 166/254.1
TXT Determining position of earth zone or marker:

    A process under subclass 250.01 in which some identifiable property of a
    portion of a formation is ascertained.

    (1)     Note.  The position determining steps must be explicitly recited in
    a claim for classification in this subclass and not left to inference. The
    position of a portion of the earth is almost always determined at some
    stage in processes involving wells.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass are a natural property which
    exists before any alteration by man and locating a radioactive marker
    inserted in a formation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    253.1,  for a process of determining location or absence of cement which
    may use radioactive markers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 152.02+ for a well logging
    wherein the well process is used only to perfect a test.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 40+, especially
    subclass 50 for a process of earth boring including indicating, testing or
    measuring a condition of the formation.


CLS 166/254.2
TXT Well logging:

    Determining position of earth zone under subclass 254.1 which includes the
    step(s) of using a wireline operated device to traverse the formation.

    (1)     Note.  The logging step must be explicitly recited in a claim for
    classification in this subclass and not left to inference. The position of
    a portion of the earth is almost always determined at some stage in
    processes involving wells.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 152.02+ for formation logging.

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclasses 323+ for a method or
    apparatus for geophysical surface or subsurface in situ.


CLS 166/255.1
TXT Determining position of object in well:

    A process under subclass 250.01 in which the location of a well completion
    device in the well is ascertained.

    (1)     Note.  The object must be something other than an instrument used
    in a process for ascertaining the position of something.

    (2)     Note.  A fluid or a formless substance is not considered an object
    under this definition.  A casing or tubing, however, is considered an
    object.


    (3)     Note.  For classification in this subclass some special step for
    directly determining the position of an object must be recited in a claim
    since the position of objects is generally known in well processes or can
    be deduced from other information if so desired.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250.13, for locating stuck pipe.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 4.51 for subject matter
    relating to well perforating by a bullet or shaped charge of an explosive
    combined with position orienting or indicating and subclass 45 for boring
    tool position, direction, or inclination measuring or indicating within the
    bore.


CLS 166/255.2
TXT Tool orienting:

    Determining position of an object under subclass 255.1 including a step of
    setting or arranging a device in a determinate position with respect to
    other well structure or the formation.


CLS 166/255.3
TXT Using whipstock:

    Tool orienting under subclass 255.2  wherein the device is for diverting a
    pipe, tubing, or a well tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117.5+, for whipstock apparatus in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 61 for methods and
    subclasses 79+ for apparatus of drilling using a whipstock.


CLS 166/256
TXT A process under subclass 244.1 in which burning takes place underground in
    the pores of the earth.

    (1)     Note.  "Burning" under this definition is a vigorous union of a
    substance with oxygen, but does not include an explosion.

    (2)     Note.  Burning taking place in a fracture in the earth is
    considered to take place in the pores of the earth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251.1,  for a process involving in situ combustion and a step of
    indicating, testing, measuring or locating.

    270,    for a process involving injection and producing wells and chemical
    interreaction of introduced material in the pores of the earth.

    299,    for a process involving an explosion.

    300,    for a process involving chemical interreaction of materials
    introduced into a well.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, appropriate subclasses for boring
    by combustion of the formation material.


CLS 166/257
TXT A process under subclass 256 in which material found in the earth is
    produced from the top of a well due to in situ combustion taking place in
    the pores of the earth, while at the same time material is being injected
    into the pores of the earth from the same well.


CLS 166/258
TXT A process under subclass 256 in which plural, naturally distinct,
    vertically related zones of earth are involved.

    (1)     Note.  The distinct zones are usually identified by the fluid they
    contain, such as oil or water.  But where it appears that different fluids
    are in a single zone having the same physical characteristics throughout,
    the zone is considered to be a single entity.

    (2)     Note.  It is common to produce a fluid from a formation located
    between two or more other formations.  Patents are classified in this
    subclass only when the existence of plural distinct zones or formation is a
    significant factor in the claimed process.  A reference in a claim to the
    top or bottom of a zone is not enough for classification under this
    definition.


CLS 166/259
TXT A process under subclass 256 in which the earth is cracked to produce a
    fissure or fissures therein, or in which fluid introduced into the pores of
    the earth chemically reacts with the earth or deposits in the earth to
    enlarge the pores of the earth.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note in subclass 307 for a discussion of the meaning
    of "deposits in the earth".

    (2)     Note.  The fracture or pore enlargement must be effected by some
    cause other than the heat of the in situ combustion itself.  A process in
    which the heat of the in situ combustion is said to cause fracturing or
    increase of permeability is classified on other features.


CLS 166/260
TXT A process under subclass 256 in which (1) a burnable substance is placed
    into the pores of the earth and burned therein or (2) a catalyst for
    affecting the burning operation is placed into the pores of the earth.

    (1)     Note.  For classification as an original in this subclass the
    burnable substance should be recited in a claim with some specificity since
    it is very common to insert fuel into the pores of the earth for in situ
    combustion.  A mere recitation of a combustible mixture of gaseous fuel and
    air or oxygen is not enough.  However, a recitation of a specific ratio of
    fuel to oxygen or air is sufficient.  Also a statement in a claim of the
    injection of fuel in a significant sequence such as after an air injection
    is also sufficient.

    (2)     Note.  "Burned" in the definition means a vigorous union of a
    substance with oxygen.

    (3)     Note.  A process in which a material is placed into the pores of
    the earth for some other purpose and is not said to be burned though it may
    actually be incidentally burned is not included under this definition.
    Such a process would be classifiable in subclass 261.


CLS 166/261
TXT A process under subclass 256 in which a material is placed into the pores
    of the earth, said material being other than oxygen, per se, or air.

    (1)     Note.  A broad recitation of a combustion supporting gas or a
    mixture of oxygen and an inert gas or of air enriched with oxygen is not
    included. However, a recitation of a separate injection of inert gas or a
    recitation of a specific ratio of oxygen in air or inert gas is included,
    except a recitation such as 20% or more oxygen in inert gas which is
    tantamount to a recitation of air or air enriched with oxygen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    260,    for an in situ combustion processes in which a specific fuel or
    catalyst for burning is injected into the pores of the earth.


CLS 166/262
TXT A process under subclass 256 in which solid fuel or a bed of solid
    particles is placed in a well for purposes of starting or affecting in situ
    combustion.


CLS 166/263
TXT Cyclic injection then production of a single well:

    A process under subclass 244.1 including a step  in which a well is (1)
    used for a period of time only to place material into the pores of the
    earth and then for a period of time used only to  produce fluid from the
    earth or (2) used for a period of time to produce fluid from the earth and
    then used (a) for a period of time only to place material into the pores of
    the earth or (b) for a period of time is shut in to stop flow of fluid from
    the earth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    245,    for specific pattern of plural wells.

    268,    for cyclic operation in an injection well moving hydrocarbons to a
    producing well.

    370,    for varying downhole pressure in a producing well.


CLS 166/264
TXT A process under subclass 244.1 comprising taking a limited amount of the
    fluid in a well or the adjacent earth for testing or measuring purposes.

    (1)     Note.  No special steps for limiting the flow need be set forth for
    classification in this subclass.  The mere statement is a claim that a
    sample is taken is sufficient.  Merely setting a sampler in position,
    however, without the step of taking the sample is not sufficient for
    classification in this subclass.  Such processes would be classifiable in
    subclass 315.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    369+,   and the subclasses there noted for a process of producing a well.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 152.02+ for a process or
    apparatus for taking a sample from a well combined with making a
    determination of a physical characteristic of a well, a borehole casing, or
    a drill rigging wherein the test is not purely electrical or purely
    magnetic, in particular subclasses 152.07, 152.09, and 152.11 for core
    sample analysis for making a formation logging wherein the test is not
    purely electrical or purely magnetic, and subclasses 152.23+ for fluid flow
    measuring or fluid analysis combined with sampling well fluid wherein the
    test is not purely electrical or purely magnetic, and subclasses 863+ for a
    process or an apparatus for sampling a fluid not in a well or for a soil
    gas sampling process and apparatus.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 59 for processes of
    taking solid samples of earth formation combined with a step of retaining
    fluid therein or taking a separate fluid sample.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 50+ for    apparatus for gas
    sampling involving use of sorbents or chemical treatments which may include
    a shaft sunk in the ground to collect gas for analysis.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 1-183
    for gas sampling as part of a process of chemical testing.


CLS 166/265
TXT A process under subclass 244.1 comprising separating a stream of material
    which has entered the well into two or more portions and as a result of
    such separation delivering the material coming out of the top or head of
    the well to two or more separate repositories or transmission lines.

    (1)     Note.  One of the repositories may be the same well from which the
    material flows.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for apparatus including float controlled valves for separating
    fluid in a well.

    105.5+, for wells having structure for separating gas from well fluid.

    313,    for a multiple completion well in which separate streams of
    material enter the well from separate formations and come out of the top of
    the well for delivery to separate repositories.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, appropriate subclasses for sampling
    involving the use of sorbents or chemical treatment.  A well may be broadly
    recited as a source.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 58, 123+, and 600+ for processes and
    apparatus for separation of a mixture by refrigeration even though broadly
    related to a well.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, for processes of gas separation, per
    se, especially subclasses 241+ for degasification of liquid.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, for apparatus for gas separation, per
    se, especially subclasses 155+ for degasifying means for liquid.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, for apparatus for treating mineral oils
    not disclosed as in a well nor in the pores of the earth even though a well
    is named broadly as a source.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, for processes of treating
    mineral oils not disclosed as in a well nor in the pores of the earth even
    though a well is named broadly as a source.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 600+ for a process of
    separating the components or constituents of a liquid-liquid or
    liquid-solid mixture.

    417,    Pumps, subclass 435, for pumps having means for venting gas from
    pumped liquid.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, appropriate subclasses for sampling apparatus
    involving the use of sorbents or chemical treatment.  A well may be broadly
    recited as a source.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 210+ for processes of
    separating or purifying gases by a chemical reaction.


CLS 166/266
TXT A process under subclass 265 including using a plurality of wells, at least
    one of which receives a fluid for insertion into the pores of the earth and
    another of which conveys a fluid from the pores of the earth to the surface
    of the earth.

    (1)     Note.  The line between this subclass and the various classes
    relating to separation of fluids is that the positive recitation in a claim
    of the step of placing a fluid in a well causes classification in this
    subclass.

    (2)     Note.  See subclass 265 for search notes on classes concerned with
    fluid separations.


CLS 166/267
TXT A process under subclass 265 comprising separating the material coming out
    of the well into two or more portions by steps taking place outside of the
    well.

    (1)     Note.  The line between this subclass and the classes concerned
    with separation or treatment of fluids is that a process comprising some
    significant steps of flowing or treating taking place in a well combined
    with steps of separating the fluid after it leaves the well is classified
    in Class 166, but a process including the mere step of withdrawing fluid
    from a well is classified according to the remaining subject matter of the
    process.

    (2)     Note.  A method of pumping a well (classifiable, per se, in Class
    417, Pumps) combined with a method of separating fluid after it leaves the
    well is classifiable in this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  See subclass 265 for search notes on classes concerned with
    fluid separation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266,    for processes involving separation outside of the well and also the
    use of injection and producing wells.


CLS 166/268
TXT Distinct, separate injection and producing wells:

    A process under subclass 244.1 comprising a step of using a plurality of
    wells, at least one of which receives a fluid for insertion into the pores
    of the earth, usually to push hydrocarbons, and another of which conducts
    the pushed hydrocarbons and fluid from the pores of the earth to the
    surface of the earth.

    (1)     Note. Patents are classified as originals under this definition
    even if the output well is not claimed if the sole disclosure is for a
    process involving input and output wells, and a fluid claimed as inserted
    into the formation is disclosed as a drive fluid. A "drive fluid" is one
    which is continued to be inserted into the formation until breakthrough or
    near breakthrough at an output well occurs (e.g., the "water" in a
    waterflood process, etc.).  A patent describing a waterflood secondary
    recovery process or the like which is not specifically disclosed as
    applicable to a single combined input and output well is considered as
    drawn to a sole disclosure of input and output wells even if the output
    well is not mentioned.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    245,    for a process in which there is a specific pattern of plural wells
    including input and output wells.

    252.1+, for a process using input and output wells and including a step of
    indicating, testing, measuring, or locating.

    256,    for a process using in situ combustion.

    263,    for a process using a single well in which a single well is used as
    an output well and then shut in or used as an input well or is used as an
    input well and then used as an output well.

    266,    for a process using input and output wells and in which there is a
    separation of material issuing from an output well.

    306,    for a process in which fluid enters and leaves a single well at
    spaced zones in the well.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclass 4 for
    subject matter relating to input and output wells utilized for in situ
    conversion of solid material other than hydrocarbon to fluid for recovery.

    507,    Earth Boring, Well Treating, and Oil Field Chemistry, subclasses
    200+ for compositions for treating a well and processes for using the
    compositions involving no significant manipulative step or relationship
    with the well. A process including placing a composition into the pores of
    the earth is considered to involve a significant manipulative step or
    relationship.


CLS 166/269
TXT A process under subclass 268 in which fluid material is introduced into the
    pores of the earth from locations in an input well which are spaced from
    each other along the longitudinal axis of the well, i.e., vertically spaced
    in the ordinary well having a vertical axis.

    (1)     Note.  A location which is packed off from another location is
    considered longitudinally spaced.  A single group of holes in a well
    conduit is not considered to provide longitudinally spaced locations, but
    longitudinally spaced groups of holes do provide spaced locations.  Fluid
    introduced from an uncased portion of a well is considered to be introduced
    from a single location.

    (2)     Note.  A claim which calls for separate introduction of fluids at
    locations longitudinally arranged in the well is considered to meet the
    definition since such claim inherently requires the use of a packer or
    equivalent means to effect the separate introduction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258,    for a process involving plural distinct superimposed formations and
    in situ combustion.


CLS 166/270
TXT Injecting a composition to adjust the permeability (e.g., selective
    plugging):

    A process in distinct, separate wells under subclass 268 in which the fluid
    temporarily alters the ease of flow through the formation by filling in the
    pores for a specific time, usually immediately prior to a hydrocarbon
    driving fluid.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are gels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300,    for chemical interaction of two or more introduced materials.


CLS 166/270.1
TXT Injecting a composition including a surfactant or cosurfactant

    A process in distinct, separate wells under subclass 268 in which the fluid
    is a wetting agent that causes the lowering of interfacial tension between
    two fluids; e.g., water and oil.

    (1)     Note.  The term "surface active agent" also describes this type of
    material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    507,    Earth Boring, Well Treating, and Oil Field Chemistry, subclasses
    200+ for well treating compositions.


CLS 166/270.2
TXT Nonaqueous type:

    Surfactant or cosurfactant under subclass 270.1 in which the fluid is a gas
    or a liquid not containing water.


CLS 166/271
TXT A process under subclass 268 in which the earth is cracked to produce a
    fissure or fissures therein or in which fluid introduced into the pores of
    the earth chemically reacts with the earth or deposits in the earth to
    enlarge the pores.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note in subclass 307 for a discussion of the meaning
    of "deposits in the earth".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259,    for a process including in situ combustion, input and output wells
    and fracturing or attacking the formation.


CLS 166/272.1
TXT Involving the step of heating:

    A process in distinct, separate wells under subclass 268 incorporating the
    step of raising the temperature of the fluid.

    (1)     Note. Any incidental heating due to a chemical reaction is not
    included unless it is specifically claimed.

    (2)     Note. The heating due to the natural heat of a formation is not
    included.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247,    for a process involving input and output wells and nuclear energy
    or radioactivity for heating the formation.

    256+,   for a process involving input and output wells and in situ
    combustion.


    266,    for a process involving input and output wells and separating fluid
    outside of the well by heating.

    302+,   for a heating process.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 12 for processes or
    apparatus for forming a bore by combustion of the earth formation material
    and subclass 17 for processes or apparatus including heating within the
    bore or heating the drilling fluid used in boring.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclass 4 for
    subject matter relating to input and output wells utilized for in situ
    conversion of solid material, other than hydrocarbons, to fluid for
    recovery and generally including the use of heat.


CLS 166/272.2
TXT In association with fracturing or crevice forming processes:

    Heating under subclass 272.1 including the step of creating a fissure in
    the formation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    308,    for fracturing.


CLS 166/272.3
TXT Steam as drive fluid:

    Heating under subclass 272.1 utilizing high temperature water vapor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 643+ for motive fluid energized by
    externally applied heat.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 152+ for steam engines.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 35 for boiler steam
    storage, 379+ for cleaning, and 459+ for steam treatment.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclasses 16.1+ for gaseous blast or
    current (fluid steam injection).

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 110+ for first fluid holder or collector
    open to second fluid (steam vapor condenser).

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, digest 10 for steam heaters and
    condensers.


CLS 166/272.4
TXT In combination with alkyls or carbon chains:

    Steam drive under subclass 272.3 including a substance having (a) univalent
    aliphatic, aromatic-aliphatic, or alicyclic hydrocarbon radical or (b) the
    element carbon in a chemical string.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    293,    for cement or consolidating material containing inorganic water
    settable and organic ingredients.

    294,    for cement or consolidating material being organic or having
    organic ingredients.

    295,    for organic cementing material being a resin or resinous.


CLS 166/272.5
TXT With override zone, diverting, or path blocking operation:

    Steam drive under subclass 272.3 including a bypassing, redirecting, or
    plugging operation.


CLS 166/272.6
TXT Liquid material injected:

    Heating under subclass 272.1 wherein the fluid is flowable, wettable,
    cohesive, has a viscosity which decreases with temperature, and which is
    above ambient temperature.


CLS 166/272.7
TXT Horizontal well:

    Heating under subclass 272.1 in which the borehole is substantially
    parallel to the earth's surface.


CLS 166/275
TXT A process under subclass 268 in which a fluid mixture or solution
    comprising water and a material other than an inorganic gas, is introduced
    into the pores of the earth.

    (1)     Note.  The "material" must be other than a material which is
    already present in the source water.  Thus a natural brine would not
    comprise an added "material" but a naturally occurring water to which salt
    has been added would have an added "material".

    (2)     Note.  See (1) Note in subclass 268 for the classification of a
    patent claiming placing a fluid into the formation but not claiming an
    output well.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273     and 274, for a process involving input and output wells in which
    two or more separate fluids are introduced into the formation.  Patents in
    subclasses 273 and 274 which disclose significant species relating to
    introducing a single fluid mixture or solution comprising water and a
    material other than inorganic gas should be cross-referenced to subclass
    275.

    305.1+, and the subclasses there noted for processes of recovering fluid
    from a well involving placing a fluid into the formation from the same well.


CLS 166/276
TXT A process under subclass 244.1 comprising establishing a mass of material
    having small irregular interstices in the well at the location where earth
    fluid enters the well so as to act as a filter for such fluid.

    (1)     Note.  The material may be made porous before or after it is placed
    in the well.  It must continue to be an adhered mass after being made
    porous.

    (2)     Note.  The mass of material must be coherent or made of adhered
    particles. A bed of separate unadhered particles such as a gravel bed is
    not included. See subclass 278 for a process of making an unadhered bed of
    particles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278,    for a process of graveling or filter forming.

    280,    for a specific propping feature for a fracture.

    285+,   and the subclasses there noted for a process of cementing, plugging
    or consolidating which may include establishing a porous mass of adhered
    particles in the formation, especially subclass 295 for a process in which
    the cementing or consolidating material is or has an ingredient which is a
    resin.


CLS 166/277
TXT A process under subclass 244.1 comprising repairing an object in the well
    (e.g., connecting broken ends, stopping leaks through the casting wall,
    replacing a casing section, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207,    for an expansible casing section.

    311+,   for processes for cleaning, which may cause an ineffective object
    to become operative.

    315,    for a process of placing, shifting, constructing or assembling well
    parts including expanding a casing section against a bore hole wall.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 15 for processes of repairing fluid
    handling means of general utility.


CLS 166/278
TXT A process under subclass 244.1 comprising making a bed of gravel or other
    filter material in situ in the well for straining fluids flowing into the
    well.

    (1)     Note.  This definition does not include a process involving merely
    forming a bed of filter material outside of the well and lowering it into
    the well. See subclass 315 for a process of making a well.

    (2)     Note.  This definition includes washing away earth around a well
    conduit to form a bed of gravel or the like. Processes involving merely
    cleaning a well, however, would be classified in subclasses 311+ and
    processes involving attacking a formation would be classified in subclass
    307 or the subclasses there noted.

    (3)     Note.  Making a bed of gravel or filter material in the formation
    is not included.  Note subclass 280 for propping material in a fracture and
    subclasses 285+ and the subclasses there noted for permeable material
    deposited in the formation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for apparatus for forming a filter bed.

    276,    for a process involving providing a porous mass of adhered gravel
    or filter material in the well.

    280,    for a process involving a specific propping feature for a fracture.

    285+,   and subclasses there noted for a process of cementing, plugging or
    consolidating which may involve establishing a filter effect in the
    formation.


CLS 166/279
TXT A process under subclass 244.1 comprising placing material into the pores
    of the earth so that fluid which was in the pores of the earth before the
    start of the process will be treated to acquire some beneficial property
    (e.g., corrosion inhibiting, etc.) as it flows past the material to enter
    the well.

    (1)     Note.  Merely flushing out a material (e.g., an acid, etc.) which
    has been placed in the pores of a formation by flow of fluid from the pores
    of the earth without any desired beneficial property being given to the
    earth fluid does not come within this definition. Such processes are
    classified in subclass 305 and the subclasses there noted.


CLS 166/280
TXT A process under subclass 244.1 comprising some claimed specific feature
    relating to placing discrete particles in a fracture in a formation to
    maintain the walls of the fracture spaced apart by resisting forces tending
    to close the fracture.

    (1)     Note.  For classification as an original under this definition the
    specific feature must be more than merely identifying the propping material
    as sand, or the equivalent, or merely the use of a specific fluid
    containing the propping material or merely the introduction of the propping
    material in one of a series of fracturing fluids.

    (2)     Note.  Placing in a fracture a slurry of cement which sets and
    remains in place as an adhered mass and which cement may contain hard
    particles dispersed therein is not considered to come within this
    definition.  For a process involving cementing see subclasses 281, 283 and
    285+.  This definition does include, however, a process in which discrete
    propping particles are adhered together after being placed and a process in
    which propping particles are incorporated in a carrier fluid, which may be
    cement (such as a gel), and the carrier fluid is changed in nature, or
    removed, or is of such a nature that the discrete particles themselves
    resist closing of the fracture rather than a mass of cement in which the
    particles are embedded resisting closing of the fracture.

    (3)     Note.  A process in which discrete particles are placed in a
    fracture so that the particles are crowded together or compacted to plug
    the fracture to impede the flow of fluid is not considered to come within
    this definition.  See the subclasses relating to cementing or plugging,
    especially subclasses 292+ for such a process.

    (4)     Note.  Discrete particles in a fracture which are described merely
    as forming a filter will be assured also to act as props and be
    classifiable under this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281,    283 and 308, for a process involving fracturing a formation, which
    may include propping the formation by steps not specific enough to come
    within this definition.

    285+,   for a process of cementing, plugging or consolidating in which the
    cement or plug is located in a fracture and resists forces tending to close
    the fracture.


CLS 166/281
TXT A process under subclass 244.1 in which a part of the process relates to
    (1) cementing, plugging or consolidating and a separate part of the process
    relates to (2) fracturing or attacking the formation.

    (1)     Note.  See the definition of subclasses 307 and 308 for the meaning
    of attacking the formation and fracturing the formation, respectively.

    (2)     Note.  It is not considered two separate parts of a process if a
    single stream or volume of one fluid composition performs both functions
    (1) and (2).  See subclasses 282 and 283 for such processes.

    (3)     Note.  It is not considered two separate parts of a process
    performing functions (1) and (2) if the process is for forming a fracture
    by cementing, plugging or consolidating material and as a separate step
    forming another fracture by such material.  Such process would be
    classifiable in subclass 283.


CLS 166/282
TXT A process under subclass 244.1 in which a fluid is introduced into the
    pores of the earth to chemically react with the earth or deposits in the
    earth to enlarge the pores of the earth and there is a specifically claimed
    feature of the process for limiting travel of the fluid in the pores of the
    formation.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note of subclass 307 for the meaning of "deposits in
    the earth".

    (2)     Note.  The feature to limit travel of the fluid may relate to an
    addition in the fluid or to another material placed in the pores of the
    formation or in the well in contact with the formation acting to limit or
    block flow of the attacking fluid in all directions or to deflect the flow
    to a desired direction.  A mechanical means for directing flow such as a
    packer in the well bore is not included.  The blocking or flow directing
    material is sometimes called a blanketing material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281,    for processes relating to separate steps for (1) cementing,
    plugging or consolidating and (2) attacking the formation in which the
    cementing, plugging or consolidating material may limit loss of the
    attacking fluid.


CLS 166/283
TXT A process under subclass 244.1 in which the earth is cracked by a fluid in
    order to create a fissure or fissures therein and in which (1) there is a
    specifically claimed feature for limiting travel of the fluid in the pores
    of the formation or (2) the fluid is a cementing, plugging or consolidating
    material.

    (1)     Note.  See (2) Note of subclass 282 for the meaning of the feature
    to limit travel of the fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281,    for processes relating to separate steps of (1) cementing, plugging
    or consolidating and (2) fracturing, in which the cementing, plugging or
    consolidating material may limit fluid loss of the fracturing fluid.


CLS 166/284
TXT A process under subclass 244.1 in which there is an opening in the side
    wall of a pipe or well conduit and a pellet entrained in a fluid is caused
    to be moved by said fluid to impede flow of said fluid through the opening,
    a single pellet being used to impede flow through an opening.

    (1)     Note.  Plural pellets may be used to block plural openings but only
    one pellet is used for each of the openings blocked by the pellets.  If a
    plurality of pellets or particles are used to block an opening the
    operation is considered to be a cementing or plugging process for
    subclasses 285+.

    (2)     Note.  The pellet must be free to travel a substantial distance due
    to fluid flow.  A pellet confined in a cage adjacent an opening which
    pellet is moved by fluid flow to block the opening is considered a check
    valve.  A process using such a pellet would be classified on other features.


CLS 166/285
TXT A process under subclass 244.1 comprising (1) causing fluent material to
    flow into position in prepositioned well conduit substantially to stop flow
    of a fluid by forming a blocking means in situ, said material being plastic
    or hardenable after being so placed, (2) placing small particles in a
    prepositioned well conduit to cause them to form a mass of particles in
    situ substantially to stop flow of a fluid, (3) placing or forming solid or
    plastic material in the pores of or spaces in a formation to block them and
    thereby impede flow of an earth fluid, (4) treating a formation with an
    introduced material so as to prevent it from shifting or breaking down,
    i.e., consolidating the formation, or (5) treating a formation (e.g., by
    heating, etc.) to cause the formation to coalesce into an impermeable or
    consolidated mass.

    (1)     Note.  Patents with claims in which there is only a broad mention
    by name only of a cementing, plugging or consolidating process with no
    detail of the steps of the process or the material used, are classified on
    the basis of the other steps recited.  In the case, however, of a drilling
    process in which drilling is interrupted for cementing, classification may
    be in subclasses 285+ even if the cementing step is only nominally or
    inferentially claimed. See section III of the class definition.  However,
    if any other steps are set forth in a claim affording a basis for
    classification in a subclass below subclasses 285+ then the patent is
    classified in the appropriate subclass, the nominal cementing step being
    disregarded.

    (2)     Note.  Processes which include forming a coating or lining on the
    bore hole wall or plugging the pores of the formation by drilling fluid
    while the earth in being cut or disintegrated to form the bore, are not
    classified as cementing, plugging or consolidating processes for this
    class.  See section III of the class definition of Class 166 for the line
    with Class 175, Boring or Penetrating the Earth, and the search notes below.

    (3)     Note.  Merely forming a plug or the like by lowering a quantity of
    plastic material in a container and permitting it to harden in the
    container is not included.  See subclass 315 for such processes.

    (4)     Note.  Under this definition material deposited in the openings of
    a formation may block one fluid and not another, or may form a permeable
    mass.

    (5)     Note.  Material deposited in the formation to form a film or thin
    coating on the formation material, or to form a foam, is not considered to
    come within this definition.  See subclasses 305+ and the subclasses there
    noted for processes for so treating the formation.

    (6)     Note.  Material deposited in a fracture to form discrete props for
    the fracture is not considered to come within this definition.  See
    subclass 280 for processes involving a specific propping feature and see
    (3) Note in said subclass for the distinction between propping and
    cementing or plugging.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244.1,  for a miscellaneous process involving forming a film or coating on
    a member.

    276,    for a process for providing a porous cementitious filter in a bore
    hole.

    279,    for a process for placing material in the pores of a formation to
    treat resident fluid flowing into the well.

    280,    for a process including a specific feature relating to propping a
    fracture.

    281,    for a process involving separate steps of (1) cementing, plugging
    or consolidating and (2) fracturing or attacking the formation.

    283,    for a process for fracturing a formation by forcing cement or
    plugging material into the formation.

    284,    for a process for causing a pellet to block an opening in the wall
    of a well conduit by flowing a fluid carrying said pellet, a single pellet
    being large enough to block an opening.

    305+,   and subclasses there noted for a process for placing material other
    than cementing, plugging or consolidating material in the openings of a
    formation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 741.11+ for a
    process of construction or assembling of a building, e.g., cistern or well,
    made by workmen operating on an exposed face of such a structure.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses for
    plastic compositions which may be used in well cementing, plugging or
    consolidating processes.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 25+ and the subclasses there noted
    for apparatus of general utility for applying a coating.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for processes and apparatus for laminating in
    general and see especially subclasses 293+ and 423+ for inserting a core
    within a tube.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 65+ for processes of
    boring with a fluid and especially subclass 72 for such processes which
    include prevention of lost circulation or caving while drilling.  See
    section III of the class definition of Class 166 for the line between Class
    166 and Class 175.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, appropriate subclasses for compounds
    which may be used in cementing, plugging or consolidating processes.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses, for processes of working, shaping or molding
    plastic materials, within the class definition.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 57 for processes of
    cementing fluid reservoirs in the earth by means operated from the earth
    surface; subclasses 130+ for processes of applying heat to or removing heat
    from an earth formation; subclasses 233+ for casting a pile in situ from
    hardenable fluent material; and subclasses 263+ for applying a chemical
    substance to an earth formation to condition the same, especially
    subclasses 266+ for cementitious substances, except that patents disclosing
    or claiming treatment of a well or treatment of the earth around a well are
    classified in Class 166.

    507,    Earth Boring, Well Treating, and Oil Field Chemistry, subclasses
    100+ for the composition of well drilling mud and processes which involve
    no more than the mere use of such compositions or a compound.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Class 523, subclasses 130+ for a composition having utility in
    consolidating a formation in a well or in cementing a well or to processes
    of preparing said composition.


CLS 166/286
TXT A process under subclass 285 comprising placing cement by (1) using a
    container of the cement in a well, (2) exploding the cement against the
    bore hole wall, (3) vibrating the cement while in the bore hole, or (4)
    striking the cement in the bore hole a blow or series of blows.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for a receptacle, all or a part of which is separated from a
    lowering means and left in the well in order to plug the well with cement.

    162+,   for a container for transporting material into a well.

    249,    for a process involving vibrating the earth or material in or being
    placed in the pores of the earth.

    315,    for a process for forming a plug or the like by merely lowering a
    quantity of plastic material in a container and letting it harden.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 234 for a process or
    apparatus for casting a pile in situ of hardenable fluent material
    utilizing an explosion.


CLS 166/287
TXT A process under subclass 285 in which a mold or forming means is used to
    hold the cement, the mold or forming means being removed from the well bore
    after the cement has set and been shaped by the mold or form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 243 for a corresponding
    process employed to cast a pile in situ.


CLS 166/288
TXT A process under subclass 285 involving the use of a significant or
    substantial amount of heat.

    (1)     Note.  The use of heat in preparing a cementing, plugging or
    consolidating material above ground is not included. See subclasses 292+
    for such a process.

    (2)     Note.  The presence of heat must be positively stated in a claim
    for classification of a patent in this subclass.  An inference that heat is
    present, as because of a chemical reaction, is not sufficient for
    classification in this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  Merely permitting the natural heat present in the well to
    act on cementing, plugging, or consolidating material is not included.  See
    subclass 295 for methods involving the use of resins set by the natural
    heat of the well.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 234 for processes or
    apparatus for casting a piling in situ of hardenable fluent material
    including heating or cooling.


CLS 166/289
TXT A process under subclass 285 in which cementing, plugging or consolidating
    material is caused to issue from a single string of well casing at a
    plurality of levels.

    (1)     Note.  A group of substantially evenly spaced perforations in a
    casing out of which cementing, plugging or consolidating material may issue
    is considered a single level rather than a plurality of levels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    269,    for a process involving input and output walls and fluid injected
    into the earth from different levels in an injection well.


CLS 166/290
TXT A process under subclass 285 comprising placing the cementing, plugging or
    consolidating composition by means of a well tubing, the lower end of which
    is lifted from the level at which the composition is placed, after
    placement.


CLS 166/291
TXT A process under subclass 285 comprising forcing the cement down a tubing or
    casing in the well and separating the traveling body of cement from an
    adjacent fluid by a piston means at an end of the cement body.

    (1)     Note.  The piston means may itself comprise a fluid of limited
    longitudinal extent which functions like a solid piston.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153+,   for well devices comprising pistons fluid driven into the well.


CLS 166/292
TXT A process under subclass 285 using a specifically claimed material in at
    least one of the steps of the process.

    (1)     Note.  The mere naming in a claim of Portland cement, hydraulic
    cement or water is not sufficient to cause classification of a patent in
    this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses for
    compositions useful in well cementing, plugging or consolidating.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 64 and 65+, especially
    subclass 72, for drilling while circulating fluid which may form a mud
    sheath or plug the formation.  See section III of the class definition of
    Class 166 for the line between Class 166 and Class 175.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 263+ for processes of
    applying a chemical substance to an earth formation not involving wells.

    507,    Earth Boring, Well Treating, and Oil Field Chemistry, subclasses
    100+ for compositions to carry off cutting during drilling and broadly
    claimed processes of using said compositions or compounds.


CLS 166/293
TXT A process under subclass 292 in which the material which causes cementing,
    plugging or consolidating comprises a mixture of an organic material and an
    inorganic material which hydrates to become hard or plastic.

    (1)     Note.  Clays, for the purpose of this definition, are not
    considered to be materials which hydrate to become hard or plastic.

    (2)     Note.  The material of the definition must be a slurry which is
    considered to form an intermingled mixture of organic and inorganic
    cementing, plugging or consolidating materials when in final position in
    the well or formation.  If the organic and inorganic materials were
    considered to be separate or separate in the formation or well so that only
    one of them performs the cementing, plugging or consolidating function,
    then classification would be on some other basis, probably in subclasses
    292 or 294+.


CLS 166/294
TXT A process under subclass 292 in which the material performing the
    cementing, plugging or consolidating function is organic or comprises an
    organic ingredient.


CLS 166/295
TXT A process under subclass 294 in which the organic material is a resin or is
    resinous.

    (1)     Note.  The resin or resinous material may be the end result of a
    reaction between other materials in the well or formation.


CLS 166/296
TXT A process under subclass 244.1 comprising the steps of preventing the flow
    of earth fluid into a well conduit through the openings of a preformed
    strainer or preformed filter while it is being lowered through a producing
    formation and then permitting flow of earth fluid through said openings to
    produce the well.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205,    for screens with valves, closures or removable portions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 314 for drive points with
    screens which may have means for preventing entrance of fluid while driving
    the point into the ground.


CLS 166/297
TXT A process under subclass 244.1 comprising forming a hold, weakening a
    localized portion, bending or separating portions of a pipe at any suitable
    location which has not previously been prepared to make it easier to
    operate on.

    (1)     Note.  The earth wall of the well or a cake left on the formation
    by circulating fluid while drilling a bore is not considered a pipe wall,
    but a cementitious wall of a well conduit made by the process defined in
    subclass 285 or made above ground is considered a pipe wall.

    (2)     Note.  In processes relating to an above ground location some
    significant well feature should be present for classification in this
    subclass, but for processes taking place below ground a disclosure line is
    followed except for those processes provided for in other classes.

    (3)     Note.  The term "bending" in this definition is limited to bending
    which causes a change in the direction of the longitudinal axis of the
    pipe. Processes involving expanding a pipe wall may be found in subclasses
    277 and 315.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55+,    for devices for perforating, weakening, bending or separating a
    well pipe at an unprepared location.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 367.1+ for processes of tube making
    and/or reshaping which may be disclosed as for use in a well.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 13+ for cutting methods in general, and
    particularly subclass 54, indented thereunder, for a method of cutting the
    wall of a hollow workpiece.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 2+ for processes of
    firing a bullet or exploding a shaped charge from an inaccessible bore for
    perforating a wall member in the bore if the process inherently result in
    penetration of the formation.


CLS 166/298
TXT A process under subclass 297 in which the wall portion of the pipe is
    perforated, weakened or separated by (1) a mechanical cutting, punching or
    abrading means or (2) a jet of fluid containing an abrasive.

    (1)     Note.  A projectile propelled by an explosive jet of fluid such as
    that produced by a shaped charge is not included.  Processes using such
    projectiles or jets are classifiable in subclass 297 or Class 175, Boring
    or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 2+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55+,    for apparatus for perforating, weakening or separating a pipe wall.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 13+ for cutting methods in general, especially
    subclass 54 for a method of cutting the wall of a hollow workpiece, and
    subclass 177 for apparatus for cutting by fluid blast and/or suction.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 67 for boring by fluid
    erosion and subclass 422 for an earth boring nozzle.


CLS 166/299
TXT A process under subclass 244.1 in which an explosion is caused to occur or
    a container is broken to cause an implosion.

    (1)     Note.  An explosion in an internal combustion engine for driving
    the engine is not considered an "explosion" for this subclass.  Such
    disclosures are classified on other features.

    (2)     Note.  The container usually contains relatively low pressure fluid
    such as air at atmospheric pressure so that when it is broken in a high
    pressure environment, such as a well, an implosion occurs.

    (3)     Note.  A "container" under this definition is a completely enclosed
    space and not a tubing of indefinite length.

    (4)     Note.  Breaking a closure portion only of a container is not
    included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     for apparatus for causing an explosion in a well.

    162+,   for a receptacle bodily movable in a well to carry material which
    may be used to cause an implosion.

    247,    for a process involving an explosion caused by nuclear energy.

    297,    for a process including perforating, weakening or separating a pipe
    wall in a well.

    311,    for a cleaning process using an implosion caused by creating access
    to a low pressure area in a container or tubing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 2+ for processes or
    apparatus for forming a bore hole by below ground explosion, or perforating
    or cutting a casing or other bore lining by firing a bullet or exploding a
    shaped charge in an inaccessible bore.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 73+, for combustion type pumping methods for
    wells.


CLS 166/300
TXT A process under subclass 244.1 comprising placing from above ground level,
    two or more materials into the well which chemically react with each other
    in the well or earth.

    (1)     Note.  The reaction may be between one introduced material and a
    product produced by the reaction of another introduced material with a
    material found in the well.

    (2)     Note.  The word "material" in the definition is intended to mean an
    unformed or particulate material or a material which has a form for
    purposes of the process but is not a device such as a tool, pipe, closure
    disk, or the like, which has an independent function in the well.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59,     for apparatus comprising a burner in the well.

    260,    for an in situ combustion process comprising introducing fuel or a
    catalyst into the pores of the formation.

    262,    for an in situ combustion process in which there is a solid fuel in
    the well.

    270,    for a process involving input and output wells and in which there
    is a chemical interreaction in the pores of the formation of material
    introduced into the input well.

    276,    for a process of forming a porous, cementitious material to form a
    filter.

    283,    for a process for fracturing a formation, said process having a
    specific low fluid loss feature and including braking a low fluid loss
    compound or composition.

    292+,   for a cementing, plugging or consolidating process involving
    chemical reaction of introduced materials.

    299,    for a process involving a chemical reaction which produces an
    explosion.

    309,    for a process for producing foam or gas in a well by reaction of a
    foam or gas producing material with material already in the well.

    311+,   for a cleaning process in which the material being removed has been
    introduced before the cleaning process starts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 64 for processes of
    boring including a chemical reaction with the earth formation or a drilling
    fluid constituent.


CLS 166/301
TXT A process under subclass 244.1 for (1) releasing an object in the well from
    a condition which prevents it from being moved, (2) grappling for an object
    in the well or (3) retrieving a small, loose object from inside the well.

    (1)     Note.  A process under part (1) of this definition must involve
    more than merely disconnecting two parts, severing a part so as to leave a
    stuck portion in the well and free the severed portion or unsetting a
    device like a packer; a special procedure must be used to free a member
    held fast in the well by a condition such as corrosion or cave-in of the
    formation. A process under part (2) of this definition relates to a process
    for using the grapple apparatus found in Class 294, Handling:  Hand and
    Hoist-Line Implements, especially subclasses 86.1+; a process for merely
    affecting a pipe joint or coupling is not included, such process when used
    in a well being classifiable in subclass 315.  A process under part (3) of
    the definition relates to a process for using the fishing means found in
    Class 294, especially subclasses 86.1+, or in Class 166, subclass 99.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55+,    for apparatus for separating a pipe section from an adjacent
    section at an unprepared point.

    98,     for apparatus comprising a grapple and a well anchored lifting
    means.

    99,     for apparatus with junk retrieving means.

    178,    for apparatus with jar means for releasing a stuck part.

    297+,   for a process of freeing a pipe section by separating it from an
    adjacent section at an unprepared point.

    311+,   for a process of cleaning which may be similar to a process in
    subclass 301 but not for freeing a stuck object, grappling or fishing in
    the well.  For example, a process for bailing sand from a well would be
    classifiable in subclasses 311+ whereas a process for fishing, e.g.,
    recovering a small discrete object from the well rather than a particulate
    mass of material, would be classifiable in subclass 301.

    315,    for a process of disconnecting parts, removing parts from a well or
    unsetting devices such as packers, no special releasing procedure being
    used because of caving, corrosion or the like.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 293+ for apparatus
    comprising below ground hammer or impact means, including such means used
    to free a stuck object in a well.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 66.5 for a
    grapple comprising a magnet and subclasses 86.1+ for a well type grapple
    apparatus.


CLS 166/302
TXT A process under subclass 244.1 in which there is a heating, cooling, or
    insulating step or a heated or cooled material is used.

    (1)     Note.  A mere welding step is not included.  See the search notes
    below.

    (2)     Note.  The cooling effect of gas flowing through a choke is not
    subject matter for this subclass unless said effect forms a part of the
    method being claimed.  Processes involving wells flowing through chokes may
    be classified in subclass 314.

    (3)     Note.  In processes for attacking a formation heat may be generated
    by chemical reaction with the formation. Such a process is not classified
    as an original under this definition, however, unless the heat effect is
    specifically recited in a claim. Processes for attacking the formation are
    classified in subclass 307 and the subclasses there mentioned.

    (4)     Note.  The heating due to the natural heat of a formation is not
    included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for apparatus for perforating, bending or separating a tubing or
    casing by an explosively propelled projectile.

    57+,    for well apparatus with heating or cooling means.

    63,     for apparatus involving means for causing an explosion or gas
    generation in a well.

    247,    for a process involving nuclear energy or radioactivity for heating.

    248,    for a process in which an electric current is passed through the
    earth for heating the earth.

    256+,   for a process involving in situ combustion.

    265+,   for a process in which the heating or cooling is used to effect
    separation of fluids from the well.

    270,    for a process involving input and output wells and chemical
    reaction of introduced materials in the pores of the earth or a surfactant
    produced in situ in the pores of the earth.

    272.1,  for a process involving input and output wells, and a heating step.

    286,    for a cementing, plugging or consolidating process including an
    explosion.

    288,    for a cementing, plugging or consolidating process including
    heating.

    297,    for a process for perforating, weakening, bending, or separating
    tubing or casing involving an explosion or heating means.

    299,    for a process including an explosion.

    300,    for a process including an exothermic interreaction of chemicals
    introduced into the well.

    315,    for a process of joining well parts by welding or soldering.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 11+ for processes or
    apparatus for boring by directly applying heat to fluidize or comminute the
    formation and subclass 17 for processes or apparatus for heating or cooling
    within the bore hole or heating or cooling the drilling fluid.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 56 and 130+ for the
    application or removal of heat from an earth formation not involving a well.


CLS 166/303
TXT A process under subclass 302 in which a heated fluid is introduced into the
    pores of the earth, said fluid being heated before it enters the pores of
    the earth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247,    for a process for using nuclear energy to heat a fluid to be
    injected into the formation.

    272.1,  for a process involving input and output wells and including
    placing preheated fluid into the formation.

    288,    for a process involving placing a heated cementing, plugging or
    consolidating material in the pores of the earth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 3+
    for mining by introducing a heated fluid into the formation.  See the
    reference to Class 299 in section V of the class definition of Class 166
    for the line between Class 166 and Class 299.


CLS 166/304
TXT A process under subclass 244.1 in which paraffin or other similar solid
    petroleum deposits are dissolved by a solvent therefor or paraffin or other
    solid petroleum deposits are prevented from forming.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    for eduction pumps with means for throwing a jet oil on the sides
    of the well during pumping in order to dissolve or prevent formation of
    paraffin.

    279,    for a process for placing material (including paraffin solvents) in
    the pores of a formation to treat resident fluid flowing into the well.

    300,    for a process of removing paraffin comprising the interreaction of
    introduced chemicals.

    302+,   for a process of preventing formation of or dissolving paraffin
    comprising a heating or cooling step.

    311+,   for a process of cleaning in which paraffin may incidentally be
    dissolved or removed.

    314,    for a process of flowing a well in which paraffin may incidentally
    be dissolved or prevented from forming.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    507,    Earth Boring, Well Treating, and Oil Field Chemistry, subclass 90
    for compositions for preventing contaminant deposits in petroleum oil
    conduits.


CLS 166/305.1
TXT Placing fluid into or fracturing the formation:

    A process under subclass 244.1 in which a fluid is caused to enter the
    pores of the earth.

    (1)     Note.  Mere incidental entry into the formation of a fluid used for
    cleaning the well is not enough for classification under this definition.
    Such processes may be found in subclasses 311+.  If, however, in a cleaning
    process a fluid is positively claimed as entering the pores of a formation
    the process is considered to come within this definition.

    (2)     Note.  The fluid used to enter the pores of the earth may come from
    the well itself or may have entered the well from another earth zone and
    may be separated from other fluids while remaining in the well.

    (3)     Note.  Class 405 takes subject matter relating to merely storing or
    disposing of fluid in an earthen cavity or the soil.  However, subject
    matter relating to recovering both a fluid from its original location in
    the earth and a fluid previously caused to enter the earth is classified in
    Class 166.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256+,   for a process in which fluid enters the earth and in situ
    combustion in the pores of the earth occurs.

    263,    for cyclic operation of plural wells in which a well is used as an
    input well.

    266,    for a process involving input and output wells and separating
    material leaving the well.

    268+,   for a process involving input and output wells.  Patents are
    classified in subclasses 268+ even if the output well is not claimed if the
    sole disclosure is for a process involving input and output wells and a
    fluid claimed as inserted into the formation is disclosed as a drive fluid.
     A "drive fluid" is one which is continued to be inserted into the
    formation until breakthrough or near breakthrough at an output well (e.g.,
    the "water" in a waterflood process).  A patent to a waterflood or
    secondary recovery process which is not specifically disclosed as
    applicable to a single combined input and output well is considered a sole
    disclosure of input and output wells even if the output well is not
    mentioned.

    279,    for a process involving placing material in the pores of a
    formation to treat resident fluid flowing into the well.

    285+,   for a process involving causing cementing, plugging or
    consolidating material to enter the pores of a formation.

    300,    for a process involving chemical reaction of material introduced
    into the well, which material may enter the pores of a formation.

    302+,   for a process involving heating or cooling, especially subclass
    303, for a process involving placing a preheated fluid into the pores of a
    formation.

    304,    for a process involving dissolving or preventing the formation of a
    solid oil deposit which process may include placing a fluid into the pores
    of a formation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 65+ for earth boring
    with fluid, especially subclass 67 for boring by fluid erosion.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 16+
    for a process of breaking down valuable or hard material by direct contact
    with fluid.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering subclasses 53+ for fluid storage in
    an earthen cavity; and subclasses 128+ for waste disposal in soil.

    507,    Earth Boring, Well Treating, and Oil Field Chemistry, subclasses
    200+ for well treating compositions and mere methods of using them.


CLS 166/306
TXT A process under subclass 305.1 in which fluid leaves the well to enter
    pores in the earth and fluid also enters the well from pores in the earth,
    the zones of departure from and entry into the well being spaced from each
    other.

    (1)     Note.  The spacing of zones is often effected by a packer.  A
    single group of holes in a well conduit is considered a single zone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257,    for a process involving injecting fluid into the earth while
    producing fluid from the earth by in situ combustion from the same well.


CLS 166/307
TXT A process under subclasses 305.1+ in which fluid introduced into the pores
    of the earth chemically reacts with the earth or deposits in the earth to
    enlarge the pores.

    (1)     Note.  The phrase "deposits in the earth" does not include material
    purposely placed in the earth such as cement or fracture props.  It is
    intended to include material precipitated from the flowing earth fluid.
    Processes for attacking material purposely placed in the earth are
    classified on other bases and may comprise a part of a process involving
    cementing in subclasses 285+ or propping in subclass 280.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259,    for a process involving in situ combustion and also fracturing or
    attacking the formation.

    271,    for a process involving input and output wells and also fracturing
    or attacking the formation.

    281,    for a process involving separate steps of (1) cementing, plugging
    or consolidating and (2) fracturing or attacking the formation.

    282,    for a process involving a specific low fluid loss feature for a
    fluid attacking the formation.

    304,    for a process for dissolving solid oil deposits in the formation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 64 for earth boring
    processes involving a chemical reaction with the earth formation.

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, appropriate subclasses for etching
    of various materials.

    507,    Earth Boring, Well Treating, and Oil Field Chemistry, subclasses
    200+ for well treating compositions and mere methods of using them.  See
    SEARCH CLASS note in Class 166, subclass 244.1, for a further discussion.


CLS 166/308
TXT A process under subclasses 305.1+ in which the earth is cracked to create a
    fissure therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177.1+, for apparatus for fracturing a formation.

    259,    for a process involving in situ combustion and fracturing a
    formation.

    271,    for a process involving input and output wells and fracturing the
    formation.

    280,    for a process involving fracturing the formation and a specific
    propping feature.

    281,    for a process involving separate steps of (1) cementing, plugging
    or consolidating and (2) fracturing the formation.

    283,    for a process involving a specific low fluid loss feature for a
    fracturing fluid or a process in which a cementing, plugging or
    consolidating material causes a fracture.

    299,    for a process of fracturing involving use of an explosive.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 301+ for apparatus and
    methods for fracturing a formation by the use of an explosive.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, appropriate subclasses, especially
    subclasses 2+ for initially forming or radially enlarging an elongated hole
    having a desired geometrical configuration, rather than forming an
    irregular fissure, in the earth.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclass 13 for
    a process of breaking down hard material by an explosive, subclasses 16+
    for a process of breaking down material by direct contact with fluid, and
    subclasses 20+ for expansible breaking down devices.  The line between
    Classes 299 and 166 as to this subject matter is based on the disclosed
    purpose for performing the fracturing process.  If the purpose is
    ultimately to recover fluid from the earth by a Class 166 process
    classification is in Class 166; if the purpose is ultimately to perform a
    Class 299 mining operation or to perform a mere disintegration operation
    (of the type classifiable in Class 299) then classification is in Class
    299.  See the reference to Class 299 in section V of the class definition
    of Class 166 for the distinction between Class 166 and Class 299 relative
    to recovering fluid from the earth and mining.


CLS 166/309
TXT A process under subclass 244.1 comprising introducing a material into the
    well which by interreaction with fluid already in the well acts as a
    foaming agent in the well or by its own change of state causes production
    of gas bubbles or foam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300,    for a process involving a chemical interreaction of a plurality of
    introduced materials which may produce gas or foam.

    311,    for a process of unloading a well by introduction of gas into the
    well, which gas may cause generation of a foam or entrained gas bubbles
    without use of a foaming agent.


CLS 166/310
TXT A process under subclass 244.1 comprising placing material in a well so
    that fluid flowing into and out of the well from the earth entrains,
    dissolves or reacts with the material thereby to impart some beneficial
    property to the resulting mixture, solution or composition.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a "beneficial property" is corrosion
    inhibiting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    279,    for a process involving material placed in the pores of a formation
    to treat resident fluid flowing into the well.

    309,    for a process involving material placed in a well to produce a foam
    or gas in the well as the earth fluid flows into and out of the well.

    311,    for a process for cleaning or unloading a well comprising
    entraining gas in material in a well to lift it out of the well.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    507,    Earth Boring, Well Treating, and Oil Field Chemistry, subclasses
    100+ for earth boring or well treating compositions and their mere methods
    of use.


CLS 166/311
TXT A process under subclass 244.1 comprising (1) removing undesired deposited
    material from well apparatus, (2) removing undesired deposited material
    from an existing bore hole or cavity or surrounding formation or (3)
    removing undesired liquid standing in the well and impeding the production
    of the desired fluid from the earth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301,    for a process for removing a stuck object, grappling or fishing in
    the well.

    305+,   for a process of placing a fluid into the formation, and see (1)
    Note in subclass 305 for the distinction between subclasses 305+ and 311+.

    309,    for a process of unloading a well by producing foam or gas in the
    well by a foaming or gas producing material.

    314,    for a process of producing the well which may include moving liquid
    in the well out of the well.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 1.7 for
    submerged cleaners with ambient flow guides, and subclass 246.5 for tank
    cleaners, and see the search notes thereunder.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 301+ for apparatus and
    methods for cleaning a bore by exploding a torpedo.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 22.1+ for
    process of cleaning hollow articles other than wells.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 15 for processes of cleaning fluid
    handling means of general utility.


CLS 166/312
TXT A process under subclass 311 in which a liquid is introduced into the well
    from the top of the well.

    (1)     Note.  The liquid may have come originally from the well itself.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for a screen with a washpipe located outside of the screen.

    157+,   for a screen with a washing point or shoe.

    278,    for a process of graveling including cleaning.

    285+,   for a process of cementing, plugging or consolidating including
    cleaning.

    300,    for a process of cleaning involving chemical reaction of introduced
    materials, one of which may be the material to be removed.

    301,    for a process for removing a stuck object, grappling or fishing in
    the well.

    302+,   for a process of cleaning involving heating.

    304,    for a process of dissolving solid oil deposits.

    305.1+, for a process of cleaning involving placing a fluid into the pores
    of a formation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 67 for processes of
    boring, which include reaming or enlarging the diameter of the bore, by
    fluid erosion.

     507,   Earth Boring, Well Treating, and Oil Field Chemistry, subclasses
    100+ for processes of cleaning involving only inserting a material in the
    bore hole without any significant manipulative step.  See the reference to
    Class 507 in Class 166, subclass 244.1, SEARCH CLASS, for a further
    discussion of class lines.


CLS 166/313
TXT A process under subclass 244.1 comprising (1) the use of plural well
    conduits which extend from the ground surface substantially to or past a
    producing formation, the conduits being positioned side by side rather than
    one within the other, or (2) producing fluid from vertically spaced zones
    in the well.

    (1)     Note.  A conduit which extends alongside another conduit and which
    is intended to be used only for servicing the other conduit as by
    furnishing lifting gas is not considered a well conduit for part (1) of the
    definition. Processes using such conduits are classified on other features.

    (2)     Note.  A patent is classified as an original in this definition
    under part (1) if conduits are referred to in a claim and they are
    disclosed as positioned side by side and not one within another even though
    no claim recites the side by side feature.

    (3)     Note.  The vertically spaced zones may be nothing more than spaced
    groups of perforations receiving fluid from a single producing zone but
    usually the vertically spaced zones are for producing fluid from spaced
    formations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189,    for a packer for non concentric conduits.

    258,    for a process of producing fluid from distinct formations by in
    situ combustion.

    269,    for a process of producing fluid from  spaced formations by driving
    fluid through the formations from an adjacent well and desirably
    distributing the driving fluid through the formations.

    306,    for a process in which fluid leaves a well and fluid enters a well
    from spaced zones.


CLS 166/316
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising (1) valves, (2) closure means
    operable while the device is in the well (e.g., by destroying them) to
    effect fluid flow, or (3) means for effecting a calculated regulation of
    fluid flow by a restriction whose restrictive effect may be varied (e.g., a
    changeable choke).

    (1)     Note.  The restrictive effect under (3) of the definition may be
    changed by destroying the restriction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for float controlled valves.

    107+,   for valved receptacles with eduction pumps or plungers.

    112,    for valves operated during the operation of an eduction pump to
    allow liquid to flow into the well.

    141,    for a packer or plug seal which opens a port when expanded.

    142+,   and subclasses there noted for a central chamber with a packer or
    plug and a controllable passage between the chamber and the space beneath
    the packer.

    154,    for valves or closures opened by a piston fluid driven into the
    well.

    155,    for pistons fluid driven into the well with means permitting flow
    past the piston.

    156,    for a stop member positioned in a conduit and having an opening
    which is adapted to be closed by a piston fluid driven into the well.

    162+,   for receptacles with valves or closures.

    179+,   for flow control by means of packers or plugs.

    183,    for a packer with a controllable bypass outside a central conduit.

    184,    for a controllable passage between a central conduit and the space
    above a packer or plug.

    188,    for a packer or plug with a passage therethrough controlled by a
    valve, closure or variable restriction.

    194,    for a sleeve valve operated by a dropped ball type plug.

    205,    for screens with valves, closures or changeable restrictors.

    231+,   for spiral well screens constructed so that the spacing between the
    spirals may be varied.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 67+, for flow controllers responsive to
    the destruction, fusion or permanent deformation of an element, subclass
    155, for gas lift valves in wells, subclass 515, for line condition change
    responsive valves in conduit couplings, and other appropriate subclasses
    for fluid handling means with valves of general utility.  See the class
    definition of Class 166 for the line.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 37+, for flow regulators of
    general utility and 89+, for pipe closures and plugs of general utility.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 232+, for a below
    ground means movable relative to an earth boring tool to stop flow toward
    the bore bottom, and subclasses 317+, for an earth boring apparatus with a
    means movable relative to a tool or shaft to control a below ground passage.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 76, for impact actuated
    valves, subclasses 142+, for a flow path with a single valve, subclasses
    341+, for valves in which the valve actuator is the valve casing or a
    continuation thereof, and other appropriate subclasses, for valve and
    actuators of general utility not having a specific location in or
    relationship to the well.


CLS 166/317
TXT Devices under subclass 316 in which there is an element that is destroyed
    or permanently deformed to allow fluid flow or to stop fluid flow.


CLS 166/318
TXT Devices under subclass 316 in which there is an element or member dropped
    into the well to operate the valve to open or closed position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    317,    for an element which is dropped to effect destruction of a valve.


CLS 166/319
TXT Devices under subclass 316 wherein the valve is actuated in response to
    fluid pressure or fluid flow.  The operating fluid may be derived from a
    source externally of the valve or it may be the fluid which flows through
    the valve.


CLS 166/320
TXT Devices under subclass 319 in which the valve element is adjustable to
    control the amount of fluid flowing through the valve. The adjustment of
    the valve may be a positive, variable opening or closing of the valve or it
    may be an automatic adjustment responsive to fluid pressure at the valve.


CLS 166/321
TXT Devices under subclass 319 in which fluid pressure acts on a surface of the
    valve to urge the valve to open position.  The fluid acting on the valve
    may be the flow line fluid acting on surfaces of the valve of unequal areas
    or the fluid may be a control fluid distinct from the flow fluid.


CLS 166/322
TXT Devices under subclass 321 in which the valve is insertable and retrievable
    from the flow line, seats in position in the flow line and is usually held
    in position by a latch means.


CLS 166/323
TXT Devices under subclass 321 in which the valve element is positively locked
    in open or closed position to provide flow therethrough in both directions
    or to prevent flow therethrough in either direction.


CLS 166/324
TXT Devices under subclass 321 in which the valve has means which when operated
    equalized the pressure on both sides of the valve before the valve is moved
    to open position.


CLS 166/325
TXT Devices under subclass 319 in which the valve allows flow of fluids in one
    direction, but closes upon the reversing of flow in the opposite direction
    (check valve type).


CLS 166/326
TXT Devices under subclass 325 in which a part of the valve comprises a
    flexible valve element.


CLS 166/327
TXT Devices under subclass 325 comprising annular or blunt nosed means (usually
    known as casing shoes) at the end of a well conduit for facilitating its
    entrance into the well combined with a valve which is opened by fluid
    pressure acting directly on it and which returns to its original position
    when the pressure is removed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143+,   for a shoe with a check valve attached to a casing or strainer
    section having a packer, and detachably connected to a setting string.

    157+,   for a shoe with check valve attached to a screen for washing the
    screen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 515, for check valves in couplings joining
    sections of a well conduit.  These devices, usually known as float collars,
    are often very similar in structure to the float plugs or cement shoes of
    this subclass (327) of Class 166.


CLS 166/328
TXT Devices under subclass 327 wherein the valve comprises a loose ball that
    closes the valve opening to prevent reverse flow.


CLS 166/329
TXT Devices under subclass 319 wherein the valve element comprises a ball that
    allows full flow in one direction and limited flow in the opposite
    direction, and closes when the flow in the opposite direction becomes
    excessive.


CLS 166/330
TXT Devices under subclass 316 where the valve operator is rotated to open or
    close the valve.


CLS 166/331
TXT Devices under subclass 330 comprising a lug on one part and a branched slot
    on the other part, and rotation of the operator moves the lug to a position
    whereby the valve is or can be operated.


CLS 166/332.1
TXT Longitudinally movable operator:

    Valve, closure or changeable restrictor under subclass 316 comprising an
    axially shiftable element operated from the surface of the well to control
    movement of a flow regulating device.

    (1)     Note. Fluid operated valves are not classifiable here, they belong
    in subclasses 319+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66.7,   for electric longitudinal movable operator.


CLS 166/332.2
TXT Having rotational movement:

    Longitudinally moveable operator under subclass 332.1 wherein the axial
    shifting of the operator causes the flow regulating device to turn.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    330+,   for rotated operators wherein the operator extends to the surface
    and is rotated from the surface.


CLS 166/332.3
TXT Ball valve type:

    Devices under subclass 332.2 wherein the flow regulating device is a
    spherical member with at least one passage.


CLS 166/332.4
TXT Operated by means inserted from the surface:

    Longitudinally moveable operator under subclass 332.1 wherein a tool is
    inserted into the well from the wellhead to actuate the flow regulating
    device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332.2+, for a rotatable valve which could be operated by a tool inserted
    from the surface.


CLS 166/332.5
TXT Valving means inserted or retrieved to operate:

    Longitudinally moveable operator under subclass 332.1 wherein the flow
    regulating device is placed in the well or removed from the well to control
    fluid flow.


CLS 166/332.6
TXT Having a dump or discharge type means:

    Longitudinally moveable operator under subclass 332.1 wherein the flow
    regulating member includes a passage to allow excess fluid to escape.


CLS 166/332.7
TXT Having equalizing valve:

    Longitudinally moveable operator under subclass 332.1 including a flow
    regulating portion that allows pressure inside the tool to be the same as
    pressure outside the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324,    for a fluid operated valve with fluid pressure equalizing means.


CLS 166/332.8
TXT Flapper Type:

    Longitudinally moveable operator under subclass 332.1 wherein the flow
    regulating device comprises a hinged plate allowing flow in one direction.


CLS 166/333.1
TXT Contact with bore bottom:

    Longitudinally movable operator valve under subclass 332.1 comprising means
    which operate the flow regulating device upon impact with the deepest point
    in the well.


CLS 166/334.1
TXT Vertical movement of conduit:

    Longitudinally movable operator valve under subclass 332.1 comprising a
    flow regulating device which is actuated by axial shifting of the pipe or
    tubing string on which the device is supported.


CLS 166/334.2
TXT With rotational movement, e.g., ball valve type:

    Vertical movement of conduit under subclass 334.1 which causes the flow
    regulating device, or member, to turn.


CLS 166/334.3
TXT Drain type:

    Vertical movement of conduit under subclass 334.1 wherein the flow
    regulating device allows excess fluid to escape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332.8,  for drain valves operated by longitudinal movement.


CLS 166/334.4
TXT Fluid flow through lateral port to exterior:

    Vertical movement of conduit under subclass 334.1 wherein the shifting
    controls gas or liquid movement via a nipple in the pipe wall.


CLS 166/335
TXT SUBMERGED WELL:

    Process, apparatus, or device under the class definition including a step
    of, or means for, assembling the components of a well or including the
    component parts of such a well, the discharge surface of which well is
    located below the surface of a body of water.

    (1)     Note.  The well of this subclass is located below the surface of an
    ocean, a lake, a river, etc.

    (2)     Note.  For inclusion in this subclass characteristics must be
    claimed to peculiarly limit the process, apparatus, or device to function
    with or as a well, the surface of which is below the surface of a body of
    water.

    (3)     Note.  In this and the indented subclasses the following terms will
    be used as defined herein (terms followed by an asterisk (*) have been so
    defined):

    FLOW LINE:

    A tubular member adapted to transmit well fluid* away from the well.

    RISER:

    Structure for use with a submerged well intended to extend from the
    wellhead* toward the surface of the water generally directly above the
    wellhead.

    WELL ELEMENT:

    Any individual portion of well structure.

    WELL FLUID:

    The desired fluid material of the earth.  The purpose of the well is to
    remove this fluid.

    WELLHEAD:

    Means at the top of the well, generally extending above the surface of the
    earth, adapted to cap the well, support the well structure* inside a well
    casing, regulate the operation of the well, and/or supply well fluid* for
    distribution.

    WELL STRUCTURE:

    Equipment added to the earth in the formation or use of a well.  Well
    structure may extend above the surface of the earth (see wellhead*) as well
    as laterally away from the well (see flow line*).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75.11+, for above ground apparatus generally, including a wellhead
    structure. A wellhead structure disclosed as being under water but not
    claimed is made to a feature peculiarly adapting the device to function
    under water is to be found in subclasses 75.1+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 307+ for apparatus adapted to dredge
    material from a submerged location.

    114,    Ships, for a floating vessel generally including a floating vessel
    which may be utilized in construction of a submerged well.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 5+ for a process of, or
    apparatus for, boring a submerged formation.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, for mining or
    disintegrating hard material in a submerged location.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, for subject matter not including
    well structure directed to apparatus adapted to function in a submerged
    location, particularly subclasses 158+ for a process of, or apparatus for,
    laying pipe or cable into a submerged location; and subclasses 195+ for
    floatable marine floor-supported structure including a submerged well
    platform.


CLS 166/336
TXT Testing:

    Process, apparatus, or device under subclass 335 including means for
    determining the characteristics of the well structure.


CLS 166/337
TXT For leak:

    Process, apparatus, or device under subclass 336 including means for
    determining if the structure of the well is sufficiently tight to hold
    fluid therein.


CLS 166/338
TXT Connection or disconnection of submerged members remotely controlled:

    Process, apparatus, or device under subclass 335 including an actuatable
    tool or well element functioning to secure together or release two well
    elements, with means above the water surface to actuate the tool or well
    element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, for a pipe joint adapted to be operated
    from a remote location, and particularly subclasses 18+ for a pipe joint or
    coupling with an assembly means or feature.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 169+ for assembling
    conduit underwater to a fixed structure wherein the fixed structure is not
    limited to be a well; subclasses 190+ for diving combined with remote
    control of the diving apparatus.

    901,    Robots, appropriate subcollections for robots adapted to work in an
    under water environment.


CLS 166/339
TXT With provision for removal or repositioning of member without removal of
    other well structure:

    Process, apparatus, or device under subclass 338 including a well
    peculiarly designed to enable detachment of a well element without
    corresponding disturbance of other well structure, or including a step of,
    or means for, manipulating such well element.


CLS 166/340
TXT Disconnection:

    Process, apparatus, or device under subclass 338 including an actuatable
    tool or well element functioning to release two previously secured well
    elements from each other, with means above the water surface to actuate the
    tool or well element.

    (1)     Note.  The device of this subclass may function to both secure and
    release two well elements, but it is required that there be claimed
    reference to the function of release.


CLS 166/341
TXT With orienting or aligning of member for connection:

    Process, apparatus, or device under subclass 338 including provision to
    cause at least one well element to move about an axis or to be translated
    to a different position to properly interfit with another well element.


CLS 166/342
TXT Including removable, member mounted guide:

    Process, apparatus, or device under subclass 341 including use of means to
    passively direct movement of one well element relative to another well
    element, which means is adapted to be detachably secured to a well element
    when in use.


CLS 166/343
TXT Including means to pull member into position:

    Process, apparatus, or device under subclass 341 including use of means
    exerting tensile force to draw a well element to an operational location
    with respect to another well element.


CLS 166/344
TXT Connection to provide fluid flow path:

    Process, apparatus, or device under subclass 338 including securing of a
    well element of the type that is to provide as a passage of liquid or
    gaseous flowable material.


CLS 166/345
TXT Connection of riser-and-tubing assembly to other structure:

    Process, apparatus, or device under subclass 344 wherein the well element
    comprises a grouping of tubular components extending upwardly from the
    wellhead to the surface of the water, one of the components intended to
    convey well fluid to the surface of the water.


CLS 166/346
TXT Yieldable tubing:

    Process, apparatus, or device under subclass 344 wherein the well element
    includes a passage that is intended to change shape.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a tube intended to flex within its
    elastic limit, as well as a tube intended to yield beyond its elastic limit.


CLS 166/347
TXT Connection of lateral flow line:

    Process, apparatus, or device under subclass 344 wherein the well element
    is a tubular member adapted to serve as a passage for well fluid from the
    well across the surface of the earth and away from the well.


CLS 166/348
TXT Connection of pipe hanging:

    Process, apparatus, or device under subclass 338 wherein the connection
    made is intended to support the weight of tubing suspended therefrom and
    extending down into the well.


CLS 166/349
TXT Connection of guide means:

    Process, apparatus, or device under subclass 338 wherein the well element
    is a member adapted to extend from the surface of the water to the surface
    of the earth in the vicinity of the well and is intended to serve to
    passively direct another well element to move therealong and down the well.


CLS 166/350
TXT Submerged, buoyant wellhead or riser:

    Process, apparatus, or device under subclass 335 involving use of a device
    at the top of the well, positioned above the surface of the earth, adapted
    to cap the well, support the structure inside a well casing, regulate the
    operation of the well, and/or supply well fluid for distribution; or
    involving use of a device extending upwardly from the plane where the well
    meets the surface of the earth toward the surface of the water for fluid
    communication with the surface of the water, which device includes portions
    lighter than the water displaced thereby to assist in supporting the
    adjacent well structure against gravity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    367,    for a riser, generally, for use beneath the surface of a body of
    water.

    368,    for a wellhead, generally, for use beneath the surface of a body of
    water.


CLS 166/351
TXT Means removably connected to permanent well structure:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 335 intended to be used in the
    operation or formation of a well and intended to be removable from the well
    without destruction of the well.

    (1)     Note.  A derrick including structure of this class will be found in
    this subclass or the subclasses indented hereunder even if there is no
    specific disclosure of subsequent removal from the well.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    358,    for well drilling combined with derrick structure in a device of
    this subclass.


CLS 166/352
TXT Surface vessel:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 351 including structure adapted to
    buoyantly rest upon the surface of the water above the well.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    358,    for well drilling including floating of a buoyant derrick to the
    well site.


CLS 166/353
TXT Having means to move vessel to precise location:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 352 including provision to cause the
    buoyant structure to be displaced from a remote position to a more exact
    position to be suitable for use with a well.


CLS 166/354
TXT Having means to hold vessel at given location (e.g., anchor, etc.):

    Process or apparatus under subclass 352 including provision to cause the
    buoyant means not to move once in position over the well.


CLS 166/355
TXT With means to compensate for vessel movement:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 352 including provision to accommodate
    for the relative movement between the buoyant means resting on the surface
    of the water and the well.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is provision to allow for relative movement
    brought about by wave or tide action on the vessel.


CLS 166/356
TXT Means to provide protective environment for operative access below surface
    of water:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 351 including provision of a means to
    isolate a man from hostile conditions, which means is located beneath the
    surface of the water.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 185+ for diving under
    water to a well where no well or well manipulation is claimed.


CLS 166/357
TXT Separator:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 351 including means to isolate one
    portion of the well fluid from another or including means to isolate the
    well fluid from foreign material.


CLS 166/358
TXT Drilling means:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 351 including means for forming a
    passageway.


CLS 166/359
TXT Removable riser:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 351 wherein the structure intended to
    be removed from the well is generally rigid, generally fixed structure
    extending from the well upwardly for fluid communication with the surface
    of the water.

    (1)     Note.  A flow line extending laterally away from the well is not
    considered to be a riser even though eventually extending upwardly to the
    surface of the water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    367,    for a riser that is a portion of a fixed structure of a well.


CLS 166/360
TXT Well component assembly means:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 351 comprising bringing together a pair
    of well elements or including securing together a pair of well elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 700+ for assembly means, generally.


CLS 166/361
TXT Pipe cutting means:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 351 including means to subdivide one
    portion of the well tubing from another portion.


CLS 166/363
TXT With safety or emergency shutoff:

    Device under subclass 335 combined with means to terminate the flow of well
    fluid under conditions that would otherwise endanger the well or
    environment (including personnel) or other extreme conditions.


CLS 166/364
TXT Including disaster feature:

    Device under subclass 335 wherein the well structure is provided with means
    allowing damaging conditions to occur without total loss of the well.


CLS 166/365
TXT With provision for disassembly:

    Device under subclass 335 wherein intentional provisions in the well
    structure allow the portions of the well to be separated one from the other.


CLS 166/366
TXT Multiple wells:

    Device under subclass 335 including more than one well.


CLS 166/367
TXT Riser:

    Device under subclass 335 comprising means extending from the plane where
    the well meets the surface of the earth upwardly toward the surface of the
    water for fluid communication with the surface of the water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    350,    for a riser for use beneath the surface of a body of water, which
    riser is buoyantly supported above the surface of the earth.


CLS 166/368
TXT Wellhead:

    Device under subclass 335 comprising means at the top of the well,
    generally extending above the surface of the earth, adapted to cap the
    well, support the well structure inside a well casing, regulate the
    operation of the well, and/or supply well fluid for distribution.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    350,    for a wellhead for use beneath the surface of a body of water,
    which wellhead is buoyantly supported above the surface of the earth.


CLS 166/369
TXT Producing the well:

    Process under subclass 244.1 which includes a significant manipulative step
    of recovering fluid from the earth.

    (1)     Note.  The mere placing of a control device or removing an
    obstruction is not enough for classification in this subclass.  Also the
    mere broad recitation in a claim that a well is flowed or produced is not
    enough.  Some detail of the flowing steps must be set forth.  Processes
    with a mere broad recitation that a well is flowed or produced are
    classified on some other basis.  Subject matter found in any subclass of
    this class may have a disclosure of producing the well. Cross-references
    should be made with restraint, therefore.  The subclasses noted below are
    considered especially pertinent to producing processes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247,    for a process of producing a well involving the use of nuclear
    energy or radioactivity.

    249,    for a process of producing a well involving vibrating the earth or
    material in the earth.

    263,    for cyclic operation of plural wells.

    264,    for a process of producing a well merely to take a sample of fluid.

    265+,   for a process of producing a well comprising separating material
    leaving a well.

    302+,   for a process of producing a well involving heating or cooling.

    305+,   and especially subclass 306, for a process of producing a well
    involving placing a fluid into or fracturing a formation.

    311+,   for a process of cleaning or unloading the well.

    313+,   for a process of producing a parallel, nonconcentric string or
    multiple completion well.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 1+ for processes of controlling fluid
    flow of general application.  Sole disclosure or claiming of use in a well
    causes classification in Class 166.

    417,    Pumps, appropriate subclasses for methods of and apparatus for
    recovering earth fluids involving only pumping.


CLS 166/370
TXT Including varying downhole pressure:

    Process under subclass 369 including a significant step of changing the
    below ground pressure by either (a) varying the pressure in the central
    conduit or pump inlet, as by a vacuum pump, or (b) varying formation
    pressure in a geopressurized zone so that recoverable gas is evolved from
    the formation fluid.

    (1)     Note.  Inasmuch as any process for reproducing fluid from a
    formation will in all likelihood cause incidental changes in below ground
    pressure, the broad recitation of producing the formation or of pumping it
    is, in itself, not sufficient for classification in this subclass.


CLS 166/371
TXT Including nonexplosive material placed in well:

    Process under subclass 369 including a step of introducing into the well a
    material which acts in a manner other than to physically force the well
    fluid toward the surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246,    for a process of producing a well involving the use of
    microorganisms.

    279,    for a process of producing a well comprising contacting the fluid
    to be produced by a treating material in the pores of a formation.

    310,    for a process of producing a well comprising entraining or
    incorporating a treating material in the flowing earth fluid in a well.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    507,    Earth Boring, Well Treating, and Oil Field Chemistry, subclasses
    200+ for processes involving no significant manipulative steps or
    relationship with the well and consisting only of placing a treating
    material in a well.  Example of broadly recited steps which are not
    considered significantly manipulative are:  using pressure, introducing one
    material after another, introducing materials through separate conduits,
    producing the well, removing spent material, introducing material at the
    bottom of the well, or below paraffin deposits, contacting well fluids with
    an introduced material during pumping producing or blowing the well.
    Examples of processes classifiable in Class 166 rather than Class 507 are;
    a process in which materials are introduced into a well to react with each
    other (including a process in which one material reacts with the product of
    the reaction between another material and a material found in the well), a
    process in which a material is introduced in a special location, as between
    the casing and tubing, or a process in which a material is inserted into
    the pores of the earth.


CLS 166/372
TXT By fluid lift:

    Process under subclass 369 wherein a motive fluid is used to expel the well
    fluid from the well.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256+,   for a process of producing a well comprising in situ combustion.

    268+,   for a process of producing a well by forcing fluid into an adjacent
    well.

    309,    for a process including a step of producing a foam or gas in the
    well by a foam or gas making material.


CLS 166/373
TXT Operating a valve, closure, or changeable restrictor in a well:

    Process under subclass 244 for operating a fluid flow regulating device
    located in the well.

    (1)     Note.  The mere step of positioning or landing a valve in a well
    without a significant operating step is not sufficient for inclusion in
    this subclass.  Likewise, the mere step of placing or removing a plug in a
    well for stopping or allowing flow is classified in subclass 286.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    316,    for a valve, closure, or changeable restrictor.

    386,    for a method of positioning a valve in a well, where no significant
    operation step is claimed, or a method of positioning or removing a plug
    from a well.


CLS 166/374
TXT Operated by fluid pressure controlled above ground:

    Process under subclass 373 wherein the flow regulating device is operated
    by a fluid pressure change which is initiated by an above ground operator.

    (1)     Note.  The fluid pressure change is typically communicated to the
    flow controller by the conduit which the valve controls.

    (2)     Note.  Changing the production flow to cause a change in pressure
    is subject matter in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for an above ground actuating means for a below ground device.


CLS 166/375
TXT By auxiliary fluid control line:

    Process under subclass 374 wherein the fluid pressure change which is
    initiated by an above ground operator is communicated to the flow
    regulating device by a conduit used exclusively for that purpose.


CLS 166/376
TXT Destroying or dissolving well part:

    Process under subclass 244.1 including a step of intentionally ruining or
    disintegrating an element of the well or a portion thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    297+,   for a process of perforating, weakening, bending, or separating a
    pipe at an unprepared point.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 426.4 for residual methods for disassembly
    by alteration or destruction of a work part.


CLS 166/377
TXT Disassembling well part:

    Process under subclass 244.1 including a step of disconnecting,
    disassociating, or otherwise removing one or more elements of a well in a
    final relationship of elements.

    (1)     Note.  The above definition excludes removal of a part in an
    unintended or unexpected association with another (e.g., a part which
    accidentally drops and becomes lodged in a well).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77.51+, for above ground means facilitating the disconnection of tubing or
    rod sections.

    88.1,   for above ground disassembly means (e.g., handling, guiding, or
    tool feature).

    301,    for a process of freeing a stuck object by grappling or fishing in
    the well.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 426.1+ for the residual locus of
    disassembly methods.


CLS 166/378
TXT Assembly well parts:

    Process under subclass 244.1 including a step of securing together two
    elements of a well.

    (1)     Note.  The mere actuation or expansion of an anchor or hanger into
    engagement with a casing or borehole is not considered assembly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85.1,   for above ground assembly means (e.g., handling, guiding, or tool
    feature).

    313,    for a process for assembling or otherwise handling or manipulating
    well elements of a parallel, nonconcentric string or multiple completion
    well.

    382,    for a method of placing or shifting a well part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 428+ for the residual locus of assembly
    methods.


CLS 166/379
TXT Above ground parts:

    Process under subclass 378 wherein the two elements, once secured, are
    employed at or above ground level.

    (1)     Note.  For purpose of this subclass, ground level is either (a)
    the level at which a person may work outside the casing of the well, this
    working space being provided either in the open or by a cellar or tunnel,
    or (b) the level at which a laterally running pipeline for discharging well
    fluid from or inserting treating fluid into the well is connected to the
    well casing.

    (2)     Note.  The definition is considered to include also those means
    adjacent the defined level though actually below it.


CLS 166/380
TXT Conduit:

    Process under subclass 378 wherein at least one of the elements is a well
    conduit or portion thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77.51+, for above ground means facilitating the connection of tubing or rod
    sections.


CLS 166/381
TXT Placing or shifting well part:

    Process under subclass 244.1 including a step of putting an element of a
    well in a particular place or moving an element to or from a position of
    use.

    (1)     Note.  Movement of an actuator, or handle therefor, is insufficient
    to cause classification in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for apparatus with above ground casing sinking means and a below
    ground feature.

    117.5,  for a means for guiding an insertable element laterally of the well
    axis (e.g., a whipstock, or side pocket mandrel).

    264,    for a process of placing in position of use an apparatus (e.g., a
    tubing and a packer, etc.) for taking a sample of well fluid.

    276,    for a process of providing a porous cementitious filter.

    277,    for repairing an object in the well including expanding a section
    of pipe to repair another pipe.

    278,    for a graveling or filter forming process.

    313,    for a process of assembling or otherwise handling or manipulating
    well elements of a parallel, nonconcentric string or multiple completion
    well.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 133 for a method of
    placing or shifting parts (e.g., lining) in an underground vertical shaft.


CLS 166/382
TXT Providing support for well part (e.g., hanger or anchor):

    Process under subclass 381 including a significant manipulative step of
    furnishing support for a well part.

    (1)     Note.  The step of actuating a hanger or anchor to fix the same
    inside a well is sufficient to cause classification in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Landing a well tool on a prepared set is subject matter for
    this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207,    for an expansible casing section.


CLS 166/383
TXT By fluid driven piston:

    Process under subclass 381 wherein a translating member driven by fluid
    pressure is employed to put into place or move a well part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153+,   for the piston apparatus, per se.


CLS 166/384
TXT With bending of tubing:

    Process under subclass 381 including a step of deforming a conduit or
    portion thereof while placing it in a well.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77.1+,  for apparatus which force tubing or cable into an existing well.


CLS 166/385
TXT Flexible cable or wire:

    Process under subclass 381 including a step of inserting or moving a strand
    of flaccid material, or for placing or shifting a well part using a strand
    of flaccid material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77.1+,  for above ground apparatus for forcing a tubing or cable into an
    existing well.


CLS 166/386
TXT Fluid flow control member (e.g., plug or valve):

    Process under subclass 381 wherein the element comprises a device for
    regulating or obstructing fluid flow in the central conduit or tubing of
    the well.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123+,   for detachable setting means for a packer or plug with an expanding
    anchor.

    181+,   for a detachable setting means for a packer or plug.

    373,    for a process of operating a valve, closure or changeable
    restrictor in a well.


CLS 166/387
TXT With sealing feature (e.g., packer):

    Process under subclass 381 wherein the element comprises means to block the
    passage of material into or out of a particular area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118+,   for a packer or plug with an expanding anchor.

    179+,   for a packer or plug.

    284+,   for a process for blocking a perforation already in a member in a
    well by a pellet.


CLS 166/400
TXT Sequentially injected separate fluids (e.g., slugs):

    A process in distinct, separate wells under subclass 268 in which gas or
    liquid quantities are introduced into the pores of the earth through an
    input well or wells, the quantities being separately identifiable at the
    point of introduction into the earth, each fluid quantity consisting of a
    solution, mixture, compound, or element.

    (1)     Note. The separate identity of the fluid quantities is established
    by introduction into the earth at different time intervals or in spaced
    locations. A single fluid quantity may be one whose composition gradually
    changes in proportions so that there is no distinct break in the
    time-composition curve. Any distinct break in such a curve is considered to
    result in separately identifiable quantities. A broad reference to
    introduction from a plurality of wells or introduction from a single group
    of perforations is not enough to qualify a quantity as introduced from
    "spaced locations."

    (2)     Note. One of the fluid quantities may be a final displacing or
    driving fluid. The injection of such a fluid is sometimes indicated only by
    a phrase such as, "driving (the previously placed fluid) toward the output
    well." The meaning of such a phrase should be construed in the light of the
    specification. If the specification indicates that the drive is
    accomplished by a separately identifiable displacing fluid, then the
    displacing fluid is one of the fluid quantities. If the specification
    indicates that the drive is merely the continued introduction of a previous
    fluid or pump pressure, then the drive fluid is not a separately
    identifiable fluid quantity.

    (3)     Note. A single compound forming part of a mixture is not a fluid
    quantity under this definition. Thus, a mixture of three compounds is a
    single fluid quantity rather than three fluid quantities.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    260,    for a process involving in situ combustion and injecting specific
    fuel or catalyst for burning into formation.

    261,    for a process involving injecting specific material other than
    oxygen into formation.

    269,    for processes involving input and output wells and fluid introduced
    into the formation from vertically spaced locations in an input well.

    270+,   for a process involving input and output wells including selective
    plugging or a surfactant.

    271,    for processes involving input and output wells and a separate fluid
    for fracturing or attacking the formation.


CLS 166/401
TXT Injecting a gas or gas mixture:

    Sequentially injected fluid under subclass 400 in which a drive or flooding
    substance is compressible, has low cohesive force, and has a viscosity that
    increases as temperature increases.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass would be air, nitrogen,
    hydrocarbon gas, flue gas, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    309,    for a process producing foam or gas in a well by a material.


CLS 166/402
TXT CO2 or carbonated gas:

    Injected gas under subclass 401 in which (a) carbon dioxide or (b) a salt
    or ester of carbonic acid in the vapor phase is inserted.


CLS 166/403
TXT In combination with additional organic material (e.g., alkyls, carbon
    chains):

    Injecting CO2 or carbonated gas under subclass 402 including more carbon
    based substances such as (a) a univalent aliphatic, aromatic-aliphatic, or
    alicyclic hydrocarbon radical or (b) the element carbon in a chemical
    string.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 166/901
TXT WELL IN FROZEN TERRAIN (E.G., PERMAFROST):
    Subject matter specialized to well operations in locations where the
    temperature of the soil is below the freezing point of water.


CLS 166/902
TXT FOR INHIBITING CORROSION OR COATING:

    Subject matter specialized to preventing or alleviating the effects of
    either (a) corrosion or (b) formation of a coating material on well
    equipment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170+,   for brushing, scraping, cutting or punching type well cleaners.

    304,    for dissolving or preventing formation of a solid oil deposit.

    311+,   for cleaning or unloading well.


CLS 168/
TTL FARRIERY

CLS 168/
TXT This class includes all inventions involving the shape, material,
    construction, and securing in place of the shoes of cattle and of horses;
    also, shoeing-stands and tools employed by blacksmiths in fitting securing
    such shoes, with the exception of mere hoof-trimming knives, which will be
    found in Class 30, Cutlery, and patents on grinding machines which are
    stated to be intended for sharpening calks, but are of general utility.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, for general care of an animal.


CLS 168/1
TXT Shoes or boots which are temporarily fastened on the foot over the ordinary
    shoe; principally the means for securing such overshoes or boots.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    54,     Harness, subclass 82.


CLS 168/2
TXT Overshoes and boots which are secured over the shoe and around the foot and
    leg of the animal for holding in place sponges, pads, etc., saturated with
    water or medicines for treating diseases of the foot.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    54,     Harness, subclass 82.


CLS 168/3
TXT Overshoes having broad soles which are intended to prevent the animal
    sinking in the soft ground of swamps or for injuring the grass of lawns.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    54,     Harness, subclass 82.


CLS 168/4
TXT Miscellaneous horseshoes not classified in the other subclasses.  It
    includes shoes made of specific materials and combinations of various
    materials.


CLS 168/5
TXT The name indicates the contents of this subclass.


CLS 168/6
TXT Miscellaneous shoes constructed to be adjusted for the purpose of spreading
    or permitting the spreading of the hoof when the heel has become contracted.


CLS 168/7
TXT Hoof-spreading shoes hinged at the toe to allow the heels and sides to
    expand and contract with the action of the hoof.


CLS 168/8
TXT Hoof-spreading shoes having a spring located between the side bars of the
    shoe for spreading them apart at the heel.


CLS 168/9
TXT Hinged section, hoof-spreading shoes having a sectional bar lying between
    the side sections of the shoe and pressing them outward.


CLS 168/10
TXT Shoes formed with wedge-shaped projections which extend upward from the
    surface of the shoe between the heels and serve to spread them apart when
    the weight comes upon them.


CLS 168/11
TXT Shoes made in sections, one of which is permanently secured to the hoof and
    the other is attached by various means to the permanent section and can be
    removed and renewed whenever it becomes worn.


CLS 168/12
TXT Miscellaneous shoes provided with elastic material between the plates of a
    composite structure or on the upper surface of the shoe between the same
    and the hoof.


CLS 168/13
TXT Metal shoes provided with sockets or grooves in their lower surface, into
    which are fitted blocks of elastic material which form the tread-surface of
    the shoe.


CLS 168/14
TXT Cushioned soft-tread shoes the elastic material whereof is extended over
    the sole, or at least over the frogs of the foot, in order to protect the
    same from injury.

    (1)     Note.  Similar sole-pads which are attached without modification in
    the structure of the shoe are found in this class, subclass 26, and
    indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     and indented subclasses.


CLS 168/15
TXT A spring-heel is formed by a hinged or resilient portion of the shoe backed
    in some cases by a rubber or metallic spring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include mere rubber pads on the heels
    of the shoe, for which see this class, subclass 13.


CLS 168/16
TXT The shoes are provided with pads at the edge to prevent injury from
    interference.

    (1)     Note.  In many cases the cushion extends over the upper surface of
    the shoe, as in the constructions found in this class, subclass 12.


CLS 168/17
TXT Miscellaneous improvements in the devices for securing the shoe to the hoof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.


CLS 168/18
TXT Shoes without nails and secured by a well-defined boot structure extending
    up around the hoof and secured by straps and buckles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2       and 3.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    54,     Harness, subclass 82.


CLS 168/19
TXT Shoes made in sections having flanges or spurs which are clamped onto the
    edges of the hoof.


CLS 168/20
TXT Constructions in which sectional flanges embracing or interlocking with the
    shoe and the edge of the hoof are bolted or otherwise secured together.


CLS 168/21
TXT Shoes provided with upwardly-extending spurs which are bent or clamped over
    the edge of the hoof and grasp the same with spurs or are secured to the
    hoof by nails or screws.


CLS 168/22
TXT Shoes provided with a strap extending up the front of the hoof and
    heel-straps running from the heel of the shoe to and connecting with the
    toe-strap.

    (1)     Note.  These shoes are somewhat like those of subclass 18, but do
    not constitute a well defined boot.


CLS 168/23
TXT The specific construction for securing the shoe to the foot by means of
    nails or screws.


CLS 168/24
TXT Peculiarities in the form of the shoe.


CLS 168/25
TXT Weighted shoes, toe-weights, heel weights, and combined weights and
    quarter-boots.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 403, for a paperweight and
    subclass 404 for miscellaneous weighting means.

    54,     Harness, subclass 82, for quarter-boots, per se.


CLS 168/26
TXT Pads secured inside the shoe for the protection of the sole and frog of the
    foot.  In some cases the pad comes into contact with the ground and gives a
    cushioned tread.

    (1)     Note.  Sole-pads are distinguished from subclass 13, by the fact
    that the shoe, per se, is not composite or cushioned with elastic material,
    and there is no modification of the shoe.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for stock material, particularly of plural layer form, which may be useful
    in forming a pad.


CLS 168/27
TXT Sole-pads constructed and adapted to be packed with sponge or other
    absorbent material to be saturated with medicines for the treatment of foot
    diseases or in some cases with water to keep the foot moist.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.


CLS 168/28
TXT Sole-pads formed of rubber or other elastic material to protect the sole
    and frog, relieve them from shock, and to keep the foot from balling up
    with snow in the winter.


CLS 168/29
TXT The form, construction, or arrangement of the calks on the shoe.

    (1)     Note.  Where there is any novelty in the mode of attachment of a
    removable calk, the patent is cross-referenced into the appropriate
    subclass of calks, removable.


CLS 168/30
TXT Auxiliary calked sections adapted to be clamped to the shoe to prevent
    slipping.

    (1)     Note.  Distinguished from subclass 11, in being of a temporary
    nature less intimately associated in structure with the primary shoe, and
    the latter is not modified in structure to provide for the attachment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclasses 59 and 67.


CLS 168/31
TXT Miscellaneous means for securing a removable calk to the shoe.


CLS 168/32
TXT Removable calks attached to the shoe by one or more bolts or screws and
    where a single one is employed it is prevented from turning by a flange or
    shoulder on one part or the other.


CLS 168/33
TXT Calks secured to the shoe by a screw or bolt and prevented from turning on
    the bolt by a lug on one part engaging a socket in the other.


CLS 168/34
TXT Calks provided with clamps by which they are clamped upon the shoe.


CLS 168/35
TXT Shoe and calk joined by a dovetailed connection and locked against movement
    by a variety of means.


CLS 168/36
TXT Calks or shoes provided with one or more hooked or undercut lugs which
    enter an undercut socket and are forced laterally into engagement.  They
    are then locked by a pin which enters the shoe and the calk.


CLS 168/37
TXT Calks or shoes provided with one or more undercut lugs which enter a socket
    and one wedged laterally to lock them in an undercut portion of the socket.


CLS 168/38
TXT The head of one of the nails which are used to secure the shoe to the hoof
    is so formed as to serve the purpose of a calk.


CLS 168/39
TXT Calk and shoe connected by means of a tenon having a button-head which
    enters a socket and is then turned on its axis to lock it in place.


CLS 168/40
TXT Calk and shoe connected by a tenon-and-socket connection secured in place
    by a cross-pin or set-screw.


CLS 168/41
TXT Calk and shoe joined by a tenon-and-socket connection, the parts being
    retained by friction.


CLS 168/42
TXT A tenon on the calk or a lug on the shoe is screw-threaded and the parts
    are screwed together.  Various means are employed to prevent the parts from
    unscrewing.


CLS 168/43
TXT The calk or a tenon on the same is inserted in a socket in the shoe and
    wedged in place.


CLS 168/44
TXT Stands used by blacksmiths for holding tools, supporting the foot of the
    animal, or serving as a seat for the workman.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 712+ for controlling an animal.


CLS 168/45
TXT Miscellaneous tools, largely compound tools for the use of blacksmiths.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous compound
    tools, and see the Notes to the class definition of that class (7) for
    compound tools elsewhere classified.


CLS 168/46
TXT Various tools or portable machines used for sharpening the calks of
    horseshoes without removal of the shoe.

    (1)     Note.  Certain portable grinding-machines intended for this
    purpose, but having no special construction limiting or adapting them to
    this purpose, and suitable for general grinding, are classified in Class
    451, Abrading, subclass 346.


CLS 168/47
TXT Tools used for expanding or pressing apart the heel portions of the hoof
    when they have become contracted.  There are also some bending-tools for
    expanding the heels of a horseshoe to fit it to the foot.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclass 302 for outwardly-facing jaws on pliers, and
    subclass 485 for miscellaneous spreaders.


CLS 168/48.1
TXT Hoof cleaner or trimmer:

    Subject matter under subclass 45 wherein the tool is used to remove foreign
    matter or excess material from the unguis, i.e., hoof, of the cattle or
    horse.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 236+ for a
    scraper of general cleaning utility, and see the search notes thereunder
    for other scrapers of more specialized application.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 76.1+ for a device or process for filing
    metal, i.e., cutting metal with a hard instrument having its surface
    sharply ridged, particularly subclass 76.4 for a file, per se.

    30,     Cutlery, appropriate subclasses, for a hand manipulable cutting
    implement adapted for trimming a hoof but of more general utility.


CLS 168/48.2
TXT Rotary:

    Subject matter under subclass 48.1 wherein the tool utilizes a revolving
    portion to remove the foreign matter or excess material.


CLS 169/
TTL FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

CLS 169/
TXT

    This class includes patents for apparatus and methods designed specifically
    for extinguishing fire and elements of such apparatus not classifiable in
    border existing classes; also apparatus capable of performing this function
    if designed to prevent fire by operating in anticipation of fire conditions.

    (1)     Note.  Devices whose sole function is the extinguishing of fire by
    smothering are included; but devices for smothering fire by closing doors,
    windows, shutters, and the like are excluded.  For the latter see Class 49,
    Movable or Removable Closures, and Class 160, Flexible or Portable Closure,
    Partition, or Panel, especially subclass 1 and indented subclasses.  Where
    the smothering and extinguishing actions are combined, the patent is
    classified in the appropriate subclass of this class (169).

    (2)     Note.  Apparatus for the general purpose of distributing fluids is
    found in Class 137, Fluid Handling.

    (3)     Note.  See Class 239, Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing,
    appropriate subclasses for apparatus used for sprinkling and spraying of
    fluids.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclass 370 for projectiles carrying
    fire extinguishing gases.

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 235.1+, 236, 237, and 256 for cigar and
    cigarette extinguishers.

    252,    Compositions, for compositions for use in extinguishing fires.


CLS 169/5
TXT The general type of complete extinguishing apparatus under the class
    definition involving a source of extinguishing fluid, distributing-pipes
    for conveying the fluid, to distant points of application, discharge
    outlets for delivering the fluid, and means for causing the propulsion of
    the fluid through the system when desired, the latter means including the
    force of gravity.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes systems in which the
    distributing-pipes have combined functions, such as serving for both
    extinguishing and heating or ventilating.


CLS 169/6
TXT Systems under subclass 5, in which a liquid is discharged from its
    supply-tank by pressure generated by the reaction of chemicals mixed at the
    time discharge is to occur.


CLS 169/7
TXT Systems under subclass 6, in which the operation occurs automatically in
    response to fire conditions, such as an abnormal increase of temperature in
    the region to be protected.


CLS 169/8
TXT Systems under subclass 7, wherein the operation occurs automatically in
    direct response to a variation of pressure of the fluid which normally
    fills the distributing-pipes.  This pressure change usually results from
    the opening of a thermally-controlled sprinkler-head, permitting flow of
    gas or liquid from the pipes.


CLS 169/9
TXT Fluid systems under subclass 5, in which an agent is discharged from its
    container by the pressure of a gas normally confined in the same or in a
    separate container.


CLS 169/10
TXT Systems under subclass 5, wherein the source is essentially a liquid-tank
    not under pressure, but elevated above the distributing-pipes so that
    discharge will occur by gravity.


CLS 169/11
TXT Systems under subclass 5, wherein extinguishing agent is gaseous or is
    delivered in the form of a gas and by its own energy or by mechanical
    blowers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 45.1+ for process and apparatus for
    handling solidified or liquefied gas (e.g., CO2) as a commodity requiring
    steps or means special to liquefied gas and more than required for other
    liquids.


CLS 169/12
TXT The extinguishing agent under subclass 11 consisting of flue or furnace
    gases or like products of combustion and is forced into the fire area
    usually after being cooled and purified.


CLS 169/13
TXT Systems under subclass 5, in which a pump is the essential element for
    propelling a liquid agent from a low-pressure or pressureless source to the
    point of application.


CLS 169/14
TXT Systems under subclass 5, wherein two or more substances, one or more in
    liquid form, are caused to unite or mix in passing from their sources to a
    common discharge-point.

    (1)     Note.  This group includes those "foam" systems in which two
    liquids are mixed near the discharge point to form a fire-extinguishing
    foam.


CLS 169/15
TXT Systems under subclass 14, in which a main liquid stream in passing to the
    discharge point is modified by adding or injecting another substance, such
    as a gas, dissolved solid, or solid matter in suspension.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 87.01+ for self proportioning or
    correlating systems, especially subclasses 111+ for plural inflows, and
    subclass 268 for a fluid handling system with a holder for solid material
    to be entrained in a flow.  See the search notes thereunder.


CLS 169/16
TXT Patents under subclass 5, relating to the control of the distribution of
    fluid through the pipes or branches of the system to the discharge-points
    and the arrangement of the pipes or outlets.


CLS 169/17
TXT Systems under subclass 16, in which the pipes are normally closed and
    filled with gas, which is displaced by extinguishing liquid when the system
    is active. Operation results from the pressure change following the opening
    of a thermally controlled outlet.


CLS 169/18
TXT Hand-operated means under subclass 16 for operating valves which control
    the flow through the pipes, usually arranged to permit control from a
    distant point.


CLS 169/19
TXT Valves under the class definition for normally restraining flow through a
    fluid system and opening automatically to permit flow upon the occurrence
    of fire conditions.  Usually an increase of temperature in the protected
    area is the ultimate condition which governs the operation of the valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 65+, 72+, 79+, 457, and 468 for other
    valve actuation responsive to increased temperature.


CLS 169/20
TXT Valves under subclass 19, which operate as a direct result of a pressure
    change in the fluid normally filling the distributing pipes or an auxiliary
    system of pipes extended into the area to be protected. These valves are
    used principally in dry pipe distributing systems and usually include a
    "water-valve", which is held closed against the pressure of the source by
    force transmitted from an "air-valve" exposed to the pressure of the fluid
    normally filling the distributing-pipes.


CLS 169/21
TXT Apparatus under subclass 20, wherein the pressure on the air-valve is
    transmitted to the water-valve through a system of levers or like
    mechanical elements and usually in increased amount.


CLS 169/22
TXT Apparatus under subclass 20, wherein the pressure of the fluid in the
    distributing- pipes is transmitted directly from the air-valve to the
    water-valve to maintain the latter closed, the effective area of the
    air-valve being greater than that of the water-valve.  The air-valve may be
    integral with the water-valve or may have a bearing upon it without the
    interposition of levers, toggles, or the like.


CLS 169/23
TXT Alarm or signal devices under the class definition peculiarly adapted for
    use in connection with extinguishing systems for signaling the abnormal
    position of a valve or abnormal flow through the pipes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 227.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 577 to 599 for electric fire
    alarm systems which are automatically responsive to fire or temperature.
    See the class definition of Class 340 for the line between Classes 169 and
    340.


CLS 169/24
TXT Apparatus under subclass 52, of the type used by city fire companies which
    includes the combination of pumping apparatus with a vehicle and is
    especially adapted for extinguishing fire.

    (1)     Note.  Inventions in the pump or power plant, per se, are excluded.


CLS 169/25
TXT Extinguishing apparatus under subclass 52, involving a portable discharge
    pipe or structure having an inlet connection and a discharge-nozzle and
    means for elevating the nozzle and controlling the direction of the
    discharge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 51+ for similar
    structure wherein the hose or nozzle support is a vehicle mounted ladder or
    scaffold.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing subclasses 146+ for
    mobile spray systems.


CLS 169/26
TXT Fire extinguishing devices under the class definition which includes a
    container for an extinguishing agent adapted to be placed in the space to
    be protected and means automatic in operation for causing the agent to be
    discharged into the space around the container.

    (1)     Note.  For portable vessels see this class, subclass 30, and
    indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 219+ for a container with
    plural distinct contents which contents can be mixed by rupture,
    manipulation or agitation of the container or container portions.


CLS 169/27
TXT Devices under subclass 26, wherein the discharge of the extinguishing agent
    is due to pressure generated by the reaction of normally separated
    chemicals, which are mixed at the time of operation.

    (1)     Note.  Search this class, subclass 32.


CLS 169/28
TXT Devices under subclass 26, in which an explosive substance is provided
    which upon detonation bursts the container and scatters the contents.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 35 and 36.


CLS 169/29
TXT Devices under subclass 26, in which the contents of the container are
    discharged or scattered by mechanical means, such as a spring-motor or
    electric motor.


CLS 169/30
TXT Fire extinguishing devices under the class definition adapted to be carried
    or transported by an operator to the fire area, comprising a container for
    an extinguishing agent and means for causing the discharge of the agent at
    the will of the operator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 215 for indicators to show a fire
    extinguisher has been used.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 219+ for a container with
    plural distinct contents which contents can be mixed by rupture,
    manipulation or agitation of the container or container portions.


CLS 169/33
TXT Devices under subclass 30, wherein the discharge is caused by a pump or a
    mechanically operated piston acting on the contents.

    (1)     Note.  This group includes vessels provided with rotary or
    rectilinear pumps operated by hand or motor, and extinguishers of the
    piston syringe type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 372+ for dispensing containers with pumps,
    subclasses 386+ for follower type dispensers.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 320+ and 329+
    for pump or follower type discharge for projecting material from the
    receptacle.


CLS 169/34
TXT Containers under subclass 30, of the bucket adapted to store a quantity of
    extinguishing agent which is to be directly dashed or thrown upon a fire.


CLS 169/35
TXT Vessels under subclass 30 for containing an extinguishing agent, usually a
    powder, which is discharged from one end of the vessel either by so shaking
    it as to throw the contents on the fire or by means of small explosive
    charges buried in the contents.

    (1)     Note.  Devices of the latter type designed for both automatic
    operation and hand use are classified in subclass 28 above.


CLS 169/36
TXT Vessels under subclass 30, comprising a fragile container filled with an
    extinguishing agent, which is discharged by throwing the container into the
    fire area, so as to break it and liberate the contents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 219+ for a container with
    plural distinct contents which contents can be mixed by rupture,
    manipulation or agitation of the container or container portions.


CLS 169/37
TXT Thermally-controlled discharge elements or outlets under the class
    definition for extinguishing fluid, comprising a nozzle, a valve or closure
    member therefor, and means for normally holding the valve in closing
    position and automatically releasing or opening it upon an increase of
    temperature.

    (1)     Note.  For spray nozzle or discharge members not automatically
    controlled, see Class 239, Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing,
    especially in the deflector subclasses (498, etc.). The patents in Class
    239 may disclose but do not claim the fusible link.


CLS 169/38
TXT The valve under subclass 37, is supported by means of a strut or
    compression device arranged between the valve and a part of the frame, the
    strut being designed to fall or collapse upon an increase of its
    temperature.  This includes struts consisting of a single or simple element
    which falls by fusion, combustion, or bursting.


CLS 169/39
TXT The strut under subclass 38, comprises a plurality of articulated elements
    whose holding relationship is destroyed on the failure of the strut.  The
    elements of the strut may include levers or other mechanical forms, but the
    strut as a whole is a compression resisting device.


CLS 169/40
TXT The valve under subclass 37, is supported by a lever or system of levers
    which communicate the thrust of the valve to the frame at two or more
    separated points.


CLS 169/41
TXT Under subclass 37, the valve or a member connected to and moving with the
    valve is supported by a fusible connection directly with the frame.


CLS 169/42
TXT Thermally-controlled devices under the class definition adapted for use in
    fire-extinguishing apparatus for resisting tension and comprising a
    plurality of interengaging elements held in normal position by a fusible
    substance and adapted to release or fail upon an increase of temperature.

    (1)     Note.  Compare Class 126, Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 287.5, and
    Class 49, Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 1+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 608 for a
    metallic composite embodying interengaged fibers.


CLS 169/43
TXT Methods under the class definition practiced to prevent or extinguish fires.


CLS 169/44
TXT Method under subclass 43, wherein a plurality of components are mixed on
    site to produce a fire extinguishing or fire preventing compound, said
    compound being formed upstream or downstream of the discharge element, or
    by separately applying the components.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14+,    for apparatus for mixing extinguishing compounds.


CLS 169/45
TXT Methods under subclass 43, practiced to prevent a flammable object from
    burning as a consequence of being in the vicinity of an existing fire, or
    to prevent the initial outbreak of fire.


CLS 169/46
TXT Methods under subclass 43 for putting out a fire which has already started.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes a process where the extinguishant is
    introduced to the area surrounding the fire or a subsurface of the matter
    on fire after which the extinguishant seeks out the seat of the fire.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass takes a process where the extinguishing
    material is present at the fire but in not active until it is acted upon by
    fire.


CLS 169/47
TXT Method under subclass 46, involving the projection of a fire extinguishing
    material directly from its discharge element onto the seat of the fire.

    (1)     Note.  The extinguishing material must be of a nature to extinguish
    a fire by itself.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 1+ for
    methods of spraying a fluid.


CLS 169/48
TXT Apparatus under class definition comprising apparatus designed to separate
    a burning area or a portion of a burning area from a second burnable area
    to prevent burning interaction between the two areas.

    (1)     Note.  The second area may include a person or article to be
    protected, or it may simply be an extension of the area which is on fire.

    (2)     Note.  Apparatus included herein is in the form of a solid or fluid
    cover or shield, e.g., nonfluid or gas.


CLS 169/49
TXT Apparatus under subclass 48, which separates a fire area from the
    atmosphere.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus placed in this subclass has the capability of
    extinguishing the separated fire by smothering, however a means may be
    included with the apparatus to discharge an extinguishant onto the fire.


CLS 169/50
TXT Apparatus under subclass 49, which separates the fire from the atmosphere
    upon manipulation of the means by an operator to accomplish the isolation.

    (1)     Note.  The manipulation includes rolling, dragging, wrapping, or
    beating.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes extinguishers of the blanket type
    which conform to the shape of the object to be treated.


CLS 169/51
TXT Apparatus under class definition comprising means to support or protect an
    extinguishant source and/or an outlet therefor.


CLS 169/52
TXT Apparatus under subclass 51, comprising fire extinguishing or preventing
    means mounted on a structure designed to provide movement of the means
    relative to the fire.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus herein includes (1) a mounting means which is
    movable to a fire, or (2) a mounting means which imparts movement to an
    extinguisher thereon during use thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30+,    for portable vessels.

    48+,    for portable fire shields and fire    fighter's apparel.


CLS 169/53
TXT Apparatus under subclass 52, mounted on an aeronautical vehicle, e.g., a
    helicopter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 136 for aerial fire fighting apparatus in
    combination with aircraft structure.


CLS 169/54
TXT Subject matter under class definition comprising means for preventing or
    minimizing damage due to fire in or about a structure or device by treating
    the fire condition, said means being particularly adapted for use with that
    specifically named structure or device.

    (1)     Note.  Fire extinguishers claimed in combination with structure or
    apparatus classifiable elsewhere is found in the class accepting that
    apparatus.


CLS 169/55
TXT Apparatus under subclass 54, especially adapted for extinguishing fire in
    or about a stove on a railway car.

    (1)     Note.  These extinguishers are usually set in operation by an
    abnormal movement of the car, as by collision, derailment, or overturning.


CLS 169/56
TXT Apparatus under subclass 54, having a device which operates in response to
    a sensed condition relative to a fire in or about the particular structure
    with which it is to be associated to control a means which may extinguish a
    fire or prevent the spreading thereof in or about said particular structure.

    (1)     Note.  Conditions which may be sensed relative to a fire may
    include heat, pressure, light, smoke, impact, deceleration, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for valve which control the flow of fire extinguishing fluid in a
    fire extinguishing system not associated with a specific structure and
    wherein said valve is responsive to a sensed condition.

    26+,    for containers having an extinguishant therein which are for
    general use and which will discharge the contents thereof in response to a
    predetermined condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclass, for
    condition responsive components not claimed with fire extinguishing systems
    or for the purpose of fire extinguishing.  Note particularly subclasses 1,
    98, 168, and 232.


CLS 169/57
TXT Apparatus under subclass 54, in which a fire extinguishing material is
    directly restrained against discharge by a plug, support or other device
    which is in contact with said material until said device is fused, melted
    or deformed when a predetermined condition is sensed, or in which such a
    plug, support, etc., operates similarly in another cooperative relation
    with the extinguishing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 232 for thermally
    responsive ceiling structure not claimed as cooperating with a fire
    extinguishing system.


CLS 169/58
TXT Apparatus under subclass 56, wherein a fire extinguishing material is
    directly restrained against discharge by a device in contact with said
    material which fractures or breaks when a predetermined fire condition is
    sensed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26+     and 28, for a frangible container for fire extinguishing material
    in a receptacle for general use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 98 for frangible
    components not claimed as being for fire extinguishing.


CLS 169/59
TXT Apparatus under subclass 56, having a flexible elongated means extending
    into the area to be protected, a sensing means in said elongated means
    which senses the fire and releases the elongated means, causing a fire
    extinguishing system to actuate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for fusible links, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 596 for electric alarm systems
    having cable sensors.


CLS 169/60
TXT Apparatus under subclass 56, having (1) means to sense a fire condition,
    (2) means to transmit a signal from the sensing means in response to a fire
    sensed by said sensing means and (3) means receiving said transmission and
    responding to release material to extinguish the sensed fire.


CLS 169/61
TXT Apparatus under subclass 60, where the signal transmitting means is an
    electrical circuit.

    (1)     Note.  The line between this class and Class 340, Communications:
    Electrical, is that Class 169, requires that the sensor act directly upon
    the extinguishing systems; systems wherein the sensor acts first on an
    alarm and then on a fire extinguishing system are found in Class 340.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communication:  Electrical, subclasses 577+ for electrical flame
    alarms; subclasses 584+ for electrical temperature alarms; and subclasses
    628+ for electrical smoke alarms.


CLS 169/62
TXT Apparatus under subclass 54, for extinguishing fires on or inside a
    conveyance for people and/or articles; e.g., airplanes, ships, automobiles
    etc.


CLS 169/63
TXT Apparatus under subclass 54 for extinguishing fires in or about devices
    which manipulate moving picture film.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes the combination of nominally recited
    film handling means with a fire extinguishing apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, for fire prevention and isolation
    structure for film strips in combination with motion picture apparatus
    structure.


CLS 169/64
TXT Apparatus under subclass 54, designed for use in extinguishing or in the
    prevention of fires in a subterranean environment of solid natural material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes apparatus for dusting the walls of
    mines as a preventive measure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for methods of preventing mine fires and explosions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclass 1.05
    for signaling or indicating means for fire conditions as part of mine
    structure and subclass 12 for mine safety methods.


CLS 169/65
TXT Apparatus under subclass 54 for extinguishing or preventing fires in stoves
    or ovens used in food preparation, and the area surrounding said stoves or
    ovens.


CLS 169/66
TXT Apparatus under subclass 54 for extinguishing or preventing fires in a
    surface-mounted receptacle which may contain a supply of inflammable fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for extinguisher protecting fuel tank of vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 88.1 - 89.4 for the prevention of fire in
    oil tanks involving only tank structure without treating the contents.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 53, 54, 152 for fire prevention and
    extinguishing means combined with oil dispensers.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 22+ for use of a fluid blanket as
    preservative means other than fire protection purposes.


CLS 169/67
TXT Apparatus under subclass 66, wherein the fire extinguishing means is
    designed for movement to and/or assembly at the receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus classified here is external of a storage
    receptacle tank, and is structurally independent of the receptacle but it
    is designed especially for use with a receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52+,    for mobile extinguishers designed for general utility.


CLS 169/68
TXT Apparatus under subclass 66, having means to particularly distribute the
    extinguishing material within the receptacle.


CLS 169/69
TXT Apparatus under subclass 54 for extinguishing or preventing fires at the
    outlet of a subterranean source of an inflammable fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclasses 75.11+ especially subclasses 79.1 and 90.1 for
    well apparatus combined with fire extinguishers where the fire
    extinguishing feature goes no further than a mere cap or head, means for
    diverting flow from the well or means for inserting a fluid into the well,
    or where more of the well is claimed than cooperates with the fire
    extinguishing means.


CLS 169/70
TXT Apparatus under subclass 54, having means to particularly distribute the
    extinguishing material with respect to the fire to be extinguished and the
    structure to be protected, or means enabling the extinguisher to surpass
    obstacles encountered in reaching the fire.


CLS 169/71
TXT Apparatus under subclass 30, wherein a pressurized gas means is provided
    and means whereby the pressurized gas may be applied to said agent to expel
    the same from a container so that said agent may be applied to a fire.

    (1)     Note.  The pressurized gas may be stored ready for use or it may be
    developed by a pump or other means.

    (2)     Note.  The pressurized gas may be stored with the agent, or it may
    be stored separately.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 394+ for dispensers using fluid pressure to
    cause discharge.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 307, 308 and
    337+ for sprayers having supply holders and in which the materials are
    discharged therefrom by the pressure of a gas.


CLS 169/72
TXT Apparatus under subclass 71, wherein said container is provided with
    specific means designed to insure that the agent will discharge from the
    container in its entirety, regardless of the orientation of the vessel when
    in use.


CLS 169/73
TXT Apparatus under subclass 72, having variable volume means provided to store
    agent within said container whereby the volumetric capacity of the variable
    volume means may be reduced substantially to zero and thus insure discharge
    of the agent in its entirety.

    (1)     Note.  The variable volume means may be a cylinder with a piston
    movable therein or a collapsible wall chamber.


CLS 169/74
TXT Apparatus under subclass 71, further comprising an outlet from the vessel
    or a terminal discharge element for said agent which imparts thereto
    particular characteristics.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes extinguishers whose outlet is
    modified by the operator in order to release the extinguishant.


CLS 169/75
TXT Apparatus under subclass 71, further comprising means to avoid accidental
    discharge of the agent from the container or excessive pressure build up in
    said container, or means to indicate any abnormal condition therein.


CLS 169/76
TXT Apparatus under subclass 71, having means, such as an on-off valve or
    plural agent sources, which allows the operator to discharge agent at will,
    more than once with an extinguisher.


CLS 169/77
TXT Apparatus under subclass 71, for containing and discharging a dry chemical
    agent.


CLS 169/78
TXT Apparatus under subclass 71, having a plurality of separately housed
    substances, which may be caused to be mixed when desired, and thus caused
    to react chemically to produce a gas with sufficient pressure to expel the
    agent from the container.


CLS 169/79
TXT Apparatus under subclass 78, wherein at least one of the reactant housings
    is turned over relative to a second reactant, thus releasing said reactant
    for mixing with a second reactant in the container.


CLS 169/80
TXT Apparatus under subclass 78, wherein the mixing is initiated by turning the
    container end for end.


CLS 169/81
TXT Apparatus under subclass 80, comprising an actuator which upon inversion of
    the container destroys a means by which the substances had been prevented
    from mixing, so that the substances may mix and produce the pressurized gas
    necessary to expel the agent from the container.


CLS 169/82
TXT Apparatus under subclass 80, wherein the housing for at least one of the
    substances to be mixed is provided with a closure therefor which will be
    removed therefrom by gravitational force upon inversion of said housing
    whereby the substances may be mixed to produce the necessary gas pressure
    to expel the agent from the container.


CLS 169/83
TXT Apparatus under subclass 78, wherein a reactant is stored in a container
    which must be fractured to release said reactant to mix with a second
    reactant to produce a fire extinguishant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     for vessels having therein a reactant container which is broken
    upon inversion of the vessel.


CLS 169/84
TXT Apparatus under subclass 71, having a charge of combustible material
    contained therein which produces the gas pressure when ignited and means
    available to the operator for igniting the charge.


CLS 169/85
TXT Apparatus under subclass 71, wherein the pressurizing gas used to expel the
    fire extinguishing agent is stored in a container which is separate from
    that in which the agent is stored.


CLS 169/86
TXT Apparatus under subclass 85, having heat exchange or other means to prevent
    the temperature of the gas, due to expansion as it passes through an
    orifice or the like, from decreasing to the point where gas passing
    therethrough will solidify.


CLS 169/87
TXT Apparatus under subclass 85, having means whereby when the vessel is turned
    over the pressurized gas may be released to expel the agent from the vessel.

    (1)     Note.  The means releasing said pressurized gas may do so by
    puncturing the pressurized gas container because of the inversion thereof,
    or upon inversion thereof and the application of a force upon said
    releasing means.


CLS 169/88
TXT Apparatus under subclass 85, wherein the means for releasing the
    pressurizing gas has a scissors grip, pistol-grip, or other squeeze type
    actuator, or a lever-type actuator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89,     for a discharge head on a container for agent stored under pressure.


CLS 169/89
TXT Apparatus under subclass 71, comprising a means on the container for the
    agent which has both a valve for releasing the pressurized material and an
    outlet communicating therewith for dispensing the released material from
    the container.


CLS 169/90
TXT Apparatus under subclass 37, further comprising a means for selectively
    terminating discharge from the sprinkler head.


CLS 169/91
TXT Apparatus under the class definition not herein before provided for.


CLS 171/
TTL UNEARTHING PLANTS OR  BURIED OBJECTS

CLS 171/
TXT GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER.

    A.      The basic subject matter of this class is limited to machines and
    methods for removing an object from a position immediately below the
    surface of the earth or from a position in which it extends partially
    through the earth's crust by either (1) selectively engaging and the
    picking or pulling said object in such manner that it is removed from the
    earth (either with or without any substantial disturbance of the soil) or
    (2) by excavating said object and portions of the surrounding earth in such
    manner that said object is separated from said earth portions either during
    the excavation or subsequent thereto, or, in the case of shallow rooted
    plants or small stones projecting through the earth's surface, by directly
    engaging and thrusting, impelling or pushing against said plants or small
    stones to force them out of the ground. The object must be completely
    recovered at some instant substantially free of earth, but otherwise in its
    original condition except that, in the case of plants, portions thereof may
    have been previously severed from the root.  For example, machines which
    dig root plants are included if the root is recovered substantially intact
    regardless of whether the plant foliage or tap root is removed or whether
    the foliage and/or root are retained, subsequently destroyed, or returned
    to the earth.

    B.      Included in this class are railroad ballast cleaners which remove
    or excavate the ballast from the railroad bed, separate the fine foreign
    matter from the coarse stone aggregates and which may return the latter to
    the railroad bed.

    C.      The scope of this class also includes (1) combinations of the basic
    subject matter with other features where said combination is not provided
    for elsewhere such as (a) an additional treatment of the object as, e.g.,
    sorting, cleaning or severing said object into parts, and (b) combinations
    of said basic subject matter with an accompanying soil treating operation,
    and (2) subcombinations of said basic subject matter not provided for
    elsewhere.

    NOTES

    (1)     Note.  The unearthed object is normally (1) a weed or plant root
    with the vine, stem, or top portion of said plant either connected to the
    root or severed therefrom, (2) a stone or small rock capable of being
    handled in a manner consistent with the basic subject matter of this class
    as set forth in definition A supra, or (3) a foreign object recovered from
    sand removed from a beach.

    (2)     Note.  Subject matter relating to merely turning a furrow or
    digging a ditch to invert the earth in such fashion that some or all of a
    series of earth embedded objects are placed on top of the removed earth is
    excluded and forms subject matter for the appropriate soil handling Classes
    37 or 172.

    (3)     Note.  Implements which are hand supported and have no driven
    digging or earth separation parts are excluded and are to be found in the
    appropriate implement classes noted below.

    (4)     Note.  Stump and boulder extractors are excluded and are classified
    in appropriate subclasses in Class 254 and Class 37 as noted below.

    (5)     Note.  Subject matter relating to pulling up plant by grasping the
    stalk or foliage is included (1) where there is a disclosure that the plant
    root is removed from the ground even where it is not clear from the
    disclosure whether the plant stalk or foliage is severed or whether the
    stalk or foliage is capable of pulling the plant root from the ground.

    (6)     Note.  Subject matter relating to partial unearthing of plants or
    buried objects in the manner provided for by this class has been included
    because of its similarity to corresponding means which completes the
    unearthing.

    (7)     Note.  Included in this class are structures and methods disclosed
    as adapted for the purpose of moving small stones along the surface of the
    ground to gather or windrow the stones.  See (4) Note to subclass 63.

    (8)     Note.  Subject matter relating to recovering objects buried in soil
    located beneath a body of water has been excluded and will be found in
    appropriate subclasses of Class 37 or in Class 299, subclasses 8 and 9 if
    objects are separated from the soil subsequent to excavation.

    (9)     Note.  Subject matter relating to recovering objects buried in the
    surfaces of tunnels, shafts or vertical soil faces or recovering a valuable
    mineral constituent has been excluded and will be found in appropriate
    subclasses of Class 299.

    DEFINITIONS OF TERMS


    DIGGERS

    Devices which are forced into a mass of earth and are then raised to lift
    an object disposed in said earth and/or to lift portions of the earth
    itself with objects embedded therein.

    EXTRACTORS

    Devices which comprise means to engage a portion of a buried or partially
    buried object and to temporarily fasten itself to said object in order to
    hold onto the object while it is lifted out of the ground.

    IMPALING OR SNAGGING

    The act of removing or unearthing an object at least partially imbedded in
    the ground by an extractor which penetrates through the surface of the
    object or which passes through or around a reentrant or restricted portion
    of the object to form a temporary connection between said object and the
    extractor.

    OPEN SEPARATOR

    A device which is provided with spaced portions having openings
    therebetween in which the spaced portions are adapted to retain all objects
    above a predetermined particle size while finer material passes through the
    openings.

    RECOVERED OBJECTS

    Articles or plants which were formerly at least partially surrounded by a
    mass of earth and which have been separated from said mass of earth as
    distinct objects, substantially free from said earth and available at some
    identifiable time for any desired purpose which may involve either use or
    destruction thereof.

    SEPARATING DIGGERS

    Diggers as defined above which comb through the earth and which are
    provided with interstices through which the earth sifts while the desired
    objects rest on the digger and are thus moved through the earth and
    separated from said earth.

    SEPARATOR ELEMENTS

    Spaced portions of a separator which support objects larger than a certain
    size while smaller particles or objects pass through the spaces
    therebetween.

    STONE GATHERING

    Moving of small stones and rocks resting on the surface of the earth into
    piles, rows or collection receptacles.

    UNDESIRED OBJECTS

    Trash, previously cut tops or foliage or other nonearth material
    accompanying the objects disclosed as intended to be removed from the earth
    and recovered.

    UNEARTHING

    This is the generic term for any of the various organizations for removing
    an object imbedded in the earth, at or near the ground surface as by
    digging or picking the object and separating it free from any substantial
    accumulation of earth, the separation being accomplished either
    simultaneously with or subsequent to the removal of the object from its
    position in situ in the ground.

    UNEARTHING UNIT

    An entity which includes all of the apparatus necessary to completely
    unearth a buried or partially buried object in its path regardless of the
    presence or absence of additional, similar entities in the same
    organization.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 302 and 303 for boulder or tree stump-type
    excavators, subclasses 304+ for self-loading vehicles which excavate snow
    or earth material, elevate it, and dump it      into the vehicle,
    subclasses 307+ for devices excavating beneath a body of water and which
    may excavate bottom material containing desired objects, and subclass 316
    for fork- or rake-type scoops.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclasses 73+ for devices adapted to transplant
    live trees or plants.

    56,     Harvesters, appropriate subclasses, for machines for severing
    portions of plants while the plant is connected to an earth embedded root,
    and subclasses 328.1+ for machines which harvest fruit or nuts which may be
    lying upon the ground.

    83,     Cutting, for a cutter of that class (83) type which may cut a
    vegetable.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, for apparatus for cutting food
    wherein distinguishable portions of the food are removed.

    172,    Earth Working, appropriate subclasses for earth working implements
    which merely form a furrow or disturb the earth without separating an
    object from the surrounding earth.  Such earth working implements may
    indiscriminately cut roots or other plant material as they proceed along
    the ground and turn a furrow but they do not act to separate the object
    from the surrounding  turned earth.  Class 172 may take that subcombination
    of a Class 171 apparatus which merely cuts and lifts earth to direct it
    towards a separating device which separates the desired objects from the
    earth.  Many of the Class 172 devices disclose teeth, blades or other means
    which are inherently useful to selectively dig buried objects from the
    ground while allowing the soil to fall back in place.  Where the disclosure
    of this type of device relates solely to earth working, the patent is
    placed in Class 172, where the invention is disclosed as useful both to
    work the earth and to unearth plants or buried objects the patent is placed
    in Class 171, since unearthing is always accompanied by soil disturbance.

    173,    Tool Driving Or Impacting, appropriate subclass for subject matter
    directed to driving or impacting a tool, when such subject matter includes
    features peculiar to tool driving, but which does not include features
    limiting the subject matter to a specific tool art, such as specific shape
    of the work contacting portion of a tool, related tools, or an opposed work
    support, and see particularly subclasses 184+ for driving or impacting
    means mounted on a wheeled vehicle.  Class 171 has not been cleared as to
    subject matter in conflict with this line.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 300+ and 506+ for portable
    conveyors having means to feed material from a stock or pile onto the
    conveyor, and see the notes thereto.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 233+ for
    apparatus for separating objects from finer or coarser accompanying
    material, and subclasses 509+ for apparatus for separating different
    objects in accordance with their particle size or other physical
    characteristics.  Class 209 takes the claimed subcombination of a specific
    sorting and/or separation means, whether or not combined with a feeding or
    discharge conveyor means even when disclosed in a plant or buried object
    unearthing organization.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, for a comminutor of
    that class (241) type which may cut a vegetable.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 131+ for lever-like implements adapted to lift a plant or other
    object from the ground.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 50.6+ and 86.4+ for hand or hoist-line implements
    which may be used to lift a plant or other object from the ground.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, appropriate
    subclass for a process or apparatus for recovering valuable mineral
    material from the earth and breaking up hard, solid material in situ, and
    particularly subclasses 7+ for mining or excavating combined with
    separation of the material into constituent parts.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 439 and 440 for draft
    motion responsive handlers and transporters adapted to pick up surface
    objects such as bales, shock or golf balls which are not normally disposed
    below the ground.

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, appropriate subclasses, for apparatus
    for removing portions of a harvested plant by threshing.

    INDEX TO CLASSES NOTED IN THE CLASS DEFINITION AND THE SUBCLASSES OF THIS
    CLASS

    After each class listed below, the notation "See -----" refers to the class
    definition, and the subclasses of Class 171 in which there are references
    to the class involved.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning.  See subclass 25.

    37,     Excavating.  See class definition and subclasses 16, 323, and 440.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, see the class definition.

    56,     Harvesters.  See class definition and subclasses 5, 7, 9, 19, 22,
    24-27, 32, 40, 43, 63, 67, 70, 84, 102, and 144.

    83,     Cutting, See subclass 31.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, see subclasses 26 and 31.

    104,    Railways.  See subclass 16.

    111,    Planting.  See subclasses 6 and 109.

    172,    Earth Working.  See class definition and subclasses 2-6, 8-10, 19,
    20, 24, 26, 44-47, 83, 84, 93, 94, 95, 97-99, 107-109, 111, 137, 139, and
    140-143.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting.  See the class definition.

    180,    Motor Vehicles.  See subclass 45.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven.  See class definition and subclass 35.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids.  See class
    definition and subclasses 15-18, 111 and 126.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Distintegration, see subclass 24.

    248,    Supports.  See subclass 11.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus For Applying Pushing or Pulling Force.  See
    class definition and subclasses 55 and 82.

    280,    Land Vehicles.  See subclasses 20 and 139.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements.  See class definition
    and subclasses 50 and 55.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material.  See class
    definition and subclasses 1, 16 and 84.1.

    414,    Material or Article Handling.  See class definition and subclasses
    63 and 138.

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating.  See class definition and subclass 27.


CLS 171/1
TXT Method or process steps included within the scope of the class definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 7+
    for a process of excavating or breaking up hard material in situ and
    separating valuable constituents thereof.


CLS 171/2
TXT Apparatus under the class definition which includes a plurality of
    unearthing units, each of which is capable of operating in the manner
    contemplated by the class definition as a complete entity and in which any
    one of the units may be used alone and then replaced by another in response
    to a manual control or in response to the occurrence of a given condition.

    (1)     Note.  Mere plural exhuming units which are capable of separate
    vertical or lateral adjustment so that either or both may be in operation
    at one time, and plural successive units which, in turn, each pass over the
    same area to be harvested have been excluded and have been classified
    elsewhere in this schedule on the basis of pertinent details of the
    individual unit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 136 for diverse earth working tools useable
    alternately only, and subclasses 204+ for earth working tools alternately
    useable for right or left hand operation.


CLS 171/3
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the unearthing apparatus is
    provided with a ground penetrating means of substantially flat shape lying
    generally in or parallel to a vertical plane extending in the direction of
    draft for the disclosed function of constraining the movement of the
    apparatus over the earth to a desired path.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes those stabilizing fins or colters
    which are inclined relative to the direction of draft at such an angle with
    respect to an associated angularly disposed unearthing apparatus as to
    thereby counteract the side draft caused by such angularly disposed
    apparatus and thus maintain the same in a straight line in the direction of
    draft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 144 for an earth-working implement
    comprising a colter, jointer and plow, subclasses 165+ for diverse earth
    working tools including a colter, and subclasses 190+ for diverse earth
    working tools including a vertical longitudinal blade (e.g., a stabilizer).


CLS 171/4
TXT Apparatus under the class definition which includes a means for recovering
    a plant or buried object and a generally cylindrical member or axially
    elongated surface of revolution engaging the ground and adapted to (1)
    press against the ground to break up clods and/or to flatten the earth's
    surface or (2) to engage a plant to press a part thereof against or into
    the ground.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    for rollers disposed over a separator or excavator to disintegrate
    clods.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 133+ for diverse earth-working tools
    including a rolling tool.


CLS 171/5
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which a severing means is disposed
    in a plane perpendicular to the earth's surface in order to sever portions
    of a standing or growing plant.

    (1)     Note.  The usual purpose of such vertical cutters is to sever
    laterally extending vine or top portions which would otherwise wrap around
    parts of the apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 229+ for vertical plant cutters, including
    vertical vine cutters.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 27+ for an earth-working implement
    combined with a means for cutting or shredding plants without soil
    disturbance.


CLS 171/6
TXT Apparatus under the class definition which includes, in addition to a means
    to unearth a desired buried object, either (1) a means to scratch a
    reference line on the earth's surface; or (2) means trailing an unearthing
    implement to prepare the surface of the earth for the reception of the
    desired unearthed object, or to otherwise work the earth.

    (1)     Note.  The additional earth disturbance is usually for the purpose
    of (1) removing undesired weeds (2) scratching, plowing or cultivating the
    earth or otherwise breaking it up to prepare for a subsequent crop (3)
    scraping the surface of the earth with a blade to provide a smooth surface
    after recovery of the desired object or (4) plowing a strip of earth
    adjacent the strip from which buried objects are to be recovered.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for ground-engaging rollers which crush clods and/or flatten the
    ground.

    5,      for vertically disposed vegetation cutters which may incidently cut
    into the soil.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    111,    Planting, subclasses 25+ for depositing and marking means and
    subclass 33 for an intermittent earth marking means.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 126+ for an earth-working device combined
    with an earth-marking means and subclasses 133+ for apparatus comprising
    diverse earth working tools.


CLS 171/7
TXT Apparatus under the class definition which includes a means to recover a
    plant or buried object from the ground and a collector which receives the
    recovered object or portions thereof from said means, said collector being
    emptied in response to (1) a predetermined travel of the apparatus, or (2)
    a predetermined weight or quantity of collected objects.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 346+ and 361 for intermittent discharge
    raking and loading devices and subclasses 474+ for sheaf or bundle
    discharging carriers.


CLS 171/8
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having a means to unearth a plant or
    buried object and including a sensing means actuated by said plant or
    object either before or after it is unearthed and a means which is
    responsive to actuation of said plant or object sensing means to drive a
    portion of said apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 5+ for earth-working apparatus comprising
    automatic power-control means and means sensing an obstruction such as a
    plant.


CLS 171/9
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which means is provided (1) which
    includes a frangible, frictional or resilient member or connection in the
    mounting of the recovery device, or a portion thereof, said member normally
    holding the recovery device, or a portion thereof in its normal working
    position until an abnormal condition arises, which overloads the device or
    said portion thereof and breaks the frangible element or overcomes the
    frictional or resilient force, thereby permitting the device or said
    portion thereof to move to a nonoverloaded position and there remain until
    manually reset, (2) in the power transmission for the device, or portions
    thereof, including a resilient, frictional or frangible member or
    connection adapted to yield or break when the device, or a portion thereof,
    is subjected to an abnormal operating condition whereby the drive to the
    recovering device is momentarily interrupted or positively disengaged; or
    (3) to sense a condition which may or not may occur and respond to such
    condition by causing an operation of the recovery device to occur only when
    said condition exists.

    (1)     Note.  Automatic devices are those which will, for example, set the
    recovery device, or a portion thereof, in operation when a desired plant or
    object is encountered, and cause such operation to cease when the plant or
    object has been worked upon.

    (2)     Note.  Overload-relief means are those means interposed in the
    drive or support for the unit, or a part thereof, which will, for example,
    permit the drive of the recovery device, or a portion thereof, to cease
    upon encountering an obstruction; or to move to a position where it will
    pass an obstruction or an unyielding object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for collection receptacles which are dumped in response to a
    predetermined weight of recovered articles or to a predetermined travel of
    the apparatus.

    8,      for drive means which are operated or controlled by sensing the
    presence of a plant or buried object either before or after it is unearthed.

    143+,   for recovery devices or parts thereof which are resiliently mounted
    on a supporting frame to move from a normal position to an abnormal
    position and to be returned to said normal position by a resilient means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 10.2+, for a harvester having
    condition-responsive operation, and particularly 10.3, for relief of drive
    overload.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 2+ for earth-working apparatus with
    automatic power controlled means, subclasses 103+ for a driven
    earth-working tool or cleaner with an overload-relief means or clutch in
    the drive train, and subclasses 261+ for an earth-working tool with an
    overload shifting means.


CLS 171/10
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having an unearthing unit adapted to
    traverse an area including a zone of earth which has desired plants or
    buried objects embedded therein in order to remove and separate said plants
    or objects from the earth and including a ground- working means outside
    (but adjacent) said zone and adapted to move undesired material in a
    direction away from said zone in order to decrease the amount of undesired
    material handled by said unearthing unit without substantially decreasing
    the quantity of unearthed product.

    (1)     Note.  The ground-working means may be a plow or scraper disposed
    either laterally of or above the desired object containing zone to either
    scrape or cut off the undesired earth or vegetation above said zone and/or
    laterally thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 133+ for diverse earth-working tools and
    subclass 382 for multiple level earth- working tools.


CLS 171/11
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which means are provided (1) to
    divert recovered objects from one receptacle to another when said one is
    full, or (2) to removably suspend or clamp a receptacle for recovered
    objects in such fashion that it may be replaced.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for selective delivery to alternate locations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 99+ for supports used in filling bags.


CLS 171/12
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which means is provided to remove
    accumulated dirt, recovered objects, or portions of said recovered objects
    from parts of said apparatus which means is located outside the normal path
    of flow of dirt and/or objects through said apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89,     90, 101, and 114+, for strippers which are interposed in the path
    of objects moving through the apparatus and which constitute the normal
    means to intercept and divert said objects from one portion of the device
    and onto another portion thereof.


CLS 171/13
TXT Apparatus under the class definition which includes a pronged member whose
    position is continually changing and which is disclosed as being
    specifically adapted to selectively snag or comb vines, tops, weeds trash
    or other material accompanying desired unearthed objects and to move said
    material away from the normal path of the desired objects through the
    apparatus to separate said material from the desired objects.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114+,   for moving strippers which engage a separating conveyor and removed
    buried objects or plants such as quack grass which it is desired to
    separate from the soil.


CLS 171/14
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having a means to remove and/or
    separate from the earth a plant or buried object which is desired to be
    retained and which includes, in addition, an apertured, interstitial or
    perforated barrier adapted to permit said desired plant or object to pass
    therethrough but which will retain larger objects and thus segregate said
    desired objects from the larger objects.

    (1)     Note.  The larger objects may consist of (1) trash, vines or rocks
    or (2) larger objects of the same kind as the smaller object and are
    ordinarily delivered to a different location than the smaller objects.

    (2)     Note.  The barrier usually comprises an apertured surface disposed
    along the path of the recovered objects to be separated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for apertured surfaces in the form of a moving comb which rakes off
    vines and similar material while allowing desired objects to pass between
    the tines or teeth of the comb.


CLS 171/15
TXT Apparatus under subclass 14 which includes means to segregate like objects
    which differ only in their dimensions into different groups according to
    size subsequent to the separation of the object from the earth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 659+ for
    separating devices including means for assorting recovered objects by size.


CLS 171/16
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which a means is provided for
    excavating or picking up the aggregate-type ballast of a railroad bed and
    (1) classifying said aggregate into different groups according to size,
    shape, weight or other physical characteristics, and/or (2) dividing from
    said aggregate undesirable matter such as weeds, dirt, trash or like debris.

    (1)     Note.  Included are devices which may or may not return the ballast
    to the road bed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, appropriate subclasses, especially subclass 104, for
    similar devices wherein the claims are limited to ballast excavating or
    road grading means, per se.

    104,    Railways, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 2+, for
    ballast cleaners combined with means for handling railroad track or ties.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 233+ and
    509+ for assorting and sifting devices, respectively, of general utility.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 7+
    for subject matter relating to excavating or breaking up hard material in
    situ and separating valuable constituents thereof.


CLS 171/17
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which object or portions thereof
    are (1) separated into different groups according to their different
    densities or shapes, or (2) oriented into a desired position because of the
    difference in shape or density between parts of said objects by means of
    (a) a stream of liquid or gas, or (b) a body of liquid or fluent material
    into which the objects or portion thereof are introduced.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 132+ for
    devices which separate recovered objects by fluid suspension.


CLS 171/18
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means to remove buried objects
    from the earth and including means to separate desired objects from
    accompanying material or objects by means of any device not provided for
    above which acts in response to the difference between the physical
    properties or attributes of (a) the desired objects and (b) the
    accompanying object or materials to be separated therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus which separates objects from other objects or
    material in response to a mere difference in size is excluded.

    (2)     Note.  For example, the objects may be separated in response to
    differences in their weight, shape, density, coefficient of friction,
    elasticity, electroconductivity or magnetic properties.

    (3)     Note.  Included, for example, are yieldable means which are
    selectively deformable by either one of (a) the desired objects or (b) the
    accompanying material or objects in order to separate the two.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14+,    84+ and 111+, for apparatus which separates desired objects from
    undesired objects or material in response to mere difference in size.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 599 and
    699 for apparatus for separating objects in accordance with the degree of
    compressibility, and subclasses 598 and 941 for apparatus for separating
    objects in accordance with the shape or contour of the objects regardless
    of the relative sizes thereof.


CLS 171/19
TXT Apparatus under the class definition which include, subsequent to a means
    for unearthing plants or buried objects which leaves said plants or objects
    on the surface of the earth, a member which extends from a point spaced
    above the ground to a point on or near the ground, said member being
    disposed either (1) transversely to the line of draft in such fashion that
    it piles up said objects, plants, or parts of said plants ahead of it on
    the ground to collect them in piles, or (2) at an inclination to the line
    of draft such that said objects, plants or parts of said plants are biased
    laterally along the ground to a delivery point along a line parallel to
    said line of draft.

    (1)     Note.  Rake-like devices which penetrate the ground and thus dig up
    objects are excluded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for similar earth scraping devices.

    67+,    for devices which shift surface material laterally prior to
    unearthing of the recovered objects.

    84      and 102, for rake-like separating diggers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 375+ for hay rakes,  per se.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 29+ for earth-working apparatus combined
    with a rake.


CLS 171/20
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which there is provision to support
    or accommodate a human operator who is necessary (1) to the handling of the
    recovered object to carry it through a portion of its travel through the
    apparatus or (2) to perform some manipulative step on said recovered object
    such as inspecting the object or severing a portion thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Mere stepping platforms which an operator uses from time to
    time to gain access to a portion of the apparatus or which support the
    operator near a portion of the device which requires adjusting or unloading
    are excluded and have been considered frame features.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 431+ for earth-working apparatus with a
    seat or attendant's station.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 32.5 for a land vehicle with a worker's
    support or shade.


CLS 171/21
TXT Apparatus under the class definition which includes a means mounted for
    motion relative to a supporting frame to engage an above-ground portion of
    a plant whose roots are disposed in situ in the ground and hold said
    portion in a desired location and attitude relative to the earth's surface
    while said portion is severed from the plant root.

    (1)     Note.  These devices usually consist of cooperating moving holding
    members which move rearwardly at the same velocity as the forward speed of
    traverse of the apparatus to hold the plant in a desired position while it
    is severed from the plant root.


CLS 171/22
TXT Apparatus under subclass 21 in which separate, vertically spaced means are
    provided to sever portions of a plant while it is held in a fixed position.

    (1)     Note.  Usually one of the severing means is disposed at a position
    spaced above ground to top the plant while another severing means is
    located at or below the ground level to sever roots.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 121.43 for plant toppers providing plural cuts
    at successive heights.


CLS 171/23
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which means is provided anywhere in
    the apparatus to shift at the will of an operator the flow of recovered
    objects or portions thereof from one continuous course through said
    apparatus to another.

    (1)     Note.  The usual purpose of such shifting is (1) to select one of a
    plurality of locations for a windrow of recovered objects or cut toppings,
    (2) to discharge to a common windrow from different, adjacent plant rows,
    for example, by employing a shiftable or reversible outlet conveyor or (3)
    to switch the flow or recovered objects or portions thereof from one path
    to another through the apparatus in order to use different sections of said
    apparatus alternately or selectively or to selectively bypass certain of
    said sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for selective delivery of recovered objects to either of plural
    receptacles.


CLS 171/24
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which an object or some portion
    thereof which has been previously unearthed is pulverized into discrete
    particles or reduced to a series of pieces as by severing at a number of
    spaced points.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for organizations in which means is provided to hold a standing
    plant while vertically spaced cutters cut the plant into several portions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 53+ for devices which comminute standing
    stalks.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 39+ for a driven earth working tool or
    cleaner comprising a cleaner or comminutor spaced from the ground surface,
    and subclasses 63+ for a nondriven earth working tool combined with a
    driven comminuting means.  In these devices the earth and any objects
    contained therein are comminuted without separating the objects and the
    earth.

    241,    Solid Material Comminutions or Disintegration, for a comminutor of
    that class (241) type which may comminute of chop vegetable material.


CLS 171/25
TXT Apparatus under the class definition which include in addition to a means
    to unearth a plant or buried object from the soil, a member having a soft
    or flexible portion or portions adapted to contact the plant or object
    after it has been freed from any substantial accumulation of accompaning
    earth inorder to frictionally engage or impinge upon the surface of said
    plant or object for the disclosed purpose of removing adhering surface dirt
    or other foreign matter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for means to clean some portion of the unearthing apparatus outside
    of the normal path of the unearthed articles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, especially subclasses
    3.1+ for vegetable brushing, wiping or cleaning apparatus.


CLS 171/26
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the object recovered or
    extracted from the ground is a plant and portions of said plant are removed
    therefrom by means located at a point above the earth's surface before,
    after or during unearthing of said plant.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are devices which remove foilage from a
    useful root portion or which separate the stalks or vine from a goober,
    tuber, fruit, berry or vegetable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for cutters which are disposed in a vertical plane to sever
    above-ground portions of standing or growing plants.

    17,     for removal of cut plants or positioning of plant tops for cutting
    by floatation or fluid flow (e.g., air blast or suction).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, appropriate subclasses, for cutting devices for
    standing or growing plants, especially subclasses 121.4+ for plant topping
    means, per se, with gauges wherein the topped plants are permitted to
    remain in the ground.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 635+ for cutting the
    end of a food item previously extracted from the ground.

    172,    Earth Working, especially subclasses 699+ for earth-working
    apparatus which cuts through the earth and may be used to sever, by a means
    located below ground, a root portion from the remainder of the plant.


CLS 171/27
TXT Apparatus under subclass 26 in which the plant parts are separated by (1)
    means which engages different portions of the plant and moves said portions
    in different lineal or torsional directions, (2) means which impacts or
    violently agitates the plant to jar portions therefrom, or (3) means to
    compress the plants in such fashion that sections connecting said portions
    are distorted until broken to allow said part to separate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 126+ for apparatus for stripping seeds from
    standing or growing plants.

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, appropriate subclass, for apparatus
    for severing parts of harvested plants by threshing.


CLS 171/28
TXT Apparatus under subclass 27 including at least a pair of adjacent
    oppositely rotating members between which certain portions of a plant are
    engaged and fed until such portions are pinched or pulled apart from other
    portions of said plant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for opposed roller-type plant extractors.


CLS 171/29
TXT Apparatus under subclass 26 in which the part of a plant which is normally
    disposed above the ground is progressively severed at different positions
    spaced along the path traversed by the plant recovering means.

    (1)     Note.  The plant may be either in its natural position in the earth
    or it may have been removed from the earth when either or both of the
    severing positions are reached.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for cutters disposed in a generally vertical plane which may trim
    the edges from plant vegetation prior to the removal thereof by a separate
    cutter.


CLS 171/30
TXT Apparatus under subclass 26 in which portions are severed from the plant by
    a sharpened member which is mounted to be freely rotatable by contact with
    the ground or the plant.

    (1)     Note.  The plant parts may be severed either before, during or
    after recovery of the plant from the earth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for rolling disk disposed in a vertical plane for severing
    vegetation from plants.


CLS 171/31
TXT Apparatus under subclass 26 in which a means is provided to remove and
    separate a plant from the earth and then sever a portion therefrom at a
    particular position which apparatus includes a means to move the plant
    either to said position or away from said position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses for cutting solid material in
    sheet, web, bar, or strand form.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 635+ for cutting the
    end of a food item previously extracted from the ground.


CLS 171/32
TXT Apparatus under subclass 31 in which the sharpened cutting instrument
    disposed in the path of recovered plants is shiftable by contacting the
    plant by a sensing device operatively secured to the instrument in order to
    sever the plant portions at a desired location.

    (1)     Note.  The gage may move the cutter in a manner to remove a plant
    top at a constant location regardless of the position of the plant, or the
    location of the cut may be varied in accordance with the size or shape of
    the plant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 121.4+, for topping cutter and gauge
    subcombinations.


CLS 171/33
TXT Apparatus under subclass 31 having means to carry unearthed plants into
    engagement with a sharpened cutting implement and including positively
    driven abutment or feed means, said apparatus being adapted to move said
    plant in the direction of its length until an enlarged portion of the plant
    engages said abutment or feed means in order to locate said plant relative
    to said cutting implement.


CLS 171/34
TXT Apparatus under subclass 31 in which plants which have been recovered from
    the ground engage a locating device to shift said plants relative to a
    sharpened cutting instrument in order to remove a portion of each plant at
    a desired location.

    (1)     Note.  The locating device may be either a fixed guide or a moving
    positioning member.

    (2)     Note.  The locating device may shift the recovered article relative
    to a conveyor means carrying said article to the cutting instrument and
    this shifting may occur either before or after the article is engaged by
    the conveyor means.


CLS 171/35
TXT Apparatus under subclass 34 which includes means to turn an unearthed plant
    laterally relative to the direction of draft into a generally recumbent
    position in which a portion of said plant is severed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 373+, for apparatus for
    arranging and orienting articles on conveyors.


CLS 171/36
TXT Apparatus under subclass 31 in which the means to move the plant to or from
    a position where a portion thereof is severed, is adapted to grip the plant
    during the cutting operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21+,    for apparatus in which a conveyor-like device holds a plant
    stationary while a portion thereof is severed.


CLS 171/37
TXT Apparatus under subclass 36 in which means is provided to move the material
    detached from the plant from the area where cutting occurs to one side of
    the device in order to form a windrow or to load said material into a
    separate carrier at the side of the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for lateral shifting devices such as conveyors for carrying foilage
    cut from standing plants to the side of the device and see the notes
    thereto.


CLS 171/38
TXT Apparatus under subclass 36 in which the means to hold the plant during the
    cutting operation and to move it to and/or from the cutting area includes a
    pair of confronting endless members having contiguous runs which cooperate
    to hold the plant therebetween.


CLS 171/39
TXT Apparatus under subclass 36 in which the means to hold the plant during the
    cutting operation and to move it to and/or from the cutting area includes a
    rotary element which turns about a single axis.


CLS 171/40
TXT Apparatus under subclass 26 in which means is arranged and disposed to
    cooperate with a plant part severing means, for discharging the severed
    plant parts to a point away from the standing plants.

    (1)     Note.  The deflector may merely push the cuttings aside or may lift
    and convey said cuttings to a windrow or collection receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for rake-like deflectors for surface material such as cut tops.

    37,     for deflectors or conveyors for tops removed from plants subsequent
    to the unearthing of the plant.

    67+,    for deflectors for surface material, disposed in advance of an
    unearthing unit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 121.44 and 121.45 for toppers having means
    for disposing of the cut tops.


CLS 171/41
TXT Apparatus under subclass 26 wherein the above-ground portion of the plant
    is separated from the remainder by means of a device having a sharpened
    portion and having a motion in addition to that due to the translating
    motion of the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for vertical cutters for vegetation.


CLS 171/42
TXT Apparatus under subclass 41 wherein the moving topping cutter is mounted to
    move in an orbital path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for rolling cutters which may sever portions of a plant either
    before or after they are unearthed.


CLS 171/43
TXT Article unearthing means under the class definition (1) claimed in
    combination with features other than particle-size responsive-separating
    means, soil-comminuting means, conveying or handling means or means to
    support, transport, actuate or control any of the preceding means and not
    provided for in other classes or in preceding subclasses of this class, or
    (2) having means or parts disclosed as capable of rearrangement or
    modification by addition thereto or subtraction therefrom to selectively
    provide, on the one hand, a device for recovering buried objects in a
    certain manner and, on the other hand, either a device for recovering such
    objects in an entirely different manner, or else a structure to perform a
    completely different function.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of treating operations provided herein are drying,
    burying, or burning of the recovered object.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 2+ for convertible harvesters.


CLS 171/44
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which a means which is driven by
    either a motor or a ground-engaging traction member is provided to position
    a portion of said apparatus relative to its supporting frame, said means
    being selectively actuated in response to an operator actuated control to
    move said portion from one position of adjustment to another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 663+ and the subclasses there noted for
    an earth- working apparatus with a power means to shift a part.


CLS 171/45
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the buried object-recovering
    device is related to an automotive chassis in such fashion that it is
    mounted on a separate frame having ground- engaging support means therefore
    and adapted to be towed by said automotive chassis, said recovering device
    being actuated by a power take-off driven from a motor mounted on said
    chassis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 79 for an earth working tool located on a
    trailer and driven by a motor on a tractor pulling said trailer.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 14.1+ for a vehicle train with a power
    transmitting connection between a tractor and trailer in addition to the
    articulated connection.


CLS 171/46
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the buried-object recovering
    device is supported, in its operative position, from a mobile
    ground-supported frame in such manner that the entire device can be
    detached as a unit from said frame.

    (1)     Note.  The unearthing unit disposed on a carrying frame which is
    towed by an automotive frame through a separable draft connection (which
    connection may or may not support part of said carrying frame) has been
    excluded unless said unit is also detachable as a unit from said carrying
    frame.

    (2)     Note.  The unearthing unit may be detachably 71. supported on
    either an automotive frame or a towed frame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 272+ for a means to facilitate the
    mounting of an implement on a motor vehicle.


CLS 171/47
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which an entire unearthing unit for
    a buried object is mounted on a frame or chassis in such fashion that it
    may be moved by means of either (1) an operator controlled or actuated
    device or (2) a surface object or ground contour-engaging guide means which
    shifts the unearthing unit bodily with respect to said frame in a generally
    horizontal plane, either pivotally or transversely to the direction of
    motion of said chassis across a field.

    (1)     Note.  The usual purpose of the laterally shiftable mounting is to
    permit continuous alignment of the object- recovering means with a series
    of plants in a row.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143+,   for unearthing units which include a ground-supported chassis
    provided with means to steer or laterally change the course of the chassis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 26 for an earth-working means guided from a
    surface track or previously formed furrow, and subclass 667 and the
    subclasses there noted for an actuator for laterally adjusting an
    earth-working means.


CLS 171/48
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which a means for recovering buried
    objects is supported from a ground supported frame or chassis said chassis
    having a connection to a draft means and an additional independent draft
    device is connected to said recovering means in order to pull said
    recovering means independently of horizontal forces applied through said
    frame.


CLS 171/49
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which a means is provided (1) to
    return earth only into the space formerly occupied by the recovered object,
    or (2) to engage the earth adjacent the location of the object being
    recovered to retain said earth in place as the object is withdrawn from the
    soil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for apparatus used for rolling the earth or plants which apparatus
    may incidently fill up voids left after a plant is unearthed.

    6,      for earth-moving means which follow an unearthing means for buried
    objects and which may incidently fill in a void in the earth formerly
    occupied by said buried object.


CLS 171/50
TXT Apparatus under the class definition which comprise means for individually
    holding either (1) an underground portion of a growing plant or buried
    object, or (2) an above ground portion of a plant extending through the
    earth's surface and lifting it without any substantial disturbance of the
    soil and without any substantial relative motion between the holding means
    and the plant or object.

    (1)     Note.  Those devices which dig plants by merely supporting them and
    not grasping or holding them are excluded. For example devices having
    spaced tines to dig and separate objects from the soil are excluded and
    classified herebelow as diggers if the objects merely rest on the tines.

    (2)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses provide for the holding and
    lifting (i.e. extractor) subcombinations, per se, and also for combinations
    of said subcombinations with a plow or other preliminary digging means.

    (3)     Note.  Included in this and the indented subclasses are means to
    remove plants from the earth by pulling on the foliage or stalks.  See also
    (5) Note of the class definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 199+ for implements or apparatus for extracting stumps or poles.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, for manually supported
    grappling implements for pulling out objects embedded in the soil.


CLS 171/51
TXT Apparatus under subclass 50 in which means is provided to shake, rap,
    strike, jiggle or otherwise jar or vibrate an extractor such as an object
    impaler, snagger or grasping device or a plant or object carried thereby a
    number of tines in succession in order to assist in removing surface dirt
    or incrustations from said plant or object.

    (1)     Note.  Strippers which remove the object from the extractor and
    which may incidently jar the object are excluded and have been classified
    on the basis of the details of the extractor.


CLS 171/52
TXT Apparatus under subclass 50 in which an extractor is mounted on a support
    which is movable relative to a frame and an unloader is provided which has
    a different motion relative to said frame in such fashion that said
    unloader engages an extractor carried object with a pushing, pulling,
    wiping or combing action to remove said object or portion of an object from
    said extractor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87,     for separating diggers provided with ejectors for stripping
    recovered objects from said diggers.


CLS 171/53
TXT Apparatus under subclass 50 including (1) a sharpened means to penetrate
    the surface of an object being recovered, or (2) means disclosed as being
    specially adapted to hook or catch into or around a reentrant or elongated
    above ground portion of said object in order to hold on to said object and
    remove it from the ground.

    (1)     Note.  The snagging means is usually employed to hook or catch into
    vines which fold or drape over said means or tangle therewith in order to
    pull out the vines.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70      and 84+, for devices which penetrate into the ground and entangle
    only with the roots of plants.


CLS 171/54
TXT Apparatus under subclass 53 wherein the impaling or snagging extractor
    means is carried by a moving support and is moved relative to said support
    after the object has been extracted, to discharge such object.


CLS 171/55
TXT Apparatus under subclass 50 in which the extractor includes spaced members
    which are adapted to engage and hold a buried object therebetween and lift
    it from its position in the earth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 131+, for special object engaging levers which may be used to
    lift plants from the ground.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 50.6+, for
    hand implements having fork- or shovel- type jaws which may be used to lift
    plants from the ground.


CLS 171/56
TXT Apparatus under subclass 55 in which the extractor includes carrier means
    provided with grasping means which have a relative motion toward and away
    from each other which is over and above the motion imparted to said
    grasping means by the movement of the carrier means, for the purpose of
    grasping or releasing the plant or buried object.

    (1)     Note.  Organizations employing grasping elements mounted on plural
    carriers in which the only relative motion of the elements is that due to
    relative motion of the carriers are excluded and have been classified in
    other pertinent subclasses of this schedule on the basis of the carrier
    structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for successive, adjacent members rigidly fixed on an endless
    flexible carrier, which members move relatively to each other as the
    carrier passes around a pulley.


CLS 171/57
TXT Apparatus under subclass 55 in which the extractor includes spaced members,
    at least one of which is in the form of a rotatable support having a
    helically arranged member thereon adapted to confront or engage the other
    of said members to cooperate therewith in feeding a buried object
    longitudinally of said support.

    (1)     Note.  These helical screw extractors are usually employed to
    engage the foliage of a plant and lift it from the earth either with or
    without the help of an object-digging device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89      and 95+, for rotary diggers which may be provided with helical
    means cooperating therewith to feed the articles unearthed by the digger.


CLS 171/58
TXT Apparatus under subclass 55 in which the extractor includes spaced members
    between which an object being unearthed in grasped at least one of said
    members being in the form of a rotatably mounted (1) wheel or narrow
    circular device having a lateral, peripheral, article- engaging face or (2)
    an elongated device having a generally cylindrical or conical
    article-accommodating periphery.

    (1)     Note.  The spaced members may in either case be provided with
    either continuous peripheral surfaces or with spaced elements lying along
    the periphery of a cylinder or cone.

    (2)     Note.  The disk-type extractors are generally disposed in
    nonparallel planes to provide zones where they approach and recede in order
    to grasp and release an article while the cylindrical extractors are
    generally but not necessarily, disposed with their axes diverging in order
    to feed the unearthed object longitudinally of the cylinder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for opposed roller-type plant part detachment means for removing
    desired portions from a plant.

    57,     for roller-type extractors which include a screw shaped member.


CLS 171/59
TXT Apparatus under subclass 55 wherein the opposed plant engagers comprise
    opposed diverging members which are fixedly mounted on an upwardly moving
    carrier; the diverging sides generally engage an intermediate portion of
    the sides of the plant with a wedging action to hold it during upward
    movement.

    (1)     Note.  Devices in which converging members dig under a buried
    object and lift and guide said object out of the earth as the object rolls
    or slides up the inclined surface thereof are excluded since they do not
    grasp said object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103     and 104+, for inclined diverging plow shares which dig objects out
    of the earth.


CLS 171/60
TXT Apparatus under subclass 55 in which the extractor includes spaced members
    between which an object being unearthed is grasped, at least one of said
    members being in the form of a moving endless element such as a belt,
    chain, strand or the like (1) adapted to engage said object directly or (2)
    provided with object- engaging devices supported on said endless element to
    engage said object and hold it against the other of said members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+     and 56, for endless carriers for extractor elements of the type
    there provided.

    118,    for opposed endless surfaces, one of which is a separator.


CLS 171/61
TXT Apparatus under subclass 60 in which both of the spaced extractor members
    are endless elements or are attached to or supported by endless elements
    and which elements or members cooperate to engage an object therebetween to
    unearth it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for the endless extractor members as described above which include
    a cutter to remove the foliage from a plant while it is held by the belts.


CLS 171/62
TXT Apparatus under subclass 50 including a means to (1) agitate, plow or
    otherwise disturb the soil or (2) sever underground plant parts and/or to
    lift an underground plant part into a position where it is more readily
    accessible to the extractor.

    (1)     Note.  Patents classified herein as originals usually recite (1)
    details of the soil disturber or plant lifter or else (2) particular
    relations of said soil disturber or plant lifter to an extractor associated
    therewith.  Where details of the extractor are claimed the patent is
    cross-referenced here, if appropriate, on the basis of claimed or novel
    disclosed soil disturber or plant lifter structure.


CLS 171/63
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which a member, disposed entirely
    above ground is moved above and adjacent the earth's surface into contact
    with the sides of plants or partially buried objects to impinge or thrust
    against said plants or objects in order to dislodge them from the soil.

    (1)     Note.  An underground cutter may or may not be provided to sever
    plant roots.

    (2)     Note.  The beater or impeller may be inclined at an angle to the
    line of draft in order that the unearthed objects (usually bean vines) may
    slide along the beater or impeller into a windrow.

    (3)     Note.  The beater or impeller may be rigidly supported on a frame
    or may be movable with respect to said frame.

    (4)     Note.  Included herein are those structures disclosed as adapted
    for the purpose of moving small stones along the surface of the ground in
    order to gather or windrow said stones because of the similarity of said
    structures to the apparatus provided for by this subclass definition and
    the likehood of said structures engaging and unearthing stones which are
    partially embedded in the ground.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for unearthing apparatus which includes a member disposed above
    ground and extending to a point above and immediately adjacent the earth's
    surface, said member being generally transverse or inclined relative to the
    line of draft in order to engage and impell unearthed objects on the ground
    and push them either forwardly into piles or laterally into windrows.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 302 and 303 for boulder or tree stump-type
    excavators.

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 327.1+ and 328.1+ for apparatus for
    gathering or collecting vegetables, fruit or nuts.

    172,    Earth Working, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 781+
    and 811+ for an earth-engaging scraper which could be used to dislodge
    and/or collect embedded or loose surface stones.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 439 and 440 for draft
    motion responsive devices adapted to pick up objects normally found on the
    surface of the ground, such as golf balls or the like.


CLS 171/64
TXT Apparatus under subclass 63 which includes a means which extends under the
    earth's surface to cut, tear or break the root portions of a plant.

    (1)     Note.  The root cutter or breaker may be a portion of the
    above-ground impeller or beater.


CLS 171/65
TXT Apparatus under subclass 63 in which the member which impinges or thrusts
    against plants, surface stones, or partially buried objects is disposed at
    an angle to the direction in which the apparatus is traveling in order to
    windrow, i.e. to deposit the uprooted objects in a row.


CLS 171/66
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the unearthing apparatus
    includes a disassociating means which, in operating position, is generally
    horizontal and planar and which is adapted to be dragged through or along
    the ground and formed of a plurality of interconnected links joined for
    horizontal and vertical movement relative to each other whereby said
    disassociating means will agitate and set apart the desired objects from
    the earth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     for other planar separators which are pivoted to a leading plow or
    blades and which trail on the ground.

    133,    for earth excavating plows or blades having a separator consisting
    of a plurality of relatively moving elements.


CLS 171/67
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a device disposed entirely
    above the earth's surface for the disclosed purpose of engaging material
    lying upon or extending through the earth's surface to lift, depress or
    shift said material into or away from the path of the apparatus for
    recovering buried objects prior to the unearthing of said objects.

    (1)     Note.  These devices may constitute above ground guards or fenders
    which (1) deflect standing plant parts away from parts of said device which
    might tangle therewith or (2) engage loose trash lying in the path of said
    apparatus to shift it out of said path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     50+ and 63+, for similar deflector-like members.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 121.42 for preliminary foliage-arranging means
    on a crop topper.


CLS 171/68
TXT Apparatus under subclass 67 in which the preliminary deflector is movably
    mounted on a support means and an additional means is provided for
    positively imparting a cyclic movement to said deflector.


CLS 171/69
TXT Apparatus under subclass 67 including a surface material-engaging device
    which is either shiftably or turnably mounted in order to (1) lift, throw
    or convey loose surface material into or out of the path of the apparatus,
    (2) to engage standing plant parts to re-arrange the foliage or stalks, or
    (3) to press plants further into the earth.

    (1)     Note.  A mere altering or changing the position of adjustment of
    the deflector relative to the ground has not been considered moving for
    this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for rotating members which roll over clods or standing plant parts.


CLS 171/70
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a frame or chassis and a
    supporting means adapted to move a digging means transversely of the line
    of draft, said digging means consisting solely of a single series of
    peripherally-spaced earth-engaging elements, the said elements moving
    relative to said frame or chassis in a closed path defining a surface of
    revolution, a cross section of which surface conforms to the shape of a
    single element of said series, said elements being adapted to work through
    the soil to push or impact plants or buried objects either in situ through
    the earth or through soil lifted from its natural position to remove them
    from said earth or soil.

    (1)     Note.  Bifurcated- or forked-earth- engaging elements have been
    excluded and have been classified in pertinent subclasses herebelow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97,     for bifurcated- or forked-separating diggers which move
    transversely across the line of draft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 376+ for rakes having a transversely moving
    single tine row.


CLS 171/71
TXT Apparatus under the class definition which includes an interstitial
    separating member adjoining a nondriven soil cutting or lifting element and
    mounted for to-and-fro and/or up-and-down motion in its entirety or as a
    unit, relative to said  element, said separating member (1) having a
    portion thereof, or means mounted on a portion thereof engaging the ground
    in order to follow the undulations in the soil to vibrate the separating
    member or (2) said separating member being provided with a means to move
    said member thru a small amplitude in order, in each case, to shake soil
    and entrained desired objects deposited on or against the separating member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132,    for a separator which may vibrate relative to a plow means which is
    spaced therefrom.

    134,    for similar organizations in which the plow or scoop is movably
    mounted relative to a separator.


CLS 171/72
TXT Apparatus under subclass 71 in which the separating surface is either (1)
    carried, at least in part, by an elastic member or (2) is moved in at least
    one direction by or through an elastically distortable member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for other types of drives to unearthing units which are provided
    with yielding overload relief means.


CLS 171/73
TXT Apparatus under subclass 71 in which the movable separating surface is so
    formed that the intersection of said surface and a reference plane disposed
    perpendicularly to the direction of draft of the apparatus forms a line
    which is disposed at different heights above the ground at different
    portions along the length of said line.

    (1)     Note.  The usual purpose of the transverse curve or inclination is
    to bias the recovered objects to roll laterally to a desired discharge
    point.


CLS 171/74
TXT Apparatus under subclass 71 which includes confining means disposed along a
    lateral edge of the moving separating surface to prevent the recovered
    objects from falling off said edge.


CLS 171/75
TXT Apparatus under subclass 71 which include, in addition to a first
    movably-supported separating surface, either (1) an additional and
    discontinuous separating surface, or (2) an additional separating surface
    or individual bars or similar separating elements which are hinged to the
    first separating surface.

    (1)     Note.  The discontinuous separator surfaces may be moved relative
    to each other or may be merely spaced apart or hinged together.


CLS 171/76
TXT Apparatus under subclass 75 which include plural separating surfaces, at
    least one of which is movably mounted for a motion which is not imparted to
    another one of said surfaces, said surfaces being provided with elements
    which interfit so that alternate elements are part of one separator while
    the intermediate elements are part of the other separator.


CLS 171/77
TXT Apparatus under subclass 71 which includes in addition to a separator
    having an intersitial separating surface movably mounted in a position
    adjoining a plow member, a separator supporting member of irregular or
    eccentric shape interposed between the separator and the ground in such
    fashion that the supporting member is turned about an axis by contact with
    the ground and imparts a motion to the separator in response to such
    turning.

    (1)     Note.  The noncircular rolling member may be supported on the
    separator itself, on a supporting frame carrying the separator, or on a
    separate frame or subframe provided especially for the rolling member.


CLS 171/78
TXT Apparatus under subclass 71 which includes a separator having a front end
    movably supported on a ground-traversing frame and the rear end pulled
    behind said frame in which the rear end is supported either by (1) direct
    contact with the earth or (2) by resting on a member which rolls or slides
    along the earth and which member is provided solely to carry the weight of
    said trailing end.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for trailing separators which are partially supported by a
    noncircular member which rolls on the ground to vibrate the separator.


CLS 171/79
TXT Apparatus under subclass 71 which includes a separator which is movably
    mounted by swinging members which are pivoted to the separator at points
    which are spaced apart along the line of draft.


CLS 171/80
TXT Apparatus under subclass 71 which includes a separating surface which is
    mounted to move about an axis which is (1) disposed along the line of draft
    or (2) which is disposed at an angle to a plane perpendicular to the line
    of draft.

    (1)     Note.  The axis need not be disposed in a horizontal plane but may
    extend at an angle relative to said horizontal plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73,     for transversely-inclined separators regardless of the axis about
    which they are vibrated.


CLS 171/81
TXT Apparatus under subclass 71 which include a separating surface which has a
    portion continuously moving horizontally along a line or direction which is
    generally perpendicular to the line of draft.


CLS 171/82
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which a buried object-recovering
    device is fixedly mounted on a support which is adapted to rest on the
    ground in such fashion that said support may oscillate back and forth while
    remaining in contact with the ground.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are diggers supported by a rocking
    chair-like support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 131+ for special object-engaging levers which may be used to
    lift plants from the ground.


CLS 171/83
TXT Apparatus under the class definition which includes an earth cutting or
    lifting member and an interstitial separator fixedly adjoining or integral
    with a rear portion of said cutting or lifting member and extending
    upwardly and rearwardly therefrom at an angle from a horizontal plane in
    order to separate from the soil desired objects dislodged by said cutting
    or lifting member.

    (1)     Note.  The separator may either comb through soil to selectively
    remove only desired objects or the soil containing the desired objects may
    be deposited on or against the upper side of the separator so that only the
    soil falls thru the separator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71+     and 124+, for moving separators which may be upwardly inclined from
    the back portion of a plow.

    136,    for diggers having a contiguous separator interconnected therewith.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 756 for a plow with a skeleton moldboard.


CLS 171/84
TXT Apparatus under the class definition which includes a member which is
    adapted to extend into a mass of earth containing plants or buried objects
    to be forced through said earth and engage said plants or objects, with a
    minimum of soil disturbance, said member consisting of a plurality of
    spaced elements or portions having an earth passage therebetween which are
    (1) spaced apart a distance such that said plants or objects cannot pass
    therebetween but will be propelled through said earth and thus separated
    therefrom; or (2) so disposed with respect to the forward motion of said
    apparatus that said elements successively engage said plant or object in a
    manner to propel it step by step, transversely relative to said forward
    motion and thus remove it from the earth.

    (1)     Note.  The separating digger must impart a motion to the buried
    objects and separators which merely support excavated objects as they move
    with the surrounding earth and which allow the earth to fall therethrough
    are excluded and are classified on the basis of the excavation and
    subsequent separation.

    (2)     Note.  The digger may operate on plants or buried objects contained
    in a mass of earth which is either in situ or which has been lifted from
    its original position provided that means is employed to constrain the
    earth to flow to the digger in substantially the same manner as if it were
    still in situ.

    (3)     Note.  Included herein are separating diggers which comprise
    vertically-disposed digger elements arranged in a generally rake-like
    formation which comb through the soil to remove buried objects.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 375+ for rakes which comprise vertical tines.

    172,    Earth Working, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 685+
    for plural earth working tools.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 36.1+
    for floor working machines that could inherently function for unearthing
    buried objects.


CLS 171/85
TXT Apparatus under subclass 84 which includes a first member shaped like a
    sector of a circle and a second member having a portion moving through a
    corresponding path adjacent said first member in such fashion as to provide
    an article confining space, at least one of said members being provided
    with digging elements adapted to comb through the soil to unearth objects
    imbedded therein and to deliver said objects between said members.

    (1)     Note.  The moving member may be a separating digger or a mere
    impeller wheel or belt which shifts the objects confined between the
    members.

    (2)     Note.  The said first member is usually fixed on a frame and may be
    a separating digger, a separator or a mere guide to confine the said
    objects.


CLS 171/86
TXT Apparatus under subclass 84 in which the separating digger is provided with
    a mounted member having a bearing surface to hold the digger from movement
    with respect to said mounting member to provide (1) a motion which directly
    causes the separation of an object from the  earth and/or (2) a movement
    which causes a discharge or unloading of objects already collected on or by
    the separating digger.

    (1)     Note.  Mere adjustably supported separating diggers have been
    excluded and classified on the basis of other pertinent details of the
    digger.

    (2)     Note.  The separating digger may be manually actuated, power
    operated by a motor or traction drive or mounted so that it is freely
    movable.

    (3)     Note.  Pivotally-supported separating diggers are included where
    the digger is adapted to swing up and discharge recovered objects collected
    on the digger to thus complete the digging operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for power means to optionally shift a separating digger to dig,
    discharge or adjust the digger.

    71+,    for vibrating separating surfaces which are disposed rearwardly of
    and adjoining or contiguous to a leading plow or earth cutting blade.

    141,    for lifting or tilting means for adjusting unearthing apparatus.


CLS 171/87
TXT Apparatus under subclass 86 including a moving separating digger and means
    adapted to remove or transfer objects resting on the digger, which means is
    supported (1) on the digger or (2) on a digger carrier which is movably
    mounted on a traveling support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     for strippers which have a motion relative to an extractor in order
    to remove recovered objects from the extractor.


CLS 171/88
TXT Apparatus under subclass 86 in which a moving-digger means includes several
    separate elements each of which is adapted to propel a buried object
    towards the other element so that the object may pass in between them.

    (1)     Note.  The several diggers usually intermesh to form a temporarily
    interdigitated grate-like support for the object which allows loose dirt to
    fall through in order to separate said dirt from the object while it is
    lifted from the ground.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55+,    for plural cooperating moving elements which may or may not
    penetrate the earth's surface, which elements are disposed in opposed
    relation for holding and lifting a plant or buried object from the earth.


CLS 171/89
TXT Apparatus under subclass 86 in which a moving digger is mounted on a frame
    and a feeding or discharge means is provided which is interposed in the
    path of objects on the digger and which has a motion relative to both the
    digger and said frame to clean said digger, to pulverize clods, or to
    remove recovered objects from said digger.

    (1)     Note.  The discharge means may be a moving stripper or a conveyor
    arranged to remove the flow of recovered objects from the digger.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for toothed strippers which move adjacent a conveyor or separator
    to pick up vines or other undesired objects therefrom.

    87,     for discharge devices or ejectors which are mounted on a separating
    digger or digger carrier.

    114+,   for similar discharging devices for separators or which cooperate
    with a means for excavating earth and objects buried therein to remove
    earth and/or objects therefrom.


CLS 171/90
TXT Apparatus under subclass 86 in which a moving digger is provided with a
    discharge device interposed in the path of objects on the digger to remove
    said objects from the digger.

    (1)     Note.  The discharge means is usually a comb or trough.

    (2)     Note.  The discharge device must actually remove the objects or
    strip them from the digger and conveyors or chutes which are merely
    disposed in the path of objects which fall from the digger are excluded and
    will be found in an appropriate subclass in Classes 198 or 193,
    respectively.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92,     for separating diggers moving in an annular path in which a chute
    is disposed within the annulus to receive objects therefrom.


CLS 171/91
TXT Apparatus under subclass 86 which includes a moving supporting member which
    rolls or is driven with respect to a frame, digging means being mounted on
    said supporting member in such fashion that it necessarily moves with
    respect to said supporting member when the latter moves, said digging means
    being provided with spaced elements which dig through the soil and engage
    plants or buried objects therein to move them through the soil while
    allowing the soil to sift through as the digging means moves.

    (1)     Note.  The digger is often carried by a crank or wheel, additional
    means being provided to change the relation of the digger to the crank or
    wheel as the latter moves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for impaling- or snagging-type extractors which move relative to a
    moving-carrier means for the purpose of stripping recovered plants from the
    teeth of the extractor.

    56,     for extractors which include jaw means movably mounted on a moving
    carrier.

    87,     for similar structures wherein the moving digger also moves
    relative to an ejector means which means is adapted to remove or transfer
    objects from said digger.


CLS 171/92
TXT Apparatus under subclass 86 which includes a digger having digging elements
    disposed about the periphery of a rotary or belt-like member (1) in which a
    receptacle is disposed within said periphery to receive recovered objects
    in order to retain them or to guide them away from the digger, or (2) in
    which said member has a surface provided with interstices adapted to
    support recovered objects but which permit smaller objects or material to
    pass to or through the interior of the periphery.


CLS 171/93
TXT Apparatus under subclass 86 in which (1) the digger is continuously moved
    through a closed path by contact with the earth as the apparatus traverses
    a field, or (2) the digger is mounted on a supporting frame and has at
    least one axis which is coaxial with a ground-contacting driving wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112     and 125, for rolling separators and elevators, respectively.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 518+ for rolling earth working tools.


CLS 171/94
TXT Apparatus under subclass 86 in which the spaced elements which remove the
    buried object from the earth are supported by a continuous belt, web or
    strand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for endless members which cooperate to grasp buried objects and
    lift them from the earth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 100 for a driven earth working tool
    comprising a blade mounted on an endless driven belt or chain.


CLS 171/95
TXT Apparatus under subclass 86 including a member which is journalled for
    movement about an axis and is disclosed as turning continuously in the same
    direction about said axis, said member being provided with spaced elements
    which dig through the soil and engage plants or buried objects therein to
    move them through the soil but which allow the soil to sift through as the
    member moves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85,     for rotary separating diggers cooperating with contiguous guide
    means for unearthed material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 35+ for driven earth working tools.


CLS 171/96
TXT Apparatus under subclass 95 in which the rotating digger is (1) arranged
    with certain digging elements extending radially further from the axis of
    rotation than others in such fashion that they terminate adjacent a conical
    surface, or (2) arranged in such fashion that the digging elements or
    portions thereof define a substantially conical surface.


CLS 171/97
TXT Apparatus under subclass 95 in which the axis of rotation of the rotary
    digger lies generally in a horizontal plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    for rotary members adapted to move transversely across a moving
    separator or excavator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 107+ for an earth working tool driven
    about a horizontal longitudinal axis.


CLS 171/98
TXT Apparatus under subclass 97 in which the generally horizontal axis of
    rotation of the rotary digger is generally perpendicular to the line of
    draft of the apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 118+ for an earth working tool driven
    about a horizontal transverse axis.


CLS 171/99
TXT Apparatus under subclass 86 in which a separating digger is supported and
    guided for motion in a rectilinear or curvilinear path not provided for
    above, means being provided to impart such motion to the digger.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are separating diggers which have a spading,
    hoeing or pawing motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for separating diggers having power- operated means to selectively
    move the diggers when desired.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 84+ for a reciprocating and oscillating
    driven earth working blade having an elongated shank.


CLS 171/100
TXT Apparatus under subclass 86 in which a separating digger is pivotally
    supported for rocking or oscillating motion about the axis of a rolling,
    ground-engaging member.

    (1)     Note.  The digger may be slidable relative to the ground-engaging
    member so that said digger may be projected into the ground.


CLS 171/101
TXT Apparatus under subclass 84 in which a separating digger is mounted on a
    frame and a means is provided which is interposed in the path of objects on
    the digger and which has a motion relative to the digger to clean said
    digger, to remove recovered objects from the digger, or to assist in moving
    the recovered objects along said digger.

    (1)     Note.  The means may be a moving stripper or a conveyor arranged to
    remove the flow of buried objects from the digger.

    (2)     Note.  The separating digger is usually fixed to the frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75+,    for separating diggers intercepted by contiguous vibrating
    separator sets.

    85,     for impellers which cooperate with an arcuate separating digger in
    such fashion that an unearthed article is moved between the impeller and
    the digger.

    89,     for similar moving discharge means or strippers for moving material
    from separating diggers.


CLS 171/102
TXT Apparatus under subclass 84 which include a separating digger having at
    least a portion having digging elements disposed generally in a plane which
    is inclined at an acute angle with respect to a vertical plane extending
    longitudinally along the path traversed by said portion in such manner as
    to deliver recovered objects at the edge of said path.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are diggers or portions of diggers arranged
    in pairs which diverge either forwardly or rearwardly with respect to the
    direction of traverse to deliver the separated objects centrally or
    laterally, respectively, or the pair.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein are patents which claim a series of
    separate, laterally-staggered diggers which shift recovered objects
    laterally in a succession of steps.

    (3)     Note.  Driven or rolling diggers which meet the above definition
    are cross- referenced here when claimed details of the moving digger
    require classification higher in the schedule.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for similar rakes or lateral deflectors which operate adjacent and
    above the surface of the ground to laterally shift surface material.

    83,     for laterally-deflecting separator surfaces adapted to comb through
    the earth to unearth objects and which are provided with plows or earth
    cutting blades at their leading ends.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Haversters, subclasses 376+, for laterally-deflecting rakes.


CLS 171/103
TXT Apparatus under subclass 84 in which the separating digger includes two
    mutually cooperating digger surfaces which extend, side by side, downwardly
    in the direction of draft and which are spaced apart at a distance such
    that said surfaces are adapted to contact opposite sides of each object
    being recovered to lift said object and guide it along said surfaces.

    (1)     Note.  The cooperating surfaces may be formed as part of an
    integral unit provided that there is an adequate opening or clear space
    below and between said surfaces to allow soil to pass through freely as the
    object is lifted therefrom.

    (2)     Note.  The surfaces are usualy flat and disposed in upwardly and
    laterally diverging planes but they may be surfaces of rods or bars.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57      and 58, for spaced, downwardly inclined, rotating members which
    engage opposite sides of a plant to extract it from the ground and which
    may enter the earth at their forward ends to form spaced digging means.

    62,     for plant- or buried-object extractors combined with diggers or
    root cutters which may be formed as pairs of inclined shares or guides.

    104+,   for devices which are disclosed as having closely-spaced digger
    elements which form an interstitial supporting surface upon which the
    objects being recovered rest but in which spaced elements do not contact
    opposite sides of said objects.


CLS 171/104
TXT Apparatus under subclass 84 in which the separating digger includes an
    interstitial or grid-like surface disposed in a plane which slants
    downwardly towards the direction in which the apparatus travels in order to
    dig under buried objects and urge them up said plane to or above the
    surface of the earth.

    (1)     Note.  The surface need not be continuous but may comprise a number
    of bars, rollers, tines or similar work supporting, digging members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71+     and 83, for separating surfaces which may be forwardly and
    downwardly inclined separating diggers which adjoin a plow or earth cutting
    blade.


CLS 171/105
TXT Apparatus under subclass 104 in which the inclined separating digger
    includes a fork-like member having a plurality of separate, closely spaced
    tines, or teeth to dig under buried objects and form an interstitial
    surface to urge said objects along said surface to or above the surface of
    the earth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for spaced shares constituting a pair of digging elements adapted
    to contact and lift opposite sides of a buried object and which may form a
    fork-like unit.


CLS 171/106
TXT Apparatus under subclass 104 in which the inclined separating digger
    includes a series of closely spaced, transversely arranged members which
    are disposed at progressively higher levels away from the direction of
    draft in order to dig under buried objects and roll them up the ladder
    rung-like transverse elements.


CLS 171/107
TXT Apparatus under subclass 84 in which the invention relates to details such
    as size and shape or relative position of the earth engaging digging
    elements or tips.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 540+ for an earth working tool with
    circumferentially spaced teeth, tines, blades or the like.


CLS 171/108
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having claimed specific details of a
    power transmission between a supporting wheel of a chassis and moving parts
    of a means mounted on said chassis for recovering buried object.

    (1)     Note.  A mere recitation that a digger or picker is driven from a
    supporting wheel axle has been excluded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for traction-wheel-driven means to optionally and selectively
    position a part of an unearthing device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 105+ for an earth working tool driven
    from a rolling or driven ground wheel.


CLS 171/109
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including an unearthing apparatus and
    a wheel- or runner-supported frame which frame is interconnected by a
    transverse horizontal pivot to an additional wheel- or runner-supported
    frame, the unearthing apparatus being mounted on one or both of said frames
    and there being provided a means for varying the included angle between the
    two frames by simultaneously swinging each said frame about the horizontal
    pivot to thereby selectively alter the vertical position or attitude of
    said unearthing apparatus or portions thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    111,    Planting, subclass 56 for planters with break joint frames.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 323, 326+ and 395+ for earth working
    apparatus which may include a break frame.


CLS 171/110
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the unearthing apparatus
    includes an excavating means interconnected with a moving-conveyor means,
    which means are mounted on a vehicular frame for simultaneous movement
    relative to said frame, there being provided a means for securing the unit
    in variable positions of adjustment in order, generally, to vary the
    working depth or attitude of the excavating means.

    (1)     Note.  The conveyor means may, in addition, be a separating means
    for segregating the desired objects from undesired objects or earth.


CLS 171/111
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which means are provided to
    excavate a mass of earth having plant roots or other objects imbedded
    therein; means being provided to receive said mass and to remove the earth
    from said objects and/or to lift said objects from the mass of earth to
    thereby separate and recover said objects.

    (1)     Note.  Patents which disclose a separating digger but claim it only
    as a digger broadly in combination with an additional separator are
    classified herein as originals and are crossed here if any significant
    details of the separating digger are recited which would require
    classification of the original higher in the schedule.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14+,    for unearthing apparatus including a screen or the like adapted to
    allow desired objects to pass therethrough in order to separate said
    objects from larger particles or objects.

    71+,    for plows or soil cutters having trailing, vibrating separating
    members disposed adjacent thereto.

    83,     for plows or soil cutters having associated therewith members
    having separating surfaces which extend upwardly and rearwardly therefrom,
    away from the direction of draft.

    110,    for organization including a digging member and a moving conveyor
    adjustable therewith as a unit relative to a supporting chassis in which
    the conveyor may either be a separator or may conduct earth and/or buried
    objects to a separator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 32 for an earth working apparatus with
    means for separating earth portions after earth working, and subclasses
    681+ for earth working tools which are adapted to raise or turn a mass of
    earth having buried objects therein or adapted to move below the ground
    surface and sever plant roots.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses, for the subcombination of separating means, per se.


CLS 171/112
TXT Apparatus under subclass 111 including a reticulate surface which is moved
    by contact with the earth as the apparatus progresses across a field and
    which is adapted to receive a mass of excavated earth and entrained buried
    objects to retain the latter but to allow the earth to sift or fall through.

    (1)     Note.  The reticulated surface is usually a rolling wheel or
    endless belt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93      and 125, for rolling separating diggers and elevating conveyors,
    respectively.

    108,    for screens or sieves which are driven by a wheel or the like
    rolling on the ground.


CLS 171/113
TXT Apparatus under subclass 111 in which a helical- or auger-like feeding
    means is disposed in contiguous relation to an excavating or separating
    means for moving unearthed material through or along the surfaces of said
    excavating or separating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for extractors which employ at least one screw-type feeding member.


CLS 171/114
TXT Apparatus under subclass 111 including a means which (1) impacts unearthed
    material to hurl it through a desired trajectory, (2) cooperates with an
    excavating or disassociating surface to assist in moving unearthed material
    along or from said surface, or (3) disintegrates unearthed material moving
    along or carried by a surface of the excavator or separator by comminuting
    said material between said surface and said means.

    (1)     Note.  The supporting surface may be a digging surface or a
    separating surface and the motion imparted to the excavated material may be
    for the purpose of (1) merely moving the material through the apparatus,
    (2) assisting the flow of part of the material through a separator surface,
    or (3) comminution of conglomerated portions of the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86+,    for moving separating diggers disposed adjacent a plow or earth
    guide in position to receive a slice of earth in its original condition as
    it was in situ and to comb through said slice to remove desired objects
    buried therein.

    101,    for fixed separating diggers provided with moving impellers or clod
    breakers.


CLS 171/115
TXT Apparatus under subclass 114 in which the impeller or breaker means is
    journalled for movement in a circular path about a fixed axis lying in or
    extending generally parallel to a vertical plane extending in the direction
    of draft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for transversely moving rotary diggers which may or may not be
    combined with excavating or separating means.

    97,     for transversely rotating separating diggers mounted for rotation
    about horizontal, longitudinal axes.


CLS 171/116
TXT Apparatus under subclass 114 in which the impeller or breaker means is
    journalled for movement in a closed circular path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85      and 101, for rotary impellers arranged to move material along a
    separating surface consisting of a portion of a separating digger.

    113,    for rotary impellers which have spirally arranged longitudinally
    conveying screw means.

    115,    for transversely moving rotary impellers or clod breakers.


CLS 171/117
TXT Apparatus under subclass 114 in which the impeller or breaker means is
    mounted for movement in a closed orbital path, there being at least two
    spaced parallel axes about which said means traverses during a single cycle
    of its operation.

    (1)     Note.  The endless impellers are not conveyors because they do not
    carry the earth and/or entrained objects but merely push it relative to a
    second fixed or moving surface which supports it.


CLS 171/118
TXT Apparatus under subclass 117 which includes a pair of endless belt members
    each of which has a run disposed adjacent to and in cooperation with a run
    of the other in such fashion that a recovered object or plant may be
    confined and transported between said runs or an earth clod may be crushed
    between said runs.


CLS 171/119
TXT Apparatus under subclass 117 in which the impeller or breaker means travels
    in an endless path about the excavating or disassociating means.


CLS 171/120
TXT Apparatus under subclass 117 in which the impeller or clod breaker means is
    disposed over and adjacent the excavator or separator surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    for endless impeller or clod breaker belts having an upper run
    disposed above an excavator or separator.


CLS 171/121
TXT Apparatus under subclass 114 in which the impeller or breaker means is
    journalled on a frame structure and adapted to be moved through a closed
    orbital path or through a rectilinear reciprocatory path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91      and 99, for separating diggers which are driven through a cyclic
    path and which may or may not be combined with an excavating or separating
    surface.


CLS 171/122
TXT Apparatus under subclass 111 including a means to strike, squeeze or
    comminute conglomerated portions of the earth, without unduly injuring
    objects entrained therein in which the means is disposed subsequent to the
    excavating means and either prior to or subsequent to the separating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for similar structure which either intentionally or incidently
    pulverizes earth clods in a separating zone.


CLS 171/123
TXT Apparatus under subclass 111 in which a carrier is disposed below an
    interstitial separating area to remove the material which falls through the
    interstices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14+,    for conveyors disposed below a separator which separator is adapted
    to pass a recovered object but exclude trash, vines, etc.


CLS 171/124
TXT Apparatus under subclass 111 including a means to excavate a mass of earth
    with buried objects entrained therein and a separating means to remove the
    earth from said objects in which either (1) the excavating means moves, (2)
    the separating means moves, or (3) a transporting device, interposed
    between the excavating means and separating means, moves.

    (1)     Note.  Excavating means, separating means and transporting devices
    which are movable only for adjustment purposes are excluded and classified
    elsewhere in this schedule on the basis of claimed details of the various
    means or the manner in which they are adjustably supported.


CLS 171/125
TXT Apparatus under subclass 124 including an earth lifting or transporting
    device interposed between an excavator and a separator which device is
    moved by contact with the earth as the apparatus moves across a field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93      and 112, for rolling separate diggers and nondigging separators,
    respectively.


CLS 171/126
TXT Apparatus under subclass 124 including an interstitial or reticulated
    surface which receives excavated earth with buried objects therein and
    which surface is movably supported in order to assist in separating the
    objects from the earth and/or to transport said objects during the
    separating operation.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are those reticulated separating surfaces
    formed of a continuous endless belt, band or conveyor flight and not
    provided for below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for excavating means having a belt-type separating conveyor
    intimately associated therewith, where the excavating means and conveyor
    are adjustable together relative to a supporting chassis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses, for details of the moving reticulated separating surface, per
    se.


CLS 171/127
TXT Apparatus under subclass 126 in which the reticulated separating surface is
    provided with a driving means which imparts thereto a motion in a different
    direction from the direction of the normal flow of the recovered objects
    across said separating surface in order to assist in the separating
    function thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for extractors which grasp an object to remove it from the earth
    and which are jiggled to facilitate separation from the earth.


CLS 171/128
TXT Apparatus under subclass 126 which includes a rotary, cylindrical member
    having an axially extending reticulated or interstitial separating surface
    projecting outwardly and generally radially from the peripheral surface
    thereof, said separating surface being adapted to receive a mass of
    excavated earth having buried objects entrained therein in such fashion as
    to support said objects while allowing said earth to sift through said
    separating surface and thus separate from said objects.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92,     93 and 95+, for similar separating diggers.

    129,    for rotary drum-type separators.


CLS 171/129
TXT Apparatus under subclass 126 in which the reticulated separating surface is
    formed as a member defining a surface of revolution and journalled for
    rotation in such fashion that a mass of excavated earth having buried
    objects entrained therein is applied to either the exterior or interior of
    said member in order to retain the objects while the earth passes
    therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92,     for separators which may be cylindrical and which are disposed
    within the confines of a surrounding endless separating digger.

    112,    for rotary drum separators which roll along the ground.

    113,    for open drum-type separators having spiral conveyors or impellers
    to move excavated material therethrough.

    128,    for separating cylinders or drums which have separating tines or
    interstitial surfaces extending radially therefrom.


CLS 171/130
TXT Apparatus under subclass 126 in which a number of reticulated separating
    surfaces formed of continuous endless belts, bands or flights are disposed
    in such relative positions that objects carried by one belt, band or flight
    are deposited on the next belt, band or flight in sequence.

    (1)     Note.  The successive belts are usually inclined with the outlet
    area of one belt disposed above the inlet area of the next so that the fall
    of the object from one to the other is utilized to assist in the separation.


CLS 171/131
TXT Apparatus under subclass 126 including a number of separate separators, one
    of which is an endless separating belt band or conveyor in which objects,
    carried on one separator are deposited on the next separator in sequence.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130,    for successive separators which consist of sequentially arranged
    endless belt separators.


CLS 171/132
TXT Apparatus under subclass 126 including a separating surface formed with
    interstices or apertures, said surface being mounted for a unitary movement
    to assist in passing earth therethrough or to carry or feed separated
    objects along said surface.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are sifting shakers which have no other
    motion than a jiggling movement to enhance sifting of earth therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71+,    for vibrating separating screens or grates which are disposed in
    contiguous relation to a plow or earth cutting blade.


CLS 171/133
TXT Apparatus under subclass 126 in which the interstitial separating surface
    includes a plurality of individual members mounted on a support, said
    members having (1) different motions with respect to said support, (2)
    motions about different axes, or (3) any motion relative to each other, and
    said members being closely spaced in order to support recovered objects
    while dirt passes through the space between adjacent members.

    (1)     Note.  The relatively moving members may be rotating rollers or
    cranked shafts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66,     for ground-engaging horizontal planar separating members consisting
    of chain-like links.

    76,     for relatively moving-interdigitating separator elements adjoining
    a nondriven plow or earth working blade.


CLS 171/134
TXT Apparatus under suclass 124 in which an excavating member is movably
    supported on a frame for digging or loosening earth and/or buried objects
    entrained therein, and a separating means is supported on the frame
    separately from the excavating member.

    (1)     Note.  The moving digger may be the means which lifts the soil and
    entrained buried objects from the ground or said digger may be
    supplementary to said means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55+,    especially subclasses 57 and 58, for rotating extractors which may
    extend into the ground and either contact a plant below ground or else
    disturb the earth.

    84,     for moving diggers which separate earth from buried objects
    simultaneously with the digging operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, appropriate subclasses, for details of the moving
    excavating device, per se.


CLS 171/135
TXT Apparatus under subclass 111 in which the means to separate earth from
    recovered buried objects includes a portion of a receiving and collecting
    chamber for said recovered objects.

    (1)     Note.  The separator normally consists of a screen or grill in a
    lower surface of the article collecting chamber.

    (2)     Note.  The separating collector may or may not be preceded by an
    additional separating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for plant or buried object unearthing units which dump periodically
    in response to either the weight of collected objects or distance traveled
    by the unit in order to leave the unearthed objects in piles.


CLS 171/136
TXT Apparatus under subclass 111 in which the excavating means and the
    separating means (1) are formed integral one with the other, or (2) are
    immovably and rigidly adjoined one to the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71+,    for vibrating separators which adjoin leading plow or earth cutting
    blades.

    83,     for inclined separator surfaces fixedly adjoined in trailing
    relation to leading plows or earth cutting blades.

    110,    for separating means which adjoin earth cutting plows or blades and
    which are adjustable therewith as a unit.


CLS 171/137
TXT Apparatus under the class definition wherein a baffle or hood means is so
    disposed relative to the unearthing apparatus, parts thereof or drive means
    therefor, that (1) such apparatus, parts, or drive means are shielded from
    foreign matter, dirt or recovered objects, or (2) an operator or attendant
    is protected from foreign matter, dirt or recovered objects which might
    otherwise strike or injure him.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85,     for a moving impeller member having a cooperating arcuate guide
    member, one of which members is a separating digger.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 112+ for a driven earth working tool with
    a deflector or shield for thrown material, and subclasses 508+ for an earth
    working implement with a guard, shield or plant diverter.


CLS 171/138
TXT Apparatus under the class definition wherein the unearthing device is
    provided with an intercepting means disposed in the normal path of flow of
    the material through said device for receiving and transporting or guiding
    said material in a direction which when measured in a horizontal plane is
    angularly disposed with respect to said normal path of flow of material in
    order, generally, to deliver material or portions thereof to a
    predetermined position within the device or on the ground.


CLS 171/139
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the unearthing apparatus
    includes the frame of a vehicle, said frame having an excavating and/or
    separating means rigidly connected thereto, and which frame is provided
    with a means for varying its vertical position relative to the ground
    whereby the working depth of said excavating and/or separating means may be
    selectively changed from one position to another.

    (1)     Note.  The frame is generally provided with a crank axle, gage
    wheel or runner means which is movable relative to the frame in order to
    position said frame at different heights above the ground.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109     and 141, for other types of devices for adjusting an unearthing
    unit either with or relative to a vehicle frame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 395+ for an earth working implement with
    a ground support vertically adjustable relative to the supporting frame.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 840+ for a vehicle with body-leveling
    means, and subclasses 43+ for a vehicle with vertically adjustable wheels.


CLS 171/140
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a buried object recovering
    device floatingly supported on a vehicle frame and a ground- engaging
    supporting member operatively connected to said recovering device to
    continuously shift said recovering device relative to said frame in
    response to changes in contour of the ground.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 387+ and subclasses 669+, and see the
    subclasses there noted for earth working implements with ground wheels or
    runners.


CLS 171/141
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a selectively operable
    mechanism connected to a part of a means for recovering buried objects
    mounted on a chassis in order to (1) raise or lower said part to adjustably
    position it with respect to said frame or (2) to adjustably vary the
    inclination or attitude of said part with respect to the earth's surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for power-operated means to adjust a part of an unearthing
    apparatus.

    109,    for articulated vehicle frames whose sections relatively pivot to
    change the position of an unearthing means.

    110,    for diggers and conveyors which are adjustable as a unit relative
    to a supporting chassis.

    139,    for unearthing units which are fixed or vertically shiftable
    vehicle frames.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 452+ and the subclasses there noted, for
    an actuator adapted to lift an earth working implement for transport on a
    wheeled frame, and subclass 668 for an actuator adapted to move an earth
    working implement vertically with respect to a wheeled frame.


CLS 171/142
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a specific means forming a
    part of a power supply system to move a portion of a device which removes
    and separates buried objects from the earth.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are devices having means to effect a
    declutching of a drive to an unearthing apparatus in response to a vertical
    or lateral shifting of such apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for power-driven means for an unearthing unit part which are
    adapted to yield or slip when overloaded.

    44,     for power-driven means to adjust or selectively position a digger
    unit part.

    108,    for details of a drive from a traction wheel to a digger unit part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 125 for details of a drive for a driven
    earth working tool.


CLS 171/143
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including claimed features relating to
    movable supporting members or platforms for mounting a device or portion of
    a device for removing and separating buried objects from the earth.

    (1)     Note.  The supporting member or frame may or may not have
    supporting wheels and may or may not be provided with means to steer said
    frame as it is propelled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for unearthing unit frames which are detachable as a unit from the
    chassis of a tractor or the like.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 669+ and the subclasses there noted for
    implements mounted on a wheeled frame, and subclass 776 for frames for
    earth working implements.


CLS 171/144
TXT Apparatus under the class definition for recovering buried objects embedded
    in the earth either immediately below the surface thereof or extending
    through the earth's surface and not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are devices under the class definition which
    include article-receiving means to retain unearthed objects until a desired
    accumulation thereof has been achieved, after which, generally, the means
    is cleared, dumped or otherwise readied for the reception and retention of
    more objects.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for collecting chambers for recovered articles, which chambers dump
    the articles periodically in piles in response to weight of the load of
    articles or distance traveled by the apparatus.

    11,     for removable or alternately employed receiving chambers for
    recovered buried objects.

    135,    for recovered article collecting chambers having reticulated
    separating surfaces therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 473.5, for similar collecting hoppers or
    receptacles for harvested crops.


CLS 172/
TTL EARTH WORKING

CLS 172/
TXT GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER:



    I.      This is the generic class for subject matter relating to working
    the earth in situ.  Earth working involves physical treatment of the earth
    and includes beating, compacting, crushing, cultivating, cutting, digging,
    furrowing, harrowing, leveling, mixing, plowing, pulverizing, rolling,
    scraping, scratching, smoothing, and tilling.

    II.     The earth is usually worked by an earth working element carried on
    an apparatus traversing the ground but hand held tools such as hoes are
    also included.

    III.    This class also takes subject matter, not otherwise classified
    relating to the cutting and removal of sod or turf from the ground.

    IV.     Apparatus comprising means other than earth working means supported
    on or attached to a vehicle for manipulation in a manner consistent with
    the use of the means as an earth working means is classifiable in this
    class if the means is identified in a claim by name only and the claim
    contains no feature otherwise inconsistent with classification in Class
    172.  However, lines with other classes have in many cases not been cleared
    so that where the bulk of the existing art has been classified on a basis
    other than indicated above such classification is continued.

    NOTES



    (1)     Note.   CLAIMS NOT CONTROLLING IN PATENTS PRIOR TO 1930.

    Patents prior to 1930 have not necessarily been classified by claims so
    that the placement of these old patents does not necessarily indicate lines
    of classification.  In view of the large numbers of old patents in this
    class many of these patents have been classified in accordance with their
    total disclosure.  This is especially true of the patents in subclasses
    332+.  Most of the patents, however, regardless of their age have been
    placed in accordance with their claimed subject matter.

    (2)     Note.  Subject matter Relating to Snow Removal, To Working the
    Earth For Industrial Purposes, To Compacting Earth For Roads or Pavement
    and To Working Hard Material In Situ.

    Class 37, Excavating, generally relates to removing snow or to working the
    earth for industrial purposes as by making a ditch or moving earth by a
    conveyor or scoop.  In many cases the devices found in Class 37 for these
    purposes are indistinguishable structurally from devices found in Class
    172.  Classification turns on emphasis for a certain use, such as snow
    removal or ditch digging.  Class 37 formerly contained subclasses 143
    through 181 entitled "Scrapers" which included subject matter relating to
    scraping the earth by means of a blade or such subject matter in
    combination with other earth working means such as harrows or rollers.  The
    devices in these subclasses were typically road graders or bulldozers for
    working or moving the earth for industrial purposes.  These subclasses were
    abolished and the art found in them was for the most part incorporated into
    Class 172 and is to be found in subclasses 4.5, 26.5, 26.6, 777-809 and
    other appropriate subclasses.  Some of the art was specialized to ditch
    filling and was placed in Class 37 subclass 142.5.  The remaining patents
    were not drawn to scraping blades or such blades combined with simple earth
    working means and were transferred to appropriate subclasses in Class 37 or
    other classes.  Class 37, subclasses 104+, Railway Graders, and subclasses
    381+, Road-Grader Type, were not cleared.  Patents in these subclasses
    should be drawn to devices more specialized than the general utility
    scrapers or "road graders" which were classified in abolished subclasses
    143-181.

    Class 299, Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, as the title
    indicates, generally provides for the working of hard earth material such
    as rock and also the working of ice in situ.  However, a tool which is
    actually of general utility in earth working, such as a ripper tooth or
    scraper and traverses the earth without relative movement with respect to
    its support (as by rolling or cyclical driving) is classifiable in Class
    172 even if solely disclosed for disintegrating rock.

    Class 404, Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 117, 121, and
    122+, for a roller device which performs a simple compacting function on
    the earth.  See the note to Class 172, under the class definition of Class
    404.

    (3)     Note.  JOINTS.

    Many of the patents relating to earth working devices claim joints between
    parts of the device.  A claim to a joint between two disclosed earth
    working portions of an earth working apparatus, e.g., a claim to a joint
    between a plow share and moldboard, is classifiable in Class 172,
    subclasses 681+. Also, a claim to an overload release joint between
    implement parts, e.g., between a tractor and a device solely disclosed as
    an earth working type of implement, is classifiable in Class 172,
    subclasses 261+ and a claim to a spring biased joint for biasing an earth
    working tool is classifiable in Class 172, subclasses 705+.  However, other
    claims to joints, per se, are classifiable in the various classes relating
    to joints.  Thus, joints of general application are classifiable in Class
    403, Joints and Connections. An articulated joint between a tractor and a
    trailing vehicle, as long as that vehicle is not solely disclosed as an
    implement, is classifiable in Class 280, Land Vehicles, subclasses 400+.


    DEFINITIONS OF TERMS



    ACTUATOR

    A device comprising both a means for imparting movement to an element and a
    means for holding the moved element against returning to a position from
    which it has been moved.  Thus, an actuator may comprise a servomotor, a
    mechanical power take-off from a motor or rolling wheel, a hand operated
    lever and ratchet or merely a handle and a bracket for holding the element
    moved by the handle in position.  In the case of a mere handle actuator,
    however, the handle must be intended to be used merely to move an element
    to an adjusted position where it is held in place by a holding means.  If
    the handle is intended to be used by an attendant so as to hold an element
    in intermediate positions by continued application of force by the
    attendant then the handle is not considered an actuator.  See subclasses
    329+ for devices with such handles.  If the handle is disclosed as usable
    as an actuator to merely move and hold and, alternatively, also as a
    guiding means to move and hold by force exerted by the attendant then the
    handle is considered to be both an actuator and an attendant hold means and
    is classified accordingly in the first appropriate subclass and cross
    referenced down if necessary.

    A device comprising merely a means for moving by direct application of
    draft force is not considered an actuator. For example, an implement
    hitched to a tractor and provided with a latch and a movable hitch whereby
    the draft force of the tractor on the movable hitch moves an earth working
    element with respect to the implement frame and the latch holds the element
    in different positions is not considered to be provided with an actuator,
    as the term is used in this class.  See subclass 605 for such devices.

    Also, a device comprising merely a screw bolt or the like is not considered
    an actuator, being merely a clamping or an adjusting means.

    ADJUSTABLE

    An adjective describing the capability of two parts of being selectively
    held in different positions with respect to one another by some means other
    than an attendant.  A mere clamp which cooperates with a member such that
    by loosening the clamp the member could be set in any desired position and
    reclamped (e.g., clamp and spike tooth) is not considered to be an
    adjusting means.  However, any specific structure such as selectively
    usable apertures, teeth, slots, etc., for the purpose of permitting the
    selective change of the relative positions of two parts is included under
    this definition.

    Despite the above limitation on the meaning of "adjustable" if a claim
    emphasizes the feature of adjustability it is classifiable in an
    "adjustable" subclass even if structurally the feature comprises a mere
    clamp.

    EARTH WORKING ELEMENT

    Synonymous with "tool".

    IMPLEMENT

    A combination of parts comprising an earth working device.  It may mean
    merely an earth working portion or a complex combination of parts including
    a tractor.  Usually it indicates a complete device which as an entity may
    be readily attached to a tractor in the field.

    LATERAL

    A direction which is transverse of the line of draft of a tool over the
    earth unless some other meaning is clearly indicated by the context.

    LONGITUDINAL

    A direction which is parallel to the line of draft of a tool over the earth
    unless some other meaning is clearly indicated.

    TOOL

    That portion of the apparatus which actually works the earth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    (INCLUDES STATEMENTS OF THE LINE WITH  OTHER CLASSES)

    7,      Compound Tools, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous compound
    tools, especially subclass 115 for a cutter combined with a pitch fork and
    subclass 116 for a cutter combined with a spade or shovel (e.g., a bayonet
    and a shovel). Hand tools comprising combinations of various earth working
    portions are classifiable in Class 172, Earth Working.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, appropriate subclasses
    for cleaners, including scrapers. Class 172 takes cleaners for cleaning
    earth working parts, which cleaners are intended to be attached to the
    earth working apparatus.

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 110+ for handles for earth
    working devices, such as plows or hoes.

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 14 for machines and processes of making
    plow and cultivator irons, subclasses 891+ for processes of making
    agricultural devices, and see the subclasses there cited.

    30,     Cutlery, appropriate subclasses, for cutters of general utility and
    cutters for merely making a slit in sod.  A cutter for earth working
    purposes such as making a slit in the soil (e.g., a colter) is classifiable
    in Class 172. Thus a patent to a cutter with a claim restricted to earth
    working or a sole disclosure of earth working is classifiable in Class 172,
    except that a patent to a hand device with the cutting edge extending
    generally in the direction of the handle is classifiable in Class 30 even
    though it is restricted to earth working.  Also a tool for merely cutting a
    plant below the surface of the earth is classifiable in Class 30.

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 196+ for snow- removing apparatus which may
    be identical with earth working apparatus except that it is disclosed as
    principally for snow removal, subclasses 307+ for dredging apparatus,
    subclasses 347+ especially subclasses 366+ for ditchers which may be very
    similar to earth working apparatus for Class 172 except that they are
    disclosed as making an industrial ditch or trench rather than a furrow, by
    more than mere scraping operation, subclasses 104+ for apparatus
    specialized to forming the bed or slopes of a railway, subclasses 381+ for
    apparatus specialized to working on roads and involving something more than
    mere scraping or earth working apparatus of general utility, subclasses
    394+ for cable operated apparatus including cable operated scrapers
    involving more than the scraper, per se, and a cable attached to the
    scraper, subclasses 403+ for a scraper convertible to or combined with a
    scoop, shovel or other material pick up means, subclasses 411+ for scoops
    which are distinguishable from scrapers classified in Class 172 in that
    they have a bottom for transporting material, and appropriate subclasses
    for digging or moving earth in general.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 1.01
    and 58 for subject matter relating to earth working combined with other
    functions relating to plant husbandry such as heating the earth or spraying
    a plant. However, a moldboard type plow with heating means for the plow is
    classifiable in Class 172 subclass 755.

    56,     Harvesters, appropriate subclasses for subject matter relating to
    severing or chopping of crop material without disturbing the soil and also
    subject matter relating to gathering or raking crop material without
    substantially disturbing the soil.  The line is essentially one of
    disclosed use.  If a device is described as a nonearth disturbing
    harvesting device the patent is placed in Class 56 rather than Class 172
    even if the structure claimed is the same as that which may be found in
    Class 172.  An exception is that if a harvester is claimed by name only and
    the claim is otherwise drawn to merely a mounting or manipulating means
    which is consistent with the functioning of the named harvester as an earth
    working device then the patent may be classifiable in Class 172.

    With respect to the stalk chopper art, if the chopper is disclosed as one
    which operates by the action of a cutter member against the ground, without
    a ledger plate it is assumed that the soil is disturbed and classification
    in Class 172 results.  Choppers operating above the ground level are
    classifiable in Class 56.

    Generally Class 172 takes the combination of or the conversion between a
    Class 56 apparatus and a Class 172 apparatus, or an apparatus disclosed as
    having either an earth working or a harvesting function without change.
    Thus a Class 172 type lawn edger combined with or convertible to a
    harvester is found in Class 172, subclass 14, the combination of other
    types of Class 172 devices with a harvester is in Class 172, subclasses 27+
    and the combination of a Class 172 device with a rake is in Class 172,
    subclasses 29+.  An exception to the above is that a hand rake combined
    with or convertible to an earth working means is classifiable in Class 56,
    subclasses 400.04+.

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 325+, especially subclass 427 for
    hydraulic-type power plants operated by liquid supplied from a pump.  Many
    such power plants are used in earth working apparatus.  A claim to a power
    plant for an earth working apparatus reciting only a tractor mounting for
    the plant and a rockshaft actuated by the power plant is classifiable in
    Class 60.  If the claim goes beyond this and claims some detail of the
    apparatus which may be only a lift arm on the rockshaft or a draft sensing
    means it is classifiable in Class 172.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 462+ for dies for forming plow and
    cultivator irons.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses for machine
    elements and mechanical movements, especially subclasses 11+ for power
    take-offs.

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclass 85 for attachments
    other than abrading attachments for sharpening earth working tools.  An
    earth working apparatus combined with a sharpening device is in Class 172,
    subclass 437. However, when the earth working apparatus as claimed is only
    a support for the attachment the claim is classifiable in Class 76.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclasses for
    servomotors, per se.  Many such servomotors are used in earth working
    apparatus.  A claim to a servomotor for an earth working apparatus reciting
    only a tractor mounting and rockshaft operated by the motor is classifiable
    in Class 91. However, further detail such as a lift arm on the rockshaft or
    a draft sensing means causes classification in Class 172.

    104,    Railways, subclass 169 for apparatus for reciprocating an earth
    working device, claimed by name only, over the ground and subclass 244.1
    for a vehicle or earth working device claimed by name only guided along a
    field by a furrow feeler.  Class 172, subclass 23+ has significantly
    claimed earth working apparatus driven from or guided by a stationary
    object or previously formed furrow.

    111,    Planting, appropriate subclasses for earth working means combined
    with planting means, especially subclasses 118+ for earth working means
    combined with means for inserting liquid or gas into the soil, subclasses
    25+ for planting means with earth marking means, subclass 33 for earth
    marking means comprising means to make an intermittent mark in the earth to
    indicate the points where material should be planted, subclasses 52+ for
    frame arrangements, subclass 82 for hand propelled planters, and subclass
    99 for dibbles.  A Class 172 device generally may comprise the earth
    working subcombination of a planting device.  A planter may be recited by
    name only as a support for an earth marker or an earth working tool in a
    claim classifiable in Class 172.  A support for an earth working portion
    identified as a planting boot in a claim is not considered too much for
    Class 172.

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, appropriate subclasses for tires and
    wheels which may be structurally similar to earth working apparatus but are
    not intended to have an earth working function.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, appropriate subclasses for
    subject matter relating to unearthing and separating an object from the
    earth (e.g., a potato digger).  A Class 172 device may cut plant roots as
    it traverses the ground or may turn a furrow which has objects in it such
    as potatoes but devices in Class 172 do not separate an object from the
    adjacent earth.  A Class 172 device may be a subcombination of a Class 171
    device; for example, a plow for Class 172 may lift earth with potatoes in
    it, the potatoes then being separated from the earth, the complete device
    being classifiable in Class 171.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, appropriate subclass for subject matter
    directed to driving or impacting a tool, when such subject matter includes
    combined features peculiar to tool driving, but which does not include
    features limiting the subject matter to a specific tool art, such as
    specific shape of the work contacting portion of a tool, related tools, or
    an opposed work support, and see particularly subclasses 184+ driving or
    impacting means mounted on a wheeled vehicle.  Class 172 has not been
    cleared as to subject matter in conflict with this line.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, appropriate subclasses for subject
    matter relating to forming elongated holes in the earth.  Apparatus for
    forming a plurality of small holes in the earth for aerating the soil or
    for like purposes is classifiable in Class 172, subclasses 21+.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 14.1+ for vehicle trains comprising a
    tractor and a trailing vehicle which may be an implement claimed by name
    only, subclasses 53.1+ for devices in which the motor of the motor vehicle
    is used as a source of external power for a device which may be an
    implement claimed by name only, and subclass 401 for power steering devices
    which may be controlled by a feeler element running in a furrow.  An
    implement described in a claim as comprising a frame and an earth working
    means carried thereby is considered to be claimed by more than name only so
    that the claim would be classifiable in Class 172.  The line between Class
    172 and subclasses 53.1+ of Class 180 is set out in the Search Class Note
    of subclass 35 in class 172.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 62 for plow-lifting type
    clutches, per se.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses for subject matter relating to comminuting or disintegrating
    material other than the earth in situ.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    appropriate subclasses for lifting means of general utility for lifting a
    load, which means may be structurally similar to a means for manipulating
    an implement.

    280,    Land Vehicles, appropriate subclasses, for the running gear or
    other features of vehicles which may be, but by disclosure are not
    restricted to, earth working implements, especially subclass 1.5 for a
    vehicle with a means for engaging the body of a walking attendant,
    subclasses 840+ for a vehicle with body-leveling devices, subclasses 32.5+
    for a vehicle with a worker's support or shade, subclass 32.7 for a riding
    attachment, subclasses 43+ for a vehicle with wheels movable vertically
    relative to the running gear, subclasses 47.11, 47.131+ and 47.34+ for
    handle-propelled vehicles, subclasses 80.1+ for vehicles, running gear,
    subclass 763.1 for a vehicle with a retractable ground support, subclasses
    847+ for dust or mud guards for vehicles, subclasses 855+ for wheel
    scrapers and cleaners, subclasses 160+ for means for fending obstacles from
    contact with the wheels of a vehicle, and subclasses 400+ for articulated
    vehicles, especially subclass 414.5 for a trailing vehicle having a
    vertically adjustable wheel, subclasses 405.1+ for a load distribution
    connection between the articulated vehicles, subclasses 411.1+ for multiple
    trailing vehicles, subclass 419 for a steering connection between
    articulated vehicles, subclasses 420+ for articulated vehicles with service
    connections therebetween, subclasses 442+ for a wheel on a trailing vehicle
    steered by articulative movement between the vehicles, subclasses 446.1+
    for condition responsive draft connections, subclasses 449+ for overload
    releasing draft connections, subclasses 456.1+ for plural laterally
    adjustable draft connnections, subclasses 477+ for connection facilitating
    means in a draft connection and subclass 490.1 for a vertically adjustable
    draft member, the adjustment being merely for the purpose of placing the
    draft member at a proper height for facilitating the connection between the
    articulated vehicles.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 49+ for hand
    forks and shovels.  Hand forks and shovels are distinguished from Class 172
    apparatus such as a hand hoe in that the row of tines or blade extends in
    the general direction of the handle from an end thereof and is designed to
    engage and lift a load.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, appropriate
    subclass for subject matter relating to recovering valuable material from
    the earth or breaking up hard, solid material in situ.  In working the
    earth surface, the line between Class 172 and Class 299 turns on described
    hardness of material worked, Class 299 taking a cutter or device for
    working hard solid material in situ.  Clay type earth or loose gravel is
    considered soft material whereas solid rock, coal or road pavement is
    considered hard material.  However, a device for merely drawing a cutter
    back and forth like a plow even in a hard surface is classified in Class
    172 if specific cutter structure is not recited.

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 41.1+ for wheels which may be structurally
    indistinguishable from earth working tools but which are not intended to
    work the earth.

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 157 for a plain bearing and 460 for an
    antifraction bearing for plow or colter disks which may include the bearing
    support.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for a joint between
    two members which does not involve any structure of the members other than
    that which cooperates to effect the joint.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclass 117, for an earth
    compacting roller with vibrating or impact means, subclass 121, for a
    sheep's foot roller, subclasses 122+, for a rotating drum, roller or tire
    to compact earth and subclasses 133.05+, for earth tamping means.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, appropriate subclasses.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, for rotary expansible
    chamber-type pumps or motors, per se.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 415+ for an abrasive attachment for sharpening
    earth working tools.  An earth working apparatus combined with a sharpening
    device is in Class 172, subclass 437.  However, where the earth working
    apparatus, as claimed, is only a support for the attachment, then
    classification is in Class 451.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a nonearth working roll, per se, not elsewhere
    provided for, and see the notes thereunder.

    Design Classes:

    D8,     Tools and Hardware, subclasses 1+ for tools and implements for
    agriculture, forestry and horticulture.

    D15,    Machines Not Elsewhere Specified, subclasses 10+ for agricultural
    or construction machinery.

    INDEX TO CLASSES NOTED IN THE CLASS DEFINITION AND THE SUBCLASSES OF THIS
    CLASS

    After each class listed below, the notation "See-----" refers to the class
    definition and the subclasses of Class 172 in which there are references to
    the class involved.

    7,      Compound Tools.  See class definition and subclasses 371 and 375.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning.  See class definition
    and subclasses 35, 558, 606, and 610.

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware.  See class definition and subclasses 329,
    371, 383, and 395.

    29,     Metal Working.  See class definition and subclasses  518, 519, 537,
    540, and 544.

    30,     Cutlery.  See class definition and subclasses 13, 15, 19, 35, 133,
    329, 371, and 518.

    33,     Geometrical Instruments.  See subclasses 126 and 430.

    37,     Excavating.  See class definition and subclasses 1, 19, 33, 133,
    205, 237, 247, 276, 438, 452, 529, 698, 699, 721, 754, and 755.

    47,     Plant Husbandry.  See class definition and subclasses 1, 19 and 22.

    56,     Harvesters.  See class definition and subclasses 5, 13, 15, 21, 27,
    29, 35, 42, 133, 237, 240, 247, 256, 324, 329, 371, 375, 378, 402, 403,
    407, 431, 437, 452, 492, 518, 540, 663, 705, and 713.

    60,     Power Plants.  See class definition and subclasses 452 and 663.

    72,     Metal Deforming. See class definition.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism.  See class definition and subclasses
    35, 292, 485, and 492.

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making. See class definition and
    subclass 437.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type.  See class definition and
    subclasses 9 and 465.

    104,    Railways.  See class definition and subclasses 23, 26, 126, 132,
    278, 383, 387, 395, 430, and 669.

    111,    Planting.  See class definition and subclasses 19, 21, 126, 133,
    325, 351, 395, 518, 701, and 721.

    125,    Stone Working.  See subclasses 329 and 371.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids.  See subclass 606.

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels.  See class definition and subclasses
    518, 519, 543, and 544.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects.  See class definition and
    subclasses 1, 2, 5, 19, 26, 27, 29, 32, 35, 39, 63, 79, 84, 100, 103, 105,
    107, 112, 118, 125, 126, 133, 136, 144, 165, 190, 204, 261, 276, 323, 326,
    382, 387, 395, 431, 452, 508, 516, 518, 540, 663, 667, 669, 685, 756, 766,
    and 776.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting.  See class definition and subclasses 35
    and 48.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth.  See class definition and
    subclasses 19, 21, 22, 35, 91, 100, 111, 518, 542, 604, 606, 681, 734, 735,
    and 741.

    180,    Motor Vehicles.  See class definition and subclasses 2, 3, 23, 26,
    35, 42, 84, 105, 114, 256, 261, 278, 292, 329, 352, and 518.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control.  See class definition and
    subclasses 403, 407, 410 and 493.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration.  See class definition.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force.  See
    class definition and subclasses 23, 236, 378, 452, and 490.

    267,    Spring Devices.  See subclass 705.

    278,    Land Vehicles:  Animal Draft Appliances.  See subclass 677.

    280,    Land Vehicles.  See class definition and subclasses 7, 26, 137,
    236, 239, 240, 248, 256, 258, 261, 264, 265, 269, 271, 272, 274, 275, 278,
    280, 282, 286, 292, 297, 310, 315, 318, 321, 324, 326, 329, 353, 383, 387,
    395, 400, 402, 404, 406, 407, 408, 414, 415, 419, 420, 423, 427, 428, 431,
    433, 439, 446, 449, 450, 452, 459, 466, 476, 507, 508, 558, 624, 669, 677,
    and 678.

    293,    Vehicle Fenders.  See subclasses 233, 276 and 297.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements.  See class definition
    and subclasses 18, 19, 22, 245, 247, 329, 371, 372, and 378.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops.  See subclasses, 272 and 431.

    297,    Chairs and Seats.  See subclasses 423.23+.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material.  See class
    definition and subclasses 19, 35, 107, 110, and 118.

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles.  See class definition and
    subclasses 243, 518, 534, 535, 540, 541, 544-546, 552, 556, 557, and 604.

    305,    Wheel Substitutes for Land Vehicles. See subclasses 100, 292, 352,
    387, and 542.

    366,    Agitating, see subclass 371.

    384,    Bearings, see the Class Definition and subclasses 518 and 599.

    403,    Joints and Connections.  See class definition.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus. See class definition (2)
    Note, and "SEARCH CLASS", and subclasses 35, 150, 170, 518, 537, 539, and
    540.

    414,    Material or Article Handling.  See class definition and subclasses
    2, 105, 236, 272, 439, 452, 467, 521, 588, and 605.

    451,    Abrading.  See class definition and subclass 437.

    452,    Butchering.  See subclasses 349 and 540.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts. See subclasses 261, 269, and 270.

    492,    Roll and Roller. See class definition.


CLS 172/1
TXT Methods under the class definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclass 195 for methods of excavating.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 58 for methods of earth working combined
    with an additional nonearth working step such as adding fertilizer or
    treating the soil.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 1 for methods of
    earth working combined with an additional step of removing or separating a
    plant or buried object from the earth.


CLS 172/2
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising an earth working element
    and a means for sensing a condition or change of condition, which condition
    or change of condition may or may not occur, a separate control means and a
    separate power means for changing a condition of operation of the
    apparatus, said three means being so related that the sensing means
    controls operation of the controlling means and the control means controls
    operation of the power means, all without the intervention of a human
    operator.

    (1)     Note.  The "power means" of the definition comprises a motor or a
    mechanical power take-off.  For purposes of this definition a spring is not
    considered a power actuating means.

    (2)     Note.  Apparatus in which a movement of the sensing means develops
    power which directly moves the power means is not included (e.g., a sensing
    means connected to a piston in a hydraulic transmission to directly cause
    movement of a piston in the power lift cylinder).  See subclass 239 for
    such apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    465,    for an actuator for lifting a tool for transport comprising a
    servo-motor with a follow up control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 9 for unearthing
    devices having automatic control.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 14.5 for a connection between a motor
    vehicle and a trailer (including a broadly claimed implement) effective to
    automatically control the vehicle on occurrence of an overload on the
    connection, and subclasses 282+ for a motor vehicle provided with a
    safety-promoting means which is responsive to the sensing of acceleration,
    deceleration, or tilt of the vehicle.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 699+, for material moving
    devices with a vertically swinging load support of the tilting shovel or
    fork type with automatic control for effecting an operation of the device.


CLS 172/3
TXT Apparatus under subclass 2 in which the power means controlled is for
    propelling the apparatus over the ground.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes brake or clutch control for the
    propelling means.

    (2)     Note.  The mere recitation of an implement by name only in
    combination with a power driven propelling means therefor having a
    mechanism for controlling the propulsion means in response to a condition
    of the implement, as for example, a mechanism for disengaging the clutch of
    a tractor when a pulled implement strikes an obstruction, is not enough for
    classification under this definition. See Class 180, Motor Vehicles,
    subclass 14.5 for such devices.

    (3)     Note.  The mere recitation of an implement in combination with a
    power driven propelling means therefor including a means for adjusting the
    implement and a mechanism for con-   trolling both the propelling means and
    the adjusting means for the implement is included in this definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 14.5 for vehicle trains with automatically
    responsive means for controlling the propelling means.  A broadly named
    implement is considered a vehicle for Class 180.

    901,    Robots, subcollection 1 for a mobile robot device.


CLS 172/4
TXT Apparatus under subclass 2 in which the sensing means contacts or senses
    the surface of the ground and acts to maintain the earthworking element at
    a preselected depth therein.


CLS 172/4.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 2 in which the earth working element is a ground
    leveling tool, (e.g., a scraper, etc.) which is so controlled that the
    contour of the finished portion of the earth which is being worked will be
    substantially straight in a longitudinal direction regardless of the
    irregularities of the original surface of said portion.


CLS 172/5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 2 wherein the condition sensed is the location of
    an obstruction or plant.

    (1)     Note.  A stake or other object which has been previously placed in
    position for the purpose of controlling an earth working implement which is
    intended to approach such object is not considered to be an obstruction
    within this definition since its sensing is not considered to be a
    condition which may or may not occur.  See subclasses 23+ for such
    apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for driven tools having an obstruction feeling device which moves
    the implement.

    233+,   for apparatus having an obstruction feeler for moving an implement
    to avoid the obstruction, the obstruction feeler providing the power
    necessary to move the implement or merely unlatching the implement so that
    it may move.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 121.4+ for harvester cutters with plant or
    crop contacting gauges.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 8 for drive triggered
    by desired object.


CLS 172/6
TXT Apparatus under subclass 5 in which at least one of the sensing,
    controlling or power means is electrical.


CLS 172/7
TXT Apparatus under subclass 2 in which the condition change which is sensed is
    a change in the force required to move the earth working element along the
    ground.

    (1)     Note.  For classification under this definition a patent must claim
    the automatic control feature in some detail.  A mere broad reference in a
    claim to an automatic control as, for example, a mere broad reference in a
    claim to a top link in a three point hitch broadly described as a link for
    automatically controlling a power lift is not enough.  See subclasses 439+
    for patents with claims of this nature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for apparatus including means to automatically control the power
    means of a vehicle for propelling a tool which may be responsive to the
    draft force on the earth working tool.

    239+,   for draft or pitch responsive depth control for implements, the
    control being other than of the automatic power control type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 446.1+ for articulated vehicles with a
    hitch responsive to changes in the draft load, there being no disclosure of
    an earth working element being the cause of the change in draft load, and
    subclasses 405.1+ for articulated vehicles with an adjustment to distribute
    the load between the vehicles or from one vehicle to another.


CLS 172/8
TXT Apparatus under subclass 7 in which the rate of movement of the power means
    varies with the magnitude of the sensed force in such a manner that the
    rate of movement increases or decreases when the magnitude of the sensed
    force increases or decreases respectively.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, those devices in which
    a plurality of pumps, a variable capacity pump, or a plurality of
    successively operated valves are used to operate a fluid servomotor.

    (2)     Note.  A system which has a mere single valve for directing fluid
    to a servomotor which would provide less restriction to fluid flow upon
    greater opening of the valve in response to the increased magnitude of the
    sensed force is not included in this subclass.


CLS 172/9
TXT With manual actuator to select type of condition sensed:

    Apparatus under subclass 7 including means having a manually actuated
    element which may be set in a plurality of positions, wherein changing the
    position of the element results in a change in the type of condition (e.g.,
    position of tool, amount of draft force, depth of tool) which causes a
    change in operation of the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes those devices having means to operate
    the power means to raise or lower the earth working means upon the
    occurrence of an excess draft force (e.g., excess draft release or overload
    lift type).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    465,    for an actuator adapted to lift a tool for transport on a wheeled
    frame or broadly claimed implement and comprising a servomotor with a
    follow-up control, or for a device wherein an automatic draft responsive
    control is converted to a position control so that the automatic draft
    control is effective only if the device is disassembled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 358+ for expansible
    chamber motors having working member position responsive feedback control.


CLS 172/10
TXT Apparatus under subclass 7 having means to selectively adjust the
    relationship between the power means and the sensing means to change the
    magnitude of sensed force required to produce a given movement of the power
    means.

    (1)     Note.  The sensed force in this definition is the force applied
    directly to the sensing means, for example, in the three-point mast type
    hitch it is the force applied to the end of the top link and not the force
    acting directly on the earth working element.


CLS 172/11
TXT Apparatus under subclass 7 in which the earthworking element is normally
    raised by the power means in response to an increase in the sensed force
    and having means which is operative when the magnitude of the force exceeds
    a predetermined amount to release the earth-working element from control by
    the power means.


CLS 172/12
TXT Apparatus under subclass 7 in which the condition sensed is an abnormal
    increase in the magnitude of the draft force, the sensing means initiating
    operation of the power means to cause raising of the earth working element
    to an inoperative position.

    (1)     Note.  The earth working element may be returned to its previous
    working condition as part of the cycle of operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261+,   for overload responsive devices which are not automatic in their
    operation.


CLS 172/13
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means other than a scraper
    specially intended for working the earth adjacent a fixed structure on the
    surface of the earth (e.g., a paved walk to edge a lawn) or working the
    earth adjacent a turf surface (e.g., grooving a plant bed adjacent a lawn).

    (1)     Note.  This definition is intended to provide an art collection of
    lawn edgers or trimmers. Usually such devices comprise a means for guiding
    the device along the edge of the pavement.  However no special structure
    need be claimed for classification in this subclass.  Patents whose sole
    specific disclosure or whose claims relate to the described use are
    considered to come under this definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, appropriate subclasses for hand manipulable implements for
    merely cutting or slitting grass or sod. Devices which cut so as to form a
    groove in the soil, however, are classified in Class 172.

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 10.1+, for a motor-driven harvester,
    particularly subclass 13.7, wherein two or more cutters are provided, e.g.,
    for mowing and for trimming, and subclass 16.9 wherein the motor may drive
    a mower or a trimmer; subclasses 229+, for a lawn and hedge cutter, and
    subclass 251, for a lawn edge trimmer combined with a lawn mower.  The lawn
    edge trimmer or cutter of Class 56 merely cuts grass.  If a groove is cut
    in the soil, or the ground is otherwise disturbed, classification is in an
    appropriate subclass in Class 172.


CLS 172/14
TXT Apparatus under subclass 13 in combination with or convertible to an
    element for performing some work operation other than earth working.

    (1)     Note.  Devices classified here include lawn edgers combined with
    mowers, brushes or snow removers.


CLS 172/15
TXT Apparatus under subclass 13 comprising an earth working element which cuts
    into the ground and has a rolling motion as it is pulled over the ground or
    is positively moved with respect to its support with a continuous or cyclic
    motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 292 and 319 for rotary blade cutters.


CLS 172/16
TXT Apparatus under subclass 15 comprising in addition an earth working element
    for cutting into or furrowing the earth which does not move relative to its
    support while working the earth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63+,    for other driven and nondriven earth working elements.

    174+,   for other rolling and nonrolling earth working elements.


CLS 172/17
TXT Apparatus under subclass 13 in combination with a ground wheel or ground
    roller.


CLS 172/18
TXT Apparatus under subclass 13 comprising (1) an earth working element adapted
    to be driven generally vertically downwardly in the earth or (2) jaw
    members for grasping and lifting a portion of earth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 49+ for hand
    forks and shovels for digging or grappling earth and not limited to use as
    lawn edgers.


CLS 172/19
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means for cutting the earth
    (1) horizontally and vertically or (2) annularly for the purpose of
    enabling a portion of sod to be removed in an undisturbed condition.

    (1)     Note.  This definition is intended to provide an art collection of
    sod or plug cutters.  Other devices such as subsoilers, or the like, which
    cut soil and have structure similar to that of a sod cutter but are not
    used for the purpose of removing a strip of earth in an undisturbed
    condition are not included.  Patents are considered to come under this
    definition if claims refer to sod cutting or the sole specific disclosure
    relates to this use.

    (2)     Note.  Patents relating to the handling and/or cutting of sod after
    it has been cut from the ground are classified under this definition if not
    otherwise classifiable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for earth perforating devices which have means for removing the
    earth from a hole made in the earth, there being no intention to remove a
    piece of sod in an undisturbed condition so that it can be replanted.  The
    earth perforating devices characteristically either disturb the earth or
    take out a very small diameter core of earth and sod, not intended for
    replanting.

    376,    for hand tools of the loop type.

    698,    for a tool with laterally spaced standards.

    699,    for subsoilers.

    720,    for subsurface blades.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, for merely cutting turf in a vertical plane.

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 302 and 303 for devices for excavating
    stumps and stones, and subclass 3 for peat excavators.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclasses 73+ for plant receptacles of the
    transplanting type.

    111,    Planting, subclasses 100+ for plant setting devices.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, appropriate subclasses for
    separating plants from the soil.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 249+ for a core-forming
    type earth boring bit provided with means to sever the core and subclasses
    403+ for a core-forming type earth boring bit.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 49+ for forks
    or shovels for lifting plugs of earth or sod and subclass 50.6 for shovels
    of the grappling type, the grapple having no means to cut the earth in a
    horizontal plane.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, appropriate
    subclass for cutting hard, solid earth material in situ, particularly
    subclasses 36.1+ for a floor working machine.


CLS 172/20
TXT Apparatus under subclass 19 comprising means for making a transverse
    vertically extending cut in the earth while the apparatus is being
    propelled over the surface of the earth.

    (1)     Note.  The apparatus may momentarily halt its forward motion while
    the transverse cut is being made.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    for driven earth working elements which are guided for rectilinear
    reciprocation, which reciprocation may be in a vertical transverse plane.


CLS 172/21
TXT LAWN AERATOR OR PERFORATION, OR PLUG REMOVER:

    Apparatus under the class definition for treating earth covered with grass
    by making a slit or small hole therein so as to either aerate the earth,
    remove a plug of grass and soil, or merely pierce sod, with a minimum of
    disturbance of the adjacent earth.

    (1)     Note.  The apparatus found in this subclass is not limited to any
    specific type of structure but is usually disclosed as being intended to
    perform the aforementioned aerating and/or plug-removing function.

    (2)     Note.  Apparatus which could incidently be used to perform this
    function is not included herein, unless the aerating and/or plug-removal of
    lawns is disclosed as an intended use of the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91+,    for cyclically driven carriers which have, movably mounted thereon,
    hole forming earth-working teeth, blades, or like projections, but which
    teeth, blades, or projections tear at and snag the soil in working it.

    118+,   for devices, other than lawn aerators or plug-removers, driven
    about a horizontal transverse axis.

    540+,   for roller devices, other than lawn aerators or plug removers, with
    teeth which make holes in the ground.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 226 for standing grain gatherers with bat
    members having a vertical movement similar to aerator projections; and
    subclass 249 for mowers with rollers having aerating devices.

    111,    Planting, subclasses 89+ for devices for making a cavity in the
    earth and depositing material in the cavity; and subclass 99 for hand
    implements for forming a cavity other than a furrow in the ground to
    receive material.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, appropriate subclasses for devices
    for boring holes in the earth.


CLS 172/22
TXT Apparatus under subclass 21 in which there are means for making a hole in
    the earth by removing earth from below the surface of the ground to a
    location above the surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclasses 73+ for plant receptacles of the
    transplanting type.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 403+ for a core-forming
    type earth boring bit.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 50.7 for
    annularly arranged grappling-type hand forks or shovels.


CLS 172/23
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising an earth working means
    adapted (1) to coact with some fixed manmade structure so as to be driven
    relative to or guided by said structure, (2) to be anchored to some fixed
    structure such as a tree or stake to be guided thereby, (3) to be operated
    while anchored to or supported on the earth so as to prevent the apparatus
    as a whole from having any translatory movement during the earth working
    operation, or (4) to be guided by a guide means contacting a channel or
    shoulder previously made in the ground.

    (1)     Note.  The fixed man-made structure may be portable.  For example,
    a tractor carrying a winch intended to pull an earth working element
    relative to the tractor to work the earth is considered a "fixed
    installation", provided the earth working element is not carried by the
    tractor.

    (2)     Note.  A means for feeling an obstruction and merely guiding or
    directing an implement to avoid such obstruction is not included in this
    definition.  Such means are found in subclass 233.  Also, an apparatus
    comprising merely a tool which shifts on meeting an obstruction is not
    included.

    (3)     Note.  In connection with section (3) of the above definition the
    device must have some anchor, ground supporting feet or earth penetrating
    pilot in addition to the earth working means. However, the pilot may itself
    have some earth working function.

    (4)     Note.  In connection with section (4) of the definition, in order
    to come within the definition an apparatus must have an element which does
    not support any substantial weight and which does not have an earth working
    function and is disclosed as intended to contact a channel or shoulder made
    on a previous pass of the apparatus or some other apparatus.  A landslide
    of a plow or the like is not classified under this definition unless it is
    disclosed as specially intended to be used to guide the apparatus along a
    previously made shoulder since a landslide which inherently could be used
    to guide an apparatus along a shoulder is very common in this art.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 169 for railroad rolling stock or track type
    apparatus claiming an earth working implement by name only and concerned
    with means for reciprocating the implement across a field, and subclass
    244.1 for means coacting with a furrow for guiding a vehicle or implement
    claimed by name only.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 400+ for a motor vehicle steered by
    means extending from a post fixed in a field.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 264+ for apparatus for hauling or hoisting a load including a
    driven device which contacts and pulls on a cable when the load is moved.

    901,    Robots, subcollection 14+ for the movement in space of a robot arm
    about its base.


CLS 172/24
TXT Apparatus under subclass 23 in which the earth working means is guided in a
    rotary path by a fixed vertical member not forming a part of the apparatus
    (e.g., tree or stake).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for an implement rotatable about a vertical axis and carrying an
    anchor or feet to prevent translational movement of the apparatus.


CLS 172/25
TXT Apparatus under subclass 23 in which the earth working means is rotated
    about an upright axis while the apparatus is anchored to or supported on
    the ground so as to prevent translational movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for an implement attached to or guided in a rotary path by a fixed
    vertical member (e.g., tree or stake).


CLS 172/26
TXT Apparatus under subclass 23 comprising a means which is adapted to contact
    an elongated shoulder or channel on or in the ground in order to guide the
    apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  See (4) Note of subclass 23 for limitations applicable to
    this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for a lawn edger which may be guided by the edge of a pavement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, for railway grading apparatus guided by a surface truck.

    104,    Railways, subclass 244.1 for a vehicle guided by a furrow feeler.
    The vehicle may be an implement claimed by name only.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 47 for a surface
    object or ground contour engaging guide means which shifts the unearthing
    unit bodily with respect to the frame in a generally horizontal plane.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 401 for a motor vehicle provided with
    steering gear which includes a land based steering datum and means on the
    vehicle for sensing the datum, which means cooperates with a steering motor
    on the vehicle for the purpose of controlling the course of the vehicle.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 87.2 for a land vehicle of the wheeled type
    provided with means whereby one or more of its wheels may be steered by an
    occupant and wherein the steering means controls also a wheel offset from
    the principal supporting wheels of the vehicle but which, by its own
    turning (i.e., pivotable) movement, is able to effect turning movement of
    certain of the principal wheels; and subclass 776 for a wheeled vehicle of
    the occupant steered type wherein bias means is provided for maintaining a
    steerable wheel in engagement with an elongate, more or less vertical
    surface (e.g., a curb) for a vehicle-steering purpose.


CLS 172/26.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 23 comprising a scraper that is adapted to be
    connected by a cable or the like flexible means to a fixed structure so as
    to be driven relative to said structure.

    (1)     Note.  The scraper in this definition comprises an approximately
    vertically disposed blade for smoothing the earth or for cutting into the
    earth and pushing earth ahead of it in order to move the material from one
    location to another.  The disclosed use may be for scraping earth beneath a
    body of water or scraping material from a vertical wall.  The blade may
    have spaced teeth, though usually it has a straight edge.

    (2)     Note.  Patents are considered to come under this definition if they
    are disclosed as intended to be used with a fixed structure, no special
    limitation being required in the claims.  Use with a fixed structure is
    considered to be established if it is clear from the disclosure that the
    scraper is dragged back as well as forward by a cable or the like and there
    is nothing in the disclosure inconsistent with the cable or the like for
    forward motion being a drag line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 394+, for cable- operated excavating
    apparatus comprising more than a scraper, per se, and nominally recited
    hauling cables or like flexible means connected thereto, subclasses 398+
    for cable operated wheeled scoops and subclasses 398+ for cable operated
    scoops.  A scoop differs from a scraper in that it has a bottom wall which
    carries material to be transported, whereas a scraper relies on the surface
    over which it is moving to support material which it is transporting.


CLS 172/26.6
TXT Apparatus under subclass 26.5 in which the scraper is adapted to be pulled
    in opposite directions by the cable or flexible means and in which some
    portion of the scraper apparatus is caused to move to and remain at a
    different position relative to some other portion when the direction of
    pull is reversed.

    (1)     Note.  The relative movable portion of the scraper apparatus must
    comprise more than a mere continuation of the flexible means, such as a
    bail.


CLS 172/27
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising an earth working means in
    combination with an independent spaced means for severing or shredding
    crops without disturbing the soil, said independent means being used
    simultaneously with said earth working means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for a driven earth working element with a cleaner spaced from the
    ground surface.

    66,     for earth working elements with a cooperating driven cleaner which
    may act to sever vines or vegetation collected on the implement.

    606+,   and the subclasses there noted, for earth working elements with
    relatively movable cutting or cleaning means to remove vegetation or debris
    that has collected on the implement.

    681+,   especially subclass 752 for earth working elements having sharpened
    edges or portions which may serve to sever crops or vegetation coming in
    contact with the elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, appropriate subclasses for plant severing or shredding
    means, per se, which do not disturb the earth.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 5 for unearthing
    devices with additional vertical cutter for vegetation.


CLS 172/28
TXT Apparatus under subclass 27 in which the plant severing or shredding means
    is driven with a regular cyclic motion relative to its support or frame by
    a power means in addition to the motion imparted directly to the means by
    the translation of the device as a whole as it is moved across the surface
    of the ground being treated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35+,    for driven earth working elements or cleaners.


CLS 172/29
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising an earth working means
    combined with means (e.g., a rack) for shifting material lying on the
    surface of the soil which has not been disturbed by the earthworking means
    without disturbing the soil, said shifting means being used simultaneously
    with said earth working means.

    (1)     Note.  Living plants, e.g., vines, are not included.  Also dead
    plants which are still standing,  e.g., corn stalks, are not included.  See
    subclasses 514+ and 517 for plant deflectors for handling such material.
    Also, devices which merely clean or remove material from earth working
    elements are not included, see subclasses 39 and 66 for driven cleaners and
    subclasses 606+ and the subclasses there noted for non driven cleaners.

    (2)     Note.  For patents to be classified under this definition the means
    to shift surface material must be disclosed as solely for such purpose. An
    earth working implement which may be adjusted to travel above the surface
    of the ground to shift surface material is not included.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, appropriate subclasses for rakes or gatherers, per se,
    or combined with harvesting means, and subclasses 400.04+ for hand rakes
    combined with earth working elements.

    111,    Planting, subclass 139 for a trash control accessory claimed in
    combination with a planting machine.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 19 for unearthing
    devices with rake or lateral deflector for ground contacting recovered
    objects.


CLS 172/30
TXT Apparatus under subclass 29 in which the means for shifting surface
    material is driven with a regular cyclic motion relative to its support or
    frame by a power means in addition to the motion imparted directly to the
    means by the translation of the device as a whole as it is moved across the
    surface of the ground being treated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35+,    for driven earth working elements or cleaners.


CLS 172/31
TXT Apparatus under subclass 29 in which the earth working means includes at
    least one earth engaging blade extending laterally of the direction of
    travel and being either reciprocable vertically to perform a cutting
    function or being attached to a rotary carrier which is rotated due to the
    resistance of the earth as the apparatus is moved over the earth.

    (1)     Note.  The earth engaging blade need not extend the 90o with
    respect to the line of travel, but may be oblique with respect thereto.

    (2)     Note.  Most of these devices are stalk choppers and the function of
    the blade is mainly to cut stalks.


CLS 172/32
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising an earth working means and
    a means for acting on the earth severed from the ground or loosened by the
    earth working means to classify, separate or assort it according to its
    physical characteristics and return at least a portion of such earth to the
    ground.

    (1)     Note.  The classifying, assorting, or separating means must be in
    addition to and distinct from the earth working means which severs the
    material from the ground.

    (2)     Note.  The classifying, assorting, or separating means is generally
    of the type found, per se, in Class 209, Classifying, Separating, and
    Assorting Solids.

    (3)     Note.  A mere pulverizing or comminuting is not considered
    separating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    511,    for fenders for preventing soil thrown about by the apparatus from
    contacting plants, the fender being of the perforated or screening type to
    permit fine soil to pass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, appropriate subclasses for
    means for unearthing plants or objects from the ground and separating them
    from the earth.  The subject matter of Class 171 is characterized by means
    which discriminate between an object and the earth.  In Class 172 the
    discrimination is between different portions of the earth itself, as
    between large clods or granules and small clods or granules. For example, a
    Class 172 device may separate large granules of earth mixed with stones
    from small granules of earth, while a Class 171 device would separate
    stones from earth.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 7+
    for apparatus for mining material followed by separation.


CLS 172/33
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising an earth working means
    combined with a power driven means for handling the earth after it has been
    severed from the ground or loosened by the earth working means.

    (1)     Note.  Where the power driven means not only handles the earth but
    performs a substantial earth working function the apparatus is classifiable
    in subclasses 35+.

    (2)     Note.  The power driven handling means may comprise for example a
    conveyer for moving the earth or a means for turning a furrow slice.

    (3)     Note.  A power driven cleaner or comminutor which merely separates
    earth from an implement without conveying it to a distance is not
    considered to come within this definition.  Such devices may be found in
    subclass 66.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for working earth
    or snow and conveying it away for the purpose of making an excavation or
    the like.


CLS 172/34
TXT Apparatus under the class definition, other than hand held devices, so
    arranged that the whole apparatus may be turned upside down so as to work
    the earth in that position in addition to its ability to work the earth in
    its original right side up position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136,    for diverse tools useable alternately only.

    241,    for an apparatus inverted to engage a ground support with the
    ground.

    371+,   for hand tools which may be used in an inverted position.


CLS 172/35
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which a power means is provided to
    move an earth working element with a regular cyclic motion relative to its
    support independently of or in addition to the motion imparted directly to
    said element by the translation of the device as a whole as it is moved
    across the surface of the ground being treated.

    (1)     Note.  The moving means may employ a resilient element or gravity
    return arrangement during a portion of the movement.

    (2)     Note.  The power means may comprise (1) a prime mover such as an
    engine or motor (2) a drive from a supporting wheel (other than where there
    is an integral wheel and earth working element or direct coupling
    therebetween) or (3) a manual means to continuously rotate the earth
    working element.

    (3)     Note.  Where no more of the driving means for a driven earth
    working element is claimed than the driven shaft which supports said
    element the patent has been construed as a rotary implement subcombination,
    equally useful as a driven or a rolling earth working element and has been
    classified in subclasses 518+ unless (1) the claimed structure, attitude,
    or relation of the element to the ground or to an adjacent, cooperating
    implement would require a drive means to operate it in the manner disclosed
    or (2) unless a disclosed drive means (more than a shaft) is claimed either
    broadly or specifically.

    (4)     Note.  Driven earth working elements as contemplated by this
    definition usually engage earth which is either undisturbed or which rests
    on undisturbed earth immediately after it has been treated by another
    implement. As an exception to the above, driven elements which (1) are
    contiguous to a ground treating implement to clean it or (2) which are
    disposed in the path of the furrow slice or earth stream leaving the
    implement to pulverize said earth have been classified as driven earth
    engaging elements in subclasses 39, 50+, 66, and 67.

    (5)     Note.  Provision of power means to shift an otherwise undriven
    earth working element at the option of the operator has not been considered
    to result in a driven earth working element for this definition in the
    absence of a regular and cyclic motion. For actuators for shifting earth
    working elements see subclass 663 and the subclasses there noted.

    (6)     Note.  Some drive connections to an earth working element actually
    retard the element and constrain it to rotate at a speed slower than that
    at which it would roll on the ground.  Patents claiming such drives have
    been classified in this and indented subclasses provided that the drive is
    capable of positively rotating the element if it were not in contact with
    the earth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for driven implements with automatic power control, especially
    subclass 5 for such implements with obstruction sensing means.

    15+,    for a lawn edger with a driven cutter.

    19+,    for driven sod cutters.

    21,     for driven lawn aerators.

    28,     for an earth working implement with adriven means for cutting or
    shredding plants without soil disturbance.

    30,     for an earth working implement with a driven means for shifting
    surface material without soil disturbance.

    32,     for an implement comprising a driven tool with means for separating
    earth after earth working.

    33,     for a power driven moldboard, conveyer, or handler.

    236+,   for an implement with a ground engageable draft responsive lever.

    292,    for specific propelling means for traversing an implement over the
    ground.

    518+,   for rolling, rotating or orbitally moving tools, no detail of a
    drive for the tool being claimed.  See (3) Note of this definition (35).

    663+,   and the subclasses there noted for power driven actuators for tools.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, appropriate subclasses
    for analogous apparatus used for cleaning.

    30,     Cutlery, appropriate subclasses for general utility cutting
    implements which may be power operated.

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 10.1+ for motor driven harvesters and
    subclasses 500+ for stalk choppers for cutting dead crop material.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 11+ for power take-offs
    and subclass 16 for portable assemblies for driving auxiliary attachments.

    111,    Planting, subclasses 113, 122, and 158+ for power-operated rotary
    furrow openers claimed in combination with planting or soil treating
    devices.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, appropriate subclasses, for
    analogous apparatus used for unearthing plants or buried objects.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, appropriate subclass for a means to
    drive or impact a tool, and particularly subclasses 184+ for such means
    mounted on a wheeled vehicle.  Class 172 has not been cleared as to
    conflicting subject matter with Class 173, therefor a disclosed use as a
    drive for an agricultural earth working tool will cause classification in
    Class 172.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, appropriate subclasses for
    analogous apparatus used for boring small diameter holes in the earth, for
    example, for artesian wells, oil wells, post holes, or the like.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, especially subclass 20 for motor vehicles with
    rollers, and subclasses 53.1+ for a motor vehicle in which the motor is
    used as a source of external power to drive an external device.  The line
    between Classes 172 and 180 as to this subject matter is that Class 172
    will take a patent in which (1) the external device is claimed as being an
    earth working implement or (2) the claim includes an external device and
    the sole specific disclosure relates to an earth working implement, or (3)
    the external device is claimed by name only and there is also claimed a
    means for manipulating the device relative to the motor vehicle in a manner
    consistent with the manner in which an earth working implement would be
    manipulated.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 29+
    for a hard material disintegrating machine having a driven cutter and
    particularly subclasses 36.1+ for such a machine described as working on a
    hard, solid floor or road surface.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 122+, for a
    rotating drum, roller, or tire means to compact the earth and drive means
    therefore.  See search notes thereunder for similar devices.


CLS 172/36
TXT Apparatus under subclass 35 in which plural earth working elements or parts
    thereof are located below the surface of the ground and are relatively
    moved by a power means in such fashion that they periodically engage each
    other and then separate in order to cut or pinch subsurface material or
    growths.


CLS 172/37
TXT Apparatus under subclass 35 in which an earth working element is mounted
    for motion in a circular path and is disclosed as being moved in said path
    by an attendant, in normal use, through an arc of over 360 degrees.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329+,   for implements which are supported, propelled, guided or held in
    position by an attendant but are not otherwise driven.


CLS 172/38
TXT Apparatus under subclass 35 in which a driven earth working element is
    secured to or carried by a supporting member movably mounted on a main
    vehicular frame, there being a means on said member or said earth working
    element adapted to engage a plant, tree, post, or like obstruction in the
    normal path of traverse of the driven earth working element over the ground
    to thereby shift or permit a shifting of the driven earth working element
    out of the path of traverse to clear the obstruction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5+,     for earth working apparatus in which the operation of the device is
    controlled automatically by sensing an obstruction or plant.

    23+,    for earth working apparatus which is controlled by a prepositioned
    stake, cable, etc.

    233+,   for nondriven implements with obstruction feelers for moving or
    releasing the implement to avoid the obstruction.


CLS 172/39
TXT Apparatus under subclass 35 in which the driven earth working element is
    mounted on a support which is provided with a means which is spaced from
    the original surface of the undisturbed ground and which means is disposed
    and adapted either (1) to remove earth from an element to be cleaned, or
    (2) to engage and chop up a slice of earth proceeding from the driven earth
    working element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for earth working means combined with driven means for shifting
    material lying on the surface of the earth without disturbing the soil, the
    driven means working on material which has not collected on the earth
    working means rather than on material which is on parts or portions of said
    earth working means.

    49,     for a plurality of driven rotary ground engaging tools which
    cooperate or intermesh one with the other.

    66,     for driven members which engage a nondriven earth working tool to
    clean the same or to comminute a furrow slice turned thereby, and 558+ and
    606 for nondriven cleaners for non drive tools.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 24 for unearthing
    devices with comminuting or multiple cutting of recovered plant.


CLS 172/40
TXT Apparatus under subclass 35 in which an earth working element, or a portion
    thereof, is driven so that it has a motion of small amplitude (i.e., it
    vibrates).

    (1)     Note.  Generally, the implement is driven by reaction forces
    produced by the rapid rotation of an off-center or unbalanced mass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61+,    for intermittent drives for tools.


CLS 172/41
TXT Apparatus under subclass 35 in which a power driven earth working element
    is adapted to be entirely supported and manipulated by an attendant.

    (1)     Note.  The power supplying means may be supported in any manner
    desired as on a vehicle, on the ground or carried by the operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for a tool which is continuously manually rotated by an attendant.

    370,    for nondriven tools with attendant attaching means.

    371+,   for hand held nondriven tools.


CLS 172/42
TXT Apparatus under subclass 35 in which a driven earth working element is
    mounted on a frame which element or frame is provided with a means to
    enable a walking attendant to steer, guide or otherwise manipulate the
    element or frame, such frame being propelled over the earth by the
    attendant, by the earth working element or by a traction member driven from
    a prime mover supported on the frame.

    (1)     Note.  This definition is intended to take those implements
    commonly referred to as "garden tillers", "rotary cultivators" and like
    devices which traverse the earth and are guided or manipulated as a unit by
    a walking attendant, there being disclosed a means, generally a handle, for
    affecting such guiding or manipulation. Devices which are coupled to a
    horse or tractor propelling means have been excluded and will be found in
    the subclasses hereinbelow based on the particular tool features or
    particular manipulative features of the driven tools.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21+,    for earth perforator tools of the lawn aerator type which may be
    hand guided by a walking attendant, such devices generally being self
    propelled over the earth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 16.7+, for a motor-driven lawn mower that is
    steered by a walking attendant.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 19.1+ for a motor vehicle steered by a
    walking attendant.


CLS 172/43
TXT Apparatus under subclass 42 comprising a frame, a driven tool supported by
    said frame and ground support means vertically adjustable relative to the
    frame.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of adjustable see "adjustable" in the class
    definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78      and 80, for other driven earth working elements combined with wheel
    substitutes.

    387+,   for nondriven earth working elements combined with wheel
    substitutes.


CLS 172/44
TXT Apparatus under subclass 35 in which a driven earth working element in the
    form of a narrow elongated shaft or bar is disposed transversely to the
    line of draft and is rotatably supported wholly below the surface of the
    earth.

    (1)     Note.  The usual purpose of the subsurface rotary shafts of this
    subclass is to stir up the soil usually to loosen weeds.

    (2)     Note.  The elongated rod may be articulated or provided with
    projecting elements such as teeth.

    (3)     Note.  The rod is generally rotatably supported at the lower end of
    "gooseneck" type standards and there may be a number of such standards some
    rotatably supporting the rod and others disposed forwardly of or to the
    rear of the rod and carrying at the lower ends thereof earth working teeth
    such as plows, chisels, etc.


CLS 172/45
TXT Apparatus under subclass 35 in which a tooth, tine or like earth working
    part is so freely pivotally mounted on a driven rotary carrier that during
    carrier rotation centrifugal forces cause the free end of said tooth, tine,
    or like to swing to a radial position relative to the axis of rotation of
    such carrier.

    (1)     Note.  This definition includes teeth or tines which are freely
    pivotally connected to a rotary carrier by means of a flexible chain.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91+,    for other teeth, tines or like earth working parts which are
    movably mounted on a driven carrier, the movement being caused (1) by a
    drive means or (2) by flexure of a resilient tooth, tine or like earth
    working part on encountering an overload or (3) by the turning of a rolling
    blade when the same contacts the ground.


CLS 172/46
TXT Apparatus under subclass 35 in which two or more earth working elements are
    journaled in a frame for movement in circular paths about a common axis of
    rotation, the drive means for such earth working elements being so arranged
    that said elements rotate in reverse directions relative to each other.


CLS 172/47
TXT With specific relationship of mast type hitch (i.e., three point hitch) to
    implement:

    Apparatus under subclass 35 in which the driven earth-working element is
    part of an implement associated with a three point hitch (mast-type hitch)
    wherein significance is attributed to the cooperation of the implement with
    the hitch, or the implement includes a mounting for an additional three
    point hitch at the rear thereof for connection to another implement.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 439, the definition and notes
    thereunder for a definition of a mast-type hitch.


CLS 172/48
TXT Plural driven tools:

    Apparatus under subclass 35 employing a plurality of separate earth working
    elements or groups of elements, each of which is driven so as to move with
    respect to one another during operation, and each of which is connected,
    through a linkage, to a drive means that drives the tool in a predetermined
    manner.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are patents wherein the tools are driven by
    a common driving element such as a drive chain or camshaft, and those
    wherein the tools are mounted on shafts connected to individual gears of a
    row of intermeshing gears.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84+,    for plural earth working elements which are alternately raised from
    and lowered into the ground in a "hoeing" or "spading" type movement.

    91+,    for an earth working implement comprising a carrier means such as a
    chain or wheel which forms the support for earth-engaging teeth and has an
    orbital movement while the teeth supported by it also move with respect to
    it.

    96+,    for a tool having multiple earth-engaging elements (e.g., elongated
    teeth) which are mounted on a single support and (a) are pivoted freely
    thereon, (b) have a spring connection thereto, or (c) consist of spring
    elements so that they are movable with respect to each other, but not in a
    predetermined manner.

    100,    for an earth working implement in which a plurality of teeth or
    like earth working parts or portions are mounted on a flexible or
    articulated member which is driven in a closed path or circuit relative to
    a frame upon which said teeth, parts, or portions and member are supported.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclass 52, and see the search notes
    therein for a single advance causing or controlling means or manipulating
    means for plural tool drives.


CLS 172/49
TXT Apparatus under subclass 48 in which separate earth working elements travel
    in circular paths in contact with the earth and in which (1) said paths
    intersect and overlap or (2) said earth working elements are disposed
    immediately adjacent each other to cooperate in treating the intermediate
    earth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for driven earth working elements which cooperate in the manner of
    shears or nippers under the surface of the earth.


CLS 172/49.5
TXT Rotating about vertical axes:

    Apparatus under subclass 49 in which the axes, about which the earth
    working elements travel, are disposed in a generally vertical direction.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes patents whose sole specific
    disclosure is to an implement in which the elements cooperate to work a
    continuous strip of soil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59,     for patents in which the tools, as disclosed, are laterally spaced
    so as to leave a strip of unworked soil between the tools.

    111,    for patents wherein a single tool, rotating about a vertical axis,
    is disclosed and claimed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    111,    Planting, subclass 160 for a power- driven earth working tool,
    rotatable about a vertical axis, which is claimed in combination with a
    planting machine.


CLS 172/50
TXT Apparatus under subclass 48 which include a plurality of driven earth
    working elements which are not identical.

    (1)     Note.  Differences in size or shape  constitute matter for this
    definition but mere differences in rotary displacement (phase), position or
    attitude are excluded and are classified in a pertinent subclass herebelow
    on the basis of the features of each individual earth working element.  For
    example, mirror images are not considered to be differences of shape.


CLS 172/51
TXT Apparatus under subclass 50 in which each of the diverse driven earth
    working elements moves through at least a complete turn in a circular path
    about an axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for similar arrangements wherein a rotary tool is driven by a
    diverse rolling tool.


CLS 172/52
TXT Apparatus under subclass 51 in which the axes of rotation of the diverse
    earth working elements are parallel to each other.


CLS 172/53
TXT Apparatus under subclass 50 in which at least one of the driven, diverse
    earth working elements is moved back and forth in a straight line path.


CLS 172/54
TXT Apparatus under subclass 50 in which at least one of the driven, diverse
    earth working elements is moved back and forth through an arcuate path.


CLS 172/54.5
TXT Tool reciprocates or oscillates within a generally horizontal plane:

    Apparatus under subclass 48 in which the earth working elements are moved
    back and forth either in a generally straight-line path, or in a generally
    arcuate path, or both, within a generally horizontal plane.


CLS 172/55
TXT Apparatus under subclass 48 in which the plural driven earth working
    elements consist of two or more groups of earth working elements, each
    group comprising a plurality of generally circular platelike members
    handled as a unit.


CLS 172/56
TXT Apparatus under subclass 48 in which the plural driven earth working
    elements are individually spaced both laterally and in the direction of
    draft or travel.


CLS 172/57
TXT Apparatus under subclass 48 in which the plural driven earth working
    elements individually spaced transversely of the direction of travel.


CLS 172/58
TXT Apparatus under subclass 57 in which the axes of cyclic movement of the
    spaced earth working elements are parallel to each other and to the
    direction of draft.


CLS 172/59
TXT Apparatus under subclass 57 in which the axes of cyclic movement of the
    spaced earth working elements are parallel to each other and are disposed
    perpendicular to the earth's surface.


CLS 172/60
TXT Apparatus under subclass 57 in which the axes of cyclic movement of the
    spaced earth working elements are coaxial or parallel to each other and are
    diposed perpendicular to the direction of draft.


CLS 172/61
TXT Apparatus under subclass 35 in which a power drive to an earth working
    element is periodically interrupted.

    (1)     Note.  Such intermittent drives generally employ mutilated or
    interrupted gears or cam operated drive clutches.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for subsurface shears or nippers which comprise earth working
    portions which are periodically brought into engagement one with the other
    and then separated in order to cut or pinch subsurface material or growth,
    the means for imparting such movement generally being a power drive which
    is periodically interrupted.

    40,     for a vibrating earth working element.

    90,     for an apparatus supported by an irregular or off center ground
    wheel or support which gives an intermittent motion to an earth working
    element.


CLS 172/62
TXT Apparatus under subclass 61 in which movement of the earth working element
    through the power drive portion of its cycle effects a loading of a
    resilient means which means then effects movement of the earth working
    element to its initial position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for subsurface shear or nipper-type tools wherein plural earth
    working elements or parts thereof are moved toward or away from each other
    by a positive drive means having a spring device as part thereof.


CLS 172/63
TXT Apparatus under subclass 35 which have a plurality of earth working
    elements, one of said elements being driven by a power driven means while
    another of said elements is not connected to said drive.

    (1)     Note.  The nondriven earth working element may be fixed relative to
    the driven element (such as a plow, harrow, drag, scraper or knife) or may
    be a rolling earth working element such as a disk or roller.

    (2)     Note.  The nondriven earth working element may be a ground
    contacting part or portion of a hood or shield for a driven earth working
    element provided such part or portion is specifically designed to work the
    earth; e.g., hoods with scraping, leveling, or smoothing blades or edges
    and hoods with depending crust breaking teeth are included under this
    definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for the combination of a nondriven plow with a power operated
    moldboard adapted to remove the furrow turned by the plow.

    80,     for driven earth working elements combined with wheel substitutes,
    i.e., runners or other ground contacting supporting means other than
    wheels, which perform no substantial earth working function.

    133+,   for a plurality of nondriven earth working elements which are
    different one from the other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 24 for unearthing
    devices with comminuting or multiple cutting of recovered plant.


CLS 172/64
TXT Apparatus under subclass 63 in which the nondriven earth working element is
    provided for forming a furrow or irrigation ditch and the driven earth
    working element is provided for disposing earth across said furrow or ditch
    to thereby block or interrupt the same in order to form therein a series of
    basins spaced from each other by interposed dams.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143,    for nondriven furrow openers followed by intermittently rolling
    ditch blockers.


CLS 172/65
TXT Apparatus under subclass 63 in which earth working portions of the non
    driven earth working elements intermesh or interdigitate with earth working
    portions of the driven earth working elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for a plurality of driven, rotary earth working elements which are
    disposed in intermeshing relation to each other.


CLS 172/66
TXT Apparatus under subclass 63 in which the driven earth working element is
    disposed in contact with or along side of and within the confines of a
    fixed or rolling earth working element in order, for example, to clean the
    latter or to treat a furrow slice passing between the two earth working
    elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for earth working means combined with driven means for shifting
    material lying on the surface of the earth without disturbing the soil, the
    driven means working on material which has not collected on the earth
    working means rather than on material which has already collected on parts
    or portions of said earth working means.

    39,     for cleaners or comminutors which are spaced above the original
    surface of the undisturbed ground and which cooperate with driven earth
    working elements.

    558     and 606, for devices or machines for scraping the soil from earth
    working elements.


CLS 172/67
TXT Apparatus under subclass 63 in which the nondriven earth working element is
    in the form of a surface adapted to pick up earth and guide it to a driven
    earth working element which pulverizes said earth.

    (1)     Note.  The guide surface may be in the form of a trough, grate,
    ramp, or tube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     (and see the Notes thereunder) for power driven conveyers which
    handle severed earth materials after they leave the earth working elements.


CLS 172/68
TXT Apparatus under subclass 63 in which the driven earth working element is
    associated with a nondriven earth working element which is freely journaled
    on a support in a manner to contact the ground and to be rotated by the
    resistance thereof as the latter element traverses a field.

    (1)     Note.  Said nondriven earth working element may be a disk, roller
    or toothed drum but a rolling member disclosed as a mere support is
    excluded.


CLS 172/69
TXT Apparatus under subclass 68 in which the driven earth working element is
    actuated by a power transmission means other than a mere rigid or
    articulated shaft which means is interposed between the driven earth
    working element and the rolling earth working element in such manner that
    in the disclosed use of the device the flow of power is always from the
    rolling earth working element to the driven earth working element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    520,    for rolling tools which are on different axes and in mutual driving
    relationship.


CLS 172/70
TXT Apparatus under subclass 63 in which the driven earth working element is
    disposed between a first forwardly positioned nondriven earth working
    element and a second rearwardly positioned nondriven earth working element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145+,   for three or more diverse tools following the same path, all of
    such tools being nondriven earth working tools.


CLS 172/71
TXT Apparatus under subclass 63 in which the nondriven earth working element
    follows the path of the driven earth working element.


CLS 172/72
TXT Apparatus under subclass 71 in which the nondriven earth working element
    comprises a ground-engaging forming member having a lower surface shape
    which is substantially flat or horizontal or which is upwardly concave to
    form a cross sectional configuration which is desired to be imparted to the
    disturbed earth behind the driven earth working element.


CLS 172/73
TXT Apparatus under subclass 63 in which the driven earth working element is
    positioned to engage the earth in an area laterally and longitudinally of
    the area in which a nondriven earth working element engages the earth.

    (1)     Note.  The driven earth working element generally works a plant row
    which row is undisturbed in the sense of not being broken, pulverized,
    tilled, or the like, however, the nondriven earth working element or
    elements may hill earth onto or scrape earth from the plant row before the
    driven earth working element engages the same.


CLS 172/74
TXT Apparatus under subclass 35 in which the means for transmitting power from
    a power source to the driven earth working element is provided with a power
    take-off for adjusting the position of the earth working element relative
    to the earth.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "adjustable" see the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315+,   317+, 321, 322+, 324+, 395+, 439+, and especially 452+, for power
    driven means to shift an implement which is otherwise undriven in order to
    lift it or move it for adjustment purposes.


CLS 172/75
TXT Apparatus under subclass 35 in which a means is provided to interrupt a
    power drive to a driven earth working element simultaneously with a bodily
    movement of the element to a different vertical position with respect to
    the ground.

    (1)     Note.  The usual purpose of these devices is to stop or arrest the
    cyclic motion of the earth working element when it is lifted to an
    inoperative position out of contact with the earth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83,     for devices in which the power drive to an earth working element is
    interrupted by shifting of said element back or forth along the line of
    travel of the device.

    103,    for overload relief or clutch means for interrupting the drive to a
    driven earth working element upon engagement of such element with an
    obstruction or as desired by an attendant.


CLS 172/76
TXT Apparatus under subclass 35 in which a driven implement is connected to a
    vehicle for vertical movement with respect thereto and is provided with a
    ground-contacting supporting member which member moves over the earth's
    surface and imparts to said implement a vertical movement corresponding to
    the contour of the earth's surface to thereby maintain the earth working
    element of the driven implement at a predetermined working depth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for driven earth working elements which are freely or yieldably
    mounted on supporting frames whereby they may move vertically or laterally
    relative to said frames, there being provided no ground supports other than
    the support afforded by ground contact of the elements themselves.


CLS 172/77
TXT Apparatus under subclass 76 in which the driven implement is provided with
    a resilient means for normally biasing said implement in a vertical plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for driven tools which are provided with a resilient means for
    yieldably biasing the same on a chassis.

    497,    for nondriven tools which are spring biased in a vertical plane and
    which are provided with ground support means.


CLS 172/78
TXT Apparatus under subclass 76 in which the ground contacting supporting
    member is adapted to be vertically adjustably connected to the driven
    implement whereby the normal working depth of the earth working element may
    be altered by moving said ground-contacting supporting members from one
    vertical position to another.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition for the meaning of "adjustable".


CLS 172/79
TXT Apparatus under subclass 76 in which the earth working element of the
    driven implement is drivingly connected by a transmission means to a power
    source on the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  The power source of this definition may be a self-contained
    prime mover for propelling the vehicle or an auxiliary self-contained power
    means; for example, an auxiliary gasoline or Diesel engine, an electric
    motor, etc.  The power source does not include a mere power take-off from a
    driven or rolling ground wheel of the propelling vehicle.  For such devices
    see subclasses 76 and 105+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    for drive details in the transmission means from a power source on
    a vehicle to a driven earth working element carried thereby.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 45 for a tractor
    powered trailing unearthing unit.


CLS 172/80
TXT Apparatus under subclass 35 comprising a runner or other ground contacting
    supporting means other than a wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42+,    for driven earth working elements which are mounted on a frame, the
    frame being provided with (1) a ground support means and (2) a means for
    guiding the same over the earth by a walking attendant.

    76,     for driven implements with ground supports and articulated
    connections to vehicles.

    240+,   for ground supports for nondriven earth working tools, which
    supports only engage the ground while transporting said tools.

    387+,   for wheel substitutes which are combined with nondriven earth
    working elements.


CLS 172/81
TXT Apparatus under subclass 35 in which (1) means are provided to move the
    above ground portions of plants and to direct them either towards or away
    from a driven earth working element in order to assure that they are
    destroyed or preserved, respectively, or (2) means are provided for
    protecting the plant against earth moved by the earth working element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     for earth working elements combined with means for shifting
    material, such as trash, dead plants, reclining stalks, etc., lying on the
    surface of the soil without disturbing such soil.

    517,    for plant deflectors, per se.


CLS 172/82
TXT Apparatus under subclass 35 in which a driven earth working element which
    normally travels in a given path or orbit with respect to a frame which
    supports said element is shiftable at the will of the operator back or
    forth in the direction in which the frame is moved across the ground to
    correspondingly shift the path or orbit.

    (1)     Note.  The usual purpose of such shifting is to contact or to avoid
    contact with certain plants in a row while "chopping" out excess plants.

    (2)     Note.  The shifting motion must be a rectilinear one substantially
    exactly in or parallel to the line of travel to come under this definition.


CLS 172/83
TXT Apparatus under subclass 82 in which the back or forth shifting movement of
    the earth working element is operative to effect a disengagement or
    declutching of the drive means to said earth working element to thereby
    arrest the cyclic motion of the element while in said back or forth
    position.

    (1)     Note.  The usual purpose of these devices is to stop the cyclic
    motion of the tool when it has been shifted to a fore or after position to
    avoid chopping out or otherwise injuring a plant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for driven earth working elements which are mounted for vertical
    shifting on a frame, the vertical shifting causing an interruption of the
    drive to the elements.


CLS 172/84
TXT Apparatus under subclass 35 in which the earth working element comprises at
    least one tooth which has an earth-engaging portion and an elongated shank
    portion said earth-engaging portion having an oscillating motion about a
    point and the point itself having a component of motion generally parallel
    to or coinciding with the longitudinal axis of the shank in addition to the
    motion imparted to it by the traverse of the apparatus over the ground
    whereby the motion of the earth-engaging portion may be analyzed as a
    reciprocation in directions generally longitudinally of the shank and also
    an oscillation in directions generally transversely of the shank.

    (1)     Note.  The earth-engaging portion is usually either perpendicular
    to the shank to provide a hoeing action or else aligned with the shank to
    provide a spading motion.

    (2)     Note.  An earth working element comprising a carrier means such as
    a chain or wheel, for example, which carrier forms the support for
    earth-engaging teeth and has an orbital movement while the teeth supported
    by it also move with respect to it is not included.  See subclasses 91+ for
    such devices.

    (3)     Note.  An earth working element comprising a driven wheel or like
    carrier means having movably mounted on the periphery thereof a blade or
    like earth working portion, there being provided a means to swing such
    blade or portion back and forth through an arc the center of which arc
    moves through a circular path concentric with the circular path of the
    driven carrier is not included.  See subclass 94 for such elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 99 for a digger
    supported and guided for motion in a rectilinear or curvilinear path.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 8.1+ for a motor vehicle having
    reciprocating or oscillating leg propulsion means.


CLS 172/85
TXT Apparatus under subclass 84 in which the driven earth working element is
    driven in an endless path or orbit which lies in a plane which is generally
    vertical and disposed perpendicularly to the direction of travel of a frame
    on which the earth working element is mounted.

    (1)     Note.  The patents in this and the indented subclasses are
    generally directed to devices which hoe transversely across a row of plants
    to chop out certain of the plants.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70      and 73, for transverse choppers combined with nondriven earth
    working elements.


CLS 172/86
TXT Apparatus under subclass 85 in which the elongated shank portion is driven
    by plural cranks or eccentric pins or cams which engage the earth working
    element at points which are spaced along said shank portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for other earth working elements having elongated shank portions
    driven by plural spaced cranks or eccentric pins or cams.


CLS 172/87
TXT Apparatus under subclass 85 in which means are provided to vary the shape
    or contour of the path or orbit through which the earth working element is
    driven.

    (1)     Note.  A mere incidental change in the shape or contour of the path
    or orbit of the element due to the raising or lowering of the same to vary
    the working depth thereof or to raise the same for transport is not
    included herein.  The claim must set forth means for varying the shape or
    contour of the path, which means is independent of the raising and lowering
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89,     for other earth working elements having elongated shank portions
    which are provided with means for varying the shape or contour of the path
    or orbit through which said earth working elements are driven.


CLS 172/88
TXT Apparatus under subclass 84 in which the elongated shank portion is driven
    by plural cranks or eccentric pins or cams which engage the earth working
    element at points which are spaced along said shank portion.


CLS 172/89
TXT Apparatus under subclass 84 in which means are provided to vary the shape
    or contour of the path or orbit through which the earth working element is
    driven.

    (1)     Note.  A mere incidental change in the shape or contour of the path
    or orbit of the element due to the raising or lowering of the same to vary
    the working depth thereof or to raise the same for transport is not
    included herein.  The claim must set forth means for varying the shape or
    contour of the path, which means is independent of the raising and lowering
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87,     for transverse chopper-type earth working elements which are
    provided with means for varying the shape or contour of the path or orbit
    through which the earth working elements are driven.


CLS 172/90
TXT Apparatus under subclass 35 in which an earth working element which is
    supported on a frame is moved towards and away from the earth by a lifting
    member which is rotatably or pivotally supported on an axis on said frame
    and has circumferential portions which extend radially to varying distances
    from said axis in such fashion that said lifting member engages the earth
    and periodically lifts the frame and the earth working element.

    (1)     Note.  The frame may be a vehicle chassis, all or part of which is
    lifted to move the earth working element.

    (2)     Note.  The lifting member may roll on the earth or may be driven
    with respect to the frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236+,   for irregular ground-engaging wheels or levers which engage the
    earth to resist motion of the apparatus thereover, whereby upon a
    predetermined resistance relative motion between the wheels or levers and
    the apparatus causes a manipulation of the apparatus or a part thereof, the
    lever or wheel passing through only a portion of a cycle i.e., passing
    through a cycle of less than 360o.


CLS 172/91
TXT Apparatus under subclass 35 in which a tooth or like earth working part or
    portion is movably supported on a carrier which carrier is driven in a
    definite closed path or orbit whereby said tooth, part or portion moves
    with respect to said carrier as said carrier moves through its path or
    orbit.

    (1)     Note.  A vehicle upon which the tooth or like earth working part or
    portion is mounted would not be a "carrier" for this subclass even if it
    were steered to travel in a closed circular path.

    (2)     Note.  A tooth or like earth working part or portion which can be
    moved from one position of adjustment to another on its carrier is not
    considered "movably mounted" for this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109,    for a tooth or like earth working part or portion which can be
    moved from one position of adjustment to another on a rotary driven carrier.

    541,    for rolling carriers having movably mounted thereon teeth or like
    earth working parts or portions which can be moved with respect to the
    rolling carrier from an earth working position to a position in which the
    teeth are prevented from engaging the ground.

    545,    for rolling carriers having projections on the periphery thereof
    which projections move relative to he carriers as said carriers rotate.

    550,    for a tooth or like earth working part or portion which can be
    selectively moved from one position of adjustment to another on a rolling
    carrier means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 89+ for an earth boring
    device including a tool element on a continuously driven flexible or
    articulated endless member.


CLS 172/92
TXT Apparatus under subclass 91 in which a means is provided for positively
    causing the movement of the tooth or like earth working part or portion
    relative to the carrier as said carrier moves through its path or orbit.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes those earth working elements having
    earth working parts or portions which rotate or move in orbital paths
    relative to the cyclically driven carriers on which said parts or portions
    are mounted.

    (2)     Note.  A mere spring connection between the blade and carrier for
    causing movement is not included in this definition.  See subclass 96 for
    such apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48+,    for a carrier which is itself a separate earth working element.

    546,    for rolling carriers having earth working teeth, parts, or
    projections on the periphery thereof, there being provided a means to cause
    movement of said teeth, parts, or projections relative to the rolling
    carriers.


CLS 172/93
TXT Apparatus under subclass 92 in which the tooth or like earth working part
    or portion is driven in such a fashion that it reciprocates in a straight
    line path with respect to the driven carrier upon which it is mounted.


CLS 172/94
TXT Apparatus under subclass 92 in which the tooth or like earth working part
    or portion is mounted on a rotating carrier, there being provided a means
    for moving said tooth, part, or portion back and forth in an arcuate path
    relative to said carrier.


CLS 172/95
TXT Apparatus under subclass 92 in which the tooth or like earth working part
    or portion is driven with respect to the driven carrier by a cam or crank.

    (1)     Note.  The cam or crank is usually but not necessarily actuated in
    response to motion of the carrier.


CLS 172/96
TXT Apparatus under subclass 91 in which the tooth or like earth working part
    or portion is supported on the driven carrier by means which include a
    member which bends or distorts to allow said tooth or like earth working
    part or portion to move relative to said carrier.

    (1)     Note.  The support may comprise a freely bendable connection or a
    resilient means adapted to bias the tooth or like earth working part or
    portion to a given position and which means may be employed either with or
    in lieu of a hinge connection between the carrier and said tooth, part, or
    portion.

    (2)     Note.  The support may be a mere continuation of a spring formed or
    flexible blade or blade shank.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for "flail type" tools wherein a tooth or like earth working part
    or portion is so pivotally mounted on a driven rotary carrier that during
    rotation of said carrier centrifugal forces cause the free end of said
    tooth or like earth working part or portion to swing to a radial position
    relative to the axis of rotation of said carrier.

    261+,   for nondriven earth working elements provided with means permitting
    the elements to shift with respect to the earth or a supporting frame when
    said elements encounter an overload.

    543,    for rolling nondriven tools having the teeth or like earth working
    parts or portions thereof formed of resilient material.

    544+,   for rolling nondriven tools in which the teeth or like earth
    working parts or portion thereof are mounted on a spring or are so related
    to a spring that relative movement between such teeth, parts or portions
    and the rolling supporting structure stresses the spring.


CLS 172/97
TXT Apparatus under subclass 35 in which the earth working element or an
    earth-engaging portion thereof has different, distinct kinds of motions
    (such as reciprocating and rotating) with respect to the earth, these
    motions either occurring simultaneously or successively during the cyclical
    operation of the earth working element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91+,    for blades or teeth which are movably mounted on carriers which are
    also movably mounted so that said blades or teeth travel in paths
    determined by the superposed motions caused by the respective movable
    mountings.

    101,    for earth working elements which move in a guide means only in a
    reciprocating path.


CLS 172/98
TXT Apparatus under subclass 35 in which a movably supported earth working
    element which is driven in a given path or orbit is provided with an
    actuating or manipulating means whereby during operation said element may
    be shifted at the will of an operator to positions in which said path or
    orbit is spaced from its initial position transversely of the line of
    travel of the element across the ground.

    (1)     Note.  The usual purpose of the lateral shifting is to follow a
    crooked row of plants or to chop or avoid cutting out certain plants in a
    row.

    (2)     Note.  The lateral shifting means may be a handle or foot lever
    type attendant operated actuating means which may be selectively moved from
    one latched position to another, or a handle or foot lever type attendant
    operated manipulating means which may be moved from one position and held
    in the position to which it is moved by continued application of force on
    the manipulating means by the attendant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for driven earth working elements which are mounted for free or
    yielding movement laterally of the path of travel, there being provided no
    attendant operated actuating or manipulating means for effecting such
    movement.

    332+,   for nondriven tools which are manipulated by an attendant to vary
    their position relative to a supporting frame.


CLS 172/99
TXT Apparatus under subclass 98 in which the earth working element is swingable
    on a fixed radius about a fixed vertical axis in a generally horizontal
    plane transversely across the line of travel of said element.


CLS 172/100
TXT Apparatus under subclass 35 in which a tooth or like earth working part or
    portion is mounted on a flexible or articulated member which is driven in a
    closed path or circuit relative to a frame upon which said tooth, part, or
    portion and member are supported.

    (1)     Note.  The flexible or articulated member is generally a chain or
    endless belt type carrier to which the tooth, part, or portion is immovably
    fixed while said tooth, part, or portion is actually in ground engagement,
    but said tooth, part, or portion may move slightly as said carrier moves
    around gears, pulleys, or otherwise changes its direction in its closed
    path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for earth working elements towed across a field from a fixed
    traction point by a flexible member.

    91+,    for blades which are movably mounted on belts or chains.

    542,    for rolling, rotating, or orbitally moving nondriven endless belts
    or chains having teeth or blades thereon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 94 for unearthing
    unit carried by an endless flexible member.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 89+ for an earth boring
    device including a tool element on a continuously driven flexible or
    articulated endless member.

    305,    Wheel Substitutes for Land Vehicles, subclass 187+ for an endless
    flexible track for a land vehicle, said track having detachable cleats for
    penetrating the ground to secure better traction for the track.


CLS 172/101
TXT Apparatus under subclass 35 in which a guide means is provided for
    constraining an earth working element to move back and forth in a straight
    line path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20      and 22, for vertically reciprocating sod cutters.

    21,     for vertically reciprocating turf perforators which pierce the soil
    to aerate the same.

    61+,    for tools which are guided for rectilinear reciprocation but which
    are intermittently driven through their cycle of operation.


CLS 172/102
TXT Apparatus under subclass 101 in which the guide means limits the movement
    of the earth working elements to a path transverse to the direction of
    draft and lying in a horizontal plane.


CLS 172/103
TXT Apparatus under subclass 35 in which the drive transmission means between a
    driven earth working element and its motivating means is provided with a
    power transmitting member which (1) slips, bends, breaks, distorts, or in
    some other manner allows a relative displacement between said earth working
    element and its motivating means, or (2) can be selectively moved from one
    position in which the drive transmission means is interrupted between the
    driven earth working element and its motivating means to another position
    in which said drive transmission means is again operative to transmit power
    directly from the motivating means to the driven earth working element.

    (1)     Note.  Generally the function of the overload relief means is to
    protect the earth working element whenever it encounters an obstruction,
    while the clutch functions to interrupt the power drive to the earth
    working element whenever desirable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for driven earth working elements which are provided with means to
    interrupt the power drive to said element upon a bodily shifting of the
    same from one vertical position to another.

    83,     for driven earth working elements which are provided with means to
    interrupt the power drive to said element upon a bodily shifting of the
    same back or forth in the direction of draft.

    96,     for teeth or like earth working parts or portions which are
    yieldably mounted on a power driven cyclic carrier for motion with respect
    thereto upon contact by a resisting member.

    117,    for means to yieldably support an earth working element which means
    may permit the earth working element to rise up out of contact with an
    obstruction.

    533,    for a clutch between a shaft and a rolling, rotating, or orbitally
    moving nondriven tool mounted thereon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 9 for unearthing
    devices with drive overload release.


CLS 172/104
TXT Apparatus under subclass 103 in which an overrunning clutch or its
    equivalent is interposed between a ground wheel and an earth working
    element driven thereby in such a manner that the wheel may drive the earth
    working element when said wheel is turning in one direction but not in the
    other.


CLS 172/105
TXT Apparatus under subclass 35 in which a driven earth working element is
    mounted in a frame which is provided with a claimed ground- engaging
    supporting wheel and details of a power transmitting means from the wheel
    to the earth working element are set out in the claims.

    (1)     Note.  Mere mention of a transmission between the wheel and the
    earth working element or a broad statement of the type of transmission
    (e.g., gearing) have not been considered  to involve detailed structure
    which would require classification under this definition since traction
    drives of this type are very common in the art.

    (2)     Note.  The wheel may itself be driven by power applied to it or may
    be a freely rolling wheel.  In the case of a driven wheel the wheel must be
    interposed in the path of power from the source to the earth working
    element to come under this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for "rod weeder" type implements which may be positively driven
    from a ground wheel on the weeder supporting frame.

    61+,    for earth working elements which may be intermittently driven from
    a rolling or driven ground wheel, such intermittent drive generally being
    from several pins or other projections which are spaced about the periphery
    of the wheel or from mutilated gears or cam operated drive clutches which
    are operatively associated with the wheel.

    69,     and the Note thereunder for earth working elements which are driven
    by nondriven earth working elements as the latter roll over the ground.

    103+,   for earth working elements which may be driven from a rolling or
    driven ground wheel and which include in the drive transmission from such
    wheel an overload relief or clutch means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 108 for traction
    wheel drive for an unearthing unit part.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 337+ for transmission mechanisms for
    driven ground wheels.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 439+ for a wheel operated
    motion or draft responsive load handler.


CLS 172/106
TXT Apparatus under subclass 105 in which the drive interposed between the
    earth working element and a wheel includes an endless flexible force
    transmitting member.


CLS 172/107
TXT Apparatus under subclass 35 in which an earth working element is driven
    about an axis which is parallel to the ground and is additionally located
    in a plane which is generally parallel to the direction of travel of the
    earth working element over the ground.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes those earth working elements which
    oscillate about a longitudinal axis generally back and forth across a crop
    row, for example, for thinning out or chopping cotton plants.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5+,     for "cotton chopper" type tools which may be driven to oscillate or
    rotate about a horizontal longitudinal axis and in which the operation of
    said tool is further under the control of a sensing means.

    58,     for a plurality of laterally spaced tools each driven about a
    longitudinal axis.

    63+,    especially subclasses 70 and 73 for driven tools which may move
    about a longitudinal axis and which in addition, are combined with one or
    more non-driven tools.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 97 for a rotary
    digger driven about a horizontal longitudinal axis.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 39.1+
    for a floor working hard material disintegrating machine having a driven
    rotary cutter.


CLS 172/108
TXT Apparatus under subclass 107 in which the driven earth working element
    rotates about an axis.


CLS 172/109
TXT Apparatus under subclass 108 in which the rotary earth working element
    includes a tooth or like earth working part or portion whose relative
    position on the hub or supporting portion of said element may be adjusted.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of  "adjustable", see the class definition.

    (2)     Note.  This definition is intended to embrace those rotary earth
    working elements in which a tooth or like earth working part or portion
    thereof may be changed from one position of adjustment to another, such
    tooth, part, or portion being locked in each selected position of
    adjustment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     for earth working elements wherein the tooth or like earth working
    parts or portions thereof are flexibly or yieldably moved from one position
    to another on the supporting hub or carrier of said elements.

    550,    for rolling earth working elements having peripherally spaced
    thereon and adjustably secured thereto a plurality of teeth, blades, or the
    like earth working parts or portions.


CLS 172/110
TXT Apparatus under subclass 35 in which an earth working element is driven
    about an axis which is generally perpendicularly disposed relative to the
    ground.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes those earth working elements which
    oscillate about a vertical axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48+,    especially subclass 59, for a plurality of tools each of which is
    provided with a separate individual drive means for causing the same to
    move about a vertical axis.

    522+,   for nondriven tools of the rolling, rotating, or orbitally moving
    type which move about a vertical axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclass 41.1
    for a floor working hard material disintegrating machine driving a
    substantially vertical axis cutter.


CLS 172/111
TXT Apparatus under subclass 110 in which an earth working element is rotatably
    driven about a vertical axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    111,    Planting, subclass 160 for a power driven earth working tool,
    rotatable about a vertical axis, which is claimed in combination with a
    planting machine.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 170+ for a drive for an
    earth boring tool, and including a drive for a vertical axis rotary-type
    earth boring tool which may be manipulatively mounted on a wheeled vehicle.


CLS 172/112
TXT Apparatus under subclass 35 in which the driven earth working element is
    provided with a guard or baffle means disposed in the path of material
    thrown from said element generally to intercept said material and alter the
    course or path of flow thereof to thereby cause said material to be
    deposited in a position or location other than that which said material
    would have assumed without said baffle means.

    (1)     Note. This definition includes hoods or like housings or enclosures
    against the inner surfaces of which unearthed material from a driven earth
    working element is impinged to break up clods or lumps of said material.

    (2)     Note.  This definition is intended to take those patents in which
    the shield or deflector is disposed on or above the original ground surface
    and performs no earth working function except that incidental to shielding
    or deflecting the driven earth working element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for screens and the like, placed in the path along which unearthed
    material emerges from an earth working element to separate constituent
    portions of said material.

    63+,    for nondriven tools combined with driven earth working elements
    which tools may be in the form of hoods or shields provided with ground
    contacting parts or portions designed to perform an earth working function
    such, for example, as leveling or further pulverizing the earth proceeding
    from the driven implement, or breaking or scratching the earth's crust
    prior to working thereof by said driven earth working elements.

    72,     for leveling drags or plates which follow the driven earth working
    element and level or shape the soil redeposited on the earth by said
    element.

    508+,   for guards or shields for nondriven earth working elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 112 for an unearthing
    unit provided with a protective guard or casing.


CLS 172/113
TXT Apparatus under subclass 112 in which the baffle or guard means acts on the
    material flowing from the driven earth working element to deflect said
    material laterally of the direction of draft of said element.


CLS 172/114
TXT Apparatus under subclass 35 comprising a motor or motor actuated means for
    traversing a driven earth working element over the ground.

    (1)     Note.  Self-propelled or tractor-propelled implements are common in
    this art.  Hence for a patent to be classified under this definition, the
    propulsion means must be recited in some detail, and the mere recitation of
    a motor is not enough.  However, a broad reference to a wheel substitute
    such as a tracklaying means on a tractor is sufficient.  Also a recitation
    of a relationship with a propulsion means such as the statement that an
    implement hitch arm is connected to a differential housing (as distinct
    from merely a "rear axle housing") is enough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    for self-propelled or tractor-propelled devices wherein the earth
    working element is driven from a rolling or a driven ground wheel of said
    device.

    292,    for specific propulsion means for non-driven earth working
    elements, and see the Search Class Notes thereunder for appropriate fields
    of search in Class 74, Machine Element or Mechanism, Class 180, Motor
    Vehicles, and Class 305, Wheel Substitutes for Land Vehicles.

    352,    for manually driven stepper-type propulsion means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, appropriate subclasses for specific propelling
    means for motor vehicles.


CLS 172/115
TXT Apparatus under subclass 114 in which the driven earth working element is
    used to steer the apparatus in the desired direction as it traverses the
    ground.


CLS 172/116
TXT Apparatus under subclass 114 in which (1) the sole means disclosed for
    traversing the apparatus over the ground is the driven earth working
    element and the apparatus is not disclosed as being guided by a walking
    attendant or (2) the driven earth working element aids in traversing the
    apparatus over the ground or is the sole means for traversing the apparatus
    over the ground and there is a significant recitation in a claim indicating
    this fact.


CLS 172/117
TXT Apparatus under subclass 35 in which the driven earth working element is so
    mounted on a supporting frame that during normal operation said earth
    working element can (1) move freely relative to said frame, or (2) can move
    against the action of a biasing member which generally urges said earth
    working element into a predetermined position.

    (1)     Note.  This definition includes lateral as well as vertical
    movement, and the tool need not be capable of universal movement but such
    tool may move in a guide way or the like even though the amplitude of the
    movement may be limited by stop means.

    (2)     Note.  The movement of the tool relative to the frame as
    contemplated by this definition is a shifting or movement of the tool from
    one position to another in the frame, which movement is above and beyond
    the motion of the tool as it is driven through its path or orbit.  Such
    shifting or movement may be either a translation of the tool as a unit or
    simply a pivotal movement of the tool about a fixed axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for a driven implement having a ground support and being jointedly
    connected to a vehicle there being additionally provided a resilient means
    for normally biasing the implement in a vertical plane.

    96,     for teeth or like earth working parts or portions which are
    yieldably mounted on a power driven carrier for motion with respect thereto.

    98+,    for earth working elements which are provided with a means whereby
    an attendant can selectively vary the lateral position of said elements
    during normal operation.

    497+,   for an actuator adapted to lift a nondriven tool for transport on a
    wheeled vehicle, there being provided a resilient means for biasing the
    tool to a predetermined position but permitting the same to yield on
    overload or the like.

    501+,   for an actuator adapted to lift a nondriven tool for transport on a
    wheeled frame, there being provided a lost motion connection between the
    actuator and tool whereby during earth working said tool is free to move
    relative to said actuator or frame.


CLS 172/118
TXT Apparatus under subclass 35 in which an earth working element is driven
    about an axis which is parallel to the ground or disposed at an angle
    relative to the ground and is additionally located in a plane which is
    transverse to the direction of travel of the earth working element.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes those earth working elements which
    are driven to and fro in an arcuate path about an axis extending
    transversely to the direction of draft; e.g., oscillating hoes and choppers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61+,    for earth working elements which are intermittently driven back and
    forth in an oscillatory path about an axis that is disposed transversely to
    the direction.

    124,    for earth working elements which are disposed at an angle other
    than 90o to the direction of draft as viewed in plan.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 98 for a rotary
    digger driven about a longitudinal transverse axis.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 25+
    for an ice working device having a driven cutter, and subclasses 39.1+ for
    a floor working hard material disintegrating machine having a rotary cutter.


CLS 172/119
TXT Apparatus under subclass 118 in which an earth working element which is
    driven about an axis transverse to the direction of travel is provided
    either with (1) a radially protruding ridge or sharpened plate or (2) a row
    of radially projecting prongs, which ridge, plate or row lies along a line
    which exends both longitudinally and circumferentially of a surface of
    revolution, such as a cylinder or cone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    532,    for nondriven earth working elements which are provided with screw
    or spiral arranged teeth, or like earth working parts or portions.


CLS 172/120
TXT Apparatus under subclass 118 in which an earth working element which is
    driven about an axis extending transversely to the direction of travel is
    in the form of a generally circular member which may be either flat or
    dished.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for plural groups of driven disks.

    518+,   for rolling, rotating, or orbitally moving disc or planar
    cutter-type tools.


CLS 172/121
TXT Apparatus under subclass 118 in which the driven earth working element
    includes a laterally extending bar or earth working part or portion held on
    a rotatable support by openwork or by spaced supporting means.

    (1)     Note.  The overall appearance of these earth working elements is
    very similar to that of a conventional lawn mower.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    552,    for nondriven earth working elements having laterally extending
    blades on skeleton supports.


CLS 172/122
TXT Apparatus under subclass 118 which comprises a relatively large diameter
    drum or roller-like member having spaced about the periphery thereof a
    plurality of teeth, blades, or like earth working parts or portions.

    (1)     Note.  The peripheral surface of the drum should be in ground
    contact as distinguished from a small diameter supporting shaft for teeth,
    blades, cutters, or like earth working portions, which shaft would be
    spaced above the ground.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    554,    for rolling nondriven tools comprising drums having axially spaced
    teeth or blades thereon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, subclasses 30+ for a roll, per se, not elsewhere
    provided for, having surface projections, indentations or slits.


CLS 172/123
TXT Apparatus under subclass 118 in which the earth working element is
    rotatably driven about an axis extending transversely to the direction of
    travel.


CLS 172/124
TXT Apparatus under subclass 35 in which the driven earth working element is
    driven about an axis which as viewed in plan is disposed at an angle other
    than 90o to the direction of draft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118,    for earth working elements which are driven about axes which are
    disposed at 90o to the direction of draft.


CLS 172/125
TXT Apparatus under subclass 35 in which a mechanical drive feature is
    significantly claimed, such as a gearing, universal coupling, bearing,
    lubrication means or details of a drive motor.

    (1)     Note.  For classification under this definition a patent must have
    a claim which contains some detailed description of a particular mechanical
    drive feature.  Thus, the mere nominal inclusion of "a gear", "a universal
    coupling", "a bearing", etc., will not suffice, while a more specific
    identification of the drive feature such as "a worm gear", "a double clevis
    type universal coupling", "a floating roller bearing", etc., will suffice.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for a clutch or overload release coupling interposed between an
    earth working element and a driving means therefor.

    105,    for mechanical drive features forming part of a specialized drive
    interposed between an earth working element and a traction and supporting
    wheel driving the same.

    533,    for a clutch interposed between a shaft and a rolling nondriven
    earth working element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 142 for details of a
    drive for a driven unearthing device.


CLS 172/126
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising an earth working device in
    combination with means for making a mark or on the earth, which mark is to
    be used as a sight line for the earth working means on a subsequent pass
    over the field.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is intended to include marking devices
    disclosed as mounted on some earth working means (e.g., a planter) even if
    the earth working means is claimed only as a support.  However, devices for
    making a mark in the earth disclosed as independent instrumentalities not
    mounted on some principal earth working means are treated as if they
    themselves were earth working devices (which they are since they mark the
    earth) and are classified in appropriate subclasses below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133+,   for diverse earth working elements.

    204+,   for earth working elements alternating for right or left hand
    operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 18.1+ for scribers of general
    utility comprising mechanically guided relatively traveling means for
    scratching or scoring lines.

    104,    Railways, subclass 244.1 for furrow followers for guiding a vehicle
    along the furrow.

    111,    Planting, subclasses 25+ for means, combined with or disclosed in
    combination with a planter, for intermittently marking the earth to
    indicate seed depositories and subclass 33 for means for intermittently
    impressing on the ground a mark, or combinations of such means with means
    for marking an unbroken line on a field.  A planter claimed by name only,
    combined with a marker is classifiable in Class 172.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 6 for unearthing
    device with an earth marker.


CLS 172/127
TXT Apparatus under subclass 126 wherein the marker means is designed to make a
    mark to one side of the earth working device while the apparatus proceeds
    in one direction, and to shift to mark at the other side of the implement
    in response to the turning of the apparatus.


CLS 172/128
TXT Apparatus under subclass 126 comprising means for raising the earth working
    device to a transport position and means interconnected therewith to shift
    the earth marking means with respect to the earth working device responsive
    to the raising movement of the earth working device.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include those devices in which the
    earth working device and marker are raised as a unit without relative
    movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209+,   for apparatus comprising tools alternating for right or left hand
    operation, lifting of the apparatus being interrelated with shifting of the
    tools.


CLS 172/129
TXT Apparatus under subclass 126 in which the earth working device includes
    ground-engaging wheels and the marker means is moved relative to the earth
    working device by power derived from rotation of the wheels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    492     and 493, for actuators adapted to lift a tool for transport wherein
    power for said actuators is derived from a continuous source of power.


CLS 172/130
TXT Apparatus under subclass 126 wherein plural markers are provided and
    interconnected such that when one marker is adjusted to operative position,
    the other marker is simultaneously moved to inoperative position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for interconnected markers shiftable on turning.

    128,    for interconnected markers shiftable on lifting the earth working
    device.

    204+,   for apparatus comprising earth working tools alternating for right
    or left hand operation.


CLS 172/131
TXT Apparatus under subclass 130 in which the markers are mounted at opposite
    ends of a common carrying member, the carrying member being movable
    laterally to place the markers into alternate operative and inoperative
    positions.

    (1)     Note.  The lateral shifting is more than a mere pivoting movement.
    The common carrying member is usually moved bodily in a lateral direction
    and also pivoted on a longitudinal axis.


CLS 172/132
TXT Apparatus under subclass 126 having marker means mounted to pivot through
    approximately 180o about an axis which extends in the direction of travel
    of the implement and centrally thereof so as to be alternately usable on
    opposite sides of the implements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224+,   for implements alternating for right or left hand operation which
    are rotated about a longitudinal axis from one operative position to the
    other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 244.1 for furrow followers for a vehicle to
    guide it along a furrow, such followers being mounted in a manner similar
    to that of a marker mounting.


CLS 172/133
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising the combination of earth
    working elements of different size or shape each working the earth at the
    same time or adjustable into earth working position.

    (1)     Note.  The diverse earth working elements must each be present in
    the apparatus at the same time, though one may be removable leaving another.

    (2)     Note.  The diverse earth working elements must be distinct entities
    as distinguished from a single unit having portions of different shape to
    perform different functions.  For such unitary elements see for example,
    subclasses 540+.  A single disk is considered a unit.  Where one tool or
    soil working element (e.g., sweep) is directly mounted upon another tool or
    soil contacting element (e.g., cultivator shovel) or on a common support or
    frame and for any given adjusted position (if the two are adjustably
    connected) could be made integral and the second element in effect forms a
    continuation of the first, for continuous soil contact, this is considered
    to be a single tool and is excluded from this definition.

    (3)     Note.  The combination of a plow and an element for merely cutting
    or breaking a furrow slice raised by the plow is not classified under this
    definition. For subject matter of this type see subclass 758.

    (4)     Note.  Where one implement is claimed so broadly that it can be
    considered merely a named support for the other, not distinguishable from a
    general utility support such as a vehicle, the device is classified on the
    basis of the other implement.  See (2) Note in the definition of subclass
    452 and (5) Note in the definition of subclass 669.

    (5)     Note.  Earth working elements which differ merely by being for
    right or left hand operation or being mirror images of one another are not
    included. See subclasses 204+, 642, and 686 for such apparatus.

    (6)     Note.  A device comprising an earth working element mounted on a
    frame which frame may incidentally contact the earth and act as an earth
    leveling member and so be considered a diverse earth working element is not
    included under this definition unless the frame is specifically shaped or
    modified to perform said function.

    (7)     Note.  The combination of an implement or implements having a part
    rotated by engagement with the soil and a nonrotating part are included
    under this definition even though the parts may be contiguous or form a
    continuation of one another if both of said parts perform a substantial
    earth working, cutting, or turning function. A plow having a moldboard
    which includes rollers or a belt to reduce friction is not included since
    the rollers or belts are not considered to have any substantial earth
    working function.  (See subclasses 717 and 718).  However, a plow having a
    disk moldboard is included.  (See subclass 167).  Also a rotating tool
    having a mere scraping element for removing earth from the tool is not
    included while a rotating tool having an adjacent moldboard for turning a
    slice raised by the tool is included.  (See subclasses 168 and 558+).

    (8)     Note.  A runner or landside directly connected to or forming a
    direct rearward continuation of a tool is considered to be a part of the
    tool. Thus, if an earth working blade, sweep, or the like is connected to
    such a runner or landside the resultant device is considered to be a single
    tool having multiple earth working portions and is not classified under
    this definition.  See subclasses 728 and 746, for example.  However, if a
    runner or landside is spaced rearwardly from a tool and does not form a
    direct continuation thereof and has an earth working blade, sweep, or the
    like mounted thereon, this is considered to be two separate tools and
    classification under this definition results.

    (9)     Note.  A runner which is not attached to the rear of or does not
    form a rearward continuation of a tool and has a plurality of different
    type or shape blades or earth working portions attached thereto rearwardly
    of its forward end is considered to be a mere common support for diverse
    tools and the resultant apparatus is classified under this definition.
    (See subclass 188).

    (10)    Note.  A pair of laterally spaced runners or landsides with unlike
    tools mounted thereon and spanning the same is included under this
    definition.

    (11)    Note.  Where a nonearth working mounting member for one tool is
    directly connected to or carried by the earth working portion of a diverse
    tool, patents will be classified under this definition even if the claims
    do not recite the tool by which the member is carried.

    (12)    Note.  This definition includes those devices in which one of the
    tools may be solely disclosed as cutting a vertical slit in the earth
    merely to prevent side sway or counterbalance side thrust.  (See subclasses
    190+).

    (13)    Note.  Where there is combined with an earth working implement,
    such as a plow, a separate and distinct member which receives soil elevated
    by the implement and acts to deflect the soil to the side, invert it, etc.,
    the member in this combination will be considered an earth working tool and
    be classified under this definition.

    (14)    Note.  Hand held tools having diverse earth working portions or
    elements are not included.  See subclasses 371+, especially subclasses 375
    and 378+ for such devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for a lawn edger with a rolling or driven cutter and a fixed cutter
    or furrower.

    20,     for a sod cutter with a means for transverse cutting while moving.

    34,     for an earth working apparatus adapted for use upside down.

    50+,    for plural driven diverse tools.

    63+,    for a driven tool combined with a nondriven tool.

    126+,   for an earth working device combined with an earth marking means.

    204+,   for alternating tools which differ merely by being for right or
    left hand operation.

    245+,   for apparatus comprising a tool convertible or changeable to a
    diverse tool, and specially subclasses 251+ for a tool changeable to a
    diverse tool by assembly or disassembly.

    452+,   for a broadly claimed implement with an actuator adapted to lift a
    tool on said implement for transport.

    540+,   for a rolling tool with circumferentially spaced tines, blades or
    the like of different shape or size.

    558+,   for a disk with disk cleaning means. See (7) Note.

    642,    for a pair of relatively movable tools cooperating to move earth to
    and from a plant row, the tools differing merely by being for right or left
    hand operation.

    669+,   for a broadly claimed implement supporting an earth working element.

    684.5   and 799.5, for implements comprising plural scraping blades which
    are of different size or shape, or mounted in different angular
    relationship with respect to a reference line.

    686,    for right and left hand tools.

    714+,   for plural earth-engaging parts of an earth working element, the
    parts being movable during operation.  See (7) Note.

    728,    for a symmetrical-type tool with an attached runner and additional
    blades attached to the runner.  See (8) Note.

    746,    for an earth working tool with a portion extended beyond the
    landside.

    758,    for a moldboard-type earth working element with a furrow slice
    cutter or breaker.

    777+,   for a scraper supporting a narrow depending tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, especially subclasses 123+ for knives and cutters of
    general application combined with other devices.

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 403+ for a scraper combined with a scoop,
    shovel, or the like.

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 400.04+ for hand rakes combined with other
    tools.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 4 for unearthing
    devices with additional earth or plant rolling implement, subclass 6 for
    unearthing devices with additional earth marker or earth conditioner,
    subclass 10 for unearthing devices having preliminary removal of earth.


CLS 172/134
TXT Apparatus under subclass 133 in which the diverse earth working elements
    are supported or propelled by a wheeled frame and at least one of the earth
    working elements operates on the soil traversed or to be traversed by the
    wheel or wheels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175+,   for rolling and nonrolling implements operating along the same path.

    297+,   for a tool located forward of the rear of a motor vehicle.

    671,    for a wheel and tool mounted on a single longitudinal beam and
    traveling in the same path.

    676,    for a tool mounted on a wheeled frame and traveling in the same
    path as the wheel.

    810+,   for a tool located forward of a motor vehicle.


CLS 172/135
TXT Apparatus under subclass 133 in which an implement has earth working
    portions which operate on all four sides of an implement having a diverse
    earth working element.

    (1)     Note.  The surrounding implement may comprise a plurality of like
    separate tools.


CLS 172/136
TXT Apparatus under subclass 133 comprising earth working elements arranged
    adjustably in the apparatus so that when an element of one type is in
    ground-working position an element of another type must be out of ground
    working position.

    (1)     Note.  Hand held tools having alternately usable unlike earth
    working portions or elements are excluded from the definition.  See
    subclass 375.

    (2)     Note.  This definition includes apparatus in which two integral
    diverse tools must be removed and reversed to bring the diverse tool into
    operation. The diverse tools must always be present in the apparatus when
    the apparatus is working the earth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for apparatus adapted to be inverted in its entirely to provide an
    earth working operation in either position.

    204+,   for alternately usable tools which differ merely by being for right
    or left hand operation.

    251+,   for a tool which is changeable to a diverse tool by an assembly or
    disassembly operation.

    375,    for hand cultivating tools having diverse alternately usable earth
    working portions.  See (1) Note above.

    777+,   for an alternately usable scraper and narrow depending tool
    attached thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 2 for alternately
    usable unearthing units.


CLS 172/137
TXT Apparatus under subclass 133 including means to alter the spacial
    relationship of the diverse earth working elements incident to a change in
    the direction of movement.

    (1)     Note.  Tool mountings which merely permit relative movement between
    the tools in the absence of means to change the relationship upon turning
    are not classified in this and indented subclasses, but are classified
    below on other bases.

    (2)     Note.  The variation in the spacing of the tools may be in a
    horizontal direction or may be a variation in the relative elevations of
    the tools.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255,    for apparatus in which a tool is lifted out of or lowered into
    ground engagement incident to a change of direction of movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 456.1+ for articulated vehicles having
    plural connections therebetween.


CLS 172/138
TXT Apparatus under subclass 133 in which the diverse earth working elements
    are independently mounted so as to be elevatable about separate axes or
    along different paths and lifting means are connected to each of the earth
    working elements the lifting means being so interrelated that vertical
    movement of one earth working element is accompanied by vertical movement
    of the other.

    (1)     Note.  The tools may move in opposite directions, i.e., one move up
    while the other moves down.

    (2)     Note.  The lifting means may comprise an actuator or an attendant
    manipulated handle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    488+,   for a single-lift actuator for plural relatively movable like tools.


CLS 172/139
TXT Apparatus under subclass 138 in which the diverse earth working elements
    comprise a moldboard-type tool for turning a furrow slice and a cutting
    knife to cut a vertical slit in the earth in advance of the moldboard-type
    tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144,    for the combination of a colter, jointer and plow.

    165+,   for diverse tools one of which is a colter.


CLS 172/140
TXT Apparatus under subclass 133 including a frame on which the diverse earth
    working elements are mounted and separate means are provided to selectively
    vertically move the diverse earth working elements with respect to the
    frame.

    (1)     Note.  The moving means may be an actuator or an attendant
    manipulated handle.

    (2)     Note.  This definition includes apparatus in which both tools are
    lifted by a single manipulating means and the second tool is lifted with
    respect to the first by a second manipulating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301,    for plural tools mounted ahead of the rear and to the rear of a
    motor vehicle and being actuatable by independent power units.

    468,    for plural tools liftable for transport on a wheeled frame and
    being independently actuatable.


CLS 172/141
TXT Apparatus under subclass 133 in which one of the earth working elements is
    of the rolling or rotating type, the axis of rotation thereof being
    adjustable in a substantially horizontal plane and a diverse earth working
    element adjustable about a separate point or along a different path, the
    adjustment of one earth working element resulting in an adjustment of the
    other earth working element.


CLS 172/142
TXT Apparatus under subclass 133 in which one of the diverse earth working
    elements comprises an earth working element which is formed of or supported
    directly upon a member formed of resilient material.

    (1)     Note.  A pivoted tool having means to bias the tool about the pivot
    is not included under this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    389+,   for spring-tooth type implements having runners or other wheel
    substitutes.

    643,    for plural spring teeth in a single implement.

    707+,   for spring teeth, per se.


CLS 172/143
TXT Apparatus under subclass 133 in which one of the earth working elements is
    of the rolling or rotating type and including brake or stop means for
    slowing down or stopping the rotation or rolling thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    528+,   for rolling or rotating tools having means for stopping or
    retarding the rotation thereof.


CLS 172/144
TXT Apparatus under subclass 133 in which the diverse earth working elements
    comprise a plow or earth turning element having a moldboard to turn a
    furrow slice, a smaller plow or element to throw a strip of soil into the
    far side of the furrow in advance of the main plow, and a cutting knife to
    cut a slit in the ground forward of the plow, the plow operating in the
    slit.

    (1)     Note.  The colter and jointer must be separate from one another and
    from the plow.

    (2)     Note.  Patents claiming the combination of a separate colter and
    jointer disclosed for use with a plow will be classified as originals under
    this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163+,   for the combination of a jointer and plow.

    165+,   for the combination of a colter and diverse tool operating in the
    slit formed by the colter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 3 for unearthing
    devices with a stabilizing colter or fin.


CLS 172/145
TXT Apparatus under subclass 133 comprising at least three diverse implements
    in succession, the second implement following in or overlapping the path of
    the first and the third following in or overlapping the path of the second,
    the implements being longitudinally spaced and having diverse earth working
    elements.

    (1)     Note.  Two of the implements may be the same if a different
    implement intervenes.

    (2)     Note.  If an implement follows in or overlaps the path of travel of
    a diverse implement the implements are considered to be traveling in the
    same path.  Thus it may be seen that three implements may be following
    overlapping paths under this definition and yet the third implement be
    laterally spaced with respect to the first.  It should be particularly
    noted, that the word "implement" covers either a group of like earth
    working elements or a single earth working element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144,    for the combination of a plow with a separate colter and jointer.

    175+,   for two rolling and nonrolling implements following the same path.

    195+,   for two diverse implements following the same path.


CLS 172/146
TXT Apparatus under subclass 145 in which at least four diverse implements
    follow the same or overlapping paths.


CLS 172/147
TXT Apparatus under subclass 146 in which the implements are alternately alike,
    but successively unlike.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148,    for three implements following the same or overlapping paths, the
    first and third implements being alike and the intermediate implement being
    of a different type.

    152+,   for at least four laterally spaced implements which are alternately
    alike, but successively unlike.


CLS 172/148
TXT Apparatus under subclass 145 in which the first and third implements in the
    direction of travel are alike and the intermediate or second implement is
    of a different type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147,    for four or more implements following the same path which are
    alternately alike, but successively unlike.

    155+,   for laterally spaced like implements with an intermediate unlike
    implement.


CLS 172/149
TXT Apparatus under subclass 145 in which one of the diverse implements
    includes an earth working element which is given a rotating motion by the
    resistance of the earth as it is drawn thereover.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143,    for diverse tools one of which is a tool which has an intermittent
    rolling motion imparted thereto.

    146+,   for four or more diverse implements following the same path and
    including a rolling implement.

    148,    for longitudinally spaced like implements with an intermediate
    diverse implement including a rolling implement.

    175+,   for two rolling and nonrolling implements following the same path.

    184+,   for two diverse rolling implements following the same path.

    518+,   for rolling implements, per se.


CLS 172/150
TXT Apparatus under subclass 149 in which the rolling earth working element
    comprises a smooth surface compaction roller of uniform diameter and free
    from protuberances or depressions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170+,   for other diverse tools one of which is a smooth leveling roller.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 122+, for
    compacting rollers, per se.


CLS 172/151
TXT Apparatus under subclass 149 including two implements having rolling earth
    working elements of unlike types.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150     and 172, for diverse rolling tools one of which is a smooth
    leveling roller.

    154,    for four or more laterally spaced rolling tools which are
    alternately alike, but successively unlike.

    158,    for laterally spaced like rolling tools with an intermediate
    diverse rolling tool.

    184+,   for other diverse rolling tools.


CLS 172/152
TXT Apparatus under subclass 133 comprising four or more earth working elements
    spaced laterally of the direction of travel, the elements being alternately
    alike, but successively unlike.

    (1)     Note.  The alternate earth working elements may consist of a group
    of like tools.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155+,   for laterally spaced like tools with an intermediate diverse tool.


CLS 172/153
TXT Apparatus under subclass 152 in which one set of alternate earth working
    elements is of the rolling type while the other set of alternate earth
    working elements is of the nonrolling type thus providing a laterally
    spaced group of earth working elements which are successively of the
    rolling and nonrolling type.

    (1)     Note.  This definition includes a single rolling tool having a
    plurality of laterally spaced sets of tines, teeth or the like with
    nonrolling tools operating in paths between the sets of teeth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65,     for a plurality of laterally spaced interdigitating driven and
    nondriven tools.

    156     and 157, for laterally spaced like tools and an intermediate
    diverse tool of the rolling and nonrolling type.


CLS 172/154
TXT Apparatus under subclass 152 in which the diverse earth working elements
    are all of the rolling type.

    (1)     Note.  This definition includes two rolling tools having laterally
    spaced sets of teeth, tines, or the like with the sets of one tool
    operating in paths between the sets of the other tool.

    (2)     Note.  This definition includes apparatus having relatively
    rotatable earth working elements of different shape or contour even if the
    members axially abut or one element carries the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65,     for a plurality of laterally spaced interdigitating driven and
    nondriven tools.

    158,    for laterally spaced like rolling tools with an intermediate
    diverse rolling tool.


CLS 172/155
TXT Apparatus under subclass 133 comprising a pair of like earth working
    elements spaced laterally of the direction of travel and a diverse earth
    working element which operates along a path intermediate the paths of the
    like elements.

    (1)     Note.  Laterally spaced right and left hand tools are considered to
    be like earth working elements under this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152+,   for four laterally spaced tools which are alternately alike, but
    successively unlike.

    193+,   for a tool with a rearwardly spaced sweep or earth working blade,
    etc., which is attached to the tool standard or mounted on a member
    attached to the tool or its standard.


CLS 172/156
TXT Apparatus under subclass 155 in which the spaced like earth working
    elements are of the rolling or rotating type and the intermediate earth
    working element is of the nonrolling type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153,    for four laterally spaced tools which are successively of the
    rolling and nonrolling type and are alternately alike.


CLS 172/157
TXT Apparatus under subclass 155 in which the spaced like earth working
    elements are of the nonrolling type and the intermediate earth working
    element is of the rolling or rotating type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153,    for four laterally spaced tools which are successively of the
    rolling and nonrolling type and are alternately alike.


CLS 172/158
TXT Apparatus under subclass 155 in which the laterally spaced like earth
    working elements and the intermediate diverse earth working element are all
    of the rolling or rotating type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154,    for four laterally spaced tools which are successively unlike and
    alternately alike, all of the tools being of the rolling type.


CLS 172/159
TXT Apparatus under subclass 155 in which the laterally spaced earth working
    elements are nonidentical or positioned in a nonidentical way so as to
    function in a right and left handed manner and so located and constructed
    as to be mirror images of each other, and the intermediate earth working
    element comprises an element of symmetrical shape.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of a symmetrical tool see subclass 721.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193+,   for a tool with a rearwardly spaced sweep or earth working blade,
    etc., which is attached to the tool standard or mounted on a member
    attached to the tool or its standard.

    642,    for relatively movable right and left hand tools for throwing soil
    to or from a crop row.

    686,    for right and left hand tools.

    721+,   for symmetrical tools.


CLS 172/160
TXT Apparatus under subclass 155 in which one of the earth working elements
    comprises a straight tooth of uniform or decreasing diameter in a downward
    direction.


CLS 172/161
TXT Apparatus under subclass 133 in which one of the earth working elements
    comprises earth working means (other than a scraper) adapted to be adjusted
    so as to shift the earth in alternate lateral directions with respect to
    the direction of draft at different times.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204+,   for tools alternating for right or left hand operation.


CLS 172/162
TXT Apparatus under subclass 161 in which adjustment of the earth working means
    for alternate operation is accompanied by an adjustment of the diverse
    earth working element.

    (1)     Note.  The adjustment of the diverse tool may comprise merely the
    operation of a latch or lock which holds the tool in adjusted position or
    may comprise the adjustment of the diverse tool in response to operation of
    a latch or lock to permit adjustment of the alternating implement.

    (2)     Note.  This definition does not include apparatus in which the
    alternating implement and diverse tool are rigidly connected and adjusted
    as a unit.  Nor does this definition include apparatus in which the diverse
    tool is freely mounted and may assume a different position upon reversal of
    the alternating implement due to altered ground resistance, gravity, etc.

    (3)     Note.  The diverse tool is usually a jointer or colter.


CLS 172/163
TXT Apparatus under subclass 133 comprising the combination of an earth working
    element having a moldboard for raising and inverting a furrow slice and a
    second earth working element operating in advance of the first and
    operative to raise and turn a smaller furrow slice and deposit it in the
    far side of a previously formed furrow so as to be covered by the furrow
    slice of the moldboard-type earth working element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144,    for the combination of a plow, colter, and jointer.

    382,    for a plurality of like earth working elements (e.g., plows) which
    operate at different depths in the soil.


CLS 172/164
TXT Apparatus under subclass 163 comprising a jointer and plow the jointer
    being of the rolling or rotating type.


CLS 172/165
TXT Apparatus under subclass 133 comprising a colter for cutting a vertical
    slit in the ground in advance of at least a portion of an earth working
    element and an earth working element following the colter and having a
    vertically extending portion operating in the slit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19+,    for sod cutters having means for cutting a strip of earth
    vertically and horizontally.

    139,    for a plow and colter mounted so as to be vertically movable along
    different paths or about different axes and lifting means connected to the
    tools such that vertical movement of one is accompanied by vertical
    movement of the other.

    144,    for the combination of a colter, jointer, and plow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    111,    Planting, subclass 140 for a coulter claimed in combination with a
    planting machine.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 3 for unearthing
    devices with stabilizing colter or fin.


CLS 172/166
TXT Apparatus under subclass 165 in which the colter is of the rolling or
    rotating type.


CLS 172/167
TXT Apparatus under subclass 133 comprising a nonrolling earth working element
    adapted to cut a slice of earth and an adjacent rotary earth working
    element, usually in the form of a disk, for receiving said slice and
    inverting it.

    (1)     Note.  A moldboard merely having friction reducing rollers or being
    in the form of a belt to reduce friction is not included under this
    definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for implements having power driven moldboards.

    717,    for implements having a moldboard in the form of a belt.

    718,    for implements having a moldboard with friction reducing rollers.


CLS 172/168
TXT Apparatus under subclass 133 comprising a rolling or rotating earth working
    element for cutting or raising a furrow slice and a nonrolling adjacent
    member for receiving the furrow slice and inverting or completing the
    inversion of the same.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166,    for a rolling colter which acts to cut a vertical slit in the earth
    and a tool which operates in the slit.

    558+,   for disk-type tools with scrapers which merely act to scrape the
    disks to clean same.


CLS 172/169
TXT Apparatus under subclass 133 in which one of the earth working elements is
    of the rolling or rotating type and rotates about an axis which is
    substantially vertical.

    (1)     Note.  The axis may deviate from the vertical by as much as 45o.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    522+,   for tools which rotate about a substantially vertical axis.


CLS 172/170
TXT Apparatus under subclass 133 in which one of the earth working elements
    comprises a smooth surface compaction roller of uniform diameter and free
    of projections or depressions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150,    for three or more diverse implements following the same path one of
    which is a smooth leveling roller.

    176,    for a nonrolling tool for forming a furrow or ridge and a following
    rolling tool which conforms to the shape of the furrow or ridge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 122+, for
    compacting rollers, per se.


CLS 172/171
TXT Apparatus under subclass 170 including an earth working element having a
    moldboard to turn a furrow slice in one direction, the roller being spaced
    laterally from the turning or moldboard side of the moldboard-type earth
    working element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202+,   for a plow and tool laterally spaced from the moldboard side of the
    plow.


CLS 172/172
TXT Apparatus under subclass 170 in which the second earth working element is
    also of the rolling or rotating type and other than a smooth leveling
    roller.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184+,   for diverse rolling implements not    including a smooth leveling
    roller.


CLS 172/173
TXT Apparatus under subclass 170 in which the roller has combined therewith a
    plurality of nonrolling earth working teeth.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of "tooth" see subclass 713.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160,    for laterally spaced like tools with an intermediate diverse tool
    and including spike teeth.

    197     and 198, for diverse nonrolling tools following the same path and
    including teeth.


CLS 172/174
TXT Apparatus under subclass 133 in which one of the earth working elements is
    given a rotating motion by the resistance of the earth as it is drawn
    thereover and another earth working element is of a nonrolling type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143,    for diverse tools including an intermittently rolling tool.

    149+,   for three or more diverse implements following the same path, at
    least one of which is of the rolling type.

    153,    for at least four laterally spaced diverse tools alternate tools
    being of the rolling type.

    156     and 157, for laterally spaced like tools with an intermediate
    diverse tool of the rolling and nonrolling type.

    164,    for a rolling jointer and plow.

    166,    for a rolling colter combined with a diverse tool.

    169,    for diverse tools one of which is rotatable about a vertical axis.

    170,    for diverse tools including a smooth  leveling roller.


CLS 172/175
TXT Apparatus under subclass 174 in which the rolling and nonrolling earth
    working elements are included in implements which travel in the same or
    overlapping paths and are longitudinally spaced from one another.

    (1)     Note.  If an implement follows in or overlaps the path of travel of
    a diverse implement the implements are considered to be traveling in the
    same path.  It should be particularly noted that the work "implement"
    covers either a group of like earth working elements or a single earth
    working element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for a driven tool and nondriven tool traveling in the same path.

    149+,   for three or more diverse implements following the same path at
    least one of which is the rolling type.

    195+,   for diverse implements of the nonrolling type following the same
    path.


CLS 172/176
TXT Apparatus under subclass 175 in which the non-rolling implement opens a
    furrow in or forms a ridge on the ground and the rolling implement operates
    in the furrow or on the ridge and conforms to the shape thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143,    for diverse tools wherein one of the tools is of the intermittent
    rolling or rotating type.


CLS 172/177
TXT Apparatus under subclass 175 in which the rolling earth working element of
    the rolling implement has teeth, tines, blades, projections or other
    configurations so the circumferential portion of the element located in a
    plane generally at right angles to the axis of rotation engages the earth
    intermittently or with a varying effect as the element turns.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    540+,   for rolling earth working elements, per se, with circumferentially
    spaced blades, tines, or the like.


CLS 172/178
TXT Apparatus under subclass 175 in which the rolling implement comprises a
    group of earth working elements of generally circular platelike members
    each having the same axis of rotation.

    (1)     Note.  The disks may be planar or concavo-convex.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    518+,   for disk gangs, per se.


CLS 172/179
TXT Apparatus under subclass 175 comprising a group of earth working elements
    of the nonrolling type spaced from one another transversely of the
    direction of travel and a rolling earth working element or elements having
    the same lateral extent as, and traveling the same path traversed by, the
    nonrolling earth working element group.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173,    for a smooth leveling roller combined with a plurality of earth
    working teeth.

    177,    for a plurality of laterally spaced nonrolling tools following the
    same path as a rolling tool having circumferentially spaced blades, tines,
    or the like.

    178,    for a plurality of laterally spaced nonrolling tools following the
    same path as a plurality of disks rotatable about a common axis.


CLS 172/180
TXT Apparatus under subclass 175 in which the rolling implement is located
    ahead of the nonrolling implement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164,    for a rolling jointer and plow.

    166,    for a rolling colter and diverse tool.


CLS 172/181
TXT Apparatus under subclass 180 in which the earth working element of the
    rolling implement comprises a generally circular platelike member concave
    in a generally forward direction to form a furrow and the nonrolling
    implement includes an earth working element of the nonrolling type
    operating in said furrow.

    (1)     Note.  The nonrolling tool may act to square off or undercut, etc.,
    the furrow formed by the rolling tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164,    for a rolling or rotating jointer followed by a moldboard-type tool.


CLS 172/182
TXT Apparatus under subclass 174 in which the rolling and nonrolling earth
    working elements are spaced laterally of the direction of travel and
    operate along different paths.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153,    for at least four laterally spaced rolling and nonrolling tools
    which are alternately alike and successively unlike.

    156     and 157, for laterally spaced like tools and an intermediate
    diverse tool, the tools being of the rolling and nonrolling type.

    201+,   for laterally spaced diverse tools of the nonrolling type.


CLS 172/183
TXT Apparatus under subclass 182 in which the rolling and nonrolling earth
    working elements have juxtaposed sides which contact or nearly contact
    during operation to perform a cutting or shearing operation.

    (1)     Note.  The cutting or shearing action is usually for stalks or
    vines.


CLS 172/184
TXT Apparatus under subclass 133 in which each of the earth working elements is
    given a rotating motion by the resistance of the earth as it is drawn
    thereover.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51+,    for diverse rotary driven tools.

    151,    for three or more diverse implements traveling in the same or
    overlapping paths and including diverse rolling tools.

    154,    for four or more laterally spaced tools which are alternately
    alike, but successively unlike and being all of the rolling type.

    158,    for laterally spaced like rolling tools with an intermediate
    diverse rolling tool.

    172,    for diverse rolling tools one of which is a smooth compaction
    roller.

    518+,   for rolling or rotating tools, per se.


CLS 172/185
TXT Apparatus under subclass 184 in which the diverse earth working elements
    have their working portions axially spaced from one another and are mounted
    to rotate about the same axis.

    (1)     Note.  A rolling tool having circumferentially spaced unlike tines,
    blades, or the like which lie in substantially a single plane is not
    considered to be diverse tools. However, unlike earth working portions
    spaced on the same axis of rotation and having an intervening space with no
    earth working or earth contacting portion comes within this definition.

    (2)     Note.  This definition includes apparatus having relatively
    rotatable earth working elements of different shape or contour even if the
    elements axially abut or one element carries the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154,    for four or more laterally spaced diverse tools which are
    alternately alike, but successively unlike and rotatable about a common
    axis.


CLS 172/186
TXT Apparatus under subclass 184 in which the earth working elements comprise
    circular platelike members at least one of which has all the parts thereof
    in a single plane and another of which is of concavo-convex shape.


CLS 172/187
TXT Apparatus under subclass 184 in which the earth working elements are of
    substantially similar shape, but differ in size.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185,    for similarly shaped different size rolling earth working elements
    which rotate about the same axis.


CLS 172/188
TXT Apparatus under subclass 133 comprising a longitudinal runner adapted to
    support at least a portion of the weight of the apparatus and a plurality
    of diverse earth working elements attached to the runner at points
    rearwardly of the forward end thereof.

    (1)     Note.  An earth working element having a rearwardly extending
    runner or landside with earth working members attached thereto is
    considered to be a single tool having plural earth working portions and is
    excluded from this definition.  See subclasses 681+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    387+,   for apparatus having a wheel substitute such as a runner and see
    the Notes thereto for other related art.

    681+,   see (1) Note above.


CLS 172/189
TXT Apparatus under subclass 133 in which one of the earth working elements
    comprises a flexible fabric, chain, cable, strand, rope, or wire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    612,    for fabric or flexible tools, per se, and see the Note thereto.


CLS 172/190
TXT Including vertical, longitudinally oriented disc or blade (e.g., as
    stabilizer): Apparatus under subclass 133 wherein an upright, generally
    planar disc or blade is disposed in the direction of travel.

    (1)     Note.  The blade or disc often works the earth only to provide
    lateral stability to the implement as it moves in its intended direction of
    travel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144     and 165+, for a colter which cuts a vertical slit in the earth and
    a tool which follows the colter and operates in the slit cut thereby.

    752,    for a unitary earthworking element having a separable vertical
    planar lognitudinal cutter including apparatus in which the cutter is
    mounted on a runner or landside which forms a direct rearward continuation
    of the shovel, moldboard, or the like.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 3 for unearthing
    devices with stabilizing colter or fin.


CLS 172/191
TXT Apparatus under subclass 190 comprising a plurality of separate planar
    longitudinal blades.


CLS 172/192
TXT Apparatus under subclass 133 in which one of the earth working elements
    comprises a substantially flat blade disposed in a horizontal plane in the
    working position and adapted to cut through the soil at or below the
    surface thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    720,    for subsurface blades, per se, which operate in substantially a
    horizontal position.


CLS 172/193
TXT Apparatus under subclass 133 comprising an earth working element (e.g.,
    shovel or moldboard) for moving soil transverse to the line of travel and
    mounted upon a standard and an earth working blade or sweep following the
    earth working element and operating upon the moved soil and mounted on the
    standard behind the earth working element or on a rearwardly extending
    member connected to the earth working element or standard.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    722,    for symmetrical tools having separately attached wings or
    moldboards.

    728,    for symmetrical tools having an attached rearwardly extending
    runner on depth gauge and additional blades attached directly to the runner.


CLS 172/194
TXT Apparatus under subclass 193 in which the working position of the sweep can
    be selectively adjusted with respect to the earth working element.


CLS 172/195
TXT Apparatus under subclass 133 in which the diverse implements travel in the
    same or overlapping paths and are longitudinally spaced in the direction of
    travel, the implements having diverse earth working elements.

    (1)     Note.  If an implement follows in or overlaps the path of travel of
    a diverse implement the implements are considered to be traveling in the
    same path.  It should be particlarly noted that the word implement covers
    either a group of like earth working elements or a single earth working
    element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71+,    for a driven tool and a nondriven tool traveling in the same path.

    144,    for a colter, jointer and plow.

    145+,   for three or more diverse implements following the same or
    overlapping paths.

    163+,   for a colter and jointer, or a jointer and plow, or a colter and
    diverse tool.

    175+,   for rolling and nonrolling implements following the same path.


CLS 172/196
TXT Apparatus under subclass 195 in which the earth working element of one of
    the implements comprises a subsoiler which acts on the soil at a greater
    depth than the earth working element of the other implement.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of subsoiler see subclass 699.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    699+,   for subsoilers, per se.


CLS 172/197
TXT Apparatus under subclass 195 in which the diverse earth working elements
    comprise a plurality of earth working teeth, and a substantially vertical
    blade disposed generally transversely of the direction of travel or a
    horizontal bar or plate having a continuous ground engaging edge or
    horizontal surface which acts to scrape or level the surface of the soil.

    (1)     Note.  A vertical blade which is disposed at an angle to the
    direction of movement of the apparatus of substantially other than 90o so
    as to provide substantial lateral soil movement is excluded from this
    definition unless such blade is a scraper for producing a level surface.

    (2)     Note.  See the definition of subclass 713 of this class for the
    definition of teeth.  However, ripper or scarifier teeth are included under
    this definition even if they do not meet the definition of subclass 713.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189,    for diverse tools one of which is a fabric or flexible tool.

    199+,   for other diverse tools following the same path and including a
    drag, scraper, or leveling blade.

    785,    for a scraper between front and rear vehicle ground supports
    combined with teeth preceding the scraper.


CLS 172/198
TXT Apparatus under subclass 195 in which earth working elements of one of the
    implements comprise a plurality of teeth.

    (1)     Note.  See the definition of subclass 713 of this class for the
    definition of teeth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160,    for laterally spaced like tools with an intermediate diverse tool
    and including a spike tooth.

    173,    for the combination of a smooth leveling roller and teeth.

    197,    for teeth combined with a drag, scraper, or leveling blade.

    713,    for teeth, per se.


CLS 172/199
TXT Apparatus under subclass 195 in which the earth working element of one of
    the implements comprises a substantially vertical blade disposed
    transversely of the direction of travel or a horizontal bar or plate having
    a continuous ground engaging edge or horizontal surface which acts to
    scrape or level the surface of the soil.

    (1)     Note.  A vertical blade which is disposed at an angle to the
    direction of movement of the apparatus of substantially other than 90o so
    as to provide substantial lateral soil movement is excluded from this
    definition unless such blade is a scraper for producing a level surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189,    for diverse tools one of which is a fabric or flexible tool.

    197,    for teeth combined with a drag, scraper, or leveling blade.

    784+,   for a scraper between front and rear vehicle ground supports
    combined with a diverse tool.


CLS 172/200
TXT Apparatus under subclass 199 in which the drag, scraper, or leveling blade
    follows behind an implement having an earth working element of a different
    type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for a driven tool followed by a leveling drag or furrow shaper.

    197,    for teeth combined with a drag, scraper, or leveling blade.

    785,    for a scraper between front and rear vehicle ground supports
    combined with a tool of a different type ahead and spaced from the scraper.


CLS 172/201
TXT Apparatus under subclass 133 in which the diverse earth working elements
    are spaced laterally of the direction of travel and operate along different
    paths.

    (1)     Note.  Two implements which travel in overlapping paths are
    considered to be following the same path and are thus not classified under
    this definition. Thus, where one implement comprises a plurality of like
    laterally spaced earth working elements only some of which follow in the
    path of the diverse implement classification under this definition does not
    result.  See subclasses 195+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152+,   for four laterally spaced tools which are alternately alike, but
    successively unlike.

    155+,   for laterally spaced like tools and an intermediate diverse tool.

    182,    for laterally spaced rolling and nonrolling tools.


CLS 172/202
TXT Apparatus under subclass 201 in which one of the earth working elements is
    a plow having a moldboard for turning a furrow slice in one direction and a
    land side and the diverse earth working element disposed to travel in a
    path spaced outwardly from the moldboard side.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171,    for a smooth roller spaced from the moldboard side of a plow.


CLS 172/203
TXT Apparatus under subclass 202 in which the diverse earth working element has
    a connection directly to the moldboard or to the handles of the plow.


CLS 172/204
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising earth working means adapted
    to be adjusted so as to shift the earth in alternate lateral directions,
    with respect to the line of draft at different times.

    (1)     Note.  Devices in which an earth working element is adjustable
    about a vertical axis for right or left hand operation, there being no
    actuating means for such adjustment or the actuating means comprising no
    more than a handle directly connected to the earth working element, are not
    included.  See subclasses 577, 600, 603, and 735.

    (2)     Note.  Devices in which an earth working element is swung laterally
    (e.g., a cultivator shovel moved toward or away from a plant row) are not
    included if the purpose of the device is merely to provide for lateral
    adjustment and any moving of the earth to the right or left is merely
    incidental and not claimed.

    (3)     Note.  A disk, scraper, or drag which is adjustable about a
    vertical axis to throw soil in opposite directions is not included.  See
    subclasses 600 and 603 for such disks and subclasses 781+ and other
    appropriate subclasses for such scrapers or drags.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for an apparatus which may include right and left hand tools in
    which the complete apparatus is adapted for use in an upside down position.

    126+,   for earth marking means mounted on an earth working device, said
    marking means being alternately engageable with the ground.

    161+,   for apparatus comprising diverse tools, at least one of which is
    alternated for right or left hand operation.

    662,    for an apparatus comprising plural relatively movable tools, at
    least one of which may be moved to nonuse position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 2 for alternately
    usable unearthing units.


CLS 172/205
TXT Apparatus under subclass 204 in which the earth working means comprises
    separate earth working elements which are rotatable about a horizontal axis
    traverse to the direction of draft in order to alternately place the earth
    working elements in operation, the rotation being effected as a result of
    torque developed due to resistance of the ground to the forward motion of
    the earth working elements or some other ground contacting part of the
    earth working element carrier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 436, 440, and  441 for scoops adapted to be
    rotated due to forward movement.


CLS 172/206
TXT Apparatus under subclass 204 in which the apparatus has a draft beam or
    tongue which may be adjusted laterally with respect to the earth working
    means and in which adjustment of the earth working means for alternate
    operation is accompanied by lateral adjustment of the draft member.

    (1)     Note.  Lateral adjustment of the draft member or adjustment of the
    earth working means for alternate operation may be accompanied merely by
    the operation of a latch to permit earth working means adjustment or draft
    member lateral adjustment, respectively.


CLS 172/207
TXT Apparatus under subclass 206 in which the draft tongue or beam is swung
    through an angle of substantially 180o with respect to the frame on which
    the earth working means is mounted so as to draw the apparatus alternately
    in opposite directions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    214,    for oppositely directed tools having a reversible draft tongue, the
    reversal of the draft tongue not causing any adjustment of the tools.


CLS 172/208
TXT Apparatus under subclass 206 in which the adjustment of the earth working
    means is accompanied by the operation of means which lock the draft member
    against lateral displacement.


CLS 172/209
TXT Apparatus under subclass 204 having earth working means other than parallel
    separate tools and means to raise the earth working means from the ground
    and in which the adjustment of the earth working means for alternate
    operation results from the operation of the raising means or the lowering
    of the earth working means to the ground after being raised.

    (1)     Note.  The "parallel separate tools" of the definition are defined
    in subclass 228.  For interrelated lifting and shifting of such tools see
    subclasses 228+.

    (2)     Note.  The adjustment of the earth working means may be no more
    than unlocking or unlatching of the same to permit reversal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128,    for an apparatus comprising an earth working device and earth
    marking means, the earth marking means being adjusted upon lifting the
    implement.

    162,    for diverse tools including an implement alternating for right or
    left hand operation where reversal of the implement adjusts a diverse tool.

    228+,   for parallel separate tools which may be raised or lowered to place
    them in alternate operation.


CLS 172/210
TXT Apparatus under subclass 209 in which the means for raising the earth
    working means is a mast-type hitch.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 439 for the definition of mast-type
    hitch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    445,    for tools carried by a mast-type hitch including an auxiliary means
    which is operated by the vertical movement of the hitch.


CLS 172/211
TXT Apparatus under subclass 209 in which the means for raising the earth
    working means comprises a wheel or wheel substitute which is depressed with
    respect to the frame on which the earth working means is mounted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    398,    for implements including an actuator adjusted ground support and
    means interconnecting the actuating means and the earth working tool.


CLS 172/212
TXT Apparatus under subclass 204 having a wheel or wheel substitute which
    automatically assumes a new supporting position with respect to its former
    supporting position, and also with respect to the earth working means, in
    response to adjustment of the earth working means to alternate positions.


CLS 172/213
TXT Apparatus under subclass 204 having separate earth working elements so
    directed as to be alternately usable when the frame on which they are
    mounted is moved in opposite directions without reversal of the frame.


CLS 172/214
TXT Apparatus under subclass 213 in which the earth working elements are
    carried by a wheeled frame having a draft member shiftable from one end of
    the frame to the opposite end through substantially 180o to draw the device
    in either direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207,    for tools adapted for alternate use having a reversible draft
    member, the reversal of the draft member adjusting the tools for alternate
    use.


CLS 172/215
TXT Apparatus under subclass 213 in which the oppositely oriented earth working
    elements are rigidly mounted at spaced points upon a longitudinally
    extending beam or frame which may be tilted about a horizontal transverse
    axis to alternately place the earth working elements in operative position.


CLS 172/216
TXT Apparatus under subclass 213 in which the earth working elements may be
    placed into and out of operative position by (1) movement about separate
    axes which are transverse to and spaced in the direction of travel or (2)
    movement in vertical planes in which the earth working elements maintain
    substantially the same angular position with respect to the ground.


CLS 172/217
TXT Apparatus under subclass 213 having shiftable earth deflector means (e.g.,
    moldboard) alternately cooperating with the earth working elements as the
    frame is moved in opposite directions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218,    for tools having a single earth breaking portion with an earth
    deflector means which is adjustable to move soil toward either side of the
    device.


CLS 172/218
TXT Apparatus under subclass 204 comprising an earth working means having one
    portion which operates in and acts to break the soil in the same position
    for both directions of earth movement and an earth deflector or deflectors
    connected therewith and adjustable to different positions to move the soil
    toward either side of the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217,    for tools having oppositely directed earth breaking points with a
    movable deflector for moving the soil in alternate directions on movement
    of the tool in opposite directions.


CLS 172/219
TXT Apparatus under subclass 204 in which the same earth working element is
    utilized to move the soil in alternate lateral directions.

    (1)     Note.  An earth working means having opposite ends or sides, one
    being used to move the soil in one direction and the other side or end
    being used to move soil in the other direction, is considered to be plural
    tools and is excluded from this and indented subclasses, except when the
    ends or sides are connected by a common moldboard or soil deflector portion
    which is utilized to deflect soil in both phases of operation.


CLS 172/220
TXT Apparatus under subclass 219 in which the earth working element is of the
    rolling-disk type having cleaning means to remove soil therefrom, the
    cleaning means being movable relative to the disk upon reversal of the disk
    so as to perform the cleaning operation for either direction of earth
    movement.

    (1)     Note.  A scraper which merely moves as a unit with a reversible
    disk is not considered to be a reversible cleaning means for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    558+,   for cleaning means for disks.


CLS 172/221
TXT Apparatus under subclass 219 including a plurality of earth working
    elements, each operative to move soil in opposite directions, the earth
    working elements being adjustable about spaced vertical axes to reverse the
    direction of soil movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    569,    for a plurality of disks which are pivoted on vertical axes with
    interconnected means for moving them identically without shifting them for
    opposite throw.

    647,    for plural relatively movable tools which are simultaneously
    adjusted about their individual vertical axes without being shifted for
    opposite throw.


CLS 172/222
TXT Apparatus under subclass 221 wherein, in addition to the movement of the
    earth working elements about their vertical axes, at least one of the axes
    is also moved horizontally at the same time.


CLS 172/223
TXT Apparatus under subclass 219 in which the earth working element is of the
    type having a point, share and moldboard and in which the earth working
    element is adjustable about an axis extending substantially in the
    direction of travel to reverse the direction of soil movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224+,   for alternately usable separate tools which are adjusted about a
    longitudinal axis.


CLS 172/224
TXT Apparatus under subclass 204 in which the earth working means comprises
    earth working elements which are alternately placed into operative position
    by rotation about an axis which is horizontal and longitudinal (i.e., in
    the direction of travel).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for earth working apparatus in which the complete apparatus is
    adapted for use upside down.

    232,    for tools alternated for right or left hand operation by rotation
    about an axis lying in a vertical longitudinal plane and at an angle to the
    horizontal.


CLS 172/225
TXT Apparatus under subclass 224 in which an actuator is provided to rotate the
    earth working elements with respect to a frame or support.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "actuator" see the class definition.


CLS 172/226
TXT Apparatus under subclass 225 in which the actuator comprises gearing.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of gearing, see Class 74, Machine Element
    or Mechanism, subclass 640.


CLS 172/227
TXT Apparatus under subclass 226 in which the gearing comprises a flexible
    member (e.g., chain or cable) cooperating with a sprocket or drum, rotation
    of the sprocket or drum effecting rotation of the earth working elements.


CLS 172/228
TXT Apparatus under subclass 204 employing separate earth working elements
    oriented for movement in the same direction which are alternately placed
    into operation by movement in substantially longitudinal vertical, parallel
    planes.

    (1)     Note.  The tools may deviate slightly from the vertical planes
    during alternation so as, for example, to clear one another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    472,    for plural tools simultaneously raised by an actuator for transport
    on a wheeled frame and which are individually lowered.

    481,    for tools raised by an actuator for transport on a wheeled frame
    and held in one position by a latch means separate from the actuating means.


CLS 172/229
TXT Apparatus under subclass 228 having means connecting the earth working
    elements such that movement of one element in one direction (i.e., raising
    or lowering) is accompanied by movement of the other element in the
    opposite direction.

    (1)     Note.  The connecting means may be temporarily disabled to allow
    both tools to be raised or lowered.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130+,   for apparatus comprising an earth working device and plural earth
    marking means, the plural earth marking  means being interconnected so that
    adjustment of one causes movement of another.


CLS 172/230
TXT Apparatus under subclass 228 having separate operating means for each earth
    working element such that each element is movable to operative and
    inoperative positions independently of the other element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304,    for plural tools carried forward of the rear of a motor vehicle
    which are independently actuatable.

    468+,   for plural tools having independently operable actuator means to
    lift the tools for transport on a wheeled frame.


CLS 172/231
TXT Apparatus under subclass 230 in which each of the operating means is
    actuated by power derived from a separate wheel engaging the ground and
    turned as an incident to the travel of the machine over the ground.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    399,    for vertically adjustable ground supports with a power take-off
    from plural wheels.

    408+,   for vertically adjustable ground wheels in which the wheel actuates
    its own crank axle mount.

    492+,   for tools lifted for transport on a wheeled frame by means of an
    actuator operated by a power take-off, the power take-off usually being
    from a ground wheel.


CLS 172/232
TXT Apparatus under subclass 204 in which the earth working means is
    alternately placed into operative position by movement about an axis which
    lies in a vertical plane extending in the direction of travel and is at an
    angle to the horizontal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224+,   for tools alternated for right and left hand operation by rotation
    about a horizontal, longitudinal axis.


CLS 172/233
TXT Apparatus under the class definition adapted to be moved over the surface
    of the earth comprising a feeler means adapted to sense the presence of an
    obstruction in or on the ground (e.g., a rock, tree, or mound of earth) and
    to cause or permit movement of the apparatus or a part thereof to avoid the
    obstruction.

    (1)     Note.  The feeler means must constitute an element specifically
    provided for that purpose and not be a mere part of the tool supporting
    structure.  A mere pivoted tool which may move because of direct contact of
    the tool or its supporting means with an obstruction is not included under
    this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5+,     for apparatus in which an obstruction sensing means is operative to
    control a power means to adjust the apparatus or some part thereof to avoid
    the obstruction.

    38,     for an implement including a driven tool and obstruction feeling
    means for moving or releasing the implement.

    236,    for apparatus comprising a ground engageable lever means (including
    a segment of a wheel) which is engageable merely with the ground rather
    than an obstruction and which causes a manipulation due to its resistance
    to forward motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    293,    Vehicle Fenders, subclasses 102+ for protective structure attached
    to vehicles comprising barrier structures for fending off blows from other
    vehicles or objects.


CLS 172/234
TXT Apparatus under subclass 233 in which the feeler means is movable relative
    to the implement part to be moved.


CLS 172/235
TXT Apparatus under subclass 234 in which the feeler means operates a lock or
    latch to release the implement part so as to be free to move to another
    position to avoid the obstruction.


CLS 172/236
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising an earth working element
    adapted to be propelled over the earth and a lever adapted to be lowered
    into engagement with the earth so as to resist motion of the apparatus
    whereby when the lever is engaged with the earth and the apparatus moved
    thereover relative motion between the lever and apparatus occurs due to the
    resistance of the lever, which results in some manipulation of the
    apparatus or a part thereof.

    (1)     Note.  A ground wheel adapted to supply a force for manipulation of
    the apparatus due to its rolling over the ground is not included.  See
    subclasses 407+, particularly subclass 409 for such devices.  However, a
    lever arrangement including an arc, which may be a portion of a wheel, for
    rolling contact with the ground to manipulate the device is included, if
    said lever does not pass through a complete cycle of 360o by contact with
    the ground to again be in position to repeat the cycle.  The lever is not
    considered to pass through a cycle of 360o by contact with the ground when
    the initial movement of the lever through a portion of the cycle is
    effected by earth contact movement of an earth working tool connected
    therewith, and such devices would be included under this definition.  See
    subclass 90 for an earth working element driven by an irregular ground-
    engaging wheel or support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90,     for ground-engaging levers or irregularly shaped wheels used to
    give a regular or intermittent cyclical motion to an implement as it is
    drawn over the ground without any manipulation from the operator, i.e., a
    device in which a latch is released by the operator and the
    ground-engageable lever or irregular wheel moves through a cycle of at
    least 360o would be classified in subclass 90, while other latch-release
    type devices which must be manually advanced through part of their cycle of
    operation or which must be manually reset and which are not free to
    complete a cycle of 360o once having been unlatched are included under this
    definition (236).

    205,    for implements alternating for right or left hand operation and
    draft revoluble about a transverse axis by means of a ground-engageable
    draft responsive lever.

    233+,   for apparatus comprising a feeler means which senses some special
    obstruction and which causes manipulation of a part due to a movement or
    tendency to movement of the apparatus past the obstruction, resistance to
    movement being not necessarily present.

    238,    for apparatus including a ground wheel or wheel substitute which is
    moved relative to the frame by the draft force.

    239,    for apparatus including ground wheels and linkages for providing a
    constant depth of operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 418+ for attached vehicle jacks, including jacks comprising a
    leg which engages the ground and lifts the vehicle by moving the vehicle
    with respect to the ground.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 43 for devices for rendering an apparatus
    transportable by movement of the apparatus with respect to a leg lowered to
    engage the ground.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 438 for a ground-engaging
    lever for manipulating a part of a load handler or transporter.


CLS 172/237
TXT Apparatus under subclass 236 having an earth working element mounted to
    rotate through 360o about a horizontal transverse axis, the draft
    responsive lever being operative to rotate the tool on said axis over an
    arc of less than 360o being caused by a force other than from the lever,
    usually from earth resistance to the earth working element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205,    for earth working tools alternating for right or left hand
    operation and draft revoluble about a transverse axis by means of a lever
    engaging the ground.

    528+,   for rolling or rotating tools having means to stop or retard the
    rotation thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclass 441 for a scoop with a dumping runner.

    56,     Harvesters, 379+ for roll-over type rakes.


CLS 172/238
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a framework, a ground wheel
    or wheel substitute carried thereby, an earth working element associated
    with the framework, a means for applying a draft force to the framework and
    means connecting the ground wheel or wheel substitute to the draft-force
    applying means whereby the ground wheel or wheel substitute may be moved
    vertically with respect to the framework by the draft-force applying means
    due to a force resulting from resistance of the apparatus to being moved
    over the earth by the draft force applying means.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus in which the vertical movement of the ground wheel
    is only the result of the draft force causing a ground wheel to rotate so
    that power from the rotating ground wheel causes the vertical movement is
    not included under this definition.  See subclasses 407+, especially
    subclasses 408+ for apparatus in which a wheel is vertically adjusted by
    power from a wheel.

    (2)     Note.  Apparatus comprising a ground wheel or wheel substitute
    which moves relatively to the framework due to irregularities in the
    surface of the ground and is connected to a draft means so as to move it
    correspondingly is not included.  See subclass 239 for such apparatus.

    (3)     Note.  Apparatus in which the draft- force applying means causes
    the ground wheel or wheel substitute to move only when a turn is being made
    is not included.  See subclass 255 for such apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236,    for apparatus including a ground-engageable draft responsive lever.

    239,    for apparatus comprising a ground level responsive depth control of
    the type comprising a wheel and a linkage associated with an articulated
    hitch to a propelling vehicle.

    255,    for apparatus in which a turning movement causes an earth working
    element to be lifted off or lowered into the ground.

    407+,   especially subclasses 408+ for apparatus in which a wheel is
    vertically adjusted relative to its running gear by power derived from the
    rolling motion of a wheel.

    467,    for an apparatus comprising an actuator adapted to lift a tool for
    transport on a wheeled frame or broadly claimed implement and also
    comprising a shiftable hitch for causing vertical movement of the tool.

    588,    for apparatus comprising a hitch shiftable on a tongue for angling
    gangs of disks.

    605,    for an apparatus comprising a shiftable hitch for moving a tool
    relative to the frame.


CLS 172/239
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising an earth working element
    and a propelling device therefor, such as a tractor, the connection between
    the earth working element and its propelling device being such that (1) the
    earth working element tends to sink lower into the earth from a median
    working position when the draft force necessary to propel the element
    decreases and tends to raise out of the earth when the draft force
    increases or (2) the earth working element tends to move up and down from a
    median position relative to its propelling device as its propelling device
    pitches down and up, respectively, over uneven ground so as to maintain an
    approximately constant depth in the ground, (3) the earth working element
    tends to rise from a median position when the downward component or suck of
    the soil pressure increases and tends to sink from a median position when
    the downward component or suck of the soil pressure decreases or (4) the
    earth working element tends to move up from a median position as it
    approaches or is in a rise of ground and tends to move down from a median
    position as it approaches or is in a depression in the ground.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is intended to provide for linkages or the
    like which are automatic in action but wholly mechanical so as not to fit
    the definition of the "Automatic" subclasses.  An earth working element
    which is simply spring-pressed downwardly or which is merely pivoted at a
    forward point may be analyzable as coming under this definition, but such
    devices are not so classified.  The devices under the definition comprise
    linkages or equivalent mechanism of greater complexity especially intended
    to function as stated in the definition.  For example, a trailing implement
    connected to a tractor by a simple hitch including a spring so that the
    earth working tool is raised or lowered as the spring is stressed due to
    changes in draft load is classified in subclass 238 or subclass 678.

    (2)     Note.  Apparatus classified under this definition is sometimes
    known as constant draft or constant depth apparatus.

    (3)     Note.  Apparatus including gauge wheels connected by linkages to
    the propelling means to perform the functions set out in the definition are
    included.

    (4)     Note.  Merely holding an earth working element down against a
    tendency to rise out of the ground is not included. Such devices are
    classified according to the structure claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for automatically operated power control devices especially
    subclasses 7+ for automatically operated power control devices responsive
    to changes in draft load.

    238,    for ground wheels moved vertically with respect to the running gear
    by means of the draft force (usually for lifting the earth working element
    for transport).

    261+,   for earth working elements which shift on occurrence of an overload.

    678,    for spring-biased hitches.

    779,    for a scraper whose position is automatically controlled by a
    linkage for leveling.

    811+,   for a scraper positioned in front of a motor vehicle and maintained
    in a horizontal position as the ground supports of the vehicle move over
    irregular terrain so that the vehicle tilts sidewise.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 446.1+ for articulated vehicles with a
    hitch responsive to change in draft load, there being no disclosure of an
    earth working element being the cause of the change in draft load.


CLS 172/240
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a ground wheel or wheel
    substitute such as a runner so arranged in the apparatus or so attachable
    to the apparatus that when the wheel or wheel substitute engages the ground
    the apparatus may not effectively perform its intended earth working
    operation but may merely be readily moved.

    (1)     Note.  A wheel or wheel substitute may be stated to be for
    transport only but if as disclosed it may actually engage the ground in
    supporting or gauging relation without precluding the operation of the
    earth working tool it is not classified under this definition.  Such
    devices may be found in subclasses 395+.  If the means attaching the wheel
    or wheel substitute to the implement can only be used to support the
    implement for transport and in any other position the wheel serves no
    purpose (e.g., gauging or supporting) classification under this definition
    results.

    (2)     Note.  The wheel or wheel substitute may constitute a part of the
    earth working element itself, which functions as a wheel or runner or an
    earth working element in accordance with different positions in the
    apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 228 for transporting attachments for
    harvesters.

    280,    Land Vehicles, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 43+
    and 47.131+ for wheel attachments for vehicles.


CLS 172/241
TXT Apparatus under subclass 240, in which the wheel or wheel substitute is so
    positioned with relation to the earth working element that the entire
    apparatus must be turned upside down to bring the wheel or wheel substitute
    into ground-engaging position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for apparatus which is adapted for use upside down to provide an
    earth working function in either position.


CLS 172/242
TXT Apparatus under subclass 240 in which an earth working element is pivoted
    about an axis extending longitudinally of the apparatus to shift it from an
    earth working position and enable engagement of the wheel or wheel
    substitute with the ground.

    (1)     Note.  The wheel or runner may constitute a part of the earth
    working element itself, which functions as a wheel or runner or an earth
    working element in accordance with different positions in the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224+,   for an apparatus comprising axially rotatable alternately useable
    tools for right and left hand operation having wheels which alternately
    contact the ground.


CLS 172/243
TXT Apparatus under subclass 240 in which a wheel or wheel substitute replaces
    an earth working element or is attached directly to an earth working
    element or in which an earth working element is manipulated to act as a
    wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    535,    for a detachable rim for a disk, the rim being used for an earth
    working function, e.g., a packing roller rather than as a ground wheel.

    540+,   for a rolling or rotating earth working element having spaced
    teeth, tines, or blades which may be made by placing such teeth on a wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclasses 38.1+ for wheels
    useable with ordinary wheels for emergency purposes.


CLS 172/244
TXT Apparatus under subclass 240 in which there is a framework supporting an
    earth working element and the ground wheel or wheel substitute and the
    ground wheel or wheel substitute is so connected to the earth working
    element that movement of one relative to the frame is accompanied by
    movement of the other relative to the frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    397+,   for apparatus having a vertically adjustable ground support which
    is movable together with a tool relative to a supporting frame.


CLS 172/245
TXT Apparatus under the class definition, (A) adapted to be rearranged to
    perform different functions, or (B) adapted to be altered so as to operate
    in a different way or change its function in some way by (1) the steps of
    disassembling the apparatus in some major portion and then reassembling the
    apparatus with the same or different portion, (2) the step of disassembling
    some major portion from the apparatus, or (3) the step of assembling some
    major portion to the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  Conversion features are common in this art.  A mere preamble
    in a claim to the effect that a device is convertible or is a conversion
    attachment is generally not enough for classification under this
    definition. The conversion feature should be spelled out as by (a)
    specifically claiming one embodiment of an apparatus having a first
    function and claiming with that embodiment a feature useable only for a
    second conversion function, or (b) repeated functional statements in the
    claim, or (c) a preamble which is so long and detailed that it may be
    considered part of the body of the claim.  Where no other suitable
    classification exists a broad mention of conversion may be enough for
    classification under this definition.

    (2)     Note.  The change in the apparatus must be more than merely placing
    a part in one of a series of adjacent holes or in general making a change
    which amounts to only an adjustment or minor alteration in the overall
    functioning of the device.

    (3)     Note.  The change must be more than to change a part between an
    operative and an inoperative position.

    (4)     Note.  When the conversion consists of the assembly of a part the
    claim must recite some element of the combination which has little or no
    utility when the part is in the combination but is useful when the part is
    absent from the combination.

    (5)     Note.  Various specific types of apparatus which fit this
    definition have been considered to be better classified in subclasses below
    this subclass and not indented under it as indicated in the Search Notes.
    The general rule is that if a subclass below furnishes a specific home for
    subject matter apparently covered by this definition the patent is properly
    classified in the subclass below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for a lawn edger convertible to a nonearth working implement.

    34,     for a complete apparatus adapted for use upside down.

    136,    for diverse tools, not of the hand-held type, carried at the same
    time in an apparatus but useable alternately only, by merely changing the
    position of the tools with respect to the earth.

    243,    for an earth working element which is changeable to or replaced by
    a ground support for transporting the apparatus.

    310,    for plural wheeled implements.

    341,    for hand guided wheeled straddle row type cultivators with an added
    intermediate tool.

    355,    for attendant guided or propelled wheeled implements with
    alternately useable tools rocked about a wheel axis.

    375,    for alternately useable hand-held earth working elements, carried
    at the same time in the apparatus and alternately useable by a mere change
    of position while remaining in the apparatus.

    439+,   for a device converting an automatic power control means to a
    nonautomatic position controlled mast-type hitch.

    443,    for an implement with a mast-type hitch adapted to be bolted to a
    tractor as a unit thereby inherently acting to convert a tractor adapted to
    use with a simple hitch to one having a mast-type hitch.

    452+,   for an automatic power control device converted to a nonautomatic
    lift device, especially subclass 465 for a device converting an automatic
    power control means to a servomotor with a follow-up control (e.g., a
    position controlled device).

    535,    for detachable rims for disks, which rims may be rollers.

    536,    for a wheel or roller and an axially adjacent earth working element
    on the same axis.

    539,    for a wheel or roller with a ridge or rim attached to convert it to
    an earth working device.

    540+,   for a wheel or roller with blades mounted on the circumference to
    convert it to an earth working device.

    541,    for a roller with tines, blades, or the like which may be projected
    from or withdrawn beneath the surface of the roller.

    568,    for a disk gang with a removable section.

    577,    for a reversible group of rolling earth working elements.

    581,    for groups of disk gangs changeable to different arrangements.

    603,    for a disk changeable to positions having a different angular
    relationship to adjacent structure when viewed in plan.

    625,    for plural tool groups which are relatively movable as a result of
    operation and connected to a forward draft bar and have alternate draft
    means.

    702+,   for an earth working element with a reversible part.

    719,    for an earth working element with an added-on cutting or wearing
    edge, point, or surface.

    735,    for an earth working element adjustable to present different
    working portions.

    777+,   for a scraper supporting a readily detachable narrow depending tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 51+ for
    implements having parts or adjustments permitting conversion of said
    implement to a fork, shovel, other implement, or different type of the same
    implement.


CLS 172/246
TXT Apparatus under subclass 245 changeable between a condition in which it
    functions as a device under the class definition and a condition in which
    it functions as a land vehicle having a body portion of general utility for
    transporting loads.


CLS 172/247
TXT Apparatus under subclass 245 changeable between a condition in which it
    functions as a device under the class definition and a condition in which
    it funcitons as a device classifiable in some other class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for a lawn edger convertible to a nonearth working implement.

    246,    for an earth working implement changeable to a land vehicle with a
    body.

    375,    for a hand-held implement with alternately useable diverse tools,
    one of which may be a tool not classifiable in this class.

    535,    for a detachable rim for a disk, which rim may be a roller.

    536,    for a wheel with a tool mounted on the same axis for rotation with
    the wheel.

    539,    for a wheel or roller with a ridge or rim attached to convert it to
    an earth working device.

    540+,   for a wheel or roller with blades mounted on the circumference to
    convert it to an earth working device.

    541,    for a roller with tines, blades, or the like which may be projected
    from or withdrawn beneath the surface of the roller, thereby converting the
    device from one classifiable in this class to one classifiable in Class
    404, Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 403+ for a scraper convertible to a scoop,
    shovel, or other material pick up means.

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 400.04+ for hand rakes convertible to earth
    working devices.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 51 for hand
    forks and shovels convertible to earth working devices.


CLS 172/248
TXT Apparatus under subclass 245 in which an apparatus under the class
    definition having one distinct type of draft connection to a propelling
    means is convertible or changeable to an apparatus having another distinct
    type of draft connection to a propelling means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    439+,   for a device converting an automatic power control means to a
    nonautomatic position controlled mast-type hitch.

    443,    for an implement with a mast-type hitch adapted to be bolted to a
    tractor as a unit, thereby inherently acting to convert a tractor adapted
    to use with a simple hitch to one having a mast-type hitch.

    452,    for a device converting an automatic power control means to a
    nonautomatic lift device especially subclass 465 for a device with an
    automatic control converted to a device having a servomotor with a
    follow-up position control.

    463,    for an apparatus comprising wheeled frame and an actuator adapted
    to lift a tool for transport, the lift actuator and the tool forming a
    removable unit.

    625,    for an apparatus comprising plural tool groups movably connected to
    a forward transverse draft bar and having alternate draft means spaced
    ninety degrees apart.

    677+,   for earth working implements with some significant detail of the
    hitch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 415.1+ for articulated vehicles with
    convertible hitches, and subclass 474 for articulated vehicles with
    selectively rigid or flexible hitches.


CLS 172/249
TXT Apparatus under subclass 245 which is changeable between a condition in
    which it has a plurality of spaced earth working elements to a condition in
    which the plurality if elements have been joined or juxtaposed to form a
    part of a single earth working element.


CLS 172/250
TXT Apparatus under subclass 245 adapted to be altered so as to operate in a
    different way or change its function in some way by (1) the steps of
    disassembling the apparatus in some major portion and then reassembling the
    apparatus with the same or different portions, (2) the step of
    disassembling some major portion from the apparatus, or (3) the step of
    assembling some major portion to the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  See the definition of subclass 245 for Notes limiting and
    explaining this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243,    for an earth working element replaceable by a ground support.

    702+,   for an earth working element with a reversible part.

    719,    for an earth working element with an added-on cutting or wearing
    edge, point, or surface.


CLS 172/251
TXT Apparatus under subclass 250 which is changeable from a device having an
    earth working element of one kind to a device in which said earth working
    element has been replaced by or changed to an earthworking element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136,    for diverse tools, not of the hand-held type, carried at the same
    time in an apparatus but usable alternately only, by disassembling and
    assembling the tools to change their position with respect to the earth.


CLS 172/252
TXT Apparatus under subclass 251 in which the change is brought about by adding
    to an earth working element or a major portion of an earth working element
    a part to form an earth working element of a different shape or size than
    the original earth working element, said part not being intended for use as
    an earth working element by itself in the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  Merely attaching an earth working element to a nominally
    recited spring tooth or rigid earth working tooth is not included, the
    tooth in that case being considered merely a standard.  However, if some
    earth working configuration of the tooth is claimed the device is
    classifiable under this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    535,    for detachable rims for disks.

    708,    for an earth working element attached to a spring tooth.

    719,    for an earth working element with an added-on cutting or wearing
    edge, point, or surface.

    777+,   for a scraper supporting a readily detachable narrow depending tool.


CLS 172/253
TXT Apparatus under subclass 250 in which the alteration of the apparatus
    comprises the addition of an earth working element or the removal of an
    earth working element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    341,    for hand guided wheeled straddle row type cultivators with an added
    intermediate tool.

    568,    for a disk gang with a removable section.


CLS 172/254
TXT Apparatus under subclass 250 in which the alteration comprises placing an
    earth working element in distinctly different positions relative to
    adjacent supporting structure so that the element may perform its earth
    working function in each of these different positions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    554,    for a disk changeable to positions having a different angular
    relationship to adjacent structure when viewed in plan.

    577,    for a reversible group of rolling earth working elements.

    581,    for groups of disks changeable to different arrangements.

    702+,   for a reversible part. Where the rearrangement of a tool results
    merely from reversing a nonrolling tool or part thereof, a standard, or a
    reversible part between such a tool and a standard or the standard and a
    beam, classification is in subclasses 702+.

    735,    for an earth working element adjustable to prevent a different
    working portion.


CLS 172/255
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means for lifting an earth
    working element out of the ground or lowering the element into ground
    engagement responsive to a change in the direction of movement of the
    apparatus over the ground or responsive to a steering means for changing
    the direction of movement of the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278+,   for apparatus with actuating means for horizontally angling the
    axis of rotation of a ground wheel, which angling may be accompanied by a
    vertical movement of the wheel with respect to its carrying frame but there
    being no turning of the implement as a result of the wheel angling,
    particularly subclasses 279+ for an implement part interconnected with a
    motor vehicle steering means, subclass 283 for a wheel on a trailing
    implement responding to turning movement and interconnected with an
    adjustable earth working element, and subclass 287 for a wheel on a
    nonself-propelled device having means to angle it horizontally and
    interconnected with an earth working element.  In subclasses 279+, 283, and
    287 the earth working element does not move off or into the ground
    responsive to turning movement.

    383+,   for apparatus with a ground wheel whose axis of rotation may be
    adjusted to different angular positions and in which horizontal angling may
    be accompanied by vertical wheel movement but there being no turning of the
    implement as a result of the wheel angling.


CLS 172/256
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising (1) a self-propelled
    vehicle having means such that an attendant walking on the ground may guide
    the vehicle, or (2) a vehicle made up of a self-propelled frame section
    having a ground wheel and another frame section having a ground wheel
    connected to the self-propelled section by a pivot means providing a
    vertical axis, the self-propelled section when in use being unstable except
    for its connection to the other section.

    (1)     Note.  The disclosure of an unstable tractor (e.g., one or two
    wheel) which is guided by a walking attendent will be classified under this
    definition even though (1) the guiding means (e.g., handles) or (2) the
    motor, is not claimed, provided the claim includes some recitation of (1)
    the tractor or tractor frame, or (2) the handles, respectively.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42+,    for an implement with a drive means for a tool or cleaner and
    guided by a walking attendant.

    329+,   for an implement comprising a vehicle other than a self-propelled
    vehicle and guided by a walking attendant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 14.7+, for a harvester deriving its motive
    power from a tractor to which it is hitched, and 16.7+, for a motor-driven
    lawn mower guided by a walking attendant.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 19.1+ for a motor driven vehicle guided
    by a walking attendant.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 47.11 for a wheeled vehicle in which the
    wheel is steered by the attendant.


CLS 172/257
TXT Apparatus under subclass 256 in which the apparatus is guided by an
    attendant riding thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    433,    for a riding attachment on other than a self-propelled implement.


CLS 172/258
TXT Apparatus under subclass 256 comprising an endless track traction means or
    a drive for one ground wheel only.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 414.5 for articulated vehicles having an
    actuator for vertically moving a wheel of a trailing vehicle.


CLS 172/259
TXT Apparatus under subclass 256 in which a ground wheel may be vertically
    adjustable with respect to its carrying frame.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "adjustable" see the class definition.


CLS 172/260
TXT Apparatus under subclass 256 having an actuator for causing an earth
    working element to move vertically with respect to its supporting frame.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "actuator" see the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257,    for apparatus in which there is an unstable propulsion unit
    vertically pivotally connected to another section with a riding attendant
    and there is also a means for causing an earth working element to move
    vertically.


CLS 172/260.5
TXT HAVING TOOL OVERLOAD SHIFT CONTROLLED BY A FLUID PRESSURE DEVICE:

    Apparatus under the class definition including (a) an earth working
    element; (b) means permitting the element to change position with respect
    to the ground, or with respect to its supporting or propelling means, when
    it meets an obstacle while being drawn over the ground, and (c) a fluid
    pressure responsive means (e.g., a hydraulic system) to yieldingly resist
    the change in position of the element.

    (1)     Note.  The patents classified herein include overload shift
    mechanisms of the type found in this class, either in subclasses 261+ or
    subclasses 705+, but also with the recitation of fluid pressure responsive
    means to control the overload shifting.  This subclass is intended to
    provide a locus for fluid pressure responsive tool overload shift
    mechanisms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    111,    Planting, subclass 151 for a trip mechanism claimed in combination
    with a planting machine.


CLS 172/261
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising an earth working element
    and means permitting the element to shift with respect to the earth or with
    respect to its supporting or propelling means when it meets an obstacle
    while being drawn over the field, said means (1) having a high initial
    resistance to said shifting of the element, which resistance decreases
    after the element starts to shift, or (2) requiring manual resetting by an
    attendant (e.g., a shear pin).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     for driven earth working elements having the teeth or like earth
    working part or portions thereof so flexibly or yieldably  mounted on a
    driven carrier member that said teeth or like parts or portions will yield
    on encountering an obstacle.

    233+,   for an obstruction feeler for moving an implement to avoid an
    obstruction, including devices for forming small dams in the ground having
    feelers sensing accumulations of earth.

    238,    for a ground support moved vertically relative to a frame by a
    draft force.

    528+,   for a rolling earth working element with means for stopping or
    retarding its motion.

    683,    for an earth working element latched in earth working position, the
    latch being manually releasable.

    705+,   for spring-biased tools in which the spring resistance remains
    constant or increases as the tool shifts from normal working position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    111,    Planting, subclass 151 for a trip mechanism claimed in combination
    with a planting machine.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 9 for unearthing
    devices with overload release.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 14.5 for vehicle trains with an overload
    release.  The trailing vehicle in subclass 14.5 may be a broadly named
    implement combined with means to control the application of pulling power
    on the occurrance of an overload.

    280,    Land Vehicles subclasses 449+ for articulated vehicles with an
    overload release connection between them.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, subclasses 30+ for an overload release device in rotary
    drive elements.


CLS 172/262
TXT Apparatus under subclass 261 in which the earth working element, upon the
    occurrence of an overload, shifts to an inoperative position and a second
    earth working element is brought into operative position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    528+,   for a rolling earth working element with means to stop or retard
    rotation at will.


CLS 172/263
TXT Apparatus under subclass 261 in which there is an actuator which is
    separated from adjacent and associated structure when the earth working
    element shifts.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "actuator" see the class definition.


CLS 172/264
TXT Apparatus under subclass 261 wherein resilient means is employed to resist
    shifting of the element, the resilient means returning the element to
    operative position after passing of the overload.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    705+,   for spring-biased tools in which the spring resistance remains
    constant or increases as the tool shifts from normal working position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 455 for articulated vehicles having an
    overload release of the type having a pivoted jaw or hook with a resilient
    keeper.


CLS 172/265
TXT Apparatus under subclass 264 wherein the movable element pivots about a
    fixed point on the support.

    (1)     Note.  This definition excludes those devices in which the movable
    element pivots about an axis and the axis also moves as a result of the
    overload shift.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 452+ for articulated vehicles having an
    overload release of the type having a pivoted jaw or hook.


CLS 172/266
TXT Apparatus under subclass 265 including two links pivoted to one another,
    one of the links also being pivoted to the implement and the other of the
    links being also pivoted to the support, the links being so positioned as
    to offer a high initial resistance to movement of the tool from working
    position and a decreased resistance after some movement has occurred.


CLS 172/267
TXT Apparatus under subclass 266 in which the angularity between the links when
    in a normal or unshifted position is adjustable.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "adjustable" see the class definition.


CLS 172/268
TXT Apparatus under subclass 266 in which the axes of the two links are
    disposed at an angle to each other of less than 900 when the implement is
    in the normal or unshifted position.


CLS 172/269
TXT Apparatus under subclass 261 wherein the element is substantially rigidly
    held in place by a resiliently biased latch device until a predetermined
    overload occurs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270,    for an element held in position by mere frictional resistance with
    an adjacent element and overcomes the frictional resistance to move upon
    the occurrence of an abnormal load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 455 for articulated vehicles having an
    overload release of the type having a pivoted jaw or hook with a resilient
    keeper.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, subclasses 37+ for an overload release coupling including a
    resiliently biased positive drive connection.


CLS 172/270
TXT Apparatus under subclass 261 wherein a friction clamp is employed to
    rigidly hold the element in place until a predetermined overload occurs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    269,    for an element held in position by a resilient latch which yields
    upon overload to permit the element to shift.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, subclasses 30+ for friction drive connections in rotary
    drive overload release devices.


CLS 172/271
TXT Apparatus under subclass 261 wherein the element is rigidly held in place
    by means destructible upon the occurrence of a predetermined overload.

    (1)     Note.  The destructible means is usually a break pin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 451 for articulated vehicles having an
    overload release of the frangible type.


CLS 172/272
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a self-propelled vehicle
    and specifically claimed means to permit and facilitate rapid attachment of
    an implement thereto with a minimum amount of labor.

    (1)     Note.  It is recognized that the terms "rapid attachment" and
    "minimum amount of labor" are difficult to limit and define.  The
    attachment should be accomplished without the necessity of tools and/or
    with little or no direct manual effort required on the part of an attendant
    to position the implement.

    (2)     Note.  The following is illustrative of subject matter included
    under this definition:

     (a)    Apparatus in which a preliminary or pilot connection is made which
    supports or positions the implement or implement part on the tractor before
    the principal connection is completed.

     (b)    Apparatus in which the connection can be completed by engaging an
    implement part with a tractor part without the addition of a separate
    connecting member (the connection may be tightened after engagement).

     (c)    Apparatus in which the tractor is driven into interfitting relation
    with the implement (e.g., self-coupling) or in which the connection can be
    completed without the necessity of the attendant leaving the tractor.

    (3)     Note.  If a self-propelled vehicle is disclosed it need not be
    claimed as such for classification under this definition.  Any reference in
    the claim to a structure disclosed as a self-propelled vehicle is
    sufficient.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 477+ for means to facilitate the
    connection of articulated vehicles.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 35.1+ for devices for
    securing a body to a vehicle.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for joints and
    connections of general application.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 563 for towing apparatus
    adapted to engage one end of a vehicle and elevate it into towing position,
    and subclasses 697+ for material moving devices with a vertically swinging
    load support of the tilting shovel or fork type with means to facilitate
    mounting them upon a motor vehicle.


CLS 172/273
TXT Apparatus under subclass 272 in which an earth working element is entirely
    located in front of the rearmost point of the frame or wheels of the
    self-propelled vehicle when connected thereto in working relationship.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    297+,   for tools mounted forward of the rear of a self-propelled vehicle.


CLS 172/274
TXT Apparatus under subclass 272 in which the implement is provided with
    ground-support means (e.g., wheel or stand) to sustain a portion of the
    weight thereof, said ground-support means being separate from the
    ground-support of the self-propelled vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  This definition does not include a runner or landside which
    forms part of or is closely associated with an earth working element.

    (2)     Note.  The ground support may be operative only when the implement
    is disconnected from the self-propelled vehicle or may be operative at all
    times.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 763.1 for a land vehicle having a
    retractable ground support to stabilize the vehicle when not in use,
    subclasses 423.1+ for semi-trailers with landing gear, and subclass 475 for
    articulated vehicles having a retractable ground support.


CLS 172/275
TXT Apparatus under subclass 272 in which the self-propelled vehicle and
    implement assume a coupled or connected relationship as a result of
    relative movement toward one another in a horizontal plane and require no
    manual manipulation at the time of making the connection.

    (1)     Note.  This definition includes apparatus where a manual
    manipulation may be required to preset or condition one of the connecting
    members for the connecting action prior to relative movement and actual
    connection of the parts.

    (2)     Note.  This definition includes apparatus having a plurality of
    connecting points between the self-propelled vehicle and implement wherein
    at least one of the points is self-coupling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 434+ and 508+ for coupling devices
    between articulated vehicles which are automatically connected by movement
    of one of the vehicles toward the other.


CLS 172/278
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising (1) an actuating means for
    moving the axis of rotation of a ground wheel to different positions of
    adjustment in a horizontal angular direction with respect to the running
    gear, or (2) means to change the horizontal angular direction of the axis
    of rotation of a ground wheel mounted on an implement with respect to the
    running gear in response to articulative movement between the implement and
    propulsion means for the implement.

    (1)     Note.  The terminology "actuating means" as used above is meant to
    include "steering" or an "actuator" as defined in the class definition.

    (2)     Note.  There must be some specific description in a claim of the
    steering means or a specific relationship to the steering means for
    classification under this definiton; merely calling for a steerable tractor
    or steerable wheel is not enough.

    (3)     Note.  The "running gear" is the framework most intimately
    connected with the wheels.  It does not include a mere draft tongue.  For
    steering a trailing vehicle by swinging a draft tongue relative to its
    wheels see subclasses 324+.

    (4)     Note.  Means for changing the direction of a freely swiveling
    caster by swinging the running gear are not included.  There must be some
    means for positively causing the wheel to turn with respect to its running
    gear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23+,    for an implement guided by a stationary object, including an
    implement guided by a feeler element running in a previously made furrow.

    256+,   especially 257 for steering devices comprising means for swinging
    an unstable propulsion unit with respect to another unit pivoted thereto on
    a vertical axis.

    383+,   for devices in which the axis of a wheel is angularly adjustable
    but there are not actuating means for making the adjustment.

    580,    for disk gangs with power means for horizontally angling them.

    591+,   for disk gangs with handle-operated horizontal angling means.

    799,    for a vehicle with a scraper between front and rear supports and
    means for horizontally angling a ground wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 244.1 for furrow followers for guiding a vehicle
    along the furrow.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 6.2+ for vehicles steered by driving and
    subclasses 400+ for steering gear.

    280,    Land Vehicles, appropriate subclasses for steering mechanisms for
    wheeled vehicles and see (1) Note in subclass 400 (Class 280) for a further
    statement of the line, and subclass 87.2 for a steering gear that controls
    a wheel which is offset from the main running gear.


CLS 172/279
TXT Apparatus under subclass 278 in which the steering means is for steering a
    wheel of a self-propelled vehicle and is connected to an earth working
    device by a linkage so that movement of the steering means causes movement
    of a part of the earth working device relative to other parts or a movement
    of the earth working device with respect to the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255,    for means interconnected with a steering means for moving an
    implement vertically responsive to turns.

    282,    for an implement having an articulated connection with a propulsion
    means, the implement having a ground wheel which turns on turning movement
    of the propulsion means due to a connection with the propulsion means
    itself rather than a connection with the steering linkage of the propulsion
    means.


CLS 172/280
TXT Apparatus under subclass 279 wherein the element of said device which is
    moved comprises a ground wheel or the like.

    (1)     Note.  The mere motion of a caster wheel on the device due to a
    movement of said device is not included.  There must be some linkage for
    positively causing movement of the wheel of the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282,    for a wheel on a device carrying an earth working element which is
    moved in response to turning movement of a propulsion means rather than by
    a means connected with the steering linkage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 419 for articulated vehicles having
    interconnected steering of the plural units.


CLS 172/281
TXT Apparatus under subclass 279 wherein the portion of the device which is
    moved is an earth working element mounting means extending crosswise of the
    line of draft and movable relative to its support in an endwise direction.


CLS 172/282
TXT Apparatus under subclass 278 in which the ground wheel whose position is
    changeable is on an implement which trails behind and has an articulated
    connection with a propulsion means such that the wheel is caused to turn
    relative to the implement by turning movement of the propulsion means
    relative to the implement.

    (1)     Note.  A freely swiveling caster wheel is not included.  There must
    be some means for positively causing the wheel to turn when the propulsion
    means turns.

    (2)     Note.  A hitch attached to a swinging axle carrying wheels so as to
    swing the axle with respect to the running gear when the propulsion means
    turns is included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280,    for an implement wheel connected with the steering linkage of a
    self-propelled vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 426 for articulated vehicles wherein the
    wheels of a semi-trailer are steered as a result of the articulate motion,
    and subclasses 442+ for articulated vehicles wherein the wheels are steered
    by articulative movement.


CLS 172/283
TXT Apparatus under subclass 282 wherein the ground wheel and an earth working
    element supported by the implement frame are interconnected whereby when
    the wheel is caused to turn the earth working element is also caused to
    move relative to the frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255,    for an implement in which an earth working element is moved
    vertically responsive to turning.

    287,    for a steering wheel interconnected with an earth working element
    wherein the wheel is mounted on a non-self-propelled device.


CLS 172/284
TXT Apparatus under subclass 282 in which the horizontal angularity of the axis
    of rotation of the ground wheel is selectively adjustable independently of
    the change caused by turning movement of the propulsion means.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "adjustable" see the class definition.


CLS 172/285
TXT Apparatus under subclass 282 in which a wheel located to the rear of the
    tool is angled.

    (1)     Note.  If more than one tool is present, the wheel must be behind
    all the tools.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    283,    for actuated wheels on trailing implements interconnected with an
    adjustable tool and located to the rear of the tool.

    284,    for actuated wheels on trailing implements provided with additional
    angular adjusting means.

    291,    for a steerable wheel on a nonself-propelled implement in which the
    wheel is behind the tool.


CLS 172/286
TXT Apparatus under subclass 278 in which the said wheel is part of an
    implement frame which does not carry its own propelling means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    799,    for a nonself-propelled vehicle with a scraper between front and
    rear supports and means for horizontally angling a ground wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 80.1+ for steering means for the running
    gear of wheeled vehicles.


CLS 172/287
TXT Apparatus under subclass 286 wherein the wheel and an earth working element
    supported by the frame are interconnected whereby when the wheel is caused
    to turn the earth working element is also caused to move relative to the
    frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212,    for an implement which is adustable to move soil in opposite
    directions and having a wheel whose position is changed in response to the
    adjustment.

    255,    for an implement with an earth working element which is moved
    vertically when the implement is turned.

    279,    for an implement part interconnected with a self-propelled vehicle
    steering means.

    283,    for a wheel interconnected with an earth working element which
    turns in response to turning movement of the propulsion means.


CLS 172/288
TXT Apparatus under subclass 286 in which two or more wheels are interconnected
    whereby they are constrained to move relative to one another when angled.


CLS 172/289
TXT Apparatus under subclass 288 in which there are two wheels each of which is
    mounted on its individual axle and wherein the axles are aligned
    transversely of the implement and are interconnected for concurrent
    movement.


CLS 172/290
TXT Apparatus under subclass 286 wherein two wheels are supported by one axle
    mounted for pivotal swinging movement about a vertical axis.


CLS 172/291
TXT Apparatus under subclass 286 in which the wheel is located to the rear of
    the tool.

    (1)     Note.  If more than one tool is present the wheel must be behind
    all of the tools.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    283,    for actuated wheels on trailing implements interconnected with an
    adjustable tool and located to the rear of the tool.

    284,    for actuated wheels on trailing implements provided with additional
    angular adjusting means.

    285,    for actuated wheels on trailing implements which are located to the
    rear of the tool.


CLS 172/292
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a motor or motor-actuated
    means for traversing an implement over the ground.

    (1)     Note.  Self-propelled or tractor-propelled implements are common in
    this art.  In order for a patent to be classified under this definition the
    propulsion means must be recited in some detail.  The mere recitation of a
    motor is not enough.  However, a broad reference to a wheel substitute such
    as a tracklaying means on a tractor is sufficient.  Also a recitation of a
    relationship with the propulsion means such as the statement that an
    implement hitch arm is connected to a differential housing (as distinct
    from merely a rear axle housing) is enough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114+,   for specific propelling means for driven tools.

    256+,   for a propulsion unit guided by a walking attendant or part of an
    articulated vehicle.

    352,    for manually driven stepper-type propulsion means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses for power
    transmitting means.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, appropriate subclasses for self-propelled vehicles.

    280,    Land Vehicles, appropriate subclasses for specific propelling means
    for land vehicles.

    305,    Wheel Substitutes for Land Vehicles, appropriate subclasses for
    track or stepper means for vehicles.


CLS 172/293
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising power driven actuating
    means and means whereby a plurality of like elements (such as earth working
    elements or wheels) are moved one after another by the actuating means
    after only one setting of a control device for the actuating means.

    (1)     Note.  Manually actuated devices are excluded.  Power is derived
    from a motor such as a servomotor or by a mechanical power take-off as from
    a rolling wheel or motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    407,    for a ground support which is vertically adjustable relative to a
    frame by power-operated means.


CLS 172/294
TXT Apparatus under subclass 293 in which the actuating means comprises a
    plurality of servomotors which are serially operated to correspondingly
    move the separate parts of the apparatus.


CLS 172/295
TXT Apparatus under subclass 293 in which at least one of the like elements
    comprises an earth working element which is mounted on a self-propelled
    vehicle forwardly of the rear of said vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    294,    for a plurality of like elements sequentially operated by
    servomotors.


CLS 172/296
TXT Apparatus under subclass 293 in which the power-driven actuating means
    comprises a rotatable shaft having radially projecting portions arranged at
    longitudinally and circumferentially spaced points on said shaft, and means
    operatively connected to the like elements of the apparatus for
    sequentially moving them, said means being located in the paths of said
    radially projecting portions so that the lost motion due to the
    circumferential spacing of the portions causes sequential motion of said
    parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    407,    for a ground support which is vertically adjustable relative to a
    frame by power-operated means.


CLS 172/297
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising an earth working element
    which is entirely located in front of the rearmost point of the frame or
    wheels of a self-propelled vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  Patents having a sole specific disclosure of an earth
    working element forward of the rear of a self-propelled vehicle are
    classified under this definition even if the location is not claimed,
    provided that some reference to the vehicle is made in the claims. The
    reference to the vehicle may be no more than a reference to a frame
    disclosed as rigidly attached to the vehicle.

    (2)     Note.  The rearmost point is determined by the direction of
    movement of the vehicle when in use, the earth working element being ahead
    of the rear in the direction of movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273,    for an earth working element located forward of the rear of a
    self-propelled vehicle and having means to facilitate mounting of the
    element thereon.

    295,    for a plurality of tools, which are sequentially operated by a
    power cycle, at least one of which is located forward of the rear of a
    motor vehicle.

    780     and 781+, for a scraper between front and rear ground supports of a
    vehicle.

    810+,   for an earth working element in front of a self-propelled vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 780+ for four-wheeled scrapers in which
    the scraper is mounted ahead of the rear wheels.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 496 for articulated vehicles having the
    point of connection of the draft means for a trailing vehicle located
    forward of the axis of the rear axle of the leading vehicle.

    293,    Vehicle Fenders, subclass 58 for individual wheel guards attached
    to vehicles and extending downwardly in front of each front wheel to clear
    objects from the path of the wheel.


CLS 172/298
TXT Apparatus under subclass 297 in which the earth working element ahead of
    the rear of the motor vehicle is part of an implement which has a wheel or
    wheel substitute which is separate and distinct from the motor vehicle
    ground support means.

    (1)     Note.  If the ground support under this definition comprises a
    wheel substitute, it must be a wheel substitute as defined in subclass 387
    of this class.  This definition does not include a runner or landside
    forming a part of or closely associated with an earth working element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    832     and 834, for an implement mounted ahead of a motor vehicle and
    having a ground support.


CLS 172/299
TXT Apparatus under subclass 297 provided with an actuator for lifting the
    earth working element out of ground contact to transport position, said
    actuator including a power means comprising a servomotor or a power
    take-off and (1) having means operative to permit movement of the power
    means output member without moving the earth working element, the range of
    movement being such that the earth working element may remain in working
    position or transport position while the power means output member
    traverses its full range of movement between transport and working position
    or (2) having means for preventing operation of the power means in addition
    to the normal controls for the power means.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "actuator" see the class definition.

    (2)     Note.  Various commonly used means, such as chain connection
    between a rock arm and a drag bar, are inherently capable of being used to
    allow full movement of the power means without moving the earth working
    element, but such devices are not classified under this definition unless
    this function is specifically described.


CLS 172/300
TXT Apparatus under subclass 297 including also an earth working element
    positioned to the rear of the self-propelled vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    295,    for a plurality of tools which are sequentially operated by a power
    cycle, at least one of the tools being located forward of the rear of a
    motor vehicle.


CLS 172/301
TXT Apparatus under subclass 300 provided with actuators for independently
    lifting different earth working elements out of ground contact to transport
    position said actuators including a plurality of power units comprising
    independently operated servomotors or power take-offs.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "actuators" see the class definition of
    "actuator".


CLS 172/302
TXT Apparatus under subclass 301 in which there is a power unit for at least
    one rearwardly mounted unit and a power unit for at least one forwardly
    mounted unit, the power unit for the rearwardly mounted unit being operable
    independently of the power unit for any forwardly mounted unit.


CLS 172/303
TXT Apparatus under subclass 297 provided with an actuator for lifting the
    earth working element out of ground contact to transport position said
    actuator including a power means comprising a servomotor or a power
    take-off and in addition a lever means manipulable by an attendant for
    moving the earth working element or the power means or a part thereof to
    effect an adjustment of the earth working element by human power or for
    acting as an adjustable stop to alter the range of movement imparted to the
    earth working element by the power means.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "actuator" see the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    485,    for a power means for lifting a tool for transport on a wheeled
    frame and having a manual adjusting or actuating means.


CLS 172/304
TXT Apparatus under subclass 297 comprising a plurality of earth working
    elements and a plurality of actuators which are independently operable to
    independently move different earth working elements out of ground contact
    to transport position.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "actuators" see the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230+,   for parallel separate tools alternating for right and left hand
    operation having independently operable means for alternating the operating
    position of the tools, as by raising and lowering the latter.

    301+,   for tools mounted ahead of the rear and to the rear of a motor
    vehicle and having independent power units for raising the tools.

    468,    for a plurality of tools with separate actuators to independently
    lift the tools for transport on a wheeled frame.

    784+,   for a scraper mounted between front and rear ground supports of a
    vehicle and a diverse tool with independently operable actuators for the
    scraper and tool.

    786+,   for a scraper mounted between front and rear ground supports of a
    vehicle and another scraper with independently operable actuators for the
    scrapers.


CLS 172/305
TXT Apparatus under subclass 297 comprising a power device or
    attendant-operated lever such as a handle for moving an earth working
    element to different positions laterally of the line of draft so as to work
    the earth in such different positions.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus comprising an actuating means for moving an earth
    working element in a vertical plane positioned diagonally of the line of
    draft is not included under this definition.  See subclass 309.

    (2)     Note.  The tool moving means may be an actuator to set and hold the
    tool in any of a number of adjusted positions or may be a handle requiring
    the continued application of force by an attendant to hold the tool in the
    desired lateral position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281,    for a tool located forward of the rear of a motor vehicle and which
    is laterally shiftable through interconnection with the vehicle steering
    means.

    781+,   for a scraper mounted between front and rear supports of a vehicle
    with an actuator for moving the scraper laterally.


CLS 172/306
TXT Apparatus under subclass 297 in which the wheel frame has a front and a
    rear axle and there are means (other than the wheel frame) connecting the
    earth working element to the front axle.


CLS 172/307
TXT Apparatus under subclass 297 provided with an actuator for lifting the
    earth working element out of ground contact to transport position including
    a pair of approximately parallel struts pivoted to the earth working
    element and the wheeled frame so as to give the earth working element an
    approximately translatory motion as it is moved between transport and
    working positions.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "actuator" see the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    484,    for an actuating means having parallel links for lifting a tool for
    transport on a wheeled frame.


CLS 172/308
TXT Apparatus under subclass 297 comprising a generally longitudinally
    extending bar supporting an earth working element, means at the rearward
    portion of said bar connecting it to the self-propelled vehicle, an
    actuator for lifting the earth working element out of ground contact to
    transport position and means at the forward portion of said bar connecting
    it to the actuator.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "actuator" see the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    479,    for tools lifted for transport on a wheeled frame by an actuator,
    the tool being pivoted to the frame on a transverse pivot axis and the
    actuating means being connected to the tool forward of the pivot axis.

    788,    for a scraper mounted between front and rear ground supports of a
    vehicle and connected to the vehicle by a push bar which is liftable by an
    actuator.

    810+    particularly 828+, for a motor vehicle having a tool mounted ahead
    of it connected to the vehicle by a push bar which is liftable by an
    actuator.


CLS 172/309
TXT Apparatus under subclass 297 in which the earth working element is movable
    from earth engaging to transport position and is pivoted on a horizontal
    axis extending diagonally of the line of draft in moving between said
    positions.


CLS 172/310
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which there are plural earth
    working devices and plural ground wheels, the different ground wheels or
    groups of ground wheels being intimately associated with different earth
    working devices or groups of earth working devices.

    (1)     Note.  Plural earth working devices and plural wheels are not
    classified under this definition if the wheels are equally associated with
    each ground working device, e.g., a single transverse tool bar supported on
    wheels at each end with trailing drag bars supporting earth working
    elements is not classified under this definition, but a plurality of drag
    bars supporting earth working elements, each drag bar having its own gauge
    wheel is classified under this definition.

    (2)     Note.  The definition includes devices comprising a tractor having
    earth working elements mounted thereon and also propelling an implement
    comprising an earth working element and wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    298,    for plural wheeled implements connected to a motor vehicle, at
    least one of the implements being forward of the rear of the motor vehicle.

    392,    for plural runner supported implements which are relatively movable
    during operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    for wheeled vehicle attachments to receive and hold a rope and that
    are adapted to be released upon appreciable pull on the rope subclasses
    411.1+ for articulated vehicles wherein a plurality of trailing vehicles
    are drawn by a propelling vehicle.


CLS 172/311
TXT Apparatus under subclass 310 comprising a vehicle having associated
    therewith an earth working implement having a wheel, the earth working
    implement being extended laterally from the vehicle and the implement being
    adjustable to a position closer to the longitudinal axis of the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "adjustable" see the class definition.


CLS 172/312
TXT Apparatus under subclass 310 comprising a self-propelled vehicle and a
    trailing implement, a draft connection of the implement to the vehicle
    being forward of the rear axle of the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  The implement may be actually readily detachably coupled to
    the tractor behind the rear axle, but if the tractor carries additional
    structure forming a continuation of the implement beam or frame which
    structure extends to a point forward of the rear axle the device is
    included in this definition.


CLS 172/313
TXT Apparatus under subclass 310 comprising a plurality of transversely spaced
    wheeled implements having separate draft tongues or members for attachment
    to different draft animals or vehicles.


CLS 172/314
TXT Apparatus under subclass 310 comprising at least three implements aligned
    in a direction at an angle other than 90o with respect to the line of
    travel, each implement having a wheel.

    (1)     Note.  Each implement may consist of more than one earth working
    element.


CLS 172/315
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising an earth working device
    trailing behind a propelling vehicle and an actuator completely carried by
    the device, the actuator being under the control of an attendant stationed
    on the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "actuator" see the class definition.

    (2)     Note.  The broad combination defined above is basically very common
    in the art.  For classification under this definition a claim should refer
    to the relationship of the actuator to the vehicle in some significant
    detail to indicate that the actuator is controlled from the vehicle.

    (3)     Note.  A trailing device under the definition must have at least a
    part thereof resting on the ground and after operation of the actuator a
    part of the device must still rest on the ground.

    (4)     Note.  The trailing device comprehends the organization which is
    intended to be attached to the vehicle by the user of the device.

    (5)     Note.  It is difficult at times to determine whether the actuator
    should be considered to be completely carried by the earth working device
    or partly carried by the vehicle.  Generally both the part of the actuator
    for effecting movement and the part for holding something in position must
    be supported on the device but the actuator may react against the vehicle.
    In the case of an actuator of the power take-off type it is sufficient if
    the power take-off clutch is mounted on the device.  In the case of an
    actuator of the hydraulic ram type both the cylinder and the piston of the
    ram must be supported on the device.  In the case of an actuator of the
    lever and ratchet type both the lever and ratchet must be supported on the
    device.  In the case of an actuator of the telescoping internally threaded
    cylinder and externally threaded rod type both the rod and the cylinder
    must be supported on the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    463,    for an actuator carried on an implement adapted to lift the
    implement for transport on a wheeled frame.

    591+,   for horizontally adjustable disk gangs in which a manually operated
    lever is actuated by an attendant not described as being on the tractor and
    the draft force of the tractor then causes an angling movement of the gangs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 407 for articulated vehicles wherein the
    load of a trailer on a leading vehicle is adjusted by adjusting the point
    of application of draft to the leading vehicle, and subclasses 420+ for
    articulated vehicles having service connections.


CLS 172/316
TXT Apparatus under subclass 315 in which the actuator is a servomotor carried
    by the implement.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "actuator" see the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    491,    for implements liftable for transport on a wheeled frame by means
    of a servo-motor.


CLS 172/317
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a vehicle, an earth working
    device trailing behind the vehicle, and an actuator on the vehicle for
    moving parts of the earth working device relative to each other while at
    least some part of the device remains on the ground.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "actuator" see the class definition.

    (2)     Note.  A relative movement of parts incident to lifting the device
    off the ground for transport is not included. Also relative movement which
    results merely from gravity and a lost motion connection is not included,
    as where an implement frame is lifted and a gauge wheel thereupon drops.

    (3)     Note.  Merely rocking an earth working element about a wheel axis
    is not included.  See subclasses 321 and 322+ for such devices.

    (4)     Note.  The parts which are usually relatively moved are an earth
    working element with respect to the implement frame or a gauge wheel with
    respect to the implement frame.


CLS 172/318
TXT Apparatus under subclass 317 comprising an actuator carried on the vehicle
    and connected to an implement so that movement of the actuator causes some
    relatively vertical motion to occur between the implement wheel, or wheel
    substitute, and the frame of the implement which carries said wheel.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "actuator" see the class definition.

    (2)     Note.  The actuator must apply some positive force to the wheel
    axle. Merely lifting the implement frame and thereby dropping the wheel due
    to a lost motion connection is not included. See subclass 321 for such
    apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238,    for apparatus in which a wheel is moved vertically with respect to
    its running gear in response to the draft load.

    293+,   for devices of this nature in which the wheels are sequentially
    operated by a power cycle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 407 for articulated vehicles wherein the
    load of a trailer on a leading vehicle is adjusted by adjusting the point
    of application of draft to the leading vehicle, and subclass 414.5 for
    articulated vehicles having an actuator for vertically moving a wheel of a
    trailing vehicle.


CLS 172/319
TXT Apparatus under subclass 318 in which there is a means for moving the hitch
    connection of the implement with the vehicle, the hitch moving means being
    interconnected in operation with the wheel moving means.

    (1)     Note.  The interconnecting means must be something additional in
    the structure such as a linkage.  Apparatus in which the hitch moves merely
    because relative movement of the wheel moves the implement beam or frame is
    not included.  Such apparatus is found in subclass 318.


CLS 172/320
TXT Apparatus under subclass 317 in which the earth working device comprises a
    group of rolling- generally circular platelike elements, each having the
    same axis of rotation, the actuator on the vehicle being effective to
    adjust said axis in a horizontal plane.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "actuator" see the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    584+    and 599, for disk gangs in which the axis of rotation of the gang
    may be adjusted.


CLS 172/321
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a vehicle having associated
    therewith an earth working device including a ground wheel, said vehicle
    carrying an actuator for moving the earth working device.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "actuator" see the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    298,    for a wheeled implement mounted ahead of the rear of a motor
    vehicle and means on the vehicle for moving the implement.

    832     and 834, for a wheeled implement mounted ahead of a motor vehicle
    and means on the vehicle for moving the implement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 407 for articulated vehicles wherein the
    load of a trailer on a leading vehicle is adjusted by adjusting the point
    of application of draft to the leading vehicle, and subclasses 490.1+ for
    articulated vehicles wherein the draft means may be vertically adjusted
    with respect to at least one of the vehicles or the ground.


CLS 172/322
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a ground wheel having an
    axis of rotation, a member extending radially from the axis of rotation and
    pivotally connected thereto, an earth working element connected to said
    member, and an actuator for pivotally moving said member and earth working
    element about the axis of rotation without changing the position of the
    earth working element with respect to the member.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition for the meaning of "actuator".

    (2)     Note.  The movement of an earth working element about the axis of a
    ground wheel which may take place when a wheel of a stable wheeled frame is
    adjusted vertically with respect to the frame and another wheel is not
    included under this definition.  See subclasses 395+ for such devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329+,   for apparatus comprising an earth working element rockable about a
    wheel axis by a handle held in position by an attendant.


CLS 172/323
TXT Apparatus under subclass 322 in which an unstable frame carrying the ground
    wheel is moved with respect to the ground by the actuator.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "actuator" see the class definition.

    (2)     Note.  It is sometimes difficult to say whether or not a part
    should be considered a frame carrying the ground wheel or merely a frame
    carrying an earth working element.  The frame carrying the ground wheel is
    the running gear of the apparatus.  If it is shown as supporting a seat for
    the attendant or directly attached to a hitch means such as a tongue it is
    considered to be the running gear or "frame" of the definition.

    (3)     Note.  The "unstable frame carrying the gound wheel" of the
    definition is a frame which relies on a draft connection to a propelling
    means such as a tractor or horse or on the contact of an earth working tool
    with the ground to keep it in a fixed position, e.g., a two wheeled frame
    is unstable while one with more than two wheels on different axes is
    stable.  A frame is considered to be unstable if it is "unstable" in any
    position of adjustment, e.g., as when an actuator causes a wheel of a
    stable frame to leave the ground to thereby cause the frame to be of the
    "unstable" type. See subclasses 395+ for a stable wheeled frame carrying an
    earth working element, the stable frame being tilted about the axis of a
    wheel by a vertical adjustment of another wheel relative to the frame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 109 for an apparatus
    comprising an unearthing unit on a vehicular break frame.


CLS 172/324
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a framework having a ground
    support (e.g., wheels or wheel substitutes) a draft means for connecting it
    to a propulsion means and an actuator on the framework or draft means for
    moving the draft means vertically relative to the framework or laterally of
    the line of draft.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "actuator" see the class definition.

    (2)     Note.  The draft means may be a tongue, and a movement of the
    tongue is considered a movement of the draft means.

    (3)     Note.  Relative movement of the draft means and the frame caused
    merely by a relative movement of the ground support with respect to the
    frame (e.g., a tongue truck moved vertically with respect to the main
    frame) is not included under this definition.  The actuator must include
    force-exerting means acting between the frame and draft means.  See
    subclasses 395+ for a ground support relatively adjustable vertically with
    respect to the frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315+,   for apparatus in which a draft means is moved with respect to a
    wheeled frame by an actuator on the wheeled frame claimed in detail as
    controlled from a propelling vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 218 for harvesters with adjustable tongues.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 83 for a vertically adjustable tongue
    truck, subclasses 456.1+ for a laterally adjustable hitch between a tractor
    and trailer, particularly, subclasses 467+ for a laterally adjustable
    trailer tongue, subclasses 463+ for articulated vehicles having actuator
    means provided for selective adjustment of the draft means on the trailing
    vehicle, and subclass 490.1 for a vertically adjustable hitch between a
    tractor and trailer.


CLS 172/325
TXT Apparatus under subclass 324 in which the draft means comprises a tongue on
    the framework, and an earth working element is connected to the tongue so
    as to be rigidly related to it and to move with it when it is moved by the
    actuator.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "actuator" see the class definition.

    (2)     Note.  The earth working element may be adjustable with respect to
    the tongue but must be rigidly related to it in any position of adjustment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    111,    Planting, subclass 56 for forward and rearward sections connected
    by a transverse pivot and capable of a buckling action to lift certain
    parts of the planter.


CLS 172/326
TXT Apparatus under subclass 324 in which the draft means is moved vertically
    with respect to the framework.

    (1)     Note.  In those devices in which the hitch means has a very minor
    vertical movement due to its manner of support on the frame but
    accomplishes its function due to a horizontal component of motion,
    classification is not under this definition.  Such devices may be found in
    subclasses 588 and 605.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323,    for apparatus comprising unstable wheeled frames on earth working
    element and an actuator for rocking the earth working element about the
    wheel axis and moving the frame with respect to the ground whereby the
    hitch means move vertically with respect to the frame.

    395+,   for apparatus in which a wheel is adjusted vertically with respect
    to the frame, whereby the draft means is moved vertically with respect to
    the frame, there being no means acting between the frame and draft means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 109 for an unearthing
    unit mounted on a vehicular break frame.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 407 for articulated vehicles wherein the
    load of a trailer on a leading vehicle is adjusted by adjusting the point
    of application of draft to the leading vehicle, and subclass 414.5 for
    articulated vehicles having an actuator for vertically moving a wheel of a
    trailing vehicle.


CLS 172/327
TXT Apparatus under subclass 326 in which a ground support is vertically
    adjustable with respect to the framework.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "adjustable" see the class definition.

    (2)     Note.  Devices in which the framework tilts about the wheel axis
    are not included in this definition.  See subclasses 323 or 326 for such
    devices.


CLS 172/328
TXT Apparatus under subclass 327 in which the adjustable ground support and the
    adjustable hitch are interconnected so that movement of one influences
    movement of the other.

    (1)     Note.  Devices in which the ground support and hitch means are
    rigidly mounted on the same support to move together are not included.  The
    interconnection must be by a linkage or the like.


CLS 172/329
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising (1) an earth working
    element having a handle for manipulating and supporting it (e.g., a hand
    hoe) or (2) an implement having a handle whereby the device is guided or
    propelled by a walking attendant (e.g., a walking plow) or (3) an earth
    working element supported on a frame and having means such as handles or
    foot pedals contacted by the attendant to manipulate the earth working
    element, the said element being held in the position to which it is moved
    by continued application of force on the manipulating means by the
    attendant (e.g., a straddle row cultivator) or (4) earth working means
    harnessed to the attendant or worn by him (e.g., a glove with earth
    scratching prongs) or (5) manipulating means such as a handle or foot pedal
    for moving any part (e.g., a draft tongue) and holding it in the position
    to which moved by continued application of force by the attendant.

    (1)     Note.  An earth working element which may be raised by an attendant
    so as to be scraped by a stationary or relatively movable cleaner is not
    included under this definition.  See subclass 461 and subclasses 606+ for
    such devices.

    (2)     Note.  A seat or attendant's station is not considered a handle or
    manipulating device under this definition.  See subclasses 431+ for
    apparatus with means manipulated by moving a seat or shifting weight on a
    seat or other attendant's station.

    (3)     Note.  For part (3) of this definition a broadly claimed implement
    about which an earth working element is manipulated is considered a
    mounting frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for hand driven implements adapted to be rotated through at least
    one complete revolution.

    41,     for a driven tool supported by an attendant.

    42+,    for an implement comprising a driven tool guided by a walking
    attendant.

    256+,   for a motor propelled implement guided by a walking attendant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 110+ for handles and handle
    attaching devices for miscellaneous articles of hardware not otherwise
    classified.

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 340+ for knives and cutter comprising blades
    provided with manipulating handles and including the means for attaching
    said handles to said blades.

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 16.7+, for a motor-driven lawn mower steered
    by a walking attendant, and subclass 400.01, for a hand rake.

    125,    Stone Working, subclass 43 for miner's picks.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 19.1 for a motor vehicle steered by a
    walking attendant.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 47.17+ for a wheeled vehicle which the
    attendant may apply a propelling force thereto, and subclasses 47.34+ for
    stable wheeled vehicles which are handle propelled by an attendant.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 49+ for hand
    forks and shovels.


CLS 172/330
TXT Apparatus under subclass 329 having combined therewith a seat or
    attendant's station which is movable with respect to the apparatus and held
    in position by the attendant and a draft member or tongue for connecting
    the apparatus to a propelling means, the seat and draft member or tongue
    being connected so that movement of the seat changes the position of the
    draft member or tongue with respect to the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    435,    for attendant manipulated seats which may move an implement or
    draft member.


CLS 172/331
TXT Apparatus under subclass 329 including a draft member or tongue for
    connecting the apparatus to a propelling means and attendant manipulated
    means for moving the draft member or tongue with respect to the implement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    330,    for a movable attendant seat for manipulating a draft member
    combined with attendant-operated means for holding the implement in
    position.

    435,    for a movable attendant seat for manipulating a draft member.


CLS 172/332
TXT Apparatus under subclass 329 comprising a ground supported (e.g., wheeled)
    frame, an earth working element movably mounted on the frame and being
    manipulable and held in the position to which moved by the continued
    application of force by the attendant to vary its position with respect to
    the frame.

    (1)     Note.  A mere wheeled axle is not considered a frame under this
    definition even though the earth working element may be rocked on the axle.
     However, a wheeled axle having a draft tongue rigid therewith is
    considered to be a frame under this definition.  Some patents which
    disclose only a wheeled axle have been classified under this definition
    where they are obviously fragmentary disclosures of that type implement
    which comprises a wheeled frame of greater extent (e.g., with tongue).

    (2)     Note.  An earth working element about or upon which another earth
    working element is manipulated is considered a mounting frame.


CLS 172/333
TXT Apparatus under subclass 332 comprising a wheeled frame having the central
    portion thereof elevated above the axis of rotation of the wheels to clear
    a crop row and having a pair of attendant manipulated earth working
    elements adapted to operate on opposite sides of a crop row.

    (1)     Note.  For classification under the definition the means by which
    the earth working elements are manipulated (e.g., handles) need not be
    claimed.


CLS 172/334
TXT Apparatus under subclass 333 including an operator's seat pivoted to the
    frame and also connected to the earth working elements so that the
    operator's weight provides an upward force on the earth working elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    431+,   for other earth working apparatus having a seat or attendant's
    station including that in which the seat is movable by the attendant to
    manipulate the implement.


CLS 172/335
TXT Apparatus under subclass 333 including resilient means to bias the earth
    working elements with respect to the wheeled frame or with respect to each
    other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    705+,   spring-biased earth working elements.


CLS 172/336
TXT Apparatus under subclass 335 in which the resilient means tends to bias the
    earth working elements out of ground engagement during operation.


CLS 172/337
TXT Apparatus under subclass 333 having means to raise the earth working
    elements with respect to the wheeled frame and connected means to
    concurrently change the position of the wheels with respect to the frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    398,    for other earth working elements mounted on a wheeled frame and
    actuating means for lifting the element and also vertically moving a wheel
    with respect to the frame.


CLS 172/338
TXT Apparatus under subclass 333 adapted to be propelled by animals and
    characterized by the absence of a draft tongue.


CLS 172/339
TXT Apparatus under subclass 338 provided with a member to contact the ground
    and stabilize the apparatus when the earth working elements are placed in
    an inoperative position.


CLS 172/340
TXT Apparatus under subclass 333 provided with a plurality of pairs of earth
    working elements adapted to operate on opposite sides of a plurality of
    crop rows.


CLS 172/341
TXT Apparatus under subclass 333 having an additional earth working element
    disposed to operate between the pair of earth working elements.


CLS 172/342
TXT Apparatus under subclass 333 in which the earth working elements of the
    pair or the bars mounting said elements have a laterally extending member
    connecting same in addition to the frame member on which they are mounted.


CLS 172/343
TXT Apparatus under subclass 333 in which the earth working elements are
    adapted to be operated by the feet of an attendant seated thereon.


CLS 172/344
TXT Apparatus under subclass 333 in which the frame is provided with means to
    support the earth working elements in an elevated nonuse position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    662,    for plural relatively movable tools movable to nonuse position.

    674,    for support brackets on wheeled frames for holding an implement in
    nonearth working position.


CLS 172/345
TXT Apparatus under subclass 332 in which an earth working element is movable
    by an attendant about an axis which extends in the direction of travel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    459,    for actuating means for lifting an earth working element for
    transport on a wheeled frame, the earth working element being pivotable
    about a longitudinal axis.

    666,    for an actuator for pivoting an earth working element about a
    longitudinal axis.


CLS 172/346
TXT Apparatus under subclass 332 including a plurality of earth working
    elements which may be manipulated individually or are so connected as to
    move in opposite directions when manipulated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333+,   for arch wheel frame implements provided with a plurality of earth
    working elements which are independently or oppositely manipulated.

    345,    for plural earth working elements which are manipulated about a
    longitudinal axis.


CLS 172/347
TXT Apparatus under subclass 332 in which there is provided a resilient means
    which biases the earth working element during operation.


CLS 172/348
TXT Apparatus under subclass 332 in which the earth working element may be
    manipulated in a vertical direction by the attendant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    345,    for earth working elements which are manipulated about a
    longitudinal axis.


CLS 172/349
TXT Apparatus under subclass 329 in which the earth working element is of the
    rolling or rotating type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    for handle-propelled rolling lawn edgers.

    518+,   for rolling, rotating, or orbitally moving earth working elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    452,    Butchering, subclass 145 for hand- operated meat tenderizing rolls.


CLS 172/350
TXT Apparatus under subclass 349 having a handle which is mounted to be freely
    pivotable about the axis of rotation of the rolling or rotating earth
    working element.


CLS 172/351
TXT Apparatus under subclass 329 comprising (1) an implement having ground
    support means (e.g., wheel) separate from the earth working means and a
    separate handle for propelling or guiding the implement, or (2) draft means
    for propelling the implement and a separate handle for guiding same.

    (1)     Note.  The ground support must act as a depth gauge or support a
    portion of the weight of the implement.

    (2)     Note.  The draft means under part (2) of this definition may
    comprise a member for the application of human power such as a body
    harness.  Note subclass 353 indented hereunder for an implement having a
    harness and separate handle to be propelled and guided by a single
    attendant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256+,   for a hand guided self-propelled implement.

    322,    for earth working elements which are attendant manipulated with
    respect to a ground-supported frame.

    371,    for tools with handles for manipulating and supporting same (i.e.,
    hand tools).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    111,    Planting, subclass 82 for implements propelled by a walking
    attendant.


CLS 172/352
TXT Apparatus under subclass 351 in which the apparatus is propelled by means
    of a member operated by the attendant which reacts with the ground to move
    the apparatus a given distance and the member is then reset to repeat the
    operation.

    (1)     Note.  Search Class 180, Motor Vehicles, subclasses 4 and 8 for
    stepper propulsion means for vehicles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    305,    Wheel Substitutes for Land Vehicles, subclasses 1+ for devices
    comprising ground-engaging feet operating by a step-by-step movement in the
    travel of the vehicle.


CLS 172/353
TXT Apparatus under subclass 351 in which the draft means comprises a means
    adapted to engage or be attached to some part of the body other then the
    hands.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370,    for an operator-supported earth working element having means to
    attach the earth working element to the operator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 1.5 for a vehicle with means for engaging
    the body (other than the hands) of a walking attendant.


CLS 172/354
TXT Apparatus under subclass 351 in which the ground support means comprises a
    wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for lawn edgers provided with a wheel or roller.

    353,    for a tool provided with a handle and a wheel, and having means
    adapted to engage or be attached to some part of the body other than the
    hands for propelling the implement.

    669+,   for a tool supported on a wheeled frame.


CLS 172/355
TXT Apparatus under subclass 354 comprising a plurality of interconnected earth
    working elements which may only be in ground contact at different times and
    being connected to pivot on the axis of rotation of the wheel to engage the
    desired earth working element with the ground.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136,    for diverse tools useable alternately only.


CLS 172/356
TXT Apparatus under subclass 354 in which the implement is provided with two
    wheels spaced in the direction of travel.


CLS 172/357
TXT Apparatus under subclass 354 in which the handle is located forward of the
    earth working element, so as to adapt the apparatus to be pulled by the
    attendant.

    (1)     Note.  The handle may be adjustable so as to adapt the apparatus to
    be pushed or pulled.


CLS 172/358
TXT Apparatus under subclass 354 in which the earth working element is located
    forwardly of the wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    671+,   for an earth working element mounted on a single longitudinal
    wheeled frame in which the wheel is located rearwardly of the forward end
    of the earth working element.


CLS 172/359
TXT Apparatus under subclass 354 in which the earth working element and the
    handle are selectively vertically adjustable relative to one another.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "adjustable" see the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    366,    for an earth working element having a handle in which the handle
    and earth working element are selectively relatively adjustable in relation
    to one another.


CLS 172/360
TXT Apparatus under subclass 351 in which the ground support means comprises an
    element other than a wheel such as, for example, a runner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    387,    for other earth working apparatus having a wheel substitute spaced
    from the earth working elements.

    764,    for earth working elements having closely associated runners and
    see the Search Notes thereto for related art.


CLS 172/361
TXT Apparatus under subclass 351 in which the handle is directly attached to
    that portion of the earth working element which operates in the soil or to
    a runner or landside connected thereto.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include those devices where a brace
    extends from the handle to the earth working blade.


CLS 172/362
TXT Apparatus under subclass 351 in which the earth working element is secured
    to a generally upright member or standard and the standard is secured
    directly to a portion of the handle.


CLS 172/363
TXT Apparatus under subclass 351 having a plurality of relatively adjustable
    earth working elements, handles associated therewith, an individual handle
    and associated earth working element being concurrently adjustable relative
    to another handle and associated earth working element.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "adjustable" see the class definition.


CLS 172/364
TXT Apparatus under subclass 351 in which there is attached to the handle,
    means whereby some portion of the earth working element is adjustable
    relative to some other portion of the earth working element or to the
    apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "adjustable" see the class definition.


CLS 172/365
TXT Apparatus under subclass 351 in which the handle is adjustable with respect
    to the earth working element.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "adjustable" see the class definition.


CLS 172/366
TXT Apparatus under subclass 365 in which the elevation of the handle with
    respect to the earth working element is adjustable.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "adjustable" see the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359,    for an earth working element having a handle and wheel in which the
    handle and earth working element are selectively vertically adjustable
    relative to one another.


CLS 172/367
TXT Apparatus under subclass 351 having a plurality of beams extending
    substantially in the direction of travel and having an earth working
    element or elements connected thereto and a plurality of handles, one
    connected to each of said beams.


CLS 172/368
TXT Apparatus under subclass 351 having a beam extending in the direction of
    travel and a pair of handles connected at their ends to opposite sides of
    the beam at the same longtitudinal location.


CLS 172/369
TXT Apparatus under subclass 368 in which there is provided at least one member
    connected to the handles and another portion of the implement to brace the
    handles.


CLS 172/370
TXT Apparatus under subclass 329 of the type wherein the earth working element
    is harnessed to or worn by the attendant.


CLS 172/371
TXT Apparatus under subclass 329 comprising an earth working means having a
    handle for manipulating and supporting it (e.g., hand hoe).

    (1)     Note.  Mortar mixing hoes are also included on account of their
    similarity of structure.

    (2)     Note.  Patents are classified under this definition even if only
    the earth working portion is claimed and not the handle if the sole
    disclosure relates to hand tools or the claim preamble relates to a hand
    tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13+,    for hand tools of the lawn-edger type.

    349+,   for handle propelled rolling implements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous compound
    tools.

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 110+ for handles for closures,
    receptacles, and the like, and see the Search Notes thereunder for the
    field of search for handles adapted for use with other devices.

    30,     Cutlery, appropriate subclasses for knives and cutting implements
    of general utility.  This class (172) takes patents in which the claims are
    restricted to or the sole disclosed use is an implement for working the
    soil except those devices in which the cutting edge extends generally in
    the direction of the handle.  In the latter case classification in Class 30
    results.

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 400.01+ for hand rakes.

    125,    Stone Working, subclass 43 for miner's picks.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 49+ for hand
    forks and shovels.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 1+ for tools especially adapted for mixing
    mortar, asphaltic and hydraulic cement, concretes, and the like.


CLS 172/372
TXT Apparatus under subclass 371 wherein the relative positions of the handle
    and earth working means is selectively adjustable.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "adjustable" see the class definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 53.5 for hand
    implements wherein the fork or shovel head is pivotally and adjustably
    attached to the handle.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 52+ for articulated connections
    in general.


CLS 172/373
TXT Apparatus under subclass 372 wherein the earth working means comprises
    plural earth working elements which are adjustable with relation to one
    another.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "adjustable" see the class definition.


CLS 172/374
TXT Apparatus under subclass 373 in which at least one of the earth working
    elements is nonadjustably secured to the handle.


CLS 172/375
TXT Apparatus under subclass 371 wherein the earth working means comprises
    plural earth working portions of different types or shapes, the portions
    being so arranged in the apparatus that when one works the earth another
    does not work the earth.

    (1)     Note.  The earth working portions may be different parts of a
    unitary earth working element or may be separate earth working elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136,    for implements other than hand held with earth working elements
    usable alternately only.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, appropriate subclasses for compound tools,
    especially subclasses 158+ for cutters combined with other tools.

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 400.04+ for hand rakes combined with hoe
    blades or other earth working elements.


CLS 172/376
TXT Apparatus under subclass 371 wherein the earth working means is made from
    an elongated thin bandlike or wire material which is secured to the handle
    through means extending between the handle and the opposite ends of the
    earth working means.


CLS 172/377
TXT Apparatus under subclass 371 wherein the earth working means is in the form
    of a U-shaped scoop or channel open at both ends and adapted to be operated
    in the direction of the longitudinal axis of the channel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13+,    for channel-type hand tools for edging along lawns or sidewalks.


CLS 172/378
TXT Apparatus under subclass 371 wherein the earth working means comprises a
    plurality of prongs, teeth, or serratins arranged to simultaneously contact
    the earth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 400.01+ for hand rakes, particularly
    subclasses 400.04+ for rakes combined with earth working elements.  A hand
    rake as distinguished from an earth working tool, is usually an implement
    having flexible teeth or rigid teeth with the width of the rigid tooth
    carrying portion width or diameter of the handle; i.e., at least ten times
    as large.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 131+ and for forks and shovels with fulcrum means to aid in the
    pulling of weeds from the ground.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 50.5 and
    50.6+ for hand implements having a handle and a blade or tines extending
    the general direction of the handle with grappling means.


CLS 172/379
TXT Apparatus under subclass 378 wherein the earth working means comprises a
    plurality of earth working members arranged in a plurality of rows to
    simultaneously engage and work an area of the surface of the earth.


CLS 172/380
TXT Apparatus under subclass 378 wherein a plurality of prongs, teeth, or
    serrations are formed from a single sheet of material.


CLS 172/381
TXT Apparatus under subclass 371 wherein the earth working means has portions
    lying in more than one plane.


CLS 172/382
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a plurality of earth working
    elements so mounted as to operate at different depths in the ground at the
    same time.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include apparatus having a plurality
    of laterally spaced tools set at different elevations for the purpose of
    operating at the same depth in the soil on a slope, furrow, ridge, etc.
    See subclasses 694+ for such tools.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133+,   for separate tools of unlike types which may operate at different
    depths and see particularly subclasses 144 and 163+ for the combination of
    a plow and jointer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 10 for unearthing
    devices with preliminary removal of earth.


CLS 172/383
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a frame, a ground wheel
    connected to the frame and (1) means for adjusting (at least in one
    direction) the axis of rotation of said ground wheel angularly with respect
    to said frame or (2) means for selectively locking said axis of rotation in
    one position or allowing it to move freely into different angular positions
    with respect to said frame.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "adjusting" see "adjustable" in the class
    definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278+,   for implements comprising a wheel with an angularly adjustable axis
    of rotation and actuating means for angularly adjusting the axis.

    395+,   for implements comprising ground wheels which are vertically
    adjustable, with the axis of rotation maintaining the same angular position.

    507,    for implements comprising ground wheels which are horizontally
    adjustable, with the axis of rotation maintaining the same angular position.

    600,    for a disk gang supported for tilting and horizontal angling
    adjustment.

    603,    for a horizontally angularly adjustable disk.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 18+ for caster wheels.

    104,    Railways, subclass 244.1 for furrow followers for guiding a vehicle
    along the furrow.

    280,    Land Vehicles, appropriate subclasses for vehicles with wheels.


CLS 172/384
TXT Apparatus under subclass 383 in which there is an actuator for angling the
    axis of rotation of the wheel by moving it in a single transverse, vertical
    plane.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "actuator" see the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    798,    for a scraper mounted between the front and rear ground supports of
    a vehicle and an actuator for tilting the axis of rotation of a wheel in a
    vertical plane.


CLS 172/385
TXT Apparatus under subclass 383 in which the axis of rotation of the wheel may
    freely change its angular position and the amount of such free movement is
    adjustable.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "adjustable" see the class definition.


CLS 172/386
TXT Apparatus under subclass 383 in which the axis of rotation of the wheel may
    freely change its angular position and there are means operable to hold the
    axis against movement to prevent free change of the angular position of the
    wheel.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus in which there is a latch designed to hold the
    axis of rotation in different positions and which would permit free angular
    movement if manually held out of operation are classified in subclass 383
    rather than under this definition.


CLS 172/387
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a means such as a runner or
    track member which is adapted to support the apparatus for movement over
    the ground and which has the same general relation to the apparatus as a
    supporting ground wheel would have.

    (1)     Note. Earth working elements mounted on a frame which frame may
    incidentally be in ground contact to act as a runner or depth gauge and is
    not specifically modified to act as a runner are not classified under this
    definition, but are classified below according to the earth working element
    or arrangement being claimed.  See subclasses 634+, for example.  A mere
    curving of the foward portion of the frame is not considered to be a
    modification under this definition.

    (2)     Note.  Runners which have earth working elements attached to the
    runners by means of a nonearth working or contacting support or bracket so
    that the tool is spaced laterally or rearwardly of the runners are included
    under this definition.  This definition does not include, however, runners
    which are so closely associated with an earth working element as to, in
    effect, form a unitary portion of the earth working element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     for an implement comprising a driven tool and a wheel substitute.

    188,    for diverse tools attached to a runner rearward of the forward end
    thereof.

    360,    for hand guided or propelled implements provided with runners.

    665,    for apparatus comprising an actuator for relatively movable
    earth-engaging parts of an earth working element, one of said parts being a
    runner.

    738,    for an earth working element having relatively adjustable
    earth-engaging parts, one being a runner.

    764,    for an earth working element and a separate runner.

    783,    for a scraper mounted between front and rear ground supports of a
    vehicle, the scraper having a runner attached thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 244.1 for furrow followers for guiding a vehicle
    along the furrow.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 140 for an unearthing
    unit provided with a gage runner or wheel.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 8+, 841+, and 845+ for runners for
    vehicles, including a runner which may have an earth-penetrating part to
    prevent lateral sway.

    305,    Wheel Substitutes for Land Vehicles, appropriate subclasses for
    wheel substitutes other than runners.


CLS 172/388
TXT Apparatus under subclass 387 which includes a wheel which is adapted to
    support at least a portion of the weight of the device in at least one
    position of the wheel or implement.


CLS 172/389
TXT Apparatus under subclass 387 in which the wheel substitute is associated
    with an earth working element which is of spring form or is carried by a
    resilient standard.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    643,    for an implement having a plurality of spring teeth.

    707+,   for an earth working tool comprising a spring in itself or a spring
    standard.


CLS 172/390
TXT Apparatus under subclass 389 in which a plurality of the earth working
    elements are carried by a plurality of parallel transverse bars which are
    pivotally mounted and selectively rotatable from one angular position of
    adjustment to another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    634+,   for implements with parallel pivotally adjusted tool bars which may
    have spring-tooth tools mounted thereon.


CLS 172/391
TXT Apparatus under subclass 387 in which the wheel substitute is associated
    with an earth working element in which the earth working portion is no
    longer in lateral or longitudinal extent than the standard which supports
    it in earth working position.


CLS 172/392
TXT Apparatus under subclass 387 in which the device comprises a plurality of
    implements which are relatively movable during operation of the device and
    each of the implements have a runner associated therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310+,   for plural wheeled implements.


CLS 172/393
TXT Apparatus under subclass 387 in which the wheel substitute comprises a pair
    of spaced parallel runners, said runners having an earth working element
    associated therewith so that said element is positioned between and
    supported by both runners.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    111,    Planting, subclass 138 for sled frames claimed in combination with
    a planting machine.


CLS 172/394
TXT Apparatus under subclass 387 in which the earth working element comprises a
    circular platelike member which is given a rotating motion by the
    resistance of the earth as it is drawn thereover.

    (1)     Note.  The circular platelike member may be plane, convex or
    concave in cross-section.


CLS 172/395
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a frame, an earth working
    element carried by the frame, means connecting a ground support such as a
    wheel to the frame and means for adjusting the ground support vertically
    with respect to the frame or moving the ground support vertically with
    respect to the frame to some position of adjustment.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "adjustable" see the class definition.

    (2)     Note.  The "frame" in this definition is the running gear or
    structure most closely associated with the ground support.  The "earth
    working element" carried by the "frame" may itself comprise an extensive
    framework.

    (3)     Note.  The relative movement between the frame and ground support
    must be produced by a force other than gravity applied to a wheel axle.
    Merely moving the frame, for example, by lifting the hitch to swing the
    frame about the axis of rotation of the wheel is not included.  See
    subclasses 321 or 323 for such devices.

    (4)     Note.  In that type of apparatus wherein the construction comprises
    a frame, wheels carrying the frame and a front- wheeled draft truck pivoted
    to the frame on a vertical axis and vertically adjustable with respect to
    the frame, the frame has been considered the running gear and the wheeled
    truck has been considered as movable vertically thereto so that such
    apparatus is classifiable under this definition.

    (5)     Note.  A mere spring-mounting means is considered not to be a means
    for moving the wheel to an adjusted position.

    (6)     Note.  The ground support under this definition must be either a
    wheel or a wheel substitute as defined in subclass 387 of this class.  The
    wheel substitute has been included under this definition so as to permit
    cross-referencing of such patents into appropriate subclasses hereunder.

    (7)     Note.  Patents are classified under this definition even if the
    claims refer broadly merely to an implement adjusting means provided that
    the sole specific disclosure relates to a wheel-adjusting means.

    (8)     Note.  A tilting movement of a frame about the axis of a wheel is
    not considered a vertical adjustment of the wheel relative to the frame.
    See subclass 323 for an unstable frame which may carry an earth working
    element and be tilted about a ground wheel axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     for a driven tool with an articulated connection to a vehicle and a
    vertically adjustable ground support.

    211,    for an alternating implement with interrelated lift and shift, the
    lift being by wheel manipulation.

    236,    for ground-engageable draft responsive levers or wheel segments
    which contact the earth to resist motion of the apparatus, continued motion
    of the apparatus causing some adjustment thereof, usually due to a lifting
    force from the lever or wheel segment.

    240+,   for implements comprising ground supports which contact the ground
    for transport only.

    259,    for a propulsion unit guided by a walking attendant or part of an
    articulated vehicle and having a vertically adjustable wheel.

    293+,   for a series of like elements sequentially lifted by vertical
    adjustment of wheels by a power cycle.

    315+,   for an actuator on a trailing implement for vertically adjusting a
    wheel and controlled from a propelling vehicle, the relationship with the
    vehicle being significantly claimed.

    318+,   for an actuator on a vehicle for vertically moving a wheel on a
    trailing implement relative to the implement frame.

    321,    for an actuator on a vehicle for lifting a wheeled implement.

    387,    for an implement comprising a wheel substitute.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 19 for vertically adjustable
    casters, and subclasses 32+ for caster wheel or leg elevators.

    104,    Railways, subclass 244.1 for furrow followers for guiding a vehicle
    along the furrow.

    111,    Planting, subclass 68 for an auxiliary frame elevated and depressed
    by means of a cranked ground-wheel axle.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, especially subclass 139 for
    apparatus comprising an unearthing unit fixed on a vertically shiftable
    vehicle frame, and subclass 109 for an unearthing unit mounted on a
    vehicular break-frame.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 840+ for means to level the body of a
    vehicle with respect to its running gear, subclasses 43+ for a vehicle
    having a wheel that is vertically adjustable with respect to the running
    gear, and subclass 414.5 for articulated vehicles having an actuator for
    vertically moving a wheel of a trailing vehicle.


CLS 172/396
TXT Apparatus under subclass 395 in which the frame carries a draft means for
    connecting the frame to a propelling means, said draft means being (1)
    vertically adjustable relative to the frame to (2) freely vertically
    movable relative to the frame under some conditions of operation and means
    are provided to prevent or limit the vertical movement under other
    conditions of operation.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "adjustable" see the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    319,    for an actuator on a vehicle for moving an implement ground support
    vertically relative to the implement frame interconnected means for moving
    a hitch.

    327+,   for an actuator on a trailing implement for moving a draft means
    vertically and a vertically adjustable ground support.


CLS 172/397
TXT Apparatus under subclass 395 in which the adjustment of the ground support
    is accompanied by movement of an earth working element relative to the
    frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211,    for implements comprising earth working means alternating for right
    or left hand operation and a vertically adjustable ground support for
    lifting the implement, the ground support and earth working means being
    interrelated so that vertical movement of the ground support is accompanied
    by the shifting of the earth working means to its alternate position.

    244,    for apparatus having a ground support engaging the ground for
    transport only where the ground support and a tool are moved together
    relative to a supporting frame.

    323,    for devices in which the tool pivots about a wheel axis which may
    be moved vertically with respect to a frame.


CLS 172/398
TXT Apparatus under subclass 397 in which the earth working element is
    interconnected by a linkage with the ground support so that movement of one
    influences movement of the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    779,    for a scraper whose position is automatically controlled by a
    linkage for leveling, the scraper and a wheel being interconnected to
    influence movement of each other.


CLS 172/399
TXT Apparatus under subclass 395 in which power derived from the rolling motion
    of a plurality of ground wheels as the apparatus is propelled over the
    ground is used to move said wheels or other ground wheels vertically with
    respect to the frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    293+,   for apparatus having a plurality of wheels or other elements which
    are sequentially operated by a power cycle.


CLS 172/400
TXT Apparatus under subclass 395 in which a plurality of wheels are
    independently mounted on different axles and there are additional means
    interconnecting the wheels whereby they may be moved simultaneously
    vertically with respect to the frame or so that the movement of one
    vertically with respect to the frame influences movement of the other, and
    there is an actuator for moving a wheel.

    (1)     Note.  Plural wheels mounted at different ends of a crank axle or
    other axle whereby the wheels move together without use of any connecting
    links or separate power units are considered not to be independently
    mounted on different axles.  Wheels so mounted do not come under the
    definition even if they are adjustable with respect to each other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 6.11 for vehicle body leveling devices
    including actuators for means interconnecting the vehicle wheels whereby
    the wheels are simultaneously moved vertically in opposite directions, and
    subclass 43.13 for vehicles with actuators for means interconnecting the
    wheels so that movement of one results in movement of another.


CLS 172/401
TXT Apparatus under subclass 400 in which three or more wheels each on
    different axles are affected by the action of the interconnecting means.


CLS 172/402
TXT Apparatus under subclass 401 in which power derived from the rolling motion
    of one of said interconnected wheels as the apparatus is propelled over the
    ground is used to move said wheels vertically with respect to the frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    408+,   for a wheel which is carried by a crank axle mount which is
    adjusted by power derived from the wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 211 for harvester frames which are adjusted by
    power derived from a traction wheel.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 47 for a vehicle having an extensible wheel
    that is vertically adjustable by means of power derived from the wheel as
    it rolls over the ground.


CLS 172/403
TXT Apparatus under subclass 400 in which power derived from the rolling motion
    of a ground wheel as the apparatus is propelled over the ground is used to
    move a plurality of said interconnected wheels vertically with respect to
    the frame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 211 for harvester frames which are adjusted by
    power derived from a traction wheel.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 62 for clutches adapted
    for use in raising plows.


CLS 172/404
TXT Apparatus under subclass 403 in which the wheel supplying the power is
    itself moved vertically with respect to the frame by use of said power.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402,    for a power take-off from a self-adjusted wheel for adjusting three
    or more wheels on different interconnected axles.

    408+,   for a wheel which is carried by a crank axle mount which is
    adjusted by power derived from the wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 47 for a vehicle having an extensible wheel
    that is vertically adjustable by means of power derived from the wheel as
    it rolls over the ground.


CLS 172/405
TXT Apparatus under subclass 400 in which one of said interconnected wheels has
    a vertical motion of translation only and another of said interconnected
    wheels pivots about a horizontal axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402,    for apparatus having three or more interconnected adjustable wheels
    on different axles which are operated by a power take-off from one of the
    adjusted wheels and which includes translating and swinging wheels.

    416,    for vertically adjustable ground supports where one translates and
    another swings.


CLS 172/406
TXT Apparatus under subclass 400 in which there is an additional actuating
    means which operates to adjust said interconnected wheels so as to change
    their relative position vertically with respect to said frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402,    for apparatus having three or more interconnected adjustable wheels
    on different axles which are operated by a power take-off from one of the
    adjusted wheels and which includes an additional actuator for changing the
    relative position of some of the wheels.

    470,    for plural tools which are independently actuated to be lifted on a
    wheeled frame for transport with a separate actuator for concurrent lifting
    or with an interlock means for causing simultaneous lifting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 840+ for vehicles with body-leveling
    means.


CLS 172/407
TXT Apparatus under subclass 395 in which movement of the ground support to
    adjusted position is caused by the use of a power means.

    (1)     Note.  A power means may be a servomotor or a continuously running
    source of power (e.g., a rotating ground wheel) with an interruptible power
    take-off.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    293+,   for a plurality of like elements sequentially operated by a power
    cycle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 211 for harvester frames which are adjusted by
    power derived from a traction wheel.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 62 for clutches adapted
    for use in lifting plows.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 43.23 for vehicles having power means to
    vertically adjust its wheels.


CLS 172/408
TXT Apparatus under subclass 407 in which there is an axle connected to a crank
    arm pivotally connected to the framework, a ground wheel is rotatably
    mounted on the axle and there is a means intermittently connectible to the
    ground wheel as it continuously rotates so that turning movement of the
    wheel causes swinging of the crank arm about its pivotal connection to the
    framework to move the wheel vertically with respect to the framework.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402     and 404, for an actuator and interconnected means for adjusting
    wheels on different axles with a power take-off from one of the adjusted
    wheels for operating the actuator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 47 for a vehicle having an extensible wheel
    that is vertically adjustable by means of power derived from the wheel as
    it rolls over the ground.


CLS 172/409
TXT Apparatus under subclass 408 in which the means intermittently connectible
    to the wheel locks said wheel against rotation relative to the pivotally
    mounted crank arm so that rolling movement of the wheel over the ground
    causes movement of the arm with respect to the frame.


CLS 172/410
TXT Apparatus under subclass 408 in which the means intermittently connectible
    with the wheel is a rotatable member mounted on the crank arm to swing
    therewith.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 62 for clutches adapted
    for use in lifting plows.


CLS 172/411
TXT Apparatus under subclass 410 in which the frame may be lowered with respect
    to the wheel to varying depths but is always raised to the same height.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    413,    for constant height depth adjustment for wheels vertically adjusted
    with respect to an implement frame by a servomotor.

    487,    for an actuator adapted to lift a tool for transport on a wheeled
    frame said actuator comprising a power unit with manual adjusting or
    supplemental manual actuating means and there being a constant height depth
    adjustment.


CLS 172/412
TXT Apparatus under subclass 408 in which the means intermittently connectible
    with the wheel is a means pivoted on the frame movable into engagement with
    the actuating wheel or into engagement with a means mounted to turn
    therewith on the same axis so that rolling movement of the wheel acts on
    the means pivoted to the frame to move the wheel relative to the frame.


CLS 172/413
TXT Apparatus under subclass 407 in which the ground support is moved to
    different positions of adjustment by a motor means which operates just long
    enough to effect the desired adjustment.

    (1)     Note.  This definition does not cover a mere power-transmitting
    mechanism intermittently connected to a continuously running source of
    power.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    294,    for a series of like elements sequentially operated by servomotors.

    316,    for a servomotor on a trailing implement for vertically moving a
    wheel, the motor being controlled from a propelling vehicle, the
    relationship with the vehicle being significantly claimed.


CLS 172/414
TXT Apparatus under subclass 395 in which there is an actuator for causing
    adjusting motion of the wheel and the connection between the actuator and
    the wheel is such as to allow at least a certain amount of free movement
    between the two in at least one direction.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "actuator" see the class definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 43.19 for vehicles having vertically
    adjustable wheels which are actuated through a flexible means.


CLS 172/415
TXT Apparatus under subclass 395 in which the ground support has a motion of
    translation relative to the frame when moved from one vertical position to
    another (i.e., the motion is such that parts maintain approximately the
    same angular position relative to a plane parallel to the frame).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 43.22 for vehicles having actuating means
    to move the wheels vertically with a translatory motion.


CLS 172/416
TXT Apparatus under subclass 415 having at least one additional ground support
    which pivots about a horizontal axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    405,    for interconnected translating and swinging wheels.


CLS 172/417
TXT Apparatus under subclass 415 in which the ground support is carried by a
    pair of links pivoted to the ground support and the frame structure,
    respectively, and which remain substantially parallel throughout their
    movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    405,    for interconnected translating and swinging wheels.


CLS 172/418
TXT Apparatus under subclass 415 in which the translating motion is imparted to
    the ground support by an actuator.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "actuator" see the class definition.


CLS 172/419
TXT Apparatus under subclass 418 in which the actuator comprises a pair of
    relatively movable threaded members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    427,    for screw-jack type actuators for vertically adjustable ground
    supports.

    504,    for screw-type actuators for lifting tools for transport on a
    wheeled frame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 43.2 for vehicles having supporting wheels
    which are moved vertically relative to the vehicle frame by a screw-jack
    type actuating means.


CLS 172/420
TXT Apparatus under subclass 418 in which the actuator comprises a rack member
    meshing with a gear or engageable by a ratchet member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 43.21 for vehicles having supporting wheels
    which are moved vertically relative to the vehicle frame by a rack and
    pinion or ratchet actuating means.


CLS 172/421
TXT Apparatus under subclass 395 comprising a plurality of ground supports
    vertically adjustable relative to the frame which are also vertically
    adjustable with respect to one another.


CLS 172/422
TXT Apparatus under subclass 395 in which a plurality of wheels are carried by
    arms which extend radially from and are connected to a common shaft and are
    circumferentially spaced about the axis of said shaft.


CLS 172/423
TXT Apparatus under subclass 395 in which vertical motion is imparted to the
    ground support by an actuator.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "actuator" see the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    418+,   for actuators for imparting a translating motion to a ground
    support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 43.17+ for vehicles having actuating
    means to move the wheels vertically.


CLS 172/424
TXT Apparatus under subclass 423 in which a spring device is provided to assist
    the actuating means in moving the ground support vertically.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    506,    for spring-assisted actuators for lifting tools for transport on a
    wheeled frame.


CLS 172/425
TXT Apparatus under subclass 423 in which the actuator comprises gearing.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of gearing, see Class 74, Machine Element
    or Mechanism, subclass 640.


CLS 172/426
TXT Apparatus under subclass 425 in which the gearing includes a worm gear.


CLS 172/427
TXT Apparatus under subclass 425 in which the gearing includes a pair of
    relatively movable threaded members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    419,    for a screw-jack type actuator for a vertically adjustable ground
    support having translating motion.

    504,    for a screw-type actuator for lifting a tool for transport on a
    wheeled frame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 43.2 for vehicles having supporting wheels
    which are moved vertically relative to the vehicle frame by a screw-jack
    type actuating means.


CLS 172/428
TXT Apparatus under subclass 425 in which the gearing includes a rack member
    meshing with a gear or engageable by a ratchet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    420,    for a rack and pinion or ratchet-type actuator for a ground support
    having a translating motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 43.21 for vehicles having supporting wheels
    which are moved vertically relative to the vehicle frame by a rack and
    pinion or ratchet-actuating means.


CLS 172/429
TXT Apparatus under subclass 423 in which the actuating means comprises a hand
    or foot operated lever rigid with the pivot shaft of a wheel carrying crank.


CLS 172/430
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising (1) means for giving a
    signal or indication of a condition or position of some portion of the
    earth working apparatus or (2) means to be observed by an attendant to aid
    him in maintaining the apparatus on a predetermined course.

    (1)     Note.  The mere positioning of an element of the apparatus is not
    considered enough to give an indication.  There must be some special
    indicia means to come under this definition.

    (2)     Note.  The guide means may comprise an element intended to be
    disposed in or aligned with a previously formed furrow or mark, the
    attendant guiding the apparatus in accordance with the position of the
    element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126+,   for apparatus comprising earth-marking means combined with an earth
    working element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 624+, for collocating gauge
    designed for setting a tool with relation to its support or with relation
    to work in which it is to operate and subclass 264, for sighting means
    attached to a vehicle to aid the driver in maintaining the vehicle on a
    predetermined course.

    104,    Railways, subclass 244.1 for a furrow follower for guiding a
    vehicle, the guiding being accomplished by reaction of the furrow follower
    with the walls of the furrow.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+ for electrical
    automatic condition responsive indicating systems.


CLS 172/431
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a seat or other support for
    an attendant operating the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  There must be some specific claiming of the seat or the
    relationship of the seat or support in structure for classification under
    this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    330,    for hand guided or manipulated apparatus also having a hitch
    movable by shiftable seat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 323, for a harvester with a seat.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 20, for unearthing
    devices with manual operation station.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 32.5+, for a land vehicle with a worker's
    support.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 63+, for seats with
    body modifications.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, appropriate subclasses, for a seat of general
    utility.


CLS 172/432
TXT Apparatus under subclass 431 in which there are a plurality of separate and
    distinct seats or operator stations.


CLS 172/433
TXT Apparatus under subclass 431 in which the attendant operating the apparatus
    is carried by a sulky or riding attachment, which is adapted to be
    detachably connected to the implement and has its own wheel or wheels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257,    for an unstable propulsion unit forming part of an articulated
    vehicle and having a riding attendant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 32.6 for riding attachments for vehicles
    and subclass 32.7 for a wheeled vehicle having a station adapted to carry
    an operator and which also may be adapted to be attached to an agricultural
    implement.


CLS 172/434
TXT Apparatus under subclass 431 in which the seat or attendant's station may
    be moved to a position in which it is not intended to be used; e.g.,
    changed from a riding implement to a walking implement.


CLS 172/435
TXT Apparatus under subclass 431 in which the attendant's station or seat is
    modified to permit the operator to shift his entire body; or the seat is
    adjustable.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "adjustable" see the class definition.

    (2)     Note.  The station or seat must be enlarged to permit the operator
    to move or slide thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334,    for hand-guided straddle row cultivators having seat
    counterbalanced tool beams.


CLS 172/436
TXT Apparatus under subclass 431 in which the attendant's station or seat is
    positioned on a member extending laterally of the direction of motion and
    said member connects two or more earth working devices.


CLS 172/437
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means for sharpening an
    earth working element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 250 for cutting reels with sharpening means.

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclasses 82+, especially
    subclass 85 for tool sharpeners or tool sharpener attachments, per se.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 415+ for an abrading attachment, per se.


CLS 172/438
TXT Apparatus under the class definition combined with a device outside of the
    class definition and not provided for in other subclasses of this class.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass, for example, are combinations with a gun,
    a shade for a draft animal, a vehicle brake, a basket of general utility
    and a loading device of general utility.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 403+ for a scraper combined with a scoop,
    shovel, or other material pick up means.


CLS 172/439
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising an earth working device
    adapted to trail behind a propelling means, said earth working device
    having a mast comprising a vertically extending structure which is held
    against movement relative to at least a portion of the device in a
    longitudinal vertical plane, and struts pivotally connected to the upper
    and lower portions of said structure, said struts also being pivotally
    connected respectively to upper and lower portions of the propelling means,
    and said struts being free to pivot about each of their pivotal connections
    in a generally longitudinal vertical plane.

    (1)     Note.  Claims classifiable under this definition may include merely
    the struts or the vertically extending structure adapted for cooperation
    with the struts.

    (2)     Note.  "Struts" are elements adapted to withstand compressive
    stress.  Usually in working position the lower strut is in tension and the
    upper strut is in compression while in transport position the lower strut
    is in compression and the upper strut is in tension.

    (3)     Note.  This definition is intended to include devices usually
    called three point hitches or Ferguson hitches.  It should be noted,
    however, that the definition is broadly phrased and will include some
    devices other than the Ferguson or three point hitch.

    (4)     Note.  The propelling device may be no more than a trailer or other
    means which itself is propelled by a tractor or other device.

    (5)     Note.  The pivotal freedom of the struts may be inhibited by a
    lifting device.  However, if other added means prevent pivoting of the
    struts then the device is not considered to come under this definition.

    (6)     Note.  The mast or vertically extending structure may have some
    freedom for movement relative to the earth working device if the apparatus
    as a whole is essentially a Ferguson-type hitch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7+,     for draft responsive, automatic, power-controlled mast-type
    hitches.  See (1) Note of subclass 7 for the line between subclasses 7 and
    439.

    47,     for a mast-type hitch in combination with a power driven tool or
    cleaner.

    210,    for an alternating implement with an interrelated tool lift and
    shift, the hitch being of the mast type.

    307,    for a tool forward of the rear of a self-propelled vehicle
    connected to the vehicle by a parallelogram-type lift.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 400+ and especially subclass 407 for
    articulated vehicles wherein the load of a trailer on a leading vehicle is
    adjusted by adjusting the point of application of draft to the leading
    vehicle, subclass 460.1 for articulated vehicles with laterally spaced
    parallel connections, subclass 461.1 for articulated vehicles with
    vertically spaced connections, subclasses 467+ for articulated vehicles
    comprising laterally adjustable hitches, subclass 490.1 for articulated
    vehicles wherein the draft means may be vertically adjusted with respect to
    at least one of the vehicles or the ground merely in order to facilitate
    connecting the vehicles, and subclass 497 for vertically paced connections
    of a draft element to a tractor. A sole disclosure to an agricultural
    implement hitched to a tractor by a hitch as defined in Class 172, subclass
    439 is classifiable in Class 172.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 680+ for a vertically
    swinging load support and subclass 766 may be of particular interest.


CLS 172/440
TXT Apparatus under subclass 439 in which said earth working device comprises a
    plurality of rows of earth working elements, the axis of one row in plan
    view being located at, or being adjustable to, an angle with respect to the
    axis of another row, and the rows being vertically movable with the mast
    structure as a unit.

    (1)     Note.  The earth working elements are usually disks.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    454+,   for angled gangs liftable for transport on a wheeled frame by an
    actuating means other than a mast-type hitch.

    579+,   for plural groups of disks.


CLS 172/441
TXT Apparatus under subclass 440 in which one row of earth working element is
    located generally behind another row of earth working elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    455,    for tandem-angled gangs liftable for transport on a wheeled frame
    by an actuating means other than a mast- type hitch.

    595     and 596, for tandem disk gangs.


CLS 172/442
TXT Apparatus under subclass 441 comprising an actuator for changing the
    angular relation in plan view of one row of earth working elements with
    respect to another row.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "actuator" see the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    580,    for groups of disks adjusted by a power device.

    591+,   for groups of disks horizontally angled by a manual actuator,
    especially subclass 594 for double tandem groups so adjusted.


CLS 172/443
TXT Apparatus under subclass 439 in which (1) the struts extend between the
    earth working device and a wheeled trailer adapted to be drawn by a
    propelling means or (2) the struts extend between different parts of the
    earth working device.

    (1)     Note.  The earth working device in part (2) of the definition is an
    implement which is adapted to be attached to a propelling means such as a
    tractor, in the field or as a substantially complete unit.

    (2)     Note.  In the ordinary mast-type hitch the struts extend between a
    tractor and an implement, pivot means for the struts are assembled on or
    built into the tractor at the factory, the struts remain associated with
    the tractor in the field and an implement is attached to the struts in the
    field.  This definition is intended to exclude this arrangement but include
    an arrangement whereby a tractor not equipped with pivot means for a
    mast-type hitch at the factory is associated with an implement which itself
    includes the mast-type hitch, or whereby the tractor is converted to use
    such an implement by securing an attachment to the tractor which includes
    struts for cooperating with the earth working element (the attachment and
    the earth working element being considered the implement for purposes of
    this definition).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248,    for an apparatus convertible from one type of hitch to another.

    463,    for a lift actuator and tool which form a removable unit carried on
    a wheeled frame.


CLS 172/444
TXT Apparatus under subclass 439 in which the geometrical outline (as seen in
    elevation), made up of the vertically extending structure, the struts and
    the propelling means, changes in basic configuration as the earth working
    device is lifted or lowered.

    (1)     Note.  The geometrical outline of the definition is made up of four
    lines connected by pivot points, so that it will naturally change as the
    struts are lifted or lowered.  This simply change is not included in the
    definition.  The changes contemplated by the definition are brought about
    by some additional means and are those which occur, for example, when one
    of the struts is made of two pivoted or telescopic sections which move
    relatively while the earth working device is being lifted, or when one of
    the pivot points is on a link which moves as the earth working device is
    raised or lowered.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7+,     for apparatus having an automatic power control and comprising a
    mast-type hitch in which one of the struts is pivoted to a yieldable pivot
    point.


CLS 172/445
TXT Apparatus under subclass 439 in which there is a means for vertically
    moving the struts and mast to lift the earth working device for transport
    and some auxiliary means is operated as a result of the vertical movement
    (e.g., a link is operated to rock the implement about a longitudinal axis).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128,    for an earth marker which is adjusted upon raising an earth working
    device.

    210,    for apparatus including earth working means alternating for right
    or left hand operation which is carried on a mast- type hitch and in which
    vertical movement of the hitch is accompanied by movement of the earth
    working means to its alternate operating position.

    458,    for apparatus in which the vertical movement of an implement on a
    wheeled frame is associated with some other movement of the implement.


CLS 172/445.1
TXT Including blade, scraper, or smoother:

    Apparatus under subclass 439 in which at least one earth working element is
    supported by a mast structure, wherein the element has either (a) a
    substantially vertical working surface adapted to strike off or level the
    earth, or (b) a substantial area adapted to contact the earth in a
    horizontal direction to compact or smooth the earth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.5,    for a scraper which is automatically power-controlled for leveling.

    26.5+,  for a dragline scraper.

    72,     for a driven tool followed by a leveling drag or furrow shaper.

    189     and 612, for flexible implements including flexible matlike drags.

    197     and 199+, for diverse tools, one of which comprises a drag or
    smoother that may be mounted on a vehicle by a three-point hitch.

    777+,   for a scraper supporting a narrow depending tool.

    779,    for a scraper whose position is controlled by a linkage for
    leveling.

    780     and 781+, for a scraper between front and rear vehicle supports.

    799.5,  for a towed scraper on a wheel-supported frame.

    810+,   for a scraper ahead of a motor vehicle.


CLS 172/445.2
TXT Angularly adjustable about vertical axis:

    Apparatus under subclass 445.1 in which the earth working element is
    mounted so to be movable about a vertical axis to a different angular
    position.


CLS 172/446
TXT Apparatus under subclass 439 in which there are means for holding an earth
    working element in different locations laterally of the line of draft or
    the propelling means.

    (1)     Note.  Merely varying the limits to which an earth working device
    may laterally sway is not included.  See subclass 450 for such apparatus.

    (2)     Note.  The lateral adjustment may be the result of movement about a
    vertical or a longitudinal axis with respect to the propelling means.

    (3)     Note.  A lateral movement of the earth working tool which is the
    result of a turning movement of the propelling tractor is not included.
    See subclass 450 for such devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    456,    for apparatus liftable on a wheeled frame by means other than a
    mast-type hitch in which a central group of earth working elements is
    lifted vertically and side groups are movable inwardly.

    459+,   for an earth working element lifted vertically on a wheeled frame
    by means other than a mast-type hitch and by swinging movement about a
    longitudinal axis.

    476+,   for an earth working element liftable on a wheeled frame by means
    other than a mast-type hitch and laterally adjustable.

    741+,   for a laterally adjustable earth working element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 840+ for vehicle body-leveling by
    adjustable means extending between the running gear and the body, or by
    means sensing an actual or incipient nonlevel condition, and subclasses
    467+ for articulated vehicles which are laterally or angularly adjustable.


CLS 172/447
TXT Apparatus under subclass 446 in which the earth working element is movable
    to a laterally adjusted position by a swinging movement about a generally
    vertical axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    477,    for an earth working element liftable on a wheeled frame by means
    other than a mast-type hitch and adjustable about a vertical axis.

    742,    for a tool adjustable about a vertical axis.


CLS 172/448
TXT Apparatus under subclass 439 in which in addition to an actuator for
    swinging the struts which is adapted to lift the earth working device for
    transport there is an added means for holding an earth working element in
    different positions in a vertical sense with respect to the propelling
    means.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of "actuator" see the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    446,    for tools associated with a mast-type hitch adjusted vertically as
    well as laterally.

    474+,   for tools which are liftable for transport on a wheeled frame which
    are rockable about an independently, vertically adjustable transverse axis.

    485+,   for apparatus comprising a power unit for lifting tools for
    transport on a wheeled frame and manual means for effecting a supplemental
    adjustment.


CLS 172/449
TXT Apparatus under subclass 439 in which an earth working element is free to
    move relative to the mast at least to a limited extent while the earth
    working element is performing its earth working function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    440+,   for apparatus comprising angled gangs liftable as a unit with one
    or more gangs movable relative to the mast while earth working.

    450,    for a mast-type hitch with tools swayable with respect to the
    propelling means but fixed with respect to the mast.

    501+,   for a tool liftable by an actuator on a wheeled frame and with a
    lost motion connection between the actuator and tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 497 for articulated vehicles comprising a
    draft connection between the vehicles with vertically spaced connections to
    the leading vehicle.


CLS 172/450
TXT Apparatus under subclass 439 in which (1) an earth working element is free
    to move laterally to the line of draft relative to the propelling means
    while performing its earth working function or (2) there are means in
    addition to merely the struts and their connections with the mast and
    propelling means for preventing or inhibiting free movement of the earth
    working element laterally of the line of draft relative to the propelling
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    449,    for tools freely movable relative to the mast of a mast-type hitch
    while earth working.

    457,    for tools liftable on a wheeled frame by means other than a
    mast-type hitch and means to restrain sway when raised.

    501+,   for tools liftable on a wheeled frame by an actuator and with a
    lost motion connection between the actuator and the tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 497 for a trailer having an articulated
    connection to a draft element having vertically spaced connections to a
    tractor.


CLS 172/451
TXT With tool frame or bar extending beyond side of vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 439 including a support mechanism or device which
    is adapted to support an earth working element or elements, wherein the
    mechanism or device extends laterally beyond the side of the propelling
    device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    440+,   for mast-type hitches with angle gangs extending laterally on each
    side of the mast structure.


CLS 172/452
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a frame supported on ground
    support means such as wheels, an earth working element and an actuator for
    lifting the earth working element for supporting it on the frame so that it
    may be transported without engaging the earth.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "actuator" see the class definition.

    (2)     Note.  Apparatus comprising an earth working element and a means
    for lifting the earth working element on an implement is classifiable under
    this definition if the implement is claimed broadly by name only, the
    implement being considered the equivalent of a frame supported on wheels.

    (3)     Note.  An actuating means imparting vertical movement to an
    implement is considered to come under this definition unless the actuating
    means is disclosed as not usable to lift the implement off the ground for
    transport.

    (4)     Note.  Apparatus comprising a frame, an earth working element and a
    means for lifting the earth working element on the frame is classifiable
    under this definition if the frame is disclosed as rigidly attached to a
    wheel frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47      and 439+, for an actuator on a vehicle adapted to lift an implement
    with a mast-type hitch for transport on the vehicle.

    74,     for a driven tool with a power take-off from the drive to adjust
    the tool.

    75,     for a driven tool with an interconnected lift and drive control.

    238,    for an implement with a ground support moved vertically relative to
    the frame by a draft force.

    240+,   for an implement with a ground support engageable with the ground
    for transport only.

    255,    for an implement with an earth working element moved vertically
    when the implement is turned.

    260,    for a propulsion unit guided by a walking attendant or part of an
    articulated vehicle and with an actuator for moving a tool vertically.

    261+,   for means for shifting an earth working element on striking an
    obstruction.

    272+,   for means to facilitate mounting an implement on a motor vehicle.

    293+,   for a series of earth working elements sequentially lifted by a
    power cycle.

    297+,   for earth working elements mounted forward of the rear of a
    self-propelled vehicle.

    315+,   for an actuator on a trailing implement, controlled from a
    propelling vehicle, the relationship with the vehicle being significantly
    claimed.

    317+,   for an actuator on vehicle for relatively moving parts of a
    trailing implement.

    321,    for an actuator on a vehicle for  lifting a wheeled implement.

    322+,   for an actuator for rocking an implement about a wheel axis.

    326+,   for an actuator on a trailing ground- supported frame for moving a
    draft means vertically.

    395+,   for an implement with an actuator for moving a ground support
    vertically relative to a frame.

    583+,   for plural groups of disks comprising a vertically adjustable group.

    663+,   for actuators other than those adapted to lift a tool for transport
    on a wheeled frame or broadly claimed implement.

    781+,   for a scraper mounted between front and rear ground supports of a
    vehicle and an actuator for lifting it for transport.

    810+,   for earth working elements mounted ahead of a self-propelled
    vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, appropriate subclasses for lifting means for excavators.

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 273 for power- operated lifts for
    reciprocating side cut type harvesters.

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 325+ for hydraulic servomotors operated by
    a pump.  See note under definition of this class for line between this
    class and Class 60.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects subclass 141 for lifting or
    tilting means for unearthing apparatus.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 2+ for hoisting trucks, and other appropriate subclasses for
    lifting devices such as cranes adapted for general utility lifting rather
    than forming part of a vehicle-implement combination intended to remain
    coupled when in use.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 407 for articulated vehicles wherein the
    load of a trailer on a leading vehicle is adjusted by adjusting the point
    of application of draft to the leading vehicle, and subclass 490.1 for
    articulated vehicles wherein the draft means may be vertically adjusted
    with respect to at least one of the vehicles or the ground.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 680+ for vertically
    swinging load supports.


CLS 172/453
TXT Apparatus under subclass 452 wherein the actuator is driven by an
    electrically powered device.


CLS 172/454
TXT Apparatus under subclass 452 comprising two groups of earth working
    elements, each group comprising elements having a common orientation, the
    longitudinal axis of one group being at an angle in plan view with respect
    to the longitudinal axis of the other group, and the groups being liftable
    as a unit by the actuator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    440,    for angled gangs carried by a mast-type hitch which are lifted as a
    unit.


CLS 172/455
TXT Apparatus under subclass 454 in which one group of elements is positioned
    behind another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    441,    for tandem-angled gangs carried by a mast-type hitch which are
    lifted as a unit.


CLS 172/456
TXT Apparatus under subclass 452 comprising a centrally located group of earth
    working elements which is lifted for transport by the actuator and
    laterally positioned groups of earth working elements which are movable
    inwardly toward the longitudinal axis of the apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, appropriate subclasses, for specific harvesting
    implements having means to reduce their width for transport and especially
    subclasses 6+ for gang mowers, subclasses 14.9+ for break-back
    reciprocating mowers, subclass 228 for transport attachments and subclass
    385 for contractible, wheel-supported rear delivery rakes.


CLS 172/457
TXT Apparatus under subclass 452 in which the earth working element is
    connected to the frame for lateral swinging movement when the earth working
    element is in lowered working position and having means to prevent or
    restrain such movement when the earth working element is raised to
    transport position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    450,    for means for limiting the lateral sway of tools carried on a
    mast-type hitch.


CLS 172/458
TXT Apparatus under subclass 452 wherein the earth working element, when moved
    up and down in a vertical plane by the actuator, is forced to undergo a
    movement in another plane, such as lateral tilting or lateral shifting.

    (1)     Note.  Devices in which the movements of the earth working element
    are a result of a simple pivoting motion about a single axis or a canted
    pivot axis are not included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    445,    for tools carried by mast-type hitch having a means operated by
    vertical hitch movement.


CLS 172/459
TXT Apparatus under subclass 452 comprising an earth working element which is
    swingable about an axis which extends substantially in the direction of
    movement of the apparatus over the ground.

    (1)     Note.  The earth working element may have a motion of translation
    and still be considered swingable about a longitudinal axis if the motion
    of translation is caused by links swinging about a longitudinal axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    446,    for an implement with a mast-type hitch and laterally adjustable
    about a longitudinal axis.

    456,    for an apparatus comprising a group of tools liftable vertically on
    a wheeled frame and side groups swingable inwardly on longitudinal axes.

    640,    for plural, relatively movable tool groups having a tool group
    pivotally adjustable about a horizontal axis.

    782,    for a scraper between front and rear ground supports of a vehicle
    and a laterally offset tool which is adjustable about a longitudinal axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 840+ for vehicle body-leveling by
    adjustable means extending between the running gear and the body, or by
    means sensing an actual or incipient nonlevel condition.


CLS 172/460
TXT Apparatus under subclass 459 wherein the earth working element is swingable
    about two longitudinal axes which are transversely spaced on the apparatus,
    each of said axes being selectively vertically adjustable.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "adjustable" see the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    781+,   especially subclass 797 and the subclasses there noted for a
    scraper between front and rear ground supports of a vehicle swingable about
    two vertically adjustable longitudinal axes.


CLS 172/461
TXT Apparatus under subclass 452 having a means for removing debris from the
    earth working element when it is raised, said means being (1) fixed on the
    frame and the earth working element raised relative thereto or (2)
    positively moved relative to the earth working element by the raising
    motion of the earth working element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    606+,   for earth working tools having cleaners.


CLS 172/462
TXT Apparatus under subclass 452 comprising a plurality of earth working
    elements each individually biased downwardly by resilient means, and an
    actuator lifting all of said implements as a group to transport position.

    (1)     Note.  The mere broad recitation in a claim that an earth working
    element is a spring tooth is not enough for classification under this
    definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500,    for a tool lifted for transport on a wheeled frame which is
    spring-biased down during operation.


CLS 172/463
TXT Apparatus under subclass 452 in which (1) the actuator for raising the
    earth working element is mounted on the earth working element and moves
    therewith between transport and working positions as a result of the
    operation of said actuator; or (2) the actuator for lifting the earth
    working element and the earth working element are carried by a common
    supporting structure which may be readily removable from the wheeled frame
    as a unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315+,   for an actuator on an implement which is controlled from a
    propelling vehicle.

    443,    for mast-type hitch devices in which the mast-type hitch forms a
    unit with the implement.


CLS 172/464
TXT Apparatus under subclass 452 in which the earth working element is
    positively moved in a downward direction by a servomotor.

    (1)     Note.  A device in which the earth working element is pivotally
    connected to and trails behind a member which is positively forced down by
    a servomotor is included in this definition.


CLS 172/465
TXT Apparatus under subclass 452 in which the actuator for lifting the earth
    working element comprises a servomotor and there are means operated in
    response to the motion of the servomotor for stopping the motor before the
    limit of motion is reached.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for automatic draft responsive power control apparatus combined
    with a position control device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 358+ for expansible
    chamber motors having working member position responsive feedback control.


CLS 172/466
TXT Apparatus under subclass 452 in which the actuator is powered by a
    servomotor and there is a means for holding the earth working element out
    of engagement with the earth so as to support the element independently of
    the servomotor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 840+ for vehicle body-leveling by
    adjustable means extending between the running gear and the body, or by
    means sensing an actual or incipient nonlevel condition.


CLS 172/467
TXT Apparatus under subclass 452 in which the wheeled frame carries a draft
    means for connecting it to a propelling means, said draft means being
    movable relative to the frame and interconnected with an earth working
    element whereby movement of the draft means relative to the frame causes
    vertical movement of the earth working element relative to the frame, said
    frame also carrying an actuator adapted to lift the earth working element
    for transport on the frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239+,   for devices having draft responsive depth control means.

    605+,   for devices adjusted by utilizing the draft force on a shiftable
    hitch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 435 for motion or draft
    responsive load handler including movably connected vehicle sections.


CLS 172/468
TXT Apparatus under subclass 452 in which actuating means are provided for
    lifting a plurality of earth working elements to transport position and
    said means are operable to lift one of said elements independently of
    another element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140,    for diverse tools having independent lift actuators.

    230+,   for parallel separate tools alternating for right or left hand
    operation having independently operable means for alternating the operating
    position of the tools, as by raising and lowering the latter.

    300+,   for a plurality of tools mounted ahead of the rear and behind a
    motor vehicle and having independent left actuators.

    304,    for plural independently actuatable tools carried forward of the
    rear of a motor vehicle.


CLS 172/469
TXT Apparatus under subclass 468 in which the actuating means is a single
    actuator alternately connectable to each earth working element to lift it
    independently of the others.


CLS 172/470
TXT Apparatus under subcass 468 in which (1) an additional actuating means is
    provided to lift all the earth working elements simultaneously or (2) means
    are provided for selectively connecting two or more of the earth working
    elements to be lifted together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    406,    for wheeled implements having an actuator for simultaneously
    adjusting wheels on different axles and having an additional actuator for
    changing the relative position of the wheels.


CLS 172/471
TXT Apparatus under subclass 468 in which there are three or more separate
    earth working elements each with a separate actuator.


CLS 172/472
TXT Apparatus under subclass 452 wherein there are a plurality of earth working
    elements and means are provided for raising all the earth working elements
    as a unit and for selectively lowering each element separately.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228,    for separate tools alternating for right or left hand operation
    which may be simultaneously raised and held in raised position by separate
    latches.

    462,    for plural tools independently spring- biased down and raised at a
    unit.

    481,    for tools which are held in position by a latch means separate from
    the actuating means.


CLS 172/473
TXT Apparatus under subclass 452 in which the earth working element is
    positively adjusted vertically at different rates or at different times at
    points spaced in the direction of travel by a single actuator (to thereby
    raise the earth working element vertically as well as tilt the same about a
    transverse axis).

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "actuator" see the class definition.

    (2)     Note.  This definition includes a device having an actuator which
    is connected to a tool beam at a single point where the beam is also
    connected to the frame at a longitudinally spaced point by means of a cam,
    link, etc., such that upon operation of the actuator the beam is positively
    caused to move such that the two points of connection of necessity are
    moved vertically at different rates.  This is to be distinguished from
    connections such as a freely  pivoted link etc., which will permit but not
    necessarily enforce a different rate of movement, and which is excluded
    from this definition.  See subclass 480.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    474,    for means to adjust an implement about a horizontal transverse axis
    including means to adjust said axis vertically.

    480,    see (1) Note above. 484, for means to adjust an implement
    vertically including parallel links connecting the implement and frame.


CLS 172/474
TXT Apparatus under subclass 452 wherein the earth working element is
    independently adjustable about an axis which extends laterally of the
    direction of travel, the elevation of the axis also being selectively
    adjustable.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of "adjustable" see the class definition.

    (2)     Note.  The implement may be raised to transport position by either
    rocking about the transverse axis or by vertical adjustment of the axis or
    both.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    448,    for tools carried by a mast-type hitch which include an auxiliary
    vertical adjustment.

    789,    for a scraper mounted between front and rear supports of a vehicle
    with an actuator for lifting it to transport position and an actuator for
    bodily shifting a scraper subframe draft connection which forms a
    transverse axis about which the scraper is adjustable.

    795,    for a scraper mounted between front and rear supports of a vehicle
    with an actuator for lifting it for transport and an actuator for tilting
    the scraper about a transverse, vertically adjustable axis.


CLS 172/475
TXT Apparatus under subclass 474 in which two actuators are carried on the
    frame and are longitudinally spaced thereon, one of said actuators
    adjusting the earth working element about the transverse axis and the other
    actuator adjusting the elevation of the transverse axis.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "actuator" see the class definition.


CLS 172/476
TXT Apparatus under subclass 452 wherein the earth working element is
    selectively positionable transversely of the direction of travel of the
    apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  The mere recitation that the earth working element is
    laterally or transversely adjustable is not enough for classification in
    this subclass. Some structural detail relative to the adjustment must be
    recited.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305,    for a laterally adjustable earth working element mounted forward of
    the rear of a motor vehicle.

    446+,   for a laterally adjustable implement with a mast-type hitch.

    456,    for apparatus liftable for transport on a wheeled frame in which a
    central group of earth working elements is lifted vertically and side
    groups are movable inwardly.

    459+,   for an earth working element lifted vertically on a wheeled frame
    about a longitudinal axis.

    645+,   for plural, relatively movable tools which are horizontally
    adjustable.

    741+,   for a laterally adjustable earth working element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 467+ for articulated vehicles which are
    laterally or angularly adjustable.


CLS 172/477
TXT Apparatus under subclass 476 wherein the earth working element is
    adjustable about a vertical axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    447,    for a tool liftable on a wheeled frame by a mast-type hitch and
    adjustable about a vertical axis.

    796,    and the subclasses there noted, for a scraper mounted between the
    front and rear ground supports of a vehicle, an actuator for lifting the
    scraper for transport and an actuator for adjusting the scraper about a
    vertical axis.

    818+,   for an elongated earth working blade mounted ahead of a motor
    vehicle and an actuator for lifting the blade for transport, the blade
    being adjustable about a vertical axis.


CLS 172/478
TXT Apparatus under subclass 452 in which the earth working element is mounted
    upon a member mounted to swing about a fixed transverse axis, the actuator
    and the earth working element both being connected to the member at points
    spaced from the pivot axis and on opposite sides thereof, the actuator
    being effective to raise the earth working element to transport position by
    movement about said axis.

    (1)     Note.  Devices in which a beam or longitudinal member is pivoted to
    swing about a transverse axis with an actuator and earth working element
    connected to the member on opposite sides of the pivot axis wherein the
    actuator comprises a handle rigidly connected to the beam or member are not
    included in this definition and are classified in subclass 482.


CLS 172/479
TXT Apparatus under subclass 452 in which the earth working element is mounted
    upon a member mounted to swing about a fixed transverse axis, the actuator
    being connected to the member forward of the pivot axis and being effective
    to raise the earth working element to a transport position about said axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    308,    for a tool located forward of the rear of a motor vehicle and
    mounted on a push bar which is pivoted at its rear end to the motor vehicle
    and has an actuator attached to its forward end to lift the same.


CLS 172/480
TXT Apparatus under subclass 452 in which the earth working element is raised
    by moving it about a transverse axis which is free to move vertically or
    longitudinally when the earth working element is in earth-engaging position
    or in which the earth working element is carried by a beam which is raised
    until some point thereon engages a point on the supporting frame at which
    time said points form a pivot axis about which the beam swings.

    (1)     Note.  An earth working element which is connected to the
    supporting frame by a mere chain, cable, or the like is not included in
    this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    473,    for tools positively adjusted vertically at longitudinally spaced
    points.

    474,    for tools vertically adjustable about a transverse axis which is
    also vertically adjustable.


CLS 172/481
TXT Apparatus under subclass 452 having means operative between the supporting
    frame and the earth working element for holding the earth working element
    in one position relative to the frame and in which the holding means is
    spaced from and forms no part of the lifting actuator or linkage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228,    for separate tools alternating for right or left hand operation
    which may be simultaneously raised and held in raised position by separate
    latches.

    466,    for a tool which is lifted for transport by a servomotor and which
    is held raised by means independent of the servomotor.

    472,    for simultaneously raised plural tools which may be individually
    lowered, as by releasing a latch means.

    683,    for tools which are latched in an earth working position, there
    being no lift actuator for the tool.


CLS 172/482
TXT Apparatus under subclass 452 comprising a shaft mounted on the wheeled
    frame for rotation about its axis, an earth working element rigidly
    connected to said shaft to rotate therewith about the shaft axis, said
    shaft being rotated by the actuator to thereby lift the earth working
    element for transport.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322+,   for tools rocked about a wheel axis by an actuator.


CLS 172/483
TXT Apparatus under subclass 452 in which the earth working element during its
    vertical movement maintains substantially the same angular position with
    respect to the ground.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    415+,   for vertically adjustable translatable wheels.

    460,    and the subclasses there noted for a tool independently vertically
    adjustable at transversely spaced points and also capable of vertical
    translation.

    661,    for plural, relatively movable tools in which a tool is vertically
    translatably adjustable.

    739+,   for devices wherein the tool is carried by a mast-type hitch which
    is generally connected to a vehicle for raising and lowering by vertically
    spaced substantially parallel links.


CLS 172/484
TXT Apparatus under subclass 483 in which the earth working element is carried
    by links pivoted to the frame and the earth working element, said links
    remaining substantially parallel throughout the vertical movement of the
    tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    307,    for tools mounted forward of the rear of a motor vehicle and having
    a parallelogram-type lift means for raising the tool.

    439+,   for a tool lifted by a mast-type hitch having parallel links.


CLS 172/485
TXT Apparatus under subclass 452 in which the actuator includes a power means
    comprising a servomotor or a power take-off and in addition a lever means
    manipulable by an attendant for moving the earth working element or the
    power means or a part thereof to effect an adjustment of the earth working
    element by human power or for acting as an adjustable stop to alter the
    range of movement imparted to the earth working element by the power means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    303,    for tools mounted ahead of the rear of a motor vehicle and having a
    power actuator with a manual adjusting or actuating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 625+ for alternate manual
    or power operators.


CLS 172/486
TXT Apparatus under subclass 485 in which the means manipulable by the
    attendant is related to the power unit so that they both are used
    simultaneously or selectively and the attendant manipulable means can move
    the earth working element over the same distance and between the same
    limits as the power means.


CLS 172/487
TXT Apparatus under subclass 485 in which the earth working element may be
    lowered to different depths in the soil as the result of different settings
    of the attendant manipulable means but is always raised to substantially
    the same height over the ground.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    411,    for self-powered crank axle mounted vertically adjustable wheels
    with constant height depth adjustment.


CLS 172/488
TXT Apparatus under subclass 452 comprising a plurality of earth working
    elements which are movable relative to each other and in which a single
    actuator is provided for lifting all the earth working elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138+,   for diverse tools which are vertically adjusted by a single
    actuator and move relative to one another when adjusted.

    456,    for devices having side groups of tools which are movable inwardly
    toward a vertically movable central group.

    462,    for plural tools which are spring-biased down and raised as a unit.


CLS 172/489
TXT Apparatus under subclass 488 wherein the earth working elements are moved
    relative to each other as a result of the lifting movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138+,   for diverse tools which are vertically adjustable by a single
    actuator and move relative to one another when adjusted.

    390,    for apparatus having a plurality of spring tools carried by
    parallel pivoted tooth bars and also having a wheel substitute such as a
    runner, said bars usually having an actuator to pivot said bars whereby the
    tools will be raised.


CLS 172/490
TXT Apparatus under subclass 452 in which the actuator comprises a winch for
    winding a cable to hoist the earth working element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    293+,   for a plurality of like elements sequentially operated by a power
    cycle wherein rotary drums are employed to actuate the elements.

    414,    for apparatus including a vertically adjustable ground support for
    a tool frame including a flexible connection between the ground support and
    actuator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 264+ for apparatus for hauling or hoisting a load including a
    driven drum which contacts and pulls on a cable attached to the load.


CLS 172/491
TXT Apparatus under subclass 452 in which the actuator comprises a motor which
    is in motion just long enough to effect the desired movement of the earth
    working element and then stops.

    (1)     Note.  Servomotor actuators are very common in this art and only
    unusual types should be cross-referenced to this subclass.  The search
    notes below list subclasses in which "servomotor" appears in the title.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for an implement with an automatic control for a servomotor.

    294,    for devices having a series of elements, such as wheels or tools,
    which are sequentially operated by a power cycle where the power is
    supplied by sequentially operated servomotors.

    316,    for servomotor actuator on a trailing implement controlled from a
    leading vehicle.

    413,    for wheels vertically adjusted by a servomotor actuator.

    464,    for a servomotor actuator forcing a tool down.

    465,    for a servomotor with a follow up control for lifting a tool for
    transport.

    466,    for a servomotor for lifting a tool for transport and means for
    holding the tool raised to relieve the load on the servomotor.

    831,    for plural servomotor actuators for lifting an elongated earth
    working blade positioned ahead of a motor vehicle.


CLS 172/492
TXT Apparatus under subclass 452 in which the actuator comprises a device for
    applying the power of a continuously moving source of power to the earth
    working element for the period of time necessary to move it from one
    position of adjustment to another.

    (1)     Note.  The source of power may be a ground wheel or motor.
    However, those devices in which the adjustment of the earth working element
    is accomplished by applying the power of a propelling means to shifting a
    hitch are not included.  See subclasses 605+ for such devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129,    for means utilizing the power from a ground wheel to adjust an
    earth marker.

    231,    for parallel separate tools alternating for right or left hand
    operation which are independently operated by power derived from a ground
    wheel.

    293+,   for a series of like elements sequentially operated by a power
    cycle which may be derived from a power take-off.

    402     and 403+, for devices having an actuator and means interconnecting
    the actuator and a plurality of wheels for vertically adjusting the wheels
    wherein the power for the actuator is derived from a ground wheel.

    407+,   for power-operated means for vertically adjusting a ground support
    including power take-off devices.

    485+,   for power-actuating means with manual adjusting or supplemental
    manual-actuating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 388-392 for rakes adjusted by a power
    take-off means deriving power from a wheel.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 11+ for power take-offs of
    general application.


CLS 172/493
TXT Apparatus under subclass 492 wherein means are provided to positively
    disengage the actuating means from the source of power when the earth
    working element has reached a predetermined position.

    (1)     Note.  A simple slip clutch is not included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129,    for means utilizing the power from a ground wheel to adjust an
    earth marker.

    410,    for apparatus comprising a frame vertically adjustable relative to
    a wheel mounted on a crank axle and having a self-interrupted clutch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 33 for an automatic
    clutch having a manual control and definite position release.


CLS 172/494
TXT Apparatus under subclass 452 comprising a linkage means disposed between
    the earth working element and the frame (1) which acts to hold the earth
    working element in a raised position by a link passing over a center
    position such that the movement due to the weight of the earth working
    element acts to hold it in raised position or (2) which acts to hold the
    earth working element in one position by a pair of links assuming a
    substantially in-line position (i.e., toggle).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    499,    for tools which include a spring device for alternately biasing a
    tool in opposite directions during operation.

    506,    for spring-assisted or spring actuators which may include a spring
    device for biasing the actuator to raise or lower the tool.


CLS 172/495
TXT Apparatus under subclass 452 wherein the actuator is provided with means
    which adapts it to be operated by the power of a human foot.


CLS 172/496
TXT Apparatus under subclass 495 in which means are provided for applying human
    power by hand to the actuating means in addition to or alternatively of the
    foot-operated means.


CLS 172/497
TXT Apparatus under subclass 452 in which the earth working element is biased
    by resilient means during operation of the device.

    (1)     Note.  The mere recitation in a claim that the earth working
    element is a spring tooth or formed of a spring material is not enough for
    classification under this definition.

    (2)     Note.  A mere spring-biased hitch is not included.  See subclass
    678 for such devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for driven earth working elements which are yieldably mounted on a
    supporting frame.

    705+,   for earth working elements which are spring biased or formed or
    have a part which is spring biased or formed.


CLS 172/498
TXT Apparatus under subclass 497 in which the resilient means provides an
    opposite bias on the tool when the tool moves in either direction from a
    neutral position.


CLS 172/499
TXT Apparatus under subclass 497 in which the resilient means is active to
    press the earth working element downwardly when the earth working element
    is in operative position and is so arranged to provide an upward bias on
    the earth working element as it is raised to transport position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    494,    for tools held in raised position by an overcenter or toggle
    holding device by the weight of the tool acting on the holding device.

    506,    for spring-assisted or spring actuators which may include a spring
    device for biasing the actuator to raise or lower the tool.


CLS 172/500
TXT Apparatus under subclass 497 in which the bias of the resilient means acts
    to move the earth working element downwardly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    462,    for plural tools which are individually spring-biased downwardly
    and raised as a unit.


CLS 172/501
TXT Apparatus under subclass 452 in which the connection between the actuator
    and earth working element is such as to allow at least a certain amount of
    free vertical movement between the two in at least one direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for driven earth working elements which are free to move bodily at
    least a limited amount relative to a supporting frame on which they are
    mounted.

    414,    for apparatus including a vertically adjustable ground support for
    a tool frame including a flexible or lost motion connection between the
    ground support and the actuator.

    449,    for apparatus with a mast-type hitch in which the tool is movable
    relative to the mast while earth working.


CLS 172/502
TXT Apparatus under subclass 501 in which the connection between the actuator
    and earth working element includes a flexible member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    293+,   for a plurality of like elements sequentially operated by a power
    cycle wherein flexible connectors are interposed between the power means
    and an element, and through which the element may be actuated by the power
    means.

    490,    for tools raised by means of a rotary drum actuator, the connection
    between the drum and tool usually being a flexible connection.


CLS 172/503
TXT Apparatus under subclass 452 comprising an actuator having a portion
    pivoted on an axis spaced from the pivot axis of a part of the earth
    working element, said actuator portion being directly connected to the
    earth working element by a connection permitting relative sliding motion
    between the actuator portion and the earth working element part.


CLS 172/504
TXT Apparatus under subclass 452 in which the actuator includes a pair of
    relatively movable threaded members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    419,    for ground supports which are moved with a vertical translating
    motion relative to a frame by a screw-jack type actuator.

    427,    for ground supports which are moved vertically relative to a frame
    by a screw-jack type actuator.


CLS 172/505
TXT Apparatus under subclass 452 in which the earth working element is
    connected to the frame by a U-shaped member, the earth working element
    being carried in the bight of said member.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include those devices in which the
    bail member constitutes an axle for a wheel and the tool is rigidly
    connected to the bail since such devices are classified above in subclass
    322.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    397,    for apparatus having a tool and a ground support which are moved
    together relative to a frame and which include a tool carried in a bail
    formed by a wheel carrying crank axle.

    480,    for tools lifted for transport on wheeled frame said tools swing
    about a freely shiftable or delayed pivot in which the tool may be carried
    by a bail member.


CLS 172/506
TXT Apparatus under subclass 452 in which (1) a resilient means is provided
    which is operatively connected to the actuator so that movement of the
    actuator in one direction stores energy in the resilient means which is
    released and aids in moving the actuating means in the opposite direction;
    or (2) in which the earth working element may be latched in working
    position and the actuator is a resilient means in which energy is stored in
    the latched position and is released to raise the earth working element
    when the latter is unlatched.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    424,    for spring-assisted actuators for moving a ground support
    vertically.

    497+,   for tools which are spring biased during operation and raised to a
    transport position by an actuator.

    790,    for a scraper mounted between front and rear supports of a vehicle
    and counterbalance means for adjusting the scraper.


CLS 172/507
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a framework having ground
    support means such as wheels, the position of the ground support means in
    the apparatus in plan view being changeable with respect to the framework.

    (1)     Note.  The framework in this definition comprises the running gear
    of the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278+,   for implements with wheel steering or an actuator for horizontally
    angling a wheel axis.

    383+,   for an implement with the axis of rotation of the wheel lockable or
    angularly adjustable.

    395+,   for an implement with a ground support vertically adjustable with
    respect to the frame, which vertical adjustment may include a horizontal
    adjustment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 638+ for extensible vehicles.


CLS 172/508
TXT Apparatus under class defintion comprising (1) means to prevent people,
    animals, or objects from contacting parts of the apparatus so as to prevent
    injuries to themselves or the apparatus, (2) means to change the position
    of standing plants without soil disturbance (other than changes brought
    about by the earth working elements themselves), or (3) means to deflect
    earth or debris thrown about by the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include those devices where an earth
    working element is provided with an extension or portion which acts as a
    deflector or shield.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29+,    for implements including means to shift nonstanding plants without
    soil disturbance.

    38,     for an implement comprising a driven tool and an
    obstruction-feeling device.

    81,     for an implement comprising a driven tool and a plant deflector or
    protector.

    112+,   for an implement comprising a driven tool with a deflector or
    shield for thrown material.

    233+,   for apparatus including an obstruction-feeling device for causing
    or permitting movement of an implement to avoid striking the obstruction.

    558+,   for disk cleaners which may also deflect earth.

    606+,   for tool cleaners.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 137 for an unearthing
    device provided with a protective guard or casing.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 847+ for land vehicles with dust and mud
    guards, subclass 159 for dust guards, and subclasses 160+ for wheel guards
    for fending obstacles from contact with the wheels of a vehicle.


CLS 172/509
TXT Apparatus under subclass 508 comprising means to limit the lateral movement
    of material thrown out by an earth working element, usually to protect
    adjacent standing plants from injury.


CLS 172/510
TXT Apparatus under subclass 509 in which said means has a rotating movement
    imparted thereto usually by rolling contact with the earth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    534,    for rolling devices provided with peripherally spaced plant saving
    means.


CLS 172/511
TXT Apparatus under subclass 509 in which said means comprises (1) a member
    having openings therein, or (2) a plurality of spaced members defining
    openings to permit the passage of material of a size smaller than the size
    of the openings through said means.


CLS 172/512
TXT Apparatus under subclass 509 in which said means comprises an inverted U-
    or V-shaped member for limiting the movement of material thrown inwardly
    toward said means from opposite sides.


CLS 172/513
TXT Apparatus under 509 in which said means comprises a pair of members spaced
    transversely of the direction of travel for limiting the movement of
    material thrown inwardly toward said means from opposite sides.


CLS 172/514
TXT Apparatus under subclass 508 comprising means for positioning or holding
    standing plants (e.g., weeds) so that they may be covered or cut by the
    operation of an earth working element.

    (1)     Note.  This definition includes means to hold surface material,
    such as stalks, in position to be cut by an earth working element, but
    excludes means to change the position of surface material without
    disturbing the soil. See subclasses 29+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29+,    for devices for shifting surface material without disturbing the
    soil. See (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    111,    Planting, subclass 143 for a trash hold down claimed in combination
    with a planting machine.


CLS 172/515
TXT Apparatus under subclass 514 in which said means is (1) biased to a working
    position by a spring means, or (2) formed of a resilient material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    705+,   for spring biased or spring formed earthworking tools or tool parts.


CLS 172/516
TXT Apparatus under subclass 515 in which said spring biased or formed means
    comprises a plurality of closely spaced or contacting elements which allow
    the passage of obstructions or larger plants between the elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclasses 55 and 56 for an
    extractor for unearthing plants or buried objects comprising plural
    cooperating plant grasping jaws.


CLS 172/517
TXT Apparatus under subclass 508 comprising means for lifting or deflecting
    standing or rooted plants to prevent covering or injury by the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     for driven tools having plant deflectors or protectors.


CLS 172/518
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising an earth working element
    which has a rotational or orbital motion in use.

    (1)     Note.  The motion of the element may be due to the resistance of
    the earth, or objects on or in the earth, as the element is moved over the
    earth; or it may be driven, but no more of the driving means is claimed
    than a driven shaft which supports the element or a wheel to which it is
    directly connected, and it does not require a drive means to operate it in
    the manner disclosed (see (3) Note under subclass 35).

    (2)     Note.  An earth working device, comprising a plurality of earth
    working blades, tines, or projections mounted on an axis and intended to be
    used so that the earth is worked while a blade is relatively stationary
    with respect to its support frame and the device is rotated on its axis
    only occasionally to bring down another blade to engage the earth, is
    included even if the rotation is not a complete revolution.

    (3)     Note.  The phrase "earth working element" or the word "tool" as
    applied to the subject mater of this group of subclasses includes in its
    meaning a unitary rotating device with a plurality of earth working blades
    or tines.  The whole rotating device is considered a tool or earth working
    element, rather than merely a single blade of the device.

    (4)     Note.  Patents are classified herein even if the claims do not
    describe an earth working element as being of the rolling or rotating type,
    provided that the sole specific disclosure relates to rolling or rotating
    earth working elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for a lawn edger with a rolling cutter.

    21,     for lawn aerators.

    31,     for a rolling cutter in an implement with means for shifting
    surface material without soil disturbance.

    35+,    for driven tools or cleaners, especially subclasses 68+ for a
    driven tool combined with a rolling tool.

    133+,   for diverse tools including rolling tools.  The rolling tools are
    not found in the generic subclass but are found in indented subclasses 144,
    149+, 153, 154, 156, 157, 158, 164, 166, 169, 170+, 174+, and 184+.

    219+,   for an alternating implement comprising a disk.

    349+,   for a rolling tool guided or propelled by a walking attendant.

    440+,   for angled disk gangs liftable as a unit by a mast-type hitch.

    454+,   for angled disk gangs adapted to be liftable as a unit by an
    actuator for transport on a wheeled frame or broadly claimed implement, the
    lifting means not comprising a mast-type hitch.

    683,    for a tool latched in earth working position.

    715,    for a rotary landside.

    716+,   for a movable moldboard.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, appropriate subclasses for general utility cutting
    implements which may roll, rotate, or move through an orbital path as the
    same are moved along the earth's surface.

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 256 for rotating disk cutters for harvesters
    of the vertical-cut type, and subclasses 500+ for stalk choppers for
    cutting dead crop material.

    111,    Planting, subclasses 112+ for a rotary furrow opener claimed in
    combination with a plant setting machine; subclasses 121+ for a rotary
    furrow opener claimed in combination with liquid or gas soil treatment; and
    subclasses 157+ for a rotary furrow opener claimed in combination with a
    planting machine.

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, appropriate subclasses for tires and
    wheels.  A tire or wheel may inherently have an earth working function but
    is not classified in Class 172 unless the earth working function is claimed
    or specifically described in the specification as an important feature.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 93 for a rolling
    unearthing device.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 331+ for a rolling
    cutter-type earth boring bit.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 20 for motor vehicles wherein one or more
    rollers support the body or frame.

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclasses 5.1+ for wheels.  A
    wheel may inherently work the earth due to its configuration, but wheels
    are not classified in Class 172 unless the earth working function is
    claimed or unless the earth working function is specifically described in
    the specification as an important feature.

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 157, for a plain bearing and 460 for an
    antifriction bearing for plow or colter disks which may include the bearing
    support.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 122+ for a
    smooth-surface compaction roller for compressing or packing clods of earth,
    for rolling out an earthy mass, or for rolling a cementitious mass, and
    subclass 121 for a sheep's foot roller.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the notes thereunder.


CLS 172/519
TXT Apparatus under subclass 518 in which the rim portion of the device bearing
    on the ground is made of rubber, fabric, or like yieldable, flexible
    material.

    (1)     Note.  Devices under this definition must have a configuration,
    when in contact with the ground which is like that set out in the various
    subclasses under subclass 518.  A mere compacting roller is classifiable in
    Class 404, Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 122+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    612,    for fabric or flexible tools.

    747,    for tools made of some specific    material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, appropriate subclasses for wheels with
    yieldable surfaces.

    492,    Roll or Roller, subclass 29 for a roll, per se, not elsewhere
    provided for, having a nap or pile surface and subclasses 53+ and 57+ for a
    roll of specific composition.


CLS 172/520
TXT Apparatus under subclass 518 comprising earthworking elements on different
    axes and interconnected so that the motion of one is constrained to
    correspond with the motion of the other.


CLS 172/521
TXT Apparatus under subclass 518 comprising a means driven by the rotating
    earth working element or a ground-engaging wheel for adjusting a part of
    the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of adjusting see the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    for a driven earth working element driven from a rolling or driven
    ground wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 439+ for a ground wheel
    operated motion or draft responsive load handler.


CLS 172/522
TXT Apparatus under subclass 518 in which the axis of rotation of the earth
    working element is substantially vertical.

    (1)     Note.  The axis may deviate from the vertical by as much as 45
    degrees. Also the axis may be adjustable to a horizontal position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for a driven tool that rotates about a substantially vertical axis.

    169,    for diverse tools, one of which is a tool which rotates about a
    substantially vertical axis.


CLS 172/523
TXT Apparatus under subclass 522 in which the earth working element is provided
    with one or more vertically disposed teeth, blades, or like earth working
    implements.


CLS 172/524
TXT Apparatus under subclass 523 in which a means engages the peripheral
    portion of the earth working element to control or to aid in controlling
    the position of the earth working element.


CLS 172/525
TXT Apparatus under subclass 523 including a weight or a means specifically
    designed to support a weight.


CLS 172/526
TXT Apparatus under subclass 523 comprising a plurality of earth working
    elements each having its axis of rotation substantially vertically disposed.


CLS 172/527
TXT Apparatus under subclass 518 in which the axis of rotation of the earth
    working element is substantially in the direction of movement of the
    apparatus over the ground.

    (1)     Note.  For classification under this definition an axis must be
    very close to a true longitudinal axis when looked at in plan view.  Many
    commonly used disk plows and harrows rotate about axes which are somewhat
    more longitudinally inclined than transverse but such devices are not
    considered to come under this definition and are classified in appropriate
    subclasses below.

    (2)     Note.  A device disclosed as comprising a tool driven about a
    horizontal longitudinal axis is classified in subclasses 107+ even if the
    drive means is not claimed.


CLS 172/528
TXT Apparatus under subclass 518 comprising brake or stop means for slowing
    down or stopping the rotation or rolling of the earth working element.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus in which the retarding means is capable of driving
    the earth working element is classifiable in subclasses 35+ even if, as
    actually used, rotation is caused due to the movement of the apparatus over
    the earth and the "driving means" functions only to retard the motion of
    the earth working element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143,    for diverse tools one of which is of the intermittently rolling
    type.

    237,    for an earth working element which may rotate from a working
    position through 360o back to the working position, the rotation through
    part of the cycle being effected by a ground- engageable draft responsive
    lever.

    261+,   for tools which may shift upon overload and particularly subclass
    262 for apparatus in which an alternate tool is brought into operation as a
    result of the shift.

    683,    for an earth working element latched in working position and which
    moves to a position of less earth resistance when manually unlatched.


CLS 172/529
TXT Apparatus under subclass 528 in which the brake or stop means comprises a
    detent device which acts to positively stop motion by abutment against a
    shoulder rather than by a frictional engagement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237,    for a tool latched in working position and rotatable through 360o
    to return to working position and having a ground- engageable draft
    responsive lever (e.g., wheel segment) to rotate the tool through a portion
    of the cycle after release of the latch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclass 440 for scoops adapted to be rotated by
    forward movement of the device.


CLS 172/530
TXT Apparatus under subclass 529 in which the stop means is controlled by the
    motion of a ground wheel or by a motor so that the rotating earth working
    element is periodically released under control of the wheel or motor as the
    apparatus is advanced over the ground.


CLS 172/531
TXT Apparatus under subclass 518 in which one or more substantially planar
    rotary tools is disposed at an angle to its axis of rotation whereby during
    rotation the tool will sweep back and forth laterally of its direction of
    traverse.


CLS 172/532
TXT Apparatus under subclass 518 in which the circumferential edge of the
    rolling or rotating earth working element is a spiral or a substantial
    portion of a spiral.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    for screw- or spiral-type tools which are driven about an axis
    transverse to the line of draft.

    549,    for plural tooth or blade units on a single axle which could be
    adjusted to have the circumferential edge of the teeth or blades in the
    form of a spiral.


CLS 172/533
TXT Apparatus under subclass 518 comprising a clutch connection between a
    rolling or rotating earth working element and its supporting shaft by which
    means the element may be connected for rotation with its shaft or the shaft
    and element may rotate relative to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103     and 125, for overload-relief type clutching means and special
    clutch features, respectively, for power-driven implements.


CLS 172/534
TXT Apparatus under subclass 518 in which the rolling earth working element is
    in the form of a wheel or roller lying in a plane parallel to the direction
    of draft and having earth working surfaces thereon, there being provided
    between a pair of the earth working surfaces a recess, shield or guard
    means for receiving and protecting a plant of a plant row.

    (1)     Note.  The earth working surface may be merely a smooth surface of
    the wheel or roller or may have teeth or the like thereon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclass 53 for vehicle wheels
    having the ground-engaging portion thereof formed with a series of openings
    or depressions.


CLS 172/535
TXT Apparatus under subclass 518 comprising a circumferential earth working
    element adapted to be readily attached to and detached from a generally
    circular platelike member commonly called a "disk" so as to surround the
    circumference of the platelike member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243,    for a detachable rim for a disk, the rim being used as a ground
    wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclasses 63.1+ for vehicle
    wheels in which the supporting portion between the ground-engaging rim and
    the hub is in the form of a continuous or deformed disk.


CLS 172/536
TXT Apparatus under subclass 518 comprising a ground-engaging supporting wheel,
    roller, or gage means having coaxially associated therewith and operatively
    connected thereto at a side thereof a rotary tool means, the surface of the
    wheel or roller not being overlapped by the rotary tool.

    (1)     Note.  The tool may be a rim or the like attached (1) to one end
    face of the wheel and may project laterally or radially outwardly
    therefrom, or (2) may be a thin rim or the like attached between the end
    faces of a pair of wheels and projecting radially outwardly therefrom in a
    relatively flat plane such that the overall area of the peripheral surfaces
    of the wheels is not appreciably changed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    539,    for wheels or rollers having a groove, rim or disk formed integral
    therewith or attached thereto so as to be on or overlie the circumference
    of the wheel or roller.


CLS 172/537
TXT Apparatus under subclass 518 in which the rolling implement comprises (1) a
    plurality of abutting, coaxially aligned, similar, unbroken,
    peripheral-edged wheel-like elements which together form an axially
    extending wave-like configuration of alternate ridges and grooves or (2) a
    single broad-rimmed element having the outer peripheral surface thereof
    formed of an axially or circumferentially extending wave-like configuration
    of alternate ridges and grooves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclass 124, for a
    compacting roller with specific periphery characteristic.

    492,    Roll or Roller, subclasses 30+ for a roll, per se, not elsewhere
    provided for, having surface projections, indentations or slits.


CLS 172/538
TXT Apparatus under subclass 518 in which the earth working element comprises
    an integral or separately formed pair of cooperating, radially inwardly
    converging annular soil packing surfaces adapted to ride on and compress
    the opposed sloping faces of a ridged plant or seed row.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    519,    for planter press wheels having the opposed converging rim portions
    thereof, i.e., the tread portions, formed of a flexible material such as
    rubber.


CLS 172/539
TXT Apparatus under subclass 518 comprising a broad-rimmed rolling device
    having a generally smooth surface for breaking clods and/or smoothing the
    earth, said device having at least one circumferential groove to form a
    ridge of earth as the device rolls over the earth, or being associated with
    one or more thin rims or disks which lie in a generally vertical plane and
    project radially beyond the broad-rimmed circumference of the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    536,    for a wheel or roller with an axially adjacent earth working
    element rotating on the same axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclass 124, for a
    compacting roller with specific periphery characteristics.


CLS 172/540
TXT Apparatus under subclass 518 in which the rolling or rotating earth working
    element has teeth, tines, projections, blades, or other configurations
    spaced circumferentially in a plane generally at right angles to the axis
    of rotation to engage the earth intermittently or with a varying effect as
    the effect as the earth working element turns.

    (1)     Note.  This definition includes those devices in which earth
    working teeth, tines, or blades are attached to wheels or rollers to
    convert them to the kind of earth working element set forth in the
    definition.  Apparatus in which a wheel element is attached to a toothed
    element for purposes of transportation is found in subclass 243.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118+,   for similar earth working elements which are mounted on a
    transverse axis and provided with a means for driving said elements through
    a cycle of operation.

    177,    for diverse tools, one of which is of the rolling type having
    circumferentially spaced blades, tines, or the like.

    532,    for a rolling tool with screw- or spirally arranged blades or teeth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 377 for side delivery horse rakes having tined
    rotary raking elements.

    111,    Planting, subclass 159 for a tined rotary furrow opener claimed in
    combination with a planting machine.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclasses 93, 95+, 116, and
    128 for rolling a rotating means provided with circumferentially spaced
    teeth or blades.

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclass 40.1 for emergency tires
    having traction increasing lugs or blades fastened thereto, and subclasses
    43+ for wheels having traction increasing means in the form of projecting
    spurs or cleats.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclass 121 for a sheep's
    foot roller.

    452,    Butchering, subclasses 141+ for meat tenderizing rollers having
    circumferentially, spaced teeth, blades, or the like.

    492,    Roll or Roller, subclasses 30+ for a roll, per se, not elsewhere
    provided for, having surface projections, indentations or slits.


CLS 172/541
TXT Apparatus under subclass 540 in which there are means operable to move the
    earth working projections with respect to the rotating support therefor to
    prevent the engagement of the projections with the ground.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclasses 46+ for vehicle wheels
    having adjustably mounted thereon traction increasing spurs or cleats.


CLS 172/542
TXT Apparatus under subclass 540 in which the teeth, tines, projections, or
    blades of the implement are mounted on a flexible or articulated, closed
    belt-like member which moves through an endless circuit as the device is
    moved over the earth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    for power driven, endless chain-type earth working implements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 89+ for an earth-boring
    device including a tool element on a continuously driven flexible or
    articulated endless member.

    305,    Wheel Substitutes for Land Vehicles, subclasses 187+ for one
    endless flexible track for a land vehicle, said track having detachable
    cleats for penetrating the ground to secure better traction for the track.


CLS 172/543
TXT Apparatus under subclass 540 in which the teeth, tines, blades, or the like
    are formed of an inherently resilient material whereby such teeth, tines,
    blades, or the like may flex or yield under stress.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     for spring teeth, blades, tines, or the like mounted on a
    cyclically driven carrier.

    643     and 705+, for spring teeth, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclasses 5+ for spring wheels having
    deformable ground-engaging rim portions whereby the wheel as a whole does
    not retain its circular form during rotation.


CLS 172/544
TXT Apparatus under subclass 540 in which a tooth, tine, or blade is mounted on
    a spring or is related to a spring so that relative movement between the
    tooth, tine, or blade and its supporting member stresses the spring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     for flexible or yieldably mounted teeth, blades, or the like
    mounted on a cyclically driven carrier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclasses 5+ for spring wheels having
    resiliently deformable ground-engaging rim portions whereby the wheel as a
    whole does not retain its circular form during rotation.

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclass 51 for a vehicle wheel
    having resiliently mounted thereon one or more traction increasing spurs or
    cleats.


CLS 172/545
TXT Apparatus under subclass 540 in which the projecting means change their
    position relative to each other while the device as a whole is rotating, or
    are in movable relation to a rotating support therefor while the support is
    rotating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     for driven implements wherein the teeth, blades, or tines therefor
    are moved or are movable relative to a driven carrier portion thereof.

    541,    for rolling supports having movable mounted thereon teeth, blades,
    tines, or the like which are movable to a position in which the teeth,
    etc., are prevented from engaging the ground.

    543,    for rolling or rotating implements with spring teeth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclasses 45+ for vehicle wheels
    having movable mounted thereon traction increasing spurs or cleats.


CLS 172/546
TXT Apparatus under subclass 545 in which means are provided for causing the
    movement to take place.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92+,    for similar devices wherein the rotating element is positively
    driven from a power source.

    96,     for similar devices wherein the rotating element is positively
    driven from a power source and the means for causing movement is a spring.

    541,    for a moving means operable to prevent ground engagement of the
    tines.

    544+,   for spring mounting or moving means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclasses 48 and 49 for vehicle
    wheels having traction increasing spurs or cleats thereon, there being
    provided a means for alternately projecting and retracting the spurs on
    cleats during each revolution of the wheel.


CLS 172/547
TXT Apparatus under subclass 540 with means for clearing earth from the
    projecting elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for apparatus in which one earth working element is definitely a
    driving means and is cleaned by another earth working element which is
    driven by the first element as the apparatus is propelled over the ground.

    546,    for a rolling, rotating, or orbitally moving element having tines,
    blades, or the like in which the tines or blades are cleaned by movement
    relative to the rotating support.

    558+,   for disc cleaning means.

    674+,   for earth working tool cleaning means in general.


CLS 172/548
TXT Apparatus under subclass 540 in which there are a plurality of tooth, tine,
    or blade units side by side on a common shaft or axle, each unit comprising
    at least one blade, tooth, or tine and a hub portion.


CLS 172/549
TXT Apparatus under subclass 548 in which a means is provided on the tooth or
    blade units or on the supporting axle therefor for adjusting the angular
    disposition of the tooth or blade units relative to each other in a
    circumferential direction about said axle.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "adjusting" see the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109,    for ground-engaging teeth or blades adjustably mounted on the
    peripheral surfaces of rotary tools, which tools are driven about
    horizontally disposed, longitudinally extending axes.

    550,    for a rolling or rotating tool with adjustable teeth.


CLS 172/550
TXT Apparatus under subclass 540 wherein a tine, tooth, blade, or like
    projection is adjustable on a rotatable carrier means.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "adjustable" see the class definition.

    (2)     Note.  A device disclosed as comprising a tool driven about a
    horizontal longitudinal axis and having adjustable teeth or blades is
    classified in subclass 109 even if the drive means is not claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    545+,   for a rolling or rotating tool in which the blades or teeth change
    position during rotation.

    549,    for a rolling or rotating tool with plural, adjustable, positioned
    tine units on a single axle.


CLS 172/551
TXT Apparatus under subclass 540 in which the rolling implement is journaled in
    a frame which frame is movably mounted on a main frame, there being
    interposed between the two frames a resilient means for yieldably urging
    the implement into ground contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for rotary-driven implements which are yieldably mounted on a
    supporting frame.

    572,    for spring means to move a rolling or rotating tool vertically.


CLS 172/552
TXT Apparatus under subclass 540 in which a laterally extending bar or earth
    working blade portion is held on a rotatable support by openwork or spaced
    supporting means.

    (1)     Note.  The general appearance of these devices is usually very
    similar to that of the conventional lawn mower.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for similar rolling earth working elements combined with means for
    shifting surface material without soil disturbance (e.g., combined with
    rake).

    121,    for driven earth working elements having laterally extending blades
    or skeleton support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclass 52 for vehicle wheels
    composed of two or more parallel rims connected one to the other by cleats.


CLS 172/553
TXT Apparatus under subclass 552 in which the laterally extending blade portion
    is provided with or formed of a number of spaced prongs, teeth, notches, or
    the like ground-working projections.


CLS 172/554
TXT Apparatus under subclass 540 which comprises a relatively large diameter
    drum or roller-like member having axially spaced along the periphery
    thereof a plurality of teeth, blades, cutters, or the like.

    (1)     Note.  The peripheral surface of the drum should be in ground
    contact as distinguished from a small diameter supporting shaft for teeth,
    blades, cutters or the like, which shaft would not be in ground contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    for a driven tool comprising a drum having teeth or blades.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 23.51 and 895.31 for apparatus and
    processes, respectively, of making toothed cylinders.


CLS 172/555
TXT Apparatus under subclass 540 in which the teeth or other configurations are
    integral parts of a platelike member.


CLS 172/556
TXT Apparatus under subclass 540 in which the teeth or blades are attached to a
    generally thin wheel or hub-like rotary support by a locking or clamping
    means which means itself extends, or exerts a clamping force which extends,
    in a direction parallel to the axis of rotation of said support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclasses 44.1+ for vehicle
    wheels having detachably mounted thereon traction increasing spurs or
    cleats.


CLS 172/557
TXT Apparatus under subclass 518 in which the rolling or rotating earth working
    element compreses a continuous rim supported by a plurality of spokes.

    (1)     Note.  Earth working elements such as press wheels, marker wheels
    and the like are found in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    539,    for a wheel or roller with a groove, rim, or disk.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclasses 64.1+ for a vehicle
    wheel in which the supporting portion between the rim and the hub comprises
    a disk deformed or cut to simulate in form or function the spokes of a
    conventional wheel.


CLS 172/558
TXT Apparatus under subclass 518 comprising means to remove earth from a
    generally circular plate like rolling or rotating earth working element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168,    for a rolling or rotating tool for cutting or raising a furrow
    slice and a nonrolling adjacent moldboard for receiving the furrow slice
    and inverting or completing the inversion of the same.

    220,    for cleaning means for disks which are shifted for opposite throw
    for alternate right or left hand operation, the cleaning means being
    movable relative to the disk upon reversal of the disk.

    547,    for cleaners for rolling, rotating, or orbitally moving earth
    working elements having tines, blades or other discontinuous or angular
    periphery.

    606,    for cleaners for stationary-type implement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, especially subclasses
    236.01+, for disk cleaners which are not attachments on earth working
    apparatus.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 855+ for vehicles having wheel scrapers
    or cleaners.


CLS 172/559
TXT Apparatus under subclass 558 in which the earth-removing means is supported
    for free rotation in position to remove accumulated soil from the platelike
    member.


CLS 172/560
TXT Apparatus under subclass 558 in which earth is removed from a pair of
    platelike members which converge towards each other and touch or are
    closely adjacent at their convergent ends.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    575,    for converging touching disks.


CLS 172/561
TXT Apparatus under subclass 558 in which the earth-removing means remove earth
    from the opposite sides of a said platelike member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    560,    for converging discs having cleaners for opposite sides of each
    disk.


CLS 172/562
TXT Apparatus under subclass 558 in which more than one earth-removing means is
    mounted to cooperate with a single side of a said platelike member.


CLS 172/563
TXT Apparatus under subclass 558 comprising a plurality of earth-removing means
    associated with a plurality of disks and means common to said plurality of
    earth-removing means for moving them towards and away from the disks.


CLS 172/564
TXT Apparatus under subclass 563 in which the earth-removing means are each
    supported on a common elongated shaft which is turned about its axis to
    move the earth removing means.


CLS 172/565
TXT Apparatus under subclass 563 in which the disks have a common axis or
    generally parallel axes and the associated earth-removing means are moved
    toward or away from the disks by a common operating means which is movable
    in a direction generally parallel to the axis or axes of the disks.


CLS 172/566
TXT Apparatus under subclass 558 in which the earth-removing means or a portion
    thereof is urged towards the platelike member.


CLS 172/567
TXT Apparatus under subclass 518 in which the rolling or rotating earth working
    elements comprise a group of generally circular platelike members each
    having the same axis of rotation and a single generally circular platelike
    member having a different axis of rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    574+,   for plural disks mounted on individual axes.


CLS 172/568
TXT Apparatus under subclass 518 in which the rolling or rotating earth working
    elements are generally circular platelike members each having the same axis
    of rotation and operated as a unit in ordinary use, a plurality of the
    platelike members which comprise a portion of the unit being movable or
    removable as a whole with respect to the remaining platelike members.


CLS 172/569
TXT Apparatus under subclass 518 in which the rolling or rotating earth working
    elements are generally circular platelike members said members being
    parallel and mounted in an identical manner for pivotal movement about
    vertical axes and means interconnecting them for moving them about their
    axes, the movement of each member or cluster of members about its axis
    being the same amount and direction as the movement of each other member or
    cluster of members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221+,   for an implement adapted to be alternated for right or left hand
    operation by being shifted for an opposite throw, said implement having
    plural disks shifted about individual vertical axes.

    576,    for plural disks mounted on individual axes and provided with
    interconnected means for simultaneously adjusting said discs.


CLS 172/570
TXT Apparatus under subclass 518 in which the rolling or rotating earth working
    element is provided with a spring other than one associated with a detent.


CLS 172/571
TXT Apparatus under subclass 570 in which a spring affects movement of a group
    of said earth working elements so as to change the angle of the axis or
    axes of rotation of the elements in plan view.


CLS 172/572
TXT Apparatus under subclass 570 in which a spring acts to move said earth
    working elements vertically.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    551,    for a rolling tool having teeth, tines, or blades and provided with
    spring means to urge the tool into ground contact.

    705+,   for spring means to move an earth working element other than disk
    vertically.


CLS 172/573
TXT Apparatus under subclass 572 comprising a plurality of said earth working
    elements, each being separately and individually acted on by a spring
    member.


CLS 172/574
TXT Apparatus under subclass 518 in which the rolling or rotating earth working
    element is generally a circular platelike member, and there are a plurality
    of such members, each of which is disclosed as having an individual axle or
    is disclosed as revolving about an individual axis, at least in one
    position of adjustment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    685+,   for plural tools of the nonrolling type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    111,    Planting, subclass 164 for openers of this general type claimed in
    combination with planters.


CLS 172/575
TXT Apparatus under subclass 574 in which two of said platelike members touch
    each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    560,    for touching disks provided with cleaning means.


CLS 172/576
TXT Apparatus under subclass 574 in which there are means for adjusting the
    platelike members, said means for the different platelike members being
    interconnected or having a common operator so as to influence each other.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "adjusting" see the class definition.

    (2)     Note.  Devices in which the platelike members, rigidly mounted on
    the same support to move together, are not included in this definition.
    The interconnection must be by a linkage or the like.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    569,    for plural disks pivoted on individual vertical axes and provided
    with interconnected means for moving them identically.


CLS 172/577
TXT Apparatus under subclass 518 comprising a plurality of earth working
    element, handled as a unit, which unit is adapted to be turned to positions
    180o apart from each other in plan view, for use in earth working in either
    position (e.g., to throw the earth either to the right or left).

    (1)     Note.  Many disk gangs are inherently reversible.  For
    classification under this definition a claim must make specific reference
    to the reversible feature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219+,   for a group of rolling earth working elements movable to reversed
    position by an actuating means comprising more than a mere handle rigidly
    attached to the frame to be moved.

    254,    for devices which are changeable in function due to rearrangement
    of earth working elements, but not including devices as defined in subclass
    577.

    702+,   for an earth working apparatus having a reversible port other than
    a disk gang.


CLS 172/578
TXT Apparatus under subclass 518 comprising a wheel, other than a traction
    wheel forming a normal part of a self-propelled vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  For classification under this definition a claim must
    positively refer to a wheel or some structure which necessarily implies a
    wheel.  A reference in a claim to a frame which might or might not carry a
    wheel is not enough even though the frame is disclosed as carrying a wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    395+,   for rolling or rotating earth working elements associated with
    wheels which are vertically adjustable with respect to their running gear.

    440+,   for angled gangs of earth working elements liftable as a unit with
    the mast of a mast-type hitch.

    454+,   for angled gangs of earth working elements liftable as a unit for
    transport on a wheeled frame by means other than a mast-type hitch.


CLS 172/579
TXT Apparatus under subclass 518 in which the rolling or rotating earth working
    element is a generally circular platelike member and there are plurality of
    groups or clusters of said members each group or cluster comprising a
    subassembly of parts which is handled as a unit.

    (1)     Note.  A group is usually a gang of disks each rotating about the
    same axis, the gang being handled as a unit in the apparatus.  The groups
    of disks, however, may be disclosed as involving disks rotating on
    different axes.  If the claim merely calls for groups or gangs without
    detailing the different axes, the device is classfiable under this
    definition.  If the claim describes the mounting of the disks on different
    axes in some detail, the patent would be classifiable in subclasses 574+ if
    its disclosure warranted it, or in other appropriate subclasses.


CLS 172/580
TXT Apparatus under subclass 579 comprising a power means for moving an
    implement part to different positions relative to surrounding structure.

    (1)     Note.  Implements which are adjusted by means of the draft force
    pulling the implement are not included, being classified in appropriate
    subclasses below.  The "power means" of this definition comprises a
    servomotor or a power take off from a wheel or motor.


CLS 172/581
TXT Apparatus under subclass 579 in which groups of said members are changeable
    from one kind of arrangement to another, the change involving more than
    mere vertical adjustment, horizontal angling, lateral, or longitudinal
    adjustment which does not change the basic character of the arrangement.

    (1)     Note.  The different arrangement may be solely for the purpose of
    changing the overall width of the device whereby it may be transported
    through a narrow opening in a fence, along a roadway, or the like.

    (2)     Note.  The same number of groups must appear in each arrangement
    under this definition.  For apparatus in which a group is added or
    subtracted see subclass 253.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    568,    for different arrangements effected by moving or removing a section
    of a gang.


CLS 172/582
TXT Apparatus under subclass 579 comprising means for positioning groups of
    said members at different lateral horizontal distances apart from each
    other independently of the variation in spacing incidental to a vertical
    motion or a horizontal angling movement.


CLS 172/583
TXT Apparatus under subclass 579 comprising means for adjusting a group of said
    members or part thereof vertically.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "adjusting" see the class definition.

    (2)     Note.  The group may be held in different positions by the draft
    force on the implement.

    (3)     Note.  The holding means may be an adjustable stop, holding against
    movement in only one direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    440+,   for plural groups of disks liftable as a unit by a mast-type hitch.

    454,    for plural groups of disks lifted by an actuator as a unit for
    transport on a wheeled frame or broadly claimed implement.

    600,    for a single gang mounted for tilting and horizontal angling
    adjustment.


CLS 172/584
TXT Apparatus under subclass 579 comprising means for adjusting a group of said
    members in positions having a different angular relationship to adjacent
    structure in plan view.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "adjusting" see the class definition.

    (2)     Note.  The gang may be adjusted due to a draft force, such as
    arises when making a turn or pulling the implement forward or pushing it
    rearward, or due to manual adjustment.


CLS 172/585
TXT Apparatus under subclass 584 in which one group is of a different length
    than another group.


CLS 172/586
TXT Apparatus under subclass 584 in which there are more than two of said
    groups in a lateral direction across the apparatus so that more than two
    paths are formed in the ground.

    (1)     Note.  A rear group may overlap a front group to a very minor
    extent in a lateral sense and still be considered to form a separate path.
    Where, however, the overlap is of material length the groups are considered
    tandem and classifiable in subclass 595 or 596.


CLS 172/587
TXT Apparatus under subclass 584 comprising at least two groups of disks
    arranged in staggered relation with respect to each other on each side of
    the center line of the apparatus (e.g., the axis of a group of disks on one
    side of the center line does not intersect the center line at the same
    point as the axis of a group of disks on the other side of the center line).


CLS 172/588
TXT Apparatus under subclass 584 comprising a pair of said groups positioned
    abreast of each other, a tongue member extending longitudinally of the line
    of draft, means pivotally connecting the gangs to the tongue member, a
    draft hitch means for connection to a propelling means, said hitch means
    being mounted on and movable longitudinally with respect to said tongue
    member, and means connecting the gangs to the hitch means to swing or
    permit the gang to swing about their pivots when the hitch means is moved
    relative to the tongue.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 435+ for motion or draft
    responsive load handling including movably connected vehicle sections.


CLS 172/589
TXT Apparatus under subclass 584 comprising a means attached to a tractor in
    addition to the draft connection of the implement to the tractor and at a
    point laterally spaced from the draft connection so that a turning movement
    of the tractor causes a movement of a disc gang relative to adjacent
    structure.


CLS 172/590
TXT Apparatus under subclass 589 comprising a detent means holding two parts
    against relative motion, which means is responsive to a movement of the
    tractor hitched to the implement to release the detent.


CLS 172/591
TXT Apparatus under subclass 584 comprising an actuator powered by an
    attendant, the operation of which moves a group or is effective to vary the
    range of movement caused by some other means.

    (1)     Note.  The mere operation of a latch is not included.

    (2)     Note.  See the class definition for the meaning of "actuator".


CLS 172/592
TXT Apparatus under subclass 591 in which there is a plurality of actuators,
    each having a shaft, the shaft of one actuator being concentrically
    positioned with respect to the shaft of another actuator.


CLS 172/593
TXT Apparatus under subclass 591 comprising a plurality of actuators, each
    connected to a different group and each moving its group independently of
    another.


CLS 172/594
TXT Apparatus under subclass 591 in which two groups are arranged substantially
    abreast with their longitudinal axes on substantially the same laterally
    extending line and two other similarly positioned groups are disposed
    behind the first two groups and thereby work substantially the same soil
    path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    592,    for horizontally, angularly adjustable double tandem groups having
    concentric controls.


CLS 172/595
TXT Apparatus under subclass 584 comprising two groups positionable
    substantially abreast with their longitudinal axes on substantially the
    same laterally extending line and two other similarly positioned group,
    behind the first two groups and working substantially the same soil path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    588,    for horizontally, angularly adjustable double tandem groups wherein
    the adjusting means comprises a hitch, longitudinally movable on the tongue
    of the apparatus.

    589+,   for horizontally, angularly adjustable double tandem groups having
    a turning connection offset from the draft connection.

    594+,   for horizontally, angularly adjustable double tandem groups
    provided with manual actuator-adjusting means.


CLS 172/596
TXT Apparatus under subclass 584 comprising a front group and a rear group
    positioned substantially directly in back of the front group and working
    substantially the same soil path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48+,    for power-driven earth working elements arranged in tandem
    formation.

    589+,   for horizontally, angularly adjustable tandem gangs having a
    turning connection offset from the draft connection.


CLS 172/597
TXT Apparatus under subclass 596 comprising two struts each directly pivoted to
    a different group and directly pivoted to each other to form a toggle joint
    between the groups.


CLS 172/598
TXT Apparatus under subclass 584 comprising a pair of groups positioned abreast
    and means acting directly between the axles of the groups or directly
    between the end disks to take the end thrust between the groups.


CLS 172/599
TXT Apparatus under subclass 518 in which the rolling or rotating earth working
    element is a generally circular platelike member and there is a plurality
    of said members each having a common axis of rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    574+,   for plural discs having individual mounts or axes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 157 for a plain bearing and 460 for an
    antifriction bearing for a plow or colter disks which may include the
    bearing support.


CLS 172/600
TXT Apparatus under subclass 599 in which the common axis is adjustable
    angularly in plan view and is also adjustable angularly in an elevational
    view.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "adjustable" see the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    583,    for plural gangs supported for tilting adjustment.

    584+,   for plural gangs supported for horizontal angling adjustment.

    603,    for a single disc which is horizontally, angularly adjustable.

    742,    for a tool which is laterally adjustable about a vertical axis.

    743,    for a tool which is laterally adjustable about a longitudinal axis.


CLS 172/601
TXT Apparatus under subclass 599 in which the axis of rotation of the platelike
    members extends along the center of a straight supporting shaft, and the
    platelike members are rotatable relative to said shaft.


CLS 172/602
TXT Apparatus under subclass 518 in which the rolling or rotating earth working
    tool is disclosed as a single, generally circular platelike member which is
    mounted on a frame or frame standard for free swinging, arcuate movement
    about a vertical axis whereby the member assumes or may freely assume
    different angular positions relative to the direction of draft as viewed in
    plan.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    748,    for a freely pivoting tool other than a disc.


CLS 172/603
TXT Apparatus under subclass 518 in which the rolling or rotating earth working
    tool comprises a single, generally circular platelike member provided with
    a means for adjusting such member on a frame in a different angular
    relationship to adjacent structure as viewed in plan.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "adjusting" see the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    584+,   for a horizontally, angularly adjustable disc gang.

    742,    for a tool other than a disc which is laterally adjustable about a
    vertical axis.


CLS 172/604
TXT Apparatus under subclass 518 in which the rolling or rotating element
    comprises a generally circular platelike member of some specific structural
    configuration.

    (1)     Note.  For classification under this definition a patent must have
    a claim which contains some detailed description of the platelike member.
    The detailed description may relate merely to the means for fastening the
    plate to a bearing structure provided such means is integral with the
    plate. A separate means for attachment to a bearing, or the bearing or
    support structure, per se, is not included under this definition.  Thus, a
    patent with a claim reciting details of a bearing and with merely a board
    reference to a disk is not included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    557,    for a disk with spokes.

    599+,   for disk gangs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    111,    Planting, subclasses 163+ for disk-type earth working tools claimed
    in combination with planting machines.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 373 for a disc cutter for
    a roller- type earth boring bit.

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclass 63 for vehicle wheels
    having the supporting portion between the hub and the rim formed of a
    continuous or a deformed disk member.


CLS 172/605
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a frame, a hitch carried by
    the frame for connection to a propelling means, said hitch being movable
    with respect to the frame, and earth working element movably carried by the
    frame and means interconnecting the hitch and earth working element whereby
    movement of the hitch with respect to the frame causes movement of the
    earth working element with respect to the frame.

    (1)     Note.  This definition is intended to include devices in which an
    earth working element has a normal earth working position and is moved by
    the hitch after it has moved up from the normal position on striking an
    obstacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238,    for an implement comprising a ground support moved vertically
    relative to the frame by a draft force.

    467,    an implement comprising a tool having vertical movement caused by a
    shiftable hitch combined with an actuator adapted to lift the tool for
    transport on a wheeled frame or broadly claimed implement.

    588,    for an implement comprising laterally disposed disk gangs which are
    horizontally angled by a hitch longitudinally movable on a tongue.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 435+ for a draft
    responsive load handler and transporter.


CLS 172/606
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means movable relative to
    an earth working element or other part of the apparatus for cleaning said
    earth working element or said other part of the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  An earth working element having means to reduce friction
    (e.g., moldboard with rollers) is excluded. However, a nonearth working
    part (e.g., standard) having a relatively movable part such as a roller to
    prevent weeds, trash, or the like from collecting thereon is included under
    this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for an implement comprising a driven tool and a cleaner spaced from
    the ground surface.

    66,     for a nondriven tool combined with a driven cleaner.

    183,    for laterally spaced rolling and nonrolling earth working elements
    having a scissors or shearing action between adjacent faces, usually to cut
    stalks, etc., from the nonrolling element.

    220,    for a reversible disk with a reversible scraper.

    236+,   for apparatus having a ground-engageable draft responsive lever
    which may act to lift the implement off the ground to free it from trash.

    461,    for apparatus having an implement liftable for transport on a
    wheeled frame, the implement being movable with respect to a cleaning means
    during lift.

    547,    for a rolling tool having circumferentially spaced tines or blades
    and provided with cleaning means.

    558+,   for disk type rolling implements with disk cleaning means.

    714+,   for earth working elements having parts relatively movable during
    operation.

    755,    for moldboard-type implements in which the moldboard is heated or
    lubricated to reduce friction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, for general utility
    cleaning apparatus not confined or limited to any particular industrial art.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, for the generic home for
    the separation or removal of adherent dirt.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 313 for a mechanical
    cleaner for an earth boring bit or cutter element.


CLS 172/607
TXT Apparatus under subclass 606 in which the earth working element is in the
    form of a vertically extending tooth, the cleaner comprising a member which
    extends completely around the tooth, relative vertical movement between the
    tooth and cleaner effecting the cleaning action.


CLS 172/608
TXT Apparatus under subclass 606 comprising a freely rotatable nonearth working
    member located at some point subject to the collection of material (trash,
    weeds, etc.) said member rotating under the influence of the material to
    clear the same from the apparatus.


CLS 172/609
TXT Apparatus under subclass 606 including a plurality of earth working
    elements and means to remove material from the surface of or from between
    the elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    607,    for a plurality of teeth and cleaning means which surrounds the
    teeth.


CLS 172/610
TXT Apparatus under subclass 606 in which the cleaner comprises an element
    which sweeps across the surface to be cleaned in scraping contact therewith
    or closely adjacent thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    609,    for scrapers for plural tools.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, appropriate subclasses
    for general cleaning attachments including scrapers, wipers, or brushes
    which cooperate with moving surfaces of devices to remove material
    therefrom.


CLS 172/611
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a weight or means for
    holding or adjusting a weight.

    (1)     Note.  Since any object has weight, apparatus is classified in this
    subclass only when an element of the combination is specially provided to
    add weight or hold a weight.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    525,    for implements having vertically extending teeth rotatable about a
    substantially vertical axis, wherein a weight is provided to tilt or cant
    the axis so that certain of the teeth will engage the earth and cause the
    teeth to rotate about said axis.


CLS 172/612
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a flexible fabric, chain,
    cable, strand, rope, or wire for engaging the earth.

    (1)     Note.  A flexible fabric may include a plurality of tooth members
    each tooth or very small goup of teeth being joined to others by pivoted
    links so as to act like a flexible chain or mat while in earth working use.
     The fabric may also be a textile material or a flexible metallic mesh or
    grating member.  However, rigid bar members of substantial length carrying
    a plurality of teeth and connected by hinges or links to adjacent bars or
    supports are not included.  This structure is classified in subclasses 619+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    519,    for a rolling tool having a flexible material rim (e.g., rubber).


CLS 172/613
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a plurality of earth
    working elements or portions of a plurality of earth working elements which
    are movably related to each other while remaining in the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  The distinction between an assemblage of parts comprising
    one earth working element and an assemblage of parts comprising a plurality
    of earth working elements is often difficult to make.  Generally when parts
    closely cooperate and are mutually interconnected so as to be supported
    from the same standard they may comprise a single earth working element,
    but parts on separate standards even though connected to a single frame and
    each performing a like function may be separate earth working elements.
    Common usage and the prior placement of the art must also be considered.

    (2)     Note.  This definition includes relatively adjustable tools of the
    type where there is provided a frame or support having a plurality of holes
    or notches, etc., to mount a plurality of tools in selective positions, the
    individual tools necessarily having to be removed to be engaged in another
    hole for adjustment purposes.  For this simple-type adjustment the tools
    are considered to remain in the apparatus when being adjusted.  However,
    apparatus of the type in which the relative position of a plurality of
    tools is changed by a substantial disassembly and assembly operation, such
    as frame sections carrying tools being rearranged, is excluded from this
    definition.  See subclasses 245+.

    (3)     Note.  A plurality of earth working elements individually loosely
    mounted, or spring mounted, or merely themselves being springs (such as
    spring teeth) come under this definition since the elements will move
    relatively to each other as the apparatus is drawn over the ground.

    (4)     Note.  See the definition of "adjustable" in the class definition.
    A plurality of earth working elements merely clamped in position so that
    the position of each may be changed by loosening the clamps and
    retightening are not included under this definition (613).  See subclasses
    685+ for such devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48+,    for plural driven tools.

    63+,    for a device comprising a driven tool and a nondriven tool.

    133+,   for diverse tools.

    204+,   for implements alternating for right or left hand operation.

    382,    for multiple-level tools for operating at different depths in the
    soil.

    488+,   for tools carried on a wheeled frame having a single actuator for
    lifting plural relatively movable tools.

    518+,   for rolling, rotating, or orbitally moving tools.

    685,    for plural relatively fixed tools.


CLS 172/614
TXT Apparatus under subclass 613 comprising an earth working element mounting
    member pivoted on a frame or support, at least one earth working element
    mounted on the member and being pivoted with respect thereto and means for
    pivoting the element incident to pivotal movement of the member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    684,    for similar structure for single tools or for rigid tool units.


CLS 172/615
TXT Apparatus under subclass 614 in which the earth working element mounting
    member and the means for pivoting the earth working element comprise a pair
    of spaced parallel bars both pivoted to the frame or support.


CLS 172/616
TXT Apparatus under subclass 615 in which the parallel bars are mounted to
    pivot about vertical axes to allow the parallel bars to swing in a
    horizontal plane.


CLS 172/617
TXT Apparatus under subclass 616 in which the parallel bars are also mounted to
    pivot about a horizontal axis to allow the bars to pivot in a vertical
    plane.


CLS 172/618
TXT Apparatus under subclass 613 in which the earth working elements or tooth
    bars pivot about a horizontal transverse axis to different working angles
    when draft force is applied to the apparatus in opposite directions and
    including means to limit the movement of the elements or tooth bars to a
    particular angularity in both directions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    712,    for an earth working element which assumes different working angles
    when drawn in opposite directions.

    777+,   for a narrow depending tool removably attached to a scraper which
    assumes different angularity when drawn in opposite directions.


CLS 172/619
TXT Apparatus under subclass 613 comprising a plurality of groups of earth
    working elements interconnected by means which permits one group to rise
    and fall or pivot vertically as a unit with respect to another group under
    the influence of the forces applied thereto during operation, without
    intervention of an attendant.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes those groups of earth working
    elements which are interconnected one to the other by means of loose or
    flexible linkage whereby as disclosed a group may move vertically a slight
    amount on encountering an obstacle or on traversing an uneven or undulating
    terrain.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    643     and 657+, for a plurality of single tools which are individually
    mounted for vertical movement one relative to the other during operation.


CLS 172/620
TXT Apparatus under subclass 619 comprising a plurality of horizontal bars
    parallel to one another and extending substantially transverse to the
    direction of travel, the bars each carrying a plurality of earth working
    teeth, the bars being so connected as to be individually capable of
    vertical motion with respect to one another during operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    634+,   for a plurality of horizontal parallel tooth bars which are
    angularly adjustable about their supporting axis, but which bars are so
    mounted on a frame or interconnected one to the other as to be incapable of
    independent vertical motion relative to each other.


CLS 172/621
TXT Apparatus under subclass 620 in which the tooth bars are resiliently
    mounted so that they may independently or simultaneously pivot or yield
    against the action of a biasing means.


CLS 172/622
TXT Apparatus under subclass 620 in which the angularity of the tooth bars may
    be changed to vary the angle of the teeth in vertically longitudinal planes
    and having actuating means to vary said angularity.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of actuating see "actuator" in the class
    definition.

    (2)     Note.  The actuator may positively move the tooth bars in only one
    direction with ground reaction force being relied upon to move the bars in
    the opposite direction.


CLS 172/623
TXT Apparatus under subclass 619 including two transversely aligned laterally
    spaced earth working element groups with each said group having
    longitudinally aligned therewith a trailing group, all of said groups being
    vertically movable relative to one another.


CLS 172/624
TXT Apparatus under subclass 619 in which the groups are movably connected to a
    laterally extending bar or draft beam located ahead of the groups.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    623,    for groups of tools abreast and in tandem which may also be
    connected to a forward transverse draft bar.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 411.1 for articulated vehicles of the type
    including a leading vehicle and a plurality of laterally spaced trailing
    vehicles.


CLS 172/624.5
TXT With parallelogram-type linkage:
    Apparatus under subclass 624 in which the mechanism connecting the groups
    of the bar or draft beam includes a plurality of vertically spaced links,
    each pivoted at an end to the bar or draft beam and at its other end to the
    tools, which links remain in parallel relationship to each other as they
    move.


CLS 172/625
TXT Apparatus under subclass 624 in which the earth working element groups are
    provided with draft or hitch means whereby they may be drawn alternately in
    different directions spaced 90o from one another.


CLS 172/626
TXT Apparatus under subclass 624 in which the bar or draft beam is composed of
    two or more movably connected sections.


CLS 172/627
TXT Apparatus under subclass 624 in which the earth working element groups
    additionally have means connecting one earth working element group to an
    adjacent earth working element group.


CLS 172/628
TXT Apparatus under subclass 619 comprising a pair of laterally spaced
    transversely aligned earth working element groups and a third earth working
    element group longitudinally spaced from the first named groups, the
    longitudinally center line of the third element group extending in a line
    between the first two groups, all the groups being substantially similarly
    shaped.


CLS 172/629
TXT Apparatus under subclass 619 in which there are at least three earth
    working element groups so disposed laterally one of the other that during
    operation each group traverses a longitudinal path which is transversely
    spaced from the path of the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    623,    for groups of tools abreast and in tandem which may have three or
    more laterally spaced groups.

    624+,   for two or more groups of tools connected to a forward transverse
    draft bar.


CLS 172/630
TXT Apparatus under subclass 619 in which the earth working element groups are
    mounted for pivotal movement on opposite sides of a longitudinal rod or
    beam which serves as a draft beam.


CLS 172/631
TXT Apparatus under subclass 619 comprising adjacent earth working element
    groups relatively pivotable about the same axis which extends substantially
    in or parallel to the line of draft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    623,    for groups of tools abreast and in tandem which may also be movable
    about a common longitudinal axis.

    627,    for groups of tools connected to each other for relative vertical
    movement which movement may be about a common longitudinal axis.


CLS 172/632
TXT Apparatus under subclass 619 in which the earth working element groups are
    connected to a draft member or to each other so they have relative movement
    about a horizontal axis which is at an angle to the line of draft.


CLS 172/633
TXT Apparatus under subclass 619 comprising a forward and a rearward group of
    earth working elements said groups being relatively movable about a
    horizontal axis disposed transversely of the apparatus intermediate the
    groups in forward and rearward position of the groups.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    623,    for groups of tools abreast and in tandem which may permit the
    tandem groups to pivot about an intermediate transverse axis.


CLS 172/634
TXT Apparatus under subclass 613 in which a plurality of parallel bars, each
    bar carrying a plurality of earth working elements, are pivotally mounted,
    the bars being selectively rotatable from one angular position of
    adjustment to another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    390,    for apparatus having a plurality of spring tools carried by
    parallel pivoted tooth bars and also having a wheel substitute such as a
    runner.

    620+,   for parallel transverse tooth bars which are relatively movable to
    each other during operation and which tooth bars may also be pivotally
    adjustable.


CLS 172/635
TXT Apparatus under subclass 634 including an actuator for pivoting one or more
    of the bars.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition for the definition of "actuator".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    390,    for apparatus having a plurality of spring tools carried by
    parallel pivoted tooth bars and also having a wheel substitute such as a
    runner, said bars usually having an actuator to pivot said bars.

    622,    for similar structures in which the tooth bars are each free to
    move vertically with respect to the others.


CLS 172/636
TXT Apparatus under subclass 635 in which the individual earth working elements
    are also adjustable about upright axes or axes which extend in the
    direction of travel.


CLS 172/637
TXT Apparatus under subclass 635 comprising a plurality of separate actuators
    for independently pivoting different bars.


CLS 172/638
TXT Apparatus under subclass 635 in which the actuator comprises gearing.


CLS 172/639
TXT Apparatus under subclass 634 in which the structural features or details of
    the bar mounting or journaling means are specifically set forth in the
    claims.


CLS 172/640
TXT Apparatus under subclas 613 in which at least one earth working element
    group is pivotally mounted on and selectively adjustable as a unit about a
    horizontal axis to thereby adjust the position of the earth working element
    group with respect to another earth working element or earth working
    element group.

    (1)     Note.  See class definition meaning of "adjustable".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    459+,   for tools lifted on a wheeled frame which are pivotal about a
    longitudinal axis.


CLS 172/641
TXT Apparatus under subclass 613 in which a pair of longitudinally extending
    earth working element supporting beams are provided with a lateral
    adjustable means comprising a yoke lying in a transverse vertical plane and
    in which the yoke comprises a pair of arms pivoted to each other at one end
    and having the other ends thereof interconnected to the element beams, the
    arms being adjustable relative to each other about the pivot to thereby
    spread the beams in a traverse direction relative to each other.

    (1)     Note.  For meaning of "adjustable", see the class definition.


CLS 172/642
TXT Apparatus under subclass 613 in which the earth engaging elements of a pair
    are nonidentical or positioned in a nonidentical way so as to function in a
    right and left handed manner in working the earth rather than in an
    identical manner, the elements being arranged to operate on opposite sides
    of a crop row for the purpose of simultaneously moving soil onto or away
    from said row.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     71+ and 73, for pairs of nondriven earth working elements which
    cooperate on opposite sides of a plant row in a right and left hand manner
    and which are disposed forwardly of or to the rear of a driven earth
    working element.

    159,    for laterally spaced right and left hand elements with an
    intermediate symmetrical element.

    686,    for plural elements of the right and left hand type.


CLS 172/643
TXT Apparatus under subclass 613 in which the earth working element or the
    immediate supporting means therefor is formed of resilient material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    389+,   for spring-tooth implements with wheel substitutes.

    624,    for a spring-formed standard mounted on a rotating carrier.

    627,    for spring teeth mounted on a rotating carrier.

    634+,   for parallel, pivotally adjusted tooth bars which may have
    spring-formed elements mounted thereon.

    707+,   for single-spring earth working elements.


CLS 172/644
TXT Apparatus under subclass 613 in which a plurality of earth working elements
    is mounted on a frame for relative movement toward and away from each other
    in the direction of draft whereby in a single manipulation such elements
    may be moved from a fore-and-aft spaced position to a position in which all
    of said elements are in transverse alignment.


CLS 172/645
TXT Apparatus under subclass 613 comprising earth working elements mounted on a
    support or frame which are capable of being adjustable relative to each
    other in a horizontal sense, without simultaneously disturbing their
    position in a vertical sense relative to said support or frame.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "adjustable" see the class definition.

    (2)     Note.  There may be a positive means provided for precluding
    relative vertical movement of the elements while they are moved
    horizontally or the elements may simpy be so mounted that they can be
    relatively moved horizontally without simultaneously causing veritcal
    displacement of said elements.  For example, this definition would include
    those devices in which loosening of an element securing means permits both
    a relative vertical and horizontal displacement, since an operator could
    manually preclude vertical displacement of said elements while moving the
    same horizontally, relative one to the other.  Also, this definition
    includes tools which are removed from one position and remounted in a
    horizontally spaced position so long as the tool in its new position can
    retain the same relative vertical position.  (Also see (2) Note under
    subclass 613).


CLS 172/646
TXT Apparatus under subclass 645 in which the earth working elements are
    adjustable in a lateral direction and each earth working element is capable
    of free vertical movement independently of the other.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "adjustable" see the class definition.

    (2)     Note.  Movement against a spring- biasing means is considered to be
    free movement under this definition. However, selective adjustment from one
    fixed position to another is not considered to be free movement.


CLS 172/647
TXT Apparatus under subclass 645 comprising a plurality of earth working
    elements each being adjustable about spaced vertical axes which coincide
    with the vertical axes of the earth working elements or element standards,
    said elements being interconnected so as to partake of concurrent movement
    about said axes when adjusted.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "adjustable" see the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221,    for alternating right or left hand tools which are simultaneously
    shifted about individual vertical axes.

    576,    for disk earth working elements which are simultaneously shifted
    about individual axes.

    614+,   for tools which are simultaneously adjusted about their individual
    vertical axes as the axes are moved laterally.


CLS 172/648
TXT Apparatus under subclass 645 in which the earth working elements or
    element-supporting bars are pivotally joined together to form a diamond
    shape, opposite apices of said diamond being capable of movement toward or
    away from each other.


CLS 172/649
TXT Apparatus under subclass 645 in which groups of earth working elements are
    relatively adjustable as units in a horizontal sense without disturbing
    their position in a vertical sense.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "adjustable" see the class definition.


CLS 172/650
TXT Apparatus under subclass 649 in which there is a group of earth working
    elements adjustable in a vertical sense, said adjustment being capable of
    occurring at a time different than the horizontal movement of this or some
    other group.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "adjustable" see the class definition.


CLS 172/651
TXT Apparatus under subclass 649 in which the relatively movable earth working
    element groups are adjustably connected one to the other or a group is
    adjustably connected to a supporting frame by vertically extending pivot
    means whereby such group may be rotated about said pivot means.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "adjustably" see "adjustable" in class
    definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    647,    for a plurality of earth working elements simultaneously pivoted
    about individual vertical axes.


CLS 172/652
TXT Apparatus under subclass 651 in which the two groups of elements are
    disposed in converging relation to form a substantially V-shaped implement
    when viewed in plan.

    (1)     Note.  The adjustment may include moving the groups from a
    forwardly converging relation to a rearwardly converging relation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254,    for groups of tools which are rearranged by disassembly and
    reassembly.

    648,    for groups of earth working elements arranged to form a diamond in
    which two of the opposite apices of the diamond are movable toward and away
    from each other.


CLS 172/653
TXT Apparatus under subclass 652 in which the groups of earth working elements
    are so disposed as to form two V-shaped implements in plan view with the
    vertex of each V pointing in generally the same direction and the vertex of
    one V lying between the arms of the other V.


CLS 172/654
TXT Apparatus under subclass 645 in which the earth working elements are
    mounted on opposite sides of a central longitudinal beam for lateral
    adjustment with respect thereto.

    (1)     Note.  The central beam must extend substantially between the earth
    working portion of the earth working elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    649+,   for tool groups which may be adjustable relative to a main central
    beam.

    741+,   for a single earth working element which is laterally adjustable.


CLS 172/655
TXT Apparatus under subclass 645 in which an earth working element is capable
    of both vertical and lateral adjustment with respect to the element-
    supporting frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    476+,   for a tool mounted on a wheeled frame said tool having an actuator
    for vertical adjustment and which tool is also laterally adjustable.

    650,    for tool groups which are adjustable horizontally and vertically.


CLS 172/656
TXT Apparatus under subclass 645 in which the earth working elements can be
    selectively laterally adjustable with respect to each other.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "adjustable" see the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    642,    for pairs of earth working elements which are laterally adjustable.

    649+,   for groups of tools which are laterally adjustable.

    654,    for earth working elements which are laterally adjustable with
    respect to a main central beam.

    655,    for earth working elements which are adjustable vertically and
    laterally.

    741+,   for a single earth working element laterally adjustable.


CLS 172/657
TXT Apparatus under subclass 613 in which the earth working elements are
    capable of independent movement relative to each other as a result of the
    operation thereof in the soil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    612,    for fabric or flexible earth working elements such as drags
    including an earth working element having spaced individual or small groups
    of teeth where each tooth or small group of teeth may move vertically with
    respect to each other tooth or group during operation.

    619+,   for groups of tools which are relatively movable during operation.

    643,    for implements having spring-formed tools or standards which tools
    because of their resiliency are relatively movable during operation.

    644,    for tools which are longitudinally adjustable to and from
    transverse alignment and which may also be relatively movable during
    operation.

    646,    for tools which are laterally adjustable and independently free to
    move vertically.


CLS 172/658
TXT Apparatus under subclass 657 in which the earth working elements during
    operation are each capable of vertical displacement independently of the
    other and means is provided for so joining the earth working elements one
    to the other that independent lateral displacement of said elements is
    precluded.


CLS 172/659
TXT Apparatus under subclass 613 in which the plural earth working elements are
    separately mounted for pivotal movement from one position of adjustment to
    another about independent-spaced horizontally disposed axes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    739,    for a single earth working element adjustable about a horizontal
    transverse axis.


CLS 172/660
TXT Apparatus under subclass 659 in which the earth working elements are so
    interconnected one to the other that pivotal adjustment of one element will
    cause a simultaneous adjustment of the others.


CLS 172/661
TXT Apparatus under subclass 613 in which the plural earth working elements are
    mounted on a frame or support means and at least one of said elements is
    individually selectively translatable from one vertical position to another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    650,    for groups of tools which are horizontally and vertically
    adjustable.

    655,    for tools adjustable vertically and laterally.

    744,    for a single earth working element vertically adjustable.


CLS 172/662
TXT Apparatus under subclass 613 in which the earth working elements are
    mounted on a supporting frame and one or more of said elements are so
    related thereto as to be capable of movement from an earth working position
    to a rest position, for example, to change the spacing between adjacent
    elements or to enable transport of the frame over the earth.

    (1)     Note.  Since almost any vertical adjustment may be continued far
    enough to result in a movement to transport position this definition is
    limited to those devices in which some means is shown for adjusting or
    holding the element in transport position other than a mere
    vertical-adjusting means such as is intended to adjust the vertical working
    position of the tool in the ground.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204+,   for an apparatus comprising elements alternating for right or left
    hand operation.


CLS 172/663
TXT Apparatus under class definition comprising an actuator for adjusting some
    part of the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition for the definition of "actuator".

    (2)     Note.  A latch or lock operator which does not adjust some part of
    the apparatus is not included under this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for power actuators which are automatically controlled.

    224+,   for actuators for implements rotatable about a longitudinal axis
    for right or left hand operation.

    263,    for an actuator which is released when an earth working element
    shifts due to an overload.

    278+,   for an actuator for changing the horizontal angle of the axis of
    rotation of a wheel.

    293+,   for power-actuating means for sequentially operating a plurality of
    like implement parts.

    297+,   for an actuator to adjust an implement mounted forward of the rear
    of a self-propelled vehicle.

    315+,   for an actuator on an implement which is controlled from a
    propelling vehicle.

    317+,   for an actuator on a vehicle for relatively moving parts of a
    trailing implement.

    321,    for an actuator on a vehicle for moving a wheeled implement.

    322,    for an actuator for rocking an implement about a wheel axis.

    324+,   for an actuator for moving a draft member laterally or vertically
    on a wheeled frame.

    395+,   for an actuator for vertically adjusting a wheel relative to a
    frame.

    439+,   for mast-type hitches (e.g., 3 point hitch) with actuating means to
    adjust the hitch.

    452+,   for an actuator for raising and lowering an implement on a wheeled
    frame and being capable of lifting the implement out of ground contact for
    transport.

    613+,   an actuator for changing the position of a plurality of relatively
    movable tools.

    781+,   for an actuator for moving a scraper mounted between the front and
    rear ground supports of a vehicle.

    810+,   for an actuator to move an implement mounted ahead of a motor
    vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 208+ for means for adjusting the position of
    a harvester platform relative to the ground.

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 325+ for hydraulic servomotors operated by
    a pump.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 44 for unearthing
    devices with a power means to shift a part.


CLS 172/664
TXT Apparatus under subclass 663 comprising an earth working element having a
    plurality of earth-engaging portions movable relative to one another and an
    actuator for relatively moving the portions.

    (1)     Note.  The plurality of earth-engaging portions may be different
    soil-working portions or may include a runner or depth gauge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    613+,   for plural, relatively adustable distinct tools.

    714+,   for plural tool or earth engaging parts relatively movable during
    operation.

    736+,   for relatively adjustable tool or earth engaging parts.

    811+,   for an actuator for relatively adjustable earth-engaging parts of
    an elongated blade mounted ahead of a motor vehicle.


CLS 172/665
TXT Apparatus under subclass 664 wherein the relatively movable parts comprises
    an earth working portion and a member adapted to slide on the ground to act
    as a runner or depth gauge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240+,   for apparatus having a wheel or runner engageable with the ground
    for transport only.

    387+,   for implements provided with runners spaced from the tools and see
    the definition and Notes thereof for the line.

    729,    for symmetrical tools having a relatively adjustable runner or
    gauge.

    738,    for tools having a relatively adjustable runner or gauge.

    764,    for tools having a runner or depth gauge separate from the standard.


CLS 172/666
TXT Apparatus under subclass 663 comprising an actuator for positioning an
    implement about an axis which is substantially horizontal and extends in
    the direction of travel.

    (1)     Note.  For meaning of "actuator" see class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225,    for actuating means for rotating right and left hand implements
    about a longitudinal axis.

    459+,   for implements liftable for transport on a wheeled frame and being
    pivoted about a longitudinal axis.

    673,    for laterally adjustable tools mounted on a wheeled frame.


CLS 172/667
TXT Apparatus under subclass 663 comprising an actuator for positioning an
    implement transversely with respect to the line of travel.

    (1)     Note.  For meaning of "actuator" see class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305,    for implements located forward of the rear of a self-propelled
    vehicle and having an actuator for lateral adjustment.

    324+,   for actuating means for moving a draft member laterally or
    vertically or a trailing wheeled implement.

    476+,   for implements liftable for transport on a wheeled frame and also
    laterally adjustable.

    507,    for an actuator for laterally moving a ground support (e.g., wheel)
    relative to an implement frame.

    673,    for laterally adjustable tools mounted on a wheeled frame.

    741,    for laterally adjustable tools not having an actuator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 47 for an actuator
    for laterally shifting an unearthing unit on its support.


CLS 172/668
TXT Apparatus under subclass 663 comprising a wheel carrying frame, an
    implement connected thereto and an actuator for vertically positioning the
    implement or some part rigid therewith with respect to the wheeled frame.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "actuator" see the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    452,    for similar devices in which the actuator is also capable of
    lifting the implement entirely off the ground for transport on the wheeled
    frame.

    675,    for vertically adjustable tools mounted on a wheeled frame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 141 for an actuator
    for lifting or tilting an unearthing apparatus.


CLS 172/669
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising an implement with a ground
    wheel or supported on a vehicle other than by a mere articulated hitch so
    that the vehicle carries a substantial portion of the weight of the
    implement rather than merely serving to pull it over the ground.

    (1)     Note.  Where the disclosure shows a framework having a wheel or
    wheels and an earth working element attached to the framework so that it
    can be supported thereby in nonearth working position the claim is
    classifiable under this definition if it recites the framework even if it
    does not call for the wheel.

    (2)     Note.  The support of the implement contemplated in the second part
    of the definition must be such that the implement would be held in
    substantially working position by the vehicle even if the ground did not
    support the implement or can be held off the ground by the vehicle.

    (3)     Note.  Where a wheel is not carried on a wheel frame (as a tractor)
    but is merely supported directly on the implement (as a gauge wheel on a
    plow beam) then the wheel must be claimed for the patent to be classifiable
    under this definition.

    (4)     Note.  The wheel under the first portion of this definition must be
    capable of carrying a portion of the vertical load of the implement.
    Wheels or rollers rotatable on a vertical or substantially vertical axis
    and acting as a rotary landside are excluded.  See subclass 715 for such
    devices.

    (5)     Note.  The "vehicle" in this definition may be a broadly claimed
    implement supporting another implement.  See (4) Note in subclass 133.  The
    implements must be disclosed as related in a manner appropriate for a
    vehicle-carried implement.  A disclosure of a specifically claimed
    implement supported on a shank of a broadly claimed implement would be
    classifiable in subclasses 681+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for a lawn edger with a wheel.

    35+,    for apparatus comprising a driven tool mounted on a wheeled frame.

    90,     for an implement comprising an irregular ground-engaging wheel for
    giving a tool a cyclical motion.

    126+,   for an earth marker carried on a broadly claimed implement.

    204+,   for alternating tools carried on vehicles.

    240+,   for an implement with a ground support engageable with the ground
    for transport only.

    255,    for a vehicle mounting a tool which is lifted off or lowered into
    the ground on turning.

    256+,   for a propulsion unit guided by a walking attendant or part of an
    articulated vehicle.

    272+,   for means for facilitating mounting of an implement on a motor
    vehicle.

    278+,   for an implement with wheel steering or actuator for horizontally
    angling a wheel axis.

    297+,   for a tool mounted forward of the rear of a motor vehicle.

    321,    for an actuator on a vehicle for moving a wheeled implement.

    322+,   for an actuator for rocking a tool about a wheel axis.

    324,    for an implement comprising an actuator on a wheeled frame for
    moving hitch means laterally or vertically.

    332+,   for an implement mounted on a wheeled frame and manipulated and
    held in position by an attendant.

    354+,   for an implement with a wheel guided or propelled by a walking
    attendant.

    383+,   for an implement with a wheel having an axis of rotation which is
    lockable or angularly adjustable.

    387+,   for an implement with a wheel substitute.

    395+,   for an implement with a ground support vertically adjustable
    relative to the frame.

    452+,   for an apparatus comprising an actuator adapted to lift an
    implement for transport on a wheeled frame or broadly claimed implement.

    507,    for an implement with a ground support movable horizontally.

    518+,   for a rolling tool, especially subclass 578 for an apparatus
    comprising a rolling tool and a wheel (not on a motor vehicle).

    780     and 781+, for a scraper mounted between the front and rear wheels
    of a vehicle.

    810+,   for a tool mounted ahead of a vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 244.1 for furrow followers for guiding a vehicle
    along the furrow.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 140 for an unearthing
    unit provided with a gauge runner or wheel, subclass 143 for wheeled
    chassis.

    280,    Land Vehicles, appropriate subclasses for wheeled vehicles, and
    subclasses 80.1+ for a wheeled vehicle with special reference to that
    portion of the vehicle which is directly concerned in enabling it to be
    moved along the surface.

    492,    Roll or Roller, subclasses 9+ for a roll, per se, not elsewhere
    provided for, having measuring, testing, or indicating means.


CLS 172/670
TXT Apparatus under subclass 669 having one or more wheels and one or more
    earth working elements, all of the wheels being positioned on the same side
    of all of the earth working elements transversely of the line of draft.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this subclass the disclosure must show
    the defined arrangement.  A patent disclosing wheels on both sides of an
    earth working element does not come under the definition even if only one
    wheel is claimed.


CLS 172/671
TXT Apparatus under subclass 669 in which the frame is disclosed as comprising
    a single longitudinal beam, an earth working element connected to the beam
    and at least one wheel connected thereto and traveling in the same path as
    the earth working element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310+,   for plural wheeled implements, which may comprise plural beams each
    with its own wheel.

    676,    for a tool and wheel following the same path.


CLS 172/672
TXT Apparatus under subclass 671 wherein the wheel or wheels are secured
    directly to an earth-engaging portion of the earth working element.


CLS 172/673
TXT Apparatus under subclass 669 wherein the earth working implement is
    selectively transversely adjustable with relation to the wheel frame.

    (1)     Note.  For meaning of "adjustable" see the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    476+,   for laterally adjustable tools on a wheeled frame which have an
    actuator for lifting the tools.

    666     and 667, for laterally adjustable tools on a wheeled frame provided
    with an actuator for effecting the adjustment.


CLS 172/674
TXT Apparatus under subclass 699 wherein the frame is provided with bracket
    means for supporting the earth working implement in nonearth working
    position.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 344 for arched wheeled-frame cultivators
    provided with an implement support bracket for transport.


CLS 172/675
TXT Apparatus under subclass 669 wherein the earth working element is
    selectively vertically adjustable with relation to the wheeled frame.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "adjustable" see the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    452+,   for tools vertically movable to transport position on a wheeled
    frame provided with an actuator for raising and lowering the tools.

    668,    for vertically adjustable tools on a wheeled frame provided with an
    actuator for effecting such adjustment.


CLS 172/676
TXT Apparatus under subclass 669 wherein an earth working element follows in
    the wheel path, and is adapted to work the ground disturbed or compacted by
    the wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    344,    for arched wheel-frame implements provided with brackets for
    holding the tools in nonuse position.


CLS 172/677
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising some detail of the means
    for hitching an implement to a separate propelling means, or to another
    implement, the hitch being of the type premitting some freedom of movement
    between the propelling means and the apparatus while the apparatus is being
    moved over the earth to perform its earthworking function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7+,     for draft responsive automatic power control.

    76+,    for an implement with a driven tool and ground support hitched to a
    vehicle by an articulated connection.

    204+,   for implements alternating for right or left hand operation and
    having various hitch details.

    238,    for a ground support moved vertically relative to a frame by draft
    force.

    239,    for an implement with draft, pitch, or ground-level responsive
    depth control.

    248,    for apparatus convertible or changeable to different types of hitch.

    257,    for a propulsion unit which is part of an articulated vehicle.

    261+,   for hitches involving overload shifting.

    272+,   for means to facilitate mounting an implement on a vehicle.

    282+,   for a trailing implement with a wheel responding to turning
    movement of a propelling means.

    315+,   for an actuator on a trailing implement controlled from a
    propelling vehicle.

    317+,   for an actuator on a vehicle for relatively moving parts of a
    trailing implement.

    321,    for an actuator on a vehicle for moving a wheeled implement.

    324+,   for an actuator on a trailing ground- supported frame for moving
    the draft means laterally or vertically.

    332,    for implements manipulated with respect to a mounting frame, the
    frame usually trailing behind a propelling animal or a tractor.

    351+,   for an implement guided by a walking attendant and having a hitch.

    439+,   for a mash-type hitch.

    452+,   for a hitch comprising an actuator adapted to lift a tool for
    transport on a wheeled frame or broadly claimed implement.

    588,    for horizontally, angularly adjustable groups of disks with a hitch
    longitudinally movable on a tongue.

    605,    for an apparatus comprising a shiftable hitch moving a tool
    relative to a frame.

    618,    for implements which assume different angularity for opposite draft.

    624+,   for plural tool groups movably connected to a forward transverse
    draft bar.

    630,    for tool groups pivoted to opposite sides of a longitudinally draft
    bar.

    810+,   for a tool hitched ahead of a motor vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    278,    Land Vehicles:  Animal Draft Appliances, appropriate subclasses,
    for that portion of a vehicle or broadly claimed earth working implement by
    means of which the pull of draft animals is utilized to move the apparatus
    over the ground.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 400+ for hitches between articulated
    vehicles.


CLS 172/678
TXT Apparatus under subclass 677 including resilient means which is yieldable
    during operation in response to movement of the implement with respect to
    the hitching means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239,    for hitching means comprising complex linkages having springs to
    provide draft, pitch, or ground-level responsive depth control.

    264+,   for implements which may shift upon overload and provided with a
    spring return.

    705+,   for spring-biased tools.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 483+ for articulated vehicles wherein the
    connection therebetween is resiliently biased in at least one direction.


CLS 172/679
TXT Apparatus under subclass 677 wherein the means for hitching the implement
    to the propelling means is adjustable with respect to either the implement
    or the propelling means.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "adjustable" see the class definition.


CLS 172/680
TXT Apparatus under subclass 679 wherein the means for hitching the implement
    to the propelling means is adjustable in a vertical sense.

    (1)     Note.  For meaning of "adjustable" see the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    396,    for a vertically adjustable or selectively lockable hitch combined
    with a vertically adjustable ground support.


CLS 172/681
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising earth working elements,
    standards (i.e., a generally vertically extending member to which the earth
    working element is connected and which is in turn connected to a frame or
    beam member), or miscellaneous joints and connections between parts of an
    earth working apparatus not otherwise provided for.

    (1)     Note.  Patents included herein may disclose and/or claim a tool,
    standard, or connection, "per se," or that combined with a frame.

    (2)     Note.  Patents which are limited by disclosure or claims to a hand
    held tool of the type classifiable in subclasses 371+ are classified there
    even if only the earth working portion of the tool is claimed.

    (3)     Note.  Frames, per se, for earth working elements which may include
    a plurality of joints, are not included.  See subclass 776 for such
    apparatus.

    (4)     Note.  Included under this definition are (1) a joint between earth
    working portions, (2) a joint between a non-earth working portion and an
    earth working portion if the claim includes some detail of significance in
    the earth working function (such as the shape of the earth contacting
    part), (3) plural joints between portions of an earth working apparatus and
    (4) a joint of special utility in earthworking such as a spring-biased
    joint.  A joint between nonearth working portions and a joint between a
    nonearth working portion and an earth working portion identified as such by
    name only except for the parts related to the joint are classified in the
    appropriate class devoted to joints of general utility.  See especially
    Class 403, Joints and Connections, subclasses 58+ for the joint between a
    standard and a beam and the joint between a standard and an earth working
    element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35+,    for driven tools.

    133+,   for diverse tools.

    261+,   for an apparatus permitting shifting of a part on occurrence of an
    overload.

    272+,   for means to facilitate the mounting of an implement on a motor
    vehicle.

    371+,   for hand tools.

    382,    for multiple level tools.

    518+,   for rolling, rotating, or orbitally moving tools.

    766,    for miscellaneous nonwheeled frames for earth working elements in
    which the earth working elements are not claimed and including those in
    which a joint or connection between parts thereof is specifically claimed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 327+ for an
    earth-boring bit or bit element.


CLS 172/682
TXT Apparatus under subclass 681 in which the working surface of an earth
    working element is selectively distorted or warped to vary the shape of the
    element.


CLS 172/683
TXT Apparatus under subclass 681 comprising an earth working element held in
    earth working position by a detent means readily operated by an attendant
    so that after release of the detent the earth working element assumes a
    position offering less resistance to a draft force propelling it over the
    ground.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261+,   for implements which are latched in position, the latch being
    released upon overload to permit the implement to shift.

    481,    for tools adapted to be lifted for transport on a wheeled frame by
    an actuator which has a latch means separate from the actuator for holding
    the tool in position relative to the frame.

    494,    for a tool and an actuator for lifting it for transport, the tool
    being held in position by a toggle.

    529+,   for intermittently rolling implements with latch means to stop the
    rotation.


CLS 172/684
TXT Apparatus under subclass 681 comprising a movable implement mounting
    member, an earth working element mounted thereon and being pivoted with
    respect thereto and means for pivoting the element incident to the movement
    of the member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222,    for a plurality of reversible implements pivoted about vertical
    axes upon a movable member, the implements being pivoted about their axes
    upon movement of the member.

    439+,   for mast-type hitches.

    614+,   for a plurality of tools which pivot upon a movable member when the
    member is moved.


CLS 172/684.5
TXT Frame-supported blade, scraper, or smoother drawn by vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 681 having at least one earth working element
    mounted on a frame which is wholly or partly supported either on skids, a
    part of the frame, or by the element itself, and which is adapted to be
    dragged behind a towing vehicle, and wherein the element has either (a) a
    substantially vertical working surface adapted to strike off or level the
    earth, or (b) a substantial area adapted to contact the earth in a
    horizontal direction to compact or smooth the earth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.5,    for a scraper which is automatically power-controlled for leveling.

    26.5+,  for a dragline scraper.

    72,     for a driven tool followed by a leveling drag or furrow shaper.

    189     and 612, for flexible implements including flexible matlike drags.

    197     and 199+, for diverse tools, one of which comprises a drag or
    smoother.

    777,    for a scraper supporting a narrow depending tool. 779, for a
    scraper whose position is controlled by a linkage for leveling.

    780     and 781+, for a scraper between front and rear vehicle supports.

    799.5,  for a towed scraper on a wheel-supported frame.

    810+,   for a scraper ahead of a motor vehicle.


CLS 172/685
TXT Apparatus under subclass 681 comprising a plurality of spaced earth working
    elements.

    (1)     Note.  A device comprising earth working elements all attached to
    an earth working portion is considered a unitary earth working means and
    does not come under this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133+,   for a plurality of tools of different types.

    310+,   for plural wheeled implements.

    378+,   for hand tools having plural prongs or teeth.

    518+,   for plural rolling tools and especially subclasses 574+ for plural
    disks with individual mounts.

    613+,   for plural relatively movable tools.

    786+,   for plural scrapers, at least one of which is between the front and
    rear ground supports of a vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclasses 84+ for diggers
    comprising a plurality of spaced digging elements.


CLS 172/686
TXT Apparatus under subclass 685 in which the earth-engaging elements of a pair
    are nonidentical or positioned in a nonidentical way so as to function in a
    right and left handed manner in working the earth rather than in an
    identical manner, i.e., the elements are so constructed and located as to
    be mirror images of each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159,    for right and left hand tools with an intermediate symmetrical tool.

    204+,   for alternately usable right and left hand-type tools.

    642,    for right and left hand tools which are adjustable with respect to
    each other.


CLS 172/687
TXT Apparatus under subclass 685 having a plurality of rows of earth working
    elements (at least three elements to the row) extending transversely of the
    line of travel and traveling generally one behind the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    379,    for hand tools having plural rows of prongs or teeth.


CLS 172/688
TXT Apparatus under subclass 687 in which the elements of one row are disposed
    to travel in the space not traversed by the elements in an adjacent row.


CLS 172/689
TXT Apparatus under subclass 685 in which the earth working elements are
    mounted at spaced intervals around a frame forming in plan view a geometric
    figure having a closed perimeter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    648,    for a diamond-shaped frame having tools carried by each of the
    sides thereof, the opposite apices of the diamond being adjustable toward
    and away from one another.


CLS 172/690
TXT Apparatus under subclass 685 in which the earth working elements are
    mounted on two elongated members that are connected at one end and
    divergent or convergent in a horizontal plane in the direction of the line
    of travel.


CLS 172/691
TXT Apparatus under subclass 685 in which the earth working elements are
    mounted on a horizontal beam the general extent of which is in a direction
    substantially 90o to the direction of travel or in a direction that is
    angular to the direction of travel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    777+,   for narrow tools which depend from a scraper and are removably
    attached thereto.


CLS 172/692
TXT Apparatus under subclass 691 having means to selectively adjust the beam on
    the frame at various angles to the direction of the line of travel.


CLS 172/693
TXT Apparatus under subclass 691 in which the general extent of the beam is in
    a direction that is at an angle to the direction of travel other than 90o.


CLS 172/694
TXT Apparatus under subclass 685 having earth working elements which are
    mounted so as to be spaced with respect to each other in a direction
    laterally of the line of travel so as to travel in different paths.


CLS 172/695
TXT Apparatus under subclass 694 wherein three or more earth working elements
    are aligned in a direction at an angle other than 90o with respect to the
    line of travel.


CLS 172/696
TXT Apparatus under subclass 694 in which the frame comprises a longitudinally
    extending beam and at least one element is mounted on each side thereof.


CLS 172/697
TXT Apparatus under subclass 694 consisting of two or more elements aligned in
    a direction substantially 90o to the line of travel.


CLS 172/698
TXT Apparatus under subclass 681 comprising an earth working element supported
    at laterally spaced points so as to resemble a U in front elevation.

    (1)     Note.  The elements may extend laterally beyond the standards and
    the number of standards may exceed two.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19+,    for sod cutters which may have an earth working element supported
    at laterally spaced points so as to resemble a U in front elevation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 302 and 303  for stump and stone-type
    excavators which may be in the form of a U in front elevation for
    undercutting a stump or stone to facilitate removal thereof.


CLS 172/699
TXT Apparatus under subclass 681 comprising an earth working element
    specifically disclosed as working deep in the soil and having such a
    configuration that it merely lifts the soil and does not shift it laterally
    of the line of draft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19+,    for sod cutters having a horizontal blade for cutting below the
    surface of the soil.

    196,    for subsoilers combined with a diverse-type tool, usually a
    moldboard plow.

    720,    for subsurface blades for cutting below the surface of the soil
    without displacing the soil laterally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclass 370 for mole plows for forming a defined
    opening or passage below the surface of the soil, e.g., for drainage.

    111,    Planting, subclass 123 for a chisel type furrow opener claimed in
    combination with liquid or gas soil treatment; and subclass 156 for a
    chisel opener claimed in combination with a planting machine.


CLS 172/700
TXT Apparatus under subclass 699 wherein a subsoil earth working element is
    secured to the lower end of a standard to work the earth below the surface,
    and a separate earth working element is attached to the same standard and
    spaced vertically above the subsoil earth working element to work the earth
    adjacent the surface of the ground.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196,    for a plurality of distinct, different-type tools mounted on
    separate standards one of which is a subsoiler.


CLS 172/701
TXT Apparatus under subclass 681 in which a single earth working element is
    adapted to move soil transversely from opposite directions to form a hill
    or ridge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176,    for a furrowing or ridging implement followed by a furrow or ridge
    roller.

    686,    for separate tools of the right and left hand type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    111,    Planting, appropriate subclasses for ridgers combined with planting
    means.


CLS 172/701.1
TXT Tool is transversely elongated blade (e.g., bulldozer):

    Apparatus under subclass 681 wherein the earth working element has a
    vertical, generally planar earth working portion extended in its dimension
    transverse to the direction of travel of a vehicle propelling the element,
    the magnitude of the extension being at least on the order of the width of
    the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    781+,   for the combination of a blade and a mounting for positioning the
    blade between the front and rear ground supports of a vehicle.

    811+,   for the combination of a blade and a mounting for positioning the
    blade ahead of a vehicle.


CLS 172/701.2
TXT Having removable corner bit:
    Apparatus under subclass 701.1 which includes a separable cutting element
    at a lower corner of the blade.


CLS 172/701.3
TXT Having removable cutting edge:
    Apparatus under subclass 701.1 which includes a separable element adapted
    to be attached to the lower extended edge of the blade.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclass 450 for a removable cutting edge on an
    excavator of the type found in Class 37 (see this class (172), class
    definition, "SEARCH CLASS" 37 for a brief description of the lines).


CLS 172/702
TXT Apparatus under subclass 681 in which some part of the apparatus may have
    its position changed through 180o usually for the purpose of presenting a
    new wearing portion or edge or for adjusting the position of some part.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus having a part which may be adjusted to a plurality
    of positions two of which may be 180o apart are not included under this
    definition.

    (2)     Note.  The change may be made either by adjustment or by removal
    and replacement of the same part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254,    for an apparatus changeable by disassembly or assembly in which a
    tool is rearranged, the rearrangement of the tool being accomplished by a
    means other than or more than a reversible tool or part thereof, a
    reversible standard or a reversible part between a tool and standard or
    standard and beam.

    577,    for gangs of disks which are adapted to be reversed to throw the
    earth either to the right or to the left.

    735,    for an earth working element adjustable through an angle of other
    than 180o or through a multiplicity of angles to present a distinct earth
    working portion to the soil.


CLS 172/703
TXT Apparatus under subclass 702 in which the part whose position is changed
    through 180o directly contacts the earth.

    (1)     Note.  A standard, beam, or other frame part which mounts the tool
    is not considered an earth contacting part under this definition, but a
    separate runner or landside is considered to be a part which directly
    contacts the earth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for apparatus adapted to be completely inverted to provide an earth
    working function in both positions.

    136,    for diverse earth working elements which are usable alternately
    only.

    241,    for apparatus which is inverted to engage a transport wheel or
    runner with the ground.

    735,    for a tool or tool part which is adjusted through an angle of other
    than 180o to present a different cutting edge or working surface to the
    earth.


CLS 172/704
TXT Apparatus under subclass 703 in which the part whose position is changed
    through 180o comprises less than all of that part of the apparatus which
    directly contacts the earth.

    (1)     Note.  A separate runner or landside is considered to be an earth
    working element part, but a standard, beam, or other frame part which
    mounts the tool is not.


CLS 172/705
TXT Apparatus under subclass 681 in which at least a portion of the earth
    working element is capable of movement under operating conditions and is
    resilient or separate resilient means is provided to resist said movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for driven implements yieldably mounted on a chassis or frame.

    261+,   for implements which shift against a spring return device upon
    overload and see the definition and Notes of subclass 261 for the line.

    335+    and 363, for spring-biased hand-guided or propelled implements.

    462,    for a plurality of tools which are individually spring-biased
    downwardly during operation and having an actuator for lifting the tools
    simultaneously for transport on a wheeled frame.

    497+,   for tools liftable for transport on a wheeled frame and being
    spring biased during operation.

    515,    for spring-biased or spring-form weed turners.

    544,    for a spring-mounted tooth on a rotating carrier.

    621,    for plural spring-biased tooth bars.

    678,    for spring-biased draft means.

    794,    for a scraper mounted between the front and rear ground supports of
    a vehicle which is spring biased into ground contact.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 400 for a spring- formed or biased rake tooth.

    111,    Planting, subclass 151 for a trip mechanism used on and claimed in
    combination with a planting machine.

    267,    Spring Devices, appropriate subclasses for springs of general
    utility.


CLS 172/706
TXT Apparatus under subclass 705 in which the earth working element includes a
    plurality of distinct earth-engaging portions movable relative to one
    another during operation and resilient means resisting said relative
    movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    707+,   for tools which are entirely of spring form or are mounted upon a
    spring standard or support.

    714+,   for tools having plural earth-engaging parts relatively movable
    during operation.


CLS 172/707
TXT Apparatus under subclass 705 in which the earth working element or the
    immediate supporting means for an earth working element are formed of
    resilient material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142,    for diverse tools one of which is a spring tooth or standard.

    624,    for a spring-formed tool standard mounted on a rotating carrier.

    627,    for spring teeth mounted on a rotating carrier.

    643,    for plural spring-formed teeth or standards.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    111,    Planting, subclass 155 for a resilient tooth or similar-type opener
    claimed in combination with a planting machine.


CLS 172/708
TXT Apparatus under subclass 707 in which (1) a rigid earth working element is
    separately attached to a spring standard or (2) a spring standard is
    modified so as to provide a rigid earth working portion thereon.


CLS 172/709
TXT Apparatus under subclass 705 comprising an earth working element is capable
    of movement transversely of the direction of travel and resilient means to
    resist said movement.


CLS 172/710
TXT Apparatus under subclass 705 comprising an earthworking element mounted to
    swing about a horizontal transverse axis, the element or its shank or
    standard having a rigid portion extended from said pivot in a direction
    different from the element and biasing means acting on said extended
    portion.


CLS 172/711
TXT Apparatus under subclass 705 in which the resilient means comprises a
    single or superposed plate(s) or bar(s) adapted to yield through a bending
    action or a member which is stressed by an axial twist.


CLS 172/712
TXT Apparatus under subclass 681 in which the earth working element pivots to a
    different working position relative to the ground when the element is moved
    in opposite directions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26.6,   for a dragline scraper which has a part which is rearranged on
    reverse movement.

    618,    for plural relatively movable implements which assume different
    working positions when moved in opposite directions.

    777+,   for a tool suspending from a scraper, the tool assuming a different
    position for opposite draft.


CLS 172/713
TXT Apparatus under subclass 681 comprising a generally elongated earth working
    element having an earth working portion and a standard to support it in
    earth working position in which the earth working portion is no longer in
    lateral or longitudinal extent than the standard.

    (1)     Note.  A disclosure of an enlarged lateral or longitudinal portion
    is enough to disqualify a patent for classification under this definition
    regardless of the claimed subject matter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160,    for laterally spaced like tools and an intermediate diverse tool at
    least one of which comprises a spike tooth.

    173,    for a smooth surface earth roller combined with earth working teeth.

    198,    for diverse tools following the same path, one of which comprises
    teeth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 400 for a horse rake tooth.

    111,    Planting, subclass 154 for a tooth- or tine-type furrow opener
    claimed in combination with a planting machine.


CLS 172/714
TXT Apparatus under subclass 681 in which the implement has a plurality of
    earth-engaging portions which may move relative to one another as a result
    of the operation of the implement in the soil.

    (1)     Note.  The plurality of earth-engaging portions may be different
    soil moving portions of tool or may be a tool and runner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    657+,   for plural tools which are relatively movable as the result of
    operation.

    664+,   for actuating means for plural relatively adjustable tool or
    earth-engaging parts.

    736,    for selectively adjustable tool or earth- engaging parts.


CLS 172/715
TXT Apparatus under subclass 714 in which the implement is provided with a
    longitudinal portion to receive the side pressure of the earth working
    element and guide it, said portion comprising an element rotatable about a
    substantially vertical axis to reduce friction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    669,    for earth working elements with wheels which serve to sustain a
    portion of the vertical load.


CLS 172/716
TXT Apparatus under subclass 714 in which at least a part of the moldboard of a
    moldboard-type implement is movable with respect to the point, share and
    landside during operation.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of a moldboard-type implement see
    subclass 754.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for an implement having a power- driven moldboard.


CLS 172/717
TXT Apparatus under subclass 716 in which the movable moldboard comprises an
    endless element which is caused to move by contact of the soil passing
    thereover.


CLS 172/718
TXT Apparatus under subclass 716 in which the movable moldboard comprises a
    member rotatable about an axis lying in a plane substantially parallel to
    the plane of movement of the soil over the moldboard.


CLS 172/719
TXT With add-on cutting or wearing element applied directly over, or onto, the
    original cutting element: Apparatus under subclass 681 including an
    additional cutting or wearing edge, point, or surface, which is adapted to
    be attached directly over or onto the original cutting or wearing edge of
    the earth working element without the removal of the original edge.

    (1)     Note.  The additional element is usually attached to the tool to
    act in place of a dulled edge or point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    701.1+, for a particular cutting element on a bulldozer blade.

    734+    or 772+, for a tool whose original cutting element is adapted to be
    removed and replaced.


CLS 172/720
TXT Apparatus under subclass 681 comprising an earth working blade, usually
    operating in a horizontal position, which operated below the surface of the
    ground to make a horizontal cut or to lift the soil and permit it to return
    to substantially the original position without any lateral shifting thereof.

    (1)     Note.  An earth working element which shifts soil laterally and has
    a horizontal blade extension or portion connected thereto is not included
    under this definition, but is classified below on other bases.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19+,    for sod cutters having a horizontal blade which operates below the
    surface of the ground to make a horizontal cut.

    699,    for subsoil plows adapted to work deep in the soil without any
    lateral movement or turning of the soil.


CLS 172/721
TXT Apparatus under subclass 681 comprising an earth working element
    symmetrically arranged with respect to the line of draft, i.e., parts on
    opposite sides of the line of draft are mirror images of each other and are
    arranged at the same position longitudinally of the line of draft.

    (1)     Note.  Patents are classified here by disclosure when a claim
    includes any detail of the shape of the earth working element.

    (2)     Note.  An earth working element all parts of which lie in a single
    plane and which is of square or rectangular shape when viewed both in plan
    and front elevation is not included under this definition.

    (3)     Note.  An earth working element which is square or rectangular when
    viewed in both plan and front elevation and whose intersection with any
    vertical plane transverse to the line of draft results in one or more
    straight lines is also excluded from this definition.  Thus, for example,
    an ordinary scraper blade which is straight, transversely of the line of
    draft and curved in end elevation, is excluded.

    (4)     Note.  An earth working element which is symmetrical due merely to
    an arrangement of earth working fingers, tines, blades, or the like is not
    classified under this definition.  See subclass 766 for such earth working
    elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 198+ for a V-shaped plow for railway snow
    excavation, subclasses 266+ for a V-shaped plow for roadway snow excavation
    and subclasses 366+ for symmetrically shaped plows for ditching.

    111,    Planting, subclass 83 for lister plows; subclass 111 for a
    runner-type opener claimed in combination with a plant setting machine;
    subclasses 124 and 125 for shoe- and runner-type openers respectively, used
    in combination with a liquid or gas soil treatment; and subclasses 152 and
    153 for shoe- and runner-type openers respectively, claimed in combination
    with seed depositors.


CLS 172/722
TXT Apparatus under subclass 721 in which the earth working element has an
    earth breaking portion and separately attached members or wings extending
    laterally beyond the sides thereof and forming a continuation of said
    portion the wings and earth-breaking portion together forming a symmetrical
    implement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193+,   for an earth working implement and a trailing sweep spaced
    therefrom so as to constitute separate tools.

    728,    for a symmetrical tool with an attached runner or depth gauge and
    also having blades extending from opposite sides of the runner.

    765+,   for a tool having dissimilar wings or a wing extending from only
    one side thereof.


CLS 172/723
TXT Apparatus under subclass 722 in which the earth-breaking portion has a
    rearward and downward inclination so as to break the earth by being drawn
    therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    768,    for draw-cut type earth working elements, per se.


CLS 172/724
TXT Apparatus under subclass 722 in which the wings are made of a single piece
    of material separately attached to the earth-breaking portion.


CLS 172/725
TXT Apparatus under subclass 721 in which the earth working element includes a
    separate member comprising a vertical cutting edge attached at the axis of
    symmetry of the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    752,    for unsymmetrical tools having separable parts one of which is a
    vertical longitudinal cutter.


CLS 172/726
TXT Apparatus under subclass 721 in which the earth working element includes
    separable like parts (i.e., right and left hand) which are joined together
    or meet at the line of symmetry of the element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    722+,   for symmetrical implements having an earth-breaking portion (e.g.,
    point) and separate wings attached thereto.


CLS 172/727
TXT Apparatus under subclass 721 including a member separate from the
    earth-working element and standard and adapted to slide over the earth to
    act as a shoe, runner, or depth gauge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240+,   for apparatus having a wheel or runner engageable with the ground
    for transport only.

    360,    for hand-guided or propelled implements having runners.

    387+,   for implements provided with runners spaced from the tools and see
    the definition and Notes thereof for the line.

    764,    for tools with separate runners the tools being other than the
    symmetrical type.


CLS 172/728
TXT Apparatus under subclass 727 in which the runner or depth gauge has
    connected thereto opposite laterally extending earth working blades which
    are additional to the earth working element, the device in its entirety
    being symmetrical.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193+,   for a tool for moving soil transversely of the line of travel and a
    sweep or blade spaced rearwardly thereof to act on the moved soil.


CLS 172/729
TXT Apparatus under subclass 727 in which the relative positions of the earth
    working element and runner or depth gauge may be selectively changed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    665,    for actuating means for relatively adjusting a tool and runner.

    738,    for relatively adjustable tools and runners, the tools being of
    other than the symmetrical type.


CLS 172/730
TXT Apparatus under subclass 721 comprising oppositely extending wing portions
    forming a V-shape when viewed in plan or front elevation and having a
    portion extending upwardly from the central portion of the V for attachment
    to a standard, all of said portions being integral.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    733,    for V-shaped symmetrical tools.


CLS 172/731
TXT Apparatus under subclass 721 in which the earth working element has a given
    dimension transverse to the direction of travel at a lower portion thereof
    which dimension decreases at a portion of the element vertically spaced
    upwardly from the lower portion.

    (1)     Note.  A tool having a reduced upward extension merely to form an
    attaching means for the tool is not included under this definition.


CLS 172/732
TXT Apparatus under subclass 721 in which the earth working element has the
    appearance of an isosceles triangle when viewed in plan or front elevation.

    (1)     Note.  The triangular blade may have an integral or separately
    attached shank to the upper portion for connection to a standard or frame.


CLS 172/733
TXT Apparatus under subclass 721 in which the earth working element has the
    appearance of a V when viewed in plan all parts of the element having
    substantially the same vertical extent.


CLS 172/734
TXT Apparatus under subclass 681 in which an earth working element or part
    thereof is selectively held in different positions with respect to the
    frame or standard.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition for the definition of "adjustable".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    372,    for hand-held tools having adjustable parts.

    383+,   for angularly adjustable wheels.

    395+,   for wheels vertically adjustable relative to a frame.

    518+,   for adjustable rolling implements.

    605,    for an implement adjustment utilizing the draft force on a
    shiftable hitch.

    613,    for plural relatively adjustable tools.

    669+,   for tools adjustable on a wheeled frame.

    679+,   for adjustable draft members.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 382+ and the search
    there noted for an earth boring bit having an adjustable cutter element.


CLS 172/735
TXT Apparatus under subclass 734 in which the earth working element or a part
    thereof is adjustable to direct a distinct cutting edge or portion in
    active earth working engagement with the soil.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "adjustable" see the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136,    for diverse tools which may be used alternately only.

    703+,   for a tool or tool part reversible through 180o to present a
    different tool or portion thereof to the soil.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 383 for an earth-boring
    bit having a cutter element which is adjustable to present a different
    cutting edge.


CLS 172/736
TXT Apparatus under subclass 734 wherein two or more earth-engaging parts of a
    single earth working element are selectively adjustable, one with respect
    to the other.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "adjustable" see the class definition.

    (2)     Note.  The plural earth-engaging parts may be different soil-moving
    parts of a single tool or may be a tool and runner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    613+,   for plural relatively adjustable distinct tools.

    664+,   for relatively adjustable tool or earth- engaging parts having an
    actuator to accomplish the adjustment.

    722+,   for symmetrical tools having separate wings which may be adjustable.

    782,    for a scraper mounted between front and rear ground supports of a
    vehicle and a laterally offset scraper part adjustable with respect to the
    scraper and for forming an inclined earth shoulder.

    815,    for a transversely elongated blade mounted ahead of a motor
    vehicle, said blade having relatively adjustable earth-engaging parts.


CLS 172/737
TXT Apparatus under subclass 736 in which provision is made for adjusting at
    least one of the elements as it is worn, through contact with the earth, to
    compensate for such wear.


CLS 172/738
TXT Apparatus under subclass 736 wherein the implement comprises an earth
    working element and a separate member adapted to slide on the ground, to
    act as a runner and the two are adjustable with respect to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    387+,   for implements having runners spaced from the tools and see the
    definition and Notes thereof for the line.

    665,    for actuating means for relatively adjusting a tool and runner or
    depth gauge.

    729,    for a relatively adjustable symmetrical tool and runner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    111,    Planting, subclasses 134+ for the combination of a gauged earth
    working tool and a planting device (e.g., seed depositor).


CLS 172/739
TXT Apparatus under subclass 734 in which the earth working element is
    adjustable about an axis transverse to the line of travel, the axis
    substantially paralleling the earth surface.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "adjustable" see the class definition.


CLS 172/740
TXT Apparatus under subclass 739 wherein the earth working element is connected
    to a standard by adjustable means which permits rotation of said element
    about the transverse axis.  The standard is the generally vertically
    extending member to which the tool is connected and which is in turn
    connected to a frame or beam member.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "adjustable" see the class definition.


CLS 172/741
TXT Apparatus under subclass 734 in which the earth-engaging element is
    adjustable laterally of the line of travel.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "adjustable" see the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305,    for implements located forward of the rear of a self-propelled
    vehicle and having an actuator for lateral adjustment.

    446+,   for an implement with a mast-type hitch and laterally adjustable.

    476+,   for implements liftable for transport on a wheeled frame and also
    laterally adjustable.

    667,    for a laterally adjustable tool having an actuator for changing the
    tool position.

    673,    for a tool laterally adjustable with respect to a wheeled frame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 384 for an earth-boring
    bit having a laterally adjustable cutter element.


CLS 172/742
TXT Apparatus under subclass 741 in which the earth working element is
    angularly adjustable with respect to the line of travel, about an axis that
    is substantially vertical.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "adjustable" see the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    447,    for an apparatus comprising a mast- type hitch and a tool
    adjustable about a vertical axis.

    477,    for an earth working element liftable on a wheeled frame by means
    other than a mast-type hitch and adjustable about a vertical axis.

    600,    for a disc gang which is vertically adjustable about a vertical
    axis.

    603,    for a horizontally, angularly adjustable disc.


CLS 172/743
TXT Apparatus under subclass 741 wherein the earth working element is
    adjustable about an axis extending in the line of travel and parallel to
    the earth.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "adjustable" see the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    600,    for a disc gang which is mounted for tilting about a longitudinal
    axis.


CLS 172/744
TXT Apparatus under subclass 734 in which the earth working element is
    selectively adjustable so as to vary the vertical distance between the
    frame and the element.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "adjustable" see the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    452+,   for actuating means for lifting a tool for transport on a wheel
    frame.

    668,    for tools vertically adjustable with respect to wheel frame by
    means of an actuator.

    675,    for tools vertically adjustable with respect to a wheel frame.


CLS 172/745
TXT Apparatus under subclass 681 in which parts of the apparatus are connected
    by heating the parts to a plastic of fluid state and allowing the metals to
    flow together with or without addition of other molten metal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes depositing weld material on a part of
    the apparatus as, for example, to replace a worn portion.


CLS 172/746
TXT Apparatus under subclass 681 comprising an earth working element having a
    straight longitudinal portion to receive the side pressure of the earth
    working element and guide it (such portion being commonly known as a
    landside) and also having a portion extended laterally outwardly beyond the
    landside on the side opposite to that at which the main portion of the
    earth working element is located.


CLS 172/747
TXT Apparatus under subclass 681 in which a claim includes a recitation of the
    material of which the implement or a part thereof is made.

    (1)     Note.  A mere recitation that a tool is made of iron or steel is
    excluded from this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    519,    for a rolling tool having a yieldable material rim (e.g., rubber).

    612,    for a fabric or flexible tool.


CLS 172/748
TXT Apparatus under subclass 681 in which an earth working element is mounted
    so as to be movable about an axis under some condition of operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    602,    for a freely swayable single disc.

    705+,   for spring-biased pivoted tools.


CLS 172/749
TXT Apparatus under subclass 681 in which separable parts of the apparatus are
    so interfitted or related as to remain in operative relation to one another
    without the addition of a connecting or fastening member which is intended
    to be entirely detached from the parts when the parts are disconnected.

    (1)     Note.  The disclosure of a separate fastening member related to the
    joint being claimed is sufficient to exclude a patent from this definition
    even though it is not claimed.

    (2)     Note.  The "parts" of definition must be principal portions of the
    apparatus such as, standard, moldboard, or share. A mere portion of the
    connecting means such as a bracket between two parts is not included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    753,    for implement parts which are interfitted or interlocked and also
    provided with a separate fastening member.


CLS 172/750
TXT Apparatus under subclass 749 in which one of the members carries a
    resilient or resiliently biased part which automatically engages and locks
    the other part when the two parts are brought together in assembled
    relationship.


CLS 172/751
TXT Apparatus under subclass 749 in which one of the parts has attached thereto
    a relatively movable fastener, clamp, or wedge member which is activated
    after the parts are juxtaposed to secure or tighten the parts.

    (1)     Note.  The fastener, clamp, or wedge may be capable of removal from
    the implement part, but if removal is not necessary to accomplish the
    connection or disconnection, classification is under this definition.


CLS 172/752
TXT Apparatus under subclass 681 in which the earth working element has
    separately attached thereto a substantially flat cutting blade lying in a
    vertical longitudinal plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165+,   for a tool having associated therewith a separate vertical cutter
    spaced forwardly to cut a slit in the earth in which the tool operates.

    190,    for separate tools one of which is a vertical longitudinal blade.

    725,    for symmetrical tools with a vertical cutter on the center line
    thereof.

    765,    for longitudinal planar blades, per se.


CLS 172/753
TXT Apparatus under subclass 681 in which separable parts of an implement have
    portions which interfit or interengage to lock the parts against movement
    in at least three directions spaced 90o apart in a single plane before the
    addition of any separate fastening means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    704,    for interlocked tool parts in which one of the tool parts is
    reversible.

    749+,   for similar devices in which no separate fastening means is
    employed.


CLS 172/754
TXT Apparatus under subclass 681 in which the tool is of the type having a
    landside to receive the side pressure of the earth working element and to
    act as a runner, a point for making an initial cut in the earth, a share
    for making a substantially horizontal cut beneath the surface to cut a
    slice of earth, and a moldboard to guide and completely invert the furrow
    slice.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 366+ for similar ditching-type excavating
    plows.

    111,    Planting subclass 126 for a moldboard furrow opener claimed in
    combination with a liquid or gas soil treatment.


CLS 172/755
TXT Apparatus under subclass 754 including means to heat or add a lubricating
    material to the moldboard-type implement to facilitate the passage of earth
    thereover and reduce friction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 200 and 227 for heated snow plows.


CLS 172/756
TXT Apparatus under subclass 754 in which at least a part of the moldboard is
    perforated or an open framework usually for the purpose of reducing
    friction or clearing the furrow slice therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  This definition does not include knives, bars, etc.,
    disposed at the exit edge of the moldboard for the purpose of cutting or
    breaking the furrow slice.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    766,    for tools having spaced parallel earth working fingers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 83 for a plow or
    cutter having a contiguous, fixed, inclined separator foraminous separator
    element.


CLS 172/757
TXT Apparatus under subclass 754 having additional means to cause the furrow
    slice to remain in contact with the entire moldboard and to prevent the
    slice from breaking or parting from the moldboard prematurely.


CLS 172/758
TXT Apparatus under subclass 754 including at least one member for cutting or
    breaking the furrow slice as it passes over or from the moldboard.


CLS 172/759
TXT Apparatus under subclass 754 in which in addition to the point, share,
    landside, and moldboard there is provided a separable soil working or
    deflector portion attached to or forming a continuation of moldboard.

    (1)     Note.  The moldboard must be capable of turning a furrow slice over
    without the added member required for this subclass.  A mere moldboard made
    of plural sections would not be included under this definition.


CLS 172/760
TXT Apparatus under subclass 754 in which a claim includes a recitation of the
    particular shape of the moldboard for the earth guiding function.

    (1)     Note.  This definition does not include those devices in which the
    shape of some portion of the moldboard is recited where such shape is
    merely for the purpose of cooperating with some other part to accomplish a
    connection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    765+,   for earth working elements of specific shape other than the
    moldboard type.


CLS 172/761
TXT Apparatus under subclass 754 in which the cutting edge or upper or lower
    surface of the point or share is provided with serrations, notches, or
    channels to enhance the earth working operation of the tool.


CLS 172/762
TXT Apparatus under subclass 681 wherein significance is attributed to a means
    connecting (a) the earth working element to (b) a generally vertically
    oriented member extending between the element and a beam or frame member.


CLS 172/763
TXT Specific standard and beam connection:
    Apparatus under subclass 681 wherein significance is attributed to a means
    connecting a generally vertically oriented member extending between the
    earth working and a beam or frame member to the beam or frame member.


CLS 172/764
TXT Apparatus under subclass 681 including a member separate from the earth
    working element and standard and adapted to slide over the surface of the
    earth to act as a runner, depth gauge, or landslide.

    (1)     Note.  The runner or gauge may be directly attached to the earth
    working element or standard.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240+,   for apparatus having a wheel or runner engageable with the ground
    for transport only.

    360,    for hand-guided or propelled implements having runners.

    387+,   for implements provided with runners spaced from the tools and see
    the definition and Notes thereof for the line.

    665,    for actuating means for relatively adjusting a tool and runner.

    727+,   for symmetrical tools having an attached runner or depth gauge.

    738,    for a tool and runner which are relatively adjustable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    111,    Planting subclasses 134+ for the combination of a gauged earth
    working tool and a planting device (e.g., seed depositor).


CLS 172/765
TXT Apparatus under subclass 681 in which a claim includes a specific
    recitation of the shape of the earth working element for the earth working
    function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    721+,   for symmetrically shaped earth working elements.

    754+,   for moldboard-type implements and particularly subclass 760 for
    specific moldboard shape.


CLS 172/766
TXT Apparatus under subclass 765 comprising a tool having an earth working
    portion and having extended therefrom a plurality of distinct substantially
    parallel similar earth working fingers, tines blades or the like.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    378+,   for hand tools having a plurality of prongs, teeth, or serrations.

    685+,   for plural distinct tools.

    777+,   for a scraper supporting a plurality of readily removable, narrow
    depending tools.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 83 for a digging
    member having trailing spaced tines or fingers to separate objects such as
    plants or potatoes from the earth.


CLS 172/768
TXT Apparatus under subclass 765 in which the earth-breaking portion of the
    tool has a rearward and downward inclination so as to break the earth by
    being drawn therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    723,    for winged symmetrical implements in which the earth-breaking
    portion is of the draw-cut type.


CLS 172/769
TXT Apparatus under subclass 765 in which the earth working element comprises
    at least two separate earth working or deflecting parts which are
    detachably connected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    714+,   for tools having a plurality of earth- engaging parts movable
    relative to one another during operation.

    719,    for tools having an add-on cutting or wearing edge point or surface.

    722+,   for symmetrical tools having separately attached wings.

    725,    for symmetrical tools having a separable vertical cutter at the
    center line thereof.

    726,    for symmetrical tools having separable parts joined at the line of
    symmetry of the tool.

    736+,   for tools having plural relatively adjustable earth-engaging parts.

    749+,   for tools having plural parts interconnected without separate
    fastening means.

    752,    for tools having separable parts wherein one of the parts is a
    vertical longitudinal cutting blade.

    753,    for tools having separable parts which interlock or interfit.

    754+,   for moldboard-type tools having separable parts.

    772,    for tools having plural separable parts and no shape of the tool
    parts for the earth working function being claimed.


CLS 172/770
TXT Apparatus under subclass 765 wherein the tool comprises two portions or
    surfaces which meet along a line so as to form a sharp angle therebetween
    of substantially less than 180o.


CLS 172/771
TXT Apparatus under subclass 765 in which the earth working element has at
    least a portion of the surface thereof which is curved.

    (1)     Note.  A planar blade having a mere curved edge is not included
    under this definition.


CLS 172/772
TXT Removable tool portion (e.g., replaceable cutting or wearing element for
    tool): Apparatus under subclass 681 wherein the earth-engaging portion of
    the tool is separable and replaceable.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the patents included herein disclose a tool having a
    portion adapted to be removed and replaced by a corresponding portion when
    worn or damaged.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    701.1+, for transversely elongated blades having separable parts.

    745,    for tools having parts which are welded together.

    769,    for tools of specific earth working shape having separable parts,
    and see the search notes therein for other tools having separable parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclass 450 for a removable cutting edge or tooth to
    be used on an excavating machine of the type found in Class 37.


CLS 172/772.5
TXT Portion is cutting edge:

    Apparatus under subclass 772 including an elongated portion at the bottom
    (i.e., the ground-engaging part) of the tool which is removable from the
    rest of the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    701.3,  for a removable cutting edge on a transversely elongated blade.


CLS 172/773
TXT Apparatus under subclass 681 wherein a claim includes details of the
    construction or shape of the tool standard (i.e., a generally vertically
    extending member to which the tool is connected and which is in turn
    connected to a frame or beam member).

    (1)     Note.  A vertical standard which is formed integral with a
    horizontal frame member (e.g., plow beam) is included under this definition.


CLS 172/774
TXT Apparatus under subclass 773 in which the standard is so shaped as to
    dispose the center line of the lower end of the standard to one side of the
    upper end thereof.


CLS 172/775
TXT Apparatus under subclass 773 in which a separate bracing member is provided
    between the standard and beam or frame to which the standard is connected.


CLS 172/776
TXT Apparatus under the class definition not otherwise provided for.

    (1)     Note.  For example, in this subclass are classified miscellaneous
    frames for earth working apparatus in which the claims do not include the
    earth working means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 143 for frames.


CLS 172/777
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a scraper and an earth
    working tool which is relatively narrow in a horizontal lateral direction
    in its intended position of use, the tool being disclosed as mounted on the
    grading scraper in such fashion that at least the lower earth working
    portion of said tool extends downwardly beyond the lower edge of the
    grading scraper to that during operation the scraper supports the tool and
    (1) the tool is readily removable from the scraper or (2) the tool is
    movably attached to the scraper so that it may be positioned to work the
    earth or not work the earth, or the depth of earth penetration may be
    changed.

    (1)     Note.  The tool must be disclosed as mounted on the transverse
    blade or moldboard portion of the scraper rather than on the wing portion
    or some structure which supports the scraper. Such device will be found in
    subclass 197.

    (2)     Note.  For the meaning of "scraper" see the definition of subclass
    781.

    (3)     Note.  A claim to the combination of a scraper and a readily
    removable depending earth working tool is classified under this definition
    even if the scraper is claimed by name only as a support for the tool.
    Also a claim to a tool with some special adaptation for attachment to a
    scraper is classified under this definition.

    (4)     Note.  Apparatus under this definition is typically used to scarify
    or break up roadways and may be called a road ripper, dozer scarifier, or
    the like.


CLS 172/778
TXT Apparatus under subclass 777 in which the earth working tool is attached to
    the scraper by means at the top and bottom edges of the scraper acting to
    clamp the tool to the scraper.


CLS 172/779
TXT Apparatus under the class definition, comprising a scraper associated with
    a frame for traversing the earth whose position relative to the frame is
    controlled by a mechanical linkage arrangement so that when the scraper
    passes over a raised section of earth it is lowered relative to the frame
    and when it passes over a low section of earth it is raised relative to the
    frame whereby an approximately level surface of the earth is created as the
    scraper traverses the earth, all without the intervention of a human
    operator.

    (1)     Note.  Typically in apparatus under this definition a ground wheel
    may move relative to a frame carrying the grading scraper and a linkage
    connects the wheel and grading scraper so that as the wheel moves up
    relative to the frame the scraper moves down relative to the frame and as
    the wheel moves down relative to the frame the scraper moves up relative to
    the frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.5,    for automatically controlled power means for shifting the position
    of a scraper in order to achieve a level surface.

    239,    for apparatus having a linkage whereby the position of an earth
    working element is controlled in certain ways in response to draft forces,
    pitching of a propelling device or ground level.

    398,    for a vertically adjustable ground support interconnected with a
    tool by linkage so movement of one influences movement of the other.

    811+,   for a scraper positioned in front of a motor vehicle and maintained
    in a horizontal position as the ground supports of the vehicle move over
    irregular terrain so that the vehicle tilts sidewise.


CLS 172/780
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a scraper supported
    intermediate the ends of an unusually long longitudinally extending
    supporting structure with separate ground support means at each end, the
    unusually long supporting structure tending to smooth out undulations in
    the earth to produce a finished, generally planar surface.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "scraper" see the definition of subclass
    781.

    (2)     Note.  The unusually long supporting structure must have one
    portion thereof extending a substantial distance from the scraper to the
    front support means and another portion thereof extending a substantial
    distance to the rear support means to present an elongated supporting base
    for materially reducing the effect of undulations in the soil on the
    scraper.

    (3)     Note.  Patents are classified under this definition on a disclosure
    basis if the claim has any reference to the supporting structure.  The
    supporting structure may be disclosed as supported at one or both ends by a
    separate vehicle or vehicles.


CLS 172/781
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which a scraper is located between
    spaced front and rear ground supports of a vehicle, the ground supports
    being either wheels or wheel substitutes having no substantial earth
    working function.

    (1)     Note.  A "scraper" under this definition is an earth working tool,
    at least a substantial portion of which is laterally or diagonally disposed
    and has a substantially vertically disposed face having a lower straight
    edge which functions to scrape earth from or slide the same along the
    surface of the earth to form a smooth planar surface.  A tool which is
    disclosed as intended to cultivate the soil, or to make a furrow or a
    trench is not considered to be a scraper and is classifiable on other
    features.  A scraper under this definition is frequently called a "road
    grader".

    (2)     Note.  The vehicle must be a unitary stable vehicle.  A scraper
    mounted between a vehicle and the ground support means of a device which is
    essentially a separate trailing vehicle or pushed vehicle is not included.
    Such devices are classified on other features in various subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  A scraper is considered to be between the front and rear
    ground supports only if at least a portion of the scraper in a plan view is
    located within a polygonal area defined by a perimeter formed by lines
    connecting the center points of the front and rear supports, e.g., in the
    ordinary vehicle having front and rear wheels, within the rectangle formed
    by the lines connecting the center lines of the wheels.

    (4)     Note.  A device comprising a vehicle having separate front and rear
    ground supports which are adjustable relative to the framework of the
    vehicle so that they support the framework during transport only and not
    during use of the scraper for its intended function is not included.  Such
    devices are classified on other features in various other subclasses.

    (5)     Note.  Patents having a specific disclosure of a scraper located
    between front and rear ground supports of a vehicle are classified under
    this definition even if the location is not claimed, provided that some
    reference to the vehicle is made in the claims.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63+,    for apparatus comprising a driven tool such as a scraper which may
    be between front and rear vehicle supports.

    780,    for a scraper between the front and rear supports of a specially
    elongated vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclass 411, especially subclass 412 for scoops
    mounted between front and rear ground supports of a vehicle.  The
    distinction between a scoop and a scraper is that a scoop has a bottom
    surface for transporting the earth while a scraper has no bottom and pushes
    earth ahead of it while the earth rests on the surface of the undisturbed
    earth beneath.


CLS 172/782
TXT Apparatus under subclass 781 in which in addition to the scraper between
    the front and rear ground supports there is another earth working tool
    which is adapted to be used to form a planar surface which is positioned
    completely laterally beyond the surface formed by the scraper and
    completely laterally beyond the perimeter delineated by the front and rear
    ground supports, and which is inclined to the horizontal and relative to
    the surface formed by the scraper.

    (1)     Note.  The additional tool may be a separate member or an extension
    of the scraper.

    (2)     Note.  When the apparatus is being used to form a shoulder the
    scraper may be positioned, for example, above a concrete road and not
    actually be used to form an earth surface.


CLS 172/783
TXT Apparatus under subclass 781 in which the scraper has a wheel or wheel
    substitute intimately associated therewith which is separate and distinct
    from the vehicle ground supports.

    (1)     Note.  The wheel or wheel substitute under this definition may
    incidentally have an earth working function but an element which is
    intended to have an earth working function or a side earth retaining wall
    of a scraper is not included even though the lower edge or surface of said
    element or wall functions as a ground support. Scrapers with such elements
    or walls are classified on other features, though they should be
    cross-referenced to this subclass if structurally similar to scrapers with
    ground supports.


CLS 172/784
TXT Apparatus under subclass 781 including an earth working element which
    differs in size or shape from the scraper and so is diverse, the diverse
    element being capable of working the earth at the same time as the scraper
    or adjustable in the apparatus to work the earth alternatively to the
    scraper.

    (1)     Note.  A diverse earth working element under this definition may
    comprise any distinctly different portion of the scraper which causes
    classification under the definition of subclass 781.

    (2)     Note.  A wing or vertical plate which extends longitudinally and
    acts to confine earth loosened by a scraper or other earth working element
    is not considered a diverse element under this definition.

    (3)     Note.  An earth working element which differs from another by being
    merely a mirror image, e.g., for pushing earth to the left instead of the
    right, is not considered diverse under this definition.

    (4)     Note.  The difference between the earth working element and the
    scraper does not have to be claimed.  If a claim refers to an earth working
    element which is disclosed as diverse, this is sufficient for
    classification under this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63+,    for an apparatus comprising a driven earth working element and a
    nondriven earth working element which may be a scraper.

    777,    for a scraper and a detachable narrow depending earth working
    element.

    782,    for an apparatus comprising a scraper between front and rear
    vehicle supports and a laterally offset inclined shoulder forming tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 403+ for a scraper combined with a scoop
    shovel or the like.


CLS 172/785
TXT Apparatus under subclass 784 in which the diverse earth working element is
    an element other than a scraper and is positioned in front of and spaced
    from the scraper when they are both in working position, the scraper and
    the diverse element working the earth in the same or overlapping paths.

    (1)     Note.  An apparatus with a diverse earth working element which is
    connected to the earth-contacting portion of the scraper so as to be
    closely associated therewith does not come within this definition even if
    it precedes and is slightly spaced from the scraper, and is classified in
    the generic subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    777,    for a scraper supporting a readily removable narrow depending tool
    which may precede the scraper.


CLS 172/786
TXT Apparatus under subclass 781 in which there are a plurality of scrapers.

    (1)     Note.  Plural scraping blades secured to a backing member or
    members to form a unitary means are not considered to be plural scrapers,
    the whole assemblage being considered a single scraper.

    (2)     Note.  A plurality of scrapers may comprise any combination of
    parts (other than described in (1) Note) if two or more of the parts are
    each identifiable individually as constituting a scraper.  A V scraper, for
    example, is considered to comprise two scrapers if each arm of the V fits
    the definition of a scraper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    784+,   for a scraper between front and rear vehicle ground supports in
    combination with a diverse earth working tool.


CLS 172/787
TXT Apparatus under subclass 786 in which the plural scrapers work the earth in
    the same or overlapping paths and are spaced from each other.

    (1)     Note.  Scrapers which are adjustable relative to each other are
    considered to come within the definition if they meet the requirements of
    the definition in some positions of adjustment even if in other positions
    they do not meet the requirements.

    (2)     Note.  Scrapers which are connected to each other in the
    earth-contacting portion so as to function as a unit (which may be composed
    of adjustable sections pivoting about the point of connection) are not
    considered to come within the definition even if the scrapers overlap and
    are spaced from each other.  Such scrapers may be classified in subclass
    786.


CLS 172/788
TXT Apparatus under subclass 781 in which the scraper is attached to the
    forward end of a generally longitudinally extending frame which is attached
    to the vehicle frame at a location in back of the scraper so as to push the
    scraper when it is performing its earth working function.

    (1)     Note.  The longitudinally extending frame under this definition
    must be one which transmits the principal propelling force (at least 50%)
    from the vehicle to the scraper rather than a mere stabilizing strut or
    adjusting link.  Whether or not a frame meets this criterium is usually a
    decision made after a consideration of the total disclosure to determine
    the stress distribution inherently present in the apparatus.

    (2)     Note.  The frame may be nothing more than a single strut.

    (3)     Note.  The phrase "generally longitudinally extending" means that
    when the scraper is in working position the frame extends more in a
    longitudinal direction than in a vertical direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    308,    for an earth working element other than a scraper between the front
    and rear of a motor vehicle and attached to a push bar.


CLS 172/789
TXT Apparatus under subclass 781 in which the scraper is attached to a
    generally longitudinally extending frame which is attached to the vehicle
    frame by a hitch allowing pivotal movement of the longitudinally extending
    frame with respect to the vehicle frame, and there is an actuator for
    moving the hitch or parts thereof so that the locus in the hitch about
    which pivotal movement takes place is moved relative to the vehicle frame.

    (1)     Note.  The frame may be nothing more than a strut.

    (2)     Note.  The phrase "generally longitudinally extending" means that
    when the scraper is in working position the frame extends more in a
    longitudinal direction than in a vertical direction.


CLS 172/790
TXT Apparatus under subclass 781 in which the scraper is adjustably mounted on
    the vehicle frame and in which there is a means for facilitating the
    adjustment by at least partially counterbalancing the weight of the scraper.

    (1)     Note.  Included under this definition is a counterbalance means
    which more than compensates for the weight of the scraper and is the sole
    means for moving the scraper to an adjusted position against the force of
    gravity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    506,    for a spring-assisted or spring actuator for lifting a tool for
    transport on a wheeled frame.


CLS 172/791
TXT Apparatus under subclass 781 comprising three or more actuators, each
    operable independently of the others to adjust the position of the scraper
    relative to the vehicle frame extending between the front and rear ground
    supports, and acting between the frame and scraper.

    (1)     Note.  If a single power source, such as an engine power take off
    or hand wheel, is connected by clutches to end elements, such as shafts,
    links or the like, so that a plurality of such elements can each be moved
    independently of each other to adjust the position of the scraper, then
    these are considered to be plural, independently operable actuators
    corresponding in number to the number of independently movable adjustment
    points.


CLS 172/792
TXT Apparatus under subclass 791 in which the grading scraper is supported from
    the vehicle frame by a means including a circular ring or ring portion
    which lies in a generally horizontal plane when the scraper cutting edge is
    horizontal and the scraper is adjustable relative to the vehicle frame
    about the axis of the ring or ring portion.


CLS 172/793
TXT Apparatus under subclass 792 in which one or more of the actuators is
    operatively connected between the vehicle's frame and the ring or ring
    portion and effective when operated to bodily move said ring or ring
    portion from one position of adjustment to another in a substantially
    lateral direction relative to said vehicle frame.

    (1)     Note.  A scraper is usually provided with lift means at each end
    whereby it may be angled in a vertical plane. Such lift means may be
    operated to cause some lateral shifting of the ring but they are not
    ring-shifting means of this definition.  The actuator of this definition is
    an added actuator whose principal function is to bodily shift the ring or
    ring portion laterally.


CLS 172/794
TXT Apparatus under subclass 781 in which the scraper or a portion of the
    scraper is movably mounted relative to the vehicle frame and there is a
    resilient means for yieldably urging said scraper or portion into ground
    contact.

    (1)     Note.  The resilient means is considered to yieldably urge the
    scraper or scraper portion into ground contact even if it is disclosed as
    used so that it does not urge the scraper or part in a vertical direction
    against the ground but instead yieldably urges the scraper or part against
    an obstacle on the ground when the scraper or part is traversing the ground
    and contacts the obstacle in the path of traverse.


CLS 172/795
TXT Apparatus under subclass 781 comprising an actuator for adjusting the
    position of the scraper relative to the vehicle frame extending between the
    front and rear supports and acting between the frame and scraper, the
    actuator being recited in a claim with some significant detail of its
    structure or relationship to the rest of the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    789,    for apparatus comprising an actuator for bodily shifting a scraper
    subframe draft connection to thereby adjust the scraper.

    791+,   for a scraper adjusted relative to the vehicle frame by three or
    more independent actuators.  Such actuators commonly comprise actuators for
    adjusting the scraper about a longitudinal horizontal axis, about a
    vertical axis and about a horizontal transverse axis through a hitch
    connecting a scraper- supporting frame to the vehicle frame.  Significant
    disclosures of actuators for tilting the scraper about a horizontal
    transverse axis adjacent its immediate support or for adjusting the scraper
    in the direction of its own longitudinal axis should be cross-referenced to
    subclass 795.


CLS 172/796
TXT Apparatus under subclass 795 in which the actuator adjusts the scraper
    about a vertical axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    791+,   for a scraper adjusted relative to the vehicle frame by three or
    more actuators, one of which is for adjusting the scraper about a vertical
    axis.


CLS 172/797
TXT Apparatus under subclass 795 in which the actuator adjusts the scraper
    about an axis lying in a horizontal plane and extending in the direction of
    the line of travel of the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  An axis lying in a horizontal plane and perpendicular to the
    longitudinal extent of the scraper is considered to be an axis under this
    definition.

    (2)     Note.  Devices under this definition usually comprise a pair of
    actuators which may be operated together to lift the scraper about a
    horizontal transverse axis passing through a draft connection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    782+,   for a shoulder-forming scraper and an actuator for tilting it about
    a generally longitudinal axis.

    791+,   for a grading scraper adjusted relative to the vehicle frame by
    three or more actuators, including one or more actuators for adjusting the
    scraper about a horizontal longitudinal axis.


CLS 172/798
TXT Apparatus under subclass 781 in which there is an actuator for angling the
    axis of rotation of a ground wheel by changing its position in a transverse
    substantially vertical plane with respect to the vehicle frame which
    extends between the front and rear ground supports.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 80.1 for a land vehicle with means to tilt
    the axis of rotation of a wheel in a vertical plane.


CLS 172/799
TXT Apparatus under subclass 781 comprising a means to change the horizontal
    angular direction of the axis of rotation of a ground wheel relative to the
    vehicle frame which extends between the the front and rear ground supports
    (e.g., for steering the vehicle, etc.), the means being claimed with some
    specificity.

    (1)     Note.  Means for changing the direction of a freely swiveling
    caster by swinging the vehicle are not included. There must be some means
    for positively causing the wheel to turn with respect to the vehicle.


CLS 172/799.5
TXT TOWED SCRAPER WITH GROUND SUPPORT WHEELS:

    Apparatus under the class definition wherein an implement mounting a
    scraper blade is adapted to be connected at its forward end to a towing
    vehicle and includes a rolling support device (i.e., a wheel).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.5,    for a scraper which is automatically power-controlled for leveling.

    26.5+,  for a dragline scraper.

    72,     for a driven tool followed by a leveling drag or furrow shaper.

    189     and 612, for flexible implements including flexible matlike drags.

    197     and 199+, for diverse tools, one of which comprises a drag or
    smoother.

    445.1+, for a scraper mounted on a frame which is supported on the rear of
    a vehicle by a three-point hitch.

    684.5,  for a dragged scraper on a supporting frame.

    777+,   for a scraper supporting a narrow depending tool.

    779,    for a scraper whose position is controlled by a linkage for
    leveling.

    780     and 781+, for a scraper between front and rear vehicle supports.

    810+,   for a scraper ahead of a motor vehicle.


CLS 172/810
TXT MOUNTING FOR PUSHED TOOL AT END OF MOTOR VEHICLE:

    Apparatus under the class definition in which a mounting mechanism is
    provided for connecting an earth working element to, and ahead of, a
    self-propelled vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  Basic subject matter for this subclass, and those indented
    hereunder, is the mounting means (e.g., a frame and adjusting linkage)
    intermediate a tool and a vehicle.  The tool, the vehicle, or a control
    system for the adjusting linkage may be claimed as well, but this is not
    necessary for classification herein.

    (2)     Note.  The earth working element is in front of the vehicle in its
    direction of travel when the element is in use. Included in this subclass,
    and those indented hereunder, are patents disclosing a tool attached to the
    rear of a vehicle, but wherein the vehicle moves in its normally reverse
    direction when using the tool.

    (3)     Note.  A significant portion of the earth working element must be
    located ahead of a transverse line corresponding to the axis of the front
    wheels, or forward track idlers, of the vehicle.  However, a tool
    comprising a transversely elongated blade, such as a bulldozer, may be
    angled (i.e., pivoted within a horizontal plane about a generally vertical
    axis) so that a portion of the blade is to the rear of said transverse line
    and outside the perimeter of the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    681+,   for a tool, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, appropriate subclass for a vehicle, per se.


CLS 172/811
TXT Transversely mounted blade (e.g., bulldozer, etc.):
    Apparatus under subclass 810 in which the earth working element has a
    vertical, generally planar, earth working portion extended in its dimension
    transverse to the vehicle's direction of travel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    701.1+, for a blade, per se.


CLS 172/812
TXT With valve or pump for hydraulic control system:
    Apparatus under subclass 811 wherein adjustment of the blade is performed
    by a control system which incorporates fluid circuitry, and including means
    for producing or controlling fluid pressure within the system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, for a hydraulic motor, per se.


CLS 172/813
TXT Fluid line specifically arranged, or shield for system component:

    Apparatus under subclass 811 wherein (a) significance is attributed to a
    particular location for the system's hydraulic lines, or (b) structure is
    recited which serves as a protective covering for some portion or element
    of the system.


CLS 172/814
TXT Having means controlling drive for interconnected vehicles: Apparatus under
    subclass 811 wherein a blade is powered by a plurality of vehicles, each
    having its motive control operatively connected one with the other.

    (1)     Note.  The vehicles may be side by side so each is directly linked
    to the blade, or they may be in tandem arrangement (i.e., one behind the
    other) so that only the vehicle in front is directly linked to the blade.
    However, one vehicle simply pushing another, each independently operated,
    is not considered appropriate for this subclass.


CLS 172/815
TXT Contiguous, relatively adjustable blades; or blade having relatively
    adjustable earth-engaging parts: Apparatus under subclass 811 in which (a)
    an auxiliary blade is mounted so as to be adjacent to, and adjustable with
    respect to, the main blade; or (b) the blade's working face is comprised of
    plural parts which can be adjusted with respect to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    701.1+, for particular blade structure, per se, and especially for a blade
    having removable parts.


CLS 172/816
TXT Blade mounting includes resilient connection: Apparatus under subclass 811
    wherein an elastically deformable element is interposed in some portion of
    the mounting means to provide resiliency to the blade support.


CLS 172/817
TXT Removable attachment for general purpose vehicle:
    Apparatus under subclass 811 which is particularly designed as an accessory
    to be selectively installed upon, and removed from, a general purpose
    vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  Especially common in this subclass are blade attachments for
    wheeled farm tractors, which tractors are capable of powering a variety of
    tools; but this subclass is not limited to a certain type of vehicle.


CLS 172/818
TXT Blade angle adjustable in a horizontal plane: Apparatus under subclass 811
    including means to maintain the blade in any one of a plurality of selected
    angular orientations with respect to the longitudinal centerline of the
    vehicle within a generally horizontal plane.

    (1)     Note.  "Angle" is the art term which refers to this adjustment.


CLS 172/819
TXT Power-operated adjusting means:
    Apparatus under subclass 818 including a power system for moving the blade
    from one angular orientation to another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclass for a
    hydraulic motor, per se.


CLS 172/820
TXT Blade angled about fixed, central, generally vertical axis: Apparatus under
    subclass 819 wherein the blade is connected to the mounting means at a
    point which does not move laterally and lies in a vertical plane that
    includes the longitudinal centerline of the vehicle, so that it pivots
    about a generally vertical axis through that point.


CLS 172/821
TXT And tilt of blade adjustable in a generally vertical plane:
    Apparatus under subclass 820 including a mechanism which maintains the
    working edge of the blade in selected angular orientations with respect to
    ground within a generally vertical plane.

    (1)     Note.  "Tilt" is the art term which refers to this adjustment.


CLS 172/822
TXT And tilt of blade adjustable:
    Apparatus under subclass 819 including a mechanism which maintains the
    working edge of the blade in selected angular orientations with respect to
    ground within a generally vertical plane.

    (1)     Note.  "Tilt" is the art term which refers to this adjustment.


CLS 172/823
TXT And tilt of blade adjustable:
    Apparatus under subclass 818 including a mechanism which maintains the
    working edge of the blade in selected angular orientations with respect to
    ground within a generally vertical plane.

    (1)     Note.  "Tilt" is the art term which refers to this adjustment.


CLS 172/824
TXT Having adjustable tilt of angularly fixed blade:
    Apparatus under subclass 811 including means to maintain the working edge
    of the blade in any one of a plurality of selected angular orientations
    with respect to ground within a generally vertical plane.

    (1)     Note.  "Tilt" is the art term which refers to this adjustment.


CLS 172/825
TXT About a pivot axis fixed to mounting:
    Apparatus under subclass 824 wherein the blade is connected to the mounting
    means so that it pivots about a generally stationary axis.


CLS 172/826
TXT Including adjustable length device between mounting means and upper corner
    portion of blade: Apparatus under subclass 824 having a variable length
    device (e.g., a jack, hydraulic cylinder, etc.) connecting a part of the
    blade at its lateral end, and at or near the top thereof, with the mounting
    mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the patents included herein also disclose
    diagonal-bracing devices extending laterally between the blade and the
    mounting means.


CLS 172/827
TXT Having means to prevent lateral movement of mounting or blade: Apparatus
    under subclass 811 including means extending between the vehicle and the
    blade or mounting mechanism for limiting lateral movement of the blade or
    mounting mechanism relative to the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of means provided for herein include (a) a strut
    which links either the blade or the mounting  mechanism to the vehicle, or
    (b) a slotted member attached to the vehicle which embraces the mounting
    mechanism to guide it in vertical movement.


CLS 172/828
TXT With power means for raising and lowering blade:
    Apparatus under subclass 811 which includes a power system for causing
    vertical movement of the blade.


CLS 172/829
TXT Including elongated flexible element (e.g., cable) connecting power means
    to tool or mounting means: Apparatus under subclass 828 in which the power
    system is connected to either the blade or a part of the mounting mechanism
    by a cable, rope, chain, or similar means.


CLS 172/830
TXT Power means is fluid servomotor:
    Apparatus under subclass 828 in which the power system includes a device
    which has a piston movable within a cylinder by fluid pressure.


CLS 172/831
TXT Plural servomotors:
    Apparatus under subclass 830 in which there are a plurality of
    fluid-pressure devices.


CLS 172/832
TXT With blade-carried ground support:
    Apparatus under subclass 811 in which the earth working blade mounts a
    skid, wheel, or wheel substitute which is separate and distinct from the
    motor vehicle ground-support means.


CLS 172/833
TXT Tool prepares wheel path for passage of wheel: Apparatus under subclass 810
    in which the tool is positioned ahead of the vehicle wheel or wheel
    substitute to smooth or level the soil in the path thereof.


CLS 172/834
TXT With tool-carried ground support:
    Apparatus under subclass 810 in which either the tool or the mounting means
    holds a skid, wheel, or wheel substitute which is separate and distinct
    from the motor vehicle ground-support means.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTION


CLS 172/900
TXT PLANT THINNERS:
    This art collection is intended to collect all plant thinners which have an
    earth working function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5+,     for plant thinners having plant sensing means which actuate
    automatic power control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 1.43 for plant thinners which do not have
    an earth working function.


CLS 173/
TTL TOOL DRIVING OR IMPACTING

CLS 173/
TXT INDEX TO CLASS DEFINITION





    I.      SUBJECT MATTER OF THE CLASS

    II.     DEFINITION OF TERMS

    III.    RELATIONSHIP TO SPECIFIC TOOL CLASSES

    IV.     MISCELLANEOUS SEARCH NOTES

    V.      INDEX TO CLASSES NOTED IN THE CLASS DEFINITION AND SUBCLASS
    DEFINITIONS OF THIS CLASS

    I.      SUBJECT MATTER OF THE CLASS

    A.      The purpose of this class is to provide a search for subject matter
    directed to means for driving a tool and also reciting some feature
    relating to the tool, or reciting a combination of features peculiar to
    driving a tool which cause separate classification in the specific motor
    classes, and in the specific machine element and mechanism classes to be
    impractical, but which subject matter is of such general application in the
    tool arts that separate classification in each specific tool class is also
    impractical.

    B.      The term, tool, as used in this class means primarily a work
    contacting element which functions to effect some physical alteration in
    the work, such as chipping or boring, but is also used to include other
    elements which are driven in the same manner as such a tool (e.g., a nail
    or post).  It must be noted, however, as explained in the next paragraph,
    that a means which impacts a tool is not in itself, regarded as a tool.

    C.      The term, impacting device, as used in this class defines a means
    including a mass of material (i.e., hammer head) which is specifically
    intended to deliver an impact or blow to a tool as defined in paragraph B
    and is not itself a tool but is defined as a species of means for driving a
    tool.

    D.      This class, in accordance with the purpose of paragraph A, provides
    for an impacting device, as defined in paragraph C, or a means to actuate
    the hammer head of an impacting device, said impacting device or means to
    actuate said hammer head being claimed in combination with at least one of
    the following features relating to a tool as defined in paragraph B:  (1) a
    nominally recited tool, (2) a means to retain or hold a tool to receive a
    blow, (3) a means to align a tool with respect to the hammer head to
    receive a blow, or (4) a means (anvil) situated between the hammer head and
    a tool and which is intended to transmit a blow from the hammer head to the
    tool.

    E.      This class also provides for a motor and/or a machine element or
    mechanism for driving a tool claimed in combination with one or more of the
    following:  (1) a means for causing, controlling, or selectively preventing
    the advancing movement of a driven tool, (2) a cleansing means, i.e., a
    means for cleaning the area of tool operation or (3) a manipulating handle.
    In the absence of a separate drive means, a means to cause, control or
    selectively prevent advance claimed in combination with a cleansing means
    will be classified in this class.

    (1)     Note.  If both the drive means and means to cause, control or
    selectively prevent advance comprise merely gear or mechanical motion
    elements as defined in Class 74, Machine Element or Mechanism,
    classification is in Class 74.  However, if structure is claimed which goes
    beyond the scope of Class 74, such as specific motor structure, a vehicle
    support for the drive, work engaging support means or means to adjust the
    position of the axis of tool advance, classification is in Class 173.

    F.      This class also provides for processes of operating apparatus
    included under the class definition and not claiming any additional feature
    limiting the process to a particular art.

    G.      This class also is intended to provide for subject matter in
    accordance with the purpose of paragraph A not specifically provided for in
    paragraphs D, E and F or excluded by paragraphs H and J.  Examples of such
    subject matter are means for driving a tool combined with (1) a vehicle
    support for the drive, (2) work engaging means supporting the drive or (3)
    means to adjust the position of the axis of tool advance.  This class also
    includes subcombinations of impacting device structure which are not
    elsewhere classifiable such as a specific means to transmit an impact from
    a hammer head to a tool.

    (1)     Note.  A motor vehicle having a power take-off of general utility,
    but which may be described as for the purpose of driving a tool is
    classifiable in Class 180, Motor Vehicles, particularly subclasses 53.1+.
    Therefor, to be included under (1) in G above, the means for driving a tool
    must include a structural feature of relationship which is peculiar to tool
    driving.

    H.      This class is not intended to provide original classification for a
    claim having any specific recitation of (1) the work contacting portion of
    the tool, (2) plural, cooperating tools (e.g., angularly related tools),
    (3) and underlying work support opposed to the tool, or (4) any other
    specifically recited feature pointing to classification in a particular
    tool art and not provided for in this definition.  An exception to (1) is
    that the recitation of the work contacting portion of the tool as being
    broadly provided with a cleansing fluid passage or port is not considered
    to define the work contacting portion of the tool with sufficient
    specificity to preclude classification from Class 173.

    J.      Not all classes have been cleared of art such as defined herein.
    This class, therefore has only such art as is cleared from other classes.
    Section III of the class definition indicates those classes which have
    bodies of art in conflict with the definitions of this class.

    II.     DEFINITION OF TERMS

    ADVANCE

    The forward movement of the tool into or along the work.  Such movement is
    in addition to the drive movement (i.e., cyclic forward and backward or
    lateral motion of the tool).  Included under this definition as apparatus
    functioning under the broad meaning of advance are means for causing,
    controlling, or selectively preventing the forward movement of the tool
    into or along the work.

    CLEANSING

    The act of removing matter resulting from the operation of the tool on the
    work.

    CLEANSING FLUID

    A fluid which is adapted to perform a cleansing function upon work.  Such a
    fluid may be solely described as performing some other function, such as
    cooling the work, so long as it is directed in such a manner as to
    inherently cleanse the work.

    DRIVE

    The motion of a tool which performs a function upon work.  Impact is
    included under the definition of this term.  Also, any means to cause the
    drive motion of a tool such as a motor, cooperating gearing or mechanical
    movement elements, or an impacting device.

    HAMMER HEAD

    The striking element of an impacting device.

    IMPACTING DEVICE

    A means including a mass of material (i.e., hammer head) which is
    specifically intended to deliver a blow to a tool.  The mass of material
    need not necessarily strike the tool directly, but may deliver the blow
    through an intervening element (e.g., anvil).

    IMPACTING

    A type of drive function which includes striking a mass of material (e.g.,
    tool) with another mass of material (e.g., hammer head).

    MANIPULATING

    Moving the tool drive from one place to another to perform a function upon
    work.  This movement is separate from or in addition to the advance
    movement of the tool.

    MANIPULATING HANDLE

    A means specifically intended to be grasped by the hand or hands of an
    operator to move the tool drive, of which it forms a part, to different
    positions with respect to the work, and to be continually grasped by the
    operator as the tool advances in performing a function upon work.

    MOTIVE FLUID

    A fluid used to drive a motor, and including fluid taken from a stream
    supplying a motor, or from a stream exhausting from a motor.  Fluid fuel
    for or fluid exhaust from a combustion motor is included under this
    definition.

    TOOL

    A work contacting element which functions to effect some physical
    alteration in the work, such as chipping or boring, but also includes other
    elements which are driven in the same manner as a tool such as a nail or
    post.

    WORK

    The object or mass of material which is contacted by the tool to be
    physically altered thereby.

    III.    RELATIONSHIP TO SPECIFIC TOOL CLASSES

    The claiming of specific work contacting tool structure in combination with
    subject matter of this class will cause original classification of the
    patent in the appropriate specific tool class, as will the claiming of
    plural, angularly related cooperating work contacting elements such as
    angularly related tools or a tool combined with an opposing support for the
    work.  However, many of the specific tool classes have not been cleared as
    to original classification in accordance with this line, nor has complete
    cross-reference of subject matter been made.  The classes which should be
    closely investigated when making a search for the subject matter provided
    for under this definition are as follows:

    Class 15,       Brushing, Scrubbing, and General
            Cleaning

    Class 30,       Cutlery

    Class 56,       Harvesters

    Class 81,       Tools

    Class 82,       Turning

    Class 83,       Cutting

    Class 125,      Stone Working

    Class 142,      Wood Turning

    Class 144,      Woodworking

    Class 172,      Earth Working

    Class 234,      Selective Cutting (e.g.,Punching)

    Class 408,      Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially
            Moving Tool

    Class 433,      Dentistry

    Class 451,      Abrading

    Class 470,      Threaded, Headed Fastener, or                   Washer
    Making:  Process and Appara-            tus

    IV.     MISCELLANEOUS SEARCH NOTES

    These notes include a statement of the line with classes having closely
    related art.

    Class 12,       Boot and Shoe Making, appropriate subclass for machines and
    processes of operating machines for making boots and shoes.

    Class 15,       Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, appropriate
    subclass for a cleaning device, and particularly subclasses 3+ for cleaning
    machines, including in subclasses 300.1+ such machines with air blast
    and/or suction.

    Class 16,       Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 110+ for handles,
    including handles described as for the purpose of manipulating tool drives,
    and including handles having vibration dampening or absorbing means. If the
    handle is claimed in combination with a mere named tool drive,
    classification will be in Class 173 only if features relating to control of
    or energy supply for the tool drive are claimed.

    Class 29,       Metal Working, appropriate subclass for metal working
    apparatus, and processes of operating same, and particularly subclasses
    700+ for assembling and disassembling apparatus.  See subclasses 243.53+
    for riveting apparatus not elsewhere classified.

    Class 30,       Cutlery, appropriate subclass for hand operated cutting
    tools, or hand manipulated, power operated cutting tools, and particularly
    subclasses 272.1+ for cutting tools having blade moving means.

    Class 37,       Excavating, appropriate subclass for excavating devices
    having drive means, and including vehicles having driven excavating
    elements.

    Class 56,       Harvesters, appropriate subclass for driven harvesting
    devices, and generally comprising such devices which are advanced by a land
    vehicle as they operate.

    Class 60,       Power Plants, appropriate subclasses for motors which may
    include a named type of tool as a load for the motor, and also for plural
    motors of diverse types. If one motor is described as a tool drive means
    and another as tool advance means, the patent will be classified in Class
    173.

    Class 72,       Metal Deforming, subclasses 429+ for apparatus for driving
    a metal deforming tool.

    Class 74,       Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclass for a
    mechanical motion transmitting means, and including such means even though
    separate elements thereof are described as operating the drive, and causing
    or controlling the advance of a tool, such means merely being considered
    equivalent to mechanical movements or transmissions involving plural power
    paths.  Class 74 also includes patents claiming a named type of motor, or
    plural named motors for imparting motion to a mechanical movement or
    transmission.

    Class 81,       Tools, appropriate subclass for a drive device for an
    assembling tool, and particularly subclasses 463+ for an assembling tool
    with impact delivering means and subclasses 54+ for a machine wrench.

    Class 82,       Turning, appropriate subclass for drive means and advance
    causing or controlling means used in a metal turning operation.

    Class 83,       Cutting, appropriate subclass for a drive means or advance
    causing or controlling means used in a cutting operation.

    Class 91,       Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclass for
    structure of a motor, or plural motors of that class.  Class 91 includes a
    motor having a named type of tool as a load, however, a motor having impact
    device features as defined in section "D" of this definition a motor
    structure having a supplement specific passage to convey cleansing fluid to
    a tool, a motor described as for a tool drive and having specific structure
    of a manipulating handle, or plural motors, even though merely described as
    separately having feed and drive loads are classified in Class 173.

    Class 92,       Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclass for a
    device of that class for driving a tool. The line between Class 92 and
    Class 173 is the same as the line between Class 91 and Class 173.

    Class 104,      Railways, subclasses 13+ for a railway track laying tamping
    tool, and subclass 17.1 for railway track laying spike drivers.

    Class 111,      Planting, appropriate subclass for driven planting devices,
    and generally comprising such devices which are advanced by a land vehicle
    as they operate.

    Class 123,      Internal-Combustion Engines, appropriate subclass for a
    motor of that type, even though a named type of tool is included as a load.
     The line between Class 123 and Class 173 is generally the same as  between
    Class 91 and Class 173.

    Class 125,      Stone Working, appropriate subclass for a drive means or
    advance causing or controlling means used in a stone working operation.

    Class 142,      Wood Turning, appropriate subclass, for a drive means or
    advance causing or controlling means used in a wood turning operation.

    Class 144,      Woodworking, for a drive means or advance causing or
    controlling means used in a woodworking operation.

    Class 172,      Earth Working, appropriate subclass and particularly
    subclasses 35+ for a drive device for an earth working tool.   Generally,
    such devices are advanced by a land vehicle as they operate.  A described
    use as a drive for an agricultural earth working tool will cause
    classification in Class 172.

    Class 175,      Boring or Penetrating the Earth, appropriate subclass for a
    tool drive means, advance causing or controlling means, impacting device or
    work cleansing means which is combined with specific structure of the work
    contacting portion of a tool, a fluid handling head adapted to seal in a
    bore entrance, or a bore wall engaging guide or packing device on the tool
    shaft, and subclasses 293+ for a below ground hammer or impact means,
    either combined with a specific earth boring tool or comprising a means
    forming a lost motion connection in a shaft or cable string, such means
    comprising relatively movable members which are provided with faces that
    impart each other to generate a "jar" which is transmitted by the rod or
    cable to a means connected thereto.

    Class 180,      Motor Vehicles, appropriate subclass for a vehicle means
    which may be described as supporting a tool drive means, and particularly
    subclasses 53.1+ for a motor vehicle having a power take-off which may be
    described as for operating a tool driving or advancing means.  If the power
    take-off does not include a structural feature or relationship that is more
    than of general utility, classification will be in Class 180.

    Class 181,      Acoustics, subclass 230 for mufflers, per se, specifically
    adapted to pneumatic type motors.

    Class 227,      Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, appropriate subclasses
    for a driver combined with a magazine for members, e.g., nails, clenching
    anvil or work support which would preclude classification in Class 173.

    Class 241,      Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclass for a drive means combined with a comminuting or disintegrating
    means.

    Class 267,      Spring Devices, subclass 137, for a tool-movement-dampening
    spring device.

    Class 299,      Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material,
    appropriate subclass and particularly subclasses 29+ for a machine having a
    specific tool described as for disintegrating hard material in situ.  In
    general, claiming of specific tool structure is necessary to cause
    classification of a machine in Class 299, with the exception that Class 299
    includes some large tunnel forming machines with material handling features
    and chain cutter driving, advancing and manipulating machines which do not
    necessarily recite specific tool structure.

    Class 310,      Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, appropriate
    subclass for motor of that class, including such motors having a named type
    of tool as a load, and particularly subclass 50 for a dynamo-electric motor
    for a portable hand tool.

    Class 318,      Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclass
    for plural motors including a named type of tool as a load, and
    particularly subclass 39 for plural, diverse, or diversely controlled
    electric motors, in which such motors comprise work and feed motors.

    Class 404,      Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 133.05+
    for tamping means and see notes thereunder.

    Class 408,      Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, for (1) a
    tool-drive means combined with work-recognizing structure for use in the
    operation of that class (2) a tool-drive means combined with a specific
    tool of that class type, or (3) tool-drive means combined with significant
    "machine frame" structure generally limiting the drive to operation in a
    machine of that class.  "Machine frame" structure is in addition, to the
    housing required to support the drive structure.  Such "machine frame"
    structure may be significantly recited by physical limitations of the
    structure of by a named recitation of two or more parts of the structure
    including the interrelationship of the parts.

    Class 409,      Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, appropriate subclasses
    for a drive means or advance causing means used in a gear cutting, milling,
    or planing operation.

    Class 415,      Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, appropriate subclass
    for a motor of that type for operating a tool, and particularly subclass
    904, for a tool drive turbine.

    Class 418,      Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, for rotary expansible
    chamber devices, per se, and see the Note to Class 91 above for a statement
    of the line between this class (173) and Class 91, the line between Classes
    91 and 418 being the same.

    Class 433,      Dentistry, subclasses 103+ for power-driven dental tools,
    especially subclasses 118+ for power operated plugging instruments.

    Class 451,      Abrading, subclasses 64+ for a machine for performing an
    abrading function, which machine also includes a drive means or an advance
    causing or controlling means which is used in the abrading operation.

    Class 470,      Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for processes of operating machines for
    making articles of the class.

    V.      INDEX TO CLASSES NOTED IN THE CLASS DEFINITION AND SUBCLASS
    DEFINITIONS OF THIS CLASS

    After each class listed below, the notation "See ----" refers to the
    sections of the class definition, and the subclasses of Class 173 in which
    there are references to the class listed.

    7,      Compound Tools.  See subclass 90.

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making.  See section IV.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning.  See sections III and
    IV, and subclass 57.

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware.  See section IV, and subclasses 162 and 171.

    29,     Metal Working.  See section IV.

    30,     Cutlery.  See sections III and IV.

    37,     Excavating.  See section IV.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), see subclass 28.

    56,     Harvesters.  See sections III and IV, and subclass 24.

    60,     Power Plants.  See section IV, and subclass 116.

    72,     Metal Deforming.  See sections III and IV, and subclasses 53, 90,
    94, and 128.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism.  See section IV, and subclasses 49,
    90, 122, 123, 141, 144, 145, and 165.

    81,     Tools.  See sections III and IV, and subclasses 12, 90, 93, and 164.

    82,     Turning.  See sections III and IV.

    83,     Cutting.  See sections III and IV, and subclasses 2, 11, 19, and 57.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type.  See section IV, and subclasses
    125 and 134.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices.  See section IV, and subclasses 125,
    127 and 134.

    104,    Railways.  See section IV, and subclass 90.

    111,    Planting.  See section IV.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines.  See section IV, and subclasses 125
    and 134.

    125,    Stone Working.  See sections III and IV.

    142,    Wood Turning.  See sections III and IV, and subclass 141.

    144,    Woodworking.  See sections III and IV, and subclass 141.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects.  See subclass 24.

    172,    Earth Working.  See sections III and IV, and subclasses 2 and 24.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth.  See section IV, and subclasses 3,
    57, 90, 145, and 162.

    180,    Motor Vehicles.  See sections I and IV, and subclasses 22 and 25.

    188,    Brakes, subclass 67 for pip or rod braking means utilized in the
    advancing thereof.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control.  See subclass 93.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length.  See subclass 149.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus. See sections III and IV, and
    subclass 90.

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching). See section III.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration.  See section IV.

    248,    Supports.  See subclass 31.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force.  See
    subclasses 81, 90, 149, and 151.

    267,    Spring Devices.  See section IV.

    279,    Chucks or Sockets.  See subclass 132.

    280,    Land Vehicles.  See subclasses 22 and 23.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material.  See section IV
    and subclasses 24, 39, 57, and 147.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure.  See section IV, and
    subclass 117.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems. See section IV, and subclass 7.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical.  See subclass 20.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus. See section IV and subclass
    90.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering.  See subclass 128.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, see sections III
    and IV, and subclasses 4, 5, 19, 141, and 145.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing. See sections III and IV, and
    subclass 57.

    414,    Material or Article Handling.  See subclasses 722+ and 743.

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps. See section IV.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, for rotary expansible chamber
    type motors and see the reference to Class 91 above for a statement of the
    line between this class (173) and Class 91,  the line between Classes 173
    and 418 being the same.

    433,    Dentistry.  See sections III and IV.

    451,    Abrading.  See sections III and IV, and subclass 197.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts. See subclasses 93.5 and 165.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and Apparatus
    See sections III and IV.


CLS 173/1
TXT Methods under the class definition for operating tool driving or impacting
    devices to perform a function which is not limited by a manipulative step
    to a specific tool art.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is not intended to form a complete search for
    all described processes of operating tool driving or impacting devices as
    provided for under the class definition.

            Therefore, the search for process claims falling herein should be
    completed in the appropriate apparatus subclass.


CLS 173/2
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising (1) means for sensing a
    condition or change of condition, which condition or change of condition
    may or may not occur, (2) a separate control means and (3) a separate power
    operated means to initiate, modify, or terminate the functioning of the
    apparatus, said three means being so related that the sensing means
    controls operation of the control means and the control means controls
    operation of the power means, all without the intervention of a human
    operator.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus wherein the driven tool constitutes the sensing
    means and controls the control means for the power operated means is
    included under this definition only if the control means moves relative to
    the driven tool.  An apparatus having structure integral with or fixed to
    the tool as the sole means to control the operating means is not considered
    to be automatic, and is classified on other features.

    (2)     Note.  A valve having one specific area which senses the condition
    of a fluid, and a completely different area which controls the flow of the
    same or a different fluid to operate as power means is included under this
    definition as separate sensing and control means. A valve which senses and
    controls with the same surface (i.e., a check valve), is not included and
    is classified on other features.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13+,    for a drive controlled by relative axial movement of a tool.

    18,     for drive controlled by relative movement of advance causing or
    controlling means or manipulating handle.

    58,     for work cleansing controlled by relative movement between the
    drive and tool, advance causing or controlling means or manipulating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 72+ for a cutting device having means to
    monitor a control operation.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 2+ for an earth working device having
    automatic power control.


CLS 173/3
TXT Apparatus under subclass 2 in which the sensing means senses the condition
    of (1) a specific modification of the tool drive which is for the purpose
    of removing unwanted material from the work face being operated on by the
    tool or (2) structure combined with the tool drive which functions to
    remove unwanted material from the work face being operated upon by the tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 38 for automatic control
    of an earth boring means in response to drilling fluid circulation.


CLS 173/4
TXT Apparatus under subclass 2 in which the sensed condition of operation
    controls a power operated means to initiate, modify, or terminate the
    operation of the means to positively cause or progressively control the
    forward movement of the tool into or along the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 5+ and
    8+ for a boring or drilling machine having automatic or tool position
    control of tool movement.


CLS 173/5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 4 in which the sensing means senses a condition of
    (1) force applied to the tool to drive the tool about an axis or (2) rate
    of motion of the drive means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 6 and 8+
    for a drilling machine having torque or penetration resistance responsive
    control of a feed mechanism.


CLS 173/6
TXT Apparatus under subclass 5 in which the sensing means includes a means to
    also sense the condition of the means which causes or controls forward
    movement of the tool.


CLS 173/7
TXT Apparatus under subclass 5 in which means driving the tool comprises a
    motor, and the sensing means senses a condition of the motor power material
    or electric current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 39 for electrical work
    and feed motors which are interrelated.


CLS 173/8
TXT Apparatus under subclass 7 in which the drive motor power material
    comprises a fluid which operates a fluid motor (e.g., expansible chamber
    type motor or turbine).

    (1)     Note.  Included under this definition are those motors which derive
    power solely from the pressure or flow of a fluid stream.  An internal
    combustion engine, for example, which may utilize a fluid fuel, but
    requires a chemical reaction to operate, is excluded from this definition.


CLS 173/9
TXT Apparatus under subclass 5 in which the means which causes or controls
    forward movement of the tool comprises a motor operated by fluid.

    (1)     Note.  Included under this definition are those motors which derive
    power solely from the pressure or flow of a fluid stream.  An internal
    combustion engine, for example, which may utilize a fluid fuel, but
    requires a chemical reaction to operate, is excluded from this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for automatic control of tool advance causing or controlling means
    in response to motive fluid pressure or current sensed torque or speed
    condition of a drive.


CLS 173/10
TXT Apparatus under subclass 4 in which the sensing means senses the distance
    of cyclic to and fro motion of a (1) hammer head or (2) tool.


CLS 173/11
TXT Apparatus under subclass 2 in which the power means comprises a drive means
    and the sensing means senses a condition of a means to positively cause or
    progressively control the forward movement of the tool into or along the
    work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 76 for cutting means combined with means to
    monitor and control operation, including means to compensate tool speed for
    work-feed variations.


CLS 173/13
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a tool drive means and a
    tool or means to receive or retain a tool for actuation by the drive means,
    the tool or tool receiving or retaining means being adapted to move
    relative to the drive in a direction parallel to the axis of tool advance,
    said relative movement being adapted to initiate, modify, or terminate the
    operation of the tool drive means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for automatic control of power operated means.

    93.5+,  for a rotary tool drive in which torsional load causes relative
    movement between a drive element and a tool to cause delivery of torsional
    impact.


CLS 173/14
TXT Apparatus under subclass 13 in which the relative movement starts the
    operation of the tool drive by causing a reciprocating element of the tool
    drive to be mechanically coupled to and directly operated by the pulsation
    or reciprocation of a confined mass of fluid.


CLS 173/15
TXT Apparatus under subclass 13 in which the tool is driven by a motor and the
    relative movement initiates, modifies or terminates the operation of the
    tool drive motor.


CLS 173/16
TXT Apparatus under subclass 15 in which the operation of the drive motor is
    initiated, modified, or terminated by a change in internal relationship of
    the parts of the motor.


CLS 173/17
TXT Apparatus under subclass 16 in which the tool drive motor is of the
    cyclically operable, expansible chamber type and the path of reciprocatory
    movement of a motor piston is altered relative to a port which supplies
    fluid to a working chamber of the motor or a fluid operated distributor
    motor.


CLS 173/18
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a tool drive means and a
    means to positively cause or progressively control the forward movement of
    the tool or a means specifically adapted to be engaged by the hand of the
    operator to manipulate the drive, and one of the latter means is adapted to
    move relative to the drive means to operate a means to initiate, modify, or
    terminate the operation of the tool drive means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for automatic control of power operated means.

    13+,    for drive controlled by relative axial movement of tool.

    58,     for work cleansing controlled by relative movement between drive
    and tool, advance causing or controlling means or manipulating handle.


CLS 173/19
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a means to positively cause
    or progressively control the forward movement of the tool into or along the
    work, and which is adapted to reverse the movement of the tool upon the
    tool reaching a predetermined position without the intervention of a human
    attendant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 69 for cutting means combined with stopping means
    effective on completion of predetermined number of tool cycles.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 5+ for
    boring and drilling combined stopping means effective on completion of
    predetermined number of tool cycles;  subclasses 10+ for automatic or tool
    position control of tool movement; subclass 17 for drive structure of that
    class to cyclically reciprocate the tool.


CLS 173/20
TXT Apparatus under the class definition combined with a means to indicate or
    signal a condition or the occurrence of a condition to a human attendant.

    (1)     Note.  Means which signal or indicate are dials, graduations,
    horns, bells, etc., but a means to form a mere stop or single fixed
    reference point are not included under this definition and are classified
    on other features.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+ for electrical
    automatic condition responsive indicating systems.


CLS 173/21
TXT Apparatus under subclass 20 in which the means signals or indicates a
    position or condition of the forward movement of the tool into or along the
    work.


CLS 173/24
TXT Apparatus under subclass 22 in which the travel of the vehicle is utilized
    to positively cause forward movement of the tool into or along the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, appropriate subclass for a harvesting device, and
    generally including a harvesting device which is advanced by a vehicle
    while operating.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, appropriate subclass for an
    unearthing device which is generally advanced by a vehicle while operating.

    172,    Earth Working, appropriate subclass, and particularly subclasses
    35+ for a driven earth working tool, generally advanced by a vehicle while
    operating.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 29+
    for a machine for disintegrating hard material in situ and which is
    generally carried on a vehicle.


CLS 173/25
TXT Apparatus under subclass 22 in which the means to power the transporting
    movement of the vehicle is provided with a mechanical power take-off to
    drive the tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 53.1+ for a motor vehicle in which the
    motor acts as an external source of power.


CLS 173/26
TXT Apparatus under subclass 25 in which the means to drive the tool includes
    gear means, and elements of the gear means are adapted to move relative to
    the power take-off of the vehicle to (1) adjust the axis of tool advance or
    (2) accommodate movement of the tool into or along the work.


CLS 173/27
TXT Apparatus under subclass 22 in which the same source of energy (e.g.,
    current, pressure, fuel, etc.), motivates the power means for the vehicle
    and the tool drive.

    (1)     Note.  One of the power means may operate a pump or generator to
    supply pressure or current for the other power means.


CLS 173/28
TXT Apparatus under subclass 22 in which the supporting structure of the tool
    drive is constructed in such a manner as to adapt the tool drive to be
    moved from the position in which the tool normally works to a position
    which better facilitates transportation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 111+ for a
    mechanism or relatively movable shaft assembly, e.g., a power erected tower
    and subclass 143 for a residual building structure with a transportation
    feature.


CLS 173/29
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which means are provided to perform
    a tool drive function and a tool drive function in a different manner or a
    function other than tool driving after (1) removal of a significant portion
    of the apparatus (2) installation of additional parts or (3) substantial
    rearrangement of existing parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for a drive which is adjustable to completely change the kind of
    drive motion.


CLS 173/30
TXT Apparatus under the class definition combined with structure particularly
    adapted to be engaged by some portion of the body of a human, with the
    exception of the hands.


CLS 173/31
TXT Apparatus under the class definition combined with the structure of means
    other than the tool, which is specifically adapted to engage the material
    upon which the work is being performed, said structure bearing the weight
    of the tool drive or resisting the reactive force of the means causing
    forward movement of the tool while the tool drive is operative.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22+,    for a work engaging vehicle support of a tool drive.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 637+ for a machinery support.


CLS 173/32
TXT Apparatus under subclass 31 in which the work engaging means comprises a
    structure adapted to positively engage the material being worked at a point
    in the face being worked (e.g., the face perpendicular to the axis of tool
    advance), in such a manner as to resist reactionary movement of the means
    causing forward movement of the tool into the work.


CLS 173/33
TXT Apparatus under subclass 32 in which the axis of tool advance forms
    substantially the geometric center of points of engagement of the means
    which positively engages the work.


CLS 173/34
TXT Apparatus under subclass 31 in which the material being worked is engaged
    by the structure at opposed points, such as opposed positions on the walls
    of a shaft or tunnel.


CLS 173/35
TXT Apparatus under subclass 34 in which the drive is adapted to operate a tool
    to advance along an axis substantially perpendicular to a line extending
    between the opposed points of engagement.


CLS 173/36
TXT Apparatus under subclass 31 in which the structure engages the material
    being worked at a point opposite to the working point, generally being the
    opposed wall of a shaft or tunnel.


CLS 173/37
TXT Apparatus under subclass 31 in which the work engaging structure includes
    plural work engaging elements, and an element is adapted to be adjusted
    relative to the tool drive means and relative to another work engaging
    element.


CLS 173/38
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means to cause forward movement
    of the tool into or along the work comprising a lever, one end of which is
    mounted to pivot about a fixed or shifting point and the opposite end being
    connected to the tool or tool drive, the forward movement of the tool being
    substantially rectilinearly controlled by (1) shifting the pivot point or
    (2) directly guiding the tool or tool drive.


CLS 173/39
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the tool drive means is
    adjustably connected to a substantially fixed structure (e.g., support),
    and means are provided to hold the tool drive means in different positions
    relative to the fixed structure to provide plural selective positions of
    the axis along which the driven tool moves forward into the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 29+
    for a hard material disintegrating machine having means to adjustably
    manipulate a chain cutter or the like.


CLS 173/40
TXT Apparatus under subclass 39 in which the tool drive includes a source of
    power and a driven gearing element, and said gearing element being shifted
    bodily relative to the source of power in adjusting the axis along which
    the tool moves forward.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for a vehicle support for a drive in which the vehicle motor
    operates the drive, and means are provided whereby drive gearing may be
    displaced relative to the vehicle motor.


CLS 173/41
TXT Apparatus under subclass 40 in which the tool drive includes plural driven
    gearing elements, and the gearing elements being relatively bodily shifted
    and each bodily shifted relative to the source of power in adjusting the
    axis along which the tool moves forward.


CLS 173/42
TXT Apparatus under subclass 39 in which plural separate adjustments are
    provided between the tool drive and fixed structure.


CLS 173/44
TXT Apparatus under subclass 39 in which a motor or mechanism is provided to
    move the tool drive to relatively adjusted position.


CLS 173/45
TXT Apparatus under the class definition combined with means such as a template
    or element of predetermined length to locate an axis along which the driven
    tool will move forward into the work relate to a position in which the
    driven tool previously moved forward into the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20+,    for a tool drive means combined with signaling or indicating means.


CLS 173/46
TXT Apparatus under the class definition combined with apparatus which is not
    included under the class definition and is not merely ancillary to the
    driving means, a means for advancing the tool, a tool drive manipulating
    means, or a work cleansing means.


CLS 173/47
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including an adjustable drive means so
    constructed that the basic kind of motion imparted to the tool may be
    changed by manipulating a drive part (e.g., shifting gears in a
    transmission).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     for a drive means changeable from one basic drive motion to another
    which requires disassembly or assembly of parts.


CLS 173/48
TXT Apparatus under subclass 47 in which the drive means is adjustable to or
    from means to deliver an impact to a tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93.5+,  for a tool drive which rotates a tool under one torsional load
    condition and which rotary drive slips or yields under another torsional
    load condition to cause torsional impact to be delivered to the tool.


CLS 173/49
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the tool drive means includes
    a mass which is driven about an axis, the axis of rotation being eccentric
    relative to the center of weight of the mass, said mass causing movement of
    an element which supports said axis of rotation when the center of weight
    of the mass reaches a certain position relative to the axis of rotation of
    the mass to drive the tool.

    (1)     Note.  The element which supports the axis of rotation of the mass
    generally (1) is guided against movement in other than line movement, and
    moves when the center of weight of the mass substantially corresponds with
    the guided line, or (2) supports a pair of masses rotating in opposite
    directions, and said element moves when the combined centers of weight of
    the masses are unbalanced.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 61 for a mechanical movement
    including an unbalanced weight.


CLS 173/50
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a motor or drive element
    connected to plural power paths to simultaneously drive plural tools.

    (1)     Note.  If the tools cooperate as a tool "gang" to perform a
    function requiring interaction upon the work, a claimed relative position
    of the tools is considered to define specific work engaging tool structure,
    and classification will be in the appropriate art class.


CLS 173/51
TXT Apparatus under subclass 50 in which at least two of the power paths
    include means to impart a rectilinear to and fro movement to a tool or the
    hammer head or an impact delivering device.


CLS 173/52
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising plural separately operable
    tool drive means which are supported by a common rigid structure combined
    with a single advance causing or controlling means or manipulating means
    for the rigid structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50+,    for power paths to plural tools from single drive, which may
    include a single advance causing or controlling or manipulating structure.


CLS 173/53
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which a hammer head or tool
    includes a rod or rod like structure rigidly connected thereto, and the
    drive means includes means to grasp said rod or rod like structure, and a
    means to reciprocate the grasp means, said grasp means permitting the
    hammer head or tool to move forward relative to the reciprocatory path of
    the grasp means by (1) cyclic release by the rod or rod like means by the
    grasp means or (2) relative slippage between the grasp means and rod or rod
    like means as the work progresses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 429+ for a tool driving means in a
    metal shaping machine, especially subclasses 431+ for a yieldable
    connection and subclasses 435+ for a "drop-hammer".


CLS 173/54
TXT Apparatus under subclass 53 in which during each cycle of reciprocation the
    grasp means engages a stationary structure to cause the grasp means to
    release or slip the rod or rod like means to permit the hammer head or tool
    to move forward as the work progresses.


CLS 173/55
TXT Apparatus under subclass 54 in which cyclic engagement of the grasp means
    with the stationary structure positively releases the grasp means from the
    rod or rod like structure.


CLS 173/56
TXT Apparatus under subclass 53 in which the grasp means, or means causing
    reciprocatory movement thereof, simultaneously causes the rod or rod like
    means to rotate or oscillate during each cycle of reciprocation of the
    grasp means.


CLS 173/58
TXT Apparatus under subclass 57 in which the operation of work cleansing is
    initiated, modified, or terminated by relative movement between the tool
    drive and (1) the tool, (2) the means to positively cause or progressively
    control the forward movement of the tool or  (3) a means specifically
    adapted to be engaged by the hand of the operator to manipulate the drive.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for drive controlled by relative movement of advance causing or
    controlling means or manipulating handle.


CLS 173/59
TXT Apparatus under subclass 57 in which the cleansing is performed by fluid
    derived from a motive fluid stream supplied to or exhausted from a drive
    motor or an advance causing or controlling motor.

    (1)     Note.  The motive fluid supply to or fluid exhaust from any type
    motor is included under this definition, including fluid exhaust from an
    internal combustion motor, which may utilize solid fuel for an energy
    supply, but exhausts a fluid.


CLS 173/60
TXT Apparatus under subclass 59 in which the motive fluid stream does not
    contact the work face, but is provided with means to induce flow of an
    ambient fluid (e.g., a venturi) to cause the ambient fluid to circulate
    over and cleanse the work face.


CLS 173/61
TXT Apparatus under subclass 59 in which a means is provided to utilize a fluid
    from a nonmotor source for cleansing, as well as a fluid derived from the
    supply or exhaust of the motor.


CLS 173/62
TXT Apparatus under subclass 61 in which means are provided to selectively
    control the supply of both fluids, whereby either one of the fluids may be
    separately admitted to the work face.


CLS 173/63
TXT Apparatus under subclass 61 in which means are provided to derive motive
    fluid to be utilized for cleansing from the stream which supplies the
    motor, before the fluid passes into a motor chamber.


CLS 173/64
TXT Apparatus under subclass 59 including means which are provided to derive
    motor fluid to be utilized for cleansing from the stream which supplies the
    motor, before the fluid passes into a motor chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     for the use of motive fluid for cleansing which bypasses a motor
    chamber, in which cleansing fluid from an additional source is also
    utilized.


CLS 173/65
TXT Apparatus under subclass 64 having the means which controls the rate of
    flow of motive fluid to the motor chamber said means being provided with
    additional structure to control the supply of motive fluid which is to be
    utilized for cleansing.


CLS 173/66
TXT Apparatus under subclass 59 in which the drive motor comprises a cyclically
    operable reciprocating type expansible chamber fluid motor, and a specific
    modification of the motor is provided whereby the motor may be controlled
    to stop operation and simultaneous continuously direct the flow of the
    motive fluid stream through one working chamber of the motor for direction
    upon the work to perform a cleansing function.


CLS 173/67
TXT Apparatus under subclass 66 in which the cyclically operable motor includes
    a relatively movable motive fluid distributor, and means are provided to
    stop relative movement of the distributor during the continuous flow of
    motive fluid through one working chamber.


CLS 173/68
TXT Apparatus under subclass 67 in which the motor is provided with a throttle
    valve controlling the inlet of motive fluid, and the throttle valve is
    adapted either by direct engagement or through a linkage to stop relative
    movement of the distributor for the purpose of maintaining cleansing fluid
    supply through one working chamber.


CLS 173/69
TXT Apparatus under subclass 67 in which the motor is provided with a throttle
    valve to control the exhaust of motive fluid from the motor, and actuation
    of said valve to control exhaust also functions to stop the distributor and
    maintain cleansing fluid supply through one working chamber.


CLS 173/70
TXT Apparatus under subclass 67 in which a mechanical means is provided to stop
    relative movement of the distributor while cleansing fluid is continuously
    supplied through one working chamber.


CLS 173/71
TXT Apparatus under subclass 59 in which means are provided for the purpose of
    preventing unwanted material (such as material removed from the work face)
    from entering the motor through a cleansing fluid passage.


CLS 173/72
TXT Apparatus under subclass 59 in which the motive fluid for cleansing is
    exhausted from a motor which causes or controls advance.


CLS 173/73
TXT Apparatus under subclass 59 having means to direct the motive fluid into a
    passage in a tool or tool shaft, from which passage the fluid is directed
    upon the work face.


CLS 173/74
TXT Apparatus under subclass 57 in which means are provided to selectively or
    simultaneously utilize fluids from separate supplies for cleansing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for motive fluid caused flow of another fluid to cleanse the work.

    61+,    for motive fluid cleansing in which fluid from an additional source
    is also provided for the purpose of cleansing.


CLS 173/75
TXT Apparatus under subclass 57 in which the tool drive means pumps or
    mechanically drives a pump means to pressurize or cause circulating of a
    fluid material which performs a cleansing function.


CLS 173/76
TXT Apparatus under subclass 75 in which the pump means to pressurize or cause
    circulation of the fluid material comprises the hammer head or impact
    transmitting anvil of an impacting device.


CLS 173/77
TXT Apparatus under subclass 57 in which the fluid material for cleansing is
    controlled by an element which also controls the drive means or advance
    causing or controlling means.


CLS 173/78
TXT Apparatus under subclass 57 in which the mass of material which comprises
    the hammer head of an impacting device is provided with a passage which is
    specifically described as for the purpose of conveying fluid cleansing
    material.


CLS 173/79
TXT Apparatus under subclass 57 in which structure necessary to the operation
    of a tool drive motor, or advance causing or controlling motor is provided
    with a passage which is specifically described as for the purpose of
    conveying fluid cleansing material.


CLS 173/80
TXT Apparatus under subclass 57 in which a mass of material which is adapted to
    transmit an impact from a hammer head to a tool is provided with a specific
    passage which is described as for the purpose of conveying fluid cleansing
    material.


CLS 173/81
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising the combination of means to
    cause reciprocation of a hammer head or tool by a cable, or similar
    flexible element, and a means to control the cable for the purpose of
    controlling the forward movement of the path of reciprocatory movement of
    the hammer head or tool.

    (1)     Note.  The means to reciprocate and cause forward movement of the
    hammer head or tool may comprise a common element such as a cable drum
    which oscillates to reciprocate the hammer head or tool, while
    progressively rotating to control the forward movement of the hammer head
    or tool.

    (2)     Note.  These devices are commonly known as "Cable Tool Rigs", in
    the well drilling and pile driving arts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for a hammer or tool shaft reciprocated by a gripping means which
    releases or yields to permit advance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 264+ for apparatus for hauling or hoisting a load including a
    driven device which contacts and pulls on a cable.


CLS 173/82
TXT Apparatus under subclass 81 in which the means to reciprocate the hammer
    head or tool cyclically actuates a means to control forward movement of the
    hammer head or tool so that the advance is only permitted at a certain
    point in each cycle of reciprocation.


CLS 173/83
TXT Apparatus under subclass 81 in which the means to control forward movement
    of the hammer head or tool is bodily reciprocated by a separate means which
    causes the reciprocation of the hammer head or tool.


CLS 173/84
TXT Apparatus under subclass 81 in which means are provided to cyclically
    release the driving connection between the cable, or similar flexible
    element, and the hammer head or tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for a hammer or tool shaft reciprocated by gripping means which
    release or yield to permit advance, and in which contact with a fixed
    structure moves the grips out of shaft engagement.


CLS 173/85
TXT Apparatus under subclass 81 including at least two drums which receive
    plural turns of cable.

    (1)     Note.  For inclusion under this definition, at least one of the
    drums must be claimed as part of a combination to reciprocate and control
    forward movement, while the other drum may be completely independent of the
    combination.


CLS 173/86
TXT Apparatus under subclass 81 in which a structure is provided to support the
    cable or similar flexible element against gravity at a relatively elevated
    point between the means causing the cable or similar flexible element to
    reciprocate, and the hammer head or tool.


CLS 173/87
TXT Apparatus under subclass 86 in which the means causing the cable or similar
    flexible element to reciprocate comprises a drum receiving plural turns of
    the cable, the drum being oscillated about an axis to cause the
    reciprocation.


CLS 173/88
TXT Apparatus under subclass 86 in which the means causing the reciprocation of
    the cable comprises a cable engaging element which is oscillated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87,     for an oscillating cable drum which causes reciprocation of a cable
    operated hammer or tool.


CLS 173/89
TXT Apparatus under subclass 88 in which the drive to the oscillating cable
    engaging element is cyclically disconnected to permit the hammer head or
    tool to substantially freely drop under the sole influence of gravity.


CLS 173/90
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a mass of material (i.e.,
    hammer head) which is specifically intended to deliver a blow to a tool.

    (1)     Note.  Included under this definition are means to transmit an
    impact from a hammer to a tool (e.g., an anvil).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for a drive adjustable to completely change kind of drive, in which
    the drive is adjustable to function as an impacting device.

    51,     for power paths to plural tools from single drive, in which at
    least one of the tools is driven by an impacting device.

    53+,    for a hammer head or tool shaft reciprocated by gripping means
    which release or yield to permit advance.

    78,     for a cleansing fluid passage through the hammer head of an
    impacting device.

    81+,    for means to control advance and cyclically reciprocate a cable
    operated hammer or tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, subclasses 143+ for hand type hammers combined with
    other tools.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 435+ for a "drop-hammer" driving means
    in a forging press.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclass for a mechanical
    movement or gearing for operating a hammer head.

    81,     Tools, subclasses 463+ for tools combined with impact delivering
    means, and subclasses 20+ for hand type hammers.

    104,    Railways, subclasses 10+ for track laying tampers, and subclass
    17.1 for track laying spike drivers.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 135 for an above ground
    impacting device combined with a specifically claimed earth boring or
    penetrating tool and subclasses 293+ for hammer or impact means located
    below ground in an earth bore, either combined with a specific earth boring
    feature or comprising a means forming a lost motion connection in a shaft
    or cable string, such means comprising relatively movable members which are
    provided with faces that impact each other to generate a "jar".  See the
    class definition of Class 175, sections I, C and IV B.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, appropriate subclass for a
    driver, e.g., hammer, having a member, e.g., nail, staple, etc., engaging
    feature.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 18+ for a nail-extractor type puller combined with a hammer head
    structure.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 69+
    for a hard material disintegrating machine operating a specifically claimed
    percussive type cutter.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus subclasses 133.05+ for
    tamping means and see notes thereunder.


CLS 173/91
TXT Apparatus under subclass 90 in which the hammer is selectively operable to
    deliver impacts in axially opposed directions.


CLS 173/92
TXT Apparatus under subclass 90 including a means to mechanically clutch and
    release the tool or tool shaft during each cycle of operation of the hammer.


CLS 173/93
TXT Apparatus under subclass 90 including an anvil which is related to a hammer
    head in such a manner as to transmit a blow from a hammer to the tool to
    rotate the tool about an axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 463+ for a tool combined with torsional impact
    delivering means.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, appropriate subclass for a clutch
    which may be suddenly applied to cause a torsional impulse and particularly
    subclasses 3.21+ for a vortex-flow drive and clutch.


CLS 173/93.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93 in which driving means for the hammer head
    rotates the tool without impact under one torsional load condition and
    includes means which release or yield under a different torsional load
    condition whereby the hammer head delivers a blow to the anvil to cause
    rotary movement of the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for a tool drive which is selectively adjustable to completely
    change the type of tool drive from rotary to impact.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, subclasses 30+ for rotary displacement between a shaft and a
    driven member occurring upon imposition of excessive torsional load.


CLS 173/93.6
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93.5 in which the hammer head reciprocates on a
    line coincident with or parallel to the axis of rotation of the tool.


CLS 173/93.7
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93 in which the anvil is adapted to transmit a
    tool rotating blow from a hammer head which is limited to rectilinear
    movement along or parallel to the axis of rotation of the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109+,   for an impacting device having a hammer head delivering rectilinear
    impact to the tool in which the tool is rotated by the hammer head or drive
    for the hammer head.


CLS 173/94
TXT Apparatus under subclass 90 in which the hammer, or a portion thereof,
    travels substantially upon some portion of a path generated by a point
    moving at a constant distance about a relatively fixed axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 406 for a "rocking" tool in a metal
    shaping machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93+,    for a hammer having an anvil arranged to transmit torsional impact
    to a tool, the hammer normally being moved about an axis.


CLS 173/95
TXT Apparatus under subclass 94 in which the hammer reciprocates on a path
    coincident with or parallel to the axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93.6,   for a hammer having an anvil arranged to transmit torsional impact
    to a tool having rotary drive with torque responsive impact and in which
    the hammer reciprocates along the rotary axis.


CLS 173/96
TXT Apparatus under subclass 95 in which means are provided to selectively
    release or vary the movement in the path generated about an axis without
    stopping or changing the reciprocation in the path coincident with or
    parallel to the axis.


CLS 173/97
TXT Apparatus under subclass 95 in which the hammer is coupled to the tool to
    cause the tool to move in the path generated about an axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     for a hammer head which rotates and reciprocates, in which means
    are provided to selectively release or vary rotation, generally such
    rotation being transmitted to the driven element.


CLS 173/98
TXT Apparatus under subclass 94 including means for permitting or causing the
    hammer to detour from the path generated about an axis, this movement being
    usually for permitting the hammer to clear the tool or anvil after the
    delivery of a blow thereto.


CLS 173/99
TXT Apparatus under subclass 98 in which the hammer detours from the path
    generated about an axis by moving in a second path generated about an axis.


CLS 173/100
TXT Apparatus under subclass 94 in which the hammer cyclically reverses
    direction of movement in the path generated about an axis.


CLS 173/101
TXT Apparatus under subclass 90 in which the hammer includes plural relatively
    movable impacting heads which are adapted to alternately impart cyclic
    impacts to a tool.

    (1)     Note.  The impacting heads do not necessarily directly impact the
    tool but may impact one another or a common anvil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for power paths from a single drive to plural hammer heads or tools.

    94+,    for an impacting device having a hammer head which moves in an
    arcuate path, and including such devices having plural hammer heads.


CLS 173/102
TXT Apparatus under subclass 101 in which one impacting head imparts impact to
    a tool by striking another impacting head.


CLS 173/103
TXT Apparatus under subclass 101 in which the relatively movable impacting
    heads are arranged in such a manner that a common line passes through the
    geometric centers of both heads.


CLS 173/104
TXT Apparatus under subclass 90 including means to cause the tool to move about
    an axis.


CLS 173/105
TXT Apparatus under subclass 104 in which the tool is moved about an axis by a
    motor which does not drive the hammer head.


CLS 173/106
TXT Apparatus under subclass 105 in which the hammer head is driven by a fluid
    motor and means are provided to convey fluid which has been utilized in a
    fluid motor which causes the tool to move about an axis to the second motor
    which drives the hammer head, said fluid being further utilized as motive
    fluid in said second motor.


CLS 173/107
TXT Apparatus under subclass 105 in which the hammer head is driven by a fluid
    motor and means are provided to convey the fluid which has been utilized in
    the hammer head driving motor to a fluid motor which causes the tool to
    move about an axis, said fluid being further utilized as motive fluid in
    said second motor.


CLS 173/108
TXT Apparatus under subclass 105 in which the motor which causes the driven
    element to move about an axis is provided with a working member which
    cyclically moves to and fro.


CLS 173/109
TXT Apparatus under subclass 104 in which means are provided to transmit
    movement of the hammer head or the means driving the hammer head to the
    tool for the purpose of moving the tool about an axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93+,    for an impacting device having an anvil arranged to transmit
    torsional impact to a tool.


CLS 173/110
TXT Apparatus under subclass 109 in which the tool is moved about an axis step
    by step or cyclically reversed.


CLS 173/111
TXT Apparatus under subclass 110 in which the hammer head comprises an element
    in the drive train for moving the tool about an axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97,     for an impacting device having a hammer head that reciprocates and
    moves about an axis, and in which the movement about an axis is transmitted
    to the tool.


CLS 173/112
TXT Apparatus under subclass 90 including a means to positively cause or
    progressively control the forward movement of the hammer head in driving
    the tool into or along the work, such motion being in addition to the
    regular impacting motion of the hammer head.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141,    and see the search notes therein for an advance causing or
    controlling means for a tool or tool drive.


CLS 173/113
TXT Apparatus under subclass 112 in which the means for positively causing or
    progressively controlling the forward movement of the hammer head is
    actuated by (1) mechanical connection to the hammer head or drive therefor
    or (2) pulsations caused by the cyclic impacts or reversal of direction of
    the hammer element or a drive element therefor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142+,   for an advance causing or controlling means operated solely by
    vibrations from the reciprocating element in a tool drive means.

    144,    for an advance causing or controlling means in which reciprocatory
    drive and advance originate from the same mechanical element.


CLS 173/114
TXT Apparatus under subclass 90 including an additional means to reciprocate
    the tool.


CLS 173/115
TXT Apparatus under subclass 90 including means selectively operable to change
    the distance that the hammer head moves in delivering an impact.


CLS 173/117
TXT Apparatus under subclass 90 in which the motion of the hammer head is
    caused by an electric motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, appropriate subclass for
    an electric motor, including a hammer head claimed as a mere load, and
    particularly subclass 50 for a dynamo-electric rotary portable or hand tool
    motor.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 114 for an impact,
    mechanical shock or vibration producing electric motor system.


CLS 173/118
TXT Apparatus under subclass 90 in which a resilient member is arranged to
    transmit force to a hammer head, and said member moves in entirety during
    each stroke of the hammer head.

    (1)     Note.  A fluid spring is included as a resilient element for
    purposes of this definition.


CLS 173/120
TXT Apparatus under subclass 119 in which a means is included to selectively
    vary the degree to which the resilient element is strained.


CLS 173/121
TXT Apparatus under subclass 119 in which the recoil of the resilient element
    retracts the hammer head from delivering a blow.


CLS 173/122
TXT Apparatus under subclass 90 in which the means transmitting drive motion
    from a source of power to the hammer head includes an element which
    cyclically moves relative to the hammer head.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for a hammer or tool shaft reciprocated by gripping means which
    release or yield to permit advance.

    81+,    for means to control advance and cyclically reciprocate a cable
    operated hammer or tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclass for a mechanical
    movement or gearing of general utility, and including a hammer head as a
    nominal load.


CLS 173/124
TXT Apparatus under subclass 122 in which the hammer head and motion
    transmitting element are coupled and uncoupled during each blow delivering
    cycle of movement of the hammer head.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for a hammer or tool shaft reciprocated by gripping means which
    release or yield to permit advance.

    84,     for a means to control advance and cyclically reciprocate a cable
    operated hammer or tool, in which the hammer or tool is cyclically
    disconnected from the cable.


CLS 173/125
TXT Apparatus under subclass 90 in which the mass of material which forms the
    hammer head includes an internal chamber which receives the piston of a
    motor, said internal chamber being adapted to receive motive material to
    cause the mass of material to move relative to the piston and deliver a
    blow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 196+ for an expansible
    chamber motor in which the cylinder necessarily moves, and including a
    moving cylinder which may be recited as a hammer head.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 117+ for a moving cylinder,
    and including a move cylinder which may be recited as a hammer head.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 52.1+ for an internal
    combustion engine having a moving cylinder, and including a moving cylinder
    which may be recited as a hammer head.


CLS 173/126
TXT Apparatus under subclass 90 in which the hammer head is composed of (1) at
    least two separate elements or (2) at least two separate materials.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118,    for a hammer head having a spring bodily cyclically moved therewith.


CLS 173/127
TXT Apparatus under subclass 126 in which the hammer head comprises or is
    rigidly connected to a mass of material forming an element which is
    received in a chamber, said element having surface which is acted upon by
    motive material in the chamber to cause the element to move and deliver a
    blow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 172+ for the piston of an
    expansible chamber device which is formed of specific or diverse materials,
    and including a piston which may be recited as a hammer head.


CLS 173/128
TXT Apparatus under subclass 90 comprising a mass of material which receives
    the direct blow from the hammer and transmits the blow to the tool or tool
    shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76,     for a cleansing fluid pump which comprises a hammer head or impact
    transmitting anvil.

    80,     for an impact transmitting anvil provided with a cleansing fluid
    passage.

    93+,    for an impact drive having an anvil arranged to transmit torsional
    impacts to a tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 476+ for an "anvil" tool in or for a
    metal shaping machine.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 245+ for anvils for
    driving hollow piles which are provided with a wall supporting core portion.


CLS 173/129
TXT Apparatus under subclass 128 in which the impact transmitting mass of
    material is specifically adapted to be attached at more than one point to
    the tool or tool shaft in a direction parallel to the path of travel of the
    hammer head.


CLS 173/130
TXT Apparatus under subclass 128 in which the impact transmitting mass of
    material is specifically adapted to engage a tool or tool shaft of a
    specific shape, other than circular in cross-section, at the location of
    engagement.


CLS 173/131
TXT Apparatus under subclass 128 in which the impact transmitting mass of
    material comprises structure arranged such that the impact is transmitted
    through (1) separate parts or (2) specified different materials.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93.7,   for an anvil means which translates longitudinal impact relative to
    a tool shaft to impact in a torsional direction, and which may comprise
    plural parts.


CLS 173/132
TXT Apparatus under subclass 128 in which the impact transmitting mass of
    material is provided with means to provide a direct and positive connection
    to the tool or tool shaft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, appropriate subclass for means to attach an
    anvil to a tool and particularly subclasses 19+ for a socket type, lost
    motion tool retainer.


CLS 173/133
TXT Apparatus under subclass 128 in which the impact transmitting mass of
    material is arranged relative to the tool in such a manner as to permit
    relative movement between said mass and said tool.


CLS 173/135
TXT Apparatus under subclass 134 in which fluid motive material is applied to
    cause movement of the element, upon the surface of the element that strikes
    the blow.


CLS 173/136
TXT Apparatus under subclass 135 in which the surface of the element which
    strikes the blow is provided with a port through which fluid motive
    material is supplied.


CLS 173/137
TXT Apparatus under subclass 135 in which the total area of the surface of the
    element to which fluid motive material is applied is greater than the area
    of the surface that strikes the blow.


CLS 173/138
TXT Apparatus under subclass 134 in which a passage or port is provided to
    conduct fluid motive material to or from the surface of the element that
    strikes the blow, generally for the purpose of cooling, lubrication or the
    removal of leakage motive fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135+,   for a hammer head which constitutes the piston of a drive motor, in
    which motive fluid is applied to the striking face.


CLS 173/140
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a relatively fixed source
    of power for driving a tool and cooperating mechanical motion converting
    elements for transmitting the power from the source to the tool, said
    cooperating mechanical motion converting elements advancing with the tool
    and relative to the source of power.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for a vehicle having a motor mechanically coupled to drive a tool,
    and in which drive gearing is displaced relative to the vehicle motor.

    40+,    for means to adjust the position of the axis of tool advance, in
    which drive gearing is displaced relative to a source of power.


CLS 173/141
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a means to positively cause
    or progressively control the forward movement of the tool into or along the
    work, such movement being in addition to a cyclic forward and backward or
    lateral motion of the tool.

    (1)     Note.  The forward movement and cyclic motion of the tool may be
    caused by the same power source or by a different power source.

    (2)     Note.  For classification under this definition the means to
    positively cause or progressively control forward movement of the tool must
    be adapted to urge or resist forward movement continuously during the
    forward movement of the tool.  Means which are adapted merely to stop the
    advance at specific points are classified on other features.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4+,     for automatic control of tool advance causing or controlling means.

    11,     for automatic control of drive means in response to sensed
    condition of advance causing or controlling means.

    19,     for a means to advance the tool through a self acting advance and
    retraction cycle.

    24,     for running gear structure of a vehicle support for the tool drive,
    in which the movement of the vehicle causes the tool to advance.

    38,     for a swinging arm advance causing means with the drive means
    guided to rectilinear advance.

    52,     for a single advance or manipulating structure for plural tool
    drives.

    53+,    for a grip drive to cyclically reciprocate a tool and permit
    advance.

    58+,    for work cleansing controlled by relative movement between the
    advance causing or controlling means and the drive.

    59+,    for work cleansing by fluid for advance causing or controlling
    motor.

    77,     for cleansing fluid controlled by control for advance causing or
    controlling means.

    81+,    for a means to control advance and cyclically reciprocate a cable
    operated tool.

    112+,   for an impacting device combined with a means to cause or control
    advance of a hammer head.

    165+,   for a relatively fixed means to drive an advancing tool about an
    axis combined with a means to stop relative tool advance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclass for a mechanical
    movement or transmission to cause or control advance or drive a tool, and
    particularly subclasses 829+ for constant length alternation stroke with
    means operable during motion to displace the end limits, and subclasses
    840+ for a rotary driven device with means operable during motion to adjust
    the position of the device relative to its supporting structure.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 401+ for means to convey work relative to a
    cutting station.

    142,    Wood Turning, subclass 47 for a carriage feed for a wood turning
    tool.

    144,    Woodworking, for a feed means for a wood working machine.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 129+ for
    a drilling machine with a feed mechanism.


CLS 173/142
TXT Apparatus under subclass 141 in which the means to cause or control forward
    movement of the tool operates with no power input other than pulsations
    resulting from the cyclic change of direction of movement of an element of
    the tool drive means, which element moves to and fro in a substantially
    rectilinear path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for tool drive by means reacting to a rotating eccentric mass.

    113,    for an impacting device including a means to advance a hammer in
    which the advance may be operated by hammer vibrations.


CLS 173/143
TXT Apparatus under subclass 142 in which the movement resulting from the
    pulsations causes an element of the means moving the tool forward to move
    unidirectionally step by step about an axis.


CLS 173/144
TXT Apparatus under subclass 141 in which one mechanical motion converting
    element transmits motion from a source of power to cause cyclic to and fro
    rectilinear motion of a tool and to simultaneously cause or control forward
    movement of the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for a hammer or tool shaft reciprocated by gripping means which
    release or yield to permit advance.

    81+,    for means to control advance and cyclically reciprocate a cable
    operated tool.

    142+,   for advance causing or controlling means operated solely by
    vibrations from reciprocating element in tool drive.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 829 for a constant length
    alternating stroke with means to displace the end limits.


CLS 173/145
TXT Apparatus under subclass 141 in which one mechanical motion converting
    element transmits movement from a source of power to drive the tool by
    rotating the tool about an axis and to simultaneously cause or control
    forward movement of the tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 840+ for a rotary driven
    device with means to adjust during operation the position of the device
    relative to its supporting structure.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 113+ for an earth
    boring tool combined with means to feed and rotate the tool from a single
    mechanical element.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 129+ for
    a drilling machine with a feed mechanism.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 431+ for apparatus for
    advancing and rotating an elongated article by means adapted to engage the
    article between its ends.


CLS 173/146
TXT Apparatus under subclass 145 in which the means connecting the mechanical
    motion converting element to the means to cause tool rotation or cause or
    control forward movement is provided with (1) a clutch having frictionally
    engaging elements or (2) a coupling which yields without breaking the drive
    train in response to the imposition of an excessive torque load.


CLS 173/147
TXT Apparatus under subclass 141 in which force to cause forward movement of
    the tool is imparted to the tool or tool drive through an easily bendable
    element which in normal operation is repeatedly curved and straightened
    such as a belt, cable, chain, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 47+
    for a side wall working mining machine having a driven flexible member
    which causes advance of the machine.


CLS 173/148
TXT Apparatus under subclass 141 in which the tool drive remains substantially
    axially fixed during operation while the tool axially moves forward
    relative thereto.


CLS 173/149
TXT Apparatus under subclass 148 in which the means to cause or control forward
    movement of the tool includes structure adapted to engage the tool or tool
    shaft at any point along the axial extent thereof, whereby the axial extent
    of the forward movement of the tool or tool shaft is not limited by the
    advance stroke of said advance means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for a grip drive which reciprocates a hammer or tool and permits
    relative advance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclass
    for a means for advancing an element of indeterminate length.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 29+ for pipe and rod jacks, and including devices which are
    adapted to advance a pipe or rod by grasping the pipe or rod at any point.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 431+ for apparatus for
    advancing and rotating an elongated article by means adapted to engage the
    article between its ends.


CLS 173/150
TXT Apparatus under subclass 148 in which the means to cause or control forward
    movement of the tool includes a motor having a moving power applying member
    which during operation is adapted to move forward upon an axis
    substantially coaxial with the axis upon which the tool is moving forward.


CLS 173/151
TXT Apparatus under subclass 148 comprising a means to coil or otherwise drive
    a cable or similar flexible element which is connected to the tool to
    control forward movement of the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81+,    for a means to advance and cyclically reciprocate a cable
    supporting a tool.

    147,    for a cable means to forcibly advance a tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 264+ for apparatus for hauling or hoisting a load which includes
    a driven device which contacts and pulls on a cable.


CLS 173/152
TXT Apparatus under subclass 141 in which the means for causing or controlling
    forward movement of the tool includes a motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59+,    for work cleansing by motive fluid for the drive motor or advance
    causing or controlling motor.

    79,     for a cleansing fluid passage provided in an advance causing or
    controlling motor.

    142+,   for advance causing or controlling means operated solely by
    vibrations from a reciprocating element of a means causing drive motion of
    a tool, said reciprocating element usually being a motor or motor driven.

    144,    for reciprocatory drive motion and advance which originates from
    the same mechanical element, said element usually being motor driven.

    145+,   for rotary drive motion and advance which originate from the same
    mechanical element, said element usually being motor driven.


CLS 173/153
TXT Apparatus under subclass 152 in which the motor for causing or controlling
    forward movement is a fluid motor and in which the tool is driven by a
    separate fluid motor, the motive fluid exhausted by the drive motor being
    utilized as motive fluid in the motor causing or controlling forward
    movement.


CLS 173/154
TXT Apparatus under subclass 152 in which the tool is driven by a separate
    motor, and the separate motor also operates a means (e.g., a pump or
    generator), to produce a supply of motivating energy for use by the motor
    which causes or controls forward movement of the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for a tool drive combined with running gear structure of a vehicle
    support for a tool drive in which the vehicle drive motor actuates a means
    to generate tool drive or advance motivating energy.


CLS 173/155
TXT Apparatus under subclass 152 in which the motor for causing or controlling
    forward movement is a fluid motor and in which the tool is driven by a
    separate fluid motor, the motive fluid exhausted by the motor causing or
    controlling forward movement being utilized as motive fluid in the drive
    motor.


CLS 173/156
TXT Apparatus under subclass 152 combined with a lock or brake operable at
    least one point between the limits of a complete forward movement stroke to
    inhibit or prevent the tool from moving forward.

    (1)     Note.  The lock or brake may be operable while the motor is causing
    or controlling forward movement, or may only operate while the motor is
    stopped or disconnected.

    (2)     Note.  The "complete forward movement stroke" is the distance that
    the tool may move forward without stopping or altering the operation of the
    forward movement causing or controlling means, therefore, structure which
    functions to lock or brake forward movement at merely the beginning or end
    of such a stroke is not classified under this definition.


CLS 173/157
TXT Apparatus under subclass 152 in which the tool is driven by a separate
    motor, and a single element is provided to start and stop or regulate the
    flow of motivating energy to both the drive motor and the motor for causing
    or controlling forward movement of the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153,    for a means for causing or controlling advance in which drive motor
    exhaust is motive fluid for an advance motor.

    154,    for a means for causing or controlling advance in which the drive
    motor generates advance motor motive energy.

    155,    for a means for causing or controlling advance in which the advance
    motor exhaust is motive fluid for a drive motor.


CLS 173/158
TXT Apparatus under subclass 157 in which an additional, separately movable
    means to start and stop or regulate the flow of motivating energy to the
    motor for causing or controlling forward movement of the tool is provided
    to control said motor independently of the drive motor.


CLS 173/159
TXT Apparatus under subclass 152 in which the tool is driven by a separate
    motor, and a supply of motivating energy flows from one source to both the
    drive motor and the motor for causing or controlling forward movement of
    the tool.


CLS 173/160
TXT Apparatus under subclass 152 in which an element is moved relative to both
    basic motor structure and the tool for transmitting motion to the tool to
    cause or control forward movement of the tool.

    (1)     Note.  Elements such as the stator and rotor of a turbine motor,
    piston and cylinder of an expansible chamber motor, etc., are considered to
    be "basic motor structure", and the transmitting element must be moved
    relative to all such basic motor structure for inclusion under this
    definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for a swinging arm advance means with tool guided to rectilinear
    advance, said swinging arm usually being motor operated.

    144,    for reciprocatory drive and advance which originate from same
    mechanical element, said element usually being motor driven.

    145+,   for a rotary drive and advance which originate from same mechanical
    element, said element usually being motor driven.

    147,    for a flexible member usually motor driven to cause advance.


CLS 173/161
TXT Apparatus under subclass 152 in which means specifically adapted to be
    engaged by the hand of an operator to manipulate the tool drive is provided
    with a relatively movable means to regulate the flow of motivating energy
    to the motor.


CLS 173/162.1
TXT INCLUDING MEANS TO VIBRATIONALLY ISOLATE A DRIVE MEANS FROM ITS HOLDER:

    Subject matter under the class definition having structure which a) is
    positioned between an apparatus causing motion of a tool, i.e., tool drive
    means of the apparatus, and b) functions to attenuate oscillatory or shock
    motion originating in the tool drive means hindering its transfer to the
    manipulating or supporting means.

    (1)     Note.  A means to dampen transmission of vibrations within the tool
    drive means, i.e., between a power source and the tool, is not included
    under this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139,    for an impacting device combined with a separate impact cushioning
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 56 for subject matter
    dealing with vibratory type earth boring, and including vibration
    cushioning or absorbing structure.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 560+ for resilient supports, per se, and
    subclass 638 for means for isolating or reducing vibrations from a
    supported member to the supported means.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 136+ for spring devices which do not
    provide support to any members, and are used to absorb shock or vibratory
    forces.


CLS 173/162.2
TXT Handle type holder:

    Subject matter under subclass 162.1 wherein the means for supporting or
    manipulation the apparatus causing motion of the tool includes a part that
    is designed to be grasped by a terminal appendage of an arm of a user,
    i.e., a hand.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 116 for insulated handle structure
    for a tool or the like.


CLS 173/164
TXT Apparatus under subclass 163 comprising a means which is specifically
    described as performing the dual functions of moving a tool about an axis
    to cause a tool to perform work, and to prevent movement about an axis of a
    section of tool shaft while moving another section of tool shaft about an
    axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, appropriate subclass for a wrench, and particularly
    subclasses 54+ for a machine wrench.


CLS 173/165
TXT Apparatus under subclass 163 in which the means to move the tool about an
    axis remains fixed relative to the axis of tool advance and is adapted to
    impart torque to the tool while the tool relatively advances.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148+,   for a drive for a relatively advancing tool combined with a means
    to cause or control advance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses, and
    particularly subclasses 434+ for a gear train or gear element, per se,
    adapted to drive a relatively advancing shaft.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, subclasses 162+ for a torque transmitting coupling which
    accommodates relative axial movement between coupled members.


CLS 173/166
TXT Apparatus under subclass 165 combined with a means which is selectively
    useable to prevent relative tool advance, said means including a motor or a
    relatively movable operating element to actuate the means into advance
    preventing condition.


CLS 173/167
TXT Apparatus under subclass 165 combined with a means to prevent relative tool
    advance by grasping the tool or tool shaft at a plurality of positions
    along the longitudinal axial extent of the shaft, which positions do not
    have to be preconditioned compared with other positions on the shaft to
    cooperate with the particular grasping means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149,    for a means to cause or control tool advance relative to a drive
    such means including means to grasp a tool shaft at any point.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclass 67 for pipe or rod braking means utilized in the
    advancing thereof.


CLS 173/168
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which a means specifically adapted
    to be engaged by the hand of the operator to manipulate the drive is
    provided with internal structure to convey motive fluid to a fluid operated
    tool drive motor.


CLS 173/169
TXT Apparatus under subclass 168 in which the internal structure of the means
    engaged by the hand of the operator is further provided with a means to
    permit or stop flow or adjust the rate of flow of fluid to the fluid
    operated tool drive motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for a tool drive controlled by relative movement of a manipulating
    handle.

    161,    for an advance causing or controlling motor control in a tool drive
    manipulating handle.


CLS 173/170
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which a tool drive means is
    provided with a means specifically adapted to be engaged by the hand of an
    operator to manipulate the drive and a means to control a tool drive (such
    as a motor control or clutch operating means), the control being related to
    the hand engaged manipulating means in such a manner as to enable the tool
    drive to be controlled and manipulated by a single hand of the operator.

    (1)     Note.  Pistol grip type handle apparatus is classified under this
    definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for a tool drive controlled by relative movement of a tool drive
    manipulating handle.

    161,    for an advance motor control in a tool drive manipulating handle.

    169,    for a means to control a drive motor motive fluid supply passage
    which is located in a tool drive manipulating handle.


CLS 173/171
TXT Apparatus under the class definition not provided for in other subclasses.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, a collection of tool
    drive motors provided with specific manipulating handle structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 110+ for handles of general
    utility, and including a handle for manipulating a tool drive.


CLS 173/176
TXT Drive means responsive to torque speed condition:
    Apparatus under subclass 2 in which the power operated means comprises a
    drive means and the sensing means senses either  (1) a condition of force
    applied to the tool to move the tool about an axis or (2) the rate of
    motion of the drive means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93.5+,  for a rotary tool drive which yields under torsional load and
    delivers torsional impact on a tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 467+ for an assembling type tool with
    predetermined overload yielding means.


CLS 173/177
TXT Fluid pressure change controls drive:
    Apparatus under subclass 176 wherein the torque or speed of the device is
    measured by sensing the force exerted on a surface by a gas or liquid, the
    sensed condition effecting a valve which modifies the tool operation.


CLS 173/178
TXT Having torque responsive clutch:
    Apparatus under subclass 176 wherein a device to engage or to disengage the
    connection between the drive means and the power means is provided and
    operates in response to a change in the force applied to the tool to move
    the tool about an axis.


CLS 173/179
TXT With speed responsive governor:
    Apparatus under subclass 176 including a regulator controlling the rate of
    motion of the drive means.


CLS 173/180
TXT With torque indicator:
    Apparatus under subclass 176 wherein a means to display the amount of
    torque is provided.


CLS 173/181
TXT Having torque sensor:
    Apparatus under subclass 176 wherein a means is provided to detect the
    torque produced by the tool.


CLS 173/182
TXT Strain gauge:
    Apparatus under subclass 176 wherein the torque sensor converts mechanical
    motion into electrical impulse.


CLS 173/183
TXT Proximity angle detector:
    Apparatus under subclass 176 wherein the torque sensor detects the amount
    of rotation of the drive means.


CLS 173/184
TXT WITH VEHICLE SUPPORT FOR DRIVE:
    Apparatus under the class definition combined with the significant
    structure of a vehicle which is  (1) adapted to move the tool drive from
    work station to work station or (2) adapted to support and advance the tool
    drive during operation.

    (1)     Note.  By significant vehicle structure is meant more than a mere
    nominal vehicle or part of the vehicle, such as a bed, which is not
    peculiar to a transporting device.  However, the inclusion of a nominal
    vehicle and the recitation  of power take-off, plural wheels or  plural
    skids, etc., comprises sufficient vehicle structure for inclusion under
    this definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, appropriate subclass for a motor vehicle of general
    utility and particularly subclass 53.1 for a vehicle in which the driving
    motor functions as an external source of power.

    280,    Land Vehicles, appropriate subclass for a land vehicle of general
    utility.


CLS 173/185
TXT Pivoted:
    Apparatus under subclass 184 in which the tool drive means is mounted to
    the transport means such that the drive swings about an axis in relation to
    the transport.


CLS 173/186
TXT Nontransporting means to support vehicle during tool operation:Apparatus
    under subclass 184 in which the vehicle is combined with additional means
    to support the vehicle structure in a  nontransporting condition during the
    time the  tool drive is operative.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 840+ for a vehicle having a body leveling
    device, and including ground engaging leveling means.


CLS 173/187
TXT Adjustable nontransporting means:
    Apparatus under subclass 186 wherein the nontransporting means to support
    the vehicle has means to vary its supporting position.


CLS 173/188
TXT Having screw threads:
    Apparatus under subclass 187 wherein the means to vary the support position
    includes a helically threaded member.


CLS 173/189
TXT Having fluid cylinder:
    Apparatus under subclass 187 wherein the means to vary the support position
    includes an air or gas powered expansible chamber.


CLS 173/190
TXT Powered by motor or mechanism:
    Apparatus under subclass 42 in which a device is provided to operate at
    least one of the adjustments which either  (1) converts chemical or
    electrical energy or fluid pressure into mechanical energy or (2) contains
    a mechanical linkage.


CLS 173/191
TXT Having screw threads:
    Apparatus under subclass 190 wherein the mechanism has continuous helical
    grooves.


CLS 173/192
TXT Having turnable:
    Apparatus under subclass 190 wherein the mechanism is a circular rotating
    platform.


CLS 173/193
TXT Having fluid motor:
    Apparatus under subclass 190 wherein the motor is a pneumatic or hydraulic
    piston and cylinder type device.


CLS 173/194
TXT With mechanical movement:
    Apparatus under subclass 193 wherein the fluid motor operates in
    conjunction with a mechanical device such as linkages, gears, etc.


CLS 173/195
TXT With flexible endless member:
    Apparatus under subclass 194 wherein the fluid motor operates in
    conjunction with a pliable, continuous line (e.g., rope or chain).


CLS 173/196
TXT Having flexible endless member:
    Apparatus under subclass 190 wherein  the mechanism is a pliable,
    continuous line such as a rope or chain.


CLS 173/197
TXT WORK CLEANSING:
    Apparatus under the class definition including (1) a specific modification
    of the tool drive which is for the purpose of removing unwanted material
    from the work face being operated upon by the driven tool or (2) structure
    combined with the tool drive which functions to remove unwanted material
    from the work face being operated upon by the driven tool.

    (1)     Note.  The arrangement of structure which will inherently perform a
    work cleansing function is included in this definition even through the
    described function may not include work cleansing (e.g., cooling or
    lubricating the tool).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for automatic control of a power means in response to the condition
    of a cleansing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 300.1+ for a
    cleaning machine, per se, including blast or suction.

    83,     Cutting, subclass 168 for a cutting machine combined with means to
    clean the work or tool.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 207+ and see the search
    notes therein for an earth boring means combined with means to handle
    drilling fluids or cuttings.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 64+
    and see the search notes therein for a hard material disintegrating machine
    having means to handle material.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclass 249 for a broaching
    tool with means to clean, lubricate, or modify the temperature of the work
    or tool.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 2+ for an abrading machine, device, or process
    with condition responsive control for sandblasting; subclasses 75+ for a
    sandblast abrading machine; and subclasses 103+ for an abrading machine
    with a scouring device.


CLS 173/198
TXT Using vacuum or reverse circulation:
    Apparatus under subclass 197 using either (1) a suction or (2) a
    circulation of fluid up through a tool in a direction opposite normal
    operation to remove unwanted material.

    (1)     Note.  Reverse circulation usually involves the flow  of drilling
    mud or lubricant up through a drilling bit instead of down to the work.


CLS 173/199
TXT Having outside conduit to supply cleansing fluid:
    Apparatus under subclass 197 wherein a supply line delivers a fluid to the
    tool without going through the working parts of the tool.


CLS 173/200
TXT Hammer head driven by pulsating fluid pressure:
    Apparatus under subclass 90 in which a force is applied and subsequently
    released in rapid succession to a hammer head by a mass of fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for a drive motor controlled by a reciprocating drive member being
    connected to a pulsating fluid column.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 537+ for a self-cycling reciprocating
    motor of the pulsator type that may include a hammer head as a nominal load
    for the motor.


CLS 173/201
TXT Pulsation caused by mechanical movement:
    Apparatus under subclass 200 wherein application and subsequent release of
    the fluid force is caused by movable, mechanically operated elements.


CLS 173/202
TXT Hammer head driven by spring:
    Apparatus under subclass 90 in which the motion of the hammer head, at
    least in one direction, is caused by the recoil of a resilient element
    which has been strained or compressed.


CLS 173/203
TXT Having cam to compress spring:
    Apparatus under subclass 202 including an eccentric or irregularly shaped
    surface used to squeeze the spring.


CLS 173/204
TXT Fluid spring:
    Apparatus  under subclass 202 wherein the resilient element is a fixed
    volume of a compressible pneumatic or hydraulic fluid contained in a
    chamber on either side of the hammer head.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212,    for a fluid spring used as an impact cushioning means.


CLS 173/205
TXT Rotary cam:
    Apparatus under subclass 122 in which the relatively moving means which
    transmits drive motion includes an element which moves about an axis, and
    which element includes a movement imparting slide surface impacting
    movement to another element, said slide surface being arranged at variable
    distances relative to the axis of rotation whereby rotation of the element
    imparts relative motion to said other element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203,    for a cam and spring operated impact tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 53, 54, and 55+ for
    mechanical movements of the rotary to or from reciprocating or oscillating
    type which includes a cam.


CLS 173/206
TXT Hammer head constitutes piston of drive motor:
    Apparatus under subclass 90 in which the hammer head comprises or is
    rigidly connected to a disk or cylinder within a chamber, said disk or
    cylinder having a surface which is acted upon by a motive fluid in the
    chamber which causes the disk or cylinder to move and deliver a blow.

    (1)     Note.  These devices differ from fluid springs in Class 173,
    subclasses 204 and 212 in that a fluid spring contains a closed fixed
    volume of fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for a piston formed of plural or diverse materials and which forms
    the hammer head of an imparting device.

    200+,   for a hammer head, generally comprising a piston, which is driven
    by pulsating fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclass for an
    expansible chamber motor having a piston that may be recited as a hammer
    head.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclass for piston of an
    expansible chamber device that may be recited as a hammer head.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, appropriate subclass for an internal
    combustion engine having a piston that may be recited as a hammer head.


CLS 173/207
TXT Having valve not directly associated with motive fluid for piston:Apparatus
    under subclass 206 having a means to control fluid flow not immediately
    involved with the force transmitting fluid for the hammer head.


CLS 173/208
TXT With accumulator:
    Apparatus under subclass 207 wherein a reservoir to contain the motive
    hydraulic or pneumatic fluid is provided.


CLS 173/209
TXT Driven by internal combustion engine:
    Apparatus under subclass 206  whereinthe drive motor is powered by a
    gasoline or diesel piston engine in which fuel is burned within the engine
    proper.


CLS 173/210
TXT With impact cushioning means:
    Apparatus under subclass 90 including resilient or flexible structure which
    is external to the hammer head or drive therefor which functions to absorb
    a blow under some condition of operation, or is adopted to cushion against
    the transmission of vibrations resulting from the operation of the hammer
    drive.


CLS 173/211
TXT Mechanical spring:
    Apparatus under subclass 210 wherein the impact cushioning means is a
    resilient element that recovers its shape after being stretched or
    compressed.


CLS 173/212
TXT Fluid spring:
    Apparatus under subclass 210 wherein the impact cushioning means is a fixed
    volume of compressible hydraulic or pneumatic fluid contained in a chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204,    for a hammer head driven by a fluid spring.


CLS 173/213
TXT MEANS TO DRIVE TOOL ABOUT AN AXIS:
    Apparatus under the class definition including means to impart torque to a
    tool and move the tool about an axis.

    (1)     Note.  The movement of the tool about an axis may be unidirectional
    or oscillating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5+,     for an automatic control of a power operated advance means in
    response to a torque or speed condition of the drive.

    93+,    for an impact type tool drive having an anvil arranged to deliver
    torsional impact to a tool.

    94+,    for a hammer head which moves about an axis.

    104+,   for a tool impacting device combined with means to move the tool
    about an axis.

    140,    for drive gearing which advances relative to a source of power, and
    including gearing moving a tool about an axis.

    145+,   for a rotating tool drive which originates from the same mechanical
    element as the means causing or controlling advance.

    148+,   for an  advance causing or controlling means for a tool advancing
    relative to the tool drive, said drive generally moving the tool about an
    axis.

    176+,   for an automatic control of a drive means in response to a torque
    speed condition.


CLS 173/214
TXT Plural tools:
    Apparatus under subclass 213 wherein the drive means can power more than
    one tool.


CLS 173/215
TXT Endless flexible drive means:
    Apparatus under subclass 213 wherein a pliant, continuous line (e.g., rope,
    chain, etc.) powers the tool.


CLS 173/216
TXT Gear drive:
    Apparatus under subclass 213 wherein the drive means consists of toothed
    interengaging mechanical elements.


CLS 173/217
TXT Electric motor:
    Apparatus under subclass 213 wherein the drive means is a device which
    converts electrical energy to mechanical energy.


CLS 173/218
TXT Fluid motor:
    Apparatus under subclass 213 wherein the drive means is a pneumatically or
    hydraulically operated power device.


CLS 173/219
TXT Having sound attenuator:
    Apparatus under subclass 218 wherein a means is provided to muffle or
    absorb acoustic vibration.


CLS 173/220
TXT With means to rotate reciprocating piston:
    Apparatus under subclass 218 wherein a means is provided to revolve a
    linearly oscillating piston about its radial axis during its oscillation.


CLS 173/221
TXT With manual means to control motor:
    Apparatus under subclass 218 wherein a means is provided that is directly
    actuable by an operator of the tool to regulate the motor.


CLS 173/222
TXT Plural motors:
    Apparatus under subclass 218 having more than one motor.


CLS 174/
TTL ELECTRICITY:  CONDUCTORS AND INSULATORS

CLS 174/
TXT

    1.      This class is for inventions relating to the structure of
    electrical conductors and insulators and insulators and the apparatus
    specialized to mounting, supporting, encasing in conduits, and/or housing
    the same.

    2.      Conductors may be bare or be encased in insulation, may be single
    strand or plural strand, may be of single conductor form or there may be a
    plurality of conductors associated together to form a cable.

    3.      Since all materials that have the property of being conductors of
    electricity and all devices made therefrom may be termed electrical
    conductors, only those structures that are specially designed to conduct
    electricity as their proximate purpose are placed in this class.

    4.      Insulators are placed here when the structure thereof is claimed,
    which structure is specially designed for spacing two or more devices of
    different electrical potential from each other or for spacing one or more
    devices from ground.

    5.      Since all materials which are poor conductors of electricity and
    devices made therefrom may be termed electrical insulators, only those
    structures whose proximate purpose is that stated in the preceding
    paragraph are placed in this class.

    6.      Conduits are placed in this class only when some characteristic is
    claimed which limits the same to the electrical use.  For reasons above
    stated, the fact, claimed or unclaimed, that the conduit is made of
    electrically conductive and/or insulative material, will not cause
    classification in this class.  375, Pulse or Digital Communications,
    subclass 36 for cable systems and components.

    7.      Housings (boxes, receptacles, containers, etc.) are placed in this
    class only when limited to electrical use.  The mere fact, claimed or
    unclaimed, that the material of which the box or housing is composed is
    conductive, and/or insulative, will not cause classification in this class.
     See (16) Note below.  To be classified in this class, the claims must
    include some structure which limits the box or housings to electrical use.
    The recitation that the box or housings include an electrical device,
    recited by name only, is sufficient to cause classification in this class
    even though no other structure is recited which limits the box or housings
    to electrical use.  This class includes as boxes, housings or envelopes
    such as are used for electric lamps, electric space discharge devices, and
    similar electrical devices which are enclosed in vitreous, ceramic,
    nonmetallic plastic or metallic housings or envelopes.  Where such subject
    matter is otherwise properly within the scope of this class, the mere
    naming of the type of lamp or discharge device as being the device within
    the housing or envelope will not exclude the patent from this class.
    Neither will the recitation of an electrode broadly recited within the
    housing or envelope exclude the patent from this class although if the
    electrode is claimed as a filament, anode, grid or other specific
    electrode, the patent will be excluded. Also, the recitation of electrode
    supporting structure when broadly recited or when recited so as to be of
    general utility will not exclude the patent from this class.  For example,
    means for supporting an electrode assembly, or lead-in wires supporting an
    electrode will not exclude the patent from Class 174.  Where the supporting
    structure is limited to use with electric lamp or discharge device
    structure, the patent is excluded from Class 174 and will be found in Class
    313.  For such envelopes and housings in this class, see subclasses 8+
    where the envelope is provided with means peculiarly adapted for use in
    connection with a vacuum, gas or fluid (but not merely a hermetically
    sealed envelope designed for use with a vacuum or gas filling where no
    structure peculiarly adapted for use with a vacuum or fluid except the
    hermetic seals is claimed).  See subclass 9 where the structure includes a
    current conductive fluid (e.g., a liquid used as a part of the lead-in
    structure) or where a vacuum is used (e.g., as a space around the lead-in
    designed to be continuously evacuated to reduce leakage of air or gas),
    subclass 15.1  where the envelope or housing has combined therewith means
    for feeding, circulating or distributing a fluid including means to cool
    the fluid or has means to cool the box or housing or the device therein
    where the cooling means involves the use of a fluid, subclasses 17+ for the
    miscellaneous envelopes, boxes and housings under subclass 8, see
    especially subclasses 17.05+ for the miscellaneous hermetically sealed
    envelopes and housing within the definition of subclass 8 (including
    housings which are provided with an evacuating stem or opening or which use
    a liquid to form the hermetic seal), subclasses 31+ for structures under
    subclass 8 which are bushings or other devices for insulating a conductor
    or object from a wall or plate through which the conductor or object
    passes, subclass 35 for such envelopes and housings provided with an
    electric shield which wholly or partially surrounds the envelope and for
    such envelopes and housings which include means to shield the housing or a
    part there of from electromagnetic or electrostatic effects, and subclasses
    50+ for the miscellaneous such boxes and housings, see especially
    subclasses 50.5+ for the miscellaneous hermetically sealed envelopes and
    housings in this class, including those provided with lead-in wires or
    other conductive means for conducting electricity to the device within the
    housing.  Note that subclasses 151+ provides for devices (e.g., bushings)
    for insulating a conductor from a wall or plate (such as a metallic
    envelope wall) through which the conductor extends, the bushing may be
    fluid tight and include a glass to metal seal.

    8.      The main use of electrical conductors is to conduct electricity to
    an electric translator for using the same.  Such electric translators are
    frequently positioned in the conductor conduit or housing.  The mere
    inclusion of such translator broadly in the claim, without setting forth
    the characteristics thereof, will not exclude the same from this class but
    where particular characteristics of the electric translator are claimed,
    classification is in the class appropriate to such translator.



            Whereas both Classes 174 and 257 provide for housings for
    electronic devices and components, Class 257 provides for housings (1)
    wherein the housing is for an active solid state device, details of which
    are positively recited in the claims, or (2) wherein the recited housing is
    necessary to make a usable active solid state device whether or not the
    active solid state device is recited nominally or in detail.


            Claims that recite housings with only nominal recitation of active
    solid state devices of only one type should not be classified as originals
    (ORs) in either Class 257 or Class 361, but rather in Class 174.

    9.      Processes other than manufacturing processes, are classified in
    this class in the subclasses with the correlative structures.

    NOTES



    MISCELLANEOUS:



    (1)     Note.  Classes 106, Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, 208, Mineral
    Oils: Processes and Products; 260, Chemistry of Carbon Compounds subclass
    2.01+ and 423, Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds and 585, Chemistry of
    Hydrocarbon Compounds, take compounds and compositions which are
    dielectrics, and their manufacture, in appropriate subclasses; 501,
    Compositions:  Ceramic, appropriate subclasses for ceramic compositions
    useful as electrical insulator; 520, Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers,
    appropriate subclasses, particularly Class 523, subclass 173 for a
    composition containing a synthetic resin having utility as a filling or
    flooding composition for cables or to processes of preparing said
    composition.  The claimed combination of conductor, coated or covered with
    the dielectric, is in this class (174) when such combination includes some
    structure of the conductor other than a mere wire, cable, etc., coated with
    the dielectric.  Class 252 has fluid dielectrics and processes which cover
    merely the use of the fluid dielectric to insulate electrically conducting
    elements from each other or from ground.  The combination of such fluid
    dielectrics with particular structure, or processes of use with particular
    structure or with conducting elements bearing particular relations to each
    other, are in this class (174) or in another appropriate electrical art
    class.

    (1.5)   Note.  Class 29, Metal Working, is the generic class for processes
    and apparatus for making wire and filaments regardless of the material
    used.  Included are processes for wire or filament making combined with a
    coating or covering operation; see subclasses 400.1+, especially subclass
    460 where conductor parts are assembled and then coated, subclass 461 where
    a stranded conductor is joined to another member by spreading the conductor
    strands, and subclasses 527.1+ where a coating operation is involved.
    Class 428 provides in subclasses 544+ for conductors which are no more than
    metal stock, even though claimed as being electric conductors.  Class 72,
    Metal Deforming, takes a process or an apparatus for making or reshaping a
    wire by a mere plastic metal working operation, e.g., die-drawing.

    (2)     Note.  Class 118, Coating Apparatus, takes apparatus for coating
    conductors.

    (3)     Note.  Class 57, Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, takes
    processes and/or apparatus for making conductors by operations within the
    class definition and also takes patents to conductor structure where the
    apparatus and/or process is also claimed. Patents claiming only conductor
    structure are in this class (174), class 57 taking in subclass 200 and
    indented subclasses patents to strands of twisted or twined form not
    limited by the claims to being conductors. This same line exists with the
    other textile classes, namely, Classes 19, Textiles:  Fiber Preparation;
    26, Textiles:  Cloth Finishing; 28, Textiles:  Manufacturing; 66, Textiles:
     Knitting; 87, Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making; and 139,
    Textiles: Weaving.

    (3.1)   Note.  Class 427, Coating Processes, subclasses 58+ for coating
    processes, per se, wherein an electrical product is produced.

    (3.4)   Note.  Class 156, Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical
    Manufacture, subclasses 47+ takes methods of making indefinite length
    electrical conductors not elsewhere provided for.

    (3.7)   Note.  Class 52, Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 40
    for a residual mast or tower with an article support structure, having no
    claimed feature of electrical significance.

    (3.8)   Note.  Class 228, Metal Fusion Bonding is the generic class for
    metallurgical bonding and includes (see subclasses 126+) surface bonding by
    rod encasing and includes (see subclasses 141.1+) surface bonding with
    mechanical shaping.

    CONDUCTORS AND ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS:

    (4)     Note.  Class 191, Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, has
    structures specially designed for transmitting electrical energy between
    relatively moving objects including the structure of conduits and
    conductors with the means for mounting or supporting the same, and
    electrical systems specialized to this use.

    (5)     Note.  As stated in the class definition, this class pertains to
    the structure of electric conductors. Substantially all art structures of
    either electrical or nonelectrical character are capable of having
    conductor structures   associated therewith.  The combination of art
    devices significantly claimed with conductors is with the appropriate art.

    (6)     Note.  Electrical systems are with the appropriate art.  Electrical
    systems for power, control, signaling or other purposes combined with
    nonelectrical art devices significantly claimed are, in general, classified
    with the nonelectrical art device.  Electrical conductors in combination
    with particular electrical devices significantly claimed and classifiable
    in other classes are with such other classes.  The following are
    particularly noted:

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 45 for wave transmission systems having loaded
    cable structures.

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclasses 277+ for an electrical control system for an elevator car drive
    means and subclass 413 for a specific arrangement or connection of an
    electrical service line with other elevator structure.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave energy.

    219,    Electric Heating.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals.

    250,    Radiant Energy.

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or  Interconnection Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for electrical distribution systems or systems for
    interconnecting two or more sources of electricity and/or two or more loads.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and  Networks.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, especially subclass 209 for extensible
    resistors, subclasses 210+ for flexible or folding resistors, including
    subclass 214 for cable type resistors, subclasses 226+ for incased,
    embedded or housed resistors, subclass 321 for resistance element cores and
    frames which may be of insulating  material, and subclass 322 for resistors
    with terminals.  See sections XIII and XVII of the class definition under
    Class 338 for certain classification lines relating to this subject matter.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas,  subclasses 700+ for antennas.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclass 257 for cable systems and
    components.

    379,    Telephonic Communications subclasses 90.01+ and indented subclasses
    having composite electrical systems and subclass 415 and indented
    subclasses having anti-inductive systems.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for stock material, particularly in plural layer form, which may be
    disclosed as having the property of electrical conductivity or insulation.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product and
    Process.

    439,    Electrical Connectors.



    (7)     Note.  See the appropriate subclasses of this class for further
    notes relative to other classes.

    CONDUITS:

    (8)     Note.  See Class 138, Pipes and Tubular Conduits, and the notes
    appended to the definitions, for conduit structures even though claimed as
    electrical conduits and/or claimed as made of electrically insulating
    and/or conductive materials.  In addition to the conduit structure there
    must be claimed additional characteristics such as the contained electrical
    conductors, electrical apparatus, added insulators and/or other
    characteristics specialized to electrical use to cause classification in
    this class (174).

    (9)     Note.  Class 52, Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses
    220.1+ for a service duct within a barrier wherein a feature limited to
    electrical use is not claimed.

    (10)    Note.  See Class 405, Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses
    132+, for tunnels and subways not restricted solely to electrical use.

    (11)    Note.  See Class 404, Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus,
    subclasses 3, 4+ and 17+ for conduits combined with pavement, curb or
    gutter structure and not limited solely to electrical use.

    (12)    Note.  See Class 104, Railways, subclass 140, and indented
    subclasses.

    (13)    Note.  See Class 191, Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles,
    subclass 23 and indented subclasses.

    (14)    Note.  See appropriate subclasses of this class for further notes
    relative to other classes.

    HOUSING, BOXES OR RECEPTACLES:

    (15)    Note.  When claimed in combination with the contained equipment
    significantly set forth (other than the conductors and/or insulators), they
    are with the class appropriate to the contained equipment.

    (15.5) Note.  For envelopes for electric lamps and electric space discharge
    devices which are included in this class, see section 7 of the class
    definition above.

    (16)    Note.  The mere structure of the housing, box or receptacle is in
    the class appropriate thereto.  See particularly Class 220, Receptacles,
    subclass 2.1 for housings and envelopes for electric lamps, electric space
    discharge devices and similar devices where no electrical structure is
    claimed, and subclasses 3.2+ for receptacles of the junction or outlet type.

    (17)    Note.  See this class, subclasses 37 and indented subclasses, for
    underground installations, 48 and 49 for wall mounted, and 50 and indented
    subclasses for other boxes and housings, and the notes thereunder.

    (17.5) Note.  This class provides for the structure of a housing, box or
    receptacle and electrical connector structure for making electrical contact
    between the lead-in conductors of the receptacle (i.e., the conductors
    which pass through the wall of the housing, box or receptacle) and an
    external circuit and for junction boxes, housings or receptacles with
    electrical connectors where significant structure of the housing, box or
    receptacle is recited in addition to the electrical connector structure.
    Class 439 provides for housing, boxes and receptacles with electrical
    connectors where no more structure is recited than is necessary to mount or
    support the electrical connectors.  Also, Class 439 provides for electrical
    connectors in combination with the housing, box or receptacle for the
    connector (e.g., housed connectors) where significant connector structure
    is recited.

    INSULATORS:



    (18)    Note.  See notes (1) for dielectric compositions and compounds.

    (19)    Note.  See the notes to this class, subclass 137, and the
    subclasses thereunder.


CLS 174/1
TXT Structures under the class definition not provided for in the following
    subclasses.


CLS 174/2
TXT Structures under the class definition for protecting life and/or property
    from atmospheric electrical discharges, due to either a direct stroke or
    due to induction from the discharge.

    (1)     Note.  For related subject matter in this class, see the following.

    (a)     Air terminals, subclass 4.

    (b)     Electric shock hazard protective devices not specialized to
    lightning protection, subclass 5.

    (c)     Earth grounds, per se, subclasses 6 and 7.

    (d)     For anti-inductive structures, subclass 32 and indented subclasses.

    (e)     For building structures combined with conductors, not specialized
    to lightning protection, subclasses 48 and 49.

    (f)     Conduit, cable and conductor joint and end structures with
    conductive stress distributing means, subclass 73.1.

    (g)     Conductors with conductive armors or sheaths, subclass 102 and
    indented subclasses.

    (h)     Insulated conductors, subclass 110 and indented subclasses.

    (i)     Conductor structure, per se, subclass 126.1 and indented subclasses.

    (j)     Insulators with conductive arcing or stress distributing means,
    subclass 140 and indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  Where significant structure of the device protected is
    claimed, in addition to that necessary to define the lightning protective
    means, the classification is with the device, with a cross-reference here.

    (3)     Note.  Art structures made of conductive and/or insulative
    materials are with the appropriate art, even though claimed to be for
    lightning protective purposes.

    (4)     Note.  Collection of atmospheric electricity is in Class 310,
    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 308.

    (5)     Note.  Protection of electrical equipment from electrical
    disturbances including over-voltage is with the appropriate art even though
    the disturbance is disclosed and claimed as due to lightning; see
    particularly Class 178, Telegraphy, subclass 69 for telegraph line clearing
    and circuit maintenance; Class 379, Telephonic Communications, subclass 415
    for anti-inductive telephone systems; Class 361, Electricity: Electrical
    Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for miscellaneous safety systems for
    protecting electrical apparatus and subclasses 61+ for lightning arresters;
    and Class 324, Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclass 110 for
    electric meter protection.

    (6)     Note.  See Class 361, Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 212+ for discharging of static charges.

    (7)     Note.  See Class 256, Fences, subclass 10, for fences constructed
    to be electrically charged.


CLS 174/3
TXT Structures under subclass 2 claiming only lightning rod conductor
    structure.  The complete rod includes its appurtenances, such as the air
    terminal at one end, grounding means at the other end, mounting devices,
    etc.

    (1)     Note.  Systems of lightning rods and lightning rods claimed in
    combination with the device protected are in this class, subclass 2.

    (2)     Note.  For conduit, cable and conductor structure of general
    application, see this class, subclass 68.1 and indented subclasses,
    particularly subclass 126.1 and indented subclasses, for conductor
    structure, per se, including that claimed as lightning rods.

    (3)     Note.  For conductor supports, see this class, appropriate
    subclasses, particularly subclass 137 and indented subclasses, and Class
    248, Supports, appropriate subclasses, particularly 511+, for a supporting
    device having means for receiving a staff, and subclass 49 and indented
    subclasses, for pipe or cable supports.


CLS 174/4
TXT Structures of conductor air terminals and combinations thereof with subject
    matter within the class definition.

    (1)     Note.  These are mostly disclosed with relation to lightning
    protection systems in this class, subclasses 2 and 3.

    (2)     Note.  For radio antenna construction, see Class 343,
    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 700+.


CLS 174/5
TXT Miscellaneous structures for protecting persons or animals against
    electrical shock.  Included, for example, are (1) covers or guards adapted
    to be positioned about a charged conductor or other electrical equipment
    for preventing accidental contact therewith; (2) devices for insulating the
    body of a person or animal from ground; and (3) devices forming a shunt
    path from a charged conductor to ground in the event of accidental contact
    therewith.

    (1)     Note.  For protection of life and/or property against lightning,
    see this class, subclasses 2 and 3.

    (2)     Note.  For mere manholes, boxes or casings for housing electrical
    apparatus, see this class, subclasses 37 and 50, and their indented
    subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass does not take mere sheathed or insulated wires
    or cables, nor conductors which are installed in conduits, for which see
    this class, subclass 68.1 and indented subclasses; but short lengths of
    insulation tubes or sleeves adapted to be positioned about an exposed
    position of conductor to prevent contact therewith by persons or animals
    are here.

    (4)     Note.  See this class, subclass 136, for conduit, cable or
    conductor anti-abrasion devices.

    (5)     Note.  For insulators not limited to use as shock-hazard protective
    devices, see this class, subclass 137 and indented subclasses.

    (6)     Note.  Protective devices of the character provided for here, but
    limited by structure to use with specific electric apparatus, are
    classified in the appropriate apparatus class.

    (7)     Note.  For art structure, in general, such as in Class 2, Apparel,
    Class 81, Tools, etc., formed in whole or in part of insulating material or
    otherwise constructed to protect the wearer or user against electrical
    shock, see the appropriate art class.

    (9)     Note.  See Class 361, Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 212+ for discharging static electricity.

    (10)    Note.  See Class 191, Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles,
    subclasses 30, 31 and 35, for protected third rails and guarded trolley
    conductors.

    (11)    Note.  For devices for temporarily holding and handling conductors
    while insulators are being changed, see Class 294, Handling:  Hand and
    Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 19 and indented subclasses.

    (12)    Note.  For electrically-insulated pull chains for switches, see
    this class, subclass 138.

    (13)    Note.  For insulated handles, see Class 16, Miscellaneous Hardware,
    subclasses 116+.

    (14)    Note.  For connector coupling devices having insulation or barrier
    means to prevent contact with the "live" parts thereof, see Class 439,
    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses, and for such devices having
    automatic means for deenergizing the contacts upon separation of the
    coupling parts, see Class 200, Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers,
    subclass 51.09.


CLS 174/6
TXT Structures under the class definition having means specially designed to
    make intimate contact with the earth to establish electrical connection
    between a conductor and the earth.

    (1)     Note.  For underground installations of conductors other than earth
    grounds, see this class, subclass 37 and indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  For devices in this class involving means for establishing
    electrical connection between a box or housing and a grounded conductor,
    see this class, subclass 51.

    (4)     Note.  Class 52, Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses
    146+, 153+, 155+, and 292+ for earth anchors or shafts, e.g., poles with
    anchors or bases, not limited to use as earth grounds.

    (5)     Note.  For conduit, cable, and conductor structures having end
    structure combined with grounding means, see this class, subclass 78.

    (6)     Note.  For earth grounds employed with means for applying an
    electrical current or potential to prevent corrosion, scale formation or
    other objectionable action upon an object which may be placed upon or
    within the ground, see Class 204, Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy,
    subclasses 196 and 197.

    (7)     Note.  See Class 439, Electrical Connectors, subclasses 92+ for an
    electrical connector with circuit conductors and safety grounding
    provision; and subclasses 207+ for an electrical connector combined with a
    conduit or duct therefor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 829+, 845 and 846+
    for antennas with a ground connection or grounding structure.


CLS 174/7
TXT Structures under subclass 6 having a portion so formed as to permit it to
    be readily driven into the earth.


CLS 174/8
TXT Structures within the class definition in which a vacuum or fluid is
    employed or having means peculiarly adapted for use in connection with a
    vacuum or with material in a fluid condition.

    (1)     Note.  In the subject matter for this class, all spaces are subject
    to being filled with insulating material in a fluid or solid condition.
    Thus when the claims define structure which will provide such space,
    classification will be made in subclasses 8+ only when the claims are
    limited to the use of fluid or presence of a vacuum and/or are limited to
    structure which will have its intended function because of the use of
    materials in fluid condition or the presence of a vacuum.  This principle
    is further stated in particular Notes to the indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  Even though the material is disclosed as being of a
    character which will subsequently harden, if the means claimed provides for
    using or handling such material in a fluid condition, it is in this
    subclass or the indented subclasses.  The fluid may be in any state, i.e.,
    a liquid, gas, or vapor.

    (3)     Note.  Where the sole fluid is the atmosphere exterior to the
    device, it is excluded, even though means to seal or otherwise keep
    moisture or air out is claimed.

    (3.5)   Note.  See section 7 of the class definition and Notes 15 to 17 of
    the class definition for the subject matter included in this and the
    indented subclasses.  Note that this and the indented subclasses include
    housings and envelopes for electric lamps, electric space discharge devices
    and similar devices which are within the class and subclass definition.
    See especially indented subclasses 9, 15.1+, 17+ (see 17.05+ for the
    hermetically sealed envelopes and housings) and subclass 31.  Note that
    merely stating that the housing or envelope is for a vacuum or gas filled
    tube will not cause classification in this or the indented subclass even
    though hermetic seals for the housing or envelope are claimed.

    (4)     Note.  See this class, subclass 47, for fluid conveying conduits
    combined with conductors.

    (4.5)   Note.  See this class, subclass 101.5, for gas filled or vacuum
    spaces to merely make conduit or cable structures buoyant.

    (6)     Note.  See this class, subclass 118, for the use of powdered or
    granular material in insulated cables.

    (7)     Note.  Bare conductors made of single or plural wires are in this
    class, subclasses 126.1+.

    (8)     Note.  The exterior formation of insulators to dispose of rain or
    atmospheric moisture is in this class, subclass 211.

    (9)     Note.  See Class 218, High-Voltage Switches With Arc Preventing or
    Extinguishing Devices, subclasses 1+ for switches utilizing arc
    extinguishing fluids.

    (10)    Note.  Class 313, Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses
    11+ provides for electric lamps and electric space discharge devices which
    are provided with means for modifying the temperature of the lamp or
    discharge device (including such devices where a fluid is used as the
    temperature modifying medium), subclasses 567+ provides for lamps and
    discharge devices which have an envelope containing a gas or vapor,
    subclasses 231.01+ provides for discharge devices having means for
    introducing a fluent material to the discharge space and for lamps and
    discharge devices having means for directing the flow of fluent material in
    the lamp or discharge device.

    (11)    Note.  Class 336, Inductor Devices, provides in subclasses 55+ for
    transformer and inductive reactor structure with means to modify the
    temperature of the structure (including where a fluid is used as a
    temperature modifier).

    (12)    Note.  See Class 137, Fluid Handling, for fluid handling devices in
    general, particularly subclass 375.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 219+ for
    resonators (e.g., cavity type) and subclasses 236+ for long lines (e.g.,
    wave guide type) in which a vacuum, gas or fluid is employed.


CLS 174/9
TXT Structures under subclass 8 in which a fluid designed to carry an electric
    current is utilized; or in which a vacuum is employed for any purpose.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes devices within the class definition
    having as a part thereof an electric conductor formed by a fluid (e.g.,
    mercury).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 32, 81.6 and
    152 for electric circuit makers and breakers in which contact is made
    through a conducting fluid, usually mercury.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 2.1+ for envelopes and housings which are
    designed to be evacuated for electric lamps, electric space discharge
    devices and similar devices where no electrical structure is claimed.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses for
    electric space discharge devices which have an evacuated or gas or vapor
    filled envelope and in which a part of the current path is the evacuated or
    gas or vapor filled space, and subclasses 233 and 315+ for electric lamps
    which are provided with an evacuated envelope.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 47+ for electromagnetically activated switches
    in which contact is made through a conductive fluid.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclass 21 for electrothermal or thermal switches employing conductive
    fluid, subclasses 25+ for such switches combined with electric discharge
    means and subclasses 28+ for similar switches combined with space discharge
    devices.


CLS 174/10
TXT Cables and conduits under subclass 8 having means associated therewith
    intended to be used only prior to or during installation of the device, as
    during shipment or storage.

    (1)     Note.  For conductors not having significant electrical features
    and cables in combination with wire-placing means, see Class 254,
    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force, subclasses
    134.3+.


CLS 174/11
TXT Structures under subclass 8 including (1) means responsive to some
    condition of the fluid (for example, temperature, pressure or flow) to
    operate some device (for example, valves, switches or indicators), (2) also
    all combinations with signaling or indicating means, including liquid level
    gauges.

    (1)     Note.  Fluid pressure operated valves are included.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not include mere expansion and
    contraction devices which compensate for changes in volume of the fluid,
    unless associated with fluid controlled or indicating means. Such expansion
    and contraction devices are in this class, subclasses 12 and 13.

    (3)     Note.  See Class 73, Measuring and Testing, subclasses 40+, for
    means for detecting leaks in electrical apparatus utilizing fluids where
    the structural characteristics of the electrical apparatus are not claimed.

    (4)     Note.  For signaling means and means responsive to a condition of a
    fluid, and not limited to combination with subject matter of this class
    (174), see the appropriate class, the following being particularly noted.

    73,     Measuring and Testing.

    116,    Signals and Indicators.

    137,    Fluid Handling, particularly subclasses 455+ and 551+.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, particularly subclasses 26+.

    220,    Receptacles, particularly subclasses 721+.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, appropriate subclasses.  Note
    particularly subclasses 577+, 584+, 603+, and 635+.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, particularly subclass 152.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 13 for electric lamps
    and discharge devices with nonelectrical means for controlling the
    temperature modifying medium used with the lamp or discharge device.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 112+ for
    electric lamps and discharge devices with electrical means for controlling
    the temperature modifying medium used with the lamp or discharge device.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 14 for
    miscellaneous electrical systems having fluid condition response means for
    controlling the system for safety purposes (e.g. opening supply circuit if
    cooling medium is not effective).


CLS 174/12
TXT Structures under subclass 8 including means providing for expansion and
    contraction of the fluid.

    (1)     Note.  Search should be completed in this class, subclass 11.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 92, Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate
    subclasses for an expansible chamber device, and particularly subclasses
    34+ for a bellows type expansible chamber device, and subclasses 89+ for a
    collapsible chamber type expansible chamber device.

    (3)     Note.  See Class 138, Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 26+,
    for pressure compensators for pipes and tubular conduits.

    (4)     Note.  See Class 220, Receptacles, subclasses 720+ and indented
    subclasses, for accessory means providing for expansion in a receptacle not
    limited to electrical apparatus.


CLS 174/13
TXT Structures under subclass 12 embodied in or constituting part of the
    structure of a conduit or cable.

    (1)     Note.  For fluid containing conduit and cable structures not
    involving expansion and contraction means, see this class, subclass 24 and
    indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  For conduit and cable structures not involving fluids, see
    this class, subclass 68.1 and indented subclasses.


CLS 174/14
TXT Structures under subclass 8 having means for preserving or maintaining the
    character of the fluid.  For example, this includes means for drying gases,
    dehydrating liquids, and all forms of chemical or physical treatment of the
    fluid other than mere cooling, fluid feeding, circulating or distributing
    which is in this class, subclasses 15.1 and 16.

    (1)     Note.  Electrical equipment containing fluid dielectrics having a
    preservative ingredient as the sole preserving means are not in this
    subclass but in subclass 8 or other appropriate indented subclass.  Class
    252, Compositions, has fluid dielectric compositions containing
    preservative ingredients.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 191, Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles,
    subclass 27, for heated conduits restricted to the purpose of that class.

    (3)     Note.  For processes, compositions and apparatus for purifying
    materials, not limited to combination with subject matter for this class,
    see the appropriate class, particularly Classes 95, Gas Separation:
    Processes; 96, Gas Separation: Apparatus; 210, Liquid Purification or
    Separation, especially subclass 243, for electrical insulating or
    electricity discharging means which is ancillary to a separator and
    subclasses 167+ for separators in a closed circulating system for an art
    device not provided for elsewhere; and 261, Gas and Liquid Contact
    Apparatus.

    (4)     Note.  See Class 313, Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices,
    subclasses 545- 566 for electric lamps and electronic tubes which are
    provided with a getter or gas or vapor generating material to preserve,
    maintain, or used to secure a desired vacuum or gas or vapor atmosphere
    within the envelope of the device.

    (5)     Note.  See Class 137, Fluid Handling, subclasses 455+ pipes and
    other fluid handling devices combined with means responsive to a change in
    the conditions in the line for maintaining or correcting the condition.


CLS 174/15.1
TXT With cooling or fluid feeding, circulating or distributing:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 combined with means for feeding,
    circulating or distributing a fluid or with means for cooling either the
    fluid or the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  See section (7) of the class definition for the lines
    between this subclass, other subclasses in this class, and elsewhere for
    housings and envelopes for electrical devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for subject matter including a fluid condition responsive means for
    initiating an operation of a device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclasses for material and space
    refrigerating processes and apparatus, particularly subclass 259.2 for
    cooling of an electrical component.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous heat
    transfer apparatus including boxes or housings in combination with means to
    modify their temperature.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g.,Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses for active solid-state semiconductor devices, per
    se, especially subclass 468 for cryogenically cooled active semiconductor
    devices, and subclasses 714-716 for liquid cooled active semiconductor
    devices.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 11+ for such
    devices provided with means to modify their temperature.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 55+ for such devices provided with
    means to modify their temperature.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 51+ and 53+ for electrical
    resistors provided with cooling or heat dissipating means.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 274.1+ and
    276 for electrostatic capacitors provided with cooling or heat dissipating
    means, and subclasses 379 and 381+ for cooling of electrical and electronic
    components.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 190+ for electrical connectors
    provided with cooling or ventilating means.


CLS 174/15.2
TXT By heat pipe:

    Subject matter under subclass 15.1 wherein cooling is provided by means of
    a heat-transfer device consisting of a sealed metal tube with an inner
    lining or wicklike capillary material and a small amount of fluid which
    undergoes a change of state.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 104.11+ for structure of heat pipes, per
    se.


CLS 174/15.3
TXT For bushing or pothead:

    Subject matter under subclass 15.1 for (a) a through wall insulator
    (bushing) or, (b) a form of terminal sealed to the sheath of an electrical
    cable for making a moisture-proof connection with an external cable or
    conductor (pothead).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     12, 14, 18, 19, 20, 74+, 142+, 151+,  and 167 for structure of
    bushings and potheads (high potential end terminals) not involving cooling.


CLS 174/15.4
TXT Superconductive type:

    Subject matter under subclass 15.1 including conductors which exhibit
    nearly no resistance at very low temperature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 99 for such devices
    with superconductive features.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 216 for such devices with superconductive features.

    336,    Inductor Devices, Digest 1 for other inductors with superconductive
    features.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    particularly subclasses 230+ for high temperature (greater than 30 K)
    superconducting wire, tape, cable, or fibers, and art collection subclass
    885 for superconductors operating at or below 30 K.


CLS 174/15.5
TXT For cable, conductor or joint:

    Subject matter under subclass 15.4 wherein a cryogenic fluid is applied to
    a cable, a conductor or a joint between two or more conductors.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for superconductive cables,
    conductors or joints wherein a means for cooling or some feature
    particularly adapting the device for use with a cryogenic cooling fluid is
    included.

    (2)     Note.  Subject matter classifiable in this subclass should not be
    cross referenced in subclass 125.1 of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84+,    for joints between superconductive cables or conductors when no
    cooling feature is specified.

    125.1   for superconductive cables or conductors which do not include a
    means for cooling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 930 for
    superconductive stock material.


CLS 174/15.6
TXT For cable, conductor or joint:

    Subject matter under subclass 15.1 wherein a cryogenic fluid is applied to
    a cable, a conductor or a joint between two or more conductors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68+,    for such devices which do not include cooling features.


CLS 174/15.7
TXT For welding or furnace cable:

    Subject matter under subclass 15.1 where the cooling fluid is applied to a
    cable used in a welding or furnace application.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 137.9 for welding apparatus combined
    with cooled current supply cables.


CLS 174/16.1
TXT By ventilation or gas circulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 15.1 in which means are provided for
    ventilating a chamber or space containing gas or for circulating a gas
    therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87,     for insulators having apertures connecting interior space with the
    atmosphere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclass
    for apparatus for drying conductors and insulators not built in as part of
    the structure thereof.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 382+ for
    cooling of plural electrical components by air or other gas.

    454,    Ventilation, appropriate subclass for ventilation of general
    application.


CLS 174/16.2
TXT Of bus bars or bus ducts:

    Subject matter under subclass 16.1 for ventilating bus bars or bus ducts or
    circulating gas through or around bus bars or bus ducts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68.2,   for patents having bus bars and bus ducts.


CLS 174/16.3
TXT With heat sink:

    Subject matter under subclass 16.1 including a conductive heat transfer
    device, e.g., a "heat sink", to conduct heat from the object being cooled
    to the air or other gaseous cooling medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 80.3 and 185 for the structure of heat
    sinks, per se, not involving any electrical feature.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g.,Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses for active solid-state semiconductor devices, per
    se, especially subclasses 468, 625, 675, 706, 707, and 712-722 for such
    devices with cooling means.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 386+ for
    heat sinks associated with plural electrical components.


CLS 174/17
TXT Structures under subclass 8, other than conduits, for housing electrical
    devices or apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  For manholes, boxes and housings not limited to use with
    fluids, see this class, subclass 37 and indented subclasses, and 50 and
    indented subclasses, and the notes thereunder.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not include conduit or cable end
    structures or joints, for which see this class, subclasses 19, 20, 21, and
    22.

    (3)     Note.  See section 7 of the class definition for housings and
    envelopes for electric lamps and electric space discharge devices included
    in this subclass.

    (4)     Note.  Search Class 220, Receptacles subclasses 2.1+ for envelopes
    and housings for electric lamps and electric space discharge devices where
    no electrical structure is claimed.  Search Class 313, Electric Lamp and
    Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses for electric lamps and electric
    space discharge devices which are provided with an envelope, jacket or
    housing.  See especially subclass 324 and the subclasses specified in the
    Notes thereto.  Also, see section 7 of the class definition of Class 174.


CLS 174/17.05
TXT Boxes, housings and envelopes under subclass 17 which are hermetically
    sealed.

    (1)     Note.  Merely reciting that the envelope is provided with structure
    (such as the hermetic seals) to provide a hermetically sealed envelope for
    use with a vacuum or gas filling will not cause classification in this or
    the indented subclasses.  See subclasses 50.5+ for such hermetically sealed
    envelopes.

    (2)     Note.  Many of the envelopes and housings in this and the indented
    subclasses are of the type used for electric lamps, electric space
    discharge devices, and similar electrical devices.  See section 7 of the
    class definition.

    (3)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses provide for envelopes and
    housings which have an evacuating stem or opening.

    (4)     Note.  Most of the boxes, housings and envelopes in this and the
    indented subclasses are provided with lead-in conductors for conducting
    electrical energy to the device within the box, housing or envelope.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for this subject matter where the structure includes a current
    conductive fluid (e.g., a liquid used as part of the lead-in structure) or
    where a vacuum is used (e.g., as a space around the lead-in designed to be
    continuously evacuated to reduce leakage of air or gas).

    14,     for this subject matter where the structure includes means for
    preserving or maintaining the character of the fluid used with the box or
    housing.

    15.1,   for this subject matter where the structure includes means for
    circulating, feeding or distributing a fluid or is provided with fluid type
    cooling means for the box or housing or the device therein.

    50.5+,  and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto for the
    miscellaneous hermetically sealed boxes and housings in this class
    including those with lead- in conductors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 2.1+ for envelopes and housings for
    electric lamps and electric space discharge devices where no electrical
    structure is claimed, see indented subclass 2.2 for such envelopes and
    housings as are provided with an evacuating stem or opening.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses for
    electric lamps and electric space discharge devices which are provided with
    an envelope or a housing.  See especially subclasses 317+ of Class 313 and
    the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto.  Also see section 7 of the
    class definition of Class 174.


CLS 174/17.06
TXT Subject matter under subclass 17.05 in which a liquid is used to seal a
    joint of the box, housing or envelope.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      where the liquid is also used as an electric conductor (e.g., the
    liquid is used as a lead-in conductor).

    31.5,   for bushings, terminals and lead-ins with liquid sealed joints even
    though the wall or plate of the supporting box or housing for the bushing,
    terminal or lead-in is claimed where no characteristics of the box or
    housing are claimed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 228 for receptacles having liquid sealed
    closures and see the classes referred to in the Notes to that subclass for
    other classes which provide for structures with liquid sealed joints.


CLS 174/17.07
TXT Subject matter under subclass 17.05 wherein the box, housing or envelope is
    provided with an evacuating stem formed of conductive material which is
    also used as a lead-in conductor for conducting electrical energy to the
    device within the box, housing or envelope.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include boxes, housings or envelopes
    where a solid lead-in conductor merely passes through a nonconductor (e.g.,
    glass) evacuating stem.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      where the lead-in conductor is a liquid which is also used to seal
    a joint so as to make the joint fluid tight.


CLS 174/17.08
TXT Subject matter under subclass 17.05 in which the box, housing or envelope
    has an electrical connector combined therewith for connecting a lead-in
    conductor of the box, housing or envelope to an external conductor, or
    where the envelope, box or housing has a portion thereof formed as to be at
    least a part of an electrical connector.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes hermetically sealed envelopes such as
    used for electric lamp, electric space discharge devices and similar
    devices which are provided with a screw type or plug type base as well as
    boxes, housings and envelopes where the lead-in conductors are either
    shaped so as to form electrical connectors or are of sufficient rigidity to
    form contacts (usually plug type contacts) subject to the limitations of
    (2) Note.  It also includes devices where a portion of the enclosing wall
    of the envelope is shaped so as to form an electrical connector.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass provides for the structure of the box, housing
    or envelope with connector structure where significant structure of the
    housing, box or receptacle is recited in addition to that necessary to
    support or mount the electrical connector.  See section 17.5 of the class
    definition of this class (174).  See Class 439, Electrical, Connectors,
    appropriate subclasses for electrical connector structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50.52+, for other hermetically sealed envelopes, boxes and housings in this
    class which are provided with an electrical connector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 318.01+ and the
    subclasses specified in the Notes thereto for electric lamps and electric
    space discharge devices which have a hermetically sealed envelope with an
    electrical connector (e.g., base) thereon or formed as a part thereof.


CLS 174/18
TXT Boxes and housings under subclass 17 having bushing or terminal means
    specially modified for cooperation with the structure of the housing or
    with some device or fluid contained therein.

    (1)     Note.  Inventions under subclass 8 relating merely to the mounting
    of a bushing or terminal in a wall or plate are in this class, subclass 31,
    even though the wall or plate is disclosed or claimed as a box or housing
    where no characteristics thereof, such as its structure or contents, are
    claimed.

    (1.5)   Note.  Search this class, subclasses 17.05+ for hermetically sealed
    envelopes and housings under subclass 8 such as are used for electric lamps
    and electric space discharge devices and which are provided with lead-in
    conductors for transmitting electrical energy through the wall of the
    envelope or housing.


CLS 174/19
TXT Structures under subclass 8 at the end of a conduit, cable or conductor for
    terminating the same, and commonly known as potheads or terminals.  These
    devices have means for engagement with the sheath or conduit at or near the
    end thereof and provide means either to lead the conducting element or
    elements to the exterior of the device or provide electrical connection
    between the interior conductors and the exterior of the device.

    (1)     Note.  For such structures not involving fluids, see this class,
    subclasses 60, 73.1, and 74 and indented subclasses, and the notes
    thereunder.


CLS 174/20
TXT End structure under subclass 19 having means for isolating the fluid in the
    conduit or cable from a fluid in the terminal housing or casing.

    (1)     Note.  For other fluid stops and seals, see this class, subclasses
    22 and 23.


CLS 174/21
TXT Structures under subclass 8 for joining electrically and/or mechanically
    two or more conduits, cables or conductors.

    (1)     Note.  For nonfluid cable or conduit joints see this class,
    subclasses 73.1 and 84 and indented subclasses, and the notes thereunder.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 156, Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical
    Manufacture, subclass 49 for methods of splicing indefinite length electric
    conductors.


CLS 174/22
TXT Joints under subclass 21 having means for preventing passage of fluid from
    one section to another.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 20 and 23, for other fluid
    stops and seals.


CLS 174/23
TXT Structures under subclass 8 having means for preventing passage of fluid
    from one section to another or for sealing the ends or outlets to prevent
    fluid leakage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for a conduit or cable using or adapted to use a vacuum or fluid
    having a temporary sealing device for use during transportation or storage.

    20,     for a conduit or cable end structure using or adapted to use a
    vacuum or fluid including a seal.

    22,     for a conduit or cable joint using or adapted to use a vacuum or
    fluid including a seal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 89+ for a plug or closure
    for a pipe or tubular conduit.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    48 for a method of making a conductor of indefinite length including
    filling a void or cavity with fluent material.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 602+ for a static contact seal intended for use on a
    pipe, conduit or cable.


CLS 174/24
TXT Structures under subclass 8 pertaining to the makeup of electric cables or
    conductors, insulated or uninsulated, and of the conduits therefor,
    including the arrangement of the wires or cables therein.

    (1)     Note.  Where the sole fluid is air under atmospheric conditions,
    this subclass takes those patents dealing with arrangements to provide air
    spaces for a particular purpose. Plural conductors or cables spaced within
    a conduit or sheath with or without means for maintaining them in spaced
    relation are in this class, subclass 68.1 and indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass and the indented subclasses take such
    structure having means for handling or introducing fluid materials or
    permitting their flow in fluid condition, and also such structure where the
    material claimed is fluid under conditions of use.  All other patents on
    such structure which claim a material which is solid in condition of use
    (even though applied during manufacture in fluid condition) or which claim
    material in broad terms not limited to being fluid in condition of use, are
    in this class, subclass 68.1 and indented subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  Lightning protection means employing fluids are in this
    class, subclasses 2 and 3.

    (4)     Note.  Earth grounds employing fluids are in this class, subclasses
    6 and 7.

    (5)     Note.  This class, subclass 47, has conduits having both electrical
    conductor channels and separate fluid channels.

    (5.5)   Note.  See this class, subclass 101.5, for buoyant conduits, cables
    and conductors.

    (6)     Note.  Mere bare hollow conductors are in this class, subclass
    126.1 and indented subclasses.

    (7)     Note.  For third rail or trolley wire conduits having draining
    means, see Class 191, Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, subclass 26.


CLS 174/25
TXT Structures under subclass 24 of the type in which the conductor insulating
    material is impregnated with a fluid.

    (1)     Note.  For conduit, cable or conductor structures where an
    impregnant is claimed generally or is limited to the type that solidifies
    under conditions of use, see this class, subclasses 96, 98, 102, and
    indented subclasses, 110 and indented subclasses, particularly subclass 121.


CLS 174/26
TXT Structures under subclass 25 having more than one conductor.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 103, 104 and 113 and indented
    subclasses.


CLS 174/27
TXT Structures under subclass 24 having a plurality of conductors at least two
    of which are arranged in substantially parallel or twisted relation.

    (1)     Note.  "Parallel" is used in this definition to exclude the
    concentric or coaxial type in this class, subclasses 28 and 29, but a
    combination of these is in this subclass (27).

    (2)     Note.  See this class, subclass 26, and the notes thereunder.


CLS 174/28
TXT Structures under subclass 24 having at least one conductor surrounded by
    and spaced from the inner walls of a tube or conduit which tube or conduit
    may be of either conducting or nonconducting material.

    (1)     Note.  For similar structures having plural parallel or twisted
    conductors (not arranged in surrounding relation), see this class, subclass
    27.

    (2)     Note.  For similar structures having solid insulation filling the
    space, see this class, subclasses 96, 98, 102, and indented subclasses and
    111.

    (3)     Note.  For conduits having interior conductor supporting means, see
    this class, subclasses 99 and 100.


CLS 174/29
TXT Cables under subclass 28 in which a central inner element is spaced from an
    outer concentric element by spirally-applied spacing means.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 131.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 592 for metallic
    stock of helical configuration or having a helical component.


CLS 174/30
TXT Structures under subclass 8 for electrically insulating at least two
    objects from each other or an object from ground.

    (1)     Note.  For similar devices not involving the use of fluids, see
    this class, subclass 137 and indented subclasses.  Patents claiming fluid
    tight joints between various parts of the insulator assembly, where the
    structure otherwise could be used with solid materials only, are placed in
    such subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  See Note (8) to the definition of subclass 8 of this class.


CLS 174/31
TXT Structures under subclass 30 (1) having a passage arranged substantially
    axially thereof for receiving a conductor or other element to be insulated,
    and/or (2) for insulating a conductor or other object from a wall or plate
    through which the conductor or other object passes.  Such devices are
    commonly known as bushings, terminals, and lead-ins.

    (1)     Note.  The search should be continued in this class, subclass 18.

    (2)     Note.  For similar devices not limited to use with fluids, see this
    class, subclasses 142, 143, 151, and indented subclasses, 154, 155, 156,
    157, and 167. Merely claiming a fluid tight structure (such as having a
    fluid tight joint) will not cause classification in this subclass (31)
    where there is no other structure claimed which is especially provided for
    use with a fluid.  A structure which provides a chamber to contain a fluid
    will be classified in this subclass (31).

    (3)     Note.  See conduit and cable end structures, this class, subclasses
    19, 20 and 74 and indented subclasses, particularly subclass 75, for
    related structures where one end of the insulator structure engages the
    sheath or conduit (conductive or insulative) surrounding the conductors at
    or near the end thereof.

    (4)     Note.  Search Class 313, Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices,
    subclass 120 for spark plugs having fluid feed or air vent means.  This
    class (174) provides for spark plugs with such vents when the sparking
    electrodes are not claimed (i.e., when only the bushing and vent structure
    is claimed).


CLS 174/31.5
TXT Subject matter under subclass 31 in which a liquid is used to seal a joint
    of the structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17.06,  for hermetically sealed envelopes, boxes, and housings, within the
    definition of subclass 9 including those with bushings, terminals and
    lead-ins, in which a liquid is used to seal a joint.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 45 for receptacles having liquid sealed
    closures and see the classes referred to in the Notes to that subclass for
    other classes which provide for structures with liquid sealed joints.


CLS 174/32
TXT Structures under the class definition having means for preventing or
    reducing the detrimental effects due to either self-inductance of a single
    conductor or mutual inductance between plural conductors.

    (1)     Note.  Where the only anti-inductive means is constituted by one or
    more surrounding conduits or sheaths or conduit partition walls of
    conductive material, classification is in this class, subclass 68.1 and
    indented subclasses, particularly subclass 102 and indented subclasses, in
    which subclasses the surrounding sheath may be a conductive coating.  If
    shields or electrical means in addition to the conduit or cable structure
    are provided, they are in this subclass (32) or appropriate indented
    subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  Where only the physical structure of a single bare
    conductor, whether of single or plural strands, is claimed, it is in this
    class, subclass 126.1 and indented subclasses, even though anti-inductive
    characteristics are alleged in the claim.

    (3)     Note.  For conductor, cable and conduit structures having
    air-spaces or utilizing fluids, even though the structure is for
    anti-inductive purposes, see this class, subclass 24 and indented
    subclasses, especially subclasses 27, 28 and 29.

    (4)     Note.  Search appropriate classes for particular apparatus having
    anti-inductive means as a part thereof.

    (5)     Note.  For electrical systems having anti-inductive means, see the
    appropriate class, particularly Class 178, Telegraphy, subclasses 45, 49
    and 69;  Class 307, Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems,
    subclasses 89+; Class 333, Wave Transmission Lines and Networks,
    particularly subclass 12, for transmission line inductive interference
    reduction systems; and Class 340, Communications: Electrical, particularly
    subclasses 288+ and 310.07. Electrical conductors combined with condensers,
    reactors or resistors have been classified as electrical systems. Class
    379, Telephonic Communications, subclass 415.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 342 for noninductive
    filaments for electric lamps and electric space discharge devices.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 61+ for electrical resistors with
    inductance reducing means.


CLS 174/33
TXT Structures under subclass 32 claiming means by which conductors are
    transposed in relative position.

    (1)     Note.  For inductors with coils or windings having parallel
    connected conductors which are transposed, see Class 336, Inductor Devices,
    subclass 187.


CLS 174/34
TXT Structures under subclass 33 in which the conductors are associated
    together (1) in cable form or (2) in the same single or multi-duct conduit.

    (1)     Note.  Conduit and cable structures combined with transposition
    boxes are in this class, subclass 33.

    (2)     Note.  For multi-duct pipe or tubular conduit structures, per se,
    having the passages transposed, even though claimed as electrical conduits
    and even though claimed as made of dielectric, conductive or composite
    materials, search Class 138, Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 111+,
    and Class 285, Pipe Joints or Couplings, particularly subclasses 120.1+,
    especially subclass 132 for plural passage fittings with branches.

    (3)     Note.  For conduit, cable, or conductor structures having twisted
    conductors without reference to any anti-inductive feature, see this class,
    subclass 68.1 and indented subclasses, particularly subclasses 102 and 110
    and their indented subclasses.


CLS 174/35
TXT Means under subclass 32 in which an electrical shield is used.  Shields or
    screens, per se, not classifiable in other main classes, are here.

    (1)     Note. Box and housing structures having added means for insuring
    good electrical contact between the body and closure, body and conduit, or
    cable sheath is in this and indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note. See sections 1 and 7 of the Class Definition for limits to a
    combination of an envelope, box or housing such as are used for electric
    lamps, electric space discharge devices, and similar devices and an
    electrical shield and for such envelopes, boxes and housings which include
    an electric shielding means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50+,    for a mere box or housing structure that may include conductive
    material or have shielding properties.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    66,     Textiles: Knitting, subclass 202 for fabrics or articles involving
    selection of strands of a peculiar nature.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 146.5+ for shielded
    internal combustion engine ignition systems.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclass 425 for metal being used in the
    texture of the fabric.

    245,    Wire Fabrics and Structure.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclass 919 for a seal including an electrical feature or
    subclass 920 for a seal including an electromagnetic shielding feature.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 313 for an electrical
    shield or static charge distribution means, especially the Search Notes
    thereto for electric lamps and space discharge devices that are provided
    with shields or screens for the lamp or discharge device or some part
    thereof, and subclasses 326+ for the structure of shields which are limited
    by claimed subject matter to use with electric lamps or electric space
    discharge devices.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclass 85 for an
    electric current and/or voltage supply system for an electric lamp and/or
    electric space discharge device of the gas or vapor ionization type, having
    radiation shielding means for the system.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 68 for a shielding means involving structure
    other than that of transformers, per se, and subclass 170 for a shielding
    means for interstage transformer coupling.

    334,    Tuners, subclass 85 for electrical tuners provided with shielding
    means.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 84+ for transformers and inductive
    reactors in combination with an electric or magnetic shielding means.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 841+ for antennas
    with an electrical shield; subclass 851 for antennas with a coupling
    network which may be shielded for radiation suppression; and subclass 905
    for antennas combined with a transmission line which may be shielded.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 607+ for an electrical connector
    having or providing an inductive or capacitive shield.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 300+ for shielded radio receivers.


CLS 174/36
TXT Means under subclass 35 in which the shielding means is applied to a
    conductor only.

    (1)     Note.  See Notes (1), (2) and (5) to the definition of subclass 32
    of this class.

    (2)     Note.  See this class, subclass 102 and indented subclasses, for
    conductors that are conductively armored or sheathed.


CLS 174/37
TXT Structures under the class definition specialized for positioning
    underground.

    (1)     Note.  Manholes, i.e., underground work chambers, are in this
    subclass.  Single manholes with radiating conduits or cables are in this
    subclass, but plural interconnected manholes are in subclass 38, and
    manholes combined with road or pavement structure are in subclass 39.

    (2)     Note.  Such structures employing fluids or a vacuum are in this
    class, subclass 8 and indented subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 48 and 49, for wall mounted
    conduits or housings.

    (4)     Note.  Mere box or housing structures are in this class, subclass
    50 and indented subclasses.

    (5)     Note.  Mere conduit or cable structures are in this class, subclass
    68.1 and indented subclasses, end structure being in subclass 74 and
    indented subclasses, even though disclosed for use in manholes.

    (6)     Note.  See:





    Class 405, Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 132+, for tunnels
    and subways;

    Class 137, Fluid Handling, subclass 236, for fluid handling systems
    including geographic feature, and subclasses 363+ for fluid handling
    devices including ground supports.

    Class 138, Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 105, for pipes in a trench;
    subclass 108 for underground conduits for supporting cables therein; and
    subclass 113 for underground conduits for supporting pipes therein.



    Class 404, Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 3, 4+ and 17+
    for conduits combined with pavement, curb or gutter structure and not
    limited solely to electrical use.

                    These classes have the structures there provided for when
    not restricted solely to electrical apparatus, even though electrical
    apparatus may be included as part of the combination.

    (7)     Note.  Search Class 429, Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing
    Apparatus, Product, and Process, subclass 47 for a battery wherein a
    portion of the earth constitutes a part of the battery.

    (8)     Note.  See Class 52 subclasses 169.1+ for particular constructions
    with a specified terranean relationship.

    (9)     Note.  For underground transmission to vehicles, see Class 104,
    Railways, particularly subclass 140 and indented subclasses, and Class 191,
    Electricity: Transmission to Vehicles, particularly subclass 23 and
    indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 236+ for long
    transmission lines having distributed electrical parameters, and subclasses
    1+ for plural channel systems of such lines.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 719 for antennas
    buried underground or submerged under water.


CLS 174/38
TXT Structure under subclass 37 arranged to deliver energy to plural points;
    also combined overhead and underground installations.

    (1)     Note.  Single manholes with plural conduits or cables radiating
    therefrom are in this class, subclass 37.

    (2)     Note.  See this class, subclass 43, for overhead distributing
    structures.

    (3)     Note.  Where an electrical system, i.e., more than the mere
    physical structure or arrangement to lead conductors to plural points, is
    claimed, see the appropriate electrical class, particularly Class 307,
    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 11+ for
    plural load circuit systems, and 43+ for systems having plural supply
    circuits or sources.


CLS 174/39
TXT Structure under subclass 37 combined with the structure of a road or
    pavement, including sidewalks, gutters and curbs.

    (1)     Note.  For this combination complete the search in Class 404, Road
    Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 3, 4+ and 17+, for conduits
    combined with pavement, curb or gutter structure and not limited solely to
    electrical use.


CLS 174/40
TXT Structures under the class definition specialized for positioning overhead.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and indented subclasses for the most part are
    for means for supporting overhead conductors, cables and conduits.

    (2)     Note.  Insulator structures with means for securing the same to
    some support and/or to secure the conductor, etc., thereto are in this
    class, subclass 137 and indented subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  For overhead electrical means for transmission to vehicles,
    see Class 191, Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles.

    (4)     Note.  For overhead supports for cables and conduits not limited by
    insulation or other claimed characteristics to electrical apparatus, see
    Class 248, Supports, subclass 49 and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 134.3+ for process or apparatus for placing or stringing
    overhead wire, strand or cable.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 236+ for long
    transmission lines having distributed electrical parameters, and subclasses
    1+ for plural channel systems of such lines.


CLS 174/41
TXT Structures under subclass 40 in which the electrical equipment is suspended
    from an overhead or messenger cable.

    (1)     Note.  Complete the search in Class 248, Supports, subclass 61, for
    pipe or cable supports not restricted by insulation or other
    characteristics to electrical conductors.

    (2)     Note.  Insulator structures having means specially designed to
    engage a wire for supporting the insulator are in this class, subclass 137
    and indented subclasses; see particularly subclass 146, for wire mid-line
    spacers, and subclass 160, for other wire engaging insulator suspending
    means.

    (3)     Note.  See Class 24, Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses
    115+, for cord and rope holders, per se.

    (4)     Note.  See Class 191, Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles,
    particularly subclasses 40+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 388+ for means supported by, and maintaining relative spacing
    between, longitudinal runs or an endless, load carrying or moving cable.


CLS 174/42
TXT Structures under subclass 40 having means to damp out mechanical vibrations
    in the supported conductor, cable or conduit.

    (1)     Note.  Dampers, per se, not claimed in combination with supporting
    structure are here.

    (2)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 146 and 147, for insulators
    for spacing wires between supports and having a mechanical vibration
    damping function.

    (3)     Note.  See Class 248, Supports, subclasses 63 and 560+ for
    resilient supports having such means and not restricted by insulation or
    other characteristics to electrical conductors, cables or conduits.

    (4)     Note.  See Class 267, Spring Devices, subclass 178, for a spring
    device of the coil spring type useful in vibration dampening support
    structure for overhead conductors.


CLS 174/43
TXT Structures under subclass 40 arranged (1) to deliver electrical energy to a
    plurality of points or (2) to be supported at a plurality of spaced points.

    (1)     Note.  For other distributing arrangements, see this class,
    subclasses 38, 49, 71, and 72.

    (2)     Note.  See this class, subclass 41, for the messenger cable type of
    plural point support.

    (3)     Note.  See this class, subclass 148 and indented subclasses, for
    plural insulator assemblies to support plural conductors at one place or to
    support single conductors at one place.

    (4)     Note.  For electrical systems of transmission and distribution,
    i.e., more than the mere physical structure to support at, or lead
    conductors to, a plurality of points, see the appropriate class,
    particularly Class 307, Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems,
    subclasses 11+ for plural load circuit systems, and subclasses 43+ for
    systems having plural supply circuits or sources.


CLS 174/44
TXT Structures under subclass 40 having (1) conductor connectors or terminal
    panels, or (2) means to lead or "fan" the conductors of a plural conductor
    cable to separated points on the overhead support.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 59, 60, 175, and 176 and indented
    subclasses, for cable and conduit junction boxes and terminal structures
    which include means for separating the conductors of a plural conductor
    cable or conduit in a box or at the end of the cable or conduit.


CLS 174/45
TXT Structures under subclass 40 claiming single towers, poles or posts.  The
    combination of tower, pole or post with its cross-arms is here.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 43, for patents claiming two or
    more towers, poles or posts in combination.  A single tower may be
    comprised of a plurality of poles or posts.

    (2)     Note.  For insulators and their securing means, per se, see this
    class, subclass 137 and indented subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  See Class 52, Static Structures (e.g., Buildings),
    subclasses 40, 146+, 153+, 155+, 292+, 651.01+, and 720.1+ for a mast, pole
    or post not restricted to electrical use.

    (4)     Note.  See Class 191, Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles,
    particularly subclasses 32, and 33 and indented subclasses, for similar
    structures specially designed for transmission to moving vehicles or
    objects, i.e., to support a conductor for contact by a relatively movable
    collector.

    (5)     Note.  See Class 362, Illumination, subclass 431, for lamp-post.

    (6)     Note.  See Class 343, Communications: Radio Wave Antennas,
    subclasses 874+ for mast or tower type antennas; subclass 886 for antennas
    horizontally suspended between poles or standards; and subclasses 890+ for
    antennas on a post, standard or tower.


CLS 174/46
TXT Structures within the class definition in the form of handles.

    (1)     Note.  Complete the search in Class 200, Electricity:  Circuit
    Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.85+ for switches actuated concurrently
    with the use of a manipulating, operating or carrying handle; and subclass
    332.2, for handles having mechanical switches.

    (2)     Note.  For conductor take-up reels in handles limited to use with
    electrical conductors, see Class 191, Electricity: Transmission to
    Vehicles, subclass 12 and indented subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  See Class 242, Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, for combined
    handle and reel structures, particularly subclass 588.2 for carriers on
    handles.

    (4)     Note.  See Class 248, Supports, subclasses 51 and 52, for tool cord
    supports.

    (5)     Note.  For mere insulated handles, see Class 16, Miscellaneous
    Hardware, subclass 116 and indented subclasses.

    (6)     Note.  For electric space discharge devices (e.g., spark ignitors)
    which are provided with handles, see Class 313, subclass 48, for such space
    discharge devices, per se, with handles and Class 315, subclass 33 for such
    handles in combination with the source of supply, the space discharge
    device and the circuit elements so as to make a portable-self-contained
    device.

    (7)     Note.  For inductors with handles, see Class 336, Inductor Devices,
    subclass 66.


CLS 174/47
TXT Structures for conveying fluids and also for conducting electrical energy.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 8 and indented subclasses, for
    structures in which fluids are employed for or applied to the electrical
    apparatus.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 405, Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses
    132+ and Class 404, Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 3, 4+
    and 17+, for conduits combined with pavement, curb or gutter structure and
    not limited solely to electrical use.

    (3)     Note.  See Class 138, Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 129+,
    137+ and 140+ for composite pipes having metal, frequently in the form of
    wire strands. Where the structure incorporates the wire in insulated
    relation for electrical conductive purposes, it is in this class (174).

    (4)     Note.  See Class 340, Communications: Electrical, subclass 320 for
    electric systems for signaling along a fire hose or other fluid conduit.

    (5)     Note.  Search Class 313, Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices,
    subclasses 11+, for electric lamps and space discharge devices which are
    provided with means for conducting a temperature modifying fluid to the
    lamp or discharge device, the fluid conducting means being designed for use
    also as an electrical conductor, and Class 315, Electric Lamp and Discharge
    Devices: Systems, subclass 50, for electric lamps and discharge devices
    which have means for conducting a temperature modifying medium to the lamp
    or discharge device, the fluid conducting means being designed for use as
    an electrical impedance.


CLS 174/48
TXT Conduits and/or housings within the class definition mounted on, in or
    through the walls of building structures.

    (1)     Note.  For lightning protective means combined with building
    structures, see this class, subclasses 2 and 3.

    (2)     Note.  For box or housing supporting means not limited to wall
    mounting, see this class, subclass 50 and indented subclasses, particularly
    subclasses 58 and 63.

    (3)     Note.  For bushing type insulators mounted in a wall or plate, see
    this class, subclass 151, and indented subclasses.

    (4)     Note.  Conduits and conduit systems specially installed in a wall,
    floor or ceiling of a building, where characteristics not limited solely to
    electrical use are claimed, such as the presence of conductors, use of
    insulators in addition to the conduit structure, etc., will be found in
    Class 52, Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 220.1+.

    (5)     Note.  Wall mounted receptacles, including outlet and junction box
    type, are in Class 220, Receptacles, subclasses 3.3 and indented subclasses
    and 476+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 201.

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 42+ for
    horizontally supported planar surface combined with the structure of a
    building, and subclass 152 for a laterally mounted shelf.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 357+ for fluid handling devices
    including a building or part thereof as a support.

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, subclass 33.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 87.01+.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclasses 29.5 and 400+.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 27.1+ and 317+.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 242 and 245+, for wall
    mounted housings of general utility.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 236+ for long
    transmission lines having distributed electrical parameters, and subclasses
    1+ for plural channel systems of such lines.


CLS 174/49
TXT Structures under subclass 48 having two or more spaced outlets and/or
    having two or more conduits.


CLS 174/50
TXT Boxes and housings within the class definition limited by claimed structure
    to electrical use, but having no claimed characteristics limiting the same
    to particular characters of electrical equipment classifiable in other main
    classes.

    (1)     Note.  The mere naming of the electrical device housed will not
    exclude the same from this class, but where characteristics of the device
    housed are claimed, classification is with such device.

    (1.5)   Note.  This and the indented subclasses include envelopes, casings,
    and housings such as are used for electric lamps, electric space discharge
    devices and similar electrical devices which are enclosed in vitreous,
    ceramic, nonmetallic plastic or metallic envelopes or casings.  See section
    7 of the class definition.  See especially indented subclasses 50.5+ where
    the envelope, box or housing is hermetically sealed.  In many of these
    devices the casing, housing or envelope is provided with lead-in wires or
    conductors for conducting electric current through the wall of the
    envelope, casing or housing.

    (2)     Note.  See this class, subclass 8 and indented subclasses, for
    boxes and housings limited to use with fluids or vacuum, particularly
    subclasses 17 and 18.

    (3)     Note.  See this class, subclass 37 and indented subclasses, for
    underground housings, and subclass 40 and indented subclasses, for overhead
    housings.

    (4)     Note.  See this class, subclass 46, for housings in the form of
    handles.

    (5)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 48 and 49, for wall mounted
    housings.

    (6)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 74 and 84 and their indented
    subclasses, for conduit, cable and conductor end structures and joints.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 220.1+ for building
    constructions with service duct not limited to electrical features.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device.

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers.

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 168.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package.

    215,    Bottles and Jars.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 2.1+ for envelopes or housings for electric
    lamps or similar devices where no electrical structure is claimed,
    subclasses 3.2+ for receptacles having provision for extending strands,
    rods, pipes, etc., through the receptacle wall or for coupling them to the
    receptacle wall.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 317 and 342+.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses, for
    electric lamps and discharge devices which are provided with an envelope,
    box or casing where significant structure is claimed which limits the
    subject matter to use as an electrical lamp or electric space discharge
    device.  See Section 7 of the class definition for the envelopes for lamps
    and discharge devices included in this class.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 156 for electric
    meter casings.

    334,    Tuners, subclass 85 for an electrical tuner provided with housing
    means.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 278 for magnets and electromagnets with housings.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 90+ for transformers and inductive
    reactors in combination with a casing or housing.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclasses 20, 34, 112, 121, 186+, 327+, 380+, 398, and 414+ for specific
    types of electrothermal and thermal operated switches with housing.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 226+ for an incased, embedded, or
    housed fixed electrical resistor.  For the lines between Class 174 and
    Class 338, see sections XIII and XVII under the class definition of Class
    338.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 331+ for
    boxes, mounting and housing means with plural diverse electrical
    components.  Even though a box or housing is claimed by name only in
    conjunction with said plural diverse electrical components, the patent is
    excluded from Class 174 and located only in Class 361.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 362+.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process, subclasses 158, 161, and 163 for battery receptacles having
    conductor structure.


CLS 174/50.5
TXT Envelopes under subclass 50 which are hermetically sealed.

    (1)     Note.  The term envelope is defined to include boxes, housings or
    other hermetically sealed receptacles in this and the indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  Many of the envelopes in this and the indented subclasses
    are of the type used for electric lamps, electric space discharge devices
    and similar electrical devices.  See section 7 of the class definition.

    (3)     Note.  Most of the envelopes in this and the indented subclasses
    are provided with lead-in conductors for conducting electrical energy to
    the device within the envelope.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9       and 17.05+, and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto for
    this subject matter where a fluid is used or where the structure is
    provided with means peculiarly adapted for use with a fluid (e.g., an
    evacuating stem or opening or a fluid seal), and see subclass 9 where the
    structure includes a current conductive fluid or where a vacuum is used.

    35,     for this subject matter where the structure includes an
    electrostatic or electromagnetic shielding means, and for envelopes with a
    shield which wholly or partially surrounds the envelope.

    65,     for other boxes and housings under subclass 50 which are provided
    with means to couple a cable, wire or conduit to the box or housing.

    151+,   for devices (e.g., bushings) for insulating a conductor from a wall
    or plate through which the conductor extends (the bushing may be fluid
    tight).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses
    for vacuum switches and subclasses 32, 81.6 and 152 for liquid contact
    (mercury switches).

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 2.1+ for envelopes (including those which
    are hermetically sealed) for electric lamps, electric space discharge
    devices, and similar devices.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 317+ and the
    subclasses specified in the Notes thereto for electric lamp and electric
    space discharge devices which are provided with a hermetically sealed
    envelope. See section 7 of the class definition of this class (174) with
    respect to the distinction between Classes 174 and 313.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclass 28+ for electrothermal switches with hermetically sealed housing,
    casing or envelope.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 54, 63, 110+, and
    140+ for electric furnaces having a sealed gas filled or evacuated chamber.

    403,    Joints and Connections subclasses 179 and 265+ for miscellaneous
    joints between diverse materials bonded together.


CLS 174/50.51
TXT Subject matter under subclass 50.5 having a casing or jacket surrounding
    the envelope or a portion thereof, or having the envelope wholly or
    partially covered with a coating or similar covering material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes envelopes within the definition of
    subclass 50.5 which have an integral double wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     where the casing, jacket or covering is an electromagnetic or
    electrostatic shield.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 2.1+ for the structure of double walled and
    coated envelopes for electric lamps and electric space discharge devices
    where no electrical structure is claimed.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 312 and the
    subclasses specified in the Notes thereto for electric lamps and discharge
    devices which are provided with a hermetically sealed envelope and a
    separable casing or jacket surrounding the envelope, and subclasses 317+
    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto for electric lamp and
    discharge devices having integral double wall hermetically sealed envelopes
    or a covered or coated hermetically sealed envelope.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for a single or plural layer stock material and for miscellaneous articles,
    see especially subclass 34 for a plurality of light transmissive sheets or
    webs spaced from each other and hermetically sealed at their edges and
    enclosing a gas space therebetween and subclasses 34.1+ for a container
    type miscellaneous article.


CLS 174/50.52
TXT Subject matter under subclass 50.5 in which the envelope has combined
    therewith an electrical connector for connecting a lead-in conductor of the
    envelope to an external conductor, or where the envelope has a portion
    thereof formed so as to be at least a part of an electrical connector.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclass includes hermetically sealed
    envelopes such as are used for electric lamps, electric space discharge
    devices, and similar devices which are provided with a screw type or plug
    type base as well as envelopes where the lead-in conductors are either
    shaped so as to form electrical connectors or are of sufficient rigidity to
    form contacts (usually plug type contacts) subject to the limitations of
    (2) Note.  The indented subclass includes devices where a portion of the
    enclosing wall of the envelope is shaped so as to form an electrical
    connector.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass provides for the structure of the envelope
    with connector structure where significant structure of envelope is recited
    in addition to that necessary to support or mount the electrical connector.
     See section 17.5 of the class definition of this class (174).  See Class
    439, Electrical Connectors, for electrical connector structure, and see
    especially subclasses 611+ for the combination of a vitreous envelope and
    an electrical connector in which no significant structure of the envelope
    is recited other than that necessary to support or mount the electrical
    connector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17.08,  for this subject matter where a fluid is used or where structure is
    provided peculiarly adapted for use with a fluid (e.g., an evacuating stem
    or opening).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 318.01+ and the
    subclasses specified in the Notes thereto for electric lamps and electric
    space discharge devices which have a hermetically sealed envelope with an
    electrical connector (e.g., a base) thereon or formed as a part thereof.


CLS 174/50.53
TXT Subject matter under subclass 50.52 where the envelope has a portion
    thereof formed so as to be at least a part of an electrical connector.

    (1)     Note.  The portion of the envelope which forms the part of the
    electrical connector may be a metallic wall portion which is used to
    complete the wall portion of a glass or ceramic envelope.

    (2)     Note.  Devices where the lead-in wires only are formed or are of
    sufficient rigidity to form contacts are in subclass 50.52 and not in this
    subclass.  This subclass includes devices having a wall portion sealed with
    a metallic closure which is designed for use as an electrical connector.

    (3)     Note.  Included in this subclass are envelopes of metals, glass or
    other ceramic which have a portion formed with screw threads so as to form
    a part of a screw threaded base type connector.  The threads may or may not
    be covered with conductive material.


CLS 174/50.54
TXT Subject matter under subclass 50.5 having means to mount an electrical
    device within the envelope.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides only for hermetically sealed
    envelopes where the mounting means within the envelope is of general
    utility, that is, where the mounting structure claimed could be used for
    mounting any one of a number of different devices such as electrical
    condensers, inductances, resistors, switches, etc.  The mere recitation of
    an electrode or electrode assembly broadly recited as the thing mounted
    will not exclude the device from this subclass, but if the electrode is
    claimed as a filament, anode, grid, cathode, or other specific electrode in
    the case of a lamp or electric space discharge device the device will be
    excluded and will be found in Class 313, Electric Lamp and Discharge
    Devices, subclasses 238+.

            Where the supporting structure is not of general utility, but is of
    the type useful only in mounting the electrodes of a lamp or electric space
    discharge device, the patent is excluded from this class (174) and will be
    found in Class 313 even though the electrodes are not claimed specifically.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52.1,   for other boxes and housings under subclass 50 with means for
    mounting an electrical device within the box or housing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 228+.  See (1) Note
    above with reference to Class 313.


CLS 174/50.55
TXT Subject matter under subclass 50.5 having a hollow tubular lead-in
    conductor passing through the wall of the envelope and having another
    lead-in conductor arranged within the hollow lead-in conductor.

    (1)     Note.  The lead-in conductors are ordinarily concentrically
    arranged. This subclass includes therefor envelopes with co-axial lead-ins
    where no electrical characteristics of the lead-ins such as the inductance,
    capacity, or resonant features are involved and also includes envelopes
    where the portion of the lead-ins which passes through the wall are stepped
    or displaced along the length of each other as in some types of "light
    house" tubes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50.53,  for this subject matter where the hollow tubular lead-in is a part
    of the envelope wall and is designed also for use as an electrical
    connector and the other lead is arranged within the hollow lead-in (as in
    some types of "light house" tubes).

    151+,   for devices (e.g., bushings) for insulating a plurality of
    concentric arranged conductors from a wall or plate through which the
    conductors extend (the bushing may be fluid tight).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 44, for concentrically arranged transmission
    lines including those with hermetically sealed joints between the
    conductors and those designed to pass through a wall or plate where
    electrical characteristics of the conductors, such as the inductance,
    capacity or resonant features are involved.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 39 for
    electric lamps and electric space discharge devices which have structurally
    combined therewith a wave guide or co-axial high frequency transmission
    line (the wave guide or coaxial line may extend through the walls of the
    envelope of the device).


CLS 174/50.56
TXT Subject matter under subclass 50.5 wherein the envelope has at least a
    portion of its wall formed of metal or other conductive material with a
    lead-in conductor which passes through the metal or conductive wall
    position and is insulated therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes patents where the envelope is formed
    substantially entirely of metal and has lead-in conductors passing through
    the wall.

    (2)     Note.  Where only the structure of the lead-in conductors, the wall
    of the envelope, and the means for insulating it from the wall is claimed,
    the device is classified in subclasses 151+ of this class as a bushing.
    Such structure is classified in subclasses 151+ even if the envelope is
    claimed where no characteristics of the envelope are claimed in addition to
    the bushing structure.  Envelopes having a plurality of separate lead-in
    conductors passing through the metal wall are classified in this subclass
    (50.56).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50.55,  where the envelope has two concentrically arranged conductors
    passing through the wall of the envelope, one of which may form a part of
    the envelope wall.


CLS 174/50.57
TXT Subject matter under subclass 50.5 having one or more lead-in conductors
    sealed into a disk, stem structure or other supporting structure, the disk,
    stem or supporting structure forming a closure for the envelope.

    (1)     Note.  The structures in this and the indented subclass are
    characterized primarily in that there is a joint between the closure which
    supports one or more lead-in conductors and the envelope as distinguished
    from the type of device which has the envelope sealed directly about the
    lead-in conductors. The disk, stem or supporting structure for the lead-in
    conductor may be of the same or different material as that of the envelope.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50.56,  where the disc or closure is formed of metal or other conductive
    material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 24+ for the structure of miscellaneous
    closures for receptacles.


CLS 174/50.58
TXT Subject matter under subclass 50.57 where the disk, stem structure or
    supporting structure for the lead-in is joined to the envelope by a fused
    seal.

    (1)     Note.  The seal may be a glass to glass joint, a metal to metal
    joint or a glass to metal joint.  Where cement is used to join the disk or
    stem structure to the envelope, see subclass 50.57.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50.61+  for bonded seals between a lead-in conductor and the envelope wall.


CLS 174/50.59
TXT Subject matter under subclass 50.5 provided with means for shielding the
    joint between the lead-in conductor and the portion of the envelope through
    which the lead-in passes, or for preventing electrical leakage currents
    between the lead-in conductors along the envelope wall.

    (1)     Note.  The shield may be for the purpose of preventing a deposit of
    sputtered or vaporized material upon or around the lead-in and the envelope
    portion adjacent thereto, or to prevent the sealing material at the joint
    from being attached by deleterious substances, or for any other shielding
    purpose.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17.08   and 55.52+, where the device is provided with an electrical
    connector (e.g., a base) and the electrical connector is formed so as to
    constitute a shield between the lead-in conductors or for the joint.

    35,     for hermetically sealed envelopes within the class definition with
    electrostatic or electromagnetic shields for the envelope or a part thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 626 for gas or vapor
    type electric lamps and electric space discharge devices with shielding
    means for the lead-in conductors, subclass 313 for the miscellaneous
    electric lamps and discharge device with electrical shielding means for the
    device or a part thereof, and subclasses 317+ for electric lamps and
    discharge devices with lead-in conductors including such devices as have
    shielding means for the lead-in joint or between the lead-in conductors.


CLS 174/50.6
TXT Subject matter under subclass 50.5 having structure especially provided for
    a plurality of lead-in conductors.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are only devices where there is
    significance to the use of a plurality of lead-ins.  If the lead-ins merely
    duplicate each other, then no cross-reference of the patent is placed in
    this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50.52+, where the envelope is provided with an electrical connector.

    50.55,  where one of the lead-ins is a hollow conductor which surrounds
    another lead-in (e.g., co-axial).

    50.57+, where a plurality of lead-in conductors pass through a closure disk
    or stem structure which is sealed into an opening in the envelope wall.

    50.59,  where there is shielding means to prevent leakage currents between
    two lead-in conductors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 317+ for electric
    lamps and discharge devices with a plurality of lead-in conductors.


CLS 174/50.61
TXT Subjects matter under subclass 50.5 wherein a lead conductor which passes
    through the wall of the envelope is sealed to the envelope by means of a
    bonded seal.

    (1)     Note.  A bonded joint is a joint in which the joining is performed
    by casting, welding, soldering, brazing or other method requiring the use
    of molten or semi-molten material, cement, or other adhesive, or where at
    least one of the parts to be joined is made of plastic and the joint is
    made by pressing the parts together so that they adhere to each other.  The
    usual glass-to-metal seal is an example of a bonded joint.

    (2)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses are residual places for
    patents for envelopes with bonded lead-ins which involve more than mere
    joint structure such as would be classified in one of the classes providing
    for joints and which do not involve sufficient other structure to be
    classified in the above subclasses of this class or in another class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151+,   for devices (e.g., bushings for insulating a conductor from a wall
    or plate through which the conductor extends).  Some of these bushings
    include a bonded joint between the lead-in conductor and the insulator or
    between the insulator and the wall or plate.  Where only the structure of
    the lead-in conductor, the wall of the envelope and the means for
    insulating it from the wall is claimed, the device is classified in
    subclasses 151+ as a bushing, even though the envelope is claimed where no
    characteristics of the envelope are claimed in addition to the bushing
    structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 36+ for a process of fusion bonding
    glass to a preformed part by a glassworking operation.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 317+ for electric
    lamps and electric space discharge devices having lead-in wires passing
    through the envelope walls and sealed to the wall by a bonded seal.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 265+ for molded joints in
    general.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 630 for stock
    comprising plural adjacent metallic components and an additional silica or
    other oxide component.


CLS 174/50.62
TXT Subject matter under subclass 50.61 where the lead-in conductor is sealed
    to the envelope by means of a plastic material or by the use of a cement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17.06,  where the material used to form the seal is a liquid or where the
    seal includes a liquid (e.g., as mercury).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses for the
    composition of cements and plastic materials.


CLS 174/50.63
TXT Subject matter under subclass 50.61 where the lead-in conductor is in the
    form of a disc or ring, or has a flange forming a disc or ring thereon or
    is a metal tube, with the envelope sealed to either the side or edge of the
    disc or ring, or to the metal tube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50.55,  where there are two lead-in conductors, one of which is a tube
    surrounding the other, and the envelope is sealed to the outer conductor
    and another hermetic seal is formed between the inner conductor and the
    outer conductor.

    50.58,  where a metal disc forms the closure for a ceramic or glass
    envelope and the closure and envelope are sealed together by a fused type
    seal.


CLS 174/50.64
TXT Subject matter under subclass 50.61 where the lead-in conductor is a foil
    or is in the form of a flat strip.


CLS 174/51
TXT Structures under subclass 50 provided with means to connect a ground wire
    to the box or housing.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 78.


CLS 174/52.1
TXT With electric device or mounting means therefor:

    Structures under subclass 50 having an electric device therein, or thereon,
    or having means to mount such a device.


CLS 174/52.2
TXT Potted or encapsulated:

    Subject matter under subclass 52.1 wherein the space between the box or
    housing and the electrical device contained therein is occupied by a solid
    or semi-solid mass of insulating material; or wherein the electrical device
    is directly encapsulated in a mass of insulating material with such mass
    itself forming the housing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 841 and 855+ for conductor or circuit
    manufacturing involving encapsulating or potting of electrical components.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 272.11+ for processes of encapsulating electrical components.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 96 for potted inductor devices wherein
    some significant detail of the inductor device is claimed.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 269 and 275 for resistors with
    molded casings or housings.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 331+ for
    plural components which are potted or encapsulated.


CLS 174/52.3
TXT Sealed:

    Subject matter under subclass 52.1 wherein the box or housing is
    hermetically sealed.


CLS 174/52.4
TXT Flat housing for electronic device (e.g., flat pack, dual-in-line package):

    Subject matter under subclass 52.3 wherein the box or housing has a
    generally flat shape and houses or is particularly adapted to house an
    electronic device, such as an integrated circuit or a transistor.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are electronic packages known in
    the trade as "Flat-Packs" and "Dual-In-Line" packages.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass provides for electronic packages in
    combination with lead frames, but does not take lead frames, per se.  For
    the structure of lead frames, per se, see Class 257, subclasses 666 and
    677.  However, if stock material is claimed either as an individual lead
    frame without being labeled "lead frame", or if the lead frame structure is
    a strip of interconnected lead frames prior to separation into individual
    lead frames, see Class 428, subclasses 571-4.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g.,Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses for active solid-state semiconductor devices, per
    se, especially subclasses 678+ for active solid- state device housings, in
    general.


CLS 174/52.5
TXT Header, mounting stud, or can-type housing for semiconductor or crystal:

    Structures under subclass 52.3 in the form of a can (e.g., TO-5 type) or
    which include an insulating support (header or mounting stud) for the leads
    entering the housing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g.,Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses for active solid-state semiconductor devices, per
    se, especially subclasses 678+ for active solid-state device housings, in
    general, including subclasses 731-3 for housing mounts.


CLS 174/52.6
TXT Pellet type housing:

    Subject matter under subclass 52.3 wherein the box or housing is
    disc-shaped with the flat surfaces forming electrical contacts for the
    electrical device therein.


CLS 174/53
TXT Structures under subclass 52.1 in which the means are specially designed
    for mounting plug receptacles or wall switches.

    (1)     Note.  When the characteristics of the switch are claimed,
    classification is in Class 200, Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers.

    (2)     Note.  Search Class 439, Electrical Connectors, subclasses 527+ for
    an electrical connector combined with supporting means therefor; especially
    subclass 535 for an electrical receptacle with an "outlet box".  For the
    line with respect to housings, boxes or receptacles between this class
    (174) and Class 439, see (15) Note and see (17) Note of the class
    definition of this class.


CLS 174/54
TXT Structures under subclass 53 having in addition means to couple or mount an
    electrical fixture.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 61 and indented subclasses.


CLS 174/55
TXT Structures under subclass 53 in which the mounting means is unitary with
    the face plate.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 66 and 67, and the notes
    thereunder, for face plates.


CLS 174/56
TXT Structures under subclass 55 in which the mounting means is on the portion
    of the face plate on the outside of the box or housing.


CLS 174/57
TXT Structures under subclass 53 in which two or more parts of the box, or the
    mounting means, are relatively adjustable.

    (1)     Note.  Complete the search in class 220, Receptacles, subclass 3.7.


CLS 174/58
TXT Structures under subclass 53 having in addition means to mount the box or
    housing.

    (1)     Note.  Complete the search in this class, subclass 63, and in class
    220, Receptacles, subclasses 3.9 and 3.92, and see the notes thereunder for
    box and housing mounting means.

    (2)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 48 and indented subclasses.


CLS 174/59
TXT Structures under subclass 52.1 in which the box or housing has a plurality
    of connectors for fanning out a plurality of incoming and/or outgoing
    conductors.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 361, Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 335+ for arrangements of circuit closers on a mounting or the
    combination with the conductors or bus-bars, including encased switchboards.

    (2)     Note.  Search Class 439, Electrical Connectors, subclasses 527+ for
    an electrical connector combined with supporting means therefor; especially
    subclass 535 for an electrical receptacle with an "outlet box".


CLS 174/60
TXT Structures under subclass 59 which form the terminal end of conduits or
    cables.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 73.1 and 74 and indented
    subclasses, for terminals not of the box or housing type.


CLS 174/61
TXT Structures under subclass 52.1 having means for coupling or mounting an
    electrical fixture (which is to be external of the box or housing) to the
    housing.

    (1)     Note.  Complete the search in this class, subclass 54.

    (3)     Note.  See Class 248, Supports, subclasses 317+.


CLS 174/62
TXT Structures under subclass 61 in which the coupling or mounting means is in
    the form of a stud or nipple.


CLS 174/63
TXT Structures under subclass 62 in which there is in addition means to mount
    the box or housing.

    (1)     Note.  Complete the search in this class, subclass 58, and in Class
    220, Receptacles, subclasses 3.9 and 3.92, and see the notes thereunder.

    (2)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 48 and indented subclasses.


CLS 174/64
TXT Structures under subclass 62 having in addition conduit or cable coupling
    means.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 65 and the notes thereunder.


CLS 174/65
TXT Structures under subclass 50 having means to couple a cable, wire or
    conduit to the box or housing.  Such means may be the conduit or cable
    openings in the box, with or without a closure therefor.  The
    subcombination of conduit or cable with connector is here.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes casings and jackets that are of
    general utility and are otherwise within the subclass definition such as
    may be used for electric lamps, space discharge devices, and similar
    devices.

    (2)     Note.  See section 7 of the Class Definition for the electrical
    devices that include such envelopes and casings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for boxes and housings with a bushing, terminal, or lead-in using a
    fluid or provided with structure peculiarly adapted for use with a fluid.

    50.5+,  for a sealed envelope and housing such as are used for an electric
    lamp, electric space discharge device, and similar device, especially
    subclasses specified in search notes thereto.

    64,     for a combination of a conduit, cable, or conductor and means to
    couple the same to a box.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 293+ for a
    switch case or mounting base having specific housing or supporting
    structure.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 3.2+ for means having no claimed electrical
    characteristics to couple a box or housing of a junction or outlet to a
    pipe or rod.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclass 606 for a static seal for a pipe, conduit or cable, and a
    wall, subclass 919 for a seal including an electrical feature.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 128+, 158+, and 189+ for means
    having no claimed electrical characteristics coupling a pipe to a box or
    plate.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses for
    electric lamps and electric space discharge devices provided with a casing,
    especially subclass 324 and notes thereto.

    361,    Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 212+ for
    discharge or preventing accumulation of electric charge (e.g., static
    electricity, etc.).


    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, appropriate subclasses where
    the device is an electric furnace.

    403,    Joints and Connections, for joints of general applications.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 445+ for an electrical connector
    having a flexible or pivoted guard or support for a line cord or conductor.


CLS 174/66
TXT Structures under the class definition which constitute a closure for a box,
    housing or wall opening and which are provided with openings for
    communicating with devices concealed by the closure.  Such openings may
    have means for coupling a device in the opening.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 55, 56 and 57.

    (2)     Note.  Face plates having means specially designed for guiding the
    prongs of electric plug elements have been placed in this subclass or
    subclass 67 indented hereunder.

    (3)     Note.  See Class 220, Receptacles, subclasses 241+ for face plates
    having no added structure limiting the same to electrical use, even though
    claimed as made of conductive and/or insulating material, and see the
    search notes thereunder for related art.


CLS 174/67
TXT Structures under subclass 66 having additional closures for the face
    opening or openings.

    (1)     Note.  Complete the search in Class 220, Receptacles, subclass 242.


CLS 174/68.1
TXT CONDUITS, CABLES OR CONDUCTORS:

    Structures of conduits, cables or conductors under the class definition.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, main class definitions, especially 2, 3, 6,
    8, and 9 as well as main class notes (1) through (14) for criteria which
    distinguish the structures found in this class from those of other classes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8+,     particularly subclasses 24+ for such structures utilizing fluids.

    32+,    for anti-inductive structures.

    37+,    for underground installations.

    40+,    for overhead installations.

    48      and 49, for wall mounted installations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 134.3+ for methods or apparatus used in installing such
    structures.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, especially subclass 19
    for devices used in placing such structures.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 236+ for long
    transmission lines having distributed electrical parameters, and subclasses
    1+ for plural channel systems of such lines.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, appropriate subclasses for electrical
    resistors, per se.  See sections XIII and XVII of the class definition
    under Class 338 for certain classification lines relating to this subject
    matter.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 700 for antennas
    which may include a conduit, cable or conductor.  See also (4) Note.  B,
    under subclass 700 and (1) Note under subclass 900 of this class (343) for
    classification lines between conduits, cables or conductors and antennas.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 154+ for methods and
    apparatus for installing or laying conductors, drawing them through
    conduits, or placing them on poles.


CLS 174/68.2
TXT Bus bars or bus ducts (residual):

    Subject matter under subclass 68.1 pertaining to bus bars or bus ducts.

    (1)     Note.  This is the residual subclass for subject matter directed to
    bus bars and bus ducts which is not provided for in any of the other bus
    bar subclasses of this class namely, subclasses 16.2, 70, 71, 72, 88, 99,
    129, 133, and 149.  Since, with the exception of subclass 16.2, the other
    bus bar subclasses in Class 174 do not have individually tailored
    definitions, determination of the subject matter falling within this
    subclass (68.2) can only be made after comparison with these other bus bar
    subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of the subject matter found in this subclass are:
    bus bars supported on an insulator without an enclosing bus duct, bus
    ducts, per se, and certain bus bar and bus duct assemblies.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, appropriate subclasses for
    bus bars and bus ducts adapted for sliding or rolling current collection to
    supply electricity to vehicles.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 147
    for bus bar systems.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 341, 355,
    361, and 378 for bus bars and bus ducts in combinations with subject matter
    of that class.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclass 22 for bus bars and bus ducts
    including detachable electrical connector structure or including provisions
    for receiving a detachable electrical connector.


CLS 174/68.3
TXT Single duct conduits:

    Structures under subclass 68.1 pertaining to conduits of the single duct
    type.

    (1)     Note.  For the line between the subject matter in this subclass and
    the structures in Class 138, Pipes and Tubular Conduits, see (8) Note to
    the main definitions of this class (174).

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for single duct conduits
    having a removable wall.  For such subject matter see subclass 101 of this
    class (174).

    (3)     Note.  See this class, class definition (9) to (13) Notes for a
    list of classes having conduits combined with the subject matter thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for conduits in combination with a fluid or having means
    particularly adapted for use in connection with a fluid.

    47,     for a combined fluid conduit and an electrical conductor.

    48      and 49, for wall mounted conduits.

    95,     and indented subclasses for conduits having plural channels or
    ducts.

    98,     for embedded conduits.


CLS 174/69
TXT Structures under subclass 68.1 constructed to be axially extensible.  In
    some of these devices the structure causes the device normally to assume a
    coiled form.

    (1)     Note.  For extensible or elastic woven fabrics, see Class 139,
    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 421+.

    (2)     Note. See Class 191, Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles,
    subclasses 12+.

    (3)     Note.  See Class 267, Spring Devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 723, 823, 877, and
    901+ for antennas which are adjustable in length.


CLS 174/70
TXT Structures under subclass 68.1 combined with things other than the
    conductors and the means for mounting and/or insulating the same in the
    conduit or cable, except those combinations provided for above in this
    class.

    (1)     Note.  Devices having special strands incorporated in armored or
    insulated cables or bare conductors for tension purposes are in this class,
    subclasses 102, 110 and 126.1 and their indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  The combination of a conduit, cable or conductor with means
    to couple the same to a box is in this class, subclasses 64 and 65.

    (3)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 135 and 136, for cable,
    conduit, or conductor accessories.

    (4)     Note.  Cables and conductors, having embodied in the structure
    thereof, noncurrent-carrying wires or elements or attaching means (other
    than mere armors or sheaths) specially designed to provide supporting or
    attaching means for the cables or conductors have been placed in this
    subclass.


CLS 174/71
TXT Structures under subclass 70 in which the conduit, cable or conductor has
    one or more branches or has means for connecting branches.

    (1)     Note.  For an electrical connector comprising an uninterrupted
    support rail or uninterrupted contact whereby a plurality of mating
    connectors may engaging at an infinite number of locations, Search Class
    439, Electrical Connectors, subclasses 110+.  For an electrical connector
    with a conduit or duct, Search Class 439, subclasses 207+.  For analogous
    structure to be used with vehicle structure, designed to permit motion of
    an electrical connector therealong, see Class 191, Electricity:
    Transmission to Vehicles, especially subclasses 23+.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 285, Pipe Joints or Couplings, appropriate
    subclasses, for pipe couplings providing branched pipes and conduits even
    though disclosed as being for electrical conductors.  See Class 254,
    Pushing and Pulling Implements, subclasses 134.3+ for wire or strand
    placing means comprising guide means interior of a coupling.

    (3)     Note.  See Class 403, Joints and Connections, subclass 169 for
    branched connections in general.

    (4)     Note.  Compare Class 138, Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 92.


CLS 174/72
TXT Structures under subclass 71 having (1) more than one branch or (2) having
    more than one duct.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 138, Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 111+
    for plural duct pipe and tubular conduit structures not limited to
    electrical use.


CLS 174/73.1
TXT With joint or end structure conductive stress distributing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 having conductive means to modify the
    electrical stress characteristics of the joint or end structure.


CLS 174/74
TXT Structures under subclass 70 claiming structure applied to the terminal end
    of a conductor, conduit or cable.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 19 and 20, for end structures
    utilizing fluids.

    (2)     Note.  For housing type terminals having means for connecting the
    conduit or cable wires to other wires leading into the housing, see this
    class, subclass 60.

    (3)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 84+ for joints.

    (4)     Note.  See Class 439, Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses
    for electrical connector structure, and see especially subclasses 730,
    754+, 775+, 865+, 874+, 877+, and 883 for an electrical connector of the
    terminal type usually applied to the end of a single conductor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 583 for a
    metallic intermediate article which has a particular configuration at an
    end.


CLS 174/75
TXT Structures under subclass 74 in which there is a joint between the
    conductor within the end structure and some conductive element extending to
    the exterior of the end structure.


CLS 174/76
TXT Structures under subclass 74 filled with plastic material.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 19 and 20, for end structures
    utilizing fluids.


CLS 174/77
TXT Structures under subclass 74 having means providing a tight seal between
    the end structure and the conductor element passing therethrough to the
    exterior thereof.


CLS 174/78
TXT Structures under subclass 74 provided with means to connect a ground wire
    thereto.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 51, for boxes or housings with
    grounding means.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 439, Electrical Connectors, subclasses 92+ for an
    electrical connector with circuit conductors and safety grounding provision.


CLS 174/79
TXT Structures under subclass 74 provided with means for attaching the same to
    a support.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 37, 40 and indented subclasses,
    48, 49, 58, and 63, for related supporting means.


CLS 174/80
TXT Structures under subclass 74 in which the end structure comprises one or
    more skirted insulator elements.

    (1)     Note.  For insulator structure, per se, see this class, subclass
    137 and indented subclasses.


CLS 174/81
TXT Structures under subclass 74 in the form of an elbow, or having a hood over
    the conduit or cable end to cause the issuing conductors to bend.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 285, Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 179.1+
    for an elbow fitting having access means, and subclasses 179+ for an elbow
    pipe fitting.


CLS 174/82
TXT Structures under subclass 74 in the form of an end cap.

    (1)     Note.  Elbow form and hooded end caps are in this class, subclass
    81.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 16, Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 108 and
    109, for ferrules, rings and thimbles for conduits and cables, where
    characteristics restricted to electrical use are not claimed.


CLS 174/83
TXT Structures under subclass 74 of sleeve form for insertion into the ends of
    conduits and cables.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 142, 143, 146, 152, 153, 154,
    157, and 167, for related insulator structures.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 16, Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 2.1+, for
    bushings and lining thimbles for conduits and cables where characteristics
    restricted to electrical use are not claimed.


CLS 174/84
TXT Structures under subclass 70 claiming the joint between the ends of
    conduits, cables or conductors.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 75, for cable, conduit, or
    conductor end structures with joints.

    (2)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 21 and 22, for joints utilizing
    fluids.

    (3)     Note.  See this class subclasses 71 and 72, for joints for
    associating conduits, cables or conductors in branching relation.

    (4)     Note.  See Class 439, Electrical Connectors, for electrical
    connectors,  generally, and see especially sections IV and VI of that class
    (Class 439) definition for the line between this Class 174) and that class
    with regard to electrical joints.

    (5)     Note.  See Class 285, Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 47+ for
    joints or couplings heat and/or electrically insulated, having no added
    features limiting the same to electrical use.

    (6)     Note.  See Class 403, Joints and Connections, appropriate
    subclasses, for conductor joints where no features restricting the same to
    the electrical arts, such as the use of insulation to insulate the
    conductively coupled wires or the structure of the conductor to improve the
    same for conducting electricity, are claimed.  Features which are designed
    to make better metal to metal contact at the joint and thus improve the
    strength of the joint and also the electrical conductive properties have
    been placed Class 403.

    (7)     Note.  See Class 156, Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical
    Manufacture, subclass 49 for methods of splicing indefinite length electric
    conductors.


CLS 174/85
TXT Structures under subclass 84 in which the joint is covered by a sleeve made
    in sections axially insulated from each other. This is usually for the
    purpose of causing sheaths or conduits of conductive material to be
    electrically noncontinuous at the joint.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 285, Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 47+ for
    insulated pipe joints.


CLS 174/86
TXT Joints under subclass 84 made to be capable of moving or adjusting the
    sections connected by the joint to an out-of-line relation.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 138, Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 120 for
    pipes having movable or adjustable sections.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 285, Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 121.3+
    for concentric joints with relative motion, subclasses 121.6+ for coupling
    for plural noncommunicating lines with relatively motion, subclasses 144.1+
    for serial relatively movable joints, and subclasses 184+ for a coupling
    providing an adjustable angle between the members.

    (3)     Note.  See Class 403, Joints and Connections, subclasses 52+ for
    articulated joints in general.


CLS 174/87
TXT Joints under subclass 84 in which the joint connects the sections in other
    than a straight line.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 86.


CLS 174/88
TXT Structures under subclass 84 claiming joints between the separately
    insulated conductors of a plural conductor cable or conduit.

    (1)     Note.  Joints between single conductors of stranded form are in
    this class, subclass 90.


CLS 174/89
TXT Joints under subclass 84 in which the conduit wall or the cable sheath at
    the joint is radially spread or flanged, usually for better engagement with
    the joint sleeve or casing.


CLS 174/90
TXT Joints under subclass 84 having special features because of the stranded
    construction of the conductor.


CLS 174/91
TXT Joints under subclass 84 in which the encasing sleeve for the joint is made
    in at least two parts.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 85, for axially insulated joint
    sleeve sections.

    (2)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 93, for sleeves provided with
    end caps.


CLS 174/92
TXT Joints under subclass 91 in which the sleeve is longitudinally divided,
    i.e., in a plane parallel to the axis.

    (1)     Note.  Compare Class 285, Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses
    148.6+, 373 and 419, and Class 403, Joints and Connections, subclasses 309+.


CLS 174/93
TXT Joints under subclass 84 in which caps are provided at the ends of the
    sleeve to join the sleeve to the conduit or cable.


CLS 174/94
TXT Joints under subclass 84 between bare conductors.

    (1)     Note.  These devices claim, in addition to the joint, features of
    structure of the conductors restricting the same to the electrical art.

    (2)     Note.  See this class, subclass 84, (6) Note., for the line with
    Class 403, Joints and Connections.


CLS 174/95
TXT Structures under subclass 68.1 having two or more distinct ducts for
    receiving electrical conductors.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 104.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 138, Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 111+
    for plural duct pipes and tubular conduits not structurally limited to
    electrical use.


CLS 174/96
TXT Structures under subclass 95 in which either the conductors in the ducts,
    or the ducts, are embedded in material.

    (1)     Note.  The material is usually granular or plastic in form.

    (2)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 98 and 118.


CLS 174/97
TXT Structures under subclass 95 in which the ducts are formed by grooves or
    channels in plates.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 101, for other removable wall
    conduits.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 138, Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 111+
    particularly subclasses 115-117, for plural duct pipes and tubular conduits
    in which the ducts are formed by grooves or channels in plates.


CLS 174/98
TXT Structures under subclass 68.1 in which either the conduit or the conductor
    in the conduit is embedded in material.

    (1)     Note.  The material is usually plastic or granular.

    (2)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 96 and 118.


CLS 174/99
TXT Structures under subclass 68.1 in which the conduit has supports in its
    interior for supporting one or more conductors.

    (1)     Note.  Complete the search in this class, subclass 98, and in Class
    138, Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 108 for conduits for supporting
    one or more conductors therein; and subclass 113 for conduits for
    supporting one or more pipes therein.

    (2)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 28 and 29, for coaxial or
    concentric conductor type of structure.

    (3)     Note.  See this class, subclass 131, for plural strand conductors
    with interior means to hold the conductors.

    (4)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 146 and 147, for mid-line spacer
    type of insulators.

    (5)     Note.  For similar structures in which the supporting means
    consists of relatively short insulating elements, such as buttons, discs,
    plates or beads, strung along or upon the conductors, see this class,
    subclass 111.

    (6)     Note.  See Class 405, Hydraulic and Earth Engineering subclasses
    132+ for tunnels and subways with supporting means.

    (7)     Note.  See Class 104, Railways, subclass 140 and indented
    subclasses, for railway slotted conduits, and subclass 173 and indented
    subclasses, for railway cable traction conduits.

    (8)     Note. See Class 191, Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles,
    subclass 23 and indented subclasses, for conduit enclosed and supported
    conductors specially arranged to transmit to vehicles.

    (9)     Note.  See Class 313, Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices,
    subclasses 274+, for electric lamps which have an envelope, generally of
    elongated tubular shape, and a filament which extends the length of the
    envelope, the envelope having supports in its interior for supporting the
    filament.


CLS 174/100
TXT Structures under subclass 99 specially designed to support conductors or
    cables in a vertical position.


CLS 174/101
TXT Structures under subclass 68.1 having at least one wall removable.

    (1)     Note.  Complete the search in this class, subclass 97, for conduits
    formed for grooved or channeled plates either stacked or having a removable
    wall.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 138, Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 157+
    for pipes having at least one wall removable.


CLS 174/101.5
TXT Structures under subclass 68.1 constructed to float on water.

    (1)     Note.  Structures herein usually include tubes or cells filled with
    a light weight fluid or a vacuum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8+,     for structures utilizing a fluid or vacuum for other purposes.

    126.1+, for mere hollow conductors.


CLS 174/102
TXT Structures under subclass 68.1 in which one or more conductors are enclosed
    in, but insulated from, an electrically conductive armor or sheath.

    (1)     Note.  An armor or sheath as used herein includes any surrounding
    conduit, tube, wrapping, winding, layer, coating, or other enclosing
    structure.  Such structures may be inherently conductive, as when made of
    metal, or may be rendered conductive by incorporation of conductive
    ingredients or particles.

    (2)     Note.  While the conductivity of the armor or sheath is essential
    to cause classification in this subclass and indented subclasses, it is not
    necessary that the armor or sheath be intended to carry an electric
    current. Thus, this subclass and indented subclasses include, for example,
    armors or sheaths (a) provided solely for mechanical protection when
    claimed as made of conductive material, and (b) having an electrical
    function such as corona prevention, grounding, shielding, etc., or
    constituting the outer conductor of a coaxial or concentric type cable.

    (3)     Note.  For structures employing anti-inductive means in addition to
    the conductor armor or sheath, see this class, subclass 32 and indented
    subclasses, especially subclass 36.

    (4)     Note.  For conductively armored or sheathed conductors or cables
    employing a fluid or vacuum, see this class, subclass 8 and indented
    subclasses, especially subclass 24 and indented subclasses.  See
    particularly subclasses 28 and 29 for coaxial or concentric type cables.

    (5)     Note.  For conductors or cables armored or sheathed solely by
    insulation, see this class, subclass 110 and indented subclasses.

    (6)     Note.  For mere hollow conductors not forming an enclosure for
    another conductor, see this class, subclass 126.1 and indented subclasses,
    especially subclasses 130 and 131.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 243+ for long
    transmission lines of the shielded type having distributed electrical
    parameters.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 214 for cable type resistors,
    subclasses 226+ for an incased, embedded or housed fixed electrical
    resistor, especially subclasses 238+ and 243+ for electrical resistance
    elements in insulation with an outer metallic sheath.  See sections XIII
    and XVII of the class definition under Class 338 for certain classification
    lines relating to this subject matter.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 620 for
    composite metallic stock having a semiconductor component.


CLS 174/103
TXT Structures under subclass 102 in which two or more conductors or groups of
    conductors are separately enclosed in a conductive armor or sheath.


CLS 174/104
TXT Structure under subclass 103 in which the conductive armor or sheath
    comprises a body having individual passages for the conductors or groups of
    conductors.  Said body may be preformed or may be molded directly about the
    conductors.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 95 and indented subclasses, for
    conductors or cables arranged in plural-duct conduits.

    (2)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 96 and 98, for single or
    plural conductors embedded in plastic or other material.


CLS 174/105
TXT Structures under subclass 102 having two or more substantially coaxial,
    conductive armors or sheaths insulated from one another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 624 for a
    metallic composite having an additional organic component.


CLS 174/106
TXT Structures under subclass 102 having two or more substantially coaxial,
    conductive armors or sheaths in conductive contact with one another.  This
    includes composite armors or sheaths comprising two or more conductive
    layers or coating conductively engaging one another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 604 for metallic
    stock or corrugate configuration, and subclasses 615+ for composite
    metallic stock defined in terms of the composition of its components.


CLS 174/107
TXT Structures under subclass 102 in which the conductive armor or sheath is
    enclosed in a wrapping, coating, or other body of nonconductive material,
    to insulate the armor or sheath or to protect it against corrosion,
    deterioration, or other damage.


CLS 174/108
TXT Structures under subclass 102 in which the armor or sheath comprises a
    conductive tape, strip, wire, or other element applied spirally.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 138, Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 130,
    133 and 134+ for flexible pipes formed of spirally wound metallic elements;
    and subclasses 144, 150 and 154 for other pipes formed of spirally wound
    metallic elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 592 for metallic
    stock which is helical or has a helical component.


CLS 174/109
TXT Structures under subclass 108 in which the successive turns of the spirally
    applied armor or sheath overlap or are interlocked with one another.


CLS 174/110
TXT Structures under subclass 68.1 pertaining to the insulation of electric
    conductors or cables.

    (1)     Note.  See notes (1), (1.5), (2), (3), (3.1), and (3.5) under the
    main class definition of this class.

    (2)     Note.  For insulated conductors or cables enclosed in conductive
    armors or sheaths, see this class, subclass 102 and indented subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  For conduit, cable and conductor structures involving fluid
    insulation, see this class, subclass 24 and indented subclasses.

    (4)     Note.  For insulator structures, see this class, subclass 137 and
    indented subclasses.

    (5)     Note.  For structures under subclass 68.1 in which the conductors
    or cables are insulated by being embedded in plastic or granular material,
    other than mere coating, see this class, subclasses 96 and 98.

    (6)     Note.  For conduits having insulating supports for supporting the
    conductors or cables therein, see this class, subclass 99.

    (7)     Note.  For insulating structures under subclass 68.1 having two or
    more distinct ducts for receiving the conductors, see this class,
    subclasses 95, 96 and 97.

    (8)     Note.  For uninsulated conductors or cables, see this class,
    subclass 126.1 and indented subclasses.

    (9)     Note.  For insulating materials, per se, see the appropriate fabric
    or composition classes.  In addition to those listed in Notes (1) (1.5),
    (2), (3), (3.1), (3.5) to the class definition of this class, the following
    are particularly noted; Class 154, Laminated Fabric and Analogous
    Manufactures, especially subclass 2.6, Class 156, Adhesive bonding and
    Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses 51+ for methods of covering
    indefinite length electric conductors and Class 162, Paper Making and Fiber
    Liberation, especially subclass 106.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 214 for cable type resistors,
    subclasses 226+ for an incased embedded or housed resistor, and especially
    subclasses 238+ and 243+ for electrical resistance elements in insulation
    with an outer metallic sheath.  See sections XIII and XVII of the class
    definition under Class 338 for certain classification lines relating to
    this subject matter.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 624 for a
    metallic composite having an additional organic component.


CLS 174/111
TXT Structures under subclass 110 in which the insulating means includes
    relatively short insulating elements in the form of buttons, plates, discs,
    beads, etc., strung along or upon one or more conductors or cables.

    (1)     Note.  For similar structures in which the buttons, discs, beads,
    etc., are specially designed or arranged to provide spaces for a fluid, see
    this class, subclass 24 and indented subclasses, especially subclass 28.

    (2)     Note.  For bead or disc type insulators specially designed as
    mid-line spacers, see this class, subclass 146.


CLS 174/112
TXT Structures under subclass 110 in which the conductors or their insulation
    is provided with distinctive markings or other means for identifying the
    individual conductors.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 115, for multiple conductor
    structures in which one or more of the conductors differ from the others in
    size, shape, insulation, for other characteristics for some special purpose
    other than or additional to mere identification.


CLS 174/113
TXT Structures under subclass 110 embodying two or more conductors insulated
    from one another.

    (1)     Note.  For multiple conductor structures in which one of the
    conductors encloses or surrounds another as, for example, in coaxial or
    concentric type cables, see this class, subclasses 28, 29 and 102 and
    indented subclasses.


CLS 174/114
TXT Structures under subclass 113 in which two or more mutually insulated
    conductors, or conductive strands, are specially designed to function as a
    single conductor carrying the same current.  The insulation between such
    conductors is ordinarily superficial.


CLS 174/115
TXT Structures under subclass 113 in which one or more of the conductors differ
    from the other in size, shape, insulation, or other characteristics for
    some special purpose or function such as, testing, signaling, grounding,
    etc.

    (1)     Note.  Where the conductors have distinguishing characteristics
    solely for identification purposes, see this class, subclass 112.

    (2)     Note.  Coaxial or concentric type cables are in this class,
    subclasses 28, 29 and 102 and indented subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  For multiple conductor structures in which one or more of
    the conductors differ from the others for anti-inductive purposes, see this
    class, subclass 32 and indented subclasses.


CLS 174/116
TXT Structures under subclass 113 in which the spaces or valleys between
    adjacent conductors, which may be laid parallel or twisted, contain filler
    insulation.  Such filler insulation is usually of preformed strips or
    strands, and together with the conductors forms an assembly having a
    circular or other desired cross-section.


CLS 174/117
TXT Structures under subclass 113 in which the conductors and insulation are
    arranged to form an assembly of noncircular cross-section.

    (1)     Note.  A twisted pair has been treated as of circular section.

    (2)     Note.  For single conductors embodying plural strands arranged in
    noncircular formation, see this class, subclasses 119 and 129.

    (3)     Note.  Noncircular assemblies employing filler insulation are
    placed in this class, subclass 116 and cross-referenced here.


CLS 174/118
TXT Single conductor structures under subclass 110 including as a part thereof
    a material in powdered or granular form.  The material may be either
    conductive or nonconductive.

    (2)     Note.  For material in fluid form, see this class, subclass 8 and
    indented subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 96 and 98, for the use of
    powdered or granular material to embed conduits or ducts, or to embed
    conductors in conduits or ducts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 228+ for a composition having a continuous phase of
    free metal made by consolidating metal particles.


CLS 174/119
TXT Single conductor structures under subclass 110 in which the conductor (a)
    is made of two or more materials, not mere constituents of a single
    composition or alloy, or (b) is of noncircular cross-section.  The
    conductor may be either single or plural strand.

    (1)     Note.  For bare composite conductors, see this class, subclass 132.

    (2)     Note.  For bare noncircular conductors, see this class, subclasses
    129 and 133.

    (3)     Note.  For noncircular assemblies of two or more conductors, see
    this class, subclass 117.


CLS 174/120
TXT Single conductor structures under subclass 110 in which the insulation
    includes (a) two or more layers of insulating material or (b) a single
    insulating layer impregnated with a composition of matter.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass have been placed all structures within the
    above definition in which any insulating layer is other than fibrous, or
    fabric, or plastic, or coating material.  For definitions of these terms,
    see the notes to subclass 121 of this class.

    (2)     Note.  Where one of the layers comprises a material in powdered or
    granular form, see this class, subclass 118.

    (3)     Note.  See Class 428, Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles,
    subclasses 380+ for an insulated conductor which is no more than a wire or
    filament with a plurality of layers of coating materials thereon.


CLS 174/121
TXT Structures under subclass 120 in which (a) one layer is fibrous or fabric
    and a contiguous layer is plastic or coating material, or (b) a fibrous or
    fabric layer is impregnated with a composition of matter.

    (1)     Note.  Fibrous or fabric, as used herein, means any material or
    textile composed of fibres and includes, for example, preformed paper or
    paper pulp, asbestos, feathers, spun glass, cotton, and wool.

    (2)     Note.  Plastic or coating material, as used herein, means those
    compositions, either natural or synthetic, in plastic or liquid form,
    capable of being applied by ordinary molding or coating processes.  Such
    compositions may have comminuted material of any character as a constituent
    thereof.  Examples of materials of this type are glass and rubber.

    (3)     Note.  Preformed tapes, strips, or sheets of rubber, mica, bamboo,
    or synthetic materials, such as regenerated cellulose, are not considered
    as fibrous, fabric, plastic or coating material, and conductors insulated
    by such elements have been placed in subclass 110 of this class, when such
    material constitutes the only layer, or in subclass 120 when there are
    additional layers of other material.  See note (1) to subclass 120.

    (4)     Note.  See this class, subclass 102 and indented subclasses, for
    coverings consisting of fibrous or fabric material coated or impregnated
    with conductive material.


CLS 174/122
TXT Structures under subclass 120 in which each insulating layer consists of
    nonimpregnated fibrous or fabric material as defined in note (1) of
    subclass 121.

    (1)     Note.  Where any one of such layers is impregnated, the patent will
    be placed in this class, subclass 121.

    (2)     Note.  For single, nonimpregnated, fibrous or fabric layers, see
    this class, subclass 124.

    (3)     Note.  All patents having claims to two or more contiguous
    nonimpregnated, fibrous or fabric layers are to be cross-referenced here.


CLS 174/124
TXT Single conductor structures under subclass 110 having a single insulating
    layer, which layer consists of a nonimpregnated fibrous or fabric material
    as defined in note (1) to subclass 121.

    (1)     Note.  Continue the search in this class, subclasses 121 and 122.

    (2)     Note.  See note (9) to subclass 110 of this class.


CLS 174/125.1
TXT Superconductor:

    Structures under subclass 68.1 pertaining to cables or conductors formed in
    whole or in part of superconductive material for use as a superconductor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 599 for general methods of making
    superconductors.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, subclass 901 for superconductive
    compositions.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 62+ for methods of making
    superconductors which involve a coating process.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 930 for
    superconductive metallic stock material.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    particularly subclasses 230+ for high temperature (greater than 30 K)
    superconducting wire, tape, cable, or fibers, and art collection subclass
    887 for superconductors operating at or below 30 K.


CLS 174/126.1
TXT Conductor structure:

    Structures under subclass 68.1 pertaining to the form, shape or other
    characteristic of an uninsulated conductor.

    (1)     Note.  See notes (1.5), (3), (4), (5), and (6) under the main class
    definition for this class for the line between conductors of this class and
    those properly placed elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15.5,   for superconductive apparatus with provision for cooling.

    102+,   for hollow conductors which constitute armors or sheaths for other
    conductors.

    110+,   for insulated conductors.

    125.1,  for structure of superconductors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, subclass 13 for conductors
    in the form of sheets or plates.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 908 for conductors
    which are active antenna components of any particular shape.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 544+ for stock
    materials, e.g., of indefinite length, which are all metal or which have
    adjacent metal components even though claimed as being electrical
    conductors.


CLS 174/126.2
TXT Composite:

    Structures under subclass 126.1 in which the conductor is made of at least
    two distinct layers of different conductive materials.


CLS 174/126.3
TXT Corrugated or slotted:

    Structures under subclass 126.1 in which the conductor has an undulating
    shape either on two opposed surfaces (corrugated) or on one surface only
    (slotted).


CLS 174/126.4
TXT Metal coated on insulation:

    Structures under subclass 126.1 in which the conductor is a conductive
    (metal) layer (coating) on the surface of an insulative core.


CLS 174/127
TXT Structures under subclass 126.1 specially designed to prevent formation of
    corona discharges, i.e., to prevent high electro-static stress at any point.


CLS 174/128.1
TXT Plural strand:

    Structures under subclass 126.1 in which two or more strands, either simple
    or composite, are assembled to form a single conductor structure.

    (1)     Note.  See note (3) to the main class definition of this class for
    the line between this class and the various textile classes.

    (2)     Note.  Search should be completed in Class 57, Textiles:  Spinning,
    Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 200+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for conductor structures comprising plural strands insulated from
    one another but intended to carry the same current and to function as a
    single conductor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 343 for plural strand
    conductors used as filaments in electric lamps or discharge devices.


CLS 174/128.2
TXT Bundle conductors:

    Structures under subclass 128.1 in which the strands are insulated from one
    another by an air space but are intended to carry the same current and to
    function as a single conductor.


CLS 174/129
TXT Structures under subclass 128.1 in which the strands are arranged to form a
    conductor having a noncircular cross-section.

    (1)     Note.  For two or more insulated conductors assembled to provide a
    structure of noncircular cross-section, see this class, subclass 117.

    (2)     Note.  For single, insulated conductors either single or plural
    strand, of noncircular cross-section, see this class, subclass 119.

    (3)     Note.  For uninsulated single strand conductors of noncircular
    cross-section, see this class, subclass 133.


CLS 174/130
TXT Structures under subclass 128.1 in which the strands are arranged to form a
    conductor which is annular in cross-section.

    (1)     Note.  For similar structures constituting an armor or sheath, see
    this class, subclass 102 and indented subclasses, especially subclass 108.


CLS 174/131
TXT Structures under subclass 130 in which the wall of the annulus is
    reinforced or supported by means located within the annulus.

    (1)     Note.  When the reinforcing means is conductive it must be of a
    form to leave the annulus substantially hollow.  When nonconductive it may
    fill the annulus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101.5,  for buoyant cable structures having interior wall supports.


CLS 174/133
TXT Single strand structures under subclass 126.1 having a cross-section other
    than circular.

    (1)     Note.  Continue the search in this class, subclass 119.

    (2)     Note.  For plural strand assemblies of noncircular cross-section,
    see this class, subclass 129.


CLS 174/135
TXT Miscellaneous devices, not otherwise classified, for use with conductors
    under subclass 68.1.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 70.

    (2)     Note.  For conductor vibration dampers, see this class, subclass
    42, and the notes thereunder.

    (3)     Note. For conductor take-ups in the form of reels, see Class 191,
    Electricity: Transmission to Vehicles, subclass 12 and indented subclasses,
    and Class 242, Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 370+.

    (4)     Note.  For other take-up devices, see Class 24, Buckles, Buttons,
    Clasps, etc., especially subclass 115 and indented subclasses, for cord
    adjusters, and Class 267, Spring Devices, especially subclass 69 and
    indented subclasses, for spring devices.


CLS 174/136
TXT Devices under subclass 135 generally tubular in form, adapted to be placed
    around one or more conductors, and supported by the latter, to prevent an
    adjacent structure, such as a tree, from injuring the conductor or its
    insulation. The device is usually but not necessarily, formed at least in
    part of insulating material.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 147, for mid-line spacers
    designed to prevent contact between two or more conductors which cross one
    another.

    (2)     Note.  For similar structures designed to be placed about
    conductors for preventing accidental contact therewith by persons or
    animals, see this class, subclass 5.

    (3)     Note.  For similar structures designed to protect flexible hose,
    rope, etc., from wear and abrasion, see Class 138, Pipes and Tubular
    Conduits, subclass 110, and Class 384, Bearings, subclass 24.

    (4)     Note.  For bushings or lining thimbles, ferrules and rings having
    means for preventing abrasion of elements passing thereinto or therethrough
    but not limited to use with electric conduits, see Class 16, Miscellaneous
    Hardware, subclasses 2.1+ 108, and 109.


CLS 174/137
TXT Devices under the class definition for electrically insulating one or more
    conductors or other articles or structures from one another or from a
    supporting structure or ground.

    (1)     Note.  An insulating device within the meaning of this class may
    include in addition to the insulating body, per se, the necessary
    attachments or fittings for mounting or supporting the insulator or for
    securing a conductor or other article thereto.

    (2)     Note.  See this class, subclass 8 and indented subclasses,
    particularly subclasses 30 and 31, for insulating devices utilizing fluids;
    subclass 40 and indented subclasses, for overhead installations, and
    subclass 68.1 and indented subclasses, particularly subclass 110 and
    indented subclasses, for insulated conductors.

    (3)     Note.  Insulating devices limited by structure to use with
    particular art devices or claimed in combination with significant structure
    thereof will be found in the appropriate art classes. The following are
    particularly noted:

            Class 16, Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 18+, for insulating
    casters, and subclasses 116+, for insulated handles.

            Class 52, Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 408+ for
    a disparate sheet lamina between components of an in-situ construction and
    having no defined electrical significance except insulation in general.

            Class 75, Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use
    Therein, Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal
    Particulate Mixtures, subclasses 228+ for a composition having a continuous
    phase of free metal made by consolidating metal particles.

            Class 105, Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 60, for electric
    locomotive insulation.

            Class 238, Railways: Surface Track, subclasses 107 and 108, for
    railway tie insulation, and subclass 152 and indented subclasses, for
    insulated rail joints.

            Class 248, Supports, subclass 345, for canopy insulators.

            Class 285, Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 47+ for insulated
    pipe joints and couplings; and also the classes listed in note (4) of
    subclass 123.14 of this class.

    (4)     Note.  For dielectric materials see Notes (1), (1.5), (2), and (3),
    (3.1) and (3.5) of the class definition of this class, and the classes
    listed therein, and also Class 156 Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous
    Chemical Manufacture, appropriate subclasses for laminated insulation
    fabrics and Class 162, Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, for paper.

    (5)     Note.  For conductor or cable supports not claimed of insulating
    material, or otherwise restricted by electrical limitations, such as arcing
    devices, grounding means, etc., see Class 248, Supports, subclass 49 and
    indented subclasses.


CLS 174/138
TXT Insulating devices under subclass 137 for supporting and/or insulating
    particular articles or structures other than conductors.

    (05.)   Note.  This subclass includes insulated rod joints not otherwise
    classified.  Where the insulated rod joint is merely two or more rod-like
    bodies which are insulated from each other by means of insulating material
    which is joined to the rod-like bodies by means of bonded joint, the patent
    is classified in 403, Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 265+, for molded joints.  A bonded joint is a joint
    where the parts are held together by means of solder, welding material,
    cement or other adhesive, or by the materials adhering directly with each
    other.

    (1)     Note.  See note (3) subclass 137 of this class.

    (2)     Note.  Insulating elements adapted for insertion between the links
    of pull chains for switches are placed in this subclass, but where such
    element constitutes a handle or pull knob for the chain, classification is
    in Class 16, Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 122.

    (3)     Note.  For insulating devices specially designed to prevent persons
    or animals from receiving electrical shocks, see this class, subclass 5.

    (4)     Note.  Insulating elements which are constituent parts of
    electrical apparatus or devices and are specially designed for use therein
    will be found in the appropriate class for such apparatus or device, even
    though claimed, per se.  For example, see: Classes 191, Electricity:
    Transmission to Vehicles, subclass 39, for section insulators and subclass
    42 for combined ears and insulators; 200, Electricity:  Circuit Makers and
    Breakers, subclass 168, for switch and fuse mountings and base; 310,
    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 233+ for commutators
    having insulation for portions thereof; 313, Electric Lamp and Discharge
    Devices, subclasses 238+, for electric lamps and electric space discharge
    devices which are provided with insulators for supporting or spacing the
    electrodes of an electric lamp and electric space discharge device, see
    subclass 340 for indirectly heated cathodes for electric lamps and electric
    space discharge devices which are provided with an insulator for spacing
    the heater element from the cathode member; and 338, Electrical Resistors,
    for electrical resistance element cores and frames which constitutes part
    of the electrical resistor (see also (1) Note under subclass 321).
    Insulators, per se, for use in the devices of Class 313 and which are of
    general utility are in this subclass of Class 174.  See subclass 292 of
    Class 313 for miscellaneous supporting and spacing elements for use in the
    devices of Class 313 and which are not otherwise classified.  See Class
    439, Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for insulating contact
    bases, lamp sockets or other elements of connectors and appurtenant devices
    of insulating materials and not elsewhere classifiable.  See Class 336,
    Inductor Devices, especially subclasses 198, 206, 209, and 219 for coil,
    inductance, magnetic core and transformer insulation.  See Class 337,
    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches, appropriate
    subclasses for specific switches of the electrothermal or thermal type with
    mountings or bases.

    (5)     Note.  Insulating supports for neon tubes are placed in this
    subclass.  For similar supports not claimed as made of insulation, see
    Class 248, Supports, subclass 50.

    (6)     Note.  Fastening devices such as bolts, rivets, etc., having means
    for insulating the same from a structure penetrated by the fastening
    device, are in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 128+.


CLS 174/139
TXT Insulating devices under subclass 137 combined with things other than the
    insulating body, its supporting or attaching means, terminal elements, and
    conductor holding means, except those combinations provided for above in
    this class.  This includes, for example, guards and other protective
    devices for preventing mechanical injury to the insulating body, connectors
    for connecting two or more conductors supported by the insulator, heating
    devices for preventing condensation of moisture and other devices for
    improving the electrical efficiency of the insulator.

    (1)     Note.  For multi-part or composite insulators, or insulators having
    coatings of other insulating material, or having metallic or nonmetallic
    reinforcing elements embedded therein, see this class, subclasses 178 and
    indented subclasses, 181, 195, 209, and 210.

    (2)     Note.  For insulators having terminal means providing for
    ventilation thereof, see this class, subclass 187.

    (3)     Note.  For trolley guards, see Class 191, Electricity:
    Transmission to Vehicles, subclass 35.


CLS 174/140
TXT Insulating devices under subclass 139 combined with conductive means to
    modify the electrical characteristics of the insulator.  This includes, for
    example, arcing horns or electrodes, conductive coating or elements for
    modifying surface resistance or preventing concentration of stress, and
    conductive grading means for controlling the voltage gradient.

    (1)     Note.  Electric condensers or capacitors are in Class 361,
    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 271+, but mere
    insulators having condenser elements for modifying the capacity thereof, or
    for distributing the stresses therein, are in this class (174).

    (2)     Note.  Lightning arresters, arc and spark gaps, and other
    overvoltage protective means are in Class 361, Electricity:  Electrical
    Systems and Devices, subclasses 212+, and in Class 313, Electric Lamp and
    Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses even though the structure of the
    lightning arrester, arc or spark gaps includes insulating means to separate
    the electrodes of the device from each other.  Insulator structures which
    are primarily designed for spacing one or more conductors or other articles
    or structures, other than mere arc or spark gap terminals, from one another
    or from a supporting structure or ground when designed to permit
    overvoltage discharges, or when combined with arcing or sparking electrodes
    constituting a part of or secured to the insulator or its terminals or
    fittings for the purpose of protecting the insulator from the effects of
    the overvoltage discharge, are in this class (174).  Where additional means
    are provided (such as fuses, resistors, etc.) for controlling or
    suppressing the arc or overvoltage, classification is in Class 361.  Where
    the structure claimed of is intended for use establishing an electric space
    discharge between the electrodes of the arc or spark gap, and the insulator
    is provided merely to insulate the electrodes from each other, the patent
    is classified in Class 313.  Arcing or grading devices, per se, which are
    specially designed for use with the insulators of Class 174, are in this
    class (174), subclass 144.  Mere arc spark or other electric space
    discharge device electrodes, which are not limited to use with the
    insulators of class 174, are in Class 313, subclasses 326+.  See subclass
    313 of Class 313 for electric lamps and electric space discharge devices
    which are provided means for preventing the accumulation of static charges
    upon parts of the device or for preventing undesired electric space
    discharges, such as arcs, between the parts of the device.

    (3)     Note.  For conduit, cable or conductor joints or end structures
    combined with conductive stress distributing means, see this class,
    subclass 73.1.

    (4)     Note.  For X-ray devices having electrostatic field stress
    distributing means, see Class 378, X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices,
    subclass 139.

    (5)     Note.  For inductor devices with coil capacitance modifying means
    to change the potential gradient in order to minimize surge or transient
    effects, see Class 336, Inductor Devices, subclass 70.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 885 for antennas
    with a support having stress distributing or static discharging means in
    the support.


CLS 174/141
TXT Structures under subclass 140 in which the insulator consists of two or
    more separate insulating units arranged in series between the structures to
    be insulated.

    (1)     Note.  For insulator strings and stacks, per se, see this class,
    subclass 150.


CLS 174/142
TXT Structures under subclass 140 in which the insulator is of the type for
    insulating a conductor from a wall or plate through which the conductor
    extends.

    (1)     Note.  For bushing type insulators, per se, see this class,
    subclasses 151 and indented subclasses, and 167.


CLS 174/143
TXT Structures under subclass 142 in which alternating rings or cylinders of
    conductive and insulating material are arranged between the conductor and
    the wall or plate.

    (1)     Note.  See note (1) to the definition of subclass 140 of this class.

    SEARCH CLASS

    216,    Etching a Substrate: Processes, subclass 6 for the formation of a
    capacitor using etching in the process.


CLS 174/144
TXT Arcing or grading rings or devices, per se, specially designed for use with
    insulators.

    (1)     Note.  See note (2) to the definition of subclass 140 of this class.

    (2)     Note.  For arcing rings or devices, per se, see the reference to
    Class 313, Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, under "SEARCH CLASS" in (2)
    Note to the definition of subclass 140 of Class 174.


CLS 174/145
TXT Devices under subclass 139 combined with means for electrically connecting
    two or more conductors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for an electrical
    connector, generally, including the combination of a conductor therewith,
    and see the notes set forth in sections IV and VI in the definition of that
    class (Class 439) for distinctions between Class 174 and Class 439.


CLS 174/146
TXT Insulating devices under subclass 137 for spacing or separating two or more
    conductors at a point intermediate the supports for said conductors.

    (1)     Note.  For similar devices for spacing plural conductors in
    conduits, see this class, subclass 99.

    (2)     Note.  For strand spacing devices formed of conducting material,
    see this class, subclass 128.1 and indented subclasses.


CLS 174/147
TXT Devices under subclass 146 for spacing or separating the conductors at a
    point where they cross one another.

    (1)     Note.  For spacing devices of this character designed to effect
    transposition of the conductors for anti-inductive purposes, see this
    class, subclass 33.

    (2)     Note.  For devices applied to one conductor for preventing wear or
    abrasion caused by a second conductor or other object which crosses the
    first, search this class, subclass 136.

    (3)     Note.  For similar devices specially designed for use with trolley
    conductors, see Class 191, Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, subclass
    37.


CLS 174/148
TXT Combinations under subclass 137 of two or more insulators, each of which
    constitutes a substantially complete insulating device capable of
    independent use as such.

    (1)     Note.  Mere divided, sectional, or multipart insulators in which
    two or more insulating elements constitute complementary parts of a single
    insulating device are not included here and will be found in the subclasses
    indicated in the following notes.

    (2)     Note.  Divided insulators are in this class, subclasses 155, 156
    and 157.

    (3)     Note.  Sectional, multi-part, and composite insulators are in this
    class, subclasses 178 and indented subclasses, 195, 209 and 210.

    (4)     Note.  Mere supports for plural insulators, such as plural
    brackets, etc., not claimed in combination with the insulators nor
    otherwise restricted to use with electric conductors have been placed in
    Class 248, Supports, subclass 49 and indented subclasses, particularly in
    subclasses 67.7 and 68.1.

    (5)     Note.  For plural supports in general, see Class 211, Supports:
    Racks.

    (6)     Note.  For plural insulator assemblies claimed in combination with
    a pole, tower, or other overhead installation, see this class, subclass 40
    and indented subclasses.


CLS 174/149
TXT Structures under subclass 148 designed for supporting two or more
    conductors or cables in spaced relationship.


CLS 174/150
TXT Structures under subclass 148 in which all of the insulators are arranged
    in a series between the conductor and a supporting structure.

    (1)     Note.  For strings and stacks combined with arcing or conductive
    stress distributing means, see this class, subclass 141.

    (2)     Note.  Multiple insulator assemblies in which some of the
    insulators are arranged in series, and some are not, have been placed in
    this class, subclass 148 or 149, and cross-referenced here when necessary.


CLS 174/151
TXT Devices under subclass 137 for insulating a conductor from a wall or plate
    through which the conductor extends.

    (1)     Note.  For such devices combined with or utilizing a fluid, see
    this class, subclass 31.

    (1.3)   Note.  For hermetically sealed envelopes of the type used for
    electric lamps and electric space discharge devices which have a metallic
    wall portion with a lead-in conductor which passes through and is insulated
    from the metal wall portion, and where structure of the envelope in
    addition to the bushing structure is recited, see subclass 50.56 of this
    class.

    (1.5)   Note.  For the miscellaneous boxes and housings with bushings where
    structure in addition to the bushing structure is involved, and for the
    miscellaneous boxes and housings with means to couple a cable, wire or
    conduit to the box or housing, see subclass 65 of this class.

    (2)     Note.  For such devices combined with conductive arcing or stress
    distributing means, see this class, subclasses 142 and 143.

    (3)     Note.  For mere tubular or spool-type insulators not limited to use
    with a wall or plate, or combined in combination therewith, see this class,
    subclass 167 and the notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, particularly subclasses 713+
    for antennas with a vehicle wherein the antenna or its lead-in conductor is
    supported by, and may extend through and be insulated from, the vehicle
    body; and subclasses 888+ for antennas with a support for supporting the
    rod-like end portion of the antenna which may extend through and be
    insulated from a wall or plate.


CLS 174/152
TXT Devices under subclass 151 in which a portion of the insulating element
    extends into the opening in the wall or plate.

    (1)     Note. Class 174 provides for portions of a complete electrical
    bushing when there is no provision for the claimed subject matter in any
    other class (e.g., only electrical bushing structure of a spark plug, a
    lead-in wire of an electrical bushing as an electrode or center electrode,
    etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74+,    for an insulating bushing limited by structure to use with the end
    structure of a conduit, cable, or conductor, especially subclass 83 for
    conduit-end lining thimbles.

    138,    for an insulated rod joint.

    154+,   for tubular or spool-type insulator mounted in a supporting bracket
    or holder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 2+ for a bushing or lining
    thimble not limited to use with electric conductors.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 3.5+ for wall, floor, or panel mounted
    outlet or junction boxes.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 27.1+, for an instrument mounted in a panel
    and subclasses 56+ for a pipe or cable extending through a plate.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclass 606 for a static seal for a pipe, conduit, or cable, and
    a wall, subclass 919 for a seal including an electrical feature.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 189+ for a pipe and plate
    joint.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 118+ for a spark
    plug having a bushing including a ground electrode point and an insulated
    electrode point.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 456 for plates for mounting lenses.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 230+ for a rod end transverse to
    a side or plate.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 571+ for an electrical connector
    mounted or attached to a wall, plate, or panel.


CLS 174/153
TXT Devices under subclass 152 in which the bushing is secured in the wall or
    plate by means located upon and engaging opposite sides of said wall or
    plate.


CLS 174/154
TXT Insulators under subclass 137 mounted in a ring, clamp, or other holder
    which embraces or surrounds both the insulator, and the conductor held
    thereby.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 151 and indented subclasses,
    for bushing type insulators mounted in walls or plates.

    (2)     Note.  For pipe and cable holders having rings, clamps, etc.,
    embracing the pipe or cable and not limited to use with electric conductors
    or combined with insulators, see Class 248, Supports, subclass 49 and
    indented subclasses.


CLS 174/155
TXT Devices under subclass 154 in which the insulator is formed of two or more
    insulating parts assembled to provide a passage for receiving the
    conductor, or for clamping the conductor therebetween.

    (1)     Note.  For other divided insulators, see this class, subclasses 156
    and 157.


CLS 174/156
TXT Insulators under subclass 137 formed of two or more insulating parts
    assembled to provide one or more passages for receiving conductors, or for
    clamping the conductors therebetween.

    (1)     Note.  For mere multi-part or sectional insulators not assembled as
    set forth in the above definition, see this class, subclasses 209 and 210,
    and the notes thereto.

    (2)     Note.  Continue the search in this class, subclass 155.


CLS 174/157
TXT Divided insulators under subclass 156 in which the insulating parts have
    one or more aligned, through apertures for receiving a nail, screw, or like
    attaching element. Such devices are known as knobs or cleats.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 166, for one piece insulators
    having through apertures for receiving nails, screws, and similar elements.

    (2)     Note.  Continue the search in class 248, Supports, subclass 67.5.


CLS 174/158
TXT Insulators under subclass 137 combined with means for engaging or attaching
    to a supporting element or structure.

    (1)     Note.  Mere supports for insulators such as brackets, etc., not
    claimed in combination with the insulators nor otherwise restricted to use
    with electric conductors, have been placed in class 248, Supports,
    appropriate subclasses, particularly in subclasses 200+ and 317+, and this
    is so even though the bracket or other support is claimed as made in whole
    or in part of a material having inherent insulating properties; but where
    additional insulation features are claimed, such as insulating skirts, to
    shed rain, etc., classification is here (Class 174), in this subclass or
    indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  For insulators claimed in combination with a tower, pole or
    other overhead installation, see this class, subclass 40 and indented
    subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  For combinations of two or more insulators with their
    supporting or attaching means, see this class, subclass 148 and indented
    subclasses.

    (4)     Note.  For combinations of bushing type insulators with mounting or
    securing means, see this class, subclass 151 and indented subclasses.

    (5)     Note.  For mere terminal structures as defined in subclass 176,
    either per se or in combination with the insulator, see this class,
    subclass 176 and indented subclasses.


CLS 174/159
TXT Devices under subclass 158 consisting of a nail, staple, or similar
    fastening element adapted to secure one or more conductors to a wall or
    other supporting surface and provided with an insulating head, washer,
    strip or similar element for insulating the conductors.

    (1)     Note.  Compare subclasses 157 and 166 for insulators adapted to be
    secured to a support by means of a nail, screw, or similar fastening
    element, but in which the conductor is secured to the insulator in
    substantially spaced relation to the supporting surface.

    (2)     Note.  For fastening devices such as bolts, rivets, etc., having
    means for insulating the same from a structure penetrated by the fastening
    device, see this class, subclass 138.

    (3)     Note.  For driven, headed and screw threaded fastenings, per se,
    not having electrical characteristics, see Class 411, Expanded, Threaded,
    Headed, and Driven Fasteners, or Locked or Coupled Bolts or Nuts, even
    though formed in whole or in part of a material having inherent insulating
    properties.


CLS 174/160
TXT Insulators under subclass 158 having means associated therewith specially
    designed to engage a flexible supporting strand such as a span wire or
    messenger cable.

    (1)     Note.  Patents claiming two or more insulators combined with a
    messenger cable or other overhead supporting cable have been placed in this
    class, subclass 41, and cross-referenced here when necessary.

    (2)     Note.   For devices other than insulators for supporting a
    conductor or cable from an overhead or messenger cable, see this  class,
    subclass 41 and the notes thereto.


CLS 174/161
TXT Devices under subclass 158 constructed or arranged so as (a) to permit the
    insulator to be adjustably positioned with respect to its supporting
    structure, or (b) to permit relative motion between the insulator and its
    supporting structure.  This includes, for example, suspension means,
    pivotally or movably mounted, brackets having adjustable sections, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Mere terminal devices of the link or clevis type are in this
    class, subclass 176 and indented subclasses, particularly subclasses 184
    and 207.

    (2)     Note.  Insulating devices in which adjustability or movability is
    attained solely by reason of the inherent flexibility or resiliency of the
    insulating material are not here but will be found in this class, subclass
    137 or the indented subclasses appropriate to the structure claimed.


CLS 174/162
TXT Devices under subclass 158 in which the insulator is positioned between and
    secured to a pair of brackets, flanges, cross-arms, or the like.

    (1)     Note.  Continue the search in class 248, Supports, subclass 67.7.

    (2)     Note.  Plural assemblies of the type provided for here, including
    those known to the trade as "Secondary racks", have been placed in this
    class, subclass 149.

    (3)     Note.  For mere terminal devices of the link or clevis type in
    which the insulator is positioned between and secured to the arms of the
    link or clevis, see this class, subclass 176 and indented subclasses,
    especially subclasses 184 and 207.


CLS 174/163
TXT Devices under subclass 158 having means embracing or clamping the
    insulator, or its support, or both.  Said means may include, for example,
    (1) a sleeve, ring, socket, cap, or other element which receives or
    encircles the insulator, or (2) a clamp for engaging the insulator and/or a
    cross-arm or other support, or (3) insulators having flanges thereon for
    straddling a cross-arm or other support.

    (1)     Note.  For similar devices in which the insulator embracing or
    clamping element also embraces the conductors, see this class, subclasses
    154 and 155.

    (2)     Note.  Insulators having integrally projecting stems for insertion
    in a cross-arm, wall, or similar support have been placed in this class,
    subclass 164.

    (3)     Note.  For the support embracing or clamping features, continue the
    search in class 248, Supports, subclasses 65 and indented subclasses and
    200 and indented subclasses, particularly subclasses 72, 214, 218.4,
    220.21, 226.11, and 309.1 and indented subclasses.


CLS 174/164
TXT Devices under subclass 158 in which the support securing or attaching means
    includes a portion extending into or through the support.

    (1)     Note.  Insulators having integral stem portions for mounting in a
    cross-arm, wall, or similar support are in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Insulator supports secured to a main support solely by
    nails, screws, or similar fastening elements not forming a part of the
    insulator support are excluded from this subclass and have been placed in
    this class, subclass 158, or other appropriate indented subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  For the support penetrating features, continue the search in
    class 248, Supports, subclasses 71 and 216 and indented subclasses.


CLS 174/165
TXT Devices under subclass 164 of the type having a portion in the form of a
    pin, rod, belt, stud, or similar element secured within a socket formed in
    the insulating body.

    (1)     Note.  For mere pin terminals, see this class, subclass 176 and
    indented subclasses, especially subclasses 180, 182, 185, and 194 and
    indented subclasses.


CLS 174/166
TXT Insulators under subclass 164 in which the insulating body is provided with
    one or more through apertures for receiving nails, screws, or similar
    elements adapted to clamp the insulating body to a supporting surface.

    (1)     Note.  For divided insulators having similar attaching means, see
    this class, subclass 157.


CLS 174/167
TXT Devices under subclass 137 in which the insulating body is provided with at
    least one through aperture for receiving a conductor.

    (1)     Note.  Insulating tubes, spools, and other bushing type insulators,
    other than divided insulators, not claimed in combination with a wall,
    plate or other holding means, or restricted by structure to use therewith,
    have been placed in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  For other insulators having through apertures for receiving
    conductors, see this class, subclass 151 and indented subclasses, for
    bushings mounted in a wall or plate or restricted to use therewith;
    subclasses 154 and 155, for insulators mounted in an embracing holder or
    restricted to use therewith, and subclasses 155, 156 and 157, for divided
    insulators.

    (3)     Note.  For insulators having through apertures for receiving
    supporting or terminal elements, see this class, subclasses 157, 166, 184,
    207, and 208.

    (4)     Note.  For insulators having slots and grooves for receiving
    conductors, see this class, subclasses 174 and 175.


CLS 174/168
TXT Insulating devices under subclass 137 having means for holding or securing
    one or more conductors.

    (1)     Note.  For insulators having means specially designed for holding
    structures or articles other than conductors, see this class, subclass 138.

    (2)     Note.  For insulators combined with conductor holding means
    specially designed to electrically connect two or more conductors, see this
    class, subclass 145.

    (3)     Note.  For devices for holding conductors on insulators not claimed
    in combination with the insulator nor otherwise restricted to use with
    electric conductors, and for analogous devices for holding cord and rope,
    see Class 24, Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 115 and 339+ and their indented subclasses.

    (4)     Note.  For insulators combined with means specialized for holding
    either overhead or underground conductors, such as trolley wires or third
    rails, so as to permit travel of a current collector therealong, see Class
    191, Electricity: Transmission to Vehicles, subclasses 32 and 42.

    (5)     Note.  For analogous devices for securing the wires of wire fences
    to the fence posts or poles, see Class 256, Fences, subclass 47 and
    indented subclasses.


CLS 174/169
TXT Devices under subclass 168 in which the conductor is held in or on a member
    other than the insulating body proper, which member is in turn secured or
    adapted to be secured to the insulating body.  This includes, for example,
    caps, pins, and other elements having a portion secured to the insulator
    and another portion provided with conductor receiving means.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and indented subclasses do not include devices
    designed to hold or position the conductor on the surface of the insulator
    or in a groove or slot formed therein.  Such devices are in this class,
    subclass 168, or other appropriate indented subclass.

    (2)     Note.  For inventions in the manner of securing the fitting or
    terminal to the insulating body, see this class, subclass 176 and indented
    subclasses.


CLS 174/170
TXT Devices under subclass 169 in which the conductor holding element is of
    hook form.


CLS 174/171
TXT Devices under subclass 169 in which the conductor holding element is
    specially designed for use with a conductor having a cross-section other
    than circular.

    (1)     Note.  See note (4) of subclass 168 of this class.


CLS 174/172
TXT Devices under subclass 168 in which the conductor is held on the insulating
    body, usually in a groove or slot, formed therein by retaining means having
    a clamp or other portion embracing the insulator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 1.1+, for other types
    of combined electric motor and brake combinations.


CLS 174/173
TXT Devices under subclass 172 in which the conductor retaining means consists
    of a flexible strand bent, wrapped or twisted about the conductor and
    insulator.

    (1)     Note.  Similar devices having preformed eyes, hooks, or other
    attaching portions, and tie wires which do not embrace the insulator have
    been placed in this class, subclass 168 and other appropriate indented
    subclass.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 256, Fences, subclasses 57 and 71, and the notes
    thereto.


CLS 174/174
TXT Devices under subclass 168 in which the structure of the insulating body is
    modified, as by means of grooves, slots, projections, etc., to provide
    conductor receiving or attaching portions.

    (1)     Note.  Such insulators combined with devices for holding the
    conductor in the slots or grooves, or about the projections of the
    insulator, have been placed in this class, subclass 168 or other
    appropriate subclass indented thereunder.

    (2)     Note.  For insulator structures in which the conductor receiving
    means comprises a through perforation formed in the insulator body, see
    this class, subclass 167 and the notes thereto.

    (3)     Note.  Compare Class 24, Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass
    129 and indented subclasses, for one-piece cord and rope holders.


CLS 174/175
TXT Insulator structures under subclass 174 designed to hold or retain a
    conductor without the employment of auxiliary fastening or retaining means.
     This includes, for example, insulators having conductor-receiving slots or
    passageways formed therein with tortuous or restricted entranceways to
    prevent separation of the conductor under ordinary installation conditions,
    and even though the conductor is loosely positioned and free to move
    longitudinally through the insulator.

    (1)     Note.  Compare Class 256, Fences, subclass 53.


CLS 174/176
TXT Insulators under subclass 137 combined with one or more terminal elements,
    as defined in the following note:

    (1)     Note.  A "terminal element" as used herein is that portion of an
    insulator support, conductor holder, or other insulator attachment which is
    secured to the insulating body.  This includes, for example, caps, pins,
    links, or clevises, but when significant features of the means whereby
    these elements are secured to supports, conductors, or other devices, are
    claimed, the patent will be classified in the appropriate subclass above
    for such features and cross-referenced to this subclass and indented
    subclasses, when necessary.


CLS 174/177
TXT Insulators under subclass 176 having two or more terminal elements.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes all insulators having more than two
    terminals, and also such two-terminal insulators as are not provided for in
    the indented subclasses.


CLS 174/178
TXT Two-terminal insulators under subclass 177 comprising two or more
    insulating parts, sections, or materials.

    (1)     Note.  For multi-part insulators combined with single pin-type
    terminals, see this class subclass 195.

    (2)     Note.  For other multi-part, sectional, or composite insulators,
    see this class, subclasses 209 and 210 and the notes thereto.


CLS 174/179
TXT Two-terminal insulators under subclass 178 comprising an elongated
    insulating core enclosed in a tubular structure of other insulating
    material.


CLS 174/180
TXT Two-terminal insulators under subclass 178 in which one of the terminal
    elements is a pin, as defined in subclass 194, and the other is a member
    having a portion embracing one end of said pin, but insulated therefrom.

    (1)     Note. For similar terminal arrangements combined with one-piece
    insulators, see this class, subclasses 182 and 185.


CLS 174/181
TXT Two-terminal insulators under subclass 177 in which a metallic element,
    insulated from the terminal elements, (a) reinforces the insulating body or
    (b) prevents mechanical separation of the terminal elements in the event
    the insulating body is broken or otherwise destroyed.

    (1)     Note. For other metal reinforced insulators, see this class,
    subclasses 209 and 210.


CLS 174/182
TXT Two-terminal insulators under subclass 177 in which one of the terminals
    comprises a pin, as defined in subclass 194, and the other terminal
    comprises a cap, as defined in subclass 188, coaxially positioned with
    respect to the pin.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 180 and 185, for insulators
    having pin terminals combined with coaxially positioned terminals other
    than caps.

    (2)     Note.  For other insulators having cap-type terminals, see this
    class, subclasses 186 and 188 and indented subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  For other insulators having pin type terminals, see this
    class, subclasses 180, 185 and 194 and indented subclasses.


CLS 174/183
TXT Two-terminal insulators under subclass 177, the terminals being insulated
    from one another but overlapping one another in the direction of the axis
    of the insulator.

    (1)     Note.  Where the overlapping terminals comprise a cap and pin
    respectively, see this class, subclass 182.

    (2)     Note.  For similar terminal arrangements combined with multi-part,
    sectional, or composite insulators, see this class, subclass 178 and
    indented subclasses.


CLS 174/184
TXT Two-terminal insulators under subclass 183 in which the terminals, usually
    in the form of links, clevises, or loops, are arranged to inter-link one
    another.

    (1)     Note.  For insulators combined with a single link or clevis type
    terminal, see this class, subclass 207.

    (2)     Note.  For insulator structures, per se, specially designed for use
    with link or clevis type terminals, see this class, subclass 208.


CLS 174/185
TXT Two-terminal insulators under subclass 183 in which one of the terminals
    has a pin portion, as defined in subclass 194, and the other terminal has a
    portion coaxially positioned with respect to said pin portion but insulated
    therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  Continue the search in this class, subclass 180.


CLS 174/186
TXT Two-terminal insulators under subclass 177 in which each terminal comprises
    a cap portion, as defined in subclass 188.

    (1)     Note.  For other insulators having cap-type terminals, see this
    class, subclasses 182 and 188 and indented subclasses.


CLS 174/187
TXT Insulators under subclass 176 in which a terminal element is constructed or
    arranged to permit ventilation of a chamber or space formed in the
    insulating body.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 16.


CLS 174/188
TXT Insulators under subclass 176 claimed in combination with a single terminal
    of the type comprising a cup-shaped element in which at least a portion of
    the insulating body is secured.

    (1)     Note.  For other insulators having cap type terminals, see this
    class, subclasses 182 and 186, and compare subclasses 180 and 185.

    (2)     Note.  For insulator supports having cup-shaped portions in which
    the insulator is secured, see this class, subclass 163.


CLS 174/189
TXT Insulators under subclass 188 in which the insulating body is molded within
    the cap terminal, or is secured therein by means including a plastic
    bonding material, such as, for example, cement or alloy.

    (1)     Note.  For insulators having pin-type terminals secured by plastic
    bonding material, see this class, subclass 196.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 265+ and subclasses specified in
    the notes to the definition of that subclass for miscellaneous bonded
    joints.


CLS 174/190
TXT Insulators under subclass 188 in which the cap terminal is longitudinally
    divided to facilitate assembly about the insulating body.


CLS 174/191
TXT Insulators under subclass 188 in which the insulating body is secured
    within the cap terminal by means including a clamp or clasp.  This includes
    the use of set screws or like devices projecting through the wall or rim of
    the cap for clamping the insulating body.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 197, for insulators having
    pin-type terminal secured by clamps or clasps.


CLS 174/192
TXT Insulators under subclass 188 in which the insulating body is secured
    within the cap terminal by means including a ring, wedge, or other similar
    element interposed between the cap and the insulating body.

    (1)     Note.  Where in addition to such interposed element a plastic
    bonding material is employed, the patent is placed in this class, subclass
    189 and cross-referenced here.

    (2)     Note.  For insulators having pin-type terminals secured by
    interposed rings or wedges, see this class, subclass 198.


CLS 174/193
TXT Insulators under subclass 188 in which the insulating body is secured
    within the cap terminal by means including a threaded or bayonet joint.

    (1)     Note.  For insulators having pin-type terminals secured by a
    threaded or bayonet joint, see this class, subclass 202.


CLS 174/194
TXT Insulators under subclass 176 claimed in combination with a single terminal
    of the type comprising a pin, rod, bolt, stud, or similar element secured
    within a socket or hole formed in the insulating body.

    (1)     Note.  For other insulators having pin-type terminals, see this
    class, subclasses 180, 182 and 185.

    (2)     Note.  For insulator supports having a pin portion secured within a
    socket or opening in the insulating body, see this class, subclass 158 and
    indented subclasses, particularly subclass 165.

    (3)     Note.  For the broader aspects of joints between a pin terminal and
    an insulator body, or for similar joints not limited to insulators, see
    Class 403, Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses, especially
    subclasses 230+, 299+ and 361+.


CLS 174/195
TXT Insulators under subclass 194 comprising two or more insulating parts or
    sections.

    (1)     Note.  For multi-part insulators combined with two or more
    terminals, see this class, subclass 178 and indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  For other multi-part, sectional, or composite insulators,
    see this class, subclasses 209 and 210 and the notes thereto.

    (3)     Note.  For insulators having sockets provided with mere thimbles or
    linings for receiving the pin terminal, see this class, subclass 200, even
    though the thimble or lining is of insulating material.


CLS 174/196
TXT Insulators under subclass 194 in which the insulating body is molded around
    the pin terminal, or is secured thereto by means including a plastic
    bonding material such as, for example, cement or alloy.

    (1)     Note.  For insulators having cap-type terminals secured by plastic
    bonding material, see this class, subclass 189.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 265+ and the classes and
    subclasses specified in the notes to the definition of that subclass for
    miscellaneous bonded joints.


CLS 174/197
TXT Insulators under subclass 194 in which the pin is secured within the
    insulator by means including a clamp or clasp.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 191, for insulators having
    cap-type terminals secured by clamps or clasps.


CLS 174/198
TXT Insulators under subclass 194 in which the pin is secured within the
    insulator by means including a ring, wedge, or other similar element
    interposed between the pin and insulating body.

    (1)     Note.  Where in addition to such interposed element a plastic
    bonding material is employed, the patent is placed in this class, subclass
    196 and cross-referenced here.

    (2)     Note.  For insulators having cap-type terminals secured by
    interposed rings or wedges, see this class, subclass 192.


CLS 174/199
TXT Insulators under subclass 194 in which the pin terminal has a portion
    expanded within the insulator socket to secure it in place.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 230+.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener,  subclasses 15+ for expanding anchors.


CLS 174/200
TXT Insulators under subclass 194 in which the socket in the insulator is
    provided with a lining or shell commonly known as a thimble for receiving
    the pin.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 195 and 210, for multi-part
    insulators comprising nested, cup-shaped parts, the inner-most of which is
    provided with a pin receiving socket.

    (2)     Note.  See this class, subclass 202 and indented subclasses, for
    thimbles forming a part of, or attached to, the pin and secured in the
    insulator by means of a threaded or bayonet joint.


CLS 174/201
TXT Insulators under subclass 194 having a hole extending entirely therethrough
    for receiving the pin.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 157, 162 and 166, for
    insulators having through openings for receiving a supporting element.


CLS 174/202
TXT Insulators under subclass 194 in which the pin is secured in the insulator
    by means including a threaded or bayonet joint.

    (1)     Note.  For insulators having cap-type terminals secured by a
    threaded or bayonet joint, see this class, subclass 193.

    (2)     Note.  For joints of the screw or bayonet type, using a thimble,
    see this class, subclass 200.

    (3)     Note.  For screw-threaded fasteners generally, see Class 411,
    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or Locked-Threaded
    Fastener, appropriate subclasses.

    (4)     Note.  See Class 403, Joints and Connections, for mere joints,
    particularly subclass 343 for screw type joints.


CLS 174/203
TXT Insulators under subclass 202 in which the thread is of strand form, i.e.,
    not formed integrally with a base.

    (1)     Note.  Strands of fibrous or other soft material set in a screw
    groove are in this subclass.  For other soft or yielding material screw
    pins, see this class, subclass 205.


CLS 174/204
TXT Insulators under subclass 202 in which the pin thread is formed in sheet
    material.


CLS 174/205
TXT Insulators under subclass 202 in which the pin, or some insulator
    contacting part thereof, is of soft or yielding material.

    (1)     Note.  Wood pins when used because of their yielding character are
    here.

    (2)     Note.  These devices are for the most part to prevent excessive
    mechanical stresses in the insulator due to differential expansion between
    the pin and insulator.

    (3)     Note.  For soft or yielding structures of the kind above provided
    for, see the appropriate structural group of this class, particularly
    subclasses 200, 203, and 204.


CLS 174/206
TXT Insulator structures under subclass 202 claiming the socket structure, per
    se, for receiving pin terminals of the screw or bayonet type.

    (1)     Note.  For insulator structures having sockets provided with pin
    receiving screw thimbles, see this class, subclass 200.


CLS 174/207
TXT Insulators under subclass 176 having a single terminal in the form of a
    link, clevis, or loop, a portion of which extends through or around the
    insulator.

    (1)     Note.  Complete the search in this class, subclass 184.

    (2)     Note.  For insulator structures per se of the type adapted to
    receive link or clevis terminal, see this class, subclass 208.

    (3)     Note.  For mere links or clevises of the type employed in chain
    structure see Class 59, Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclass 78
    and indented subclasses.

    (4)     Note.  For mere joints between a link or clevis and a fitting for
    the same, see Class 403, Joints and Connections, particularly subclasses
    150+.


CLS 174/208
TXT Insulators under subclass 137 of the type providing passages such as
    grooves or openings for the reception of a link, clevis, or loop.

    (1)     Note.  For similar structures combined with terminals see this
    class, subclasses 184 and 207.

    (2)     Note.  For other insulator structures having through apertures, see
    this class, subclass 167 and the notes thereto.


CLS 174/209
TXT Insulators under subclass 137 in which the insulating device is composed of
    (1) two or more insulating parts or sections suitably assembled to provide
    a unitary insulating structure, or (2) an insulating body coated or covered
    with other insulating material, or (3) an insulating body provided with
    mere reinforcing elements.  Such reinforcing elements may be metallic
    provided they have no electrical function.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 140 and indented subclasses, for
    insulators coated with conductive material for stress distributing purposes.

    (2)     Note.  For similar structures combined with terminal elements, see
    this class, subclasses 178 and indented subclasses, 181 and 195.

    (3)     Note.  For multi-part insulators of the type in which one or more
    conductors are clamped or otherwise secured between two or more insulating
    parts, see this class, subclasses 155, 156 and 157.

    (4)     Note.  For multi-part insulators of the bushing type, or otherwise
    specially designed to insulate a conductor from a wall or plate through
    which the conductor passes, see this class, subclasses 151 and indented
    subclasses and 167.

    (5)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 148 and indented subclasses,
    for assemblies or combinations of two or more complete insulators.

    (6)     Note.  For electric conductors insulated with composite or
    plural-layer insulation, see this class, subclass 120 and indented
    subclasses.

    (7)     Note.  See Class 156, Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical
    Manufacture, subclasses 47+ for methods of laminating indefinite length
    electrical conductors.


CLS 174/210
TXT Insulators under subclass 209 of the type in which a plurality of
    cup-shaped insulating elements are nested one within another.  One of the
    cup-shaped elements usually exposes its socket to the exterior of the
    structure, which socket may be used for the reception of a terminal or
    supporting element.

    (1)     Note.  For similar structures claimed in combination with the
    terminal element, see this class, subclass 195.


CLS 174/211
TXT Insulators under subclass 137 having a structure specially designed to
    disperse or to facilitate shedding or disposal of rain, atmospheric
    moisture or other foreign matter.  The means for accomplishing this may
    consist, for example, of petticoats, skirts, flanges, ribs, etc., modified
    for this purpose, or drainage openings, grooves, channels, etc.

    (1)     Note.  For insulators having means for handling or dealing with
    fluids other than rain or atmospheric moisture, see this class, subclasses
    30 and 31.

    (2)     Note.  See this class, subclass 139 and indented subclasses, for
    insulators combined with heating means to dry or prevent moisture from
    condensing.


CLS 174/212
TXT Insulators under subclass 137 in which the shape or external configuration
    of the insulating body is specially designed to modify its electrical
    and/or mechanical characteristics.  This includes, for example, insulators
    (1) having petticoats, skirts, or flanges formed or proportioned to
    distribute electrical stresses or increase the leakage path or (2) having
    strengthening ribs formed thereon, or (3) shaped to afford tool engaging
    surfaces to facilitate mounting the insulator, or (4) streamlined to reduce
    wind resistance.

    (1)     Note.  For insulators having a shape or surface designed to
    disperse or to facilitate shedding or removal of rain, moisture, or other
    foreign matter, see this class, subclass 211.

    (2)     Note.  For insulators having a shape or surface modified to provide
    conductor receiving or attaching means, see this class, subclass 168 and
    indented subclasses, especially subclasses 174 and 175.

    (3)     Note.  For insulators having a shape or surface modified to provide
    terminal receiving or attaching means, see this class, subclass 176 and
    indented subclasses.

    (4)     Note.  For insulators having interlinking passages or grooves
    formed therein, see this class, subclass 208.

    (5)     Note.  For insulators having a shape or surface modified to provide
    support receiving or attaching means, see this class, subclass 158 and
    indented subclasses.


CLS 174/250
TXT Preformed panel circuit arrangement (e.g., printed circuit):Subject matter
    under subclass 68 wherein a cable or conductor is formed on or attached to
    a panel or sheet-like insulating body so as to form a unitary structure.

    (1)     Note.  The conductor or cable may be made by coating a panel or
    sheet with conductive material, or by impregnating selected layers of the
    surface of an insulating body with conductive material, or by attaching
    preformed conductors to the surface of an insulating-body as by adhesives,
    etc.  Note the reference to Class 428, Stock Material or Miscellaneous
    Articles, below.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass are such "printed circuit"
    assemblies as include "branched" circuits (indented subclasses 71+), such
    assemblies as include joints between the ends of the cables or conductors
    (subclasses 84+), as well as other "printed circuit" structures properly
    classified in subclass 68 or one of the indented subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass and those indented thereunder include printed
    circuit boards having one or more electrical devices of the same type.
    Search Class 361, subclasses 397+ for printed circuit boards having plural,
    diverse electrical devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 829+ for the miscellaneous methods of
    manufacturing cable and conductor assemblies of the type classified in this
    subclass of  Class 174.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    for integrated circuit structure with active solid-state devices,
    subclasses 446 and 499+ for integrated circuit devices with electrically
    isolated components, in general, subclasses 678-733 for housings, in
    general, subclasses 787-796 for encapsulated devices, in general, and other
    appropriate subclasses for specific type devices in integrated circuits, or
    with a housing, or with encapsulation.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 66 for amplifier printed circuit boards, per
    se.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 199 for electromagnetically operated switches
    where at least a part of the switch contact structure includes a printed
    circuit.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 397+ for
    printed circuit boards having diverse electrical devices.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 96+ for chemical coating processes
    which produce printed circuits and printed circuit boards.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for a single or plural layer stock material product which involves no more
    structure than a base having a conductive layer coated thereon or
    impregnated therein, see especially subclass 67 for nonparticulate elements
    embedded or inlaid in a substrate and visible, subclasses 411+ for a
    nonstructural composite product characterized solely by the composition of
    the layers, subclass 601 for metallic stock having a discontinuous surface
    component, e.g., printed circuit, and subclass 901 (a cross-reference art
    collection) for a printed circuit device.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 55+ for "printed circuit"
    assemblies which include detachable connectors.


CLS 174/251
TXT With encapsulated wire:
    Subject matter under subclass 250 wherein the unitary structure includes a
    wire electrical conducting means embedded in, potted or molded over with a
    material which protects the wire from the surrounding environment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96      and 98,  for embedded conductors, per se.

    117,    for insulated conductor assemblies of noncircular section.


CLS 174/252
TXT With cooling means:
    Subject matter under subclass 250 including means to remove or prevent heat
    accumulation in the structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 381 for
    printed circuits with cooling means, where the printed circuits includes
    plural diverse electrical devices.


CLS 174/253
TXT Micropanel:
    Subject matter under subclass 250 wherein the cable or conductor is not
    visible to the naked eye.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the size of the structure is given in terms of
    microns and is smaller than 20 mils.

    (2)     Note.  The micropanels of this class should not be confused with
    microstrip or microwave devices classified principally in Class 333, Wave
    Transmission Lines and Networks.  (A microstrip is generally a flat
    conductor which coacts with a single ground plane.)

    (3)     Note.  Coating thickness of a conducting layer is insufficient for
    classification in this subclass.


CLS 174/254
TXT Convertible shape (e.g., flexible) or circuit (e.g., breadboard):Subject
    matter under subclass 250 wherein the structure is either easily bent
    without breaking or has means to easily change its conductor circuit
    configuration.

    (1)     Note.  Terms that are somewhat synonymous with "breadboard" are
    "prototype" and "universal board".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 398 for
    flexible printed circuits which include plural, diverse electrical devices.


CLS 174/255
TXT With particular substrate or support structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 250 including a material means distinguished
    by significant construction or configuration which provides a supporting
    surface for other materials, especially materials used as printed-circuits
    patterns.


CLS 174/256
TXT With particular material:
    Subject matter under subclass 250 wherein at least a part of the circuit
    board structure is composed of one or more specific substances.


CLS 174/257
TXT Conducting (e.g., ink):
    Subject matter under subclass 256 including a material adapted to the
    transmission of electricity.

    (1)     Note.  The conducting material may be for example superconducting,
    semiconducting or resistive.


CLS 174/258
TXT Insulating:
    Subject matter under subclass 256 including a material on or through which
    essentially no electrical current will flow.


CLS 174/259
TXT Adhesive/bonding:
    Subject matter under subclass 256 including a material which causes parts
    of the structure to stick, bind or fasten together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263,    for soldered feed through connections where the composition of the
    solder is nominal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for adhesive methods and materials, per se.


CLS 174/260
TXT With an electrical device:
    Subject matter under subclass 250 wherein an electrical component other
    than a wire, cable or connector is part of the panel circuit arrangement.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes plural electrical devices of the same
    type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 40+ for integrated chip devices, subclasses 72+ for encapsulated
    solid- state devices and subclasses 74+ for active solid-state devices
    combined with a housing.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 358+ for
    electrical service distribution boxes including panel boards for electrical
    power distribution systems and devices.


CLS 174/261
TXT With a particular conductive connection (e.g., crossover):
    Subject matter under subclass 250 including details to the electrical
    interconnection of two or more electrically separate parts of the panel.


CLS 174/262
TXT Feedthrough:
    Subject matter under subclass 261 including a passage used to make
    electrical and mechanical connection between conductive patterns on plural
    planes of a printed circuit board.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 410 for
    cross-connected patterns on printed circuit boards which include plural
    diverse electrical components.


CLS 174/263
TXT With solder:
    Subject matter under subclass 262 wherein the conductive material is a
    readily meltable metal or alloy that produces a bond at a junction of two
    metal surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259,    for bonding with solder in printed circuits where the solder has a
    significant composition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, appropriate subclasses for soldering methods
    and devices, per se.


CLS 174/264
TXT Voidless (e.g., solid):
    Subject matter under subclass 262 wherein the conductive material is a
    solid that completely fills the feedthrough.


CLS 174/265
TXT Preform in hole:
    Subject matter under subclass 264 including a prefabricated solid
    conductive material insert for the feedthrough.


CLS 174/266
TXT Hollow (e.g., plated cylindrical hole):
    Subject matter under subclass 262 wherein the feedthrough surrounds an
    empty space.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes hollow preform inserts.


CLS 174/267
TXT Termination post:
    Subject matter under subclass 261 including an oblong piece of metal,
    either solid or hollow and of two or more diameters, which can be stacked,
    flared, swaged or pressed into a hole for the purpose of connecting leads
    or external wires to the conductive part of the panel.


CLS 174/268
TXT With single conductive plane (e.g., tape, cable):
    Subject matter under subclass 250 including a single layer of conductive
    material in a circuit arrangement supported by a layer of insulative
    material.


CLS 175/
TTL BORING OR PENETRATING THE  EARTH

CLS 175/
TXT INDEX TO CLASS DEFINITION AND NOTES



    I       CLASS DEFINITION

    II   DEFINITION OF TERMS

    III  RELATIONSHIP TO CLASS 166, WELLS

    IV      RELATIONSHIP TO OTHER CLASSES WHICH INCLUDE SUBJECT MATTER CLOSELY
    RELATED TO CLASS 175

    V       MISCELLANEOUS SEARCH NOTES

    VI      INDEX TO CLASSES NOTED IN (1) SECTIONS I-V AND (2) THE SUBCLASSES
    OF THIS CLASS

    I       CLASS DEFINITION

    A.      This class relates to processes and means for initially forming or
    radially enlarging an elongated hole in the earth in situ by dislocating
    the solid material of the earth.

    1.      The means forming the hole is of the type which advances inwardly
    into the earth from the point at which the earth is pierced and acts on the
    entire peripheral extent of the hole as it advances.

    2.      Dislocating of the earth formation may be achieved by any action,
    such as disintegrating, compacting, chipping, cutting, severing, splitting,
    spalling, piercing, burning, decomposing or eroding, for example, so long
    as the purpose is to form a hole.

    B.      This class also takes tools not elsewhere classified specifically
    described as for forming bores in masonry, concrete, cement, glass or
    similar materials having a brittle frangible character similar to rock.

    C.      This class is also the locus for below ground impact connections.
    Such devices, commonly called "Jars" are defined as a means forming a lost
    motion connection in a shaft or cable, and are provided with impacting
    faces which are described as generating a blow to be delivered to some
    device connected to the rod or cable and located in a hole in the earth.
    Combinations involving below ground impact connection and a specifically
    claimed art device which forms subject matter for another class will be
    found in such other class.

    However, the combination of the below ground impact connection and a
    specific joint for joining the shaft or cable to an art device which forms
    subject matter for another class is classifiable in Class 175.

    D.      This class includes in subclasses 2+ subject matter relating to
    devices for firing a bullet or exploding a shaped charge from an
    inaccessible hole to penetrate the formation.  Also included are such
    devices which are limited by disclosure to perforating or cutting a casing
    or other hole lining in an inaccessible hole but which would inherently
    function to direct a bullet or charge in the same manner as a formation
    cutter or perforator.

    II      DEFINITION OF TERMS

    ABOVE GROUND

    The term "Above Ground" denotes any point which lies outside of a hole
    being formed in the earth, this may be either in the open (e.g., on the
    surface of the earth) or a cellar, tunnel or other hole in the earth from
    which a hole is being formed.

    ADVANCE

    Motion in a direction towards the desired depth or direction of a hole
    being formed.

    BELOW GROUND

    "Below Ground" denotes any point within a hole being formed in the earth
    from the point at which the earth is pierced by the means forming the hole.

    BORE

    The hole formed by the boring means. It is not limited to a vertically
    extending hole, but can extend at any angle into the earth.

    BOREWALL

    The wall which forms the periphery of a hole in the earth.  In the case of
    a lined hole the inside wall of the lining constitutes a borewall for
    purposes of classification.

    BORING MEANS

    A combination of parts comprising an earth boring or drilling device.  It
    may comprise merely a tool provided with a handle for manipulating the same
    to form a hole in the earth, or a complex combination of parts including
    above ground structure for supporting, feeding and driving a tool for
    boring a hole in the earth.

    CASING

    A tube which is introduced in a preformed bore and forms a lining for the
    bore.

    Conveyor

    A mechanical device for receiving and carrying cuttings, for example, it
    may consist of a simple chute for directing cuttings away from the bore
    entrance, a helical screw fixed to the tool shaft, or a power-driven
    endless carrier type device extending between any two points within the
    bore or from any point within the bore to any location above ground.

    DRILLING FLUID

    Any fluid, gaseous or liquid, which is introduced into the bore for the
    purpose of lubricating or cleaning any part of the boring means, or to
    displace or assist the tool in displacing the formation, or to flush or
    clean the bore of cuttings.

    DRIVE

    A part of the boring means which comprises a motion generating, applying,
    or transmitting means which is specifically adapted to repeatedly or
    continuously act upon a boring tool to cause the tool to bore by cutting or
    penetrating into the earth.  Drive is divided into the following major
    categories:

    (1)     Feed.  The sustained forced advance of a boring tool by means other
    than mere gravity, adapted to cause the tool to cut or penetrate either
    with or without another type of drive means.

    (2)     Impact Drive.  The actuation of a boring tool by a means adapted to
    deliver a series of blows upon a tool or tool shaft, said impact delivering
    means being adapted to move relative to said tool or tool shaft.

    (3)     Reciprocating Drive.  The actuation of a boring tool by means
    adapted to cause the tool to partake of to and fro axial movement, at least
    one direction of axial movement being caused by the drive.

    (4)     Rotary Drive.  The actuation of a boring tool by means causing the
    tool to continuously rotate about its own axis, and includes uniform or
    step by step unidirectional or oscillatory motion.

    INACCESSIBLE HOLE

    A hole or cavity in the earth which is not large enough to permit both a
    human operator and a boring means to be located therein.  A specific
    disclosure that the hole or cavity is a well or borehole and that the
    supporting or carrying means for the boring means substantially fills said
    hole or cavity will be considered an inaccessible hole.

    MOTIVE FLUID

    Any fluid which is derived from a pressurized stream which operates a drive
    motor for the boring means.  Motive fluid when exhausted into the bore is
    also considered to be drilling fluid.

    RETRACTION

    Motion in a direction away from the bottom of a hole being formed.

    SHAFT

    A part of the boring means which comprises an elongate, relatively slender
    structure (e.g., rod, tube, casing, strand, cable, etc., or any combination
    thereof), which is connected to another part of the boring means for
    manipulating, supporting or driving said other part.

    (1)     Actuating Shaft.  A shaft connected to another part of the boring
    means for modifying or controlling said other part (e.g., cutter expansion
    shaft).

    (2)     Shaft Section.  One of the individual elements of a multipart shaft.

    (3)     Tool Shaft.  A shaft which is connected to the boring tool and
    extends above ground, or to another part of the boring means (e.g., to the
    drive or advance means.

    (4)     Tool Drive Shaft.  A tool shaft connecting the tool to the drive
    means, to transmit mechanical movement from the drive to the tool.

    TOOL

    Comprises the terminal or work applying element of the boring means
    including bits, nozzles, drive points, projectiles, explosives, etc., which
    disintegrates, dislocates, erodes or compresses the earth to form a bore.
    See the appropriate subclasses for the definition of particular tools, and
    particularly subclasses 327+ for the definition of "bit".

    III     RELATIONSHIP TO CLASS 166, WELLS

    Classes 166 and 175 are very closely related since the majority of the
    wells classifiable in Class 166 are made by the processes or apparatus of
    Class 175 and much of the apparatus of Class 166 used in operating wells is
    also useful in operating Class 175 apparatus.  In view of this fact, the
    general lines between these two classes are different with respect to
    processes and apparatus.

    A.      Process

    Processes of making, using or treating a well which as a whole are more
    comprehensive than an earth boring or penetrating process and which include
    a step of earth boring or penetrating, which step alone would be
    classifiable in the processes of Class 175, are classified in the
    appropriate process subclasses of Class 166, except as noted below.

    A well fluid sampling process including a step of earth boring or
    penetrating is classifiable in Class 166, unless a step of sampling the
    earth formation solids is included in such a fluid sampling process, then
    classification is in Class 175, subclass 59.

    Generally, processes of cementing a well are classified in Class 166
    subclasses 285+ while processes of boring the earth with fluid containing a
    plugging or cementing type constituent are classified in Class 175
    subclasses 65+.  The line between these classes, when cementing or boring
    with fluid is concerned, is set forth in section III of the class
    definition of Class 166 and the definition of subclass 285+ of the same
    class.

    Processes for cleaning the wall of a well or earth bore in which the
    material being removed has been deposited in the well are classified in
    Class 166.  Processes in which the well bore is enlarged or acted upon to
    remove the natural solid earth formation (e.g., reaming), are classified in
    Class 175.  In a process of cleaning a well bore which includes a step of
    drilling or boring, the step of the removal of the deposited material from
    the wall of a well or earth bore must be specifically recited in the claim
    to be classifiable in Class 166 since practically all drilling processes
    would inherently result in cleaning of the well bore.

    Processes of casing or lining well bores are generally classifiable in
    Class 166 even though an earth boring step is claimed.  However, drilling a
    well generally involves the use of a tubing, particularly in rotary
    drilling operations, which may in some instances be left in the bore to
    form a casing or lining.  Therefore, a patent which claims in a boring
    process the formation of a cased or lined well by merely leaving the tubing
    or the like used in the boring operation in the well, will be classified in
    Class 175.

    If, however, a drill tubing or shaft and a separate well lining or casing
    are specifically described, and steps are claimed of boring and lining or
    casing, classification will be in the processes of Class 166 even if the
    separate casing or lining is specifically described as including an earth
    cutting shoe and the step of cutting with the casing or lining is claimed.

    B.      Apparatus

    In general, Class 175 is more comprehensive than Class 166 with respect to
    apparatus when an earth boring tool is claimed in combination with a well
    feature except as noted below.

    Cutters specifically described as perforating or cutting well pipe in situ
    as defined in subclass 55 of Class 166 are classified in such subclass even
    though such cutter may be incidentally described as also cutting the earth.
     For such cutters to be classified in Class 175, there must be a cutter
    element which is specifically described as a rock or earth cutting element
    in addition to the pipe cutter and such earth cutting element must be
    claimed.  However, devices for firing a bullet or exploding a shaped charge
    to perforate or cut well pipe in situ are classified in Class 175 even
    though the disclosure is limited to perforating or cutting casing or a wall
    member in a bore if the device inherently functions to form a bore in the
    earth formation.

    A lateral probe extending from a tubular well member to engage and
    penetrate the earth formation to form a fluid passage is classified in
    Class 166, subclass 100.  If the probe removes any of the earth formation,
    for a sample or otherwise, classification will be in Class 175.  See
    subclasses 77, 78 and 79+.

    Class 166 is more comprehensive than Class 175 when an earth boring tool is
    not claimed; Class 166 taking subcombinations of Class 175 subject matter,
    such as a below ground impact connection claimed in combination with a well
    feature.

    IV      RELATIONSHIP TO OTHER CLASSES WHICH INCLUDE SUBJECT MATTER CLOSELY
    RELATED TO CLASS 175.

    A.      Processes

    Class 125, Stone Working, provides for processes for forming a hole in
    stone or a stone like substance which has been previously removed from its
    relative position, and for processes for precious stone working.

    Class 172, Earth Working, provides for processes of forming holes in the
    earth for agricultural purposes such as, for example, aerating the soil.

    Class 299, Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, provides for
    processes for forming openings in the earth while recovering in desirable
    sizes or shapes a valuable material which naturally occurs in the solid
    state.  However, merely forming a hole in valuable material for a purpose
    other than recovery of the material removed, such as to form a hole to
    receive a blasting charge or for ventilation is classified in Class 175.
    Class 299 further provides for disintegrating hard material in situ where
    the area worked is of larger surface extent than the working extent of the
    tool, and forming a large horizontal opening in the earth by following a
    cutting means into an opening with a horizontally operating vehicle support
    therefore.

    Class 405, Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, provides for methods and
    apparatus for installing water or earth control structures or piles or the
    like in the earth which may include a hole forming step or means.  Further,
    Class 405 provides for methods or apparatus for forming an underground
    fluid storage cavity, or a shaft or tunnel, which go beyond merely removing
    the material to form the hole.  However, boring generally involves the use
    of tubing, and such tubing may, in some instances, be left in the bore to
    form a cased hole which may be described as a shaft, tunnel, or conduit for
    fluid, etc.  Therefore, a patent which claims in a boring process, the
    formation of a cased or lined hole by merely leaving the tubing or the like
    used in the boring operation in the hole, will be classified in Class 175.

    Class 588, Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, (subclasses
    249 and 250) for processes where boring or penetrating the earth is
    employed as part of a process within the Class 588 definition.

    B.      Tool driving or impacting;

    Class 173, Tool Driving or Impacting, provides for means to drive or impact
    a tool, when such means includes combined features, such as driving and
    advancing, driving and cleansing or specific impact relationship to a tool,
    but which means is not limited to specific art use.  Class 175 includes
    combinations of such means with means such as the specific structure of the
    work contacting portion of a tool, a fluid head adapted to engage a bore
    entrance, or a bore wall engaging guide or packer on a shaft being used in
    a boring operation.  Class 175 also provides for below ground impacting
    devices comprising lost motion connectings as described in section I, C,
    even when such impacting devices are not combined with any other specific
    feature for Class 175.

    C.      Tools

    Class 175 takes the terminal or work performing element for forming a bore
    in the earth which is generically called a tool, and includes bits,
    nozzles, drive points, heaters, etc., and analogous and similar tools
    elsewhere provided for are noted as follows:

    125,    Stone Working, provides for tools for boring gem stones, and also
    the combination of a tool for boring stone or stone-like material when the
    tool is claimed in combination with a work support or work holder. Class
    125 also provides for sawing or splitting tools for working blocks of stone
    and stone-like materials, and for stone surface working tools and
    miscellaneous stone working tools (e.g., miners picks).

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, provides for
    tools for boring or penetrating into the earth, when the boring is done to
    recover valuable cuttings from a borehole in desirable size or shape, and
    also includes earth boring or penetrating tools which are specifically
    described as being adapted to follow a boring movement with a lateral
    movement relative to the surface of a hard material which is being worked
    to form a channel or kerf.  However, Class 175 takes such channeling
    cutters which are described as functioning completely below the surface of
    the earth in an inaccessible hole, note Class 175, subclass 90, for
    example.  Class 299 also takes apparatus for forming a large horizontal
    passageway into the earth by continuously advancing a cutting device by
    means of a horizontally operating vehicle which forms a passageway as the
    vehicle follows the cutting means into and along the passageway.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, is the generic home
    for rotary boring bits not otherwise classifiable.  See the reference to
    Class 408 in section V.

    Class 37, Excavating, provides for soft earth removing tools such as
    ditchers, dredgers and clam shells, which are adapted to form a hole of
    greater peripheral extent than the tool by lateral movement which may or
    may not follow a boring advance, or by repeated laterally displaced
    excavatory grabs.

    A tool which is provided with a cutting edge adapted for boring or
    penetrating into the earth, but which is solely disclosed as for boring
    into the earth around a living plant for the purpose of removing the plant
    from the earth as the tool is extracted, is classified in the appropriate
    agricultural or material handling class, primarily Class 37, Excavating,
    Class 111, Planting and Class 294, Handling: Hand and Hoist-Line Implements.

    A tool such as a drive point or nozzle which assists in the placement or
    construction of an earth embedded structure and forms part of the completed
    structure is classified in the appropriate building art, primarily Class
    52, Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), and Class 405, Hydraulic and Earth
    Engineering.

    A device which is disclosed as a tool to bore or penetrate the earth by
    directly applying heat to fluidize or comminute, but which is merely a
    heater of general utility (e.g., does not claim bit elements, drilling
    fluid discharge port, etc.), is classified in the appropriate heating class
    and particularly Class 219, Electric Heating and Class 431, Combustion".

    V       MISCELLANEOUS SEARCH NOTES

    Search notes to classes which provide for processes for boring or
    penetrating the earth, or apparatus or processes relating to subject matter
    which is described for use in connection with a process or apparatus for
    boring or penetrating the earth, including a statement of the line with the
    most closely related classes.

    Class 29, Metal Working, appropriate subclasses for metal working apparatus
    and processes of mechanical manufacture, and particularly subclasses 95+
    for cutters for metal working. Class 29 takes a cutter for use in a bore
    hole where the sole disclosed use of the cutter is to mill away metallic
    objects in a bore hole.

    Class 33, Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 302 and 304+ for methods of
    and apparatus for indicating borehole direction by utilizing forces such as
    terrestrial gravitation or magnetism.

    Class 37, Excavating, appropriate subclasses for processes and apparatus
    for making an opening in the earth by the removal or displacement of
    material.  The line between Class 37 and Class 175 being generally related
    to the peripheral extent of the opening at the surface of the earth.  Class
    37 taking subject matter relating to forming an opening wherein the
    periphery of said opening greatly exceeds the cross-sectional area of the
    tool or cutting organization.  See the reference to Class 37 in section IV.

    Class 52, Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 40 for a shaft or
    tower merely holding a named article or support means, subclasses 111+ for
    mechanism operated or relatively movable shaft, e.g., a tower, subclasses
    155+ for land anchors, subclasses 651.01+ for three-dimensional openwork,
    e.g., a mast, subclasses 720.1+ for a residual elongated structural unit.

    Class 60, Power Plants, appropriate subclasses for power plants and motors
    of the type provided for in Class 60 for operating earth boring or
    penetrating means.  The nominal recitation of an earth boring or
    penetrating load (e.g., boring tool) will not preclude classification in
    Class 60.

    Class 73, Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses and particularly
    subclasses 152.01+ for a nominal drilling step or apparatus combined with a
    step or apparatus for measuring or testing.

    Class 74, Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses for
    mechanical movements, gearing, and elements provided for therein which are
    described for use in earth boring or penetrating apparatus.

    Class 76, Metal Tools and Implements, Making, appropriate subclasses, and
    particularly subclasses 102 and 108 for blanks and processes for making
    drilling tools.  Patents including claims to blanks or processes for making
    drills and claims to the drill as an article of manufacture are classified
    with the article in Class 175.

    Class 81, Tools, appropriate subclasses for tools for connecting elements
    of boring means and particularly subclasses 53+ for wrenches.

    Class 89, Ordnance, appropriate subclass for a expelled projectile or
    firing control of general utility.

    Class 91, Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclass for an
    expansible chamber fluid motor, including such a motor for operating an
    earth boring means.

    Class 92, Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclass for an
    expansible chamber device, including such device which may be described as
    used in operating an earth boring means.

    Class 95, Gas Separation:  Processes, for processes of gas separation,
    particularly subclasses 241+ for degasification of liquid.

    Class 96, Gas Separation:  Apparatus, for apparatus for gas separation,
    particularly subclasses 155+ for degasifying means for liquid.

    Class 102, Ammunition and Explosives, appropriate subclass for a process of
    apparatus relating to an explosive charge of general utility and
    particularly subclasses 301+ for blasting and well torpedoes. Class 175
    provides for subject matter for extending or enlarging a bore or
    perforating a formation from an inaccessible hole or penetrating a casing
    or other wall member in an inaccessible hole by means of a gun or shaped
    charge device which would inherently penetrate the formation.  However,
    Class 102 provides for subject matter relating to merely causing an
    explosion in a hole where such explosion is not directed in a particular
    manner relating to a shaped charge or cartridge, per se.  Also, Class 102
    includes blasting of general utility to break up earth formation, even
    though mechanical earth boring steps or means to position the charge are
    included.  However, a mechanical earth boring means or step combined with
    an explosive means or step ancillary to the boring is classifiable in Class
    175, subclasses 2+.

    Class 111, Planting, appropriate subclasses for agricultural type planting
    including a step or means for boring or penetrating the earth combined with
    depositing an object in the bore (usually a seed or living plant).

    Class 123, Internal-Combustion Engines, appropriate subclasses for
    internal-combustion engines and including such engines for operating earth
    boring means.

    Class 125, Stone Working, appropriate subclasses for processes and
    apparatus for working stone and stone-like material, which is not in situ
    in the earth.  Boring or penetrating tools which are described for working
    materials (e.g., glass, ceramics, concrete) which are not normally in situ
    will, nevertheless, be classified in Class 175 if the claims are limited to
    the boring tool.  See the reference to Class 125 in section IV.

    Class 137, Fluid Handling, appropriate subclasses for fluid handling means
    and including such means for use in earth boring apparatus.

    Class 138, Pipes and Tubular Conduits, for pipe structure of general
    utility.

    Class 144, Woodworking, for apparatus for boring wood including wood (e.g.,
    trees) which may be in situ in the earth.

    Class 166, Wells, appropriate subclasses for processes and apparatus
    including steps or means for making or operating wells.  The line between
    Class 166 and Class 175 is set forth in section III.

    Class 171, Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, appropriate subclasses for
    processes or apparatus for unearthing buried objects which may include
    boring steps or means.

    Class 172, Earth Working, for processes or means for working the earth, and
    particularly subclass 21 for earth perforators.  See the reference to Class
    172 in section IV.

    Class 173, Tool Driving or Impacting, appropriate subclass for subject
    matter directed to driving or impacting a tool, when such subject matter
    includes combined features peculiar to tool driving, but which does not
    include features limiting the subject matter to a specific tool art, such
    as specific shape of the work contacting portion of a tool, related tools,
    or an opposed work support.  See the reference to Class 173 in section IV.

    Class 174, Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, appropriate subclasses
    for a combined tool shaft and electrical conductor, and particularly
    subclass 47 for a combined fluid conduit and electrical conductor.

    Class 185, Motors:  Spring, Weight, and Animal Powered, for animal, spring,
    or weight powered devices which may be used for operating boring means.

    Class 188, Brakes, particularly subclass 67 for a brake (e.g., a clasp)
    mechanically connected to a relatively stationary structure and which holds
    a pipe or rod at various locations along the pipe's or rod's length for
    short, quick linear assembly or disassembly during a work or manufacturing
    operation, or preparation to a working operation done by the pipe, rod, or
    a pipe supported tool.

    Class 209, Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses for processes and apparatus for selectively separating solids
    from solids including solids in drilling fluids.

    Class 210, Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses for
    processes or apparatus for separating a material from a fluid including a
    drilling fluid.

    Class 248, Supports, appropriate subclasses, and particularly subclasses
    637+ for machinery supports.  The inclusion of a nominal boring means in a
    claim does not preclude classification in Class 248.

    Class 250, Radiant Energy, subclass 254 for methods and apparatus where a
    nominal drill apparatus or drilling step combined with a geological
    invisible radiation test, or earth formation or well material irradiation
    method or apparatus, and subclasses 256+ for methods and apparatus to
    detect or utilize invisible radiation to test material in or about a well.

    Class 251, Valves and Valve Actuation, appropriate subclasses for valve
    means including valves for use in earth boring.

    Class 254, Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    appropriate subclasses including means to advance or retract a boring means.

    Class 277, Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 322+ for a seal for a well apparatus, subclasses 358+
    for a relatively rotatable radially extending sealing face member (e.g.,
    face, mechanical, etc.) or subclasses 500+ or a dynamic circumferential
    contact seal for other than a piston.

    Class 279, Chucks or Sockets, appropriate subclasses, including chucks and
    sockets for drilling tools, and particularly subclass 20 for a socket type,
    fluid conducting, drill holding chuck.  The inclusion of details of the
    portion of the boring tool that cooperates with the chuck or socket does
    not preclude classification in Class 279.  However, claims reciting plural
    boring tool elements which are simultaneously received in a chuck or socket
    are classified in Class 175.

    Class 285, Pipe Joints or Couplings, appropriate subclasses including pipe
    joints or couplings for earth boring or penetrating means, and particularly
    for joints or couplings for tool shafts. The nominal recitation of one
    joint or coupling member as being a boring tool does not preclude
    classification in Class 285.

    Class 294, Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 49+ for
    hand type, nonrotary tools for boring post holes, and subclasses 86.1+ for
    grapples for removing or placing earth boring tools and other objects from
    or into a borehole and particularly subclass 86.34 for a means for
    retrieving a stuck object from a borehole combined with a means to remove
    material from around the stuck object, which means may include a nominally
    claimed earth boring bit, though if specific structure of a cutting edge
    for earth boring is claimed, classification is in Class 175.  The term
    "stuck object" does not include a core of earth material.  A core removing
    means is classifiable in Class 175 even if an earth boring feature is only
    nominally claimed.  In the absence of an earth boring feature, a grapple
    for retrieving a core is classifiable in Class 294, subclasses 86.1+.  As
    between Class 294 and Class 175, generally any claiming of an earth boring
    feature causes classification in Class 175, except for the subject matter
    of Class 294, subclass 86.34. Hand type, post hole boring tools which are
    described as being rotated in forming a hole are classified in Class 175.

    Class 299, Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, appropriate
    subclass for a process or apparatus for recovering valuable material from
    the earth or breaking up hard material in situ.  See the references to
    Class 299 in section IV.

    Class 310, Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, appropriate subclasses
    including an electric motor for operating an earth boring means, and which
    may be described as entering a bore hole.

    Class 318, Electricity: Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    electric motor power plants, and particularly subclass 39 for plural motors
    which may broadly be combined with feed and drive loads.

    Class 324, Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclasses 323+ for a step
    or means for measuring an electrical property of the formation.  The
    combination of nominal earth boring steps or means and a step or means for
    measuring an electrical property of the formation is classified in Class
    324.

    Class 340, Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 853.1+ for well bore
    electrical communications, including telemetering in a well bore.

    Class 367, Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 14+ for acoustic wave seismic prospecting systems; and
    subclasses 81+ for acoustic wave wellbore telemetering.

    Class 384, Bearings, appropriate subclasses for bearing of general utility.

    Class 403, Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for rod couplings
    or joints for earth boring means.  The nominal inclusion of one joint or
    coupling member as being a boring tool does not preclude classification in
    this class (403).

    Class 404, Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus appropriate subclasses for
    (1) highway, pathway or walkway structure, per se; and (2) process and
    apparatus for making, installing, repairing or maintaining such structure
    where such structure, process or apparatus is not otherwise classifiable as
    either (a) specifically provided for in other loci or (b) of such general
    utility as to be provided for on that basis (See III and IV, under Class
    404, class definition for known collections of such nature and the
    particular lines of demarcation).

    Class 405, Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, appropriate subclasses for the
    combination of an earth boring process or apparatus and a process step or
    apparatus classifiable in Class 405. In the process of installing hydraulic
    and earth engineering structure, Class 405 is clearly superior, a mere
    recitation in a process claim preamble (e.g., in a process of driving a
    pile) being sufficient to control classification.  See the reference to
    Class 405 in section IV.

    Class 408, Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, appropriate
    subclasses for processes and apparatus for boring or reaming bores by a
    rotating tool, not elsewhere provided for.  Class 408, for example, takes
    steps and means for boring or reaming bores solely in metallic objects even
    though the metallic object may be embedded in the earth, and boring bits
    which are described as equally well suited for boring rock, etc., and
    either wood or metal.  See the reference to Class 408 in section IV.

    Class 414, Material or Article Handling, for material handling of general
    utility, and particularly subclasses 22.51+ for a well pipe or rod
    including tool shaft racking mechanism.

    Class 415, Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, subclass 903 for a fluid
    motor disclosed as a well bit drive turbine.

    Class 417, Pumps, appropriate subclasses for pumps for circulating drilling
    mud.

    Class 418, Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices appropriate subclasses for a
    rotary expansible chamber device, per se, or in combination with a
    nominally claimed Class 175 structure.

    Class 464, Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, appropriate subclasses for rotary shafts and flexible shaft
    couplings for transmitting rotary drive to a boring tool; and particularly
    subclasses 18+ for a flexible coupling between fluid conducting rotary
    shaft; subclasses 163+ for a coupling between a rotary drive table and
    axially movable drill string; and subclass 183 for a hollow torque
    transmitting shaft.

    Class 507, Earth Boring, Well Treating, and Oil Field Chemistry, subclasses
    100+ for earth boring (e.g., drilling fluid) compositions. The inclusion of
    an inherent fluid handling step of; e.g., circulating fluid or injecting
    while boring, preparative step, or mixing, of a specific drilling fluid
    composition does not preclude classification in Class 507.

    Class 520, Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Class 523, subclasses 130+ for a composition containing a
    synthetic resin or natural rubber having utility in sealing fissures or
    crevices in stone, rock, or other subterranean formations or in
    consolidating a formation in a well or in cementing a well or to processes
    of preparing said composition.

    VI      INDEX TO CLASSES NOTED IN (1) SECTIONS I-V AND (2) THE SUBCLASSES
    OF THIS CLASS

    After    each   class    listed below,    the  notation   "See ----" refers
    to the sections of the class definition, and the subclasses of Class 175 in
    which there are references to the class involved.

    7,      Compound Tools.  See Class 175, subclasses 135 and 315.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning.  See Class 175,
    subclasses 54, 84, 92, 107, 207, 209, 323, 331, and 378.

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc.  See Class 175, Subclass 255.

    29,     Metal Working, See Class 175,  subclasses 327 and 425.

    30,     Cutlery, appropriate subclasses for cutters of general utility.
    See Class 175, subclasses 18, 327 and 373.

    33,     Geometrical Instruments.  See Class 175, section V and subclass 40.

    37,     Excavating.  See Class 175, sections IV and V and subclasses 5, 57,
    89, 327, 413, and 424.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), see Class 175, sections IV, V
    and subclasses 19, 263, 327, and 394.

    60,     Power Plants.  See Class 175, section V and subclasses 11, 14 and
    189.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, see Class 175, subclass 11.

    72,     Metal Deforming.  See Class 175, subclass 135.

    73,     Measuring and Testing.  See Class 175, section V and subclasses 39,
    40, 48, 50, 232, 308, and 403.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism. See Class 175, sections IV and V and
    subclasses 55, 135, 170, 189, and 195.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures.  See Class 175, subclasses 11 and 13.

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making. See Class 175, section V and
    subclasses 327, 374 and  425.

    81,     Tools.  See Class 175, section V and subclass 135.

    89,     Ordnance.  See Class 175, section V and subclass 2.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type. See Class 175, section V and
    subclasses 107 and 189.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices.  See Class 175, section V.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes.  See Class 175, section V and subclass
    206.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus.  See Class 175, section V and subclass
    206.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives.  See Class 175, section V and subclasses
    1, 2 and 4.

    110,    Furnaces.  See Class 175, subclass 11.

    111,    Planting.  See Class 175, sections IV and V and subclass 327.

    114,    Ships.  See Class 175, subclasses 5 and 6.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines.  See Class 175, section V.

    125,    Stone Working.  See Class 175, sections IV and V and subclasses 11,
    18, 91, 327, 414, 403, and 434.

    128,    Surgery.  See Class 175, subclass 327.

    137,    Fluid Handling.  See Class 175, section V and subclass 207.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits.  See Class 175, section V.

    144,    Woodworking.  See Class 175, sections IV and V and subclasses 27,
    57, 162, 170, and 327.

    148,    Metal Treatment.  See Class 175, subclass 11.

    166,    Wells.  See Class 175, sections III and V and subclasses 1, 2, 4,
    5, 11, 12, 16, 17, 40, 52, 56, 57, 59, 64, 65, 67, 72, 77, 78, 79, 81, 83,
    84, 98, 99, 207, 209, 214, 230, 249, 263, 264, 267, 270, 293, 308, 314,
    317, 324, 325.1+, 402, and 422.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects.  See Class 175, section V.

    172,    Earth Working.  See Class 175, section V and subclasses 89, 313,
    327, 331, 373, 382, 383 and 384.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting.  See Class 175, sections IV, V and
    subclasses 24, 27, 38, 40, 51, 55, 57, 92, 113, 122, 135, 162, 170, 195,
    203, 205, 207, 220, 293, 299, and 422.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators.  See Class 175, section V
    and subclasses 19 and 320.

    181,    Acoustics.  See Class 175, subclasses 1 and 40.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold. See Class 175, subclass 85.

    184,    Lubrication.  See Class 175, subclasses 65, 207 and 227.

    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, or Animal Powered.  See Class 175, section
    V.

    188,    Brakes, in Class 175 subclasses 255 and 422 and the class
    definition, section V.

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways.  See Class 175,
    subclass 88.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven.  See Class 175, subclass 172.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids.  See Class 175,
    section V and subclasses 55 and 206.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation. See Class 175, section V and
    subclass 206.

    211,    Supports:  Racks.  See Class 175, subclass 85.

    219,    Electric Heating.  See Class 175, section IV and subclasses 16 and
    17.

    221,    Article Dispensing.  See Class 175, subclass 52.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, appropriate subclass for a
    hammer for driving a member, e.g., nail, into work.

    235,    Registers.  See Class 175, subclass 40.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing.  See Class 175,
    subclasses 208 and 422.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration.  See Class 175,
    subclasses 11, 327 and 341.

    248,    Supports.  See Class 175, section V.

    250,    Radiant Energy.  See Class 175, section V and subclasses 40 and 41.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation.  See Class 175, section V and subclass
    209.

    252,    Compositions.  See Class 175, section V and subclasses 65 and 206.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force. See
    Class 175, sections IV and V and subclasses 37 and 87.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus. See Class 175, subclass 205.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus.  See Class 175, subclasses 11 and 14.

    277,    Joint Packing. See Class 175, section V and subclasses 209, 214,
    359 and 371.

    279,    Chucks or Sockets.  See Class 175, section V and subclass 146.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings.  See Class 175, section V and subclasses
    74, 207, 256, 293, and 321.  section V and subclass 321.

    294,    Handling: Hand and Hoist-Line Implements.  See Class 175, sections
    IV and V and subclasses 249, 255, 293, 313, 316, and 328.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, sections IV and
    V and subclasses 2, 11, 12, 17, 18, 24, 56, 57, 62, 65, 67, 89, 91, 244,
    327, 331, 393, 394, and 414.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure.  See Class 175, section V
    and subclasses 104, 105 and 189.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems. See Class 175, section V and
    subclasses 33 and 104.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing.  See Class 175, section V and
    subclasses 40 and 50.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical.  See Class 175, section V and
    subclasses 24 and 40.

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation) See Class 175, subclass 40.

    346,    Recorders.  See Class 175, subclass 40.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, see Class 175,
    subclass 40.

    367,    Communications, Electrical: Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices. See
    Class 175, section V and subclasses 1 and 40.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing. See Class 175, subclass 40.

    384,    Bearings, See Class 175, section V and subclasses 220, 227, 337,
    and 371.

    403,    Joints and Connections.  See Class 175, section V and subclass 321.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus.  See Class 175, section V
    and subclass 135.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering. See Class 175, sections IV and V
    and subclasses 5, 9, 11, 17, 19, 62, 67, 171, and 422.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current.  See Class 175, subclass 65.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, sections IV and V,
    and subclasses 27, 51, 113, 162, 170, 220, 327, 382, 385, 394, and 403.

    414,    Material or Article Handling.  See Class 175, section V and
    subclasses 84 and 85.

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps.  See Class 175, section V and
    subclass 107.

    417,    Pumps.  See Class 175, section V and subclasses 212 and 324.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices. See Class 175, section V and
    subclasses 107, 189, 212, and 324.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds.  See Class 175, subclass 11.

    431,    Combustion.  See Class 175, section IV and subclass 14.

    433,    Dentistry.  See Class 175, subclass 327.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing.  See Class 175,
    subclass 40.

    451,    Abrading, see Class 175, subclasses 54, 263, 327, and 425.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts.  See Class 175, section V and subclasses 75, 195, 293, and
    321.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers.  See Class 175, subclass 65.


CLS 175/1
TXT Process or apparatus under the class definition which includes a step or
    means for boring a hole in the earth, combined with a step or means located
    within the hole relating to subjecting the earth to a force to initiate a
    seismic wave in the earth.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this subclass, the process or means
    causing the force must be specifically described as for generating a
    seismic shock and not left to inference.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     and the search there noted for boring by explosion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, appropriate subclasses for processes and apparatus which may
    cause seismic wave generation, and particularly subclasses 177.1+ and 308
    and the search notes there noted for processes and apparatus respectively,
    for fracturing the formation.

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 101+, for geophysical exploration involving
    seismic wave generating or detecting.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 140+ for compressional wave detectors.


CLS 175/2
TXT Process or apparatus under the class definition comprising subject matter
    directed to exploding a charge in an inaccessible hole to directly attack
    the formation or to propel an object such as a bullet into the formation.

    (1)     Note.  Internal combustion motors and similar devices operating
    below the surface of the ground are excluded and found in subclasses 92+.

    (2)     Note.  Subject matter directed to a device described as for causing
    a below ground explosive charge or projectile to extend or enlarge a bore
    or perforate the formation or a wall member in the hole is classified under
    this definition if (1) the sole disclosure is for use in an in-accessible
    hole or (2) there is a specific disclosure for use in an inaccessible hole.
     However, an explosive device which is described as adapted to cause a
    blast of general utility or a gun or general utility even though
    incidentally described as usable to extend, enlarge or perforate the
    formation or a wall member in the hole is classified in the appropriate
    subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  Devices which fire bullets or charges in a manner that would
    inherently penetrate an earth formation in an inaccessible hole are
    included under this definition even though the specific disclosure for use
    in an inaccessible hole is limited to perforating or severing a casing or a
    wall member in the hole.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    89,     Ordnance, appropriate subclasses for means for firing explosive
    projectiles.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, appropriate subclasses and particularly
    subclasses 20+ and 22+ for an explosive charge below ground for fracturing
    or breaking up the formation.

    166,    Wells, subclass 299 for a well process including an explosive step,
    subclasses 55+ for means for perforating or cutting pipe at an unprepared
    point including explosive means which does not inherently cause penetration
    of an earth formation to form a bore, and subclass 63 for a well apparatus
    with explosive means.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclass 13 for
    a process including a blasting step for recovering valuable material from
    the earth or breaking up hard material in situ.


CLS 175/3
TXT Process or apparatus under subclass 2 involving a step or means utilizing
    an explosive charge to separate a previously formed undisturbed core from
    the formation.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this subclass the charge must be set
    off before the core is fully formed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244+    and the search there noted for other type core severing means.


CLS 175/3.5
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2 in which a projectile containing an
    explosive charge is described as forming a bore as it is projected into the
    formation by an explosive charge and the explosive charge carried by the
    projectile is then fired.


CLS 175/4
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2 directed to an explosive apparatus which
    includes or is combined with (1) a core receiving barrel or tube which is
    propelled into the formation by an explosive charge or (2) a receptacle or
    the like which is described as adapted to collect and remove a sample of
    the formation from the hole.

    (1)     Note.  An apparatus having a receptacle or the like described as
    adapted to collect only fluid is included under this definition, as well as
    a receptacle adapted to collect solid formation material or both fluid and
    solid formation material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclass 264 for a process of sampling only fluid from a
    well, and including an explosive boring step.


CLS 175/4.5
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2 directed to plural charges or bullets which
    are fired through the same gun barrel and/or in succession in the same
    direction and along the same line into the formation without removing the
    firing apparatus from the hole.


CLS 175/4.51
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2 directed to (1) means to position or aim an
    explosive charge or projectile relative to a predetermined point or
    direction in the hole, (2) means to enable an operator at the surface to
    determine where something (e.g., the explosive charge or projectile) is
    located in the hole or (3) means to place an indicator (e.g., reference
    bullet) in the formation or hole wall.

    (1)     Note.  A means which merely centralizes the device in the hole or
    holds the device against an undetermined point at the side of the hole, or
    is merely described as engaging the hole bottom is not included as a
    positioning or aiming means under this definition and is classified on
    other features.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.5,    for subject matter directed to orienting means for directing
    successive projectiles or charges along the same path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells subclasses 255.1+ for a well process including a step of
    determining the position of an object in the well.


CLS 175/4.52
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2 directed to means engaging the hole wall or
    a tubular member in the hole to (1) block fluid flow between the explosive
    apparatus and the hole wall or member or (2) attach the explosive apparatus
    to the hole wall or other wall in the hole so as to resist the action of
    gravity or a lifting force.

    (1)     Note.  The means to block fluid flow or attach the explosive
    apparatus must be insertable from above ground to coact with the hole wall
    or a prepositioned tubular member in the hole.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclass 319 for a well torpedo with
    anchoring means or a well wall contacting guide or buffer.


CLS 175/4.53
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2 directed to (1) a chamber for an explosive
    charge which is movable while it is in the hole relative to a body or frame
    which supports the chamber in the hole or (2) plural chambers which are
    connected together so as to permit relative movement between the chambers
    while they are in the hole.


CLS 175/4.54
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2 directed to means provided in the apparatus
    to (1) start, stop or modify operation of an explosive firing means in
    response to a sensed condition within the hole or (2) compensate for change
    in a hole condition due to exploding of a charge.


CLS 175/4.55
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2 directed to means including plural charges
    and a control to separately fire the charges.

    (1)     Note.  Charges which are consecutively or train fired due to the
    single actuation of a control means are not included under this definition
    unless the firing can be interrupted so as to control the firing of one
    charge separately from another, such train firing being classified on other
    features.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.5,    for subject matter directed to separately controlled firing in
    which successive projectiles or charges are directed in the same path.


CLS 175/4.56
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2 directed to a mechanical control means
    which is actuated in the hole to explode the charge.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this definition, mechanical control
    comprises any relative movement of mechanical parts which takes place below
    ground or in an inaccessible hole.  For example, merely an electrical
    switch blade which is moved by some means in the hole relative to a contact
    is considered mechanical control for this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.55,   for subject matter directed to independent firing of plural charges
    or projectiles and which may include a firing control mechanically actuated
    in the hole.


CLS 175/4.57
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2 comprising an apparatus or process for
    firing a missile.

    (1)     Note.  A mere missile or projectile, per se, is not classified
    under this definition.  It is classified in the appropriate ordnance class
    if the disclosure is not limited to earth boring and no specific earth
    boring feature is claimed.  However, if the disclosure is limited to earth
    boring or a specific earth boring feature is claimed, classification is in
    the appropriate subclass herebelow in Class 175.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.5,    for subject matter directed to a projectile which carries an
    explosive charge.


CLS 175/4.58
TXT Subject matter under subclass 4.57 directed to means which are provided to
    temporarily hold back the missile at the time of firing the explosive
    charge so as to build up pressure behind the missile and propel the missile
    with high initial acceleration when the holding means is overcome.


CLS 175/4.59
TXT Subject matter under subclass 4.57 directed to means which are provided to
    prevent ambient fluid in the hole from coming in contact with the missile
    until propulsion of the missile commences.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.58,   for subject matter directed to a device in which a means is adapted
    to initially restrain a projectile for pressure buildup and also prevent
    preliminary bore fluid contact.


CLS 175/4.6
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2 directed to means in which the explosive
    charge is hollowed or dished inwardly toward a central point to give a
    focused pressure to directly attack the formation or a wall member in the
    hole.


CLS 175/5
TXT Process or apparatus under the class definition comprising a step or means
    for sinking a well, shaft or deep boring in the surface of the earth lying
    below a body of water, (e.g., ocean, lake or river).

    (1)     Note.  Included under this definition are patents in which the sole
    specific disclosure or a claim is directed to subject matter for boring in
    strata located below a body of water. Excluded from this subclass are
    subcombinations of a boring apparatus such as a tool, disclosed as being
    part of an underwater drilling apparatus, but which has no structure
    specially adapting the tool to under water boring.  Such structure is
    classified in the appropriate subclasses below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclass 307 for dredges for excavating below a body of
    water.

    114,    Ships, appropriate subclasses for floating supports, per se.  Class
    175 takes patents relating to a floating support for an earth boring
    apparatus where some element of the earth boring apparatus is claimed.
    Nominal recitation of a drill rig, or details of a derrick or draw works
    have not been considered to involve specialized drilling features and are
    classified in Class 114.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 300+ for a process or apparatus relating to
    forming or producing a well which is located in the earth's surface below a
    body of water.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 158+ for a process of
    apparatus for laying a pipe or cable into a submerged location.


CLS 175/6
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5, including a drive means for a boring tool,
    and in which said drive means is located below the surface of the water
    during the boring operation.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of "drive", see the class definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclass 336 for submarines with life saving or salvage
    devices, and which may include means to bore into a sunken vessel.


CLS 175/7
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5, utilizing a base structure positioned on
    the underwater floor and completely covered by water when so positioned and
    a floating structure independent of the base structure, said floating
    structure and base structure cooperating to support and guide the drilling
    apparatus during the drilling operation.

    (1)     Note.  A mere casing extending upwardly from the marine floor is
    not included under this definition.

    (2)     Note.  The base structure may be connected to the floating
    structure by flexible means which will permit the floating structure to
    move relative to the base structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for submersible guide means which may engage the marine floor but
    which guide means is mounted on a guide frame which frame will move with
    movement of the floating structure.

    220,    for above ground guide means for relatively advancing tool.


CLS 175/8
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5, utilizing a normally floating or buoyant
    support for a boring means which is submerged to a position below the
    surface of the water during the boring operation.

    (1)     Note.  Merely sinking anchors which may normally be buoyant is
    excluded.

    (2)     Note.  The boring means or support therefore need not be completely
    submerged to be placed in this subclass.


CLS 175/9
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5, utilizing a boring means mounted on a
    structure at or above the surface of the body of water and which structure
    is so constructed or anchored by means of fixed rigid supports (e.g.,
    piles) as to be nonbuoyant or unaffected by the normal wave or tide action
    of the body of water.

    (1)     Note.  A guide frame or casing for the tool or tool shaft which
    engages the formation is excluded unless the frame or casing prevents
    movement of the supporting structure for the boring means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 195.1+ for marine floor
    supported structures.  Class 175 takes a structure adapted to support an
    earth boring device in a body of water where some details of the boring
    device is claimed.  Nominal recitation of a drilling rig, provision for
    drilling a mere foundation for a support, details of a derrick or draw
    works, or mere access spaces communicating with the surface of the water
    which could be used equally well in a pile driving organization have not
    been considered to involve specialized drilling features and are classified
    in Class 405.


CLS 175/10
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5, utilizing a support for a boring means
    provided with a vertically disposed guide frame, a second guide frame or
    member mounted on said first guide frame, said second guide frame or member
    being movable relative to said first guide frame in a vertical direction to
    a position below the surface of the body of the water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220     and the search there noted for above ground guide means for
    relatively advancing tool.


CLS 175/11
TXT Process or apparatus under the class definition comprising a step or means
    for directing a form of heat energy into a mineral body to (1) alter the
    physical state of the body or (2) separate the mineral body into particles
    (e.g., spalling).

    (1)     Note.  Class 175 is considered generic to heat working of naturally
    occurring mineral bodies in situ, and as such, takes all processes and
    apparatus particularly adapted to heat working of said bodies, not limited
    to (1) surface treatment or channeling of blocks of stone, classified in
    Class 125, Stone Working, or (2) mining or channeling of in situ mineral
    bodies for the recovery of valuable material therefrom, classified in Class
    299, Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material.

    (2)     Note.  Apparatus classifiable herein, must include a structural
    modification peculiar to mineral working. For heating devices of general
    application search the appropriate heating class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for subject matter in which heat energy is generated by an
    explosion which is caused to occur in a borehole.

    17,     for subject matter relating to heating or cooling within the
    borehole or heating or cooling drilling fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 200.1+ for jet reaction motors and
    processes for operating the same and subclasses 39.01+ for mixed fluid
    power plants.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 112+ for glass stock treating
    including severing or perforating, and see the collection of notes
    thereunder.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, appropriate subclasses for smelting of mineral ores.

    110,    Furnaces, appropriate subclasses for furnaces.

    125,    Stone Working, subclass 2 for channeling or working blocks of stone
    by heat.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 194 for processes of chemical-heat
    removing (e.g., flame cutting, etc.) or burning (i.e., oxidizing) of metal.

    166,    Wells, subclass 302 and the subclasses there noted for well
    processes including a heating step, and subclasses 57+ for well heating
    apparatus.

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, subclasses 93+ for apparatus for
    severing by breaking, especially subclass 93.5 for such apparatus utilizing
    thermal shock.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 1 for solid
    material comminution and disintegration by heat.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 48+ for metallurgical blowpipes.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 3+
    for in situ conversion of solid material to fluid by the use the heat, and
    subclass 14 for a process including a step of heating.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 131 for thawing earth.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, for chemically treating mixtures
    to obtain metal containing compounds which processes may include heating.


CLS 175/12
TXT Subject matter under subclass 11 in which material comprising the in situ
    formation is disclosed as entering into an exothermic chemical reaction.

    (1)     Note.  The chemical reaction is generally started or sustained by
    introducing a reactant (e.g., oxygen) from an external source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclasses 251.1 and 256+ for processes of in situ
    combustion for the recovery of fluid from the earth which processes might
    incidentally show boring by in situ combustion.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclass 5 for
    recovering valuable solid material by conversion to the fluid state which
    includes a chemical reaction, such as combustion.


CLS 175/13
TXT Subject matter under subclass 11 in which a chemical compound is directed
    into the heated or molten mass of disintegrated material to bring about the
    formation of a resultant product having a desirable property (e.g., to
    increase fluidity).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 303+ for fluxes for smelting and treating ores.


CLS 175/14
TXT Subject matter under subclass 11 in which an exothermic chemical reaction
    is caused to occur in a confined area, and the products of the reaction are
    discharged through a restriction from said area against the mineral body
    with jet and/or intensely heated characteristics.

    (1)     Note.  The "confined area" consists of an area enclosed by
    structure other than the mere walls of the borehole being formed in the
    mineral body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 200.1+ for jet reaction motors and
    processes for operating the same.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses
    for a jet discharge nozzle, per se, or combined with the system for
    providing fluid to the nozzle.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 48+ for metallurgical blowpipes
    with internal-combustion chambers.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 158 for a combustion chamber not disclosed for
    power purposes, specialized to combustion, and having a jet discharge.


CLS 175/15
TXT Subject matter under subclass 11 in which the heat applying or directing
    device is continuously rotated about an axis.


CLS 175/16
TXT Subject matter under subclass 11 in which the heat is generated by an
    electric current either (1) within, or (2) in close proximity to the
    mineral body being worked.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclasses 60 for electrical well heaters.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 68+ for electrical cutting or
    disintegrating of metal, subclass 221 for tools and instruments, and
    subclasses 277+ for oil well heaters.


CLS 175/17
TXT Process or apparatus under the class definition comprising a step or means
    (1) for changing the temperature of a drilling fluid or (2) positively
    changing the temperature of all or a portion of a bore or boring equipment
    within the bore.

    (1)     Note.  The mere step or means of circulating drilling fluid through
    the bore as a heat absorbing or transmitting medium is excluded even though
    the fluid may be compressed and expanded (e.g., exhaust from a down the
    hole motor).

    (2)     Note.  Heat produced incidental to the normal boring operation of a
    boring means (e.g., bit friction or motor heat) is excluded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for seismic shock generation which may include heating.

    2+,     for boring by below ground explosion.

    11+,    for boring by directly applying heat to fluidize or comminute and
    which may include cooling.

    65+     and the search there noted for processes or apparatus for drilling
    with fluid which may heat or cool a bore. (See (1) Note above).

    92+,    for heating the bore incidental to the operation of a below ground
    drive motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclass 302 and the subclasses there noted for well
    processes including heating and/or cooling, and subclasses 57+ for well
    heating or refrigerating apparatus.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 277+ for electric oil well heaters.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 3+
    for recovering valuable material by converting solid material to fluid in
    situ, and including melting material by heat or heated fluid.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 56 for a method or
    apparatus for heating or cooling the walls of an earthen cavity in which is
    sorted a fluid material; and subclasses 130+ for heating or cooling of an
    earth formation in general.


CLS 175/18
TXT Process or apparatus under the class definition comprising steps or means
    which are peculiar to forming boreholes in naturally situated bodies of
    frozen water.

    (1)     Note.  A specific disclosure of use in boring ice is sufficient to
    cause classification in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The term "naturally situated bodies", is limited to bodies
    of the type which are normally occurring earth structures such as glaciers
    or ponds. If the subject matter is limited by disclosure to bodies which do
    not meet this limitation, or the bodies are portions of naturally situated
    bodies which have been removed, classification will be in another class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, appropriate subclasses, and particularly subclasses 164.5+
    for ice pick or chipper type cutlery.

    125,    Stone Working, appropriate subclasses for subject matter relating
    to working bodies of ice which are not in situ.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 3+
    for melting ice in situ, subclasses 10+ for a process of mining ice, and
    subclasses 24+ for a device for working ice in situ.


CLS 175/19
TXT Process or apparatus under the class definition including a step or means
    peculiar to forming a borehole in the earth without the extraction of
    material from the borehole, and relating primarily to the wedging or
    packing aside of the earth by a driven element (e.g., drive point).

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter going beyond merely forming an opening in the
    earth (e.g., installing piling), is classified in another art on the basis
    of the additional function or structure.  However, apparatus for forming or
    placing a lining or casing in the bore as part of the boring without earth
    removal operation, does not exceed the scope of this class unless
    significant lining or casing structure, which is classifiable elsewhere, is
    claimed.

    (2)     Note.  A disclosure that the principal boring operation is carried
    out without earth removal is necessary to cause classification in this
    subclass.  For example, tools which have a drive point feature (i.e., pilot
    or anchor), but which have additional structure that in normal operation
    causes, or permits material to be removed from the borehole, will not be
    classified herein.

    (3)     Note.  Points that have screw or helical portions thereon which
    portions have a greater diameter than the largest diameter of the point
    will be classified under subclasses 327+ even though by disclosure no
    formation is removed, since any screw or helical portion would tend to
    convey material unless the tool was advanced the proper amount with respect
    to the speed of rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327+,   for earth boring bits and bit elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 155+ for a piercing
    or expanding earth anchor.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 7 for driving
    type earth grounding rods.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 232+ for apparatus and
    methods for driving piles into the ground.


CLS 175/20
TXT Subject matter under subclass 19 including in addition to boring without
    earth removal, the step or means for removing earth, (e.g., boring without
    earth removal followed by taking a sample).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    405,    and search there noted for core receiver driven into formation.


CLS 175/21
TXT Subject matter under subclass 19 relating to conducting fluid through the
    drive point to the exterior thereof, generally to lubricate or treat the
    earth formation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227+,   for lubricant fluid storage means carried by the tool or tool shaft.


CLS 175/22
TXT Subject matter under subclass 19 including a step or means for (1)
    separating a drive point from its shaft to permit the shaft to remain as a
    casing in the bore or (2) installing a separate casing as a part of the
    boring operation.

    (1)     Note.  Processes of installing a casing including forming a well or
    hydraulic or earth engineering structure which include boring are excluded
    and well be found in classes 166 and 405 respectively.

    (2)     Note.  The term "detached" as used in this title includes merely
    removing the drive point from its position adjacent the end of the shaft,
    as well as mechanically disconnecting the shaft and drive point.


CLS 175/23
TXT Subject matter under subclass 22 including a step or means for withdrawing
    a drive point through a hollow shaft or casing.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 257 and search there noted for earth boring
    means removable through a tool shaft.


CLS 175/24
TXT Process or apparatus under the class definition comprising the steps or
    means for (1) sensing a condition of operation which may or may not occur
    and (2) controlling a power operated means in response to said sensed
    condition (without assistance from an intelligent operator) to initiate,
    modify, or terminate the operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 2+ for automatic control of a
    power operated tool driving or impacting means.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 267, 268 and 272+ for a load hauling or hoisting drum with
    control means responsive to a condition.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclass 1 for
    subject matter relating to automatic control involved in recovering
    valuable earth material and disintegrating hard material in situ.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 853.2+ for an electronic
    communication selective control system in a wellbore.


CLS 175/25
TXT Subject matter under subclass 24 in which a sensed condition of operation
    controls a power operated means to adjust or regulate the pressure of fluid
    which is (1) within a borehole or (2) confined in apparatus in which the
    fluid pressure may be automatically adjusted or modified while the
    confining apparatus is within a borehole.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for automatic control in response to drilling fluid circulation.


CLS 175/26
TXT Subject matter under subclass 24 in which a below ground drive prime mover
    comprises part of the boring means.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 92 for the definition of a below
    ground tool drive prime mover.


CLS 175/27
TXT Subject matter under subclass 24 in which a sensed condition of operation
    controls a power operated means to initiate, modify, or terminate the
    advance or axial pressure of a tool upon the formation.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "advance" see the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for self acting cyclic advance and retraction of a tool or tool
    shaft.

    114,    for means to simultaneously feed and rotate a tool from a single
    mechanical movement, including a means to permit a constant rotation rate
    regardless of release of feed force or change in feed rate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 4+ for automatic control of a
    power operated tool advance causing or controlling means.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 8+, for
    control means of that class.


CLS 175/38
TXT Subject matter under subclass 24 in which a sensed characteristic of
    drilling fluid circulation controls a power operated means to modify the
    boring operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for automatic control of fluid pressure below ground.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclass 3 for automatic control of a
    power operated tool driving or impacting means in response to a condition
    of a cleansing means.


CLS 175/39
TXT Process or apparatus under the class definition comprising a step or means
    for initiating a signal when a specified condition relating to wear of the
    bit occurs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 152.44+ for bit wear indicating
    involving drill depth-rate.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+ for electrical
    automatic condition responsive indicating systems.


CLS 175/40
TXT Process or apparatus under the class definition combined with a step or
    means for measuring, testing, signaling, indicating, detecting, registering
    or recording a condition for the benefit of an observer.

    (1)     Note.  A boring process or apparatus which inherently gives a
    signal while performing some boring function is not included unless it
    includes an added step or apparatus for indicating.  For example a mere
    stop means or abutment which is intended to limit the extent to which a
    tool may be fed is excluded. Also, a below ground means which is responsive
    to a condition of the boring means to control the flow of fluid through a
    passage is excluded unless the means to indicate the change in fluid flow
    or pressure, or a step of indicating is claimed.  Such structure is
    classified on other features.

    (2)     Note.  Bore bottom sensing by touching the bottom of the borehole
    with the boring apparatus is excluded.

    (3)     Note.  Patents relating to measuring or indicating a condition in a
    borehole are classified in the appropriate measuring or indicating class.
    Class 175 takes patents relating to process or apparatus for boring into
    the earth combined with a measuring or indicating feature, where more than
    a mere step of boring is claimed or where details of the boring apparatus
    are claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for a bit provided with means to initiate a signal when the bit
    becomes worn.

    232+,   for means movable relative to tool below ground to stop flow toward
    bore bottom.

    317+,   for means movable relative to tool or shaft to control below ground
    passage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 302 and 304+ for methods of and
    apparatus for indicating borehole direction by utilizing forces such as
    terrestrial gravitation or magnetism.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 81+ for means to test the
    hardness of a material, including a penetrator or indenter, subclasses
    152.01+ for measuring a condition of the boring means or earth formation in
    a borehole wherein the test is not purely electrical or purely magnetic and
    wherein the boring process or the boring apparatus is only nominally
    claimed.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 250.01+ for processes involving a well, combined
    with a step of measuring, testing, signaling, indicating, directing,
    registering or recording a condition, subclass 66 for a well device
    combined with electrical indicating means, and subclass 113 for a well
    device combined with nonelectrical measuring, testing or indicating means.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 20+ for a signaling or
    indicating means combined with a tool driving or impacting device.

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 102+ for subject matter relating to a
    mechanical acoustic device in a bore hole.

    235,    Registers, appropriate subclasses for a registering process or
    device, per se.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 254 for methods and apparatus where a
    nominal step of boring or boring apparatus is claimed in combination with a
    geological invisible radiation test, or earth formation or well material
    irradiation method or apparatus, and subclasses 256+ for methods and
    apparatus to detect or utilize invisible radiation to test material in or
    about a well.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 323+ for subject
    matter relating to the determination of an electrical characteristic of the
    subsurface of the earth.  A nominal recitation of an earth boring step or
    means does not preclude classification in Class 324.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 853.1+ for a borehole
    signaling system, and subclasses 500+ for electrical automatic condition
    responsive indicating systems.

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave System and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 5+ for a radar system in a borehole.

    346,    Recorders, appropriate subclasses for a recording process or
    device, per se.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 422
    and 804, respectively, for the mathematical application of well logging and
    the simulation of a fluid well.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 136 for subsurface
    temperature determination other than for strata identification.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 25+
    for testing or measuring methods involving chemical analysis.


CLS 175/41
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 comprising a step or means for detecting
    the presence of, or measuring the quantity or quality of invisible radiant
    energy rays, such as for example radioactive emanations or phosphorescence
    or fluorescence.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 254 for methods and apparatus with a
    nominal drill apparatus or drilling step combined with a geological
    invisible radiation test, or earth formation or well material irradiation
    method or apparatus, and subclasses 256+ for methods and apparatus to
    detect or utilize invisible radiation to test material in or about a well.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 600 for electrical automatic
    radiant energy responsive indicating systems.


CLS 175/42
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 comprising a drilling fluid system and a
    step or means for releasing an identifiable substance into the drilling
    fluid stream which substance when carried above ground by the circulating
    fluid will indicate to an observer the presence of a condition.

    (1)     Note.  The substance is something which is specifically disclosed
    for indicating.


CLS 175/44
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 comprising a step or means to take a core
    sample from the formation and a step or means operative during the
    extraction of the core for indicating the position of the core sample in
    the formation, so that said core sample may be placed in the same position
    which it assumed while in the formation for observation after it is brought
    above ground.


CLS 175/45
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 comprising a step or means for indicating
    the position, direction or inclination of a boring tool in a borehole with
    relation to geographical direction, a characteristic of the borehole or
    some other preselected point of reference.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for the process or apparatus for indicating the position of a core
    sample while in situ for the purpose of orientation.


CLS 175/46
TXT Process or apparatus under subclass 40 comprising a cuttings retainer and a
    step or means for indicating a condition of cuttings within or entering
    said cuttings retainer.


CLS 175/48
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 relating to a drilling fluid system
    forming a part of the boring means and a step or means to (1) measure or
    indicate the pressure of the drilling fluid or (2) measure or indicate the
    rate of flow of said drilling fluid at a specified location in said system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 290+, 700+ and 861+ for volume or
    rate of flow meters, liquid level or depth gauges, and fluid pressure
    gauges, respectively.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 603+ for electrical
    automatic fluent material responsive indicating systems.


CLS 175/49
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 comprising a step or means for encasing a
    part of the boring means or cuttings in a transparent enclosure such that
    said enclosed boring means or cuttings may be visually observed or
    inspected.


CLS 175/50
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 comprising a step or means for determining
    the characteristics of the earth formation traversed by a boring tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for indicating, measuring or testing a condition of the formation
    involving the detection or measuring of ray energy.

    44,     for indicating, measuring or testing a condition of the formation
    involving taking of a core sample.

    48,     for indicating, testing or measuring a condition of the formation
    involving a change in drilling fluid pressure or rate of flow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 81+ for measuring the hardness of
    a material by employing a device which measures the force required to
    penetrate the material, and subclasses 152.01+ for measuring and testing,
    relating to the earth formation in a borehole.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 323+ for a process
    or means for measuring an electrical characteristic of the earth formation
    in or around a borehole.


CLS 175/51
TXT Process or apparatus under the class definition combined with a step or
    means requiring no other control by an operator other than the initial
    starting or presetting of the condition of operation, for the tool or tool
    shaft to follow a complete cycle of operation of advance and retraction or
    retraction and advance returning to its original or starting position and
    then stopping.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for automatic control of tool advance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclass 19 for a tool driving or
    impacting device which is advanced and retracted through a cycle by a
    self-acting means.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 14+ for
    machines of that class type including stopping upon completion of operation.


CLS 175/52
TXT Process or apparatus under the class definition combined with a holding of
    storage means or steps for carrying a plurality of separate disconnected
    tools or tool shaft sections, said holding or storage means or steps
    including separately removing and positioning a tool or a tool shaft
    section from said holding or storage position into a use position with the
    previously removed and positioned tool or tool shaft section.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclasses 378+ for processes of placing removing,
    constructing or assembling well elements.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses and the search there
    noted in sections IV and V for dispensing of articles of general utility.


CLS 175/53
TXT Process or apparatus under the class definition including a step of, or
    apparatus peculiar to increasing the diameter of an existing through
    borehole (spaced entrance and exit points) wherein certain parts of either
    the boring apparatus used must be located outside of end of the existing
    borehole at some time during the boring operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 132+ for tunneling
    machines.


CLS 175/54
TXT Process or apparatus under the class definition comprising a step or means
    for continuously recirculating within the bore a plurality of unsupported
    elements such as shot or pellets to cause such elements to directly impinge
    upon and disintegrate the formation.

    (1)     Note.  The elements must be recirculated entirely within the bore
    for classification in this subclass. Drilling fluid provided with
    unsupported particles which circulate from above ground into the bore is
    excluded.

    (2)     Note.  The elements (e.g., shot or pellets) need not be claimed for
    classification in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    380,    for cutters comprising unsupported abrading particles (e.g., shot)
    where there is no means to recirculate the particles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 95+ for
    cleaning by shotting.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 2+ for a condition responsive control for
    sandblasting and subclasses 75+ for a sandblasting machine.


CLS 175/55
TXT Process or apparatus under the class definition comprising a step or means
    for driving the boring tool which includes a mass or weight mounted to
    travel in an orbital path with the center of gravity of the mass or weight
    being spaced from the center of the path in which it travels, the reaction
    of said mass or weight on its mounting being transmitted to the boring tool
    through the means mounting the mass or weight for rotation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 61 for mechanical movements
    for converting rotary motion to or from reciprocating or oscillating motion
    by means of unbalanced weights.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclass 49 for a tool driving or
    impacting device actuated by a means reacting to the rotation of an
    eccentric mass.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 367 for
    actuating devices for reciprocating sifters having unbalanced weights.


CLS 175/56
TXT Process or apparatus under the class definition comprising a step or means
    relating to an element or part of the boring means which has a property
    affecting its natural period of vibration when it is impacted or
    elastically deformed which bears a relationship to (1) a similar property
    of another element or part of the boring means or (2) the frequency or
    period of vibration of the force causing the impacts or deformations of the
    first element.

    (1)     Note.  The relationship of vibration characteristics must be
    specifically described but the claims need recite only some feature which
    has been described as relating to the vibration characteristics for
    classification in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  A mere shock absorber, such as a spring or rubber element,
    is excluded from this subclass unless it is described as having a
    particular relationship to the vibration characteristics of another part or
    the imposed motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for boring devices combined with means to generate or detect
    seismic shocks.

    55,     for boring tools actuated by the reaction of a rotating eccentric
    mass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclass 249 for processes for vibrating the earth to
    fracture the formation and subclasses 177.1+ for apparatus for causing
    vibrations to fracture the formation.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclass 14 for
    a process of recovering valuable material from the earth or breaking up
    hard material in situ, including a step of disintegrating by directly
    applying vibration.


CLS 175/57
TXT Processes under the class definition.

    (1)     Note.  Processes classified in this subclass comprise, for example,
    processes of manipulating drills, drill rods or expanding reamers to drill
    or ream a borehole or processes of operating various types of drill rig
    power supplies and the like.

    (2)     Note.  Subclasses 1 through 56 includes both processes and
    apparatus, and processes relating to the subject matter provided for in
    those subclasses will be found therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclass 195 excavating processes not otherwise
    classified.

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 365 for a woodworking process of turning,
    boring or drilling.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 244.1+ for well processes which may include a
    step of well boring.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclass 1 for a process limited to the
    operation of a tool driving or impacting device. If steps peculiar to
    performing an earth boring operation are included, classification will be
    in Class 175.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 10+
    for a process of recovering valuable material from the earth or
    disintegrating hard material in situ.


CLS 175/58
TXT Processes under subclass 57 comprising drilling a definite sample of earth
    from the borehole or from the surrounding earth formation for testing or
    measuring purposes.

    (1)     Note.  The manner of taking the sample may be the taking of a core
    during drilling, collecting chips or cuttings dislodged by drilling or
    removing a plug from the sidewall of previously formed borehole, but these
    steps must be set forth as earth sampling steps to be classified in this
    subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Sampling apparatus as such is difficult, in some instances,
    to distinguish from similar nonsampling apparatus and thus apparatus has
    been classified not on the function of sampling but on its drilling or
    boring function in general.  Only in those instances where the sampling
    feature is a distinguishing characteristic have the patents been so
    classified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for processes or devices for severing a core by means of an
    explosive or explosion.

    4,      for processes or devices in which a core receiver is driven into a
    formation by an explosion.

    20,     for a process or apparatus for boring without earth removal,
    combined with a step or means for removing an earth sample.

    44,     for processes or apparatus providing identifiable indication of
    core position in situ for core sample orientation.

    49,     for process or apparatus having means or steps for observing a
    sample.

    77,     for apparatus in which a sample receptacles, generally of the
    side-wall type, is fed laterally without rotation from a carrier.

    78,     for sample taking tools which are motor fed laterally of a carrier,
    generally to take a side-wall sample.

    308,    for below ground receptacles for cuttings.

    403,    and the search there noted for core taking tools.


CLS 175/59
TXT Processes under subclass 58 comprising the step of (1) maintaining the
    natural fluid content of the earth sample or (2) taking a discrete sample
    of the fluid occurring in the borehole or its surrounding earth formations.

    (1)     Note.  Processes including the step of taking a single sample
    comprising a solid and liquid, as for example a sample of drill cuttings
    and drilling fluid, are not included in this subclass unless there is some
    additional step of maintaining the natural fluid content of the solid earth
    portion of the sample.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232+,   for apparatus in which a subsurface sample is delivered to the
    surface at the same pressure existing at the bottom of the borehole.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclass 264 for processes of sampling well fluids, per se.


CLS 175/60
TXT Processes under subclass 58 comprising the step of moving the sample from
    the bottom of the borehole to the surface of the earth by entrainment in a
    fluid.

    (1)     Note.  The mere step of transporting or carrying to the surface of
    cuttings by drilling fluid without a specific sampling step is not
    included.  Such processes are classified in subclasses 65+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66,     for processes of drilling with fluid and treating the used fluid
    above ground to remove drill cuttings from the fluid.


CLS 175/61
TXT Processes under subclass 57 comprising drilling or forming a borehole in
    which the axis of the borehole is (1) curved or arcuate, (2) two straight
    line portions intersecting at an angle or (3) a straight line portion and a
    curved portion.

    (1)     Note.  Processes of reaming or enlarging the diameter of a borehole
    or cutting slots longitudinally of the borehole are not included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for process and devices involving driving a core receiver into the
    earth formation usually in a lateral direction by an explosion.

    73+,    for apparatus having means traveling with a tool to constrain it to
    bore along a curved path.

    77,     for side wall sampling tool fed laterally without rotation from
    inaccessible hole.

    78,     for means carried by housing insertable in inaccessible hole to
    advance side wall tool laterally.

    79+,    for tool shaft advanced relative to guide insertable in
    inaccessible hole to change direction of advance.

    231,    for means movable relative to tool below ground to control
    eccentric fluid emission.


CLS 175/62
TXT Processes under subclass 57 comprising the making of a horizontal bore
    either from the surface or from an accessible hole.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for processes which may direct a bore in a horizontal direction or
    form a horizontal bore from an inaccessible bore or hole.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 10+
    for a process of recovering valuable material from the earth or
    disintegrating hard material in situ and including forming horizontal
    tunnels.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 138+ for a method or
    apparatus for forming a lined tunnel; and subclasses 154+ for a method of
    laying a pipe or cable into a submerged or subterranean location.


CLS 175/64
TXT Processes under subclass 57 comprising (1) introducing a material into a
    borehole to react chemically with the in situ earth formation to form the
    borehole or (2) introducing a material into the borehole during drilling to
    react chemically with a material present in the drilling fluid.

    (1)     Note.  The term "during drilling" is defined as that period in
    which the actual drilling or hole making step is in progress and does not
    include the whole period of time required to form a completed bore in which
    actual hole making operations may have been temporarily stopped numerous
    times.

    (2)     Note.  Drilling fluids generally deposit a cake or mud sheath upon
    the wall of a bore.  Such deposits are not considered cementing, plugging
    or consolidating in the sense used in the definition of Class 166, subclass
    285. However, when one step of a cementing process is done during drilling,
    as by adding one constituent of a resin type cement in the drilling fluid
    while drilling, and another step is performed after drilling has stopped,
    as by adding the remaining constituent of the resin cement, such a process
    is considered to be performed while drilling has been interrupted and is
    classified in Class 166 subclasses 285+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for processes and apparatus for forming earth bores by the
    combustion of the earth formation material.

    13,     for processes and apparatus for forming earth bores by the
    application of heat with the introduction of a slag forming flux to the
    bore.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclass 300 for well processes involving chemical
    inter-reaction of introduced material.


CLS 175/65
TXT Processes under subclass 57 comprising providing a liquid or gaseous
    material in a borehole to facilitate the making of such borehole.

    (1)     Note.  Since the use of some fluid in drilling is almost universal
    in this art, patents to be classified in this subclass must specifically
    describe some step involving more than the conventional use of fluid, for
    example, merely pumping or circulating fluid or screening cuttings from the
    fluid would be excluded but steps involving specifically described
    constituents of the fluid would be included.

    (2)     Note.  The fluid may be for the purpose of lubricating the drill,
    removing the cuttings, preventing collapse of the bore wall, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for processes and apparatus for heating or cooling drilling fluid.

    64,     and the search there noted for processes of causing a chemical
    reaction with the earth formation or drilling fluid constituent.

    92+,    for apparatus in which a below drive prime mover may be operated by
    drilling liquid flow.

    207+,   for above ground apparatus for handling or supplying drilling fluid
    to the borehole.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclasses 285+ for cementing, plugging or consolidating in
    a well and particularly section III of the class definition of Class 166
    for the line with Class 175 concerning drilling with fluid and cementing
    drilling with fluid and cementing and subclass 300 for placing two or more
    materials into a well which chemically react with each other.

    184,    Lubrication, appropriate subclasses for lubrication of general
    utility.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 16+
    for a process of breaking down valuable or hard material by direct contact
    with fluid.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclass 197 for processes of fluid
    current conveying.

    507,    Earth Boring, Well Treating, and Oil Field Chemistry, subclasses
    100+ for well drilling compositions and earth boring processes which
    involve no more than the mere use of such compositions or a compound.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Class 523, subclasses 130+ for a composition containing a
    synthetic resin or natural rubber having utility in sealing fissures or
    crevices in stone, rock or other subterranean formations or in
    consolidating a formation in a well or in cementing a well or to processes
    or preparing said composition.


CLS 175/66
TXT Processes under subclass 65 comprising the step of subjecting drilling
    fluid which has been returned to the surface of the earth from the borehole
    to a physical or chemical treatment at the surface.

    (1)     Note.  The treatment at the surface must include more than the mere
    addition of a material which is to be effective down the borehole, such as
    adding material to a gaseous drilling fluid to prevent wetting of cuttings
    or to a liquid drilling fluid to prevent lost circulation, see subclasses
    68 and 72, respectively.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for vehicle or conveyor for carrying cuttings laterally of bore
    axis.

    206+,   for apparatus for treating drilling fluid.

    207+,   for apparatus for cuttings or flushing fluid handling means at the
    bore entrance including chutes, etc.


CLS 175/67
TXT Processes under subclass 65 comprising the making of a borehole or the
    performance of a reaming operation by the use of a stream of pressurized
    fluid to dislodge the earth formation.

    (1)     Note.  Practically all drilling operations which use a circulating
    drilling fluid have jets in the drill head to wash loose cuttings away from
    the drill during operation and the claiming of such jetting or washing
    steps, even without the claiming of a step of using a drill, are excluded
    from this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11+,    for processes by directly applying heat to fluidize or comminute
    which may include erosion.

    422,    for earth boring nozzles, per se, and the search there noted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclass 312 for well cleaning processes involving the use
    of a liquid introduced from the top of the well.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclass 17 for
    a process of breaking down valuable or hard material in situ by jetting.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 55+ for the formation
    of an underground fluid storage cavity including a step of means for
    delivering a stream of pressurized fluid to form or enlarge the cavity;
    subclass 226 for a method of embedding a marine structure in the bed of a
    body of water using fluid jets; and subclass 248 for a pile with fluid jet
    means to assist in sinking or positioning the pile.


CLS 175/68
TXT Processes under subclass 65 comprising the step of treating a gaseous
    drilling fluid with a material to prevent the agglomerating or wetting by
    liquid occurring naturally in the borehole of the cuttings loosened during
    drilling.


CLS 175/69
TXT Processes under subclass 65 comprising the use of liquid and gaseous
    materials as the fluid circulated in the borehole.

    (1)     Note.  Processes in which a gas under pressure is provided over a
    liquid drilling fluid wherein the gas is not circulated through the drill
    or through fluid in the bottom of the borehole are not included.  See this
    class subclass 71.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205,    for apparatus in which a liquid drilling fluid is in contact with a
    pressurized gas.

    212,    for above ground drill fluid handling or supply means for supplying
    a pressurized gas.


CLS 175/70
TXT Processes under subclass 65 comprising drilling with two or more liquids
    which remain separated in the borehole due to their mutual immiscibility,
    difference in specific gravities, manner of placement in the borehole, or
    other characteristics.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11+,    in which plural liquids such as kerosene and water may be
    introduced in boring by directly applying heat to fluidize or comminute.


CLS 175/71
TXT Processes under subclass 65 comprising (1) drilling with a gaseous fluid as
    the circulating drilling fluid or (2) the placing of a gas under pressure
    in the borehole during drilling either along or over a liquid drilling
    fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     and the search there noted for combined liquid and gaseous supply.


CLS 175/72
TXT Processes under subclass 65 comprising the step of treating a subsurface
    earth formation during drilling (1) to prevent the loss of drilling fluid
    into such formation or (2) to prevent the earth formation of the bore wall
    from collapsing into the earth bore.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for processes including a chemical reaction with the formation or a
    drilling fluid constituent during drilling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclasses 285+ and the search there noted for processes of
    cementing, plugging or consolidating a subsurface earth formation while
    drilling is interrupted.


CLS 175/73
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means carried by or movable
    with a tool while drilling to cause the tool to drill a bore or segment of
    a bore having a nonlinear axis.

    (1)     Note.  Tools which are asymmetrical in shape or which have a means
    biasing them laterally of a bore and which would enlarge the bore in a
    lateral direction if rotated are not included even though they are
    disclosed as bore deflection tools when used as impact devices, see this
    class subclasses 398+ for such devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for processes of drilling curved or redirected bores.

    231,    for means movable relative to tool below ground to control
    eccentric fluid emission.

    325.1+, and the search there noted for bore wall engaging guide means.

    398+,   for nonsymmetrical bits which may be disclosed as bore deflecting
    tools (See (1) Note above).


CLS 175/74
TXT Apparatus under subclass 73 wherein the means for causing the tool to drill
    a curved bore comprises a tool shaft or a means adapted to direct the
    course of the tool which is made up of units or segments, generally
    pivotally connected to one another, movable to be positioned at an angle to
    one another in the direction of the bore axis and means engageable with the
    segments to hold them in their angularly related position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256,    for releasable means normally holding joined shaft sections in
    angular relation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclass 118 for knuckle type pipe joints
    with actuating means.


CLS 175/75
TXT Apparatus under subclass 73 wherein the means to cause the tool to bore a
    curved hole comprises a member to direct the tool or a shaft for driving
    the tool which has or is formed to assume a nonlinear shape in the
    direction of boring.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, appropriate subclasses for flexible rotary shafting and
    shaft housings.


CLS 175/76
TXT Apparatus under subclass 73 wherein the means for causing the tool to drill
    a curved bore comprises means carried by the tool or tool shaft at points
    axially spaced along the bore axis and extending in opposite directions
    laterally from the tool or tool shaft to engage the bore wall.

    (1)     Note.  One of the bore wall engaging means may comprise an annular
    means surrounding the tool or tool shaft.


CLS 175/77
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means for cutting the earth
    which cuts without requiring rotation of the cutting means about an axis
    coincident with its direction of advance, said cutting means being fed from
    an inaccessible hole.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "inaccessible hole", see the class
    definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79      and the search there noted for tool advance guides.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclass 100 for a lateral probe sealed against a well wall
    which has similar structure.


CLS 175/78
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a supporting or carrying
    means insertable in an inaccessible hole, said supporting or carrying means
    providing a housing with an opening for the boring tool, and means is
    provided in the housing to advance the tool from the housing through the
    opening in a direction at an angle to the path of travel of the housing on
    being inserted in the inaccessible hole.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "inaccessible hole", see the class
    definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79      and the search there noted for tool advance guides.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclass 100 for lateral probes sealed against a well wall
    which have similar type structure.


CLS 175/79
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a tool shaft and a means
    engageably by the shaft as the shaft is advanced to change the direction of
    advance of the shaft, said means being insertable in an inaccessible hole.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "inaccessible hole", see the class
    definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for processes and devices involving driving a core receiver into
    the earth formation usually in a lateral direction by a an explosion.

    77,     for a side wall tool fed laterally without rotation from an
    inaccessible hole.

    78,     for means carried by housing insertable in an inaccessible hole to
    advance side wall tool laterally.

    220     and the search there noted for devices with above ground guides for
    a relatively advancing tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclass 55.3 for apparatus for perforating or cutting a
    slot in a well casing having a cam or wedge actuated cutter, subclass 100
    for lateral probes or seals engaging a well wall which have similar
    structure and subclasses 117.5+ for lateral diverting means (e.g.,
    whipstocks) for tools, per se, which are used in wells or boreholes.


CLS 175/80
TXT Apparatus under subclass 79 in which the means changing the direction of
    advance comprises a rod or mandrel having a shaft engaging surface which is
    set in the hole at an angle to the original direction of advance, the shaft
    receiving the rod or mandrel in a telescoping relationship to be guided in
    a different direction thereby.


CLS 175/81
TXT Apparatus under subclass 79 in which the means changing the direction of
    advance has combined therewith means to engage or penetrate a side wall of
    the hole to resist movement of the direction changing means either
    longitudinally or radially of the hole.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230     and the search there noted for bore wall or casing engaging anchor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclass 117.6 for lateral diverting means for cutting tools
    per se which are secured in operative position by well conduit engaging
    means.


CLS 175/82
TXT Apparatus under subclass 79 in which the means changing the direction of
    advance is supported by the tool shaft and moved into an operative position
    in the hole thereby.


CLS 175/83
TXT Apparatus under subclass 82 in which the means changing the direction of
    advance and the tool shaft are provided with means for preventing their
    relative rotation which is manipulable, usually by relative longitudinal
    movement, to permit relative rotation therebetween.

    (1)     Note.  A mere shearable pin or bolt or other frangible connector
    between the redirecting means and the tool is excluded and will be found in
    subclass 82.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclass 237 for detents and clutches particularly adapted
    for use in wells.


CLS 175/84
TXT Apparatus under the class definition wherein the apparatus is provided with
    means normally positioned above the ground (e.g., outside the borehole) to
    clean the apparatus or some portion thereof.  Said cleaning means may
    include wiping, scraping, brushing or flushing with a fluid.

    (1)     Note.  A mere conduit for cleaning or drilling fluid is not
    considered to be a means to clean the tool shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209+,   for a fluid or cuttings directing or receiving means engaging the
    bore entrance, through which extends a tool shaft, and a seal means between
    said means and the tool shaft which allows axial movement of said tool
    shaft relative to said means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclasses 104.03+ for pipe and tube cleansers.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 82.1 and 86.1+ and the search there noted for
    seals or wipers for reciprocating member.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 417 for a pusher plate type
    ejector for emptying a receptacle.


CLS 175/85
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including (1) a means to cause the
    movement of unconnected tools, rods, tubings, or casing in a direction
    lateral to the bore axis and to and/or from a position in vertical
    alignment with the bore axis or (2) a structure particularly adapted to
    store unconnected tools, rods, tubings, or casings and which is laterally
    spaced from vertical alignment with the bore axis, (i.e., fourble board).

    (1)     Note.  The term "unconnected" is defined as meaning that the tool,
    rods, tubing, or casing are not assembled in drilling relationship with the
    drive or advancing means, for example.  However, the tool may be connected
    to a section of rod, or several sections of rod, tubing, or casing may be
    connected together as a unit and considered "unconnected" for
    classification in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     for magazine for successively moving unconnected, oriented tool or
    shaft sections to use position.

    161,    for means to move tool laterally of bore axis to dump.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclass 114 for scaffolds
    combined with a sucker rod support.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, appropriate subclasses for racks, and
    particularly subclasses 70.4 for pipe racks.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 22.51+ for pipe racking
    mechanism.


CLS 175/86
TXT Apparatus under the class definition combined with means positioned within
    a hole being bored for supporting, enclosing, protecting or otherwise
    accommodating a person in the hole while it is being bored.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219     and the search there noted for above ground apparatus in general
    with particular accommodations for personnel.


CLS 175/87
TXT Apparatus under the class definition adapted to perform functions other
    than earth boring or to perform an earth boring function in a different
    manner in response to (1) removal of a significant portion of the apparatus
    and/or (2) installation of additional parts or (3) by substantial
    rearrangement of the existing parts.

    (1)     Note.  Many patents in this art disclose substituting one form of
    tool reciprocating device for another type. Such structure has been
    excluded as not performing an earth boring function in a different manner
    for the purpose of this definition and will be found below.

    (2)     Note.  Merely rendering parts (which are present in the apparatus)
    operative or inoperative by a manual adjustment or by actuation of a
    control mechanism (e.g., clutch) have been excluded as not constituting a
    substantial rearrangement of existing parts for the purpose of this
    subclass.

    (3)     Note.  Merely replacing one type of earth boring tool or cutter
    element with a different type of earth boring tool or cutter element has
    been excluded since it is common in this art to interchange tools depending
    on the type of formation encountered. However, substituting a tool or
    element which has no earth boring function for an earth boring tool has
    been included.

    (4)     Note.  The change in the apparatus must include more than merely
    adjusting or reversing a part which has no material effect on the overall
    functioning of the apparatus.  Such structure is classified below as
    indicated by the search notes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for a device in which a common prime movement feeds and rotates a
    tool, and in which an adjustment, may be effected to provide an independent
    feed or rotation of the tool.

    382+    and the search there noted for a cutter element which is adjustable
    relative to a bit head.

    386,    for a bit having a pilot portion which is used only at the initial
    stages of the boring operation and which is removed after the bore has been
    started.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 29+ for means for pulling stuck pipes or rods otherwise than by
    impact.


CLS 175/88
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which an above ground means is
    provided to transport cuttings in a direction perpendicular to the borehole
    axis which does not require conveying by a fluid current, such means
    comprising an endless or screw conveyor, open chute or vehicle, but not
    including a tubular conduit which is utilized in a fluid system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207+,   for other above ground means including tubular conduits for
    handling cuttings or flushing fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, and the search there
    noted for conveyors of general utility.


CLS 175/89
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which a cutting means is carried
    through recurring cycles on a driven member forming a closed circuit, said
    member composed of a rope, cable, chain, hinged elements, or like structure.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include apparatus in which the
    support for the flexible or articulated endless member is adapted to be
    moved laterally relative to the bore axis as the cutter cuts unless the
    lateral movement of said support takes place entirely below ground.
    Compare Classes 37, 172 and 299 for apparatus for forming a ditch, furrow
    or kerf.

    (2)     Note.  The cutting means may consist of teeth or digging buckets.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for conveyor means to move cuttings transversely of bore axis.

    172,    for a tool drive means combined with an endless flexible conveyor
    for transporting cuttings.

    338,    for rolling cutter bit or element with endless carrier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 353+ and 462+ for ditchers or excavators.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 95+, 100 and 542 for a rotary separating
    digger and a tooth or blade on an endless carrier.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 29+
    for a mining machine having a chain type cutter head, and subclasses 82.1+
    for a chain type cutter head.


CLS 175/90
TXT Apparatus under subclass 89 in which a flexible or articulated member is
    carried on a support which is adapted to move all or a portion of said
    member radially relative to the axis of the bore to undercut or slot the
    wall of the borehole.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263+,   for cutter elements laterally shiftable below ground.


CLS 175/91
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which (1) a single cutting means
    rotating through recurring cycles, or (2) a combination of cutting means
    carried on a common support and including at least one cutting means
    rotating through recurring cycles, is particularly adapted to form in a
    single advance a bore which is noncircular in a plane perpendicular to the
    bore axis.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass, for example, are a pair of
    rotating cutters forming a pair of overlapping, circular bores.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89+,    for cutters carried on a flexible or articulated member and adapted
    to form a noncircular bore.

    108,    for common drive or advancing means for concurrently boring along
    laterally spaced axes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    125,    Stone Working, subclasses 12+, for stone saws.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 29+
    for a mining machine which may include a rotary cutter and form a
    noncircular opening and subclasses 79.1+ for a cutter which may be rotary
    and adapted to form a noncircular opening.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclass 30 for
    woodworking augers or cutting square holes.


CLS 175/92
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a means adapted to drive a
    boring tool through recurring cycles comprising a means commonly called a
    motor which is adapted to convert a source of energy into simple mechanical
    motion, said motor being so related to the boring tool that it enters the
    borehole and advances with the boring tool as the boring tool performs its
    earth boring function.

    (1)     Note.  The boring means including the motor need not be claimed as
    being located in the borehole.  The mere disclosure that the boring means
    is of the type in which the drive motor for the tool advances into the bore
    with the tool is sufficient for classification in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Mere subsurface mechanical motion converting boring tool
    drive means, such as for example, vanes on a tool shaft which contact the
    fluid in the borehole and causes the tool to rotate as the shaft is
    reciprocated are not considered motors for this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  A compilation of all types of motors will be found in the
    notes to the class definition of Class 60.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for underwater tool drive means.

    26,     for automatic control of boring means including a below ground
    prime mover

    323     and search there noted for a tool shaft provided with an exteriorly
    disposed helical structure for imparting rotary motion to the shaft in
    response to a reciprocation of said shaft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 104.05+ for
    inside pipe and tube cleaners which may be motor driven.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, appropriate subclass for a means for
    driving or impacting a tool, not limited to a specific art.  If means, such
    as specific shape of the work contacting portion of an earth boring tool,
    bore engaging guide or anchor, etc., are included, classification will be
    in Class 175.


CLS 175/93
TXT Apparatus under subclass 92 in which (1) the motor is fluid operated, and
    means are provided within the borehole for generating or imparting energy
    to the motive fluid, (2) means are provided within the borehole for storing
    a source of motivating energy for operating the motor.


CLS 175/94
TXT Apparatus under subclass 92 including means positioned within the borehole
    which functions to feed the tool in the boring operation with, or relative
    to, the tool drive means.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "feed", see the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162     and the search there noted for an above ground means to feed to
    tool.


CLS 175/95
TXT Apparatus under subclass 92 comprising a plurality of drive motors
    positioned within the borehole.


CLS 175/96
TXT Apparatus under subclass 95 wherein the tool is composed of a plurality of
    relatively movable cutting elements, each of said cutting elements being
    driven by a separate motor.


CLS 175/97
TXT Apparatus under subclass 92 including means to secure the motor support to
    the bore wall against either axial or rotary movement or both.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "bore wall", see the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230     and search there noted for means to anchor a boring means to the
    bore wall.


CLS 175/98
TXT Apparatus under subclass 97 in which said means may be selectively expanded
    or retracted to or from engagement with the bore wall.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclasses 206+ for an expansible anchor or casing for wells.


CLS 175/99
TXT Apparatus under subclass 98 in which said means is operated by pressure
    fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228,    for fluid pressure operated lubricant feed for bit.

    247+,   for a core receiver removable through a below ground tool shaft by
    fluid pressure or provided with a pressure fluid operated latch.

    250,    for a fluid actuated core retaining or severing means.

    267+,   for a cutter element shifted laterally relative to a bit head below
    ground by fluid pressure.

    271+,   for a cutter element shifted relative to a bit head below ground
    with a latch operated by a fluid pressure.

    296+,   for fluid operated below ground hammer or impact device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclasses 120+ and 212 for fluid pressure expansible
    anchors.


CLS 175/100
TXT Apparatus under subclass 92 in which the motor is fluid operated and means
    are provided for exhausting a portion of the fluid which operates the motor
    from the motor or motor housing into the bore in a direction extending
    toward the bore entrance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324,    for a tool shaft which may be provided with means to induce fluent
    flow comprising fluid outlet ports in said shaft extending in a direction
    toward the bore entrance.


CLS 175/101
TXT Apparatus under subclass 92 in which the motor is a rotary type motor
    supported by a rotatable shaft extending into the bore, and in addition to
    the motor is a means provided for connecting said rotatable support shaft
    to the tool in a driving relationship.


CLS 175/102
TXT Apparatus under subclass 92 including means located within the bore for
    removing cuttings from the bore comprising either (1) an endless flexible
    carrier or (2) a means to induce fluent flow (e.g., pump or helical screw).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324,    and the search there noted, for other means to induce fluent flow
    including a pump.


CLS 175/103
TXT Apparatus under subclass 92 including means intended to function and remain
    above ground.


CLS 175/104
TXT Apparatus under subclass 92 in which the motor is of the type which
    converts electrical energy into mechanical motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, and the search there noted for
    electric motor.


CLS 175/105
TXT Apparatus under subclass 104 wherein the electric motor is of the type
    having a rectilinearly reciprocating part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 15+ for a
    reciprocating electric motor, per se.


CLS 175/106
TXT Apparatus under subclass 92 including means (e.g., gearing, linkage or cam)
    for modifying the direction, location or advantage relationship of simple
    mechanical motion, said means being drivingly interposed between the motor
    and the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170+,   and the search there noted for other mechanical motion converting
    means.

    319,    for below ground mechanical motion converting means relatively
    moving plural cutting edges.


CLS 175/107
TXT Apparatus under subclass 92 in which said motor includes an element
    provided with means upon which a fluid may act to cause a nonreversing
    motion of said element about an axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 104.061+ and
    104.12 for fluid current operated pipe and tube cleaners.

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, subclass 903 for a fluid
    motor disclosed as a well bit drive turbine.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, for rotary expansible chamber
    pumps or motors.


CLS 175/108
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a single means which
    directly contacts, or is connected through a gearing or otherwise, to at
    least two boring tools, and the means functions to drive or advance the
    boring tools along different axes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     for boring means including at least one rotating cutter which may
    overlap in boring operation with another cutter to form a bore, which is
    noncircular in cross-sectional area.


CLS 175/113
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means by which a boring tool
    is simultaneously rotated and fed along the boring axis by a drive
    originating from one mechanical movement.

    (1)     Note.  Separate drive and feed motors which are actuated by a
    common source (e.g., fluid pressure motors having common supply pump) are
    excluded from this subclass, and are classified in the appropriate feed or
    drive subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 145+ for a tool advance
    causing or controlling means in which drive and advance originate from the
    same mechanical element.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 129+,
    for a feed means for a boring, drilling or tapping apparatus.


CLS 175/114
TXT Apparatus under subclass 113 in which the mechanical movement, or means
    coupling the mechanical movement to the rotary drive and/or feed is adapted
    to rotate the tool at a uniform speed while permitting (1) complete
    disconnection of the feed drive or (2) a change in the speed at which the
    tool is being fed into the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for automatic control of tool advance.


CLS 175/118
TXT Apparatus under subclass 113 in which a means is provided to anchor some
    part of the feed means into the wall which is being bored, whereby the
    anchor is adapted to directly resist the reactionary pull of the feeding
    force.

    (1)     Note.  The "earth wall being bored", is defined as a generally flat
    surface, (i.e., the face of the earth or a substantially planar or curved
    section not exceeding 90o of the side or bottom of a crevice or shaft) into
    which the bore is being formed, the anchor being usually located in the
    bore, or at some point closely adjacent the mouth of the bore.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210,    for cuttings directing or receiving means engaging bore entrance,
    anchored to bore wall.

    230,    for borewall engaging anchor.


CLS 175/121
TXT Apparatus under subclass 113 in which a feed screw moves axially relative
    to a means which is causing it to rotate.


CLS 175/122
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a means to feed the tool
    drive means.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "feed" and "drive" see the class
    definition.

    (2)     Note.  If the means is disclosed as performing the function of
    feeding the tool drive, the means is classified herein whether or not the
    tool drive is claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162     and search there noted for above ground means to feed a tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclass 141 and see the search notes
    therein for a tool advance causing or controlling means.


CLS 175/135
TXT Apparatus under the class definition combined with an above ground hammer
    to deliver, or cause to be delivered an impact or blow to an earth boring
    means.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this subclass the impact or blow must
    be delivered to a portion of the earth penetrating means and not directly
    to the earth formation.  For example, an above ground hammer for delivering
    an impact or blow to an earth penetrating means is classified herein, but
    an earth penetrating means which is reciprocated to deliver a blow to the
    formation is excluded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189,    and the search there noted for means to reciprocate an earth
    penetrating means.

    293+,   for a below ground hammer or impact device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, subclasses 143+ for hammers combined with other
    tools.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 429+ for a power hammer of the metal
    working type.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses for mechanical
    motion converting means for operating a hammer.

    81,     Tools, subclasses 463+ for tools combined with impact delivering
    means and subclasses 20+, for hand operated hammers.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 90+ and see the search notes
    therein for an impacting device.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus. See Class 175, subclass 135.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclass 137 for a spring device for dampening the
    movement of an earth-boring impacting tool.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclass 133 for a tamping
    device.


CLS 175/161
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a means located above ground
    which is adapted to shift a means lifting earth material from a borehole to
    a position remote from the bore axis for the purpose of discharging said
    material at said remote location.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85,     for orienting means for moving unconnected boring means laterally
    of the bore axis.


CLS 175/162
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a means necessarily located
    above ground which functions to feed the tool in the boring operation.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "feed" see the class definition.

    (2)     Note.  A handle for directly applying force to a tool shaft without
    a mechanical motion conversion is excluded.  However, a simple relatively
    movable lever or gear for example would be included even though operated by
    hand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for automatic control of advance or applied tool weight.

    51,     for preset control of advance or retraction for tool drive or
    rotary tool.

    94,     for below ground tool feed means in combination with a below ground
    tool drive motor.

    108,    for common drive or advancing means for concurrently boring along
    laterally spaced axes.

    113,    for a single mechanical movement which feeds and rotates a tool.

    122,    for means to feed a tool drive means.

    203,    for above ground means to advance or retract a boring means.

    321,    for below ground feed means incorporated in an axially telescopic
    tool drive shaft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 92+ for a boring feed.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 141+ for a tool advance
    causing or controlling means.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, appropriate
    subclasses, particularly subclasses 129+ for means for feeding a boring or
    drilling tool, not peculiar to earth boring usage.


CLS 175/170
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a means adapted to drive a
    boring tool through recurring cycles comprising (1) a means commonly called
    a motor which is adapted to convert a source of energy into simple
    mechanical motion or (2) a means adapted to modify the direction, location,
    or advantage relationship of simple mechanical motion (e.g., gear or lever).

    (1)     Note.  A compilation of all types of motors will be found in the
    notes to the class definition of Class 60.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for underwater tool drive means.

    24+,    for tool drive means with automatic control.

    54,     for boring by below ground recirculating of unsupported elements.

    55,     for tool actuation by reaction of a rotating eccentric mass.

    92+,    for below ground drive motors.

    106,    for below ground mechanical motion converting means drivingly
    interposed between a below ground drive motor and a tool.

    108,    for common drive or advancing means for concurrently boring along
    laterally spaced axes.

    113+,   for single prime movement feeding and rotating a tool.

    135,    for above ground means to impact earth penetrating means.

    319,    for below ground mechanical motion converting means relatively
    moving plural cutting edge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses for gearing
    and mechanical movements of general utility.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 92+ for wood boring machines.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, appropriate subclass for a device to
    drive a tool, where no feature is included to make the device peculiar to a
    specific art, such as specific shape of the work contacting portion of the
    tool, etc.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, appropriate
    subclasses for machines for cutting in the manner of that class.


CLS 175/171
TXT Apparatus under subclass 170 including a drive means for a tool which is
    particularly adapted to installing a separate casing, or a means is
    specified in addition to the tool drive means for the purpose of installing
    a casing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 133 for a method or
    apparatus for forming a shaft with a lining; subclasses 138+ for a means or
    method of forming a lined tunnel; subclasses 154+ for a method or apparatus
    for laying pipe or cable into a submerged or subterranean location; and
    subclasses 232+ for a method or apparatus for installing a hollow pile
    shell in the earth.


CLS 175/172
TXT Apparatus under subclass 170 including material transport elements mounted
    to travel in a circuitous path on a flexible or articulated endless means,
    and generally for the purpose of conveying cuttings above ground.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89,     for tool element on continuously driven flexible or articulated
    endless member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses for power-driven
    endless conveyors.


CLS 175/173
TXT Apparatus under subclass 170 in which means are provided to simultaneously
    or consecutively move in a different manner, plural shafts which extend
    into a bore; the shafts generally consist of two tool drive shafts, or a
    tool drive shaft and a tool actuating shaft.


CLS 175/189
TXT Apparatus under subclass 170 in which the tool drive comprises a means to
    cause substantially rectilinear to and from movement of the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135,    for means to reciprocate a means to impact an earth penetrating
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 369+ and 537+ for pulsators adapted to
    reciprocate a tool.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses, and
    particularly subclasses 20 through 62 for reciprocation type mechanical
    movements.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclass for an
    expansible chamber type motor adapted to reciprocate a tool.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 15+ for
    reciprocating electric motors.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclasses for a
    rotary expansible chamber motor adapted to reciprocate a tool.


CLS 175/195
TXT Apparatus under subclass 170 in which the drive is of the type commonly
    called a rotary table, such drive being adapted to remain relatively
    axially fixed while the tool shaft being rotated thereby advances relative
    to the rotary table.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121,    for a rotary drive for a relatively advancing feed screw in a
    single mechanical movement feeding and rotating a tool, said feed screw
    generally also comprising the tool drive shaft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses, and
    particularly subclasses 434+ for a gear element, per se.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 165+ for a relatively fixed
    drive of an advancing tool.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, subclasses 163+ for a coupling between a rotary drive table
    and an axially movable drill string.


CLS 175/202
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising the combination of a tool
    having relatively movable tool elements and a means necessarily remaining
    outside the mouth of the bore, which is adapted to be actuated to cause
    relative movement between the tool elements, while the tool is located
    within the bore.

    (1)     Note.  The tool elements must be positively relatively moved by the
    moving means to be classified herein. Those tool elements which are
    relatively moved by the manipulation of a tool drive shaft only, relative
    to which they are movably attached (e.g., centrifugal, or bottom engagement
    expansion), are excluded from this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Structure in addition to a mere connecting rod or cable must
    be claimed as the above ground means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173,    for drive means including diversely actuated shafts extending into
    a bore.


CLS 175/203
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means located above ground
    to move a tool, shaft, or any other portion of the boring means in one
    direction along the axis of the bore or (2) to counterbalance or offset a
    portion of the weight resting on the tool.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this subclass the above ground means
    to advance or retract the boring means must include more than a mere handle
    which is held by an operator to support or move the tool toward or away
    from the bore.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for automatic control of advance means for a boring means.

    162     and the search there noted for above ground means to feed a tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 141+ and see the search notes
    therein for a tool advance causing or controlling means.


CLS 175/205
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means which are provided for
    bringing a stream of gaseous fluid above atmospheric pressure into intimate
    contact with a body of drilling liquid which liquid is intended to be
    introduced or directed into a borehole.

    (1)     Note.  Gaseous fluid at normal atmospheric pressure is not
    considered as "pressurized", for the purposes of this subclass.  However, a
    statement that a stream consists of compresses gas is sufficient to cause
    classification herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69      and 71, for drilling processes including the use of pressurized gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclass 74 and see the search noted
    therein for plural cleansing fluid sources utilized with a tool driving or
    impacting means.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for gas
    and liquid contact apparatus of general utility.


CLS 175/206
TXT Apparatus under this class definition including above ground means by which
    the drilling fluid is (1) formed or acted upon prior to or during insertion
    into the borehole to bring about a change in a physical or chemical
    property or (2) acted upon after the fluid leaves the borehole to remove,
    separate or subtract substances, including cuttings, from said fluid.

    (1)     Note.  Means for causing entrainment of cuttings in the drilling
    fluid are not considered to be drilling fluid treating for the purpose of
    this subclass.  However, separating the cuttings from said fluid is
    classifiable herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for heating or cooling the drilling fluid.

    65+,    for processes of drilling with fluid, particularly subclass 66 for
    treating used or spent fluid.

    205,    for pressurized gas contact with drilling fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, for processes of gas separation,
    particularly subclasses 241+ for degasification of liquid.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, for apparatus for gas separation,
    particularly subclasses 155+ for degasifying means for liquid.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses.

    507,    Earth Boring, Well Treating, and Oil Field Chemistry, subclasses
    100+ for earth boring compositions.


CLS 175/207
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means located outside the
    mouth of the borehole to conduct or circulate drilling fluid or cuttings to
    or from the borehole.

    (1)     Note.  A tool shaft is not considered to be above ground apparatus
    for the purposes of this subclass even though a section of the shaft may be
    recited as above ground in a claim.  However, if structure is claimed which
    is disclosed as always functioning above ground (e.g., supporting swivel,
    or pipe section larger than the completed bore), the patent will be
    classified herein even though the structural element is nominally claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65+,    for processes of drilling with fluid.

    88,     for above ground vehicle or conveyor for carrying cuttings
    laterally of bore axis.

    161,    for above ground means to shift tool laterally of bore axis to dump
    cuttings.

    172,    for an endless flexible conveyor for removing the cuttings from the
    bore.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 300.1+ for
    air blast and/or suction cleaners.

    137,    Fluid Handling, for fluid handling means of general utility.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 75.11+ for well heads.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 197+ and see the search notes
    therein for a tool driving or impacting means provided with work cleansing
    means.

    184,    Lubrication, for lubricating apparatus of general utility.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, for fluid pipe couplings of general
    utility and particularly subclasses 272+ for fluid conducting swivels.


CLS 175/208
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 in which the means consists of a fluid
    spraying means (e.g., nozzle) which emits fluid adjacent the mouth of the
    borehole.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, for a fluid spraying
    device, per se.


CLS 175/209
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 provided with means sealingly engageable with
    the mouth of the bore and having means to receive a tool shaft therethrough
    and adapted to (1) catch or contain material which is emerging from the
    bore or (2) change the direction of movement or flow of material which is
    emerging from the bore.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for an above ground vehicle or conveyor for carrying cuttings
    laterally of the bore axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 300.1+ for
    air blast and/or suction cleaners combined with a fluid cuttings directing
    or receiving means adapted to engage a bore entrance. Class 175 takes the
    combination of such means with earth boring means.  The inclusion in a
    claim of structure adapted to support or receive a tool shaft is sufficient
    for classification in Class 175.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 75.11+ for a well head.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 1.1 for valve type blowout
    preventers, per se.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 322+ for a seal for a well apparatus.


CLS 175/210
TXT Apparatus under subclass 209 in which said means extends into the bore and
    is held in sealed engagement with the bore wall.


CLS 175/211
TXT Apparatus under subclass 209 in which the collecting or diverting means is
    mounted on a tool shaft and means are provided to restrain the same against
    axial movement in one direction along said tool shaft.


CLS 175/212
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 including a means to provide a gas at above
    atmospheric pressure for use in the borehole.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69      and 71, for processes of drilling with gas under pressure.

    134,    for means to flush the bore with motive fluid which may be
    pressurized gas.

    205,    for pressurized gas contact with flushing liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, for gas pumps of general utility.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, for rotary expansible chamber
    pumps, per se.


CLS 175/213
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 including a pumping means, the low pressure
    side or intake of which is in direct communication with the bottom of the
    borehole.

    (1)     Note.  This material generally relates to which is commonly called
    "reverse circulation", that is, the direction of flow is opposite to normal
    drilling circulation in which the pressure side of a pump forces fluid from
    the bottom of a borehole.

    (2)     Note.  The pumping means may be located below ground.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324,    and the search there noted for other means to induce fluent flow
    including a pump.


CLS 175/214
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 comprising a tool shaft having a fluid head
    secured to the end thereof located above ground said head being provided
    with an axially extending passage which is intersected by a generally
    perpendicular passage extending from the axially extending passage to the
    exterior of the head, and having a seal located in the head which is
    adapted to cooperate with a means movable through the axial passage, or the
    perpendicular passage and one end of the axial passage.

    (1)     Note.  Generally the means reciprocable in the head may consist of
    a core barrel, or a wire line for retrieving a core barrel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclasses 84.1+ for a fluid head of the type classified in
    Class 166 having a seal for reciprocating member.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 322+ for a seal for a well apparatus.


CLS 175/215
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 including a tool shaft which is provided with
    more than one fluid conduit through a substantial portion of its length.


CLS 175/216
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 including a substantially vertical conduit
    means which is usually either part of, attached to, or adjacent a derrick,
    and which is used to conduit fluid from a point located near ground level
    to a fluid handling element fixed at one end of an axially movable tool
    shaft.


CLS 175/217
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 including pump means adapted to cause the
    drilling fluid to circulate.

    (1)     Note.  The pump may be located below ground.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212,    for pressurized gas supplying means.

    213,    for drilling fluid handling systems in which a pump inlet
    communicates with the borehole bottom.

    324 ,   and the search there noted, for other means to induce fluent flow
    including a pump.


CLS 175/218
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 including valve means to stop or regulate the
    flow of drilling fluid.

    (1)     Note.  The valve may be located below ground.


CLS 175/219
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the device is provided with a
    means to support or shelter an attendant (e.g., a seat, platform or cover
    means) or the device is provided with a safety means to protect the
    attendant from injury (e.g., a hand guard).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86,     for below ground means for personnel accommodation.

    209+,   for means positioned adjacent the bore entrance to direct cuttings
    away from the operator.


CLS 175/220
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a means located outside the
    bore entrance which is adapted to remain relatively axially stationary and
    pilot or direct a tool or means actuating or supporting a tool, as the tool
    advances during the boring operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for a guide base on a marine flow spaced from a buoyant support for
    the boring apparatus.

    10,     for a submersible vertically movable guide for boring means mounted
    on a buoyant support.

    79+     and the search there noted for tool guides insertable in an
    inaccessible hole.

    122     and the search there noted for means to feed a drive, said means
    generally combined with a guide means, or performing a guiding function.

    135,    for above ground means to impact an earth penetrating means which
    generally includes guide means for a hammer, and particularly subclasses
    151+ for drop hammer guide means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, appropriate subclass for a means to
    drive or impact a tool which may include a means to guide the tool or
    drive, and particularly subclasses 39+ for such means combined with means
    to adjust the position of the axis of tool advance.

    384,    Bearings, appropriate subclasses, and subclasses 7+ for linear
    bearings.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 72+ for
    a gauge block of guiding a drill of general utility into a workpiece.


CLS 175/226
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which a substantially undisturbed
    sample of the formation is covered or coated with (1) a material which is
    fed into the sample receiver and applied to the sample as the sample is
    being taken to enclose or form a cover therefor or (2) a fluent material
    which is applied to the sample to enclose or coat a portion thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The fluent material under part (2) must be some fluent
    material other than the drilling fluid.


CLS 175/227
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the tool, tool shaft or tool
    housing is provided with a means to retain and/or supply a friction
    reducing fluid or grease to the cutter or formation disintegrating member
    or a portion thereof (e.g., the bearings of a rolling cutter).

    (1)     Note.  Drilling fluid is not considered to be a friction reducing
    fluid or grease under this definition.  Patents in which the drilling fluid
    is used to lubricate the tool will be found below.

    (2)     Note.  Structure including specific ducts, passages or a means
    separate from the drilling fluid passages, if disclosed for the purpose of
    supplying a friction reducing fluid which is distinct from the drilling
    fluid is included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    337,    for means to supply drilling fluid to the bearing of a rolling
    cutter bit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    184,    Lubrication, appropriate subclasses, for lubricating devices and
    systems.

    384,    Bearings, subclass 93 for bearing structure with lubrication means
    which are adapted for use in roller type rock drill bits and only enough
    support structure for the bearing and lubrications means.  A broadly
    recited roller cutter bit which may be part of the bearing support, but if
    the cutting means has any details of how it cutters shape of cutting teeth,
    etc.  Class 175 is the proper place.


CLS 175/228
TXT Apparatus under subclass 227 in which the friction reducing fluid is
    supplied or fed to the cutter or a portion thereof by a fluid pressure or
    fluid flow operated means usually the fluid pressure or flow of the
    drilling fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99      and the search there noted for other pressure fluid operated
    devices.


CLS 175/229
TXT Apparatus under subclass 227 in which the friction reducing fluid is
    supplied or fed to the cutter or portion thereof by means actuated by the
    rotation of the tool or the cutter.


CLS 175/230
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the tool, tool shaft or
    housing is provided with a means which is adapted to expand laterally to
    engage the wall of the borehole or casing to resist or prevent the movement
    of the tool, tool shaft or housing or a portion thereof due to the action
    of gravity or a lifting force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     for an anchor engaging side wall of inaccessible bore for shaft
    engaging guide.

    98,     for expansible means to anchor a below ground tool drive motor to a
    bore wall.

    118,    for feed anchor in earth wall being bored.

    210,    for a fluid or cuttings directing or receiving means engaging the
    bore entrance, said means being anchored to the bore wall.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclasses 206+ and the search there noted for an expansible
    anchor or casing for wells.


CLS 175/231
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a means which is movable
    relative to a tool while the tool is below ground to change the direction
    of flow nonsymmetrically relative to the bore axis of fluid discharging
    from the tool, usually to alter the direction of boring.


CLS 175/232
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a means which is movable
    below ground relative to a tool or to a part of a tool, whereby the movable
    means will substantially block the flow of material toward the bottom of
    the bore, said movable means either blocking the bore, or a passage in the
    tool or tool shaft.

    (1)     Note.  For classification herein, the flow stopping means must be
    described as capable of at least preventing the downward flow of fine
    material such as sand or silt.

    (2)     Note.  If the flow stopping means comprises a line pressure
    responsive device or check valve, the valve must be capable of stopping
    downward flow when higher pressure exists on the upper side thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    317+    and the search there noted for means movable relative to a tool or
    shaft to control a below ground passage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 863+ for a sampler of general
    utility.


CLS 175/233
TXT Apparatus under subclass 232 in which the movable means seals, or
    cooperates with another means to seal a sample collecting chamber at the
    pressure which exists at the bottom of the bore.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    234+,   for longitudinally spaced valve seats, wherein longitudinally
    spaced valves may be arranged, but are not described as sealing a sample
    receiver at bore bottom pressure.


CLS 175/234
TXT Apparatus under subclass 232 in which at least two surfaces are spaced
    along the bore axis, said surfaces being adapted to cooperate with
    relatively movable flow stopping means.

    (1)     Note.  The longitudinally spaced valve seats may both cooperate
    with a single movable means, and may be engaged to stop either upward or
    downward flow.


CLS 175/235
TXT Apparatus under subclass 234 in which a surface or seat is engaged to stop
    the flow of material away from the bore bottom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    318,    for upward flow stopping movable means.


CLS 175/236
TXT Apparatus under subclass 232 in which the movable means is located in a
    means to receive a sample of the formation (undisturbed core, cuttings,
    etc.), and said sample receiving means is adapted to be taken above ground
    while the shaft which drives the tool remains in the borehole.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246+,   for a undisturbed sample receiver removable through a tool shaft.

    257     and the subclasses there noted for a tool removable or insertable
    through or around a driving or driven shaft.


CLS 175/237
TXT Apparatus under subclass 232 in which the movable means comprises an
    element which is described as being released in the tool shaft after said
    shaft is in the borehole to travel through a portion of said shaft to flow
    stopping position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270     and the search there noted for a cutter element laterally shiftable
    below ground, and including a dropped element means.


CLS 175/238
TXT Apparatus under subclass 232 in which at least part of the relatively
    movable, flow stopping means comprises a cutter element.


CLS 175/239
TXT Apparatus under subclass 232 comprising the combination of a relatively
    movable, flow stopping means and structure adapted to admit and
    substantially encompass a cylinder of earth formation as it is being
    defined by an annular type bit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236,    for flow stopping movable means in sample receiver removable
    through below ground shaft.


CLS 175/240
TXT Apparatus under subclass 239 in which the movable means is adapted to admit
    the core of material to the core receiver, and then move to flow stopping
    position to block movement of the core toward bore bottom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233,    for means movable to seal a sample receiver at bore bottom pressure.

    249,    for means movable relative to bit to retain or sever a core, but
    which, per se, are incapable of stopping downward flow of fine material.


CLS 175/241
TXT Apparatus under subclass 232 in which the movable means is pivotally
    mounted to move from flow permitting to flow blocking position.


CLS 175/242
TXT Apparatus under subclass 241 in which the pivot point comprises an axis
    which is substantially transverse to the axis along which the tool is
    forming a bore.


CLS 175/243
TXT Apparatus under subclass 232 in which (1) the movable means is held in a
    position by a resilient means such as spring or (2) the movable means is
    composed for flexible material such as rubber (e.g., flap valve).


CLS 175/244
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a means which, during normal
    operation, is displaceable or rotatable relative to the working face of a
    tool, said means being adapted to have physical contact with a core of
    material such as is formed by a core type bit to (1) accommodate the core
    as it is formed, (2) grasp the core after it is formed, or (3) cut or break
    the already formed core from the formation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for core severing by explosive means.

    44,     for a core receiver provided with means to mark the core while
    being taken for the purpose of orienting the core to its original position
    while in situ.

    46,     for a core receiver provided with means to signal or indicate a
    condition of the core being taken relative to the receiver.

    239+,   for means movable in tool or tool shaft to stop flow toward bore
    bottom, combined with an undisturbed sample receiver.

    403+    and the search there noted for core forming type bits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclass 63 for
    a mining machine having an endless loop chunk severing cutter.


CLS 175/245
TXT Apparatus under subclass 244 in which the movable means comprises an
    element initially closing the core receiving opening in the tool, said
    means being moved away from the working face of the tool as the core is
    formed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    307,    for a means adapted to initially cover the cutting edges of a bit.


CLS 175/246
TXT Apparatus under subclass 244 in which the movable means comprises a
    structure adapted to cooperate with a tool and hollow tool shaft to receive
    a core as it is taken, said structure and core then being readily lifted
    above ground through the center of the tool shaft while the tool shaft
    remains in the borehole.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236,    for sample receiver removable through below ground tool shaft, said
    receiver being provided with means movable to stop flow toward bore bottom.

    257+    and the subclasses there noted for a tool or sample receiver
    insertable through a driving or driven tool shaft.

    309,    for a receptacle of general utility insertable or removable through
    a below ground tool shaft.


CLS 175/247
TXT Apparatus under subclass 246 in which (1) a fluid pressure operated means
    or surface is provided to move a core receiver toward above ground or (2) a
    means latching the core barrel in the tool shaft is actuated to engaged or
    released position by fluid pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for a process of transporting a sample to the surface by fluid.

    99      and the subclasses there noted for other pressure fluid operated
    devices.


CLS 175/248
TXT Apparatus under subclass 246 in which the core receiver is provided with a
    cutting edge or element which is adapted to participate in the forming of a
    core of undisturbed material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257+    and the search there noted for tool removable or insertable through
    or around driving or driven shaft.


CLS 175/249
TXT Apparatus under subclass 244 in which the movable means comprises a means
    to grasp or make a cut in the core after it has been formed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for processes or devices for severing a core by means of an
    explosive or explosion.

    240,    for undisturbed core receiver combined with movable flow stopping
    means adapted to underlie a severed core.

    263+,   for cutter element laterally shiftable below ground.

    333,    for rolling cutter bits with fixed core breaking means.

    404,    for core forming type bits with fixed core breaking means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclasses 55+ for earth embedded well pipe cutters.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 86.1+ for
    grappling means having structural features adapted to function in a bore
    hole or similar earth opening.


CLS 175/250
TXT Apparatus under subclass 249 in which the core retaining or severing means
    is moved from one position to another by fluid pressure or flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99,     and the subclasses there noted for other pressure fluid operated
    devices.

    247,    for fluid pressure responsive means to remove a core receiver or
    operate a means latching a core receiver in a tool shaft.

    267+,   for cutter element shifted relative to bit head below ground by
    fluid pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 86.15 for well
    grapples shiftable to engage an object or earth core through a fluid
    pressure means.


CLS 175/251
TXT Apparatus under subclass 249 in which a relative movement between the tool
    and tool shaft (1) moves the core retaining or severing means into
    engagement with the core or (2) releases the core retaining or severing
    means so that they can move into core engagement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281     and 284, for expansible cutter element shifted by relative
    longitudinal movement of shaft.


CLS 175/252
TXT Apparatus under subclass 251 in which the core retaining or severing means
    move into core engagement upon relative rotational movement between the
    tool and tool shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272     and 273, for expansible cutter element shifted by relative rotary
    movement between tool and shaft.


CLS 175/253
TXT Apparatus under subclass 249 including a means to positively hold the core
    retaining or severing means out of core contact position until a certain
    condition or manipulation takes place, said holding means generally being
    deactivated upon the formation of a substantial length of core.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251+,   for retaining or severing means actuated upon relative movement
    between tool and shaft.

    271,    275+ and 290, for expansible cutter elements with latch.


CLS 175/254
TXT Apparatus under subclass 249 in which the retaining or severing means moves
    toward the longitudinal axis of the core by swinging movement about a pivot
    axis which is substantially transverse to the longitudinal axis of the core.

    (1)     Note.  The pivot axis may shift during the pivotal movement of the
    retaining or severing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263+,   for expansible cutters mounted on a transverse pivot.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 86.29 for
    pivoted contracting grapples used in a well bore.


CLS 175/255
TXT Apparatus under subclass 249 in which the retaining or severing means is
    moved toward the longitudinal axis of the core due to wedge like action
    upon relative bodily longitudinal sliding movement between surfaces on the
    retaining or severing means and the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    279+    and 286+, for expansible cutter element with wedge type expansion
    means.

    422,    for a clasp (e.g., a well slip assembly) which separately travels
    with an earth boring shaft or which cooperates with specifically shaped
    well structure which stops or actuates the clasp.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., appropriate subclasses, and
    particularly subclass 114.5, for a strap, cable, or pipe button (i.e., trip
    or stop projection).

    188,    Brakes, particularly subclass 67 for brake (e.g., a clasp)
    mechanically connected to a relatively stationary structure and which holds
    a pipe or rod at various locations along the pipe's or rod's length for
    short quick linear assembly or disassembly during a work or manufacturing
    operation, or preparation to a working operation done by the pipe, rod, or
    a pipe  supported tool.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 86.3+ for
    grapples that are cammed inwardly to engage an object or earth core within
    a well bore or similar earth opening.


CLS 175/256
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a tool shaft having
    sections which are joined together by means permitting relative movement
    transverse to the longitudinal axis thereof, as by pivoting, and a means
    which normally holds the two sections of shafting in their angular or bent
    condition and which may be rendered inoperable to permit the two shaft
    sections to assume in aligned position.

    (1)     Note.  The releasable means is generally released by the engagement
    of the tool with the bottom of the borehole.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for sectional guide or shaft having means to lock sections in
    angular relation while boring.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclass 118 for knuckle joints in pipes
    having actuating means to relatively move pipe sections.


CLS 175/257
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a tool and a shaft or
    casing to drive the tool or be driven by the tool, said tool being adapted
    to be connected to or disconnected from driving relation with the shaft or
    casing by movement either (1) through the inside of said shaft or casing or
    (2) externally of the shaft or casing in the space between the shaft or
    casing and the bore wall, the movement of the tool being to or from a
    position below ground while the shaft or casing is in the borehole and
    without the removal of the latter from the borehole.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for device for forming a bore without earth removal in which the
    drive point is retracted through a shaft or casing.

    202,    for devices having above ground means for relatively moving below
    ground tool elements.

    236,    for devices having a sample receiver with below ground means
    movable relative to a tool to stop flow toward the bore bottom, the sample
    receiver being removable through a below ground shaft.

    246+,   for devices having an undisturbed core receiver which is removable
    through a below ground tool shaft.

    309,    for devices having a receptacle removable or insertable through a
    below ground tool shaft.


CLS 175/258
TXT Apparatus under subclass 257 in which the tool comprises a laterally
    shiftable cutter element (as defined in subclass 263) movable through the
    inside of a tubular shaft.


CLS 175/259
TXT Apparatus under subclass 258 in which a plurality of cutter elements are
    movable through the shaft, said cutter elements being movable relative to
    each other in the direction of the longitudinal axis of the shaft to an
    operative position in which the cutting edges of the cutter elements lie in
    the same transverse plane perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the
    shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    265,    for plural laterally shiftable cutter elements, per se, which are
    longitudinally relatively movable into transverse alignment.


CLS 175/260
TXT Apparatus under subclass 258 in which the shaft has an element or portion
    having a surface which extends substantially longitudinally and radially of
    the shaft and which is engaged by a portion of the cutter element so that
    rotary motion about the shaft axis may be transmitted from the shaft to the
    cutter element or from the cutter element to the shaft.

    (1)     Note.  For the purposes of this subclass the laterally movable
    support for a rolling cutter, as defined in subclass 331, is considered to
    be part of the cutter element since the rolling cutter element itself could
    not have a torque transmitting surface engaging the shaft.


CLS 175/261
TXT Apparatus under subclass 260 in which the cutter element is carried by a
    bit head and the shaft and bit head are also provided with mutually
    engaging drive transmitting surfaces which transmit torque between the
    shaft and bit head.


CLS 175/262
TXT Apparatus under subclass 257 in which the tool is movable to operative
    position by moving externally of the shaft in the space between the shaft
    and the bore wall.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 86.34 for a
    nominally claimed earth boring means for cutting away earth or rock or a
    means for removing loose material or metal around a stuck object (e.g., a
    section of drill pipe) in a borehole combined with means for retrieving the
    object.


CLS 175/263
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a cutter element carried on
    a shaft or bit head by means which permits or causes the cutter element to
    move relative to the shaft or bit head in a direction transverse to the
    bore axis while the shaft or bit head and cutter element are below ground.

    (1)     Note.  When the laterally shiftable cutter element comprises a
    rolling cutter bit element as defined in subclass 331 the lateral shifting
    movement of the cutter element for classification in this subclass must
    consist of a movement other than that due to the normal cycle of rotation
    of the rolling cutter element about its rolling axis.  Thus a rolling
    cutter element which normally rolls about an axis and partakes of a cyclic
    eccentric motion with a lateral    component is not included under this
    definition but will be found below in subclass 343 for example.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for side wall tool fed laterally without rotation from inaccessible
    hole.

    78,     for tools which are fed laterally to bore from a recess in a
    carrier inserted in an inaccessible hole.

    90,     for tool elements mounted on a continuously driven flexible or
    articulated endless member which is carried on a support which is swingable
    or laterally movable.

    202,    for devices having above ground means for relatively moving below
    ground tool elements.

    256,    for tools combined with jointed shaft having a means which normally
    biases the tool laterally of the bore but which is releasable to permit
    operation without the bias.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 155+ for a piercing
    or expanding earth anchor.

    82,     Turning, subclass 1.2 for expanding reverse taper wood augers.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 55+ for cutters for earth embedded well pipe,
    subclasses 170+ and particularly subclass 174 for well pipe cleaners for
    expansible well anchors or casing.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 93+ for an
    expanding grapple.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener,  subclasses 29+ for expansible anchors provided
    with cutting teeth for the formation of the bore in which the anchor is to
    be expanded.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 463+ for expansible abrading tool.


CLS 175/264
TXT Apparatus under subclass 263 in which the cutter element moves outwardly
    from the shaft axis to operative position and a means is provided which is
    detachable from the cutter element or bit head and which is temporarily
    attached to the cutter element above ground to hold the cutter element in
    an inward or collapsed position, usually to facilitate insertion of the
    cutter element in the borehole, said means being removed and remaining
    above ground when the cutter element is placed in the borehole.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclasses 85.1+ for above ground apparatus with assembly or
    disassembly means including means for aiding in inserting a member into or
    removing a member from a well.


CLS 175/265
TXT Apparatus under subclass 263 in which a plurality of cutter elements are
    provided, said cutter elements being movable relative to each other in the
    direction of the longitudinal axis of the shaft to an operative position in
    which the cutting edges of the cutter elements lie in the same transverse
    plane perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259,    for similar cutter elements which are also removable or insertable
    around or through a driving or driven shaft or casing while the shaft or
    casing is below ground.


CLS 175/266
TXT Apparatus under subclass 263 in which a plurality of laterally movable
    cutter elements are provided and means are also provided which permits one
    of said cutter elements to move laterally while another laterally movable
    cutter element is temporarily held against such movement.


CLS 175/267
TXT Apparatus under subclass 263 in which the laterally movable cutter element
    is moved laterally by means of a fluid under pressure acting against the
    cutter element or a below ground part attached thereto.

    (1)     Note.  Devices which have a specific description of a fluid jet
    acting directly on the cutter element to assist in moving it laterally have
    been classified in this subclass only when the nozzle or outlet for the
    fluid has been claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99,     and the search there noted for other pressure fluid operated
    devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclass 55.8 for fluid pressure actuated, radially movable
    well pipe cutter and subclass 212 for fluid pressure actuated expanding
    anchor.


CLS 175/268
TXT Apparatus under subclass 267 in which a part is provided which is
    specifically described as being dropped from above ground to an operative
    position below ground, said part functioning to cause operation of the
    fluid shifting means, for example, by (1) operating a latch, (2) providing
    a fluid reacting surface or (3) operating a valve or other means to permit
    movement of the cutter element.

    (1)     Note.  Patents are classified in this subclass which specifically
    describe the part as being a dropped element even though no such recitation
    is made in the claims provided the part itself is claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270,    and the subclasses there noted, for other devices employing a
    dropped element.


CLS 175/269
TXT Apparatus under subclass 267 in which the laterally movable cutter element
    or part acted on by the pressure fluid is also acted upon by a resilient
    means urging the cutter element or part in a direction opposite to that
    exerted by the pressure fluid.


CLS 175/270
TXT Apparatus under subclass 263 in which the laterally movable cutter element
    is moved laterally by means of a part which is specifically described as
    being dropped from above ground to an operative position below ground.

    (1)     Note.  Patents are classified in this subclass which specifically
    describe the part as being a dropped element even though no such recitation
    is made in the claims provided the part itself is claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237,    for means movable relative to a tool below ground to stop flow
    toward the bore bottom comprising a dropped element.

    268,    for fluid pressure operated lateral shiftable cutter elements
    including a dropped element.

    271,    for laterally shiftable cutter elements having a fluid operated
    latch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclass 239 for detent or clutch in well operated by
    dropped weight.


CLS 175/271
TXT Apparatus under subclass 263 in which the laterally movable cutter element
    is held in one position, either expanded or collapsed, by a movable latch
    member, said latch member being moved by (1) a fluid under pressure acting
    against the latch or a part connected thereto or (2) engaging a part which
    is specifically described as being dropped from above ground to an
    operative position below ground.

    (1)     Note.  Patents are classified in this subclass which specifically
    describe the latch as being operated by fluid pressure or a dropped element
    even though no such recitation is made in the claims provided the part on
    which fluid pressure directly acts on the dropped element itself is claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99,     and the subclasses there noted for other pressure fluid operated
    devices.

    270,    and the subclasses there noted, for other devices operated by a
    dropped element.


CLS 175/272
TXT Apparatus under subclass 263 in which the laterally movable cutter element
    is connected to a pair of elements having cooperating screw threaded
    portions, said elements being relatively movable in a direction parallel to
    the longitudinal axis of the shaft due to the action of the screw threads
    to cause the cutter element to move laterally.


CLS 175/273
TXT Apparatus under subclass 263 in which the laterally movable cutter element
    is connected to a cam or gear which is mounted to rotate about an axis
    substantially coincident with the longitudinal axis of the shaft so that
    relative movement of the cam or gear and the shaft about said axis will
    cause the cutter element to move laterally relative to the shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252,    for a core retaining or severing means which is movable on a bit
    and the movement is caused by relative rotary movement between the bit and
    tool shaft.


CLS 175/274
TXT Apparatus under subclass 263 in which the laterally movable cutter element
    is moved by a mechanism which is biased by a resilient means to move the
    cutter element to its operative position.

    (1)     Note.  A mechanism for classification in this subclass includes a
    system of parts having a link, cam or similar element between the cutter
    element and the resilient means but a simple link connecting a cutter
    element and a spring is excluded, see subclass 291 below.


CLS 175/275
TXT Apparatus under subclass 274 combined with a movable member which is
    separate from the laterally movable cutter element and which engages the
    cutter element or some part of the resiliently biased mechanism to hold the
    cutter element in one position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    271,    for laterally shiftable cutter elements having a latch operated by
    fluid pressure or a dropped element.


CLS 175/276
TXT Apparatus under subclass 275 in which the movable latch member comprises a
    part which is destructible or discarded so that the part is used only one
    time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301,    for below ground hammer or impact devices with a frangible means to
    releasably retain the impact member against reciprocation.

    307,    for a cutting edge cover which is generally frangible or
    discardable.


CLS 175/277
TXT Apparatus under subclass 275 in which the movable latch member acts to hold
    the laterally movable cutter element in an inoperative or noncutting
    position.


CLS 175/278
TXT Apparatus under subclass 277 in which the movable latch member also acts on
    the mechanism to cause the mechanism to be moved to its inactive or
    inoperative position to permit retraction of the cutter element.

    (1)     Note.  Generally the latch member engages the lower end of a casing
    when it is desired to retract the cutter element by lifting the shaft and
    cutter element and this motion causes the latch member to move the spring
    mechanism to its inoperative or inactive position.


CLS 175/279
TXT Apparatus under subclass 274 in which the shaft or bit head is provided
    with a cam or gear element other than the cutter element which is movable
    thereon, said element having a portion which engages the laterally movable
    cutter element or a part connected thereto to cause the cutter element to
    be moved.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273,    for laterally shiftable cutter elements movable by a cam or gear
    axially rotatable relative to the shaft.

    286+,   for laterally shiftable cutter elements moved by a longitudinally
    relative movable cam or gear.


CLS 175/280
TXT Apparatus under subclass 279 in which the laterally movable cutter element
    is carried on a bit head or shaft which has a portion extending inwardly
    toward the axis of the shaft and forward of the cutter element in the
    direction of boring and which has no cutting function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    283,    for similar laterally shiftable cutter elements in which the cutter
    elements are longitudinally movable on the shaft.

    406+,   and the subclasses there noted, for other cutters with a forwardly
    extending noncutting portion.


CLS 175/281
TXT Apparatus under subclass 274 in which the laterally movable cutter element
    is carried on the bit head or shaft so that the cutter element is bodily
    movable generally longitudinally relative to the bit head or shaft to cause
    movement of the cutter element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251,    for a core retaining or severing means actuated by relative
    movement of bit and tool shaft.

    288,    for laterally shiftable cutter elements which are movable
    longitudinally relative to an expanding cam or gear means.


CLS 175/282
TXT Apparatus under subclass 281 comprising a plurality of laterally movable
    cutter elements which move outwardly from the longitudinal axis of the bit
    head or shaft to operative position and a single socket or recess on the
    bit head or shaft which receives in abutting relation a portion of each
    cutter element when they have been moved to operative position.


CLS 175/283
TXT Apparatus under subclass 281 in which the laterally movable cutter element
    is carried on a bit head or shaft which has a portion extending inwardly
    toward the axis of the bit and forward of the cutter element in the
    direction of boring and which has no cutting function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258+,   and the subclasses there noted, for other cutters with a forwardly
    extending noncutting portion.

    280,    for similar laterally shiftable cutter elements which are shifted
    by a movable gear or cam.


CLS 175/284
TXT Apparatus under subclass 263 in which the cutter element is moved laterally
    by the relative bodily movement of a plurality of parts carried by the bit
    head or shaft, which parts move relative to each other in the direction of
    the longitudinal axis of the shaft.

    (1)     Note.  One of the parts may be the cutter element itself or one of
    the parts may be a fixed portion of the bit head or shaft.

    (2)     Note.  The mere pivoting of a cutter element on the bit head or
    shaft about a fixed pivot is not included since there is no bodily relative
    movement as required by the above definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251,    for core retaining or severing means actuated by relative movement
    of bit and tool shaft.

    272,    for laterally shiftable cutter elements shifted by relatively
    longitudinally movable threaded elements.

    279+    and 281+, for laterally shiftable cutter elements shifted by
    longitudinally movable parts which are spring biased to operative position.


CLS 175/285
TXT Apparatus under subclass 284 in which the laterally movable cutter element
    is moved by a link or element which is pivotally connected to the cutter
    element and one of the relatively longitudinally movable parts.


CLS 175/286
TXT Apparatus under subclass 284 in which one of the relatively longitudinally
    movable parts comprises the transversely movable cutter element and another
    of the parts comprises a cam or gear element having a portion engaging the
    cutter element so that as the parts move longitudinally relative to each
    other the cutter element will be moved transversely of the bit head.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    279+,   for laterally shiftable cutter elements shifted by a cam or gear
    mechanism which spring biases the cutter to operative position.


CLS 175/287
TXT Apparatus under subclass 286 combined with a movable member which is
    separate from the laterally movable cutter element or the cam or gear and
    which engages a portion of the movable parts to hold the cutter element in
    the position in which it is displaced laterally of the bit head the maximum
    distance from the longitudinally axis of the bit head or shaft.

    (1)     Note.  A latch is considered to be separate from the cutter
    element, cam or gear for the purposes of this definition even though it may
    be formed as a unitary part of these elements if its latching function is
    independent of the action which moves the cutter element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290,    and subclasses there noted, for other laterally shiftable cutter
    elements with latches.


CLS 175/288
TXT Apparatus under subclass 286 in which the laterally movable cutter element
    is carried on the bit head or shaft so that the cutter element moves
    generally longitudinally relative to the bit head or shaft to cause the
    movement of the cutter element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255,    for core retaining or severing means of the sliding wedged type.

    281+,   for a laterally shiftable cutter element longitudinally movable on
    the shaft by a mechanism which spring biases the cutter to operative
    position.


CLS 175/289
TXT Apparatus under subclass 286 in which the laterally movable cutter element
    is resiliently urged to move laterally of the bit head or shaft in the
    direction in which the cutter element would be in an inoperative or
    noncutting position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291,    and the search there noted for other spring biased laterally
    shiftable cutters.


CLS 175/290
TXT Apparatus under subclass 263 combined with a movable member which engages
    the laterally movable cutter element to hold it in one position.

    (1)     Note.  A mere spring or other resilient element which urges the
    cutter element laterally of the bit head is excluded and will be found in
    subclass 291.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    271,    for laterally shiftable cutter elements having a latch operated by
    fluid pressure or a dropped element.

    275+,   for laterally shiftable cutter elements having a mechanism spring
    biasing the cutter to operative position and a separate latch.

    287,    for laterally shiftable cutter elements moved by a longitudinally
    relatively movable cam or gear and having a separate latch holding the
    cutter element in shifted position.


CLS 175/291
TXT Apparatus under subclass 263 in which the laterally movable cutter element
    is resiliently urged to move laterally of the shaft axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254,    for core retaining or severing means mounted on a transverse pivot
    which is generally spring biased.

    269,    for laterally shiftable cutter elements which are shifted by fluid
    pressure acting against a spring biased part.

    274+,   for laterally shiftable cutter elements with a shifting mechanism
    spring biased to operative position.

    289,    for laterally shiftable cutter elements moved by a longitudinally
    relatively movable cam or gear engaging a cutter element which is spring
    biased to retracted position.


CLS 175/292
TXT Apparatus under subclass 263 in which the laterally movable cutter element
    is pivotally mounted on the bit head or shaft to swing about an axis which
    substantially parallel to the longitudinal axis of the shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    343,    for rolling cutters which are eccentrically mounted on a
    longitudinal axis and which may be so positioned when inoperative to pass
    through a casing or bore of smaller diameter than the cutters will cut when
    operative.


CLS 175/293
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising (1) a reciprocable member
    positioned below ground adapted to cause a sudden jar shock or hammer below
    to the boring apparatus or (2) two telescoping members positioned below
    ground which members are capable of axial reciprocation with respect to
    each other and are provided with means to limit said reciprocation, the
    means for limiting reciprocation being for the purpose of causing an impact
    or hammer blow or jar to the boring apparatus or a portion thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The jarring function must be specifically described for
    classification in this subclass and not left to inference; mere telescoping
    tool shaft sections which are not disclosed as for the purpose of impacting
    or jarring a portion of the apparatus below ground are classified below as
    indicated by the search notes.

    (2)     Note.  For classification in this subclass the impact or blow must
    be delivered to a portion of the boring means and not directly to the
    formation.  For example, a below ground device for impacting a bit is
    classified herein, but a bit which is reciprocated to deliver a blow to the
    formation is excluded.

    (3)     Note.  Elements such as tubes, rods or balls which are freely
    dropped into a tool shaft from the surface to actuate a mechanism or close
    or otherwise modify a passage located in a portion of a tool or tool shaft
    located below ground are excluded even though such devices may incidentally
    cause an impact or jar to the apparatus.  Such devices are classified on
    the basis of the individual functions performed.

    (4)     Note.  As detailed in the class definition, section I, C and IV, B
    subject matter under this definition includes a below ground lost motion
    connection, per se, or a below ground lost motion connection combined with
    a specific joint for connecting the shaft or cable to an art device forming
    the subject matter for another class. However, inclusion in a claim of
    specific structure of an art device classified in another class will cause
    classification in such other class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135,    and the search there noted for above ground means to impact an
    earth penetrating means.

    237,    for means movable relative to a tool below ground to stop flow
    toward the bore bottom, and in which said means comprises a dropped element.

    268,    270 and 271, for a cutter element which is shiftable laterally
    relative to a bit head below ground, and in which the expansion of the
    cutter element is dependent on a dropped element.

    317+,   for means movable relative to a tool or shaft to control a below
    ground passage means and in which the means includes a dropped element.

    321+,   for axially telescoping tool shaft sections.

    414+,   for an impact type bit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclass 178 for specific well structure classifiable, per
    se, in Class 166 combined with a jar.  However, a jar combined with a
    packer or guide or a shaft being used in a boring operation is classifiable
    in Class 175.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 90+ and see the search notes
    therein for an impacting device of general utility for imparting blows to a
    tool. The mere location of an impacting device below ground in an earth
    bore does not prevent classification in Class 173 but an impacting device
    which is described as located below ground and is described as (1) a lost
    motion connection in a tool shaft or cable or (2) is claimed in combination
    with a specific earth boring means such as specific work contacting tool
    structure, or a packer or guide on a shaft being used in a boring operation
    is classified in Class 175.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 298+ and the search there
    noted for pipe joints or couplings having a telescopic or a relative motion
    connection.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 86.18 for
    grapples adapted to function in a well combined with a jar or impact means
    to effect a release of the grapple from engagement with an object in a well
    bore, and subclass 86.23 for grapples adapted to function in a well bore
    combined with a jar or impact means of general utility within a well bore
    or similar earth opening.  (Included herein are grapples combined with
    impact means that function to firmly set the grapple in engagement with an
    object in a well bore or with impact means that function to drive upwardly
    to release a grapple engaged object that is stuck within a well bore).

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, subclasses 18+ for a flexible coupling between fluid
    conducting rotary shafts; and subclasses 162+ for a drive coupling
    facilitating relative axial motion between coupled members.


CLS 175/294
TXT Apparatus under subclass 293 combined with a joint between two parts which
    may be selectively uncoupled below ground independently of other joints in
    the apparatus, such that one part may be left in the bore while the other
    part is withdrawn therefrom.


CLS 175/295
TXT Apparatus under subclass 293 in which the hammer or impact device comprises
    an outer sleeve provided with cutting edges and mounted for longitudinal
    sliding movement on a shaft, said shaft having a portion extending
    forwardly of said sleeve which has a noncutting function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    406+,   and the search there noted for a device having a noncutting portion
    forwardly of a cutting portion.


CLS 175/296
TXT Apparatus under subclass 293 in which (1) the hammer or impact device is
    acted upon and propelled by a body of fluid to deliver a blow (2) a body of
    fluid acts directly upon the hammer or impact device, or on holding means
    therefor to restrain said device against movement, and means to relieve the
    device or holding means from the influence of the restraining fluid to
    deliver a blow or (3) a means for holding the hammer or impact device
    against movement is released by a body of fluid to deliver a blow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99,     and the search there noted for other fluid operated devices.


CLS 175/297
TXT Apparatus under subclass 296 in which said relieving means comprises a
    restricted orifice through which said fluid may escape when placed under
    pressure to allow unrestrained movement of said hammer or impact device
    after a predetermined amount of said fluid has escaped.


CLS 175/298
TXT Apparatus under subclass 293 in which the telescoping members are provided
    with means which cooperate to cause repetitive reciprocation of said
    members relative to each other when one member is continuously turned in
    the same direction about its axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322,    for telescoping shaft sections of a nonjarring type provided with
    cooperating means for reciprocating said sections relative to each other
    when one of said sections is continuously rotated in one direction.


CLS 175/299
TXT Apparatus under subclass 293 in which an elastic member acts upon the
    hammer or impact device to urge said hammer or impact device toward or away
    from a jarring position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 202+ for an impacting device
    having a hammer head which is driven by a spring.


CLS 175/300
TXT Apparatus under subclass 293 in which means are provided on one of the
    telescoping members for engaging and holding the other member against axial
    movement with said reciprocation limiting means in spaced relation, said
    holding means being selectively releasable to allow relative axial movement
    between the members.


CLS 175/301
TXT Apparatus under subclass 300 in which said holding means comprises an
    element which is destructible so that said element is used only one time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    276,    for a frangible latching means for a spring biased shifting
    mechanism of an expandable cutter element.


CLS 175/302
TXT Apparatus under subclass 300 in which the holding means is adjustable to
    vary the manner in which the holding means may be released or the force
    required to effect release of the holding means.


CLS 175/303
TXT Apparatus under subclass 302 in which the adjustment may be effected while
    the device is in position to perform its intended function within the bore.


CLS 175/304
TXT Apparatus under subclass 300 in which said holding means is held in
    operative position by means of an elastic element.


CLS 175/305
TXT Apparatus under subclass 293 in which the telescoping members are so
    arranged that they may freely rotate relative to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    298,    for relatively rotatable telescoping members in which continuous
    unidirectional rotary motion of one member causes repetitive impacts.


CLS 175/306
TXT Apparatus under subclass 305 in which selectively engageable means are
    provided on the telescoping members for transmitting rotary motion from one
    member to the other.


CLS 175/307
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a means provided to fit over
    and protect a cutting edge of a bit or cutter element from being damaged or
    inflicting damage only while the bit or cutter element is not in use, such
    means being necessarily removed or destroyed either before or
    simultaneously with the commencement of boring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    383,    for a cutter element having plural cutting edges, one of which is
    carried in nonuse position on the bit head or cutter support.


CLS 175/308
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a receptacle means having a
    bottom and side walls for retaining or collecting fluent material and/or
    junk.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232+,   for a receptacle having a bottom or portion of a bottom movable
    below ground to stop flow toward the bore bottom.

    244+    and the search there noted for a means movable relative to a bit to
    receive, retain or sever an undisturbed core.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 864.51+ for a sampling implement
    provided with a receptacle.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 162+ and the search there noted, for well type
    receptacles.


CLS 175/309
TXT Apparatus under subclass 308 in which the receptacle means may be inserted
    in and withdrawn from a hollow tool shaft at any time during operation of
    the boring means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246+,   for a core receiver removable through a below ground tool shaft.

    257+    and the search there noted for a tool or sample receiver insertable
    through a driving or driven tool shaft or casing.


CLS 175/310
TXT Apparatus under subclass 308 in which the receptacle is provided with a
    conveyor or feed screw.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323     and the search there noted for other devices with a helix or
    helical structure.


CLS 175/311
TXT Apparatus under subclass 308 in which the receptacle is suspended in a
    preformed hole below the cutting portion of the tool.


CLS 175/312
TXT Apparatus under subclass 308 in which the receptacle is either porous or is
    provided with apertures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206,    for above ground separation of drilling fluid constituents.


CLS 175/313
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which a structure is supported or
    moved relative to a bit or cutter element so that it will strip, wipe,
    scrape, or break up adhering accumulations of mud or cuttings from a bit or
    cutter element.

    (1)     Note.  Since nearly all relatively moving or rolling cutter
    elements which are adjacent to another cutter element inherently perform a
    cleaning action, such structures have been excluded from this subclass and
    are classified on other structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     for an above ground cleaner for the boring means.

    96      and 319, for below ground drive means for plural relatively movable
    cutting edges.

    341,    for plural rolling cutters with intermeshing teeth.

    381,    for plural cutting edges relatively longitudinally movable during
    operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 606 for a cleaner for the tool of an earth
    working implement.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 50+ for fork
    tine shovel clearers.


CLS 175/314
TXT Apparatus under the class definition combined with means for separating
    solids from earth fluid flowing into a well conduit.

    (1)     Note.  The means for separating solids is generally known as a well
    screen, strainer or filter and may comprise no more than a pipe with a
    multiplicity of perforations therein.  The important factor determining
    classification in this subclass is the specific description of the use of
    the means to permit naturally occurring fluid in the earth formation to
    flow into a well conduit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312,    for devices combined with a receptacle for cuttings having a sieve
    or strainer.

    320+,   for tool shafts which may have holes to permit fluid circulation
    and subclass 324 in particular for means other than bit structure to induce
    fluent flow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclasses 227+ and the search there noted, for well
    screens, per se, or for other combinations of well devices with screens.


CLS 175/315
TXT Apparatus under the class definition claimed in combination with features
    other than means to transmit motion to the formation penetrating means, or
    means to remove cuttings from the bore, or means to conduct fluid to the
    earth penetrating means and not provided for in any of the preceding
    subclasses.

    (1)     Note.  The means to transmit motion to the earth penetrating means
    includes means to rotate, reciprocate, impact, feed or stabilize the tool
    including the tool shaft.

    (2)     Note.  The means to remove cuttings from the bore includes
    mechanical conveying means or a fluid system which functions to remove
    cuttings from the bore.

    (3)     Note.  The means to conduct fluid to the tool includes conduits,
    passages, apertures, valves or closures including packers positioned
    between the tool shaft and bore wall for allowing or controlling the flow
    of fluid to or from the tool.

    (4)     Note.  The tool includes any device which disintegrates, cuts,
    dislocates, erodes or compresses the formation to form the bore.

    (5)     Note.  All preceding subclasses must be investigated for particular
    combinations within this definition as shown by the preceding subclass
    titles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, appropriate subclasses, for an earth boring tool
    combined with a nonearth boring tool.


CLS 175/316
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having parts or portions which are
    connected together in such a manner as to be movable relative to each other
    without being completely separated to permit the removal of cuttings from
    the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232+,   for tools with means movable relative to the tool below ground to
    stop flow toward the bore bottom which may also be moved to permit cleaning
    of the tool.

    308+,   for tools combined with receptacles which may have parts which are
    movable to permit cleaning.

    313,    for tools combined with a mechanical cleaner for a bit or cutter
    element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements subclasses 49+ for
    hand-type nonrotary post hole diggers.


CLS 175/317
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which a tool or tool shaft is
    provided with a passage and means movable relative to said tool or tool
    shaft for regulating or controlling the flow of fluent material through
    said passage while the tool or tool shaft is positioned below ground.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218+,   for a valve in combination with above ground means for handling
    fluid or cuttings.

    232+,   for means movable relative to tool below ground to stop flow toward
    bore bottom.

    247+,   for fluid pressure responsive means to remove core receiver or
    operate a receiver latch.

    250+,   for passage control means in a fluid actuated core retaining or
    severing means.

    267+,   for passage control means in a means to laterally shift a cutter
    element by fluid pressure.

    271+,   for passage control means in a latch operated by fluid pressure or
    dropped element.

    296+,   for passage control means in a fluid operated below ground hammer
    or impact device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclasses 107+ and 162+ for well fluid receptacles which
    include valves and subclasses 316+ for below ground valves peculiar to
    wells.


CLS 175/318
TXT Apparatus under subclass 317 in which the means comprises a subsurface
    valve so mounted in the tool or tool shaft as to prevent the upward flow of
    fluent material in the tool or tool shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233,    for means movable to seal a sample receiver at bore bottom pressure.

    235,    for the combination of valve seats engaged by movable means to stop
    upward and downward flow.


CLS 175/319
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a plurality of cutting
    edges and a mechanical linkage or gearing which is located below ground and
    which is connected to the cutting edges to cause the cutting edges to move
    relative to each other.

    (1)     Note.  Rotation of similar cutting elements, about spaced axes,
    whether parallel or not, is considered to be relative motion for
    classification in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     for a plurality of cutting edges which are moved relative to each
    other by individual below ground drive motors.

    106,    for below ground mechanical motion converting drive means drivingly
    interposed between a below ground drive motor and a tool.

    170+,   for above ground mechanical motion converting drive means for tool.

    263+,   and the search there noted, for devices having cutter elements
    which are laterally shiftable below ground.

    298,    for devices having a below ground hammer or impact device in which
    continuous unidirectional rotary motion of one telescoping member effects
    the impacting.


CLS 175/320
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including particulars of a tool shaft.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "tool shaft", see the class definition.

    (2)     Note.  The term detail or particulars is meant to exclude mere
    nominal or broad recitations of a tool shaft.  For example, a shaft having
    a detailed handle fixed thereto or merely stating "hollow tool shaft",
    "centrally located passage", "convolute tool shaft", etc, would be
    insufficient, but if said shaft is described as having a particular kind of
    passage or convolution or multiple passages, etc., the patent will be
    classified herein.

    (3)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass, the tool shaft extends
    between above ground structure and the joint directly above the cutting
    element that is most closely located to the above ground structure; all
    structure from the joint above the said cutting element to the most remote
    bore engaging end of the boring means is considered as part of the tool
    structure.

            Likewise, details of the joint structure which are in the tool
    shaft, but function merely to connect the tool structure to the shaft are
    excluded as subject material for this subclass, and are classified with the
    particular tool structure in this class if tool structure is claimed, or in
    the appropriate joint class if tool structure is not claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for sectional shaft having means to lock sections in angular
    relation in a means to constrain tool to bore along a curved path.

    75,     for normally curved shaft in a means to constrain tool to bore
    along a curved path.

    101,    for positive driving connection between tool and support shaft for
    rotary below ground prime mover.

    173,    with drive means including diversely actuated shafts extending into
    bore.

    205,    for means providing pressurized gas contact with drilling liquid
    which may be located in a tool shaft.

    215,    for tool shaft having plural passages for drilling fluid.

    317+    and the search there noted for means movable relative to tool or
    tool shaft to control below ground passage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, appropriate subclasses for
    electrical conductors and particularly subclass 47 for combined electrical
    and fluid conductors.


CLS 175/321
TXT Apparatus under subclass 320 in which separate sections of tool shafting
    cooperate with one another so as to be slidably extensible or collapsible
    (e.g., one section slidable within a second section) and including below
    ground tool advancing devices such as fluid operated expansible chamber
    feed means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94,     for below ground feed means for a below ground prime mover.

    257+    and the search there noted for tool removable or insertable through
    or around driving or driven shaft.

    293+,   for telescoping shaft sections wherein the sections are provided
    with opposing faces which are adapted to contact upon movement of the
    sections to cause an impact or jar.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 298+ for variable length pipe
    joints.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 52+ for articulated members in
    general.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, subclasses 18+ for a flexible coupling between
    fluid-conducting rotary shafts; and subclasses 162+ for a drive coupling
    facilitating relative axial motion between coupled members.


CLS 175/322
TXT Apparatus under subclass 321 in which the sections of shafting include
    means acting between the sections so that the collapsing motion is
    accompanied by relative motion of the sections about the axis of the
    shafting (e.g., axial rotation or axial oscillation).

    (1)     Note.  The axial motion may be specifically described as either (1)
    causing the collapsing or telescoping or (2) being caused by the collapsing
    or telescoping of the sections for classification in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    298,    for devices having a below ground hammer or impact device in which
    continuous unidirectional rotary motion of one telescoping member effects
    the impacting.


CLS 175/323
TXT Apparatus under subclass 320 including structure other than the structure
    of a bit providing a helix or portions arranged in a helical manner.

    (1)     Note.  The helix or helically arranged portions usually perform a
    pumping or conveying function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for a helix or helically arranged structure in a device which
    includes a below ground tool drive motor.

    310,    for a receptacle with a helical conveyor.

    388,    for a bit having a pilot which is helical.

    394+,   for a bit with a helical conveying portion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 104.33 for
    helically shaped sewer cleaners.


CLS 175/324
TXT Apparatus under subclass 320 including structure other than the structure
    of the tool which is specifically adapted to cause the circulation of
    flowable material (e.g., cuttings or drilling fluid) within the tool shaft
    or borehole.

    (1)     Note.  Since most boring tools normally include or are inherently
    adapted to cause a degree of impelling or conveying, tool structure is
    excluded as subject matter for this subclass and is classified in the
    appropriate tool subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    for means to induce fluent flow comprising discharge passages for
    motive fluid of a below ground fluid operated motor directed toward the
    bore entrance.

    102,    for a below ground pump for the removal of cuttings combined with a
    below ground tool drive motor.

    213,    for a flushing fluid handling system in which a pump inlet
    communicates with the bore bottom.

    217,    for an above ground means for handling drilling fluid or cuttings
    including a pump which may be positioned below ground.

    323,    and the search there noted for a helix or helically arranged
    structure on a tool shaft for inducing fluid flow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclasses 62, 68 and 105+ for an eduction pump or plunger
    in a well.

    417,    Pumps, appropriate subclasses for pumps of general utility.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclasses for
    rotary expansible chamber devices, per se.


CLS 175/325.1
TXT Shaft carried guide or protector:
    Apparatus under subclass 320 in which a means on the tool shaft directs,
    positions, or shields a drillstring or a portion thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73+,    for bore wall engaging guides which act to constrain the tool to
    bore along a curved path.

    97+,    for a below ground tool drive motor in which the motor support is
    provided with means for engaging the bore wall.

    323,    for a tool shaft having helical impeller or conveyor structure
    engaging the bore wall.

    399,    for nonsymmetrical bits provided with bore wall engaging guide
    means.

    408,    for bits having means on the bit to centralize of stabilize the bit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclasses 117.5+ for means guiding an insertable element
    laterally of bore axis and subclasses 241.1+ for means  positioning a well
    device within a well.


CLS 175/325.2
TXT Coupled  between shaft sections or bit and shaft section:
    Apparatus under subclass 325.1 where the guide or protecting means is (1) a
    discrete device connecting two axially spaced shaft sections or (2) a shaft
    section and a bit in which the tool shaft or portion is specifically
    adapted to hold the bore wall guide or protector means.


CLS 175/325.3
TXT With bore wall engaging means rotatable relative to shaft section (e.g.,
    with bearings):Apparatus under subclass 325.2 where a borehole contacting
    device is mounted on the shaft section in a manner that allows the shaft
    section to rotate while the guide or protector means is substantially fixed
    in the borehole.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 29+ for a cylindrical linear bearing of
    general use; if borehole or well contacting structure is disclosed or
    claimed, placement is in Class 175, subclasses 325.1+.


CLS 175/325.4
TXT Having removable inserts:
    Apparatus under subclass 325.2 where a bore wall contacting portion is
    readily placed in or removed from a slot or an aperture in the guide or
    protector means.


CLS 175/325.5
TXT Surrounding existing shaft section:
    Apparatus under subclass 325.1 where the guide or protector encircles and
    is secured to the shaft.


CLS 175/325.6
TXT Held by a fastener parallel to shaft axis:
    Apparatus under subclass 325.5 where the guide or protector means encircles
    and is fixed to the shaft by a securing means having a longitudinal axis
    equidistant to the longitudinal axis of the tool shaft.


CLS 175/325.7
TXT Held by discrete fastening means tangential to shaft axis:
    Apparatus under subclass 325.5 where the guide or protector means encircles
    and is fixed to the shaft by a securing means having a longitudinal axis
    that touches a single point of a planar circle whose center is the
    longitudinal axis of the tool shaft.


CLS 175/326
TXT Apparatus under subclasses 325.1+ in which at least a portion of the guide
    means advances with the tool, and is described as larger than the area of
    bore being formed so that the advance is guided by a surface (generally a
    performed bore) that is laterally spaced from the bore currently being
    formed by the tool.


CLS 175/327
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising (1) a tool having a cutter
    element or cutting edge which is disclosed as specifically adapted to
    mechanically contact and selectively cut, disintegrate or dislocate
    portions of masonry, stone, rock or earth formations to form or enlarge a
    hole or bore therein or (2) subcombinations of such a tool not otherwise
    classified.

    (1)     Note.  Cutter element is defined as any portion of a bit that
    comprises a cutting edge and a body portion that is specifically formed to
    be movably or immovably engaged or connected to a supporting structure
    (i.e., bit head) which supporting structure by itself has no disintegrating
    function but serves as an intermediate member for connecting the cutter
    element to a drive shaft.

    (2)     Note.  Cutting edge is defined as that portion of the cutter
    element or bit that initially contacts and cuts, disintegrates or
    dislocates the earth formation, said edge may be composed of a surface
    which is usually sharpened or chisel shaped; however, any projection or
    surface the sole purpose of which is to cut disintegrate or dislocate the
    formation which it contacts is included under the term cutting edge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, appropriate subclasses for cutlery of general utility.

    37,     Excavating, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 446+
    for digging edge of scoops.

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, for an
    abrasive tool making process, material, or composition in general.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 155+ for a piercing
    or expanding earth anchor.

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclasses 102 and 108.1+ for
    blanks and processes for making drills.

    111,    Planting, subclass 99 for dibbles for planting.

    125,    Stone Working, subclasses 36+ for stone working tools including
    drills adapted to bore a hole in stone not in situ.

    144,    Woodworking, for a woodworking machine including cutting edges.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 681+ and the search there noted for earth
    working tools.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses, and particularly subclasses 291+ for apparatus for breaking up
    solid material.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 79.1
    for a cutter head or tooth for mining or disintegrating hard material in
    situ.

    407,    Cutters, for Shaping, for a metal working cutter.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 186+ and
    199+ for a tool of that class type.

    433,    Dentistry, subclass 165 for dental tool bits.

    451,    Abrading, for an abrading tool of general utility, and particularly
    subclasses 490+ for a tool support for a flexible-member abrading tool,
    subclasses 526+ for a flexible-member abrading tool, per se, and subclasses
    540+ for a rigid abrading tool.

    606,    Surgery, subclasses 80+, for bone drills and subclasses 167+, for
    cutting, puncturing or piercing tools in general.


CLS 175/328
TXT Apparatus under subclass 327 in which the bit is provided with a magnet or
    with a magnetized portion.

    (1)     Note.  The magnet or magnetized portion may comprise either a
    permanent magnet or an electromagnet.

    (2)     Note.  A bit that may become magnetized during use is excluded.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 65.5 for a
    grapple adapted to be used in a borehole and provided with a magnet.


CLS 175/331
TXT Apparatus under subclass 327 comprising a rotary bit in which a cutter
    element or carrier for a fixed cutter is rotatably mounted thereon so that
    the cutter element or carrier may roll or tend to roll on a surface of the
    bore as the bit is rotated.

    (1)     Note.  Patents have been classified in this and indented subclasses
    which claim a portion of a bit which is specifically described as a roller
    cutter bit even though the roller cutter element is not claimed.

    (2)     Note.  An endless flexible member mounted to roll about journals on
    the bit head in response to rotation of said head is considered a rolling
    cutter and is classified in this and indented subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  The term "readily detachable" as employed in the notes to
    this and indented subclasses refers to constructions which may be
    disassembled by employing only conventional hand tools.  Patents which
    claim that the various parts or subassemblies may be separated by a cutting
    torch and new components welded together, have not been treated as
    involving readily detachable components although some of these patents
    refer to such welded parts as being detachable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 104.13 for pipe
    cleaners having similar rollers.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 518+ for rolling, rotating or orbitally
    moving earthworking tools.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclass 86 for
    a cutter head for mining or disintegrating hard material having a rolling
    cutter.


CLS 175/332
TXT Apparatus under subclass 331 in which the rolling cutter element or a fixed
    cutting edge of the bit is so arranged that the bit makes an annular cut in
    the formation and leaves a central undisturbed portion of the formation in
    the form of a cylinder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403+,   and the search there noted for other core forming type bits.


CLS 175/333
TXT Apparatus under subclass 332 in which the bit is further provided with
    means to disintegrate the undisturbed cylindrical portion of the formation
    after it has been formed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404     and the search there noted for other core forming type bits having
    core breaking means.


CLS 175/334
TXT Apparatus under subclass 331 in which the rolling cutter element or a fixed
    cutting edge of the bit forms a first bore of definable diameter, and a
    trailing rolling cutter or fixed cutting edge increases the diameter of the
    first bore so that the boring outline of the bit will describe at least one
    peripheral axial step.

    (1)     Note.  Since many rolling cutting bits include toothed rolling
    cutter elements which will individually form "steps" due to inclination of
    the cutter relative to the bit axis, or varying tooth lengths, such patents
    are excluded from this  subclass and classified on other rolling cutter bit
    features.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    385+,   for a nonroller type bit having a pilot cutter.


CLS 175/335
TXT Apparatus under subclass 334 in which the leading cutter or pilot comprises
    a cutter element or cutting edge other than a rolling cutter element or
    portion thereof.


CLS 175/336
TXT Apparatus under subclass 331 in which the bit includes a cutter element or
    cutting edge other than a rolling cutter element or portion thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    335,    for a rolling cutter bit provided with a fixed pilot cutter.


CLS 175/337
TXT Apparatus under subclass 331 in which the cutter element is rotatably
    mounted on a bearing and in which drilling fluid is supplied to the bearing
    to clean, cool or lubricate such bearing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227+,   for storage or conduit means for bit lubricant other than drilling
    fluid.

    339+,   for other drilling fluid conduit structure in a rolling cutter bit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, subclass 93 for bearing structure with lubrication means
    which are adapted for use in roller type rock drill bits and only enough
    support structure for the bearing.  The lubricant can be drilling fluid.
    The support can be broadly recited roller cutter bit but not details of the
    cutter relating to cutting, or lubricating a cutter.


CLS 175/338
TXT Apparatus under subclass 331 in which the rolling cutter element is
    rotatably mounted on an endless or rotary carrier so that both the rolling
    cutter element and the carrier may roll or tend to roll on a surface of the
    bore as the bit is rotated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89,     for tool element on continuously driven flexible or articulated
    endless member.


CLS 175/339
TXT Apparatus under subclass 331 in which the bit is provided with a particular
    nozzle, passage or conduit to supply drilling fluid to the cutting edge of
    the rolling cutter element or to the surface of the formation being
    disintegrated.

    (1)     Note.  Since nearly all earth boring tools under subclass 331 are
    provided with some form of drilling fluid supply, a mere nominal recitation
    of a fluid nozzle or passage has been excluded.

    (2)     Note.  The fluid nozzle, passage or conduit need not define a
    tubular structure, it may form only a portion of the wall of the fluid
    conducting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227+,   for storage and conduit means for a bit lubricant other than the
    drilling fluid.

    332+,   for a core forming type roller bit provided with fluid conduit
    details.

    337,    for a drilling fluid supply to a roller cutter element bearing.


CLS 175/340
TXT Apparatus under subclass 339 in which the means to supply drilling fluid
    comprises (1) a coated or treated passage or (2) a distinct element which
    is limited in use to conducting, directing, or blocking the drilling fluid.

    (1)     Note.  A fluid conducting element under part (2) of the definition
    which is also a cutter element or a bit is classified either with subclass
    339 or is classified on other bit structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227+,   for a storage and conduit means for lubricant other than drilling
    fluid for a bit.

    332+,   for a core forming type roller bit provided with a fluid conduit
    lining or element.

    337,    for a drilling fluid supply to a roller cutter element bearing.

    393,    for a fluid conduit lining or fluid conducting, directing or
    blocking element for a bit other than a roller type bit.


CLS 175/341
TXT Apparatus under subclass 331 in which the bit is provided with a plurality
    of rolling cutter elements which cutter elements are provided with cutting
    edges arranged in circumferential rows about each cutter element, and which
    rows are positioned on each of the cutter elements so that the cutting
    edges of one row interfit the cutting edges of an adjacent cutter element
    row.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    319,    for plural rolling cutter elements provided with cutting edges
    arranged in circumferential rows about each cutter so that the cutting
    edges of one cutter element interfit the cutting edges of the other cutter
    element in driving relation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 236 for
    intermeshing plural rotating crushing surfaces in a comminuting device.


CLS 175/342
TXT Apparatus under subclass 331 in which means are provided to selectively
    hold the rolling cutter element in different positions with respect to the
    bit head.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    382+,   for an adjustable nonrolling cutter element.


CLS 175/343
TXT Apparatus under subclass 331 in which (1) the rolling cutter element is
    mounted on an axis which is spaced from, or inclined to the geometric axis
    of the cutter or cutting edge, or (2) in which the rolling cutter element
    is loosely held on its rotary supporting means so that it may continually
    shift laterally as it rolls.

    (1)     Note.  The loosely supported cutters are usually disks which slide
    on part of the bit head to effect a self-sharpening function.


CLS 175/344
TXT Apparatus under subclass 331 in which the rolling cutter element is carried
    on a bit having a portion extending inwardly toward the axis of the bit and
    forwardly of the cutter element in the direction of boring and which has no
    cutting function.

    (1)     Note.  The noncutting portion can be located between claimed
    cutting portions and patents which claim cutting portions spaced
    longitudinally of the bore axis will be classified in this subclass even
    though no noncutting portion is specifically recited.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    295,    for a device having a noncutting portion forwardly of a sleeve
    impact member having a cutting portion thereon.

    406+,   for a bit having a noncutting portion forwardly of the cutting
    portion and in which the cutting portion is a nonrolling cutter.


CLS 175/345
TXT Apparatus under subclass 344 in which the rolling cutter element is mounted
    on the bit head on an axis which extends in the same general direction as
    the axis of the bit.

    (1)     Note.  The cutter axis has been considered as extending in the
    general direction of the axis of the bit when it is disclosed as inclined
    to the axis of the bit at an angle of less than 30o.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    348+,   for a rolling cutter element mounted on a bit on a longitudinal
    axis.


CLS 175/346
TXT Apparatus under subclass 345 wherein the rolling cutter element is mounted
    on an axle which is supported on the bit by means of two or more spaced
    readily detachable supporting devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    363,    for a transverse axis rolling cutter element mounted on an axle
    which is supported on the bit by means of two or more spaced readily
    removable supporting devices.


CLS 175/347
TXT Apparatus under subclass 345 wherein the rolling cutter element is mounted
    on an axle or bushing which is removably fastened to the bit by a means
    which is readily detachable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    346,    for axles which are supported by a supporting device which
    supporting device is detachably connected to the bit.

    364,    for a transverse axis rolling cutter element which is mounted on an
    axle or bushing which is removably fastened to the bit.


CLS 175/348
TXT Apparatus under subclass 331 in which the rolling cutter element is mounted
    on the bit head on an axis which extends in the same general direction as
    the axis of the bit.

    (1)     Note.  The cutter may have cutting means on its periphery or on its
    radial face.

    (2)     Note.  The cutter axis has been considered longitudinal when it is
    disclosed as inclined to the axis of the bit at an angle of less than 30o.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    345+,   for rolling cutter reamers which are mounted on an axis extending
    longitudinally of the bit.


CLS 175/349
TXT Apparatus under subclass 348 in which an additional rolling cutter element
    is mounted on an axis extending transversely of the bit head.


CLS 175/350
TXT Apparatus under subclass 331 in which the axis of the rolling cutter
    element is offset from a radial vertical plane containing the longitudinal
    axis of the bit.

    (1)     Note.  The purpose of offsetting the cutter axis is to obtain a
    sliding or scraping cut but enough radial component is usually provided for
    the cutter axis to cause the cutters to roll as well as slide.


CLS 175/351
TXT Apparatus under subclass 350 in which the rolling cutter element comprises
    a cutting wheel having a smooth, unbroken, sharpened, cutting edge at its
    periphery.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes plural disk cutters mounted on
    different axes offset from each other as well as from the drill head axis.

    (2)     Note.  Bits employing only offset, serrated disks having a stepped
    or undulating edge have been treated as having a toothed cutting edge and
    are classified in subclass 350.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    373,    for earth boring cutter disks, per se, or with broadly recited
    supporting structure.


CLS 175/352
TXT Apparatus under subclass 351 in which an additional rolling cutter element
    is mounted generally coaxially with the disk cutter.

    (1)     Note.  The additional cutter may be a disk or a toothed cutter and
    may rotate either with respect to or in unison with the disk cutter, (e.g.,
    integral coaxial or spool cutters).


CLS 175/353
TXT Apparatus under subclass 350 in which the rolling cutter element comprises
    an axially elongated roller which tapers in diameter along its axis.


CLS 175/354
TXT Apparatus under subclass 331 in which the rolling cutter element is
    provided with a rotatably mounted supporting member which is integral
    therewith or fixed thereto to rotate therewith.

    (1)     Note.  The rotatable shaft or shank may have a plurality of cutting
    members secured thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    352,    for coaxial cutters which may be supported on a common rotary axis,
    the cutters being on a laterally offset axis and at least one cutter being
    a disk.


CLS 175/355
TXT Apparatus under subclass 331 comprising a plurality of rolling cutter
    elements in which the axis of one cutter element lies in a diametric plane
    containing the bit axis while the axis of another cutter element is
    disposed in a plane which is displaced from said diametric plane through an
    angle measured in a plane perpendicular to the bit axis.


CLS 175/356
TXT Apparatus under subclass 355 in which all of the cutter elements are
    journaled on a separate axle or pin supported at one end only in cantilever
    fashion.


CLS 175/357
TXT Apparatus under subclass 355 in which all of the cutter elements are
    journaled on a separate axle or pin supported by a frame, bracket, or
    securing means which is readily detachable from the bit head in such manner
    that all of the axles or pins may be detached simultaneously.


CLS 175/358
TXT Apparatus under subclass 355 in which all of the cutter elements are
    journaled on a separate axle or pin which intersect, abut, or otherwise
    engage each other under the bit head so as to support or brace each other.

    (1)     Note.  Additional brace means may be interposed between the head
    and the region of intersection or engagement of the cutter supports.


CLS 175/359
TXT Apparatus under subclass 358 provided with a specific bearing or seal
    structure.

    (1)     Note.  Since nearly all rolling cutter elements employ some form of
    bearing, nominally recited bearing structures as defined in (1) Note to
    subclass 371, have been excluded and the patent has been classified on the
    basis of the remaining features.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    371+,   for bearings and seals in other combinations with cutter structure
    and see the notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 358+ for a relatively rotatable radially extending
    sealing face member (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.) or subclasses 500+ or a
    dynamic circumferential contact seal for other than a piston.


CLS 175/360
TXT Apparatus under subclass 331 comprising a plurality of rolling cutter
    elements and in which one cutter is journaled on an axle or pin disposed
    transversely of the bit axis and which axle or pin is supported at spaced
    points and another rolling cutter element is journaled on an axle or pin
    supported at one end only and extending in cantilever fashion.

    (1)     Note.  The stub axle may be a continuation of the cross axle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    355,    357 and 358+, for rolling cutters on cross and stub axles which are
    circumferentially displaced in a horizontal plane about the bit axis.


CLS 175/361
TXT Apparatus under subclass 331 in which the rolling cutter element is
    journaled on an axle or pin disposed transversely of the bit axis and which
    axle or pin is supported at spaced points.

    (1)     Note.  The cross axle may consist of a plurality of stub axles
    connected together (for example, by a sleeve or by welding) to form a
    continuous axle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    356,    for stub axles which merely abut each other.


CLS 175/362
TXT Apparatus under subclass 361 comprising a plurality of rolling cutter
    elements disposed on axes which extend in a single diametric plane through
    the bit, and which are (1) angularly related to each other within the
    plane, or (2) offset vertically from each other within the plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    350+,   for cutters on laterally offset axes.

    355+,   for cutters on axes which are disposed in angularly related
    diametric planes.


CLS 175/363
TXT Apparatus under subclass 361 in which (1) one or more of the spaced
    supporting devices for the cross axle are readily detachable from the bit
    head to release the axle or (2) the bit head consists of plural mating
    sections which are readily detachable from each other to release the cross
    axle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    346,    for a rolling cutter element journaled on a longitudinal axle,
    which axle is supported at spaced points by readily removable supporting
    devices.

    357     and 366, for similar detachable supports for circumferentially
    displaced cutter axles and for stub axles, respectively.


CLS 175/364
TXT Apparatus under subclass 361 in which the axle is in the form of a pin,
    bearing or bushing which is removably fastened to the bit head by a means
    which is readily detached.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    354,    for detachable, rotatably mounted axles.

    363,    for cross axles which are supported by a member which is detachably
    connected to the head.

    367+,   for detachable stub axles.


CLS 175/365
TXT Apparatus under subclass 331 in which the rolling cutter element is
    journaled on axle or pin which is supported at its inner end only in
    cantilever fashion and extends radially away from the center of the bit
    head.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    356,    for stub axles which are circumferentially spaced and which may be
    outwardly directed.


CLS 175/366
TXT Apparatus under subclass 331 in which the rolling cutter element is
    journaled on an axle or pin supported at one end only in cantilever fashion
    on an arm, leg or bracket which is removably connected to the rest of the
    bit head by a means which is readily detachable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    357,    for plural circumferentially spaced rolling cutter elements
    journaled on separate axles or pins which are supported by a means which is
    readily detachable from the bit head to simultaneously detach all of the
    axles or pins.

    363,    for cross axle supports which are detachably connected to the bit
    head.


CLS 175/367
TXT Apparatus under subclass 331 in which the rolling cutter element is
    journaled on an axle or pin supported at one end only in cantilever
    fashion, said axle or pin being either (1) readily detachable, or (2)
    provided with a bearing or bushing which is readily detachable therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    364,    for cross axles which are removably connected to part of the bit.


CLS 175/368
TXT Apparatus under subclass 367 in which means are provided to secure the
    cutter element to the removable axle, pin, bushing or bearing and which is
    releasable to free the cutter element after the removal of the axle, pin,
    bushing or bearing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    369+,   for other releasable cutter securing devices.


CLS 175/369
TXT Apparatus under subclass 331 in which the rolling cutter element is
    journaled on an axle or pin, supported at one end only in cantilever
    fashion and provided with a particular means to rotatably secure the
    rolling cutter element with respect to the axle or pin.

    (1)     Note.  The securing means need not be releasable and may be
    intended to permanently secure the cutter to the stub axle (e.g., "snap
    connections"). Patents which merely recite that the cutter is "releasable"
    have been classified on the basis of other claimed features and
    cross-referenced into this subclass when appropriate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    368,    for releasable means to secure a rolling cutter to a detachable
    stub axle.


CLS 175/370
TXT Apparatus under subclass 369 in which the rolling cutter element is
    journaled on the axle or pin by a bearing having rolling elements which may
    be removed from their races to provided for removal of the rolling cutter
    element.


CLS 175/371
TXT Apparatus under subclass 331 provided with a specific bearing or seal
    structure.

    (1)     Note.  Since nearly all rolling cutters employ some form of
    bearing, nominally recited bearing structures have been excluded and such
    patents have been classified on the basis of the cutting features claimed.
    A claim reciting a "bearing sleeve", a "roller bearing", or a "ball bearing
    having inner and outer races" would be considered to involve a mere nominal
    recitation of bearing structure but patents claiming specific locations of
    bearings with respect to the cutters; specific bearing shape,
    characteristics or materials, or bearings which detachably secure the
    cutters to their axles have been considered to involve more than nominal
    bearing structure.  For example, a claim reciting "a bushing having a hard
    faced bearing surface" or "a pair of ball bearings engaging shoulders in
    the rolling cutter" would be classified in this or the indented subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359,    364, 367+, and 370, for bearing or seal structures of the type
    there provided.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 358+ for a relatively rotatable radially extending
    sealing face member (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.) or subclasses 500+ or a
    dynamic circumferential contact seal for other than a piston.

    384,    Bearings, subclass 94 for bearing structure with a seal which are
    adapted for use in roller type rock drill bits and only enough support
    structure for the bearing, the drill bit can be broadly recited as a
    support for the bearing but not details of cutting, teeth, etc.


CLS 175/372
TXT Apparatus under subclass 371 in which the bearing is an antifriction
    bearing employing rolling elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370,    for antifriction bearings which may be disassembled to release a
    rolling cutter from its support axle.


CLS 175/373
TXT Apparatus under subclass 331 in which the rolling cutter element comprises
    a wheel having an unbroken, sharpened cutting edge portion at its periphery.

    (1)     Note.  Serrated disks having a stepped or undulating edge have been
    treated as toothed cutting edge despite the fact that they may be termed
    "disks" in the claims and are classified on other structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    351     and 352, for disk cutters in a bit having laterally offset cutter
    axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 347 and the search there noted for rotary blade
    cutters of general utility.

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 604 for a disc earth working tool, per se.


CLS 175/374
TXT Apparatus under subclass 331 in which the bit or any portion thereof is
    composed of (1) two or more different materials, (2) a single material
    which has been treated to provide portions of the bit with specific
    properties which properties are different from the properties of another
    portion or (3) a specific material.

    (1)     Note.  The mere recitation under part (3) of metal, iron or steel,
    per se, is excluded.  However, specifying iron and steel or different types
    of iron or steel would be included under part (1).

    (2)     Note.  The specific material under part (3) may be identified by
    its properties (e.g., ductile, soft, hardened, etc.).

    (3)     Note.  Under part (1) a rolling cutter element having an insert
    connected thereto would be included since the cutter element and insert
    would normally be composed of diverse material.

    (4)     Note.  A bit provided with a welded, brazed or soldered joint is
    considered formed of diverse material and is classified under this
    definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    425+,   for a nonroller type bit composed of specific or diverse material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclasses 102 and 108.1+ for
    processes of making augers and drills usually of specific material.


CLS 175/375
TXT Apparatus under subclass 374 in which portions of the bit are connected
    together by (1) heating the parts to a plastic or fluid state and allowing
    the metals to flow together with or without the addition of other molten
    metal or (2) connecting the parts by means of melted or fluid metal (e.g.,
    solder).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes depositing weld material on a part of
    the bit as, for example, to form a wear surface or a cutting edge.

    (2)     Note.  The mere recitation in a claim that parts of a bit are
    connected has been included in this subclass provided there is a specific
    description that the connection has been formed in the manner set forth in
    the definition of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    376,    for a nonroller type bit having a welded portion.


CLS 175/376
TXT Apparatus under subclass 331 in which the external physical form or shape
    of the bit is such that the bit has (1) no more than one plane of bilateral
    symmetry passing through a line coinciding with the longitudinal axis of
    the drive shaft for the bit and (2) no radial symmetry about an axis
    coinciding with the longitudinal axis of the drive shaft for the bit.

    (1)     Note.  For the purposes of this subclass an element has bilateral
    symmetry when each part thereof lying on one side of a plane passing there
    through has a corresponding part lying on the opposite side of the plane at
    an equal distance from the plane and on a line through the parts and
    perpendicular to the plane.  An element has radial symmetry when it can be
    divided into a plurality of segments radially about the axis of symmetry
    each of which has the same shape and size and the sum of the radial angles
    of all the segments equal 360 degrees.

    (2)     Note.  Patents in which the claims would meet the terms of the
    definition of this subclass because only a portion of a specifically
    described bit has been claimed are excluded if the entire bit as described
    would not meet the terms of the definition.  Such patents have been
    classified on other features.

    (3)     Note.  The external form of the bit is considered to include the
    configuration and location of rolling cutter elements, cutting edges, fluid
    or cuttings conveying ports or the shape of the bit head, however, a lug or
    recess or opening for the purpose of connecting the parts of the bit or the
    bit to the drive shaft are not included, such as, for example, an opening
    for a single set screw or a flat on the bit head to be received in a
    socket.  Also, the internal shape of fluid, cuttings or core conveying
    passages are not included.  Also, not included is structure where the sole
    nonsymmetrical feature of the bit resides in the shape or position of teeth
    or cutting edges on the individual rolling cutters, if all the rolling
    cutters are identical in shape and size and are symmetrically arranged on
    the bit head.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    341,    for a nonsymmetrical rolling cutter bit in which the cutter edges
    on one roller cutter intermesh with the cutting edges of an adjacent roller
    cutter.

    378,    for a rolling cutter element, per se, with irregular tooth rows.

    398+,   for a nonsymmetrical nonroller type bit.


CLS 175/377
TXT Apparatus under subclass 331 in which the rolling cutter element is
    provided with a portion which has a cutting edge or edges arranged along a
    line or series of lines extending around the circumference of the element
    and simultaneously extending in a direction along the axis of the cutter
    element (e.g., helical).


CLS 175/378
TXT Apparatus under subclass 331 in which the rolling cutter element has (1) a
    row of circumferential cutting edges of nonuniform size, shape, or pitch or
    other cutting edge arrangements (e.g., spacing) which are adapted to
    prevent repeated engagement or "tracking" of the cutting edges with the
    same point on the earth formation or (2) a plurality of circumferential
    rows of cutting edges and in which there is an abrupt change in shape or
    pitch between adjacent rows.

    (1)     Note.  Under part (2) a mere gradual change in size or shape of the
    cutting edges to allow for the taper of the cutter element is excluded.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 104.13 for pipe
    cleaning cutter wheels which have irregularly spaced teeth for the same
    purpose.


CLS 175/379
TXT Apparatus under subclass 327 in which the bit is provided with (1)
    relatively movable parts which are adapted to move during operation to
    provide a new cutting edge or (2) a body in the form of repeating similar
    structure extending longitudinally of the bit such that a new cutting edge
    is provided when the original cutter edge becomes worn.

    (1)     Note.  Under part (2) a mere homogeneous bit body which inherently
    wears away is excluded, some specific repeating structure, such as for
    example, separate defined layers of specific material, symmetrically
    arranged apertures in the bit body or a cutter element combined with a
    backing member made of different material such that as the cutter element
    and backing member wear an effective cutting edge will be provided, is
    necessary for classification under this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331+,   for rolling cutter bits having plural cutting edges which are used
    successively and continuously.

    382+,   for adjustable cutter elements which are not adjustable during
    operation and particularly subclass 383 in which the adjustment is for the
    purpose of presenting a different cutting edge.

    409,    for a homogeneous bit-body made of some specific abrasive resistant
    material.


CLS 175/380
TXT Apparatus under subclass 327 in which the bit is particularly adapted to
    receive and restrain unsupported abrasive particles between its outer end
    and the bore bottom, said particles forming the cutting edge of the bit.

    (1)     Note.  For classification under this definition the abrasive
    particles must be described as separate elements such as shot or other
    pellets insertable into the bore.  Drilled chip particles which may
    incidentally function to disintegrate the formation are excluded.

    (2)     Note.  The abrasive particles need not be claimed for
    classification in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for shot or pellets which are recirculated by the drilling fluid
    and act or aid in disintegrating the formation.


CLS 175/381
TXT Apparatus under subclass 327 in which the bit is provided with a plurality
    of cutter elements or cutting edges which elements or edges are connected
    to the bit in such a manner as to permit axial movement of one cutter
    element or cutting edge relative to another during normal operation of the
    bit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    319,    and the search there noted for other devices having relatively
    moving plural cutting edges.


CLS 175/382
TXT Apparatus under subclass 327 in which the bit is provided with a movable
    cutter element and means to selectively hold said cutter element in
    different positions with respect to the bit head.

    (1)     Note.  A mere clamp which cooperates with a member such that by
    loosening the clamp the member could be set in any desired position and
    reclamped is not considered to be adjustable. However, any specific
    structure such as selectively usable apertures, teeth, slots, etc., for the
    purpose of permitting the selective change of the relative positions of two
    parts is included under this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263+,   for cutter elements laterally shiftable below ground.

    342,    for an adjustable rolling cutter bit.

    379,    for cutting elements which are renewable during operation.

    381,    for plural cutting edges which are relatively longitudinally
    movable during operation.

    412+,   for cutter elements detachably mounted in a bit head by means of
    clamps or other securing devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 734+ for an adjustable earth working tool.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 186+ for
    an adjustable tool of that class type.


CLS 175/383
TXT Apparatus under subclass 382 in which the cutter element may be selectively
    held in different positions for the purpose of placing a different cutting
    edge in operative position for engaging the formation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    379,    for a cutter element adjustable during operation to present a new
    cutting edge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 735 for an earth working tool which is
    adjustable to present different working portions.


CLS 175/384
TXT Apparatus under subclass 382 in which the cutter element is adapted to be
    selectively held in different positions for the purpose of increasing the
    circular outline of the cutting edge as the bit is rotated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202,    for devices operable from the surface to control position of tool
    or cutter element.

    263+,   for a cutter element which is laterally shiftable during operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 741+ for a laterally adjustable earth
    working tool.


CLS 175/385
TXT Apparatus under subclass 327 in which the bit is provided with a leading or
    pilot cutting edge or portion which forms a first bore of definable
    diameter, and a trailing cutting edge which increases the diameter of the
    first bore so that the boring outline of the bit will describe at least one
    peripheral axial step.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334+,   for rolling cutter bits with a leading cutter forming a smaller
    diameter initial bore.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 195,
    196, 211, 212, 215+, and 223+ for a cutting tool of that class type having
    a leading pilot or cutting edge.


CLS 175/386
TXT Apparatus under subclass 385 in which the leading or pilot portion
    comprises a readily removable starter element for cooperating with the
    trailing portion to form a shallow, accurately positioned bore, the
    trailing portion then being described as usable independently of the
    starter element to continue the boring operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248,    for similar structure comprising a core receiver removable through
    a below ground drill string.


CLS 175/387
TXT Apparatus under subclass 385 in which the leading or pilot portion has a
    cutter element or cutting edge so arranged that the bit makes an annular
    cut in the formation, leaving a central undisturbed portion of the
    formation in the form of a cylinder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403+,   and the search there noted for other core forming type bits.


CLS 175/388
TXT Apparatus under subclass 385 in which the leading or pilot portion
    describes a helical convolution, said convolution extending through at
    least 180o.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    394+,   and the search there noted for other helical boring structure.


CLS 175/389
TXT Apparatus under subclass 385 in which the cutting edges of the bit are of
    the type which disintegrate the formation by percussive action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    346+,   for an impact type bit, per se.


CLS 175/390
TXT Apparatus under subclass 389 in which the cutting edges of the impact bit
    are arranged so that the boring outline of the bit will describe at least
    two peripheral axial steps.


CLS 175/391
TXT Apparatus under subclass 385 in which the cutting edges of the bit are
    arranged so that the boring outline of the bit will describe at least two
    peripheral axial steps.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    390,    for impact type bits which describe plural larger diameter steps.


CLS 175/392
TXT Apparatus under subclass 385 comprising a rotary bit in which the leading
    or pilot portion is provided with two or more axially extending branches
    terminating in cutting edges.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    387,    for bits having a core forming leading portion, and generally
    defining axial leading branches.

    421,    and the search there noted for bits having axially extending
    branches terminating in cutting edges.


CLS 175/393
TXT Apparatus under subclass 327 in which the bit is provided with means to
    conduct fluid comprising (1) a coated or treated passage or (2) a distinct
    element which is limited in use to fluid conducting, directing or blocking
    a fluid passage.

    (1)     Note.  Under (2) of the definition, only those fluid conducting
    elements are included which do not form fundamental parts of the bit
    structure (e.g., a fluid conducting element which also functions to attach
    or connect cutter elements to a bit head or tool shaft is classified with
    the bit or cutter structure).

    (2)     Note.  The fluid conducting element may form only a portion of the
    wall of the fluid conduit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    339+,   and the search there noted for other drilling fluid nozzle or
    conduit details and particularly subclass 340 for a removable nozzle or
    conduit element in a roller cutter bit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclass 81 for
    a cutter head for mining or disintegrating hard material having an internal
    fluid passage.


CLS 175/394
TXT Apparatus under subclass 327 in which the bit is provide with a screw
    shaped surface extending axially thereof for conveying cuttings away from
    the end of the bit, said screw shaped surface extending through a
    convolution of at least 180o.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310,    for receptacles with helical conveying structure.

    323,    for a tool shaft provided with an external helix or conveyor.

    388,    for bits having a screw pilot.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 157 for an auger type
    earth anchor.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclass 87.1
    for a cutter head for mining or disintegrating hard material having a
    helical cutting or conveying portion.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclass 230 for a
    twist drill of general utility.


CLS 175/395
TXT Apparatus under subclass 394 in which the cutting edge of the bit is of the
    type which is adapted to disintegrate the formation by percussive action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    414+,   for impact type bits, per se.


CLS 175/396
TXT Apparatus under subclass 327 in which the bit includes a portion laterally
    spaced from the axis of the bit, and substantially parallel to said axis,
    and another portion substantially perpendicular to said first portion, said
    other portion extending from said first portion toward said axis, said
    portions being specifically described as adapted to lift cut material from
    the borehole.

    (1)     Note.  The function of retaining cuttings must be specifically
    described and not left to inference.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    308+,   and the subclasses there noted for receptacles and receptacle like
    structures.


CLS 175/397
TXT Apparatus under subclass 327 comprising a rotary type bit having a
    plurality of axially extending cutter elements or cutting edges which
    elements or edges contact the bottom of the bore and are spaced radially
    different distances from the longitudinal axis of rotation so that as the
    bit is rotated a portion of a cutter element or cutting edge engages a
    portion of the bore bottom not engaged by any other cutter element or
    cutting edge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258,    for a bit having a noncutting portion forwardly of a cutting
    portion.

    376,    for a roller bit having nontracking cutting edges.

    385+,   for a bit including a leading portion (e.g., pilot) forming a
    smaller diameter initial bore.

    421,    for symmetrical inwardly stepped forked rotary type.


CLS 175/398
TXT Apparatus under subclass 327 in which the external physical form or shape
    of the bit is such that the bit has (1) no more than one plane of bilateral
    symmetry passing through a line coinciding with the longitudinal axis of
    the drive shaft for the bit and (2) no radial symmetry about an axis
    coinciding with the longitudinal axis of the drive shaft for the bit.

    (1)     Note.  For the purposes of this subclass an element has bilateral
    symmetry when each part thereof lying on one side of a plane passing
    therethrough has a corresponding part lying on the opposite side of the
    plane at an equal distance from the plane and on a line through the parts
    and perpendicular to the plane.  An element has radial symmetry when it can
    be divided into a plurality of segments radially about the axis of symmetry
    each of which has the same shape and size and the sum of the radial angles
    of all the segments equals 360 degrees.

    (2)     Note.  Patents in which the claims would meet the terms of the
    definition of this subclass because only a portion of a specifically
    described bit has been claimed are excluded if the entire bit as described
    would not meet the terms of the definition.  Such patents have been
    classified on other features.

    (3)     Note.  The external form of the bit is considered to include the
    configuration and location of cutter elements, cutting edges, fluid or
    cuttings conveying ports or the shape of the bit head, however, a lug or
    recess or opening for the purpose of connecting the parts of the bit or the
    bit to the drive shaft are not included, such as, for example, an opening
    for a single set screw or a flat on the bit head to be received in a
    socket.  Also the internal shape of fluid, cuttings or core conveying
    passages are not included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    376,    for a nonsymmetrical roller type bit.

    394+,   for a bit having a helical conveying portion.

    397,    for a forked rotary nontracking bit.


CLS 175/399
TXT Apparatus under subclass 398 in which the bit is provided with means
    engaging the wall of the bore being formed to position the bit or direct
    its course.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this subclass the guide means must be
    an element other than the body of the bit which may incidentally function
    as a guide.  However, a modification of the bit body to provide ribs,
    projections or the like which are specifically described as positioning or
    directing the bit are included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73+,    for bore wall engaging guides which act to constrain the tool to
    bore along a curved path.

    408,    and the search there noted for a bit provided with a bore wall
    engaging guide.


CLS 175/400
TXT Apparatus under subclass 398 in which the bit is provided with one or more
    openings to permit the ingress or egress of either fluid or formation
    cuttings, the arrangement of the opening or openings with respect to the
    longitudinal axis of the drive shaft for the bit being nonsymmetrical both
    bilaterally and radially as required by the definition of subclass 398.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this subclass the arrangement of the
    fluid or cuttings openings themselves must be nonsymmetrical regardless of
    whether or not the remainder of the bit is nonsymmetrical.  Thus a bit
    which is nonsymmetrical in shape but has a central opening on the shaft
    axis or a plurality of equally spaced openings about the shaft axis is not
    included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231,    for means movable relative to a tool to control eccentric fluid
    emission.


CLS 175/401
TXT Apparatus under subclass 327 in which the bit is provided with
    longitudinally spaced cutting edges, the cutting edges at one spacing
    facing in one axial direction and the cutting edges at a different spacing
    facing in the opposite axial direction of the bit.


CLS 175/402
TXT Apparatus under subclass 327 in which the bit is of the type commonly
    called "casing shoe", and which is adapted to be positioned on the end of a
    tubular conduit to facilitate the entry of such conduit into a preformed
    bore by reaming or cutting any projections on the bore wall by means of
    cutting edges provided on said shoe.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this subclass the device must be
    specifically described as a casing shoe and not left to inference.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403+    and the search there noted for a bit specifically described for
    forming a core.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclass 242.8 for a casing shoe which has no cutting or
    reaming function.


CLS 175/403
TXT Apparatus under subclass 327 in which the cutter element or cutting edge of
    the bit is so arranged that the bit makes an annular cut in the formation
    and leaves a central undisturbed portion of the formation in the form of a
    cylinder.

    (1)     Note.  Patents which specifically describe forming a core of the
    earth formation have been classified in this subclass even though the
    claims do not recite the forming of a core.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for processes or devices in which a core receiver is driven into a
    formation by an explosive.

    244+    and the search there noted for a core forming type bit combined
    with means movable relative thereto to receive, retain, or sever an
    undisturbed core.

    332+,   for a rolling cutter bit of the core forming type.

    387,    for a bit with a leading or pilot portion forming a smaller
    diameter initial bore in which the leading or pilot portion is core forming
    type.

    402,    for similar structure described for use as a casing shoe.

    405.1,  for a core forming type bit including diamond as a specific
    material.

    421,    for a forked rotary bit having structure which may permit the
    formation of a core.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 864.44+ for a sampling and
    tolling implement.

    125,    Stone Working, subclass 20 for disk cutting saws for stone working.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 204+ for
    annular drills.


CLS 175/404
TXT Apparatus under subclass 403 in which the bit is further provided with
    means to disintegrate the undisturbed cylindrical portion of the formation
    after it has been formed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249+,   for undisturbed core retaining or severing means.

    333,    for a rolling cutter bit of the core forming type having core
    breaking means.


CLS 175/405
TXT Apparatus under subclass 403 in which the cutting edge of the bit is of the
    type which is adapted to disintegrate the formation by a forceful contact
    or a repetitive striking action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for core tubes driven into a formation by an explosion.

    414+,   for impact type bits, per se.


CLS 175/405.1
TXT Includes diamond:
    Apparatus under subclass 403 in which the cutter element or cutting edge of
    the bit contains the very hard crystalline form of the element carbon.


CLS 175/406
TXT Apparatus under subclass 327 in which the cutter element or cutting edge is
    carried on a bit which has a portion extending inwardly towards the axis of
    the bit and forwardly of the cutter element or cutting edge in the
    direction of boring and which has no cutting function.

    (1)     Note.  The noncutting portion can be located between claimed
    cutting portions and patents which claim cutting portions spaced
    longitudinally of the bore axis will be classified in this subclass even
    though no noncutting portion is specifically recited.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    295,    for a device having a noncutting portion forwardly of a sleeve
    impact member having a cutting portion thereon.

    311,    for receptacle suspended below a bit.

    344+,   for a bit having a noncutting portion forwardly of a cutting
    portion and in which the cutting portion is a rolling cutter.

    385+,   for bits having a leading or pilot portion forming a smaller
    diameter bore ahead of a trailing larger diameter cutting portion.

    401,    for reamers having additional upwardly directed cutting edges.

    404,    for a bit having a noncutting portion forwardly of a cutting
    portion, and in which the cutting portion is positioned within a core bit
    and functions as a core breaking means.


CLS 175/407
TXT Apparatus under subclass 406 in which the cutting edge of the bit is of the
    type which is adapted to disintegrate the formation by percussive action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    389+,   for impact type bit with leading portion forming smaller diameter
    bore.

    414+,   for impact type bits, per se.


CLS 175/408
TXT Apparatus under subclass 327 provided with (1) means on the bit for
    centralizing or stabilizing the bit in the bore or (2) a device to smooth
    or compress together the material which makes up the wall surface of the
    bore.

    (1)     Note.  For classification under this definition the guide or
    compacting device must be an element other than the body of the bit which
    may incidentally function as a guide or compacting device.  However, a
    modification of the bit body such as ribs or projections which are
    disclosed as for the purpose set forth herein is classified under this
    definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    325.1+  and the search there noted for tool shafts having bore wall
    engaging means.

    394,    for a bit provided with a peripheral helical conveying portion
    which incidentally functions as a bit guide.

    399,    for a nonsymmetrical bit provided with a bore wall engaging guide.

    406+,   for a bit having a noncutting portion forwardly of the cutting
    portion, and in which said noncutting portion functions as a guide.


CLS 175/412
TXT Apparatus under subclass 327 in which the bit is provided with two or more
    cutter elements, said elements being detachably secured to the bit head.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331+,   for plural separable rolling cutter elements.

    382+,   for detachably mounted cutter elements which are adjustable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 199+.


CLS 175/413
TXT Apparatus under subclass 412 in which each cutter element can be separately
    attached or detached from the bit head without attaching or detaching the
    other elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331+,   for plural separable rolling cutter elements in which the rolling
    cutters are independently attachable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 446+ for cutting edges attachable to an
    excavating scoop.


CLS 175/414
TXT Apparatus under subclass 327 in which the cutting edge of the bit is of the
    type which is adapted to disintegrate the formation by a forceful contact
    or a repetitive striking action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19+,    for drive points which are driven into the earth usually by impact.

    389+,   for impact bits having a leading portion forming a smaller diameter
    initial bore.

    395,    for an impact type bit provided with a helical cuttings conveying
    portion.

    398+,   for a nonsymmetrical impact type bit.

    405,    for a core forming impact type bit.

    407,    for an impact type bit provided with a noncutting portion forwardly
    of the cutting portion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    125,    Stone Working, subclasses 40+ for impact type tools for working on
    stone after it has been removed from its position in the earth.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclass 100 for
    a percussive cutter head for mining or disintegrating hard material.


CLS 175/415
TXT Apparatus under subclass 414 in which the cutting edge is formed to
    disintegrate the formation as a result of simultaneous rotary and a
    forceful contact or a repetitive striking action.

    (1)     Note.  The dual function of formation disintegrating by rotary and
    percussive or impact action must be specifically described for
    classification in this subclass and not left to inference.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331+,   for rolling cutters which roll on the bottom of the bore and impact
    the formation due to the rolling motion.


CLS 175/416
TXT Apparatus under subclass 414 in which the bit is formed so as to normally
    cut a hole which is noncircular in cross section.

    (1)     Note.  The bit must be specifically disclosed as cutting a hole of
    noncircular cross section for classification in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tools, subclass 30 for a
    wood boring bit adapted to bore a noncircular hole.


CLS 175/417
TXT Apparatus under subclass 414 in which the bit is provided with a drilling
    fluid passage enclosed within the body of the bit and having an inlet or
    exhaust port opening to the outside of the bit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    339+    and 393, for a bit provided with a lined fluid passage or where the
    fluid passage includes a nozzle.

    405,    for a core forming impact type bit.


CLS 175/418
TXT Apparatus under subclass 417 in which the passage has a plurality of inlet
    or exhaust ports.


CLS 175/419
TXT Apparatus under subclass 417 comprising a plurality of cutting edges which
    lie in perpendicular planes intersecting at a line coinciding with the
    longitudinal axis of the bit.


CLS 175/420
TXT Apparatus under subclass 414 comprising a plurality of cutting edges which
    lie in perpendicular planes intersecting at a line coinciding with the
    longitudinal axis of the bit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    419,    for a cruciform bit provided with a fluid passage.


CLS 175/420.1
TXT Insert:
    Apparatus under subclass 414 in which the cutting edge of the bit is formed
    of a relatively small element of abrasive resistant material which is
    inserted in a slot or aperture in the bit and secured therein.


CLS 175/420.2
TXT Includes diamond:
    Structure under subclass 420.1 including diamond as a specific material.



CLS 175/421
TXT Apparatus under subclass 327 comprising a rotary type bit provided with at
    least two axially extending branches terminating in cutting edges, the
    configuration of said axially extending branches and cutting edges being
    such that (1) more than one plane of bilateral symmetry may be passed
    through an axis coinciding with the rotary axis of the bit or (2) radial
    symmetry is presented about an axis coinciding with the rotary axis of the
    bit.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note of subclass 398 for definition of bilateral and
    radial symmetry.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331+,   for a rolling cutter bit in which the rolling cutters form axially
    extending branches.

    392,    for a rotary bit having a forked forwardly extending portion
    forming a smaller diameter initial bore.

    397,    for a nontracking rotary type bit having axially extending branches
    terminating in cutting edges.

    398+,   for a nonsymmetrical forked bit.

    403+    and the search there noted for a core type bit having axially
    extending symmetrical forked portions.

    414+,   for an impact type bit comprising axially extending, symmetrical
    branches terminating in cutting edges.


CLS 175/423
TXT WEDGING SLIP ASSEMBLY FOR SUPPORTING A PIPE OR ROD:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a tapered clasping
    structure, when lowered into an opening in a separate hole drilling related
    structure, e.g., a spider or rotary table, is cammed into gripping and
    suspending engagement with a drilling tube or stem passing through the
    opening.

    (1)     Note.  The slip usually temporarily suspends a string of connected
    pipes or rods during the attaching or detaching of different sections to
    the string which is being lowered into or taken out of a drill hole.

    (2)     Note.  The earth boring tool itself is usually not claimed.

    (3)     Note.  Details of the separate hole drilling related structure may
    not be claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255,    for earth boring or penetrating means including core retaining
    means of the sliding wedge type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., particularly subclass 114.5 for a
    strap cable, or pipe button, i.e., a trip or stop projection.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, particularly subclasses 831+ and 856+ for
    clamping, holding or supporting structure peculiar to or having a sole
    disclosure for use in specimen measuring and testing.

    74,     Machines Element or Mechanism, particularly subclasses 144+ for an
    intermittent gripping device for moving a member (e.g., a polish rod); and
    subclasses 579+ for a pitman or connecting rod and its gripping device.

    166,    Wells, particularly subclasses 75.11+ for above ground apparatus
    for wells including slips for well pipes or casings which are not involved
    in the drilling of the well and are more permanent in nature; and
    subclasses 206+ for an expansible anchor or casing.  See the class
    definition of Class 175, section III for the line between Classes 166 and
    175.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, particularly subclasses 213+ for a
    structure which grips and rotates a pipe or rod to move it into and out of
    a material.

    188,    Brakes, particularly subclass 67 for a brake mechanically connected
    to a relatively stationary structure and which holds a pipe or rod at
    various locations along the pipe's or rod's length for short, quick linear
    assembly or disassembly during a work or manufacturing operation, or
    preparatory to a working operation, done by the pipe, rod, or a pipe
    supported tool.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, appropriate subclasses for rack structure which
    supports an article against the pull of gravity or holds it in a storage
    position.

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses for structure which supports an
    article against the pull of gravity or holds it in a storage position.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    appropriate subclasses for a clasp attached to a work pushing or pulling
    implement or apparatus.

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses for a clamp which hold an
    article (e.g., a pipe or rod) while modifying work is done on it, or while
    a plurality of articles are being located in an assembled arrangement.

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, appropriate subclasses for a chuck or socket
    which grips a pipe, rod, or tool which is intended to be rotated or
    repeatedly reciprocated by an unclaimed power boring source.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, appropriate subclasses for pipe joints or
    couplings for drilling shafts and subclasses 123.15+ and 123.3+, in
    particular, for pipe joints or couplings for well related pipes or casings
    through which fluid may flow.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, particularly subclasses
    86+ and 102 for a grapple which is disclosed for gripping articles (e.g.,
    well pipes or rods) being moved between two locations by either a hand or
    cable lifting force.


CLS 175/424
TXT MISCELLANEOUS (E.G., EARTH-BORING NOZZLE):

    Subject matter under the class definition not provided for in other
    subclasses.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, drill motor housing
    guide saddles and an art collection of nozzles peculiarly adapted to boring
    in the earth by fluid flow or jetting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11+,    for heat applying nozzles.

    220,    for guide saddles combined with an above ground guide for a
    relatively advancing tool.

    327+,   for a bit or bit element having a nozzle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 322 and 323 for suction type dredges with
    jet diggers.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 222+ for whirling or lateral discharge or
    projectable nozzles for use in a well.

    173,    Tool Drive or Impacting, subclasses 197+ and see the search notes
    therein for a tool driving or impacting means provided with a work
    cleansing means and including a fluid nozzle.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses
    for nozzles of general utility.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 248 for pile installation
    utilizing a fluid discharge nozzle.


CLS 175/425
TXT Specific or diverse material:
    Apparatus under subclass 327 in which the bit or any portion thereof is
    composed of either (1) two different materials, (2) a single material which
    has been treated to provide portions of the bit with specific properties
    which are different from the properties of another portion or (3) a
    particular material to which significance is attributed.

    (1)     Note.  Under part (3), the mere recitation of iron or steel, per
    se, is excluded. However, specifying both iron and steel would be included
    under part (1).

    (2)     Note.  Under part (3), a specific material need not be named as
    such but may be identified by its properties (e.g., ductile, malleable,
    hardened).

    (3)     Note.  A bit provided with a welded brazed or soldered joint is
    considered to be formed of diverse materials.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332+,   for a core forming roller type bit.

    339+    and 393, for a bit having a nozzle or slush tube which may be made
    of a specific material or a material different from the bit.

    374+,   for a rolling cutter bit made of a specific material.

    403+,   for a core forming type bit.

    428+,   for a compact.

    420.2,  for an impact type bit including diamonds.

    434,    for a bit including a diamond.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, for an
    abrasive tool making process, material, or composition of general utility.

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclasses 102 and 108.1 for
    processes of making augers and drills usually of specific materials.

    125,    Stone Working, appropriate subclasses for stone working tools
    including diamond material, and particularly subclass 30.01 for precious
    stone working and subclass 39 for diamond, surface traversing tools.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 544+ for stock
    material or intermediate articles which are all metal or have adjacent
    metal components, including specific materials used in drill bits, where no
    specific drill-bit structure is claimed.


CLS 175/426
TXT Insert:
    Apparatus under subclass 425 in which the cutting edge of the bit is a
    relatively small element of abrasion resistant material which is at least
    partially enclosed within a slot or aperture in the bit and secured therein.


CLS 175/427
TXT For a mine roof drill bit type:
    Apparatus under subclass 426 where the insert is in a cutting tooth secured
    with connecting  means to a cutter head for obtaining solid state valuable
    minerals.


CLS 175/428
TXT Preformed cutting element (e.g., compact) mounted on a distinct support
    (e.g., blank, stud, shank):Structure under subclass 426 where the insert
    comprises an earth contacting portion that is fixed to a backing or
    substructure which is then placed in the bit aperture.


CLS 175/429
TXT Including a nozzle:
    Structure under subclass 428 which is combined with a fluid spraying means.


CLS 175/430
TXT Having a Noncircular or nonplanar cutting face:
    Structure under subclass 428 in which the earth contacting portions either
    (1) defines a line or curve which is other than circular or (2) includes
    points which are not coplanar.

    (1)     Note.  A circle with a notch is considered noncircular and a
    cutting face in the form of a sine wave is considered nonplanar.


CLS 175/431
TXT Having a particular orientation or location:
    Structure under subclass 428 where significance is attributed to (1) the
    compact's alignment or (2) the arrangement of both the compact and support.

    (1)     Note.  The aligment would include the rake angle.


CLS 175/432
TXT With support detail:
    Structure under subclass 428 in which significance is attributed to a
    structural feature of the backing or substructure portion.


CLS 175/433
TXT Having a specified thermal property:
    Structure under subclass 428 wherein a property of the compact or support
    material has a specific temperature or temperature range.


CLS 175/434
TXT Diamond:
    Apparatus under subclass 425 in which the very hard, crystallized form of
    the element carbon, commonly called a "diamond" is included as a specific
    material in the structure of the bit.


CLS 175/435
TXT Welded, brazed, or soldered:
    Apparatus under subclass 425 in which portions of the bit are connected
    together by (1) locally heating the parts to a fluid state and allowing the
    base metals to flow together with or without the addition of other molten
    metal or (2) connecting the parts by means of a dissimilar fluid metal
    having a lower melting point.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes depositing weld material on a part of
    the bit as, for example, to form a wear surface or a cutting edge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    375,    for a rolling cutter bit having a welded portion.

    434,    for diamond bits including welding.


CLS 177/
TTL WEIGHING SCALES

CLS 177/
TXT This class provides for (1) scales that determine the weight of articles or
    material, (2) the control of the supply of material to, with or without the
    discharge from, a weigh chamber responsive to accumulation of a
    predetermined weight of the material in the weigh chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 458 for a changeable
    exhibitor operated or controlled by a weigher.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 296 for a weighing type liquid
    level gauge, and 433+, for specific gravity or density determination with a
    weighing feature.  See the notes to Class 73 for the distribution of
    measuring and testing art.

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 280+ for automatic weighers controlling the
    feed of tobacco to cigar or cigarette machines.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 161 and 162 for a gravitating vessel
    controlling a fluid pressure system and subclasses 403+ for a fluid
    handling system controlled by the weight accumulated fluid.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    appropriate subclasses for a weigher-receiver organization with handling in
    addition to supplying or removing receivers, or treatment subsequent to
    completion of a weighing phase, particularly subclass 83 for mere
    determination of weight of contents of a receiver.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 155.7 for a metal casting apparatus
    including control means influenced by a weight sensor.

    194,    Check-Actuated Control Mechanisms, subclasses 21, 35 and 47 for
    other check controlled weighing scales, and subclass 103 for the rejection
    of coins of improper weight.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 959 for a conveyor having a
    weighing feature wherein there is some moving of the material besides that
    necessary to the weighing operation.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 510+,
    592+, and 645+ for means for automatically sorting articles by weight, and
    subclass 239 for sifting with weighing.

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclass 283 for a traversing hoist with a
    weighing means which accomplishes more than the mere lifting and weighing
    of the load.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 55 for constant feed from a dispenser
    responsive to the weight of unrestrained material already discharged,
    subclass 58 for means responsive to the weight of material in a container
    for controlling its discharge, and subclass 77 for weighing-dispensing
    combinations involving means to weigh material already dispensed.

    346,    Recorders, subclass 94 for a recorder operated by a weigher wherein
    there is included only so much of the weigher as is necessary to operate
    the recorder.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 567 for
    calculating the weight of an object which includes electrical computing
    means and only nominal claim recitation to the weight means.

    366,    Agitating, subclass 18 for mortar mixing devices including means
    for proportioning ingredients by weight, and subclass 141 for agitation
    with weighing.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 14 for thermal gravimetric
    analysis.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclasses 23+ and 32+ for a fluid
    current conveyor including a weighing feature wherein there is some
    movement of the material besides that necessary to the weighing operation.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 21 for weighing with
    handling of that class more than that necessary to the weighing operation.

    705,    Data Processing: Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/price Determination, subclass 407, for a postage meter system
    including (a) a weighing device to determine the weight of an article and
    (b) an electrical computing arrangement to calculate a postage fee based on
    the determined weight;and subclasses 414+, for determining the cost per
    unit weight of a material by an electrical computing arrangement.

    D10,    Measuring, Testing, or Signalling Instruments, subclasses 87+ for
    design of weighing machines.


CLS 177/1
TXT Processes under the class definition.


CLS 177/2
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including means for making a
    permanent record of the weighing operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, subclasses 9+ and 40 for a recorder for a weigher.


CLS 177/3
TXT Apparatus under subclass 2 including means for totalizing the amount
    measured or for producing a record in units other than of mass or force.


CLS 177/4
TXT Apparatus under subclass 2 wherein a record other than of the weight value
    is produced.


CLS 177/5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 4 wherein the additional record is of other
    information associated with the material weighed.


CLS 177/6
TXT Apparatus under subclass 2 whereby records of tare and gross weight are
    associated.


CLS 177/7
TXT Apparatus under subclass 2 wherein the recorder is actuated by means
    sensing removal of the weighed mass or its weigh chamber.


CLS 177/8
TXT Apparatus under subclass 2 including means whereby the record receiver is
    advanced through the recorder.


CLS 177/9
TXT Apparatus under subclass 8 wherein the means is the weigher.


CLS 177/10
TXT Apparatus under subclass 2 wherein the weight record is made by an
    independently operating operator.


CLS 177/11
TXT Device under subclass 10 wherein an element of the recorder is mounted on a
    slidable poise.


CLS 177/12
TXT Apparatus under subclass 2 wherein the recorder is actuated by timing means
    or means sensing the completion of the weighing operation.


CLS 177/13
TXT Apparatus under subclass 2 including weigher operated means setting record
    printing type.


CLS 177/14
TXT Apparatus under the class definition provided with means to limit the
    number of filling and discharging cycles of the weigher.


CLS 177/15
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a counting or totalizing
    device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for totalizing and recording.


CLS 177/16
TXT Apparatus under subclass 15 wherein the quantity of material flowed over a
    weigher is totalized by a means relating the continuous weigher reading to
    the material stream length.


CLS 177/17
TXT Apparatus under subclass 15 including means for adding together successive
    distinct weight value indications.


CLS 177/18
TXT Apparatus under subclass 15 which is responsive to the number of times the
    weigher is operated.


CLS 177/19
TXT Apparatus under subclass 18 wherein the totalizer is responsive to each of
    a plurality of weigh chambers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for totalizing the weight value of successive loads.


CLS 177/20
TXT Apparatus under subclass 19 wherein operation of the totalizer is preceded
    by preliminary translation of the weighing chambers in a rotary type
    weigher.


CLS 177/21
TXT Apparatus under subclass 19 wherein the totalizer is responsive to one of a
    plurality of weigh chambers said one being intermittently involved in a
    plurality of weighing operations.


CLS 177/22
TXT Apparatus under subclass 18 operated by the oscillations of a weigh beam.


CLS 177/23
TXT Apparatus under subclass 18 operated by movement of a weigh chamber
    discharge valve.


CLS 177/24
TXT Apparatus under subclass 18 operated by movement of a weigh chamber.


CLS 177/25.11
TXT Computer:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising means which gives the
    result of a mathematical operation involving the weight evaluator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 567 for
    determining the weight of an object by electrical computing means.

    705,    Data Processing: Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/price Determination, subclass 407, for a postage meter system
    including (a) a weighing device to determine the weight of an article and
    (b) an electrical computing arrangement to calculate a postage fee based on
    the determined weight;and subclasses 414+, for determining the cost per
    unit weight of a material by an electrical computing arrangement.


CLS 177/25.12
TXT Electrical:

    Apparatus under subclass 25.11 where the mathematical operation is
    performed by an electrical or electronic devices.


CLS 177/25.13
TXT Digital:

    Apparatus under subclass 25.12 where the electrical or electronic devices
    performs the mathematical operation using discrete data, (e.g., by means of
    a microprocessor or other electronic calculating means, acquired through an
    analog to digital conversion means).


CLS 177/25.14
TXT Multiplying or dividing scales:

    Apparatus under 25.13 where the mathematical operation includes multiplying
    or dividing the results of a weighing operation by user determined input(s).


CLS 177/25.15
TXT Price:

    Apparatus under subclass 25.14 where the user input is unit price
    information, used to determined the total cost of the material being
    weighed (e.g., grocery store or postage scales).


CLS 177/25.16
TXT Calorie counting:

    Apparatus under subclass 25.14 where the user input is information relating
    to the caloric content of food stuffs being weighed.


CLS 177/25.17
TXT Counting:

    Apparatus under subclass 25.14 where the user input is unit weight
    information to enable the number of articles being weighed to be determined
    from the total weight of the articles.


CLS 177/25.18
TXT Combinatorial scales:

    Apparatus under subclass 25.13 where increments of weight are determined by
    one or more weighers, deposited in hoppers and combined in various ways to
    obtain a combination which most closely approaches a target value.


CLS 177/25.19
TXT Weight history:

    Apparatus under subclass 25.12 where the device maintains a memory of
    previous weight value for an individual, object, class of objects or a sum
    of serial increments of fluent material.


CLS 177/26
TXT Apparatus under subclass 25 wherein a load holder is connected to
    evaluating structure optionally operable to separately weigh or to
    separately give a computed value of the load.


CLS 177/27
TXT Apparatus under subclass 26 including separate slidable poises on diversely
    calibrated balance beams.


CLS 177/28
TXT Apparatus under subclass 27 wherein the weighing dial and the computing
    dial are on separate beams having separate pivots.


CLS 177/29
TXT Apparatus under subclass 27 wherein the calibrations on one of the
    diversely calibrated beams comprises a chart.


CLS 177/30
TXT Apparatus under subclass 25 in which a weight responsive structure,
    additional to the weigher, positions a datum scale relative to the path of
    the weight evaluating member of the weigher or modifies the response of the
    indicator elements to the weight evaluator.


CLS 177/31
TXT Apparatus under subclass 25 comprising a datum scale and index independent
    of the weigher scale and index.


CLS 177/32
TXT Apparatus under subclass 31 having an adjustable structure driving the
    computer reading structure from the load force offsetting means.


CLS 177/33
TXT Apparatus under subclass 32 in which the driven computer reading structure
    includes a pointer that is mounted coaxially with a weigher pointer.


CLS 177/34
TXT Apparatus under subclass 25 comprising a plurality of diverse datum scales
    showing results calculated from certain data including a weight evaluation.


CLS 177/35
TXT Apparatus under subclass 34 wherein a slidable poise portions the chart.


CLS 177/36
TXT Apparatus under subclass 34 wherein the chart is moved by the weight sensor.


CLS 177/37
TXT Apparatus under subclass 36 in which the chart is in the form of a
    rotatable drum.


CLS 177/38
TXT Apparatus under subclass 37 including a member moved manually over the face
    of the chart to pick out or expose a section thereof.


CLS 177/39
TXT Apparatus under subclass 37 including oppositely disposed reading windows
    in the drum casing.


CLS 177/40
TXT Apparatus under subclass 36 wherein the chart is a flat circular plate
    enclosed in a housing.


CLS 177/41
TXT Apparatus under subclass 34 wherein the chart is externally movable
    relating to the path of the pointer of the weigher.


CLS 177/42
TXT Apparatus under subclass 41 wherein the chart is rotatable about a
    longitudinal axis.


CLS 177/43
TXT Apparatus under subclass 34 wherein the chart is traversed by a weigher
    driven arm having calibrations correlated with datum scales on the chart.


CLS 177/44
TXT Apparatus under subclass 34 in which the chart extends along a balance arm
    carrying a slidable poise.


CLS 177/45
TXT Apparatus under the class definition with means to audibly or visually
    convey information in addition to that of the regular weigher indicator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 458 for a changeable
    exhibitor operated or controlled by a weigher.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 666 for a weight operated
    electrical alarm.


CLS 177/46
TXT Apparatus under subclass 45 wherein a signal or indicator is given when the
    load differs from the desired datum or preset i.e., just before the balance
    of a beam overload.


CLS 177/47
TXT Apparatus under subclass 45 which indicates the attainment of the desired
    datum or preset.


CLS 177/48
TXT Apparatus under subclass 47 wherein the signal or indication is given
    electrically.


CLS 177/49
TXT Apparatus under subclass 45 relating to the operative presence of
    additional counterpoise.


CLS 177/50
TXT Apparatus under the class definition wherein a test is performed.


CLS 177/51
TXT Apparatus under subclass 50 having a size gauging structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 163 for miscellaneous coin testing
    and see the search notes in the definition of that subclass.


CLS 177/52
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means by which the movement of
    a series of removable containers relative to a filling and weighing station
    is correlated with the weighing operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 129+ for handling successive receivers in a relation other than
    correlated with a weighing operation.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 510+,
    592+, and 645+ for means for automatically sorting articles by weight.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 21 for material handling
    devices wherein there is some moving of the material besides that
    incidental to the weighing operation.


CLS 177/53
TXT Apparatus under subclass 52 wherein a receiver in filling position on the
    conveying means controls operation of the weigher.


CLS 177/54
TXT Apparatus under subclass 52 wherein a rotary conveyor transports the
    receivers to the filling means.


CLS 177/55
TXT Apparatus under subclass 54 wherein the receiver on the conveyor is
    subsequently filled from a distinct priorly operated weigh chamber.


CLS 177/56
TXT Apparatus under subclass 52 wherein the receiver on the conveyor is
    subsequently filled from a distinct priorly operated weigh chamber.


CLS 177/57
TXT Apparatus under subclass 56 wherein a plurality of weighing means operate
    simultaneously.


CLS 177/58
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having a plurality of weighers carried
    in a circular path by rotating supporting means.


CLS 177/59
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means for delivering a load
    from a weigh chamber to a removable container.


CLS 177/60
TXT Apparatus under the class definition wherein a weigh chamber actuates
    material supply control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 403+ for liquid level control by weight
    of accumulated liquid.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 510+,
    592+, and 645+ for means for automatically sorting articles by weight.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 58 for a dispenser having means responsive to
    the weight of material in the supply container for controlling its
    discharge.


CLS 177/61
TXT Apparatus under subclass 60 wherein a weigh chamber is translated among a
    plurality of feeding sources.


CLS 177/62
TXT Apparatus under subclass 60 wherein a discharge station is remote from the
    filling station.


CLS 177/63
TXT Apparatus under subclass 60 including additional means responsive to the
    presence of material, e.g., regulators.


CLS 177/64
TXT Apparatus under subclass 63 wherein the additional means controls feed
    means.


CLS 177/65
TXT Apparatus under subclass 64 wherein the feed is directed to each of
    alternating weigher chambers.


CLS 177/66
TXT Apparatus under subclass 64 also controlling discharge means.


CLS 177/67
TXT Apparatus under subclass 66 also controlling overload removal means.


CLS 177/68
TXT Apparatus under subclass 60 which terminates flow of material in response
    to movement of the weigh chamber the necessary reestablishment of flow
    being initiated by an external operator.


CLS 177/69
TXT Apparatus under subclass 68 wherein a plurality of feeding sources are cut
    off simultaneously.


CLS 177/70
TXT Apparatus under subclass 68 wherein a plurality of feeding sources with
    different ingredients are used sequentially.


CLS 177/71
TXT Apparatus under subclass 68 controlling both the feed to and discharge from
    the weigher.


CLS 177/72
TXT Apparatus under subclass 71 provided with manually actuated means
    controlling discharge from the weigh chamber.


CLS 177/73
TXT Apparatus under subclass 68 wherein the external reset is incidental to
    placement of a receiver in feeding position on the weigher.


CLS 177/74
TXT Apparatus under subclass 68 wherein the movement of the weigh chamber
    causes the release of a latch.


CLS 177/75
TXT Apparatus under subclass 74 having a plurality of latches released in
    sequence.


CLS 177/76
TXT Apparatus under subclass 74 wherein the latch is released by a magnetic
    operator.


CLS 177/77
TXT Apparatus under subclass 76 wherein the release of the latch causes
    actuation of a switch in series circuit with the magnetic operator.


CLS 177/78
TXT Apparatus under subclass 74 wherein the latch controls a reciprocating
    closure member.


CLS 177/79
TXT Apparatus under subclass 68 wherein movement of the weigh chamber controls
    an electric circuit to a magnetic holding coil.


CLS 177/80
TXT Apparatus under subclass 60 correlated with an additional distinct control
    means.


CLS 177/81
TXT Apparatus under subclass 80 wherein an initial partial change is fed to the
    weigh chamber prior to a finishing feed and one of the feeds is controlled
    by external means.


CLS 177/82
TXT Apparatus under subclass 60 controlling discharge from the weigh chamber of
    material in excess of the desired predetermined weight.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     for additional material-presence-responsive means controlling the
    overload.


CLS 177/83
TXT Apparatus under subclass 60 wherein the weigh chamber is mounted for
    unidirectional rotation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 217+ for a rotary tank type of
    volume or rate of flow meter.


CLS 177/84
TXT Apparatus under subclass 83 wherein an external energy source moves the
    weigh chamber.


CLS 177/85
TXT Apparatus under subclass 83 wherein the movement of the rotary weigh
    chamber is controlled by an electromagnetically actuated latch release.


CLS 177/86
TXT Apparatus under subclass 83 wherein the translation of the axis under the
    load received in the weigh chamber controls its turning.


CLS 177/87
TXT Apparatus under subclass 86 in which the translation also controls feed.


CLS 177/88
TXT Apparatus under subclass 87 wherein the feed control is achieved by cam
    structure mounted on the rotary weigh chamber.


CLS 177/89
TXT Apparatus under subclass 60 wherein the load is carried and controlled by
    movement of the floor or discharge gate of the weigh chamber, the body of
    the weigh chamber having no movement.


CLS 177/90
TXT Weighers under subclass 60 wherein the weighing operation occurs
    alternately in two weigh chambers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65,     for additional material-presence-responsive means related to
    alternating weigh chambers.


CLS 177/91
TXT Weighers under subclass 90 in which the weigh chambers are compartments of
    a chamber divided by a partition.


CLS 177/92
TXT Weighers under subclass 91 wherein the partition oscillates relative to the
    weigh chamber.


CLS 177/93
TXT Weighers under subclass 92 wherein the alternation of feed to the weigh
    chamber is controlled by a diverter pivotally mounted on the partition.


CLS 177/94
TXT Weighers under subclass 91 wherein the alternation is by oscillation.


CLS 177/95
TXT Weighers under subclass 94 including valve means.


CLS 177/96
TXT Weighers under subclass 95 opened by gravity.


CLS 177/97
TXT Weighers under subclass 95 wherein the valve means is relatively fixedly
    mounted externally of the weigh chamber.


CLS 177/98
TXT Weigh chambers under subclass 90 wherein the lowering of one weigh chamber
    actuates a diverter located within or at the discharge end of a feed hopper
    to direct material to another weigh chamber.


CLS 177/99
TXT Weigh chambers under subclass 98 wherein the diverter is correlated with
    discharge valves of the weigh chambers.


CLS 177/100
TXT Weigh chambers under subclass 90 wherein the discharge of the weighed
    material is through valve means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99,     for a discharge valve correlated with a feed diverter.


CLS 177/101
TXT Weigh chambers under subclass 90 wherein the discharge is accomplished by
    siphon means.


CLS 177/102
TXT Weigh chambers under subclass 90 wherein the weigh chambers are oscillated.


CLS 177/103
TXT Apparatus under subclass 60 including a plurality of weigh chambers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90+,    for alternating weigh chambers.


CLS 177/104
TXT Devices under subclass 103 so related that they discharge simultaneously.


CLS 177/105
TXT Apparatus under subclass 60 which discharges by the opening of a discharge
    valve or gate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for a weigher having a cycle totalizer, discharge valve operated.


CLS 177/106
TXT Weighers under subclass 105 wherein a feed valve at closed position starts
    mechanism which opens the discharge valve.


CLS 177/107
TXT Device under subclass 105, on closing, starts mechanism to open feed valve
    means.


CLS 177/108
TXT Weigher under subclass 105 operated by the power of a source outside the
    weigher.


CLS 177/109
TXT Weigher under subclass 108 with structure connectable between the outside
    power source and the valve.


CLS 177/110
TXT Apparatus under subclass 109 of the magnetic type.


CLS 177/111
TXT Device under subclass 105 mechanically interconnected to a feed valve so
    that as one valve opens the other closes.


CLS 177/112
TXT Device under subclass 105 operated by a linkage mechanism associated with
    the weigh chamber.


CLS 177/113
TXT Device under subclass 105 held in closed position by a latch which is
    released by the weigh chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for an externally reset feed terminator latch released by the weigh
    chamber.


CLS 177/114
TXT Apparatus under subclass 60 wherein discharging from the weigh chamber is
    correlated with feeding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87+,    for a weigher in which a translation of a rotary weigh chamber
    controls feed.

    99,     for a feed controller diverting feed between alternating weigh
    chambers correlated with a discharge valve.

    106,    for a weigher in which the actuation of the feed flow terminator
    opens a discharge valve or gate.

    107,    for a weigher in which the closing of the weigh chamber discharge
    valve or gate initiates feed.

    111,    for mechanically interconnected feed and discharge valves.


CLS 177/115
TXT Weigher under subclass 114 wherein the weigh chamber oscillates between a
    filling position and a position where the weighed material spills over the
    edge of the weigh chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for alternating chambers that discharge by tilting.


CLS 177/116
TXT Apparatus under subclass 60 relating to the supply of material to the weigh
    chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64+,    for control of feed responsive to additional material presence.

    68+,    for manually initiated feed with weigh chamber responsive cutoff.

    98+,    for a feed diverter controlling flow to alternating weigh chambers.

    107,    for initiation of a feed valve by closing of a discharge valve.

    111,    for a feed valve mechanically interconnected with a weigh chamber
    discharge valve or gate.

    114,    for correlated feed and discharge of a weigh chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 55 for a controller that effects the discharge
    of a dispenser responsive to weight of unrestrained material to secure
    uniformity of discharge from the dispenser.


CLS 177/117
TXT Apparatus under subclass 116 wherein the filling operation is initiated
    responsive to application of the weigh chamber to the weigher.


CLS 177/118
TXT Apparatus under subclass 116 including means to clamp a bag or other
    receiver in feed position.


CLS 177/119
TXT Apparatus under subclass 116 including a device advancing material by a
    continuous application of force additional to gravity.


CLS 177/120
TXT Apparatus under subclass 119 with feed cutoff means.


CLS 177/121
TXT Apparatus under subclass 119 operable at different speeds.


CLS 177/122
TXT Apparatus under subclass 116 in which the feed control means responds first
    to a partial load in the weigh chamber to reduce the feed rate and then to
    a full load to cut off the feed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for a flow terminator requiring external reset including latch
    means sequentially operated.

    121,    for a feed conveyor operating at reduced speed near the end of the
    feed operation.


CLS 177/123
TXT Apparatus under subclass 122 comprising a plurality of distinct controllers.


CLS 177/124
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including lock or seal means which
    prevents unauthorized use or adjustment.


CLS 177/125
TXT An immobilized weigher under the class definition rendered operative by the
    use of a coin or substitute therefor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    194,    Check-Actuated Control Mechanisms, subclasses 21, 35 and 47 for
    other check-controlled weighing devices.  See section IV of the Class 194
    definition.


CLS 177/126
TXT Apparatus under the class definition constructed to be moved relatively
    from operative position to form a compact inoperative unit.


CLS 177/127
TXT Apparatus under subclass 126 with a container or having structure forming
    the collapsed weigher elements into a unit enclosed by an outer covering.


CLS 177/128
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means for repairing,
    removing, replacing or aiding in assembling or removing an element of a
    weigher assembly.


CLS 177/129
TXT Device under the class definition in which by reorientation or by
    rearrangement or omission or addition of a part, there is obtained a second
    character or different kind of device having a different mode of operation.


CLS 177/130
TXT Apparatus under subclass 129 in which a weigher is converted to a hand
    truck by means disabling the weigher.


CLS 177/131
TXT Apparatus under subclass 129 in which a weigher is converted to a handling
    load holder such as a scoop or fork by means disabling the weigher.


CLS 177/132
TXT Apparatus under the class definition with (1) means performing an operation
    external to the subject matter of this class (2) combined with a static
    construction installation, or (3) specifically related to a particular
    geographic feature, wherein there is included only enough structure foreign
    to this class to associate it with the apparatus.


CLS 177/133
TXT Apparatus under subclass 132 in which a weigher part is arranged relative
    to the earth.


CLS 177/134
TXT Apparatus under subclass 133 wherein the weigher part is installed in a
    cavity in the earth.


CLS 177/135
TXT Apparatus under subclass 134 with means between movable weigher elements
    and the pit enclosure for preventing the entrance of undesirable material
    into the pit.


CLS 177/136
TXT Apparatus under subclass 132 in which the weigher is structurally related
    to vehicular load carrier.


CLS 177/137
TXT Apparatus under subclass 136 wherein a vehicle load is indicated by means
    responsive to the yielding of the vehicle running gear springs.


CLS 177/138
TXT Apparatus under subclass 137 wherein the yield indicating means may be
    disconnected from the running gear.


CLS 177/139
TXT Apparatus under subclass 136 in which the load carrying section of the
    vehicle is supported from frame structure by weight responsive weigher
    elements in such a manner that release or disconnection of such elements
    will transfer such section onto the frame.


CLS 177/140
TXT Apparatus under subclass 136 provided with handle means for propulsion by
    an attendant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130,    for a weigher convertible to a hand truck by the locking of the
    weight responsive elements.


CLS 177/141
TXT Apparatus under subclass 136 in which the weigher is of the hydraulic type.


CLS 177/142
TXT Apparatus under subclass 132 in which the weigher is installed in or on a
    part of a building.


CLS 177/143
TXT Apparatus under subclass 132 in which the weighing means is a part of a
    refrigerator.


CLS 177/144
TXT Apparatus under subclass 132 in which the weigher is installed in an
    article of furniture or in a room fixture or fitting.


CLS 177/145
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including structure which transports a
    load relative to a load holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52+,    for the coordinated filling and conveying of successive receivers.

    62,     for a weigh chamber movable to a remote discharge station.

    119+,   for a weigh chamber responsive conveyor feeding the weigh chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 959 for a conveyor having a
    weighing feature wherein there is some moving of the material besides that
    necessary or incidental to the weighing operation.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclasses 23+ and 32+ for a fluid
    current conveyor including a weighing feature wherein there is some
    movement of the material besides that necessary or incidental to the
    weighing operation.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 21 for a material handling
    device including a weighing feature wherein there is some moving of the
    material besides that necessary or incidental to the weighing operation.


CLS 177/146
TXT Apparatus under subclass 145 comprising a unitary, portable, base supported
    weigher having structure by which the load holder may be moved upwardly to
    engage and lift the load.


CLS 177/147
TXT Apparatus under subclass 145 including means by which a suspended weighing
    device lifts the load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclass 283 for a traversing hoist in
    combination with a weighing means which accomplishes more than the mere
    lifting and weighing of the load.


CLS 177/148
TXT Apparatus under subclass 145 including a unitary, portable material
    handling weigher having means by which it is manually moved as a whole in
    loading or unloading the load holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131,    for a hand manipulatable device convertible to a weigher by the
    release of means immobilizing the weigher.


CLS 177/149
TXT Apparatus under subclass 148 wherein the device is a container such as a
    bucket or scoop.


CLS 177/150
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having mechanism by which the support
    of the beam of an equal arm weigher is transferred from the pivot to a
    nonweighing holder.


CLS 177/151
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having mechanism by which the support
    of the load holder is transferred from the transmission mechanism to a
    nonweighing support.


CLS 177/152
TXT Apparatus under subclass 151 wherein the transfer mechanism includes
    elements of the load holder transmission.


CLS 177/153
TXT Apparatus under subclass 152 wherein the transfer is accomplished by means
    effecting the disconnection of transmission elements of the load holder.


CLS 177/154
TXT Apparatus under the class definition securing a load responsive weighing
    element against motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124,    for a weigher having a lock or seal.

    125,    for a check released immobilized weigher.

    130,    for a weigher convertible to a hand truck by the locking of the
    weight responsive elements.

    131,    for a hand manipulated load pickup device with means immobilizing
    the weight responsive elements.


CLS 177/155
TXT Apparatus under subclass 154 including means to hold bearing elements from
    engagement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150,    for the separation of the bearing parts of an equal arm type
    weigher.

    151+,   for structure transferring the weight of a load holder from the
    weigher bearings.


CLS 177/156
TXT Apparatus under subclass 154 wherein the holding device engages the load
    responsive element acting between the load holder and the weight indicating
    means.


CLS 177/157
TXT Apparatus under subclass 154 including structure for engaging and
    preventing movement of the beam of a beam type weigher.


CLS 177/158
TXT Apparatus under subclass 157 including a plurality of counterweight beams
    each provided with its own holding means.


CLS 177/159
TXT Apparatus under subclass 154 wherein the holding device is located at the
    reading structure.


CLS 177/160
TXT Apparatus under the class definition engaging and holding open the mouth of
    a sack.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS SUBCLASS:

    118,    for a sack retainer with weight responsive material feed control.


CLS 177/161
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including structure upon which the
    load may be moved to or from its supported position upon the weigher.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59,     for a weigher that discharges to a receiver.


CLS 177/162
TXT Apparatus under subclass 161 including an inclined trough.


CLS 177/163
TXT Apparatus under subclass 161 including a rail.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    for a weigher installed in a pit.


CLS 177/164
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the change in position of a
    first weigher element between balanced unloaded and balanced loaded
    position is a measure of the load and having (1) an additional element for
    adjusting the balance or zeroizing the weigher in its initial position or
    (2) means for setting weigher structure to coordinate the change of
    position of the first element with the load value.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25.11+, for a computing type of preset.


CLS 177/165
TXT Apparatus under subclass 164 responsive to the weight or presence of a load
    receiver.


CLS 177/166
TXT Apparatus under subclass 164 with a dial and pointer and including a second
    pointer adjustably connected to the first pointer.


CLS 177/167
TXT Apparatus under subclass 164 in which the preset is of the fixed indicator
    element along which the weight indicative element is moved during the
    weighing operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41+,    for similar structure in which the fixed indicator element is a
    tabular type computer chart.


CLS 177/168
TXT Apparatus under subclass 164 wherein the fixed end of a load offsetting
    spring is adjustable.


CLS 177/169
TXT Apparatus under subclass 168 including means for adjusting the length of
    the elastic section of the spring.


CLS 177/170
TXT Apparatus under subclass 168 in which the fixed end of the spring is
    mounted on an adjustable lever.


CLS 177/171
TXT Apparatus under subclass 164 immediately associated with a beam which is
    substantially level in both the balanced loaded and balanced unloaded
    conditions.


CLS 177/172
TXT Apparatus under subclass 171 wherein the preset is of the load arm length
    of the beam.


CLS 177/173
TXT Apparatus under subclass 164 wherein the preset is of the indicator or its
    immediate drive.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32+,    for a computing type indicator having an adjustable drive.


CLS 177/174
TXT Apparatus under subclass 173 wherein the presetting is accomplished through
    means connecting an indicator rack to its drive.


CLS 177/175
TXT Apparatus under subclass 164 in which the presetting means is an element of
    or is carried by the structure transmitting force from the load holder.


CLS 177/176
TXT Apparatus under subclass 175 wherein the presetting element is a weight.


CLS 177/177
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a light source.


CLS 177/178
TXT Apparatus under subclass 177 wherein light is directed through or by a
    movable part of the weigher to give a reading.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, subclasses 40+ for an image projector in
    combination with a nominally claimed weighing scale.


CLS 177/179
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a protective covering member
    immediately associated with a bearing.


CLS 177/180
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising an external casing having
    an opening protected by a seal, shield or removable section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for a carrying case for a collapsible weigher.

    135,    for a guard or shield for platform openings of a pit type weigher.


CLS 177/181
TXT Apparatus under subclass 180 in which the closure is transparent.


CLS 177/182
TXT Apparatus under subclass 181 in which the transparent section includes a
    magnification lens.


CLS 177/183
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means for lubricating the
    weigher.


CLS 177/184
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means to damp mechanism or
    protect it from shock.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139,    for a vehicle mounted weigher protected from shock by immobilizing
    or relieving means.

    150,    for an equal arm type weigher protected from shock by beam transfer
    mechanism.

    195+,   for an equal arm weigher inherently damped by spring means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 297+ for a fluid-resistance shock absorber or
    damper of general utility.


CLS 177/185
TXT Apparatus under subclass 184 wherein damping is accomplished by an
    electrical or magnetic field.


CLS 177/186
TXT Apparatus under subclass 184 directly associated with the indicator or its
    immediate drive.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159,    for means holding an indicator against motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 430 for instrument mechanism
    damping means of general application.


CLS 177/187
TXT Apparatus under subclass 184 which acts on an element of the load force
    transmitting linkage connected to the load holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156,    for a means at the load holder transmission for holding it against
    motion.


CLS 177/188
TXT Apparatus under subclass 187 wherein the element is a rocking lever.


CLS 177/189
TXT Apparatus under subclass 184 mounted for cooperation with the load holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151+,   for means transferring a load holder to a nonweighing support.


CLS 177/190
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a beam balance with the
    fulcrum thereof located at the midpoint between connections supporting a
    load and a counterweight holder.


CLS 177/191
TXT Apparatus under subclass 190 with means for handling a counterweight.


CLS 177/192
TXT Apparatus under subclass 191 wherein the counterweight is a flexible chain.


CLS 177/193
TXT Apparatus under subclass 190 with a structure rising above the beam to
    house a weight indicator.


CLS 177/194
TXT Apparatus under subclass 190 having means imposing a position restoring
    force to the beam proportional to the deflection of the beam from its
    position of balance.


CLS 177/195
TXT Apparatus under subclass 194 wherein the position restoring force is
    supplied by a spring.


CLS 177/196
TXT Apparatus under subclass 195 wherein the spring serves as a bearing.


CLS 177/197
TXT Apparatus under subclass 190 having structure supporting a slidable poise.


CLS 177/198
TXT Apparatus under subclass 190 having linkage maintaining the attitude of the
    load or counterweight holder.


CLS 177/199
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having a plurality of load holders
    operative with a common load evaluator.


CLS 177/200
TXT Apparatus under subclass 199 operating to compare the load on one holder to
    that on another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for a computing type weigher having an ancillary load holder
    effecting the response of the weigher to the load on the main load holder.

    190+,   for an equal arm type weigher.


CLS 177/201
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which weigher elements assume a
    balanced position or condition indicative of load value in response to the
    application of the load.


CLS 177/202
TXT Apparatus under subclass 201 wherein the indication is of both the valve
    and direction of unbalance of an even balance type weigher.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194+,   for an equal arm type of weigher biased toward balance.


CLS 177/203
TXT Apparatus under subclass 201 having an additional load force
    counterbalancing means combined with the self positioning indicating
    elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194+,   for an equal arm type weigher with a bias toward balance.

    200,    for a load comparing weigher with plural distinct load holders.


CLS 177/204
TXT Apparatus under subclass 203 responsive to a movement of the self
    positioning offsetting means.


CLS 177/205
TXT Apparatus under subclass 203 with remote reading structure interconnected
    with supplemental means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for a weigher with a signal indicating the use of a supplemental
    counterweight.


CLS 177/206
TXT Apparatus under subclass 203 wherein the means is a slidably mounted weight.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176,    for similar structure zeroizing the weigher.


CLS 177/207
TXT Apparatus under subclass 201 which employs the lifting effect of a fluid on
    a float.


CLS 177/208
TXT Apparatus under subclass 201 wherein fluid pressure proportional to weight
    is communicated to a device responsive to pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141,    for a hydraulic weigher installed on a vehicle.


CLS 177/209
TXT Apparatus under subclass 208 wherein the pressure is developed by the
    action of the load holder on a plurality of interconnected expansible
    chambers.


CLS 177/210
TXT Apparatus under subclass 201 wherein an electric current is generated or
    modified and the value of such current is taken as the weight value.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 763+ for a stress or strain
    testing device of the current generating or modifying type.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 85 for a weight
    controlled switch.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 71.1 for the
    determination of nonelectrical properties in general by measuring
    electrical properties.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 2+ for a strain gauge type
    electrical resistor and subclass 47 for a resistor responsive to force.


CLS 177/211
TXT Apparatus under subclass 210 wherein the strain of a deformable member is
    measured.


CLS 177/212
TXT Apparatus under subclass 201 including means responsive to a movement of a
    weigher element under load actuating a device tending to restore the
    element to its original position.


CLS 177/213
TXT Apparatus under subclass 212 wherein the balance of a beam is brought about
    by a poise slidable thereon and actuated by electrical means responsive to
    the deflection of the beam.


CLS 177/214
TXT Apparatus under subclass 213 wherein an indicator is correlated with the
    poise.


CLS 177/215
TXT Apparatus under subclass 213 wherein the speed of the poise in its movement
    along the beam is varied.


CLS 177/216
TXT Apparatus under subclass 201 wherein a suspended poise is arranged to swing
    in proportion to the load applied.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 836 and 862.381+ for a push or
    pull force measuring device of the pendulum type.


CLS 177/217
TXT Apparatus under subclass 216 including two pendulums mounted on coaxial or
    parallel pivots and which swing in opposite directions in counter-balancing
    the load.


CLS 177/218
TXT Apparatus under subclass 217 in which the pivots translate as the poises
    swing.


CLS 177/219
TXT Apparatus under subclass 217 wherein the swing of the poises is produced by
    pull through a flexible member.


CLS 177/220
TXT Apparatus under subclass 216 including an independently mounted indicating
    element driven by the pendulum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for a recording type indicator set by a weigher.

    36,     for a tabular type indicator chart driven by a weigher.


CLS 177/221
TXT Apparatus under subclass 220 including a flexible pull member.


CLS 177/222
TXT Apparatus under subclass 220 including a gear.


CLS 177/223
TXT Apparatus under subclass 222 including a straight rack and a pinion.


CLS 177/224
TXT Apparatus under subclass 216 having a pointer fixed to the swingable poise.


CLS 177/225
TXT Apparatus under subclass 201 having an elastic body arranged to yield in
    proportion to the load applied.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137+,   for vehicle running gear springs used for weighing.

    168+,   for a preset means for a spring support.

    195+,   for an equal arm weigher biased toward balance by a spring.


CLS 177/226
TXT Apparatus under subclass 225 including means to compensate for temperature
    changes.


CLS 177/227
TXT Apparatus under subclass 226 effective to change the distance between the
    pivot points of a lever located in the force train between a load holder
    and a spring.


CLS 177/228
TXT Apparatus under subclass 226 acting on or built into the spring.


CLS 177/229
TXT Apparatus under subclass 225 comprising a projecting elastic member
    supported at one end and loaded at the other.


CLS 177/230
TXT Apparatus under subclass 225 including means for delivering a force from
    the load holder to the spring proportional to, but changed in direction or
    intensity from, the direct gravity force of the load.


CLS 177/231
TXT Apparatus under subclass 225 wherein an external casing supports one end of
    the spring and carries structure limiting tilting movement of a load holder
    acting on the other end of the spring.


CLS 177/232
TXT Apparatus under subclass 225 comprising a helical coil spring within a
    casing having a constant cross sectional area in its spring enclosing
    section corresponding to that of the spring.


CLS 177/233
TXT Apparatus under subclass 232 wherein the casing has a longitudinal slit
    within which a weight indicator moves in response to load.


CLS 177/234
TXT Apparatus under subclass 225 including a reading device moved by the
    deformation of the spring an amount greater than, but proportional to, such
    deformation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211,    for a weigher in which the deformation is measured electrically.


CLS 177/235
TXT Apparatus under subclass 201 relating to counterweight type.


CLS 177/236
TXT Apparatus under subclass 235 wherein the imposition of the load shifts the
    fulcrum point of a balancing load and counterweight to a position at which
    the load and counterweight moments are equal.


CLS 177/237
TXT Apparatus under subclass 235 wherein weight units are progressively lifted
    from a support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204,    for the pickup of capacity changing weights of a self balancing
    weigher.


CLS 177/238
TXT Apparatus under the class definition with an enclosing member, fixture, or
    attachment to protect the device or part thereof from soil, contamination,
    injury, theft or loss; or to protect persons or things from injury through
    contact with the weigher or part thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for a collapsible foldable knockdown weigher with carrying case.

    179,    for a bearing shield.

    180+,   for a casing closure or shield.

    231,    for a load holder steadying structure and spring carried by casing.

    232+,   for a coil spring in a sleeve casing.


CLS 177/239
TXT Apparatus under subclass 238 wherein the casing forms a bottom structure
    enclosing and supporting weigher elements.


CLS 177/240
TXT Apparatus under subclass 239 with an upright support carried by the bottom
    structure.


CLS 177/241
TXT Apparatus under subclass 240 with an additional housing supported on the
    standard.


CLS 177/242
TXT Apparatus under subclass 241 wherein the housing is cylindrical and has an
    external opening in the cylindrical wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181+,   for a closure or shield for a casing opening comprising a
    transparent section or lens.


CLS 177/243
TXT Apparatus under subclass 239 wherein a load holder is supported by a member
    projecting through a wall of the housing.


CLS 177/244
TXT Apparatus under the class definition provided with a support for an entire
    weighing assembly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131,    for a hand manipulatable load pickup device convertible to a
    weigher.

    148+,   for a hand manipulated weigher.


CLS 177/245
TXT Apparatus under the class definition combined with a device or structure
    having (1) a function other than weighing or (2) serving to perfect such
    apparatus for its intended primary purpose.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 458 for a changeable
    exhibitor operated or controlled by a weigher.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 239 for a
    sifting means associated with a weigher.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 54 for egg candlers
    combined with weighing scales having no novel structure.


CLS 177/246
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a lever and fulcrum upon
    which load force and a counterweight means may be directly balanced against
    each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for a beam computing table.

    171,    for a beam with presetting means.

    190+,   for a beam weigher of the equal arm  type.

    202,    for a balancing beam type weigher with an over or under load
    offsetting means.

    235+,   for a self balancing weigher of the  counterweight type.


CLS 177/247
TXT Apparatus under subclass 246 wherein one counterweight is adjustable along
    a beam slide and another lighter counterweight is adjustable along another
    slide.


CLS 177/248
TXT Apparatus under subclass 246 having plural counterweights with related
    structure to place one or more of them on the beam from a stored position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191+,   for counterweight manipulating means installed on an equal arm type
    weigher.

    204,    for the supply or removal of a capacity changing weight on a self
    positioning weigher.

    216+,   for self positioning counterweights of the pendulum type.

    235+,   for other self positioning counterweights.


CLS 177/249
TXT Apparatus under subclass 246 including transmission between a slidable
    poise and other structure interconnecting them for actuation of one by the
    other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     for a computing table driven by poise movement.

    213+,   for a poise actuated in response to beam unbalance.


CLS 177/250
TXT Apparatus under subclass 246 with means to retain a counterweight in set
    position with respect to the beam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154+,   for means holding a load driven element against motion.


CLS 177/251
TXT Apparatus under subclass 246 wherein the distance along the beam between
    the fulcrum and the load connection may be changed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172,    for a beam having adjusting preset means for the load arm length.

    236,    for a counterweight type device that balances itself by shifting
    the fulcrum in response to load.


CLS 177/252
TXT Apparatus under subclass 246 in which more than one counterweight may be
    used to balance the load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27+,    for a computing type weigher or using plural counterweights.

    158,    for plural counterweights on separately pivoted beams having
    individual beam latches.

    171,    for a preset beam type weigher.

    247,    for coarse and fine sliders.


CLS 177/253
TXT Device under the class definition that sustains the load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60+,    for a load holder with material flow control means.

    151+,   for a load holder having both a weighing and nonweighing support.

    154+,   for means for holding a load holder against motion.

    160,    for a load holder comprising a sack support.

    161+,   for a guide positioning a load on a load holder.

    189,    for a load holder with shock absorbing means.


CLS 177/254
TXT Apparatus under subclass 253 wherein the load sustaining means includes
    fluid transmission structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208+,   for a fluid transmission connected with a pressure gauge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 325+ for a fluid transmission, per se.


CLS 177/255
TXT Apparatus under subclass 253 limiting horizontal or tilting motion of the
    load holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198,    for a check link structure in an equal arm type weigher.

    231,    for a load holder steadying structure combined with a casing
    mounted spring.


CLS 177/256
TXT Apparatus under subclass 253 including separate levers pivotally
    interconnected to transmit force to each other or to a separate
    transmission element.


CLS 177/257
TXT Apparatus under subclass 256 wherein an extension for a plurality of load
    holder carrying levers beyond their interconnection serves to deliver a
    single combined force from the load.


CLS 177/258
TXT Apparatus under subclass 256 wherein two load holder carrying levers load a
    separate force delivering lever.


CLS 177/259
TXT Apparatus under subclass 258 wherein the separate force delivering lever
    applies the force to an additional lever.


CLS 177/260
TXT Apparatus under subclass 253 including means for adjusting a connection
    within transmission or between the load holder and the transmission.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175+,   for a presetting adjustment of a transmission that prepares the
    weigher for a load evaluation operation.

    251,    for a load evaluating adjustment of the load arm connection.


CLS 177/261
TXT Apparatus under subclass 253 wherein a lever bearing is so mounted that it
    provides for movement of the bearing additional to its rotation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, subclass 2 for a beam or lever bearing, per se.


CLS 177/262
TXT Subject matter under subclass 253 comprising a load holder for a portable
    or small counter type scale.


CLS 177/263
TXT Subject matter under subclass 262 relating to means to suspend the load
    holder.


CLS 177/264
TXT Subject matter under the class definition not otherwise classifiable.


CLS 178/
TTL TELEGRAPHY

CLS 178/
TXT Means for transmitting to a distance messages, unlimited with respect to
    the extent of information they are adapted to convey, and the transmission
    and facsimile reproduction of written, printed, or otherwise produced
    characters, marks, pictures, etc., unlimited with respect to form or
    outline, by the utilization of conductive or inductive electrical current
    impulses or reversals, the elements of the messages being selected or
    composed at will, according to a prearranged code, or the transmitter being
    actuated or controlled by a previously designed pattern.

    (1)     Note.  Electric signaling means that are limited with respect to
    the number, character, or subject matter of messages adapted to be conveyed
    thereby or with respect to the selection of the elements of a message or
    the possibility of composing the same thereby are deemed to be electric
    signals, indicators, and alarms rather than electric telegraphs.  Means for
    the conversion of sound waves into conductive or inductive electrical
    impulses and reconversion into sound waves for reproduction of sounds at a
    distance are classified as telephones.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclasses 243+ for
    electro-optical cells.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for
    electrical testing systems not limited to telegraphy.

    330,    Amplifiers, appropriate subclasses for amplifiers.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, for electric wave
    transmission systems wherein electromagnetic wave energy is guided or
    constrained by a wave propagation medium of appreciable electrical length
    as compared to the wave length of the propagated energy.  This class
    includes numerous electrical networks and components useful in telegraphy.
    Note particularly subclass 20 for wave shaping networks of the passive
    type, subclass 23 for artifical lines, subclasses 24+ for coupling
    networks, which include equalizers, impedance matching networks, delay
    networks, and wave filters, subclass 81 for attenuators, subclasses 236+
    for longe transmission lines, and subclasses 1+ for plural channel systems
    of the above which include branched circuits and hybrid type networks.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 15+ for photoconductive electrical
    resistors.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, for electric systems of communication
    not peculiar to telegraph code signaling. Note Particularly subclasses 825+
    for selective systems analogous to the selective systems utilized in
    telegraphy but restricted to the communication of a limited amount of
    information or control signals, subclasses 287+ and 533+ for signal box
    systems such as the American district telegraph or fire alarm systems, and
    subclass 320 for signaling along a fluid conduit.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 20+ and 173+ for a
    pulse code transmitter.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, for devices which may involve
    facsimile systems to test light, or articles or substances by means of
    light for optical properties, dimensions, configuration, or flaws,
    particularly subclasses 308+ for spectrographic scanning devices,
    subclasses 380, 386, 387, and 398 for mensuration or configuration devices
    involving scanning, subclasses 404 and 405 for photographic or tristimulus
    color tests, and subclass 444 for light transmission tests involving
    scanning.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    227+ and  238+ for light valves.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    electrical safety systems not limited to telegraphy.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for a multiplexing
    system, particularly subclasses 298+ for multiplexed teletypewriter service.

    375,    Pluse or Digital Communications, appropriate subclasses for
    nontelegraphic pulse or digital communications.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 108.01+ for combinations of
    telegraph and signaling systems with telephone systems or means for sending
    signals over telephone circuits, subclasses 338+ for telephone type
    repeaters.  Class 171 for amplifiers.

    380,    Cryptography, appropriate subclasses for cryptographic techniques
    and equipment.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, appropriate subclasses for a remote-control
    typewriter, and see (1) Note, section IV to Class 400 for discussion of the
    difference between a typewriter of Class 400 and a printing telegraph of
    Class 178.

    455,    Telecommunications, appropriate subclasses for nonpulse carrier
    wave communications.


CLS 178/1
TXT Means under class definition and parts and accessories thereof not
    otherwise provided for.


CLS 178/2
TXT Miscellaneous means under class definition for transmitting messages
    between stations telegraphically not otherwise provided for that include a
    plurality of telegraph instruments, such as transmitting and receiving
    instruments, in circuit.

    (1)     Note.  Telegraphing and telephoning by Hertzian Waves guided by
    transmission lines between stations and all line or conductive transmission
    systems therefor are classified, respectively, in appropriate subclasses
    under Class 178, Telegraphy and 379, Telephonic Communications.

    (2)     Note.  For telemetric systems specific to measuring, see Class 73,
    Measuring and Testing; Class 33, Geometrical Instuments, subclasses 267,
    312, 317, 363, and 366.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for telegraphing by induction on neighboring lines, etc.

    47,     for harmonic or vibratory transmission systems and essential
    accessories.

    64,     for applications of induction-coils and transformers to telegraphy.

    66.1,   for alternating current transmission.

    74,     for subcombinations comprising a plurality of connected instruments
    or local circuits at one station employed in transmitting or receiving,
    such as combinations of key and battery, induction-coils, and the like.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, (see (2) Note).

    73,     Measuring and Testing, (see (2) Note).

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclasses 3+ for central signal
    control, and subclass 7, and appropriate indented subclasses for train
    telegraphy or telephony.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 10+ for
    dynamoelectric machine structure for generating electrical current.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks. See the reference to this
    class under "SEARCH CLASS", in the class definition above.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclass for the structure of
    transformers and inductor devices.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, appropriate subclasses, for electrical
    resistors, per se.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825+ for selective
    nontelegraph systems, analogous to the selective systems utilized in
    telegraphy but restricted to the communication of a limited amount of
    information or control, subclasses 870.01+ for telemetering systems, and
    subclasses 287+ for signal box telegraph systems.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 20+ and 173+ for a
    pulse code transmitter.

    346,    Recorders, appropriate subclass.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for multiplexing
    systems.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclass 218 for pulse
    communications using an earth or water transmission medium.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, for electrical pulse counters and registers.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process, for electrochemical batteries useful in telegraphy.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 40 for analog modulated carrier wave
    communications via an earth or water medium.


CLS 178/3
TXT Systems under subclass 2 having transmitting means employing perforated
    strip or tape, code-type, patterns, etc.

    (2)     Note.  There are numerous other record controlled means in other
    classes which as to some characteristics may be references for the record
    controlled mechanisms of this class.  Attention is called to the following
    classes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, particularly subclasses 231+ for pattern
    mechanism.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 76.1+ for a pattern-controlled cutting or
    punching machine.

    84,     Music, the subclasses indented under "Automatic", starting with
    subclass 2, the selecting or record controlled means being in subclasses
    115+.

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, particularly
    subclasses 14+ for apparatus with pattern mechanism.

    101,    Printing, particularly subclasses 19 and 20 for piercing embossing
    machines, and subclasses 93 and 96 for bed and platen machines.

    112,    Sewing, particularly subclass 4 for Jacquard card sewing machines,
    subclasses 470.01+ for a pattern controlled sewing machine and subclasses
    78+ for a pattern controlled embroidery-type sewing machine.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, particularly subclasses 317+ for the record
    controlled mechanism.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 137+ for a pattern controlled shaping
    machine.

    199,    Type Casting, particularly subclass 74 for pattern controlled
    rotary matrix type cast machines, and subclass 77 for pattern controlled
    slidable matrix machines.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 46 for
    pattern-sheet controlled switches.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, particularly
    subclasses 532, 554, 612, 613, 619, and 688 for automatic perforated
    articles assorting machines.

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching) subclasses 59+ for a
    record-controlled punching machine with a plurality of individually movable
    tools.

    235,    Registers, subclass 56 for vote counters, and subclasses 419+ for
    record controlled calculators.

    276,    Typesetting, particularly subclass 13 for pattern controlled type
    setting machines.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 20+ and 173+ for
    pulse code transmitter.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, appropriate subclasses for pattern controlled
    typewriting machines.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 79+ for a pattern
    controlled milling machine; and subclasses 289+ for a pattern controlled
    planing machine.


CLS 178/4
TXT Automatic systems under subclass 3 adapted to print the message at the
    receiving station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23+,    for printing telegraphs other than automatic.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, for the art of printing.

    235,    Registers, for printing features specific thereto.

    346,    Recorders, (see class 235 above).

    400,    Typewriting Machines, for typewriters not peculiarly adapted for
    printing telegraphs and for typewriters connected by the same number of
    wires as there are keys or for electrically actuated typewriters, and
    subclasses 70+, for perforated tape actuators for typewriters.


CLS 178/4.1
TXT Systems under subclass 4 of remote control for starting and/or stopping
    printer motors at called or calling stations or both by either manually or
    automatically transmitted impulses or code.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53.1,   for start-stop rotary distributor synchronizers for multiplex
    systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for multiplexing
    systems.


CLS 178/15
TXT Automatic systems other than facsimile under subclass 3 that employ
    photographic recorders.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90,     for photographic recorders of general application to telegraphy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 302+ for facsimile systems with photographic
    recorders.

    386,    Television Signal Processing for Dynamic Recording or Reproducing,
    subclasses 30, 42+, and 128+ for photographic television recording or
    reproducing, particularly subclasses 38 and 117 for video apparatus
    combined with camera for recording television signal.


CLS 178/16
TXT Automatic systems under subclass 3 in which direct and reversed currents
    are employed, usually with pole changers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for multiple pen facsimile systems.

    17,     for automatic transmitters or recorders.

    62,     for chemical-type telegraph systems.

    63,     for cable-type telegraph systems.

    67.1,   for modified alternating current telegraph systems.

    69,     for line clearing and circuit maintenance systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 245+ for
    pole changers of general application.


CLS 178/17
TXT Means under subclass 3 specific to automatic systems for transmitting
    automatically or for recording.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3+,     for automatic transmitters combined in systems, particularly
    subclass 4 for printing systems, and subclass 16 for current reversing
    systems.

    36,     for type printing recorders.

    43,     for space induction systems.

    48,     for receivers and recorders peculiar to harmonic or tone telegraphy.

    62,     for recorders operating by chemical action.

    79,     for transmitters for transmitting code signals and not specific to
    any particular system of telegraphy.

    89,     for Morse registers and other code-recorders for producing a record
    of code signals on suitable receiving surfaces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 202+ for a
    feeding and cutting or punching machine.

    84,     Music, subclass 19 for perforated-strip controlled pianos; subclass
    107 for perforated-strip controlled musical instruments; subclass 147 for
    perforated-strip controlled automatic selectors; and subclass 462 for
    electric type recording devices.

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), for a selective punching
    machine, and appropriate subclasses for pattern control, programmed
    control, etc., of such a machine.

    276,    Typesetting, subclasses 12+ for perforated strip and keyboard
    transmitting apparatus.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 287+ and 533+ for signal
    box telegraph systems having signal box transmitters.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 20+ and 173+ for a
    pulse code transmitter.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 245+ for
    pole changing transmitters or current reversers.


CLS 178/17.5
TXT Automatic transmitters under subclass 17 comprising means for accumulating
    messages or code-signals in advance of actual transmission.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for storing-transmitters in combination with other elements of an
    automatic system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 8.51+ for
    cathode ray tube systems for accumulating or storing electrical pulse
    energy for later retrieval, and subclasses 84.51+ for similar electrical
    pulse storage systems utilizing electric space discharge devices of the
    gaseous type.


CLS 178/18
TXT Systems under subclass 2 for producing at the receiver a facsimile of the
    handwriting, drawing, etc., made by the operator in manipulating the pen of
    the transmitting instrument.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    901,    Robots, appropriate subcollections for programmable manipulators in
    general.


CLS 178/19
TXT Writing systems under subclass 18 employing alternating current with or
    without an independent motor.


CLS 178/20
TXT Writing systems under subclass 18 employing a direct current varied by the
    motions of the stylus in writing.


CLS 178/21
TXT Systems under subclass 2 for transmitting stenographic or shorthand
    messages, characters, or abbreviated codes corresponding thereto and
    generally employing a transmitter or receiver, or both, of the multiple-pen
    type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    380,    Cryptography, appropriate subclasses for cryptographic equipment.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 91+ for stenographic machines.


CLS 178/23
TXT Systems under subclass 2 for recording messages in typed letters or
    characters by impression or contact upon a suitable recording surface--as a
    tape, strip, sheet, or page--by means of type-wheels or type-levers,
    typewriters, or the like, actuated by current variations transmitted over
    one or more lines or conductors less in number than the number of
    characters of transmitting keys used.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for telegraphic printing systems employing automatic transmitters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 41+ for
    synchronizers of general application.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 20+ for bodily
    actuated code generators of general application.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 168+ for selective electrical
    control of image or message display system with a keyboard input means.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 70+, and appropriate indented
    subclasses for typewriters operated by electromagnetic power or for systems
    in which the number of connecting transmission lines is the same as the
    number of keys or electromagnets connected thereby.  In the typewriters of
    this group the electric operation replaces the mechanical actuation.


CLS 178/24
TXT Systems under subclass 23 for printing on bulletin boards.


CLS 178/25
TXT Systems under subclass 23 for printing in successive lines in page or
    column form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    276,    Typesetting, subclasses 12+ for perforated strip and keyboard
    transmitting apparatus.


CLS 178/26.1
TXT Translators:

    Page printing systems under subclass 25 in which Morse or other code
    signals are translated by selective mechanism, usually, but not necessarily
    at the letters corresponding thereto or having means for facilitating
    translation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     for transmitting code signals by reversals or current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    276,    Typesetting, subclasses 12+ for perforated strip and keyboard
    transmitting apparatus.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 50+ for digital
    code conversion in general.


CLS 178/27
TXT Page printing systems under subclass 25 in which "selectors" or devices for
    operating particular printing elements are selectively actuated by the
    signal impulses or currents and employed either at the sending or receiving
    station.

    (1)     Note.  Rotary distributors or "sun-flowers" are not included herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825+ for nontelegraph
    selective systems, analogous to the selective systems utilized in
    telegraphy but restricted to the communication of a limited amount of
    information or control.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    168+ for telephone call transmitters.


CLS 178/28
TXT Page printing systems under subclass 25 with typewheel recorders or
    inventions in transmitters plus page printing type-wheel recorders.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 20+ and 173+ for a
    pulse code transmitter.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    168+ for telephone call transmitters.


CLS 178/29
TXT Type-wheel recorders under subclass 28 specialized for use in page printing
    systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 70+ for electric-power-driven
    typewriters.


CLS 178/30
TXT Printing systems under subclass 23 in which each character is printed by
    the action of one or more of the printing elements that together form and
    record the character transmitted.


CLS 178/31
TXT Telegraphy printing systems under subclass 23 having a plurality of main
    connecting lines, but less in number than the number of transmitting keys
    of letters used. Excludes page or column printers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for bulletin printing devices.

    27,     for printing page selectors.

    28+,    for wheel type recorder page printing systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 70+ for typewriters connected by
    the same number of lines as there are keys when the object is electrical
    actuation.


CLS 178/32
TXT Multiple-line circuit printing systems under subclass 31 employing type
    wheel recorders.


CLS 178/33
TXT Telegraphic printing systems under subclass 23 having means for selectively
    operating one or more of a plurality of printing surfaces by the character
    of the signal impulses or current transmitted, but excluding sun-flower and
    step-by-step wheels without auxiliary selectors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825+ for nontelegraph
    selective systems, analogous to the selective systems utilized in
    telegraphy but restricted to the communication of a limited amount of
    information or control.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    168+ for telephone call transmitters.


CLS 178/34
TXT Telegraph printing selector systems other than page printers under subclass
    33 employing type-wheel recorders.


CLS 178/35
TXT Single line circuit systems other than page printers under subclass 23
    employing type-wheel recorders.


CLS 178/36
TXT The recorders or printers, per se, under subclass 23 specialized for use in
    printing telegraph systems not otherwise provided for in the subclasses
    hereunder and excluding page printers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for page printing devices.

    26,     for page translating devices.

    27,     for page selecting devices.


CLS 178/37
TXT Recorders under subclass 36 for concealing or secreting the printed message
    from those not authorized to read it.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    380,    Cryptography, appropriate subclasses for cryptographic techniques
    and equipment.


CLS 178/38
TXT Type-wheel recorders under subclass 36 includes all type-wheel recorders
    other than page printers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for systems using type-wheel recorders.

    29,     for type-wheel recorders, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 139+ for specific structures of
    type-wheels.


CLS 178/39
TXT Type-wheel recorders under subclass 38 in which there are a plurality of
    circumferential rows of type, a row on the periphery of each of two or more
    type-wheels or a plurality of rows on a single wheel or its equivalent.


CLS 178/40
TXT Multiple type-wheel recorders under subclass 39 having means for shifting
    the type-wheel or the cooperating platen into position for printing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     for shifting devices in type-wheel page printers.


CLS 178/41
TXT Type-wheel recorders under subclass 38 provided with means whereby all
    connected recorders on the line may be brought to unison or their
    type-wheels stopped in the same or the initial position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for unison means in page printers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 41+ for means for
    synchronizing rotary members.


CLS 178/42
TXT Means under subclass 36 for guiding or feeding the paper or strip to the
    recorder in combination therewith or specific thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 332+ or 354+ for means
    to direct material between a supply coil and take-up coil, subclasses 535+
    and 548+ for a feeder or guide associated with convolute winding,
    subclasses 564.3+ and 566 for a feeder or guide associated with unwinding
    an elongated material, and subclasses 615+ for a guide directing indefinite
    length material.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 578+ for paper feeding devices,
    and subclasses 191+, for ribbon mechanisms.


CLS 178/43
TXT Systems under subclass 2 for transmitting messages by induction
    (electrostatic or electromagnetic) through the intervening space between
    neighboring or adjacent conductors, coils, or other circuit elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for use of coil transformers for superposing electrostatic or
    induced current signals upon lines already carrying ordinary Morse or other
    signaling current.

    64,     for use of induction-coils, transformers, etc., for current
    intensifying systems where the only space induction, is between the primary
    and secondary coils or is incidental and inconsequential and the object of
    the invention is current intensification and not space transmission by
    induction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclass 8 for inductive train
    telegraphy or telephony; subclass 63 for inductive cable signal or train
    control; and subclass 194 for inductive train mechanism control.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for the structure of
    transformers and inductive reactors.

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), appropriate subclasses, for radio and wireless
    signal and teledynamic systems. See especially Class 343, Communications:
    Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 866+ for loop type antennas.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclass 55.1 for similar apparatus
    employed in telephony.


CLS 178/45
TXT Wave transmission systems under subclass 2 having claims for conductors or
    lines loaded with inductance coils, condensers, etc., for preventing or
    diminishing attenuation or distortion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for loading coils, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 32+ for
    structural arrangements of conductors for anti-inductive purposes.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, particularly subclass 23 for
    artificial lines that may simulate loaded lines, and subclasses 236+ for
    smooth transmission lines having distributed parameters.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 749+ for antennas
    with a lumped reactance for loading the antenna; subclass 802 for doublet
    type antennas with distributed reactance added to the arms; and subclass
    828 for fractional, multiple or full wave length linear type antennas with
    a nonuniformity in the antenna.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 592 for metallic
    stock material of helical configuration or having a helical component.


CLS 178/46
TXT Induction or inductance coils under subclass 45 for loading circuits or
    cables adapted to wave transmission systems.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for cables or conductors provided with loading coils.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for the structure of
    transformers and inductive reactors.


CLS 178/47
TXT Systems under subclass 2 in which vibrating means, reeds, tuning forks,
    diaphragms, or rotary circuit interrupters, etc., are utilized in
    transmitting or receiving undulating currents and fundamentally
    characterized by the production of musical tones easily distinguishable
    from one another, so that a plurality of messages may be simultaneously
    transmitted over the same line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for simultaneous transmission of currents of different frequency,
    with tuned or resonant circuits, and usually generated by alternating
    current machines or equivalent.

    82,     for so-called "auto-dot" transmitters for transmitting dots by
    vibrating or reed circuit closers or interrupters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, subclasses 723+ for electric music instruments provided with
    a tuned sound wave generator, which may be used to produce electric
    currents or potentials of a particular wave form.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 19+ for
    periodically actuated switches.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 186+ for wave
    filters of the electromechanical transducer type.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 78+ for electromagnetically operated periodic
    switches.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for transformer and
    inductive reactor structure, and especially subclasses 130+ and the
    subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for inductor devices which have
    a movable core (e.g., vibrating reed, etc.).

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.38+ for party line
    selective systems, not restricted to telegraphy, utilizing needs.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclass 180 for application of reeds to
    call systems in telephony.


CLS 178/48
TXT Receiving or recording instruments under subclass 47 for harmonic systems,
    generally comprising a vibratory element electromagnetically actuated by
    the pulsating, intermittent, or wave currents peculiar to harmonic systems
    and employed for interpreting or recording messages.


CLS 178/49
TXT Composite systems and combinations under subclass 2 of two or more distinct
    systems of transmission, usually by employing currents of different
    character for signaling, though not limited thereto.  The superposed
    currents are generally produced by induction upon a line already carrying
    ordinary Morse or make and break current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44+,    for wave transmitting systems having means to diminish or prevent
    distortion or attenuation, and especially applicable to long lines, cables,
    and systems having large capacity or inductance.

    47,     for simultaneous transmission of messages by harmonic or tone
    telegraphy.

    51,     for resonant circuits tuned by inductance or capacity, or both, to
    receive currents of particular frequencies.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for the structure of
    transformers and inductive reactors.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclasses 496, 527, and 529 wherein a signaling or nonsignaling
    information is superposed on a main information in a multiplex
    communication system.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 37+ for protective signalling
    over a telephone line, subclasses 90+ for the combination of a diverse
    system of current transmission and a telephone system, subclasses 108+ for
    alternative use of a telephone or a telegraph over the same line.


CLS 178/62
TXT Systems under subclass 2 in which the message transmitted by current
    impulses or variations is recorded by the chemical or electrolytic action
    resulting therefrom; also recorders for recording code messages on
    chemically or specially prepared surfaces through the chemical change or
    electrolytic action produced by the impulses or current transmitted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3+,     for chemical systems having automatic transmitters, particularly
    subclass 11 for formation or production of records by successive-line
    apparatus.

    89,     and appropriate indented subclasses for features common to
    code-recorders.

    111,    for chemically prepared tapes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 52+ for electrolytic processes of
    recording messages.  The systems or other apparatus specialized for
    carrying out such processes are to be found in this class (178), subclass
    62.


CLS 178/63
TXT Systems under subclass 2 adapted to the transmission of code signals over
    cables or long lines, involving large electric capacity and usually
    characterized by the use of reversals of current in transmission, clearing
    line, eliminating "tailings", static compensation, etc.; also because of
    analogy of means all current reversing telegraph systems not otherwise
    classifiable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for automatic current reversing systems.

    44,     for wave transmitting systems having means to diminish or prevent
    distortion or attenuation, and especially applicable to long lines, cables,
    and systems involving large capacity or inductances.

    55+,    for quadruplex systems.

    58+,    for duplex systems.

    69,     for line clearing systems, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 12 for transmission
    line inductive or radiation interference reduction systems, and subclass 23
    for artificial lines simulating cable lines.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclass 257 for cable systems and
    components.


CLS 178/64
TXT Systems under subclass 2 for transmitting messages by induced currents
    having an induction-coil or transformer, usually with its primary in a
    local circuit, with the transmitter and its secondary in the main line;
    also includes systems utilizing induction-coils or transformers between
    sections of the main line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for systems transmitting messages through appreciable space by
    induction between lines, coils, or other elements.

    47,     for harmonic or tone telegraphy employing circuit interrupting
    transmitters or vibrating receivers.

    49,     for use of transformer or induction-coil in superposed-current
    signaling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Device, appropriate subclasses for the structure of
    transformers and inductive reactors.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 37+ for protective signalling
    over a telephone line, subclasses 90+ for the combination of a diverse
    system of current transmission and a telephone system, subclasses 108+ for
    alternative use of a telephone or a telegraph over the same line.


CLS 178/65
TXT Systems under subclass 2 not otherwise classifiable employing dynamo or
    magneto-electric machine-generated currents and claiming dynamo or
    magneto-electric machine structure or arrangements specific to telegraphic
    use and in combination with telegraph systems or instruments.


CLS 178/66.1
TXT Alternating or pulsating current:

    Systems under subclass 2 using alternating, pulsating, sine, or similar
    wave currents in the transmission of messages, but excluding harmonic or
    reed systems (defined in subclass 47).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for alternating current transmitting means employed in superposed
    current telegraphy.

    63,     for systems employing reversal of current and pole changers for
    reversing currents.

    69,     for prevention of leakage, induction, and "tailings" and for
    capacity compensation, etc., and not otherwise specific to duplex or a
    quadruplex or cable systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses for demodulators and detectors
    in general, particularly subclasses 311+ for pulse demodulators; and
    subclasses 315+, for frequency demodulators and 345+ for phase demodulators
    respectively.

    330,    Amplifiers, appropriate subclasses for various types of amplifiers.

    331,    Oscillators, appropriate subclasses for electrical oscillators in
    general, particularly subclass 179 for step-frequency change oscillator
    systems (e.g., frequency shift type).

    332,    Modulators, appropriate subclasses for modulators, and particularly
    subclasses 117+ for frequency modulators, 144+ for phase modulators -- and
    -- 149+ --, respectively and subclasses 31+ for amplitude modulators.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 259+ for pulse or
    digital communication systems using alternating or pulsating current.


CLS 178/66.2
TXT Transmitter keying:

    Subject matter under subclass 66.1 having a transmitter which is turned on
    and off or "keyed".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17+,    for automatic keyed transmitters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclass 309 for pulse or digital
    transmitter keying circuits.


CLS 178/67.1
TXT Modified semicycle:

    Alternating current systems under subclass 66.1 in which messages are sent
    by suppressing, reversing, augmenting, or otherwise modifying one or more
    halves of the sine or similar wave cycles on one or the other side of the
    line of zero potential, in accordance with a predetermined code.


CLS 178/69
TXT Systems under subclass 2 having means for clearing the line of static
    charges, preventing "tailings", neutralizing the residual magnetism of
    instruments, neutralizing inductance, adjusting against leakage, and in
    general maintaining the line circuit in normal condition, and though
    adapted to capacity or cable systems not limited thereto; also systems
    having means for preventing the detrimental effects produced by induction
    from external or internal causes and not specific to any particular system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for automatic telegraph systems.

    16,     for automatic current reversing systems.

    44,     for long line type transmission systems and coupling devices
    therefor.

    45,     for loaded line systems.

    46,     for loading coils, per se.

    55+     and 58+, for similar means involved in quadruplex and duplex
    systems, respectively.

    63,     for combinations of such apparatus in and with specific systems of
    telegraphy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 89+
    for systems of transmitting electricity having means for preventing
    induction or coupling to other electrical systems.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 12 for transmission
    line inductive or radiation interference reduction systems.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 398 and 415 for
    anti-inductive systems or devices for telephony.


CLS 178/69.6
TXT Means under subclass 2 for signaling a remote operator, who, in response to
    such signaling connects the recorder.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes cross references of patents directed
    to other systems but including such means.


CLS 178/70
TXT Means under class definition whereby the relay, sounder, or recorder on the
    opening and closing of another circuit with which it is suitably connected
    is caused to repeat the signals received into another line or circuit.
    Repeaters of this subclass establish direct communication between distant
    stations or connect branch and main lines and operate in but one direction
    at a time and require the services of an attendant for changing the
    direction of the operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for repeaters adapted to quadruplex telegraphy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, appropriate subclasses for amplifiers of various types,
    particularly subclass 61 for those operating on the principle of the
    microphone.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, appropriate subclasses for electromagnetically operated
    circuit controllers generally, and subclasses 220+ for electromagnets with
    armatures.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 291 for signal box system
    repeaters, such as those which repeat signals arriving at a central to a
    plurality of fire houses.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 236+ for
    speed controlled systems, subclasses 139+ for electromagnetic device
    control circuits, and subclass 211 for nonelectromagnetic relay control
    circuits.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 211+ for pulse
    repeaters.

    379,    Telephonic Communications subclasses 338+ for two way repeaters,
    specific to telephone work and usually operating on the principle of the
    microphone by varying the renewal current by variable contact pressure.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 7+ for analog modulated carrier wave
    repeaters.


CLS 178/71.1
TXT Automatic in either direction:

    Telegraph repeater under subclass 70R which operates in either direction
    without the interposition or aid of an operator at the repeating station.


CLS 178/71.11
TXT Piezoelectric:

    Telegraph repeater under subclass 71.1 using effect of a material which
    generated an electrical output when subjected to a mechanical stress.


CLS 178/71.12
TXT Vacuum tube and relay:

    Telegraph repeaters under subclass 71.1 using a space discharge tube and an
    electromechanical operated contact.


CLS 178/71.13
TXT Relay only:

    Telegraph repeater under subclass 71.1 using exclusively electromechanical
    operated contact.


CLS 178/71.14
TXT Supervisory, alarm, monitor:

    Subject matter under subclass 71.1 having provision for indicating or
    handling an abnormal performance of the telegraph repeater.


CLS 178/71.2
TXT Distributor:

    Telegraph repeater under subclass 71.1 having a signal supply means which
    rotates for successively connecting lines, or having switches which are
    selectively controlled by a code selection mechanism (e.g., keyboard).


CLS 178/71.3
TXT Mechanical:

    Telegraph repeater under subclass 71.1 having details of motor driven
    cam-operated contacts.


CLS 178/71.4
TXT Generator:

    Telegraph repeaters under subclass 71.1 in which signal currents are
    amplified by a dynamo electric device.


CLS 178/71.5
TXT Artificial line and relay:

    Telegraph repeater under subclass 71.1 having an auxiliary line for
    balancing impedance and an electromechanical operated contact.


CLS 178/71.6
TXT Vacuum tube and gas magnetron:

    Telegraph repeater under subclass 71.1 using a space discharge tube and an
    ultra or super high power generated electron tube.


CLS 178/71.7
TXT Code transformer:

    Telegraph repeater under subclass 71.1 having means for translating direct
    current impulses of telegraph code signals into alternating carrier
    currents, or vice versa.


CLS 178/71.8
TXT Oscillatory:

    Telegraph repeater under subclass 71.1 using a vibrating circuit for timing
    individual signal impulses.


CLS 178/71.9
TXT One-way repeater switched:

    Telegraph repeater under subclass 71.1 having means to select a relay on
    either side of the repeater for transmitting or receiving.


CLS 178/72
TXT Automatic repeaters under subclass 71 in which the relay armature of the
    outgoing circuit is mechanically held by locks, catches, stops, etc., from
    breaking the circuit when the receiving relay opens the circuit.


CLS 178/73
TXT Automatic repeaters under subclass 71 adapted to repeat the transmitted
    messages into a plurality of circuits or lines.


CLS 178/74
TXT Subcombinations of systems or local circuit arrangements under class
    definition not amounting to systems nor specific to any particular type of
    system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes branch connections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricty: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 220+ for electromagnets with armatures.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ for
    electromagnetic device control circuits, and subclass 211 for
    nonelectromagnetic relay control circuits.


CLS 178/75
TXT Circuits under subclass 74 provided with manipulating switches specific to
    telegraphy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, for circuit controllers
    of general application.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 600+ for
    switchboards of general application.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 352+ for call transmitters;
    subclasses 242+ for switchboards; subclasses 422+ for switches, and
    subclass 302 for rotary contact switches, specific to telephone work.


CLS 178/76
TXT Telegraph circuits under subclass 74 having devices for closing the
    circuits after they have been left open or for gradual closing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for self-closing telegraph keys.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 33+ for
    retarded circuit controllers of general application, and subclass 108 for
    retarded latch trip electromagnetically actuated circuit controllers.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 59+ for retarded or delayed action
    electromagnetically actuated circuit controllers and subclasses 172+ for
    retarded latch trip means for electromagnetically actuated circuit
    controllers.


CLS 178/77
TXT Telegraph instruments under class definition structurally united in one or
    capable of performing the functions of two or more separate instruments,
    except combinations with transmitters, separately classified under
    "Code-transmitters."

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     for structural combinations of code-transmitters with some other
    telegraph instrument.

    81,     for transmitters combined with typewriters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 1+ for a combination of
    electrophotographic devices with diverse subject matter.


CLS 178/78
TXT Compact arrangements under subclass 77 of telegraph instruments or sets
    combining devices and connections for tapping lines and transmitting or
    receiving messages.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 419+ for telephone sets.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, for a detachable connector adapted to be
    permanently secured to a connector; and see especially subclasses 477+ for
    an overhead line type connector having a handle or manipulating means.


CLS 178/79
TXT Devices under class definition for making and breaking the circuit in
    predetermined and fixed manner in accordance with code signals and
    involving a specific structure for each key or other transmitting element,
    whereby each transmits a different signal, thereby enabling a code or a
    message to be transmitted by their successive action at the will of the
    operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for automatic transmitters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 307+ for transmitters
    utilized with signal box systems.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 20+ and 173+ for a
    pulse code transmitter.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 245 for pole
    changing transmitters and pole changers of the magnet and lever type
    energized by a local circuit controlled by a manually operated key or
    equivalent.


CLS 178/80
TXT Code-transmitters under subclass 79 structurally united or combined with
    some other instrument or having the function of some other instrument.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for structurally combined instruments, not including transmitters.


CLS 178/81
TXT Means under subclass 80 for transmitting signals and printing the message
    simultaneously at the same station and comprising typewriters having
    electromechanical devices or attachments to or for typewriters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25+,    for page printing systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 70+ for electrically actuated
    typewriters.


CLS 178/82
TXT Transmitters under subclass 79 having means for producing one or more dots,
    as may be desired, and automatically as long as a key or lever is held in
    one position and a dash of desired length by placing or holding it in
    another position, the automatic dot means comprising a vibrator of some
    type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for other types of vibrating transmitters or receivers.


CLS 178/83
TXT Code-transmitters under subclass 79 in which one of the contact members is
    arranged to rotate or revolve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 309 and 535 for make and
    break wheel type signal box system transmitters.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 20+ and 173+ for a
    pulse code transmitter.


CLS 178/84
TXT Rotary contact transmitters under subclass 83 having a drum or cylinder for
    one of the contact members or on which contacts are placed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83,     for rotary disk transmitters.


CLS 178/85
TXT Code-transmitters under subclass 79 having a contact member arranged to
    move to and fro in curved lines.


CLS 178/86
TXT Code-transmitters under subclass 79 having a contact member arranged to
    move into and out of contact in straight lines.


CLS 178/87
TXT Code transmitters under subclass 79 in which code characters or contacts
    are conveniently arranged on a tablet, the other contact being on a movable
    hand-controlled stylus; also inventions in tablets or styluses, per se,
    specific to telegraphy.


CLS 178/89
TXT Electromagnetic instruments under subclass 88 for making a visible record
    of dots and dashes or other code messages on a suitable recording surface,
    usually a paper strip or tape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for recorders adapted to automatic systems.

    25,     for page printing systems.

    36+,    for printing recorders.

    48,     for receivers and recorders peculiar to harmonic or tone telegraphy.

    62,     for recorders operated by chemical   action.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 220+ for electromagnets with armatures.

    346,    Recorders, appropriate subclasses.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ and
    subclass 211 for miscellaneous relay circuits.


CLS 178/90
TXT Code recorders under subclass 89 in which the record is made by photography.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for automatic systems with photographic recorder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 302+ for facsimile systems with photographic
    recorders.

    386,    Television Signal Processing for Dynamic Recording or Reproducing,
    subclasses 30, 42+, and 128+ for photographic television recording or
    reproducing, particularly subclasses 38 and 117 for video apparatus
    combined with camera for recording television signal.


CLS 178/91
TXT Code-recorders under subclass 89 having a siphon for supplying the ink or
    fluid to produce the record.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     for telegraph systems in which siphon recorders are ordinarily
    employed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 76.11+ for electric
    meters and meter movements.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 148+ for moving coil switches and subclass 222
    for relay devices with a coil movable relative to a permanent magnet.


CLS 178/92
TXT Code-recorders under subclass 89 for indenting, embossing, or perforating
    the record in the tape.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    197,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 6+ for letter-embossing
    typewriters.


CLS 178/93
TXT Code-recorders under subclass 89 having polarized magnets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 76.11+ for electric
    meters and meter movements.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 78+ for polarity responsive electromagnetically
    actuated switches and subclasses 220+ for electromagnetic-mechanical
    transducers.


CLS 178/94
TXT Code-recorders under subclass 89 in which the record is made by pyrographic
    means or by burning the record into the tape.


CLS 178/95
TXT Code-recorders under subclass 89 having means for stopping the movement of
    the tape when each signal is recorded.

    (1)     Note.  See search data under subclass 42 in this class.


CLS 178/96
TXT Code-recorders under subclass 89 having claims for or disclosing specific
    linking features.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     for inking by means of a siphon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclasses 335+ for inking devices employed in printing.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 197+ for inking means adapted to
    typewriters.


CLS 178/97
TXT Code-recorders under subclass 89 in which the tape has a lateral movement,
    usually toward the recording element, in addition to the longitudinal feed
    movement.

    (1)     Note.  See search data under subclass 42 in this class.


CLS 178/98
TXT Devices under subclass 88 usually comprising an electromagnet and armature
    for producing distinct audible signals in conformity to the code employed
    and characterized by some acoustical properties.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 137+ for mechanical instruments
    or devices for simulating code signals.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 2+ for electromagnetically actuated circuit
    controllers generally and subclasses 220+ for electromagnets with armatures.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ and
    subclass 211 for relay circuits.


CLS 178/99.1
TXT Private (e.g., acoustically shielded):

    Subject matter under subclass 98 which restricts the sounds produced to the
    recipient of the signal.

    (1)     Note.  The sound restriction is generally produced by a sound
    blocking device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, appropriate subclasses for a sound blocking device.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 384.1+ for an electrical
    signalling sound producer.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclass
    158 for an acoustic reproducing transducer with a sound attenuating element.


CLS 178/100
TXT Sounders under subclass 98 having means--such as box sounders, resonators,
    sounding boards, etc.--for intensifying the audible signals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 177+ for sound intensifying horn.


CLS 178/101
TXT Manually operated lever instruments under class definition for making and
    breaking the circuit to transmit at will dash or dot or code signals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 18 for mechanical instruments or
    devices for simulating code signals.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ for
    control circuits for electromagnetic devices. See subclass 211 for
    nonelectromagnetic relay control circuit.


CLS 178/102
TXT Telegraph keys under subclass 101 having a plurality of circuit closing
    contacts in excess of the usual number--two.


CLS 178/103
TXT Telegraph keys under subclass 101 for transmitting over a plurality of
    lines.


CLS 178/104
TXT Telegraph keys under subclass 101 which automatically close the line
    circuit when released or left open by the operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76,     for other devices for closing circuits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 33+ for
    retarded circuit controllers generally.


CLS 178/105
TXT Telegraph keys under subclass 101 in which the lever, finger button, or
    contacts may be adjusted or swung around to facilitate transmission with
    either hand or to vary its movements to prevent hand fatigue.


CLS 178/106
TXT Telegraph keys under subclass 101 having one or more of the contacts
    movable or revoluble, so that the points of contact may be renewed when
    they are roughened or burned by heavy currents or use.


CLS 178/107
TXT Keys under subclass 101 in which the contact lever oscillates on a
    knife-edge pivot.


CLS 178/108
TXT Telegraph keys under subclass 101 in which the key lever is mounted to
    swing horizontally.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     for automatic vibrators having horizontal swing.


CLS 178/109
TXT Telegraph keys under subclass 101 made of spring metal or connected to
    their supports by leaf springs functioning as pivots.


CLS 178/110
TXT Inventions under subclass 101 involving the structure or arrangements of
    the finger buttons or manipulating handles of telegraph keys.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for modifications of finger button structure adapted to
    self-closing keys.


CLS 178/111
TXT Specially prepared strips under class definition adapted to receive or to
    transmit a record of code signals. Includes sensitized and chemically
    prepared tapes, as well as those having structural features adapted for use
    in either recording or transmitting code signals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, subclass 115 for automatic selectors of the winding and
    rewinding type; subclass 146 for trackers and sheets for automatic
    selectors; and subclass 161 for note sheets for automatic selectors, for
    use in automatic musical instruments.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 191+ for inking ribbons specific
    to or adapted to typewriters.


CLS 178/112
TXT Tapes under subclass 111 especially adapted to automatic or printing
    systems by the provisions of code perforations, notched edges, pole
    changing characteristics, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, subclass 115 for automatic selectors; subclass 122 for
    automatic selectors of the winding and rewinding type subclass 146 for
    trackers and sheets for automatic selectors; and subclass 161 for note
    sheets for automatic selectors, for use in automatic musical instruments.


CLS 178/114
TXT Supporting stands under class definition adapted to facilitate connecting
    up or manipulating telegraph instruments or arrangements thereof specific
    to telegraphy and not otherwise classifiable.


CLS 178/115
TXT Electrical instruments under class definition for assisting beginners in
    learning code signals and manipulating telegraph instruments in sending or
    receiving.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclass 222 for mechanical devices
    for teaching or practicing telegraphy or simulating code signals.


CLS 178/116
TXT Spark gap or arc discharge:

    Subject matter under subclass 66.1 wherein a transmitter employs the
    negative-resistance characteristics of an arc or the oscillatory discharge
    of a capacitor through an inductor and a spark gap as a source of radio
    frequency oscillations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 106+
    for pulse producing systems which may employ a spark gap for discharging a
    condenser.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses for
    spark gap or arc devices, per se.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    appropriate subclasses for spark gap devices with consumable electrodes.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 127 for oscillators of the spark or open arc
    type.

    332,    Modulators, appropiate subclasses  for modulators of the spark or
    open arc type.


CLS 178/117
TXT Coherer:

    Subject matter under subclass 66.1 including a variable resistance device
    consisting of loosely packed conductive particles placed between two
    electrodes, the resistance of the conductive path between the electrodes
    being a function of an applied electric field.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclass 43 for active solid-state type coherers.

    329,    Demodulators, subclass 371 for a coherer type amplitude modulation
    demodulator.


CLS 178/118
TXT RECEIVERS:

    Miscellaneous devices under the class definition for converting received
    telegraph signals into a perceptible form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     for long transmission line systems having large distributed
    capacitance, such as cables.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for
    electric meters and electric meter movements.

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses for demodulators of the type
    used to demodulate radio waves.

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 2+ for electromagnetically actuated circuit
    controllers generally; and subclasses 220+ for electromagnets with
    armatures.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 287+ for signal box
    receivers; subclasses 366+ for visual receivers; subclasses 384.1+ for
    audible receivers; and subclasses 407.1+ for miscellaneous, such as tactual
    receivers.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 1+ for visual display systems
    with selective electrical control.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ for
    miscellaneous relay circuits.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for multiplexing.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, for pulse communications in
    general; and subclasses 316+ for pulse receivers.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 130 for radio receivers generally.


CLS 178/119
TXT Optical member:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 in which optical devices are used.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunication, subclasses 600+ for optical communications.


CLS 178/120
TXT With electron tube or solid-state device:
    Subject matter under subclass 118 which contains an active element such as
    a transistor or electron space discharge device.


CLS 180/
TTL MOTOR VEHICLES

CLS 180/
TXT This class relates to the propulsion of land vehicles by a motor carried on
    the vehicle and to the following subject matter, which may be considered as
    incidental to such propulsion:

    1.      The mounting of a motor on a land vehicle.

    2.      Transmission mechanism in connection with specific vehicle
    structure.  (See (1) Note (b).

    3.      Power steering-gear for land vehicles.

    4.      Power means for raising a frame or body relative to a wheel or
    wheels.

    5.      Devices not of general application for utilizing the power of the
    power plant of a land vehicle to drive other machines, the specific
    structure of such machines not being involved.

    6.      Controlling devices in connection with land vehicle structure.

    7.      Gyroscopes in connection with land vehicle structure.

    8.      Safety devices involving a feature limited to use on motor vehicles.

    9.      Motor Vehicles provided with wheel substitutes.  This includes
    vehicles with wheel substitutes even though no power or driving means is
    claimed unless the vehicle claimed is identified in the specific disclosure
    as only a nonmotor vehicle.  Further, this class takes fluid supported
    suction effect and surface effect vehicles, including subcombinations drawn
    to the fluid producing means even though no power or driving means or
    specific vehicle structure is claimed or disclosed.

    (1)     Note.  The preceding definition is subject to the following
    exceptions:

    (a)     This class is superior to the various motor classes, and whenever a
    patent contains claims involving in any degree the structure of the vehicle
    in connection with a power plant or the location and arrangement of the
    motive-power plant relative thereto it is placed in this class.  The mere
    mention of a vehicle broadly, or of such parts as are necessarily involved
    in the definition of a vehicle, in a claim which is in other respects drawn
    to the specific construction of the power plant, does not cause such an
    assignment, the classification being then based on the power-plant
    structure, so that the patent is assigned to the appropriate motor class.

    (b)     Transmission mechanism for driving vehicle-wheels is classified
    with other transmission mechanism in Class 74, Machine Element or
    Mechanism, even when there is an inclusion in a claim for such structure of
    a frame, body or boiler, an axle, and traction-wheels.  In general,
    however, inventions relating to vehicle structure are classified in Class
    180, although transmission mechanism is included. Transmission-trains
    designed to drive the road-wheels on opposite sides of a vehicle at the
    same speed and when desired at different speeds or in different directions
    or to drive the wheel on one side only are placed in Class 180. Patents
    containing claims for vehicle-springs in connection with transmission
    mechanism are placed in Class 180.  Patents having two sets of claims, one
    relating to vehicle structure of general application and the other to
    transmission mechanism, are placed in this class.  Transmission mechanism
    for an occupant-propelled vehicle in connection with vehicle structure is
    found in Class 280, Land Vehicles.

    (c)     Self-propelled vehicles carrying or constituting a device designed
    to perform a function not incidental to transportation are classified in
    the class having such devices when a functional manipulation or mounting of
    the device or more structure than is necessary for connection to the
    running gear is claimed.  For example, a traction-engine claimed in
    connection with a plow is placed in Class 172, Earth Working.

    (2)     Note.  The term "steering wheel" used in the following definitions
    means a road-wheel, the axis of which may be swung so as to change the
    course of the vehicle; however, see (2) Note of subclass 252 for an
    exception to this practice.  By the term "normal wheel-base" is meant the
    arrangement of the four wheels of a vehicle so that straight lines joining
    the points of contact of the wheels with the road form approximately a
    rectangle when the steering wheels are in the straight-away position.

    (3      Note.  Vehicle structure designed for motor-vehicles, but not
    involving features mentioned in the preceding definition, will be found in
    Classes 280, Land Vehicles, 296, Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, and 301,
    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, (see (1) Note (b)).

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, appropriate subclasses (e.g., subclasses
    215.1+) for a motor vehicle which includes means whereby it may operate in
    the manner of a vehicle of that class (105).

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 3 for earth working apparatus with
    automatic motive power control, subclasses 114+ for a driven earth working
    tool mounted on a vehicle, specific propelling means for the vehicle being
    claimed, and subclass 292 for earth working apparatus in which specific
    propelling means are claimed.  Also, see (1) Note (c), above.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 184+ for a tool driving or
    impacting device combined with a vehicle support.

    244,    Aeronautics, appropriate subclasses (e.g., subclasses 2, 17.17, 50)
    for a vehicle of that class which either is combined with a land or water
    vehicle or else includes means whereby it may operate in one or more
    respects (e.g., braking, steering, etc.) in the manner of a land or a water
    vehicle.

    280,    Land Vehicles, (see (3) Note).

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, (see (3) Note).

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, (see (3) Note).

    305,    Wheel Substitutes for Land Vehicles, for wheel substitutes, per se.
     Class 180 takes patents relating to a vehicle, disclosed as a motor
    vehicle, where some vehicle structure or a special relationship between the
    vehicle frame and the wheel substitute is set forth in the claims,
    irrespective of whether or not any driving means is claimed.  However such
    expressions as a "vehicle frame", an "axle", a "pivotal connection between
    the vehicle frame and wheel substitute carrying frame" in claims which are
    otherwise directed to specific wheel substitute structure are considered
    mere nominal recitations of vehicle structure and are not excluded from
    Class 305.  Also Class 180 takes patents claiming some element of the
    driving means of a wheel substitute except that the mere broad recitation
    of a drive means, drive axle or drive sprocket for a wheel substitute is
    not sufficient to exclude the patent from Class 305, if the vehicle is
    otherwise only nominally recited in the claims. Further Class 180 takes
    suction effect and surface effect vehicles even though no driving means or
    specific vehicle structure is claimed.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 6+ for a
    vehicle responsive parking meter and subclasses 1+ for an horological
    device acted upon by a disparate device.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, for a planetary
    gear transmission in a vehicle drive train. The same line exists between
    Class 180 and Class 475 as exists between Class 180 and Class 74.

    477,    Interrelated Power Delivery Controls, Including Engine Control, for
    interrelated control between an engine and a transmission, clutch, or
    brake.  Class 477 was formed from patents in Classes 74 and 192 and so the
    same line exists between Class 180 and Class 477 as exists between Class
    180 and Classes 74 and 192.

    INDEX OF CLASSES REFERRED TO IN THE CLASS DEFINITION AND SUBCLASS
    DEFINITIONS OF THIS CLASS:



    CLASS   REFERRED TO HEREIN AT



    5       166

    15      271

    16      69.2

    24      268

    49      281, 286, 289

    56      8.1, 19.1, 41, 116, 337

    60      36, 54.1, 89.2, 165, 296,

            301, 303, 305, 309, 367

    70      69.2, 287, 289

    73      170

    74      Class Definition, 6.2, 6.44,6.62,

            36, 53.1, 54.1, 69.2, 76, 78, 90.6,

            170, 230, 231, 239, 241, 248,

            250, 251, 260, 271, 337, 346,
            347, 364, 365, 367, 369, 383

    91      303

    104     7.1, 116, 131

    105     Class Definition, 8.1, 15,

            63, 68.5, 116, 291, 337

    111     337

    114     2.2, 116, 182,

    122     303

    123     54.1, 78, 170, 287

    128     272

    137     170, 287

    165     68.4, 229

    172     Class Definition, 8.1 9.1,

            9.22, 14.5, 19.1, 20, 53.1,

            131, 337

    173     Class Definition, 53.1

    175     90

    181     89.2, 296, 309

    184     69.1, 339

    185     54.1, 166

    188     6.2, 182, 232, 244, 271,

            273, 276, 287, 300, 370

    191     2.1, 65.1

    192     6.2, 6.62, 14.5, 76,

            170, 271, 292, 293,

            367, 370, 383, 385

    200     174, 274, 282, 287

    222     53.1

    224     68.5

    239     2.1, 271

    242     7.1, 53.1, 268

    244     Class Definition, 116, 167,

            180, 268, 315

    246     167, 170, 272

    248     68.5, 89.2, 164, 228,

            291, 293, 296, 300, 309

    254     7.1, 199

    267     227, 228

    277     339

    280     Class Definition, 6.24, 6.64, 2.2,

            7.1, 8.1, 9.1, 9.4, 10,11, 14.1,
            14.5, 19.1, 36, 39, 41, 79, 79.5,
            84,131,165, 166, 181, 182, 183,

            189, 194, 196, 199, 205, 208,
            209, 210, 211, 218, 225, 227,
            232, 234, 240, 252, 253, 263,
            264, 266, 268, 271, 282, 291,
            310, 311, 337

    290     54.1, 65.1

    291     271

    292     289

    293     89.2, 225, 271, 274, 275,
            279,296,

            309

    295     10

    296     Class Definition, 89.1, 89.11,

            89.12, 90.6, 208, 232, 311

    297     268.1, 271.1

    301     Class Definition, 344, 348, 385

    303     271, 272, 287

    305     Class Definition, 7.1, 8.1, 9,

            9.1, 9.26, 9.44, 9.5, 9.62,

            10, 116, 182, 193

    307     268, 287

    310     54.1, 55, 65.1

    318     79.1, 167, 170

    320     65.1

    340     167, 171, 268, 271, 272,

            273, 287, 288

    343     169

    361     78, 170, 178

    368     Class Definition

    384     63, 379, 381

    403     247, 254, 385

    404     20

    414     116

    415     54.1

    434     116

    454     84

    464     53.1, 254, 381

    474     337, 346, 350, 351, 357, 366

    475     Class Definition,
            6.2, 6.44, 76, 230, 248,
            337, 364, 365, 367, 368,
            369, 371, 372

    477     Class Definition,
            6.2, 69.6, 170, 197, 248,
            271, and 337


CLS 180/2.1
TXT MOTOR SUPPLIED WITH POWER FROM AN EXTERNAL SOURCE:

    Motors under class definition supplied from without the vehicle with fuel
    or an equivalent during the travel of the vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, which contains inventions
    relating to the transmission of electrical energy from fixed points to
    vehicles, and not involving specific vehicle structure nor specific means
    for applying the electrical energy to any specific purpose.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 738 and 746
    for ambulant sprayers with a stationary fluid supply and having a carriage
    propelled by the energy of the fluid to be sprayed.


CLS 180/2.2
TXT Source comprises or includes energy derived from a force of nature (e.g.,
    sun, wind):

    Motor vehicles under subclass 2.1 wherein the source of power for the motor
    is derived from a freely occurring natural force (e.g., sun, wind).

    (1)     Note.  For the purposes of this subclass, although a sail is
    powered by a natural force, it is not considered a motor under the class
    definition and therefor vehicles powered by sails except in connection with
    a motor are excluded from this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclasses 39.1+, for sail powered boats.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 1, 213 and 810 for sail powered land
    vehicles.


CLS 180/6.2
TXT Vehicles under the class definition having means to cause a relative
    difference in rate of travel between traction elements on opposite sides,
    as by:  (1) unclutching or otherwise disengaging the road traction element
    or elements on one side from its driving means; (2) changing the speed of,
    or the amount of power transmitted to, the traction element or elements to
    produce a differential effect; or (3) varying the effective tractive area
    of the driving element or elements.

    (1)     Note.  The line between this group of subclasses and Classes 74,
    Machine Element or Mechanism, 188, Brakes and 192, Clutches and Power-Stop
    Control and 475, Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, is that
    where specific vehicle frame structure or arrangement not related to the
    transmission of power is claimed, such as, the location or equilibrious
    positioning of the motor, transmission or the like on the frame, or other
    vehicle feature (e.g., load carrying structure or nondriven wheels),
    classification is in Class 180.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for vehicles in which the driving wheels are positively moved by
    independent means for steering the vehicle.

    24.01,  for vehicles in which wheels other than driving wheels are
    positively moved by independent means for steering the vehicle.

    24.08,  for similar devices in which steering of the vehicle is not
    involved.

    400+,   for power steering gear mechanism and steering gear combined with
    vehicle power features.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses, for power
    transmitting elements included in steering by driving mechanism wherein
    specific vehicle structure or specific relation with vehicle structure is
    not claimed (i.e., the vehicle is included in name only).  See (1) Note.

    188,    Brakes, appropriate subclasses, for brakes included in steering by
    driving mechanism wherein no significant vehicle structure is claimed.  See
    (1) Note.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, appropriate subclasses, for brakes
    and clutches, plural clutches, transmission control with brake control or
    clutch, etc., wherein no significant vehicle structure is claimed.  See (1)
    Note.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses 18+
    for steering by driving. See (1) Note.

    477,    Interrelated Power Delivery Controls, Including Engine Control, for
    steering by driving, including interrelated engine and transmission,
    clutch, or brake controls and lacking significant vehicle structure.  The
    same line exists between Class 180 and Class 477 as exists between Class
    180 and Class 74 as set forth above.


CLS 180/6.24
TXT Vehicles under subclass 6.2 having combined therewith means for manually
    turning or rotating ground engaging elements about a vertical axis; i.e.,
    conventional steering gear.

    (1)     Note.  The manual steering mechanism for the most part controls
    nondriven wheels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400+,   for power steering gear mechanisms and steering gear combined with
    vehicle power features.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 771+, for conventional steering gear for
    vehicles.


CLS 180/6.26
TXT Combinations under subclass 6.24 in which the mechanism for steering by
    driving is controlled by or responsive to the manual steering mechanism.


CLS 180/6.28
TXT Combined steering mechanisms under subclass 6.26 in which the interlocked
    relation between the steering mechanisms is accomplished by means of
    electromechanical responsive devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6.44,   for auxiliary electric motors used to effect steering by driving.

    6.5,    for electric traction motors that drive traction elements and are
    controlled to effect steering by driving.


CLS 180/6.3
TXT Combined steering mechanisms under subclass 6.26 in which the interlocked
    relation between the steering mechanisms is accomplished through the medium
    of a fluid pressure system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6.44,   for auxiliary fluid motors used to effect steering by driving.

    6.48,   for fluid traction motors that drive traction elements and are
    controlled to effect steering by driving.


CLS 180/6.32
TXT Combined steering mechanisms under subclass 6.26 in which the interlocked
    relation between the steering mechanisms is accomplished by means of a
    mechanical lever and/or linkage system.


CLS 180/6.34
TXT Steering mechanisms under subclass 6.32 in which the mechanical lever
    and/or linkage system is operated or controlled by a cam mechanism.


CLS 180/6.36
TXT Steering mechanisms under subclass 6.32 in which the mechanical lever
    and/or linkage systems is constructed so as to have lost motion.

    (1)     Note.  These devices, for the most part, are operative only when
    making sharp turns.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6.34,   for cam controlled linkage systems having a lost motion.


CLS 180/6.38
TXT Steering mechanisms under subclass 6.32 in which the motion of the
    mechanical lever and/or linkage system is controlled by geared members.


CLS 180/6.4
TXT Steering mechanisms under subclass 6.32 in which the mechanical lever
    and/or linkage system includes flexible and/or yieldable elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6.36,   for yieldable elements providing lost motion in the steering
    mechanism.


CLS 180/6.44
TXT Vehicles under subclass 6.2 in which a separate motor is used to modify or
    vary the drive to the traction element or elements to effect steering by
    driving.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6.28,   for auxiliary electric motors in steering by driving systems
    combined with manual steering mechanisms.

    6.3,    for auxiliary fluid motors in steering by driving systems combined
    with manual steering mechanisms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 640+ for gearing in
    general with two power sources.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses 1+
    for planetary gearing having two power sources.


CLS 180/6.48
TXT Vehicles under subclass 6.2 in which different traction elements are driven
    by individually controlled motor units for varying motor power output to
    effect steering by driving.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6.3,    for independently operable fluid drive motors in steering by
    driving systems combined with manual steering mechanism.


CLS 180/6.5
TXT Combinations under subclass 6.48 in which the motor units are electrical.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6.28,   for electrical motor units used in interlocked steering mechanisms.


CLS 180/6.54
TXT Vehicles under subclass 6.2 in which the effective tractive area of a
    traction element or elements is varied.

    (1)     Note.  These vehicles, for the most part, have endless flexible
    traction elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6.7,    for vehicles having endless flexible traction elements, steered by
    driving, but not involving variable ground contact.

    15,     for vehicles having auxiliary traction elements.

    16,     for auxiliary traction elements adapted to be attached to vehicles.


CLS 180/6.58
TXT Vehicles under subclass 6.2 in which means for controlling the steering by
    driving mechanism is located on a pivotally mounted platform or turntable
    type of superstructure.

    (1)     Note.  These are for the most part vehicles having endless flexible
    tracks.


CLS 180/6.6
TXT Combinations under subclass 6.58 in which the steering by driving mechanism
    is responsive to the position of and/or controllable by the rotation of the
    superstructure.


CLS 180/6.62
TXT Vehicles under subclass 6.2 claimed in combination with features other than
    the steering by driving structure and not provided for in preceding
    subclasses.

    (1)     Note.  Steering by driving structure includes propulsive ground
    engaging elements and power, transmission and/or driving means such as will
    produce variation in the relative motion of the traction elements either by
    changing power or tractive effort, with connecting framework or platform.

    (2)     Note.  In this subclass, for example, are combinations with power
    take-offs, hitches or hangers for a trailing load or animal draft, furrow
    engaging wheels used as a controlling element for the steering by driving
    mechanism, and supports on which the vehicle can be tilted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6.24+,  for steering by driving mechanism combined with manual steering
    mechanism.

    6.58+,  for steering by driving mechanism combined with a rotatably mounted
    superstructure.

    53.1+,  for other power take-offs combined with vehicle structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 11+ for power take-offs,
    per se.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, the unnumbered title "Interrelated
    power delivery controls" and see the Notes thereto for interrelated control
    of one or more of prime movers, clutches, gearing, brakes and loads by name
    only.


CLS 180/6.64
TXT Vehicles under subclass 6.2 having a frame member, carrying driven traction
    elements, mounted so as to swing about a vertical axis in response to the
    steering by driving.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14.1+,  for articulated trains of motor vehicles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 400+ for jointed vehicles or vehicle
    trains.


CLS 180/6.66
TXT Vehicles under subclass 6.2 in which means are provided for driving the
    traction elements in relatively reverse directions to effect steering by
    driving.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6.48+,  for vehicles driven by individually controlled motor units capable
    of selectively reversing the drive to their respective traction elements.


CLS 180/6.7
TXT Vehicles under subclass 6.2 wherein the traction elements are flexible and
    endless.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6.58+,  for endless flexible tracked vehicles mounting a rotatable
    superstructure.

    9.1+,   for endless flexible tracked vehicles not involving steering by
    driving.


CLS 180/7.1
TXT SPECIAL DRIVING DEVICE:

    Motor-vehicles under class definition driven in some other way than by the
    mere rotation of road-wheels as traction-wheels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    for surface effect vehicles.

    164,    for a motor vehicle having powered means for creating a fluid force
    to attract the vehicle to the surface upon which it travels.

    186+,   for a motor vehicle which includes a ski-like or runner member and
    wherein the vehicle is provided with at least one surface-engaging
    propulsion element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 235, for vehicles propelling the vehicle along a
    fixed cable.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 390.7 for a reeling
    device driven by a vehicle motor, 392 for a spool mounted on a vehicle
    wheel, and 391+ for a traction driven spool in a reeling device.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 28.5 for patents on vehicles with wheel
    substitutes, the vehicle being claimed as a nonmotor vehicle or identified
    only as a nonmotor vehicle in the specific disclosure.

    305,    Wheel Substitutes for Land Vehicles, appropriate subclasses, for
    wheel substitutes, per se.  See the class definition of Class 180 for the
    line between Class 180 and Class 305.


CLS 180/7.2
TXT Spiral type element:

    Motor vehicle under subclass 7.1 wherein at least one propulsion element
    comprises a reaction surface in the form of a screw or a helix which is
    driven about its axis of rotation, said axis being in general alignment
    with the direction of the vehicle's motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188,    for vehicles driven by this type of device and also provided with
    runners.


CLS 180/7.3
TXT Reaction jet propulsion:

    Motor vehicle under subclass 7.1 wherein the special driving device is a
    jet propulsion device.


CLS 180/7.4
TXT Propeller type:

    Motor vehicle under subclass 7.1 wherein the special driving device is a
    rotary fluid reaction type impeller.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182+,   for vehicles driven by this type of device and also equipped with
    runners.


CLS 180/7.5
TXT Vehicle mounted winch for pulling vehicle:

    Motor vehicle under subclass 7.1 wherein the special driving device is a
    driven cable reel which is mounted on the vehicle and winds a cable
    connected at its other end to a stationary object.

    (1)     Note.  These devices are usually used to extract the vehicle from
    the mud and the like.

    (2)     Note.  A wheeled roadway vehicle having a motor powered, traction
    cable-pulling device mounted on it for propelling it from one location to
    another as the cable is pulled by the device, is found in this subclass;
    if, however, the vehicle is not claimed, or the device is not disclosed as
    also being used to pull a load, classification is in Class 254.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 264+, for apparatus for hauling or hoisting a load which
    includes a driven device for pulling on or traveling along a cable, and
    wherein either the device or the cable is attached to the load; see (2)
    Note  above.


CLS 180/8.1
TXT Stepper:

    Motor vehicles under subclass 7.1 driven by mechanical legs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    187,    for a motor vehicle of the kind described in the reference to
    subclasses 186+ appearing in subclass 7.1 above, and wherein the propulsion
    element is of a type which shuffles along the vehicle-supporting surface.

    203,    for a motor vehicle provided with powered, ground-engaging means
    for producing, or assisting in the production of, lateral movement of the
    vehicle (e.g., for parking) and wherein the means comprises a reciprocally
    driven stepper or a rotatably driven cam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 365+ for combined rakes and tedders and 370+
    for tedders.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 32 and 49 for intermittent grip
    drive.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 84+ for earth working blades having a
    reciprocating and oscillating motion, and subclass 352 for earth working
    apparatus with manually driven stepper propulsion means.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 1.181+, 218 and 219 for
    occupant-propelled vehicles having similar driving means.

    305,    Wheel Substitutes for Land Vehicles, subclasses 1+ for stepper type
    wheel substitutes.


CLS 180/8.2
TXT Step or abutment ascending/descending type vehicle:

    Motor vehicle under subclass 8.1 wherein the mechanical legs are used to
    propel the vehicle up or down steps or abutments (e.g., stair climber).

    (1)     Note.  Vehicles to be placed in this subclass must have legs that
    engage the step or abutment by intermittent action.  Legs on wheels which
    form spiders will be found in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9.22,   for motor driven stair climbers employing only an endless tread.


CLS 180/8.3
TXT Wheel and stepper type:

    Motor vehicle under subclass 8.1 having supporting wheels in addition to
    the mechanical legs.


CLS 180/8.4
TXT Nonsupporting pusher type stepper:

    Motor vehicles under subclass 8.3 wherein the mechanical legs serve only to
    propel the vehicle.


CLS 180/8.5
TXT With alternately lifted support base and legs:

    Motor vehicle under subclass 8.1 having a ground engaging supporting base
    and at least one mechanical leg and including means that alternately lift
    the base and the leg from the ground and means for moving the base and leg
    relative to one another to move the vehicle.


CLS 180/8.6
TXT With alternately lifted feet or skids:

    Motor vehicle under 8.1 having ground engaging means that are alternately
    lifted from the ground and reciprocated or swung relative to the vehicle to
    move the vehicle.


CLS 180/8.7
TXT Endless or rotary type:

    Motor vehicle under subclass 8.1 wherein the mechanical legs are mounted
    for guided motion on an endless guide track or a rotary support and engage
    with and disengage from the ground in succession.


CLS 180/9
TXT Motor-vehicles under subclass 7.1 adapted to travel upon a track carried by
    the vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    305,    Wheel Substitutes for Land Vehicles, subclasses 6+ for rigid
    portable tracks.


CLS 180/9.1
TXT Motor vehicles under subclass 9 wherein the track is flexible and endless.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184+,   for a motor vehicle which includes a ski-like or runner member,
    which member is substitutable for support structure of the wheel type, and
    wherein the vehicle is provided with a propulsion element of the endless
    track type.

    190+,   for a motor vehicle which includes a ski-like or runner member and
    wherein the vehicle is provided with at least one surface-engaging
    propulsion element of the endless track type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 292 for an earth working implement
    propelled over the ground by an endless track motor vehicle.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 5.22 for a step or abutment ascending
    vehicle with an endless track and subclass 28.5 for vehicles disclosed as
    only a nonmotor vehicle and having wheel substitutes.

    305,    Wheel Substitutes for Land Vehicles, appropriate subclasses for
    flexible endless track type wheel substitutes.


CLS 180/9.21
TXT Track substituted for drive wheel:

    Motor vehicles under subclass 9.1 wherein the endless track is substituted
    for one or more of the regular drive wheels of the vehicle.


CLS 180/9.22
TXT Motor vehicles under subclass 9.1 provided with means by which the vehicle
    may be supported or guided by a walking attendant.

    (1)     Note.  Motorized stair climbers using endless tread drives will be
    found in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19.1,   for a motor vehicle steered by a walking attendant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 258 for an earth working implement
    supported on an endless track motor vehicle which is guided by a walking
    attendant.


CLS 180/9.23
TXT With attendant station:

    Motor vehicles under subclass 9.1 provided with a seat or other support
    means for the operator of the vehicle.


CLS 180/9.25
TXT Rider straddles vehicle (e.g., motorcycle):

    Motor vehicle under subclass 9.23 wherein the attendant rides the vehicle
    with one leg on each side of the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    190+,   for snowmobiles.


CLS 180/9.26
TXT Motor vehicles under subclass 9.1 wherein (1) a flexible track is always
    carried by a vehicle provided with ground wheels but by an adjustment of
    parts the vehicle is either a flexible track vehicle (i.e., a vehicle in
    which a flexible track engages the ground) or a wheeled vehicle (i.e., a
    vehicle in which all of the supporting means are wheels) or (2) a frame
    carrying a flexible track apparatus is mounted on a wheeled vehicle without
    removing any of the wheels from the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  Devices in which the drive wheel of a vehicle is removed and
    a flexible track apparatus substituted therefor, and devices in which a
    flexible track is applied to the drive wheel of a motor vehicle to extend
    between such drive wheel and an idler wheel to convert the wheel vehicle
    into an endless track vehicle are not included in this subclass.  Such
    devices are classified on other features in other subclasses under subclass
    9.1.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185,    for a motor vehicle which includes a ski-like or runner member,
    which member is substitutable for support structure of the wheel type, and
    wherein the vehicle is provided with a propulsion element of the endless
    track type and further wherein the track comprises a substitute for or an
    addition to a propulsion element in the nature of a traction wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    305,    Wheel Substitutes for Land Vehicles, subclass 20 for a flexible
    track apparatus adapted to be positioned beneath a vehicle so that the
    vehicle wheel directly engages the upper surface of the flexible track to
    drive said track.


CLS 180/9.28
TXT Motor vehicles under subclass 9.26 wherein the flexible track is always
    carried by a vehicle provided with ground wheel means and by an adjustment
    of parts may be brought into or out of ground contact.


CLS 180/9.3
TXT Motor vehicles under subclass 9.28 wherein the arrangement of parts is such
    that when the flexible track contacts the ground the wheel means is out of
    ground contact.


CLS 180/9.32
TXT Apparatus under subclass 9.1 provided with means in addition to the running
    gear of the vehicle, said means being out of ground contact during normal
    operation of the vehicle but being operative when the vehicle encounters an
    obstacle to assist the vehicle in surmounting the obstacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9.28,   for a wheel vehicle provided with a flexible track apparatus, said
    flexible track apparatus being vertically movable into or out of ground
    contact.


CLS 180/9.34
TXT Motor vehicles under subclass 9.1 provided with a ground engaging wheel
    adapted to assist the endless track in supporting or propelling the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9.32,   for a flexible track motor vehicle provided with wheels which are
    normally out of ground contact, but which are engageable with the ground
    when the vehicle encounters an obstruction.


CLS 180/9.36
TXT Motor vehicles under subclass 9.34 wherein the ground wheel is located to
    one side of the track, and a portion thereof lies within an area defined by
    a horizontal projection of the track periphery.


CLS 180/9.38
TXT Motor vehicles under subclass 9.34 wherein said wheel is adapted to be
    turned to steer the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9.44+,  for steering means in which the track is steered.


CLS 180/9.4
TXT Motor vehicles under subclass 9.1 provided with an articulated hitch for
    connecting another vehicle to the motor vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 400+ for articulated vehicles.


CLS 180/9.42
TXT Motor vehicles under subclass 9.1 in combination with means other than the
    basic subject matter of subclass 9.1, which includes a flexible track
    structure, a vehicle frame and motive power and drive means for the
    flexible track, and not provided for in other subclasses under subclass 9.1.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, jack means for
    supporting the vehicle frame on the track frame for allowing the removal of
    the drive sprocket from the apparatus, an automatic track leveling means, a
    crawler speed indicator, a track heating means, a vehicle hood usable as a
    trailer, and a means for conducting the engine exhaust gases to the final
    drive mechanism for the expulsion of dirt and grit therefrom.


CLS 180/9.44
TXT Motor vehicles under subclass 9.1 provided with means for steering the
    vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  The means of this subclass may involve modifying (e.g., by
    distorting) or repositioning, relative to the vehicle, a track.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6.7,    for a flexible track motor vehicle which is steered by driving.

    9.38,   for a flexible track vehicle provided with a separate ground
    engaging wheel which is adapted to be turned to steer the vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    305,    Wheel Substitutes for Land Vehicles, subclass 44 for an endless
    flexible track where the track is so modified as to facilitate steering
    thereof.


CLS 180/9.46
TXT Motor vehicles under subclass 9.44 wherein the track is carried by a frame
    which is pivotally mounted on the vehicle frame to turn about a vertical
    axis.


CLS 180/9.48
TXT Motor vehicles under subclass 9.1 wherein the flexible track is carried by
    a frame and (1) there are means to selectively hold the track frame at
    various distances from the vehicle frame, or (2) the track frame is adapted
    to accommodate tracks of varying widths.


CLS 180/9.5
TXT Motor vehicles under subclass 9.1 in which at least one end portion of the
    track is trained over a supporting structure including an end wheel and
    said supporting structure is mounted for movement in a vertical plane
    relative to the vehicle frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193,    for a motor vehicle of the kind described in the reference to
    subclasses 190+ appearing in subclass 9.1 above and wherein the endless
    track is provided with a vertically movable support which is located
    intermediate the forward and rearward extremities of the track.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    305,    Wheel Substitutes for Land Vehicles, subclass 143 for a wheel
    substitute apparatus comprising a pair of spaced end wheels, a flexible
    track trained about said end wheels, and one of said end wheels being
    vertically movable with relation to the other end wheel.


CLS 180/9.52
TXT Motor vehicles under subclass 9.5 wherein means are provided to selectively
    hold said supporting structure in different vertical positions relative to
    the vehicle frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9.28,   for a vehicle provided with ground wheels and a flexible track
    apparatus, and in which the track apparatus may be selectively raised or
    lowered relative to the vehicle frame.


CLS 180/9.54
TXT Motor vehicles under subclass 9.5 wherein spring means are provided between
    the track supporting structure and the vehicle frame.


CLS 180/9.56
TXT Motor vehicles under subclass 9.54 wherein said spring means comprises a
    coil spring extending in a longitudinal direction relative to the vehicle
    frame.


CLS 180/9.58
TXT Motor vehicles under subclass 9.54 wherein said spring means comprises
    either a leaf or torsion spring.


CLS 180/9.6
TXT Motor vehicles under subclass 9.58 wherein said leaf or torsion spring
    extends in a transverse direction relative to the vehicle frame.


CLS 180/9.62
TXT Motor vehicles under subclass 9.1 wherein the track is driven by means of a
    wheel provided with track engaging teeth along the periphery thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    305,    Wheel Substitutes for Land Vehicles, subclasses 195+ for specific
    interengaging means between a track and its driving sprocket.


CLS 180/9.64
TXT Motor vehicles under subclass 9.62 wherein said toothed wheel is driven by
    a power train which includes a belt or a sprocket chain.


CLS 180/10
TXT Motor-vehicles under subclass 9 having a ring or annular track on which a
    supporting-wheel or supporting-wheels of the vehicle bear and which is
    caused to rotate to effect propulsion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    342+,   for transmission mechanism which includes a rotatably driven pulley
    or the equivalent for driving a tire or a wheel rim by direct engagement
    therewith.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 207 for vehicles propelled by occupant
    within the wheel.

    295,    Railway Wheels and Axles, subclass 3 for railway wheels of this
    type.

    305,    Wheel Substitutes for Land Vehicles, subclass 7 for a rigid
    circular track type wheel substitute.


CLS 180/11
TXT Devices under class definition comprising a frame carrying a motor
    supported on one or more wheels and adapted to be attached to a vehicle
    which supports the frame in part.

    (1)     Note.  The motor may drive the wheel or wheels of the frame or a
    wheel or wheels of the vehicle.

    (2)     Note.  See (2) Note of subclass 295 below regarding the apparent
    absence, at present, of a clear line of distinction between the art of that
    subclass (295) and that of this subclass (11).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    295,    for a motor vehicle wherein the motor and the body frame are
    particularly related to one another and wherein a change-speed gearing or a
    clutch is mounted in common with the motor and further wherein a wheeled
    auxiliary frame, which is resiliently joined to the body frame, is provided
    for supporting the motor and the gearing or clutch; however, see also (2)
    Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 400+ for articulated vehicles, especially
    subclasses 423.1+ for a motor section and a trailer supported on the rear
    end thereof, the motor section and trailer being separable.


CLS 180/12
TXT Frames under subclass 11 wherein the wheels of the attachment are driven
    and steered.


CLS 180/13
TXT Frames under subclass 12 having a single wheel supporting the frame.


CLS 180/14.1
TXT VEHICLE TRAINS:

    Vehicles under class definition having two or more connected vehicles, one
    at least being a motor vehicle which remains a complete vehicle when the
    other vehicle or vehicles are detached.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182,    for a vehicle train consisting of one or more sleds attached to a
    motor vehicle, as mentioned in (1) Note thereof.

    235,    for a motor vehicle having four wheels driven and provided with
    means for steering all of the driven wheels and wherein the means includes
    articulation of the frame of the vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 400+ for patents relating to a train of
    vehicles including a motor vehicle, and claiming the motor vehicle only by
    a general term, as motor vehicle or traction-engine.


CLS 180/14.2
TXT Motorized trailer:

    Motor vehicles under subclass 14.1 wherein each of the vehicles is provided
    with its own motor or power plant.


CLS 180/14.3
TXT All motors supplied from power plant of a single vehicle:

    Motor vehicles under subclass 14.2 wherein the motors of all of the
    vehicles are supplied with power from a power plant mounted on one vehicle
    (e.g., hydrostatic or electric transmission of power between vehicles).

    (1)     Note.  Motor as used herein refers to a device supplied with power
    from an external source.


CLS 180/14.4
TXT Drive means between vehicles through coupling:

    Motor vehicles under subclass 14.1 wherein one vehicle is a complete motor
    vehicle which drives the wheels of the other vehicles by means of a drive
    train extending through the means coupling the vehicles.


CLS 180/14.5
TXT Vehicles under subclass 14.1 in which the connections between the motor
    vehicle and the drawn vehicle contain means which operates to stop the
    motor or release the load in case of overload.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 3 for earth working apparatus with an
    automatically operated control of the motive power for the apparatus.  A
    trailing implement must be claimed by more than name only to be placed in
    Class 172.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 150 for over-load
    released stop mechanisms.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 449+ for vehicle train draft couplings
    with over-load release.


CLS 180/14.6
TXT Tractor drive effort varied by pull exerted by trailer:

    Motor vehicle under subclass 14.1 where one vehicle is a complete motor
    vehicle which functions as a tractor and the power applied to the wheels of
    the tractor is a function of the load exerted by the trailing vehicles on
    the means connecting the vehicles.


CLS 180/14.7
TXT Vehicle drive drives other vehicle wheel:

    Motor vehicle under subclass 14.1 where one vehicle is a complete motor
    vehicle which has drive means directly engaging and driving one or more
    wheels of the other vehicle, e.g., a drive device for driving the nose or
    trail wheel of an aircraft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    904,    for a cross reference art collection of traction dollies for
    aircraft.


CLS 180/15
TXT Vehicles under class definition with driving devices consisting of one or
    more traction-wheels not constituting the main supporting-wheels of the
    vehicle.  The traction-wheel is frequently mounted on a frame pivoted at
    one end to the vehicle body or running-gear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11+,    for motor carrying attachments which may have traction wheels.

    196,    for a motor vehicle which includes one or more ski-like or runner
    members and wherein the vehicle is provided with at least one
    surface-engaging propulsion element and further wherein the element
    comprises a traction wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, especially subclass 73 for locomotives and
    traction regulators therefor.


CLS 180/16
TXT Devices under class definition comprising a frame carrying traction-wheels
    adapted to be attached to motor vehicles.

    (1)     Note.  The traction-wheels of the motor-vehicle may be removed or
    may remain in place; but the traction-wheels of the attachment support the
    vehicle instead of the original traction-wheels and are driven from the
    source of power of the motor vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11+,    for such frames carrying a motor.


CLS 180/19.1
TXT STEERED BY WALKING ATTENDANT:

    Vehicles under class definition having steering means adapted to be
    actuated by an attendant who walks with the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9.22,   for such vehicles adapted to travel upon a flexible endless track
    carried by the vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 14.7, a harvester driven by a motor and guided
    by a walking attendant.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 42+ for a driven earth working tool
    guided by a walking attendant, and subclasses 256+ for an earth working
    apparatus comprising a propulsion unit guided by a walking attendant.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 47.11 for non-motor propelled vehicles with
    wheel steering by walking attendant.


CLS 180/19.2
TXT Who steerably controls steerable wheel:

    Motor vehicles under subclass 19.1 including steerable wheel means and
    mechanism carried by the vehicles, accessible to the walking attendant to
    control the steerable wheel means.

    (1)     Note.  Castered wheels with a handle attached thereto are included
    in this subclass.


CLS 180/19.3
TXT Handle movement controls vehicle drive:

    Motor vehicles under subclass 19.1 having a handle engaged by the attendant
    for guiding the vehicle with movement of the handle relative to the vehicle
    by the attendant being effective to control the drive means to the vehicle
    wheels.

    (1)     Note.  Sectional handles in which one handle portion is movable to
    control the drive are included in this subclass


CLS 180/20
TXT Motor vehicles under class definition wherein one or more rollers support
    the body or frame.

    (1)     Note.  Patents for power steering-gear disclosing a steering-roller
    are placed in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 133+ for rollers combined with other
    earth working tools and subclasses 518+ for some types of rollers specific
    to agricultural use.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 122+ for a device
    for working earth or road material provided with one or more rollers.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the notes thereunder.


CLS 180/21
TXT Motor vehicles under class definition in which the arrangement of the
    road-wheels differs from the usual one in which straight lines joining the
    points of contact of the wheels with the road form approximately a
    rectangle when the steering-wheels are in the straightaway position.

    (1)     Note.  In the reclassification of former subclasses 25+ ("Three
    wheeled") and 29+ ("Two wheeled") of this area, now subclasses 205 through
    231, and in a concurrent screening of the examiner copies of the patents of
    this subclass (21), which subclass was not included in the reclassification
    project, a vehicle which is (a) disclosed solely as having a number or an
    arrangement of wheels whereby it constitutes a special wheel base type of
    vehicle, even though the specific number or arrangement of wheels is not
    claimed, or (b) disclosed as having both special and nonspecial (i.e., four
    wheels, rectangularly arranged) wheel base species, and claimed only
    generically, is classified here (subclasses 21 and 205 through 231);
    however, this statement is not applicable to subclass 22 and the subclasses
    indented thereunder, which subclasses were not included in the project nor
    were they screened.

    (2)     Note. Also included herein (subclasses 21 and 205 through 231) is a
    subcombination of a special wheel base vehicle, provided that the
    subcombination (a) is not specifically provided for in another class or in
    a superior subclass of this class and (b) is primarily relevant only to the
    special wheel base vehicle with which it is associated.

    (3)     Note.  Generally, a vehicle which is disclosed solely as having a
    nonspecial (see (1) Note above) wheel base, but for which a number of
    wheels less than four is claimed, is not classified here (subclasses 21 and
    205 through 231) on the basis of that specific number of wheels; rather,
    classification is elsewhere in the class on some other feature.

    (4)     Note.  Insofar as subclasses 21 and 205 through 231 are concerned,
    the substitution of a dual wheel (i.e., two wheels having their central
    portions either joined back to back or else otherwise mounted in such
    proximity to each other that insufficient space remains therebetween for
    accommodating an intervening element such as a drive chain or a steering
    gear operating shaft) for a single wheel at one or more of the vehicle's
    wheel-carrying locations does not change the number of wheels thereon from
    the standpoint of determining the vehicle's wheel base. This statement,
    however, is not intended to affect the meaning assigned to "dual wheel
    pair" in subclass 24.03.


CLS 180/22
TXT Motor vehicles under subclass 21 comprising five or more main
    supporting-wheels.

    (1)     Note.  These are single vehicles and are distinguishable by this
    from the vehicles of subclass 14.1.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11+,    for vehicles having wheeled motor carrying attachments.

    14.1,   (see Note 1).

    15,     for single vehicles having additional traction wheels.

    233+,   for a motor vehicle having four wheels which are driven.


CLS 180/23
TXT Apparatus under subclass 22 in which one of the supporting wheels is a
    driving wheel which is positively moved by independent means for guidance
    of the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6.2,    for vehicles that are steered by causing a relative difference in
    the rate of travel between traction elements on opposite sides thereof.

    24.01,  for vehicles in which nondriving wheels are positively moved for
    steering a vehicle.


CLS 180/24
TXT Apparatus under subclass 23 in which the driving wheel which is positively
    moved to guide the vehicle swings about pivot means positioned between the
    medium line of the vehicle and the wheel.


CLS 180/24.01
TXT Apparatus under subclass 22 in which one of the wheels is positively moved
    by external means for guiding the vehicle and in which one other wheel
    longitudinally spaced in the direction of travel of the vehicle being
    either positively and simultaneously moved for steering the vehicle or
    movably mounted to vehicle structure to move incident to a steering
    movement of the vehicle.


CLS 180/24.02
TXT Apparatus under subclass 22 which one of the wheels is either (1)
    adjustably mounted for vertical movement on the frame of the vehicle or (2)
    mounted for vertical movement and moving incident to a condition of
    operation of the vehicle whereby the load carried by one other wheel is
    accordingly modified.

    (1)     Note.  Under part (2) of the above definition it is considered that
    wheels mounted on opposite ends of a rocker beam or the equivalent thereof
    and thereby having relative vertical movement do not constitute load
    shifting or proportioning wheels for classification here and classification
    thereof will be based on other vehicle features classifiable in subclass 22
    of this class or the subclasses indented thereunder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   for a motor vehicle provided with powered, ground-engaging means
    for producing, or assisting in the production of, lateral movement of the
    vehicle (e.g., for parking) and wherein the means comprises a rotatably
    driven member which may be an auxiliary wheel.


CLS 180/24.03
TXT Apparatus under subclass 22 in which two of the wheels are positioned
    side-by-side to thereby make a dual wheel pair and in which each wheel of
    the dual wheel pair is mounted on the vehicle to have rotational
    differential movement relative to the other wheel of the wheel pair.

    (1)     Note.  See (4) Note of subclass 21 above.


CLS 180/24.04
TXT Apparatus under subclass 22 in which gearing connected to and
    simultaneously and differentially transmitting driving power to laterally
    spaced driving wheel axles is provided with a housing which is rigidly
    connected to the frame of the vehicle.


CLS 180/24.05
TXT Apparatus under subclass 22 in which the motor vehicle includes a hollow
    pivoted member having mounting means intermediate its ends by which it is
    rotatably supported on the vehicle, the hollow pivoted member having one of
    the wheels mounted thereon at each of its ends and driving torque to the
    wheels being provided by power transmitting mechanism within the hollow
    member.


CLS 180/24.06
TXT Apparatus under subclass 22 in which the motive means for propelling the
    vehicle comprises either a plurality of prime movers or a plurality of
    energy conversion devices converting other than mechanical energy to
    mechanical energy.


CLS 180/24.07
TXT Apparatus under subclass 24.06 comprising a separate prime mover or energy
    conversion device for independently driving each driving wheel of the
    vehicle for propelling the vehicle.


CLS 180/24.08
TXT Apparatus under subclass 22 in which the motive means is positively
    drivingly connected to each wheel of the vehicle for propelling the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6.2,    for similar devices in which steering of the vehicle is involved.

    38,     for a motor vehicle of the steam traction engine type having not
    only the steering wheels, but also the remaining two wheels, driven.

    212,    for a motor vehicle having a wheel arrangement comprising three
    wheels and wherein at least one wheel is steered and further wherein each
    wheel is driven.

    224,    for a motor vehicle having a wheel arrangement comprising two
    wheels in tandem relationship and wherein at least one of the wheels is
    steered and further wherein both wheels are motor driven.

    233+,   as explained in the reference thereto appearing in subclass 22
    above.


CLS 180/24.09
TXT Apparatus under subclass 22 in which the drive means for the motor vehicle
    includes a power dividing means in the form of differential gearing driving
    each differential of a tandem pair of differentially driven wheel drive
    axles.


CLS 180/24.1
TXT Apparatus under subclass 22 comprising two driving wheels spaced
    longitudinally in the direction of travel of the vehicle and the drive
    thereto includes drive disconnect means whereby driving torque to one of
    the longitudinally spaced driving wheels is discontinued, the driving
    torque to the other driving wheel remaining unaffected.


CLS 180/24.11
TXT Apparatus under subclass 22 comprising wheels spaced longitudinally in the
    direction of travel of the vehicle and a drive to two of the longitudinally
    spaced wheels for propelling the vehicle.


CLS 180/24.12
TXT Apparatus under subclass 24.11 wherein the drive to the longitudinally
    spaced wheels is initially directed to a wheel or drive gearing therefor
    from which one other wheel or its drive gearing is sequentially driven
    whereby upon interruption of the drive to the first mentioned wheel or
    drive gearing, drive to the other wheel or to the other drive gearing would
    also be interrupted.


CLS 180/24.13
TXT Apparatus under subclass 22 in which the motor vehicle includes an
    elongated resilient member having a wheel means mounted at each end
    thereof, the elongate resilient member being pivotally mounted intermediate
    its ends to the frame of the vehicle.


CLS 180/36
TXT Vehicles under class definition of normal wheelbase carrying a steam-engine
    and boiler, the parts of the power plant constituting the main part of the
    vehicle, precluding its use as a means of carrying goods or passengers.

    (1)     Note.  Classification in this and the indented subclasses likewise
    is proper when only the steam traction engine vehicle and its boiler are
    claimed, i.e., the motor (engine) is disclosed but not claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    303+,   for a motor vehicle of other than the steam traction engine type
    having a propulsion motor driven by expansible gas from an external source,
    which gas is produced by treating a volatile fluid (e.g., the gas is steam).

    310,    for a vehicle of the kind described above as being proper for
    subclasses 303+ but wherein the vehicle's motor is not claimed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 668 for a steam power system physically
    related to vehicle structure.  See (1) Note of the class definition of
    Class 180 for the line between Class 180 and the power or motor classes.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, in appropriate subclasses, for
    transmission mechanism not involving specific vehicle structure.  For a
    more detailed statement of this line see Note 1,b, under the class
    definition.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 830+ for inventions relating to the
    mounting of a boiler on the running gear.


CLS 180/37
TXT Vehicles under subclass 36 wherein the steering-wheels are driven.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12+,    for a motor vehicle having a motor-carrying attachment in the
    nature of a wheeled frame and wherein the wheels of the frame are driven
    and steered.

    23+,    for a motor vehicle having a wheel arrangement comprising five or
    more wheels and wherein one or more of the wheels are driven and steered.

    211+,   for a motor vehicle having a wheel arrangement comprising three
    wheels and wherein at least one of the wheels is driven and steered.

    222,    for a motor vehicle having a wheel arrangement comprising two
    wheels in tandem relationship and wherein one of the wheels is driven
    frictionally and further wherein means is provided for steering that wheel.

    223+,   for a motor vehicle having a wheel arrangement comprising two
    wheels in tandem relationship and wherein at least one of the wheels is
    driven and steered.

    234+,   for a motor vehicle having four wheels driven and provided with
    means for steering all of the driven wheels.

    252+,   for a motor vehicle having at least one wheel which is both driven
    and steerable.

    400+,   for a motor vehicle having means for guiding it.


CLS 180/38
TXT Vehicles under subclass 37 in which all four wheels are driven.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212,    for a motor vehicle having a wheel arrangement comprising three
    wheels and wherein at least one wheel is steered and further wherein each
    wheel is driven.

    224,    for a motor vehicle having a wheel arrangement comprising two
    wheels in tandem relationship and wherein at least one of the wheels is
    steered and further wherein both wheels are motor driven.

    234+,   as explained in the reference thereto appearing in subclass 37
    above.


CLS 180/39
TXT Vehicles under subclass 36 wherein means is provided for leveling the
    boiler.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 7 for similar vehicles without special
    motor features.


CLS 180/40
TXT Vehicles under subclass 36 in which the boiler is mounted by means of
    springs on the rear axle or axle of the driving wheels.


CLS 180/41
TXT Motor-vehicles under class definition having means for raising the frame or
    body relatively to a wheel or wheels, also power means for raising a frame
    or body relatively to a wheel or wheels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for boiler carrying vehicles of this type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 208+ for harvester platform adjustments.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 840+ for means to level the body of a
    vehicle with respect to its running gear, and subclasses 43+ for vehicles
    having a wheel that is vertically adjustable with respect to the running
    gear.


CLS 180/53.1
TXT MOTOR AS SOURCE OF POWER FOR OTHER MACHINE:

    Devices under class definition designed to facilitate the use of the motor
    of a motor vehicle to supply power to drive other machines.

    (1)     Note.  Inventions of this nature disclosed in connection with a
    steam traction-engine of usual wheelbase will be found in subclass 36.

    (2)     Note.  Classes 74, Machine Element or Mechanism, and 464, Rotary
    Shafts, Gudgeons, Housing, and Flexible Couplings for Rotary Shafts,
    contain devices of general application for transmitting power from a motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14.1    for motor-vehicles supplying power to other vehicles connected
    thereto.

    36,     (see (1) Note).

    198,    for a portable carrier which comprises the sole support for a motor
    of the vehicle, the power of the motor continuing to be expended in the
    same manner (e.g., through the vehicle's wheels), however, as it was when
    the vehicle was not supported by the carrier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, (see (2) Note).

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 35+ for driven earth working tools, and
    see the Search Class notes in this subclass for the line.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 25+ for a tool driving or
    impacting means mounted on a wheeled vehicle, in which the vehicle motor is
    mechanically coupled to the means to drive or impact a tool, and subclass
    27 for a vehicle motor and drive motor powered by the same energy source.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 627 for a driven dispensing means which is
    carried on, or pulled or pushed by, a motor vehicle and wherein the means
    is driven by the motor of the vehicle.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 390.7 for a reeling
    device driven by a vehicle motor, 392 for a spool mounted on a vehicle
    wheel, and 391+ for a traction driven reel spool.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, (see (2) Note).


CLS 180/53.2
TXT Other machine is creeper drive on motor vehicle:

    Devices under the subclass 53.1 wherein the other machine is a speed
    reducing transmission which enables the motor vehicle to move at a slow
    speed to permit the machinery on the vehicle to perform a function related
    to that slow speed.


CLS 180/53.3
TXT Other machine mounted by three point hitch (i.e., ford-ferguson hitch):

    Devices under subclass 53.1 wherein the other machine is mounted on the
    motor vehicle by a lifting hitch having three connecting linkages, at least
    one of which is powered to raise and lower the other machine between a use
    and nonuse (i.e., transporting) position.

    (1)     Note.  Such hitches are known as the Ford-Ferguson hitch.


CLS 180/53.4
TXT Hydraulic drive to other machine:

    Devices under subclass 53.1 wherein the motor vehicle motor drives a
    hydraulic drive system which in turn drives the other machine.


CLS 180/53.5
TXT Electric drive to other machine:

    Devices under subclass 53.1 wherein the motor vehicle motor drives an
    electric power system which in turn drives the other machine.


CLS 180/53.6
TXT Drive to other machine by power take-off (PTO) driven by wheel or axle of
    motor vehicle:

    Drives under subclass 53.1 wherein the other machine is driven by drive
    means connected to or forming part of the driven axle or wheels of the
    motor vehicle.


CLS 180/53.61
TXT PTO mounted directly on or engaging drive wheel to rotate therewith:

    Devices under subclass 53.6 wherein the drive means for the other machine
    is rigidly mounted on or engages the drive wheel of the motor vehicle and
    rotates with the drive wheel.


CLS 180/53.62
TXT PTO constantly driven with wheel selectively drive:

    Devices under subclass 53.6 wherein the drive means to the other machine is
    constantly driven by the axle and means are provided to selectively couple
    the axle to the wheel to drive the latter.


CLS 180/53.7
TXT Drive to other machine by power take-off (PTO) at front end of vehicle:

    Devices under subclass 53.1 wherein the other machine is driven by drive
    means connected to the forward end of an engine mounted on the front end of
    the motor vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  The connection is usually to the forward end of the
    crankshaft of the engine.


CLS 180/53.8
TXT Other machine is vehicle accessory:

    Devices under subclass 53.1 wherein the other machine is a vehicle
    accessory (i.e., windshield wiper, air conditioning system, etc.) and the
    invention is in the drive means to the vehicle accessory.

    (1)     Note.  Where the invention is in the accessory and not the drive
    means therefore, the invention is classified with the accessory in the
    appropriate class and subclass.


CLS 180/54.1
TXT POWER:

    Inventions under class definition in which the distinguishing feature of
    the invention relating to the apparatus for producing power, usually its
    location and arrangement relative to the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  When a patent contains claims involving the structure of the
    vehicle in connection with the motor or power-plant, or the location and
    arrangement of the motor or power-plant relative to the vehicle, it is
    placed in this class.  The mere mention of a vehicle broadly, or of such
    parts as are necessarily involved in the definition of a vehicle, in a
    claim which is in other respects drawn to the specific construction of the
    motor or power-plant does not cause such an assignment, the classification
    being then based on the motor or power-plant structure.  A search therefore
    for a motor or power-plant shown in connection with a conventional vehicle
    must be made in the motor or power-plant classes (e.g., Classes 60, 91,
    123, 185, 290, 310, and 415).

    (2)     Note.  The vehicles of this subclass and the subclasses indented
    thereunder are four-wheeled vehicles of usual wheel-base.

    (3)     Note.  Motors mounted so as to be moved to place a pulley in
    contact with the tire of a road-wheel will be found in Class 74, Machine
    Element or Mechanism, subclasses 13+, unless specific vehicle structure is
    included, in which case they will be found in this class, subclasses 342+.

    (4)     Note.  Motors movable on a frame to enable the power-shaft to drive
    different shafts, and so change the speed or direction, will be found in
    Class 74, Machine Element or Mechanism, in appropriate subclasses of
    Gearing, unless specific vehicle structure is claimed, in which case they
    will be found in this class, subclasses 364+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    283,    for a motor vehicle provided with safety-promoting means which
    responds to a sensing of acceleration, deceleration, or tilt of the vehicle
    in a manner whereby the ignition circuit is interrupted.

    284,    for a motor vehicle provided with safety-promoting means which
    responds in the manner of the means of subclass 283 noted above and which
    further responds by impeding the flow of fuel.

    342+,   (see (3) Note).

    364+,   (see (4) Note).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, (see (3) Note and (4) Note).


CLS 180/54.2
TXT With spring powered motor:

    Power plant apparatus under subclass 54.1 wherein the power plant includes
    an energy storing mechanical motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, or Animal Powered, appropriate subclasses
    for spring motors, per se.


CLS 180/55
TXT Inventions under subclass 54.1 relating to the mounting of the power plant
    partly or wholly on the lower running-gear--i.e., wheels, axles, and their
    immediate attachments, such as underframes and springs.  The body-frame is
    not included as part of the lower running-gear.

    (1)     Note.  When the mounting of some other part of the power plant than
    the motor and the mounting of the motor constitute the invention, the
    patent is classified according to the motor-mounting and a cross-reference,
    if necessary, placed in the subclass in which the rest of the invention
    would be placed if claimed, per se.

    (2)     Note.  In the instance of a vehicle wheel which contains a motor
    for driving the wheel, classification is in a motor class as long as the
    wheel is claimed in such a manner as to amount to no more than a nominal
    load for the motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 67 for
    dynamoelectric devices incorporated within some other unit or device such
    as a vehicle wheel.


CLS 180/56
TXT Power plant under subclass 55 mounted on the rear axle and on a body or
    body-frame spring-mounted on the rear axle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     for motor moving with axle relatively to body.


CLS 180/57
TXT Power plant drive under subclass 56 effected by means of a fore-and-aft
    shaft.


CLS 180/58
TXT Power apparatus under subclass 55 mounted on the frame connecting the axles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for frames carrying a motor or power-plant and mounted by means of
    springs on both axles or mounted pivotally on the front axle and by springs
    on the rear axle.

    61,     for frames carrying a motor or power-plant and mounted pivotally on
    the rear axle and by springs on the front axle.


CLS 180/59
TXT Power plants under subclass 58 mounted pivotally on a rear axle and by
    means of springs from an underframe of which the rear axle forms a part.


CLS 180/60
TXT Electric-power apparatus under subclass 58 mounted on an underframe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59,     for electric-power apparatus pivotally mounted on a driving-axle
    and spring-mounted at the other end of an underframe.


CLS 180/61
TXT Power apparatus under subclass 55 carried by a frame or casing pivoted to
    the rear or driving axle at one end and supported resiliently at the other
    end by some part of the running-gear other  than the body-frame or the
    underframe.


CLS 180/62
TXT Power apparatus under subclass 55 mounted on the rear or driving axle.


CLS 180/63
TXT Motors under subclass 54.1 mounted on the body or body-frame and moving
    relatively to its support, the rear axle being connected with the motor, so
    that as the body moves up and down relatively to the axle, the distance
    from the motor-shaft to the axle is kept constant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling-Stock, subclass 3, for articulated trains.

    384,    Bearings, appropriate subclasses for bearing of general use.


CLS 180/65.1
TXT Electric:

    Vehicles under subclass 54.1 wherein an electric motor in the body or on
    the body-frame drives the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6.48,   for vehicles wherein electric motors are selectively driven to
    steer the vehicle.

    60,     for a motor vehicle having its power plant mounted on its lower
    running gear and wherein that running gear comprises the frame which
    connects the axles and further wherein the power plant is an electric motor.

    214,    for a motor vehicle having a wheel arrangement comprising three
    wheels and wherein at least one wheel is both steerable and driven and
    further wherein the vehicle's motor is mounted to swing with that wheel,
    and wherein, in addition, the motor is electrical in nature.

    216,    for a motor vehicle having a wheel arrangement comprising three
    wheels and wherein two wheels, which wheels have a common axis, are driven
    and further wherein the vehicle's motor is electrical in nature.

    220,    for a motor vehicle having a wheel arrangement comprising two
    wheels in tandem relationship and wherein the vehicles motor is of the
    electrical type.

    242+,   for a motor vehicle having four wheels driven and wherein the means
    for driving one or more of the wheels may be an electric motor.

    298,    for a motor vehicle wherein the motor and the body frame are
    particularly related to one another and wherein is included means which
    enables the repositioning of the motor relative to the body frame; as
    explained in (2) Note of that subclass (298), the motor may be a prime
    mover of the battery, or of the motor-generator, type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, for inventions relating to
    the transmission of electrical energy from fixed points to vehicles and not
    involving specific vehicle structure nor specific means for applying the
    electrical energy to any specific purpose.

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants, subclass 45, and the subclasses (e.g.,
    9+, 22+, 27-29) indented under Electric Control, for power-plants for
    motor-vehicles, including a prime mover, a generator, and one or more
    motors.  Patents herein do not include claims for structure specific to
    vehicles nor for inventions relating to the mounting of
    electric-power-plant structure relative to a vehicle.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, appropriate subclasses for
    electric motors designed for motor vehicles but not involving vehicle
    features.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass for charging a vehicular battery.


CLS 180/65.2
TXT Combined with nonelectric drive means:

    Vehicles under subclass 65.1 wherein the electric motor is combined with a
    prime mover, other than another electric motor, for driving the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  The electric motor and the prime mover may act on the same
    or different wheels of the vehicle and may be usable alternately or jointly
    but both remain on the vehicle at all times.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is intended to include a
    prime-mover-generator-electric motor drive train provided they are all
    mechanically interconnected with the drive wheels.  Such an apparatus is
    known as a hybrid drive vehicle.  Vehicles where only the electric motor
    portion of the combination is mechanically connected to the drive wheels
    will be found in the class subclass 65.4.  Vehicles where nonelectric drive
    means is provided by the physical effort of the vehicle occupants, will be
    found in this class, subclasses 205+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65.4,   (see (2) Note).

    205+,   (see (2) Note).


CLS 180/65.3
TXT With means on vehicle for generating power for the electric motor:

    Vehicles under subclass 65.1 wherein the electric motor is supplied with
    electric power generated by means carried on the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  The generating means may be a generator driven a prime mover
    or the running gear of the vehicle including the drive wheels, the drive
    axle, drive shaft or shock absorbing means.  The drive may be direct or
    indirect through an energy conversion mechanisms.  Although the systems in
    this and the indented subclass may include batteries, for purposes of this
    subclass, a storage battery is not considered to be means for generating
    electric power.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.2,    for generating means on a vehicle driven by a wind motor or in the
    form of a solar cell.


CLS 180/65.4
TXT Generating means is driven by a prime mover:

    Vehicles under subclass 65.3 wherein the means for generating power for the
    electric motor is driven by a prime mover other than another electric motor.

    (1)     Note.  The prime mover is usually a gasoline or diesel engine and
    the drive system is usually referred to as a gas-electric or
    diesel-electric drive.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65.2,   for vehicles wherein the prime mover is also connected to the
    vehicle wheels to form a hybrid drive.


CLS 180/65.5
TXT With motor in or moveable with wheel:

    Vehicles under subclass 65.1 wherein the electric motor is mounted in the
    wheel to form part of the wheel or is mounted on the wheel to move with the
    wheel as the wheel moves relative to the vehicle body or frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for wheel mounted motors other than electric or hydraulic.

    308,    for hydraulically driven motors mounted in or on the wheels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 67, for electric
    motors combined with wheels.


CLS 180/65.6
TXT With gearing between electric motor and drive wheel:

    Vehicles under subclass 65.1 wherein the electric motor is connected to the
    drive wheels by a mechanical transmission means comprising intermeshing
    gears.

    (1)     Note.  The gearing means is usually used to permit the motor and
    drive wheels to rotate at different speeds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    337+,   for gear transmissions in combination with vehicles not limited by
    the recitation of an electric motor.


CLS 180/65.7
TXT Gearing is changeable ratio gearing:

    Vehicles under subclass 65.6 wherein the transmission is provided with
    means whereby the ratio of the motor speed to the wheel speed can be
    selectively changed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    364+,   for variable speed transmissions in vehicles without an electric
    motor.


CLS 180/65.8
TXT With electronic devices (logic gates, semi-conductors, vacuum tubes, etc.)
    in control circuit:

    Vehicles under subclass 65.1 wherein the electric motor is controlled by a
    circuit that includes electronic devices such as logic gates,
    semi-conductors or vacuum tubes in the circuit.

    (1)     Note.  The motor and circuit must be claimed in combination with
    features limited to a motor vehicle for placement in this subclass. Control
    circuits utilizing only normally standard switches, relays or regulators
    are excluded from this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    control circuits not claimed in combination with a vehicle.


CLS 180/68.1
TXT With means to guide and/or control air for power plant cooling:

    Power plant apparatus under subclass 54.1 wherein the vehicle is provided
    with means for directing cooling air to the power plant for its cooling.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes means to guide air to the radiator of
    a liquid cooled engine, housings for the power plant and having air guide
    means and air cooled engines in combination with a motor vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    International-Combustion Engines, subclasses 41.01+, for cooling
    systems for internal combustion engines.


CLS 180/68.2
TXT With further means to utilize power plant cooling air for other purposes:

    Power plant cooling apparatus under subclass 68.1 wherein the air that is
    used to cool the power plant is used to heat or cool the vehicle by either
    passing through the vehicle before cooling the engine or by passing into
    the vehicle after cooling the engine or for other purposes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    237,    Heating Systems, subclass 12.3, for heating devices wherein the
    vehicle is claimed only nominally.


CLS 180/68.3
TXT With means to guide and/or control combustion air for power plant:

    Power plant apparatus under subclass 54.1 wherein the vehicle is provided
    with means to guide and/or control air provided to the power plant for
    combustion purposes.

    (1)     Note.  The guide means may be part of the vehicle frame or may be
    mounted on the hood covering the power plant.


CLS 180/68.4
TXT Radiators and condensers, mounting:

    Apparatus under subclass 54.1 for mounting a radiator condenser on a
    vehicle-body or body-frame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 41+, for a heat exchanger installed on a
    vehicle; subclasses 67+, for an external support for a heat exchanger; and
    subclass 149, for a radiator case having a frame or edge cover means.


CLS 180/68.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 54.1 including cradles, holders, hold-downs, and
    supports for battery cells on motor vehicles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 51 for electric locomotive battery
    holders.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclasses 400+ for vehicle-mounted
    carriers generally.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 500+ for hold-downs of general utility.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process, subclasses 96+ for battery supports.


CLS 180/68.6
TXT With protector for the radiator or condenser:

    Radiator or condenser mountings under subclass 68.4 having combined
    therewith a protector positioned in front of the radiator or condenser, to
    fend off foreign objects which would otherwise strike the radiator or
    condenser.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, appropriate
    subclasses for flexible panels, per se.

    293,    Vehicle Fenders, subclass 115, for radiator guards which also serve
    as a fender or bumper for the vehicle.


CLS 180/69.1
TXT Devices under subclass 54.1 including dust, protective, or drip pans
    adapted to be attached beneath the engines of automobiles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    184,    Lubrication, subclass 106 for a device placed beneath a bearing for
    catching unused oil.


CLS 180/69.2
TXT Hoods:

    Covers under subclass 54.1 for the power plants of motor-vehicles.

    (1)     Note.  The inclusion of a radiator or dashboard in a claim for a
    motor-  cover is deemed to restrict it to use on a vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    289,    for a motor vehicle having means for promoting its safety, which
    means may be in the nature of a device, mechanism, or system for either (1)
    repositioning the hood of the vehicle or (2) operating a means for locking
    the hood, the moving or the securing of the hood being for the purpose of
    preventing unauthorized or unintended access or use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 221 for hinges for automobile
    hoods.

    70,     Locks, subclasses 240 and 241 for devices for locking hoods to
    vehicle-frames.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 606 for motor-covers of
    general applications.


CLS 180/69.21
TXT Pivoted about horizontal axis extending transversely of vehicle (e.g.,
    alligator type or front end pivot):

    Power plant covers under subclass 69.2 wherein the cover is pivoted about a
    horizontal axis extending transversely off the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  The cover is usually of one place construction and the pivot
    may be at either the forward end or the rear end of the cover.  The cover
    may also be provided with an operator for the cover.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Moveable or Removable Closures, appropriate subclasses for closures
    and operators therefor.


CLS 180/69.22
TXT With noise suppression means:

    Power plant covers under subclass 69.2 wherein the cover is provided with
    means to reduce the transmission of acoustical vibrations caused by the
    operation of the power plant or by the movement of the cover relative to
    the vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 284+, for sound absorbing panels.


CLS 180/69.23
TXT Noise suppression means prevents hood from vibrating (i.e., anti-rattlers):

    Power plant covers under subclass 69.22 wherein the noise suppression means
    is attached to one of the vehicle frame or the cover and engages the other
    to prevent acoustical vibration from being transferred between the cover
    and the vehicle frame.


CLS 180/69.24
TXT With access openings having moveable or removable closures:

    Power plant covers under subclass 69.2 wherein the cover is provided with
    openings to permit access to portions of the power plant without opening
    the cover completely, said openings being provided with suitable closures
    pivoted to or removable from the cover.

    (1)     Note.  These openings are usually to permit access to the battery
    filler caps, the dipsticks, the radiator cap or other items involved in
    routine servicing of the power plant.


CLS 180/69.25
TXT Water deflectors:

    Devices under subclass 69.2 forming a part of the hood or adapted for use
    with a conventional hood for deflecting water from the engine compartment
    of a motor vehicle.


CLS 180/69.3
TXT With means to increase idle speed of internal combustion engine to
    compensate for accessory load:

    Power plant apparatus under subclass 54.1 wherein the power plant is an
    internal combustion engine and means are provided to increase automatically
    the idle speed of the engine when accessories to be driven by the engine
    are connected to drive means driven by the engine.


CLS 180/69.4
TXT With fuel supply for internal combustion engine:

    Power plant apparatus under subclass 54.1 wherein the power plant is an
    internal combustion engine and the vehicle is provided with means to
    provide fuel to the engine, said fuel supply means being connected to the
    means controlling the operation of the engine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, appropriate subclasses for internal
    combustion engines, per se, with fuel supply means.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 5, for vehicle having fuel supply tanks and
    not claiming the power plant.


CLS 180/69.5
TXT Engine uses gaseous fuel:

    Power plant fuel supply apparatus under subclass 69.4 wherein the power
    plant uses a normally gaseous fuel and means are provided on the vehicle
    for storing or generating the fuel.

    (1)     Note.  The fuel may be stored in gaseous form such as propane, in
    liquid for such as LPG or may be generated and stored by means carried on
    the vehicle or on a trailer attached to the vehicle.


CLS 180/69.6
TXT Vehicle has plural power plants:

    Power plant apparatus under subclass 54.1 wherein the vehicle has two or
    more separate power plants mounted on a single body or body frame.

    (1)     Note.  The power plants may be used individually or simultaneously
    and the operation of one may control the operation of the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14.2,   for vehicle trains with more than one power plant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses 1+
    for plural motors driving a planetary gear transmission lacking significant
    vehicle structure.

    477,    Interrelated Power Delivery Controls, Including Engine Control,
    subclasses 2+ for plural motors with interrelated control between a
    transmission clutch, or brake, and lacking significant vehicle structure.


CLS 180/76
TXT Miscellaneous devices under class definition for allowing a driven
    road-wheel to turn faster than the corresponding wheel on the other side
    when the resistance that it meets is less than that of the other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 640+ for compensating
    mechanism other than planetary gearing connecting the adjacent ends of two
    shafts and subclass 575 for pawls and ratchets connecting one or more
    wheels to a shaft.


    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 41+ for
    pawl-and-ratchet and other overrunning clutches.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses 220+
    for planetary gear differentials.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   for a motor vehicle provided with powered, ground-engaging means
    for producing, or assisting in the production of, lateral movement of the
    vehicle (e.g., for parking) and wherein the means comprises a rotatably
    driven auxiliary wheel or endless track, the drive train for which wheel or
    track may include the vehicle's differential.


CLS 180/78
TXT Controlling devices under subclass 315 mounted on the steering post or
    handle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 484+ and 491+ for hand
    and/or foot operated control lever and linkage systems.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 319, per se, for manually
    controlled speed regulators.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 600+,
    especially subclass 627 for panel board-type switchboards.


CLS 180/84
TXT Devices under class definition for preventing the cloud of dust raised by
    the vehicle from settling on the occupants or the vehicle claimed in
    combination with a feature limited to a motor-vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 847+ for dust-guards for vehicles in
    general.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 96+ for dust-guards used on
    railway-vehicles.


CLS 180/89.1
TXT Body structure under the class definition claimed in combination with a
    feature limited to a motor vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54.1,   and indented subclasses, for inventions relating to the mounting of
    a power plant in a body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, appropriate subclasses, for
    vehicle body construction in general.


CLS 180/89.11
TXT Apparatus under subclass 89.1 wherein the passenger compartment of a motor
    vehicle is provided with either I, an article receiving compartment or
    receptacle means or II, a means which may include a compartment or
    receptacle whereby articles such as litter or trash may be positively
    removed from within the passenger compartment of a vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 37.8+ for auxiliary
    article compartments accessible from within the passenger compartment of a
    vehicle.


CLS 180/89.12
TXT Apparatus under subclass 89.1 in which a motor vehicle other than what is
    normally considered to be a roadway type vehicle (e.g., automobile, truck,
    bus, etc.) is provided with an enclosed operator's compartment or station.

    (1)     Note.  Cabs for tractors, self-propelled farm machines, bulldozers,
    etc., are classified here providing no specific art structure is claimed.
    This subclass will take a nominally claimed bulldozer, harvester, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 102 and 190 for similar
    structure where no vehicle features for Classes 180 and 280 are claimed.


CLS 180/89.13
TXT Apparatus under subclass 89.1 wherein the body or the vehicle comprises a
    compartment or portion for occupation by the vehicle operator, the
    compartment or portion being shiftable to at least one other position or
    attitude on the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  For classification here the cab or operator's station in its
    entirety is movable to an adjusted or alternate position.  Where a portion
    only of an otherwise fixed cab or operator's station is moved to an
    adjusted or alternate position, classification is in subclass 89.18 of this
    class.


CLS 180/89.14
TXT Apparatus under subclass 89.13 wherein the compartment or portion is
    pivotally attached to the frame of the vehicle whereby it is shiftable to
    an alternate attitude or position.


CLS 180/89.15
TXT Apparatus under subclass 89.14 wherein the compartment is shifted to its
    alternate attitude or position by either I, a motive means movable by the
    application of a pressurized fluid or II, a linkage or other gearing
    provided a mechanical advantage to a user for positively moving the
    compartment or portion.


CLS 180/89.16
TXT Apparatus under subclass 89.13 wherein the compartment occupied by the
    vehicle operator is positioned at least partially above the motor of the
    vehicle.


CLS 180/89.17
TXT Apparatus under subclass 89.1 wherein the motor vehicle comprises body
    parts movable to alternate positions, the movable body parts providing an
    entrance-way to the vehicle motor.


CLS 180/89.18
TXT Apparatus under subclass 89.17 wherein the body parts movable to alternate
    positions comprises either the seat means or other part (e.g., floor) of
    the vehicle operator's compartment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89.13,  for a cab or operator's station movable in its entirety to an
    adjusted or alternate position.


CLS 180/89.19
TXT Apparatus under subclass 89.1 wherein the compartment occupied by the
    vehicle operator is positioned at least partially above the motor of the
    vehicle.


CLS 180/89.2
TXT With means for handling exhaust of a motor:

    Apparatus under subclass 89.1 wherein the feature comprises means for
    receiving, conducting, or otherwise handling the products of combustion
    discharged from a motor utilized for propelling a vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    296,    as explained in subclass 309.

    309,    for a motor vehicle which is provided with means for receiving,
    conducting, or otherwise handling the products of combustion discharged
    from its motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 272+ as explained in the reference thereto
    appearing in subclass 296.

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 121+ as explained in the reference thereto
    appearing in subclass 296.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 49+ as explained in the reference thereto
    appearing in subclass 296.1.

    293,    Vehicle Fenders, subclass 113 as explained in the reference thereto
    appearing in subclass 296.


CLS 180/90
TXT Dashboards under subclass 89.1 claimed in connection with a feature limited
    to a motor vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  May include the disposition or arrangements of control or
    other instruments on the dashboard.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315,    for controlling devices for motor vehicles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 298 for panels and
    switch-boards which are of general application for mounting electrical
    devices.


CLS 180/90.6
TXT Inventions under subclass 89.1 in the footboards of motor vehicles and in
    wind and heat guards for the same, usually in connection with the pedal
    openings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 18+, for a flexible
    sealing diaphragm attached to a moving rod and to a casing, and subclasses
    469+, for levers and for guards and devices of this nature claimed
    significantly in combination with levers.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, appropriate subclasses for the
    floor, or a floor-related feature, of a vehicle body.


CLS 180/116
TXT Vehicles under the class definition comprising means maintaining a working
    fluid mass, i.e., a cushion or film of fluid, between a surface of the
    vehicle and a reaction supporting surface, to cause a force to act on the
    vehicle to repel the vehicle from the supporting surface so as to sustain
    the vehicle in lift above, but in close proximity to, the supporting
    surface, the said fluid issuing from the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  This definition is intended to cover an art collection of
    surface effect vehicles and no motor propulsion means need be disclosed or
    intended to be used.  The vehicle may be a broadly recited art device and
    no specific vehicle structure need be claimed.  The fluid cushion may be
    identified as merely a support, it being assumed for purposes of this
    definition, that a fluid cushion support is intended and is inherently
    capable of use in moving any device or load over a surface in the manner of
    a vehicle.  A subcombination of the vehicle comprising the surface effect
    producing means is classifiable under this definition.

    (2)     Note.  Subject matter under this definition includes a vehicle
    having wheels or wheel substitutes and a separate or auxiliary surface
    effect producing means.

    (3)     Note.  The "reaction supporting surface" in the definition may be
    any surface (e.g., water, etc.) other than one which is a part (e.g., a
    track, etc.) of the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164,    for a motor vehicle having powered means for creating a fluid force
    to attract the vehicle to a surface on which it may travel, and see the
    reference to this subclass (116) in (2) Note thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 10.1, for air cushion supported rotary cutting
    lawn mowers.

    104,    Railways, appropriate subclasses for railways having track guided
    surface effect vehicles.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, appropriate subclasses for transportation
    equipment for railways having a surface effect means.

    114,    Ships, appropriate subclasses, especially subclass 67, for surface
    effect marine vehicles having propulsion means extending in and acting
    against the water, as well as devices peculiar to water borne vehicles.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 12.1+ and 23 for fluid sustained aircraft
    operating in both ground effect and free flight conditions.  Class 180
    takes ground effect machines which utilize the action of a working fluid
    mass against a reaction surface to effect a limited lifting of the vehicle,
    but do not provide sufficient vertical thrust that would enable such to
    attain a free flight condition, i.e., where the earth's surface has no
    effect on the vehicle, the latter being provided for by Class 244.

    305,    Wheel Substitutes for Land Vehicles, appropriate subclasses for
    wheel substitutes, per se, with the exception of the fluid supported
    surface effect devices provided for by this subclass.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 676 for an article supported
    by one or more columns of air issuing from a surface beneath the article
    and wherein the article is moved laterally relative to the surface by
    mechanical or manual means.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 30+, for aircraft operation
    teaching devices using fluid supported training apparatus to simulate "in
    space" conditions.


CLS 180/117
TXT A vehicle under subclass 116 comprising means to propel the vehicle or
    control the direction of movement, attitude, or propulsion of the vehicle.


CLS 180/118
TXT A vehicle under subclass 117 in which a condition indicative of instability
    of the vehicle (e.g., a variation of cushion or curtain pressure, a
    variation of the height of the vehicle above the supporting surface, etc.)
    causes operation of the propulsion or control means without the
    intervention of a human operator.


CLS 180/119
TXT A vehicle under subclass 117 wherein the propulsion or control means has at
    least a portion thereof in contact with the supporting surface.


CLS 180/120
TXT A vehicle under subclass 117 wherein at least part of the working fluid is
    utilized as the propulsion or control means.


CLS 180/121
TXT A vehicle under subclass 120 wherein the working fluid is utilized to
    produce a plurality of separate fluid cushions.


CLS 180/122
TXT A vehicle under subclass 120 wherein the working fluid is utilized to
    produce a fluid cushion which is at least in part, supplied from and
    confined by a dynamic seal or fluid curtain.


CLS 180/123
TXT A vehicle under subclass 116 provided with means to diminish the
    undesirable effect of the upward spray or debris occasioned by the action
    of the fluid against the supporting surface, e.g., lateral deflectors,
    shields, etc.


CLS 180/124
TXT A vehicle under subclass 116 provided with a chamber means which is
    expanded or inflated by the admission of the working fluid to support the
    weight of the vehicle and supply the working fluid for producing the
    surface effect.


CLS 180/125
TXT A vehicle under subclass 116 wherein the basal area of the vehicle conforms
    to the contour of the supporting surface, usually planar, and is supported
    above the surface by a thin film of high pressure fluid.


CLS 180/126
TXT A vehicle under subclass 116 wherein the working fluid is contained, at
    least in part, by separate side walls which are substantially rigid under
    normal conditions of use, are rigidly connected to the vehicle and extended
    in the direction of movement of the vehicle.


CLS 180/127
TXT A vehicle under subclass 116 provided with a flexible skirt suspended from
    the basal area of the vehicle for confining at least a portion of the
    working fluid.


CLS 180/128
TXT A vehicle under subclass 127 wherein the flexible skirt is provided with an
    outlet to supply and maintain the working fluid.


CLS 180/129
TXT A vehicle under subclass 116 wherein the working fluid is, at least
    partially, supplied and maintained by a dynamic seal or fluid curtain.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    for propulsion or control means for a surface effect vehicle
    utilizing a dynamic seal or fluid curtain.


CLS 180/130
TXT A vehicle under subclass 129 wherein the dynamic seal or fluid curtain has
    a fluid recovery means.


CLS 180/164
TXT WITH POWERED MEANS FOR CREATING FLUID FORCE TO ATTRACT VEHICLE TO SURFACE
    OF TRAVEL:

    Vehicle under the class definition provided with a fluid-moving device
    (e.g., blower, fan) driven by the vehicle's propulsion motor or by an
    auxiliary motor, for causing a flow of fluid (ordinarily air) away from all
    or a portion of the region between the vehicle and a surface on or along
    which it may travel (usually a vehicle-underlying surface) and with such
    confining structure (e.g., apron, seal) for the region as may be necessary
    to cause the flow of fluid therefrom to result in a less-than-ambient
    pressure in the region, thus causing the vehicle to be attracted to the
    surface (by a force greater than that of gravity when the surface is a
    vehicle-underlying one).

    (1)     Note.  The art of this subclass is not limited to the scope of the
    class definition; rather, the subclass has been utilized as a collecting
    point for load transporting devices, not otherwise provided for, which
    devices may lack the propulsion motor of a motor vehicle and, in fact, may
    amount to no more than a movable load transporting platform; however, the
    devices do meet the requirement of having a powered (ordinarily by an
    onboard power plant) means for developing the suction-creating, fluid flow.

    (2)     Note.  The devices of this subclass occasionally have the
    alternative capability of maintaining a cushion of fluid between themselves
    and a reaction-supporting surface (e.g., by a reversal of the direction of
    fluid flow) as provided for in subclasses 116+ below; cross-reference
    copies of patents to such devices are found in the appropriate subclass of
    that area (subclasses 116+).  In rare instances, the attractive force of
    this subclass (164) and the fluid cushion of subclasses 116+ may be
    operative simultaneously in different regions of a single device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116+,   for a motor vehicle of the surface effect type, and see (2) Note
    above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 362 for a vacuum hold-down.


CLS 180/165
TXT WITH FLUID OR MECHANICAL MEANS TO ACCUMULATE ENERGY (I) DERIVED FROM MOTION
    OF VEHICLE OR (II) OBTAINED FROM OPERATION OF VEHICLE MOTOR, AND GIVE UP
    THE ENERGY (1) WHEN NEEDED FOR VEHICLE ACCELERATION OR (2) TO POWER AN
    AUXILIARY SYSTEM OF THE VEHICLE:

    Vehicle under the class definition provided with means of a fluid or a
    mechanical nature (e.g., pressure reservoir, flywheel) to receive and
    retain energy which (I) results from the momentum of the vehicle in
    ordinary travel, or any other movement of all or part of the vehicle
    ancillary thereto, or (II) is produced by the operation of the motor of the
    vehicle (which operation may or may not serve simultaneously a vehicle
    propelling purpose) which means will, upon demand, feed back the stored
    energy (1) to aid in starting up or increasing the speed of the vehicle or
    (2) to drive or otherwise operate a system of the vehicle which serves
    other than a propelling purpose.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass was established during the project which
    reclassified former subclasses 1, 3+, 25+, 42+, 64, 66+, 82+, and 115 and
    is intended to provide a locus for collecting art which relates to certain
    aspects of conserving the energy required for the operation of a motor
    vehicle.  The art initially placed here was assembled primarily from the
    informal records of an examiner in the class and secondarily from screening
    the subclasses listed above; while the collection is believed to be
    relatively complete, also, insofar as the nonreclassified portion of the
    class is concerned, it may presently contain only a minor portion of such
    relevant art as exists in other classes. Inasmuch as the development of a
    subclass of this nature was beyond the original scope of the project, it
    was necessary to keep the subclass concept relatively narrow, e.g., to have
    broadened it to include energy conservation devices of the kind commonly
    associated with electrically propelled vehicles would have involved
    reviewing such relatively large fields of art as dynamic braking, motors
    which may function alternatively as generators, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 408 for a motor and a source of fluid for
    driving the motor, and wherein the fluid is in the form of a gas which is
    supplied to or removed from the motor by, e.g., a pump, and wherein is
    further provided a storage vessel for serving as the gas supplying or
    removing device and additionally wherein the motor is a unit which is
    usable either as a motor (when driven by gas from the charged storage
    vessel) or as a pump (when used to charge the vessel); and subclasses 413+
    for a motor and a source of fluid for driving the motor, and wherein is
    provided structure that stores energy and also a manual or condition
    responsive means for controlling either the input to the storage means or
    the output therefrom.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 212+ for a land vehicle of the wheeled
    type provided with positive means adapting it to be propelled by an
    occupant, and wherein the means is one operable by the occupant, and
    further wherein is additionally provided a means for storing energy, which
    energy is expended in driving the vehicle.


CLS 180/166
TXT WHEELED INFANT CARRIAGE OR CRIB WITH DRIVEN MEANS FOR RECIPROCATING IT
    LONGITUDINALLY:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising a vehicle of the kind used
    for resting or transporting an infant, and motor means for moving the
    vehicle back and forth in a direction parallel to its longitudinal axis.

    (1)     Note.  The purpose of the movement is to quiet or relax the infant,
    induce it to sleep, etc.  To further promote such relaxation, etc., it is
    not uncommon to also provide means for rocking the infant supporting
    portion of the vehicle relative to the remainder thereof.

    (2)     Note.  A vehicle of this subclass is propelled manually when being
    utilized to transport the infant, and, from that standpoint, is a vehicle
    for Class 280. However, the presence of a motor means, which means propels
    the vehicle in its direction of travel, albeit to a limited extent, is
    considered to make this class (180) the more appropriate locus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclass 109 for an infant crib provided with motor means for
    imparting a rocking (e.g., a to-and-fro) movement thereto.

    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, or Animal Powered, subclasses 37+ for a
    motor in which the prime mover is a spring.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 47.34+ for a vehicle of that class which
    is stable when traveling and is provided with handle means whereby it may
    be propelled by an attendant; and see particularly subclasses 47.38+
    thereunder.


CLS 180/167
TXT WITH MEANS FOR CONTROLLING OPERATION RESPONSIVE TO ELECTROMAGNETIC
    RADIATION, MAGNETIC FORCE, OR SOUND WAVES RECEIVED FROM SOURCE, OR
    REFLECTED FROM OBJECT OR SURFACE, LOCATED APART FROM VEHICLE:

    Vehicle under the class definition provided with means for regulating its
    operation (e.g., starting, steering, stopping), which means responds to
    electromagnetic radiation (e.g., radio rays, light rays, gamma rays) or
    magnetic force or sound waves, and wherein the radiation, force, or waves
    are either sent to the vehicle from a location remote therefrom or else are
    reflected to the vehicle (e.g., an on-board source creates the radiation,
    force, or waves) from an object or surface at such a location.

    (1)     Note.  The control of a vehicle by an operator located apart
    therefrom, and utilizing an electrical conductor, one end of which travels
    with the vehicle, to transmit signals thereto, does not constitute subject
    matter for this and the indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.1,    for a motor vehicle wherein the motor of the vehicle is supplied
    with fuel or the equivalent from outside the vehicle.

    170+,   for a motor vehicle provided with means which is responsive to the
    speed of the vehicle for maintaining its speed at, or preventing if from
    exceeding, a particular value.

    401,    for the combination of a motor vehicle and a land based steering
    datum, the vehicle including means for sensing the datum and for
    controlling a steering motor in accordance with the information sensed from
    the datum.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 3.11+ for the remote control of a missile;
    and subclasses 189+ for the remote control, by apparatus of an electrical
    nature, of an aircraft.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, appropriate subclasses (e.g.,
    subclasses 182, 186+), for the remote control of a vehicle of the railway
    type.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 16 for the control of
    an electric motor by space-transmitted electromagnetic or electrostatic
    energy; and subclass 587 for positional servo systems for guiding a land
    vehicle about a single axis.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, appropriate subclasses (e.g.,
    subclasses 901+ for the use of electrical energy for communicating
    information.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclass 175 or a light or sound
    responsive toy; and subclasses 454+ for a remotely controlled toy vehicle.


CLS 180/168
TXT Having controlling means adapted to interact with stationary means which
    describes course of vehicle's travel:

    Vehicle under subclass 167 wherein the means for regulating the operation
    of the vehicle is adapted to function with or under the influence of a
    means which is fixed in a position (e.g., embedded in the roadway which
    supports the vehicle) and is so configured as to outline the path which the
    vehicle is intended to follow.


CLS 180/169
TXT Radiation, force, or waves reflected from external object or surface:

    Vehicle under subclass 167 wherein the radiation, force, or waves to which
    the means responds is that which is reflected from an object or a surface
    located remotely from the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168,    for a motor vehicle provided with means for controlling its
    operation, which means is responsive to electromagnetic radiation, magnetic
    force, or sound waves received from a source, or from an object or surface,
    located apart from the vehicle, and wherein the controlling means is
    adapted to interact with a stationary means which is of a kind whereby it
    describes the intended course of travel of the vehicle.  While the
    stationary means of that subclass frequently is a conductor embedded in a
    pavement, it may also comprise, for example, a reflecting element on each
    of a series of roadside posts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), appropriate subclasses for reflected or otherwise
    returned wave systems (e.g., object detection, radar).


CLS 180/170
TXT WITH MEANS RESPONSIVE TO SPEED OF VEHICLE FOR MAINTAINING SPEED AT, OR
    PREVENTING IT FROM EXCEEDING, A PARTICULAR VALUE:

    Vehicle under the class definition provided with means for controlling its
    rate of movement over a supporting surface in response to its speed, which
    controlling may consist of either (a) preventing it from exceeding an
    arbitrarily established, predetermined velocity or (b) maintaining it at a
    particular velocity, or velocity range, selected by the operator of the
    vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  The means ordinarily includes a device (e.g., a
    servomechanism) for operating a velocity-affecting element (e.g., the
    throttle) of the vehicle.

    (2)     Note.  A means for preventing the vehicle from exceeding a
    particular speed often is identified as a "governor" whereas a means for
    maintaining the vehicle at a particular speed, or within a relatively
    narrow range of speed, frequently is designated as a "cruise control";
    however, the two functions frequently are so interrelated as to make it
    difficult to identify a device as being particularly adapted to perform
    only one, or the other, of the functions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167+,   for a motor vehicle having means for controlling its operation
    responsive to electromagnetic radiation or magnetic force or sound waves
    either received from a source, or reflected from an object or a surface,
    located apart from the vehicle, and wherein the controlling of the
    operation of the vehicle may include the regulation of its speed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 488+ for a device of that class
    which is responsive to speed.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 513 for a linkage system
    associated with a foot operated accelerator, which system may include means
    for locking the accelerator at a particular point in its travel.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 319+ (see especially
    indented subclasses 350+ and 378+) for means for controlling the speed of
    an engine, which engine may be the motor of a vehicle, wherein the means is
    responsive to a condition of the engine; and subclass 198 for an accessory
    (e.g., a fuel or ignition cutoff device) for an engine.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 47+ for a system of that class which
    includes a valve and a driven actuator therefor, which actuator influences
    the operation of the valve in accordance with the speed at which it is
    driven.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 1.1+ for the joint
    control of a vehicle engine (e.g., as by a throttle holder) and a vehicle
    brake.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, appropriate subclasses for
    controlling the speed of a vehicle of the railway type; however, as
    indicated in section IV(a) of the class definition of that class (246),
    speed control of a vehicle is elsewhere (as designated therein) "when all
    of the mechanism is upon the vehicle and there is no cooperation with
    devices on the track or roadway".

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 51 for means
    for protecting an electrical system or device by sensing an excessive speed
    condition and activating a protective circuit.

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, subclasses 800+ and 825+ for
    single motor running-speed control systems with, and without, feedback,
    respectively.

    477,    Interrelated Power Delivery Controls, Including Engine Controls,
    subclass 108 for engine speed control and interrelated transmission control
    to achieve constant output speed, where specific vehicle structure is not
    claimed.


CLS 180/171
TXT Including device to signal to operator existence of unusual or unintended
    speed:

    Vehicle under subclass 170 wherein the means includes a device to audibly,
    visibly, or otherwise indicate to a person controlling the operation of the
    vehicle that the vehicle is not traveling at the expected or desired speed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 670 for an electrical
    communication device (e.g., an alarm) which is automatically responsive to
    velocity (e.g., of a vehicle); and indented subclasses 671+ for a similar
    device but wherein the velocity sensed is that in an angular direction
    (e.g., a centrifugal governor).


CLS 180/172
TXT Including device responsive to centrifugal force:

    Vehicle under subclass 170 wherein the means includes a device for sensing
    the outward force resulting from imparting curvilinear or rotational
    movement to a mass and for reacting (e.g, by developing a control signal or
    force) to that force.

    (1)     Note.  While rotating weights driven at a speed proportional to
    that of the vehicle's motor presently predominate as the device of this
    subclass, included also, for example, is the pendulum of a curve
    compensator (i.e., a refinement to the regulating means for automatically
    adjusting the "set" speed of the means to changes in the course of the
    roadway along which the vehicle is traveling).


CLS 180/173
TXT And means to prevent tampering or unauthorized use:

    Vehicle under subclass 172 wherein the means includes additional means to
    discourage, reduce, or eliminate the possibility of an unauthorized
    adjusting or other changing of the controlling means or the use of that
    means by an unauthorized person.

    (1)     Note.  A means for preventing unauthorized use of the controlling
    means may serve also to prevent unauthorized use of the vehicle of which it
    is a part.


CLS 180/174
TXT Having electrical switch:

    Vehicle under subclass 172 wherein the device includes a switch of the
    electrical type, which is caused to function by the centrifugal force.


CLS 180/175
TXT Including fluid pressure actuated servomechanism:

    Vehicle under subclass 170 wherein the means includes a servomechanism of
    the fluid pressure actuated type for operating a velocity-affecting element.


CLS 180/176
TXT And electrical quantities comparison means for development of input
    pressure:

    Vehicle under subclass 175 wherein the means includes additional means for
    comparing one electrical quantity (e.g., voltage, pulse, waveform, flux,
    etc.) with another (e.g., a reference) quantity of a like kind, which
    comparison means is involved in the development of a pressure which is fed
    into the controlling means.


CLS 180/177
TXT And one or more electrical components for establishing or regulating input
    pressure:

    Vehicle under subclass 175 wherein the means also includes at least one
    electrical component for setting up or maintaining or changing a pressure
    which is fed into the means.

    (1)     Note.  The presence anywhere in the means of any electrical device
    or element which sets up or maintains or changes the pressure is sufficient
    for classification in this subclass.


CLS 180/178
TXT Including electrically actuated servomechanism:

    Vehicle under subclass 170 wherein the means includes a servomechanism of
    the electrically actuated type for operating a velocity-affecting element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices as explained in the
    reference thereto appearing in subclass 170 above.


CLS 180/179
TXT And electrical quantities comparison means for development of electrical
    input:

    Vehicle under subclass 178 wherein the means includes additional means for
    comprising one electrical quantity (e.g., voltage, pulse, waveform, flux,
    etc.) with another (e.g., a reference) quantity of a like kind, which
    comparison means is involved in the development of an electrical signal
    which is fed into the controlling means.


CLS 180/180
TXT SKI- OR SKATE-TYPE VEHICLE FOR IMPARTING MOVEMENT TO A PERSON STANDING
    THEREON:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising either (I) a
    surface-engaging power device for pushing or pulling a standing person who
    is at least partially supported by, and whose feet are secured to or in
    direct contact with, one or more ski- or skate-like (e.g., ice, roller)
    members, or (b) one or more ski- or skate-like members which have power
    means integral therewith or at least partially attached thereto, and which
    are adapted to be secured to or in direct contact with the feet of a
    standing person supported thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9.22,   for a motor vehicle which is adapted to travel upon endless,
    flexible track carried by the vehicle, and wherein the vehicle is provided
    with means whereby it may be guided by an attendant who is walking (i.e.,
    is located apart from the vehicle).

    19.1,   for a motor vehicle having steering means adapted to be actuated by
    an attendant who is walking (i.e., is located apart from the vehicle).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 4 for aircraft of the heavier-than-air type,
    which subclass may include a device to be attached to a person for placing
    the person in, or maintaining him in, an airborne condition.


CLS 180/181
TXT With power means or a portion thereof affixed to or built into the ski or
    skate:

    Apparatus under subclass 180 in which the power means is integral with or
    at least partially attached to the one or more members.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 11.115 for a skate having means for
    propelling it, the means being of a kind which is driven by the person
    utilizing the skate.


CLS 180/182
TXT INCLUDING ONE OR MORE SKI-LIKE OR RUNNER MEMBERS:

    Vehicle under the class definition having a ski-like or runner member
    attached thereto, which member is in sliding contact with a vehicle
    supporting surface during a period when the vehicle is in a normal mode of
    operation, and wherein the member serves to guide or to support, in part,
    at least, the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  Vehicle trains consisting of one or more sleds attached to a
    motor vehicle are classified in this and the indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclass 43 for an ice boat.

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 8 and 128 for braking means particularly adapted
    for use on a vehicle of the sled type.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 8+ for a vehicle of that class which is
    provided with supporting means of both the wheeled and the runner type; and
    subclasses 845+ for a vehicle of that class which is provided with one or
    more supporting means in the nature of a ski-like member.

    305,    Wheel Substitutes for Land Vehicles, appropriate subclasses for a
    vehicle supporting and/or propelling means of other than a wheeled or
    runner type.


CLS 180/183
TXT Member substitutable for wheel type support structure:

    Vehicle under subclass 182 in which at least one member is utilized to
    change at least part of the supportive engagement of the vehicle with the
    surface from a rolling contact type to a sliding contact type.

    (1)     Note.  If the structure which provided the rolling contact type of
    engagement continues to perform--along with the member--a supporting
    function, there is not a substitution within the meaning of this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 9+ for a vehicle provided with both
    supporting wheels and runners in which either the wheels or runners may be
    retracted into an inoperative position leaving the other in a position of
    support; and subclass 13 for runners which are designed to be applied to
    the wheels of a wheeled vehicle.


CLS 180/184
TXT With propulsion element of endless track type:

    Vehicle under subclass 183 provided with a driven endless belt or chain
    type propulsion element, which describes a path determined by two or more
    longitudinally spaced drive and idler wheels (i.e., the end wheels) around
    which it passes, and which directly engages the supporting surface.


CLS 180/185
TXT Track comprises substitute for or addition to propulsion element of
    traction wheel type:

    Vehicle under subclass 184 in which the endless belt or chain-type
    propulsion element constitutes a substitute for, or an addition to, a
    propulsion element of the kind which comprises a powered wheel having a
    periphery which bears directly on the supporting surface.

    (1)     Note.  The powered wheel may remain in place and by utilized as a
    driving wheel for the track.


CLS 180/186
TXT With at least one surface-engaging propulsion element:

    Vehicle under subclass 182 provided with one or more
    supporting-surface-contacting propulsion elements.


CLS 180/187
TXT Element shuffles along support surface:

    Vehicle under subclass 186 wherein at least one surface containing
    propulsion element propels the vehicle by alternately (a) freely sliding
    upon, or slightly above and generally parallel to, the supporting surface
    away from a point on the vehicle and (b) firmly engaging the supporting
    surface and pulling the point on the vehicle towards it.

    (1)     Note.  The element may be a member in the sense of subclass 182.


CLS 180/188
TXT Spiral type element:

    Vehicle under subclass 186 wherein at least one propulsion element
    comprises a reaction surface in the form of a screw or a helix which is
    driven about its axis of rotation, said axis being in general alignment
    with the direction of the vehicle's motion.


CLS 180/189
TXT Plural elements connected to and spaced along the plural throws of a common
    crankshaft:

    Vehicle under subclass 186 including plural propulsion elements, each
    attached to one of the cranks of a crankshaft at a point on the element
    remote from the surface contacting portion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 12.11+ for a sled having an
    occupant-driven propulsion means which propels the sled by making
    intermittent contact with the sled's supporting surface.


CLS 180/190
TXT Endless track type element:

    Vehicle under subclass 186 wherein at least one propulsion element
    comprises an endless belt or chain in direct engagement with the supporting
    surface, and which belt or chain travels in a path having a forward
    extremity determined by one track driving or guiding wheel and a rearward
    extremity determined by another such wheel (i.e., the end wheels).


CLS 180/191
TXT Protruding from member:

    Vehicle under subclass 190 in which a portion of the chain or belt passes
    through and projects slightly below an opening in the member or members.


CLS 180/192
TXT Plural tracks with interconnected drive or support means:

    Vehicle under subclass 190 including plural, individual track type elements
    having interjoined drive or support means.


CLS 180/193
TXT With vertically movable track support located intermediate the forward and
    rearward extremities of the track:

    Vehicle under subclass 190 provided with a belt or chain supporting device
    which is situated between, and is vertically movable relative to at least
    one of, the end wheels.

    (1)     Note.  "Support", as used herein, is not limited to a force exerted
    in opposition to gravity; rather, it encompasses any force applied by a
    vertically movable device to the inner surface of the belt or chain in a
    direction generally normal thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9.5,    for a motor vehicle having a special driving device in the nature
    of a portable track and wherein the track is of the endless, flexible type
    and further wherein a support, which is vertically movable, is provided for
    the track.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    305,    Wheel Substitutes for Land Vehicles, subclass 141 for a wheel
    substitute in the nature of an endless track, and wherein the track is
    provided with a vertically movable supporting means intermediate its run.


CLS 180/194
TXT Plural discrete elements protruding from a wheel, hub, or shaft:

    Vehicle under subclass 186 including plural, individual, propulsion
    elements each attached directly to a single wheel, hub, or shaft for
    rotation therewith about its axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 12.11+ for a sled having an
    occupant-driven propulsion means which propels the sled by making
    intermittent contact with the sled's supporting surface.


CLS 180/195
TXT Each element moves relative to wheel, hub, or shaft:

    Vehicle under subclass 194 wherein the elements are attached to the wheel,
    hub, or shaft in such a manner as to be moved, at least in part, relative
    to the wheel, hub, or shaft during the vehicle's operation.


CLS 180/196
TXT Element comprises traction wheel:

    Vehicle under subclass 186 wherein the propulsion element comprises a
    powered wheel having a periphery which bears directly on the supporting
    surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194+,   for a traction wheel having individual elements protruding
    therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 12.13+ for a sled having an
    occupant-driven propulsion means for the traction wheel type.


CLS 180/197
TXT WITH MEANS FOR DETECTING WHEEL SLIP DURING VEHICLE ACCELERATION AND
    CONTROLLING IT BY REDUCING APPLICATION OF POWER TO WHEEL:

    Apparatus under the class definition wherein the vehicle is provided with
    means for determining if a driven wheel is rotating more rapidly than is
    proportional to the speed of the vehicle (i.e., the wheel is spinning
    relative to the surface with which it is in engagement) during a period
    when the speed of the vehicle is being increased, and for taking action to
    reduce or eliminate the unproportionality of the rotational velocity of the
    wheel to the speed of the vehicle by decreasing the amount or the effect of
    the power being applied to drive the wheel.

    (1)     Note.  The means of this subclass is sometimes used also for
    detecting wheel slip during braking (i.e., the wheel is rotating more
    slowly than is proportional to the speed of the vehicle and therefore is
    sliding relative to the surface it engages), and may include a capability
    for reducing or eliminating the unproportionality by decreasing the braking
    effort being applied to the wheel.

    (2)     Note.  In detecting wheel slip of the spinning kind (i.e., as is
    associated with acceleration), it is common practice to use the rotational
    velocity of a nondriven wheel as the reference against which the velocity
    of the driven wheel is compared.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    477,    Interrelated Power Delivery Controls, Including Engine Control,
    subclass 35 for interrelated differential and engine control.


CLS 180/198
TXT PORTABLE CARRIER SUPPORTS MOTOR VEHICLE IN TOTO AND IS PROPELLED THEREBY:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising a dolly or platform having
    ground-engaging supporting members in the nature of wheels or wheel
    substitutes and serving as the sole support for a motor vehicle, the motor
    of the vehicle being utilized to drive the loaded dolly or platform.

    (1)     Note.  The motor vehicle does not undergo any significant change in
    identity or status.

    (2)     Note.  The motor vehicle most commonly drives the dolly or platform
    by (a) driving its own wheels or wheel substitutes to drive directly (e.g.,
    by a belt or chain and the appropriate gearing or by frictional engagement)
    or indirectly (e.g., by a treadmill) the ground-engaging, supporting
    members of the dolly or platform, or (b) driving the ground-engaging,
    supporting members directly from a power take-off located at the vehicle's
    motor, transmission, etc.


CLS 180/199
TXT WITH POWERED, GROUND-ENGAGING MEANS FOR PRODUCING, OR ASSISTING IN THE
    PRODUCTION OF, LATERAL MOVEMENT OF THE VEHICLE (E.G., FOR PARKING):

    Vehicle under the class definition provided with powered means for engaging
    the ground and lifting one or more of the vehicle's ground contacting
    members to relieve it of all or a part of its load and then either (1)
    transporting, while supporting, the one or more members in a sidewise
    direction, or (2) exerting, while at least part of the load is relieved, a
    sidewise thrust on the portion of the vehicle with which the one or more
    members are associated, or (3) supporting, after lifting, the one or more
    members, which members are at one end of the vehicle, for relatively
    friction-free sidewise movement (e.g., as on casters) and then cooperating
    with the motor of the vehicle to produce the sidewise movement of the
    members, and a resultant swinging of the vehicle, when (a) power is applied
    to the vehicle's two, driven, ground-contacting members at its other end
    and (b) the appropriate one (depending upon the direction of swinging
    desired) of those two members is braked against rotation and thus utilized
    as a point of pivot for the swinging of the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  While vehicle movement of the kind provided for herein finds
    its most common application in the "parallel" parking of the vehicle, it is
    not infrequently utilized in turning the vehicle end for end.

    (2)     Note.  A device or element for preventing sagging of a wheel and
    its suspension members, at such time as the portion of the vehicle to which
    they are attached is elevated, appears frequently in the art of this and
    the indented subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  Certain motor vehicles, which are merely reducible in
    overall dimensions for a storage (e.g., parking) or transport purpose, will
    be found in subclass 208 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208,    for a motor vehicle of the special wheel base type, which vehicle
    is of a collapsible or knockdown nature, and see (3) Note above.

    236,    for a motor vehicle having four wheels driven and wherein is
    provided means for steering all of the driven wheels and further wherein
    that means enables the vehicle to travel in a path which is other than that
    produced by turning the front wheels and the rear wheels substantially
    equally and oppositely (e.g., if each wheel is turned 90o about its axis of
    pivot, the vehicle will move sideways).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 418+ for a vehicle-attached jack for lifting the vehicle.  The
    powering of the jack, not only during its lifting movement but also for
    driving a wheeled jack relative to its supporting surface, by the motor of
    the vehicle being lifted is not foreign to the art of that subclass (418);
    however, to be proper therefor, the lifting should be limited to that
    performed in conjunction with repairing or servicing the vehicle.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 761 for a land vehicle provided with an
    attachment in the nature of a manually-actuated device for assisting in the
    parking of the vehicle in "parallel" fashion.  If the device is a jack
    which is powered during lifting by the motor of the vehicle, classification
    is in this class (180), but, in the absence of powered lateral movement of
    the vehicle, is not in this area (subclasses 199+).


CLS 180/200
TXT Comprising rotatably driven auxiliary wheel or endless track:

    Vehicle under subclass 199 wherein the means includes at least one wheel or
    endless track, which wheel or endless track (a) supplements or replaces
    some or all of the vehicle's usual ground-engaging elements in supporting
    the vehicle, (b) is driven about its axis of rotation, and (c) transports
    the vehicle in a sidewise direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.1+,   for a motor vehicle which is driven in some other way than by the
    mere rotation of road wheels as traction wheels.

    203,    for a motor vehicle which is provided with powered, ground-engaging
    means for producing, or assisting in the production of, lateral movement of
    the vehicle and wherein the means is a wheel substitute which may engage
    the ground cyclically.


CLS 180/201
TXT Driven by frictional engagement with tire of vehicle traction wheel:

    Vehicle under subclass 200 wherein the power for driving the auxiliary
    wheel or endless track is derived from, or transmitted by, a member which
    is in frictional engagement with a tire of one of the traction wheels of
    the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221+,   for a motor vehicle having a wheel arrangement comprising two
    wheels in tandem relationship and wherein one of the wheels is driven
    frictionally.

    342+,   for a motor vehicle, generally, which includes mechanism for
    transmitting driving effort to a wheel and wherein the mechanism includes a
    rotating element which drives the wheel by frictionally engaging it.


CLS 180/202
TXT Driven by auxiliary electric or fluid motor:

    Vehicle under subclass 200 wherein the power for driving the auxiliary
    wheel or endless track is provided by an ancillary motor of the electric or
    the fluid type.


CLS 180/203
TXT Comprising reciprocally driven stepper or rotatably driven cam:

    Vehicle under subclass 199 wherein the ground-engaging means comprises
    either an extensible leg or a revolvable surface, either of which exert a
    force upon the vehicle which is, at first, primarily an upwardly directed
    force, but which, by virtue of the location of the leg or the surface
    relative to the center of gravity of the vehicle, develops an
    ever-increasing lateral component as the driving cycle of the leg or
    surface progresses.

    (1)     Note.  The extensible leg or revolvable surface may shift the
    vehicle laterally in a single cycle of operation, or it may require a
    plurality of such cycles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8.1,    for a motor vehicle provided with a special driving device in the
    nature of a stepper.


CLS 180/204
TXT WITH DEVICE FOR PROGRAMMABLY OPERATING VEHICLE'S STEERABLE WHEELS:

    Vehicle under the class definition wherein the means includes a device
    which turns the steerable (e.g., the front) wheels of the vehicle in a
    direction and to an extent and at a time whereby, in conjunction with a
    particular, concurrent, backward or forward movement of the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  "Automatic parking", "automatic self-steering", and "preset
    maneuver" are typical of the art terms used to describe the subject matter
    of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167+,   for a motor vehicle provided with means for controlling its
    operation which is responsive to electromagnetic radiation, magnetic force,
    or sound waves received from a source, or reflected from an object or
    surface, which is located apart from the vehicle.

    400+,   for a motor vehicle provided with means for guiding it.


CLS 180/205
TXT With mechanism of occupant-powered type for developing torque for
    supplementing, alternating with, or replacing torque of motor:

    Vehicle under subclass 21 provided with a mechanism (e.g., pedal drive) for
    receiving physical effort on the part of an occupant of the vehicle and
    turning it into rotary force for use in propelling the vehicle, which
    rotary force may be utilized (a) simultaneously with the rotary force of
    the vehicle's motor to increase the total force available for propelling
    the vehicle, (b) to substitute periodically for the rotary force of the
    motor, or (c) to substitute indefinitely for the rotary force of the motor
    (i.e., the mechanism becomes the sole, or at least the principal, source of
    rotary force).

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note through (4) Note of subclass 21 above.

    (2)     Note.  The torque of the mechanism and that of the motor may be
    applied either to the same wheel or to different wheels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65.1+,  for a motor vehicle, generally, provided with an electric motor for
    driving it; and particularly subclass 65.2, for a motor vehicle having
    other than a special wheel base and provided with both electric and
    nonelectric means for driving it.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 212+ for a land vehicle of the wheeled
    type provided with means operable by an occupant for propelling the vehicle
    and wherein the means includes additional means for storing energy.


CLS 180/206
TXT And means for controlling motor in response to either operation of
    occupant-powered mechanism or vehicular movement resulting therefrom:

    Vehicle under subclass 205 provided also with means whereby the motor is
    caused to start, operate in a prescribed manner, stop, or otherwise perform
    in response to (a) the functioning of the occupant-powered mechanism, or a
    component thereof, for developing torque or (b) movement of the vehicle
    produced as a result of (a).


CLS 180/207
TXT Including member utilized in common by occupant-powered mechanism and by
    motor for transmitting torque output of each to wheel:

    Vehicle under subclass 205 which includes a member (e.g., a sprocket chain)
    for transmitting the torque output of either the occupant-powered mechanism
    or the motor to a particular wheel or an element (e.g., a sprocket)
    attached thereto, and which member is operative whenever torque is being
    developed by either the mechanism or the motor.


CLS 180/208
TXT Collapsible or knockdown for storage or transport:

    Vehicle under subclass 21 provided with elements or components which are
    foldable or telescopicably respositionable, or readily disconnectable, for
    a purpose relating either to placing the vehicle in a nonuse condition or
    moving the vehicle to another location.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note through (4) Note of subclass 21 above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 278 for a land vehicle of the wheeled type
    provided with means adapting it to be propelled by an occupant and further
    provided with means whereby it may be steered by an occupant, which means
    involves the control of a single wheel, and additionally provided with a
    frame which is of the adjustable, foldable, or knockdown type; and subclass
    287 for a land vehicle of the wheeled type provided with means adapting it
    to be propelled by an occupant and further provided with a frame which is
    adapted to be extended, folded, or readily taken apart.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclass 27 for a land vehicle
    body provided with means whereby it may be collapsed.


CLS 180/209
TXT With means for changing number of supporting wheels, or for adjusting
    relative location thereof:

    Vehicle under subclass 21 provided either with means whereby the number of
    wheels which engage the ground for supporting the vehicle may be decreased
    or increased, or with means whereby the position of at least one wheel
    relative to at least one other wheel may be changed.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note through (4) Note of subclass 21 above.

    (2)     Note.  "Supporting wheels" is interpreted to include not only the
    wheels which engage the ground while the vehicle is traveling in normal
    fashion, but also any other wheels which may be moved, relative to the
    vehicle, into engagement with the ground (e.g., to maintain a two-wheeled
    vehicle in its operating attitude at such time as it becomes unstable as a
    result of slowing or stopping).

    (3)     Note.  A vehicle having four wheels, which wheels are so arranged
    as to form a nonspecial (i.e., a rectangular) wheel base, and provided with
    means inherently capable of so rearranging or respacing the wheels as to
    change the wheel base to a special one, is proper for this subclass,
    regardless of whether or not such a change is expressed in "wheel base"
    terminology.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11+,    for a motor vehicle provided with an attachment in the nature of a
    motor-carrying frame, which attachment is supported in part by the vehicle.

    15,     for a motor vehicle provided with at least one traction wheel which
    does not constitute one of the main supporting wheels of the vehicle.

    16,     for a motor vehicle provided with an attachment in the nature of a
    traction-wheel-carrying frame, the traction wheels of which replace the
    vehicle's original traction wheels as vehicle supporting members.

    24.02,  for a motor vehicle having a wheel arrangement comprising five or
    more wheels and wherein one of the wheels is adjustably, or otherwise,
    mounted to move vertically for the purpose of modifying the proportion of
    the load imposed upon at least one other wheel of the vehicle.

    200+,   for a motor vehicle provided with powered, ground-engaging means
    for producing, or assisting in the production of, lateral movement of the
    vehicle (e.g., for parking) and wherein the means comprises a rotatably
    driven auxiliary wheel or endless track.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 638+ for a land vehicle of the wheeled
    type which is so constructed as to allow at least one dimension thereof to
    change.


CLS 180/210
TXT Having only three wheels:

    Vehicle under subclass 21 wherein the arrangement consists of three wheels
    for supporting the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note through (4) Note of subclass 21 above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 282 for a land vehicle of the wheeled type
    provided with means adapting it to be propelled by an occupant and further
    provided with a frame which is designed for more than two wheels; and
    subclass 62 for a land vehicle of the kind which normally travels on three
    wheels.


CLS 180/211
TXT Including steerable and driven wheel:

    Vehicle under subclass 210 wherein at least one wheel is not only drivingly
    rotated for propelling the vehicle, but is also attached to the vehicle in
    such a manner that it may be moved pivotably (e.g., rotatably) about a more
    or less vertical axis for changing the course of travel of the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6.2+,   for a motor vehicle which is steered by creating a difference
    between the driving effort developed by one or more traction elements
    located on one side of the vehicle and the driving effort developed by one
    or more traction elements located on the other side thereof.

    12+,    for a motor vehicle having a motor-carrying attachment in the
    nature of a wheeled frame and wherein the wheels of the frame are driven
    and steered.

    23+,    for a motor vehicle having a wheel arrangement comprising five or
    more wheels and wherein one or more of the wheels are driven and steered.

    37+,    for a motor vehicle of the steam traction engine type having
    steering wheels which are driven.

    222,    for a motor vehicle having a wheel arrangement comprising two
    wheels in tandem relationship and wherein one of the wheels is driven
    frictionally and further wherein means is provided for steering that wheel.

    223+,   for a motor vehicle having a wheel arrangement comprising two
    wheels in tandem relationship and wherein at least one of the wheels is
    driven and steered.

    400+,   for a motor vehicle having means for guiding it.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 771+ for a land vehicle of the wheeled
    type provided with means whereby one or more of its wheels may be steered
    by an occupant.


CLS 180/212
TXT All wheels motor driven:

    Vehicle under subclass 211 wherein each of the supporting wheels is
    drivingly rotated by the vehicle's motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24.08,  for a motor vehicle having a wheel arrangement comprising five or
    more wheels and wherein each wheel is driven.

    38,     for a motor vehicle of the steam traction engine type wherein not
    only the steering wheels, but also the remaining two wheels, are driven.

    224,    for a motor vehicle having a wheel arrangement comprising two
    wheels in tandem relationship and wherein at least one of the wheels is
    steerable and further wherein both wheels are driven.

    233+,   for a motor vehicle provided with four driven wheels.


CLS 180/213
TXT Having motor mounted to swing with steerable wheel:

    Vehicle under subclass 211 wherein the vehicle's motor, which motor
    drivingly rotates at least the steerable wheel, is attached to or otherwise
    supported by the steerable wheel in such a manner as to partake of the
    pivotable movement thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264+,   for a motor vehicle provided with a driven axle which carries two
    or more wheels and is swingable about an axis of steering pivot and wherein
    the motor for driving the axle and its wheels is mounted to swing with the
    axle.


CLS 180/214
TXT Electrical type motor:

    Vehicle under subclass 213 wherein the motor is of a kind which converts
    electrical energy into mechanical motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65.1+,  for a motor vehicle, generally, provided with an electric motor for
    driving it.

    216,    for another motor vehicle of the three-wheeled type which utilizes
    an electric motor, but wherein only two of the wheels, which two wheels
    have a common axis, are driven.

    220,    for a motor vehicle having a wheel arrangement comprising two
    wheels in tandem relationship and wherein the vehicle's motor is of the
    electrical type.


CLS 180/215
TXT Including two wheels driven and having common axis of rotation:

    Vehicle under subclass 210 wherein two of the three wheels are drivingly
    rotated about the same axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    337+,   for a motor vehicle, generally, which includes mechanism for
    transmitting driving effort to at least one of two wheels mounted on an
    axle.


CLS 180/216
TXT Electrical type motor:

    Vehicle under subclass 215 wherein the vehicle's motor is of a kind which
    converts electrical energy into mechanical motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65.1+,  as explained in the reference thereto appearing in subclass 214
    above.

    214,    for another motor vehicle of the three-wheeled type which utilizes
    an electric motor, but wherein at least one wheel is both steerable and
    driven, and further wherein the motor is mounted to swing with that wheel.

    220,    for a motor vehicle having a wheel arrangement comprising two
    wheels in tandem relationship and wherein the vehicle's motor is of the
    electrical type.


CLS 180/217
TXT Including endless element for transmitting drive to wheels:

    Vehicle under subclass 215 which includes, as a component of a mechanism
    for transferring the driving effort of the vehicle's motor to the wheels,
    an element in the nature of a belt or chain.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231,    for a motor vehicle having a wheel arrangement comprising two
    wheels in tandem relationship and wherein the mechanism for transferring
    driving effort to a wheel includes an endless element.

    239,    241 and 251, for various species of a motor vehicle which has four
    wheels driven, each of which species includes at least one endless element
    for transmitting driving effort to one or more of the wheels.


CLS 180/218
TXT Having only two wheels:

    Vehicle under subclass 21 wherein the arrangement consists of two wheels
    for supporting the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note through (4) Note of subclass 21 above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 63+ for a land vehicle of the kind which
    normally travels on two wheels; subclasses 205+ for a land vehicle of the
    wheeled type provided with means adapting it to be propelled by an occupant
    and wherein the vehicle may have only two wheels, which wheels are on a
    common axis; and subclasses 281.1+ (with the exception of subclass 282) for
    a land vehicle of the wheeled type provided with means adapting it to be
    propelled by an occupant and further provided with a frame or running gear.


CLS 180/219
TXT Arranged in tandem:

    Vehicle under subclass 218 wherein the two wheels occupy, during
    straight-ahead travel of the vehicle, a plane which is inclusive of, or
    parallel to, the longitudinal axis of the vehicle.


CLS 180/220
TXT Electrical type motor:

    Vehicle under subclass 219 wherein the vehicle's motor is of a kind which
    converts electrical energy into mechanical motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65.1,   for a motor vehicle, generally, provided with an electric motor for
    driving it.

    214,    for a motor vehicle having a wheel arrangement comprising three
    wheels and wherein at least one wheel is both steerable and driven and
    further wherein the vehicle's motor is mounted to swing with that wheel,
    and wherein, in addition, the motor is electrical in nature.

    216,    for a motor vehicle having a wheel arrangement comprising three
    wheels and wherein two wheels, which wheels have a common axis, are driven
    and further wherein the vehicle's motor is electrical in nature.


CLS 180/221
TXT Including rotating element for frictionally engaging and driving a wheel:

    Vehicle under subclass 219 which includes, as a component of a means for
    transmitting the driving effort of the vehicle's motor to one of its
    wheels, a rotating element (e.g., a roller) which causes the wheel to
    rotate when pressed into engagement with it or with a component (e.g., rim,
    tire) thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    342+,   for a motor vehicle, generally, which includes mechanism for
    transmitting driving effort to a wheel and wherein the mechanism includes a
    rotating element which drives the wheel by frictionally engaging it.


CLS 180/222
TXT And means for steering that wheel:

    Vehicle under subclass 221 which is additionally provided with means for
    steering the frictionally driven wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for a motor vehicle having a motor-carrying attachment in the
    nature of a wheeled frame and wherein the frame is supported by a single
    wheel (i.e., a wheel of the stub-axle type).

    24,     for a motor vehicle having a wheel arrangement comprising five or
    more wheels and wherein one or more of the wheels are driven and steered
    and further wherein any driven and steered wheel is a wheel of the
    stub-axle type.

    37+,    for a motor vehicle of the steam traction engine type having
    steering wheels which are driven.

    211+,   for a motor vehicle having a wheel arrangement comprising three
    wheels and wherein at least one of the wheels is driven and steered.

    223+,   for another motor vehicle of the two-tandem-wheeled type wherein at
    least one of the wheels is driven and steered.

    400+,   for a motor vehicle having means for guiding it.


CLS 180/223
TXT Including steerable and driven wheel:

    Vehicle under subclass 219 provided with at least one wheel which is not
    only drivingly rotated for propelling the vehicle, but is also attached to
    the vehicle in such a manner that it may be moved pivotably (e.g.,
    rotatably) about a more or less vertical axis for changing the course of
    travel of the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     24, 37+, 211+, and 400+, as explained in the references thereto
    appearing in subclass 222 above, and see that subclass (222) for another
    motor vehicle of the two-tandem-wheeled type wherein one of the wheels is
    driven frictionally and further wherein means is provided for steering that
    wheel.


CLS 180/224
TXT Both wheels motor driven:

    Vehicle under subclass 223 wherein each of the two supporting wheels is
    drivingly rotated by the vehicle's motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24.08,  for a motor vehicle having a wheel arrangement comprising five or
    more wheels and wherein each wheel is driven.

    38,     for a motor vehicle of the steam traction engine type having not
    only the steering wheels, but also the remaining two wheels, driven.

    212,    for a motor vehicle having a wheel arrangement comprising three
    wheels and wherein at least one of the wheels is steered and further
    wherein each wheel is driven.

    233+,   for a motor vehicle provided with four driven wheels.


CLS 180/225
TXT Having frame element or fender constituting also exhaust or fuel passageway
    or fuel reservoir:

    Vehicle under subclass 219 wherein a component of the vehicle's frame, or a
    fender (i.e., mudguard) of the vehicle, is adapted to serve also as (a) a
    conduit for products of combustion being discharged from the vehicle's
    motor or for fuel being fed to the motor, or (b) a container for storing a
    supply of fuel for the motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 830+ for the combination of a land
    vehicle and a tank or boiler; and subclass 782 for a land vehicle of the
    wheeled type having running gear and wherein a frame for receiving a body
    is provided and further wherein the frame may have or may form a fluid or
    electrical conduit.

    293,    Vehicle Fenders, subclass 106 for a vehicle bumper having a storage
    compartment.


CLS 180/226
TXT Including longitudinally extending shaft for transmitting drive to wheel:

    Vehicle under subclass 219 which includes, as a component of a means for
    transferring the driving effort of the vehicle's motor to one or more of
    its wheels, an elongated element which extends length-wise of the vehicle
    from the vicinity of the motor to a locus for engagement with a driven
    wheel or a member (e.g., a gear) affixed thereto, which element is
    rotatable about its principal axis.


CLS 180/227
TXT Including resilient means for mounting driven wheel:

    Vehicle under subclass 219 which includes means in the nature of a cushion,
    shock absorber, spring, etc., for mounting a driven one of the wheels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 2+ for spring devices which are adapted
    to cushion relative movement between parts of a vehicle and are not
    provided for elsewhere.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 275+ for a land vehicle of the wheeled
    type provided with means adapting it to be propelled by an occupant and
    further provided with means whereby it may be steered by the occupant,
    which means involves the control of a single wheel, and additionally
    provided with a frame or running gear which is constructed to yield (e.g.,
    to absorb shock); subclasses 283+ for a vehicle of the wheeled type
    provided with means adapting it to be propelled by an occupant and further
    provided with a frame or running gear which is constructed to yield; and
    subclasses 688+ for a land vehicle of the wheeled type provided with a
    spring or spring system between the wheels and the load carrier or the
    vehicle frame.


CLS 180/228
TXT Including resilient means for mounting motor:

    Vehicle under subclass 219 which includes means in the nature of a cushion,
    shock absorber, spring, etc., for mounting (e.g., supporting) the vehicle's
    propulsion motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    295,    for a motor vehicle wherein the motor and the body frame are
    particularly related to one another and wherein a change-speed gearing or a
    clutch is mounted in common with the motor and further wherein a wheeled,
    auxiliary frame, which is resiliently joined to the body frame, is provided
    for supporting the motor and the gearing or clutch.

    299,    for a motor vehicle wherein the motor and the body frame are
    particularly related to one another and wherein is included both an
    auxiliary frame for supporting the motor and resilient means for connecting
    the auxiliary frame to the body frame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 560+ for supports which are resilient in
    nature.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 2+, as explained in the reference
    thereto appearing in subclass 227 above.


CLS 180/229
TXT With means for cooling motor:

    Vehicle under subclass 219 provided with means for preventing an excessive
    increase in the operating temperature of the vehicle's motor (e.g., a
    system for circulating a liquid coolant, a blower or a ducting arrangement
    for forcing or directing air to the motor, cooling fins on a cylinder head,
    etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68.1+,  for art included therein relating to the cooling or ventilation of
    a vehicle's motor.

    68.4+,  for a motor vehicle having a radiator or condenser and wherein
    means is provided for mounting the radiator or condenser.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 41+ for heat transfer wherein a vehicle
    feature is involved.


CLS 180/230
TXT With change-speed means between motor and driven wheel:

    Vehicle under subclass 219 provided with means for receiving power from the
    motor at whatever speed the motor is operating and converting it to a
    different speed for driving a wheel (e.g., plural gear sets, a fluid torque
    converter, a belt and pulley arrangement, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    364+,   for variable speed transmissions in combination with vehicles
    generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 640+ for nonplanetary
    transmissions.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, appropriate
    subclasses for means for controlling speed ratio in a belt and pulley drive
    system.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, for planetary
    gear transmission.


CLS 180/231
TXT Including endless element for transmitting drive and means for adjusting
    tension of element:

    Vehicle under subclass 219 which includes, as a component of a mechanism
    for transferring the driving effort of the vehicle's motor to one or more
    wheels thereof, an element in the nature of a belt or chain, and wherein
    the vehicle further includes means for increasing or decreasing the amount
    of tensile stress in the element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217,    for a motor vehicle having a wheel arrangement comprising three
    wheels and wherein two of the wheels, which have a common axis of rotation,
    are driven and further wherein the mechanism for transferring driving
    effort to the wheels includes an endless element.

    239,    241 and 251, for various species of a motor vehicle which has four
    wheels driven, each of which species includes at least one endless element
    for transmitting driving effort to one or more of the wheels.

    351,    357, 366, and 373, for belt or chain drives in other vehicle
    combinations that may include tensioning means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 101+ for a belt and pulley transmission with means for adjusting
    belt tension.


CLS 180/232
TXT WITH MEANS FOR (1) PROTECTING MOTOR FROM IMPACT OF COLLISION, (2) UTILIZING
    MASS OF MOTOR TO ABSORB FORCE THEREOF, OR (3) PROTECTING OCCUPANT REGION OF
    VEHICLE FROM IMPACT-INDUCED SHIFTING OF MOTOR:

    Vehicle under the class definition provided with means for either (1)
    cushioning or isolating the motor of a vehicle from the force created when
    the vehicle engages an object, (2) taking advantage of the inertia inherent
    in a moving motor to dissipate part of that force (e.g., by allowing a
    certain amount of "controlled" movement of the motor), or (3) redirecting
    the shifting of the motor caused by such a force into a path whereby it is
    less likely to cause critical damage to that portion of the vehicle in
    which the operator and any passengers are located (e.g., by providing guide
    means for the motor, which guide means are sometimes so designed as to also
    cause some of the force of the impact to be dissipated by the movement of
    the motor therealong).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass consists principally of art found in former
    subclasses 64 and 82, and, accordingly, is not necessarily a complete
    collection of all such art which may exist in the class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 371+ and 378+ for miscellaneous means for
    retarding motion, which means may comprise or include a metallic element
    which is deformable or frangible.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 784 for a frame for a land vehicle, which
    frame includes means for absorbing an impact.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclass 35.2 for a land vehicle
    body secured to running gear or a chassis frame by means including
    collision impact absorbing structure, and subclass 189 for a land vehicle
    body which is deformable for absorbing the shock of an impact.


CLS 180/233
TXT HAVING FOUR WHEELS DRIVEN:

    Vehicle under the class definition provided with four wheels and means for
    driving each of the wheels.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses consist, for the most part, of
    art from former subclasses 42+ which provided for a steerable wheel of the
    driven type; see also (1) Note of subclass 252 below.

    (2)     Note.  While a majority of the art herein claims the typical
    four-wheel-drive type of vehicle (i.e., one having a driven wheel at each
    of its four corners), patents disclosing only that type of vehicle, but not
    necessarily claiming clearly that exact number of wheels as being driven,
    are included here (subclasses 233+).

    (3)     Note.  The substitution of a dual wheel (i.e., two wheels having
    their central (e.g., spider) portions joined back to back, or being
    otherwise connected to move as one member, there being, in any case,
    insufficient space between the two to accommodate any such mechanism as a
    drive chain or a steering gear shaft) for a single wheel at one or more of
    the wheel-carrying locations of a vehicle does not, for the purposes of
    this and the indented subclasses, change the number of wheels on the
    vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6.2+,   for a motor vehicle which, for a steering purpose, is provided with
    at least one driven traction element on each of two opposite sides and
    means for driving the elements at different speeds.

    14.1+,  for a motor vehicle which comprises two or more connected vehicles,
    at least one of which retains its identity as a complete vehicle when the
    other or others are detached therefrom, which subclass may include, for
    example, two coupled vehicles having two driving wheels each.

    21,     for a motor vehicle having a special wheel-base; note that in the
    case of a patent claiming a vehicle having four driven wheels so located
    thereon that they form other than a rectangle, original classification
    would be in that subclass (21).

    24.08,  for a motor vehicle having a wheel arrangement comprising five or
    more wheels and wherein each wheel is driven.

    24.09,  for a motor vehicle having a wheel arrangement comprising five or
    more wheels and wherein the drive means includes power dividing means in
    the form of differential gearing for driving each differential of a tandem
    pair of differentially driven axles.

    24.1,   for a motor vehicle having a wheel arrangement comprising five or
    more wheels and wherein are included two, longitudinally spaced wheels
    which are driven and further wherein is included means for disconnecting
    the drive to one of the two wheels.

    24.11+, for a motor vehicle having a wheel arrangement comprising five or
    more wheels and wherein are included at least two, longitudinally spaced
    wheels which are driven.

    38,     for a motor vehicle of the steam traction engine type wherein not
    only the steering wheels, but also the remaining two wheels, are driven.

    212,    for a motor vehicle having a wheel arrangement comprising three
    wheels and wherein at least one of the wheels is steered and further
    wherein each wheel is driven.

    224,    for a motor vehicle having a wheel arrangement comprising two
    wheels in tandem relationship and wherein at least one of the wheels is
    steerable and further wherein both wheels are driven.


CLS 180/234
TXT With means for steering all driven wheels:

    Vehicle under subclass 233 provided with means for repositioning every one
    of the driven wheels in such a manner as to alter the direction of travel
    of the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  The means includes any such device or mechanism as may be
    necessary for coordinating the repositioning of the several wheels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 91.1 for a land vehicle of the wheeled type
    having running gear for which steering means operable by an occupant is
    provided and wherein the means controls four supporting wheels; and
    subclasses 99+ for a land vehicle of the wheeled type having running gear
    which is specially constructed to enable the vehicle to make a short turn
    and wherein four supporting wheels are controlled for turning the vehicle.


CLS 180/235
TXT Comprising articulated frame and means for pivoting one portion of frame
    relative to other portion about vertical axis located centrally of vehicle:

    Vehicle under subclass 234 wherein the means for repositioning the wheels
    comprises a vehicle frame which is divided into fore and aft,
    wheel-supported portions, the portions being hingedly connected to one
    another along a substantially vertical axis which is located at the
    approximate center of the vehicle, and provided with means for moving one
    portion of the frame relative to the other portion about the axis.

    (1)     Note.  The connection of one portion of the other frequently
    provides also for the pivotable movement of one portion relative to the
    other about one or more horizontal axes (e.g., to facilitate movement of
    the vehicle over an uneven surface).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6.2+,   as explained in the reference thereto appearing in subclass 233
    above, and see particularly indented subclass 6.64, for a vehicle of that
    area which includes a frame member, having at least two traction elements
    thereon, swingable about a vertical axis in response to the differential
    driving of the elements.

    14.1+,  as explained in the reference thereto appearing in subclass 233
    above, and with further observation that subclasses 14.1+ has not been
    screened for subject matter which may now be better provided for by this
    subclass (235).

    265,    for a motor vehicle of the steerable, driven wheel type having two
    or more steerable wheels mounted upon an axle which is swingable about a
    substantially vertical axis and having the motor of the vehicle mounted to
    swing with the axle, and wherein the axis is offset longitudinally from the
    axis about which it swings.

    418+,   for a motor vehicle of the kind comprising articulated sections and
    having steering gear of the fluid power assist type, and wherein steering
    is accomplished by moving the sections relative to one another about a more
    or less vertical axis at their point of articulation.


CLS 180/236
TXT In a path of travel other than that produced by turning the front wheels
    and the rear wheels substantially equally and oppositely:

    Vehicle under subclass 234 wherein the means for repositioning the wheels
    is controllable in such a manner as to cause the vehicle to assume a course
    which is different from that obtainable by the usual practice of turning
    the front wheels in one direction and the rear wheels in the opposite
    direction and to more or less the same extent.

    (1)     Note.  Exemplary of the controllability of the repositioning means
    are:  (a) restricting it to operating on fewer than all of the wheels; (b)
    causing it to turn the front wheels to either a greater or a lesser degree
    than the rear wheels, or vice versa; and (c) causing it to turn all of the
    wheels in the same direction (i.e., to make the vehicle move laterally or
    with a lateral component).


CLS 180/237
TXT Comprising swingable, plural-wheel-carrying axles on individual, vertical
    axes of pivot:

    Vehicle under subclass 234 wherein the means for repositioning the wheels
    comprises two axles, each axle having a wheel at or adjacent each of its
    ends and being mounted for pivotable movement about a vertical axis, which
    axes do not coincide with one another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264+,   266 and 267, for motor vehicles of the steerable, driven wheel type
    which have two or more steerable wheels mounted upon a driven axle which is
    swingable about a substantially vertical axis.


CLS 180/238
TXT At least one axle being offset from its pivotable axis:

    Vehicle under subclass 237 wherein at least one of the axles is located in
    a vertical plane which is spaced horizontally (e.g., longitudinally of the
    vehicle) from a parallel vertical plane which contains the axis about which
    the axle may swing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    265,    as explained in the reference thereto appearing in subclass 235
    above.


CLS 180/239
TXT Including longitudinally extending, endless element for transmitting drive
    to wheels:

    Vehicle under subclass 237 wherein a means for transferring the driving
    effort, developed by the motor, to the wheels of the vehicle includes a
    member which operates in a plane extending generally fore-and-aft of the
    vehicle and is in the nature of a belt or chain.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217,    for a motor vehicle having a wheel arrangement comprising three
    wheels and wherein two of the wheels, which have a common axis of rotation,
    are driven and further wherein the mechanism for transferring driving
    effort to the wheels includes an endless element.

    231,    for a motor vehicle having a wheel arrangement comprising two
    wheels in tandem relationship and wherein the mechanism for transferring
    driving effort to a wheel includes an endless element.

    241     and 251, for other motor vehicles of the four-driven-wheel type
    which include a longitudinally extending, endless, drive-transmitting
    element.

    350+,   357, 366, and 373, for a motor vehicle having transmission
    mechanism in the nature of one or more belts or chains for transmitting
    drive to its wheels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, appropriate
    subclasses for a power transmission using an endless belt.


CLS 180/240
TXT Including rotatable shaft extending longitudinally from wheels at one end
    of vehicle to wheels at other end for transmitting steering force thereto:

    Vehicle under subclass 234 wherein the means for repositioning the wheels
    includes a torque-transmitting member in the nature of a rod or shaft,
    extending from the wheels adjacent one end of the vehicle to those adjacent
    the other end thereof in a direction generally parallel to the longitudinal
    centerline of the vehicle, for transferring to the wheels a force for
    redirecting them.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    429,    for a motor vehicle having steering gear of the fluid power assist
    type and wherein the mechanism of the power assist includes a working
    member which moves about an axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 96 for a land vehicle of the wheeled type
    having running gear for which steering means operable by an occupant is
    provided and wherein each steerable wheel is mounted upon an individual
    axle and the axles of at least two steerable wheels are inter-connected by
    a link for turning in unison and further wherein the steering means
    includes a rotary shaft and gearing.


CLS 180/241
TXT Including longitudinally extending, endless element for transmitting drive
    to wheels:

    Vehicle under subclass 234 wherein the means for driving the wheels
    includes a force transferring element in the nature of a belt or chain
    which travels in a plane extending generally fore-and-aft of the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239     and 251, for other motor vehicles of the four-driven-wheel type
    which include a longitudinally extending, endless, drive-transmitting
    element.

    350+,   357, 366, and 373, each as explained in the reference thereto
    appearing in subclass 239 above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, appropriate
    subclasses for a power transmission using an endless belt.


CLS 180/242
TXT Including pump and fluid motor, or generator and electric motor, for
    driving one or more wheels:

    Vehicle under subclass 233 which includes, for driving one or more of its
    wheels, either a fluid motor and a pump for operating it or an electric
    motor and a generator for operating it.

    (1)     Note.  "Generator" is not intended to exclude an equivalent source
    of electricity, such as a battery.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65.1+,  for a motor vehicle, generally, provided with an electric motor for
    driving it.

    305+,   for a motor vehicle having a traction motor of the kind driven by a
    noncompressible fluid received under pressure from a pump, which motor, in
    the case of indented subclass 308 drives a specific wheel.


CLS 180/243
TXT And another means for driving the remaining driven wheels:

    Vehicle under subclass 242 which also includes some other means (e.g., a
    drive shaft from a power plant, which power plant may be the vehicle's
    prime motor) for driving those of the four wheels which are not driven by
    either the fluid motor or the electric motor.


CLS 180/244
TXT With means for braking either (1) one or more driven wheels or (2)
    structure transmitting drive to wheel:

    Vehicle under subclass 233 provided with means for either (a) applying a
    force to one or more of the driven wheels to slow or stop its rotation or
    (b) applying a slowing or stopping force to an element, member, or device
    which is involved in transferring the driving effort of the motor to one or
    more of the driven wheels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6.2+,   for means for changing the rate of travel of a traction element
    located on one side of a vehicle relative to the rate of travel of a
    traction element located on the other side of the vehicle, where the
    purpose of the change is to alter the course of the vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, appropriate subclasses for means for retarding the motion
    of machines (including vehicles), shafts, wheels, pulleys, and other moving
    mechanisms; see especially subclasses 2+ for brakes for vehicles; and the
    subclasses beginning with subclass 67 for brakes for wheels.


CLS 180/245
TXT Including separate mechanical assemblies for transmitting drive to each of
    two wheels at one end of vehicle:

    Vehicle under subclass 233 which includes one group of mechanical elements
    for transferring the driving effort developed by the motor to one of the
    two driven wheels located at a particular end of the vehicle and another
    group of mechanical elements for transferring the driving effort to the
    other driven wheel at that end.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24.05,  for a motor vehicle having a wheelbase comprising five or more
    wheels wherein the wheels are attached to the vehicle by way of a rocker
    beam and further wherein mechanism for transmitting drive to the wheels is
    provided, which mechanism may be similar to the mechanical assemblies of
    this subclass (245).


CLS 180/246
TXT And assemblies for each of two wheels at other end, also:

    Vehicle under subclass 245 wherein separate sets of mechanical,
    drive-transferring elements are provided also for each of the two driven
    wheels at the opposite end of the vehicle.


CLS 180/247
TXT With manually operated means for disengaging drive to one or more, but
    fewer than all, of the four wheels:

    Vehicle under subclass 233 provided with means for interrupting the
    transmission of driving effort to at least one of the driven wheels while
    simultaneously maintaining it to at least one wheel, the means being of the
    kind which requires the intervention of an individual (e.g., the vehicle
    operator) for its actuation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24.1,   for a motor vehicle having a wheelbase comprising five or more
    wheels and wherein is provided means for driving two wheels spaced from
    each other longitudinally in the direction of travel of the vehicle and
    wherein is further provided means for disconnecting the drive to one of the
    wheels but leaving unaffected the drive to the other wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Corrections, subclass 1 for a selectively engageable hub
    to shaft connection.


CLS 180/248
TXT With differential means for driving two wheel sets at dissimilar speeds:

    Vehicle under subclass 233 provided with means which modifies the driving
    effort of the motor to the extent of causing it to drive one set of wheels
    (e.g., the front) at one speed and the other set (e.g., the rear) at
    another speed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24.09,  for a motor vehicle having a wheelbase comprising five or more
    wheels and wherein the drive means for the vehicle includes a power
    dividing means in the form of gearing for differentially driving each
    differential of a tandem pair of wheel drive axles.

    76,     for a device for allowing a driven wheel on one side of a vehicle
    to rotate at a different speed than the corresponding wheel on the other
    side of the vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 640+ for gearing,
    including gearing of the differential kind.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses 220+
    for planetary gear differentials.

    477,    Interrelated Power Delivery Controls, Including Engine Control, for
    interrelated control between a differential and a motor.


CLS 180/249
TXT And means for locking out the differential means:

    Vehicle under subclass 248 provided with additional means for preventing
    the differential means from causing the wheel sets to be driven at speeds
    which are not the same.


CLS 180/250
TXT Manually operated type of lockout means:

    Vehicle under subclass 249 wherein the means for preventing the
    differential means from functioning is of the kind which requires the
    intervention of an individual (e.g., the vehicle operator) for its
    actuation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 469+ for control lever and
    linkage systems.


CLS 180/251
TXT Including longitudinally extending, endless element for transmitting drive
    to wheels:

    Vehicle under subclass 233 which includes, for transferring to the wheels
    the driving effort developed by the motor, a member which operates in a
    plane extending generally fore-and-aft of the vehicle and is in the nature
    of a belt or chain.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239     and 241, for other motor vehicles of the four-driven-wheel type
    which include a longitudinally extending, endless, drive-transmitting
    element.

    350+,   357, 366, and 373, each as explained in the reference thereto
    appearing in subclass 239 above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, appropriate
    subclasses for a power transmission using an endless belt.


CLS 180/252
TXT HAVING AT LEAST ONE WHEEL BOTH DRIVEN AND STEERABLE:

    Vehicle under the class definition wherein one or more of its wheels is not
    only drivingly rotated for propelling the vehicle, but is also attached to
    the vehicle in such a manner that it may be moved pivotably (e.g.,
    rotatably) about a more or less vertical axis for changing the course of
    travel of the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses consist primarily of that
    art which remained in former subclasses 42+ subsequent to the removal
    therefrom of the art devoted to vehicles having four wheels driven; see
    also (1) Note of subclass 233 above.

    (2)     Note.  Contrary to the statement in (2) Note of the class
    definition that the term "steering wheel" defines a road wheel which is
    swingable to change the course of the vehicle, the project which
    reclassified former subclasses 42+ adopted, instead, the designation of
    "steerable wheel" for such a road wheel.

    (3)     Note.  The substitution of a dual wheel (i.e., two wheels having
    their central (e.g., spider) portions joined back to back, or being
    otherwise connected to move as one member, there being, in any case,
    insufficient space between the two to accommodate any such mechanism as a
    drive chain or a steering gear shaft) for a single wheel at one or more of
    the wheel-carrying locations of a vehicle does not, for the purposes of
    this and the indented subclasses, change the number of wheels on the
    vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6.2+,   for a motor vehicle which is steerable by creating a difference
    between the driving effort developed by one or more traction elements
    located on one side of the vehicle and the driving effort developed by one
    or more traction elements located on the other side thereof.

    12+,    for a motor vehicle having a motor-carrying attachment in the
    nature of a wheeled frame and wherein the wheels of the frame are driven
    and steered.

    23+,    for a motor vehicle having a wheel arrangement comprising five or
    more wheels and wherein one or more of the wheels are driven and steered.

    37+,    for a motor vehicle of the steam traction engine type having
    steering wheels which are driven.

    211+,   for a motor vehicle having a wheel arrangement comprising three
    wheels and wherein at least one of the wheels is driven and steered.

    222,    for a motor vehicle having a wheel arrangement comprising two
    wheels in tandem relationship and wherein one of the wheels is driven
    frictionally and further wherein means is provided for steering that wheel.

    223+,   for a motor vehicle having a wheel arrangement comprising two
    wheels in tandem relationship and wherein at least one of the wheels is
    driven and steered.

    400+,   for a motor vehicle having means for guiding it.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 771+ for a land vehicle of the wheeled
    type provided with means whereby one or more of its wheels may be steered
    by an occupant.


CLS 180/253
TXT Steerable wheel has exclusive axis of pivot (i.e., stub-axle type):

    Vehicle under subclass 252 wherein any steerable wheel thereof has an axis
    of pivot which is separate and distinct from that of any other such wheel.

    (1)     Note.  "Stub-axle" is the art term ordinarily associated with a
    pivotable wheel mounting of the kind described.

    (2)     Note.  See (1) Note of subclass 252 above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     as explained in the reference to subclasses 12+ appearing in
    subclass 252 above, and with the further limitation that the frame is
    supported by a single wheel (i.e., a wheel of the stub-axle type).

    24,     as explained in the reference to subclasses 23+ appearing in
    subclass 252 above, and with the further limitation that any driven and
    steered wheel is a wheel of the stub-axle type.

    37+,    211+, 222, and 223+, as explained in subclass 252 above, and with
    the further observation that a driven and steered wheel of the kind found
    in these subclasses may be, especially in subclasses 211+, 222, and 223+,
    of the stub-axle type.

    447,    for a motor vehicle having a steering gear which is provided with
    power assist of a mechanical nature and wherein the steerable wheel or
    wheels, while not driven, may be of the stub-axle type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 93+ for a land vehicle of the wheeled
    type provided with means whereby it may be steered by an occupant and
    wherein the means comprises the mounting for movement about a generally
    vertical axis of pivot of at least one of the vehicle's wheels and further
    wherein any wheel so mounted is provided with an individual axle; and
    subclasses 691+ for a land vehicle of the wheeled type provided with a
    spring or spring system for suspending its wheels from its frame and
    wherein each wheel is suspended independently of any other wheel and, in
    addition, is steerable.


CLS 180/254
TXT Including flexible, axially rotatable means having one portion fixed to
    vehicle and another portion pivotable with wheel for transmitting drive
    thereto:

    Vehicle under subclass 253 wherein the arrangement for drivingly rotating
    the steerable wheel includes means (e.g., a shaft) which (a) is flexible
    (e.g., by means of a universal joint), (b) is rotatable about an axis
    corresponding generally with its centerline, (c) has one portion (e.g.,
    that adjacent the vehicle's motor) anchored, except for axial rotation, to
    the vehicle (e.g., to its body, chassis, differential, etc.), and (d) has
    another portion located at or adjacent to the wheel and pivotable
    therewith, the purpose of the means being to transmit rotational drive to
    the wheel regardless of its angle of pivot.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    337+,   for a motor vehicle provided with means to transmit power from its
    motor to its wheels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 52+ for a connection between two
    or more members which provides for relative movement of the members about a
    bearing surface.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, appropriate subclasses for flexible shafting and flexible
    shaft couplings; and particularly subclasses 106+ for a flexible coupling
    between torque transmitting members having misaligned or angularly related
    axes.


CLS 180/255
TXT Pivotable portion of means has additional structure of gearlike nature in
    driving engagement with corresponding structure on wheel:

    Vehicle under subclass 254 wherein that portion of the flexible, axially
    rotatable means which is pivotable with the steerable wheel, and the
    steerable wheel, are each provided with structure in the nature of a gear,
    which structures are in drive-transmitting engagement, or are otherwise
    drivingly connected, with one another.

    (1)     Note.  "Structure in the nature of a gear" includes, for example, a
    toothed gear for intermeshing with another such gear, a wheel having a
    friction surface on its periphery for engaging another wheel of like
    nature, a sprocket for driving interconnection with another sprocket by
    means of a chain, etc.


CLS 180/256
TXT Means comprises rotatable shaft containing plural universal joints:

    Vehicle under subclass 254 wherein the means is a rotatable, elongated
    member having, within its length and exclusive of its extremities, for the
    purpose of rendering it flexible, two or more connections of the kind which
    are capable of receiving rotational movement along one axis and are further
    capable of accommodating changes in the angular relationship of one of
    those axes to the other.


CLS 180/257
TXT Having at least one joint located on each side of axis of pivot:

    Vehicle under subclass 256 wherein one or more of the universal joints of
    the shaft is located in one direction laterally from the axis about which
    the steerable wheel pivots, and another one or more of the universal joints
    is located in the opposite direction laterally from the axis of pivot.


CLS 180/258
TXT Pivotable portion of means includes ball or socket element of ball and
    socket type universal joint:

    Vehicle under subclass 254 wherein that portion of the flexible, axially
    rotatable means which is pivotable with the steerable wheel includes one or
    the other of the principal elements of a universal joint of the ball and
    socket type.


CLS 180/259
TXT Joint includes intermediate ball, floating in groove, for positively
    engaging ball with socket:

    Vehicle under subclass 258 wherein the ball and socket universal joint is
    of the kind which is provided with, between the ball and the socket, one or
    more (usually a plurality of) balls which are significantly smaller than
    the ball of the joint, and wherein grooves for receiving a portion of the
    periphery of each of the intermediate balls are provided in either the ball
    or the socket or both, each intermediate ball being permitted some movement
    in its groove in a direction parallel to the axis of the shaft of either
    the ball or the socket, but serving to key the ball and socket to one
    another insofar as rotational movement of their shafts is concerned.

    (1)     Note.  Structure resembling a bearing race may be provided for
    maintaining a fixed lateral spacing between each of a plurality of the
    intermediate balls.


CLS 180/260
TXT Pivotable portion of means includes gear element of intermeshing gear type
    universal joint:

    Vehicle under subclass 254 wherein that portion of the flexible, axially
    rotatable means which is pivotable with the steerable wheel includes a
    member having a toothed, or equivalent, surface, which member comprises one
    of the two or more gear elements of a universal joint of the intermeshing
    gear type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 63+ for a mechanical
    movement for transferring rotary motion in kind.


CLS 180/261
TXT Joint includes at lest one gear element rotatable on axis of pivot and
    intermeshing with gear element on pivotable portion:

    Vehicle under subclass 260 wherein the intermeshing gear type universal
    joint includes one or more gear elements having an axis of rotation which
    coincides with the axis of pivot, at least one of the elements being in
    intermeshing engagement with the gear element which is pivotable with the
    steerable wheel.


CLS 180/262
TXT Joint also includes gear element on fixed portion engaging gear element on
    axis of pivot and vertically offset from gear element on pivotable portion:

    Vehicle under subclass 261 wherein the intermeshing gear type universal
    joint additionally includes a gear element which is (a) located on the
    fixed portion of the flexible, axially rotatable means and meshing with a
    gear element of the one or more gear elements which have an axis of
    rotation coinciding with the axis of pivot and (b) offset in a vertical
    direction from the gear element which is located on the pivotable portion
    of the means.

    (1)     Note.  The offset mentioned is for the purpose of adapting the
    joint to accommodate a difference in elevation between the axes of rotation
    of the two portions of the flexible, axially rotatable means.

    (2)     Note.  Usually there are at least two, separated members each
    having a gear element formed thereon, which have an axis of rotation that
    coincides with the axis of pivot; however, it is possible that, instead of
    having separated members on the axis, there will be a single member thereon
    and that member will have at least two gear elements formed on spaced
    regions thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    267,    for a motor vehicle having a driven axle carrying two or more
    wheels and swingable about an axis of pivot for steering, and wherein the
    arrangement for transferring drive from the motor to the wheels includes a
    shaft which rotates about an axis which corresponds with the axis of pivot.


CLS 180/263
TXT Having axis of pivot disposed between parallel planes defined by opposite
    sides of wheel:

    Vehicle under subclass 254 wherein the axis of pivot of the steerable wheel
    lies within the space bounded on one side by a plane perpendicular to the
    axis about which the wheel is driven and tangent to the outer surface of
    one side of the wheel and bounded on the opposite side by another plane
    parallel to the first plane and tangent to the outer surface of the other
    side of the wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 96.3 for a land vehicle of the wheeled type
    provided with means whereby it may be steered by an occupant and wherein
    the means comprises the mounting for movement about a generally vertical
    axis of pivot of at least one of the vehicle's wheels and further wherein
    any wheel so mounted has (1) an axle individual to it, (2) means for
    attaching it to its support, and (3) an axis of pivot which lies within the
    plane established by the wheel.


CLS 180/264
TXT With driven axle, mounting two or more wheels, swingable about axis of
    pivot, and motor mounted to swing therewith:

    Vehicle under subclass 252 provided with at least one axle, which axle (a)
    is driven for a vehicle propelling purpose, (b) carries a plurality of
    wheels, and (c) is movable about the axis of pivot for enabling its wheel
    to perform a steering function, and wherein the motor for imparting driving
    rotation to the axle and its wheels is mounted in such a manner as to
    partake of the swingable movement of the axle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213+,   for a motor vehicle having a wheel arrangement comprising three
    wheels and wherein at least one wheel is steerable and further wherein the
    vehicle's motor is mounted to swing with the steerable wheel.

    237+,   for a motor vehicle having four wheels driven and provided with
    means for steering all of the driven wheels and wherein the means comprises
    wheel-carrying axles mounted for swinging about individual, generally
    vertical axes of pivot.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 97 for a land vehicle of the wheeled type
    provided with means whereby it may be steered by an occupant and wherein
    the means comprises a wheel-carrying axle which is swingable about a
    generally vertical axis.


CLS 180/265
TXT Having axle offset longitudinally of vehicle from axis of pivot:

    Vehicle under subclass 264 wherein the axis of pivot about which the axle
    swings is spaced from the axle lengthwise of the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  In the art of this subclass, the axis of pivot frequently is
    the axis of articulation of an articulated vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235,    for a motor vehicle having four wheels driven and means for
    steering all of the driven wheels and wherein the means comprises an
    articulated frame for the vehicle and means for pivoting one portion of the
    frame relative to the other portion about a generally vertical axis located
    approximately at the center of the vehicle.

    238,    as explained in the reference to subclass 237 in subclass 264 above
    and with the further observation that subclass 238 provides for at least
    one of the axles to be offset from its axis of pivot.


CLS 180/266
TXT With driven axle, mounting two or more wheels, swingable about axis of
    pivot, and swingable also about a horizontal axis:

    Vehicle under subclass 252 provided with at least one axle, which axle (a)
    is driven for a vehicle propelling purpose, (b) carries a plurality of
    wheels, and (c) is movable about the axis of pivot for enabling its wheels
    to perform a steering function, and wherein the axle is so attached to the
    vehicle (e.g., as by a universal joint) that it may pivot about an axis
    which is horizontal and is perpendicular to the axle.

    (1)     Note.  The additional swingable movement of the axle enables it to
    rock as the vehicle passes across bumps or over obstructions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 109+ for a land vehicle of the wheeled
    type provided with an axle which is mounted for swinging about a vertical
    axis and for rocking about a horizontal axis normal to its length.


CLS 180/267
TXT With driven axle, mounting two or more wheels, swingable about axis of
    pivot, and shaft for transmitting drive coincident with axis:

    Vehicle under subclass 252 provided with at least one axle, which axle (a)
    is driven for a vehicle propelling purpose, (b) carries a plurality of
    wheels, and (c) is movable about the axis of pivot for enabling its wheels
    to perform a steering function, and wherein the arrangement for
    transmitting drive from the motor to the wheels includes a shaft which
    rotates about an axis which corresponds with the axis of pivot.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262,    for a motor vehicle having at least one wheel which is both
    steerable and driven, which wheel has an exclusive axis of pivot for
    steering, and wherein is included flexible, axially rotatable means having
    one portion fixed to the vehicle and another portion pivotable with the
    wheel for transmitting drive to the wheel and further wherein the pivotable
    portion of the means includes a gear element of an intermeshing gear type
    of universal joint and additionally wherein the universal joint includes at
    least one gear element rotatable on the axis of pivot and intermeshing with
    a gear element on the pivotable portion and lastly wherein the joint also
    includes a gear element on the fixed portion engaging the gear element on
    the axis of pivot and vertically offset from the gear element on the
    pivotable portion.


CLS 180/268
TXT WITH BELT OR HARNESS FOR RESTRAINING OCCUPANT, AND MEANS WHEREBY THE BELT
    OR HARNESS CONTROLS, OR IS CONTROLLED BY, THE FUNCTIONING OF A VEHICLE
    SYSTEM OR COMPONENT:

    Apparatus under the class definition wherein the vehicle is provided with
    one or more devices consisting principally of a flexible, straplike member,
    or an assembly of such members, for engaging an occupant of the vehicle and
    preventing or limiting movement of the occupant relative to the vehicle
    upon a change in the momentum of the latter, and means whereby either (a)
    the belt, by its status (i.e., use or nonuse), renders a system (e.g., the
    ignition circuit) or a component (e.g., the transmission selector lever) of
    the vehicle either operative or inoperative or not properly positioned to
    function in its intended manner, or (b) as the result of the operation, or
    the failure to do so, or the improper positioning, of such system or
    component, the belt is itself placed in a condition whereby it either can,
    or cannot, serve to restrain the occupant.

    (1)     Note.  An inflatable device (e.g., an air bag) for restraining an
    occupant of a vehicle of either a Class 180 type or a Class 280 type is
    classified in Class 280, Land Vehicles, subclasses 728.1+, without regard
    to which one of these two classes otherwise would take the particular
    vehicle involved.  Moreover, the inflatable device may be in the nature of,
    or used in conjunction with, a belt or strap, as recognized by indented
    subclass 733.

    (2)     Note.  As in the case of an inflatable device, as explained in (1)
    Note, a belt or harness of the passive restraint type (i.e., a belt or
    harness system which places itself in occupant-restraining position, and
    subsequently removes itself therefrom, without the aid of any manipulative
    effort on the part of the vehicle occupant) likewise is classified in Class
    280, Land Vehicles, in this instance in subclasses 802+, without regard to
    whether the vehicle constitutes a motor vehicle or a land vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    271+,   for a motor vehicle provided with means for promoting the safety of
    the vehicle, its occupant or load, or an external object.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., appropriate subclasses for a device
    in the nature of a buckle for joining two, straplike members, particularly
    subclasses 572+.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, especially subclasses 382+ for a
    seat belt reeling device.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 122 for a seat peculiar to an aircraft and a
    device for holding an occupant thereto.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 728.1+ for a vehicle, generally, provided
    with an inflatable passenger restraint, and see (1) Note above; subclasses
    801.1+ and 805 through 808 for a land vehicle provided with a safety belt
    arrangement; and subclasses 802+ for a vehicle, generally, provided with a
    safety belt arrangement of the passive restraint type, and see (2) Note
    above; in regard to subclasses 801.1+ and 805 through 808, classification
    here (subclasses 268+) is proper if the safety belt arrangement is
    interlinked operationally with a system (e.g., ignition, transmission,
    etc.) which is peculiar to the vehicle as a motor vehicle or if the vehicle
    is established as being provided with a source of electrical power;
    however, the recital of an electrical device or element which is peculiar
    to only the safety belt arrangement is not sufficient for classification
    here (subclasses 268+).

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 464+ for a chair or seat provided with
    a body or occupant restraint or confinement and see (1) Note of subclass
    464 as to the scope thereof.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 10.6
    for a specific, vehicle-mounted, electrical system which may involve a
    circuit which includes elements of a seat belt.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 457.1 for an electric alarm
    or indicator responsive to the status (fastened or unfastened) of a vehicle
    seat belt.


CLS 180/269
TXT System comprises transmission or element thereof:

    Apparatus under subclass 268 wherein the vehicle system is the mechanism
    which transmits or adapts the power of the engine or motor to the use of at
    least one road wheel or an element of the mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  Most frequently it is a control (e.g., selector) lever for
    the transmission which either (a) is rendered inoperative by the belt being
    in nonuse status or (b) by being positioned improperly, prevents the belt
    from fulfilling its restraining function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    337+,   for a motor vehicle provided with mechanism connecting the power
    shaft to the road wheels.


CLS 180/270
TXT System comprises ignition circuit or starter circuit or element of one or
    other:

    Apparatus under subclass 268 wherein the vehicle system is either the
    elements and wiring for providing electrical impulses to the motor or the
    elements and wiring for providing cranking torque to the motor or any part
    of either circuit.


CLS 180/271
TXT WITH MEANS FOR PROMOTING SAFETY OF VEHICLE, ITS OCCUPANT OR LOAD, OR AN
    EXTERNAL OBJECT:

    Vehicle under the class definition having means, not provided for
    elsewhere, in the nature of an element or device or system, or an
    operational interconnection between elements or devices or systems of the
    vehicle, which means has the purpose of (1) protecting the vehicle by (a)
    decreasing its likelihood of being involved in a collision or other
    accident, (b) rendering it less vulnerable to damage from such a collision
    or accident, (c) making it less susceptible to damage resulting from being
    incorrectly started, operated, or stopped by an unskilled operator or one
    unfamiliar with the vehicle, or (d) decreasing the possibility of its being
    entered or operated by a person not intended to have access to the vehicle;
    (2) protecting an occupant or a load either as a result of protecting the
    vehicle in one or more of the ways noted in (1) above or as a result of
    providing a restraint or shield for the occupant or load; or (3) protecting
    an external object, including another vehicle or an obstacle, either as a
    result of protecting the vehicle in one or more of the ways noted in (1)
    above or as a result of utilizing, for the vehicle, external structure
    which is less likely to damage the object or obstacle.

    (1)     Note.  The means of this and the indented subclasses usually has a
    capability for ascertaining a condition which involves, or may involve, the
    safety (as set of the above) of the vehicle and for acting in response
    thereto to protect the vehicle, its occupant or load, or an object
    (including another vehicle) external of the vehicle.

    (2)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses represent a
    reclassification of former subclasses 82+ (i.e., former subclasses 82 and
    91 to 114), less former subclasses 98 and 105+, for which subclasses 167+
    and 170+, respectively, have been established above. Concurrent with the
    reclassification, the safety concept was assigned a more superior position
    in the schedule.  As a result of that relocation, this area (subclasses
    271+) is incomplete to the extent that any intervening, unreclassified
    subclass may contain safety-related subject matter; it is believed,
    however, that, should such art exist, it will be confined principally to
    subclasses 315+.

    (3)     Note.  While subclass 90 was not included in this project, it is
    believed that art pertaining to a resilient (e.g., padded) dashboard has
    been placed there without regard to whether it constituted a safety device
    within the concept of former subclasses 82+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for a motor vehicle provided with means for raising the frame or
    body relative to one or more of the vehicle wheels; inasmuch as that
    subclass (41) was not included in the classification project which
    established this area (subclasses 271+), principally from former subclasses
    82+, no assurance can be given that it (subclass 41) does not contain art
    which, while having a safety aspect, was not previously considered as
    comprising a "safety device" within the meaning of former subclass 82.

    78,     for a motor vehicle provided with a controlling device which is
    mounted on the vehicle's steering post, and see the mention of subclasses
    315+ in (2) Note above.

    90,     for a motor vehicle provided with a body and wherein the body has
    structure in the nature of a dashboard, which dashboard may be of a
    resilient (e.g., padded) type, and see (3) Note above.

    232,    for a motor vehicle provided with means for (a) protecting its
    motor from the impact of a collision, (b) utilizing the mass of the motor
    to absorb the force of a collision, or (c) protecting its occupant region
    from an impact-induced shifting of its motor.

    268+,   for a motor vehicle provided with a belt or harness for restraining
    an occupant and means whereby the belt or harness controls, or it is
    controlled by, the functioning of a vehicle system or component.

    405+,   for a motor vehicle provided with steering gear of the fluid power
    assist type and wherein secondary means is provided for insuring the
    availability of power to aid in manipulating the steering gear in the event
    of failure of the primary means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 250.001+ for
    an optical member cleaner (e.g., a windshield wiper).

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 492+ for a steering post,
    per se, which may include a post which is collapsible or deformable.

    188,    Brakes, appropriate subclasses for a device or system for slowing
    or stopping a vehicle (e.g., an arrangement for controlling the
    "fishtailing" of a towed vehicle with respect to its towing vehicle by
    utilizing the brakes of one or both vehicles may be found in subclass 112).

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Controls, appropriate subclasses for the
    interrelated control of a motor and a clutch or a brake.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 284.1 for a
    windshield-type liquid sprayer.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 432 for a land vehicle comprising a tractor
    capable of independent use and an unbalanced trailing vehicle having
    running gear at its rear end and having its forward portion supported by
    the tractor and wherein is included a safety feature in the nature either
    of means to prevent excessive horizontal swing of the trailer or of means
    to prevent separation of the tractor and the trailer in the event of
    failure of the means which couples one to the other; subclasses 728.1+,
    subclasses 801.1+ and 805 through 808 as explained in the reference thereto
    appearing in subclass 268 above; subclasses 802+ also as explained in
    subclass 268 above; subclasses 748+ for a land vehicle provided with a
    passenger safety guard; subclass 756 for a land vehicle provided with an
    attachment in the nature of a roll bar and/or an overhead guard; subclasses
    757+ for a land vehicle provided with an attachment in the nature of a
    device for providing traction with a road surface; subclass 770 for a land
    vehicle provided with an attachment in the nature of a device for
    protecting the vehicle from externally caused damage; and subclasses 772
    and 777 for a land vehicle of the wheeled type having means whereby one or
    more of its wheels may be steered by an occupant and further provided with
    apparatus for either (a) deterring tip or overturn (subclass 772) or (b)
    enabling the steering column or wheel to deform or otherwise move in
    response to the force of a collision (subclass 777).

    291,    Track Sanders, appropriate subclasses for means for applying sand
    or like material to the tread of a vehicle wheel or to the surface which
    underlyingly supports the wheel, or to both, for the purpose of increasing
    the coefficient of friction between the wheel and the surface.  Certain
    subclasses (e.g., 2, 3, 4, 14, 15, 19, 22, 39, and 40) thereof provide for
    the combination of specific vehicle structure, or particular vehicle
    operation, with the means.

    293,    Vehicle Fenders, appropriate subclasses for a vehicle attached
    device for removing persons or animals from the path of a moving vehicle,
    or for catching and retaining such persons or animals, or for receiving or
    fending off blows from other vehicles or objects.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 464+ as explained in the reference
    thereto appearing in subclass 268.1 above, and see particularly indented
    subclasses 487+.

    303,    Fluid-Pressure and Analogous Brake Systems, subclass 7 for the
    distribution of braking fluid to a plurality of braking motors, and wherein
    the motors are those on a sectional train and the fluid is distributed
    differently to the different sections; and subclasses 121+ for fluid
    braking apparatus wherein the distribution of braking fluid, and therefore
    the braking action, is regulated at least in part by a speed condition.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 438+ for vehicle alarms or
    indicators responsive to a condition of the vehicle which condition may
    relate to the safety or protection of the vehicle or its occupants.

    477,    Interrelated Power Delivery Controls, Including Engine Control, for
    transmission and engine start interlock.


CLS 180/272
TXT Responsive to absence or inattention of operator, or negatively reactive to
    attempt to operate vehicle by person not qualified mentally or physically
    to do so:

    Vehicle under subclass 271 wherein the means either (a) initiates action to
    safeguard the vehicle or an occupant (e.g., applies brake, closes throttle,
    sounds alarm, etc.) when the operator is not at his usual station or fails
    to positively indicate his presence and/or his attentiveness (e.g., a
    "deadman-type" control), or (b) foils an attempt to start or drive the
    vehicle if the would-be operator is unable to demonstrate his mental or
    physical capacity to do so (e.g., a "coded" ignition lock for dissuading
    one who is inebriated).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclass 186 for train control
    involving means located on the train for controlling its motive power,
    which may include deadman-type control devices.

    303,    Fluid-Pressure and Analogous Brake Systems, subclass 19 for a brake
    system wherein distribution of the fluid is initiated upon some failure of
    the operator.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 573+ for a condition
    responsive indicating system of that class, which system is responsive to
    the condition of a human being or an animal, and see particularly
    subclasses 575 and 576 thereunder.

    600,    Surgery, subclass 300 for diagnostical devices which may include
    breath analyzers.


CLS 180/273
TXT Utilizing weight, or lack thereof, of operator on seat or other support to
    determine presence or absence:

    Vehicle under subclass 272 wherein the determination of the operator's
    presence or absence is made by investigating whether or not his weight is
    detected at his seat or such other structure as may be provided for his
    support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclass 109 for a brake which may be operated by the
    imposition of weight on a vehicle seat.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 666+ for a condition
    responsive indicating system of that class, which system is responsive to
    weight.


CLS 180/274
TXT Responsive to engagement of portion of perimeter of vehicle with external
    object:

    Vehicle under subclass 271 wherein the means responds to a contact of an
    outermost portion, or an element (e.g., a bumper for protecting the vehicle
    body) thereon, of the vehicle with an object (e.g., a roadway guardrail,
    another vehicle, etc.) which is not a part of the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  The art of this and the indented subclasses represents a
    reclassification of former subclasses 91+.  It has not been possible at
    this time to determine whether a conflict may exist between the art of this
    subclass (274) and that of subclasses 2+ of Class 293.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232,    as explained in the reference thereto appearing in subclass 271
    above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 61.44 for a
    feeler which is attached to a moving vehicle and which detects an object
    upon contact therewith.

    293,    Vehicle Fenders, subclasses 2+ for a vehicle fender interconnected
    in operation with a car-controlling element (and see (1) Note above).


CLS 180/275
TXT And causing application of vehicle brake:

    Vehicle under subclass 274 wherein the response of the means results,
    either directly or by way of an intermediate mechanism or an additional
    means, in the operation of one or more devices on the vehicle which are
    intended to slow or stop it.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    295,    Vehicle Fenders, subclasses 5, 6, and 8 for a vehicle fender
    interconnected in operation with a car-controlling element and wherein, in
    subclass 5, the fender is movable and the element is a fluid brake system
    for the car, and wherein, in subclass 6, the element is a brake which
    engages a surface which supports the vehicle, and wherein, in subclass 8,
    the element is a brake shoe; also in regard to this area of Class 293, see
    (1) Note of subclass 274 above.


CLS 180/276
TXT Brake comprises or includes element moved or deformed into engagement with
    ground:

    Vehicle under subclass 275 wherein the device is an element which is
    attached to, or forms an integral portion of, the vehicle and is movable,
    or deformable, into frictional contact with the ground (e.g., the surface
    of a road).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 5+ for a ground- engaging brake for a
    nonrail-type vehicle.


CLS 180/277
TXT And also interruption of at least one operational system of the vehicle or
    its motor:

    Vehicle under subclass 275 wherein the response of the means additionally
    results in stopping, momentarily or otherwise, the functioning of one or
    more systems of the vehicle having to do with its operation (e.g., clutch,
    steering, transmission) or with that of its motor (e.g., ignition, fuel
    flow).


CLS 180/278
TXT System comprises clutch:

    Vehicle under subclass 277 wherein the operational system involved is the
    clutch of the vehicle.


CLS 180/279
TXT And causing interruption of an electrical system of the vehicle or its
    motor:

    Vehicle under subclass 274 wherein the response of the means results in
    stopping, momentarily or otherwise, the functioning of an electrical system
    of either the vehicle (e.g., battery circuit) or the motor thereof (e.g.,
    ignition circuit).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    293,    Vehicle Fenders, subclass 4 for a vehicle fender interconnected in
    operation with a car-controlling element in the nature of an electric
    switch, and see (1) Note of subclass 274 above.


CLS 180/280
TXT And causing operation of vehicle steering system:

    Vehicle under subclass 274 wherein the response of the means results in the
    manipulation of the steering system of the vehicle for the purpose of
    altering its course of travel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400+,   especially 443, for a motor vehicle (e.g., an unattended lawn
    mower) having an impact-responsive steering system, but wherein the safety
    aspect of this subclass (280) is absent and wherein the capability of the
    vehicle for changing its course of travel as the result of contacting an
    obstruction (e.g., a guide) is essential to its normal operation.


CLS 180/281
TXT Comprising either movable closure member or fastening device therefor
    responsive to forward or rearward movement, or variations therein, of
    vehicle:

    Vehicle under subclass 271 wherein the means comprises (a) a movable
    closure member of the vehicle or (b) a device for preventing such a closure
    member from opening, and wherein the closure member changes position or the
    fastening device undergoes a change of status (e.g., locked to released) in
    response either to movement of the vehicle in a forward or rearward
    direction or to changes in its movement in one or the other of these
    directions.

    (1)     Note.  "Fastening device" includes such structure as is involved in
    keeping a door or other movable closure member in its closed position and
    may comprise a latch bolt, a lock, etc.

    (2)     Note.  The response may be contingent upon the attainment by the
    vehicle of a predetermined speed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclass 31 for a closure of that
    class which is provided with means to sense a condition and with means
    responsive to the sensing means to effect control of the closure.


CLS 180/282
TXT Responsive to sensing of acceleration, deceleration, or tilt of vehicle:

    Vehicle under subclass 271 wherein the means responds to the determination
    of or the reaction to (a) a change in the velocity of travel of the vehicle
    or (b) a tipping movement of the vehicle in either a side-to-side or a
    forwardly-rearwardly direction.

    (1)     Note.  The sensing frequently is that accomplished by a
    gravity-sensitive device (e.g., a mercury switch, a pendulum), but may be,
    instead, that of a less sophisticated device such as a mechanical linkage
    serving to transfer the effect of a physical force or movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     as explained in the reference thereto appearing in subclass 271
    above.

    172,    for a motor vehicle provided with means which is responsive to the
    speed of the vehicle for maintaining its speed at, or preventing it from
    exceeding, a particular value and wherein the means includes a device which
    is responsive to centrifugal force, which device may be, as explained in
    (1) Note of that subclass (172), a pendulum.

    274+,   for a motor vehicle provided with a safety-promoting means which is
    responsive to the engagement of a portion of the perimeter of the vehicle
    with an external object (e.g., collision-caused deceleration).

    281,    for a motor vehicle provided with a safety-promoting means which
    comprises either a movable closure member or a fastening device therefor
    which is responsive to forward or rearward movement, or variations therein,
    of the vehicle.

    290,    for a motor vehicle provided with a safety promoting means which is
    responsive to the weight of a cargo load transported by the vehicle; in the
    instance of a vehicle which is caused to tilt by the weight of the load
    applied, classification is here (subclass 282) if the means responds to the
    tilting rather than, or in addition to, the weight of the load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.45+ for a
    switch responsive to a change of rate of motion or a change of inclination.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 734+ for a vehicle attachment in the
    nature of an inflatable passenger restraint and wherein the restraint is
    responsive to a condition of the vehicle; subclass 753 for a land vehicle
    attachment in the nature of a passenger safety guard and wherein the guard
    is a padded or cushioned member and further wherein the member is
    positionable by an automatic actuator; and subclass 755 for a land vehicle
    attachment for preventing the vehicle from tilting or tipping.


CLS 180/283
TXT And causing interruption of ignition circuit:

    Vehicle under subclass 282 wherein the response of the means results in
    stopping, momentarily or otherwise, the flow of current to or within the
    ignition system of the vehicle's motor.


CLS 180/284
TXT And also impeding flow of fuel:

    Vehicle under subclass 283 wherein the response of the means results,
    additionally, in slowing or stopping the movement of gasoline or other fuel
    to the vehicle's motor.


CLS 180/285
TXT And causing disruption of drive train between motor and wheels:

    Vehicle under subclass 282 wherein the response of the means results in
    creating a discontinuity in the train of elements and mechanisms which
    serve to transmit power from the motor of the vehicle to its wheels.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass frequently is directed
    to a ground-actuated linkage for disengaging the vehicle's clutch.


CLS 180/286
TXT Comprising vehicle system or component responsive either to position of
    movable closure member or to status of fastening device therefor:

    Vehicle under subclass 271 wherein the means comprises a system or a
    component of the vehicle which system or component is responsive to (a) the
    position, or a change therein, of a movable closure member of the vehicle
    or (b) the status, or change therein, of a device for preventing such a
    closure member from opening.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note of subclass 281 above for an explanation of
    "fastening device".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclass 31 as explained in the
    reference thereto appearing in subclass 281 above.


CLS 180/287
TXT By preventing unauthorized or unintended access or use:

    Vehicle under subclass 271 wherein the means has as its purpose the
    prevention of use of the vehicle or access to it by a person or persons, or
    for a purpose or purposes, not reasonably contemplated.

    (1)     Note.  Neither a mere keyed lock for a vehicle closure member nor a
    keyed ignition switch constitute subject matter for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173,    for a motor vehicle provided with means responsive to the speed of
    the vehicle for maintaining the speed at, or preventing it from exceeding,
    a particular value and wherein the means includes a drive responsive to
    centrifugal force and further wherein there is also included means to
    prevent tampering or unauthorized use, and see the observation of (1) Note
    of that subclass.

    272,    for a motor vehicle provided with a safety-promoting means which
    may be of the kind which reacts negatively to an attempt by a mentally or
    physically unqualified person to operate the vehicle (e.g., an ignition
    lock which is responsive to an alphabetical or digital input code).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclasses 237+ for locks adapted for use on automotive
    vehicles.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 198 for accessories for an
    internal combustion engine, which accessories may be of an antitheft nature.

    137,    Fluid Handling, appropriate subclasses (e.g., subclasses 351+ or
    383+) for a fluid handling system which is, or may be, associated with a
    vehicle, and which system may include an antitheft provision.

    188,    Brakes, appropriate subclasses, and see particularly subclass 353,
    for a brake of the fluid pressure type which is applied to a motor or other
    road vehicle and wherein means is provided to trap fluid in the brake
    system to hold the brake applied.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 42.01+ and
    43.01+ for a circuit maker and breaker provided with means for preventing
    its operation except by one authorized to use it.

    303,    Fluid-Pressure and Analogous Brake Systems, appropriate subclasses,
    and see particularly subclass 89, for a system of the kind provided for in
    that class and wherein the system includes a device for maintaining the
    parts of the system in a position which may be that of brake application.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses
    10.2+ for an electrical distribution system mounted in an automotive
    vehicle, which system may include an antitheft provision.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 426+ for vehicle mounted
    antitheft alarms.


CLS 180/288
TXT Responsive to failure of taxicab operator to activate fare meter upon
    boarding of passenger:

    Vehicle under subclass 287 wherein the means having the purpose of
    preventing unauthorized or unintended access or use is one which responds
    to the omission of the operator of a motor vehicle of the for-hire type to
    place into operation, when a person engaging the vehicle boards it, a
    register provided on the vehicle for determining the charge for a trip, the
    response consisting of making the vehicle inoperative.


CLS 180/289
TXT Comprising element, mechanism, or system for either repositioning a movable
    or removable closure member or operating a fastening device therefor:

    Vehicle under subclass 287 wherein the means having the purpose of
    preventing unauthorized or unintended access or use comprises an element,
    mechanism, or system for (a) moving a vehicle closure member which is
    either movable or removable to a different position or location or (b)
    changing the status (e.g., locked to released) of a device for preventing
    movement of such a closure member.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note of subclass 281 above for an explanation of
    "fastening device".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281,    for a motor vehicle provided with a safety-promoting means which
    comprises either a movable closure member or a fastening device therefor
    responsive to forward or rearward movement, or variations therein, of the
    vehicle.

    286,    for a motor vehicle provided with a safety-promoting means which
    comprises a vehicle system or component responsive either to the position
    of a movable closure member or to the status of a fastening device therefor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclass 35 for a closure member of
    that class which may be controlled by a key; and subclass 72 for a window
    mounted in a door and wherein movement of the window relative to the door
    is interrelated with the movement of a means for latching the door.

    70,     Locks, appropriate subclasses (e.g., subclasses 237+ and 262+) for
    means or a system for locking a closure member of a motorized vehicle.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, appropriate subclasses for fasteners for vehicle
    closure members.


CLS 180/290
TXT Responsive to weight of cargo load transported by vehicle:

    Vehicle under subclass 271 wherein the means responds to the downward force
    created by the articles or material placed on the vehicle for movement
    thereby.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14.5,   for two or more connected vehicles, at least one of the vehicles
    being a motor vehicle, and wherein the connection between the motor vehicle
    and at least one vehicle drawn thereby includes means for stopping the
    motor of the motor vehicle or for releasing the load in the event the load
    exceeds the capacity of the motor vehicle.

    282,    for a motor vehicle provided with a safety-promoting means which
    may be responsive to a tilt of the vehicle, and see the reference therein
    (subclass 282) to this subclass (290) for an explanation of the
    relationship of the subclasses.


CLS 180/291
TXT Having specific motor-to-body-frame relationship:

    Vehicle under subclass 54.1 wherein either (1) the device which develops
    the power for propelling the vehicle or (2) the device of (1) plus an
    attached or integral accessary (e.g., clutch, transmission, etc.) therefor,
    or (3) the device of (1) plus some other component (e.g., fender, front
    wheel suspension, etc.) of the vehicle, or any combination of (1), (2), or
    (3) is either (a) related peculiarly to the body frame of the vehicle
    (e.g., by giving it a particular location thereon) or (b) related to a body
    frame which, in itself, is more than a mere support--provided that no other
    locus for such subject matter exists.

    (1)     Note.  The line between this area, formerly subclass 64, and
    subclasses 55+ is not clear.  While the art found in former subclass 64 has
    been broken down and identified in this and the indented subclasses, no
    attempt has been made to reconcile its locus with that of the art of
    subclass 55 or its indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  While the definition of former subclass 64 referred to "the
    main or body frame as distinguished from an under-frame" (in contrast, of
    course, with the definition of subclass 55), the terms are not meaningfully
    definable nor, in the art, are the two kinds of frames necessarily either
    (a) readily identifiable or (b) clearly distinguishable; moreover, vehicle
    structures frequently utilize only one such frame or the other and, in some
    instances, neither.

    (3)     Note.  In view of the provision in inferior subclasses 65.1+ for a
    motor vehicle having an electric motor, and in inferior subclasses 301,
    302+, and 305+ (all of which were developed from former subclasses 66+) for
    a motor vehicle having a fluid motor, the art which had accumulated in
    former subclass 64, and which comprises the bulk of the art in this (291)
    and the indented subclasses, tended to be that pertaining principally to
    the mounting of a motor of the internal combustion engine type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228,    for a motor vehicle having a wheel arrangement comprising two
    wheels in tandem relationship and wherein the vehicle includes resilient
    means for mounting its motor.

    232,    for a motor vehicle provided with means for (a) protecting its
    motor from the impact of a collision, (b) utilizing the mass of the motor
    to absorb the force of a collision, or (c) protecting its occupant region
    from an impact-induced shifting of its motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 133+ for the locating or securing
    of a motor on a vehicle of that class.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 54 for the mounting of a power plant on an
    aircraft.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 560+ for supports which are resilient in
    nature; and subclasses 637+ for supports for machinery.  While the
    supporting of a nominally claimed vehicle frame is not beyond the scope of
    Class 248, nevertheless classification in Class 180 is proper when the
    claims develop specific motor or frame or vehicle aspects of which the
    following are exemplary:  (a) structure of the motor which is in addition
    to that necessary for receiving the support provided by the frame, (b)
    motor (e.g., crankcase parting flange) or motor component (e.g., timing
    gear cover) structure which has, in addition to its support function, a
    function peculiar to the motor, (c) structure of the frame which is in
    addition to that necessary for providing support to the motor, (d) one or
    more frame members which, while serving to support the motor, are disclosed
    as performing a frame-related function (e.g., rigidifying the frame), and
    (e) vehicle structure not involved solely in supporting the motor.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 781+ for a land vehicle of the wheeled
    type having running gear and wherein a frame for receiving a body is
    provided.


CLS 180/292
TXT Including change-speed gearing, or clutch, mounted in common with motor:

    Vehicle under subclass 291 provided with means in the nature of gearing for
    altering the speed or direction of the power output of the motor or means
    for interrupting said output, the means being either formed integrally with
    or attached directly to the motor, or else mounted along with the motor on
    a frame which is auxiliary to the body frame, in order to form an assembly
    which is supported as a unit relative to the body frame.

    (1)     Note.  The claiming of only the housing of the gearing or the
    clutch is sufficient for classification here.

    (2)     Note.  The mounting in common with the motor of an accessory or
    component of a nature other than a change-speed gearing or a clutch (e.g.,
    a generator, a starter, etc.) appears occasionally in the art of subclass
    291 above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    374+,   for the gear transmission relationship to the vehicle frame or
    axle, where the engine is not claimed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, appropriate subclasses for a
    clutch.


CLS 180/293
TXT With member or mechanism for controlling gearing or clutch, and means for
    minimizing transfer of movement, caused by operation of motor, to member or
    mechanism:

    Vehicle under subclass 292 provided with an element or linkage for
    controlling the gearing (e.g., by a shift lever) or the clutch (e.g., by a
    clutch pedal), and also provided with means for reducing or eliminating the
    transfer to the element or linkage of the movement (e.g., oscillation,
    vibration) set up by the running of the vehicle's motor.

    (1)     Note.  The movement of the motor is that permitted by the mounting
    customarily provided therefor, which mounting may or may not be claimed.

    (2)     Note.  The elimination of "clutch chatter" appears occasionally as
    an objective of the structure of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315+,   for a motor vehicle provided with a device for controlling its
    motor or driving mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 82+ for a device for
    actuating a clutch.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 560+ and 637+ as explained in the reference
    thereto appearing in subclass 291 above.


CLS 180/294
TXT With means enabling repositioning of motor and gearing or clutch:

    Vehicle under subclass 292 provided with means for moving, or facilitating
    the movement of , the motor and the gearing or clutch either into a
    different attitude or location on the body frame or from or to the body
    frame.

    (1)     Note.  The repositioning usually is for either changing the
    relative location of the motor (e.g., for adjusting the tension of a drive
    belt) or making the motor more easily accessible for service or repair.

    (2)     Note.  See (2) Note of subclass 298 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232,    for a motor vehicle provided with means for (a) protecting the
    vehicle's motor from the impact of a collision, (b) utilizing the mass of
    the motor to absorb the force of a collision, or (c) protecting the
    occupant region of the vehicle from an impact-induced shifting of the
    motor, which last-named category of means may include tracks, etc., for
    guiding the resultant movement  of the motor.


CLS 180/295
TXT With wheeled auxiliary frame, resiliently joined to body frame, for
    supporting motor and gearing or clutch:

    Vehicle under subclass 292 provided with an additional frame for carrying
    the motor and the gearing or clutch, the additional frame having
    ground-engaging wheels (e.g., the front wheels of the vehicle) and being
    connected to the body frame by one or more elastic couplings.

    (1)     Note.  In regard to (1) Note of subclass 291, this subclass, in
    particular, comprises art which subclasses 55+ may have been intended to
    provide for.

    (2)     Note.  Since subclasses 11+ were not included in the
    reclassification project which established this subclass (295), the line
    between the two is not entirely clear at present.  In this subclass (295),
    however, the motor-supporting, wheeled, auxiliary frame is an essential
    portion of the vehicle and not a component which readily lends itself to
    being described as an "attachment".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11+,    for a motor vehicle having a motor-carrying attachment, but see (2)
    Note above.


CLS 180/296
TXT Including means on body frame or motor for handling exhaust:

    Vehicle under subclass 291 wherein means located with respect to or
    attached to the body frame or motor is provided for receiving, conducting,
    or otherwise handling the products of combustion discharged from the motor.

    (1)     Note.  The means most frequently comprises a motor-attached exhaust
    pipe or manifold.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 272+ for the combination of an engine of
    the type in which fuel is burned in an expansible chamber to produce work
    and means to handle or treat at least some of the combusted material
    subsequent to its departure from the chamber, and see the search notes
    thereto for other, exhaust-related subject muffler.

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 212+ for a fluid conducting type matter.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 49+ for supports particularly adapted to
    support a pipe (e.g., an exhaust conduit) or a cable.

    293,    Vehicle Fenders, subclass 113 for a vehicle fender of the buffer or
    bumper type having an opening therein which may be for the purpose of
    providing a passage for the products of combustion (or a conduit carrying
    them) discharged from the motor.


CLS 180/297
TXT Having motor shaft parallel to rotational axis of driven wheel:

    Vehicle under subclass 291 wherein the component of the motor which
    delivers the power developed therein (e.g., the crank-shaft) lies on a line
    which is parallel to a line about which one or more driven wheels rotate in
    order to propel the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  In the event that the vehicle has motors of both a prime
    mover type and a traction kind, the shaft with which this subclass is
    concerned is that of the traction motor.


CLS 180/298
TXT Including means enabling repositioning of motor:

    Vehicle under subclass 291 provided with means for moving, or facilitating
    the movement of, the motor either into a different attitude or location on
    the body frame or from or to the body frame.

    (1)     Note.  (1) Note of subclass 294 is equally applicable here.

    (2)     Note.  While the motor of this subclass (298) usually is a
    torque-developing device from which power is transmitted mechanically to a
    driven wheel of the vehicle, a small portion of the art relates to a
    repositionable prime mover of the kind which contains (i.e., a battery) or
    which develops (i.e., a motor-generator) electrical energy which is
    utilized to drive a disclosed electric traction motor.  On the other hand,
    subclasses 65.1+, which was not included in the reclassification project
    which established this subclass (298) but which is known to include
    motor-generator prime movers, may contain a more significant portion of the
    art pertaining to repositionable prime movers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232,    as explained in the reference thereto appearing in subclass 294
    above.

    294,    for a motor vehicle provided with means enabling the repositioning
    of the vehicle's motor and a change-speed gearing or a clutch which is
    mounted in common with the motor.


CLS 180/299
TXT Including auxiliary frame for motor and resilient means for connecting
    auxiliary frame to body frame:

    Vehicle under subclass 291 provided with an additional frame (e.g., a
    subframe) for supporting the motor and with one or more cushioning devices
    (e.g., a spring, a shock absorber, elastomeric material, etc.) for joining
    the additional frame to the body frame.


CLS 180/300
TXT Including means of nonsupporting nature for minimizing operation-induced
    movement of motor:

    Vehicle under subclass 291 having means for reducing or restraining that
    movement of the motor which is occasioned by forces (e.g., torque,
    vibration, etc.) developed consequent to the operation of the motor, and
    wherein the means provides no appreciable support of the motor against
    gravity.

    (1)     Note.  Frequently the means is a laterally extending brace which
    has a cushioning or snubbing capability.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 266+ for a vibration dampener of the
    internal-resistance, motion-retarder type.

    248,    Supports, subclass 638 for a machinery support which includes
    vibration damping or absorbing means.


CLS 180/301
TXT Including traction motor of turbine type driven by fluid product of
    combustion:

    Vehicle under subclass 54.1 wherein the apparatus for producing power
    includes a motor of the kind having a blade-carrying shaft, which shaft is
    caused to rotate by the reaction on its blades of a moving gas generated by
    the burning of fuel, for imparting vehicle-propelling movement to one or
    more surface-engaging members of the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  The source of the moving gas may or may not be claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291+,   for a motor vehicle wherein the motor and the body frame are
    particularly related to one another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 39.01+ for a power plant which utilizes a
    motive fluid comprised, at least in part, of gases produced by combustion,
    and see particularly those indented subclasses which relate to power plants
    of the turbine type.


CLS 180/302
TXT Including traction motor of kind driven by expansible fluid from source
    external of motor:

    Vehicle under subclass 54.1 wherein the apparatus for producing power
    includes a motor of a type operated by a fluid, which is undergoing an
    increase in volume as the result of having been subjected to an elevation
    of its pressure or temperature at a location outside the motor, for
    imparting vehicle-propelling movement to one or more surface-engaging
    members of the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  The source of the expansible gas may or may not be claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291+,   as explained in subclass 301 above.


CLS 180/303
TXT Gas is product of treatment of a volatile fluid (e.g., gas is steam):

    Vehicle under subclass 302 wherein the expansible gas is obtained by
    subjecting one of a particular class of fluids, while in a liquid state
    (e.g., water), to a change in pressure and/or temperature, thereby causing
    the liquid to vaporize.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36+,    for a vehicle propelled by a motor driven by steam, but wherein the
    vehicle is primarily a pulling device rather than a load-transporting means.

    310,    for a vehicle having means to generate steam for a propulsion
    purpose, but lacking the motor of this subclass (303).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 668 for a power plant comprising means to
    increase the energy of a motive fluid by the indirect addition of heat
    thereto plus a motor actuated by the fluid, and wherein is further included
    means dependent upon vehicle motion, vehicle traction, or vehicle body
    structure, provided that no other locus exists for such a plurality of
    means.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclasses for a
    steam motor adapted for use with a vehicle.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 3 for a boiler plant
    adapted for use with a vehicle.


CLS 180/304
TXT With means to condense gas discharged from motor:

    Vehicle under subclass 303 having means to receive the gas which has
    operated the motor and exited therefrom and to change the gas into a liquid.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for a closed-cycle system in which
    the fluid, or at least a portion of it, is continuously reused.


CLS 180/305
TXT Including traction motor of kind driven by noncompressible fluid received
    under pressure from a pump:

    Vehicle under subclass 54.1 wherein the apparatus for producing power
    includes at least one motor of a type operated by a fluid which is not
    appreciably reducible in volume (e.g., a liquid), and which is supplied to
    the motor in a pressurized state by a pump, for imparting
    vehicle-propelling movement to one or more surface-engaging members of the
    vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  The pump may or may not be claimed.

    (2)     Note.  The pump is intended to be driven by the power plant (e.g.,
    an internal combustion engine) of the vehicle which power plant frequently
    is not claimed.

    (3)     Note.  The pump and motor of this subclass may constitute
    components of a device designated as a "hydro-static transmission".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242+,   for a motor vehicle having four wheels driven and wherein the means
    for driving one or more of the wheels may be a fluid motor.

    291+,   as explained in subclass 301 above.

    367,    for other types of fluid drives combined with motor vehicles
    structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 325+ for a power plant consisting of a
    source of fluid under pressure and a motor driven by the fluid.


CLS 180/306
TXT Vehicle includes another system operated by same fluid:

    Vehicle under subclass 305 having at least one other system (e.g., braking,
    steering), not a part of the traction-producing system, which also is
    driven by the pressurized fluid.


CLS 180/307
TXT Having variable displacement type motor or pump:

    Vehicle under subclass 305 wherein either the traction motor, or the pump
    which supplied the fluid under pressure to the motor, is of a kind capable
    of changing its power output by virtue of having internal components which
    are adjustable to vary its volumetric capacity for handling fluid.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is art directed to means for controlling the
    operation of the power plant of the vehicle in a manner responsive to the
    operation of another means for regulating the output of a variable
    displacement pump.


CLS 180/308
TXT Having separate motor for each driven, surface-engaging member:

    Vehicle under subclass 305 wherein each driven wheel, track, or other
    traction-developing member is provided with an individual motor of the
    noncompressible fluid type for operating it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6.48,   for a motor vehicle having means to cause, for the purpose of
    guiding the vehicle, a relative difference in the rate of travel of a
    traction element on one side of the vehicle and that of a traction element
    on the other side of the vehicle, and wherein the means comprises an
    individually controlled motor for each traction element.

    24.07,  for a motor vehicle having a wheel arrangement comprising five or
    more wheels and wherein the means for propelling the vehicle comprises
    either a plurality of prime movers or a plurality of energy conversion
    devices and further wherein each driven wheel is operated by an individual
    one of the prime movers or energy conversion devices.

    242+,   as explained in subclass 305 above, and with the observation that
    the fluid motor which may appear there (subclasses 242+) is frequently one
    which drives a specific wheel.


CLS 180/309
TXT With means for handling motor exhaust:

    Vehicle under subclass 54.1 provided with means for receiving, conducting,
    or otherwise handling the products of combustion discharged from its motor.

    (1)     Note.  The means may be one or more elements of which the following
    are exemplary: exhaust manifold, exhaust pipe, catalytic converter,
    muffler, tail pipe.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass was established during the reclassification of
    former subclass 64 and the art placed herein at the time comprises a
    collection which should not be considered to be completed insofar as the
    remainder of the class is concerned.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    296,    for a motor vehicle wherein the motor and the body frame are
    particularly related to one another and wherein is provided means, attached
    to or otherwise located with respect to the body frame or the motor, for
    handling the exhaust of the motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 272+ as explained in the reference thereto
    appearing in subclass 296 above.

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 212+ as explained in the reference thereto
    appearing in subclass 296 above.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 49+ as explained in the reference thereto
    appearing in subclass 296.1 above.

    293,    Vehicle Fenders, subclass 113 as explained in the reference thereto
    appearing in subclass 296 above.


CLS 180/310
TXT With means to generate steam for a propulsion purpose:

    Vehicle under subclass 54.1 provided with a boiler or other means for
    producing steam, which steam is intended for a purpose related to the
    propelling of the vehicle (i.e., the steam is for the operation of an
    unclaimed motor).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36+,    for a motor vehicle propelled by a motor driven by steam, but
    wherein the vehicle is primarily a pulling device rather than a vehicle of
    general utility; also, as pointed out in (1) Note of subclass 36, it is
    sufficient for classification there if only the steam traction engine
    vehicle and its boiler are claimed.

    303+,   for the vehicle and generating means of this subclass (310) plus
    the motor for utilizing the steam to propel the vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 830+ for a vehicle provided with a tank,
    which tank may be for the purpose of holding water which is intended to be
    used for the generation of steam.


CLS 180/311
TXT FRAME:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a frame for a vehicle,
    which frame includes a feature peculiar to a vehicle of the motor-propelled
    type.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is an outgrowth of the reclassification of
    selected portions (e.g., former subclass 64) of this class; accordingly, it
    does not purport to be a complete collection of all the art of this nature
    which may be present in the class.  As a matter of fact, subclasses such as
    55-63 and 89.1+, which were not a part of the reclassification project, may
    be particularly likely to include frame structure which would be pertinent
    to this area (subclasses 311+).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55      through 63 and 89.1+, as explained in (1) Note above.

    291+,   for a motor vehicle wherein the motor and the body frame are
    particularly related to one another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 781+ for a land vehicle of the wheeled
    type having running gear and wherein a frame for receiving a body is
    provided.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 203+ for a body for a
    land vehicle, which body is provided with a frame for supporting or
    rigidifying it.


CLS 180/312
TXT With structure adapted to receive or support a motor, change-speed gearing,
    or other power train element:

    Frame under subclass 311 provided with an auxiliary frame, a platform, a
    bracket, or other structure of such a nature either for holding a motor for
    propelling a vehicle, for holding gearing for changing a vehicle's
    velocity, or reversing its direction of movement, or for holding an element
    of the kind involved in developing power for, or transmitting power to, a
    traction-producing member of a vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291+,   as explained in subclass 311 above, and see especially subclass 299
    thereof.

    374+    and 377+, for a transmission-frame relationship and transmission
    support respectively, where the transmission is positively claimed.


CLS 180/313
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Apparatus under the class definition not otherwise provided for.


CLS 180/314
TXT WITH PLURAL FUEL TANKS:

    Apparatus under the class definition wherein the vehicle is provided with
    two or more containers for holding energizing fluid for powering the
    vehicle.


CLS 180/315
TXT MANUALLY ACTUATED CONTROLLING DEVICES:

    Devices under the class definition having means for manually controlling
    the motor or driving mechanism in connection with specific vehicle
    structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90,     for dashboards with controlling instruments arranged thereon.

    173,    for locks or sealing means for speed-controlling means.

    714,    for vehicle control actuated by a fender or buffer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 469+ for controlling
    devices of general application.

    123,    Internal Combustion Engines, subclasses 185.1+ for manual starting
    mechanisms operable from the seat.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, appropriate subclasses for brakes
    designed to be actuated in connection with a motor or clutch, so that the
    motor is stopped or the clutch disengaged when the brake is applied.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 75 and the classes specified in the notes
    thereto for apparatus and devices for controlling aircraft and other mobile
    craft.  See subclass 175 and the classes specified in the notes thereto
    where the control is effected by electrical means, and for a statement as
    to the line between the classes.


CLS 180/316
TXT By other than hand or foot of operator:

    Apparatus under subclass 315 wherein a controlling device is actuated by a
    body portion of an operator, and the body portion normally not being
    utilized in the control of a vehicle (e.g, knee, head, hip, etc.).


CLS 180/317
TXT On mine car vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 315 in which the vehicle comprises structure
    designed for operation in a subterranean passage.


CLS 180/318
TXT On delivery-type vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 315 wherein the vehicle comprises structure for
    facile on-off movement by an operator or other person of a vehicle designed
    for frequent pickup and delivery stops.


CLS 180/319
TXT With rein means:

    Apparatus under subclass 315 wherein a manually manipulatable flexible
    means is connected to a movable vehicle control part to at least partly
    control operation of the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  A flexible member interconnecting rigid link members, one of
    which being manually manipulable, in a vehicle control mechanism is not
    considered proper for classification here.  Classification will be based on
    other features.


CLS 180/320
TXT With vehicle control extension:

    Apparatus under subclass 315 wherein an additional manual means normally
    comprising extendable parts is secured to the vehicle (e.g., tractor)
    steering wheel and/or other manually controlled part normally used to
    control the vehicle, movement of the additional manual means enabling
    control of the vehicle from a remote position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    319,    for similar devices using rein means.


CLS 180/321
TXT With plural control stations:

    Apparatus under subclass 315 wherein the vehicle comprises two or more
    operator locations, the vehicle drive being controlled from at least one of
    the locations.

    (1)     Note.  One of the locations may be used solely for controlling a
    work apparatus.

    (2)     Note.  One of the locations may provide a separate control for
    braking (only) the vehicle for use by a passenger or other rider.

    (3)     Note.  Included herein are dual control stations.


CLS 180/322
TXT Side-by-side:

    Apparatus under subclass 321 wherein the locations are positioned alongside
    one another.


CLS 180/323
TXT For single control means:

    Apparatus under subclass 321 wherein the same control apparatus is
    accessible for operation from a plurality of operator locations.


CLS 180/324
TXT With tool or equipment control:

    Apparatus under subclass 321 wherein at least one of the operator locations
    comprises means to control equipment or work apparatus on the vehicle.


CLS 180/325
TXT Braking controllable by passenger:

    Apparatus under subclass 321 comprising means readily accessible to a
    vehicle rider to retard vehicle motion, the rider being someone other than
    the vehicle operator.


CLS 180/326
TXT With movable control station or seat position:

    Apparatus under subclass 315 having a control location which may have seat
    means for an operator from which the controlling means may be actuated, and
    wherein the control location or the seat may be moved from one position to
    another to enable the operator to control the vehicle and/or work apparatus
    thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334,    for a control means adjustable merely for the convenience and at
    the will of a vehicle operator.


CLS 180/327
TXT Movable cab:

    Apparatus under subclass 326 wherein an operator's location comprises a
    vehicle compartment or enclosure for housing the vehicle operator, the
    compartment or enclosure being shiftable to other positions or attitudes on
    the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89.13+, for similar subject matter wherein vehicle control means are not
    claimed, and see the search note thereunder.


CLS 180/328
TXT Tilting:

    Apparatus under subclass 327 wherein the compartment or enclosure is
    pivotally attached to the frame of the vehicle whereby it is shiftable
    between alternate attitudes or positions.


CLS 180/329
TXT Simultaneously movable seat and control:

    Apparatus under subclass 326 wherein an operator seat or location and at
    least one control means are mounted for concurrent movement to an alternate
    position.


CLS 180/330
TXT Seat or seat portion movable to alternate position:

    Apparatus under subclass 326 wherein the seat or seat portion is movable to
    permit the operator to face another direction either to control the vehicle
    or to control work apparatus or equipment thereon.


CLS 180/331
TXT With tool or equipment control:

    Apparatus under subclass 330 wherein a control means for vehicle-mounted
    work apparatus or equipment is accessible for operation by the operator at
    one position of seat or seat portion adjustment.


CLS 180/332
TXT With tiller-type handle:

    Apparatus under subclass 315 comprising an arm or lever means connected at
    or adjacent one of its ends to at least one vehicle control entity and
    engageable at or adjacent its other end by the operator of the vehicle for
    the movement to control at least one vehicle control entity (e.g.,
    steering, braking, etc.).


CLS 180/333
TXT Multiple vehicle functions controllable by single device:

    Apparatus under subclass 315 comprising a member movable to control
    operation of a vehicle, the member being capable of controlling a plurality
    of distinct functional control entities (e.g., steering, braking, etc.).


CLS 180/334
TXT With adjustable operator engageable control:

    Apparatus under subclass 315 wherein the position of a control member
    engageable by an operator to control the vehicle may be selectively moved
    to an alternate working position at a control station at the will of and
    for the convenience of the vehicle operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    326+,   for either a control station or seat movable to at least one other
    position from which the vehicle and/or tool or equipment thereon may be
    controlled.


CLS 180/335
TXT With fuel or air throttle control:

    Apparatus under subclass 315 comprising means actuated by a vehicle
    operator for regulating the amount of fuel and/or air deliverable to the
    cylinders of a vehicle motor.


CLS 180/336
TXT With transmission control:

    Apparatus under subclass 315 comprising means actuated by a vehicle
    operator for regulating change speed mechanism positioned intermediate the
    vehicle motor and drive shafting.


CLS 180/337
TXT TRANSMISSION MECHANISM:

    Mechanism under the class definition connecting the power shaft to the road
    wheels and claimed in combination with specific vehicle structure.

    (1)     Note.  Classes 56, Harvesters; 111, Planting; and 172, Earth
    Working, subclasses 105+, contain some agricultural vehicles carrying
    transmission mechanism connecting road wheels to a mechanism to be driven,
    e.g., in Class 56, Harvesters, are found vehicles carrying cutting
    mechanism actuated by the road wheels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6.2+,   21+, 36+, 53.1+, 233+, and 252+, for transmission mechanism of a
    nature peculiar to the motor vehicles of those subclasses.

    53.1+,  for transmission combinations with power take-offs, especially
    53.2, for creeper drives.

    165,    for a transmission in combination with a mechanical or fluid
    accumulator.

    200+,   for a motor vehicle provided with powered ground engaging means for
    producing or assisting in the production of lateral movement of the
    vehicle, (e.g., for parking), and wherein the means comprises a rotatably
    driven auxiliary wheel or endless track, the drive train for which wheel or
    track may include the vehicle's transmission.

    269,    for a motor vehicle having a belt or harness for restraining an
    occupant and means whereby the belt or harness controls, or is controlled
    by, the functioning of the vehicle's transmission.

    305+,   for a motor vehicle which includes a traction motor of the kind
    driven by a noncompressible fluid which has been placed under pressure by a
    pump, sometimes referred to as a hydrostatic transmission.

    332,    333 and 336, for manually actuated vehicle transmission controls.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, (See (1) Note).

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses, which contain
    transmission mechanism designed for motor vehicles, but not claimed in
    connection with specific vehicle structure.  For a more detailed statement
    of this line see (1) Note (b) under the class definition.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, appropriate subclasses, for vehicles of that
    class having transmission mechanism; and see particularly subclasses 96+
    for such a vehicle having drive mechanism for a wheel or axle.

    111,    Planting, (see (1) Note).

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 35+ for a driven earth working tool, and
    subclass 292 for an earth working apparatus with some specific propelling
    means.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 200+ for occupant propelled vehicles.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, for belt and
    chain transmissions not claimed in combination with specific vehicle
    structure.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, for planetary
    gear transmission mechanism. The line is the same as with Class 74.

    477,    Interrelated Power Delivery Controls, Including Engine Control, for
    interrelated engine and transmission control.


CLS 180/338
TXT Condition responsive, (e.g., responsive to speed, load, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 337 including means which controls or adjusts
    the transmission in response to a sensed condition or change of condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14.6,   for a transmission which may be controlled by the resistance to
    movement exerted by a trailer.


CLS 180/339
TXT With temperature control, lubrication or sealing:

    Subject matter under subclass 337 including (a), heating or cooling of the
    transmission mechanism; (b), means to facilitate the admission of lubricant
    to the transmission mechanism or (c), means to contain such lubricant or
    deflect undesirable fluids or solids.

    (1)     Note.  Brake cooling is not found here but in subclass 370.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    184,    Lubrication, for lubricating means, per se.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 500+ for a dynamic circumferential contact seal for
    other than a piston.


CLS 180/340
TXT With laterally movable wheel:

    Subject matter under subclass 337 including means to move the power driven
    road wheel(s) toward or away from the longitudinal axis of the vehicle so
    that the width of the vehicle's track may be varied.


CLS 180/341
TXT Wheel drives parallel wheel:

    Subject matter under subclass 337 provided with a drive means, not part of
    the normal road wheel drive transmission, through which one wheel driven by
    the road wheel drive transmission may drive a parallel wheel.

    (1)     Note.  The effect is the same as locking up the differential
    between two parallel wheels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24.12,  for driven wheels that may also drive through idlers to a set of
    tandem wheels.


CLS 180/342
TXT Tire directly driven:

    Subject matter under subclass 337 wherein the transmission includes a gear
    in engagement with the ground contact surface of a traction wheel.

    (1)     Note.  The gear may be of the belt or chain type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14.7,   24.11+, 198, and 201, for vehicles of the type there provided for
    which drive a ground wheel by contact.

    221+,   for a motor vehicle comprising two wheels in tandem, one of which
    is powered by a rotating element in frictional engagement therewith.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    476,    Friction Gear Transmission Systems or Components, for friction gear
    transmissions.


CLS 180/343
TXT With particular gear structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 342 including the configuration of the gear
    or the material of which it is made.


CLS 180/344
TXT Assembly feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 337 including structure facilitating the
    taking apart or bringing together of the transmission or the parts thereof
    and the vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclasses 9.1+ for a vehicle
    wheel of detachable sections.


CLS 180/345
TXT Traction aid:

    Subject matter under subclass 337 including particular structure disclosed
    as equalizing the normal forces acting between two parallel drive road
    wheels and the road.

    (1)     Note.  The inequality in traction which is here compensated for is
    normally caused by the torque of the drive transmission.


CLS 180/346
TXT With protective guard or casing:

    Subject matter under subclass 337 including a protective shield or covering
    designed to protect the transmission or to protect an object or person
    adjacent the transmission.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    380,    for propeller shaft casings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 606+ and 608+ for gear
    housings and guards not in combination with specific vehicle structure.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses
    144+ for chain or belt drives having guards or housings.


CLS 180/347
TXT Mechanical movement transmission:

    Subject matter under subclass 337 wherein the transmission includes a
    device, other than gearing, for imparting motion to one body from the
    motion of another body, the two motions, or some intermediate motion, being
    of different form, type or degree.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses for mechanical
    movements, per se.


CLS 180/348
TXT Final drive axle movable:

    Subject matter under subclass 337 wherein the power driven road wheel is
    supported such that its axis is movable relative to the vehicle body or
    frame.

    (1)     Note.  The axle moves against the pressure of the springs or
    oscillates relative to the body under the influence of inequalities in the
    road.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for steam traction engines of this type.

    227,    for a resiliently mounted driven wheel in a tandem wheeled vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclasses 133 and 136 for spring
    mountings of wheels on axle ends.


CLS 180/349
TXT Rigid axle:

    Subject matter under subclass 348 wherein two parallel drive wheels or
    drive wheel axles are mounted on a common support, which support is movable
    relative to the vehicle body or frame.


CLS 180/350
TXT Belt or chain drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 349 wherein the transmission includes a
    flexible endless member entrained between a pair of pulleys or sprockets.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9.64,   217, 231, 239, 241, and 251, for belt or chain transmissions
    combined with the particular vehicles provided for therein.

    357,    366 and 373, for other belt or chain drive combinations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, appropriate
    subclasses for belt or chain drives, per se.


CLS 180/351
TXT With tensioning means:

    Subject matter under subclass 350 including means to regulate the stress in
    the belt or chain.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231,    for belt tensioning means used with vehicles having only two wheels
    in tandem.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses
    101+ for belt tensioning, per se.


CLS 180/352
TXT With lateral support between the differential or axle housing and the
    vehicle frame:

    Subject matter under subclass 349 wherein significance is attributed to the
    structure linking the casing which surrounds the differential or live axle
    with the vehicle frame to prevent transverse movement of the driving road
    wheels with respect to the longitudinal axis of the vehicle.


CLS 180/353
TXT With sprung differential:

    Subject matter under subclass 349 wherein the gearing which compensates for
    varying speeds of the drive wheels is supported directly by the vehicle
    frame and thus constitutes part of the weight which is supported by the
    spring suspension of the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359,    for a sprung differential used with an independent suspension.


CLS 180/354
TXT And differential support feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 353 wherein significance is attributed to the
    structure connecting the differential to the vehicle frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    360     and 378+, for other differential supports.


CLS 180/355
TXT And final gear drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 353 wherein a gear transmission extends
    between the differential and the vehicle road wheels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    350+    and 357, for final gear drives of the belt or chain type.

    356,    361, 363, and 371+, for other final gear drive combinations.


CLS 180/356
TXT And final gear drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 349 wherein a separate gear transmission
    extends to each of two road wheels and, where a differential is disclosed,
    is beyond such differential in the path of power flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    350     and 357, for final gear drives of the belt or chain type.

    355,    361, 363, and 371+, for other final gear drive combinations.


CLS 180/357
TXT Belt or chain drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 348 wherein the transmission includes a
    flexible endless member entrained between a pair of pulleys or sprockets.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9.64,   217, 231, 239, 241, and 251, for belt or chain transmissions
    combined with the particular vehicles provided for therein.

    350,    366 and 373, for other belt or chain drive combinations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, appropriate
    subclasses for belt or chain drives, per se.


CLS 180/358
TXT Swinging axle, single pivot:

    Subject matter under subclass 348 wherein separate drive wheel supporting
    axles are supported for swinging movement in a vertical plane transverse to
    the longitudinal axis of the vehicle about a common fulcrum.


CLS 180/359
TXT With sprung differential:

    Subject matter under subclass 348 wherein the gearing which compensates for
    varying speeds of the drive wheels is supported directly by the vehicle
    frame and thus constitutes part of the weight which is supported by the
    spring suspension of the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    353,    for a sprung differential together with a movable rigid axle.


CLS 180/360
TXT And differential support feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 359 wherein significance is attributed to the
    structure connecting the differential to the vehicle frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    354     and 378+, for other differential supports.


CLS 180/361
TXT And final gear drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 359 wherein a gear transmission extends
    between the differential and the vehicle road wheels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    350+    and 357, for final gear drives of the belt or chain type.

    355,    356, 363, and 371+, for other final gear drive combinations.


CLS 180/362
TXT With transverse leaf spring suspension:

    Subject matter under subclass 359 wherein the vehicle suspension includes a
    spring made up of one or more flat, elongated flexible elements which
    extend in a direction transverse to the longitudinal axis of the vehicle.


CLS 180/363
TXT And final gear drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 348 wherein a separate gear transmission
    extends to each of two road wheels and, where a differential is disclosed,
    is beyond such differential in the path of power flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    350+    and 357, for final gear drives of the belt or chain type.

    355,    356, 361, and 371+, for other final gear drive combinations.


CLS 180/364
TXT Variable speed or direction:

    Subject matter under subclass 337 wherein the transmission includes a gear
    arrangement which may be controlled to (a) change the number or fractional
    number of revolutions made by an output load driving member for each
    revolution made by an input member or (b) change the direction of rotation
    of an output load driving member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65.7,   for change speed gearing in combination with an electric motor
    drive.

    230,    for a change speed means utilized with a vehicle having only two
    wheels arranged in tandem.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 325+ for interchangeably
    locked change speed transmissions, per se.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses 198+
    for a charge speed transmission in series with a differential.


CLS 180/365
TXT Plural:

    Subject matter under subclass 364 wherein more than one speed varying or
    direction changing transmission is provided in the power path(s) to the
    road wheels.

    (1)     Note.  The two or more transmissions may be in series or in
    parallel.

    (2)     Note. A change speed or direction transmission that is duplicated
    at each of two drive wheels is not found in this subclass but in one of the
    "final drive" subclasses or in the subclass providing for the particular
    transmission.

    (3)     Note.  Fluid drives not of the hydrostatic type combined with an
    additional change speed or direction transmission have been placed in
    subclass 367.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305+,   for plural transmissions one of which is of the hydrostatic type.

    367,    see (3) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

     74,    Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 745 for plural transmissions
    which may be used in vehicle combinations.

      475,  Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses 207+
    for; a nonplanetary transmission combined with a planetary transmission.


CLS 180/366
TXT Belt or chain:

    Subject matter under subclass 364 wherein the change speed or direction
    transmission includes a flexible endless member entrained between a pair of
    pulleys or sprockets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, appropriate
    subclasses for belt or chain drives, per se.


CLS 180/367
TXT Fluid drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 364 wherein the connection between the power
    shaft and road wheels includes the transmission of torque through a fluid
    medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301,    for a turbine motor driven by the fluid product of combustion.

    305+,   for a pump and motor drive of the hydrostatic type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

     60,    Power Plants, subclasses 330+ for coaxial impeller and turbine
    units, per se.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 718, 720 and 730.1+ for
    combinations of fluid drives and gearing.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 21.5 and 58.1+ for
    fluid drives of the clutch type.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses 31+,
    for a fluid drive in a planetary transmission.


CLS 180/368
TXT Friction drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 364 wherein the transmission includes gearing
    of the toothless type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses 183+,
    for friction planetary gearing.

    476,    Friction Gear Transmission Systems or Components, for friction gear
    transmissions.


CLS 180/369
TXT Planetary:

    Subject matter under subclass 364 wherein the transmission includes first
    and second engaging gears each having a central axis and wherein, during at
    least one mode of operation, the axis of one of the gears follows a path
    extending around the axis of the other of the gears.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses for planetary
    transmissions, per se.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, for planetary
    transmissions, per se.


CLS 180/370
TXT With brake:

    Subject matter under subclass 337 wherein significance is attributed to the
    means for stopping the road wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

     6.2+,  for brakes used for steering by driving purposes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, for brakes, per se.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 4+ for the combination
    of transmission control and brake.


CLS 180/371
TXT Final gear drive at each of two parallel wheels:

    Subject matter under subclass 337 wherein a separate gear transmission
    extends to each of two road wheels and, where a differential is disclosed,
    is beyond such differential in the path of power flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    342,    for final drive gears which engage the traction surface of the
    ground wheels.

    355,    356, 361, and 363, for other final gear drive combinations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses 198+
    for a variable speed or direction transmission combined with a differential.


CLS 180/372
TXT Planetary:

    Subject matter under subclass 371 wherein each separate gear transmission
    includes first and second engaging gears each having a central axis and
    wherein, during at least one mode of operation, the axis of one of the
    gears follows a path extending around the axis of the other of the gears.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    369,    for variable speed or direction planetary gearing associated with a
    vehicle wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems, or Components, for planetary
    transmissions, per se.


CLS 180/373
TXT Belt or chain:

    Subject matter under subclass 371 wherein each separate gear transmission
    includes a flexible endless member entrained between a pair of pulleys or
    sprockets.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    350+    and 357, for belt or chain final drives used with movable drive
    axles and see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 180/374
TXT Gear transmission relationship to frame or axle:

    Subject matter under subclass 337 wherein significance is attributed to the
    spatial relationship between the vehicle gear transmission and the vehicle
    frame or axle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    292+,   for a specific relationship between the motor, transmission and
    vehicle frame.


CLS 180/375
TXT Transmission is differential:

    Subject matter under subclass 374 wherein the gear transmission is the
    differential.


CLS 180/376
TXT Shaft relationship to frame or shaft:
    Subject matter under subclass 337 wherein significance is attributed to the
    spatial relationship between (a) a transmission shaft and the vehicle frame
    or (b) the various shafts of the transmission.


CLS 180/377
TXT Transmission support:

    Subject matter under subclass 337 wherein significance is attributed to the
    structure that sustains the transmission against the force of gravity.

    (1)     Note.  To be placed here both the transmission and vehicle
    structure must be positively claimed.  In the absence of a claimed
    transmission patents should be placed in Class 180 subclass 312.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312,    see (1) Note above.


CLS 180/378
TXT Differential or axle housing:

    Subject matter under subclass 377 wherein the transmission supported is the
    differential or axle housing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    354     and 360, for differential supports in combination with movable
    drive axles.


CLS 180/379
TXT Shaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 377 wherein the transmission supported is a
    shaft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, appropriate subclasses for bearing supports and shaft
    hangers.


CLS 180/380
TXT With propeller shaft casing, (e.g., torque tube):

    Subject matter under subclass 379 wherein the support includes an elongated
    housing that surrounds the vehicle drive shaft.

    (1)     Note. For purposes of this subclass "propeller shaft", (drive
    shaft), normally refers to the shaft extending lengthwise of the vehicle
    between the main gear transmission output and the differential, but could
    also refer to the shaft between the engine and the main gear transmission
    input where the transmission is located adjacent the differential.


CLS 180/381
TXT Vibration damping:

    Subject matter under subclass 379 wherein the support includes means,
    usually flexible, to suppress the transmission of force between the shaft
    and structure from which the shaft is supported.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    380,    for the combination of vibration damping and propeller shaft casing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, appropriate subclasses for resilient bearing supports.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, subclass 180 for shafting, per se, having vibration
    dampening structure.


CLS 180/382
TXT Flexible support:

    Subject matter under subclass 377 wherein the support is characterized by
    its resilience.


CLS 180/383
TXT With particular drive coupling:

    Subject matter under subclass 337 wherein the transmission includes a
    specifically claimed torque transmitting connection.

    (1)     Note.  The connection may take the form of a joint or coupling as
    in Classes 403 and 464 or a clutch as in Class 192.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76,     for miscellaneous devices that allow one driven road wheel to
    rotate faster than a parallel road wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 650 for nonplanetary devices
    which may be used to allow differential rotation of parallel vehicle wheels.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 49+ for clutches which
    may allow differential rotation of parallel vehicle wheels.


CLS 180/384
TXT Relative axial movement:

    Subject matter under subclass 383 wherein the torque transmitting
    connection accommodates relative movement between the connected members
    along their rotational axes.


CLS 180/385
TXT Drive connection to wheel:

    Subject matter under subclass 383 wherein the torque transmitting
    connection includes or is adjacent to the vehicle wheel.



    (1)     Note. See subclass 384 for a drive connection to the wheel which
    permits relative axial movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 49+ for clutches in a
    drive line to parallel vehicle wheels.

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, appropriate subclasses for
    wheels, axles and combinations thereof.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclass 1 for disengageable connections
    which may be to a wheel.


CLS 180/400
TXT STEERING GEAR:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising means for guiding
    vehicles involving motor vehicle structure or otherwise limited to motor
    vehicles as distinguished from drawn vehicles.

    (1)     Note. The titled phrase "STEERING GEAR" is defined to be a total
    operating system for guiding a vehicle, and is not meant to solely include
    or to be limited to the presence of a mechanical element known as a gear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6.2+,   for a motor vehicle which is steered by creating a difference
    between the driving effort developed by one or more traction elements
    located on one side of the vehicle and the driving effort developed by one
    or more traction elements located on the other side thereof; and see
    especially subclasses 6.24+ for the combination therewith of means (e.g.,
    steerable wheels) for manually steering such a vehicle.

    9.38,   for a motor vehicle having a special driving device in the nature
    of an endless, flexible track and having also a ground-engaging wheel for
    assisting in propelling or supporting the vehicle and further wherein the
    wheel is adapted to be turned (i.e., pivoted) for steering the vehicle.

    9.44+,  for a motor vehicle having a special driving device in the nature
    of an endless, flexible track and having also means for steering the
    vehicle.

    12+,    for a motor vehicle having a motor-carrying attachment in the
    nature of a wheeled frame and wherein the wheels of the frame are driven
    and steered.

    23+,    for a motor vehicle having a wheel arrangement comprising five or
    more wheels and wherein one or more of the wheels are driven and steered;
    and in particular subclass 24.01 for such a vehicle wherein one of the
    wheels is positively moved by external means for a vehicle-guiding purpose
    and another wheel longitudinally spaced from the one wheel is either
    positively and simultaneously moved for a steering purpose or is mounted to
    move incident to a turning movement of the vehicle.

    37+,    for a motor vehicle of the steam traction type having steering
    wheels which are driven.

    167+,   for a motor vehicle having means for controlling its operation
    responsive to either electromagnetic radiation, magnetic force, or sound
    waves received from a source, or reflected from an object or a surface,
    located from the vehicle.

    204+,   for a motor vehicle having a device for programmably operating the
    vehicle's steerable wheels.

    211+,   for a motor vehicle having a wheel arrangement comprising three
    wheels and wherein at least one of the wheels is driven and steered.

    222,    for a motor vehicle having a wheel arrangement comprising two
    wheels in tandem relationship and wherein one of the wheels is driven
    frictionally and further wherein means is provided for steering that wheel.

    223+,   for a motor vehicle having a wheel arrangement comprising two
    wheels in tandem relationship and wherein at least one of the wheels is
    driven and steered.

    234+,   for a motor vehicle having four wheels driven and provided with
    means for steering all of the driven wheels.

    252+,   for a motor vehicle having at least one wheel which is both driven
    and steerable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 263+ for occupant propelled vehicles
    including steering, and subclasses 771+ for other land vehicles including
    occupant steering.


CLS 180/401
TXT Steering by terrestrial guide:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 comprising a land based steering datum
    for cooperating with a datum sensing means on a vehicle wherein the datum
    sensing means cooperates with control means for steering the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167+,   for a motor vehicle having means for controlling its operation
    responsive to either electromagnetic radiation, magnetic force, or sound
    waves received from a source, or reflected from an object or surface,
    located apart from the vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 244.1 for a derailment guard for a railway
    vehicle, which guard includes a vehicle-mounted feeler element which is
    adapted to contact an existing channel or furrow in or on the ground and to
    guide the vehicle in a course which corresponds to that of the channel or
    furrow.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 23+, and particularly indented subclass
    26, for earth working apparatus provided with means adapted to contact an
    elongate shoulder or a channel on or in the ground for the purpose of
    guiding the apparatus.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 87.2 for a land vehicle of the wheeled type
    provided with means whereby one or more of its wheels may be steered by an
    occupant and wherein the steering means controls also a wheel which is
    offset from the principal supporting wheel of the vehicle but which, by its
    own turning (i.e., pivotable) movement, is able to effect turning movement
    of certain of the principal wheels; and subclass 776 for a wheeled vehicle
    of the occupant steered type wherein bias means is provided for maintaining
    a steerable wheel in engagement with an elongate, more or less vertical
    surface (e.g., curb) for a vehicle-steering purpose.


CLS 180/402
TXT No mechanical connection between steering shaft and steering gear:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein there is no mechanical linkage
    joining the steering shaft and the steering gear.


CLS 180/403
TXT Hydraulic:

    Subject matter under subclass 402 wherein the steering shaft controls a
    fluid valve which regulates the flow of a pressurized fluid to a steering
    gear.


CLS 180/404
TXT Power assist alarms or disablers:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 comprising either a means for (a)
    stopping the operation of the power assist in response to the
    malfunctioning thereof, or (b) producing a humanly perceptible signal in
    response to a predetermined condition of the power assist.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400,    for detectors and sensors for steering systems where a control
    system is not being claimed.

    405+,   for failure systems which further include a backup power assist.


CLS 180/405
TXT With alternate emergency power means (e.g., pump, gearing, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 400 provided with secondary or backup means
    to ensure the steering of a vehicle with a mechanical advantage to the
    vehicle operator upon failure of a part of a primary steering means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    271+,   for a motor vehicle which is provided with means for promoting the
    safety of the vehicle, or its occupant or load, or an external object.
    (Inasmuch as this subclass 133 was not within the scope of the
    classification project which established subclass 271, principally from
    former subclasses 82+, there is no assurance that this subclass does not
    presently contain art which is within the scope of subclass 271).


CLS 180/406
TXT With fluid backup:

    Subject matter under subclass 405 wherein the secondary means is hydraulic.


CLS 180/407
TXT With electrical backup:

    Subject matter under subclass 405 wherein the secondary means is electrical.


CLS 180/408
TXT Each wheel steerable:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein the vehicle comprises main and
    auxiliary wheels and there is provided a means for steering each of the
    wheels of the vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 91.1 for a nonmotor vehicle including
    steering gear which controls four supporting wheels.


CLS 180/409
TXT Occupant steered:

    Subject matter under subclass 408 wherein all of the power for steering the
    wheels of the vehicle is provided by an occupant (i.e., no power assist).


CLS 180/410
TXT With condition modulated steering:

    Subject matter under subclass 409 wherein there is provided a means
    responsive to either (a) the condition of operation of the vehicle or (b) a
    change thereof in order to change the steering ratio between the main and
    auxiliary wheels.


CLS 180/411
TXT Independently controlled steerable wheels:

    Subject matter under subclass 408 wherein each wheel can be independently
    steered or controlled.


CLS 180/412
TXT With electric power assist:

    Subject matter under subclass 408 including means movable by an electric
    motor to provide power to assist the steering of a wheel of the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    445,    for subject matter directed to an electric power assist motor for
    steering the rear wheels of a motor vehicle


CLS 180/413
TXT With electric power assist to all wheels:

    Subject matter under subclass 412 wherein electric means provides the power
    assist for all of the wheels of the vehicle.


CLS 180/414
TXT With fluid power assist:

    Subject matter under subclass 408 in which means movable by the application
    of pressure fluid thereto is positively connected to each vehicle wheel.


CLS 180/415
TXT With electrical control:

    Subject matter under subclass 414 in which electrical energy is utilized
    for adjusting the flow of pressurized fluid to the movable means.


CLS 180/416
TXT With mechanical power assist:

    Subject matter under subclass 408 in which there is provided motive means
    movable by the application of mechanical power (obtained, for example, from
    a power take-off mechanism) thereto to provide substantially all of the
    force required for steering the wheels of the vehicle.


CLS 180/417
TXT With fluid power assist:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 in which there is provided motive means
    movable by the application of a pressurized fluid thereto to provide
    substantially all of the force required for guiding the vehicle, the
    initiating and/or remaining force being provided by a vehicle operator in
    guiding the vehicle.


CLS 180/418
TXT Between articulated wheeled vehicle sections:

    Subject matter under subclass 417 wherein the vehicle comprises a plurality
    of relatively movable wheeled parts, the motive means causing relative
    movement between the vehicle parts for guiding the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235,    for a motor vehicle having four wheels driven and provided with
    means for steering all of the driven wheels and wherein the means includes
    articulation of the frame of the vehicle.


CLS 180/419
TXT Combined with another steering mode:

    Subject matter under subclass 418 wherein the vehicle includes a steering
    means in addition to the means for steering by relative movement between
    the wheeled vehicle parts for guiding the vehicle.

    (1)     Note. The plural steering means may be utilized singly or together
    as desired to perform the steering operation.


CLS 180/420
TXT Reciprocating power assist:

    Subject matter under subclass 418 wherein the means movable by the
    application of pressurized fluid comprises an expansible chamber motive
    means, the relatively movable parts thereof being movable in a straight
    line.


CLS 180/421
TXT With condition modulated steering:

    Subject matter under subclass 417 wherein there is provided a means
    responsive either to (a) a condition of operation of the vehicle or (b) a
    change thereof for continuously and proportionally controlling the flow of
    pressure fluid to the motive means to compensate for the influence of the
    condition or change thereof in the guidance of the vehicle by the operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404,    for devices which sense a condition and disable or indicate failure
    or malfunction of the power assist


CLS 180/422
TXT With electrical control:

    Subject matter under subclass 421 in which electrical energy is utilized
    for adjusting the flow of pressure fluid to the movable means.


CLS 180/423
TXT Vehicle speed condition only:

    Subject matter under subclass 422 in which the condition of operation is
    the velocity only of the vehicle for controlling the flow of pressure fluid
    to the movable means.


CLS 180/424
TXT With swinging axle:

    Subject matter under subclass 417 in which the vehicle includes an elongate
    pivoted wheeled supporting member having a width at least substantially the
    width of the vehicle, the motive means moving the pivoted supporting member
    about its pivot to guide the vehicle.


CLS 180/425
TXT Including flexible power transmitting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 417 in which there is provided an elongate
    chain or cable means interconnecting the motive means with steerable wheel
    means to guide the vehicle.


CLS 180/426
TXT Steering column supported:

    Subject matter under subclass 417 in which the motive means is either (a)
    attached to, (b) integral with, or (c) otherwise supported by a steering
    column of the vehicle.


CLS 180/427
TXT Including rack gear means:

    Subject matter under subclass 426 in which there is provided force
    transmitting means comprising interengaging gear means one of which being
    an elongate toothed barlike member of determinate length movable in a
    reciprocating motion.

    (1)     Note. The barlike member may be a piston connecting rod or may be a
    toothed side of a piston (working member).


CLS 180/428
TXT With rack and pinion gearing intermediate steering shaft and power assist:

    Subject matter under subclass 417 in which there is provided interengaging
    gear means interconnecting a vehicle steering shaft or an extension thereof
    with either the motive means or a fluid control means therefor for guiding
    the vehicle, one of the interengaging gear means having the form of an
    elongate toothed bar.


CLS 180/429
TXT Having rotary working member:

    Subject matter under subclass 417 wherein the motive means comprises a
    working member moving about an axis.


CLS 180/430
TXT Having flexible working member:

    Subject matter under subclass 417 wherein the motive means comprises a
    working member having a pliable displaceable member comprising the movable
    wall of an expansible chamber device.


CLS 180/431
TXT Steering linkage includes interengaging gear means:

    Subject matter under subclass 417 in which the motive means acts on force
    transmitting members comprising relatively moving meshing toothed members
    for moving a ground engaging wheel to thereby guide the vehicle.


CLS 180/432
TXT With plural working members:

    Subject matter under subclass 417 in which the motive means includes at
    least two separate force or work producing members.


CLS 180/433
TXT Working member movement traverses vehicle path:

    Subject matter under subclass 432 in which the force or work producing
    members move in a direction extending at least generally from side to side
    of the vehicle in a direction traverse to its path of travel.


CLS 180/434
TXT Working member movement traverses vehicle path:

    Subject matter under subclass 417 in which the motive means includes a
    force or work producing member having movement from side to side of the
    vehicle in a direction substantially traverse to its path of travel.


CLS 180/435
TXT Moves separate arm for each wheel steering arm:

    Subject matter under subclass 434 in which the force or work producing
    member is connected to actuate a plurality of force transmitting members
    each of which being connected to steer a separate steerable wheel.


CLS 180/436
TXT Working member part engages wheel steering arm:

    Subject matter under subclass 434 wherein the force producing member is
    connected to a swinging lever or crank of a steerable ground engaging wheel.


CLS 180/437
TXT Working member part engages tie rod:

    Subject matter under subclass 434 wherein the force producing member is
    connected to a force transmitting member which is connected to a steering
    wheel means at its ends.


CLS 180/438
TXT Movable working member engages wheel steering arm:

    Subject matter under subclass 417 wherein the motive means includes a force
    or work producing member directly connected to a swinging lever or crank of
    a steerable ground engaging wheel.


CLS 180/439
TXT Movable working member is a moving cylinder:

    Subject matter under subclass 417 in which the motive means includes a
    force or work producing member comprising a movable housing or outer member
    thereof which surrounds a fixed member of substantially like dimension.


CLS 180/440
TXT With linkage intermediate working member and wheel steering arm:

    Subject matter under subclass 417 in which the motive means includes a
    force or work producing member connected to at least one force transmitting
    member having connection either directly or via another force transmitting
    member to a swinging lever or crank of a steerable ground engaging wheel.


CLS 180/441
TXT Device to control pressure (e.g., valve):

    Subject matter under subclass 417 designed to vary the fluid pressure in a
    fluid power assisted steering system.


CLS 180/442
TXT Hydraulic circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 417 wherein a number of fluid logic devices
    are connected together forming a system for providing fluid to a power
    steering device.


CLS 180/443
TXT With electric power assist:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 in which there is provided motive means
    movable by the application of electrical power (e.g., an electric
    servomotor) thereto to provide substantially all of the force required for
    guiding the vehicle, the initiating and/or remaining force being provided
    by a vehicle operator in guiding the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400,    for detectors and sensors for steering systems where a control
    system is not being claimed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity: Motive Power Systems, subclasses 560+ for positional
    servo systems (e.g., servomechanisms); and see particularly subclass 628
    for "feedback" systems.


CLS 180/444
TXT Specific mechanical feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 443 directed to a mechanical linkage between
    the electric power means and the steering gear.


CLS 180/445
TXT Controlling rear wheels:

    Subject matter under subclass 443 directed to an electric motor for
    steering the rear wheels of the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    412+,   for a vehicle having electrical power assisted rear wheel steering
    and also having front steerable wheels.


CLS 180/446
TXT Condition modulated:

    Subject matter under subclass 443 wherein there is provided a means
    responsive either to (a) a condition of operation of the vehicle or (b) a
    change thereof for continuously and proportionally controlling the
    electrically powered motive means to compensate for the influence of the
    condition or change thereof in the guidance of the vehicle by the operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404,    for devices which sense a condition and disable or indicate failure
    or malfunction of the power assist.


CLS 180/447
TXT With mechanical power assist:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 in which there is provided motive means
    movable by the application of mechanical power (obtained, for example, from
    a power take-off mechanism) thereto to provide substantially all of the
    force required for guiding the vehicle, the initiating and/or remaining
    force being provided a vehicle operator in guiding the vehicle.

    (1)     Note. When the invention relates to steering gear and transmission
    mechanism for actuating it, the fact that a shaft rotating constantly in
    one direction supplies the power is regarded as evidence that the steering
    gear is driven by power.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for steering by differential rotation of the wheels on opposite
    sides of the vehicle.

    18,     for steering by driving controlled by steering of this type.

    20,     power steering of some steam rollers.


CLS 180/448
TXT Swinging axle:

    Subject matter under subclass 447 wherein the mechanical power is applied
    to steer a continuous axle which carries a wheel in the vicinity of each of
    its ends.


CLS 180/449
TXT Bogie truck having more than one axle:

    Subject matter under subclass 447 wherein the mechanical power is applied
    to steer a bogie truck having more than one axis.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 180/900
TXT AGRICULTURAL-TYPE TRACTORS:

    Art collection of motor vehicles wherein the vehicle is in the nature of
    either a traction vehicle for pulling a farm implement or a vehicle which
    not only moves but also supports such an implement and wherein the vehicle
    includes one or more features which particularly adapt it for an
    agriculture-related use (e.g., cultivating, harvesting, etc.).


CLS 180/901
TXT DEVICES FOR TRAVERSING VERTICAL SURFACES:

    Art collection of motor vehicles wherein the vehicle is in the nature of a
    device which is particularly adapted (e.g., by magnetic means) to move
    itself along a surface which is predominantly vertical.


CLS 180/902
TXT SHOCK OR VIBRATION ABSORBING OR TRANSMITTING MEANS BETWEEN WHEEL SUSPENSION
    AND MOTOR:

    Art collection of motor vehicles wherein the vehicle is provided with means
    located between its motor and the structure for suspending its (usually
    front) wheels for absorbing or transmitting a force in the nature of a
    shock or vibration.


CLS 180/903
TXT AIRSTREAM REACTIVE VEHICLE OR VEHICLE STRUCTURE:

    Art collection of motor vehicles wherein the vehicle or a component thereof
    is so configured as to react with the ambient air under the condition of
    relative movement of the vehicle and the air.


CLS 180/904
TXT TRACTION DOLLIES FOR AIRCRAFT:

    Art collection of motor vehicles wherein the vehicles is a traction dolly
    employed to move aircraft on the ground with the vehicle connectable to the
    aircraft usually at the aircraft's steerable wheel.


CLS 180/905
TXT AXLES:

    Art collection of axles for motor vehicles.


CLS 180/906
TXT ADJUSTABLE AXLES:

    Art collection of axles for motor vehicles wherein the axle is adjustable
    to vary the distance between the wheels mounted on the axle.


CLS 180/907
TXT MOTORIZED WHEELCHAIRS:

    Art collection of wheelchairs equipped with motors for driving the
    wheelchair.


CLS 180/908
TXT MOTOR VEHICLES WITH SHORT WHEEL BASE:

    Art collection of motor vehicles wherein the wheelbase of the vehicle is
    shorter than normal so that usually only the operator of the vehicle may be
    carried by the vehicle (e.g., lift trucks of the industrial tractors).

    (1)     Note.  Farm or agricultural tractors are excluded from this
    collection as an art collection of agricultural tractors will be found in
    subclass 900.


CLS 181/
TTL ACOUSTICS

CLS 181/
TXT This class includes devices and corresponding methods for mechanically
    transmitting, for amplifying and for ascertaining the direction of sound
    and for mechanically muffling or filtering sound, and not elsewhere
    provided for.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 572+ and especially 645+ for the
    determination of qualities, characteristics or conditions by the
    utilization of acoustical energy and which is not specifically provided for
    elsewhere.

    84,     Music, appropriate subclasses for musical instruments.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclass 21.5 for
    partitions having a sound transmitting passage constructed to prevent
    passage of projectiles.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclasses, for mechanical
    signaling devices utilizing sound.

    178,    Telegraphy, appropriate subclasses, for acoustic instruments
    limited to that art.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 141+ for
    electrical delay networks wherein the electrical waves may be converted to
    sound waves, such sound waves being delayed and reconverted to electrical
    waves, and subclasses 186+ for wave filters of the electromechanical
    transducer type, wherein electrical waves may be converted to sound waves,
    such sound waves being filtered and reconverted to electrical waves.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 1+ for "taking" motion picture
    apparatus.

    367,    Communications, Electrical: Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices, for
    electrical signaling devices utilizing sound or compressional waves.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, for an information
    storage or retrieval device having particular acoustical structure.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, appropriate subclasses, for acoustic
    instruments limited to that art.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processsing Systems and Devices,
    appropriate subclasses for one-way electrical transmission of audio signals.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, particularly subclass 300, on teaching
    acoustic principles.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclass 175 for a toy having sound
    responsive switch or control.

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclass 64 for an amusement device
    causing an illusion by sound imitation or effect.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 150+ for high temperature (Tc  30 K) superconducting devices,
    and particularly subclass 203 for electroacoustic transducers.


CLS 181/.5
TXT Inventions falling within the definition of this class, and not otherwise
    provided for.

    (1)     Note.  Acoustic levitation devices are found here.

    SEARCH CLASS

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 570+ for an acoustic levitation
    apparatus combined with a motion sensing device or a motion controlling
    device and not elsewhere classified.


CLS 181/18
TXT Construction of speaking-tubes with their associated parts; also
    "speaking-tube exchanges", also, any patents on speaking-tubes not
    classified elsewhere.


CLS 181/19
TXT Alarms or indicators of a speaking-tube.


CLS 181/20
TXT Mouthpieces and connected earpieces.


CLS 181/21
TXT Structure of the mouthpieces of speaking-tubes and the combination
    therewith of accessory parts, as alarms, indicators, etc.


CLS 181/22
TXT The construction of the tubes, per se.


CLS 181/30
TXT Devices for improving the acoustic properties of halls or other places.


CLS 181/101
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to systems for
    mechanically transmitting or receiving acoustical waves for the purpose of
    identifying geologic or subsurface structure.

    (1)     Note.  Subsurface is defined as including anything, whether
    composition, article, structure or formation which lies below the upper
    natural surface of the earth.

    (2)     Note.  Acoustical waves are considered to include seismic waves for
    the purposes of this section.

    (3)     Note.  In scope, this subclass is analogous to Class 367
    Communications Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices subclasses
    25+ and 853.1+ wherein electrical communication, in part or in whole, is
    involved.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124,    for depth sounding related to sound echo compressional wave systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 323+ for
    geophysical surface or subsurface exploration in situ generally.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 853.8 for a wellbore
    telemetering system.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 14+ for seismic prospecting using electrical acoustic wave
    systems.


CLS 181/102
TXT Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein said geologic or subsurface
    structure includes a shaft or deep boring in the earth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 302 and 304+ for bore-hole
    direction indicators.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 152.01+ for instruments, for
    bore-hole studies.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 64, 66 and 113 for well apparatus including
    measuring and testing means, subclasses 250.01+ for well processes
    including measuring and testing, and subclass 264 for processes comprising
    merely sampling a well fluid and appropriate subclasses (especially
    subclasses 142+ and the subclasses there noted) for the corresponding
    apparatus.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 40+ for a process or
    means of measuring or testing combined with an earth boring process or
    apparatus.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 256+ for ray energy detection or
    measurement (including detection or measurement of radioactive materials)
    applied to bore-hole and drilling study.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 323+ for electrical
    testing of bore holes.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 853.1+ for telemetering in
    wells.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 25+ for seismic well logging using acoustic wave responsive
    electrical means.


CLS 181/103
TXT Subject matter under subclass 102 including means operative upon initiation
    to transmit or receive acoustical waves through a given cycle of operations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for similar subject matter not limited to a well bore.


CLS 181/104
TXT Subject matter under subclass 102 including means for sending, or receiving
    acoustical waves which is characterized by some quality that varies
    according to the relative bearing of the means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    for sound locating means not limited to bore holes.


CLS 181/105
TXT Subject matter under subclass 102 for investigating physical conditions of
    well bores and casings, such as obstructions, bore surfaces, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 152.01+ for a determination of a
    physical characteristic of a borehole by making a measurement which is not
    purely electrical or purely magnetic and subclass 152.57 for a
    determination of a physical characteristic of a casing or a cementing by
    making a measurement which is neither purely magnetic.


CLS 181/106
TXT Subject matter under subclass 102 including means for generating acoustical
    waves mechanically in the shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108+,   for seismic wave generation not limited to a well bore in
    combination with a receiver.

    133+,   for seismic wave generation not limited to a well bore.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 152.01+ for a determination of a
    physical characteristic of a borehole by making a measurement which is not
    purely electrical or purely magnetic and subclass 152.57 for a
    determination of a physical characteristic of a casing or a cementing by
    making a measurement which is neither purely electrical nor purely
    magnetic.


CLS 181/107
TXT Subject matter under subclass 101 including means operative upon initiation
    to transmit or receive acoustical waves through a given cycle of operations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for this subject matter in a well bore environment.


CLS 181/108
TXT Subject matter under subclass 101 including means for transmitting and
    receiving seismic waves.


CLS 181/109
TXT Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein the means for transmitting or
    receiving seismic waves is elevated above the surface of the earth.


CLS 181/110
TXT Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein the means for transmitting or
    receiving seismic waves is in wave coupling relationship with a body of
    water.


CLS 181/111
TXT Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein the means for transmitting
    seismic waves includes more than one source.


CLS 181/112
TXT Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein the means for receiving seismic
    waves includes more than one seismic wave detector.


CLS 181/113
TXT Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein the system includes means for
    producing seismic waves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclasses, for mechanical
    signalling devices utilizing sound.


CLS 181/114
TXT Subject matter under subclass 113 including means for supporting the
    seismic wave producing means on a land vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are combinations of a land vehicle
    adapted to transport a seismic wave source to a desired location, a seismic
    wave source, and means to position the source in contact with the earth.


CLS 181/115
TXT Subject matter under subclass 113 including means to minimize adverse
    effects arising from the production of bubbles by the means for producing
    seismic waves in a fluid medium.

    (1)     Note.  Some seismic sources produce seismic pulses by producing
    gaseous bubbles which may produce undesired or adverse secondary impulses.
    This subclass is drawn to means to mechanically control or compensate for
    such secondary bubble impulses.


CLS 181/116
TXT Subject matter under subclass 113 wherein the means for producing seismic
    waves includes means for utilizing the violent expansion of hot gases
    resulting from the sudden combustion of a material.


CLS 181/117
TXT Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein the material is a gas.


CLS 181/118
TXT Subject matter under subclass 117 wherein the seismic waves are produced
    and coupled to a body of water.


CLS 181/119
TXT Subject matter under subclass 113 wherein the seismic waves are generated
    by utilizing a fluid under pressure.


CLS 181/120
TXT Subject matter under subclass 119 wherein the seismic waves are produced
    and coupled to a body of water.


CLS 181/121
TXT Subject matter under subclass 113 wherein the seismic waves are generated
    by utilizing the kinetic energy of a moving inertial mass.


CLS 181/122
TXT Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein the system includes means for
    mechanically receiving the acoustical waves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 140+ for electrical geophysical vibration transducers.


CLS 181/123
TXT Subject matter under the class definition having means for sending out a
    sound wave and receiving said wave after a reflection being utilized to add
    some information to the original wave.

    (1)     Note.  Except for mechanical altitude or depth detectors in
    subclass 124 below, this subclass does not provide for mechanical systems
    relating to identifying geologic or subsurface structure which is provided
    for by subclass 101 above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101+,   for systems for identifying geologic or subsurface structure (see
    (1) Note above).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 620+ and 627+ for means for
    testing a body utilizing a wave reflected from a surface of a body.

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), appropriate subclass for reflected or otherwise
    returned radio wave systmes.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 87+ for electrical acoustic wave echo systems.


CLS 181/124
TXT Subject matter under subclass 123 for determining the vertical distance of
    a body above the surface of the earth or the vertical distance down from a
    surface.


CLS 181/125
TXT Subject matter under the class definition for ascertaining the direction
    from which a sound proceeds.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 170.16 for means for measuring
    cloud height, and subclass 290 for means for measuring liquid level.

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 1 - 205 for reflected radiant energy
    wave systems and subclasses 350+ for radio wave systems.

    367,    Communications, Electrical: Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclass 87 for electrical echo altimeters, subclass 99 for electrical
    underwater sound direction indication.


CLS 181/126
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including an acoustical device
    wherein at least a portion is in contact with a living being during use.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses provided for subcombination
    devices particularly adapted for use in or with the acoustical device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclass 558 for diagnostics of ear or hearing.

    601,    Surgery:  Kinesitherapy, subclass 47 for kinesitherapy.


CLS 181/127
TXT Subject matter under subclass 126 wherein the acoustical device is held or
    positioned in the mouth, generally by the teeth.


CLS 181/128
TXT Subject matter under subclass 126 having an earpiece and mouthpiece
    operatively connected together.


CLS 181/129
TXT Subject matter under subclass 126 for aiding hearing or preventing unwanted
    noises from entering the auditory canal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 846+ for body protectors and restraining
    devices.


CLS 181/130
TXT Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein there is a device that is
    operatively inserted in the auditory canal.


CLS 181/131
TXT Subject matter under subclass 130 having a sensing element which is to be
    used in contact with a source of sound and a sound conducting element
    guiding the sound to an ear contacting element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135,    for subcombination of stethoscope.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 585, 591 and 649+, where the
    stethoscope is part of a testing device which tests articles or mechanisms
    by sensing the vibrations produced therein.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices subclass 67
    for a stethoscope comprising a vibration-electric transducer which senses
    vibrations of the body by virtue of physical contact between the transducer
    and the body, there being no acoustical transimission through the air, and
    in accordance with said vibrations controls an electric current which is
    applied to a hearing or listening device.


CLS 181/132
TXT Subject matter under subclass 130 including a flexible element which form
    part of a sound sensing device.


CLS 181/133
TXT Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein there is a device to deflect
    sound waves into the auditory canal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136,    for a device to deflect sound wave to an ear where there is no
    element inserted into the auditory canal.


CLS 181/134
TXT Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein the device inserted in the
    auditory canal is an artificial ear drum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135,    for ear insert only.

    137,    for receiver only.


CLS 181/135
TXT Subject matter under subclass 130 having the device inserted into the
    auditory canal only.


CLS 181/136
TXT Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein there is a device to deflect
    sound waves into the auditory canal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    for a deflector and means to be inserted into the auditory canal.


CLS 181/137
TXT Subject matter under subclass 129 having a sensing element only.


CLS 181/138
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein sound is transmitted by
    the vibrations of molecules set up by mechanical means in a wire, string or
    flexible member strung taut.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communications, appropriate subclasses for transmission
    of sound by means of electrical devices.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing  Systems and Devices,
    appropriate subclasses for one-way electrical transmission of audio signals.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 141+ for a toy telephone which
    is not capable for transmitting sound.


CLS 181/139
TXT Subject matter under the class definition for producing and receiving sonic
    compressional waves.


CLS 181/140
TXT Subject matter under the class definition for producing or receiving sonic
    compressional waves and a marine device.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes any container for use in a water
    environment.


CLS 181/141
TXT Subject matter under the class definition to which has been added a
    subcombination or assembly which is recognized as the subject matter of
    some other class.


CLS 181/142
TXT Subject matter under the class definition for producing a sonic
    compressional wave.

    (1)     Note.  A diaphragm or a diaphragm and means to move it will be
    placed as an original in subclasses below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143,    for sound means and means to move the sound means.

    144,    for plural diaphragms.

    148,    for a diaphragm and enclosure.

    157,    for a diaphragm.


CLS 181/143
TXT Subject matter under the class definition for continuously moving a sound
    source (e.g., loudspeaker) or for continuously moving a sound reflector
    located in the sound path.

    (1)     Note.  The continuous motion is generally designed to produce a
    tremulant effect.


CLS 181/144
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including at least two separate
    means that can be vibrated by sound waves or produce sound waves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148,    for a single diaphragm and an enclosure with plural sound emitting
    portions.

    163,    for plural dependent diaphragms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    150+ for instruments designed to transform variable electrical current or
    potential into sound in combination with means to intensify the sound by
    mechanical means.  Note especially subclasses 153+ for such combinations
    having sound resonators as the intensifying means.  Also subclasses 193 and
    202+ for diaphragm and support means with electrical means to move the
    diaphragm.


CLS 181/145
TXT Subject matter under subclass 144 wherein the vibrated means are mounted in
    more than one enclosure or compartment.

    (1)     Note.  Each enclosure or compartment may contain plural speakers.


CLS 181/146
TXT Subject matter under subclass 144 including sound absorbent material
    associated therewith for preventing undesirable effects.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126,    for sound absorbing means and an enclosure.


CLS 181/147
TXT Subject matter under subclass 144 including at least three vibrated means
    per unit.


CLS 181/148
TXT Subject matter under the class definition having means that can be vibrated
    by sound waves or produce sound waves and means to support and means to at
    least partially contain the vibrated means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199,    for a speaker enclosure, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    381,    Electrical Audio Systems Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    150+ for instruments designed to transform variable electrical current or
    potential into sound in combination with means to intensify the sound by
    mechanical means. Note especially subclasses 153+ for such combinations
    having sound resonators as the intensifying means.  Also subclass 193 and
    202+ for diaphragm and support plus electrical means to move the diaphragm.


CLS 181/149
TXT Subject matter under subclass 148 wherein the means to enclose the
    diaphragm is waterproof or rain resistant.


CLS 181/150
TXT Subject matter under subclass 149 wherein the means to support the
    diaphragm is provided with means to facilitate mounting within or behind a
    surface wall or an exposed surface.


CLS 181/151
TXT Subject matter under subclass 148 including sound absorbent material within
    the means to enclose the diaphragm for preventing undesirable effects.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146,    for plural diaphragms and sound absorbing means.

    199,    for an enclosure with sound absorbing means.


CLS 181/152
TXT Subject matter under subclass 148 including a tube of varying sectional
    area associated with the diaphragm  for intensifying the sound waves
    produced therefrom.


CLS 181/153
TXT Subject matter under subclass 148 wherein the means to enclose the
    diaphragm has at least one surface that is circular or curved.


CLS 181/154
TXT Subject matter under subclass 148 wherein the means to support the
    diaphragm is mounted at an angle to both the horizontal and vertical axes
    of one side of the enclosure means.


CLS 181/155
TXT Subject matter under subclass 148 wherein the vibrated means is
    substantially enclosed and a portion of a radiation wave from in front of
    the vibrated means is deflected or modified.

    (1)     Note.  The enclosure has only openings for sound to be emitted.  An
    enclosure which has no top, back, or etc., will be found above.


CLS 181/156
TXT Subject matter under subclass 148 wherein the vibrated means is
    substantially enclosed and a portion of a radiation wave from the rear of
    the vibrated means is propagated forward after a shift or modification of
    the wave.

    (1)     Note.  The enclosure has only openings for sound to be emitted.  An
    enclosure which has no top, back or, etc., will be found above.

    (2)     Note.  A grille of cloth or other material that sound passes
    through is not considered a reflector for this subclass.


CLS 181/157
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including a vibratable partition
    which is designed to produce sound waves when driven.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144+,   for plural, independent diaphragms.

    148+,   for diaphragms included with an     enclosure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    193 and 202+ for diaphragm and electrical means to move the diaphragm.


CLS 181/158
TXT Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the diaphragm is designed
    specifically for use in a microphone.


CLS 181/159
TXT Subject matter under subclass 157 including a sound intensifying horn
    acoustically coupled to the diaphragm.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177+,   for sound intensifying horns, per se.


CLS 181/160
TXT Subject matter under subclass 157 including a compartment which is
    acoustically coupled to the diaphragm.

    (1)     Note.  The compartment will affect the quality, tone or loudness of
    the sound produced by the diaphragm.


CLS 181/161
TXT Subject matter under subclass 157 including a mechanical means which
    directly connects the diaphragm to a driver unit.


CLS 181/162
TXT Subject matter under subclass 161 wherein the driver unit is a needle or
    holder furnished with an abrasive-resistant tip.

    (1)     Note.  This is primarly a collection of old style phonograph
    pick-up heads which include a thin metallic diaphragm directly actuated by
    a stylus bar.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 157, 158, and
    160+ for this subject matter forming a portion of a phonograph sound box.


CLS 181/163
TXT Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein two or more diaphragms are driven
    by the same mechanism, or arranged so that the sound waves produced by one
    cause the other to vibrate.

    (1)     Note.  Each of the diaphragms must have at least a portion of its
    surface facing the surface of the other.

    (2)     Note.  The diaphragms are usually aligned on a common axis, and may
    be surrounded by walls to form an airtight compartment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144+,   for plural diaphragm sound sources which are independent from one
    another.

    165,    for a single diaphragm having more than one sound producing section.


CLS 181/164
TXT Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the diaphragm has areas of
    different material, shape or thickness which are united to form a
    vibratable partition.

    (1)     Note.  Only one independent driver unit may drive the diaphragm.
    When the different sections are driven independently of one another, they
    are considered plural, independent diaphragms and classified in subclasses
    144+.

    (2)     Note.  The different sections may have different natural periods of
    vibration and thus produce sound waves within different frequency ranges.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163,    for plural, dependent diaphragms.


CLS 181/165
TXT Subject matter under subclass 164 wherein the diaphragm has a central
    section which is attached to and surrounded by at least one concentric,
    annular portion.

    (1)     Note.  The outer, ring-like section is usually designed to vibrate
    within a lower frequency range than the center section, and often supports
    the center section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144+,   for diaphragms having sections which are independently driven, and
    therefore considered plural diaphragm sound sources.

    163,    for annular diaphragms which face another diaphragm and are driven
    by sound waves produced by it.


CLS 181/166
TXT Subject matter under subclass 157 including means to suppress or limit
    diaphragm vibrations.

    (1)     Note.  The damping means must be in addition to diaphragm
    structure, for example an air chamber, a travel limiter, or a special
    coating on the diaphragm.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174,    for diaphragms having portions of different thickness which might
    dampen vibrations.


CLS 181/167
TXT Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the diaphragm is constructed of
    specific material or the diaphragm is covered or saturated, at least in
    part, with extraneous material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166,    for diaphragm coatings specifically designed to dampen vibrations.


CLS 181/168
TXT Subject matter under subclass 167 wherein the material of which the
    diaphragm is made is metal.


CLS 181/169
TXT Subject matter under subclass 167 wherein the material of which the
    diaphragm is made consists of or includes fibers.


CLS 181/170
TXT Subject matter under subclass 167 comprising plural layers or surfaces,
    adhered or cohered to each other.


CLS 181/171
TXT Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein means are provided to hold the
    diaphragm in a given, neutral position.

    (1)     Note.  The mounting or suspension means may serve to shape or
    tension the diaphragm, or may be designed to permit the diaphragm to
    vibrate freely.


CLS 181/172
TXT Subject matter under subclass 171 wherein the means to hold the diaphragm
    is sufficiently flexible to permit the diaphragm to vibrate freely.


CLS 181/173
TXT Subject matter under subclass 157 characterized by the form or
    configuration of the diaphragm.


CLS 181/174
TXT Subject matter under subclass 173 wherein the thickness of the vibratable
    partition constituting the diaphragm varies across its surface.


CLS 181/175
TXT Subject matter under the class definition for (1) deviation of the
    direction of an acoustical wave, (2) blocking of an acoustical wave, or (3)
    the modification of the character or property of an acoustical wave.


CLS 181/176
TXT Subject matter under subclass 175 wherein a structure is placed in front of
    an acoustic wave device having an aperture which inserts a phase delay over
    the cross section of the aperture so as to effect a convergence or
    divergence of acoustic waves from the acoustic wave device.


CLS 181/177
TXT Subject matter under subclass 175 comprising a hollow member open at
    opposite ends and having a progressively increasing cross sectional area
    from one end to the other.  Sound is introduced at the smaller open end and
    emerges increased in loudness at the larger open end.

    (1)     Note.  A device which both increases the loudness of the sound and
    modifies the quality or tone of the sound is properly classified here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129,    for a sound intensifying horn which is designed to have contact
    with the human body.

    152,    for a horn and sound diaphragm in an enclosure.

    159,    for a horn and a sound producing diaphragm.


CLS 181/178
TXT Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein the horn includes means to effect
    a reduction in size from an operative condition to an inoperative
    condition, e.g., telescopes or folds.


CLS 181/179
TXT Subject matter under subclass 177 including means for connecting the sound
    intensifying horn to a support.

    (1)     Note.  The connecting means must be emphasized, and not merely
    incidental.

    (2)     Note.  Structure which connects one portion of a horn to another
    portion of a horn is not considered mounting structure.


CLS 181/180
TXT Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein the horn is constructed of a
    specific material or materials.


CLS 181/181
TXT Subject matter under subclass 177 including thin wires which are attached
    to the sound intensifying horn.

    (1)     Note.  The thin wires affect the quality or tone of the sound
    through vibration.


CLS 181/182
TXT Subject matter under subclass 177 including a compartment exterior to the
    basic horn shape, but in communication with the horn via a sound passage or
    a vibrating portion of the horn wall.

    (1)     Note.  The compartment does not necessarily intensify the sound but
    does affect the quality or tone of the sound coming from or passing through
    the horn.


CLS 181/183
TXT Subject matter under subclass 182 wherein the resonant chamber lies between
    at least part of a side of the horn and a second structure substantially
    parallel to that part of the horn.


CLS 181/184
TXT Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein the horn has sides which are
    provided with openings.

    (1)     Note.  The openings may take any shape and be covered by sound
    transmitting material.

    (2)     Note.  The presence of the openings is designed to affect the
    quality or tone of the sound coming from or passing through the
    intensifying horn.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182+,   for horns having apertured walls which communicate with resonant
    chambers.


CLS 181/185
TXT Subject matter under subclass 177 including structure within the horn which
    constitutes an obstruction to the sound waves.

    (1)     Note.  The restriction can be an object placed within the horn or a
    pinch in the horn walls which generally affects the quality or tone of the
    sound in addition to decreasing the loudness by partially blocking the
    expected sound path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    187+,   for structure which merely divides the horn into plural
    intensifying portions.

    191,    for external sound deflectors.

    196+,   for similar structure located within a sound conveying tube.


CLS 181/186
TXT Subject matter under subclass 185 wherein the structure can be altered or
    moved within the horn.

    (1)     Note.  Such adjustment generally affects the loudness of the sound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    197,    for similar structure within a sound conducting tube.


CLS 181/187
TXT Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein the sound intensifying horn
    comprises more than one section having an increasing cross-sectional area
    in the direction of travel of the sound.

    (1)     Note.  The sections may range in type from divisions within one
    horn to independent horns bundled together.


CLS 181/188
TXT Subject matter under subclass 187 wherein the plural intensifying portions
    have substantially the same shape or are mirror images of one another.


CLS 181/189
TXT Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein the structure forming the sound
    intensifying horn comprises two or more units attached together.  Each unit
    must include part of a given sound path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    187,    for intensifying sections providing plural sound paths.


CLS 181/190
TXT Subject matter under subclass 189 wherein means are provided which permit
    the units to be detached from each other.


CLS 181/191
TXT Subject matter under subclass 177 including means for changing the
    direction of the sound after it has left the horn.


CLS 181/192
TXT Subject matter under subclass 177 characterized by the form or
    configuration of a wall of the horn.


CLS 181/193
TXT Subject matter under subclass 192 wherein the wall of the horn is arranged
    to provide a spiral sound path.


CLS 181/194
TXT Subject matter under subclass 192 wherein the wall of the horn is arranged
    to provide a sound path which changes direction by substantially 180
    degrees at least twice.

    (1)     Note.  Such arrangements are also called "reflex type" or
    "internally reversed".


CLS 181/195
TXT Subject matter under subclass 192 wherein the horn has a mouth from which
    sound emanates and has at least a quarter circle silhouette when viewed
    from one of its sides.


CLS 181/196
TXT Subject matter under subclass 175 wherein a mechanical restriction or valve
    is located within a sound conducting tubular member.

    (1)     Note.  The structure generally affects the loudness of the sound
    and/or its quality or tone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185+,   for similar structure within a sound intensifying horn.


CLS 181/197
TXT Subject matter under subclass 196 wherein the sound modifying structure can
    be altered or moved within the tubular member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186,    for similar structure within a sound intensifying horn.


CLS 181/198
TXT Subject matter under subclass 175 comprising means to at least partially
    contain an acoustical device.


CLS 181/199
TXT Subject matter under subclass 198 wherein the enclosure is for a
    loudspeaker.


CLS 181/200
TXT Machine type enclosure:

    Subject matter under subclass 198 wherein the enclosure is specially
    designed to confine an acoustic wave emitting device, which device does not
    form an element of this class type or is not claimed in combination with
    the subject matter of another class.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this class type in combination with or
    forming an element of an art device is with the appropriate art.

    (2)     Note.  See the Index to Classification: "Anti-Noise", "Deadeners"
    and "Mufflers".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 35 for mounts and housings for
    motion picture apparatus with acoustical damping of the sound originating
    in the motion picture apparatus.


CLS 181/201
TXT Office type devices (e.g., typewriters, teleprinters, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the enclosure is for machines
    normally used and found in a business type office.


CLS 181/202
TXT Electrical type devices (e.g., transformers, motors, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the enclosure is for electrical
    apparatus.


CLS 181/203
TXT Reaction engine test chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein a reaction-type engine is
    completely enclosed while undergoing a testing operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217     and 218, for similar devices, but which do not enclose the
    acoustical device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 200.1+ for reaction engines of this
    subclass type, per se.


CLS 181/204
TXT Internal-combustion engine:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the type of machine enclosure is
    for internal-combustion engines, e.g., automobiles, tractors, lawnmowers,
    etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, for engines of this subclass type, per
    se, and in combination with subject matter similar to that of this class
    (181), note especially subclass 198.


CLS 181/205
TXT Partial enclosure or shroud:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein only certain parts of a machine
    are enclosed, or the enclosure partially covers the device.


CLS 181/206
TXT By wave interference:

    Subject matter under subclass 175 wherein the means for modifying the sound
    includes modulating the sound by interacting or introducing an additional
    higher or lower frequency to the sound source, the resulting sound being at
    a different frequency.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 165+ for
    electrical wave filters, and particularly subclasses 186+ for electric wave
    filters of the electromechanical transducer type, and subclass 81 for
    electrical attenuators.


CLS 181/207
TXT Mechanical vibration attenuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 175 comprising sound deadening material
    physically or mechanically attached or installed on the acoustical device,
    or an element thereof to prevent vibratory noise usual to the operation of
    the device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuruing and Testing, subclasses 514.12+ for fluid or fluent
    material dampening of an inertial member in an acceleration measuring
    apparatus and subclass 514.14 for vibration dampening in an inertial-type
    acceleration measuring apparatus.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 452 for sound deadeners limited
    thereto.

    248,    Supports, particularly the subclasses pertaining to resilient or
    vibration dampening supports for those which dampen sound.

    295,    Railway Wheels and Axles, subclass 7 for railway wheels having
    sound deadeners.


CLS 181/208
TXT Damping of flexural structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 207 wherein the sound deadening material is
    applied to vibratile structure or other bending surfaces to dampen the
    sound.


CLS 181/209
TXT Relatively moving parts:

    Subject matter under subclass 207 wherein the device has at least two parts
    moving with respect to one another.


CLS 181/210
TXT Sound absorbing fence or screen (e.g., jet engine or vehicle noise):

    Subject matter under subclass 175 comprising physical barriers which
    absorb, direct, and/or block sound waves from acoustical devices.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type includes, for example,
    sound absorbing fences erected along runways at airports and along highways.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 114 for blast deflector fences arranged
    adjacent to runways.


CLS 181/211
TXT Combined:

    Subject matter under subclass 175 not provided for above comprising some
    acoustical device or other device having a function other than sound
    modifying or sound muffling combined with or in addition to sound modifying
    or sound muffling means.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter claimed in combination with or forming an
    element of an "Art Device" are with the appropriate art.


CLS 181/212
TXT Muffler, fluid conducting type:

    Subject matter under subclass 175 for conducting or guiding moving liquids
    or gases, and acting on such moving liquids or gases to attenuate acoustic
    waves therein, i.e., "mufflers".

    (1)     Note.  Such devices in combination with or forming an element of an
    art device are with the appropriate art.

    (2)     Note.  See the Index to Classification: "Anti-Noise", "Deadeners"
    and "Mufflers".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 272+ and 685+ for combinations of engines
    or motors with means for treating the exhaust fluids.

    137,    Fluid Handling, appropriate subclasses for fluid handling devices
    not otherwise provided for.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclasses 26+ and 37+ for related structure.


CLS 181/213
TXT Reaction engine type:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 comprising fluid conducting device which
    muffles or dampens noise emanating from a reaction type engine.

    (1)     Note.  In the subject matter of this subclass type, the engine is
    usually shrouded and the muffling means are generally along the shroud.

    (2)     Note.  For recited combinations of reaction engines and muffling
    means, see the reference to Class 60, Power Plants, in the Search Note
    below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, for reaction engines, per se, and subclasses 272+ and
    685+ for combinations of engines or motors with means for treating the
    exhaust fluids.


CLS 181/214
TXT Upstream (e.g., intake silencer):

    Subject matter under subclass 213 wherein the attenuating device is at the
    air intake side of the engine shroud.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229,    for internal-combustion engines having attenuating devices for the
    carburetor air intake.


CLS 181/215
TXT With adjustable outlet nozzle:

    Subject matter under subclass 213 wherein the shroud is comprised of
    adjustable tail end sections and the position of the shroud end sections
    determine the degree of attenuation.


CLS 181/216
TXT Longitudinally adjustable section:

    Subject matter under subclass 215 wherein the tail end sections are
    adjustable longitudinally of the shroud in the downstream direction.


CLS 181/217
TXT Removable silencer unit (e.g., mobile):
    Subject matter under subclass 213 wherein the fluid conducting device can
    be attached to and detached from the exhaust end of the jet engine exhaust
    nozzle.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type, because of its size,
    is usually mounted on wheels or other means for mobility.


CLS 181/218
TXT Ground installation silencer:

    Subject matter under subclass 213 wherein the fluid conducting device is a
    fixed structure with an opening to receive the tail end of a jet engine
    exhaust nozzle.

    (1)     Note.  The jet engine is usually brought to the site of the
    structure. The structure may also be provided with multiple receiving
    stations.


CLS 181/219
TXT With adjustable internal baffles:

    Subject matter under subclass 213 wherein the jet engine shroud comprises a
    series of repositionable barriers spaced along the internal surface of the
    shroud.


CLS 181/220
TXT With disparate fluid mingling:

    Subject matter under subclass 213 in which a fluid is introduced into and
    mingled with the moving fluids to assist in muffling, as by dilution or
    condensing the moving fluids.

    (1)     Note.  Chemical treatments of exhaust gases are not in this class.
    See Class 23, for chemical treatment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259+,   for mufflers having fluids mixed with the exhaust for muffling the
    sound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 272+ and 685+ for combinations of engines
    with means for treating exhaust.


CLS 181/221
TXT Liquid:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 in which the added fluid is a liquid,
    usually water.


CLS 181/222
TXT With sound absorbing material:

    Subject matter under subclass 213 comprising sound absorbing material
    positioned in the shroud to be contacted by the exhaust gases, as by
    surrounding or being positioned adjacent to and communicating with the
    exhaust gases.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248,    252 and 256+, for similar sound absorbing devices with sound
    absorbing material.


CLS 181/223
TXT Silencer for firearms:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 comprising silencer muffler which
    attenuates explosive sounds generated by small firearms and which have a
    straight-through passage for the projectile and silencing chambers for the
    explosive exhaust.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    89,     Ordnance, subclasses 31 and 42.01 and indented subclasses for
    recoil checks, flames arrestors, etc., which inherently muffle.


CLS 181/224
TXT Sound absorbing ventilating duct or curb (e.g., A/C, heat, air flow type):

    Subject matter under subclass 212 comprising ducts or conduits for the
    movement of streams of air therethrough.

    (1)     Note.  The ducts of this subclass type are usually lined with sound
    absorbing material or other sound absorbing structure for attenuating the
    sound waves of moving air.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    454,    Ventilation, subclass 262 for an air mixing building inlet airway
    having specific noise prohibiting structure; cross-reference art collection
    906 for ventilating means, in general, including specific noise prohibiting
    structure; and subclasses 329, 338, and 341+ for inlet or outlet air pumps
    which forcefully admit or exhaust air from the stationary structure of a
    building.


CLS 181/225
TXT With fan to assist fluid flow:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 wherein there is provided rotating fan
    means to assist in the movement of fluid through the sound modifying means.

    (1)     Note.  The fan of this subclass type may be operated by the force
    of the moving fluid or may be operated by some other mechanical means.


CLS 181/226
TXT With adjustable fluid flow:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 wherein there is provided some means for
    varying the fluid flow while attenuating and diffusing the sounds normally
    produced by moving fluids.


CLS 181/227
TXT Pipe-muffler (e.g., tail pipe type):

    Subject matter under subclass 212 wherein the fluid conducting device is
    comprised of a conduit with sound attenuating chambers along the length
    thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type is generally referred
    to as a tail pipe, and is usually connected to a muffler which is not
    claimed as part of the system.


CLS 181/228
TXT With exhaust pipe:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 comprising an attenuating fluid
    conducting device in combination with an additional pipe (i.e., exhaust
    pipe) connected to the exhaust outlet of the attenuating device.


CLS 181/229
TXT Carburetor, burner, or compressor intake silencer:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 wherein the fluid conducting attenuating
    device is mounted on a carburetor (air intake) of an internal-combustion
    engine.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type includes, for example,
    devices designed for attenuating air intake noise for gasoline engines,
    compressors, and burners.

    (2)     Note.  For structure claimed in combination with the silencer and
    which goes beyond the scope of this class, such as specific motor
    structure, or specific art device, search the appropriate art classes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    214,    for air intake silencers for jet or reaction engines.


CLS 181/230
TXT Pneumatic type motor (e.g., air hammer, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 212 wherein the fluid conducting attenuating
    device is mounted on the exhaust end of a compressed air or vacuum actuated
    motor (i.e., air hammer, tool, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Structure claimed in combination with the silencer and which
    goes beyond the scope of the class is classified with the art device.  For
    example, the combination of an impact tool plus a muffler for the tool is
    classified with the impact tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclass 276 for sound attenuation of gases flowing
    through the system.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, appropriate subclasses for pneumatic
    tools, and specifically Digest 2 for sound muffling.

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, subclass 119 for sound or
    vibratory wave absorbing or preventing means.


CLS 181/231
TXT With solid particle separator (e.g., spark arrestor, vacuum cleaner, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 212 wherein there is provided additional
    means which at the same time remove from the moving fluids (exhaust) all
    entrained dirt particles, sparks, and the like.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclass 276 for gas separators (not mere
    arrestors) with sound damping or acoustical means.


CLS 181/232
TXT Separate distinct units serially connected:
    Subject matter under subclass 212 provided with a plurality of sound
    attenuating devices, each either of duplicate or different design and
    connected one after the other in the down-stream direction.


CLS 181/233
TXT Liquid motion silencer:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 wherein the fluid conducting attenuating
    device suppresses the transmission of sound waves or similar vibrations
    (fluid impluses) along pipes and conduits carrying fluids.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227,    for pipe mufflers for handling exhaust gases.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclasses 26+ and 37+ for related structure.


CLS 181/234
TXT Water-closet type:

    Subject matter under subclass 233 in which the fluid conductor is part of a
    fluid supply leading to or part of a water closet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, appropriate subclasses for
    water closets, per se.


CLS 181/235
TXT Underwater discharge:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 wherein the fluid is ejected under water.


CLS 181/236
TXT With muffler cut-out:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 comprising a valve device which can be
    utilized for diverting the moving fluid away from the fluid conducting
    attenuating device which performs the muffling operation.


CLS 181/237
TXT With pressure relief safety valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 wherein there is provided a valve
    responsive to relieve excess pressure to the atmosphere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 455+ for valves responsive to change in
    line condition.


CLS 181/238
TXT Multiple distinct inlets and/or outlets:
    Subject matter under subclass 212 wherein the moving fluid is introduced in
    the muffler via at least two inlets or expelled through at least two
    outlets.


CLS 181/239
TXT Outlets:

    Subject matter under subclass 238 comprising a plurality of fluid outlets
    or discharge ports.


CLS 181/240
TXT Manifold type:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 for collecting and conducting the fluids
    from single or multiple cylinders into a single exhaust pipe.


CLS 181/241
TXT Adjustable muffler (i.e., internal or external parts):

    Subject matter under subclass 212 wherein two or more of the internal parts
    of external casing sections can be repositioned relative to each other to
    change the size of the muffler.


CLS 181/242
TXT Mouthpieces (e.g., telephone, microphone, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 212 comprising devices constructed to be
    spoken into.

    (1)     Note.  Only such parts of the device necessary to establish the
    environment are included in this subclass.  For devices such as
    microphones, telephones, etc., per se, search the appropriate art.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 437+ for such devices in
    combination with telephones.


CLS 181/243
TXT With repair, replacement, or quick disassembly:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 having means to facilitate the repair of
    damaged parts or elements of the muffling device.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type includes, for example,
    muffling devices which can be disassembled with minimum mechanical
    manipulations.


CLS 181/244
TXT Corrosion prevention:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 comprising means for preventing chemical
    erosion of the material of which the device is made.


CLS 181/245
TXT Internally coated parts:

    Subject matter under subclass 244 wherein at least some of the fluid
    contacting surfaces of the conducting devices are coated so as to prevent
    corrosion.


CLS 181/246
TXT Nonmetallic:

    Subject matter under subclass 244 wherein the fluid conducting device is
    constructed of organic materials.


CLS 181/247
TXT Straight-through passage:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 wherein the fluid is conducted through a
    fluid conducting device having a linear, unobstructed passage at least the
    same size from the inlet to the outlet.


CLS 181/248
TXT Continuous conduit:

    Subject matter under subclass 247 wherein the passage is comprised of a
    continuous uninterrupted conduit from its inlet to the outlet.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type may have sound
    absorbing material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222,    252 and 256, for similar sound absorbing devices with sound
    absorbing material.


CLS 181/249
TXT With expansion chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 248 having enlarged chambers intermediate the
    length of the through passage.


CLS 181/250
TXT And side branch:

    Subject matter under subclass 249 having cushion, acoustic filter, or
    resonator chambers in communication with the through passage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266,    273 and 276, for similar devices with side branch chamber.


CLS 181/251
TXT And multipassage:

    Subject matter under subclass 249 having a plurality of through passages
    between which the moving fluid is divided.


CLS 181/252
TXT With sound absorbing material:

    Subject matter under subclass 247 having acoustic wave attenuating material
    positioned within the fluid conducting device to be contacted by the
    exhaust fluid as by surrounding the through passage or being positioned
    adjacent to and communicating with the exhaust fluids.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222,    248 and 256, for similar sound absorbing devices having sound
    absorbing material.


CLS 181/253
TXT With muffler bypass:

    Subject matter under subclass 247 having one or more passages, which
    performs a muffling function, which bypass the whole or part of the through
    passage.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type includes, for example,
    devices in which the bypassed fluid is returned out of phase with the fluid
    in the through passage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236,    in which the fluids are diverted from the muffler and are not
    muffled.

    268,    for devices which have a plurality of through passages connected in
    parallel.


CLS 181/254
TXT Valve controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 253 having means to vary the rate of fluid
    flow in either the through or the bypass passage.


CLS 181/255
TXT Expansion chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 247 having enlarged chambers intermediate the
    length of the through passage.


CLS 181/256
TXT With Sound absorbing material:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 having acoustic wave attenuating material
    positioned to be contacted by the moving fluid, as by surrounding or being
    positioned adjacent to and communicating with the fluid passage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222,    for jet engine muffler devices having sound absorbing material.

    247,    for straight-through continuous passage mufflers having sound
    absorbing material.

    252,    for through passage mufflers with sound absorbing material.


CLS 181/257
TXT And multipassage:

    Subject matter under subclass 256 having a plurality of passages between
    which the moving fluid is divided.


CLS 181/258
TXT Pervious material interposed in flow path: Subject matter under subclass
    256 wherein the sound absorbing material is directly in the flow path of
    the moving fluid, and the fluid must pass through the material to its exit.


CLS 181/259
TXT With disparate fluid mingling:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 in which a fluid is introduced into and
    mingled with the moving fluids to assist in muffling, as by diluting and
    condensing the moving fluids.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220+,   for similar devices in jet engines.


CLS 181/260
TXT Liquid:

    Subject matter under subclass 259 in which the added fluid is a liquid,
    usually water.


CLS 181/261
TXT Sprayed:

    Subject matter under subclass 260 in which the liquid is injected into the
    main stream of exhaust by some diffusing means.


CLS 181/262
TXT Induced by suction:

    Subject matter under subclass 259 wherein the device is provided with
    openings for admitting the fluid through said opening as a result of a
    vacuum created by the moving exhaust fluids.


CLS 181/263
TXT Motion induced:

    Subject matter under subclass 262 wherein the motion of the device on which
    the muffler is installed creates a vacuum by scooping a fluid as the device
    moves.


CLS 181/264
TXT With baffle or baffle structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 in which barriers or partitions cause the
    fluids to travel in a tortuous path.


CLS 181/265
TXT Retroverted:

    Subject matter under subclass 264 having a plurality of serially connected
    fluid passages substantially parallel to the inlet, the direction of flow
    of the fluid being reversed as it travels through each successive passage.


CLS 181/266
TXT And side branch chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 265 having cushion, acoustic filter, or
    resonator chambers in communication with the fluid passage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250     and 273, for similar devices with side branch chambers.


CLS 181/267
TXT Coaxial foraminous walls:

    Subject matter under subclass 264 in which are provided a plurality of
    coaxial cylindrical chambers having fluid pervious walls through which the
    fluid flows in a radial direction into the atmosphere.


CLS 181/268
TXT Multipassage:

    Subject matter under subclass 264 having a plurality of passages between
    which the moving fluid is divided.


CLS 181/269
TXT Expansion chamber type:

    Subject matter under subclass 264 having an enlarged chamber intermediate
    the length of the fluid passage.


CLS 181/270
TXT With alternating partial baffles along the length of casing:

    Subject matter under subclass 269 wherein there is a plurality of partial
    barriers alternately spaced along the length of the muffler casing.


CLS 181/271
TXT With adjustable or flexible wall:

    Subject matter under subclass 269 wherein at least one of the partitions
    defining the chamber is repositionable with respect to another.


CLS 181/272
TXT Plural chambers:

    Subject matter under subclass 269 having more than one expansion chamber.


CLS 181/273
TXT And side branch chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 269 having cushion, acoustic filter, or
    resonator chambers in communication with the fluid passages.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250,    266 and 276, for similar devices with side branch chambers.


CLS 181/274
TXT With centrifugal flow:

    Subject matter under subclass 269 in which the inlet to the expansion
    chamber and the baffles are in such direction as to impel the fluid into a
    circular flow.


CLS 181/275
TXT And multipassage:

    Subject matter under subclass 269 having a plurality of passages between
    which the moving fluid is divided.


CLS 181/276
TXT Side branch:

    Subject matter under subclass 264 having cushion, acoustic filter, or
    resonator chambers in communication with the fluid passages.


CLS 181/277
TXT Movable baffle:

    Subject matter under subclass 264 having baffles constantly in motion, and
    driven either under the force of the moving fluid or by some external means.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type includes, for example,
    baffles which form rotating vanes.


CLS 181/278
TXT Biased:

    Subject matter under subclass 277 having means tending to force the moving
    baffle toward a position to restrict flow of fluid.


CLS 181/279
TXT Spiral:

    Subject matter under subclass 264 in which the baffles are arranged to
    guide the moving fluid through an axially or radially expanding, circular
    path.


CLS 181/280
TXT Helical:

    Subject matter under subclass 279 in which the circular path is axially
    expanding.


CLS 181/281
TXT Perpendicular and/or oblique:

    Subject matter under subclass 264 having baffles angularly disposed
    relative to the axis of the flow passage, i.e., not parallel to the axis.


CLS 181/282
TXT Casings:

    Subject matter under subclass 264 comprising the jacket or housing
    structure of the fluid handling device wherein the jacket or housing
    structure is more than nominally recited.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 52, 154, or 157 for casings with a
    surrounding jacket to form a space for circulating cooling fluids.


CLS 181/283
TXT Air or liquid cooled:

    Subject matter under subclass 282 having a chamber or other structure for
    providing a cooling fluid to lower the temperature of the moving exhaust
    fluids.


CLS 181/284
TXT Sound absorbing panels:

    Subject matter under subclass 175 comprising planar-type structure for
    attenuating acoustic waves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 144+ for a
    combination of units having an exposed surface configuration having an
    acoustical function, or a unit with a feature for such a combination.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, for a product or stock
    material.


CLS 181/285
TXT Load bearing block type structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 284 comprising sound attenuating structural
    elements or units, e.g., blocks, sufficiently strong or rigid to support a
    load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 144+ for a
    combination of units having an exposed surface configuration having an
    acoustical function, or a unit with a feature for such a combination.


CLS 181/286
TXT Specific acoustical properties or dimensions:

    Subject matter under subclass 284 whose composition, size or shape is
    related to a particular type of acoustic wave attenuation, e.g., insertion
    loss, transmission loss, or specific acoustic structure (Helmholtz
    resonator, 1/4 wavelength chamber depth).


CLS 181/287
TXT Movable/foldable panels:

    Subject matter under subclass 284 specifically designed to be flexible,
    hinged, or portable.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type includes, for example,
    curtain or drape-like products.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, appropriate subclass for such
    devices.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, appropriate
    subclass for such devices.


CLS 181/288
TXT Cellular:

    Subject matter under subclass 284 comprising either discrete elements
    (e.g., tubular constituents) or components which form, or cooperate to
    form, cavities the longitudinal axis of which are at an angle to the plane
    of the major face of the product.

    (1)     Note.  Multilayer products having one layer formed as a
    honeycomb-like or cellular layer are found in this class, subclasses 290+.


CLS 181/289
TXT Light permeable:

    Subject matter under subclass 284 which is translucent or transparent to
    visible radiation.


CLS 181/290
TXT Multilayer panel or wall structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 284 comprising more than one layer of sound
    attenuating material.


CLS 181/291
TXT With membrane outer layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 290 having a front or rear facing formed as a
    coating, foil, or film.


CLS 181/292
TXT With perforated or porous face and honeycomb-like core:

    Subject matter under subclass 290 having at least one porous or perforated
    layer and at least one honeycomb-like layer.

    (1)     Note.  Typically, such products are used as reaction engine duct
    liners.


CLS 181/293
TXT With channels or cavities in surface layer: Subject matter under subclass
    284 wherein the outer face is formed with channels or cavities.


CLS 181/294
TXT Materials:

    Subject matter under subclass 284 characterized by the particular sound
    absorbing material used to form the product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, for such compositions which have
    sound deadening properties.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 62 for heat or sound insulating compositions.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 411.1+ for
    laminate characterized by compositions of laminas.


CLS 181/295
TXT Space absorber:

    Subject matter under subclass 175 comprising structures of sound absorbing
    material for absorbing acoustic energy in rooms or similar chambers within
    which the structure is enclosed.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type, for example, is
    usually formed as a hollow box and suspended from a wall or ceiling or used
    in anechoic chambers.


CLS 181/296
TXT Methods:

    Subject matter under subclass 175 comprising methods of attenuating sound.

    (1)     Note.  Methods of this subclass type may attenuate the entire sound
    or selected frequencies thereof.

    (2)     Note.  Patents claiming both a method of attenuating sound and a
    product or apparatus for attenuating sound are placed above in the
    appropriate subclass and cross-referenced here.

    (3)     Note.  Methods of making a sound attenuating product or apparatus
    are found in the various manufacturing classes involved.

     CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS

            The following subclasses are collections of published disclosures
    pertaining to various specified aspects of the acoustic art which aspects
    do not form appropriate bases for subclasses in the foregoing
    classification (i.e., subclasses superior hereto in the schedule), wherein
    original copies of patents are placed on the basis of proximate function of
    the apparatus.  These subclasses assist a search based on remote function
    of the apparatus and may be of further assistance to the searcher, either
    as a starting point in further related fields of search inside or outside
    the class.  Thus, there is here provided a second access for retrieval of a
    limited number of types of disclosure.

    (1)     Note.  Disclosures are placed in these subclasses for their value
    as references and as leads to appropriate main or secondary fields of
    search, without regard to their original classification of their claimed
    subject matter.

    (2)     Note.  The disclosures found in the following subclasses are
    examples, only of the indicated subject matter, and in no instance do they
    represent the entire extent of the prior art.

    (3)     Note.  Original copies of patents are not placed in the following
    subclasses.


CLS 181/400
TXT Elements or material for transforming sound wave energy from high to low
    pressure and vice versa.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are means to transmit sound waves from one
    medium to another medium with minimum reflection, deviation or absorption
    wherein the means acts as a mechanical impedance matching means.  The
    impedance matching may be a function of the material or may be due to the
    shape or configuration of an element such as a horn shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175+,   for material or elements for attenuating sound waves.


CLS 181/401
TXT Elements or material under subclass 400 wherein one of the media is the
    earth.


CLS 181/402
TXT Elements or material under subclass 400 wherein one of the media is a
    liquid.


CLS 181/403
TXT REFRIGERATOR COMPRESSOR MUF-FLER:

    Disclosures of sound attenuating mufflers for refrigerator compressors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclass 312 for pumps with mufflers acting on the pumped
    fluid.


CLS 181/404
TXT HOBBY CRAFT ENGINE MUFFLER:

    Disclosures of toy engines or hobby craft-type engines with sound
    attenuating mufflers.


CLS 182/
TTL FIRE ESCAPE, LADDER, OR  SCAFFOLD

CLS 182/
TXT This class includes (1) structures supported in spaced relation to the
    earth's surface for supporting a workman adjacent a structure being worked
    on, (2) means for climbing comprising a stile having steps or rungs, (3)
    means ancillary to normal egress means to traverse a vertical distance to
    facilitate quick escape from a structure in case of emergency not elsewhere
    provided for and (4) torso harness, for rescue or escape operations, with
    or without a tether anchored to the work or to a worker's support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    14,     Bridges, subclasses 69.5 to 72.5  for a gangway for supporting a
    person or material between ordinarily disassociated bases.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclass for a
    tower, mast or other structurally similar building structure including a
    building construction forming or combined with a stair or ladder, a helical
    stair or a stair with a riser.  This class (182) takes a tower with a
    platform which supports a person.

    104,    Railways, appropriate subclasses for a track mounted vehicle of
    general utility.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 437+ for vehicle steps with a
    gate, and subclasses 443+ for permanent vehicle steps requiring
    installation at the time the railway car is manufactured or requiring
    modification of the car, and for an auxiliary step in combination with and
    requiring specific coaction with said permanent steps or the side supports
    therefor, e.g., an extension or auxiliary step for a staircase on a railway
    car operated therefrom.  Class 182 takes auxiliary steps external and
    independent of a railway car, and an auxiliary step simply supported by
    merely "a step".

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 144+ for a
    vertically adjustable horizontally supported planar surface, and subclasses
    115+ for folding horizontally supported planar surface, especially
    subclasses 116+ for such surfaces which are vertically adjustable.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 712+ and 856+ for body harness useful
    for both lower animals and human beings.  See the search notes thereunder.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 342 for a workman's support ancillary to a
    fluid handling system.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, subclass 24 for a pumping apparatus on a fire
    truck and subclass 25 for a portable discharge pipe with means for
    elevating and controlling a fire-hose nozzle.  This class (182) takes
    similar structure wherein the truck supports a ladder in operative position
    or wherein the nozzle support is a ladder structure.

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    appropriate subclasses for personnel lift structure of general application.
     This class (182) takes the combination of a scaffold or ladder and such an
    elevator.

    188,    Brakes, subclass 65.1 for strand brakes of general utility.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses for a conveyor
    having general utility.

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclasses 71+ and 312+ for traveling cranes of
    general application; and subclasses 223+ for a hoist having a horizontally
    swingable boom.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 147 for aircraft structure relating to
    passenger and cargo loading and discharge, and subclasses 138+ for a safety
    lowering device, especially subclasses 142+ for a parachute.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 210+ for a bracket peculiar to a ladder,
    subclasses 235+ for a scaffold type bracket, subclasses 317+ for a
    suspended support of general utility and subclasses 351+ for a wall-board
    prop.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 151+ for a cable drum of fire-escape type and subclasses 167+
    for suspended cable drums of general utility.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 4 for a vehicle with a ladder rack,
    subclasses 32.5+ for a vehicle having a workman's support adjacent the
    ground, and subclasses 163+ for steps requiring vehicle modification.  This
    class (182) takes mere wheels on a ladder and takes a ladder mounted on a
    vehicle wherein the mounting supports the ladder in its operative position.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for joints of
    general utility and particularly subclass 49 for laterally related members
    connected by latch means.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 10+ for a lifting device
    for use in fastening sheet material to an overhead member or surface; e.g.,
    to a ceiling where there is manipulation of the sheet; subclass 560 for a
    traversing hoist with diverse material handling means; subclasses 685+ for
    a vertically and horizontally swinging load support of general application,
    and subclass 507 for a self-loading or unloading vehicle having a load
    handling means in the nature of a conveyor and provided with means for
    supporting a person in working relationship to the conveyor.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 49+ for a toy parachute.


CLS 182/1
TXT Device under the class definition comprising steps pivoted with respect to
    horizontally pivoted ladder stile structure, the device being provided with
    means maintaining the step level during pivotal movement of the stile
    structure.


CLS 182/2.1
TXT MEANS MAINTAINING PLATFORM LEVEL ON ANGULARLY MOVABLE SUPPORT:

    Device under the class definition comprising a work station (e.g., bucket,
    cage, seat, etc.) intended to pivot about an axis generally parallel with
    the ground or support thereunder, with means to hold the work station in a
    level position regardless of the angle of inclination of the movable
    support relative to the ground.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 111+ for a
    mechanism operated or relatively movable shaft assembly; e.g., a tilting
    skeleton tower, per se.


CLS 182/2.11
TXT Telescopic support:

    Device under subclass 2.3 comprising a linearly extensible and retractible
    boom which is relatively movable to increase or decrease its end-to-end
    length to raise or lower the work platform.


CLS 182/2.2
TXT Adjustable to plural operating positions:

    Device under subclass 2.1 wherein the orientation of the platform is
    changable from one orientation to another.


CLS 182/2.3
TXT Swingable support:

    Device under subclass 2.1 comprising a boom section pivotally connected at
    its lower end to a supporting base for pivotal movement in a vertical plane.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclasses 255+ for a traversing derrick having
    a vertically swinging hoist frame.

    414,    Material or Artical Handling, subclasses 706+ for vertically
    swinging load supports of the tilting shovel or fork type having means to
    maintain the shovel or fork level during the swinging.


CLS 182/2.4
TXT Of dielectric material:

    Device under subclass 2.3 comprising a structural component which is
    constructed of electrically nonconducting material (e.g., glass fiber,
    plastic, resin, etc.) to prevent short circuiting from the electrical wire
    to the ground.


CLS 182/2.5
TXT Ladder associated:

    Device under subclass 2.3 wherein the boom section is provided with two
    long, structural members crossed by parallel rungs, used to climb or
    descend.


CLS 182/2.6
TXT Providing access to underside of elevated surface:

    Device under subclass 2.3 comprising a supporting base located on top of an
    elevated structure (e.g., bridge, elevated roadway, etc.) with a first boom
    section extending downwardly and over the side of the elevated structure,
    and a second boom section attached to the end of the first swinging into a
    position so it extends back under the elevated structure whereby an
    individual located on the platform may obtain easy access to the
    structure's under surface.


CLS 182/2.7
TXT Parallelogram linkage:

    Device under subclass 2.3 wherein the swingable support comprises a
    parallel motion linkage which has a pair of substantially parallel lifting
    arms.


CLS 182/2.8
TXT Foldable hinged support:

    Device under subclass 2.3 wherein the swingable support comprises at least
    two boom sections which are pivotally interconnected and folded one on the
    other in their inoperative positions.


CLS 182/2.9
TXT Hydraulically operated:

    Device under subclass 2.8 comprising a telescopic cylinder and piston rod
    form of hydraulic lift to pivot the boom section.


CLS 182/3
TXT Device under class definition with means closely encircling a person's
    torso like a harness.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189,    for a mere seat or foot loop on a strand type escape.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    54,     Harness, subclass 134 for body restraints.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 712+ for a harness for controlling or
    handling an animal, and subclasses 856+ for a body- or appendage-encircling
    collar or band.

    128,    Surgery, subclass 134 for a body restraint.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 464+ and especially subclasses 468+
    for flexible bands engaging the body of a seated person.


CLS 182/4
TXT Device under subclass 3 having anchoring means associated with a window.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., particularly subclasses 455+ and
    572+ for a clasp.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 37 for a safety belt
    hook attached at or near a window frame.


CLS 182/5
TXT Device under subclass 3 with means to control descent, along a strand, of a
    person supported by the encircling means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for a supple escape having other means to support a person thereon
    with occupant of said means controlling a descent retarder.


CLS 182/6
TXT Device under subclass 5 including loop means for encircling a leg or foot
    of the person.


CLS 182/7
TXT Device under subclass 5 including means providing a seat for the supported
    person.


CLS 182/8
TXT Device under subclass 3 wherein there is provided means connecting the
    torso encircling means with a ladder.


CLS 182/9
TXT Device under subclass 3 wherein there is provided means for encircling or
    grasping a pole, tree or the like.


CLS 182/10
TXT Device under the class definition comprising a personnel carrier, e.g., a
    seat, cage, platform, supported on an inclined cable for movement there
    along.


CLS 182/11
TXT Device under subclass 10 wherein the travel of the carrier along the cable
    is controlled by the occupant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5+,     for torso harness with a descent retarder.


CLS 182/12
TXT Device under the class definition for traversing the horizontal and with
    means actuating, controlling or responding to the horizontal traversing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 32.5 for a vehicle carrying platform for a
    person engaged in work adjacent the ground.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 508 for a self-loading or
    unloading vehicle having a load handling means in the nature of a conveyor
    and provided with means for supporting a person in working relationship to
    the conveyor.


CLS 182/13
TXT Device under subclass 12 with occupant operated actuation or control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 1.11 for velocipede occupant propelled
    vehicles, and subclass 200 for other occupant propelled wheeled land
    vehicles.


CLS 182/14
TXT Device under subclass 13 further provided with occupant raising or lowering
    means, controlled by the occupant.


CLS 182/15
TXT Device under subclass 13 wherein the control means is a holding means,
    e.g., brake means.


CLS 182/16
TXT Device under subclass 12 with propelling handle means, or with steering
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13+,    for occupant controlled steering devices.


CLS 182/17
TXT Device under subclass 12 with means to prevent traversing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for holding means with occupant actuated or controlled means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, appropriate subclasses for brake means of general utility.


CLS 182/18
TXT Device under the class definition combined with means to alert a person to
    a condition or to indicate a position or condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclasses for a signal, alarm
    or indicator of more general utility.  See the search notes in the class
    definition of Class 116.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 541+ for electrical
    automatic intrusion responsive signal systems; subclasses 686+ for
    electrical automatic position responsive signal systems; and subclass 666
    for electrical automatic weight responsive signal systems.


CLS 182/19
TXT Device under the class definition including control means responsive to
    means sensing a condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12+,    for a device of this class with control means responsive to
    horizontal traversing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclasses 276+ for control mechanisms for elevators of general application.


CLS 182/20
TXT Device under the class definition which by reorientation or by
    rearrangement or omission or addition of a part, there is obtained a second
    character or different kind of device having a different mode of operation.


CLS 182/21
TXT Device under subclass 20 comprising a ladder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings).


CLS 182/22
TXT Device under subclass 21 comprising a ladder which is transformed into a
    different type ladder, e.g., a stepladder convertible to stacked ladders.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163,    for elongated ladders with folding components enabling them to be
    shortened and still usable.

    178.1+, for ladders with stacking means.

    207,    for an extension ladder.


CLS 182/23
TXT Device under subclass 22 comprising a stepladder having a ladder section as
    a prop which section may be pivoted to an inverted position to extend the
    ladder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104+,   for pivotally connected ladders with a noninvertible feature.

    115+,   for a ladder with a platform with a noninvertible feature.

    165+,   for a ladder with a pivoted prop with a noninvertible feature.


CLS 182/24
TXT Device under subclass 23 wherein the ladder stile and prop are in
    end-to-end abutting position when the prop is used to extend the ladder.


CLS 182/25
TXT Device under subclass 23 wherein there is provided a spreader or tie
    between the ladder and the prop spaced from the pivot point thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses 60+ for pivoted braces for wooden
    receptacles.


CLS 182/26
TXT Device under subclass 22 wherein one form of the ladder is a stepladder, in
    which the point of connection between the ladder and its prop is variable,
    thereby providing for its use or a planar surface or on multiple planes,
    e.g., a stairway.


CLS 182/27
TXT Device under subclass 21 comprising a ladder convertible to a scaffold
    structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.1+,   for an angularly movable support with means to maintain a step
    level.

    104,    for pivotally connected ladders.

    115+,   for a ladder with a platform.

    153+,   for a unitary folding trestle.

    163+,   for a ladder with folding stiles.

    165+,   for a ladder with a pivoted prop.


CLS 182/28
TXT Device under subclass 21 comprising a ladder convertible to a table or to a
    support for a table surface.


CLS 182/29
TXT Device under subclass 28 in which the table comprises an ironing board.


CLS 182/30
TXT Device under subclass 29 wherein the ironing board converts to a pivoted
    prop for the ladder.


CLS 182/31
TXT Device under subclass 30 wherein the ironing board when functioning as such
    is supported by crossed-leg structure.


CLS 182/32
TXT Device under subclass 28 in which the table comprises a stand for the
    support of a wash basin.


CLS 182/33
TXT Device under subclass 21 comprising a ladder convertible to a support for a
    seated occupant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 127+ for a stool of general utility.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, appropriate subclasses, for a device restricted
    to a support for a seated person.


CLS 182/33.2
TXT Device under subclass 33 wherein the occupant supporting bottom and its
    associated leg structure is turned 180_ end-for-end to uncover steps or
    rungs concealed or obstructed thereby or there beneath.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 1+ for a seating device invertible to
    uncover supports on the reverse side.


CLS 182/33.3
TXT Device under subclass 33 wherein the ladder rungs are mounted within or
    upon the back of the seating device, i.e., the back comprises the stiles or
    the stiles are mounted on the back.


CLS 182/33.4
TXT Device under subclass 33.3 wherein the rungs of the ladder are immovably
    held by their stiles and do not pivot with respect thereto.


CLS 182/33.5
TXT Device under subclass 33 wherein a step is movable from a nonuse position
    under a support for a seated occupant to a use position outside of such
    support.


CLS 182/33.6
TXT Device under subclass 33.5 wherein the step moves as an entity in an arc a
    portion of a revolution about a horizontal axis in moving from the use to
    nonuse position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 423.26+ for a footrest pivoted to
    swing from a use to a nonuse position under a chair or seat.


CLS 182/34
TXT Device under subclass 21 convertible from a ladder to a bed.


CLS 182/35
TXT Device under subclass 20 convertible to an article of furniture.


CLS 182/36
TXT Device under the class definition movably mounted by track supported means
    for horizontal traversing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10+,    for a traveling personnel carrier on a stationary inclined cable.

    12+,    for a ladder or platform including means for horizontal traversing
    with actuation control or response means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclasses 312+ and 71+ for traveling cranes of
    general application.


CLS 182/37
TXT Device under subclass 36 provided with means for elevating or lowering the
    person occupying the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141+,   for a platform having elevating or lowering means.

    150,    for a suspended platform.


CLS 182/38
TXT Device under subclass 36 including vertically spaced tracks.


CLS 182/39
TXT Device under subclass 36 which also directly engage a floor or the ground
    when in use position.


CLS 182/40
TXT Device under the class definition including a supple escape, e.g., a
    flexible ladder, and means on a common base therewith to upwardly extend
    and support said escape by rigid extensible support means or rigidifying
    and extending means.


CLS 182/41
TXT Device under subclass 40 including means to simultaneously rigidify and
    extend the supple escape means.


CLS 182/42
TXT Device under the class definition comprising a personnel carrier mounted on
    endless conveyor means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclass for endless
    conveyors of general utility.


CLS 182/43
TXT Device under subclass 42 in which the conveyor is provided with upper and
    lower supports in its endless path of travel.


CLS 182/44
TXT Device under subclass 43 in which the carrier pivots or folds.


CLS 182/45
TXT Device under the class definition comprising a platform and means for
    supporting said platform on a pitched roof in a position of utility.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 148 for a receptacle stand for a sloping
    surface, and subclass 237 for a scaffold support of general utility which
    compensates for roof pitch.


CLS 182/46
TXT Device under the class definition with means to inhibit the transfer of
    wave energy, e.g., heat or electricity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 404.1+ for a
    building component with an insulating insert in a cavity, and subclasses
    408+ for a disparate material lamina separating building components.


CLS 182/47
TXT Device under subclass 46 including shield means to protect a person from
    fire or heat while using escape means.


CLS 182/48
TXT Device under the class definition including a trough, tube or tower means
    with means utilizable only by a person or combined with means essential to
    maintaining life (e.g., ventilation means).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43+,    for an escape chute or tower with an endless conveyor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, subclasses 2+ for a
    mere chute.


CLS 182/49
TXT Device under subclass 48 wherein the means utilized by a person is a ladder.


CLS 182/50
TXT Device under the class definition provided with a projector or projectile
    to assist in getting the device to its point of use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, appropriate subclasses for various firearms, per se.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 19 for fishing
    rods with line propelling or trajecting means.

    89,     Ordnance, subclass 6.5 for fuse setters with projecting, launching
    or releasing devices.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclass 504 for a projectile with line
    carrying means.

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, appropriate subclass for the
    projection of missiles through the air by mechanical means.

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 317+ for aerial projectile
    types of amusement devices.


CLS 182/51
TXT Device under the class definition with fluid handling means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 342 for a fluid system support for workman
    or nonsystem material.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, subclass 25 for a portable fire fighting tower
    wherein a nozzle is controlled from the supporting base of the tower.


CLS 182/52
TXT Device under subclass 51 wherein a fluid conduit is a support member for a
    ladder, platform or escape.


CLS 182/53
TXT Device under the class definition comprising a balcony-like platform
    detachably mounted in a window opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for a window washer safety strip with a torso harness.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 73+ for a rigid
    cantilevered barrier, e.g., a balcony.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 235+ for shelf or scaffold type brackets,
    particularly subclass 236 for window mounted types.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 234+ for an auxiliary seat supported
    from another seat, and subclasses 452.1+ for a seat provided with bracket
    support means.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 101+, for a window mounted
    cabinet.


CLS 182/54
TXT Device under subclass 53 with a step, rung or additional platform.


CLS 182/55
TXT Device under subclass 53 wherein the platform is disposed below the window.


CLS 182/56
TXT Device under subclass 53 wherein the platform is extensible.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223,    for a platform comprising relatively movable sections.


CLS 182/57
TXT Device under subclass 53 with support means engaging the wall surface of
    the common wall opposite that on which the platform is mounted.


CLS 182/58
TXT Device under subclass 57 with depending means inwardly of the window which
    engages the framing or wall surface below said window opening.


CLS 182/59
TXT Device under subclass 58 with depending support means outwardly of the
    window opening which engages the framing or wall surface.


CLS 182/60
TXT Device under subclass 59 with means to clamp it to one the walls.


CLS 182/61
TXT Device under subclass 59 with a diagonal strut or brace outwardly of the
    window or window opening to maintain the platform horizontal.


CLS 182/62
TXT Device under subclass 57 with a diagonal strut or brace outwardly of the
    window opening to maintain the platform horizontal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for a window saddle and a diagonal strut.


CLS 182/62.5
TXT Structure under the class definition having means to extend a substructure
    for a platform in a vertical direction and means mounted for movement
    outwardly of the platform, e.g., forming a bridge or cantilevered ladder.


CLS 182/63.1
TXT HAVING TRANSPOSITIONING BASE AND ERECTING MEANS:

    Device under the class definition provided with a mobile base (e.g., a
    vehicle) to transport the device from a first position to a second position
    and with means to lower portions thereof for transportation and to raise
    the portions back to an elevated position after transportation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.1,    for an extensible boom with means to maintain a platform level.

    12+,    for a fire escape, ladder, or scaffold with means actuating,
    controlling, or responsive to horizontal traversing.

    40+,    for an upwardly extensible, flexible ladder or escape.

    50,     for an escape with a projector or projectile.


CLS 182/64.1
TXT Ladder pivotably mounted on transpositioning base (e.g., on vehicle):

    Device under subclass 63.1 comprising a ladder mounted to turn about an
    axis on the mobile base for swinging movement in a vertical or horizontal
    plane.


CLS 182/65.1
TXT About vertical axis:

    Device under subclass 64.1 wherein the supporting base (e.g., turntable)
    rotates about a vertical axis with respect to its movable support means
    (e.g., vehicle).


CLS 182/66.1
TXT Extension ladder (i.e., ladder having sliding section):

    Device under subclass 65.1 comprising a plurality of coextensive, elongated
    ladder units, one of which is designed to be moved along its longitudinal
    axis relative to the other.


CLS 182/66.2
TXT Motor operated:

    Device under subclass 66.1 provided with a prime mover for extending the
    ladder section.


CLS 182/67.1
TXT Manually operated:

    Device under suclass 66.1 wherein the ladder is extended by hand.


CLS 182/67.2
TXT By use of screw:

    Device under subclass 67.1 wherein the ladder is extended  by manually
    rotating a threaded shaft within a threaded sleeve.


CLS 182/67.3
TXT By use of gear:

    Device under subclass 67.1 wherein the ladder is extended by manually
    rotating a toothed wheel in meshing engagement with another toothed wheel
    or with a toothed segment.


CLS 182/67.4
TXT Folding ladder:

    Device under subclass 65.1 comprising a  ladder of multiple coextensive
    sections pivotally connected together so that they can be brought from an
    extended to a folded position.


CLS 182/67.5
TXT Having screw rod for erecting ladder about horizontal pivot:

    Device under subclass 65.1 comprising a ladder elevating mechanism actuated
    by a rotary motion of a threaded rod within a threaded sleeve.


CLS 182/68.1
TXT Extension ladder pivotally mounted to be erected about a horizontal axis:

    Device under subclass 64.1 comprising a plurality of coextensive, elongated
    ladder units designed to be moved along their longitudinal axis relative to
    one another wherein the ladder is mounted for movement about a horizontal
    axis.


CLS 182/68.2
TXT Having winch means for erecting ladder:

    Device under subclass 68.1 wherein the pivotal motion of the extension
    ladder on the horizontal axis is actuated by a line means  wound upon a
    winding drum.


CLS 182/68.3
TXT Having gear means for erecting ladder:

    Device under subclass 68.1 wherein the pivotal motion of the extension
    ladder on the horizontal axis is actuated by the meshing engagement between
    a toothed wheel and another toothed wheel or a toothed segment.


CLS 182/69.1
TXT Having lazy tong extending means:

    Device under subclass 68.1 wherein the ladder is extended by a scissors
    structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208,    for mechanical or power extending means for an extension
    ladder,generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 521 for lazy tong mechanism,
    generally.


CLS 182/69.2
TXT And winch to actuate lazy tong:

    Device under subclass 69.1 wherein movement of the scissors structure is
    effected by a line means (e.g., rope, cable, etc.) wound upon a winding
    drum.


CLS 182/69.3
TXT And gear to actutate lazy tong:

    Device under subclass 69.1 wherein movement of the scissors structure is
    effected by the meshing engagement between a toothed wheel and another
    toothed wheel or toothed segment.


CLS 182/69.4
TXT Telescopic erecting means:

    Device under subclass 63.1 wherein the means to raise or lower the work
    platform comprises concentric, tubular sections disposed in sliding
    relationship with one another.


CLS 182/69.5
TXT Erecting means actutated by lazy tong:

    Device under subclass 63.1 wherein the means to raise or lower the work
    platform comprises a vertically extensible or retractable scissors
    structure interposed between the supporting base and the work platform.


CLS 182/69.6
TXT And platform elevatable relative to its support:

    Device under subclass 63.1 combined with a work platform movable up and
    down along a vertical support.

    (1)     Note. The work platform of this subclass may be moved manually or
    by a power operated means.


CLS 182/70
TXT Device under the class definition comprising storage means for and combined
    with a flexible escape made of supple material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10+,    for a personnel carrier supported by and moving with respect to an
    inclined cable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 65.1+ for a strand brake.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 151+ for a fire escape cable drum.


CLS 182/71
TXT Device under subclass 70 comprising an escape in which the device descends
    under the influence of the weight of an occupant.


CLS 182/72
TXT Device under subclass 70 with an occupant controlled descent retarding
    device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5+,     for a strand retarder combined with a torso harness.

    193,    for a carrier on a strand having an occupant actuated brake.


CLS 182/73
TXT Device under subclass 70 wherein the storage means comprises a reel upon
    which the flexible escape is wound.


CLS 182/74
TXT Devices under subclass 73 provided with release means actuatable to permit
    a ladder-type escape to unwind from the reel.


CLS 182/75
TXT Device under subclass 74 in which the reel is provided with a brake or
    regulator means to retard the unwinding of the escape therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for a retarder of similar nature combined with a torso harness.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 290+ for a fluid-resistance brake retarding the
    rotation of an unwinding escape reel.


CLS 182/76
TXT Device under subclass 70 in which the storage means is embedded in a wall.


CLS 182/77
TXT Device under the class definition wherein a ladder is associated with a
    door.


CLS 182/78
TXT Device under subclass 77 wherein the ladder and door are so related that
    movement of the latter causes movement of the ladder.


CLS 182/79
TXT Device under subclass 78 comprising a rigid ladder provided with a guide
    means.


CLS 182/80
TXT Device under subclass 79 in which a guide is mounted on or near the door
    frame.


CLS 182/81
TXT Device under subclass 78 wherein the door and ladder are movably mounted on
    opposite sides of a common supporting wall (e.g., ceiling).


CLS 182/82
TXT Device under the class definition permanently associated with a structural
    ceiling, wall, or floor for supporting said device relative thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 342 for a workman's support combined with
    a fluid handling system.


CLS 182/83
TXT Device under subclass 82 wherein a combined ladder and platform, e.g.,
    balcony, are attached to a wall.


CLS 182/84
TXT Device under subclass 83 wherein both the platform and the ladder are
    mounted for movement with respect to the wall.


CLS 182/85
TXT Device under subclass 83 wherein the ladder is mounted for movement.


CLS 182/86
TXT Device under subclass 85 wherein the ladder is pivotally mounted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.5,    for a pivoted ladder having steps which are maintained level.


CLS 182/87
TXT Device under subclass 82 in which a portion of a scaffold support means is
    secured within the structure comprising a wall.


CLS 182/88
TXT Device under subclass 82 which are retractible or collapsible beneath the
    floor support on track means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79+,    for a guided rigid ladder operated by associated door means.


CLS 182/89
TXT Device under subclass 82 wherein a pivoted ladder or step is biased in or
    out of use position by spring means.


CLS 182/90
TXT Device under subclass 82 comprising a separate and distinct rung or step
    enabling a person to climb from one level to another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 123 for a horizontally mounted rod-type
    support of general utility.


CLS 182/91
TXT Device under subclass 90 which is pivotally mounted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 443+ for a permanent step
    pivotally secured to a railway vehicle.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 166 for a step-requiring vehicle
    modification mounted on a land vehicle with means permitting the step to be
    moved into various positions.


CLS 182/92
TXT Device under subclass 90 wherein the step or rung is readily detachable
    from its supporting means without the use of tools.


CLS 182/93
TXT Device under subclass 82 comprising a ladder structure secured to a wall of
    a building, car, or other similar supporting structure.


CLS 182/94
TXT Device under subclass 93 with which there is associated a wall penetrating
    actuating or operating means to effect the collapsing the ladder structure.


CLS 182/95
TXT Device under subclass 93 said ladder comprising rigid components mounted
    for hinged motion therebetween to permit folding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156+,   for a unitary foldable rigid ladder.


CLS 182/96
TXT Device under subclass 95 comprising hinge means restricting folding by a
    stile moving through a plane passing through the major axes of the rungs or
    steps.


CLS 182/97
TXT Device under subclass 93 comprising a rigid ladder pivoted as a unit with
    respect to supporting structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78+,    for a pivoted ladder related to a door.

    86,     for a pivoted ladder with a wall mounted platform.

    91,     for an independent rung or step pivotally mounted.


CLS 182/98
TXT Device under subclass 97 in which the ladder is normally counter balanced
    to inoperative position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85+,    for a nonpivoted ladder which is counter balanced.


CLS 182/99
TXT Device under subclass 93 wherein the ladder structure has a portion
    extending over the roof or top of the supporting structure to which said
    ladder structure is secured.


CLS 182/100
TXT Device under subclass 82 wherein the device comprises a pole or single
    strand.


CLS 182/101
TXT Device under the class definition including a ladder with a platform or
    escape mounted for vertical movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for a traversing escape with elevating means.

    42+,    for an endless conveyor escape combined with a diverse escape.

    85,     for a ladder moving relative to a stationary platform which is
    structurally installed.

    129,    for fixed scaffold means with material hoisting means.


CLS 182/102
TXT Device under subclass 101 wherein the platform is movably supported by the
    ladder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63.1+,  for a platform movably supported by a ladder combined with erection
    and positioning means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclass 241 for a nonself supporting portable elevator and subclass 402
    for an elevator load support which carries a masonry hod.


CLS 182/103
TXT Apparatus under subclass 102 wherein a ladder stile or prop supports and
    guides carriage means mounting the platform or receptacle on the ladder.


CLS 182/104
TXT Device under the class definition including pivotally connected ladders
    depending on each other for support in erected position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22+,    for a convertible ladder wherein a section may be pivoted from a
    ladder propping position to an inverted position.


CLS 182/105
TXT Device under subclass 104 wherein a central upright ladder section is
    supported between the pivotally connected sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166+,   for an extension ladder with pivoted props.


CLS 182/106
TXT Device under the class definition comprising a ladder provided with an
    upright, alone or with a running structural member or rail, for the
    stabilization of a ladder occupant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    256,    Fences, subclasses 59+ for railings, per se.


CLS 182/107
TXT Device under the class definition comprising a ladder with means to prevent
    slippage of said ladder when disposed in upright position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   for a ladder with means compensating for difference in level of a
    supporting surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 19+ for a
    pavement with an anti-slip surface.


CLS 182/108
TXT Device under subclass 107 wherein an antislip foot or shoe is terminally
    connected to a ladder stile.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 42+ for sliding feet or pads.

    248,    Supports, subclass 188.9 for a terminal tip or shoe for the
    extremity of a furniture leg.


CLS 182/109
TXT Device under subclass 108 comprising different kinds of antislip means,
    e.g., a pad and a spike.


CLS 182/110
TXT Device under subclass 108 including a suction cup.


CLS 182/111
TXT Device under subclass 108 including a component which is pivotable.


CLS 182/112
TXT Device under the class definition comprising a platform with means to
    protect an occupant or the platform in event of structural failure or
    adverse conditions affecting stability.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5+,     for a torso harness combined with strand-engaging brake means.

    70+,    for a supple escape means combined with storage means.

    141+,   for a platform with elevating or lowering means which may have a
    brake.


CLS 182/113
TXT Device under subclass 112 provided with an occupant guard in the member
    mounting a running member or rail.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for a window seat type platform with guard rails.

    106,    for similar guards on a ladder.


CLS 182/114
TXT Device under the class definition combined with a sucker rod support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 70.4 for a slender article support, per
    se.


CLS 182/115
TXT Device under the class definition comprising a scaffold structure in
    combination with a ladder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85+,    for a wall mounted platform with a moving ladder.

    101+,   for a vertically movable platform combined with a ladder.


CLS 182/116
TXT Device under subclass 115 in which the ladder supports the platform.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for an angularly movable ladder supporting a step or platform in a
    level condition throughout the ladder movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 238 for a scaffold jack, per se, and subclass
    210 for a ladder bracket of general utility.


CLS 182/117
TXT Device under subclass 116 wherein the platform is supported on and between
    spaced ladders.


CLS 182/118
TXT Device under subclass 117 wherein the spaced ladders have the planes of
    their climbing faces normal to a common intersecting vertical plane.


CLS 182/119
TXT Device under subclass 118 wherein the platform may be detached from the
    ladders without requiring the use of tools.


CLS 182/120
TXT Device under subclass 116 in which a detachable step or platform is adapted
    to be supported by a single ladder.


CLS 182/121
TXT Device under subclass 120 in which the step or platform is attached to or
    engages a plurality of rungs of the ladder.


CLS 182/122
TXT Device under subclass 121 in which the step or platform also engages or is
    attached to a ladder stile.


CLS 182/123
TXT Device under subclass 116 in which there are a plurality of platforms.


CLS 182/124
TXT Device under subclass 116 in which the ladder is combined with a pivoted
    prop and a pivoted platform.


CLS 182/125
TXT Device under subclass 116 in which the platform is disposed into its
    operative position by relative movement of the ladder and prop.


CLS 182/126
TXT Device under subclass 116 in which the platform is pivoted to the ladder
    prop.


CLS 182/127
TXT Device under the class definition comprising a ladder mounted on a distinct
    land vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12+,    for a similar device provided with actuation, control or response
    means relative to horizontal traversing thereof.

    63.1+,  for a similar device provided with erection and positioning means.

    93+,    for a ladder mounted on a floor or wall of a vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, subclass 24 for a fire engine, and subclass 25
    for a water tower.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 32.5+ for a wheeled vehicle combined with
    a support for a person engaged in manual labor on or adjacent the ground
    and see the search notes thereunder, subclass 4 for a land vehicle with
    ladder and hose racks and brackets.


CLS 182/128
TXT Device under the class definition including means supporting a scaffold
    within wall portions which define hollow shaft-like means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for a detachable window seat having opening confined securing means.

    82+,    for a wall mounted scaffold.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 123 for a horizontal rod type rack
    supported between spaced walls.


CLS 182/129
TXT Device under the class definition comprising a device in addition to or
    combined with a workman's support, said device having another function or
    servicing to perfect the support for its intended purpose.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206,    for a ladder having hook or grab means.

    214,    for a ladder having means to space it from a supporting surface.


CLS 182/130
TXT Device under the class definition comprising a plurality of workman's
    platforms on a common support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123,    for a plural platform supported by a ladder.


CLS 182/131
TXT Device under subclass 130 in which at least one platform is movable with
    respect to another.


CLS 182/132
TXT Device under the subclass 130 in which the platforms are vertically spaced
    and horizontally offset.


CLS 182/133
TXT Device under the class definition comprising a support means mounted by
    gripping a substantially vertical pole or strand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189+,   for a single pole or strand escape with means to retard descent.


CLS 182/134
TXT Device under subclass 133 to receive or be secured to a person's foot or
    leg during the operation of traversing a support.


CLS 182/135
TXT Device under subclass 134 with additional support for the occupant.


CLS 182/136
TXT Device under subclass 133 including vertically spaced alternately operable
    gripping means.


CLS 182/137
TXT Device under the class definition particularly adapted for receiving and
    absorbing the impact of a human body upon falling through the air, and any
    device analogous in structure and function not otherwise provided for.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 690+ for a mattress of similar construction.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 452.1+ for bottom and back supporting
    panels connected by tensioning means to a peripheral frame.


CLS 182/138
TXT Device under subclass 137 in which the receiving portion of the body
    catcher is of sheet or net form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclass 111 for a cot of similar nature.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet, of general utility.


CLS 182/139
TXT Device under subclass 138 wherein the sheet or net is tensioned
    peripherally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    482,    Exercise Devices, particularly subclasses 27+ for a body projecting
    trampoline having similar structure.


CLS 182/140
TXT Device under subclass 138 provided with a folding base support for the
    sheet or net.


CLS 182/141
TXT Device under the class definition including means for elevating or lowering
    a platform.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for a similar device mounted on a track for traversing movement.

    42+,    for a platform mounted on an endless conveyor.

    101+,   for an elevatable platform mounted on ladder means.

    136,    for alternate grasping structures adapted to climb a pole or strand.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclass 149 for a
    suspended horizontally supported planar surface which is vertically
    adjustable.

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    appropriate subclasses for a lift of general utility.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    appropriate subclasses for means to merely jack and hold a wallboard in
    position.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 10+ for wallboard handling
    means which manipulate and hoist the board.


CLS 182/142
TXT Device under subclass 141 wherein the platform is supported from above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10+,    for a suspended device traveling on an inclined cable.

    36+,    for a suspended track mounted platform.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 317+ for a suspended support of general
    utility.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    appropriate subclass for a force multiplying device, per se, particularly
    subclasses 188+ for a block and tackle, per se.


CLS 182/143
TXT Device under subclass 142 including a plurality of suspension means at
    least two of which are simultaneously operable.


CLS 182/144
TXT Device under subclass 143 in which all the suspension means are
    simultaneously operable to maintain the platform level.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.1+,   for a level platform supported on an angularly movable support.


CLS 182/145
TXT Device under subclass 142 including support means other than the work upon
    which a platform suspension means is mounted.


CLS 182/146
TXT Device under subclass 145 including detent means on the platform coacting
    with a support member to hold the platform fixed with respect to the
    separate support.


CLS 182/147
TXT Device under subclass 142 wherein the suspension device comprises plural
    distinct elevating means.


CLS 182/148
TXT Device under subclass 141 provided with means on the platform whereby a
    workman on the platform may operate or control the elevating structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12+,    for a device where horizontal movement of the platform is
    controlled by an operator on the platform.


CLS 182/149
TXT Device under subclass 141 wherein a trestle is provided with mechanical
    means for shifting component parts thereof to vary the height of its beam.


CLS 182/150
TXT Device under the class definition comprising a platform hanging from a
    superior support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10+,    for a suspended carrier traveling on an inclined cable.

    55,     for a suspended window seat type support.

    142+,   for a suspended device with elevating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 317+ for a suspended article support of more
    general utility.


CLS 182/151
TXT Device under the class definition having parts shaped to be so disposed
    relative to each other as to comprise a package, one or more components
    providing a special receptacle for the remainder.


CLS 182/152
TXT Device under the class definition comprising a unitary scaffold or ladder
    of rigid components which are hinged with respect to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for a folding window seat type platform.

    124,    for a pivoted platform mounted on a ladder having a pivoted prop.

    151,    for a package type trestle of separable parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 115+ for a
    horizontally supported planar surface which is foldable.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 166+ for a folding stand having plural legs.


CLS 182/153
TXT Device under subclass 152 wherein the device comprises a trestle which may
    be collapsed to facilitate its storage or transportation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    for a pivoted ladder having a control upright section supported
    therebetween.


CLS 182/154
TXT Device under subclass 153 supported by legs which cross each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for a ladder convertible to an ironing board supported by crossed
    leg structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 118+ for a
    folding horizontally supported planar surface in which mutually pivoted
    crossed legs support the surface.

    248,    Supports, subclass 164 for crossed legs in a stand.


CLS 182/155
TXT Device under subclass 153 wherein the legs of the device fold substantially
    parallel to the beam of the trestle to form a package.


CLS 182/156
TXT Device under subclass 152 relatively movable stiles or rungs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for a pivoted step on an angularly movable support with means to
    keep the step horizontal.

    33+,    for a unitary folding device wherein a ladder structure folds
    beneath a top step or seat to convert a step ladder to a stool.

    95+,    for a unitary foldable ladder structurally installed.

    165+,   for a rigid ladder having a pivoted prop.


CLS 182/157
TXT Device under subclass 156 comprising lazy tong construction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69.1+,  for a lazy tong actuated extension ladder pivotally mounted on a
    moving base.


CLS 182/158
TXT Device under subclass 157 provided with mechanical or power means for
    extending the lazy tong structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40+,    for an upwardly extensible flexible ladder.


CLS 182/159
TXT Device under subclass 156 in which plural stiles, or plural elements of a
    single stile, move toward each other, with a rung or step pivoted thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     for a similar type folding ladder structurally installed.


CLS 182/160
TXT Device under subclass 159 wherein the stiles construction forms a
    compartment or housing for storing the remainder of the ladder structure.


CLS 182/161
TXT Device under subclass 159 in which each stile is composed of plural
    parallel elements.


CLS 182/162
TXT Device under subclass 159 provided with a prop having relatively movable
    components.


CLS 182/163
TXT Device under subclass 156 wherein a stile is composed of rigid sections
    hinged together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22+,    for a stepladder having pivoted sections whereby it may be adjusted
    lengthwise.

    24,     for similar hinge structure between a ladder and a prop.

    40+,    for a ladder having folding stiles with means to simultaneously
    unfold and extend the same upwardly.

    78+,    for a folding stile ladder mounted on a door.

    104+,   for pivotally connected separate ladder sections.


CLS 182/164
TXT Device under subclass 163 wherein the sections extend from rung to rung.


CLS 182/165
TXT Device under the class definition comprising a ladder having a prop pivoted
    relative thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22+,    for a stepladder convertible to an extension ladder.

    23,     for a ladder with a prop which is inverted to make a stepladder an
    extension ladder.

    104+,   for similar structure wherein the prop is a ladder.

    124+,   for a pivoted platform mounted on a ladder having a pivoted prop.

    156+,   for a collapsible, unitary foldable ladder, especially subclass 162
    for a collapsible prop.


CLS 182/166
TXT Device under subclass 165 including at least one section extensible below
    the prop pivot.


CLS 182/167
TXT Device under subclass 166 including means to hold steps of one section in
    registry with those of another section.


CLS 182/168
TXT Device under subclass 165 including coplanar extension sections with the
    prop pivoted to the lower section.


CLS 182/169
TXT Device under subclass 165 in which said prop is a rear prop comprising a
    single pole or rod.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for a convertible ladder wherein the pivoted prop may be an ironing
    board.


CLS 182/170
TXT Device under subclass 165 in which the prop is a rear prop movable
    laterally with respect to the ladder.


CLS 182/171
TXT Device under subclass 165 in which either the stiles or the props converge
    and contact each other or are so intimately associated at their mutual ends
    as to be in virtual contact.


CLS 182/172
TXT Device under subclass 165 in which the prop extends laterally of the ladder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170,    for a rear prop which is movable laterally.


CLS 182/173
TXT Device under subclass 165 in which there is provided a rear flange for the
    top step of the ladder, to which the prop is hinged.


CLS 182/174
TXT Device under subclass 165 wherein there is a cleat provided for the top
    step of the ladder, to which the prop is pivoted.


CLS 182/175
TXT Device under subclass 174 in which there is provided a spreader or tie
    between the stile and the prop, separate and distinct from the cleat
    structure and spaced therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for a similar spreader on a convertible ladder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, for an ironing board forming a pivoted prop.


CLS 182/176
TXT Device under subclass 175 wherein the spreader is in two parts pivoted
    together so as to be folded about said pivot into substantial juxtaposition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclass 5 for articulated connections in
    general.


CLS 182/177
TXT Device under subclass 165 in which the prop and stile overlap.


CLS 182/178.1
TXT STACKABLE:

    Device under the class definition including coupling means particularly
    adapted to allow a plurality of fire escapes, ladders, or scaffolds to be
    superimposed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207,    for an extension ladder comprised of relatively movable lapped
    ladder sections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 637+ for
    superimposed three-dimensional, openwork units (e.g.,towers of stacked
    skeletonal units).


CLS 182/178.2
TXT Ladder section:

    Device under subclass 178.1 wherein each superimposed unit is a ladder
    section.


CLS 182/178.3
TXT Male and female connecting means:

    Device under subclass 178.2 wherein the
    coupling means of one ladder section comprises a socket element designed to
    receive a cylindrical element of another ladder section.


CLS 182/178.4
TXT Overlapping sections:

    Device under subclass 178.2 wherein the adjacent ladder sections are
    coupled together in longitudinally overlapping relation.


CLS 182/178.5
TXT Male and female connecting means:

    Device under subclass 178.1 wherein the
    coupling means of a first, stackable member comprises a socket element
    designed to receive a cylindrical element of a second stackablemember.


CLS 182/178.6
TXT Double-ended pin:

    Device under subclass 178.5 wherein the cylindrical element includes an
    oppositely extending portion received by a socket element of the second
    stackable member.


CLS 182/179.1
TXT SELF-SUSTAINING:

    Device under the class definition adapted to rest upon the earth or other
    underlayment and to stand alone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 111+ for a
    mechanism operated or relatively movable shaft assembly, (e.g., a
    self-erecting skeletonal tower), subclasses 637+ for superimposed
    three-dimensional openwork units, and subclass 651.10 for a
    three-dimensional, openwork structure.

    248,    Supports, for a self-sustaining support of general utility.


CLS 182/180.1
TXT Ladder:

    Device under subclass 179.1 comprising a means for climbing which consists
    of two stiles crossed by parallel rungs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for pivotally connected ladders which depend on each other for
    support in erected position.

    165+,   for a ladder with a pivoted prop.

    194+,   for a ladder adapted to rest on the ground and to rest against the
    wall of a building.


CLS 182/180.2
TXT Having supporting base:

    Device under subclass 180.1 wherein the ladder is mounted upon a supporting
    substructure.


CLS 182/180.3
TXT Vertically pivoted to supporting base:

    Device under subclass 180.2 wherein the ladder is movable relative to the
    supporting base and rotates about a horizontal axis.


CLS 182/181.1
TXT Scaffold horse (e.g., trestle):

    Device under subclass 179.1 comprising a horizontal beam and supporting
    legs therefor at one end thereof.

    (1)     Note. Scaffold horse may be used with another to form a pair to
    support a work platform.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117+,   for a platform with a ladder support at each end, especially
    subclasses 118+ for facing ladders supporting the platform.

    149,    for a trestle with beam elevating means.

    153+,   for a unitary foldable trestle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 286.1+ for a workbench of that class.


CLS 182/182.1
TXT Having height adjustable beam:

    Device under subclass 181.1 including an adjustment means for setting the
    beam at different positions of use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    for pivoted ladders having a central upright supported therebetween.

    151,    for a knockdown scaffold kit.


CLS 182/182.2
TXT By extensible leg brace:

    Device under subclass 182.1 wherein the height of the beam is adjusted by
    an adjustable length prop mounted between the horizontal beam and the
    supporting leg.


CLS 182/182.3
TXT Step-by-step adjustment:

    Device under subclass 182.2 wherein the adjustment of the intermediate
    extensible shaft is incremental.


CLS 182/182.4
TXT By slidable leg:

    Device under subclass 182.1 wherein the adjustment means comprises a sleeve
    having areleasable means to permit selective positioning of the supporting
    leg relative to an associated pathway.


CLS 182/182.5
TXT By extensible leg:

    Device under subclass 182.1 wherein one of the trestle legs is
    longitudinally adjustable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201+,   for a ladder stile extension.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 144.11+ for a
    horizon-tally supported planar surface which is vertically adjustable.

    248,    Supports, subclass 157 for a vertically adjustable stand.


CLS 182/183.1
TXT Having longitudinally extensible beam:

    Device under subclass 181.1 wherein the beam is comprised of a plurality of
    horizontal beam sections slidably connected for extension or contraction.


CLS 182/185.1
TXT Having unitary leg to beam coupler and brace:

    Device under subclass 181.1, including a single member of unitary rigid
    construction, comprising a brace or bracket having sockets for reception of
    the legs and serving to maintain the legs in angular relationship.


CLS 182/186.1
TXT Beam clamped by leg actuation:

    Device under subclass 181.1 wherein the horizontal beam is gripped by its
    supporting legs in reaction to pressure from the supporting floor surface.


CLS 182/186.2
TXT Pivotally connected legs:

    Device under subclass 186.1 wherein the gripping legs are connected to each
    other by a hinge joint and wherein gripping is actuated by relative
    rotation of the gripping legs about their hinge joint.


CLS 182/186.3
TXT Having leg to beam attaching bracket:

    Device under subclass 181.1 comprising a member with one portion fixed to
    the horizontal beam and another portion secured to the upper end of its
    supporting leg.


CLS 182/186.4
TXT Leg coupled directly to beam:

    Device under subclass 181.1 wherein the upper portion of the supporting leg
    comprises a means for engaging the horizontal beam (e.g., socket, channel,
    etc.).


CLS 182/186.5
TXT Knockdown:

    Device under subclass 181.1 constructed to be (1) readily set up from
    unassembled parts, or (2) readily disjointed into unassembled parts.


CLS 182/186.6
TXT Having height adjustable platform:

    Device under subclass 179.1 comprising a work platform extending between
    the supporting legs, and an adjustment means for operatively selecting the
    horizontal position of the work platform along the legs.


CLS 182/186.7
TXT Connector for horizontal or diagonal brace:

    Device under subclass 179.1 comprising a connector (e.g., clamp, bracket,
    etc.) which permits an inclined prop to be attached to a supporting leg.


CLS 182/186.8
TXT Releasable connector:

    Device under subclass 186.7 wherein the connecting means comprises a
    coupling which enables the parts to be readily set up or disjointed.

    (1)     Note. The connector of this subclass may utilize a wedge, a pin, a
    peg, a socket, etc.


CLS 182/186.9
TXT Having cantilevered auxillary platform:

    Device under subclass 179.1 comprising a projecting frame extending
    laterally beyond the supporting structure to support a supplementary work
    platform.


CLS 182/187
TXT Device under the class definition comprising a scaffold platform mounted on
    a single strand or pole, e.g., tree, chimney, silo, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128,    for a scaffold supported internally of shaft means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 218.4+ for a bracket specially mounted on a
    post.


CLS 182/188
TXT Device under subclass 187 in which the platform may be moved or adjusted to
    different horizontal positions relative to the pole, tree or the like.


CLS 182/189
TXT Device under the class definition comprising a single strand or single
    rod-like means which serves as a ladder stile or a slide-pole escape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5+,     for a safety girdle combined with a single pole or strand escape.

    42+,    for an endless conveyor type escape.

    90,     for a structurally installed independent rung or step.

    100,    for a structurally installed single pole or strand.

    133+,   for support means gripping a substantially vertical pole or strand.


CLS 182/190
TXT Device under subclass 189 comprising a flexible element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70+,    for a supple escape with a storage device.

    196+,   for a flexible ladder.


CLS 182/191
TXT Device under subclass 190 comprising a carrier mounted for sliding movement
    along a strand or pole.


CLS 182/192
TXT Device under subclass 191 having a brake provided with a component movable
    by application of a load upon the carrier which movement results in a
    braking action as between the carrier and the strand or pole.


CLS 182/193
TXT Device under subclass 191 including a retarding or brake device adapted to
    be actuated by the user or occupant of the carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for an occupant controlled descent retarder combined with a supple
    escape and storage means therefor.


CLS 182/194
TXT Device under the class definition composed of a stile having a plurality of
    rungs or steps mounted therebetween along the length thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189+,   for a single stile ladder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 182+ for a stair
    with risers and specifically defined in situ erected type building
    structure with an attached stair or ladder.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 443+ for steps on railroad
    rolling stock involving modified vehicle structure.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 163+ for steps on a land vehicle.


CLS 182/195
TXT Device under subclass 194 wherein the ladder stiles comprise nesting,
    relatively slidable segments, each supporting a single rung.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166+,   for slidable nesting ladder sections combined with a pivoted prop.


CLS 182/196
TXT Device under subclass 194 wherein the ladder stiles are supple.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40+,    for means to extend a flexible ladder upwardly.

    42+,    for an endless conveyor type flexible ladder.

    70+,    for a flexible escape combined with a storage device.

    190+,   for a flexible single stile ladder and escape.


CLS 182/197
TXT Device under subclass 196 provided with a spacer, usually to space the
    stiles from a building wall.


CLS 182/198
TXT Device under subclass 197 attached to a rung.


CLS 182/199
TXT Device under subclass 196 wherein the stile comprises a plurality of spaced
    flexible strands.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215,    for rungs sandwiched between elements of a composite stile.


CLS 182/200
TXT Device under subclass 194 comprising means to compensate for the
    inequalities of the surface, on which the ladder rests.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170,    for independent, laterally moving ladder props on an uneven surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 144.11+ for a
    vertically adjustable horizontal planar surface.

    248,    Supports, subclass 157 for a vertically adjustable stand, subclass
    161 for a standard type stand wherein the standard is vertically
    adjustable, subclass 188.2 for a furniture elevating or leveling device,
    and subclasses 354+ for an adjustable length prop.


CLS 182/201
TXT Device under subclass 200 comprising a movable and adjustable stile
    extension.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111,    for extensible stiles combined with anti-slip means.

    166+,   for units of a ladder or prop which are extensible.

    184,    for a scaffold horse with extensible and adjustable legs.

    225+,   for extensible legs on a trestle.


CLS 182/202
TXT Device under subclass 201 in which two of said stile extensions are
    provided and are interconnected together so that movement of one of the
    extensions will effect movement of the other extension in opposite
    direction.


CLS 182/203
TXT Device under subclass 201 wherein said stile extension includes means
    engaging a rung.


CLS 182/204
TXT Device under subclass 201 wherein the adjusting means comprises stepped
    adjustment means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166,    for extension units employing similar step-adjustment means.


CLS 182/205
TXT Device under subclass 204 wherein the incremental adjustment is by means of
    a ratchet-like structure.


CLS 182/206
TXT Device under subclass 194 including means for supporting the ladder by
    hooking or grasping a supporting surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150,    for a suspended scaffold.

    196+,   for a suspended flexible ladder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 84 for a clasp-sliding jaw
    fastener, per se.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 683+ for article carried self-supporting means.


CLS 182/207
TXT Device under subclass 194 comprising lapping ladder sections relatively
    movable to provide for length adjustment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22+,    for a stepladder convertible to an extension ladder.

    40+,    for an upwardly extensible flexible escape.

    66.1+,  for ladder sections on a rotatable transpositioning base.

    68.1+,  for reciprocating ladder sections combined with erection and
    transpositioning means.

    166+,   for a stepladder having extensible stiles or prop.

    168,    for an extension ladder with a pivoted prop.

    195,    for a ladder comprising slidable-nested single rung stile units.

    201+,   for supporting surface compensating means comprising an extensible
    stile.


CLS 182/208
TXT Device under subclass 207 including means providing a mechanical advantage
    or motor means connected between the sections to cause relative movement
    therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12+,    for an extension ladder mounted on a land vehicle having control or
    actuation means.

    64.1+,  for a ladder which has extension means combined with positioning
    means.

    158,    for a lazy tong type ladder with power or mechanical means to
    extend the same.


CLS 182/209
TXT Device under subclass 207 wherein a latch is provided between the sections
    to prevent their relative movement.


CLS 182/210
TXT Device under subclass 209 wherein the latch is actuated by movement of a
    ladder section.


CLS 182/211
TXT Device under subclass 210 wherein the latch is spring biased.


CLS 182/212
TXT Device under subclass 209 wherein the latch is operated by remote control.


CLS 182/213
TXT Device under subclass 212 wherein the remote control is operated by the
    extension ladder elevating cable.


CLS 182/214
TXT Device under subclass 194 including means to support the ladder away from
    the surface against which it leans or rests.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    197+,   for a flexible ladder having a spacer.

    229,    for a spacer of more general utility.


CLS 182/215
TXT Device under subclass 194 wherein a side rail is composed of a plurality of
    elongated members and the rung or step is anchored therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199,    for a flexible ladder having a stile comprising plural strands.


CLS 182/216
TXT Device under subclass 194 wherein a tie rod is used to hold the side rails
    and rungs in assembled condition.


CLS 182/217
TXT Device under subclass 194 with means to reinforce a member of the ladder.


CLS 182/218
TXT Device under subclass 217 comprising a rod, cable or wire in the form of a
    bow string.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216,    for a tie rod of a similar nature.


CLS 182/219
TXT Device under subclass 217 in which the side rails are reinforced.


CLS 182/220
TXT Device under subclass 194 including a distinct support element mounting a
    rung to a stile.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159+,   for a rung-stile connection in a collapsible ladder of rigid
    components.

    228.1+, for a joint between a rung and stile.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 123 for a rod type rack.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 200+ especially subclasses 251+ for a rod
    bracket.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses, for connections in
    general and particularly subclasses 230+ for a connection between the end
    of one rod and the side of another.


CLS 182/221
TXT Device under the class definition adapted to be attached to a person's shoe
    or leg to assist him in climbing a pole.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134+,   for a grasping-type climber adapted to be secured to a person's
    foot or leg for ascending or descending a substantially vertical strand or
    pole.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclasses 62+ for antislipping devices
    for use in walking, to be attached to the feet or shoes.


CLS 182/222
TXT Device under the class definition comprising a surface element upon which a
    workman is supported.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    14,     Bridges, subclasses 69.5+ for a ramp between disassociated bases.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Building), subclasses 177+ for a residual
    building structure with a wear resisting or friction increasing traffic
    carrying surface and subclasses 262+ for a barrier, e.g., ceiling floor or
    roof, resting on a vertical structure.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 163+ for running-boards.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 19+ for a
    pavement with an anti-slip surface.


CLS 182/223
TXT Device under subclass 222 formed of sections with means to detachably
    connect them or permit relative movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for a detachable window seat having an extensible platform.

    131,    for plural platforms, relatively movable.


CLS 182/224
TXT Device under the class definition comprising a sawhorse beam and one set of
    legs or details of either the beam or set of legs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87,     for a portion of the structure embedded in a wall.

    153+,   for a unitary foldable trestle.

    181+,   for a self-sustaining scaffold horse.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 677+ for means
    spacing and positioning an elongated reinforcing rod from a surface.

    248,    Supports, subclass 188 for leg attaching connections in a stand,
    and subclasses 188.1+ for supporting substructure for a stand.


CLS 182/225
TXT Device under subclass 224 wherein a joint provides for relative movement
    between two components.


CLS 182/226
TXT Device under subclass 225 wherein pivoting legs clamp the beam therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186.1,  for a knockdown trestle having a beam clamped by leg actuation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 489+ for a pivoted clasp.


CLS 182/227
TXT Device under subclass 225 including a vertical staff like member between
    the beam and legs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149,    for elevating means between a trestle beam and legs.

    181.1,  for a trestle with adjustable means between the legs and beam.


CLS 182/228.1
TXT RUNG OR RUNG-TO-STILE CONNECTION:

    Device under the class definition comprising a step (or crosspiece) of a
    ladder intended to be engaged by a climber or comprising the structure
    interconnecting such a step or crosspiece to the two side rails of the
    ladder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90+,    for a wall attached rung or step.

    159+,   for a collapsible ladder having a hinged rung-stile joint.

    174+,   for cleat structure connecting the top step of a ladder to a stile
    or prop.

    187+,   for a platform mounted externally of a shaft.

    189+,   for a single stile ladder including a series of single steps or
    rungs.

    194+,   for other ladder structure.

    196+,   for a connection between a rung and a flexible stile.

    222+,   for platform structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, for a pipe joint or coupling requiring
    internal wall structure of one of the members and having general utility.

    403,    Joints and Connections, for joints in general and particularly
    subclasses 230+ for a connection between the end of one rod and the side of
    another.


CLS 182/228.2
TXT Rung having anti-skid surface:

    Device under subclass 228.1 wherein the surface of the step structure
    intended to be engaged by a climber comprises a frictional means (e.g.,
    nonslip projections, rough surface, etc.) to prevent a foot or hand of the
    climber from slipping.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 177+ for a residual
    building component with a wear decreasing or friction increasing traffic
    carrying surface.


CLS 182/228.3
TXT Bracket-type connection:

    Device under subclass 228.1 comprising an L-shaped member with one arm
    fixed to the side rail and the other arm projecting horizontally to support
    the end of the ladder step.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220+,   for a ladder including bracket mounted rungs.


CLS 182/228.4
TXT Sleeve-type connection:

    Device under subclass 228.1 comprising a ferrule surrounding the end
    portion of the tubular ladder step for fastening the step and side rail
    together.


CLS 182/228.5
TXT Rung for a motor vehicle:

    Device under subclass 228.1 comprising a step which is especially designed
    to use in getting in and out of a car, truck, tractor, etc.


CLS 182/228.6
TXT Hollow rung:

    Device under subclass 228.1 wherein the ladder step is an elongated,
    tubular body member.


CLS 182/229
TXT Device under the class definition comprising a horizontal supporting
    member, supported at one end by a scaffold post and at the other end by a
    wall, tree, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87,     for a wall embedded scaffold member.

    197+,   for a flexible ladder with spacer means.

    214,    for a ladder with spacer means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 218.4+ for a post or column attached bracket,
    subclasses 226.11+ for a bracket clamped to a support, and subclasses 351+
    for a prop or brace, per se.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for joints in
    general and particularly subclasses 230+ for a connection between the end
    of one rod and the side of another.


CLS 182/230
TXT Device under the class definition comprising residual basic subject matter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129,    for workmen's kneeling stool with means for holding tools or
    supplies.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 127+ for a kneeling stool used by a person
    other than a workman and subclasses 346.01+ for a base which is capable of
    use as a workman's support, e.g., kneeling base.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 32.5 for vehicular support means for a
    person engaged in manual labor on or adjacent the ground, e.g., wheeled
    scrubbing stool.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 67.1+ for
    hoist-line frames and subclasses 68.1+ for a hoistable container or cage.
    See the search notes thereunder.


CLS 182/231
TXT Attached to strand wound on reel, and means for retarding unwinding of
    strand:

    Device under subclass 3 having a reel on which a strand for supporting the
    encircling means is wound, and means for slowing or stopping the unwinding
    of the strand from the reel during the lowering of the encircling means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclass 64 for brakes which operate on a strand and a
    wheel or a pulley over which it runs, and subclasses 65.1+ for brakes which
    operate on a strand.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 285+, 381+, 396+, 410+,
    and 422+ for a reeling device with a particular brake.


CLS 182/232
TXT Including spring for rewinding strand:

    Device under subclass 231 including a spring interacting with the reel to
    rewind the strand after the removal of the person from the encircling means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 371+ for a spring
    retracted reeling device of general use.


CLS 182/233
TXT Fluid resistance brake:

    Device under subclass 231 wherein the slowing or stopping means includes a
    brake which utilizes the force of a fluid against a portion of the brake
    structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclass 346 for a fluid governor carried upon an elevator car and driven
    by the movement of the car.

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 266+ for internal resistance motion retarders.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 377 for a driven drum which pulls on a cable and includes a
    fluid-resistance brake for retarding the rotation of the drum.


CLS 182/234
TXT Movable, friction brake element applied by centrifugal force:

    Device under subclass 231 wherein the slowing or stopping means includes a
    brake having at least one movable element which frictionally engages the
    reel or structure connected thereto and is actuated or applied by
    centrifugal force generated from the rotation of the reel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclasses 373+ for an elevator car supported brake whose actuation is
    controlled by the speed of the car.

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 180+ for speed-responsive brakes.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 267 for a rotatably driven drum which pulls on a cable and
    includes a rotational speed governor for generating a control impulse to
    rotation retarding means or the drive.


CLS 182/235
TXT Friction brake and occupant mechanism for applying brake during descent:

    Device under subclass 231 wherein the slowing or stopping means includes a
    brake having a portion which frictionally engages the reel, structure
    connected thereto, or the strand and is actuated or applied by the person
    supported by the encircling means during his downward movement.


CLS 182/236
TXT With means for retarding unwinding of strand type escape:

    Device under subclass 73 in which the flexible escape is a movable strand
    which supports a person traveling therewith, and means for slowing or
    stopping the unwinding of the strand from the reel during the lowering of
    the person.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclass 64 for brakes which operate on a strand and a
    wheel or pulley over which it runs, and subclasses 65.1+ for brakes which
    operate on a strand.


CLS 182/237
TXT Including spring for rewinding strand:

    Device under subclass 236 including a spring interacting with the reel to
    rewind the strand after removal of the person traveling with the strand.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 371+ for a spring
    retracted reeling device of general use.


CLS 182/238
TXT Fluid resistance brake:

    Device under subclass 236 wherein slowing or stopping means includes a
    brake which utilizes the force of a fluid against a portion of the brake
    structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclass 346 for a fluid governor carried upon a car and driven by the
    movement of the car.

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 266+ for internal resistance motion retarders.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 377 for a driven drum which pulls on a cable and includes a fluid
    resistance brake for retarding the rotation of the drum.


CLS 182/239
TXT Movable, friction brake element applied by centrifugal force:

    Device under subclass 236 wherein the slowing or stopping means includes a
    brake having at least one movable element which frictionally engages the
    reel or structure connected thereto and is actuated or applied by
    centrifugal force generated from the rotation of the reel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclasses 373+ for an elevator car supported brake whose actuation is
    controlled by the speed of the car.

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 180+ for speed-responsive brakes.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 267 for a rotatably driven drum which pulls on a cable and
    includes a rotational speed governor for generating a control impulse to
    rotation-retarding means or to the drive.


CLS 182/240
TXT Friction brake and occupant-operated mechanism for applying brake during
    descent:

    Device under subclass 236 wherein the slowing or stopping means includes a
    brake having a portion which frictionally engages the reel, structure
    connected thereto, or the strand and is actuated or applied by the person
    supported by the strand during his downward movement.


CLS 182/241
TXT MOVABLE STRAND ESCAPE AND MEANS FOR RETARDING TRAVEL OF STRAND:

    Device under the class definition comprising a flexible strand for
    supporting a person, the portion of the strand which supports the person
    traveling downwardly therewith, and provided with means for slowing or
    stopping its descent.


CLS 184/
TTL LUBRICATION

CLS 184/
TXT This class is not intended to include the lubrication generally of machines
    of every kind; but it is intended to include those devices employed to
    lubricate bearing parts in a machine where such lubricating device forms no
    part of the machine structure.

    Where the lubricating device is a part of the machine, where the structure
    is modified to admit of lubrication, where the particular or peculiar
    operation of the machine governs the operation of the lubricating device,
    or, in other words, where there is a special combination between the
    lubricating device and the machine in connection with which the lubricating
    device is used, then such device is classified with the machine to which it
    belongs.

    In this definition the term "machine" includes any device having bearing
    parts.

    Exception:  Where the machine is operated by air, steam, or water and the
    same means used to operate the lubricator, then such lubricator belongs to
    this class, provided the structure of the machine is not modified.  An
    example of this exception is subclass 52.

    (1)     Note. For further search upon this line, see Class 384, Bearings,
    appropriate subclasses, and also the particular class in which the machine
    or device itself belongs.

    (2)     Note.  Where the modification of a journal-box is no more than a
    hole to admit a lubricant or allow it to escape and a lubricating device is
    used in connection with such a journal-box, the device will go in this
    class (184) unless there is a particular combination between the
    journal-box and the lubricating device.

            SEARCH CLASS:

            The following classes have the noted subclasses, which are
    classified on the basis of the lubrication of solid, relatively movable
    surfaces or the materials used therefor;

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 36 for caster lubricators and
    subclass 274 for hinge lubricators.

    19,     Textiles: Fiber Preparation, subclass 285.

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 483 for a bench plane with lubricator.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twinning, subclass 120 and
    subclass 133 and indented subclass.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 170 for a glass working machine with
    apparatus lubricating means.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 41+ for a method or an apparatus for
    plastically shaping metal and including a step of or a means for applying a
    lubricant to the work, and subclass 236 for a rolling mill with
    roller-lubricating means.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 280 for structure to oil volume or
    rate of flow meter diaphragms.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 467, and indented subclass,
    587, and 605.

    83,     Cutting, subclass 169 for means to lubricate a cutting tool or the
    work.

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, subclass 32.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 153+ for lubricating means
    for an expansible chamber device.  See section III, under "SEARCH CLASS
    184", in the class definition of Class 92 for a statement of the line
    between Class 192 and Class 184.

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 43 and 256.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses, for coating apparatus.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 90.1+ and 196.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 246+ for lubricated valves.

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclass 2 and indented subclasses for
    spring wheel lubrication.

    188,    Brakes, subclass 264 for lubricating brake shoes, wheels, or drums.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 70.12 for an
    arrangement of opposed clutch faces having means to lubricate the elements,
    and 113.1+ for lubricating means for a clutch element.

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 500+.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 50 and 268, for vehicle spring structure
    claimed in combination with a lubricator or having a lubrication feature.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 512+ for a dynamic circumferential contact seal for
    other than a piston intended to be contained or compressed by a gland
    member in a packing box having means to introduce or direct a fluid or
    subclass 930 for a seal including means to introduce, circulate, or remove
    fluid having a heating or cooling feature.

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 322+ and see search notes.

    407,    Cutters, for Shaping, subclass 11 for a lubrication means for a
    milling machine cutter or for a lathe cutter, combined with such a cutter.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 56+ for
    means to cut in the manner of that class combined with means to apply
    fluent lubricating material to the work or to the tool in the vicinity of
    the cutting edge.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 228 and 372.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 83+ for rotary
    expansible chamber devices having nonworking fluid lubrication or seal
    means.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 107 for a molding machine for nonmetallic materials with means
    lubricating cooperating apparatus parts.

    451,    Abrading, subclass 554 for a rigid abrading tool having means to
    supply lubricant to the abrading surface.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, subclasses 7+ for a flexible coupling wherein the structure
    is modified so as to admit lubrication.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses
    43+ and 91 for structure wherein a belt, pulley, or guide roll is modified
    for the specific purpose of facilitating admission of lubricant.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission or Components, subclasses 159+.

    508,    Solid Antifriction Devices, Materials Therefor, Lubricant or
    Separant Compositions for Moving Solid Surfaces, and Miscellaneous Mineral
    Oil Compositions, particularly subclasses 110+ for lubricant compositions.


CLS 184/1.5
TXT Devices having means for emptying, and replenishing the oil in the crank
    case, transmission case, or differential casing of an automobile.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass will take devices adapted to perform any one
    of the above functions alone, unless the device (if for emptying or
    replenishing) is one which could be used for dispensing or emptying for any
    purpose.  In these instances classification might be in either Class 222,
    Dispensing, or Class 417, Pumps, respectively.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, the line being:

    (a)     Processes of cleaning crank, transmission or differential casing,
    per se, are in Class 134 or other appropriate class under the lines with
    Class 134, even though involving the operation of the apparatus cleaned,
    where only such operation is claimed as is necessary for the cleaning
    operation.  Processes of combined cleaning and lubricating or lubricating,
    per se, are in  Class 184.

    (b)     Apparatus disclosed for cleaning only of crank, transmission, or
    differential casings, or for removing of lubricant from the same and
    cleaning, is in Class 134 or other appropriate class under the lines with
    Class 134, and even though a combination with the casing is claimed, as
    well as apparatus disclosed generically for cleaning or lubricating.  Class
    184 has apparatus disclosed for lubricating only, or combined apparatus for
    cleaning and lubricating and also apparatus for merely removing lubricant
    or for removing, cleaning, and returning the cleaned lubricant.

    222,    Dispensing, see note 1.

    417,    Pumps, see (1) Note.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, see (1) Note.


CLS 184/2
TXT Devices specifically intended and arranged to lubricate the wheels of
    mine-cars while in operation.


CLS 184/3.1
TXT Rail or rail vehicle wheel lubricator:

    Subject matter under class definition, including apparatus specifically
    adapted to lubricate the rail or track, or the rail or track vehicle wheels.

    (1)     Note.  The majority of the devices in this subclass are located
    adjacent the track or rail on or in the ground. Devices mounted on the
    vehicle are found in the indented subclass 3.2.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 279 for railway track clearers and lubricators.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 500 for lubricating devices for
    conveyor rails or rail wheels.


CLS 184/3.2
TXT On vehicle:

    Subject matter under subclass 3.1 including apparatus mounted on a track or
    rail vehicle, specifically adapted to lubricate the track or rail, or the
    track or rail vehicle wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 279 for railway track clearers and lubricators.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 500 for lubricating devices for
    conveyors rails or rail wheels.


CLS 184/4
TXT Devices which are particularly adapted for use on a windmill to lubricate
    the bearings.


CLS 184/5
TXT Devices for lubricating slide-bearings where the lubricating devices are
    practically part of the bearings.  This subclass is limited to the
    lubricating of the bearing.

    (1)     Note.  Where the claims are broader and include parts of the
    machine, the device goes to the machine class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclass 2

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planning for lubricating combined with a
    machine of that class.


CLS 184/5.1
TXT BEARING PACKER:

    Subject matter under the class definition including devices specifically
    intended for lubricating or repacking bearings, e.g., vehicle wheel
    bearings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, appropriate subclasses for bearing lubrication where the
    lubricating means is a part of the bearing structure.


CLS 184/6
TXT The combination of conveying-pipes with a source of lubricant-supply and
    arranged to lubricate the several bearings of a machine or of several
    machines from a common source of supply.

    (1)     Note.  In connection with the above there may or may not be an
    arrangement to return the oil not used to the source of supply.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 90.33+ for poppet valve
    operating mechanism having a related lubrication feature.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses for
    processes and apparatus for removal of a constituent from a liquid mixture,
    e.g., oil filters, particularly subclasses 167+ and 171 for the combination
    of a liquid separator and art device defining no characteristics of the art
    device in addition to those necessary to the functioning of the liquid
    separator, e.g., a named source of liquid or the separator.


CLS 184/6.1
TXT Device under subclass 6 provided with means to sense the machine operation
    (e.g., change of speed, load, temperature, etc.), to affect the operation
    of the machines lubrication systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 196 for synchronous
    operations of an engine and a lubrication forcing means.


CLS 184/6.11
TXT Device under subclass 6 having means for feeding a lubricant into a hollow
    shaft in a gas turbine from which the lubricant is fed to the bearings.


CLS 184/6.12
TXT Device under subclass 6 having means for lubricating a gear surface or a
    gear shaft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 467+ for gears
    specifically modified for purposes of lubrication.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses 159+,
    for lubrication of planetary gear transmission.


CLS 184/6.13
TXT Device under subclass 6 having means for removing the lubricant from a
    machine sump.


CLS 184/6.14
TXT Device under subclass 6 having means for lubricating machine tools.


CLS 184/6.15
TXT Device under subclass 6 having means for lubricating sewing machines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 43 and 256 for a sewing machine with apparatus
    to lubricate it.


CLS 184/6.16
TXT Device under subclass 6 having means for lubricating the rubbing parts of a
    rotary type compressor.

    (1)     Note.  Only a minute quantity of lubricant is generally applied.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 83+ for lubrication
    of a rotary expansible chamber device.


CLS 184/6.17
TXT Device under subclass 6 having means for lubricating machines wherein the
    cylinders are parallel or substantially parallel to a drive shaft.

    (1)     Note.  These machines usually include wobbler can or plate.


CLS 184/6.18
TXT Device under subclass 6 having means for lubricating a vertical shaft.


CLS 184/6.19
TXT Device under subclass 6 including means for lubricating links which are
    connected to other bodies.


CLS 184/6.2
TXT Device under subclass 6 including means to prevent disruption of the
    machines lubrication system when the machine is tilted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 135 for fuel supply systems combined with
    aircraft.


CLS 184/6.21
TXT Device under subclass 6 including conditioning means for the lubricant
    while in use in the system.


CLS 184/6.22
TXT Device under subclass 6.21 wherein the conditioning means raises or lowers
    the temperature of the lubricant or maintains the proper fluidity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104.1+, for apparatus for heating or cooling a lubricant other than in a
    system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 196 for engine lubricators.

    165,    Heat Exchange, for heating or cooling apparatus of general use.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, for temperature and
    humidity apparatus.


CLS 184/6.23
TXT Device under subclass 6.21 including means to destroy or remove gas or
    vapor bubbles dispersed in the lubricant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 155+ for degasifying means
    for liquid, per se.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 321 for processes of foam or gaseous
    dispersands.


CLS 184/6.24
TXT Device under subclass 6.21 wherein the conditioning means (e.g., filtering,
    centrifuging or separating) removes foreign material to purify the
    lubricant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, for apparatus to filter or
    separate liquids.

    494,    Imperforate Bowl:  Centrifugal Separators, appropriate subclasses
    for apparatus and process for breaking up a mixture of fluids or fluent
    substances into two or more components by centrifuging within a generally
    solid-walled, receptacle-like member.


CLS 184/6.25
TXT Device under subclass 6.21 includes magnetic means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 222 for separators
    including a magnet of general use.


CLS 184/6.26
TXT Device under subclass 6 including means to spray a lubricant for creating a
    mist or fog.


CLS 184/6.27
TXT Device under subclass 6 including means to control spraying or leakage of
    lubricant to prevent damage to a surface.

    (1)     Note.  The lubricant would cause carbonization or other detrimental
    effects to a surface.


CLS 184/6.28
TXT Device under subclass 6 including structure for fixing or making fast the
    position of a lubricant pump or system.


CLS 184/6.3
TXT Device under subclass 6 including means to provide lubrication
    simultaneously with or prior to starting the machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 196 for lubrication systems
    combined with an engine.


CLS 184/6.4
TXT Device under subclass 6 provided with (1) means to sense a change in the
    operation of a lubrication system and means responsive to said change to
    affect the operation of the machine, (2) means to prevent abnormal
    pressures in a lubricating system or (3) means for indicating the operation
    of the machine or supply.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 196 for lubrication systems
    combined with engines.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 631 for electric indicator for
    machine lubricant; and subclasses 679+ for machine condition responsive
    indicating systems.


CLS 184/6.5
TXT Device under subclass 6 having means for lubricating crank-type machines.


CLS 184/6.6
TXT Device under subclass 6.5 wherein the machines have cylinders in more than
    one radial plane or opposed.


CLS 184/6.7
TXT Device under subclass 6.5 wherein an expansible chamber of the machine is
    below the connecting rod.


CLS 184/6.8
TXT Device under subclass 6.5 having means for lubricating a cylinder surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for apparatus for lubricating a cylinder.


CLS 184/6.9
TXT Device under subclass 6.5 including means for lubricating valves of the
    machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, sub- classes 90+ for valve-operating
    mechanism in an engine.


CLS 184/7.1
TXT For twister ring or spinning spindle:

    Subject matter under subclass 6, including apparatus specifically adapted
    to lubricate twister rings or spinning spindles of textile or similar
    machines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 1 and 45 for lubricating devices
    specifically for textile machines.


CLS 184/7.2
TXT For chassis lubrication:

    Subject matter under subclass 6, including apparatus specifically adapted
    to lubricate the bearing points in a chassis for a vehicle or other machine.


CLS 184/7.3
TXT With flow regulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 7.2, including apparatus to control the
    lubricant flow.


CLS 184/7.4
TXT With measuring or metering value system: Subject matter under subclass 6,
    including apparatus to monitor and indicate lubricant flow parameters.


CLS 184/8
TXT Subject matter under subclass 6, wherein there is a continuous tube from
    the source of lubricant to the bearing.


CLS 184/9
TXT Subject matter under subclass 6, including apparatus comprising two
    telescoping tubes which slide, where usually one tube is fastened to a
    stationary part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 580 for fluid distribution systems
    including a running joint between movable parts of the system.


CLS 184/10
TXT Subject matter under subclass 6, wherein a tube or collecting device is
    secured to a moving bearing and the tube or collecting device carries a
    member which at some point in its movement wipes a drop of oil from the
    outlet of the reservoir of oil which is permanently secured.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63.


CLS 184/11.1
TXT Splash:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the lubricant is splashed by some
    moving part of the machine to be lubricated into one or more receptacles
    placed so as to feed the lubricant so collected to the part(s) to be
    lubricated.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is distinguished from subclass 13.1, in this
    subclass, by the fact in this subclass there are means to catch the
    lubricant when splashed and to carry it to the part(s) to be lubricated.


CLS 184/11.2
TXT With conduit:

    Subject matter under subclass 11.1 including a pipe, tube, or the like to
    transmit lubricant to or from the part(s) to be lubricated.


CLS 184/11.3
TXT For transmission band:

    Subject matter under subclass 11.1 wherein a transmission band is
    lubricated.


CLS 184/11.4
TXT With connecting rod clippers or scoops:

    Subject matter under subclass 11.1 wherein connecting rod clippers or
    scoops pick up lubricant from a crankcase during movement of the rod.


CLS 184/11.5
TXT For endless band or chain feed:

    Subject matter under subclass 11.1 wherein an endless band or a chain is
    lubricated.


CLS 184/12
TXT Devices for conveying the lubricant from a reservoir to a bearing.  They
    are more complicated than those of subclass 61.


CLS 184/13.1
TXT Splash:

    Subject matter under the class definitions including apparatus in which a
    moving part strikes a body of lubricant and spatters it about, so that it
    comes in contact with a part to be lubricated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11.1,   for devices which splash lubricant into a catch means, with
    lubricant then being carried to a part to be lubricated.


CLS 184/14
TXT Primarily receptacles for holding lubricant having an outlet, and
    associated with this receptacle so as practically to be a part of it, is
    some arrangement which regulates and causes (either one or both) the oil to
    be delivered through the outlet.  These devices as above described are
    complete in themselves and may be removed as an entirety from one machine
    and placed on another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating.

    222,    Dispensing.


CLS 184/14.1
TXT Spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 14 including apparatus specially intended,
    and arranged, to lubricate a spring (e.g., coil, leaf, spiral, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for devices for lubricating vehicle chassis.


CLS 184/15.1
TXT Belt, cable, chain or conveyor:

    Subject matter under subclass 14, including apparatus for lubricating a
    belt, cable, chain or conveyor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 123.4 and 381+ for chain saws, per se.

    83,     Cutting, subclass 169 for chain saw lubrications.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 500 for power-driven conveyor
    lubricators.

    305,    Wheel Substitutes for Land Vehicles, subclasses 117+ for wheel
    lubricators.


CLS 184/15.2
TXT With injector:

    Subject matter under subclass 15.1, wherein the lubricant is applied to a
    belt, cable, chain or conveyor by an injection means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for steam or air injector lubricators.


CLS 184/15.3
TXT With intermittent spray or drip:

    Subject matter under subclass 15.1, wherein an alternately on and off
    apparatus supplies lubricant to a belt, cable, chain or conveyor.


CLS 184/16
TXT Devices for applying the lubricant by a swab.


CLS 184/17
TXT Devices for applying the lubricant by roller.


CLS 184/18
TXT Devices designed and adapted especially for lubricating an engine-cylinder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 153+ for lubricating means
    for the cylinder of an expansible chamber device.


CLS 184/19
TXT The lubricant is applied by a swab usually fastened to the piston-rod.


CLS 184/20
TXT Cylinder-lubricators in which the lubricant is applied by a rotary swab.


CLS 184/21
TXT Devices intended to be placed upon an elevator-car and in position to
    lubricate the slideways of the same.


CLS 184/22
TXT The lubricant is applied by a swab.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102.


CLS 184/23
TXT The lubricant is applied by a roller or a rotating brush.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the notes thereunder.


CLS 184/24
TXT As the name indicates, these devices are adapted to lubricate a piston-rod.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 512+ for a dynamic, circumferential, contact seal for
    other than a piston intended to be contained or compressed by a gland
    member in a packing box having means to introduce or direct a fluid.


CLS 184/25
TXT Piston-rod lubricators in which the lubricant is applied by a stationary
    swab.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     22 and 102.



    Lubricators, Force-feed.  In this type the lubricant in the reservoir is
    placed under pressure by some means, and thus forced to its destination.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 311+, particularly subclasses 383+ for dispensers having means
    to couple to receivers.


CLS 184/26
TXT A pump is used to force the lubricant from the container to its destination.

    (1)     Note.  Similar structures are to be found in Class 417, Pumps and
    Class 418, Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 495.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 251+, particularly, subclasses 255, 309,
    333+, and 372+.


CLS 184/27.1
TXT Mechanically operated:

    Device under subclass 26 wherein the pump is mechanically connected to some
    source of power, usually a moving part of the machine upon which the
    lubricant-receptacle is mounted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71      and 74, for mechanically operated lubricator valves.


CLS 184/27.2
TXT Multiple pumps:

    Device under subclass 27.1 including a plurality of separate, mechanically
    operated pumping units.


CLS 184/27.3
TXT Pump with sight feed:

    Device under subclass 27.1 having a transparent portion through which the
    flow of the lubricant can be viewed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     for a lubricator sight feed, per se.


CLS 184/27.4
TXT Oscillating cylinder:

    Device under subclass 27.1 wherein the pump includes elements which undergo
    angular or swinging movement, rather than linear, to pump the lubricant.


CLS 184/28
TXT The pump-piston is operated by hand.


CLS 184/29
TXT The piston is actuated by intermittent application of fluid under pressure
    to the said piston.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72      and 76.


CLS 184/30
TXT The piston is actuated by means of a pendulum which is vibrated by the
    motion of the machinery.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73      and 78.


CLS 184/31
TXT Pumps of the rotary type where the lubricant is forced by the direct
    pressure of continuously revolving vanes or equivalents.


CLS 184/32
TXT The piston is so arranged that by its own oscillation it covers and
    uncovers ports, so that during its forcing stroke a lubricant is forced
    through an outlet-passage and upon its suction-stroke the lubricant is
    admitted to the pump-cylinder.


CLS 184/33
TXT The pump is mounted upon the valve and both rotate together.  In action it
    is like subclass 35, hereinafter defined.


CLS 184/34
TXT The discharge-valve from the pump-cylinder oscillates so that the
    outlet-passage is in connection with the pump-cylinder during the forcing
    stroke and the in-take-passage is connected with the pump-cylinder at the
    suction-stroke of the piston.


CLS 184/35
TXT The discharge-valve from the pump-cylinder rotates continuously, and the
    ports are so arranged that upon the forcing stroke of the piston oil is
    distributed to a single outlet or several outlets and upon the
    suction-stroke the valve is in position to allow the lubricant to enter the
    pump-cylinder from a source of supply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    indented subclasses under Lubricators, Gravity-feed, Automatic cutoff,
    Rotatable valve.


CLS 184/36
TXT Things not part of the lubricator-proper, but used in connection with the
    same, such as special valves, etc.



    Lubricators, Force-feed, Followers.  Lubricators wherein the lubricant is
    forced by a piston, which follows and pushes the lubricant from the
    receptacle.


CLS 184/37
TXT The follower is moved by a mechanical connection between it and some
    actuating source.


CLS 184/38.1
TXT Hand-operated:

    The piston-follower is actuated by hand to force the lubricant out of its
    receptacle.


CLS 184/38.2
TXT Follower rod threaded to receptacle:

    Device under subclass 38.1 wherein the piston-follower is attached to a rod
    which is joined to the lubricant-receptacle by a threaded connection for
    relative movement.


CLS 184/38.3
TXT Follower threaded to receptacle:

    Device under subclass 38.1 wherein the piston-follower, itself, is joined
    to the lubricant-receptacle by a threaded connection for relative movement.


CLS 184/38.4
TXT Follower threaded to rod:

    Device under subclass 38.1 wherein the piston-follower is attached to a rod
    by a threaded connection for relative movement.


CLS 184/39
TXT Fluid-operated:

    The piston-follower is actuated by fluid pressure which urges it to move in
    one direction to force the lubricant out of its receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54      and 55.1+, for lubricators wherein the lubricant is subjected
    directly to a fluid pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 434+ for a charge forming
    device.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 389+ for a fluid pressure actuated discharge
    assistant.


CLS 184/39.1
TXT Cyclical-type metered injector:

    Device under subclass 39 wherein the piston-follower is subjected to a
    pulse of fluid pressure to force a given amount of lubricant from its
    receptacle in one shot, the piston-follower subsequently returning to its
    initial position and the receptacle being refilled from a reservoir to
    complete the cycle and await the next pulse.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.4,    for a similar device included in a system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal Combustion Engines, subclasses 446+ for an internal
    combustion engine having a fuel injection device.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 88+ for an
    injection nozzle and pump.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus subclasses 34+ for a liquid pump
    of that class type.


CLS 184/40
TXT Fluid operated followers which are returned by fluid-pressure.


CLS 184/41
TXT Fluid-operated followers which are assisted by the expansive force of a
    spring.


CLS 184/42
TXT Fluid-operated followers which are returned by a spring.


CLS 184/43
TXT Followers actuated by centrifugal force, due to the rotation of the object
    upon which the lubricator is placed.


CLS 184/44
TXT Followers actuated by mechanism operated by a pendulum, which pendulum is
    swung by the motion of the machine.


CLS 184/45.1
TXT Spring-operated:

    The piston-follower is actuated by a spring to force the lubricant out of
    its receptacle.


CLS 184/45.2
TXT Spiral spring:

    Device under subclass 45.1 wherein the spring element is a coil-spring.


CLS 184/46
TXT A weight upon the follower moves the same.


CLS 184/47
TXT There are two receptacles, and the followers are connected so that when one
    follower moves in one direction the other follower moves in the opposite
    direction.


CLS 184/48.1
TXT Locking devices:

    The piston-follower is engaged by means which inhibit or prevent it from
    moving away from the lubricant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45.1+   and 46, for spring and gravity operated devices which urge the
    piston-follower toward the lubricant.


CLS 184/48.2
TXT Friction type:

    Device under subclass 48.1 wherein the piston-follower engaging means
    utilizes friction between relatively movable members to inhibit or prevent
    the piston-follower from moving away from the lubricant.


CLS 184/49
TXT Steam is admitted to some receptacle, where it condenses, and then the
    water of condensation flows into the lubricant-receptacle and displaces the
    lubricant, and thus forces it out.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55.1+.


CLS 184/50.1
TXT Double passage:

    Device under subclass 49 wherein the steam and water of condensation flow
    into the lubricant-receptacle through one passage and the displaced
    lubricant flows out of the lubricant- receptacle through a second passage.


CLS 184/50.2
TXT Atomizer:

    Device under subclass 1 including means to reduce the lubricant to minute
    particles.


CLS 184/51
TXT The receptacle has but one passage to the interior, and the steam must
    enter and the lubricant flow out this same passage.


CLS 184/52
TXT Devices used in connection with condensation-displacement lubricators and
    placed on a steam-chest or analogous device to prevent back pressure in the
    lubricator.

    (1)     Note.  For restrictors not limited by structure to use with a
    lubricating system, see Class 138, Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 40,
    and indented subclasses.


CLS 184/53
TXT Receptacles attached to the lubricator by means of which lubricant may be
    fed to a bearing in addition to the lubricant regularly supplied or can be
    used in case any accident occurs to the principal lubricator.


CLS 184/54
TXT Displacement by liquid:

    Device wherein the lubricant is directly displaced by a liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39+,    for lubricators having a piston-follower between the lubricant and
    the pressurized fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 101.11+ and 206+ for devices of that
    class type using a displacing fluid.


CLS 184/55.1
TXT Displacement by air or steam:

    Lubricating device wherein the lubricant is directly displaced by air or
    steam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39+,    for lubricators having a piston-follower between the lubricant and
    the pressurized fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 101.11+ and 206+ for devices of that
    class type using a displacing fluid.


CLS 184/55.2
TXT Air line lubricators:

    Device under subclass 55.1 wherein lubricant passes from a receptacle and,
    as it leaves, it is brought into contact with a stream of air or steam and
    divided into fine particles or mist and carried by the air or steam to a
    part to be lubricated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6.26,   for a lubrication system including a lubricant mister or atomizer.

    50.2,   for an atomizer in a condensation displacement system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 340+ and 418+
    for related devices of that class type.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 78.1+ for an atomizer
    of that class type.


CLS 184/57
TXT Force-feed lubricators comprising an auxiliary tank in connection with the
    lubricant-receptacle, which tank is charged with compressed air, and this
    air is used to force the lubricant from its receptacle.


CLS 184/58
TXT The lubricant is drawn by suction to the part to be lubricated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 590+.


CLS 184/59
TXT Force-feed, fluid-operated suction lubricators having an opening of some
    kind which permits the air to come into the receptacle, the pressure of the
    air assisting the suction.


CLS 184/60
TXT The lubricant lies directly in the path of a fluid under pressure, which
    mechanically wears off small particles of lubricant from a mass of solid
    lubricant and carries it to its destination.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 222+ for general
    disinfecting apparatus using water under pressure to carry small particles
    from a solid mass of disinfectant to a destination.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 261+ apparatus which dissolves a
    portion of a solid to form a solution.


CLS 184/61
TXT The lubricant is forced to its destination by means of a conveyor, such as
    a screw, or by buckets and chain.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclass 34.


CLS 184/62
TXT A bucket is used to elevate the lubricant and convey it to some outlet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10.


CLS 184/63
TXT The title is self-explanatory.


CLS 184/64
TXT The lubricant is fed through a wick by capillary attraction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclass 25.


CLS 184/65
TXT Lubricators where the lubricant is fed by gravity and the flow is usually
    controlled by a valve which is operated by hand.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclass 4.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 434+, 445, and 590+.


CLS 184/66
TXT The feed is intermittently cut off and the valve is automatically actuated
    from some extraneous source, such as the machine which is being lubricated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 451.


CLS 184/67
TXT The valve is actuated by an electromagnet, solenoid, or similar electrical
    device.


CLS 184/68
TXT The valve is caused to operate by the expansion of some metal, which
    expansion is caused by the heat generated by the friction of the bearing to
    which the lubricator is attached.


CLS 184/69
TXT The valve is usually a ball or some piece of metal of such shape that the
    valve seats and unseats due to the vibration of the machine to which the
    lubricator is attached.


CLS 184/70
TXT Devices attached to a rotating machine part.  During the rotation of the
    part the oil is splashed and enters ports near the top of an outlet-pipe to
    a bearing.  When not in motion, the level of the oil is below the ports in
    the tube.  Therefore there is no feeding.

    Lubricators, Gravity-feed, Automatic cut-off, Rotatable-valve.  The valve
    is rotated to cause intermittent feeding substantially in the manner
    out-lined in the definitions of the subclasses under
    Vertically-reciprocating valve.


CLS 184/71
TXT The valve is rotated by direct mechanical connection with some source of
    power, substantially in the manner outlined in the definitions of the
    subclasses under Vertically-reciprocating valve.

    (1)     Note.  See also this class, subclasses 27.1+, 33, and 35.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 434.


CLS 184/72
TXT The valve is rotated by fluid-pressure, substantially in the manner
    outlined in the definitions of the subclasses under
    Vertically-reciprocating valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     33, and 35.


CLS 184/73
TXT The valve is rotated by a pendulum, substantially in the manner outlined in
    the definitions of the subclasses under Vertically-reciprocating valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     33, and 35.



    Lubricators, Gravity-feed, Automatic cut-off, Vertically-reciprocating
    valve.  In this group of subclasses the valve regulating the feed is
    reciprocated vertically.


CLS 184/74
TXT The valve is operated by mechanical connections to some source or power and
    caused to vertically reciprocate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal Combustion Engines, subclass 434.


CLS 184/75
TXT The valve is caused to return to its initial position by means of a spring.


CLS 184/76
TXT The valve is subject to fluid-pressure intermittently and causes the valve
    to vertically reciprocate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     and 59.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 434.


CLS 184/77
TXT The valve is caused to operate because of the rotary motion of the object
    to which it is attached.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70.


CLS 184/78
TXT The valve is operated by a pendulum.  Due to the motion of the object to
    which the lubricator is attached the pendulum is caused to vibrate.


CLS 184/79
TXT The valve in its operation slides horizontally and may be operated either
    by the motion of the machine or by some outside source.


CLS 184/80
TXT Lubricators having novelty in the closure for the cup as well as the valve
    which regulates the flow of lubricant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88.1+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclass 56.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 482+.


CLS 184/81
TXT A single receptacle has several outlets leading to several bearings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 579+.


CLS 184/82
TXT The valve is set to give a certain feed, usually by screw, and the valve is
    opened or closed by a bodily vertical movement of the valve-stem.


CLS 184/83
TXT The controlling-valve is constructed so as to deliver a definite quantity
    of lubricant at one time on turning the valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 344+, 425+, 476, and 477.


CLS 184/84
TXT The lubricant-container has only one opening.  Upon being inverted the
    receptacle is air-tight, and the feed of the oil is regulated by the vacuum
    created in the top of the receptacle.


CLS 184/85
TXT The feed is accomplished by the use of a siphon.


CLS 184/86
TXT The valves have means coacting with the valve-rod to lock the same in any
    adjusted position.


CLS 184/87
TXT The outlet from the receptacle is covered by a mass of fibrous matter.
    This mass may be compressed, and so regulate the outflow of lubricant.


CLS 184/88.1
TXT Oil cup closure:

    Device under subclass 14 for covering or closing an oil cup or lubricant
    fitting.

    (1)     Note.  An "oil cup" is a device which holds a relatively small
    amount of fluent lubricant which discharges by gravity or capillary action
    (e.g., a wick).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     for a closure combined with a valve in a gravity feed lubricator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 200+ for closures for bottles and jars.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 200+ for closure for receptacles, and see
    the notes thereunder.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 544+ and see the notes thereunder.


CLS 184/88.2
TXT Flexible cover:

    Device under subclass 88.1 wherein the oil cup closure is a cover made of
    flexible material.


CLS 184/89
TXT The part that closes the opening is held in place in a closed position by a
    spring and is adapted to have the nose of an oil-can push back the
    closing-piece and admit lubricant.


CLS 184/90
TXT The cover of the cup is hinged.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclass 56.


CLS 184/91
TXT The cover is returned to its closed position by a spring.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclass 56.


CLS 184/92
TXT The cover upon being rotated uncovers an opening through which lubricant
    can be admitted to the cup.


CLS 184/93
TXT Devices in which the cover is brought back to its initial or closed
    position by a spring.


CLS 184/94
TXT The cover slides, and so uncovers an opening for the admission of lubricant.


CLS 184/95
TXT The cover is returned to its initial or closed position by a spring.


CLS 184/96
TXT Devices attached to a lubricator through which the lubricant flows as it is
    discharged and by means of which the quantity and rate of discharge may be
    observed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 323 and indented subclass.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 662+, and see the notes thereto, for
    structures wherein a transparent panel is mounted in a wall.


CLS 184/97
TXT Auxiliary attachments to a sight-feed, such as reflectors, shields, etc.


CLS 184/98
TXT The heat generated by the friction of the bearing parts melts a solid or
    semisolid in the cup and allows it to run onto the bearing.


CLS 184/99
TXT A solid stick of lubricant is in contact with the bearing.  It is melted by
    the friction.


CLS 184/100
TXT Devices fastened to a moving part of a slide-bearing and applying lubricant
    to the bearing parts.  They are separate from the structure which they
    lubricate and may be removed from the same, in which respect they
    distinguish from subclass 5, in this class.


CLS 184/101
TXT Devices not otherwise classifiable for applying lubricant to a bearing by a
    roll, usually covered with felt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3       and 17.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the notes thereunder.


CLS 184/102
TXT Miscellaneous devices for applying lubricant to a bearing by a swab.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      16, 19, 22, 25, and 64.


CLS 184/103.1
TXT Constant level:

    Device under subclass 14 having a lubricant distributing-reservoir and
    means to automatically maintain a constant level of lubricant therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 590+ for a constant level
    charge mixing device in an internal-combustion engine.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 64+ for dispenser having material level
    control means.


CLS 184/103.2
TXT Float-controlled:

    Device under subclass 103.1 wherein the automatic level maintaining means
    includes a buoyant body floating on or in the lubricant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclass 70 for a device of that
    class type having a float controlled liquid inlet valve.


CLS 184/104.1
TXT Lubricant heating and/or cooling device:

    Device under subclass 14 including means to increase or decrease (or both)
    the temperature of the lubricant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 47+ for a structurally installed heat
    exchanger; and appropriate subclasses for a heat exchanger, per se.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclass 930 for a seal including means to introduce, circulate,
    or remove fluid having a heating or cooling feature.


CLS 184/104.2
TXT For internal-combustion engine:

    Device under subclass 104.1 wherein the machine to be lubricated is
    disclosed as an internal-combustion engine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 90.1+ and 196 for
    lubricators limited by structure for use only with an internal-combustion
    engine.


CLS 184/104.3
TXT Lubricant cooling device:

    Device under subclass 104.2 having only means to decrease the temperature
    of the lubricant.


CLS 184/105.1
TXT Refilling device:

    Device under subclass 14 including means to replenish the lubricant in the
    lubricant-receptacle, either directly into a lubricant cup or through a
    grease fitting, without disturbing the apparatus being lubricated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    appropriate subclasses beginning with subclass 311, particularly subclasses
    383+ for a filling means and associated receiver.


CLS 184/105.2
TXT Grease gun:

    Device under subclass 105.1 wherein the means to replenish includes a
    lubricant delivery member which has means to detachably fit on or in a
    lubricant receiving nipple or fitting on the apparatus being lubricated.


CLS 184/105.3
TXT Nipple or fitting:

    Device under subclass 14 including means detachable fluid connection
    between the refilling device and the lubricant-receptacle of the apparatus
    being lubricated.

    (1)     Note.  A "Zerk" fitting is a common nipple or fitting.


CLS 184/106
TXT Devices placed beneath a bearing which catch the unused oil and either hold
    the same or have means connected therewith to return it to the reservoir.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 571+ for a drip or drain pan, per se.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 108+.


CLS 184/107
TXT FUSIBLE SAFETY MEANS FOR LUBRICATION DEVICE:

    Subject matter under the class definition including containing means
    utilizing a condition responsive plug to inhibit lubricant flow from the
    container, and which lubricates a device when environmental conditions of
    predetermined temperature or pressure cause the plug to melt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6.4,    for lubrication systems which include safety devices.


CLS 184/108
TXT SAFETY ALARM OR INDICATING MEANS:

    Subject matter under the class definition including apparatus provided with
    audio or visual signal means responsive to an abnormal operating condition
    of a lubrication device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6.4,    for lubrication systems with safety or indicating means.


CLS 184/109
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition including devices for lubricating
    surfaces which can not be classified elsewhere.


CLS 185/
TTL MOTORS:  SPRING, WEIGHT, OR ANIMAL POWERED

CLS 185/
TXT

    This is the class of spring, weight and animal powered motors and is
    specific to motors of these types and to plural arrangements of such motors.

    (1)     Note.  Composite motors are defined as involving a plurality of
    energy converting means, each of which is capable of delivering an output
    to a load which is not one of the means. Accordingly, the combination of
    two motors in which the sole function of one of the motors is to wind the
    second motor or to otherwise condition it for performing work for
    delivering energy is not classified as a composite motor but merely as a
    single motor having winding means.



    Plural motors, both of which are Class 185 motors, are classified in
    subclasses 2+ of this class.  Plural motors of diverse types, one of which
    is a Class 185 type motor, are classified in appropriate subclasses of
    Class 60 with the exception noted in (3) Note below.

    (3)     Note.  Relative to combinations involving a Class 185 motor and a
    winding arrangement therefor, Class 185 takes such combinations when both
    the output motor and the winding motor are Class 185 type motors.  Where
    the winding motor is not a Class 185 motor (as, for example, tide motors),
    classification is in the appropriate subclass of Class 60 with one
    exception.  Combinations involving an electric motor for winding a Class
    185 motor, the electric motor being incapable of performing other work, are
    classified in the appropriate winding subclasses of this class.


CLS 185/2
TXT Motors under the class definition composed of two or more prime movers,
    with separate trains running to a common transmitting element, all of which
    prime movers are of the class comprising spring motors, weight motors and
    animal powered motors.

    (1)     Note.  See (2) Note to the class definition of this class for
    further definition of composite motors of the type herein classified and
    for the distinction between such motors and motor-motor winding
    combinations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 698+ for motors of types properly
    classifiable in other classes than this combined with motors of the type
    provided for in this class.


CLS 185/3
TXT Composite motors under subclass 2 in which energy expended by animals is
    converted into mechanical energy in all of the prime movers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    for single motors of the animal powered type.


CLS 185/4
TXT Composite motors under subclass 2 in which all of the prime movers are
    weight motors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27+,    for weight motor features not specific to composite weight motor
    combinations, and see the definition of subclass 27 for the definition of
    weight motors.


CLS 185/5
TXT Composite weight motors under subclass 4 which include escapements for
    controlling the operation of the motor.

    (1)     Note.  By the term "escapement", as used throughout this class, is
    meant a device which receives energy from a power plant and by virtue
    thereof performs a cycle of movements in which the escapement first causes
    the power element to cease its motion and later permits it to resume its
    motion. Throughout this class, if the escapement includes a spring or a
    weight which derives its energy from another motor, the device is
    classified in the appropriate Winding Motor subclass instead of in the
    Escapement controlled subclass and a cross-reference is placed in the
    appropriate Winding, Overwinding preventers subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for composite weight motors having escapements which include a
    spring or a weight which derives its energy from another motor.

    9,      for composite spring motors including escapements and indented
    subclass 13 for similar structures having also overwinding prevention
    means.  See (1) Note.

    31,     for escapement controlled weight motors.

    35,     for weight motors having winding means and overwinding prevention
    means and including escapements.  See (1) Note.

    38,     for escapement controlled spring motors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 1.5 for escapements, per se.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 124+ for
    escapements included in devices which are restricted to use in instruments
    employed for measuring time.


CLS 185/6
TXT Composite weight motors under subclass 4 having special devices for raising
    the weights.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10+     and 39+, for spring motors including winding arrangements.

    32+,    for weight motors including weight raising or winding means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 111+ and appropriate
    indented subclasses, for mechanical movements of the intermittent grip type
    adapted to be used in winding arrangements.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 266+ for apparatus for hauling or hoisting a load including a
    driven drum which contacts and pulls on a cable.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 33, 50,
    147+, 190+, and 206+ for similar combinations which are restricted to use
    in time measuring instruments.


CLS 185/7
TXT Composite weight motors under subclass 6 in which the weights are raised by
    motor means.

    (1)     Note.  See (2) and (3) Notes to the class definition of this class
    for the distinctions made between plural and composite motors and single
    motors having a winding motor and for statement of the line between this
    class and Class 60.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11+     and 40+, for spring motors which derive their energy from other
    motors.

    33,     for weight motors in which the weight is raised by motor means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 149+, and
    206+, for spring and weight motors which derive their energy from other
    motors, and which are restricted to use in time measuring instruments.


CLS 185/9
TXT Composite motors under subclass 2 in which all the prime movers are spring
    motors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37+,    for spring motor features not specific to composite spring motor
    combinations and see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 185/10
TXT Composite spring motors under subclass 9 having special devices for winding
    the springs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6+,     for mechanism for operating winding drums, and see the search notes
    to subclass 6.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, subclasses 7+ and 16+, for
    compressing and releasing devices for springs used to operate devices for
    projecting missiles through the air.

    186,    Merchandising, subclasses 10+ for spring operated store service car
    systems.


CLS 185/11
TXT Composite spring motors under subclass 10 in which the springs are wound up
    by motor means.

    (1)     Note.  See (2) and (3) Notes to the class definition of this class
    for the distinctions made between plural and composite motors and single
    motors having a winding motor and for a statement of the line between this
    class and Class 60.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for composite weight motors which derive their energy from other
    motors, and see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 185/12
TXT Composite spring motors under subclass 11 having shafts rotating in one
    direction only, which alternately wind the springs and receive power
    therefrom, the connecting trains coming to rest after each alternation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for similar structures related to single spring motors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 215+ for such motors combined with
    vehicle structure having occupant propulsion means.


CLS 185/13
TXT Composite spring motors under subclass 10 having means for preventing the
    overwinding of the springs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     for overwinding preventers as included in single weight motors
    having winding means.

    43,     for overwinding preventers as included in single spring motors
    having winding means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 467+ for wrenches or screwdrivers responsive to
    the amount of torque on the work being turned.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclass 209, for
    time measuring instruments having overwinding preventers.


CLS 185/14
TXT Composite spring motors under subclass 10 having means for showing the
    degree to which the springs of the motors are wound or for operating an
    indicator when the springs need winding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6+,     for composite weight motors having winding means some of which
    include indicating means.

    36      and 44, for means combined with single weight and spring motors
    respectively for indicating the need for winding or the degree to which the
    motor has been supplied with potential energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 210+ for
    winding indicators as included in time measuring instruments.


CLS 185/15
TXT Motors under the class definition comprising means whereby energy expended
    by animals, including human beings is converted into mechanical energy.

    (1)     Note.  Where merely the dead weight of an animal or operator is
    used to do work, classification is in the appropriate weight motor
    subclass. See, for example, subclass 28 of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2       and 3, for composite motors, one or all of which may be motors of
    the type provided for in this subclass.


CLS 185/15.5
TXT Motors under subclass 15 in which a pivoted seat is the means used to apply
    the energy of the animal or human being to a system of levers whereby such
    energy is transmitted to an output element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 523+, for hand levers and
    treadles, per se.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 220+ for such pivoted seat motors
    combined with vehicle structure.


CLS 185/16
TXT Motors under subclass 15 in which the animals tread upon an endless belt.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 202+ for a positive drive belt; and subclasses 237+ for a
    friction drive belt.


CLS 185/17
TXT Motors under subclass 15 in which the animals tread on the curved surfaces
    of pivoted drums.


CLS 185/18
TXT Motors under subclass 15 in which the animals tread on pivoted disks.


CLS 185/19
TXT Motors under subclass 15 in which the animals draw upon a sweep.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 107+ and
    207+ for sweep type drives combined with comminutors.


CLS 185/20
TXT Sweep type motors under subclass 19 having devices for driving or whipping
    the draft animals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for other driving and whipping devices found in motors of the
    animal powered type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    54,     Harness, appropriate subclasses, for driving and whipping devices
    associated with harness.

    231,    Whips and Whip Apparatus, subclasses 2+ for whips, per se.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 170+ for whip socket attachments for land
    vehicles, and especially subclass 178 for whip manipulating devices.


CLS 185/21
TXT Devices under subclass 19 comprising sweeps for use in sweep motors,
    including structure unitary therewith or mounted thereon.


CLS 185/22
TXT Sweeps under subclass 21 in which provision is made for equalizing the
    draft of the animals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    278,    Land Vehicles:  Animal Draft Appliances, subclasses 3+ and 5+ for
    equalizers of general application.


CLS 185/23
TXT Devices under subclass 19 comprising draft devices for use in sweep motors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for equalizers for such draft devices when included in sweep
    subcombinations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    54,     Harness, for draft devices of general application associated with
    harness.

    278,    Land Vehicles:  Animal Draft Appliances, for draft devices of
    general application.


CLS 185/24
TXT Animal powered motors under subclass 15 having means for driving or
    whipping the draft animals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for sweep type motors including driving or whipping means, and see
    the search classes noted there.


CLS 185/25
TXT Motors under subclass 15 having means for anchoring such motors to a fixed
    position during operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 155+ for an earth
    piercing or expanding anchor, per se.


CLS 185/27
TXT Motors under the class definition in which kinetic energy is derived from
    the movement of a mass by virtue of the effects of gravity.  Such motors
    are generally known as weight motors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4+,     for composite motors, all of which are weight motors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 639+ for a motor actuated by accumulating
    and dumping liquid or fluent material; and subclass 675 for a gravity water
    actuated by weight of condensed steam.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclass 390.4 for a reeling
    device powered by a weight.


CLS 185/28
TXT Weight motors under subclass 27 in which energy is derived from the weight
    of the operators without other application of energy by the operators.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15.5,   for motors in which energy is derived from work done by an operator
    on a lever system including a pivoted seat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 523+, for hand levers and
    treadles, per se.


CLS 185/29
TXT Weight motors under subclass 27 in which the actuating mass or masses have
    an oscillating motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 134+, 165+
    and 179+, for clocks including motors which are operated by pendulums.


CLS 185/30
TXT Oscillating weight motors under subclass 29 in which the actuating mass or
    masses are mounted on supports subjected to irregular movements, or to a
    wave motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 485, for changeable
    exhibitors which are operated by pendulum type weight motors.

    184,    Lubrication, subclasses 30, 44, 73, and 78, for pendulum type motor
    operators for various types of pressure lubricating systems.

    235,    Registers, subclass 105, for pedometers in which the register is
    operated by movements of a weight.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 150 and
    208, for self-winding watches which include weight motors of the type
    provided for in this subclass.

    440,    Marine Propulsion, subclass 10 for oscillating weight, wave
    propulsion motors combined with ship structure for ship propulsion.


CLS 185/31
TXT Weight motors under subclass 27 having escapement means to control the
    cycle of operation of such motors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for composite weight motors which are escapement controlled, and
    see the search notes thereunder for related fields of search, and (1) Note
    thereto for the definition of the term "escapement".


CLS 185/32
TXT Weight motors under subclass 27 having special devices for raising the
    weights, as by winding a weight supporting line on a drum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6+,     for composite weight motors having winding means, and see the
    search notes under subclass 6.


CLS 185/33
TXT Weight motors under subclass 32 in which the weights are raised by motor
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for composite weight motors having motor means for raising the
    weights, and see the search notes to that subclass.


CLS 185/35
TXT Weight motors under subclass 32 having means for preventing overwinding the
    weights of weight motors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for overwinding preventers as included in composite spring motors
    having winding means, and see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 185/36
TXT Weight motors under subclass 32 having means for indicating the degree to
    which the weights are wound or for operating an indicator when the weights
    need winding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for composite spring motors including winding indicating means, and
    see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 185/37
TXT Motors under the class definition in which the prime movers are springs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9+,     for motor combinations comprising a plurality of spring motors of
    the type provided for in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, appropriate subclasses, and
    especially subclasses 517 and 520+ for changeable exhibitors having spring
    motor operating means or spring reels.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 18.1, 20+ and
    22, for fishing rods having spring reels.

    54,     Harness, subclass 70 for harness checking and unchecking devices
    containing spring reels.

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, subclasses 7+ and 16+ for
    compressing and releasing devices for springs used to operate devices for
    projecting missiles through the air.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, particularly
    subclasses 291+ for roll type closures having spring motors when the motors
    are combined with a brake or stop, and subclasses 313+ when not so combined.

    186,    Merchandising, subclasses 10+ for store service car propelling
    means in which springs are employed to propel the cars.

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, subclasses 12+ for flexible
    extensions for electrical transmission lines, including spring means, and
    subclasses 91+ for trolley retrieving devices which are retracted by spring
    motors.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 63+ for
    rotating contact snap acting switches having operating means.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 226, 251+, and 371+ for
    a reeling device powered by a spring.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 330.1 and 334.1+ for spring reel operated,
    vertically adjustable suspended supports.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 402 for light supporting devices having
    vertical adjusting means operated by spring reels.

    473,    Amusement Devices:   Games, subclasses 35+ for a cue chalking
    device which may contain a spring reel.


CLS 185/38
TXT Spring motors under subclass 37 having escapement means for controlling the
    operation of such motors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for composite weight motors which are escapement controlled, and
    see the search notes thereunder for related fields of search, and (1) Note
    thereto for the definition of the term "escapement".


CLS 185/39
TXT Spring motors under subclass 37 having special devices for winding the
    springs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6+,     for composite weight motors having winding means and see the search
    notes under subclass 6.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclass 7.5, and see the notes thereto, for watch and clock
    mainspring winders.


CLS 185/40
TXT Spring motors under subclass 39 in which the springs are wound up by motor
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for composite weight motors having motor operated winding means and
    see the search notes thereunder, for spring and weight motors which derive
    their energy from other motors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 31 and 63+ for
    toy phonographs having a spring powered motor.


CLS 185/41
TXT Spring motors under subclass 40 having shafts rotating in one direction
    only, which alternately wind the springs and receive power therefrom, the
    connecting trains coming to rest after each alternation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for composite spring motors of the momentum type and see the search
    notes thereunder.


CLS 185/43
TXT Spring motors under subclass 39 having means for preventing the overwinding
    of the springs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for composite spring motors having overwinding preventers and see
    the search notes thereunder.


CLS 185/44
TXT Spring motors under subclass 39 having means for showing the degree to
    which the springs of the motors are wound or for operating an indicator
    when the springs need winding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for composite spring motors having winding indicators and see the
    search notes thereunder.


CLS 185/45
TXT Spring Motors under subclass 37 which are distinguished by special features
    relating to the mounting of the springs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 113-182, appropriate subclass therein
    for springs and the mounting therefor not including sufficient related
    structure to constitute a motor; e.g., subclasses 174+ for a coil-spring
    type spring device for moving a tool through (or returning it from,
    subclass 176) a work stroke, or for moving some other object (e.g., door
    latch) for a condition-changing stroke.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 141+ for
    motor spring mounting means as included in instruments employed for
    measuring time.


CLS 186/
TTL MERCHANDISING

CLS 186/
TXT This class comprises methods and apparatus relating to (a) the performing
    of the various and usually normal but required activities pursuant to a
    selling or other mutually beneficent transaction at a retail or like
    service level available to the public or (b) activities directly relating
    to dining.

    (1)     Note.  The transaction is normally held between persons in or at a
    building or other structure.

    (2)     Note.  The subject matter of the class is intended to include the
    combination of a device classifiable, per se, in another class, e.g.,
    conveyor, dispenser, etc., and structure adapting it for use in a business
    establishment available to the public.  No attempt has been made to clear
    other classes of conflicting art and lines and/or placement of art between
    other classes and this class (186) remains the same.

    (3)     Note.  Dining activities include those which transpire between a
    prospective diner and a person or apparatus whereby a contract is satisfied
    or operations are completed whereby a certain desired food or foods and
    related appurtenances are made available to the diner for his or her
    consumption.

    (4)     Note.  Mere method of doing business which consists of nonstatutory
    matter is not subject matter for this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, appropriate subclasses for railway systems, per se.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 327 and 328 for dining and
    merchandising cars, respectively.

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 94+ for
    rotatable terraced horizontal planar surfaces, for example, self-waiting
    tables; and   subclasses 103+ for plural related horizontal planar surface
    members which are rotatable about a vertical axis.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    for devices for transfer of fluent material from a source and relatively
    movable coacting receiver.

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    for an elevator, per se.

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, appropriate subclasses for
    the transmission of electrical energy between a relatively moving vehicle
    and another object.

    194,    Check-Actuated Control Mechanisms, for a check-controlled device,
    per se.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, for power-driven conveyors, per se.

    221,    Article Dispensing, for a dispenser, per se, for articles.

    222,    Dispensing, for a dispenser, per se, for fluent material.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, for electrical
    apparatus for, and corresponding methods of, performing calculation
    operations.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, for apparatus for the propulsion of a
    carrier through a tube means by fluid pressure.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, for devices for handling material or
    an article, and especially subclass 9 for a human body operated eating aid.

    452,    Butchering, subclasses 177+ for an elevator and conveyor means used
    in a butchering operation.

    705,    Data Processing: Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/price Determination, subclass 15 for a data processing system for
    administration of restaurant ordering; subclasses 16+ for a data processing
    system having an electronic cash register or point of sale terminal.


CLS 186/2
TXT Miscellaneous inventions not otherwise classifiable.  The tracks are
    inclined, and the propelling force for the carriers is gravity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclasses 53 and 112.

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and  Ways, subclasses 27 and 32.


CLS 186/3
TXT There are a number of terminals to which the cars are switched from the
    main line, the particular switch operated by a given carrier depending on
    its configuration or size.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15      and 20, for other selective switching features.


CLS 186/4
TXT One end of the track is raised or lowered to give the necessary impelling
    force in the required direction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclasses 53 and 112.


CLS 186/5
TXT Here each end of the track is raised and lowered.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.


CLS 186/6
TXT The ends of the track are attached to pivoted arms, so that when one end of
    the track is raised the other is lowered.


CLS 186/7
TXT The propelling means is on the car in the form of a spring, electric, or
    other motor. In some cases the cars run on a closed track loop and
    distribute and collect selectively and automatically.  In other cases the
    cars are switched selectively and automatically from the main line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclasses 112, 124 and 295+.


CLS 186/8
TXT The car is impelled by the hand either directly or by means of interposed
    mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 112.


CLS 186/9
TXT The car is impelled usually by hand, but with speed increasing means
    interposed between the power and the car.


CLS 186/10
TXT The impelling means is a spring which is strained to the requisite point
    and then suddenly released to propel the car along the track.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, subclass 7, and indented
    subclasses, and subclass 16 and indented subclasses, for spring straining
    and releasing mechanisms similar to those shown in this subclass.


CLS 186/11
TXT The track itself or a line parallel to and coextensive with the track is an
    elastic cable or has springs inserted between its ends and the supports.
    The car is propelled from either end by pulling the line at the end and
    straining the elastic cable or the spring at the opposite end and quickly
    releasing, when the car is propelled through means of a projecting part on
    the line.


CLS 186/12
TXT The end of the track upon which the car rests is tilted to give the
    necessary impulse to propel the car along the remainder of the track, which
    is not inclined.  This subclass also includes cases in which the car rest
    on the level portion of the track, the car being impelled by a bunter
    running down the inclined portion of the track, which is tilted, and the
    bunter released at will.


CLS 186/13
TXT The car is given an impulse by the spreading apart at one end of two
    members inserted between suitable parts on the car. In some cases both
    members are flexible, in other cases one is flexible and the other rigid,
    and one or both movable.  In some cases one member forms the track on which
    the car runs and the other is coextensive with it, in other cases the
    second member extends for a limited distance only.


CLS 186/14
TXT The car is propelled by a running cable or belt and runs on a track or is
    suspended on the cable or belt.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclasses 53, 112 and 180.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power Driven, appropriate subclasses.


CLS 186/15
TXT The carrier is propelled along a track by a continuously running cable, to
    which when the carrier is placed in the proper position it is automatically
    attached by means of a gripper on the carrier.  The carrier runs to a
    designated station, when the gripper is automatically  operated and the car
    switched to its terminal.  The point of release and switching is determined
    by the configuration of the car.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclasses 112, 124, 202, and 204.


CLS 186/16
TXT A belt or cable in the form of a closed loop propels a wheeled car or a
    flight usually along a track.  A receptacle is carried by the car or pushed
    by the flight and is itself deposited at a previously selected point, or
    the contents of the receptacle are deposited at the given point.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclasses 112 and 124.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate  subclasses.


CLS 186/17
TXT The carrier is attached to a cable and is propelled back and forth in the
    same path between the terminals.  It may be propelled both ways by the
    cable or in one direction by the cable and in the reverse by gravity.  In
    some instances the carrier runs on a track, in others it is suspended from
    the propelling cable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railway, subclasses 112 and 180.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 119.01 and  indented subclasses.


CLS 186/18
TXT Here the carrier is attached to the cable and is propelled back and forth
    in the same path.  The car runs on a track or is suspended from the cable.
    Provision is made in some cases for lowering the carrier at the terminals.
    In other instances it is lowered at any intermediate point.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclass 71 and indented subclasses.


CLS 186/19
TXT Devices not otherwise classified for directing a carrier from one track to
    another over an intervening movable track section.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclass 415 and indented subclasses,
    and other appropriate subclasses.


CLS 186/20
TXT Mechanisms by which the carrier is directed to a particular branch along a
    track, the point of switching depending upon the configuration or size of
    the carrier.  In some cases the switch is movable, in others immovable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      13, and 15.


CLS 186/21
TXT The carrier is switched to a particular point, depending upon the size or
    configuration of the carrier, the switch being returned to its original
    position by action of the carrier after passing.


CLS 186/22
TXT Devices for hoisting or lowering a carrier from one level to another.  In
    some cases the devices operate between tracks at different levels, in
    others between a station and a track at another level.

    (1)     Note.  A large number of these devices are shown in this class,
    subclasses, 2, 3 and 8, and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    89,     Ordnance, subclass 46.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffolds, subclasse 42+ for an endless
    conveyor type escape.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 739+ for a platform moved
    about an endless path.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 592+.

    452,    Butchering, subclass 178 for an elevator means used in a butchering
    operation.


CLS 186/23
TXT Devices for hoisting or lowering a carrier from one level to another,
    connected with which are means for controlling the speed of the falling
    carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
    29.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclasses 345+ for fluid dampening means regulating the movement of an
    elevator car, and subclasses 373+ for an elevator car supported brake
    actuated by a speed governor or sensor.

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, subclasses 18, 19 and
    24.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 264+ for apparatus for hauling or hoisting a load including a
    driven device which contacts and pulls on a cable attached to the load.


CLS 186/24
TXT Devices for receiving the impact of the carrier as it reaches the end of
    the line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 82, and indented subclasses.

    104,    Railways, subclass 254.

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for  Vehicle,
    subclasses 343+ for means cushioning the contact of an elevator car with an
    end of its shaft.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 601 or 602, 623 and 719,
    and indented subclass.


CLS 186/25
TXT The retarding action is produced by the carrier sliding on the buffer,
    which is in the form of an inclined plane.  In some cases the buffer is a
    wedge embraced by parts on a car.


CLS 186/26
TXT Miscellaneous cash and parcel carriers not otherwise classified.


CLS 186/27
TXT Carriers running on wheels adapted to the service indicated in the general
    definition of this class and not specifically included in the remaining
    carrier subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclasses 89 and 124.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 147 and 150.


CLS 186/28
TXT Wheeled carriers propelled by a self-contained motor of any form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclasses 112, 124 and  295+.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 148.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 134.5+ for tractors utilized to pull wire into conduits or along a
    messenger.


CLS 186/29
TXT Wheeled carriers in which the cash or parcel receptacle is lowered from its
    normal position while still remaining attached to the car.  In some
    instances the car remains attached to some part of the structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     22 and 23.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclass 71 and indented subclasses.


CLS 186/30
TXT Devices for preventing derailment of wheeled carriers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclasses 243, 244 and 246.


CLS 186/31
TXT Carriers of spherical, cylindrical, and other permissible shapes which roll
    along the track.


CLS 186/32
TXT The carriers slide along the track.  The method of propulsion is
    unrestricted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15.


CLS 186/33
TXT Elementary parts of cash carrier systems and their accessories not
    otherwise classifiable.


CLS 186/34
TXT Track accessories and elementary parts not otherwise classifiable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclasses 112, 124 and 189.

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclass 71, and indented subclasses.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclass 415.


CLS 186/35
TXT CUSTOMER SERVICE:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising means by which a purchaser
    or user may personally and directly consummate a purchase or other
    transaction with a seller or other agent.


CLS 186/36
TXT Combined services:

    Apparatus under subclass 35 provided with means by which two or more
    diverse retailing operations may be performed either simultaneously or
    sequentially from a specific locus.

    (1)     Note.  For example, a person may order groceries or food from an
    automobile while having the tank of the automobile filled with gasoline.


CLS 186/37
TXT Banking:

    Apparatus under subclass 35 directly related to a transaction at a bank or
    like place of business.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    705,    Data Processing: Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/price Determination, subclass 39 for this subject matter combined with
    a data processing arrangement.


CLS 186/38
TXT Dining room service:

    Apparatus under subclass 35 directly related to dining.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    705,    Data Processing: Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/price Determination, subclass 15 for a data processing system having a
    limitation particularly designed for a restaurant.


CLS 186/39
TXT With machine readable means:

    Apparatus under subclass 38 wherein a dining establishment includes a
    device into which sensible encoded menu information is fed, the device upon
    sensing the menu information initiating one or more activities relating to
    a dining operation.


CLS 186/40
TXT In a transport vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 38 wherein a public conveyance is provided with a
    food carrier means, the carrier means conveying food to the vicinity of
    passengers from a food storage or preparation area.


CLS 186/41
TXT Drive-in:

    Apparatus under subclass 38 wherein there is provided means directly
    available to a motorist while in or at a vehicle either for selecting items
    from a menu or for receiving selected items when delivered.


CLS 186/42
TXT Dining table structure movable in fixed path:

    Apparatus under subclass 38 comprising a dining structure surface for
    supporting food or drink being consumed by a diner in the act of eating,
    the structure being secured to a movable support movable in a fixed path of
    travel into and out of a dining area.


CLS 186/43
TXT With conveyor cleaner:

    Apparatus under subclass 38 in which there is provided a moving conveyor or
    carrier and there is further provided a means to cleanse the conveyor or
    carrier at a zone or station as it moves therepast.

    (1)     Note.  Removing dishes or the like from a moving conveyor is not
    considered to be conveyor cleansing for classification here.
    Classification of such structure will be based on other features.


CLS 186/44
TXT Menu make-up table:

    Apparatus under subclass 38 comprising a support structure for supporting a
    variety of foods from which a selection may be made, consumption of the
    food selected being at a place spaced from the support structure.


CLS 186/45
TXT Wheeled carrier:

    Apparatus under subclass 38 comprising a wheeled device for carrying food
    from a preparation area to a dining or other use area (e.g., hospital room).


CLS 186/46
TXT Track guided:

    Apparatus under subclass 45 wherein the wheeled device is mounted to travel
    on rails or other like fixed path means.


CLS 186/47
TXT With food carrier elevating means:
    Apparatus under subclass 46 wherein there is provided structure to raise or
    lower either the wheeled device or a load bearing part thereof whereby to
    transport food for dining from one level to another.

    (1)     Note.  An inclined trackway, per se, for a food carrier carrying
    prepared food to a dining area is not considered proper subject matter for
    classification here, classification of such subject matter being based on
    other features.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for devices for hoisting or lowering a carrier proper for this
    class, but in other than dining room service, from one level to another.


CLS 186/48
TXT Overhead:

    Apparatus under subclass 46 wherein the rail or fixed path means is fixed
    to or otherwise mounted to support structure at or adjacent the ceiling of
    a dining establishment so that the load carrying parts supported on the
    wheel device are suspended therefrom.


CLS 186/49
TXT With conveyor (e.g., belt type):

    Apparatus under subclass 38 comprising a laterally moving surface for
    carrying food or other items pertaining to a dining operation.


CLS 186/50
TXT With food carrier elevating means:
    Apparatus under subclass 49 wherein there is provided structure to raise or
    lower a food tray or the like to or from a conveying level.


CLS 186/51
TXT With elevator:

    Apparatus under subclass 38 comprising a device for vertically hoisting or
    lowering food or appurtenances pertaining to a dining operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    for an elevator, per se.


CLS 186/52
TXT Store service:

    Apparatus under subclass 35 wherein the purchase or transaction is effected
    in a retail or like establishment for the purchase of goods.


CLS 186/53
TXT Drive-in:

    Apparatus under subclass 52 wherein there is provided means directly
    available to a motorist, while in or at a vehicle, either for selecting
    merchandise or for receiving the delivery of selected merchandise.


CLS 186/54
TXT With cooling room having transparent access door:

    Apparatus under subclass 52 wherein the retail or like establishment is
    provided with a partitioned cooling area for perishable items, the
    partition having a see-through door means for permitting item removal.


CLS 186/55
TXT With remote item dispensing:

    Apparatus under subclass 52 having an order make-up means comprising a
    control means spaced from a gate means or the like on the supply or stock
    structure is actuated for dispensing desired items of merchandise
    therefrom, the selected dispensed items being conveyed either to a control
    station or to a point of assembly for further processing of the order.


CLS 186/56
TXT Machine readable:

    Apparatus under subclass 55 wherein the control means comprises a device
    into which sensible encoded order information is fed whereby the control
    means actuates respective gate or the like means mounted on the supply or
    stock structure for selecting desired items of merchandise.


CLS 186/57
TXT Relatively movable selection station and merchandise shelving:

    Apparatus under subclass 52 wherein there is provided a merchandise supply
    or stock structure and a customer or clerk support or station, at least one
    of which being movable relative to the other to facilitate item selection
    by the customer or clerk.


CLS 186/58
TXT With order carrier movable or track means: Apparatus under subclass 52
    provided with fixed path means upon which a container for receiving
    selected items of merchandise is supported for travel therealong.

    (1)     Note.  A shopper pushing a cart in the aisles and selecting items
    from adjacent racks is not considered proper for classification here.


CLS 186/59
TXT Checkout counter:

    Apparatus under subclass 52 comprising store structure to which a purchaser
    may bring his selected items of merchandise either for payment or for
    otherwise completing the transaction.

    (1)     Note.  It is not necessary for a cash register or the like to be
    claimed with the checkout counter structure for classification here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    705,    Data Processing: Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/price Determination, subclasses 16+ for a point of sale terminal or
    electronic cash register having significant data processing.


CLS 186/60
TXT With conveyor to vehicle loading station:
    Apparatus under subclass 59 wherein the store structure comprises a
    conveyance means for delivering the purchased items of merchandise to a
    vehicle loading station.


CLS 186/61
TXT With means enabling price reading:
    Apparatus under subclass 59 wherein the store structure comprises means for
    at least allowing utilization of a scanning or other device for reading
    price information placed on merchandise.


CLS 186/62
TXT With cart accommodation or handling:
    Apparatus under subclass 59 wherein the store structure comprises means on
    or at the store structure or the cart for facilitating the emptying or
    other handling of a shopping cart.

    (1)     Note.  The store structure (i.e., checkout counter) must cooperate
    with a grocery cart in a special way other than merely having the grocery
    cart brought into proximity thereto.


CLS 186/63
TXT Cart emptying facilitation:

    Apparatus under subclass 62 wherein there is provided means on either the
    store structure or the shopping cart to facilitate unloading of the
    shopping cart by a checkout clerk.


CLS 186/64
TXT Self-unloading:

    Apparatus under subclass 63 provided with means on or at the store
    structure coacting with means on the shopping cart for discharging items of
    merchandise from the shopping cart, one of said means being connected to a
    source of power.


CLS 186/65
TXT With elevating means:

    Apparatus under subclass 63 comprising a hoist or other means for raising
    the shopping cart or a part thereof whereby items of merchandise may be
    more readily accessible for removal therefrom by the checkout clerk.


CLS 186/66
TXT With bag storage or bagging support:
    Apparatus under subclass 59 provided with (a) means on or at the store
    structure for holding a supply of bags into which items of merchandise may
    be placed after checkout or (b) means on or at the store structure and
    convenient to a clerk for supporting a bag into which the checked-out items
    of merchandise are placed.


CLS 186/67
TXT With turntable:

    Apparatus under subclass 59 wherein the store structure comprises a
    rotatable platform.


CLS 186/68
TXT With power driven belt conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 59 wherein the store structure comprises a powered
    endless surface means for moving items of merchandise thereon.


CLS 186/69
TXT With power driven conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 52 wherein the store structure comprises a powered
    endless surface means for transporting selected items of merchandise.


CLS 187/
TTL ELEVATOR, INDUSTRIAL LIFT TRUCK, OR STATIONARY LIFT  FOR VEHICLE

CLS 187/
TXT
    This class is the locus for apparatus (i.e., elevator) for shifting a
    discrete load, in its entirety, from an entry level to a vertically spaced
    exit level along a fixed path when the apparatus includes (1) a
    reciprocating, load-underlying, support surface (e.g., car), (2) rigid or
    semirigid means for contacting and limiting the travel of the load support
    surface to the fixed vertical path, and (3) either (a) drive means* (e.g.,
    fluid motor, manually operated linkage) for transmitting to the load
    support surface the force necessary to shift the load between the levels or
    (b) motion resisting means (e.g., counterweight) for slowing the travel of
    the load supporting surface when moving from a higher load entry level to a
    lower load exit level.

    In addition, this class is the locus for a fixedly mounted apparatus (i.e.,
    vehicle lift) which elevates a discrete vehicle, in its entirety, from a
    lower entrance and exit level to a significantly higher upper level where
    the vehicle is intended to be repaired or inspected when the apparatus
    includes both (1) a vertically reciprocating, vehicle-underlying support
    surface and (2) drive-means* for transmitting to the support surface the
    force necessary for it to elevate the vehicle.

    Further, this class is the locus for a mobile wheeled or tracked apparatus
    (e.g., forklift) which travels to, picks up, and shifts a discrete load, in
    its entirety, from one level to another vertically spaced level and then
    carries the load, while still fully supported thereby,a short horizontal
    distance (e.g, length of a warehouse) to a load discharge point; when the
    apparatus includes (1) a vertically reciprocating load support surface
    (e.g., forks) which travels only along a confined linear path and (2)
    drive-means* for transmitting to the support surface the force necessary
    for it to elevate the load.

    This class also provides for a subcombination of one of the above types of
    apparatus when (1) no specific locus for the subcombination exists in
    another class and (2) the subcombination is limited to use with the above
    types of apparatus by a structural modification.

    Finally, this class also provides for an ancillary device (e.g., call
    registration system) which is (1) used exclusively with and (2) has its
    operation either influencing or being influenced by the operation of one of
    the above types of apparatus when no particular locus exists for the device
    in another class.

    (1)     Note.  Elevating apparatus otherwise proper for this class which is
    either (a) specially modified for use with or within another disparate
    apparatus (e.g., machine tool, furnace), (b) in combination with structure
    for treating the discrete load or vehicle in some manner (e.g., work
    cutting) or (c) claimed in combination with specific details of a distinct
    disparate apparatus (e.g., endless feeding belt) or distinct structure
    (e.g., rack) is classified in other classes (e.g., Class 414, subclass 564,
    Class 414, subclasses 592+).

    (2)     Note.  Elevating apparatus which is constructed in such a manner
    that the support surface for the load or vehicle is inherently self-charged
    or self-discharged during movement along its fixed generally vertical path
    of travel is excluded from this class and is classified in other handling
    classes (e.g., Class 414, subclasses 595+).

    (3)     Note.  An apparatus including a load or vehicle support surface
    which travels in a circuit around a fixed pathway having both a vertical
    and a horizontal segment is excluded from this class and is found in other
    handling classes (e.g., Class 198, subclasses 321+).

    (4)     Note.  The load or vehicle support surface of an apparatus proper
    for this class is intended to support the load or vehicle only for a short
    period of time during handling and is not intended for either (a)
    supporting an article in a nonuse storage location (e.g., Class 312,
    subclass 247 vertically moveable cabinet) (b) supporting a useable machine
    or tool (e.g., Class 248, subclasses 646+ movable machinery support) or (c)
    moving one portion of a machine or article relative to another portion
    thereof (e.g., an operator).  In the situation when a vehicle is supported,
    the surface may also support the vehicle during the time necessary for its
    repair or inspection.

    (5)     Note.  The line between an elevator proper for this class (187) and
    a jack proper for Class 254, Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing
    or Pulling Force is as follows:

    (A)     Class 187 provides for elevating apparatus which (1) lifts the
    entire load a significant distance, (2) is either stationary, nonmanually
    transported as a unit between use locations, or supported, at least in
    part, by a building it services in use, and (3) has a load supporting
    surface intended to be guided along or confined to (e.g., located within a
    shaft) a linear path; and

    (B)     Class 254 provides for ``jacking" apparatus which either (1)
    elevates only one portion of the load, (2) is manually pulled as an
    assembled self supporting unit between use locations or carried and is also
    positioned under the load, or (3) is stationary mounted at a particular
    location and is capable of lifting the load only a relatively short
    distance (e.g., far less than the distance between the floor and ceiling of
    a room).

    (6)     Note.  The discrete load proper for this Class is either (a) an
    animal, (b) an article, (c) a unitized bulk material (e.g., cotton bail,
    ice block) or (d) a group or mix thereof moved as a unit between levels.

    (7)     Note.  Glossary of Terms.

            Repetitive terms used in the titles or definitions of the class
    definition and its indented subclasses in a special or limited sense are
    set forth below with the meaning each is to have.  For economy of space, an
    asterisk (*) following a word located in the definition or notes indicates
    that reference should be made to this Glossary for the specific meaning
    thereof.  In addition, an asterisk (*) following a hyphenated phase (e.g.,
    drive-means*) indicates that the entire hyphenated phase has been defined
    in this Glossary.

            Cable*

            A flaccid, elongated, flexible element which can transmit force
    only when under tension (e.g., rope, wire, chain).

            Control*

            Means for regulating the operation of a separate and distinct force
    generating, transmitting, or retarding device (e.g., motor, drive-means*,
    brake) which moves or stops the movement of a relatively movable component
    of apparatus proper for this class (e.g., elevator car), and includes both
    (1) an information input component (e.g., sensor, information storage
    means, manual push button) and (2) a distinct component which effects the
    operation of the force generating, transmitting, or retarding device in a
    particular manner based on the input information.

            Drive-means*

            Means for supplying a motive force to an element to be moved which
    includes both force generating means (e.g., motor) and structural linkage
    (e.g., gears) needed to transmit the force from the generating means to the
    element.

            Landing*

            An in situ floor within a structure (e.g., building) located
    adjacent to an elevator shaft* and to or from which a load (e.g.,
    passenger, cargo) transfers during the charging or discharging of the
    load-underlying support surface of an elevator.

            Shaft*

            A long, narrow, in situ passageway within a structure (e.g.,
    building, ship, mine) which defines the fixed path between the vertically
    spaced load entrance and exit levels traveled by the load-underlying
    support surface of an elevator. notorieties

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures, (e.g., Buildings), subclass 30 for an elevator
    combined with building structure other than that necessary to support or
    guide the elevator.

    104,    Railways, subclasses 35+ for structure shifting railroad vehicles
    through use of a turntable and subclasses 127+ for an elevator having its
    operation interconnected with that of an elevated railway.

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 20+ for a power
    driven surface and subclasses 144.11+ for a vertically adjustable surface
    which supports a load (e.g., lowers as articles are being stacked) but does
    not transport it as a unit between vertical locations.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 141+ for a platform
    having elevating or lowering means which is used to either escape a fire or
    in the maintenance of a building.

    186,    Merchandising, subclasses 22+ for an elevator or drop used to
    service a store and subclasses 47 and 51 for an elevator used in servicing
    a dining room.

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclass 319 for a traveling bridge-type crane
    having a load engager (other than a platform, cage, or similar device)
    which is mounted for guided vertical movement toward and away from the
    bridge.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 137.1+ for means (e.g., elevator ) to load
    cargo or a passenger onto an aircraft.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 247 for a vertically movable
    cabinet.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    electric motor controls, per se.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 3 for means for lifting a
    marine vessel during portage, launching, or removing.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, as following subclasses:

    246,    247+, 249+, 260, and 264 for a vertically moving vehicle carrier,
    which carrier is adapted for charging or discharging a facility for the
    parking of wheeled vehicles;

    281,    for a means for charging or discharging plural, static structures,
    and wherein the means includes a portable elevating device having a load
    sustaining surface;

    364+,   for the combination of a pivotably or tiltably movable structure
    for supporting a wheeled, load-transporting type vehicle and reorienting
    the vehicle into a load-releasing attitude, and the vehicle being unloaded
    thereby, and wherein the axis of pivot or tilt of the structure is
    vertically shiftable (e.g., by means in the nature of an elevator or hoist);

    422+,   for a receptacle emptying device of an elevator type.

    427,    for a wheel and wheel type article handler and transporter having a
    wheel engaging means of an elevator type;

    441,    for a motion responsive load handler and transporter wherein the
    handler is operated by a ground-engaging wheel and is guided for
    rectilinear movement in a vertical or inclined path;

    458+,   for a vehicle having load handling means in the nature of spaced,
    shelf-like load engaging portions which portions engage the load from
    opposite sides and elevate it for transport;

    460+,   for a vehicle which straddles a load and elevates it onto load
    supporting structure;

    471,    for a self-loading or unloading vehicle having a load receiving
    portion which is pivotable relative to the horizontal, and wherein means is
    provided for also raising or lowering the portion and its axis of pivot;

    495+,   for a self-loading or unloading vehicle having a load receiving
    portion which is movable in a vertical or inclined path;

    540+,   for a self-loading or unloading vehicle having a load handling
    means which raises or lowers a load in a path which includes vertical
    rectilinear movement;

    564,    for a combination of carriers, at least one of which is an elevator
    or hoist and another is an endless or rotary carrier;

    589+,   for a load support which moves linearly in a vertical direction and
    has additional movement for aligning and mounting its load; and

    592+,   for the combination of an elevator or hoist and a loading or
    unloading means therefor.

    452,    Butchering, subclass 178 for an elevator combined with or having
    particular structure limiting it to use with, butchering means.

    472,    Amusement Devices, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclass 2,
    for an amusement device which lifts an individual during a ride.


CLS 187/200
TXT STAIRWAY ASSIST FOR INDIVIDUAL OR MINOR BARRIER (E.G., CURB) LIFT FOR
    IMPAIRED  INDIVIDUAL:

    Subject matter under the class definition either (1) intended to carry only
    a single person and located on or very near to a flight of stairs for use
    by the person as (a) an alternative to or (b) in conjunction with the
    stairs or (2) located adjacent a small obstruction (e.g., loading dock)
    which would be no serious obstacle to a healthy person and having a
    specific feature (e.g., modified access, wheelchair guides) adapting it to
    carry a person having some physical problem which prohibits or restricts
    the ability of the person to travel past the small obstruction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    901,    for an elevator control modified for use by a disabled individual.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 564.1+ for means
    for lifting a person vertically into or out of a tub.

    5,      Beds, subclasses 83.1+ for hoisting means for lifting a person into
    or out of a bed.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 321+ for a conveyor or an
    accessory therefor with specialized structure for conveying people.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 467+ and 921 for vehicles
    having means to load or unload an individual in a wheelchair.


CLS 187/201
TXT Mounted adjacent stairway for travel parallel thereto:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 which is located near a flight of stairs
    and wherein the rigid or semirigid means for limiting the path of travel of
    its load-underlying support surface restricts the path to a direction
    parallel to the incline of the flight of stairs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    245+,   for an inclined elevator of general utility.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 595+ for an inclined track
    elevator with means which loads or unloads it.


CLS 187/202
TXT Having specific means contacting or on load support for stopping thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 having a particular structural aspect
    (e.g., operator) of braking or catching means mounted on or engaging the
    load-underlying support surface and selectively holding the load-underlying
    support surface at different locations along its path of travel detailed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    351+,   for means for stopping a load support of general utility.


CLS 187/203
TXT STATIONARY LIFT FOR ROADWAY VEHICLE OR REQUIRED COMPONENT THEREOF:

    Subject matter under the class definition consisting of fixedly mounted
    apparatus, or a specified component thereof (i.e., drive-means*,
    vehicle-underlying support surface component) not provided for in another
    class, for elevating a discrete wheeled highway vehicle, in its entirety,
    from a lower entrance and exit level to a significantly higher upper level
    where the vehicle is intended to be repaired or inspected.

    (1)     Note.  The line between a vehicle lift proper for this subclass and
    its indented subclasses and one proper for Class 254, Implements or
    Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force is as follows:

    (1)     This subclass and its indents provide for vehicle elevating
    apparatus which (a) has a vehicle supporting surface entirely separable
    from the vehicle, (b) lifts the entire vehicle a significant distance along
    a generally rectilinear path, (c) maintains its vehicle underlying support
    surface in a substantially level attitude relative to ground, and (d) is
    stationarily mounted at a particular location; and

    (2)     Class 254 provides for vehicle elevating apparatus otherwise proper
    therefor which either (a) elevates only one portion of the vehicle at a
    time, (b) is manually carried or moved as an assembled, self supporting
    unit between use locations and positioned under the vehicle, (c) lifts the
    entire vehicle only a relatively short distance (e.g., a small lever arm
    lifting less than the height of the vehicle) or (d) is attached to and
    travels with the vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 44 for an automobile turntable combined with an
    elevator, and subclasses 127+ for a railway vehicle elevator.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 234.6 for a vehicle lift, vehicle guide,
    or vehicle support combined with a fluid supply means for the vehicle.

    184,    Lubrication, subclass 1.5 for means used in emptying or filling a
    vehicle's crank case.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 2+, 88, 89+, 94, 418+, and Dig. 9 for apparatus for lifting an
    entire vehicle a short distance.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 233+ for a parking
    facility including one or more movable sites (i.e., a vehicle is
    transported by and also stored on the load support surface), and subclass
    678 for a device having a support for a boat or land vehicle and means to
    lift and tilt the support.


CLS 187/204
TXT With distinct jack on vehicle support:

    Subject matter under subclass 203 provided with means having its own
    drive-means* and mounted on, or adjacent to and traveling with, the
    vehicle-underlying support surface of the elevating apparatus for lifting
    one portion of a vehicle while the vehicle is located on the support
    surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220,    for axle or undercarriage type support structure which normally
    travels with distinct wheel supporting trackways, but is selectively
    sustained by a prop at an elevated position to remove the vehicle from the
    trackways when the trackways are lowered relative thereto.


CLS 187/205
TXT With floor pit opening for support and safety cover therefor:

    Subject matter under subclass 203 provided with both a hole in the floor
    surrounding the elevating apparatus which allows the vehicle-underlying
    support surface to be flush with the floor when not elevated and means
    which extends over at least a portion of the hole when the
    vehicle-underlying support surface is elevated to prevent an object from
    falling into the hole.


CLS 187/206
TXT With safety prop or braking rod for support:

    Subject matter under subclass 203 provided with an elongated rigid member
    which (a) is attached to and extends from the elevated vehicle-underlying
    support surface to the floor, (b) is distinct from the drive-means* for the
    support surface, and (c) holds the support surface in its elevated position
    if the drive-means* therefor fails by pushing against the surface of the
    floor or coacting with means for stopping (e.g., a stationary catch) its
    motion.


CLS 187/207
TXT Having position lock for engaging sustaining drive means or guide means of
    support:

    Subject matter under subclass 203 having a catch or brake which engages
    either (a) a portion of the drive-means* directly supporting (e.g., piston
    of fluid ram) the vehicle-underlying support surface or (b) travel
    directing structure (e.g., guide shoe) for the vehicle-underlying support
    surface to retain at a particular position, or slow the travel of, the
    vehicle-underlying support surface.


CLS 187/208
TXT Ratchet bar and latching pawl-type lock:

    Subject matter under subclass 207 wherein the vehicle-underlying support
    surface is retained at a particular position by a catch engaging a
    corresponding surface configuration (e.g., tooth) on an elongated member
    and wherein the catch, when not engaged, moves vertically relative to the
    elongated member when the vehicle-underlying support surface is elevated or
    lowered.


CLS 187/209
TXT With safety cutoff for drive means:

    Subject matter under subclass 203 provided with means (e.g., limit switch)
    which turns off or disconnects the vehicle-underlying support surface
    drive-means* to protect the user of, or vehicle on, the vehicle elevating
    apparatus when the apparatus is either improperly used (e.g., overloaded)
    or a potentially injurious condition exist.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    276+,   for a control* for the drive means of an elevator car.


CLS 187/210
TXT Having specific drive means for support:

    Subject matter under subclass 203 having a particular structural aspect of
    drive-means* (e.g., cable drum) for transmitting to the vehicle-underlying
    support surface the force necessary to shift the vehicle between its upper
    and lower levels detailed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250+,   for specific drive means for an elevator car.


CLS 187/211
TXT Includes plural sustaining levers (e.g., scissored levers):

    Drive-means* under subclass 210 including two distinct elongated members
    which are (a) located between the vehicle-underlying support surface and a
    supporting floor and (b) mounted in a manner allowing them to each swing
    vertically in conjunction with each other and to hold up the vehicle while
    restricting its movement to a generally linear vertical path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    269,    for an elevator car supported by scissored levers in the drive
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 91 for a swinging platform which elevates an entire vehicle.


CLS 187/212
TXT Powered by vehicle being lifted:

    Drive-means* under subclass 210 having as its source of power either the
    motor, drive train, or road wheel of a vehicle located on the
    vehicle-underlying support surface of the apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 91, 94, and 422 and digest 9 for vehicle lifting apparatus
    powered by either the impact of, the motion of, or a driven part of a
    supported vehicle.


CLS 187/213
TXT Includes driven sustaining columns on opposite sides of support:

    Drive-means* under subclass 210 including two distinct elongated structures
    positioned on different sides of a common vehicle-underlying support
    surface and directly across from each other which transmit elevating force
    to, and together hold up, the vehicle-underlying support surface.


CLS 187/214
TXT Having threaded rider and mating screw:

    Drive-means* under subclass 213 wherein one of the force transmitting
    elongated structures includes both (a) an element attached to the
    vehicle-underlying support surface which has an aperture therein with an
    internally facing threaded tooth and (b) a cylindrical rod passing through
    the aperture which has a tooth on its outer surface threaded around the
    longitudinal axis of the rod, mating with the tooth of the aperture
    element, and rotating relative thereto when the vehicle-underlying support
    surface is elevated or lowered.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    267+,   for an elevator car supported by threaded rider and screw drive
    means.


CLS 187/215
TXT Includes sustaining fluid ram:

    Drive-means* under subclass 210 including a vertically extending, fluid
    powered mechanism which (a) is attached to the vehicle-underlying support
    surface and (b) has two concentric, telescoping components bearing a
    portion of the weight of the vehicle-underlying support surface when it
    travels vertically.

    (1)     Note.  The line between a stationary vehicle lift drive proper for
    this class (187) and a linear fluid motor and its control proper for Class
    91, Motors: Expansible Chamber Type, or a linear fluid motor proper for
    Class 92, Expansible Chamber Devices, is as follows:

    (1)     Class 187 provides for lifting apparatus which claims more than a
    named stationary lift for a vehicle moving a vehicle in its entirety
    between vertically spaced levels by a linear fluid motor and additional
    structure which is not necessary to the internal fluid drive of the linear
    fluid motor (e.g., external load support guide structure, particular
    load-underlying support surface structure, particular lifting apparatus
    controls (e.g., rope controls)),

    (2)     Class 91 provides for linear fluid motors and their controls moving
    a load between spaced positions and claiming a named load supporting
    surface, and

    (3)     Class 92 provides for linear fluid motors moving a load between
    spaced positions and claiming a named load supporting surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272+,   for an elevator car with a fluid supporting ram in its drive means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclasses, for fluid
    pressure operated linear motors and their controls.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclasses, for fluid
    pressure operated linear motors.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 93 for fluid pressure powered apparatus for lifting a portion of a
    vehicle a short distance.


CLS 187/216
TXT Having specific vehicle support structure (e.g., trackways):

    Subject matter under subclass 203 having a particular aspect of the
    vehicle-underlying support surface of the apparatus detailed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403,    for an elevator having a load-underlying support surface with means
    to engage the wheels of a carried vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 133+ for special engaging structure on a jack.


CLS 187/217
TXT With movable stop engaging vehicle wheel:

    Vehicle-underlying support surface under subclass 216 provided with
    structure (e.g., chock) shiftable from a position where it does not
    interfere with the movement of the vehicle wheel onto the support surface
    to a position where it contacts the wheel and prevents movement of the
    vehicle off of the support surface in one direction.


CLS 187/218
TXT Includes portion positioned or shaped to engage axle or undercarriage:

    Vehicle-underlying support surface under subclass 216 including a component
    or section particularly arranged or contoured to contact the axle or
    supporting framework of the vehicle and transmit lifting force thereto.


CLS 187/219
TXT Portion adjusts to plural use positions:

    Vehicle-underlying support surface under subclass 218 having an attached
    contact component or section shiftable from one location to another to
    contact either (a) different portions of the supporting framework or axle
    of the same vehicle or (b) the axles or supporting frameworks of vehicles
    having different configurations.


CLS 187/220
TXT Portion moves from use to nonuse configuration (e.g., alternate supports):

    Vehicle-underlying support surface under subclass 218 having at least one
    attached contact component or section which shifts from (a) a location
    where it does not contact the vehicle axle or framework when the vehicle
    elevating apparatus is in operation to (b) another location where it will
    contact the vehicle axle or framework when the vehicle elevating apparatus
    is in operation.


CLS 187/221
TXT Includes auxiliary or adjustably spaced trackway:

    Vehicle-underlying support surface under 216 including a component which
    (1) is designed to direct a wheel of a vehicle driving onto the support
    surface and (2) is either (a) located where it does not contact and direct
    a wheel every time the vehicle elevating apparatus is in operation (e.g.,
    one of plural alternatively useable trackways) or (b) shiftable toward or
    away from a similar wheel directing component during different vehicle
    elevating operations for vehicles having a different gauge or wheel
    arrangement.


CLS 187/222
TXT INDUSTRIAL LIFT TRUCK OR REQUIRED COMPONENT THEREOF (E.G., FORKLIFT):

    Subject matter under the class definition consisting of a mobile wheeled or
    tracked apparatus (e.g., forklift) or a specified component thereof (i.e.,
    drive-means*, load support surface, guides for surface) not provided for in
    another class, which travels to, picks up, and shifts a discrete load, in
    its entirety, from one level to another vertically spaced level and then
    carries the load while still fully supported on the surface a short
    horizontal distance (e.g., the length of a warehouse) to a load discharge
    point.

    (1)     Note.  The line between a mobile lift truck proper for this and the
    indented subclasses and one proper for Class 254, Implements or Apparatus
    for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force is as follows:

    (1)     This subclass and its indents provide for a mobile wheeled or track
    guided truck which both (a) selfloads, supports, and travels with a load
    between horizontally spaced locations and (b) is capable of vertically
    moving this load along a fixed path for a significant distance and
    unloading it at a different, vertically spaced level; and

    (2)     Class 254 provides for a mobile lift truck which either (a)
    elevates only one portion of the load or (b) lifts the entire load only a
    relatively short distance (e.g., less than the height of the load) and then
    returns it to its original level when unloading.

    (2)     Note.  Wheeled or tracked apparatus otherwise proper for this and
    the indented subclasses is excluded therefrom when the load support surface
    is mounted for movement in an additional direction (e.g., tilted) and is
    found in Class 414 subclasses 629, 631+, 641+, and 663+ even when the
    movement is not utilized to load or unload the surface (e.g., merely
    stabilizes the load).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 2+ for a jack-type hoist truck.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 629, 631+, 641+, 663+, and
    914 for portable elevators having an additional handling feature (e.g.,
    tilting vertical guide).


CLS 187/223
TXT Having safety cutoff control:

    Mobile wheeled or tracked apparatus under subclass 222 having a control*
    which determines when an unsafe operating condition has occurred and
    responds to the condition by regulating or stopping the operation of the
    apparatus or load support surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209,    for a stationary lift for a roadway vehicle having safety cutoff
    means for its drive-means*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclass 50 for operation controlling means, per se, of this type for a
    forklift when the algorithm utilized is not peculiar solely to use with a
    forklift.


CLS 187/224
TXT Having control for load support drive-means:

    Mobile wheeled or tracked apparatus under subclass 222 having a control*
    for regulating the operation of the drive-means* for the load support
    surface of the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209,    for a stationary lift for a roadway vehicle having a safety cutoff
    means for its drive-means*.

    276+,   for a control* regulating the power source of drive-means* for an
    elevator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclass 50 for an operation controlling means for a forklift utilizing an
    algorithm not peculiar solely to use with a forklift.


CLS 187/225
TXT Having foldable vertical guide:

    Mobile wheeled or tracked apparatus under subclass 222 provided with rigid,
    vertically extending, elongated structure for limiting the load support
    surface to travel along its confined linear path, the structure having two
    elongated vertical segments attached to one another in a manner allowing
    one segment of the elongated structure to bend over and lie adjacent to the
    other segment.


CLS 187/226
TXT Having extensible vertical guide for load support:

    Mobile wheeled or tracked apparatus under subclass 222 provided with rigid,
    vertically extending, elongated structure for limiting the load support
    surface to travel along its confined linear path, the structure having two
    elongated vertical sections attached to one another in a manner allowing
    one section to move vertically relative to the other section to lengthen or
    shorten the height of the elongated structure.


CLS 187/227
TXT Guide or drive-means* therefor positioned to enhance operator visibility:

    Mobile wheeled or tracked apparatus under subclass 226 in which either (a)
    the structure for confining the load support surface to a linear path, (b)
    the drive-means* for the movable section thereof, or (c) the drive-means*
    for the load support surface is positioned, relative to a work station for
    the human operator of the apparatus, in a manner designed to avoid
    obstructing the view of the operator when using the apparatus.


CLS 187/228
TXT And guiding means for fluid drive line:

    Mobile wheeled or tracked apparatus under subclass 226 also having
    directing means for limiting the path traveled by a pipe which is shifted
    when the sections of the elongated structure are moved relative to each
    other and which carries fluid to drive-means* for either (a) the movable
    section of the elongated structure or (b) the load support surface of the
    apparatus.


CLS 187/229
TXT Extended by single fluid ram:

    Mobile wheeled or tracked apparatus under subclass 226 wherein the two
    sections of the vertically extending, elongated structure are moved
    relative to each other by a single, fluid powered mechanism having two
    telescopic concentric components.


CLS 187/230
TXT Specific vertical guide:

    Mobile wheeled or tracked apparatus under subclass 226 in which one
    particular aspect (e.g., cross section) of the vertically extending
    elongated structure is detailed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238,    for a nonextensible vertical guide for the load support surface of
    a lift truck.


CLS 187/231
TXT Having structure allowing propulsion or steering by walking attendant:

    Mobile wheeled or tracked apparatus under subclass 222 having hand engaged
    structure used to propel or to direct the course of the mobile apparatus
    which is positioned in a manner designed to allow a human operator to walk
    while propelling or directing the apparatus when it travels between
    horizontally spaced locations.


CLS 187/232
TXT With stabilizing outrigger:

    Mobile wheeled or tracked apparatus under subclass 231 provided with
    structure extending outwardly from the main track engaging or wheeled
    supporting base of the mobile apparatus which prevents the mobile apparatus
    from toppling over or overturning when in use.


CLS 187/233
TXT Having specific drive-means for load support:

    Mobile wheeled or tracked apparatus under subclass 222 having a particular
    aspect of drive-means* (e.g., cable drum) for transmitting to the load
    support surface of the apparatus the force necessary to shift it along its
    confined linear path detailed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250+,   for specific load support drive-means* for an elevator.


CLS 187/234
TXT Including fluid ram:

    Mobile wheeled or tracked apparatus under subclass 233 wherein the
    drive-means* includes a fluid powered mechanism having two telescopic,
    concentric components which mechanism is directly attached or linked to the
    load support surface of the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272+,   for a fluid ram type drive-means* for an elevator car.


CLS 187/235
TXT Including cable accumulating-type drum:

    Mobile wheeled or tracked apparatus under subclass 233 wherein the
    drive-means* includes both (1a a cable* directly attached to the load
    support surface of the apparatus and (b) a drum turned about its central
    axis by the source of power and having a perimeter about which the cable*
    is wound and collected when the drum is turned to apply a pulling force to
    the load support surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261+,   for a drive-means* for an elevator car which includes a cable
    accumulating type drum.


CLS 187/236
TXT Including gear and mating rack or chain:

    Mobile wheeled or tracked apparatus under 233 wherein the drive-means*
    includes both (a) a toothed gear rotatably attached to the load support
    surface or to a relatively stationary component of the mobile apparatus and
    (b) a bar or chain which is mounted along the confined path of travel of
    the load support surface or attached to the load support surface and which
    has a row of complementary teeth or apertures mating with teeth of the gear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270+,   for drive-means* for an elevator car which includes a gear and
    mating rack or chain.


CLS 187/237
TXT Having specific load support structure (e.g., forks):

    Mobile wheeled or tracked apparatus under subclass 222 having at least one
    particular aspect of the load support surface detailed.

    (1)     Note.  The line between an elevator or industrial lift truck proper
    for this and the indented subclasses and one proper for Class 414, Material
    or Article Handling, is as follows:

    (a)     This subclass and its indents provide for an elevator or industrial
    lift truck or component thereof when the load is shifted in its entirety in
    a primary lifting direction from one level to another vertically spaced
    level and may additionally include (1) mere pivoting or tilting of the load
    supporting structure for detachment or storage or (2) retaining of a
    received load on the support surface; and

    (b)     Class 414 provides for load engaging structure in which the load
    support surface travels in a generally vertical primary lift direction and
    (1) is mounted for movement in a direction other than the primary lift
    direction (e.g., tilting) or (2) has an additional load handling structure
    (e.g., conveyor) or (3) is constructed in such a manner that the load
    support surface is inherently self-charged or self-discharged along the
    primary lift direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401+,   for specific load support structure for an elevator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 785 for a load-underlying
    support surface for an elevator or industrial lift truck having an
    additional load handling feature.


CLS 187/238
TXT Having specific guide means for load support:

    Mobile wheeled or tracked apparatus under subclass 222 having one
    particular aspect of means which contacts or is on the load support surface
    of the apparatus for limiting the surface to vertical travel along its
    confined linear path detailed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230,    for an extensible vertical guide for the support surface of a lift
    truck.


CLS 187/239
TXT MOUNTED ON EXTERIOR OF BUILDING:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein (a) the rigid or
    semirigid means for limiting the path of travel of the load-underlying
    support surface of an elevator is attached to or formed in the outer
    surface of a wall forming the perimeter of a building and (b) the
    load-underlying support surface is completely located, at all times, beyond
    the perimeter of the building.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 141+ for a platform
    having elevating or lowering means and subclass 37 for a similar platform
    which also traverses horizontally along a track.


CLS 187/240
TXT TRANSPORTABLE ELEVATOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition constructed in a manner which
    makes it easily movable, as a unit, from one location where it functions as
    an elevator to another location where it again functions as an elevator.

    (1)     Note.  The line between a portable elevator proper for Class 254,
    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force, is as
    follows:

    (1)     Class 187 provides for transportable elevating apparatus which (a)
    lifts the entire load a significant distance between a loading and
    unloading position (e.g., greater than the height of a load being lifted),
    (b) is transported between use locations in an unloaded condition and (c)
    has a load supporting surface intended to be guided along or confined to
    (e.g., located within a shaft) a linear path, and

    (2)     Class 254 provides for portable ``jacking" apparatus which is
    movable between locations and either (a) elevates only one portion of the
    load, or (b) is manually transported as an assembled self supporting unit
    between use locations or (c) is carried and positioned under the load and
    is capable of lifting the load only a relatively short distance (e.g., less
    than the distance between the floor and ceiling of a room).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222+,   for an industrial lift truck.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, appropriate subclasses especially
    subclasses 141+ for a portable platform where a workman only does work
    while supported thereon (e.g., sandblasting, window washing, etc.)

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    appropriate subclasses, for portable ``jacking" apparatus lifting only a
    portion of a load or lifting a load a short distance.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 495+ for a self-loading
    vehicle with an elevating load body and subclasses 540+ for a self-loading
    vehicle loaded by an attached elevator.


CLS 187/241
TXT Nonselfsupporting-type (e.g., leaned against building):

    Movable elevator under subclass 240 wherein the rigid or semirigid means
    for contacting and limiting the travel of the load-underlying support
    surface to a fixed vertical path is incapable of maintaining itself in an
    operative position without being leaned against or propped up by another
    structure (e.g., building, pole).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 101+ for a vertically
    moving platform on a ladder.


CLS 187/242
TXT Knockdown or collapsible for transport:

    Movable elevator under subclass 240 which is either designed to be (a)
    quickly disassembled and reassembled when moved between use locations or
    (b) readily folded into a more compact size, in at least one dimension,
    when moved between use locations.


CLS 187/243
TXT Wheel supported:

    Movable elevator under subclass 242 wherein a portion of the weight of the
    elevator is sustained or borne by an attached wheel in contact with the
    ground when the elevator is moved in its disassembled or folded
    configuration between use locations.


CLS 187/244
TXT Wheel supported:

    Movable elevator under subclass 240 wherein a portion of the weight of the
    elevator is sustained or borne by an attached wheel in contact with the
    ground when the elevator is moved between use locations.


CLS 187/245
TXT INCLINED ELEVATOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the rigid or semirigid
    means for contacting and limiting the path of travel of the load-underlying
    support surface is obliquely angled relative to the horizontal surface or
    ground upon which the elevator is supported.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201+,   for an inclined elevator mounted adjacent a stairway and used to
    move only a single individual.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 10+ for a support
    traveling along an inclined cable.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 595+ for an inclined track
    elevator with means to load or unload it.


CLS 187/246
TXT Having linking cable tension change actuated stopping means for load
    support:

    Subject matter under subclass 245 having braking or catching means mounted
    on or engaging the load-underlying support surface and selectively holding
    it at different locations along its travel path, which means is responsive
    to variations in the amount of tension in a cable* structurally linking the
    power source of a drive-means* to the load-underlying support surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202,    for means for stopping the load-underlying support surface of an
    inclined elevator mounted adjacent a stairway.

    361+,   for means for stopping the load-underlying support surface of an
    elevator which is actuated by a change in tension of its suspension cable.


CLS 187/247
TXT HAVING COMPUTER CONTROL OF ELEVATOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition having a central processing unit
    (CPU) supervising a control* which fully regulates the entire operation of
    an elevator without assistance by an individual.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclasses 1+ for operation controlling or monitoring moves, per se, of
    this type for an elevator when the algorithm utilized is not peculiar
    solely to use with an elevator.


CLS 187/248
TXT Includes redundant circuitry:

    Subject matter under subclass 247 also having a secondary central
    processing unit, components of the control*, or means for carrying electric
    current therebetween which assumes the function of its equivalent in
    response to the failure of either the primary central processing unit,
    components of the control*, or means for carrying electric current
    therebetween.


CLS 187/249
TXT HAVING INDEPENDENT SUPPORTS CARRYING DISTINCT LOADS AND SHARING COMMON PATH:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the elevator has two or
    more unattached load support surfaces which (a) shift different loads and
    (b) follow the same rigid or semirigid means for contacting and limiting
    the travel path.

    (1)     Note.  Plural load-underlying support surfaces attached to an
    endless belt or chain and having a vertical component of travel are found
    in Class 198, Conveyors:  Power-Driven when the supports travel around a
    closed path and this subclass when the supports reciprocate along a linear
    path only.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 25 for an endless horizontal train.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven subclasses 321+ for a conveyor specialized
    to conveying people and 793+ for plural supports attached to an endless
    belt or chain.


CLS 187/250
TXT HAVING SPECIFIC LOAD SUPPORT DRIVE MEANS OR ITS CONTROL:

    Subject matter under the class definition having either (a) a particular
    structural aspect of drive-means* (e.g., cable drum) for transmitting to
    the load-underlying support surface of the elevator the force necessary to
    shift the load between its entry and exit levels or (b) a particular aspect
    of a control* for regulating the operation of such a drive-means* detailed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210+,   for specific drive-means* for the vehicle support of a vehicle lift.

    233+,   for specific drive-means* for the load support of an industrial
    lift truck.


CLS 187/251
TXT Includes linking support cable (e.g., rope, chain) in drive means:

    Drive-means* under subclass 250 including a cable* attached to the load
    underlying support surface and which (a) is part of the structural linkage
    needed to transmit power from the power source to the load-underlying
    support surface of the elevator and (b) bears at least a portion of the
    weight of the load-underlying support surface during its travel along the
    shaft*.

    (1)     Note.  Class 254, Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or
    Pulling Force, provides for the type of drive-means proper for this and the
    indented subclasses when the load support is merely named and no additional
    elevator structure (e.g., load support guide) is claimed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 264+ for apparatus for lifting a load which contacts and pulls
    on a cable supporting the load.


CLS 187/252
TXT And reciprocatingly shifted pulley wheel pulling thereon:

    Drive-means* under subclass 251 also including an element having a
    generally circular perimeter which engages the cable* and is (a) freely
    (i.e., nonpowered) rotatable about an axis through its center in response
    to movement of the cable* over its perimeter and (b) attached at its axis
    to the source of power and bodily reciprocated thereby from one position to
    another to apply a pulling force to the cable*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 385+ for a load supporting cable shifted by a cable engaging
    pulley reciprocated by drive means.


CLS 187/253
TXT Shifted by fluid ram:

    Drive-means* under subclass 252 wherein the source of power includes a
    telescopic, fluid powered mechanism having (a) at least two concentric
    components and (b) the axis of the cable* engaging element attached to the
    reciprocating component thereof.


CLS 187/254
TXT And rotatably driven drum pulling thereon:

    Drive-means* under subclass 251 also including a drum turned about its
    central axis by the source of power and having a perimeter which contacts
    the cable* and either winds a segment of cable* around its perimeter, or
    otherwise engages and pulls on a segment of the cable*, to apply a pulling
    force on the load-underlying support surface of the elevator.

    (1)     Note.  The term ``drum" is used in this and the indented subclasses
    to designate a rotatable structure (e.g., capstan, driven pulley, driven
    sprocket wheel, winding drum, windless, etc.) which is caused to turn about
    its axis of rotation by the source of power (e.g., motor).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 266+ for a rotatably driven drum pulling on a load hoisting
    cable.


CLS 187/255
TXT With projections or apertures for engaging complementary formations on
    cable (e.g., sprocket):

    Drive-means* under subclass 254 wherein the drum is provided with
    projections or apertures located on the surface of its perimeter for
    engaging mating apertures or projections formed along the length of the
    cable*.


CLS 187/256
TXT Plural driven drums:

    Drive-means* under subclass 254 including at least one other drum turned
    about its central axis by a source of power and having a perimeter which
    contacts the same or another cable* to apply a pulling force on the same or
    another load-underlying support surface.


CLS 187/257
TXT Each moves distinct load support:

    Drive-means* under subclass 256 wherein each drum engages and pulls on
    distinct cables* attached to different load-underlying support surfaces.


CLS 187/258
TXT Having distinct drive motors:

    Drive-means* under subclass 256 wherein different motors having no common
    components and whose operation is not dependent on one another provide the
    source of power for each drum.


CLS 187/259
TXT Cable accumulating-type drums:

    Drive-means* under subclass 256 having at least two drums, each of which is
    of the type which winds the contacted cable* about, and collects it on, its
    perimeter when the drum is turned to apply a pulling force to the load
    support surface.


CLS 187/260
TXT Different size drums:

    Drive-means* under subclass 256 having at least two drums, one of which has
    a larger perimeter than the other.


CLS 187/261
TXT Cable accumulating-type drum:

    Drive-means* under subclass 254 wherein the drum is of the type which winds
    the cable* about, and collects it on, the perimeter of the drum when the
    drum is turned to apply a pulling force to the load-underlying support
    surface.


CLS 187/262
TXT Having cable guiding pulley wheel spaced therefrom:

    Drive-means* under subclass 261 having a cable* directing element (e.g.,
    pulley) positioned along the path of travel of the cable* at a location
    spaced from the drum, which element is provided with a generally circular
    perimeter rotatable about an axis through its center in response to the
    movement of the cable* over its perimeter.


CLS 187/263
TXT With structure adapting drum for manual drive:

    Drive-means* under subclass 254 wherein the drum is provided with structure
    attached to it which allows the drum to be turned by a human, rather than
    mechanical, energy source of power.


CLS 187/264
TXT With separate biasing means maintaining cable tension:

    Drive-means* under subclass 254 wherein the cable* linking the drum to the
    load support surface of the elevator has means engaging or attached to it,
    other than the drum, which applies a force to the cable* to keep it at the
    proper tautness.


CLS 187/265
TXT Includes spring supported pulley:

    Drive-means* under subclass 264 wherein the cable* tauting means includes
    (a) a cable* directing element (e.g., pulley) positioned along the path of
    the cable* and provided with a generally circular perimeter which rotates
    about an axis through its center in response to the movement of the cable*
    over its perimeter and (b) spring means for movably mounting the cable*
    directing element to supporting structure.


CLS 187/266
TXT Having cable guiding pulley wheel spaced therefrom:

    Drive-means* under subclass 254 having a cable* directing element (e.g.,
    pulley) positioned along the path of travel of the cable* and  spaced from
    the drum, which element is provided with a generally circular perimeter
    rotatable about an axis through the center of the element in response to
    the movement of the cable* over the perimeter.


CLS 187/267
TXT Includes threaded rider mating with support screw in drive means:

    Drive-means* under subclass 250 including (a) an element attached to the
    load-underlying support surface of the elevator which has an aperture
    therein with an internally facing threaded tooth and (b) a cylindrical rod
    passing through the aperture and mounted along the length of the shaft*
    which has a tooth on its outer surface threaded around the longitudinal
    axis of the rod and mating with the tooth of the element, and rotating
    relative thereto, when power is transmitted to the load-underlying support
    surface to shift it along the shaft*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 98+ for screw type means for lifting a load.


CLS 187/268
TXT Driven rider:

    Drive-means* under subclass 267 wherein the apertured element attached to
    the load-underlying support surface is rotated about the axis of the
    aperture by the power source.


CLS 187/269
TXT Includes scissored supporting levers in drive-means:

    Drive-means* under subclass 250 including two levers attached to the
    load-underlying support surface of the elevator which (a) are joined
    together by a pivot pin at a point spaced from their ends and about which
    they swing when the levers are transmitting power from the power source to
    the support surface and (b) bear at least a portion of the weight of the
    load-underlying support surface during its travel along the shaft*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 122 for lazy tong means used to lift a load.


CLS 187/270
TXT Includes gear on support mating with stationary rack or chain:

    Drive-means* under subclass 250 including both (a) a power transmitting
    toothed gear rotatively attached to the load-underlying support surface of
    the elevator and (b) a bar or chain mounted along the length of the shaft*
    and having a row of complementary teeth or apertures with which the teeth
    of the gear mate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    352+,   for a gear mounted on the support surface and provided with
    rotation inhibiting means which mates with a stationary rack or chain.


CLS 187/271
TXT Worm-type gear:

    Drive-means* under subclass 270 wherein the rotatable gear either (a) has a
    cylindrical shape and a continuous tooth on its outer surface which is
    threaded around the longitudinal axis of the cylinder or (b) has teeth on
    its outer surface shaped to cooperate with a cylinder shaped bar mounted
    along the length of the shaft* and having a continuous tooth on its outer
    surface which is threaded around the longitudinal axis of the cylinder
    shaped bar.


CLS 187/272
TXT Includes fluid supporting ram in drive-means:

    Drive-means* under subclass 250 including a fluid powered mechanism
    attached to the load-underlying support surface of the elevator having two
    concentric telescopic components which bear a portion of the weight of the
    load-underlying support surface and move it along the shaft* when
    telescoped.

    (1)     Note.  The line between an elevator drive proper for this class
    (187) and a linear fluid motor and its control proper for Class 91, Motors:
     Expansible Chamber Type, or a linear fluid motor proper for Class 92,
    Expansible Chamber Devices is as follows:

    (1)     Class 187 provides for elevating apparatus which claims more than a
    named load-underlying support surface moved between vertically spaced
    levels by a linear fluid motor or additional elevator structure which is
    not necessary to the internal fluid drive of the linear fluid motor (e.g.,
    external load support guide structure, particular load-underlying support
    surface structure, particular elevator controls (e.g., rope controls),
    elevator counterbalances),

    (2)     Class 91 provides for linear fluid motors and their controls moving
    a load between spaced positions and claiming a named load supporting
    surface, and

    (3)     Class 92 provides for linear fluid motors moving a load between
    spaced positions and claiming a named load supporting surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215,    for a stationary lift for a roadway vehicle having fluid ram-type
    drive-means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclasses, for fluid
    pressure operated linear motors and their controls.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclasses, for fluid
    pressure operated linear motors.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 93 for fluid pressure operated lifting means.


CLS 187/273
TXT Pneumatic (e.g., steam):

    Drive-means* under subclass 272 wherein the fluid utilized to power the
    mechanism is a gas.


CLS 187/274
TXT Plural fluid rams having interrelated operation:

    Drive-means* under subclass 272 provided with an additional, similar,
    telescopic, fluid powered mechanism having its operation influenced or
    affected by the other fluid powered mechanism.


CLS 187/275
TXT With fluid flow controlling means:

    Drive-means* under subclass 272 provided with particular means for
    directing and regulating the amount of fluid going to the telescopic, fluid
    powered mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 428 for a manual control
    for a motive fluid valve carried and operated from a named load.


CLS 187/276
TXT Includes control for power source of drive- means:

    Subject matter under subclass 250 including a control* which regulates the
    operation of either (a) the force generating means of the drive-means*
    (e.g., motor) or (b) a component of the force transmitting linkage of the
    drive-means* not bearing the weight of the load-underlying support surface
    (e.g., fluid valve for fluid ram).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209,    for a stationary lift for a roadway vehicle having safety cutoff
    means for its drive-means*.

    224,    for an industrial lift truck having a control* for its load support
    drive-means*.


CLS 187/277
TXT With specific electrical component:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 wherein the control* is provided with a
    particular part for receiving input information or effecting the regulating
    operation powered by an electric current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    308,    for an electrically actuated latch for holding the manual input
    component of a control* for the power source of drive-means* for an
    elevator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, digest 26 for a circuit
    maker or breaker operated when a lifting cable becomes slack (e.g., cable
    breaks).

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    electric motor controls, per se.


CLS 187/278
TXT Actuated by movement of building (e.g., seismic activity):

    Control* under subclass 277 wherein the load-underlying support surface
    travels within a normally static, multistory structure and the information
    input component has its operation induced or modified by a change in
    position of one portion of the structure relative to either (a) another
    portion of the structure or (b) the ground caused by an accidental (e.g.,
    explosion) or natural (e.g., wind deflection) external force thereon.


CLS 187/279
TXT Actuated by presence of obstruction in shaft:

    Control* under subclass 277 in which the information input component has
    its operation induced by the presence of an object (e.g., foot) projecting
    into the shaft* and when the object is in this location it is either (a)
    obstructing the safe passage of the load-underlying support surface or (b)
    endangering its safety when the load-underlying support surface passes
    through the shaft*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300,    for a mechanical control* for the power source of a drive-means*
    actuated by the presence of an obstruction in the shaft*.


CLS 187/280
TXT Actuated by location of access barrier or its lock:

    Control* under subclasses 277 in which the information input component has
    its operation induced by either (a) the position of a door which allows or
    prevents the passage of a load onto the load-underlying support surface or
    (b) the position of a device having the sole function of holding such a
    door in its load blocking or unblocking position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301,    for a mechanical control* for the power source of a drive-means*
    actuated by the location of an access barrier or its lock.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.62+
    particularly subclass 61.65, for a circuit maker or breaker actuated by the
    operation of a closure, closure operator or closure accessory.


CLS 187/281
TXT Actuated by excessive load:

    Control* under subclass 277 in which the information input component has
    its operation induced by an increase in the weight of the load on the
    load-underlying support surface beyond the normal or acceptable limit.


CLS 187/282
TXT Actuated by load support contacting trip in shaft:

    Control* under subclass 277 in which the information input component has
    its operation induced by engagement with either (a) a device located along
    the shaft* and projecting thereinto when the input component of the
    control* travels with the load-underlying support surface or (b) the
    load-underlying support surface or structure attached thereto when the
    input component of the control is stationarily mounted, located along, and
    projects into the shaft*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302+,   for a mechanical control* for the power source of a drive-means*
    actuated by a trip in the shaft*.


CLS 187/283
TXT Having trip at each of plural landings:

    Control* under subclass 282 having either a projecting operation inducing
    device or a control input component located near each of numerous (i.e.,
    more than two) landings* along the shaft*.


CLS 187/284
TXT And means for final leveling:

    Control* under subclass 283 having additional means which (a) begins its
    operation when a relatively short vertical distance remains between the
    load-underlying support surface and a landing* at which it is stopping and
    (b) adjusts the regulating functioning of the control* to accurately align
    the landing* and load-underlying support surface when fully stopped.


CLS 187/285
TXT For fluid-type power source:

    Subject matter under subclass 277 in which the force generating means
    regulated by the control* is powered by a fluid flowing therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    275,    for a fluid ram which moves the load-underlying support surface and
    has specific fluid flow controlling means (e.g., valve).


CLS 187/286
TXT Actuated by load support speed sensor or governor:

    Control* under subclass 285 in which the information input component has
    its operation induced by regulating or detecting means which either
    measures or is responsive to (a) changes in the velocity or (b) improper
    velocity of the load support surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305,    for a mechanical control* for the power source of a drive-means*
    actuated by a load support speed sensor or governor.


CLS 187/287
TXT Includes safety cut off switch actuated by load support speed sensor or
    governor:

    Control* under subclass 277 including a device for stopping the flow of
    electric current to the force generating means when the information input
    component has its operation induced by regulating or detecting means which
    measures or is responsive to excessive or improper velocity of the
    load-underlying support surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305,    for a mechanical control* for the power source of a drive-means*
    actuated by a load support speed sensor or governor.


CLS 187/288
TXT Control actuates mechanical braking means for power source:

    Subject matter under subclass 277 wherein the control* regulates the
    operation of means directly engaging and stopping or slowing the motion of
    a moving component of either (a) the force generating means of the
    drive-means* (e.g., motor) or (b) a component of the force transmitting
    linkage of the drive-means* not bearing the weight of the load-underlying
    support surface (e.g., clutch).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 267 for a rotational speed governor controlling retarding means
    engaging a cable pulling drum.


CLS 187/289
TXT For electric power source:

    Subject matter under subclass 277 in which the force generating means
    regulated by the control* is powered by an electric current.


CLS 187/290
TXT With auxiliary supply of electricity:

    Subject matter under subclass 289 provided with an alternate or reserve
    supply (e.g., battery) of electric current for powering the control* or
    force generating means upon failure or reduction in the primary supply of
    electric current.


CLS 187/291
TXT Having means for final leveling:

    Control* under subclass 289 having means which (a) begins its operations
    when a relatively short vertical distance remains between the
    load-underlying support surface and a landing* at which it is stopping and
    (b) adjusts the regulating functioning of the control* to accurately align
    the landing* and load-underlying support surface when fully stopped.


CLS 187/292
TXT With means for stopping vibration or bump start:

    Control under subclass 289 with means adjusting the functioning of the
    control* so as to prevent either (a) the oscillation of the load-underlying
    support surface during its travel or (b) any motion opposite to the
    intended direction of travel of the load-underlying support surface when it
    is leaving a landing*.


CLS 187/293
TXT Controls power source speed:

    Subject matter under subclass 289 wherein the control* regulates the force
    output rate of the generating means.


CLS 187/294
TXT Actuated near terminus of shaft:

    Control* under subclass 293 in which the information input component has
    its operation induced when the load-underlying support surface comes close
    to the upper or lower end of the shaft*.


CLS 187/295
TXT Having control signal pattern generator:

    Control* under subclass 293 having an electrical component in the
    regulating circuitry of the force generating means which receives a signal
    from a landing*, formulates the electrical command signals necessary to
    accomplish the desired movement of the load-underlying support surface, and
    transmits these signals to another component of the regulating circuitry.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247,    for a central processing unit which accomplishes this function.


CLS 187/296
TXT Limited to power source (i.e., motor) utilizing A.C. power:

    Subject matter under subclass 293 in which the force generating means
    regulated by the control* must specifically use an alternating electric
    current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 727+ for an
    induction motor system which is not combined with, or limited to use solely
    with, an elevator.


CLS 187/297
TXT Limited to Power Source (i.e., motor) Utilizing D.C. Power:

    Subject matter under subclass 293 in which the force generating means
    regulated by the control* must specifically use a direct electric current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, appropriate subclasses for a
    D.C. motor control which is not combined with, or limited to use solely
    with, an elevator.


CLS 187/298
TXT Actuated by human operator engaging specific input part:

    Control* under subclass 289 in which a particular aspect of the information
    input component is detailed and has its operation induced by force applied
    to it by an individual (e.g., manual pull starting cable).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306+,   for a mechanical control* for the power source of a drive-means*
    actuated by a human operator.


CLS 187/299
TXT With means locking input part of control against movement:

    Control* under subclass 298 provided with means having the sole function of
    holding the information input component at a particular position and
    resisting its shifting by the individual.


CLS 187/300
TXT Actuated by presence of obstruction in shaft:

    Control* under subclass 276 in which the information input component has
    its operation induced by the presence of an object (e.g., foot) projecting
    into the shaft* and when the object is in this location it is either (a)
    obstructing the safe passage of the load-underlying support surface or (b)
    endangering its safety when the load-underlying support surface passes
    through the shaft*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    279,    for an electric control* for the power source of the drive-means*
    actuated by the presence of an obstruction in the shaft*.


CLS 187/301
TXT Actuated by location of access barrier or its lock:

    Control* under subclass 276 in which the information input component has
    its operation induced by either (a) the position of a door which allows or
    prevents the passage of a load onto the load-underlying support surface or
    (b) the position of a device having the sole function of holding such a
    door in its load blocking or unblocking position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280,    for an electric control* for the power source of a drive-means*
    actuated by the location of an access barrier or its lock.


CLS 187/302
TXT Actuated by load support contacting trip in shaft:

    Control* under subclass 276 in which the information input component has
    its operation induced by engagement with either (a) a device located along
    the shaft* and projecting thereinto when the input component of the
    control* travels with the load-underlying support surface or (b) the
    load-underlying support surface or structure attached thereto when the
    input component of the control is stationarily mounted, located along, and
    projects into the shaft*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282+,   for an electric control* for the power source of the drive-means*
    actuated by a trip in the shaft*.


CLS 187/303
TXT Having trip at each of plural landings:

    Control* under subclass 302 having either a projecting operation inducing
    device or a control input component located near each of numerous (i.e.,
    more than two) landings* located along the shaft*.


CLS 187/304
TXT Trip supported on or formed by cable:

    Control* under subclass 303 wherein the projecting operation inducing
    device or the control input component located near a landing* is sustained
    by or made of a cable*.


CLS 187/305
TXT Actuated by load support speed sensor or governor:

    Control* under subclass 276 in which the information input component has
    its operation induced by regulating or detecting means which either
    measures or is responsive to (a) changes in the velocity or (b) improper
    velocity of the load-underlying support surface.


CLS 187/306
TXT Actuated by human operator engaging specific input part:

    Control* under subclass 276 in which the information input component has
    its operation induced by force applied to it by an individual and a
    particular structural aspect of the input component is detailed (e.g., made
    of cable*).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    298+,   for an electric control* for the power source of the drive-means*
    actuated by a human operator.


CLS 187/307
TXT With means for locking input part of control against movement by operator:

    Control* under subclass 306 provided with means having the sole function of
    holding the information input component (e.g., handle) at a particular
    location to prevent its operation by an individual until the holding means
    is released.


CLS 187/308
TXT Actuated by position or movement of access barrier or its position lock:

    Control* under subclass 307 wherein the holding means for the information
    input component has its operation induced by the location or shifting of
    either (a) a passage door for the load-underlying support surface or (b) a
    device for holding such a door in its blocking or unblocking location.


CLS 187/309
TXT Having barrier position lock operable only when load support or control
    input part safely positioned:

    Control* under subclass 308 wherein damage to the load is prevented by
    having the device for holding the door constructed or located so it may not
    be normally released or applied except when either (a) the load-underlying
    support surface is at a landing* or (b) the information input component of
    the control* is in a neutral location where the drive-means* will not
    transmit force to the load-underlying support surface.


CLS 187/310
TXT With common actuation of barrier position lock and input part locking means:

    Control* under subclass 309 provided with structural linkage for
    transmitting force either (a) from the means holding the information input
    component to the device for holding the door to release or apply the device
    when the holding means is shifted or (b) from a single input source to both
    the means for holding the information input component and the device for
    holding the door at the same time to make their operation interdependent.


CLS 187/311
TXT Using cable to transmit input:

    Control* under subclass 306 wherein a cable* conveys force from the
    individual to the input component.


CLS 187/312
TXT Running cable type:

    Control* under subclass 311 in which the cable* is linked to the
    load-underlying support surface in such a manner as to travel therewith or
    at a rate proportional thereto.


CLS 187/313
TXT WITH BARRIER FOR REGULATING ACCESS TO LOAD SUPPORT:

    Subject matter under the class definition provided with means (e.g., gate,
    door) which allows or prevents the passage of a load (e.g., freight, rider)
    entering or leaving the load-underlying support surface by selectively
    moving, relative to the path of travel of the load, into a blocking or
    unblocking position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, in appropriate subclasses, for door
    structure in combination with merely named elevator structure (e.g., car,
    shaft).


CLS 187/314
TXT Operation variable for emergency, maintenance, or abnormal condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 313 provided with means which changes, or
    allows changes to, the normal functioning of the path blocking means when
    (a) a serious crisis exists which could cause injury (e.g., fire, broken
    support cable*), (b) repair or cleaning of a component of the elevator is
    needed, or (c) an unusual situation occurs (e.g., landing* and car not
    correctly aligned).


CLS 187/315
TXT Includes motor or motor driven linkage for shifting barrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 313 wherein the path blocking means is moved
    between its positions by drive-means* which includes either (a) a device
    which converts nonmechanical energy (e.g., electrical) or stored energy
    (e.g., fuels) into mechanical energy or (b) a structural linkage intended
    to be driven by such a device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 324+ for an operator for
    moving a closure.


CLS 187/316
TXT With specific electrical control therefor:

    Subject matter under subclass 315 provided with a control* for the
    drive-means* of the path blocking means having a particular aspect of a
    part powered by an electric current detailed (e.g., electric eye).


CLS 187/317
TXT Includes object detecting sensor or switch on barrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 316 wherein the information input component
    of the control* is carried by the path blocking means and includes circuit
    making and breaking means which contacts, or otherwise determines the
    physical presence of, an object obstructing the course along which the path
    blocking means moves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 26+ for safety means
    responsive to an obstruction in the path of a closure.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 61.43 for a
    sensitive edge type feeler, per se, intended to be mounted on a closure and
    to detect an object in its path.


CLS 187/318
TXT Shifts barrier mounted at landing:

    Subject matter under subclass 315 wherein the drive-means* moves path
    blocking means which is stationarily positioned at a landing* to allow or
    prevent passage of the load between the load-underlying support surface and
    the landing*.


CLS 187/319
TXT Through coupling with barrier on load support:

    Subject matter under subclass 318 wherein the path blocking means
    positioned at the landing* is detachably connected to distinct path
    blocking means attached to and traveling with the load-underlying support
    surface when both path blocking means are at the same landing* and a common
    energy converting device (i.e., motor) of the drive-means* therefor
    utilizes this connection to move both path blocking means simultaneously.


CLS 187/320
TXT Plural interconnected motors shift barriers at different landings:

    Subject matter under subclass 318 having at least two distinct energy
    converting devices which either (a) share a common energy supply system,
    (b) power portions of the same drive-means*, or (c) have their operation
    regulated by the same control* and which move distinct path blocking means
    stationarily positioned at various landings* along the shaft*.


CLS 187/321
TXT Motor stationarily mounted and linkable to barriers on different landings:

    Subject matter under subclass 318 wherein the energy converting device is
    attached to structure at a fixed location and the structural linkage which
    it powers is constructed to move distinct path blocking means stationarily
    positioned at various landings* along the shaft*.


CLS 187/322
TXT Includes rotating shaft extending between landings:

    Subject matter under subclass 321 wherein the structural linkage includes
    an elongated rigid element which passes through plural landings* and turns
    about its longitudinal axis when transmitting power to path blocking means.


CLS 187/323
TXT Nonelectric motor:

    Subject matter under 318 in which the energy converting device (i.e.,
    motor) does not utilize electric current as input energy.


CLS 187/324
TXT Shifts sliding barrier on load support:

    Subject matter under subclass 315 wherein the drive-means* moves path
    blocking means attached to the load-underlying support surface bodily, as a
    unit, along guide means which constrains its movement to rectilinear
    reciprocation in substantially a single primary direction when repositioned
    either to prevent or allow passage of a load.


CLS 187/325
TXT Including barrier mounted at landing:

    Subject matter under subclass 313 including path blocking means
    stationarily positioned at a landing* to allow or prevent passage of the
    load between the load-underlying support surface and the landing*.


CLS 187/326
TXT Barrier shifted by drive means powered by motion of load support:

    Subject matter under subclass 325 wherein the stationary path blocking
    means is selectively moved to prevent or allow passage of the load by
    drive-means* powered by contact with a moving load-underlying support
    surface, or by structure attached to the load-underlying support surface,
    of an elevator.


CLS 187/327
TXT Having endless driving belt in drive means:

    Drive-means* under subclass 326 having a flaccid element (e.g., chain)
    formed into a continuous loop which transmits force to the path blocking
    means when moved around a closed path by the power source.


CLS 187/328
TXT Having rotatably driven drum and cable pulled thereby in drive means:

    Drive-means* under subclass 326 having a drum turned about its central axis
    by the source of power and a cable* which is either wound around or
    otherwise engaged by the perimeter of the drum to transmit force to the
    path blocking means.


CLS 187/329
TXT Having cable and guiding pulley therefor in drive means:

    Drive-means* under subclass 326 having a cable* and a cable* directing
    element (e.g., pulley) positioned along the path of travel of the cable*,
    which element is provided with a generally circular perimeter rotatable
    about an axis through the center of the element in response to the movement
    of the cable* over its perimeter when the cable transmits force to the path
    blocking means.


CLS 187/330
TXT With means to couple to barrier on load support:

    Subject matter under subclass 325 provided with means for detachably
    connecting the path blocking means stationarily positioned at a landing* to
    distinct path blocking means attached to and traveling with the
    load-underlying support surface when both path blocking means are at the
    same landing* so that both are moved


CLS 187/331
TXT With position lock therefor:

    Subject matter under subclass 325 provided with means having the sole
    function of restricting or preventing the movement of the path blocking
    means from a location where it allows passage of the load to a location
    where it prevents passage of the load.


CLS 187/332
TXT Collapsible or rollable type:

    Subject matter under subclass 325 wherein the stationary path blocking
    means has two distinct edges which are connected to each other by load
    blocking structure which permits the edges to move either closer together
    by reducing one of its dimensions (e.g., folds compact, winds around one of
    the edges) when the path of the load is cleared or spread apart by
    expanding one of its dimensions when the path of the load is blocked
    thereby.


CLS 187/333
TXT Slideably mounted:

    Subject matter under subclass 325 wherein the stationary path blocking
    means both (a) is attached to the landing* by guide means which constrains
    its movement to rectilinear reciprocation in substantially a single primary
    direction and (b) moves bodily as a unit when repositioning to prevent or
    allow passage of the load.


CLS 187/334
TXT Including slidably mounted barrier on load support:

    Subject matter under subclass 313 including path blocking means which (a)
    travels with and is attached to the load-underlying supporting surface by
    guide means which constrains the blocking movement of the means to
    rectilinear reciprocation in substantially a single primary direction and
    (b) moves bodily as a unit when repositioning to prevent or allow passage
    of the load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 116+ for plural closures
    having opposed similar movement.


CLS 187/335
TXT With position lock therefor:

    Subject matter under subclass 334 provided with means having the sole
    function of restricting or preventing the movement of the path blocking
    means from a location where it either allows passage of the load or
    prevents passage of the load.


CLS 187/336
TXT WITH CLOSURE MEANS FOR SHAFT OPENING THROUGH LANDING:

    Subject matter under the class definition provided with repositionable
    means for covering the passageway formed through the landing* by the
    elevator shaft*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclass 33 for a closure shiftable
    to bridge an obstacle or pit.


CLS 187/337
TXT Including pivoted closure:

    Subject matter under subclass 336 wherein at least a portion of the means
    covering the passageway includes covering structure (e.g., door) connected
    to the landing* in a manner allowing it to both (a) swing in an arcuate
    path about a constantly contacted connection point or region located on the
    landing* and (b) maintain movement between the covering structure and
    landing* at their contact point or region.


CLS 187/338
TXT Shifted by drive means powered by load support motion:

    Passageway covering means under subclass 337 wherein the swinging covering
    structure is moved about its connection to the landing* by drive-means*
    powered by contact with a moving load-underlying support surface, or
    structure attached to the load-underlying support surface, of an elevator.

    (1)     Note.  Means located on and traveling with the load supporting
    surface which is intended to impact directly against the passageway
    covering means is not considered a drive-means* proper for this subclass
    and is found in subclass 337.


CLS 187/339
TXT With closure latching means:

    Passageway covering means under subclass 337 provided with means for
    releasably holding the free end of the swinging covering structure in its
    passage covering position or its passage uncovering position.


CLS 187/340
TXT Including transversely sliding closure:

    Subject matter under subclass 336 wherein the means covering the passageway
    includes covering structure (e.g., door) which is (a) connected to the
    landing* by guide means which contrains its movement to rectilinear
    reciprocation in substantially a single primary direction intersecting the
    central axis of the shaft*, and (b) movable only bodily as a unit between
    its covering and uncovering positions.


CLS 187/341
TXT Shifted by drive means powered by load support motion:

    Passageway covering means under subclass 340 wherein the reciprocating
    covering structure is moved by drive-means* powered by contact with a
    moving load-underlying support surface, or structure attached to the
    load-underlying support surface, of an elevator.

    (1)     Note.  Means located on and traveling with the load-underlying
    support surface which is intended to impact directly against the passageway
    covering means is not considered a drive-means* proper for this subclass
    and is found in subclass 340.


CLS 187/342
TXT Including closure bodily carried along shaft by load support:

    Subject matter under subclass 336 wherein at least a portion of the means
    covering the passageway includes covering structure (e.g., hatch)
    completely detachable from the passageway formed in the landing*, this
    detachable covering structure being moved in at least one direction along
    the shaft* by the load-underlying support surface of an elevator, or
    structure attached thereto, when the surface or structure passes through
    the passageway.


CLS 187/343
TXT HAVING MEANS CUSHIONING CONTACT OF LOAD SUPPORT WITH TERMINUS OF SHAFT:

    Subject matter under the class definition having means which (1) is located
    either (a) near the top or bottom of the shaft* of the elevator or (b) on
    the upper or lower portion of the load-underlying support surface and (2)
    coacts respectively with the upper or lower portion of the support surface
    or the top or bottom of the shaft when the load-underlying support surface
    comes close to an end of the shaft* to soften the force of impact of the
    support surface therewith.

    (1)     Note.  An impact softening means proper for this and the indented
    subclasses is capable of retarding the movement of the load-underlying
    support surface only adjacent to the ends of a shaft* and not at different
    points along the shaft*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 266+ for an internal-resistance retarder, per se.


CLS 187/344
TXT Fluid resistance or shock absorber-type means:

    Subject matter under subclass 343 wherein the impact softening means
    includes structure which contacts or compresses a gas or liquid medium and
    utilized the retarding force caused by this contact or compression to slow
    down the load-underlying support surface coacting therewith.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes patents in which the load-underlying
    support surface is designed to act as a piston within a cylinder of a fluid
    shock absorber when entering a modified portion of the shaft.


CLS 187/345
TXT HAVING FLUID DAMPENING MEANS REGULATING LOAD SUPPORT MOVEMENT:

    Subject matter under the class definition having means which (a) contacts
    and pushes against a resisting fluid and (b) is linked to, engages, or is
    supported on the load-underlying support surface to slow the travel of the
    support surface to an acceptable speed in at least one direction by direct
    utilization of the resistance of the fluid to the movement of a component
    of the means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    343+,   for means which cushions the travel of the load supporting surface
    only near an end of the shaft*.

    351+,   for means stopping the load supporting surface which utilizes a
    fluid operator* for moving a component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 266+ for an internal-resistance motion retarder,
    per se.


CLS 187/346
TXT With fluid coacting portion carried by load support:

    Subject matter under subclass 345 wherein the component of the means which
    contacts and pushes against the resisting fluid is supported by, and bodily
    transported with, the load-underlying support surface during its travel up
    and down the shaft*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    352,    for a nonfluid dampened rotating gear attached to a load-underlying
    support surface which coacts with a stationary rack.


CLS 187/347
TXT Includes piston and cylinder attached to support by cable:

    Subject matter under subclass 345 wherein the fluid resistance means
    includes a component located within and movable along the length of an
    elongated hollow chamber containing the resisting fluid, the component
    displacing or compressing the fluid when moved relative to the chamber by
    the travel of the load-underlying support surface which is linked thereto
    by a cable*.


CLS 187/348
TXT WITH EMERGENCY RUNNING SUSPENSION CABLE FOR LOAD SUPPORT:

    Subject matter under the class definition provided with a cable* either
    attached or attachable to the load-underlying support surface which travels
    with and assumes a portion of the weight of the load-underlying support
    surface upon the breakage or failure of the normal or primary weight
    sustaining structure of the load-underlying support surface to prevent its
    uncontrolled falling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251+,   for a suspension cable* which is a component of the normal
    drive-means* for the load-underlying support surface.

    407,    for a stationary cable which guides the travel of the
    load-underlying supporting surface.


CLS 187/349
TXT WITH CONDITION ACTUATED MEANS RELEASING LOAD SUPPORT FROM DRIVE MEANS:

    Subject matter under the class definition provided with means which
    disconnects or detaches the load-underlying support surface from its
    drive-means* in response to a particular circumstance (e.g., over tensioned
    cable, cable overwinding).

    (1)     Note.  The patents within this subclass usually include structure
    for supporting or stopping the movement of the load supporting surface
    after it has been detached or disconnected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    411,    for a device which is not detached in response to a particular
    condition for connecting the drive-means* to the load-underlying support
    surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 82.24+ for a
    load release type hoisting hook and subclasses 110.1+ for an automatically
    released pivoting jaws type grapple.


CLS 187/350
TXT HAVING MEANS ENGAGING CABLE ATTACHED TO LOAD SUPPORT, OR ITS GUIDE, TO SLOW
    LOAD SUPPORT:

    Subject matter under the class definition having (a) a cable* (e.g.,
    haulage cable, counter weight cable, looped braking cable) connected to and
    traveling with the load-underlying support surface which can transmit
    slowing or halting force directly thereto and (b) braking means for
    engaging either the cable* or a nondriven cable* directing means (e.g.,
    pulley) to slow or halt the travel of the load-underlying support surface
    by transmitting the braking force through the cable* thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclass 65.1 for a brake for a strand.


CLS 187/351
TXT HAVING SPECIFIC MEANS CONTACTING OR ON LOAD SUPPORT FOR STOPPING OR SLOWING
    THEREOF:

    Subject matter under the class definition having particular means (e.g.,
    pawl, brake shoe) which either (1) is located along or cooperates with the
    shaft* and directly engages the load-underlying support surface or (2) is
    carried by the load-underlying support surface and engages structure
    located along or cooperating with the shaft* for (a) retaining the support
    surface at a particular location (e..g, catch) or (b) halting or retarding
    the travel of the support surface (e.g., brake).


CLS 187/352
TXT Includes gear on support mating with stationary rack:

    Subject matter under subclass 351 wherein the retaining, halting, or
    retarding means includes (a) a toothed gear rotatively attached to the
    load-underlying support surface of the elevator and provided with means to
    inhibit its rotation and (b) a bar or chain mounted along the length of the
    shaft* and having a row of complementary teeth or apertures with which the
    teeth of the rotatable gear intermesh.


CLS 187/353
TXT Worm-type gear:

    Subject matter under subclass 352 in which the rotatable gear either (a)
    has a cylindrical shape and a continuous tooth on its outer surface which
    is threaded around the longitudinal axis of the cylinder or (b) has teeth
    on its outer surface shaped to cooperate with a cylinder shaped bar mounted
    along the length of the shaft* and having a continuous tooth on its outer
    surface which is threaded around the longitudinal axis of the cylinder
    shaped bar.


CLS 187/354
TXT Means actuated by access barrier movement:

    Retaining, halting, or retarding means under subclass 351 having its
    operation induced by the shifting of path blocking means (e.g., door) which
    allows or prevents the passage of a load entering or leaving the
    load-underlying support surface by a path going to or from a landing*.


CLS 187/355
TXT And having movable contact component carried by support:

    Retaining, halting, or retarding means under subclass 354 carried by the
    load-underlying support surface and having one relatively moving part which
    in one of its positions forcefully engages fixed structure located along or
    forming a portion of the shaft* to retain, halt, or retard the travel of
    the support surface and in another of its positions allows free movement of
    the support surface past or along the fixed structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 41+ for a brake applied to the traction rail of
    a railroad.


CLS 187/356
TXT Stationarily mounted and having disparate movable contact component:

    Retaining, halting, or retarding means under subclass 351 which is fixedly
    located along a side of the shaft* and has at least one relatively moving
    connected part which has no other function but to engage the
    load-underlying support surface, or structure traveling therewith, to
    retain, halt, or retard the supporting surface when in one of its positions
    and in another of its positions allow free movement of the supporting
    surface therepast.

    (1)     Note.  A fixedly located movable structure along a side of the
    shaft having a function other than the mere stopping of the load-underlying
    support surface (e.g., movable elongated guide rail) is found in subclass
    351.


CLS 187/357
TXT Mounted only at landings or terminus of shaft:

    Retaining, halting, or retarding means under subclass 356 which is located
    along the shaft* solely at the landings* or at the top or bottom of the
    shaft*.


CLS 187/358
TXT Having drive means for component powered by load support motion:

    Retaining, halting, or retarding means under 356 having its relatively
    moving part moved by drive-means* powered by contact with a moving
    load-underlying support surface, or structure attached to such
    load-underlying support surface, of an elevator.


CLS 187/359
TXT Includes movable contact component on support for engaging shaft structure:

    Retaining, halting, or retarding means under subclass 351 which is carried
    by the load-underlying support surface and has at least one relatively
    moving connected part which in one of its positions forcefully engages
    fixed structure located along or forming a portion of the shaft* to retain,
    halt, or retard the travel of the support surface and in another of its
    positions allows free movement of the support surface past or along the
    fixed structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 41+ for a brake applied to the traction rail of
    a railroad.


CLS 187/360
TXT Interlocking only with structure of landings or terminus of shaft:

    Retaining, halting, or retarding means under 359 wherein the movable part
    can only forcefully engage fixed structure forming a portion of the
    landings* or the top or bottom of the shaft* to retain, halt, or retard the
    travel of the load-underlying support surface.


CLS 187/361
TXT Actuated by change in suspension or counterweight cable tension:

    Retaining, halting, or retarding means under subclass 359 in which the
    relatively movable engaging part has its operation induced by a variation
    in tautness (e.g., breaking) of a cable* connected to the load-underlying
    support surface and wherein this cable both (a) bears a portion of the
    weight of the load-underlying support surface during its travel along the
    shaft* and (b) is linked either to the power source or a weight which
    causes or opposes the travel of the load-underlying support surface in one
    direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246,    for means for stopping the load-underlying support surface of an
    inclined elevator which is actuated by a change in tension of its drive
    cable.


CLS 187/362
TXT And shaped to cut into cooperating structure:

    Retaining, halting, or retarding means under subclass 361 wherein the
    relatively movable engaging part has a sharp edge configured in such a
    manner as to sever or deeply pierce into fixed structure located along or
    forming a portion of the shaft* to retain, halt, or retard the
    load-underlying support surface.


CLS 187/363
TXT And interlocking with complementary stationary formation (e.g., catches):

    Retaining, halting, or retarding means under subclass 361 wherein the
    relatively movable engaging part engages a corresponding surface
    configuration on fixed structure located along or forming a portion of the
    shaft* to retain, halt, or retard the load-underlying support surface.


CLS 187/364
TXT Slidably mounted contact component:

    Retaining, halting, or retarding means under subclass 363 having its
    relatively moving engaging part connected to another part of the means, or
    to the structure attaching it to the load-underlying support surface, by
    two distinct, rigid or semirigid formations which (1) are each integral
    with or attached to a different one of the parts or part and attaching
    structure and (2) have mutually cooperating surfaces both (a) in gliding
    contact with each other and (b) restricting the relative movement of the
    engaging part to substantially a single primary direction.


CLS 187/365
TXT Slides perpendicular to path of support:

    Retaining, halting, or retarding means under subclass 364 wherein the
    single primary direction along which the engaging part moves is at a right
    angle to the fixed structure located along or forming a portion of the
    shaft* which is engaged by it.


CLS 187/366
TXT Plural pivotally attached gripping contact components engaging common rail:

    Retaining, halting, or retarding means under subclass 363 having two
    relatively moveable engaging parts which (1) are connected to the
    load-underlying support surface in a manner allowing both of them to (a)
    swing in an arcuate path about a constantly contacted connection point or
    region traveling with the support surface and (b) maintain movement between
    the part and connection at their contact point or region and (2) forcefully
    engage opposite sides of a slender member or formation which extends along
    the length of the shaft*.


CLS 187/367
TXT Pivotally attached contact component:

    Retaining, halting, or retarding means under subclass 361 in which the
    relatively movable engaging part is connected to the load-underlying
    support surface in a manner allowing it to both (a) swing in an arcuate
    path partially about a constantly contacted connection point or region
    traveling with the support surface and (b) maintain movement between the
    part and connection at their contact point or region.

    (1)     Note.  Patents with an engaging part which revolves completely
    around the contacted point or region (e.g., a rotating guide wheel with a
    brake) are not proper for this and the indented subclasses and are found in
    subclass 361.


CLS 187/368
TXT With eccentric camming face:

    Retaining, halting, or retarding means under subclass 367 wherein the
    engaging part is provided with a curved engaging periphery and the axis
    about which the engaging part swings is positioned in such a manner that it
    is not geometricly centered relative to the engaging periphery of the part
    which arrangement causes the periphery to apply ever increasing pressure to
    the fixed structure it engages as the part swings toward its final position.


CLS 187/369
TXT Having similar contact component cooperating to grip common rail:

    Retaining, halting, or retarding means under subclass 368 having an
    additional engaging part which is shaped like the first engaging part and
    acts therewith to forcefully engage opposite sides of a slender member or
    formation which extends along the length of the shaft*.


CLS 187/370
TXT Plural gripping contact components engaging common rail:

    Retaining, halting, or retarding means under subclass 367 having two
    swinging engaging parts forcefully engaging opposite sides of a slendor
    member or formation which extends along the length of the shaft*.


CLS 187/371
TXT Slidably mounted contact component:

    Retaining, halting, or retarding means under subclass 361 having its
    relatively moving engaging part connected to another part of the means, or
    to the structure attaching it to the load-underlying support surface, by
    two distinct, rigid or semirigid formations which (1) are each integral
    with or attached to a different one of the parts or part and attaching
    structure and (2) have mutually cooperating surfaces both (a) in gliding
    contact with each other and (b) restricting the relative movement of the
    engaging part to substantially a single primary direction.


CLS 187/372
TXT Having wedge shape or sliding along incline:

    Retaining, halting, or retarding means under subclass 371 in which either
    (a) the moving engaging part has a tapered contour or (b) the cooperating
    formations restricting its movement to a primary direction are at an acute
    or an obtuse angle to the fixed structure located along the shaft*, and the
    engaging part and cooperating formation are positioned relative to each
    other in such a manner that the part will increase the engaging force
    applied against the fixed structure when moved along the formation in one
    direction.


CLS 187/373
TXT Actuated by load support speed governor or sensor:

    Retaining, halting, or retarding means under subclass 359 in which the
    relatively movable engaging part has its operation induced by regulating or
    detaching means which either measures or is responsive to changes in the
    velocity of the load-underlying support surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 180+ and 189 for a speed-responsive brake.


CLS 187/374
TXT Pivotally attached contact component:

    Retaining, halting, or retarding means under subclass 373 in which the
    relatively movable engaging part is connected to the load-underlying
    support surface in a manner allowing it to both (a) swing in an arcuate
    path partially about a constantly contacted connection point or region
    traveling with the support surface and (b) maintain movement between the
    part and connection at their contact point or region.

    (1)     Note.  Patents with an engaging part which revolves completely
    around the contacted point or region (e.g., a rotating guide wheel with a
    brake) are not proper for this and the indented subclasses and are found in
    subclass 373.


CLS 187/375
TXT Plural gripping contact components engaging common rail:

    Retaining, halting, or retarding means under subclass 374 having two
    swinging engaging parts forcefully engaging opposite sides of a slender
    member or formation which extends along the length of the shaft*.


CLS 187/376
TXT Slidable contact component having wedge shape or sliding along incline:

    Retaining, halting, or retarding means under subclass 373 having its
    relatively moving engaging part connected to another part of the means, or
    to the structure attaching it to the load-underlying support surface, by
    two distinct rigid or semirigid formations which (1) are each integral with
    or attached to a different one of the parts or part and attaching structure
    and (2) have mutually cooperating surfaces both (a) in gliding contact with
    each other and (b) restricting the relative movement of the engaging part
    to substantially a single primary direction, and further wherein either (i)
    the engaging part has a tapered contour or (ii) the cooperating formations
    restricting its movement to a primary direction are at an acute or an
    obtuse angle to the fixed structure located along the shaft*, and the
    engaging part and cooperating formation are positioned relative to each
    other in such a manner that the part will increase the engaging force
    applied against the fixed structure when moved along the formation in one
    direction.


CLS 187/377
TXT Actuated by human operator:

    Retaining, halting, or retarding means under subclass 359 in which the
    relatively movable engaging part has its operation induced by force applied
    to it by an individual.


CLS 187/378
TXT And interlocking with complementary stationary formation:

    Retaining, halting, or retarding means under subclass 377 wherein the
    relatively movable engaging part engages a corresponding surface
    configuration on fixed structure located along or forming a portion of the
    shaft* to retain, halt, or retard the load-underlying surface.


CLS 187/379
TXT Pivotally attached contact component:

    Retaining, halting, or retarding means under subclass 377 in which the
    relatively movable engaging part is connected to the load-underlying
    support surface in a manner allowing it to both (a) swing in an arcuate
    path partially about a constantly contacted connection point or region
    which travels with the support surface and (b) maintain movement between
    the part and connection at their contact point or region.

    (1)     Note.  Patents with an engaging part which revolves completely
    around the contacted point or region (e.g., a rotating guide wheel with a
    brake) are not proper for this and the indented subclasses and are found in
    subclass 377.


CLS 187/380
TXT WITH CALL REGISTRATION MEANS:

    Subject matter under the class definition provided with means which
    receives, processes, and stores or cancels requests (i.e., car calls, hall
    calls) by individuals for elevator service to change their landing*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ for
    relay control systems.


CLS 187/381
TXT Having call cancel or refuse feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 380 in which the service request means has
    means to either nullify, reject, or prevent the processing of a service
    request.


CLS 187/382
TXT Shared by plural load supports:

    Subject matter under subclass 380 in which a single means handles all
    service requests for or from two or more load-underlying support surfaces
    and coordinates their operation.


CLS 187/383
TXT Assigns load supports to zones:

    Subject matter under subclass 382 wherein all the landings* served by the
    load-underlying support surfaces are subdivided into small regions of
    adjoining landings* and the service request handling means either (a)
    restricts a load-underlying support surface to servicing only one of these
    smaller regions or (b) allows a load-underlying support surface to respond
    to service request only from one of these specified smaller regions.


CLS 187/384
TXT Having security or priority preemption feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 382 having means to either (a) refuse an
    unauthorized or accept an authorized request from an individual or (b)
    alter the normal precedence for processing a service request from an
    individual.


CLS 187/385
TXT Dispatches load supports from designated landing:

    Subject matter under subclass 382 wherein the service request handling
    means also restricts the load-underlying support surface to a single
    landing* when not in use and permits the idle  load-underlying support
    surfaces to travel therefrom only when service is requested to another
    landing* or another condition in a preexisting service plan is met.


CLS 187/386
TXT Frequency based on interval of time:

    Subject matter under subclass 385 having preexisting service plan which
    requires the passing of a particular amount of time before an idle
    load-underlying support surface may travel from the landing*.

    (1)     Note.  The amount of time may either be fixed or changed
    periodically based on another factor (e.g., time of day).


CLS 187/387
TXT Assigns calls to load supports on predetermined basis:

    Subject matter under subclass 382 wherein the service request handling
    means directly selects an individual load-underlying support surface of the
    group to respond to the request for service from a landing* based on a
    preexisting selection plan.


CLS 187/388
TXT Also directs response:

    Subject matter under subclass 380 wherein the means for handling service
    request also sends the load-underlying support surface to a landing* in
    answer to the request.


CLS 187/389
TXT Includes specific floor selector:

    Subject matter under subclass 380 including a particular device for either
    (a) causing the load-underlying support surface to be stopped at a landing*
    or (b) signaling an individual controlling the operation of the
    load-underlying support surface to stop it at a landing* in response to a
    request for service.


CLS 187/390
TXT ALARM SYSTEM:

    Subject matter under the class definition which includes means to detect a
    dangerous condition and signal a warning in response thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 68 for a mechanical alarm, per se,
    actuated by the motion of an elevator.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+ for an electrical
    alarm system, per se.


CLS 187/391
TXT WITH MONITORING, SIGNALLING, AND INDICATING MEANS:

    Subject matter under the class definition provided with means which senses
    or keeps track of a physical condition important to the operation of the
    elevator and transmits notice of a change in this condition to a
    communication device designed to inform either an individual or a central
    processor of the change.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 64 for mechanical means for
    signaling the elevator car from different floors.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 76 for means for lighting an elevator
    threshold.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 21 for control
    of a dynamic recording or reporting means by a named elevator absent any
    specific elevator structure or elevator control, and subclass 69 for a
    recording or reporting device combined with a named elevator absent any
    specific elevator structure or control.


CLS 187/392
TXT Monitors passengers:

    Subject matter under subclass 391 wherein the physical condition checked or
    sensed is related to an individual riding, or waiting at a landing* to
    ride, the load-underlying support surface.


CLS 187/393
TXT Monitors operational parameter:

    Subject matter under subclass 391 wherein the physical condition checked or
    sensed is one which it is essential for anyone maintaining or using the
    elevator to know for the safe or proper functioning of the elevator (e.g.,
    position, speed, direction).


CLS 187/394
TXT Load support position:

    Subject matter under subclass 393 in which the location of the
    load-underlying support surface along the shaft* is the physical condition
    checked.


CLS 187/395
TXT HAVING CALL BUTTON WITH INDICATOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition having a device (e.g., push
    button) used by an individual to request elevator service which is provided
    with communication means (e.g., it lights up when request is recorded)
    informing the same individual that load-underlying support surface will be
    responding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses
    for mechanical switches, per se.


CLS 187/396
TXT GENERAL INFORMATION DISPLAY (E.G., STORE DIRECTORIES):

    Subject matter under the class definition which includes either (a) means
    for communicating both knowledge necessary to the operation of an elevator
    and knowledge (e.g., advertising) which is not limited in its useful
    application to an individual using an elevator or (b) means having its
    operation caused or modified by an elevator, which communicates knowledge
    (e.g., advertising) not limited in its useful application to an individual
    using an elevator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 446+ for a changing
    exhibitor, subclasses 541+ for an illuminated directory, and subclass 585
    for a sign type directory.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 815.01+ for electrical
    visual display means other than those changing the operation of the
    elevator or those having their operation or information modified by an
    elevator.


CLS 187/397
TXT WITH VISUAL INDICATOR OF MOVEMENT OF LOAD SUPPORT:

    Subject matter under the class definition provided with means for
    exhibiting to the view of an individual a read-out showing some facet of
    the motion or travel of the load-underlying support surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 226 for mechanical means for
    indicating the position of an elevator car.

    340,    Communication:  Electrical, subclasses 815.01+ for a visual
    indicator, per se, and subclasses 286.01+ for a visual indicator in a
    communication system other than the type used with an elevator.


CLS 187/398
TXT Indicates particular one of plural load supports responding:

    Exhibiting means under subclass 397 which shows the specific one of several
    load-underlying support surfaces which will answer a request for service
    made from any given landing*.


CLS 187/399
TXT Indicates existing location:

    Exhibiting means under subclass 397 which shows the current position in the
    shaft* of, or the landing* nearest to, the load-underlying support surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 226 for mechanical means
    indicating the position of an elevator within its shaft.


CLS 187/400
TXT WITH SAFETY OR SEALING MEANS FOR GAP BETWEEN LOAD SUPPORT AND LANDING:

    Subject matter under the class definition provided with means attached to
    the load-underlying support surface, landing* or shaft* of the elevator
    which alleviates, prevents, or restricts the accidental, harmful, or
    unwanted (a) passage of a substance (e.g., gas, dirt) or (b) intrusion of a
    portion of a passenger or cargo (e.g., hand, chair leg) into the space
    between the landing* and load-underlying support surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 303+ for a closure
    movement actuated retractable sealing, guiding, or locking strip and
    subclasses 316+ for an operator for a retractable sealing, guiding, or
    locking strip.


CLS 187/401
TXT HAVING SPECIFIC LOAD SUPPORT STRUCTURE OR ARRANGEMENT (E.G., CAR FRAMING):

    Subject matter under the class definition having a particular structural
    aspect of the load-underlying, support surface of the elevator (e.g.,
    framing, shape, flooring) detailed.

    (1)     Note.  The line between an elevator or industrial lift truck proper
    for this and the indented subclasses and one proper for Class 414, Material
    or Article Handling, is as follows:

    (a)     This subclass and its indents provide for an elevator or industrial
    lift truck or component thereof when the load is shifted in its entirety in
    a primary lifting direction from one level to another vertically spaced
    level and may additionally include (1) mere pivoting or tilting of the load
    supporting structure for detachment or storage or (2) retaining of a
    received load on the support surface; and

    (b)     Class 414 provides for load engaging structure in which the load
    support surface travels in a generally vertical primary lift direction and
    (1) is mounted for movement in a direction other than the primary lift
    direction (e.g., tilting) or (2) has an additional load handling structure
    (e.g., conveyor) or (3) is constructed in such a manner that the load
    support surface is inherently self-charged or self-discharged along the
    primary lift direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216+,   for specific vehicle-underlying support structure for a roadway
    vehicle lift.

    237,    for specific load support structure for an industrial lift truck.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 67.1+ for a
    load supporting frame attached to a hoist-line.

    312,    Supports: Cabinet Structure, subclass 247 for a vertically movable
    cabinet mounted on the wall or ceiling of a room.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 592+ for a load-underlying
    support surface for an elevator, or industrial lift truck having an
    additional load handling feature.


CLS 187/402
TXT Arranged to carry masonry hod:

    Load-underlying, support surface under subclass 401 particularly
    constructed to support between the entrance and exit levels of the elevator
    a tray or container attached to a pole type handle which is intended to
    carry a load of building material (e.g., brick) used by a mason.


CLS 187/403
TXT With means for engaging wheels of carried vehicle:

    Load-underlying, support surface under subclass 401 provided with means
    which contacts the wheels of a vehicle positioned on the support surface
    while it travels between its entrance and exit levels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217,    for a stationary lift for a roadway vehicle having
    vehicle-underlying support structure with a movable stop which engages a
    wheel of the vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclasses 127+ for an elevator having its operation
    interconnected with that of an elevated railway.

    410,    Freight Accommodation on Freight Carrier, subclasses 7+ for means
    for retaining a vehicle type load on a freight carrier.


CLS 187/404
TXT HAVING SPECIFIC COUNTERBALANCE MEANS FOR LOAD SUPPORT:

    Subject matter under the class definition having a particular structural
    aspect of means detailed which is structurally linked to and mitigates the
    effect of either (a) gravitational force on or (b) the driving force
    exerted by the drive-means* on the load-underlying support surface in at
    least one direction of its travel within the shaft* by opposing those
    forces with a resistance tending to balance them.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    406+,   for specific stationary guiding structure for a counterbalance
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 193+ for counterbalance means
    for a door or window respectively and subclasses 400+ for a counterbalance
    device, per se.

    104,    Railways, subclass 174 for a counterbalance system used in railway
    traction and subclass 254 for a counterweighted bumper.


CLS 187/405
TXT Includes variable weight:

    Subject matter under subclass 404 wherein the means for resisting the
    gravitational or driving force on the load-underlying support surface
    includes structure capable of having its weight changed by the addition or
    removal of material to thereby increase or decrease the amount of
    resistance to the travel of the load-underlying support surface.


CLS 187/406
TXT HAVING SPECIFIC STATIONARY GUIDING STRUCTURE FOR COUNTERBALANCE MEANS OR
    LOAD SUPPORT:

    Subject matter under the class definition having a particular aspect (e.g.,
    cross section) of the immovable structure which contacts and limits the
    travel of (a) a weight designed to at least partially balance or counteract
    the weight of the load-underlying support surface or (b) the
    load-underlying support surface of the elevator to a fixed path detailed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    184,    Lubrication, subclasses 21+ for a device mounted on an elevator car
    which lubricates its guiding structure.


CLS 187/407
TXT Formed from cable:

    Subject matter under subclass 406 in which the path limiting structure is
    constructed from a cable*.


CLS 187/408
TXT And mounting means therefor:

    Subject matter under subclass 406 having means for attaching the path
    limiting means to the elevator shaft*.


CLS 187/409
TXT HAVING SPECIFIC GUIDE SHOE:

    Subject matter under the class definition having a particular structural
    aspect (e.g., shape) of a device mounted on the load-underlying support
    surface and bodily traveling therewith detailed which is intended to
    contact and slide along the rigid or semirigid means limiting the travel of
    the load-underlying support surface of the elevator to a fixed vertical
    path.


CLS 187/410
TXT With roller:

    Subject matter under subclass 409 wherein the device is provided with at
    least one revolvably mounted wheel or caster to reduce friction between the
    device and the path limiting means.


CLS 187/411
TXT HAVING SPECIFIC FORCE TRANSMITTING CONNECTION FOR COUNTERWEIGHT OR LOAD
    SUPPORT:

    Subject matter under the class definition having

    a particular structural aspect of a device detailed for attaching either
    (a) drive-means* to the load-underlying support surface of the elevator,
    (b) a weight designed to at least partially balance or counteract the
    weight of the load-underlying support surface to structure linking the
    weight to the support surface, or (c) the load-underlying support surface
    to structure linking it to a weight designed to at least partially balance
    or counteract the weight of the support surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    349,    for an attaching means which releases the load-underlying support
    surface from the drive-means* in response to a particular condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 115+ for a cord or rope
    holder per se which connects a cord or rope to a structure.


CLS 187/412
TXT Equalizes tension in, or length of, plural linking cables:

    Attaching device under subclass 411 which attaches two or more cables to
    the load-underlying support surface or weight at a common location and is
    constructed to maintain the cables at the same degree of tautness or at the
    same length.


CLS 187/413
TXT HAVING SPECIFIC ARRANGEMENT OR CONNECTION OF ELECTRICAL OR FLUID SERVICE
    LINE:

    Subject matter under the class definition having (1) a particular aspect of
    structure within the shaft* detailed which limits the path of or (2) a
    particular aspect of a device used to attach a portion of either (a) a wire
    which carries electric current or (b) a pipe which carries fluid under
    pressure to the load-underlying support surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 68.1+ for
    electrical conductors, per se.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 49+ for a pipe or cable support which is not
    combined with more than named elevator structure.

    285,    Pipe Joints or couplings, appropriate subclasses for a pipe
    attaching device which is not combined with more than named elevator
    structure.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for a connector for
    attaching an electric wire which is not combined with more than named
    elevator structure.


CLS 187/414
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition not provided for in another
    subclass.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 187/900
TXT TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION ELEVATOR FOR BUILDING:

    A collection of art disclosing a useful detail of an elevator intended to
    be nonpermanently located at a site and to move building material to its
    final landing* within an insitu structure during the erection of the
    structure.


CLS 187/901
TXT CONTROL MODIFIED FOR USE BY DISABLED  INDIVIDUAL:

    A collection of art disclosing a control* which regulates the operation of
    a component of an elevator (e.g., door) and has a specific feature adapting
    it for use by a person having some physical problem which prohibits or
    restricts the ability of the person to operate a standard control.


CLS 187/902
TXT CONTROL FOR DOUBLE-DECKER CAR:

    A collection of art disclosing a control* which regulates the operation of
    an elevator car having two distinct passenger compartments located at
    different vertical levels.


CLS 188/
TTL BRAKES

CLS 188/
TXT This class includes means for retarding the motion of or stopping machines,
    including vehicles, both rail and road, and shafts, wheels, pulleys, or
    other moving mechanisms, by friction, by positive engagement of elements,
    or by the internal resistance of a fluid or a field of force.  Citations
    from other classes indicating the limits of this class will be found under
    the various subclass definitions.

    (1)     Note.  Class 192 is the generic locus for clutches and brakes, and
    see paragraph III of the class definition of that class.

    (2)     Note.  Vehicle shock-absorbers are included in this class unless of
    the type which flex or put stress upon a spring or springs.  These latter
    are found in Class 267, Spring Devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    3,      Artificial Body Members, subclasses 26 and 28 for knee joints
    equipped with brakes.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 813+ for indexing
    assemblies of general utility including means to prevent or hold against
    rotation, and appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 640+ for brakes
    and/or clutches used to modify or control a gearing organization, where
    specific gearing structure is claimed.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclasses for an
    expansible chamber device, and particularly subclasses 8+ for a means to
    control the flow of a nonworking arresting fluid for a working member,
    subclasses 15+ for a releasable stop or latch means to arrest the movement
    of a working member.  For a statement of the line between Class 92, and
    Class 188, see section III, under "SEARCH CLASS 188", of the class
    definition of Class 92.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 6.2+ for a motor vehicle which is
    steered by creating a difference between the driving effort developed by
    one or more traction elements located on one side of the vehicle and the
    driving effort developed by one or more traction elements located on the
    other side thereof (e.g., by braking the element or elements on one side);
    and subclass 197 for a motor vehicle which is provided with means for
    detecting wheel slip during vehicle acceleration and controlling it by
    reducing the power applied to the wheel, and see (1) Note thereof regarding
    the possible involvement, additionally, of a change in a braking condition.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 5+, 72, 191, and 192
    for brakes or retarders which engage a strand of a device of that class,
    and subclasses 75, 231, and 236+ for brakes or retarders associated with a
    winding reel of a supple escape.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning or Guiding, subclasses 243+, 285+, 381+, 382+,
    385+, 396+, 419+, 421+, and 422+ for a brake in a winding, unwinding, or
    similar environment.

    305,    Wheel Substitutes for Land Vehicles, subclass 9 for brakes combined
    with wheel substitutes.  Class 305 takes the combination of a wheel
    substitute and a brake therefor if some wheel substitute structure is
    claimed.  The mere nominal recitation of a wheel substitute in the claim is
    not sufficient wheel substitute structure to be classified in Class 305.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 93 for brakes
    wherein the braking force is transmitted solely by means of an
    electromagnetic field between the brake and the braked elements.

    318,    Electricity: Motive Power Systems, subclasses 362+ for motor
    braking control.  This class (318) takes braking arrangements for electric
    motors and includes friction braking, plugging, dynamic braking and
    magnetic braking.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, for brakes
    and/or clutches used to modify a planetary gearing organization.

    477,    Interrelated Power Delivery Controls, Including Engine Control, for
    interrelated control between an engine and a transmission, clutch, or brake.


CLS 188/1.11
TXT WITH CONDITION INDICATOR:

    A device under the class definition including means automatically
    responsive to a predetermined condition of the brake for sending a signal
    indicating the condition to an operator.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes only patents claiming both
    significant brake structure and an indicator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses, especially
    subclasses 121+ for a nonelectric brake condition indicator wherein no
    significance is attributed to brake structure.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 453+ and 457.3 for an
    electric automatic brake condition indicator wherein no significance is
    attributed to brake structure.


CLS 188/1.12
TXT TO RETARD ROLLING OF CASTER:

    A device under the class definition including a small roller member (e.g.,
    a wheel or ball) mounted for rotation about a central axis and adapted to
    support a heavy object (e.g., a piece of furniture), and also including
    means to brake the rotation of the member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 35 for a caster having a lock to
    prevent swiveling.


CLS 188/2
TXT Includes brakes for vehicles not specifically provided for in other
    subclasses, including vehicle-brakes.


CLS 188/3
TXT Includes brakes for trains of nonrail vehicles.

    (1)     Note.  Where the braking action is initiated by the relative action
    between the vehicles of the train, the patent will be found in this class,
    subclass 112.  Where the relative motion is between the draft-animals and
    the vehicle, see this class, subclasses 115 to 118, and 120 to 123.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 400+ for trains of road vehicles,
    especially subclasses 427+ for interrelated brake, landing gear and
    couplings in semi-trailers.

    303,    Fluid-Pressure and Analogous Brake Systems, subclass 7 for a fluid
    pressure brake system for a train divided into a plurality of sections, the
    fluid being distributed to the sections in a different manner.


CLS 188/4
TXT Includes brakes for nonrail vehicles which act on the wheel and ground.

    (1)     Note.  Brakes of this description usually are applied between the
    wheel and the ground.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for chocks applied to rail-vehicles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclass 18 for patents for wheel-chocks attached to the
    wheel.


CLS 188/5
TXT Brakes for nonrail vehicles applied to the ground, either to check the
    forward motion of the vehicle or to prevent side motion or skidding.


CLS 188/6
TXT The brake member is pointed and penetrates the surface of the ground.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 188 for ground-engaging devices that pull
    on the horse-rein.


CLS 188/7
TXT Brakes for nonrail vehicles which contact or penetrate the surface of the
    earth for the purpose of preventing motion when the vehicle-body is used as
    a machine-support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 418+ for vehicle attached jacks.


CLS 188/8
TXT Brakes for sleds.


CLS 188/9
TXT Brakes for four-wheeled road-vehicles usually known as "farm" or "lumber"
    wagons.


CLS 188/10
TXT The brake engages all the four wheels of the wagon.


CLS 188/11
TXT Brakes in which there is no beam and the brake-shoe is supported directly
    by the brake-applying lever or where the beam is divided into two parts.


CLS 188/12
TXT The brake is supported directly by the running-gear and is unaffected by
    the rise or fall of the body or box.


CLS 188/13
TXT The brake is supported directly by the running-gear and there is no beam or
    the beam is divided.


CLS 188/14
TXT A wagon brake in which the operating mechanism is extended upward to clear
    the load.


CLS 188/15
TXT Wagon brakes in which the portions of the divided beam are withdrawn a
    considerable distance from the wheel upon release of the brake.


CLS 188/16
TXT Brakes that may be separately applied to the independently-rotating rear
    wheels of a nonrail vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    303,    Fluid-Pressure and Analogous Brake Systems, subclass 9.61 for
    separately and simultaneously controlled multiple motor systems.


CLS 188/17
TXT Brakes applied to the wheel-attached hub or disk on the axle of a nonrail
    vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  The parallel subclasses for rail-vehicles are subclasses 58
    and 59 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71.1+,  for disclosure of an axially movable brake element for retarding
    rotation of a wheel (e.g., disc brake).

    218,    for the disks or surface to which these brakes are applied.


CLS 188/18
TXT Hub or disk brakes adapted to a motor-vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  The device in this subclass usually include the structure of
    the axle (e.g., steerable axle), frame structure in addition to hub, or
    disc brake structure with mounting means for the brake structure in
    relation to the other vehicle components.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for disc brakes for railway vehicles which brakes are applied to
    the nontread surface of the traction wheel or to a disk on the axle.


CLS 188/19
TXT Brakes adapted to carts with two wheels.


CLS 188/20
TXT Brakes for children's carriages or perambulators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 87.01 for brakes for children's
    coaster-wagons.


CLS 188/21
TXT Brakes for the platform type of trucks.


CLS 188/22
TXT Brakes for two-wheeled platform-trucks.


CLS 188/23
TXT The brake contacts with the ground.


CLS 188/24.11
TXT Velocipede (e.g., bicycle, etc.):
    Apparatus under subclass 2 which is adapted to be mounted upon a wheeled
    vehicle of the type which is propelled by a person operating the vehicle
    (e.g., a bicycle, tricycle, etc.) and which retards motion of the vehicle
    by applying braking force to one or more of its wheels.


CLS 188/24.12
TXT Including mechanism for opposed gripping of wheel rim or tire: Apparatus
    under subclass 24.11 including a pair of brake components (e.g., brake
    pads) carried by an actuating means (e.g., a caliper mechanism), wherein
    the actuating means is adapted to move the pair of brake components into
    opposed frictional engagement with sides of either a rim of the wheel or a
    tire mounted thereon.


CLS 188/24.13
TXT Wheel rim configured to cooperate with components:

    Apparatus under subclass 24.12 having a wheel rim particularly designed or
    constructed to enhance its coaction with the components.


CLS 188/24.14
TXT Having means to increase braking force (e.g., self-energizing brake, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 24.12 including automatically operating means to
    increase the effective force exerted upon the vehicle when the brake is
    actuated.

    (1)     Note.  Common to this subclass, and those indented hereunder, is a
    vehicle having at least one caliper-type brake and means for automatically
    increasing the effective braking force upon the vehicle without
    proportionately increasing the force exerted upon the actuator by the
    vehicle's operator.  A so-called self-energized brake is one type of this
    subject matter.


CLS 188/24.15
TXT Variable leverage actuator:

    Apparatus under subclass 24.14 wherein the actuating means includes a
    plurality of caliper arms, each carrying a component, which gives a varying
    mechanical advantage to the brake as the components move from their
    inoperative positions to their fully operative positions.


CLS 188/24.16
TXT Plural brakes having common actuator:
    Apparatus under subclass 24.14 on a vehicle which has a plurality of
    brakes, and means interconnecting the brakes so that actuation of one
    effects similar actuation of the other.


CLS 188/24.17
TXT Actuation controlled by back-pedalling:

    Apparatus under subclass 24.12 for use on a vehicle wherein the operator
    propels the vehicle by turning a sprocket in one direction by means of a
    pedal arrangement, wherein the brake is actuated by turning the sprocket in
    the other direction.


CLS 188/24.18
TXT With means to lock brake in actuated position:

    Apparatus under subclass 24.12 having means whereby the brake is
    constrained to remain in engagement with the wheel rim or tire after
    initial actuation without continued manual actuation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83,     for a wheel brake which is continuously operated.

    265,    for a device for holding a brake in a set position (e.g., set
    position of brake actuation).

    353,    for a fluid operated brake with means to trap fluid in the brake
    system to hold the brake applied.


CLS 188/24.19
TXT Having means to adjust spacing between brake component and wheel rim or
    tire:

    Apparatus under subclass 24.12 including means for selectively changing the
    distance between at least one of the components and the wheel rim or tire
    when the brake is in its inoperative position.


CLS 188/24.21
TXT Having center-pull, cable-type actuator for mechanism:

    Apparatus under subclass 24.12 wherein the brake-actuating means includes a
    cable adapted to move along its longitudinal axis when it is actuated to
    operate the brake, and the longitudinal axis of the cable passes through
    the symmetrical center of the brake components.

    (1)     Note.  The elongated means may comprise, for example, a rod, a
    chain, or a cable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    344,    for a velocipede brake having a hydraulic actuator.


CLS 188/24.22
TXT Specific actuator element structure:
    Apparatus under subclass 24.12 wherein significance is attributed to a
    particular design or construction feature of at least one part within the
    brake-actuating means.

    (1)     Note.  Disclosures found in this subclass include a caliper arm,
    per se, hinge means for pivotally connecting caliper arms, etc.


CLS 188/25
TXT The brake-shoe is a cylinder or other rotating body.


CLS 188/26
TXT Brakes are applied to a wheel-attached hub or to a disk on the axle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71.1+,  for disclosures of an axially movable brake element for retarding
    rotation of a wheel (e.g., disc brake).


CLS 188/27
TXT The brake is applied to the wheel that turns with the fork of the
    velocipede.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194,    for brakes applied to pivoted wheels turning with reference to the
    relatively stationary brake-support.


CLS 188/28
TXT The brakes are applied to the diametrically-opposite sides of a
    nonrail-vehicle wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for the parallel subclass in rail-vehicles.


CLS 188/29
TXT The brakes are applied on the upper side of the wheel.


CLS 188/30
TXT Brakes applied to the wheels of a nonrail vehicle to prevent retrograde
    movement.


CLS 188/31
TXT Brakes for nonrail vehicles that positively stop rotation.

    (1)     Note.  Parallel subclasses will be found in subclasses 60 and 69
    below.


CLS 188/32
TXT The brakes are located on the ground and not attached to the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  Chocks are found in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62+,    for brakes for track guided vehicles mounted on a track and not to
    the vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    293,    Vehicle Fenders, subclass 7 for a chock block for a vehicle fender
    device with car control.

    410,    Freight Accommodation on Freight Carrier, subclasses 4+ for chocks
    or cradles for the wheel of a vehicle accommodated on a freight carrier
    during shipment; note subclasses 7+ for structure retaining the vehicle on
    the carrier which may further include the chock or cradle for abutment
    purposes; in particular, note the indented subclasses 19+ for hub or axle
    retainer structure and wherein a wheel chock, as well, may be provided.
    See too, subclass 30 for a vehicle wheel cradle or chock, absent retainer
    means; and subclasses 49+ for a cradle or chock for a cylindrical article
    in transit on a freight carrier and which is not mounted on a stowed
    vehicle.

    D12,    Transportation, subclass 217 for a wheel chock.


CLS 188/33
TXT Brakes peculiarly adapted to vehicles running on rails.


CLS 188/34
TXT Brakes for the vehicles of a train operated from one point in the train.


CLS 188/35
TXT The brakes are applied to both the car-wheel and the rail, either
    simultaneously or successively.


CLS 188/36
TXT The brake is applied between the wheel and the rail.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 258 for rail-chocks clamped to the rail.

    293,    Vehicle Fenders, subclass 7 for chock-brakes actuated by a fender.


CLS 188/37
TXT The shoe-chock is in the form of a roller.


CLS 188/38
TXT The brake is applied to the track, not on the rail upon which the wheels
    run.


CLS 188/38.5
TXT Devices under subclass 38 wherein a series of detent or stop elements are
    adjacent the rails arranged in a line parallel to the direction the rails
    extend and a rail-traversing car or carriage carries thereon an element
    which is so located that when the car moves along the rails the element
    will engage one of the stop elements and arrest the car.

    (1)     Note.  The stop elements of this subclass are other than those
    elements necessary to complete the railway such as crossties, rail
    connecting plates, rail plates, and the like; the stop elements may be and
    usually are adjustable in the direction the rails extend.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for car-carried devices which are used to engage parts of the
    railway and see (1) Note.

    62+,    for car retarders or catchers installed on the trackway and
    requiring no modification for special construction on the car.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 396 for interrelated tool actuating means and
    means to actuate a stop for a work-mover, and subclass 416 for means to
    stop a work-conveyer.

    104,    Railways, subclasses 249+ for trackway-mounted devices arranged to
    engage and stop or prevent the motion of a car on the rails; in the devices
    in this class (104) the car is not structurally modified to provide means
    designed solely to coact with the stop element.


CLS 188/39
TXT The brake-shoe is a wheel or cylinder.

    (1)     Note.  The rotary shoe is in some cases driven in a direction
    opposite to the rotation of the car wheels.


CLS 188/40
TXT The brake is applied to the portions of the track bounding a channel,
    usually between the traction-rails.


CLS 188/41
TXT The brakes are applied to the traction-rail.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165,    for rail-brakes electrically applied.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclasses 202+ for grippers for railways.

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclasses 359+ for a brake carried by an elevator car and engaging shaft
    structure to stop the car.


CLS 188/42
TXT Brakes applied to a rail of the suspended or mono-rail type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclasses 112+, and 105, Railway Rolling Stock,
    subclasses 148+ for the specified type of railway structure and car.


CLS 188/43
TXT Brakes in which the rail is gripped by the jaws of a clamp.  The rail may
    be the traction-rail or another.


CLS 188/44
TXT The gripper is automatically acting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127.


CLS 188/45
TXT The wheel or axis is clamped to the rail to form an anchor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 33+ for examples of rail-clamps.


CLS 188/46
TXT A series of brakes applied to two or more wheels or sets of parallel wheels
    in tandem and in which the pull is equalized on all the brakes in the
    series.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for clasp-brakes used in this structure.


CLS 188/47
TXT Brakes especially applicable to the two-, four-, or six-wheel trucks of a
    railway-car.


CLS 188/48
TXT Brakes adapted to the railway-car trucks in which preponderance of the load
    is on two of the wheels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 184, for the maximum-traction
    car-truck.


CLS 188/49
TXT The brakes are hung outside for four wheels of the truck and are pulled
    toward each other.


CLS 188/50
TXT The brake mechanism is so disposed as to leave the center of the truck open
    for the motor and for other purposes.


CLS 188/51
TXT The brake-beam is divided or the brake-shoe is attached directly to the
    brake-lever.


CLS 188/52
TXT The brakes are between the wheels of the four-wheel truck and are pushed or
    pulled outwardly.


CLS 188/53
TXT The beam is divided or the brake-shoe is attached directly to the
    brake-lever.


CLS 188/54
TXT Locomotive-brake known as the "jam-brake".


CLS 188/55
TXT Specially applicable to mine-cars.

    (1)     Note.  Other brakes applicable to these cars are found in this
    class, subclass 57.


CLS 188/56
TXT The brakes are on the diametrically-opposite sides of the wheels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for similar brakes on road-vehicles.

    46,     for other examples of clasp-brakes.

    233,    for brake-beams especially applicable  to these brakes.


CLS 188/57
TXT Brakes applied to the tops of the wheels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     for similar brakes for road-vehicles.


CLS 188/58
TXT The brakes are applied to the nontread surface of the traction-wheel or to
    a disk on the axle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71.1+,  for disclosure of an axially movable brake element for retarding
    rotation of a wheel (e.g., disc brake).

    218,    for the disks or wheel surfaces to which these brakes are applied.


CLS 188/59
TXT The brakes are applied in a direction perpendicular to the braking-surface
    of the disk. Search This Class, Subclasses 26, 71, 72, and 73.


CLS 188/60
TXT Brakes that positively stop rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31      and 69.


CLS 188/61
TXT Brakes designed to prevent retrograde motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     81, and 127.


CLS 188/62
TXT Brakes located on the track.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 26 for railway track brakes for regulating the
    speed of rolling motion of a freight car along a track.


CLS 188/63
TXT Brakes located on the track that present a positive stop to the vehicle.


CLS 188/64
TXT Brakes applied to a strand or cord and to the wheel or pulley over which it
    runs.


CLS 188/65.1
TXT Brakes which operate on strands, such as ropes, bands, cords, etc.

    (1)     Note.  The brake structure when claimed, per se, is here even
    though it is disclosed as moving relative to a stationary strand.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 182, Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses
    3+ for a torso harness with a strand engaging descent retarder, subclass 11
    for an occupant controlled carrier traveling on inclined cable, subclasses
    71 and 72 for an occupant-controlled or occupant-weight-controlled descent
    retarder with a storage device for a supple escape, and subclasses 191+ for
    a load responsive or occupant actuated brake on a carrier sliding on a
    single strand.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 419+ and 147+ for a
    brake to retard movement of running material.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 375+ for a cable-pulling drum having means for preventing or
    retarding rotation of drum; and subclass 391 for a pulley having a
    mechanism for retarding or preventing cable movement or element rotation.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclass 10 for spring devices in which friction
    means operate on a flexible strap, and subclass 198 for a strand type shock
    absorber combined with a spring.


CLS 188/65.2
TXT Brakes under subclass 65.1 which have means for securing the brake
    structure to some other device.

    (1)     Note.  The securing means may be disclosed for securing a person to
    the brake for controlled travel down a stationary strand or for securing
    the brake to a stationary structure to anchor the brake.


CLS 188/65.3
TXT Devices under subclass 65.1 in which two or more different strand brakes
    are claimed in combination.


CLS 188/65.4
TXT Devices under subclass 65.1 in which the strand passes through the brake
    structure in a devious or tortuous path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 160+ for metal bending apparatus which
    treats metal by progressively bending it back and forth by passing it
    between staggered abutments in opposed rows.


CLS 188/65.5
TXT Devices under subclass 65.4 wherein a part of the tortuous brake structure
    is adjustable to vary the applied frictional force or grip.


CLS 188/67
TXT Brakes applied to rods.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for a flexible strap brake moving transversely to and toward the
    axis and partially or wholly encircling a wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 162 for devices for gripping
    and advancing rods and subclass 531 for friction detents for control levers.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 15+ for a releasable stop or
    latch means engageable between a piston or piston rod of an expansible
    chamber device and a fixed part to prevent movement of the piston.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 22 through 24, 31, 106+, 210, and 245 for analogous structure
    for gripping, advancing, and/or holding in position a traveling bar or rod.


CLS 188/68
TXT Brakes applied frictionally and positively, either successively or
    simultaneously.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 813+ for turrets which may
    have both positive and friction locking means.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 53.1+ for similar action
    in clutches.


CLS 188/69
TXT Brakes for wheels that positively stop rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31      and 60.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 813+ for turrets which may
    have a positive locking means.


CLS 188/70
TXT Wheel-brakes moving parallel and transversely to axis of rotation.


CLS 188/71.1
TXT Motion-retarding means under the class definition wherein the motion to be
    retarded is rotation of a wheel, pulley, disc or an analogous member
    rotating about an axis and having a radially-extending surface, and wherein
    said means includes a component with the following characteristics:

    a)      it is supported to be adjacent to said member, but substantially
    fixed against rotation therewith.

    b)      it has a friction surface complementary to said radially-extending
    surface, but normally spaced away therefrom, and

    c)      it may be moved in a direction parallel to said axis to effect
    mutual contact of the complementary surfaces; whereby upon occurrence of
    said contact, the rotation of said member will be retarded.

    (1)     Note.  The term "radially-extending surface" includes a conical or
    frustro-conical surface as well as a planar surface that is perpendicular
    to the axis of rotation.

    (2)     Note.  Patents in this subclass (71.1) usually claim a housing that
    supports a disc-brake assemblage, or the means for mounting such a housing,
    but omit structure that would justify placement into one of the indented
    subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     26 and 58, for disclosure of a hub or disc brake acting on a
    vehicle, velocipede and railway axle, respectively.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 302+,  381+, 396.9, and
    423+ for an axially applied brake  for retarding a spool or the like.


CLS 188/71.2
TXT Apparatus under subclass 71.1 provided with a clutch that connects and
    disconnects said disc or analogous rotating member with respect to a wheel
    or other analogous rotating member, the rotation of which is to be retarded.

    (1)     Note.  The "clutch" referred to above is one that by itself would
    be found in Class 192, Clutches and Power-Stop Control, thus needs no
    further definition.  In this subclass, however, the clutch is used solely
    to connect the wheel, or equivalent rotating load, whose rotation is to be
    retarded, to a device of this class (188) and this subclasses (71.1+), used
    to retard such rotation, so that a user may control operation or
    nonoperation of a brake.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291,    for disclosure of an internal-resistance brake connected to a wheel
    or rotating load by a clutch mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, appropriate subclasses, for a
    clutch, per se, and subclasses 12+, for a clutch and brake that are applied
    alternatively to drive or to retard a mechanism.


CLS 188/71.3
TXT Apparatus under subclass 71.1 provided with two of said components, the
    friction surface of one of the components facing in a direction opposite
    the friction surface of the other of the components, and further provided
    with two radially-extending surfaces spaced from one another on said
    rotating member, the components being located in the space between the
    radially- extending surfaces so that each of the radially-extending
    surfaces is adjacent to but spaced from a corresponding one of the friction
    surfaces, wherein the components are moved apart from one another to cause
    each friction surface to contact its adjacent radially-extending surface.


CLS 188/71.4
TXT Apparatus under subclass 71.3 wherein each of said friction surfaces
    extends entirely around the axis of rotation of the member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73.2,   for disclosure of an annular disc in a disc brake, and see the
    notes to subclass 73.2, for the locus of other similar structure.


CLS 188/71.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 71.1 provided with a multiplicity of said members
    and with a multiplicity of said components interleaved between the members
    such that each friction surface (i.e., on a component) is adjacent a
    radially-extending surface (i.e., on a rotating member).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71.3,   for disclosure of a member having two radially-extending surfaces
    facing each other and two brake elements therebetween that move away from
    each other to cause each element surface to contact its adjacent member
    surface.

    73.2,   for disclosure of an annular disc used in a disc brake, and see the
    notes of subclass 73.2, for the locus of other similar structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 70.2 and 70.21 for a
    multiple clutch disk arrangement.


CLS 188/71.6
TXT Apparatus under subclass 71.1 provided with means for reducing in any or
    all parts of the apparatus defined in subclass 71.1 the heat rise that is
    caused by use of such apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  It is inherent in any "spot-type" disc-brake (i.e., in which
    a friction pad of relatively small area is pressed against a rotating disc
    of relatively large area) that the portion of the disc not adjacent to the
    pad is exposed to ambient atmosphere and thus is cooled.  To be placed in
    this subclass (71.6) a patent must therefore disclose structure (e.g., a
    cooling fan, a liquid-circulating system) specifically designated for a
    cooling function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218,    for a heat shield and for a shield serving both as a dust guard and
    a heat shield for a brake rotor or drum.

    264,    for disclosure of cooling or lubricating means in a brake
    assemblage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 70.12 and 113.1+ for
    means to cool or lubricate a clutch part.


CLS 188/71.7
TXT Apparatus under subclass 71.1 provided with means to alter the space
    between the radially-extending surface and the friction surface, such
    alteration occurring during a period of noncontact of the surfaces.

    (1)     Note.  See the definition of subclass 72.1 and (1) Note of that
    definition for the difference between adjustment and actuation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79.51+, for wear take up or compensating structure for a transversely
    movable brake.

    196+,   for disclosure of a slack adjuster similar to brake-wear adjusting
    means found herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 70.25 for adjustable
    means to move a clutch element axially to compensate for wear in the clutch
    parts and subclass 111 for a clutch wear compensator.


CLS 188/71.8
TXT Apparatus under subclass 71.7 wherein the altering means operates without
    manual intervention of a user of the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  In this and the indented subclass the actuator itself is
    moved to approximately the same degree during application of the brake
    element (i.e., toward the disc) as during retraction of the element (i.e.,
    away from the disc) but a connection between the actuator and the element
    permits a lesser degree of movement during retraction than during
    application.

    (2)     Note.  In this subclass (71.8) many patents disclose a connection
    having differential friction between two elements; that is, friction
    between two elements causes them to slide together at the same rate in one
    direction of mutual movement but permits them to slip, one with respect to
    the other, in the opposite direction of mutual movement.


CLS 188/71.9
TXT Apparatus under subclass 71.8 wherein the altering means includes a
    helically threaded member that is caused to turn relative to a mating
    member in one direction only, thus causing said threaded member to advance
    along its axis of turning.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the screw rotates by reason of a ratchet fixed
    thereto that cooperates with a pawl oscillating relative to the screw.


CLS 188/72.1
TXT Apparatus under subclass 71.1 provided with means to press said component
    toward said rotating member so that the friction surface contacts the
    radially-extending surface, the operation of said means being initiated by
    a user of the brake.

    (1)     Note.  In the operation of a brake or both of the surfaces (i.e.,
    that on the rotating disc and that on the nonrotating brake element) will
    wear by attrition of the surfaces, thus tending to increase the space that
    should normally exist between the surfaces during nonoperation of the
    brake.  The actuator that moves the brake element toward the disc for
    braking usually has only a limited range of operation, thus it is necessary
    to adjust the brake element toward the disc to compensate for such wear.
    In most devices the actuator mechanism is separate from the adjustor
    mechanism, but in all instances the actuator applies the brake whereas the
    adjuster is operated during nonapplication and the difference is readily
    apparent.


CLS 188/72.2
TXT Apparatus under subclass 72.1 wherein said component-pressing means
    includes mechanism to augment braking pressure applied by said means, the
    mechanism acting after the initiation of the means by a brake user and also
    acting without further intervention by the brake user.

    (1)     Note.  Energy for augmenting or increasing brake pressure is
    usually derived from kinetic energy of the rotating brake disc, as by
    dragging a brake element with and toward the disc, but may be derived from
    another source. However, such energy is in addition to that provided by the
    muscle power of the user.


CLS 188/72.3
TXT Apparatus under subclass 72.1 further provided with mechanism to withdraw
    said component away from contact with said rotating member.

    (1)     Note.  Most patents in this subclass disclose a resilient element
    (e.g., coil spring, "Belleville" washer, rubber block) for urging the brake
    element away from the rotating element. However, positively-acting means
    (e.g., fluid pressure, mechanical link, etc.), is also disclosed as having
    that function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166+,   for a spring applied brake with the release mechanism therefor.

    216,    for the release mechanism to secure the release of a brake when the
    applying force is removed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 70.28 for spring means to
    move a clutch element axially to separate engaged clutch elements.



CLS 188/72.4
TXT Apparatus under subclass 72.1 wherein said component-pressing means
    includes a movable disc or cylinder fitted closely within a hollow tube or
    cylinder and moved by a force applied via a liquid or gaseous medium.

    (1)     Note.  In this and indented subclasses subatmospheric (i.e.,
    "vacuum") pressure is also disclosed as a fluid-pressure medium.

    (2)     Note.  In order to be placed in this subclass, there must be both
    significant component-pressing means and significant cylinder or tube
    structure recited in the claims.  Nominal component-pressing means and
    cylinder or piston structure together with more significant seal structure
    or duct boot structure is found in this class, subclass 370.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151+,   for disclosure of a brake operator actuated by fluid pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 98 for a rolling diaphragm of
    the expansible chamber type with the entire periphery secured to the rigid
    working member forming the collapsible wall; subclasses 165+ for a guide or
    seal on the cylinder end portion of a piston or member moved by a piston;
    subclass 169 for particular details of the cylinder structure; and
    subclasses 172+ for details of the brake piston, per se.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 85+ for a fluid
    pressure axially actuated, clutch motor.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 434+ for a piston ring or piston ring expander or seat
    therefor.


CLS 188/72.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 72.4 provided with a plurality of components and
    with a corresponding plurality of component-pressing means.

    (1)     Note.  In some devices of this subclass (72.5) one cylinder is
    fitted with two pistons, and each piston actuates its brake element.


CLS 188/72.6
TXT Apparatus under subclass 72.4 further provided with structure for
    converting force into motion or for connecting a part movable in one
    direction to a part movable in another direction or for increasing or
    decreasing the rate of motion or force of one part with respect to another
    part.

    (1)     Note.  The mechanical linkage may be used in addition to the
    fluid-pressure piston (i.e., in a drive train including both fluid-pressure
    and mechanical elements in series), or be used in substitution therefor
    (i.e., either the fluid-pressure system is used or a mechanical linkage is
    used).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    for brake devices having both a mechanical and a fluid operator.


CLS 188/72.7
TXT Apparatus under subclass 72.1 wherein said component-pressing means
    includes a first element moving in a first direction and having a surface
    angular to said direction, and also includes a second element movable in a
    second direction and in contact with said surface, whereby movement of said
    first element in a first direction causes movement of said second element
    in a second direction.

    (1)     Note.  In the disclosures of this and indented subclasses one or
    more balls or rollers may be interposed between the first and second
    elements to reduce friction in the actuator mechanism.


CLS 188/72.8
TXT Apparatus under subclass 72.7 wherein said first element is rotated or
    oscillated about an axis and said surface extends substantially radially
    from said axis and fully or partially encompasses said axis, and wherein
    said second element is constrained to move in a direction parallel to said
    axis, whereby turning the first element causes axial movement of the second
    element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71.4,   for disclosure of annular brake elements spread apart from each
    other by helical cams.


CLS 188/72.9
TXT Apparatus under subclass 72.1 wherein said component-pressing means
    includes a bar or rigid piece fulcrumed on a pin, said bar being connected
    to said component and oscillated by a user to effect movement of said
    component.


CLS 188/73.1
TXT Apparatus under subclass 71.1 wherein the construction of said component is
    particularly significant.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass (73.1) usually claim the
    composition of the brake element, (e.g., the chemical elements or alloys
    that comprise the brake element), or the manner or bonding the brake
    element to a backing pad, or disclose other mechanical details of the brake
    element, per se, not otherwise provided for.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250+,   for the structure of a brake component, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 107 for the structure of
    a clutch component, per se.


CLS 188/73.2
TXT Apparatus under subclass 73.1 wherein said component includes either a
    single friction surface or a plurality of separate friction surfaces, but
    in either case extending entirely around the axis of rotation of the member
    which the surface will contact.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are disclosures of a conical or
    frustro-conical surface, or of a planar radial surface, as well as segments
    of surface portions spaced circumferentially to form an equivalent conical
    or planar ring.

    (2)     Note.  The component referred to herein is the stator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71.4,   for disclosure of annular brake elements moved away from each other
    into contact with complementary rotating surfaces.

    71.5,   for disclosure of a multiple-disc brake assemblage using annular
    brake disc and complementary annular rotating members.

    218,    for rotor or stator structure, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 70.11+, for disclosure
    of one or more annular elements having similar structure, but used in a
    clutch-assemblage.


CLS 188/73.31
TXT Retainer for brake element:

    Apparatus under subclass 71.1 provided with means for supporting the
    component relative to the rotating member, fixing the component against
    rotation, but permitting movement of the component in a direction parallel
    to the axis of rotation.


CLS 188/73.32
TXT Having means to facilitate changing brake element:

    Apparatus under subclass 73.31 wherein the supporting means include means
    particularly intended to minimize the time or effort required to remove and
    replace the component or some part thereof.


CLS 188/73.33
TXT By manipulation of brake actuator:

    Apparatus under subclass 73.32 including an actuating means for moving the
    component into contact with the surface of the rotating member, wherein
    either a rearrangement of parts of the actuating means, or a relocation of
    the actuating means relative to the supporting means, facilitates removal
    or replacement of the component.


CLS 188/73.34
TXT Pivotable actuator:

    Apparatus under subclass 73.33 wherein the actuating means is adapted to
    swivel into an alternate location to provide access to the component.


CLS 188/73.35
TXT Having actuator and means to prevent vibration thereof:

    Apparatus under subclass 73.31 including an actuating means for moving the
    component into contact with the surface of the rotating member, and means
    intended to preclude rapid to-and-fro (i.e., vibratory) movement of the
    actuating means.

    (1)     Note.  Disclosures in this subclass and its indent refer to
    "squeal", "noise", or "rattle" as undesirable characteristics of disc
    brakes, and describe means to prevent such characteristics.


CLS 188/73.36
TXT Including means to prevent vibration of brake element:

    Apparatus under subclass 73.35 including an additional means for precluding
    vibratory movement of the component, or wherein the means for precluding
    vibratory movement of the actuator has a similar effect upon the component.


CLS 188/73.37
TXT Having means to prevent vibration of brake element:

    Apparatus under subclass 73.31 including means intended to preclude rapid
    to-and-fro (i.e., vibratory) movement of the component.

    (1)     Note.  Disclosures in this subclass and its indent refer to
    "squeal", "noise", or "rattle" as undesirable characteristics of disc
    brakes, and describe means to prevent such characteristics.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    D12,    Transportation, subclass 180 for a brake element.


CLS 188/73.38
TXT Spring:

    Apparatus under subclass 73.37 wherein the vibration-preventing means
    comprises a resiliently deformable member of solid material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    D12,    Transportation, subclass 180 for a brake element.


CLS 188/73.39
TXT Including torque member supporting brake element:

    Apparatus under subclass 73.31 including a stationary member, fixed to a
    wheel support structure, which receives drag force resulting from
    engagement of the component with the rotating member, wherein the component
    is carried by the stationary member.


CLS 188/73.41
TXT Including actuator pivotable in plane parallel to axis of rotation of wheel:

    Apparatus under subclass 73.31 including an actuating means for moving the
    component into contact with the surface of the rotating member, wherein the
    actuating means itself is mounted for angular movement about an axis
    parallel to the radially extending surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73.47,  for a closed loop type housing which may pivot as defined above.


CLS 188/73.42
TXT And slidable in that plane:

    Apparatus under subclass 73.41 wherein the actuating means is also capable
    of linear movement in a direction parallel to, or colinear with, the axis
    of rotation of the member.


CLS 188/73.43
TXT Including actuator slidable in plane parallel to axis of rotation of wheel:

    Apparatus under subclass 73.31 including an actuating means for moving the
    component into contact with the surface of the rotating member, wherein the
    actuating means is mounted for linear movement in a direction parallel to,
    or colinear with, the axis of rotation of the member.


CLS 188/73.44
TXT On axially extending pin:

    Apparatus under subclass 73.43 wherein the actuating means is guided in its
    sliding movement by a rodlike element which extends through an aperture in
    the actuating means in the direction of sliding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 18.2 for a flexible sealing
    diaphragm attached to a longitudinally  reciprocating rod and casing
    therefor.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 634+ for a static contact seal for other than an
    internal combustion engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable that is a flexible
    sleeve, boot, or diaphragm.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 13+ for guide for a rod or
    bushing used with a joint or connection of that class.


CLS 188/73.45
TXT Plural pins:

    Apparatus under subclass 73.44 wherein the actuating means is guided in its
    movement by a plurality of rodlike elements.


CLS 188/73.46
TXT Including actuator fixed on torque member:

    Apparatus under subclass 73.31 including an actuating means for moving the
    component into contact with the surface of the rotating member, wherein the
    actuating means carries the movable components, and the means is mounted
    immovably on a stationary member which is fixed to a wheel support
    structure and which is adapted to receive torque produced by engagement of
    the component with the rotating member.


CLS 188/73.47
TXT Having closed loop type housing:
    Apparatus under subclass 73.31 wherein the supporting means comprises a
    frame having length and width dimensions, an opening in the frame having
    lesser corresponding dimensions and closed on four sides by the frame, and
    the supporting means is related to the rotating member in the following
    manner:

    (a)     an arc of the periphery of the rotating member projects through the
    opening;

    (b)     the length and width dimensions lie in a plane parallel to and
    spaced from the axis of rotation;

    (c)     the length dimension subtends the member on a chord thereof; and

    (d)     the width dimension is parallel to the axis of rotation.


CLS 188/74
TXT Wheel-brakes moving transversely to the axis of rotation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 301, 381, 396.5+, and
    422.4+ for a radially applied brake for retarding a spool or the like.


CLS 188/75
TXT Wheel-brakes opposing on diametrically-opposite sides of the wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 73 for opposing type of
    transversely engaging clutch.


CLS 188/76
TXT Wheel-brakes moving transversely to the axis of rotation and gripping the
    rim of the wheel.


CLS 188/77
TXT Flexible brakes moving transversely to and toward the axis and partially or
    wholly encircling the wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26      and 58, for other examples of this brake.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 80+ for a strap type
    clutch.


CLS 188/78
TXT Brakes moving transversely to and away from the axis and partially or
    wholly encircling the inner rim of the wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135+,   and especially subclasses 140+, for brakes, the braking action of
    which is due to the momentum of the machine to which the brake is applied.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 567+ for the structure of
    cam elements, per se.


CLS 188/79
TXT Multiple sets of expanding brakes arranged serially or in parallel in
    contact with the inner rim of a wheel.


CLS 188/79.51
TXT Having wear take up or compensating structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 74 which includes a device for adjusting the
    wheel-brake to reduce slack or make allowance for the removal of any
    wheel-brake material due to use, i.e., wear of a brake shoe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71.7+,  for means to adjust for wear of an axially movable brake.

    196+,   for specific slack adjuster structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 522 for a manually
    adjustable lever, per se.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 70.25 and 111 for a
    clutch wear compensator.


CLS 188/79.52
TXT Temperature responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 79.51 including means which reacts to the
    presence or absence of heat due to braking to affect the adjusting of the
    wheel-brake.


CLS 188/79.53
TXT Feeler actuated:

    Subject matter under subclass 79.51 including a separate member which
    senses wear of the brake shoe and activates the adjusting device.


CLS 188/79.54
TXT Actuated in conjunction with other braking element:

    Subject matter under subclass 79.51 wherein the adjusting device is
    activated in cooperation with a braking part, e.g., a parking brake
    actuator, separate from any use to primarily operate the brake.


CLS 188/79.55
TXT Actuated by brake operating lever:

    Subject matter under subclass 79.51 including a brake applying arm which is
    used to activate the adjusting device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 425+ where the brake
    applying are is connected to a worm gear and the worm gear shaft structure
    is of particular significance and subclasses 458+ for particulars of the
    teeth of the worm gear and its associated shaft.


CLS 188/79.56
TXT Having separate adjustment actuator mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 79.51 having activating means for the
    adjusting device  distinct from the adjusting devices, and any brake
    applying means, i.e., operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79.54,  for an adjusting device actuated in conjunction with another
    braking element, e.g., a parking brake, which may act as a separate
    activating means.


CLS 188/79.57
TXT Manually operated:

    Subject matter under subclass 79.51 wherein the adjusting device may be
    directly actuated by a living being.

    (1)     Note.  The adjusting device may also be automatically adjusted
    during braking.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 568+ for adjustable cam
    actuators.


CLS 188/79.58
TXT Brake operator length adjusted:

    Subject matter under subclass 79.57 wherein the adjusting device is part of
    a brake applying means, i.e., brake operator.


CLS 188/79.59
TXT Mounted between shoe and a support member:

    Subject matter under subclass 79.57 wherein the wheel adjusting device is
    attached intermediate the brake shoe and a separate holding element.

    (1)     Note.  The support member may also be another brake shoe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79.63+, for an adjusting device mounted between a shoe and a support member
    no directly actuated by a living being.


CLS 188/79.61
TXT Causes direct simultaneous adjustment of plural shoes:

    Subject matter under subclass 79.59 wherein the adjusting device is in
    contact with and produces concurrent transverse extension of more than one
    shoe.

    (1)     Note.  The shoes are usually adjusted at the brake shoe anchor.


CLS 188/79.62
TXT Located on or in an operator:

    Subject matter under subclass 79.51 wherein the wheel-brake adjusted device
    is positioned in direct contact with or is part of a brake applying means,
    i.e., an operator.


CLS 188/79.63
TXT Mounted between shoe and support member:

    Subject matter under subclass 79.51 wherein the wheel-brake adjusting
    device is attached intermediate the brake shoe and a separate holding
    element.

    (1)     Note.  The support member may also be another brake shoe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79.59+, for manually operated adjusting device mounted between a shoe and a
    support member.


CLS 188/79.64
TXT Between plural supporting shoes:

    Subject matter under subclass 79.63 wherein the wheel-brake adjusting
    device is attached intermediate to and is solely suspended by two or more
    brake shoes.


CLS 188/80
TXT Wheel-brakes with rotating shoes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for rotary shoes on track.


CLS 188/82.1
TXT Brakes applied to element rotating relative to stationary elements to
    prevent retrograde rotation while allowing forward rotation.

    (1)     Note.  These devices are often known as "automatic" or "safety"
    brakes.  They may be considered "automatic" in the sense that their basic
    structure is such that they necessarily react to apply braking force on
    rotation in one direction.

    (2)     Note.  The rotating element may be included by name as "hoisting
    drum", "wheel", etc.

    (3)     Note.  For machines to which the one-way brake is applied, see the
    appropriate art class.  See (2) Note above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for one-way brakes applied to the wheels of a nonrailway vehicle to
    prevent retrograde movement.

    61,     for one-way brakes for railway vehicles to prevent retrograde
    movement.

    67,     for one-way brakes for reciprocating rod-like members.

    290+,   for a fluid-resistance one-way brake.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 111+, for mechanisms
    provided with parts adapted to impart step by step motion to a
    unidirectionally driven member, particularly subclasses 144+, for grip
    units and features, and subclasses 575+, for the structural detail of a
    pawl or ratchet.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 291+,
    for flexible closures in which the material is accumulated in the form of a
    roll and which have means retarding or stopping the rotation of the roll or
    for holding the roll to prevent undesired rotation.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 7+, for devices for the
    joint control of power transmission and brake in which the application of
    the brake is automatic in that it requires no separate control operation,
    subclasses 41+, for clutches which engage in one direction of rotation
    without manipulating, subclass 51, for multiple associated clutches
    instrumental in accomplishing the reversal of rotation, and subclasses
    116.5+, for stop mechanisms.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 298+, 382+, 385+,
    396.2+, and 410 for a one-way positive brake in a reel or similar
    environment.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 266+ for apparatus for hauling or hoisting a load, the apparatus
    including a driven drum which pulls on or travels along a cable where no
    more structure is included than relates to the brake device, classification
    is in Class 188, Brakes.

    477,    Interrelated Power Delivery Controls, Including Engine Control, for
    interrelated control between an engine and a transmission, clutch, or brake.


CLS 188/82.2
TXT Devices under subclass 82.1 in which the direction in which retrograde
    rotation is prevented is selectable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82.3,   for one-way brakes including means for rendering the brake
    inoperative to prevent retrograde rotation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 43+, for clutches which
    engage in one direction of rotation without manipulation and which are
    adjustable to drive in either direction.


CLS 188/82.3
TXT Devices under subclass 82.1 which include means by which a one-way brake
    may be rendered inoperative to prevent retrograde motion of the rotating
    element.

    (1)     Note.  The reversible one-way brakes in this class (188), subclass
    82.2, include means by which one of two one-way brakes is rendered
    inoperative while the other is in operating position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82.2,   see (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 148+, for grip units which
    form parts of more complex intermittent grip mechanisms and which include
    means for releasing a gripper from the driven member.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 32+, for clutches, the
    action of which is initiated by manipulation upon which the engagement is
    completed automatically, and subclass 41 for one-way clutches that may be
    made operative or inoperative by manipulation.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclass 299 for a disabler on a
    one-way positive brake in a fishing reel.


CLS 188/82.34
TXT Devices under subclass 82.3 in which a disabling device is integral with
    the element applied to the surface of the rotating element to brake it.


CLS 188/82.4
TXT Devices under subclass 82.1 having means to withhold the element applied to
    the surface of the rotating element for braking from contact with the
    rotating element during forward rotation while not incapacitating the
    braking element from preventing retrograde rotation.

    (1)     Note.  This feature is usually employed in pawl and ratchet wheel
    type one-way brakes to hold the pawl from rattling on the ratchet wheel
    during forward rotation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 576, for pawls which are
    held out of engagement with a ratchet wheel during rotation of the wheel in
    forward direction and moved into engagement with said ratchet wheel on
    retrograde rotation.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclass 300 for a rotational
    responsive positive brake hold out in a fishing reel.


CLS 188/82.5
TXT Devices under subclass 82.1 in which a one-way brake is claimed in
    combination with elements other than or in addition to a stationary
    element, an element rotating relative thereto, and means permitting
    rotation in the forward direction and reacting on the stationary element to
    brake the rotating element when rotation is in the retrograde direction; or
    in which more than one type of one-way brake is claimed.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, devices which act as a
    one-way brake and have automatic control as, for instance, having means
    responsive to the speed of retrograde rotation of the rotating element to
    augment the action of the brake.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass also includes one-way brakes in combination
    with an additional brake such as a "service" brake.  Where the additional
    brake and the one-way brake are interconnected with a disabling means for
    the one-way brake, search this class, subclasses 82.3+.

    (3)     Note.  See the notes to the definition of this class, subclass
    82.1, as to combinations of one-way brakes with other devices located in
    other classes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82.1,   see (3) Note above.

    82.3+,  see (2) Note above.


CLS 188/82.6
TXT Devices under subclass 82.1 in which a strip continuously under
    longitudinal tension flexes on retrograde rotation of the shaft to apply
    braking force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for flexible brakes moving transversely to and toward the axis and
    partially or wholly encircling the wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 80+, for transversely
    engaged exterior clutches in which the exterior transversely moving member
    is a flexible strap or band.


CLS 188/82.7
TXT Devices under subclass 82.1 in which a tongue-like element is mounted to
    swing or bend into braking position upon retrograde motion of the rotating
    member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82.4,   for this subject matter in combination with means which during the
    forward rotation of the rotating member acts to hold the pivoted member out
    of contact with the surface of the rotating member usually to avoid
    rattling of the pawl on ratchet wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 575+, for machine elements
    limited to the structural details of a pawl or ratchet, and see the notes
    thereto for the classification of combinations including pawls.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 300+,
    for flexible panels which are accumulated in the form of a roll and which
    have a brake or stop in the form of a pawl acting on the roll supporting
    means, or some part carried thereby and rotated therewith for the purpose
    of retarding or stopping the rotation of the roll, or for holding the roll
    to prevent undesired rotation.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 43.1, for one-way
    engaging reversible automatic clutches in which the engaging elements are
    pivoted pawls, and subclass 45.1, for one-way clutches in which the
    engaging element is a wedging pawl or block.


CLS 188/82.74
TXT Devices under subclass 82.7 in which the swing or bending of the detent
    member is in a plane containing or parallel to the axis about which the
    braked element rotates.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82.9,   for other one-way brakes for rotating elements in which the braking
    element moves axially of the axis of rotation.


CLS 188/82.77
TXT Devices under subclass 82.7 in which the swinging element is carried by the
    rotating member.


CLS 188/82.8
TXT Devices under subclass 82.1 in which rotation of the rotating element in
    the retrograde direction forces a member into jamming position between
    converging surfaces, one of which is the rotating element, to cause a
    braking.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 45.1, for one-way
    clutches in which the engaging element is a wedging pawl or block.


CLS 188/82.84
TXT Devices under subclass 82.8 in which the engaging member is circular in
    cross-section and rolls into position to exert the braking force.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclass 297,
    for flexible panels which are accumulated in the form of a roll and which
    employ a brake or stop in the form of a ball or roller operating on the
    roll supporting means or some part secured to and rotating with roller.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 45, for one-way engaging
    automatic clutches in which the engaging  element is a ball or roller and
    see the notes thereto for other ball and roller engaging clutches.


CLS 188/82.9
TXT Devices under subclass 82.1 in which the engaging element moves along the
    axis of rotation of the element braked to exert the braking force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82.74,  for one-way brakes for rotating elements in which the braking
    element is a pivoted or flexing detent swinging axially of the axis of
    rotation.


CLS 188/83
TXT Wheel-brakes applied continuously.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 100+.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 244+ for a continuously
    applied brake for the spool of a spinning-type fishing reel, and subclasses
    422+ and 147+ for a brake to stress running material.


CLS 188/84
TXT The brake is fixed, the part to be braked being moved to the braking member.


CLS 188/85
TXT Wheel-brakes applied and released automatically at equal intervals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    303,    Fluid-Pressure and Analogous Brake Systems, subclass 61 for a brake
    system intermittently charged with brake fluid.


CLS 188/105
TXT Two or more operating means applied to the same brake.


CLS 188/106
TXT Two or more operators applied to a brake on a nonrail vehicle.


CLS 188/107
TXT Two or more operators applied to a brake on a rail-vehicle.


CLS 188/108
TXT The brake is operated by the weight on a vehicle-step.


CLS 188/109
TXT The brake is operated by the weight on a vehicle or other seat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    303,    Fluid-Pressure and Analogous Brake Systems, subclass 19 for a dead
    man type brake wherein the brake system is actuated by a vehicle operator
    becoming unintentionally removed from a vehicle operator seat.


CLS 188/110
TXT Brakes operated by the action of the machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 197 as explained in the reference thereto
    appearing in the definition of this class (188); and subclasses 275+ for a
    motor vehicle which is provided with a safety-promoting means of a kind
    which responds to the engagement of a portion of the perimeter of the
    vehicle with an external object by causing application of the vehicle's
    brake.


CLS 188/111
TXT The brake is operated by an obstruction or trip located on the ground.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclasses 171+ and 201+.

    293,    Vehicle Fenders, subclasses 5, 6, 7, and 8.


CLS 188/112
TXT Trains of nonrail vehicles on which the brakes are operated upon the
    occurrence of relative motion between the vehicles.

    (1)     Note.  The brakes in this subclass are frequently termed "over run"
    brakes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142,    for momentum operated brakes controlled (as distinguished from
    applied) by draft means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 400+ for trains of road vehicles,
    especially subclasses 427+ for interrelated brake, landing gear and
    couplings in semi-trailers.


CLS 188/113
TXT The brakes are applied to the four wheels of a wagon when the draft-animals
    hold back.


CLS 188/114
TXT The brakes are automatically applied to the wheel-hubs or wheel-attached
    disk.


CLS 188/115
TXT Brakes applied to the rear wheels of a wagon by means of mechanism on the
    tongue when the draft-animals hold back.


CLS 188/116
TXT The brake is applied to the rear wheels by means of a divided beam.


CLS 188/117
TXT The brake is applied to the front wheels of the wagon.


CLS 188/118
TXT The brake on the front wheels is applied by a divided beam.


CLS 188/119
TXT The brake is operated by the rising or falling of the tongue.


CLS 188/120
TXT The brakes on the rear wheels are operated by the relative motion between
    the tongues and the wagon when the draft-animals hold back.


CLS 188/121
TXT The brake on the rear wheels is applied by means of a divided beam.


CLS 188/122
TXT The brakes are applied to the front wheel.


CLS 188/123
TXT The brakes on the front wheels are applied through a divided beam.


CLS 188/124
TXT The brakes are applied to the railway-car wheels upon relative movement
    between the cars.


CLS 188/125
TXT The action of the brakes is through the drawbar.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149+,   for momentum operated brakes controlled (as distinguished from
    applied) by draft means.


CLS 188/126
TXT The action of the brake through the draw-bar is dependent upon the speed of
    the railway-car.


CLS 188/127
TXT Upon the draft slacking or parting the brake is automatically applied to
    the track.


CLS 188/128
TXT The brakes of the sled are operated when the draft-animals hold back.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    indented under "Operators, Automatic, Vehicle, Auxiliary mechanism on
    tongue," for similar action with wagons.


CLS 188/129
TXT Friction-brakes operated upon the rise or fall of the vehicle-body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    297+,   for a fluid-resistance shock absorber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclass 235 for a friction brake
    and occupant-operated mechanisms for applying a brake during descent.

    213,    Railway Draft Appliances, subclasses 22+.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 196+ for a similar device combined with
    or having resilient means for biasing the vehicle parts.


CLS 188/130
TXT The brake member pursues a curved path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306+,   for an arcuately oscillating fluid-resistance shock absorber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 215 for a similar devices combined with
    or having resilient means for biasing the relatively moving vehicle parts.


CLS 188/131
TXT A brake operating to resist turning of a pivoted vehicle-truck.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 88, for cases where the steering-gear is
    associated with brake mechanism, and subclasses 89+ for brakes of this
    type, both friction and internal resistance.


CLS 188/132
TXT When the connection of the draft-animals to the vehicle is severed, a
    further pull will serve to set the brake.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 188.


CLS 188/134
TXT The braking action is due to change in relative motion of the different
    parts of a machine.


CLS 188/135
TXT The braking action is due to the momentum of the machine to which the brake
    is applied.


CLS 188/136
TXT A brake-shoe is wedged between a holder and the body whose motion is to be
    checked.


CLS 188/137
TXT The brake is held from action by electrically-controlled means.


CLS 188/138
TXT The momentum electrically controlled brake is applied to a vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161+,   for brakes operate by an electromagnetic device wherein the braking
    action my be due to the momentum of the machine (e.g., revolving brake drum
    brake rotor) to which the braking action is applied.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 84.1+ for an
    electrically actuated clutch with the particular structure of the
    electromagnetic actuator therefor.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 77 for electrical
    generator or motor structure including an electromagnetic system with a
    braking device.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 281 for the particular structure of the core or
    pole shape or structure or material of the electromagnetic device.


CLS 188/139
TXT The operation of the momentum-brake is initiated or controlled by the
    action of a weight.


CLS 188/140
TXT Brake applied by the motion of the vehicle to be braked.


CLS 188/141
TXT The brake applied to the vehicle through its momentum is controlled by
    fluid-pressure-operated means.


CLS 188/142
TXT The brake applied to the vehicle by momentum is controlled through the
    draft means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    for brakes automatically applied (as distinguished from controlled)
    by draft means.


CLS 188/143
TXT The momentum vehicle-brake is applied to the wheel and ground.


CLS 188/144
TXT A momentum-brake applied to a railway-car.


CLS 188/145
TXT The car-brake is operated through the momentum of the car, by means of a
    winding-drum.


CLS 188/146
TXT Here the drum is concentric with the wheel-axle.


CLS 188/147
TXT The brakes are operated through the momentum of the cars to be braked, the
    action being controlled by the relative motion of the units of the train.


CLS 188/148
TXT The braking action is initiated by means of rods on each car, operated when
    the cars approach each other.


CLS 188/149
TXT The push-rods are the drawbars of the cars.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125+,   for brakes automatically applied (as distinguished from controlled)
    by draft means.


CLS 188/150
TXT The action of the drawbar in initiating the braking action is dependent on
    the speed of the car.


CLS 188/151
TXT The brake is operated by means of fluid under pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72.4+,  for disclosure of a fluid-pressure actuator for a disc-brake
    assemblage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 533+ for a master-slave actuator system
    where the load connected to the system is broadly recited.  The following
    terms are considered to indicate a merely nominal load and do not preclude
    classification in Class 60. a. Wheel cylinder b. Brake means c. Brake
    cylinders d. Hydraulic vehicle brakes e. Disc brakes f. Brakes g. Front
    and/or rear wheel brakes h. Dual brakes.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclasses for expansible
    chamber devices, per se, even though disclosed as means to operate a brake.

    303,    Fluid-Pressure and Analogous Brake Systems, appropriate subclasses
    for  systems of distribution of fluid to motors of more general
    application, particularly subclass 84.2 for a safety valve which isolates a
    failed circuit.


CLS 188/152
TXT Fluid-pressure-operated brakes applied to motor or other road vehicles.


CLS 188/153
TXT Fluid-pressure-operated brakes applied to rail-vehicles.


CLS 188/154
TXT Fluid-pressure-operated brakes in which the operating fluid is obtained
    from the exhaust of an internal-combustion or other vapor engine.


CLS 188/155
TXT Brakes operated by the impact of a fluid-current.


CLS 188/156
TXT Brakes operated in succession or simultaneously by electric and other than
    electric means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 370+ for electric
    motor braking by plural, diverse or diversely controlled braking means.


CLS 188/157
TXT There is a rotating electric motor mounted on a rotating staff, which is
    also actuated by hand to operate the brakes.


CLS 188/158
TXT Electric:
    Operator under the class definition in which a device using voltage and
    current actuates the motion retarder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171+,   for spring applied, electrically released brakes.

    266.1,  for an internal-resistant motion retarder  controlled by condition
    detected outside of retarder.

    267,    for a brake or shock absorber using magnetic flux as a
    motion-resisting force.

    282.2+, for a valved orifice in a piston actuated by an electrical system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 21.5, for field
    responsive frictional media type brakes.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 93 for
    electrodynamic torque brakes.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 362+, for electric
    motor braking systems.


CLS 188/159
TXT The brakes are operated by means of electric current furnished by the
    motors, acting as generators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 375+, for electric
    motor dynamic braking systems.


CLS 188/160
TXT Additional supply of electric current supplements the motor-generated
    current.


CLS 188/161
TXT The brakes are operated by an electromagnet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 84.1+ for an
    electrically actuated clutch.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 77 for an
    electrical generator or motor structure including an electromagnetic
    braking system.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 281 for the particular structure of the core or
    pole shape or structure or material of the electromagnetic device.


CLS 188/162
TXT The brake is operated by a rotary electric motor.


CLS 188/163
TXT The brake is operated by a solenoid.


CLS 188/164
TXT Devices under subclass 161 in which the frictionally engaging elements form
    part of the electromagnetic flux circuit.


CLS 188/165
TXT Devices under subclass 164 in which one of the frictionally engaging
    elements is a rail.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 78, for this type of device.


CLS 188/166
TXT The brake is operated by a spring.


CLS 188/167
TXT The vehicle-brake is operated by a spring.


CLS 188/168
TXT The brake-setting spring is released by the pull of the draft-rigging on
    the vehicle.


CLS 188/169
TXT The brake-setting spring is released by the pull of the draft-animals.


CLS 188/170
TXT The spring-applied brake is released by fluid-pressure-operated means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72.3,   for a device with a mechanism (e.g., fluid) to withdraw the
    component away from the rotating member which device further includes means
    (e.g., fluid) to press the component toward the rotating member, the
    component including the characteristics set forth under subclass 71.1.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 63 for biasing means for a
    working member and subclass 130 for biasing means for a working member held
    inoperative by fluid pressure.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 91 for spring applied,
    fluid pressure released clutches.

    303,    Fluid-Pressure and Analogous Brake Systems, subclass 71 for a brake
    motor forced to release position by the pressure of fluid.


CLS 188/171
TXT The spring-operated brake is released by electrically-operated means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158,    for electrical operators for applying the brake.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 90 for a spring applied
    electrically released clutch.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 366+, for devices of
    this type combined with a motor circuit to release the brake when the motor
    is energized.


CLS 188/173
TXT The spring-operated brake on a vehicle is released by electrically-operated
    means.


CLS 188/174
TXT The brake is applied by a weight.


CLS 188/175
TXT The operation of the weight is controlled by the draft on the vehicle.


CLS 188/176
TXT The vehicle-body forms the weight that operates the brake.


CLS 188/177
TXT A brake is applied when the vehicle-body is inclined.


CLS 188/178
TXT The body of the vehicle is shifted longitudinally to operate the brake.


CLS 188/179
TXT The brakes are operated by a float.


CLS 188/180
TXT The brake is applied in response to speed condition of the machine.  The
    regulator recovers and assumes its normal condition on decrease of speed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 488+ for a speed responsive
    device, per se.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 336+, for speed-controlled
    gears.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 291+,
    for roll devices having means for retarding or stopping the roll, or for
    holding the roll to prevent undesired rotation.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 75, 234, and 239 for a
    reel type self-lowering escape with a regulator or brake on reel.

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 250+ for a specific elevator
    load support drive means or its control.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 147.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses 254+,
    for condition responsive control in planetary gear transmission systems.


CLS 188/181
TXT A brake-speed regulator located on a vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    303,    Fluid-Pressure and Analogous Brake Systems, particularly subclasses
    121+ for a speed controlled braking systems, especially subclass 115.6 for
    a flywheel type.


CLS 188/182
TXT The fluid-pressure and electric operated brakes are controlled in response
    to the speed of the machine.


CLS 188/184
TXT In response to the speed of the wheel brake-shoes are forced into contact
    with the inner rim.


CLS 188/185
TXT The action of the shoes is radially outward.


CLS 188/186
TXT The action of the brake-shoe is inward toward the rim of the wheel.


CLS 188/187
TXT A brake is moved parallel to the axis of rotation in response to speed of
    the wheel.


CLS 188/188
TXT In response to the speed of movement a brake engages a strand or cord.


CLS 188/189
TXT The brake is set in response to speed condition.  The brake remains set
    upon decrease of speed.


CLS 188/190
TXT Devices to compensate the disturbance of the brake-rigging upon movements
    of the vehicle-body.


CLS 188/191
TXT A rod or bar maintains the brake-shoe at a constant distance from the
    vehicle-wheel during the rise and fall of the vehicle-body.


CLS 188/192
TXT Devices to compensate the disturbance of the brake-rigging due to the
    turning of a wheel truck.


CLS 188/193
TXT To compensate the turning of a railway-wheel truck.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 165+, for means for radial
    compensation.


CLS 188/194
TXT To compensate the brake-rigging upon disarrangement due to the turning of a
    one-wheel truck.


CLS 188/195
TXT Devices to regulate the force of application of the brakes made necessary
    by changes in the load on the vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    303,    Fluid-Pressure Brake and Analogous Systems, subclasses 9.68 and
    22.1+, for systems where the distribution of the fluid is controlled
    according to the gravity load on the machine.


CLS 188/196
TXT Devices to compensate the wear or stretch of the brake shoes and rigging.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71.7+,  for disclosure of a wear-adjusting means in a disc-brake assemblage.

    79.51+, for wear take up or compensating structure for a transversely
    movable brake.


CLS 188/197
TXT Slack-adjusters peculiarly adapted for use on railway-cars.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclass 152, and indented
    subclasses, for wear or stretch compensators.


CLS 188/198
TXT The slack-adjuster is automatic in action.


CLS 188/199
TXT The adjustment is made by means of frictional rod-clutch.


CLS 188/200
TXT The slack is taken up by means of a ratchet and toothed bar.


CLS 188/201
TXT Plates or shims are used in adjusting the length of members.


CLS 188/202
TXT The wear or stretch is taken up by means of a nut and screw.


CLS 188/203
TXT The screw is operated by fluid-pressure.


CLS 188/204
TXT Devices to equalize the draft on two or more brake members.


CLS 188/205
TXT Hangers or other supports for brake members.


CLS 188/206
TXT Supports for braking elements.


CLS 188/207
TXT Supports for the shoe-carrying beams on vehicles.


CLS 188/208
TXT Supports for brake-beams adapted to the road-vehicle type of beam and
    brake-shoe.


CLS 188/209
TXT The portion of the vehicle from which the beam is suspended or upon which
    it is supported.


CLS 188/210
TXT An additional support, normally idle, adapted to receive the brake element
    upon failure of the active support.


CLS 188/211
TXT The support is engaged in the brake-head or in the bracket-support in a
    manner to prevent accidental displacement.


CLS 188/212
TXT The supports are designed to preserve the parallelism of the face of the
    brake-shoe and the face of the wheel.


CLS 188/213
TXT The parallelism of the shoe-face to the wheel-face is secured by supporting
    the beam at more than two points.


CLS 188/214
TXT There are means to compensate wear in the support to prevent chattering and
    for other purposes.


CLS 188/215
TXT The position of the support is affected by wear in the brake-shoe to secure
    a readjustment.


CLS 188/216
TXT Mechanism to secure the release of the brakes when the applying force is
    removed.


CLS 188/217
TXT A spring or other cushion placed between the brake-applying power and the
    brake to distribute or partially dissipate the thrust on the braking
    element.


CLS 188/218
TXT The disks or drums attached to or revolving with the wheel and to which the
    brake is applied.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes heat shields, dust guards and
    vibration dampeners for compensating for thermal expansion of the brake
    wheel drum or disc.  Also, this subclass includes vibration dampeners for
    the noted elements in general.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250,    for vibration dampeners for brake shoes, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 574 for vibration dampeners
    for flywheels and rotors.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 30 for vibration dampener
    for a clutch and subclasses 70.17+ and 200+ for a vibration dampener for
    clutch elements.

    295,    Railway Wheels and Axles, subclass 33.

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, for a wheel having a surface to
    be engaged by a brake, particularly subclasses 6.1+ for a wheel with a
    brake or drive attachment.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the notes thereunder.


CLS 188/219.1
TXT Devices under the class definition which carry the brake shoes and heads,
    and through which the thrust is transmitted to the shoes, either claimed,
    per se, or in combination with heads, shoes, fulcrums, guides and/or guards.


CLS 188/219.6
TXT Devices under subclass 219.1 wherein the beam has structure for mounting
    the brake heads movably, reversibly and/or adjustably.

    (1)     Note.  Beams peculiarly constructed to pivot a brake head are here,
    even though the head is not claimed.


CLS 188/220.1
TXT Devices under subclass 219.6 wherein the head is pivoted upon the beam.


CLS 188/220.6
TXT Devices under subclass 220.1 in which means is provided for fastening the
    head in an angularly adjusted position.


CLS 188/221.1
TXT Devices under subclass 220.6 in which the fastening means yieldingly holds
    the head with respect to the beam, and allows for automatic readjustment of
    the position of the head when the brakes are applied.

    (1)     Note.  Devices which provide for automatic readjustment of the head
    combined with means for manually locking the head in the readjusted
    position are found in this subclass.


CLS 188/222.1
TXT Devices under subclass 219.1 wherein the brake head or head thrust block is
    fixed with respect to the beam.


CLS 188/222.6
TXT Devices under subclass 222.1 in which the head and beam are made by shaping
    a single piece of material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226.1,  for trussed beams in which the tension and compression members are
    integral.


CLS 188/223.1
TXT Devices under subclass 222.1 wherein the beam is a trussed beam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225.6+, for the specific structure of trussed beams.


CLS 188/223.6
TXT Devices under subclass 223.1 in which the heads or blocks are held in place
    on the compression member of the beam by means of the tension element of
    the beam.


CLS 188/224.1
TXT Devices under subclass 223.6 wherein the end of the tension member
    extending through the head or block is threaded to receive a nut, the
    adjustment of which changes the tension in the member.


CLS 188/225.6
TXT Devices under subclass 219.1 having separate compression and tension
    members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223.1+, for trussed beams combined with rigidly mounted brake heads.


CLS 188/226.1
TXT Devices under 225.6 wherein the tension and compression members are made by
    shaping a single piece of material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222.6,  for integral beams and brake heads.


CLS 188/228.1
TXT Devices under subclass 225.6 wherein the compression member of the beam is
    of hollow form.


CLS 188/228.6
TXT Devices under subclass 225.6 wherein the compression member is of H, I, L,
    T, U, V, or X cross-section.

    (1)     Note.  These compression members are usually made from modified
    rolled sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223.7,  for nontrussed beams having any of these same cross-sections.


CLS 188/229.1
TXT Devices under subclass 225.6 wherein a strut between the tension and
    compression members also constitute a bearing or pivot for a brake lever
    which applies force to the beam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228.1   and 228.6, for strut type fulcrums used with the particular type of
    trussed beams there classified. (Disclosures from these two subclasses are
    not cross-referenced into this subclass).


CLS 188/229.6
TXT Devices under subclass 229.1 wherein the fulcrum is capable of being
    positioned in either of two positions approximately ninety degrees apart,
    to enable the brake lever to be canted to the right or to the left.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231,    for reversible fulcrums mounted on nontrussed beams.


CLS 188/231
TXT Devices under subclass 219.1 having a bearing or pivot for a brake-lever
    which applies force to the beam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229.1,  for fulcrums which also constitute the strut for trussed beams.


CLS 188/232
TXT Devices under subclass 231 wherein the fulcrum is capable of being
    positioned in either of two positions approximately ninety degrees apart,
    to enable the brake lever to be canted to the right or to the left.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229.6,  for reversible fulcrums which serve as struts for trussed beams.


CLS 188/233
TXT Devices under subclass 231 wherein there are a plurality of spaced fulcrums
    on the beams, usually near the ends.

    (1)     Note.  This form of beam is adaptable for clasp-brakes and others
    where it is desirable to leave a free central space.


CLS 188/233.3
TXT Devices under subclass 219.1 with means to cooperate with other parts of
    the brake or vehicle structure to confine the movement of the beam and/or
    the brake head in its normal movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207,    for supports combined with beams and/or beam assemblies.


CLS 188/233.7
TXT Beam structures under subclass 219.1 wherein the beam is of H, I, L, T, U,
    V or X cross-section.

    (1)     Note.  These beams are usually made from modified rolled sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228.6,  for trussed beams having a compression member of any of the same
    cross-sections.


CLS 188/234
TXT Includes patents for methods or devices for fastening wearing-shoes to the
    holder.

    (1)     Note.  In the railway type of brake the shoe is attached to a
    holder called the "head", and this is attached to the beam. In the wagon
    type of brakes, where the wearing-shoe is attached directly to the
    brake-beam, the patents will be found in this class, subclass 220 or 221
    above.


CLS 188/235
TXT A shoe-fastener adapted to locomotive and other heavy shoes.


CLS 188/236
TXT Brake-heads or shoe-holders in which the invention is directed to the part
    of the head modified by or which modifies the wearing-shoe.


CLS 188/237
TXT A wheel-guard or device to retain the shoe in proper relation to the wheel
    is combined with the shoe-fastening.


CLS 188/238
TXT Two or more shoes are combined in the same structure.


CLS 188/239
TXT The shoes are placed one over another, so that the back shoe is a holder to
    the one at the face.


CLS 188/240
TXT The shoes are arranged in line in relation to face of wheel.


CLS 188/241
TXT The shoes are in linear arrangement, connected by parts that may be
    fractured on undue strain.


CLS 188/242
TXT The heads and shoes have projecting interfitting parts.


CLS 188/243
TXT The fastening-key is inserted longitudinally of the shoe.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or Lock-Threaded
    Fastener, subclasses 357+ for longitudinally inserted penetrating pin
    securing means.


CLS 188/244
TXT The shoe and head lugs can be brought together only longitudinally.


CLS 188/245
TXT The shoe and head lugs can be brought together only from the side.


CLS 188/246
TXT The shoe is held in a clamp with movable jaws.


CLS 188/247
TXT Lugs on the back of the shoe to attach to the head.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255     and 258.


CLS 188/248
TXT The back-lug is cast into the back of the shoe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255     and 258.


CLS 188/249
TXT Devices for attaching flexible shoes to ears or heads.


CLS 188/250
TXT The elements that come in contact with the body to be retarded.

    (1)     Note.  Where the shoe or element is claimed with no significant
    shoe or element structure but merely in terms of the composition or
    material of which it is composed, it will be classified in the appropriate
    composition or material class, even though there is no claim to the
    composition, per se.  In this connection, the following classes should be
    considered:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, for articles defined solely by their metal or alloy composition.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic. Note particularly the class
    definition of Class 106 for the classification of other compositions.

    148,    Metal Treatment, particularly subclasses 31+ for materials which
    are products of processes of treating metal classifiable in Class 148, or
    for products distinguished only by the internal structure or
    characteristics of the metals, metallic compositions or alloys comprising
    such products.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclass, for methods of making laminated structures.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 107+ for the structure
    of a clutch component, per se.

    252,    Compositions, for compositions not elsewhere classified.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, subclasses 709+ for a composition
    containing rubber.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet not elsewhere provided for, and especially subclasses 64.1+ for a
    circular sheet; subclasses 196+ and 225+ for such a product embodying
    mechanically interengaged strands (e.g., weave, knit); subclasses 364+ for
    a rod, strand, fiber or filament with structure (e.g., nonlinear) or
    coated; and subclasses 544+ for a web or sheet which is all metal or has
    adjacent metal components.  See also (2) Note below.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Class 523, subclass 152 for a composition containing a
    synthetic resin having utility as a friction element for automobiles,
    trains, trailers, roller skates, skateboards, or other wheeled vehicles or
    to processes of preparing said composition.

    (2)     Note.  A patent directed to a product with a frictional property,
    where said property is enhanced by claimed structure (external structure
    (e.g., disc surface configuration)) or internal structure (e.g., discrete
    zones of friction material; particular arrangement of strands, fibers or
    layers), will be placed in this class (188) rather than in Class 428, Stock
    Material or Miscellaneous Articles, where the sole use disclosure is as a
    brake.


CLS 188/251
TXT Shoes that are a combination of two or more elements.


CLS 188/251
TXT Shoes that are a combination of two or more elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclass 36, for friction
    surface compositions.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 564 for a
    metallic composite in which at least one component is made up of a mixture
    of metal and nonmetal particles.


CLS 188/252
TXT Composite shoes having a member extending over the flange of the wheel.


CLS 188/253
TXT Composite flanged shoes having recesses for ventilation or other purposes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261,    for examples of other recessed shoes.


CLS 188/254
TXT A composite shoe constructed of a shell filled with some plastic material
    not molten metal.


CLS 188/255
TXT A composite shoe formed of a body of cast metal, in which is embedded other
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257     and 258.


CLS 188/256
TXT A composite shoe of a body of cast metal, in which are placed inserts of
    nonmetallic material.


CLS 188/257
TXT Into the metal body of the shoe and near the wearing-face are cast metallic
    inserts to modify the frictional and abrasive action of the shoe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
    255.


CLS 188/258
TXT Into the metal body of the shoe and near the back are cast metallic inserts
    to prevent the shoe falling apart when broken.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
    255.


CLS 188/259
TXT Flexible brake-shoes suitable for band-brakes.


CLS 188/260
TXT Portions of the face of the shoe are chilled when casting.


CLS 188/261
TXT The shoes contain recesses or cavities for purposes of ventilation and for
    other purposes.


CLS 188/262
TXT The shoe is formed of a roller or has a roller on its face.


CLS 188/264
TXT Devices for cooling or lubricating brake-shoes or brake wheels or drums.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes such wheel structure as may be necessary
    to the functioning and/or support of devices which, by disclosure, are
    intended to facilitate the removal of brake-generated heat from a braked
    wheel or to prevent transmission of such heat from a brake part or parts to
    other portions of the wheel.  This is so, regardless of whether any brake
    structure is claimed.  For example, patents drawn to ventilating wheel
    covers for the above stated purpose, or to the combination of such covers
    with their respective wheels, are classified here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71.6,   for disclosure of a disc-brake assemblage having cooling means
    therefor.

    218,    for brake wheels or rotors, per se, including wheel cooling
    structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 59, for devices for cooling motors.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 70.12 for means to cool
    or lubricate a clutch part of the axially engaging type and subclasses
    113.1+ for lubricating a cooling a clutch part.

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclasses 6.1+, for wheel
    brake-heat dissipators or insulators combined with wheel parts not
    necessary to the functioning and/or support of the dissipator.


CLS 188/265
TXT Devices for holding the brakes in a set position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 114+ for locks for
    holding the clutch in a set position.


CLS 188/266
TXT INTERNAL RESISTANCE MOTION RETARDER:

    Device under the class definition including a first member attached to a
    moving mechanism, wherein there is relative motion between the first member
    and either a medium or a second member, and wherein at least one component
    of the relative motion is restrained or dissipated by a reluctance to be
    disturbed that exists within the medium or the second member.

    (1)     Note.  The term "reluctance to be disturbed" is used to describe
    the internal resistance of a medium to movement of an object therethrough,
    such as (a) a liquid (which has viscosity), (b) a magnetic field (which has
    flux lines of force), (c) a gas (which has density, though less than that
    of liquid), and (d) granular material (which is fluent under certain
    conditions).  Said term also describes the internal resistance of an object
    (i.e., the "second member" of the definition) to elastic deformation, such
    as a spring or body of rubber (which yieldingly resists deformation).  The
    named mediums and objects are only examples of those that can be found
    within devices in this and indented subclasses.  In each of these devices,
    internal resistance is the characteristic that retards motion.

    (2)     Note.  The movement of the first member is not restricted to motion
    in only one direction, but may include return motion in the opposite
    direction. However, when the movement of the member is returned, both the
    energy of the original motion and that of the returned motion are absorbed
    by the retarder.  In neither direction of motion is absorbed energy
    returned by the device to cause return movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclass 233 for fluid resistance
    brakes for fire escapes, ladders and scaffolds.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 4 for internal resistance
    brake with a transmission control.

    267,    Spring Devices, appropriate subclasses for a device by which energy
    absorbed during movement of a member in one direction is returned to
    restore the member to its original position.

    293,    Vehicle Fenders, subclass 134 for bumpers having fluid shock
    absorber means to absorb an impact force on the bumper.


CLS 188/266.1
TXT Motion damped from condition (e.g., bump, speed change) detected outside of
    retarder:

    Internal resistance motion retarder under subclass 266 in which a
    movement, external to the retarder (e.g., by the wheel) causes a response
    by the member or medium.


CLS 188/266.2
TXT Condition actuates valve or regulator:

    External condition detection under subclass 266.1 in which a flow
    controlling device damps the motion.


CLS 188/266.3
TXT Of the rotary type:

    Valve under subclass 266.2 which turns about an axis to align an opening to
    control flow.


CLS 188/266.4
TXT Having plural openings:

    Rotary valve under subclass 266.3 in which an element of the flow
    controlling device has more than one aperture.


CLS 188/266.5
TXT Of the pulsating or reciprocating type:

    Valve under subclass 266.2 which oscillates along an axis to align an
    opening to control flow.


CLS 188/266.6
TXT Side mounted:

    Pulsating or reciprocating valve under subclass 266.5 in which the flow
    control device is located perpendicular to the retarder axis.


CLS 188/266.7
TXT Piezoelectric:

    Internal resistance motion retarder under subclass 266 in which a material
    that converts alternating current into mechanical vibrations is used.


CLS 188/266.8
TXT With failure or malfunction detection:

    Internal resistance motion retarder under subclass 266 in which a flaw in
    the member, medium, or system is recognized.


CLS 188/267
TXT Using magnetic flux:

    Internal resistance motion retarder under subclass 266 wherein a medium
    comprises a dipolar field of force in which the density is related to the
    intensity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 84.1+ for electric or
    magnetic operators.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 140.14+ for a spring device with energy
    absorbing means including fluid and magnet flux dampening.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 92 for electrical
    generator or motor structure including a magnetic flux brake.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 362+ for a brake on
    an electric motor, wherein the brake uses magnetic flux to retard rotation.


CLS 188/267.1
TXT Electroviscous or electrorheological fluid:

    Internal resistance motion retarder under subclass 266 wherein the liquid
    or gas changes viscosity upon application of electricity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 140.14 and 140.15 for energy absorbing
    means with electronic or magnetic control which includes electroviscous or
    electrorheological fluid.


CLS 188/267.2
TXT Magnetic fluid or material (e.g., powder):

    Internal resistance motion retarder under subclass 266 wherein a dipolar
    liquid or gas composition changes viscosity upon application of energy.


CLS 188/268
TXT Device under subclass 266 wherein the first member imparts its motion to a
    resilient second member or to a flowable, granular mass of particles.

    (1)     Note.  The use of a spring to bias a valve is common in the devices
    of subclasses 266+, but such spring means is not classified here.  This
    subclass (268) is for a device wherein the energy of motion is absorbed by
    a spring or block of rubber, for example.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, appropriate subclasses, for a device wherein a
    spring absorbs and returns energy of motion from and to the device.


CLS 188/269
TXT Device under subclass 266 wherein the medium comprises a gas and a liquid,
    or comprises liquids of different viscosities.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass (269) are some devices wherein a
    mixture of air and liquid tends to "froth" during operation, but special
    valve or ducting structure is provided to prevent such frothing.


CLS 188/270
TXT Device under subclass 266 wherein the medium comprises air that surrounds
    the mechanism and flows relative thereto, and wherein the first member
    extends into or causes the flow of air.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a vehicle having vanes extensible into
    the flow of air through which the vehicle is travelling, and a motor
    driving a fan-blade that causes air to be moved whereby motor speed is
    governed.


CLS 188/271
TXT Device under subclass 266 having an internal-resistance motion-retarder
    placed in an appropriate subclass of 266+ and also relying for its
    motion-retarding effect upon the friction characteristics of two adjacent
    surfaces, which second motion-retarding effect is characteristic of devices
    placed in other subclasses of Class 188.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes (a) a device wherein a brake of
    subclass 290 or its indented subclasses is combined with a friction brake
    of other subclasses of Class 188, and (b) a device wherein a shock absorber
    of subclass 297 or its indented subclasses is particularly disclosed as
    having its retarding effect increased by friction (e.g., the cylindrical
    surface of a piston is radially urged against the cylinder in which the
    piston slides).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 57, for a
    surface-friction clutch combined with an internal-resistance clutch.


CLS 188/272
TXT Internal-resistance brake as defined in subclass 266 combined with the
    moving mechanism that causes the motion which is to be restrained by the
    brake; the combination being not otherwise provided for.

    (1)     Note.  The devices in this and indented subclasses are those
    wherein the mechanism is not significant (therefore the device is not
    proper for the class wherein other such mechanisms are found) and wherein
    the proper class for such mechanism, per se, does not provide for the
    combination of mechanism and motion-retarder therefor. See the Search Class
    Notes below for a partial listing of classes providing for such combination.

    (2)     Note.  It is customary for a motor vehicle to have included therein
    a shock absorber of an appropriate subclass of 266+.  Therefore the
    "combination" of a vehicle and shock absorber will be found in the subclass
    pertaining to the shock absorber, per se, unless significant vehicle
    structure warrants classification of the device in an appropriate vehicle
    class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclass 248, for buffer and
    dashpot structure.

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 84, for a pneumatic closure check.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 862.09+, for a torque absorbing
    dynamometer using fluid, and subclass 430, for an instrument mechanism
    damping device.

    104,    Railways, subclass 256, for a fluid-pressure car-stopping bumper.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 193, for a bogie bolster damper.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 323, for a significant
    charge-proportion-varying internal combustion engine having braking means
    therefor including exhaust restricting means.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 514+, for a valve having a dashpot
    thereon to retard its actuation.

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclasses 184+, for a weighing scale having a
    shock absorber or damper.

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclass 344 and subclasses 345+, for an elevator having a fluid governor.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 34, for a
    dashpot in a circuit maker.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 110+, for aircraft arresting gear including
    fluid resistance means.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 48+, for a valve retarded by
    a dashpot.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 377, for a cable drum retarded by a fluid resistance brake.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 90, for a steering gear having a fluid
    checking mechanism therein.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 470+, for a body restrainer having an
    energy-absorbing device.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclasses 99+, for a movable electrode having a dashpot for retarding
    motion thereof.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 29, 61 and 240, for a switch having a dashpot.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses 31+,
    for planetary gearing associated with a fluid brake.


CLS 188/273
TXT Device under subclass 272 wherein the mechanism is an engine emitting waste
    products and includes a member that may be positioned to restrict the
    emission of such products, whereby the operation of said engine is
    restrained as a result of such restriction.

    (1)     Note.  The engine may be an internal-combustion engine emitting
    exhaust products or a steam engine or turbine emitting waste steam, but in
    either case the restriction on emission is the proximate cause of engine
    retardation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 323, for an
    internal-combustion engine having a relationship of resistance braking and
    charge-proportion varying.


CLS 188/274
TXT Device under subclass 266 provided with means to change the temperature of
    the medium or any part of the device.

    (1)     Note.  It is inherent in the operation of an internal resistance
    brake that heat will be generated as a member is moved in a medium.  The
    device of this subclass has significant means to cool the medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, for a heat exchanger, per se.


CLS 188/275
TXT Device under subclass 266 wherein the first member causes flow of a fluid
    medium through a passage for said fluid, said passage having an element
    that is movable to close or modify the size of the passage, thereby
    variably restricting flow of fluid through said passage, said element being
    sluggish in its movement by reason of a reluctance to be disturbed that
    exists in the element or a weight connected thereto; whereby motion of said
    member is restrained not only by reluctance to be disturbed that exists in
    the fluid itself, but also restrained by restriction to fluid flow caused
    by reluctance to be disturbed that exists in the element.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of devices found in this subclass include:  a shock
    absorber wherein amplitude or frequency of movement to be retarded causes
    operation of a valve in the shock absorber by reason of inertia in the
    valve, and a shock absorber on a vehicle wherein change in direction of the
    vehicle causes an inertia valve on the shock absorber to change the
    retarding effort of the shock absorber.


CLS 188/276
TXT Device under subclass 266 wherein motion of a member relative to a fluid
    medium causes variation in degree of heat or fluidity of the fluid (and
    thus tends to alter restraining characteristics of the device), provided
    with means for counteracting effects of such variation, thereby preserving
    restraining characteristics of the device.


CLS 188/277
TXT Device under subclass 276 wherein said fluid flows through a passage having
    an element modifying the size of the passage, which element is affected by
    variation in degree of heat of the fluid thereby to counteract effects of
    such variation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 93, for a
    thermostatic valve, per se, located in the fluid controlled by the valve.


CLS 188/278
TXT Device under subclass 277 wherein modification in size of the passage by
    said element is further regulated by manipulation of the element by a
    person using the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

     309    and 310, for an oscillating or reciprocating shock absorber having
    a manually adjustable valve.


CLS 188/280
TXT Device under subclass 266 wherein restraining effort is responsive to the
    velocity of the thrust member or of the flowing medium with respect to the
    device.

    (1)     Note.  The term "thrust member" is defined and explained in the
    definition and (1) Note of subclass 297.

    (2)     Note.  In this subclass a shock absorber retards a normal movement
    with a normal force, but retards a faster movement with a greater force.


CLS 188/281
TXT Resistance alters relative to direction of a thrust member (e.g., high
    resistance in one direction, low in the other):Internal-resistance motion
    retarder under subclass 266 wherein the restraining effort is responsive to
    the path of movement of a piston (first member), within a fluid, with
    respect to a chamber or cylinder.

    (1)     Note. In this subclass, a shock absorber retards movement of a
    mechanism in one direction with a normal force, but retards movement in an
    opposite direction with a greater or lesser force.


CLS 188/282.1
TXT Via valved orifice in thrust member:

    Resistance altered depending on piston direction under subclass 281 wherein
    the member is provided with an opening for the passage of gas or liquid
    through the opening, and the opening is provided with an element for
    regulating the opening.

    (1)     Note. Included in this subclass are pistons in which usually two
    orifices are provided in the piston or thrust member; one of which orifices
    has a one-way valve that permits flow of fluid in one direction and
    restricts flow of fluid in the opposite direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    317+,   for a variable volume chamber in which fluid flows through an
    orifice in a piston.

    322.15, for the particular structure of the piston member.


CLS 188/282.2
TXT Valve actuated by electrical system:

    Valved piston under subclass 282.1 in which the size varying element is
    moved by an applied voltage and current.


CLS 188/282.3
TXT System initiated by a pressure change or feedback:

    Electrically actuated valve under subclass 282.2 in which the voltage and
    current are applied in response to a fluid force.


CLS 188/282.4
TXT System having distinct selections (e.g., hard, medium, soft):

    Electrically actuated valve under subclass 282.2 in which the voltage and
    current moves the element based on a particular choice that determines the
    degree of damping.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are selections based on the type
    of driving anticipated (fast versus slow) and road conditions (rough versus
    smooth).


CLS 188/282.5
TXT Flexible flap-type valve (e.g., compression washers):

    Valved piston under subclass 282.1 in which the size varying element is a
    bendable platelike member.


CLS 188/282.6
TXT Having flow passage, cutout, aperture, slot, etc:

    Flexible flap valve under subclass 282.5 in which the platelike member has
    an opening.


CLS 188/282.7
TXT Ball-type valve:

    Valved piston under subclass 282.1 in which the size varying element is a
    sphere, usually solid.


CLS 188/282.8
TXT Spring-loaded valve:

    Valved piston under subclass 282.1 in which the size varying element is a
    generally coiled metal wire having a resiliency.


CLS 188/282.9
TXT Adjusting the tension via (a) compressing or expanding or (b) different
    strength springs:

    Spring-loaded, valved piston under subclass 282.8 in which the coiled wire
    resiliency (a) can be varied or (b) comprises two different sizes.


CLS 188/283
TXT Piston having a restrictable opening (e.g., apertured plate) in a fixed
    volume chamber:Internal resistance motion retarder under subclass 266
    wherein restraining effort varies in accordance with the relationship
    between a passage for fluid medium and an element modifying the size of the
    passage within a cylinder having a predetermined size.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    319.2,  for varying orifice size using a hand or hand tool in a variable
    volume chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 140.11+ for a resilient shock absorber
    including energy absorbing means having an orifice plate.


CLS 188/283.1
TXT Vortex flow passages:

    Piston restrictable opening under subclass 283 in which the element is
    designed to create an outward rotating effect to damp.


CLS 188/284
TXT Device under subclass 266 wherein restraining effort varies in accordance
    with the location of a thrust member with respect to the variable-volume
    chamber in which the member moves.

    (1)     Note.  The terms "thrust member" and "variable-volume chamber" are
    defined and explained in the definition and Notes of subclass 297.

    (2)     Note.  This and indented subclasses provide for a so-called
    "two-stage" shock absorber in which movement of a mechanism is retarded to
    one degree during a portion of such movement, and is retarded to a greater
    or lesser degree during another portion of such movement.


CLS 188/285
TXT Having a fluid flow passage adjusted manually e.g., threaded plug, threaded
    rod, gearing:Piston movement varies resistance under subclass 284 in which
    the degree to which the restraining effort varies is controlled by a hand
    or hand tool moving a short slender dowel with a projecting helical rib, a
    toothed plate, etc.


    (1)     Note.  In this subclass, passage of fluid is permitted in an amount
    regulated by, and responsive to, the position of a piston relative to the
    cylinder in which it moves, and a valve is regulated by a user of the
    device to additionally permit or restrict the amount of fluid passed.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass are needle valves.


CLS 188/286
TXT Device under subclass 284 wherein said chamber is formed by a thrust member
    and an enclosure which together contain a fluid, said enclosure has at
    least one opening therein for the passage of fluid therefrom, and said
    thrust member moves past said opening to permit or prevent passage of fluid
    through the opening.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass, there is usually an orifice in the piston
    for flow of a portion of fluid and another orifice in the chamber wall for
    flow of another portion of fluid.  When the piston covers the wall orifice,
    fluid flows only through the piston orifice and is accordingly restricted
    to a lesser flow, thus exerting a greater resistance to movement of the
    piston.

    (2)     Note.  In several devices of this and the indented subclasses the
    chamber wall that has the orifice(s) comprises a perforated tube (e.g., a
    piston rod) within a cylinder; thus the wall referred to is an interior
    wall.


CLS 188/287
TXT Device under subclass 286 provided with more than one of said openings,
    wherein said thrust member moves past said openings in sequence.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass flow of fluid is gradually restricted to a
    greater degree as the piston passes and closes the orifices successively.


CLS 188/288
TXT Device under subclass 284 wherein a thrust member moves within a
    variable-volume chamber through a corridor that surrounds the thrust member
    in a plane perpendicular to its direction of movement, and wherein the size
    of the corridor in that plane changes along the direction of movement of
    the thrust member.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass fluid moved by the piston flows between the
    periphery of the piston and the interior wall of the chamber.  The area of
    interior wall provided for such fluid flow varies by reason of grooves in,
    or taper of, the wall, thus the degree of fluid flow is dependent upon the
    position of the piston along the wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    316,    for a shock absorber in which fluid flows between the periphery of
    a piston and the interior wall of a chamber.


CLS 188/289
TXT Device under subclass 284 wherein a thrust member has an opening therein
    for passage of fluid therethrough, which opening is closed to a greater or
    lesser degree by an elongated bar, the length dimension of which bar
    reaches through said opening and the size of which bar; in dimension
    perpendicular to its length dimension, changes along the length of the bar.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass fluid moved by the piston flows through an
    orifice in the piston, the area of which orifice varies by reason of taper,
    or a groove, in the rod that extends through the orifice; thus the degree
    of fluid flow is dependent upon the position of the piston relative to the
    rod.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    317+,   for a shock absorber in which fluid flows through an orifice in a
    piston.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, subclass 8 for metering pins in a mechanical spring
    and retarder arrangement and subclass 64.22 for a fluid spring and retarder
    with a metering pin for varying the spring rate.


CLS 188/290
TXT Device under subclass 266 wherein said moving mechanism turns about an axis
    in only one direction of turning and is connected to said first member,
    whereby turning of the moving mechanism is restrained by relative motion
    between the first member and a fluid medium.

    (1)     Note.  In this and indented subclasses the load member or mechanism
    is usually a wheel or axle on a vehicle, but may be a pulley, drum, shaft
    or any one-way rotating mechanism, the rotation of which is to be retarded.
     The load member usually causes rotation of vanes or blades within a fluid,
    or rotation of said load member is mechanically converted into
    reciprocation of a vane or a piston within a cylinder or into rotation plus
    oscillation of vanes within a housing for fluid, but in all such cases,
    flow of fluid is effected and such flow is restricted to retard rotation of
    the load member.

    (2)     Note.  The definition and note does not bar placement of a patent
    disclosing rotation in either or both of two directions (e.g., clockwise
    and/or counterclockwise).  However, it should be clear that the action of
    the brake when the member rotates in either direction is the same as if the
    member were rotating in one direction only.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 58.1+ for a internal
    resistance motion retarder for a clutch with unidirectionally rotating load
    member.


CLS 188/291
TXT Device under subclass 290 provided with a clutch that connects and
    disconnects said moving mechanism and said first member.

    (1)     Note.  The "clutch" referred to above is one that by itself would
    be found in Class 192, Clutches and Power-Stop Control, thus needs no
    further definition.  In this subclass, however, the clutch is used solely
    to connect a wheel, or equivalent rotating load whose  rotation is to be
    retarded, to a device of this class (188), and this subclass (290+), used
    to retard such rotation, so that user may control operation or nonoperation
    of a retarder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71.2,   for disclosure of a disc-brake assemblage connected to a wheel or
    rotating load by a clutch mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, appropriate subclasses, for a
    clutch, per se, and subclasses 12+, for a clutch and a brake that are
    applied alternatively to drive or to retard a mechanism.


CLS 188/292
TXT Device under subclass 290 wherein said moving mechanism is connected to a
    gear-like element having teeth on the circumference thereof, said first
    member is connected to another gear-like element having similar teeth, and
    the teeth of both elements mesh with each other, whereby as one element
    turns in one direction the other turns concurrently in an opposite
    direction.

    (1)     Note.  In many devices of this subclass the elements described
    above form a "gear pump" in which fluid is caused to flow by reason of the
    teeth acting as vanes to cause such flow.  In other devices the teeth are
    helicoidal and act as screws to cause relative motion or flow of the fluid.
     In both exemplary instances flow is restricted to retard motion of the
    load.


CLS 188/293
TXT Device under subclass 290 wherein a connection between said first member
    and said mechanism converts turning of the mechanism about its axis into
    reciprocation of the member perpendicular to said axis; said reciprocation
    resulting in circulation of fluid medium in which the member reciprocates.

    (1)     Note.  The reciprocation is usually effected by a crank, cam or
    shaft revolving eccentrically of the axis of the mechanism, to which
    eccentric a vane or piston is connected.

    (2)     Note.  In this subclass, the brake usually includes a drum rotated
    by a wheel, which drum carries vanes extending radially from the axis and
    parallel thereto.  The drum and its vanes rotate within a fluid-filled
    housing having an inner periphery eccentric to the axis.  The revolving
    vanes, radially urged against the housing, effect circulation of fluid.


CLS 188/294
TXT Device under subclass 293 provided with means for changing the extent of
    reciprocation of said member.

    (1)     Note.  The change referred to is usually accomplished by varying
    the eccentricity described in (1) Note to subclass 293, although other
    regulating means are also found in this subclass. For example, in a device
    wherein piston reciprocation is caused by rotation of an inclined "wobble
    plate", the extent of reciprocation can be changed by changing the
    inclination of the plate, or in a device wherein relative reciprocation of
    a piston in a cylinder causes fluid flow, such flow can be changed by
    changing the position of the cylinder.


CLS 188/295
TXT Device under subclass 293 wherein said first member is a thrust member
    moving to-and-fro in a straight line within a chamber.

    (1)     Note.  The terms "thrust member" and "chamber" are defined and
    explained in the definition and Notes of subclass 297.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    297+,   for a shock absorber having a piston reciprocating rectilinearly in
    a chamber.


CLS 188/296
TXT Device under subclass 290 wherein said mechanism turns a shaft having
    radially extending blades connected to and partly enclosed by a concave
    shroud, which device has a second concave shroud having radially extending
    blades therein but not turning; the shrouds being arranged to face one
    another to enclose a body of fluid which is caused to be moved by the
    turning blades and retarded by the nonturning blades.

    (1)     Note.  The brake herein defined is structurally similar to a device
    described as a "vortex-flow drive" in (1) Note to Class 192, subclass 3.21.
    In both instances fluid circulates in the shape of a torus (i.e., the solid
    formed by a circle revolving about an axis lying in its plane).  However,
    in Class 192 the device transmits torque from a first, rotating shaft to a
    second rotatable shaft, whereas in this subclass (296), the second shaft
    does not rotate, thereby retarding rotation of the first shaft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 3.21+, and see (1) Note
    above.


CLS 188/297
TXT Having a thrust member and variable volume chamber (e.g., coaxial or
    telescopic tubes, compensating reservoir):

    Internal resistance motion retarder under subclass 266 wherein said first
    member is moved by a mechanism relative to or within a container for fluid
    medium; the member together with the container enclosing a space the size
    of which changes as the member is moved, thus causing fluid contained
    within the space to be moved relative to both the member and the container.

    (1)     Note.  The term "thrust member" is used to refer to a first member
    as defined above that is moved in or through a fluid contained in a chamber
    thereby forcing such fluid to be moved. The thrust member is connected to a
    load, i.e., a mechanism whose movement is to be retarded, and is moved by
    the load. Examples of a thrust member include; a piston (connected to a
    reciprocating piston rod), a blade or vane (connected to a rotating or
    oscillating shaft) and a flexible diaphragm (connected to a reciprocating
    or oscillating rod).


    (2)     Note.  This and indented subclasses provide for a device known in
    the art as "shock absorber", "dashpot", "buffer", "check", and "cushion",
    these terms being only examples of the names used.

    (3)     Note.  In this subclass, the chamber is usually a cylinder closed
    at one end and open at the other and the thrust member is a reciprocating
    piston having its piston rod extending through the open end. A vent orifice
    in either the piston or chamber wall permits restricted flow of fluid,
    usually air, between the chamber and its surroundings.


CLS 188/298
TXT Device under subclass 297 wherein either or both of said member or said
    container is made, at least in part, of expansible material.

    (1)     Note.  The term "container" comprehends a chamber (e.g., cylinder,
    casing, etc.), as described in subclass 297, or a reservoir as described in
    subclass 314, or both together forming the enclosure in which fluid is
    moved by the thrust member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 64.19, 64.23, 64.27 for a flexible wall
    or chamber for a spring device.


CLS 188/299.1
TXT Controlled by an operator (e.g., vehicle driver) remote from retarder:

    Internal-resistance motion retarder under subclass 266 provided with means
    for regulating movement of said fluid (thereby regulating degree of
    resistance exerted by the fluid), which means is located at a distance from
    the device and actuated by a person.

    (1)     Note. Included in this subclass are shock absorbers (e.g., on axle
    of a vehicle) that are controlled by a driver who is within the vehicle.


CLS 188/300
TXT Device under subclass 297 provided with means for preventing movement of
    said member relative to said container, said means being normally
    inoperative but being made operative by a user of the device.


CLS 188/301
TXT Device under subclass 297 wherein said fluid is gaseous atmosphere, and
    movement of said member within said container generates a subnormal
    atmospheric pressure in said container.


CLS 188/302
TXT Device under subclass 297 wherein a mechanism is connected to the device by
    an arm pivoted thereto so that movement of the mechanism causes movement of
    the arm to-and-fro in an arc of a circle, and wherein said arm is connected
    to a thrust member so as to cause movement of said thrust member to-and-fro
    in a straight line within a chamber.


CLS 188/303
TXT Device under subclass 302 provided with two thrust members facing in
    generally the same direction and moving to-and-fro within two chambers that
    lie in the same plane but not in the same line, wherein said arm is
    connected to said thrust members so as to cause movement of one member
    toward an end of its chamber and simultaneously cause movement of the other
    member away from an end of its chamber.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the cylinders are hydraulically connected at their
    ends so that fluid forced out of one cylinder by movement of its piston
    toward its end is caused to flow into the other cylinder as its piston is
    moved away from its end.


CLS 188/304
TXT Device under subclass 302 provided with two thrust members facing
    oppositely and spaced apart from each other, wherein a connection from said
    arm is positioned in the space between said members.

    (1)     Note.  In most devices of this subclass the pistons reciprocate
    within the same cylinder in the same direction so that when one piston is
    moving toward one end of the cylinder, the other piston is moving away from
    the opposite end of that cylinder, both pistons being caused to move by an
    arcuately oscillating arm or load member.


CLS 188/305
TXT Device under subclass 302 provided with means for converting to-and-fro
    arcuate motion of said arm about a pivot line into a to-and-fro
    straight-line motion of a thrust member lengthwise of said pivot line.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of motion-converting means include screw-and-nut
    means inclined cam or wedge means.


CLS 188/306
TXT Device under subclass 297 wherein said member is moved to-and-fro in an arc
    of a circle within a container for fluid medium, said member being
    connected to a shaft or hub that is pivoted to said device.


CLS 188/307
TXT Device under subclass 306 wherein said member comprises a yieldable blade
    or comprises a blade having a portion biased away from said shaft or hub.


CLS 188/308
TXT Device under subclass 306 wherein said shaft is provided with an orifice
    extending generally diametrically therethrough for passage of fluid that is
    moved by said member.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the thrust member (e.g., blade, vane or
    piston) divides the container (e.g., chamber, cylinder, etc.), into at
    least two compartments.  As the member oscillates in one direction, one
    compartment decreases in volume and fluid therefrom flows through the
    orifice into the other compartment which correspondingly increases in
    volume.


CLS 188/309
TXT Device under subclass 308 wherein said shaft is also provided with an
    element modifying the size of the orifice, which element is manipulated by
    a person using the device to vary the size of the orifice.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278,    for a manually-adjustable thermostatic valve in a shock absorber.

    282.1,  for a manually-adjustable valve in the piston of a shock absorber.


CLS 188/310
TXT Device under subclass 306 provided with means for regulating movement of
    the fluid within said container, which means is controlled by a person
    using the device.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the thrust member (e.g., blade, vane or
    piston) divides the container (e.g., chamber, cylinder, etc.), into at
    least two compartments.  Fluid flows between the compartment through a
    passage, the size of which is regulated by the user.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278,    for a manually-adjustable thermostatic valve in a shock absorber.

    282.1,  for a manually-adjustable valve in the piston of a shock absorber.


CLS 188/312
TXT Device under subclass 297 wherein said container is an elongated cylinder
    having two extremities defining the length dimension thereof, and said
    member is a piston having two faces each oriented toward one of said
    extremities, to each of which faces is connected a shaft that reaches
    through a respective extremity, at least one of said shafts being connected
    to a load.


CLS 188/313
TXT With valve controlling fluid flow between chambers or compartments of the
    chamber:Thrust member and variable volume chamber under subclass 297
    wherein a regulator permits restricted movement of fluid from one section
    to another section as the volumes of the sections change.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass, a solid piston reciprocates within and
    fills the area bounded by a cylinder, and a passage permits restricted flow
    of liquid from one compartment of the cylinder to the other compartment.
    The passage is usually provided with a valve that is adjustable to vary the
    restriction.


CLS 188/314
TXT Device under subclass 313 provided with an enclosed space additional to
    said container, which space is hydraulically connected to only one of said
    sections and accommodates liquid forced from said section by said member,
    or accommodates liquid stored therein to compensate for possible loss of
    liquid from the device.

    (1)     Note.  To be considered as a "reservoir" the space referred to
    should not permit passage of liquid from one compartment to another, but
    rather should permit passage of liquid from a particular compartment to the
    reservoir and return of liquid from the reservoir to the particular
    compartment. Other subclasses (for which, see below) provide for an
    external passage hydraulically connecting two compartments of a cylinder
    and incidentally serving to store liquid outside of the cylinder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    313,    for a shock absorber having an external passage for circulation and
    storage of liquid.

    318,    for a shock absorber having an orifice in its piston and also
    having an external passage for circulation and storage of liquid.


CLS 188/315
TXT Device under subclass 314 wherein said container is a first cylinder and
    said enclosed space is a tubular volume bounded in part by said first
    cylinder and a second cylinder outside of and concentric with said first
    cylinder.


CLS 188/316
TXT Fluid through or around piston within chamber:
    Reciprocating piston with fluid flow between chamber compartments under
    subclass 313 wherein fluid moves from one section to another section via
    (a) an opening in said member extending from one face thereof to an
    opposite face thereof, or (b) a passageway that exists because said member
    does not fill the area bounded by the container in which the member moves.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are devices wherein a piston
    reciprocates within a cylinder, and the piston is either of smaller
    diameter than the cylinder or has peripheral grooves extending in the
    direction of reciprocation, but in either case the difference in dimension
    forms the passageway for fluid flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    288,    for a shock absorber having a passageway varying in area according
    to the position of a piston in the passageway.


CLS 188/317
TXT Device under subclass 316 wherein fluid moves via an opening in said member
    that extends between said faces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282.7,  for a shock absorber having a piston provided with a one-way valve
    in its orifice.

    289,    for a shock absorber having a piston provided with an orifice,
    through which orifice extends an elongated tapered metering rod.


CLS 188/318
TXT Device under subclass 317 wherein said container is further provided with a
    hydraulic connection between said sections, said connection being outside
    of the container in which the member moves.

    (1)     Note.  The external passage is in addition to an orifice in the
    piston, and is usually provided with a valve that is adjustable to vary the
    restriction to fluid flow.


CLS 188/319.1
TXT Having an orifice adjustment for both jounce or bound (compression) and
    rebound:

    Reciprocating piston with fluid flow through an orifice under subclass 317
    in which the flow restrictor regulates in one direction (i.e., the
    compression stroke) and in the other direction (i.e., expansion stroke).


CLS 188/319.2
TXT Orifice size varied using a hand or hand tool:

    Reciprocating piston with fluid flow through an orifice under subclass 317
    in which the dimension of the opening is regulated  by a person: (a)
    turning, for example, a knob connected to the flow restrictor or the
    chamber cylinder or (b) using a wrench or screwdriver; both (a) and (b)
    located outside the container.

    (1)     Note.  An example of subject matter in this subclass would be two
    plates, rotatable with respect to each other, having a hole in each plate.
    Slightly rotating one plate with respect to the other would create an
    opening smaller than either hole.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278,    for a manually adjustable thermostatic valve in a shock absorber.


    299.1,  for a retarder controlled by an operator (e.g., vehicle driver)
    remote from the retarder.

    309     and 310, for a manually adjustable valve in a shock absorber
    wherein a blade oscillates.


CLS 188/320
TXT Device under subclass 316 wherein said opening extends in other than a
    straight line, whereby liquid flows through the opening in a meandering
    course.


CLS 188/321.11
TXT Including means connecting thrust member to load:

    A device under subclass 297 wherein significance is attributed to means for
    attaching the first member to the mechanism so that the mechanism causes
    the member to move.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 668 for particular connecting means for a
    "MacPherson" strut.


CLS 188/322.12
TXT Including protective shield for retarder:

    Device under subclass 266 which includes a sleeve, plate, or other covering
    means for preventing damage to parts of the retarder caused by rocks, mud,
    or other debris external to the device.


CLS 188/322.13
TXT Including valve:

    Device under subclass 266 wherein significance is attributed to an element
    or assembly which regulates fluid flow through an orifice means.

    (1)     Note.  The valve means may have a fixed, preset location, or it may
    move in response to fluid pressure acting upon a surface area of the valve
    means.


CLS 188/322.14
TXT Foot valve:

    Device under subclass 322.13 wherein the container includes a cylindrical
    chamber, and the flow-regulating element or assembly is located at an end
    of the chamber to regulate fluid flow into and out of the cylinder.

    (1)     Note.  Devices found in this subclass are of the type described in
    the (3) Note of patent subclass 297.


CLS 188/322.15
TXT Piston valve:

    Device under subclass 322.13 wherein the container includes a cylindrical
    chamber having a piston which reciprocates within the chamber, the
    flow-regulating element or assembly mounted on or in the piston to regulate
    fluid flow through an aperture in the piston.


CLS 188/322.16
TXT Including seal or guide:

    Device under subclass 266 wherein significance is attributed to a component
    which is adapted to (a) prevent fluid passage either through an aperture in
    the container or between related parts of the retarder, or (b) determine
    the path of movement of one part relative to another.


CLS 188/322.17
TXT Between piston rod and cylinder:
    Device under subclass 322.16 wherein the container includes a cylindrical
    chamber having a piston which reciprocates within the chamber, and the
    component is located at, and functions between, the interface of an opening
    in an end wall of the chamber and a shaft projecting from the piston
    through said opening.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 500+ for a dynamic, circumferential, contact seal for
    other than a piston.


CLS 188/322.18
TXT Between piston and cylinder:

    Device under subclass 322.16 wherein the container includes a cylindrical
    chamber, the first member is a piston which reciprocates within the
    chamber, the component located at and functioning between the interface of
    the piston and the chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 434+ for a piston ring or piston ring expander or seat
    therefor.


CLS 188/322.19
TXT Cylinder structure:

    Device under subclass 266 wherein the container includes a cylindrical
    chamber, and significance is attributed to a design or construction feature
    of the container.


CLS 188/322.2
TXT Having connection for side-mounted valve type:

    Cylinder structure under subclass 322.19 in which a particular  attachment
    fixes a regulator perpendicular to the container axis.


CLS 188/322.21
TXT Having means for filling or recharging:

    Device under subclass 322.19 including a means associated with the
    container permitting access to its interior for introducing dampening media
    into the device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, subclass 64.28 for means for charging or
    discharging a fluid spring device.


CLS 188/322.22
TXT Thrust member structure:

    Device under subclass 266 wherein significance is attributed to a design or
    construction feature of a first member that is moved in or through the
    fluid contained by the device.

    (1)     Note.  The thrust member is not limited to a certain configuration,
    it may be, for example, either a piston or a movable diaphragm.


CLS 188/322.50
TXT Using viscosity of fluid medium:
    Device under subclass 266 wherein the medium is a flowable material, the
    material has a characteristic resistance to flow and the resistance to flow
    is used to restrain motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 574 for a fluid vibration
    dampener for flywheels and rotors.


CLS 188/323
TXT Device under subclass 78 comprising three distinct frictional contacting
    members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250+,   for brake shoe elements, per se.


CLS 188/324
TXT Device under subclass 323 wherein shoe movement is effected by rotation of
    a contoured element sliding against a shoe extremity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329,    330, 332, 338, 339, for other rotary cam actuating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 78, for cam operated
    expanding clutch devices.


CLS 188/325
TXT Device under subclass 78 comprising two distinct frictional contacting
    members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250+,   for brake shoe elements, per se.


CLS 188/326
TXT Device under subclass 325 wherein shoe movement is effected by actuator
    means at the extremities of each frictional contacting member.


CLS 188/327
TXT Device under subclass 325 wherein the holding or locating means for
    frictional contacting members are contiguous to the nonactuated ends of the
    members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    341,    for anchors of more general utility in expanding, transversely
    movable brakes.


CLS 188/328
TXT Devices under subclass 327 wherein the plural holding or locating means use
    the same projection for rotational or sliding restraint.


CLS 188/329
TXT Device under subclass 328 wherein shoe movement is effected by rotation of
    a contoured element sliding against the extremities of the shoes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324,    for three shoe rotary cam actuating means and see notes thereunder
    for other similar means.


CLS 188/330
TXT Device under subclass 327 wherein shoe movement is effected by rotation of
    a contoured element sliding against the extremities of the shoes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324,    for three shoe rotary cam actuating means and see notes thereunder
    for other similar means.


CLS 188/331
TXT Device under subclass 325 wherein contiguous shoe ends are linked without
    restraint relative to supporting wheel structure.


CLS 188/332
TXT Device under subclass 331 wherein shoe movement is effected by rotation of
    a contoured element sliding against a shoe extremity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324,    for three shoe cam actuating means and see notes thereunder for
    other similar means.


CLS 188/333
TXT Device under subclass 331 wherein one shoe extremity is held or located
    relative to supporting wheel structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    341,    for anchors of more general utility in expanding transversely
    movable brakes.


CLS 188/334
TXT Device under subclass 325 wherein each shoe is held or located by means
    applied to an extremity on one shoe remote from the other shoe extremity
    having holding or locating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    341,    for anchors of more general utility in expanding transversely
    movable brakes.


CLS 188/335
TXT Device under subclass 78 including means to confine the movement of a
    frictional contacting member to a path transversely of the wheel axis.

    (1)     Note.  A pin and slot arrangement, for example, may provide a
    radial guide for a brake shoe, suitable for this subclass, and still allow
    lateral shoe movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    340,    for devices which restrict the lateral movement of a brake shoe,
    though not necessarily limiting the movement to a radial one.


CLS 188/336
TXT Device under subclass 78 wherein the frictional contacting member is a
    single internal circumferential shoe with closely abutting ends.


CLS 188/337
TXT Device under subclass 336 including a holding or locating means remote from
    gapped ends of the band.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    341,    for anchors of more general utility in expanding transversely
    movable brakes.


CLS 188/338
TXT Device under subclass 337 wherein shoe movement is effected by rotation of
    a contoured element sliding against the gapped ends of the shoe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324,    for three shoe rotary cam actuating means and see notes thereunder
    for other similar means.


CLS 188/339
TXT Device under subclass 336 wherein shoe movement is effected by rotation of
    a contoured element sliding against the gapped ends of the shoe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324,    for three shoe rotary cam actuating means and see notes thereunder
    for similar means.


CLS 188/340
TXT Device under subclass 78 including means to restrict the movement of a
    frictional contacting member along the axis of wheel rotation.

    (1)     Note.  A resilient pad bearing against the arcuate edge of a brake
    shoe, for example, may restrict lateral shoe movement and still not confine
    the shoe to radial movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    335,    for devices which in limiting brake shoe to radial movement may
    also restrict the lateral movement.


CLS 188/341
TXT Device under subclass 78 for holding or locating a frictional contacting
    member relative to the supporting wheel structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327+,   333 and 337, for more specialized applications of holding or
    locating means.


CLS 188/342
TXT Device under subclass 78 including means to further urge brake elements
    into motion stopping position, which means are solely responsive to the
    initial actuation of the device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 32+, for clutches - the
    action of which is initiated by manipulation, upon which the engagement is
    completed without further actuation.


CLS 188/343
TXT Device under subclass 78 wherein the means to urge brake elements into
    motion stopping position includes an inclined plane element sliding against
    the end of a brake element.


CLS 188/344
TXT Device under subclass 152 where the vehicle is bicycle-like with two or
    three wheels impelled by the rider.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24.11+, for velocipede brakes.


CLS 188/345
TXT Device under subclass 152 including two or more units for fluid pressure
    source, or pulsators, actuated by the same operating member.

    (1)     Note.  Generally, these units are so isolated that failure of one
    will not affect another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 549 for a power driven master cylinder means
    supplying fluid through separate pulsator circuits to nominal plural brake
    structure; subclass 561 for a pulsator system comprising parallel pulsators
    with a pressure balancing shuttle therebetween; subclass 562 for parallel
    pulsators in which the master of one is driven by the master of the other
    by a resilient, fluid or lost motion connection; and subclasses 579+ for
    multiple master cylinders associated with a pulsator device.


CLS 188/346
TXT Device under subclass 152 wherein a reaction force on an applied brake shoe
    is transmitted to at least one other shoe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141,    for a vehicle fluid pressure brake controlled by momentum of the
    vehicle.


CLS 188/347
TXT Device under subclass 152 including fluid pressure means responsive to
    operating members for initial rapid elimination of "play" at low
    "mechanical" advantage followed by actual braking at high "mechanical"
    advantage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 516, for control lever and
    linkage systems with variable output force.


CLS 188/348
TXT Device under subclass 152 wherein an operating member controls both (1) a
    source of stored energy, such as compressed air or vacuum, to initially
    eliminate "play" in the brake system as well as then (2) actuate the actual
    brake means.


CLS 188/349
TXT Device under subclass 152 arranged to vary the braking action of forward
    wheels with respect to that of rearward wheels.

    (1)     Note.  In some instances such variation is during initial braking
    only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204,    for equalizer position adjuster means.

    347,    for hydraulic quick-slack-take-up pulsator means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    303,    Fluid-Pressure and Analogous Brake Systems, subclasses 6.01+ for
    braking pressure delivered to a plurality of motors - usually differently
    related to the distributing means.


CLS 188/350
TXT Device under subclass 152 wherein one or more steering wheel brake means
    are rendered inoperative, or released, responsive to actuation of steering
    mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  This is generally considered a safety feature to avoid
    skidding.


CLS 188/351
TXT Device under subclass 152 wherein a predetermined amount of fluid is
    trapped in a brake cylinder as the brake is released so as to limit and/or
    regulate the amount of "play".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79.5,   for wear take-up or compensating means on transversely movable
    wheel brakes.

    196,    for slack position adjuster means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 590 for a pulsator of general utility having
    a condition responsive device limiting the return flow from a biased slave.


CLS 188/352
TXT Device under subclass 152 including means to release air bubbles from the
    brake system or means to flush or fill the system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 453 for means for purging, cleaning or
    separating undesirables from a motive fluid and subclass 584 for structure
    for bleeding, charging, discharging or adjusting a pulsator volume.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 86.1+, for container filling devices, per
    se.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for bleeding and filling means
    in combination with dispensing means.


CLS 188/353
TXT Device under subclass 152 including means to trap fluid in the brake system
    to hold the brakes applied.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    265,    for brake lock means, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    303,    Fluid-Pressure and Analogous Brake Systems , subclass 89, for brake
    system lock means, per se.


CLS 188/354
TXT Device under subclass 152 including means for selective application of
    braking force to one wheel at a time.

    (1)     Note.  This is often an expedient for steering - as in the case of
    an airplane on the ground - or for providing traction for one of two
    differentially driven wheels when the other is slipping in mud or ice.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for independent wheel brakes for non-rail vehicles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    303,    Fluid-Pressure and Analogous Brake Systems, subclass 9.61 for
    separately and simultaneously controlled multiple motor systems.


CLS 188/355
TXT Device under subclass 152 including means for supplying liquid and/or air
    pressure from a pump or pump tank.

    (1)     Note.  A simple and direct manual or pedal operated force is not
    considered to be a "pump" for this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Control of the brake is generally by means of valving.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    348,    for power quick-slack-take-up means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, appropriate subclasses for a booster device combined
    with a master cylinder.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclasses for a
    booster, per se.


CLS 188/356
TXT Device under subclass 355 wherein the non-manual power source is of the
    vacuum or sub-atmospheric pressure type.


CLS 188/357
TXT Device under subclass 356 including supplementary hand or pedal operated
    power means.

    (1)     Note.  Both manual and non-manual power means are subject to a
    common control means.

    (2)     Note.  The two means may be applied sequentially or simultaneously.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    for multiple operators for vehicle brakes.

    359,    for liquid and manual power brake means.


CLS 188/358
TXT Device under subclass 355 wherein the nonmanual power source is of the
    hydraulic type.


CLS 188/359
TXT Device under subclass 358 including supplementary hand or pedal operated
    power means.

    (1)     Note.  Both manual and nonmanual power means are subject to a
    common control means.

    (2)     Note.  The two means may be applied sequentially or simultaneously.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    for multiple operators for vehicle brakes.

    357,    for vacuum and manual power brake means.


CLS 188/360
TXT Device under subclass 355 including supplementary hand or pedal operated
    power means.

    (1)     Note.  This is the locus for combinations of mechanical and manual
    power sources applied to brakes.


CLS 188/361
TXT Device under subclass 152 pertaining to the structure immediately adjacent
    the wheel brake or brake shoe.


CLS 188/362
TXT Device under subclass 361 wherein a frictional contacting member shifts
    radially outward of the wheel axis to engage a brake drum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78+,    for expanding transversely movable wheel brakes.


CLS 188/363
TXT Device under subclass 362 wherein the fluid pressure operator is located in
    the space separating adjacent frictional contacting members.


CLS 188/364
TXT Device under subclass 363 wherein the operator is of the type having two
    driven rods which separate to actuate brake shoes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 50 for oppositely movable
    walls of a common chamber for plural flexible wall working members and
    subclass 75 for oppositely movable walls of a common chamber with
    relatively movable working members.


CLS 188/365
TXT Device under subclass 361 wherein the fluid pressure operator for a brake
    element moves normal to the axis of the wheel to actuate the brake.


CLS 188/366
TXT Device under subclass 361 wherein the fluid pressure operator for a brake
    element is curved or of circular configuration.

    (1)     Note.  Generally, the operator is a flexible or resilient bag-like
    member.


CLS 188/367
TXT Device under subclass 366 wherein the fluid pressure operator moves
    parallel to the axis of the wheel to actuate the brake.


CLS 188/368
TXT Device under subclass 361 wherein the fluid pressure operator for a brake
    element moves parallel to the axis of the wheel to actuate the brake.


CLS 188/369
TXT Device under subclass 361 wherein the frictional contacting element shifts
    parallel to the axis of the wheel to actuate the brake.

    (1)     Note.  Here are operators for brakes of the "disc" type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71+,    for disc brake details.


CLS 188/370
TXT Device under subclass 369 wherein the axially movable brake member is a
    relatively small element acting against outer portions of the radial face
    of the wheel.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are operators for "caliper" brakes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73,     for rim grip disc brakes.


CLS 188/371
TXT PLASTIC DEFORMATION OR BREAKAGE OF RETARDER ELEMENT (E.G., IMPACT ABSORBER):

    Device under the class definition including first and second relatively
    movable members, wherein the second member includes an element adapted to
    be either fractured or deformed beyond its elastic limit, which element
    acts to restrain the relative motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 514.12+ for fluid or fluent
    material dampening of an inertial member in an acceleration measuring
    apparatus and subclass 514.14 for vibration dampening in an inertial-type
    acceleration measuring apparatus.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 492 for plastically
    deformable steering columns.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 777 for a steering column or steering wheel
    that is collapsible in response to a collision.

    293,    Vehicle Fenders, subclass 133 for a one-shot type (e.g.,
    plastically deformable or breakable) bumpers.


CLS 188/372
TXT And subsequent reverse deformation:

    Device under subclass 371 wherein, after once being deformed, the element
    is again deformed in a direction opposite to that of the first deformation.


CLS 188/373
TXT Element twisted:

    Device under subclass 371 wherein the relative motion is converted into
    torsional loading, and the element is twistably deformed thereby.


CLS 188/374
TXT Element extruded through or around tool: Device under subclass 371 wherein
    the cross section of the element has a two-dimensional configuration, and
    the deformation is a change in that configuration as the element moves
    relative to a tool device (e.g., through a die, about a mandrel).


CLS 188/375
TXT Element severed by cutting tool:

    Device under subclass 371 wherein a part of the element is adapted to be
    progressively sheared from another part thereof as the element moves
    relative to a shearing device.


CLS 188/376
TXT Frangible element:

    Device under subclass 371 wherein the moving member impacts upon the
    element or a member in contact with the element and the element is adapted
    to break as a result of the impact.


CLS 188/377
TXT Crushable element:

    Device under subclass 371 wherein the element is adapted to be compacted by
    the energy of motion of the first member relative to the second member.


CLS 188/378
TXT INERTIA OF DAMPING MASS DISSIPATES MOTION (E.G., VIBRATION DAMPER):

    Device under the class definition including first and second relatively
    movable members, wherein the second member includes a relatively heavy
    damping mass and the motion is restrained by an opposing force resulting
    from the inertia of the damping mass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218,    for a vibration dampener for a drum, wheel or disc.

    322.5,  for fluid, viscous, torsional dampener.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 514.12+ for fluid or fluent
    material dampening of an inertial member in an acceleration measuring
    apparatus and subclass 514.14 for vibration dampening in an inertial-type
    acceleration measuring apparatus.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 574 for vibration dampening
    means for flywheels for rotors.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 42 for vibration
    dampening means associated with an overhead conductor.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 30 for a clutch vibration
    dampener, subclasses 70.17+ for vibration dampening means in the form of
    resilient torque connections between a clutch elements and its associated
    shaft and subclasses 200+ for resiliently carried clutch elements carried
    on a hub wherein the resilient connection dampens vibrations between the
    elements.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 140.11+ for a spring device  including
    energy absorbing means.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., impellers), subclass 134 for
    nonmetallic vibration dampeners for impellers.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, subclass 180 for the particular vibration dampening means
    for a rotary shaft or flexible coupling for rotary shafts.


CLS 188/379
TXT Resiliently supported damping mass:

    Device under subclass 378 wherein the damping mass is carried by an
    elastically deformable means.


CLS 188/380
TXT Supported by mechanical spring:

    Device under subclass 379 wherein the elastically deformable means is a
    mechanical element consisting of solid material, such as a coil spring,
    leaf spring, etc.


CLS 188/381
TXT FRICTIONAL VIBRATION DAMPER:

    Device under the class definition wherein a force tends to vibrate a first
    member, a second member contacts the first member, and the vibration is
    restrained or dissipated by a resistance to sliding between the surfaces of
    the members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129,    for a shock absorber with friction brakes operated upon the rise or
    fall or the vehicle body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 514.12+ for fluid or fluent
    material dampening of an inertial member in an acceleration measuring
    apparatus and subclass 514.14 for vibration dampening in an inertial-type
    acceleration measuring apparatus.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 9+ for a mechanical spring including a
    frictional vibration dampener and subclass 140.1 for a spring device
    including frictional energy absorbing means.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclass 210 for damping or braking a slit
    exposure scanning carriage.


CLS 188/382
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    A device under the class definition not already provided for.


CLS 190/
TTL TRUNKS AND HAND-CARRIED  LUGGAGE

CLS 190/
TXT

    I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF THE CLASS SUBJECT MATTER:

    This is the generic class for receptacles which are used to transport
    personal items while traveling.  Such receptacles combined with or
    convertible to other devices are included in this class.

    (1)     Note.  The suitcases and briefcases provided for in this class are
    distinguished from the purses and wallets of Class 150 by both (1) the type
    of personal items they normally carry (e.g., clothes, books, papers versus
    money, keys, identification) and (2) their proximity to the person (e.g.,
    left in the hotel or office room versus kept on or near the person)
    respectively.

    (2)     Note.  A camp kit is included in this class if it has room for
    storage of supplies and is convertible into a desk or table.  Otherwise, it
    is classified in Class 206, Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 541+.



    II.     RELATION TO OTHER CLASSES:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, appropriate subclasses, for trunk casters
    and hinges, even though combined with corner shields, and subclasses 110+
    for a handle, per se.

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., for a fastener, per se.

    29,     Metal Working, for methods of assembly, in general.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 299+, for a check,
    label or tag, per se.

    70,     Locks, appropriate subclasses, and in particular subclasses 63+ for
    an article of luggage combined with a lock of that class type (e.g., key,
    combination, etc.) wherein the modification of the article of luggage is
    only of a character to accommodate the lock.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses for
    material of that class type nominally claimed as an article of hand luggage.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 200+ for indicators, per se.

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, subclasses 100+, for a
    purse (i.e., a container which is used to carry personal items such as
    money, credit cards identification on one's person).  Note.  Purses and
    Wallets are distinguished from suitcases and briefcases by both (1) the
    type of personal items they normally carry (e.g., money, key,
    identification versus clothes, books, papers) and (2) their proximity to
    the person (e.g., kept on or near the person versus remain at the hotel or
    office) respectively.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, for
    adhesive bonding in general.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 278+ for either (1) a
    special receptacle for apparel which is not of the 190 (for traveling) type
    or (2) an article of hand carried luggage which includes claimed structure
    to position or support the apparel, and in particular:  subclasses 286+ for
    an article of hand carried luggage having an interior member for supporting
    an article of clothing and a second member for attachment to an external
    support; subclasses 289+ for an article of hand carried luggage having an
    apparel holding member hanging inside; and subclasses 292+ for an article
    of hand carried luggage which includes means for holding a clothing item in
    a predetermined position.

    220,    Receptacles, for a rigid receptacle not otherwise provided for, and
    in particular, subclasses 4.01+ for an enclosed container having two
    similar or identical halves and for a knockdown receptacle.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, for an article of hand luggage having
    a strap or other means for supporting it on the body while allowing the
    bearer's hands to remain free.  Any article of luggage of this type is
    proper for Class 224 even if it also includes an element which optionally
    may be gripped by the bearer's hand.  This Class 190, includes articles of
    hand carried luggage which are intended to be grasped by the hand.



    The test to be used is:  as long as one of the bearer's hands must remain
    occupied in order to carry the luggage, it is proper for Class 190 if it is
    also intended to be simultaneously slung over the bearer's shoulder.

    248,    Supports, for a support, per se, and in particular, subclass 461
    for a knockdown easel having a housing for the collapsed components.

    252,    Compositions, for compositions of that class type nominally claimed
    as an article of luggage.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses, for a process of making an article of luggage by
    molding, casting, or shaping.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 37, 47.131+ and 47.34+ for an article of
    luggage combined with transporting wheels wherein the claim recites only so
    much of the luggage structure as is necessary to mount or house the wheels.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, for a means to fasten a closure, per se, and, in
    particular, Digest 42 for a trunk latch.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 244 for a receptacle of that
    class type combined with a carrying handle.

    383,    Flexible Bags, for receptacles of that class type which are not
    articles of luggage, particularly subclasses 2 for volume adjustment means,
    6+ for bag handles, 33+ for a bag mouth biasing or stiffening means, 38+
    for a compartmented bag, 41 for a bag having plural access openings,  66
    for a sidewall closure and 86+ for mail bags.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    appropriate subclasses for an apparatus of that class type which is used to
    make an article of luggage.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    and in particular, subclasses 34.1+ for stock material nominally claimed as
    an article of luggage.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclass 125 for an article, in
    general, convertible to or from a flotation device.  This Class 190,
    subclass 1 provides for an article of luggage convertible to a flotation
    device.


CLS 190/1
TXT Structures under the class definition which are capable of change to adapt
    them to other uses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 141+ for
    convertible hand-held article carriers which are not of the receptacle type.


CLS 190/2
TXT Devices under subclass 1 which are convertible into beds or couches, and
    which in folded or closed position hold at least the bed-clothing or
    mattress and usually have storage-room also for other clothing, etc.


CLS 190/3
TXT Devices under subclass 1 made up wholly or partly of drawers.  Small
    drawers in bookcases--such as are used for note-paper, stamps, etc., and
    which do not extend across the frame--and mirrors mounted upon cases
    without drawers are not considered as making the structures bureaus.


CLS 190/4
TXT Devices under subclass 3 opening both at the top and at the front.  The top
    opening usually gives access to a tray, as in the ordinary trunk, and the
    front opening permits the drawers to be drawn out.


CLS 190/5
TXT Devices under subclass 4 in which the cover for the top opening is itself a
    receptacle.


CLS 190/6
TXT Devices under subclass 3 in which the removal of a front cover or fastening
    permits the drawers to be drawn out.


CLS 190/7
TXT Devices under subclass 6 in which the closure of the front opening is
    itself a receptacle.


CLS 190/8
TXT Devices under subclass 1 which are convertible into chairs or seats.


CLS 190/9
TXT Devices under subclass 1 which are provided with partitions, which are
    available in the converted position as shelves.


CLS 190/10
TXT Devices under subclass 9 provided with flaps for writing use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 231 for cabinet structure
    provided with either a drafting board or means for supporting writing
    material, usually paper, for use.


CLS 190/11
TXT Devices under subclass 1 which are convertible into desks or tables.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 10+, for a desk
    capable of structural rearrangement to a different use; see subclass 18,
    wherein the rearrangement makes the Class 108 support structure inoperative.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 142 for a
    hand-held article carrier having legs by which it may alternately serve as
    a table.


CLS 190/12
TXT Devices under subclass 11 which are in the form of trunks or traveling-bags
    adapted to carry supplies or baggage and are convertible into tables.
    Camp-kits in the form of convertible lunch-boxes, chairs, etc., but not
    containing the features of the above definition, are classified with these
    articles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 541+ for a camp or lunch
    kit.


CLS 190/13
TXT Devices under subclass 1 in which, when converted, a space is left within
    which clothing can be suspended.


CLS 190/14
TXT Devices under subclass 13 provided with means by which increased height is
    gained.


CLS 190/15
TXT Devices under subclass 14 in which the increased height is secured by
    extending parts which slide one within the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for trunks which are not convertible that are provided with
    telescopic sections.

    104+,   for traveling bags with telescopic sections.


CLS 190/15.1
TXT Devices under subclass 1 including component parts which may be arranged to
    form an enlarged open top container.  These devices are for the most part
    converted into luggage carriers of the type adapted to be attached to a
    vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21+,    for extensible trunks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclasses 400+ for carriers of this
    type including specific means for attaching it to a vehicle.


CLS 190/16
TXT Trunks or traveling bags under the class definition having features fitting
    them for commercial travelers' use.  These features are usually the
    construction of the trays to hold the line of articles to be carried and
    disposition of trays to display the contents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 736+ for a receptacle
    convertible to or from a display device and subclasses 557+ for a tray type
    receptacle.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses 8+ for folding boxes, including
    display boxes.


CLS 190/17
TXT Devices under subclass 16 in which the trays are held in display position
    by links.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30      and 34, for similar structure in nonsample cases.


CLS 190/18
TXT Devices under the class definition including legs and other structures for
    bearing the weight of the baggage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for trunks with circular ends which facilitate handling.

    39,     for handles of strap form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 18 for casters and subclasses 110
    and 125 for trunk-handles of other types.

    280,    Land Vehicles, appropriate subclasses, for wheeled carriers for
    baggage, and for the combination of an article of baggage with transporting
    wheels where no more baggage structure is claimed than is necessary to
    mount or house the wheels and subclass 43.1 for a vehicle having vertically
    adjustable ground engaging means and which is unstable when in transporting
    position but which is stabilized by an attendant or an article to which the
    vehicle is temporarily attached.


CLS 190/19
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising transportation
    receptacles of somewhat larger size than traveling bags characterized
    generally by box shape and the location of the handles at opposite ends.


CLS 190/20
TXT Trunks under subclass 19 in which the end is circular in section to permit
    rolling upon its edge without jar.  The form is generally that of a
    cylinder or barrel.


CLS 190/21
TXT Trunks under subclass 19 which can be increased in capacity.  This is
    usually accomplished by releasing telescoped or folded compartments or
    walls or by adding independent receptacles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for convertible wardrobe trunks which are extensible.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses 12+ and 43+ for knockdown boxes and
    grates.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 500+, for compartmented receptacles.


CLS 190/22
TXT Trunks under subclass 21 in which the increased capacity is obtained by
    drawing the telescoping member of one section out from the other section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for convertible trunks with telescopic sections to increase the
    height.

    104+,   for traveling bags with telescopic sections.


CLS 190/23
TXT Trunks under subclass 19 arranged to open while resting against the wall.


CLS 190/24
TXT Devices under subclass 19 comprising structural details of the body of the
    trunk.  Under "interior braces" are included brackets or strips upon the
    inside of the trunk to support the tray when the trunk is closed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29+,    for tray movers and supporters which show supports for the tray in
    its position within the closed trunk.


CLS 190/25
TXT Devices under subclass 19 comprising strip and slat fastenings with the
    exterior strengthening bands which they hold.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for frames and interior braces.


CLS 190/26
TXT Devices and subclass 19 comprising harnesses which are so arranged as to
    protect the trunk from jar or injury, while also keeping the trunk closed.


CLS 190/27
TXT Devices under subclass 19 comprising combinations of straps suitable for
    securing trunks in their closed position. Single straps are included when
    they are attached to the trunk or when the trunk is modified to accommodate
    the strap. Attached fasteners are included when they fasten the strap
    surrounding the trunk.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for similar harnesses which have the additional function of
    protecting the trunk.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 24+ for bale and package
    ties in the form of metal bands, subclasses 68+ for strap tighteners, and
    subclasses 712+ for lacing devices.


CLS 190/28
TXT Trunks under subclass 19 in which, the edges of the one part where the
    trunk opens, are extended in the form of strips to overlap the edges of the
    other part in order to relieve the hinges and fastenings from side strain
    and to protect the contents from the elements.  These overlapping parts are
    called "valances".


CLS 190/29
TXT Devices under subclass 19 comprising constructions whose object is the
    lifting or shifting of the tray from the position which it occupies when
    the trunk is closed into another position permitting easier access to the
    trunk-body or to the tray or which support or retain the tray in that other
    position.


CLS 190/30
TXT Devices under subclass 29 in which the tray is moved by the action of the
    lid.


CLS 190/31
TXT Devices under subclass 29 in which the tray turns upon a pivot.


CLS 190/32
TXT Devices under subclass 31 in which the tray moves in a horizontal plane
    upon its pivot. It usually has some vertical motion along the pivot also.


CLS 190/33
TXT Devices under subclass 29 in which the tray slides upon a track in
    approximately a horizontal plane.


CLS 190/34
TXT Devices under subclass 29 in which arms ordinarily pivoted are used
    directly to operate or support the tray.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for sample cases in which the trays are held in display position by
    links.

    30,     for trunks which include trays that are separated by movement of
    the lid.


CLS 190/35
TXT Devices under subclass 19 relating to the tray.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for supports for the tray in the closed position of the trunk.

    29+,    for mechanism for moving the tray or in supporting it in a
    different position from that occupied by it when the trunk is closed.


CLS 190/36
TXT Devices under subclass 19 relating to adjustable partitions insertible or
    movable after the contents is in place to compress or retain it.  The
    follower is sometimes in the form of a tray.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses 64 for followers in boxes and 86 for
    followers in barrels.


CLS 190/37
TXT Devices under subclass 19 relating to protections for the corners of the
    trunk.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for trunks arranged to be opened while resting against the wall.

    25,     for reinforcing strips for trunks.

    26,     for protecting harnesses for trunks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 18 for corner-shields in
    combination with casters.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses 69+ for stiffeners and braces for
    box- joints.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for structures which
    are mere joints or joint adjuncts.


CLS 190/39
TXT Devices under subclass 19 relating to strap-handles and the fastenings
    therefor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 110 and 125 for handles suitable
    for trunk use.


CLS 190/40
TXT Subject matter under subclass 19 relating to "Material" which includes
    corrugations, combinations of layers, and other modifications of what might
    be called "raw materials" to suit them for use in the trunk-body generally.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for other trunk frames and interior braces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclass 1 for wooden receptacles in which the
    slats are bent into the desired shape.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet not elsewhere provided for, and especially subclasses 174+ for such a
    product having a nonplanar uniform thickness (e.g., corrugations, pleats)
    and subclasses 411.1+ for a nonstructural composite web or sheet defined
    only by the composition of the layers.


CLS 190/100
TXT HAND LUGGAGE (SUITCASE, BRIEFCASE, ETC.):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the article of hand
    luggage is a container that can be carried in one hand.

    (1)     Note.  The suitcases and briefcases provided for in this class are
    distinguished from the purses and wallets of Class 150 by both (1) the type
    of personal items they normally carry (e.g., clothes, books, papers versus
    money, keys, identification) and (2) their proximity to the person (e.g.,
    remain at the hotel or office room versus kept on or near the person).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for an article of hand luggage which is disclosed as being
    transformable into a nonluggage device.

    16,     for a sample case.

    18,     for an article of hand luggage having legs or other structures for
    bearing the weight of the luggage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, subclasses 100+ for a
    purse, and see (1) Note above.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 284+ for an article of
    hand luggage having an internal member for supporting an article of
    clothing, and a second member projecting from the luggage for attachment to
    an external support; subclasses 289+ for an article of hand luggage which
    includes an apparel holding member hanging inside; subclasses 292+ for an
    article of hand luggage having means for holding a clothing item in a
    predetermined position.


CLS 190/101
TXT Theft resistant:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the hand luggage includes means
    for preventing or deterring an unwanted taking of the hand luggage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for means to prevent an unauthorized opening of the hand luggage.


CLS 190/102
TXT With means for securing an accessory:
    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the hand luggage includes an
    element for attaching to it an adjunct.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for plural, independently usable, articles of hand luggage.


CLS 190/103
TXT Variable volume:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein means are provided for changing
    the capacity of the hand luggage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21+,    for an extensible trunk.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 2 for a flexible bag having means to
    selectively adjust the volume.


CLS 190/104
TXT Telescoping sections:

    Subject matter under subclass 103 wherein the means for changing the
    capacity of the hand luggage includes two slidably connected parts, one of
    which fits inside the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for an extensible trunk having telescoping sections.


CLS 190/105
TXT Selectively adjustable:

    Subject matter under subclass 104 wherein the telescoping sections include
    means which allow them to be optionally changed from one discrete content
    holding configuration to another, and back.


CLS 190/106
TXT With means to bias luggage mouth into open configuration:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the hand luggage includes means
    which force the mouth to remain open when it is not secured in its closed
    position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 33+ for a flexible bag with means to
    maintain the bag mouth in open configuration.


CLS 190/107
TXT Knockdown or collapsible:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the hand luggage includes folding
    or disassembling means for facilitating its manipulation into a nonuse
    configuration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 4.08, 4.16, and 6 for a knockdown
    receptacle and subclasses 9.2+ for a receptacle having flaccid walls united
    with a collapsible, skeletal framework.


CLS 190/108
TXT Plural:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 comprising two or more independently
    usable articles of hand luggage.

    (1)     Note.  One article of hand luggage can be removably contained
    within another, or detachable from an external surface of another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109,    for a single article of hand luggage having plural compartments.

    110,    for a compartment forming member that is releasable secured to an
    article of hand luggage, but is not independently usable as an article of
    hand luggage.


CLS 190/109
TXT Compartmented:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the hand luggage includes a
    barrier which forms two content holding sections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 38+ for a flexible bag having
    compartments.


CLS 190/110
TXT Removable compartment or compartment- forming member:

    Subject matter under subclass 109 wherein the means for forming one of the
    content holding sections is either unattached to or releasably secured to
    the hand luggage so that it may be dissociated therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for two independently usable articles of hand luggage which are
    releasably secured together.


CLS 190/111
TXT Independently closable compartments:
    Subject matter under subclass 109 wherein each of two of the content
    holding sections includes its own closure member which can be used to open
    or close its section without opening or closing the other.


CLS 190/112
TXT With plural access openings:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the hand luggage includes two or
    more openings which are usable for insertion or removal of content.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 41 for a flexible bag having plural access
    openings.


CLS 190/113
TXT Closure panel struck from luggage wall:
    Subject matter under subclass 100 including a closure panel which is a
    unitary part of the luggage wall and which is partially detached therefrom
    along its periphery to allow access to the luggage interior.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 66 for a flexible bag having a closure for
    an access opening in the bag sidewall.


CLS 190/114
TXT Coacting closure elements hinged to opposed side walls:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the hand luggage includes two
    closure members which are hingedly secured to each of two opposing side
    walls and which act together to close the hand luggage.


CLS 190/115
TXT With handle:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the hand luggage includes an
    element which is to be grasped by the hand in order to lift, carry, or
    otherwise move it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for a trunk with a handle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 110+ for a handle, per se.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 244 for a receptacle of that
    class type combined with a carrying handle.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 6+ for a flexible bag with a handle.


CLS 190/116
TXT Detachable:

    Subject matter under subclass 115 including means for facilitating the
    removal of the handle from the hand luggage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 13 for a flexible bag having a detachable
    handle.


CLS 190/117
TXT Plural interengaging elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein at least two separable handle
    elements have means for holding them together when they are being used to
    move the hand luggage.

    (1)     Note.  The "handle elements" may be either two separate handles or
    two parts of a single handle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 15 for a flexible bag having a handle with
    plural interengaging elements.


CLS 190/118
TXT Closure locking means manipulated via handle:

    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein the hand luggage includes an
    element which is responsive to movement by the handle to either (1) fasten
    or unfasten the closure fastener or (2) prevent the closure fastener from
    being inadvertently unfastened.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for plural interengaging handle elements which may also function to
    maintain the hand luggage in its closed condition.

    120,    for other means to prevent accidental or unauthorized release of
    the fastener.


CLS 190/119
TXT With means to fasten the hand luggage in closed condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the hand luggage includes an
    element which releasably secures the luggage against opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for a trunk having a harness which keeps it closed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., for a fastener, per se.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, for a means to fasten a closure, per se.


CLS 190/120
TXT And means to prevent inadvertent or unauthorized opening:
    Subject matter under subclass 119 wherein the hand luggage includes, in
    addition to the fastening element, means for preventing accidental or
    unauthorized release of that element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    for means to discourage an unauthorized taking of the article of
    luggage.

    118,    for a closure locking means manipulated via the handle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclasses 63+ for an article of luggage combined with a
    lock of that class type (e.g., key, combination, etc.) wherein the
    modification of the article of luggage is only of a character to
    accommodate the lock.


CLS 190/121
TXT Fastening means secured to mouth frame: Subject matter under subclass 119
    wherein the fastening means is attached to an elongated, relatively rigid
    element or plurality of elements which extend along substantially the
    entire periphery of the access opening.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., for a fastener, per se.

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, subclass 123 for purse
    mouth fasteners.


CLS 190/122
TXT Including frame or frame members substantially surrounding luggage mouth:
    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the hand luggage includes an
    elongated, relatively rigid element or plurality of elements which extend
    along substantially the entire periphery of the access opening.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is a frame, per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for a trunk having a mouth frame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, subclass 124 for a purse
    having a mouth frame.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 34+ for similar subject matter for a
    flexible bag mouth.


CLS 190/123
TXT Including means to facilitate attachment to the hand luggage:

    Subject matter under subclass 122 wherein the frame includes a particular
    modification which makes it easier to secure it to the hand luggage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., for a fastener, per se.

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, subclass 124 for similar
    subject matter relating to a purse mouth-frame.


CLS 190/124
TXT Wall detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the luggage wall includes
    specific structure or a specified feature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for a trunk having structural body details.

    40,     for a trunk made of a specific material.


CLS 190/125
TXT Multi-layer or ply:

    Subject matter under subclass 124 wherein there is more than one layer of
    material over substantially the entire surface area of the hand luggage.


CLS 190/126
TXT Specified seam structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 124 including details of a joint which
    connects two parts of the hand luggage wall material.

    (1)     Note.  The mere recitation of a "seam" or "connection" is not
    included here.


CLS 190/127
TXT Reinforced:

    Subject matter under subclass 124 wherein the hand luggage includes means
    which strengthen it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for a trunk having corner protecting devices.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 190/900
TXT BRIEF CASE TYPE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the hand luggage is the
    type usually used to hold and transport written documents (e.g., legal
    briefs, etc.).


CLS 190/901
TXT Flat opening:

    Subject matter under subclass 900 wherein the brief case has two opposed
    walls hinged (flexibly joined) together along a line so that the walls lie
    in the same plane when the brief case is opened.


CLS 190/902
TXT With closure flap:

    Subject matter under subclass 900 wherein the brief case includes a piece
    of material which extends across the access opening and overlaps the side
    wall.


CLS 190/903
TXT ZIPPER:

    Subject matter under the class definition having a zipper-like closure.


CLS 191/
TTL ELECTRICITY:  TRANSMISSION  TO VEHICLES

CLS 191/
TXT Means for transmitting electrical energy between relatively moving objects.
     Generally involves the problem of transmitting electrical energy from
    fixed points to vehicles or other moving objects, or vice versa.

    (1)     Note.  Includes the combination of generation and transmission to
    and from the vehicle, but does not include specific means for applying the
    electrical energy to any specific purpose, which are classified according
    to the application.

    (2)     Note.  Does not include mere slip rings and brushes, which are
    classified in Class 310, Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass
    232; rail bonds which are classified in Class 238, Railways: Surface Track,
    subclasses 14.1+; nor means peculiarly adapted for transmitting electrical
    energy momentarily to a vehicle for the purpose of operating a signal,
    switch, etc., which are classifiable in Class 246, Railway Switches and
    Signals, and will be found in the various subclasses containing the words
    "Intermittent contact" in the title.

    (4)     Note.  See Class 174, Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, for
    conductor, conductor cable and insulator structure, conduits and housings
    for conductor and insulator structures and conduits and housings for other
    electrical equipment where the characteristics of the electrical equipment
    are not claimed.

    (4.5)   Note.  Class 307, Electrical Transmission or Interconnection
    Systems, subclass 145 for miscellaneous electrical systems involving
    current collection or transfer.

    (5)     Note.  Class 314, Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Consumable
    Electrodes, subclass 129 for consumable electrode discharge devices (arc
    lamps, et cetera) provided with means to transfer the electric current from
    a lead wire to a moving electrode.

    (5.5)   Note.  Class 324, Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses
    323+ for geophysical exploration systems having means to pass current from
    a moving electrode into the earth.

    (7)     Note.  See Class 439, Electrical Connectors for electrical
    connector structure, especially subclasses 1+ for a pair of relatively
    movable mating connectors; and subclasses 110+ for a continuous outlet
    receptacle.

    (8)     Note.  Class 439, Electrical Connector, for electrical connector
    structure, especially subclasses 1+, for interrelated connectors relatively
    movable during use, and subclasses 110+ for an uninterrupted support rail
    or uninterrupted contact type electrical connector.


CLS 191/1
TXT Means within the class definition not otherwise classifiable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, particularly subclasses in the title
    of which "cab signal or train control" occur.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 754, 757+, 869,
    and 882 for movable or rotatable antennas including means to transmit
    electrical energy to the antenna.


CLS 191/2
TXT Means under the class definition for supplying electric energy to or from
    vehicles and involving processes or more than the mere physical structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 9.1+
    for vehicle mounted electrical systems, and subclass 145 for electrical
    systems which include current collecting or transferring means.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 71 for
    dynamoelectric devices having circuit supply connections therefor.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 24+ for coupling
    networks including significant reactive structure for effecting a transfer
    of oscillatory energy from one circuit to another circuit and having
    attenuation and/or delay characteristics over a frequency range for
    attenuating and/or delaying in a predetermined manner wave energy passing
    therethrough, and/or providing an impedance match between the network and
    at least one of the circuits, and subclasses 1+ for such coupling networks
    in plural channel systems.


CLS 191/3
TXT Systems under subclass 2 distributing a plurality of currents of different
    characteristics to or from the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  The currents may be supplied simultaneously or successively,
    and the conversion may be automatic or at will.


CLS 191/4
TXT Systems of distribution under subclass 3 of the convertible multiple
    current source type wherein one source is on the vehicle and another
    exterior thereto, the vehicle source obtaining its power primarily from an
    external source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 9.1+
    for electrical systems mounted on vehicles.


CLS 191/5
TXT Systems of distribution under subclass 3 of the convertible multiple
    current source type wherein one of the currents supplied to or from the
    vehicle is alternating and another direct.


CLS 191/6
TXT Systems of distribution under subclass 2 comprising a sectional contact
    conductor.

    (1)     Note.  The physical structure of the sectional conductor is
    classified in subclass 14, and indented subclasses in this class.


CLS 191/7
TXT Systems of distribution under subclass 2 wherein the current source is
    alternating and is converted to an alternating current of different
    characteristics before reaching the point of use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 151
    for miscellaneous conversion systems.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 160 for
    dynamoelectric frequency converters.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    electric power conversion systems, but particularly subclasses 148+ for
    phase conversion, and subclasses 157+ for frequency conversion.


CLS 191/8
TXT Systems of distribution to vehicles under subclass 2 combined with means
    under the control of the persons on the vehicle for de-energizing the
    systems at will.


CLS 191/9
TXT A conventional drawbridge, turn-table, or other transfer table, under the
    class definition with means for maintaining the bridge or table or a
    vehicle thereon in electrical connection with a relatively fixed point
    exterior to the bridge or table.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    14,     Bridges, subclass 31, and indented subclasses.

    104,    Railways, subclasses 19, 35, 48, and 172.


CLS 191/10
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising a vehicle, its
    pathway, and a static transformer whose primary is mounted on the pathway
    and its secondary on the vehicle, or vice versa, whereby electrical energy
    is transferred between the vehicle and its pathway.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, subclass 3.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 12+ for linear
    dynamoelectric machines, but particularly subclass 13, where both the fixed
    and movable elements of the machine are provided with electrical windings.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for the structure of
    transformers and inductive reactors.


CLS 191/11
TXT Vehicles under the class definition having, a single current source, and
    means for causing the same current to pass to each vehicle in series.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 36+
    for serially connected load circuits.


CLS 191/12
TXT Devices under the class definition having a relatively fixed current
    source, a movable vehicle or other object and a flexible conductor
    connecting the two.

    (1)     Note.  For extensible electric conduit, cable or conductor
    structures, see Class 174, Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators,
    subclass 69.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 24, Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 115,
    and indented subclasses, for cord and rope holders providing a
    take-up-function. Many of these devices are disclosed for flexible
    conductors but are not limited to that use.

    (3)     Note.  See Class 362, Illumination, especially subclass 198.

    (4)     Note.  See Class 248, Supports, subclasses 51, 52, 329, and 330.1,
    for supports having conductor take-ups.

    (5)     Note.  See Class 267, Spring Devices, particularly subclass 69 and
    indented subclasses for elastic extension devices operable as take-ups for
    flexible conductors or other flexible strands but not limited to electrical
    use.


CLS 191/12.2
TXT Reel Structures under subclass 12.

    (1)     Note.  Combinations of reel structures with the vehicle or object
    in or upon which the reel is mounted are in this class, subclass 12.

    (2)     Note.  The electrical translator to which energy is supplied may be
    included in the claims, if no characteristics thereof other than are
    necessary to define the reel structure are set forth.

    (3)     Note.  See Class 200, Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers,
    particularly subclasses 153+ for switches controlled by operation of a reel.

    (4)     Note.  See Class 242, Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses
    370+ particularly 390.8+, 391+, and 400+ for a reeling device that may
    include an electrical source.

    (5)     Note.  See Class 248, Supports, subclass 317, and indented
    subclasses, particularly subclasses 329 and 330 for suspended supports
    having reels, even though limited to use with electrical conductors.

    (6)     Note.  See Class 439, Electrical Connectors, subclasses 1+ for an
    electrical connector having contacts relatively movable during use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 707 for trailing
    type antennas which may have a reel for the antenna wire; and subclass 877
    for antennas with a reel for the antenna.


CLS 191/12.4
TXT Reels under subclass 12.2 having secured thereto an electric connector plug
    or plug receptacle permitting interconnection of the conductor on the reel
    and a complementary connector part.  The complementary connector part may
    constitute the connector element of an electrical translator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for an electrical
    connector of general utility.


CLS 191/13
TXT Devices under the class definition wherein means involving conductors
    having two- dimension contact-surfaces for the purpose of serving
    collectors mounted on vehicles which are not confined to a fixed path.

    (1)     Note.  The device generally comprises two parallel spaced plane
    conductors, the lower one forming the vehicle path.


CLS 191/14
TXT Devices under the class definition having means involving an uninterrupted
    feeder and plurality of separated conductor sections exposed to the
    collector and means connecting the feeder to the section.


CLS 191/15
TXT Means under subclass 14 of the sectional conductor type wherein the
    sections are normally connected to the feeder and normally energized
    therefrom.  The section exposed to the collector is generally much shorter
    than the interval between sections and the collector used generally is long
    enough to bridge from section to section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclasses 34, 41 and 58, and
    indented subclasses.

            Sectional conductor, Normally dead section. Means of the sectional
    conductor type in which the sections are normally deenergizedand a given
    section is connected to the feeder only while the collector is in contact
    therewith.


CLS 191/16
TXT Means of the normally dead section type wherein the sections are energized
    by magnetic means and deenergized by mechanical means or vice versa.


CLS 191/17
TXT Means of the normally dead section type wherein the mechanism for
    energizing and deenergizing the sections is operated magnetically.

    (1)     Note.  Most of the devices in this subclass involve an
    electromagnetically operated current controller whose magnet obtains
    current from the feeder when its section is energized by the collector
    bridging from the adjacent live section.


CLS 191/18
TXT Means under subclass 17 of the normally dead section magnetic circuit
    controlled type wherein the magnetically operated mechanism for energizing
    the sections is carried by the vehicle path and operated by a magnet
    carried by the vehicle.


CLS 191/19
TXT Means under subclass 18 of the normally dead section type in which the
    feeder and portions of the sections are disposed in parallelism in a closed
    conduit, which also carries a magnetic traveling bridging piece for
    successively placing the sections in contact with the feeder, the bridging
    piece being propelled by the magnet carried by the vehicle.


CLS 191/20
TXT Means of the normally dead section type in which the mechanisms for
    energizing and deenergizing the sections are mechanically operated by means
    of the collector or other operator carried by the vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclasses 161 and 246 for trolley
    and car-actuated circuit closers, and 31.


CLS 191/21
TXT Means under subclass 20 of the normally dead section mechanical circuit
    controlled type wherein the conductor element is composed of a series of
    insulated contact sections and a continuous feeder united by a flexible or
    deformable casing, so that the collector or other operator resting on the
    sections may force them into contact with the feeder, thus energizing them.


CLS 191/22
TXT Electrical conductors under the class definition arranged adjacent the
    vehicle or object path and presenting a substantially continuous exposed
    surface for contact with a collector carried by the vehicle or object.  The
    electrical energy may be transmitted in either direction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclasses 9, 65, 67, and 69, and
    indented subclasses.


CLS 191/23
TXT Conductors under subclass 22 placed within a conduit which is provided with
    a continuous aperture or slot for entry of the collector of the vehicle or
    object and combinations thereof with the collector. The conductor element
    presents a substantially continuous exposed surface for contact with the
    collector.

    (1)     Note.  The conductor may possess inherent rigidity or inherent
    flexibility.  In the former case the conductor element, free from conduit
    structure, will be classified as a third rail; in the latter case as a
    trolley conductor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclasses 165+.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 110+ for an electrical connector
    comprising an uninterrupted support rail or uninterrupted contact.


CLS 191/24
TXT Conductors of the conduit type under subclass 23 in which the slot or other
    place of entry of the collector into the conduit is not symmetrical with
    reference to the running rails or other vehicle path.

    (1)     Note.  The collector opening is generally placed in the flange-way
    of one of the running rails.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 165, and indented subclasses.


CLS 191/25
TXT Conductors of the conduit type under subclass 23 in which the place of
    entry of the collector into the conduit is normally obstructed by a movable
    closer, which is withdrawn as the collector passes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 194.


CLS 191/26
TXT Conductors of the conduit type under subclass 23 combined with conduit
    draining means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 165, and indented subclasses.


CLS 191/27
TXT Conductors of the conduit type under subclass 23 combined with heating
    means for various purposes, as for keeping the conductor dry or for melting
    ice therefrom.  The heater may be built within the conductor element itself.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 165, and indented subclasses.


CLS 191/28
TXT Conductors of the conduit type under subclass 23 modified to meet special
    local conditions, such as crossings, switches, plow removal pits, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclasses 165, 185 and 195.


CLS 191/29
TXT Conductors of the rigid rail type, under subclass 22 which are placed above
    the ground or other vehicle pathway, but so near such way as not to clear
    persons and other ordinary objects on the ground, and which present a
    substantially continuous exposed surface for contact with the collector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    238,    Railways:  Surface Track.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclasses 9, 65, 67 and 69, and
    indented subclasses.


CLS 191/30
TXT Third rail conductors under subclass 29 provided with a more or less
    complete casing, guard, or shield for preventing accidental contact with
    the exposed conductor element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    238,    Railways:  Surface Track, subclass 379.


CLS 191/31
TXT Third rail conductors of the protected type under subclass 30 wherein the
    place of entry of the collector into the protecting casing is normally
    obstructed by a movable closer, which is withdrawn as the collector passes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 194.


CLS 191/32
TXT Means under subclass 29 for holding the third rail conductor in operative
    position.  It generally involves an insulator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 194.


CLS 191/33
TXT Conductors under subclass 22 placed adjacent the vehicle path at such a
    height as to clear persons and ordinary objects on the ground and
    presenting a substantially continuous exposed surface for contact with the
    collector.

    (1)     Note.  The conductor element per se is generally inherently
    flexible and is tensioned to present a rigid contact surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 124.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclasses 9, 65, 67 and 69, and
    indented subclasses.


CLS 191/34
TXT Trolley conductors under subclass 33 wherein the collector contacts on some
    portion other than or in addition to the under surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 124.


CLS 191/35
TXT Trolley conductors under subclass 33 provided with means such as cages,
    shields, etc. for preventing the collector from leaving the conductor or
    for replacing the collector if derailed or protecting the conductor from
    deposits of ice, dust, etc.


CLS 191/36
TXT Means under subclass 33 at the point of meeting of the trolley conductor
    with other structures which allow the latter to function without
    interfering with the operation of the conductor.  Generally involves the
    intersection of trolley conductors with structures such as railway safety
    gates, doors, bridges, roads, etc.


CLS 191/37
TXT Structures under subclass 33 at the intersection of a plurality of separate
    trolley conductors for guiding each conductor's collector across the
    intersection and preventing it from being diverted to another conductor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclass 454, and indented subclasses.


CLS 191/38
TXT Trolley conductor under subclass 33 having modifications at the point of
    branching for directing the collector to the selected branch.  Includes the
    combination of the track switch with the trolley switch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    186,    Merchandising, subclass 19, and indented subclasses.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclass 415 and indented subclasses.


CLS 191/39
TXT Means under subclass 33 for interrupting the electrical continuity of the
    trolley conductor while maintaining the uninterrupted mechanical path of
    the collector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    238,    Railways:  Surface Track, subclass 152.


CLS 191/40
TXT Means under subclass 33 for securing the trolley conductor in operative
    position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclasses 124 and 165, and indented subclasses.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 141, and indented subclasses and
    148.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators subclass 168 and indented
    subclasses for insulators with conductor holding means.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 79.

    440,    Marine Propulsion, subclasses 33+.

    (3)     Note.  See Classes 248, Supports, subclass 61 and 254, Implements
    or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force, subclass 388 for means
    supported by, and maintaining relative spacing between, longitudinal runs
    of an endless, load-moving cable.


CLS 191/41
TXT Means under subclass 40 for supporting the trolley conductor in a more or
    less straight line, comprising a superposed supporting or "Messenger"
    strand connected to the conductor by hangers.  Includes hangers, per se,
    modified for this use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    14,     Bridges, subclass 18, and indented subclasses.

    104,    Railways, subclass 124.


CLS 191/42
TXT Means under subclass 40 connecting the trolley conductor to the supporting
    insulator and presenting an uninterrupted path to the collector, combined
    with the supporting insulator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 168, and indented
    subclasses, for insulators with conductor holding means.


CLS 191/43
TXT Means under subclass 40 connecting the trolley conductor to the support and
    presenting an uninterrupted path to the collector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 165, and indented subclasses.

    174,    Electricity: Conductors and Insulators, subclass 168, and indented
    subclasses, for insulators with conductor holding means.


CLS 191/44
TXT Trolley conductor under subclass 43 having supporting ears adapted to join
    trolley conductors meeting at the ear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclasses 165+

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for an electrical
    connector, generally.


CLS 191/44.1
TXT Splicers or couplings under subclass 33 for alined ends of electric
    trolley-wires.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 403, Joints and Connections, subclasses 300+ for
    distinct end couplers not restricted to electrical conductors.


CLS 191/45
TXT Subject matter under the class definition having the portion of the current
    communicating means carried by the vehicle or body that moves, as
    distinguished from that portion which is fixed in relation to the track or
    pathway of the moving member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclass 229 for a composition having a continuous phase of free
    metal made by consolidating metal particles and which contains a flake or
    fibrous constituent or has a fibrous grain structure.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, generally.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclasses 9, 65, 67, and 69+.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 219+ for slip
    rings, commutators and other current collectors for dynamoelectric devices.


CLS 191/46
TXT Collectors under subclass 45 cooperating alternatively with a plurality of
    conductor systems, such as trolley, third rail, conduit, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Convertible collectors are unitary devices.  Systems are
    classified in this class, subclass 3.


CLS 191/47
TXT Collectors under subclass 45 having longitudinally extensive contact
    surfaces to cooperate with conductors which do not have a continuous
    contact surface, but which present a series of separated contacts spaced at
    less distance than the length of the collector contact surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
    15.


CLS 191/48
TXT Collectors under subclass 45 for cooperating with conductors placed beneath
    the surface of the ground.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 202, and indented subclasses.


CLS 191/49
TXT Collectors under subclass 45 for cooperating with conductors placed
    substantially at the surface of the ground.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclasses 202, and indented subclasses, and 279, and
    indented subclasses.


CLS 191/50
TXT Collectors under subclass 45 for cooperating with conductors placed at a
    substantial distance above the ground.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclasses 9, 65, 67, and 69, and
    indented subclasses.


CLS 191/51
TXT Trolley collectors under subclass 50 capable of passing one another on the
    same conductor either by being outside each other's clearance line or by
    riding one over the other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 53.


CLS 191/52
TXT Trolley collectors under subclass 50 readily removable from the vehicle or
    other movable body.


CLS 191/53
TXT Trolley collectors under subclass 50 contacting on some portion of the
    conductor other than its under side or on some portion in addition to the
    under side.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
    34.


CLS 191/54
TXT Under-running trolley collectors under subclass 50 presenting an extended
    contact substantially at right angles to the conductor and not guided
    laterally by the conductor.


CLS 191/55
TXT Indefinite path trolley collectors under subclass 54 wherein the contact
    element slides on the conductor.  The contact may be a whip, bow, slide,
    etc.


CLS 191/56
TXT Indefinite path trolley collectors under subclass 54 wherein the contact
    element is of the roller type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the notes thereunder.


CLS 191/57
TXT Trolley collectors under subclass 50 having a plurality of contact elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclasses 65, and indented subclass,
    73 and 254.


CLS 191/58
TXT Multiple contact trolley collectors under subclass 57 wherein the contact
    elements are arranged to travel one in advance of the other on the same
    conductor.


CLS 191/59
TXT That portion of the collector under subclass 50 of the ordinary
    under-running type that includes the contact element, its mounting, and the
    securing means between the contact mounting and the pole or other
    supporting means.

    (1)     Note.  Wheel mounts adapted for general application although
    designed as mounts for trolley wheels, are classified in Class 384,
    Bearings, subclasses 252+ and 429+ for bearing supports, e.g., mount for
    trolley wheel.


CLS 191/59.1
TXT Devices under subclass 59 wherein the engaging part slides along the supply
    conductor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     55, 62, and 65.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclass 229 for a composition having a continuous phase of free
    metal made by consolidating metal particles and which contains a flake or
    fibrous constituent or has a fibrous grain structure.


CLS 191/60
TXT Trolley heads under subclass 59 comprising a swivel, so that the contact
    element may follow lateral curves of the conductor.

    (1)     Note.  Compare Class 384, Bearings, subclasses 429+ for bearing
    supports, or mounts.


CLS 191/60.1
TXT Gravity, spring, or electric devices under subclass 60 constantly tending
    to maintain the swiveled heads in normal or central position and to restore
    them to such position if swung to either side.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
    60.2.


CLS 191/60.2
TXT Devices under subclass 59 wherein the head or harp is pivotally or flexibly
    connected to the trolley-pole to permit the head to swing transversely
    relatively to the car and trolley-wire.


CLS 191/60.3
TXT Devices under subclass 59 wherein the head or harp is pivotally or flexibly
    connected to the trolley to permit the head to swing vertically toward or
    from the trolley-wire.


CLS 191/60.4
TXT Devices under subclass 59 wherein the shank of the head or harp has an
    axially slidable connection with the trolley-pole, usually against
    spring-pressure.


CLS 191/60.5
TXT Releasable and permanent fixtures under subclass 59 for securing the head
    or harp to the trolley-pole, not including yielding or pivotal connections,
    which are found in this class, subclasses 60, 60.1, 60.2, 60.3, and 60.4.


CLS 191/61
TXT Trolley heads under subclass 59 involving means for maintaining the
    electrical connection between the wheel and its mounting, thus bridging
    possible resistance in the bearings.


CLS 191/62
TXT Means under subclass 59 associated with or modifications of the trolley
    head for the removal of ice, sleet, or other accumulations on the conductor
    or for the prevention of the formation of such accumulations thereon.

    (1)     Note.  Compare Classes 15, Brushing, Scrubbing, and General
    Cleaning, subclass 3, and indented subclasses; 104, Railways, subclass 279,
    and indented subclass, and 184, Lubrication, subclasses 3.1+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 704 for antennas
    with an ice clearer or preventer.


CLS 191/63
TXT Elements of trolley heads under subclass 59 making a rolling contact with
    the conductor and providing a definite path for the conductor.

    (1)     Note.  For similar wheel devices intended for general use as
    pulleys, see Class 474, Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or
    Components, subclass 166 and indented subclasses.


CLS 191/63.1
TXT Articulated sectional trolley-harps under subclass 63 to permit the quick
    release of a trolley-wheel.


CLS 191/63.2
TXT The trolley-wheel under subclass 63 is mounted on an elongated pin or shaft
    to permit the wheel to slide laterally while running on the trolley-wire.


CLS 191/63.3
TXT The trolley-wheel under subclass 63 is mounted in the harp or on a pin, so
    as to permit free universal movement of the wheel.


CLS 191/63.4
TXT The supporting-pins under subclass 63 for the trolley-harps are mounted so
    as to permit up and down or rear and forward movement of the pins in the
    harps.


CLS 191/63.5
TXT Devices under subclass 63 for fastening trolley-wheel pins or axles in the
    trolley-harps.


CLS 191/64
TXT That portion of the trolley under subclass 50 connecting the head to the
    stand or erecting means.


CLS 191/65
TXT Trolley poles under subclass 64 constituting a framed structure, generally
    a plurality of simple poles braced together.  Includes the "pantagraph"
    trolley.


CLS 191/66
TXT That part of the trolley under subclass 50 which connects the pole with the
    vehicle. Generally includes means for allowing the pole to swing laterally
    or swivel and means for erecting the pole or forcing it upward toward the
    conductor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85      and 86, and indented subclasses.


CLS 191/67
TXT Trolley stands under subclass 66 wherein the erecting or operating force is
    due to fluid pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87      and 90.


CLS 191/68
TXT Trolley stands under subclass 66 wherein the erecting or operating means is
    of the mechanical spring type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85      and 86, and indented subclasses.


CLS 191/69
TXT Trolley stands under subclass 68 of the spring type wherein the operating
    spring is of the torsion type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85+,    for operating springs of the torsion type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 608+ for a resilient support comprising a
    torsion bar or bushing.


CLS 191/70
TXT Trolley stands under subclass 68 of the spring type wherein the operating
    spring is of the tension or compression type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85+,    for trolley retrievers with torsion type operating springs.


CLS 191/71
TXT Devices under subclass 50 for preventing moisture, rain, grease, etc., from
    flowing down the operating rope of the trolley.


CLS 191/72
TXT Means under subclass 50 on the vehicle associated or integral with the
    trolley and cooperating with the conductor to prevent the trolley leaving
    the conductor or to aid in its replacement.

    (1)     Note.  The retaining means are not intended to aid directly in the
    conduction of current.

    (2)     Note.  Compare subclass 53, of this class.


CLS 191/73
TXT Guards and finders under subclass 72 which are always operative.  They have
    no inoperative position.


CLS 191/74
TXT Trolley guards and finders under subclass 73 of the constantly operative
    type having but one position.  They are fixed or immovable in reference to
    the trolley.


CLS 191/75
TXT Trolley guards and finders under subclass 73 of the constantly operative
    type consisting of conical members placed at the side of the regular
    trolley wheel and coaxial therewith.  The surfaces of these cones are
    provided with spiral grooves leading toward the regular wheel, so that the
    displaced wire falling upon the conical member will be carried back onto
    the wheel.


CLS 191/76
TXT Trolley guards and finders under subclass 73 of the constantly operative
    type consisting of star or rimless spoked wheels at the side of or forming
    part of the regular trolley contactor, so that one arm or spoke of the
    guard wheel is always in operative position.


CLS 191/77
TXT Trolley guards and finders under subclass 72 normally held in operative
    position but capable of being moved into an inoperative position.


CLS 191/78
TXT Trolley guards and finders under subclass 77 of the normally operative type
    capable of being automatically forced to the inoperative position by
    obstructions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     and indented subclasses.


CLS 191/79
TXT Trolley guards and finders under subclass 77 of the normally operative type
    capable of being moved to the inoperative position by pulling on the
    trolley rope or an auxiliary rope.


CLS 191/80
TXT Trolley guards and finders under subclass 77 of the normally operative rope
    retracted type wherein the guard or finder elements swing in planes
    substantially transverse or normal to the conductor.


CLS 191/81
TXT Guards and finders under subclass 79 of the normally operative rope
    retracted type wherein the guard or finder elements swing in planes
    substantially parallel to the conductor.


CLS 191/82
TXT Trolley guards and finders under subclass 72 held in an inoperative
    position or out of the way when the trolley occupies its normal position on
    the conductor.


CLS 191/83
TXT Trolley guards and finders under subclass 82 of the normally inoperative
    type which are automatically moved into the guarding or fishing position
    when the trolley leaves the conductor.  Includes guards that are operated
    by undue pressure upon the trolley contact.


CLS 191/84
TXT Trolley guards and finders under subclass 82 of the normally inoperative
    type which are moved into operative position by pulling on the trolley rope
    or an auxiliary rope.


CLS 191/85
TXT Trolley modifications or attachments for trolleys under subclass 45 for
    causing the trolley to move downward, so as to avoid fouling the conductor
    system when the trolley leaves the conductor.


CLS 191/86
TXT Trolley retrievers under subclass 85 wherein the erecting force is released
    when the trolley leaves the conductor, thus allowing the trolley to drop.


CLS 191/87
TXT Trolley retrievers under subclass 86 of the erector release type wherein
    the erecting force of the trolley is fluid pressure, which pressure is
    released when the trolley leaves the conductor, thus allowing the trolley
    to drop.


CLS 191/88
TXT Trolley retrievers under subclass 86 of the erector release type wherein
    the normally tensioned erecting spring is rendered ineffective by a
    shortening of its lever arm or is released when the trolley leaves the
    conductor, thus allowing the trolley to drop.


CLS 191/89
TXT Trolley retrievers under subclass 88 of the erector spring release type
    wherein the erecting spring is normally tensioned by a toggle, which toggle
    is broken when the trolley leaves the conductor, thus allowing the trolley
    to drop.


CLS 191/90
TXT Trolley retrievers under subclass 85 wherein there is a fluid pressure
    motor which overcomes the erecting motor and retracts the trolley when it
    leaves the conductor.  The erecting motor may be of any type--spring,
    weight, fluid, etc.


CLS 191/91
TXT Trolley retrievers under subclass 85 wherein there is a spring motor which
    overcomes the erecting motor and retracts the trolley, the holding or
    restraining means of the retracting motor being tripped or set in operation
    when the trolley leaves the conductor.


CLS 191/92
TXT Trolley retrievers under subclass 91 of the spring retracted type wherein
    the spring motor operates through the medium of the trolley rope and is set
    in operation by the sudden acceleration of the latter upon the trolley
    leaving the conductor.


CLS 191/93
TXT Trolley retrievers under subclass 92 of the spring retracted rope actuated
    type wherein the trolley rope is kept taut, but allowed to follow the
    undulations of the conductor, and wherein the retracting spring motor is
    set in immediate operation by the sudden acceleration of the trolley rope
    upon the trolley leaving the wire.

    (1)     Note.  This means automatically cuts short the upward spring of the
    trolley when it leaves the wire and rapidly draws it downward to a position
    below the conductor.


CLS 191/94
TXT Trolley retrievers under subclass 85 wherein the retracting motor comprises
    a suspended weight whose restraining means is tripped or set in operation
    upon the collector leaving the conductor.  Includes the means with or
    without slack take-up mechanism.


CLS 191/95
TXT Collectors under subclass 45 of the trolley type provided with automatic
    mechanism operating to stop the rise of the collector upon its leaving the
    conductor.  The trolley is merely prevented from rising; it is not
    retracted.  When the device acts through the agency of the trolley-rope, it
    is generally provided with a slack take-up.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

     93.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclass 291 and
    indented subclasses.


CLS 192/
TTL CLUTCHES AND POWER-STOP  CONTROL

CLS 192/
TXT I.      This class includes clutches, combinations including vortex flow
    drive and clutch, vortex flow drive and brake, clutch and brake, and clutch
    and gear; and also includes mechanism for joint control of transmission and
    clutch, and transmission and brake.

    II.     This class includes the control of those various power-transmission
    means, motors, and brakes the motions of which occur at the completion of a
    cycle of operations or which are due to contact with the material handled
    by the machine or to the defective action of the parts of the machine
    operated or to such operations as arise from the initiation of measures for
    the safety of the operator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses, especially
    640+ for clutches or brakes and clutches used to modify or control a
    gearing organization, where specific gearing structure is claimed.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 6.2+ for various clutch and brake
    arrangements providing for steering by driving, where some specific
    steering by driving vehicle structure is claimed.

    188,    Brakes, appropriate subclasses for motor vehicle mounted brakes
    used in association with clutches, where the clutch is not claimed.

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), appropriate subclasses, for the
    starting and stopping of a selective cutting machine in response to various
    predetermined conditions; especially subclass 21 for means to stop after a
    given number of operations, and subclass 51 for unicyclic or nonrepeat
    drive means.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 257+ for a clutch in a
    fishing reel, subclasses 264+ for a releasable coupling in a fishing reel,
    subclass 356.6 for a one-way clutch in the drive of a winder of an
    information bearing carrier, subclasses 394+ for a clutch in a reeling
    device of general use, subclasses 46.4+ for a clutch in a bobbin drive of a
    strand winding machine, and subclasses 545+ for a clutch in the drive on a
    convolute winding machine in which particular winding or unwinding
    structure is specified.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclass 210 for damping or braking a slit
    exposure scanning carriage.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 69, for rotary
    expansible chamber devices combined with a nominally claimed clutch device.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, appropriate
    subclasses, for clutches or brakes and clutches used to modify or control a
    planetary gearing organization.

     477,   Interrelated Power Delivery Controls, Including Engine Control, for
    interrelated control between an engine and a transmission, clutch, or brake.

    III.    This class is also the generic locus for clutches and brakes, and
    subclasses 21.5 and 107+ include both clutches and brakes of the subject
    matter therein classified.


CLS 192/3.21
TXT Apparatus comprising the combination of a clutch under the class definition
    and a device described in (1) Note below as a "Vortex-Flow Drive".

    (1)     Note.  For the purposes of this subclass (3.21) and subclass 3.34
    below, a "Vortex-Flow Drive" is defined as a device for transmitting torque
    from a first, rotating shaft to a second, coaxial rotatable shaft, to which
    shafts are secured shroud elements, each of which is generally concave
    (e.g., hemispherical or hemitoroidal) and provided with generally radial
    vanes secured within the concavity, the elements being capable of rotation
    relative to one another, but together forming a spheroidal or toroidal
    enclosure for a mass of liquid material, in which device rotation of the
    first shaft (and of the vanes carried thereby) causes particles of the
    liquid mass to circulate in a small circle that lies in a plane coincident
    with (or parallel to) the axis of rotation of the shafts and simultaneously
    circulate in a larger circle that lies in a plane at right angles to said
    axis, which circulation of the mass causes rotation of the second shaft as
    the vanes carried thereby are moved by the fluid.

    (2)     Note.  The device termed herein "Vortex-Flow Drive", is known in
    the art by such names as "fluid drive", "fluid coupling", "fluid flywheel",
    "torque converter", and "hydrokinetic torque transformer", among others.
    Such devices generally fall into one of two categories.  In one of these
    (e.g, "fluid coupling") the angular velocity of the driven shroud element
    referred to in (1) Note cannot be greater than that of the driving element
    (and is usually less due to slippage); thus the torque is not increased.
    In the other category (e.g., "torque converter") an additional,
    radially-vaned element is interposed in the flow of fluid to modify
    direction of movement and velocity in the fluid and thereby change the
    torque transmitted from the first shaft to the second shaft.

    (3)     Note.  A combination of vortex-flow drive and clutch which, per se,
    is classified in this subclasses (3.21+) is properly classified in Class 74
    or Class 475 if gearing is also recited in the claims.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for an assemblage of mechanical and fluent material clutches.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 330+ for a "vortex-flow drive" device, per
    se.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 730 for the combination of
    vortex-flow drive and gearing; and see (3) Note above.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses 31+,
    for fluid drive and control in planetary gear transmission; and see (3)
    Note above.


CLS 192/3.22
TXT Device under subclass 3.21 including a rotated input shaft that drives the
    combination (i.e., the vortex-flow drive plus the clutch), and a rotatable
    output shaft which may be driven by said combination in a first direction
    of rotation, and provided with means to change the direction of rotation of
    said output shaft while the input shaft continues to rotate in its original
    direction.

    (1)     Note.  The shafts referred to in the definition above are not
    necessarily those referred to in the definition of "Vortex-Flow Drive", as
    found in (1) Note to the definition of subclass 3.21.  If, in a particular
    disclosure, a shaft serves both as an "input" or "output" shaft as defined
    in this subclass (3.22) and as a shaft defined in subclass 3.21, such
    occurrence is coincident rather than significant.

    (2)     Note.  The "means" referred to above may comprise a second clutch,
    or a brake, or structure to reverse the flow of fluid within the
    vortex-flow drive.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 730.1+ for torque reversal
    means inherent in a combination of fluid drive and gearing.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses 31+,
    for fluid drive and control in planetary gear transmission.


CLS 192/3.23
TXT Device under subclass 3.21 further provided with a brake.

    (1)     Note.  The term "brake" is intended to refer to that device
    classified, per se, in Class 188, Brakes.  This subclass and this note are
    not intended to change the line between Class 188 and Class 192 involving
    Brakes and Clutches.

    (2)     Note.  For a line between Classes 188 and 192 with respect to a
    patent to a vortex-flow drive plus a brake, without a clutch, see (2) Note
    to subclass 3.34 below.


CLS 192/3.24
TXT Device under subclass 3.23 wherein either the clutch or the brake (but not
    both simultaneously) is in functioning relationship.

    (1)     Note.  For the purposes of this subclass (3.24) a clutch is
    "functioning" when it is effective to transmit force, and a brake is
    "functioning" when it is effective to retard motion.


CLS 192/3.25
TXT Device under subclass 3.21 including at least two "Vortex-Flow Drives", or
    at least two clutches.


CLS 192/3.26
TXT Device under subclass 3.25 including at least two clutches that are in
    force-transmitting, relationship at the same time.


CLS 192/3.27
TXT Device under subclass 3.25 including two clutches wherein either a first or
    a second of the clutches (but not both simultaneously) is in
    force-transmitting relationship.

    (1)     Note.  The patents in this subclass usually disclose only two
    clutches in combination with a vortex-flow drive. A patent claiming a
    vortex-flow drive and only two clutches that are alternatively operable is
    proper as an original patent for this subclass even though it may disclose
    more than two clutches.


CLS 192/3.28
TXT Device under subclass 3.21 wherein engagement of the clutch causes the
    first, rotating shaft and the second, rotated shaft of the vortex-flow
    drive to be effectively secured together so that all rotation of the first
    shaft is transmitted to the second shaft in 1:1 ratio.


CLS 192/3.29
TXT Device under subclass 3.28 provided with means for causing engagement and
    disengagement of the drive-lockup clutch, which means is actuated by force
    applied via a liquid or gaseous medium.

    (1)     Note.  The fluid pressure that actuates the clutch-operator means
    may be derived from the toroidal flow of the vortex-flow drive or may be
    derived from a secondary source of fluid pressure as in subclass 3.3
    hereunder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.33,   for a fluid-pressure operator to engage a clutch other than a
    drive-lockup clutch) that is combined with a vortex-flow drive.

    85+,    for a fluid-pressure operator to actuate a clutch, in general.


CLS 192/3.3
TXT Combination under subclass 3.29 provided with means, other than the
    vortex-flow drive, that generates the force in the medium.


CLS 192/3.31
TXT Device under subclass 3.28 provided with means for causing engagement and
    disengagement of the clutch and wherein the means is actuated upon the
    attainment of a predetermined angular velocity of one of the shafts of the
    vortex-flow drive.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.33,   for a fluid-pressure operator which may be inherently
    speed-responsive, and see (1) Note there.

    87.12,  for a speed-responsive fluid-pressure operator in a device having
    multiple clutches.


CLS 192/3.32
TXT Device under subclass 3.21 wherein either the vortex-flow drive or the
    clutch (but not both simultaneously is in force-transmitting relationship.


CLS 192/3.33
TXT Device under subclass 3.21 provided with means for causing engagement of
    the clutch, which means is actuated by force applied via a liquid or
    gaseous medium.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the patents in this subclass (3.33) disclose the
    fluid pressure for actuating the clutch to be derived from the toroidal
    flow of the vortex-flow drive.  It is inherent in such disclosures that the
    clutch engagement is speed responsive.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.29+,  for a fluid-pressure operator to actuate a vortex-flow drive-lockup
    clutch.


CLS 192/3.34
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the mechanism for control of
    power includes a brake and a device described in (1) Note of subclass 3.21
    of this class (192).

    (1)     Note.  The term "brake" is intended to refer to that device
    classified, per se, in Class 188, Brakes.  This subclass and this note are
    not intended to change the line between Class 188 and Class 192 involving
    brakes and clutches, in general.  It should be further noted that Class 188
    (particularly subclass 296) is the locus of patents to a "fluid brake",
    wherein the structure is superficially similar to a vortex-flow drive as
    described in (1) Note of subclass 3.21 above.  However, in the disclosures
    found in Class 188 subclass 296, one of the elements is fixed to its
    supporting structure to retard rotation of the other element.

    (2)     Note.  The line between this class (192) and Class 60, Power Plants
    is not intended to be changed as a result of the establishment of this
    subclass (3.34).  This subclass (3.34) is intended as the locus of patents
    to a vortex-flow drive plus a brake applied to either the first or second
    shaft of such drive (as described in (1) Note of subclass 3.21).  Class 60
    particularly subclasses 330+ is intended as the locus of patents to a
    device similar to that described in that (1) Note, wherein a brake is
    applied to the additional, interposed element described in that (1) Note.
    (The interposed element is known in the art as a "reactor member").

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 330+; and see (2) Note, above.

    188,    Brakes, subclass 296; and see (1) Note, above.


CLS 192/3.51
TXT Device under the class definition including means to determine the
    operational mode of a clutch structure and including means to determine the
    ratio of a multi-ratio motion transmitting mechanism.


CLS 192/3.52
TXT Device under subclass 3.51 wherein the multi-ratio motion transmitting
    mechanism controlled is of the type wherein an element called a planet
    member rotates about an axis, which axis revolves about a second axis, in
    which the rotation and the revolution may or not be simultaneous; and
    wherein the clutch structure controlled is functional to transmit motion
    directly and by-pass the multi-ratio motion transmitting mechanisms.


CLS 192/3.53
TXT Device under subclass 3.52 including means adapted to be engaged by the
    foot of an operative to determine the output of the transmission to rotate
    oppositely to the input.


CLS 192/3.54
TXT Device under subclass 3.51 wherein the means used to determine the
    operational mode of the clutch is also used to determine the ratio of the
    transmission.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.63,   for structure including a clutch control and a transmission control
    interrelated so that one must be in a prescribed position before the other
    will function.


CLS 192/3.55
TXT Device under subclass 3.54 wherein a clutch member is moved relative to a
    cooperating member into or out of motion transmitting engagement therewith
    by energy originating at a source other than an operative.


CLS 192/3.56
TXT Device under subclass 3.55 wherein the clutch member is moved relative to
    the cooperating member by the attracting force of an electrically induced
    magnetic field in one member acting on ferrous-like material in the other
    member (or on structure connected to the members).


CLS 192/3.57
TXT Device under subclass 3.55 wherein the clutch member is moved relative to
    the cooperating member by the action of a pressurized flowable medium
    acting on one of the members (or on structure connected thereto).


CLS 192/3.58
TXT Device under 3.57 including structure for conducting electrical current
    which is regulated responsive to the mode/ratio determining means to, in
    turn, regulate the flow of the clutch operating medium.


CLS 192/3.59
TXT Device under subclass 3.57 including provision to reduce the pressure on a
    portion of one of the members (or structure connected thereto) so that
    atmospheric pressure serves to moves that member relatively to the other
    member.


CLS 192/3.61
TXT Device under subclass 3.54 wherein the multi-ratio motion transmitting
    mechanism is of a type capable of operation in a limited number of
    specific, exactly proportional relationships.


CLS 192/3.62
TXT Device under subclass 3.61 wherein the common control includes means
    adapted to be gripped by the hand of an operator.


CLS 192/3.63
TXT Device under subclass 3.51 wherein the operation of one of the control
    means is dependent on the operational characteristics of the other control
    means.


CLS 192/4
TXT Combinations under class definition for joint operation and control of
    transmission and braking mechanisms.


CLS 192/5
TXT Mechanism under subclass 4 in which the brake is applied when the
    transmission is impelled in the reverse direction.


CLS 192/6
TXT Mechanism under subclass 5 in which the transmission and brake mechanisms
    act on the same member, called the "hub".


CLS 192/7
TXT Mechanism under subclass 4 in which the action of the brake is more or less
    completely automatic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15      and 16, for similar mechanisms in which a clutch is the
    transmission member.


CLS 192/8
TXT Mechanism under subclass 7 in which the braking action occurs upon the
    failure of the driving mechanism.


CLS 192/9
TXT Mechanism under subclass 4 in which either the transmission or brake, or
    both, are operated electrically.


CLS 192/10
TXT Mechanism under subclass 4 in which the transmission element is a belt, the
    brake being applied upon the shifting of the belt.


CLS 192/11
TXT Mechanism under subclass 4, in which the transmission element is a belt,
    the brake being applied upon the slackening of the driving-belt.


CLS 192/12
TXT Mechanism under class definition in which a clutch or brake is applied
    alternately to drive and retard or stop the mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8+,     where the brake is applied automati- cally on the breaking of a
    belt.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclass 291 for a fluid-resistance brake having a clutch
    between the brake and a rotating load to connect and disconnect the brake
    from the load.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 300, 318, 347, and 366 for apparatus for hauling or hoisting a
    load, including at least one cable-pulling drum which is driven around its
    rotational axis by a drive having a clutch mechanism with coaxial,
    rotatable, relatively shiftable axially, power-transmitting components; the
    clutch mechanism is linked to and is operationally influenced by a
    frictional brake assembly which retards the rotation of the drum.


CLS 192/13
TXT Combinations of clutch and brake under subclass 12 adapted for use in
    propelling and retarding vehicles.


CLS 192/14
TXT Combinations under subclass 12 in which the clutch and brake are the same
    member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for brakes which are automatically applied when drive through the
    clutch ceases.


CLS 192/15
TXT Combinations under subclass 12 in which the brake is applied automatically
    when drive through the clutch ceases.


CLS 192/16
TXT Combinations under subclass 15 in which the clutch and brake are the same
    member.


CLS 192/17
TXT Combinations under subclass 12 in which the brake is applied transversely
    to the periphery of a wheel.


CLS 192/18
TXT Combinations under subclass 12 in which both the clutch and brake move
    parallel to the axis of motion.


CLS 192/19
TXT Combinations under subclass 12 in which the clutch and brake are operated
    by the crank that drives the shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    for follow up type clutch operators.


CLS 192/20
TXT Clutches under class definition in which the clutch is associated with a
    gear that is instrumental simply in completing the operation of the clutch.


CLS 192/21
TXT Clutches under subclass 20 in which the gearing completes the reversal of
    the clutch.


CLS 192/21.5
TXT Devices under the class definition wherein torque is transmitted or
    absorbed between two relatively movable members having a medium there
    between and wherein the frictional characteristics of the medium are (1)
    augmented by, or (2) altered in response to a change in, a magnetic or an
    electrostatic field set up between the two members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84.1+,  for other types of electrically actuated clutches.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 92+ for
    electrodynamic torque transmitting clutches or brakes.


CLS 192/22
TXT Clutches under class definition in which the operation of a clutching or
    transmission member is accomplished through a latch or relatively
    stationary finger.


CLS 192/23
TXT Clutches under subclass 22 peculiarly adapted to seed-planters.


CLS 192/24
TXT Clutches under subclass 22 in which a clutching member moves parallel to
    the axis of rotation.


CLS 192/25
TXT Mechanism under subclass 24 in which the clutching member is a pin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclass 24 for clutches associated
    with cloth pulling machines.


CLS 192/26
TXT Clutches under subclass 22 in which the clutching member moves transversely
    to the axis of rotation.


CLS 192/27
TXT Clutches under subclass 26 in which the active element of the
    latch-operated mechanism is a ball or roller.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for ball and roller one-way engaging automatic clutches and see the
    notes thereto for other ball and roller clutches.


CLS 192/28
TXT Clutches under subclass 26 in which the transversely-moving clutching
    member engages positively.


CLS 192/29
TXT Clutches under subclass 28 in which the positive clutching member is a
    rotary approximately cylindrical member.


CLS 192/30
TXT Power-transmitting devices under class definition operating by friction or
    by interlocking for securing driving continuity as between two shafts or a
    pulley and a shaft or other driving and driven parts.

    (1)     Note. Class 464, in subclasses 30+, has overload release couplings
    wherein relative rotation between coupled members continues so long as an
    overload condition occurs.  The line between Class 464, subclasses 30+, and
    Class 192, subclasses 56.1+, is that Class 464 takes structure wherein
    relatively rotatable surfaces move with respect to each other during an
    overload condition; but drive through such surfaces is automatically
    reestablished, without an additional operation, upon correction of the
    overload condition.  Class 192, subclasses 56.1+, requires a further
    operation, in addition to correcting the overload condition, to reestablish
    the drive; such further operation being, for example, operator assisted
    reengagement or reduction in rotational speed of a power input member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.21+,  for a vortex-flow drive and clutch, and especially subclasses 3.28+
    for a drive-lockup clutch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 55 for a significantly
    claimed expansible chamber motor combined with a clutch in the output
    therefrom and not involving an interrelated control of the motor and clutch.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 237+ for well devices with clutches.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, subclasses 30+ for overload release coupling devices in
    accordance with the aforementioned line note.


CLS 192/31
TXT Clutches under subclass 30 which engage without manipulation upon the
    initiation of rotation of the parts to which they are attached.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 14.1+ for clutch operations due to
    unusual motions of automobile tractors.


CLS 192/32
TXT Clutches under subclass 31 the action of which is initiated by
    manipulation, upon which the engagement is completed automatically.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for one-way engaging automatic clutches that may be made operative
    or inoperative by manipulation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 82.3+ for one-way brakes which include means
    whereby the brake may be rendered inoperative to prevent retrograde motion
    of a rotating element.


CLS 192/33
TXT Clutches under subclass 32 in which the clutch is disengaged at the end of
    a cycle.


CLS 192/34
TXT Clutches under subclass 32 in which the action of engagement is completed
    by the thrust of the shaft.


CLS 192/35
TXT Clutches under subclass 32 in which the initial action is to throw in a
    pilot-clutch or other pilot mechanism, which operates to effect the
    engagement of the main clutch.


CLS 192/36
TXT Clutches under subclass 35 in which the pilot mechanism is of a brake-band
    type.


CLS 192/37
TXT Clutches under subclass 32 in which the clutching parts move transversely
    to the axis of rotation.


CLS 192/38
TXT Clutches under subclass 37 in which the transversely-moving clutching part
    is a ball or roller.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for one-way engaging automatic clutches in which the engaging
    element is a ball or roller and see the notes thereto for other ball or
    roller clutches.


CLS 192/39
TXT Clutches under subclass 37 in which the transversely-moving clutching parts
    are positively engaged.


CLS 192/40
TXT Clutches under subclass 32 in which the automatic action of the clutch is
    controlled electrically.


CLS 192/41
TXT Clutches under subclass 31 which engage in one direction of rotation
    without manipulation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48.6    and 48.92, for plural clutch-assemblages including a one-way
    engaging clutch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 111+ for mechanical
    movements, intermittent grip type, especially subclasses 144+, for lever
    mounted grip units, and see (1) Note to the definition of Class 74, and
    subclass 144 for the line between these two subclasses.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 185.1+ for internal
    combustion engine cranking mechanisms.

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 82.1+, for brakes applied to elements rotating
    relative to stationary elements to prevent retrograde rotation while
    allowing forward rotation.


CLS 192/42
TXT Clutches under subclass 41 designed to impart initial movement to an engine
    to start the same, the clutch releasing when the speed of the engine
    exceeds the starting-speed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     for manually-controlled clutches of this type.


CLS 192/43
TXT Clutches under subclass 41 adjustable to drive in either direction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclass 82.2 for one-way brakes in which the direction in
    which retrograde rotation is prevented is selectable.


CLS 192/43.1
TXT Clutches under subclass 43 in which the engaging elements are pivoted
    pawls, each set of pawls comprising a pair of oppositely-directed pivoted
    pawls, which may be an integral single member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 29+ for ratchet type bit stocks.

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 82.7+ for one-way brakes in which there is a
    pivoting or flexing detent.


CLS 192/43.2
TXT Clutches under subclass 43 in which the engaging elements are slidable
    pawls.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 29+, for ratchet type bit stocks.


CLS 192/44
TXT Clutches under subclass 43 in which the engaging elements are balls or
    rollers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for ball or roller one-way engaging clutches and see the notes
    thereto for other clutches with a ball or roller engaging element.


CLS 192/45
TXT Clutches under subclass 41 in which the engaging element is a ball or
    roller.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for latch operated clutches in which the transmitting member is a
    ball or roller.

    38,     for one-way automatic manually controlled clutches in which the
    clutching element is a ball or roller.

    44,     for one-way clutches in which the clutching element is a ball or
    roller.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 162+ for intermittent grip
    devices.

    188,    Brakes, subclass 82.84, for one-way brakes in which the engaging
    element rolls into jamming position between converging surfaces one of
    which is the rotating element to exert a braking force.


CLS 192/45.1
TXT Clutches under subclass 41 in which the engaging element is a wedging pawl
    or block.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 82.7+ for one-way brakes employing a pivoting or
    flexing detent, and subclasses 82.8+ for one-way brakes in which retrograde
    rotation of a rotating element forces a member in jamming position between
    converging surfaces one of which is the rotating element to cause a braking.


CLS 192/45.2
TXT Clutches under subclass 41 in which the engaging element has a two-point
    frictional gripping contact.


CLS 192/46
TXT Clutches under subclass 41 which positively engage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 111+ for mechanical
    movements, intermittent grip type.


CLS 192/47
TXT Clutches under subclass 41 that may be made operative or inoperative by
    manipulation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32+,    for automatic clutches in which the action is initiated by
    manipulation upon which the engagement is completed automatically.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclass 82.3 for one-way brakes with means by which it may
    be rendered inoperative to prevent retrograde motion of rotating element.


CLS 192/48.1
TXT Mechanism under subclass 31 provided with at least two clutch-assemblages
    associated together to transmit rotation from at least one rotating input
    shaft to at least one rotatable output shaft.

    (1)     Note.  A clutch-assemblage comprises all the parts that cooperate
    together to (a) connect a rotating "input" shaft (or a pulley, drum,
    flywheel, gear or other equivalent torque-transmitting member) to a
    rotatable "output" shaft (or hub, pulley, gear or other equivalent
    torque-transmitting member) that is coaxial with and driven by the input
    shaft, or (b) disconnect said shafts from rotational relationship, either
    action being performed at the will of the user of the clutch-assemblage.
    Although any clutch-assemblage is by itself a distinct entity and is
    capable of transmitting rotation from an input shaft to an output shaft,
    different clutch-assemblages may have parts in common. That is, a part may
    form one of the components of a first clutch-assemblage at one time, and
    that part may also form one of the components of a second clutch-assemblage
    at another time.  An example of a use for such an arrangement is a machine
    having an input shaft that may be clutched selectively to any of a
    plurality of output shafts by using a shiftable clutch-element first in one
    clutch-assemblage and then in another clutch-assemblage.  See subclass
    48.91 for such an arrangement.  Another common arrangement is a first
    clutch-assemblage having an output shaft that is also the input shaft of a
    second clutch-assemblage in "series" relationship.

    (2)     Note.  The term "clutch-element" as used in this and indented
    subclasses has the same meaning as the term defined and described in the
    definition and notes of subclass 70.11 below. However, whereas in subclass
    70.11 the engaging surface is usually a friction surface, in this
    subclasses (48.1+) it may be a friction surface or a toothed or gear-like
    surface or any other surface configuration that will mate with another,
    complementary surface on a second clutch-element to transmit rotation
    between the elements having such surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.26,   for a combination including a vortex-flow drive and a plurality of
    clutches.

    35+,    for a multiple-clutch arrangement in which one clutch serves as a
    pilot operator for the other.

    57,     for a combination of fluent-material clutch and mechanical clutch.

    87.1+,  for a multiple-clutch arrangement wherein the clutches are actuated
    by fluid-pressure operators.


CLS 192/48.2
TXT Device under subclass 48.1 wherein one of the associated clutch-assemblages
    is provided with clutch-elements that are mutually engaged or disengaged by
    electromagnetic energy.

    (1)     Note.  Included in the subclass are plural clutch-assemblages of
    which at least one is actuated by eddy currents, or by a field-responsive
    frictional medium, (per se, classified in subclass 21.5) or by an
    electrical operator, (per se, classified in subclasses 84.1+).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21.5    and 84.1+, and see (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 92+, for an
    eddy current clutch associated with other structure provided for in that
    schedule.


CLS 192/48.3
TXT Device under subclass 48.1 wherein one of the associated clutch-assemblages
    is different in its principle of operation from another.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of arrangements wherein the principle of operation
    is "different" include:  Arrangements wherein one clutch-assemblage is
    actuated by fluid pressure whereas another clutch-assemblage is actuated by
    mechanical linkage; arrangements wherein one clutch-assemblage uses
    clutch-elements that engage positively, as by splines, intermeshing teeth
    or ratchet-and-pawl elements, whereas another clutch-assemblage uses
    clutch-elements that engage frictionally, as by surface-to-surface contact;
    and arrangements wherein one clutch-assemblage is intended to function in
    only one direction of rotation whereas another clutch-assemblage is
    intended to transmit all torque applied thereto in either direction of
    rotation.  Minor differences in shape or size between the elements of
    clutch-assemblages, not involving differences in operation, are not
    justification for placement into this and indented subclasses.  For
    example, an arrangement of clutch-assemblages wherein one has tapered
    clutch-elements and another has disc clutch-elements or an arrangement of
    clutch-assemblages wherein one uses rollers and another uses balls, are not
    properly considered to be "diverse", but will be classified in subclasses
    48.11+ according to their plural characteristics.


CLS 192/48.4
TXT Device under subclass 48.3 provided with more than two associated
    clutch-assemblages.


CLS 192/48.5
TXT Device under subclass 48.3 wherein one of the associated clutch-assemblages
    is provided with a clutch-element that intermeshes with a mating
    clutch-element to transmit torque positively (i.e., without slipping), in
    at least one direction of rotation, from an input shaft to an output shaft.

    (1)     Note.  The clutch-assemblage defined above is also known as a
    "positive" clutch.  The other clutch-assemblage associated therewith in
    this subclass (48.5) usually has friction clutch-elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28+,    39, 46, 69+, and 71 and for a clutch, per se, of "positive" type.


CLS 192/48.6
TXT Device under subclass 48.5 wherein a second one of the associated
    clutch-assemblages is provided with clutch-elements that transmit torque
    from an input shaft to an output shaft in only one direction of rotation of
    the input shaft, which clutch-elements permit rotation in said direction of
    the output shaft relative to the input shaft.

    (1)     Note.  The clutch-assemblage herein is also known by the terms
    "Overrunning clutch", "One-way clutch" and "Free-wheeling clutch".  The
    purpose of such arrangement is to cause engagement of the clutch-elements
    when the input shaft is powered whereby the output shaft will rotate at
    least as fast as the input shaft, but to permit the output shaft to rotate
    faster than the input shaft under certain conditions of operation.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass provides for two or more clutch-assemblages,
    one of which has positively-engaging clutch-elements and another of which
    has one-way-engaging clutch-elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41+,    for a one-way-engaging clutch.

    48.92,  for plurality of one-way-engaging clutch-assemblages.


CLS 192/48.7
TXT Device under subclass 48.1 wherein two or more clutch-assemblages are
    intended to be operative simultaneously as a set, provided with means to
    ensure that one clutch-assemblage of said set has its clutch-elements fully
    engaged before another clutch-assemblage of said set has its
    clutch-elements engaged, or with means to ensure that one clutch-assemblage
    of said set has its clutch-elements fully disengaged before another
    clutch-assemblage of said set has its clutch-elements disengaged.

    (1)     Note.  The set of clutch-assemblages described above permits torque
    from an input shaft to be applied to an output shaft in stages, or
    progressively, in order to reduce stress or shock attendant upon a sudden
    application of load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52.1+   and 70.21, for other arrangements for progressively transmitting
    load from an input to an output shaft.


CLS 192/48.8
TXT Device under subclass 48.1 wherein the clutch-assemblages are provided with
    more than two shafts for input or output of torque, in any combination of
    one (or more) input shaft (s) plus two (or more) output shafts, or of two
    (or more) output shafts plus one (or more) output shaft (s).

    (1)     Note.  For the purposes of this and indented subclasses, a shaft is
    a rotating member that transmits torque; thus a gear, pulley, drum, hub,
    etc., is equivalent to a shaft.  An input shaft is such a member that is
    rotated by a source of power external to the device, and an output shaft is
    such a member that  (a) is rotated by the claimed device AND  (b) rotates a
    torque-using mechanism external to the claimed device.  Thus, if there are
    rotating members that transmit torque between the input and output shafts
    within the device they are not counted in the number "three or more"
    required for these subclasses.


CLS 192/48.9
TXT Device under subclass 48.8 wherein either a first or a second of the
    clutch-assemblages (but not both simultaneously) is in torque-transmitting
    relationship.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.27,   for the combination of a vortex-flow drive and alternatively
    operative clutches.

    87.14+, for alternatively operative clutches that are actuated by
    fluid-pressure operator means.


CLS 192/48.91
TXT Device under subclass 48.9 wherein a member rigidly carries one of the
    clutch-elements of the first clutch-assemblage and the same member rigidly
    carries one of the clutch-elements of the second clutch-assemblage.


CLS 192/48.92
TXT Device under subclass 48.1 wherein at least one of the associated
    clutch-assemblages is provided with clutch-elements that transmit torque
    from an input shaft to an output shaft in only one direction of rotation of
    the input shaft, which clutch-elements permit rotation in said direction of
    the output shaft relative to the input shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41+,    for a one-way-engaging clutch.

    48.6,   for an arrangement of a one-way-engaging clutch-assemblage and a
    "positive" clutch-assemblage.


CLS 192/49
TXT Clutches under subclass 48.1 associated to operate in connection with
    parallel vehicle-wheels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 192, for clutches driven by vehicle wheels
    and driving a winding drum used in controlling the vehicle.


CLS 192/50
TXT Clutches under subclass 49 associated to operate in connection with
    parallel vehicle-wheels, permitting either wheel to overrun.


CLS 192/51
TXT Clutches under subclass 48.1 instrumental in accomplishing the reversal of
    rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for clutches associated with gearing to accomplish a reversal in
    rotation.


CLS 192/52.1
TXT Progressive engagement:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein means are provided specifically to
    cause clutch elements to engage gradually.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48.7,   for an arrangement of two or more clutch-assemblages that engage
    (or disengage) progressively or in succession, thus transmitting (or
    releasing) torque progressively from an input shaft to an output shaft.

    70.21,  for a multiple-element clutch wherein the elements engage (or
    disengage) sequentially.


CLS 192/52.2
TXT Surface area:

    Subject matter under subclass 52.1 wherein the amount of surface area of
    one clutch element in engagement with a second clutch element increases as
    the elements move toward full engagement.


CLS 192/52.3
TXT Yielding:

    Subject matter under subclass 52.2 wherein at least one clutch element
    deforms as a result of engagement to cause an increase in the engaging
    surface area.


CLS 192/52.4
TXT Variable force:

    Subject matter under subclass 52.1 wherein an engaging force is changed
    during clutch engagement in order to provide gradual engagement of the
    clutch.


CLS 192/52.5
TXT Initial engagement causes increase in applied force:

    Subject matter under subclass 52.4 wherein initial clutch engagement causes
    relative rotation of a mechanism to increase the applied force.


CLS 192/52.6
TXT Yielding:

    Subject matter under subclass 52.1 wherein at least one clutch element
    deforms as a result of engagement to cause gradual engagement while the
    contacting surface area remains constant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for a subcombination of a clutch which is axially compressible.


CLS 192/53.1
TXT Frictional and positive:

    Subject matter under subclass 52.1 wherein after a preliminary slipping
    engagement of friction elements, positive clutch elements intermesh to
    transmit torque without slip.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclass 68, for similar action in brakes.


CLS 192/53.2
TXT Magnetic or electromagnetic operated friction clutch:

    Subject matter under subclass 53.1 wherein the slipping engagement is
    produced by the force of a magnet or electromagnet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84+,    for clutches engaged by electromagnetic force.


CLS 192/53.3
TXT With blocker:

    Subject matter under subclass 53.1 wherein structure is provided to resist
    or delay movement of a shiftable positive clutch element into full
    engagement to facilitate synchronization.

    (1)     Note. Clutches in subclasses 53.3+ are typically synchronizer
    clutches for use in transmissions to facilitate shifting from one gear
    ratio to another, and classification in these subclasses is proper even if
    one clutch element is claimed as a gear.

    (2)     Note.Where parallel transmission shafts and cooperating gears are
    claimed, classification in Class 74, subclasses 325+ is proper.


CLS 192/53.31
TXT Self-energizing:

    Subject matter under subclass 53.3 wherein a cam structure is provided to
    increase the clamping force of friction elements after an initial
    engagement of the friction elements.


CLS 192/53.32
TXT Interposed friction member:

    Subject matter under subclass 53.3 wherein frictional engagement is
    provided by at least three friction elements with at least one friction
    element being sandwiched between adjacent elements.

    (1)     Note. The friction elements here are generally in the form of discs
    or frustocones.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70.11+, for a multiple friction element clutch assemblage, per se.


CLS 192/53.33
TXT Member extending axially between friction surfaces:

    Subject matter under subclass 53.3 wherein there are plural friction
    elements connected to at least one axially extending member which
    cooperates with a radially extending portion of a shift sleeve to perform a
    blocking function.


CLS 192/53.331
TXT Blocker on axially extending stepped pin:

    Subject matter under subclass 53.33 wherein at least one axially extending
    member has a substantially circular cross-section and the cross-section has
    a diameter that varies along the length of the axially extending member.


CLS 192/53.332
TXT Resilient detent pin:

    Subject matter under subclass 53.331 further including at least one axially
    extending resilient member offset circumferentially from the stepped pin to
    cooperate with an opening in the shift sleeve to define at least one
    position of the shift sleeve.

    (1)     Note. These members are typically themselves yieldable or are made
    up of separate sections biased apart by a distinct resilient element.


CLS 192/53.34
TXT Outward tooth or lug on friction member:

    Subject matter under subclass 53.3 wherein the blocker includes at least
    one lug or tooth carried by a friction element in which said lug or tooth
    projects radially outward of the rotational axis.


CLS 192/53.341
TXT With thrust member:

    Subject matter under subclass 53.34 wherein the shiftable positive clutch
    element carries a keylike strut member for imparting axial force to the
    friction element.


CLS 192/53.342
TXT Resilient thrust bar:

    Subject matter under subclass 53.341 wherein the keylike strut member is
    made of a yieldable material.


CLS 192/53.343
TXT Resilient expander ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 53.341 wherein the keylike strut member is
    biased radially outward relative to the rotation axis by at least one
    substantially circular spring ring.


CLS 192/53.35
TXT Inward tooth or lug on friction member:

    Subject matter under subclass 53.3 wherein the blocker includes at least
    one lug or tooth carried by the friction element in which said lug or tooth
    projects radially toward the rotational axis.


CLS 192/53.36
TXT Radially movable blocker:

    Subject matter under subclass 53.3 wherein the blocker has a component of
    movement which is transverse or oblique to the axis of rotation to allow
    the shiftable positive clutch element to pass into its engaged position.


CLS 192/53.361
TXT Detent acts as blocker:

    Subject matter under subclass 53.3 wherein the radially movable blocker
    comprises structure which is provided to define a disengaged position of
    the shiftable positive clutch element.


CLS 192/53.362
TXT Rocker lever actuates friction clutch:

    Subject matter under subclass 53.361 wherein the detent is formed by or
    carried by a generally radially disposed pin which is pivotally mounted at
    its radially inner end to an input or output shaft and is releasably
    connected at its radially outer end to the shiftable positive clutch
    element; and wherein axial movement of the shiftable element causes the pin
    to tilt and force frictional surfaces into engagement; further shifting of
    the element, and engagement of the positive clutch elements, being resisted
    by the releasable connection until synchronization is achieved.


CLS 192/53.363
TXT Radially movable friction element acts as
     blocker:

    Subject matter under subclass 53.36 wherein one of the friction elements
    has a component of movement transverse to the axis of rotation to allow the
    shiftable positive clutch element to pass into its engaged position.


CLS 192/53.364
TXT Resilient friction element:

    Subject matter under subclass 53.363 wherein the transversely moving
    friction element is formed by a resilient ringlike member substantially
    concentric to the clutch rotational axis.


CLS 192/53.4
TXT Lock for positive clutch:

    Subject matter under subclass 53.1 wherein structure is provided to prevent
    inadvertent disengagement of the intermeshed positive elements.

    (1)     Note. The structure here can be the configuration of the positive
    clutch teeth or a separate device to maintain the positive clutch in
    engagement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114+,   for element-locking means, per se.


CLS 192/53.5
TXT Axially projecting positive clutch:

    Subject matter under subclass 53.1 wherein at least one of the positive
    clutch elements includes at least one tooth or lug projecting axially from
    an end face thereof.

    (1)     Note. Devices in this subclass do not include a blocker.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69+,    for axially engaging positive clutches, per se.


CLS 192/53.51
TXT Cylindrical pin:

    Subject matter under subclass 53.5 wherein the tooth or lug has a
    substantially circular cross-sectional shape.


CLS 192/53.6
TXT Transversely moving positive clutch:

    Subject matter under subclass 53.1 wherein at least one of the positive
    clutch elements has a component of engaging movement transverse to the axis
    of rotation.

    (1)     Note. Devices in this subclass do not include a blocker.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for transversely engaging clutches, per se.


CLS 192/54.1
TXT Torque responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein the transmission of torque from a
    clutch input shaft to a clutch output shaft is affected by the torsional
    strain on one of the shafts.

    (1)     Note.Class 464, in subclasses 30+, has overload release couplings
    wherein relative rotation between coupled members continues so long as an
    overload condition occurs.  The line between Class 464, subclasses 30+, and
    Class 192, subclasses 56.1+, is that Class 464 takes structure wherein
    relatively rotatable surfaces move with respect to each other during an
    overload condition; but drive through such surfaces is automatically
    reestablished, without an additional operation, upon correction of the
    overload condition.  Class 192, subclasses 56.1+, requires a further
    operation, in addition to correcting the overload condition, to reestablish
    the drive; such further operation being, for example, operator assisted
    reengagement or reduction in rotational speed of a power input member.


CLS 192/54.2
TXT Hub clutch:

    Subject matter under subclass 54.1 wherein the clutch engages a wheel hub
    to a selectively driven axle (e.g., in a four-wheel drive vehicle).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69.4,   for positive engaging wheel hub clutches, per se.


CLS 192/54.3
TXT Fluid operated:

    Subject matter under subclass 54.1 wherein the clutch is moved either to an
    engaged or disengaged position by hydraulic or pneumatic pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85+,    for fluid pressure operators, per se.


CLS 192/54.4
TXT Magnetic or electromagnetic:

    Subject matter under subclass 54.1 wherein the clutch is moved either to an
    engaged or disengaged position by a permanent magnet or an electromagnetic
    coil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84+,    for a magnetic or electromagnetic operator, per se.


CLS 192/54.5
TXT Cam operated:

    Subject matter under subclass 54.1 wherein the torsional strain causes
    movement of an inclined surface relative to a cooperating structure to
    affect engagement of the clutch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93+,    for a cam operator, per se.


CLS 192/54.51
TXT Screw operated:

    Subject matter under subclass 54.5 wherein the torsional strain causes
    movement of a helical thread spline relative to a cooperating structure to
    affect engagement of the clutch.


CLS 192/54.52
TXT Ball  or roller type:

    Subject matter under subclass 54.5 wherein the inclined surface contacts a
    sphere or cylinder.


CLS 192/55.1
TXT With overload release coupling:

    Subject matter under subclass 54.1 having structure in the torque
    transmission path which permits continuous relative rotation between the
    input and output shafts, without disengaging the clutch upon occurrence of
    a torque overload.

    (1)     Note. This subclass includes the combination of a selectively
    engageable clutch and an overload slip coupling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52.3    and 52.6, for clutches in which one element yields as the clutch
    engages to cause gradual engagement.

    56.1+,  for clutches which disengage upon overload.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings and Flexible Couplings for Rotary
    Shafts, subclasses 30+, for a flexible coupling wherein means is provided
    for transmitting torque between input and output members so as to
    accommodate relative rotation between said members when resistance to
    rotation of said output member exceeds a predetermined value, said means
    including either (a) a device which is designed to rupture when said
    resistance to rotation exceeds said predetermined value, or (b) a device
    which slips or disengages when said resistance to rotation exceeds said
    predetermined value but which automatically reengages without operator
    intervention or other additional operation when said resistance to rotation
    no longer exceeds said predetermined value.


CLS 192/55.2
TXT With flexible shaft coupling permitting limited relative rotation:

    Subject matter under subclass 54.1 having structure in the torque
    transmission path which permits limited relative rotation between the input
    and output shafts in order to absorb torque variations.

    (1)     Note. This subclass and subclasses indented thereunder include the
    combination of a selectively engageable clutch and a flexible shaft
    coupling.  Classification in this subclass requires more than mere nominal
    recitation of a clutch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70.17,  for clutches having interposed mating clutch elements including
    recoilably yieldable means permitting a limited degree of variation between
    the rotation of a shaft and the rotation of a member supported thereby.

    200+,   for a subcombination comprising a clutch element resiliently
    mounted on a hub.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings and Flexible Couplings for Rotary
    Shafts, appropriate subclasses for flexible shaft couplings, per se.


CLS 192/55.3
TXT Separate resilient member between clutch element and its shaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 55.2 wherein the structure which permits
    limited relative rotation is a coupling separate from the engaging clutch
    elements and includes at least one resiliently yieldable member.


CLS 192/55.4
TXT Fluid damper:

    Subject matter under subclass 55.3 wherein the resilience of the
    resiliently yieldable member or members is provided by compressing a liquid
    or gas or by forcing a liquid or gas through a restriction (e.g., a
    dashpot).


CLS 192/55.5
TXT Coil spring coaxial with rotation axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 55.3 wherein at least one yieldable member is
    comprised of an elongated elastic element coiled about a center line which
    substantially coincides with the axis of the clutch.


CLS 192/55.51
TXT Radially overlapping convolutions:

    Subject matter under subclass 55.5 wherein the coils of the elongated
    element overlie each other substantially in a plane transverse to the
    rotational axis of the clutch.


CLS 192/55.6
TXT Plural resilient members:

    Subject matter under subclass 55.3 including plural resiliently yieldable
    members.


CLS 192/55.61
TXT Coil springs with center line spaced from rotational axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 55.6 wherein each of the resiliently
    yieldable members is comprised of an elongated elastic element coiled about
    a center line other than the rotational axis of the clutch.


CLS 192/55.62
TXT Center line of coil springs parallel to rotational axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 55.61 wherein each of the elongated resilient
    or elastic members is coiled about a center line that is substantially
    parallel to the rotational axis of the clutch.


CLS 192/55.7
TXT Coil spring with center line spaced from rotational axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 55.3 wherein there is a single resiliently
    yieldable member comprised of an elongated resilient or elastic element
    coiled about a center line other than the rotational axis of the clutch.


CLS 192/56.1
TXT Overload release:

    Subject matter under subclass 54.1 wherein engaged clutch elements,
    coupling input and output shafts of a selectively engageable clutch,
    release or slip when subjected to an excessive torsional strain on one of
    the shafts.

    (1)     Note. See the line note in subclass 54.1 for the line between Class
    192 and Class 464.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55.1,   for structure in the drive-line of the clutch which slips on
    overload while the clutch remains engaged (e.g., the combination of a
    clutch and overload coupling).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, subclasses 32+ for structure wherein torque transmission is
    disrupted by breakage of a frangible element that may be replaced.


CLS 192/56.2
TXT Coil:

    Subject matter under subclass 56.1 wherein one of the clutch elements is a
    helically coiled resilient device which frictionally engages the other
    clutch element to transmit torque.


CLS 192/56.3
TXT Fluid operated clutch:

    Subject matter under subclass 56.1 wherein the clutch elements are moved to
    or held in either an engaged or released condition by means of a liquid or
    gas under pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85+,    for fluid activated clutches, per se.


CLS 192/56.31
TXT Axially engaged:

    Subject matter under subclass 56.3 wherein movement of the clutch elements
    to the engaged condition is in a direction parallel to the rotation axis of
    the clutch.


CLS 192/56.32
TXT Positive:

    Subject matter under subclass 56.31 wherein the clutch elements have
    formations thereon which intermesh to transmit torque without slip.


CLS 192/56.33
TXT Ball or roller:

    Subject matter under subclass 56.32 wherein at least one of the formations
    is a spherical or generally cylindrical member.


CLS 192/56.4
TXT Magnetic or electromagnetic:

    Subject matter under subclass 56.1 wherein the clutch elements are moved to
    or held in either an engaged or released condition by means of at least one
    permanent magnet or electromagnetic coil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84+,    for magnetically or electromagnetically operated clutches, per se.


CLS 192/56.41
TXT Axially engaged:

    Subject matter under subclass 56.4 wherein movement of the clutch elements
    to the engaged condition is in a direction parallel to the rotation axis of
    the clutch.


CLS 192/56.42
TXT Positive:

    Subject matter under subclass 56.41 wherein the clutch elements have
    formations thereon which intermesh to transmit torque without slip.


CLS 192/56.43
TXT Ball or roller:

    Subject matter under subclass 56.42 wherein at least one of the formations
    is a spherical or generally cylindrical member.


CLS 192/56.5
TXT Clutch elements remain disengaged after overload corrected:

    Subject matter under subclass 56.1 wherein the clutch elements release from
    engagement when subjected to excessive torsional strain and remain released
    after the excessive torsional strain is reduced.


CLS 192/56.51
TXT Having separate latch to hold clutch elements disengaged:

    Subject matter under subclass 56.5 having a spring biased detent or pivoted
    pawl which positively engages another member to prevent the clutch elements
    from reengaging until reset by an operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for locking devices, per se.

    150,    for overload release mechanism, per se.


CLS 192/56.52
TXT Axially engaged:

    Subject matter under subclass 56.51 wherein movement of the clutch elements
    to the engaged condition is in a direction parallel to the rotation axis of
    the clutch.


CLS 192/56.53
TXT Positive:

    Subject matter under subclass 56.52 wherein the clutch elements have
    formations thereon which intermesh to transmit torque without slip.


CLS 192/56.54
TXT Ball or roller:

    Subject matter under subclass 56.53 wherein at least one of the formations
    is a spherical or generally cylindrical member.


CLS 192/56.55
TXT Axially engaged:

    Subject matter under subclass 56.5 wherein movement of the clutch elements
    to the engaged condition is in a direction parallel to the rotation axis of
    the clutch.


CLS 192/56.56
TXT Positive:

    Subject matter under subclass 56.55 wherein the clutch elements have
    formations thereon which intermesh to transmit torque without slip.


CLS 192/56.57
TXT Ball or roller:

    Subject matter under subclass 56.56 wherein at least one of the formations
    is a spherical or generally cylindrical member.


CLS 192/56.6
TXT Axially engaged:

    Subject matter under subclass 56.1 wherein movement of the clutch elements
    to the engaged condition is in a direction parallel to the rotation axis of
    the clutch.


CLS 192/56.61
TXT Positive:

    Subject matter under subclass 56.6 wherein the clutch elements have
    formations thereon which intermesh to transmit torque without slip.


CLS 192/56.62
TXT Ball or roller:

    Subject matter under subclass 56.61 wherein at least one of the formations
    is a spherical or generally cylindrical member.


CLS 192/57
TXT Clutches under subclass 30 include an ordinary friction or other
    mechanically clutching part combined with a clutch in which the resisting
    part is enveloped in the clutching material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.21+,  for a combination of vortex-flow drive and clutch.

    48.1+,  for other plural clutch-assemblages.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclass 271 for a surface- friction brake combined with a
    fluid- resistance brake.


CLS 192/58.1
TXT Fluent material:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 in which a clutching medium envelopes at
    least one of a pair of clutch members and is a fluid or any substance the
    particles of which readily flow over each other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 330+ for fluid couplings which include the
    transmission of torque through kinetic forces resulting from acceleration
    and deceleration of the fluid effective between the driving and driven
    elements of the coupling.  Where the driven element includes a fluid
    channel or space between vanes which communicates with regions of the
    driving element which are maintained at different fluid pressures or are
    moving at different velocities, the resulting forces are considered kinetic
    and such structures are found in Class 60.

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 266+ for a similar structure used as a brake.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings and Flexible Couplings for Rotary
    Shafts, subclasses 24+ for a flexible coupling wherein a liquid or gas is
    used to affect the coupling, and see the line note with Class 192 under the
    class definition of Class 464.


CLS 192/58.2
TXT Fluid:

    Subject matter under subclass 58.1 wherein the clutching medium is a liquid
    or a gas.

    (1)     Note. Where the clutching medium is not a liquid or gas (e.g., a
    powder or gellike plastic fluid mass) classification is proper in subclass
    58.1.


CLS 192/58.3
TXT Vane clutch:

    Subject matter under subclass 58.2 wherein at least one of the members is
    provided with a projection acting as a scoop or paddle which propels the
    clutching medium against the other of the members to transmit torque
    therebe-tween.


CLS 192/58.4
TXT Viscous shear:

    Subject matter under subclass 58.2 wherein torque is transmitted by fluid
    friction acting on surfaces of the clutch members.


CLS 192/58.41
TXT Multiple plate:

    Subject matter under subclass 58.4 wherein there is a plurality of disclike
    elements on one clutch member interleaved with a plurality of disclike
    elements on the other of the clutch members.


CLS 192/58.42
TXT Variable gap or volume:

    Subject matter under subclass 58.41 wherein means are provided for
    adjusting the spacing between the disclike elements or for adjusting the
    volume of a chamber in which the liquid or gas is contained.


CLS 192/58.43
TXT Variable gap or volume:

    Subject matter under subclass 58.4 wherein means are provided for adjusting
    the spacing of the surfaces of the clutch members or adjusting the volume
    of a chamber in which the liquid or gas is contained.


CLS 192/58.5
TXT Separate reservoir:

    Subject matter under subclass 58.4 wherein one of the clutch members
    rotates in a space defined by a housing, which housing has a working
    chamber in which fluid friction between the members occurs and wherein a
    separate storage chamber is provided in which the liquid or gas can be
    collected.

    (1)     Note. The housing referred to above may be defined by the other of
    the members; e.g., a housing is coupled to a part to be driven and a disc
    rotatable in the housing is coupled to a driving part.


CLS 192/58.6
TXT Automatic regulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 58.5 wherein means are provided to control
    the flow of fluid between the working chamber and the storage chamber in
    response to at least one sensed condition.


CLS 192/58.61
TXT Magnetic or electric:

    Subject matter under subclass 58.6 wherein the means which controls the
    flow between chambers is magnetically or electrically operated.


CLS 192/58.62
TXT Temperature and speed:

    Subject matter under subclass 58.6 wherein the sensed condition includes
    both a level of heat and a rate of rotation.


CLS 192/58.63
TXT Temperature:

    Subject matter under subclass 58.6 wherein the sensed condition is a level
    of heat.


CLS 192/58.64
TXT Coolant and clutching medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 58.63 wherein the sensed condition is a level
    of heat in the clutching medium and the level of heat in a separate liquid
    used to cool a related device.

    (1)     Note. The related device is typically an internal combustion engine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 41.12, for similar devices in
    combination with an internal combustion engine.


CLS 192/58.65
TXT Ambient and clutching medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 58.63 wherein the sensed condition is a level
    of heat in the clutching medium and the level of heat of air external to
    and immediately surrounding the clutch.


CLS 192/58.66
TXT Ambient and coolant:

    Subject matter under subclass 58.63 wherein the sensed condition is a level
    of heat in air external to and immediately surrounding the clutch and the
    level of heat in a separate liquid used to cool a related device.


CLS 192/58.67
TXT Clutching medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 58.63 wherein the sensed condition is the
    level of heat in the clutching medium.


CLS 192/58.68
TXT Ambient:

    Subject matter under subclass 58.63 wherein the sensed condition is the
    level of heat in air external to and immediately surrounding the clutch.


CLS 192/58.681
TXT Bimetallic:

    Subject matter under subclass 58.68 wherein the level of heat of the
    surrounding air is sensed by an element comprised of at least two metals
    having dissimilar coefficients of thermal expansion, the element moving in
    response to a change in the level of heat to effect control of the level of
    clutching medium in the working chamber (e.g., by operating a valve).


CLS 192/58.682
TXT Spiral:

    Subject matter under subclass 58.681 wherein the element is coiled in
    plural convolutions which lie substantially in the same plane.


CLS 192/58.683
TXT Resilient or adjustable mounting feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 58.682 wherein at least one end of the
    element is attached to a support on the clutch by recoilably yieldable
    means or by means permitting a change in the position of attachment.


CLS 192/58.684
TXT Mounting feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 58.681 wherein the specifics of the
    attachment of the element to the clutch are cited as significant.


CLS 192/58.7
TXT Pump-out feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 58.5 wherein a device is provided to force
    fluid from the working chamber to the storage chamber and wherein the
    shape, arrangement or material of said device is cited as significant.


CLS 192/58.8
TXT Specific valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 58.5 wherein a device is provided for opening
    and closing a fluid passage extending between the storage and working
    chamber and wherein the shape, arrangement or material of said device is
    cited as significant.


CLS 192/58.9
TXT Radial vane:

    Subject matter under subclass 58.2, having a clutch member disposed
    radially inward of another clutch member, and one of the clutch members
    carries bladelike elements which slidably engage the other member, rotation
    being transmitted through circumferential compression of the fluid.


CLS 192/58.91
TXT Vanes on inner member:

    Subject matter under subclass 58.9 wherein the bladelike elements are
    carried by the radially inward member to slidably engage an inwardly facing
    surface on the other member.


CLS 192/58.92
TXT Spring-biased:

    Subject matter under subclass 58.91 wherein recoilably yieldable means are
    provided to impart a radially outwardly directed force on the bladelike
    elements.


CLS 192/59
TXT Clutches under subclass 58.1+ in which the rotating driving member propels
    one or more pistons against the action of the clutching fluid in a
    direction parallel to the axis of rotation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 290+ for similar structure used as a brake.


CLS 192/60
TXT Clutches under subclass 58.1+ in which the pistons move transversely to the
    axis of rotation, against the action of the clutching fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 290+ for similar structure used as a brake.


CLS 192/61
TXT Clutches under subclass 58.1+ in which the rotation is transmitted by means
    of the clutching fluid, which is forced between meshed gears.

    (1)     Note.  Both this subclass, and Class  475, Planetary Gear
    Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses 91+, contain planetary units
    including gear pumps so arranged that when fluid flow through the pump is
    unrestricted, the unit slips, as the fluid flow is restricted, the unit
    planetates, and when fluid flow is completely shut off, the gear elements
    forming the pump are locked against relative rotation and the unit is
    locked.  Where a planet pinion of the unit drives a separate gear pump, the
    pump, in fact, operates as a planet pinion brake, and such art will be
    found in the appropriate one of the above listed subclasses in Class 475.
    Where a planet pinion and its intermeshing sun or orbit gear together
    constitute the gear pump, the device will be found in this subclass
    (192/61).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclass 292 for similar structure used as a brake.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 54+ for rotary
    expansible chamber devices for working members having planetary or
    planetating movement; subclasses 166+ for rotary expansible chamber devices
    of the moving cylinder type having intermeshing peripheral surfaces and
    subclasses 191+ for rotary expansible devices having interengaging rotary
    members.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses 91+,
    and see (1) Note above.


CLS 192/62
TXT Clutches under subclass 30 adapted for use in raising plows.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 403+ and 407+ especially subclasses 410+
    for earth working apparatus comprising a clutch associated with a wheel for
    lifting a plow.


CLS 192/63
TXT Clutches under subclass 30 for engine-drives designed to permit at times
    the engine to run free without transmitting power.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for automatic type of free-engine clutch.


CLS 192/64
TXT Clutches under subclass 30 designed to permit a velocipede wheel to run
    freely when the pedals are held.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41+,    for one-way clutches.


CLS 192/65
TXT Clutches under subclass 30 in which the engaging elements of the clutches
    have both a motion parallel and a motion transverse to the axis of rotation.


CLS 192/66.1
TXT Axially engaging:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein at least one engaging member is
    movable parallel to the axis of rotation to engage or disengage at least
    one other member.


CLS 192/66.2
TXT Conical or frustoconical:

    Subject matter under subclass 66.1 wherein engaging faces of the members
    are in the form of a cone or frustocone.


CLS 192/66.21
TXT Plural radially spaced surfaces:

    Subject matter under subclass 66.2, with two or more concentric conical or
    frustoconical surfaces on each engaging member.


CLS 192/66.22
TXT Spring engaged:

    Subject matter under subclass 66.2 wherein the faces are moved to a torque
    transmitting position by the action of a recoilably yieldable member.


CLS 192/66.23
TXT Spring released:

    Subject matter under subclass 66.2 wherein the faces are moved to the
    disengaged position by the action of a recoilably yieldable member.


CLS 192/66.3
TXT Planar radially extending:

    Subject matter under subclass 66.1 wherein engaging faces of the members
    are disposed in a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis.


CLS 192/66.31
TXT Spring engaged:

    Subject matter under subclass 66.3 wherein the faces are moved to a torque
    transmitting position by the action of a recoilably yieldable member.


CLS 192/66.32
TXT Spring released:

    Subject matter under subclass 66.3 wherein the faces are moved to the
    disengaged position by the action of a recoilably yieldable member.


CLS 192/69
TXT Positive:

    Clutches under subclass 66.1 in which the axially movable members carry
    elements that intermesh to transmit torque without slip.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for improvements in the engaging faces, per se, of interlocking or
    positively engaged clutches.


CLS 192/69.1
TXT Pivoting positive clutch element:

    Subject matter under subclass 69 wherein at least one of the members
    includes an element which is swingably mounted to a point of attachment
    thereto and is engageable with another of the clutch members.


CLS 192/69.2
TXT Plunger disconnect:

    Subject matter under subclass 69 wherein a finger moving generally
    transversely to the axis of rotation of the clutch engages cooperating
    structure (e.g., a screw) which causes the engaging members to move to the
    disengaged position.


CLS 192/69.3
TXT Pilot pawl:

    Subject matter under subclass 69 wherein a member is provided with a
    swinging finger which engages ratchet teeth and is effective to cause
    synchronous engagement of the intermeshed elements.


CLS 192/69.4
TXT Wheel hub clutched to axle:

    Subject matter under subclass 69 wherein the positive clutch engages a
    wheel hub to an axle (e.g., in a four-wheel drive vehicle).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54.2,   for hub clutches which engage in response to torque on the axle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 247 for a manual means to disengage drive
    to one or more, but fewer than all four of the wheels.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclass 1 for selectively engageable hub
    to shaft connections.


CLS 192/69.41
TXT Fluid pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 69.4 wherein one of the members of the
    positive clutch is shifted either into or out of engagement with another
    member by hydraulic or pneumatic pressure.


CLS 192/69.42
TXT Electromagnetic:

    Subject matter under subclass 69.4 wherein one of the members of the
    positive clutch is shifted axially either into or out of engagement with
    another member by the action of a solenoid or electric motor.


CLS 192/69.43
TXT Manual:

    Subject matter under subclass 69.4 wherein one of the members of the
    positive clutch is shifted axially into or out of engagement with another
    member by an operator manipulated knob or handle disposed on the hub or
    axle.


CLS 192/69.5
TXT Ball or roller:

    Subject matter under subclass 69 wherein at least one of the intermeshed
    elements is generally spherical or cylindrical and rotatably mounted
    relative to its corresponding member.


CLS 192/69.6
TXT Cylindrical pin:

    Subject matter under subclass 69 wherein at least one of the intermeshed
    elements is an elongated element of generally circular cross-section that
    is fixedly mounted to its corresponding member.


CLS 192/69.61
TXT Axial pin on only one member:

    Subject matter under subclass 69.6 wherein only one member carries an
    elongated element which extends generally parallel to the rotation axis.


CLS 192/69.62
TXT Pin engages aperture in other member:

    Subject matter under subclass 69.61 wherein the other of the engaging
    elements includes apertures to receive the elongated element.

    (1)     Note. Here aperture is defined as a hole, slot, or recess defined
    by a periphery that surrounds the pin.


CLS 192/69.63
TXT Radial pin:

    Subject matter under subclass 69.6 wherein the elongated element extends
    generally transverse to the clutch rotation axis.


CLS 192/69.7
TXT Axial-radial:

    Subject matter under subclass 69 wherein one of the members includes
    elements extending axially from the member and joined thereto only on a
    radially extending surface of the member, and the other engaging member has
    radially extending elements adapted to interlock with the axially extending
    elements, the radially extending elements being joined to its associated
    member at least on one circumferential surface of the member.


CLS 192/69.71
TXT Axially extending projection engages aperture:

    Subject matter under subclass 69.7 wherein the axially extending projection
    engages an aperture in the other member.

    (1)     Note. Here aperture is defined as a hole, slot, or recess defined
    by a periphery that surrounds the axially extending projection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69.62,  for projections that are cylindrical pins.


CLS 192/69.8
TXT Axial-axial:

    Subject matter under subclass 69 wherein a pair of members each include
    elements extending axially from the members and joined thereto solely on a
    radially extending surface of the members.

    (1)     Note.The elements must have a component in the axial direction.


CLS 192/69.81
TXT Sawtooth:

    Subject matter under subclass 69.8 wherein the axially extending elements
    on at least one of the coupled members has the form of a tooth having one
    engaging surface that lies in a plane substantially parallel to or
    including the rotational axis and an adjacent engaging surface that lies in
    a plane oblique to the rotational axis.


CLS 192/69.82
TXT Square tooth:

    Subject matter under subclass 69.8 wherein oppositely facing engaging
    surfaces on the elements of both members are each perpendicular to an end
    face of the element.


CLS 192/69.83
TXT With lead-in:

    Subject matter under subclass 69.82 wherein at least one of the elements
    includes a configuration to facilitate engagement.


CLS 192/69.9
TXT Radial-radial:

    Subject matter under subclass 69 wherein the members each include at least
    one element which extends radially and are joined to their respective
    member at least on one circumferential surface of the respective member.


CLS 192/69.91
TXT Outward projection on movable member:

    Subject matter under subclass 69.9 wherein only one of the members moves
    parallel to the axis of rotation and has at least one element which extends
    radially from an outer circumferential surface of said one member.


CLS 192/70
TXT Clutches under subclass 66.1+ in which two axially-moving members are
    spread to engage the companion members of the clutch.


CLS 192/70.11
TXT Device under subclass 66.1+ having an input (i.e., driving) shaft and an
    output (i.e., driven) shaft rotatable about a common axis and at least
    three members supported thereby in an array of adjacent members spaced
    along the axis and co-axial with the shafts, the outer of said members
    having surfaces facing opposite surfaces of one or more intermediate
    members; one of said members being constrained to rotate with one of the
    shafts, another of said members being constrained to rotate with the other
    of the shafts but being movable along the common axis, and a third of said
    members being movable along the common axis; the device also having means
    for moving said members toward one another for mutual engagement of the
    facing surfaces, whereby the input shaft transmits its rotation to the
    output shaft when the facing surfaces are mutually engaged.

    (1)     Note. In this and indented subclasses one clutch-element is
    connected to one of the shafts and is sandwiched between two other
    clutch-elements that are connected to the other shaft.  In a variation of
    this arrangement a multiplicity (usually more than three) of
    clutch-elements is connected for rotation with one shaft and a multiplicity
    of clutch-elements is connected for rotation with the other shaft, the
    elements of one shaft alternating with the elements of the other shaft.
    The variation described is called a "multiple-element clutch-assemblage" in
    the definitions and notes of the subclasses indented hereunder.

    (2)     Note.  The clutch-assemblage is usually enclosed by a "flywheel"
    and a "cover plate".  A flywheel is a heavy component secured to the input
    shaft to stabilize rotational momentum thereof, and a cover plate (also
    known as a "back plate") also encloses a "pressure plate" (which is a
    component that, compared to a clutch-element, is relatively thick and
    heavy) and an actuator that urges the pressure plate towards
    clutch-elements lying between the pressure plate and the flywheel to effect
    engagement of the clutch-assemblage.

    (3)     Note.  The term "shaft", as used in the definition above, is
    intended as the generic name of a torque-transmitting member which is
    referred to by a variety of names, including:  shaft, flywheel (usually
    applied to the input of an automobile), pulley, gear, drum, hub, spindle,
    axle, sleeve, etc., the named terms being only exemplary of those used.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclass 71.5 for disclosure of rotationally-fixed elements
    interleaved between rotatable elements and axially moved to retard rotation
    of the rotatable elements.


CLS 192/70.12
TXT Device under subclass 70.11 provided with means for reducing the
    temperature of, or for supplying a friction-reducing fluid to, any of the
    members or components of a clutch-assemblage.

    (1)     Note.  The term "clutch-assemblage" is defined in (1) Note to the
    definition of subclass 48.1 above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113+,   for clutch lubricating and/or cooling means, e.g., per se.


CLS 192/70.13
TXT Device under subclass 70.11 wherein any of the members or sub-assemblies of
    the device may be taken out of the clutch-assemblage, or put back into the
    clutch-assemblage, or wherein one such member or sub-assembly may be
    exchanged for another such member or sub-assembly.

    (1)     Note.  The term "clutch-assemblage" is defined in (1) Note to the
    definition of subclass 48.1 above.

    (2)     Note.  It is inherent in any device that is assembled from a
    plurality of parts that the device may be disassembled and then
    re-assembled with the same or equivalent parts.  Therefore, an original
    patent placed in this subclass should clearly disclose the features
    implicit in the title and definition of the subclass.


CLS 192/70.14
TXT Device under subclass 70.11 having a distinctive, structurally-significant
    peculiarity in the engaging face of the member.

    (1)     Note.  Terms such as "segmented", or "faced with leather",  or
    "roughened" or "tapered" are considered to be structurally-significant
    descriptors of the engaging surface.  Functional terms such as "friction
    surface" are not proper for this subclass (70.14), and clutch-elements so
    described will be found elsewhere according to their other characteristics.

    (2)     Note.  Compare this subclass (70.14) with subclass 107 of this
    class (192).  A device in this subclass (70.14) relates to a clutch-element
    clearly identifiable as part of an opposed-element clutch-assemblage,
    whereas a device of subclass 107 relates to the engaging face of an
    element, per se, usable in a clutch or brake.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107+,   for engaging elements, and see (2) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclass 73.1 for disclosure of surface characteristics
    enhancing friction of a braking element, and subclass 73.2, for disclosure
    of a conical braking element.


CLS 192/70.15
TXT Device under subclass 70.14 wherein the engaging face of the member is
    distinctive by being, at least in part, a frustoconical surface, and
    wherein the engaging face of a member having mutual engagement with the
    first-mentioned member is also a frustoconical surface that complements the
    first-mentioned surface.

    (1)     Note.  A device having clutch-elements whose adjacent complementary
    engaging surfaces show a profile, on a cross-section passing through the
    axis of rotation of the clutch-elements, of V-shaped or zigzag
    configuration, is proper for this subclass (70.15).


CLS 192/70.16
TXT Device under subclass 70.11 provided with means which (a) transmits
    rotational force from an input shaft to a member supported thereby, or
    transmits rotational force from another member to an output shaft that
    supports the other member, and (b) simultaneously permits movement of
    either member relative to its supporting shaft.

    (1)     Note.  It is emphasized that this and indented subclasses provide
    for the connection between a shaft and the clutch-element supported
    thereby, rather than for the means transmitting rotation from one
    clutch-element to a mating clutch-element.  The permitted movement may be
    rotational as in subclass 70.17 below, or axially slidable as in subclass
    70.19 below, or oscillating about an axis perpendicular to the axis of
    rotation of the shafts as in this subclass (70.16).


CLS 192/70.17
TXT Device under subclass 70.16 wherein said means is recoilably yieldable to a
    limited extent in the rotation direction, whereby the permitted movement is
    a limited degree of variation between the rotation of a shaft and the
    rotation of the member supported thereby.

    (1)     Note.  It is emphasized that the amount of variation of transmitted
    rotation is extremely small, and that the primary purpose of the resilient
    connection is to absorb shock inherent in the act of causing a stationary
    clutch-element to be engaged suddenly by a rotating clutch-element.  The
    resilient connection permits the torque to be applied from the shaft to the
    clutch-element supported thereby (or from the clutch-element to its
    supporting shaft) without stressing any of the parts to an excessive
    degree.  The "permitted movement" of the clutch-element is rotation
    momentarily addition to and/or subtractive from the rotation of its
    supporting shaft.  However, the rotation of the clutch-element quickly
    matches that of its supporting shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   for a subcombination comprising a clutch-element (or similar
    structure such as a brake element) resiliently mounted on a hub.


CLS 192/70.18
TXT Device under subclass 70.17 wherein said means comprises a link or strap
    having two ends, one end of which is attached to a clutch-element (or to an
    equivalent rotating member such as a pressure plate or flywheel) at a point
    on the clutch-element radially spaced from the axis of rotation thereof,
    and the other end of which link is attached to a driving or driven shaft
    (or to an equivalent rotating member integral therewith) at a point on the
    shaft radially spaced from the axis of rotation thereof and angularly
    spaced from the first-mentioned attachment.

    (1)     Note.  The attachment at either end of the link may take the form
    of a pivot pin passing through a hole in the link or a resilient connection
    between the link and the clutch-element or its supporting shaft.  The
    necessary requirement for this subclass (70.18) is not the form of
    attachment, but rather that the link extend between the two rotating parts
    (i.e., the clutch-element and its supporting shaft) as if the link were a
    chordal link intersecting circles of revolution traced by link-connecting
    parts of the clutch-element and its shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212+,   for a subcombination of a clutch-element connected to a hub by a
    helical-coil spring wherein the spring is chordally disposed between the
    clutch-element and the hub.


CLS 192/70.19
TXT Device under subclass 70.16 wherein the means comprises portions integral
    with or secured to either shaft extending along or parallel to the axis of
    rotation thereof which portions connect the member to its supporting shaft
    for rotation and permit movement only in a direction parallel to said axis.


CLS 192/70.2
TXT Device under subclass 70.19 wherein the portions comprise gear-like teeth
    and grooves in the shaft (or drum) mating with complementary grooves and
    teeth in the member, (or comprise ribs and slots in the shaft (or drum)
    mating with complementary slots and protrusions in the member), and wherein
    a plurality of first members are in torque-transmitting connection with an
    input shaft, a plurality of second members are in torque-transmitting
    connection with an output shaft coaxial with the input shaft, and the first
    and second members alternate with one another along the axis of the shafts.


CLS 192/70.21
TXT Device under subclass 70.11 including a multiple-element clutch-assemblage
    the members of which are arranged along an axis of rotation, and provided
    with means for moving the members along said axis, wherein said means
    causes said members to engage one another in a predetermined succession of
    mutual engagements along said axis, or to disengage from one another in the
    same or an opposite succession of mutual disengagements.

    (1)     Note.  The purpose of the structure described is to ensure that
    torque from one shaft is applied gradually to the other shaft rather than
    suddenly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48.7    and 52.1+, for other arrangements for progressively transmitting
    load from an input to an output shaft.


CLS 192/70.22
TXT Device under subclass 70.11 provided with means for moving a member along
    said axis and with means additional to the member-moving means, which
    additional means maintains the members in close contact with one another,
    or maintains the members apart from one another, until the members are
    released to permit movement thereof by member-moving means.

    (1)     Note.  Some devices of subclasses 70.29 and 70.3 below include a
    toggle linkage to move a pressure plate or the clutch-elements axially.  A
    toggle linkage comprises two pivotable links joined together by an
    intermediate pivot, and such linkage is inherently capable of latching
    itself if the intermediate pivot is moved "overcenter", i.e., past an
    imaginary line connecting the end pivots.  Such structure will be proper
    for this subclass (70.22) only when the toggle linkage locks itself, i.e.,
    is moved "overcenter".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70.29   and 70.3, for a toggle-link actuator and see (1) Note above.

    114+,   for element-locking means, e.g., per se.


CLS 192/70.23
TXT Device under subclass 70.11 provided with means for moving a member along
    said axis wherein the member-moving means includes a movable component
    having a surface in sliding engagement with a surface portion of a member
    or of a pressure plate, the component surface and the member or plate
    surface being so related and contoured that movement of the component in a
    predetermined direction is converted into axial movement of the member or
    pressure plate.

    (1)     Note.  A device is proper for this subclass (70.23) even if sliding
    friction between the cam surfaces is reduced by use of a roller at the area
    of contact between the cam and the clutch-element or pressure plate.

    (2)     Note.  The movement of the component is usually oscillation in the
    case of a cam, and reciprocation (often in a radial direction) in the case
    of a wedge.

    (3)     Note.  A device is proper for this subclass (70.23) if its cam or
    wedge contacts a cam surface on a flywheel that has an engaging surface
    equivalent to a clutch-element surface.


CLS 192/70.24
TXT Device under subclass 70.23 wherein the component comprises a lever pivoted
    between its ends for oscillation in a plane parallel to the axis of
    rotation of the clutch-assemblage, and the lever having the sliding surface
    at one of its ends, whereby oscillation of the component within the plane
    is converted into axial movement of the member of the pressure plate.


CLS 192/70.25
TXT Device under subclass 70.11 provided with means for moving a member along
    said axis and with means additional to the member-moving means, which
    additional means is capable of axially changing the positional relationship
    between one of the members and a member mating therewith, such change being
    additional to the movement effected by the member-moving means.

    (1)     Note.  The structure described is for the purpose of offsetting the
    decrease in the axial dimension of the clutch-elements due to attrition of
    the surfaces of the elements that occurs as they are repeatedly engaged and
    disengaged under load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111+,   for wear-compensating means, e.g.,  per se.


CLS 192/70.26
TXT Device under subclass 70.25 provided with two or more of said additional
    means, each of which additional means comprises a bolt or threaded male
    member rotatable relative to a nut or threaded female member.

    (1)     Note.  Each of the plurality of screws or bolts is disposed
    radially outwardly of the axis of rotation of the shafts, and each is
    angularly spaced from the others (usually equally spaced) so that the
    amount of adjustment of each of the screws may be chosen to compensate for
    that degree of wear required by the portion of the clutch-element surface
    adjacent to that screw.


CLS 192/70.27
TXT Device under subclass 70.11 provided with means for moving a member along
    said axis, wherein the member-moving means includes at least one elastic
    body that tends to recover its shape when distorted.

    (1)     Note.  A "Belleville" spring (i.e., a relatively thin, resilient
    disc that is dished or tapered in shape) is found herein, as well as a
    common coil spring.  Usually the spring acts along a line parallel to or
    coinciding with the axis of rotation of the shaft.


CLS 192/70.28
TXT Device under subclass 70.27 wherein the elastic bodies tend to move the
    members apart from one another.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of devices in this subclass (70.28) include:  a
    device wherein a spring is used alternatively to engage or to disengage the
    clutch-elements, and a device wherein a spring is stressed (as by actuating
    a lever) only when the clutch-elements are to be disengaged.  The necessary
    requirement is not the means for urging the clutch-elements into engagement
    (such means will be found elsewhere in this class (192) but rather than a
    spring is used to disengage the clutch-elements.


CLS 192/70.29
TXT Device under subclass 70.27 wherein the member-moving means also includes a
    bar oscillatable about a fulcrum by application of force thereto, which
    fulcrum is connected to or mounted on a pressure plate, said fulcrum being
    a pivot pin or the equivalent of a "knife edge" about which the bar
    oscillates.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70.22,  for a "toggle linkage" pivoted on a pressure plate, and see (1)
    Note to the definition of subclass 70.22 for a relationship between the
    subclasses.

    70.3,   for an actuator level pivoted on a back plate, or on both a back
    plate and a pressure plate.


CLS 192/70.3
TXT Device under subclass 70.11 provided with means for moving a member along
    said axis, wherein the member-moving means includes a bar oscillatable
    about a fulcrum by application of force thereto, which fulcrum is connected
    to or mounted on a pressure plate or a cover plate, said fulcrum being a
    pivot pin or the equivalent of a "knife edge" about which the bar
    oscillates.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70.22,  for a "toggle linkage" pivoted on a pressure plate and a cover
    plate, and see (1)  Note to the definition of subclass 70.22 for a
    relationship between the subclasses.

    70.29,  for an actuator lever pivoted on a pressure plate and opposed or
    aided by a spring means.



    Transversely engaged.  Clutches under subclass 30 in which the movable
    engaging element has movement transverse to the axis of rotation.


CLS 192/71
TXT Clutches under Transversely engaged in which the clutch elements engage
    positively.


CLS 192/72
TXT Clutches under Transversely engaged in which the transversely-moving member
    or members engage other members both exteriorly and interiorly.


CLS 192/73
TXT Clutches under subclass 72 in which the member or members moving
    transversely grip an intermediate member.


CLS 192/74
TXT Clutches under Transversely engaged in which the member moving
    transversely, becomes engaged with the interior of a rotatable member.


CLS 192/75
TXT Clutches under subclass 74 in which two or more members, moving
    transversely away from the axis of rotation, engage the interior of the rim
    or rotatable member.


CLS 192/76
TXT Clutches under subclass 75 in which the motion of the transversely-engaging
    members is radial.


CLS 192/77
TXT Clutches under subclass 75 in which the transversely-moving member is a
    split ring.

    (1)     Note.  The split ring is usually released from engagement by its
    own resilience.


CLS 192/78
TXT Clutches under subclass 77 in which the split ring is spread by means of a
    cam.


CLS 192/79
TXT Clutches under Transversely engaged, in which the transversely moving
    members engage the exterior of the rotating part.


CLS 192/80
TXT Clutches under subclass 79 in which the exterior transversely-moving member
    is a flexible strap or band.


CLS 192/81
TXT Clutches under subclass 80 in which the strap encircles the drum or wheel
    in two or more folds.


CLS 192/82
TXT Devices under subclass 30 for actuating clutches.


CLS 192/83
TXT Devices under subclass 82 which include two or more devices for operating
    the same clutch.


CLS 192/84.1
TXT Electric or magnetic:

    Subject matter under subclass 82, wherein frictional or interlocking
    engagement of driving and driven clutch parts is effected by attraction
    between elements having opposite potential or polarity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.56,   12, 17, or 18 for an electric or magnetic component involving a
    clutch and brake system.

    21.5,   for a field responsive system.

    40,     for an electric or magnetic component in a manually controlled
    clutch.

    48.2,   for an electrically actuated plural clutch assemblage.

    53.2,   for a positive frictional clutch operated by electric or magnetic
    means.

    54.4,   for a magnetic or electromagnetic torque responsive clutch.

    56.4,+  for an overload release having magnetic or electromagnetic means

    69.42,  for a wheel hub clutched to axle having electromagnetic means.

    90,     for an operator that is spring engaged having electric release.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 158+ for an electric operator for a frictional
    damping system.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 92+ for an
    electrically operated clutch in a motor or generator.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 220+ for electromagnetic operators, per se.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, subclass 29 for an electrical or magnetic coupling.


CLS 192/84.2
TXT Plural coils:

    Subject matter under subclass 84.1, wherein clutch engagement is effected
    by the attraction between poles of opposite magnetic polarity and these
    poles are the result of a magnetic field produced by the flow of electric
    current in two or more distinct windings of conductors.


CLS 192/84.21
TXT Plural armatures:

    Subject matter under subclass 84.2, wherein two or more windings effect
    movement of two or more independently movable, magnetizable members.


CLS 192/84.3
TXT Including permanent magnet:

    Subject matter under subclass 84.1, wherein a material which naturally
    attracts iron provides opposite polarities that affect engagement of the
    driving and driven clutch parts.


CLS 192/84.31
TXT And electromagnet:

    Subject matter under subclass 84.3, wherein a field produced by the flow of
    electric current in a coiled conductor also affects engagement of the
    clutch parts.


CLS 192/84.4
TXT Electrostatic:

    Subject matter under subclass 84.1, wherein engagement of driving and
    driven clutch parts is effected by the electro-adhesive forces between a
    conductive member and a semi-conductive member subjected to an
    electric-potential difference.


CLS 192/84.5
TXT Air gap adjustment:

    Subject matter under subclass 84.1, wherein structure is provided to set to
    a predetermined value a distance between elements of opposite magnetic
    polarities when the clutch parts are in a disengaged condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for adjusting devices, per se.

    111+,   for wear compensators, per se.


CLS 192/84.51
TXT Automatic:

    Subject matter under subclass 84.5, wherein the distance is set without
    manipulation by an operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111,    for automatic wear compensators, per se.


CLS 192/84.6
TXT Rotary electric motor is clutch actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 84.1, wherein the attraction between elements
    of opposite magnetic polarity produces a relative rotation between the
    elements which, through a motion converting mechanism, effects engagement
    of driving and driven clutch parts.


CLS 192/84.7
TXT Mechanical force increasing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 84.1, wherein structure is provided to
    amplify a clutch-engaging force after an initial clutch engagement is
    effected by the attraction between elements of opposite magnetic polarity.


CLS 192/84.8
TXT Operator for transversely engaging elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 84.1, wherein driving and driven parts rotate
    about an axis and are engageable by a motion in a direction perpendicular
    to said axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71      and 81, for transversely engaging clutches, per se.


CLS 192/84.81
TXT Coil spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 84.8, wherein one of the driving and driven
    clutch parts is an elongated member wound into a helix shape that is
    adapted to unwind into or out of frictional engagement with the other
    clutch part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89.2+,  for a spring-engaged operator.


CLS 192/84.9
TXT Operator for axially engaging elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 84.1, wherein the driving and driven clutch
    parts rotate about an axis and are engageable by a motion in a direction
    parallel to said axis.


CLS 192/84.91
TXT Interposed friction elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 84.9, wherein frictional engagement is
    provided by three or more friction elements with one or more of the
    friction elements being sandwiched between adjacent elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70.11+, appropriate subclasses for clutches, per se, having interposed
    friction elements.


CLS 192/84.92
TXT Positively engaging elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 84.9, wherein the driving and driven clutch
    parts carry formations which interlock to transmit torque without slip.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69.42,  for positively engaging clutches, per se.


CLS 192/84.93
TXT Magnetic flux path spaced from engaging elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 84.9, wherein the engagement is effected by a
    magnetic circuit which bypasses the engaging surfaces of the clutch parts.


CLS 192/84.94
TXT Specified torque transmitting spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 84.9, wherein one or more of the elements
    moving parallel to the axis is connected to one of the driving and driven
    clutch parts by one or more resilient members and wherein the shape,
    arrangement, or material of the one or more resilient members is cited as
    significant.


CLS 192/84.941
TXT Nonmetallic:

    Subject matter under subclass 84.94, wherein the one or more resilient
    members is formed of a material other than metal.


CLS 192/84.95
TXT With slip rings:

    Subject matter under subclass 84.9, wherein an electromagnet is carried by
    and rotates with one of the driving and driven parts and electric current
    is supplied to the electromagnet by a connection including brushes and
    rotary contacts.


CLS 192/84.951
TXT With pulley or gear:

    Subject matter under subclass 84.95, wherein torque is transmitted to or
    from one of the driving and driven clutch parts by means of a toothed
    member or a torque transmitting belt or chain.


CLS 192/84.96
TXT Fixed concentric coil:

    Subject matter under subclass 84.9, wherein a stationary, annular
    electromagnetic coil surrounds the clutch axis and magnetizes one of the
    driving and driven clutch parts to provide a pole piece which attracts the
    other of the driving and driven clutch parts into engagement therewith.


CLS 192/84.961
TXT With pulley or gear:

    Subject matter under subclass 84.96, wherein torque is transmitted to or
    from one of the driving and driven clutch parts by means of a toothed
    member or a torque transmitting belt or chain.


CLS 192/85
TXT Devices under subclass 82 in which the action of fluid under pressure is
    used to operate the clutch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.29+   and 3.33, for a fluid-pressure operator to engage or actuate a
    clutch that is combined with a vortex-flow drive.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclasses for an
    expansible chamber device, per se, even though disclosed as a means to
    operate a clutch.

    303,    Fluid-Pressure and Analogous Brake Systems, appropriate subclasses
    for systems of distribution of fluid to motors of more general application.


CLS 192/86
TXT Devices under subclass 85 in which the fluid-pressure is utilized both to
    set the clutch in an engaging position and to release it.


CLS 192/87.1
TXT Device under subclass 85 in which the fluid under pressure is applied to
    clutch-actuator means for engaging or disengaging one or more of a
    plurality of clutches.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.25+,  for a combination of vortex-flow drive and a plurality of clutches,
    wherein the clutches may be fluid-pressure actuated.

    48.1+,  for a combination of multiple clutches that are mechanically
    actuated.


CLS 192/87.11
TXT Device under subclass 87.1 wherein the functioning of one clutch-actuator
    is unrelated to the functioning of another clutch-actuator.

    (1)     Note.  This (or an indented) subclass is the locus, for example, of
    a claim directed to the combination of three clutches, two of which are
    alternatively engaged (i.e., one is engaged while the other is disengaged),
    and the third of which may be engaged regardless of the condition of either
    of the first two clutches.   A claim wherein a plurality of clutches must
    all be engaged or disengaged simultaneously is not considered as proper for
    this subclass but will be found in subclass 87.1 above.


CLS 192/87.12
TXT Device under subclass 87.11, whose clutch includes a rotating portion, and
    whose clutch actuator is pressurized upon the attainment of a predetermined
    angular velocity of the rotating portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.31,   for a speed-responsive operator for a vortex-flow drive-lock-up
    clutch.


CLS 192/87.13
TXT Device under subclass 87.11 provided with a multiway valve unit effective
    to direct the pressurized fluid to the actuator for any, all, or none of
    the clutches.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87.18+, for a fluid-pressure distributor for alternate clutch actuators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 625+, for a multiway valve unit, per se.


CLS 192/87.14
TXT Device under subclass 87.1 having only two clutches, wherein either clutch,
    (but not both simultaneously) is in force-transmitting relationship.

    (1)     Note.  A patent directed to the combination of more than two
    clutches will be placed in subclass 87.1 or 87.11+ as appropriate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.27,   for the combination of a vortex-flow drive and alternatively
    operative clutches.


CLS 192/87.15
TXT Device under subclass 87.14 wherein both clutches are rotatable about the
    same axis of rotation and the means that actuates each clutch is a
    pressure-receiving member that acts (i.e., moves under fluid-pressure)
    along said axis of rotation.


CLS 192/87.16
TXT Device under subclass 87.15 wherein both clutches are actuated by the same
    pressure-receiving member or by pressure-receiving members that are secured
    together.

    (1)     Note.  The actuator of the disclosures herein may comprise an
    enclosure divided into two chambers by a relatively movable partition.
    Pressure is applied to one or the other of the chambers to cause the
    movement of the partition or the enclosure.  If the partition is moved, it
    is the piston (i.e., pressure-receiving member) common to both
    clutch-actuators.  If the enclosure is moved its interior end faces are
    effectively pistons, and since the "pistons" are rigidly connected
    together, the enclosure is the pressure-receiving member common to both
    clutch actuators.


CLS 192/87.17
TXT Device under subclass 87.16 wherein the pressure-receiving member is
    located in the space separating the clutches.


CLS 192/87.18
TXT Device under subclass 87.14 provided with a multiway valve unit effective
    to direct the pressurized fluid to the actuator for either one of the
    clutches or neither of them.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87.13,  for a fluid-pressure distributor for a plurality of
    clutch-actuators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 625+ for a multiway valve unit, per se.


CLS 192/87.19
TXT Device under subclass 87.18 wherein the unit can be caused to apply no
    pressure to the actuator for either clutch.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are patents disclosing use of the neutral
    position of a multiway valve for relieving residual pressure in the
    actuators of both clutches at the same time.


CLS 192/88
TXT Devices under subclass 85 in which the fluid-pressure is applied through a
    motor having flexible walls.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 34+ for a bellows type
    expansible chamber device, and subclasses 90+ for a flexible wall type
    expansible chamber device.


CLS 192/89.1
TXT Weight operated:

    Structure under subclass 82, wherein an operating mechanism of the clutch
    is activated by gravitational force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103+,   for a clutch in which a weight is acted on by centrifugal force,
    acceleration, or inertia to operate a speed-responsive clutch.


CLS 192/89.2
TXT Spring engaged:

    Structure under subclass 82, wherein the clutch is operated to the engaged
    position by a resilient means.


CLS 192/89.21
TXT Cam release:

    Structure under subclass 89.2, wherein an element having an eccentric
    surface or groove is employed to release the clutch in opposition to the
    resilient means.


CLS 192/89.22
TXT Belleville disc spring:

    Structure under subclass 89.2, wherein the resilient means is a relatively
    thin, resilient annular disc that is dished or tapered in shape.


CLS 192/89.23
TXT Push-type:

    Structure under subclass 89.22, wherein the disc spring has radially,
    inwardly directed fingers and is fulcrumed such that the fingers are moved
    in a direction axially toward a clutch plate in order to release engagement.


CLS 192/89.24
TXT Pull-type:

    Structure under subclass 89.22, wherein the disc spring has radially,
    inwardly directed fingers and is fulcrumed such that the fingers are moved
    in a direction axially away from a clutch plate in order to release
    engagement.


CLS 192/89.25
TXT Geometric configuration:

    Structure under subclass 89.22, wherein significance is attributed to a
    specific shape of the spring structure.


CLS 192/89.26
TXT Plural coil springs spaced from clutch axis:

    Structure under subclass 89.2, wherein the engaging force is provided by a
    multiplicity of helical springs having axes positioned radially spaced from
    the clutch axis.


CLS 192/89.27
TXT Coil spring coaxial to clutch axis:

    Structure under subclass 89.2, wherein the resilient means is a helical
    spring concentric with the clutch axis.


CLS 192/89.28
TXT Transversely engaged:

    Structure under subclass 89.27, wherein an engaging element moves
    transversely to the axis of the rotation of the clutch.


CLS 192/89.29
TXT Quick throw spring:

    Structure under subclass 89.2, wherein a mechanism initially deflects or
    compresses a spring after which the spring force is released allowing it to
    quickly move the clutch into the engaged position.


CLS 192/90
TXT Devices under subclass 89.2 in which electric action is employed to release
    the clutch.


CLS 192/91
TXT Devices under subclass 89.2 in which the clutch is released by fluid action.


CLS 192/92
TXT Devices under subclass 82 in which the clutch is operated to engagement and
    release by successive movements of the operator in the same direction.


CLS 192/93
TXT Devices under subclass 82 in which the clutch is operated to engaging
    position by some form of cam.


CLS 192/94
TXT Devices under subclass 82 in which the clutch is operated to engaging
    position by a screw.


CLS 192/95
TXT Devices under subclass 82 in which some form of rotating
    manually-controlled handle is used to operate the clutch.


CLS 192/96
TXT Devices under subclass 82 in which a pin or rod in the axle of rotation
    operates the clutch.


CLS 192/97
TXT Devices under subclass 96 in which the central pin operator is actuated by
    a screw.


CLS 192/98
TXT Devices under subclass 82 which include elements known as "shipper-saddles"
    for operating the clutch.


CLS 192/99
TXT Devices under subclass 82 includes a simple lever or combination of levers
    for actuating the clutch.


CLS 192/100
TXT Devices under subclass 82 in which the same device operates the clutch and
    continues to operate the shaft after the clutch is in engagement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for combined clutch and brake operated by the drive shaft.


CLS 192/101
TXT Devices under subclass 82 for moving the clutch to an inoperative position.


CLS 192/102
TXT Devices under subclass 82 which, upon the driven member or operated
    connection being stopped or checked, positively operates the clutch to
    released position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 185.1+ for cranking devices
    for engines.


CLS 192/103
TXT Devices under subclass 82 for operating the clutch in response to speed.


CLS 192/104
TXT Devices under subclass 103 in which speed-responsive elements are so
    arranged as to produce slipping of the clutch if the critical speed is
    exceeded.


CLS 192/105
TXT Devices under subclass 103 in which speed responsive elements are arranged
    to produce engagement of the clutch when the driving member reaches a
    predetermined speed.


CLS 192/106
TXT Devices under subclass 103 include speed-responsive devices to prevent an
    unauthorized engagement of a clutch.


CLS 192/107
TXT Devices under Elements which include modifications of the engaging surfaces
    of clutches.

    (1)     Note.  Where the clutch or element is claimed with no significant
    clutch or element structure, but merely in terms of the composition or
    material of which it is composed, it will be classified in the appropriate
    composition or material class, even though there is no claim to the
    composition, per se.  In this connection, the following classes should be
    considered:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclass 231 for a composition having a continuous phase of free
    metal made by consolidating metal particles and containing a functionally
    defined nonmetal constituent, e.g., abrasive.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, note particularly the class
    definition of Class 106 for the classification of other compositions.

    148,    Metal Treatment, particularly subclasses 400+ for materials which
    are products of processes of treating metal classifiable in Class 148, or
    for products distinguished only by the internal structure or
    characteristics of the metals, metallic compositions or alloys comprising
    such products.

    252,    Compositions, for compositions not elsewhere classified.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, appropriate subclasses for
    articles defined only by their alloy or metallic composition.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet not elsewhere provided for and especially subclasses 64.1+ for a
    circular sheet, subclasses 196+ and 225+ for such a product embodying
    mechanically interengaged strands (e.g., weave, knit, etc.), and subclasses
    364+ for a rod, strand, fiber or filament with structure (e.g., nonlinear,
    etc.), or coated.  See also (2) Note below.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Class 523, subclass 152 for a composition containing a
    synthetic resin or natural rubber having utility as a friction element for
    automobiles, trains, trailers, roller skates, skateboards, or other wheeled
    vehicles or to processes of preparing said composition.

    (2)     Note.  A patent directed to a product with a frictional property,
    where said property is enhanced by claimed structure (external structure
    (e.g., disc, zones of friction material; particular arrangement of strands,
    fibers or layers), will be placed in this Class (192) rather than in Class
    428, Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, where the sole use
    disclosure is as a clutch or brake.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclass 36 for tractive or
    friction surface compositions.


CLS 192/108
TXT Devices under subclass 107 pertaining to improvements in the engaging faces
    of interlocking or positively engaged clutches.


CLS 192/109
TXT Devices under Elements including thrust members for cushioning the
    engagement of clutches, retarders for delaying the action, and stops for
    defining the limits of movement.


CLS 192/110
TXT Devices under Elements including shafts and bearings for clutches and
    adjusting devices other than provided for in the next subclass.


CLS 192/111
TXT Devices under Elements including mechanism to compensate for wear in
    effecting the engagement of clutches.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70.25+, for opposed clutch faces having means to effect the engagement of
    the clutch faces and means to compensate for wear in the faces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 79.5+ for wear compensators for transversely
    movable wheel brakes.


CLS 192/112
TXT Devices under Elements, including liquid-tight casings to entirely enclose
    the clutch.


CLS 192/113.1
TXT Lubricating, insulating, or cooling:

    Subject matter under the mainline subclass 103, which includes means for
    reducing the friction or affecting temperature of a clutch.


CLS 192/113.2
TXT Air cooling:

    Subject matter under subclass 113.1, in which air is a cooling medium.


CLS 192/113.21
TXT Heat radiating structure:

    Structure under subclass 113.2, which includes an element for increasing
    radiation of heat away from the clutch to ambient air (e.g., having
    ``fins", etc.).


CLS 192/113.22
TXT Grooved surfaces:

    Structure under subclass 113.2, wherein engaging clutch surfaces are
    striated to facilitate the flow of cooling air.


CLS 192/113.23
TXT Air directing structure:

    Structure under subclass 113.2, including a member which is contoured to
    forcibly direct the flow of cooling air through or around clutch elements.


CLS 192/113.24
TXT Rotating cover:

    Subject matter under subclass 113.23, wherein the air directing structure
    is a part of a rotating encasement for the clutch.

    (1)     Note.  Air directing structure in a fixed clutch housing in general
    would be properly classified in this class, subclass 113.23.


CLS 192/113.25
TXT Spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 113.23, wherein the air directing structure
    is a part of a clutch spring.


CLS 192/113.26
TXT Clutch plate:

    Subject matter under subclass 113.23, wherein the air directing structure
    is a part of a clutch plate.


CLS 192/113.3
TXT Liquid cooled or lubricated clutch surfaces:

    Structure under subclass 113.1, wherein a liquid is used to reduce friction
    or temperature of the clutch.


CLS 192/113.31
TXT Entire coolant path is spaced from clutch surfaces:

    Subject matter under subclass 113.3, wherein a passageway for a coolant is
    spaced from engaging surfaces of the clutch throughout its whole length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113.34+, for coolant passing between engaging clutch surfaces.


CLS 192/113.32
TXT Overrunning clutch:

    Subject matter under subclass 113.3, which includes clutch elements which
    automatically engage in response to relative rotation of the elements in
    one direction and which disengage automatically in response to relative
    rotation in an opposite direction.


CLS 192/113.33
TXT Positive:

    Subject matter under subclass 113.3, which includes intermeshing elements
    for interconnection of said elements without slippage.


CLS 192/113.34
TXT Lubricant or coolant between engaging surfaces:

    Structure under subclass 113.3, including means for supplying lubricant or
    coolant between engagable clutch surfaces (e.g., during slip or
    disengagement).


CLS 192/113.35
TXT With change of coolant flow during disengagement:

    Structure under subclass 113.34, having means to increase, decrease, or
    redirect coolant flow during clutch disengagement.


CLS 192/113.36
TXT Grooved surfaces:

    Structure under subclass 113.34, wherein the engagable clutch surfaces are
    striated to facilitate lubricant or coolant flow.


CLS 192/113.4
TXT Thermal insulation:

    Structure under subclass 113.1, wherein a thermal break is provided between
    heat generating engaging surfaces and other elements of the clutch.


CLS 192/113.5
TXT Lubrication of ancillary clutch parts:

    Subject matter under subclass 113.1, wherein means is provided to lubricate
    elements of the clutch other than friction surfaces (e.g., to lubricate
    bearings or operating mechanism).


CLS 192/114
TXT Devices under Elements for maintaining the clutch in any set position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70.22,  for opposed clutch faces having means to effect the engagement of
    the clutch faces and means to lock the elements together.


CLS 192/115
TXT Devices under Elements for supporting clutches and power-stop control
    devices.


CLS 192/116.5
TXT Mechanisms under class definition, usually automatic in operation, for
    stopping a machine when a predetermined result is reached when some part of
    the machine fails to function, or the material fails or is disarranged, or
    when an operator's position renders him liable to injury.

    (0.5)   Note.  This subclass includes devices having an electric motor
    drive where a mechanical stop mechanism stops the drive independently of
    any motor control or deenergization, even though the stopping of the drive
    incidently causes control or deenergization of the motor.

    (1)     Note.  For organizations and constructions of the machines, such as
    presses, winding machines, etc., to which the stop mechanism is applied,
    see appropriate art class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 53 for presses not elsewhere provided for, which
    have interrelated or safety controls.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 663+ for coating apparatus having
    automatic control means.

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 82.1+ for one-way brakes applied to elements
    rotating relative to stationary element to prevent retrograde rotation and
    see the notes thereto for other one-way brakes.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 36 for
    automatic power stop mechanisms applied to significantly included
    comminution.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 466+ and 477 for
    electric driven motor devices combined with a mechanical stop mechanism and
    the stopping operation requires control of the motor as well as operation
    of the stop mechanism.  See Note (0.5).

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 79 for a
    phonograph cabinet closure braking actuator; and subclasses 232 and 234+
    for phonograph braking by record structure actuation, and mechanism
    condition actuation, respectively.


CLS 192/125
TXT Stop mechanisms under subclass 116.5 in which the starting or stopping of
    the machine is effected by some condition of the material being treated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses .2+ for stopping of
    machines that prepare fibers for making textiles.

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclasses 10+ for stopping of machines
    cutting pile loops.

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclasses 186+ for stopping of warp
    preparing machines; and 225, for knot or slub detectors in thread finishing
    machines.

    53,     Package Making, appropriate subclasses for methods of and apparatus
    for encompassing or encasing goods or materials with a separate cover or
    band which serves as means for identifying, protecting or unit handling the
    goods or materials, particularly subclasses 55+ for concurrent controls of
    contents and cover feeds (subclasses 56+ being directed to manually reset
    stopping under the control of the contents), subclasses 493+ for contents
    feed controls, subclasses 64+ for cover feed or cover adjunct feed or
    application control, and subclasses 75+ for end closing control.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 80+ for
    strand controlled stopping of spinning and twisting machines.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclasses 157+ for stopping of a knitting
    machine.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 3+ for a metal shaping machine which
    includes means to sense a condition of the work or product and exert a
    control operation to stop the machine in response thereto, and subclasses
    10+ for the same where the result is an operation other than stopping.

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, subclasses 18+ for
    stopping mechanisms for braiding, netting and lace making machines.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 336+ for stopping mechanisms for
    looms.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses including 572+ and
    855+ for conveyors in which the material handled controls the drive for the
    conveyor.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, especially subclass 37
    for a strand or web feeding device which is controlled by the material
    being moved.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 22, 28+, 36+, 534+, and
    563+ for a stop or detector for a winding or unwinding device.


CLS 192/126
TXT Stop mechanisms under subclass 125 in which the material is in the form of
    sheets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, appropriate subclasses for methods of and apparatus
    for encompassing or encasing goods or materials with a separate cover or
    band which serves as means for identifying, protecting or unit handling the
    goods or materials, particularly subclasses 55+ for concurrent controls of
    contents and cover feeds (subclasses 64+ for cover feed or cover adjunct
    feed).

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, sub- classes 258+ for a device for
    stopping the feed of sheets.


CLS 192/127
TXT Stop mechanisms under subclass 126 in which the control is through an
    electrical agency.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, subclass 19 for
    electrical control stopping of braid, net or lace making machines.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, sub- classes 258+ for a device for
    stopping the feed of sheets.


CLS 192/128
TXT Stop mechanisms under subclass 126 in which the control is through a
    pneumatic agency.


CLS 192/129
TXT Stop mechanisms under subclass 116.5 which operate to interrupt the drive,
    render the starting mechanism inoperative, or otherwise prevent operation
    of the machine, as a safety expedient.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 159, for an apparatus safety device
    in glassworking apparatus.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, subclass 43 for safety devices with bolt and rivet making
    machines.


CLS 192/130
TXT Safety devices under subclass 129 in which the control of the movement of
    the work element of the machine prevents injury to the hand of the operator.


CLS 192/131
TXT Safety devices under subclass 130 in which both hands of the operator are
    required to start or maintain the operation of the machine, so that they
    are kept out of the danger zone.


CLS 192/132
TXT Safety devices under subclass 130 in which positive driving connection for
    the work element is made only just prior to contact of the work element
    with the work.


CLS 192/133
TXT Safety devices under subclass 129 in which guards interlock with the power
    element of the machine to prevent the starting or the operative functioning
    of the machine or to throw out the drive when abnormal conditions exist.


CLS 192/134
TXT Safety devices under subclass 133 in which the punch press type of machine
    is involved.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 1+ for randomly-actuated stopping of a
    metal deforming machine.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 613+ for guard mechanisms
    which do not depend upon the control of the machine.


CLS 192/135
TXT Safety devices under subclass 133 in which the cover of the machine is
    involved.


CLS 192/136
TXT Safety devices under subclass 135 in which the machine is of the
    centrifugal type.


CLS 192/137
TXT Safety devices under subclass 133 in which the power-transmitting
    connections are disabled upon the guard striking an extraneous object.


CLS 192/138
TXT Stop mechanisms under subclass 116.5 in which the drive of the machine is
    discontinued at the limit of travel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclass 79 for
    spinning machines which are stopped after sufficient material has been
    wound in a package.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 10+ for mechanical dial
    operators and see (2) Note to the definition of subclass 10 for the line
    between these two classes.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 220+ for cyclically
    operable expansible chamber motors having condition responsive stop means.

    112,    Sewing, subclass 67 for starting and stopping of a buttonhole
    machine and subclasses 271-277 for sewing machine stopping elements.

    140,    Wireworking, for wire feeders having stop devices.

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclasses 282+ and 302+ for control means for an elevator car actuated by
    the car contacting a trip in the shaft.

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclasses 116, 280, 286, and  329 for automatic
    stops for traversing hoists.

    235,    Registers, subclass 132 for registers which actuate control means
    upon attainment of a predetermined reading of the register.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 269 for apparatus for hauling or hoisting a load, including a
    cable-pulling drum which is driven around its rotational axis and a
    stationary mechanism for generating a control impulse to a
    rotation-retarding means of the drive for the drum; the mechanism is
    actuated by the load or another obstruction on and traveling with the cable.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 234+ for
    similar subject matter in a phonograph.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 139+ for
    cutting means of that class type combined with clutch structure
    disengageable by tool movement.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclass 342 for a stop
    mechanism for a tool feed of a metal planing machine.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 674, for automatic stops for
    hoists.


CLS 192/139
TXT Stop mechanisms under subclass 138 in which stopping is controlled by a
    rotary member of the machine.


CLS 192/140
TXT Stop mechanisms under subclass 139 in which the control is through the
    speed of the machine.


CLS 192/141
TXT Stop mechanisms under subclass 139 in which control is by a screw operated
    by the machine.


CLS 192/142
TXT Stop mechanisms under subclass 139 in which stopping is controlled by
    electrically-actuated elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 466+ for electric
    motor starting and stopping in response to movement, position or limit of
    travel of motor or other body or device.


CLS 192/143
TXT Stop mechanisms under subclass 138 in which stopping is controlled by a
    reciprocating member.


CLS 192/144
TXT Stop mechanisms under subclass 116.5 in which the drive is automatically
    released and the brake automatically applied.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for brakes which are applied upon cessation of the drive.


CLS 192/145
TXT Stop mechanisms under subclass 144 in which a plurality of clutches are
    involved in the control of the machine.


CLS 192/146
TXT Stop mechanisms under subclass 144 in which the speed is automatically
    reduced in successive stages before final stopping occurs.


CLS 192/147
TXT Stop mechanisms under subclass 144 in which the control of the drive
    release and brake is in response to speed.


CLS 192/148
TXT Stop mechanisms under subclass 144 in which the moving parts of the machine
    are brought to rest by a positive stop.


CLS 192/149
TXT Stop mechanisms under subclass 148 in which the positive stop is combined
    with a cushion element.


CLS 192/150
TXT Stop mechanisms under subclass 116.5 in which some part of the power or
    power and current connection is automatically disengaged upon occurrences
    of an overload.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56.1+,  for clutches which release upon overload.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 467+ for wrenches or screwdrivers which yield
    upon a selected torque being reached.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 32, for
    overload release devices associated with comminutors.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 434 for electric motor
    systems including a yieldable member in the mechanical output of the motor
    with means actuated by the yieldable member for controlling the motor other
    than by deenergization to limit the motor load, current or torque, and
    subclasses 474+, for electric motor systems including a yieldable member in
    the output of the motor with means actuated by the yieldable member for
    deenergizing the motor.


CLS 192/200
TXT Clutch element resiliently carried on hub:

    Device under ELEMENTS wherein a clutch-engaging member is rotatable about
    an axis and has a friction surface which is mounted on a hollow cylindrical
    component by recoilably yieldable means that connect the member to the
    component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55.2+,  for a combination of a resiliently mounted clutch-element and such
    structure as is necessary to form an operative clutch assemblage other than
    as provided for in subclass 70.17.

    70.17+, for a combination of resiliently mounted clutch-element and such
    structure as is necessary to form an operative multidisc clutch assemblage
    as defined in (1) Note under subclass 70.11.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings and Flexible Couplings for Rotary
    Shafts, subclasses 51+, for a resilient connection, per se, between a shaft
    and a driven member such as a clutch.


CLS 192/201
TXT Speed-responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein structure is provided for
    affecting the degree of resilience of the clutch engaging member relative
    to the cylindrical component in response to the rate of rotation thereof.


CLS 192/202
TXT Manually adjustable:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein structure requiring manipulation
    is provided for varying the degree of resiliency of the clutch engaging
    member relative to the cylindrical component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for adjusting devices, per se.


CLS 192/203
TXT Coil spring detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the recoilably yieldable means
    comprises an elongated resilient member formed into a helix and the shape
    or material of the resilient member is cited as significant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 166+ for coil springs, per se.


CLS 192/204
TXT Specified bushing:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein a sleeve or plain bearing is
    disposed between the hub and a member to which a friction surface is
    affixed to maintain concentricity between the hub and member and the shape
    or material of the sleeve or bearing is cited as significant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 129+ for a rotary plain bearing, per se.


CLS 192/205
TXT Separate seat detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein a separate disc or cup is
    provided at an end of the recoilably yieldable means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 170+ for a spring end thrust member.


CLS 192/206
TXT Relatively axially movable hub sections:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the hollow cylindrical component
    comprises at least two parts which are displaceable with respect to one
    another in a direction parallel to the axis of rotation.


CLS 192/207
TXT Circumferential resilience:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the recoilably yieldable means
    deforms to permit limited relative rotation between the friction surfaces
    and the hollow cylindrical component in a plane perpendicular to the axis
    of rotation.


CLS 192/208
TXT With fluid damping:

    Subject matter under subclass 207 wherein a liquid or gas is provided to
    affect the relative rotation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings and Flexible Couplings for Rotary
    Shafts, subclasses 24+ for a flexible coupling in which a liquid or gas is
    used to affect or effect the coupling.


CLS 192/209
TXT Nonmetallic:

    Subject matter under subclass 207 wherein the recoilably yieldable means
    includes at least one elastomeric member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, subclass 153 for a spring device comprising an
    elastomeric body, per se.


CLS 192/210
TXT Interposed friction element:

    Subject matter under subclass 209 wherein a separate element is provided
    between a face of a member carrying the friction surface and a generally
    radial face of a member carried by the cylindrical component, said element
    in rubbing contact with at least one of the faces.


CLS 192/210.1
TXT Biasing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein the element is urged into rubbing
    contact with at least one face by a separate spring member.


CLS 192/211
TXT And coil spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 209 wherein the recoilably yieldable means
    further includes at least one elongated resilient member formed into a
    helix.


CLS 192/212
TXT Coil spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 207 wherein the recoilably yiedable means
    includes at least one elongated resilient member formed into a helix.


CLS 192/213
TXT Plural helical coil spring damping stages:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 wherein the recoilably yieldable means
    includes at least two elongated resilient members each formed into a helix
    and wherein for a first range of angles of relative rotation at least one
    of the resilient members acts to oppose the relative rotation with a first
    force and for a second range of angles of relative rotation at least one
    other of the resilient members acts to oppose further relative rotation
    with a second net force which differs from the first force.

    (1)     Note. The at least two resilient members provide at least two
    damping stages which may be due to different spring stiffnesses or to a
    summing of the force of a second resilient member with the force of a first
    member after a predetermined clearance between an end of the second
    resilient member and a member which acts to compress the resilient member
    is taken up.


CLS 192/213.1
TXT Plural axially spaced springs:

    Subject matter under subclass 213 wherein a first helical resilient member
    has a centerline disposed a predetermined distance from a centerline of a
    second helical resilient member in a direction parallel to the axis of
    rotation.


CLS 192/213.11
TXT Interposed friction element:

    Subject matter under subclass 213.1 wherein a separate element is provided
    between a face of a member carrying the friction surface and a generally
    radial face of a member carried by the cylindrical component, said element
    in rubbing contact with at least one of the faces.


CLS 192/213.12
TXT Biasing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 213.11 wherein the element is urged into
    rubbing contact with at least one face by a separate spring member.


CLS 192/213.2
TXT Plural radially spaced springs in a common radial plane:

    Subject matter under subclass 213 wherein a first helical resilient member
    has a centerline disposed a predetermined distance from a centerline of a
    second helical resilient member in a common plane perpendicular to the axis
    of rotation.

    (1)     Note. If the centerline of the first and second resilient members
    are also spaced from one another in a direction parallel to the axis of
    rotation, classification in subclasses 213.1+ is proper.


CLS 192/213.21
TXT Interposed friction element:

    Subject matter under subclass 213.2 wherein a separate element is provided
    between a face of a member carrying the friction surface and a generally
    radial face of a member carried by the cylindrical component, said element
    in rubbing contact with at least one of the faces.


CLS 192/213.22
TXT Biasing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 213.21 wherein the element is urged into
    rubbing contact with one face by a separate spring member.


CLS 192/213.3
TXT Interposed friction element:

    Subject matter under subclass 213 wherein a separate element is provided
    between a face of a member carrying the friction surface and a generally
    radial face of a member carried by the cylindrical component, said element
    in rubbing contact with at least one of the faces.


CLS 192/213.31
TXT Biasing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 213.3 wherein the element is urged into
    rubbing contact with one face by a separate spring member.


CLS 192/214
TXT Interposed friction element:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 wherein a separate element is provided
    between a face of a member carrying the friction surface and a generally
    radial face of a member carried by the cylindrical component, said element
    in rubbing contact with at least one of the faces.


CLS 192/214.1
TXT Biasing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 214 wherein the element is urged into rubbing
    contact with one face by a separate spring member.

    FOREIGN ART COLLECTION


CLS 192/FOR100
TXT Devices for operating clutches by electric action.



CLS 193/
TTL CONVEYORS, CHUTES, SKIDS,  GUIDES, AND WAYS

CLS 193/
TXT Includes devices limited to guiding material either vertically,
    horizontally or at an inclination.



    (1)     Note.  The material may be either individual articles or fluent.
    It may be guided and acted on by the force of gravity or may be acted on by
    power applied either by hand or machinery to move the material up an
    inclined way or horizontally.  The devices classified, here, however, do
    not include the combination of the chute, skid or way with the power
    mechanism, neither does this class include guides connected to a specific
    hopper for delivering articles to machines or for dispensing them.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 182, Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses
    48+ for chutes combined with means utilizable by a person (e.g., handrail
    or ladder) or with means to sustain life (e.g., ventilation means).

    (3)     Note.  For mere tubes and pipes, see Class 138, Pipes and Tubular
    Conduits.

    (4)     Note.  The following related art is noted, See Classes:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 464+.

    14,     Bridges, subclass 69.5

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 165+.

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclass 86.

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 328.1 to 340.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 304 for chute means combined with
    glassworking means, and see the "Search Notes" thereunder.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 863+ for samplers and tollers.

    86,     Ammunition and Explosive-Charge Making, subclasses 45 and 46.

    100,    Presses, subclass 167 for plural stage roll-type mills not
    elsewhere provided for and having a chute between stages.

    104,    Railways, subclasses 56, 69, 70, 134, 135, and 164.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 158.1, 239, 247, 252, 254, 256,
    279, 301, and 436.

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 102, 116, 117, and 118.

    111,    Planting, generally.

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 106 and 113.

    114,    Ships, subclass 375.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 51.011+, 52.1 to 56.1, 402, 408+, 449,
    456+, 464, 475+, 515, 521, and 843+.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 242.

    137,    Fluid Handling, for fluid handling not otherwise provided for.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate apparatus subclasses.

    186,    Merchandising, subclasses 2, 19 and 34.

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 311, 359+ and 523+.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 233+ and
    509+.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 14.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 476+.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses and see section VI of
    the class definition of Class 221 for a statement of the line between the
    classes.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 526+ and 566+, and see the notes thereto for
    dispenser outlets.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, in general, for methods
    or apparatus to move material using other than its leading or trailing
    ends, especially subclass 196.1 for a passive guide combined with a
    material feeder that may include a nominal recitation of a supply or
    take-up coil (e.g., less than a support for such a coil or a cooperative
    relationship between a tension or exhaust detector and reel driving or reel
    stopping means, etc.).

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclasses 39+, 99+ and 107+.

    232,    Deposit and Collection Receptacles, subclasses 44 to 63.

    235,    Registers, subclass 98.

    238,    Railways:  Surface Track,   subclasses 10 and 13.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses and see section 9 of the main class definition of that class
    (241).

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 176+ for a nonpower driven
    conveying device combined with an ore treating metallurgical furnace.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 32+.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, generally.

    291,    Track Sanders, generally.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclass 61.

    298,    Land Vehicles:  Dumping, subclass 7.

    312,    Supports: Cabinet Structure, subclasses 35, and indented
    subclasses, 121, 124, and 210.5.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 68 and 187.

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 445+ for antifriction  bearings.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 101+ for road
    material distribution means.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 119+ for flumes.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, generally.

    413,    Sheet Metal Container Making, subclasses 34+, 45+ and 56+.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, various subclasses having handling
    devices which include chutes, skidways, etc. such as subclasses 209, 216,
    224, 276, 228+, 288+, 376+, 425, 537+, 571, and 598.

    417,    Pumps, subclass 232.

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclasses 88+ for an amusement
    device providing a surface for a gliding vehicle and subclasses 116+ for an
    amusement type body slide.


CLS 193/1
TXT Devices not otherwise classifiable.


CLS 193/2
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having either pipes or troughs through
    which material may pass under the influence of gravity.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 104, Railways, subclasses 53 and 69.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 182, Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses
    48+ for a chute with a handrail or ladder, or with means to sustain life.


CLS 193/3
TXT Apparatus under subclass 2 for loading vehicles, generally including
    distributors or "trimmers."

    (1)     Note.  See Classes 14, Bridges, subclass 69.5, 119, Animal
    Husbandry, subclass 82; 296, Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclass 61.


CLS 193/4
TXT Apparatus under subclass 2 for unloading vehicles.

    (1)     Note.  See Classes 105, Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 252 and
    256; 280, Land Vehicles, subclass 32; 296, Land Vehicles: Bodies and Tops,
    subclass 61; 298, Land Vehicles:  Dumping, subclass 7, and 414, Material or
    Article Handling, subclasses 529+ and 537.


CLS 193/5
TXT Chute under subclass 4 wholly supported by the vehicle wall.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 537+ for a self-loading or
    unloading vehicle having a skidway.


CLS 193/6
TXT The chute under subclass 4 consists of an open trough made in sections
    relatively slidable longitudinally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 32.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclass 61.

    298,    Land Vehicles:  Dumping, subclass 7.


CLS 193/7
TXT Apparatus under subclass 2 especially adapted for preventing fruit from
    injury.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 25.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 56, Harvesters, subclass 328.1, and indented
    subclasses.


CLS 193/8
TXT Apparatus under subclass 2 for mailable letters or packages.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 232, Deposit and Collection Receptacles, subclass
    44, and indented subclasses.


CLS 193/9
TXT Apparatus under subclass 2 for grain-drilling machines.

    (1)     Note.  See Classes 111, Planting, and 222, Dispensing, generally
    especially subclasses 526+ and 566+.


CLS 193/10
TXT Chutes under subclass 2 for a rotary drum agitator or mixer.

    (1)     Note.  For chutes combined with significant agitating means, see
    Class 366, Agitating, subclasses 68 and 187.


CLS 193/11
TXT Apparatus under subclass 2 provided with a liquid or steam nozzle for
    wetting or washing down material or preventing dust.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 202, Distillation: Apparatus, subclasses 253 and
    262 and indented subclasses.


CLS 193/12
TXT Apparatus under subclass 2 wherein the chute is a spiral.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 35 and 36, for spiral rollerways.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 182, Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclass
    48, and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 147.


CLS 193/13
TXT Spiral chutes with means for directing material in different directions.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 28, 31, 36, and 39.


CLS 193/14
TXT Wherein the chute under subclass 2 is made in sections, some of which may
    be moved out of alignment for discharging material at different points.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 23 and 29.


CLS 193/15
TXT Wherein the chute under subclass 2 is mounted for vertical movement of the
    entire chute.


CLS 193/16
TXT Wherein the chute under subclass 2 may be swung in both a horizontal and a
    vertical direction.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 25.

    (2)     Note.  See Classes 209, Classifying, Separating, and Assorting
    Solids, subclasses 233+; 138, Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 120, and
    414, Material or Article Handling, subclass 592.


CLS 193/17
TXT Wherein the chute under subclass 2 is capable of being swung upwardly only.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 209, Classifying, Separating, and Assorting
    Solids, subclass 233, and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 533+.


CLS 193/18
TXT Wherein the chute under subclass 17 is counterbalanced.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 535+ for a power-driven
    conveyor combined with a chute that swings to a discharging position.


CLS 193/19
TXT Wherein the effective counterbalance under subclass 18 is varied for
    different positions of the chute.


CLS 193/20
TXT Wherein the chute under subclass 18 has a controlling gate or valve.


CLS 193/21
TXT Wherein chutes under subclass 17 are provided with gates or valves.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 20.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 536.


CLS 193/22
TXT The horizontally-swinging chute is composed of a plurality of sections
    swiveled together.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 23.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 414, Material or Article Handling, subclass 592.


CLS 193/23
TXT The swinging chute delivers to different chutes or receptacles.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 14, 22, and 29.


CLS 193/24
TXT Wherein miscellaneous movable chutes under subclass 2 are provided with a
    counter-balance.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 18 and 19.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 535+ for a power-driven
    conveyor combined with a chute that swings to a discharging position when a
    load accumulating on the chute reaches a predetermined weight.


CLS 193/25
TXT The chute under subclass 2 is made flexible throughout its length,
    generally of flexible material.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 7.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 56, Harvesters, subclass 328.1, and indented
    subclasses.


CLS 193/27
TXT Apparatus under subclass 2 wherein the material passes through zigzag
    passages, or the sections of the chute are connected to form a zigzag
    passage.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 32.


CLS 193/28
TXT Means under subclass 27 provided for taking off material at different
    points.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclass 32.


CLS 193/29
TXT The chute consists of a vertical pipe with means for discharging material
    at different elevations.


CLS 193/30
TXT The vertical-pipe chute consists of telescopic sections.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 138, Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 120 for
    telescopic, jointed, short sections of pipe.


CLS 193/31
TXT The general miscellaneous subclass under subclass 2 for chutes provided
    with gates or valves for directing material in different directions.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 13, 23, 28, and 36.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses
    119.01+ and 861+ for fluid handling apparatus including means for directing
    fluid in different directions.


CLS 193/32
TXT The chute under subclass 2 has means for retarding the velocity of material
    therein.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 7, 27 and 28.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 312 for article dispensers not
    otherwise provided for having interior article guiding means.


CLS 193/33
TXT The chute under subclass 2 is secured to or built into the wall of an
    inclosure or building.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 5 and 6.


CLS 193/34
TXT The chute under subclass 33 is secured to or passes through the vertical
    wall of some structure or building.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 3, 5, 6, 8, and 11.


CLS 193/35
TXT Apparatus under the class definition which consists of a series of rollers
    over which things may be conveyed.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 42.


CLS 193/36
TXT Apparatus under subclass 35 provided with means for changing the direction
    of things conveyed.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 13, 28, 31, and 39.


CLS 193/37
TXT Wherein the structure under subclass 35 is of the roller itself.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 384, Bearings, subclass 549 for a roller bearing
    on a fixed support.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 474, Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or
    Components, particularly subclasses 166+ for friction drive pulleys or
    guide rolls.

    (3)     Note.  See Class 198, Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 501,
    824+ and 842 for support rollers for endless belt conveyors.

    (4)     Note.  See Class 492, Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not
    elsewhere provided for, and see the notes thereunder.


CLS 193/38
TXT Ways under the class definition for guiding articles but not suitable for
    fine material.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 280, Land Vehicles, subclass 32.


CLS 193/39
TXT Apparatus under subclass 38 provided with means for changing the direction
    of articles.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 13, 28, 31, and 39.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 59.2+ for stacked article type of rack
    having a dispensing means therein.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for article dispensing
    or feeding devices many of which include a chute type structure as the
    supply receptacle or as a passageway from a source of supply to an outlet.
    See particularly subclasses 261, 280 and 312.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 35+ for article containing
    magazine structures having means to facilitate the removal of the articles
    therefrom.


CLS 193/40
TXT Apparatus under subclass 38 having means for retarding the velocity of
    articles on the way.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 32, and see the SEARCH CLASS notes
    thereto.


CLS 193/41
TXT Unitary structures under the class definition for guiding articles from a
    higher to a lower level or the reverse, but incapable of use with fine
    material.

    (1)     Note.  See Classes 14, Bridges, subclass 69.5,  280, Land Vehicles,
    subclass 32.


CLS 193/42
TXT Unitary devices under the class definition provided with a roller over
    which articles may be supported in loading, unloading, or stacking them.


CLS 193/44
TXT Apparatus under the class definition, having means whereby (1) a conveyed
    article is turned to have its posture* or its heading* or its leaning*
    intentionally or significantly varied with relation to said path, or (2) a
    conveyed article which is not in a predetermined posture relative to its
    conveyed path is caused to be removed from or to abandon the path
    determined for those articles being conveyed in the predetermined posture.
    (The terms having asterisks are discussed in (2) Note below.)

    (1)     Note.  In this and indented subclasses the disclosed intent of the
    claimed apparatus is important.  Therefore, although the structure of two
    devices may be similar, a patent disclosing such structure will be placed
    into this portion of the schedule only if its claimed disclosure is clearly
    for accomplishing one of the functions set forth in the definition by
    asterisk (*) and further discussed in (2) Note that follows.  The similar
    structure that is disclosed as having a different function or that is
    disclosed in terms of its structure and not disclosing such a function will
    be found elsewhere in accordance with its claimed function or its claimed
    structure that is provided for in other subclasses of this schedule.

    (2)     Note.  For the purpose of helping to visualize the terms to be
    discussed herein, assume a three-dimensional line figure consisting of
    three axes (i.e., an "X-axis", a "Y-axis" and a "Z-axis") that intersect at
    a mutual point, each axis being perpendicular to the plane in which both of
    the other two axes lie.  Assume further that said mutual point lies within
    the article to be conveyed and that (a) the conveyor moves the article in
    the direction of the "X-axis", (b) the conveyor has a major article support
    surface that extends transversely (i.e., athwart) of said direction along
    the "Z-axis" and (c) the remaining axis that extends perpendicularly of the
    plane formed by both of the previously-mentioned axes is the "Y-axis".
    With these assumptions in mind, variation in "posture" will refer only to a
    turning of an article about a "Z-axis", variation in "heading" will refer
    only to a turning of an article about a "Y-axis", and variation in
    "leading" will refer only to a turning of an article about an "X-axis".  It
    is understood that any or all of these turnings may occur sequentially or
    simultaneously, and that if there is a major dimension of the article being
    conveyed, such major dimension may coincide with any or none of the axes
    mentioned.

    (3)     Note.  This note is in amplification of preceding notes regarding
    intent of disclosure and attitude of article relative to its conveyed
    direction. The predetermined path of an article may be straight or arcuate
    or crooked, but whatever the path, if the conveyed article is at a first
    point on the path with a particular dimension in a particular relationship
    to the path (e.g., its length is parallel to the path), and is thereafter
    at a second point with the same dimension in a different relationship to
    the path (e.g., its length is perpendicular to the path), its attitude
    relative to the path has been changed.  For proper placement of a patent
    into this or an indented subclass the claim thereof must recite the change
    in attitude of the article in significant terms; that is, the recitation
    must be clear, and the change must be intentional.  A patent that discloses
    a change in attitude that is incidental to the movement of an article on a
    conveyor system (e.g., an article on a nonrectilinear system could change
    its attitude relative to a particular compass direction, but not
    necessarily change relative to conveyed direction) will not be placed
    herein, but will be placed on the basis of the claimed function or
    structure of the conveyor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 373+ for conveyors which are
    power-driven or for conveyor systems having at least one power-driven
    section wherein the claimed disclosure of the conveyor or conveyor system
    is to change the posture of a conveyed article relative to its conveyed
    path.


CLS 193/45
TXT Apparatus under subclass 44 wherein said means is mechanically or manually
    activated to cause a change in the posture of the conveyed article, the
    posture changing function of said means being nonconveying even though said
    means may otherwise also function as a chute, skid, guide or way.

    (1)     Note.  A linkage or other device which is driven by the article to
    be oriented is not included in this subclass.  See, for example, subclass
    48 for article engaging pivots which are moved upon engagement by the
    conveyed article.


CLS 193/46
TXT Apparatus under subclass 44 wherein the posture of the conveyed article is
    changed relative to its conveyed path because of its engagement with a
    particular configuration of the article engaging surface of the conveyor,
    said configuration acting on said article continuously as it moves over a
    portion or the entire extent of said surface.


CLS 193/47
TXT Apparatus under subclass 44 wherein the posture of the conveyed article is
    changed relative to its path because of its engagement with, or because
    under the influence of gravity it rotates about, immovable means associated
    with said conveyor.


CLS 193/48
TXT Apparatus under subclass 44 wherein the posture of the conveyed article is
    changed relative to its path because of its engagement with, or because
    under the influence of gravity it rotates about, means associated with the
    conveyor which may be variously positioned relative to the conveyor or
    which is movable upon being contacted by the moving article.


CLS 194/
TTL CHECK-ACTUATED CONTROL  MECHANISMS

CLS 194/
TXT This is the generic and residual class for control mechanisms adapted to be
    actuated by check means, and whose function is to govern the operation of
    an associated machine or system.  This class provides for such control
    mechanisms, per se, the combination of such control mechanism with either a
    machine or system, a cabinet structure containing the control mechanism
    peculiar to this class  (e.g., a value accumulator, a coin chute, etc.), or
    a check, per se, designed specifically to actuate a control mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  The term "check," as used herein, refers to an object having
    or representing a monetary value which can be measured or verified, and
    includes coins and substitutes therefor which have an analogous function.

    (2)     Note.  In disclosures of parts or the whole of a machine or system
    and check-actuated control mechanism for governing the operation therefor,
    the mere inclusion of "coin- (or other check) controlled means" as an
    element in claims setting forth specific structure of the machine or
    system, but in which no specific feature of the control mechanism is
    claimed, is not sufficient to justify placement in this class.  The
    disclosure will be placed in the class in which the machine or system is
    classifiable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclass 35 for a check-controlled
    closure wherein no specific feature of the control mechanism is claimed.

    81,     Tools, subclass 3.09 for the combination of a check-actuated
    control mechanism with a receptacle closure remover.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 290, 323.6 and 357 for
    the combination of a check-actuated control mechanism with a corn popper,
    beverage infusor or food cooker.

    101,    Printing, subclass 71 for a mail-box machine, and Digest 23 for a
    collection of coin-controlled printing machines.

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclass 125 for a check-controlled weighing scale.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 2 for a coin-controlled telegraph system
    wherein no specific feature of the control mechanism is claimed.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 2 for check-controlled dispensing apparatus
    where in no specific feature of the control mechanism is claimed.

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, appropriate subclass for a game machine
    or apparatus which operates in response to a check, wherein no significance
    is attributed to the check-actuated control mechanism.

    348,    Television, subclasses 1+ for use survey and accounting of
    television systems, see particularly subclass 3 for billing.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 90+ for a
    check-controlled parking meter wherein no specific detail of the control
    mechanism is claimed.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 143+ for those combinations
    of a telephone with a check-actuated control mechanism wherein the control
    mechanism is modified to adapt especially for use with telephone circuitry,
    or wherein the telephone circuitry is modified by reason of the presence of
    the control mechanism.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclass 673 for a machine of that class
    wherein no specific detail of the control mecchanism is claimed.

    453,    Coin Handling, appropriate subclass for apparatus whose function is
    to handle coins without controlling a machine or system external to the
    apparatus.

    463,    Amusement Devices: Games, for a game or for a chance machine or
    apparatus which operates in response to a check, wherein no significance is
    attributed to the check-actuated control mechanism.

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, for a game or for a chance machine
    or apparatus which operates in response to a check, wherein no significance
    is attributed to the check-actuated control mechanism.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 538+ for the combination of a check-actuated
    control mechanism with a spirometer where the spirometer is significantly
    claimed.

    D20,    Sales and Advertising Equipment, subclass 9 for an advertising
    display for use with a coin-control mechanism on a vending machine.


CLS 194/200
TXT WITH MEANS RESPONSIVE TO MALFUNCTION:

    Apparatus under the class definition combined with a mechanism which is
    specifically designed to operate when the control mechanism is out of
    working order.


CLS 194/201
TXT Antijackpotting device:

    Apparatus under subclass 200 wherein the malfunction-responsive mechanism
    includes a device adapted to prevent the release of an excessive number of
    checks from within the control mechanism.


CLS 194/202
TXT WITH ADDITIONAL, DISPARATE MEANS PREVENTING FRAUDULENT ACTUATION:

    Apparatus under the class definition combined with an additional mechanism
    which is specifically designed to defer either the actuation of the control
    mechanism by an improper check, repeated actuations of the control
    mechanism by a single check, or actuation of the control mechanism without
    a check being deposited.

    (1)     Note.  A control mechanism with means for testing the validity of a
    check is common in this art, and is not considered to be additional and
    desparate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302+,   for a control mechanism which includes means for testing the
    validity of a check.


CLS 194/203
TXT Means preventing use of tethered check:

    Apparatus under subclass 202 in which the additional mechanism includes a
    device adapted to prevent actuation of the control mechanism by, and
    subsequent withdrawal from the control mechanism of, a check attached to a
    long, slender member (e.g., a string).


CLS 194/204
TXT Antijarring device:

    Apparatus under subclass 202 in which the additional mechanism includes a
    device from being actuated by a blow delivered to the apparatus.


CLS 194/205
TXT CONTROL MECHANISM ACTUATED BY CHECK, OTHER THAN COIN (E.G., SLUG, TOKEN,
    CARD, ETC.), WHICH IS MUTILATED OR RETAINED:

    Apparatus under the class definition wherein (a) the control mechanism is
    adapted to be actuated by a check other than a piece of stamped metal
    serving as legal tender, and (b) the check, or a part therefor, is either
    destroyed or kept by the apparatus after actuation.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of the check used to actuate control mechanisms in
    this subclass and its indents are coin-substitutes (slugs and tokens),
    folding money, cards, and articles useful for redemption of money (aluminum
    cans, glass bottles, etc.).

    (2)     Note.  Apparatus wherein such a check is inserted into a control
    mechanism to operate a machine or system, and subsequently removed intact,
    is excluded from this subclass, and is classified with the machine or
    system.


CLS 194/206
TXT By pliant currency (e.g., dollar bill, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 205 wherein the control mechanism is adapted to be
    actuated by legal tender comprising a sheet of flexible material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclass 110 for apparatus adapted to
    either identify the denomination of currency, or spot counterfeit bills,
    but which do not control another machine or system.


CLS 194/207
TXT Including light sensitive testing device:

    Apparatus under subclass 206 including means to measure a light-conducting
    characteristic of the legal tender.


CLS 194/208
TXT Having means to mutilate check:

    Apparatus under subclass 205 including means to destroy the check in whole
    or in part as it actuates the control mechanism.


CLS 194/209
TXT And means to test physical characteristic of check:

    Apparatus under subclass 208 including means for analyzing a material
    property of the check.


CLS 194/210
TXT Having means to read magnetically encoded check:

    Apparatus under subclass 205 adapted to be actuated by a check which either
    emanates a magnetic field, or responds to a magnetic field, to send a coded
    signal; and including a device which interprets the signal.


CLS 194/211
TXT Having electric circuit with switch operated by check:

    Apparatus under subclass 205 wherein the control mechanism includes an
    electric circuit and a switching device within the circuit, the switching
    device adapted to be operated by the check.


CLS 194/212
TXT Having means to test physical characteristic of check:

    Apparatus under subclass 205 including means to test the check by analyzing
    a material property of the check.


CLS 194/213
TXT Test electrical or magnetic property:

    Apparatus under subclass 212 wherein the check is tested by analyzing
    either its ability to conduct electric current or its response to a
    magnetic field.


CLS 194/214
TXT CHECK, PER SE:

    Apparatus under the class definition wherein significance is attributed to
    the check itself.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 27.5 for a check, per
    se, representing no monetary value


CLS 194/215
TXT INCLUDING VALUE ACCUMULATOR FOR PLURAL CHECKS:

    Apparatus under the class definition wherein the control mechanism is
    adapted to receive a plurality of checks before actuation, and includes a
    device which sequentially registers and totals the value of deposited
    checks pending actuations.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus found in this subclass and its indents may either
    require a plurality of checks adding up to a predetermined value to produce
    a single actuation, or store credit upon receipt of checks, from which
    value is taken upon each of a plurality of actuations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229+,   for a control mechanism adapted to receive a plurality of checks
    before actuation, but wherein values are not registered and totalled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 7+ for cash registers, per se, and subclass
    100 for registering boxes.

    453,    Coin Handling, subclasses 1+ for change makers, per se, and
    subclasses 3+ for coin assorters, per se.


CLS 194/216
TXT Having solid state circuitry:

    Apparatus under subclass 215 wherein the registering device includes an
    electric circuit including a semiconductor.


CLS 194/217
TXT Programmable:

    Apparatus under subclass 216 wherein the control mechanism responds to the
    registering device according to a prescribed sequence of instructions, and
    the instructions can be changed.


CLS 194/218
TXT Including binary counter:

    Apparatus under subclass 216 wherein the circuit includes a dipole
    electronic register.


CLS 194/219
TXT And electric circuit with switch operated by check:

    Apparatus under subclass 215 including a circuit within the control
    mechanism, but apart from the registering device, and a switching device in
    the circuit, the switching device including a movable circuit maker/breaker
    adapted to be moved by a check.


CLS 194/220
TXT Accumulator includes electric circuit having stepper switch:

    Apparatus under subclass 219 wherein the registering device includes an
    additional electric contacts and a wiper element, the wiper element adapted
    to move from one of the contacts to another in response to operation of the
    switching device.

    (1)     Note.  Each operation of the check- operated switch results in a
    movement of the wiper element according to a scheduled sequence of
    movements, until the element arrives at a final position where the
    additional circuit is closed.


CLS 194/221
TXT Single check-operated switch:

    Apparatus under subclass 220 wherein there is only one switching device
    adapted to be operated by a check within the control circuit


CLS 194/222
TXT Plural stepper switches:

    Apparatus under subclass 219 wherein the registering device includes a
    plurality of wiper elements.


CLS 194/223
TXT Accumulator having ratchet wheel:

    Apparatus under subclass 219 wherein the registering device includes a gear
    wheel with ratchet teeth.


CLS 194/224
TXT Having electric circuit completed by check itself:

    Apparatus under subclass 215 including an electric circuit within the
    control mechanism, wherein the circuit is adapted to utilize a check as a
    bridge for current.


CLS 194/225
TXT Mechanical accumulator:

    Apparatus under subclass 215 wherein the registering device consists solely
    of a plurality of movable mechanical parts, and the value is determined by
    the relative movement of those parts.


CLS 194/226
TXT Having ratchet wheel:

    Apparatus under subclass 225 wherein the registering device includes a gear
    wheel with ratchet teeth.


CLS 194/227
TXT And indexing means differently responsive to various check values:

    Apparatus under subclass 226 adapted to receive checks having different
    values, in which the registering device includes a regulator which limits
    the rotation of the ratchet wheel to a radial distance corresponding to a
    specified number of teeth, including a mechanism whereby various numbers of
    teeth correspond to various values.


CLS 194/228
TXT And means to impart thrust to check to operate accumulator:

    Apparatus under subclass 225 including a member adapted to exert force upon
    a check within the control mechanism, causing relative movement between the
    control mechanism and the check, and resulting in operation of the
    registering device.


CLS 194/229
TXT CONTROL MECHANISM RESPONSIVE TO PLURALITY OF CHECKS:

    Apparatus under the class definition adapted to recieve a plurality of
    checks, wherein the mechanism requires several checks in order for
    actuation to occur.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains apparatus which simply requires a
    plurality of checks, and does not register or total the value of the checks.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215,    for apparatus adapted to receive a plurality of checks, registering
    and totalling their value.


CLS 194/230
TXT Including electric circuit with switch operated by check:

    Apparatus under subclass 229 including an electric circuit within the
    control mechanism, the circuit having a switching device with a movable
    circuit maker/breaker adapted to be operated by a check.


CLS 194/231
TXT Single switch:

    Apparatus under subclass 230 having only one switching device adapted to be
    operated by a check.


CLS 194/232
TXT Including part locked by detent and released by check:

    Apparatus under subclass 229 including a movable member and a detent member
    adapted to engage with one another, wherein the members are normally
    positioned for engagement, and are acted upon by the checks to cause one to
    shift relative to the other, so the movable member will be free of
    engagement with the detent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237,    for apparatus wherein a plurality of checks operate to prevent
    either a movable member or a detent member, which do not normally engage
    with one another, from shifting into a position where engagement occurs.

    247,    for apparatus including a part locked by a detent and released by a
    single check.


CLS 194/233
TXT Stationary detent:

    Apparatus under subclass 232 wherein the detent member is fixed in position.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass, the movable member must shift for it to be
    released.


CLS 194/234
TXT And means to impart thrust to check to unlock part:

    Apparatus under subclass 232 including a member adapted to exert a force
    upon a check within the control mechanism, causing relative movement
    between the control mechanism and the check and resulting in the relative
    shifting.


CLS 194/235
TXT Pivoted detent:

    Apparatus under subclass 234 wherein the detent member is adapted to swing
    about an axis.


CLS 194/236
TXT And pivoted released part:

    Apparatus under subclass 235 wherein the movable member is also adapted to
    swing about an axis


CLS 194/237
TXT Check prevents locking of part by detent:

    Apparatus under subclass 229 including a movable member and a detent member
    adapted to engage with one another; wherein the members normally are not in
    position for engagement with one another, but one member will shift into
    position for engagement with the other as actuation is attempted, unless a
    check keeps it from shifting into that position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232,    for apparatus requiring a plurality of checks to release a part
    which is normally locked.

    290,    for apparatus requiring only a single check to prevent a part from
    becoming locked by a detent.


CLS 194/238
TXT Including reciprocating check mover:

    Apparatus under subclass 237 including a member adapted to impart motion to
    the checks, wherein the member moves linearly, alternately in opposite
    directions.


CLS 194/239
TXT INCLUDING ELECTRIC CIRCUIT WITH SWITCH OPERATED BY CHECK:

    Apparatus under the class definition including an electric circuit within
    the control mechanism, and a switching device within the circuit having a
    movable circuit maker/breaker adapted to be operated by a check.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211,    for apparatus including an electric circuit with a switch operated
    by a check other than a coin.

    219,    for apparatus including an electric circuit with a switch operated
    by a check and including an accumulator.

    230,    for apparatus including an electric circuit with a switch operated
    by a plurality of checks.


CLS 194/240
TXT And holding circuit responsive to operation of switch:

    Apparatus under subclass 239 including an additional electric circuit
    which, when actuated, is adapted to maintain the machine or system ready to
    operate until a predetermined condition has been met, wherein the
    additional circuit is actuated in response to operation of the switching
    device.


CLS 194/241
TXT Controlled by timer:

    Apparatus under subclass 240 including a timing device, wherein the
    additional circuit remains actuated for a period of time determined by the
    timing device.


CLS 194/242
TXT Weight of check operates switch:

    Apparatus under subclass 241 wherein the switching device is operated by
    the effect of gravity upon the check


CLS 194/243
TXT And means to impart thrust to check to operate switch:

    Apparatus under subclass 239 including a member adapted to exert a force
    upon the check within the control mechanism and cause movement thereof,
    resulting in operation of the switching device.


CLS 194/244
TXT Weight of check operates switch:

    Apparatus under subclass 239 wherein the switching device is operated by
    the effect of gravity upon the check.


CLS 194/245
TXT And means holds switch in operative position:

    Apparatus under subclass 244 wherein a means is provided whereby the
    switching device can be maintained in position to keep the machine or
    system operable.

    (1)     Note.  The switch is adapted to be released from that position only
    when a predetermined condition is met.


CLS 194/246
TXT Switch held by weight of check:

    Apparatus under subclass 245 wherein the switching device is maintained in
    position by the effect of gravity upon the check itself


CLS 194/247
TXT INCLUDING PART LOCKED BY DETENT AND RELEASED BY CHECK:

    Apparatus under the class definition including a movable member and a
    detent member adapted to engage with one another, wherein the members are
    normally positioned for engagement, and are acted upon by the check to
    cause one to shift relative to the other, thereby releasing the movable
    member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232,    for apparatus including a part locked by  a detent and released by
    a check.

    290,    for apparatus wherein a check operates to prevent either a movable
    member or a detent member which do not normally engage with one another
    from shifting into a position where engagement occurs.


CLS 194/248
TXT Stationary detent:

    Apparatus under subclass 247 wherein the detent member is fixed in position.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass, the movable member must shift for it to be
    released.


CLS 194/249
TXT And means to impart thrust to check to unlock part:

    Apparatus under subclass 247 including a member adapted to exert force upon
    the check within the control mechanism to cause both movement to the check
    and the relative shifting of the member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    260,    for apparatus wherein a movable part is unlocked by the weight of a
    check.


CLS 194/250
TXT Noncontacting, relatively movable parts connected by check:

    Apparatus under subclass 259 including a plurality of elements adapted for
    relative movement but which do not contact one another, nor will they upon
    relative movement; wherein the elements are adapted to be linked to one
    another by the check.

    (1)     Note.  The plurality of elements may include either the movable
    member or the detent member, or it may include other elements which, when
    they are linked and relatively shift; but it may not consist simply of the
    movable member and the detent member, since they by definition have the
    capability of contacting one another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263,    for apparatus including noncontacting, relatively movable parts
    cconnected by a check and operated by the weight of a check.

    293+,   for apparatus including noncontacting, relatatively movable parts
    connected by a check wherein there are no normally locked parts.


CLS 194/251
TXT Connected parts pivot:

    Apparatus under subclass 250 wherein each of the elements is adapted to
    swing about an axis when linked.


CLS 194/252
TXT Connected parts reciprocate:

    Apparatus under subclass 250 wherein eacch of the elements is adapted to
    move linearly, and alternately in opposite directions, when linked.


CLS 194/253
TXT Pivoted detent:

    Apparatus under subclass 249 wherein the detent member is adapted to swing
    about an axis.


CLS 194/254
TXT And pivoted released part:

    Apparatus under subclass 253 wherein the movable member is also adapted to
    swing about an axis.


CLS 194/255
TXT Unidirectionally pivoted:

    Apparatus under subclass 254 wherein the movable member is contrained to
    swing in only one direction.


CLS 194/256
TXT Spring biased:

    Apparatus under subclass 254 wherein the movable member is yieldably urged
    toward a rest position by a resiliently deformable element.


CLS 194/257
TXT Released part biased by spring:

    Apparatus under subclass 253 wherein the movable member is yieldably urged
    toward a rest position by a resiliently deformable element.


CLS 194/258
TXT Pivoted released part:

    Apparatus under subclass 249 wherein the movable member is adapted to swing
    about an axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261,    for apparatus having a pivoted released part, released by the
    weight of a check.


CLS 194/259
TXT Reciprocating released part:

    Apparatus under subclass 249 wherein the movable member is adapted to move
    linearly, alternately in opposite directions.


CLS 194/260
TXT Weight of check unlocks part:

    Apparatus under subclass 247 wherein the effect of gravity upon the check
    causes the relative shifting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249,    for apparatus wherein a part is unlocked by a check after thrust is
    imparted to it.

    339,    for apparatus wherein a check is tested for validity by analyzing
    its weight.


CLS 194/261
TXT Pivoted released part:

    Apparatus under subclass 260 wherein the movable member is adapted to swing
    about an axis.


CLS 194/262
TXT Unidirectionally pivoted:

    Apparatus under subclass 261 wherein the movable member is constrained to
    swing in only one direction.


CLS 194/263
TXT Noncontacting, relatively movable parts connected by check:

    Apparatus under subclass 262 including a plurality of elements adapted for
    relative movement, but which do not contact one another, not will they upon
    relative movement; wherein the elements are adapted to be linked to one
    another by the check.

    (1)     Note.  The plurality of elements may include either the movable
    member or the detent member, or it may include other elements which, after
    being linked, cause the members to relatively shift.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    293+,   for apparatus having noncontacting, relatively movable parts
    connected  by a check but not unlocked part.


CLS 194/264
TXT Having means to hold check in contact with detent:

    Apparatus under subclass 262 wherein the check, after being inserted,
    contacts the detent member; and including an element adapted to retain the
    check in contact with the detent member.


CLS 194/265
TXT And ejector to remove check:

    Appartus under subclass 264 including an element adapted to forcibly
    separate the check from the detent member.


CLS 194/266
TXT Check passageway has movable portion:

    Apparatus under subclass 264 including a guideway adapted to define a path
    for the check as it passes there through, wherein the guideway includes a
    part which can be relatively shifted.


CLS 194/267
TXT Having motor for driving released part:

    Apparatus under subclass 262 including a motor adapted to swing the movable
    member.


CLS 194/268
TXT Spring motor:

    Apparatus under subclass 267 wherein the motor comprises an elastically
    deformable element restoring itself from a deformed condition adapted to
    swing the movable member.

    (1)     Note.  The movable member swings as the spring restores itself from
    a deformed condition.


CLS 194/269
TXT And regulating escapement mechanism:

    Appartus under subclass 268 including a wheel adapted to be driven by the
    motor, either integral with or connected to the movable member, carrying a
    plurality of teeth on its circumferrence, and a catch member having a first
    pawl lockingly engaging the wheel and a second pawl spaced from the first
    pawl and out of engagement with the wheel; wherein the catch member shifts
    upon actuation, withdrawing the first pawl from engagement with the wheel
    and advancing the second pawl into locking engagement with the wheel, and
    the wheel turning through an arc determined by the pawls.


CLS 194/270
TXT And regulating ratchet mechanism:

    Apparatus under subclass 268 including a wheel adapted to be driven by
    motor, either integral with or connected to the movable member, carrying a
    plurality of teeth upon its circumference, and a pawl adapted to engage the
    wheel wherein, upon actuation, the wheel is turned through an arc
    determined by the pawl.


CLS 194/271
TXT Spring biased detent:

    Apparatus under subclass 268 wherein the detent is spring biased.


CLS 194/272
TXT And regulating ratchet mechanism:

    Apparatus under subclass 267 including a wheel adapted to be driven by the
    motor, either integral with or connected to the movable member, carrying a
    plurality of teeth upon its circumference, and a pawl adapted to engage the
    wheel; wherein, upon actuation, the wheel is turned through an arc
    determined by the pawl.


CLS 194/273
TXT Weight motor:

    Apparatus under subclass 267 wherein the movable member is designed to be
    swung by gravity.


CLS 194/274
TXT Having regulating escapement mechanism:

    Apparatus under subclass 273 including a wheel adapted to be turned by the
    weight, either integral with or connected to the movable member, carrying a
    plurality of teeth on its circumference, and a catch member having a first
    pawl lockingly engaging the wheel and a second pawl spaced from the first
    pawl and out of engagement with the wheel; wherein the catch member shifts
    upon actuation, withdrawing the first pawl from engagement with the wheel
    and advancing the second pawl into locking engagement with the wheel, and
    the wheel is turned through an arc determined by the pawls.


CLS 194/275
TXT Spring biased detent:

    Apparatus under subclass 273 wherein the detent member is spring biased.


CLS 194/276
TXT Having regulating ratchet mechanism:

    Apparatus under subclass 262 including a wheel either integral with or
    connected to the movable member and carrying a plurality of teeth upon its
    circumference, and a pawl adapted to engage the wheel; wherein, upon
    actuation, the wheel is turned through an arc determined by the pawl.


CLS 194/277
TXT Having means to hold check in contact with detent:

    Apparatus under subclass 261 wherein the check, after being inserted,
    contacts the detent member; and including an element adapted to retain the
    check in contact with the detent member.


CLS 194/278
TXT Having motor for driving released part:

    Apparatus under subclass 261 including a motor adatped to swing the movable
    member.


CLS 194/279
TXT Spring motor:

    Apparatus under subclass 278 wherein the device comprises an elastically
    deformable element restoring itself from a deformed condition adapted to
    swing the movable member.


CLS 194/280
TXT Weight motor:

    Apparatus under subclass 261 wherein the movable member is designed to be
    swung by gravity.


CLS 194/281
TXT Weight of check:

    Apparatus under subclass 280 wherein the movable member is swung by the
    effect of gravity upon the check.


CLS 194/282
TXT Having means to hold check in contact with detent:

    Apparatus under suibclass 260 wherein the check, after being inserted,
    contacts the detent member; and including adapted to retain the check in
    contact with the detent member.


CLS 194/283
TXT One piece detent:

    Apparatus under subclass 282 wherein the detent member consists of a single
    part.


CLS 194/284
TXT Biased by spring:

    Apparatus under subclass 283 wherein the detent member is spring biased.


CLS 194/285
TXT Released part biased by spring:

    Apparatus under subclass 260 wherein the movable member is spring biased.


CLS 194/286
TXT To lock position:

    Apparatus under subclass 285 wherein the movable member is biased to its
    locked position.


CLS 194/287
TXT Released part biased by weight:

    Apparatus under subclass 260 wherein the movable member is biased by
    gravity.


CLS 194/288
TXT Pivoted detent:

    Apparatus under subclass 260 wherein the detent member is adapted to swing
    about an axis


CLS 194/289
TXT Biased by spring:

    Apparatus under subclass 288 wherein the detent member is spring biased.


CLS 194/290
TXT CHECK PREVENTS LOCKING OF PART BY DETENT:

    Apparatus under the class definition including a movable member adapted to
    actuate the control mechanism through its movement, and a detent member
    adapted to engage with the movable member before actuation occurs; wherein
    one member is adapted to shift into position for locking with the other
    member as actuation is attempted, unless a check is present.

    (1)     Note.  In apparatus found herein, the detent member does not
    normally engage the movable member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237,    for apparatus wherein a plurality of checks prevent the locking of
    a movable part by a detent.

    247,    for apparatus wherein a locked part is released by a check.


CLS 194/291
TXT Including check mover:

    Apparatus under subclass 290 including a member adapted to impart motion to
    the check.


CLS 194/292
TXT Pivoted:

    Apparatus under subclass 291 wherein the motion imparting member is adapted
    to swing about an axis.


CLS 194/293
TXT INCLUDING NONCONTACTING, RELATIVELY MOVABLE PARTS CONNECTED BY CHECK:

    Apparatus under the class definition including a plurality of elements
    adapted for relative movement but which do not contact one another, nor
    will they upon relative movement; wherein the elements are adapted to be
    linked to one another by the check.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250+    and 263, for apparatus including noncontacting, relatively movable
    parts connected by a check to release a locked part.


CLS 194/294
TXT And means to impart thrust to check to move part:

    Apparatus under subclass 293 including a member adapted to exert force upon
    the check within the control mechanism and both  move the check and cause
    relative movement of the parts.


CLS 194/295
TXT Having pivoted part:

    Apparatus under subclass 294 wherein at least one of the elements is
    adapted to swing about an axis when linked.


CLS 194/296
TXT Coaxial pivoted parts:

    Apparatus under subclass 295 wherein a plurality of the elements are
    adapted to swing about the same axis when they are linked.


CLS 194/297
TXT Spring biased part:

    Apparatus under subclass 296 wherein at least one of the coaxial elements
    is spring biased.


CLS 194/298
TXT And linearly reciprocating part:

    Apparatus under subclass 295 wherein another of the elements is addapted to
    move along a straight line alternately in opposite directions.


CLS 194/299
TXT Both parts spring biased:

    Apparatus under subclass 298 wherein each of the elements is yieldably
    urged to a rest position by a resiliently deformable element.


CLS 194/300
TXT Parts spring biased:

    Apparatus under subclass 294 wherein a plurality of the elements is spring
    biased.


CLS 194/301
TXT Weight of check moves part:

    Apparatus under subclass 293 wherein at least one of the elements is
    adapted to the moved by gravity.


CLS 194/302
TXT INCLUDING MEANS TO TEST VALIDITY OF CHECK:

    Apparatus under the class definition wherein a characteristic of a check
    deposited in the control mechanism is analyzed to verify that it matches
    that expected of an appropriate check before the macchine or system is
    actuated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 163 for a coin tester, per se.


CLS 194/303
TXT By testing material composition:

    Apparatus under subclass 302 including means for analyzing a characteristic
    of the substance comprising the check.


CLS 194/304
TXT Having electric circuit completed by check:

    Apparatus under subclass 303 wherein the analyzing means comprises an
    electric circuit and a pair of contact members within the circuit, the
    members spaced from each other and each adapted to contact the check,
    wherein the check serves as a bridge through which electric current passes,
    connecting the contact members to complete the circuit.


CLS 194/305
TXT Circuit includes thermocouple:

    Apparatus under subclass 304 wherein the circuit includes a pair of
    conductive elements having different compositions connected serially at
    spaced junctions, adapted to produce a potential difference when the
    junctions sense different temperatures.


CLS 194/306
TXT Circuit  includes three or more contacts:

    Apparatus under subclass 304 including at least three contact members.


CLS 194/307
TXT Circuit includes movable contact:

    Apparatus under subclass 304 wherein one of the contact members is adapted
    to move relative to the other.


CLS 194/308
TXT Pivotable:

    Appartus under subclass 307 wherein a contact member is adapted to swing
    about an axis.


CLS 194/309
TXT Cam actuated:

    Apparatus under subclass 308 wherein the pivoted contact member is driven
    by a camming member.


CLS 194/310
TXT And means to impart thrust to check:

    Apparatus under subclass 304 including a member adapted to exert force upon
    the check, resulting in relative movement between the check and the
    apparatus.


CLS 194/311
TXT Unidirectionally pivoted:

    Apparatus under subclass 310 wherein the force exerting member is adapted
    to swing about an axis in only one direction.


CLS 194/312
TXT And means to stop check at contact:

    Apparatus under subclass 304 including a member adapted to arrest motion of
    the check and maintain it in contact with the contact member.


CLS 194/313
TXT Pivotable:

    Apparatus under subclass 312 wherein the arresting member is adapted to
    swing about an axis.


CLS 194/314
TXT Solenoid actuated:

    Apparatus under subclass 313 wherein the arresting member is caused to
    swing by the induced axial motion of a core within an electromagnetic coil.


CLS 194/315
TXT Circuit includes spring contact:

    Apparatus under subclass 304 wherein one of the contact members consists of
    a resillently yieldable member.


CLS 194/316
TXT Circuit includes elongated contact (e.g., long slide, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 304 wherein one of the contact members has
    substantial length:


CLS 194/317
TXT Having electric circuit influenced by check:

    Apparatus under subclass 303 wherein the analyzing means comprises an
    electric circuit having an operating characteristic which is affected by
    the relative passage of the check.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    320,    for apparatus wherein the check's path of travel is affected by a
    magnetic field.


CLS 194/318
TXT Passing between transmitting and receiving coils:

    Apparatus under subclass 317 including a pair of inductive coils at
    different potentials, each having a plurality of conductive turns, and an
    electric field created by current flowing from one to the other, wherein
    the check enters the electric field.


CLS 194/319
TXT Entering coil:

    Apparatus under subclass 317 including an inductive coil with a plurality
    of conductive turns, wherein the check passes into the turns.


CLS 194/320
TXT Having magnetic field acting on check:

    Apparatus under subclass 303 wherein the analyzing means comprises a member
    adapted to produce magnetic lines of force, and a path of travel for the
    check which intersect the lines of force.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass, since the check enters a magnetic field, a
    check composed of material which is responsive to the magnetic force will
    have its path altered thereby.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    317,    for apparatus wherein a check affects a magnetic field and thereby
    influences an electric circuit.


CLS 194/321
TXT And scavenger mechanism:

    Apparatus under subclass 320 including a device adapted to remove a check
    retained within the control mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  The purpose of a scavenger is to clear the check passageway
    of checks that are stuck.


CLS 194/322
TXT Movable magnet:

    Apparatus under subclass 321 wherein the scavenger comprises a magnetic
    member mounted for movement relative to the path of travel.


CLS 194/323
TXT Movable portion within check passageway:

    Apparatus under subclass 321 including a guideway adapted to define the
    path of travel for the check, wherein the scavenger comprises a part of the
    guideway shiftable relative to another part.


CLS 194/324
TXT And magnetically actuated deflector or stop:

    Apparatus under subclass 320 including a device adapted to either change
    the direction of, or arrest the motion of, a moving check, wherein the
    device operates in response to a magnetic force.


CLS 194/325
TXT Speed or path of check altered:

    Apparatus under subclass 320 wherein the magnetic force changes either the
    rate of motion or the direction of a moving check.


CLS 194/326
TXT After impact with rigid body (i.e., bounce test):

    Apparatus under subclass 325 wherein the motion is changed after the check
    strikes a nonyielding member (e.g., an anvil).


CLS 194/327
TXT Check impacts against rigid body (i.e., bounce test):

    Apparatus under subclass 303 wherein a moving check is so directed as to
    strike a nonyielding member (e.g., an anvil).


CLS 194/328
TXT Having means to test surface configuration:

    Apparatus under subclass 302 including means for analyzing a characteristic
    of form of a face or edge of the check.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334+,   for apparatus wherein the check's size is analyzed.


CLS 194/329
TXT Raised annular rim:

    Apparatus under subclass 328 wherein the testing means includes a device
    adapted to determine the presence of a flange at the check's border
    projecting perpendicularly from its surface.


CLS 194/330
TXT Both faces of check:

    Apparatus under subclass 328 wherein the testing means is adapted to
    analyze opposite sides of the check before operation of the machine or
    system occurs.


CLS 194/331
TXT Serrated edge:

    Apparatus under subclass 328 wherein the testing means includes a device
    adapted to determine the presence of a series of grooves in the check's rim.


CLS 194/332
TXT Apertured check:

    Apparatus under subclass 328 wherein the testing means includes a device
    adapted to determine the presence of a relative movement between the check
    and the control mechanism.


CLS 194/333
TXT And means to impart thrust to check:

    Apparatus under subclass 332 including a member adapted to exert a force
    upon the check, resulting in relative movement between the check and the
    control mechanism.


CLS 194/334
TXT Having means to test size:

    Apparatus under subclass 302 including means for analyzing the magnitude of
    a dimension of the check.


CLS 194/335
TXT Thickness:

    Apparatus under subclass 334 wherein the control mechanism is adapted to be
    actuated by a check having a breadth dimension, including a member adapted
    to analyze the magnitude of the breadth dimension.


CLS 194/336
TXT By cradle sensor:

    Apparatus under subclass 334 wherein the testing means comprises a pivoted
    lever, movable by check, having an aperture defining a passageway of fixed
    size permitting passage of a similarly sized check.


CLS 194/337
TXT By pivoted lever sensor:

    Apparatus under subclass 334 wherein the testing means comprises a member
    adapted to turn about an axis, analyzing the diameter of a check passing
    thereby.


CLS 194/338
TXT By fixed gauge:

    Apparatus under subclass 334 wherein the testing means comprises an element
    or a plurality of elements, defining a passage of fixed size permitting a
    check of similar size to pass therethrough.


CLS 194/339
TXT Having means to test weight:

    Apparatus under subclass 302 including means for analyzing the check's
    weight.


CLS 194/340
TXT By adjustable counterbalance:

    Apparatuss under subclass 339 wherein the testing means includes a member
    adapted to exert a force opposed to the check's weight, wherein the
    magnitude of the opposing force can be changed and maintained at various
    values.


CLS 194/341
TXT By spring counterbalance:

    Apparatus under subclass 339 wherein the testing means includes a member
    adapted to exert a force opposed to the check's weight, wherein the
    opposing force is exerted by a spring.


CLS 194/342
TXT INCLUDING MEANS TO IMPART THRUST TO CHECK:

    Apparatus under the class definition either combined with or including a
    member adapted to exert force upon a check, resulting in relative movement
    between the check and the control mechanism.


CLS 194/343
TXT Introducing device:

    Apparatus under subclass 342 wherein the thrust imparting member is adapted
    to impel the check into the control mechanism.


CLS 194/344
TXT INCLUDING SPECIFIC CHECK PASSAGEWAY (E.G., CHUTE DETAIL, ETC.):

    Apparatus under the class definition wherein significance is attributed to
    a guideway adapted to define a path of travel for the check.


CLS 194/345
TXT And scavenger mechanism:

    Apparatus under subclass 344 including a device adapted to remove a check
    from the guideway.


CLS 194/346
TXT And movable check diverter:

    Apparatus under subclass 344 including a device adapted to selectively
    alter the path of the check


CLS 194/347
TXT Having means to divert spurious matter:

    Apparatus under subclass 344 wherein a means providing an alternate path is
    provided for material having a form or consistency different from that of a
    proper check, and improper material is diverted into the alternate path.


CLS 194/348
TXT Liquid diverter:

    Apparatus under subclass 347 designed to divert material having a liquid
    consistency.


CLS 194/349
TXT Wire or filament diverter:

    Apparatus under the subclass 347 designed deflect an elongated strand of
    solid material.


CLS 194/350
TXT WITH SPECIFIC CABINET STRUCTURE:

    Apparatus under the class definition with a housing for the apparatus or
    the machine or system, wherein significance is attributed to the housing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, appropriate subclasses for housing
    structure for general use, and especially subclasses 35+ for dispensing
    machine housings.


CLS 194/351
TXT Slot closure:

    Apparatus under subclass 350 including an entrance for a check, and a
    device adapted to selectively block the entrance.


CLS 194/352
TXT Check exhibitor:

    Apparatus under subclass 350 including a member adapted to render a check
    within the housing visible to the housing's exterior.


CLS 194/353
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Apparatus under the class definition not otherwise provided for.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 194/900
TXT PARKING METER WITH BARRIER:

    This art collection is intended to collect all check-actuated parking
    meters which are combined withsome form of barrier means.


CLS 194/901
TXT CHECK-OPERATED TOLL BOOTH:

    This art collection is intended to collect all toll collection facilities
    which are designed to be operated automatically in response to the deposit
    of a check.


CLS 194/902
TXT CHECK-OPERATED DEVICE FOR CONTROLLING PARKING LOT:

    This art collection is intended to collect all devices for controlling
    access to, or exit from, a parking lot, wherein the devices operate
    automatically in response to the deposit of a check.


CLS 194/903
TXT CHECK-CONTROLLED TURNSTILE:

    This art collection is intended to collect all turnstiles which operate
    automatically in response to the deposit of a check.


CLS 194/904
TXT CHECK-OPERATED RELEASER FOR AUTOMOBILE SERVICE EQUIPMENT:

    This art collection is intended to collect all retention devices for
    equipment designed to service automobiles wherein the device releases the
    equipment in response to the deposit of a check.


CLS 194/905
TXT SHOPPING CART RETURN:

    This art collection is intended to collect all facilities designed to
    release a shopping cart after receipt of a deposit, and to receive the
    shopping cart after use and return the return deposit.


CLS 194/906
TXT VIDEO CASSETTE VENDOR:

    Apparatus for handling video cassettes after receipt of a deposit or for
    receiving a returned video cassette for credit or return of a deposit.


CLS 196/
TTL MINERAL OILS:  APPARATUS

CLS 196/
TXT This class relates to apparatus for treating, refining, or recovering
    mineral oils such as petroleum, coal tar, pitch, asphalt or related
    products, not elsewhere classified. Included specifically in this class are
    apparatus for dewaxing, solvent extraction or refining of such mineral oils
    as well as stills designed for mineral oil distillation and condensers
    peculiarly adapted and limited to the mineral oil art.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 104.011+,
    104.02 and 104.03 for implements there provided for which are used for
    removing carbon and which are not claimed as being permanently associated
    with the vaporizing apparatus but may be applied to other chambers.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 72 for
    apparatus therein provided for combined with means to recover vapors or
    other substances from gases.

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, appropriate subclass for apparatus
    for converting mineral oil to gases (e.g., by cracking).

    62,     Refrigeration, particularly subclasses 93, 272, and 900 for
    processes and apparatus for separating vapors from gases by refrigeration.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, for apparatus for gas separation, in
    general, even though disclosed or claimed for separating mineral oil vapors
    from hydrocarbon gases or combined with broadly recited means for
    recovering the mineral oil after separation.

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses for presses not elsewhere provided
    for and particularly subclass 104 for presses with drain means for
    expressed liquid.

    110,    Furnaces, for miscellaneous furnace structure.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, appropriate subclass for liquid
    heaters and vaporizers of general application.

    137,    Fluid Handling, for fluid feeding and handling not elsewhere
    provided for, particularly subclass 386 for liquid level responsive flow
    control.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for a heat exchanger not
    limited to the mineral oil art.

    166,    Wells, appropriate subclass for apparatus for treating oil or oil
    bearing mineral while in the ground.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, appropriate subclasses for a
    process of producing coke from solid carbonaceous material and a mineral
    oil distillate.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, appropriate subclass for apparatus
    involving distillation of general utility or which may be used to treat
    mineral oils among other materials.  Also apparatus for distilling solid
    carbonaceous materials is found in Class 202.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, appropriate subclass, for a
    process involving distillation of general utility or which may treat
    mineral oils among other materials.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclass for
    apparatus for treating mineral oils involving more than the mere thermal
    effects of the electrical or wave energy.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, for processes of treating,
    refining or recovering mineral oils and for mineral oil products.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, for processes and apparatus for
    separating liquids including mineral oils involving no chemical treatment
    of the mineral oil.

    219,    Electric Heating, for electric heaters which may be used for
    heating oil.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, appropriate
    subclasses, for means for automatically maintaining desired temperatures or
    humidity.

    252,    Compositions, particularly subclasses 319 for processes for
    breaking emulsions including petroleum emulsions where there is no
    additional treatment of the oil.

    366,    Agitating, for means to cause fluid materials to be commingled.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    gas-liquid scrubbing devices.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, for a process or
    apparatus for treating oil or oil bearing minerals while in situ in a
    tunnel or excavation.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 256 and 261 for extracting
    apparatus; and subclasses 171, 177, 191, and 211 for catalytic apparatus.

    431,    Combustion, appropriate subclass for residual combustion apparatus.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, appropriate
    subclass for apparatus specialized for use in making, separating, or
    purifying mineral oils or hydrocarbons by operations that include
    fermentations.

    494,    Imperforate Bowl:  Centrifugal Separators, appropriate subclasses,
    for apparatus for breaking up a mixture of fluids or fluent substances into
    two or more components by centrifuging within a generally solid-walled,
    receptacle-like member.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, appropriate subclasses for
    processes of preparing, recovering or purifying hydrocarbons of known
    composition.


CLS 196/14.5
TXT Apparatus under the class definition for separating wax from a petroleum
    oil to either recover the wax or purify the oil.

    (1)     Note.  Most of the patents in this subclass include apparatus for
    solvent treating the oil combined with some additional step such as
    chilling, or apparatus for sweating the oil out of the wax.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14.52,  for apparatus for separating mineral oils by solvent extraction.
    Apparatus for separation of wax from mineral oil by solvent extraction is
    in this subclass (14.5).

    46,     for apparatus for separating impurities or nonmineral materials
    from mineral oils.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclass, for refrigeration processes
    and apparatus even though employed for separating wax from mineral oil.

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses, for presses not elsewhere provided
    for. Note particularly subclass 104 for presses having a drain duct or
    channel for liquid expressed from the material pressed.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclass 24 for processes of
    separating paraffin waxes from mineral oils.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 175 and 774 for separating processes and apparatus
    involving the use of heaters or coolers.

    494,    Imperforate Bowl:  Centrifugal Separators, appropriate subclasses
    for a separator of that class, as explained is the search note to that
    class appearing in the definition of this class (196).


CLS 196/14.52
TXT Apparatus under the class definition especially adapted for the solvent
    extraction of mineral oils.

    (1)     Note.  The apparatus classified herein is adapted to the separation
    of mineral oils of natural origin into its component fractions as well as
    the separation of undesirable nonmineral oil components from mineral oils
    by use of solvents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14.52,  for apparatus for dewaxing mineral oils which may be by solvent
    extraction.

    46,     for apparatus for refining mineral oils by reacting with chemicals
    to separate nonmineral oil components therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclass 311 for processes
    of extracting mineral oils with solvents.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 255+ for extraction apparatus in
    general.


CLS 196/46
TXT Apparatus under the class definition peculiarly adapted for the separation
    of impurities or nonmineral oil components from mineral oils.

    (1)     Note.  The apparatus classified herein provides for the most part
    for apparatus for treating mineral oils with chemicals to separate or
    remove nonmineral oil components therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14.5,   for apparatus used to dewax mineral oils.

    14.52,  for apparatus specially adapted to extract mineral oils with
    solvents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclass, for apparatus for refining by
    refrigeration alone.

    96,     Gas Separation: Apparatus, for apparatus for gas separation.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, appropriate subclass, for a
    thermolytic distillation process including recovery of oil.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, for apparatus for separating components
    of a nonmineral oil mixture by distillation.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, appropriate subclass, for a
    process of separating components of a nonmineral oil mixture by
    distillation.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and  Products, subclass 177 for processes
    of refining mineral oils.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclass for
    processes and apparatus for purifying nonmineral oil liquids and for
    filters and decanting devices.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclass, for
    gas-liquid scrubbing devices.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 252 for chemical apparatus in general.

    494,    Imperforate Bowl:  Centrifugal Separators, appropriate subclasses,
    for a separator of that class, as explained in the search note to that
    class appearing in the definition of this class (196).


CLS 196/46.1
TXT Apparatus under subclass 46 which also includes filtering means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, for filters and for processes of
    filtering mineral oil, per se.


CLS 196/98
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising the combination of a
    vaporizer and a condenser where that apparatus is peculiar to the art of
    mineral-oil distillation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, for similar apparatus for distilling
    other materials.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 92, 100 and 347
    for mineral oil distillation processes.


CLS 196/99
TXT The combination of a vaporizer with a condenser, usually a dephlegmator or
    fractionating column, under subclass 98, provided with means for returning
    part or all of the condensate from the condenser to the vaporizer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139,    for dephlegmator or fractionating columns alone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic subclass 29, for a
    thermolytic distillation process including the step of returning a volatile
    to the carbonization zone.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 152, for separatory distillation
    apparatus including the combination of a vaporizer, a condenser and means
    for returning at least a part of the condensate from the condenser to the
    vaporizer.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclasses 75, 78, 82, 84,
    93, 97, and 98, for a separatory distillation process including the step of
    returning a condensate to a distillation zone.


CLS 196/100
TXT Fractionating columns under subclass 99 provided with heating means for
    causing vaporization of the liquid-mineral-oil- feeding stock.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139,    for columns which are heated merely by hot vapors that are treated
    and which are generated in a separate vaporizer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclass 153, for separatory distillation apparatus including association
    of still and fractionating column.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, appropriate subclasses.


CLS 196/102
TXT Vaporizing apparatus under subclass 98 containing some means for causing
    condensation within the vaporizer or for collecting condensate formed
    within the condenser.


CLS 196/103
TXT Vaporizing apparatus under subclass 98 having heads or domes that are
    provided with means for condensing, filtering, or otherwise treating vapors
    from the vaporizer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 508.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclass 31.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for a heat exchanger not
    limited to the mineral oil art.


CLS 196/104
TXT Vaporizing apparatus under the class definition peculiarly designed for use
    in the distillation of mineral oils.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators. 165, Heat Exchange, appropriate
    subclasses, for a heat exchanger of general application.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclasses 152 and 232, for distillation
    apparatus in which the distilland is vaporized.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, appropriate subclasses for a
    process of vaporizing a liquid.


CLS 196/105
TXT A plurality of interconnected mineral-oil vaporizers, under subclass 104.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111,    for vaporizers provided with baffles.


CLS 196/106
TXT A plurality of mineral-oil vaporizers under subclass 105 connected in
    series, so that the oil being distilled passes from one vaporizer to the
    next.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclass 17.1.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 173, for a separatory
    distillation system having a plurality of stills in series.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclass 71, for a separatory
    distillation process including a series of distillation steps.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclass 49 and subclass 350
    for processes including plural serial stages of mineral oil conversions or
    distillations, respectively.


CLS 196/107
TXT Vaporizing compressing heating tubes or coils under subclass 104 for
    heating the mineral-oil and a drum or expansion chamber connected to the
    tube or drum.  An expansion valve may or may not be placed between the tube
    and drum, and the drum may or may not be heated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for tubular vaporizers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 40 and 235.11+.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclass 2.

    208,    Minerals Oils:  Processes and Products, subclass 131 for processes
    of cracking mineral oils employing this type of apparatus.


CLS 196/108
TXT Vaporizers, under subclass 107 having a means for returning the oil from
    the drum back to the tube for retreatment.


CLS 196/109
TXT Vaporizers under subclass 108, wherein a part at least of the drum is
    placed vertically above a part of the tube.


CLS 196/110
TXT Vaporizers under subclass 104, for mineral-oil distillation that are
    tubular and usually of comparatively small cross section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for tube and drum type of vaporizer.


CLS 196/111
TXT Vaporizers under subclass 104 having therein one or more partitions or
    baffles either placed in the vapor space to separate it into a plurality of
    chambers or placed in the liquid space to cause the liquid oil to follow a
    tortuous path through the vaporizer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128,    for vaporizers having baffles to cause the oil to flow in films.


CLS 196/112
TXT Vaporizers under subclass 104 mounted so as to permit their rotation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 11 and 12.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclass 6.1.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 238, for separatory distillation
    apparatus in which the still is mounted upon an axis and rotated or tilted
    during distillation.


CLS 196/114
TXT Vaporizers under subclass 104 adapted for the distillation of mineral-oils
    under reduced pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclass 17.1.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 357 and 366 for
    processes of distilling mineral oil under reduced pressure.


CLS 196/115
TXT Vaporizers under subclass 104 having peculiar or nonconventional shapes.


CLS 196/116
TXT The combination of a furnace with a mineral-oil vaporizer under subclass
    104 where the combination is designed to solve a problem peculiar to the
    art of mineral-oil distillation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, for miscellaneous furnace structure alone.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, for the combination of furnace with
    a closed liquid heater and vaporizer of general application.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 344 for open water heaters.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 30 for furnace lining formation or repair and see the notes
    thereto.


CLS 196/117
TXT The combination of furnace with mineral-oil vaporizer under subclass 116
    having flues for combustion gases passing through the vaporizer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 44.1 and 135.1.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclasses 28.1+ and 40.


CLS 196/118
TXT Mineral-oil vaporizers under subclass 104 having therein baths that are
    liquid, but substantially nonvolatile at the vaporizing temperature
    employed.  Such material may be metal, fusible salts, or heavy hydrocarbons.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclass 92.


CLS 196/119
TXT Mineral-oil vaporizers under subclass 104 that are provided with jackets
    around at least part of their periphery.  These jackets may be for the
    purpose of heating, cooling, or heat insulating the vaporizer.


CLS 196/120
TXT Mineral-oil vaporizers under subclass 104 provided with heating means other
    than furnaces, liquid baths, jackets, or other conventional heating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for a heat exchanger, per se.


CLS 196/121
TXT Mineral-oil vaporizers under subclass 120 heated in part at least by
    electric heaters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclasses 65 and 103.

    392,    Electric Resistance Heating Devices, subclasses 386+ for
    electrically heated vaporizer structure.


CLS 196/122
TXT Mineral-oil vaporizers under subclass 104 provided with means for removing
    carbon from the oil or from the vaporizer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124,    for vaporizers with mechanical agitators or circulators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 104.011+,
    104.02 and 104.03, or Class 414, Material or Article Handling, subclass
    291, and other appropriate subclasses, for carbon removing devices which
    are not claimed as being permanently associated with the vaporizing
    apparatus but may be applied to other chambers.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 379.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclass 2, for a
    thermolytic distillation process including the step of removing adhering
    carbon from the apparatus.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 241, for distilling apparatus
    including means for cleaning and decarbonizing or preventing the fouling of
    the retort or still or the tubes of the heating system therefore.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclass 48.


CLS 196/123
TXT Mineral-oil vaporizers under subclass 104 provided with means for causing
    or directing the circulation or agitation of the oil.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 379 and 406.1.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 108 for a heat exchanger with means
    directing recirculation, and subclass 109.1 for a heat exchanger with an
    agitator.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclass 367 for
    distillation processes with agitation.

    366,    Agitating, appropriate subclasses.


CLS 196/124
TXT Mineral-oil vaporizers under subclass 123 provided with moving or rotating
    mechanical means for causing or directing the circulation or agitation of
    the oil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    for means for removing carbon combined with vaporizer.


CLS 196/125
TXT Mineral-oil vaporizer under subclass 123 provided with baffles to cause the
    oil to cyclically circulate in a definite path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111,    for baffles or partitions to cause the oil to pass through the
    vaporizer in a tortuous path.


CLS 196/126
TXT Mineral-oil vaporizers under subclass 123 provided with means for injecting
    a gas, vapor, or liquid to cause circulation or agitation of the oil in a
    definite predetermined manner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for fluid injectors not designed or placed primarily to cause a
    definite path of circulation or agitation.


CLS 196/127
TXT Mineral-oil vaporizers under subclass 104 provided with means for injecting
    gas, vapor, or liquid into the oil being distilled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126,    for fluid injectors which cause a definite circculation or
    agitation of the oil.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 5.51+.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclass 16.1.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 125, 128, 356 and
    362 for processes for mineral oil treatment involving injecting a gas,
    vapor or liquid.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclass.


CLS 196/128
TXT Mineral-oil vaporizers under subclass 104 having means for causing the oil
    being distilled to assume the form of a film or spray.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers subclass 39, and subclass 501.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclasses 3 and 5.

    239,    Fluid Sprikling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses
    for nozzle devices, per se, especially subclass 193 for weir type discharge
    means discharging a film or curtain or fluid.


CLS 196/129
TXT Mineral-oil vaporizers under subclass 104 having tubes or legs projecting
    from the main body of the vaporizer down into the furnace, the ends of the
    tubes so projecting being closed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for heating tubes one end of which is connected with a vaporizer
    and the other end of which is connected either with a source of supply of
    oil or with the vaporizer.

    110,    for vaporizers consisting entirely of tubular elements.


CLS 196/130
TXT Mineral-oil vaporizers under subclass 104 that have bottoms of peculiar
    shape, construction, or position.


CLS 196/131
TXT Mineral-oil vaporizers under subclass 130 whose bottoms are not subjected
    to the direct heating action of the furnace or other heating means, usually
    for the purpose of avoiding the caking of precipitated carbon.


CLS 196/132
TXT Mineral-oil vaporizers under subclass 104 provided with means for
    automatically maintaining desired conditions, usually the temperature,
    constant within the vaporizer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141,    for condensing apparatus with similar automatic means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 448.1 and 449.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 200+ for automatic control of a heat
    exchhanger of general utility.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclass 1 for a thermolytic
    distillation process combined with the positive step of determining some
    characteristic of the distilland, vapor, residue or condensate.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 160 for a column having
    automatic temperature and/or pressure control.

    203,    Distillation:  Proceesses, Separatory, subclass 1, for a separatory
    distillation process including determining a characteristic or condition in
    the system.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, appropriate
    subclasses.


CLS 196/133
TXT Mineral-oil vaporizers under subclass 104 having some special feature of
    construction not otherwise provided for.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 192 for an in situ
    constructed type container or hopper, per se, having a material port.


CLS 196/134
TXT Mineral-oil vaporizers under subclass 104 having means for preheating the
    incoming oil by the heat of the vapors or the unvaporized residue of
    distillation.

    SEARCH  CLASS:

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclasses 24.1 and 46.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 66 for apparatus for exchanging heat
    between the supply and exhaust lines of a heated or cooled vessel.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclass 14 for heating the
    carbonaceous material by indirect heat exchange with a conversion product
    of the carbonization step.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclasses 150, 159 and 177, for
    distillation apparatus combined with a preheater.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, in which the feed is
    indirectly heated by recovered heat.


CLS 196/135
TXT Special means for feeding the oil to the vaporizer, under subclass 104.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, for fluid feeding and handling not otherwise
    provided for, particularly subclass 386 for liquid level responsive flow
    control.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclass 43.1.


CLS 196/136
TXT Special constructions under subclass 104 for vapor outlets.


CLS 196/137
TXT Miscellaneous attachments under subclass 104 for mineral-oil vaporizers.


CLS 196/138
TXT Apparatus under the class definition for condensing mineral-oil vapors
    which by construction and operation is peculiar to this art.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses, for a heat exchanger not
    specialized to condesing mineral-oil vapor.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, appropriate subclasses, for distillation
    apparatus particularly subclass 185.1.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products subclass 347 for distillation
    of mineral oils.


CLS 196/139
TXT Condensing apparatus under subclass 138, peculiar to this art, generally
    known in the art as dephlegmators or fractionating columns, where the
    condensate formed in cooler zone is reheated and partially revaporized by
    vapors in a hotter zone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    for similar devices combined with combined condensing and
    vaporizing apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclass 30, for a proocess of fractioonally condensing
    removed vapor.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subcalsses 153 and 158, for distillation
    apparatus including a fractionating column, and subclasses 179 and 198 for
    distillation apparatus including a dephlegmator.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclasses 22 and 87, for a
    distillation process in which tthe distillation process in which the vapor
    is in indirect heat exchange with the feed or the vapor is fractionally
    condensed.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, appropriate subclasses.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses.


CLS 196/140
TXT Condensing apparatus under subclass 138 peculiar to this art where the
    vapors are brought in direct contact with a cooling liquid, usually water.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses.


CLS 196/141
TXT Apparatus under subclass 138 for condensing mineral-oil vapors provided
    with means for automatically controlling the temperature of condensation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 281+ and 287+ for heat exchange means
    with automatic temperature or pressure control.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, appropriate
    subclasses.


CLS 196/155
TXT Apparatus under the class definition not provided for specifically above.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the patents classified in this subclass are for
    apparatus for recovering mineral oils from natural or converted gases.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclasses, for processes and apparatus
    for separating vapors from gases by refrigeration (e.g., liquefaction, gas
    compression).

    96,     Gas Separation: Apparatus, for apparatus for gas separation where
    the recovery of the mineral oil after separation is not included or is
    recited only broadly.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclass 340 for processes
    of separating mineral oils from natural or converted gases including
    specific recovery of the mineral oil vapor.


CLS 198/
TTL CONVEYORS:  POWER-DRIVEN

CLS 198/
TXT I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    A power-driven conveyor is an assemblage of elements for moving a load over
    a predeter- mined path or path section.  The assemblage generally includes
    a single frame structure mounting a power-driven load-advancing means which
    is used to advance the load over the predetermined path.

    The load-advancing means may comprise either a single load-advancing
    element or a group of like members acting as a single load-advancing
    device.  A group of like members may be considered as acting as a single
    unit if they coact one with the other to effect movement of the load, where
    said coaction occurs along the entire length of said path or path section.
    Some other criteria which generally indicate that a group of like members
    is acting as a single unit are:  a common frame structure supporting all
    the members; or a drive means for all the members, with the elements being
    driven at the same speed or over the same speed range.  The above are
    merely certain parameters that most groups acting as a single unit exhibit.
     As with any rule or definition, there will be exceptions.

    Subclass 584 should be limited to a conveying system composed of a
    plurality of sections which are joined to each other by means allowing
    ready connection or disconnection of the sections, said means further
    allowing the sections, to partake of a pivotal motion relative to each
    other. Examples of the type of patent which will be placed here are
    nonambulant articulated trains or movable articulated trains which are
    connected to a stationary element in the system.

    II.     The following explanations represent an attempt to clarify and
    limit the concepts of certain conveyor art terms, the first two applying to
    the manner in which they are encountered in Class 193, Conveyors, Chutes,
    Skids, Guides, and Ways, subclasses 44+.

    CHUTE

    A structure capable of guiding a gravity induced flow of material
    therethrough or thereon.  While a chute is more often than not an inclined
    passageway in the form of a trough, it occasionally takes the form of a
    conduit.

    Inasmuch as a chute with a gate, especially a chute in the form of a
    conduit, presents structure closely related to that of a hopper, such
    structures are distinguished on the basis of whether a storage concept
    exists (hopper) or does not exist (chute).

    A receptacle positioned in such manner as to impart the property of gravity
    induced flow to material contained therein, and, therefore, to be a source
    of supply to components "downstream" thereof.  While it is not essential
    that the contained material be "stored" for a finite period of time, there
    should be a concept of supporting it for an interval longer than that
    required for mere passage therethrough.

    A hopper has an inlet and an outlet, although the inlet may be merely an
    open side (of the receptacle).  The outlet, however, will have a provision
    whereby passage of the contents can be controlled (e.g., possibly a
    conveyor).

    The provision of chute-like structure integral with the hopper, whereby
    material is guided into the inlet or out of the outlet, should not be
    considered as constituting a separate element.  (This is in line with what
    appears to be a basic difference between chutes and hoppers; namely, a
    chute guides whereas a hopper stores and may guide).

    (1)     "Gravity-induced" is not intended to be construed to exclude those
    nondriven conveyors which utilize mechanical means (e.g., a vibrator) to
    start to maintain flow (i.e., bridge breaking).

    CONDITION RESPONSIVE

    Apparatus having (1) means to sense a condition of the environment
    surrounding the conveyor and means responsive to said sensing means to
    cause a change in the operating condition of the conveyor, or (2) means to
    sense a particular condition which may or may not exist  relative to the
    conveyor itself, such as speed, overload, motor temperature, etc., and
    means responsive to said sensing means to act to change the operating
    condition of the conveyor.

    III.    ORGANIZATION OF THE CLASS:

    A.      Perusal of the first-order (capitalized) titles of the schedule
    will show that the class is composed of a relatively few major collections
    of subclasses.  Search fields are provided for special-purpose and
    particular-function conveyors as well as for particular combinations of
    conveyor structure and subcombinations of conveyor structure.  Generally in
    order of superiority, the major collections provide for the following
    search fields:

    1.      Conveyor on a vehicle (subclasses 300+) or for people (subclasses
    321+).

    2.      Selective conveyor (subclasses  348+).

    3.      Conveyors handling a specific article or specific group of
    articles, including:

    a)      a conveyor "orienting" an article (subclasses 667+); or

    b)      a system of conveyors grouping plural articles into a group
    (subclasses 418+); or

    c)      a system of conveyors conveying articles as a stream wherein
    articles are successively arranges (subclasses 434+); or

    d)      a system of conveyors conveying articles each as a separate article
    (subclasses 463+).

    4.      Special conveyor or one having special features (subclasses 339+,
    493+, 502.1, 506+, and 347).

    5.      Arrangement of plural conveyors of which

    a)      one conveyor is not power-driven (subclasses 523+); and

    b)      all conveyors are power-driven (subclasses 570+).

    6.      Methods of conveying (subclass 617).

    7.      Conveyor, per se, including subcombinations (subclasses 618+).

    8.      Stopping of a conveyor (subclasses 854+).

    9.      The frame or supporting structure for a conveyor (subclasses 860.1).

    B.      In some of the collections summarized above (III-A-3), the
    disclosed intent of the claimed apparatus is significant and important.
    Mechanisms that are apparently similar in structure are used for different
    functions by modifying the arrangement or providing a different adjunct to
    the structure. The following summary cites subclasses involving apparently
    similar structure used for different functions:

    1.      A control means responsive to a sensing means will be found in:

    a)      301, when carried by a ground vehicle;

    b)      323, when part of a people-carrier;

    c)      341, when part of a working station;

    d)      368+, when part of a selective conveyor system;

    e)      376+, 395 or 401, when part of an "orienting" mechanism;

    f)      most of the subclasses of 418+ when used to control the operation
    of a group-forming mechanism (control of this operation is so much a part
    of grouping that the control subclasses have not been specifically set out);

    g)      437, when the function is the formation or arrangement of a stream
    of items;

    h)      464.1, when the function is to separate or convey a particular
    article;

    i)      502+, when responsive to weight variations;

    j)      507, when part of structure to collect load from the ground;

    k)      524, when part of a system having a nondriven conveyor;

    l)      571+, when part of a conveyor system;

    m)      634, 639, 718, 751, 794, and 810.1+, when part of a conveyor
    section (each noted subclass number is applicable to a different kind of
    conveyor section);

    n)      855, when part of a conveyor that is not specified as to the kind
    of conveyor under consideration.

    2.      An endlessly-orbiting conveyor, either as one belt or chain or as a
    plurality of connected components, will be found throughout the class, but
    particularly in:

    a)      326+, when used as a people-carrier.

    b)      375+, 384+, 393, 397, 404+, and 408, when used for "orienting"
    articles;

    c)      440+, 449+, when used in a stream-moving conveyor system;

    d)      469.1, when used to separate or convey a particular article;

    e)      515, when part of a structure to collect load from the ground;

    f)      545 and 547, when part of a system having a nonpower-driven
    conveyor;

    g)      606+, when part of a conveyor system;

    h)      626+, 725+, 793+, and 804+, when part of a conveyor section.

    3.      A rotating screw or helix will be particularly found in:

    a)      467.1, when used to separate or convey a particular article;

    b)      513, when part of a structure to collect load from the ground;

    c)      545, 548, 550.6, 550.10, when part of a system having a
    nonpower-driven conveyor;

    d)      657+, when part of a conveyor section.

    4.      A reciprocating or oscillating conveyor will be particularly found
    in:

    a)      429+, when used to form a group of articles;

    b)      468.01+, when used to separate or convey a particular article;

    c)      597, when part of a conveyor system;

    d)      376+, 750.1+, when part of a conveyor section.

    IV.     VARIOUS FIELDS OF SEARCH FOR DEVICES RELATED TO THOSE IN THIS CLASS:

    1.      Class 226, Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, provides the
    search for methods of and apparatus for feeding material without utilizing
    the leading or trailing ends thereof to effect movement of the material.

    1.5     Class 119, Animal Husbandry, subclasses 52.1+, for the combinations
    of a source of supply, which is disclosed as being feed for creatures of
    that class, a conveyor for removing material therefrom, and a receiver in
    the form of a receptacle (trough, bank, etc.) or surface in or upon which
    the feed is placed for consumption.

    2.      Class 114, Ships, subclasses 366 and 375 for apparatus in the form
    of chutes or tracks for launching life craft from ships.

    3.      Class 14, Bridges, subclass 70, for endless-conveyor gangplanks.

    4.      Class 209, Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, for a
    conveying system for separating conveyed articles employing means to sense
    variations in size or other physical characteristics of the article.

    5.      Class 118, Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for coating
    apparatus having means to convey the work.

    6.      Class 241, Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, especially
    the various feeding and discharging subclasses, for comminutors combined
    with power conveyors.  See the Class 241 main class definition, section 9,
    for a statement of the line.

    6.5     Class 83, Cutting.  The line between Class 198 and Class 83,
    Cutting, is in concert with the general line which distinguishes Class 198
    from other classes having a greater combination.  That is, the claimed
    recitation of a power-driven conveyor (or a power-driven work-feeding
    means) in combination with a cutting instrumentality, in name only or in
    nominal terms, with respect to which the work feed means may move work,
    will not of itself exclude original placement of the patent in Class 198.

            However, when such instrumentality is set forth with structural
    specificity, the claimed congregation of elements is properly placed with
    the work modifying instrumentality (Class 83).  For example: A claim
    reciting structurally defined work-handling means (not claimed as
    synchronized with "work-modifying means", or "tool", or "cutter", or
    "punch", or "knife", etc.) is properly placed in Class 198, on the basis of
    the work-handling means.  A claim reciting a power conveyor and, for
    instance, a work station including "a reciprocating tool", or "a tapered
    tool", or "a round cutter", or a "rotary cutter", etc., is properly placed
    in the class of the specified tool set forth.

            In addition, Class 83, Cutting, receives patents for classification
    therein which claim a cutting tool (of the type provided for in Class 83)
    synchronized with, or in power transmitting relation with, a work handling
    means, regardless of whether such tool is claimed significantly or merely
    nominally.

    8.      Dispensing:  Endless conveyors used in dispensing environments are
    found in Class 221, Article Dispensing, subclasses 76+; Class 312,
    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 97, if the conveyor moves the load
    to a door for manual removal from within a cabinet; and Class 211,
    Supports: Racks, subclasses 121+, for an endless support rack not claiming
    cabinet structure or dispensing (e.g., endless filing system, etc.).

    9.      Class 202, Distillation, subclasses 23+, 117+, 253, and 262+, for
    distillation apparatus including conveying means.

    10.     Class 34, Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, for
    conveyors claimed in combination with added means to promote a drying
    action or contact of gases or vapors with solids conveyed, and see subclass
    203, Notes (2), (3) and (4).

    11.     Class 204, Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 198+,
    for conveying means specialized for electrolytic devices.

    12.     Class 37, Excavating, for conveyors particularly adapted for
    digging in the earth.  If no actual digging element, as teeth, wheel, plow,
    scoop, or the like, is claimed, and if the conveyor is not particularly
    adapted to trench, it is classified in this class (198).  If other
    operations are included, as a melting snow, classification is in Class 37.
    If the presence of a wagon to be loaded is essential to the intended
    operation of the device, classification is in Class 414, Material or
    Article Handling.

    13.     Class 406, Conveyors:  Fluid Current, for the combination of
    conveying mechanisms, of the type classified in Class 198, and pneumatic
    conveyors.

    14.     Class 99, Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 360+ for
    conveyors particularly adapted for use in sterilizing or can-cooking
    machines.

    15.     Class 193, Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, for gravity
    conveyors. Power-driven conveyors combined with gravity conveyors are
    classified in this class, see subclasses 523+ in this class.

    16.     Class 56, Harvesters, subclasses 158+ for conveyors limited to use
    on harvesters. For excavating and loading machines of the type having a
    scoop or a rake delivering to an endless or rotary carrier, see Class 56,
    subclasses 344+.  The line between conveyors of this type and harvesters of
    the raking or loading type is that where tines, prongs, or the like are the
    raking means and the apparatus is particularly designed for raking up loose
    material while moving across a field, or if it can be so used without
    modification, classification is in harvesters.  If the conveyor alone and
    not the raking conveyor is claimed, classification is in the conveyor class.

    17.     Class 165, Heat Exchange, subclass 120, for heat exchanger with an
    impeller or conveyor for moving material therethrough.

    18.     Class 415, Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, subclasses 7+, for
    impellers acting in an unconfined or undirected fluid medium.

    19.     Class 73, Measuring and Testing, subclasses 863+ for an apparatus
    for sampling material being conveyed.

    20.     Class 414, Material or Article Handling, for instruments and
    mechanical methods for placing or displacing particular articles in a
    particular manner or with reference to a particular support, for loading or
    unloading vehicles with materials or objects in general, charging or
    discharging furnaces, ovens, bins or other containers, stacking or piling
    articles or materials, also combination of general types of carriers or
    forwarding mechanisms, which types, per se, are separately classified
    elsewhere, and general types of elevators, cranes or hoists when associated
    with special means for handling the load to place it on the carrier or
    remove it therefrom.

    21.     Class 72, Metal Deforming, subclasses 199+, and in particular
    subclasses 227+ and 250+, for a rolling mill having a conveyor to carry
    work to the rolls or to manipulate or guide the work for proper shaping.
    The conveyor, per se, is in Class 198.

    As between Classes

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven,

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length,

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding,

    294,    Handling: Hand and Hoist-Line Implements,

    414,    Material or Article Handling,

            Class 72 is superior.  However, in the case of a subcombination for
    structure or process wherein it is not clear from the claims whether
    handling or deforming is involved, a reasonable interpretation of the total
    disclosure will determine whether classification should be in Class 72, as
    a deforming subcombination.  For example, a claim reciting a "roller pair"
    may be considered as a feeding subcombination in the absence of disclosure
    of deformation. On the other hand, "a configured roller" will usually be a
    deforming device unless it is feeding a correspondingly configured
    workpiece. A claimed "pinch-roll couple" may be disclosed (a) with many
    details showing its effectiveness as a feeder, or (b) may be sparsely
    described as a deforming device and still be clearly a deformer.

            A patent including a claim involving both metal deforming and work
    handling is classified in Class 72, unless both the following criteria are
    met:

    A)      There is no claim limited to deforming, per se, and

    B)      The claims to handling and deforming recite deforming by name only.

    20.     Search subclasses 137.1+ for the combination of a conveyor with
    provision to load or unload a buoyant vehicle.

    22.     Class 266, Metallurgical Apparatus, for apparatus for treating
    solid metal. Cooling beds in which a bar of metal is conveyed while cooling
    are classified in Class 198, even though the bar may be rotated while being
    conveyed to keep it straight.

    23.     Class 210, Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 400+, for
    belt type filters and subclasses 523+, for gravitational separators having
    a mechanical mover constituent.

    24.     Class 53, Package Making, for conveyor or article handling
    mechanisms combined with packaging machines.

    25.     Class 100, Presses, subclass 167, for plural stage roll-type
    presses, not elsewhere provided for and having a conveyor between stages.

    26.     Class 104, Railways, for tracks or road beds with endless traction
    means which are detachably connected to or which push the carrier or car,
    and subclass 25, for endless railways and moving sidewalks combined with an
    endless railway.

    27.     Class 105, Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 48.1, for conveyors
    combined with railway locomotives to convey solid fuels to their combustion
    chambers.

    28.     Class 270, Sheet-Material Associating and Class 271, Sheet Feeding
    or Delivering, for sheet-material associating conveying and feeding.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, appropriate subclasses, for a machine
    having one or more of the following functions;

    a)      separating a sheet from a stack of such sheets and conveying the
    separated sheet, usually to a station whereat an operation (e.g., printing,
    cutting, etc.) is to be performed,

    b)      conveying a sheet, usually from a station whereat an operation has
    been performed, to a receiver whereat the sheet is stacked together with
    other such sheets,

    c)      conveying a sheet (e.g., from a stack to an operation), and
    concurrently performing an operation-related function (e.g., aligning the
    conveyed sheet relative to the operation station, interrupting the feed in
    response to absence or excess of sheets, intermittently moving a sheet
    relative to an operation station, etc.).  Also see (1) Note to subclass
    213, of Class 271, for a particular combination of conveyor on which a
    plurality of sheets is stacked and subsequently moved as a stack, and for a
    line note distinguishing structure proper for Class 271 and this class
    (198).

    29.     Class 186, Merchandising, subclasses 38+ and 52+ for dining and
    store service conveyors, respectively.

    30.     Class 171, Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, for conveyors which
    (1) are used to dig, convey and separate from the earth desired objects; or
    (2) are combined with digging or excavating means and function to separate
    from the soil flowing from the digging or excavating means the desired
    plant or buried object; or (3) are combined with an unearthing device and
    function merely to feed material to or from such device.

    31.     Class 209, Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, for a
    conveying system for separating conveyed articles employing means to sense
    variations in size or other physical characteristics of the article.

    32.     Class 483, Tool Changing, generally for a process or apparatus
    including a tool transfer means combined with either a tool support or
    storage means.


CLS 198/300
TXT Apparatus under the class definition wherein the load conveyor or conveyor
    system is wholly supported upon a carrier having wheels, treads, skids, or
    other means permitting its free movement on the ground or a floor.

    (1)     Note.  The words "wholly supported upon a carrier having wheels,
    skids, . . ." in the definition of this subclass excludes a conveyor or
    conveying system partially sustained by such a carrier or a plurality of
    such carriers and partially sustained by any other support except the
    ground or a floor. Thus the subclass includes a conveyor support frame
    mounted on a carrier of the type described so that one end of said frame
    can slide on the ground, but the subclass does not include a conveyor
    partially supported on such a carrier and partially supported by (1) fixed
    ground supports such as stanchions or (2) a mobile carrier of a different
    type, such as a track traversing vehicle.

    (2)     Note.  Assignment of a patent in this subclass or its indents does
    not require a claim that a conveyor is mounted on specific ground vehicle
    type supports such as wheels, skids, or caterpillar tracks, but may be
    based on any claim language indicating that a conveyor is freely movable on
    the ground, e.g., by claim limitations stating that a conveyor is mounted
    on a "carriage," "truck," "slidable support" or "movable support means,"
    where such terms are clearly supported by the disclosure of a ground
    vehicle type support for a conveyor.  However, a conveyor defined only as
    being "portable" has not been included here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    618+,   for structure of conveyors not carried by a vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, appropriate subclasses, for conveyors mounted on mobile
    excavation apparatus.


CLS 198/301
TXT Apparatus under subclass 300 having separate means which senses the
    occurrence of a condition or a change in condition and in response thereto
    acts to start, stop, or change the manner of operation of either the load
    conveyor or its carrier.


CLS 198/302
TXT Apparatus under subclass 300 including means for lifting a wheel of the
    carrier from its supporting surface, e.g., to transfer the weight of the
    apparatus to a fixed support leg while the conveyor is operated at a
    selected site.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 240+, for earth working vehicle having
    ground support engageable with ground for transport only.


CLS 198/303
TXT Apparatus under subclass 300 wherein at least three separate carriages
    having wheels or tracks are joined together to support the conveyor
    assembly and are independently movable relative to each other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 726+, for
    sprinkling apparatus carried on a train of vehicles.


CLS 198/304
TXT Apparatus under subclass 300 in which the carrier includes means for
    controlling its direction of travel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    303,    for a conveyor assembly carried by a dirigible train of vehicles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 799, 832 and 834, for steerable wheel on
    an earth working vehicle.

    305,    Wheel Substitute for Land Vehicles, subclass 44, for steerable
    vehicle tracks or treads.


CLS 198/305
TXT Apparatus under subclass 304 including flexible means connected to a reel
    mounted on the carrier, the free end of said flexible means being anchored
    at a selected point and the reel then rotated to thereby pull the carrier
    toward said point.


CLS 198/306
TXT Apparatus under subclass 300 including at least one carrier support wheel
    securable in two ground engaging positions disposed 90o a part relative to
    the carrier frame, thus permitting selective travel of the carrier in
    either one of two perpendicular directions merely by shifting the position
    of said wheel.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include a conveyor supported on a
    vehicle equipped with a caster wheel that is not lockable in two positions
    spaced 90o apart.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 507, for ground support adjustably mounted
    on earth working vehicle.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 742, for
    sprinkling apparatus carried on a train of vehicles with adjustable wheels
    permitting travel of the train in the direction of its length or in the
    direction normal to its length.


CLS 198/307.1
TXT Bucket conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 300 wherein the conveyor includes at least one
    holder having a pocket formed thereon for retaining a load.


CLS 198/308.1
TXT Shovel or tine pushable under load:

    Apparatus under subclass 300 including lifting means, such as a scoop or a
    row of closely spaced teeth, movable under a load by translation of the
    carrier or by movement of said means itself, usually for the purpose of
    transferring the load to another section of the conveyor assembly.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a vehicle equipped with a ground-engaging
    ramp having mounted thereon a rotatable arm which gathers ore or other
    loose material and moves it up said ramp.


CLS 198/309
TXT Apparatus under subclass 300 wherein the conveyor is supported by a skid or
    other means readily slidable over a surface.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a conveyor supported by both a wheel or
    track equipped vehicle and an element that slides on the ground or a floor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    308.1,  for a vehicle carrying a shovel or tines that scoop material from
    the ground and feed it to a conveyor mounted on the same vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 80 and 387+, for wheel substitute on an
    earth working vehicle.


CLS 198/310
TXT Apparatus under subclass 300 including conveyor drive means operated by
    motion of a wheel or other support element of the carrier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 43, for an endless belt
    used as a display device and actuated from the revolving axle or wheel of a
    vehicle, and subclass 48, for an endless belt of the same type that is
    actuated by mechanism which contacts an obstacle located along the track of
    a vehicle carrying the device.

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 14.8, for harvester drive train powered by
    ground engaging wheels.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 105+, for earth working means driven from
    ground wheel.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 685, for a
    rotating scatterer driven from ground wheel.


CLS 198/311
TXT Apparatus under subclass 300 wherein the load is moved along at least a
    portion of the conveyor by the force of gravity alone, or including a bin
    from which material is removed by a conveyor.


CLS 198/312
TXT Apparatus under subclass 300 including means permitting movement of a
    conveyor to different working positions or orientations relative to the
    carrier on which it is mounted.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a conveyor vertically adjustable relative
    to ground engaging supports of the carrier vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 395+, for earth working tool mounted on a
    vehicle frame that is vertically adjustable.


CLS 198/313
TXT Apparatus under subclass 312 wherein a conveyor can be telescoped or swung
    to a more compact configuration that it has when operating, e.g., to
    facilitate transporting the conveyors along a road.


CLS 198/314
TXT Apparatus under subclass 312 including separate conveyors mounted on a
    single carrier so that they successively convey a load.


CLS 198/315
TXT Apparatus under subclass 312 including motorized means for moving the
    conveyor support frame relative to the carrier.


CLS 198/316.1
TXT Fluid-actuated ram:

    Apparatus under subclass 315 wherein the conveyor moving means includes a
    cylinder and piston mechanism operated by fluid pressure.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a ram operated by fluid pressure derived
    from any means, including a manually worked pump.


CLS 198/317
TXT Apparatus under subclass 312 including a conveyor rotatable to extend in
    different directions circumferentially of the carrier.


CLS 198/318
TXT Apparatus under subclass 312 including a conveyor inclinable at different
    angles relative to the ground.

    (1)     Note.  Not included here as vertically swingable is a conveyor
    support frame that pivots about the axle of a two-wheeled vehicle in the
    same way that the drawbar and bed of a two-wheeled trailer pivot about the
    trailer axle.  The support frame of the conveyor must be vertically
    swingable relative to a supporting frame of the vehicle.


CLS 198/319
TXT Apparatus under subclass 318 having means for retaining a support platform
    for a conveyor drive motor in the same position as the conveyor swings to
    different inclinations.


CLS 198/320
TXT Apparatus under subclass 318 including flexible means connected to a
    support frame for the conveyor and to a reel mounted on the carrier,
    whereby rotation of said reel changes the inclination of said conveyor.


CLS 198/321
TXT Devices under the class definition wherein a conveying section is provided
    with structure which particularizes the section to move people from one
    location to another.  Further included herein are the subcombinations
    peculiar to such sections, e.g., handrails, guards, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of structure particularizing a section for
    conveying people are moving steps, conveyors having handrails, conveyors
    having serrated foot engaging surfaces and entrance or exit comb plates,
    passenger operated drive control means, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    14,     Bridges, subclass 70, for gangways of the endless conveyor type.

    104,    Railways, subclass 25, for endless railways or moving sidewalks
    combined with an endless railway.  Some of the features indicative of an
    endless railway are cabs or other passenger enclosures, releasable drivers
    for the cars, seats, etc.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 42+, for endless
    conveyor escapes.


CLS 198/322
TXT Device under subclass 321 wherein the section is provided with means to
    regulate the operation of the section, which means effects such regulation
    in response to an operating instruction which is either originated by a
    condition sensing means or is introduced into the system by the operator.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of structure to be found herein include passenger
    controlled conveyors, jam prevention safety circuits, section speed
    controllers, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    854+,   for means to drive, start or stop a conveying section, especially
    subclass 856, for controls responsive to abnormal operating conditions of a
    conveying section.


CLS 198/323
TXT Device under subclass 322 wherein a means to sense the operation of the
    section is provided which originates an operation command to vary the speed
    of or to stop the section if some condition is sensed which is dangerous or
    potentially dangerous to either the conveying mechanism or to the
    passengers moved by the mechanism.


CLS 198/324
TXT Device under subclass 321 wherein the section is provided with means
    located at a terminal end of the section to aid in the movement of
    passengers onto or off of the section.


CLS 198/325
TXT Device under subclass 324 wherein the means to facilitate entry or exit,
    includes a platform formed with a plurality of elements which interleaf
    with grooves formed on the conveying surface to effect or to aid movement
    of passengers to or from the section.


CLS 198/326
TXT Device under subclass 321 wherein the section includes a continuous train
    of moving tread members which are either attached one to the other so as to
    form a closed loop or are mounted to an interminable belt-like member and
    which form a moving flight of stairs as they are moved along an inclined
    surface.


CLS 198/327
TXT Device under subclass 326 wherein the endless member includes a plurality
    of pivotally connected tread and riser members which alternate one with the
    other and wherein the moving flight of stairs is formed by flexing the
    endless member to displace the risers to a vertical attitude and the treads
    to a substantially horizontal attitude.


CLS 198/328
TXT Device under subclass 326 wherein the endless member includes a plurality
    of articulated steps which are arranged to bend about an axis which is
    generally normal to the horizontal.

    (1)     Note.  Moving stairways having side-by-side ascending and
    descending flights formed from the same endless member will be found herein.


CLS 198/329
TXT Device under subclass 326 wherein the section is provided with means which
    will take up undesired slack in the endless member or will accommodate for
    misalignments which occur when such slack is taken up.


CLS 198/330
TXT Device under subclass 326 wherein the section is provided with means to
    effect movement of the endless member.


CLS 198/331
TXT Device under subclass 330 wherein the system is provided with a moving hand
    supporting and guiding structure and means are provided for moving the
    steps and the hand support structure in unison.


CLS 198/332
TXT Device under subclass 326 wherein the section is provided with two guide
    rail means which simultaneously coact with followers carried by each step
    to maintain the tread portion of the step in a horizontal attitude as it
    moves through that portion of its path which constitutes the flight of
    stairs.


CLS 198/333
TXT Device under subclass 326 wherein the section includes the specific
    structural features of the passenger supporting platforms, i.e., the steps,
    carried by the endless member.


CLS 198/334
TXT System under subclass 321 wherein the means specialized to handle people
    includes a) a conveying means or an accessory therefore which is adapted to
    move at different rates at different points along its path of travel, or b)
    a system of plural conveying sections which operate at different speeds and
    which are arranged such that a passenger may move from one section to
    another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    792,    for a conveyor having a zone of varying speed.


CLS 198/335
TXT Device under subclass 321 wherein a structure is provided which has a
    moving member adapted to be grasped by the hand of a passenger to steady
    the passenger while entering, riding on or exiting from the conveying
    section.


CLS 198/336
TXT Device under subclass 335 wherein the moving member is a flexible belt and
    the structure further includes means to take up slack which may develop in
    the belt.


CLS 198/337
TXT Device under subclass 335 wherein the moving member is a flexible belt of a
    specific construction.


CLS 198/338
TXT Device under subclass 335 preventing the entry of a passenger's hand into
    an entrance or exit hole formed in a balustrade for the moving member.


CLS 198/339.1
TXT WITH MEANS TO FACILITATE WORKING, TREATING, OR INSPECTING CONVEYED LOAD AT
    A STATION:

    Apparatus under the class definition including specialized structure,
    either part of the conveyor or separate means associated therewith,
    specifically provided for the purpose of aiding the working, treating, or
    inspecting of the load by separate means at a station situated along the
    conveying path.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a conveyor having associated therewith
    claimed means for working or treating a load, where the combination of such
    means and the conveyor is not classifiable elsewhere on the basis of the
    working or treating means.

    (2)     Note.  A nominal recitation that a conveyor operates in a machine
    for performing some work operation, that the load passes through a treating
    station or that a conveyor is intermittently driven in a working or
    treating apparatus does not warrant placement of a patent here.  Such
    patens should be classified in other subclasses of this class on the basis
    of the claimed structure.

    (3)     Note.  Combinations of a conveyor and a treating tank are found in
    the appropriate treating class such as Class 118, 134 or 204.


CLS 198/340
TXT Apparatus under subclass 339.1 including indicia or other identification
    means associated with the conveyed load, or a signalling device associated
    with either the conveyor or separate work means, which provides an
    attendant or workman with information regarding operation of the conveyor
    or handling of the load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+ for electrical
    automatic condition responsive indicating systems, especially subclass 676
    relating to conveyor belts.


CLS 198/341
TXT Apparatus under subclass 339.1 including means for sensing a change in the
    conveyed load or a change in the mode of operation of the conveyor or the
    load-working, treat- ing, or inspecting apparatus associated therewith, and
    in response to the change controlling the conveying or the load or the
    operation of said apparatus, e.g., means for stopping a conveyor if the
    load is not properly positioned at a station for a work operation to be
    performed thereon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 52+, for package making apparatus having
    operation control means responsive to a condition of a package or its
    contents.


CLS 198/343.1
TXT Load supporting conveyor portion is retarded or stopped with load at
    station without being disconnected from remainder of continuously moving
    conveyor:Subject matter under subclass 339.1 wherein the load and its
    respective supporting conveyor portion are caused to move relative to the
    remainder of a moving endless or rotary conveyor such that the load
    advancement relative to the station is halted or slowed.


CLS 198/343.2
TXT Load supporting conveyor portion is movably secured to conveyor
    drive:Subject matter under subclass 343.1 wherein the load supporting means
    is pivotally or slidably secured to its endless or rotary drive means.


CLS 198/345.1
TXT Means engaging conveyor or load on a conveyor to align load for
    working:Subject matter under subclass 339.1 including separate aligning
    means, such as a locator pin or clamp, which temporarily engage the
    conveyor or the load to position said load at the station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    346.1,  346.2, or 346.3 for means which shift a palleted load or the load
    solely back and forth between the mainline conveyor and the station.


CLS 198/345.2
TXT Means engages conveyor to fix conveyor position relative to station:Subject
    matter under subclass 345.1 wherein at least the conveyor or conveyor
    portion is engaged by the locator pin or clamp to position the load at the
    station.


CLS 198/345.3
TXT Means engages a conveyor portion (i.e. pallet) which is separable from the
    conveyor drive to fix the position of said conveyor portion:Subject matter
    under subclass 345.2 wherein a detachable conveyor portion or pallet is
    engaged by the aligning means to position the load at the station.


CLS 198/346
TXT Apparatus under subclass 339.1 including fixedly positioned means for
    supporting the load or a workman beside a conveyor while said load is being
    worked on, treated, or inspected.


CLS 198/346.1
TXT Means to convey a palleted load back and forth between an initial location
    and the work station:

    Apparatus under subclass 339.1 wherein the load is supported by a carrier
    which is separable from a conveyor which transports the load and the pallet
    in both directions between an initial location (e.g., a main conveyor) and
    the working, treating or inspection station.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are reversibly driven conveyors and loop
    path forming conveyors which convey both the load and the pallet to and
    from a station and an initial location.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    465.1+, 681, 795, and 803.01+, for patents showing loads supported by
    separable carriers.


CLS 198/346.2
TXT Means to transfer a load back and forth between the mainline conveyor and
    the work station:

    Apparatus under subclass 339.1 wherein only the load is transported in both
    directions between the mainline conveyor and the working, treating, or
    inspecting stations.


CLS 198/346.3
TXT Conveyor(s) lowers the load to at least one of a plurality of fixed work
    stations:

    Apparatus under subclass 339.1 wherein the load is lowered to at least one
    of a plurality of fixed working, treating or inspecting stations by a
    conveyor and is then raised away from the station before continuing along
    the conveyor path.


CLS 198/347.1
TXT CONVEYOR SYSTEM HAVING AUXILIARY SECTION FOR STORING ITEMS MOVING BETWEEN
    SOURCE AND DESTINATION:Subject matter under the class definition including
    at least one primary path conveyor for the purpose of conveying articles
    from a supply to a destination and a laterally adjacent supplemental
    conveyor for the temporary repository of articles which have been diverted
    from the primary path  conveyor and which will subsequently be reintroduced
    onto the primary path conveyor.


CLS 198/347.2
TXT Auxiliary section has the same entrance and exit:
    Subject matter under subclass 347.1 wherein the supplementary section
    receives and discharges articles relative to the primary path conveyor
    through the same passageway.


CLS 198/347.3
TXT Auxiliary section has a reversibly driven conveyor for bidirectional
    article movement:Subject matter under subclass 347.2 wherein at least one
    conveyor in the supplemental section is capable of being driven in one
    direction during removal of articles from the main path conveyor and being
    driven in the opposite direction during return of articles to the primary
    path conveyor.


CLS 198/347.4
TXT Plural laterally spaced, same direction auxiliary paths:
    Subject matter under subclass 347.1 wherein articles are diverted onto one
    of several laterally separated auxiliary conveyors which are all driven in
    the same direction to return articles to the primary path conveyor at a
    point upstream or downstream from the point of initial diversion.


CLS 198/348
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having at least one driven conveyor
    section, said apparatus further having either a plurality of supply points
    or zones or a plurality of discharge points or zones arranged such that a
    discrimination may be made as to which supply or discharge point is to be
    used.

    (1)     Note.  An outlet which is in constant communication with a
    conveying system and which can be pointed to direct the flow in different
    directions is not considered to constitute a selective or changeable
    destination and will not be found herein.

    (2)     Note.  Recycling of the load back to a supply is not considered to
    comprise plural destinations.

    (3)     Note.  The word arrangement as used in this title and the
    definitions indented hereinunder includes a single conveying section which
    is provided with either means to alter the length of travel of the load
    along the section so that different sources or destinations may be
    communicated with the section or means which allows selective supply or
    delivery of the conveying section from either side.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    536,    for a conveyor system having a gravity section and wherein the last
    section of the system is adjustable, usually for the purpose of changing
    the exit path of material leaving the system.

    537,    for a conveyor system having a gravity conveyor section and having
    means to handle a portion of the load which becomes separated from the main
    flow path and wherein the separated portion may comprise a portion which is
    shunted to an auxiliary path for return to the main supply and eventual
    recirculation.

    580,    for a conveyor system having plural power-driven conveyor sections
    and wherein a portion of the load is recycled in a closed path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclass, for conveying arrangements which function to separate or sort
    conveyed articles based on either a physical characteristic of the articles
    or a load carried code; further, see subclasses 703+ and 705 for
    power-driven sorting tables and carriers, respectively.  If a destination
    code is carried by a reusable load carrier in lieu of a article itself, the
    patent will be placed as an original in this class (198).  Also, a conveyor
    to transfer material (or an article) to a selected destination by use of
    computer memory is to be found in this class (198).  The combination of a
    Class 198 device with a Class 209 sorting means is to be found in Class 209.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 133, for conveying
    arrangements having some additional means external to the conveyor
    structure which allows an operator to control the destination of a conveyed
    load.  Thus, Class 414 provides for patents claiming a conveying system
    having a central control means and a synchronous memory means, e.g., coded
    memory wheels, shift register system, etc.  Examples of such arrangements
    are devices wherein a code would be impressed by an operator at a central
    station onto an analog system associated with a conveying section; that is,
    the code would be placed in a device separate from, but which operates in
    synchronism with the conveying structure.  Operator actuated keyboards used
    to effect destination selection will likewise be found in Class 414.


CLS 198/349
TXT Apparatus under subclass 348 wherein the arrangement is provided with an
    operations control means which is arranged with respect to the systems'
    load transferring means such that it controls the manner of communication
    of the transferring means with a selected source or destination in response
    to changeable operating instructions introduced into the conveyor
    arrangement by the operator, said instructions being either introduced into
    the system at a point remote from the control means by means of an
    information carrying element moved in association with said transferring
    means or being contained in information storage means associated with the
    control means.


CLS 198/349.1
TXT By synchronously moving signal carrier distinct from conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 349 including a driven conveyor section for
    movement in a particular manner and including a memory member for movement
    in direct relationship thereto, such that movement of the conveyor is
    accompanied by corresponding movement of the memory member.

    (1)     Note.  The "memory member" of this subclass stores the "changeable
    operating instructions" as set forth in the definition of parent subclass
    349.  "Memory" allows utilization of information at a time later than input
    time later than input time.

    (2)     Note.  A memory member riding on a conveyor is not considered to be
    a "synchronous" for placement herein.

    (3)     Note.  The synchronous signal carrier of this subclass may be
    called a "timer", but ever "timer" is not a synchronous signal carrier.


CLS 198/349.2
TXT Moving at different velocity than conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 349.1 wherein the memory member is driven at a
    different speed or in a different manner (e.g., about an axis rather than
    linearly) than the linearly) than the conveyor.


CLS 198/349.3
TXT Rotary signal carrier:

    Apparatus under subclass 349.2 wherein the memory member is generally
    circular in cross-section and is driven to turn about its concentric axis.


CLS 198/349.4
TXT Magnetic means on rotary carrier stores codes:

    Apparatus under subclass 349.3 (a) wherein the turning memory member
    includes a sensor responsive to prescribed magnetic characteristics of the
    surrounding structure or, (b) including a fixed sensor responsive to
    prescribed magnetic characteristic of the turning memory member.


CLS 198/349.5
TXT Using central memory to store code until article is discharged:

    Apparatus under subclass 349 including a memory member to allow selection
    in advance of the particular supply/discharge point/zone of the material on
    the conveyor and to store such selection until disposition of such material.

    (1)     Note.  The "memory member" of this subclass stores the "changeable
    operating instructions" as set forth in the definition of parent subclass
    349.  "Memory" allows utilization of information at a time later than input
    time.

    (2)     Note.  The following terms are common among the patents of this
    subclass: "central memory", "computer", "timer", etc.


CLS 198/349.6
TXT Memory stores plural sources or destinations:

    Apparatus under subclass 349.5 wherein the memory member is intended to
    allow selection of multiple supply/discharge points/zones of the portions
    of material and stores such selections until disposal thereof.


CLS 198/349.7
TXT Inventory also in memory:

    Apparatus under subclass 349.6 also including provision to determine
    placement of material in the conveyor arrangement and to store that
    information substantially permanently for later retrieval or replacement of
    the material.


CLS 198/349.8
TXT Material detector indexes codes:

    Apparatus under subclass 349.6 having a material sensor positioned along
    the conveying path to cause the changeable operating instructions to be
    revised as the material travels through the conveyor arrangement.


CLS 198/349.9
TXT Plural, longitudinally spaced, material detectors index code:

    Apparatus under subclass 349.8 having multiple sensors positioned along the
    conveying path to cause the changeable operating instructions to be revised
    as the material travels through the conveyor arrangement.


CLS 198/349.95
TXT Conveyor detector indexes code:

    Apparatus under subclass 349.6 having a sensor responsive to the position
    of a portion of the conveyor to cause the changeable operating instructions
    to be revised as the conveyor moves.


CLS 198/350
TXT Apparatus under subclass 349 wherein means are provided which contain or
    store the operating instructions as the lines of force emanating from a
    magnetic element within said means.


CLS 198/351
TXT Apparatus under subclass 349 wherein the arrangement is provided with
    relatively moveable members, one of which carries means containing or
    introducing changeable operating instructions.  Said means containing or
    introducing the changeable instructions comprises a contact element, the
    position of which may be varied. Another of said members is provided with
    structure which is contacted by and coacts with said contact element, when
    said element is aligned therewith, to effect communication between a
    particular source or destination and the transferring means.


CLS 198/352
TXT Apparatus under subclass 351 wherein said means containing or introducing
    the operating instructions is provided with a plurality of contact elements
    which are capable of being arranged in different arrays. The structure
    contacted by said elements is constructed so that it will only coact with
    single specific array of said elements.


CLS 198/353
TXT Apparatus under subclass 351 wherein the member carrying the means
    containing or introducing the operating instructions  includes a support
    upon which said contact element is mounted for sliding movement, said
    contact element being moveable along said support to a plurality of
    positions at each of which said element is aligned with the coacting
    structure of a different other member.


CLS 198/354
TXT Apparatus under subclass 351 wherein said containing or introducing means
    includes a contact element supporting structure having a plurality of
    apertures or recesses within which said element is releasably retained.


CLS 198/355
TXT Apparatus under subclass 349 wherein the means containing the operating
    instructions includes a movable member which coacts with an electric
    circuit to energize the circuit for effecting delivery of the conveyed load
    to a selected destination.

    (1)     Note.  The term switch as used herein includes any circuit
    completing device, some of which need not be physically contacted by the
    switch actuator, as for example, a photocell and repositionable reflector.
    Also the switch actuator is generally an element mounted on or carried by
    some part of the conveying structure and is movable or repositionable
    relative to the part carrying it and is not merely the load units
    themselves.  Thus, a counter which merely responds to the passage of a
    predetermined number of load units will not be found herein.


CLS 198/357
TXT Condition responsive control means to prevent collision on merging
    conveyors:Apparatus under subclass 348 wherein the arrangement is provided
    with means responsive to the feeding of a load from a source and means to
    regulate  or  position a load from another source or its conveyor when the
    danger of impacting upon one another exists.


CLS 198/358
TXT Condition responsive control means including sensing condition of source or
    destination:Apparatus under subclass 348, wherein the arrangement has means
    to detect a condition at a source or destination and means responsive to
    said means to control the operations of selected transfer means.


CLS 198/359
TXT Apparatus under subclass 348 wherein the arrangement includes one or more
    gravity conveyor sections.


CLS 198/360
TXT Arrangement under subclass 359 wherein a gravity conveyor section is
    repositionable.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are baffles that deflect a falling load.


CLS 198/361
TXT Apparatus under subclass 360 wherein a gravity conveyor section includes
    either a cylindrical member which is mounted to freely rotate about its
    longitudinal axis or a frame carrying a plurality of such cylindrical
    members, the attitude of either of which may be altered so as to direct the
    load to or from the arrangement at a selected source or destination.


CLS 198/363
TXT Apparatus under subclass 348 wherein a section has a plurality of means to
    supply it with material to be conveyed, which supply means are so
    interconnected and regulated that the composition of the load is
    controllable.


CLS 198/364
TXT Apparatus under subclass 348 wherein the coacting means is adapted for
    travel along the length of the conveying path so that said means can be
    shifted to different supply or discharge positions.

    (1)     Note.  Means for distributing bales of hay along either side of a
    bale conveyor will be found herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    812,    for conveyors of the endless type having means to vary the length
    of the conveying path.


CLS 198/367
TXT Apparatus under subclass 348 wherein the selecting means includes a member
    which is adapted to be placed athwart the path of movement of the conveyed
    load to direct the load to a selected conveying path.


CLS 198/367.1
TXT Material diverted by plural, successive gates:

    Apparatus under subclass 367 including a circuit of travel for the material
    to the chosen destination having two or more shutters along that circuit
    that are actuated to directed the material therealong.


CLS 198/367.2
TXT Plural, manually manipulated gate actuators:

    Apparatus under subclass 367 including a material directing shutter
    manipulated as a result of manual input from a keyboard or a plurality of
    hand or foot operated control members.


CLS 198/368
TXT Apparatus under subclass 348 wherein one or more of the conveying paths is
    provided with an abutment member which is capable of being shifted into the
    path of movement of the conveyed load to arrest load movement along that
    path.


CLS 198/369.1
TXT One of a plurality of main line conveyors selectively moves to connect with
    a spaced path:

    Subject matter under subclass 348 wherein an adjacent source or destination
    route is physically separated from a principal carrying route having two or
    more carriers and including a particular means for effecting a relative
    movement of one of the carriers in the principal carrying route between the
    separated source or destination and the remainder of the principal carrying
    route to close the gap when it is desired to carry a load to or from the
    adjacent source or destination route.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359+,   for a system using a gravity conveyor which connects the system
    with a normally spaced source or destination.

    370.07  through 370.09 and 370.1, for an adjacent conveyor movable instead
    of the main conveyor to close a gap between the main path and the adjacent
    path.

    435,    for a system for distributing articles of succession which are
    moved by one conveyor and are apportioned among plurality of second
    conveyors arranged to be one above the other and further convey or retain
    the apportioned articles.


CLS 198/369.2
TXT Endless conveyor or portion thereof pivots about a horizontal axis
    perpendicular to path:

    Subject matter under subclass 369.1 wherein a continuous carrier or a part
    of the continuous carrier selectively tilts about a horizontal straight
    line extending normal to the principal carrying route to connect the
    principal carrying route with the spaced source or destination.


CLS 198/369.3
TXT Endless conveyor or portion thereof pivots about an axis parallel to path:

    Subject matter under subclass 369.1 wherein a continuous carrier or a
    portion thereof selectively tilts about a longitudinal straight line
    extending parallel to the carrying route to connect the principal carrying
    route with a spaced source or destination.


CLS 198/369.4
TXT Roller pivots about a vertical axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 369.1 wherein the main conveying path
    includes at least one revolving cylinder or similar element which supports
    the load and selectively swivels around an upward or downward straight line
    to convey the load to or from a selected source or destination.


CLS 198/369.5
TXT Endless conveyor or portion thereof pivots about a vertical axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 369.1 wherein a continuous carrier or a part
    of the continuous carrier selectively swivels around an upward or downward
    straight line connecting the main line conveying path to a spaced source or
    destination.


CLS 198/369.6
TXT Rollers shift the load vertically to a different plane:

    Subject matter under subclass 369.1 wherein the main line conveying path
    includes revolving cylinders or similar elements which move upward or
    downward as a unit to selectively transfer loads between the main line
    conveying path and the selected spaced source or destination.


CLS 198/369.7
TXT Conveyor slides to provide an opening in main path:

    Subject matter under subclass 369.1 wherein the carrier moves selectively
    on a smooth continuous surface along or laterally of the carrier route to
    create an opening in the carrier route to selectively receive or discharge
    the load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359+,   for a system using a gravity conveyor to connect the system with a
    normally spaced source or destination.


CLS 198/370.01
TXT By loading or unloading section at a selected one of a plurality of
    pre-established locations along the length thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 348 wherein (a) a main line conveyor has two
    or more supply or discharge points at intervals along the conveyor's path
    and (b) a means to select which of these points is to be used to receive a
    load to the carrier or to discharge the load from the carrier.

    (1)     Note.  The selected locations along the length may be merely the
    ends of the conveyor and do not necessarily include the selective locations
    in between.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359+,   for a system using a gravity conveyor which connects the system
    with a normally spaced source or destination.

    369.1+,for a main line conveyor which selectively moves relative to
    adjacent conveyors to feed or receive from the spaced source or destination.

    371.1+,for a reversibly driving main line section.

    890+,   for selective delivery from or to plural laterally spaced paths
    which are upstream or downstream of the conveyor.


CLS 198/370.02
TXT Conveyor has independent lateral pushers:

    Subject matter under subclass 370.01 wherein the carrier includes  more
    than two force or pressure exerting elements which selectively move the
    loads sideway of the carrier for discharge or receipt at the selected
    location along the conveyor's path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370.03+,for an independently movable load supporting portion.


CLS 198/370.03
TXT Conveyor has independently movable load supporting portions:

    Subject matter under subclass 370.01 wherein the carrier includes more than
    two load holding members which are moved along the carrying path and each
    member is capable of partaking of a motion separate from other members of
    the carrier to affect the discharge or receipt of the load at a selected
    location along the carrier.


CLS 198/370.04
TXT Supporting portions tilt about an axis parallel to path of travel:

    Subject matter under subclass 370.03 wherein the load holding members pivot
    transverse to the carrying route around a straight line in the same
    direction as the track of load movement.


CLS 198/370.05
TXT Supporting portions tilt vertically about an axis perpendicular to path of
    travel:

    Subject matter under subclass 370.03 wherein the load holding members pivot
    in an upright plane relative to the carrying route around a straight line
    at a right angle to the route of load movement.


CLS 198/370.06
TXT Supporting portions are laterally extending belts:

    Subject matter under subclass 370.03 wherein the load holding members are
    endless or segments of flexible bands having their conveying surfaces
    driven transverse to the conveying path.


CLS 198/370.07
TXT By separate reciprocating or oscillating pusher:

    Subject matter under subclass 370.01 wherein an independent fixed location
    force exerting means having a back and forth or arcuate movement impels the
    load to or from the conveyor along the conveyor's length.


CLS 198/370.08
TXT By separate endless or rotary pusher:

    Subject matter under subclass 370.01 wherein the conveyor is serviced by an
    independent fixed location with a continuous or circular motion force
    exerting means to impel the load to or from the conveyor along the
    conveyor's length.


CLS 198/370.09
TXT By separate supporting  rollers:

    Subject matter under subclass 370.01 wherein the conveyor is provided with
    an independent fixed location revolving cylinders or similar means which
    hold and impel the load to or from the conveyor along the conveyor's length.

    (1)     Note.  Rollers are not directly used to convey the load along the
    main conveying path.


CLS 198/370.1
TXT By separate endless or rotary supporting conveyor:

    Subject matter under subclass 370.01 including an independent fixed
    location continuous or circular motion carrier to hold and impel the load
    to or from the carrier.


CLS 198/370.11
TXT By separate fluid jet:

    Subject matter under subclass 370.01 wherein an independent fixed location
    forceful rush of liquid, gas, or vapor through a narrow or restricted
    opening impels the load to or from the conveyor along the conveyor's length.


CLS 198/370.12
TXT By selective application of suction:

    Subject matter under subclass 370.01 wherein a specific amount of load is
    impelled from a main line conveyor by the force produced due to a reduced
    air pressure.


CLS 198/370.13
TXT By selective application of a magnetic field:

    Subject matter under subclass 370.01 wherein a body having a property of
    attracting a ferrous material is placed at specific locations on the main
    line conveyor to guide or remove the load having a ferromagnetic property.


CLS 198/371.1
TXT By reversibly driving the main line section:

    Subject matter under subclass 370.01 wherein the selecting means  includes
    a device to operate a portion of the main line conveyor selectively in the
    direction opposite to its normal direction of operation.


CLS 198/371.2
TXT Endless belt or chain:

    Subject matter under subclass 371.1 includes a continuous band of flexible
    material (e.g., leather, rubber, fabric) or a continuous band constructed
    of links of metal, plastic or similar material.


CLS 198/371.3
TXT Rollers:

    Subject matter under subclass 371.1 wherein the reversible section of the
    conveyor includes a revolving cylinder or similar element.


CLS 198/373
TXT Apparatus under the class definition wherein a conveyor section or a
    conveyor system moves an article along a predetermined path, and wherein
    said article is turned to have its posture*, or its heading, or its
    leaning* intentionally or significantly varied with relation to said path.
    (*These terms are discussed in (2) Note below.)

    (1)     Note.  In this and indented subclasses the disclosed intent of the
    claimed apparatus is important.  Therefore, although the structure of two
    devices may be similar, a patent disclosing such structure will be placed
    into this portion of the schedule only if its claimed disclosure is clearly
    for accomplishing one of the functions set forth in the definition by
    asterisk (*) and further discussed in (2) Note that follows.  The similar
    structure that is disclosed in terms of its structure and not disclosing
    such a function will be found elsewhere in accordance with its claimed
    function or its claimed structure that is provided for in other subclasses
    of this schedule.

    (2)     Note.  For the purpose of helping to visualize the terms to be
    discussed herein, assume a three-dimensional-line figure consisting of
    three axes (i.e., an "X-axis", a "Y-axis" and a "Z-axis") that intersect at
    a mutual point, each axis being perpendicular to the plane in which both of
    the other two axes lie.  Assume further that said mutual point lies within
    the article to be conveyed and that a) the conveyor moves the article in
    the direction of the "X-axis", b) the conveyor has a major article-support
    surface that extends transversely (i.e., athwart) of said direction along
    the "Z-axis", and c) the remaining axis that extends perpendicularly of the
    plane formed by both of the previously-mentioned axes is the "Y-axis".
    With these assumptions in mind, variation in "posture" will refer only to a
    turning of an article about a "Z-axis", variation in "heading" will refer
    only to a turning of an article about a "Y-axis", and variation in
    "leaning" will refer only to a turning of an article about an "X-axis". It
    is understood that any or all of these turnings may occur sequentially or
    simultaneously, and if there is a major dimension of the article being
    conveyed, such major dimension may coincide with any or none of the axis
    mentioned.

    (3)     Note.  This note is in amplification of preceding notes regarding
    intent of disclosure and attitude of article relative to its conveyed
    direction. The predetermined path of an article may be straight, or
    arcuate, or crooked, but whatever the path, if the conveyed article is at a
    first point on the path with a particular dimension in a particular
    relationship to the path (e.g., its length is parallel to the path), and is
    thereafter at a second point with the same dimension in a different
    relationship to the path (e.g., its length is perpendicular to the path),
    its attitude relative to the path has been changed.  For proper placement
    of a patent into this, or an indented subclass, the claim thereof must
    recite the change in attitude of the article in significant terms; that is,
    the recitation must be clear, and the change must be intentional.  A patent
    that discloses a change in attitude that is incidental to the movement of
    an article on a conveyor system (e.g., an article on a nonrectilinear
    system could change its attitude relative to a particular compass
    direction, but not necessarily change relative to conveyed direction) will
    not be placed herein, but will be placed on the basis of the claimed
    function or structure of the conveyor.


CLS 198/374
TXT Apparatus under subclass 373 wherein the articles move sequentially past a
    station at which the articles are either turned or not turned in a preset
    pattern, which pattern occurs repeatedly, whereby groups of articles are
    formed, each group appearing like other similar groups.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    418+,   for a conveyor system forming groups of articles wherein the facing
    of individual articles therein is not significant.


CLS 198/375
TXT Apparatus under subclass 373 wherein a) a member retains an article with
    respect to itself, b) the member is mounted on a conveyor section that
    thereby moves the member and the article concurrently in the conveyed
    direction, and c) the member is moved with respect to the conveyor section,
    whereby the member and its retained article are both turned with respect to
    the conveyed direction.

    (1)     Note.  The limitation that the member retains the article does not
    preclude the movement of the article into or out of the member as long as
    the article is held in the member during the conveyance thereof.


CLS 198/376
TXT Apparatus under subclass 375 provided with means for detecting the presence
    or attitude of an article, and provided with means for regulating or
    changing the operation of said apparatus, wherein said regulating means is
    caused to operate as a result of the detection of the article by the
    detecting means.


CLS 198/377
TXT Apparatus under subclass 375 wherein said conveyor section comprises a
    plurality of components that are connected together and moved in a
    closed-loop path such that each component is followed by and preceded by
    another component and a part of said closed-loop path coincides with a part
    of the path of an article to be conveyed.


CLS 198/378
TXT Apparatus under subclass 377 wherein said member moves relative to the
    conveyor in a step-by-step manner, or the conveyor section moves in a
    step-by-step manner relative to the path of the article being conveyed.

    (1)     Note.  The described movement permits the article to be "indexed"
    in a stop-and-go fashion in order to permit an operation to be performed on
    the conveyed article during periods of stopping, and then convey the
    article to its next operation, or convey another article to an operation
    station.


CLS 198/379
TXT Apparatus under subclass 373 wherein an article moving on a conveyor is
    momentarily stopped in its movement, the stoppage occurring by reason of
    the article being securely held, and wherein the article so held is rotated
    about a stationary axis of rotation before the article is released for
    further conveyance by the same, or a different conveyor.

    (1)     Note.  The holding can be performed by a suction member, or a
    magnetic member, or a gripper couple comprising two surfaces engaging the
    article frictionally on opposing sides thereof.


CLS 198/380
TXT Apparatus under subclass 373 wherein a gas or a liquid pressure impinges
    against the article being conveyed by a conveyor section to effect a
    turning of the article.

    (1)     Note.  The pressurized fluid that effects the turning is in
    addition to whatever mechanism that effects the conveyance of the article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    493+,   for a conveyor wherein impinging fluid is a conveyor means.


CLS 198/381
TXT Apparatus under subclass 373 wherein a device that generates lines of
    magnetic flux acts upon the article being conveyed by a conveyor section to
    effect a turning of the article.

    (1)     Note.  The magnetism that effects the turning is in addition to
    whatever mechanism that effects the conveyance of the article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    619,    for a conveyor wherein magnetic forces effect movement.

    690.1,  for a conveyor wherein magnetic forces enhance the friction of a
    conveyor.


CLS 198/382
TXT Apparatus under subclass 373 wherein the initial attitude of any article is
    unpredictable and wherein as the article is conveyed on or by a conveyor
    its attitude relative to its path of conveyance is caused to be predictable.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this and indented subclasses are devices wherein
    articles are supplied in a hopper or on a conveyor in a haphazard array, or
    faced in a direction relative to the conveyor in a manner which cannot be
    predicted to occur.  If, by change, a particular article is properly faced
    on the conveyor, no change in its attitude will occur.  However, if an
    article is improperly faced, either its attitude or its facing will be
    corrected, or it will be returned to supply for reconveyance and proper
    refacing; in either event, the attitude must be changed or corrected to be
    moved through the conveyor.

    (2)     Note.  In this and indented subclasses, the meaning of the word
    "uniform" will vary with the intent of the disclosure. For example, if in
    one disclosure the article at its source is in a haphazard (i.e., random)
    array, and at its destination the article is in an attitude which is
    acceptable as disclosed (e.g., one of two attitudes, either of which is
    acceptable), then the occurrence of that attitude is predictable and,
    therefore, is "uniform" in accordance with the disclosed intent.  However,
    if in another disclosure the article at its source is in one of the two
    attitudes, the occurrence of which attitude is not predictable (i.e.,
    random), and at its destination the article must be faced in only one
    particular attitude to be acceptable as disclosed, then only the proper
    attitude is predictable and, therefore, is "uniform" in accordance with the
    other disclosed intent.


CLS 198/383
TXT Apparatus under subclass 382 wherein the article to be conveyed has a
    particular configuration, and wherein the conveyor, or an adjunct thereto,
    has a particular configuration, and wherein the two configurations conform
    one to the other, whereby only an article whose configuration conforms to
    the conveyor configuration will be conveyed.

    (1)     Note.  To be properly placed into this or an indented subclass, a
    patent must include a claim to a conveyor portion that is clearly shaped so
    as to match or fit or be inserted into an article, and the claim should be
    clear that cooperation between the conveyor portion and the conveyed
    article occurs, such that articles that fit the conveyor pass and articles
    that do not fit the conveyor do not pass.


CLS 198/384
TXT Apparatus under subclass 383 wherein the conveyor comprises a plurality of
    components that are connected together and moved in a closed-loop path such
    that each component is followed by and preceded by another component and a
    part of said closed-loop path coincides with a part of the path an article
    to be conveyed, one or more components forming a receptacle for an article
    during its conveyance and each receptacle having means associated therewith
    for moving the article relative to the receptacle as it is conveyed
    therein, whereby each article is turned to a uniform facing in each
    receptacle.


CLS 198/385
TXT Apparatus under subclass 384 wherein the means for moving the article
    relative to the component comprises a rotating wheel having a periphery
    that contacts the surface of the article is received within the receptacle,
    and wherein the article is a spheroidal object having a relatively small
    portion of its surface depressed within the outline of the major portion of
    its surface to an extent that when the wheel or an auxiliary finger fits
    the small, depressed surface the wheel periphery will not contact the
    depressed portion, at which time the wheel will cease moving the article
    within the component.

    (1)     Note.  In most of the devices of this subclass, the roller serves
    the dual purpose of turning the object until the roller periphery "finds"
    the depression in the object; in some of the devices the roller periphery
    turns the object and an auxiliary finger, or "finder", senses the
    depression and causes the wheel to stop its rotation or move out of contact
    with the object; in either event, the object will stop turning when it is
    properly faced within the receptacle or pocket.

    (2)     Note.  The objects being conveyed and faced in this and the
    indented subclasses are usually peaches, apricots, or other "drupe" fruits
    having a line of cleavage along which line a pit is aligned, or are other
    food objects such as apples, olives, whole pears, that are characterized by
    having a surface depression or indentation with respect to which depression
    the fruit is to be faced for further processing.


CLS 198/386
TXT Apparatus under subclass 385 wherein the rotating wheel turns about an
    internal axis of turning, and can be further turned about a different axis
    of turning.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the roller is mounted between the branches of a
    bifurcated stem, the length of which is perpendicular to the axis of the
    roller.  Thus, the roller rotates in a vertical plane on its own horizontal
    axis, whereas the stem rotates on its longitudinal axis, thereby changing
    the vertical plane in which the roller rotates.


CLS 198/387
TXT Apparatus under subclass 384 wherein the components comprise rotatable
    shafts extending laterally across the direction of movement of the conveyor
    and moving perpendicular to their extent in said direction, each shaft
    having one or more peripheral depressions in the circumference thereof,
    adjacent shafts having their peripheral depressions aligned along the
    direction of movement, whereby the peripheral depressions of two adjacent
    shafts form a receptacle for the conveyed article.

    (1)     Note.  The device of this subclass conveys an ovid object, such as
    a egg, supported between adjacent rollers in the grooves of the rollers.
    By rotating the objects on the roller, the longitudinal axis of the ovid is
    caused to extend parallel to the axes of the rollers and perpendicular to
    the direction of movement thereof.


CLS 198/388
TXT Apparatus under subclass 383 wherein the configuration on the conveyor is a
    part, on or adjacent the conveyor, that juts out or protrudes into the path
    of articles being conveyed, wherein the configuration of the article
    includes a bifurcation or a cavity therein, and wherein the conveyor
    configuration is inserted into the article configuration, whereby those
    articles that match configurations pass along the conveyor and those that
    do not match configurations do not pass along the conveyor, or are turned
    so that the configurations do match.

    (1)     Note.  Usually, those articles that do not match and pass are
    returned to a supply of articles for recirculation and refacing.


CLS 198/389
TXT Apparatus under subclass 383 wherein the article to be conveyed is so
    proportioned that with respect to a major dimension thereof a first portion
    extending perpendicular to the dimension at one end thereof is larger than
    a second portion extending perpendicular to the dimension at the other end,
    and wherein the conveyor is provided with supports that are so spaced that
    the article will move along the conveyor with the first portion above the
    supports and the second portion hung from and below the supports.


CLS 198/390
TXT Apparatus under subclass 383 wherein the configuration of the conveyor is
    in the form of an opening through which an article passes, and wherein the
    article to be conveyed is configured to have its bounding line conforming
    to the bounding line of the opening, whereby articles so faced as to have
    their bounding lines matched with the opening pass therethrough.


CLS 198/391
TXT Apparatus under subclass 383 comprising a bowl-shaped means having a
    passageway which conforms to the article to be conveyed, and wherein the
    attitude of the article relative to its path of conveyance is caused to be
    predictable by vibrating said bowl.


CLS 198/392
TXT Apparatus under subclass 383 comprising means having a passageway or exit
    which conforms to the article to be conveyed whereby the attitude of the
    article relative to its path of conveyance is caused to be predictable by
    rotating said means.


CLS 198/393
TXT Apparatus under subclass 383 wherein the conveyor comprises a plurality of
    components that are connected together and moved in a closed-loop path such
    that each component is followed by and preceded by another component and a
    part of said closed-loop path coincides with the path of an article to be
    conveyed, each component forming a receptacle that is configured to the
    configuration of the article to be conveyed, and wherein another part of
    said closed-loop path coincides with a hopper or bin in which the articles
    are temporarily stored in haphazard array, whereby as a receptacle moves
    within the hopper an article will be received thereinto if its
    configuration conforms to the receptacle configuration and the so-received
    article will be conveyed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    397,    for similar structure wherein an item-receiving pocket does not fit
    the item.


CLS 198/394
TXT Apparatus under subclass 382 wherein the article to be conveyed is formed
    with a particular point or zone thereon which is identifiable to the
    apparatus as that point which should face in a predetermined direction
    relative to the conveyor, and wherein the article, while it is being
    conveyed, is caused to turn on its own axis and is caused to stop turning
    when said point or zone is faced in said predetermined direction.

    (1)     Note.  The article is usually a bottle or a can having a visible
    projection or seam that is to be faced relative to a station (e.g., a
    label-applying station).  However, the position characteristic can be a
    visible mark or an invisible indicium that is sensed by the apparatus.  For
    other means actuated in response to an improperly-faced article, see
    subclass 395.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    395,    and see (1) Note above.


CLS 198/395
TXT Apparatus under subclass 382 provided with means for detecting the attitude
    of an article and further provided with means for regulating the operation
    of said apparatus such that the article attitude will be corrected, or the
    article is rejected if it is presented incorrectly, and the attitude will
    remain unchanged if the article is presented correctly.

    (1)     Note.  Usually those articles that are rejected are returned to a
    supply of articles for recirculation and refacing.


CLS 198/396
TXT Apparatus under subclass 382 wherein the conveyor moves in a path, a part
    of which path coincides with a bin in which the articles to be conveyed are
    temporarily stored in a haphazard array, and wherein the article is taken
    from said bin and its attitude changed during the movement of the conveyor.


CLS 198/397
TXT Apparatus under subclass 396 wherein the conveyor comprises a plurality of
    components that are connected together and moved in a closed-loop path such
    that each component is followed by and preceded by another component, a
    part of said closed-loop path coincides with the path of an article to be
    conveyed, and other part of said path coincides with the bin (of subclass
    396), and wherein each component forms a receptacle for the article to be
    conveyed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    393,    for similar structure wherein an item-receiving pocket fits the
    shape of the item.


CLS 198/398
TXT Apparatus under subclass 382 wherein the article being conveyed is
    presented in one of only two opposite attitudes (the occurrence of any
    particular attitude being random or unpredictable), and wherein the
    conveyor, or an adjunct thereto, differentiates between the opposite
    attitudes and causes all the articles to have the same attitude.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for a device wherein articles facing
    one way will be separated from those articles facing the opposite way so
    that both articles will face the same way, but will travel in different
    directions, or the improperly-faced articles will be returned to the supply
    of articles for recirculation and refacing.


CLS 198/399
TXT Apparatus under subclass 398 wherein those articles having the correct
    attitude will remain in that attitude, and those articles having an
    incorrect attitude will have their attitudes changed to be correct.


CLS 198/400
TXT Apparatus under subclass 398 wherein each article has its attitude changed
    so that they all have the same attitude and all are moving along the same
    path of movement.


CLS 198/401
TXT Apparatus under subclass 373 provided with means for detecting the presence
    or absence of an article and further provided with means for regulating or
    changing the operation of the conveyor that causes an article to be turned,
    wherein said regulating means is actuated as a result of a detection by
    said detecting means.


CLS 198/402
TXT Apparatus under subclass 373 wherein each article that is conveyed in a
    sequence of articles is turned upside down (i.e., from an attitude wherein
    a particular face that is up is changed to an attitude wherein that
    particular face is down).

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the mechanism for inverting is a passive
    means acting in conjunction with a powered conveyor to invert successive
    articles.


CLS 198/403
TXT Apparatus under subclass 402 provided with mechanism that is powered to
    effect the turning of each article upside down.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the mechanism for inverting is separate
    from the apparatus for conveying.


CLS 198/404
TXT Apparatus under subclass 403 wherein the conveyor for articles includes one
    or more components moving in a closed-loop path and a part of said
    closed-loop path coincides with a part of the path of the articles to be
    conveyed, and wherein the conveyor effects the turning of each article
    upside down.


CLS 198/405
TXT Apparatus under subclass 404 wherein the conveyor comprises an
    endlessly-orbiting surface that travels in the direction of the "X" axis
    and extends transversely of said direction along a "Z" axis, and wherein as
    a particular "Z" axis line moves along the "X" axis, the "Z" axis turns
    about the "X" axis, thereby turning the article supported and carried by
    the surface.

    (1)     Note.  The terms "X" axis and "Z" axis are defined and further
    discussed in (2) Note of subclass 373.

    (2)     Note.  Usually the conveyor comprises two belts cooperating
    together to frictionally maintain a conveyed article between them and both
    belts twist together.


CLS 198/406
TXT Apparatus under subclass 373 wherein each article that is conveyed in a
    sequence of articles is a) lifted or lowered relative to an original
    direction of conveyance, and is also b) turned about its "Z" axis, during
    its conveyance.

    (1)     Note.  See (2) Note to subclass 373 for a definition and further
    discussion of "Z" axis.

    (2)     Note.  A device wherein an article is simply lifted and lowered (or
    vice versa) to its original elevation is not in this subclass, but may be
    found in such subclasses as 411 or 414.


CLS 198/407
TXT Apparatus under subclass 406 wherein each article is conveyed through a
    conveyor system in which first one conveyor moves an article and then a
    second conveyor moves said article.


CLS 198/408
TXT Apparatus under subclass 406 wherein the conveyor for articles includes one
    or more components moving in a closed-loop path and a part of said
    closed-loop path coincides with a part of the path of the articles to be
    conveyed, whereby the conveyor changes both the elevation and the attitude
    of each article.


CLS 198/409
TXT Apparatus under subclass 406 wherein the conveyor for articles includes a
    component that is connected to an actuator that imparts to-and-fro motion
    in a path, at least part of which path coincides with a part of the path of
    the article to be conveyed, the component having the function of contacting
    an article to change both the elevation and the attitude of each article at
    least while the paths coincide.


CLS 198/410
TXT Apparatus under subclass 373 wherein each article that is conveyed in a
    sequence of articles has its attitude changed at least twice in different
    actions that are separated in time or distance from one another.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is an apparatus wherein an article
    is faced in a particular direction to have an operation performed thereon,
    and that article is refaced in its original direction after the operation
    has been performed.


CLS 198/411
TXT Apparatus under subclass 373 wherein each article that is conveyed in a
    sequence of articles is moved by a conveyor and is turned by a mechanism
    that is powered to effect the turning of each article.


CLS 198/412
TXT Apparatus under subclass 411 wherein each article is moved by a plurality
    of conveyors in the form of separate conveyor sections forming a conveyor
    system, or in the form of separate conveyor components forming a conveyor
    section, but in either event, the conveyors are spaced apart along the
    direction of movement of the articles, and wherein the turning mechanism
    transfers each of the sequence of articles from a preceding conveyor to a
    succeeding conveyor, and during such transfer turns the article.


CLS 198/413
TXT Apparatus under subclass 412 wherein the turning mechanism comprises one or
    more members that pass through the space(s) between the conveyors to
    contact and turn the articles successively.


CLS 198/414
TXT Apparatus under subclass 413 wherein the turning mechanism contracts each
    successive article and is caused to raise the article out of contact with
    the conveyor, rotate the article partially with respect to the conveyor,
    and descend with the article to replace it on the same or a succeeding
    conveyor section.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass, it is not significant whether an article
    moves from one conveyor section to another conveyor section, or moves from
    one conveyor component to another conveyor component.  It is significant
    that between the parts of a conveyor a turntable mechanism effects turning
    of the article.


CLS 198/415
TXT Apparatus under subclass 411 wherein each article is moved by plurality of
    components forming a conveyor section, all of which components engage the
    same item at the same time to move that item, but one of which components
    has a greater rate of movement than another of said components, whereby the
    components cooperate with each other and the article to effect turning of
    the article as it moves in the conveyed direction.


CLS 198/416
TXT Apparatus under subclass 373 wherein each article that is conveyed in a
    sequence of articles is moved by a conveyor and is turned by an
    appurtenance that is located next to the conveyor and in the path of
    movement of the articles, whereby during the movement of each article, it
    engages the appurtenance and the reaction between the moving article and
    the appurtenance causes the article to turn.

    (1)     Note.  In most mechanisms of this subclass the member (i.e.,
    appurtenance) is a stationary and fixed object, but it also may be member
    that, in use, is fixed in the path of the articles, but may be moved at
    will out of such path, or may be a member that is in the path of the
    article, but as the member is engaged by the moving article, the member
    moves to permit the now-turned article to pass.


CLS 198/417
TXT Apparatus under subclass 416 wherein the appurtenance comprises a channel
    through which the successive articles pass, which channel substantially
    encloses the outline of the article as seen in the "X" axis, and wherein
    sections through the channel taken in the plane of the "Y" axis and "Z"
    axis in successive stations along the "X" axis show the channel displaced
    angularly about the "X" axis.

    (1)     Note.  For definitions and further discussion of the axes referred
    to, see (2) Note of subclass 373.


CLS 198/418
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including at least two conveyor
    sections cooperating for the purpose of conveying plural articles in such
    manner that a particular plurality of articles will be arranged or formed
    into a particular array or cluster comprising a specific number of such
    articles, and for subsequently conveying said array or cluster as a
    separate collection.

    (1)     Note.  This note is intended to express in short form the
    differences in the concepts among patents placed in this subclass (418) and
    those of the two following coordinate subclasses 434 and 463.1.  In all
    three major subclasses and their indented subclasses, the function of the
    disclosed structure is the movement of one or more items via two or more
    conveyors.  In this subclass (418) the items are arranged as an
    identifiable and significant group consisting of a predetermined plurality
    of items moved as a group through that structure being claimed by the
    patent. In subclass 434, the items are arranged as a succession of items
    consisting of an indeterminate number of items moved consecutively via the
    conveyors being claimed by the patent, and at least the last downstream
    claimed conveyor does not provide structure for individualization or
    separation between the successive conveyed items.  In subclass 463.1 the
    items are individual and separate one from the other, each being an
    identifiable and significant item being moved separately via the conveyors
    being claimed by the patent, and at least the last downstream claimed
    conveyor does provide structure for individualization or separation between
    one item and a preceding or succeeding item.

    (2)     Note.  For a patent to be placed in this or an indented subclass it
    is not necessary for a group to retain its identity separate from other
    such groups.  For example, in a subclass such as 418.1 a formed group of
    items could be packed into a container (not claimed) into which other
    groups have been or will be packed.  Nor is it necessary for all of the
    claimed structure to move the group as a group. For example, in a subclass
    such as 431 a group of items is formed by depositing successive items one
    by one into group formation, after which the group is moved as a group.
    The term "array" is inclusive of, but not limited to, a plurality of items
    arranged in a straight line; the term "cluster" is inclusive of, but not
    limited to, a plurality of items arranged in an irregular formation or a
    formation such as a circle.  For purposes of convenience, the term "group"
    will be used in the definitions of subclasses indented hereunder unless one
    of the other terms is specifically applicable.

    (3)     Note.  The line between Class 198 Conveyors: Power-Driven, and
    Class 414, Material or Article Handling, relative to apparatus for placing
    articles into or removing them from an intersupporting group is as follows:

    (1)     Class 198 takes such apparatus when (a) it consists of a power
    driven or gravity conveyor, (b) the site on which the group is supported is
    a horizontally extended conveyor surface, and (c) the group is formed on
    the surface of the conveyor while the conveyor both moves and transports
    the article in a horizontal direction; and

    (2)     Class 414 takes such apparatus, even if it consists of a
    conveyor(s) proper for Class 198, when either (a) the site on which the
    group is supported is other than a conveyor proper for Class 198 (e.g., an
    elevator, a shelf) or (b) the site on which the group is supported is a
    conveyor surface which has been fully stopped while each article is added
    to the group.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclasses 213+, for a conveyor on
    which sheets are delivered in succession to form a stack, on which conveyor
    the stack is moved as a stack without the aid of structure other than the
    conveyor.


CLS 198/418.1
TXT Having items discharged from plural distinct outlets into group:

    Apparatus under subclass 418 in which either (1) a single conveyor section
    having two or more separate exits or (2) plural conveyor sections each
    having a separate exit deliver articles to another conveyor section on
    which the articles are arranged or formed into a common group.

    (1)     Note.  The definition does not limit the taking of only one article
    from each of the exits.  Rather, it permits the taking of one or more
    articles from any two or more exits even if one or more possible exits are
    skipped.  The articles can be supplied from a random mass, a regular stack,
    or succession of articles.


CLS 198/418.2
TXT With outlets longitudinally spaced along path of progressively formed group:

    Apparatus under subclass 418.1 wherein at least two of the conveyor exits
    which deliver articles to the group supporting conveyor section are
    positioned at different points along its length and add articles to the
    group thereon when it is moved past each of the exit points.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    270,    Sheet-Material Associating or Folding, subclasses 58.01+, for a
    mechanism to associate sheets from different supply stacks into new stacks
    containing different sheets in each new stack.


CLS 198/418.3
TXT Superposes items within group:

    Apparatus under subclass 418.2 wherein at least a portion of one of the
    articles is placed by a delivery conveyor section on top of or below a
    portion of another one of the articles of the group which was previously
    delivered thereto either by this or another delivery conveyor.


CLS 198/418.4
TXT With vertically aligned outlets discharging in the same direction and
    superposing items:

    Apparatus under subclass 418.1 wherein one of the conveyor exits which
    delivers articles to the group supporting conveyor section is positioned
    directly above and delivers articles in an identical direction to another
    conveyor exit, the articles delivered by both exits having each a portion
    thereof which is located above or below another article within the final
    group.


CLS 198/418.5
TXT Having plural successive groups discharged by single conveyor into larger
    group:

    Apparatus under subclass 418 in which a single conveyor section having one
    exit consecutively delivers several small groups to another conveyor
    section on which the articles of the groups are arranged or formed into a
    bigger common group.

    (1)     Note.  It is not necessary for the number of articles in each group
    to be the same as the number of articles in a previous or succeeding group,
    but the variances should recur regularly.  For example, in forming a
    staggered layer of bottles to be packaged, a row of seven bottles is
    formed, a row of six bottles is then formed, followed by another row of
    seven bottles.


CLS 198/418.6
TXT Having conveyor drop grouped items simultaneously onto another conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 418 wherein a conveyor section which supports the
    entire group of articles is located above a second conveyor section to
    which it delivers the group by releasing all the articles of the group at
    the same time and allowing them to fall as a group onto the second conveyor.


CLS 198/418.7
TXT Subdivides continuous item stream into longitudinally spaced groups:

    Apparatus under subclass 418 wherein the articles to be grouped are already
    in a succession of articles moving along a particular line of motion, and
    wherein the group is formed by separating the last article of a preceding
    group from the first article of a succeeding group while continuing the
    movement of the preceding group along substantially the same line of motion
    followed by its articles prior to becoming a group.

    (1)     Note.  The separation can be caused by increasing the speed of the
    preceding group after the last item of the group has passed a particular
    point, or by intermittently stopping or decreasing speed of the first item
    of a succeeding group after the last item of the preceding group has passed
    a particular point.


CLS 198/418.8
TXT By offsetting first or last article:

    Apparatus under subclass 418.7 which separates the preceding group from the
    succeeding group by abruptly shifting out of alignment with its adjacent
    articles, an article located at either (1) the end of the preceding group
    or (2) the beginning of the succeeding group.


CLS 198/418.9
TXT And imbricates items within group:

    Apparatus under subclass 418.7 wherein the articles are delivered to the
    group in such a manner that the leading edge of each article in the group
    both (1) overlaps or underlies the trailing edge of the adjacent previously
    delivered article and (2) travels ahead of the leading edge of all articles
    subsequently placed within the group.


CLS 198/419.1
TXT By item engaging stop means:

    Apparatus under subclass 418.7 wherein the preceding group is separated
    from the succeeding group by means which contacts the first article of the
    succeeding group and prevents its movement for a period of time.


CLS 198/419.2
TXT By different speed conveyors:

    Apparatus under subclass 418.7 wherein the last conveyor section supporting
    the succession of articles to be formed into groups moves the articles at a
    different velocity for at least a portion of the time it transports them
    than the succeeding conveyor section which supports the formed groups.


CLS 198/419.3
TXT With spaced dividers on conveyor limiting group size:

    Apparatus under subclass 419.2 wherein either (1) the last conveyor section
    supporting the succession of articles or (2) the succeeding conveyor
    section supporting the groups is provided with structural means located
    along its article transporting surface which restricts the number of
    articles possible in each group by dividing the surface into two or more
    distinct sections.


CLS 198/426
TXT Apparatus under subclass 418 wherein the articles to be grouped comprise a
    succession of such articles moving on a first conveyor along a particular
    line of motion, and wherein a particular plurality of said articles is
    engaged by means for transferring all of said particular plurality of
    articles at the same time from said first conveyor to a second conveyor,
    which transfer means moves in a direction different from said particular
    lines of motion.

    (1)     Note.  For discussion of the term "stream", see (1) Note of
    subclass 434 below.


CLS 198/427
TXT Apparatus under subclass 426 wherein the second conveyor is divided into a
    plurality of conveyor sections substantially corresponding in number to the
    number of articles in the transferred group, whereby the articles
    transferred as a group are subsequently divided so that each article is one
    of a subsequent succession of articles on the second conveyor, and the
    number of such successions corresponds to the number of articles in the
    transferred group.

    (1)     Note.  In the subclass (427), the items from one stream are arrayed
    in a group before being distributed into plural streams.  For a mechanism
    wherein items from a stream are distributed into plural streams without the
    intermediate transfer as a group, see subclasses 436+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    436,    and see (1) Note above.


CLS 198/428
TXT Apparatus under subclass 426 wherein the transfer means includes a gaseous
    fluid medium under subatmospheric or above-atmospheric pressure.

    (1)     Note.  The pneumatic conveyor usually is (though it is not limited
    to) a series of suction members that engage and carry the groups of items.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    438     and 493+, for other conveyors having transfer means using air blast
    or suction.


CLS 198/429
TXT Apparatus under subclass 426, wherein the transfer means moves to-and-fro
    and during one of its movements engages the particular plurality of
    articles to transfer the articles simultaneously from the first conveyor to
    the second conveyor.


CLS 198/430
TXT Apparatus under subclass 429 wherein either a) the to-and-fro movement of
    the transfer means is in a direction that is angularly related to the line
    of motion imparted to the articles by the first conveyor, or b) the
    to-and-fro movement of the transfer means is included in a movement that
    follows an endless closed-loop path, at least a part of the to-and-fro
    movement intercepting the line of motion imparted to the articles by the
    first conveyor.


CLS 198/431
TXT Apparatus under subclass 418 wherein the articles to be grouped are
    conveyed one followed by another aligned along a particular line of motion
    on a first conveyor, and wherein the articles are engaged by a transfer
    means and placed one at a time in an aligned group on a second conveyor,
    which transfer means changes the line of motion of the articles on the
    second conveyor relative to the line of motion of the articles on the first
    conveyor, or changes the alignment of articles on the second conveyor
    relative to the alignment of articles on the first conveyor.


CLS 198/432
TXT Apparatus under subclass 418 wherein the articles to be grouped are
    conveyed as an array followed by another array, each array consisting of a
    particular number of articles aligned along a particular array line, which
    array line is substantially transverse to a line of motion of a first
    conveyor, and wherein each arrayed group of articles is engaged by a
    transfer means and placed as an arrayed group on a second conveyor, which
    second conveyor carries each successive conveyed group in an array whose
    alignment is transverse to the line of motion of the second conveyor.

    (1)     Note.  Patents are placed in this subclass wherein the conveyed
    group is formed either on the first conveyor, by means associated with the
    first conveyor, or prior to placement as a group on the first conveyor.


CLS 198/433
TXT Apparatus under subclass 418 wherein the articles to be grouped are
    conveyed as an array followed by another array, each array consisting of a
    particular number of articles aligned along a particular array line, which
    line is substantially transverse to a line of motion of a first conveyor,
    and wherein each arrayed group of articles is engaged by a transfer means
    and placed as an arrayed group on a second conveyor, and the second
    conveyor carries the array so that its array line is in alignment with the
    line of motion of the second conveyor.

    (1)     Note.  Patents are placed in this subclass wherein the conveyed
    group is formed either on the first conveyor, by means associated with the
    first conveyor, or prior to placement on the first conveyor.


CLS 198/434
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including at least two conveyor
    sections cooperating for the purpose of moving a succession of articles
    from one conveyor to another, and during such movement changing the
    relationship between, or the direction of movement of, or the path of,
    successive articles.

    (1)     Note.  A conveyor system of this or an indented subclass functions
    to form a stream of items from a random mass or quantity of such items, or
    functions to redirect or respace the items of such a stream relative to
    each other, or functions to change the number of streams passing through
    the system. The term "stream of items" refers to a plurality of articles
    moving in accordance with two criteria.  The first criterion is that the
    articles move in succession, one article followed by another which is
    followed by a third, etc, the number of articles so moved being
    indeterminate or indefinite.  The second criterion is that the succession
    of articles moves along a predetermined line or path.  It is not necessary
    that the line be straight, but if it is other than straight, it must be a
    line along which each article of the succession moves in its turn.  It is
    not necessary that the line be the only line (i.e., there may be plural
    lines or streams), but if there are plural streams (e.g., one stream
    alongside another stream) the claimed disclosure must clearly describe the
    presence of such plural streams or describe means to channelize or guide
    each such streams separately from the other(s).  Thus, a disclosure of a
    belt carrying a plurality of articles extending along the direction of
    movement of the belt and articles extending across said direction would not
    be considered as a disclosure of plural streams unless the specification
    clearly described the articles as being arranged in plural successions of
    articles or the structure indicated channels to form plural successions. In
    the absence of such "stream" disclosure the belt would be considered as a
    quantity source of articles or as a destination for articles.

    (2)     Note.  A distinction should be made as to the structural and
    functional difference between a conveyor  system for conveying plural
    articles arranged as a stream of items and a conveyor system for conveying
    plural articles, each article being a specific load as a separate unit.  In
    the stream conveyor (found in this subclass (434) and indented subclasses)
    there is no means for dividing and maintaining separately one article from
    the preceding or succeeding article.  The emphasis in the claimed
    disclosure of a patent to such a system is in the manner of forming the
    stream, or reforming the stream into other streams.  In the unit conveyor
    (found in subclass 463.1, and indented subclasses) there is a means for
    dividing one article from the preceding or succeeding article and conveying
    it separately even though a plurality of articles may be conveyed
    simultaneously.  The emphasis in the claimed disclosure of the patent in
    subclasses 463.1+ is in the individuality of each of the plural articles,
    rather than in the plurality of the articles. A particular conveyor section
    proper as part of a system for subclass 463.1 could be used as a means for
    combining or dividing streams and thus be proper as part of a system for
    subclass 434.

    (3)     Note.  If the structure of a patent comprises a conveyor moving its
    load against a member that serves to deflect, or guide, or restrain, or
    regulate the movement of the load, and if the claimed disclosure of the
    patent significantly describes the load as comprising a plurality of
    articles, and further significantly describes the function of the structure
    as for forming a stream (defined in (1) Note above) from a source of such
    articles, or for changing the arrangement of streams a) from a particular
    number of streams upstream of the member to a different number of streams
    downstream of the member, or b) from a particular path of stream upstream
    of the member to a different path of stream downstream of the member or c)
    from a particular space between successive articles upstream of the member
    to a different space between successive articles downstream of the member,
    in such a disclosure the upstream conveyor will be considered as one
    conveyor section and the downstream conveyor will be considered as a
    different conveyor section despite the apparent use of one conveyor element.


CLS 198/435
TXT Apparatus under subclass 434 wherein the articles of the succession that
    are moved by one conveyor are apportioned among a plurality of second
    conveyors, which second conveyors are arranged to be one above another, and
    further convey, or temporarily retain and then convey, the apportioned
    articles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 509+, for
    a machine wherein sheets are assorted into plural receivers in accordance
    with characteristics of the respective sheets.

    270,    Sheet-Material Associating and see Search Class note below to Class
    271.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclasses 306+, wherein the sheets to
    be delivered comprise a sequence of two or more sheets that are being
    conveyed one after the other(s) toward two more receivers, the device being
    provided with means for diverting a first of said sheets into a first
    receiver a second of said sheets into a second receiver, the sequence
    continuing until a sheet is diverted into the last receiver, whereupon the
    next sheet of the sequence is diverted into said first receiver and the
    operation is repeated.  A machine for Class 271, subclasses 306+, differs
    from a machine for Class 270, subclasses 58.01+, in that Class 271,
    subclasses 306+, provides for the stacking into plural receivers of sheets
    from a single or an undetermined source, whereas Class 270, subclasses
    58.01+, provides for the stacking into plural receivers of sheets from a
    plurality of source stacks, the sheets of which are to be collated into a
    plurality of finished stacks.  See the Search Class notes in the class
    definition of Class 271 for further discussion.  In this subclass will also
    be found a machine which is programmed so that one or more of the receivers
    is "skipped" to form special stacks.


CLS 198/436
TXT Apparatus under subclass 434 wherein the purpose of the system is to change
    the path of successive articles from a single succession of articles to at
    least two successions of articles.


CLS 198/437
TXT Apparatus under subclass 436 provided with means for detecting a condition
    of a conveyor system, or of the load carried by said system, or of the
    environment in which the system operates, and provided with means for
    regulating or changing the operation of said system, wherein said
    regulating means is actuated as a result of the detection of the condition
    by said detecting means.

    (1)     Note.  The regulating may be for the purpose of maintaining the
    intended operating conditions, as by slight changes on either side of usual
    operation.  The changing may be for the purpose of altering or correcting
    the operating conditions, such as would result from feedback of undesired
    operating conditions or discovery of the need for new or different
    operating conditions.


CLS 198/438
TXT Apparatus under subclass 436 provided with means using a gaseous medium
    under sub-atmospheric or above-atmospheric pressure to change the path of
    successive articles.


CLS 198/439
TXT Apparatus under subclass 436 provided with means using lines of magnetic
    flux to change the path of successive articles.


CLS 198/440
TXT Apparatus under subclass 436 provided with a plurality of components that
    are connected together and moved in a closed-loop path such that each
    component is followed by and preceded by another component and a part of
    said closed-loop path coinciding with a part of the path of one of the
    successions of articles referred to in the definition of subclass 436, each
    component having the function of contacting one article of a succession
    thereof, whereby said article will be caused to partake of movement that is
    imparted to said component at least while said paths coincide.


CLS 198/441
TXT Apparatus under subclass 440 wherein the closed-loop path is a circle, and
    the components follow the circular path.


CLS 198/442
TXT Apparatus under subclass 436 provided with a member that may be positioned
    to intersect the line of movement of said single succession of articles in
    such manner as to either a) intersect said line or not intersect said line
    after passage of successive articles, or b) intersect said line in a
    particular relationship to said line, or intersect said line in a different
    relationship to said line after passage of successive articles, whereby to
    cause at least two successions of articles to be formed from the single
    succession of articles.


CLS 198/443
TXT Apparatus under subclass 434 wherein the purpose of the system is to change
    a supply of articles into at least one succession of articles.

    (1)     Note.  The term "quantity source of items" has been used to refer
    to a supply consisting of many articles. Thus it includes a mass of
    articles having a haphazard or random arrangement, as well as a supply of
    plural streams of items as in subclass 448 below.  The term does not refer
    to a single stream from which only one article can be taken at a time; for
    disclosure of such a function, see subclasses 463.1+ below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    463.1+, and see (1) Note above.


CLS 198/444
TXT Apparatus under subclass 443 provided with means for detecting a condition
    of a conveyor system, or of the load carried by said system, or of the
    environment in which the system operates, and provided with means for
    regulating or changing the operation of said system, wherein said
    regulating means is actuated as a result of the detection of the condition
    by said detecting means.

    (1)     Note.  The regulating may be for the purpose of maintaining the
    intended operating conditions, as by slight changes on either side of usual
    operation.  The changing may be for the purpose of altering or correcting
    the operating conditions, such as would result from feedback of undesired
    operating conditions, or discovery of the need for new or different
    operating conditions.


CLS 198/445
TXT Apparatus under subclass 443 wherein the purpose of the system is to change
    a supply of articles into two or more successions of articles.


CLS 198/446
TXT Apparatus under subclass 445 provided with means to agitate, vibrate, or
    jog the successive articles so as to urge the articles into separate
    successions of articles, which means is either part of or in addition to
    one of the conveyor sections referred to in the definition of subclass 434.


CLS 198/447
TXT Apparatus under subclass 445 wherein said articles from said two or more
    successions of articles are interspersed to form only one succession of
    articles.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the original source of articles is usually
    a random mass of articles.  The articles are first arranged into plural
    streams, which streams are then rearranged into one stream.  Compare this
    subclass with subclass 448 wherein the original source is a plurality of
    streams.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    448,    and see (1) Note above.


CLS 198/448
TXT Apparatus under subclass 443 wherein said supply of articles comprises two
    or more successions of articles, and wherein said articles from said
    successions are interspersed to form only one succession of articles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    447,    and see (1) Note therein.


CLS 198/449
TXT Apparatus under subclass 448 provided with a plurality of components that
    are connected together and moved in a closed-loop path such that each
    component is followed by and preceded by another component, and a part of
    said closed-loop path coinciding with a path of one of the successions of
    articles referred to in the definition of subclass 443, each component
    having the function of contacting one article of a succession thereof,
    whereby said article will be caused to partake of movement that is imparted
    to said component at least while said paths coincide.


CLS 198/450
TXT Apparatus under subclass 449 wherein the closed-loop path is a circle, and
    the components follow the circular path.


CLS 198/451
TXT Apparatus under subclass 448 provided with barrier means that may be
    inserted into or removed from the course of movement of each of the
    successions of articles, thereby to regulate the passage of articles past
    the barrier means of each succession and permit the orderly interspersion
    of articles from each of the successions of articles into one said
    succession of articles.


CLS 198/452
TXT Apparatus under subclass 448 provided with a member that may be positioned
    to intersect the course of movement of each of the succession of articles,
    or not intersect such course of movement, which member diverts an article
    from one of such successions when it is caused to intersect such course of
    movement.


CLS 198/453
TXT Apparatus under subclass 443 wherein the supply of articles is a random or
    haphazard arrangement, and the apparatus is provided with a passageway
    between the supply and the succession of articles to be formed, which
    passageway permits the passage of only one article at a time, and the
    apparatus includes means for moving articles successively through the
    passageway.

    (1)     Note.  The article-moving means may be one of the conveyor sections
    needed to form a conveyor system, or may be a conveyor section additional
    thereto.


CLS 198/454
TXT Apparatus under subclass 453 provided with structure additional to said
    article-moving means, which additional structure includes a face or area
    that contacts the articles passing thereby, and which additional structure
    is moved relative to the movement of the article-moving means.

    (1)     Note.  The additional movement may be at right angles to or in the
    direction of movement of the stream, but the purpose is to facilitate
    passage of single articles in succession.  For additional movement counter
    to the direction of stream movement (either unidirectional or vibratory)
    see subclass 455 indented hereunder.


CLS 198/455
TXT Apparatus under subclass 454 wherein the movement of the additional
    structure is in a direction opposite to the direction of movement of the
    succession of articles.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note to subclass 454 for exemplary movements for
    this subclass.


CLS 198/456
TXT Apparatus under subclass 434 wherein a succession of articles moves along a
    path in a particular direction of movement, and wherein the articles are
    successively shunted in a direction transverse to, or raised or lowered
    with respect to, said particular direction to change either the path or the
    direction of movement of the succession of articles.

    (1)     Note.  The movement of the succession of articles after the
    transverse shunting can be either a) along a new path that is substantially
    parallel to the original particular direction, or b) along a new path that
    is transverse to, or inclined relative to, the the original particular
    direction, or c) along a new path that is vertical or vertically inclined.


CLS 198/457
TXT Apparatus under subclass 456 wherein the direction of movement of the
    succession of articles after they have been successively shunted is along a
    new path that is transverse to, or inclined relative to, the original
    particular direction of movement.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is apparatus wherein each of the
    articles is successively shunted in a transverse direction, and each is
    successively shunted into a new path that is parallel to the old path,
    laterally displaced from the old path, and in a direction reverse to the
    old path.  In brief, each article follows a "U-shaped" path.

    (2)     Note.  Structure for this subclass (457) includes a first conveyor
    for moving articles in a first direction and delivering the articles to a
    second conveyor that moves the articles in a different direction.  In such
    structure the claimed disclosure of the patent is important to the proper
    placement of the patent for original and cross-reference purposes.  If the
    attitude of the successive articles relative to the conveyors is not
    significant (i.e., not claimed or particularly disclosed), the patent
    disclosing such conveyor structure is properly placed in this subclass
    (457) as an original.  If the attitude of the successive articles is
    significant (e.g., a claim recites a turning of the conveyed article), the
    effect of such turning should be considered for placement.  If the turning
    of the article relative to the conveyors is such that on the first conveyor
    a particular face is headed in the conveyed direction and during turning,
    and when on the second conveyor said particular face is still headed in the
    conveyed direction, then its attitude relative to its conveyed direction
    has not been changed; a patent claiming such "turning" is proper for
    original placement in this subclass (457).  If the turning of the article
    is such that on the first conveyor a particular face is headed in the
    conveyed direction, and if during turning or when on the second conveyor a
    different face is headed in the conveyed direction then its attitude
    relative to its conveyed direction has been changed; a patent claiming such
    turning is proper for original placement is subclasses 373+.


CLS 198/458
TXT Apparatus under subclass 456 wherein at least two successions of articles
    move along a corresponding number of substantially parallel paths in a
    particular direction of movement, and wherein the articles of at least one
    of said successions are successively shunted in a direction transverse to
    said particular direction, whereby the distance between the successions of
    articles after the shunting is different from the distance between the
    successions before the shunting.


CLS 198/459.1
TXT By longitudinally respacing successive articles in stream:

    Subject matter under subclass 434 wherein a series of loads are
    repositioned or relocated lengthwise in a timely and properly spaced order.


CLS 198/459.2
TXT Rotating star wheel:

    Subject matter under subclass 459.1 wherein a change in the load position
    is effected by the engagement of the load with a revolving member having an
    alternate arm and recess or having a plurality of radially disposed fingers.


CLS 198/459.3
TXT Rotating screw:

    Subject matter under subclass 459.1 wherein the change in the article
    spacing is effected by a revolving member which turns about its axis and
    includes a body of cylindrical form having a plurality of helical or spiral
    ribs or threads.


CLS 198/459.4
TXT Varying pitch:

    Subject matter under subclass 459.3 wherein a distance between a point on
    one of the threads of the rotating screw and a corresponding point on an
    adjacent thread is different.


CLS 198/459.5
TXT Fixed obstruction and means for moving articles over or around the
    obstruction:

    Subject matter under subclass 459.1 wherein a stationary barrier to the
    movement of the loads is overcome by a means which elevates or advances
    laterally a leading load relative to the barrier to permit further movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    463.5,  for a similar barrier.


CLS 198/459.6
TXT Movable gate:

    Subject matter under subclass 459.1 wherein a barrier changes its position
    into the conveying path to retard or stop the load and the barrier is
    retractable to resume the load position to provide predetermined
    longitudinal spacing between the adjacent loads.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    463.4,  for a similar gate.


CLS 198/459.7
TXT Plural:

    Subject matter under subclass 459.6 including two or more barriers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    463.6,  for a similar gate.


CLS 198/459.8
TXT Endless or rotary conveyor having zone of varying speed:

    Subject matter under subclass 459.1 wherein a continuous or revolving
    carrier includes a load carrying roller or similar element contacting the
    loads and changing the relative spacings of the articles by temporarily
    increasing or decreasing the rate of motion of the contacted articles.


CLS 198/460.1
TXT With space-control means responsive to article sensing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 459.1 including means for detecting the
    presence or absence, or other condition, of the loads of the succession,
    and including means for regulating or changing the operation of the
    conveyor to change the distance between the successive loads as a result of
    the condition detected by the detecting means.


CLS 198/460.2
TXT Variable conveying length conveyor:

    Subject matter under subclass 460.1 wherein the detecting means
    automatically changes the effective carrying distance along the path of
    travel to delay or speed up the time of discharge or receipt of the loads.


CLS 198/460.3
TXT To crowd or imbricate:

    Subject matter under subclass 460.1 including means for automatically
    controlling the conveyor system for (a) decreasing the spacing between the
    loads or (b) overlapping one load partly over the adjacent load in a
    predetermined spacing arrangement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    462.1+, for crowding or imbricating without a sensor.


CLS 198/461.1
TXT By successive conveyors having dissimilar speeds:

    Subject matter under subclass 459.1 wherein a change in the spacing between
    the loads is effected during a passage of the loads from one portion of the
    carrier to the adjacent portion of the carrier, and the change is caused by
    a difference in the rate of movement of the carrier portions relative to
    each other.


CLS 198/461.2
TXT Conveyors having increased speeds only:

    Subject matter under subclass 461.1 wherein each downstream carrier moves
    faster than the upstream carrier.


CLS 198/461.3
TXT Belt or chain conveyors only:

    Subject matter under subclass 461.2 wherein the carriers consist only of
    continuous bands of flexible material or continuous bands constructed of
    links of metal or plastic or similar material.


CLS 198/462.1
TXT To crowd or imbricate articles:

    Subject matter under subclass 461.1 wherein at least one of the  conveyors
    is driven at a speed to (a) cause a decreased spacing between the loads or
    (b) cause one load to partly overlap the adjacent load in a predetermined
    spacing arrangement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    460.3,  for an article sensing means controlling a crowding or imbricating.


CLS 198/462.2
TXT Articles imbricated:

    Subject matter under subclass 462.1 wherein at least one of the conveyors
    is driven at a speed to cause one load to overlap the adjacent load in a
    predetermined spacing arrangement.


CLS 198/462.3
TXT Crowding by endless belts or chain conveyors only:

    Subject matter under subclass 462.1 wherein the decreased spacing  is
    caused only by continuous load carriers made of bands of flexible material
    or bands constructed of links of metal or plastic or similar material.


CLS 198/463.1
TXT CONVEYOR SYSTEM FOR MOVING A SPECIFIC LOAD AS A SEPARATE UNIT:

    Apparatus under the class definition including at least two conveyor
    sections cooperating for the purpose of conveying one portion of material,
    one article or one group of articles as a unit separate from other portions
    or articles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    418+,   for plural conveyor sections cooperating to form a group of items
    into a unit from a mass or a plurality of sources of items.

    434+,   for plural conveyor sections cooperating to move articles in a
    particular continuous arrangement such as a stream of articles instead of
    as a separate unit.


CLS 198/463.2
TXT System includes a linear conveyor or portion thereof which bodily shifts
    transversely to move a load in synchronization with a transverse
    continuously operating conveyor section:

    Apparatus under subclass 463.1 wherein the system includes a conveyor
    driven to convey a load in a straight line and in addition is in whole or
    part bodily shifted sidewise to its direction of conveyance in
    synchronization with a transverse, continuously operating conveyor such
    that the load can be transferred between conveyors without halting article
    movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    631.1+, for conveyor adjustably mounted for extra conveying function.


CLS 198/463.3
TXT System includes linear conveyor or portion thereof which shifts to lift or
    lower load before or after linearly conveying load relative to adjacent
    conveyor section:

    Apparatus under subclass 463.1 wherein the system includes a conveyor,
    which normally conveys a load in a straight line, which  in whole or part
    bodily shifts to elevator or depress the load prior to or following having
    conveyed the load relative to an adjacent conveyor section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    631.1+, for conveyor adjustably mounted for extra conveying function.


CLS 198/463.4
TXT System includes gate means:

    Apparatus under subclass 463.1 wherein the system includes a barrier which
    may be inserted into or removed from the course of movement of the load
    moving along the system to regulate the movement of the load from one
    conveyor to another  in the system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    425,    for gates used to form a unit from a stream of articles.

    451,    for gates used to merge plural streams into one stream.

    459.1+, for gates used to space articles in a stream.


CLS 198/463.5
TXT Load obstructing gate and means for lifting load over the obstruction:

    Apparatus under subclass 463.4 wherein the system includes a barrier to the
    movement of articles and a means which elevates at least the leading unit
    over the barrier to permit further movement of said unit along the system.


CLS 198/463.6
TXT Plural successively operated gate means:

    Apparatus under subclass 463.4 wherein the system includes two or more
    barriers which are sequentially operated.


CLS 198/464.1
TXT System includes control means responsive to sensing means:

    Apparatus under subclass 463.1 wherein the system includes means for
    detecting a condition of a conveyor system or of the load carried thereon,
    or of the environment in which the system operates and includes means for
    regulating or changing the operation of said system in response to the
    detecting means.


CLS 198/464.2
TXT Responsive to load presence or absence:

    Apparatus under 464.1 wherein the detecting means is actuated by the
    existence or nonexistence of the load.


CLS 198/464.3
TXT Responsive to condition of at least one conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 464.2 wherein the detecting means is responsive to
    a condition (e.g., position, speed, etc.) of one conveyor of the system in
    addition to the existence or nonexistence of the load.


CLS 198/464.4
TXT Responsive to undesired condition of load:

    Apparatus under subclass 464.1 wherein the detecting means determines an
    unwelcome condition of the load such as a jam.

    (1)     Note.  Sensing load orientation or attitude is found in subclass
    395 of this class.


CLS 198/465.1
TXT System includes a load supported by a conveyor portion which is separable
    from the conveyor drive:

    Apparatus under subclass 463.1 wherein the load is supported by a reusable
    carrier (conveyor portion) which is frictionally or positively driven by a
    drive means and is disengagable therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    803.1,  for separable carriers used with a single conveyor.


CLS 198/465.2
TXT Wherein the conveyor portion moves in a closed path in the horizontal plane
    only:

    Apparatus under subclass 465.1 wherein the load carrier portion is moved
    only in a closed path in the longitudinal plane by one or more separate
    carrier drives.


CLS 198/465.3
TXT Wherein the conveyor portion is supported and driven adjacent its opposite
    sides by horizontally spaced drives:

    Apparatus under subclass 465.1 wherein the load carrier portion is driven
    by longitudinal spaced drives which engage opposite sides of the portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    681     and 803.2, for carriers supporting loads between horizontally
    spaced drives.


CLS 198/465.4
TXT Wherein the conveyor portion supports the load below the drive:

    Apparatus under subclass 465.1 wherein the load carrier portion engages the
    load at a point below to the location of engagement of the load carrier by
    its drive means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    681,    for carriers which engage load below the location of engagement
    between the carrier and the carrier drive.


CLS 198/466.1
TXT System includes a T-shaped or headed load suspended between parallel
    conveyors directly:

    Apparatus under subclass 463.1 wherein a load which is so proportioned that
    with respect to a major dimension thereof a first portion extending
    perpendicular to the dimension at one end thereof is larger then a second
    portion extending perpendicular to the dimension at the other end, and
    wherein the conveyor section is provided with at least two horizontally
    spaced rails or conveyors that the load will move along the conveyor
    sections with the first portion above the rails or conveyors and the second
    portion hung from the below the rails or conveyors.

    (1)     Note.  Changing the attitude of a load by horizontal spaced rails
    or conveyors if found is subclass 389 of this class.


CLS 198/467.1
TXT System includes a rotating screw:

    Apparatus under subclass 463.1 wherein one of the conveyor sections
    includes a member which turns about its axis and has a helical surface
    which is shaped to extend radially of and simultaneously advance
    longitudinally of said axis whereby the turning member engages the load and
    advance it parallel to the axis.


CLS 198/468.01
TXT System includes an oscillating or reciprocating load engaging element:

    Apparatus under subclass 463.1 wherein one of the conveyor sections
    comprises a component which is connected to an actuator that imparts
    to-and-fro motion in a path, at least a part of which path coincides with a
    part of the path load being conveyed, the component having the function of
    contacting the load whereby said load will partake of movement imparted to
    said component at lest while said paths coincide.


CLS 198/468.1
TXT Element pushes load over separate support and has nonlinear path of travel:

    Apparatus under subclass 468.9 wherein the load is supported by a distinct
    support as it is pushed by the load engaging component which travels in a
    curvilinear or orbital path.


CLS 198/468.11
TXT Element pushes load over separate support and has linear path of travel:

    Apparatus under subclass 468.9 wherein the load is supported by a separate
    support as it is pushed by the engaging component which travels in a
    straight line path.


CLS 198/468.2
TXT Comprising load gripping elements:

    Apparatus under subclass 468.01 wherein the load engaging component
    positively holds or attracts the load by friction, or by use of a force
    field, or by fluid current.


CLS 198/468.3
TXT Gripping elements movable relative to one another to space articles in the
    load:

    Apparatus under subclass 468.2 wherein the load engaging components are
    relatively movable to move one portion of the load with respect to other
    portion(s) thereof.


CLS 198/468.4
TXT Suction gripping elements:

    Apparatus under subclass 468.2 wherein the load gripping member comprises a
    gaseous medium under subatmospheric pressure to hold the load during
    conveyance.


CLS 198/468.5
TXT Magnetic or electrostatic gripping elements:

    Apparatus under subclass 468.2 wherein the load gripping member uses lines
    of magnetic flux or an electric force field to hold the load during
    conveyance.


CLS 198/468.6
TXT Engaging element moves load vertically and horizontally:

    Apparatus under subclass 468.01 wherein the load compact moves the load
    simultaneously in both a raised or lowered position in a plane generally
    parallel with the ground.


CLS 198/468.7
TXT Element pushes load over nonlinear support:

    Apparatus under subclass 468.6 wherein the load is supported during
    conveying by a separate support with a horizontally and vertically
    extending supporting surfaces and the engaging component propels the load
    over said supporting surface.


CLS 198/468.8
TXT Engaging element moves load vertically only:

    Apparatus under subclass 468.01 wherein the load is only moved in a raised
    or lowered position by the load engaging component.


CLS 198/468.9
TXT Engaging element moves load horizontally in a straight line:

    Apparatus under subclass 468.01 wherein the load is only moved in a
    straight line in a plane generally parallel to the ground by the load
    engaging component.


CLS 198/469.1
TXT System includes a rotating or endless carrier with a load engaging element:

    Apparatus under subclass 463.1 wherein at least one conveyor comprises a
    plurality of load contacting components spaced about and attached to a
    drive member which moves in a closed loop or a belt movable continuously
    along a path defined by the longitudinal axis.


CLS 198/470.1
TXT Comprising a load gripping element:

    Apparatus under subclass 469.1 wherein the load engaging components are
    mounted on a rotating or endless drive which holds or attracts the load by
    friction or by use of a force field, or by fluid current or wherein at
    least one component is used to attract the load by a force field or fluid
    pressure difference on a rotating endless conveyor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    803.3,  for grippers mounted on a single rotary or endless conveyor.


CLS 198/471.1
TXT Suction gripping element:

    Apparatus under subclass 470.1 wherein the load engaging component or
    attracting means comprises a gaseous medium under subatmospheric pressure
    to hold the load during conveyance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    689.1,  for conveyor section using suction to enhance friction between the
    load and the conveyor.

    803.5,  for a conveyor section having suction holders.


CLS 198/472.1
TXT Magnetic or electrostatic gripping element:

    Apparatus under subclass 470.1 wherein the load engaging or attracting
    element uses lines of magnetic flux or an electric force field to hold the
    load during conveyance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    690.1   and 691, for conveyor section using magnetic or electrostatic
    forces to enhance frictional contact between the load and the conveyor.

    803.6,  for a conveyor section with magnetic or electrostatic holders.


CLS 198/473.1
TXT Nongripping elements are adjustable or replaceable for different sized
    loads:

    Apparatus under subclass 469.1 wherein the load engaging component attached
    to the rotating or endless drives do not grip the load and are adaptable or
    changeable to accommodate different sized loads.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    803.11, for a conveyor section with replaceable or adjustable holders for
    different sized loads.


CLS 198/474.1
TXT With means to move load engaging elements relative to carrier:

    Apparatus under subclass 469.1 wherein the load engaging components are
    provided with means to cause said load contacting components to have motion
    relative to its drive member.


CLS 198/475.1
TXT Whereby the load engaging component moves relative to the carrier to
    maintain load in a desired position during travel along a curved path:

    Apparatus under subclass 474.1 wherein the load engaging component is moved
    relative to the drive member such that the load is maintained in the same
    attitude during travel of the load engaging component along a circuitous
    path.


CLS 198/476.1
TXT Element is shifted to discharge or receive a load:

    Apparatus under subclass 474.1 wherein the load engaging element is movable
    relative to the drive member for the purpose of ejecting or receipt of a
    load.


CLS 198/477.1
TXT Element is only shifted with the load during discharge:

    Apparatus under subclass 476.1 wherein the load engaging component is only
    movable relative to the drive member to eject the load.


CLS 198/478.1
TXT Carrier rotates about a fixed axis:

    Apparatus under subclass 469.1 wherein the load engaging components are
    attached to a fixed member traveling in a closed loop path.


CLS 198/479.1
TXT Elements push the load over a separate support:

    Apparatus under subclass 478.1 wherein the load is supported by distinct
    means and the load engaging component propels the load over said distinct
    means.


CLS 198/480.1
TXT With a load retaining guard means:

    Apparatus under subclass 479.1 wherein the load is additionally contacted
    or guided by a guide or fence which is spaced from the rotating load drive
    at a distance sufficient to permit a load to be conveyed by said drive
    member as it is pushed over the separate support without permitting the
    load to escape therefrom.


CLS 198/481.1
TXT With load retaining guard means:

    Apparatus under subclass 478.1 provided with a guide or fence which is
    spaced from the rotating load drive member at a distance sufficient to
    permit a load to be conveyed by said driven members without unintended
    escape therefrom.


CLS 198/482.1
TXT Means mounted on the engaging element to forceable eject the load from the
    element:

    Apparatus under subclass 469.1 wherein each load contacting component
    includes a forcing means to expel the load from the element.


CLS 198/483.1
TXT Means movably mounted inside the path of the element to eject the load:

    Apparatus under subclass 470.1 wherein the rotating or endless conveyor has
    a moveably mounted means located within the orbital path of the load
    engaging elements to engage and discharge the load from the load engaging
    elements.


CLS 198/484.1
TXT Elements comprise a nongripping pair of members which self-open as they
    pass through a curved path:

    Apparatus under subclass 469.1 wherein the load engaging elements are
    formed by a pair of opposed member which cooperate to contain the load
    without gripping during linear travel and which pivot or flex relative to
    one another to permit receipt or discharge of the load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    803.13, for a conveyor section with nongripping self-opening holders.


CLS 198/485.1
TXT Nongripping elements support the load below the endless carrier:

    Apparatus under subclass 469.1 wherein the load engaging elements contact
    the load without gripping said load at a point below the location of
    connection of the elements to the rotating or endless drive.


CLS 198/486.1
TXT Elements are hooks:

    Apparatus under subclass 485.1 wherein the nongripping load engaging
    elements are curved or angular pieces of hard material.


CLS 198/487.1
TXT Nongripping elements are laterally projecting pins which engage the
    interior of a hollow load:

    Apparatus under subclass 469.1 wherein the load has a cavity and the load
    engaging elements are pins which engage said load cavity without gripping
    and which project sidewise from the drive member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    803.12, for conveyor section with means to engage the interior of a hollow
    load.


CLS 198/493
TXT Apparatus under the class definition wherein a conveying section has means
    associated therewith which will a) shift a load on, supply a load to, or
    remove a load from the conveying section by contacting the load with a
    stream of moving fluid, b) remove detritus or other unwanted material from
    the section or some part thereof, c) maintain the cleanliness of the
    section, d) place the section or a portion thereof in an aseptic condition,
    or e) provide grease, oil, or other lubricant thereto to facilitate the
    operation of the section.

    (1)     Note.  Conveyors having cabinets with or without ventilating means
    to prevent contamination of the conveyor or its load will be found herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, appropriate subclass,
    for cleaning implements of general utility and for cleaning implements
    specialized for use on conveyors, but which are not adapted to be mounted
    on an operating conveyor.

    184,    Lubrication, appropriate subclass, especially subclasses 15.1+, for
    lubricating systems and devices, per se, or combined with a nominal
    conveyor.

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 418+ for a bearing and support means for
    roller elements which may be used with power conveyors.

    406,    Conveyors: Fluid Current, subclasses 51+ for apparatus by which the
    load is moved by contact from a power-driven surface and by a fluid
    current, either simultaneously or alternately.


CLS 198/494
TXT Apparatus under subclass 493 wherein the section is provided with means
    which is positioned so that it can directly act on the section, or some
    part thereof, to remove soil or other unwanted or undesirable material
    therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  The cleaning means is structure, in addition to that which
    is normally used to discharge the load.  This additional structure may
    discharge the unwanted material to the same area that the load is delivered
    to if the unwanted material is of the same material as the load.  For
    example, belt conveyors are often provided with a cleaning implement
    located immediately downstream of the load discharge point, which implement
    strikes off load adhering to the belt beyond the discharge zone.  This
    adhering load must be removed as it could have a deleterious effect on the
    conveyor; however, such material obviously could be carried along with the
    discharged load without contaminating the same.  In fact, if the adhering
    load was not rejoined with the discharged load, material would be wasted.
    In such arrangements, the adhering load is, in fact, rejoined with the
    discharged load.


CLS 198/495
TXT Apparatus under subclass 494 wherein the means for removing the unwanted
    material includes means for contacting the section with a fluid.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of structures to be found herein are a) fluid
    spraying nozzles which impinge the section with a stream liquid or gas to
    remove undesired material therefrom, as opposed to impinging means for
    discharging the load from the conveying section, b) vacuum applying means
    relying on the sweeping action of a stream of atmospheric gas, e.g., air,
    or c) tanks into which the section dips, or which carry liquid transferring
    means which, in turn, contact the section.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclass, for
    processes of cleaning, and for apparatus which clean a work piece by
    contacting said work piece with a liquid.


CLS 198/496
TXT Apparatus under subclass 494 wherein the means for removing the undesired
    material includes a bristle carrying means which contacts the section, or a
    portion thereof, to sweep such material thereform.


CLS 198/497
TXT Apparatus under subclass 494 wherein the means for removing the unwanted
    material includes a blade-like member which engages some portion of the
    section, and which is effective to dislodge such unwanted material
    therefrom.


CLS 198/498
TXT Apparatus under subclass 497 wherein means are provided which mount the
    blade-like member for movement relative to the section, or section portion,
    to effect or facilitate removal of unwanted material therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  Movable conveyor flight cleaners for barn-cleaning conveyors
    will be found herein.


CLS 198/499
TXT Apparatus under subclass 497 wherein the means for removing the unwanted
    material includes means which urge the blade-like member into contact with
    the surface to be cleaned.


CLS 198/500
TXT Apparatus under subclass 493 wherein the section, or some part thereof, has
    means providing grease, oil, or some other lubricant thereto, to promote
    efficiency in the operation of the section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    721,    for a pusher-type conveyor having means to facilitate movement of
    the load across its supporting surface.

    811,    for endless belt-type conveyors provided with means for forming an
    air cushion between the belt and its supporting structure to facilitate
    movement of the belt.


CLS 198/501
TXT Apparatus under subclass 500 wherein the section is of the troughed belt
    type having support structure employing a plurality of drum-like members
    which are arranged to contact and deflect the belt into an open channel
    shape, and wherein the lubricant providing means communicates with bearings
    carried by the drum-like members to insure free turning of said members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    824+,   for belt-type conveyors having roller assemblies for troughing the
    belt thereof.


CLS 198/502.1
TXT WITH ALARM OR INDICATOR:
    Subject matter under the class definition including means for (1), warning
    an attendant of an undesirable conveyor operating condition (2), indicating
    the operating mode of conveyor (3), indicating dimensions of load or (4),
    indicating the position of a moving or recently moved load along a
    conveying path.

    (1)     Note.  Specific Conveying functions (orienting articles, grouping
    articles, etc.) which are in combination with nominal weighing means should
    be classified in the appropriate conveying function subclass in Class 198.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    464.1   through 464.3, and 571-577, for controls for article movement on
    conveyor systems.

    464.4,  for conveying systems having indicators for undesirable conditions.

    810.01+, for the combination of an endless belt and a sensor for articles,
    belt damage, belt tracking, or belt tension.

    958,    for conveyors in combination with a load unit counter.

    959,    for conveyors in combination with weighing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    177,    Weighing Scales, and Class 222, Dispensing, for specific weighers
    in combination with conveying means.

    235,    Registers, subclasses 98+ or Class 377, subclasses 6+ for conveyors
    and article counting means.


CLS 198/502.2
TXT Means for measuring dimensions (height, width, or length) of load on a
    conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 502.01 wherein the physical proportions of the
    load are detected while the load is on a conveyor.


CLS 198/502.3
TXT Means for indicating position of unit load:

    Apparatus under subclass 502.1 wherein the physical location of the load is
    tracked and indicated as it moves along the conveyor path.


CLS 198/502.4
TXT Means responsive to conveyor movement to indicate speed or to actuate alarm
    due to abnormal speed:

    Apparatus under subclass 502.1 wherein means senses the velocity of the
    conveyor movement and displays said velocity or actuates means warning on
    attendant if the velocity is erratic.


CLS 198/506
TXT Device under the class definition wherein a conveying section is provided
    with means which particularizes the section either to gather material
    scattered on a stationary-supported surface, e.g., the ground, or to remove
    material from a mound or pile of such material located on such a surface.

    (1)     Note.  The term static support, as used herein, means a surface
    that is stationary, or generally stationary, at the time material is
    removed therefrom. Thus, a stopped railway car or a moored ship is
    considered a static support for purposes of classification in this subclass.

    (2)     Note. Water in a well is not considered to be material scattered on
    a stationary support surface, nor is it considered to be a mound or pile of
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    700,    702 and 715, for a driven conveyor of the bucket type which is
    particularly adapted to convey liquid, and wherein the source of liquid
    frequently is an entrapped, stationary body of water (e.g., a well, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 78+, for
    street cleaners which are loading devices, including brushes or flexible
    members to aid in the loading.  If the conveyor and its support only are
    claimed, or its support only is claimed, and if it otherwise meets the
    definition of this class (198), the patent should be placed in this Class.

    37,     Excavating, appropriate subclass, for conveyors particularly
    adapted for in situ digging, where the surface of the earth is penetrated.
    If no actual digging element, as teeth, wheel, plow, scoop, or the like, is
    claimed, and if the conveyor is not particularly adapted to trench, the
    patent should be placed in this class (198).  If other provided for
    operation, e.g., melting snow, are included, the patent should be placed in
    Class 37.  If the conveyor is useful to handle loose material, the patent
    should be placed in this class (198).  If the presence of a wagon to be
    loaded is essential to the intended operation of the device, the patent
    should be placed in either Class 37 or Class 414, Material or Article
    Handling.

    56,     Harvesters, appropriate subclasses, especially 16.4+, 71+, 153+,
    and 345+, for conveyors combined with other harvester structure, or for
    conveyors limited to use on harvesters.  The line between conveyors of the
    type provided for in subclass 506 and those provided for in Class 56, which
    are of the raking and loading type, is that where tines, prongs, or the
    like, are the raking means and the apparatus is particularly designed for
    continuous raking up of loose crop material while moving over a field, or
    if it can be so used without modification, the patent is placed in Class 56.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, appropriate subclasses,
    especially 31+, 63+, 89, 110, 111+, and 138, for excavating and loading
    machines of the type having a scoop or rake delivering to a power-driven
    conveyor.  Class 171 further provides for conveyors which (1) are used to
    dig, convey, and separate from the earth desired objects, (2) are combined
    with digging or excavating means and function to separate from the soil
    flowing from the digging or excavating means from the desired plant or
    buried object, or (3) are combined with an unearthing device and function
    merely to feed material to or from such devices.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 64+,
    for hard material disintegrating machines having material-handling means.


CLS 198/507
TXT Device under subclass 506 wherein the conveying section is provided with
    means to regulate the operation of the section, or of some part thereof,
    which means includes means to sense a) an undesirable operating
    characteristic of the section, or b) a property or characteristic of the
    conveyed load.

    (1)     Note.  Undesirable operating characteristics of a conveying section
    includes conditions which are potentially dangerous to machine operators or
    to those in the vicinity of the machine, or conditions which might cause
    damage to the conveying section, or some part thereof.


CLS 198/508
TXT Apparatus under subclass 506 wherein the section is provided with means
    which enables the section to form a mound of material on a stationary
    supporting surface.


CLS 198/509
TXT Device under subclass 506 wherein the particularizing means for the
    conveying section comprises an orbiting progression of load confining
    receptacles, each of which intermittently engages material on the static
    support, and each of which removes a volumetrically confined discrete load
    unit of the material from the support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    701+,   for bucket conveyors in general, subclass 700, for bucket members
    carried by a freely hanging, endless member, and subclass 715, for flexible
    pocket conveying members.


CLS 198/510.1
TXT Power-driven feed means:

    Device under subclass 506 wherein the particularizing means includes a
    driven-load transferring device which is located at the entrance to a
    conveying section, and which acts on the material on the static support to
    compel the material onto the section.

    (1)     Note.  A feeding means is an apparatus which is structurally
    similar to a conveying section, but which assumes an ancillary role due to
    its position with respect to the section served.  It is present merely to
    enhance or improve the operation of the section served.


CLS 198/511
TXT Apparatus under subclass 510.1 wherein the power-driven feeding means is
    mounted to move in a plane normal to the horizon to any one of a plurality
    of desired positions, such that the feeding means will be maintained in
    contact with a receding pile of material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    519,    for a conveyor having means mounting the conveyor for pile surface
    attack.

    589     and 592+, for plural power-driven conveyors with means mounting a
    section to swing about a generally horizontal axis.

    861.1+, for a conveyor frame which may be adjustable or mounted for
    swinging.


CLS 198/512
TXT Device under subclass 510.1 wherein the particularizing means includes a
    set of two load transferring devices which are adapted to be positioned on
    opposite sides of the entrance to a conveying section, and which devices
    coact with each other to move the material therebetween and onto the
    section.


CLS 198/513
TXT Device under subclass 512 wherein the set of transfer devices includes two
    rotating members, each of which has a helical wound load engaging flight
    extending around and along its axis of rotation, each flight being
    configured to move material in a direction opposite to the direction of
    material movement in the other flight so that the material is fed by both
    members towards a central delivery point at which a conveying section is
    adapted to be located.


CLS 198/514
TXT Apparatus under subclass 512 wherein each of the load transferring devices
    has a material contacting member which is swept across a load support
    surface common to both devices to cause the movement of the material
    therebetween.


CLS 198/515
TXT Apparatus under subclass 514 wherein each transfer device includes a
    plurality of material contacting members which are moved in a closed path.


CLS 198/516
TXT Apparatus under subclass 515 wherein the plurality of material contacting
    members are secured to, and moved by, a flexible band-like member.


CLS 198/517
TXT Apparatus under subclass 510.1 wherein the particularizing means includes a
    plate-like member which sweeps across the material supporting surface to
    draw material towards the conveying section.


CLS 198/518
TXT Apparatus under subclass 510.1 wherein the particularizing means includes a
    load transferring device which turns about an axis of rotation and which
    engages and compels the material to move into the entrance of a conveying
    section by following a path which is coincident with or tangent to the path
    described by the periphery of the rotating device.


CLS 198/519
TXT Device under subclass 506 wherein the conveying section is provided with
    means which enable the section's conveying member to engage and to remain
    in contact with the surface of a mound of loose material so that the
    section can continue to remove material from the mound as its surface
    recedes.


CLS 198/520
TXT Apparatus under subclass 506 including a conveying section having a
    material contacting member which sweeps across a load-supporting surface,
    said section being configured such that it is capable of either collecting
    loose bulk material scattered on a supporting surface, e.g., the ground, or
    separating the bulk material from a mass of loose material, e.g., a pile of
    coal.


CLS 198/521
TXT Apparatus under subclass 506 wherein the conveying section is a generally
    channel-shaped element which is adapted to be rapidly reciprocated to and
    fro, and which has a material inlet designed to facilitate removal of the
    load from the ground.


CLS 198/522
TXT Apparatus under subclass 506 wherein the section is provided with means
    forming an entrance for the section, which means acts to guide material
    from the static support to the section.


CLS 198/523
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a conveyor system
    consisting of at least one gravity conveyor section and at least one
    power-driven conveyor section in any sequence.  Devices (e.g., gates, etc.)
    appurtenant to either section, or otherwise forming a part of the system,
    are included.

    (1)     Note.  "Gravity conveyor section" is a term embracing structures
    which support, or guide, or otherwise define a flow path for material which
    is moving from one elevation to another under the influence of gravity.
    Art terms such as "hopper", "chute", etc., frequently are indicative of a
    gravity aspect, but their usage is sufficiently inconsistent as to be
    nondefinitive thereof.

    (2)     Note.  Gravity conveyor sections are of two principal kinds: (1)
    gravity discharge material holders (the art term "hopper" occasionally
    corresponds), and (2) gravity flow paths (the art term "chute" frequently
    corresponds).

            A gravity discharge material holder is primarily a storage device
    having a vertically (or predominantly so) downward discharge path.  No
    specific "bottom" structure need be claimed as long as it is apparent that
    material may be supported therein for an interval somewhat longer than that
    required for mere passage therethrough, i.e., that the device is something
    more than a funnel.  If the device is a holder by these criteria, the
    claiming of flow-inducing internal structure (e.g., "downwardly and
    inwardly sloping sidewalls", etc.) is irrelevant.

            A gravity flow path is an inclined structure which supports and/or
    guides material moving therealong or therethrough under the influence of
    gravity.  The inclination may vary from just above the horizontal to
    vertical, and the structure, often of a trough-like nature, may be anything
    from a surface (supporting, but not guiding the material) to a conduit
    (which, if vertical, guides, but does not support).  (While the term
    "gravity flow path" is not specifically set forth in a subclass title until
    subclass 560, structure of this nature appears throughout this and the
    indented subclasses.)

    (3)     Note.  When a gravity discharge material holder serves as a source
    of supply for the claimed system, it is more precisely identified in this
    and the indented subclasses as a "source of supply discharging by gravity"
    (or, more briefly, as a "gravity source"). This particular usage of a
    gravity discharge material holder is provided for in subclasses 540+ below.

    (4)     Note.  Some material-containing receptacles (usually designated as
    a "hopper" or a "bin") found in this and the indented subclasses are not
    capable of discharging by gravity and, therefore, do not constitute gravity
    conveyor sections in the sense that gravity discharge material holders do.
    A power-driven conveyor section is provided within, or otherwise associated
    with, each such receptacle for removing (upwardly or laterally) the
    material therefrom.  Where such a receptacle and conveyor, identified
    herein as a "bin with a power-driven conveyor section for discharging it",
    constitutes a source of supply for the claimed system, subclasses 550.01+
    provides for the system; however, if it appears elsewhere in the system, it
    has only the status of its power-driven section.

            One other usage of a receptacle appears occasionally in this and
    the indented subclasses, namely, as an element for receiving the material
    transported by the system.  Having neither a capability for gravity
    discharge nor a power-driven section for moving the material therefrom, it
    is treated as a mere receiver, for which no classification is provided.  As
    a matter of fact, a receiver for this and the indented subclasses is not
    limited to a receptacle, but can be merely a surface.

    (5)     Note.  Inasmuch as conveyor systems and sections for the conveying
    of articles usually are more adequately and specifically provided for in
    certain subclasses above, most of the art in this and the indented
    subclasses involves the conveying of bulk-type material (e.g., coal, sand,
    etc.).


CLS 198/524
TXT Apparatus under subclass 523 wherein the system includes means to sense a
    condition (or a change therein) which affects the operation of the system,
    and to cause a response thereto by one or more elements of the system.


CLS 198/525
TXT Apparatus under subclass 523 wherein the system includes means which has an
    effect (e.g., starting, maintaining, slowing, stopping, reshaping (e.g.,
    leveling of bulk material), redirecting, regulating, etc.) upon the flow of
    the principal body of material entering, moving through, or leaving the
    system.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the means is in the form of an element, member,
    device, etc., which is in addition to the conveyor sections; however, it
    may comprise a conveyor section, gravity or power-driven which has a
    mounting means of the kind whereby the section is adjustable,   provided
    that the purpose of so mounting the section is to enable it to affect the
    flow of material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASSES:

    537,    for a conveyor system under this heading which may include means to
    affect the flow of material which has become separated, whether purposely
    or otherwise, from the principal body of material.

    633+,   for a conveyor section provided with a passive means, which means,
    upon contact of the load therewith, changes the movement of the load with
    respect to the section.


CLS 198/526
TXT Apparatus under subclass 525 wherein the flow-affecting means comprises an
    element (or series of elements) which moves (e.g., orbitally, rotatably,
    etc.) through or within the path of flow from a gravity section to a
    power-driven section in timed relation with the movement of the
    power-driven section for the purpose of momentarily interfering with flow
    along that path at such times no one of the successive conveying elements
    (e.g., a bucket) of the power-driven section is properly positioned to
    receive the flow.

    (1)     Note.  The means of this subclass (526) frequently is a series of
    traveling deflectors, each of which temporarily diverts or interrupts the
    flow, and which are more commonly referred to as "gap closers". While such
    deflectors may, per se, constitute a gravity conveyor section (i.e., a
    gravity flow path), classification herein does not take into account either
    the presence or the absence of such a conveying function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    708,    for a conveyor section of the bucket type wherein a bucket is
    provided with structure to close a gap between it and the next successive
    bucket.


CLS 198/527
TXT Apparatus under subclass 526 wherein the moving means comprises a
    power-driven conveyor section.

    (1)     Note.  The coordinated movement of the power-driven sections is
    sometimes utilized to control the duration of flow (e.g., gating), or to
    accomplish delivery from one to the other in a particular manner (e.g.,
    with reduced shock, with less friction-developing speed differential, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    531,    for a reciprocating, load-supporting element which, while sometimes
    identified as a "carrier", and which may be spaced below the gravity
    sections, function more in the nature of a gate than a power-driven
    conveyor section.


CLS 198/528
TXT Apparatus under subclass 525 wherein the flow-affecting means comprises an
    adjustable (e.g., repositionable) gravity section (e.g., a
    pivotably-mounted gravity flow path) which is moved (raised) from an
    inclined, discharging attitude to a less inclined (e.g., horizontal),
    nondischarging attitude and back (lowered), by a power- driven conveyor
    which passes beneath the gravity section in a discharge-receiving
    relationship.  The shifting is caused by the engagement of a conveying
    element (e.g., a bucket) or other component of the power-driven section
    with the nonpower-driven section or an attachment thereto, and the result
    is an interruption of the flow of material whenever no one of the conveying
    elements is in a proper position to receive same.

    (1)     Note.  The structures of this subclass frequently include
    additional means to affect the volume of flow, usually by controlling its
    duration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    533,    for a flow-affecting means under this heading wherein a power-
    driven section may intermittently contact a gravity section, but wherein
    the purpose is to encourage flow on or in that section rather than to cause
    the flow to begin or cease as in this subclass.


CLS 198/529
TXT Apparatus under subclass 525 wherein the flow-affecting means comprises
    structure whereby an element of a power-driven section is so engaged and/or
    moved (e.g., opened, tilted, etc.) as to initiate removal of the section's
    load.

    (1)     Note.  In the case of a power-driven section of the bucket type,
    which type of section appears frequently in this subclass, the structure
    usually is of one or the other of two kinds;  (1) the bucket is movably
    mounted with respect to its carrier and a member is provided to cause
    movement of the bucket (or a guiding/restraining member is terminated to
    permit movement of the bucket by gravity), relative to the carrier, into a
    dumping attitude, or (2) one or more portions of the bucket are movable
    with respect to the remainder thereof to throw open the load-confining
    region of the bucket. On the other hand, the mere passage of a bucket
    around a sprocket into an inverted, load-discharging attitude is not
    sufficient for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    525,    for flow-affecting means under this heading which may involve a
    means to effect the removal of a load from a conveying element of a
    power-driven section, but which removal-affecting means does not manipulate
    the conveying element.


CLS 198/530
TXT Apparatus under subclass 525 wherein the flow-affecting means comprises an
    adjustably-mounted element which can be moved into or out of position in
    which it blocks the flow path of a conveyor section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    534,    for a flow-affecting means under this heading comprising structure
    which interferes with, or otherwise restricts, but does not close off the
    flow path.

    535,    for a flow-affecting means under this heading involving a gravity
    conveyor section which has means to reposition it, and wherein the flow of
    material over or through the section may be slowed or stopped by such
    repositioning.


CLS 198/531
TXT Apparatus under subclass 530 wherein the element is associated with a
    gravity conveyor section and is shifted from one position to the other as
    the result of the movement of a conveying element of a power-driven section
    into a position to receive the flow which results from the shifting of the
    element.  The element may be shifted by direct contact with the conveying
    element or some other portion of the power-driven section, or the shifting
    of the element and the movement of the conveying element may be coordinated
    otherwise (e.g., geared drive, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    526,    for a conveyor system under this heading having a moving
    flow-control means which is coordinated with a power-driven section, and
    which means may be in the nature of a traveling gate (e.g., an apertured
    endless apron, an apertured rotary disc, etc.).

    703+,   for a conveyor section of the bucket type wherein means is provided
    to facilitate the loading or the unloading of a bucket.


CLS 198/532
TXT Apparatus under subclass 530 wherein the element is located adjacent the
    discharge opening of a gravity discharge material holder.  While such an
    opening often is located in a horizontal plane, and therefore has a
    vertical discharge path, the opening can be any one from which the
    discharge path is at least as nearly vertical as it is horizontal.

    (1)     Note.  The element may be located in a spout (i.e., a gravity flow
    path) which is attached to the holder and depends from the discharge
    opening thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    531,    for a gate under this heading which may be of the type found in
    this subclass (532), but wherein its operation is coordinated with that of
    a power-driven section.


CLS 198/533
TXT Apparatus under subclass 525 wherein the flow-affecting means comprises a
    device, mechanism, element, etc., to impart additional energy to the load
    for the purpose of assisting its movement through the system.

    (1)     Note.  The device, etc., may be located within a section and in
    direct contact with the load therein (e.g., to prevent "bridging"), or it
    may act upon a section exteriorly thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    537,    for a conveyor system under this heading which includes means to
    handle a portion of the load which becomes separated from the main flow
    path, which means may involve an auxiliary flow path having a device, etc.,
    for agitating, etc.

    752+,   for a power-driven conveyor section which moves in a vibrator
    manner, but wherein that movement constitutes the principal conveying force
    upon the load.


CLS 198/534
TXT Apparatus under subclass 525 wherein the flow-affecting means comprises
    structure which is clearly intended to interfere with, or otherwise
    restrict, but not to close off the movement of a load, or a portion
    thereof, along or within a flow path.

    (1)     Note.  In the instance of an article-type load, yieldable (elastic,
    pivotable, etc.) elements frequently are utilized to slow or to even the
    flow, whereas, in the case of bulk material, the restricting structure
    often is of a kind which levels, or otherwise configures the cross-section
    of a moving load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    525,    for related structure, but wherein the effect thereof upon the
    movement of a load is not expressly related to retarding its velocity or
    reducing its volume.

    530+,   for related structure, but which has the capability of, and is
    intended to be used at some time for, closing off the flow path.


CLS 198/535
TXT Apparatus under subclass 525 wherein the flow-affecting means comprises the
    adjustable (e.g., movable, repositionable, etc.) mounting of one or more of
    the conveyor sections for the purpose of altering the flow of material in
    such respects as direction, velocity (e.g., varying the inclination of a
    gravity flow path), etc.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes a gravity system wherein the first
    section of the system is adjustable for the purpose of receiving, at
    alternative locations, material from a source outside of the claimed system.

    (2)     Note.  The adjustability requirement of this subclass is satisfied
    by a section which is adjustable only in part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    360+,   for a conveyor arrangement for selecting among plural sources or
    plural destinations and wherein the selecting means comprises a movable
    mounted gravity section.

    526,    for a flow-affecting means under this heading which frequently
    includes traveling deflector elements which may, in themselves, perform in
    the nature of momentary gravity flow paths, but wherein no attempt is made,
    for purposes of classification, to account for the presence of such a
    function.

    528,    for a flow-affecting means under this heading which includes an
    adjustable gravity section.

    533,    for a flow-affecting means under this heading which comprises an
    agitator, etc., and wherein a conveyor section may be adjustable to the
    extent necessary to cooperate with the agitator.

    538,    for a conveyor system under this heading wherein one or more of the
    conveyor sections is repositionable for a nonoperative purpose (e.g.,
    storage, transport, etc.).

    586+,   for a conveyor system which comprises plural power-drive conveyor
    sections and wherein the sections are relatively adjustable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 166, for a dispenser having a supply container
    which is tiltable for the purpose of dispensing by gravity.


CLS 198/536
TXT Apparatus under subclass 535 wherein the adjustable section, or at least
    one of them, if plural, is the last section of the system.

    (1)     Note.  The purpose of the adjustment ordinarily is to change the
    locus of the point at which work is discharged from the system, and the
    adjustment frequently comprise pivotablity in one or more planes.


CLS 198/537
TXT Apparatus under subclass 523 wherein the system includes means pertaining
    to the handling of a portion or component of the load which becomes
    separated from the flow path of the principal portion of the load.

    (1)     Note.  The portion which becomes separated may be, for example,
    bulk material which inadvertently escapes from the principal flow path by
    overflow, spillage, etc., or it may be foreign material on articles (e.g.,
    the husk on an ear of corn) which is encouraged to leave the main flow
    path. In the first instance, the means usually involves structure whereby
    the separated portion is returned to the flow path of the principal
    portion, whereas in the second case, the means may take the form of an exit
    path from the system.

    (2)     Note.  The separated portion also may comprise a portion which is
    shunted to an auxiliary path for return to the main supply and eventual
    recirculation.

    (3)     Note.  While the means of this subclass may itself comprise an
    additional conveyor system or an element thereof, it is not intended that a
    patent of this subclass be additionally classified elsewhere on the basis
    of that system or element thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    494+,   for a conveyor section having a means to clean it.  In some
    instances, a separate flow path is provided for the material removed by the
    cleaning means, which material may be residue from the conveyed load.

    580,    for a conveyor system involving plural power-driven conveyor
    sections, and wherein a portion of the load is recycled in a closed path.


CLS 198/538
TXT Apparatus under subclass 523 wherein the system includes means whereby one
    or more of the conveyor sections are adjustable (e.g., repositionable)
    relative to one another for a reason having to do with a nonoperative mode
    of the system (e.g., for placing the system in a condition for being stored
    or being moved to another location, for moving a component to a
    nontraffic-obstructing position, etc.); in general, this subclass involves
    structure whereby the system may be made more compact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    528     and 535+, for other conveyor systems under this heading having
    sections which are adjustable, but wherein the adjusting is for the purpose
    of affecting the flow of material in the system.

    586+,   for a conveyor system which comprises plural power-drive sections
    and wherein the sections are relatively adjustable.

    632,    for a conveyor section which is foldable to facilitate storage or
    transportation.

    861.1+, for a conveyor section having a frame which is adjustable.


CLS 198/539
TXT Apparatus under subclass 523 wherein the system includes a member which
    serves to support the load as it moves, under the influence of a
    previously-acquired momentum, from one conveyor section to another.

    (1)     Note.  The member may take the form of a horizontal planar surface;
    however, a platform which serves only as depository for the load after it
    has departed from the system is not subject matter for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    600,    for a conveyor system having plural power-driven conveyor sections
    and involving load-supporting structure which functions in a similar manner.


CLS 198/540
TXT Apparatus under subclass 523 wherein the system comprises a gravity
    discharge material holder, which serves as a source of supply for the
    system, and a power-driven section downstream thereof. Additional conveyor
    sections, either gravity or power-driven, may be present downstream of the
    holder, either in one of the sequences specifically provided for in the
    subclasses indented hereunder, or in some other sequence.

    (1)     Note.  Some systems which have a source of supply present a close
    case as to whether the source constitutes a "gravity discharge material
    holder" for this and the indented subclasses, or a "bin with a power-driven
    conveyor for discharging it" for subclasses 550.01+ below (see the
    explanatory material which appears in subclass 523).

            If the material leaves the source in a vertically (or predominantly
    so) downward path solely by gravity, these subclasses (540+) are involved.
    If the material is moved from the source only by the operation of the
    power-driven section, subclasses 550.01+ are proper.

            If the source is claimed as "overlying the conveyor", or the
    conveyor is claimed as being "below the source" - despite the absence of a
    showing of such a separation - gravity flow is presumed to exist.

            The disclosure may be helpful in resolving borderline situations;
    for instance, a statement to the effect that "the material drops onto the
    power-driven section" is presumptive of the existence of gravity flow.  If
    the situation remains doubtful, then the doubt should be resolved in favor
    of the existence of gravity flow for this and the indented subclasses.


CLS 198/541
TXT Apparatus under subclass 540 wherein the system includes at least one more
    gravity section between the gravity discharge material holder and the
    discharge-receiving, power-driven section.


CLS 198/542
TXT Apparatus under subclass 541 wherein the system includes at least one
    additional power-driven section immediately following the
    discharge-receiving, power-driven section.


CLS 198/543
TXT Apparatus under subclass 540 wherein the system includes at least one more
    power-driven section immediately following the discharge-receiving,
    power-driven section.


CLS 198/544
TXT Apparatus under subclass 543 wherein the successive power-driven section is
    a conveyor of the apron type.


CLS 198/545
TXT Apparatus under subclass 543 wherein the successive power-driven section is
    a conveyor of the screw type.


CLS 198/546
TXT Apparatus under subclass 540 wherein the system includes at least one
    gravity section immediately following the discharge-receiving, power-driven
    section.


CLS 198/547
TXT Apparatus under subclass 540 wherein the discharge-receiving, power-driven
    section is a conveyor of the apron type.


CLS 198/548
TXT Apparatus under subclass 540 wherein the discharge-receiving, power-driven
    section is a conveyor of the screw type.


CLS 198/549
TXT Apparatus under subclass 540 wherein the discharge-receiving, power-driven
    section is a conveyor of the endless belt type.


CLS 198/550.01
TXT Bin having a power-driven conveyor section for discharging or feeding
    discharge to a gravity or power-driven section:

    Apparatus under subclass 523 wherein the system comprises a receptacle
    (e.g., bin, tank, etc.) with a power-driven conveyor section for
    discharging it, which receptacle serves as a source of supply for the
    system, or the power-driven discharge feeds the discharge to additional
    conveyor section either of the power-driven or gravity type.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses provide for a specific use
    of the type of conveyor section designated as "a bin with a power-driven
    conveyor section for discharging it", as discussed more fully in subclasses
    523 and 540 above.  These subclasses (550.01+) are the only areas within
    this heading wherein a receptacle and conveyor arrangement of this nature
    is accorded, for purposes of classification, any status other than that of
    its power-driven section, per se.

    (2)     Note.  An elevating conveyor, having at its lower end structure,
    forming a "boot" from which the conveyor picks up material, usually is an
    example of a bin with a power-driven conveyor for discharging it.  However,
    such is not the case in the event that structure of the boot is claimed in
    such a manner (e.g., "a forwardly and downwardly sloping rear wall leading
    to the path of the buckets", etc.) that its function as a gravity flow path
    cannot be ignored; in this situation, the two devices present a system
    comprised of a nonpower-driven conveyor section (gravity flow path) feeding
    to a power- driven section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    453,    for a conveying system for gueueing items from a quantity source
    onto another conveyor of the system through a throat for restricting the
    flow of massed items.


CLS 198/550.1
TXT Screw type power-driven discharge means:

    Apparatus under subclass 550.01 wherein the power-driven section for
    discharging the receptacle is a load engaging rotating section in the form
    of a helical surface.


CLS 198/550.11
TXT Bucket type power-driven discharge means:

    Apparatus under subclass 550.01 wherein the power-driven section for
    discharging the receptacle is a holder having a pocket formed thereon to
    receive the discharge.


CLS 198/550.12
TXT Scraper type power-driven discharge means:

    Apparatus under subclass 550.01 wherein the power-driven section
    discharging the receptacle is a conveyor having a blade-like member mounted
    thereon to facilitate movement of the discharge.


CLS 198/550.13
TXT Apron type power-driven discharge means:

    Apparatus under subclass 550.01 wherein the power-driven section
    discharging the receptacle is a conveyor of the endless belt type.


CLS 198/550.2
TXT Having adjustable bin or discharge means:

    Apparatus under subclass 550.01 the receptacle is movable relative to
    power-driven discharge means or the power-driven discharge means is movable
    relative to the receptacle for the purpose of changing the position of one
    relative to the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    861.1,  for an adjustable conveyor frame or casing.


CLS 198/550.3
TXT Excess material on power-driven discharge means returned to bin:

    Apparatus under subclass 550.01 having means for facilitating the reentry
    of the discharge carried upon the power-driven discharge means to the
    source of supply (e.g., receptacle).


CLS 198/550.4
TXT Power-driven discharge means feeds to a subsequent gravity section:

    Apparatus under subclass 550.01 wherein the system includes at least one
    gravity section which immediately receives the discharge provided by the
    power-driven receptacle discharge means.


CLS 198/550.5
TXT Power-driven discharge means feeds to a subsequent power-driven section:

    Apparatus under subclass 550.01 wherein the power-driven conveyor section
    discharge means feeds the discharge to another power-driven conveyor
    section immediately following said discharge means.


CLS 198/550.6
TXT Of the screw type:

    Apparatus under subclass 550.5 wherein the power-driven section, which
    immediately receives the discharge provided by the power-driven receptacle
    discharge means consists of a rotating section having a load engaging
    portion which is in the form of a helical surface.


CLS 198/550.7
TXT Of the bucket type:

    Apparatus under subclass 550.5 wherein the power-driven section, which
    immediately receives the discharge provided by the power-driven receptacle
    discharge means is a holder having a pocket formed thereon for retaining
    the discharge.


CLS 198/550.8
TXT Of the scraper type:

    Apparatus under subclass 550.5 wherein the power-driven section, which
    immediately receives the discharge means, is a conveyor having a blade-like
    member mounted thereon to facilitate movement of the discharge.


CLS 198/550.9
TXT Of the apron type:

    Apparatus under subclass 550.5 wherein the power-driven section, which
    immediately receives the discharge provided by the power-driven discharge
    means is an endless belt.


CLS 198/560
TXT Apparatus under subclass 523 wherein the system comprises three or more
    conveyor sections, the first three sections of which are, in sequence,
    power-driven, gravity and power-driven.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    554,    for a conveyor system under this heading having the same sequence
    of power-driven and gravity sections, but wherein the first power-driven
    section is a means for discharging a bin, which bin and power-driven
    section constitute a source of supply for the system.

    561,    for a conveyor system under this heading having a gravity section
    located between two runs of plural-run, power-driven section.

    563,    for a conveyor system under this heading having gravity and
    power-driven sections in a sequence which is the reverse of that of this
    subclass (560).


CLS 198/561
TXT Apparatus under subclass 560 wherein the system comprises a gravity section
    which is fed by one run of a plural-run, power- driven section, and which
    then feeds to another run of that section.


CLS 198/562
TXT Apparatus under subclass 523 wherein the system comprises a gravity section
    of the gravity flow path type feeding to a power-driven section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    540,    for a conveyor system under this heading having the same sequence
    of gravity and power-driven sections, but wherein the gravity section is a
    gravity discharge material holder which is the source of supply for the
    system.


CLS 198/563
TXT Apparatus under subclass 562 wherein the system includes another gravity
    section, which can be either a gravity discharge material holder or a
    gravity flow path, immediately following the power-driven section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    546,    for a conveyor system under this heading having the same sequence
    of gravity and power-driven sections, but wherein the first gravity section
    is a gravity discharge material holder which is the source of supply for
    the system.


CLS 198/564
TXT Apparatus under subclass 562 wherein the power-driven section is a conveyor
    of the thrower type.


CLS 198/565
TXT Apparatus under subclass 562 wherein there are two or more gravity sections
    upstream of the power-driven section, at least the first of which gravity
    sections is a gravity flow path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    541,    for a conveyor system under this heading having the same sequence
    of gravity and power-driven sections, but where the first section is a
    gravity discharge material holder which is the source of supply for the
    system.


CLS 198/566
TXT Apparatus under subclass 562 wherein there are two or more power-driven
    sections downstream of the gravity flow path.


CLS 198/567
TXT Apparatus under subclass 566 wherein the power-driven sections are arranged
    serially with respect to one another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    543,    for a conveyor system under this heading having the same sequence
    of gravity and power-driven sections, but wherein the gravity section is a
    gravity discharge material holder which is the source of supply for the
    system.


CLS 198/568
TXT Apparatus under subclass 523 wherein there are two or more power-driven
    sections upstream of the gravity section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    550.01, for a conveyor system under this heading having the same sequence
    of gravity and power-driven sections, but wherein the first power-driven
    section is a means for discharging a bin, which bin and power-driven
    section constitute a source of supply for the system.


CLS 198/569
TXT Apparatus under subclass 523 wherein there are two or more gravity sections
    downstream of the power-driven section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    553,    for a conveyor system under this heading having the same sequence
    of gravity and power-driven sections, but wherein the power-driven section
    is a means for discharging a bin, which bin and power-driven section
    constitute a source of supply for the system.


CLS 198/570
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including either (a) conveyors on
    separate conveying paths, or (b) conveyors which transfer a load from one
    to another.

    (1)     Note.  The following arrangements are not considered systems with
    plural conveyors:  (a) sets of reciprocating members tandemly disposed
    along the load conveying path, members of adjacent sets being
    interdigitated, and the load being supported on, and advance by, the sets
    successively, (b) two or more members which are fixedly secured to a single
    reciprocating means, such as a pressure actuated ram, and which push
    articles or bulk material supported on the same surface or on different
    surfaces, and (c) plural reciprocating means, such as rakes, which
    positioned in side by side relation, are not rigidly connected together,
    and are arranged to cooperate in pushing a mass of articles or bulk
    material supported on a surface without separating means between the
    articles or bulk material.

    (2)     Note.  Includes here as a system of plural conveyors is an
    arrangement wherein reciprocating members are driven by a single powered
    means (e.g., a crankshaft), and are not fixedly connected together if said
    members push articles or bulk material supported in separated relation on
    the same surface or on different surfaces (e.g., cans in
    spaced-apart-troughs, or rows of cans supported on the same surface, but
    separated by a partition).

    (3)     Note.  Not included here as a system of plural conveyors is a first
    conveyor which is located above a second conveyor and which engages a
    portion of the load carried by said second conveyor and moves it backward
    (e.g., a doffing roller situated above an endless belt and rotating in a
    direction opposite to movement of the latter).

    (4)     Note.  Included in this subclass are systems of conveyors such as
    endless belts placed side by side, with one belt carrying cans, and another
    belt carrying can covers, to workers at a can assembly area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    497,    for conveyors having cleaning scrapers which are provided with
    auxiliary conveyors for transporting removed detritus away from the main
    conveyor.

    620+,   for plural conveyors which coact by gripping a load therebetween,
    and which do not transfer the load from one to another.

    793+,   for pallets, carriages, or the like, which move around an endless
    path to convey loads supported thereon, plural drive means being spaced
    along said path for moving said load-conveying means.

    817,    for plural endless belts disposed side by side and jointly
    supporting the same load.


CLS 198/571
TXT Apparatus under subclass 570 including means for influencing the operation
    of a conveyor in response to (a) a change in operation of the conveying
    system, (b) presence or absence of the load at a point on its normal path
    of travel, or (c) a characteristic of the load.


CLS 198/572
TXT Apparatus under subclass 571 wherein the operation influencing means
    responds to things recited in either section (b) or section (c) of said
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    505,    for a system of plural conveyors in which the operation of a
    conveyor is controlled by means responsive to the weight of the load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 52+, for package making apparatus having
    operation control means responsive to a condition of a package or its
    contents.


CLS 198/573
TXT Apparatus under subclass 572 wherein the operation influencing means
    responds to an undesirable accumulation of load at a point on its travel
    path.


CLS 198/574
TXT Apparatus under subclass 570 wherein a first conveyor is mounted on and
    moves with a second conveyor that engages the same or a different load.

    (1)     Note.  Conveying sections merely supported on movable or
    repositionable mounts will not be found herein, unless such a mount is an
    identifiable conveying section which engages a load.


CLS 198/575
TXT Apparatus under subclass 570 including means for influencing the operating
    mode of one conveyor with respect to the operating mode(s) of one or more
    additional conveyors for the purpose of establishing or modifying a
    particular relationship between the operating modes of the several
    conveying sections.


CLS 198/576
TXT Apparatus under subclass 570 wherein conveyors that sequentially carry the
    same load are synchronized in operation.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of plural conveyors included here are endless belts
    having load-supporting platforms spaced therealong and revolving in timed
    relation so that a platform on one belt is positioned to receive a load
    dropped from a platform on the other belt as the latter passes around an
    end support roller, or an endless belt that is mechanically linked with the
    drive of a reciprocating conveyor so that the belt moves only when the
    reciprocating conveyor is moving in the direction that advances load to
    said belt.


CLS 198/577
TXT Apparatus under subclass 570 including means for changing the speed of,
    stopping, or reversing the movement of a conveyor.


CLS 198/578
TXT Apparatus under subclass 570 including means for cyclically swinging a
    pivotally mounted conveyor of the conveying system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    631.1+, for a single conveyor that repetitively swings back and forth.


CLS 198/579
TXT Apparatus under subclass 570 wherein one of the conveyors moves the load
    faster than another.


CLS 198/580
TXT Apparatus under subclass 570 wherein at least a portion of the load is
    conveyed in a loop-like path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    560,    for a conveyor system involving a gravity conveyor section having
    means to handle a portion of the load which becomes separated from the main
    flow path, and wherein the separated portion may comprise a portion which
    is shunted to an auxiliary path for return to the main supply and eventual
    recirculation.


CLS 198/581
TXT Apparatus under subclass 570 including a conveyor, the support frame of
    which comprises hinged sections that can be swung together to provide a
    compact configuration of said conveyor for storage or transport.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    632+,   for a single conveyor section having means whereby it may be folded
    intermediate its ends.


CLS 198/582
TXT Apparatus under subclass 570 provided with a receptacle for storing load to
    be conveyed by the system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    550.01+, for conveying systems having a bin feeding a power-driven section.


CLS 198/583
TXT Apparatus under subclass 570 having means which facilitates adding a
    conveyor to, or removing a conveyor from, the system.


CLS 198/584
TXT Apparatus under subclass 583 wherein a conveyor can be added to the system
    so that it is movable relative to another conveyor of said system.


CLS 198/585
TXT Apparatus under subclass 570 including an endless belt, the upper conveying
    reach of which has its travel direction twice reversed to form an S-shaped
    path therein, and a conveyor receiving a load dropped from said belt when
    the latter reverses its travel direction at the uppermost loop of said
    S-shaped path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    812,    for a tripper movable along and endless belt conveyor to vary the
    conveying length of the latter.


CLS 198/586
TXT Apparatus under subclass 570 wherein one conveyor of the system is
    repositionable relative to another by moving either the entire conveyor or
    only a portion thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a system having means for moving the
    support frame of a first conveyor so that said first conveyor lifts a load
    from a second conveyor, said first conveyor then being operated to convey
    said load.  A specific example is a swingable frame that carries an endless
    belt, said frame being moved upward relative to power-driven rollers so
    that the endless belt lifts a load from said rollers, and said endless belt
    then moving said load by its orbital motion.

    (2)     Note.  If coacting conveyors which grip a load therebetween are
    classifiable as plural conveyors (either because a load is transferred
    between the coacting conveyors, or because a load is transferred between
    such conveyors and another conveyor not coacting therewith), a claimed
    arrangement for moving one of the coacting conveyors relative to another is
    classifiable in this subclass or an indent thereof.


CLS 198/587
TXT Apparatus under subclass 586 wherein a conveyor is mounted for pivotal
    movement about an axis generally perpendicular to the ground.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a vibratory conveyor including two
    platforms which swing relative to each other and which are connected by
    moving drive links or gears for transmitting the motion of one platform to
    the other.  The subclass also includes a vibratory conveyor having (a) two
    platforms which are connected together for relative swinging motion by a
    pin fixed on one platform and extending into an aperture on the other
    platform, and (b) a third platform which is mounted on one of the swingably
    connected platforms so that it can be extended or retracted relative
    thereto while the conveyor is operating.  The subclass does not include a
    vibratory conveyor meeting only the requirement of section (a) of the
    preceding sentence.


CLS 198/588
TXT Apparatus under subclass 587 including means for changing the length of the
    path over which the load is conveyed.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are (a) conveyors movable relative to each
    other so that one conveyor can discharge the load at different points along
    the available path of load travel on the other conveyor, and (b) plural
    conveyors, at least one of which includes means for varying its conveying
    length (e.g., and endless belt conveyor having a belt storage loop that can
    be shortened while the length of the belt conveying reach is increased
    during operation of the conveyor, or an endless belt conveyor provided with
    means for facilitating the addition or removal of links or panel sections
    of its loop when the conveyor is not operating).

    (2)     Note.  A vibratory conveyor is included here if it includes two
    platforms which successively carry the load, and which can be shifted
    relative to each other, while the conveyor is operating, to thereby change
    the length of the conveying path.  This subclass does not include a
    vibratory conveyor having two platforms which successively carry the load,
    and which can only be shifted relative to each other while the conveyor is
    not operating (e.g., a vibratory trough consisting of two sections that can
    be fixedly connected together by means of bolts, or the like, with
    different overlapping of adjacent end portions of said sections).  See
    subclasses 752.1+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    812,    for an endless belt conveyor having means for varying its conveying
    length.


CLS 198/589
TXT Apparatus under subclass 587 wherein a conveyor is mounted for pivotal
    movement about an axis generally parallel with the ground.


CLS 198/590
TXT Apparatus under subclass 587 including side-walls respectively disposed on
    opposite sides of the conveying path and arranged to move or flex when a
    conveyor is laterally pivoted relative to an adjacent conveyor.


CLS 198/591
TXT Apparatus under subclass 587 wherein the swingable conveyor is supported or
    guided in its movement by an arcuate, static means, such as curved track or
    curved guide slot cooperating with means mounted on the free end of the
    support frame of said conveyor.


CLS 198/592
TXT Apparatus under subclass 586 wherein a conveyor is mounted for pivotal
    movement about an axis generally parallel with the ground.


CLS 198/593
TXT Apparatus under subclass 592 wherein the system is provided with a cable,
    chain, or other flexible means having one end secured to the swingable
    conveyor, and its other end secured to a winding reel.


CLS 198/594
TXT Apparatus under subclass 586 including means for changing the length of the
    path over which the load is conveyed.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are the types of conveying systems described
    in (1) Note and (2) Note of subclass 588 as includible in that subclass (if
    laterally swingable).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    812,    for an endless belt conveyor having means for varying its conveying
    length.


CLS 198/595
TXT Apparatus under subclass 594 including a plurality of platforms, each
    having a concave shape transversely of the conveying path so that opposite
    side portions of said platforms rise above their central section, said
    platforms being fitted one within another and being movable relative to
    each other longitudinally of said conveying path to thereby vary the length
    thereof.


CLS 198/596
TXT Apparatus under subclass 595 including gripping blocks mounted in pairs on
    one of said platforms for releasably engaging opposed friction surfaces on
    another of said platforms to permit (a) movement of the two platforms as a
    unit when said gripping blocks engage said friction surfaces, and (b)
    movement of the two platforms relative to each other when said gripping
    blocks are disengaged from said friction surfaces.


CLS 198/597
TXT Apparatus under subclass 570 including a first conveyor for moving a load
    in a first direction, and a second conveyor for moving said load, while it
    rests on said first conveyor, in a direction transverse to said first
    direction.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is the combination of a conveyor and means for
    shifting a load laterally of said conveyor by magnetic force exerted
    against said load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370.07  through 370.09, 370.1, 370.11 through 370.13, for a conveyor
    arrangement for selecting among plural sources or destinations and
    involving a power-driven means for moving a load from or to a conveyor
    section

    717+,   for conveying means of the pusher type.


CLS 198/598
TXT Apparatus under subclass 597 wherein said second conveyor has orbital
    motion, or turns about an axis.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are belts, rollers, swingable arms, or other
    like means which move a load transversely of a conveyor supporting the same.


CLS 198/599
TXT Apparatus under subclass 570 wherein a load is moved relative to a conveyor
    by a nonpowered means, such as a fixed guide rail or a freely revolving
    endless belt moved only by contact with the load.


CLS 198/600
TXT Apparatus under subclass 570 including passive support means on which the
    load moves or sits when it is not on a conveyor (e.g., freely rotating
    rollers or a side platform positioned between the ends of two driven belts
    for supporting a load as it moves between the belts).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    539,    for a conveyor system having a gravity conveyor section and
    involving load-supporting structure which functions in a similar manner.


CLS 198/601
TXT Apparatus under subclass 570 wherein the load is fed from one conveying
    path to plural conveying paths, or vice versa.


CLS 198/602
TXT Apparatus under subclass 570 including only one travel path for the load.


CLS 198/603
TXT Apparatus under subclass 602 including a plurality of conveyors disposed
    one above another and alternately carrying a load in opposite directions as
    it is elevated or lowered.


CLS 198/604
TXT Apparatus under subclass 602 including at least two conveyors which
    cooperate to grip the load therebetween and thereby move it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    606+,   for plural endless belts, at least one of which is disposed
    adjacent idler rollers or other passive means, the load engaging both the
    belt conveyor and said passive means as it travels therebetween.

    620+,   for a plurality of conveyors which move a load by engaging it
    therebetween.


CLS 198/605
TXT Apparatus under subclass 604 wherein the load is carried on a first
    conveyor before the latter enters a zone of coaction with a second
    conveyor, and wherein the load is transferred to said second conveyor and
    carried thereby after it leaves said zone.


CLS 198/606
TXT Apparatus under subclass 602 including at least two conveyors, each
    consisting of, or including as part of its structure, an endless loop.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of plural conveyors included here are (a) endless
    belts that directly support a load on their upper surfaces, and (b) endless
    belts, each carrying other elements, such as buckets or platforms, which
    support the load.


CLS 198/607
TXT Apparatus under subclass 606 wherein the elevation of the load is changed
    as it is moved by one of said conveyors.


CLS 198/608
TXT Apparatus under subclass 602 including at least two conveyors, each
    comprising a body that spins about an axis passing therethrough.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are (a) rotating wheels, each having a
    plurality of buckets or platforms mounted on its periphery, (b) rotating
    disks which carry the load on their upwardly facing planar surfaces, or (c)
    screws rotating about their longitudinal axes.

    (2)     Note.  Included here as a system with plural conveyors are screws
    which successively convey a load and which are driven by a single power
    source, a first screw being connected to said power source, and a second
    screw being coupled to said first screw only by gears which transmit
    driving force therebetween.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass includes power-driven rollers arranged in
    separate groups clearly recognizable as forming separate portions of a load
    conveying path (e.g., one line of rollers disposed perpendicular to another
    line of rollers, or two lines of rollers having another type of conveyor
    therebetween).  But the subclass does not include power-driven rollers
    arranged in a single line, even where the rollers are rotated by separate
    drive means.  See subclasses 780+.

    (4)     Note.  Included here is a rotatable shaft carrying (a) a helical
    surface or screw, and (b) one or more radially projecting vanes that impel
    a load radially away from said shaft after the load has been moved to said
    vane, or vanes, by said helical surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    662+,   for screw conveyors having plural helical surfaces, particularly
    subclasses 625+, for coating helical surfaces on parallel axes, and
    subclass 666, for helical surfaces coupled end to end.

    780+,   for power-driven rolls arranged in an uninterrupted sequence to
    form a single unbranched conveying path.


CLS 198/609
TXT Apparatus under subclass 602 including at least two conveyors, each of
    which moves to-and-fro with high frequency and low amplitude of motion.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a vibratory conveying means formed of
    plural platforms which successively carry the load and which are connected
    by moving drive links or gears for transmitting to-and-fro motion of one
    platform to the next.  The subclass does not include a vibratory conveying
    means formed of plural platforms fixedly connected together.


CLS 198/610
TXT Apparatus under subclass 602 including different kinds of conveyors (e.g.,
    an endless belt and a star wheel).


CLS 198/611
TXT Apparatus under subclass 610 including a conveyor comprising a body that
    spins about an axis passing therethrough.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are (a) a rotating wheel having a plurality of
    buckets or platforms mounted on its periphery, (b) a rotating disk carrying
    the load on its upwardly facing planar surface, and (c) a screw rotating
    about its longitudinal axis.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass is a conveyor comprising an
    endless belt and a roller that supports said belt at a point where it
    reverses travel direction, the belt or means connected thereto, such as
    buckets, discharging the load onto the roller while passing around the
    latter.


CLS 198/612
TXT Apparatus under subclass 611 wherein said spinning body has mounted on its
    periphery a distinct means, such as a blade, bucket, spike, or pocket,
    which positively engages the load to ensure its movement along the
    conveying path.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a conveying system comprising (a) a
    rotating member, such as a disk, having buckets spaced about its periphery,
    and (b) an endless belt also having buckets spaced apart thereon.


CLS 198/613
TXT Apparatus under subclass 612 wherein the peripherally mounted means move
    relative to said spinning body to thereby disengage from the load.

    (1)     Note.  The structures to be found herein include, for example, a
    conveyor having a screw and retracting fingers mounted for rotation on the
    same cylindrical body.


CLS 198/614
TXT Apparatus under subclass 611 including a conveyor that moves to-and-fro
    with low frequency and high amplitude of motion.

    (1)     Note.  Included here as a reciprocating conveyor is a load-carrying
    strip, each end of which is attached to a winding reel, said strip being
    moved in opposite directions between the reels by alternately changing
    their direction of rotation.


CLS 198/615
TXT Apparatus under the class definition (A) adapted to be rearranged to
    perform different functions, or (B) adapted to be altered so as to operate
    in a different way or change its function in some way by (1) the steps of
    disassembling the apparatus in some major portion and then reassembling the
    apparatus with the same or different portion, (2) the step of disassembling
    some major portion from the apparatus, or (3) the step of assembling some
    major portion to the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  Conversion features are common in this art.  A mere preamble
    in a claim to the effect that a device is convertible or is a conversion
    attachment is generally not enough for classification under this
    definition. The conversion feature should be spelled out as by (a)
    specifically claiming one embodiment of an apparatus having a first
    function and claiming with second conversion functions, or (b) repeated
    functional statements in the claim.  Where no other suitable classification
    exists, a broad mention of conversion may be enough for classification
    under this definition.

    (2)     Note.  The change in the apparatus must be more than merely placing
    a part in one of a series of adjacent holes, or, in general, making a
    change which amounts to only an adjustment or minor alteration in the
    overall functioning of the device.

    (3)     Note.  The change must be more than to change a part between an
    operative and an inoperative position.

    (4)     Note.  When the conversion consists of the assembly of a part, the
    claim must recite some element of the combination which has little or no
    utility when the part is in the combination, but is useful when the part is
    absent from the combination.

    (5)     Note.  A part which is disassembled and reversed to present a new
    wearing surface is included under this definition.


CLS 198/617
TXT Method, under the class definition, of conveying a load or load portion
    from one place to another.

    (1)     Note.  Only those patents which contain method claims which are
    susceptible to being practiced by a plurality of different devices, or
    which are drawn to functions not provided for above, should be placed
    herein, either on an original or cross-reference basis. Those patents
    containing method claims which are limited to the operation of a single
    above-provided-for apparatus will be found in the appropriate apparatus
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    Any appropriate subclass above, for a process patent having apparatus or
    other limitations sufficient to warrant placement therein.


CLS 198/618
TXT Apparatus under the class definition wherein an element or an assemblage of
    elements acts in a unitary fashion to support and cause movement of a load
    of material along a predetermined path from a source to a destination which
    lie with a distance between one and the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    860.1,  for conveyor frame or casing structure claiming only that means
    which supports or encloses only a "conveyor", "conveyor means", "elevator
    conveyor", etc.


CLS 198/619
TXT Apparatus under subclass 618 wherein the load is moved, at least in part,
    as a result of its reaction with a moving electron, ion, or magnetic field
    and not necessarily to any extent by a power-driven surface means which may
    act as a support for said load.


CLS 198/620
TXT Apparatus under subclass 618 having at least two power-driven conveyor
    sections which cooperate to engage the load between said sections and
    thereby cause the load to be moved in a given direction.

    (1)     Note.  A conveyor section is considered to be power-driven if it is
    motivated by any power means including another power-driven conveyor
    section if the first section has parts which directly contact the second
    section from which motion is obtained.  The load cannot constitute a power
    transmission means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    570+,   for conveyor systems having plural conveyor sections which may
    cooperate to grip and move a load, but which, in addition thereto, as a
    conveyor system, begin the movement of the load by one of the sections, and
    complete the movement of the load by another of the sections.

    604,    for a system of conveying sections having coacting conveying
    elements defining a load path therebetween.

    625+,   for coacting parallel screw conveyors.

    635,    for plural conveyor sections which engage the load simultaneously,
    but wherein one of said sections acts to skim off and reverse the direction
    of the skimmed off portion to that direction which a cooperating conveyor
    section causes said load to move.

    721,    for pusher conveyors having a movable surface upon which the load
    is supported.

    817,    for plural endless belt conveyors which cooperate to support a load
    set across them.

    819,    for trough-shaped carrier belts having edges which may be brought
    together to enclose a load.


CLS 198/621.1
TXT Reciprocating member:

    Subject matter under subclass 620 wherein one of the power-driven conveyor
    sections engages the load with a back and forth motion as it cooperates
    with another power-driven conveyor section.


CLS 198/621.2
TXT Load support member lifted by inclined or vertical supporting fluid
    actuator (e.g., piston or air bag):

    Subject matter under subclass 621.1 wherein an element directly holding the
    load is raised from a lower to a higher position by a sloping or
    perpendicular hydraulic elevating mechanism such as a linearly expandable
    device moving back and forth under fluid pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    774.2,  for a similar lifting means used in an alternately-acting load
    support member.


CLS 198/621.3
TXT Load support member lifted by supporting eccentric cam or rotating crank
    drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 621.1 wherein an element directly holding the
    load is raised from a lower to a higher position by a revolving or
    oscillating mechanical device having its axis of rotation displaced from
    its center or by a revolving link having an axis of rotation at one end and
    a pivotal connection to the material holding means adjacent to its opposite
    end.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    774.3,  for a similar lifting means used in an alternately-acting load
    support member.


CLS 198/621.4
TXT Load support member lifted by inclined supporting surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 621.1 wherein an element directly holding the
    load is raised from a lower to a higher position by a sloped, slanted or
    pitched holding body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    774.4,  for a similar lifting means used in an alternately-acting load
    support member.


CLS 198/622
TXT Apparatus under subclass 620 wherein two or more of said power-driven
    conveyors sections, which simultaneously cooperate to move the load, form a
    couple to move the load, but wherein each member of the couple, if acting
    independently, would tend to move the load in opposite directions.

    (1)     Note.  The driven conveyor member which moves opposite to the
    direction of motion of the conveyed load contacts a portion of the load
    being conveyed and strips off or throws back the stripped portion of the
    load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    635,    for static means which scrape or smooth out the surface of the load
    being conveyed.

    688.1,  for means which engage a free surface of the load to bias the load
    to the conveying means for greater friction engagement therewith.

    836,    for endless conveyors having broadly means independent of the
    carrier designed to prevent accidental removal of the load from the carrier.


CLS 198/623
TXT Apparatus under subclass 620 wherein two or more of said power-driven
    conveyor sections, which simultaneously cooperate to move the load, form a
    couple whose members move relatively in terms of velocity.

    (1)     Note.  A conveyor couple whose members converge to gradually grip
    the load between them are not considered to have relative motion in terms
    of direction. See other appropriate subclasses, such as subclasses 620+.


CLS 198/624
TXT Apparatus under subclass 620 wherein two or more of said power-driven
    conveyor sections, which simultaneously cooperate to move the load, form a
    couple, wherein at least two of the sections forming the couple are adapted
    to rotate continuously about their own axes, and wherein the load, when
    being conveyed, is in such a position that it is traversed by a line which
    extends between the axes of the rotating conveyor section.


CLS 198/625
TXT Apparatus under subclass 624 wherein the rotating sections each have a
    load-engaging portion which is in the form of a helical surface.

    (1)     Note.  The sections, more often than not are parallel, and the
    helical surfaces usually are spaced apart, although intermeshing of the
    surfaces sometimes is found where the load consists of bulk material.

    (2)     Note.  The helical surfaces may, or may not, be identical insofar
    as concerns characteristics such as pitch, diameter, hand, or speed or
    direction of rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    663,    for plural helical surfaces which act together in forming an
    underlying support for an article-type load, but wherein no portion of that
    load extends downwardly into intersecting relationship with a line drawn
    between the axes of two adjacent helical surfaces.


CLS 198/626.1
TXT Opposed endless belts:
    Subject matter under subclass 620 wherein the load is engaged on opposite
    sides by oppositely facing endless belts which apply forces normal to the
    belt faces to the intermediate load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    793+,   for plural endless conveyors with individual load supports
    supporting the same load.

    817,    for plural endless belts supporting a load on their upper surfaces.


CLS 198/626.2
TXT Load is enclosed by belts:
    Subject matter under subclass 626.1 wherein the load is totally enclosed by
    the opposed belts, or belts in combination with guides or housing means.


CLS 198/626.3
TXT Having means to adjust one belt relative to the opposed belt:Subject matter
    under subclass 626.2 wherein means permit one of the belts to be moved
    relative to the opposing belt.


CLS 198/626.4
TXT By biasing means:
    Subject matter under subclass 626.3 wherein the one belt is moved relative
    to the opposing belt by an urging means.


CLS 198/626.5
TXT Having adjustable belt portion:
    Subject matter under subclass 626.1 wherein means permit movement of a
    portion of one of the belts relative to the opposing belt.


CLS 198/626.6
TXT By biasing means:
    Subject matter under subclass 626.5 wherein a portion of the one belt is
    moved relative to the opposing belt by an urging means.


CLS 198/629
TXT Apparatus under subclass 618 comprising (1) a single driven conveyor means
    which acts through successive stages to move the load in a plurality of
    recognized different conveying actions, or (2) a plurality of unlike driven
    conveying sections which cooperate to act simultaneously to move the load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    570+,   for plural conveyor sections which act consecutively to move the
    load.

    620+,   for plural conveyors which simultaneously engage the load between
    them.

    817,    for plural endless belt conveyors which cooperate to support a load
    set across them.


CLS 198/630
TXT Apparatus under subclass 618 comprising flexible sheet or tubular material
    which is fixed against lateral movement and upon which the load to be
    conveyed is placed, and having means to cause a ripple, wave or raised
    portion to be developed on the surface of said material, and to move across
    said surface so that as said ripple contacts said load the load is caused
    to move across said surface.


CLS 198/631.1
TXT Conveyor portion only cyclically rotates, shifts, or oscillates for
    extra-conveying function:

    Subject matter under subclass 618 wherein only a part of the load carrier
    periodically changes its position or direction by revolving, reciprocating,
    or swinging for additional load carrying action.


CLS 198/632
TXT Apparatus under subclass 618 wherein the conveyor section is adapted to be
    folded or to be angulated between its extremities to facilitate
    transportation or storage thereof, at which time it has no load conveying
    capacity.


CLS 198/633
TXT Apparatus under subclass 618 wherein the conveyor section has either (a) a
    means associated therewith which in its operative position presents a
    nonload-supporting means which may be engaged by, or engages, the load as
    it is moved by said section to stop, slow or cause the load to be
    manipulated or deflected from the path of movement imparted only by said
    conveyor section; or (b) a means movable to a position where it will cause
    the load moved only by the conveyor section to be removed and supported
    from the influence of said section for the purpose of stopping the motion
    of the load, and which then may subsequently return the load to the
    conveyor section for continued conveyance thereby.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes those patents claiming a single
    conveyor section and having a load deflector means which is movable from
    and to operative position, or is adjustable to various operative positions.
     When it is clear from the claimed disclosure that the function of the
    deflector is to increase or decrease the number of streams or to ultimately
    select the load destination, etc., see subclasses above., e.g., 348+, 418+,
    434+.  See (3) Note for subclass 434.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass also includes patents having means which may
    be placed in the path of the conveyed load to check the load against
    movement counter to its intended direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    456+,   for a conveyor system having means to laterally shift the load on
    one or more of the conveying elements of the system.

    530+,   for gravity conveyors combined with power-driven conveyors and
    having gate means to stop the movement of the load thereon.

    534,    for flow-restricting structure in a system comprising a gravity
    conveyor and a power-driven conveyor, which structure may be a means to
    change the movement of the load for this or an indented subclass.

    599,    for a system of plural conveyors combined with a passive member
    that deflects a load from the travel direction imparted thereto by one of
    said conveyors.

    836,    for endless conveyor sections having passive load retainer means
    associated therewith which simply holds the load against falling from the
    belt or moving relative to the belt.


CLS 198/634
TXT Apparatus under subclass 633 wherein the nonconveying means is moved into
    its operative position to engage the load, independent of movement of the
    load conveying means, by a means activated either responsive to a sensed
    condition which may or may not exist, or to an independent or
    conveyor-controlled timing means.


CLS 198/635
TXT Apparatus under subclass 633 wherein the nonconveying means engages a
    portion of the conveyed load to remove said engaged portion from the
    conveyor; to hold the engaged portion against movement by the conveyor; or
    to deflect the engaged portion of the load in a direction other than that
    imparted by the conveyor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    534,    for means which engages and retards the movement of a load conveyed
    by a conveyor system which includes a gravity conveyor section.

    637,    for passive means which causes the entire load carried by the
    conveyor to discharge therefrom upon contact with said passive means.

    836,    for guard means separate from an endless belt conveyor designed to
    prevent the load from falling off the belt.

    953,    and in particular subclass 622, for conveyors having associated
    power-driven means which may contact part of the load conveyed to move that
    portion of the load conveyed relative to the load not contacted by the
    driven means.


CLS 198/636
TXT Apparatus under subclass 633 having a passive means associated with the
    conveyor and which may be located relative to the conveyor which, when
    engaged by the conveyed load, or a portion thereof, will cause such load to
    be moved transversely of the moving conveyor surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    367,    for a conveyor system having a member adapted to be placed athwart
    the path of movement of a conveyed load to select the source or destination
    of said load.

    836,    for endless conveyor means having a load retainer or guide separate
    from said means designed to maintain the conveyed load on the conveyor
    means.


CLS 198/637
TXT Apparatus under subclass 636 wherein said associated means causes said
    load, or a portion thereof, to move away from the influence of the conveyor
    section.


CLS 198/638
TXT Apparatus under subclass 618 which projects material to be conveyed by,
    first exerting a force on said material to move the same, and then causing
    said force to be released from said material, whereby said material will be
    projected and continue to move unsupported, in a trajectory, over a
    horizontal distance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    564,    for a conveyor system having a gravity section and a power-driven
    section, and wherein the latter section is of the thrower type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 58, for
    devices subjecting material to centrifugal force when the function
    disclosed is that of treating the material.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 642, for
    methods and means for projecting material through space associated with
    means for separately collecting the articles or components of the material
    which takes different paths.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 251+, for device combined with containers or
    specifically adapted for use with containers, and comprising means acting
    in addition to, or against, gravity for either removing material from a
    container, or which move or tend to cause material to move, to or through a
    container outlet.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 214+, for a
    fluid distributor comprising a slinger, splasher or deflector rotated
    relative to the affluent fluid, and subclasses 650+, for devices having
    means for holding a supply of material other than a fluid or slurry, and
    means for strewing such material over an extended area on a surface.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 5,
    subclasses 39+ and subclass 275, for comminutors including means to throw
    the material.

    406,    Conveyors: Fluid Current, subclasses 71 for a rotary thrower
    combined with a fluid current conveyor.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 174+ and 193+ for a
    heating chamber combined with a charging device of the thrower type.


CLS 198/639
TXT Apparatus under subclass 638 having (1) means to sense a condition
    surrounding the thrower and means responsive to said sensing means to cause
    a change in the operating condition of the conveyor, or (2) means to sense
    a particular condition which may, or may not, exist relative to the
    conveyor itself, such as speed, overload, motor temperature, etc., and
    means responsive to said sensing means to act to change the operating
    condition of the conveyor.


CLS 198/640
TXT Apparatus under subclass 638 having means positionable in the path of the
    impelled material to control its path after leaving the influence of the
    throwing mechanism.


CLS 198/641
TXT Apparatus under subclass 638 having means actuatable to control the speed
    or the horizontal or vertical angle of the conveying mechanism so that the
    horizontal distance or angle of discharge of the conveyed material may be
    varied.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    523+,   for conveyors having means to throw a material to be conveyed in
    combination with gravity conveyor means which support said material before
    and/or after it has been thrown.


CLS 198/642
TXT Apparatus under subclass 638 having means which revolves about an axis, and
    in doing so, projects material to be conveyed so that it will assume a
    trajectory as a result of it having contacted said revolving means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 410+, for dispensers having a rotary
    discharge assistant.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 195 for a heating chamber
    combined with a charging device of the rotary thrower type.


CLS 198/643
TXT Apparatus under subclass 618 comprising an endless member (i.e.,
    chain-like, smooth or braded cored-like strand or belt) which is driven
    over sheaves or pulleys so that at least a portion of said endless member
    dips into the fluid to be lifted and lifts said fluid by mere cohesion of
    said liquid to said member, and means whereby the fluid may be removed from
    said member at the desired elevation.

    (1)     Note.  These devices are sometimes called "pumps", perhaps on the
    basis that they move a viscous fluid from one elevation to another.
    However, any development of kinetic energy is not a factor.  The function
    of these devices is merely to move a viscous fluid from one place to
    another.

    (2)     Note.  The fluid may be removed from the member by passing said
    member around a pulley.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, subclass 90, for rotary pumps
    or motors having a bladeless surface wherein transfer of energy between the
    runner and the fluid which it contacts is the result of friction in the
    area of contact of said runner and said fluid.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclass 4, for
    rotatable skin friction type fluid engaging impellers or rotors.

    417,    Pumps, for expansible chamber type pumps.


CLS 198/644
TXT Apparatus under subclass 618 which is particularly adapted to convey
    signatures of printers or bookbinders, usually on an inverted V support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    717+,   for pusher conveyors which comprise a load-supporting surface over
    which the load is moved by a power-driven means which engages and moves the
    load, but does not support the load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 21+, for book sewing machines having feeding
    devices for signatures.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclasses 99+, for a device
    for feeding signatures and applying a member, e.g., staple, thereto.

    270,    Sheet-Material Associating, particularly subclasses 52.01+, for
    conveyors combined with means to associate or disassociate signatures.


CLS 198/657
TXT Apparatus under subclass 618 wherein the conveyor section comprises a
    helical surface formation which is rotated about its longitudinal axis.

    (1)     Note.  Screw conveyors which move articles frequently do so by
    providing a moving "floor" across which an article is propelled by virtue
    of resting thereupon (i.e., as in subclass 663), whereas a screw conveyor
    which moves bulk material functions in the nature of a pusher-type conveyor
    section.

    (2)     Note.  A screw conveyor which moves bulk material usually is
    provided with a housing (conduit, trough, etc.) which forms a load support
    surface; however, the housing is sometimes dispensed with (e.g., a screw
    conveyor immersed in a bin of material may rely upon the material which
    surrounds its flow path for the confinement otherwise achieved by the use
    of a housing).

    (3)     Note.  Usually the helical surface formation includes a core,
    within which lies the longitudinal axis of the formation, and which core is
    utilized to transmit a driving force to the conveyor section; however, the
    so-called "coreless" type of helical surface formation (examples of which
    appear in subclass 676) is characterized by the absence of a central
    structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    625,    for plural screw type conveyor sections which coact to engage and
    move a load therebetween.

    642,    for a thrower type conveyor section of the rotary kind wherein the
    impelling surfaces may be comprised of helical surfaces or segments thereof.

    666+,   for connections between housings of successive helical surfaces
    when those connections correspond with connections between the helical
    surfaces.

    717+,   for another kind of conveyor section wherein a load is pushed over
    a load-supporting surface, but wherein the pushing means is other than a
    helical surface rotating about its axis.

    778,    for a spiral type conveyor section wherein the load-supporting
    surface spiralling defines a path for the load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 48.1, for a railway locomotive
    having a combustion chamber and a screw conveyor, which conveyor feeds
    solid fuel to the chamber.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 156.1+ for a mixing chamber with a feed means
    therefor, and wherein a screw conveyor is provided in a feeder or supply
    reservoir for agitating material therein; and subclasses 318+ for a
    stationary mixing chamber having a rotatable stirrer of the screw type, and
    see particularly the subclasses indented thereunder for specific kinds of
    screw structure.

    406,    Conveyors: Fluid Current, subclasses 53+ for a screw conveyor
    combined with a fluid current conveyor.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclasses 176+, for a
    fluid impeller having a working surface in the form of a spiral.


CLS 198/658
TXT Apparatus under subclass 657 wherein the helical surface formation extends
    from or is integral with the inner surface of a rotatable tubular member.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is, for example, a device wherein (a) the
    helical configuration extends across the diameter of the tubular member,
    (b) the helical configuration is formed from a plurality of members
    extending radially inward toward the axis of rotation, and (c) the helical
    configuration is formed by the inner surface of the hollow tubular member.


CLS 198/659
TXT Apparatus under subclass 657 wherein the conveyor section structure
    includes a component, the shape of which is subject to change during the
    operation of the conveyor, or may be changed to establish a shape whereby
    said component can be accommodated as an operative part of a conveyor.


CLS 198/660
TXT Apparatus under subclass 657 wherein the conveyor section comprises one or
    more helical surface formations, at least one of which can be moved in a
    direction parallel to its axis of rotation.

    (1)     Note.  Typical of the movement found here is the repositioning of a
    helical surface with respect to its housing, or of one helical surface with
    respect to another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    629,    for a conveyor section which moves a load by a plurality of
    different conveying actions (e.g., a helical surface which is rotated and,
    in addition, reciprocated).

    659,    for a flexible helical surface which has one portion which is
    movable relative to another portion (e.g., a helical surface which may be
    lengthened by stretching it).


CLS 198/661
TXT Apparatus under subclass 657 wherein the conveyor section comprises one or
    more helical surface formations and which, by virtue of a changing pitch,
    diameter (overall or core), number of threads, etc., has a capacity which
    varies along its length.


CLS 198/662
TXT Apparatus under subclass 657 wherein there are a plurality of helical
    surface formations.


CLS 198/663
TXT Apparatus under subclass 662 wherein the helical surface formations
    comprise laterally spaced members which form an underlying support for an
    article-type load, the load continuously contacting at least two of the
    members.

    (1)     Note.  Movement of the load may be in a direction parallel to the
    longitudinal axes of the members, or may be diagonally thereof.  In the
    absence of an axial component of movement, however, consideration should be
    given as to whether the members do not more nearly comprise one of the
    types of rolls provided for in subclasses 780+.

    (2)     Note.  Confinement of the movement of the load to the axial
    direction usually is accomplished by either (a) the provision of an
    external guide as an abutment for some portion of the load, or (b) the use,
    in more or less equal number, of oppositely rotating, opposite-handed,
    helical surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    625,    for plural helical surfaces which act together upon a load, and
    wherein at least a portion of the load is so located as to be intersected
    by a line drawn between the axes of two of the helical surfaces.


CLS 198/664
TXT Apparatus under subclass 662 wherein the plural helical surface formations
    comprise a plurality of coaxial elements, each of which has formed thereon
    a working surface which extends for less than 360o about the common axis.

    (1)     Note.  The working surface of an individual element may itself be a
    segment of a helical surface, or it may be planar in nature; in the latter
    instance, however, the elements are arranged along the axis in such a
    manner as to form a helical path.

    (2)     Note.  In the instance of those elements which have a working
    surface which is a segment of a helical surface, the elements may abut one
    another in such a manner that the individual surfaces form a continuous
    helical surface.

    (3)     Note.  The structures of this subclass commonly provide means to
    attach the elements to a member (e.g., a shaft) which extends along the
    common axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 73, for a collection of packing augers wherein blade-like members
    on a shaft are utilized to move and/or pack fluent material into a receiver.


CLS 198/665
TXT Apparatus under subclass 664 wherein means is provided to join the elements
    to the shaft in such a manner that the angular relationship of the elements
    to the longitudinal axis of the shaft can be reversed for the purpose of
    changing the direction of thrust of the surfaces.


CLS 198/666
TXT Apparatus under subclass 662 wherein the plural helical surface formations
    are coupled one to another in an end to end relationship.

    (1)     Note.  The coupling usually is of a disconnectable or otherwise
    separable nature, but may comprise a permanent union.

    (2)     Note.  If each surface is formed upon a shaft, it is sufficient
    that the shafts be coupled end to end, in which event there may
    be--especially in the instance of an intermediate bearing or an
    intermediate drive--a brief discontinuity.  In turn, it is frequently the
    practice to utilize one or more short helical surface portions to fill in a
    discontinuity of this nature.

    (3)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses usually involve also the
    corresponding connection between any housing members which may be present.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    602+,   for a conveyor system having plural, power-driven sections arranged
    in a single flow path.


CLS 198/667
TXT Apparatus under subclass 666 wherein the coupled formations are driven by
    way of a member (gear, pulley, sprocket wheel, etc.) which is located
    between the formations at, or in the vicinity of, the coupling.

    (1)     Note.  When the surfaces are provided with housing members, a means
    to seal the spaced, confronting ends of the latter usually is involved.


CLS 198/668
TXT Apparatus under subclass 666 wherein the coupled formations are pivotably
    related one to another (e.g., the coupling is a universal joint).


CLS 198/669
TXT Apparatus under subclass 662 wherein the plural helical surface formations
    comprise at least one formation of a right-handed thread and at least one
    formation of a left-handed thread, which formations generate flow paths
    which either approach, or recede from, each other.


CLS 198/670
TXT Apparatus under subclass 657 including means coacting with said helical
    surface formation and/or with the load to regulate or facilitate the
    passage of the load.

    (1)     Note.  The means includes either a passive structure or a moving
    surface.


CLS 198/671
TXT Apparatus under subclass 657 wherein means is provided to facilitate or
    control either the entry of the load into the housing of a helical surface
    or the exit of the load therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    670,    for a means which may be structurally similar to a means for this
    subclass (671), but wherein the functioning thereof is influenced by a
    condition which exists within the housing (e.g., pressure).


CLS 198/672
TXT Apparatus under subclass 657 provided with means for sustaining the helical
    surface formation for rotation.


CLS 198/673
TXT Apparatus under subclass 672 wherein the means to sustain is positioned
    about the outer periphery of the formation.


CLS 198/674
TXT Apparatus under subclass 657 provided with means to rotate the helical
    surface formation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    667,    for drive means located between coupled helical surfaces.


CLS 198/675
TXT Apparatus under subclass 674 wherein the means to rotate may be modified to
    change the direction or rate of rotation of the formation.


CLS 198/676
TXT Apparatus under subclass 657 involving structural aspects of a helical
    surface formation.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is concerned primarily with those aspects
    which show most readily in a sectional view taken at 90o to the working
    portion of the helical surface (e.g., the configuration of the surface, its
    angular relationship with its axis of rotation, its internal structure,
    etc.).


CLS 198/677
TXT Apparatus under subclass 657 wherein means is provided for attaching a
    helical surface formation to a driving member, which member usually is in
    the form of a shaft located in the axis of rotation of the formation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    664+,   for plural helical surface formations in the nature of a plurality
    of coaxial elements, which structures commonly provide means for securing
    the elements thereof to a driving shaft.


CLS 198/678.1
TXT Endless conveyor having means for suspending load:
    Subject matter under subclass 618 wherein the conveying means comprises a
    hanger from which the load is suspended, said hanger being supported above
    the location where the load engages the hanger by a support means which is
    either (1) a track or guide means along which said hanger is caused to move
    by an endless drive means, or (2) an endless means which both supports and
    moves said hanger.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    463.1+, for conveying systems having at least one article suspending
    conveyor.

    793+,   for load holding designs for a unit load conveyor having an endless
    or rotating path of travel where the load may be suspended also.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, for suspending conveyors having rail supported, power and
    free, suspending trolleys.

    452,    Butchering, subclasses 177+ and 187+ for endless hooks limited for
    use in the butchering art..


CLS 198/679
TXT Apparatus under subclass 678.1 wherein the conveyed load, or the hanger
    means supporting the load, is maintained in engagement with the drive means
    by magnetic means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    690,    for conveyors having magnetic means used to enhance the frictional
    engagement between the conveyor and its load.


CLS 198/680
TXT Apparatus under subclass 678 having a hanger means which comprises
    relatively movable parts or is movable relative to the support means, in
    addition to its conveying motion, and having means to engage and cause
    movement of said part of said hanger means relative to said support means
    to cause the suspended load to change position relative to the support
    means as it is being conveyed, or to cause the load to be disengaged from
    said hanger or released from the grip of the hanger so that said load may
    be removed from said hanger.


CLS 198/681
TXT Apparatus under subclass 678 having a plurality of substantially parallel
    guide or track support means along each of which an articulated drive means
    is adapted to move in parallel fashion with respect to the other, and means
    supported by and spanning the space between said drive means from which a
    load may be suspended.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    817,    for endless strip-like belts arranged to move parallel to and
    spaced from one another, and having load engaging and supporting elements
    extending transversely of and spanning the gap between the belts.


CLS 198/682
TXT Apparatus under subclass 678 having a means which is positioned between the
    hanger means and the load, and which is secured to said hanger means
    whereby the two said means are maintained in engagement for the purpose of
    bearing a load.


CLS 198/683
TXT Apparatus under subclass 678 wherein the articulated drive means transmits
    the weight of the load from the hanger means to the track or guide support
    means and said drive means is provided with support engaging means which
    guide said drive means as it moves along said support means.


CLS 198/684
TXT Apparatus under subclass 678 wherein motion is transmitted to the hanger
    means through a sprocket means or other drive means which, in turn, engages
    and drives the articulated drive means, and including particular means
    whereby motion is transmitted from said sprocket or other drive means to
    said articulated means.


CLS 198/685
TXT Apparatus under subclass 678.1 having means interconnecting or causing
    engagement between the articulated drive means and the hanger means whereby
    motion can be transmitted from said drive to said hanger.


CLS 198/686
TXT Apparatus under subclass 685 wherein said articulated drive means is a
    strand or cable means and is connected to the hanger means below the point
    of engagement between the hanger and the support means to transit motion
    from the drive means to the hanger means.


CLS 198/687
TXT Apparatus under subclass 685 wherein said articulated drive means is a
    chain or pivotally interconnected members and is connected to the hanger
    means below the point of engagement between the hanger and the support
    means to transmit motion from the drive means to the hanger means.


CLS 198/687.1
TXT Separable conveyor portion:
    Subject matter under subclass 678.1 wherein the load is supported upon a
    reusable carrier which engages a load at a point below the location of
    engagement of the load carrier by its drive means from which it is
    disengageable.

    (1)     Note.  The drive means may drive the load carrier by either
    frictional or positive drive means.


CLS 198/688.1
TXT Having means to enhance the friction or adherence between the conveyor and
    load at random locations on conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 618 comprising a conveying means which is provided
    with means designed to enhance the frictional engagement between the load
    and the conveying means beyond that which result from the mere weight of
    the load.


CLS 198/689.1
TXT Suction:

    Apparatus under subclass 688.1 having means to reduce below ambient the air
    pressure between the load and the power-driven conveying surface means and
    thereby enhance the frictional engagement between the load and the
    conveying means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    471.1,  for conveyor systems using suction to enhance the frictional
    contact between the load and the conveyor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering and 414, Material or Article Handling,
    appropriate subclass for suction conveyors used to stack or unstack
    articles.


CLS 198/690.1
TXT Magnetic:

    Apparatus under subclass 688.1 having lines of magnetic flux which cause
    the load to adhere to the power-driven conveyor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    472.1,  for conveyors systems using magnetic forces to enhance frictional
    contact between the load and the conveyor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering and 414, Material or Article Handling,
    appropriate subclass for magnetic conveyors used to stack or unstack
    articles.


CLS 198/690.2
TXT Transversely extending elongated ridge means formed on or attached by
    nonmechanical means to the conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 688.1 having an elongated laterally extending
    projection formed on or attached, without using mechanical fastener means,
    to the conveyor for the purpose of increasing the frictional relationship
    between the conveyor and the load.


CLS 198/691
TXT Apparatus under subclass 688.1 wherein the natural slippage between the
    load and the conveyor means is reduced because of the effect of electrical
    polarization of the load and the conveying means.


CLS 198/692
TXT Apparatus under subclass 688.1 wherein the means which causes the conveyed
    load to adhere to the conveying means is a sharp spike-like member carried
    by the conveying means on which the load may be stuck or which pierces into
    the load to convey the load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    620+,   for means wherein a load is conveyed between separately moving
    surfaces, which surfaces may be provided with means to impale the load.

    638+,   for conveying means which throw a load into a free flight
    trajectory and which means may impale the load prior to throwing it.

    717+,   for conveyors comprising a load-supporting surface and a pusher
    where-in the pushing member may impale the load being pushed thereby.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles: Fiber Preparation, subclasses 67+, for such devices to
    carry fibrous material to a textile machine.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 31, for confection holders, per se, and
    subclass 502, for impaling-type work holders for use in a coating operation.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 213+, for article dispensers not
    elsewhere provided for using   impaling means to engage and carry articles
    from a source of supply to a point of discharge.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclass 81 for a fluid current conveyor
    fed by an endless belt conveyor having load impalers.


CLS 198/693
TXT Apparatus under subclass 692 employing means other than gravity to remove
    or to assist in the removal of the load from the impaling means.


CLS 198/697
TXT Apparatus under subclass 688.1 comprising an endless belt, the outer face
    of which contacts the load, and a separately formed means hinged to the
    belt and protruding therefrom in at least one position thereof for the
    purpose of exerting a positive propelling force on the load (e.g., a belt
    having mounted thereon a slat or lug swingable between a load-propelling
    position extending outwardly from the belt face and a retracted position
    lying flat against the belt face).


CLS 198/698
TXT Apparatus under subclass 688.1 comprising an endless belt, the outer face
    of which contacts the load, and a separately formed means secured to and
    protruding from the belt for the purpose of exerting a positive-propelling
    force on the load, said means extending substantially across the belt face
    and a separate screw, pin, rivet, tongue and groove connection, or other
    mechanical fastening means securing it to said face.


CLS 198/699
TXT Apparatus under subclass 698 wherein the belt is formed of a flexible,
    continuous strip of monofilament, composition or laminated sheet material.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a longitudinally slitted tubular slat that
    is attached to a conveyor belt by means of (1) a looped portion of said
    belt which extends through the slit in said slat, and (2) a rod or tube
    that is positioned within said belt loop to press it firmly against the
    inner surface of said slat.


CLS 198/699.1
TXT By a plurality of laterally spaced, projecting members to the conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 688.1 having a plurality of elements which
    projects sidewise from one another across the conveyor surface and are
    formed on or attached without using mechanical fastener means (i.e., glue,
    etc.) to the conveyor for the purpose of increasing the frictional
    relationship between the conveyor and the load.


CLS 198/700
TXT Apparatus under subclass 618 comprising an endless carrier means in the
    form of a freely suspended loop whereby a carrier-supported load may be
    raised or lowered.

    (1)     Note.  The loop may or may not be weighted.


CLS 198/701
TXT Apparatus under subclass 618 wherein the load-engaging and conveying part
    comprises structure in the form of a bucket which either (1) completely
    enclosed and moves the load as a unit or in noncommunicating segments, or
    (2) is substantially cup or trough shaped, or is a variation thereof, and
    has means to vertically support the load with cooperating sidewall surface
    means surrounding the load to hold the load against movement in any lateral
    direction while being conveyed; said part either forms a part of, or is
    connected to, endless means whereby said load conveying part is moved over
    an endless path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    509,    for bucket conveyors having means specialized to gather a load from
    a pile of material (e.g., by means whereby the conveyor support may be
    moved relative to a pile of material so that the bucket may dig into and
    remove material from the pile, etc.).

    715,    for conveyors having flexible pocket means in which a load may be
    placed for conveyance, but which pocket means does not have wall means
    completely surrounding the load.

    793+,   for conveyors having surface means to provide vertical support for
    a unit load.  These surfaces may be provided with guard means or other
    means movable therewith to prevent lateral movement of the load from said
    surface, but will not have wall means completely surrounding said surface
    as in subclasses 701+.

    819,    for trough-shaped endless conveyors which can be made to completely
    enclose the load, and, in so doing, form a continuous tubular conveyor
    having no means to compartmentalize the load along the longitudinal axis of
    the conveyor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclass 81 for a fluid current conveyor
    fed by an endless conveyor having buckets.


CLS 198/702
TXT Apparatus under subclass 701 wherein it is particularly intended that the
    bucket means convey a load in the liquid state.


CLS 198/703
TXT Apparatus under subclass 701 having particular means whereby the bucket may
    be loaded or unloaded more readily, including:  means adapted to coact with
    the load in the bucket to assist in the loading or unloading operation;
    means to give the bucket a particular direction, motion, or path; by
    particularly designing or constructing the bucket for that purpose; or
    means controlling the flow of fluid to or from the bucket.

    (1)     Note.  Patents having a mere end sheave over which the bucket
    passes to thereby invert the same so the load is caused to drop from the
    bucket are not included herein.  However, patents providing sheave means in
    addition to the end sheave means to cause the bucket to travel a particular
    path which will facilitate a more complete or particularly directed load
    discharging or loading operation will be found in this and indented
    subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    526+,   for a conveyor system having a gravity conveyor section and
    including a moving (e.g, traveling) flow control means which is coordinated
    with a power-driven section (often of the bucket type) for the purpose of
    interrupting the flow of material when no one of the conveying elements of
    the latter section is in a proper position to receive the flow.

    702,    for bucket conveyors for conveying liquid and having means whereby
    the liquid may be removed therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 334+ for a moving,
    wheeled, load-transporting type vehicle (e.g., a bucket having
    track-engaging wheels for supporting it, and attached to an endless element
    for traction purposes) and a portable loading or unloading device therefor,
    the device being supported at least in part independently of the vehicle
    and traveling with the vehicle during the transfer of a load between the
    two; see especially subclass 336 thereunder for a suspendedly supported
    device, which is frequently the situation when the vehicle being loaded or
    unloaded is a car of an aerial tramway.


CLS 198/704
TXT Apparatus under subclass 703 wherein a portion of the surface of the bucket
    means which supports or restrains the load may be displaced so that the
    load may be removed from the bucket.


CLS 198/705
TXT Apparatus under subclass 703 having means which will engage and cause the
    load to move relative to the bucket to remove the load from the bucket.


CLS 198/706
TXT Apparatus under subclass 703 wherein the bucket means is mounted for
    pivotal movement relative to the endless means, and means is provided
    whereby the bucket means may be pivoted to facilitate loading or
    discharging a load therefrom.


CLS 198/707
TXT Apparatus under subclass 701 wherein a plurality of bucket means are
    pivotally interconnected, one to the other, in endless fashion, so that
    power employed to move one or more of the interconnected bucket means will
    cause movement in all the other buckets interconnected therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    710,    for noninterconnected bucket means which are adapted to abut and
    push one another around an endless track.


CLS 198/708
TXT Apparatus under subclass 701 having a plurality of bucket means and a
    means, either incorporated with or separate from the bucket means, moving
    with the bucket means and providing a covering for the space between the
    bucket means, as they are spaced for movement, so that material or load
    will not tend to be lost from the conveyor should it be released to the
    conveyor in the area between the buckets.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    526+,   for a conveyor system having a gravity conveyor section and
    including a moving (e.g., traveling) flow control means which is
    coordinated with a power-driven section (often of the bucket type) and
    which means may be in the nature of a "gap closer".

    707,    for a plurality of buckets which are pivotally interconnected to
    form a chain and which may include means covering the space between buckets
    to prevent the fall of material between the buckets.


CLS 198/709
TXT Apparatus under subclass 701 having means to vary the tension on the
    endless means.


CLS 198/710
TXT Apparatus under subclass 701 having slide and guide or wheel and track
    means to support the bucket means while it is being driven by the endless
    drive means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    706,    for a slide and guide or wheel and track which is involved in the
    pivoting of a bucket to facilitate the loading of the bucket or the
    discharging of a load therefrom.

    854+,   for other slide and guide or wheel and track means to support other
    types of movable load-carrying means driven by an endless means.


CLS 198/711
TXT Apparatus under subclass 701 wherein the endless means is monofilament,
    composition or woven, band or strand, and particular means is provided
    whereby the bucket means may be connected to the band or strand and thereby
    driven to convey the load.


CLS 198/712
TXT Apparatus under subclass 701 wherein the endless means is a chain or an
    elongated articulated means formed by pivotally interconnected members, and
    wherein particular means is provided whereby the bucket means may be
    connected to the chain means.


CLS 198/713
TXT Apparatus under subclass 701 wherein the structure or construction of the
    conveying part of bucket means is particularly defined.


CLS 198/714
TXT Apparatus under subclass 713 wherein the conveying part comprises a
    plurality of interconnected, joined, attached, or separate parts.


CLS 198/715
TXT Apparatus under subclass 618 having a flexible load-support means which,
    when a load is placed thereon, forms a cradle or sling which supports and
    restrains the load against movement in one or more, but not all, lateral
    directions.


CLS 198/716
TXT Apparatus under subclass 618 comprising a vertically extending conduit
    means which, at least through said extension, completely surrounds a
    conveying means comprising an elongated power transmission means and flight
    means attached thereto and driven thereby, whereby a flowable solid
    material may be elevated.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are those patents wherein the
    conduit is formed by relatively movable members and including conduits
    formed in part by the elongated power transmission means.


CLS 198/717
TXT Apparatus under subclass 618 wherein the conveyor section includes surface
    means which is the sole support for a load or loads against gravity and
    which does not move to convey the load, said conveyors also including
    load-propelling means which moves substantially parallel to said surface
    means and exerts only a force against the load or a portion thereof to move
    said load said surface means.

    (1)     Note.  Patents solely disclosing pusher-type conveyors, but
    claiming only flight structure, flight and transmission connection means,
    flight or flight transmission guide means, or any subcombination of a
    pusher-type conveyor, not classified elsewhere, which is directly in
    contact with the load, or deals with load movement, will be found in this
    or indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  See the Notes to subclass 570 for the distinction between
    plural and single pusher conveyors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    597,    for conveying systems having a plurality of conveying sections and
    a pusher-type shifter associated with one of the sections.

    644,    for conveyors for moving structures, some of which are the
    pusher-type.

    657+,   for screw conveyors wherein a helix pushes a load over a
    load-supporting surface.

    660,    for screw conveyors wherein the helix may be shifted axially.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 93 and
    236.01, for scraping machines and scraping implements.

    56,     Harvesters, the subclasses including "endless" in their titles, for
    pushers in that art.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 360, and indented
    subclasses, for can pusher conveyors is sealed can processors.

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 242.1+ for a work feed mechanism on a
    woodworking machine.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 154+, for flume
    stream-type strainers which may include like devices for cleaning the
    strainers.

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, subclass 5, for like
    structures utilized in a pump or turbine.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclasses 7+, for like
    structure reacting with an unconfined or undirected medium fluid.

    452,    Butchering, subclasses 177+ for pushers to push hooks along a track
     in the butchering art.


CLS 198/718
TXT Apparatus under subclass 717 having means, separate from the load pushing
    and support means, which senses or is responsive to the occurrence of a
    condition or a change in a condition and thus acts to cause a change in the
    operation of any means whereby the load is caused to move or to not move,
    or acts to relocate the load-conveying means or its support means.


CLS 198/719
TXT Apparatus under subclass 717 having means or particular construction
    designed to prevent damage of the conveyor because of (1) a worn,
    misaligned, bent, or otherwise   abnormal part or parts of the conveyor, or
    because (2) the load being conveyed has become unmanageable by the conveyor.


CLS 198/720
TXT Apparatus under subclass 717 having means whereby the load which has been
    caused to move between given points by flight means of a given conveyor may
    be further moved by said flight means so that it will again be moved
    between the same said points by said flight means or other flight means of
    said conveyor.


CLS 198/721
TXT Apparatus under subclass 717 wherein the load-supporting surface is
    specially designed or is provided with means whereby the coefficient of
    friction of said surface is indicated as being low.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    629,    for plural conveying sections which cooperate to simultaneously
    move a given load, one of said sections being a pusher.


CLS 198/722
TXT Apparatus under subclass 717 wherein the said member extends from and turns
    about an axis of rotation in a continuous circular path.


CLS 198/723
TXT Apparatus under subclass 722 wherein the member moves the load in a
    circular path on at least a portion of the load-supported surface.


CLS 198/724
TXT Apparatus under subclass 723 wherein the load is moved along the axis of
    rotation of said member as well as in said circular path.


CLS 198/725
TXT Apparatus under subclass 717 wherein said member is a flexible closed-loop
    force-transmitting assemblage that is driven in an endless path, a portion
    of said path being parallel to said load-supporting surface along which the
    member moves a portion of said load.

    (1)     Note.  The assemblage included herein is, for example, a chain, or
    a belt, or a rope, or a cable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclass 81 for a fluid current conveyor
    fed by an endless conveyor having load pushers.


CLS 198/726
TXT Apparatus under subclass 725 provided with at least two said assemblages,
    each moving in its own path, but a portion of each path being concurrently
    parallel to said load-supporting surface, whereby, when said paths are
    parallel to said surface, the members carried by said assemblages cooperate
    together to move a portion of said load.


CLS 198/727
TXT Apparatus under subclass 725 wherein the load-supporting surface is a
    trough having a particular cross-sectional shape and the periphery of the
    load-engaging surface of the load-engaging means conforms in shape to the
    cross-sectional shape of the trough.


CLS 198/728
TXT Apparatus under subclass 725 wherein a load-engaging means is attached to,
    or is carried by, or is part of said closed-loop assemblage.


CLS 198/729
TXT Apparatus under subclass 728 provided with means that are shaped to fit a
    dimension or shape of any part or all of the pusher member, which means is
    adapted to move or maintain said pusher in its intended path of movement.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is, for example, an idler wheel, or a
    sprocket wheel, or a rail, or a track way, having a particular shape to
    accommodate the pusher, for the purpose of holding the assemblage in its
    intended path.


CLS 198/730
TXT Apparatus under subclass 728 wherein the closed-loop assemblage comprises a
    plurality of connected segments, each segment including:  a) a portion
    thereof that serves as a means for engaging and moving a load, and b) a
    portion thereof that serves to hold the means in load-moving position, and
    c) a portion thereof that serves to connect each segment with its preceding
    and its   succeeding segment, and each segment being formed as a single
    unit.

    (1)     Note.  Each segment may be formed by shaping a single blank, or by
    permanently assembling a number of pieces into a single unitary assemblage
    (as by welding, bolting, rewetting, etc.), provided that each segment can
    be connected to its preceding and its succeeding segment without the use of
    additional interconnecting elements.


CLS 198/731
TXT Apparatus under subclass 728 provided with means for facilitating the
    attachment of said load-engaging means to said closed-loop assemblage in
    the detachment of said load-engaging means from said assemblage; provided
    with means for facilitating the repositioning said member relative to said
    assemblage.

    (1)     Note.  The integral element found in the patents of subclass 730 is
    inherently capable of being readily attached and detached from other such
    segments.  Search for the connection of this subclass (731) should include
    a search through subclass 730, where applicable.


CLS 198/732
TXT Apparatus under subclass 728 wherein the attachment of said load-engaging
    means of said assemblage is by way of means permitting arcuate oscillation
    of the load-engaging means relative to the assemblage.


CLS 198/733
TXT Apparatus under subclass 728 wherein there is only one closed-loop
    assemblage which is driven in an endless path, and wherein said
    load-engaging means is rigidly attached to the said assemblage.


CLS 198/734
TXT Apparatus under subclass 725 wherein the shape of the load-engaging surface
    of the means is significant.


CLS 198/735.1
TXT Load support, casing, shield, or auxiliary attachment:
    Subject matter under subclass 725, wherein the significance is attributed
    to the load support design, partial or total load enclosing casing design,
    shield attached to the load support or casing or an auxiliary attachments
    on the load support or casing of an endless pusher system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    860.1+, for similar concepts in combination with other conveyor systems.


CLS 198/735.2
TXT Modules connectable end to end with no relative movement:
    Subject matter under subclass 735.1, wherein the load support or casing is
    formed of plural detachable sections which are attached together in a
    manner to prevent motion relative to each other after assembly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    860.2,  for similar modules and their connection.


CLS 198/735.3
TXT Door, casing, cover, or load supporting surface:
    Subject matter under subclass 735.1, wherein significance is attributed to
    a movable or removable closure, enclosing casing, overlying cover or load
    support design.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    860.3,  for similar concepts in other conveyors.


CLS 198/735.4
TXT Casing or load supporting floor with door:
    Subject matter under subclass 735.3 wherein the enclosing casing or the
    load supporting floor has movable or removable closure to permit access to
    at least one run of the endless pusher.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    860.4,  for access doors in other conveyors.


CLS 198/735.5
TXT Removable cover overlying the conveyor:
    Subject matter under subclass 735.3 wherein a housing portion which
    overlies the conveyor and load is capable of being moved therefrom to
    provide access to said housing portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    860.5,  for removable overlying covers on other conveyors.


CLS 198/735.6
TXT Modules connected end to end permitting relative angular positioning (e.g.,
    due to uneven ground):Subject matter under subclass 735.1 wherein the load
    support or casing is formed of plural detachable sections which are capable
    of turning movement relative to other sections during conveyor operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    861.1+, for the same concept in other conveyors.


CLS 198/736
TXT Apparatus under subclass 717 wherein the member is moved alternately to and
    fro and wherein said member engages said load to exert a force on and move
    the load on one of its movements and returns without moving the load to a
    load-engaging position on the other of its movements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclass 76 for a fluid current conveyor
    combined with reciprocating pusher-type conveyor.


CLS 198/737
TXT Apparatus under subclass 736 provided with at least two members arranged
    transversely of each other and extending along the path of travel of the
    load, each member moves alternately in a load-moving direction and in a
    nonload-moving direction, and wherein (1) the load-moving direction is the
    same for all members, and (2) the entire load-moving motion of two of the
    members does not extend during the same time interval.


CLS 198/738
TXT Apparatus under subclass 736 wherein the force-exerting member is held by a
    movable carriage, which carriage moves the member alternately to and fro.


CLS 198/739
TXT Apparatus under subclass 738 wherein the movable carriage swings to and fro
    about a pivot.


CLS 198/740
TXT Apparatus under subclass 738 wherein the movable carriage moves in a
    continuous closed-loop path.


CLS 198/741
TXT Apparatus under subclass 738 wherein there are two or more force exerting
    members held by the movable carriage.


CLS 198/742
TXT Apparatus under subclass 741 wherein the members are pivotable about an
    axis of the carriage.


CLS 198/743
TXT Apparatus under subclass 742 wherein the members are held by the movable
    carriage for arcuate oscillation, each member oscillating about its own
    axis and each axis extending laterally of the path of load travel.


CLS 198/744
TXT Apparatus under subclass 743 wherein the axis of oscillation of the members
    are below the load-support surface.


CLS 198/745
TXT Apparatus under subclass 742 wherein the axes of oscillation of the members
    are at right angles to the load-support surface.


CLS 198/746
TXT Apparatus under subclass 738 wherein the force exerting member is mounted
    on the movable carriage for arcuate oscillation.


CLS 198/747
TXT Apparatus under subclass 736 wherein the member is moved along a straight
    line from a starting point during its load-engaging movement and is moved
    along the same straight line, but in the opposite direction, when returned
    to its starting point.


CLS 198/748
TXT Apparatus under subclass 747 wherein the member is moved by a closed-loop
    device.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of a device for this subclass include (a) endless
    chain, or (b) endless cable, or (c) endless rope.


CLS 198/749
TXT Apparatus under subclass 736 wherein the shape of the member is
    significantly claimed.


CLS 198/750.1
TXT Reciprocating conveying surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 618 wherein a member which is directly
    supporting the load of material is moving to and fro.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    752.1+, for a reciprocating conveyor where the conveyed material moves out
    of contact with the reciprocating surface during one of the directions of
    reciprocating movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    406,    Conveyors: Fluid Current, subclasses 73+ for a fluid current
    conveyor combined with a reciprocating conveyor.


CLS 198/750.2
TXT Surface formed by plural parallel elongated sections reciprocating
    horizontally:

    Subject matter under subclass 750.1 wherein the reciprocating conveying
    surface is comprised of two or more stretched out material holding members
    extending in the conveying direction and moving to and fro as a group
    during the material advance and moving to and fro sequentially during
    holding retraction in order to keep the material stationary.


CLS 198/750.3
TXT Seals:

    Subject matter under subclass 750.2 comprising a gap closing means in or
    over the joints between the holding members or between the holding members
    and an adjacent member of the conveying system to prevent undesired entry
    of debris or fluid into the gap.


CLS 198/750.4
TXT With specified bearing:

    Subject matter under subclass 750.2 wherein a significance is attributed to
    a material, pattern, or shape of a member supporting the plural elongated
    sections of the load conveying surface.


CLS 198/750.5
TXT Piston drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 750.2 wherein the horizontal movement of the
    plural parallel elongated sections is provided by a linearly expandable
    device moving back and forth under fluid pressure.


CLS 198/750.6
TXT Detachable drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 750.5 wherein the piston drive is releasibly
    engaged between a support framework and the elongated load supporting
    members so that the load supporting members as a unit are separable from a
    power transferring mechanism.


CLS 198/750.7
TXT Piston drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 750.1 wherein the reciprocating movement of a
    single conveyor member is provided by a linearly expandable device moving
    back and forth under fluid pressure.


CLS 198/750.8
TXT Eccentric cam or rotating crank drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 750.1 wherein the reciprocating movement of
    the conveying surface of the conveyor is provided by a revolving or
    oscillating mechanical device having its axis of rotation displaced from
    its center or by a revolving link having an axis of rotation at one end and
    a pivotal connection to the load conveyor member adjacent to its opposite
    end.


CLS 198/751
TXT Apparatus under subclass 750.1 wherein the conveyor is provided with a
    detector that generates a signal upon the occurrence of a predetermined
    condition of the load or the conveyor, which signal causes actuation of a
    means to regulate the conveyor or movement of the load.


CLS 198/752.1
TXT Vibratory conveying member:

    Subject matter under subclass 750.1 wherein the load carrying surface moves
    alternately to and fro with a high frequency and a low amplitude so that
    the material moves out of contact of the carrying surface during a portion
    of the to and fro movement.

    (1)     Note.  In use, the load is carried on the conveying member during
    its forward or a portion of its forward movement, and the load continues
    its forward movement by reason of its inertia and out of contact with the
    conveying element while the conveyor element reverses its direction to
    return to its original position for a repeat of the conveyor element
    movement.


CLS 198/753
TXT Apparatus under subclass 752.1 wherein the conveyor member is provided with
    means to change its load-conveying movement to a direction opposite to its
    former load-conveying movement, which means is operable at the will of an
    operator.


CLS 198/754
TXT Apparatus under subclass 752.1 wherein the conveyor member includes a
    bendable or pliant strip or band to increase or decrease the load-conveying
    path of the conveyor member.

    (1)     Note.  In use, one end of the flexible belt is fastened to an
    adjacent end of the vibrating conveyor and the other end of the flexible
    belt is wound into a reel.  Thus, by increasing or decreasing the distance
    between the conveyor and the reel, the effective length of the conveyor may
    be varied.


CLS 198/755
TXT Apparatus under subclass 752.1 provided with means in addition to the
    conveyor member, which means prevents backward movement of the load during
    the backing movement of the conveyor member.


CLS 198/756
TXT Apparatus under subclass 752.1 wherein the conveyor member includes a
    surface that extends around an axis, as well as along said axis.


CLS 198/757
TXT Apparatus under subclass 756 wherein the conveyor member surface is secured
    to the inside wall of a container, said wall being radially spaced from
    said axis and extending generally parallel to said axis.

    (1)     Note.  The container generally has a bowl shape and is vibrated
    with an oscillatory motion about the axis so as to effect conveying of the
    load along the helical path formed by the conveyor member surface.


CLS 198/758
TXT Device under subclass 752.1 wherein the conveyor is composed of a plurality
    of channel-shaped conveying parts which are rapidly reciprocated to effect
    load movement, which parts are provided with means allowing the members to
    be readily joined or separated.


CLS 198/759
TXT Apparatus under subclass 752.1 wherein the conveyor member is a
    load-supporting surface provided with sustaining means to allow controlled
    vibratory movement of said surface, or provided with means to cause such
    movement.


CLS 198/760
TXT Apparatus under subclass 759 wherein the conveyor member is provided with a
    counter mass or energy-absorbing means to balance or retard destructive or
    excessive conveyor member motions.

    (1)     Note.  Example of a device of this subclass include (a) another
    conveyor, or (b) a dash pot, or (c) a shock absorber, or (d) a coil spring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    330,    for a damper applied to a vibratory drive means.


CLS 198/761
TXT Apparatus under subclass 759 wherein the conveyor member is provided with
    means to regulate the rate of movement of the load.


CLS 198/762
TXT Apparatus under subclass 761 wherein the rate of movement of the load is
    regulated by varying the frequency of the to-and-fro movements as caused by
    the drive means.


CLS 198/763
TXT Apparatus under subclass 759 wherein the conveyor member is a
    load-supporting surface provided with sustaining means to allow controlled
    vibratory movement of said surface.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein, for example, is (a) a coiled spring, or (b)
    a leaf spring, or (c) rubber or synthetic rubber blocks, or (d) a spring
    formed of glass fiber, steel or elastomer.


CLS 198/764
TXT Apparatus under subclass 763 wherein said sustaining means includes a
    plurality of spaced-apart connecting rods, each rod being hingedly
    connected at its one end to said load support and being hingedly connected
    at its other end to a foundation or base.


CLS 198/765
TXT Apparatus under subclass 763 wherein said sustaining means is at least one
    rotatable antifriction element located between and touching both of said
    conveying member and a foundation or base.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein, for example, is (a) a roller, or (b) a
    ball, or (c) a cylinder, or (d) a wheel, or (e) an endless belt, any of
    which allows the conveyor member may roll to and fro.


CLS 198/766
TXT Apparatus under subclass 763 wherein said load-supporting surface is
    further provided with a vibrating means to cause said controlled vibratory
    movement.


CLS 198/767
TXT Apparatus under subclass 766 wherein a balance of energy-absorbing means is
    operatively connected to the vibratory means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    760,    for a damper applied to the conveyor surface or its support.


CLS 198/768
TXT Apparatus under subclass 766 wherein said vibrating means is powered by a
    gaseous or liquid medium under pressure.


CLS 198/769
TXT Apparatus under subclass 766 wherein said vibrating means is powered by
    mechanism to generate lines of magnetic flux.


CLS 198/770
TXT Apparatus under subclass 766 wherein the vibrating means includes a
    rotating mass having a center of rotation and a center of gravity that is
    not on the center of rotation, said mass being connected to the
    load-supporting surface.


CLS 198/771
TXT Apparatus under subclass 752.1 wherein the shape of the load-supporting
    surface of the conveyor member is significantly claimed.


CLS 198/772
TXT Apparatus under subclass 750.1 provided with means in addition to, and
    separate from, the conveyor member, which means prevents backward movement
    of the load during the backward movement of the conveyor member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    755,    for a retrograde movement preventer associated with a vibrator
    conveyor.


CLS 198/773
TXT Apparatus under subclass 750.1 wherein the conveyor includes at least two
    groups of load-carrying bars, each group comprising plural bars connected
    and acting together, a bar of one group being adjacent to one or more bars
    of another group, at least one group being movable and another group being
    either movable or stationary, and the groups coacting in cyclic alternation
    to lift at least a portion of the load from either group and to advance
    said load by either of the groups in a wave-like manner.


CLS 198/774.1
TXT Longitudinally extending interdigitated sets (lifting by oscillating arms,
    etc.):Subject matter under subclass 773  wherein said load carrying bars
    reach in the direction of said load and are positioned between or on
    opposite sides of the bars of another group.


CLS 198/774.2
TXT Load support members lifted by inclined supporting fluid actuators:Subject
    matter under subclass 774.1 wherein vertical movement of the load support
    members is effected by fluid actuating means which directly support the
    members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    774.1,  for fluid actuators which actuate oscillating arms.

    774.4,  for fluid actuators which move the members along inclined support
    surfaces.


CLS 198/774.3
TXT Load support members lifted by supporting, eccentric cam or rotating crank
    drive:Subject matter under subclass 774.1 wherein the vertical movement of
    the load-support members is by a rotating or oscillating eccentric member
    having its axis of revolution displaced from its center or by a rotating
    (not oscillating) member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    774.1,  for an eccentric cam or a rotating crank operating an oscillating
    arm which supports the member.


CLS 198/774.4
TXT Load support members lifted by inclined supporting surface:
    Subject matter under subclass 774.1 wherein vertical movement of the
    load-support member is by a supporting surface which is sloped, slanted or
    pitched with respect to a horizontal surface on the member.


CLS 198/775
TXT Apparatus under subclass 774.1 wherein each group of load-carrying bars has
    an active motion.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass one group is movable to lift the load from
    supporting relationship with another group, and another group is movable to
    advance the load relative to the one group.


CLS 198/776
TXT Apparatus under subclass 775 wherein each group of load-carrying bars moves
    in an orbited endless path, but in opposite phase, one group to the other,
    whereby alternate groups alternately carry and alternately support the load.


CLS 198/777
TXT Apparatus under subclass 773 wherein the conveyor includes at least two
    groups of load-carrying components, each group comprising plural components
    connected and acting together, each component oscillatable about an axis
    that is perpendicular to the direction of load advance, and a component of
    one group being adjacent to a component of another group; and wherein the
    groups coact to transfer at least a portion of the load from one group to
    an adjacent component of another group, and from said adjacent component of
    said other group to a component of said one group.


CLS 198/778
TXT Apparatus under subclass 618 having a load-supporting surface which
    traverses a spiraling path over which the load will be conveyed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    657,    for screw conveyors in which a rotatable helical surface moves the
    conveyed load.

    724,    for rotating pusher means which may move the conveyed load over a
    spiral path.

    813+,   for an endless conveyor belt having means to maintain or to adjust
    the tension on said belt.


CLS 198/779
TXT Apparatus under subclass 618 wherein the conveying element comprises a
    series of load-contacting rolls attached to an endless driven member.  The
    rolls may be rotated themselves, by power or other means, or braked to
    prevent rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    780,    for rolls mounted to be rotated about their own axis to thereby
    convey a load supported thereby.

    804+,   for endless conveyors which may be made of rotatable elements which
    are moved about an endless path.


CLS 198/780
TXT Apparatus under subclass 618 wherein the conveyor comprises one or more
    parts or roller means which will rotate about an axis when influenced to do
    so by a source of power, and thereby cause movement of a load directly
    supported by and in contact with said rotated part.

    (1)     Note.  Conveyors in this and indented subclasses may include an
    idler roller which may aid the power-driven roller in supporting the load
    conveyed. However, see subclasses 523+ for power-driven rollers and
    nonpower-driven rollers which act independently wherein one is active as a
    conveyor for the load, while the other is disengaged from the load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    624,    for conveyor means wherein the load is moved by being gripped
    between a plurality of driven rollers.

    779,    for rolls moved about an endless path and having means to axially
    rotate a roll or rolls as they move about the endless path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles: Fiber Preparation, subclass 24, and indented subclasses,
    for a series of rollers to crush fibers.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 199+, for sets of rolls used for metal
    deforming.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses having reference in their title to work or
    product moving, and particularly subclasses 156, 235, 259+, 268+, and 436.3.

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, subclasses 35+, for
    gravity-actuated rollers.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses,
    for methods of and apparatus for feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.

    384,    Bearings, for bearings of general use.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclass 70 for a fluid current conveyor
    combined with a line roller conveyor.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the notes thereunder.


CLS 198/781.01
TXT Live roll drive engages, disengages, or slips responsive to load position
    or blockage:

    Subject matter under subclass 780 having a means to bring a cylindrical
    motion transmitting device and the load conveying device in contact with
    each other or out of contact with each other or to permit abnormal movement
    to take place between the cylindrical motion transmitting device and the
    load conveying device in response to (a) a sensor detecting the presence or
    absence of the load at a predetermined position on the conveyor or (b) a
    device responsive to excessive load on the conveyor.


CLS 198/781.02
TXT Friction drive slips or disengages:

    Subject matter under subclass 781.01 wherein the cylindrical motion
    transmitting device releases a motion transmitting force to the load
    conveying rollers via a coupling (e.g., friction clutch) breaking the
    motion transmitting force relative to one another in response to the
    overload caused by a desired load stoppage or weight.


CLS 198/781.03
TXT Belt drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 781.02 wherein the frictional motion
    transmitting device includes a continuous flexible band.


CLS 198/781.04
TXT Friction wheel drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 781.02 wherein the frictional motion
    transmitting device includes a mechanical device consisting of a circular
    member having a smooth surface of contact.


CLS 198/781.05
TXT Live roll is driven by load sensor (e.g., trigger roller):

    Subject matter under subclass 781.01 wherein the roll drive means is
    controlled by a device which detects the load.


CLS 198/781.06
TXT Sensor and drive interconnected by fluid or electric means:

    Subject matter under subclass 781.05 wherein a circuit between the load
    detecting means and a means to connect or disconnect a motion transmitting
    device to the roll drive means is powered by liquid, air, gas, or
    electricity.


CLS 198/781.07
TXT Positive gear drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 781.05 wherein the roll drive motion is
    transmitted by a meshing toothed wheel without slippage.


CLS 198/781.08
TXT Friction wheel drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 781.05 wherein the motion is transmitted by a
    mechanical device consisting of a circular member having a smooth surface
    in direct contact with the roller.


CLS 198/781.09
TXT Flat belt drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 781.05 wherein the motion is transmitted by a
    continuous band of flexible material having substantially a rectangular
    cross section.


CLS 198/781.1
TXT O-Ring drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 781.05 wherein the motion is transmitted by a
    continuous band of flexible material having a round cross section.


CLS 198/781.11
TXT Chain drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 781.05 wherein the motion is transmitted by a
    continuous band constructed of metal or plastic links.


CLS 198/782
TXT Apparatus under subclass 780 wherein a load-supporting roller may be
    shifted in any direction (vertically, laterally, longitudinally) with
    respect to the load which it conveys.


CLS 198/783
TXT Apparatus under subclass 780 in which the power means or power transmission
    means which rotates the roller means is timed, programmed, or is otherwise
    provided with means whereby said roller means is caused to rotate
    intermittently or periodically to move the load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    854+,   for drive means for conveyors in general, which means are
    intermittent, indexed, condition responsive controlled, etc.


CLS 198/784
TXT Apparatus under subclass 780 having means (1) whereby the rotatable speed
    of a single roller or of a plurality of rollers may be varied, or (2)
    whereby one roller rotates at a different speed from another roller, or
    otherwise changes load speed as it moves from one roll to another, and
    wherein said rollers cooperate to simultaneously support the load being
    conveyed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    570+,   for plural roller conveyors which do not support the load
    simultaneously and wherein each conveyor may be independently driven or
    driven at different speeds.


CLS 198/785
TXT Apparatus under subclass 780 wherein the load being conveyed on the roller
    means is persuaded to travel along a predetermined longitudinal path on the
    conveyor because of either the shape of the roller means or the angular
    relationship of one roller means with another.


CLS 198/786
TXT Apparatus under subclass 780 wherein the roller means is shaped or arranged
    to move the load in a direction having at least a component thereof in the
    direction which is axially of the roller means.


CLS 198/787
TXT Apparatus under subclass 780 wherein the rolls are constructed or arranged
    to curve the path of movement given the load conveyed.


CLS 198/788
TXT Apparatus under subclass 780 having specific motor means by means of which
    the roller means may be rotated.


CLS 198/789
TXT Apparatus under subclass 780 having specific means whereby power is
    transmitted to the roller means so that when activated the rollers will be
    caused to rotate.


CLS 198/790
TXT Apparatus under subclass 789 wherein said transmission means is an endless
    belt or chain which engages the roller means or sprocket means attached to
    said roller means.


CLS 198/791
TXT Apparatus under subclass 789 wherein the transmission means comprises gears
    which engage the roller means.


CLS 198/792
TXT Apparatus under subclass 618 having a load-conveying means which is driven
    continuously over a closed path, and having means whereby the velocity of
    said means, or of a portion of said means, may be caused to change each
    time it moves through a particular portion, or particular portions, of said
    path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334,    for a conveyor or accessory, which is specialized to convey people,
    having a zone of varying speed.

    854+,   for conveyors having drive means which, when controlled, may stop
    or start the conveyor on change the speed thereof, but having no
    significant conveyor structure.


CLS 198/793
TXT Apparatus under subclass 618 comprising a conveyor having load-supporting
    surface means moved about an endless or rotating path and comprising a unit
    load-supporting tray or platform or other surface means which may support a
    load thereon and power transmission means, said load-supporting surface
    means being supported by either said flexible means, a track means or other
    stationary or movable means.

    (1)     Note.  A tray or other load-supporting surface is considered to be
    the load if in its course of travel it is caused to be disengaged from its
    propelling means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    597+,   for unit load-conveying means moved by endless means arranged in
    tandem along the path of the conveyor.

    678+,   for conveyor means from which a load may be suspended wherein said
    means is supported by a track or guide and is moved by an articulated
    transmission means.

    701+,   for bucket conveyors having a surface to vertically support a load
    and vertical wall means completely surrounding said surface to prevent
    lateral movement of said load in all directions.

    803.16, for conveyors comprising rotating disc members which may be
    compartmentalized to receive a unit load.

    804+,   for conveyor means having load-supporting tray means, a plurality
    of which cooperate to support a single load or a load comprising a "stream"
    of granular or the like material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 248 and 251 for apparatus
    particularly adapted for charging or discharging a facility for the parking
    or wheeled vehicles, and wherein there is at least one vehicle transporting
    device of the kind which comprises an endless carrier having vehicle
    supporting members attached thereto, which carrier may orbit in a vertical
    plane.


CLS 198/794
TXT Apparatus under subclass 793 having means other than cyclic means by which
    the means driving or moving the supporting surface may be controlled.


CLS 198/795
TXT Apparatus under subclass 803.01 wherein the load-supporting surface means
    comprises a plurality of distinct load-supporting surfaces, each being
    moved, over at least a portion of the endless path, as the result of being
    pushed by the next following supporting surface.


CLS 198/797
TXT Apparatus under subclass 793 having means to maintain the plane of the
    conveying surface means horizontal for load-carrying purposes during at
    least that portion of its endless path where it is both deviating form
    straight-line travel and going through a change in altitude.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 227+, for movable storage
    carriers for wheeled vehicles, and see section IV-8 in the main class
    definition to this class for other conveyors used in a dispensing
    environment.


CLS 198/798
TXT Apparatus under subclass 797 wherein the load-supporting means is provided
    with means which is brought into engagement with a movable or stationary
    guide or stabilizing means located at the point where the load-supporting
    means is caused to deviate from straight-line motion to constantly maintain
    the plane of the load- supporting surface means in a constant relationship
    to the horizontal while in engagement with said guide or stabilizing means.


CLS 198/799
TXT Apparatus under subclass 797 wherein said load-supporting surface means is
    propelled and supported solely by a plurality of endless, flexible, motion
    transmission means of equal length, each said flexible means being trained
    around associated sheave or sprocket means having nonaligned axes of
    rotation, so that said load-supporting surface means may be negotiated
    around said associated sprockets and so that the load-supporting surface
    may be maintained at a constant angular relationship to the horizontal
    plane.


CLS 198/800
TXT Apparatus under subclass 797 wherein the load-support means is provided
    with means which is in constant engagement with a nonload-supporting,
    nonpower-transmitting endless flexible means, or with a fixed guide, or
    track, or rack means to constantly maintain the plane of the
    load-supporting surface in a constant relationship to the horizontal
    throughout its course of travel.


CLS 198/801
TXT Apparatus under subclass 793 in which the load-supporting surface means is
    secured adjacent one end only to said endless power transmission means,
    extends laterally therefrom and is unsupported at its opposite end as the
    load placed on said surface is raised or lowered by movement of said
    surface.


CLS 198/802
TXT Apparatus under subclass 793 wherein the load-supporting surface means is
    provided with means whereby it may move or be moved relative to the path
    about which is traverses.


CLS 198/803.01
TXT Holder is removable or replaceable relative to drive:

    Apparatus under subclass 793 wherein the load-supporting surface is a
    conveyor portion which is separable from the conveyor drive means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    465.1   and 465.2, for separable load holders.


CLS 198/803.1
TXT Gripping portions self-open as they pass through a curved path:

    Apparatus under subclass 803.3 wherein the load-supporting component
    comprises at least two relatively movable portions which move apart as the
    conveyor travels an outwardly convex path so the load can be inserted or
    removed.


CLS 198/803.11
TXT Nongripping holder is adjustable for different sized loads:

    Apparatus under subclass 793 wherein the load-supporting component is
    attached to the rotating or endless drives and do not grip the load and are
    adaptable or replaceable to accommodate different sized loads.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    473.1,  for conveyor systems with adjustable or replaceable holders for
    different sized loads.


CLS 198/803.12
TXT Holder for hollow load contacts interiorly:

    Apparatus under subclass 793 wherein the load-supporting means holds an
    article having a cavity within itself and the load-supporting means engages
    the surface of the cavity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    487.1,  for laterally projecting pins which engage the interior of a hollow
    load in a conveyor system.


CLS 198/803.13
TXT Holder formed of nongripping elements which self-open as they pass through
    a curved path:

    Apparatus under subclass 793 wherein the load-supporting component
    comprises at least two relatively movable portions which move apart as the
    conveyor travels an outwardly convex path so the load can be inserted or
    removed therefrom without being gripped by said relatively movable portions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    484.1,  for a conveyor system having nongripping self-opening holders.


CLS 198/803.14
TXT Holder means forms recess to receive or seat load:

    Apparatus under subclass 793 wherein the load-supporting means includes a
    portion thereof which at least partly surrounds an area or contiguous areas
    of a load to an extent which prevents unintended movement other than such
    movement imparted by the load-supporting means.


CLS 198/803.15
TXT Holder means forms an aperture for receiving load:

    Apparatus under subclass 793 wherein the load-supporting means comprised a
    plate or support having holes therein which could have a smaller
    circumferential dimension than that of the load to be conveyed, into which
    the load is insert, but does not fall through the holes because of the
    difference between said dimensions.


CLS 198/803.16
TXT Rotary conveyor without specific locations for supporting randomly placed
    articles or bulk material:

    Apparatus under subclass 618 wherein the conveying means is a rotary member
    which is designed to randomly support articles or bulk material at any
    location about its periphery.


CLS 198/803.2
TXT Holder supported and driven by horizontally spaced drive:

    Apparatus under subclass 803.01 wherein the separable load support is
    driven by drives parallel to the vertical which engage the conveyor
    portions adjacent its opposite ends.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    465.3,  for separable holders driven by horizontally spaced drives.


CLS 198/803.3
TXT Holder grips load:

    Apparatus under subclass 793 wherein the load-supporting components are
    mounted on a rotating or endless drive means which positively hold or
    attract the load by friction or by use of a force field, or by a fluid
    current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    470.1+, for conveyor systems using load grippers.


CLS 198/803.4
TXT Relatively adjustable grippers space portion of load:

    Apparatus under subclass 803.3 wherein the load-supporting components
    comprise a plurality of load holding means which are movable relative to
    one another to space at least one portion of the load from another portion
    thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    468.3,  for separable grippers on a reciprocating or oscillating conveyor.


CLS 198/803.5
TXT Suction gripper:

    Apparatus under subclass 803.3 wherein the load-supporting component
    element means comprises a gaseous medium under subatmospheric pressure to
    hold the load during conveyance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    471.1,  for endless or rotary conveyors in a system using suction grippers.


CLS 198/803.6
TXT Magnetic or electrostatic gripper:

    Apparatus under subclass 803.3 wherein the load-supporting component uses
    lines of magnetic flux or an electrical force field to hold the load during
    conveyance.


CLS 198/803.7
TXT Gripper portion biased to load engaging portion:

    Apparatus under subclass 803.3 wherein the load-supporting component
    comprised at least two relatively movable portions, one of which is
    continually urged to the load contacting position by a separate resilient
    means.

    (1)     Note.  The resilient means could be a fluid.


CLS 198/803.8
TXT Gripper portion made of resilient material which is self biased into
    engaging position:

    Apparatus under subclass 803.3 wherein the load-supporting component is
    made of resilient material which is compressed or deformed by the reception
    of the load and is self-urged into engagement with the load.


CLS 198/803.9
TXT Cam means moves at least one portion of the gripper to a load engaging
    position:

    Apparatus under subclass 803.3 wherein the load-supporting component
    comprised at least two relatively movable portions, one of which is moved
    to the load contacting position by a means having a surface carrying fixed
    points at varying distance from the center thereof.


CLS 198/804
TXT Apparatus under subclass 618 in which the load-supporting and moving, or
    carrier, means of the conveyor is a belt movable continuously along the
    path defined by its longitudinal axis, at least part of said path being
    that over which a load is to be moved, and the belt having an endless
    surface or including longitudinally spaced elements which cooperate to
    form, in effect, an endless surface for supporting the load.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is an endless belt formed fo a continuous
    material, or formed of a series of bars, plates, or other transversely
    disposed member which either abut one another or are spaced apart
    longitudinally of the belt and cooperate to support a conveyed load
    spanning a gap or gaps therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404     and 405, for an endless conveyor included in load-inverting
    conveying apparatus.

    544,    547, 550.9, and 550.13, for gravity conveyor systems which involve
    a driven conveyor of the apron type.

    606     and 607, for plural endless conveyors forming a conveying system.

    610,    for an endless conveyor combined in a conveying system with a
    different type of power-driven conveyor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    14,     Bridges, subclass 70, for an endless conveyor used as a gangway.

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 2.17, for an endless belt moving work to a
    cutter.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 658+, for
    belts for conveying webs or strands being treated by a gas or vapor.

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclasses 8+, for a conveyor belt
    for moving an article in smoothing apparatus.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 78.09 and 96+, for a
    belt used in an exhibiting device.

    53,     Package Making, subclass 282, for an endless conveyor moving
    preformed receptacles.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 380, for a continuous belt conveyor in
    refrigeration apparatus.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 197, for an endless conveyor carrying
    a glass sheet.

    68,     Textiles: Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 39+, 44+, and 204,
    for endless belt carriers in textile treating apparatus.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclass 41, for an endless belt used to
    support work in leather machines.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 155+, for an endless belt or chain for
    conveying product in a cutting machine.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclass 42 for an endless belt
    carrying an electrical precipitator electrode.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 118 and 151+, for an endless conveyor in a
    press.

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 40, for endless grates.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 239, 322, and 324, for a belt
    conveyor in a coating apparatus.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 48, 67, 70+,
    and 124+, for a belt conveyor in a cleaning and liquid contact apparatus.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 245.2+ for an endless conveyor in a
    woodworking machine.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 130, for an endless
    belt in a machine for removing or separating earth from an object.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclass 42, for an endless
    conveyor fire escape apparatus.

    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, or Animal Powered, subclass 16, for
    animal-powered motors employing belts.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 202+, for an
    endless conveyor in an electrolytic apparatus.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 218, 272,
    307, 428+, 470, 620, 622+, 661, 663, 665, 685, and 705, for belts for
    assorters and ore separators.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 400+ and 526, for
    endless belts in liquid purifiers or separators.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 121+, for article-supporting elements
    mounted on an endless carrier.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 84, 119, 218, and 253, for an
    endless belt in an article dispenser.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 371 and 415, for an endless belt in a fluent
    material dispenser.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 170+, for an
    endless belt conveyor for a strand or the like.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclasses 44+, for an endless
    conveyor in apparatus within the class.

    245,    Wire Fabrics and Structure, appropriate subclasses, for wire fabric
    for use in endless belts.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclasses 12, 16, 34, 45+, 66-69,
    75+, and 150, for endless conveyor in a sheet handling apparatus.

    305,    Wheel Substitutes for Land Vehicles, subclasses 157+, for
    nonmetallic endless tracks for land vehicles, and subclasses 185+, for
    flexible land vehicle tracks formed of interconnected treads.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 91, 97, 134, and 268, for
    an endless carrier in a cabinet.

    406,    Conveyor:  Fluid Current, subclasses 77+ for endless conveyors
    combined with fluid current conveyors.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclass 263 for an endless
    carrier for work in a broaching machine.

    413,    Sheet Metal Container Making, subclasses 56+, for an endless chain
    for carrying can bodies.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    appropriate subclasses, for an endless belt used to shape plastic material.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 331+ for an endless conveyor for feeding work
    to an abrading device.

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, subclass 86, for threshing machine
    belts.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 202+ for a positive drive belt; and subclasses 237+ for a
    friction drive belt.


CLS 198/805
TXT Apparatus under subclass 804 in which the belt is maintained on a selected
    path, sustained, or caused to move by a magnetic force impressed thereon.


CLS 198/806
TXT Apparatus under subclass 804 in which deviation of the belt from the
    centered position on its travel path is corrected by an automatically
    occurring change in the angular orientation, relative to said path, of
    revolvable means engaged with a face of said belt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    810.1+, for means which senses a deviation of a carrier belt from its
    travel path and acts to correct such deviation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    26,     Textiles: Cloth Finishing, subclasses 66 and 67, for cloth
    stretched by rollers which change position to regulate movement of said
    cloth thereon.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 21+, for a
    roller which automatically skews to correct training deviations of a web
    supported thereon.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components,
    particularly subclasses 102+ for a control for correcting belt training
    deviation in a transmission belt.


CLS 198/807
TXT Apparatus under subclass 806 including a motor, pressure actuated ram, or
    other power means for changing the angular orientation of said revolvable
    means.


CLS 198/808
TXT Apparatus under subclass 804 wherein said revolvable means maintains the
    belt, along at least its load conveying reach, in upwardly concave form in
    the direction perpendicular to travel direction of said belt.


CLS 198/809
TXT Apparatus under subclass 804 wherein an independent load support is
    positioned on each side of a belt, the belt, or a position thereof, being
    movable upwardly or downwardly relative to the supports (e.g., to
    selectively bring the belt into driving engagement with the load, or to
    vary the driving force exerted by the belt on the load).


CLS 198/810.01
TXT Condition responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 804 having means, separate from the belt,
    which detects an occurrence of a condition and in response thereto acts to
    start, stop, or correct the movement of the belt in response to (a) the
    presence or absence of the load or (b) belt damage or (c) misalignment of
    the belt or its support means or (d) tension in the belt or in a strand
    supporting the belt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    502.1+, for indicators for measuring dimensions of the article on a
    conveyor or indicating the current position of the article along the
    conveyor or the abnormal speed of the conveyor.


CLS 198/810.02
TXT Belt damage sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 810.01 wherein the detecting means detects a
    break or wear in the continuous band beyond the pre-established limit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    810.04, for a belt sensor.


CLS 198/810.03
TXT Belt tracking sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 810.01 wherein the detecting means is adapted
    to monitor an alignment of the continuous flexible band and actuate an
    alarm, alignment correction device or stop the continuous band when the
    continuous band is out of alignment beyond the pre-established limit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    806+,   for a belt tracking device.


CLS 198/810.04
TXT Belt tension sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 810.01 wherein the detecting means is adapted
    for measuring a force in the continuous band which tends to stretch the
    continuous band or to measure the amount of slack in the continuous band
    and having a device which either indicates via an alarm the force in excess
    of the pre-established limit in the continuous band or control a stretching
    means to correct the stretch in the continuous band.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    813+,   for a tensioning device.


CLS 198/811
TXT Apparatus under subclass 804 wherein positive or negative fluid pressure,
    relative to atmospheric pressure, is exerted against the belt to either
    increase or decrease the force exerted by said belt against its support
    means.


CLS 198/812
TXT Apparatus under subclass 804 wherein the length of the conveying reach of
    the belt can be varied.

    (1)     Note.  Included here inter alia are: (1) a conveyor having
    structure that facilitates addition or removal of its segments to change
    conveying length, and (2) a conveyor combined with separate means for
    holding extra segments until they are required to change conveying length
    (e.g., a reel mounted on a conveyor frame and holding belt segments).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    313,    for a contractible conveyor mounted on a vehicle.

    364,    for conveying systems having sections employing load discharging or
    feeding means which are movable along the length of the section to effect
    communication between the section and a selected source or destination.

    370.01+, for means for loading or unloading a conveyor section at selected
    locations along the length thereof.


CLS 198/813
TXT Apparatus under subclass 804 including means for stressing (1) the carrier
    belt, (2) a drive belt for the carrier belt, (3) a support belt for the
    carrier belt, or (4) a strand which extends along one side of the carrier
    belt and which supports, in cooperation with another strand on the opposite
    side of said carrier belt, a roller or roller assembly supporting said
    carrier belt.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses 250+, for means for
    tensioning an endless belt used in a machine for attenuating textile fiber.

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 32, for combined fastening
    and tightening means for a belt.

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclasses 54+, for devices for
    applying tension to cloth.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 118, for a
    tightener for a belt associated with a material treating drum.

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 224, for a drive belt tensioner, and subclass
    292, for tensioner for endless cutter.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclass 105, for means
    for automatically tensioning driving bands.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 814+, for means for tensioning an endless
    cutting band or chain.

    101,    Printing, Digest 21, for means for tensioning webs.

    104,    Railways, subclass 117, for tension regulators for railway cables.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 105+, for belt tighteners for
    wheel or axle drives.

    114,    Ships, subclasses 213+, for devices for relieving tension in a
    cable.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 351 and 357, for rear axles of motor
    vehicles which are movable to adjust a drive chain.

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclass 264 for an elevator car shifted by a rope drive and separate
    biasing means for maintaining tension in a rope drive.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 11, for belt tighteners
    which act as clutches combined with brakes.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 119.09, for clothesline loop tighteners.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 419+ and 147+ for means
    to apply or regulate stress in a running material.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 199+ for portable implements or apparatus for tensioning
    flexible material or for extracting stumps or poles.

    305,    Wheel Substitutes for Land Vehicles, subclasses 120+, 125, 145+,
    152, and 153+, for tensioner for vehicle track.

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 252+ for adjustable support for a bearings.

    451,    Abrading, subclass 311 for means for maintaining in traveling
    abrading bands.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 101+ for a tension adjuster for a power transmission belt.


CLS 198/814
TXT Apparatus under subclass 813 wherein a spring exerts force on the belt or
    strand to maintain tension therein.


CLS 198/815
TXT Apparatus under subclass 813 wherein a weight is arranged to exert force on
    the belt or strand to maintain tension therein.


CLS 198/816
TXT Apparatus under subclass 813 including a threaded means that is turnable to
    vary tension in the belt or strand.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a screw moved axially by turning a nut on
    the screw, thereby moving a belt support connected to the screw.


CLS 198/817
TXT Apparatus under subclass 804 including plural belt reaches arranged in
    side-by-side relation to jointly support a load.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein inter alia are separate belts which are
    disposed in side-by-side relation and which are (1) inclined relative to a
    vertical plane situated between their edges so that the belts together form
    a trough, or (2) supported at different elevations along their conveying
    reaches so that one edge of a plate-like load rests on the upper surface of
    the lower belt and the opposite edge of said load rests against a side
    surface of the upper belt.


CLS 198/818
TXT Apparatus under subclass 804 wherein the load-supporting reach of the belt
    has a concave cross-sectional shape so that the side portions of said
    carrier belt rise above its central section.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein inter alia is a carrier belt which sags
    between supports connected to its edges, or is connected to and shaped by
    transverse frames spaced apart longitudinally thereof, or is flexed into a
    trough when a separate element mounted thereon engages a cam surface
    extending along its travel path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    806,    for a trough-shaped carrier belt supported on a roller or roller
    assembly which automatically skews to correct training deviations of said
    belt.


CLS 198/819
TXT Apparatus under subclass 818 in which the belt edges are juxtaposed, in the
    conveying reach of the belt, to thereby completely or substantially enclose
    the load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    701+,   for elongated tubular-type conveyors having means to
    compartmentalize the tubular load-conveying portion into noncommunicating
    compartments.

    821,    for a belt which has raised edges formed thereon, or is otherwise
    preshaped to sustain a trough configuration in cross section.


CLS 198/820
TXT Apparatus under subclass 818 in which the belt in intrinsically shaped in
    the form of a trough.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a carrier belt formed of wires or rods.


CLS 198/821
TXT Apparatus under subclass 820 wherein the belt consists of, or includes as
    part of its structure, a loop of sheet-like material.


CLS 198/822
TXT Apparatus under subclass 820 in which the belt is formed of or includes a
    plurality of plates extending crosswise of said belt and successively
    disposed lengthwise thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    850+,   for similar belt structure in which the carrier belt is not
    trough-shaped in cross section.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclass 91, for chains formed
    of sheet metal links.


CLS 198/823
TXT Apparatus under subclass 818 in which the belt is supported in nonplanar
    cross-sectional form by independent means engaging a face of said belt.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein inter alia is a carrier belt flexed into a
    trough by a stationary support on which it slides, or by one or more
    revolving belts on which it is supported.


CLS 198/824
TXT Apparatus under subclass 823 in which the belt support means comprises at
    least one roller.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein inter alia is a carrier belt shaped into a
    trough by a flexible roller sagging between ends supports, or by coaxial
    rollers having different diameters, or by rollers tilted relative to one
    another and connected so that they rotate together.

    (2)     Note.  If a roller is claimed for shaping a carrier belt into a
    trough, the invention is classified herein or in indented subclasses.  If a
    roller is claimed generally, the invention is classified in Class 384,
    Bearings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    501,    for lubricating means for rollers that form a belt into a trough.


CLS 198/825
TXT Apparatus under subclass 824 wherein the belt support means comprises a
    plurality of rollers which are independently rotatable, generally disposed
    in end to end relation crosswise of the carrier belt, and tilted relative
    to one another.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein inter alia is a carrier belt supported on
    rollers strung on a flexible strand or rod which sags between a pair of
    supports.


CLS 198/826
TXT Apparatus under subclass 825 wherein at least one roller is movable by
    choice to thereby vary the angle of orientation between a plurality of
    rollers.


CLS 198/827
TXT Apparatus under subclass 825 in which supports for the rollers are hinged
    together in end to end relation to form a concatenation hanging between
    supports located at opposite sides of the belt.


CLS 198/828
TXT Apparatus under subclass 825 including at least one strand extending along
    each of the opposite edges of the belt, and a frame connected to at least
    one of the strands and supporting at least one of the rollers.


CLS 198/829
TXT Apparatus under subclass 825 wherein at least one of the rollers is
    supported at only one of its ends.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    826,    for a belt-troughing roller assembly including a roller that is
    supported from one end only.


CLS 198/830
TXT Apparatus under subclass 825 including at least three upwardly projecting
    roller supports fixed in traversely spaced relation on a rigid member
    extending crosswise of the belt.


CLS 198/831
TXT Apparatus under subclass 804 wherein the belt makes a lateral bend, with
    the lower belt reach traveling directly under the upper belt reach at said
    bend.


CLS 198/832
TXT Apparatus under subclass 804 including claimed means for moving the carrier
    belt around its orbital path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    805,    for a carrier belt driven by magnetic means.

    810.1+, for a carrier belt, the movement of which is controlled by
    condition responsive means.

    818+,   for drive means associated with trough-shaped carrier belt.

    854+,   for drive means for conveyors in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 32, for an electric
    motor drive for an endless belt used as a display device.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses
    8+ for drive belts.


CLS 198/832.1
TXT Indexed or intermittent drive:
    Subject matter under subclass 832 wherein the drive means causes the
    conveyor to stop and start at definite intervals.


CLS 198/832.2
TXT Brake means to slow, stop or hold carrier belt:
    Subject matter under subclass 832 wherein means are provided to lower the
    speed, halt or retard the belt in its movement.


CLS 198/832.3
TXT Brake means directly engages carrier belt:
    Subject matter under subclass 832.2 wherein the brake means physically
    contacts the carrier belt.


CLS 198/833
TXT Apparatus under subclass 832 including a drive belt movable along the path
    defined by its longitudinal axis, said drive belt being free from said
    carrier belt, but moving the same through (1) abutment between parts of the
    belts, or (2) clamp means mounted on one of the belts which can be quickly
    engaged with and released from the other belt.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 401, for belt
    superimposed on a moving support.


CLS 198/834
TXT Apparatus under subclass 832 including a drive wheel having radially
    projecting teeth that engage counterparts on the carrier belt or on a belt
    attached to the latter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    849,    for similar devices where sprocket is not included in claim.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 152+ for a positive drive pulley.


CLS 198/835
TXT Apparatus under subclass 832 including a member rotatable about an axis by
    drive means and engaged with the carrier belt to impart motion thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 166+ for a friction drive pulley.


CLS 198/836.1
TXT Having load retainer or guide separate from carrier belt:
    Subject matter under subclass 804 wherein the load is restrained, directed
    or contained on the carrier belt by laterally positioned longitudinally
    extending surfaces or by surfaces positioned in opposition to the carrying
    surface of the carrier belt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    626.1+, for coacting endless belts.


CLS 198/836.2
TXT Load retainer biases load transversely against carrier belt:Subject matter
    under subclass 836.1 wherein a containing surface is urged toward the
    carrying surface of the carrier belt to retain the load.


CLS 198/836.3
TXT Laterally adjustable or yieldable guides contact load:
    Subject matter under subclass 836.1 wherein guides are mounted for sidewise
    movement or urged sidewise relative to the carrier belt to accommodate
    width of the load.


CLS 198/836.4
TXT Replaceable modular guides for changing the conveying path
    cross-section:Subject matter under subclass 836.1 wherein the guide means
    are interchangeable, differently dimensioned elements which are selectively
    used to change any of the cross-sectional dimensions of the conveying path.


CLS 198/837
TXT Apparatus under subclass 804 including specific means for sustaining the
    belt, holding it on a selected path, or pressing it against an object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    810.1+, for means which senses a shifting of a carrier belt from its
    centered position on a support and acts to correct such deviation.

    813,    for a carrier belt supported on a roller or roller assembly which
    automatically skews to correct training deviations of said belt.

    823,    for a carrier belt flexed into a trough by a stationary support
    over which it slides.

    845,    for a carrier belt supported or guided by rotatable means attached
    to the belt.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclass 249, for an auxiliary
    support for an endless belt used for attenuating textile fiber, and
    subclasses 252+, for means for guiding an endless belt used for attenuating
    textile fiber.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 640+, for
    means for guiding or floating a running web or strand by means of a fluid
    current, and subclasses 647+, for means for guiding such running material
    in a zigzag path.

    84,     Music, subclass 161, for guides for sheet music.

    451,    Abrading, subclass 297 for belt tracking means in an abrading
    machine.


    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, appropriate
    subclasses for a guide or tensioning drive for an endless power
    transmission belt.


CLS 198/838
TXT Apparatus under subclass 837 wherein rollers on the belt rest on a rail or
    other support extending longitudinally of said belt.


CLS 198/839
TXT Apparatus under subclass 837 in which a rotatable member is oriented to
    turn the belt in screw-like motion about its longitudinal axis, or to turn
    the belt from one horizontal path to another horizontal path extending in a
    different direction.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a means which lifts one edge of a belt
    upward to discharge a load from the belt.


CLS 198/840
TXT Apparatus under subclass 837 including a roller, wall, or other means which
    exerts a force sidewise against the belt to keep the latter from shifting
    horizontally in a direction transverse to the longitudinal center line of
    the belt.


CLS 198/841
TXT Apparatus under subclass 837 wherein the belt slips on an underlying
    support (e.g., a smooth plate).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    836,    for a belt support in the form of a slide plate having side walls
    that retain the conveyed load on the belt.


CLS 198/842
TXT Apparatus under subclass 837 including a rotatable body abutting the lower
    face of the belt on the conveying belt reach, or engaging either the upper
    face or the lower face of the belt on the nonconveying belt reach.

    (1)     Note.  If a roller is claimed for supporting carrier belt, the
    invention is classified herein or in the indented subclass.  If a roller is
    claimed generally, the invention is classified in Class 384, Bearings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    806,    for a roller or roller assembly which automatically skews to
    correct training deviations of a carrier belt.

    824+,   for a roller or roller assembly engaged with the lower face of a
    carrier belt to flex said belt into a trough.

    835,    for a roller which drives a carrier belt.

    836,    for a roller which retains a load on a carrier belt.


CLS 198/843
TXT Apparatus under subclass 842 wherein the rotatable means yieldably supports
    the belt (e.g., a roller formed of rubber or resiliently mounted, etc.).


CLS 198/844.1
TXT Carrier belt structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 804 wherein significance is attributed to the
    particular construction of the conveyor belt.


CLS 198/844.2
TXT Connection means joins ends of sheet-like belt:
    Subject matter under subclass 844.1 wherein two ends of a flexible belt
    segment or two adjacent ends of two flexible segments are joined by some
    means to form an endless flexible belt.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 31+,for means for
    connecting end of a belt.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses
    218 and 253+, for means for connecting opposite ends to form a loop.


CLS 198/845
TXT Apparatus under subclass 844.1 in which a turnable means, such as a roller,
    wheel, drum, or ball, is engageable with means for supporting the belt or
    maintaining it on a predetermined path.


CLS 198/846
TXT Apparatus under subclass 844.1 wherein the belt consists of, or includes as
    part of its structure, a loop of sheet-like material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    692+,   for conveyor belt means having load-impaling means projecting from
    its surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, for a single layer stock
    material in the form of a web or sheet, especially subclasses 116+, for
    such material having varying thickness.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 237+ for a friction drive belt.


CLS 198/847
TXT Apparatus under subclass 846 including (1) strengthening elements embedded
    in the material forming the belt, or (2) a belt formed of plural plies of
    material joined together.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    305,    Wheel Substitutes for Land Vehicles, subclasses 167+ and 183, for
    metal reinforced nonmetallic endless flexible tracks for land vehicles.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 55+, for a
    laminate with filamentary elements (e.g., strands) in one layer disposed at
    an angle to such elements in a second layer, and subclass 60, for a
    laminate having a parallel relationship between filamentary elements of
    adjacent layers.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 237+ for a friction drive belt.


CLS 198/848
TXT Apparatus under subclass 844.1 in which the belt is formed of or includes
    (1) a wire lattice, or (2) rods having center portions thereof extending
    transversely of said belt in spaced, parallel relation, the ends of each of
    said rods extending longitudinally of said belt and turning around an
    adjacent rod to form a pivotal connection therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    820,    for a trough-shaped carrier belt including wires or rods.

    851+,   for a conveyor belt formed of separate tandemly disposed strips
    having a zigzag shape transversely of the belt and joined together by rods
    passing through holes in interdigitated crown portions thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclass 83, for chains formed
    of wire links.

    245,    Wire Fabrics and Structure, subclasses 2+, for wire fabrics, per se.

    256,    Fences, subclass 45, for wire fabric used in fences.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 202+ for a positive drive belt; and subclasses 237+ for a
    friction drive belt.


CLS 198/849
TXT Apparatus under subclass 848 including a link-formed belt that is secured
    to the load-carrying belt.


CLS 198/850
TXT Apparatus under subclass 844.1 in which the belt is formed of or includes
    rigid link members pivotally connected one to another in tandem relation
    lengthwise of the belt.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein inter alia is a carrier belt formed of links
    joined by hooks, ball and socket-type connections, or lacing rings or coils
    extending through apertures in said links.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    820+,   for a trough-shaped carrier belt including links.

    832+,   for a device which drives a carrier belt including links.

    845+,   for a carrier belt including links and rollers.

    846+,   for a carrier belt including links and a looped strip of flexible
    material.

    849,    for a carrier belt including links and wire or rod elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclasses 82 and 84+, for
    chains formed of links.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 202+ for a positive drive belt; and subclasses 237+ for a
    friction drive belt.


CLS 198/851
TXT Apparatus under subclass 850 in which the link members are connected by
    separately formed pins.


CLS 198/852
TXT Apparatus under subclass 851 in which the link members pivot about mutually
    perpendicular axes, so that the carrier belt can curve in both horizontal
    and vertical planes.


CLS 198/853
TXT Apparatus under subclass 851 including identical link members, each formed
    at one end with transversely spaced knuckles, or bifurcated to provide at
    one end transversely spaced arms, with the opposite end of each link member
    extending between the knuckles or arms of the longitudinally adjacent link
    member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    503+,   for conveyors which are controlled in response to a unit load count.


CLS 198/860.1
TXT CONVEYOR FRAME OR CASING:

    Apparatus under the class definition directed to means for supporting or
    encasing the load carrying means of a conveyor, or to the surface, per se,
    upon which the load rests as it is conveyed.


CLS 198/860.2
TXT Modules connectable end-to-end with no relative movement:

    Apparatus under subclass 860.1 wherein the conveyor support or casing
    comprises components or modules which interconnected in end-to-end
    relationship along the longitudinal axis of the conveyor without relative
    movement between the modules or components.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    735,    for endless scraper troughs which are interconnected modules.

    861.2   for modules interconnected for relative movement.


CLS 198/860.3
TXT Casing, cover, shield or load supporting surface:

    Apparatus under subclass 860.1 wherein significance is attributed to the
    structure which either encases, partially or completely, the load as it is
    being conveyed, or is the supporting surface for the load as it is being
    conveyed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    657+,   701+, 716+, 836, for particular casings, covers, shields or load
    supporting surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 31 for a housing
    combined with a conveyor.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material and 405,
    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, appropriate subclass for mine roof
    supports.


CLS 198/860.4
TXT Casing with door:

    Apparatus under subclass 860.3 wherein the casing is provided with a portal
    or opening to permit access to the conveyor inside the casing for repairs,
    corrections of article or material feed, cleaning, etc., of the conveyor.


CLS 198/860.5
TXT Removable cover overlying the conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 860.3 wherein the conveying run of the conveyor
    has an adjustable or removable covering overlying said conveying run to
    permit crossing by man or machine, prevent contamination, dust control, or
    to permit access to conveyor.


CLS 198/861.1
TXT Adjustable conveyor frame or casing:

    Apparatus under subclass 860.1 wherein the conveyor support structure has
    parts which may be moved relatively.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312+,   for a conveyor shiftable mounted on a vehicle.

    463.2,  463.3 and 631, for adjustably mounted conveyor which moves for
    extra conveying function.

    535+,   for a gravity conveyor system having an adjustably mounted conveyor.

    586+,   for plural power-driven conveying sections at least one of which is
    adjustably mounted.


CLS 198/861.2
TXT Conveyor frame or casing flexes or pivots intermediate its ends to move one
    end relative to the other:

    Apparatus under subclass 861.1 wherein the conveyor support is designed to
    permit flexing or movement about a fixed axis between the ends of the
    conveyor to cause the load to travel a linear or nonlinear conveying path.


CLS 198/861.3
TXT Single horizontal pivot axis only:

    Apparatus under subclass 861.2 wherein the conveyor support has movement
    about a single horizontal axis only to enable the path of the conveyor to
    change.


CLS 198/861.4
TXT Entire conveyor pivots about horizontal and vertical axes:

    Apparatus under subclass 861.1 wherein the entire conveyor is movable about
    horizontal and vertical axes to permit the conveyor to be positioned in any
    inclination to the three orthogenal axes.


CLS 198/861.5
TXT Entire conveyor pivots about horizontal axis:

    Apparatus under subclass 861.1 wherein the entire conveyor is moved only
    about a horizontal axis only to limit the pivoting of the conveyor to a
    vertical plane.


CLS 198/861.6
TXT Entire conveyor pivots about vertical axis:

    Apparatus under subclass 861.1 wherein the entire conveyor is moved about a
    vertical axis only to limit the pivoting to a horizontal plane.


CLS 198/866
TXT Apparatus under the class definition not herein before provided for.


CLS 198/890
TXT Plural laterally spaced locations fed to or received from a conveyor having
    laterally movable article supports or pushers:

    Subject matter under subclass 348 wherein a load carrier consisting of two
    or more load holding members or force exerting means moving along a
    delivering or transferring path receives loads from two or more sources
    physically separated from the load carrier and positioned sideways relative
    to the load carrier and delivers or transfers the loads to two or more
    destinations physically separated from the load carrier and positioned
    sideways relative to the load carrier.

    (1)     Note.  Each load holding member or force exerting means is capable
    of partaking of a motion independent from the other holding members or
    force exerting means to effect a delivery of the load at a selected
    destination.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370.02  through 370.06, for a conveyor having movable transfer elements for
    discharging at selected locations along the conveyor length.


CLS 198/890.1
TXT Laterally moving article supports:

    Subject matter under subclass 890 wherein the load holding members move
    transverse of the conveyor path.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 198/950
TXT Art collection of conveyors and structure whereby they may convey a load
    through an opening in a wall.


CLS 198/951
TXT Art collection of conveyors having specific means for turning cigarettes
    end for end.


CLS 198/952
TXT Art collection of conveyors having heating or cooling means.


CLS 198/953
TXT Art collection of conveyors having means to convey and untangle springs.


CLS 198/954
TXT Art collection of conveyors having means to handle an overflow load.


CLS 198/955
TXT Art collection of conveyors having fluid actuated, expansible chamber means
    to move or shift some portions of the conveyor or conveyor system.


CLS 198/956
TXT Art collection of conveyors having flat surface positional adjacent the end
    of the conveyor or conveyor system which is forceably contacted by the load
    and which acts to redirect the load.


CLS 198/957
TXT Art collection of conveyors, wherein significance is attributed to the
    specific material used to make the conveyor or some part thereof.


CLS 198/958
TXT LOAD UNITS COUNTER:
    Subject matter having means to count separate articles or batch loads on a
    conveying means.


CLS 198/959
TXT WEIGHING:
    Subject matter having means to determine the weight of a load carried upon
    a conveying means.


CLS 199/
TTL TYPE CASTING

CLS 199/
TXT Means for forming from material while in a fluid state the elements, either
    separately or in the form of a bar or line, that are adapted to be set up
    to constitute a printing-form.

    Note.  Does not include the casting of stereotype-plates nor forging or
    molding type from plastic material by pressure.  By "fluid" is meant a
    condition wherein the cohering particles of the mass seek a level under
    gravity, implying adaptability to be poured.


CLS 199/1
TXT Subject matter under the class definition having means for casting in
    single operations printing elements in the form of integral lines or bars
    bearing words or several characters, as distinguished from means for
    casting each character separately.


CLS 199/2
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 drawn to machines having selectable
    matrices in which each matrix is confined to its individual guide or
    conveyer during the entire operation.


CLS 199/3
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2, wherein the matrices traveling along wires
    or the like.


CLS 199/4
TXT Subject matter under subclass 3, having means limited in function to
    handling the matrices, there being no improvement in the casting part of
    the machine.


CLS 199/5
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2, having a series of members, each carrying
    a complete set of matrix characters, having a movement of rotation to
    assemble in line before the mold the desired characters of the different
    sets.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 73, and indented subclass.


CLS 199/6
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2, having a series of long-bars, each
    carrying a complete set of matrix characters, having a sliding movement to
    assemble in line before the mold the desired characters of the different
    sets.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 75.


CLS 199/7
TXT Subject matter under subclass 6, having means limited in function to
    handling the matrices, there being no improvement in the casting part of
    the machine.


CLS 199/8
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1, drawn to machines in which bars of
    variable length carrying a plurality of different matrix characters are
    released from their individual compartments and assembled together before
    the mold, each bar being stopped at a point to bring the desired characters
    into line, the same mechanism which releases the bar operating to determine
    its stopping-point and the bars after casting being returned to their
    respective compartments.

    (1)     Note.  These are known as "circulating machines".  (See definition
    of this class, subclass 11).


CLS 199/9
TXT Subject matter under subclass 8 comprising means for both assembling and
    distributing the matrices and also casting the line.


CLS 199/10
TXT Subject matter under subclass 8 comprising means for both assembling and
    distributing the matrices, but including no casting mechanism.


CLS 199/11
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the matrices are released from
    their individual channels, brought into line-casting position before the
    mold, and thereafter restored to their respective channels.

    (1)     Note.  Machines of this subclass are known as "circulating
    machines".  A circulating machine comprises three zones, each having a
    different function, as follows:

    (1)     Assembling, including means for releasing the matrices from the
    storage-magazines and delivering them in a composed line to a holder which
    is designed to present them to the mold.

    (2)     Casting, including means for presenting the composed matrices to
    the mold and withdrawing them therefrom and such casting mechanism as is
    peculiarly adapted to these machines.

    (3)     Distributing, including means for withdrawing the matrices from the
    holder which presented them to the mold and for restoring them to their
    respective magazine channels.

    Improvements in the storage-magazines not involving any assembling or
    distributing features are provided for in separate subclasses.

    This subclass includes means for performing all three operations.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 72.

    (2)     Note.  For means for setting and distributing type in a manner
    analogous to the matrix assembling and distributing mechanism of these
    machines, see Class 276, Typesetting.


CLS 199/12
TXT Subject matter under subclass 11 comprising means other than a screw to
    feed the matrices in the sorting mechanism.


CLS 199/13
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 having means for both assembling the
    matrices and casting the line, but including no distributing mechanism.


CLS 199/14
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 having means for both assembling and
    distributing the matrices, but including no casting mechanism.


CLS 199/15
TXT Subject matter under subclass 14 employing a plurality of magazines, each
    magazine consisting of a group of channels adapted to hold matrices of the
    different characters.


CLS 199/16
TXT Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein magazines moved to bring any one
    into operative position.


CLS 199/17
TXT Subject matter under subclass 15 having improvements in the means for
    bringing the matrices together into line after being discharged from their
    individual channels and passages.


CLS 199/18
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 limited to the means for releasing the
    matrices from the storage-magazines and delivering them in a composed line
    to a holder which is designed to present them to the mold.


CLS 199/19
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 employing a plurality of magazines, each
    magazine comprising a group of channels adapted to hold the matrices of the
    different characters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15.


CLS 199/20
TXT Subject matter under subclass 19 wherein magazines are moved to bring any
    one into operative position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16.


CLS 199/21
TXT Subject matter under subclass 19 having improvements in the means for
    bringing the matrices together into line after discharge from their
    individual channels and passages.


CLS 199/22
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 having means peculiarly adapted for
    placing blanks between or after words in composing the line.


CLS 199/23
TXT Subject matter subclass 18 having means for both releasing the matrices
    from their individual channels and bringing them together into a composed
    line.


CLS 199/24
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 having means for automatically changing
    the delivery of matrices from one channel to another where matrices of the
    same character are stored in a plurality of channels.


CLS 199/25
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 having means for releasing matrices
    actuated by a motor controlled by the operator or by pattern.


CLS 199/26
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 having means both for bringing the
    matrices together into line after having been discharged from their
    individual channels and passages and for conveying the composed line to the
    holder for presenting the line to the mold.


CLS 199/27
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 limited to means for bringing the matrices
    together into line after having been discharged from their individual
    channels and passages.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     21, 23, and 26.


CLS 199/28
TXT Subject matter under subclass 27 having spring structures adapted to guide
    and control the matrices as they are delivered into the matrix-receiver.


CLS 199/29
TXT Subject matter under subclass 27 having composing sticks or channels into
    which the matrices are delivered as they are assembled in line.


CLS 199/30
TXT Subject matter under subclass 29 having various devices connected to a
    sliding member which is advanced by the matrices as they are delivered into
    the receiver.


CLS 199/31
TXT Subject matter under subclass 29 having means for shifting the
    matrix-receiver.


CLS 199/32
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 having means for moving and guiding the
    assembled line from the matrix-receiver to the matrix-holder of the casting
    mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     and 36.


CLS 199/33
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 limited to means for withdrawing the
    matrices from the holder, which presented them to the mold, and for
    restoring them to their respective magazine-channels.


CLS 199/34
TXT Subject matter under subclass 33 having means peculiarly adapted for
    distributing matrices of other than the normal font.


CLS 199/35
TXT Subject matter under subclass 33 having distributing means other than those
    employing a screw to feed the matrices in the sorting mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.


CLS 199/36
TXT Subject matter under subclass 33 having means for moving or guiding the
    line of matrices from the holder, which presented it to the mold, to a
    receiver, which is to carry it to a distributing position.


CLS 199/37
TXT Subject matter under subclass 33 having means for conveying the matrices
    after discharge from the holder of the casting mechanism to position for
    sorting them into their individual channels.


CLS 199/38
TXT Subject matter under subclass 33 having means for detecting matrices other
    than of a given font or fonts in order that they may be rejected.


CLS 199/39
TXT Subject matter under subclass 33 employing a plurality of magazines, each
    magazine consisting of a group of channels adapted to hold matrices of the
    different characters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     and indented subclasses.


CLS 199/40
TXT Subject matter under subclass 39 having means for separating the different
    fonts.


CLS 199/41
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 with means for separating each matrix in
    turn from the undistributed line.


CLS 199/42
TXT Subject matter under subclass 33 having means for separating each matrix in
    turn from the undistributed line.


CLS 199/43
TXT Subject matter under subclass 33 having means for stopping the operation
    when improper conditions arise in the distributing mechanism.


CLS 199/44
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 having magazine structure, per se, and
    supports therefor not invovling any assembling or distributing means.


CLS 199/45
TXT Subject matter under subclass 44 having means for moving multiple magazines
    into and out of operative position, including registering and locking means
    or other construction peculiar to multiple magazines.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     20 and 39, and indented subclasses.


CLS 199/46
TXT Subject matter under subclass 44 having attachments to facilitate the
    removal of the magazine from operative position.


CLS 199/47
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 having means for casting a type-bar or
    integral line of type and essential accessories, including the presentation
    of a composed line of matrices to the mold and the withdrawal of the same
    therefrom, but not selective manipulation of the matrices.


CLS 199/48
TXT Subject matter under subclass 47 employing a plurality of molds.


CLS 199/49
TXT Subject matter under subclass 47 having means for receiving the matrices as
    they are transferred from the assembling mechanism, presenting them to the
    mold, and withdrawing them therefrom to a position from which they may be
    transferred to the distributing mechanism.


CLS 199/50
TXT Subject matter under subclass 47 having means for clamping the ends of the
    composed line of matrices while in position before the mold.


CLS 199/51
TXT Subject matter under subclass 47 having means for modifying the spaces
    between the words, so as to bring the line of matrices to standard length,
    including modifications of the machine peculiarly adapted for facilitating
    the operation.

    (1)     Note.  Compare Class 276, Typesetting, subclass 28.


CLS 199/52
TXT Subject matter under subclass 47 having mechanism for automatically
    preventing casting if the matrix-line is not properly presented to the mold
    or other improper conditions exist.


CLS 199/53
TXT Subject matter under subclass 52 limited to means for automatically
    preventing the discharge of molten material from the melting pot.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 90.


CLS 199/54
TXT Subject matter under subclass 47 having chambers for receiving the molten
    material for solidification and means for trimming the type-bar.


CLS 199/55
TXT Subject matter under subclass 47 having chambers for receiving molten
    material for solidification, including modifications in the throat, through
    which the material is received, and means for causing accurate registration
    of the matrix-line with the chamber.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 48 for means within the definition
    of subclass 47 in which a plurality of molds is employed.

    (2)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 91, and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, aprropriate subclasses, for molds, per se.


CLS 199/56
TXT Subject matter under subclass 55 having means peculiarly adapted for
    cooling the type-bar mold.


CLS 199/57
TXT Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein the invention alleged includes
    specific structure of the pieces to be inserted between the cap and body of
    the mold to form its end wall, as well as other parts of the mold.


CLS 199/58
TXT Subject matter under subclass 55 limited to pieces to be inserted between
    the cap and body of the mold to constitute its end walls, including parts
    of the mold immediately cooperating with these pieces.


CLS 199/59
TXT Subject matter under subclass 47 having attachments for trimming the cast
    type-bars.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54.


CLS 199/60
TXT Subject matter under subclass 47 having means for forcing the type-bar out
    of the mold.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 66.1+ for means permanently combined with
    a mold to eject the molded product.


CLS 199/61
TXT Subject matter under subclass 47 having means for handling completed
    type-bars.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 95.


CLS 199/62
TXT Subject matter under subclass 47 having attachments for removing
    accumulations of waste material from various parts of the casting apparatus.


CLS 199/63
TXT Subject matter under subclass 47 wherein counterparts of the characters to
    be cast are adapted to be presented to the mold and form the characters in
    the casting operation.

    (1)     Note.  Modifications of the construction of the matrices to
    cooperate with space-bands are classifiable in this class, subclass 68.

    (2)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 96 and Class 164, Metal
    Founding, subclasses 139+.


CLS 199/64
TXT Subject matter under subclass 63 having those parts that characterize and
    distinguish by the distributing mechanism different matrices for selection
    and engagement.


CLS 199/65
TXT Subject matter under subclass 63 wherein the matrices having a plurality of
    characters.


CLS 199/66
TXT Subject matter under subclass 63 having matrices modified so as to produce
    particular printed characters.


CLS 199/67
TXT Subject matter under subclass 47 having members adapted to be assembled
    between the words of matrices to facilitate bringing the line to standard
    length.


CLS 199/68
TXT Subject matter under subclass 67 having portions of increasing thickness
    adapted to be inserted different distances within the line.


CLS 199/69
TXT Subject matter under the class definition having means for casting each
    printing character, with its supporting-body separately, as distinguished
    from casting a plurality of characters integrally united to form a type-bar.

    (1)     Note.  For mechanism for manipulating printing-type in a manner
    analogous to the means for moving the matrices in this group see Class 400,
    Typewriting Machines.


CLS 199/70
TXT Subject matter under subclass 69 having wherein the type is stored in
    magazines prior to composition.


CLS 199/71
TXT Subject matter under subclass 69 drawn to machines employing matrices
    adapted to move individually into position for casting without moving the
    remaining characters of the font.


CLS 199/72
TXT Subject matter under subclass 71 wherein the matrices being released from
    their individual channels, brought into casting position before the mold,
    and thereafter restored to their respective channels.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 11, and indented subclass.


CLS 199/73
TXT Subject matter under subclass 69 drawn to machines employing a carrier for
    a plurality of matrix characters and capable of rotation for bringing a
    desired character to casting position with or without additional sliding
    movement.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 5.


CLS 199/74
TXT Subject matter under subclass 73 having a previously-prepared member
    adapted to govern the operation of the means to select the desired matrices.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 77.


CLS 199/75
TXT Subject matter under subclass 69 drawn to machines employing a carrier for
    a plurality of matrix characters and capable of bringing the desired
    character to casting position by rectilinear movement only.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 6 and 7.


CLS 199/76
TXT Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein the matrix-carrier is slidable in
    two directions.


CLS 199/77
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 having a previously-prepared member
    adapted to govern the operation of the means to select the desired matrices.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 74.


CLS 199/78
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 having a plurality of manually-operatable
    members for selecting the desired matrix-characters.


CLS 199/79
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 limited to the holder structure for
    matrices.


CLS 199/80
TXT Subject matter under subclass 69 having means for casting individual types
    and essential accessories, but not involving selective manipulation of the
    matrices.

    (1)     Note.  Compare Class 164, Metal Founding, subclass 139 for
    apparatus for casting printing plates and subclass 303 for metal injecting
    apparatus of general utility.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47.


CLS 199/81
TXT Subject matter under subclass 80 having also means for removing surplus
    material and completing the type.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 54 and 59, and Class 29,
    Metal Working, subclass 24.  Also Class 164, Metal Founding, subclass 140.


CLS 199/82
TXT Subject matter under subclass 81 with molds in which one side thereof is
    moved into the chamber for forcing the type out through the opposite side.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     and indented subclasses, 92 and 93.


CLS 199/83
TXT Subject matter under subclass 81 with molds composed of two sections which
    open and close at every operation, each section containing part of the
    chamber.


CLS 199/84
TXT Subject matter under subclass 81 having molds in which one side thereof is
    moved into the chamber for forcing the type out through the opposite side.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     92, and 93.


CLS 199/85
TXT Subject matter under subclass 84 adapted to produce nonprinting filling
    members of less than normal height.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93.


CLS 199/86
TXT Subject matter under subclass 84 wherein the entire mold travels from one
    position to another.


CLS 199/87
TXT Subject matter under subclass 80 having molds composed of two sections
    which open and close at every operation, each section containing a part of
    the chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83      and 94.


CLS 199/88
TXT Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein the entire mold traveling from one
    position to another.


CLS 199/89
TXT Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the entire mold travels from one
    position to another.

    (1)     Note.  Compare Class 164, Metal Founding, subclasses 323+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86      and 88.


CLS 199/90
TXT Subject matter under subclass 80 having means for automatically preventing
    the discharge of molten material from the melting-pot.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 53.


CLS 199/91
TXT Subject matter under subclass 80 limited to the receptacles or molds only
    for receiving the molten material for solidification.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 54 and 55, and indented
    subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, appropriate subclasses, for molds, per se.


CLS 199/92
TXT Subject matter under subclass 91 having one side being movable into the
    chamber for forcing the type out through the opposite side.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82      and 84, and indented subclasses.


CLS 199/93
TXT Subject matter under subclass 92 for producing non-printing filling members
    of less than normal height.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85.


CLS 199/94
TXT Subject matter under subclass 91 composed of two sections which open and
    close at every operation each section containing a part of the chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83,     87 and 88, for similar subject matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 160+ for molds, per se, having plural
    sections.


CLS 199/95
TXT Subject matter under subclass 80 having means for handling the completed
    type.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclasses 61 and 81, indented
    subclasses.


CLS 199/96
TXT Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the counterparts of the characters
    to be cast, are adapted to be presented to the mold and form the characters
    in the casting operation.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 63, and indented subclasses.


CLS 200/
TTL ELECTRICITY:  CIRCUIT MAKERS  AND BREAKERS

CLS 200/
TXT

    I.      This is the generic class for devices, per se, of general
    application which are used for closing or opening electrical circuits and
    the combination of these devices with their operating means.  In the
    combined devices there must be something more than the mere inclusion of a
    circuit maker or breaker broadly.

    II.     Combinations of circuit makers and breakers with electrical plugs,
    sockets, or other connectors are in this class.

    III.    This class includes devices known as "controllers",
    "circuit-closers", "switches", "circuit-breakers", "interrupters",
    "distributers", "thermal-cut-offs", "fuses", and "electrical thermostats".

    IV.     Electrical systems or circuits are excluded from this class.  These
    systems or circuits are classified in the various electrical or art
    classes, depending on the particular form of electrical system or of the
    apparatus controlled.

    V.      Note.  A circuit maker or breaker of this class (200) can be
    distinguished from an electrical connector of Class 439, Electrical
    Connectors, in that a circuit maker or breaker comprises an assemblage of
    parts including both a movable contact and its mating contact wherein there
    is a positive (permanent) physical connection between the contacts such
    that a contact is restricted to move with respect to a mating contact along
    a prescribed path each time the circuit maker or breaker operates, whereas
    an electrical connector is physically separated from the distinct, mating
    connector each time the circuit is broken.

    The combination of an electrical circuit maker or breaker with an
    electrical connector will be found in this class (200). For example, an
    electrical connector with a distinct switch actuated by a mating connector
    is included in this class (200), especially in subclasses 61.58+.  An
    electrical connector that includes integrally therewith a "switching"
    component actuated by coupling engagement with a mating connector is to be
    found in Class 439. Search especially Class 439, subclass 188 for an
    electrical connector having circuit interrupting provision effected by
    mating.

    An electrical connector, per se, may include movable contacts and be in the
    class of electrical connectors.  For example, Search Class 439, subclasses
    43+ for an electrical connector with a selectable circuit wherein no
    details of the circuit structure is set forth; subclasses 152+ for an
    electrical connector detachable from a mating connector by snap or
    quick-break action; subclasses 259+ for a connector with a contact moved
    laterally into engagement with a mating contact in a "zero insertion force
    device"; subclasses 296+ for an electrical connector with coupling
    movement-actuating means or retaining means in addition to the contact,
    especially subclasses 310+ for a retaining means with distinct
    movement-actuating means to move a coupling part axially; and subclasses
    374+ for an electrical connector with guiding means for mating of a
    coupling part.

    This class (200) has not been screened to verify placement according to
    this line.

    VI.     SEARCH CLASS:

    Search should be made in the art or special application classes for
    circuit-controllers of such special type as to be peculiarly adapted for
    those arts-- e.g., telegraph keys in Class 178, Telegraphy,
    telephone-switches in Class 379, Telephonic Communications.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, for patents claiming a metal composition, e.g., an alloy or a
    composition having a continuous phase of free metal made by consolidating
    metal particles.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 400+ for elemental metal or alloys
    which (a) are the product of a Class 148 process (e.g., heat treated, age
    hardened), (b) are claimed in terms of specific magnetic properties or as
    having particular internal structure which affects the magnetic properties,
    (c) are amorphous, (d) possess the property of shape memory, (e) are the
    product of a significant Class 164, Metal Founding, step (e.g., chill cast,
    directionally solidified, etc.), (f) are the product of the dispersion of
    particulate matter in molten metal which particulate retains its identity
    in the final product (e.g., dispersion strengthened, etc.).

    178,    Telegraphy, (See VI above).

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), appropriate subclasses, and
    particularly subclasses 59+ for a pattern-controlled selective cutting
    machine wherein the pattern sensor may involve electrical
    circuit-controllers.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 500+ for electrically conductive
    compositions and devices defined solely in terms of the composition of
    which they are composed.  Included are contacts and switches defined solely
    in terms of their composition or stock.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses, and
    314, Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Consumable Electrodes,
    appropriate subclasses for electric space discharge devices designed to
    pass an electric current (e.g., arc, spark, etc.) between two electrodes
    spaced apart in a vacuum or a gas or vapor atmosphere (including
    atmospheric air).  See Class 314 where the discharge device is provided
    with an electrode which is consumed during the operation and has means to
    feed the electrodes together to compensate for the consumption of the
    electrode.  Class 313 is the generic class for space discharge devices.
    See subclasses 146+ of Class 313 for discharge devices which are provided
    with a movable electrode. Some discharge devices are closely analogous in
    structure to some types of circuit makers and breakers.  See section XXII
    of the class definition of Class 313 for the distinction between a space
    discharge device and a circuit maker and breaker.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes, see the
    reference to Class 313, above.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 101+ for plural
    channel systems including branched circuits with switching, subclass 13 for
    resonator type breakdown discharge system, e.g., T-R or R-T systems, and
    subclass 262 for long line elements and components which may perform a
    switching or blocking function, e.g., long line short circuiting switches
    and long line shorting plugs.

    334,    Tuners, subclasses 47+ for tuners which are varied or adjusted by a
    switching operation which usually involves a make and break type switch.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 768 for slot type
    antennas with periodic control of the slot or coupling; subclass 777 for
    plural wave guide type antennas with control of the individual antenna;
    subclass 876 for antennas with switching between the antennas and lines;
    and subclass 904 for antennas which may be combined with a switch.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 600+ for
    arrangements of circuit closures on a mounting or in a housing.  See also,
    subclass 115 for specific circuit breaker structure in protection of safety
    of a system or device.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, (See VI above).

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, for alloys containing metal or
    metallic compositions which contain a continuous phase of metal.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 58+ for coating processes, per se,
    wherein an electrical product is produced.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 379+ for coated electrical conductors which may
    include contacts and switches, but which are merely coated bases recited
    solely as a substrate with a particular coating therein; see also
    subclasses 411.1+ for a composite web or sheet which is characterized
    solely by the compositions of the layers.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, (see V Note above).


CLS 200/1
TXT Devices under class definition in which a plurality of contacts are
    arranged to control two or more circuits.

    (1)     Note.  This group includes motor and resistance controllers, per
    se, the combination of these with electro-magnetic control, and operators
    peculiar to this type of circuit control.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20      and 23+, for devices for the periodic control of a plurality of
    circuits.

    33+,    for combinations with retarding means.

    51+,    especially subclasses 51.03-51.06 for multiple circuit control
    switches actuated by or claimed in combination with a plug, socket, or
    other connector coupling device.


CLS 200/2
TXT Devices under subclass 1 for connecting a loop or shunt circuit into a main
    circuit without at any time completely interrupting the circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51+,    especially subclass 51.1 for such devices actuated by or claimed in
    combination with a plug, socket, or other connector  coupling device.


CLS 200/3
TXT Devices under subclass 1 include combinations with thermal current cut outs
    or fuses.  These devices are generally used for starting
    alternating-current motors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches, for
    thermal-current cut outs, per se.


CLS 200/4
TXT Devices under subclass 1 in which a contactor moving in a circular path is
    combined with one moving in a straight line.


CLS 200/5
TXT Devices under subclass 1 comprising a plurality of switches each being
    separately operated and usually provided with interlocking means to permit
    their operation only in a definite order.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for multiple contact or pivoted contact of plural switch devices.

    13,     for dial-type plural switch devices.

    18,     for plural switch devices with operating means.

    50.01+, for retarded interlocking switches.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 22+ for a keyboard
    controlled code transmitter.


CLS 200/6
TXT Devices under subclass 1 in which the contactors are mounted so as to move
    in a circular path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for combined pivoted and reciprocating contact switches.

    37,     for retarded multiple contact rotary switches.


CLS 200/7
TXT Devices under subclass 6 comprising two or more of the following different
    types of pivoted contact controllers.


CLS 200/8
TXT Devices under subclass 6 in which the contact-pressure between the fixed
    and movable contacts is exerted in a line radial to the arc of movement of
    the pivoted contact.

    (1)     Note.  This type comprises largely the devices known as
    "drum-controllers".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for radial contact pressure pivoted switch combined with other type.

    17,     for radial contact pressure switches with operating means.


CLS 200/9
TXT Devices under subclass 8 in which two or more controllers have movement
    relative to one another.


CLS 200/10
TXT Devices under subclass 8 in which special means are provided for
    extinguishing or preventing the formation of arcs upon separation of the
    contacts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    218,    High-Voltage Switches With Arc Preventing or Extinguishing Devices,
    subclasses 1+ for arc preventing or extinguishing devices


CLS 200/11
TXT Devices under subclass 6 comprising two or more contacts arranged in the
    arc of a circle, the contact-surface being in a plane and having a pivoted
    cooperating sliding contact moving in a plane parallel to that of the
    contact-surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for dial-type switch combined with other type.

    17,     for dial type switch with operating means.


CLS 200/12
TXT Devices under subclass 11 in which the movable contact is biased toward a
    certain position, usually the off position, and is adapted to be held in
    some other position and released by means of an electromagnet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 2+ for electromagnetically actuated circuit
    controllers generally.


CLS 200/13
TXT Devices under subclass 12 in which there are two or more controllers which
    have movement relative to one another.


CLS 200/14
TXT Devices under subclass 11 comprising two or more dial-type controllers
    which have movement relative to one another.


CLS 200/15
TXT Devices under subclass 6 comprising conducting blades adapted to make
    contact by being projected between conducting leaves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for pivoted contact knife blade switch combined with thermal
    current.

    7,      for pivoted contact knife blade switch combined with other type of
    pivoted contact switch.

    554+,   for single-contact switches of the knife-blade type.


CLS 200/16
TXT Devices under subclass 1 in which the movable contact operates in a
    straight line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for combined reciprocating contact and pivoted contact switch.


CLS 200/17
TXT Means under subclass 1 peculiarly adapted for the operation of
    multiple-circuit controllers.

    (1)     Note.  Search should be extended to appropriate subclasses in this
    group of multiple-circuit control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, for operators of general application;
    and subclass 565 for controller checks.


CLS 200/18
TXT Devices under subclass 17 for operating two or more controllers which have
    movement relative to one another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for radial pivoted contact pressure plural switches.

    13,     for dial-type plural switch, electromagnetic release.

    14,     for dial-type plural switch.


CLS 200/19
TXT Devices under class definition in which the circuit is made and broken
    intermittently or at constantly-recurring intervals. There is usually a
    constantly-driven member which operates a contact or plurality of contacts
    to intermittently make and break the circuit.

    (1)     Note.  This group includes devices known as "interrupters",
    "distributers", and "flashers".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 87+ for electromagnetically operated periodic
    circuit closers.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    appropriate subclasses for periodic switches having a thermal control,
    particularly subclasses 51, 92+, 138, and 302+.


CLS 200/20
TXT Devices under subclass 19 comprising a plurality of circuit-controllers one
    at least of which is of the intermittent type.


CLS 200/21
TXT Devices under subclass 20 in which a rotating intermittent contact is
    combined with a cam-operated contact.


CLS 200/22
TXT Means under subclass 21 are provided for changing the relative positions of
    the fixed and movable contacts to vary the time of contact.


CLS 200/23
TXT Devices under subclass 19 in which a plurality of contacts are arranged for
    controlling a plurality of circuits.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for multiple-circuit control generally.


CLS 200/24
TXT Limited to devices under subclass 23 in which a rotating contact cooperates
    with the fixed contacts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for retarded clock train plural contact rotary switch.


CLS 200/25
TXT Devices under subclass 24 in which the relative positions of the fixed and
    movable contacts may be changed to vary the time of contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for adjustable rotary and cam periodic switch.


CLS 200/26
TXT Devices under subclass 24 in which the contact pressure between the fixed
    and movable contacts is exerted in a line radial to the arc of movement of
    the pivoted contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8+,     for pivoted contact radial contact pressured switch.


CLS 200/27
TXT Devices under subclass 23 in which the movable contacts are operated by a
    rotating cam or cams.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for retarded clock train cam operated switch.


CLS 200/28
TXT Devices under subclass 19 in which a rotating contact cooperates with a
    fixed contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for retarded clock train rotary switch.


CLS 200/29
TXT Devices under subclass 28 in which the relative positions of the fixed and
    movable contacts may be changed to vary the time of contact.


CLS 200/30
TXT Devices under subclass 19 in which the movable contact is operated by a
    rotating cam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for retarded clock train cam operated switch.


CLS 200/31
TXT Means under subclass 30 are provided for changing the relative positions of
    the cam and cooperating contact.  The adjustment may be manual or automatic.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, subclasses 1+ for a speed responsive device for adjusting
    the relative rotational position of coupled members.


CLS 200/33
TXT Devices under class definition including means for timing or delaying the
    operation of the contacts.

    (1)     Note.  These devices include the so-called "time-switches".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 76 for retarded circuit closers peculiar to
    telegraph systems.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 141+
    for a switching system including a time delay or retardation means
    controlling a switch actuation.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 59+ for electromagnetically operated retarded
    circuit-makers.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    appropriate subclasses for electrothermally and thermally actuated switches
    with retarded action.


CLS 200/34
TXT Devices under subclass 33 in which the retarding means is a dashpot.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 297+ for a dashpot, per se.


CLS 200/35
TXT Devices under subclass 33 in which clocks, clock-trains, or similar gearing
    are used as a retarding means.


CLS 200/36
TXT Devices under subclass 35 in which the movable contact has a rotary motion.


CLS 200/37
TXT Devices under subclass 36 in which the movable contact cooperates with a
    plurality of fixed contacts.


CLS 200/38
TXT Devices under subclass 35 in which the contacts are operated by means of a
    rotating cam.


CLS 200/39
TXT Devices under subclass 35 in which the switch contact is held from movement
    by means of a latch which is released by a clock mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    405+,   for oscillating contact double snap switch.

    427+,   for reciprocating contact latch switch.

    468+,   for oscillating contact single snap of switch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 39+ for electromagnetically actuated retarded
    trips in automatic circuit interrupters, and subclasses 174+ for
    electromagnetically actuated latch trips.


CLS 200/40
TXT Devices under subclass 39 in which the tripping of the latch releases a
    motor, usually a spring-motor, which operates the contact.


CLS 200/41
TXT Devices under subclass 39 in which the tripping of the latch releases a
    weight, which in falling operates the contact.


CLS 200/42.01
TXT PLURAL SWITCHES CONTROL SINGLE CIRCUIT:

    Devices under the class definition wherein a single circuit is closed or
    opened by placing a plurality of circuit controlling switches in a
    specified relationship to complete or open the circuit.

    (1)     Note.  These devices are commonly known as permutation switches.

    (2)     Note.  The switches are normally in series when the desired state
    is circuit completion and the switches are normally parallel when the
    desired state is an open circuit.


CLS 200/42.02
TXT Coded removable actuator:

    Devices under subclass 42.01 including a separate and distinct actuator for
    opening or closing the switches in a predetermined pattern, which actuator
    can be withdrawn from the switch (e.g., key).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43.06,  for devices of the type where each individual switch controls a
    circuit.


CLS 200/43.01
TXT SWITCH ACTIVATION INHIBITOR (e.g., UNAUTHORIZED INADVERTENT USE PREVENTION):

    Devices under the class definition having structure to prohibit or restrain
    the operation of a switch actuator including for example coded elements
    (e.g., combination codes), locks or other circuit completing means.

    (1)     Note.  The term "switch" is a device for making or breaking an
    electrical circuit and it normally activated by an "actuator".  The
    actuator may take many forms such as button, handles, keys or some other
    type of element.  A "coded element" may be in the form of a special tool,
    key, combinations such as permutation codes or combination locks.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5+      and 50.01+, for interlock switches which have the actuator blocked
    depending upon the condition of the plug, the switch housing or another
    switch.

    304     and 333, for switch shields which limit access to the actuator but
    which do not block the actuator or prevent access to the actuator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    380,    Cryptography, particularly subclasses 26+ for mechanical control of
    signal encryption.


CLS 200/43.02
TXT Combined which connector coupling:

    Devices under subclass 43.01 wherein a lock-type switch is associated with
    an electrical connector for opening and closing an electrical circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51+,    for connector couplers which do not include restraining or
    inhibiting means and see the definitions of 51+ for placement of combined
    switches and electrical connectors classifiable in this subclass and
    subclasses 51+.


CLS 200/43.03
TXT Engine starter protector:

    Devices under subclass 43.01 having structure which prevents an actuator
    for an ignition switch from being returned to start position after being
    activated without first being moved to "off", standby or some other
    nonactivated position.


CLS 200/43.04
TXT Removable actuator:

    Devices under subclass 43.01 wherein the actuator is designed to be readily
    removable.

    (1)     Note.  The actuator is in many instances termed a key.


CLS 200/43.05
TXT Actuator is circuit completing element:

    Devices under subclass 43.04 wherein the switch is activated by introducing
    a coded actuator which becomes part of the circuit-completing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for contact plugs in
    general.


CLS 200/43.06
TXT Plural switches actuated by a single coded element:

    Devices under subclass 43.04 comprising multiple switch contacts to
    activate multiple circuits where all circuits are selectively actuated by
    introducing a single coded element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.02,  for devices of the type where a single circuit is controlled by the
    switches.


CLS 200/43.07
TXT Reciprocating actuator activates switch:

    Devices under subclass 43.04 wherein the switch device includes structure
    which is mechanically moved to an activated condition by inserting a coded
    element, and to a nonactivated condition by removal of the coded element.

    (1)     Note.  The activated condition may be either opened or closed.


CLS 200/43.08
TXT By rotation of actuator:

    Devices under subclass 43.04 wherein the actuator is a coded element
    normally referred to as a key which key activates a switch device typically
    including structure such as lock cylinders and plungers.

    (1)     Note.  The devices provided for in this subclass require a key
    which will only operate a switch having a matching plunger configuration.


CLS 200/43.09
TXT Combination automatically actuates switch:

    Devices under subclass 43.01 wherein contacts are spontaneously activated
    by means of a series of combination moves of a combination lock.

    (1)     Note.  The combination locks provided for in this subclass are
    generally disclosed as tumbler type, where a series of correct rotations of
    the operating mechanism releases a part of the lock to automatically
    activate the switch contacts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43.12,  for combination lock which control a separate locked actuator and
    the actuator must first be unlocked before it can be manipulated.


CLS 200/43.11
TXT Actuator locking device:

    Devices under subclass 43.01 including means that prevent unauthorized
    movement of the actuator or the contacts, or prohibits access to the
    actuator, until the lock is opened.


CLS 200/43.12
TXT Combination lock control actuator:

    Devices under subclass 43.11 wherein a combination type lock prevents
    manipulation of a separate and distinct switch actuator.


CLS 200/43.13
TXT Reciprocating actuator (e.g., push button):

    Devices under subclass 43.11 wherein the actuator is a button or knob that
    when pushed operates to open or close an electric circuit, and including a
    lock which prevents operations of the button or knob.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159+    and 340+, for various types of push button actuators including
    push-push and push-pull.


CLS 200/43.14
TXT Circuit breaker handle type (i.e., padlock):

    Devices under subclass 43.11 wherein the actuator comprises a handle type
    assembly which is prevented from any movement by means of a removable lock.

    (1)     Note.  The padlock device must be removable for proper
    classification in this subclass.


CLS 200/43.15
TXT Including attachments to lock handle:

    Devices under subclass 43.14 wherein the actuator is prevented from
    movement by means attached to the handle assembly in addition to the lock.


CLS 200/43.16
TXT Actuator blocking device (e.g., latch):

    Devices under subclass 43.01 including structure which prevents the
    inadvertent movement of the actuator, and which must be moved or removed in
    order to move the actuator.


CLS 200/43.17
TXT Hand grip type (e.g., power tool):

    Devices under subclass 43.16 wherein the actuator preventing means is
    structurally attached to the handle portion of a hand held appliance.


CLS 200/43.18
TXT Push button type:

    Devices under subclass 43.16 wherein the blocking device prevents the
    urging or depression of a button or knob.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43.13,  for push button type actuators that are locked and must be unlocked
    before the button can be depressed.


CLS 200/43.19
TXT Removable blocking element:

    Devices under subclass 43.16 wherein the means that block the movement of
    the actuator must be completely removed from the switch assembly before the
    actuator can be moved.


CLS 200/43.21
TXT Mounted on actuator:

    Devices under subclass 43.19 wherein the blocking element is mounted on the
    actuator handle, lever, plunger or other type actuator and the blocking
    element must be removed to enable movement of the actuator.


CLS 200/43.22
TXT Locked cover prevents access to actuator:

    Devices under subclass 43.01 including means to enclose and lock the switch
    assembly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333,    for actuator covers which are not of the unauthorized prevention
    type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 242 for closures for face plate type openings.


CLS 200/46
TXT Devices under class definition in which the contact is controlled by means
    of a perforated or embossed sheet, card, or strip.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is limited to such devices, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, in most subclasses of "Automatic" that have the word
    "electric" in the titles, for combinations of pattern-sheet-controlled
    circuit closers in a system.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 3 for pattern-operated automatic telegraph
    systems, and subclass 17 for pattern-operated telegraph transmitters or
    recorders.

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), subclasses 59+ for a pattern
    controlled selective cutting machine which may involve electrical circuit
    controllers.

    235,    Registers, subclass 56 for voting machines using sheet controlled
    switches, and subclasses 441+, 444+ and 452 for record-sensing devices
    wherein switches may be opened or closed or circuits made in accordance
    with areas on the record that contain coded indicia, the area where said
    indicia is sensed conveying particular information.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 20+ and 173+ for a
    pulse code transmitter of general utility.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 108+ for visual display
    systems including plural mechanically movable display elements with
    selective electrical control.


CLS 200/47
TXT Devices under class definition include circuit-controllers adapted to limit
    the travel of electrically-driven devices. They are generally used in
    hoisting devices to break the circuit at the desired limits of travel.


CLS 200/48
TXT Devices under class definition especially adapted for breaking high-voltage
    circuits.

    (1)     Notes.  These breakers are generally used out of doors and contacts
    separate in the air.  They are usually provided with horn arc-dissipating
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for high potential type switches adapted for use as pole switches.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses for
    electric space discharge devices, including arc and spark discharge devices.


CLS 200/49
TXT Devices under class definition adapted to be mounted on a telephone-pole to
    disconnect the transmission-line.  They are usually adapted to be operated
    from indoors and isolate the telephone during a storm.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for high potential type switches.

    538+,   for mechanical pull type switches.


CLS 200/50.01
TXT Interlocking:

    Devices under class definition in which means are provided for insuring a
    predetermined sequence of operation of a plurality of switches or of a
    switch and an associated element, as the switch-casing cover or an
    auxiliary plug.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for multiple switch for multiple circuit control, having
    interlocking means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 483 for interlocking devices
    generally.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclasses 131+ for railway signaling
    systems involving interlocking switch arrangements.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magets, and
    Electromagnets, subclaases 120 and 60 for an interlock   associated with
    electrical power distribution systems and devices.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclasses 43, 201 and 339 for an interlock associated with electrothemally
    or thermally actuated switches, and subclasses 284+ for a plurality of
    fusible switches selectively or sequentially inserted in the same circuit.

    361,    Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 601+ for an
    interlock associated with electrical power distribution system and devices.


CLS 200/50.02
TXT Between switches and housing:

    Subject matter under subclass 50.01 wherein the interlocking means
    associated between the switch and a casing, a box, or a container having a
    cover or a door to facilitate engagement and disengagement of switch
    operating mechanism.


CLS 200/50.03
TXT Handle latches cover:

    Subject matter under subclass 50.02 wherein the element includes means
    attached to the housing to be gripped by the hand to latch the cover or the
    door when the switch is closed.


CLS 200/50.04
TXT Simultaneous operation:

    Subject matter under subclass 50.03 including means to actuate the cover or
    the door and the switch to be opened or closed at the same time.


CLS 200/50.05
TXT Handle disconnected from actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 50.03 including means attached to the cover
    of the switch box so that the cover may be opened and closed and
    automatically disengages and engages the handle from an interior switch
    actuator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50.06,  for engaging and disengaging handle from an interior switch
    actuator.


CLS 200/50.06
TXT Handle disconnected from actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 50.02 wherein the element includes means to
    be gripped by the hand so that automatically disengages and engages the
    handle from an interior switch actuator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50.05,  for handle latching cover.


CLS 200/50.07
TXT Fuse blocks:

    Subject matter under subclass 50.02 wherein an insulating base or slab
    houses a protective device, usually a short piece of wire but sometimes a
    chemical compound which melts and breaks a circuit when a current exceeds a
    rated value.


CLS 200/50.08
TXT Contacts shielding member:

    Subject matter under subclass 50.02 including a barrier member for
    protecting or screening terminal contacts of the switch from electric or
    magnetic fields generated within the device.


CLS 200/50.09
TXT With key-controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 50.02 including a metal instrument inserted
    into the interlocking means to move its bolt to operate the device.


CLS 200/50.1
TXT Lid-controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 50.02 wherein the interlocking means is
    controlled by a movable piece, separate or hinged, for closing the opening
    of the housing.


CLS 200/50.11
TXT Switch handle locking means:

    Subject matter under subclass 50.02 including a mechanical means for
    fastening or securing a switch handle in a position.


CLS 200/50.12
TXT Dual interlocked between door and switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 50.02 wherein the

    interlocking means is operatively connected between the switch mechanism
    and the door so that the opening of the switch is prerequisite to the
    opening of the door, and the closing of the     door is prerequisite to the
    closing of the switch.


CLS 200/50.13
TXT Door independently opened:

    Subject matter under subclass 50.12 including means to open or close the
    door when the switch is opened.


CLS 200/50.14
TXT Lid carrying switch elements (e.g., contacts, terminals, or movable switch
    member):

    Subject matter under subclass 50.12 wherein the housing cover carries the
    switching elements such as contacts, terminals, or a moving switch member.


CLS 200/50.15
TXT Defeater interlock:

    Subject matter under subclass 50.12 including means to deactivate the
    interlocking means so that the door can be open while the switch is closed.


CLS 200/50.16
TXT Independently locked switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 50.12 including a second locking mechanism,
    independent of the interlocking means, to lock the switch in its closed or
    open positions.


CLS 200/50.17
TXT Drawout-type switchgear:

    Subject matter under subclass 50.12 comprising an aggregate of switching
    facilities having components on a sliding box or receptacle that is opened
    by pulling out and closed by pushing in, combined with an enclosure for a
    power station or transforming station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50.21,  for interlocking means, per se.


CLS 200/50.18
TXT Switch latches cover:

    Subject matter under subclass 50.02 including means  automatically locks a
    lid of the switch housing in a closed position when the switch is
    electrically closed.


CLS 200/50.19
TXT Predetermined handle position locks or unlocks switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 50.02 including means attached to the housing
    to be gripped by the hand for selectively locking or unlocking a cover of
    the switch housing closed in one or more predetermined positions of such
    handle corresponding to the opened and closed condition of the switch.


CLS 200/50.2
TXT For bus-duct type:

    Subject matter under subclass 50.02 wherein the interlocking means is used
    for a duct run containing bus bars and a connector box having retractable
    contacts and an interlock cover to prevent the opening of the box when the
    contacts are in the engaged position.


CLS 200/50.21
TXT Drawout-type switchgear:

    Subject matter under subclass 50.01 comprising an aggregate of switching
    facilities having components on a sliding box or receptacle that is opened
    by pulling out and closed by pushing in, combined with an enclosure for a
    power station or transforming station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50.17,  for dual interlocked between door and switch.


CLS 200/50.22
TXT Shutter over contacts:

    Subject matter under subclass 50.21 wherein the interlock means is in the
    form of a sliding guard or shutter which physically closes off connecting
    apertures to the switch gear contacts.


CLS 200/50.23
TXT Truck type:

    subject matter under subclass 50.21  wherein the drawout-type switch gear
    is carried by a carriage with wheels.


CLS 200/50.24
TXT With racking mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 50.21 including a force amplifying or
    levering mechanism for locking the breaker in each of its plurality of
    positions automatically without need for guesswork by the operator as to
    how far the circuit breaker must be moved to place it in the desired
    position.


CLS 200/50.25
TXT Racking screw:

    Subject matter under subclass 50.24 wherein the racking mechanism is a
    forming a continuous helical rib, or thread, with the cylindrical shank, or
    spindle, from which it projects.


CLS 200/50.26
TXT With position indicating means (i.e., connect, disconnect, or test):

    Subject matter under subclass 50.21 including means providing a visual
    indication of the connect, disconnect, or test positions of the circuit
    interrupter unit in the draw-out type switchgear.


CLS 200/50.27
TXT Contact or contact mounting structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 50.21 comprising structural details of
    support to hold electrode, or electrode which engages or disengages to open
    or close the circuit within the circuit interrupter,


CLS 200/50.28
TXT Between switch and connector assembly:

    Subject matter under subclass 50.01 wherein the locking means is associated
    with the switch and a connector assembly comprising a plug and an outlet to
    facilitate engagement and disengagement of switch operating mechanism.


CLS 200/50.29
TXT Switch locks plug:

    Subject matter under subclass 50.28 wherein the locking means prevents the
    withdrawal of the plug except when the switch is in the off position.


CLS 200/50.3
TXT Dual interlock:

    Subject matter under subclass 50.28 wherein theinterlocking means is
    operatively connected between the switch mechanism and the connector
    assembly so that the opening of the switch is prerequisite to the opening
    the plug from the receptacle, and the locking the plug on the receptacle is
    prerequisite to the closing the switch.


CLS 200/50.31
TXT Plug controls switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 50.28 including means which prevents
    withdrawal of the plug from the receptacle when the switch is in the on
    position, and to prevent movement of the switch into the on position in the
    absence of a plug positioned in the receptacle.


CLS 200/50.32
TXT Between plural switches:

    Subject matter under subclass 50.01 including two or more switches with the
    interlocking mechanism connecting the switches such that the operation of
    one or more of those switches affects the operation of the others of the
    switches.


CLS 200/50.33
TXT Alternately operated:

    Subject matter under subclass 50.32 including means to control the
    operation of the electrical switch, to maintain one electrical switch in an
    inoperative condition during the time that another electrical switch is
    energized.


CLS 200/50.34
TXT Rotary:

    Subject matter under subclass 50.33 wherein the switches which turn and
    variable interleaf in a circular or orbital path about a fixed axis.


CLS 200/50.35
TXT Pivot:

    Subject matter under subclass 50.33 including a pin or shaft on the end of
    which the switch is rested and turned or rotated.


CLS 200/50.36
TXT Push button:

    Subject matter under subclass 50.33 wherein the switch contacts are moved
    into engagement or disengagement by a push button actuator having a single
    surface on which pressure is exerted to engage and disengage the contacts.


CLS 200/50.37
TXT Sequentially operated:

    Subject matter under subclass 50.32 wherein the interlocking arrangement
    for two or more operating mechanisms of two or more switches in series
    conducting relation whereby one switch must be opened before the other
    switch or switches can be opened.


CLS 200/50.38
TXT Grounding transformer switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 50.37 including a transformer switch intended
    primarily for the purpose of providing a neutral point for grounding
    purposes.


CLS 200/50.39
TXT Disconnect switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 50.37 including an electrical switch of the
    bypass type for removing a load from its electrical supply sources.


CLS 200/50.4
TXT With handle:

    Subject matter under subclass 50.37 wherein the interlocking means is
    gripped by the hand to control the operation of the electrical switches.


CLS 200/51
TXT Connector coupling devices under class definition (a) combined with a
    switch in a unitary structure, or (b) capable of functioning as a switch;
    i.e., having means specially provided for holding the complementary
    coupling parts in mechanically coupled but open-circuit position.  (For
    exceptions, see especially Note (4) below).

    (1)     Note.  "Connector coupling" as used above refers to electrical
    connectors, other than mere binding posts, comprising a pair of
    complementary parts each having contact means adapted to be readily engaged
    or disengaged by manipulation of said parts.  Such parts are commonly known
    as plugs, sockets, receptacles, and the like.

    (2)     Note.  For the distinction between "connectors" and "switches", see
    Note (3) to the main class definition.

    (3)     Note.  The plug, socket, et cetera, may constitute or be combined
    with the base of a lamp, heater, or other translating device and mere
    recitation by name only of the lamp, heater, or such other device does not
    exclude the patent from this class.

    (4)     Note.  Combinations of connector-coupling devices with the
    following specified types of circuit makers and breakers are excluded from
    this subclass and will be found in the subclasses indicated:

            19+     Periodic switches.

            33+     Retarded switches.

            50.01+, Interlocking switches and
            connectors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 32+ for
    electric lamps and electric space discharge devices which have structurally
    combined therewith an electric switch, note especially subclasses 32, 47,
    63, 64+, subclasses 72, 73, and 74+.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, especially Subclass 188 for an electrical
    connector having circuit interrupting provision effected by mating or
    having a "dead" contact actuated after mating.  See paragraph V under the
    definition of this class (200) for more details of the lines between this
    class and class 439.


CLS 200/51.01
TXT Devices under subclass 51 the parts of which are specially shaped or
    arranged to resemble a candle or to permit the assembly to be inclosed in a
    relatively elongated tubular sheath having the appearance of a candle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 190, 202 and 392+ for such devices claimed
    in combination with light modifying or distributing means.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 123+ for electrical connectors,
    per se, which simulate a candle in shape.


CLS 200/51.02
TXT Devices under subclass 51 having a plurality of separate plug, socket, or
    other coupling parts for cooperation with a like number of complementary
    coupling parts.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, (a) devices having a
    plug at one end and a socket at the other, sometimes known as adapters, (b)
    lamp sockets having one or more plug receptacles combined therewith, and
    (c) multiple lamp sockets, sometimes known as cluster lamp sockets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 638+ for two or more plural
    contact coupling part connectors combined in one integral unit.


CLS 200/51.03
TXT Devices under subclass 51.02 in which single or plural switching means may
    be so operated as to open or close a selected part only of the total number
    of circuits under control of the switching means.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, multiple lamp sockets
    having a switch which can be operated to light any desired number of lamps
    at will of the operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for switches, per se, for multiple-circuit control.

    19+,    for switch-connector devices having means for periodically
    energizing the circuits.

    51.05+, for single coupling connector devices combined with
    multiple-circuit, selective switching means.


CLS 200/51.04
TXT Devices under subclass 51.03 in which the switching means comprises two or
    more independent switches, each complete in itself, and having separate
    operating means.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, multiple lamp socket
    devices, each socket of which is provided with an individual switch.


CLS 200/51.05
TXT Single coupling connector devices under subclass 51 in which single or
    plural switching means may be so operated as to open or close a selected
    part only of the total number of circuits under control of the switching
    means.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, lamp sockets combined
    with switching means for selectively controlling a remote lamp in addition
    to the lamp in the socket.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for switches, per se, for multiple-circuit control.

    51.03+, for multiple-coupling connector devices combined with selective
    switching means.


CLS 200/51.06
TXT Devices under subclass 51.05 in which the coupling member has three or more
    insulated contacts for cooperation with the contacts of a complementary
    coupling member.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, multiple-filament lamp
    sockets having switching means for selectively lighting the filaments to
    effect different degrees of illumination.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 64+ for
    such devices claimed in combination with a multiple filament lamp.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 626+ for a plural-contact
    coupling part which may have three or more contacts.


CLS 200/51.07
TXT Devices under subclass 51 in which the two complementary parts of a
    connector coupling may be moved relative to one another to open or close a
    circuit, without completely uncoupling the parts.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, plug and socket devices
    wherein the circuit may be broken by turning the plug in the socket without
    removing the plug from the socket.

    (2)     Note.  Where the circuit can be broken by partially uncoupling the
    plug from its socket, this subclass includes only those wherein special
    means (latch, detent, etc.) is provided for holding the parts in their
    partially uncoupled relation.  Thus, this subclass does not take mere
    screw-threading coupling devices, such as screw-shell lamp sockets in which
    the lamp may be extinguished by partially unscrewing the same from the
    socket, unless special means are provided for holding the lamp in the "Off"
    position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51.09+, for connector coupling devices wherein a switching means
    automatically operated by the act of separating the parts of the coupling.


CLS 200/51.08
TXT Devices under subclass 51.07 in which the coupling is of the "Bayonet"
    type; i.e., coupling of the parts is effected by engagement of a pin, stud,
    or other projection carried by one of the parts in a slot or groove having
    entrance and seat portions and formed in the other part.


CLS 200/51.09
TXT Devices under subclass 51 in which a switch is automatically operated upon
    engagement or disengagement of the complementary coupling parts.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, lamp sockets wherein
    upon removal of the lamp therefrom, a switch automatically opens the
    circuit of the socket contacts, thus preventing short-circuiting of the
    socket contacts by tools, foreign matter, etc., or preventing shock by
    accidental touching of the contacts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51.07+, for connector coupling devices in which a circuit is made or broken
    by relative motion of a coupling member with respect to a complementary
    coupling member without completely separating the coupled parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 135+ and especially subclasses
    137+ for connectors having movable nonuse covering means operable upon
    disengagement of the coupling parts to cover or prevent access to any
    contact thereof; and subclasses 310+ for an electrical connector having a
    "dead" contact actuated after mating.


CLS 200/51.1
TXT Devices under subclass 51.09 in which separation of the coupling members
    automatically close a switch, usually to "short-circuit" the contacts of
    one of the coupling members.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, (a) lamp sockets for
    series lighting systems having switching means automatically operable upon
    removal of the lamp to "short-circuit" the contacts of the socket thus
    permitting the remainder of the lamps in series therewith to remain lit,
    and (b) connector couplings used in train-line signaling systems in which
    separation of the coupling members causes the contacts of one of the
    coupling members to come together, thus completing a circuit for signaling
    or other purposes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51.11,  for connector coupling devices having independent manually operated
    switching means for short circuiting the contacts of one of the coupling
    members.

    118,    for connector coupling devices having shunt-circuit closing means
    automatically operable in response to an over-load in the circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclass 188 for an electrical connector
    having a circuit interrupting provision effected by mating or having a
    "dead" contact actuated after mating; and see the line notes under section
    V of this class (Class 200) definition.  Search subclasses 507+ for a
    jumper to be temporarily inserted across an electrical flow path having
    means for matching or interengaging union with such connector to divert or
    shunt the flow of electricity so as to shorten the path and/or to preserve
    the circuit continuity.


CLS 200/51.11
TXT Connector coupling members under subclass 51 in which the switch contacts
    are in parallel with or "bridge" the coupling contacts thus short
    circuiting the coupling contacts when the switch is closed.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, lamp sockets for use in
    series lighting systems having a push-button or other switch for short
    circuiting the filament of the lamp.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51.1,   for connector coupling devices having short circuiting means
    automatically operable upon separation of the complementary coupling
    members.

    118,    for connector coupling devices having shunt-circuit closing means
    automatically operable in response to an over-load, in the circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclass 188 for an electrical connector
    having a circuit interrupting provision effected by mating or having a
    "dead" contact actuated after mating; and see the line notes under section
    V of this class (Class 200) definition.


CLS 200/51.12
TXT Connector coupling devices under subclass 51 comprised of two separable
    coupling members, in which one of the switch contacts is mounted in or on
    one of the coupling members and a cooperating switch contact is mounted in
    or on the complementary coupling member, said switch contacts serving also
    as coupling contacts of the respective members.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, lamp sockets of the
    screw-shell type, the center contact of which may be disengaged from the
    center contact of the lamp base by an actuating means without disturbing
    the relation between the lamp and the socket.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51.07+, for connector coupling devices wherein the circuit is opened or
    closed by relative movement between the coupled members without complete
    separation thereof.


CLS 200/51.13
TXT Connector coupling devices under subclass 51 in which the coupling is of
    the "Bayonet" type, i.e., coupling of the parts is effected by engagement
    of a pin, stud, or other projection carried by one of the parts in a slot
    or groove having entrance and seat portions, and formed in the other part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51.08,  for bayonet-type couplings in which the circuit may be made or
    broken without completely uncoupling the parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 671+ for a plural-contact
    coupling part having a bayonet-coupling contact, and see the search note
    appended thereto for another type of bayonet coupling electrical connector.


CLS 200/51.14
TXT Devices under subclass 51 in which one of the coupling members is screwed
    into the other to effect coupling thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 661+ for a plural-contact
    coupling part having a screw-thread-coupling contact, and see the search
    notes appended thereto for the location of other screw coupling type
    electrical connectors, per se.


CLS 200/51.15
TXT Devices under subclass 51.14 in which the switch is operated by means of a
    pull chain or cord.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    410+,   for rotary contact pull snap switches.

    464+,   for mechanical rotating pull switches.

    519,    for pull switches.


CLS 200/51.16
TXT Devices under subclass 51.14 in which the switch is operated by means of a
    pushbutton.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156,    for rotating pull switch.

    159+,   for push button type switch.

    410,    for rotating contact pull snap switch.


CLS 200/51.17
TXT Devices under subclass 51.14 in which the switch is operated by means of a
    rotatable key.


CLS 200/52
TXT Devices under class definition in which the circuit maker or breaker is
    associated with various devices acting either as special operators for or
    modified to carry the circuit controller.  The circuit controller must be
    an essential element of the combination.  A mere conventional or incidental
    showing of the circuit controller is not enough.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 76+ for
    systems for supplying electric energy to lamps and/or electric space
    discharge devices of the gaseous ionization type, the system including an
    electric switch which is associated with a particular device (as a brake
    pedal), the switch being operated by the movement of some part of the
    device.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+ for electric alarm
    systems which are automatically responsive to a condition, which condition
    may control a switch.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 180+ for illumination means with a camera
    shutter synchronizer wherein a switch is operated concurrently with the
    actuation of the shutter.


CLS 200/56
TXT Circuit-controllers under subclass 52 are arranged to cooperate with the
    pointer of an indicating instrument or there is a common operator for the
    pointer and the circuit-controller.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, for most measuring instruments (see the
    Notes to that class for other measuring instrument classes) and for the
    combination of a Class 73 measuring instrument and a circuit controller
    wherein the circuit controller is claimed broadly (Class 200 subclass 56
    provides for the combination when specific structure of the circuit
    controller is claimed).


CLS 200/60
TXT Circuit controllers under subclass 52 which are specially adapted for use
    with portable hand flashlights.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 205+ for combinations of circuit
    controllers with portable self-contained electric lamp structures.


CLS 200/61
TXT Circuit controllers under subclass 52 especially adapted to be used with
    incubators and operated by the lever which controls the heater-damper.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 318+ for incubator in combination with
    the switch.


CLS 200/61.01
TXT Circuit controllers under subclass 52 which are operatively responsive to
    compressional impulses propogated in an elastic medium.


CLS 200/61.02
TXT Circuit controllers under subclass 52 comprising means whose action is
    initiated by energy received from a source of illumination.

    (1)     Note.  These devices for the most part comprise means initiated by
    photo- sensitive gases.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for photo cells, circuits and
    apparatus, and see (7) Note (Class 250, subclass 200) for a field of search
    for photocells, per se.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 600 for electric automatic
    radiant energy responsive indicating systems.


CLS 200/61.03
TXT Circuit controllers under subclass 52 comprising means whose action is
    initiated by the presence of non-liquid fluids including colloidal
    suspensions of solid particles in a gas.

    (1)     Note.  These circuit controllers may involve mechanisms which
    become unbalanced as a result of exothermic reaction, breakdown of surface
    tension, or buoyancy due to the presence of the gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61.04,  for liquid or moisture responsive devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 628 to 634 for electric
    automatic gas or smoke responsive indicating systems.


CLS 200/61.04
TXT Circuit controllers under subclass 52 having means which become operative
    as a result of contact with nongaseous fluid(s) whose presence is merely
    Adventitious, or with vapor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 603+ for electric automatic
    fluent material responsive indicating systems.


CLS 200/61.05
TXT Devices under subclass 61.04 in which a circuit is completed by an
    electrolyte, that is, liquid bridges the gap between the electrical
    conductors.


CLS 200/61.06
TXT Devices under subclass 61.04 having hygroscopic means responsive to the
    presence of vapor in the atmosphere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 29.02+ for hygrometers and
    hygrostats.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 44 for
    apparatus controlling the humidity of a room, etc., by means of a device
    responsive to the relative humidity therein.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 602 for electrical automatic
    moisture or humidity responsive indicating systems.


CLS 200/61.07
TXT Devices under subclass 61.06 in which a certain quantity of water taken up
    by the hygroscopic means causes operation of the circuit controller.


CLS 200/61.08
TXT Current Conductors under subclass 52 which become circuit interrupters or
    cut-outs by their destruction by other than thermal action.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    appropriate subclasses for switches responsive to heat generated by current
    in the circuit or heat from some external source or a combination of both.


CLS 200/61.09
TXT Circuit controllers under subclass 52 which are responsive to the presence,
    in a particular zone, of metal articles or particles whose presence in that
    zone is not desired.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 204 for fluid
    material examination, and subclasses 228+ for testing material by means of
    a magnetic field.


CLS 200/61.1
TXT Apparatus under subclass 52 in which a propelled or independently movable
    element of a game or amusement device brings about the actuation of a
    switch by that element's contacting with, or proximity to, a switch part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 108+ and 317+ for game
    devices involving aerial and surface projectiles, and subclass 238 for
    removable and discrete game pieces which change the status of an electrical
    circuit located in a game board.


CLS 200/61.11
TXT Apparatus under subclass 61.1 in which the propelled or independently
    movable element is a sphere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclass 118 for game devices involving
    a ball rolling on a surface.


CLS 200/61.12
TXT Circuit controllers under subclass 52 responsive to a change in chain
    tension or direction of movement of the braking or driving mechanisms of
    velocipedes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61.39,  for circuit makers and breakers controlled by direction of rotation
    of a shaft or spindle and not associated with a bicycle.


CLS 200/61.13
TXT Circuit makers and breakers under subclass 52 in which the operating
    mechanisms thereof are controlled by continuous or indefinite lengths of
    material such as motion picture film, rope, yarn, endless belts and the
    like, travelling in a given path or being wound onto or unwound from spools
    or reels.

    (1)     Note.  For textile machines, including fiber preparation apparatus,
    which have an electrical switch controlled by a thread or strand, search
    classes:

      19,   Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclass 165.

      28,   Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclass 187 and 227.

      57,   Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclass 81.

      66,   Textiles:  Knitting, subclasses 161 and 163.

     139,   Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 353+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material, especially
    subclasses 10+ for a feeder provided with material responsive control means.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 28+, 36+, 49, 390.1,
    390.2+, 413+, 418.1, 419.1, 420.5, 421.5, 534+, 563+, 564.1, and 565 for
    machine control or stop for regulating running material.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 675-677 for alarms controlled
    by web, sheet or work feeding.


CLS 200/61.14
TXT Devices under subclass 61.13 wherein the control is effected by a special
    configuration or characteristic given or applied to the material at a
    definite point along its length.

    (1)     Note.  For textile machines including fiber preparation apparatus
    which have an electrical switch controlled by a knot or variation in
    diameter of a thread or stand, search classes:

      28,   Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclass 187 and 227.

      57,   Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclass 81.

      66,   Textiles:  Knitting, subclasses 161 and 163.

      139,  Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 353+.


CLS 200/61.15
TXT Devices under subclass 61.13 wherein the response of the circuit maker or
    breaker corresponds to the attainment of a given amount of material wound
    upon a spool or reel.


CLS 200/61.16
TXT Devices under subclass 61.15 wherein the amount of material on the spool or
    reel is determined by means responsive to the distance the material is
    built up from the axis of spool rotation.


CLS 200/61.17
TXT Devices under subclass 61.13 in which the controller is actuated
    concurrently with the attainment of or departure from a predetermined
    rotational speed (including zero rpm) of a member which is in rolling
    frictional contact with the material.


CLS 200/61.18
TXT Circuit controllers under subclass 61.13 in which the actuation is in
    response to slack or reduction in tautness, breakage, runout or failure to
    travel along the intended path of the material being fed.

    (1)     Note.  For textile machines including fiber preparation apparatus
    which have an electrical switch controlled by the slack, breakage, runout
    or failure to properly track of a thread or strand, search classes:

      19,   Textile:  Fiber Preparation, subclass 165.

      28,   Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclass 187.

      57,   Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclass 81.

      66,   Textiles:  Knitting, subclasses 161 and 163.

      139,  Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 353+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 668 for electrical automatic
    tension responsive indicating systems.


CLS 200/61.19
TXT Circuit controllers under subclass 52 comprising a nonconductive body
    located between the contacts of a circuit maker to hold the said contacts
    physically separated during the presence of said body, absence thereof
    permitting the said contacts to come into abutting or face-to-face relation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 126+ for
    high voltage dissipators, per se, comprising interposed nonconductive
    compositions.


CLS 200/61.2
TXT Circuit makers and breakers under subclass 52 which are actuated by an
    element which responds, in circuit making or breaking manner, to the height
    or volume within a receptacle of the surface of material contained thereby.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 612+ for electrical
    automatic fluent material level responsive indicating systems.


CLS 200/61.21
TXT Devices under subclass 61.2 in which the said element responds to the
    volume within the said receptacle of particulate nonfluid material.


CLS 200/61.22
TXT Circuit makers and breakers under subclass 52 associated with a pneumatic
    tire for a vehicle in use, whose actuation is controlled by means
    responsive to an increase and/or decrease above or below a normal operating
    pressure range of the air or other gas used to maintain the tire in its
    inflated condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61.45+, for circuit controllers actuated in response to the tilting of a
    vehicle when a tire becomes deflated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 146.2 for a fluid pressure gauge
    combined with a vehicle wheel, tire or tire stem.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 34 for mechanical signals,
    indicators or alarms associated with tires and responsive to pressure
    conditions therein.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 224+ for pressure sensitive switches
    utilized to control the pressure within the tire and see the search notes
    thereto.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 442+ for electric signals
    automatically actuated by a change in the pressure within pneumatic tires.


CLS 200/61.23
TXT Devices under subclass 61.22 in which the control means is a sensing member
    which contacts the "bulge" at the ground engaging area of the tire casing
    which results from the deflation of the tire.


CLS 200/61.24
TXT Devices under subclass 61.22 in which the control means is actuated by a
    member which moves into contact with the vehicle supporting surface as a
    result of the lowering of the vehicle caused by the deflation of the tire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61.44,  for vehicle mounted feelers actuated by contact with an object
    proximate the path of the vehicle.


CLS 200/61.25
TXT Devices under subclass 61.22 wherein the control means is operated by the
    pressurized fluid within the tire casing. Included are such means as
    bellows, Bourdon tubes, pistons and diaphragms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81+,    for fluid pressure operated circuit makers and breakers other than
    those operatively associated with vehicle tires while in use.


CLS 200/61.26
TXT Devices under subclass 61.25 in which the fluid pressure actuated control
    means is feeler means which is resiliently urged into contact with the gas
    confining tube of the tire and which moves as a result of the softening of
    the tube due to a decrease in gas pressure.


CLS 200/61.27
TXT Circuit makers and breakers under subclass 52 especially adapted for use on
    vehicles to control the supply of current to vehicle turn indicating
    devices, and being generally operated by movement of a vehicle controlling
    means or by independent manual or pedal means.

    (1)     Note.  Switches disclosed for use with illuminating means, as for
    example, auxiliary headlamps (e.g., curve lamps) which are switch
    controlled by vehicle turning, are included in this group together with
    other disclosed vehicle turning switch controlled devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 80 for
    systems for supplying electric energy to lamp and/or electric space
    discharge devices of the gas or vapor ionization type, the system including
    a switch which is operated by the movement of a vehicle controlling means
    (steering wheel, hand or foot lever).

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 465 for signals which
    automatically respond to vehicle turning or steering and subclasses 475+
    for turn signals which are manually actuated and may be automatically
    cancelled.


CLS 200/61.28
TXT Devices under subclass 61.27 supported in or on the manual transmission
    ratio changer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61.88,  for switches actuated concurrently with the movement of a gear
    shift lever into operating positions.


CLS 200/61.29
TXT Devices under subclass 61.27 supported on a foot operated vehicle
    controlling means and/or which are foot operated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61.89+, for circuit makers and breakers actuated concurrently with the
    operation of a vehicle pedal.

    86.5,   for other foot operated (other than the force of gravity acting
    through the foot) controllers.


CLS 200/61.3
TXT Devices under subclass 61.27 which are restored to inoperative position by
    the return of the vehicle to a straight ahead course.

    (1)     Note.  Devices in which the initiation of the turning restores the
    switch to inoperative position are classified in subclass 61.27, the
    generic subclass of the group.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 476+ for automatically
    reset vehicle turn signals.


CLS 200/61.31
TXT Devices under subclass 61.3 in which the setting to signal indicating
    position of the circuit controller is accomplished by the turning of the
    vehicle from its straight ahead course.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 465 for automatic signals for
    indicating vehicle turning.


CLS 200/61.32
TXT Devices under subclass 61.31 provided with additional means for manually
    setting the said circuit controller, or an additional circuit controller,
    to signal indicating position prior to turning.


CLS 200/61.33
TXT Devices under subclass 61.31 in which circuit controller movement is
    accomplished through the motion of a vehicle's steering arm, draglink or
    tie rod.


CLS 200/61.34
TXT Devices under subclass 61.3 in which the restoring means comprises a
    pivotally movable unidirectionally acting member of rachet-like or
    pawl-like function brought into position for restoring engagement with some
    part of the steering mechanism by a manual switch setting lever or operator.

    (1)     Note.  The rachet-like action or unidirectional engagement of the
    dog may not be accomplished by the mere resilient or elastic nature of the
    member, but rather by being pivoted out of engagement while the steering
    mechanism moves to initiate a turn.


CLS 200/61.35
TXT Devices under subclass 61.3 in which the restoring means acts as a result
    of the movement of a steering wheel or steering rod relative to the
    steering rod casing or housing.


CLS 200/61.36
TXT Devices under subclass 61.35 in which restoration is accomplished by the
    physical engagement of the steering wheel or an attachment thereof with
    some part of the manual switch setting lever or operator, or functionally
    integral extension thereof.


CLS 200/61.37
TXT Devices under subclass 61.35 in which restoration is accomplished by motion
    imparted to some member of the switching organization through rolling
    contact means by a rotating steering wheel or post.


CLS 200/61.38
TXT Devices under subclass 61.35 in which the switching organization is mounted
    or supported on or in the steering wheel.


CLS 200/61.39
TXT Apparatus under subclass 52 in which a circuit is made or broken in
    response to a mere change in direction of rotation (not to angular
    acceleration or deceleration) of a shaft, the manner of making or breaking
    the circuit consequent upon rotation of the shaft in one direction
    differing from that corresponding to rotation in the opposite direction.

    (1)     Note.  Although it is a form of acceleration, the change in
    direction of rotation involved in a shaft's going from rest to rotation in
    either direction is considered a mere change of direction for this subclass.

    (2)     Note. The difference in function, dependent upon direction of
    rotation, may comprise the closing of alternative circuits, for instance;
    or by way of additional example, the making of a circuit corresponding with
    rotation of a shaft in one direction and the breaking of such circuit upon
    rotation in the opposite direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61.12,  for circuit makers and breakers associated with bicycle sprocket or
    brake shafts which are controlled by the direction of rotation of said
    shafts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 672 for signals responsive to
    the direction of rotation of a shaft.


CLS 200/61.4
TXT Devices under subclass 52 in which the circuit maker and breaker is
    actuated by the accomplishment of a predetermined change in the diameter of
    a workpiece or of an element in an organized device.


CLS 200/61.41
TXT Apparatus under subclass 52 which operates to open or close a circuit in
    response to the motion of a fixedly supported mechanical tentacle or
    movable obstruction (feeler), which motion is brought about by the presence
    of an object moving through the zone of operation of such feeler.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61.13+, for switch-actuating detectors or feelers responsive to the
    presence or absence of a running length of web or strand material.


CLS 200/61.42
TXT Devices under subclass 52 which operate to open or close a circuit in
    response to the motion of a mechanical tentacle or movable obstruction
    (feeler) which motion is brought about by the impingement of such feeler
    against an object (either moving or stationary) due to the motion of the
    feeler support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61.62+, for circuit makers and breakers necessarily operated concurrently
    with the operation or use of a closure member, operator or accessory.


CLS 200/61.43
TXT Apparatus under subclass 61.42 in which an edge of a closure is provided
    with circuit making and breaking means constituting a feeler means,
    contacting of an object by such edge resulting in circuit controlling
    movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61.62+, for circuit makers and breakers necessarily operated concurrently
    with the operation or use of a closure member, operator or accessory.


CLS 200/61.44
TXT Circuit makers and breakers under subclass 61.42 the support for whose
    feeler element is transported by a conveyance (aerial, ground or marine) so
    that at least a component of the sensing motion of the feeler is imparted
    to it by the motion of the conveyance.


CLS 200/61.45
TXT Circuit makers and breakers under subclass 52 operated by (a) the action of
    gravity on a part thereof when the relation of the circuit controller as a
    unit to the horizontal is changed and/or (b) the tendency of a part thereof
    to remain at rest or to continue moving at a constant rate of speed when
    the circuit controller as a unit is caused to be accelerated or decelerated.

    (1)     Note.  Those circuit controllers which are actuated in response to
    (a) a change in direction of motion, (b) linear displacement, or (c) the
    attainment of a predetermined speed, without regard to the rate at which
    (a), (b), or (c) is accomplished are not in this subclass or in those
    indented hereunder, but will be found in other appropriate subclasses in
    this class.

    (2)     Note.  As applied to vehicles these controllers are generally known
    as collision or upset switches.

    (3)     Note.  The duration of the period of acceleration (or deceleration)
    may be imperceptible or minute such as when the circuit controller is
    jarred or vibrated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 669 for electrical automatic
    acceleration responsive indicating systems.


CLS 200/61.46
TXT Devices under subclass 61.45 in which a circuit controller is operated by
    the change in the relative rotational velocities of two rotating units one
    of which is an inertia member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31.39,  for circuit controllers responsive to a mere change in direction of
    rotation.


CLS 200/61.47
TXT Devices under subclass 61.45 in which a body of current conducting liquid
    flows under the influence of gravity, or by reason of its inertia, into or
    out of circuit closing position.

    (1)     Note.  The switch operation must be by virtue of the inertia of the
    conducting fluid or by the change of inclination of the fluid containing
    vessel without the use of actuating levers, the fluid containing vessel
    being rigid with respect to the body whose inclination is changed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    for circuit controllers utilizing conducting fluids to make contact
    and wherein levers or other actuators are employed to cause the flow of the
    conducting fluid.


CLS 200/61.48
TXT Devices under subclass 61.45 in which an inertia body forming a part of the
    circuit controller unit moves with a swinging motion (relative to the
    circuit controller support) in response to a change in inclination or rate
    of motion of the said circuit controller support.


CLS 200/61.49
TXT Devices under subclass 61.48 wherein the inertia member is constrained to
    move in an arcuate path by a flexible springy elongated member fixed at one
    end and free at the other, the said member being attached to the free end.


CLS 200/61.5
TXT Devices under subclass 61.48 provided with means for preventing the
    swinging inertia member from reverting to the position occupied by it prior
    to being disturbed by the change of inclination or rate of motion.


CLS 200/61.51
TXT Devices under subclass 61.48 in which the swinging inertia member and/or
    its supporting arm conduct electrical current when the circuit controller
    is in its disturbed or other than normal position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61.49,  for conducting oscillating controllers supported by a resilient arm.


CLS 200/61.52
TXT Devices under subclass 61.45 whose circuit controlling member moves under
    the influence of gravity alone when the circuit maker and breaker undergoes
    a change in inclination.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61.47   and 61.48+, respectively, for tilt responsive circuit controllers
    utilizing conducting liquids and oscillating members.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclasses 276+ for tilt-responsive switches
    which shut down or otherwise regulate a crane.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 689 for electrical automatic
    tilt responsive indicating systems.


CLS 200/61.53
TXT Devices under subclass 61.45 in which the circuit controlling member is
    constrained to move along a straight line path.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass are generally provided with means
    restraining the moving members thereby requiring that an accelerating force
    be applied thereto to the restraining means.  For those linearly moving
    controlling members which are unrestrained, see subclass 61.08, tilt
    responsive.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61.52,  and see (1) Note above.


CLS 200/61.54
TXT Circuit makers and breakers under subclass 52 supported or carried by a
    vehicle steering wheel, steering rod, or steering rod casing or housing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61.27+, for turn indicator type switches mounted on a steering wheel shaft
    or column.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 80+ for
    systems for supplying electric energy to lamp and/or electric space
    discharge devices of the gas or vapor ionization type, the system including
    a switch which is operated by the movement of a vehicle controlling means
    (steering wheel, hand or foot lever).


CLS 200/61.55
TXT Devices under subclass 61.54 at the center of the steering wheel and spring
    urged to circuit breaking position, closing the circuit requiring the
    overcoming of the spring means.


CLS 200/61.56
TXT Devices under subclass 61.55 having an actuating lever outwardly extending
    from the center whereby the circuit can be closed from a region proximate
    the periphery of the wheel.


CLS 200/61.57
TXT Devices under subclass 61.54 mounted on or in the peripheral portion of the
    wheel.


CLS 200/61.58
TXT Circuit makers and breakers under subclass 52 which are so connected with
    apparatus other than switch means that the volitional use of such
    apparatus, in the normal manner, necessarily brings about a substantially
    simultaneous actuation of such circuit maker and breaker.

    (1)     Note.  The volitional use (referred to above) requires that the
    utilizing act which initiates the circuit controlling action be brought
    about by human agency (e.g., through opening of a door, turning of a
    handle, etc.), not merely by the attainment of a certain point in the cycle
    of operation of a mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 90.01+ for telephone systems
    combined with other electrical systems such as fire, burglar, etc..

    396,    Photography, subclasses 180+ for illumination means with a camera
    shutter synchronizer wherein a switch is operated concurrently with the
    actuation of the shutter.


CLS 200/61.59
TXT Devices under subclass 61.58 in whose operation or use the volitional act,
    which initiates the circuit-controlling action, is the insertion of an
    article into the art device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 568+ for alarms for
    indicating the placement or removal of an article.


CLS 200/61.6
TXT Apparatus under subclass 61.58 in whose operation the volitional use
    comprises the coupling of a fluid conduit to another member, such as a wall
    outlet or another conduit.


CLS 200/61.61
TXT Means under subclass 61.58 in whose operation the volitional use comprises
    the movement of a sliding compartment, till, or receptacle within an
    encompassing receptacle or cabinet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 570 for electrical automatic
    drawer responsive indicating systems.


CLS 200/61.62
TXT Circuit makers and breakers under subclass 61.58 whose circuit-controlling
    operation is brought about by the movement of a closure member, an operator
    therefor or an accessory thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61.42+, for closures which in their operation may or may not cause a
    circuit to be made or broken, and subclass 291 for such closures of the
    sensitive edge type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, appropriate subclasses, for a
    closure of the type provided for and see the search note thereto in section
    IV for the loci of closures in other classes.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 271+ for cabinets having
    movable components actuated by movement of the closure.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 84 for
    systems for supplying electric energy to lamps and/or electric space
    discharge devices of the gas or vapor ionization type, the systems having a
    switch which is operated by the movement of a door or window sash.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 542+ and 545+ for electric
    automatic lock or door or window movement responsive indicating systems.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 180+ for illumination means with a camera
    shutter synchronizer wherein a switch is operated concurrently with the
    actuation of the shutter.


CLS 200/61.63
TXT Devices under subclass 61.62 in which the closure member or closure
    operator is associated with a mail slot or receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61.59,  for letter boxes which comprise circuit controlling means which
    respond to the insertion or presence of a letter in the box in addition to
    or instead of means responsive to the movement of a closure or its operator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    232,    Deposit and Collection Receptacles, subclasses 35, 36 and 37 for
    alarms signals and indicators operated by the movement of letter box doors.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 569 for alarms operated
    during placement or removal of contents of mail boxes.


CLS 200/61.64
TXT Devices under subclass 61.62 actuated by the movement of a securing means,
    as for example a lock, bolt or keeper, or of an operating means therefor,
    such as a key.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43.11+, for switches provided with means for locking the movable element of
    the switch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 542+ for communications
    comprising means responsive to the operation of a lock.


CLS 200/61.65
TXT Devices under subclass 61.64 in which the securing means is a bar lock
    applied to an elevator gate or door.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61.67,  for other operators which move bolts or the like and also move
    circuit controlling elements.


CLS 200/61.66
TXT Devices under subclass 61.64 in which (1) a substitute implement or the
    like, not intended for use with the lock, or (2) the mere insertion of an
    implement (key) or substitute therefor causes the circuit to be made.

    (1)     Note.  The unauthorized keys of section (1) under this subclass
    definition do not, of course, serve as operators for the locks or bolts;
    however, those which are proper operate to move the latch or lock-bolt
    without changing the circuit condition then present.


CLS 200/61.67
TXT Devices under subclass 61.64 having a bar like securing means which is
    movable to engage or disengage a retaining means and also controls a
    circuit.  The securing means is either a part of the circuit or else acts
    as the circuit controller.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61.65,  for circuit controllers which are moved by a bolt or the like and
    are associated with elevator locks.


CLS 200/61.68
TXT Devices under subclass 61.67 in which the movement of the securing means
    into engagement with the retaining means either (1) makes direct electrical
    contact therewith or (2) moves a circuit maker within said retaining means.


CLS 200/61.69
TXT Means under subclass 61.62 including a circuit maker and breaker whose
    operation requires the movement of a plurality of closures into a
    predetermined position, or a circuit maker and breaker whose cycle of
    operation (i.e., a making and breaking of the circuit) corresponds to more
    than one closure operating cycle (i.e., more than one opening and closing
    of a closure).


CLS 200/61.7
TXT Devices under subclass 61.62 whose circuit-controlling member is a part of
    the means for pivotally mounting a closure on its supporting structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 221+ for hinges, per se.


CLS 200/61.71
TXT Apparatus under subclass 61.62 in which the closure member follows a linear
    path in its restricted or guided end or edgewise circuit-controlling
    movement.


CLS 200/61.72
TXT Devices under subclass 61.71 including a circuit maker and breaker having a
    part which is constrained, by frictional contact with the closure member,
    to move in conjunction with the closure member.


CLS 200/61.73
TXT Means under subclass 61.71 in which the closure member, in its
    circuit-controlling movement, meets a circuit-maker-and-breaker actuator in
    abutting or face-to-face relationship, causing the latter to make or break
    a circuit.


CLS 200/61.74
TXT Apparatus under subclass 61.71 in which at least one of the contacts of the
    circuit making and breaking member is resiliently urged into or out of
    contact-making position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61.76+, for resiliently urged circuit controllers associated with a type of
    closure other than sliding.


CLS 200/61.75
TXT Means under subclass 61.74 in which either the slidable closure member or
    its guideway or track is modified to receive or support a part of the
    circuit making and breaking device.


CLS 200/61.76
TXT Devices under subclass 61.62 in which at least one of the contacts of the
    circuit making and breaking member is resiliently urged into or out of the
    contact-making position.


CLS 200/61.77
TXT Apparatus under subclass 61.76 wherein the resilient switch has a pull
    chain type operator and has means responsive to opening or closing movement
    of a closure, to pull the said chain.


CLS 200/61.78
TXT Devices under subclass 61.76 in which at least one of the contacting
    members of the circuit making and breaking means or the immediate support
    of such member, which is movable therewith, is itself resilient.


CLS 200/61.79
TXT Circuit-controllers under subclass 61.76 which may be adjusted in such a
    manner that opening or closing movement of the associated closure produces
    no circuit-making or breaking effect.


CLS 200/61.8
TXT Apparatus under subclass 61.76 which, after responding in circuit-opening
    or -closing manner to an opening or closing of a closure, requires an
    adjustment by some means other than the reverse motion of such closure
    before it can respond again in the same manner to the same stimulus.


CLS 200/61.81
TXT Devices under subclass 61.76 which are mounted upon a closure frame or a
    wall of an enclosure to which such closure gives access, as well as being
    operatively connected to such closure itself.

    (1)     Note.  The enclosure referred to in the definition may be, for
    instance, a room, cabinet, box, etc.


CLS 200/61.82
TXT Means under subclass 61.81 in which the frame or wall mounted portion of
    the device is disposed within a recess in such frame or wall.


CLS 200/61.83
TXT Apparatus under subclass 61.62 in which at least one of the circuit making
    and breaking members is urged by gravity into or out of contact-making
    position.


CLS 200/61.84
TXT Apparatus under subclass 61.62 which responds, in circuit-controlling
    manner, to the movement of a member mounted on or adjacent to a window and
    which member serves as an adjunct to such window.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 550 for communications
    comprising means responsive to the condition of screens, gratings or
    curtains.


CLS 200/61.85
TXT Devices under subclass 61.58 in whose operation the volitional use
    comprises the normal or intended movement of a manually graspable guiding,
    lifting, or actuating member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 80+ for
    systems for supplying electric energy to lamp and/or electric space
    discharge devices of the gas or vapor ionization type, the system including
    a switch which is operated by the movement of a vehicle controlling
    (steering wheel, hand or foot) lever.


CLS 200/61.86
TXT Devices under subclass 61.85 in which movement of the actuating member
    results in the actuation of a circuit controller and of a valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81+,    for fluid pressure actuated switches, and especially 81.9 for flow
    responsive devices where the valve or obstruction, if any, is present
    merely to operate the switch element(s).


CLS 200/61.87
TXT Means under subclass 61.85 in which the operating handle functions to
    control a vehicle retarding device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 457.3 for signals responsive
    to the position of a hand brake lever.


CLS 200/61.88
TXT Apparatus under subclass 61.85 in which the operating handle functions to
    vary the relation of gears in a train, one to another, to effect a change
    in speed ratio or in relative directions of rotation, between the input and
    output of such gearing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61.28,  for turn indicator type switches mounted on gear shift levers.


CLS 200/61.89
TXT Means under subclass 61.58 in whose operation the volitional use comprises
    the actuation of a foot operated member for controlling the functioning of
    a conveyance part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 80+ for
    systems for supplying electric energy to lamp and/or electric space
    discharge devices of the gas or vapor ionization type, the system including
    a switch which is operated by the movement of a vehicle controlling
    (steering wheel, hand or foot) lever.


CLS 200/61.9
TXT Devices under subclass 61.89 whose circuit making or breaking effect is
    nullified by (1) disabling the vehicle pedal as a circuit controller
    actuator, or (2) use of a series related circuit disabling switch, brought
    about by the attainment of a predetermined condition of the vehicle's
    engine.


CLS 200/61.91
TXT Apparatus under subclass 61.58 in whose operation the volitional use
    comprises the rearrangement of gears in a speed-change gearing train and in
    which the circuit controlling elements are not directly affected by a gear
    shift lever.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61.88,  for circuit makers and breakers actuated concurrently with the use
    of a gear shift lever.


CLS 200/61.93
TXT Circuit-controllers under subclass 52 which are actuated by the attempted
    entry into or egress from a room, compartment, building, or other
    enclosure, through the use of unauthorized methods or means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 541+ for electrical
    automatic intrusion responsive indicating systems.

            SNAP.  This group relates to circuit makers and breakers which are
    constructed to operate with a quick motion.  They are limited to those
    switches in which the quick motion of the contacts is not dependent on the
    rate of movement of the operator.  This is usually accomplished by a spring
    connection between the operator and the switch-contact, so that the initial
    movement of the operator puts the spring under tension and when the contact
    is released it is snapped by action of the spring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154,    for quick-action switches in which the contact is positively
    controlled by the operator, the quick action being derived through lever
    mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, the subclasses under the heading
    "Mechanical Movements" especially subclasses 97.1+ and 100.1+, for
    mechanical movements, per se,  involving snap actions.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    appropriate subclasses for electrothermal and thermally actuated snap
    switches.


CLS 200/79
TXT Circuit-controllers under class definition used in transmission or trolley
    lines which are operated by the breaking of the wire to disconnect the
    broken section.


CLS 200/80
TXT Circuit-controllers under class definition in which the contact is operated
    by means responsive to centrifugal force.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 535+ for a speed responsive
    device of the centrifugal weight type, per se.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 236+ for
    speed controlled systems which may include centrifugally operated switches.


CLS 200/81
TXT Devices under class definition in which the operating means is responsive
    to pressure of a liquid, gas, or vapor.  The pressure may be caused by a
    confined fluid or by the flow of a fluid.

    (1)     Note.  This group includes devices responsive to vacuum.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 632+, for one shot explosion actuated
    expansible chamber type motors.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclasses for an
    expansible chamber device, per se.

    235,    Registers, subclass 452 for record-sensing devices wherein a switch
    may be opened or closed or circuits made in accordance with areas on the
    record that contain coded indicia, the area where said indicia is sensed
    conveying particular information.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclasses 114+ for electrothermally operated switches employing expansible
    or vaporizable fluid and subclasses 306+ for similar thermally actuated
    switches.


CLS 200/81.4
TXT Combinations, under subclass 81, of two or more distinct circuit makers and
    breakers, each having its own operating means, at least one of said
    operating means being responsive to pressure of a fluid or to vacuum.


CLS 200/81.5
TXT Devices under subclass 81, having two or more distinct operating means, at
    least one of which is responsive to pressure of a fluid or to vacuum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81.4,   for combinations of two or more distinct circuit makers and
    breakers, each having its own operating means, at least one of said
    operating means being responsive to pressure of a fluid or to vacuum.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 625+ for gearing having
    provision for operation by either manual or power means, and subclass
    479.01 for manually operated control lever and linkage systems having a
    plurality of controlling elements.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 179.1+ for starters
    equipped with dual operators.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 91 for
    devices operated by a plurality of thermostats.


CLS 200/81.6
TXT Devices under subclass 81 of the type in which the fluid pressure (or
    vacuum) acts upon a body of conductive liquid causing the latter to move so
    as to open or close a circuit including the conductive liquid.

    (1)     Note.  The fluid pressure or vacuum may be applied either directly
    to the conductive liquid, or indirectly through a piston or diaphragm, so
    that the change in pressure causes liquid motion, as distinguished from
    fluid pressure operated means that cause change in position of a liquid
    contact switch, liquid motion being due to such change in position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182+,   for miscellaneous circuit makers and breakers employing liquid
    contact means.

    200+,   for periodic circuit makers and breakers employing liquid contact
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 747+ for manometric type pressure
    gauges.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclasses 122 and 331 for electrothermal or thermally actuated switches
    with conductive fluid contacts.


CLS 200/81.8
TXT Devices under subclass 81, of the type in which the operating means
    includes a flexible, arc-shaped tube, the curvature of which changes in
    response to changes in the fluid-pressure therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 732+ for pressure gauges of the
    Bourdon tube type.


CLS 200/81.9
TXT Devices under subclass 81 of the type in which the operating means is
    responsive to the flow of a fluid (including air-currents, wind, etc.), as
    distinguished from those which are responsive merely to the static pressure
    of the fluid.

    (1)     Note.  See alphabetical index to the classification of patents, the
    title "Flow" for the distribution of flow controlled devices in the several
    classes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, particularly subclasses 98+, 107, 459+, 486+, 496,
    and 497+ for valves with flow responsive actuating means.


CLS 200/82
TXT Devices under subclass 81 in which the fluid acts on a piston which moves
    in a cylinder.


CLS 200/83
TXT Devices under subclass 81 in which the fluid acts on a flexible sheet
    member confined in a housing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 96+ for a diaphragm type
    expansible chamber device.


CLS 200/84
TXT Devices under class definition in which the contact is operated by the
    movement of a float.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 308 and 313 for float operated
    switches combined with measuring structures.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclasses 314+ for thermally actuated switches employing an expansible
    fluid with float means.


CLS 200/85
TXT Circuit-controllers under class definition in which the operator is adapted
    to be moved by having a weight applied to it and subjected to the action of
    gravity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 666 for electric alarms which
    are automatically responsive to weight.


CLS 200/86
TXT Circuit-controllers under subclass 85 incorporated in mats or treads and
    adapted to be operated by a person stepping upon them.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 666 for electric alarms which
    are automatically responsive to the movement of a tread or treadle.


CLS 200/86.5
TXT Circuit-controllers under the class definition in which the operator by its
    nature, mounting or association with a device is adapted to be moved by
    foot applied force other than the force of gravity acting through the foot.


CLS 200/175
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the claimed device includes contact
    selecting means which in itself is acting, or automatic, the contact
    selecting structure operating by its own self-contained mechanism when
    activated by some impersonal influence as for example a signalling current
    or voltage transmitted from a distance, and which is not manual and
    requiring personal intervention; i.e., not requiring the presence of an
    operator. The art to be found in this and the indented subclasses is
    analogous to the structure to be found in Class 335, subclasses 111+ and in
    Class 379, Telephonic Communications, subclasses 242+.

    (1)     Note.  (a) The structure to be found in Class 335 is restricted to
    devices which are magnetically operated and of general utility and not
    restricted by the language in the claims to any one art device specifically
    classifiable elsewhere.  (b) The structure to be found in Class 379 is
    restricted by language in the claims, other than in the preamble, which is
    generally recognized as restricting the device to telephony.  (c) The
    patents classified in this and the indented subclasses are formerly in the
    telephone art but were found not to be restricted to the telephone art by
    any language other than perhaps in the preamble to the claims, and not
    recited as magnetically operated.  A similar group of patents, not
    restricted to any otherwise classifiable art, but which are specifically
    claimed as magnetically activated are to be found in Class 335 subclasses
    110+.

    (2)     Note.  The search to be complete must be extended to the
    appropriate subclasses in Classes 379 and 335 as discussed, supra.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for devices under the class definition in which a plurality of
    contacts are arranged to control two or more circuits and where the
    arrangement is not restricted to automatic selective means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 76 for electric motor controlled switches with
    plural contacts, subclasses 92+ for electromagnetically controlled
    vibrators with plural contact activating means, and subclasses 111+ for
    electromagnetically activated switches with plural contacts and not forming
    a part of a specific art device, which is otherwise classifiable, and
    wherein the activating structure comprises self acting (automatic) means
    similar to the telephone type.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825+ for remote control
    selective systems for controlling the operation of plural devices at a
    distance, the said control being exercised over a lesser number of
    communication lines than the number of different results which can be
    obtained.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 242+ for automatic telephone
    systems limited to instrument and their combinations for effecting the
    transmission of spoken sounds by means of electricity and in which
    connection between subscribers are automatically and mechanically made at a
    central station, without the aid or presence of an operator.


CLS 200/176
TXT Subject matter under subclass 175 wherein the claimed structure includes
    means whereby the movable contactor or wiper structure is caused to be
    first in one direction, and then at least in one other direction, the final
    selection being the result of the plurality of motions, or whereby at least
    two or more contactor or wiper structures are caused to have movement
    relative to one another.  The movements may include vertical, rotary,
    radial or other motions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17+,    for means under subclass 1 which is peculiarly adapted for the
    operation of multiple circuit controllers and subclass 18 for means for
    operating two or more controllers which have movement relative to one
    another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 112+ for switches which are of similar type, but
    magnetically activated, subclasses 122+ for devices wherein a plurality of
    individual controlled circuits are completed selectively, cyclically,
    alternately or intermittently by other than automatic means which may
    involve compound motions, subclasses 140+ for plural contact switches
    utilizing plural magnetic means which may or may not produce
    multi-directional movement.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 242+ for combined rotary and
    nonrotary switch lock out arrangements.


CLS 200/177
TXT Subject matter under subclass 176 wherein the plurality of directional
    motions are caused to take place in different planes, as for example a
    first rectilinear motion in a vertical plane combined with a rotary motion
    in a horizontal plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for combined rotary and nonrotary switch arrangements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 113 for automatic magnetically activated multiple
    contact switches having motion conversion means such as, rotary to
    reciprocal.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 299+ for automatic telephone
    switches utilizing combined rotary and nonrotary operating means.


CLS 200/178
TXT Subject matter under subclass 175 wherein the claimed structure includes
    apparatus whereby one or more carriers for the contact selecting means is
    caused to move or reciprocate in a single plane.  The motion usually takes
    place in a vertical plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for multiple circuit control switches with reciprocating contact
    means, subclass 46 for pattern-sheet controlled switches which may comprise
    any number of contacts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 118 for multiple contact switches automatically
    operated in a single plane, subclass 130 for plural contact switches having
    reciprocating or linearly sliding means whereby the contacts are
    selectively cyclically, alternately or intermittently activated, and
    subclasses 131+ for plural contact switches having reciprocating means
    whereby the plurality of contacts are simultaneously activated.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 299+ for automatic telephone
    switches establishing circuit connections by devices having motions in
    which a line terminal or connector moves in a longitudinal, transverse,
    vertical or radial direction.


CLS 200/179
TXT Subject matter under subclass 178 wherein the claimed structure includes at
    least one wiper or movable contactor which is adapted to be brought into
    contact with fixed contacts selectively through the medium of a carrier or
    rotor turning about a fixed axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24+,    for periodic multiple contact switches with rotary motion, subclass
    37 for retarded clocktrain rotary switch with multiple contacts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 575+ for pawl and ratchet
    movements.

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 64 for retarded or delayed type switches in which
    a plurality of contacts are alternately, consecutively or selectively
    activated by mechanical means, subclass 103 for alternating or fluctuating
    current activated switches utilizing induction or eddy current rotary
    means, subclass 117 for automatic plural contact switches with rotary
    selector motion, subclasses 126+ for plural contact type switches with
    rotary or compound motion means for selectively, cyclically, alternately or
    intermittent contact selection not automatic, subclasses 142+ for step by
    step type switches utilizing rotary motion devices which are magnetically
    activated.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 258+ for automatic percentage
    telephone switching systems, utilizing rotary single level switches.


CLS 200/180
TXT Subject matter under subclass 179 wherein the claimed structure comprises a
    clutch mechanism connecting a driving means to the carrier or rotor whereby
    the rotor may be disassociated from the driving means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 37 for reciprocating control
    means utilizing belt or chain means with a clutch, subclass 110 for
    reciprocating to reciprocating motion mechanical drive means with clutch.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 30+ for clutches in
    general.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclasses 132+ for railway signal
    type switching means, comprising plural contact sets and means for
    selecting any one or any combination of the contact sets with interlocking
    or clutch means.

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 121 for plural contact automatically operated
    switches with motor driven contact activation means including clutch means,
    subclass 126 for nonautomatic plural contact switches with rotary or
    compound motion means for selectively activating the contacts.


CLS 200/181
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the claimed apparatus
    comprises means whereby the completion or interruption of at least one
    electrical circuit is accomplished by means utilizing either the phenomenon
    wherein some materials experience an elastic strain as the result of an
    electric field, this strain being independent of the polarity of the field
    or by means utilizing the laws of electrostatics, i.e., the phenomena
    wherein, due to the mutual repulsion of all electricity for electricity of
    the same kind (of like polarity), a conductor of one polarity with its
    surrounding electric field is caused to attract or repulse another
    conductor with an electric field.

    (1)     Note.  All crystals, in addition to their first order
    piezo-electric effect, have a second order electrostrictive effect in which
    a distortion occurs which is proportional to the electric displacement.
    Patents in which piezo-electric devices are utilized for their
    electrostrictive effect, for the purpose of causing the control of one or
    more electric circuits, are to be found here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 463+ for changeable
    exhibitors which may utilize electrostrictive or electrostatic effects for
    controlled action.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosive Devices, subclasses 200+ for fuses or
    ignition devices utilizing electrical magnetic wave or radiant energy.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 91 for
    devices for magnetic or electrostatic field control, subclass 104 for
    electromagnet and highly inductive connection systems, subclass 109 for
    pulse producing systems utilizing the discharge of a capacitor and
    subclasses 125+ for switching systems responsive to electrical conditions
    and which may utilize electrostrictive or electrostatic principles.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 300 for
    nondynamo-electric generator or motor structure, subclasses 311+ for
    piezo-electric devices, per se, and subclasses 10+ for dynamo-electric
    generator or motor structure.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 118 for
    magnetostrictive motor devices.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 74 for motor type
    devices which may utilize the electrostrictive or  electrostatic
    principles, subclass 109 for devices for measuring or testing electricity
    and consisting of piezo-electric or electrostatic devices and subclass 144
    for testing devices with an electromagnetic field.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 509+ for miscellaneous externally effected circuits.

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 18 for automatic circuit breaking devices
    responsive to reverse currents or voltages, subclass 35 for automatic
    circuit breaking devices with trip means which may depend in part on
    electrostrictive or electrostatic means, subclasses 78+ for switching
    devices in which the movement of an armature depends upon the direction of
    a current in the armature controlling circuit, subclass 215 for relay
    devices utilizing the magnetostrictive principle for obtaining mechanical
    force, subclass 223 for relays utilizing relatively movable conductors,
    e.g., dynamometer type.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for particular inductor
    arrangements.

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, subclasses 112+ for
    electrostatic marking.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 207 for
    electric circuits for relays and electromagnets which utilize the
    electrostatic principle, subclasses 258+ for electrostatic igniting systems.


CLS 200/182
TXT Switching devices under the class definition in which electrical connection
    is made between two or more contacts or terminals by means of conducting
    liquid, usually mercury.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61.04+, for other electrically-conducting-liquid switching devices of
    special application.

    81.6,   for other liquid-contact switches of the type in which a fluid
    pressure (or vacuum) acts upon a body of conductive liquid causing the
    latter to move so as to open or close a circuit including the conductive
    liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 163+ for electric
    discharge devices which have a liquid electrode.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 92+ for devices for
    measuring, testing or sensing electricity, per se, and utilizing fluid
    conductors.

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 47+ for magnetically operated switches utilizing
    conductive liquid.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclasses 21, 80+, 331, and 373 for electrothermal or thermally controlled
    switches utilizing liquid contacts.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    subclasses 1+ and 60+ and the classes specified in the Notes to the
    definitions of those subclasses, for the apparatus and processes for the
    manufacture of electric lamp and electric space discharge devices, such
    apparatus and processes being analogous to those in making mercury switches.


CLS 200/183
TXT Subject matter under subclass 182 wherein the liquid contact switch is
    claimed in combination with another art device having an added purpose or
    utility independent of the switch and which claimed combination does not
    include sufficient structure details of the other art device for
    classification elsewhere or the combination is not provided for elsewhere.


CLS 200/184
TXT Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein the liquid contact switch is
    combined with an illumination means.


CLS 200/185
TXT Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein the liquid contact switch is
    combined with an electrical resistor (e.g., the resistor may be in the form
    of a heating coil).


CLS 200/186
TXT Subject matter under subclass 182 wherein some means of delaying electrical
    connection between the switch contact and the liquid is employed.


CLS 200/187
TXT Subject matter under subclass 182 wherein more than one switch is contained
    in a single housing.  The housing may be the only means by which the
    electrically conductive liquid is contained, wherein there are solid
    dividers which separate the liquid, or each switch may further be contained
    in an additional enclosure (e.g., a glass envelope) which is mounted within
    the single housing.


CLS 200/188
TXT Plural switches under subclass 187 wherein the switches are electrically
    connected by a solid metal conductor or by the liquid conductor of each
    switch (e.g., by the flowing-together of the liquid conductor by means of
    an aperture in a wall or septum).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221+,   for similar type connections occuring within a single switch.


CLS 200/189
TXT Subject matter under subclass 187 wherein a number of circuits are to be
    successively completed in a predetermined sequence, responsive to the
    relative movement of the contacts and the liquid.


CLS 200/190
TXT Subject matter under subclass 182 wherein electrical connection of the
    liquid contact switch is made or broken responsive to the level or height
    of the liquid in the enclosing housing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61.2+,  for similar switches of special application.

    230,    for switches wherein electrical connection is made or broken by the
    buoyancy of a float which is responsive to the rise and fall of a liquid
    (not to be confused with the liquid which is part of the switch).


CLS 200/191
TXT Subject matter under subclass 182 wherein the conductive-liquid container
    includes a capillary tube.


CLS 200/192
TXT Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the phenomenon of
    electro-capillarity is utilized.  Electro-capillarity action involves
    generation of a force when current flows from one conductive liquid to
    another in a capillarity tube, the force being a surface tension force at
    the boundary between the liquids.  The direction of movement of the liquids
    is the same as the direction of the current.


CLS 200/193
TXT Subject matter under subclass 182 wherein the conductive liquid constitutes
    and electrolyte.


CLS 200/194
TXT Subject matter under subclass 193 wherein the constituents of the
    electrolyte are specified by name or characteristics.


CLS 200/195
TXT Subject matter under subclass 182 wherein the conductive liquid is
    converted into a spray or jet stream.  Usually the conversion takes place
    by using a pump to transfer the liquid from a tank to a centrifugal force
    device which is responsible for creating the spray or jet stream which in
    turn establishes an electrical connection across at least two contacts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     for circuit controllers under the class definition in which a
    contact is operated by means responsive to centrifugal force.


CLS 200/196
TXT Subject matter under subclass 195 wherein electrical connection is made or
    broken at predetermined time intervals.


CLS 200/197
TXT Subject matter under subclass 196 wherein a wave-shaped conductive liquid
    jet is utilized for effecting the closing or interruption of an electric
    circuit.  The wave-shape of the liquid jet is generally produced by the
    interaction of a current carrying liquid jet and a magnetic field.


CLS 200/198
TXT Subject matter under subclass 196 wherein the contacts move relative to the
    container of the conductive liquid and dip into the liquid spray or jet.


CLS 200/199
TXT Subject matter under subclass 182 wherein the contacts move relative to the
    container of the conductive liquid and dip into the liquid.


CLS 200/200
TXT Subject matter under subclass 199 wherein electrical connection is made or
    broken at predetermined time intervals.


CLS 200/201
TXT Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein a number of circuits are to be
    successively completed in a predetermined sequence, responsive to the
    relative movement of the contacts and the liquid.


CLS 200/202
TXT Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein a cam is used to actuate the
    switch.


CLS 200/203
TXT Subject matter under subclass 182 wherein a cam is used to actuate the
    switch.


CLS 200/204
TXT Subject matter under subclass 203 wherein the cam actuation results in a
    wobbly motion of the container of the conductive liquid.


CLS 200/205
TXT Subject matter under subclass 203 wherein electrical connection is made or
    broken at predetermined time intervals.


CLS 200/206
TXT Subject matter under subclass 205 wherein more than one switch is involved,
    but not in the same housing.

    (1)     Note.  Where two or more switches are claimed as being in the same
    housing classification is in subclasses 187+.


CLS 200/207
TXT Subject matter under subclass 205 wherein the cam actuation results in a
    wobbly motion of the container of the conductive liquid.


CLS 200/208
TXT Subject matter under subclass 182 wherein electrical connection is made or
    broken at predetermined time intervals.


CLS 200/209
TXT Subject matter under subclass 182 wherein piston means (e.g., rod or
    plunger) are used to force the conductive liquid into electrical connection
    with the switch contacts.


CLS 200/210
TXT Subject matter under subclass 209 wherein the piston functions as a contact
    or carries a contact to make or break the circuit.


CLS 200/211
TXT Subject matter under subclass 182 wherein the switch is operated by a
    pressure deformable or flexible element, such as a diaphragm, a bellows or
    a bourdon tube. The movement of the deformable flexible means produces
    relative movement between the liquid and the contacts.


CLS 200/212
TXT Subject matter under subclass 211 wherein a number of circuits are to be
    successively completed in a predetermined sequence, responsive to the
    relative movement of the contacts and the liquid.


CLS 200/213
TXT Subject matter under subclass 211 wherein contact means are attached to the
    flexible element for movement into the conductive liquid to close the
    switch.


CLS 200/214
TXT Subject matter under subclass 182 wherein the switch circuit is broken by
    utilizing some mechanical means for separating the conductive liquid into
    at least two bodies, or shifting the liquid.


CLS 200/215
TXT Subject matter under subclass 182 including housing or support means which
    is external to the switch, per se, (i.e., external to the envelope or
    container which contains the electrically conductive liquid and the
    contacts).


CLS 200/216
TXT Subject matter under subclass 215 wherein the external housing is
    hermetically sealed.  This sealing does not concern the switch envelope
    (usually a sealed glass container) which is almost always sealed to prevent
    loss of the liquid and air-evacuated to remove harmful oxidizing gases.


CLS 200/217
TXT Subject matter under subclass 215 wherein an electrical contact of the
    switch extends through the switch housing or envelope and serves as a
    support element for the switch.


CLS 200/218
TXT Subject matter under subclass 217 wherein the actuator means of the switch
    is held under a resilient securing means usually for the purpose of
    imparting on-off stop limits or a resistance to the movement of the
    actuating means.


CLS 200/219
TXT Subject matter under subclass 215 wherein the housing or support includes
    actuating means for moving the switch, per se, into circuit-making or
    breaking position.


CLS 200/220
TXT Subject matter under subclass 182 wherein the switch is actuated either by
    tilting or rotating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61.47,  for switch devices of special application in which a body of
    current conducting liquid flows under the influence of gravity, or by
    reason of its inertia, into or out of circuit closing position.  (See also
    Note (1) under this subclass).


CLS 200/221
TXT Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein the container for the liquid is
    divided into plural liquid containing chambers with fluid passage means
    interconnecting the chambers.  Actuation of the switch causes the liquid of
    one or more of the chambers to flow into circuit closing relationship with
    contact elements of the switch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188,    for plural switches in a single housing with a common conductive
    liquid.


CLS 200/222
TXT Subject matter under subclass 221 wherein the switch envelope or container
    is formed of one or more metal parts and at least one of these parts is
    used as an electrical terminal for the switch, per se.


CLS 200/223
TXT Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein a contact is of such a shape
    (e.g., ring, disk or cone shaped) that the electrical circuit is completed
    when the switch is positioned within certain predetermined angular limits
    and the electrical circuit is broken when the switch is not positioned
    within the said predetermined angular limits.


CLS 200/224
TXT Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein a common contact may be moved
    into more than one contact closing position to establish electrical
    connections in one of a plurality of electrical circuits.


CLS 200/225
TXT Subject matter under subclass 224 wherein the common contact member is the
    single pole type and is limited to closing the electrical connection by
    movement into either of two contact closing positions.


CLS 200/226
TXT Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein the switch envelope or container
    is formed of one or more metal parts and at least one of these parts is
    used as an electrical terminal for the switch, per se.


CLS 200/227
TXT Subject matter under subclass 226 wherein the liquid container contains a
    restrictive element of insulative material which forms a recess or groove
    in the container for receiving the conductive liquid in order to make or
    break the switch circuit.


CLS 200/228
TXT Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein the liquid container contains a
    restrictive element of insulative material which forms a recess or groove
    in the container for receiving the conductive liquid in order to make or
    break the switch circuit.


CLS 200/229
TXT Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein the conductive liquid container
    has a recess formed integrally therewith.


CLS 200/230
TXT Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein electrical connection is made or
    broken by the buoyancy of a float located in the conductive liquid.
    Whenever the liquid rises or falls, the float carried by the liquid is
    moved into contact opening or closing position.  The float itself may
    constitute the contact, or it may carry a contact thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    190,    for fluid-level switching devices that do not require a float.


CLS 200/231
TXT Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein the sealing of a contact or
    contacts to the switch container is set forth in specific details.  The
    mere statement that the contact is sealed to the container is not
    sufficient to cause classification in this subclass.


CLS 200/232
TXT Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein some means is specified for
    preventing splashing of the liquid conductor within the container whenever
    the switch is actuated.


CLS 200/233
TXT Subject matter under subclass 182 wherein the constituents of the
    conductive liquid are specified.


CLS 200/234
TXT Subject matter under subclass 233 wherein the liquid contains a
    contact-wetting agent.


CLS 200/235
TXT Subject matter under subclass 182 wherein the contact structure has
    specific details or the material of a contact is specified.


CLS 200/236
TXT Subject matter under subclass 235 wherein the mounting or attaching means
    of the contact is set forth in specific details.


CLS 200/237
TXT This subclass relates to an element of an electrical switch of this class
    (200) wherein the element is characterized by some significant structural
    detail or details.  If a claim is drawn to a sufficient number of elements
    which cooperate to form a complete switch, the patent is normally
    classified higher in the schedule and crossed in a "detail" subclass.


CLS 200/238
TXT A contact or contacts under subclass 237, wherein significant details are
    claimed which relate solely to some distinct characteristics concerning the
    contact.

    (1)     Note.  An electrical contact is defined as being one of at least
    two elements that constitutes the electrical connection point of a circuit
    maker and breaker, the elements being relatively movable to open and close
    a circuit.


CLS 200/239
TXT Subject matter under subclass 238, wherein the manner of cooperation or
    engagement between the contacts constitutes abutting. This type of
    engagement is characterized in that the relative movement between the
    contacts, whenever the contacts are approaching each other, terminates when
    the surface of one of the contacts touches the surface of the other
    contact.  Generally, there is no further movement between the contacts
    after the initial touch.


CLS 200/240
TXT Subject matter under subclass 239, wherein the engagement of the contacts
    by abutting is followed immediately by a rolling motion between the
    contacts, generally due to the curvature of at least one of the contacts.
    This rolling motion precludes any wiping or sliding movement between the
    contacts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241,    for "Subsequent Sliding" movement.


CLS 200/241
TXT Subject matter under subclass 239, wherein the engagement of the contacts
    by abutting is followed immediately by a sliding or wiping motion between
    the contacts.  This sliding or wiping motion precludes any rolling motion
    between the contacts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240,    for "subsequent rolling" movement.


CLS 200/242
TXT Subject matter under subclass 241, wherein the sliding or wiping motion
    between the contacts is designed for cleaning the contact surfaces.


CLS 200/243
TXT Subject matter under subclass 239, wherein there are at least two contact
    elements mounted on a common support and electrically connected, usually by
    the conductive material forming the support.


CLS 200/244
TXT Subject matter under subclass 239, wherein the moving contact is mounted on
    a rigid pivoted member.


CLS 200/245
TXT Subject matter under subclass 239, wherein each of the abutting contacts
    are mounted on a separate piece of resilient support, such support having
    the ability to bounce or spring back into shape, position, etc., after
    being pressed or stretched.


CLS 200/246
TXT Subject matter under subclass 245, wherein the resilient material is a
    spring blade support.


CLS 200/247
TXT Subject matter under subclass 245, wherein at least one of the resilient
    contact supports is held in position or guided by a slot or hole in a
    structural element such as an insulating block.


CLS 200/248
TXT Subject matter under subclass 239, wherein at least one of the abutting
    contacts is mounted in a semi-universal manner such that the contact will
    pivot or rotate to a position whereby the contact aligns itself squarely
    with its cooperating contact to give an efficient electrical connection.


CLS 200/249
TXT Subject matter under subclass 239, wherein adjusting means (e.g., a screw)
    is provided for positioning one of the contacts relative to its cooperating
    contact.  This positioning includes the setting of the gap between the
    cooperating contacts and/or the horizontal or sideways aligning between the
    contacts.


CLS 200/250
TXT Subject matter under subclass 239, wherein at least one of the abutting
    contacts is biased or pressed by some means into good electrical connection
    with the cooperating contact.  Frequently, the biased contact is biased
    inherently in the material of which it is made.


CLS 200/251
TXT Subject matter under subclass 250, wherein the biasing means includes means
    (e.g., a screw) for changing or adjusting the biasing pressure in order to
    improve the electrical connection between the cooperating contacts.


CLS 200/252
TXT Subject matter under subclass 238, wherein the manner of cooperation or
    engagement between a fixed contact and a moving contact constitutes sliding
    or wiping. This type of engagement is characterized in that the relative
    movement between the contacts, whenever the contacts are approaching each
    other, does "not" terminate when the surface of one of the contacts touches
    the surface of the other contact, but rather there is a further movement
    between the contacts which constitutes a sliding or wiping motion after the
    initial touch.


CLS 200/253
TXT Subject matter under subclass 252, wherein the sliding or wiping motion
    between the contacts is designed for cleaning the contact surfaces.


CLS 200/253.1
TXT Plug type contacts:

    Subject matter under subclass 252 wherein the contacts, when engaged, are
    arranged in such a manner that one contact is inserted into another mating
    part.


CLS 200/254
TXT Subject matter under subclass 252, wherein the sliding or wiping motion is
    effected by a knife blade and clip type of contacts.


CLS 200/255
TXT Subject matter under subclass 254, wherein at least one of the relatively
    sliding contacts (usually the fixed or nonmoving contact) is biased or
    pressed by some means into good electrical connection with the cooperating
    contact.  Frequently, the biased contact is biased inherently in the
    material of which it is made.


CLS 200/256
TXT Subject matter under subclass 255, wherein the biasing means includes means
    (e.g., a screw) for changing or adjusting the biasing pressure in order to
    improve the electrical connection between the cooperating contacts.


CLS 200/257
TXT Subject matter under subclass 252, wherein the relative moving contacts,
    usually only one of these contacts, are mounted on a separate piece of
    resilient support, such supports having the ability to bounce or spring
    back into shape, position, etc., after being pressed or stretched.


CLS 200/258
TXT Subject matter under subclass 252, wherein at least one of the relative
    moving contacts, usually the fixed contact, is mounted such that the
    contact will pivot, rotate, or spring (according to the nature and
    structure of the material) into a position whereby the contact aligns
    itself squarely with its cooperating contact to give an efficient
    electrical connection.


CLS 200/259
TXT Subject matter under subclass 252, wherein adjusting means (e.g., a screw)
    is provided for positioning one of the contacts relative to its cooperating
    contact.  This positioning includes the setting of the gap between the
    cooperating contacts and/or the horizontal or sideways aligning between the
    contacts.


CLS 200/260
TXT Subject matter under subclass 252, wherein at least one of the relatively
    sliding contacts is biased or pressed by some means into good electrical
    connection with the cooperating contact.  Frequently, the biased contact is
    biased inherently in the material of which it is made.


CLS 200/261
TXT Subject matter under subclass 260, wherein the biasing means including
    means (e.g., a screw) for changing or adjusting the biasing pressure in
    order to improve the electrical connection between the cooperating contacts.


CLS 200/262
TXT Subject matter under subclass 238, wherein the contact is specific to the
    material therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 544+ for a
    metallic contact claimed nominally, that is, of some, but insufficient
    structural detail for limitation as an element in a circuit maker or
    breaker.


CLS 200/263
TXT Subject matter under subclass 262, wherein the material of each of the
    cooperating contacts (i.e., a contact which abuts or slides against and
    relative to another contact) is different.


CLS 200/264
TXT Subject matter under subclass 262, wherein the contact comprises a porous
    substance in which the pores have been filled (infiltrated) with a
    different material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 545 for
    composite stock material comprising a porous metallic powder compact
    impregnated with a nonmetal.


CLS 200/265
TXT Subject matter under subclass 262, wherein the contact material constitutes
    a physical mixture of various ingredients, not alloyed.


CLS 200/266
TXT Subject matter under subclass 262, wherein the contact material constitutes
    a chemically combined mixture of various metals or compounds of metals.


CLS 200/267
TXT Subject matter under subclass 262, wherein the contact material constitutes
    one layer.

    (1)     Note.  The support to which the layer is attached does not
    constitute a layer.

    (2)     Note.  For purposes of classification in this subclass, the term
    "layer" is meant to include sheet material or coating material, either
    material being adhesively bonded to a support (e.g., weld, resin, cold
    flow, etc.) or to another layer as indicated in subclasses 268 and 269.


CLS 200/268
TXT Subject matter under subclass 262, wherein the contact material constitutes
    two layers.  Each layer material is different from the other layer.

    (1)     Note.  The support to which the layers are attached does not
    constitute a layer.

    (2)     Note.  For purposes of classification in this subclass, the term
    "layer", is meant to include sheet material or coating material, either
    material being adhesively bonded to a support (e.g., weld, resin, cold
    flow, etc.), or to another layer as indicated in subclasses 268 and 269.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 615+ for a
    metallic composite defined in terms of the composition of its components,
    especially subclasses 616+ for bimetallic temperature-sensitive stock.


CLS 200/269
TXT Subject matter under subclass 262, wherein the contact material constitutes
    three or more layers.  Each adjacent layer of material is different from
    each other layer, however, every other layer of material could possibly be
    similar to each other (e.g., layers 1 and 3, layers 2 and 4, or layers 3
    and 5, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  The support to which the layers are attached does not
    constitute a layer.

    (2)     Note.  For purposes of classification in this subclass, the term
    "layer" is meant to include sheet material or coating material, either
    material being adhesively bonded to a support (e.g., weld, resin, cold
    flow, etc.), or to another layer as indicated in subclasses 268 and 269.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 617 for
    composite metallic stock having more than two components and deflectable by
    a temperature change, and subclass 635 for composite metallic stock having
    four or more distinct components with alternate recurrence of each type
    component.


CLS 200/270
TXT Subject matter under subclass 262, wherein the contact material constitutes
    an element of the periodic table.  There may be more than one element,
    however they must be individual elements, not chemically combined.


CLS 200/271
TXT Subject matter under subclass 238, relating to the structure of a movable
    contact, referred to frequently, by the term "blade", or "pole plate".


CLS 200/272
TXT Subject matter under subclass 271, wherein the movable contact is combined
    with support means.


CLS 200/273
TXT Subject matter under subclass 271, wherein the movable contact is
    structured for rotary movement.


CLS 200/274
TXT Subject matter under subclass 273, wherein the rotary contact is combined
    with support means.


CLS 200/275
TXT Subject matter under subclass 238, wherein the contact is characterized by
    a particular shape or structure.


CLS 200/276
TXT Subject matter under subclass 275, wherein the contact is in the form of a
    coil spring.


CLS 200/276.1
TXT With push button actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 wherein the switch includes a push button
    actuator to cause the coil spring to engage or disengage the stationary
    contacts.


CLS 200/277
TXT Subject matter under subclass 275, wherein at least one of the contact
    elements has a rolling configuration (e.g., cylindrical, sphere, etc.).


CLS 200/277.1
TXT With push button actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 277 wherein the switch includes a push button
    actuator to cause the cylindrical or spherical contact to engage or
    disengage the stationary contact.


CLS 200/277.2
TXT With rocker actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 277 including an actuator adapted to
    oscillate in a limited arc to move the contacts into engagement or
    disengagement.


CLS 200/278
TXT Subject matter under subclass 275, wherein the contact constitutes two or
    more sheets of material which are physically bonded together (e.g., screw,
    clamp, etc.).


CLS 200/279
TXT Subject matter under subclass 275, wherein the contact is characterized by
    the shape or structure of the contact-making surface (e.g., grooved).


CLS 200/280
TXT Subject matter under subclass 238, wherein the contact or the support
    thereof may be repositioned or rearranged in order to alter the operation
    of the switch.


CLS 200/281
TXT Subject matter under subclass 238, wherein the contact may be readily
    replaced by a new contact (e.g., replaceable insert); or the contact making
    surface may be renewed by manipulating the contact so that a different area
    is presented for use (e.g., reversing).


CLS 200/282
TXT Subject matter under subclass 238, wherein the contact is a generally
    U-shaped structure, usually made of spring material, which grips another
    contact or the contact portion of a blade.


CLS 200/283
TXT Subject matter under subclass 238, wherein the contact is supported by a
    leaf spring. The leaf spring itself may be the contact.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this definition with the definition of subclass 284.


CLS 200/284
TXT Subject matter under subclass 238, wherein the contact is integrally
    supported by a structure which also constitutes a terminal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is not intended to include the leaf spring
    with terminal as provided for in subclass 283.


CLS 200/285
TXT Subject matter under subclass 238, wherein the contact has specialized
    structure or material for enhancing the freedom of movement when touching
    another contact.


CLS 200/286
TXT Subject matter under subclass 238, which relates to the adjusting of the
    contact position relative to its carrier or support.  Such a combination is
    sometimes called a contact finger.  This subclass also provides for contact
    pressure adjusting not limited to claimed cooperating contacts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249     and 259, for position adjustment of a contact relative to its
    cooperating contact.

    251,    256 and 261, for pressure adjustment between cooperating contacts.


CLS 200/287
TXT Subject matter under subclass 286, wherein the adjusting of the contact is
    automatically performed.


CLS 200/288
TXT Subject matter under subclass 238, wherein the contact has structure which
    reduces or prevents bounce when connection is made with another contact.


CLS 200/289
TXT Subject matter under subclass 238, wherein the contact has structure for
    the purpose of cooling itself.


CLS 200/290
TXT Subject matter under subclass 238, wherein the contact is biased or pressed
    into connection with its cooperating contact by spring means (e.g., coil
    spring, rubber spring, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  The spring means is in addition to the contact supporting
    structure.


CLS 200/291
TXT Subject matter under subclass 238, wherein a moving contact has detent
    means which is adapted for stopping and releasing the contact relative to
    its rigid support.  An example of the detent means is a ball, carried by
    the contact or by the contact mounting, which is spring-biased into a slot
    in the rigid support.


CLS 200/292
TXT Subject matter under subclass 238, wherein at least one of the contacts
    constitutes a printed conductor and its support.


CLS 200/293
TXT Subject matter under subclass 237, wherein the switch cases or switch
    mounting bases constitute specific housing structure or specific supporting
    structure.


CLS 200/293.1
TXT Unitary switch mounted in handle or handgrip:

    Subject matter under subclass 293 wherein a switch with its own housing is
    mounted in a tool handle or handgrip and wherein the switch is the actuator
    of the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332.2,  for devices that also have an auxiliary housing.

    502,    for switches having an auxiliary actuator, and


CLS 200/294
TXT Subject matter under subclass 293, wherein the housing or base has
    significant structural details for attachment onto a surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    296,    for housings or bases that extend into and through a surface.


CLS 200/295
TXT Subject matter under subclass 293, wherein the attaching structure of the
    housing or base constitutes flexible or resilient structure (e.g., metal
    spring, plastic spring, usually integral with housing, etc.).


CLS 200/296
TXT Subject matter under subclass 293, wherein the housing or base has
    significant structure which is adapted for mounting in or through a panel.


CLS 200/297
TXT Subject matter under subclass 293, wherein the switch casing or base has
    significant structure which is adapted for adjusting the switch casing or
    base for proper fit and alignment in a box, commonly known as an electrical
    outlet box or switch box. These boxes are normally located in walls of
    houses and other buildings.


CLS 200/298
TXT Subject matter under subclass 293, wherein the switch case is suspended
    (i.e., hanging) by or on flexible cord or other means.


CLS 200/299
TXT Subject matter under subclass 298, wherein the pendant housing is combined
    with a lamp socket.


CLS 200/300
TXT Subject matter under subclass 293, wherein the housing includes a portion
    which can be readily shattered, cut or destroyed (e.g., fire box cover of
    glass).


CLS 200/301
TXT Subject matter under subclass 293, wherein the housing or base contains a
    means for counter-acting the effects of vibration (e.g., foam rubber
    mounted inside the housing).


CLS 200/302.1
TXT Dust, dirt, or moisture excluding:
    Subject matter under subclass 293 wherein the switch housing contains means
    which inhibits the ingress of dust, dirt, moisture, etc.


CLS 200/302.2
TXT Seal for push button actuator:
    Subject matter under subclass 302.1 wherein the excluding means includes a
    seal between a push button actuator and the housing.


CLS 200/302.3
TXT Seal for rocker or lever actuator:
    Subject matter under subclass 302.2 wherein the excluding means includes a
    seal between a rocker actuator and the housing, or a seal between a lever
    actuator and the housing.


CLS 200/303
TXT Subject matter under subclass 293, wherein the housing is divided into
    components which are normally detachable or separable.


CLS 200/304
TXT Subject matter under subclass 293, wherein a portion of the casing has
    means which serves particularly in a protective capacity.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include hermetical sealing and total
    exclusion of the elements as does subclass 302.


CLS 200/305
TXT Subject matter under subclass 304, wherein the shield portion has
    electrical grounding means.


CLS 200/306
TXT Subject matter under subclass 293, wherein the housing has significant
    means for venting (e.g., air holes in housing).


CLS 200/307
TXT Subject matter under subclass 293, wherein the switch casings are provided
    with structural means for attaching a plurality of switch casings to each
    other.


CLS 200/308
TXT Subject matter under subclass 237, wherein indicating means are utilized
    for showing "on" or "off" position of the switch or for showing the
    location of the switch.


CLS 200/309
TXT Subject matter under subclass 308, wherein the indicating means are inserts
    designed to be readily interchangeable.  Typical interchangeable inserts
    carry different words.


CLS 200/310
TXT Subject matter under subclass 308, wherein the indicating means include
    illumination means.


CLS 200/311
TXT Subject matter under subclass 310, wherein the illuminating means of the
    indicator is filtered or changed into a color by using one or more
    transparent color elements.


CLS 200/312
TXT Subject matter under subclass 310, wherein the illuminating means is
    supplemented with an additional type of indicating means. The indicating
    means has to be more than mere numerals, letters or words.  For example,
    projections indicating the switch setting position would constitute a
    proper type of additional indicating means.


CLS 200/313
TXT Subject matter under subclass 310, wherein the illumination is visible
    through the actuator.


CLS 200/314
TXT Subject matter under subclass 313, wherein the actuator is a push button
    type.


CLS 200/315
TXT Subject matter under subclass 313, wherein the actuator is a rocker or
    toggle type.


CLS 200/316
TXT Subject matter under subclass 313, wherein the actuator is rotatable.


CLS 200/317
TXT Subject matter under subclass 310, wherein the illumination is visible
    through the switch housing or base.


CLS 200/318
TXT Subject matter under subclass 237, wherein a latch or detent device is
    utilized for holding the contacts of a switch in a desired position.  The
    contacts are usually latched in circuit-closing position to prevent
    accidental opening, however; the contacts may also be latched in a
    circuit-opening position, or in both a circuit-closing and a
    circuit-opening position.  The latch is usually released by hand or some
    other physical means when desired.


CLS 200/318.1
TXT Mechanism to hold push button down:

    Subject matter under subclass 318 including a push button and a mechanism
    to hold the push button in a desired position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    523+,   for push/pull devices which include alternate action mechanism.


CLS 200/318.2
TXT Auxiliary motion of actuator required to release (e.g., turn or slide):

    Subject matter under subclass 318.1 wherein the push button must be
    physically moved, either by turning or sliding, etc., in order to move the
    push button from its latched position.


CLS 200/319
TXT Subject matter under subclass 318, wherein the latch cannot be released due
    to vibrating and jarring conditions.


CLS 200/320
TXT Subject matter under subclass 318, wherein more than one latch is utilized
    in a switch.


CLS 200/321
TXT Subject matter under subclass 318, wherein the latch is closed or opened
    manually.


CLS 200/322
TXT Subject matter under subclass 321, wherein the latching means comprises a
    plate or lever-type element which is movable into a position necessary for
    locking or releasing the contacts.


CLS 200/323
TXT Subject matter under subclass 318, wherein the latch includes self
    actuating means to cause its operation.


CLS 200/324
TXT Subject matter under subclass 323, wherein the self-operating latching
    means comprises a cam-type element (e.g., plate, lever, etc.), which is
    movable into a position necessary for locking the contacts.


CLS 200/325
TXT Subject matter under subclass 324, wherein the cam-type element is either a
    spring itself or a spring-biased element.


CLS 200/326
TXT Subject matter under subclass 323, wherein the latching means is operated
    by gravity.


CLS 200/327
TXT Subject matter under subclass 318, wherein one contact is stopped in a
    predetermined position by a detent or some other type stop element which is
    usually located on or near the other cooperating contact.


CLS 200/329
TXT Subject matter under subclass 237, wherein the devices include structure of
    the operating handles or buttons.


CLS 200/330
TXT Subject matter under subclass 329, wherein an additional actuator operates
    the primary operating handle or button.


CLS 200/331
TXT Subject matter under subclass 330, wherein the additional or auxiliary
    actuator is extended to provide remote operating means for the primary
    operating handle or button.


CLS 200/332
TXT Subject matter under subclass 330, wherein the additional or auxiliary
    actuator is a handle or button which pivots about a point remote from the
    point of the applied or operating force.


CLS 200/332.1
TXT Having auxiliary housing:

    Subject matter under subclass 330 including detailed structure of an
    auxiliary housing and actuator into which a switch having its own housing
    and actuator is inserted.

    (1)     Note.  The mounted or encased switch is often referred to as a
    microswitch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    330+,   for auxiliary actuators which move the actuator of a switch.


CLS 200/332.2
TXT Housing is a handle or handgrip for tool or appliance:

    Subject matter under subclass 332.1 wherein the auxiliary housing is a
    hand-held housing generally in the shape of an elongated graspable handle
    or in the shape of a handgrip.

    (1)     Note.  The switch housing is generally an electrical tool or
    appliance, e.g., drill, vacuum cleaner, router, etc.


CLS 200/333
TXT Subject matter under subclass 329, wherein the actuator is provided with
    covering means.


CLS 200/334
TXT Subject matter under subclass 329, wherein the actuator is provided with
    safety structure to prevent accidental actuation of the switch.


CLS 200/335
TXT Subject matter under subclass 329, wherein the actuator is a handle or
    button which pivots about a point remote from the point of the applied or
    operating force.


CLS 200/336
TXT Subject matter under subclass 329, wherein the actuator rotates in an
    arcuate plane.


CLS 200/337
TXT Subject matter under subclass 329, wherein the actuator comprises linkages
    connected between the operating handle or button and the moveable contact.


CLS 200/338
TXT Subject matter under subclass 329, wherein the actuator includes additional
    structure for securing it to the switching mechanism and may also serve as
    guiding means.


CLS 200/339
TXT Subject matter under subclass 329, wherein the actuator pivots about an
    axis (e.g., toggle or rocker).


CLS 200/341
TXT Push button:

    Subject matter under subclass 329 wherein the operating structure comprises
    a push button element having a single surface on which pressure can be
    exerted.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are push buttons with a single pushing
    surface or with two surfaces when the surfaces are coaxial.

    (2)     Note.  Push buttons are also called keys or caps, often with the
    actual pushing surface called a keypad.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 472+ under appropriate titles for
    key-board or key lever actuating mechanisms.


CLS 200/342
TXT Including lost motion connection:

    Subject matter under subclass 341 including a means connected to the push
    button to allow pretravel motion prior to moving the contacts into
    engagement, or to permit the push button to have overtravel motion after
    moving the contacts into engagement.


CLS 200/343
TXT Hinged button (e.g., piano key):

    Subject matter under subclass 341 wherein the push button is connected in a
    flexible manner to a supporting structure permitting pivotal motion of the
    push button in only one plane pivoted about an axis along the connection.


CLS 200/344
TXT Mechanism to keep key level:

    Subject matter under subclass 341 wherein structure is included to prevent
    tilting or sideways motion of the push button when other than a direct
    straight-line force is applied.

    (1)     Note.  The surface of the push button is normally in the form of a
    bar similar to a space bar of a typewriter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 490+ for key-cap or key-stem
    structure used in typewriting machines.


CLS 200/345
TXT Cap/stem and stem/housing details:

    Subject matter under subclass 341 wherein the particular connecting
    structure between (a) the cap and a stem or plunger, or (b) between the
    stem and a housing or casing, are structurally defined.


CLS 200/400
TXT CONTACT MOVED BY SUDDEN RELEASE OF STORED ENERGY (E.G., SPRING CHARGER):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the switch device
    includes (a) means to stress a spring device, (b) a latching device for
    holding the stressed spring from operating after being stressed, and (c) an
    actuating device to release the stored energy of the spring to open or
    close a circuit.

    (1)     Note.  Often the spring or stored energy device is charged by an
    electric motor.

    (2)     Note.  These switches differ from snap switches in that snap
    switches have an actuator (e.g., a lever, rocker, push button, knop, etc.)
    which charges a spring and then during its motion releases the spring.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 2, for similar type devices
    for releasing or tripping portions of machines to cause other portions to
    automatically operate due to the expenditure of the potential energy
    possessed by such parts.


CLS 200/401
TXT Toggle mechanisms:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising an actuator having
    mechanical linkage connections between the actuator and a movable contact;
    the linkage includes at least two links between the actuator and the
    contact; the switch also having a biasing member, usually a coil spring, to
    hold the links in various positions.


CLS 200/402
TXT Snap:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a switch having a
    moveable contact and an actuator, and wherein the contact is quickly or
    abruptly moved independently of the actuator during actuation.

    (1)     Note.  Contact movement is usually accomplished by a spring
    connection between the actuator and contact stressed during initial
    movement of the actuator followed by a quick or abrupt movement of the
    contact when the actuator is moved beyond a predetermined point (i.e.,
    trigger point).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 97.1+ for a mechanical
    movement of the oscillating to oscillating kind and wherein movement of the
    driving member causes an initially delayed but subsequently rapid movement
    of the driven member, and subclasses 100.1+ for a mechanical movement of
    the reciprocating to or from oscillating kind and wherein movement of the
    driving member causes an initially delayed but subsequently rapid movement
    of the driven member.


CLS 200/403
TXT Mercury snap:

    Subject matter under subclass 402, wherein the moveable contact is a
    metallic conducting fluid, (i.e., mercury).


CLS 200/404
TXT Magnetic snap:

    Subject matter under subclass 402 including a magnet to cause a rapid or
    abrupt motion of the moveable contact independent of the actuator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 205+ for permanent magnet-actuated switches.


CLS 200/405
TXT Double snap:

    Subject matter under subclass 402 wherein the moveable contact is quickly
    or abruptly moved independently of the actuator (i.e., snapped) towards
    both an open and a closed position.


CLS 200/406
TXT Including raised flexible snap element (e.g., dome):

    Subject matter under subclass 405 having a flexible spring element and
    wherein the spring element has a dome like configuration, the shape of the
    spring being such that when it is actuated the direction of the spring
    reverses to cause snapping.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    516,    for snap domes used in membrane switches.


CLS 200/407
TXT Blade element stressed to twisted configuration:

    Subject matter under subclass 405 wherein the moveable contact is moved by
    a planar spring which is prestressed to have two stable positions separated
    by maximum stress over center position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    453+,   for blades which are bent in a U-shape and act as a compression
    spring.


CLS 200/408
TXT Spring buckle:

    Subject matter under subclass 405 including a spring with each of its ends
    secured to a switch housing in a stressed arched state, wherein the snap
    movement is caused by the buckling movement of the arched spring past a
    line defined by the two secured ends.

    (1)     Note.  Normally the spring is held in an arched state wherein snap
    occurs when the direction of the arch is reversed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    535,    for switches having the contacts controlled by a spring held at
    both ends where the motion is nonsnap.


CLS 200/409
TXT Spring compressed between two points at a fixed distance from each other:

    Subject matter under subclass 408 wherein the spring ends are separated by
    a fixed distance with the spring under stress, and the ends of the spring
    generally attached to a housing.

    (1)     Note.  Normally the spring has its ends fixed to a housing and the
    actuator exerts pressure at a point between the ends.


CLS 200/410
TXT Rotating contact:

    Subject matter under subclass 405 wherein the moveable contact moves in an
    arc of a circle relative to a stationary contact in a continuous unlimited
    rotary motion.

    (1)     Note.  The rotary movement is usually in one direction.


CLS 200/411
TXT Contact movement blocked until spring is charged (e.g., latch):

    Subject matter under subclass 410 including a spring connection between the
    actuator and contact, and an element that (a) blocks the contact movement
    until the actuator has moved to stress the spring and (b) moves the
    blocking element from its blocking position.


CLS 200/412
TXT Push button actuated:

    Subject matter under subclass 411 including a reciprocating type push
    button to move the contacts.


CLS 200/413
TXT Pull cord actuated:

    Subject matter under subclass 411 wherein the actuator includes an
    elongated flexible member attached to the switch to actuate the switch when
    a pull force is exerted thereon.


CLS 200/414
TXT Including radial motion:

    Subject matter under subclass 411 wherein the blocking means moves in a
    radial direction to release the contact for rotary motion.


CLS 200/415
TXT Contact restrained until spring is charged (e.g., detent):

    Subject matter under subclass 410 including a spring connection between the
    actuator and contact, and a spring biased restraining element which
    releases the contact when the force of the connecting spring reaches a
    predetermined release level to cause snap motion of the contact.


CLS 200/416
TXT Cam actuated contact:

    Subject matter under subclass 410 wherein the contact is moved by a cam,
    wedge or inclined surface and is quickly or abruptly released after the
    contact passes over the highest point of the cam, wedge or inclined surface.

    (1)     Note.  This is also referred to in the art as the "hill-and-valley"
    type.


CLS 200/417
TXT Push button actuated:

    Subject matter under subclass 416 wherein the switch device includes a
    reciprocating type button to actuate the contact.


CLS 200/418
TXT Pull cord actuated:

    Subject matter under subclass 416 wherein the actuator includes an
    elongated flexible member attached to the switch when a pull force is
    exerted thereon.


CLS 200/419
TXT Ratchet controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 410 comprising a spring biased rotary contact
    which is part of a ratchet and pawl system for limiting the rotation of the
    contact to a one-way rotary motion.


CLS 200/420
TXT Pull cord actuated:

    Subject matter under subclass 419 wherein the switch device includes an
    elongated flexible member to actuate the switch when a pull force is
    exerted on the flexible member.


CLS 200/421
TXT Pawl carries contact:

    Subject matter under subclass 419 wherein the pawl is a contact that
    cooperates with the rotating contact on the ratchet.

    (1)     Note.  The pawl is usually a leaf spring.


CLS 200/422
TXT Push button actuated:

    Subject matter under subclass 421 including a reciprocating type push
    button actuator.


CLS 200/423
TXT Pull cord actuated:

    Subject matter under subclass 421 wherein the switch device includes an
    elongated flexible member to actuate the switch when a pull force is
    exerted on the flexible member.


CLS 200/424
TXT Contact movement is blocked until spring is charged:

    Subject matter under subclass 405 including, a spring connection between
    the actuator and moveable contact, and an element which blocks the movement
    of the contact until the actuator has moved to stress the spring and moves
    the blocking element from its blocking position.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are devices wherein the blocking element is
    part of the actuator.

    (2)     Note.  Normally one end of the spring is directly driven by the
    actuator and the other end of the spring directly drives the contacts.
    However, the switch may also include intermediate linkages between both the
    actuator and a spring driving element and the contacts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    411,    for similar-type devices using a rotating contact.


CLS 200/425
TXT Blocked by distinct latch:

    Subject matter under subclass 424 including a separate mechanical blocking
    element which is moved or tripped to a nonblocking position by the actuator.


CLS 200/426
TXT Driving and driven element oscillate about a common axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 425 wherein the ends of the connecting spring
    are mounted on a driving and a driven element, both of which oscillate
    about a common axis.


CLS 200/427
TXT With reciprocating contact:

    Subject matter under subclass 426 including a linkage to translate the
    oscillating motion of the driven element into a reciprocating motion of the
    contact.


CLS 200/428
TXT Including cam or wedge release:

    Subject matter under subclass 425 including a cam and a spring biased cam
    follower element wherein movement of the cam follower relative to the cam
    over a high point causes a component of the bias force of the cam follower
    to reverse direction and wherein the actuator moves the latch to release
    the contact after the cam follower is past the reversal point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    431+,   and especially 437 for similar type cam or wedge release devices
    which do not include a latch.


CLS 200/429
TXT Including reciprocating contact:

    Subject matter under subclass 425 wherein the contact is moved in a
    straight line to a closed or opened circuit position.


CLS 200/430
TXT Contact movement is restrained until spring is charged (e.g., detent):

    Subject matter under subclass 405 including a connecting spring between the
    actuator and the moveable contact, and a spring biased restraining element
    which releases the contact when the force of the connecting spring reaches
    a predetermined release level to cause snap motion of the contact.


CLS 200/431
TXT Cam or wedge release:

    Subject matter under subclass 405 including a cam and spring biased cam
    follower element wherein movement of the cam follower relative to the cam
    over a high point causes a component of the bias force of the cam follower
    to reverse direction causing a quick or abrupt motion of the contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    428,    for similar type devices which include a latch.


CLS 200/432
TXT Roller contacts acts as cam:

    Subject matter under subclass 431 wherein a spherical or cylindrical type
    element is utilized as both the actuating cam and the contact.


CLS 200/433
TXT Contact slides over pivot point:

    Subject matter under subclass 431 wherein the contact is moved with a
    sliding motion over a pivot point by the actuator which causes the contact
    to cross over the pivot point with an abrupt snap motion.

    (1)     Note.  Normally the contact is spring biased towards the pivot
    point by a plunger type element carried by the actuator, however spring
    biased pivot points and rigid coupling of the contact to the actuator are
    included.


CLS 200/434
TXT Reciprocating contact:

    Subject matter under subclass 431 wherein the contact moves in a straight
    line to a closed or opened circuit position.


CLS 200/435
TXT Contact carrier snaps in opposite direction from actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 434 wherein the actuator carries either the
    cam or cam follower element, with the moveable contact carried by the other
    element, and with the contact reciprocating in the opposite direction from
    the actuator.

    (1)     Note.  Normally the actuator takes the form of a push button but
    other actuators are herein classified.


CLS 200/436
TXT Including lost motion coupling to cam:

    Subject matter under subclass 431 including a lost motion connection
    between the actuator and the cam or cam follower to permit with the cam or
    cam follower to rapidly complete its movement independently of the actuator
    once the high point of the cam is past.

    (1)     Note.  Normally the cam follower is in the form of a spring with
    the cam in the form of a square.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    469,    for similar devices wherein the cam snaps in one direction only.


CLS 200/437
TXT Spring biased element slides over pivoted element:

    Subject matter under subclass 431 wherein a spring biased element acts
    against an inclined pivoted element and is suddenly released, after passing
    the highest point on the element, to move the contact.

    (1)     Note.  Normally the moveable contact is carried by or is the
    pivoted element although linkages may be used.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    438,    for similar type devices wherein the spring bias is provided by the
    pivoted element which engages a rigid cam follower.


CLS 200/438
TXT Spring biased pivoted element snapped when cam follower crosses pivot:

    Subject matter under subclass 431 wherein a cam follower acts against a
    spring biased, pivoted element which abruptly pivots when the cam follower
    crosses the pivot point.

    (1)     Note.  Normally the spring bias for the pivoted element is in the
    form of a leaf spring carried by the pivoted element with the follower
    directly engaging the spring or in the form of a spring biased pivot.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    437,    for similar type devices utilizing a spring biased cam follower.


CLS 200/439
TXT Wedge on reciprocating actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 431 wherein the actuator includes a wedge
    shaped cam which forms part of the actuator and the wedge is carried by the
    actuator as it moves in a straight line motion to move the contacts.


CLS 200/440
TXT With mechanism to insure positive separation of contacts (i.e., positive
    kick):

    Subject matter under subclass 405 combined with a mechanical linkage to
    positively move the contacts during a portion of the actuator travel.

    (1)     Note.  These devices are usually intended to break welded contacts
    or to overcome friction to enable the normal spring system to snap the
    contacts.


CLS 200/441
TXT Contact moved by separate lever:

    Subject matter under subclass 440 including a distinct lever which is moved
    by the actuator to initiate movement of the contact, wherein movement of
    the lever is at the end of the travel of the actuator.


CLS 200/442
TXT Actuator moves contact near limit of travel:

    Subject matter under subclass 440 including abutments on the actuator which
    engage the contact when the actuator is near the limits of its travel.


CLS 200/443
TXT Contact driven by impact element:

    Subject matter under subclass 405 including a lost motion coupling between
    the moveable contact and an element which strikes a hammerlike blow to the
    contact to break contact welds or overcome friction.

    (1)     Note.  These devices are intended to break contact welds or
    overcome friction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    446,    for similar devices where the snapped element engages the contacts
    before the snapped element is moved overcenter by the actuator.


CLS 200/444
TXT Having weight drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 443 wherein the striking element is a mass
    acted upon by gravity.


CLS 200/445
TXT Snap spring system using multiple diverse springs:

    Subject matter under subclass 405 including two or more dissimilar springs
    (e.g., leaf springs, coil springs) which cause the rapid abrupt movement of
    the contact.

    (1)     Note.  Herein included are systems having two or more sequential
    snap motions involved in the movement of the contact.


CLS 200/446
TXT Systems having lost motion connections between the actuator, an
    intermediate snapped element, and the contact:

    Subject matter under subclass 405 including, an intermediate snapped
    element and nonrigid connections between the actuator, intermediate snapped
    element, and the contact to allow independent motion of the actuator,
    snapped element, and contact.


CLS 200/447
TXT Double ended type (e.g., reciprocating bridging contacts):

    Subject matter under subclass 405 wherein there are at least two moveable
    contacts carried symmetrically by a support.

    (1)     Note.  The snapped element is normally the contacts and is normally
    in the shape of a disc or a rectangle with one or two springs coupling the
    rectangle to the rod or with a dome type spring coupling the disc to the
    rod.


CLS 200/448
TXT Contact pivots moved by actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 447 wherein the snap action of the contacts
    is caused by the movement of a contact pivot point; movement of the contact
    pivot point is caused by movement of the common support.

    (1)     Note.  The pivot point of the contacts is usually on the common
    support.


CLS 200/449
TXT Reciprocating contacts:

    Subject matter under subclass 405 wherein the contact is caused to move in
    a straight line between open and closed positions.

    (1)     Note.  Normally the contact is driven by a pivoted element which is
    snapped.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    462+,   for similar snap devices using pivoted contacts, where the pivoted
    contact is normally the snapped element and corresponds to the pivoted
    driven element.


CLS 200/450
TXT Compression spring type:

    Subject matter under subclass 449 wherein a spring held in a prestressed
    state is utilized to cause the contact to snap.

    (1)     Note.  The element being snapped is pivoted and there is a linkage
    between the snapped element and contacts to cause the contact to
    reciprocate in a straight line motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    453,    for similar devices wherein the contact is pivoted or oscillates
    about a limited arc where the pivoted contact is normally the snapped
    element and corresponds to the pivoted drive element.


CLS 200/451
TXT End of blade pivotally carries element compressing blade:

    Subject matter under subclass 405 including a prestressed bladelike spring
    element and wherein one end of the blade normally carries a contact, and
    wherein the other end is attached to a housing and is adapted for pivotal
    movement during actuation.


CLS 200/452
TXT Both ends of blade are freely floating:

    Subject matter under subclass 405 including a bladelike element with one
    end of the blade carrying the moveable contact and with the other end of
    the blade normally being moved to cause actuation.

    (1)     Note.  There is no definitive fixed pivot point for the blade.  The
    blade is mounted normally by two compression springs or by a compression
    spring and a rigid link normally mounted between the ends of the blade.


CLS 200/453
TXT Compression spring (e.g., push force):

    Subject matter under subclass 405 wherein the snapping action is caused by
    a resilient member (e.g., spring) prestressed (i.e., compressed) by
    colinear, opposed forces.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are one piece leaf spring elements which are
    shaped to have legs in both compression and tension.  The nature of the leg
    under compression governs classification.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    450,    for similar snap devices using a linkage to cause the oscillated
    snap element to drive the contact in a reciprocating straight line motion.


CLS 200/454
TXT Both ends of spring move:

    Subject matter under subclass 453 wherein the spring has an initial
    position prior to actuation, and assumes another position after actuation,
    and wherein after an abrupt motion both ends of the spring are located in a
    new position.


CLS 200/455
TXT Having roller contact:

    Subject matter under subclass 454 including a spherical or cylindrical-type
    contact.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are devices which utilizes a track
    for the roller rather than a pivoted link.  In these cases the pivot point
    is taken to be the center of curvature of the track.


CLS 200/456
TXT Both ends of spring are carried by blade (e.g., leaf spring):

    Subject matter under subclass 454 including a bladelike member and wherein
    the prestressed spring is carried between two portions of the blade.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are leaf spring blades where the
    compression spring is an integral part of the leaf spring blade.


CLS 200/457
TXT Axially compressed coil spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 454 including a spiral shaped spring which is
    subjected to a force along its longitudinal axis during actuation.


CLS 200/458
TXT One end of spring is carried by actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 454 wherein a one piece actuator directly
    carries one end of the spring.

    (1)     Note.  The actuator is that part of the switch which is first moved
    to change the make or break status.  There are no other mechanical
    connections between the actuator and the spring.


CLS 200/459
TXT One end of spring is fixed:

    Subject matter under subclass 453 wherein one end of the spring engages a
    fixed abutment on a support and the other end of the spring engages a
    moveable member which is caused to move with a snapping action when the
    spring passes a fixed point.


CLS 200/460
TXT Central portion of spring is moved to cause snap:

    Subject matter under subclass 459 wherein the central portion of the spring
    is directly moved by an actuator.


CLS 200/461
TXT Blade is moved to cause snap:

    Subject matter under subclass 459 wherein the compression spring is a
    resilient blade and wherein an actuator directly engages the blade to cause
    the blade to snap.


CLS 200/462
TXT Tension spring (e.g., pull force):

    Subject matter under subclass 405 including a spring which is used to exert
    a pulling force to cause the quick abrupt motion of the contacts.

    (1)     Note.  Normally the contacts are pivoted and directly connected to
    the spring although there may be a linkage between the snapped element and
    the contacts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    449,    for similar snap devices normally using a pivoted snapped member
    with a linkage to cause the contacts to reciprocate in a straight line
    motion.


CLS 200/463
TXT Contact pivot point is moved to cause snap:

    Subject matter under subclass 462 including a pivoted contact which is
    caused to snap when its pivot point is moved beyond a line connecting the
    two ends of the spring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    448,    for similar devices having an even number of contacts pivoted on
    the actuator normally using a tension spring connected between at least two
    of the contacts.


CLS 200/464
TXT Pivot point is carried by actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 463 wherein the pivot point of the contact is
    directly mounted on the actuator.


CLS 200/465
TXT Both ends of spring move:

    Subject matter under subclass 462 wherein the spring has an initial
    position prior to actuation, and assumes another position after actuation,
    and wherein after an abrupt motion both ends of the spring are located in a
    new position.


CLS 200/466
TXT One end of spring is carried by actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 465 wherein a one piece actuator directly
    carries one end of the spring.


CLS 200/467
TXT One end of spring is fixed:

    Subject matter under subclass 462 wherein one end of the spring engages a
    fixed abutment on a support and the other end of the spring engages a
    moveable member which is caused to move with a snapping action when the
    spring passes a fixed point.


CLS 200/468
TXT Single snap:

    Subject matter under subclass 402 wherein the contact is caused to abruptly
    or quickly move during part of the actuator travel in only one direction,
    with the contact being fully controlled by the actuator in the other
    direction.


CLS 200/469
TXT Including lost motion coupling to cam:

    Subject matter under subclass 468 including a cam, cam follower, and a lost
    motion connection between the cam and actuator, wherein the quick abrupt
    motion of the contact is caused when the high point of the cam is moved
    past the cam follower with the cam then quickly moving independent of the
    actuator.

    (1)     Note.  Normally the cam follower is a spring biased contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    436,    for similar devices wherein the cam snaps in both directions.


CLS 200/470
TXT Contact movement is blocked by latch until spring is charged:

    Subject matter under subclass 468 including a spring connection between the
    actuator and contact, and an element which blocks the movement of the
    contact until the actuator has moved to stress the spring and moves the
    blocking element from its blocking position.


CLS 200/471
TXT Contact restrained before snap spring is charged (e.g., detent):

    Subject matter under subclass 468 including a spring connection between the
    actuator and contact, and a spring biased restraining element which
    releases the contact when the force of the connecting spring reaches a
    predetermined release level to cause snap motion of the contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    430,    for similar devices wherein the contact is snapped in both
    directions.


CLS 200/472
TXT Detent function performed by spring biased contact (e.g., knife blade):

    Subject matter under subclass 471 wherein the stationary contact acts as a
    spring biased detent, restraining the moving contact until a spring
    connected to the moving contact, overcomes the detent spring force allowing
    the moving contact to quickly separate.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are double throw switches which
    snap away from both contacts.  These are considered single snap devices
    because the contacts do not snap closed.


CLS 200/500
TXT Helical drive mechanism:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the opening or closing of
    an electrical circuit is operated by a helical element.

    (1)     Note.  The helical drive mechanism may include rack and pinions,
    worm drive devices, screw-type drive or helical grooves on the driving
    shaft.


CLS 200/501
TXT Gear driven:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising relatively rotatable
    bodies or combinations of such bodies each provided with circumferential
    teeth intermeshing with each other to impart a drive motion to move a
    contact member to open or close a circuit.


CLS 200/502
TXT Solid contact:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein an electrical circuit si
    completed by the physical engagement and disengagement of two solid
    conductive elements (i.e., contacts) to form a complete switch.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are devices which may have plural
    sets of contacts, however, the plurality herein is an obvious duplication
    of a single contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for devices arranged to control two or more circuits.


CLS 200/503
TXT Rolamite-type:

    Subject matter under subclass 502 comprising a flexible roller band or
    spring band device wherein at least a pair of rotatable roller contact
    members are disposed within a switch housing and the flexible resilient
    band is convoluted around the roller contact members in S-shaped
    configuration so as to maintain the roller axes parallel as they move
    within the housing when actuated.


CLS 200/504
TXT Coaxial switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 502 wherein the switch is used to switch a
    signal between a first and a second coaxial cable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 260+ for the
    combination of a coaxial conductor system including switches.


CLS 200/505
TXT Hand held squeeze actuated switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 502 including a switch device comprising a
    housing which normally consists of a bulb or sleeve element on which a
    pressure is exerted especially on opposite sides to actuate the conductive
    elements.

    (1)     Note.  These devices lack a clearly identifiable actuator
    projecting from a housing such as a lever or push button element to operate
    the switch device.


CLS 200/506
TXT Interposed nonconductor:

    Subject matter under subclass 502 including a nonconductive element which
    is inserted between the solid conductive elements to hold the conductive
    elements physically separated during the presence of the nonconductive
    element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61.19,  for similar type devices in combination with a special application.


CLS 200/507
TXT Screw used as moving contact:

    Subject matter under subclass 502 wherein a movable threaded member is
    utilized as the solid contact member for completing the electrical circuit.


CLS 200/508
TXT Both contacts are moved:

    Subject matter under subclass 502 including structure to move each solid
    conductive element separately into engagement or disengagement in relation
    to each other.

    (1)     Note.  There are no stationary contacts present in the switch.


CLS 200/509
TXT Bimodal (e.g., single stroke make/break-no make on return):

    Subject matter under subclass 502 wherein the contacts travel in one path
    upon actuation and includes mechanism to divert the contacts into another
    path upon their return.

    (1)     Note.  The initial actuating stroke causes a closing and then
    opening (or vice-versa) of the contacts.  The return stroke of the actuator
    returns the movable contact to its original position, but the mechanism
    does not permit reactuation.


CLS 200/510
TXT Push button actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 509 including a reciprocating-type push
    button having a single surface on which pressure is exerted to actuate the
    contacts.


CLS 200/511
TXT Compressible elastomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 502 wherein a circuit is completed by an
    elastomeric material containing discrete particles of electrically
    conductive materials embedded therein and wherein, in the compressed state,
    the particles come into contact with each other to complete the circuit,
    and as the compression is released, the particles again separate to open
    the circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 114, for variable resistors using
    elastomeric conductors.  These switches differ from the resistors in the
    amount of change of resistance with pressure.  The switch normally changes
    from open or infinite resistance to closed or low resistance with only a
    small change in pressure.  The resistor has a gradual change in resistance
    such that intermediate resistance can be obtained.


CLS 200/512
TXT Membrane type:

    Subject matter under subclass 502 wherein the switch includes at least one
    contact member which is carried on or actuated by a flexible sheet, which
    cooperates with another contact on a substrate to open or close a circuit.

    (1)     Note.  The membrane switch normally comprises a substrate and a
    flexible sheet sealed together with a separate spacer which is normally
    used to separate the substrate, and the flexible sheet normally carries the
    moving contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for similar type switches arranged in keyboard manner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 20+ for an operator
    actuated code transmitter including circuitry.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 288.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclass 479.1, for push button controllers
    using variable capacitance.  The capacitor normally has a substrate with a
    conductive plate and a flexible membrane with a moveable conductive plate
    like a membrane switch but has in addition an insulative layer to prevent
    the plates from contact.


CLS 200/513
TXT Specific dome shape:

    Subject matter under subclass 512 wherein the flexible sheet comprises a
    particularly defined convex configuration, designed to buckle under
    pressure, and having the moving contact within or under the convex area.


CLS 200/514
TXT Specific nonconductive materials:

    Subject matter under subclass 512 comprising a substrate and a flexible
    member, and wherein there is disposed a spacer separating the substrate and
    flexible member, the spacer or flexible member being of specified
    nonconductive materials.


CLS 200/515
TXT Pressure equalizing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 512 including means to vent a compartment
    formed between the flexible member and the substrate, to either the
    atmosphere or to another compartment so as to equalize the pressure of air
    or other fluid displaced by the flexible sheet member when actuated.


CLS 200/516
TXT Including auxiliary dome/disc type spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 512 including an arched disc or dome type
    spring disposed between the flexible sheet member and the substrate,
    wherein the spring may be utilized as the moveable contact.


CLS 200/517
TXT Including additional actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 512 wherein the membrane switch includes
    additional means to actuate the membrane switch.

    (1)     Note.  The additional means is usually attached or applied above
    the flexible member in order to press on the flexible member.


CLS 200/518
TXT Plural actuators operate single switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 502 including two or more actuating devices
    utilized to engage and disengage the solid conductive elements of a single
    switch device, each of the actuating devices can operate the switch
    individually.


CLS 200/519
TXT Push and/or pull with 3 or more positions:

    Subject matter under subclass 502 wherein the contacts are moved into
    engagement or disengagement by manually grasping, guiding, pushing or
    lifting a rigid device which can be manipulated into three or more
    positions into and out of a switch housing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    538+,   for similar type push/pull mechanical devices but which devices
    include only two position movements.


CLS 200/520
TXT Push button operated:

    Subject matter under subclass 502 wherein the contacts are moved into
    engagement or disengagement by a push button actuator having a single
    surface on which pressure is exerted to engage and disengage the contacts.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are also actuators which reciprocate with
    one pushing surface, and also pivoted or hinged type actuators which have a
    single pushing surface.  All of these type actuators are inherently two
    positions switches.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    538+    and 553+, for switches which have two pushing surfaces, and 51.16,
    for push button switches associated with connector couplings, (i.e., light
    bulbs).


CLS 200/521
TXT Including tactile feedback mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 520 wherein structure is provided to simulate
    a varied resistance to depression of the push button to indicate by feel
    the position of the contacts.

    (1)     Note.  These devices generally try to simulate the effects of a
    snap switch which reaches maximum resistance to travel prior to switch-over
    followed by an abrupt decline in resistance after the contacts are closed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclass 491.3 for tactile feedback type
    mechanisms used in typewriters.


CLS 200/522
TXT Trigger actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 520 wherein the push button is a lever-type
    element to control the engagement or disengagement of the contacts.

    (1)     Note.  The push button is normally in the shape of a trigger on a
    firearm or an actuator on an electrical tool, etc.


CLS 200/523
TXT Including alternate action mechanism, (e.g., push-pull):

    Subject matter under subclass 520 wherein the position of the solid
    conductive element is alternated between opened and closed with each
    actuation of the push button and wherein the solid conductive element
    remains in the last position until the push button is further actuated.


CLS 200/524
TXT With heart-shape cam:

    Subject matter under subclass 523 including a cam track having a generally
    cardioid shape which is utilized to hold the position of the solid
    conductive element in engagement or disengagement.


CLS 200/525
TXT With W-shaped rocking element:

    Subject matter under subclass 523 wherein a w-shaped element is utilized to
    change the position of the solid conductive elements by rocking the
    w-shaped element from one side to the other with the push button and
    further includes means to engage alternate grooves of the w-shaped element
    during actuation.


CLS 200/526
TXT With rotating member, (e.g., ball point pen type):

    Subject matter under subclass 523 including a rotating member and a
    mechanism to convert a generally reciprocating motion of the push button
    into unlimited rotary motion of the rotating member, wherein each actuation
    of the push button indexes the rotary member a predetermined amount.

    (1)     Note.  These devices may be similar to ball point pen retraction
    mechanisms having ratchet type movements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    417,    419, 422, 526, and 532, for similar type mechanisms wherein the
    rotating element is a contact which is snapped.


CLS 200/527
TXT Including rotating contact:

    Subject matter under subclass 526 wherein the rotating member carries, or
    is the solid conductive member which moves in an arc of a circle, engages
    and disengages a solid stationary conductive element.


CLS 200/528
TXT Rotating cam moves contact:

    Subject matter under subclass 526 wherein the rotating member is a cam
    which engages a moveable conductive element to engage and disengage with a
    stationary conductive member.


CLS 200/529
TXT Mechanism to transfer reciprocating to rotary or rocking:

    Subject matter under subclass 520 including a mechanism to convert
    reciprocating motion of the push button to rotary or rocking motion during
    actuation of the push button.


CLS 200/530
TXT Contact carried by push button:

    Subject matter under subclass 520 wherein the push button carries the solid
    conductive member.


CLS 200/531
TXT Sliding contact:

    Subject matter under subclass 530 wherein the solid conductive element
    carried by the push button engages a fixed solid conductive element in a
    sliding manner.


CLS 200/532
TXT Leaf spring contact:

    Subject matter under subclass 530 wherein the solid conductive element is
    carried by the push button and is in the form of a leaf spring.


CLS 200/533
TXT Cam actuated contact:

    Subject matter under subclass 520 wherein actuation of the push button
    causes relative movement between a cam and cam follower to cause motion of
    the solid conductive element.


CLS 200/534
TXT Abutting contact:

    Subject matter under subclass 520 wherein engagement between the solid
    conductive element is characterized in that the relative movement between
    one of the solid conductive elements terminates when the surface of one
    touches the surface of the other.

    (1)     Note.  Generally there is no further movement between the
    conductive elements after the initial touch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    508,    for switches wherein both solid conductive elements are caused to
    engage in an abutting fashion, however there are no stationary solid
    conductive elements included in these switches.


CLS 200/535
TXT Leaf spring contact:

    Subject matter under subclass 534 wherein leaf springs are utilized as
    either the movable or stationary conductive elements.


CLS 200/536
TXT Sliding contact:

    Subject matter under subclass 520 wherein the solid conductive elements are
    engaged and disengaged in a sliding manner.


CLS 200/537
TXT Reciprocating actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 502 comprising means for moving or
    controlling the solid conductive elements into engagement or disengagement
    in a straight line motion.


CLS 200/538
TXT Push/pull rod:

    Subject matter under subclass 537 wherein the solid conductive elements are
    moved into engagement by a rigid rod actuating member and disengaged when
    the rigid rod actuating member is moved in the opposite direction.

    (1)     Note.  These switch devices are generally the reverse of a push
    button switch, being pulled into engagement rather than pushed into
    engagement.  Also included in this subclass are push rods that require a
    push at one end to actuate and a push at the other end to deactuate.


CLS 200/539
TXT Specific detent structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 538 including detailed mechanical structure
    of means to hold the actuating rod member in an engaged position.


CLS 200/540
TXT Contact carried by rod:

    Subject matter under subclass 538 wherein the solid conductive element is
    carried by the rigid rod actuating member.


CLS 200/541
TXT Sliding contact:

    Subject matter under subclass 540 wherein the solid conductive elements are
    engaged and disengaged in a sliding manner.


CLS 200/542
TXT Cam actuated contact:

    Subject matter under subclass 538 wherein movement of the rigid rod
    actuating member causes relative movement between a cam and cam follower to
    cause motion of a solid conductive element.


CLS 200/543
TXT Pull cord:

    Subject matter under subclass 537 wherein the solid conductive members are
    moved into engagement and disengagement by pulling an elongated flexible
    member on which a pulling force can be exerted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    413,    418, 420, and 423, for snap switches using rotating contacts
    wherein a pull cord is used to actuate the switch, and also 51.15 for
    switches combined with or actuated by connector coupling and operated by a
    pull chain or cord.


CLS 200/544
TXT Rotating contact:

    Subject matter under subclass 543 wherein one of the solid conductive
    elements moves in an arc of a circle, relative to a stationary contact, in
    a continuous unlimited rotary motion.


CLS 200/545
TXT Cam actuated contact:

    Subject matter under subclass 543 wherein a pull force of the elongated
    flexible member causes relative movement between a cam and cam follower to
    cause motion of the solid conductive elements.


CLS 200/546
TXT Leaf spring contact:

    Subject matter under subclass 543 including a leaf spring and wherein the
    leaf spring is utilized as either the movable or stationary conductive
    elements.


CLS 200/547
TXT Slide switch (handle projects perpendicular to motion):

    Subject matter under subclass 537 including a switch housing and a sliding
    actuator wherein the actuator protrudes from the housing at right angles
    relative to the housing, and relative to its sliding direction.


CLS 200/548
TXT Housing and actuator form detent:

    Subject matter under subclass 547 wherein the housing and actuator include
    a mechanism which incorporates a holding device to retain the actuator in a
    given position.


CLS 200/549
TXT Contact carried by slide:

    Subject matter under subclass 547 wherein the actuator carries the solid
    conductive element.


CLS 200/550
TXT Sliding contact:

    Subject matter under subclass 549 wherein the solid conductive element,
    carried by the actuator, engages a fixed solid conductive element in a
    sliding manner.


CLS 200/551
TXT Cam actuator contact:

    Subject matter under subclass 547 wherein movement of the actuator causes
    relative movement between a cam and cam follower to cause motion of a solid
    conductive element.


CLS 200/552
TXT Two button switches (noncoaxial parallel buttons):

    Subject matter under subclass 537 wherein there are two push buttons which
    are movable independently of each other to engage or disengage the solid
    contact elements.


CLS 200/553
TXT Rocking actuator (e.g., rocker, lever):

    Subject matter under subclass 502 including an actuator having at least two
    pushing surfaces wherein the actuator oscillates in a limited arc about an
    axis parallel to the outer surface of a switch housing from which the
    actuator projects.

    (1)     Note.  The switches in this subclass are generally characterized by
    having an actuator with two pushing surfaces that cause an element,
    normally the actuator itself, to oscillate.  Often the push buttons are an
    integral part of the oscillating member.  The two button switches in this
    subclass normally have both buttons projecting from the same side of the
    housing.  Switches with the rocking actuator mounted to the side of the
    housing, rather than within the housing, are included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    538,    for switches with two button actuators where the two buttons
    reciprocate along the same axis.  These switches normally have the buttons
    projecting from opposite sides of the housing.


CLS 200/554
TXT Knife blade contact:

    Subject matter under subclass 553 comprising a movable blade type
    conducting element and a generally U-shaped fixed receiving member so that
    the movable blade member can engage the U-shaped member for closing or
    opening a circuit.


CLS 200/555
TXT With catch:

    Subject matter under subclass 554 including means to hold the blade
    conducting element and the U-shaped receiving member in a fixed opened or
    closed position.


CLS 200/556
TXT Housing and actuator form detent:

    Subject matter under subclass 553 including a housing and an actuator which
    further includes a mechanism which incorporates a holding device to retain
    the actuator in a desired position.


CLS 200/557
TXT Actuator biasing mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 553 including specific spring type means to
    urge the actuator to return to a normal nonactuated center position after
    momentary motion of the actuator to either side.


CLS 200/558
TXT Cam actuated contact:

    Subject matter under subclass 553 wherein movement of the actuator causes
    relative movement between a cam and cam follower to cause motion of the
    movable solid conductive elements.


CLS 200/559
TXT Leaf spring contact:

    Subject matter under subclass 558 wherein the solid conductive element,
    operated by the cam, is a leaf spring.


CLS 200/560
TXT Rotating contact:

    Subject matter under subclass 553 wherein one of the solid conductive
    elements moves in an arc of a circle, relative to a stationary contact, in
    a limited rotary motion.


CLS 200/561
TXT Reciprocating contact in straight-line motion:

    Subject matter under subclass 553 including mechanism to convert the
    oscillating motion of the actuator to limited straight-line motion.


CLS 200/562
TXT Contact carried by actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 553 wherein the actuator carries the movable
    solid conductive element.


CLS 200/563
TXT Sliding contact:

    Subject matter under subclass 562 wherein the solid conductive element,
    carried by the oscillating actuator engages a fixed solid conductive
    element in a sliding manner.


CLS 200/564
TXT Rotating actuator (e.g., dial):

    Subject matter under subclass 502 including a housing and an actuator
    having a graspable extension for manipulating the actuator about an axis in
    a limited or unlimited circular motion relative to the housing.

    (1)     Note.  The graspable extension may also function as a dial to
    indicate position of the actuator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51.17,  for devices in which a switch is operated by means of a rotatable
    key.


CLS 200/565
TXT Housing and actuator form detent:

    Subject matter under subclass 564 wherein the housing and the actuator
    incorporate a mechanism for holding the actuator in a desired position.


CLS 200/566
TXT Auxiliary motion required to actuate or release (e.g., push to rotate):

    Subject matter under subclass 564 wherein the actuator is in an initial
    hold or lock state and wherein the actuator must be physically moved, such
    as by push or pull force in order to release the actuator from its hold or
    lock state prior to actuation.


CLS 200/567
TXT Rotation about a longitudinal axis of tool or appliance:

    Subject matter under subclass 564 wherein the circular motion of the
    actuator is around the longitudinal axis of the body of a housing of a tool
    or appliance.


CLS 200/568
TXT Contact actuated by cam:

    Subject matter under subclass 564 including a cam and cam follower, wherein
    movement of the actuator causes relative movement between the cam and cam
    follower to actuate the solid conductive element.


CLS 200/569
TXT Leaf spring contact operated by cam on actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 568 wherein the solid conductive element is a
    leaf spring-type contact and wherein the leaf spring contact is actuated by
    a cam carried by the actuator.


CLS 200/570
TXT Rotating contact:

    Subject matter under subclass 564 wherein one of the solid conductive
    elements moves in an arc of a circle, relative to a stationary contact, in
    an unlimited rotary motion.


CLS 200/571
TXT Sliding contact:

    Subject matter under subclass 570 wherein the solid conductive element,
    carried by the oscillating actuator engages a fixed solid conductive
    element in a sliding manner.


CLS 200/572
TXT Linear moving contact:

    Subject matter under subclass 564 including mechanism to convert the
    circular motion of the actuator into straight-line motion of the contact.


CLS 200/573
TXT Cam operates contact or microswitch:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a cam which imparts
    motion directly to the contact to open or close an electrical circuit, or
    imparts motion to a unitary switch, (i.e., microswitch) to actuate the
    switch.

    (1)     Note.  A unitary switch is basically comprised of its own housing,
    actuator and terminal.  It is generally within another device.


CLS 200/574
TXT Peripheral cam:

    Subject matter under subclass 573 wherein the cam includes, on its outer
    circumferential surface, eccentric or disc-type structure which engages the
    contacts of the unitary switch to impart periodic motion to the contacts.


CLS 200/600
TXT CAPACITIVE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a capacitor is the
    circuit closing and opening device.

    (1)     Note.  A capacitor switch plus circuitry is classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 112+
    for a capacitive device controlled switching circuit.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    subclasses 166+ for capacitor charging or discharging.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 658+ for measuring
    capacitance.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclass 33 for a capacitive
    keyboard controlled code transmitter.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 168+ for a display with a
    capacitive keyboard.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 287+ for a
    mechanically variable capacitor, per se.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclass 479.1 for a typewriter keyboard with
    a capacitance operated switch.


CLS 201/
TTL DISTILLATION:  PROCESSES,  THERMOLYTIC

CLS 201/
TXT CONTENTS



    I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    II.     GLOSSARY

    III.    GENERAL LINES WITH OTHER CLASSES

    A.      Classification lines in subclasses and sections of Class 201.

    B.      Lines with chemical composition classes.

    C.      Processes including evaporation.

    D.      Superior to Class 203.

    IV.     INDEX TO CLASSES NOTED IN SUBCLASSES AND CLASS DEFINITION SECTIONS
    OF THIS CLASS

    V.      MISCELLANEOUS SEARCH NOTES

    I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    This is the residual class for thermolytic distillation processes not
    otherwise provided for.  For purposes of this class thermolytic
    distillation is limited to the heating of a solid carbonaceous material
    (distilland) to vaporize the portion volatile under the conditions employed
    and to cause a compound or compounds in the material to undergo chemical
    decomposition (thermolysis) to form different chemical substances, at least
    some of which are volatile under the condition employed and an unvaporized
    solid carbonaceous material (residue).  At least a part of the vaporized
    material is usually condensed to a liquid (distillate).  See section III
    for the lines between this class (201) and other classes having processes
    including thermolysis of carbonaceous material.

    Solid carbonaceous materials within the purview of this class (201) include
    (exemplary but not limiting) such minerals as coal and oil shale and
    substances of an organic nature such as organic wastes and wood.  Inorganic
    carbonates are excluded.

    II.     GLOSSARY

    AUTOTHERMIC DISTILLATION

    A thermolytic distillation operation in which the distilland, either by
    combustion of a portion of itself or by other chemical change, furnishes at
    least part of the heat for thermolysis and volatilization of either the
    inherent or the thermolized volatile matter.

    CARBONACEOUS MATERIAL

    Any solid material (mixture or compound) other than an inorganic carbonate
    which contains carbon or carbon containing compounds such as coke or wood.

    CHAR

    The generic term applied to the carbonaceous residue from a thermolytic
    distillation of any carbonaceous material. It encompasses such terms as
    bone black, charcoal and coke.

    COKE

    Strictly this is the amorphous, solid residue of coal after the volatile
    material has been distilled off in a thermolytic distillation.  The term is
    also applied in the art to the solid, carbonaceous residue from the
    thermolytic distillation of such materials as oil shale, petroleum and
    pitch.

    CONDENSATE

    See distillate in section I, of the class definition.

    Destructive Distillation:

    See thermolytic distillation.

    DISTILLAND

    For the purpose of this class is the carbonaceous material which is
    undergoing a distillation operation.

    DISTILLATE

    The liquid product condensed from vapor during the distillation operation.

    SEPARATORY DISTILLATION

    A process of vaporizing at least a portion of a liquid mixture (distilland)
    and condensing at least a portion of the vapor to separate the liquid
    mixture into distinct parts. The substances recovered as products must have
    preexisted in the original mixture.

    SUBLIMATION

    A process in which a solid passes into the vapor state without liquefaction
    and the vapor returns to the solid state without passing through the liquid
    phase.

    THERMOLYTIC DISTILLATION

    A distillation in which material found in the distilland undergoes chemical
    decomposition (thermolysis) to form different substances at least some of
    which are volatile at the temperature employed.  The volatile substances
    are recovered by condensation or sorption.

    EVAPORATION

    The process of changing a solid or liquid into a vapor.  This is the
    generic term for both sublimation and vaporization.  It differs from
    "distillation" in that distillation includes the additional step of
    condensing vapor produced to a liquid.

    III.    GENERAL LINES WITH OTHER CLASSES

    A.      Classification lines in subclasses and sections of Class 201.

    Class 201

    Class   Section Subclass

    34      III C1

    44      III B2c 5

    48      III B2d

    75      V

    110     V

    134     III C2

    203     III D

    208     III B2e 2.5 15

    252     III B2a,

            III B2b

    264     III B2b 5

    423     III B2a 17

    B.      Lines With Chemical Composition Classes

    1.      Product whether claimed in terms of their composition or claimed in
    terms of the process of making are classified in the appropriate
    composition class even if the process merely recites a thermolytic
    distillation operation.

    2.      Processes for heating solid, carbonaceous material to cause
    decomposition of compounds therein and to produce a solid, carbonaceous
    residue are classified here only if not otherwise provided for.

    a.      Processes of thermolytically decomposing a carbonaceous material to
    produce carbon black, graphite or other purified carbon are classified in
    Class 423, Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 445+ or Class 252,
    Compositions, appropriate subclasses, 502, Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or
    Support Therefor:  Product or Process of Making, subclasses 416+.

    b.      Processes for carbonizing a solid carbonaceous material to produce
    an electrically conductive product are classified in Class 252,
    Compositions, subclasses 502+ or Class 264, Plastic and Nonmetallic Article
    Shaping or Treating:  Processes, subclasses 29.1+.  A carbonized
    composition (e.g., activated carbon) claimed or disclosed solely as a
    sorbent or catalyst or a method of making such composition is classified in
    Class 502, Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product of
    Process of Making.

    c.      The line between processes in this class (201) and Class 44, Fuel
    and Related Compositions, is that this class (201) takes a carbonization
    process wherein the carbonization is specified as being complete or a
    vaporized component is intended to be recovered, while Class 44 takes a
    process wherein the extent of  carbonization is not specified or the
    disposition of any vaporized component is irrelevant to the process, only
    the final solid fuel product being of concern.

    d.      Class 48, Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, takes processes and
    apparatus for making heating and illuminating gases when no solid
    carbonaceous residue is left.

    e.      The line between this class (201) and Class 208, Mineral Oils:
    Processes and Products, is (1) thermolytic distillation of a distilland
    consisting predominately of solid carbonaceous material and a minor amount
    of a mineral oil material to produce a char is in this class (201), (2)
    thermolytic distillation of a distilland consisting predominately of a
    mineral oil material and a minor amount of a previously charred material is
    classified in Class 208, (3) for processes including extracting mineral
    oils from natural, solid, carbonaceous material as well as the digestion or
    conversion of the same as the digestion or conversion of the same to obtain
    mineral oils see Class 208, Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclass
    8 for the line.

    C.      Processes Including Evaporation

    Processes for evaporating without a condensing step are generally excluded
    from this class.  For specific lines between the processes of this class
    and other processes including an evaporating step, see below.

    1.      This class (201) is distinguished from Class 34, Drying and Gas Or
    Vapor Contact With Solids, in that the material herein is a solid or
    semi-solid which is chemically changed by the heating step so as to yield
    volatile substances containing condensable or absorbable components, while
    the material of Class 34 is a solid or semi-solid from which it is desired
    to remove an extraneous liquid, leaving the residue chemically unchanged,
    even though the volatile material be condensed.

    2.      Class 134, Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, takes claimed
    combinations of work handling or supporting means or steps with means or
    steps to apply a liquid to the work, as by spraying or immersion, where
    said liquid is distilled or evaporated, whether or not the resulting vapor
    is (1) directly contacted with the work or (2) condensed for re-use to
    contact the work.  When only the liquid distillation subcombination or the
    vapor-phase work contact subcombination has been claimed, see section III
    C1 above for the line between Class 201 and Class 34.

    3.      Evaporation Processes

    Processes in which volatile components of the material being heated are
    removed as vapor without at least a portion of the vapor being condensed to
    a liquid are not within the purview of this class (201).  Some classes
    which provide for processes that include an evaporating or concentrating
    step are:

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes,

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds

    426,    Food or Edible Material: Processes, Compositions, and Products IIIC.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds



    D.      This class (201) is superior to Class 203, Distillation:
    Processes, Separatory.

    IV.     INDEX TO CLASSES NOTED IN (1) SECTIONS AND (2) SUBCLASSES OF THIS
    CLASS:

    Class 201



    Class   Section Subclass

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing,
    and General Cleaning            2

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical
    Processes       IIIC3   5

    34,     Drying and Gas or
    Vapor Contact
    With Solids     IIIA, III,
            C       12,11,13,
                    15,26,31,
                    33,35,36,
                    37,40

    44,     Fuel Related
    Compositions    III A, III
            B2c,V   5,21,25,42

    48,     Gas:  Heating and
    Illuminating    III A, III
            B2d,V   11,23,38

    73,     Measuring and
    Testing 1

    75,     Specialized
    Metallurgical
    Processes,
    Compositions
    for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal
    Powder Compositions,
    and Loose Metal
    Particulate Mixtures,   III A,V

    95,     Gas Separation:
    Processes       V   4

    106,    Compositions:
    Coating or
    Plastic V       18

    110,    Furnaces        III A,V 21,26,38

    122,    Liquid Heaters
    and Vaporizers  V       2

    127,    Sugar, Starch,
    and Carbohydrates       III C3

    134,    Cleaning and
    Liquid Contact
    With Solids     III A, III
            C2,V    2

    137,    Fluid Handling          1,4,9

    149,    Explosive and
    Thermic Compositions or
    Charges         42

    159,    Concentrating
    Evaporators     III C3

    162,    Paper Making
    and Fiber Liberation    V       1,43

    165,    Heat Exchange           2,10,11,13

    196,    Mineral Oils:
    Apparatus               1,2,13,14,                              19,29

    198,    Conveyors:
    Power-Driven            33

    202,    Distillation:
    Apparatus               1,2,4,10,
                    13,15,20,
                    26,29,30,
                    32,33,34,
                    35,36,37,
                    39,40,43,
                    44

    203,    Distillation:
    Processes, Separatory   III D,  1,2,3,13,
            III A   14,18,20,
                    30,35,44

    208,    Mineral Oils:
    Processes and
    Products        III A,III
            B2e     2,12,15,
                    23,31,36,
                    44

    209,    Classifying,
    Separating, and
    Assorting Solids                3,4,19

    210,    Liquid Purification or
    Separation              3

    219,    Electric Heating                19

    237,    Heating Systems         13

    241,    Solid Material
    Comminution or
    Disintegration          7

    249,    Static Molds            5

    252,    Compositions    III A,III
            B2a,III
            B2b     2,17,21,
                    36

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon

            Compounds       III C3

    264,    Plastic and Non-
    metallic Article
    Shaping or Treating:
    Processes       III A,III
            B2b     5,6,7,9,
                    18,19

    266,    Metallurgical
    Apparatus       V       18

    299,    Mining or In Situ
    Disintegration of
    Hard Material   V

    313,    Electric Lamp and
    Discharge Devices               21

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring
    and Testing             1

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical
    Systems and Devices             1

    366,    Agitating       V       33

    373,    Industrial
    Electric Heating
    Furnaces                18,21,32

    374,    Thermal Measuring
    and Testing

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid
    Current V

    414,    Material or Article
    Handling        V       40

    422,    Chemical Apparatus
    and Process
    Disinfecting,
    Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or
    Sterilizing             1

    423,    Chemistry of
    Inorganic
    Compounds       III A,III
            B2a,V   17,19,41

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus, and
    -- 5 -- under "Class" and "Subclass", respectively.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products.

    432,    Heating

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    ofMaking      III B2a,  III B2b,V       17, 36

    585,    Chemistry of
    Hydrocarbon
    Compounds       III (C,3)



    V.      MISCELLANEOUS SEARCH NOTES

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclasses 500+ for a particulate
    solid fuel composition and subclasses 550+ for a consolidated fuel solids
    composition.

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclasses 200, 201 and 202 for a
    process for gasifying a mixture which includes coal and subclass 210 for a
    process for gasifying coal alone.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, appropriate subclasses for a process of reducing an ore to the
    metallic state or refining molten metal involving distillation or for a
    sublimation process.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, for processes of gas separation.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses for a
    coating composition which may be applied to surfaces of the distillation
    apparatus or utilized for making apparatus of a particular composition.

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 235+ for a device for burning garbage or
    sewage, subclass 229 for a furnace having a special repository for fuel for
    eliminating the combustible gases and burning them before the coked fuel is
    fed to the fire and subclasses 101+ for a device for feeding fuel to a
    furnace.  Under Class 110, class definition, SEARCH CLASS, see Class 122,
    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, and Class 126, Stoves and Furnaces, for the
    lines among these classes.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, for apparatus and methods for
    heating liquids, generating vapors from liquids, treating the vapors
    generated and conserving the heat remaining in the liquid or vapor after
    part of the heat has been used.  See particularly subclass 66 for devices
    containing a water cooled coking chamber for fuel.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 1+ for a
    cleaning process particularly subclasses 20 and 39, for a process of
    removing carbon, subclass 12 for a cleaning process including distilling
    the cleaning agent and subclass 31 for a cleaning process including the
    step of condensing a gas or vapor.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 30.1+ for a process
    of destroying the organic constituents of the waste liquor.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 502+ for an electron conductive or
    emissive composition containing free carbon and process of making.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, for apparatus peculiarly adapted for the
    treatment of metals or metalliferous material.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 3+
    for a process of converting coal or oil shale in place to fluid material,
    whether a coke-like residue remains or not.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 219+ for apparatus for agitating a liquid or
    a particulate material by motion of the container, and subclasses 241+ for
    a fixed container with movable stirring apparatus, particularly subclasses
    262+ for pump type stirrers.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for
    conveying solid material in a current of air or other gas.

    414,    Material Article or Handling, subclasses 147+ for charging devices
    for placing a charge in or removing one from an oven or furnace, and
    subclass 786 for a process of material or article handling.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses for
    processes of producing inorganic compounds and nonmetallic elements by
    chemical reaction, which may include a distillation step.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor: Product or Process of
    Making, especially subclasses 174+ and 416+ for a catalyst or sorbent
    containing carbonized material or a process of making such composition.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the use of process distillation and thermolytic processes to
    destroy hazardous waste.


CLS 201/1
TXT Processes under the class definition combined with the positive step of
    visually, chemically or physically determining some chemical or physical
    characteristic or property of the distilland, vapor, residue or condensate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses, particularly 700+
    for a device for the direct measurement of pressure.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 2+ for a process of fluid handling in
    which one or more characteristics or conditions of a fluent material are
    determined.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclass 238 for a digester with
    automatic control means.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 132 for a mineral oil vaporizer
    provided with means for automatically maintaining desired conditions.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclasses 151, 160, 193, 196, and 206
    for distillation apparatus having control devices and see "SEARCH CLASS"
    under each subclass for related fields of search.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclasses 1+ for a process
    directed to distilling, combined with measuring, testing or inspecting.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for a
    device for determining an appropriate physical characteristic of a material
    by electrical means.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, appropriate
    subclasses for electrical systems not otherwise classified and see "SEARCH
    CLASS" under the Class Definitions for various types of electrical systems.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 100+ for a device for
    quantitatively determining temperature.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 50+ for chemical apparatus for (a)
    determining quantitatively or qualitatively the presence of one or more
    chemical constituents of a material and (b) combination of a test or
    measurement means and means for regulating a chemical reaction.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 1-183
    for processes which quantitatively or qualitatively determine the presence
    of a chemical specie.


CLS 201/2
TXT Processes under the class definition including the step of cleaning the
    apparatus, e.g., removing adhering char product, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for processes in which hot char is quenched as removed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 1.51 for a
    cleaning device including means to apply an electrostatic field to the
    foreign material to remove it, and subclasses 104.03+ for mechanical or
    gaseous pressure devices for removing deposits from conduits, pipes or
    tubes.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 85 for gas or
    vapor contact with solids, apparatus with means for cleaning the apparatus.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 379+ for a boiler
    provided with a mechanism for cleaning the boiler.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 20 and 39 for a
    cleaning process for removing carbon.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 5 for apparatus including a heat storing
    mass with a provision for cleaning the heat storing mass.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 122 for a mineral oil vaporized
    provided with means for removing carbon from the vaporizer.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 241 for means for cleaning and
    decarbonizing distillation apparatus.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclass 4 for a separatory
    distillation process combined with the step of removing a contaminant from
    the separatory apparatus.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclass 48 for a chemical
    conversion of hydrocarbon process including the step of removing solid
    deposits of carbon from the apparatus.

    252,    Compositions, appropriate subclass, for a particular cleaning
    composition.

    432,    Heating, subclass 2 for a residual heating process including a step
    that purges, cleans or prevents accretion on the apparatus used.


CLS 201/2.5
TXT Processes under the class definition in which the feedstock to the
    distillation process is a vegetable or animal material and which include
    either (1) use of a catalyst with distilland during the thermolysis, or (2)
    a chemical treatment of a volatile component, i.e., a distillate or a fixed
    gas obtained in the thermolysis, to convert or maintain a volatile
    component in a desired chemical form.

    (1)     Note.  Materials such as municipal wastes, garbage, sewage sludge,
    cellulosics, etc., distillands suitable for placement in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The chemical treatment must include a chemical change, but
    it need not be a change in the product desired.

    (3)     Note.  Mere removal of water of hydration or mere conversion of a
    material to a carbon oxide (combustion) is not sufficient chemical
    treatment for this subclass.

    (4)     Note.  Mere recycle of products of the process, water, carbon
    oxides, hydrogen, etc., without a recitation of a specific chemical
    reaction due to the recycle is not sufficient for placement of a patent in
    this subclass.

    (5)     Note.  The catalyst must be more than the mere char product of the
    process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for processes in which nonwood, nonmineral material is used as a
    distilland.

    45,     for a collection of patents concerned with special procedures
    whereby a distillate of special characteristics may be obtained from a
    given distilland.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclasses 240+ for the
    production of a hydrocarbon mixture from refuse or vegetation.


CLS 201/3
TXT Processes under the class definition including separating a solid
    by-product material by a disparate physical step.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for a process in which a solid product of a thermolytic process is
    removed, treated and recycled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclasses 47+ for a
    separatory distillation process including the step of separating solid
    material.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses for a process or apparatus for separating or segregating solid
    material according to a physical characteristic.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 600+ for a process of
    separating a solid from a liquid, especially subclasses 702+ for an
    accretion or precipitation process; and subclasses  767+ for a skimming,
    settling or filtration process.


CLS 201/4
TXT Processes under subclass 3 in which a solid by-product is separated from a
    gas or vapor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, for processes of separation of a solid
    from a gas, per se.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 544+ for fluid handling apparatus
    including means for separating solid material from a fluid and see "SEARCH
    THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS" and "SEARCH CLASS" under subclass 544 for related
    fields of search.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 197 for apparatus in which vapor
    deposits entrained solid or liquid particles.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 19 for a
    process of using free suspension in a gas for segregating solid components
    of a mixture.


CLS 201/5
TXT Processes under the definition including a step of shaping solid
    carbonaceous material into a definite shape or structure.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass the recitation that the charge
    of carbonaceous material fills a container or a carbonizing zone is not
    shaping.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for a process of filling a carbonizing zone with carbonaceous
    material and compacting the material therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, appropriate subclasses especially
    subclasses 591 and 607, for a fuel product containing a carbonized
    component and subclass 599 for a method of making a consolidated fuel
    product which includes carbonizing using a specified condition or technique.

    249,    Static Molds, appropriate subclass for a static molding implement.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses for a process of shaping plastic and nonmetallic
    articles and particularly subclasses 29.1+ wherein a carbonaceous material
    is subjected to a heat treatment in a substantially nonoxidizing atmosphere
    to produce a product containing elemental carbon.  See Class 264, Plastic
    and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes, section IA3 for
    the line.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    appropriate subclasses for molding machine to shape or reshape nonmetals.


CLS 201/6
TXT Processes under subclass 5 in which the shaping of the feed particles
    occurs prior to the step of charging them to the carbonizing zone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 29.1+ for a process of carbonizing a shaped preform.


CLS 201/7
TXT Processes under the class definition combined with the step of comminuting
    or at least a portion of the charge or the residue.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 1 to 30,
    for a process directed to comminuting solid material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 500+ for a process of direct application of fluid pressure to
    shape the work and subclasses 239+ for a process of making a solid shape by
    the application of mechanical force.


CLS 201/8
TXT Processes under subclass 7 in which the solid carbonaceous material is
    disintegrated prior to charging to the carbonizing zone.


CLS 201/9
TXT Processes under the class definition which include a treatment of the
    surface of the particles of the charge to reduce or prevent agglomerating
    or foaming or swelling during distillation.

    (1)     Note.  Searing the surface of the feed particles to inhibit
    swelling during the carbonizing step is "Treating" within the purview of
    this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 170.1+ for apparatus for controlling the
    degree of foaming in a gas charged liquid.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 80 for a process of chemically decomposing a surface portion of a
    particle by heat.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 266 for a
    fermentation process including the step of treating the foam.


CLS 201/10
TXT Processes under the class definition in which the distillation is brought
    about by heat derived by direct contact with an extraneous, preheated solid
    or liquid or container.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this and indented subclasses a char is
    considered "an extraneous solid" unless it is disclosed as recycled solid
    product.

    (2)     Note.  A preheated coke oven is a preheated container within the
    meaning of this subclass if it contains originally enough heat to
    completely carbonize the charge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for a process in which a solid or liquid noncarbonaceous substance
    is included in the material to be carbonized and subclass 28 for a
    continuous process in which a recovered product of the carbonization step
    is recycled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 104.11+,for apparatus in which a retained
    body of fluent material forming a part of the apparatus, acts as a heat
    storer or heat carrier for the apparatus.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 219 for distillation apparatus
    in which the retort contains a mass of fusible substance through which the
    heat is conveyed to the retort.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the use of preheated inert disparate solid or preheated
    liquid to destroy hazardous waste.


CLS 201/11
TXT Processes under subclass 10 in which the preheated material is molten metal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 329+, for a
    process including contacting the material being treated with a liquid
    metal, and see notes thereunder for related fields of search.

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclass 92 for a retort containing
    heated molten metal into which material to be gasified is injected.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 104.11+ for apparatus in which a retained
    body of fluent material forming a part of the apparatus, acts as a heat
    storer or heat carrier for the apparatus.


CLS 201/12
TXT Processes under subclass 10 in which the preheated material is a
    particulate solid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for a process in which char is incorporated in the material to be
    carbonized.

    28,     for a process in which a hot, solid product of the carbonization
    step is recycled to the carbonizing operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 126+ for a
    process directed to adding hot solids to a mineral oil and note "SEARCH
    THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS" and "SEARCH CLASS" under subclass 126.


CLS 201/13
TXT Processes under the class definition including using a product of the
    carbonizing step as an indirect source of heat.

    (1)     Note.  A hot product of the thermolytic distillation process may be
    utilized as such as an indirect source of heat or further treated before
    recovering the heat therefrom by indirect heat exchange.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28+,    for a process in which heat is incidently and directly recovered by
    recirculating a hot product of the carbonizing step to the carbonizing zone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 513 for a
    process including conserving heat by indirect heat exchange.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 4+ for a device for alternately heating a
    mass with a fluid and then heating a second fluid with the stored heat.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 134 for apparatus for vaporizing
    mineral oils including means for heat recovery from the vapor or residuum.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 146 for a horizontal retort with
    flues wherein the air and/or gas combustion is heated by the waste products
    of combustion by means of a single-surface heater and subclass 150 for a
    similar apparatus using a double surface heater.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclasses 21+ for a process
    of distilling a liquid in which heat is recovered by indirect heat exchange.

    237,    Heating Systems, appropriate subclass, for a heating system which
    may use the heat rejected portion of a refrigeration system with additional
    heating means.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the use of a carbonization product as an indirect heat
    source to destroy hazardous or toxic waste.


CLS 201/14
TXT Processes under subclass 13 directed to indirectly heating the carbonaceous
    charge, at least in part, with heat from a product of the thermolytic
    distillation operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 134 for a mineral oil vaporizer
    having means for preheating the incoming oil by the heat of the vapors or
    residue.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclasses 22+ and 25+ for a
    process of distilling a liquid in which the heat recovered by indirect heat
    exchange is used to heat the incoming feed or the distillation zone.


CLS 201/15
TXT Processes under subclass 14 directed to indirectly heating the carbonaceous
    charge, at least in part, by the burning of at least a part of a product of
    the thermolytic distillation operation.

    (1)     Note.  When the cracking of a vapor product is for the production
    of heat to assist the thermolytic process and not primarily to produce a
    mineral oil, the process is classified in Class 201 instead of Class 208.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 513, for a
    process including conserving heat by burning the discharged vapors and
    using the evolved heat.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclasses 111, 122, 123, 130, 132, 140,
    141+, 146, and 148 for retort system heated by the heat carried off by the
    products of combustion.


CLS 201/16
TXT Processes under subclass 15 in which the carbonaceous charge is indirectly
    heated, at least in part, by burning a solid product of the thermolytic
    distillation operation.


CLS 201/17
TXT Processes under the class definition combined with the step of removing
    impurities from char.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 449.1+ for processes
    for producing carbon by a chemical reaction, e.g., oxidation, etc.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, especially subclasses 174+ and 416+ for a catalyst or sorbent
    containing carbonized material or process of making such composition.


CLS 201/18
TXT Processes under the class definition directed to using structures having a
    specific composition, (e.g., a cast iron  sole plate, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclass 86 for a process of
    distilling directed to the use of an apparatus or element of specific
    composition.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 30 for forming or repairing furnace linings and see "Search Class"
    thereunder for related fields of search.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 280+ for the lining
    construction for metallurgical receptacles.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 137, 155 and 164
    for an electric furnace having a lining of a specific composition.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, subclasses 94+ for refractory compositions
    useful in making refractory linings.


CLS 201/19
TXT Processes under the class definition including applying electrical energy
    directly to the material undergoing treatment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclasses 120+ for mineral oil
    vaporizing apparatus having special means for heating.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 127.1+,
    for a process of applying an electrostatic charge for assorting solid
    material.

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclasses for electric heating
    devices and electrical heating processes.  See also under "SEARCH CLASS"
    references to related fields utilizing electrical heating.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 405+ for a process directed to applying electrical or wave
    energy directly to the work.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 449.1+ for processes
    for producing carbon by a chemical reaction, e.g., oxidation, etc.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the use of  electrical energy in the destruction of
    hazardous or toxic waste.


CLS 201/20
TXT Processes under the class definition directed to incorporating an
    extraneous, solid or liquid, noncarbonaceous material into the carbonaceous
    material being treated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 176 for separatory distillation
    apparatus including a distilland treating device.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclasses 29+ for a
    distillation process directed to adding a material which reacts with a
    component of the mixture.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for using an added substance to destroy hazardous or toxic waste.


CLS 201/21
TXT Processes under the class definition in which the feed material is composed
    of two or more carbonaceous substances of which at least the predominate
    one is a solid.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this and indented subclasses, garbage and
    waste material which is carbonized is considered a mixture unless the
    disclosure specifically states that it is not.

    (2)     Note.  For purposes of this and indented subclasses wood, oil shale
    or a particular type of coal is considered a distinct material.

    (3)     Note.  For purposes of this and indented subclasses a charge of a
    mixture of two distinct sizes of particles is considered a mixture, e.g., a
    charge consisting of wood blocks and sawdust.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, appropriate subclasses especially
    subclasses 591 and 607, for a fuel product containing a carbonized
    component and subclass 599 for a method of making a consolidated fuel
    product which includes carbonizing using a specified condition or technique.

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 235 for furnaces for incinerating garbage.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 502+ for electrically conductive
    compositions containing carbon which compositions have been carbonized.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 326+ for electrodes
    for electric lamps and electric discharge devices defined by their
    structure.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 88+ for the
    composition of electric arc furnace electrodes.


CLS 201/22
TXT Processes under subclass 21 in which a component of the feed is char.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28+,    for processes in which a char product is recycled to the
    carbonizing operation.


CLS 201/23
TXT Processes under subclass 21 in which the feed contains mineral oil.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 208, Mineral Oils: Processes and Products,
    "Definition of Terms," for the scope of the term "mineral oil".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     for a process in which an oil recovered from the carbonization step
    is recycled to the carbonization zone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclass 201 for a process of
    gasifying a mixture of coal and oil.


CLS 201/24
TXT Processes under subclass 21 in which the feed is a mixture of coal
    materials.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes a feed comprising a mixture of two or
    more different coals.  It also includes a feed of a mixture two or more
    specific sizes of coal particles, e.g., a mixture of 4-inch lumps and
    1/2-inch lumps.


CLS 201/25
TXT Processes under the class definition in which the feed is a solid
    carbonaceous material other than coal, oil shale or wood.

    (1)     Note.  Corn cobs, peat and straw are examples of solid carbonaceous
    material within the scope of this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass the term "coal" includes
    anthracite, all bituminous coals and all lignites.

    (3)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass the term "wood" includes wood
    of any type whether in large pieces or as sawdust.

    (4)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass the term "oil shale" includes
    tar sands.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclasses 490+ for peat briquettes
    and processes for preparing peat for fuel, especially subclass 492 for a
    process for wet carbonizing peat


CLS 201/26
TXT Processes under the class definition wherein a plurality of solid
    carbonaceous materials are separately and simultaneously subjected to
    carbonizing conditions.

    (1)     Note.  To come within the purview of this subclass a plurality of
    distinct carbonaceous charges are thermolytically treated substantially
    simultaneously in separate and distinct isolated zones.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 113 for a
    combination of a plurality of interconnected rotating treating drums.

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 208 for a plurality of interconnected furnaces
    in which the gases from one furnace are passed into an associated furnace.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 113 for a plurality of retorts
    connected in series or parallel.


CLS 201/27
TXT Processes under the class definition in which a volatile product of the
    carbonization step is burned.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the burning of the vaporized product.


CLS 201/28
TXT Processes under the class definition directed to treating a product of the
    carbonizing step and recycling to the carbonizing process at least a part
    of the so treated product.

    (1)     Note.  The product recycled may be a solid or a liquid or a gas.

    (2)     Note.  The product of the carbonization step may or may not have
    been altered after it was removed from the carbonizing zone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13+,    for processes in which the heat of a product of carbonization is
    recovered by indirect heat exchange.


CLS 201/29
TXT Processes under subclass 28 in which the product which is recycled is a
    volatile.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 99, for mineral oil distilling
    apparatus including the combination of a vaporizer, condensing means with
    means for returning a part or all of the condensate to the vaporizer.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 109, for apparatus for moving
    the volatile matter distilled off in a closed circuit through the retort.


CLS 201/30
TXT Processes under the class definition directed to condensing the vapor
    evolved during distillation into a plurality of distinct fractions.

    (1)     Note.  The vapor must be removed from the carbonizing zone and
    condensed in a plurality of zones having distinct temperatures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 199 for apparatus in which vapor
    is passed through a condensate from itself to surrender high-boiling
    constituents.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclass 87 for a process
    directed to fractionally condensing the vapor outside the still and see
    "SEARCH CLASS" thereunder.


CLS 201/31
TXT Processes under the class definition directed to carbonizing the
    carbonaceous material in a fluidized bed.

    (1)     Note.  Fluidized bed for purposes of this subclass is a system in
    which an upwardly flowing gas maintains the particles of the charge in an
    agitated, more or less suspended condition during carbonization.
    Arbitrarily a process including hindered fall of particles during
    carbonization by means of an upwardly flowing gas is included in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 359 for a
    process of treating a solid in gas or vapor suspension.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 126+ for a
    process directed to adding hot solids to a mineral oil and note "SEARCH
    THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS" and "SEARCH CLASS" under subclasses 126 and 127.


CLS 201/32
TXT Processes under the class definition in which carbonizing is carried out on
    a charge of carbonaceous material which is in motion with respect to the
    carbonizing zone.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this and indented subclasses the individual
    particles of a charge may be in motion with respect to each other and the
    carbonization zone or a confined charge may be moving with respect to the
    carbonization zone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclasses 117 for apparatus having means
    for moving the distilland through it, and note "Search This Class,
    Subclass" under subclasses 117+ for other apparatus in which the distilland
    passes through the retort.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 84 and 85+ for a
    rotating electric arc furnace.


CLS 201/33
TXT Processes under subclass 32 directed to positively agitating the charge in
    the carbonizing zone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 114+ and
    122 for a rotating retort with means for gas or vapor contact with the
    treated material.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 467.1, 513, 545, 548, 550.10,
    608, 611+, 468.10, 625, 657+ for a screw conveyor, subclasses 409, 429+,
    517, 602, 614, 621.1+, 736+, and 750.1+ for a reciprocating conveyor, and
    subclasses 441+, 450, 550.6,  608, 611+ for a rotary conveyor.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclasses 118, 131, 136, 216, 218, 238,
    and 265, for distillation apparatus including a rotating retort or
    agitating elements and see "SEARCH CLASS" under subclass 218 and 265.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 219+ for a mixing chamber which moves, in
    whole or in part, to effect agitation; also the corresponding method.


CLS 201/34
TXT Processes under subclass 32 directed to carbonizing a gravitating charge of
    carbonaceous material in the carbonizing zone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclasses 120+ for apparatus in which
    the distilland passes through it in a vertical direction.


CLS 201/35
TXT Processes under the class definition directed to carbonizing under
    pneumatic pressure or vacuum.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass the claims must clearly state
    that the pneumatic pressure in the carbonizing zone materially differs from
    ambient pressure.

    (2)     Note.  Processes directed to carbonizing in which the charge is
    only subjected to container wall pressure are excluded.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 402+ for a
    process of treating a solid under vacuum or applying gas or vapor under
    superatmospheric pressure.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 110 for thermolytic distillation
    apparatus in which the distilland is under pressure.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclasses 73+ and 91+ for a
    distillation process in which the distillation zone is under pressure or
    vacuum.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses in which treating under pressure or a vacuum is used to destroy
    hazardous or toxic waste.


CLS 201/36
TXT Processes under the class definition directed to positively adding an
    extraneous gaseous material to the solid carbonaceous material being acted
    upon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 282+ for a
    process for contacting a solid with a gas or vapor to remove moisture or
    other vaporizable components and subclasses 114+ and 122 for a rotating
    retort with means for gas or vapor contact with the treated material.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 121 for a retort provided with
    means for injection of fluid, and see (1) Note and "(2) Search Class"
    thereunder for other apparatus in which fluid is injected.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 126+ for a
    process directed to adding hot solids to a mineral oil and note "SEARCH
    THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS" and "SEARCH CLASS" under subclass 126.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, especially subclasses 174+ and 416+ for a catalyst or sorbent
    containing carbonized material or a process of making such composition.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the use of gaseous material in a process for destroying
    hazardous or toxic waste.


CLS 201/37
TXT Processes under subclass 36 in which the extraneous gaseous material
    includes combustion gases.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 443+ for a
    process of treating solid material with the products of combustion.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclasses 111, 121, 123, 130, 132, 140,
    141+, 146, and 148 for a retort system heated by the heat carried off by
    the products of combustion.


CLS 201/38
TXT Processes under subclass 36 in which the extraneous gaseous material
    includes steam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclasses 200, 202 and 204+, for a
    process of gasifying fuel in which steam is injected into the incandescent
    fuel.

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 188+, 199+, 296, and 297+ for means of feeding
    air and steam to a furnace.


CLS 201/39
TXT Processes under the class definition directed to cooling the carbonaceous
    residue of the process by quenching in an inert medium.

    (1)     Note.  A liquid or gas which does not materially react with the hot
    carbonaceous residue is considered inert.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 95 for apparatus including a
    device for cooling the residue, subclasses 227+ for distillation apparatus
    including a quencher and see under subclass 227 "SEARCH THIS CLASS,
    SUBCLASS" and "SEARCH CLASS" for related fields of search.


CLS 201/40
TXT Processes under the class definition including arranging or positioning the
    carbonaceous material in the retort to facilitate carbonizing it or to
    facilitate removing products.

    (1)     Note.  The broad recitation that gas is removed during charging
    does not take the process out of this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 518 for a
    process of arranging the solid material to promote contact with gas or
    vapor passing therethrough.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 263 for thermolytic distillation
    apparatus provided with means for disposing of smoke and fumes produced
    while charging.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 133 for apparatus for
    forming piles of coal or like material; also, subclasses 147+ or 586+ for
    the combination, or subcombination, respectively, of a chamber of a type
    utilized for a heating function and means for moving material to, into,
    within, out of, or from the chamber.


CLS 201/41
TXT Processes under the class definition directed to thermolytically
    decomposing solid, carbonaceous material by applying heat not otherwise
    provided for.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass are combinations not provided for above and
    not provided for elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 449+ for processes for
    producing carbon by a chemical reaction, e.g. oxidation, etc.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS

    The following subclasses represent at least a substantial collection of
    patents found elsewhere in the classification of this class, but merit
    isolation for aid in searching certain concepts which do not form
    appropriate bases for the placement of original patents.  These concepts
    are as given in the titles and definitions of the subclasses listed
    hereunder.

    The cross-reference patents contained in these collections may be of
    further assistance to the searcher, either as a starting point in searching
    this class or as an indication of further related fields of search inside
    or outside the class. Thus, there is here provided a further path of access
    for retrieval of a limited number of types of disclosure.

    (1)     Note.  Disclosure are placed in these subclasses for their value as
    references and as leads to appropriate main or secondary fields of search,
    without regard to their original classification or their claimed subject
    matter.

    (2)     Note.  The disclosures found in the following subclasses are
    examples, only, of the indicated subject matter, and in no instance do they
    represent the entire extent of the prior art.


CLS 201/42
TXT Thermolytic processes as provided for in this class wherein there is either
    recited or disclosed a reference to a particular size or dimension of the
    particles of at least one component of the material being acted upon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclasses 500+ for a particulate
    solid fuel composition and subclasses 550+ for a consolidated fuel solids
    compositions.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, subclasses 110+ for
    a collection of patents based on the particle size of a component of an
    explosive or thermic composition.


CLS 201/43
TXT Thermolytic processes as provided for in this class in which the charge is
    heated by means of a hot, extraneous, inert gas cyclicly circulated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 41+ for a process of
    fiber liberation including circulating a hot digesting fluid through the
    digester and subclasses 248+ for a fiber liberation digester having means
    to circulate the digesting fluid.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 109 for apparatus for moving the
    volatile matter distilled off in a closed circuit through the retort.


CLS 201/44
TXT Thermolytic processes as provided for in this class in which the
    carbonaceous material is subjected to at least two distinctly different
    temperature stages.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclasses 150, 159 and 177+ for
    distillation apparatus including a preheating device.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclasses 71+ for plural
    separatory distillation steps.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 49+, 354+ and
    364+ for a process directed to heating mineral oil at distinct temperature
    stages.


CLS 201/45
TXT Thermolytic processes involving special characteristics may be obtained
    from a given distilland.


CLS 202/
TTL DISTILLATION:  APPARATUS

CLS 202/
TXT CONTENTS


    I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    II.     GLOSSARY

    III.    GENERAL LINES WITH OTHER CLASSES

    A.      Distillation Processes

    B.      Distillation Apparatus

    C.      Evaporating Apparatus

    IV.     INDEX TO CLASSES NOTED IN SUBCLASSES AND CLASS DEFINITION SECTIONS
    OF THIS CLASS

    V.      MISCELLANEOUS SEARCH NOTES

    I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUB-
    JECT MATTER

    This class includes all apparatus except as noted herein below for
    distillation of either solids or liquids, and associations of distillation
    apparatus and other apparatus adapted to prepare material for distillation.
     For the purposes of this classification distillation is defined as the
    volatilization of a substance for the purpose of recovering material from
    the vapor produced by condensation or absorption.  The product obtained by
    condensation must be a liquid.  Generally the volatile material separated
    existed as a definite chemical entity in the substance, but in the case of
    thermolytic distillation it may be formed from other compounds during and
    by the heating.  The absence from the claims of means for performing
    condensation or absorption in an apparatus patent does not exclude it from
    this class if it is disclosed, evident or well known that the apparatus is
    designed to be used in connection with such a step.

    When all claims are generic and the disclosure indicates that the apparatus
    is of wide utility, the patent is classified here (class 202) and
    cross-referenced to the classes disclosed.  When the patent includes
    generic claims and the disclosure is limited to a class other than Class
    202, the patent is classified in the class disclosed.  When a patent
    contains generic distillation apparatus claims and species claims including
    a Class 202 species, see section III for the line with various classes.

    For classification purposes in this class three forms of distillation are
    recognized, defined as follows:

    Autothermic distillation, in which the distilland, either by combustion of
    a portion of itself or by other chemical change, furnishes at least part of
    the heat for thermolysis and volatilization of either the inherent or
    thermolized volatile matter.

    Separatory distillation, in which the substances separated pre-exist in the
    material subjected to distillation, called herein the distilland, and are
    recovered usually without chemical change of composition.

    Thermolytic distillation, in which a compound or compounds found in the
    distilland undergo chemical decomposition, thermolysis, and form different
    chemical compounds, at least some of which are volatile at the temperature
    employed, and can be recovered by condensation or absorption.  In this are
    included coal, oil shale, peat, and wood distillation when the latter
    produces charcoal.

    II.     GLOSSARY

    CHAR

    The generic term applied to the carbonaceous residue from a thermolytic
    distillation of any carbonaceous material. It encompasses such terms as
    bone black, charcoal and coke.

    COKE

    Strictly this is the amorphous, solid residue of coal after the volatile
    material has been distilled off in a thermolytic distillation.  The term is
    also applied in the art to the solid, carbonaceous residue from the
    thermolytic distillation of such materials as oil shale, petroleum and
    pitch.

    CONDENSATE

    See distillate in section I.

    DESTRUCTIVE DISTILLATION

    See thermolytic distillation.

    DISTILLAND

    The material which is undergoing a distillation operation.

    DISTILLATE

    The liquid product condensed from vapor during the distillation operation.

    EXTRACTIVE DISTILLATION

    A separatory distillation in which a generally less volatile substance,
    often referred to as a solvent, is added to the distillation column to
    preferentially remove some components of the vapor by dissolving it. The
    added substance and the dissolved component are removed below the point at
    which the less volatile substance is added to the distillation column.

    FRACTIONAL DISTILLATION

    A separatory distillation operation in which distillate is collected over
    specific temperature intervals.

    SUBLIMATION

    A process in which a solid passes into the vapor state without liquefaction
    and the vapor returns to the solid state without passing through the liquid
    phase.

    EVAPORATION

    The process of changing a solid or liquid into a vapor.  This is the
    generic term for both sublimation and vaporization.  It differs from
    "distillation" in that distillation includes the additional step of
    condensing vapor produced to a liquid.

    VAPORIZATION

    The process of changing a liquid into a vapor.  See "Evaporation".

    III.    GENERAL LINES WITH OTHER CLASSES

    A.      Distillation Processes

    Patents claiming a distillation process and claiming distillation apparatus
    of general utility within the purview of Class 202 are classified in the
    appropriate distillation process class and cross-referenced to this Class
    (202).  See Classes 23, 34, 134, 201, 203, 208, 426, and 435, and the
    search notes under the Class Definitions of these classes for processes
    including a distillation operation.

    B.      Distillation Apparatus

    Patents claiming distillation apparatus of general utility are classified
    here unless otherwise provided for.

    1.      Class 34, Drying and Gas Vapor Contact With Solids, is
    distinguished from Class 202 in that in Class 34 the combination of means
    for removing an extraneous liquid from a solid and means for condensing
    vapor produced must leave the solid chemically unchanged.  In Class 202
    apparatus is utilized to chemically alter the solid being treated.

    2.      Class 48, Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, takes apparatus for
    making heating and illuminating gases.  The line between the apparatus in
    this class (202) for thermolytic distillation and the apparatus in Class 48
    is that the apparatus in Class 48 has no solid carbonaceous material left
    in the material acted upon.

    3.      Class 62, Refrigeration, takes apparatus for vaporizing a liquid
    mixture having a boiling point at atmospheric pressure below 0oC. (32oF.)
    and condensing the vapor except as otherwise provided in the Class
    Definition of Class 62.  When a patent contains claims to Class 62
    apparatus and Class 202 apparatus, the patent is classified in Class 62 and
    cross-referenced to Class 202.

    4.      Class 134, Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, takes processes
    and apparatus for contacting solids with liquids for cleaning or any
    purpose not provided for in other classes.  The combination of means for
    contacting a solid with a liquid and means for distilling the liquid is in
    Class 134.  The subcombination of distilling apparatus of general utility
    is classified here (202).

    5.      Class 435, Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, takes
    processes for fermentation including a distillation operation and apparatus
    that is peculiar to, or specialized and designed for use in, processes
    classified in Class 435.

    6.      Class 196, Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, takes all patents drawn to
    apparatus for distilling mineral oil.  When a patent contains claims to
    apparatus for distilling mineral oil and claims to apparatus for distilling
    within the purview of Class 202, the patent is classified in Class 202 and
    cross-referenced to Class 196.

    7.      Class 266, Metallurgical Apparatus, takes apparatus for heating
    metalliferous material combined with means for condensing the vapor.  The
    line between Class 202 and Class 266 is that Class 266 takes apparatus for
    distilling metals, such as mercury and zinc, from their ores.

    8.      Class 588, Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, is
    noted at appropriate subclasses for the use of apparatus in the destruction
    of hazardous or toxic waste.

    C.      Evaporating Apparatus

    Apparatus designed to heat material to remove vapor therefrom without
    condensing at least a portion of the vapor is excluded from Class 202.
    Some classes which provide for apparatus including means for concentrating
    or evaporating without necessarily including condensing means are:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus,

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing

    IV.     INDEX TO CLASSES NOTED IN (1) SECTIONS AND (2) SUBCLASSES OF THIS
    CLASS:

    CLASS 202

    CLASS   SECTION SUBCLASS

    15,     Brushing, Scrub-
    bing, and General
    Cleaning                241

    23,     Chemistry:
    Physical Pro-
    cesses  III A,

    34,     Drying and Gas
    or Vapor Contact
    With Solids     III A,
            III-B1,
            III C, V        100, 131,136,
                    168,185, 205,
                    216, 218,221,
                    238,242, 269

    44,     Fuel and Related
    Compositons     V       215, 226

    47,     Plant Husbandry         168

    48,     Gas:  Heating and
    Illuminating    III-B2, 86, 87, 88,
            III C, V        99, 105,112,
                    121,211,214,
                    215, 219,242,
                    250

    55,     Gas Separation          182, 200

    62,     Refrigeration   III-B3, V       81,183,184,
                    185

    73,     Measuring and
    Testing         160

    75,     Specialized
    Metallurgical
    Processes,
    Compositions for
    Use Therein,
    Consolidated
    Metal Powder
    Compositions,
    and Loose
    Metal Particulate
    Mixtures,       V       267

    96,     Gas Separation:
    Apparatus       V       183, 264

    99,     Foods and Bever-
    ages:  Apparatus        III A,III C, V  176, 185,190,
                    193,265

    106,    Compositions:
    Coating or
    Plastic V

    110,    Furnaces        V       81, 83, 86,96,
                    100,105,113,
                    114,117,119,
                    128,131,132,
                    133,140,141,
                    148,217,218,
                    227,228,230,
                    242,243,245,
                    247,248, 262

    122,    Liquid Heaters
    and Vaporizers  V       81, 94, 106,
                    138, 167, 193,
                    197, 202, 206,
                    217, 241, 242,
                    247, 248

    126,    Stoves and
    Furnaces                81, 151, 165,
                    166, 190, 245,
                    246, 247, 248,
                    251

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and
    Carbohydrates   III C, V        168

    134,    Cleaning and
    Liquid Contact
    With Solids     III A,III-B4,
            III C   170, 241

    137,    Fluid Handling          81, 151, 160,181,
                    193, 196

    138,    Pipes and Tubu-
    lar Conduits            242

    159,    Concentrating
    Evaporators     III C, V        81, 163, 174,
                    175, 193, 205,
                    232, 234, 236,
                    265

    165,    Heat Exchange   V       185, 232,243

    193,    Conveyors,Chutes,
    Skids, Guides, and
    Ways            262

    196,    Mineral Oils:

           Apparatus        III-B6  150,152,153,158,
                    159,160,161,163,
                    168,172,173,175,
                    177,179,180,181,
                    182,183,185,193,
                    198,199,205,206,
                    218,219,232,234,
                    236,237,238,241,
                    251,252,254,265

    198,    Conveyors:
    Power-Driven            117,118,119,230,
                    262

    201,    Distillation:
    Processes, Ther-
    molytic III A   81, 86, 95,96,102,
                    108,109,110,111,
                    113,117,120,121,
                    122,123,129,130,
                    131,132,134,140,
                    141,146,148,150,
                    167,174,176,177,
                    197,199,205,219,
                    226,227,234,235,
                    241,264, 265,267

    203,    Distillation:
    Processes,
    Separatory      III A   81, 110, 134,150,
                    152,154,155,159,
                    160,161,167,173,                174,175,176,177,
       179,180,183,197,                199,200,205,226,
    234,235,236,264,                267

    208,    Mineral Oils:
    Processes and
    Products        III A   96, 168,  177, 180,
                    183,200,201,202,
                    241

    210,    Liquid Purifi-
    cation or Separa-
    tion    V       182, 202, 204

    219,    Electric Heating                81

    220,    Receptacles             242, 246,266, 269

    221,    Article Dis-
    pensing         262

    236,    Automatic Tem-
    perature and
    Humidity Regu-
    lation          160, 206

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling,
    Spraying, and
    Diffusing               253

    249,    Static Molds            268

    251,    Valves and Valve
    Actuation               151

    252,    Compositions            241, 264

    260,    Chemistry of Car-
    bon Compounds           168

    261,    Gas and Liquid
    Contact Appara-
    tus     V       158, 162,182, 203

    264,    Plastic and Non-
    Metallic Article
    Shaping or Trea-
    ting:  Processes                267

    266,    Metallurgical

           Apparatus        III-B7, V       105,211,214,215,
                    216,217,218,227,
                    250,251,253,254,
                    263, 267

    361,    Electricity: Electrical
    Systems and Devices     160

    366,    Agitating       V       131,136,175,218,
                    262, 265

    373,    Industrial              131, 136,
    Electric Heating                205, 218,
    Furnaces                238, 262, 267

    374,    Thermal Measure-
     ing and Testing

    406,    Conveyors: Fluid
    Current V

    414,    Material or Article
    Handling        V       230,250,251,262

    422,    Chemical Apparatus
    and Process
    Disinfecting,
    Deodorizing,
    Preserving,
    or Sterilizing  III C, V        168

    426,    Food or Edible
    Material: Processess,
    Composition,
    and Products    III A

    431,    Combustion              151

    432,    Heating         81, 98, 99, 100,
                    103,104,105,114,
                    117,131,216,223,
                    224,227

    435,    Chemistry:      III A.
    Molecular Biolo-        III B.
    gy and Microbio-
    logy



    V.      MISCELLANEOUS SEARCH NOTES

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 73+, for
    apparatus for separating liquids from solids combined with means to
    condense vapors, subclasses 108+, for apparatus including a hollow drum
    rotating about an axis and subclasses 201+, for apparatus including a kiln.

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclasses 629+ for an apparatus for
    making or treating a fuel composition.

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclasses 61+, for gas generators
    and subclasses 119+, for retorts for gasifying materials by heat.

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclasses, for processes and apparatus
    peculiar to removing heat from a substance.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, appropriate subclasses, for a process of reducing an ore to the
    metallic state or refining molten metal involving distillation or for a
    sublimation process.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, for apparatus for gas separation. See
    particularly subclasses 155+ for degasifying means for liquid.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 275+, for apparatus for
    preparing beverages.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses, for a
    coating composition which may be applied to surfaces of the distillation
    apparatus or utilized for making apparatus of a particular composition.

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 235, for a device for burning garbage or sewage,
    subclass 229, for a furnace having a special repository for fuel for
    eliminating the combustible gases and burning them before the coked fuel is
    fed to the fire and subclasses 101+, for a device for feeding fuel to a
    furnace. Under Class 110, Class Definition, Search Class, see Class 122,
    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, and for lines among these classes.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, for apparatus and methods for
    heating liquids, generating vapors from liquids, treating the vapors
    generated and conserving the heat remaining in the liquid or vapor after
    part of the heat has been used.  See particularly subclass 66, for devices
    containing a water cooled coking chamber for fuel.

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, subclasses 3+, for apparatus for
    extracting carbohydrates from solid material and subclass 16, for apparatus
    for evaporation to crystallization of sugar solutions.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, for apparatus and processes not more
    specifically provided for elsewhere, peculiar to the concentration of
    solids held in solution or suspension by evaporation of the liquid
    containing them.  See particularly subclass 2.1, for a flash evaporator,
    subclasses 3+, for a spray evaporator and subclasses 5+, for a film type
    evaporator.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for heat exchange devices,
    including surface condensers, per se.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses, for
    apparatus for purifying or separating any liquid by (1) filtration (2)
    sorption or ionic exchange, (3) liquid-liquid extraction, (4) destruction
    or conversion of a constituent thereof.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses, for
    apparatus adapted to produce an intimate contact between gases and liquids
    and see (2) Note under the class definition.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, appropriate subclasses, for furnaces
    limited to the treatment of metals or metalliferous materials, particularly
    subclasses 148+, for apparatus for vaporizing metals and collecting the
    vapor.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 219+ for apparatus for agitating a liquid or
    a particulate material by motion of the container, and subclasses 241+ for
    a fixed container with movable stirring apparatus, particularly subclasses
    262+ for pump type stirrers.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, appropriate subclasses for conveying
    solid material in a current of air or other gas.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 147+ for a chamber of a
    type utilized for a heating function and means for moving material to,
    into, within, out of, or from the chamber; also subclasses 586+ for a
    subcombination of subclasses 147+ subject matter.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 305 for apparatus for generating fumes.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 11+, for processes of preparing alcoholic beverages including
    distillation.


CLS 202/81
TXT Apparatus and devices relating to the art of distillation not provided for
    in the subclasses below.

    (1)     Note.  For heating see Classes 126, Stoves and Furnaces, 219,
    Electric Heating and 432, Heating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclasses, for processes and apparatus
    involving compressing, cooling and expanding a fluid.

    110,    Furnaces, for furnaces.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, for boilers.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, (see (1) Noteabove).

    137,    Fluid Handling, for fluid handling  apparatus.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, for evaporators.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, appropriate subclass, for a
    process of thermolytically carbonizing a solid carbonaceous material.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, appropriate subclass, for a
    process of separatory distillation.

    219,    Electric Heating, (See (1) Note above).


CLS 202/82
TXT Combinations and associations of apparatus not provided for in the
    subclasses indented hereunder.


CLS 202/83
TXT Groupings of distilling apparatus mounted for moving from place to place as
    an entirety.  This also includes patents claiming movable heating elements
    used in connection with distilling apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213,    for a kiln structure designed to be moved from place to place.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 241 for a portable incinerator.


CLS 202/84
TXT Systems of apparatus including kilns, retorts, or chambers in which the
    distilland is subjected to both separatory and thermolytic distillation.
    The two species of distillation may occur simultaneously in separate
    chambers or successively in a single chamber.


CLS 202/85
TXT Associations of kilns, retorts, and/or chambers, in which thermolytic
    distillation occurs, part of the necessary heat being supplied by the
    combustion (or chemical change) of the distilland.


CLS 202/86
TXT Assemblies of retorts in which material is distilled by externally-applied
    heat, and chambers or kilns in which material is distilled by combustion or
    a portion thereof.  The retorts may be heated by other means or by the heat
    carried by the distillate from the kiln.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclasses 76, 77 and 78, and
    indented subclasses.

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 242, for a closed retort for incinerating
    garbage.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclasses 15+, for a
    process in which at least a part of the original material is burned.


CLS 202/87
TXT The retort is heated by combustion of the gases from the kiln, which latter
    may be a producer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclasses 76, 77 and 78, and
    indented subclasses.


CLS 202/88
TXT Assemblies of kiln and chamber.  The distillation gases and/or products of
    combustion from the kiln pass through the chamber in direct contact with
    its contents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclasses 76 and 203.


CLS 202/89
TXT The kiln and chamber are identical in construction and may interchange
    functions.


CLS 202/90
TXT The chamber in which distillation is performed by the direct action of the
    heated gas is also heated externally, frequently by combustion of a part of
    the gas coming from the kiln.


CLS 202/91
TXT Systems in which the kilns or chambers in which the destructive
    distillation occurs are heated by chemical change (as combustion) of the
    distilland itself.


CLS 202/92
TXT The distilland is placed in a structure without a top or is piled upon the
    ground or upon a platform and heated by means of the combustion of a part
    or its substance.


CLS 202/93
TXT The kiln is closed and partial combustion of its contents furnishes the
    heat to distill the remainder.  This is the broad subclass for the beehive
    ovens.


CLS 202/94
TXT The kiln is closed, and a steam generator of some form is associated in the
    system.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 122, Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 7.


CLS 202/95
TXT A device for cooling the residue either by a liquid or a fluid or by
    preservation from air is associated with the system.  The residue may be
    cooled within the kiln or after withdrawal therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227+,   for quenching apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclass 39, for a
    thermolytic distillation process directed to cooling the residue by
    quenching with an inert medium.


CLS 202/96
TXT Thermolytic systems in which thermolytic distillation occurs, not provided
    for in the subclasses indented hereunder.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus for treating the vapor or condensate from
    thermolysis, unless provided for in the subclasses indented hereunder, is
    found in this class, subclasses 182 and 202 and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 235+, for furnaces for incinerating garbage.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, appropriate subclass for a
    process of carbonizing solid carbonaceous material.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 390, 391 and
    400-435, for a process of recovering mineral oils from solid natural
    material not otherwise classified.


CLS 202/97
TXT Horizontal chambers having one end closed, the other closable, and heated
    either directly or indirectly, into which a receptacle containing a
    distilland may be run and withdrawn.


CLS 202/98
TXT The stall is openable and closable at both ends and not necessarily
    horizontal, and the receptacles are introduced at one end and withdrawn at
    the other.  Heated directly or indirectly.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    432,    Heating, subclasses 121+, for a residual material heating furnace
    having means by which work is progressed or moved mechanically.


CLS 202/99
TXT A chamber equipped with means introducing heat into its interior in direct
    contact with the distilland, either by means of heated solids or heated
    gaseous fluids.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclasses 76 and 203.

    432,    Heating, subclass 41, for a  residual material heating furnace in
    which the material is heated by contact with combustion products.


CLS 202/100
TXT The directly heated chamber is arranged to be rotated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131,    136, 216, and 218, for a rotary retort.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 108, for a
    rotating hollow receptacle through which the material to be treated is
    carried and see (8) Note thereunder for related fields of search.

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 246 for a rotary drum incinerator.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 105+, for a residual rotary drum tumbler type
    furnace in which combustion products directly contact the material being
    heated.


CLS 202/101
TXT The distilling chamber has the form of the beehive oven, but is heated from
    the outside through walls or floor, or both.


CLS 202/102
TXT The distilling chamber is heated from the bottom.  Heating flues in the
    lower portion of the side walls if auxiliary in function do not exclude
    from this subclass.  The chamber may have means also for the introduction
    of gas or vapor to assist the distillation or react with the distilland.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124+,   for a chamber having flues, subclasses 138+ and 220, for a retort
    having flues also subclasses 121, 129, and 134, for a retort with fluid
    injection means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclasses 31 and 38+, for a
    carbonization process in which fluid is passed into the carbonizing zone.


CLS 202/103
TXT The hearth has means for moving the distilland over and off its surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    432,    Heating, subclasses 153+, for a residual heating apparatus in which
    the work is pushed across a heating surface.


CLS 202/104
TXT The hearths lie in a vertical series.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    432,    Heating, subclass 132, for a residual material heating apparatus in
    which the material is moved across vertically spaced heated shelves and
    drops from shelf to shelf.


CLS 202/105
TXT Closed vessels of metal, clay, brick, or other material designed to contain
    the distilland and with means for external heating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating.

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 242 for a closed retort incinerator.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 148+ especially subclass 153,
    for externally heated ore containing vessels combined with vapor condensing
    structure.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 120+, for a residual material heating chamber
    having heating means.


CLS 202/106
TXT The distilling vessel is heated from the outside and has associated with
    it, so as to be heated by the products of the combustion which heat the
    retort, or by other sources of waste heat, means for generation of steam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 7.


CLS 202/107
TXT The system contains a chamber in which the distilland is treated with a
    liquid which frees the material to be distilled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99,     and indented subclass.


CLS 202/108
TXT The retort is also heated internally by direct contact of its contents with
    a heating medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclasses 10+, for a
    thermolytic distillation process including the step of heating the retort
    internally by direct contact with a heating medium and subclasses 36+ for
    passing an extraneous gas through the carbonizing zone.


CLS 202/109
TXT The volatile matter distilled off is moved in a closed circuit through the
    retort, with or without intermediate purification.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclasses 28+, for a
    process of thermolytic distillation including removing, treating and
    recycling a product and subclass 43, for a digest of heating by cyclically
    circulating a hot, extraneous, inert gas.


CLS 202/110
TXT The retort system is provided with means for maintaining the distilland
    under pressure during distillation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclass 35, for a
    thermolytic distillation process in which the carbonizing zone is under
    pneumatic pressure.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclasses 73+ and 91+, for a
    separatory distillation process under pressure.


CLS 202/111
TXT The retort system has both double and single surface air and/or gas heaters
    heated by the heat carried off by the products of combustion.  The
    double-surface heaters are in this class called recuperators, the single
    surface, regenerators.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    123, 130, 132, 140, 141, and indented subclasses, 146 and 148.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclasses 15+, for a
    carbonizing process including burning a product of the carbonizing step and
    recovering heat from a product by indirect heat exchange, and subclass 37,
    for a process in which externally produced combustion gases are passed
    through the retort.


CLS 202/112
TXT The distillate is passed through tubes or chambers in which it is subjected
    to high temperature in order to crack the higher boiling portions thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclasses 93, 94, 109, 110, and
    112, and indented subclasses.


CLS 202/113
TXT A plurality of retorts are associated.  The arrangement may be either
    series or parallel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 208+ and 295+, for a plurality of
    interconnected furnaces.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclass 26, for a
    thermolytic distillation process of carbonizing a plurality of charges in
    series or parallel.


CLS 202/114
TXT A plurality of retorts arranged to be heated by a single furnace.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147,    and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 230+ for a solid fuel furnace provided with
    coking means.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 207+, for a residual material heating apparatus
    including a plurality of structurally related retorts.


CLS 202/115
TXT The retorts are arranged in a closed chain which is not necessarily
    circular.


CLS 202/116
TXT The retorts are arranged in cooperating pairs of vertical and inclined or
    horizontal units.


CLS 202/117
TXT The retort has means for moving the distilland through it.  It may be fed
    at top or bottom or end.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120+,   for distillation apparatus so arranged that the distilland passes
    through it in a vertical direction and subclass 136, for a horizontal
    retort having a rotary motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 186+, 227+, 255+, and 267+ for refuse
    incinerators or solid fuel furnaces provided with conveying means.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclass, for conveying means.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclasses 32+, for a
    thermolytic distillation process in which the distilland passes through the
    retort.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 121+, for a residual work heating chamber
    having heating means and means by which the work is progressed or moved
    mechanically.


CLS 202/118
TXT The conveying means comprises one or more screws.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 476.1, 513, 548, 550.6, 550.10,
    582, 608, 611, 625, and 657+, for screw conveying means.


CLS 202/119
TXT The conveyor is reciprocating and may be a reciprocating floor or plunger.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 109 and 114.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 602, 614, 736+, and 750 for a
    reciprocating conveyor.


CLS 202/120
TXT The retort is so arranged that the distilland passes through it in a
    vertical direction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclass 34, for a
    thermolytic distillation process of a gravitating bed type.


CLS 202/121
TXT Means are provided for injection of fluid, including oil, into the retort
    before or after or during the distillation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    129, 134, and 149.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclasses 63+, 75, 78+, 93, 94,
    95, 102+, 108+, and 111+.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclass 31, for a process
    utilizing a fluidized bed and subclasses 36+, for a thermolytic
    distillation process including passing an extraneous gas through the
    carbonizing zone.


CLS 202/122
TXT The retorts are vertical, and the air and/or gas for combustion is heated
    by the waste products of combustion through double surface heaters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclasses 15+, for a
    carbonizing process including burning a product of the carbonizing step and
    recovering heat from a product by indirect heat exchange and subclass 37,
    for a process in which externally produced combustion gases are passed
    through the retort.


CLS 202/123
TXT The retorts are vertical, and the air and/or gas for combustion is heated
    by the waste products of combustion through single surface heaters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclasses 15+, for a
    carbonizing process including burning a product of the carbonizing step and
    recovering heat from a product by indirect heat exchange and subclass 37,
    for a process in which externally produced combustion gases are passed
    through the retort.


CLS 202/124
TXT The vertical retorts are inclosed in a chamber through which the heating
    gases pass.  The chamber may have baffles to control the direction of flow
    of the gas.


CLS 202/125
TXT The heating chamber is divided into vertical flues, alternate ones of which
    carry flames and products of combustion in opposite directions.


CLS 202/126
TXT The heating chamber is divided into flues which are in the vertical
    position, the flames or heating gases passing in either direction.


CLS 202/127
TXT The flues carry the products of combustion or heating gases around the
    retort.


CLS 202/128
TXT The retorts are inclined and may pass through a heating chamber, with or
    without flues.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 230+ for a solid fuel furnace provided with
    coking means.


CLS 202/129
TXT The inclined retort has provisions for injection of fluid into the
    distilland.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    121, 134, and 149.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclasses 36+, for a
    thermolytic distillation process including passing an extraneous gas
    through the carbonizing zone.


CLS 202/130
TXT The retorts are inclined and associated with single or double surface air
    and/or gas heaters which are heated by the waste products of combustion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111,    122, 123, 132, 140, 141, and indented subclasses 146 and 148.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclasses 15+ for a
    carbonizing process including indirectly heating the carbonaceous material
    by burning a product of the carbonizing step and subclass 37 for a
    carbonizing process in which combustion gases are passed into the retort.


CLS 202/131
TXT The retort is arranged to rotate around its longer axis, and thus carry the
    distilland forward.  It may have spiral vanes or other means to assist the
    movement of the distilland.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136,    for a thermolytic distillation system including rotary horizontal
    retort, subclass 216, for a rotary directly heated chamber and subclass
    218, for a rotary thermolytic retort.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 108+, for a
    receptacle rotating about an axis through which receptacle the material
    being treated is carried.

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 246 for a rotary drum incinerator for
    carbonizing and burning garbage.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclasses 32+, for a
    thermolytic distillation process in which the distilland moves through the
    apparatus.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 219+ for movably mounted mixing chamber of
    general utility.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 84 and 85+ for a
    rotating electric arc furnace and subclasses 115 and 116, for a rotating
    electric resistance furnace.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 103+, for a residual tumbler type rotary drum
    furnace.


CLS 202/132
TXT The retorts are of the well-known gas-bench retort form and placed in
    inclined position within the ordinary gas retort furnace.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147,    and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 230+ for a solid fuel furnace provided with
    coking means.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclasses 15+, for a
    carbonizing process including burning a product of the carbonizing step and
    recovering heat from a product by indirect heat exchange and subclass 37,
    for a process in which externally produced combustion gases are passed
    through the retort.


CLS 202/133
TXT The retort or retorts are so arranged that the distilland passes through
    them in a horizontal direction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 230+ for a solid fuel furnace provided with
    coking means.


CLS 202/134
TXT The retorts have provisions for injection of fluid, either to react with
    the distillate or for convective separation of the distillate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclasses 36+, for a
    thermolytic distillation process including injecting a fluid into the
    carbonizing zone.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclass 49, for a process of
    convective distillation.


CLS 202/135
TXT At least one of the fluids necessary for combustion in the heating chamber
    or flues is admitted at separate points in the path of the flame to
    lengthen the flame or to preserve a regulated temperature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108     and 109.


CLS 202/136
TXT The horizontal retort has a rotary motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131,    for a thermolytic distillation system including a rotary inclined
    retort, subclass 216, for a rotary directly heated chamber and subclass
    218, for a rotary thermolytic retort.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 108+, for a
    hollow drum rotating about an axis through which the material to be treated
    is carried.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 219+ for movably mounted mixing chamber of
    general utility.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 84 and 85+, for a
    rotating electric arc furnace and subclasses 115 and 116, for a rotating
    electric resistance furnace.


CLS 202/137
TXT The retorts, either singly or in groups, are inclosed in a chamber in which
    combustion takes place to heat them.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135.


CLS 202/138
TXT The retort is heated by combustion in flues.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 135.1+, for a boiler
    having one or more fire tubes or flues wholly or partly surrounded by the
    water space.


CLS 202/139
TXT The flues are vertical.


CLS 202/140
TXT The products of combustion as they leave the system heat the air and/or gas
    in double-surface heaters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 230+ for a solid fuel furnace provided with
    coking means.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclasses 15+, for a
    carbonizing process including burning a product of the carbonizing step and
    recovering heat from a product by indirect heat exchange and subclass 37,
    for a process in which externally produced combustion gases are passed
    through the retort.


CLS 202/141
TXT The system contains chambers usually filled with refractory material
    checkerwork through which hot products pass to the flues in alternating
    periods, whereby the incoming combustible material is heated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 230+ for a solid fuel furnace provided with
    coking means.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclasses 15+, for a
    carbonizing process including burning a product of the carbonizing step and
    recovering heat from a product by indirect heat exchange and subclass 37,
    for a process in which externally produced combustion gases are passed
    through the retort.


CLS 202/142
TXT Apparatus coming under subclass 141, in which the currents of combustible
    material and those of air and/or gas are periodically reversed and the
    latter heated.  If rich gas is used, the heating of gas may be omitted.
    There may be dilution of rich gas fuel with nitrogen, air, or products of
    combustion.


CLS 202/143
TXT The flues may be in distinct groups which may lie either along or across
    the heating wall in which they are contained or across the retort, the
    flame ascending in the flues of one group and descending in those of
    another group, all the flues in which the flame ascends in one wall or
    section of a wall being in connection with one regenerator or regenerator
    group, and the flues in which the flame descends connected with another
    regenerator or regenerator group, these regenerators being at right angles
    to the system and reversal taking place along the system.


CLS 202/144
TXT The regenerators may be in groups and stand parallel or transverse to the
    axis of the system, but in either case their reversal occurs across that
    axis.


CLS 202/145
TXT The heating flues are horizontal.


CLS 202/146
TXT The air and/or gas for combustion is heated by the waste products of
    combustion by means of single-surface heaters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclasses 13+, for a
    thermolytic distillation process including the step of heating the
    combustion gas or air by indirect heat exchange with the products of the
    carbonizing step.


CLS 202/147
TXT The retorts are of the well-known gas-retort forms and inclosed in the
    ordinary gas-bench furnace structure.


CLS 202/148
TXT The system is provided with means for heating the gas and/or air for
    combustion by the waste products of combustion through double surface
    heaters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111,    122, 130, 140, and 141.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 230+ for a solid fuel furnace provided with
    coking means.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclasses 15+, for a
    carbonizing process including burning a product of the carbonizing step and
    recovering heat from a product by indirect heat exchange and subclass 37,
    for a process in which externally produced combustion gases are passed
    through the retort.


CLS 202/149
TXT Provisions are made for injection of fluid into the retort.


CLS 202/150
TXT The retort has means for preheating the distilland.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 134, for apparatus for
    vaporizing mineral oils including means for heat recovery from the vapor or
    residuum.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclasses 13+, for a
    thermolytic distillation process including recovering heat from a product
    by indirect heat exchange.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclasses 21+, for a
    separatory distillation process including recovering heat by indirect heat
    exchange.


CLS 202/151
TXT Devices for controlling the flow of fuel gases and waste gases.  Burners,
    dampers, gas and air pipes, and reversing valves when claimed in
    combination with the ovens are classified herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 285, and appropriate indented
    subclasses, for specific dampers and operating devices.

    137,    Fluid Handling, for fluid handling in general including flow
    control, e.g., for air or gas.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, for damper and valve structure, per se.

    431,    Combustion, appropriate subclass for residual apparatus specialized
    to combustion.


CLS 202/152
TXT Systems and parts of apparatus directed to separation of substances
    preexisting in the distilland where not provided for in subclasses below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclasses 98+, for apparatus for
    treating mineral oils including vaporizing and condensing means and
    subclasses 104+, for apparatus including vaporizing means.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, appropriate subclass, for a
    separatory distillation process.


CLS 202/153
TXT Associations of still and fractionating column, either as separate or
    integral structures.

    (1)     Note.  A still is defined for purposes of this class as a vessel
    having a tube leading therefrom for the purpose of carrying vapors
    generated within it to a condenser or a vessel adapted and designed and
    used in connection with a condenser, which latter is not necessarily shown
    or claimed.  The vessel is to be heated only to a temperature below that
    which would produce chemical change in the distilland.  For definition of
    "column" see subclass 158 below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 100, for a mineral oil
    distilling system including a fractionating column and subclass 139, for a
    condensing apparatus including a fractionating column.


CLS 202/154
TXT Systems embracing a plurality of fractionating columns with a single still
    or a plurality of stills.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclasses 71+, for a
    distillation process including a plurality of vaporization and condensation
    steps.


CLS 202/155
TXT A plurality of stills associated with a fractionating column.


CLS 202/156
TXT The plurality of stills are so related that each delivers its vapor direct
    to the column or columns.  The stills may be used alternatively as single
    stills or in groups.


CLS 202/158
TXT A system of separatory distillation apparatus comprising a device arranged
    to conduct a liquid and a vapor derived therefrom by distillation in
    counter-current direct contact.  At any plane in the column the liquid has
    a greater concentration of low-boiling substances and the vapor of
    high-boiling ones than that necessary to maintain equilibrium as to these
    substances between the vapor and liquid passing that plane, whereby the
    liquid becomes progressively richer as to high-boiling substances and the
    vapor as to low-boiling ones.  The column, per se, is a gas and liquid
    contact apparatus and is only classed herein when heating and/or cooling
    elements are recited in the claims.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclasses 100, 105 and 139.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 75+ for specific
    contact elements or structures, and subclass 148 for columns with heating
    or cooling means for the trays.


CLS 202/159
TXT The distilland entering the system is passed through a device in which it
    is heated previous to admission.  The heat may be derived from an
    extraneous source or from exchange with the outgoing hot waste liquor
    (slop), or from condensation of the vapors, or from both the latter sources.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150     and 177+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclasses 100, 134 and 139.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclasses 22+, for a
    distillation process in which the feed is preheated by indirect recovery of
    heat.


CLS 202/160
TXT The column is provided with means for controlling its temperature or
    pressure automatically.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151,    183, 184, and 206.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 700+, for a device for the direct
    measurement of pressure.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 505+, for a device for regulating the
    pressure of a fluid in a line.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclasses 132 and 141.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclass 2, for a
    distillation process including the step of measuring the temperature.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 24.5 and
    32.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 160+ for
    electrical systems not otherwise classified and see "SEARCH CLASS" under
    the class definition for various types of electrical systems.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 100+ for a device for
    quantitatively determining temperature.


CLS 202/161
TXT The final condensate is divided into two portions, one of which returns to
    the column, the other being withdrawn either as a finished product or to be
    conducted to some other part of the system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 99.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclasses 75 and 82, for a
    plural distillation process including returning a part of the condensate to
    a prior distillation zone and subclasses 93, 94, 97, and 98, for a single
    distillation process in which part of the condensate is returned to the
    distillation zone.


CLS 202/162
TXT The vapors may be passed around the dephlegmator, the column, or a like
    element of the vapor system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclass 63.


CLS 202/163
TXT Miscellaneous organizations and parts of a separatory distilling system not
    provided for below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclass 22, and appropriate indented
    subclasses.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 105.


CLS 202/164
TXT Special arrangements and devices in apparatus for recovering residues and
    waste from barrels, casks, and other containers by vaporization.


CLS 202/165
TXT Associations of still and stove.  The connection may be by way of a water
    back.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 34, 53 and 513+ for specific
    water-back structure and 364, and indented subclass, for water-heating
    devices associated with a stove-pipe.


CLS 202/166
TXT Associations of still and stand boiler.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 361, and indented subclasses.


CLS 202/167
TXT Associations of still and means for heating the water to be fed to a steam
    boiler.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 441 and 442.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclasses 13+, for a
    thermolytic distillation process in which heat in the process is recovered
    by indirect heat exchange.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclasses 21+, for a
    separatory distillation process in which heat in the process is recovered
    by indirect heat exchange and subclasses 10+, for a distillation process of
    purifying water.


CLS 202/168
TXT Associations of a still and a vessel in which a substance is removed from
    material by a solvent.  The extract is then run into the still and
    distilled.  Either the solvent or substance dissolved, or both, may be
    volatile.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107     and 170.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclass,
    for the separation of a liquid from a solid.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 10, for plant source extraction of rosin
    or turpentine.

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, subclasses 3+, for apparatus for
    leaching sacchariferous material.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 14.52.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 311+.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 255+ for extracting apparatus.


CLS 202/169
TXT Apparatus coming under subclass 168 for continuously extracting and
    distilling.  A condenser frequently returns its condensate upon the
    material within the extractor at short intervals, which condensate is a
    solvent of the material to be extracted, and passes it through to the
    still.  Final separation of the solvent and volatile is usually in the same
    still assembly.


CLS 202/170
TXT Devices in which extraction and separation by distilling occur in the same
    vessel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclass 11, for a
    cleaning process including the step exposing the work to a gaseous or vapor
    treating agent.


CLS 202/172
TXT The system includes more than one still with or without individual
    condensers and arranged to be used either in parallel or to be used
    alternately.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 105.


CLS 202/173
TXT A plurality of stills so connected that either the vapor or the residue of
    one flows into the other.

    (1)     Note.  When the vapor flows from one still to another in this
    subclass, it enters into the still itself, and is not simply carried
    through in pipes, which structure is found in the next subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 106.

    203,    Distillation: Processes, Separatory, subclasses 71+, for a
    separatory distillation process in which the vapor or residue of a
    distillation operation is the distilland in a subsequent distillation
    operation.


CLS 202/174
TXT The vapor from one still is carried through the distilland of another in
    heat-interchange relation, but not in direct contact.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclasses 17.1+.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes Thermolytic, subclasses 14+, for a process
    directed to using a conversion product as an indirect source of heat to
    heat the carbonaceous material.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclasses 25+, for a process
    in which the distillation zone is indirectly heated by recovered waste heat.


CLS 202/175
TXT Means are provided for setting the distilland in motion within the still as
    a part of the system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclasses 6.1+, 16.1+ and 25.1+.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclasses 123, 124 and 125.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclasses 72 and 89, for a
    filming distillation process in which the film is agitated.

    366,    Agitating, appropriate subclass for agitators in general,
    particularly subclasses 241+ for movable stirrers.


CLS 202/176
TXT Systems provided with means for treating the distilland before or during
    distillation.  This may include filtering, decanting, aeration, preheating,
    or other treatment of the distilland.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    159 and 168+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 277.1 and 277.2.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, appropriate subclass for a
    process directed to treating a solid, carbonaceous distilland before or
    during distillation.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, appropriate subclass for a
    distillation process directed to treating a distilland before or during
    distillation, particularly subclasses 28+ for a process including a
    chemical reaction, subclasses 39+ for a process including a disparate
    physical separation step and subclasses 50+, for a process including adding
    a substance to alter the relative volatility of the components of the
    distilland.


CLS 202/177
TXT Systems coming under the preceding subclass in which the distilland is
    preheated.  The preheating may be with agitation and by the distilling
    residue.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 134.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclasses 14+ and 32+, for
    a process directed to preheating a solid carbonaceous distilland.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclasses 22+, 88 and 90,
    for a process directed to preheating a distilland.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 353 and 364+.


CLS 202/178
TXT The preheater has a straining device.


CLS 202/179
TXT The distilland enters a device for heat exchange with the distillate
    vapors, from which it condenses the high-boiling-point constituents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 139, for condensing apparatus in
    which the vapor is partially condensed.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclasses 22+, for a
    distillation process in which the feed is heated by indirect heat exchange
    with the distillate vapor and subclass 87, for a process of fractional
    condensation of the vapor.


CLS 202/180
TXT The distilland before it enters the still is used as the cooling fluid in
    the condenser.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 134.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclasses 10+, for a process
    of purifying water by distillation in which the feed water is used as the
    cooling fluid in the condenser.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 353 and 364+.


CLS 202/181
TXT Automatic means for controlling the level of the distilland or rate of
    feeding the still are provided.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193     and 196.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 386+, for a liquid level responsive or
    maintaining system.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus.


CLS 202/182
TXT Patents for apparatus directed to physical treatment of the distillate,
    such as filtering, dephlegmating, washing, absorbing, or condensing, when
    in combination with the elements of or limited to being a part of a
    distilling system. Apparatus for treatment of the volatiles from
    thermolytic distilling, unless provided for under thermolytic apparatus, is
    included here.

    (1)     Note.  For filters, see Classes: 55, Gas Separation, subclasses
    following subclass 474.  196, Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 46.1. 210,
    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 348+.

    (2)     Note.  For condensers see Class 196, Mineral Oils:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 138+; and 261, Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 76,
    78.1 and 115.

    (3)     Note.  For washers see Classes 55, Gas Separation, subclass 220,
    and appropriate indented subclasses; 196, Mineral Oils:  Apparatus,
    subclass 146; and 261, Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 19 and
    75.


CLS 202/183
TXT System comprises a still and a second vessel in which the vapor undergoes
    absorption either with or without intermediate physical treatment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 101+, 141+ and 476+ for sorption type
    refrigeration producing processes and apparatus.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 108+ for solid sorbent
    apparatus for gas separation.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclasses 104+.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclasses 41 and 42, for a
    distillation process including a sorption operation.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 341+ and 348.


CLS 202/184
TXT Comprises a still which is heated to remove volatile material from a
    distilland, then along with its contained residue, cooled and the volatile
    material returned to the still and allowed to absorb in the residue, either
    with or without intermediate physical treatment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 101+, 141+ and 476+ for sorption type
    refrigeration producing processes and apparatus.


CLS 202/185.1
TXT Condenser:

    Subject matter under subclass 182 comprising the association of a still and
    a device for condensing the vapors produced by the still to the liquid
    state.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 73+ for
    apparatus having means for condensing vapor.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 80+, 91+, 93+, 150+, and 272+ for
    refrigeration processes and apparatus involving atmospheric condensate
    handling.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 347 for cooking apparatus
    having means for condensing vapors and returning the condensate to the
    material being cooked.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 110+ for a heat exchanger having a first
    holder or collector in a flow path to a second fluid.

    196,    Mineral Oils: Apparatus, subclasses 138+ for mineral oil treating
    apparatus including a still and condenser.


CLS 202/185.2
TXT Direct contact:

    Subject matter under subclass 185.1 in which the vapors to be condensed are
    cooled by being mingled with a cooler gas or liquid.


CLS 202/185.3
TXT Air condensers:

    Subject matter under subclass 185.1 in which the cooling or the vapor is
    effected by air at a lower temperature than the vapor on the outer surface
    of the vapor container.


CLS 202/185.4
TXT Circulating coolant in cap or top closure:

    Subject matter under subclass 185.1 in which the condenser comprises means
    for circulating a coolant substance which is located in the topmost part of
    the still in the top cap or closure thereof or a pipe connects the top of
    the still with the condenser unit.


CLS 202/185.5
TXT Helical coil for vapor stream:

    Subject matter under subclass 185.1 in which the vapors to be condensed are
    passed through a helical coil which is surrounded by a lower temperature
    gas or liquid.


CLS 202/185.6
TXT Helical coil for coolant:

    Subject matter under subclass 185.1 in which the lower temperature gas or
    liquid coolant is passed through a helical coil which is surrounded by the
    warmer vapors which are to be condensed.


CLS 202/186
TXT The system contains more than a single condenser.


CLS 202/187
TXT The still and condenser are concentric.


CLS 202/188
TXT The still and condenser are so arranged that the still is supported by the
    condenser.


CLS 202/189
TXT The condenser is supported by the still.


CLS 202/190
TXT The condenser forms a cap or closure for the still.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 293, and indented
    subclass, for condenser type beverage infusers.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 381, and indented subclass, for
    liquid heating vessels combined with condensing means.


CLS 202/191
TXT The condenser forms the cap of the still and is surrounded or surmounted by
    a jacket to contain a cooling fluid.


CLS 202/192
TXT The cooling liquid in the cap condenser passes to the still and is
    distilled.


CLS 202/193
TXT Means is provided for controlling the height of the distilland in the still
    as it passes from the condenser.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181     and 196.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 451, and appropriate
    indented subclasses.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 386+, for a liquid level responsive or
    maintaining system.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclasses 43.1+.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 135.


CLS 202/194
TXT The condenser is supported by or upon the still and the cooling fluid
    therefrom passes into the still.


CLS 202/195
TXT The cooling liquid from the condenser passes into the still, at least in
    part.


CLS 202/196
TXT The amount of liquid entering the still from the condenser is automatically
    limited to that which will keep the level of the distilland constant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181     and 193.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 386+, for a liquid level responsive or
    maintaining system.


CLS 202/197
TXT The vapors from the still pass through a vessel or chamber in which they
    deposit the particles of liquid and of solids entrained within them.  These
    vapors do not pass through condensed liquids, nor is there condensation
    except incidental.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 489 and 492.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclass 4, for a
    thermolytic distillation process including separating a solid by-product
    from a gas or vapor.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclass 40, for a separatory
    distillation process including the step of removing entrained particles
    from a gas or vapor.


CLS 202/198
TXT The vapors from the column or still pass through a condenser in which the
    higher-boiling fractions are condensed and returned directly to the column
    or still.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 139.


CLS 202/199
TXT The vapor from the still or column is passed through a condensate from
    itself to which it surrenders its high-boiling constituents and from which
    it evaporates its low-boiling constituents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 140.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclass 30, for a
    thermolytic distillation process of fractionally condensing the removed
    vapor.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclass 42, for a
    distillation process including sorption of a component of a removed vapor
    in a liquid and subclass 87, for a process including fractional
    condensation of the removed vapor.


CLS 202/200
TXT The vapor from the still or column is passed through porous material or
    other filter which removes from it entrained particles of liquid and
    solids.  The filtering material in some instances may have a chemical
    effect.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses following 474 for filter structure for
    gas.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclass 40, for a
    distillation process including removing entrained particles from a gas or
    vapor and subclass 41, for a distillation process including utilizing a
    solid sorbent.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 347+.


CLS 202/201
TXT Means are provided for admitting or injecting air or other gas into the
    vapor element of the system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 356 and 362+.


CLS 202/202
TXT Patents for apparatus or parts directed to physical treatment of the
    condensate, such as filtering, decanting, aerating or reboiling, when in
    combination with the elements of the still or limited to the distilling
    art.  Treatment of the condensate of thermolytic distillation is here
    unless provided for in the thermolytic subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 441 and 448.1 for
    feed-water reboilers.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 188 and 349.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclasses 294+ for diverse separators, subclasses 348+ for
    filters and subclasses 513+ for gravitational separators.


CLS 202/203
TXT Air or other gas is passed through the condensate for purification,
    flavoring, preserving, or other purpose.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, for structure of gas and liquid
    contact apparatus.


CLS 202/204
TXT The condensate consisting of immiscible liquid is passed into a vessel
    where it is allowed to separate into two or more layers, one of which may
    be removed separately from the others.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclasses 294+ for diverse separators, and subclasses 513+
    for gravitational separators.


CLS 202/205
TXT The system is provided with means for producing a vacuum therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 92, for
    apparatus for contacting solids with a gas under vacuum.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclasses 17+, 21 and 22+.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 114.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclass 35, for a process
    for applying differential pressure to the carbonizing zone.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclasses 73+ and 91+, for a
    separatory distillation process utilizing a vacuum and see "SEARCH CLASS"
    thereunder.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 54, 63, 110+, and
    140+, for an electric furnace which is operated under pressure or vacuum.


CLS 202/206
TXT Means for automatically controlling or cutting off the heat from the still
    when any conditions making it desirable are found in the system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 447 and 448.1.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclasses 132 and 141.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, appropriate subclass
    for regulating-apparatus combinations.

    Apparatus, Types:

    This group is directed to the structure of the still, chamber, kiln, heap,
    or retort which may be incorporated into the system rather than to the
    system in which it is incorporated.


CLS 202/207
TXT A portable chamber designed to be placed over a stump and heated from the
    outside, with means for carrying off the vapors, the temperature being so
    controlled that first separatory, then thermolytic, distillation occurs.


CLS 202/208
TXT A single chamber which is heated internally by heating medium passed
    therethrough directly in contact with the distilland.


CLS 202/209
TXT A chamber heated either externally or by internal tubes or furnace in such
    a way that first separatory, then thermolytic, distillation occurs.

    (1)     Note.  The two heating stages here are distinct and do not refer to
    the periods of gradual increase in temperature involved in heating up a
    retort.


CLS 202/210
TXT Arrangements of wood or other carbonaceous material in piles covered with
    material to exclude air, mainly used in charcoal burning.


CLS 202/211
TXT Structures in which carbonaceous material is to be placed and carbonized by
    combustion of a part of its own substance. It may also have flues in its
    walls and floors inside by means of which it is heated, in addition to the
    heat of combustion of its contents.  Many beehive ovens are here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclass 76.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 171+, for ore treating furnaces.


CLS 202/212
TXT The kiln has an arched top and greater length than breadth, i.e., is
    noncircular in horizontal section.


CLS 202/213
TXT Kiln structures designed to be moved from place to place and needing no
    base on which to place the carbonaceous material or having a new base
    constructed at each new location.  The kiln may be constricted so as to be
    moved as a whole or in sections or parts to be separated and reassembled in
    a new location.


CLS 202/214
TXT The kiln is discharged at the bottom, which may either rotate, and thus
    dump the residue, or have other provision for discharge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclasses 62, 69 and 76.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 195+ and 236+, for furnaces and
    other vessels which have material discharges means associated therewith.


CLS 202/215
TXT A chamber arranged with means for introducing hot gaseous substances into
    direct contact with the distilland.  It may have auxiliary external heating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclass 492.

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclasses 63, and indented
    subclass, and 94.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 186+, for a furnace having
    fluid feeding means associated therewith.


CLS 202/216
TXT The directly-heated chamber is arranged for rotation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 108+ for a
    receptacle rotating about an axis through which receptacle the material
    being treated is carried.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclass 145, for fume handling structure
    associated with a rotary furnace, see the search notes associated with this
    subclass.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 105+ for a residual rotary work heating furnace
    heating the work by direct contact with combustion products.


CLS 202/217
TXT The structure of the closed vessel constituting the retort.  It is heated
    externally, but may also have auxiliary means for indirect heating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 242 for a refuse incinerator in the form of a
    closed retort.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, appropriate subclasses, for a closed
    liquid container apparatus in which heat is applied directly or indirectly
    to the walls.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclass 153, for furnaces having retort
    condenser units and subclasses 171+ for furnaces having retorts.


CLS 202/218
TXT The retort is arranged for rotation, usually on its longer axis, or for
    tilting or pivoting to empty.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131     and 136, for a thermolytic distillation system including a rotary
    retort.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 108+ for a
    receptacle rotating about an axis through which receptacle the material
    being treated is carried.

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 246 for a refuse incinerator in the form of a
    rotary drum.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 112.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 195+ and 236+ for furnaces and
    other vessels having material discharge means associated therewith and 243+
    for pivotally mounted Bessemer type treating vessels.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 219+ for movably mounted mixing chambers.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 84 and 85+ for an
    electric arc furnace including means for rotating the furnace chamber and
    subclasses 115 and 116.


CLS 202/219
TXT The retort is surrounded by or contains a mass of fusible substance through
    which the heat is conveyed to the retort.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclass 92.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclasses 118 and 120.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclass 11 for a
    thermolytic distillation in which the distilland is heated by a molten
    metal bath.


CLS 202/220
TXT The retort is constructed with flues or pipes either internal to it or a
    part of its wall.


CLS 202/221
TXT Retorts designed to be charged at the top and discharged at the bottom and
    to occupy the vertical position.  The retort may be of ring shape and may
    have jalousie walls.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 165+ for
    apparatus for vapor contact with solids in which the material being treated
    is fed in at an elevated level and flows generally downward through the
    treating zone.


CLS 202/222
TXT The claims are directed to features of retort structure or shape.


CLS 202/223
TXT Patents disclosing the structure of the retort, oven, or kiln walls.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    432,    Heating, subclasses 247+ for the chamber structure of a residual,
    material heating furnace.


CLS 202/224
TXT The retort is coated with protective material over a whole or part of its
    surface or has a baffle or refractory substance shielding it from the flame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    432,    Heating, subclass 248 for residual heating chamber structure
    including a protected, lined or reinforced melt holding section.


CLS 202/225
TXT Structures to be inserted within the retorts to subdivide the charge.  The
    core may have channels for removal of volatile material and may be removed
    with the residue or remain in the retort.


CLS 202/226
TXT The distilling retorts are associated with devices for crushing, grinding,
    or compressing or otherwise treating the residue.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95,     227+, 261, and 262+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclass 492.

    201,    Distillation: Processes, Thermolytic, subclasses 5, 7 and 39 for a
    process directed to treating a distillation residue.

    203,    Distillation: Processes, Separatory, subclasses 47+ for a process
    in which a solid is removed from a liquid.


CLS 202/227
TXT Miscellaneous means for quenching or cooling the residue of distillation.
    It may consist of an open or a closed chamber attached to or separate from
    the retort in which the residue is cooled by gas or liquid or merely held
    to cool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95      and 253.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 165+ for a device for receiving and removing
    ashes when furnace structure is included.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclass 39, for a
    thermolytic distillation process directed to quenching char with an inert
    material.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclass 122, for means for contacting a
    heated ore with a cooling liquid.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 77+ for a residual material heating furnace
    having work cooling structure.


CLS 202/228
TXT Receivers for hot distillation residue arranged to cool or quench the
    residue by circulation through or over it of neutral gas or by generation
    and/or circulation of steam or other vapor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 229+ for a solid fuel furnace provided with
    means to release a gas from the fuel.


CLS 202/229
TXT A chamber or holder arranged to be lowered into a tank of quenching liquid
    after filling with hot residue.


CLS 202/230
TXT A conveyor upon which the residue is held while it is being quenched or
    cooled.  The conveyor may itself be submerged in the liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 165.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power Driven, for the Conveyor structure, per se.



    Apparatus, Types, Separatory:


    Structure and form of stills and other parts peculiar to separatory
    distillation and not provided for in the system subclasses.


CLS 202/232
TXT This group of subclasses is restricted to the structure or shape of the
    still itself and to the means associated therewith for heating it and other
    characteristic features of the still, apart from the system in which it is
    used.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclass 22 and subclasses 23-28.1+,
    indented thereunder.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses, for means for modifying
    temperature not provided for in other classes and note "Search Class" under
    the class definition for related fields of search.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 104, and appropriate indented
    subclasses.


CLS 202/233
TXT Single stills with heating furnace, tube, jacket, or other means of heating
    its contents without contact of heating fluid and contents and also means
    for introducing heating fluid directly to the interior of the still.


CLS 202/234
TXT The distilland is heated by a heating fluid directly in contact with it, by
    radiant heat (as by the sun, etc.), by electric elements immersed in the
    distilland, or in contact therewith.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclasses 4.1+, 8 and 16.1.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclasses 126 and 127.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclass 19 for a
    thermolytic distillation process in which electrical energy is applied
    directly to the distilland.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclasses 10+ for a process
    of solar distillation of water and subclass 100 for a collection of methods
    of heating in a separatory distillation process.


CLS 202/235
TXT Stills heated by fluids carried in or through or around them, in coils,
    pipes, or jackets, or in superficial contact, the fluids being held from
    contact with the distilland.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclasses 14+ for a process
    directed to thermolytic distillation in which a conversion product is used
    as an indirect source of heat.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclasses 25+ and 27 for a
    process in which the vaporization zone is indirectly heated by a product of
    the process.


CLS 202/236
TXT The still has means for introducing the distilland in the form of a spray
    or for forming a spray after its introduction, or the distilland flows into
    or through the still in the form of a film.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclasses 3+ for a spray evaporator and
    subclasses 5+ for a film evaporator.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 128.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclass 90 for a
    distillation process of spraying the distilland into the distillation zone
    and subclasses 72 and 89 for distillation utilizing filming.


CLS 202/237
TXT The still is composed of a tube or tubes in which the distilland is
    subjected to distillation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 110.


CLS 202/238
TXT The still is mounted upon an axis and rotated or tilted during distillation
    or to discharge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 108+ for a
    receptacle rotating about an axis through which receptacle the material
    being treated is carried.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 112.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 84 and 85+ for an
    electric arc furnace including means for tilting or rotating the furnace.


CLS 202/239
TXT Elements used in connection with stills, retorts, or the like, not
    constituting a type of distilling apparatus, and not provided for in other
    classes.


CLS 202/241
TXT Means for cleaning and decarbonizing or preventing the fouling of the
    retort or still or the tubes of the heating system therefor.

    (1)     Note.  The means herein are either mechanical, as scrapers, or
    chemical, as the introduction of air to unite with the carbon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 104.001+ and
    subclass 246.5 for tank cleaner attachments, or Class 414, Material or
    Article Handling, subclass 291 and other appropriate subclasses, for carbon
    removing devices which are not claimed as being permanently associated with
    the retort or still but may be applied to other chambers.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 379+.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses,
    for apparatus for cleaning in which a solid is contacted with a liquid.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 122.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclass 2 for a thermolytic
    distillation process including the step of cleaning the apparatus.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclass 48 for processes of
    removing deleterious carbon accumulations formed on the equipment during a
    chemical conversion of the mineral oil.

    252,    Compositions.

    432,    Heating, subclass 75 for a furnace  including means peculiarly
    adapted for cleaning the furnace.


CLS 202/242
TXT Miscellaneous closures for retorts and stills not provided for below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 201 for
    enclosing apparatus which may be open on one side, and see "(6) Note" for
    related fields of search.

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclass 124 for a retort having a
    lid.

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, appropriate subclasses, for closures
    of the type provided for and see the search notes in section IV of Class 49
    for the loci of closures in other classes.

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 173+.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 498 for water-cooled
    furnace doors.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 89+ for closures and or
    plugs for pipes.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 200+ for receptacle closures.


CLS 202/243
TXT The doors, lids, or other closures are cooled by a fluid within or flowing
    through them.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 179 and 180.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 73+ for a heat exchanger having a cover
    which is cooled by a liquid passing through it.


CLS 202/244
TXT Patents showing the structure of the openings for charging dome ovens, the
    air and gas flues surrounding these, the castings or other devices inserted
    for their protection, and the lids closing the charging holes.


CLS 202/245
TXT Doors so mounted as to be removable by other than a hinged motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 173.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 190.


CLS 202/246
TXT Closures supported and turnable on hinges at either their side, top or
    bottom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 194.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 334+.


CLS 202/247
TXT Closures for retorts occupying the horizontal position.  This includes
    doors, lids, mouthpieces and securing devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 173.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 498.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 190, 191 and 192.


CLS 202/248
TXT Doors and devices for handling them when claimed in combination, which
    close the horizontal retorts of coke ovens.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 173, 175, 176, and 177.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 498.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 191 and 192.


CLS 202/249
TXT Patents disclosing means for closing and charging or discharging rotary
    cylinders which claim means for other functions than merely charging the
    distilland or discharging the residue.


CLS 202/250
TXT Devices to close the tops of vertical retorts, ovens or stills.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclass 76.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclass 184, for furnaces having bell and
    hopper type charging structure and subclass 199, for shaft furnaces having
    specific top structure.


CLS 202/251
TXT Closures having devices for feeding the charge into the distilling
    receptacle.  The feeding device may be a simple magazine or means for
    forcing the material into the retort and may have preheating means in the
    top.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 73.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 135.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 176+, for ore treating furnaces
    having means to feed a charge of solid material thereto.


CLS 202/252
TXT Devices for closing the bottoms of retorts, kilns or stills.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclasses 130+.


CLS 202/253
TXT The closure has means for cooling or quenching the residue before
    discharging it from the retort.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 750+ for
    devices disclosed as useful for moving coke through a fluid treating zone
    for quenching the coke.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclass 197, for shaft furnaces having
    specific bottom structure.


CLS 202/254
TXT Tubes or pipes for carrying off the vapors from distilling chambers.

    (1)     Note.  If claimed in combination with hydraulic main or its
    equivalent, the patent is to be classified in this class, subclasses 255
    and 256.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 136.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 144+ for treating vessels
    having means to handle gases evolved therein.


CLS 202/255
TXT Hydraulic mains and gas pipes extending there into leading from the gas
    generator. The mains may be provided with means for maintaining a liquid
    seal for the pipes.


CLS 202/256
TXT Dip pipes having valves for closing the pipe or by-passing the seal.


CLS 202/257
TXT The retort or still is fitted with a plurality of tubes for removal of the
    distillate.  The removal may be from more than one point.


CLS 202/258
TXT The offtake or offtakes are valved.


CLS 202/259
TXT The pipe through which the distillate is removed from the retort or still
    is jacketed to contain either a heating or cooling agent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153+    and 158+, for distillation systems including a column and 185.1+
    for a system including a condenser.


CLS 202/260
TXT The offtake is cooled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259.


CLS 202/261
TXT Means for discharging the residue.


CLS 202/262
TXT The still or retort is associated with means for introducing material into
    it or for removing residue.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 101+ for devices for feeding fuel to a furnace.

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, subclasses 2+ for
    chutes of particular structure or use.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 602, 614 and 736+ for a
    reciprocating pushing bar.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 208+, for apparatus having means to
    affirmatively segregate, separate or move articles from a supply source
    toward a point of egress.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 150.1+ and 185+.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 33+, 79+, 115, and
    142+ for charging and discharging devices for electric furnaces.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 147+ and 586+ as explained
    in Part V of the definition of this class (202).


CLS 202/263
TXT Means for disposing of the smoke and fumes produced while charging or
    discharging hot distilling chambers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 144+, for miscellaneous
    metallurgical apparatus including means for arresting the fumes from the
    gases produced in the metallurgical operation.


CLS 202/264
TXT Means is associated with the still for preventing foam formation or for
    breaking foam already formed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation: Apparatus, subclasses 155+ for degasifying means
    for liquid.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclass 9, for a process
    directed to treating a solid distilland to inhibit foaming.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclass 20, for a process
    directed to inhibiting foaming of a distilland.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 321.


CLS 202/265
TXT The retort or still is provided with means to rock, shake, or otherwise
    agitate it and the contained distilland or has agitating means provided
    internally thereof for the same purpose.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175,    for means for setting the distilland in motion as a part of the
    system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages: Apparatus, subclasses 277.1 and 277.2.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclass 25.1+

    196,    Mineral Oils: Apparatus, subclasses 123 and 124.

    201,    Distillation: Processes, Thermolytic, subclasses 31 and 32, for a
    process directed to agitating the distilland.

    366,    Agitating, for specific agitators.


CLS 202/266
TXT The still or retort is furnished with supports upon or in which the
    distilland rests.  The container may be removable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 628+.


CLS 202/267.1
TXT Materials of construction:

    Subject matter under subclass 239 claiming the materials of which the
    structures classified in this class are constructed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclass 301 for a furnace lining which reacts with the charge.

    201,    Distillation: Processes, Thermolytic, subclass 18 for a thermolytic
    distillation process including utilizing apparatus of a particular
    composition.

    203,    Distillation: Processes, Separatory, subclass 86 for separatory
    distillation process including reciting apparatus or an element in terms of
    its composition.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    subclass 30 for forming or repairing furnace lining and see, "SEARCH CLASS"
    thereunder for related fields of search.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, appropriate subclasses for
    electric furnace linings and processes for making.


CLS 202/267.2
TXT Corrugate walls:

    Subject matter under subclass 267.1 wherein the walls of the structure
    display alternately ridges and groves or furrows.


CLS 202/268
TXT The distilling assembly has provision for expansion and contraction as the
    structure is heated and cooled.  This may be in the form of sliding or
    other joints or devices for allowing expansion and forcing contraction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 82, wherein molding means is provided to
    adjust the volume of the apparatus during the molding operation to
    compensate for change in volume of the material.


CLS 202/269
TXT Miscellaneous devices for preventing access or exit of air or gas to the
    chambers and pipes of the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 242, for
    drying apparatus having means to seal an opening against gas or vapor
    leakage and providing for feeding material through the opening.

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 228.


CLS 202/270
TXT Miscellaneous group of details of apparatus not provided for above and
    devices accessory to the operation of the distilling apparatus not
    otherwise provided for.


CLS 203/
TTL DISTILLATION:  PROCESSES,   SEPARATORY

CLS 203/
TXT CONTENTS


    I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    II.     GLOSSARY

    III.    GENERAL LINES WITH OTHER CLASSES

    A.      Classification lines in (1) sections and (2) subclasses of Class
    203.

    B.      Lines with chemical composition classes.

    C.      Process including evaporation.

    D.      Superiority of Class 201.

    IV.     INDEX TO CLASSES NOTED IN SUBCLASSES AND CLASS DEFINITION SECTIONS
    OF THIS CLASS

    V.      MISCELLANEOUS SEARCH NOTES

    I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT  MATTER

    This is the residual class for processes for separating a liquid mixture
    (distilland) by vaporizing and condensing at least a portion thereof to
    isolate in the condensed liquid (distillate) or in the unvaporized portion
    (residue) a comparatively pure compound which was present as such in the
    original mixture. The original mixture may be a solid under normal
    atmospheric conditions if it liquifies below the vaporization temperature.

    To come within the purview of this class (203) the distilland must have a
    boiling point above OoC. under normal atmospheric pressure.  Because the C4
    hydrocarbons have boiling points above and below OoC., all C4 hydrocarbons
    are arbitrarily classified as having boiling points above OoC.

    Sublimination (see Glossary) is excluded from this class (203).  See Class
    75, Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, for the sublimation of metals.  For general sublimation processes
    see 23, Chemistry:  Physical Processes, subclass 294 and Class 260,
    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, subclass 706, and Class 585, Chemistry of
    Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclass 801.

    When all claims are generic and it is disclosed that the separatory
    distillation process is of general utility, it is classified in this class
    (203).  When all claims are generic and the process is disclosed to be
    limited to one species of separatory distillation, the patent is classified
    according to the disclosed species.  When a patent has claims to two or
    more species of separatory distillation processes, see section III, General
    Lines With Other Classes.

    II.     GLOSSARY

    AZEOTROPIC DISTILLATION
    A separatory distillation of a liquid in which a substance is added to the
    distilland mixture in order to assist separation of its components by
    forming with one or more of the components a mixture having a minimum
    boiling point.  (The art has also used the term for a distillation process
    in which two substances in the starting material are removed by their
    forming a minimum boiling mixture).

    CONDENSATE
    See distillate in section I of the class definition.

    CONVECTIVE DISTILLATION
    A separatory distillation operation in which an inert vapor is passed
    through a heated liquid to reduce the partial vapor pressure of the
    component in the liquid desired to be recovered.  It permits the separation
    of heat sensitive high boiling substances at temperatures below their
    decomposition temperature.  Steam distillation is the most commonly used
    type of convective distillation.

    DISTILLAND
    For purposes of this class the liquid or liquefied material which is
    undergoing a distillation operation.

    DISTILLATE
    The liquid product condensed from vapor during the distillation operation.

    EXTRACTIVE DISTILLATION
    A separatory distillation in which a generally less volatile substance,
    often referred to as a solvent, is added to the distillation column to
    preferentially remove some component of the vapor by dissolving it. The
    added substance and the dissolved component are removed below the point at
    which the less volatile substance is added to the distillation column.

    FRACTIONAL DISTILLATION
    A separatory distillation operation in which distillate is collected over
    specific temperature intervals.

    MOLECULAR DISTILLATION
    A high vacuum separatory distillation process for distilling high boiling,
    heat sensitive substances in which the distance from the liquid surface to
    the condensing surface is less than the mean free path.

    SEPARATORY DISTILLATION
    A process of vaporizing at least a portion of a liquid mixture (distilland)
    and condensing at least a portion of the vapor to separate the liquid
    mixture into distinct parts. The substances recovered as products must have
    preexisted in the original mixture.

    STEAM DISTILLATION
    A form of convective distillation in which the inert vapor passed through
    the heated liquid is steam. The adding of water or steam to a distillation
    column or the adding of water to a distilland is not within the meaning of
    this term.

    SUBLIMATION
    A process in which a solid passes into the vapor state without liquefaction
    and the vapor returns to the solid state without passing through the liquid
    phase.

    THERMOLYTIC DISTILLATION
    A distillation in which material found in the distilland undergoes chemical
    decomposition (thermolysis) to form different substances at least some of
    which are volatile at the temperature employed.  The volatile substances
    are recovered by condensation or sorption.

    VAPORIZATION
    The process of changing a liquid into a vapor.  See "Evaporation".

    FLASH VAPORIZATION
    The process in which the distilland is heated under pressure high enough to
    prevent ebullition (usually above atmospheric pressure) and the heated
    distilland is then introduced into a zone of lesser pressure resulting in
    the volatilization of at least a position of the distilland.

    EVAPORATION
    The process of changing a solid or liquid into a vapor.  This is the
    generic term for both sublumination and vaporization.  It differs from
    "distillation" in that distillation includes the additional step of
    condensing vapor produced to a liquid.

    III.    GENERAL LINES WITH OTHER CLASSES

    A.      Classification lines in subclasses and sections of Class 203

    Class   Section                     Subclass

    23      I

    34      IIIC1

    62      IIIC3

    75      I, IIIB4a

    95      IIIC4

    134     IIIC2

    159     IIIC5

    201     IIID

    208     IIIB4b

    260     I, IIIB2                                  39

    423     III B2, IIIB4e

    426     III B4d, V

    435     IIIB4c

    520     IIIC6

    585     I



    III.    B.      LINES WITH CHEMICAL COMPOSI-
            TION CLASSES

    1.      Products whether claimed in terms of their composition or claimed
    in terms of the process of making are classified in the appropriate
    composition class even if the process merely recites a separatory
    distillation operation.

    2.      Processes including a chemical reaction and a separatory
    distillation operation are classified here only when the chemical reaction
    merely facilitates the isolation by the separatory distillation operation
    of a preexisting substance in the distilland.  See Class 260, Chemistry of
    Carbon Compounds, Class 423, Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, or Class
    585, Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds for a process of preparing a
    compound and isolating it by a separatory distillation process.

    3.      Processes including a separatory distillation step and a disparate
    physical separation step, such as extraction, are classified in this class
    (203) if the disparate separating step follows the distillation step and
    the process is not otherwise provided for. When the disparate separation
    step precedes the distillation step, the process is generally provided for
    elsewhere.

    4.      Processes directed solely to a separatory distillation operation
    are classified in this class (203) unless otherwise provided for:

    a.      Processes for the distillation of metals, such as mercury or zinc
    are classified in Class 75, Specialized Metallurgical Processes,
    Compositions for Use Therein, Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and
    Loose Metal Particulate Mixtures.

    b.      Processes for distilling a mineral oil in which the product
    isolated is a pure compound are classified in this class (203).  However,
    when the distillation process produces as the product a mineral oil, it is
    classified in Class 208, Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products.

    c.      Processes which include fermentation are classified in 435,
    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, even if such processes also
    include distillation.

    d.      Processes for distilling fermented beverage to produce a distilled
    beverage are classified in Class 426, Food or Edible Material:  Processes,
    Compositions, and Products, but processes for distilling a fermented
    beverage to isolate alcohol are classified here (203).

    e.      When a patent contains a Class 423, Chemistry of Inorganic
    Compounds, process claim and a Class 203, Distillation:  Processes,
    Separatory, process claim, the patent is classified in Class 423 and
    cross-referenced to Class 203.

    III.    C.      Processes Including Evaporation

    Processes for evaporating without a condensing step are generally excluded
    from this class.  For specific lines between the processes of this class
    and other processes including an evaporating step, see below.

    1.      This class (203) is distinguished from Class 34, Drying and Gas or
    Vapor Contact With Solids, in that the material treated herein (203) is a
    liquid or a liquefiable solid from which volatile material is to be
    separated and condensed or absorbed. The product recovered must be a
    relatively pure substance which existed as such in the original material.
    The material of Class 34 is a solid or semi-solid from which it is desired
    to remove a liquid, leaving the residue chemically unchanged.

    2.      Class 134, Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, takes claimed
    combinations of work handling or supporting means or steps with means or
    steps to apply a liquid to the work, as by spraying or immersion, where
    said liquid is distilled or evaporated, whether or not the resulting vapor
    is (1) directly contacted with the work or (2) condensed for reuse to
    contact the work.  When only the liquid distillation subcombination or the
    vapor-phase work contact subcombination has been claimed, see section III
    C1 above for the line between Class 203 and Class 34.

    3.      Class 62, Refrigeration, includes processes for separating a
    mixture of substances having boiling points below 0oC.  (32oF) at
    atmospheric pressure by the steps of vaporizing a component and condensing
    the vapor. When a patent includes species claims classifiable in Class 62
    and Class 203, it is classified in Class 62 and cross-referenced to Class
    203.

    4.      Class 95, Gas Separation: Processes, takes processes in which gas
    is removed from a liquid wherein the gas is normally gaseous at a
    temperature of 0oC and a pressure of 760 mm Hg (e.g., hydrogen sulfide
    (H2S), carbon monoxide (CO), carbon dioxide (CO2), etc.).  The volatile
    need not be condensed.  The line between Class 95 and Class 203 is that a
    Class 203 operation requires vaporizing and condensing a material which is
    normally a liquid, while Class 95 does not.

    5.      Class 159, Concentrating Evaporators, takes processes for
    concentrating solids in solution or suspension by volatilizing the liquid.
    It is distinguished from this class (203) by the fact that the volatile
    material is not condensed.

    6.      Some additional classes which provide for processes that include an
    evaporating step or a concentrating step are:

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates

    260,    Chemistry, Carbon Compounds

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment.



    III.    D.    Class 201, Distillation:

    Processes, Thermolytic, is superior to Class 203.

    IV.     INDEX TO CLASSES NOTED IN (1) SECTIONS AND (2) SUBCLASSES:

    Class 203



    For Reference   See Class 203   See Class 203

    to Class        Section Subclass



    23,     Chemistry:

            Physical

            Processes       I

                    IIIA    1,12,39,
                                           43,48,49,
       58,71,99



    34,     Drying and

            Gas or Vapor

            Contact With

            Solids  IIIA,IIIC1      12,21,22,

                            91



    55,     Gas Separa-

            tion            86



    62,     Refrigera-

            tion    IIIA, IIIC3,V   12,21



    73,     Measuring

            and Testing             1,2,3



    75,     Specialized
            Metallurgical
            Processes, Com-
            positions for
            Use Therein,
            Consolidated Metal
            Powder Compositions,
            and Loose Metal
            Particulate
            Mixtures,       I,IIIA,IIIB4a,V



    95,     Gas
            Separation:
            Processes       IIIA, IIIC4, V,         4,5,12,
                            20,39,40,
                            41,42,43,
                            49,100

    99,     Foods and

            Beverages:

            Apparatus       IIIA,V



    106,    Compositions:

            Coating or

            Plastic V       86



    122,    Liquid

            Heaters and

            Vaporizers      V       40



    127,    Sugar,

            Starch, and

            Carbohydrates           48



    134,    Cleaning

            and Liquid

            Contact With

            Solids  IIIA,IIIC2,V    4



    137,    Fluid

            Handling                1,2,3,20,
       40



    159,    Concentra-

            ting Evapo-

            rators  IIIA,IIIC5,V    10,71,72,                       88,89,90,
                       99



    162,    Paper Making

            and Fiber

            Liberation              1



    165,    Heat

            Exchange                10,21,75,

                            98,100



    196,    Mineral Oils:

            Apparatus               1,7,21,
                                            22,71,72,
                          75,78,82,                         84,86,89,
                          91,93,95,                         97,98,

                            100

    201,    Distillation:

            Processes,

            Thermolytic     IIIA,IIID       1,4,20,

                            22,39,86,                       87,91



    202,    Distilla-

            tion:  Appa-

            ratus           1,2,7,

                            10,20,21,

                            25,40,41,

                            49,71,72,

                            73,86,87,

                            88,89,90,

                            91,100



    208,    Mineral Oils:

            Processes and

            Products        IIIA,IIIB4b     7,14,21,

                            22,23,28,

                            39,41,42,

                            43,49,50,

                            52,58,68,

                            71,72,75,

                            78,82,84,

                            87,88,89,

                            90,91,94,

                            95,97,98,

                            99



    209,    Classifying,

            Separating,

            and Assor-

            ting Solids             40



    210,    Liquid Pur-

            ification or

            Separation      V       10,41,47,

                            100



    237,    Heating

            Systems         21



    252,    Composi-

            tions           6,7,20,

    260,    Chemistry of

            Carbon Com-

            pounds  I,IIIA,IIIB2    2,14,15,
                                           17,28,30,
    31,32,39,

                            41,42,43,

                            48,57,68,

                            69,70,86



    261,    Gas and

            Liquid Con-

            tact Appa-

            ratus   V       21,42


    264,    Plastic and

            Nonmetallic

            Article Sha-

            ping or

            Treating:

            Processes               99



    266,    Metallurgical

            Apparatus               86



    361,    Electricity:

            Electrical

            Systems and

            Devices         1



    366,    Agitating       V



    374,    Thermal Mea-

            suring and

            Testing         1



    422,    Chemical

            Apparatus

            and Process

            Disinfecting,

            Deodorizing,

            Preserving,

            or Sterilizing          6



    423,    Chemistry of

            Inorganic

            Compounds       IIIB2,IIIB4e    5,10,13

                            13,50

    424,    Drug, Bio-

            Affecting and

            Body Treating

            Compositions            43



    426,    Food or

            Edible Mater-

            ial:  Pro-

            cesses, Com-

            positions, and

            Products        IIIA,IIIB4d,III

                    C-6,V   43



    432,    Heating         100



    435,    Chemistry:

            Molecular Bi-

            ology and

            Microbio-

            logy    IIIA,IIIB4c     20



    502,    Catalyst,-

            Solid Sorbent,-

            or Support

            Therefor:-

            Product or-

            Process of

            Making          41



    585,    Chemistry of

            Hydrocarbon

            Compounds       IIIA,IIIB2,

                    IIIC6



    V.      MISCELLANEOUS SEARCH NOTES

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclasses for processes and apparatus
    peculiar  to removing heat from a substance.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, appropriate subclasses for a process of reducing an ore to the
    metallic state or refining molten metal involving distillation or for a
    sublimination process.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, for processes involving steps resulting
    in separation of a gas from a fluid mixture comprising (a) a gas and solid
    or liquid particles entrained therein, (b) a liquid and gas entrained
    therein, or (c) a plurality of gases.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 275+ for apparatus for
    preparing beverages.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating and Plastic, appropriate subclasses for a
    coating composition which may be applied to surfaces of the distillation
    apparatus or utilized for making apparatus of a particular composition.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, appropriate subclass for heating
    liquids, superheating or cooling the vapors generated and conserving the
    heat in the liquid or vapor in a closed system.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 1+ for a
    cleaning process, particularly subclass 12 for a process including the step
    of distilling the treating agent and subclass 31 for a process including
    the step of condensing a gas or vapor.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, for apparatus and processes not more
    specifically provided for elsewhere, peculiar to the concentration of
    solids held in solution or suspension by evaporation of the liquid
    containing them.  See subclasses 48.1+ for a process of concentrating by
    spraying and subclass 49 for a process of concentrating by a filming
    operation. See also subclasses 5+ for a film type evaporator.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses for a
    process for purifying or separating a liquid by (1) sorption or ionic
    exchange, (2) filtration, (3) liquid-liquid extraction, (4) purification by
    destruction or conversion of a constituent thereof.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus adapted to produce an intimate contact between gases and liquids
    and see (2) Note under the class definition.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 219+ for apparatus for agitating a liquid or
    a particulate material by motion of the container, and subclasses 241+ for
    a fixed container with movable stirring apparatus, particularly subclasses
    262+ for pump type stirrers.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 11+ for processes of preparing alcoholic beverages including
    distillation.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for distillation process in the destruction of hazardous or
    toxic waste.

    935,    Genetic Engineering:  Recombinant DNA Technology, Hybrid or Fused
    Cell Technology, and Related Manipulations of Nucleic Acids, which provides
    a search collection for processes of altering the genetic structure of
    microorganisms; genes and methods of modifying genes and their expression;
    vectors and methods of modifying vectors; methods of introducing DNA into a
    cell; microorganisms, per se, which have had their genetic sequence altered
    by recombinant DNA techniques or by cell fusion or by uptake of DNA;
    testing; separation techniques; apparatus; and methods of use of vectors or
    of the genetically engineered microorganisms; methods of gene therapy or
    genetic modification of living organisms.


CLS 203/1
TXT Processes under class definition combined with the positive step of
    visually, chemically or physically determining some chemical or physical
    characteristic or property of the feed, vapor, residue or condensate.

    (1)     Note.  The chemical or physical characteristic must be positively
    stated in the claim for the purpose of this and indented subclasses, e.g.,
    measuring the temperature.  Heating to a specified temperature is not
    determining a characteristic within the purview of this and indented
    subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for measuring and
    testing apparatus.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 2+ for a process in which a condition or
    characteristic of a fluent material is determined and used to control the
    system.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclass 238 for a digester with
    automatic control means.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 132 for mineral oil vaporizing
    apparatus provided with automatic control.

    201,    Distillation: Processes, Thermolytic, subclass 1 for a process
    directed to thermolytic distillation combined with measuring, testing or
    inspecting.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclasses 151, 160, 193, 196, 206 for
    distillation apparatus having control devices and see "SEARCH CLASS" under
    each subclass.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, appropriate
    subclasses for electrical systems not otherwise classified and see "SEARCH
    CLASS" under the class definitions for various types of electrical systems.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 230+
    for a process of chemically testing not combined with a distillation
    process.


CLS 203/2
TXT Processes under subclass 1 directed to specifically determining the
    temperature and/or pressure of the feed, vapor, residue or condensate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for device for
    quantitatively measuring temperature and 700+ for a device for the direct
    measurement of pressure.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 2+ for a process of fluid handling in
    which one or more characteristics or conditions of a fluent material are
    determined, particularly subclass 14 for a process involving pressure
    control.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 160 for a separatory
    distillation system including a column provided with automatic temperature
    and/or pressure control, and see "SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS" and "SEARCH
    CLASS" thereunder for related fields of search.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, subclass 700 for a process directed
    to temperature control.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 100+ for a device for
    quantitatively determining temperature.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclass 956 for a collection
    of patents concerned with condition-responsive control procedures in
    hydrocarbon purification processes.


CLS 203/3
TXT Processes under subclass 1 including the steps of determining the
    concentration of the feed, vapor, residue or condensate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 32+ for apparatus for determining
    density and/or specific gravity of a liquid.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 2+ for a process of fluid handling in
    which one or more characteristics or conditions of a fluent material are
    determined.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 345+ for interferometers
    and subclasses 128+ for refractometers.


CLS 203/4
TXT Processes under the class definition combined with a step of removing a
    contaminant from the separatory apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  Usually a material, such as a gas, is passed through the
    apparatus to remove the contaminant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 241+ for degasification of
    liquid.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 1+ for a
    process of separating or removing adherent undesired matter from solid
    material and subclasses 43+ for apparatus for cleaning by liquid contact.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 15 for a process of removing undesirable
    material from the system.

    201,    Distillation: Processes, Thermolytic, subclass 2 for a process of
    cleaning the apparatus or removing adhering char product.


CLS 203/5
TXT Processes under the class definition directed to separating (1) the atoms
    of a given element or a compound containing said atoms according to the
    atomic weights of said atoms according to the atomic weights of said atoms
    or (2) a mixture containing at least two tautomeric forms of a substance
    initially in a state of equilibrium.

    (1)     Note.  A mixture of H2O and D2O is an example of a feed mixture
    containing hydrogen atoms of different atomic weights.

    (2)     Note.  Separating by distillation the ketoenol forms of a compound
    is within the purview of this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 31+ for processes in which a
    plurality of gases is separated by making use of physical difference in
    weight.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclass 580.1 for processes of
    producing water and subclass 580.2 for processes of producing heavy water
    including a chemical reaction.


CLS 203/6
TXT Processes under the class definition including adding an element or a
    chemical compound or mixture (of substances) to the distilland or the vapor
    to inhibit or prevent formation of scale on the apparatus and/or to inhibit
    or prevent corrosion of the apparatus and/or to inhibit or prevent an
    unwanted reaction of the feed, vapor, residue or condensate.

    (1)     Note.  The addition of a scale inhibiting material to water being
    distilled or the addition of a corrosion inhibiting material to an acidic
    material being distilled or the addition of a material which inhibits the
    polymerization of an olefin at the temperature of the distillation are
    nonlimiting examples of the scope of this and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86,     for a separatory distillation process including the use of a
    surface of a specific composition which thereby inhibits or prevents an
    unwanted reaction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 397+ for compositions for preventing,
    inhibiting or reducing oxidation, chemical decomposition, or other chemical
    change.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, and its daughter Classes 530-570 for
    a nonhydrocarbon organic compound containing a stabilizer.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 7+ for process of maintaining an
    environment nondestructive to metal.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclasses 1+ for a hydrocarbon
    compound containing a stabilizer.


CLS 203/7
TXT Processes under subclass 6 directed to adding a substance to inhibit or
    prevent corrosion of the apparatus and/or to inhibit or prevent scale
    formation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 133 for a mineral oil vaporizer
    having some special feature of construction.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 267 for apparatus in terms of
    the materials of construction.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclass 47 for a process of
    treating mineral oil including a step to prevent or reduce corrosion or
    erosion of the apparatus employed in the process and see "SEARCH THIS
    CLASS, SUBCLASS" and "SEARCH CLASS" thereunder for related fields of search.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 175+ for  water-softening or purifying or
    scale-inhibiting agents, and subclasses 387+ for anti-corrosion agents.


CLS 203/8
TXT Processes under subclass 6 directed to adding a substance to inhibit or
    prevent unwanted polymerization.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for a separatory distillation process in which a substance is added
    to cause a desired polymerization of at least one component.


CLS 203/9
TXT Processes under subclass 8 directed to inhibiting or preventing the
    polymerization of an unsaturated hydrocarbon.


CLS 203/10
TXT Processes under the class definition of purifying water in which the only
    material recovered as a product is water.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclasses 5+ for concentrating
    apparatus of the film type, subclasses 13+ for evaporating apparatus
    designed to maintain the liquid being evaporated in a film and subclass 49
    for an evaporating process in which the liquid to be concentrated is spread
    in a thin film.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 3 for a process of adding water vapor to
    air or removing water vapor from air.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 167 for a separatory
    distillation apparatus which includes a still and a feed water heater.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 600+ for a process of
    purifying a liquid not otherwise provided for.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclass 580.1 for processes of
    producing water and 580.2 for processes of producing heavy water including
    a chemical reaction.


CLS 203/11
TXT Processes under subclass 10 in which distillation is carried out under a
    pressure greater than atmospheric or under a vacuum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73+,    for a plural distillation process in which at least one
    distillation is under pressure or vacuum and subclasses 91+ for a single
    distillation process carried out under pressure or vacuum.


CLS 203/12
TXT Processes under the class definition in which only water is removed from
    the feed mixture.

    (1)     Note.  For  purposes of this and indented subclasses water is the
    impurity of the distilland which is to be removed.  A process of removing
    other impurities as well as water is excluded.

    (2)     Note.  A plural distillation process of separating only water by
    adding an extraneous liquid to the distilland to alter the relative
    volatility of water and the liquid be dried in the initial distillation
    step and then distilling a product of the initial distilling operation to
    separate the extraneous liquid is classified here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10+,    for a process in which the only material recovered as a product is
    water and 50+ for a process directed to adding a specific extraneous
    material to alter the relative volatility of a component of a mixture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry:   Physical Processes, subclass 306 for a process of
    concentrating a solution of a liquid in a liquid not otherwise provided for.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate
    subclasses, under "Processes" for a process for separating a liquid from a
    solid.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 93+ for a process of removing moisture
    from air.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, appropriate subclasses for processes of
    removing water from a gaseous fluid mixture.  See particularly subclasses
    117+ for solid sorption processes to remove water from a gaseous fluid
    mixture and subclass 231 for processes of liquid contacting to remove water
    from a gaseous fluid mixture.


CLS 203/13
TXT Processes under subclass 12 in which the liquid substance is aqueous nitric
    acid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 390.1+ for producing
    nitric acid by a chemical reaction.


CLS 203/14
TXT Processes under subclass 12 for separating water from an organic compound.

    (1)     Note.  Mixtures of organic substances from which only water is
    separated by a distillation step are included in this and indented
    subclasses unless otherwise provided for.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 187+ for a
    process for removing water from mineral oils and see "Note", "SEARCH THIS
    CLASS, SUBCLASS" and "SEARCH CLASS" in subclass 187 for related processes
    for removing water from organic mixtures.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, appropriate subclasses for a process
    including removing water by distillation combined with a step for forming a
    compound or extracting the compound from a natural source.


CLS 203/15
TXT Processes under subclass 14 in which the organic substance is an organic
    acid.

    (1)     Note.  The term "organic acid" includes organic compounds which
    contain an acid function, e.g., boro, phosphor, sulfa or carboxylic group
    and see Class 260, Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, subclass 500 "(1) Note".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for a separatory distillation process for removing only water from
    salts or esters of organic acids.


CLS 203/16
TXT Processes under subclass 15 in which the organic acid is acetic acid.


CLS 203/17
TXT Processes under subclass 14 in which the organic substance is an aldehyde
    or a ketone.

    (1)     Note.  The terms "aldehyde" and "ketone" include those compounds
    having the structure R1COR2 wherein R1 is hydrocarbon and R2 is either
    hydrogen or hydrocarbon.  See Class 568, Organic Compounds, subclasses 303
    and 420 and the notes thereunder.


CLS 203/18
TXT Processes under subclass 14 in which the organic substance is an alcohol.

    (1)     Note.  For  purposes of this and indented subclasses the term
    "alcohol" is limited to a hydroxy group bonded to carbon.


CLS 203/19
TXT Processes under subclass 18 in which the alcohol is ethanol.


CLS 203/20
TXT Processes under the class definition directed to defoaming or inhibiting
    the formation of foam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclass 155 for processes of gas
    separation involving liquid contacting and the use of a defoaming or
    antifoaming agent; subclass 157 for processes of gas separation involving
    liquid contacting and defoaming the liquid; and subclass 242 for defoaming
    a liquid, per se.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 107.1+ for apparatus for controlling the
    degree of foaming in a gas charged liquid.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclass 9 for a process of
    surface treating the solid particles of the charge to inhibit, reduce or
    prevent foaming during distillation.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 264 for distillation apparatus
    intended to break foam or inhibit foaming.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 321 for a process not combined with
    distillation for inhibiting foam and Search Class thereunder; subclass 358
    for compositions for use in breaking colloids.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 266 for a
    fermentation process including the step of treating the foam produced.


CLS 203/21
TXT Processes under the class definition directed to recovering waste heat by
    indirect heat exchange with (1) a disparate source or (2) a product of a
    distillation step.

    (1)     Note.  Heat generated by an engine which runs a compressor used in
    the process is a disparate source of "waste heat" within the scope of this
    and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    for a digest of distillation processes directed to specific type of
    heating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 427 and 513
    for a process including conserving heat by indirect heat exchange.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 96 for a process in which heat from a gas
    being cooled is transferred to a heat absorber by indirect heat exchange,
    and subclass 113 for a process of refrigeration in which one function is in
    heat exchange relation with a second function.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for heat exchange apparatus
    and note Search Class under Class definition for related fields of search.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 134 for apparatus for vaporizing
    mineral oils including means for heat recovery from the vapor or residuum.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 146 for a horizontal retort with
    flues wherein the air and/or gas for combustion is heated by the waste
    products of combustion by means of a single-surface heater and subclass 150
    for a similar apparatus using a double-surface heater.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclass 365 for a process
    wherein the mineral oil distilland is heated by indirect contact with a
    heated product of the distillation.

    237,    Heating Systems, appropriate subclass for a heating system which
    may use the heat rejecting portion of a refrigeration system with
    additional heating means.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 158+ for apparatus for
    indirect interchange of heat between contact fluids.


CLS 203/22
TXT Processes under subclass 21 in which the feed is heated by the recovered
    waste heat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 513 for a
    process of including the step of exchanging heat between the incoming and
    outgoing gases.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 134 for mineral oil vaporizing
    apparatus having means for preheating the oil by the heat of the vapor or
    residue.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclasses 14+ for a
    thermolytic distillation process directed to using a conversion product as
    an indirect source of heat for heating the feed.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 159 for a distillation system
    including a device for heating the feed with a product of the distillation
    step and subclasses 177+ for a still system including a device for
    preheating the feed with a product of the distillation step.


CLS 203/23
TXT Processes under subclass 22 in which distillation residue is the source of
    recovered heat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclass 353 for a process
    wherein one component being distilled is heated by indirect heat exchange
    of a component of the process, usually by the residue.


CLS 203/24
TXT Processes under subclass 22 in which compressed vapor is the source of
    waste heat.


CLS 203/25
TXT Processes under subclass 21 in which the distillation zone is heated by the
    recovered waste heat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclasses 174 for multiple effect still
    series apparatus, 187 for apparatus in which the still and condenser are
    concentric and 192 for apparatus to which the cooling liquid in the
    condenser passes to the still to be distilled.


CLS 203/26
TXT Processes under subclass 25, in which the source of waste heat is
    compressed vapor.


CLS 203/27
TXT Processes under subclass 21, in which the recovered waste heat is utilized
    in a step subsequent to the step in which the heat was produced.


CLS 203/28
TXT Processes under the class definition including the step of producing a
    chemical reaction of a component of the mixture being separated to
    facilitate separation of the desired substance in the original mixture.

    (1)     Note.  To come within the purview of this and indented subclasses a
    chemical change must occur which facilitates the recovery without chemical
    change of the desired substance which was present in the original mixture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 46+ for a process
    of treating mineral oil which results in a chemical alteration of at least
    some of the hydrocarbon molecules thereof.

    546,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 134+ for a general process of
    chemically treating a carbon compound not otherwise provided for.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the use of a chemical reaction with distillation as part of
    a process of the destruction of hazardous or toxic waste.


CLS 203/29
TXT Processes under subclass 28, directed to adding a catalyst or a material
    which reacts with a component of the mixture to assist the separation of
    the desired component in the original mixture.

    (1)     Note.  A chemical reaction for purposes of this and indented
    subclasses includes such reactions as (1) forming hydrates, (2) adjusting
    of hydrogen ion concentration, (3) polymerizing a component, (4) oxidizing
    or reducing a component or the addition to the mixture being acted upon of
    an oxidizing or reducing agent, and (5) the forming of different substances.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50+,    for adding a substance to alter the relative volatility of
    components of the incoming feed without specifically producing a new
    chemical compound.


CLS 203/30
TXT Processes under subclass 29, in which the added material causes unwanted
    material in the feed to enter a reaction forming polymeric material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 1+ for a process of
    polymerizing, per se, and products resulting therefrom.

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives; Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclasses 211+ for a process
    polymerizing, per se, and products resulting therefrom.

    554,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 25-29 for a process polymerizing, per
    se, and products resulting therefrom.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclasses 502+ for olefin
    polymerization processes; and subclass 832 for a hydrocarbon purification
    process which involves polymerization and depolymerization.


CLS 203/31
TXT Processes under subclass 29, directed to adding an oxidizing substance.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is limited to incorporating a substance which
    is stated to oxidize a part of the material being treated or is a
    well-known oxidizing agent.

    (2)     Note.  Nitric acid is classified here and crossed to subclass 34.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, appropriate subclass for a process
    of purification by an oxidative treatment of a particular carbon compound
    and subclass 702 for a general process of oxidation of impurities.  See (1)
    Note under subclass 702.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclasses 833+ for a
    purification process involving the addition of an oxidizing agent to a
    hydrocarbon feedstock.


CLS 203/32
TXT Processes under subclass 29 directed to adding a reducing substance.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is limited to incorporating a substance which
    is stated to reduce a part of the material being treated or is a well known
    reducing agent, e.g., hydrogen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, appropriate subclasses for a process
    of purifying by a reductive treatment, a particular carbon compound and
    subclass 701 for a general process of reductive treatment.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclasses 258+ and 841 for
    hydrogenative purification of hydrocarbons.


CLS 203/33
TXT Processes under subclass 29, in which the reactive material added is a
    metal or ammonium salt of an inorganic oxygen containing acid.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes acid, neutral and basic salts of oxygen
    containing inorganic acids, e.g., NaHSO4, Na2SO4, CuCO3, Cu(OH)2.


CLS 203/34
TXT Processes under subclass 29, in which the added material is an acid.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this and indented subclasses the term "acid"
    includes inorganic compounds which contain hydrogen as the cation and under
    subclass 15 see (1) Note for definition of organic acids.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for processes in which the reacting material is a complex inorganic
    acid  salt, e.g., NaHCO3.


CLS 203/35
TXT Processes under subclass 34 in which the acid is phosphoric or sulfuric.


CLS 203/36
TXT Processes under subclass 29, in which the added material is an alkaline
    oxide or an alkaline hydroxide.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is limited to the oxides and hydroxides of
    alkali metals, alkaline earth metals including magnesium and the scandium
    group metals.


CLS 203/37
TXT Processes under subclass 36, in which the material is an alkali metal
    hydroxide.


CLS 203/38
TXT Processes under subclass 29, in which the added material is organic.

    (1)     Note.  To come within the purview of this subclass an organic
    compound must be clearly disclosed to react with a component of the mixture
    being treated to form a new compound.

    (2)     Note.  See class definitions of Class 260, Chemistry of Carbon
    Compounds, for the scope of the term "organic".

    (3)     Note.  A separatory distillation process of adding an organic
    compound, such as an alcohol or an acid, to form in situ an ester which
    assists separation is classified here and cross-referenced to the
    appropriate indented subclass under subclass 57.


CLS 203/39
TXT Processes under the class definition combined with subjecting the material
    being vaporized, the vapor, the distillate or the residue to a disparate
    physical treatment to remove a substance.

    (1)     Note.  A process merely including the step of separating the
    immiscible layers of the distillate, e.g., decanting, is not considered a
    disparate separation for this and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50+,    for a separatory distillation process including the step of
    separating the distillate layers in an azeotropic type distillation and
    subclasses 76, 79, 83, 85, 92+, and 95+, when the azeotroping agent is
    water only.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, subclasses 293+ for a general
    physical process not otherwise classified and under subclass 293, see
    "SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS" and "SEARCH CLASS" for related fields of
    search.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, for processes of gas separation, per se.

    201,    Distillation: Processes, Thermolytic, subclasses 3+ for a process
    of physical separating of a solid in the removed by product mixture.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclass 369 for a process
    of distilling mineral oil involving some noncondensation treatment of the
    volatiles evolved during distillation and subclass 349 for a process in
    which the liquid condensate or the residue resulting from the distillation
    is subjected to a nonvaporizing treatment.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, subclasses 236.5+ for a process for
    preparing and treating extracts.  See "Notes" under subclass 236.5 and
    "SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS" and under subclass 236.6.  Subclasses 704+,
    includes general physical processes of treating a carbon compound not
    otherwise provided for.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclasses 802+ for hydrocarbon
    purification by plural serial diverse separations.


CLS 203/40
TXT Processes under subclass 39, directed to removing entrained solid or liquid
    particles from gas or vapor in the distillation operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, for processes, per se, of removing
    solid or liquid particles entrained in a gas.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 492 for a device in the
    steam dome of a boiler for separating water from steam.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 544+ for fluid handling apparatus
    including means for separating solid material from a fluid and see "SEARCH
    THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS" and "SEARCH CLASS" under subclass 544 for related
    fields of search.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 197 for apparatus in which vapor
    deposits entrained solid or liquid particles.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting, subclasses 19-37 and 133+
    for a process of using free suspension in a gas or separating solid
    components of a mixture.


CLS 203/41
TXT Processes under subclass 39, directed to material being treated being acted
    upon with a solid sorbent to assist separation of a desired product.

    (1)     Note.  The sorbent must contact the distilland during distillation
    or a   product of the distillation step.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 90+ for processes, per se,
    of gas separation utilizing solid sorption.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 200 for distillation apparatus
    in which the vapor is passed through porous material or other porous
    material.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclass 310 for a process
    wherein a mineral oil containing fluid is contacted with a solid sorptive
    material, and note "SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS" and "SEARCH CLASS"
    thereunder.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 660+ for a process of
    purifying a liquid by sorption.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Processes
    of  Making, subclasses 60+ and 400+ for a sorbent composition.


CLS 203/42
TXT Processes under subclass 39, directed to extracting a component from gas or
    vapor with a liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 149+ for processes, per se,
    of gas separation utilizing liquid contacting.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclass 311 for a process
    in which mineral oil is mixed with a liquid which will form with a portion
    of the oil a liquid phase which is immiscible with the rest of the oil and
    note "SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS" and "SEARCH CLASS" thereunder.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, subclass 708 for a process including
    treatment for absorbing impurities, and note "SEARCH CLASS" thereunder.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus for contacting a gas and a liquid.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclasses 833+ for hydrocarbon
    purification by solvent extraction.


CLS 203/43
TXT Processes under subclass 39 directed to extracting a liquid product of a
    distillation step with a liquid.

    (1)     Note.  The extraction with a liquid must take place subsequent to
    the vaporization of the distilland.  The liquid extracted may be the
    initial distillate or residue or a product of a subsequent distillation
    operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, subclasses 306+ for process of
    concentrating a liquid in liquid.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclass 190 for processes, per se, of
    gas separation utilizing liquid contacting and separation of liquid from
    the contact liquid by liquid-liquid extraction.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 311+ for a
    process in which mineral oil is mixed with or contacted with another liquid
    which will dissolve or is miscible with a portion or fraction of the oil
    and by so doing forming a liquid phase which is immiscible with another
    portion or fraction, particularly subclass 339 and under subclass 311 see
    "SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS" and "SEARCH CLASS" for related fields of
    search.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 634+ for a process of
    extracting a solute from a liquid solution by contacting the solution with
    a second liquid.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, and its daughter Classes 530-570
    appropriate subclasses for a process of isolating or purifying a
    nonhydrocarbon carbon compound including a liquid extraction step and
    subclass 705 for a process including extracting a carbon compound from a
    mixture.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses for a
    process of isolating or purifying an inorganic compound by an extracting,
    leaching or dissolving step.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, for a process
    of producing a composition of that class and which may include an
    extraction step.  See especially subclasses 123+, 195.1+  and  520+.

    426,    Food or Edible Material: Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 425+ for extracting or using a liquid as an extracting medium.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclasses 833+ for hydrocarbon
    purification by solvent extraction.


CLS 203/44
TXT Processes under subclass 43 in which the extracted liquid is a distillate.


CLS 203/45
TXT Processes under subclass 44, directed to distilling the distillate after it
    has been extracted with a liquid.

    (1)     Note.  The raffinate phase is that part of the distillate which
    does not dissolve in the extracting liquid during the liquid extraction
    step.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74+     and 81+, for a plural separatory distillation process in which the
    initial distillate is distilled.


CLS 203/46
TXT Processes under subclass 44, directed to distilling the extracting liquid
    phase subsequent to the extraction step.

    (1)     Note.  The extracting liquid phase is the liquid composed of the
    extracting liquid and the portion of the distillate soluble therein.


CLS 203/47
TXT Processes under subclass 39, directed to separating a solid material from a
    product of the distillation step.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 600+ for a process of
    separating a solid from a liquid, especially subclasses 702+ for an
    accretion or precipitation process; and subclasses 767+ for a skimming,
    settling, or filtration process.


CLS 203/48
TXT Processes under subclass 47 directed to crystallizing a component from a
    product of the distillation step.

    (1)     Note.  The fact that the solid material is crystalline must be
    stated in the claim.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, subclasses 295+ for a process
    including crystallization and under subclass 295, see "SEARCH CLASS" for
    related crystallization processes.

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, subclasses 58+ for a process of
    crystallizing sugar from a solution.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, subclass 707 for a process of
    physically treating an organic compound which includes the step of
    crystallizing.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclasses 812+ for a
    hydrocarbon separation or purification process which includes chilling to
    form a solid.


CLS 203/49
TXT Processes under the class definition directed to passing through the
    material being distilled a normally gaseous substance.

    (1)     Note.  A substance to be considered "normally gaseous" must have a
    boiling point below - 10oC at atmospheric pressure.  Air, ammonia, carbon
    dioxide, dimethyl ether and propane are some examples of "normally gaseous"
    substances.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, subclass 307 for a process of
    concentrating a solution of a liquid in a liquid in which the liquid being
    concentrated is directly contacted with the concentrating medium (e.g., hot
    gases).

    95,     Gas Separation: Processes, subclasses 263+ for degasification of a
    liquid by stripping with a gas.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 134 for a retort having
    provision for injecting a fluid for convective separation of the distillate.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 356 and 362 for a
    process of distilling mineral oil in the presence of an added gas or vapor,
    and subclass 43 for a process of contacting tar with high temperature gas
    during distillation.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus adapted to produce an intimate contact between gases and liquids,
    particularly subclasses 121+ for devices for discharging gases beneath the
    surface of a liquid.


CLS 203/50
TXT Processes under the class definition including the step of adding material
    other than water or steam per se to the distilland or distillation zone.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and indented subclasses include azeotropic and
    extractive distillations in which additional material other than water or
    steam alone is added to alter the relative volatility of components of the
    distilland to assist the distillative separation.  Usually the material is
    added to the distilland or the distillation zone.  Recycling all or part of
    a product of the distillation is not considered adding an additional
    material for purposes of this and indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  The use of water or steam in addition to the added material
    is within the scope of this and indented subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  When two or more distinct species of added substance are
    claimed, the patent is placed in the subclass first providing for a
    species.  When a species claimed is not specifically provided for, the
    patent is placed in the generic subclass (50 or 57) and cross-references to
    the subclasses providing for the other species.

    (4)     Note.  See Class 260, Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, class
    definitions, Definition of Terms Employed in this Class, and appropriate
    subclasses for definitions of terms for organic compounds used in this and
    indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12+,    for a process for reducing only the water content of the distilland
    in which additional material assists the distillative separation and
    subclasses 76, 79, 83, 85, 92+, and 95+ for a separatory distillation
    process in which only water or steam is the additional material added.

    29+,    for a separatory distillation process in which the added material
    reacts with a component of the material being separated or catalyzes a
    chemical reaction.

    39+,    for a distillation process in which an extraneous material is
    utilized to assist a disparate physical separation such as extraction or
    sorption.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 356 and 362 for a
    process of distilling mineral oil in the presence of an added gas or vapor,
    and subclass 313 for a process of distilling mineral oil in the presence of
    a selective solvent.  Under subclass 362 see "SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS"
    and "SEARCH CLASS" for related fields of search.


CLS 203/51
TXT Processes under subclass 50 in which plural materials are added.

    (1)     Note.  Each of the added materials may be repeatedly added to the
    distilland at different points in the same distillation zone, for the
    purpose of this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  When a series of distillations is carried out and a
    different substance is added in separate distillations, the process is
    treated as adding a single substance and classified under subclass 50
    according to the claimed added substance first appearing.


CLS 203/52
TXT Processes under subclass 51 in which a mixture of hydrocarbons is added.

    (1)     Note.  Benzine, gasoline and kerosene are examples of hydrocarbon
    mixtures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 14+ for mineral
    oil mixtures.


CLS 203/53
TXT Processes under subclass 51 in which the additional material comprises
    water or stream and at least one other substance.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this and  indented subclasses the plural
    component mixture added includes a solution, a suspension, or water and at
    least one other substance added separately to produce a complementary
    result.


CLS 203/54
TXT Processes under subclass 53 in which another substance comprises an
    aldehyde or a ketone.


CLS 203/55
TXT Processes under subclass 53 in which the other substance comprises an
    alcohol.


CLS 203/56
TXT Processes under subclass 51 in which the additional material comprises an
    alcohol or an ether and at least one other substance.


CLS 203/57
TXT Processes under subclass 50 in which the additional material is an organic
    compound.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 260, Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, Class
    Definitions, Definitions of Terms Employed In This Class, and appropriate
    subclasses for definitions of terms used in this and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, appropriate subclass for a
    particular nonhydrocarbon organic compound.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclasses 16+ for a
    hydrocarbon compound per se, and subclasses 864+ for hydrocarbon
    purification involving use of an organic agent.


CLS 203/58
TXT Processes under subclass 57 in which the organic compound is heterocyclic.

    (1)     Note.  The term heterocyclic denotes the presence of a ring whose
    members are composed of at least one carbon atom and one or more atoms of
    the elements taken from the group consisting of nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium and tellurium.

    (2)     Note.  Carbohydrates and their derivatives unless shown to be
    acyclic are presumed to be heterocyclic compounds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for a distillation process utilizing a ring oregano boron or
    oregano phosphorus compound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    208,    Mineral Oils: Processes and Products, subclasses 325+ for a process
    of fractionating mineral oil in which a heterocyclic  organic compound is a
    selective solvent.


CLS 203/59
TXT Processes under subclass 57 in which the organic compound is an amine.

    (1)     Compounds containing amino and  other functional groups are
    classified here and cross-referenced to the other functional groups
    appearing below.


CLS 203/60
TXT Processes under subclass 57 in which the organic compound is an ester.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass the term "ester" includes
    amide and nitrite.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for a separatory distillation process in which an organic acid or
    an alcohol is added to form in situ an ester which aids separation by
    changing the relative volatility of components of the distilland.


CLS 203/61
TXT Processes under subclass 57 in which the organic compound is an acid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for the scope of the term "and".


CLS 203/62
TXT Processes under subclass 57 in which the organic compound is an aldehyde or
    a ketone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for the meaning of "aldehyde" and "ketone".


CLS 203/63
TXT Processes under subclass 57 in which the compound is an alcohol or an ether.

    (1)     Note.  As used in this and indented subclasses the term "alcohol"
    includes the monohydroxy and polyhydroxy organic compounds such as:
    butanol, glycol, glycerol, sorbitol, cyclohexanol, phenol, (ROH).

    (2)     Note.  As used in this and indented subclasses the term "ether"
    includes organic compounds in which the hydrogen of at least one alcohol
    group has been replaced by a hydrocarbon radical.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for a process using a mercaptan (thiol alcohol) or an organic
    sulfide (thiol ether) without other significant groups.

    59,     for a process in which the added material is an amino alcohol.


CLS 203/64
TXT Processes under subclass 63 in which the compound is polyhydroxy alcohol or
    an ether derivative thereof.


CLS 203/65
TXT Processes under subclass 63 in which the organic compound is a hydroxy
    aromatic, e.g., phenol, naphthol, cresol.


CLS 203/66
TXT Processes under subclass 63 in which the alcohol is methanol.


CLS 203/67
TXT Processes under subclass 57 in which the compound is a halogenated
    hydrocarbon.

    (1)     Note.  Organic compounds which contain only carbon, hydrogen and
    halogen are halogenated hydrocarbons.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, subclasses 648+ for compounds which
    contain halogen bonded to carbon.


CLS 203/68
TXT Processes under subclass 57 in which the compound is a hydrocarbon.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this and indented subclasses the term
    "hydrocarbon" is limited to compounds consisting of carbon and hydrogen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12+,    for a process of separating only water in which a hydrocarbon is
    the azeotroping agent.

    43+,    for a process in which the extracting liquid is a hydrocarbon.

    52,     for a process of adding a mixture of hydrocarbons to assist
    separation during distillation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclass 337 for a process
    of fraction- ating mineral oil using a hydrocarbon as a solvent.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, appropriate subclasses for
    compounds which consist of carbon and hydrogen only.


CLS 203/69
TXT Processes under subclass 68 in which the hydrocarbon is aromatic.

    (1)     Note.  A compound consisting of carbon and hydrogen characterized
    by the presence of a benzene nucleus is an aromatic hydrocarbon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclasses 16 and 18 for a
    hydrocarbon which contains a benzene nucleus.


CLS 203/70
TXT Processes under subclass 68 in which the hydrocarbon is acyclic.

    (1)     Note.  A compound consisting of carbon and hydrogen and having an
    open chain structure, only, is an acyclic hydrocarbon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclasses 16 and 18 for a
    hydrocarbon which is acyclic.


CLS 203/71
TXT Processes under the class definition directed to utilizing at least two
    distilling operations to separate components present in the original
    mixture.

    (1)     Note.  The second distilling operation may be performed on all or a
    part of a distillate, a side stream or a residue from the initial
    distilling operation.

    (2)     Note.  For purposes of this and indented subclasses an operation is
    considered to be a plural operation if (a) a part of a distilland is
    removed by distillation and the residue in the still is further distilled
    under a different pressure or with the addition or absence of water or
    steam and (b) two or more distillation systems are used regardless as to
    whether there is an intermediate condensation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21+,    for a plural distillation process in which useful heat is recovered
    by indirect heat exchange.

    43,     for a plural distillation process in which a residue of a
    distillation operation is extracted with a liquid.

    44+,    for a plural distillation process in which a distillate of a
    distillation operation is extracted with a liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, subclass 306 for a process of
    concentrating a solution of a liquid in a liquid not otherwise provided for.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclasses 47.1+, for a process of
    concentrating a liquid, and see "SEARCH CLASS" thereunder for related
    fields of search.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclasses 105+ for a plurality of
    interconnected mineral oil vaporizers.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclasses 154 and 155 for separatory
    distillation apparatus having plural columns and/or plural stills and
    subclass 173 for a plurality of stills so connected that either the vapor
    or the residue of one flows into the other.

    208,    Mineral Oils: Processes and Products, subclasses 354+ and 364+ for
    a process of distilling mineral oil wherein the vaporization is carried out
    in a plurality of separate and distinct operations.


CLS 203/72
TXT Processes under subclass 71 in which at least one distilling operation is
    directed to introducing the distilland into the vaporization zone by
    spreading it as a thin film over a surface.

    (1)     Note.  The surface on which the distilland is spread may be liquid,
    solid or foraminous.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89,     for a process involving a single distillation operation in which
    the distilland is spread as a thin film over a surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclasses 5+ for concentrating
    apparatus of the film type including subclasses 13+ for evaporating
    apparatus designed to maintain the liquid being evaporated in a film and
    subclass 49 for an evaporating process in which the liquid to be
    concentrated is spread in a thin film.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 128 for vaporizing apparatus for
    distilling mineral oil in a thin film.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 236 for separatory distillation
    apparatus in which the still has means for intro- ducing the distilland
    into the still in the form of a spray or the distilland is introduced into
    the still in the form of a film.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclass 360 for a process
    of distilling mineral oil wherein the oil is spread as a thin film on a
    surface.


CLS 203/73
TXT Processes under subclass 71 in which at least one distillation operation is
    carried out under a pressure greater than atmospheric or under a vacuum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for a distillation separatory process in which the initial residue
    is extracted with a liquid.

    91+,    for a single distillation process carried out at a pressure greater
    or less than atmospheric pressure and see "SEARCH CLASS" under subclass 91
    for related fields of search.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 205 for a separatory
    distillation system provided with means for producing a vacuum therein.


CLS 203/74
TXT Processes under subclass 73, in which at least a portion of the distillate
    from the initial distillation operation is subjected to at least one
    subsequent distillation operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45      and 46, for a process of separatory distillation including
    extracting a distillate with an immiscible liquid.


CLS 203/75
TXT Processes under subclass 74 in which a product from a later distillation
    operation is returned in terms of the process to a distillation zone prior
    to the distillation zone in which the product was produced.

    (1)     Note.  The prior distillation zone must be in the series of
    distillation operations which produced the product being returned.

    (2)     Note.  The product returned may be all or a part of a product of a
    second or subsequent distillation operation in a series.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 104.21+ for apparatus in which liquid is
    vaporized at one zone, condensed at another and the condensate is returned
    to the first zone.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 99 for mineral oil distilling
    apparatus  including the combination of a vaporizer, condensing means with
    means for returning a part or all of the condensate to the vaporizer.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclass 355 for a process
    of subjecting mineral oil to at least two distillation operations in which
    either vapors,  condensate, and/or residue from a later distillation zone
    is returned to an earlier distillation zone.


CLS 203/76
TXT Processes under subclass 74, directed to adding water or steam to at least
    one distillation operation.

    (1)     Note.  Water or steam is usually added to the distillation
    operation to change the relative volatility of the components of the
    material being distilled.


CLS 203/77
TXT Processes under subclass 74 in which the initial distillation is carried
    out under a pressure greater than atmospheric or under a vacuum.


CLS 203/78
TXT Processes under subclass 73 in which a product from a later distillation
    operation is returned in term of the process to a distillation zone prior
    to the distillation zone in which the product was produced.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 99 for mineral oil distilling
    apparatus including the combination of a vaporizer, condensing means with
    means for returning a part or all of the condensate to the vaporizer.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclass 355 for a process
    of subjecting mineral oil to at least two distillation operations in which
    either vapors,  condensate, and/or residue from a later distillation zone
    is returned to an earlier distillation zone.


CLS 203/79
TXT Processes under subclass 73 directed to adding water or steam to at least
    one distillation operation.

    (1)     Note.  Water or steam is usually added to the distillation
    operation to change the relative volatility of the components of the
    material being distilled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95+,    for a single distillation process in which water is added and under
    subclass 95, see "SEARCH CLASS" for related fields of search.


CLS 203/80
TXT Processes under subclass 73 in which the initial distillation is carried
    out under a pressure greater than atmospheric or under a vacuum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for a process including the step of distilling the initial
    distillate in which the initial distillation is under a pressure greater or
    less than atmospheric pressure.


CLS 203/81
TXT Processes under subclass 71 directed to distilling all or a part of the
    distillate from the initial distillation operation.

    (1)     Note.  The term "distillate" includes the portion of the incoming
    feed which is taken off "overhead" or taken off as a "side stream".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for a separatory distillation process in which the initial residue
    is extracted with a liquid.

    45      and 46, for a plural distillation process including extracting a
    distillate with a liquid and distilling the raffinate phase or the
    extractant phase.


CLS 203/82
TXT Processes under subclass 81 including returning a product from a second or
    subsequent distillation operation in a series to an earlier distillation in
    the series.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 99 for mineral oil distilling
    apparatus  including the combination of a vaporizer, condensing means with
    means for returning a part or all of the condensate to the vaporizer.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclass 355 for a process
    of subjecting mineral oils to at least two distillation operations
    including returning vapor, condensate, and/or residue from a later
    distillation to an earlier distillation zone.


CLS 203/83
TXT Processes under subclass 81 directed to adding water or steam to at least
    one distillation operation.

    (1)     Note.  Water or steam is usually added to the distillation
    operation to change the relative volatility of the components of the
    material being distilled.


CLS 203/84
TXT Processes under subclass 71 which includes returning a product from a later
    distillation operation to a distillation zone prior to the distillation
    zone in which the product was produced.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for a separatory distillation process in which the initial residue
    is extracted with a liquid.

    75,     78 and 82, for other plural distillation processes in which at
    least a portion of a product of a second or subsequent distillation step is
    returned to a distillation zone prior to the one in which the product was
    produced and subclass 98, in which a separated product of a single
    separatory distillation operation is  returned to the distillation zone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 99 for mineral oil distilling
    apparatus including the combination of a vaporizing and condensing means
    with means for returning a part or all of the condensate to the vaporizer.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclass 355 for processes
    in which mineral oil is subjected to at least two distillation operations
    in which either vapors, condensate, and/or residue from a later
    distillation zone is returned to an earlier distillation zone.


CLS 203/85
TXT Processes under subclass 71 directed to adding water or steam to at least
    one distillation operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for a separatory distillation process in which the initial residue
    is extracted with a liquid.

    72,     76, 79, and 83, for other plural distillation processes in which
    water or steam is added.

    95+,    for a single distillation process in which water or steam is added.


CLS 203/86
TXT Processes under the class definition directed to distilling in a system in
    which all or a part thereof is recited as being made of a specific material.

    (1)     Note.  Processes within the purview of this subclass must recite
    only a single distillation step in which the composition of the system or a
    part thereof is recited.  For example, broadly distilling using a glass
    column.

    (2)     Note.  The mere recitation in a claim that an apparatus is metal
    does not bring it within the purview of this subclass, but the recitation
    in the claim that the column filling material is chrome steel balls or
    beryl saddles does.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6+,     for a process of adding a material to inhibit or prevent chemical
    change which may or may not function to coat the system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 522+ for gas separation apparatus in
    which the composition of the apparatus is recited.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic,   appropriate subclass for a
    composition for coating the surfaces of the distilling apparatus.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 133 for a mineral oil vaporizing
    system having some special feature of construction.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclass 18 for a process of
    destructive distillation utilizing apparatus of a particular composition.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 267, in which the apparatus is
    recited in terms of the materials of construction.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 280+ for the lining
    construction for metallurgical receptacles.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 1+ for a synthetic
    resin or a composition containing a synthetic resin for coating distilling
    apparatus.


CLS 203/87
TXT Processes under the class definition directed to condensing the vapor
    evolved during the distillation step in a plurality of fractions.

    (1)     Note.  To come within the purview of this subclass a mixed vapor
    must be produced which is separated into parts by cooling the vapor in a
    plurality of distinct stages.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    201,    Distillation: Processes, Thermolytic, subclass 30 for a thermolytic
    distillation process in which the evolved vapors are condensed in a
    plurality of distinct stages.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 199 for apparatus in which vapor
    is passed through a condensate from itself to surrender high boiling
    constituents.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclass 342 for a process
    including fractionally condensing a mineral oil containing vapor mixture.


CLS 203/88
TXT Processes under the class definition directed to heating the distilland
    under pressure high enough to prevent ebullition and the heated distilland
    is then introduced into a zone of lesser pressure resulting in the
    volatilizing of at least a portion of the distilland.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclass 2 for a flash evaporator.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 177 for a separatory still with
    a preheater.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 352 and 361 for a
    process of separating mineral oil wherein the distilland is heated under
    pressure high enough to prevent ebullition and the heated distilland is
    then introduced into a zone of lesser pressure.


CLS 203/89
TXT Processes under the class definition directed to introducing the distilland
    into the vaporization zone by spreading it as a thin film over a surface.

    (1)     Note.  The surface on which the distilland is spread may be liquid,
    solid or foraminous.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclasses 5+ for concentrating
    apparatus of the film type including subclasses 13+ for evaporating
    apparatus designed to maintain the liquid being evaporated in a film and
    subclass 49 for an evaporating process in which the liquid to be
    concentrated is spread in a thin film.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 128 for vaporizing apparatus for
    distilling mineral oil in a thin film.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 236 for separatory distillation
    apparatus in which the still has means for intro- ducing the distilland
    into the still in the form of a spray or in the form of a film.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclass 360 for a process
    of introducing mineral oil into the vaporization zone by spreading it as a
    thin film over a surface.  See also "SEARCH CLASS" thereunder for related
    fields of search.


CLS 203/90
TXT Processes under the class definition directed to spraying the distilland
    into the vaporization zone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for a separatory distillation process in which heated distilland
    under pressure is introduced into a zone of lesser pressure resulting in
    the volatilization of at least a portion of the distilland.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclasses 48.1+ for a process for
    concentrating in which the liquid being concentrated is reduced to a spray;
    and subclasses 3+ for concentrating apparatus of the spray type.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 236 for separatory distillation
    apparatus in which the still has means for intro- ducing the distilland
    into the still in the form of a spray.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclass 359 for a process
    of distilling mineral oil in which the distilland is sprayed into the
    vaporization zone and see "SEARCH CLASS" thereunder for related fields of
    search.


CLS 203/91
TXT Processes under the class definition in which distillation is carried out
    under a pressure greater than atmospheric or under a vacuum.

    (1)     Note.  The use of pressure varying from atmospheric changes the
    relative volatility of the components of the distilland thereby altering
    the composition of the vapor evolved.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 402+ for a
    process of drying a solid involving the application of a vacuum.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 114 for mineral oil vaporizing
    apparatus operated under vacuum.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclass 35 for a process of
    applying differential pneumatic pressure to the thermolytic conversion zone.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 205 for separatory distillation
    apparatus provided with means for producing a vacuum therein and see
    "SEARCH CLASS" thereunder for related fields of search.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 357 and 366 for a
    process of distilling mineral oil in which the vaporization zone is under a
    pressure greater or less than atmospheric pressure and see "SEARCH CLASS"
    under subclass 357 for related fields of search.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the use of heat or vacuum in the destruction of hazardous or
    toxic waste.


CLS 203/92
TXT Processes under subclass 91 directed to adding water or steam to the
    distillation operation.

    (1)     Note.  Water or steam is usually added to the distillation
    operation to change the relative volatility of the components of the
    material being distilled.


CLS 203/93
TXT Processes under subclass 92 directed to returning a product to the
    distillation zone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 99 for mineral oil distilling
    apparatus  including the combination of vaporizing and condensing means
    with means for returning a part or all of the condensate to the vaporizer.


CLS 203/94
TXT Processes under subclass 91 directed to   returning a product of the
    distillation operation to the distillation zone.

    (1)     Note.  To be considered a product of distillation for purposes of
    this subclass an overhead vapor or side stream must be condensed to a
    liquid before being returned to the distillation zone.  In other words to
    be considered a   "product" the substance must be  isolated outside the
    distillation zone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclass 358 for a mineral
    oil distillation process in which condensate or residue is returned to the
    rectification zone after having been removed therefrom to assist in the
    separation process.


CLS 203/95
TXT Processes under the class definition directed to adding water or steam to
    the distillation operation.

    (1)     Note.  Water or steam is usually added to the distillation
    operation to change the relative volatility of the components of the
    material being distilled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclasses 126 and 127 for mineral oil
    vaporizing apparatus having means to inject gas or vapor into the
    vaporization zone.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 348, 356 and 362+
    for a process in which a gas or vapor is employed to affect volatilization
    of the distilland.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses wherein the use of water or steam is used in the destruction of
    hazardous or toxic waste.


CLS 203/96
TXT Processes under subclass 95 in which the water or steam is added to the
    distillation column.


CLS 203/97
TXT Processes under subclass 95 in which a product of the distillation
    operation is returned to the distillation zone.

    (1)     Note.  To be considered a product of distillation for purposes of
    this subclass an overhead vapor or side stream must be condensed to a
    liquid before being returned to the distillation zone.  In other words to
    be considered a "product" the substance must be isolated outside the
    distillation zone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 99 for mineral oil distilling
    apparatus including the combination of vaporizing and condensing means with
    means for returning a part or all of the condensate to the vaporizer.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclass 358 for a mineral
    oil distillation process in which condensate or residue is returned to the
    rectification zone after having been removed therefrom to assist in the
    vaporization process.


CLS 203/98
TXT Processes under the class definition directed to returning a product of the
    distillation operation to the distillation zone.

    (1)     Note.  To be considered a product of distillation for purposes of
    this subclass an overhead vapor or side stream must be condensed to a
    liquid before being returned to the distillation zone.  In other words to
    be considered a   "product" the substance must be  isolated outside the
    distillation zone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 104.21+ apparatus in which liquid is
    vaporized in one zone, condensed in another and the condensate is returned
    to the first zone.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 99 for mineral oil distilling
    apparatus  including the combination of vaporizing and condensing means and
    means for returning a part or all of the condensate to the vaporizer.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclass 358 for a mineral
    oil distillation process in which condensate or residue is returned to the
    rectification zone after having been removed therefrom to assist in the
    vaporization process.


CLS 203/99
TXT Processes under the class definition not otherwise provided for.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass are distillation combinations not provided
    for above and not provided for elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, subclass 306 for a process of
    concentrating a solution of a liquid in a liquid not otherwise provided for.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 78 for a process of
    preparing a beverage base in concentrated from and see "SEARCH THIS CLASS,
    SUBCLASS" and "SEARCH CLASS" thereunder for related fields of search.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclasses 47.1+ for a process of
    concentrating a liquid, and see "SEARCH CLASS" thereunder for related
    fields of search.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclass 347 for a process
    of distilling mineral oil not otherwise provided for.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 405+ for a process directed to applying electrical or wave
    energy directly to the work.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTION

    The following subclass represents at least a substantial collection of
    patents found elsewhere in the classification of this class which merit
    isolation for search aid purposes on specific types of heating.


CLS 203/100
TXT Processes as provided for in this class wherein there is recited or
    disclosed a reference to a special type of heating, such as separation of
    the vapor by the heating effect of sonic waves of a specific frequency.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 29+ for processes of gas
    separation in which the separation is effected or enhanced by use of sound
    waves.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for apparatus and processes
    for the transfer of heat from one material to another and see "SEARCH
    CLASS" under the class definition for related fields of search.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclasses 120+ for mineral oil
    vaporizing apparatus having special means for heating.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 234 for distillation apparatus
    using radiant heat or electric heating elements.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 738 and 748 for a
    process of separating liquid mixtures using pulsations or oscillations.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 1+ for a process of heating or heater,
    operation not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 204/
TTL CHEMISTRY:  ELECTRICAL AND  WAVE ENERGY

CLS 204/
TXT I.      STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    II.     GLOSSARY

    III.    CLASSIFICATION LINES AND SEARCH NOTES TO OTHER CLASSES

    IV.     INDEX TO CLASSES NOTED IN THE CLASS DEFINITION AND THE SUBCLASSES
    OF THIS CLASS

    I.      STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    This class includes, where not provided for elsewhere:

    (A)     Processes (1) involving the use of electrolysis (as provided for in
    Class 205); (2) of  preparing or purifying  compounds or elements involving
    chemical reaction brought about by electrical or wave energy in a magnetic
    field (as provided for in subclasses 155+); (3) of treating materials
    involving chemical reaction brought about by wave energy (as provided for
    in subclasses 157.15+); (4) of preparing or purifying compounds or elements
    involving chemical reaction brought about by an electrostatic field or
    electrical discharge (as provided for in subclasses 164+); (5)  involving
    the use of electrophoresis or electro-osmosis (as provided for in
    subclasses 450+); (6) of treating a liquid (a) to separate or purify the
    liquid using electric and magnetic fields simultaneously, (b) to separate
    or purify the liquid using an electric field, or (c) using a magnetic field
    to obtain some effect other than mere separation or purification of the
    liquid (as provided for in subclasses 554+); (7) involving coating,
    forming, or etching by the use of sputtering (as provided for in subclasses
    192.1+); and (8) involving coating by the use of vacuum arc discharge (as
    provided for in subclass 192.38).

    (B)     Products solely disclosed as made by a process under (A) with the
    following exceptions:  (1) products which comprise two or more contiguous
    metallic layers; (2) products of processes classifiable in Class 204,
    subclasses 157.15+ and 450+, and Class 205, subclasses 640+.  These
    products are properly classified in the appropriate product or stock
    material class (e.g., 260, 423, 428, etc.).

    (C)     Apparatus for carrying out the processes set forth under (A) except
    the apparatus used to carry out the wave energy treatment processes
    provided for in Class 204, subclasses 157.15+; such apparatus is provided
    for in Class 250, Radiant Energy (particularly subclasses 492.1+) and in
    Class 422, Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing (particularly subclasses 186+).

    (D)     Electrolyte compositions specialized for use in electrolytic
    processes or methods of preparing the compositions.

    (1)     Note.  A list of superiority of several composition classes appears
    in the main class definition of Class 252, Compositions, (5) Note. This
    note in Class 252 explains classification of a generic composition with
    several disclosed uses.

    (2)     Note.  Although the processes described above in (A), items (6),
    (7), and (8),  do not involve strictly chemical changes, they are in some
    respects closely related to other portions of the class and so have been
    included here.

    (3)     Note.  Processes involving purely thermal actions of electrical
    phenomena or wave energy are not included in this class.

    (4)     Note.  Class 204 provides for the combination of electrical and
    wave energy processes as described in (A) above with subsequent: (1)
    conventional treatments such as filtering, distilling, washing, and other
    methods of separating or concentrating products from the previous Class 204
    operation or  (2) mere admixing of products from the previous Class 204
    operation to form a desired end product. Where a subsequent step
    significantly modifies a composition, product, or article made by the
    previous Class 204 operation, the combined process is generally provided
    for elsewhere and is cross-referenced in Class 204, where necessary.

    (5)     Note.  The combination of an electrical or wave energy operation as
     described in (A) above with a preceding method, such as treatment of
    material to prepare it for the electrical or wave energy operation, is
    provided for in Class 204. When a method preparatory to a Class 204
    operation is claimed, per se, and is not provided for elsewhere, it may be
    classified in Class 204.

    II.     GLOSSARY

    ACYCLIC

    For the purposes of this class, "acyclic" refers to an organic compound
    which does not contain a heterocyclic, nitrocyclic, or carbocyclic nucleus.

    ALKALI-FORMING METAL

    A metal element chosen from the group consisting of the alkali metals
    (lithium (Li), sodium (Na), potassium (K), rubidium (Rb), cesium (Cs), and
    francium (Fr)), the alkaline earth metals (calcium (Ca), strontium (Sr),
    barium (Ba), and radium (Ra)), and magnesium (Mg) (included due to its
    similarity in properties to the alkaline earth metals).

    DESIGNATED CHEMICAL COMPOSITION (DCC)

    A composition in which at least one of the chemical atoms can either be
    deduced with certainty or be determined to belong to a limited select group
    of elements (as indicated in the exemplary lists of terms provided below);
    except that for the purposes of this class, "organic" is considered to be
    too broad, eventhough inherently reciting the presence of a carbon atom. An
    exemplary list of terms used to describe compositions to be regarded as
    DCC's is as follows: alcohol, alkali or alkaline earth metal, amine, carbon
    black,  carboxylic acid, chalcogen, drying oil, ether, fat, fatty acid or
    ester, halogen, hydrocarbon, latex, metal hydrate, peroxide, peroxy-,
    proton donor, sulfide, water, etc.  An exemplary list of terms used to
    describe compositions not to be regarded as DCC's is as follows:
    amphoteric, anionic, antioxidant, blue, cationic, cosolvent, conductor,
    crystalline, curing catalyst, deliquescent, dielectric, dispersant, drier,
    electrophoretic, emulsifier, fibrous, filler, fluorescent, free radical,
    gas, humectant, hydrophillic, inorganic compound, insulator, ionic, Lewis
    acid or base, liquid, lubricant, luminescent, metal containing, mineral,
    numerically described without designating a chemical atom or a limited
    select group of elements,  organic compound, organic solvent,
    organometallic, particulate, phosphorescent, pigment, plastic, plasticizer,
    preservative, solid, solvent, stabilizer, surface active agent, surfactant,
    wax, Ziegler or Natta catalysts, etc.  These lists are not intended to be
    exhaustive.

    ELECTROLYSIS

    A process which is characterized by conduction of an electric current
    between two or more electrodes through an electrolyte and resulting in a
    chemical change (e.g., oxidation, reduction, etc.) (other than that brought
    about by the mere heating effect of the electric current) at one or more of
    the electrodes (e.g., electrolytic coating or etching, etc.) or at another
    location in contact with the electrolyte as a direct result of the electric
    current passing therethrough (e.g., electrolytic material treatment, etc.),
    such chemical change being the process objective and not merely as a means
    of conducting an electric current through the electrolyte (as is the case
    in "electrophoresis" as defined in subclass 450 of this class).

    ELECTROLYTE

    A substance which is or forms a liquid, solid, or gel containing
    dissociated ions to conduct an electrolytic current (usually an ionic
    compound is dissolved in solution or melted into a fused state to provide
    an electrically conductive medium).

    ESTER-TYPE WAX

    A "wax" which is essentially an ester in chemical structure, (e.g., montan
    wax, carnauba wax, etc.).

    FAT, FATTY OIL

    A glyceride of a higher fatty acid, including naturally occurring mixtures
    thereof.

    FATTY STILL RESIDUES

    Bottoms, tars, or pitches resulting from the distillation of fats, fatty
    oils, and ester-type waxes, (e.g., stearine pitch, etc.).

    HIGHER FATTY ACID

    A monocarboxylic acid containing an unbroken chain of at least seven carbon
    atoms bonded to a carboxyl group, (e.g., stearic acid, etc.).

    INTERNAL BATTERY

    A device or means which generates an electrical current by chemical action
    within a zone of desired electrolysis without the need for an external
    source of electrical current.

    ORGANIC COMPOUND

    A chemical compound limited by the definition of a "carbon compound" found
    under the class definition in Class 260, Chemistry of Carbon Compounds.

    PERMANENT COATING

    A coating which remains as part of a finished article as distinguished from
    a coating which is formed upon and removed or stripped from a base or
    substrate.


    PLATINUM METAL

    A metal element from the group consisting of iridium (Ir), osmium (Os),
    palladium (Pd), platinum (Pt), and rhenium (Re).

    PRECIOUS METAL

    A metal element from the group consisting of gold (Au), platinum metals,
    and silver (Ag).

    SYNTHESIS

    For purposes of this class, "synthesis" includes the production of a
    desired element or compound by breaking down from complex forms to simpler
    ones as well as the building up of complex forms from simpler ones.

    WAVE ENERGY

    For the purposes of this class, "wave energy" includes radiation as well as
    wave energy transmitted by various mediums and embraces electromagnetic
    wave energy or radiation, sonic and supersonic waves, neutron, proton,
    deutron, and other types of corpuscular radiation.

    III.    CLASSIFICATION LINES AND SEARCH
            NOTES TO OTHER CLASSES

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, for bleaching or dyeing, fluid treatment, and chemical
    modification of textiles and fibers using electrical, radiant, or wave
    energy; without involving electrolysis (electrolytic treatment of organic
    fibrous material is provided for in Class 205, subclasses 689+).

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 1.3 for processes and apparatus for
    culture of plants by using electricity.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, for (1) general production of metals, (2) electrothermal
    processes of preparing metals and alloys, and (3) branching processes in
    which one branch comprises a process falling within the definition of Class
    204 and which contains at least one other branch falling within Class 75.
    Combinations of metallurgical process steps falling within the definition
    of Class 75 and electrical or wave energy steps falling under the
    definition of Class 204 are classified in Class 204, when the metallurgical
    process steps are preparatory to the electrical or wave energy steps, and
    are placed in Class 75 when the electrical or wave energy methods are
    preparatory to the metallurgical process steps. The above applies even when
    such preparatory steps result in a desired by-product. Class 75, subclasses
    228+, provides for a "nominal" element usable in a Class 204 process (i.e.,
    an element claimed only in terms of the metal composition from which it is
    made). The order of superiority among various metal, alloy, and metal stock
    areas and methods of manufacture involving them is as follows:


    1.      Class 419, Powder Metallurgy Processes.

    2.      Class 148, Metal Treatment, subclasses 22+, compositions for
    treatment of solid metal.

    3.      Class 75, Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use
    Therein, Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal
    Particulate Mixtures, subclasses 300, 301, and 303+, gaseous, liquid, or
    solid treating compositions for liquid metal or charges, and subclass 302,
    welding rods defined by composition.

    4.      Class 75, Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use
    Therein, Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal
    Particulate Mixtures, subclasses 228+, consolidated metal powder
    compositions, and subclasses 255+,  loose metal particulate mixtures.

    5.      Class 420, Alloys or Metallic Compositions, alloys or metallic
    compositions claimed as products.

    6.      Class 148, Metal Treatment, subclasses 95-122, 194-287, and
    500-714, in class schedule order, certain processes of treating solid or
    semisolid metal by modifying or maintaining internal physical structure
    (i.e., microstructure) or chemical properties of metal, processes of
    reactive coating of metal, or processes of chemical heat-removing (e.g.,
    flame-cutting, etc.) or burning of metal. However, if metal casting, fusion
    bonding, machining, or working is involved, there is a requirement of
    significant heat treatment as described in section III A of the Class 148
    definition.

    7.      Class 148, Metal Treatment, subclasses 33+, p-n type barrier layer
    stock material, and subclasses 400+,  stock.

    8.      Class 75, Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use
    Therein, Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal
    Particulate Mixtures, subclasses 331+, processes of making solid
    particulate alloys directly from liquid metal, and subclasses 343+,
    processes of producing or purifying alloys in powder form.

    9.      Class 75, Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use
    Therein, Consolidated Metal Powder Compostions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 10.1+ and 10.67,  electrothermic, electromagnetic, or
    electrostatic processes of making alloys.

    10.     Class 420, Alloys or Metallic Compositions, processes of
    manufacture.

    11.     Class 75, Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use
    Therein, Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal
    Particulate Mixtures, subclasses 330+, processes of making metal, treating
    liquid metals and liquid alloys, and consolidating metalliferous material.

    12.     Class 204, Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, processes.

    13.     Class 164, Metal Founding, subclasses 1+, processes.

    14.     Class 266, Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 44+, processes of
    operating metallurgical apparatus.

    101,    Printing, appropriate subclasses for electrotype molds, matrices,
    or other printing members which may be produced by electrolytic coating,
    electroforming, or cathode sputtering methods. For processes of their
    production by such methods, see Class 204, appropriate subclasses.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, for a general coating apparatus which does not
    involve the use of electrolysis, electrophoresis, electro-osmosis, or
    cathode sputtering.  Class 204 provides for apparatus having means for
    combined coating operations in which at least one coated layer is applied
    by electrolysis, electrophoresis, electro-osmosis, or cathode sputtering.
    However, Class 118 provides for coating apparatus which also has means to
    subsequently cure (considered to be a mere perfecting step) the coating
    using electrical or wave energy.

    128,    Surgery, for electrical or wave energy treatment of the living
    human body and apparatus specialized therefor.

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 294, 295, and 299 for processes of treating
    tobacco with electrical or radiant energy.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 1+ for
    processes of cleaning solids by the application of electric, wave, ray or
    radiant energy to the work, other than broadly recited radiant heat energy.

    148,    Metal Treatment, particularly subclass 518 for processes of
    treating solid or semisolid metal to modify or maintain the internal
    physical structure (i.e., micro structure) or chemical properties of metal
    combined with a Class 204 procedure. Class 148 takes the combination,
    whether the Class 148 operation precedes or is subsequent to the Class 204
    procedure.  Also, see Class 148, subclasses 240+ for the location of
    processes of reactive coating of metal wherein an externally applied agent
    combines with the metal substrate to form a coating thereon which contains
    an element from the metal substrate. Combinations that involve reactive
    coating as defined in Class 148, subclasses 240+, and a Class 204 coating
    operation are proper in Class 204. Combinations of a Class 148 reactive
    coating, a Class 204 coating operation, and an etching operation that
    occurs while the electrocoated layer still exists are in Class 204.
    However, combinations of  carburizing or nitriding of metal (as defined in
    Class 148, subclasses 206+) with a Class 204 operation are proper for Class
    148.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    625.1+ for a process of chemically etching an electrical function
    semiconductive precursor, substrate, or device and subclasses 60+ for
    surface bonding and/or assembly therefor, particularly subclasses 150+ for
    a laminating process combined with at least one Class 204 step of
    electrodeposition (i.e., by electrolysis, electrophoresis, electro-osmosis,
    or cathode sputtering).  In general, a class 156 operation (e.g., chemical
    etching of an electrical function semiconductor substrate, etc.) performed
    on a composition, product, or article made by a Class 204 process (e.g., an
    entire article previously etched by electrolysis, a product portion
    modified by electrolytic material treatment, etc.) is considered to provide
    a significant modification of the composition, product, or article made by
    the Class 204 process; therefore placing the combination of a Class 204
    process followed by a Class 156 procedure in Class 156.  However, the
    combination of a Class 204 electrolytic coating step followed by a Class
    156 operation (other than a laminating process as described above)
    performed (1) to allow at least a portion of the electrolytic coating to
    remain and (2) to only significantly modify the electrolytic coating, per
    se, is considered to be an electrolytic coating process followed by a mere
    perfecting step for the electrolytic coating; therefore placing the
    combination in Class 204. The significant modification of only the
    electrolytic coating allows for mere incidental alterations to other
    portions of a coated article such as the substrate, provided that such
    changes are clearly unintentional (e.g., chemical etching through an
    electrolytic coating which may also progress into the substrate in some
    areas to allow complete penetration through all desired other areas of the
    electrolytic coating, etc.).   Class 156, subclasses 625.1+, provide for
    the original classification of chemically etching an electrical function
    semiconductive precursor, substrate, or device when the claims are
    alternative (claims to a Class 156 etching process and claims to a Class
    205 electrolytic etching, or when a generic claim is present and no species
    is specifically claimed).  When, however, a generic claim is present
    (disclosure includes both Class 156 etching and Class 204 or Class 205
    subject matter) and a Class 204 or Class 205 species is specifically
    claimed, and there is no specific claim to a Class 156 etching process, the
    original classification is in Class 204 or Class 205 and a mandatory
    cross-reference is placed into Class 156  etching based on the generic
    claim.  Other combinations of Class 204 step(s) with Class 156 step(s) will
    follow the general class line for the combination of Class 204 step(s) with
    those from other classes as stated at the beginning of Class 204.  Also,
    see the search class note to Class 216 in this section, since Class 216 is
    an integral part of Class 156.

    208,    Mineral Oils: Processes and Products, for processes of treatment
    and preparation of mineral oils employing mere electrical thermal effects.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, for electrical or
    wave energy classification, separation, or assortment of solids,
    particularly subclasses 127.1+ for electrostatic processes and apparatus,
    subclasses 179+ for electrical amalgamation processes and apparatus, and
    subclasses 212 and 213+ for magnetic separating processes and apparatus.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 600+ for purification
    or separation of a liquid which may include a Class 204-type step of making
    an agent used in the process. A process of treating the liquid directly by
    a Class 204 step to purify or separate it will be placed in Class 204
    whether or not combined with a physical separation step classifiable in
    Class 210, subclasses 767+. Class 210 will take the combination of a 210
    process, other than mere separation (as provided for in  subclasses 767+),
    with a Class 204 operation.  However, a Class 204 process (e.g., synthesis)
    preceded by a Class 210  step which is ancillary to the process will be
    placed in Class 204.

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, for a chemical etching process, in
    general.  Chemical etching performed on a composition, product, or article
    made by a Class 204 process (e.g., an entire article previously etched by
    electrolysis, a product portion modified by electrolytic material
    treatment, etc.) is considered to provide a significant modification of the
    composition, product, or article made by the Class 204 process; therefore
    placing the combination of a Class 204 process followed by Class 216
    chemical etching in Class 216.  However, the combination of a Class 205
    electrolytic coating step followed by Class 216 chemical etching  performed
    (1) to allow at least a portion of the electrolytic coating to remain and
    (2)  to only significantly modify the electrolytic coating, per se, is
    considered to be an electrolytic coating process followed by a mere
    perfecting step for the electrolytic coating; therefore placing the
    combination in Class 205. The significant modification of only the
    electrolytic coating allows for mere incidental alterations to other
    portions of a coated article such as the substrate, provided that such
    changes are clearly unintentional (e.g., chemical etching through an
    electrolytic coating which may also progress into the substrate in some
    areas to allow complete penetration through all desired other areas of the
    electrolytic coating, etc.).  Class 216 also provides for the original
    classification when the claims are alternative (claims to a Class 216
    process and claims to a Class 205 electrolytic etching, or when a generic
    claim is present and no species is specifically claimed).  When, however, a
    generic claim is present (disclosure includes both Class 216 and Class 204
    or Class 205 subject matter) and a Class 204 or Class 205 species is
    specifically claimed, and there is no specific claim to a Class 216 etching
    process, the original classification is in Class 204 or Class 205 and a
    mandatory cross-reference is placed into Class 216 based on the generic
    claim.  Other combinations of Class 204 step(s) with Class 216 step(s) will
    follow the general class line for the combination of Class 204 step(s) with
    those from other classes as stated at the beginning of Class 204.  Also,
    see the search class note to Class 156 in this section, since Class 216 is
    an integral part of Class 156.

    250,    Radiant Energy, for radiant energy processes and apparatus,
    particularly subclasses 281+ for ionic separation or analysis of materials
    utilizing the mass to electric charge ratio of particles.  Note the
    difference between the scope of "radiant energy" as set out for Class 250
    and "wave energy" as defined in Class 204, subclass 157.15.

    252,    Compositions, for electrical or wave energy preparation of
    dispersions without involving electrolysis.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for (1) a chemical process, in
    general, for preparation and treatment of carbon compounds or a product
    formed by such a process; (2) the combination of a Class 204 operation with
    a subsequent significant chemical process provided for in Class 260 when
    the subsequent Class 260 process modifies a product of the Class 204
    operation to produce a different compound; and (3) a branched process in
    which one branch is a Class 204 process and another branch falls within the
    class definition of Class 260. The combination of a Class 260 process and a
    subsequent Class 204 operation is classified in Class 204.  The foregoing
    applies even when the preparatory process or operation results in a desired
    by-product.  Also, see the search class note to Class 520 in this section,
    since Class 520 is an integral part of Class 260.

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, for measuring, testing, or
    sensing, per se, to determine electrical properties by electrical means
    even though nonelectrical values may be derived therefrom; especially
    subclasses 323+ for testing of underground formations by electrolytic
    methods (e.g., testing an oil well bore for water strata, etc.), subclasses
    425+ for testing of an electrolyte to determine electrical properties
    thereof, and other appropriate subclasses for electrical testing processes
    or apparatus which is combined with a significant electrical testing
    circuit or is unrelated to the subject matter of Class 204.

    361,    Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 230+ for
    ionization apparatus, in general, and subclasses 500+ for electrolytic
    apparatus which is utilized for a purpose other than to produce a desired
    chemical change.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, for electric furnaces and
    methods of using them, in general, especially subclasses 60+ for electric
    arc furnaces and methods of using them in which an electric arc is used as
    a heating means and the reactions performed are a result of the mere
    thermal effects of the electric arc.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, appropriate subclasses for a
    "nominal" element usable in a Class 204 process (i.e., an element claimed
    only in terms of the alloy or metallic composition from which it is made)
    and for processes of producing an alloy or metallic composition.  See the
    class definition of Class 420 for a description of the class line between
    Class 75 and Class 420.  Also, see the search class note to Class 75 in
    this section for the order of superiority among various metal, alloy, and
    metal stock areas and methods of manufacture involving them.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, for (1) a chemical process of
    producing an inorganic compound or nonmetallic element, in general; (2) the
    combination of a Class 204 operation with a subsequent chemical process
    provided for in Class 423 when the Class 423 process modifies a product of
    the Class 204 operation to produce a different compound or element, and (3)
    a branched process in which one branch is a Class 204 process and another
    branch falls within the definition of Class 423. The combination of a Class
    423 process with a subsequent Class 204 operation which modifies a product
    of the Class 423 process is classified in Class 204.  In processes where a
    useful by-product is formed, the patent is classified according to the
    primary product ultimately produced.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, for a drug,
    bio-affecting,  or body treating composition which may be made by a Class
    204 process, especially subclasses 1.11+ for a radionuclide or intended
    radionuclide containing, adjuvant or carrier, intermediate, or preparatory
    composition.  Also, see the search class note to Class 514, since Class 514
    is an integral part of Class 424.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    especially subclasses 234, 235, 236, and 237+ for processes of preparing,
    preserving, and treating food involving the use of electrical or wave
    energy, including electrolysis.

    427,    Coating Processes, for general coating processes.  Class 204
    provides for processes involving combined coating operations in which at
    least one coated layer is applied by a Class 204 coating operation.
    However, a Class 427 coating step followed by curing (considered to be a
    mere perfecting step) of the 427 coating using electrical or wave energy is
    proper for Class 427.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product not elsewhere provided for in the form of a
    single or plural layer web or sheet. Also, see the class definition of
    Class 428, especially sections VI, C, 4 and VI, C, 6 for an elaboration of
    the class line between Class 204 and Class 428.

    429,    Chemistry: Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process, for an electrolyte, process, or apparatus specialized for the
    production of electrical current as a result of a chemical reaction or
    change of state (e.g., from a liquid to a gas, etc.).

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, for a process or
    apparatus involving measuring or testing by electrical or wave energy which
    is separate and apart, but in combination with a process or apparatus for
    use with a viable microorganism or a catalytically active enzyme; and for a
    process or apparatus involving electrical or wave energy treatment of a
    microorganism or an enzyme when the treatment is solely disclosed for use
    with a viable micro-organism or a catalytically active enzyme.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, for a qualitative
    or quantitative chemical analysis including (1) a step of electrochemistry
    followed by at least one step of another chemical reaction not involving
    electrochemistry or (2) a process which is alternatively chemical or
    electrochemical.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor: Product or Process of
    Making, especially subclass 5 for the use of electrical, magnetic, or wave
    energy in making a catalyst, solid sorbent, or support therefor.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 300+ for processes of producing high temperature (Tc > 30 K)
    superconductors, particularly subclass 411 for sputter etching, subclass
    472 for electrolytic or electrophoretic coating, or subclasses 475+ for
    sputter coating.

    514,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, as an integral
    part of Class 424, for a drug,  bio-affecting,  or body treating
    composition which may be made by a Class 204 process, especially subclasses
    167+ for a composition including activated or irradiated ergosterol.  Also,
    see the search class note to Class 424, since Class 514 is an integral part
    of Class 424.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers -- Part of the Class 520
    Series, appropriate classes, especially Class 522, subclasses 1+, for a
    composition to be polymerized by wave energy wherein said composition
    contains a rate-affecting material; or a synthetic resin composition to be
    modified by wave energy wherein said composition contains a rate-affecting
    material; or a process of preparing or treating a solid polymer utilizing
    wave energy. Any process step involving electrolysis, electric current,
    electro-osmosis, electrophoresis, electrostatic field, electrical
    discharge, or magnetic field and also involving the treating of a synthetic
    resin or natural rubber is proper in Class 204 if a wave energy step is
    involved in any part of the process. The combination of a Class 520
    chemical process not involving the use of wave energy with a Class 204
    operation is classified (1) in Class 204 when the Class 520 nonwave energy
    process is preparatory to the Class 204 operation and (2) in Class 520 when
    the Class 204 operation is preparatory to the Class 520 nonwave energy
    process.  A branching process in which the claims are alternative to
    producing or treating a polymer by a Class 204 process or by a Class 520
    chemical process not involving the use of wave energy is classified in
    Class 520. See Class 204, subclass 157.15, for a further elaboration of the
    line between Class 204 and Class 520, subclasses 1+.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, for a process of synthesizing
    or purifying a hydrocarbon compound. The line between Class 585 and Class
    204 is analogous to that between Class 260 and Class 204. See the search
    class note to Class 260 in this section.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, for
    destruction of containment of hazardous or toxic waste by using electrical
    wave energy, expecially subclass 204 for electrolytic or electrodialytic
    degradation or containment.

    IV.     INDEX TO CLASSES NOTED IN THE CLASS DEFINITION AND THE SUBCLASSES
    OF THIS CLASS

            CLASS 204

    CLASS   SECTION SUBCLASS

    8,      Bleaching and   III     471
    Dyeing; Fluid
    Treatment and
    Chemical Modification
    of Textiles and
    Fibers

    34,     Drying and Gas          471,515,551,622
    or Vapor Contact
    With Solids

    47,     Plant Husbandry III

    73,     Measuring and           404,430,472,519,        Testing
    555,556,602,607

                            628,661

    75,     Specialized     III     157.21,294
    Metallurgical
    Processes,
    Compositions for
    Use Therein,
    Consolidated
    Metal Powder
    Compositions,
    and Loose
    Metal Particulate
    Mixtures

    95,     Gas Separation:         157.3,554,557
    Processes

    96,     Gas Separation:         660,664
    Apparatus

    101,    Printing        III

    106,    Compositions:           471
    Coating or
    Plastic

    118,    Coating         III     155,622
    Apparatus

    128,    Surgery III     403

    131,    Tobacco III

    134,    Cleaning and    III     551
    Liquid Contact
    With Solids

    136,    Batteries:              196
    Thermoelectric
    and Photoelectric

    148,    Metal Treatment III

    156,    Adhesive        III
    Bonding and
    Miscellaneous
    Chemical
    Manufacture

    196,    Mineral Oils:           660
    Apparatus

    205,    Electrolysis:   I(A)    192.1,450,471,

            Processes,              513,554         Compositions
    Used Therein,
    and Methods
    of Preparing
    the Compositions

    208,    Mineral Oils:   III     513,554
    Processes and
    Products

    209,    Classifying,    III

            Separating, and

            Assorting Solids

    210,    Liquid  III     295,415,554,557,                Purification or ,
               558,660,664Separation

    216,    Etching a       III
    Substrate:
    Processes

    236,    Automatic               430
    Temperature
    and Humidity
    Regulation

    250,    Radiant Energy  I(C),III

    252,    Compositions    I(1),III        157.15,291,400,
       414,551,554

    260,    Chemistry of    I(B),III        157.15,158.21
    Carbon Compounds

    264,    Plastic and             471,483
    Nonmetallic
    Article
    Shaping or
    Treating:
    Processes

    307,    Electrical              196
    Transmission or
    Interconnection
    Systems

    313,    Electric Lamp           157.15,280
    and Discharge
    Devices

    323,    Electricity:            223,228,602,607,
    Power Supply or         628,661
    Regulation Systems

    324,    Electricity:    III     242,400,407,472,
    Measuring and           519,555,556,602,                Testing
    607,628,661

    338,    Electrical              430
    Resistors

    340,    Communications:         450,600
    Electrical

    355,    Photocopying            450,600,622

    356,    Optics:                 450,600
    Measuring and
    Testing

    358,    Facsimile               450,600

    359,    Optics: Systems         450,600
    (Including
    Communication)
    and Elements

    361,    Electricity:    III     164,242
    Electrical
    Systems
    and Devices

    364,    Electrical              406
    Computers
    and Data
    Processing
    Systems

    373,    Industrial      III
    Electric Heating
    Furnaces

    376,    Induced Nuclear                 157.15
    Reactions:
    Processes,
    Systems,
    and Elements

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma  157.15
    Ray Systems
    or Devices

    420,    Alloys or       III
    Metallic
    Compositions

    422,    Chemical        I(C)    155,156,
    Apparatus and           157.15,
    Process                 164,176,
    Disinfecting,           400,404,
    Deodorizing,            405,407,
    Preserving, or          424,554,
    Sterilizing             660,664

    423,    Chemistry of    I(B),III        157.15,157.21,
    Inorganic               157.3,158.2,173Compounds                433

    424,    Drug, Bio-      III     157.67,166

            Affecting and
    Body Treating
    Compositions

    426,    Food or Edible  III     157.67,158.2,166
    Material:
    Processes,
    Compositions
    and Products

    427,    Coating         III     155,157.15,
    Processes               290,471

    428,    Stock Material  I(B),III        280,283,
    or Miscellaneous                284,290,
    Articles                292,471,476

    429,    Chemistry:      III     242,280,295
    Electrical
    Current
    Producing
    Apparatus,
    Product,
    and Process

    430,    Radiation               157.15,
    Imagery Chemistry:      471,528
    Process,
    Composition, or
    Product Thereof

    435,    Chemistry:      III     157.15,
    Molecular               403,554,
    Biology and             660
    Microbiology

    436,    Chemistry:      III     404
    Analytical and
    Immunological
    Testing

    451,    Abrading                213

    502,    Catalyst, Solid III     551
    Sorbent, or
    Support
    Therefor:
    Product or
    Process of
    Making

    505,    Superconductor  III
    Technology:
    Apparatus,
    Material,
    Process

    514,    Drug,   III
    Bio-Affecting
    and Body
    Treating
    Compositions

    518,    Chemistry               157.15,
    Fischer-Tropsch                 158.21
    Processes;  or
    Purification or
    Recovery of
    Products Thereof

    520,    Synthetic       III     157.15
    Resins or                       Natural Rubbers
    -- Part of the Class 520 Series

    522,    Synthetic               157.15,157.68
    Resins or
    Natural Rubbers
    -- Part of the
    Class 520 Series

    530,    Chemistry:              157.15,158.21
    Natural Resins
    or Derivatives;
    Peptides or
    Proteins;
    Lignins or
    Reaction
    Products Thereof

    532,    Organic                 157.15,158.21

            Compounds --
    Part of the
    Class 532-570
    Series

    585,    Chemistry of    III     157.15,158.21
    Hydrocarbon
    Compounds

    588,    Hazardous or    III     155,
    Toxic Waste             157.15,
    Destruction or          164
    Containment

    604,    Surgery         550

    CLASS           CLASS 205

                            SUBCLASS

    8,      Bleaching and           690,691,
    Dyeing; Fluid           692,700
    Treatment and
    Chemical
    Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers

    29,     Metal Working           73,114,115,

                            125,222,

                            323,640

    47,     Plant Husbandry         688

    51,     Abrasive Tool           110, 640
    Making Process,
    Material, or
    Composition

    73,     Measuring and           641,645,
    Testing         725,743,775

    75,     Specialized             43,44,45,
    Metallurgical           46
    Processes,
    Compositions for
    Use Therein,
    Consolidated
    Metal Powder
    Compositions,
    and Loose Metal
    Particulate
    Mixtures

    76,     Metal Tools and                 640
    Implements, Making

    95,     Gas Separation:         517
    Processes

    101,    Printing                69,127

    126,    Stoves and              cross-reference
    Furnaces                art collection

                            923

    127,    Sugar, Starch,          697
    and Carbohydrates

    131,    Tobacco         688

    134,    Cleaning and            210,640,
    Liquid Contact          687,705

            With Solids

    148,    Metal Treatment         43,224,640,

                            704

    156,    Adhesive                76,135,210,
    Bonding and             223,666 Miscellaneous
    Chemical
    Manufacture

    178,    Telegraphy              52

    204,    Chemistry:              67,80,348,
    Electrical and          374,377,
    Wave Energy             380,384,

                            385,387,

                            389,399,

                            468,472,

                            487,501,

                            504,505,

                            517,518,

                            525,530,

                            531,532,

                            535,566,

                            567,575,

                            577,578,

                            579,588,

                            598,603,

                            622,624,

                            625,629,

                            630,631,

                            634,635,

                            639,647,

                            661,662,

                            663,668,

                            671,687,

                            695,696,

                            701,703,

                            724,730,

                            742,746,

                            770,775,

                            775.5,

                            777.5,778,

                            779,779.5,

                            782.5,783,

                            783.5,784,

                            785,785.5,

                            787.5,

                            788.5,789,

                            791.5,792,

                            793,794

    210,    Liquid          99,673,742
    Purification or
    Separation

    216,    Etching a               640
    Substrate:
    Processes

    219,    Electric Heating                640

    228,    Metal Fusion            114
    Bonding

    252,    Compositions            323,640,674

                            687,775.5

    260,    Chemistry of            697
    Carbon Compounds

    264,    Plastic and             68
    Nonmetallic
    Article Shaping
    or Treating:
    Processes

    307,    Electrical              724
    Transmission or
    Interconnection
    Systems

    324,    Electricity:            641,645,
    Measuring and           725,743,
    Testing         775

    346,    Recorders               52

    358,    Facsimile               52

    359,    Optics:  Systems                71,116
    (Including
    Communication)
    and Elements

    361,    Electricity:            323
    Electrical
    Systems and
    Devices

    420,    Alloys or               43,46,623
    Metallic
    Compositions

    422,    Chemical                701,775.5
    Apparatus and
    Process
    Disinfecting,
    Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or
    Sterilizing

    423,    Chemistry of            43,44,45,
    Inorganic               46,49,527,
    Compounds               529

    427,    Coating                 116,532,
    Processes               625,666

    428,    Stock Material          50,75,76,
    or Miscellaneous                125,138,
    Articles                150,152,

                            160,161,

                            170,171,

                            226,228,

                            532,625,

                            640

    429,    Chemistry:              343
    Electrical
    Current
    Producing
    Apparatus,
    Product, and
    Process

    430,    Radiation               127,667
    Imagery Chemistry:
    Process,
    Composition, or
    Product Thereof

    435,    Chemistry:              777.5
    Molecular
    Biology and
    Microbiology

    436,    Chemistry:              775,777.5
    Analytical and
    Immunological
    Testing

    437,    Semiconductor           123,157
    Device
    Manufacturing:
    Process

    451,    Abrading                640

    483,    Tool Changing           640

    522,    Synthetic               414
    Resins or
    Natural Rubbers
    -- Part of the
    Class 520 Series

    534,    Organic                 43
    Compounds --
    Part of the
    Class 532-570
    Series

    536,    Organic                 421
    Compounds --
    Part of the
    Class 532-570
    Series

            Processes and products:
    Processes falling within the scope of the class definition and the products
    necessarily resulting therefrom where not provided for elsewhere.


CLS 204/155
TXT Chemical processes which have for their purpose the preparation of
    compounds or elements through chemical reaction brought about by the agency
    of electrical or wave energy in which the reaction is carried out within a
    magnetic field; except electrolytic processes, provided for above, and
    those brought about through mere heating effect of electrical or wave
    energy.  For example, the conversion of the surface of a polymeric material
    to produce a film thereon.

    This includes both the synthetic production of compounds or elements and,
    likewise, the chemical modification or chemical purification of compounds
    or elements, making use of electrical or wave energy to effect the chemical
    changes in such processes.

    The processes falling within these subclasses are those whose purpose is
    for the production of compounds, elements by chemical reactions, but not
    those wherein a material or composition is treated, such as a metal,
    tobacco, foods, beverages, leather and the like, and in which a chemical
    change may be brought about.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, for coating apparatus.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 186+ for apparatus having means for
    initiating or perfecting chemical reaction using electromagnetic wave
    energy or corpuscular radiation and subclasses 127+ for apparatus having
    means to initiate or perfect a process using shock or sound wave.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 457+ for processes of coating in
    general involving a magnetic base or coating.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the use of electrical energy and magnetic force in the
    destruction of hazardous or toxic waste.


CLS 204/156
TXT Processes under subclass 155 in which the chemical reaction is carried out
    within a magnetic field including electrical discharges. The discharges may
    be produced by the same means as that which creates the magnetic field,
    such as an electromagnetic field of such character as produces discharges,
    or an additional electrical discharge field may be imposed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 186.03 for the corresponding apparatus.


CLS 204/157.15
TXT Processes of treating materials by wave energy:

    Subject matter under the class definition involving chemical reactions
    brought about by wave energy.

    (1)     Note.  Subclasses 157.15+ provides for the following subject
    matter: (a)  provides for preparing a compound or element, involving a
    chemical reaction induced by wave energy; said chemical reaction resulting
    in either (1) an element or chemical compound (2) a purified product
    (wherein the chemical reaction has assisted in the removal of a
    contaminant) or (3) an element (wherein the chemical reaction consists of
    decomposing a compound to produce the elemental form).  (b) provides for
    any process of treating waste or unwanted material involving a chemical
    reaction induced by wave energy where there is no intent to recover a
    specified desired product.  (c) provides for effecting optical rotation,
    i.e., d, 1 optical rotation for effecting a change in isomeric forms, e.g.,
    cis to trans isomers by wave energy, etc. (d) provides for producing a
    photochromic material by using wave energy.  (e) provides for effecting a
    chemical reaction by wave enrgy where the product produced is a composiiton
    not disclosed as having a desired use.  Materials which are compositions to
    begin with such as tobacco, foods, etc., are not proper for this area
    unless a final desired product is isolated which is a compound or element.
    (f) provides for the degradation of a chemical compound or polymer by wave
    energy to produce a chemical compound or element.

    (2)     Note.  The utilization of wave energy to effect a color change is
    presumed to be a chemical reaction for purposes of this class unless
    otherwise stated in the specification.

    (3)     Note.  The utilization of wave energy to increase the viscosity of
    a chemical compound is considered to be a chemical reaction for purposes of
    this class unless otherwise stated in the specification.  Also included
    herein is a process of removing an embrittlement causing material from a
    metallic substance to reduce the embrittlement condition of metal.

    (4)     Note.  The term "wave energy" includes radiation as well as wave
    energies transmitted by various mediums and embraces electromagnetic waves
    or radiations, sonic supersonic, ultransonic waves, neutrons, protons,
    deutron and other corpuscular radiations.

    (5)     Note.  The term "electromagnetic waves'' as employed in the (4)
    Note above includes, e.g., X-ray and gamma-ray, ultraviolet, infra red, and
    visble light rays, and short electric and radio waves.  Energy including
    wave enrgy processes which produces merely a thermal effect or heat waves,
    per se, even if a chemical reaction is induced is excluded under the
    provisions of the class definitions, see page 1, column 1 and page 4,
    column 2, "wave enregy" under "definition of terms" in the main class
    definition.

    (6)     Note.  Classification of documents into this area is on the basis
    of the wave energy step providing the final desired product and not
    necessarily on the first wave energy step recited if that product is not
    the ultimate desired product of the claim.  An example of such a situation
    would be a wave energy step of preparing a nitrogen heterocyclic compound
    followed by a wave energy step of cleaving the heterocyclic ring whereby
    the final product is devoid of a heterocyclic ring but still contains a
    nitrogen atom.  Classification in 157.81 rather than in 157.71 would be
    proper.

    (7)     Note.  In those subclasses which are identified in the
    classification schedule as "using," i.e., 157.22, 157.41, 157.42, 157.43,
    157.44, 157.61, 157.62, 157.63 original placement has been on either
    specifically claimed subject matter or solely disclosed subject matter.
    Claims which are alternative but which specifically recite the subject
    matter of the above subclasses are considered as being claimed.  An example
    of such a situation would be a claim reciting alternatively the use of a
    laser of X-ray to produce a desired nitrogen compound.  Classification as
    an original in 157.61 would be proper.  The rule to be followed is that if
    the claim does not meet the parameter of the "solely disclosed or claimed
    rule" it is classified below on some other aspect of the claim.

    (8)     Note.  This area does not provide for products of a wave energy
    proccedure nor does it provide for compositions or compounds which are to
    be exposed to wave energy.  Patents with claims drawn to a process of
    preparing a compound in the presence of wave energy and the compound, per
    se, are originally classified in the appropriate product class (260, etc.).
     See Class 252, Compositions, in particular subclass 188.31 for
    compositions which are to be exposed to wave energy so as to produce a
    desired compound or element.

    (9)     Note.  Processes of growing crystals, dissolving compounds,
    altering friability of particles, changing the structure in a crystal
    lattice or converting a substance into an amorphous state (e.g., Cg to Cd)
    are considered to be physical processes and thus are excluded from this
    class unless stated to be chemical reactions by the patentee.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, 518, Chemistry:  Fischer-Tropsch
    Processes; or Purification or Recovery of Products Thereof, 530 - 570,
    Organic Compounds -- Part of the Class 532 - 570 Series, AND 585, Chemistry
    of Hydrocarbon Compounds, for (1) processes for purifying an organic
    compound wherein no chemical reaction induced by wave enrgy is involved and
    (2) for processes with subsequent chemical process steps when such latter
    steps modify the product of the wave energy method to produce a different
    compound and (3) organic products prepared in the presence of wave energy.

            A process of preparing an organic compound by a chemical reaction
    which reaction is generic so as to include or exclude a Class 204 wave
    energy step is classified with the nonwave energy step, i.e., 518, 530 -
    570 or Class 585 and cross-reference to Class 204.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses for
    electric lamps and electric space discharge devices such as ultraviolet
    light generators, and cathode-ray tubes.  See especially subclass 112 for
    lamps and discharge devices having an envelope made of a material which
    will transmit invisible radiations and subclasses 364+ for cathode-ray
    tubes.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 323+ for a chemical reaction
    carried out in a reactor.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 119+ for X-ray
    sources, etc.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 186+ for apparatus for carrying out
    the radiant energy chemical processes of this subclass, subclasses 127+ for
    apparatus having means to initiate or perfect a process using shock or
    sound wave, and subclasses 1+ for radiant or wave energy methods in general
    for preserving, disinfecting, and sterilizing.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, for (1) processes of purifying an
    inorganic compound or nonmetallic element wherein no chemical reaction
    induced by wave energy is involved (2) for processes with subsequent
    chemical process steps when such latter steps modify the product of the
    wave energy method to produce a nonmetallic element or different inorganic
    compound and (3) inorganic products prepared in the presence of wave energy.

            A process of preparing an inorganic compound or free nonmetallic
    element by a chemical reaction which reaction is generic so as to include
    or exclude a Class 204 wave energy step is classified with nonwave energy
    step, i.e., Class 423 and cross-reference to Class 204.

    427,    Coating Processes, for general coating processes; especially
    subclasses 457+ for direct application of electrical, magnetic, wave, or
    particulate energy (without effecting a chemical reaction) as part of a
    coating process (including pre- or post-treatment).  Class 204 provides for
    processes involving combined coating operations in which at least one
    coated layer is applied by a Class 204 coating operation.  However, a Class
    427 coating step followed by curing (considered to be a mere perfecting
    step) of the 427 coating using electrical or wave energy is proper for
    Class 427.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, appropriate subclasses for radiation sensitive compositions and
    elements and for processes of exposing said compositions or elements to
    wave energy in an imagewise exposure technique.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 173.1+
    for electrical or wave energy treatment of micro-organisms or enzymes.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, in particular Class 522, for
    processes of preparing or treating a solid polymer utilizing wave energy
    and compositions to be polymerized or modified by wave energy wherein said
    composition contains a rate affecting material.  Class 520, subclasses 1+
    also provides for products which are the result of a chemical modification
    utilizing wave energy.  Class 204 is superior to Class 520, subclasses 1+
    therefore a patent claiming in the alternative a process of preparing an
    organic compound and a synthetic resin in the presence of wave energy is
    classified for original in purposes in Class 204 and cross-reference into
    Class 520.  In the situation where an alternative claim is presented as
    well as a specific claim to the synthetic is synthetic resin species and
    there is no specific claims to nonresin species, e.g., the organic
    compound, etc., the same rule of original patent placement applies.  Any
    step involving electrolysis, an electric, current electroosmosis,
    electrophoresis, electrostatic field, electrical discharge or magnetic
    field and also involving a synthetic resin or natural rubber will be proper
    in Class 204 even when a wave energy step is involved in any part of the
    process.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the use of wave energy in the destruction of hazardous or
    toxic waste.


CLS 204/157.2
TXT Isotope separation or enrichment:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.15 involving chemical processes which
    separate isotopic species from materials containing differing isotopes; or
    the enrichment of a material in a particular isotope; or the production of
    an isotopic species; all of said processes brought about by wave energy.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of patents in this subclass are:

    a.      Processes for increasing the concentration of deuterium relative to
    hydrogen in a fluorhydrocarbon.

    b.      Processes of producing C13 by decomposing C3H6, said C3H6
    containing C12 and C13 by irradiating C3H6.

    (2)     Note.  "Enrichment of an isotopic species" refers to increasing the
    isotope concentration by an exchange process to a level greater than that
    existing before the exchange.


CLS 204/157.21
TXT Inorganic product produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.2 wherein the produce produced is
    inorganic in nature.

    (1)     Note.  An inorganic compound for purposes of this subclass denotes
    those compounds which do not meet the definition of organic which is
    compounds having carbon therein and which are further characterized by the
    presence in a molecule of (a) two carbon atoms bonded together, or (b) one
    atom of carbon bonded to at least least one atom of hydrogen or halogen, or
    (c) one atom of carbon bonded to at least one atom of nitrogen by a single
    or double bond, with the proviso that hydrocyanic acid, cyanogen, isocyanic
    acid, cyanamide, cyanogen halides, isothiocyanic acid, and metal carbides
    are excluded as being organic compounds.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Powder Metal Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 122.5+ for radioactive alloys or metallic compositions.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 2+ for process for
    chemically treating a mixture to obtain a radioactive inorganic isotope and
    subclasses 249+ for a radioactive inorganic compound, nonmetallic element
    or isotope, per se.


CLS 204/157.22
TXT Using laser:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.21 wherein the separtion or enrichment is
    wherein the separation or enrichment is claimed or solely disclosed as
    being induced by the use of light amplified by stimulated emissions of
    radiation, i.e., laser.

    (1)     Note.  This area provides for a specific wave energy processs,
    i.e., laser.  In order for a wave energy process to be classified herein as
    an original, there must be claim to the noted process or the total
    disclosure in the patent must be directed to the specific process.  The
    wave energy process in the claim need not to be limited to the provided
    specific process if the claim specifically recites the process of this
    subclass.  Processes not claimed or solely disclosed are classified below
    on some other aspect.


CLS 204/157.3
TXT Removing a component from normally gaseous mixture:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.15 in which an initial normally gaseous
    or vaporous mixture is treated by wave energy so as to remove therefrom by
    a chemical reaction or change to a different chemical form at least one of
    the components therein, resulting in a heterogenous composition.

    (1)     Note.  When the recovery of a definite chemical compound or element
    as a product is claimed, original classification of the patent is in
    subclass 157.4 or 157.6.  However, where the claim does not include the
    step of separating the modified component, the patent is classified here
    even though the disclosed intent is to ultimately effect separation of the
    component.

    (2)     Note.  The mixture need not be entirely gaseous.  It may contain
    entrained solids or liquids.  It must however be handled and distributed as
    a gas and must be in this form at the onset of the treatment.

    (3)     Note.  Methods of purifying a gaseous composition so as to perfect
    said remaining composition for a particular art use are classified with the
    art use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, appropriate subclasses, for processes
    of purifying a gaseous mixture or separating a constituent therefrom where
    no chemical reaction is involved in the separation or purification, per se.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 210+ for processes of
    purifying a gaseous mixture or separating constituent therefrom involving a
    chemical reaction where the claim does not include the step of separating
    the modified component and the appropriate compound subclasses 249 - 658
    when the claim does include such step.


CLS 204/157.4
TXT Process of preparing desired inorganic material:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.15 wherein an element of inorganic
    compound is produced by a chemical reaction brought about by wave energy.

    (1)     Note.  An inorganic compound is one that does not meet the
    definition of "organic" as elaborated in subclass 157.6.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158.2,  for processes of purifying an inorganic substance by removing
    impurities therefrom using wave energy.


CLS 204/157.41
TXT Using laser:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.4 wherein the chemical reaction is
    claimed or solely disclosed as being induced by the use of light amplified
    by stimulated emissions of radiation, i.e., a laser.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158.2,  for processes of purifying an inorganic substance by employing a
    laser to decompose the organic or inorganic contaminant.

    (1)     Note.  This area provides for a specific wave energy process, i.e.,
    laser.  In order for a wave energy process to be classified herein as an
    original, there must be a claim to the noted process or the total
    disclosure in the patent must be directed to the specific process.  The
    wave energy process in the claim specifically recited the process of this
    subclass.  Processes not claimed or solely disclosed are classified below
    on some other aspect.


CLS 204/157.42
TXT Using sonic of ultrasonic energy:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.4 wherein the chemical reaction is either
    claimed or solely disclosed as being induced or effected by the step of
    imparting rapid oscillation at a frequency of greater than 10 cycles per
    second.

    (1)     Note.  Claims drawn merely to "sonic" energy or "ultrasonic energy"
    are presumed to meet the stated limitations and thus would be classified
    herein.

    (2)     Note.  This area provides for a specific wave energy process, i.e.,
    sonic or ultrasonic energy.  In order for a wave energy process to be
    classified herein as an original, there must be a claim to the noted
    process or the total disclosure in the patent must be directed to the
    specific process.  The wave energy process in the claim need not be limited
    to the provided specific process if the claim specifically recites the
    process of this subclass.  Processes not claimed or solely disclosed are
    classified below on some other aspect.


CLS 204/157.43
TXT Using microwave energy:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.4 wherein the chemical reaction is
    claimed or solely disclosed as being induced or effected by a wave having a
    wavelength between 30,000 nanometers and 1X109 nanometers and which is
    usually generated by radio frequency power tubes from high-voltage direct
    current.

    (1)     Note.  Claims drawn merely to "microwave energy" are presumed to
    meet the stated limitations and thus would be classified herein.

    (2)     Note.  This area provides for a specific wave energy process, i.e.
    microwave energy.  In order for a wave energy process to be classified
    herein as an original, there must be a claim to the noted process or the
    total disclosure in the patent must be directed to the specific process.
    The wave energy process in the claim need not be limited to the provided
    specific process if the claim specifically recites the process of this
    subclass.  Processes not claimed or solely disclosed are classified below
    on some other aspect.


CLS 204/157.44
TXT Using ionizing radiation:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.4 wherein the chemical reaction is
    claimed or solely disclosed as being induced or effected by ionizing
    radiation.

    (1)     Note.  Included within the term ionizing radiation are X-rays,
    gamma rays, nuclear particles like protons, fast neutrons, alpha and beta
    particles, deuterons, fission fragments and the like or high speed
    accelerated electrons (including electron bombardment).

    (2)     Note.  The radiation proper for this subclass may be obtained from
    various sources.  The following is a list of such possible sources, e.g.,
    including natural radioactive materials, which emit alpha, beta and gamma
    radiation such as radium and its compounds; from  nuclear fission
    by-products of processes in which atomic power is generated, these
    by-products including elements having atomic numbers 30 to 63; from
    materials made radioactive by exposure to neutron radiation, such as
    cobalt-60, cesium-37, sodium-24, manganese-56, gadolinium-72,
    lanthanum-140, etc.; or from operating nuclear reactors including spent
    fuel elements.  The charged particles may be brought to high energy levels
    by acceleration in devices like cathode ray tubes, Van de Graff generators,
    resonant cavity accelerators, betatrons, synchrotrons, cyclotrons, and
    electron accelerators.  Suitable accelerated electrons may also be obtained
    as beta radiation from radioactive isotopes, such as C14, P32, Sr90 and
    tritium.  High energy X-ray machines are a source of X-rays as are the
    bombardments of metal targets, such as gold or tungsten, with high energy
    electrons.

    (3)     Note.  This area provides for a specific wave energy process, i.e.,
    ionizing radiation.  In order for a wave energy process to be classified
    herein as an original, there must be claim to the noted process or the
    total disclosure in the patent must be directed to the specific process.
    The wave energy process in the claim need not be limited to the provided
    specific process if the claim specifically recites the process of this
    subclass.  Processes not claimed or solely disclosed are classified below
    on some other aspect.


CLS 204/157.45
TXT Boron, phosphorous or silicon containing product produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.4 wherein the wave energy process of the
    product contains at least one boron, phosphorus or silicon atom.

    (1)     Note.  Processes for the production of glass and clay analogues are
    included herein.


CLS 204/157.46
TXT Nitrogen containing product produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.4 wherein the product of said wave energy
    process contains at least one nitrogen atom.


CLS 204/157.47
TXT Carbon containing product produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.4 wherein the product of said wave energy
    process contains at least one carbon atom.

    (1)     Note.  Processes for the production of carbon black are included
    herein.


CLS 204/157.48
TXT Halogen containing product produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.4 wherein the product of said wave energy
    process contains at least one halogen atom.

    (1)     Note.  Halogen is limited to fluorine, Chlorine, iodine, bromine
    and astatine.


CLS 204/157.49
TXT Sulfur containing product produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.4 wherein the product of said wave energy
    contains at least one sulfur atom.


CLS 204/157.5
TXT Oxygen containing product produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.4 wherein the product of said wave energy
    process contains at least one oxygen atom.

    (1)     Note.  A process for generating oxygen radicals (02) would be
    classified herein.


CLS 204/157.51
TXT Metal oxide or hydrate thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.5 wherein the product is a binary
    compound containing only a metal atom and oxygen, or a hydrate form thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Metal is limited to those elements of atomic number 3-4,
    11-13, 19-33, 37-51, 55-70, 72-84 or 87 and higher.


CLS 204/157.52
TXT Hydrogen containing product produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.4 wheerein the product of said wave
    energy process contains at least one hydrogen atom.


CLS 204/157.6
TXT Process or preparing desired organic product containing at least one atom
    other than carbon and hydrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.15 wherein a specific organic compound is
    produced by a chemical reaction brought about by wave energy and wherein
    said orgainc compound contains at least one atom other than carbon and
    hydrogen.

    (1)     Note.  "Organic" denotes all compounds having carbon therein and
    which are further characterized by the presence in a molecule of (a) two
    carbon atoms bonded together, or (b) one atom of carbon bonded to at least
    one atom of hydrogen or halogen, or (c) one atom  of carbon to at least one
    atom of nitrogen by a single or double bond, with the proviso that
    hydrocyanic acid, cyanogen, isocyanic acid, cyanamide, cyanogen halides,
    isothiocyanic acid, and metal carbides are excluded as being organic
    compounds.

    (2)     Note. Isomerization processes (for example, a change in orientation
    from a cis to trans form) which are induced by wave energy are classified
    herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS

    157.15, for production of an acyclic hydrocarbon and 158.14 for production
    of a cyclic hyderocarbon.

    158.21, for processes of purifying an organic substance by removing
    impurities therefrom and using wave energy.


CLS 204/157.61
TXT Using laser:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.6 wherein the chemical reaction is
    claimed or solely disclosed as being induced by the use of light amplified
    by stimulated emissions of radiation, i.e., a laser.

    (1)     Note.  This area provides for a specific wave energy process, i.e.,
    laser.  In order for a wave energy process to be classified herein as an
    original, there must be a claim to the noted process or the total
    disclosure in the patent must be directed to the specific process.  The
    wave energy process in the claim need not be limited to the provided
    specific process if the claim specifically recites the process of this
    subclass.  Processes not claimed or solely disclosed are classified below
    on some other aspect.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158.21, for processes of purifying an organic substance by photolyzing
    impurities therefrom by use of a laser.


CLS 204/157.62
TXT Using sonic or ultrasonic energy:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.6 wherein the chemical reaction is
    claimed or solely disclosed as being induced or effectted by the step of
    imparting rapid oscillation at a frequency of greater than 10 cycles per
    second.

    (1)     Note.  Claims drawn merely to "sonic" energy or "ultrasonic energy"
    are presumed to meet the stated limitations and thus would be classified
    herein.

    (2)     Note.  This area provides for a specific wave energy process, i.e.,
    sonic or ultrasonic.  In order for a wave energy process to be classified
    herein as an original, there must be a claim to the noted process of the
    total disclosure in the patent must be directed to the specific process.
    The wave energy process in the claim need not be limited to the provided
    specific process if the claim specifically recites the process of this
    subclass.  Processes not claimed or solely disclosed are classified below
    on some other aspect.


CLS 204/157.63
TXT Using ionizing radiation:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.6 wherein the chemical reaction is
    claimed or solely disclosed as being induced or effected by ionizing
    radiation.

    (1)     Note.  Included within the term ionizing radiation are X-rays,
    gamma rays, nuclear particles like protons, fast neutrons, alpha and beta
    particles, deuterons, fission fragments and the like, or high speed
    accelerated electrons (including electron bombardment).

    (2)     Note.  The radiation proper for this subclass may be obtained from
    various sources.  The following is a list of such possible sources, e.g.,
    including natural radioactive materials, which emit alpha, beta and gamma
    radiation such as radium and its compounds; from nuclear fission
    by-products including elements having atomic numbers 30 to 63; from
    materials made radioactivee by exposure to neutron radiation such as
    cobalt-60, cesium-37, sodium-24, manganese-56. gadolinium-72,
    lanthanum-140, etc.; or from operating nuclear reactors including particles
    maybe brought to high energy levels by acceleration in devices like cathode
    ray tubes,Van de Graff generators, resonant cavity accelerators, betatrons,
    synchrotrons, cyclotrons, and electron accelerators suitable accelerated
    electrons may also be obtained as beta radiation from radioactive isotopes,
    such as C14, P32, Sr90 and tritium. High energy X-ray machines are a source
    of X-rays as are the bombardments of metal targets, such as gold or
    tungsten, with high energy electrons.

    (3)     Note.  This area provides for a specific wave energy process, i.e.,
    ionizing radiation.  In order for a wave energy process to be classified
    herein as an original, there must be a claim to the noted process or the
    total disclosure in the patent must be directed to the specific process.
    The wave energy process in the claim need not be limited to the provided
    specific process if the claim specfically recites the process of this
    subclass.  Processes not claimed or solely disclosed are classified below
    on some other aspect.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158.21, for processes of purifying an organic compound by removing
    impurites therefrom by wave energy wherein said wave energy induces a
    reaction to occur only amongst the considered material.


CLS 204/157.64
TXT Nitrogen, sulfur, phosphorous or silicon containing product produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.63 wherein the product produced from said
    reaction contains at least one nitrogen, sulfur, phosphorus or silicon atom.


CLS 204/157.65
TXT Carbocyclic ring containing product produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.63 wherein the product produced from said
    reaction contains a ring composed of only carbon and hydrogen atoms.


CLS 204/157.67
TXT Vitamin product produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.6 wherein the product of the wave energy
    process is a vitamin or modified product thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of patents proper for this subclass include:

    (i)     process of treating an activatable material to impart an
    antirachitic (vitamin D) property thereto by exposing the same to wave
    energy

    (ii)    process of producing or increasing vitamin D in ergosterol by the
    use of wave energy.

    (iii)   process for the isomerization of cis-vitamin A compound or
    derivative thereof into the translomer by the use of wave energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166,    for preparation or treatment of vitamins involving the use of an
    electrostatic field or electrical discharge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424     and 524, Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions,
    appropriate subclass, based on the structure of the vitamin and especially
    Class 514, subclasses 167+ for a vitamiin D composition which may be
    produced by wave energy.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 72+, 248+ and 311 for food products, containing vitamins and
    processes involving the same.


CLS 204/157.68
TXT Carbohydrate or protein product produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.6 wherein the product of the wave energy
    process is either a protein or carbohydrate or modified product thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein as proteins are gelatin and collagen.
    Included herein as carbohydrates are sugars, celluiose, and starch.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of patents proper for this subclass include:

    (i)     a process of producing saccharose from formaldehyde by use of wave
    energy.

    (ii)    a process of releasing fragments of peptides from a polypeptide by
    use of photolysis.

    (3)     Note.  The scope of the terms protein and carbohydrate is defined
    in Class 530, subclass 350 and Class 536, subclasses 1.11+ respectively.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    522,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 87 - 89  for
    processes of chemically reacting a carbohydrate or protein with an
    ethylenic reactant by wave energy and modified products thereof.


CLS 204/157.69
TXT Heterocyclic product produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.6 wherein the product of the wave energy
    process is an organic compound wherein one or more carbon atoms are
    convalently bonded in a  ring system with at least one hetero atom of
    oxygen, sulfur, nitrogen, selenium or tellurium and there are no other
    different atoms in the ring.


CLS 204/157.7
TXT Hetero sulfur containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.69 wherein there is at least one sulfur
    atom in the hetero ring system.


CLS 204/157.71
TXT Hetero nitrogen containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.69 wherein there is at least one nitrogen
    atom in the hetero ring system.


CLS 204/157.72
TXT Hetero nitrogen ring contains at least two hetero atoms:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.71 wherein there is at least one nitrogen
    atom and at least one other atom selected from oxygen, nitrogen, selenium
    or tellurium in the same hetero ring.


CLS 204/157.73
TXT Phosphorous product produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.6 wherein the product of the wave energy
    process contains at least one phosphorus atom.


CLS 204/157.74
TXT Silicon product produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.6 wherein the product of the wave energy
    process contains at least one silicon atom.


CLS 204/157.75
TXT Heavy metal product produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.6 wherein the product of the wave energy
    process contains a metal having a specific gravity greater than four,
    including arsenic.


CLS 204/157.76
TXT Sulfur product produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.6 wherein the product of the wave energy
    process contains at least one sulfur atom.


CLS 204/157.77
TXT Nitrogen containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.76 wherein the sulfur product produced
    also contains at least one nitrogen atom.


CLS 204/157.78
TXT Oxygen containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.76 wherein the sulfur product produced
    also contains at least one oxygen atom.


CLS 204/157.79
TXT Halogen containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.78 wherein the sulfur and oxygen  product
    produced also contains at least one halogen atom.

    (1)     Note.  Patents with claims drawn to processes of preparing sulfonyl
    halides or acid halides are included herein.

    (2)     Note.  Halogen is limited to fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine
    and astatine.


CLS 204/157.8
TXT Halogen containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.76 wherein the sulfur product produced
    also contains at least atom selected from fluorine, chlorine, bromine,
    iodine or astatine.


CLS 204/157.81
TXT Nitrogen product produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.6 wherein the produce of the wave energy
    contains at least one nitrogen atom.


CLS 204/157.82
TXT Oxygen containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.81 wherein the product nitrogen produced
    also contains at least one oxygen atom, e.g., isocyanate, etc.


CLS 204/157.83
TXT Nitroso or oxime containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.82 wherein the oxygen atom is part of a
    C=N.OH or C-N=O group.


CLS 204/157.84
TXT Halogen containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.83 wherein the C=N-OH or C-N=O product
    contains at least one halogen atom.

    (1)     Note.  Halogen is limited to fluorine, chlorine, iodine, bromine
    and astatine.


CLS 204/157.85
TXT Carbon triple bonded to nitrogen containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.81 wherein the nitrogen product produced
    contains a least one -C=N group.


CLS 204/157.86
TXT Halogen containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.81 wherein the nitrogen product produced
    contains at least one halogen atom.

    (1)     Note.  Halogen is limited to fluorine, chlorine, iodine, bromine
    and astatine.


CLS 204/157.87
TXT Carboxylic acid or derivative product:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.6 wherein the organic product which is
    the result of a wave energy process is a carboxylic acid or derivative.

    (1)     Note.  A carboxylic acid for purposes of this subclass denotes:


    A compound containing the structure

    A.      --OH

                    A carboxylic acid derivative for this subclass is limited
    to ester, nonhetero anhydride, salt, and acyl halide.

                    A carboxylic acid anhydride denotes:

                    A compound containing the acyclic structure

    B.      --O-

                    A carboxylic acid ester denotes:

                    A compound containing the structure

    C.      --O-C

                    wherein the carbon atom single bonded to the oxygen atom of
    the

    --O- group is not double bonded to oxygen, selenium, or tellurium.

                    An acid hacioe denotes:

                    A compound containing the structure

    D.      --hal

    The salt of a carboxylic acid denotes:

                    A compound containing the structure

    E.      --

    wherein X is a metal


CLS 204/157.88
TXT Oxygen other than as part of a carboxylic acid or derivative moiety:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.87 wherein the carboxylic acid or
    derivative contains an oxygen atom which is other than as part of a

    -O  or derivative group.


CLS 204/157.89
TXT Atom other than carbon, hydrogen or oxygen:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.87 wherein the carboxylic acid or
    derivative contains an atom other than carbon, hydrogen or oxygen.


CLS 204/157.9
TXT Alcohol product produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.6 wherein the organic product of a wave
    energy process is an alcohol.

    (1)     Note.  Alcohol denotes a C-OH group wherein the carbon atom bound
    to the oxygen atom of the hydroxyl group cannot be double bonded to oxygen,
    selenium or tellurim.


CLS 204/157.91
TXT Fused or bridged ring containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.9 wherein the alcohol contains a fused-
    or bridged-ring system.

    (1)     Note.  A fused- or bridged-ring system for this subclass denotes a
    ring system having at least two rings which (a) share with each other two
    adjacent ring atoms, or (b) share with each other three or more ring atoms
    and wherein each ring having shared atoms is a carbocyclic ring.


CLS 204/157.92
TXT Ether product produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.6 wherein the organic product of a wave
    energy process is a ether.

    (1)     Note.  An ether for purposes of this subclass denotes an organic
    compound having the general structure -C-O-C- wherein the carbons bound to
    the linking oxygen atom cannot be double bonded to oxygen, selenium, or
    tellurium.


CLS 204/157.93
TXT Aldehyde or ketone product produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.6 wherein the organic product of a wave
    energy process is an aldehyde or ketone.

    (1)     Note.  An aldehyde for purposes of this subclass denotes an organic
    compound containing the structure

            R--H

    (2)     Note.  A ketone for purposes of this subclass denotes an organic
    compound having the general structure

            R--R


CLS 204/157.94
TXT Halogen product produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.6 wherein the organic product of a wave
    energy process contains at least one halogen atom.

    (1)     Note.  Halogen is limited to fluorine, chlorine bromine, iodine and
    astatine.


CLS 204/157.95
TXT Carbon and halogen only in product:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.94 wherein the halogen product produced
    is composed solely of carbon and halogen atoms.


CLS 204/157.96
TXT Carbocyclic ring containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.95 wherein the carbon and halogen product
    contains at least one ring composed solely of carbon atoms, e.g. aryl, etc.


CLS 204/157.97
TXT Aryl ring containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.96 wherein at least one ring is aryl.


CLS 204/157.98
TXT Unsaturated product:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.94 wherein the halogen containing product
    produced contains an unsaturated group.

    (1)     Note.  The term "unsaturated" includes benzene ring containing
    compounds.


CLS 204/157.99
TXT Unsaturation in aryl ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.98 wherein the unsaturated group is part
    of an aryl ring.


CLS 204/158.1
TXT Carbocyclic ring containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.94 wherein the halogen containing product
    produced contains a ring composed solely of carbon atoms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158.1,  for a product containing an aryl ring.


CLS 204/158.11
TXT Two or more diverse halogen atoms containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.94 wherein the halogens containing
    product produced contains at least two diverse halogen atoms.


CLS 204/158.12
TXT Four or more carbon atoms containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.94 wherein the halogen product produced
    contains at least four carbon atoms.


CLS 204/158.14
TXT At least one carbocyclic ring and only carbon and hydrogen atoms in product
    produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.15 wherein an organic compound is
    produced which contains a ring composed solely of carbon atoms and wherein
    the molecule consists solely of carbon and hydrogen atoms.


CLS 204/158.2
TXT Processes of purifying materials:

    Subject matter under subclass 175.15 involving processes which cause the
    separation or purification of materials through chemical reactions brought
    about by wave energy.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of patents proper for this subclass include:

    (a)     process of removing phosgene impurity in BC13 by the use of laser
    radiation said radiation disassociating COC12 into disassociated products.

    (b)     process of subjecting propylene oxide containing volatile
    by-product chlorine-containing impurities to ionization radiation to remove
    said impurities.

    (c)     process of removing phenanthrene from crude anthracene by use of
    wave energy.

    (2)     Note.  Methods of purifying a composition by wave energy so as
    perfect said composition for a particular art use are classified with the
    appropriate art use,  e.g., Class 426 if a food, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157.4   and 158.14, for processes of synthesizing a desired compound by the
    use of wave energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, for processes of purifying an
    inorganic compound or element wherein no chemical reaction induced by wave
    energy is involved.


CLS 204/158.21
TXT Organic material purified:

    Subject matter under subclass 158.2 wherein the desired material is an
    organic compound.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 157.6 for a definition of the term "organic
    compound".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, 518, Chemistry:  Fischer-Tropsch
    Processes; or Purification or Recovery of Products Thereof, 530 - 570,
    Organic Compounds -- Part of the Class 532 - 570 Series, and 585, Chemistry
    of Hydrocarbon Compounds, for processes of purifying an organic compound by
    chemical reaction induced by other than wave energy.


CLS 204/164
TXT Chemical processes which have for their purpose the preparation of
    compounds or elements through chemical reactions brought about by the
    agency of electrical energy within an electrostatic field or a field within
    which electrical discharging takes place. For example, the conversion of
    the surface of a polymeric material to produce a film thereon.

    This group includes both the synthetic production of compounds or elements
    and, likewise the chemical modification or chemical purification of
    compounds or elements, making use of electrical energy to effect the
    chemical changes in such processes.


    The processes falling within this group of subclasses are those whose
    purpose is for the production of compounds or elements by chemical
    reaction, but not those wherein a material or composition is treated, such
    as a metal, tobacco, foods, beverages, leather and the like, and in which a
    chemical change may be brought about.


    This group of subclasses likewise includes processes wherein one or both of
    the reactants are subjected to an electrostatic field or electrical
    discharge for the purpose of activation and the desired reaction is
    effected by mere mixing while such reactant or reactants are in the
    activated condition. This usually consists of a step of ionization followed
    immediately by mixture with another ionized or unionized substance, the
    reaction following as a matter of course due to the condition of the mixed
    reactants.

    (1)     Note.  For chemical processes brought about in a zone wherein both
    a magnetic field and discharging occurs, see this class, subclass 156.

    (2)     Note.  For electric charge generating or conducting apparatus
    (ionizing devices) see Class 361, Electricity:  Electrical Systems and
    Devices, subclasses 230+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 186.04+ for corresponding apparatus.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the use of electrostatic field or electrical discharges in
    the destruction of hazardous or toxic waste.


CLS 204/165
TXT Processes under subclass 164 directed to the production of organic
    compounds.

    (1)     Note.  For electrostatic field or electrical discharge processes of
    producing carbon, see this class, subclass 173.


CLS 204/166
TXT Processes under subclass 165 directed to the production of vitamins.

    (1)     Note.  Compare with this class, subclass 157.67.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 426, Food or Edible Material:  Processes,
    Compositions, and Products, subclasses 72+, 248 and 311 for food products
    containing vitamins.

    (3)     Note.  See Class 424, Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating
    Compositions, appropriate subclass for a composition containing a vitamin
    and for treating or curing a disease of the body.


CLS 204/167
TXT Processes under subclass 165 directed to the production and treatment of
    fats, fatty oils, ester-type waxes, fatty still residues or higher fatty
    acids.


CLS 204/168
TXT Processes under subclass 165 directed to the production and treatment of
    hydrocarbons.


CLS 204/169
TXT Processes under subclass 168 directed to the production of halogenated or
    oxidized hydrocarbons.


CLS 204/170
TXT Processes under subclass 168 directed to the production of gaseous
    hydrocarbons.

    (1)     Note.  This group of patents is intended to include processes for
    the production of heating and illuminating gaseous mixtures comprising
    hydrocarbons when use is made of an electrostatic field or electrical
    discharge for their preparation. However, those processes are not here
    included which employ an electrostatic field or electrical discharge as
    merely one of a series of treatments of hydrocarbons to produce such gases
    unless the other treatments are in nature of preparatory steps for the
    electrostatic field or electrical discharge step and are integrally
    associated therewith.


CLS 204/171
TXT Processes under subclass 170 directed to the production of acetylene.


CLS 204/172
TXT Processes under subclass 168 directed to the cracking of hydrocarbon oils.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 170 and 171 for cracking
    processes resulting in the production of gaseous hydrocarbons.


CLS 204/173
TXT Processes under subclass 164 directed to the production of carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Carbon may be incidentally produced in the processes
    classified in this class, subclass 165 and indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  See 423, Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 445+
    for nonelectrolytic processes of forming carbon.


CLS 204/174
TXT Processes under subclass 164 directed to the production of inorganic
    sulfur-oxygen compounds.


CLS 204/175
TXT Processes under subclass 164 directed to the production of hydrogen
    peroxide.


CLS 204/176
TXT Processes under subclass 164 directed to the production of ozone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 186.07+ for corresponding apparatus.


CLS 204/177
TXT Processes under subclass 164 directed to the production of inorganic
    nitrogen compounds.


CLS 204/178
TXT Processes under subclass 177 where the field employed comprises an
    electrical arc discharge.


CLS 204/179
TXT Processes under subclass 178 directed to the production of nitrogen oxides.

    (1)     Note.  This group of patents includes the recovery of the oxides
    even though this be accomplished by absorption in water or aqueous
    solutions with the change to the corresponding acid or salt. For example,
    processes which merely in addition to the arc synthesis of nitrogen oxides
    include absorption of the oxide (1) in water to form nitric, nitrous or
    other acid, or (2) in a alkaline solutions to form nitrites, nitrates and
    the like, are here included.


CLS 204/192.1
TXT Coating, forming or etching by sputtering:

    Processes for coating, forming or etching within a vacuum environment
    involving bombarding a solid or liquid target material with atomic
    particles (e.g., ions) to cause some target material to be ejected (i.e.,
    sputtered) by momentum transfer.

    (1)     Note.  Solid or liquid material being bombarded is generally
    referred to as the target material.

    (2)     Note.  Material removed from the target may be used to deposit a
    coating on a workpiece, to etch a workpiece or to form a product, e.g.,
    particles, flakes, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    298.01, for corresponding apparatus.

    471+,   for electrophoretic or electro-osmotic coating or forming of an
    object.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions subclasses 67+ for electroforming or a
    composition therefor and subclasses 80+ for electrolytic coating.


CLS 204/192.11
TXT Ion beam sputter deposition:

    Processes under subclass 192.1 for the deposition of target material onto a
    surface (or substrate), to coat or form, wherein a beam of ions generated
    by an ions source remote from the target is employed to sputter material
    from the target.


CLS 204/192.12
TXT Glow discharge sputter deposition (e.g., cathode sputtering, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 192.1 for the deposition of target material onto a
    surface (or substrate) wherein material is sputtered from the target in the
    presence of a glow discharge, e.g., cathode sputtering, etc.


CLS 204/192.13
TXT Measuring or testing (e.g., of operating parameters, property of articles,
    etc.):

    Processes under subclass 192.12 wherein at least one characteristic of the
    process or the product produced is measured or tested.


CLS 204/192.14
TXT Coating inorganic material onto polymeric material:

    Processes under subclass 192.12 wherein inorganic coating material is
    deposited onto a polymeric material.


CLS 204/192.15
TXT Specified deposition material or use:

    Processes under subclass 192.12 wherein the target or deposition material
    has a designated chemical composition or the function of the product is
    specified.

    (1)     Note.  A designated chemical composition (DCC) is a composition
    wherein at least one chemical atom is identified. for a more comprehensive
    definition of DCC, see DEFINITIONS OF TERMS, under the main definitions of
    this class.


CLS 204/192.16
TXT Wear or abrasion resistant:

    Processes under subclass 192.15 wherein the function of the coating is to
    enhance the wear or abrasion resistance of the product.


CLS 204/192.17
TXT Electrical contact material:

    Processes under subclass 192.15 wherein the material functions as an
    electrical contact or electrode.


CLS 204/192.18
TXT Process under subclass 192.15 wherein the material exhibits piezoelectric
    properties (e.g., conversion of applied voltage to physical motion).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes ferroelectic materials, i.e., wherein
    the coating is characterized by spontaneous electric polarization the
    direction of which can be altered by an electric field.  These materials
    are dielectic analogs of ferromagnetic materials.


CLS 204/192.2
TXT Ferromagnetic:

    Processes under subclass 192.15 wherein the material exhibits ferromagnetic
    properties (e.g., hysteresis, etc.).


CLS 204/192.21
TXT Resistor:

    Processes under subclass 192.15 wherein the deposition material is
    characterized by a specified electrical resistivity and is adapted to
    function as a resistor in an electical circuit.


CLS 204/192.22
TXT Insulator or dielectric:

    Processes under subclass 192.15 wherein the material is characterized by
    low electrical conductivity.


CLS 204/192.23
TXT Silicon containing:

    Processes under subclass 192.22 wherein the material comprises silicon.


CLS 204/192.24
TXT Superconductor:

    Processes under subclass 192.15 wherein the material is characterized by an
    almost complete disappearance of eletrical resistance at low temperatures.


CLS 204/192.25
TXT Semiconductor:

    Processes under subclass 192.15 wherein the material is a semiconductor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, for (a) combined
    processes and (b) certain unit operations of manufacturing a semiconductive
    substrate or device.


CLS 204/192.26
TXT Optical or photoactive:

    Processes under subclass 192.15 wherein the material is chosen on the basis
    of its optical properties or wherein a property of the material is altered
    in the presence of light (e.g., photoconductive, etc.).


CLS 204/192.27
TXT Reflective:

    Processes under subclass 192.26 wherein the function of the material is to
    reflect at least a part of the spectrum of visible light (e.g., coated
    glass for architectural applications).


CLS 204/192.28
TXT Absorptive:

    Processes under subclass 192.26 wherein the function of the material is to
    absorb at least part of the spectrum of visible light (e.g., coated panels
    for collecting solar energy).


CLS 204/192.29
TXT Processes under subclass 192.26 wherein the material is electrically
    conductive and transparent to light.


CLS 204/192.3
TXT With sputter etching:

    Processes under subclass 192.15 wherein a sputter etching step is included
    in the process in addition to the sputter depostion step.


CLS 204/192.32
TXT Sputter etching:

    Processes under subclass 192.1 for removing materials from a substrate
    wherein the substrate is subjected to bombardment by atomic particles
    (e.g., ions) and the activation energy is supplied at least in part by
    momentum transfer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, subclasses 707+ for
    processes of vapor phase chemical etching of a semiconductive substrate
    utilizing irradiation of electromagnetic or wave energy and, particularly,
    subclasses 710+ for such chemical etching processes wherein the irradiation
    produces a plasma or glow discharge.


CLS 204/192.33
TXT Measuring or treating (e.g., operating parameters, end point determination
    etc.):

    Processes under subclass 192.32 wherein at least one characteristic of the
    etching process or the substrate being etched is measured or tested, e.g.,
    operating parameters, and point determination, etc.


CLS 204/192.34
TXT Ion beam etching (e.g., ion milling, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 192.32 wherein a beam of ions generated by an ion
    source remote from the substrate is employed to sputter material from the
    substrate.


CLS 204/192.35
TXT Etching specified materials:

    Processes under subclass 192.32 wherein the material being etched comprises
    a designated chemical composition (DCC).


CLS 204/192.36
TXT Organic:

    Processes under subclass 192.35 wherein the material being etched is
    organic material.


CLS 204/192.37
TXT Silicon containing:

    Processes under subclass 192.35 wherein the material being etched is
    organic material.


CLS 204/192.38
TXT Vacuum arc discharged coating:

    Processes for the deposition of a coating onto a substrate within a vacuum
    environment by the action of an arc discharge between an anode and a
    cathode wherein the source of material to be deposited forms or is
    associated with the cathode.

    (1)     Note.  The process is generally characterized by one or more
    cathode spots which move across the surface of the source and vaporize the
    coating materials.


CLS 204/193
TXT Apparatus specialized for carrying out any of the processes of this class
    and not provided for in subclasses indented hereunder.


CLS 204/194
TXT Apparatus for performing electrolytic operations coming within the class
    definition.


CLS 204/196
TXT Apparatus under subclass 194 in which an electrical current or potential is
    utilized or applied to prevent corrosion, scale formation or other
    objectionable action in or on any object in order to neutralize or correct
    such action when the object is in normal use.  The current or potential
    impressed may be for the purpose of neutralization or it may be employed to
    give the object to be protected an electrical condition effective for the
    prevention or modification of objectionable action.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include apparatus for the
    electrolytic treatment of fluids in order to modify their properties so
    that they do not cause or accelerate electrolytic action. Such electrolytic
    apparatus is provided for below in the appropriate subclass which is
    dependent upon the structure or character of the apparatus employed.

    (2)     Note.  Combinations of object protection means as herein defined
    and outside art devices are here included when no more of said art device
    is specified than is necessary to provide a setting or locus for the
    protection means.

    (3)     Note.  See Class 307, Electrical Transmission or Interconnection
    Systems, subclass 95 for anti-electrolysis devices specialized for or
    appurtenant to electrical systems of distribution.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    136,    Batteries: Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclasses 200+ for
    thermoelectric batteries.


CLS 204/197
TXT Apparatus under subclass 196 in which the anti-electrolysis device includes
    means for creating an internal battery action within or upon the object
    being protected.

    (1)     Note.  For internal battery electrolytic cells, and see this class,
    subclasses 248 and 249.



    Apparatus, Electrolytic, With movable electrode means.  Electrolytic
    apparatus provided with one or more electrodes peculiarly adapted to be
    moved incident to the electrolytic operation.  This subclass and indented
    subclasses do not include mere adjustable means for mounting one or more of
    the electrodes.  The apparatus here provided for includes all apparatus for
    moving an electrode into and out of the electrolytic bath and those which
    move the electrode during the electrolysis or intermediate the electrolytic
    action.


CLS 204/198
TXT Electrolytic apparatus in which means are provided for conveying in the
    electrolytic bath the article, material or work being treated, such work
    acting as one of the electrodes.


CLS 204/199
TXT Conveyors under subclass 198 which give the articles a rotary movement
    through the bath.


CLS 204/200
TXT Rotary conveyors under subclass 199 with means to give the electrode base a
    treatment preliminary or subsequent to the electrolysis.

    (1)     Note.  For endless conveying means combined with base treatment
    means, see this class, subclasses 203 and 204.


CLS 204/201
TXT Rotary conveyors under subclass 199 specialized to convey articles in a
    loose condition within the electrolytic bath, that is, the articles are not
    fixed to a support while being treated.


CLS 204/202
TXT Apparatus under subclass 198 in which the conveyor is of the endless type.


CLS 204/203
TXT Apparatus under subclass 202 with additional means to treat the base before
    or after the electrolytic action.

    (1)     Note.  For rotary conveying means combined with base treatment
    means, see this class, subclass 200.


CLS 204/204
TXT Apparatus under subclass 203 in which is included control means for the
    current supplied to the electrolytic device, or electrical control for
    operation of apparatus included or combined with said device.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include a mere current supply.


CLS 204/205
TXT Apparatus under subclass 202 in which a means is included for the control
    of current supplied to the electrolytic device or to a device included or
    combined therewith.

    (1)     Note.  Search also this class, subclass 204.


CLS 204/206
TXT Electrolytic apparatus in which the electrode is moved in the form of a
    strip or filament of continuous or indefinite length.


CLS 204/207
TXT Apparatus under subclass 206 which additional means to treat the base
    before or after the electrolytic action.


CLS 204/208
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 wherein stripping means or means to assist
    stripping are included.


CLS 204/209
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 wherein means for mechanically working the
    base are included.


CLS 204/210
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 wherein a means for heat treating the base is
    included.


CLS 204/211
TXT Apparatus under subclass 206 including means to control the current
    supplied to the electrolytic device or to a device included or combined
    therewith.


CLS 204/212
TXT Electrolytic apparatus which is adapted to give the electrode a rotary
    motion of more than 180 degrees.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 199 and indented subclasses, for
    rotary work conveyors.


CLS 204/213
TXT Apparatus falling under subclass 212 in which the means to give the rotary
    motion is a barrel or other rotary receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 85+ for a sandblast machine having a tumbling
    barrel and subclasses 326+ for an abrading machine which involves a
    tumbling device.


CLS 204/214
TXT Apparatus under subclass 213 in which means are provided to swing or tilt
    the axis of the barrel or other rotary receptacle, usually to assist
    charging or discharging.


CLS 204/215
TXT Apparatus under subclass 212 in which the base is given an additional
    treatment before or after the electrolytic action.


CLS 204/216
TXT Apparatus under subclass 215 wherein stripping means are included.


CLS 204/217
TXT Apparatus under subclass 215 in which means are included to give the base a
    mechanical working.


CLS 204/218
TXT Apparatus under subclass 212 including control means for the current
    supplied to the electrolytic device or electrical control for operation of
    apparatus included or combined with said device.


CLS 204/219
TXT Electrolytic apparatus which includes means to move a liquid electrode.

    (1)     Note.  For other cells with liquid electrodes, see this class,
    subclasses 250 and 251.


CLS 204/220
TXT Apparatus under subclass 219 including means to recirculate the liquid
    electrode.


CLS 204/221
TXT Apparatus under subclass 219 including means to oscillate, reciprocate or
    agitate the liquid electrode.


CLS 204/222
TXT Electrolytic apparatus which provides means to oscillate, reciprocate or
    agitate the electrodes.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 221 for liquid electrodes having
    means to oscillate, reciprocate or agitate the electrodes.


CLS 204/223
TXT Apparatus under subclass 222 including control means for the current
    supplied to the electrolytic device, or electrical control for operation of
    apparatus included or combined with said device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    220-354 for miscellaneous systems for controlling the current and/or
    voltage in a single circuit.


CLS 204/224
TXT Electrolytic apparatus wherein means are provided to localize the areas to
    which electrolysis is applied.

    (1)     Note.  This group of patents include portable coating electrodes,
    cells and half-cells specialized for localized application of the
    electrolytic coat; however, the subclass is not limited thereto but
    includes stationary devices in which the electrode or electrodes alone are
    moved to localize electrolytic action.

    (2)     Note.  Compare with this class, subclass 271.


CLS 204/225
TXT Electrolytic apparatus wherein means are provided whereby an electrode may
    be fed to and/or withdrawn from the zone of electrolytic action and not
    falling within the subclasses above.


CLS 204/226
TXT Apparatus under subclass 225 in which the base is given an additional
    treatment before or after the electrolytic action.


CLS 204/227
TXT Apparatus under subclass 194 including an electrolytic cell and means to
    treat the base before or after the electrolytic action.

    (1)     Note.  Search also this class, subclasses 200, 203, 204, 207-210,
    215-217, and  226.


CLS 204/228
TXT Apparatus under subclass 194 including an electrolytic cell and means for
    controlling the supply of current to members of said cell.

    (1)     Note.  Search also this class, subclasses 204, 205, 211, 218, and
    223.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    220-354 for miscellaneous systems for controlling the current and/or
    voltage in a single circuit.


CLS 204/229
TXT Apparatus under subclass 228 which includes means to intercontrol the
    electrical current flow to the cell, in accordance with the fluid pressure,
    flow, or level to, through, or in the cell, or developed thereby.


CLS 204/230
TXT Apparatus under subclass 229 in which the fluid is a gas.


CLS 204/231
TXT Apparatus under subclass 228 in which the current control includes means to
    control the current to an auxiliary electrode.


CLS 204/232
TXT Apparatus under subclass 194 including an electrolytic cell and additional
    means to provide for chemical or physical treatment of the electrolyte
    outside the cell.


CLS 204/233
TXT Apparatus under subclass 232 in which the additional electrolyte treatment
    means includes a leacher, dissolver or extractor.


CLS 204/234
TXT Apparatus under subclass 233 including means to recirculate the electrolyte.

    (1)     Note.  Compare with this class, subclass 237 and indented
    subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  For electrolytic cells with means for agitating the
    electrolyte or material therein, see this class, subclasses 261 and 273.


CLS 204/235
TXT Apparatus under subclass 234 in which the additional electrolyte treatment
    means includes a filter.

    (1)     Note.  Compare with this class, subclasses 238 and 240.

    (2)     Note.  For electrolytic cells having filter means, see this class,
    subclasses 249, 264 and 276.


CLS 204/236
TXT Apparatus under subclass 234 in which the additional electrolyte treatment
    means includes a heater or cooler.

    (1)     Note.  Compare with this class, subclasses 239 and 241.

    (2)     Note.  For electrolytic cells having heating or cooling means, see
    this class, subclasses 262 and 274.


CLS 204/237
TXT Apparatus under subclass 232 in which the additional electrolyte treatment
    means includes means to recirculate the electrolyte.

    (1)     Note.  Search also this class, subclass 234 and indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  For electrolytic cells with means for agitating the
    electrolyte or material therein, see this class, subclasses 261 and 273.


CLS 204/238
TXT Apparatus under subclass 237 in which the additional electrolyte treatment
    means includes a filter.

    (1)     Note.  Search also this class, subclass 235.

    (2)     Note.  Compare with this class, subclass 240.

    (3)     Note.  For electrolytic cells having filter means, see this class,
    subclasses 249, 264 and 276.


CLS 204/239
TXT Apparatus under subclass 237 in which the additional electrolyte treatment
    means includes a heater or cooler.

    (1)     Note.  Search also this class, subclass 236.

    (2)     Note.  Compare with this class, subclass 241.

    (3)     Note.  For electrolytic cells having heating or cooling means, see
    this class, subclasses 262 and 274.


CLS 204/240
TXT Apparatus under subclass 232 in which the additional electrolyte treatment
    means includes a filter.

    (1)     Note.  Search also this class, subclasses 235 and 238.

    (2)     Note.  For electrolytic cells having filter means, see this class,
    subclasses 249, 264 and 276.


CLS 204/241
TXT Apparatus under subclass 232 in which the additional electrolyte treatment
    means includes a heater or cooler.

    (1)     Note.  Search also this class, subclasses 236 and 239.

    (2)     Note.  For electrolytic cells having heating or cooling means, see
    this class, subclasses 262 and 274.


CLS 204/242
TXT Electrolytic cells falling under subclass 194 specialized to carry out any
    of the processes of this class.

    (1)     Note.  For electrolytic cells for the production of or generation
    of electricity, see Class 429, Chemistry: Electrical Current Producing
    Apparatus, Product and Process.

    (2)     Note.  For electrolytic cells not constructed for use in carrying
    out the processes of this class and not falling within the class definition
    of Class 429, Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product
    and Process and Class 324, Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses
    425+, may be found in Class 361, Electricity:  Electrical Systems and
    Devices, wherein electrical systems and devices are provided, see
    subclasses 500+.


CLS 204/243
TXT Electrolytic cells under subclass 242 specialized for fused bath
    electrolysis.


CLS 204/244
TXT Electrolytic cells under subclass 243 consisting of two or more distinct
    cell units.

    (1)     Note.  For other plural unit cells, see this class, subclasses 253
    and 267 and indented subclasses.


CLS 204/245
TXT Electrolytic cells under subclass 243 provided with means to feed to or
    withdraw material from the cell chamber.

    (1)     Note.  For other cells with feeding and withdrawal means, see this
    class, subclasses 255-258, 263, 269, and 275 and indented subclasses.


CLS 204/246
TXT Electrolytic cells under subclass 245 provided with means to feed gaseous
    material to the cell chamber.

    (1)     Note.  For other cells with gas feeding means, see this class,
    subclasses 256, 258, 265, 270, and 277.


CLS 204/247
TXT Electrolytic cells under subclass 245 provided with means to withdraw a gas
    from the cell chamber.

    (1)     Note.  For other cells with gas withdrawing means see this class,
    subclasses 256, 258, 266, 270, and 278.


CLS 204/248
TXT Electrolytic cells under subclass 242 in which the current supply is
    provided by means of an internal battery.

    (1)     Note.  For object protection apparatus including electrolysis by
    internal battery action, see this class, subclass 197.


CLS 204/249
TXT Electrolytic cells under subclass 248 including a filter or a loose
    electrode material which may be in the form of a filter bed.


CLS 204/250
TXT Electrolytic cells under subclass 242 in which one of the electrodes of the
    cell is a liquid.

    (1)     Note.  For cells with moving liquid electrodes see this class,
    subclass 219 and indented subclasses.


CLS 204/251
TXT Electrolytic cells under subclass 250 in which the electrodes are separated
    by a diaphragm.

    (1)     Note. For other diaphragm-type cells, see this class, subclass 252
    and indented subclasses.


CLS 204/252
TXT Electrolytic cells under subclass 242 in which the electrodes are separated
    by a diaphragm.

    (1)     Note. For liquid electrode diaphragm type cells, see this class,
    subclass 251.

    (2)     Note. For electrodes with diaphragms, see this class, subclasses
    282 and 283.

    (3)     Note. For diaphragm elements, see this class, subclasses 295 and
    296.


CLS 204/253
TXT Electrolytic cells under subclass 252 consisting of two or more distinct
    units.

    (1)     Note. For other plural unit cells, see this class, subclasses 244
    and 267 and indented subclasses.


CLS 204/254
TXT Electrolytic cells under subclass 253 in which at least one of the units
    contains an electrode of the bi-polar type, i.e., one wherein an electrode
    bears one polarity with respect to a second electrode and a different
    polarity with respect to a third electrode.

    (1)     Note. For other bi-polar electrode cells, see this class, subclass
    268.


CLS 204/255
TXT Electrolytic cells under subclass 254 provided with means to feed to or
    withdraw material from the cell chamber.

    (1)     Note. For other cells with feeding or withdrawal means, see this
    class, subclasses 245, 257, 263, 269, and 275 and indented subclasses.


CLS 204/256
TXT Electrolytic cells under subclass 255 in which the material feed or
    withdrawn is a gas.

    (1)     Note. For other cells equipped with gas feeding or withdrawal
    means, see this class, subclasses 246, 247, 258, 265, 266, 270, 277, and
    278.


CLS 204/257
TXT Electrolytic cells under subclass 253 provided with means to feed or
    withdraw material from the cell chamber.

    (1)     Note. For other cells with feeding or withdrawal means, see this
    class, subclasses 245, 255, 263, 269, and 275 and indented subclasses.


CLS 204/258
TXT Electrolytic cells under subclass 257 in which the material fed or
    withdrawn is a gas.

    (1)     Note. For other cells with gas feeding or withdrawal means, see
    this class, subclasses 246, 247, 256, 265, 266, 270, 277, and 278.


CLS 204/259
TXT Electrolytic cells under subclass 252 in which at least one of the
    electrodes is in the form of a basket, or of a porous or foraminous
    container surrounding the other electrode or electrodes.


CLS 204/260
TXT Electrolytic cells under subclass 252 in which two or more of the
    electrodes are arranged concentrically one within the other.

    (1)     Note. For other cells with concentrically arranged electrodes, see
    this class, subclass 272.

    (2)     Note. Compare with this class, subclass 259.


CLS 204/261
TXT Electrolytic cells under subclass 252 provided with an agitator for the
    electrolyte or the material being treated.

    (1)     Note. For other cells provided with agitating means, see this
    class, subclass 273.

    (2)     Note. See this class, subclass 221, 222 and 223, for means for
    agitating the electrodes.


CLS 204/262
TXT Electrolytic cells under subclass 252 provided with a heating or cooling
    means.

    (1)     Note. For other cells with heating or cooling means, see this
    class, subclass 274.

    (2)     Note. See this class, subclasses 236, 239 and 241 for a heater or
    cooler for treatment of the electrolyte outside the cell.


CLS 204/263
TXT Electrolytic cells under subclass 252 provided with means to feed or
    withdraw material from the cell chamber.

    (1)     Note. For other cells with feeding or withdrawal means, see this
    class, subclasses 245, 255, 257, 269, and 275 and indented subclasses.


CLS 204/264
TXT Electrolytic cells under subclass 263 including a filter as part of the
    cell.

    (1)     Note. For cells with filters, see also this class, subclasses 249
    and 276.

    (2)     Note. See this class, subclasses 235, 238 and 240, for filters for
    the treatment of the electrolyte outside the cell.


CLS 204/265
TXT Electrolytic cells under subclass 263 provided with means to feed a gaseous
    material to the cell chamber.

    (1)     Note. For gas feeding means for cells, see also this class,
    subclasses 246, 256, 258, 270, and 277.


CLS 204/266
TXT Electrolytic cells under subclass 263 provided with means to withdraw a gas
    from the cell chamber.

    (1)     Note. For gas withdrawal means for cells, see also this class,
    subclasses 247, 256, 258, 270, and 278.


CLS 204/267
TXT Electrolytic cells under subclass 242 consisting of two or more distinct
    units.

    (1)     Note. For plural cells, see also this class, subclasses 244 and 253
    and indented subclasses.


CLS 204/268
TXT Electrolytic cells under subclass 267 in which at least one of the units
    contains an electrode of the bi-polar type, i.e., one wherein an electrode
    bears one polarity with respect to a second electrode and a different
    polarity with respect to a third electrode.

    (1)     Note. For bi-polar electrode type diaphragm cells, see this class,
    subclass 254 and indented subclasses.


CLS 204/269
TXT Electrolytic cells under subclass 267 in which means are provided to feed
    to and/or withdraw material from the cell chamber.

    (1)     Note. For other cells with feeding or withdrawal means, see this
    class, subclasses 245, 255, 257, 263, and 275 and their indented subclasses.


CLS 204/270
TXT Electrolytic cells under subclass 269 in which material fed or withdrawn is
    a gas.

    (1)     Note. For other cells with gas feeding or withdrawal means, see
    this class, subclasses 246, 247, 256, 258, 265, 266, 277, and 278.


CLS 204/271
TXT Electrolytic cells under subclass 242 which are peculiarly designed so as
    to be portable.

    (1)     Note. Compare with this class, subclass 224.


CLS 204/272
TXT Electrolytic cells under subclass 242 in which two or more of the
    electrodes are arranged concentrically one within the other.

    (1)     Note. Search also this class, subclass 260.


CLS 204/273
TXT Electrolytic cells under subclass 242 provided with an agitator for the
    electrolyte or the material being treated.

    (1)     Note. Search also this class, subclass 261.

    (2)     Note. For means for agitating electrodes, see this class,
    subclasses 221, 222 and 223.


CLS 204/274
TXT Electrolytic cells under subclass 242 provided with means for heating
    and/or cooling.

    (1)     Note. For diaphragm-type cells with heating or cooling means, see
    this class, subclass 262.

    (2)     Note. See this class, subclasses 236, 239 and 241, for a heater or
    cooler for treatment of the electrolyte outside the cell.

    (3)     Note. For fused bath cells with heating means, see this class,
    subclass 243 and indented subclasses.


CLS 204/275
TXT Electrolytic cells under subclass 242 provided with means to feed and/or
    withdraw material from the cell chamber.

    (1)     Note. Search also this class, subclass 245, 255, 257, 263, and 269
    and their indented subclasses.


CLS 204/276
TXT Electrolytic cells under subclass 275 provided with a filter.

    (1)     Note. Search also this class, subclasses 249 and 264.

    (2)     Note. See this class, subclasses 235, 238 and 240, for filters for
    treatment of the electrolyte outside the cell.


CLS 204/277
TXT Electrolytic cells under subclass 275 provided with means to feed a gas to
    the cell chamber.

    (1)     Note. Search also this class, subclasses 246, 256, 258, 265, and
    270.


CLS 204/278
TXT Electrolytic cells under subclass 275 provided with means to withdraw a gas
    from the cell chamber.

    (1)     Note. Search also this class, subclasses 247, 256, 258, 266, and
    270.


CLS 204/279
TXT Elements specialized for carrying out any of the electrolytic processes
    provided for in this class which are not provided for in outside classes or
    below.


CLS 204/280
TXT Apparatus under subclass 279 consisting of electrodes useful for carrying
    out the processes herein provided for and combinations of such electrodes
    with other elements not provided for in any foregoing group of patents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400     through 435, for testing electrodes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 327 for self-baking
    electrodes such as, for example, the Soederberg electrodes, which are not
    limited to use in electrolysis, but can be used, for example, in arc
    furnaces.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, main class definition,
    section VI, C, 4, for the lines determining the classification of
    electrodes and "nominal" electrodes.

    429,    Chemistry: Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product and
    Process, subclasses 40+ for fuel cell catalytic electrodes, and 209+ for
    electrodes specialized for that class.


CLS 204/281
TXT Electrodes, generally known as electroforming molds or strip plates,
    constructed or modified to facilitate formation of temporary coatings
    thereon and from which the coating or deposit is to be stripped or
    otherwise removed.


CLS 204/282
TXT Electrodes claimed in combination with electrolytic diaphragms.

    (1)     Note. For diaphragms, per se, see this class, subclasses 295 and
    296.


CLS 204/283
TXT Electrode combinations under subclass 282 in which the electrode is
    perforated or foraminous. Such perforated or foraminous electrodes may
    operate as supports or containers for the work or material being subjected
    to electrolytic action.

    (1)     Note. For other work supports or containers, see this class,
    subclasses 285 and 287.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 596+ for
    apertured metallic stock material.


CLS 204/284
TXT Electrodes under subclass 280 which are perforated or foraminous.

    (1)     Note. Search this class, subclass 283 for perforated or foraminous
    electrodes combined with diaphragms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 596+ for
    apertured metallic stock material.


CLS 204/285
TXT Electrodes under subclass 284 constructed so as to constitute holders for
    the material or article being subjected to electrolytic treatment.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclasses 283 and 287 for other electrodes
    with work supports or containers.


CLS 204/286
TXT Electrodes under subclass 280 provided with means to support the electrode
    within the electrolytic cell chamber.

    (1)     Note. For supports or work holders, per se, see this class,
    subclass 297.

    (2)     Note. For movable electrode supports, see this class, subclasses
    198-226.


CLS 204/287
TXT Electrodes under subclass 286 in which the support is in the form of a
    container holding the work or material treated wherein the container does
    not act as an electrode.

    (1)     Note. See this class, subclasses 283 and 285, for other electrodes
    with work supports or containers.


CLS 204/288
TXT Electrodes under subclass 286 wherein the active portion of the electrode
    comprises two or more lateral extensions.


CLS 204/289
TXT Electrodes under subclass 280 wherein the active portion of the electrode
    comprises two or more lateral extensions.

    (1)     Note. Search also this class, subclass 288.


CLS 204/290
TXT Electrodes under subclass 280 which are laminated or coated.

    (1)     Note. Search also this class, subclass 281, for coated or laminated
    electroforming molds or strip plates.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 58+ for processes of producing
    electrical products by a coating operation.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 375+ for a
    rod, strand, fiber or filament which is structurally defined or is coated
    and subclasses 411.1+ and 615+ for nonmetallic and metallic composites,
    respectively, defined in terms of the composition of their components.


CLS 204/291
TXT Electrodes under subclass 280 in which are defined merely by the
    composition of which they are composed.

    (1)     Note.  In the event any specific structure is included together
    with a special composition, the patent is placed in the appropriate
    structure subclass above (or if the structure is not provided for
    specifically, in subclass 280, and cross-referenced here).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 500+ for compositions specialized for use
    as electrodes and electrode devices defined solely in terms of the
    composition of which they are composed which electrodes are useful in
    electric lamps and electric space discharge devices, and as welding
    electrodes and furnace electrodes.


CLS 204/292
TXT Electrode compositions under subclass 291 in which a metal in the free or
    uncombined state comprises one of the essential ingredients of the
    composition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 544+ for stock
    materials, e.g., of indefinite length, which are all metal or have adjacent
    metal components.


CLS 204/293
TXT Electrodes under subclass 292 in which an alloy comprises an essential
    ingredient of the composition. Steel or other metal containing alloys or
    carbon, silicon and other nonmetallic elements are here included as
    metallic alloys.


CLS 204/294
TXT Electrodes under subclass 291 in which carbon comprises one of the
    essential ingredients.

    (1)     Note. For carbon metal alloys, steel and the like, see this class,
    subclass 293.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclass 244 for a composition having a continuous phase of free
    metal made by consolidating metal particles and containing a carbide
    compound of more than one metal.


CLS 204/295
TXT Apparatus under subclass 279 in which the element is a diaphragm
    constructed for the performance of any of the electrolytic processes of
    this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 500.21 (2) Note for the
    lines between this class (204) and other classes with respect to membranes
    defined by composition.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product and
    Process, subclasses 248+ for diaphragms specialized for batteries.


CLS 204/296
TXT Electrolytic diaphragms under subclass 295 comprising as an essential part
    thereof an organic member, compound or composition.


CLS 204/297
TXT Apparatus under subclass 279 in which the element is an electrode support
    or a workholder specialized for use in electrolytic processes of this class.

    (1)     Note. For specific electrodes combined with supports or
    workholders, see this class, subclasses 285 and 286 and indented subclasses.


CLS 204/298.01
TXT Coating, forming or etching by sputtering:
    Apparatus under subclass 193 specialized for coating, forming, or etching
    by sputtering within a vacuum environment (i.e., under reduced pressure)
    involving bombarding a solid or liquid target with atomic particles to
    cause target material to be ejected therefrom by momentum transfer.


CLS 204/298.02
TXT Coating:
    Apparatus under subclass 298.01 including means for the deposition of a
    coating material on a workpiece (i.e., substrate).

    (1)     Note.  The coating material is usually comprised of material
    ejected from the target.


CLS 204/298.03
TXT Measuring, analyzing or testing:
    Apparatus under subclass 298.02 including means for measuring, analyzing or
    testing at least one process parameter or product characteristic.


CLS 204/298.04
TXT Ion beam sputter deposition:
    Apparatus under subclass 298.02 wherein a beam of ions generated by a
    separate ion source remote from the target is employed to sputter material
    from the target so that a coating of target material is deposited on a
    workpiece.


CLS 204/298.05
TXT Ion plating:
    Apparatus under subclass 298.02 additionally including means for ionizing
    at least a portion of the evaporated coated material and for applying a
    potential to the workpiece, whereby the workpiece is simultaneously
    subjected to electrostatically aided deposition and sputter etching due to
    ionic bombardment.

    (1)     Note.  In ion plating apparatus the workpiece serves as a target
    which is sputter etched.

    (2)     Note.  The potential applied to the workpiece is usually negative.


CLS 204/298.06
TXT Triode, tetrode, auxiliary electrode or biased workpiece:
    Apparatus under subclass 298.02 including electrode means (e.g., thermionic
    filament, screen grid, auxiliary electrode, etc.) in addition to an anode
    and a cathode, or including workpiece biasing means.


CLS 204/298.07
TXT Specified gas feed or withdrawal:
    Apparatus under subclass 298.02 including significant specified means for
    feeding or withdrawing reactive or inert gases from the coating chamber.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus in which gas feed or withdrawal means are merely
    nominally specified are not included herein.


CLS 204/298.08
TXT Specified power supply or matching network:
    Apparatus under subclass 298.02 including significant specified power
    supply means or matching network means.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus in which power supply means or matching network
    means are merely nominally specified are not included herein.


CLS 204/298.09
TXT Specified cooling or heating:
    Apparatus under subclass 298.02 including significant specified means for
    cooling or heating of an electrode or work holder.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus in which cooling or heating means are merely
    nominally specified are not included herein.


CLS 204/298.11
TXT Specified mask, shield or shutter:
    Apparatus under subclass 298.02 including significant specified means for
    masking, shielding or shuttering of electrodes or workpieces.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus in which masking, shielding or shuttering means
    are merely nominally specified are not included herein.


CLS 204/298.12
TXT Specified target particulars:
    Apparatus under subclass 298.02 wherein a significant target feature or
    particular target construction is specified.

    (1)     Note.  The target usually forms a part of or is associated with a
    cathode electrode.


CLS 204/298.13
TXT Target composition:
    Apparatus under subclass 298.12 wherein the composition of the target is
    specified.


CLS 204/298.14
TXT Specified anode particulars:
    Apparatus under subclass 298.02 wherein a significant anode feature or
    particular anode construction is specified.


CLS 204/298.15
TXT Specified work holder:
    Apparatus under subclass 298.02 including significant specified means for
    holding a workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus in which work holder means are merely nominally
    specified are not included herein.


CLS 204/298.16
TXT Magnetically enhanced:
    Apparatus under subclass 298.02 including significant means for magnetic
    enhancement of target sputtering, plasma shaping or confinement, or control
    of deposition parameters or deposit characteristics.

    (1)     Note.  The means for magnetic enhancement may be either inside or
    outside the chamber utilized in creating the vacuum.

    (2)     Note.  Apparatus in which magnetic means are merely nominally
    specified are not included herein.


CLS 204/298.17
TXT Flux passes through target surface:
    Apparatus under subclass 298.16 including means to allow the flux to pass
    through a target surface.


CLS 204/298.18
TXT Focusing target (e.g., conical target, plural inclined targets,
    etc.):Apparatus under subclass 298.17 including a magnetically enhanced
    sputtering target surface of conical or other particle flux focusing
    geometry.


CLS 204/298.19
TXT Planar magnetron:
    Apparatus under subclass 298.17 including a magnetically enhanced generally
    flat planar sputtering target surface wherein lines of magnetic flux emerge
    from and return to the flat planar sputtering target surface.


CLS 204/298.2
TXT Moving magnetic field or target:
    Apparatus under subclass 298.19 including means for mechanically moving or
    electrically shifting the magnetic enhancement means or lines of magnetic
    flux, or the sputtering surface, relative to each other.


CLS 204/298.21
TXT Cylindrical or curved magnetron target:
    Apparatus under subclass 298.17 including a magnetically enhanced curved
    sputtering target surface which may be of cylindrical geometry.

    (1)     Note.  Cylindrical Sputtering targets may be solid or hollow and,
    if hollow, sputtering may be from either the inside or outside surface.


CLS 204/298.22
TXT Moving magnetic field or target:
    Apparatus under subclass 298.21 including means for mechanically moving or
    electrically shifting the magnetic enhancement means or lines of magnetic
    flux, or the sputtering surface, relative to each other.


CLS 204/298.23
TXT Moving workpiece or target:
    Apparatus under subclass 298.02 including means for moving the target or
    workpiece relative to each other.


CLS 204/298.24
TXT Indeterminate length moving workpiece:
    Apparatus under subclass 298.23 including means for moving an elongated
    workpiece of indeterminate length.


CLS 204/298.25
TXT Multi-chamber (e.g., including air lock, load/unload chamber,
    etc.):Apparatus under subclass 298.23 including a plurality of distinct
    chambers or subchambers (e.g., air lock, loading or unloading chamber,
    plural diverse treatment chambers, etc.) and means for moving at least one
    workpiece through the plurality of chambers or subchambers.


CLS 204/298.26
TXT Plural diverse treatment stations, zones, or coating material source within
    single chamber:Apparatus under subclass 298.23 including plural diverse
    treatment stations or zones (e.g., plural sputter coating stations, sputter
    coating and etching stations, or sputter coating and other pre-treatment or
    post-treatment stations, etc.) within a single chamber and means for moving
    at least one workpiece through the plurality of stations or zones.


CLS 204/298.27
TXT Plural modes of movement (e.g., planetary, epicyclic, etc.):Apparatus under
    subclass 298.23 including means for moving the target or workpiece in
    plural modes (e.g., directions), such as planetary or epicyclic motion.


CLS 204/298.28
TXT Rotational movement:
    Apparatus under subclass 298.23 including means for rotating the target or
    workpiece.


CLS 204/298.29
TXT Oscillatory movement:
    Apparatus under subclass 298.23 including means for oscillating the target
    or workpiece.


CLS 204/298.31
TXT Etching:
    Apparatus under subclass 298.01 including means for the removal of material
    from a workpiece (i.e., substrate) by subjecting it to bombardment by
    atomic particles (e.g., ions), whereby the activation energy of material
    removal is supplied at least in part by momentum transfer.


CLS 204/298.32
TXT Measuring, analyzing or testing:
    Apparatus under subclass 298.31 including means for measuring, analyzing or
    testing at least one process parameter or product characteristic (e.g.,
    end-point determination, etc.).


CLS 204/298.33
TXT Specified gas feed or withdrawal:
    Apparatus under subclass 298.31 including significant specified means for
    feeding or withdrawing reactive or inert gases from the etching chamber.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus in which gas feed or withdrawal means are merely
    nominally specified are not included herein.


CLS 204/298.34
TXT Auxiliary electrode, bias means or specified power supply:
    Apparatus under subclass 298.31 including electrode means in addition to an
    anode and cathode (e.g., auxiliary electrode, etc.), workpiece biasing
    means, or significant specified power supply means.


CLS 204/298.35
TXT Multi-chamber, load/unload means or moving workpiece:
    Apparatus under subclass 298.31 including a plurality of distinct chambers
    or subchambers, means for loading or unloading a workpiece, or means for
    moving a workpiece.


CLS 204/298.36
TXT Beam or directed flux etching (e.g., ion beam, etc.):
    Apparatus under subclass 298.31 including means for sputter etching or ion
    milling a workpiece utilizing a beam of ions or directed flux generated
    from a separate ion source.


CLS 204/298.37
TXT Magnetically enhanced:
    Apparatus under subclass 298.31 including means for magnetic enhancement of
    workpiece sputtering, plasma shaping or confinement, or control of etching
    parameters.


CLS 204/298.38
TXT Microwave excitation:
    Apparatus under subclass 298.31 including means for generating plasma by
    excitation from a source of microwaves.


CLS 204/298.39
TXT Plural parallel plates (e.g., desmearing reactor, etc.):
    Apparatus under subclass 298.31 including a plurality of spaced apart,
    parallel electrode plates or workpiece holders (e.g., desmearing reactor,
    etc.).


CLS 204/298.41
TXT Vacuum arc discharge coating:
    Apparatus under subclass 193 for coating a workpiece within a vacuum
    environment by the action of an arc discharge between an anode and a
    cathode wherein the source of coating material forms or is associated with
    the cathode.

    (1)     Note.  The apparatus generally includes means for generating and
    moving one or more cathode spots across the surface of the coating source
    thereby vaporizing the coating material.


CLS 204/400
TXT Analysis and testing:

    Apparatus under subclass 194 for utilizing electrolytic action for analysis
    or testing where the testing device is claimed, per se.

    (1)     Note.  Combinations of electrochemical testing devices with the
    systems in which they may be employed will be placed with the combination
    class and cross-referenced here, if necessary.

    (2)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses include reference or
    testing electrodes, cells or half cells, either, per se, or in nominal
    combination with a broadly recited test circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 62.2 for the composition of electrolytes for
    electrical condensers and recitifiers, some of which electrolytes are
    useful for analysis and testing.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 414+ for such devices used as sensors (e.g., chemical sensors).

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 323+ for the
    testing of underground formations by electrolytic methods as, for example,
    the testing of an oil well bore for water strata, and subclasses 425+ for
    the subject matter of this subclass in combination with significant
    electrical testing circuits.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 50+ for analytical chemical
    apparatus including means for carrying out nonelectrochemical analysis and
    for apparatus for carrying out a combined chemical and electrochemical
    procedure.


CLS 204/401
TXT Fault testing of sensor or component:

    Apparatus under subclass 400 including means for detecting the nonoperative
    condition of the electrochemical testing device or apparatus associated
    with it.


CLS 204/402
TXT Regeneration or activation:

    Apparatus under subclass 400 which includes means for restoring the
    function of a spent or contaminated sensor part, or means for activating an
    electrochemical sensor for the performance of a test.


CLS 204/403
TXT Biological, e.g., microbe, enzyme, antigen, etc.:

    Apparatus under subclass 400 which includes a biological material, or is
    adapted to measure electrolytically some property of a biological material.

    (1)     Note. This subclass is intended to provide for the use in an
    electrolytic measurement of a micro-organism, enzyme, antigen or antibody
    when such process is not provided for in another superior class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, for apparatus used in the inspection and treatment of
    diseases of the bodies of men and animals which apparatus is provided with
    means for connection with the living body.

    435,    Chemistry: Molecular Biology and Microbiology, for an apparatus for
    separately measuring or testing an electrical or wave energy property,
    which property exists in combination with a system wherein (a) a
    microorganism is cultured or present or (b) an enzyme functions
    catalytically (e.g., a fermentor in combination with a pH electrode).


CLS 204/404
TXT Corrosion:

    Apparatus under subclass 400 for electrolytically testing the corrosion
    resistance of materials or the effect of corrosive or corrosion inhibiting
    materials.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, particularly subclasses 61.2 and 104 for
    methods of physical determination of corrosive properties.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 53 for apparatus for chemically
    investigating corrosion resistance or power.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclass 6 for
    processes of chemically testing corrosion resistance or power.


CLS 204/405
TXT Titration:

    Apparatus under subclass 400 which is designed for or combined with means
    for conducting an electrolytic titration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 50 for integrated analyzers which may
    include nominal electrode structure in a titration device.


CLS 204/406
TXT With significant electrical circuitry or nominal computer device:

    Apparatus under subclass 400 in which the measuring electrode is operable
    connected to a claimed arrangement of electrical elements or is claimed as
    connected to a computer.

    (1)     Note. This subclass is intended to provide for documents which
    claim an electrochemical sensor in combination with a circuit other than a
    mere recital of a current or potential measuring means, i.e., claim
    language like "analysis means for measuring an electrical potential
    developed" is not provided for here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 496+
    for an electrode absent significant structure in combinatin with a data
    processing system or calculating computer.


CLS 204/407
TXT With significant display or analytical device:

    Apparatus under subclass 400 in which the electrical signal produced by the
    measuring electrode is claimed as driving a device which produces a visible
    or audible signal or an analytical device.

    (1)     Note. This subclass is intended to provide for display devices of
    claimed structure, i.e., with indicating scales, particular arrangements of
    display lights, etc., and is not intended to provide for a nominal display
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus for testing an electrical property or condition even though the
    results of the test may be used to indicate some other physical or chemical
    property or condition.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 50 for analyzers or structured
    indicators for quantitative or qualitative chemical analysis.


CLS 204/408
TXT With means for temperature or pressure compensation:

    Apparatus under subclass 400 including means for compensating for the
    physical or electrical effects of temperature or pressure on the apparatus.

    (1)     Note. The compensation may be a separate measurement of temperature
    or pressure which is used to produce a signal representing the effect of
    temperature or pressure or may be in the physical design of the measuring
    electrode or associated apparatus.


CLS 204/409
TXT With means providing specified flow-condition or flow-path:

    Apparatus under subclass 400 which is designed to provide a particular
    flow-path through or around an electrode surface or to promote a particular
    type of flow over the electrode surface.

    (1)     Note.This and the indented subclass are intended to provide for
    apparatus in which the fluid to be analyzed flows in a labyrinthine manner,
    or a series of treatement stations or apparatus claimed or disclosed as
    providing a particular flow state at the electrode surface, e.g., laminar
    flow, turbulent flow, etc.


CLS 204/410
TXT Solid electrolyte means:

    Apparatus under subclass 409 which incorporates a solid electrolyte.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    421+,   for apparatus incorporating one or two electrodes with a solid
    electrolyte.


CLS 204/411
TXT Three or more electrodes:

    Apparatus under subclass 409 which contains an arrangement of three or more
    electrodes.


CLS 204/412
TXT Three or more electrodes:

    Apparatus under subclass 400 in which there are three or more electrodes.

    (1)     Note. This subclass is intended to provide for arrangements of
    several physically indentical electrolytic cells.


CLS 204/413
TXT Liquid electrodes, e.g., Hg, Na, etc.:

    Apparatus under subclass 400 in which at least one electrode is a liquid.

    (1)     Note. The electrodes included herein are typically liquid metals
    particularly sodium or mercury.


CLS 204/414
TXT Gel electrolyte:

    Apparatus under subclass 400 in which the electrolyte is a gel.

    (1)     Note.  A gel is a colloidal solution of a liquid in a
    solid.Typically the gels herein are hydrogels, i.e., a solid colloidal
    solution in water.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 315.01+ for gel compositions, per se.


CLS 204/415
TXT Selectively permeable membrane:

    Apparatus under subclass 400 in which a constituent of the fluid being
    treated diffuses through a material which acts as a barrier to other
    constituents of the fluid permitting only the selected constituent to
    contract the electrode surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    416+,   for electrodes which are themselves selective as to ionic species.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 644 for processes of
    use of selectively permeable membranes.


CLS 204/416
TXT Ion-sensitive electrode:

    Apparatus under subclass 400 which incorporates means which permit only
    desired ionic species to participate in the electrochemical reaction in a
    sensing electrode.

    (1)     Note. Ion-sensitive membranes include:

    (a)     compressed bodies of inorganic salts.

    (b)     monocrystals of such salts.

    (c)     fine powders of such salts embedded in a resin or glass.

    (d)     porous bodies with an adsorbed solution of an ion-exchanger
    solution.


CLS 204/417
TXT Liquid ion-exchanger:

    Apparatus under subclass 416 in which the ion-exchange medium is a liquid.


CLS 204/418
TXT Organic membrane:

    Apparatus under subclass 416 in which the ion-selective membrane is organic.

    (1)     Note.  Organic compounds are compounds containing carbon which are
    further characterized by the presence of two carbon atoms bonded together
    or one atom of carbon bonded to at least one atom of hydrogen or halogen or
    one atom of carbon bonded to one atom of nitrogen by a single or double
    bond.

    (2)     Note.  Typically the patents herein include a resin matrix plus an
    ion exchange material, e.g., an organic metal salt, metal salt or metal
    ion, etc.


CLS 204/419
TXT Inorganic membrane:

    Apparatus under subclass 416 in which the ion-selective membrane is
    inorganic.


CLS 204/420
TXT Glass ion-selective membrane:

    Apparatus under subclass 419 in which the inorganic ion-selective membrane
    is glass.


CLS 204/421
TXT Solid electrolyte:

    Apparatus under subclass 400 which incorporates a solid electrolyte.


CLS 204/422
TXT Liquid sample sensor:

    Apparatus under subclass 421 which is adapted to be used for the analysis
    or testing of a liquid sample.

    (1)     Note.  Liquid includes molten metals.


CLS 204/423
TXT With fugitive protective element:

    Apparatus under subclass 422 in which part of the sensor is designed to
    protect the remainder from environmental damage and having served this
    function is designed to decompose leaving the sensor element in contact
    with the liquid sample.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass includes a cap or plug
    of resinous or resin containing material which is melted by the liquid
    sample.


CLS 204/424
TXT Gas sample sensor:

    Apparatus under subclass 421 in which the primary component of the sample
    is gaseous.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes solid electrolyte gas sensors in
    which the partial pressure of the reference gas is provided by a solid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    422,    for apparatus sensin dissolved gas in a liquid sample.


CLS 204/425
TXT With impressed current means:

    Apparatus under subclass 424 in which a current is impressed on the sensor
    by means other than interaction with the sample or reference material.

    (1)     Note. The impressed current can be for the electrolytic generation
    of a reference gas.


CLS 204/426
TXT Planar electrode surface:

    Apparatus under subclass 424 in which the sensing element is generally flat.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes electrodes in which the sensing
    element is a flat disk.


CLS 204/427
TXT With gas reference material:

    Apparatus under subclass 424 having a solid electrolyte with electrode
    films attached to the sides which are in turn in contact with a gas sample
    and a reference gas.

    (1)     Note.  Oxygen sensor for control of air/fuel ratio in internal
    combustion engines are included herein.

    (2)     Note.  The reference gas is usually provided by an opening to admit
    atmospheric air.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    424,    for gas sensors in which the reference material is a solid material
    which produces the partical pressure as a reference standard.


CLS 204/428
TXT With protective element:

    Apparatus under subclass 427 in which part of the sensor assembly to shield
    the remainder from the deleterious chemical or physical effects of the
    sample or atmospheric gas.

    (1)     Note.  The protective element is typically a screen or perforate or
    slotted solid member but may also be an ablative material.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes protective elements for the sensor,
    e.g., caps for the sensor end, as well as protective elements at the
    reference end, e.g., filters in the reference gas entryway, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    425,    for fugitive protective elements for solid electrolyte containing
    sensors.


CLS 204/429
TXT Protective element is a layer:

    Apparatus under subclass 428 in which the protective element is an adherent
    layer on the surface of the sensor assembly.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass would include a layer of material impregnated
    with a getter for catalyst poisons.


CLS 204/430
TXT Moisture absorbing electrolyte:

    Apparatus under subclass 400 in which the electrolyte of the sensor absorbs
    water.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 75 for moisture determination by
    electrical or thermal conductivity.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 44 for
    control of the humidity of an area and subclass 44 for use of an
    electrically conductive element.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 34+, for moisture absorbing
    resistors.


CLS 204/431
TXT Gas sensing electrode:

    Apparatus under subclass 400 which detects the presence quantity or
    identity of a gas.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for trace gas detectors, detecting
    for example, oxygen, sulfur dioxide, carbon monoxide or hydrogen sulfide by
    means of a liquid electrolyte since solid electrolytes are provided for
    above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    421+,   particularly 424 for a solid electrolyte electrode for gas analysis.


CLS 204/432
TXT With gas diffusion electrode:

    Apparatus under subclass 431 in which a gas diffuses through part of an
    electrode.


CLS 204/433
TXT Measuring carbon content or pH:

    Apparatus under subclass 400 for the measurement of the quality of carbon
    in a fluid or for the measurement of the hydrogen ion content of a fluid.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for apparatus for monitoring the
    carbon content of liquid sodium reactor coolant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    423,    for apparatus utilizing a solid electrolyte and a fugitive
    protective element of analysis of liquid metal compositions.


CLS 204/434
TXT Involving plating, coating or stripping:

    Apparatus under subclass 400 including means for electrolytically applying
    or removing a layer of material in the performance of a test or analysis.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for anodic stripping voltametric
    apparatus in which a minute amount of material is tested for by
    electrochemically depositing and subsequently stripping a material on an
    electrode.

    (2)     Note.  Further examples of the subject matter included herein is
    apparatus for trace metal detection, coating thickness determination,
    analytical electroplating and test plating.


CLS 204/435
TXT Standard reference electrode:

    Apparatus under subclass 400 including means for producing a precise and
    reproducible reference potential.

    (1)     Note.  As no attempt has been made to cross-reference all apparatus
    in which a reference cell is present, if such a cell is claimed in
    combination with features provided for in a preceding subclass a search of
    that subclass is generally indicated.


CLS 204/450
TXT Electrophoresis or electro-osmosis processes and electrolyte compositions
    therefor when not provided for elsewhere:

    Subject matter under the class definition drawn to (a) processes involving
    (1) the travel, transport, or relative movement of one or more particles or
    components in a conducting liquid or fluent material, other than a gas,
    under a net unidirectional electric stress or (2) the movement of a liquid
    inside the capillary spaces of a solid (e.g., membrane, etc.) under the
    influence of an electric field or (b) electrolyte compositions specialized
    for use in a process under (a) when not provided for elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  For the purpose of Class 204, "electrophoresis" is
    restricted to situations where the liquid or fluentmaterial is electrically
    conductive and wherein there is at least one electrolytic phenomenon (e.g.,
    electrode gas formation, etc.) inherently or otherwise taking place
    simultaneously with electromigration of the particles or components.

    (2)     Note.  In electrophoresis, the moved particles or components
    usually are electrically charged.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    554+,   for electrical separation or purification of liquid not involving
    electrolysis, electrophoresis, or electro-osmosis.

    600+,   for corresponding electrophoretic or electro-osmotic apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, appropriate subclasses for electrolytic
    processes.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, for various types of electrical
    communications systems and methods not provided for in other classes.

    356,    Optics: Measuring and Testing, subclass 344 for processes of
    testing the change in refractive index of a fluid in an electrophoresis
    cell and the apparatus therefor and subclasses 128+ for refraction testing
    processes and apparatus therefor.

    358,    Facsimile, for pictorial communication systems and methods.

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, for optical
    elements and systems not provided for in other classes.

    399,    Electrophotography, for electrophotographic processes and
    apparatus.


CLS 204/451
TXT Capillary electrophoresis:

    Process under subclass 450 involving electromigration of particles or
    components in a conducting liquid or fluent material inside a tube with an
    inside diameter less than 1 mm.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this subclass and the subclasses
    indented hereunder, use of a "capillary" or very small tube of undisclosed
    inside diameter is presumed to be small enough.


CLS 204/452
TXT With detailed detection:

    Process under subclass 451 which includes the use of a detection system
    recited in more detail than mere nominal mention.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is not intended to provide for the mere use of
    plotters or other recording devices unless combined with at least one
    detailed detector element or device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    461,    for gel electrophoresis with analysis or detailed detection, but
    without using a capillary.


CLS 204/453
TXT With injection:

    Process under subclass 451 in which material to be treated or tested is
    injected into the capillary, usually by electro-osmotic bulk flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    454,    for capillary electrophoresis with adjustment or alteration of
    electro-osmotic bulk flow.


CLS 204/454
TXT With adjustment or alteration of electro-osmotic bulk flow:

    Process under subclass 451 which provides for adjustment or alteration of
    continuous phase buffer liquid movement within the capillary.

    (1)     Note.  Reduction or reversal of electro-osmotic bulk flow with
    respect to the direction of electrophoretic movement of suspended particles
    or components is used to enhance separation therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    453,    for capillary electrophoresis with injection by electro-osmotic
    bulk flow of material to be treated or tested.


CLS 204/455
TXT Using gel-filled capillary:

    Process under subclass 451 in which the inside of the capillary tube is
    filled with a jellylike colloidal solution of liquid in a solid (usually
    organic).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is not intended to provide for the use of a
    capillary filled with an inorganic solid (e.g., silica gel, etc.) which is
    not present as a jellylike colloidal solution of a liquid in the inorganic
    solid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    456+,   for gel electrophoresis without using a capillary.


CLS 204/456
TXT Gel electrophoresis:

    Process under subclass 450 in which particles or components migrate in an
    electric field within a continuous medium of a jellylike colloidal solution
    of liquid in a solid (usually organic).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder are not
    intended to provide for the use of a continuous medium of an inorganic
    solid (e.g., silica gel, etc.) which is not present as a jellylike
    colloidal solution of a liquid in the inorganic solid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    455,    for organic gel electrophoresis using a capillary filled with an
    organic gel.


CLS 204/457
TXT With programmed, cyclic, or time responsive control:

    Process under subclass 456 which involves (a) storing coded instructions or
    other data which are used to regulate the process, (b) repetitively
    regulating a sequence of process steps, or (c) regulating the process
    according to preset timing sequences (e.g., limiting various process steps
    to predetermined durations of time, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and the subclass indented hereunder includes
    any control which maintains an operating condition, predetermines apparatus
    operation, or regulates repetition.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass and the subclass indented hereunder is not
    intended to provide for the mere use of alternating current (AC), per se.


CLS 204/458
TXT Plural rapid changes in direction of electric field (at least 1000 times
    total and at more than 1/sec) (e.g., pulsed field, etc.):

    Process under subclass 457 in which the electric field changes direction
    more than 1000 times in rapid succession (more than one change per second),
    usually using more than 2 electrodes with synchronized timing of voltage
    spikes or peaks.


CLS 204/459
TXT Isoelectric focusing (i.e., using pH variation):

    Process under subclass 456 in which a differential pH gradient is
    established in the medium to affect the migration of individual particles
    or components based on their different isoelectric points (the different pH
    values at which the net charge on each particle or component is neutral).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    548,    for isoelectric focusing without using a gel.


CLS 204/461
TXT With analysis or detailed detection:

    Process under subclass 456 which includes analysis or the use of a
    detection system recited in more detail than mere nominal mention.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is not intended to provide for the mere use of
    plotters or other recording devices unless combined with at least one
    detailed detector element or device or when clearly used in a process of
    analysis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    452,    for capillary electrophoresis with detailed detection.


CLS 204/462
TXT With posttreatment of gel to purify or recover a desired component:

    Process under subclass 456 in which the gel is subsequently treated to
    purify or recover a desired component.


CLS 204/463
TXT Destaining:

    Process under subclass 462 in which the posttreatment involves removal of a
    colored component, usually present as an undesired impurity which masks the
    desired separation of components.


CLS 204/464
TXT Blotting:

    Process under subclass 462 in which one or more desired separated
    components are transferred from the gel to an adjacent receiving medium
    (e.g., membrane, sorbent, another gel, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  The transfer may be assisted by an external force (e.g.,
    hydraulic pressure, electric field, etc.).


CLS 204/465
TXT Preparation in unitary apparatus (e.g., preparative, etc.):

    Process under subclass 456 which is conducted to yield a separated product
    in final form (e.g., ready for analysis, etc.) using a single piece of
    apparatus, usually precluding the need for subsequent treatment or transfer
    of separated species.

    (1)     Note.  The preparative nature of gel electrophoresis or an
    apparatus used therein must be specifically recited for placement in this
    subclass.


CLS 204/466
TXT Using slab gel:

    Process under subclass 456 in which the gel is planar in form (e.g., as a
    rectangular sheet, etc.).


CLS 204/467
TXT Vertical or inclined:

    Process under subclass 466 in which the slab is in an upright position or
    is tipped up during use (e.g., vertical slab, etc.).


CLS 204/468
TXT Electrolyte composition:

    Subject matter under subclass 456 drawn to (a) electrolyte compositions or
    (b) processes of gel electrophoresis using an electrolyte of specified
    composition.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is not intended to provide for the use of
    merely an "aqueous" buffer solution electrolyte unless further detail of
    the electrolyte composition is recited.


CLS 204/469
TXT Gel composition (other than simple agarose or polyacrylamide):

    Subject matter under subclass 456 drawn to (a) gel compositions (other than
    simple agarose or polyacrylamide) or (b) processes of gel electrophoresis
    using a gel of specified composition (other than simple agarose or
    polyacrylamide).

    (1)     Note.  The gel may contain a combination of agarose or
    polyacrylamide with another specified component but must not be comprised
    of only agarose or polyacrylamide as the only specified components.


CLS 204/470
TXT Including manufacture or preparation (e.g., molding, gelation, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 469 which includes one or more steps of gel
    manufacture or preparation (e.g., molding, gelation, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    521,    for electrophoretic or electro-osmostic ion selective barrier
    separation combined with manufacture or pretreatment of the barrier.


CLS 204/471
TXT Coating or forming of object:

    Process under subclass 450 directed to the coating of a substrate or the
    formation of an object by electrophoresis or electro-osmosis.

    (1)     Note.  Electrophoretic forming processes are defined herein as an
    electrophoretic coating process wherein the coated layer is subsequently
    removed from the coated substrate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    192.1+, for processes of coating or forming by sputtering.

    622+,   for corresponding apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, especially subclass 444 for a nonelectrolytic process
    of bleaching, dyeing, or fluid treatment of textiles or fibers utilizing
    electric, magnetic, or wave energy; or a product thereof.

    106,    Compositions: Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses for
    certain bath compositions used in electrophoretic coating procedures and
    the notes thereto for the line between Class 106 and other classes
    providing for coating compositions.

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 67+ for electroforming and
    subclasses 80+ for electrolytic coating.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    especially subclasses 22+ for processes of shaping and treating provided
    for in this class (264) without involving electrical or wave energy to
    effect a chemical reaction, per se, and without involving electrophoresis.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 457+ for coating processes utilizing
    electrical energy to deposit particles out of a liquid by other than
    electrolysis, electrophoresis, or electro-osmosis.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, for coated products in
    general, especially subclass 547 for a metallic stock material having metal
    particles and a composition or density gradient or differential porosity.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product,
    subclasses 32+ for a process of applying a coating of particles from an
    insulating suspending liquid by applying an electric field in combination
    with imagewise exposure to radiation, including compositions used in and
    products produced by such a process; and subclass 52 for "electrolysis
    imaging" or "photoconductography."


CLS 204/472
TXT With control responsive to sensed condition:

    Process under subclass 471 in which the coating or forming is regulated by
    detecting a characteristic or a change in a characteristic of the process
    and by implementing an action in the process based upon the detected
    characteristic or change therein.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder a
    single means may be used both to detect a characteristic or a change in a
    characteristic of the process and to implement an action in the process
    based upon the detected characteristic or change therein.  There must be a
    positive action made by a control means because of the detected
    characteristic or change therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    480+,   for electrophoretic coating or forming of an object involving
    regeneration or replenishment of the coating bath but without control
    directly responsive to a sensed condition.

    519,    for electrophoretic or electro-osmotic barrier separation with
    control responsive to sensed condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, as the residual class for processes and
    apparatus for measuring or testing, per se.  See also the (3) Note in the
    class definition of Class 73 for additional loci of other measuring and
    testing processes and apparatus of different types.

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, for measuring, testing, or
    sensing, per se, to determine electrical properties by electrical means
    even though nonelectrical values may be derived from the electrical
    properties determined.


CLS 204/473
TXT Temperature sensed:

    Process under subclass 472 in which a detected temperature or a change in a
    detected temperature is used to control the process.


CLS 204/474
TXT Current sensed:

    Process under subclass 472 in which a detected current or a change in a
    detected current is used to control the process.


CLS 204/475
TXT Rubber or vulcanizable gum used to coat or form:

    Process under subclass 471 directed to the coating or formation of objects
    with (a) a natural or synthetic elastic polymer commonly known as rubber
    (e.g., caoutchouc, neoprene, etc.) or (b) a gum which may be vulcanized
    (cross-linked) (e.g., by reaction with sulphur at an elevated temperature,
    etc.) from a tacky, plastic mixture to an elastic or rigid product.


CLS 204/476
TXT Sheet, web, wire, or filament of indeterminate length formed or coated:

    Process under subclass 475 directed to the coating or formation of sheets,
    webs, wire, or filaments of indeterminate length.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a composite or plural component
    web or sheet which is not provided for elsewhere. See also the main
    definition of Class 428, Sections VI, C, 4 and 6.


CLS 204/477
TXT Alternating current:

    Process under subclass 471 in which alternating electrical current is used.


CLS 204/478
TXT With irradiation or illumination (e.g., for curing, etc.):

    Process under subclass 471 in which electromagnetic waves (e.g.,
    ultraviolet light, gamma rays, etc.) or corpuscular radiation (e.g., stream
    of alpha particles, electron beam, etc.) is applied to the substrate or to
    a coated layer  (e.g., for curing, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    487+,   491, 493+, 500+, 507, and 509, for electrophoretic or
    electro-osmotic coating processes with heat treatment of a coated layer.


CLS 204/479
TXT Coating interior of object:

    Process under subclass 471 in which a coating is formed on the interior of
    an object.


CLS 204/480
TXT With regeneration or replenishment of coating bath (e.g., ultrafiltration,
    ion exchange, measurement followed by addition of concentrated reagent,
    etc.):

    Process under subclass 471 which includes purification or rejuvenation
    (e.g., using ultrafiltration, ion exchange,  etc.) or concentration
    adjustment of the coating bath (e.g., measurement followed by addition of
    concentrated reagent, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  The type of measurement followed by replenishment for
    concentration adjustment which is provided for in this subclass and the
    subclasses indented hereunder does not include any adjustment which is
    controlled in direct response to a sensed condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    472+,   for electrophoretic coating or forming of an object with control
    that is responsive to a sensed condition.


CLS 204/481
TXT Using ion exchange material:

    Process under subclass 480 in which ion exchange material is used to
    regenerate or replenish the coating bath.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    524     and 536, for electrophoretic or electro-osmotic ion selective
    barrier separation in which an ion exchange material is also employed.


CLS 204/482
TXT Using filter or membrane:

    Process under subclass 480 in which a filter or membrane is used to
    regenerate the coating bath.


CLS 204/483
TXT Forming of object:

    Process under subclass 471 directed to the formation of an object.

    (1)     Note.  Electrophoretic forming processes are defined herein as
    electrophoretic coating processes wherein the coated layer is subsequently
    removed from the substrate, thus forming an object.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    especially subclasses 22+ for processes of shaping and treating provided
    for in this class (264) without involving electrical or wave energy to
    effect a chemical reaction, per se, and without involving electrophoresis.


CLS 204/484
TXT Plural coating operations:

    Process under subclass 471 directed to the coating of a substrate with at
    least two layers and wherein at least one of the layers is applied
    electrophoretically or electro-osmotically.

    (1)     Note.  A single step coating process wherein a previously coated
    object that is being coated (e.g., single step coating of an
    electrostatically sprayed object, etc.) is not considered to encompass
    plural coating operations for this subclass or the subclasses indented
    hereunder.


CLS 204/485
TXT Using mask:

    Process under subclass 484 in which a mask is used to shield selected areas
    of the substrate during coating.


CLS 204/486
TXT Including nonelectrophoretic coating:

    Process under subclass 484 which employs at least one nonelectrophoretic
    coating step (e.g., impregnation, electrostatic spraying, etc.).


CLS 204/487
TXT With heat treatment of a coated layer (e.g., curing, sintering, etc.):

    Process under subclass 486 in which at least one of the coated layers is
    heated to effect a desired change therein (e.g., curing, sintering, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    478,    for an electrophoretic or electro-osmotic coating or forming
    process with use of radiation energy.

    491,    493+, 500+, 507, and 509, for other electrophoretic or
    electro-osmotic coating processes with heat treatment of a coated layer.


CLS 204/488
TXT Organic (e.g., curing thermoset resin, etc.):

    Process under subclass 487 in which the heat treated layer contains organic
    material.


CLS 204/489
TXT Using bath having designated chemical composition (DCC):

    Process under subclass 471 which specifically identifies a coating bath
    used in the coating process as containing a designated chemical composition
    (DCC).

    (1)     Note.  A designated chemical composition is a composition wherein
    at least one chemical atom is identified.  For a more comprehensive
    definition of designated chemical composition (including exceptions and
    examples), see DEFINITION OF TERMS under the main definition of this class.


CLS 204/490
TXT Resultant coating is solely inorganic:

    Process under subclass 489 in which the resultant coating contains no
    organic material.

    (1)     Note.  The coating bath composition may include organic material as
    long as the resultant coating is limited to inorganic material.


CLS 204/491
TXT With heat treatment of coating:

    Process under subclass 490 in which the coating is heated to effect a
    desired change therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    478,    for an electrophoretic or electro-osmotic coating or forming
    process with use of radiation energy.

    487+,   493+, 500+, 507, and 509, for other electrophoretic or
    electro-osmotic coating processes with heat treatment of a coated layer.


CLS 204/492
TXT Anodic processes only:

    Processes under subclass 489 in which the bath composition is specifically
    directed to use in anodic processes only (i.e., anionic compositions).

    (1)     Note.  Processes involving compositions which are suitable for both
    anodic and cathodic processes are excluded from this subclass and the
    subclasses indented hereunder.


CLS 204/493
TXT With heat treatment of coating:

    Process under subclass 492 in which the coating is heated to effect a
    desired change therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    478,    for an electrophoretic or electro-osmotic coating or forming
    process with use of radiation energy.

    487+,   491, 500+, 507, and 509, for other electrophoretic or
    electro-osmotic coating processes with heat treatment of a coated layer.


CLS 204/494
TXT And washing, rinsing, or drying of coating:

    Process under subclass 493 in which the coating is also washed, rinsed, or
    dried, usually before heat treatment.


CLS 204/495
TXT With pretreatment of substrate or bath:

    Process under subclass 492 in which either the substrate or the coating
    bath is treated to prepare for the coating process.

    (1)     Note.  Placement in this subclass requires positive recitation of
    one or more pretreatment steps and does not provide for the mere use of a
    substrate or bath composition which was previously made by an unrecited
    method.

    (2)     Note.  Pretreatment appropriate for this subclass includes:
    coating of individual particles which are subsequently electrophoretically
    coated onto a substrate, chemical reaction to prepare a bath for
    electrophoresis, and prewetting of a substrate to enhance bonding of an
    electrophoretic coating.  This subclass is not intended to provide for mere
    mixing of a coating bath unless combined with clear recitation of a
    treatment to chemically or otherwise alter the bath to promote subsequent
    coating of at least a part thereof onto a substrate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    510,    for other electrophoretic or electro-osmotic coating processes with
    pretreatment of the substrate.


CLS 204/496
TXT Bath contains shading or coloring agent (e.g., pigment, etc.):

    Process under subclass 492 in which the bath used for coating contains a
    white, black, or colored material which imparts a shade or color to the
    bath or to the resultant coating (e.g., pigment, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    503,    for a cathodic electrophoretic or electro-osmotic coating process
    using a bath containing a shading or coloring agent and an epoxy or epoxide.

    508,    for other electrophoretic or electro-osmotic coating processes
    using a bath having a DCC and containing a shading or coloring agent, metal
    oxide, free metal, or free carbon.


CLS 204/497
TXT Bath contains surface active agent (e.g., soap or detergent, wetting or
    emulsifying agent, etc.):

    Process under subclass 492 in which the bath used for coating contains a
    surface active agent (e.g., soap or detergent, wetting or emulsifying
    agent, etc.).


CLS 204/498
TXT Bath contains carboxyl group:

    Process under subclass 492 in which the bath used for coating contains an
    organic compound having a carboxyl group (C=O)-OH.


CLS 204/499
TXT Cathodic processes only:

    Process under subclass 489 in which the bath composition is specifically
    directed to use in cathodic processes only (i.e., cationic compositions).

    (1)     Note.  Processes involving compositions which are suitable for both
    anodic and cathodic processes are excluded from this subclass and the
    subclasses indented hereunder.


CLS 204/500
TXT With heat treatment of coating:

    Process under subclass 499 in which the coating is heated to effect a
    desired change therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    478,    for an electrophoretic or electro-osmotic coating or forming
    process with use of radiation energy.

    487+,   491, 493+, 507, and 509, for other electrophoretic or
    electro-osmotic coating processes with heat treatment of a coated layer.


CLS 204/501
TXT Bath contains epoxy or epoxide:

    Process under subclass 500 in which the bath used for coating contains an
    oxirane or any other compound with an  -O- bridge attached to two different
    carbon atoms which are also united in some other way, either directly or
    indirectly (e.g., epoxy resin, cyclic ether, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    502+,   for other cathodic electrophoretic or electro-osmotic coating
    processes using a bath containing an epoxy or an epoxide.


CLS 204/502
TXT Bath contains epoxy or epoxide:

    Process under subclass 499 in which the bath used for coating contains an
    oxirane or any other compound with an  -O- bridge attached to two different
    carbon atoms which are also united in some other way, either directly or
    indirectly (e.g., epoxy resin, cyclic ether, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    501,    for a cathodic electrophoretic or electro-osmotic coating process
    using a bath containing an epoxy or an epoxide combined with heat treatment
    of the coating.


CLS 204/503
TXT And shading or coloring agent:

    Process under subclass 502 in which the bath used for coating also contains
    a white, black, or colored material which imparts a shade or color to the
    bath or to the resultant coating (e.g., pigment, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    496,    for an anodic electrophoretic or electro-osmotic coating process
    using a bath containing a shading or coloring agent.

    508,    for other electrophoretic or electro-osmotic coating processes
    using a bath having a DCC and containing a shading or coloring agent, metal
    oxide, free metal, or free carbon.


CLS 204/504
TXT And separate crosslinking or curing agent:

    Process under subclass 502 in which the bath used for coating also contains
    a separate compound or element intended to enhance crosslinking or curing
    of the coating.

    (1)     Note.  For the purposes of this subclass and the subclass indented
    hereunder, the presence of a separate crosslinking or curing agent (i.e.,
    not chemically bound to a composition to be coated) must be positively
    recited.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    506,    for other cathodic electrophoretic or electro-osmotic coating
    processes using a bath containing a separate crosslinking or curing agent.


CLS 204/505
TXT Isocyanate:

    Process under subclass 504 in which the crosslinking or curing agent is an
    isocyanate.


CLS 204/506
TXT Bath contains separate crosslinking or curing agent:

    Process under subclass 499 in which the bath used for coating contains a
    separate compound or element intended to enhance crosslinking or curing of
    the coating.

    (1)     Note.  For the purposes of this subclass, the presence of a
    separate crosslinking or curing agent (i.e., not chemically bound to a
    composition to be coated) must be positively recited.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    504+,   for a cathodic electrophoretic or electro-osmotic coating process
    using a bath containing both an epoxy or an epoxide and a separate
    crosslinking or curing agent.


CLS 204/507
TXT With posttreatment of coating (e.g., heat treatment, washing, drying, etc.):

    Process under subclass 489 in which the coating is subsequently treated
    (e.g., heat treatment, washing, drying, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    478,    for an electrophoretic or electro-osmotic coating or forming
    process with use of radiation energy.

    487+,   491, 493+, 500+, and 509, for other electrophoretic or
    electro-osmotic coating processes with heat treatment of a coated layer.


CLS 204/508
TXT Bath contains shading or coloring agent, metal oxide, free metal, or free
    carbon:

    Process under subclass 489 in which the bath used for coating contains a
    metal oxide, free metal, free carbon, or a white, black, or colored
    material which imparts a shade or color to the bath or resultant coating
    (e.g., pigment, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    496,    for an anodic electrophoretic or electro-osmotic coating process
    using a bath containing a shading or coloring agent.

    503,    for a cathodic electrophoretic or electro-osmotic coating process
    using a bath containing a shading or coloring agent and an epoxy or epoxide.


CLS 204/509
TXT With heat treatment of coating:

    Process under subclass 471 in which the coating is heated to effect a
    desired change therein (e.g., firing, baking, sintering, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    478,    for an electrophoretic or electro-osmotic coating or forming
    process with use of radiation energy.

    487+,   491, 493+, 500+, and 507, for other electrophoretic or
    electro-osmotic coating processes with heat treatment of a coated layer.


CLS 204/510
TXT With pretreatment of substrate (e.g., cleaning, wetting, etc.):

    Process under subclass 471 in which the substrate is treated to prepare it
    for coating (e.g., cleaning, wetting, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Placement in this subclass requires positive recitation of
    one or more pretreatment steps and does not provide for the mere use of a
    substrate which was previously made or treated by an unrecited method.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    495,    for an anodic electrophoretic or electro-osmotic coating process
    with pretreatment of the substrate or bath.


CLS 204/511
TXT Using liquid jet:

    Process under subclass 471 in which a stream of liquid containing a
    composition for electrophoretic or electro-osmotic coating (e.g., of
    suspended particles, etc.) is directed onto the substrate during coating.


CLS 204/512
TXT Continuous movement of substrate through bath:

    Process under subclass 471 in which the substrate is continuously
    transported in, through, and out of the bath; with an electrophoretic or
    electro-osmotic coating being applied to the substrate while it is moving
    through the bath.

    (1)     Note.  The substrate does not need to be of indeterminate length,
    provided that it is kept in motion through the bath while being coated.


CLS 204/513
TXT Hydrocarbon oil separated or purified:

    Process under subclass 450 directed to the separation or purification of
    hydrocarbon oil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    559+,   for electrical separation or purification of a liquid hydrocarbon
    (including hydrocarbon oil) not involving electrolysis, electrophoresis, or
    electro-osmosis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclass 696 for electrolytic material
    treatment of hydrocarbon oil.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, for processes of treatment
    and preparation of mineral oils employing mere electrical thermal effects.


CLS 204/514
TXT Aqueous system:

    Process under subclass 513 in which the hydrocarbon oil is in an aqueous
    system.


CLS 204/515
TXT Inorganic siliceous or calcareous material prepared, separated, or treated
    (e.g., clay, earth, concrete, asbestos, glass, etc.):

    Process under subclass 450 involving preparation, separation, or treatment
    of a material containing silica or calcium (e.g., clay, earth, concrete,
    asbestos, glass, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses
    for drying and gas or vapor contacting of solids, in general, especially
    subclass 1 for processes and apparatus involving the subjection of solids
    to electrical energy; but not involving electrolysis, electrophoresis, or
    electro-osmosis.


CLS 204/516
TXT Barrier separation (e.g., using membrane, filter paper, etc.):

    Process under subclass 515 in which a barrier (e.g., membrane, filter
    paper, etc.) is used to separate some ions or particles from other ions or
    particles by allowing some ions or particles to pass through the barrier
    while the others are retained at or stopped from passing through the
    barrier.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and the subclass indented hereunder are not
    intended to provide for the mere use of a perforated electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    518+,   for electrophoretic or electro-osmotic barrier separation of other
    materials.


CLS 204/517
TXT Ion selective:

    Process under subclass 516 in which the barrier distinguishes between ions
    of different charges to effect separation.

    (1)     Note.  Methods which distinguish between ions having different
    levels of positive or negative charge are included here as well as those
    distinguishing between positive and negative charges.

    (2)     Note.  Use of ion exchange membranes to effect separation is
    included in this group.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    520+,   for electrophoretic or electro-osmotic ion selective barrier
    separation of other materials.


CLS 204/518
TXT Barrier separation (e.g., using membrane, filter paper, etc.):

    Process under subclass 450 in which a barrier (e.g., membrane, filter
    paper, etc.) is used to separate some ions or particles from other ions or
    particles by allowing some ions or particles to pass through the barrier
    while the others are retained at or stopped from passing through the
    barrier.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder are not
    intended to provide for the mere use of a perforated electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    516+,   for electrophoretic or electro-osmotic barrier separation of
    inorganic siliceous or calcareous material.

    627+,   for corresponding apparatus.


CLS 204/519
TXT With control responsive to sensed condition:

    Process under subclass 518 in which the barrier separation is regulated by
    detecting a characteristic or a change in a characteristic of the process
    and by implementing an action in the process based upon the detected
    characteristic or change therein.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder a
    single means may be used both to detect a characteristic or a change in a
    characteristic of the process and to implement an action in the process
    based upon the detected characteristic or change therein.  There must be a
    positive action made by a control means because of the detected
    characteristic or change therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    472+,   for electrophoretic or electro-osmotic coating or forming with
    control responsive to sensed condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, as the residual class for processes and
    apparatus for measuring or testing, per se.  See also the (3) Note in the
    class definition of Class 73 for additional loci of other measuring and
    testing processes and apparatus of different types.

    324,    Electricity, Measuring and Testing, for measuring, testing, or
    sensing, per se, to determine electrical properties by electrical means
    even though nonelectrical values may be derived from the electrical
    properties determined.


CLS 204/520
TXT Ion selective:

    Process under subclass 518 in which the barrier distinguishes between ions
    of different charges to effect separation.

    (1)     Note.  Methods which distinguish between ions having different
    levels of positive or negative charge are included here as well as those
    distinguishing between positive and negative charges.

    (2)     Note.  Use of permiselective membranes or ion exchange materials to
    effect separation is included in this group.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    517,    for electrophoretic or electro-osmotic ion selective barrier
    separation of inorganic siliceous or calcareous material.


CLS 204/521
TXT Combined with manufacture or pretreatment of barrier:

    Process under subclass 520 which includes one or more steps of manufacture
    or pretreatment of the barrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    470,    for gel electrophoresis or gel composition therefor combined with
    manufacture or preparation of the gel.


CLS 204/522
TXT Using both anion and cation selective membranes:

    Process under subclass 520 in which at least one membrane selectively
    passes ions with a positive charge and at least one other membrane
    selectively passes ions with a negative charge.


CLS 204/523
TXT Alternating anion and cation selective membranes:

    Process under subclass 522 in which at least 3 anion and cation selective
    membranes are employed in an alternating sequential array (e.g., 2 anion
    selective membranes separated by a cation selective membrane, etc.).


CLS 204/524
TXT And using ion exchange material (e.g., suspended particles, etc.):

    Process under subclass 523 in which ion exchange material (e.g., suspended
    particles, etc.) is also used.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    481,    for electrophoretic or electro-osmotic coating or forming with
    regeneration or replenishment of the coating bath using ion exchange
    material.

    536,    for electrophoretic or electro-osmotic ion selective barrier
    separation combined with the use of ion exchange material, but not using
    both anion and cation selective membranes.

    542,    for other electrophoretic or electro-osmotic barrier separation
    processes combined with a diverse-type separation.


CLS 204/525
TXT With prevention of scale buildup or fouling of membrane:

    Process under subclass 523 in which action is taken to prevent accumulation
    of scale or fouling substances on a membrane or other internal components
    of a chamber used during separation.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is not intended to provide for mere recycling
    of process fluid unless specifically recited to prevent scale buildup or
    fouling of a membrane.


CLS 204/526
TXT Gas or vapor treated:

    Process under subclass 523 in which a gas or vapor is treated.


CLS 204/527
TXT Biological material prepared, recovered, or treated (e.g., urine, etc.):

    Process under subclass 523 in which biological material is prepared,
    recovered, or treated (e.g., urine, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for electro-osmotic barrier
    separation involving preparation, recovery, or treatment of a fluid (e.g.,
    air, carbon dioxide, etc.) which may be metabolized or may be the result of
    a metabolic process unless the fluid is specifically disclosed in
    connection with a metabolic or biological process or organism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    540,    for other electrophoretic or electro-osmotic ion selective barrier
    separation of biological material.

    543,    for electrophoretic or electro-osmotic nonion selective barrier
    separation of biological material.


CLS 204/528
TXT Regeneration of liquid electrolyte:

    Process under subclass 523 in which a desired liquid electrolyte solution
    is rejuvenated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    480+,   for electrophoretic or electro-osmotic coating or forming with
    regeneration or replenishment of the coating bath.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Processes, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, especially subclasses 398+ for regeneration of image processing
    compositions (e.g., regeneration of photographic solutions, etc.).


CLS 204/529
TXT Metal or metal salt recovered or removed:

    Process under subclass 523 in which a metal or metal salt is recovered or
    removed.


CLS 204/530
TXT Organic material prepared, recovered, or treated:

    Process under subclass 523 in which organic material is prepared,
    recovered, or treated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    541,    for other electrophoretic or electro-osmotic ion selective barrier
    separation of organic material.

    544,    for electrophoretic or electro-osmotic nonion selective barrier
    separation of organic material.


CLS 204/531
TXT Acid prepared, recovered, or treated:

    Process under subclass 523 in which an acid is intentionally prepared,
    recovered, or treated.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is not intended to provide for the mere use of
    an acid unless it is also intentionally separated by electrophoresis or
    electro-osmosis using alternating anion and cation selective membranes.


CLS 204/532
TXT And using nonion selective membrane:

    Process under subclass 522 which also uses at least one membrane which does
    not exhibit ion selectivity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    535,    for electrophoretic or electro-osmotic ion selective barrier
    separation which also uses a nonion selective membrane, but does not employ
    both anion and cation selective membranes.


CLS 204/533
TXT And using ion exchange material (e.g., suspended particles, etc.):

    Process under subclass 522 in which ion exchange material (e.g., suspended
    particles, etc.) is also used.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    481,    for electrophoretic or electro-osmotic coating or forming with
    regeneration or replenishment of the coating bath using ion exchange
    material.

    524,    for electrophoretic or electro-osmotic ion selective barrier
    separation using alternating anion and cation selective membranes combined
    with the use of ion exchange material.

    536,    for electrophoretic or electro-osmotic ion selective barrier
    separation combined with the use of ion exchange material, but without
    using both anion and cation selective membranes.

    542,    for other electrophoretic or electro-osmotic barrier separation
    processes combined with a diverse-type separation.


CLS 204/534
TXT And using bipolar membrane:

    Process under subclass 522 in which a membrane having anionic properties on
    one side and cationic properties on the other is used in combination with
    both anion and cation selective membranes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    537,    for electrophoretic or electro-osmotic ion selective barrier
    separation using a bipolar membrane, but not using both anion and cation
    selective membranes.


CLS 204/535
TXT And using nonion selective membrane:

    Process under subclass 520 which also uses at least one membrane which does
    not exhibit ion selectivity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    532,    for electrophoretic or electro-osmotic ion selective barrier
    separation which uses a nonion selective membrane, but also employs both
    anion and cation selective membranes.


CLS 204/536
TXT And using ion exchange material (e.g., suspended particles, etc.):

    Process under subclass 520 in which ion exchange material (e.g., suspended
    particles, etc.) is also used.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    481,    for electrophoretic or electro-osmotic coating or forming with
    regeneration or replenishment of the coating bath using ion exchange
    material.

    524,    for electrophoretic or electro-osmotic ion selective barrier
    separation using alternating anion and cation selective membranes combined
    with the use of ion exchange material.

    542,    for other electrophoretic or electro-osmotic barrier separation
    processes combined with a diverse-type separation.


CLS 204/537
TXT Using bipolar membrane:

    Process under subclass 520 in which a membrane having anionic properties on
    one side and cationic properties on the other is used.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    534,    for electrophoretic or electro-osmotic ion selective barrier
    separation using a bipolar membrane combined with both anion and cation
    selective membranes.


CLS 204/538
TXT Water splitting:

    Process under subclass 537 in which water is broken down into hydrogen and
    oxygen.


CLS 204/539
TXT Using anion selective membrane:

    Process under subclass 520 in which at least one anion selective membrane
    is used.


CLS 204/540
TXT Biological material prepared, recovered, or treated (e.g., urine, etc.):

    Process under subclass 520 in which biological material is prepared,
    recovered, or treated (e.g., urine, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for electro-osmotic barrier
    separation involving preparation, recovery, or treatment of a fluid (e.g.,
    air, carbon dioxide, etc.) which may be metabolized or may be the result of
    a metabolic process unless the fluid is specifically disclosed in
    connection with a metabolic or biological process or organism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    527,    for electrophoretic or electro-osmotic ion selective barrier
    separation of biological material using alternating anion and cation
    selective membranes.

    543,    for electrophoretic or electro-osmotic nonion selective barrier
    separation of biological material.


CLS 204/541
TXT Organic material prepared, recovered, or treated:

    Process under subclass 520 in which organic material is prepared,
    recovered, or treated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    530,    for electrophoretic or electro-osmotic ion selective barrier
    separation of organic material using alternating anion and cation selective
    membranes.

    544,    for electrophoretic or electro-osmotic nonion selective barrier
    separation of organic material.


CLS 204/542
TXT Combined with diverse-type separation (e.g., electro-osmotic barrier
    separation combined with centrifugal separation, etc.):

    Process under subclass 518 which is combined with a separation which
    employs neither an electrical force (or stress) nor a separation barrier.

    (1)     Note.  The combined diverse separations may be conducted
    simultaneously.


CLS 204/543
TXT Biological material prepared, recovered, or treated (e.g., urine, etc.):

    Process under subclass 518 in which biological material is prepared,
    recovered, or treated (e.g., urine, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for electro-osmotic barrier
    separation involving preparation, recovery, or treatment of a fluid (e.g.,
    air, carbon dioxide, etc.) which may be metabolized or may be the result of
    a metabolic process unless the fluid is specifically disclosed in
    connection with a metabolic or biological process or organism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    527     and 540, for electrophoretic or electro-osmotic ion selective
    barrier separation of biological material.


CLS 204/544
TXT Organic material prepared, recovered, or treated:

    Process under subclass 518 in which organic material is prepared,
    recovered, or treated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    530     and 541, for electrophoretic or electro-osmotic ion selective
    barrier separation of organic material.

    541,    for electrophoretic or electro-osmotic ion selective barrier
    separation of organic material.


CLS 204/545
TXT With use of nonelectrical field or force to separate (e.g., magnetic,
    centrifugal, etc.):

    Process under subclass 450 in which a material is separated by
    electrophoresis or electro-osmosis combined with a nonelectrical field or
    force (e.g., magnetic, centrifugal, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  The two combined separations may be conducted simultaneously.


CLS 204/546
TXT Absorbent strip electrophoresis (e.g., using cellulose acetate, paper
    strip, etc.):

    Process under subclass 450 in which a separation by the differential
    migration of ions or particles takes place on a sheet or strip of absorbent
    material (e.g., using cellulose acetate, paper strip, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Use of the term "paper" broadly in a method of this type is
    considered proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    641+,   for corresponding apparatus.


CLS 204/547
TXT Dielectrophoresis (i.e., using nonuniform electric field):

    Process under subclass 450 in which a nonuniform electric field is used to
    separate particles or ions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    643,    for corresponding apparatus.


CLS 204/548
TXT Isoelectric focusing (i.e., using pH variation):

    Process under subclass 450 in which a differential pH gradient is
    established in the medium to affect the migration of individual particles
    or components based on their different isoelectric points (the different pH
    values at which the net charge on each particle or component is neutral).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    459,    for isoelectric focusing in gel electrophoresis.

    644,    for corresponding apparatus.


CLS 204/549
TXT Isotachophoresis (i.e., displacement electrophoresis) or measurement of ion
    or particle mobility:

    Process under subclass 450 which involves different ion or particle
    mobilities (e.g., ions or particles having the same charge and given the
    same initial velocity are separated based on their differing net
    mobilities, etc.) or which merely involves measuring of ion or particle
    mobility.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    645,    for corresponding apparatus.


CLS 204/550
TXT Ionophoresis:

    Process under subclass 450 which involves the separation or removal of ions
    from solution by electrophoresis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    516+,   for electrophoretic or electro-osmotic barrier separation of
    inorganic siliceous or calcareous material.

    518+,   for electrophoretic or electro-osmotic barrier separation of other
    materials.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 20+ for an iontophoresis process or apparatus
    used to introduce ionic medication through unbroken skin under the
    influence of a direct electric current.


CLS 204/551
TXT Solid sorption or desorption:

    Process under subclass 450 which involves electrophoretic or
    electro-osmotic solid sorption or desorption.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses for
    cleaning and contacting solids with liquid without involving a chemical
    reaction brought about by electrical or wave energy, especially subclass 1
    for a Class 134 process including application of electrical, radiant, or
    wave energy to the work (material under treatment).

    252,    Compositions, subclass 194 for compositions used to absorb, bind,
    remove, or release water.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor, Product or Process of
    Making, subclasses 20+ for other methods, in general, of regenerating or
    rehabilitating a solid sorbent, per se; subclasses 60+ for zeolite
    compositions and processes of making zeolite compositions; and subclasses
    400+ for other solid sorbent compositions and methods of making solid
    sorbent compositions.


CLS 204/553
TXT Bulk separation of solids and liquids (e.g., dewatering solids, clarifying
    water, etc.):

    Process under subclass 450 which involves nonanalytical, large scale
    separation of solids and liquids (e.g., dewatering solids, clarifying
    water, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    648+,   for corresponding apparatus.


CLS 204/554
TXT Electrical (including simultaneous electrical and magnetic) separation or
    purification of liquid or magnetic treatment of liquid (other than
    separation):

    Process under the class definition involving (a) electrical (including
    simultaneous electrical and magnetic) separation or purification of a
    liquid or (b) magnetic treatment, per se, when some effect other than mere
    separation is desired or produced.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder
    primarily provide for electrostatic separation of a liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155+,   for processes of producing a compound or element by chemical
    reaction brought about by electrical or wave energy in a magnetic field,
    except processes involving electrolysis or in which chemical reaction is
    brought about by the mere heating effect of electrical or wave energy.

    450+,   for electrophoresis or electro-osmosis processes.

    660+,   for corresponding apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 2+ and 57+ for electric
    field separation of gaseous mixtures (including degasifying of liquid)
    without involving chemical reaction to convert one or more constituents to
    other compounds; but simultaneous or sequential combinations of electrical
    degasification of a liquid with other electrical separation of a liquid are
    provided for in Class 205 when electrolysis is involved or in Class 204
    when electrolysis is not involved (this remains true for placement of such
    combined processes regardless of whether a chemical reaction is or is not
    involved).

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, for electrolytic processes.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, for processes of purifying
    mineral oils (including removing water) without using electrical or wave
    energy (other than mere electrical heating which is provided for in Class
    208) and as long as more than mere physical separation (provided for in
    Class 210, subclasses 767+) is involved.  Also, see Class 252, subclass
    319, and the line notes above and below drawn to Classes 205 and 210 for
    other loci providing for processes of treating emulsions or dispersions.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 748 for general
    purification or separation of a liquid, especially water or waste water,
    utilizing electrical or wave energy (except the type provided for in
    Classes 204 or 205, unless (1) the Class 204 or Class 205 process is merely
    used to produce a reagent employed in a process otherwise provided for in
    Class 210 above subclasses 767+ (e.g., electrolytic production of free
    chlorine in salt water which is employed to sterilize the salt water under
    treatment, etc.) or (2) the 204 or 205 type process includes at least one
    separate step provided for in Class 210 above subclasses 767+ and except
    for general disinfecting, preserving, deodorizing, or sterilizing (as
    provided for in Class 422, subclasses 1+) of a medium other than liquid
    water or waste water (e.g., Class 210, subclass 748, provides for the use
    of ultraviolet light to sterilize, and therefor purify, liquid water,
    etc.)); and appropriate other subclasses for breaking or coalescing of
    oil/water emulsions which may involve the use of a magnetic field, but
    without using an electric field.  Also, see Class 252, subclass 319, and
    the line notes above drawn to Classes 205 and 208 for other loci providing
    for processes of treating emulsions or dispersions.

    252,    Compositions, especially subclasses 302+ for colloids and potential
    colloids; chemical processes of making and breaking; and apparatus related
    thereto (general processes of breaking, inhibiting, or forming of
    emulsions, per se (e.g., to obtain a purified oil, etc.), without using
    electrical or wave energy are provided for in Class 252). Also, see Class
    252, subclass 319, and the line notes above drawn to Classes 205, 208, and
    210 for other loci providing for processes of treating emulsions or
    dispersions.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 1+ for general disinfecting,
    preserving, deodorizing or sterilizing, especially subclasses 20, 21, and
    22+ for disinfecting, preserving, or sterilizing using electrical or wave
    energy in a way not provided for in another class (e.g., electrostatic
    sterilizing (involving a chemical reaction) of a gas, etc.).

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, for a process or
    apparatus involving measuring or testing by electrical or wave energy which
     is separate and apart, but in combination with a process or apparatus for
    use with a viable micro-organism or a catalytically active enzyme; and for
    a process or apparatus involving electrical or wave energy treatment of a
    micro-organism or an enzyme when the treatment is solely disclosed for use
    with a viable micro-organism or a catalytically active enzyme.


CLS 204/555
TXT With control responsive to sensed condition:

    Process under subclass 554 in which the separation or purification is
    regulated by detecting a characteristic or a change in a characteristic of
    the process and by implementing an action in the process based upon the
    detected characteristic or change therein.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder a
    single means may be used both to detect a characteristic or a change in a
    characteristic of the process and to implement an action in the process
    based upon the detected characteristic or change therein.  There must be a
    positive action made by a control means because of the detected
    characteristic or change therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    556,    for electrical separation or purification of liquid with measuring,
    testing, or sensing; but without control responsive to sensed condition.

    661,    for corresponding apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, as the residual class for processes and
    apparatus for measuring or testing, per se.  See also the (3) Note in the
    class definition of Class 73 for additional loci of other measuring and
    testing processes and apparatus of different types.

    324,    Electricity, Measuring and Testing, for measuring, testing, or
    sensing, per se, to determine electrical properties by electrical means
    even though nonelectrical values may be derived from the electrical
    properties determined.


CLS 204/556
TXT With measuring, testing, or sensing:

    Process under subclass 554 which includes measuring, detecting, or testing
    a characteristic, condition, or property of the process or an element used
    in the process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    555,    for electrical separation or purification of liquid with control
    responsive to sensed condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, as the residual class for processes and
    apparatus for measuring or testing, per se.  See also the (3) Note in the
    class definition of Class 73 for additional loci of other measuring and
    testing processes and apparatus of different types.

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, for measuring, testing, or
    sensing, per se, to determine electrical properties by electrical means
    even though nonelectrical values may be derived from the electrical
    properties determined.


CLS 204/557
TXT Using magnetic field:

    Process under subclass 554 in which magnetic lines of force are used to
    separate a constituent, to aid the separation of a constituent from a
    liquid, or to treat a liquid without resulting in separation or
    purification.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for (a) simultaneous electrical and
    magnetic separation processes and (b) magnetic treatment, per se, when some
    effect other than mere separation is desired or produced.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155+,   for processes of producing compounds or elements by chemical
    reaction brought about by electrical or wave energy in a magnetic field;
    except processes involving electrolysis or in which chemical reaction is
    brought about by the mere heating effect of electrical or wave energy.

    664,    for corresponding apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 27 and 28 for magnetic
    separation of gaseous mixtures without involving chemical reaction to
    convert one or more constituents to other compounds.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 695 for magnetic
    separation of a liquid, per se, or combined with a separate step of
    electrical separation.


CLS 204/558
TXT With simultaneous use of liquid-liquid extraction solvent:

    Process under subclass 554 characterized by the presence of a liquid-liquid
    solvent capable of removing a liquid constituent from a liquid mixture by
    preferential dissolution or miscibility of the liquid constituent into the
    liquid-liquid solvent.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is intended to include processes using such a
    liquid-liquid solvent for any purpose, even if there is no disclosure of
    actual transfer of a liquid constituent from the liquid mixture into the
    liquid-liquid solvent.

    (2)     Note.  The liquid-liquid solvent extraction and electrical
    separation or purification must occur simultaneously.  See the search class
    note to Class 210 below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 634+ for
    liquid-liquid solvent extraction, per se, or combined with a separate step
    of electrical treatment.


CLS 204/559
TXT Predominantly hydrocarbon:

    Process under subclass 554 in which the liquid to be separated or purified
    is predominantly made up of one or more chemical compounds containing only
    atoms of carbon and hydrogen such that the total hydrocarbon content is
    greater than that of any single nonhydrocarbon constituent in the liquid
    (e.g., separating or purifying a liquid mixture containing 20% hexane, 20%
    octane, 30% water, 25% acetone, and 5% ethanol, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    513+,   for electrophoretic or electro-osmotic separation or purification
    of hydrocarbon oil.


CLS 204/560
TXT Removing solids:

    Process under subclass 559 in which solid material is removed from the
    liquid under treatment.

    (1)     Note.  Very small single cell biological entities (e.g., bacteria,
    etc.) are not considered to be solid material for the purposes of this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    571+,   for electrical separation or purification to remove solids from
    other liquids.


CLS 204/561
TXT With addition of agent to facilitate removal:

    Process under subclass 560 in which a material is added to the liquid under
    treatment to clearly aid removal of solids therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  The addition of an agent for this subclass is more
    restricted than the mere use of a modifying agent in resolving an emulsion
    or dispersion as provided for in subclasses 567+.


CLS 204/562
TXT Using cohesive filter or solid packing:

    Process under subclass 560 in which a cohesive filter medium or bed of
    solid packing elements is used to remove the solids.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    572,    for electrical separation or purification of other liquids using a
    cohesive filter or solid packing.


CLS 204/563
TXT Resolving emulsion or dispersion:

    Process under subclass 559 which involves breaking an emulsion or
    dispersion by agglomerating or accreting suspended constituents.

    (1)     Note.  The emulsion or dispersion may either be initially present
    or formed during a previous process step.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    573,    for electrical separation or purification of other liquids by
    resolving an emulsion or dispersion.


CLS 204/564
TXT Using interrupted or pulsed direct current field:

    Process under subclass 563 in which the emulsion or dispersion is resolved
    using an electric field produced by a direct current which is periodically
    interrupted or pulsed.

    (1)     Note.  An interrupted or pulsed direct current field is often used
    to reduce short circuiting by inhibiting the alignment of conducting
    constituents in the emulsion or dispersion between opposing electrodes.


CLS 204/565
TXT Using modified alternating current (other than standard 50 Hz or 60 Hz sine
    wave) field:

    Process under subclass 564 in which the emulsion or dispersion is resolved
    using an electric field produced by a modified alternating current with a
    frequency or wave form other than that of standard 50 Hz or 60 Hz sine wave
    alternating current (e.g., other than standard pure or simple alternating
    current, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  A modified alternating current field is often used to reduce
    short circuiting by inhibiting the alignment of conducting constituents in
    the emulsion or dispersion between opposing electrodes.


CLS 204/567
TXT Using modifying agent:

    Process under subclass 563 in which a gaseous, liquid, or solid material is
    used to change the physical or electrical characteristics of the emulsion
    or dispersion.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder are
    intended to be interpreted broadly, including processes in which the
    modifying agent may be used merely as a carrier for one or more system
    constituents.


CLS 204/568
TXT Gas or vapor:

    Process under subclass 567 in which the modifying agent is a gas or vapor.


CLS 204/569
TXT Dielectric liquid:

    Process under subclass 567 in which the modifying agent is a nonconducting
    or insulating liquid (e.g., hydrocarbon oil, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  The terms "dielectric," "nonconducting," "insulating," or
    their equivalents used in connection with an added modifying agent are
    sufficient for placement in this subclass.  If the dielectric functionality
    of such an added modifying agent is in doubt, placement is proper for the
    broad subclass, 567.


CLS 204/570
TXT Water:

    Process under subclass 567 in which the modifying agent consists of
    substantially pure water (i.e., containing only mere incidental impurities).


CLS 204/571
TXT Removing solids:

    Process under subclass 554 in which solid material is removed from the
    liquid under treatment.

    (1)     Note.  Very small, single-cell, biological entities (e.g.,
    bacteria, etc.) are not considered to be solid material for the purposes of
    this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    560+,   for electrical separation or purification to remove solids from
    liquid hydrocarbons.


CLS 204/572
TXT Using cohesive filter or solid packing:

    Process under subclass 571 in which a cohesive filter medium or bed of
    solid packing elements is used to remove the solids.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    562,    for electrical separation or purification of liquid hydrocarbons
    using a cohesive filter or solid packing.


CLS 204/573
TXT Resolving emulsion or dispersion:

    Process under subclass 554 which involves breaking an emulsion or
    dispersion by agglomerating or accreting suspended constituents.

    (1)     Note.  The emulsion or dispersion may either be initially present
    or formed during a previous process step.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    563+,   for electrical separation or purification of liquid hydrocarbons by
    resolving an emulsion or dispersion.


CLS 204/600
TXT Electrophoretic or electro-osmotic apparatus:

    Apparatus under subclass 193 used to conduct processes involving (a) the
    travel, transport, or relative movement of one or more particles or
    components in a conducting liquid or fluent material, other than a gas,
    under a net unidirectional electric stress or (b) the movement of a liquid
    inside the capillary spaces of a solid (e.g., membrane, etc.) under the
    influence of an electric field.

    (1)     Note.  For the purpose of Class 204, "electrophoresis" is
    restricted to situations where the liquid or fluent material is
    electrically conductive and wherein there is at least one electrolytic
    phenomenon (e.g., electrode gas formation, etc.) inherently or otherwise
    taking place simultaneously with the electromigration of particles.

    (2)     Note.  "Electrophoretic display devices" or other systems which
    employ an electrostatic field or a dielectric suspending liquid or fluent
    material for particles undergoing motion are more properly classified in
    the appropriate electrical class (e.g., 355, 358, 359, etc.).

    (3)     Note.  In electrophoresis, the moved particles usually are
    electrically charged.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194+,   for electrolytic apparatus.

    450+,   for corresponding processes of electrophoresis or electro-osmosis.

    660+,   for electrical apparatus used to separate or purify liquids.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, appropriate subclasses for subject
    matter relating to electrical communications which is not provided for
    elsewhere.

    356,    Optics: Measuring and Testing, subclass 344 for processes and
    apparatus for testing the change in the refractive index of a fluid in an
    electrophoresis cell and subclasses 128+ for other refraction testing
    processes and apparatus therefor.

    358,    Facsimile, for pictorial communication systems and methods.

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, appropriate
    subclasses for optical elements and systems not provided for elsewhere.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics, subclasses 38+
    for controls, subclasses 130+ for image formation, subclasses 168+ for
    charging, subclasses 177+ for exposure, subclasses 222+ for development,
    subclasses 297+ for transfer, subclasses 320+ for fixing, subclasses 343+
    for cleaning, and subclasses 361+ for document handling.


CLS 204/601
TXT Capillary electrophoresis type:

    Apparatus under subclass 600 having a tube with an  inside diameter less
    than 1 mm in which particles or components migrate in an electric field
    through a conducting liquid or fluent material.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this subclass and the subclasses
    indented hereunder, a "capillary" or very small tube of undisclosed inside
    diameter is presumed to be small enough.


CLS 204/602
TXT With control means responsive to sensed condition:

    Apparatus under subclass 601 in which means are provided to detect an
    apparatus or process characteristic or change therein and to control or
    regulate operation of the apparatus or process based on the detected
    characteristic or change therein.

    (1)     Note.  A single means may be used both to detect an apparatus or
    process characteristic or a change in a characteristic and to implement an
    action in the process based upon the detected characteristic or change
    therein.  There must be a positive action made by a control means because
    of the detected characteristic or change therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    607,    for gel electrophoresis-type apparatus with control means
    responsive to sensed condition.

    628,    for electrophoretic or electro-osmotic apparatus using a barrier
    separator with control means responsive to sensed condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, as the residual class for processes and
    apparatus for measuring or testing, per se.  See also the (3) Note in the
    class definition of Class 73 for additional loci of other measuring and
    testing processes and apparatus of different types.

    323,    Electricity Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 220-354
    for miscellaneous systems for controlling the current and/or voltage in a
    single circuit.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, for measuring, testing, or
    sensing, per se, to determine electrical properties by electrical means
    even though nonelectrical values may be derived from the electrical
    properties determined.


CLS 204/603
TXT With detailed detection system (e.g., including a light source and a
    camera, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 601 which provides for a detection system recited
    in more detail than merely nominal mention (e.g., including a light source
    and a camera, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is not intended to provide for apparatus
    merely having a plotter or a recording device without including at least
    one detailed detector element or device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    612,    for gel electrophoresis-type apparatus with a detailed detection
    system.


CLS 204/604
TXT With injector:

    Apparatus under subclass 601 having means to inject material to be tested
    or treated into the capillary, usually by electro-osmotic bulk flow.


CLS 204/605
TXT Gel filled:

    Apparatus under subclass 601 in which the inner bore of the capillary is
    filled with a jellylike colloidal solution of liquid in a solid (usually
    organic).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is not intended to provide for a capillary
    filled with an inorganic solid (e.g., silica gel, etc.) which is not
    present as a jellylike colloidal solution of a liquid in the  solid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    606,    for gel electrophoresis-type apparatus without a capillary.


CLS 204/606
TXT Gel electrophoresis type:

    Apparatus under subclass 600 in which particles or components migrate in an
    electric field within a continuous medium of a jellylike colloidal solution
    of liquid in a  solid (usually organic).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder are not
    intended to provide for a continuous medium of an inorganic solid (e.g.,
    silica gel, etc.) which is not present as a jellylike colloidal solution of
    a liquid in the  solid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    605,    for gel electrophoresis-type apparatus using a capillary filled
    with organic gel.


CLS 204/607
TXT With control means responsive to sensed condition:

    Apparatus under subclass 606 in which means are provided to detect an
    apparatus or process characteristic or change therein and to control or
    regulate operation of the apparatus or process based on the detected
    characteristic or change therein.

    (1)     Note.  A single means may be used both to detect an apparatus or
    process characteristic or a change in a characteristic and to implement an
    action in the process based upon the detected characteristic or change
    therein.  There must be a positive action made by a control means because
    of the detected characteristic or change therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    602,    for capillary electrophoresis-type apparatus with control means
    responsive to sensed condition.

    628,    for electrophoretic or electro-osmotic apparatus using a barrier
    separator with control means responsive to sensed condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, as the residual class for processes and
    apparatus for measuring or testing, per se.  See also the (3) Note in the
    class definition of Class 73 for additional loci of other measuring and
    testing processes and apparatus of different types.

    323,    Electricity: Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 220-354
    for miscellaneous systems for controlling the current and/or voltage in a
    single circuit.

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, for measuring, testing, or
    sensing, per se, to determine electrical properties by electrical means
    even though nonelectrical values may be derived from the electrical
    properties determined.


CLS 204/608
TXT With programmed, cyclic, or time responsive control means:

    Apparatus under subclass 606 which is provided with control means for (a)
    storing coded instructions or other data which is used to regulate
    operation of the treating apparatus, (b) repetitively regulating a sequence
    of operational steps performed in or by the treating apparatus, or (c)
    causing various system operations to occur according to preset timing
    sequences or to last for predetermined durations of time (e.g., timer
    switches, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and the subclass indented hereunder includes
    any control means which maintain an operating condition, predetermine
    apparatus operation, or regulate repetition.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass and the subclass indented hereunder are not
    intended to provide for apparatus merely using alternating current (AC),
    per se.


CLS 204/609
TXT Plural rapid changes in direction of electric field (at least 1,000 times
    total and at more than 1/sec) (e.g., pulsed field, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 608 in which the electric field changes direction
    more than 1,000 times in rapid succession (more than 1 change per second),
    usually using more than 2 electrodes with synchronized timing of voltage
    spikes or peaks.


CLS 204/610
TXT Isoelectric focusing (i.e., using pH variation):

    Apparatus under subclass 606 in which a pH gradient is established in the
    medium to affect the migration of different particles or components based
    on their isoelectric points (the point having a pH at which the net charge
    on the particle or component is neutral).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    644,    for nongel-type isoelectric focusing apparatus.


CLS 204/612
TXT With detailed detection system (e.g., including a light source and a
    camera, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 606 which provides for a detection system recited
    in more detail than merely nominal mention (e.g., including a light source
    and a camera, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is not intended to provide for apparatus
    merely having a plotter or a recording device without including at least
    one detailed detector element or device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    603,    for capillary electrophoresis-type apparatus with a detailed
    detection system.


CLS 204/613
TXT With means for post treatment of gel to purify or recover a desired
    component:

    Apparatus under subclass 606 having means to subsequently purify or recover
    a desired component from the gel.


CLS 204/614
TXT Blotter (e.g., membrane, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 613 having means to transfer one or more
    components from the gel to an adjacent receiving medium (e.g., membrane,
    etc.).

    (1)     Note.  The transfer may be assisted by an external force (e.g.,
    hydraulic pressure, electric field, etc.).


CLS 204/615
TXT Unitary preparation apparatus (e.g., preparative means, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 606 comprised of a single unit designed to yield a
    product in final form (e.g., for analyzing results, etc.), precluding the
    need for additional means to subsequently treat or transfer separated
    species.

    (1)     Note.  The preparative nature of gel electrophoresis or an
    apparatus used therein must be specifically recited for placement in this
    subclass.


CLS 204/616
TXT Slab gel:

    Apparatus under subclass 606 in which the gel is planar in form (e.g.,
    rectangular sheet, etc.).


CLS 204/617
TXT Curved:

    Apparatus under subclass 616 in which the slab gel is in the form of an arc
    (including annular slabs).


CLS 204/618
TXT Vertical or inclined:

    Apparatus under subclass 616 in which the slab gel is in an upright
    position or is tipped up during use (e.g., vertical slab, etc.).


CLS 204/619
TXT With gel shaping or molding means (e.g., comb, ribbed insert, gel
    injectors, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 618 provided with means to form or cast the gel,
    usually prior to use in gel electrophoresis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    620,    for slab gel electrophoresis-type apparatus with a gel shaping or
    molding means in which the gel slab is not positioned vertically or
    inclined during use.


CLS 204/620
TXT With gel shaping or molding means (e.g., comb, ribbed insert, gel
    injectors, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 616 provided with means to form or cast the gel,
    usually prior to use in gel electrophoresis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    619,    for vertical or inclinedslab gel electrophoresis-type apparatus
    with a gel shaping or molding means.


CLS 204/621
TXT With liquid heat exchange means to cool gel slab during electrophoresis:

    Apparatus under subclass 616 having means to transfer heat during
    electrophoresis from the gel slab to a cooling liquid.


CLS 204/622
TXT Coating or forming means:

    Apparatus under subclass 600 having means to coat a substrate or form an
    object by electrophoresis or electro-osmosis.

    (1)     Note.  An electrophoretic forming apparatus is defined herein as an
    electrophoretic coating apparatus also having means to subsequently remove
    the coated layer from the coated substrate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194+,   for electrolytic coating or forming apparatus.

    298.01+, for sputter coating or forming apparatus.

    471+,   for corresponding processes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses
    for apparatus used to dry solids by other than electrolysis, electrical, or
    wave energy.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 620+ for apparatus for applying a
    coating electrostatically, where the medium is not electroconductive.

    399,    Electrophotography, for electrophotographic apparatus.


CLS 204/623
TXT With moving or movable electrode:

    Apparatus under subclass 622 in which an electrode is either moving or
    movable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198     through 226, for electrolytic apparatus with movable electrode
    means.

    629,    for an electrophoretic or electro-osmotic barrier separator with a
    moving or movable electrode.

    649,    for an electrophoretic or electro-osmotic bulk separator for solids
    and liquids with a moving or movable electrode.

    650,    for electrophoretic or electro-osmotic apparatus with a moving or
    movable electrode, in general.

    668+,   for electrical apparatus used to separate or purify liquid equipped
    with a moving or movable electrode.


CLS 204/624
TXT And means for posttreatment of coating (e.g., drying, heating, curing,
    etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 623 which is also provided with means to treat a
    coated layer after it is produced (e.g., drying, heating, curing, etc.).


CLS 204/625
TXT Coating interior of object or article (e.g., water main, automobile body,
    etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 623 having means to produce a coating on the
    interior of an object or article (e.g., water main, automobile body, etc.).


CLS 204/626
TXT With means for regeneration or replenishment of coating bath or electrolyte:

    Apparatus under subclass 622 having means for regeneration, purification,
    or concentration adjustment of the coating bath or electrolyte.


CLS 204/627
TXT Barrier separator (e.g., electrodialyzer, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 600 having a filter or membrane (e.g.,
    electrodialyzer, etc.) to separate some ions or particles from other ions
    or particles by allowing some ions or particles to pass through the barrier
    while the others are retained at or stopped from passing through the
    barrier.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder are not
    intended to provide for the mere use of a perforated electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    518+,   for corresponding processes.


CLS 204/628
TXT With control means responsive to sensed condition:

    Apparatus under subclass 627 in which means are provided to detect an
    apparatus or process characteristic or change therein and to control or
    regulate operation of the apparatus or process based on the detected
    characteristic or change therein.

    (1)     Note.  A single means may be used both to detect an apparatus or
    process characteristic or a change in a characteristic and to implement an
    action in the process based upon the detected characteristic or change
    therein.  There must be a positive action made by a control means because
    of the detected characteristic or change therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    602,    for capillary electrophoresis-type apparatus with control means
    responsive to sensed condition.

    607,    for gel electrophoresis-type apparatus with control means
    responsive to sensed condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, as the residual class for processes and
    apparatus for measuring or testing, per se.  See also (3) Note in the class
    definition of Class 73 for additional loci of other measuring and testing
    processes and apparatus of different types.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    220-354 for miscellaneous systems for controlling the current and/or
    voltage in a single circuit.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, for measuring, testing, or
    sensing, per se, to determine electrical properties by electrical means
    even though nonelectrical values may be derived from the electrical
    properties determined.


CLS 204/629
TXT With moving or movable electrode:

    Apparatus under subclass 627 having a moving or movable electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198     through 226, for electrolytic apparatus with movable electrode
    means.

    623+,   for electrophoretic or electro-osmotic coating or forming apparatus
    with a moving or movable electrode.

    649,    for an electrophoretic or electro-osmotic bulk separator for solids
    and liquids with a moving or movable electrode.

    650,    for electrophoretic or electro-osmotic apparatus with a moving or
    movable electrode, in general.

    668+,   for electrical apparatus used to separate or purify liquid with a
    moving or movable electrode.


CLS 204/630
TXT Ion selective:

    Apparatus under subclass 627 in which the barrier distinguishes between
    ions of different charges to effect separation.

    (1)     Note.  Barrier separators which distinguish between ions having
    different levels of positive or negative charge are included here as well
    as those distinguishing between positive and negative charge.

    (2)     Note.  The ion selective barrier may be a permiselective or ion
    exchange membrane.


CLS 204/631
TXT With bipolar membrane:

    Apparatus under subclass 630 having a membrane with anionic properties on
    one side and cationic properties on the other.


CLS 204/632
TXT And ion exchange material (e.g., suspended ion exchange resin particles,
    etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 630 in which ion exchange material (e.g.,
    suspended ion exchange resin particles, etc.) is also used.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    626,    for electrophoretic or electro-osmotic coating or forming apparatus
    with ion exchange material for regeneration or replenishment of a coating
    bath  or electrolyte.


CLS 204/633
TXT Both anion and cation selective membranes:

    Apparatus under subclass 630 in which at least one membrane selectively
    passes ions with a positive charge and at least one other membrane
    selectively passes ions with a negative charge.


CLS 204/634
TXT Alternating anion and cation selective membranes:

    Apparatus under subclass 633 in which at least 3 anion and cation selective
    membranes are employed in an alternating sequential array (e.g., 2 anion
    selective membranes separated by a cation selective membrane, etc.).


CLS 204/635
TXT Tortuous path-type frame or membrane spacer:

    Apparatus under subclass 634 having a frame or spacer configured to direct
    liquid in a tortuous flow path (e.g., zig-zag, twisted, back and forth,
    etc.).


CLS 204/636
TXT With foraminous or perforated membrane support or spacer (e.g., screen,
    perforated plate, fabric, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 634 having a foraminous or perforated membrane
    support or spacer (e.g., screen, perforated plate, fabric, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    638,    for an ion selective barrier separator with a  foraminous or
    perforated membrane support or spacer but without both anion and cation
    selective membranes.

    639,    for a nonion selective barrier separator with a foraminous or
    perforated membrane support spacer.


CLS 204/637
TXT And nonion selective membrane:

    Apparatus under subclass 630 which also has at least one membrane which
    does not exhibit ion selectivity.


CLS 204/638
TXT With foraminous or perforated membrane support or spacer (e.g., screen,
    perforated plate, fabric, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 630 having a foraminous or perforated membrane
    support or spacer (e.g., screen, perforated plate, fabric, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    636,    for an ion selective barrier separator with alternating anion and
    cation selective membranes and a foraminous or perforated membrane support
    or spacer.

    639,    for a nonion selective barrier separator with a foraminous or
    perforated membrane support or spacer.


CLS 204/639
TXT With foraminous or perforated membrane support or spacer (e.g., screen,
    perforated plate, fabric, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 627 having a foraminous or perforated membrane
    support or spacer (e.g., screen, perforated plate, fabric, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    636,    for an ion selective barrier separator with alternating anion and
    cation selective membranes and a foraminous or perforated membrane support
    or spacer.

    638,    for an ion selective barrier separator with a  foraminous or
    perforated membrane support or spacer but without both anion and cation
    selective membranes.


CLS 204/640
TXT Cylindrical barrier (e.g., filter, membrane, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 627 having a separation barrier (e.g., filter,
    membrane, etc.) in the form of a cylinder or annulus.


CLS 204/641
TXT Absorbent strip (e.g., cellulose acetate, paper strip, etc.) type:

    Apparatus under subclass 600 having a sheet or strip of absorbent material
    (e.g., cellulose acetate, paper strip, etc.) on which a separation by the
    differential migration of ions or particles takes place.

    (1)     Note.  Use of the term "paper" broadly in an apparatus of this type
    is considered proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    546,    for corresponding processes.


CLS 204/642
TXT Movable strip:

    Apparatus under subclass 641 in which the absorbent strip is movable.


CLS 204/643
TXT Dielectrophoretic (i.e., using nonuniform electric field):

    Apparatus under subclass 600 in which a nonuniform electric field is used
    to separate particles or ions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    547,    for corresponding processes.


CLS 204/644
TXT Isoelectric focusing (i.e., using pH variation):

    Apparatus under subclass 600 in which a pH gradient is established in the
    medium to affect the migration of different particles or components based
    on their isoelectric points (the point having a pH at which the net charge
    on the particle or component is neutral).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    548,    for corresponding processes.

    610,    for gel electrophoresis-type isoelectric focusing apparatus.


CLS 204/645
TXT Isotachophoretic (i.e., displacement electrophoretic) or means to measure
    ion or particle mobility:

    Apparatus under subclass 600 having means involving different ion or
    particle mobilities (e.g., ions or particles having the same charge and
    given the same initial velocity are separated based on their differing net
    mobilities, etc.) or means to merely measure ion or particle mobility.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    549,    for corresponding processes.


CLS 204/647
TXT Particle bed separator (e.g., inert particles, ion exchange beads, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 600 using a bed of particles (e.g., inert
    particles, ion exchange beads, etc.) to facilitate separation.


CLS 204/648
TXT Bulk separator for solids and liquids (e.g., to dewater solids, clarify
    water, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 600 having nonanalytical, large scale separation
    means for solids and liquids (e.g., to dewater solids, clarify water, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    553,    for corresponding processes.


CLS 204/649
TXT With moving or movable electrode:

    Apparatus under subclass 648 having a moving or movable electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198     through 226, for electrolytic apparatus with movable electrode
    means.

    623+,   for electrophoretic or electro-osmotic coating or forming apparatus
    with a moving or movable electrode.

    629,    for an electrophoretic or electro-osmotic barrier separator with a
    moving or movable electrode.

    650,    for electrophoretic or electro-osmotic apparatus with a moving or
    movable electrode, in general.

    668+,   for electrical apparatus used to separate or purify liquid with a
    moving or movable electrode.


CLS 204/650
TXT With moving or movable electrode:

    Apparatus under subclass 600 having a moving or movable electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198     through 226, for electrolytic apparatus with movable electrode
    means.

    623+,   for electrophoretic or electro-osmotic coating or forming apparatus
    with a moving or movable electrode.

    629,    for an electrophoretic or electro-osmotic barrier separator with a
    moving or movable electrode.

    649,    for an electrophoretic or electro-osmotic bulk separator for solids
    and liquids with a moving or movable electrode.

    668+,   for electrical apparatus used to separate or purify liquid with a
    moving or movable electrode.


CLS 204/660
TXT Apparatus for electrical (including simultaneous electrical and magnetic)
    separation or purification of liquid or magnetic treatment of liquid (other
    than separation):

    Apparatus under subclass 193 specialized for (a) electrical (including
    simultaneous electrical and magnetic) separation or purification of liquid
    or (b)  magnetic treatment, per se, when some effect other than separation
    is desired or produced.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder
    primarily provide for electrostatic separators designed to treat liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194+,   for electrolytic apparatus.

    554+,   for corresponding processes.

    600+,   for electrophoretic or electro-osmotic apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 15+ for electric field
    separation apparatus used to separate gaseous mixtures without involving
    chemical reaction to convert one or more constituents to other compounds
    (including degasifying means for liquid), but and apparatus for
    simultaneous or sequential combinations of electrical degasification of a
    liquid with a Class 204 typeelectrical separation of a liquid is provided
    for in Class 204. (This remains true for placement of apparatus used to
    perform such combined processes regardless of whether a chemical reaction
    is or is not involved).

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, for apparatus to treat or separate
    mineral oil by more than mere physical separation (provided for in Class
    210, subclasses 767+) with or without means to apply electrical or wave
    energy as long as such means is only used to heat the mineral oil under
    treatment.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus used to perform general purification or separation of a liquid,
    especially water or waste water, utilizing electrical or wave energy
    (except the type provided for in Class 204  unless (1) the Class 204 type
    apparatus is merely used to produce a reagent employed in a process
    otherwise provided for in Class 210 above subclasses 767+ (e.g.,
    electrolytic production of free chlorine in salt water which is employed to
    sterilize the salt water under treatment, etc.) or (2) the 204 type
    apparatus includes means to perform at least one separate step provided for
    in Class 210 above subclasses 767+ and except for general chemical
    apparatus (as provided for in Class 422) to treat a medium other than
    liquid water or waste water).  Also, see the line note drawn to Class 196
    above for other apparatus used to resolve oil and water emulsions or
    dispersions.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclass 250 for liquid carrier condensation of
    liquid developer material within an electrophotographic device.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, for general chemical treatment apparatus
    including that used to sterilize or disinfect without involving
    electrolysis, electrophoresis, or electro-osmosis; especially subclasses
    127+ for apparatus having means to initiate or perfect a process using
    shock or sound waves and subclasses 186+ for apparatus having means for
    initiating or perfecting a chemical reaction using electromagnetic wave
    energy or corpuscular radiation.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, for a process or
    apparatus involving measuring or testing by electrical or wave energy which
     is separate and apart, but in combination with a process or apparatus for
    use with a viable micro-organism or a catalytically active enzyme; and for
    a process or apparatus involving electrical or wave energy treatment of a
    micro-organism or an enzyme when the treatment is solely disclosed for use
    with a viable micro-organism or a catalytically active enzyme.


CLS 204/661
TXT With control means responsive to sensed condition:

    Apparatus under subclass 660 in which means are provided to detect an
    apparatus or process characteristic or change therein and to control or
    regulate operation of the apparatus or process based on the detected
    characteristic or change therein.

    (1)     Note.  A single means may be used both to detect an apparatus or
    process characteristic or a change in a characteristic and to implement an
    action in the process based upon the detected characteristic or change
    therein.  There must be a positive action made by a control means because
    of the detected characteristic or change therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    556,    for similar corresponding processes with control responsive to a
    measured parameter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, as the residual class for processes and
    apparatus for measuring or testing, per se. Also see the (3) Note in the
    class definition of Class 73 for additional loci of other measuring and
    testing processes and apparatus of different types.

    323,    Electricity: Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 220-354
    for miscellaneous systems for controlling the current and/or voltage in a
    single circuit.

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, for measuring, testing, or
    sensing, per se, to determine electrical properties by electrical means
    even though nonelectrical values may be derived from the electrical
    properties determined.


CLS 204/662
TXT Liquid level sensing means:

    Apparatus under subclass 661 in which means are provided to detect the
    height of a liquid level or a change therein and to control operation of
    the apparatus based upon the detected level or change therein.


CLS 204/663
TXT With programmed, cyclic, or time responsive control means:

    Apparatus under subclass 660 which is provided with control means for (a)
    storing coded instructions or other data which are used to regulate
    operation of the treating apparatus, (b) repetitively regulating a sequence
    of operational steps performed in or by the treating apparatus, or (c)
    causing various system operations to occur according to preset timing
    sequences or to last for predetermined durations of time (e.g., timer
    switches, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes any control means which maintains an
    operating condition, predetermines apparatus operation, or regulates
    repetition.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is not intended to provide for apparatus
    merely using alternating current (AC), per se.


CLS 204/664
TXT With magnetic separating means:

    Apparatus under subclass 660 having means to produce magnetic lines of
    force in order to separate a constituent or to aid the separation of a
    constituent from a liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    557,    for corresponding processes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 1+ for magnetic separating
    means used to separate gaseous mixtures without involving chemical reaction
    to convert one or more constituents to other compounds.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 222+ for separators
    which apply a magnetic field for liquid separation without the use of an
    electric field.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 186+ for apparatus having means for
    initiating or perfecting a chemical reaction using electromagnetic wave
    energy or corpuscular radiation and subclasses 127+ for apparatus having
    means to initiate or perfect a process using shock or sound waves.


CLS 204/665
TXT With filter (e.g., electrostatic filter, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 660 in which a foraminous or porous mass (e.g.,
    electrostatic filter, etc.) is used to physically trap one or more
    constituents while allowing the remaining liquid to pass therethrough.

    (1)     Note.  A filter for this subclass may also be electrically charged
    (i.e., as an electrode) to preferentially attract one or more constituents
    in the liquid under treatment, provided that physical entrapment also
    occurs at the filter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    562     and 571, for similar processes.

    674,    for electrical separation apparatus having a porous, perforated, or
    grid electrode.


CLS 204/666
TXT Plural separate treatment chambers or zones:

    Apparatus under subclass 660 having two or more physically separate areas
    to treat a liquid under separation.

    (1)     Note.  The separate areas may be in different chambers or housed in
    the same chamber, provided that there are at least two clearly different
    and distinguishable zones for liquid treatment.


CLS 204/667
TXT Probe type:

    Apparatus under subclass 660 in the form of a single electrode, per se, or
    a modular insert (containing one or more electrodes along with other
    elements) to be placed into a liquid treatment chamber or vessel.


CLS 204/668
TXT With moving or movable electrode:

    Apparatus under subclass 660 in which an electrode is either moving or
    movable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198     through 226, for electrolytic apparatus with movable electrode
    means.

    623,    629, 649, and 650, for electrophoretic or electro-osmotic apparatus
    with a moving or movable electrode.


CLS 204/669
TXT Rotating or rotatable:

    Apparatus under subclass 668 in which the moving or movable electrode is
    either rotating or rotatable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199+    and 212+, for electrolytic apparatus with rotary electrode means.


CLS 204/670
TXT Concentric electrodes:

    Apparatus under subclass 660 in which one or more electrodes are arranged
    concentrically within another electrode.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and the subclass indented hereunder is
    intended to be interpreted broadly, including any such apparatus with an
    outer electrode at least partially wrapped around an inner electrode having
    a common axis, provided that at least a portion of the electrodes are
    overlapped along a radial line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    260     and 272, for electrolytic apparatus with concentrically arranged
    electrodes.


CLS 204/671
TXT Cylindrical or annular:

    Apparatus under subclass 670 in which at least the overlapping portions of
    the concentric electrodes are cylindrical or annular in shape.


CLS 204/672
TXT Parallel plate-type electrodes:

    Apparatus under subclass 660 in which at least two plate-type electrodes
    are arranged in parallel fashion.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and the subclass indented hereunder are also
    intended to provide for bent or curved plate electrodes positioned in
    parallel relationship.


CLS 204/673
TXT Vertical flat plates:

    Apparatus under subclass 672 in which the parallel plate-type electrodes
    are flat and arranged vertically during operation.


CLS 204/674
TXT Porous, perforated, or grid electrode:

    Apparatus under subclass 660 having at least one porous, perforated, or
    grid electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    665,    for an electrical separation apparatus in which a porous electrode
    also serves as a filter to physically remove one or more constituents from
    a liquid.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS RELATING TO SUBCLASSES 157.15-158.21

    The following subclasses (art collection subclasses 900-914) of published
    disclosures pertain to various aspects of art relating to the use of energy
    in preparing or treating various chemical compounds.

    (1)     Note.  Disclosure are placed for value as a search aid and in no
    instance do they represent the entire extent of the prior art.


CLS 204/900
TXT EFFECTING A CHANGE IN ISOMERIZATION BY WAVE ENERGY:

    Subject matter involving processes of utilizing wave energy in effecting a
    process to distinguish two or more compounds having the same percentage
    composition therein of atoms but which compound differ in the relative
    positions ot the atoms in the compound therefore giving different chemical
    and physical properties, i.e., isomers.


CLS 204/901
TXT EFFECTING A COLOR CHANGE BY WAVE ENERGY:

    Subject matter involving a process of effecting a color change in a
    material through the use of wave energy.


CLS 204/902
TXT PRODUCTION OF DESIRED COMPOUND BY WAVE ENERGY IN PRESENCE OF A CHEMICALLY
    DESIGNATED NONREACTANT CHEMICAL TREATING AGENT (EXCLUDING WATER,
    CHLOROFORM, CARBON TETRACHLORIDE, METHYLENE CHLORIDE OR BENZENE):

    Subject matter involving preparing a desired compound or element by a
    reaction involving wave energy and wherein said reaction is achieved in the
    presence of a designated nonreactant material which is other than water,
    chloroform, carbon tetrachloride, methylene chloride or benzene.

    (1)     Note.  A designated nonreactant chemical material is a material
    that is present during the wave energy process and is generally inert,
    although some reaction with the material may occur.  The material, however,
    cannot be one of the principal reactants nor may it add atoms to the
    principal reactants so as to change the chemical or physical properties
    thereof to a significant degree.  Intended to be included herein are
    catalysts, diluents, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Designated for purposes of this area is a material from
    which an atom can be deduced with certainty.

    (3)     Note.  Water in any of its various physical forms or air is
    excluded herefrom as being designated.  Also excluded herefrom is a
    material stated as organic or inorganic.  Other materials excluded herefrom
    are chloroform, carbon tetrachloride, methylene chloride and benzene.


CLS 204/903
TXT INORGANIC CHEMICAL TREATING AGENT:

    Subject matter under subclass 902 wherein the designated nonreactant
    chemical material is in elemented form or is in the form of an inorganic
    compound.

    (1)     Note.  An inorganic compound is one that does not meet the
    definition of "organic" as elaborated in subclass 157.6


CLS 204/904
TXT METAL TREATING AGENT:

    Subject matter under subclass 903 wherein the designated nonreactant
    chemical material contains a metal atom in either elemental or compound
    form.


CLS 204/905
TXT HEAVY METAL AGENT:

    Subject matter under subclass 904 wherein the metal atom present has a
    specific gravity of more than four.


CLS 204/907
TXT SILICON OR BORON TREATING AGENT:

    Subject matter under subclass 902 wherein the designated nonreactant
    chemical material is organic and contains at least one atom of silicon or
    boron.


CLS 204/908
TXT PHOSPHORUS TREATING AGENT:

    Subject matter under subclass 902 wherein the designated nonreactant
    chemical material is organic and contains at least one atom of phosphorus.


CLS 204/909
TXT HEAVY METAL TREATING AGENT:

    Subject matter under subclass 902 wherein the designated nonreactant
    chemical material is organic and contains at least one metal atom whose
    specific gravity is greater than four.


CLS 204/910
TXT SULFUR TREATING AGENT:

    Subject matter under subclass 902 wherein the designated nonreactant
    chemical material is organic and contains at least one atom of sulfur.


CLS 204/911
TXT NITROGEN TREATING AGENT:

    Subject matter under subclass 902 wherein the designated nonreactant
    chemical material is organic and contains at least  one atom of nitrogen.


CLS 204/912
TXT OXYGEN TREATING AGENT:

    Subject matter under subclass 902 wherein the designated nonreactant
    chemical material is organic and contains at least one atom of oxygen.


CLS 204/913
TXT PEROXIDE AGENT:

    Subject matter under subclass 912 wherein the designated nonreactant
    chemical material is organic and contains at least one -0-0- moiety.


CLS 204/914
TXT ONLY CARBON, HYDROGEN OR HALOGEN ATOM IN TREATING AGENT:

    Subject matter under subclass 902 wherein the designated nonreactant
    chemical material is organic and contains only atoms of carbon, hydrogen or
    halogen.

    (1)     Note.  Halogen is limited to fluorine, chlorine, iodine, bromine
    and astatine.


CLS 205/
TTL ELECTROLYSIS:  PROCESSES,  COMPOSITIONS USED THEREIN, AND METHODS OF
    PREPARING THE COMPOSITIONS

CLS 205/
TXT Class 205 is an integral part of Class 204.  It incorporates all the
    definitions and rules as to subject matter of Class 204.

    CLASS DEFINITION

    Class 205 is an integral part of Class 204 (placed at the top of the
    schedule) and follows the schedule hierarchy, retaining all pertinent
    definitions and class lines of Class 204.


CLS 205/43
TXT ELECTROLYSIS INVOLVING ACTINIDE SERIES ELEMENT OR COMPOUND (AT. NO. 89+)
    (PRODUCT, PROCESS, COMPOSITION, AND METHOD OF PREPARING COMPOSITION):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the processes involve the
    electrolysis of, or upon, an actinide element or compound thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The product of the electrolytic process may be an element or
    compound other than an actinide series element or compound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 393+ for the chemical production of free actinide
    series metal.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclass 132 for processes involving heat
    treatment of the actinide series metal.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, subclasses 2+ for the chemical
    production of actinide base alloys.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 3+ and 249+ for
    nonelectrolytic processes of forming actinide series elements or compounds.

    534,    Organic Compounds -- Part of the Class 532-570 Series, subclasses
    11+ for nonelectrolytic processes of forming organic compounds of actinide
    series elements.


CLS 205/44
TXT Plutonium:

    Subject matter under subclass 43 wherein the actinide series element is
    plutonium or a compound thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 396+ for the production of free plutonium metal.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclass 251 for nonelectrolytic
    processes of forming plutonium compound.


CLS 205/45
TXT Thorium:

    Subject matter under subclass 43 wherein the actinide series element is
    thorium or a compound thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 394+ for the production of free thorium metal.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclass 252 for nonelectrolytic
    processes of forming thorium compound.


CLS 205/46
TXT Uranium:

    Subject matter under subclass 43 wherein the actinide series element is
    uranium or a compound thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 398+ for the production of free uranium metal.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, subclass 3 for the chemical
    production of uranium base alloys.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 253+ for
    nonelectrolytic processes of forming uranium compound.


CLS 205/47
TXT Utilizing fused bath:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 wherein the electrolytic process is
    carried out in an electrolytic medium consisting of a substance or
    combination or mixture of substances which are heated above ordinary,
    normal room temperature during a process in order to bring the substance or
    substancesto a fluid or liquid condition (e.g., a molten bath, etc.).


CLS 205/48
TXT Involving electrolytic coating, etching, or polishing:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 wherein the process includes an
    electrolytic coating or etching or polishing step.


CLS 205/49
TXT Uranium containing compound produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 wherein a uranium containing compound is
    produced.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 253+ for
    nonelectrolytic processes of preparing uranium compound.


CLS 205/50
TXT Product produced by electrolysis involving electrolytic marking, battery
    electrode active material forming, electroforming or electrolytic coating:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a product is made by the
    process of electrolytic marking, utilizing electrolysis to form battery
    electrode active material, electroforming or electrolytic coating with the
    following exception: products which form two or more contiguous metallic
    layers (see Class 428).


CLS 205/51
TXT Superconductor preparation involving electrolytic marking, electroforming
    or electrolytic coating, or composition therefor:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein an article described as a
    superconductor is prepared utilizing electrolytic marking, electroforming,
    or electrolytic coating.


CLS 205/52
TXT Electrolytic marking or composition therefor:

    Subject matter under the class definition for the development of successive
    marks, letters, designs and the like, upon a surface or within the body of
    a carrier, wherein electrical impulses from an electrode are employed to
    create by electrolysis, at selected areas, different colors, shades, or
    shapes resulting in the desired symbol (e.g., electroprinting, etc.).

    (1)     Note. This subclass also includes compositions, not elsewhere
    provided  for, particularly adapted to carry out the processes herein
    included.

    (2)     Note.  It is the general rule of classification to classify a
    process of preparing a composition along with the composition.  In these
    circumstances where only a process of preparing a composition is claimed
    and there is no claim to a composition, the claims would be classified
    identically as if there were a composition claimed.

    (3)     Note. The symbols must consist of a series successively formed,
    otherwise the process will be found in this class, subclass 118 and
    indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 62 for chemical or electrical methods of
    recording messages transmitted by current impulses other than by
    electrolysis and apparatus for carrying out such processes including those
    involving electrolysis.

    346,    Recorders, appropriate subclasses for apparatus involving similar
    processes and peculiarly adapted to record the movements of instruments,
    machines, and the like.

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 296+ for processes and apparatus specialized
    for formation of optical facsimiles wherein the image is developed by
    electrolysis or other electrical modes or by chemical changes.

    386,    Television Signal Processing for Dynamic Recording or Reproducing,
    subclass 127 for television recording having thermoplastic record.


CLS 205/53
TXT Utilizing inorganic color forming material other than carbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein an inorganic color-forming
    material other than carbon is utilized.

    (1)     Note.  Where the mark is produced by reaction or complex formation
    between an organic compound and an inorganic material electrolytically
    released (e.g., iodine, etc.) the subject matter is placed here.


CLS 205/54
TXT Utilizing organic color-forming material:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein an organic color-forming material
    is utilized.


CLS 205/55
TXT Heterocyclic color-forming material:

    Subject matter under subclass 54 wherein the organic color-forming material
    contains a heterocyclic ring.


CLS 205/56
TXT Hydroxyl or carboxyl group-containing color- forming material:

    Subject matter under subclass 54 wherein the organic color-forming material
    contains a hydroxyl (OH) or carboxyl (COOH) group.


CLS 205/57
TXT Utilizing electrolysis to form battery electrode active material or
    composition therefor:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein battery electrode active
    material is formed or deposited utilizing electrolysis and compositions
    used for such electrolysis.


CLS 205/58
TXT Organic active material other than organic metal salt:

    Subject matter under subclass 57 wherein the active material is organic and
    not an organic metal salt.


CLS 205/59
TXT Group IA metal-containing active material (e.g., Li, Na, K, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 57 wherein the active material contains a
    metal from group IA of the Periodic Table of Elements (e.g., Li, Na, K,
    etc.) as an essential constituent.


CLS 205/60
TXT Nickel-containing active material:

    Subject matter under subclass 57 wherein the active material contains
    nickel as an essential constituent.


CLS 205/61
TXT Cadmium-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 wherein the active material also contains
    cadmium as an essential ingredient.


CLS 205/62
TXT Cadmium-containing active material:

    Subject matter under subclass 57 wherein the active material contains
    cadmium as an essential constituent.


CLS 205/63
TXT Lead-containing active material:

    Subject matter under subclass 57 wherein the active material contains lead
    as an essential constituent.


CLS 205/64
TXT Zinc-containing active material:

    Subject matter under subclass 57 wherein the active material contains zinc
    as an essential constituent.


CLS 205/65
TXT Silver-containing active material:

    Subject matter under subclass 57 wherein the active material contains
    silver as an essential constituent.


CLS 205/66
TXT Iron- or tin-containing active material:

    Subject matter under subclass 57 wherein the active material contains iron
    or tin as an essential constituent.


CLS 205/67
TXT Electroforming or composition therefor:

    Subject matter under the class definition involving the reproduction or
    formation of objects by electrodeposition in which the deposit does not
    remain with the base upon which deposition is made and compositions
    therefor.

    (1)     Note.  Subsequent process steps of separation from the base,
    backing up the deposit and conventional steps such as washing, drying and
    the like are included here when in combination with the electrodeposition
    step or steps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 471+ for
    electrophoretic or electro-osmotic coating orforming of an object and
    subclasses 192.1+ for processes of forming objects by sputtering.


CLS 205/68
TXT Recording device:

    Subject matter under subclass 67 wherein recordings or records and record
    matrices or molds are produced (e.g., sound recordings, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses for processes, within the class definition, for
    shaping or moulding plastic materials.  In particular , see subclasses 106+
    pertaining to forming sound grooves in records.


CLS 205/69
TXT Printing plate or electrotype:

    Subject matter under subclass 67 wherein printing plates or electrotypes
    are produced.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for processes of reproducing to form dies and molds useful in the
    preparation of records.

    72,     for processes sometimes referred to as electrotyping, which result
    in the production of decorative plaques or lettered plates not used in
    printing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclass 401.1 and indented subclasses for processes in
    general for making printing members.


CLS 205/70
TXT Mold, mask, or masterform:

    Subject matter under subclass 67 wherein molds, masks, or masterforms are
    produced.


CLS 205/71
TXT Mirror or reflector:

    Subject matter under subclass 67 wherein mirrors or reflectors are produced.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    for processes for the preparation of mirror and reflectors wherein
    the metal coat remains on the deposition base.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    838+ for processes of making mirrors and reflectors not provided for in a
    particular process class.


CLS 205/72
TXT Ornamental article:

    Subject matter under subclass 67 wherein ornamental articles are produced.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69      and 70, for the preparation of printing plates, molds, or
    masterforms to be used in the formation of decorative designs on other
    objects.

    120,    for the preparation of designs on a base wherein the electrolytic
    coat remains on the base when finished.


CLS 205/73
TXT Roll, ring, or hollow body:

    Subject matter under subclass 67 wherein rolls, rings, or hollow bodies are
    produced.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76,     for processes wherein rings or rolls are formed, stripped and cut
    to make sheets or strips.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, for diverse manufacturing and metal working
    processes in general for producing hollow articles, see especially
    subclasses 1.2+, 435, 454, 455.1, 463, 888+, 889.72+, 890.03+, 890.06,
    890.08, 890.12+, 890.14+, 895+, and 899.1.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the notes thereunder.


CLS 205/74
TXT Powder, flakes, or colloidal particles:

    Subject matter under subclass 67 wherein the objects formed are powder,
    flakes, or colloidal particles.


CLS 205/75
TXT Perforated or foraminous article:

    Subject matter under subclass 67 wherein the objects formed are perforated
    or foraminous.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150,    for the formation of permanent coats on predominantly single metal
    or alloy perforated or foraminous substrates.

    161,    for the formation of permanent coats on predominantly nonmetal
    perforated or foraminous substrates.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 596 for metallic
    stock material having an aperture or cut.


CLS 205/76
TXT Sheet, web, wire, or filament:

    Subject matter under subclass 67 wherein the object produced is a sheet,
    web, wire, or filament.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for the production of films by electroforming with subsequent
    reduction to flakes, etc., subclass 75 for production of perforated or
    foraminous sheets or webs, and subclasses 138 and 152+ for formation of
    permanent coats on sheets, webs, wires, or filaments.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    150 and 151 for laminating processes combined with a Class 204 coating step.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 544+ for stock
    material which is all metal or has adjacent metal components, especially
    subclasses 606+ for foils and filaments smaller than 6 mils.


CLS 205/77
TXT Of indeterminate length:

    Subject matter under subclass 76 wherein the sheets, webs, wires, or
    filaments formed are of indeterminate length.

    (1)     Note.  Generally this subclass, as   distinguished from the
    preceding one,  includes processes in which the article is produced
    continuously; however, it is not restricted to such but includes all
    processes resulting in the formation of such articles of no defined length.


CLS 205/78
TXT Electrical product:

    Subject matter under subclass 67 wherein the product produced is described
    as having utility as an electrical element.


CLS 205/79
TXT Optical element:

    Subject matter under subclass 67 wherein the product produced is described
    as having utility as an optical element.


CLS 205/80
TXT Electrolytic coating (process, composition and method of preparing
    composition):

    Process under the class definition directed to the formation or deposition
    by an electrolytic action of a permanent coating material or materials upon
    a base, electrolyte compositions therefor and methods of making said
    electrolyte compositions.

    (1)     Note.  It is intended by the phrase "permanent coating" to include
    those coatings which remain part of the finished article as distinguished
    from those coatings which are stripped from a base as provided for in
    subclass 67, and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 471+ for
    electrophoretic or electro-osmotic coating or forming of an object and
    subclasses 192.12+ for glow discharge sputter deposition (e.g., cathode
    sputtering, etc.).


CLS 205/81
TXT Involving measuring, analyzing, or testing:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the process includes a step of
    measuring, analyzing, or testing.


CLS 205/82
TXT Controlling coating process in response to measured or detected parameter:

    Subject matter under subclass 81 wherein the electrolytic coating process
    is controlled in response to a measured or detected parameter thereof or of
    a characteristic of the electrolytic coating formed.


CLS 205/83
TXT Parameter is current, current density, or voltage:

    Subject matter under subclass 82 wherein the parameter measured or detected
    is the current, current density, or voltage of the electrolytic coating
    process.


CLS 205/84
TXT Parameter is thickness, weight, or composition of coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 82 wherein the characteristic measured,
    analyzed, or tested is the thickness, weight, or composition of the
    electrolytic coating.


CLS 205/85
TXT Displacement or replacement coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein a coating is formed on a substrate
    by the phenomenon usually known as displacement or replacement plating
    wherein a more active metal part of the surface of an object is dissolved
    and replaced by a less active metal coating derived from a bath composition.


CLS 205/86
TXT Employing internal battery action during coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the electric current is
    self-generated and without the use of an external power source.


CLS 205/87
TXT Simultaneous deplating and plating:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein a coating is electrolytically
    deposited or formed on an article while simultaneously electrolytically
    removing a coating therefrom.

    (1)     Note. This subclass does not include periodic reversal
    electroplating wherein plating and deplating occur sequentially.


CLS 205/88
TXT Utilizing subatmospheric or superatmospheric pressure during coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the electrolytic coating process
    is performed under a subatmospheric or superatmospheric pressure which
    means a pressure other than the normal atmospheric pressure in the
    surrounding atmosphere.


CLS 205/89
TXT Utilizing magnet or magnetic field during coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein a magnet or magnetic field is used
    during the electrolytic coating process.


CLS 205/90
TXT Ferromagnetic material deposited:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein a ferromagnetic material is
    electrolytically deposited under the influence of a magnetic field.


CLS 205/91
TXT Utilizing electromagnetic wave energy during coating (e.g., visible light,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the electrolytic action is
    supplemented by the application of electromagnetic wave energy.


CLS 205/92
TXT Energy produced by laser:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 wherein the electromagnetic wave energy is
    provided by a laser.


CLS 205/93
TXT Contacting coating as it forms with solid member or material other than
    electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the coating is simultaneously
    contacted by solid material or a solid member other than an electrode as it
    is formed (e.g., simultaneous electroplating and honing, simultaneous
    electroplating and burnishing, etc.).


CLS 205/94
TXT Utilizing mist prevention:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein misting of the electrolyte is
    prevented by, for example, the use of chemical additives or by physical
    means (e.g., foaming means, particles floating on the bath, etc.).


CLS 205/95
TXT Coating has specified thickness variation:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the electrolytic coating is
    carried out in such a manner that the coating is deliberately nonuniform in
    thickness.


CLS 205/96
TXT Controlling current distribution within bath:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the electrolytic process is
    carried out with means present or with control thereof such that a desired
    current distribution is maintained on the article being coated.


CLS 205/97
TXT Shaped counterelectrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 96 wherein a shaped counterelectrode is used
    to control the current distribution on the article being coated (e.g., a
    counterelectrode matching the profile of the article being coated, etc.).


CLS 205/98
TXT Treating process fluid by means other than agitation or heating or cooling:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein fluids used in the process (e.g.,
    electrolytes, rinse water, effluents, etc.) are physically, electrically,
    or chemically treated (e.g., recovery of chemicals, purification, effluent
    discharge, etc.).


CLS 205/99
TXT Purifying electrolyte:

    Subject matter under subclass 98 wherein the electrolyte is purified by
    removing or inactivating contaminants or interferents therefrom (e.g.,
    dummying, ion exchange, precipitation, filtering, activated carbon
    treatment, complexation, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, for processes of chemical or
    physical purification of liquids in general.


CLS 205/100
TXT Treating rinse solution (e.g., rinse water, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 98 wherein the process fluid treated is a
    rinse solution (e.g., recovery and reuse of rinse water, recovery of
    plating chemicals from rinse water, etc.).


CLS 205/101
TXT Regenerating or maintaining electrolyte (e.g., self-regulating bath,
    etc.):Subject matter under subclass 98 wherein the electrolyte ingredients
    are regenerated or  maintained to optimum condition (e.g., self-regulating
    bath, recirculation of electrolyte through metal pieces to supply metal
    ions for plating, etc.).


CLS 205/102
TXT Depositing predominantly single metal or alloy coating on single metal or
    alloy using specified waveform other than pure DC:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein a predominantly single metal or
    alloy coating is deposited on single metal or alloy utilizing an electric
    current which is not pure DC (e.g., stepped voltage, etc.).


CLS 205/103
TXT Reversing current or voltage:

    Subject matter under subclass 102 wherein the specified waveform is a
    reversing current or voltage which has a positive and negative component
    (e.g., periodic reversed current, superimposed AC on DC, etc.).


CLS 205/104
TXT Nonreversing pulsed current or voltage:

    Subject matter under subclass 103 wherein the specified waveform
    repetitively changes from one current or voltage level to another (e.g.,
    pulses of current separated by periods of no current flow, etc.).


CLS 205/105
TXT Depositing predominantly single metal or alloy coating on nonmetal using
    specified waveform other than pure DC or 60 Hz sine wave AC (e.g., single
    metal  or alloy coating within or above pores of anodic oxide layer, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the current or voltage used is
    other than pure DC or 60 Hz sine wave AC (e.g., periodic reversed current,
    pulsed current, superimposed AC on DC, etc.) and wherein a predominantly
    single metal or alloy is deposited on nonmetal (e.g., copper on anodic
    oxide, etc.).

    (1)     Note. A metal is defined as an electropositive chemical element
    characterized by ductility, malleability, luster, conductivity of heat and
    electricity, which can replace the hydrogen of an acid and forms bases with
    the hydroxyl radical.


CLS 205/106
TXT Forming nonmetal coating using specified waveform other than pure DC or 60
    Hz sine wave AC (e.g., anodic oxide coating, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the electric current is not pure
    DC or 60 Hz sine wave AC (e.g., stepped voltage, etc.) and where the
    coating formed is predominantly a nonmetal (e.g., anodic oxide, chromate,
    Si, phosphate, Se, etc.).

    (1)     Note. The terminology "nonmetal" is treated as excluding alloys and
    elemental metal.


CLS 205/107
TXT Reversing current or voltage:

    Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein the specified waveform is a
    reversing current or voltage which has a positive and negative component
    (e.g., periodic reversed current, superimposed AC on DC, etc.).


CLS 205/108
TXT Nonreversing pulsed current or voltage:

    Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein the specified waveform
    repetitively changes from one current or voltage level to another (e.g.,
    pulses of current separated by periods of no current flow, etc.) and
    wherein the pulses contain no reversed pulses.


CLS 205/109
TXT Coating contains embedded  solid material (e.g., particles, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein solid material becomes embedded in
    the coating as a distinct phase and the solid material is supplied by solid
    material in the electrolyte or solid material sprinkled or placed upon a
    substrate and embedded in the coating as it forms.


CLS 205/110
TXT Abrasive article produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 109 wherein the article produced has abrasive
    utility (e.g., substrate coated with a nickel layer containing embedded
    silicon carbide particles or diamond particles, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, for other
    methods of preparing an abrasive tool.


CLS 205/111
TXT Coating is dendritic or nodular:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the coating process is performed
    to achieve a dendritic or nodular coating (e.g., nodular copper, etc.).


CLS 205/112
TXT Coating is discontinuous single metal or alloy layer (e.g., islands, porous
    layer, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the coating process is performed
    to achieve a metal layer which has a plurality of discontinuities therein
    (e.g., microporous layer, islands, etc.).


CLS 205/113
TXT Coating is microcracked:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein the discontinuous coating is
    described as microcracked (e.g., microcracked chromium, etc.).


CLS 205/114
TXT Uniting two separate solid materials:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the electrolytic coating is used
    to unite distinct articles or parts of an article one to another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 592+ for miscellaneous process of
    manufacture, assembly and disassembly; subclasses 424, 458+, 460, and
    527.1+ for processes of coating combined with assembly and/or metal working
    steps.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, appropriate subclasses for the process of
    uniting surfaces by a metallurgical bond.


CLS 205/115
TXT Repairing:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the electrolytic coating is used
    to restore a previously worn or degraded coating (e.g., worn bearing
    surfaces, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 402.01+ and 402.18 and the notes thereto
    for other processes of repair.


CLS 205/116
TXT Mirror or reflector produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein mirrors and reflectors are
    produced by electrolytic coating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    838+ for processes of making mirrors not provided for in a particular
    process class.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 162+ for processes of making optical
    elements by coating means other than electrodeposition or Class 204 coating
    process.


CLS 205/117
TXT Utilizing brush or absorbent applicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein a brush or absorbent applicator is
    utilized to apply electrolyte to the substrate and in which the brush or
    absorbent application comprises a counterelectrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93,     for subject matter wherein a coating is contacted as it forms with
    a solid member or material other than an electrode.


CLS 205/118
TXT Coating selected area:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein a coating is formed on at least
    one restricted or selected area of the substrate, the restricted or
    selected area or areas including less than the total surface area of the
    substrate.

    (1)     Note. Coating the entire substrate followed by removing selected
    areas of the coating are not herein included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52+,    for electrolytic marking.

    221+,   for subject matter wherein a selected area of an electrolytic or
    nonelectrolytic coating is treated after it is formed.


CLS 205/119
TXT Depositing ferromagnetic coating or coating ferromagnetic substrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein the coating that is deposited is
    ferromagnetic or the substrate onto which the coating is deposited is
    ferromagnetic.


CLS 205/120
TXT Design or ornamental article produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 directed to the preparation of designs
    and ornamental articles wherein decorative effects are produced by
    restricting the coatings to selected areas.


CLS 205/121
TXT Predominantly nonmetal electrolytic coating (e.g., anodic oxide, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 120 wherein the coating is predominantly
    comprised of nonmetal material such as, for example, an oxide formed by
    anodizing.


CLS 205/122
TXT Specified product produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 for the production of a product which is
    specified and which has a disclosed or claimed function wherein the coating
    of a selected area of a substrate either transforms the substrate into the
    specified product or simply serves to deposit material on a substrate which
    before coating was already identifiable as the specified product.


CLS 205/123
TXT Product is semiconductor or includes semiconductor:

    Subject matter under subclass 122 wherein the specified product is a
    semiconductor or includes a semiconductor as part of the product.

    (1)     Note. "Semiconductor" is a generic term for (a) a substance or
    material whose electronic conductivity at ordinary temperature is
    intermediate between that of a metal and an  insulator and whose
    conductivity is capable of being modified by the addition of a dopant, (b)
    an electronic device the main functioning parts are made from semiconductor
    materials.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass and subclasses indented hereunder include
    processes of electrolytic coating, per se, on or with a semiconductor
    material and combinations of electrolytic coating with an additional step
    or steps which are preparatory treatments that adapt the material for
    electrolytic coating or which perfect the electrolytic coating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Processes, for (a) combined
    processes and (b) certain unit operations of manufacturing a semiconductive
    substrate or device.


CLS 205/124
TXT Predominantly nonmetal electrolytic coating (e.g., anodic oxide, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 123 wherein the coating is predominantly
    comprised of nonmetal material such as, for example, an oxide formed by
    anodizing.


CLS 205/125
TXT Product is circuit board or printed circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 122 wherein the specified product is a
    circuit board or printed circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 829+ for processes of conductor or
    circuit  manufacturing on a flat or curved insulated substrate (e.g.,
    printed circuit, etc.).

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 250+ for
    structures in which a conductor is formed on or attached to a panel or
    sheet-like insulating body so as to make a preformed panel circuit
    arrangement (e.g., printed circuit, etc.)

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a single or plural layer stock material product which involves no more
    structure than a base having a conductive layer coated thereon or
    impregnated therein, see especially subclasses 411.1+ for a nonstructural
    composite product characterized solely by the composition of the layers,
    subclass 601 for metallic stock having a discontinuous surface component,
    e.g., printed circuit, and subclass 901 (a cross-reference art collection)
    for a printed circuit device.


CLS 205/126
TXT Electroless coating from bath containing metal ions and reducing agent
    prior to electrolytic coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 125 wherein prior to electrolytic coating a
    coating is deposited by electroless (i.e., autocatalytic) coating from a
    bath containing metal ions and a reducing agent.


CLS 205/127
TXT Product is printing member:

    Subject matter under subclass 122 for the preparation of the printing
    surface of a sheet, plate, roll, or other member employed in printing by
    electrolytically forming a coating on a selected area of the surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclass 401.1 and indented subclasses.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 300 through 310 for processes of making a printing
    plate utilizing  radiation imagery chemistry.


CLS 205/128
TXT Simultaneous or sequential coating of a plurality of separate articles:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein a selected area of each of a
    plurality of separate articles which may be the same as or different from
    each other are simultaneously or sequentially coated.

    (1)     Note.  The separate articles may be joined together to expedite the
    coating process.


CLS 205/129
TXT Selectively coating moving substrate of indeterminate length (e.g., strip,
    wire, fiber, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein the substrate moves past the
    location(s) where coating occurs and is characterized by having a length
    which is indeterminate.


CLS 205/130
TXT Completely coating one side of strip:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein one side of a strip is completely
    coated.


CLS 205/131
TXT Internal coating (e.g., coating inside of cylinder, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein the substrate has both internal
    and external  surfaces and a coating is applied to an internal surface.


CLS 205/132
TXT Moving counterelectrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein a moving counterelectrode is
    utilized.


CLS 205/133
TXT Directing electrolyte to selected area (e.g., jet plating, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein the electrolyte is directed to
    the selected area to be plated.

    (1)     Note.  Processes wherein the electrolyte is merely confined over a
    selected area of the substrate are not included herein.


CLS 205/134
TXT Partially submerging substrate in bath:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein during coating the substrate is
    only partially submerged in the electrolyte bath.


CLS 205/135
TXT Utilizing specified mask material:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein a mask made of specified material
    is utilized in coating a selected area of the substrate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    904 for etching resist compositions.


CLS 205/136
TXT Utilizing means other than mask:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein a selected area of the substrate
    is coated without the use of a mask.


CLS 205/137
TXT Coating moving substrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the substrate is moved during
    coating.

    (1)     Note.  Mere insertion of the substrate into or withdrawal from the
    electrolyte bath is  not considered to be movement for the purposes of this
    subclass.


CLS 205/138
TXT Indeterminate length (e.g., strip, wire, fiber, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 137 wherein the substrate moves past the
    location(s) where coating occurs and is characterized by having a length
    which is indeterminate

    (1)     Note.  Unless otherwise specified, a substrate in the form of a
    strip, wire or fiber of indeterminate length is considered to be a moving
    substrate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material in the form of a composite or plural component web or
    sheet and not elsewhere provided for.  See also the main definition of
    Class 428, sections VI, C. 4 and VI, C. 6.


CLS 205/139
TXT Predominantly aluminum substrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 138 wherein elemental aluminum is the major
    or predominant constituent of the substrate.


CLS 205/140
TXT Tin-containing coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 138 wherein the coating contains tin in
    either free or combined form.


CLS 205/141
TXT Zinc-containing coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 138 wherein the coating contains zinc in
    either free or combined form.


CLS 205/142
TXT Chromium-containing coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 138 wherein the coating contains chromium in
    either free or combined form.


CLS 205/143
TXT Rotary (e.g., barrel plating, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 137 wherein the article or articles being
    coated undergo rotary motion or wherein the container or holder supporting
    the article or articles undergoes rotary motion during coating.


CLS 205/144
TXT Utilizing fluidized bed (e.g., coating particles, flakes, granules, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 137 wherein a fluidized bed is utilized for
    coating substrate which, for example, may be in the form of particles,
    flakes, or granules.


CLS 205/145
TXT Simultaneous or sequential coating of a plurality of separate articles:

    Subject matter under subclass 137 wherein a plurality of separate articles
    which may be the same as or different from each other are simultaneously or
    sequentially coated.

    (1)     Note.  The separate articles may be joined together to expedite the
    coating process.


CLS 205/146
TXT Reciprocating substrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 137 wherein the substrate is moved back and
    forth during coating.


CLS 205/147
TXT Applying current to substrate without mechanical contact (e.g., liquid
    contact, bipolar electrode, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein electric current is applied to the
    substrate without mechanically contacting the substrate with a solid
    current-carrying member.


CLS 205/148
TXT Agitating or moving electrolyte during coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the electrolyte is agitated or
    moved during coating.


CLS 205/149
TXT Coating predominantly single metal or alloy substrate of specified shape:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the substrate is predominantly
    comprised of a single metal or alloy and in which the shape or
    configuration of the substrate is specified.


CLS 205/150
TXT Perforated, foraminous, or permeable substrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 149 wherein the substrate is perforated,
    foraminous, or permeable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 131+ and 596+
    for a stock material product in which a component includes apertures.  See
    also main definition of Class 428,  sections VI, C. 4 and VI, C. 6.

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 1+ for a knitted or open mesh fabric.


CLS 205/151
TXT Cylinder, roll, or hollow article:

    Subject matter under subclass 149 wherein the substrate is in the form of a
    cylinder, roll, or hollow article.


CLS 205/152
TXT Sheet, plate, or foil:

    Subject matter under subclass 149 wherein the substrate is in the form of a
    sheet, plate, or foil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150     and 161, for sheets of perforated, foraminous or permeable
    structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    150 and 151 for laminating processes combined with a Class 204 or Class 205
    coating step.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a composite or plural component
    web or sheet and not elsewhere provided for.  See also the main definition
    of Class 428, sections VI. C. 4 and VI. C. 6.


CLS 205/153
TXT Predominantly aluminum substrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 152 wherein elemental aluminum is the major
    or predominant constituent of the substrate.


CLS 205/154
TXT Tin-containing coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 152 wherein the coating contains tin in
    either free or combined form.


CLS 205/155
TXT Zinc-containing coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 152 wherein the coating contains zinc in
    either free or combined form.


CLS 205/156
TXT Chromium-containing coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 152 wherein the coating contains chromium in
    either free or combined form.


CLS 205/157
TXT Coating predominantly semiconductor substrate (e.g., silicon, compound
    semiconductor, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the major or predominant
    constituent of the substrate is a semiconductor.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 123, (1) Note, for     the definition of a
    semiconductor.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes processes of electrolytic coating,
    per se, on a semiconductor material and combinations of electrolytic
    coating with an additional step or steps which are preparatory treatments
    that adapt the material for electrolytic coating or which perfect the
    electrolytic coating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Processes, for (a) combined
    processes and (b) certain unit operations of manufacturing a semiconductive
    substrate or device.


CLS 205/158
TXT Coating a substrate predominantly comprised of nonconductive material to
    which conductive material or material which can be converted into
    conductive material has been added (e.g., nonconductive polymer substrate
    containing carbon or copper oxide particles, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the substrate predominantly
    comprises a mixture of a first material the electrical conductivity of
    which is insufficient to allow it to carry adequate current to be directly
    electroplated and a second material which is electrically conductive or can
    be treated to make it electrically conductive.

    (1)     Note. The substrate may be a homogeneous mixture of the first and
    second material or the second material may be present only at or near the
    surface of the substrate.

    (2)     Note. Coating with a conductive material is excluded and placed
    below, see subclasses 163 and 165-169.


CLS 205/159
TXT Coating predominantly nonmetal substrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the major or predominant
    constituent of the substrate is a nonmetal.


CLS 205/160
TXT Fabric substrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein the substrate is in the form of a
    fabric.

    (1)     Note. For coating of metallic wire cloth, see this class, subclass
    150.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 175+, 190,
    193, and 196+ for a stock material product embodying mechanically
    interengaged strands and strand portions (e.g., weave, knit, etc.).  See
    also main definition of Class 428, sections VI, C. 4 and VI, C. 6.

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 59+ for a coated or impregnated fabric.


CLS 205/161
TXT Perforated, foraminous, or permeable substrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein the substrate is perforated,
    foraminous, or permeable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 131+ and 596+
    for a stock material product in which a component includes apertures.  See
    also main definition of Class 428,  sections  Vl, C. 4 and VI, C. 6.

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 1+ for a knitted or open mesh fabric.


CLS 205/162
TXT Ceramic or glass substrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein the major or predominant
    constituent of the substrate is a ceramic or glass.


CLS 205/163
TXT Conductive material applied to substrate by painting, spraying, or
    immersion (e.g., electroless plating, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein conductive material is applied to
    the substrate by painting, spraying, or immersion before the substrate is
    electrolytically coated.


CLS 205/164
TXT Synthetic resin substrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein the major or predominant
    constituent of the substrate is a synthetic resin.


CLS 205/165
TXT Conductive material applied to substrate by vacuum or vapor deposition:

    Subject matter under subclass 164 wherein conductive material is applied to
    the substrate by vacuum or vapor deposition before the substrate is
    electrolytically coated.


CLS 205/166
TXT Conductive material applied to substrate by painting, spraying, or
    immersion:

    Subject matter under subclass 164 wherein conductive material is applied to
    the substrate by painting, spraying, or immersion before the substrate is
    electrolytically coated.


CLS 205/167
TXT Conductive material applied to substrate by plating from bath containing
    metal ions and reducing agent (e.g., electroless plating, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 164 wherein conductive material is applied to
    the substrate by plating from a bath containing metal ions and a reducing
    agent before the substrate is electrolytically coated.


CLS 205/168
TXT Resin contains etchable filler:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 wherein the synthetic resin contains a
    filler material which may be at least partially removed by etching.


CLS 205/169
TXT Conductive material is copper or nickel:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 wherein the major or predominant
    constituent of the conductive material is copper or nickel.


CLS 205/170
TXT Forming multiple superposed electrolytic coatings:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein a plurality of distinct superposed
    electrolytic coatings are formed on a substrate.

    (1)     Note.  A single coat, layer, or film built up of a series of
    substantially identical coatings, one superimposed or added to the other or
    others, is not placed here but may be found in the appropriate subclass
    dependent upon the composition of the layer or coat formed.  For example, a
    process of coating copper on a rotating surface that is repeatedly immersed
    in the electrolyte and withdrawn will be found in subclass 143 even though
    a great number of thin films join together to form one distinct coat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for stock material or articles having adjacent metal layers.


CLS 205/171
TXT At least one anodic coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 170 wherein one or more of the coatings
    consists essentially of an anodic coating or in which the anodic
    composition is an essential constituent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 628 for
    composite metallic stock material having an additional nonmetal component
    which is a compound of an adjacent metal.


CLS 205/172
TXT Predominantly aluminum substrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 171 wherein the substrate coated is
    predominantly aluminum (e.g., pure aluminum or an alloy in which the
    predominant ingredient is aluminum, etc.).


CLS 205/173
TXT Electrolytically depositing material only within or above pores of anodic
    coating (e.g., electrolytic coloring, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 172 wherein material is electrolytically
    deposited only within or above the pores of a porous anodic coating (e.g.,
    electrolytically depositing pigment material in the pores, etc.).


CLS 205/174
TXT Multiple anodic coatings:

    Subject matter under subclass 173 wherein multiple anodic coatings are
    formed.


CLS 205/175
TXT Multiple anodic coatings:

    Subject matter under subclass 171 wherein multiple anodic coatings are
    formed.


CLS 205/176
TXT At least one alloy coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 170 wherein one of the coatings consists
    essentially of an alloy (e.g. brass, bronze, etc.).

    (1)     Note. The coating must be alloy as deposited form the bath.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228,    for subject matter wherein the coating forms an alloy as a result
    of a heat treatment.


CLS 205/177
TXT At least one predominantly zinc metal coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 170 wherein one of the coatings is
    predominantly zinc.


CLS 205/178
TXT At least one chromium-containing coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 170 wherein one of the coatings contains
    chromium in the free metal or combined state (e.g., chromium, chromate,
    chromium oxide, etc.).


CLS 205/179
TXT Multiple chromium-containing coatings:

    Subject matter under subclass 178 wherein more than one of the coatings
    contain chromium in the free metal or combined state.


CLS 205/180
TXT At least one predominantly nickel metal coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 178 wherein one of the coatings is
    predominantly nickel metal (e.g., Cu-Ni-Cr, etc.).


CLS 205/181
TXT At least one predominantly nickel metal coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 170 wherein at least one of the coatings is
    predominantly nickel metal.


CLS 205/182
TXT At least one predominantly copper metal coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 170 wherein at least one of the coatings is
    predominantly copper metal.


CLS 205/183
TXT Forming nonelectrolytic coating before depositing predominantly single
    metal or alloy electrolytic coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein a permanent coating is formed by a
    nonelectrolytic coating process before a predominantly single metal or
    alloy coating is deposited by an electrolytic coating process.

    (1)     Note.  For this subclass and those indented hereunder a permanent
    coating is considered to comprise any material deposited on the substrate
    that remains as part of the finished article.


CLS 205/184
TXT Nonelectrolytic coating or coatings all contain single metal or alloy:

    Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein the nonelectrolytic coating or
    each one of multiple superposed nonelectrolytic coatings at least partially
    comprises a single metal or alloy.


CLS 205/185
TXT Nonelectrolytic coating from zincate or stannate bath:

    Subject matter under subclass 184 wherein a zincate or stannate bath is
    utilized to form a nonelectrolytic coating.


CLS 205/186
TXT Nonelectrolytic coating by vacuum or vapor deposition:

    Subject matter under subclass 184 wherein a nonelectrolytic coating is
    formed by vacuum or vapor deposition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165,    for processes of applying conductive material to a synthetic resin
    substrate by vacuum or vapor deposition before depositing electrolytic
    coating.


CLS 205/187
TXT Nonelectrolytic coating by plating from bath containing metal ions and
    reducing agent (e.g., electroless plating, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 184 wherein a nonelectrolytic coating is
    formed by plating from a bath containing metal ions and a reducing agent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167+,   for processes of applying conductive material to a synthetic resin
    substrate by plating from a bath containing metal ions and reducing agent
    before depositing electrolytic coating.


CLS 205/188
TXT Forming nonelectrolytic coating before forming nonmetal electrolytic
    coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein a permanent coating is formed by a
    nonelectrolytic coating process before a nonmetal coating is formed by an
    electrolytic coating process.

    (1)     Note.  For this subclass and those indented hereunder a permanent
    coating is considered to comprise any material deposited on the substrate
    that remains as part of the finished article.


CLS 205/189
TXT Predominantly titanium, vanadium, zirconium, niobium, hafnium, or tantalum
    nonelectrolytic coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 188 wherein the major or predominant
    constituent of the nonelectrolytic coating is elemental titanium, vanadium,
    zirconium, niobium, hafnium, or tantalum.


CLS 205/190
TXT Predominantly aluminum nonelectrolytic coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 188 wherein  elemental aluminum is the major
    or predominant constituent of the nonelectrolytic coating.


CLS 205/191
TXT Forming nonelectrolytic coating after depositing predominantly single metal
    or alloy electrolytic coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein a permanent coating is formed by a
    nonelectrolytic coating process after a predominantly single metal or alloy
    coating is deposited by an electrolytic coating process.

    (1)     Note.  For this subclass and those indented hereunder a permanent
    coating is considered to comprise any material deposited on the substrate
    that remains as part of the finished article.


CLS 205/192
TXT Nonelectrolytic coating by vacuum or vapor deposition of a predominantly
    single metal or alloy coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein a predominantly single metal or
    alloy nonelectrolytic coating is formed by vacuum or vapor deposition.


CLS 205/193
TXT Nonelectrolytic coating by immersion in bath of molten metal to form
    predominantly single metal or alloy coating (e.g., hot dipping, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein a predominantly single metal or
    alloy nonelectrolytic coating is formed by immersion in a bath of molten
    metal.


CLS 205/194
TXT Nonelectrolytic coating is predominantly nonmetal:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the major or predominant
    constituent of a nonelectrolytic coating is a nonmetal.


CLS 205/195
TXT Nonelectrolytic coating is ceramic, glass, or vitreous enamel:

    Subject matter under subclass 194 wherein the major or predominant
    constituent of a nonelectrolytic coating is a ceramic, a glass, or a
    vitreous enamel.


CLS 205/196
TXT Nonelectrolytic coating is predominantly organic material (e.g., paint,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 194 wherein an organic material is the major
    or predominant constituent of a nonelectrolytic coating.


CLS 205/197
TXT Nonelectrolytic coating is phosphorus- or chromium-containing (e.g.,
    phosphate, chromate, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 194 wherein the major or predominant
    constituent of a nonelectrolytic coating is a phosphorus-containing or
    chromium-containing material.


CLS 205/198
TXT Forming nonelectrolytic coating after forming nonmetal electrolytic coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein a permanent coating is formed by a
    nonelectrolytic coating process after a nonmetal coating is formed by an
    electrolytic coating process.

    (1)     Note.  For this subclass and those indented hereunder a permanent
    coating is considered to comprise any  material deposited on the substrate
    that remains as part of the finished article.


CLS 205/199
TXT Electrolytic coating is oxygen-containing (e.g., chromate, silicate, oxide
    formed by anodizing, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 198 wherein the electrolytic coating is an
    oxygen-containing material.


CLS 205/200
TXT Predominantly titanium, vanadium, zirconium, niobium, hafnium, or tantalum
    substrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 199 wherein the major or predominant
    constituent of the substrate is elemental titanium, vanadium, zirconium,
    niobium, hafnium, or tantalum.


CLS 205/201
TXT Predominantly aluminum substrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 199 wherein elemental aluminum is the major
    or predominant constituent of the substrate.


CLS 205/202
TXT Nonelectrolytic coloring (including nonelectrolytic coloring and sealing):

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein color is imparted to the
    substrate by the deposition of material by a nonelectrolytic coating
    process.

    (1)     Note.   Processes which include both     nonelectrolytic coloring
    and sealing     are included herein.


CLS 205/203
TXT Sealing:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the oxide-containing coating on
    the aluminum substrate is sealed by the incorporation of material into the
    oxide-containing coating by a nonelectrolytic coating process.

    (1)     Note.  Sealing by subjecting the substrate to an aqueous
    environment at an elevated temperature is included herein.


CLS 205/204
TXT Sealing agent includes organic constituent:

    Subject matter under subclass 203 wherein the nonelectrolytic coating
    process utilizes a sealing agent which includes an organic constituent.


CLS 205/205
TXT Treating substrate prior to coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein one or more preliminary
    preparatory treatments of the substrate to be coated are performed.

    (1)     Note.  For this subclass, and those indented hereunder a substrate
    is considered to be the object to be coated prior to the execution of any
    positively recited coating step.

    (2)     Note.  Processes which include the formation of a temporary coating
    which is completely removed prior to the formation of a permanent coating
    are included herein.

    (3)     Note.  The preliminary preparatory treatments of the substrate do
    not result in the deposition of  material that remains as part of the
    finished article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    640+,   for electrolytic erosion of a workpiece to change the shape or
    surface thereof (e.g., etching, polishing, etc.).

    687+,   for other electrolytic material treatment, especially subclasses
    705+ for electrolytic removal of foreign material from a metal or metal
    alloy (e.g., cleaning, etc.), per se.


CLS 205/206
TXT Contacting substrate with solid member or material (e.g., polishing,
    rolling, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 205 wherein the substrate is contacted with a
    solid member or material prior to coating.


CLS 205/207
TXT Heating substrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 wherein the substrate is heated prior to
    coating.

    (1)     Note.  The substrate may be heated prior to, simultaneous with or
    subsequent to the contact with the solid member or material.


CLS 205/208
TXT Blasting substrate with particulate material:

    Subject matter under subclass 205 wherein the substrate is impacted with
    particulate material prior to coating.


CLS 205/209
TXT Heating substrate other than by contact with liquid:

    Subject matter under subclass 205 wherein the substrate is heated prior to
    coating by a method which utilizes means other than contacting with a
    liquid.

    (1)     Note.  Processes which include cooling the substrate subsequent to
    heating but prior to coating are included herein.


CLS 205/210
TXT Treating substrate with liquid other than tap water (e.g., for removing
    foreign material, etching, activating, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 205 wherein the substrate is treated with a
    liquid other than tap water prior to coating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, for methods of cleaning in
    general.

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, for etching processes.


CLS 205/211
TXT Liquid is nonaqueous (e.g., hydrocarbon solvent, fused bath, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein the liquid with which the
    substrate is treated does not contain water.


CLS 205/212
TXT Predominantly titanium, vanadium, zirconium, niobium, hafnium, tantalum,
    molybdenum, or tungsten substrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein the major or predominant
    constituent of the substrate is elemental titanium, vanadium, zirconium,
    niobium, hafnium, tantalum, molybdenum, or tungsten.


CLS 205/213
TXT Predominantly aluminum substrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein elemental aluminum is the major
    or predominant constituent of the substrate.


CLS 205/214
TXT Graining or roughening chemically or electrolytically:

    Subject matter under subclass 213 wherein the substrate is either
    chemically or electrolytically grained or roughened.


CLS 205/215
TXT Predominantly copper, zinc, or tin substrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein the major or predominant
    constituent of the substrate is copper, zinc, or tin.


CLS 205/216
TXT Predominantly cobalt or nickel substrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein the major or predominant
    constituent of the substrate is cobalt or nickel.


CLS 205/217
TXT Predominantly iron or steel substrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein elemental iron is the major or
    predominant constituent of the substrate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    712+,   for electrolytic removal of nonelemental foreign material from a
    ferrous metal (e.g., cleaning a ferrous metal, etc.), per se.


CLS 205/218
TXT Steel containing chromium or nickel (e.g., stainless steel, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 217 wherein the substrate is predominantly
    iron which contains elemental chromium or nickel.


CLS 205/219
TXT Electrolytic treatment:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein the substrate is treated
    electrolytically prior to coating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    704+,   for electrolytic treatment of a metal or metal alloy, in general.


CLS 205/220
TXT Treating electrolytic or nonelectrolytic coating after it is formed:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein an electrolytic or a
    nonelectrolytic coating is treated subsequent to its formation to produce a
    modification of or change in character of the coating as distinguished from
    subsequent treatment of the object on which the coating is placed.

    (1)     Note. If a nonelectrolytic coating is treated, a step of
    electrolytic coating must precede the step of forming the nonelectrolytic
    coating or follow the treatment step.


CLS 205/221
TXT Selected area:

    Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein only a restricted selected area
    of the coating is treated, the restricted or selected area including less
    than the total surface area of the coating.


CLS 205/222
TXT Contacting with solid member or material (e.g., buffing, burnishing,
    polishing, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein the coating is contacted with a
    solid member or material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 90.01+ for burnishing in general.


CLS 205/223
TXT Etching of coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein the coating is etched.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221,    for process in which only a restricted or selected area of the
    coating is etched.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, for methods of etching glass, per
    se.  See the SEARCH CLASS notes thereunder.



CLS 205/224
TXT Heating:

    Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein the coating is heated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, particularly subclass 518 for processes of
    treating a metal substrate in   the solid or semi-solid state by a heating
    or cooling treatment to modify or maintain the internal physical structure
    (i.e., microstructure) or chemical properties of the metal.  See Class 148,
    section III, C, for the line to Class 204.

     (1)    Note.  Class 205 will take electrocoating processes that result in
    a metal layer formed or in metal being electrocoated by another material
    and combinations of electrocoating with other chemical treating operations
    that (a) involve preparatory treatment of metal substrates including
    heat-treatment which if claimed alone would be proper for Class 148 and (b)
    post-treatment solely of the electrocoated layer including heat-treatment
    which if claimed alone would be proper for Class 148. However, if the
    subsequent treatment modifies the original substrate or a combination of
    the original substrate and the electrocoated layer, placement will go
    elsewhere, including Class 148, if the other criteria for Class 148 are met.

     (2)    Note.  Interdiffusion of the electrocoated layer occurring during
    the coating operation or during the post-treatment operation is proper for
    Class 205 if limited to the interfacial region between the coating and the
    substrate, as a perfecting of the bond between the coating and the
    substrate.  If the electrocoated layer is completely melted in the
    post-treatment operation to perfect the bonding of the coating, this is
    proper for Class 205.  If multiple electrocoated regions are inter diffused
    to the extent of completely alloying with the loss of coating layer
    identity, but not substrate identity, this is proper for Class 205.
    However,  if the coating is completely interdiffused into a metal substrate
    to completely alloy the substrate, leaving no identifying layer on the
    substrate, placement goes to Class 148.


CLS 205/225
TXT Tin-containing coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 224 wherein the coating contains tin.


CLS 205/226
TXT Coating is fused (e.g., reflowing, flow brightening, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 225 wherein sufficient heat is applied to
    cause the tin-containing coating to melt.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 941 (a
    cross-reference art collection) for material produced by solid state
    alloying, e.g., diffusion, to the disappearance of an original layer.


CLS 205/227
TXT Single metal or alloy coating on single metal or alloy substrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 224 wherein the coating or each one of
    multiple superposed coatings is predominantly comprised of a single metal
    or alloy and the substrate is also predominantly comprised of a single
    metal or alloy.


CLS 205/228
TXT Coating is at least partially diffused or forms alloy:

    Subject matter under subclass 227 wherein sufficient heat is applied to at
    least partially diffuse coating material into an adjacent coating material,
    the substrate or both, or to cause the formation of an alloy of coating
    material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 941 (a
    cross-reference art collection) for material produced by solid state
    alloying, e.g., diffusion, to the disappearance of an original layer.


CLS 205/229
TXT Predominantly nonmetal electrolytic coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein the major or predominant
    constituent of the coating is a nonmetal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203,    for subject matter wherein an oxide-containing coating on an
    aluminum substrate is sealed.


CLS 205/230
TXT Utilizing fused bath:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein a nonaqueous electrolyte bath
    which is a substance or combination or mixture of substances which is
    heated above ordinary normal room temperature during the electrolysis in
    order to bring it to a fluid or liquid condition is utilized.

    (1)     Note.  These processes are usually        performed at high
    temperatures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    354+,   for processes of electrolytic synthesis from fused bath.


CLS 205/231
TXT Reactive coating (e.g., by diffusion, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 230 wherein a coating is formed by the
    reaction of a constituent of the substrate being coated with a constituent
    of the fused bath (e.g., boron diffuses into and reacts with iron of a
    steel substrate to form an iron-boride layer, etc.).


CLS 205/232
TXT Depositing predominantly alloy coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 230 wherein the coating is predominantly an
    alloy.

    (1)     Note. The coating must be an alloy as deposited from the bath.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228,    for subject matter wherein the coating forms an alloy as the result
    of a heat treatment.


CLS 205/233
TXT Depositing aluminum  coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 230 wherein the coating consists essentially
    of aluminum.


CLS 205/234
TXT Utilizing nonaqueous bath:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein an electrolyte bath containing no
    water is employed in the electrolytic coating process (e.g., a hydrocarbon
    solvent bath, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is intended to take water-free baths using
    solvents such as alcohol, amines, ethers, etc.


CLS 205/235
TXT Coating is predominantly organic material:

    Subject matter under subclass 234 wherein the coating consists of a
    material which is predominantly organic (e.g., polymer coating, etc.).


CLS 205/236
TXT Depositing predominantly alloy coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 234 wherein the coating is predominantly an
    alloy.

    (1)     Note.  The coating must be an alloy as deposited from the bath.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228,    for subject matter wherein the coating forms an alloy as the result
    of heat treatment.


CLS 205/237
TXT Depositing aluminum coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 234 wherein the coating consists essentially
    of aluminum.


CLS 205/238
TXT Depositing predominantly alloy coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the coating is predominantly an
    alloy.

    (1)     Note.  The coating must be an alloy as deposited from the bath.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228,    for subject matter wherein the coating forms an alloy as the result
    of a heat treatment.


CLS 205/239
TXT Copper-containing alloy:

    Subject matter under subclass 238 wherein the alloy contains metallic
    copper (i.e., copper in the free uncombined state) as one of the essential
    constituents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291+,   for processes of electrolytically coating with copper.


CLS 205/240
TXT Including zinc (e.g., brass, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 239 wherein the copper-containing alloy also
    contains metallic zinc as one of the essential constituents.


CLS 205/241
TXT Including tin (e.g., bronze, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 239 wherein the copper-containing alloy also
    contains metallic tin as one of the essential constituents.


CLS 205/242
TXT Including noble metal (e.g., gold-copper-cadmium alloy, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 239 wherein the copper-containing alloy also
    contains a noble metal (i.e., Au, Ag, and   Platinum group metal) as an
    essential constituent.


CLS 205/243
TXT Chromium is predominant constituent:

    Subject matter under subclass 238 wherein the alloy contains metallic
    chromium as the major or predominant constituent (e.g., 40% Cr - 30% Fe -
    30% Ni etc.).


CLS 205/244
TXT Zinc is predominant constituent:

    Subject matter under subclass 238 wherein the alloy contains metallic zinc
    as the predominant or major constituent (e.g., 70% Zn - 30% Cd, etc.).


CLS 205/245
TXT Including iron group metal (i.e., Fe, Co, or Ni):

    Subject matter under subclass 244 wherein the zinc alloy also contains
    metallic iron group metal or metals as essential constituent(s) (e.g., 70%
    Zn - 30% Fe,  50% Zn - 20%Fe - 30% Co, etc.).


CLS 205/246
TXT Nickel:

    Subject matter under subclass 245 wherein the iron group metal is or
    wherein the iron group metals include nickel (e.g., 70% Zn - 20%Ni - 10%
    Co, etc.).


CLS 205/247
TXT Gold is predominant constituent:

    Subject matter under subclass 238 wherein the alloy contains gold as the
    predominant or major constituent (e.g., 60% Au - 40% Ag, etc.).


CLS 205/248
TXT Utilizing sulfite-containing bath:

    Subject matter under subclass 247 wherein the electrolyte bath contains a
    source of sulfite as an essential ingredient.


CLS 205/249
TXT Utilizing phosphonic or phosphinic acid or derivative-containing bath:

    Subject matter under subclass 247 wherein the electrolyte bath contains a
    source of phosphonic acid or phosphinic acid or a derivative thereof
    (e.g., sodium phosphonate, ethylene diamine tetraphosphonic acid, etc.).


CLS 205/250
TXT Including iron group metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 247 wherein the alloy includes an iron group
    metal (i.e., Fe, Ni, or Co) as an essential constituent.


CLS 205/251
TXT Including arsenic, indium, or thallium:

    Subject matter under subclass 247 wherein the alloy contains arsenic indium
    or thallium as an essential constituent.


CLS 205/252
TXT Tin, lead, or germanium is predominant constituent:

    Subject matter under subclass 238 wherein tin, lead, or germanium is the
    major or predominant alloy constituent.


CLS 205/253
TXT Utilizing organic compound-containing bath:

    Subject matter under subclass 252 wherein the electrolyte bath contains an
    organic compound as an essential ingredient (e.g., peptone, glue, etc.).


CLS 205/254
TXT Organic sulfoxy-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 253 wherein the organic compound contains a
    sulfoxy group(sulfur bonded  to at least one oxygen) (e.g., benzyl sulfonic
    acid, sodium naphthalene sulfonate, etc.).


CLS 205/255
TXT Group VIII metal is predominant constituent (i.e., Fe, Co, Ni, Pt, Pd, Rh,
    Ru, Ir, or Os):

    Subject matter under subclass 238 wherein a group VIII metal (i.e., Fe, Co,
    Ni, Pt, Pd, Rh, Ru, Ir, or Os) is the major or predominant constituent in
    the alloy.


CLS 205/256
TXT Utilizing specified anode:

    Subject matter under subclass 255 wherein a specific anode is used in the
    process (e.g., Ni-Co alloy anode, platinum anode, etc.).


CLS 205/257
TXT Platinum group metal-containing alloy (i.e., contains Pt, Pd, Rh, Ru, Ir,
    or Os):

    Subject matter under subclass 255 wherein the alloy contains a platinum
    group metal (i.e., Pt, Pd, Rh, Ru, Ir, or Os) as an essential constituent.


CLS 205/258
TXT Phosphorus-containing alloy:

    Subject matter under subclass 255 wherein the alloy contains phosphorus as
    an essential ingredient.


CLS 205/259
TXT Utilizing organic compound-containing bath:

    Subject matter under subclass 255 wherein the electrolyte bath contains an
    organic compound as an essential ingredient.


CLS 205/260
TXT Organic sulfoxy-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 259 wherein the organic compound contains a
    sulfoxy group (e.g., butyne sulfonic acid, sodium naphthalene sulfonate,
    etc.).


CLS 205/261
TXT Depositing predominantly single metal coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 for coating predominantly with a single
    metallic element (e.g., indium, etc.).


CLS 205/262
TXT Group VIIB transition metal (i.e., Mn, Tc, or Re):

    Subject matter under subclass 261 wherein the single metal consists
    essentially of manganese, technetium, or rhenium.

    (1)     Note.  Technetium is also known by     the names eka-manganese and
    masurium.


CLS 205/263
TXT Silver:

    Subject matter under subclass 261 wherein the single metal consists
    essentially of silver.


CLS 205/264
TXT Platinum group metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 261 wherein the single metal consists
    essentially of a platinum group metal (i.e., Pt, Pd, Rh, Ru, Ir, or Os).


CLS 205/265
TXT Palladium:

    Subject matter under subclass 264 wherein the single platinum group metal
    consists essentially of palladium.


CLS 205/266
TXT Gold:

    Subject matter under subclass 261 wherein the single metal consists
    essentially of gold.


CLS 205/267
TXT Utilizing organic compound-containing bath:

    Subject matter under subclass 266 wherein the electrolyte bath contains an
    organic compound as an essential ingredient.


CLS 205/268
TXT Inorganic cyanide-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 267 wherein the electrolyte bath contains a
    source of inorganic cyanide (e.g., sodium cyanide, sodium gold cyanide,
    etc.).


CLS 205/269
TXT Cobalt:

    Subject matter under subclass 261 wherein the single metal consists
    essentially of cobalt.


CLS 205/270
TXT Iron:

    Subject matter under subclass 261 wherein the single metal consists
    essentially of iron.


CLS 205/271
TXT Nickel:

    Subject matter under subclass 261 wherein the single metal consists
    essentially of nickel.


CLS 205/272
TXT Utilizing specified anode:

    Subject matter under subclass 271 wherein a specified anode (e.g.,
    particular alloy, defined structure, etc.) is used.


CLS 205/273
TXT Utilizing sulfamate-containing bath:

    Subject matter under subclass 271 wherein the electrolyte bath contains
    sulfamic ions.


CLS 205/274
TXT Utilizing organic sulfoxy compound-containing bath:

    Subject matter under subclass 271 wherein the electrolyte bath contains an
    organic compound having a sulfoxy group (e.g., naphthalene sulfonic acid,
    etc.).


CLS 205/275
TXT And acetylenic compound-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 274 wherein the electrolyte bath also
    contains an organic compound which has an acetylenic bond (i.e., -CC-)
    (e.g., 1,4-dihydroxy-2 butyne, etc.).


CLS 205/276
TXT And polyether-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 274 wherein the electrolyte bath also
    contains a polyether compound (e.g., having (CxH2x0)y groups wherein  "y"
    is an integer greater than 1, etc.).


CLS 205/277
TXT And nitrogen-heterocyclic compound-containing

    Subject matter under subclass 274 wherein the electrolyte bath also
    contains an organic compound having a nitrogen containing heterocyclic ring.


CLS 205/278
TXT Utilizing oxygen-heterocyclic compound-
    containing bath:

    Subject matter under subclass 271 wherein the electrolyte bath contains an
    organic compound having an oxygen containing heterocyclic ring (e.g.,
    coumarin, etc.).


CLS 205/279
TXT Utilizing nitrogen-heterocyclic compound-
    containing bath:

    Subject matter under subclass 271 wherein the electrolyte bath contains an
    organic compound having a nitrogen containing heterocyclic ring.


CLS 205/280
TXT Utilizing organic carbonyl compound-
    containing bath:

    Subject matter under subclass 271 wherein the electrolyte bath contains an
    organic compound having a carbonyl group (e.g., acetic acid, ketone,
    aldehyde, etc.).


CLS 205/281
TXT Cadmium:

    Subject matter under subclass 261 wherein the single metal consists
    essentially of cadmium.


CLS 205/282
TXT Utilizing inorganic cyanide-containing bath:

    Subject matter under subclass 281 wherein the electrolyte bath contains a
    source of inorganic cyanide (e.g., sodium cyanide, potassium cadmium
    cyanide, etc.).


CLS 205/283
TXT Chromium:

    Subject matter under subclass 261 wherein the single metal consists
    essentially of chromium.


CLS 205/284
TXT Utilizing specified anode:

    Subject matter under subclass 283 wherein a specified anode (e.g.,
    particular alloy special structure, etc.) is used.


CLS 205/285
TXT Colored chromium coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 283 wherein the chromium deposit is described
    as colored (e.g., black, yellow, blue, iridescent, etc.).


CLS 205/286
TXT Utilizing inorganic fluorine-containing bath:

    Subject matter under subclass 283 wherein the electrolyte bath contains a
    source of inorganic fluorine (e.g., sodium fluoride, etc.).


CLS 205/287
TXT Utilizing trivalent chromium-containing bath:

    Subject matter under subclass 283 wherein the chromium is present in the
    bath at least partially in the trivalent state.


CLS 205/288
TXT Thiocyanate-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 287 wherein the trivalent chromium containing
    bath also contains a source of thiocyanic ions (i.e., -SCN).


CLS 205/289
TXT Organic carboxyl compound-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 287 wherein the trivalent chromium-containing
    bath also contains an organic compound having a carboxyl group (e.g.,
    formic acid, acetic acid, etc.).


CLS 205/290
TXT Utilizing organic compound-containing bath:

    Subject matter under subclass 283 wherein the electrolyte bath contains an
    organic compound.


CLS 205/291
TXT Copper:

    Subject matter under subclass 261 wherein the single metal consists
    essentially of copper.


CLS 205/292
TXT Utilizing specified anode:

    Subject matter under subclass 291 wherein a specified anode (e.g.,
    particular alloy, defined structure, etc.) is used.


CLS 205/293
TXT Utilizing inorganic cyanide-containing bath:

    Subject matter under subclass 291 wherein the electrolyte bath contains a
    source of inorganic cyanide ion (e.g., sodium cyanide, potassium copper
    cyanide, etc.).


CLS 205/294
TXT Selenium or tellurium containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 293 wherein the electrolyte bath also
    contains selenium or tellurium as a constituent thereof (e.g. , sodium
    selenide, tellurium sulfate, etc.).


CLS 205/295
TXT Utilizing alkaline bath:

    Subject matter under subclass 291 wherein the electrolyte bath has a pH of
    over 7.


CLS 205/296
TXT Utilizing organic compound-containing bath:

    Subject matter under subclass 291 wherein the electrolyte bath contains an
    organic compound.


CLS 205/297
TXT Nitrogen-heterocyclic compound-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 296 wherein the organic compound contains a
    nitrogen containing heterocyclic ring.


CLS 205/298
TXT And organic sulfur compound-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 297 wherein the electrolyte bath also
    contains an organic compound having sulfur as a constituent thereof (e.g.,
    sulfonic acid, etc.).


CLS 205/299
TXT Lead:

    Subject matter under subclass 261 wherein the single metal consists
    essentially of lead.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    597+,   for electrolytic synthesis of lead from an aqueous bath.


CLS 205/300
TXT Tin:

    Subject matter under subclass 261 wherein the single metal consists
    essentially of tin.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    610+,   for electrolytic synthesis of tin from an aqueous bath.


CLS 205/301
TXT Utilizing alkaline bath:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein the electrolyte bath has a pH of
    over 7.


CLS 205/302
TXT Utilizing organic compound-containing bath:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein the electrolyte bath contains an
    organic compound.


CLS 205/303
TXT Organic carbonyl compound-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 302 wherein the organic compound contains a
    carbonyl group as a constituent thereof (e.g., carboxylic acid, ketone,
    etc.).


CLS 205/304
TXT Aldehyde-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 303 wherein the organic compound is an
    aldehyde or contains an aldehyde group (e.g., formaldehyde, benzaldehyde,
    etc.).


CLS 205/305
TXT Zinc:

    Subject matter under subclass 261 wherein the single metal consists
    essentially of zinc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    602+,   for electrolytic synthesis of zinc from an aqueous bath.


CLS 205/306
TXT Utilizing inorganic cyanide-containing bath:

    Subject matter under subclass 305 wherein the electrolyte bath contains a
    source of inorganic cyanide (e.g., sodium cyanide, potassium zinc cyanide,
    etc.).


CLS 205/307
TXT Nitrogen-heterocyclic compound-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 306 wherein the electrolyte bath also
    contains an organic compound having a nitrogen containing heterocyclic ring.


CLS 205/308
TXT Organic carbonyl compound-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 306 wherein the electrolyte bath also
    contains an organic compound having a carbonyl group as a constituent
    thereof (e.g., carboxylic acid, ketone, aldehyde, etc.).


CLS 205/309
TXT Utilizing alkaline bath:

    Subject matter under subclass 305 wherein the electrolyte bath has a pH of
    over 7.


CLS 205/310
TXT Nitrogen-heterocyclic compound-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 309 wherein the electrolyte bath contains an
    organic compound having a nitrogen-heterocyclic ring as a constituent
    thereof.


CLS 205/311
TXT Utilizing organic compound-containing
    bath:

    Subject matter under subclass 305 wherein the electrolyte bath contains an
    organic compound.


CLS 205/312
TXT Nitrogen-heterocyclic compound-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 311 wherein the organic compound contains a
    nitrogen-heterocyclic ring as a constituent thereof.


CLS 205/313
TXT Organic sulfur compound-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 311 wherein the organic compound contains
    sulfur as a constituent thereof (e.g., sulfonic acid, etc.).


CLS 205/314
TXT Organic carbonyl compound-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 311 wherein the organic compound contains a
    carbonyl group.


CLS 205/315
TXT Antimony:

    Subject matter under subclass 261 wherein the single metal consists
    essentially of antimony.


CLS 205/316
TXT Forming nonmetal coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 for the electrolytic production of
    coatings which contain nonmetal material which has been electrolytically
    produced (e.g., anodic oxide, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Certain nonmetallics may variously be semiconductive.
    Examples of such include (but are not limited to) selenium, tellurium,
    silicon carbide, diamond, copper oxide, etc.  However, without positive
    recitation that a nonmetallic material is semiconductive, placement is
    proper hereunder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS SUBCLASS:

    123,    for electrolytic coating a selected area on a semiconductor
    substrate.

    157,    for electrolytic coating of a semiconductor substrate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, for (a) combined
    processes and (b) certain unit operations of manufacturing a semiconductive
    substrate or device.


CLS 205/317
TXT Coating is predominantly organic material:

    Subject matter under subclass 316 wherein the nonmetal material is
    predominantly organic.


CLS 205/318
TXT Phosphorus-containing coating (e.g., phosphate, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 316 wherein the nonmetal containing coating
    comprises phosphorus as an essential constituent thereof.


CLS 205/319
TXT Chromium-containing coating (e.g., chromate, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 316 wherein the nonmetal containing coating
    comprises chromium as an essential constituent thereof.


CLS 205/320
TXT Predominantly iron or steel substrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 316 wherein the nonmetal coating is formed on
    an article having an iron or steel surface.


CLS 205/321
TXT Predominantly magnesium substrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 316 wherein the nonmetal coating is formed on
    an article having a surface of magnesium or an alloy having magnesium as
    the predominant constituent thereof.


CLS 205/322
TXT Predominantly titanium, vanadium, zirconium, niobium, hafnium, or tantalum
    substrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 316 wherein the nonmetal coating is formed on
    an article having a surface of titanium, tantalum, zirconium, niobium
    (columbium), hafnium, or vanadium or an alloy having one of these metals as
    the predominant constituent thereof.


CLS 205/323
TXT Predominantly aluminum substrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 316 wherein the nonmetal coating is formed on
    an article having a surface of aluminum or an alloy having aluminum as the
    predominant constituent thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 25.03 for processes for the production of
    barrier layer electrolytic type devices and subclasses 25.41+ for processes
    for the production of electric condensers.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 62.2 for electrolytes for electrolytic
    condensers or rectifiers.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 500+ for
    electrolytic condensers or rectifiers.


CLS 205/324
TXT Anodizing:

    Subject matter under subclass 323 wherein the nonmetal coating is formed by
    anodizing (e.g., anodic oxide, etc.).


CLS 205/325
TXT Specified alloy substrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 324 wherein the additional metals alloyed
    with the aluminum substrate are identified.


CLS 205/326
TXT Utilizing alkaline bath:

    Subject matter under subclass 324 wherein the anodizing takes place in an
    electrolyte bath having a pH of over 7.


CLS 205/327
TXT Utilizing chromium-containing bath:

    Subject matter under subclass 324 wherein the anodizing takes place in an
    electrolyte bath comprising chromium dissolved therein as an essential
    constituent.


CLS 205/328
TXT Utilizing sulfuric acid-containing bath:

    Subject matter under subclass 324 wherein the anodizing takes place in an
    electrolyte bath having sulfuric acid as an essential ingredient.


CLS 205/329
TXT Organic compound-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 328 wherein the electrolyte bath also
    contains an organic compound as an essential constituent thereof (e.g.,
    pyridine, etc.).


CLS 205/330
TXT Organic carboxyl compound-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 329 wherein the organic compound contains a
    carboxyl radical or a salt thereof (e.g., -COOH, -COONa, etc.) as a
    constituent thereof.


CLS 205/331
TXT Organic sulfoxy compound-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 329 wherein the organic compound contains a
    sulfoxy group (e.g., sulfonic acid, saccharin, etc.) as a constituent
    thereof.


CLS 205/332
TXT Utilizing organic compound-containing bath:

    Subject matter under subclass 324 wherein the electrolyte bath contains an
    organic compound (e.g., acetic acid, sulfonic acid, etc.) as an essential
    constituent thereof.


CLS 205/333
TXT Oxide-containing coating (e.g., lead dioxide, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 316 wherein the nonmetal containing coating
    contains an oxide (e.g., peroxide, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    465+,   for electrolytic synthesis of peroxides form an aqueous bath.


CLS 205/334
TXT ELECTROLYTIC SYNTHESIS (PROCESS, COMPOSITION, AND METHOD OF PREPARING
    COMPOSITION):

    Processes under the class definition for the preparation of chemical
    compounds or of elements by means of electrolytic action.

    (1)     Note.  These may be produced either by breaking them down from
    complex forms to simpler ones or by building up complex forms from simpler
    ones.

    (2)     Note.  Branching processes for the synthesis of compounds or
    elements, one branch of which falls within the class definition and one
    branch of which is excluded thereby and which is provided for elsewhere,
    are classified in the outside class and cross-referenced here.

    (3)     Note.  Processes of synthesis wherein the products of electrolysis
    are merely admixed within or outside the cell to produce the desired
    material are included, here, when claimed in combination with the
    electrolysis.  For example, a metal salt solution may be prepared in the
    anodic zone of a cell by electrolytic solution  of a metal anode, while in
    the cathodic zone of the same or another cell an alkali hydroxide may be
    formed.  Mixing the two solutions together to produce a metal hydroxide
    outside the cell would not be a subsequent step sufficient to take the
    process outside the class.

    (4)     Note.  Combination processes including precedent steps for the
    preparation of the material for the electrolytic synthesis step, in which
    one or more of the precedent steps may result in the preparation of a
    desired product elsewhere classifiable if claimed alone, are included here
    and cross-referenced to the outside class.  For example, if in a process
    including the electrolytic preparation of a free metal, the leach solution
    is treated with a precipitating agent in order to remove one or more of the
    constituents as insoluble salts or as free metals in precedent operations,
    thus constituting preparation of the leach solution for electrolytic
    separation, the process is classified in this class even though
    crystallization, filtering, or other conventional separation steps for the
    salt or metal is claimed and such product is considered a valuable
    by-product of the process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    687+,   for the purification of definite chemical compounds by electrolysis
    which does not include a synthesis of the desired compound.  However, when
    a substance is electrochemically reconstituted, the process is considered
    electrochemical synthesis.  For example, impure oxygen is fed to the
    cathode of a cell and pure oxygen is recovered at the anode.


CLS 205/335
TXT Involving measuring, analyzing, or testing during synthesis:

    Subject matter under subclass 334 wherein the process includes a step of
    measuring, analyzing, or testing during synthesis.


CLS 205/336
TXT Utilizing fused bath (e.g., eliminating anode effect in a fused bath, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein a nonaqueous electrolyte bath
    which is a solid substance or combination or mixture of substances which is
    heated above ordinary normal room temperature during synthesis in order to
    bring it to a fluid or liquid condition is utilized.

    (1)     Note.  These processes are usually performed at high temperatures.

    (2)     Note.  Anode effect is the condition where a high net voltage drop
    occurs between the electrodes of the electrolytic cell and, consequently,
    cell efficiency decreases.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    354+,   for processes of electrolytic synthesis from a fused bath.


CLS 205/337
TXT Current, current density, or voltage:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein the current, current density, or
    voltage of the electrolytic synthesis process is measured, analyzed, or
    tested during synthesis.


CLS 205/338
TXT Utilizing subatmospheric or superatmospheric pressure during synthesis:

    Subject matter under subclass 334 wherein the synthesis process is
    performed under a pressure other than the normal pressure in the
    surrounding atmosphere.


CLS 205/339
TXT Utilizing magnet or magnetic field during synthesis:

    Subject matter under subclass 334 wherein a magnet or magnetic field is
    used during synthesis.


CLS 205/340
TXT Utilizing electromagnetic wave energy during synthesis (e.g., visible
    light, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 334 wherein the electrolytic action is
    supplemented by the application of electromagnetic wave energy.

    (1)     Note.  The term "electromagnetic waves" as employed herein
    includes, for example, x-rays and gamma rays; ultraviolet, infrared, and
    visible light rays; and short electric and radio waves.  Energy which
    produces merely a thermal effect or heat waves, per se, is excluded.


CLS 205/341
TXT Utilizing AC or specified wave form other than pure DC:

    Subject matter under subclass 334 wherein the synthesis process utilizes
    alternating current or an electric current which is not pure DC (e.g.,
    stepped voltage, nonreversing pulsed current or voltage, etc.)


CLS 205/342
TXT Reversing nonpulsed current or voltage:

    Subject matter under subclass 341 wherein the specified wave form is a
    reversing nonpulsed current or voltage which has a positive and negative
    component (e.g., periodic reversed current, superimposed AC on DC, etc.)


CLS 205/343
TXT Involving fuel cell:

    Subject matter under subclass 334 wherein an electrolytic synthesis cell is
    combined with a fuel cell or is converted from a fuel cell to a synthesis
    cell.

    (1)     Note.  A fuel cell is a device used to produce an electrical
    current wherein at least one reactant is fed to the cell.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    429,    Chemistry: Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process, appropriate subclasses for the various parts or operation of the
    fuel cell, especially subclasses 12 through 46.


CLS 205/344
TXT Utilizing bipolar membrane:

    Subject matter under subclass 334 wherein at least one membrane of the
    bipolar type (i.e., a membrane having anionic properties on one side and
    cationic properties on the other) is utilized during synthesis.


CLS 205/345
TXT Utilizing plural distinct electrolytic cells where the cells are separate
    containers:

    Subject matter under subclass 334 wherein a plurality of separate and
    distinct electrolytic containers not having a common wall are utilized
    during synthesis.

    (1)     Note.  This does not include multiple anodes and cathodes utilized
    in the same container (e.g., filter press cells, etc.)


CLS 205/346
TXT Including decomposing or purifying cell:

    Subject matter under subclass 345 wherein at least one of the containers is
    utilized for breaking down the bath, electrolyte, effluent, or product, or
    for removing undesired constituent electrolytically.


CLS 205/347
TXT Identical plural distinct cells:

    Subject matter under subclass 345 wherein a plurality of identical distinct
    containers not having a common wall are utilized during synthesis.


CLS 205/348
TXT Utilizing fluidized bed or particulate electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 334 wherein a fluidized bed or particulate
    electrode is utilized during synthesis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 280 for the
    fluidized bed electrode or particulate electrode structure or composition.


CLS 205/349
TXT Recycling electrolytic product produced during synthesis back to the
    production cell:

    Subject matter under subclass 334 wherein at least a portion of the product
    produced during synthesis is sent back to the cell where the product was
    produced.


CLS 205/350
TXT Treating electrode, diaphragm, or membrane during synthesis (e.g.,
    corrosion prevention, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 334 wherein at least one electrode,
    diaphragm, or membrane is treated during synthesis.

    (1)     Note.  Specific treatment can include electrode polarity reversal,
    forming coatings on an electrode in situ during synthesis, feeding an
    oxidizing or reducing gas to an electrode, etc.


CLS 205/351
TXT Treating electrolyte or bath without removal from cell other than
    agitating, moving, regenerating, replenishing, or replacing consumed
    material during synthesis:

    Subject matter under subclass 334 wherein the electrolyte or bath is
    treated during synthesis other than agitating, moving, regenerating,
    replenishing, or replacing consumed material.

    (1)     Note.  Specific treatment can include applying energy impulses,
    varying current density, adding a catalyst to the electrolyte or bath
    during synthesis, etc.

    (2)     Note.  A bath is the fluid used for electrolytic processes in a
    cell including the electrolyte.


CLS 205/352
TXT Utilizing emulsion, dispersion, or suspension electrolyte system:

    Subject matter under subclass 334 wherein an emulsion, dispersion, or
    suspension is utilized as the electrolyte or bath.

    (1)     Note.  An emulsion is a fluid consisting of a microscopically
    heterogeneous mixture of two normally immiscible liquid phases, in which
    one liquid forms minute droplets suspended in the other liquid.

    (2)     Note.  A dispersion is a fluid consisting of individual extremely
    fine particles of solids, which are usually of colloidal size, suspended
    therein.

    (3)     Note.  A suspension is a fluid consisting of finely divided
    colloidal particles, too small to settle, but kept in motion by Brownian
    movement, floating therein.


CLS 205/353
TXT Utilizing electrolyte system having two or more separate immiscible layers:

    Subject matter under subclass 334 wherein an electrolyte system having two
    or more separate, immiscible layers are utilized.

    (1)     Note.  Immiscible is used to describe liquids that will not mix; a
    liquid that dissolves a solute from a solution with which it does not mix.


CLS 205/354
TXT Utilizing fused bath:

    Subject matter under subclass 334 wherein the electrolytic synthesis is
    carried out in an electrolytic medium consisting of a substance or
    combination or mixture of substances which is heated above normal room
    temperature during synthesis in order to bring it to a fluid or liquid
    condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230+,   for coating by electrolysis in a fused bath.

    413+,   for processes of electrolytic synthesis from an aqueous electrolyte
    bath containing a portion or a pool of molten material (e.g., source
    material, etc.).


CLS 205/355
TXT Organic compound produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 354 wherein organic compounds are produced by
    synthesis.

    (1)     Note.  "Organic" denotes all compounds having carbon therein and
    which are further characterized by the presence in a molecule of (a) two
    carbon atoms bonded together or (b) one atom of carbon bonded to at least
    one atom of hydrogen or halogen or (c) one atom of carbon bonded to at
    least one atom of nitrogen by a single or double bond, with the proviso
    that hydrocyanic acid, cyanogen, isocyanic acid, isothiocyanic acid,
    cyanogen halides, cyanamide, fulminic acid, and metal carbides are excluded
    from being organic compounds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    413+,   for processes of preparing organic compounds from an aqueous bath
    or bath other than a fused bath by synthesis.


CLS 205/356
TXT Halogen containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 355 wherein the organic compound produced
    contains halogen.


CLS 205/357
TXT Inorganic compound produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 354 wherein inorganic compounds are produced
    by synthesis.

    (1)     Note.  An inorganic compound is one that does not meet the
    definition of "organic" as elaborated in the (1) Note of subclass 355.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    464+,   for processes of preparing inorganic compounds from an aqueous bath
    or bath other than a fused bath by synthesis.


CLS 205/358
TXT Silicon, boron, or phosphorus containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 357 wherein the inorganic compound produced
    contains silicon, boron, or phosphorus.


CLS 205/359
TXT Halogen containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 357 wherein the inorganic compound produced
    contains halogen.


CLS 205/360
TXT Nitrogen containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 357 wherein the inorganic compound produced
    contains nitrogen.

    (1)     Note. The cyanides, hydrocyanic acid, cyanogen, isocyanic acid,
    cyanamide, dicyandiamide, isothiocyanic acid, fulminic acid, and metal
    nitrides are included herein; also included is ammonia and inorganic
    ammonia derivatives.


CLS 205/361
TXT Sulfur containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 357 wherein the inorganic compound produced
    contains sulfur.


CLS 205/362
TXT Oxygen containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 357 wherein the inorganic compound produced
    contains oxygen.


CLS 205/363
TXT Alloy produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 354 wherein alloys are produced.

    (1)     Note.  A substance which is recited as an impurity is not
    considered to be a positive constituent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    557+,   for processes of preparing alloys from an aqueous bath or a bath
    other than a fused bath by synthesis.


CLS 205/364
TXT Silicon or aluminum containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 363 wherein the alloy contains silicon or
    aluminum (e.g., silicon or aluminum in a free or uncombined state, etc.) as
    one of the constituents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    372+,   for processes of preparing aluminum from a fused bath by synthesis.


CLS 205/365
TXT Iron, cobalt, or nickel containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 363 wherein the alloy contains iron, cobalt,
    or nickel as one of the  constituents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370,    for processes of preparing iron, cobalt, or nickel from a fused
    bath by synthesis.

    587+,   for a process of preparing iron and cobalt from an aqueous bath or
    a bath other than a fused bath by synthesis.

    594+,   for a process of preparing nickel from an aqueous bath or a bath
    other than a fused bath by synthesis.


CLS 205/366
TXT Lead, zinc, titanium, zirconium, or hafnium containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 363 wherein the alloy contains elemental
    lead, zinc, titanium, zirconium, or hafnium as one of the constituents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    369,    for processes of preparing lead or zinc from a fused bath by
    synthesis.

    397,    for processes of preparing zirconium or hafnium from a fused bath
    by synthesis.

    398+,   for processes of preparing titanium from a fused bath by synthesis.

    597+,   for processes of preparing lead from an aqueous bath or a bath
    other than a fused bath by synthesis.

    602+,   for processes of preparing zinc from an aqueous bath or a bath
    other than a fused bath by synthesis.


CLS 205/367
TXT Single metal produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 354 wherein single metals are produced during
    synthesis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230+,   for processes of electrolytically coating with a single metal from
    a fused bath.

    234+,   for processes of electrolytically coating with a single metal from
    an nonaqueous bath.

    261+,   for processes of electrolytically coating with a single metal from
    an aqueous bath.

    560+,   for processes of preparing single metals from an aqueous bath or a
    bath other than a fused bath by synthesis.


CLS 205/368
TXT Rare earth metal (At. No. 21, 39, or 57-71):

    Subject matter under subclass 367 wherein the single metal produced is a
    rare earth metal (i.e., scandium, yittrium, or lanthanides).


CLS 205/369
TXT Lead, zinc, or cadmium:

    Subject matter under subclass 367 wherein the single metal produced is
    lead, zinc, or cadmium.


CLS 205/370
TXT Iron, cobalt, nickel, or manganese:

    Subject matter under subclass 367 wherein the single metal produced is
    iron, cobalt, nickel, or manganese.


CLS 205/371
TXT Vanadium, niobium, tantalum, chromium, molybdenum, or tungsten (V, Nb, Ta,
    Cr, Mo, or W):

    Subject matter under subclass 367 wherein the single metal produced is
    vanadium, niobium, tantalum, chromium, molybdenum, or wolfram (tungsten).


CLS 205/372
TXT Aluminum:

    Subject matter under subclass 367 wherein aluminum is the single metal
    produced.


CLS 205/373
TXT And elemental alkali or alkaline earth metal, magnesium, beryllium, or
    nonmetal element other than halogen produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 372 wherein elemental alkali or alkaline
    earth metal, magnesium, beryllium, or a nonmetal element other than halogen
    is produced (e.g., sodium, magnesium, sulfur, etc.).


CLS 205/374
TXT Utilizing specified current distributing means or method other than wire
    connecting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 372 wherein specified current distributing
    means or methods other than wire connection means are utilized (e.g.,
    specified bus or current collector or distributor means arrangement,
    reduced current at the edge of the cell, etc.)

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include a mere current supply.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 228+ for
    electrolytic cells with current control means.


CLS 205/375
TXT Utilizing specified distance between cathode and anode:

    Subject matter under subclass 372 wherein a specified distance between the
    anode and cathode is utilized.

    (1)     Note.  The distance (or range) must be specified numerically.


CLS 205/376
TXT Agitating or moving electrolyte or bath during synthesis:

    Subject matter under subclass 372 wherein the electrolyte or bath is
    agitated or moved during synthesis.


CLS 205/377
TXT Utilizing membrane or diaphragm between electrodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 372 wherein a membrane or diaphragm between
    electrodes is utilized to separate the electrodes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 251 for liquid
    electrode diaphragm-type cells, subclasses 282 and 283 for electrodes with
    diaphragms, and subclasses 295 and 296 for diaphragm elements and their
    compositions.


CLS 205/378
TXT Utilizing spacer between electrodes:

    Subject matter subclass 372 wherein one or more spacers are utilized
    between electrodes.

    (1)     Note.  The spacers do not pass ions, gases, electrolyte, or bath
    material therethrough as membranes or diaphragms.  The spacers are
    utilized, for example, to maintain a constant distance between electrodes
    of the same polarity or as supports for the electrodes, etc.


CLS 205/379
TXT Utilizing nonmetal cell lining other than inorganic carbon or graphite:

    Subject matter under subclass 372 wherein a nonmetal cell lining other than
    inorganic carbon or graphite is utilized (e.g., ceramic, cermet, metal
    borides, nitrides, etc.).


CLS 205/380
TXT Utilizing specified electrode other than consumable electrode (e.g.,
    cylindrical, tapered, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 372 wherein a specified electrode shape or
    structure other than a consumable electrode is utilized during synthesis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 280+ for
    electrodes utilized in carrying out the processes herein provided for and
    combinations of such electrodes with other elements not provided for in any
    foregoing subclasses and subclasses 243+ for cells utilized in carrying out
    the processes.


CLS 205/381
TXT Inclined electrode (not horizontal or vertical):

    Subject matter under subclass 380 wherein at least one of the electrodes
    utilized during synthesis is inclined or not horizontal or vertical.


CLS 205/382
TXT Liquid electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 380 wherein at least one of the electrodes
    utilized during synthesis is a liquid (e.g., liquid mercury, aluminum,
    sodium, etc.).


CLS 205/383
TXT Bipolar electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 380 wherein at least one of the electrodes
    utilized during synthesis is a bipolar-type electrode (i.e., a planar
    electrode wherein one surface serves as an anode and the other surface
    serves as a cathode).


CLS 205/384
TXT Coated electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 380 wherein at least one of the electrodes is
    coated or laminated and utilized during synthesis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     for the process directed to the formation or deposition by an
    electrolytic action of a permanent coating material or materials upon a
    base, electrolyte compositions therefor, and methods of making said
    electrolyte compositions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 290+ for coated
    or laminated electrodes.


CLS 205/385
TXT Specified electrode composition other than consumable inorganic carbon or
    graphite:

    Subject matter under subclass 380 wherein at least one of the electrodes
    utilized during synthesis has been specified other than a consumable
    inorganic carbon or graphite containing electrode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 280+ for a
    specified electrode composition.


CLS 205/386
TXT Nonconsumable electrode having inorganic carbon or graphite and a nonmetal
    containing material (e.g., cermet, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 385 wherein at least one of the electrodes is
    a nonconsumable electrode composed of inorganic carbon or graphite and a
    nonmetal containing material (e.g., metal boride, carbide, sulfide, oxide,
    nitride or cermet, etc.).


CLS 205/387
TXT Nonmetal containing (e.g., metal oxide, carbide, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 385 wherein at least one of the electrodes
    contains a nonmetal (e.g., metal boride, carbide, sulfide, oxide, nitride
    or cermet, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 291 and 294 for
    specified nonmetal electrode compositions.


CLS 205/388
TXT Utilizing coated or treating electrode connecting or positioning means
    (e.g., coating, cooling, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 372 wherein an electrode connecting or
    positioning means which is coated or treated is utilized during synthesis
    (e.g., utilizing cooling fluid through connecting or positioning means,
    etc.).


CLS 205/389
TXT Specific replenishing, replacing, or feeding of consumable electrode
    material:

    Subject matter under subclass 372 wherein a specific method of
    replenishing, replacing, or feeding of consumable electrode material is
    performed during synthesis.

    (1)     Note.  Self-baking or Soderberg or prebaked electrodes are included.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, utilizing spent
    potliner as electrode material, electrode support manipulation or feeding
    methods or means of joining new electrodes to old, replacing worn or
    consumed electrode stubs, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 294 for the
    composition of the carbonaceous electrodes.


CLS 205/390
TXT Involving specific process startup other than mere turn on:

    Subject matter under subclass 372 wherein a specific process startup other
    than mere turn on is utilized.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, initially raising the
    temperature, conditioning or treating the electrode at startup, etc.


CLS 205/391
TXT Collecting or controlling fumes or gases produced during synthesis:

    Subject matter under subclass 372 wherein the fumes or gases produced
    during synthesis are collected or controlled.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, utilizing a collection
    hood, a vacuum, purifying generated gases, etc.


CLS 205/392
TXT Utilizing specific method or means to feed or replenish electrolyte or bath
    material:

    Subject matter under subclass 372 wherein a specific method or means to
    feed or replenish electrolyte or bath material is utilized during synthesis.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, utilizing specifically
    placed feeding pipe or conduit, utilizing a dam, a movable piston in a
    conduit, etc.


CLS 205/393
TXT Purifying or treating electrolyte or bath prior to or after synthesis:

    Subject matter under subclass 372 wherein the electrolyte or bath is
    purified or treated prior to or after synthesis.


CLS 205/394
TXT Bath contains fluorine or bromine containing compound other than cryolite
    (NA3AlF6):

    Subject matter under subclass 372 wherein a bath containing fluorine or
    bromine containing compounds other than cryolite (Na3AlF6) is utilized
    during synthesis (e.g., potassium, sodium, lithium fluorides or borides,
    etc.).

    (1)     Note.  This also excludes the mixture of aluminum fluoride and
    sodium fluoride.


CLS 205/395
TXT Fluorine or bromine containing compound contains alkaline earth metal,
    beryllium, or magnesium (Ca, Sr, Ba, Ra, Be, or Mg):

    Subject matter under subclass 394 wherein the fluorine or bromine
    containing compound contains calcium, strontium, barium, radium, beryllium,
    or magnesium.


CLS 205/396
TXT Utilizing specified process step to maintain bath temperature:

    Subject matter under subclass 372 wherein a specified process step is
    utilized to maintain bath temperature.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, recycling heated air or
    gas during the process, utilizing a flammable liquid, utilizing a heater,
    etc..


CLS 205/397
TXT Titanium, zirconium, or hafnium (Ti, Zr, or Hf):

    Subject matter under subclass 367 wherein the single metal produced is
    titanium, zirconium, or hafnium.


CLS 205/398
TXT Titanium:

    Subject matter under subclass 397 wherein the single metal produced is
    titanium.


CLS 205/399
TXT Utilizing specified electrode structure or anode alloy composition:

    Subject matter under subclass 398 wherein a specified electrode shape or
    structure or a specific anode alloy is utilized during synthesis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 280+ for an
    electrode of specified structure and composition.


CLS 205/400
TXT Utilizing diaphragm or barrier between anode and cathode:

    Subject matter under subclass 398 wherein a diaphragm or barrier between
    the anode and cathode is utilized.


CLS 205/401
TXT Bath contains metal oxide or fluorine containing compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 398 wherein the fused electrolyte bath for
    producing titanium contains a metal oxide (e.g., titanium oxide, etc.) or a
    fluorine containing compound (e.g., potassium fluoride, etc.).


CLS 205/402
TXT Alkaline earth metal, beryllium, or magnesium:

    Subject matter under subclass 367 wherein the single metal produced is
    calcium, strontium, barium, radium,  beryllium, or magnesium.


CLS 205/403
TXT Beryllium:

    Subject matter under subclass 402 wherein the single metal produced is
    beryllium.


CLS 205/404
TXT Magnesium:

    Subject matter under subclass 402 wherein the single metal produced is
    magnesium.


CLS 205/405
TXT Bath contains alkali metal or fluorine containing compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 404 wherein the fused electrolyte bath
    contains an alkali metal or fluorine containing compound (e.g., sodium
    chloride or magnesium fluoride, etc.).


CLS 205/406
TXT Alkali metal (Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs, or Fr):

    Subject matter under subclass 367 wherein the single metal produced is an
    alkali metal (i.e., Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs, or Fr).


CLS 205/407
TXT Lithium, sodium, or potassium:

    Subject matter under subclass 406 wherein the alkali metal is lithium,
    sodium, or potassium.


CLS 205/408
TXT Sodium:

    Subject matter under subclass 407 wherein the alkali metal is sodium.


CLS 205/409
TXT Bath contains halide other than sodium chloride:

    Subject matter under subclass 408 wherein the fused electrolyte bath
    contains a halide other than or in addition to sodium chloride (e.g.,
    calcium chloride, sodium fluoride, etc.).


CLS 205/410
TXT Silicon, boron, or phosphorus produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 354 wherein elemental silicon, boron, or
    phosphorus is produced.


CLS 205/411
TXT Halogen produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 354 wherein elemental halogen (i.e.,
    fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine, or astatine) is produced.


CLS 205/412
TXT Heating or cooling electrolyte or bath in production cell during synthesis
    except in fused bath:

    Subject matter under subclass 334 wherein the electrolyte or bath is heated
    or cooled in the cell in which synthesis is taking place except in a fused
    or molten bath.


CLS 205/413
TXT Preparing organic compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 334 wherein organic compound is produced from
    an aqueous bath or other bath.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 355, (1) Note, for the definition of "organic
    compound."

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    316,    for processes of forming a nonmetal coating which is predominantly
    organic material.

    354+,   for processes of preparing organic compounds from a fused bath.


CLS 205/414
TXT By polymerization:

    Subject matter under subclass 413 wherein the organic compound is a polymer
    produced by a reaction in which two or more molecules of the same or
    different substance (monomer or reactant) combine to form a single compound
    (polymer).

    (1)     Note.  A polymer requires two or more repeating units or moieties
    derived from monomers or reactants.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    522,    Synthetic Resins and Natural Rubbers-Part of the Class 520 Series,
    for processes of preparing a solid polymer utilizing wave energy.


CLS 205/415
TXT By dimerization:

    Subject matter under subclass 414 wherein the polymer produced is a dimer
    (a polymer of two molecules of the same substance) formed by a
    electrochemical coupling process.

    (1)     Note.  The term "coupling" as employed herein refers to the joining
    together of two molecules of the same compound and does not include the
    coupling of two different compounds.


CLS 205/416
TXT Nitrogen containing dimer produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 415 wherein the dimer produced contains
    nitrogen.


CLS 205/417
TXT Adiponitrile:

    Subject matter under subclass 416 wherein the dimer produced is
    adiponitrile (i.e., NC(CH2)4CN, dimer of acrylonitrile).


CLS 205/418
TXT Carbonyl or hydroxy containing dimer produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 415 wherein the dimer contains a carbonyl
    (>C=O) or hydroxyl (-OH) group (e.g., pinacols, dimethyl sebacate, etc.).


CLS 205/419
TXT From ring containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 414 wherein the polymer is produced from a
    reactant (monomer) which contains a ring structure (e.g., benzene ring,
    pyridine, etc.).


CLS 205/420
TXT Silicon, boron, or phosphorus containing compound produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 413 wherein the organic compound produced
    contains silicon, boron, or phosphorus.


CLS 205/421
TXT Carbohydrate or derivative containing compound produced (e.g.,
    streptomycin, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 413 wherein the organic compound produced is
    a carbohydrate or derivative (e.g., streptomycin, ribose, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  See Class 536, subclass 1.1, for the definition of
    "carbohydrate or derivative."


CLS 205/422
TXT Heterocyclic compound produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 413 wherein the organic compound produced
    contains a hetero(cyclic) ring system having carbon and least one hetero
    atom of oxygen, sulfur, nitrogen, selenium, or tellurium as ring members.


CLS 205/423
TXT Nitrogen containing hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 422 wherein the hetero ring system contains a
    nitrogen atom as a ring member.


CLS 205/424
TXT Polycyclo ring system having the hetero ring as one of the cyclos:

    Subject matter under subclass 423 wherein the hetero ring system is a
    polycyclo ring system (i.e., a fused or bridged ring system) having the
    hetero ring as one of the cyclos in the ring system.


CLS 205/425
TXT Diverse hetero atoms in the polycyclo ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 424 wherein the polycyclo ring system
    contains at least two different hetero atoms as ring members.


CLS 205/426
TXT The hetero ring is six-membered:

    Subject matter under subclass 423 wherein the nitrogen containing hetero
    ring has six ring members.


CLS 205/427
TXT Oxygen containing hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 422 wherein the hetero ring system contains
    an oxygen atom as a ring member.


CLS 205/428
TXT The hetero ring is three-membered:

    Subject matter under subclass 427 wherein the oxygen containing hetero ring
    has three ring members.


CLS 205/429
TXT Cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system containing compound produced
    (e.g., steroids, etc.)

    Subject matter under subclass 413 wherein the organic compound produced
    contains a cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring nucleus.


CLS 205/430
TXT By fluorination of organic compound other than hydrocarbon or halogenated
    hydrocarbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 413 wherein the organic compound is
    fluorinated during synthesis with the exception of hydrocarbons or
    halocarbons.

    (1)     Note.  The organic compound which is fluorinated during synthesis
    may contain fluorine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    460,    for processes of preparing fluorine containing hydrocarbons.


CLS 205/431
TXT Nitrogen containing compound produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 413 wherein the organic compound produced
    contains nitrogen.


CLS 205/432
TXT Nitrogen bonded to nitrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 431 wherein two nitrogens of the organic
    compound are bonded directly to each other (e.g., azo compounds, hydrazide,
    etc.).


CLS 205/433
TXT Carbon triple bonded to nitrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 431 wherein the nitrogen is triple bonded to
    carbon (-C=N).


CLS 205/434
TXT Carboxamide:

    Subject matter under subclass 431 wherein the nitrogen containing compound
    is an amide (-C-N) of a carboxylic acid.


CLS 205/435
TXT -COO- group containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 431 wherein the nitrogen containing compound
    contains a -C-O group (e.g., carbamate, amino acid, etc.).


CLS 205/436
TXT Oxygen containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 431 wherein the nitrogen containing compound
    also contains oxygen.


CLS 205/437
TXT Hydroxy containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 436 wherein the oxygen containing compound
    contains a hydroxyl group (-OH).


CLS 205/438
TXT Carbocyclic ring containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 431 wherein the nitrogen containing compound
    contains a ring or ring system in which all ring members are carbons.


CLS 205/439
TXT Carbonate or peroxy compound produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 413 wherein the organic compound produced is
    a carbonate (-O-C-O- containing) or a peroxide (-O-O- containing).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    427,    for processes of preparing a cyclic carbonate from an aqueous bath
    or a bath other than a fused bath.


CLS 205/440
TXT Carboxylic acid or derivative produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 413 wherein the organic compound produced is
    a carboxylic acid (-COOH containing) or functional derivative (including
    carboxylic acid ester, nonhetero anhydride, salt, and acyl halide).


CLS 205/441
TXT Carboxylic acid ester produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 440 wherein the compound produced is a
    carboxylic acid ester (-C-O-C containing).


CLS 205/442
TXT Carbocyclic ring containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 440 wherein the carboxylic acid or derivative
    produced contains a ring or ring system in which all ring members are
    carbons.


CLS 205/443
TXT Carbonyl or hydroxy group containing other than as part of the carboxylic
    acid or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 440 wherein the carboxylic acid or derivative
    produced contains a carbonyl group (C=O) or a hydroxyl group (-OH) which is
    other than as part of a -C-OH or derivative group.


CLS 205/444
TXT Sulfur containing compound produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 413 wherein the organic compound produced
    contains sulfur.


CLS 205/445
TXT Oxygen containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 444 wherein the sulfur containing compound
    also contains oxygen.


CLS 205/446
TXT Ketone produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 413 wherein the organic compound produced is
    ketone (-C-C-C containing).


CLS 205/447
TXT By electrolytic oxidation only:

    Subject matter under subclass 446 wherein the ketone is produced by an
    electrolytic oxidation process only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    446,    for processes of preparing ketone involving an electrolytic or
    chemical reduction process step.


CLS 205/448
TXT Aldehyde produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 413 wherein the organic compound produced is
    aldehyde (-C-H containing).


CLS 205/449
TXT By electrolytic oxidation only:

    Subject matter under subclass 448 wherein the aldehyde is produced by an
    electrolytic oxidation process only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    448,    for processes of preparing aldehyde involving an electrolytic or
    chemical reduction process step.


CLS 205/450
TXT Alcohol or alcoholate produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 413 wherein the organic compound produced is
    an alcohol or alcholate (C-OM wherein M is a metal) (e.g., sodium methylate
    CH3ONa, etc.).


CLS 205/451
TXT Halogen containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 450 wherein the alcohol or alcoholate
    produced contains halogen.


CLS 205/452
TXT By electrolytic oxidation only:

    Subject matter under subclass 450 wherein the alcohol or alcoholate is
    produced by an electrolytic oxidation process only.


CLS 205/453
TXT Carbocyclic ring containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 450 wherein the alcohol or alcoholate
    produced contains a ring or ring system in which all ring members are
    carbons.


CLS 205/454
TXT Four or more hydroxy groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 450 wherein the alcohol or alcoholate
    produced contains four or more hydroxyl groups (e.g., sorbitol, etc.).


CLS 205/455
TXT Oxygen containing compound produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 413 wherein the organic compound produced
    contains oxygen (e.g., ethyl ether, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    427+,   for processes of preparing a cyclic ether or a cyclic acetal from
    an aqueous bath or a bath other than a fused bath.


CLS 205/456
TXT Carbocyclic ring containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 455 wherein the oxygen containing compound
    produced contains a ring or ring system in which all the ring members are
    carbons.


CLS 205/457
TXT Metal containing compound produced:

    Subject matter subclass 413 wherein the organic compound produced contains
    a metal (elements of atomic number 3-4, 11-13, 19-33, 37-51, 55-84 or 87).


CLS 205/458
TXT Lead containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 457 wherein the metal is lead.


CLS 205/459
TXT Halogen containing compound produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 413 wherein the organic compound produced
    contains halogen (fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine, or astatine).


CLS 205/460
TXT Fluorine containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 459 wherein the halogen containing compound
    produced contains fluorine.


CLS 205/461
TXT Acyclic:

    Subject matter under subclass 459 wherein the halogen containing compound
    contains no ring system (e.g., methyl chloride, etc.).


CLS 205/462
TXT Hydrocarbon produced:

    Subject matter subclass 413 wherein the organic compound produced consists
    of carbon and hydrogen only.


CLS 205/463
TXT Carbocyclic ring containing:

    Subject matter subclass 462 wherein the hydrocarbon compound produced
    contains a ring or ring system in which all the ring members are carbons.


CLS 205/464
TXT Preparing inorganic compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 334 wherein inorganic compounds are produced
    from an aqueous bath or a bath other than a fused bath by synthesis.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 357, (1) Note, for the definition of "inorganic
    compound."

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    357+,   for processes of preparing inorganic compounds from a fused bath by
    synthesis.


CLS 205/465
TXT Peroxy compound produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 464 wherein a peroxy compound is produced
    during synthesis.

    (1)     Note.  A peroxy compound contains the O-O or O2 group in which two
    oxygen atoms are singly linked.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not contain quadrivalent metal dioxides
    (i.e., MnO2, PbO2, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333,    for processes of electrolytically coating with peroxides.


CLS 205/466
TXT Hydrogen peroxide:

    Subject matter under subclass 465 wherein hydrogen peroxide is produced
    during synthesis.


CLS 205/467
TXT Utilizing mercury or amalgam electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 466 wherein a mercury or amalgam electrode is
    utilized during synthesis.


CLS 205/468
TXT Utilizing inorganic carbon containing electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 466 wherein at least one electrode containing
    inorganic carbon is utilized during synthesis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 294 for specified
    inorganic carbon electrode compositions.


CLS 205/469
TXT Boron containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 465 wherein a boron containing peroxy is
    produced during synthesis.


CLS 205/470
TXT Phosphorus containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 465 wherein a phosphorus containing peroxy is
    produced during synthesis.


CLS 205/471
TXT Sulfur containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 465 wherein a sulfur containing peroxy is
    produced during synthesis.


CLS 205/472
TXT Utilizing specified electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 471 wherein an electrode of specified
    structure or composition is utilized during synthesis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 280+ for an
    electrode of specified structure or composition.


CLS 205/473
TXT Perhalogen acid or salt thereof produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 464 wherein the inorganic compound produced
    is a perhalogen acid or salt thereof (e.g., periodic acid, etc.).


CLS 205/474
TXT Perchlorate or perchloric acid:

    Subject matter under subclass 473 wherein the perhalogen acid or salt
    thereof produced is a perchlorate (e.g., sodium perchlorate NaClO4, etc.)
    or perchloric acid (HClO4).


CLS 205/475
TXT Permanganate produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 464 wherein the inorganic compound produced
    is a permanganate (e.g., sodium permanganate NaMnO4, etc.).


CLS 205/476
TXT Potassium containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 475 wherein the permanganate or permanganic
    produced contains potassium.


CLS 205/477
TXT Metal containing compound produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 464 wherein the inorganic compound produced
    contains a metal (elements of atomic number 3-4, 11-13, 19-33, 37-51, 55-84
    or 87).


CLS 205/478
TXT Carbon containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 477 wherein the metal containing compound
    produced contains carbon.


CLS 205/479
TXT Cyanide:

    Subject matter under subclass 478 wherein the carbon containing compound
    produced is a cyanide in which the carbon is bound to nitrogen by a triple
    bond (e.g., potassium ferricyamide K3Fe (CN)6 etc.).


CLS 205/480
TXT Carbonate or bicarbonate:

    Subject matter under subclass 478 wherein the carbon containing compound
    produced is a carbonate (CO3 containing) or a bicarbonate (HCO3 containing).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    465,    for processes of preparing a percarbonate or peroxycarbonate from
    an aqueous bath or a bath other than a fused bath.


CLS 205/481
TXT Lead containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 480 wherein the carbonate or bicarbonate
    produced contains lead.


CLS 205/482
TXT Alkali metal containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 480 wherein the carbonate or bicarbonate
    produced contains an alkali metal (Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs, or Fr).


CLS 205/483
TXT Chromium containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 477 wherein the metal containing compound
    produced contains chromium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    178+,   for processes of forming multiple superposed electrolytic coatings
    wherein at least one of the coatings contains chromium.

    243,    for processes of depositing predominantly alloy coating having
    chromium as the predominate constituent.

    283+,   for processes of depositing predominantly chromium coating.


CLS 205/484
TXT Chromate:

    Subject matter under subclass 483 wherein the chromium containing compound
    produced is chromate (CrO4  containing).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199,    for processes of forming nonelectrolytic coating after forming
    electrolytic coating where the electrolytic coating contains chromate.

    319,    for processes of forming a nonmetal coating which contains chromate.


CLS 205/485
TXT Alkali metal containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 484 wherein the chromate produced contains an
    alkali metal (Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs, or Fr).


CLS 205/486
TXT Chromic acid:

    Subject matter under subclass 483 wherein the chromium containing compound
    is chromic acid (H2CrO4).


CLS 205/487
TXT Utilizing specified electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 486 wherein a specified electrode structure
    or composition is utilized during synthesis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 280+ for
    specified electrode structure and composition.


CLS 205/488
TXT Phosphorus containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 477 wherein the metal containing compound
    produced contains phosphorus.


CLS 205/489
TXT Phosphate:

    Subject matter under subclass 488 wherein the phosphorus containing
    compound produced is a phosphate (PO4 containing).


CLS 205/490
TXT Alkali or alkaline earth metal, beryllium, or magnesium containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 489 wherein the phosphate produced contains
    an alkali or alkaline earth metal, beryllium, or magnesium (Li, Na, K, Rb,
    Cs, Fr, Be, Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba, or Ra).


CLS 205/491
TXT Nitrogen containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 477 wherein the metal containing compound
    produced contains nitrogen (e.g., nitrosodisulfonate, etc.).


CLS 205/492
TXT Nitrite:

    Subject matter under subclass 491 wherein the nitrogen containing metal
    compound is a nitrite (NO2 containing).


CLS 205/493
TXT Nitrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 491 wherein the nitrogen containing metal
    compound is a nitrate (NO3 containing).


CLS 205/494
TXT Sulfur containing (e.g., sulfide, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 477 wherein the metal containing compound
    produced contains sulfur (e.g., sodium sulfide, etc.).


CLS 205/495
TXT Sulfite, bisulfite, or dithionite:

    Subject matter under subclass 494 wherein the sulfur containing compound
    produced is a sulfite (SO3 containing), a bisulfite (HSO3 containing), or a
    dithionite (S2O4 containing).

    (1)     Note.  Dithionite may be termed hydrosulfite or hyposulfite in the
    patents.


CLS 205/496
TXT Sulfate or bisulfate:

    Subject matter under subclass 494 wherein the sulfur containing compound
    produced is a sulfate (SO4 containing) or a bisulfate (HSO4 containing).


CLS 205/497
TXT Group VIII metal, lead, or copper containing (Fe, Co, Ni, Rn, Rh, Pd, Os,
    Ir, Pt, Pb, or Cu):

    Subject matter under subclass 496 wherein the sulfate produced contains a
    group VIII metal or lead or copper.


CLS 205/498
TXT Halogen containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 477 wherein the metal containing compound
    produced contains halogen (i.e., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine, and
    astatine).


CLS 205/499
TXT Oxygen containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 498 wherein the halogen containing compound
    produced contains oxygen (e.g., potassium bromate, etc.).


CLS 205/500
TXT Hypochlorite or chlorite:

    Subject matter under subclass 499 wherein the oxygen containing compound
    produced is a hypochlorite (ClO containing) or chlorite (ClO2 containing).


CLS 205/501
TXT Utilizing tubular or coated electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein a tubular or coated electrode is
    utilized during synthesis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 280+ for
    electrodes utilized in carrying out the processes herein provided for and
    subclasses 290+ for laminated or coated electrodes.


CLS 205/502
TXT Chlorate:

    Subject matter under subclass 499 wherein the oxygen containing compound
    produced is a chlorate (ClO3 containing).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    474,    for processes of preparing perchlorate or perchloric acid from an
    aqueous bath or a bath other than a fused bath.


CLS 205/503
TXT Alkali metal containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 502 wherein the chlorate produced contains an
    alkali metal.


CLS 205/504
TXT Utilizing graphite or inorganic carbon containing electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 503 wherein a graphite or inorganic carbon
    electrode is utilized during synthesis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 294 for carbon
    containing electrode.


CLS 205/505
TXT Utilizing coated electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 503 wherein a coated electrode is utilized
    during synthesis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 290+ for
    laminated or coated electrode.


CLS 205/506
TXT Germanium, tin, or lead (containing Ge, Sn, or Pb):

    Subject matter under subclass 498 wherein the halogen containing compound
    produced contains germanium, tin, or lead.


CLS 205/507
TXT Copper, silver, or gold containing (Cu, Ag, or Au):

    Subject matter under subclass 498 wherein the halogen containing compound
    produced contains copper, silver, or gold.


CLS 205/508
TXT Hydroxide:

    Subject matter subclass 477 wherein a metallic hydroxide is produced during
    synthesis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    316+,   for processes of applying a hydroxide coating to a substrate
    electrolytically.


CLS 205/509
TXT Group VIII metal containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 508 wherein a group VIII metal hydroxide is
    produced.


CLS 205/510
TXT Alkali metal containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 508 wherein the metal hydroxide produced
    contains an alkali metal.


CLS 205/511
TXT Utilizing bipolar electrode:

    Subject under subclass 510 wherein at least one bipolar-type electrode is
    utilized during synthesis.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 383 for the definition of "bipolar electrode."


CLS 205/512
TXT Potassium hydroxide produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 510 wherein potassium hydroxide is produced.


CLS 205/513
TXT Utilizing filter press cell configuration:

    Subject matter under subclass 512 wherein a filter press-type cell is
    utilized during synthesis.

    (1)     Note.  A filter press-type cell is a cell containing at least one
    alternating anode unit and cathode unit having a membrane or diaphragm
    disposed therebetween and means to compress the units and membranes or
    diaphragms together where the compression means can be springs, bolts,
    clamps, etc.


CLS 205/514
TXT Utilizing cell having three or more compartments or units:

    Subject matter under subclass 512 wherein a cell having three or more
    compartments or units is utilized during synthesis (e.g., a buffer
    compartment, etc.).


CLS 205/515
TXT Including gas compartment:

    Subject matter under subclass 514 wherein at least one of the cell
    compartments or units contains gas.


CLS 205/516
TXT And elemental halogen produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 510 wherein a halogen is also produced in the
    elemental state during synthesis (e.g., F, Cl, Br, I, etc.).


CLS 205/517
TXT Utilizing structurally defined diaphragm or membrane or diaphragm or
    membrane other than nonstructurally defined single layer cation exchange
    membrane having single-type cation exchange groups (e.g., anion exchange
    membrane, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 516 wherein a diaphragm or membrane having a
    specified composition or configuration other than a nonstructurally defined
    single layer cation exchange membrane having single-type cation exchange
    groups is utilized during synthesis.

    (1)     Note.  Anion exchange groups include, for example, quaternary
    ammonium groups, quaternary pyridinium groups, sulfonium bases, primary,
    secondary and tertiary amino groups, pyridine groups, imino groups, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 45+ for selective diffusion
    of gases through a substantially solid barrier using a solid electrolyte
    membrane (SEM) which functions without electrodes and without externally
    applied voltage.  These membranes are used where the partial pressure of
    the gas to be diffused through the membrane on the permeate side is lower
    than that on the feed side.  Electrodeless solid electrolyte membrane cells
    are operated by maintaining a pressure on the feed side such that a
    positive driving force for ion transport can be achieved in the absence of
    an externally applied voltage and power source.  Class 204 takes the use of
    a SEM situated between two electrodes positioned to apply external voltage
    across the membrane.  These are used where the partial pressure of the gas
    is to be diffused through the permeate side.  Molecules on the feed
    electrochemically dissociated into ions are transported across the matrix
    of the membrane by the applied voltage and recombined to form molecules on
    the anode.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 295 and 296 for
    a specified membrane or diaphragm composition.


CLS 205/518
TXT Asbestos containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 517 wherein a diaphragm or membrane
    containing asbestos is utilized during synthesis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 295 for a
    specified membrane or diaphragm containing asbestos.


CLS 205/519
TXT And polymer containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 518 wherein the asbestos containing membrane
    or diaphragm also includes a polymer constituent.


CLS 205/520
TXT Membrane having two or more different ion exchange groups in a single layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 517 wherein a membrane containing two or more
    different ion exchange groups are utilized during synthesis.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass can include a mixture of cationic exchange
    groups (e.g., carboxylic, sulfonic, and phosphoric groups; cationic and
    anionic groups; etc.).


CLS 205/521
TXT Multilayered membrane:

    Subject matter under subclass 517 wherein a membrane having more than one
    layer is utilized during synthesis.


CLS 205/522
TXT Roughened membrane:

    Subject matter under subclass 517 wherein a membrane having at least one
    surface thereof roughened is utilized during synthesis.


CLS 205/523
TXT Diaphragm or membrane having a specified porosity:

    Subject matter under subclass 517 wherein a diaphragm or membrane having a
    specified porosity is utilized during synthesis.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include a diaphragm or membrane which
    broadly states that it is porous without giving a specific pore size or
    range.


CLS 205/524
TXT Diaphragm or membrane having nonelectrode layer bonded thereto or embedded
    therein:

    Subject matter under subclass 517 wherein a diaphragm or membrane having a
    nonelectrode layer bonded thereto or embedded therein is utilized during
    synthesis.


CLS 205/525
TXT Electrode bonded diaphragm or membrane:

    Subject matter under subclass 517 wherein a diaphragm or membrane having at
    least one electrode bonded thereto is utilized during synthesis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 282 and 283 for
    the structure and composition of electrodes bonded to a membrane or
    diaphragm.


CLS 205/526
TXT Utilizing specified electrode (e.g., rod, cylinder, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 516 wherein at least one specified electrode
    structure or composition is utilized during synthesis.


CLS 205/527
TXT Mercury or amalgam cathode:

    Subject matter under subclass 526 wherein a mercury or amalgam cathode is
    utilized during synthesis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    529,    for treating the amalgamated mercury cathode with water or other
    agent to generate the hydroxide when combined with the electrolytic
    synthesis step of producing the amalgam even though no electrolytic action
    is claimed for the amalgamated mercury treatment step.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclass 180 for the mere
    treatment of mercury amalgam which may be prepared electrolytically unless
    an internal or external current is impressed to facilitate the action by
    electrolysis.


CLS 205/528
TXT Specified anode composition:

    Subject matter under subclass 527 wherein an anode of specified composition
    is utilized during synthesis.


CLS 205/529
TXT Purifying the cathode:

    Subject matter under subclass 527 wherein the mercury or amalgam cathode is
    purified.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes treating the amalgamated mercury
    cathode with water or other agent to generate the hydroxide when combined
    with the electrolytic synthesis step of producing the amalgam even though
    no electrolytic action is claimed for the amalgamated mercury treatment
    step.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclass 180 for the mere
    treatment of mercury amalgam which may be prepared electrolytically unless
    an internal or external current is impressed to facilitate the action by
    electrolysis.


CLS 205/530
TXT Concentrically arranged electrodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 526 wherein two or more electrodes arranged
    concentrically one within the other are utilized during synthesis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 272 for
    concentrically arranged electrodes.


CLS 205/531
TXT Foraminous or perforated (e.g., mesh, screen, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 526 wherein at least one of the electrodes
    which is foraminous or perforated is utilized during synthesis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 284 for foraminous
    or perforated electrodes.


CLS 205/532
TXT Laminated or coated:

    Subject matter under subclass 526 wherein at least one electrode which is
    laminated or coated is utilized during synthesis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80+,    for processes of applying a coating electrolytically.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 284 for foraminous
    or perforated electrodes.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 58+ for processes of producing
    electrical products by a coating operation.


CLS 205/533
TXT Polymer or graphite or inorganic carbon containing coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 532 wherein an electrode having at least one
    polymer or graphite or inorganic carbon containing coating is utilized
    during synthesis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    517+,   for a process of preparing a hydroxide and halogen wherein a coated
    or laminated membrane or diaphragm is used.


CLS 205/534
TXT Raney metal containing coating (e.g., Ni-Al alloy, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 532 wherein the electrode has at least one
    Raney metal containing coating.

    (1)     Note.  Raney metal is an alloy of any two or more metals having the
    property of forming a catalytically active porous surface upon the leaching
    of an inactive soluble component metal (sacrificial metal) from the alloy,
    usually by a strong base such as sodium hydroxide, to leave an active
    metal.  Some specific Raney metals are, for example, Raney silver and Raney
    Cobalt.  This subclass includes both the alloy or the active catalyst
    produced by dissolving out the sacrificial metal.


CLS 205/535
TXT Valve metal containing electrode substrate (i.e., Ta, Nb, Hf, Zr, Ti, V, W,
    Be, or Al):

    Subject matter under subclass 532 wherein the electrode substrate contains
    a valve metal.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass, a valve metal is a metal
    which forms an electrically insulating, corrosion-resistant oxide film upon
    exposure to acidic materials under anodic conditions.  The valve metals are
    also referred to as the film-forming metals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 290+ for
    electrodes having a valve metal substrate.


CLS 205/536
TXT Treating electrolyte or bath material prior to synthesis other than
    heating, cooling, or replacing consumed material during synthesis:

    Subject matter under subclass 516 wherein the electrolyte or bath material
    is treated prior to synthesis other than by heating, cooling, or replacing
    material consumed during synthesis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    351,    for treating the electrolyte or bath without removal from the cell
    other than regenerating, replenishing, or replacing consumed material
    during synthesis.


CLS 205/537
TXT Controlling electrolyte flow other than by flow through a diaphragm or
    membrane:

    Subject matter under subclass 516 wherein the flow of electrolyte is
    controlled during the synthesis other than by flow through a diaphragm or
    membrane (e.g., utilizing baffles, conduits, differences in solution
    densities, specific electrolyte feed rate, entrained gas in solution, etc.).


CLS 205/538
TXT Oxide:

    Subject matter under subclass 477 wherein a metallic oxide is produced
    during synthesis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333,    for processes of applying an oxide coating to a substrate
    electrolytically.


CLS 205/539
TXT Manganese containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 538 wherein a manganese oxide is produced
    during synthesis.


CLS 205/540
TXT And elemental zinc or elemental manganese produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 539 wherein elemental zinc or elemental
    manganese is also produced during synthesis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262,    for processes of electrolytically coating with manganese from an
    aqueous bath.

    305+,   for processes of electrolytically coating with zinc from an aqueous
    bath.

    369,    for the processes of preparing metallic zinc from a fused bath by
    synthesis.

    370,    for the processes of preparing metallic manganese from a fused bath
    by synthesis.

    602+,   for the processes of preparing metallic zinc from an aqueous bath
    or a bath other than a fused bath by synthesis.


CLS 205/541
TXT Utilizing specified electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 539 wherein at least one specified electrode
    is utilized during synthesis.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes specified composition and/or
    configuration.


CLS 205/542
TXT Titanium, zirconium, hafnium, vanadium, niobium, or tantalum containing
    (Ti, Zr, Hf, V, Nb, or Ta):

    Subject matter under subclass 541 wherein the electrode contains titanium,
    zirconium, hafnium, vanadium, niobium, or tantalum.


CLS 205/543
TXT Group VIII metal containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 538 wherein a group VIII metal containing
    oxide is produced during synthesis (e.g., an oxide of Fe, Ni, or Co.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    269,    for processes of electrolytically coating with cobalt from an
    aqueous bath.

    270,    for processes of electrolytically coating with iron from an aqueous
    bath.

    271+,   for processes of electrolytically coating with nickel from an
    aqueous bath.

    370,    for processes of preparing iron, cobalt, or nickel from a fused
    bath by synthesis.

    587+    for processes of preparing iron or cobalt from an aqueous bath or a
    bath other than a fused bath by synthesis.

    594+,   for processes of preparing nickel from an aqueous bath or a bath
    other than a fused bath by synthesis.


CLS 205/544
TXT Germanium, tin or lead containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 538 wherein germanium, tin, or lead
    containing oxide is produced during synthesis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    299,    for processes of electrolytically coating with lead from an aqueous
    bath.

    300+,   for processes of electrolytically coating with tin from an aqueous
    bath.

    369,    for processes of preparing lead from a fused bath by synthesis.

    597+,   for processes of preparing lead from an aqueous bath or a bath
    other than a fused bath by synthesis.

    610+,   for processes of preparing tin form an aqueous bath or a bath other
    than a fused bath by synthesis.


CLS 205/545
TXT Copper, silver, gold, zinc, cadmium, or mercury containing (Cu, Ag, Au, Zn,
    Cd, Hg):

    Subject matter under subclass 538 wherein copper, silver, gold, zinc,
    cadmium, or mercury containing oxide is produced during synthesis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263,    for processed of electrolytically coating with silver from an
    aqueous bath.

    266+,   for processes of electrolytically coating with gold from an aqueous
    bath.

    281+,   for processes of electrolytically coating with cadmium from an
    aqueous bath.

    291+,   for processes of electrolytically coating with copper from an
    aqueous bath.

    305+,   for processes of electrolytically coating with zinc from an aqueous
    bath.

    369,    for processes of preparing zinc or cadmium from a fused bath by
    synthesis.

    562,    for processes of preparing mercury from an aqueous bath or a bath
    other than a fused bath by synthesis.

    571,    for processes of preparing silver or gold from an aqueous bath or a
    bath other than a fused bath by synthesis.

    574+,   for processes of preparing copper from an aqueous bath or a bath
    other than a fused bath by synthesis.

    602+,   for processes of preparing zinc from an aqueous bath or a bath
    other than a fused bath by synthesis.


CLS 205/546
TXT Hydrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 477 wherein a metallic hydrate is produced
    during synthesis.

    (1)     Note.  A hydrate is a substance containing water combined in the
    molecular form.


CLS 205/547
TXT Germanium, tin, or lead containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 477 wherein a compound containing germanium,
    tin, or lead is produced during synthesis (e.g., lead borate, sodium
    stannate, etc.).


CLS 205/548
TXT Iron, cobalt, or nickel containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 477 wherein a compound containing iron,
    cobalt, or nickel is produced during synthesis (e.g., potassium ferrate,
    etc.).


CLS 205/549
TXT Silicon, boron, or phosphorus containing compound produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 464 wherein an inorganic compound containing
    silicon, boron, or phosphorus is produced during synthesis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    358,    for processes of preparing inorganic silicon, boron, or phosphorus
    compounds from a fused bath by synthesis.

    420,    for processes of preparing organic silicon, boron, or phosphorus
    containing compounds from an aqueous bath or a bath other than a fused bath
    by synthesis.

    477+,   for processes of preparing metal containing silicon or boron
    compounds from an aqueous bath or a bath other than a fused bath by
    synthesis.

    488+,   for processes of preparing metal containing phosphorus compounds
    from an aqueous bath or a bath other than a fused bath by synthesis.


CLS 205/550
TXT Phosphine:

    Subject matter under subclass 549 wherein the compound produced is
    phosphine (PH3).

    (1)     Note.  The aqueous electrolyte bath utilized herein may contain a
    portion or a pool of molten phosphorus.


CLS 205/551
TXT Nitrogen containing compound produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 464 wherein a compound containing nitrogen is
    produced during synthesis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    491+,   for processes of producing metal containing nitrogen compounds by
    synthesis.

    617,    for processes of producing elemental nitrogen by synthesis.


CLS 205/552
TXT Ammonia:

    Subject matter under subclass 551 wherein the compound produced is ammonia.


CLS 205/553
TXT Nitric acid or oxide of nitrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 551 wherein the compound produced is nitric
    acid or an oxide of nitrogen.


CLS 205/554
TXT Sulfur containing compound produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 464 wherein a compound containing sulfur is
    produced during synthesis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    361,    for processes of preparing inorganic sulfur containing compounds
    from a fused bath by synthesis.

    444+,   for processes of preparing organic sulfur containing compounds from
    an aqueous bath or bath other than a fused bath by synthesis.

    494,    for processes of preparing metal containing sulfur compounds from
    an aqueous bath or a bath other than a fused bath by synthesis.

    617,    for processes of preparing elemental sulfur from an aqueous bath or
    a bath other than a fused bath by synthesis.


CLS 205/555
TXT Carbon containing compound produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 464 wherein an inorganic compound containing
    carbon is produced by synthesis (e.g., carbon dioxide, carbon monoxide,
    etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    478+,   for processes of preparing metal containing inorganic carbon
    compounds from an aqueous bath or a bath other than a fused bath by
    synthesis.


CLS 205/556
TXT Halogen containing compound produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 464 wherein a compound containing halogen is
    produced during synthesis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    356,    for processes of preparing organic halogen containing compounds
    from a fused bath by synthesis.

    359,    for processes of preparing inorganic halogen containing compounds
    from a fused bath by synthesis.

    411,    for processes of preparing elemental halogen from a fused bath by
    synthesis.

    459+,   for processes of preparing organic halogen containing compounds
    from an aqueous bath or a bath other than a fused bath by synthesis.

    498+,   for processes of preparing metal containing halogen compounds from
    an aqueous bath or a bath other than a fused bath by synthesis.

    618+,   for processes of preparing elemental halogen from an aqueous bath
    or a bath other than a fused bath by synthesis.


CLS 205/557
TXT Preparing alloy:

    Subject matter under subclass 334 wherein an alloy is produced during
    synthesis utilizing an aqueous bath or other bath.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 420, Glossary, for the definition of "alloy."

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238+,   for processes of depositing a predominantly alloy coating from an
    aqueous bath.

    363+,   for processes of preparing an alloy from a fused bath.


CLS 205/558
TXT Amalgam produced (e.g., utilizing mercury or amalgam electrode during
    synthesis, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 557 wherein the alloy produced is an amalgam
    (alloy of mercury with another metal) which may be synthesized by alloying
    a metal with a mercury or amalgam cathode.


CLS 205/559
TXT Precious metal containing (Ru, Rh, Pd, Os, Ir, Pt, Ag, or Au):

    Subject matter under subclass 558 wherein the amalgam produced contains a
    precious metal (i.e., Ru, Rh, Pd, Os, Ir,Pt, Ag, or Au).


CLS 205/560
TXT Preparing single metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 334 wherein a single metal (free metal or
    elemental metal) is produced from an aqueous bath or other bath.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261+,   for processes of depositing a predominantly single metal coating
    from an aqueous bath.

    367,    for processes of preparing a single metal from a fused bath.


CLS 205/561
TXT Utilizing bipolar electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 560 wherein the electrode utilized during
    synthesis is a bipolar-type electrode which is a planar electrode wherein
    one surface serves as an anode and the other surface serves as a cathode.


CLS 205/562
TXT Mercury produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 560 wherein the single metal produced is
    mercury.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    559+,   for processes of preparing an alloy of mercury (amalgam) from an
    aqueous bath or a bath other than a fused bath.


CLS 205/563
TXT Arsenic, antimony, or bismuth produced (As, Sb, or Bi):

    Subject matter under subclass 560 wherein the single metal produced is
    arsenic, antimony, or bismuth.


CLS 205/564
TXT Gallium, germanium, indium, vanadium, or molybdenum produced (Ga, Ge, In,
    V, or Mo):

    Subject matter under subclass 560 wherein the single metal produced is
    gallium, germanium, indium, vanadium, or molybdenum.


CLS 205/565
TXT Precious metal produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 560 wherein the single metal produced is a
    precious metal (i.e., Ru, Rh, Pd, Os, Ir, Pt, Ag, or Au).


CLS 205/566
TXT Utilizing specified electrode other than consumable precious metal
    containing electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 565 wherein a specified electrode structure
    or composition is utilized other than a precious metal containing electrode
    which is used up during synthesis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 280+ for  an
    electrode of specified structure or composition.


CLS 205/567
TXT Alloy electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 566 wherein the specified electrode is an
    alloy electrode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 293 for an
    electrode composed of a particular alloy.


CLS 205/568
TXT Leaching, dissolving, or extracting prior to synthesis:

    Subject matter under subclass 565 wherein a source material (raw material)
    containing the precious metal is subjected to a process of leaching,
    dissolving, or extracting prior to electrolytic synthesis.


CLS 205/569
TXT Utilizing nitrogen containing material:

    Subject matter under subclass 568 wherein a nitrogen containing material
    (e.g., nitric acid, sodium cyanide, etc.) is used in the leaching,
    dissolving, or extracting process (e.g., cyaniding leach, etc.).


CLS 205/570
TXT Utilizing halogen containing material:

    Subject matter under subclass 568 wherein a halogen containing material
    (e.g., hydrochloric acid, ferric chloride, etc.) is used in the leaching,
    dissolving, or extracting process (i.e., halogenating leach).


CLS 205/571
TXT Silver or gold:

    Subject matter under subclass 565 wherein the precious metal is silver or
    gold.


CLS 205/572
TXT Chromium produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 560 wherein the single metal produced is
    chromium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    283+,   for processes of depositing a chromium coating from an aqueous bath.


CLS 205/573
TXT Manganese produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 560 wherein the single metal produced is
    manganese.


CLS 205/574
TXT Copper produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 560 wherein the single metal produced is
    copper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291+,   for processes of depositing a copper coating from an aqueous bath.


CLS 205/575
TXT Utilizing specified electrode other than consumable copper containing
    electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 574 wherein a specified electrode structure
    or composition is utilized other than a copper containing electrode which
    is used up during synthesis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 280+ for an
    electrode of specified structure or composition.


CLS 205/576
TXT Specified anode:

    Subject matter under subclass 575 wherein the specified electrode is an
    anode.


CLS 205/577
TXT Elemental carbon containing (e.g., graphite, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 576 wherein the specified anode contains
    carbon in a free state (e.g., graphite, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 294 for a carbon
    containing electrode composition.


CLS 205/578
TXT Lead containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 576 wherein the specified anode contains lead.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 291+ for an
    electrode made of a specified composition.


CLS 205/579
TXT Iron, cobalt, or nickel containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 576 wherein the specified anode contains
    iron, cobalt, or nickel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 291+ for an
    electrode made of a specified composition.


CLS 205/580
TXT Leaching, dissolving, or extracting prior to synthesis:

    Subject matter under subclass 574 wherein a source material (raw material)
    containing the copper is subjected to a process of leaching, dissolving, or
    extracting prior to electrolytic synthesis.


CLS 205/581
TXT Utilizing organic material:

    Subject matter under subclass 580 wherein an organic material (e.g.,
    oximes, diketones, etc.) is used in the leaching, dissolving, or extracting
    process.


CLS 205/582
TXT Utilizing halogen containing material:

    Subject matter under subclass 580 wherein a halogen containing material is
    used in the leaching, dissolving, or extracting process (i.e., halogenating
    leach).


CLS 205/583
TXT Utilizing sulfur containing material:

    Subject matter under subclass 580 wherein a sulfur containing material
    (e.g., sulfuric acid, etc.) is used in the leaching, dissolving, or
    extracting process (e.g., sulfating leach, etc.).


CLS 205/584
TXT Recycling electrolyte or bath material back to production cell after
    synthesis:

    Subject matter under subclass 583 wherein at least a portion of the
    electrolyte or bath material is sent back to the electrolytic cell where
    copper was produced after synthesis.


CLS 205/585
TXT Bath contains organic material:

    Subject matter under subclass 574 wherein the electrolyte bath contains an
    organic material.


CLS 205/586
TXT Purifying or treating electrolyte or bath prior to or after synthesis:

    Subject matter under subclass 574 wherein the electrolyte or bath is
    purified or treated prior to or after electrolytic synthesis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    351,    for processes of treating electrolyte or bath without removal from
    cell other than regenerating, replacing, or replenishing consumed material
    during synthesis.


CLS 205/587
TXT Iron, cobalt, or nickel produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 560 wherein the single metal produced is
    iron, cobalt, or nickel.


CLS 205/588
TXT Specified anode other than consumable iron, cobalt, or nickel containing
    electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 587 wherein a specified anode structure or
    composition is utilized other than an iron, cobalt, or nickel containing
    electrode which is used up during synthesis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 280+ for an
    electrode of specified structure or composition.


CLS 205/589
TXT Leaching, dissolving, or extracting prior to synthesis:

    Subject matter under subclass 587 wherein a source material (raw material)
    containing the iron group metal (Fe, Co, or Ni) is subjected to a process
    of leaching, dissolving, or extracting prior to electrolytic synthesis.


CLS 205/590
TXT Utilizing organic material:

    Subject matter under subclass 589 wherein an organic material is used for
    any purpose in the leaching, dissolving, or extracting process.


CLS 205/591
TXT Utilizing halogen containing material:

    Subject matter under subclass 589 wherein a halogen containing material is
    used in the leaching, dissolving, or extracting process.


CLS 205/592
TXT Of iron:

    Subject matter under subclass 591 wherein a source material containing iron
    is subjected to leaching, dissolving, or extracting with a halogen
    containing material (halogenating leach).


CLS 205/593
TXT Of iron:

    Subject matter under subclass 589 wherein a source material containing iron
    is subjected to a process of leaching, dissolving, or extracting prior to
    electrolytic synthesis.


CLS 205/594
TXT Nickel:

    Subject matter under subclass 587 wherein the iron group metal produced is
    nickel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    271+,   for processes of depositing a nickel coating from an aqueous bath.


CLS 205/595
TXT Bath contains organic material:

    Subject matter under subclass 594 wherein the electrolyte bath contains an
    organic material.


CLS 205/596
TXT Bath pH below 5:

    Subject matter under subclass 594 wherein the PH of the electrolyte bath is
    less than 5.0.


CLS 205/597
TXT Lead produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 560 wherein the single metal produced is lead.


CLS 205/598
TXT Utilizing specified electrode other than consumable lead containing
    electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 597 wherein a specified electrode structure
    or composition is utilized other than a lead containing electrode which is
    used up during synthesis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 280+ for an
    electrode of specified structure or composition.


CLS 205/599
TXT Leaching, dissolving, or extracting prior to synthesis:

    Subject matter under subclass 597 wherein a source material (raw material)
    containing lead is subjected to a process of leaching, dissolving, or
    extracting prior to electrolytic synthesis.


CLS 205/600
TXT Utilizing halogen containing material:

    Subject matter under subclass 599 wherein a halogen containing material is
    used in the leaching, dissolving, or extracting process.


CLS 205/601
TXT Bath contains organic material:

    Subject matter under subclass 597 wherein the electrolyte bath contains an
    organic material.


CLS 205/602
TXT Zinc produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 560 wherein the single metal produced is zinc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305+,   for processes of depositing zinc from an aqueous bath.


CLS 205/603
TXT Utilizing specified electrode other than consumable zinc containing
    electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 602 wherein a specified electrode structure
    or composition is utilized other than a zinc containing electrode which is
    used up during synthesis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 280+ for an
    electrode of specified structure or composition.


CLS 205/604
TXT Leaching, dissolving, or extracting prior to synthesis:

    Subject matter under subclass 602 wherein a source material containing zinc
    is subjected to a process of leaching, dissolving, or extracting prior to
    electrolytic synthesis.


CLS 205/605
TXT Utilizing organic material:

    Subject matter under subclass 604 wherein an organic material is used in
    the leaching, dissolving, or extracting process.


CLS 205/606
TXT Utilizing halogen containing material:

    Subject matter under subclass 604 wherein a halogen containing material is
    used in the leaching, dissolving, or extracting process.


CLS 205/607
TXT Utilizing sulfur containing material:

    Subject matter under subclass 604 wherein a sulfur containing material is
    used in the leaching, dissolving, or extracting process (e.g., sulfating
    leach, etc.).


CLS 205/608
TXT Removing iron or iron containing material:

    Subject matter under subclass 607 wherein iron or iron containing material
    is removed in the process.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is the removal of iron or iron containing
    material derived from the source or raw material which is used for the
    production of zinc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    357+,   for processes of preparing an iron containing inorganic compound
    from a fused bath.

    370,    for processes of preparing iron from a fused bath.

    548,    for processes of preparing iron containing inorganic compound from
    an aqueous bath or a bath other than a fused bath.

    587+,   for processes of preparing iron from an aqueous bath or a bath
    other than a fused bath.


CLS 205/609
TXT Bath contains silver, strontium, or organic material:

    Subject matter under subclass 602 wherein the electrolyte bath contains
    silver, strontium, or organic material.


CLS 205/610
TXT Tin produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 560 wherein the single metal produced is tin.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300+,   for processes of depositing a tin coating from an aqueous bath.


CLS 205/611
TXT Leaching, dissolving or extracting prior to synthesis:

    Subject matter under subclass 610 wherein a source material (raw material)
    containing tin is subjected to a process of leaching, dissolving, or
    extracting prior to electrolytic synthesis.


CLS 205/612
TXT Utilizing halogen containing material:

    Subject matter under subclass 611 wherein a halogen containing material is
    used in the leaching, dissolving, or extracting process.


CLS 205/613
TXT Utilizing sulfur containing material:

    Subject matter under subclass 611 wherein a sulfur containing material is
    used for any purpose in the leaching, dissolving, or extracting process
    (e.g., sulfating leach, etc.).


CLS 205/614
TXT Bath contains silicon or organic material:

    Subject matter under subclass 610 wherein the electrolyte bath contains
    silicon or organic material.


CLS 205/615
TXT Preparing nonmetal element:

    Subject matter under subclass 334 wherein a nonmetallic element is produced
    during synthesis.


CLS 205/616
TXT Utilizing bipolar electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 615 wherein at least one bipolar electrode is
    utilized during synthesis.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 383 (Class 205) for the definition of "bipolar
    electrode."


CLS 205/617
TXT Sulfur or nitrogen produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 615 wherein elemental sulfur or nitrogen is
    produced during synthesis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    360,    for processes of preparing inorganic nitrogen containing compounds
    from a fused bath by synthesis.

    361,    for processes of preparing inorganic sulfur containing compounds
    from a fused bath by synthesis.

    431+,   for processes of preparing organic nitrogen containing compounds
    from an aqueous bath or a bath other than a fused bath by synthesis.

    444+,   for processes of preparing organic sulfur containing compounds from
    an aqueous bath or a bath other a fused bath by synthesis.

    491+,   for processes of preparing meal containing nitrogen compounds from
    an aqueous bath or a bath other than a fused bath by synthesis.

    494+,   for processes of preparing metal containing sulfur compounds from
    an aqueous bath or a bath other than a fused bath by synthesis.

    551+,   for processes or preparing inorganic, nonmetal containing nitrogen
    compound from an aqueous bath or a bath other than a fused bath by
    synthesis.

    554,    for processes of preparing inorganic, nonmetal containing sulfur
    compound from an aqueous bath or a bath other than a fused bath by
    synthesis.


CLS 205/618
TXT Halogen produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 615 wherein elemental halogen is produced
    during synthesis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    356,    for processes of preparing organic halogen containing compounds
    from a fused bath.

    359,    for processes of preparing inorganic halogen compounds from a fused
    bath by synthesis.

    411,    for processes of preparing elemental halogen from a fused bath by
    synthesis.

    459+,   for processes of preparing organic halogen containing compounds
    from an aqueous bath or a bath other than a fused bath by synthesis.

    498+,   for processes of preparing metal containing halogen compounds from
    an aqueous bath or a bath other than a fused bath by synthesis.

    556,    for processes of preparing inorganic halogen containing compounds
    from an aqueous bath or a bath other than a fused bath by synthesis.


CLS 205/619
TXT Fluorine, bromine, or iodine produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 618 wherein elemental fluorine, bromine, or
    iodine is produced during synthesis.


CLS 205/620
TXT Chlorine and hydrogen produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 618 wherein both elemental chlorine and
    hydrogen are produced during synthesis.


CLS 205/621
TXT Utilizing specified metal or alloy cathode:

    Subject matter under subclass 620 wherein a specified metal or alloy
    cathode is utilized during synthesis.


CLS 205/622
TXT Utilizing specified electrode other than graphite or inorganic carbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 618 wherein at least one specified electrode
    structure or composition other than graphite or inorganic carbon is
    utilized during synthesis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 280+ for an
    electrode of specified structure or composition.


CLS 205/623
TXT Mercury or amalgam cathode:

    Subject matter under subclass 622 wherein a mercury or amalgam cathode is
    utilized during synthesis.

    (1)     Note.  Amalgam is an alloy of a metal with mercury.  See Class 420,
    Glossary, for the definition of "alloy."


CLS 205/624
TXT Diaphragm or membrane bonded electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 622 wherein a diaphragm or membrane bonded to
    at least one electrode or wherein at least one electrode bonded to a
    diaphragm or membrane is utilized during synthesis.

    (1)     Note.  The membrane or diaphragm must be a separately made preform
    bonded to the electrode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 282 and 283 for
    the structure and composition of electrodes and membranes or diaphragms
    bonded together.


CLS 205/625
TXT Coated electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 622 wherein at least one electrode which is
    coated is utilized during synthesis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80+,    for processes of applying a coating electrolytically.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 290+ for
    electrode compositions.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 58+ for processes of producing
    electrical products by a coating operation.


CLS 205/626
TXT Ozone produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 615 wherein ozone (O3) is produced during
    synthesis.


CLS 205/627
TXT Deuterium or tritium produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 615 wherein deuterium or tritium (D2 or H3)
    is produced during synthesis.


CLS 205/628
TXT Oxygen and hydrogen produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 615 wherein both elemental oxygen and
    hydrogen are produced during synthesis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    633+,   for processes of preparing elemental oxygen from an aqueous bath or
    a bath other than a fused bath by synthesis.

    637+,   for processes of preparing hydrogen from an aqueous bath or a bath
    other than a fused bath by synthesis.


CLS 205/629
TXT Utilizing inorganic solid electrolyte:

    Subject matter under subclass 628 wherein an inorganic solid electrolyte is
    utilized during synthesis (e.g., ceramic, metallic, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 295 for specified
    electrolyte composition.


CLS 205/630
TXT Utilizing specified electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 628 wherein at least one specified electrode
    structure or composition is utilized during synthesis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 280+ for an
    electrode of specified structure or composition.


CLS 205/631
TXT Specified single metal or alloy:

    Subject matter under subclass 630 wherein at least one specified single
    metal or alloy electrode is utilized during synthesis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 292 and 293 for
    specified electrode single metal or alloy compositions, respectively.


CLS 205/632
TXT Group VIII metal:

    Subject matter subclass 631 wherein the electrode containing a group VIII
    metal (e.g., Fe, Ni, or Co) or alloy is utilized during synthesis.


CLS 205/633
TXT Oxygen produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 615 wherein elemental oxygen is produced
    during synthesis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    628+,   for processes of preparing oxygen and hydrogen from an aqueous bath
    or a bath other than a fused bath.


CLS 205/634
TXT Utilizing inorganic solid electrolyte:

    Subject matter under subclass 633 wherein an inorganic solid electrolyte is
    utilized during synthesis (e.g., ceramic, metallic, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 295 for specified
    electrolyte composition.


CLS 205/635
TXT Utilizing nonmetal containing electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 633 wherein at least one electrode containing
    a nonmetal is utilized during synthesis (e.g., metal boride, carbide,
    oxide, nitride, cermet, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 291 and 294 for
    specified nonmetal electrode compositions.


CLS 205/636
TXT Utilizing group VIII metal alloy electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 633 wherein at least one electrode containing
    a group VIII metal alloy (e.g., Fe, Ni, Co alloy) is utilized during
    synthesis.


CLS 205/637
TXT Hydrogen produced:

    Subject matter under subclass 615 wherein elemental hydrogen is produced
    during synthesis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    510+,   for processes of preparing alkali metal hydroxide and hydrogen from
    an aqueous bath or a bath other than a fused bath.

    620+,   for processes of preparing hydrogen and chlorine from an aqueous
    bath or a bath other than a fused bath.

    628+,   for processes of preparing oxygen and hydrogen from an aqueous bath
    or a bath other than a fused bath.


CLS 205/638
TXT Utilizing specified electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 637 wherein at least one specified electrode
    structure or composition is utilized during synthesis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280+,   for an electrode of specified structure or composition.


CLS 205/639
TXT Specified single metal or alloy:

    Subject matter under subclass 638 wherein at least one electrode containing
    a single metal or alloy is utilized during synthesis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 292 and 293 for
    specified metal or alloy electrode compositions.


CLS 205/640
TXT Electrolytic erosion of a workpiece for shape or surface change (e.g.,
    etching, polishing, etc.) (process and electrolyte composition):

    Subject matter under the class definition in which the chemical change
    occurs as a result of an electrolytic current between a tool electrode and
    a workpiece electrode and involves removing material from the workpiece in
    order to change the shape or surface configuration thereof, including
    electrolyte compositions for use therein.

    (1)     Note.  For this subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder,
    some of the terms in the schedule and definitions are defined as follows:

            Electropolishing:  The electrolytic erosion of solid surfaces to
    produce bright or mirrorlike surfaces.  The effect usually results from a
    selective electrolytic erosion of the high points of a base material
    surface to thus reduce surface irregularities.

            Element:  An electrode, a workpiece, a tool, or an electrolyte.

            Tool:  A solid (including a gel) coherent object which cooperates
    with a workpiece and an electrolyte, either mechanically or electrically,
    to remove some of the material from the workpiece.  Thus, for example, a
    tool may be an electrode, a grinding wheel, an insulating spacer, etc.

            Workpiece:  A solid coherent object which serves as an electrode
    and is subjected to electrolytic erosion, some of which is removed during
    the process and some of which remains as a product.  The workpiece may be a
    layer of one material supported by another material.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder include
    the electrolyte technology employed in electrolytic erosion processes.  The
    regeneration, per se, of such electrolytes is classified in subclass 673
    and the electrolyte compositions are classified in subclasses 674+.

    (3)     Note.  The products of electrolytic erosion  processes are excluded
    from this and the subclasses indented hereunder as a specific exception to
    the general rule of Class 204; see section (B) of the class definition.

    (4)     Note.  Processes included in this and the indented subclasses are
    those in which the net result is stripping or removal of material to change
    the shape or surface configuration of a workpiece.  Processes of
    electrolytic erosion combined with electrolytic deposition of a desired
    product are found in the above appropriate subclasses.  However, if
    electrolytic coating is followed by electrolysis to entirely remove the
    electrolytically coated layer, no net coating has taken place, and no
    desired product has been synthesized (other than an electrolytically eroded
    or treated article); therefore placing the process in this subclass or the
    subclasses indented hereunder when such erosion or treatment has resulted
    in a change of shape or surface configuration of the base article
    (workpiece) and in 687+ in other cases.

    (5)     Note.  This subclass (640) is the locus for patents directed to
    manufacturing or repairing of tools used in an electrolytic erosion
    process; such manufacturing or repairing not being provided for in any of
    the above subclasses in this class.  The manufacturing or repairing of
    these tools by electrolytic erosion and the manufacturing or repairing of
    these tools combined with their use in electrolytic erosion are properly
    classified in the subclasses indented hereunder when provided for in these
    subclasses.

    (6)     Note.  Although this subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder
    are intended to provide for electrolytic polishing (electropolishing as
    defined above), other processes which do not clearly or necessarily involve
    electrolytic erosion (e.g., "brightening," forming a surface "luster,"
    etc.) may only be classified herein if such operations are clearly
    electrolytic and are the result of a shape or surface change of a
    workpiece.  Otherwise, such operations are assumed to be mere cleaning or
    removal of a surface coating (e.g., metal oxide, sulfide, scale, etc.), the
    electrolytic variety of which is provided for below, under subclasses 687+,
    electrolytic material treatment.  "Burnishing" is generally mere mechanical
    compacting, smoothing, or rubbing of material to produce a shiny or
    lustrous surface thereon, unless clearly indicated otherwise.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     for electrolytic marking (e.g., electroprinting, etc.) involving
    electrolytic erosion.

    70,     for a process of making a die by electroforming in which the die
    may or may not be used as a tool for electrolytic erosion.

    80+,    for a process where a polished surface is produced by electrolytic
    coating.

    205+,   for electrolytic erosion followed by electrolytic coating.

    220+,   for electrolytic coating followed by electrolytic erosion of the
    coating to remove only a portion thereof.

    687+,   for electrolytic erosion performed upon solid coherent objects for
    purposes other than a change in the shape or surface configuration of the
    workpiece.

    705+,   for electrolytic metal treatment in which brightening results from
    a cleaning action only.  Processes in which electrolytic polishing is
    preceded by an electrolytic cleaning action are found in subclasses 660+.

    717+,   for a process in which an entire layer of elemental material is
    removed from a metallic substrate by electrolytic erosion, the material
    removed not being limited to a portion of the workpiece surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 89.5+ and 90.01+ for processes and
    apparatus for producing a smooth surface by burnishing (e.g., by rubbing
    with a smooth surface of greater hardness than the workpiece, etc.).

    51,     Abrasive Toolmaking Process, Material, or Composition, for
    processes, materials, or compositions used to make tools employed in
    changing the shape or surface configuration of an object by grinding or
    other mechanical material removal without also employing electrolytic
    erosion.

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, appropriate subclasses for
    special machines, processes, blanks, and dies for making tools, in
    particular, subclasses 107.1+ for blanks and processes of making dies.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses for
    processes and apparatus in general for cleaning or assuring contact of a
    solid material with a treating liquid.

    148,    Metal Treatment, appropriate subclasses for the treatment (e.g.,
    tempering, ageing, etc.) of solid or semisolid metal to modify or maintain
    internal physical structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical properties
    of the metal which may or may not be combined with a Class 205 procedure
    (e.g., carburizing or nitriding of solid metal combined with electrolytic
    erosion, etc.).  Processes of electrolytic removal of metal by erosion
    combined with a broadly claimed heat treatment are properly classified in
    Class 205, subclasses 640+.

    216,    Etching a Substrate: Processes, for processes of chemical etching
    or erosion which do not employ an electrolytic current, but may involve an
    electrical discharge.

    219,    Electric Heating, especially subclasses 68+, for processes of
    electrical erosion which do not employ an electrolyte or involve an added
    chemical reagent (e.g., spark gap erosion, etc.).

    252,    Compositions, especially subclass 62.2 for electrolytes specialized
    or designed for an electrical device used merely as an electrical component
    (e.g., rectifier, condenser, etc.) and subclasses 79.1+ for etching
    compositions which, although not intended for use in electrolysis, may be
    identical in composition to such electrolytes.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 612 for a
    composite metallic stock material having a microscopic interfacial wave or
    roughness.

    451,    Abrading, appropriate subclasses for apparatus, processes, and
    compositions for changing the shape or surface configuration of an object
    by grinding or other mechanical material removal, without electrolytic
    erosion.

    483,    Tool Changing, for a process or apparatus involving electrolytic
    erosion in which changing a tool electrode using a tool transfer means and
    a tool support or storage means is the sole significantly recited feature.


CLS 205/641
TXT With control responsive to sensed condition:

    Process under subclass 640 in which the material removal is regulated by
    detecting a characteristic or a change in a characteristic of the process
    and by implementing an action in the process based upon the detected
    characteristic or change therein.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder a
    single means may be used both to detect a characteristic or a change in a
    characteristic of the process and to implement an action in the process
    based upon the detected characteristic or change therein.  There must be a
    positive action made by a control means because of the detected
    characteristic or change therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    645,    for electrolytic erosion with measuring, testing, or sensing; but
    without involving control responsive to a sensed condition.

    646+,   for electrolytic erosion with programmed, cyclic, or time
    responsive control; but without control responsive to sensed condition.

    652+,   for electrolytic erosion in which the tool-workpiece gap size is
    either specified or maintained constant; without using (1) control
    responsive to a sensed condition, (2) measuring, testing, or sensing, or
    (3) programmed, cyclic, or time responsive control.

    775+,   for electrolytic methods of analysis or testing, per se.  See the
    (1) note in subclass 775.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, as the residual class for processes and
    apparatus for measuring or testing, per se.  See also the (3) Note in the
    class definition of Class 73 for additional loci of other measuring and
    testing processes and apparatus of different types.

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, for measuring, testing, or
    sensing, per se, to determine electrical properties by electrical means
    even though nonelectrical values may be derived from the electrical
    properties determined.


CLS 205/642
TXT To adjust voltage across or size of tool-workpiece gap:

    Process under subclass 641 in which the detected characteristic or change
    therein is used (a) to establish proper gap or spacing between a tool and a
    workpiece, (b) to adjust or keep this gap or spacing constant, or (c) to
    vary the voltage across this gap or spacing.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and the subclass indented hereunder are not
    intended to provide for mere process shutdown in response to a sensed
    condition unless the shutdown is clearly accompanied by or is the result of
    an interruption in the gap voltage. Subclasses 641 and 644 provide for mere
    process shutdown in response to a sensed condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    652+,   for electrolytic erosion in which the tool-workpiece gap size is
    either specified or maintained constant without using (1) control
    responsive to a sensed condition, (2) measuring, testing, or sensing, or
    (3) programmed, cyclic, or time responsive control.


CLS 205/643
TXT In response to sensed voltage:

    Process under subclass 642 in which the gap voltage or size or a change in
    the gap voltage or size are adjusted or controlled in response to a
    detected voltage or change therein.

    (1)     Note.  The detected voltage may either be the gap voltage or any
    other process voltage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    644,    for electrolytic erosion in which a sensed voltage or current is
    used to control the process without being used to adjust the voltage across
    or size of the tool-workpiece gap.


CLS 205/644
TXT In response to sensed voltage or current:

    Process under subclass 641 in which a detected voltage or current or a
    change in a detected voltage or current is used to control the process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    643,    for electrolytic erosion in which a sensed voltage is used to
    adjust the voltage across or size of the tool-workpiece gap.


CLS 205/645
TXT With measuring, testing, or sensing:

    Process under subclass 640 which includes measuring, detecting, or testing
    of a characteristic, condition, or property of the process or an element
    used in the process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    641+,   for electrolytic erosion which is controlled in response to a
    sensed condition.

    775+,   for electrolytic methods of analysis or testing, per se.  See the
    (1) Note in subclass 775.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, as the residual class for processes and
    apparatus for measuring or testing, per se.  See also the (3) Note in the
    class definition of Class 73 for additional loci of other measuring and
    testing processes and apparatus of different types.

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, for measuring, testing, or
    sensing, per se, to determine electrical properties by electrical means
    even though nonelectrical values may be derived from the electrical
    properties determined.


CLS 205/646
TXT With programmed, cyclic, or time responsive control:

    Process under subclass 640 which is not directly responsive to a sensed
    condition, but involves (a) storing coded instructions or other data which
    is used to regulate the process, (b) repetitively regulating a sequence of
    process steps, or (c) regulating the process according to preset timing
    sequences (e.g., limiting various process steps to predetermined durations
    of time, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder are not
    intended to include the use of alternating current (AC), per se, or the use
    of direct current (DC) pulses which are not clearly repetitive (i.e., with
    multiple complete cycles) or predetermined.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    641+,   for electrolytic erosion with control responsive to a sensed
    condition.

    652+,   for electrolytic erosion in which the tool-workpiece gap is either
    specified or maintained constant; but without using programmed, cyclic, or
    time responsive control.


CLS 205/647
TXT Including nonelectrolytic erosion:

    Process under subclass 646 which includes both electrolytic and
    nonelectrolytic removal of material from the workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  The nonelectrolytic erosion may be carried out either
    simultaneously with the electrolytic erosion or as a separate step.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    661,    for electrolytic erosion with preliminary nonelectrolytic cleaning
    or shaping of the workpiece; but without programmed, cyclic, or time
    responsive control.

    662+,   for electrolytic erosion with mechanical abrasion or grinding, in
    general.

    709,    for electrolytic cleaning involving moving contact of a solid
    member with a workpiece.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 280+ for
    electrode structure and compositions used in electrolysis, including those
    also having a nonelectrolytic action.

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, appropriate subclasses for a
    combination process of Class 205 electrolytic erosion followed by a Class
    216 chemical etching step.  See section III of the class definition for
    Class 204 for an elaboration of the class line.


CLS 205/648
TXT Using diverse-type tool electrodes:

    Process under subclass 646 which employs two or more different types of
    tool electrodes (e.g., moving and stationary tools, layered composite and
    pure metal tools, etc.).


CLS 205/649
TXT Eroding workpiece to match nonplanar surface shape of tool electrode:

    Process under subclass 646 in which the workpiece is eroded to match the
    surface shape of a tool electrode having a nonplanar machining surface
    (e.g., a tool electrode having a concave surface is used to erode a
    workpiece until it possesses a convex shape with the same radius of
    curvature as that of the tool surface, etc.).


CLS 205/650
TXT Cleaning, recycling, or reusing electrolyte:

    Process under subclass 646 in which the electrolyte is purified by removing
    unwanted material (e.g., by filtering, etc.), recycled, or reused.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    673,    for the regeneration, per se, of an electrolyte used in
    electrolytic erosion.


CLS 205/651
TXT Moving tool or workpiece:

    Process under subclass 646 in which the tool, workpiece, or both are moved
    during erosion of the workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    654,    for electrolytic erosion in which a moving tool electrode is used
    with gap maintenance or a defined tool-workpiece gap.

    663,    for electrolytic erosion using a rotating tool or workpiece with
    mechanical abrasion or grinding; but without programmed, cyclic, or time
    responsive control.

    686,    for electrolytic erosion, in general, using a moving tool electrode.


CLS 205/652
TXT Gap maintenance or defined tool-workpiece gap:

    Process under subclass 640 in which a method is recited for keeping a gap
    or spacing between the tool and workpiece essentially constant or in which
    this gap or spacing is mathematically specified.

    (1)     Note.  The spacing may be maintained by the presence of a solid,
    insulating, nonabrasive material (e.g., stencil, mask, etc.) between the
    tool and workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    642+,   for electrolytic erosion in which a sensed condition is used to
    adjust the voltage across or size of the tool-workpiece gap.

    662+,   for electrolytic erosion in which the spacing may be maintained
    somewhat constant by the presence of abrasive particles between the tool
    and workpiece, but in which the use of such particles is not intended to
    maintain such spacing constant.

    666+,   for electrolytic erosion in which a stencil or mask is attached to
    the workpiece, but is not used to maintain the spacing between the tool and
    workpiece.


CLS 205/653
TXT Using tool electrode with two or more holes for passage of electrolyte:

    Process under subclass 652 in which the tool electrode is provided with two
    or more perforations in the working surface thereof, usually to allow
    electrolyte to be supplied to or removed from the workpiece.


CLS 205/654
TXT Moving tool electrode:

    Process under subclass 652 in which the tool electrode is moved during
    erosion of the workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    651,    for electrolytic erosion using a moving tool or workpiece with
    programmed, cyclic, or time responsive control.

    663,    for electrolytic erosion using a rotating tool or workpiece with
    mechanical abrasion or grinding.

    686,    for electrolytic erosion, in general, using a moving tool electrode.


CLS 205/655
TXT With irradiation or illumination:

    Process under subclass 640 in which electromagnetic waves (e.g.,
    ultraviolet light, gamma rays, etc.) or corpuscular radiation (e.g., stream
    of alpha particles, electron beam, etc.) are applied to an element during
    the erosion.


CLS 205/656
TXT Eroding workpiece of nonuniform internal electrical  characteristics:

    Process under subclass 640 in which the workpiece has electrical
    characteristics which vary within its interior (e.g., doped semiconductor
    with n and p regions, etc.), so that erosion proceeds at differing rates on
    one or more localized areas or portions thereof, usually to confine the
    erosion to desired locations.

    (1)     Note.  The electrical nonuniformity need not be "normal," and may
    be brought about by processing (e.g., by short-circuiting, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    666+,   for electrolytic erosion in which the workpiece has a
    distinguishable surface layer called a mask, usually having different
    electrical characteristics than the workpiece itself.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, for chemical etching
    of a semiconductive substrate utilizing a p-n junction as an etch stop.


CLS 205/657
TXT Internal battery action:

    Process under subclass 640 conducted without an external source of
    electrolytic current; usually the electrolytic current is derived from an
    internal chemical reaction (e.g., galvanic action, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    706+,   for an electrolytic metal cleaning process which employs internal
    battery action, but does not result in a change of the shape or surface
    configuration thereof.


CLS 205/658
TXT Simple alternating current:

    Process under subclass 640 in which electric current passing through the
    electrolyte (usually between the tool and workpiece) can be represented by
    a smooth sine wave having equal amplitude above and below a straight line
    ordinate at zero current (e.g., pure alternating current, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    711,    for an electrolytic metal cleaning process which employs simple
    alternating current.


CLS 205/659
TXT Plural separate currents or voltages applied:

    Process under subclass 658 which employs separate currents or voltages
    differing in magnitude, character, or type (e.g., simultaneous AC and DC,
    etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    646+,   for electrolytic erosion with programmed, cyclic, or time
    responsive control.


CLS 205/660
TXT Preliminary cleaning or shaping of workpiece:

    Process under subclass 640 which includes a step of removing foreign matter
    from the workpiece or altering the form of the workpiece before at least
    one step of electrolytic erosion on the same workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  Plural steps of electrolytic erosion for shape or surface
    change of the same workpiece are included in this subclass and the
    subclasses indented hereunder.

    (2)     Note.  Mere coating of the workpiece is not considered shaping.


CLS 205/661
TXT Nonelectrolytic (e.g., mechanical grinding, milling, machining, etc.):

    Process under subclass 660 in which at least one step of preliminary
    cleaning or shaping is nonelectrolytic (e.g., mechanical grinding, milling,
    machining, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    647,    for electrolytic erosion combined with nonelectrolytic erosion and
    programmed, cyclic, or time responsive control.

    662+,   for electrolytic erosion with simultaneous or subsequent mechanical
    abrasion or grinding.

    709,    for electrolytic cleaning involving moving contact of a solid
    member with a workpiece.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 212+ for
    electrolytic apparatus having a rotary electrode and subclasses 280+ for
    electrode structure and compositions used in electrolytic apparatus,
    including those also having a nonelectrolytic action.


CLS 205/662
TXT With mechanical abrasion or grinding:

    Process under subclass 640 in which a solid makes moving contact with the
    workpiece to scrape or rub material from a surface of the workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  The abrasive solid may be attached to a tool or may be loose.

    (2)     Note.  The abrasion or grinding may occur simultaneously with or
    subsequent to electrolytic erosion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    647,    for electrolytic erosion combined with nonelectrolytic erosion and
    programmed, cyclic, or time responsive control.

    652+,   for electrolytic erosion in which solid nonabrasive particles are
    used to maintain a tool-workpiece gap.

    661,    for electrolytic erosion with preliminary nonelectrolytic cleaning
    or shaping of the workpiece.

    709,    for electrolytic cleaning involving moving contact of a solid
    member with a workpiece.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 280+ for
    electrode structure and compositions used in electrolytic apparatus,
    including those having an abrading action.


CLS 205/663
TXT Rotating tool or workpiece:

    Process under subclass 662 in which the tool or workpiece is rotated about
    an axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    651,    for electrolytic erosion with programmed, cyclic, or time
    responsive control using a moving tool or workpiece.

    654,    for electrolytic erosion in which a moving tool electrode is used
    with gap maintenance or a defined tool-workpiece gap.

    686,    for other processes of electrolytic erosion using a moving tool
    electrode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 212+ for
    electrolytic apparatus having a rotary electrode.


CLS 205/664
TXT Sharpening or point making:

    Process under subclass 640 in which the workpiece is given a tapered end or
    side configuration by electrolytic erosion resulting in a sharp or pointed
    workpiece or portion thereof.


CLS 205/665
TXT Aperture making:

    Process under subclass 640 in which material removal is continued until a
    passage is made to penetrate completely through the entire workpiece or a
    distinct layer thereof (i.e., having a discernable boundary).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    641+,   for electrolytic erosion in which the creation of an aperture is
    part of sensing a condition used to control the process.

    645,    for electrolytic erosion in which the creation of an aperture is
    part of a test or measurement of a condition.

    666+,   for electrolytic erosion in which a complex pattern is etched using
    a mask.

    717+,   for a process in which an entire layer of elemental material is
    removed from a metallic substrate by electrolytic erosion, the material
    removed not being limited to a portion of the workpiece surface.


CLS 205/666
TXT Using mask:

    Process under subclass 640 in which a workpiece surface to be eroded is
    provided with a distinguishable nonuniform covering which allows only part
    of the workpiece to contact the electrolyte.

    (1)     Note.  The covering may be an adherent coating, a stencil, etc.

    (2)     Note.  The nonuniformity of the covering is produced by a procedure
    or phenomenon other than the electrolytic erosion process itself.

    (3)     Note.  The composition of the mask may bear a resemblance to that
    of the workpiece (e.g., the mask and workpiece may be different alloys of
    the same base metal) provided that the mask is identifiably separate from
    the workpiece and will not be eroded at the same rate as the workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    656,    for electrolytic erosion in which the workpiece has nonuniform
    internal electrical characteristics.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for laminating processes.  See the search class note
    to Class 156 at the beginning of this class for the class line.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 256+ for processes of forming a
    nonuniform coating, in general.


CLS 205/667
TXT Of photoresist or radiation resist:

    Process under subclass 666 in which the mask is composed of a material
    which exhibits physical changes when exposed to light or radiation and is
    more resistant to electrolytic erosion than is the workpiece.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, appropriate subclasses for creating a coating imagewise through a
    radiation imagery process.  However, Class 205, subclasses 640+, accepts
    the combination of electrolytic erosion with a Class 430 imaging step.


CLS 205/668
TXT Local application of electrolyte:

    Process under subclass 640 in which only a portion of a workpiece surface
    is contacted with electrolyte.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    652+,   for electrolytic erosion in which an insulating member serves both
    to maintain spacing between the tool and workpiece and to confine
    electrolyte contact to a portion of a workpiece surface.

    666+,   for electrolytic erosion in which contact of the electrolyte is
    confined to only a portion of a workpiece surface by positioning a mask
    against the workpiece.

    671+,   for electrolytic erosion in which an entire workpiece surface is in
    contact with an agitated electrolyte.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 224+ for
    electrolytic apparatus having a localized area applicator.


CLS 205/669
TXT Using surface tension or capillary action to hold electrolyte in contact
    with workpiece:

    Process under subclass 668 in which the electrolyte is held into contact
    with a portion of the workpiece surface by surface tension or capillary
    action.

    (1)     Note.  The surface tension forces may be due to an adjacent gas or
    an immiscible liquid.


CLS 205/670
TXT Through open nozzle or flow-through piping (e.g., unsupported jet, etc.):

    Process under subclass 668 in which the electrolyte is selectively
    contacted with a portion of the workpiece surface by directing a stream of
    the electrolyte towards the workpiece through either an open nozzle or
    enclosed piping.


CLS 205/671
TXT Agitation or vibration of electrolyte:

    Process under subclass 640 in which an element is given a rhythmic back and
    forth or oscillatory movement resulting in the formation of pressure waves,
    mixing, or swinging within the electrolyte.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 222+ for
    electrolytic apparatus having an electrode oscillator, reciprocator, or
    agitator.


CLS 205/672
TXT Defined electrolyte movement or pressure:

    Process under subclass 640 in which a particular path of motion or pressure
    is imparted to the electrolyte during the erosion process (e.g., submerged
    jet action, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  A recitation of merely passing electrolyte between the tool
    and workpiece is not sufficient for classification in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    668+,   for electrolytic erosion with local application of the electrolyte
    to contact only a portion of a  workpiece surface.


CLS 205/673
TXT Regenerating or rehabilitating, per se, of electrolyte:

    Process under subclass 640 for the, per se, regeneration or cleaning of an
    electrolyte used in electrolytic erosion (usually to permit reuse thereof).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    650,    for cleaning, recycling, or reusing an electrolyte used in
    electrolytic erosion combined with programmed, cyclic, or time responsive
    control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses for
    processes and apparatus for purifying liquids, in general.


CLS 205/674
TXT Electrolyte composition or defined electrolyte:

    Subject matter under subclass 640 drawn to (a) electrolyte compositions,
    (b) processes of preparing an electrolyte of specified composition, or (c)
    electrolytic erosion processes which employ an electrolyte of specified
    composition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    673,    for a process of regenerating or rehabilitating an electrolyte, per
    se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, especially subclass 62.2 for electrolytes specialized
    or designed for an electrical device used merely as an electrical component
    (e.g., rectifier, condenser, etc.) and subclasses 79.1+ for etching
    compositions which, although not intended for use in electrolysis, may be
    identical in composition to such electrolytes.


CLS 205/675
TXT Less than 50 weight percent water:

    Subject matter under subclass 674 in which the major portion by weight of
    the electrolyte is a material other than water.


CLS 205/676
TXT More than 20 weight percent organic material:

    Subject matter under subclass 675 in which more than 20 percent by weight
    of the electrolyte is composed of organic material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    684,    for an aqueous-base electrolyte containing organic material.


CLS 205/677
TXT With one or more phosphoric acids:

    Subject matter under subclass 676 in which the electrolyte also contains
    one or more phosphoric acids (e.g., orthophosphoric acid, metaphosphoric
    acid, polyphosphoric acid, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    680,    for an electrolyte containing more than 20 percent by weight of one
    or more phosphoric acids but less than or equal to 20 percent by weight
    organic material.

    682,    for an aqueous-base electrolyte containing phosphorus.


CLS 205/678
TXT With sulfuric acid:

    Subject matter under subclass 676 in which the electrolyte also contains
    sulfuric acid.


CLS 205/679
TXT More than 20 weight percent chromium compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 675 in which more than 20 percent by weight
    of the electrolyte is made of one or more chromium (Cr) compounds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    681,    for an aqueous-base electrolyte containing chromium.


CLS 205/680
TXT More than 20 weight percent of one or more phosphoric acids:

    Subject matter under subclass 675 in which more than 20 percent by weight
    of the electrolyte is made up of one or more phosphoric acids (e.g.,
    orthophosphoric acid, metaphosphoric acid, polyphosphoric acid, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    677,    for an electrolyte containing one or more phosphoric acids and more
    than 20 percent by weight organic material.

    682,    for an aqueous-base electrolyte containing phosphorous.


CLS 205/681
TXT Chromium containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 674 in which the electrolyte contains
    chromium (Cr).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    679,    for an electrolyte in which less than 50 percent by weight is water
    and more than 20 percent by weight is composed of one or more of chromium
    or its compounds.


CLS 205/682
TXT Phosphorus containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 674 in which the electrolyte contains
    phosphorus (P).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    677,    for an electrolyte containing one or more phosphoric acids and more
    than 20 percent by weight organic material.

    680,    for an electrolyte containing more than 20 percent by weight of one
    or more phosphoric acids.


CLS 205/683
TXT Cyano compound containing (e.g., hydrogen cyanide, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 674 in which the electrolyte contains a
    compound with an inorganic radical having carbon doubly or triply bonded to
    nitrogen (e.g., hydrogen cyanide, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Included under cyano compound radicals are cyanide radicals
    and their iso- and thio-variants.


CLS 205/684
TXT Organic material containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 674 in which the electrolyte contains an
    organic material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    676+,   for an electrolyte containing more than 20 percent by weight
    organic material.


CLS 205/685
TXT Nitrate containing (e.g., nitric acid, sodium nitrate, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 674 in which the electrolyte contains at
    least one nitrate cation or a compound thereof.


CLS 205/686
TXT Moving tool electrode:

    Process under subclass 640 in which the tool electrode is moved during
    electrolytic erosion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    651,    for electrolytic erosion in which a moving tool or workpiece is
    used with programmed, cyclic, or time responsive control.

    654,    for electrolytic erosion in which a moving tool electrode is used
    with gap maintenance or a defined tool-workpiece gap.

    663,    for electrolytic erosion in which the use of a rotating tool or
    workpiece is combined with mechanical abrasion or grinding.


CLS 205/687
TXT Electrolytic material treatment (product, process, and electrolyte
    composition):

    Subject matter under the class definition directed to the chemical
    modification of material by electrolysis, including products thereof where
    not provided for elsewhere and electrolyte compositions for use therein.

    (1)     Note.  For this subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder,
    some of the terms in the schedule and definitions are defined as follows:

            Platinum group metal:  A metal element from the group consisting of
    osmium (Os), iridium (Ir), platinum (Pt), ruthenium (Ru), rhodium (Rh), and
    palladium (Pd).

    (2)     Note.  The processes in this section of subclasses are intended to
    provide for electrolytic purification, concentration, or another desirable
    modification of an element, compound, or composition of matter; as
    distinguished from electrolytic synthesis of a desired element or compound,
    found in subclasses 334+.  When a starting material is electrolytically
    altered and then electrolytically reconstituted the process is classified
    as electrolytic synthesis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67+,    for electroforming processes and compositions therefore.

    80+,    for processes intended to produce a permanent coating on a
    substrate by electrolysis.

    640+,   for electrolytic erosion resulting in a change of workpiece shape
    or surface configuration.

    775+,   for electrolytic methods of analysis or testing, per se.  See the
    (1) Note in subclass 775.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses for
    cleaning processes and apparatus, in general.

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 194+ for
    electrolytic material treatment apparatus.

    252,    Compositions, especially subclass 62.2 for electrolytes specialized
    or designed for an electrical device used merely as an electrical component
    (e.g., rectifier, condenser, etc.) and subclasses 79.1+ for etching
    compositions which, although not intended for use in electrolysis, may be
    identical in composition to such electrolytes.


CLS 205/688
TXT Organic:

    Subject matter under subclass 687 in which at least a portion of the
    material treated is organic.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 1.3 for processes of culturing plants
    using electricity.

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 295 and 299 for electrical and wave energy
    processes of treating tobacco.


CLS 205/689
TXT Fibrous:

    Subject matter under subclass 688 in which the organic material contains
    long ribbon or threadlike filaments or particles, usually cells or tissue
    of vegetable or animal origin.

    (1)     Note.  Fibrous material provided for in this subclass and the
    subclasses indented hereunder includes that formed from synthetic or
    artificial organic material.


CLS 205/690
TXT Bleaching:

    Subject matter under subclass 689 in which the fibrous material is treated
    to remove color or colored impurities, usually to make the fibrous material
    lighter or whiter in appearance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    693,    for electrolytic cleaning or refining of fibrous organic material
    which does not involve bleaching.

    700,    for electrolytic bleaching of nonfibrous organic material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 101+ for bleaching, in general.


CLS 205/691
TXT Dyeing:

    Subject matter under subclass 689 in which the fibrous material is stained
    or colored.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for tanning of hides or
    skins, per se, for which see subclass 692.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, appropriate subclasses for dyeing, in general, of
    fibrous material.


CLS 205/692
TXT Hides or skins:

    Subject matter under subclass 689 in which the fibrous material treated is
    a hide or skin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, especially subclasses 94.1+ for processes in general
    of treating hides, skins, leather, or other animal tissues.


CLS 205/693
TXT Cleaning or refining:

    Subject matter under subclass 689 in which the fibrous material is purified
    by removing foreign material therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    690,    for electrolytic bleaching of fibrous organic material.

    702,    for electrolytic removal of a metal or metal compound from
    nonfibrous organic material.

    705,    for electrolytic removal of foreign material from a metal or metal
    alloy.

    771+,   for electrolytic removal of a metal or metal compound from
    inorganic material.


CLS 205/694
TXT Protection:

    Subject matter under subclass 689 in which an electrolytic current or
    potential is utilized (a) to prevent corrosion, scale formation, or other
    objectionable action in or on the fibrous organic material or (b) to
    neutralize or correct such action when the material is in normal use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    724+,   for electrolytic protection of metal objects.


CLS 205/695
TXT Oil or fat:

    Subject matter under subclass 688 in which the organic material is an oil
    or fat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 450+ for
    electrophoresis or electro-osmosis of an oil or fat and subclasses 554+ for
    electrical separation or purification of an oil or fat, without employing
    electrolysis, electrophoresis, or electro-osmosis.


CLS 205/696
TXT Hydrocarbon oil:

    Subject matter under subclass 695 in which the organic material is a
    hydrocarbon oil.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 513+ for
    separation or purification of hydrocarbon oil by electrophoresis or
    electro-osmosis and subclasses 559+ for electrical separation or
    purification of a hydrocarbon (including oil), without employing
    electrolysis, electrophoresis, or electro-osmosis.


CLS 205/697
TXT Sugar:

    Subject matter under subclass 688 in which the organic material is a sugar
    or sugars (e.g., syrup, molasses, cane and beet sugar compositions, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, for other processes and apparatus
    for general nonelectrolytic treatment of sugar, starch, and carbohydrates;
    including some products resulting therefrom.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, especially Class 536 as an integral
    part thereof for carbohydrates or derivatives thereof.


CLS 205/698
TXT Cellulosic:

    Subject matter under subclass 688 in which the organic material contains
    cellulose or derivatives thereof in which the basic molecular structure of
    cellulose remains intact.


CLS 205/699
TXT Rubber or latex:

    Subject matter under subclass 688 in which the organic material contains
    (a) a natural or synthetic elastic polymer commonly known as rubber (e.g.,
    caoutchouc, neoprene, etc.) or (b) a dispersion or emulsion of a natural or
    synthetic elastic polymer in water commonly known as latex.


CLS 205/700
TXT Bleaching:

    Subject matter under subclass 688 in which the organic material is treated
    to remove color or colored impurities, usually to make the organic material
    lighter or whiter in appearance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    690,    for electrolytic bleaching of organic fibrous material.

    702,    for electrolytic removal of a metal or metal compound from
    nonfibrous organic material which does not involve bleaching.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 101+ for bleaching in general.


CLS 205/701
TXT Biological (e.g., sterilizing, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 688 in which the organic material includes
    living organisms (e.g., sterilizing, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 527, 540, and 543
    for electrophoretic or electro-osmotic barrier separation to prepare,
    recover, or treat biological material.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 1+ for sterilizing in general.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, for a process or
    apparatus involving electrical or wave energy treatment (other than mere
    sterilization) of a micro-organism or an enzyme when the treatment is
    solely disclosed for use with a viable micro-organism or a catalytically
    active enzyme.


CLS 205/702
TXT Removing metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 688 in which a metal or metal compound is
    removed from the organic material usually either by deposition of a free
    metal or metal alloy or by precipitation of an insoluble metal compound or
    complex.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    693,    for electrolytic cleaning or refining of fibrous organic material.

    700,    for electrolytic bleaching of nonfibrous organic material.

    705+,   for electrolytic removal of foreign material from a metal or metal
    alloy.

    750,    for electrolytic removal of a metal or metal compound from water,
    sewage, or other waste water using a membrane.

    771+,   for electrolytic removal of a metal or metal compound from
    nonmetallic inorganic material.


CLS 205/703
TXT Using membrane:

    Subject matter under subclass 688 in which a semipermeable solid barrier or
    diaphragm (e.g., ion exchange membrane, etc.) is used in the treatment of
    organic material; usually the barrier or diaphragm is placed between the
    electrodes in an electrolytic cell to provide separate compartments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    746+,   for electrolytic treatment of water, sewage, or other waste water
    using a membrane.

    770,    for electrolytic treatment of other nonmetallic inorganic material
    using a membrane.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 450+ and
    particularly subclasses 518+ for electrophoretic or electro-osmotic barrier
    separation.


CLS 205/704
TXT Metal or metal alloy:

    Subject matter under subclass 687 in which the material treated is either a
    metal in a free or uncombined state or a metal alloy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    771+,   for electrolytic removal of a metal or metal compound from a
    nonmetallic inorganic liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 95+ for heat treatment of a metal in
    order to modify or maintain the internal physical structure (i.e.,
    microstructure) or chemical properties thereof, including electrical heat
    treatment.


CLS 205/705
TXT Removing foreign material (e.g., cleaning, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 704 in which foreign or undesired material
    having a different chemical composition from that of the metal or metal
    alloy is removed therefrom (e.g., cleaning, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Electrolytic removal of metal followed by a broadly recited
    heat treatment are included in this subclass and the subclasses indented
    hereunder.

    (2)     Note.  Processes which employ a Class 205 electrolytic cleaning
    step in combination with a Class 134 cleaning step are properly classified
    herein and cross-referenced to Class 134 when appropriate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    693,    for electrolytic cleaning or refining of fibrous organic material,
    includingremoval of an undesirable metal or metal compound.

    702,    for electrolytic removal of a metal or metal compound from
    nonfibrous organic material.

    750,    for electrolytic removal of a metal or metal compound from water,
    sewage, or other waste water using a membrane.

    771+,   for electrolytic removal of a metal or metal compound from
    nonmetallic inorganic material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, for cleaning and analogous
    processes which are physical or chemical in nature, but which do not use an
    electric current.


CLS 205/706
TXT Internal battery action:

    Subject matter under subclass 705 conducted without an external source of
    electrolytic current; usually the electrolytic current is derived from an
    internal chemical reaction (e.g., galvanic action, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    657,    for electrolytic erosion by internal battery action and resulting
    in a change of workpiece shape or surface configuration.

    730+,   for electrolytic protection of objects containing metal or metal
    alloy by internal battery action.

    745,    for electrolytic treatment of water, sewage, or other waste water
    by internal battery action.

    764,    for electrolytic treatment of an inorganic gas, vapor, or critical
    fluid by internal battery action.


CLS 205/707
TXT From precious metal or precious metal alloy:

    Subject matter under subclass 706 in which foreign material is removed from
    a base metal or metal alloy containing silver (Ag), gold (Au), or a
    platinum group metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    718,    for electrolytic removal of a precious metal layer from a ferrous
    metal base.

    767,    for electrolytic treatment of a solid containing a precious metal
    compound.


CLS 205/708
TXT Using anode containing aluminum:

    Subject matter under subclass 707 which employs a positively charged
    electrode (other than the metal or metal alloy under treatment) containing
    aluminum (Al), usually with the precious metal or alloy thereof serving as
    a negatively charged electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    732,    for electrolytic protection of a ferrous metal object by internal
    battery action using an anode containing aluminum.


CLS 205/709
TXT With solid-workpiece moving contact (e.g., brushing, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 705 in which a workpiece of the metal or
    metal alloy is contacted with a relatively moving solid object (e.g.,
    brushing, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes the relative moving contact of two or
    more workpieces.  Solid-workpiece moving contact may occur at any time
    before, during, or after the electrolytic treatment; and need not result in
    mechanical removal of foreign material from the metal or metal alloy
    workpiece, provided that there is relative movement between the workpiece
    and a contacting solid object.  The relative moving contact of a conductive
    brush against the workpiece for sliding electrical contact is appropriate
    for this subclass, but the use of idling rollers contacting the workpiece
    and moving only therewith are classified below on some other basis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    662+,   for electrolytic erosion combined with mechanical abrasion or
    grinding and resulting in a change of workpiece shape or surface
    configuration.


CLS 205/710
TXT With changing current:

    Subject matter under subclass 705 in which the metal or metal alloy is
    treated with alternating current, pulsed direct current, or any other
    electric current which is varied in direction or intensity during the
    electrolytic removal of foreign material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder do not
    include alterations in electric current which occur for or during a
    noncleaning treatment unless there is also some current change during the
    electrolytic removal of foreign material.


CLS 205/711
TXT Simple alternating current:

    Subject matter under subclass 710 in which electric current passing through
    the electrolyte (usually between an electrode and a workpiece) can be
    represented by a smooth sine wave having equal amplitude above and below a
    straight line ordinate at zero current (e.g., pure alternating current,
    etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    658+,   for electrolytic erosion using simple alternating current and
    resulting in a change of workpiece shape or surface configuration.


CLS 205/712
TXT Nonelemental material from ferrous metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 705 in which the foreign material is a
    chemical compound of two or more atoms and the metal or metal alloy treated
    is iron (Fe) or contains at least 50 percent iron.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217+,   for nonaqueous liquid cleaning of a ferrous metal base combined
    with electrolytic coating.


CLS 205/713
TXT Using fused bath (e.g., molten salt, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 712 in which the nonelemental material is
    removed from ferrous metal using an electrolyte bath consisting of a
    substance or mixture of substances which is heated to bring it to a liquid
    or fluid condition (e.g., molten salt, etc.) during electrolysis.


CLS 205/714
TXT Using acidic electrolyte:

    Subject matter under subclass 712 in which the nonelemental material is
    removed from ferrous metal using an electrolyte with a pH less than 7.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    723,    for other removal of foreign material from a metal or metal alloy
    using an acidic electrolyte.


CLS 205/715
TXT Containing one or more phosphoric acids:

    Subject matter under subclass 714 in which the electrolyte contains one or
    more phosphoric acids (e.g., orthophorphoric acid, metaphosphoric acid,
    polyphosphoric acid, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    677,    680, and 682, for electrolytic erosion using an electrolyte
    containing phosphorus or one or more phosphoric acids and resulting in a
    change of workpiece shape or surface configuration.


CLS 205/716
TXT Containing nitric acid:

    Subject matter under subclass 714 in which the electrolyte contains nitric
    acid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    685,    for electrolytic erosion using an electrolyte containing a nitrate,
    such as nitric acid, and resulting in a change of workpiece shape or
    surface configuration.


CLS 205/717
TXT Entire identifiable elemental layer or portion removed (e.g., stripping,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 705 in which the foreign material removed
    comprises an entire layer or portion thereof existing in elemental form
    (e.g., metal, metal alloy, metal carbide, metal nitride, etc.) on a base
    containing the metal or metal alloy, and is identifiable therefrom with a
    naked eye (e.g., electrolytic stripping, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  A body or workpiece of the metal or metal alloy may consist
    of metal alone, contain free metal as part of its composition, or consist
    of a coating or lamination thereon containing free metal.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder include
    mere electrolytic stripping or removal of elemental material into solution
    or suspension where there is no deposition of a desired material (but may
    include the deposition of an undesired precipitate).  Electrolytic
    stripping, together with electrolytic deposition of a desired material, is
    classified in the above appropriate subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  The removal of an entire surface layer or a  portion thereof
    provided for in this subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder does
    not include that which is intended to change the shape or surface
    configuration of a workpiece which is specifically provided for in the
    electrolytic erosion subclasses (640+) above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    363+,   367+, 477+, 557+, and 560+, for electrolytic synthesis in which a
    metal, metal alloy, or metal compound is produced.


CLS 205/718
TXT Precious metal removed:

    Subject matter under subclass 717 in which the elemental layer or portion
    removed contains silver (Ag), gold (Au), or a platinum group metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    707+,   for electrolytic removal of foreign material from a precious metal
    or precious metal alloy by internal battery action.


CLS 205/719
TXT Tin removed:

    Subject matter under subclass 717 in which the elemental layer or portion
    removed contains tin (Sn).


CLS 205/720
TXT Nickel removed:

    Subject matter under subclass 717 in which the elemental layer or portion
    removed contains nickel (Ni).


CLS 205/721
TXT Copper removed:

    Subject matter under subclass 717 in which the elemental layer or portion
    removed contains copper (Cu).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    772,    for electrolytic removal of copper from a nonmetallic inorganic
    liquid.


CLS 205/722
TXT Using electrolyte containing surface active agent (e.g., foaming or wetting
    agent, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 705 in which the foreign material is removed
    using an electrolyte containing a surface active agent (e.g., foaming or
    wetting agent, etc.).


CLS 205/723
TXT Using acidic electrolyte:

    Subject matter under subclass 705 in which the foreign material is removed
    using an electrolyte with a pH less than 7.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    714+,   for electrolytic removal of nonelemental material from ferrous
    metal using an acidic electrolyte.


CLS 205/724
TXT Object protection:

    Subject matter under subclass 704 in which an electrolytic current or
    potential is utilized (a) to prevent corrosion, scale formation, or other
    objectionable action in or on an object containing the metal or metal alloy
    or (b) to neutralize or correct such action when the object is in normal
    use.

    (1)     Note.  This section is not intended to provide for the electrolytic
    treatment of fluids in order to modify their properties so that they do not
    cause or accelerate electrolytic action.  Processes of this type are
    classified in other appropriate subclasses of this section (687+) based on
    the material treated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    694,    for electrolytic protection of fibrous organic material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 155+ for
    electrical or wave energy treatment in a magnetic field, including object
    protection, and subclasses 196+ for electrolytic object protection
    apparatus.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 95 for
    electrical systems having means to prevent electrolysis as a result of the
    operation of such systems.


CLS 205/725
TXT With control responsive to sensed condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 724 in which the object protection is
    regulated by detecting a characteristic or a change in a characteristic of
    the process and by implementing an action in the process based upon the
    detected characteristic or change therein.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder a
    single means may be used both to detect a characteristic or a change in a
    characteristic of the process and to implement an action in the process
    based upon the detected characteristic or change therein.  There must be a
    positive action made by a control means because of the detected
    characteristic or change therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    641+,   for electrolytic erosion resulting in a change of workpiece shape
    or surface configuration with control responsive to a sensed condition.

    729,    for electrolytic protection of an object containing a metal or
    metal alloy with programmed, cyclic, or time responsive control; but
    without involving control responsive to a sensed condition.

    743,    for electrolytic treatment of water, sewage, or other waste water
    with control responsive to a sensed condition.

    775+,   for electrolytic methods of analysis or testing, per se,  see the
    (1) note in subclass 775.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, as the residual class for processes and
    apparatus for measuring or testing, per se.  See also the (3) Note in the
    class definition of Class 73 for additional loci of other measuring and
    testing processes and apparatus of different types.

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, for measuring, testing, or
    sensing, per se, to determine electrical properties by electrical means
    even though nonelectrical values may be derived from the electrical
    properties determined.


CLS 205/726
TXT Current sensed:

    Subject matter under subclass 725 in which a detected current or a change
    in a detected current is used to control the object protection.


CLS 205/727
TXT Voltage sensed:

    Subject matter under subclass 725 in which a detected voltage or a change
    in a detected voltage is used to control the object protection.


CLS 205/728
TXT And programmed, cyclic, or time responsive control:

    Subject matter under subclass 727 which also involves (a) storing coded
    instructions or other data which is used to regulate the object protection,
    (b) repetitively regulating a sequence of process steps, or (c) regulating
    the object protection according to preset timing sequences (e.g., limiting
    various process steps to predetermined durations of time, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is not intended to include the use of direct
    current (DC) pulses which are not clearly repetitive (i.e., with multiple
    complete cycles) or predetermined.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    729,    for electrolytic protection of objects containing a metal or metal
    alloy with programmed, cyclic, or time responsive control; but without
    involving control responsive to a sensed condition.


CLS 205/729
TXT With programmed, cyclic, or time responsive control:

    Subject matter under subclass 724 which involves (a) storing coded
    instructions or other data which is used to regulate the object protection,
    (b) repetitively regulating a sequence of process steps, or (c) regulating
    the object protection according to preset timing sequences (e.g., limiting
    various process steps to predetermined durations of time, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is not intended to include the use of direct
    current (DC) pulses which are not clearly repetitive (i.e., with multiple
    complete cycles) or predetermined.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    646+,   for electrolytic erosion resulting in a change of workpiece shape
    or surface configuration with programmed, cyclic, or time responsive
    control.

    725+,   for electrolytic protection of objects containing a metal or metal
    alloy with control responsive to a sensed condition.

    728,    for electrolytic protection of objects containing a metal or metal
    alloy involving both control responsive to a sensed voltage and programmed,
    cyclic, or time responsive control.

    744,    for electrolytic treatment of water, sewage, or other waste water
    with programmed, cyclic, or time responsive control.


CLS 205/730
TXT Internal battery action (e.g., using sacrificial anode, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 724 in which the object protection is
    performed without an external source of electrolytic current; usually the
    electrolytic current is derived from an internal chemical reaction (e.g.,
    galvanic action, using a sacrificial anode, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    706+,   for electrolytic removal of foreign material from  a metal or metal
    alloy by internal battery action.

    745,    for electrolytic treatment of water, sewage, or other waste water
    by internal battery action.

    764,    for electrolytic treatment of an inorganic gas, vapor, or critical
    fluid by internal battery action.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 197 for
    electrolytic object protection apparatus using internal battery action.


CLS 205/731
TXT Ferrous metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 730 in which the object protected is iron
    (Fe) or contains at least 50 percent iron.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    735+,   for electrolytic protection of a ferrous metal object without
    employing internal battery action.

    741,    for other electrolytic treatment of a metal or metal alloy
    containing iron.


CLS 205/732
TXT Using anode containing aluminum:

    Subject matter under subclass 731 in which a positive electrode containing
    aluminum (Al) is used to protect the ferrous metal object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    708,    for electrolytic removal of foreign material from a precious metal
    or precious metal alloy by internal battery action using an anode
    containing aluminum.


CLS 205/733
TXT Using anode containing magnesium:

    Subject matter under subclass 731 in which a positive electrode containing
    magnesium (Mg) is used to protect the ferrous metal object.


CLS 205/734
TXT Metal imbedded in asphalt, concrete, stone, or masonry (e.g., reinforced
    concrete, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 724 in which the object protected consists of
    a metal imbedded in asphalt, concrete, stone, or masonry (e.g., reinforced
    concrete, etc.).


CLS 205/735
TXT Ferrous metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 724 in which the object protected is iron
    (Fe) or contains at least 50 percent iron.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    731+,   for electrolytic protection of a ferrous metal object by internal
    battery action.

    741,    for other electrolytic treatment of a metal or metal alloy
    containing iron.


CLS 205/736
TXT Stainless steel:

    Subject matter under subclass 735 in which the ferrous metal is steel
    containing at least 9 weight percent chromium (Cr).


CLS 205/737
TXT Using anode containing free carbon (e.g., graphite, carbon fibers, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 735 in which a positive electrode containing
    free carbon (C) (e.g., graphite, carbon fibers, etc.) is used to protect
    the ferrous metal object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    739,    for electrolytic protection of a nonferrous metal or metal alloy
    object using an anode containing free carbon.

    760,    for electrolytic treatment of water, sewage, or other waste water
    using an electrode containing a precious metal or free carbon.


CLS 205/738
TXT Using anode containing precious metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 724 in which a positive electrode containing
    silver (Ag), gold (Au), or a platinum group metal is used to protect object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    760,    for electrolytic treatment of water, sewage, or other waste water
    using an electrode containing a precious metal or free carbon.


CLS 205/739
TXT Using anode containing free carbon (e.g., graphite, carbon fibers, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 724 in which a positive electrode containing
    free carbon (C) (e.g., graphite, carbon fibers, etc.) is used to protect
    the object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    760,    for electrolytic treatment of water, sewage, or other waste water
    using an electrode containing precious metal or free carbon.


CLS 205/740
TXT Vessel (e.g., ship hull, steam boiler, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 724 in which the metal object is a container
    of any structural shape or configuration (e.g., ship hull, steam boiler,
    etc.), provided that it is used to hold solid or fluid material.


CLS 205/741
TXT Containing iron:

    Subject matter under subclass 704 in which the metal or metal alloy
    contains iron (Fe).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    731+,   for electrolytic protection of ferrous metal objects by internal
    battery action.

    735+,   for electrolytic protection of ferrous metal objects without using
    internal battery action.


CLS 205/742
TXT Water, sewage, or other waste water:

    Subject matter under subclass 687 in which the material treated is water,
    sewage, or any other waste water.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder are
    intended to provide for purification or other treatment of water or waste
    water as the desired product. Electrolytic treatment of water, sewage, or
    other waste water to obtain other products are classified elsewhere in this
    class, depending on the particular process and type of material produced,
    and are cross-referenced here when necessary.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 450+ for
    electrophoretic or electro-osmotic separation or purification of aqueous
    liquids and subclasses 554+ for other electrical separation or purification
    of aqueous liquids.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, especially subclass 748 for
    nonelectrolytic purification or separation of a liquid utilizing the direct
    application of electrical or wave energy; see Class 204, (14) Note, for the
    class line.


CLS 205/743
TXT With control responsive to sensed condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 742 in which the water treatment is regulated
    by detecting a characteristic or a change in a characteristic of the
    process and by implementing an action in the process based upon the
    detected characteristic or change therein.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder a
    single means may be used both to detect a characteristic or a change in a
    characteristic of the process and to implement an action in the process
    based upon the detected characteristic or change therein.  There must be a
    positive action made by a control means because of the detected
    characteristic or change therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    641+,   for electrolytic erosion resulting in a change of workpiece shape
    or surface configuration with control responsive to a sensed condition.

    725+,   for electrolytic protection of objects with control responsive to a
    sensed condition.

    744,    for electrolytic treatment of water, sewage, or other waste water
    with programmed, cyclic, or time responsive control; but without involving
    control responsive to a sensed condition.

    775+,   for electrolytic methods of analysis or testing, per se.  See the
    (1) Note in subclass 775.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, as the residual class for processes and
    apparatus for measuring or testing, per se.  See also the (3) Note in the
    class definition of Class 73 for additional loci of other measuring and
    testing processes and apparatus of different types.

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, for measuring, testing, or
    sensing, per se, to determine electrical properties by electrical means
    even though nonelectrical values may be derived from the electrical
    properties determined.


CLS 205/744
TXT With programmed, cyclic, or time responsive control:

    Subject matter under subclass 742 which involves (a) storing coded
    instructions or other data which is used to regulate the treatment of
    water, sewage, or other waste water, (b) repetitively regulating a sequence
    of process steps, or (c) regulating the treatment according to preset
    timing sequences (e.g., limiting various process steps to predetermined
    durations of time, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is not intended to include the use of direct
    current (DC) pulses which are not clearly repetitive (i.e., with multiple
    complete cycles) or predetermined.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    646+,   for electrolytic erosion resulting in a change of workpiece shape
    or surface configuration with programmed, cyclic, or time responsive
    control.

    728,    for electrolytic protection of objects containing a metal or metal
    alloy involving both control responsive to a sensed voltage and programmed,
    cyclic, or time responsive control.

    729,    for electrolytic protection of objects containing a metal or metal
    alloy with programmed, cyclic, or time responsive control; but not
    involving control responsive to a sensed condition.

    743,    for electrolytic treatment of water, sewage, or other waste water
    with control responsive to a sensed condition.


CLS 205/745
TXT Internal battery action:

    Subject matter under subclass 742 in which the water, sewage, or other
    waste water is treated by electrolysis without an external source of
    electrolytic current; usually the electrolytic current is derived from an
    internal chemical reaction (e.g., galvanic action, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    706+,   for electrolytic removal of foreign material from a metal or metal
    alloy by internal battery action.

    730+,   for electrolytic protection of objects containing a metal or metal
    alloy by internal battery action.

    764,    for electrolytic treatment of an inorganic gas, vapor, or critical
    fluid by internal battery action.


CLS 205/746
TXT Using membrane:

    Subject matter under subclass 742 in which a semipermeable solid barrier or
    diaphragm (e.g., ion exchange membrane, etc.) is used in the treatment of
    water, sewage, or other waste water; usually the barrier or diaphragm is
    placed between the electrodes in an electrolytic cell to provide separate
    compartments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    703,    for electrolytic treatment of organic material using a membrane.

    770,    for electrolytic treatment of other nonmetallic inorganic material
    using a membrane.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 450+ particularly
    subclasses 518+ for electrophoretic or electro-osmotic barrier separation.


CLS 205/747
TXT With filtering:

    Subject matter under subclass 746 in which the water, sewage, or other
    waste water is passed through a porous substance to mechanically remove a
    solid therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    751+,   for electrolytic treatment of water, sewage, or other waste water
    with filtering; but without the use of a membrane.


CLS 205/748
TXT Plural membranes:

    Subject matter under subclass 746 in which two or more membranes are used.


CLS 205/749
TXT With recycle or reuse:

    Subject matter under subclass 748 in which material is either circulated
    outside the treatment process and returned thereto or used again later
    (e.g., in plural steps with or without regeneration, etc.).


CLS 205/750
TXT Removing metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 746 in which a metal or a metal compound is
    removed from the water, sewage, or other waste water; usually either by
    deposition of a free metal or metal alloy or by precipitation of an
    insoluble metal compound or complex.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    702,    for electrolytic removal of a metal or metal compound from organic
    material.

    705+,   for electrolytic removal of foreign material from a metal or metal
    alloy.

    771+,   for electrolytic removal of a metal or metal compound from
    nonmetallic inorganic material.


CLS 205/751
TXT With filtering:

    Subject matter under subclass 742 in which the water, sewage, or other
    waste water is passed through a porous substance to mechanically remove a
    solid therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    747,    for electrolytic treatment of water, sewage, or other waste water
    using a membrane; and with filtering.


CLS 205/752
TXT And treatment with oxygen or ozone:

    Subject matter under subclass 751 in which the water, sewage, or other
    waste water is also exposed to oxygen or ozone which may either be provided
    from an external source or be produced during electrolysis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    756,    for electrolytic treatment of water, sewage, or other waste water
    using an oxygenating gas; but without filtering.


CLS 205/753
TXT Using particle bed:

    Subject matter under subclass 742 in which a discrete body of solid
    particles is used in the treatment of water, sewage, or other waste water.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder are not
    intended to provide for the use of a bed consisting only of solid particles
    produced or precipitated during the electrolytic treatment.


CLS 205/754
TXT As electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 753 in which the particle bed is used as an
    electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    758,    for electrolytic treatment of water, sewage, or other waste water
    using a porous electrode other than a particle bed.


CLS 205/755
TXT With mixing, agitating, or gas-liquid contacting:

    Subject matter under subclass 742 in which the water, sewage, or other
    waste water under treatment is (a) mixed, agitated, or otherwise
    intermingled or (b) contacted with a gas or vapor.

    (1)     Note.  The gas or vapor may either be provided from an external
    source or be produced during electrolysis, provided that such gas or vapor
    is clearly disclosed as intentionally contacting the water, sewage, or
    other waste water.  For the purpose of this subclass and the subclasses
    indented hereunder, such contact is not assumed as an inevitable result of
    electrolysis and does not provide for the mere liberation of gas or vapor
    produced thereby.


CLS 205/756
TXT Using oxygenating gas (e.g., ozone, air, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 755 in which the water, sewage, or other
    waste water is contacted with a gas containing oxygen in a form which may
    be used to saturate the water, sewage, or other waste water with oxygen
    (e.g., ozone, air, etc.).


CLS 205/757
TXT Bubbling (e.g., for flotation of solids, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 755 in which the water, sewage, or other
    waste water is contacted with a gas by allowing gas bubbles to rise in a
    body of the water, sewage, or other waste water (e.g., for flotation of
    solids, etc.).


CLS 205/758
TXT Using porous electrode (e.g., perforated, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 742 in which at least one electrode used in
    the treatment of water, sewage, or other waste water is provided with two
    or more penetrating holes passing through the entire depth thereof (e.g.,
    perforated, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    754,    for electrolytic treatment of water, sewage, or other waste water
    using a particle bed electrode.


CLS 205/759
TXT Using coated electrode (e.g., having electrocatalytic coating, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 742 in which at least one electrode used in
    the treatment of water, sewage, or other waste water is provided with a
    distinguishable layer of different composition (e.g., having
    electrocatalytic coating, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  The electrode coating may be formed during the water
    treatment.


CLS 205/760
TXT Using electrode containing precious metal or free carbon (e.g., insoluble
    electrode, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 742 in which at least one electrode used in
    the treatment of water, sewage, or other waste water contains silver (Ag),
    gold (Au), a platinum group metal, or free carbon (C) (e.g., insoluble
    electrode, etc.).


CLS 205/761
TXT Using electrode containing ferrous metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 742 in which at least one electrode used in
    the treatment of water, sewage, or other waste water contains a ferrous
    metal (i.e., containing at least 50 percent iron).


CLS 205/762
TXT Alkali-forming metal hydroxide:

    Subject matter under subclass 687 in which the material treated is a metal
    hydroxide which dissociates on dissolution in water to provide a pH greater
    than 7.


CLS 205/763
TXT Gas, vapor, or critical fluid:

    Subject matter under subclass 687 in which the material treated is a gas,
    vapor, or fluid beyond its critical point (i.e., in which all liquid and
    vapor merge into a single continuous fluid phase having properties
    different from either the liquid or vapor).


CLS 205/764
TXT Internal battery action:

    Subject matter under subclass 763 in which the material treatment is
    conducted without an external source of electrolytic current; usually the
    electrolytic current is derived from an internal chemical reaction (e.g.,
    galvanic action, using a sacrificial anode, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    657,    for electrolytic erosion by internal battery action and resulting
    in a change of workpiece shape or surface configuration.

    706+,   for electrolytic removal of foreign material from a metal or metal
    alloy by internal battery action.

    730+,   for electrolytic protection of an object containing a metal or
    metal alloy by internal battery action.

    745,    for electrolytic treatment of water, sewage, or other waste water
    by internal battery action.


CLS 205/765
TXT Using solid electrolyte:

    Subject matter under subclass 763 in which the material treatment is
    conducted using a solid electrolyte.


CLS 205/766
TXT Solid (e.g., articles, particles, ore, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 687 in which the material under treatment is
    an inorganic, nonmetallic solid (e.g., articles, particles, ore, etc.).


CLS 205/767
TXT Containing precious metal (e.g., beneficiating ore, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 766 in which the solid material contains
    silver (Ag), gold (Au), or a platinum group metal (e.g., beneficiating ore,
    etc.).


CLS 205/768
TXT Containing free carbon (e.g., graphite, carbon black, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 766 in which the solid material contains
    carbon (C) in a free or uncombined state (e.g., graphite, carbon black,
    etc.).


CLS 205/769
TXT Glass, silica, quartz, or optical material (e.g., contact lenses, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 766 in which the solid material is glass,
    silica, quartz, or a material used for optical purposes (e.g., contact
    lenses, etc.).


CLS 205/770
TXT Using membrane:

    Subject matter under subclass 687 in which a semipermeable solid barrier or
    diaphragm (e.g., ion exchange membrane, etc.) is used in the material
    treatment; usually the barrier or diaphragm is placed between the
    electrodes in an electrolytic cell to provide separate compartments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    703,    for electrolytic treatment of organic material using a membrane.

    746+,   for electrolytic treatment of water, sewage, or other waste water
    using a membrane.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 450+ and
    particularly subclasses 518+ for electrophoretic or electro-osmotic barrier
    separation.


CLS 205/771
TXT Removing metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 687 in which a metal or a metal compound is
    removed from the material under treatment, usually either by deposition of
    free metal or metal alloy or by precipitation of an insoluble metal
    compound or complex.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    693,    for electrolytic cleaning or refining of fibrous organic material.

    702,    for electrolytic removal of a metal or metal compound from organic
    material.

    705+,   for electrolytic removal of foreign material from a metal or metal
    alloy.

    750,    for electrolytic removal of a metal or metal compound from water,
    sewage, or other waste water using a membrane.


CLS 205/772
TXT Copper:

    Subject matter under subclass 771 in which copper (Cu) is removed.


CLS 205/775
TXT ELECTROLYTIC ANALYSIS OR TESTING (PROCESS AND ELECTROLYTE COMPOSITION):

    Subject matter under the class definition involving an electrolytic method
    of analysis or testing, including electrolyte compositions for use therein.

    (1)     Note.  Processes drawn to combinations of electrolytic analysis or
    testing with other electrolytic processes provided for above are placed in
    the appropriate above subclass or subclasses and cross-referenced in this
    section when desired.  However, electrolytic processes carried out merely
    for the purpose of analysis or testing (e.g., stripping of a coating from a
    substrate by electrolysis merely to determine the bonding strength of the
    coating, etc.) are properly classified here.

    (2)     Note.  Classification in this subclass and the subclasses indented
    hereunder is based on electrolytic analysis or testing to obtain a desired
    result.  Therefore, analysis or testing of a sample for the presence or
    amount of a specific component is classified based on the specific
    component (when provided for) even if a test electrode only senses an
    intermediate second component to deduce the presence of the specific
    component. Cross-referencing to any other appropriate subclass or
    subclasses which provide for the detection of the intermediate second
    component is merely discretionary.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, as the residual class for processes and
    apparatus for measuring or testing, per se.  See also the (3) Note in the
    class definition of Class 73 for additional loci of other measuring and
    testing processes and apparatus of different types.

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 400+ for
    corresponding apparatus utilizing electrolytic action for analysis or
    testing.

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, for measuring, testing, or
    sensing, per se, to determine electrical properties by electrical means
    even though nonelectrical values may be derived from the electrical
    properties determined; especially subclasses 323+ for testing of
    underground formations by electrolytic methods (e.g., testing an oil well
    bore for water strata, etc.), subclasses 425+ for testing of an electrolyte
    to determine electrical properties thereof, and other appropriate
    subclasses for any other electrolytic-type testing, in general, which is
    combined with a significant electrical testing circuit or is unrelated to
    the subject matter of Class 205.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, for a qualitative
    or quantitative chemical analysis including (1) a step involving
    electrochemistry followed by another chemical reaction not involving
    electrochemistry or (2) a step which may alternatively involve either
    electrochemistry or another chemical reaction not involving
    electrochemistry.


CLS 205/775.5
TXT For corrosion:

    Subject matter under subclass 775 in which the gradual electrochemical
    disintegration of a material is determined, usually to test the ability of
    a solid material (e.g., ferrous metal, etc.) to withstand such
    disintegration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    694,    for electrolytic protection of fibrous organic material.

    724+,   for electrolytic protection of metal objects.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 404 for
    electrolytic apparatus for analysis and testing of corrosion and subclasses
    196+ for electrolytic object protection apparatus.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 387+ for compositions for use as or in
    agents for preventing, inhibiting, or reducing corrosion or chemical attack
    of metals or other solid materials.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 7+ for a process of maintaining an
    environment nondestructive to metal, usually by continuous or regular
    addition of a chemical agent to inhibit corrosion of a metal object.


CLS 205/776
TXT Testing by internal battery action:

    Subject matter under subclass 775.5 in which a material or system is tested
    for corrosion without an external source of electric current; usually the
    electrolytic current is derived from an internal chemical reaction (e.g.,
    galvanic action, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    730+,   for electrolytic protection of metal objects by internal battery
    action.


CLS 205/776.5
TXT Of coating, coated substrate, or imbedded object:

    Subject matter under subclass 775.5 in which the material is a coating,
    coated substrate, or imbedded object (e.g., reinforced concrete, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  The coating, coated substrate, or imbedded object must exist
    as such apart from any base material or matrix which is included merely for
    the purpose of supporting the coating, coated substrate, or imbedded object
    during electrolytic analysis or testing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    734,    for electrolytic protection of metal imbedded in asphalt, concrete,
    stone, or masonry.

    791,    for electrolytic analysis or testing of a solid coating or coated
    substrate for material properties thereof, in general.

    794,    for electrolytic analysis or testing of a reactant or product
    during the formation of a coating on a substrate.


CLS 205/777
TXT Of ferrous metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 775.5 in which the material is iron (Fe) or
    contains at least 50 percent iron.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    735+,   for electrolytic protection of ferrous metal objects.


CLS 205/777.5
TXT Involving enzyme or micro-organism:

    Subject matter under subclass 775 in which the method involves an enzyme or
    micro-organism (e.g., animal or plant cells, bacteria, virus, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Measuring or testing for the activity of an enzyme or
    micro-organism by change in electrolytic action is an example of the
    subject matter provided for in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    701,    for electrolytic treatment of biological organic material.

    779,    for electrolytic analysis or testing of a biological fluid for
    halogen or a halogen containing compound, but without involving an enzyme
    or micro-organism.

    792,    for electrolytic analysis or testing of a biological fluid or
    tissue, but without involving an enzyme or micro-organism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 403 for
    electrolytic apparatus for biological analysis and testing.

    435,    Chemistry: Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 4+ for
    nonelectrolytic, nonelectrophoretic, and nonelectro-osmotic measuring or
    testing processes involving enzymes or micro-organisms; a composition or
    test strip therefor; and processes of forming such a composition or test
    strip.  This includes processes in which a micro-organism is cultured or an
    enzyme functions catalytically when a nonelectrical property is measured,
    processes of purification and immobilization of enzymes, and processes
    using an enzyme to produce a product.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, appropriate
    subclasses for related processes of measuring or testing (1) in which an
    enzyme reacts noncatalytically or (2) involving an antigen antibody (which
    is not living) for the nondiagnostic identification of chemical species.


CLS 205/778
TXT And using semipermeable membrane:

    Subject matter under subclass 777.5 in which a semipermeable solid barrier
    or diaphragm is utilized, often as a support for an enzyme.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    782.5+, for electrolytic analysis or testing for an oxygen or oxygen
    containing compound using a semipermeable membrane, but not involving an
    enzyme or micro-organism.

    793,    for electrolytic analysis or testing using a semipermeable
    membrane, in general, but not involving an enzyme or micro-organism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 415 for
    electrolytic apparatus for analysis and testing using a selectively
    permeable membrane.


CLS 205/778.5
TXT For halogen or halogen containing compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 775 in which a material is analyzed or tested
    for halogen (i.e., F, Cl, Br, I, or At) or a halogen containing compound.


CLS 205/779
TXT In biological fluid (e.g., urine, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 778.5 in which the material analyzed or
    tested is a biological fluid (e.g., urine, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for electrolytic analysis or
    testing of a fluid (e.g., air, carbon dioxide, etc.) which may be
    metabolized or may be the result of a metabolic process unless the fluid is
    specifically disclosed in connection with a metabolic or biological process
    or organism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    701,    for electrolytic treatment of biological organic material.

    777.5+, for electrolytic analysis or testing involving an enzyme or
    micro-organism.

    792,    for electrolytic analysis or testing of a biological material  in
    general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 403 for
    electrolytic apparatus for biological analysis and testing.


CLS 205/779.5
TXT Gaseous halogen or halogen containing compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 778.5 in which the material analyzed or
    tested contains gaseous halogen or a gaseous halogen containing compound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 424+ and 431+ for
    electrolytic apparatus for analysis and testing of a gas with or without
    the use of a solid electrolyte, respectively.


CLS 205/780
TXT Using electrode containing precious metal or free carbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 778.5 in which an electrode containing silver
    (Ag), gold (Au), a platinum group metal, or free carbon (C) (e.g.,
    graphite, carbon fibers, etc.) is used.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    786,    for electrolytic analysis or testing for oxygen or an oxygen
    containing compound other than water using anelectrode containing precious
    metal or free carbon.

    794.5,  for other processes of electrolytic analysis or testing using an
    electrode containing precious metal or free carbon.


CLS 205/780.5
TXT For nitrogen or nitrogen containing compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 775 in which a material is analyzed or tested
    for nitrogen (N) or a nitrogen containing compound.


CLS 205/781
TXT Nitrogen oxide (e.g., gaseous nitrogen dioxide, dissolved sodium nitrate,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 780.5 in which the material is analyzed or
    tested for a nitrogen oxide (e.g., gaseous nitrogen dioxide, dissolved
    sodium nitrate, etc.).


CLS 205/781.5
TXT For alkali metal, alkaline earth metal, or compound thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 775 in which a material is analyzed or tested
    for an alkali metal (i.e., Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs, or Fr), an alkaline earth
    metal (i.e., Be, Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba, or Ra), or a compound of an alkali metal
    or alkaline earth metal.


CLS 205/782
TXT For oxygen or oxygen containing compound (except water):

    Subject matter under subclass 775 in which a material is analyzed or tested
    for oxygen (O) or an oxygen containing compound other than water.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder also
    provide for the analysis or testing for the chemical potential of oxygen or
    an oxygen containing compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    788,    for processes of analyzing or testing a material for water.


CLS 205/782.5
TXT Using semipermeable membrane:

    Subject matter under subclass 782 in which a semipermeable solid barrier or
    diaphragm is utilized.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    778,    for electrolytic analysis or testing involving an enzyme or
    micro-organism and using a semipermeable membrane.

    793,    for electrolytic analysis or testing using a semipermeable
    membrane, in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 415 for
    electrolytic apparatus for analysis and testing using a selectively
    permeable membrane.


CLS 205/783
TXT Gaseous oxygen or oxygen containing compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 782.5 in which the material analyzed or
    tested contains gaseous oxygen or a gaseous oxygen containing compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    784+,   for electrolytic analysis or testing for gaseous oxygen or a
    gaseous oxygen containing compound using a solid electrolyte, but not using
    a semipermeable membrane.

    785.5,  for electrolytic analysis or testing for gaseous oxygen or a
    gaseous oxygen containing compound, but without using a semipermeable
    membrane or a solid electrolyte.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 424+ and 431+
    for electrolytic apparatus for analysis and testing of a gas, in general.


CLS 205/783.5
TXT Using solid electrolyte:

    Subject matter under subclass 782 in which a solid ionic conductor (i.e.,
    electrolyte) is utilized.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 410 and 421+ for
    electrolytic apparatus for analysis and testing using a solid electrolyte.


CLS 205/784
TXT Gaseous oxygen or oxygen containing compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 783.5 in which the material analyzed or
    tested contains gaseous oxygen or a gaseous oxygen containing compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    783,    for electrolytic analysis or testing for gaseous oxygen or a
    gaseous oxygen containing compound using a semipermeable membrane.

    785.5,  for electrolytic analysis or testing for gaseous oxygen or a
    gaseous oxygen containing compound, in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 424+ for
    electrolytic apparatus for analysis and testing of a gas using a solid
    electrolyte.


CLS 205/784.5
TXT In combustible gas (e.g., air/fuel mixture for internal combustion engine,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 784 in which the gaseous oxygen or gaseous
    oxygen containing compound is either flammable or is found in a flammable
    mixture of gases.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is not intended to include sensing of an
    exhaust gas to control an air/fuel feed mixture to an internal combustion
    engine unless the exhaust gas is specifically disclosed as comprising a
    combustible gas containing gaseous oxygen or a gaseous oxygen containing
    compound.


CLS 205/785
TXT With heating or temperature sensing:

    Subject matter under subclass 784 which includes heating or detection of
    temperature, often used in connection with temperature control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 408 for
    electrolytic apparatus for analysis and testing with means for temperature
    or pressure compensation.


CLS 205/785.5
TXT Gaseous oxygen or oxygen containing compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 782 in which the material analyzed or tested
    contains gaseous oxygen or a gaseous oxygen containing compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    783,    for electrolytic analysis or testing for gaseous oxygen or a
    gaseous oxygen containing compound using a semipermeable membrane.

    784+,   for electrolytic analysis or testing for gaseous oxygen or a
    gaseous oxygen containing compound using a solid electrolyte, but not using
    a semipermeable membrane.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 424+ and 431+ for
    electrolytic apparatus for analysis and testing of a gas, in general.


CLS 205/786
TXT Using electrode containing precious metal or free carbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 782 in which an electrode containing silver
    (Ag), gold (Au), a platinum group metal, or free carbon (C) (e.g.,
    graphite, carbon fibers, etc.) is used.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    780,    for electrolytic analysis or testing for halogen or a halogen
    containing compound using an electrode containing precious metal or free
    carbon.

    794.5,  for other processes of electrolytic analysis or testing using an
    electrode containing precious metal or free carbon.


CLS 205/786.5
TXT For sulfur or sulfur containing compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 775 in which a material is analyzed or tested
    for sulfur (S) or a sulfur containing compound.


CLS 205/787
TXT For organic compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 775 in which a material is analyzed or tested
    for an organic compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    688+,   for electrolytic treatment of organic material.


CLS 205/787.5
TXT For pH:

    Subject matter under subclass 775 in which a material is analyzed or tested
    for the logarithm of the reciprocal of hydrogen (H) ion concentration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 433 for
    electrolytic apparatus used to measure carbon content or pH.


CLS 205/788
TXT For water (e.g., moisture, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 775 in which a material is analyzed or tested
    for water (e.g., moisture, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    782+,   for electrolytic analysis or testing for oxygen or an oxygen
    containing compound other than water.


CLS 205/788.5
TXT Including titration:

    Subject matter under subclass 775 which involves the volumetric
    determination of the concentration of a desired substance in a known volume
    of a solution by adding a standard reacting solution of known strength and
    volume until the reaction is completed as indicated electrometrically
    (e.g., potentiometric titration, coulometric titration, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 405 for
    electrolytic titration apparatus.


CLS 205/789
TXT For ion concentration (e.g., ion activity, pKa, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 775 in which a material is analyzed or tested
    for ion concentration (e.g., ion activity, pKa, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  The electrolytic analysis or testing of a material for the
    mere presence of one or more ionic species in solution is insufficient for
    placement in this subclass or the subclass indented hereunder, which are
    intended to provide for determination of at least the relative quantity of
    ions in solution.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 416+ for
    electrolytic apparatus for analysis and testing using an ion sensitive
    electrode.


CLS 205/789.5
TXT Cations:

    Subject matter under subclass 789 in which the material is analyzed or
    tested for the concentration of one or more cationic species.


CLS 205/790
TXT For composition of metal or metal alloy:

    Subject matter under subclass 775 in which the chemical composition of a
    metal or metal alloy is determined.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for analysis or testing for
    localized variations in composition unless combined with the determination
    of the overall chemical composition of a metal or metal alloy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    790.5+, for electrolytic analysis or testing of a solid material for other
    properties, particularly subclass 791.5 for defects in solid material.


CLS 205/790.5
TXT For properties of solid material (e.g., surface area, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 775 in which a physical, chemical, or
    electrical property of a solid material (including manufactured articles or
    subassemblies) is determined (e.g., surface area, etc.).


CLS 205/791
TXT Of coating or coated substrate (e.g., thickness, bonding strength, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 790.5 in which the solid material is a
    coating or coated substrate (e.g., thickness, bonding strength, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  The coating or coated substrate must exist as such apart
    from any base material or matrix which is included merely for the purpose
    of supporting the coating or coated substrate during electrolytic analysis
    or testing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    776.5,  for electrolytic analysis or testing of a coating, coated
    substrate, or imbedded object for corrosion.

    794,    for electrolytic analysis or testing of a reactant or product
    during the deposition of a coating on a substrate.


CLS 205/791.5
TXT Defects:

    Subject matter under subclass 790.5 which involves detecting undesirable
    localized variations in a solid material or component (e.g., localized
    microstructure defects in a solid metal article which may result in
    mechanical or electrical failure, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 401 for
    electrolytic apparatus for analysis and testing having means for fault
    testing of a sensor or component used therein.


CLS 205/792
TXT Of biological material (e.g., urine, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 775 in which a biological material (e.g.,
    urine, etc.) is analyzed or tested.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for electrolytic analysis or
    testing of a fluid (e.g., air, carbon dioxide, etc.) which may be
    metabolized or may be the result of a metabolic process unless the fluid is
    specifically disclosed in connection with a metabolic or biological process
    or organism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    701,    for electrolytic treatment of biological organic material.

    777.5+, for electrolytic analysis or testing involving an enzyme or
    micro-organism.

    779,    for electrolytic analysis or testing of a biological fluid for
    halogen or a halogen containing compound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 403 for
    electrolytic apparatus for biological analysis and testing.


CLS 205/792.5
TXT Using ion exchange resin:

    Subject matter under subclass 775 in which an ion exchange resin is
    employed.


CLS 205/793
TXT Using semipermeable membrane:

    Subject matter under subclass 775 in which a semipermeable solid barrier or
    diaphragm is utilized.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    778,    for electrolytic analysis or testing involving an enzyme or
    micro-organism and using a semipermeable membrane.

    782.5+, for electrolytic analysis or testing for an oxygen or oxygen
    containing compound using a semipermeable membrane.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 415 for
    electrolytic apparatus for analysis and testing using a selectively
    permeable membrane.


CLS 205/793.5
TXT Tracking chemical reactions:

    Subject matter under subclass 775 which involves electrolytic analysis or
    testing of a reactant or product during a chemical reaction.


CLS 205/794
TXT Coating (e.g., electroless, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 793.5 in which the chemical reaction results
    in the deposition of a coating on a substrate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    776.5,  for electrolytic analysis or testing of a coating, coated
    substrate, or imbedded object for corrosion.

    791,    for electrolytic analysis or testing for material properties of a
    solid coating or coated substrate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 434 for
    electrolytic apparatus for analysis and testing involving plating, coating,
    or stripping.


CLS 205/794.5
TXT Using electrode containing precious metal or free carbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 775 in which an electrode containing silver
    (Ag), gold (Au), a platinum group metal, or free carbon (C) (e.g.,
    graphite, carbon fibers, etc.) is used.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    780,    for electrolytic analysis or testing for halogen or a halogen
    containing compound using an electrode containing precious metal or free
    carbon.

    786,    for electrolytic analysis or testing for oxygen or an oxygen
    containing compound other than water using an electrode containing precious
    metal or free carbon.


CLS 205/799
TXT MISCELLANEOUS ELECTROLYSIS:

    Subject matter under the class definition involving electrolysis which is
    not provided for above.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS
    PERTAINING TO ELECTROLYTIC COATING


CLS 205/915
TXT ELECTROLYTIC DEPOSITION OF SEMICONDUCTOR:

    Subject matter wherein a semiconductor is deposited.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123,    for subject matter directed to the selected area electrolytic
    coating wherein the product is or includes a semiconductor.


CLS 205/916
TXT SEQUENTIAL ELECTROLYTIC AND NONELECTROLYTIC, OR NONELECTROLYTIC AND
    ELECTROLYTIC COATING FROM THE SAME BATH:

    Subject matter wherein electrolytic and nonelectrolytic coating steps are
    sequentially performed in any order from the same bath.

    (1)     Note.  Compare with this class, subclass 109 for subject matter
    directed to depositing a coating which contains embedded solid material,
    such processes often involving simultaneous electrolytic and
    nonelectrolytic coating from the same bath.


CLS 205/917
TXT TREATMENT OF WORKPIECE BETWEEN COATING STEPS:

    Subject matter wherein the workpiece is treated after one coating step and
    before another coating step.


CLS 205/918
TXT USE OF WAVE ENERGY OR ELECTRICAL DISCHARGE DURING PRETREATMENT OF SUBSTRATE
    OR POST-TREATMENT OF COATING:

    Subject matter wherein wave energy or electrical discharge is used during
    the pretreatment of a substrate prior to coating or during the
    post-treatment of a coating after it has been deposited.


CLS 205/919
TXT WATERPROOFING:

    Subject matter wherein one or more steps of water-proofing the substrate
    prior to electrolytic coating are performed or wherein the electrolytic
    coating itself serves to waterproof the substrate.


CLS 205/920
TXT ELECTROLYTIC COATING OF CIRCUIT BOARD OR PRINTED CIRCUIT (OTHER THAN
    SELECTED AREA COATING):

    Subject matter directed to the production of a circuit board or printed
    circuit wherein an electrolytic coating step either transforms a substrate
    into the circuit board or printed circuit or simply deposits material on a
    substrate which before coating was already identifiable as a circuit board
    or printed circuit and wherein the electrolytic coating is applied to the
    entire  substrate.


CLS 205/921
TXT ELECTROLYTIC COATING OF PRINTING MEMBER (OTHER THAN SELECTED AREA COATING):

    Subject matter directed to the preparation of the printing surface of a
    sheet, plate, roll or other member employed in printing by electrolytically
    depositing a coating over the entire surface.


CLS 205/922
TXT ELECTROLYTIC COATING OF MAGNETIC STORAGE MEDIUM (OTHER THAN SELECTED AREA
    COATING):

    Subject matter directed to the production of a magnetic storage medium
    wherein an electrolytic coating step either transforms a substrate into the
    magnetic storage medium or simply deposits material on a substrate which
    before the electrolytic coating step was already identifiable as a magnetic
    storage medium and wherein the electrolytic coating is applied to the
    entire substrate.


CLS 205/923
TXT SOLAR COLLECTOR OR ABSORBER:

    Subject matter wherein an electrolytic coating is provided on a substrate
    designed to serve as a device or as a part of a device for absorbing or
    collecting solar energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, cross-reference art collection subclass 901
    for an absorber coating other than electrolytic coating.


CLS 205/924
TXT ELECTROLYTIC COATING SUBSTRATE PREDOMINANTLY COMPRISED OF SPECIFIED
    SYNTHETIC RESIN:

    Subject matter wherein a coating is electrolyt-ically deposited on a
    substrate the major or predominant constituent of which is a synthetic
    resin of specified composition.


CLS 205/925
TXT SYNTHETIC RESIN IS ELECTRICALLY CONDUCTIVE:

    Subject matter under subclass 924 wherein the major or predominant
    constituent of the substrate is a synthetic resin which is itself
    sufficiently electrically conductive to allow direct electroplating.


CLS 205/926
TXT POLYAMIDE OR  POLYIMIDE (E.G., NYLON, ETC.):

    Subject matter under subclass 924 wherein the major or predominant
    constituent of the substrate is a polyamide or polyimide.


CLS 205/927
TXT POLYOLEFIN (E.G., POLYETHYLENE, POLYPROPYLENE, ETC.):

    Subject matter under subclass 924 wherein the major or predominant
    constituent of the substrate is a polyolefin.


CLS 205/928
TXT ABS COPOLYMER:

    Subject matter under subclass 924 wherein the major or predominant
    constituent of the substrate is a copolymer made from acrylonitrile,
    butadiene, and styrene.


CLS 206/
TTL SPECIAL RECEPTACLE OR  PACKAGE

CLS 206/
TXT Class 206 is the residual locus for:  (a) a container configured to hold a
    particular article or set of articles or material; (b) a mercantile unit -
    i.e., means in or by which goods (article or material) are displayed,
    protected, packaged or arranged in a particular manner, to facilitate sale,
    transportation in commerce, use or storage or (c) a packet, compact or case
    carried on the person of a user.

    (1)     Note. Containers of this class type must function, by disclosure,
    to hold contents which in turn are to be eventually removed from the
    container.

    (2)     Note.  Generally, specific container (or retainer) structure as
    defined above, in combination with composition or stock material
    characteristics of said structure is considered classifiable in Class 206.
    However, mere "nominal" inclusion of a container (or retainer) in such
    combination is not considered "specific".  For example:  "A gas bag of
    dacron mesh laminated between mylar films", is considered proper subject
    matter for Class 428; Similarly, "An acid tank with walls made of leak
    stopping composition x,y,z" and "A match safe with walls made of fireproof
    material x,y,z", are considered subject matter for the appropriate
    composition class.

    (3)     Note.  Included here is a bale, bundle, roll, pile, stack or nest
    of articles (or material) which arrangement must be destroyed for use of an
    individual component or its contents-e.g., a roll of severably connected
    fasteners, an article or receptacle configured to nest or stack with
    another article or receptacle, or the knockdown interfitted arrangement of
    a device or article.

    (4)     Note.  Generally, unless provided for in some other class as
    partially indicated under "SEARCH CLASS" below, the combination of an
    article (or material) and its containment means is to be found in this
    (206) class.  However, the claimed disclosure of content is ordinarily not
    a basis for intra class distinctions among the subclasses therein.

    (5)     Note.  Included here is a package for (or with) a plurality of
    articles or material, or an arrangement of articles or material, which
    articles or materials are to be used together (successively or
    cooperatively) in any operation or to make a definite solution, mixture,
    composition or assemblage.

    (6)     Note.  Included here is a container, package or packing element
    under the class definition having (a) means for displaying an article or
    material, (b) indicia, a sign, panel or simulation means or (c) an
    indicator relative to the container or contents.

    (7)     Note.  Included here is a container wherein the content (article or
    material) included, or to be included therein, bears some relationship to
    the container other than mere containment.

    (8)     Note.  Placement of patents within class schedule.  Patents issued
    since 1940 have been classified, both for original and cross reference
    placement, in accord with the claimed disclosure. However, patents issued
    prior to 1940 have generally been evaluated as to total disclosure, and
    thus placement of these older patents does not necessarily indicate lines
    of classification.

    (9)     Note.  The subclass schedule and definitions, as revised and
    published in late 1973, represent an initial effort toward a realignment of
    the several receptacleclasses-both with respect to each other and to other
    related classes.  Thus, as of this time (1973) no significant inter-class
    changes have been effected except with respect to the transfer from Class
    220 into this (206) class of (a) portable carriers for plural beverage
    receptacles (subclasses 139+) and (b) nesting or stacking features (499
    through 520).  As subsequent changes are completed they will be annotated
    in this note for emphasis.  Special attention is directed to the major
    receptacle classes listed below which, except as noted above, have not been
    modified as a result of this particular reclassification in 1973.



    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage

    215,    Bottles and Jars

    217,    Wooden Receptacles

    220,    Receptacles

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure

    (10)    Note.  As between Class 206 and the other receptacle classes,
    listed in (8) Note above, claimed disclosure of (a) content (article or
    material) in combination with the container or retainer structure or (b)
    specific retainer structure, per se, is classified in Class 206.  However,
    the following language is not considered as "claimed disclosure" for Class
    206.

            "A container for (a named article or material) ..."

            "A container adapted to hold (a named article or material) ..."

            "A (named article or material) container ..."

            Similarly, a mere multi-compartmented or partitioned container, is
    not "special" or specific retainer structure for Class 206.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing:  Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, particularly subclasses 524+ for compositions used in
    the processes named in the class title, which may be in the form of cakes,
    tablets, flakes, powders, etc.

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 124+ and 535 for cutlery combined with
    receptacles.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 312+ for boxes having
    indicia thereon.

    42,     Firearms, particularly subclasses 49+ and 87+ for magazines and
    magazine chargers.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 26 for covers
    and containers to hold sections of jointed rods, subclasses 54.1+ for
    holders for bait, tackle and the catch, and subclasses 56+ for minnow
    buckets.

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclasses 540 and 541 for a
    bundled, covered or wrapped fuel product.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclasses 66.1+ for flower pots, and subclasses
    50+ for sap buckets.

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclasses 59+ for carbide
    cartridges, and subclass 174 for gas holders.

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, subclass
    294 for an abradant-filled bag.

    53,     Package Making, particularly subclasses 394+ for matchbook making
    and subclasses 396+ for methods of package making.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 457.1+ for a refrigerator specialized to
    a portable receptacle.

    70,     Locks, subclasses 456+ for key holders.

    71,     Chemistry:  Fertilizers, subclass 64.01+ and the notes thereunder
    for fertilizers in commercial forms.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 426+ for measuring vessels.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, particularly subclass 282 for bags
    adapted to contain explosive powder and subclasses 283+ for sticks or bars
    of explosive substance arranged to modify the rate or manner of burning or
    exploding.

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 400+ for a stock material product of a sewing
    operation. See notes thereunder for the locus of other sewn products.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 72 for poison receptacles and
    alarms.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 261+ for heated lunch receptacles.

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 347+, particularly subclasses 349+ for packages
    of tobacco users' appliances combined with ash receptacles.  The recitation
    of significant claimed tobacco product structure or composition-i.e., more
    than a named article such as a cigar or cigarette will effect
    classification in Class 131.

    132,    Toilet, particularly subclasses 79+ for toilet kits.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges.

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, appropriate subclasses for
    receptacles used to carry money, credit cards or items of identification on
    the person, and for flaccid protective article covers not provided for
    elsewhere.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 385+ for an electric heating device
    combined with a container or enclosure.

    220,    Receptacles, and the notes appended to the class definition thereof
    for other receptacles.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for article dispensers
    not otherwise provided for.  Class 221 is the residual article dispensing
    class and takes receptacles having means to eject or release articles
    therefrom where not otherwise provided for.  As between Classes 206 and
    221, if a container, otherwise classifiable in Class 206, includes a
    dispensing feature recognized as indicative of classification in Class 221,
    as set forth in sections I and II of the class definition of that class
    (221), patents are classified therein.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 3+ for gas or vapor dispensing.  See 20 in
    the class definition of Class 222 relative to collapsibility as a
    dispensing feature.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 106+ for spool and implement holders.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, for animal worn or vehicle carried
    receptacles which are package or article carriers.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 159+ for a detail of a
    wound storage package, subclasses 588+ for a randomly oriented coil holder,
    and subclasses 137+ for a spool holding carrier in which material from a
    coil remains within in a reusable receptacle.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 200+ for a bracket type soap holder,
    subclasses 317+ for a suspended type soap holder and subclasses 683+ for a
    holder which supports the soap while in storage position and remains with
    the soap while in use.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 475.2+ for special ray photographic
    cassettes.

    252,    Compositions, particularly subclass 176 for packages of
    compositions of the type included in that class.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, appropriate subclasses
    for package and article carriers which are not receptacles and which do not
    form a mercantile unit when holding the article.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 351 for a soap dish provided
    with means to support the soap in spaced relation to the bottom wall of the
    structure.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 167+ for
    photographic detector supports combined with X-ray devices.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 511+ for means which hold sensitized
    surfaces during exposure.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 88+ for a
    holder or wrapper encasing a piece of self-sustaining coating material with
    an end of the piece exposed so as to apply to a surface by rubbing contact
    therewith; subclasses 118+, for the combination of a container for a supply
    of coating material and a removable hand-manipulable applicator for
    applying the material to a work surface; subclasses 196+, for a coating
    implement with material supply having a  porous work-engaging portion,
    through which porous portion the material flows from the supply to the work
    surface (e.g., a mere porous pad with a pocket for soap, in subclass 201);
    and subclasses 268+ for a brush, broom or mop with means to retain a piece
    of soap in direct proximity to the filamentary tool elements.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 61 for chemical test package or kit;
    subclasses 99+ for laboratory receptacles; and other appropriate subclasses
    for containers for that class.



            An alternative electronic search of U.S. patents based upon a
    modification of the European Patent Office Classification (ECLA) System for
    certain subject matter in this subclass may also be found in Class 422
    Cross-Reference Art Collections 908-948. (There are no definitions
    associated with these Cross-Reference Art Collections. The most available
    disclosure as to the types of documents contained herein is given in any
    notes associated with the titles.)

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 14+
    for a medicine enclosed in an ingestible capsule, etc., and subclasses 16+
    for a base (carrier or vehicle) coated or impregnated with a composition of
    that class (424).

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 70+ for a food package.  A food package for Class 426 must claim
    the content as a food either specifically or on the basis of sole
    disclosure. Recital of food and nonfood as alternative content will effect
    classification in this (206) class.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for structure falling within the Class 428 and further modified by the bare
    recital that such other structure is (a) in the form of a "roll", "reel",
    "drum", "coil", "stack", "pile", "bale", or (b) "packaged" or "within a
    container".

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process, subclasses 163+, especially 176 for vessels designed specifically
    for battery elements.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 243+ for
    packages of products that contain ferments, that are living fungi.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 2+ for money boxes, and
    subclass 11 for toys in the form of containers or for containers which may
    be converted into toys.

    449,    Bee Culture, subclass 17 for a container for marketing comb honey.

    508,    Solid Antifriction Devices, Materials Therefor, Lubricant or
    Separant Compositions for Moving Solid Surfaces, and Miscellaneous Mineral
    Oil Compositions, for packages of compositions of the type included in that
    class.

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, particularly
    subclasses 120, 140, 277, 293, 295+, 406, and 439 for packages of
    compositions of the type included in that class and subclass.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Class 523, subclass 134 for a composition containing a
    synthetic resin or natural rubber having utility as a battery container or
    battery container cover or to processes of preparing said composition.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or  Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for containment or storage of hazardous or toxic waste.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 1+ for radioactive substances applied to the
    body for therapy including radioactive seeds and holders.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 403+ for a medicator constituting a container
    or holder for a solid, liquid, or gas.

    935,    Genetic Engineering:  Recombinant DNA Technology, Hybrid or Fused
    Cell Technology, and Related Manipulations of Nucleic Acids, which provides
    a search collection for processes of altering the genetics structure of
    microorganisms; genes and methods of modifying genes and their expression;
    vectors and methods of modifying vectors; methods of introducing DNA into a
    cell; microorganisms, per se, which have had their genetic sequence altered
    by recombinant DNA techniques or by cell fusion or by uptake of DNA;
    testing; separation techniques; apparatus; and methods of use of vectors or
    of the genetically engineered microorganisms; methods of gene therapy or
    genetic modification of living organisms.


CLS 206/.5
TXT Receptacles and packages under the class definition containing an infusing
    substance which may be infused directly from or through the walls of the
    receptacle or package.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    524.1+, for a container with specified material for the cover or content,
    especially subclass 524.7 for a soluable container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 226, 228-231 for
    disinfecting chemical holders for use in the flush pipes and flush bowls of
    water closets.

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 524+ for compositions used in the processes
    named which may be in the form of cakes, tablets, powders, etc.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 561+ for
    material applicators of general utility having a work contacting means and
    a material supply wherein the material permeates the work contacting means.

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Process, subclasses 267+ for extracting or
    leaching apparatus.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 323 for reusable infusion
    receptacles for use in preparing beverages.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclass 93 for soap
    dissolving devices forming part of a cleaning apparatus.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 282 for removable
    cartridges or hand-manipulated containers for particulate material
    functioning as a separator, and subclass 484 for a unit comprising a filter
    medium within a foraminous container.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 34+ for
    holders for slow diffusers.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 16+
    for a base (carrier or vehicle) coated or impregnated with a composition,
    e.g., insecticide, medicine, etc., of that class.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclass 77 for tea, coffee and beverage bags.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 403+ for receptacles designed to hold
    medicaments, especially containers facilitating the charging of medicating
    device.


CLS 206/.6
TXT Receptacles and packages under the class definition for storing gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclasses 174+ for gas holders.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 45.1+ for process and apparatus for
    handling liquefied gas as a commodity including steps or means involving
    pressure or temperature control special to liquefied gas and more than
    required for other liquids.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    appropriate subclasses for processes and apparatus for filling a receiver
    with gas.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, particularly subclasses 11 and 12, for fire
    extinguishers in which the extinguishing agent is a gas.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 3+, for other gas dispensing.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 43+,
    for an effervescent composition of that class.


CLS 206/.7
TXT Devices under subclass .6 containing an absorbent, adsorbent or solvent in
    which the gas is stored.

    (1)     Note.  A device for storing hydrogen in the form of a metal
    hydride, suitable for decomposition in situ  to produce hydrogen gas, is
    classified in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 364, for solvents.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 31+, for containers for
    nongaseous materials having slow diffusers or absorbents.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclass 658.2 for a method for
    producing elemental hydrogen by direct decomposition of a metal hydride.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, especially subclasses 60+, 400+ and 526 for a sorbent composition


CLS 206/.8
TXT Receptacles and packages under the class definition for containing or
    holding coins. For example, in this subclass are mats or pads specially
    constructed to facilitate picking up of coins lying thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37+,    for pocket and personal use receptacles for articles other than
    coins.

    557+,   for trays for articles other than coins.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, subclass 37 for a
    coin-holding pocketbook.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 49.1 for racks for stacking poker chips
    and other disc form devices similar to coins.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, particularly subclasses
    87.2 and 92.9 for coin receptacles, packages and wrappers of paper and for
    coin cards.

    232,    Deposit and Collection Receptacles, particularly subclasses 55+ for
    coin traps and 64+ for devices for dumping change into a customer's hand.

    235,    Registers, subclasses 2 through 49 for cash and fare registers.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, for money drawers.


CLS 206/.81
TXT Devices under subclass .8 combined with other features, e.g., with a
    receptacle or pocket for paper money and things other than coins, with
    indicia, with a mirror, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38+,    for a combined pocket or personal use container for articles other
    than coins.


CLS 206/.815
TXT Bulk coin receptacle having a coin insertion slit or slot (e.g., savings
    bank type):

    Receptacle or package under subclass .8 which includes a relatively long
    narrow opening sized to accept a coin and which is intended to hold
    randomly arranged coins (i.e., the coins are not held in position).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclass 92.9 for a coin
    card.

    232,    Deposit and Collection Receptacles, subclasses 4+ for a savings box
    in which money is inserted through an opening one item at a time and is
    removed in bulk through a different opening.

    446,    Amusement Devices: Toys, subclasses 8+ for a toy money bank.


CLS 206/.82
TXT Devices under subclass .8 having either means for closing the same or means
    for fastening the coins in place.


CLS 206/.83
TXT Devices under subclass .82 having two or more compartments or pockets for
    coins.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    .81,    for devices that have one or more pockets or compartments for coins
    and one or more for other things.


CLS 206/.84
TXT Devices under subclass .8 having two or more pockets or compartments for
    coins.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    .81,    for devices that have one or more pockets or compartments for coins
    and one or more for other things.

    .83,    for multiple pocket or compartment devices with closing or
    fastening means.


CLS 206/1.5
TXT A container under the class definition in which the structure is modified
    to effect a locked condition, the unlocking not being effected by
    conventional means, but generally by a manipulation of the container or a
    part thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262,    for a tobacco product (or pipe) casing formed of hinged covers
    released by translation of said covers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclasses 289+ for an operating lock mechanism of a complex
    or puzzle type.


CLS 206/1.7
TXT A container under the class definition which is constructed or configured
    to hold materials and appliances especially for use by artists.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, appropriate subclass for artists'
    receptacles which include features, beyond that for holding the artists'
    supplies, such as supporting structure for the receptacle or the work.


CLS 206/1.8
TXT A container under subclass 1.7 in the form of a box provided with a
    plurality of spaced receptacles, each receptacles holding a paint tablet or
    a container of liquid paint.


CLS 206/1.9
TXT A container under subclass 1.7 for a disc or wafer of paint put up as a
    package and sealed against the entry of dust and other foreign matter by
    means of a protective cover.


CLS 206/3
TXT A container under the class definition specifically restricted to the
    function of containing ammunition for storage and shipping.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, particularly subclasses 87+ for devices holding fixed
    ammunition ready for insertion into magazines of firearms.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses 18+ for cell structures for
    receptacles.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclasses 196, 199, 223, 239, 600+, and 660+ cross-reference art
    collection 931 for carriers and holders for cartridges and caps.


CLS 206/5
TXT A container under the class definition comprising cases or covers for a
    face carried, vision correcting, optical device.


CLS 206/5.1
TXT A container under subclass 5 for a small eyeglass of the type that is worn
    against the eyeball itself.


CLS 206/6
TXT A container under subclass 5 involving hinged parts.


CLS 206/6.1
TXT FOR JEWELRY:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising either a container
    for, or a package including, one or more items of personal adornment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205,    for a container including an ancillary article contacting medium
    (e.g., anti-tarnish composition).

    301,    for a container for a watch or clock.

    553,    for a container for silverware eating utensils.

    566,    for a tray type (i.e., open, shallow) container for jewelry.


CLS 206/8
TXT A container under subclass 278 comprising hat boxes and cases.  Also forms
    and special devices for retaining hats, etc., in boxes.


CLS 206/9
TXT A container under subclass 8 for packing a plurality of hats, etc.  Also
    constructions of rings or bands placed around any individual hat to protect
    it when it is nested or packed with other hats.  Includes cases and frames
    for hats which are modified to permit the display of the hat, provided the
    packing function is retained.


CLS 206/11
TXT A container under subclass 278 constructed to contain sets of furs, muffs,
    collars, etc.


CLS 206/14
TXT A container under subclass 314 for violins and like instruments.  Also
    devices for holding violin-bows in the cases.


CLS 206/15
TXT A container under subclass 307 provided with means for holding cylindrical
    phonograph-records, either a case for a single record or for a plurality of
    records.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    309,    for holders for phonograph-disks not forming articles of furniture.

    314,    for portable cases for holding any other part of a phonograph.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 40, for phonograph record type racks.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 9+, for phonograph record
    cabinets.


CLS 206/15.2
TXT A container under subclass 361 in which the closure for the receptacle is
    provided with means to statically support the brush or brush head.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 228+ for receptacles of the type
    classifiable in Class 215 wherein a brush is supported by the closure.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 126+ for the
    combination of a container for a supply of coating material, a removable
    closure for the container, and an applicator to apply the material to a
    work surface, which applicator depends from the closure in a position to
    receive coating material from the supply.


CLS 206/15.3
TXT A container under subclass 15.2 in which the receptacle closure is provided
    with an opening through which the brush handle may extend when it is
    supported in the receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclass 127 for the
    combination of a container for a supply of coating material, a removable
    closure for the container and an opening in the closure to receive material
    from the supply and apply it to a work surface.


CLS 206/18
TXT A container under subclass 301 inclosing and protecting watch-movements.
    Commonly the case is provided with elastic supports for the watch-movement
    to prevent injury from shocks.


CLS 206/19
TXT A container under the class definition specifically arranged for sacerdotal
    use.


CLS 206/37
TXT FOR POCKET OR PERSONAL USE:

    A container under the class definition which is so constructed or
    configured that it is conveniently carried in the pocket or otherwise on
    the person of a user.

    (1)     Note. A great many of the containers classified in this (206) class
    are "small" and can be considered as for pocket or personal use.  In part,
    the rules of subclass schedule superiority have resulted in patents to such
    containers falling into subclasses higher in the schedule.  Only a
    representative sample of those patents have had a cross reference placed in
    subclasses 37+ and 38+.  Therefore, a full search for features considered
    of import with respect to size must include such higher subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5+,     for a container for eyeglasses.

    38+,    for a pocket or personal use container configured to hold two or
    more diverse articles or materials.

    85+,    for a container for tobacco with an igniter.

    96+,    for a match packet or container for matches.

    242+,   for a container for tobacco, cigarettes, a pipe or a cigarette
    holder.

    352+,   for a container for a razor blade.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, subclasses 131+ for a
    pocket or purse carried container for relatively small personal items
    (e.g., money, credit cards, items of identification, etc.).


CLS 206/37.1
TXT For a key:

    Subject matter under the subclass 37 wherein the container is intended to
    hold a keys or keys.


CLS 206/37.2
TXT Including external element for ejecting key:

    Subject matter under subclass 37.1 wherein the key container includes means
    located exteriorly thereof for forcing the key into its use position.


CLS 206/37.3
TXT Key frictionally retained in container:

    Subject matter under subclass 37.1 wherein a key is held in position by
    pressure from opposing portions of the container.


CLS 206/37.4
TXT Compartmented:

    Subject matter under subclass 37.1 wherein the container includes means for
    separating two or more keys from one another.


CLS 206/37.5
TXT Includes key retainer of two elements movable relative to each other and to
    the container:

    Subject matter under subclass 37.1 wherein the container includes two parts
    which can be moved in relation to each other and the container.


CLS 206/37.6
TXT Includes plural, serially aligned key retainers:

    Subject matter under subclass 37.1 wherein the container includes a
    plurality of elements for securing keys therein, which elements are
    linearly arranged.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37.8,   for a key container having an element for securing a plurality of
    keys therein.


CLS 206/37.7
TXT Removable:

    Subject matter under subclass 37.6 wherein the key securing elements are
    separable (detached) from the container.


CLS 206/37.8
TXT Including key retainer for common mounting of plural keys:

    Subject matter under subclass 37.1 wherein the container includes an
    element for securing a plurality of keys therein, said element extending
    through each key.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37.6,   for a key container having a plurality of elements for securing
    keys therein.


CLS 206/38
TXT For pocket or personal use:

    A container under subclass 216 for pocket or personal use provided with two
    or more compartments specifically arranged to hold diverse articles; or a
    box or case, having only a single compartment but also including some
    article of personal use, such as a comb, knife, compass, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37+,    for a container for pocket or personal use.  See the notes under
    subclass 37.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, subclass 106 for a purse
    combined with personal items, and subclasses 131+ for a pocket or purse
    carried container for relatively small personal items (e.g., money, credit
    cards, items of  identification, etc.).

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 92+ for article dispensing devices
    having plural sources, stacks or compartments.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 129+ for fluent material dispensers having
    plural sources or compartments for the material to be dispensed.


CLS 206/38.1
TXT Key case:

    A container under subclass under subclass 38 configured either as to shape,
     interior arrangement, or retaining device for holding a key.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    0.81,   for a combined coin and key container.

    37.1+,  for a key container, per se.


CLS 206/39
TXT A container under subclass 37 specially constructed to hold tickets, cards,
    stamps, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a patent for a currency or note case made
    of other than cloth, or leather; for which see reference to Class 150 below.

    (2)     Note.  A container for a "large" sheet is classified in subclasses
    449+.  See (1) Note under subclass 37.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    425,    for a file for plural sheets or cards.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, subclasses 131+ for a
    wallet-type container and subclasses 147+ for a pocket carried card
    container with no specific relationship between the container and the card
    (e.g., no retaining means).


    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, appropriate subclasses for a
    ticket dispensing container combined with a blade or other severing means.

    402,    Binder Device Releasably Engaging Aperture or Notch of Sheet,
    appropriate subclasses for an apertured or notched sheet retainer, which
    sheet can be removed without mutilation of said sheet.


CLS 206/39.1
TXT A container under subclass 39 including structure for holding or securing a
    portion-usually with a record indicia-of the ticket or card that is removed
    from the container.


CLS 206/39.2
TXT A container under subclass 39.1 wherein the structure to hold or secure a
    stub portion includes an element stuck through said portion or through an
    aperture in said portion.


CLS 206/39.3
TXT A container under subclass 39 for two or more separate groups of tickets,
    cards or stamps.

    (1)     Note.  Generally, each group is so held that an individual item may
    selectively be removed or separated from a desired group.


CLS 206/39.4
TXT A container under subclass 39 including structure engaging content so that
    manipulation of said structure projects a portion of the content from the
    container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for a device to eject a
    single item from a group.


CLS 206/39.5
TXT A container under subclass 39 including an aperture exposing at least part
    of a top, bottom or outer content item so that it may be shifted by
    frictional finger action to expose either (a) a single item or (b) a
    desired portion of strip content.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    357+,   for a razor blade container with mid-blade access for finger.

    555+,   for a "large" plate or sheet container with access means for manual
    content removal.


CLS 206/39.6
TXT A container under subclass 39.5 wherein the aperture is at a container end
    wall - e.g., a notch - so that an exposed end portion of content is
    frictionally engaged.


CLS 206/39.7
TXT A container under subclass 39 for a distinct content item which is doubled
    over - at least in part - so as to fit the container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    492,    for a folded blank container where the article, or content, is
    folded with the blank.

    494,    for a container for a folded sheet-like article.


CLS 206/39.8
TXT A container under subclass 39 for a band of tickets, cards or stamps in
    either a roll configuration or doubled over in accordion-like fashion.


CLS 206/45.2
TXT A container under subclass 44 provided with a cover which is convertible to
    or includes or carries means to form a support or easel for holding the
    container in inclined or elevated display position.


CLS 206/45.21
TXT A container under subclass 45.2 of the folder blank type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 100+ for a
    folded, blank paperboard box.


CLS 206/45.22
TXT A container under subclass 45.21 comprising multiple blanks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard  Boxes, subclass 23 for
    multiple blank paper boxes.


CLS 206/45.23
TXT A container under subclass 45.2 in which the cover is hinged to the
    container or is connected thereto by pivoted links.


CLS 206/45.24
TXT A container under subclass 44 provided with a support or easel for
    supporting the entire container in display position, the support being
    foldable or movable to an inoperative position to provide with the
    container a compact shipping or storage unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45.2+,  for covers which are convertible to easels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclass, for supports, per se.


CLS 206/45.25
TXT A container under subclass 45.24 of the folded blank type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 305 for similar structures including a
    dispensing type outlet.

    248,    Supports, subclass 152 for supports, per se, of sheet material and
    subclass 198 for easels formed of sheet material.


CLS 206/45.26
TXT A container under subclass 45.25 in which the support is cut from one or
    more of the box walls.


CLS 206/45.27
TXT A container under subclass 45.25 comprising multiple blanks.


CLS 206/45.28
TXT A container under subclass 44 provided with a cover which when opened
    functions as an upstanding display card.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses 60+ for hinged closures having
    support means to hold them in open position.


CLS 206/45.29
TXT A container under subclass 45.28 of the folder blank type.


CLS 206/45.3
TXT A container under subclass 45.29 comprising multiple blanks.


CLS 206/49
TXT A container under the class definition including embroidery, laces,
    trimming, etc. Commonly the package prevents the lace or ruching from being
    crushed and also provides for a display of a portion of such lace.


CLS 206/53
TXT A container under subclass 389 including a holder applied to rolls or
    spools of ribbon, braid, etc., for preventing the unrolling of the fabric.


CLS 206/54
TXT A container under subclass 53 including a holder secured to the center of
    the roll or spool.


CLS 206/55
TXT A container under subclass 53 with one member of the clamp engaging between
    the layers of the ribbon or braid to retain the clamp in position.


CLS 206/63.3
TXT A container under subclass 438 of filamentary material, generally aseptic,
    specially adapted for use in stitching wounds and other surgical operations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 134+ for a device for
    holding spools, subclasses 141+ for a twine holder, and subclasses 159+ for
    a wound storage package.

    606,    Surgery, subclasses 228+ for sutures and lightures.


CLS 206/63.5
TXT A container under subclass 438 of dental materials and articles adapted for
    use in dental work.  Includes also waste receptacles for dental materials
    and articles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    364+,   for a syringe container.

    368+,   for a dental tool container.

    379,    for a bit or drill container.


CLS 206/68
TXT A container under the class definition for a mantle for incandescent
    lighting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 100+ for an incandescent mantle, per se.


CLS 206/69
TXT A container under the class definition for a rubber bag or tubing commonly
    water-bags, fountain-syringes, and the like with tubing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    364,    for a hypodermic syringe container.


CLS 206/70
TXT A container under subclass 301 for a watch-spring.  Commonly a casing
    encloses the spring and maintains the same in coiled condition ready for
    insertion into a watch-barrel.


CLS 206/71
TXT A container under the class definition for "books", rolls, and other
    packages of metal leaf for gilders' use.


CLS 206/77.1
TXT A container under the class definition provided with means to facilitate
    the lifting or removal of a piece of soap from the container.


CLS 206/81
TXT A container under the class definition designed to disclose colors or
    coatings, as paints, varnishes, etc., for the purpose of comparison or
    exhibition.


CLS 206/83
TXT A container under the class definition for the display and comparison of
    artificial teeth.


CLS 206/83.5
TXT A package under the class definition comprising pressed masses of
    compressible material formed into packages or bales for transportation or
    storage and not provided for in preceding subclasses.  Such bales may be
    either self-sustaining (e.g., having no restraining ties or receptacles) or
    they may include some external means for restraining the compressed mass.

    (1)     Note.  Relative to self-sustaining masses or blocks of compressible
    material in which the specific material thus prepared for shipment or
    storage is significantly claimed, such subject matter is classifiable in
    the appropriate composition class and should be placed in this subclass
    only if no existing composition classification provides for the specific
    material or materials claimed. See the search note to Class 161 under this
    (206) class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    597,    for a container with a pallet feature including a binder wrap for
    content.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 2 for bales or
    bundles identified as being for trash or refuse, subclass 571 for metallic
    stock material provided along its length with portions of reduced fracture
    resistance, subclass 576 for an article comprising a mass of metallic
    material shaped to facilitate its melting, subclass 583 for an intermediate
    metallic article held together by a mechanical fastener, subclass 588 for a
    metallic workpiece having parallel components stacked together, and
    subclass 594 for metallic stock having layers held together by mechanical
    fastening.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 1+ for swabs; subclasses 286+ and 904 for
    tampons; subclasses 358+ for absorbent pads; and subclass 369 for foam or
    cellular structures, which are for surgical use but have similarities in
    their structure to holes.


CLS 206/85
TXT Container under the class definition for tobacco or tobacco product (e.g.,
    cigar, cigarette, pipe plug) combined with means to start combustion of
    said tobacco or product.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 86, below, for a further combinational feature
    relating to additional content or configuration for such content.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96+,    for a match packet, container or holder, per se.

    242+,   for a container, per se, for tobacco, pipe or cigarette.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 351 for a significant tobacco product or
    composition combined with an ignition facilitating means; subclass 185 for
    a smoking device combined with an igniter; subclass 234 for a smoking
    device combined with an ash receiver and an igniter and subclass 249 for a
    cigar or cigarette end cutter combined with an igniter.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 136+ for an igniter combined with a
    cigar or cigarette dispenser.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 86 for a removal
    facilitating magazine type cabinet for a slender cylindrical article
    combined with an igniter.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 247+ for
    igniting systems.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 129+ and 144+ for a mechanical (e.g.,
    fluid-flint) lighter, per se.


CLS 206/86
TXT Container under subclass 85 including either (a) an additional content
    (article or material) or (b) an additional container configuration for such
    other content.

    (1)     Note.  Such added content may be within or outside the tobacco
    container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102+,   for a match packet or container combined with other than igniter
    means or ash tray.

    216+,   for other combinations with container or package structure.


CLS 206/87
TXT Container under subclass 85 wherein the combustion means is of the
    friction-spark and capillary-fuel-supply type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 267+ for a friction type igniter and
    subclasses 298+ for a fibrous wick type flame holder.


CLS 206/88
TXT Container under subclass 87 wherein means for operating an igniter also
    exposes the tobacco content.


CLS 206/89
TXT Container under subclass 87 wherein both igniter and tobacco content are
    exposed by removal or displacement of the same cover element.


CLS 206/90
TXT Container under subclass 85 wherein the combustion means is a slender piece
    of flammable material tipped with composition capable of igniting when said
    composition is abraded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96+,    for a match packet, container or holder, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclasses 507+ for a match, per se.


CLS 206/91
TXT Container under subclass 90 wherein the content holder is further encased
    in a translatable sleeve-like member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121+,   for plural matches grouped in a box, per se.


CLS 206/92
TXT Container under subclass 90 wherein a match is exposed by pivoting a
    closure member.


CLS 206/93
TXT Container under subclass 92 wherein both product and igniter are encased
    within a cover construction by erecting the scored or marked portions of a
    single sheet of material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 100+ for a
    folded blank paperboard box.


CLS 206/94
TXT Container under subclass 90 wherein a match is secured outside the content
    casing.


CLS 206/95
TXT Container under subclass 94 wherein a match securement means engages a
    swingable portion of a match folder.


CLS 206/96
TXT Container under the class definition for a slender piece of flammable
    material tipped by a combustible composition which composition is ignited
    by friction.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a comb-type match packet, a box of loose
    stick matches and holder for loose matches.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85+,    for an igniter for tobacco content.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 185, 234, 239, 249, and 251 for match, igniter
    or scratcher features combined with a tobacco user's appliance.


CLS 206/97
TXT Container under subclass 96 including a means to shield the match flame
    against air current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 350+ for a flame holder with windshield
    means and see search notes thereunder for the loci of other windshield
    structure.


CLS 206/98
TXT Container under subclass 96 wherein a friction or scratch surface is
    contacted by a match tip as said match is removed from its holder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 351 for a tipped tobacco product ignited by a
    withdrawal of said product from its holder.


CLS 206/99
TXT Container under subclass 98 wherein the match is one of plural matches
    whose individual elongated bodies are formed by parallel slits in an edge
    of a sheet or card to constitute tooth-like projections secured to a
    unitary base, back, or strip; which back or base portion is secured to a
    cover member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for disparate articles combined with a comb-type match packet.

    104,    for a comb-type match pocket.


CLS 206/100
TXT Container under subclass 98 wherein there are two spaced friction or
    scratch surfaces between which a match tip moves.

    (1)     Note.  A corrugated striker surface is considered to provide
    "opposed striker surfaces".


CLS 206/101
TXT Container under subclass 96 including means to fasten the container packet
    to the human body or clothing.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are means to secure a match holder to a dress,
    skirt or that, or as to a finger ring mounting.


CLS 206/102
TXT Container under subclass 96 combined with (a) means to hold an article
    other than a match, tobacco product or debris; e.g., toothpick, notepaper
    or (b) means to facilitate visual exposure of content or adverting material.


CLS 206/103
TXT Container under subclass 102 wherein the match is one of plural matches
    whose individual elongated bodies are formed by parallel slits in an edge
    of a sheet or card to constitute tooth-like projections secured to a
    unitary base, back or strip.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99,     for a comb-type match packet with the striker surface in the
    withdrawal path of the match.

    104,    for a comb-type match packet.


CLS 206/104
TXT Container under subclass 96 wherein the match is one of plural matches
    whose individual elongated bodies are formed by parallel slits in an edge
    of a sheet or card to constitute tooth-like projections secured to a
    unitary base, back or strip.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99,     for a comb-type match packet with the striker surface in the
    withdrawal path of the match.

    103,    for a comb-type match packet combined with a disparate article or
    display feature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclass 509 for a match card, per
    se.


CLS 206/105
TXT Container under subclass 104 for two or more packets; i.e., each match comb
    or set of match combs, has its own cover structure in addition to means
    holding the packets together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    for plural boxes.


CLS 206/106
TXT Container under subclass 104 including structure or relative arrangement,
    other than a mere packet cover, to prevent unintended combustion of
    remaining matches in a packet while one match is being ignited.


CLS 206/107
TXT Container under subclass 106 including a separate case or retainer for the
    packet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118,    for a comb-type match packet with a discrete holder.


CLS 206/108
TXT Container under subclass 106 including a means, or structure, to protect or
    cover the friction surface or portion of the packet.


CLS 206/109
TXT Container under subclass 108 wherein the friction portion is recessed or
    consists of parallel spaced elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    for an opposed striker surface structure in the withdrawal path of
    a match.


CLS 206/110
TXT Container under subclass 108 including means to translate or rotate the
    remaining matches.


CLS 206/111
TXT Container under subclass 106 wherein the cover or case for the matches is
    other than a "book" or ply or folder type.


CLS 206/112
TXT Container under subclass 106 wherein a friction surface is exterior of the
    ply, or folder portion, enclosing the match head.

    (1)     Note.  In the typical comb-type match packet the match comb is
    secured between a "tuck" flap and an extended "cover" which is folder over
    the match and match head back to the tuck flap with the cover end inserted
    between the comb and the tuck flap.  The cover end portion engaging under
    the tuck flap is called the "cover flap".  The exterior of the tuck flap is
    usually treated to serve as a striker surface.


CLS 206/113
TXT Container under subclass 112 wherein the friction surface is at the outer
    end of the cover flap and is exposed by an opening in the tuck flap.


CLS 206/114
TXT Container under subclass 112 wherein the friction surface is at the outer
    end of the cover adjacent the comb-cover securement.


CLS 206/115
TXT Container under subclass 106 including a distinct means to cover or enclose
    the combustion composition at the tip of the match.

    (1)     Note.  The "distinct" means is in addition to the folder or cover
    ply of the usual match packet.


CLS 206/116
TXT Container under subclass 104 wherein the match comb is rotatably, or swing,
    mounted for access.


CLS 206/117
TXT Container under subclass 104 including a unitary holder for spent matches
    or other trash.


CLS 206/118
TXT Container under subclass 104 including a separate case or retainer for the
    match packet-usually for pocket or purse.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for an accidental ignition prevention means with a discrete holder.

    131,    for a match box with a discrete case.


CLS 206/119
TXT Container under subclass 104 including means to fasten or secure the packet
    to an article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19.5,   for a vehicle attached container.

    101,    for means to secure a match container to the body or cloth.


CLS 206/120
TXT Container under subclass 119 wherein the article is a receiver for burnt
    tobacco product.


CLS 206/121
TXT Container under subclass 96 wherein an assemblage of matches are
    substantially completely wrapped or encased for shipment, sale, display or
    storage.

    (1)     Note.  The term "box" includes a tray with a slide sleeve cover, a
    tray with a hinged or pivoted lid, or a tray, per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134+,   for loose matches exposed in a holder for use.


CLS 206/122
TXT Container under subclass 121 for two or more boxes; i.e., each assemblage
    of matches has its own cover structure in addition to means holding the
    boxes together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    for plural comb-type match packets.


CLS 206/123
TXT Container under subclass 121 including structure which allows matches to
    move, by their own mass, toward a low-positioned opening from which they
    may be removed from the box.


CLS 206/124
TXT Container under subclass 123 wherein match box structure may be rearranged
    to provide match feed toward a removal opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128,    for match box structure which may be rearranged to provide support
    means for the box.


CLS 206/125
TXT Container under subclass 123 including holder for spent matches or other
    trash.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130,    for a match box support means with a debris receiver.

    132,    for a discrete match box case including a debris receiver.

    133,    for a match box with a debris receiver.

    135,    for a support for loose matches with a debris receiver.

    136,    for match packet with a debris receiver.

    246,    for a tobacco, pipe or cigarette holder with an ash receiver.

    567,    for a tray-type container for refuse.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    131,    Tobacco, appropriate subclasses for other combinations with an ash
    receiver.


CLS 206/126
TXT Container under subclass 121 including structural means to move a match at
    least partially up out of its container.

    (1)     Note.  Mechanistic is used to exclude a mere access opening through
    which one may shift the position of contents. Such an opening may be found
    elsewhere on the basis of other structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129,    for means to hold a match partially exposed in a box so that it may
    be readily removed.


CLS 206/127
TXT Container under subclass 121 including structure to retain the match box in
    desired position.

    (1)     Note.  Include here is a support means for a match tray, per se, or
    a match tray and its slide cover.  The slide cover, itself, is not a
    support means for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19.5,   for a vehicle attached container.

    119+,   for attachment means for a comb-type match packet.

    121,    for a match tray and slide cover, per se.

    131+,   for a discrete case for a box of matches.


CLS 206/128
TXT Container under subclass 127 wherein match box structure may be rearranged
    to provide box retainer means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124,    for match box structure which may be rearranged to provide gravity
    match feed to an access part.


CLS 206/129
TXT Container under subclass 127 including means to make the match content
    accessible.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121,    for a match tray in a slide cover.


CLS 206/130
TXT Container under subclass 127 having a holder for spent matches or other
    trash.

    (1)     Note.  See search notes under subclass 125, for the locus of other
    debris receivers.


CLS 206/131
TXT Container under subclass 121 including a separate case or retainer for the
    match box-usually for pocket or purse.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for an accidental ignition prevention means with a discrete holder.

    118,    for a comb-type match packet with a discrete case.

    121,    for a match tray in a slide cover.


CLS 206/132
TXT Container under subclass 131 having a holder for spent matches or other
    trash.

    (1)     Note.  See search notes under subclass 125 for the locus of other
    debris receivers.


CLS 206/133
TXT Container under subclass 121 including a holder for spent matches or other
    trash.

    (1)     Note.  See search notes under subclass 125 for the locus of other
    debris receivers.


CLS 206/134
TXT Container under subclass 96 consisting of structure to hold or position a
    plurality of individual matches or matches loosely grouped.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127+,   for similar means to hold a box of matches.


CLS 206/135
TXT Container under subclass 134 including a holder for spent matches or other
    trash.

    (1)     Note.  See search notes under subclass 125 for the locus of other
    debris receivers.


CLS 206/136
TXT Container under subclass 96 including a holder for spent matches or other
    debris.

    (1)     Note.  See search notes under subclass 125 for the locus or other
    debris receivers.


CLS 206/137
TXT Container under subclass 96 including a distinct friction or scratch
    surface removable attached to the container.


CLS 206/138
TXT Container under subclass 137 wherein a friction surface is provided in
    plural strip, or roll, form so that an unused portion may be shifted into
    operation position.


CLS 206/139
TXT A transport device, receiver or carrier under the class definition for two
    or more cylinder-like containers for potable liquid including both (a)
    means to maintain a desired spacing, or relative position, between at least
    two of said containers and (b) hand or finger engaging means to pendulously
    support the device.

    (1)     Note.  Included here as "cylinder-like containers for potable
    liquid" are: beer cans, soda pop bottles, food cans, drinking mugs or glass
    tumblers.

    (2)     Note.  The use of such terms as "upper", "lower", "top", "bottom",
    etc., refer to the parts of the carrier in normal transport orientation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    427+,   for a similar receiver without spacer means or pendulous hand
    support means.

    561,    for a tray-type container including partition means.

    562,    for a tray-type container including an aperture to hold an article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclass 934 for a
    cross-reference art collection of plural blanks of paperboard or similar
    material intended for use as a partitioned receptacle to transport bottles.


CLS 206/140
TXT A carrier under subclass 139 configured to keep its erected form, once
    assembled, and having wall panels extending around at least a portion of
    each retained receptacle a structure tab or edge on one of said panels
    being engaged in a slot, notch or aperture in another of said panels to
    secure the panels together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171+,   for a collapsible carrier having a similar type interlock.


CLS 206/141
TXT A carrier under subclass 139 including a flap portion, formed by a cut in
    and spaced from the edge of a portion of an upper panel of the carrier, and
    deflected from the plane of said panel for manual engagement.

    (1)     Note.  As the cut is spaced from an edge of said panel this
    subclass includes a handle formed from a panel doubled upon itself where
    the cut extends to the crease or fold line.


CLS 206/142
TXT A carrier under subclass 139 wherein articulation between carrier and
    manual carrier support means plus contact with contents, effected by manual
    lift of said carrier support means, retains or further secures the carrier
    content.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 164 for
    hand-held article carriers wherein the article gripping or retaining means
    is actuated by lifting the handle.


CLS 206/143
TXT A carrier under subclass 142 wherein opposite face portions of the manual
    carrier support means are sandwiched by adjacent containers.


CLS 206/144
TXT A carrier under subclass 139 including means connecting or joining one
    carrier to another for common transport.


CLS 206/145
TXT A carrier under subclass 139 which holds the contents by contact with (a) a
    bead or flanged extending radially outwardly from the end portion of each
    container, (b) a similar bead or flange or edge of the container closure or
    (c) a radial projection adjacent the end portion of each container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 87.2 for
    hand-held carriers for plural beverage containers and which engage a chime
    or flange on the container.  Those carriers found in Class 294 are neither
    of the receptacle or the mercantile unit type.


CLS 206/146
TXT A carrier under subclass 145 including a further means to secure or hold a
    different thing; e.g., a can opener.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216+,   for a container or retainer to hold diverse articles.


CLS 206/147
TXT A carrier under subclass 145 formed from (a) a panel with contour, aperture
    or tab elements, (b) a sheath, sleeve or tube, (c) an erectable scored or
    crease-marked sheet of material or (d) a strand, band or filamentary-like
    member.

    (1)     Note.  The sheath, sleeve, band or tube is usually seamless,
    resilient and embraces the containers so that each and all are yieldably
    retained.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes,  subclasses 100+ for  a
    folded blank paperboard box.


CLS 206/148
TXT A carrier under subclass 147 having a flap, cut and folded inside the
    carrier, and generally parallel to the cylindrical axis of the containers,
    to contact the chime, cap skirt or container projection.

    (1)     Note.  The contact is made between flap and outward enlargement
    normal to the cylindrical surface.


CLS 206/149
TXT A carrier under subclass 147 having a flap, cut and folded inside the
    carrier, and generally parallel to the radial end of the containers, to
    contact the chime or cap skirt.

    (1)     Note.  The contact is made between flap and inner cylindrical
    surface on the end of the container or closure.


CLS 206/150
TXT A carrier under subclass 147 including a flexible web, or strip, loop
    engaging outer cylindrical surfaces of containers and with at least one
    edge abutting radial surfaces of the chime or cap flange.


CLS 206/151
TXT A carrier under subclass 147 including portions which resiliently clasp a
    bead (or closure flange) around substantially the entire circumference
    thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a carrier which grips only a diametrically
    opposed points on the perimeter.


CLS 206/152
TXT A carrier under subclass 147 including intermittent cuts or openings along
    a score or crease line, the edges of said cuts engage the chime or flange
    portions of the containers.

    (1)     Note.  The cuts, slots, or openings-provided for in this
    subclass-merely allow for limited protrusion of container elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158,    for an aperture in carrier structure which embraces a whole
    container.

    197,    for a positioning cutout in a carrier wall which partially engages
    the outer cylindrical surface of a chime or closure cap.


CLS 206/153
TXT A carrier under subclass 152 wherein merely a single extremity of plural
    containers are held or positioned.


CLS 206/154
TXT A carrier under subclass 152 wherein the beads or flanges at opposite
    extremities of plural containers are held or positioned.


CLS 206/155
TXT A carrier under subclass 152 including terminal panels partially, or
    completely, closing the carrier.

    (1)     Note.  Generally, the terminal panels are normal to the cylindrical
    axes of the containers.


CLS 206/156
TXT A carrier under subclass 147 including a hinged end portion of the sheet
    material, which portion provides the chime or flange engaging holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147,    for a similar retaining flap not forming an end portion of the
    blank.


CLS 206/157
TXT A carrier under subclass 156 wherein the hinged end portion is sandwiched
    by files of containers.


CLS 206/158
TXT A carrier under subclass 147 wherein edge portions of an opening in an
    upwardly  facing panel (i.e., in the usual carrying position of the
    carrier) encircles the cylindrical surface of a container and bear against
    the bead or flange of said container or closure thereof.


CLS 206/159
TXT A carrier under subclass 145 including a plurality of clasping or gripping
    holders acting in pairs or sets - which clench onto the beads or flanges of
    adjacent containers to maintain their side-by-side relationship.


CLS 206/160
TXT A carrier under subclass 145 including means interposed between containers,
    to maintain relative positions thereof, which means also engages the end
    beads or flanges of said containers.


CLS 206/161
TXT A carrier under subclass 145 including at least one specific aperture for
    manual support or handling of said carrier and its contents.


CLS 206/162
TXT A carrier under subclass 139 including a means disposed at the carrier top
    (i.e., in the usual carrying position of said carrier) for manual
    engagement so that in normal use the carrier is suspended below said means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 27.1+ for a
    lifter or carrier for a single container; and subclasses 87.1+ for a lifter
    or carrier for plural containers (e.g., bottles).


CLS 206/163
TXT A carrier under subclass 162 wherein the handle means can be moved up or
    down with respect to the carrier-usually between the containers.

    (1)     Note.  This shift adjustment is usually for the purpose of carrier
    stacking.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    503+,   for structural features for vertical stacking of similar
    receptacles.


CLS 206/164
TXT A container under subclass 162 wherein the handle means includes an
    elongated bent end engaging the carrier.


CLS 206/165
TXT A carrier under subclass 163 wherein the handle means is (a) a plate-like
    member with an aperture for manual engagement or (b) secured to a
    plate-like member for movement therewith.


CLS 206/166
TXT A carrier under subclass 165 wherein the upper edge of the panel type
    handle can shift below, or even with, the upper edge of the carrier
    structure.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a carton, or a generally four-walled
    carrier with a bottom, wherein the plate-like handle can be shifted within
    the walls.


CLS 206/167
TXT A carrier under subclass 162 so articulated, or readily foldable, that
    portion may be relatively shifted to then permit insertion or removal of
    the containers.

    (1)     Note.  A movable closure or barrier across all, or part, of the
    egress path is one form of such articulated portion.


CLS 206/168
TXT A carrier under subclass 167 including a panel or flap with at least one
    opening to receive the reduced-diameter outlet portion of a bottle.


CLS 206/169
TXT A container under subclass 167 wherein the means for manual engagement
    assumes a position for normal transport whereby containers cannot be
    removed.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a container where the handle causes side
    walls to move inwardly as the handle is lifted.


CLS 206/170
TXT A carrier under subclass 162 so articulated, or readily foldable, that in a
    nonuse state (i.e., without containers) it may be repeatedly rearranged
    without destroying a joint into a relatively flat or compact form for
    shipment storage.

    (1)     Note.  Merely disassembling an interfitted or interlocked joint-
    which joint can subsequently be interlocked again by relative position of
    its element  is not "destroying" in the sense of tearing, delaminating,
    deforming (beyond elastic limits), or removal of separate fastener elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193+,   for a carrier erected from a folded blank which may be restored to
    its blank form without destroying any joint structure.


CLS 206/171
TXT A carrier under subclass 170 including a disengageable member which in its
    engaged position maintains the carrier in an erect or container receiving
    condition.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note under subclass 170.


CLS 206/172
TXT A carrier under subclass 171 including as an element of the latch means, a
    panel normal to the base or carrier bottom and straddled by the containers
    therein.

     (1)    Note.  Generally, the term "middle wall" is used with reference to
    a segregating panel medially situated between and parallel to, the
    container sides.  (See sketch under subclass 175).  In the oblong type
    carrier a segregating panel parallel to the longer length is called a
    middle or center wall while the shorter segregating cross panel is called a
    transverse, separator or strap wall.


CLS 206/173
TXT A carrier under subclass 172 wherein the interengagement of middle wall and
    base, or bottom, constitutes the latch means.


CLS 206/174
TXT A carrier under subclass 170 including a spacer or holding means for each
    of the containers therein.


CLS 206/175
TXT A carrier under subclass 174 formed from an erectable scored or
    crease-marked sheet of material.

    (1)     Note.  The walls, panels, flaps and other carrier portions of the
    erected carrier are integral along fold lines and not made of separate
    pieces secured together.

            Nomenclature Note.  Shown below is atypical erected carrier and the
    terms applied to the several parts thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193+,   for a noncollapsible folded blank type carrier.

    491,    for a folded blank type container, and see search notes thereunder.



CLS 206/176
TXT A carrier under subclass 175 formed of a plurality of sheets.


CLS 206/177
TXT A carrier under subclass 176 including at least two portions of the erected
    structure formed by separation from a folded sheet; e.g., a handle member
    pushed out of a center or middle carrier partition.


CLS 206/178
TXT A carrier under subclass 176 wherein a transverse wall is formed from a
    sheet other than the sheet forming the side walls of the carrier.


CLS 206/179
TXT A carrier under subclass 178 wherein the separate sheet has a midportion
    parallel to and adjacent, the base (or middle wall) with two-leg portions
    erected parallel to each other - said erected portions being normal to the
    base and parallel to the carrier ends - constituting the transverse
    separators for containers.

    (1)     Note.  Such U-shaped member may (a) be slit to straddle the middle
    or center wall or (b) be at the upper side of the carrier base or have the
    legs projected through slots in the base.


CLS 206/180
TXT A carrier under subclass 175 including a panel or panel portions, forming a
    partition medially situated between and parallel to walls of the carrier.


CLS 206/181
TXT A carrier under subclass 180 including a strap or separator panel erected
    from an integral extension of a side wall, (a) a first portion doubled up
    face to face with said side wall (b) and a second portion extending normal
    to both said doubled portion and the carrier base.



CLS 206/182
TXT A carrier under subclass 180 wherein there is only one middle panel erected
    from a base panel.


CLS 206/183
TXT A carrier under subclass 180 including a pair of face to face middle panels
    erected from separate portions of the base.


CLS 206/184
TXT A carrier under subclass 180 including a middle panel generally extending
    directly from an end or transverse panel, doubled upwardly upon itself
    along a line parallel to the carrier base.

    (1)     Note.  A flap folded from a middle panel through a handgrip opening
    and thence upward from said opening is not considered to constitute a
    middle panel double upon itself.


CLS 206/185
TXT A carrier under subclass 180 including a middle panel extending from an end
    panel and doubled upon itself along a line normal, or oblique, to the
    carrier base.


CLS 206/186
TXT A carrier under subclass 185 wherein the middle panel portion, directly
    erected from the end panel, includes a further panel portion, either panel
    portion may be doubled downwardly along a line parallel to the base.



CLS 206/187
TXT A carrier under subclass 186 wherein the middle panel portion remote from
    the end panel, and doubled along a line normal to the carrier base, also
    includes a further panel portion doubled downwardly along a line parallel
    to the base.


CLS 206/188
TXT A carrier under subclass 180 including middle panels extending from
    opposite and panels, each middle panel doubled downwardly upon itself along
    a line parallel to the carrier base.


CLS 206/189
TXT A carrier under subclass 180 wherein the carrier base is integral with and
    erected from side panels.


CLS 206/190
TXT A carrier under subclass 189 wherein a strap or separator panel, on one
    side of a middle panel, is erected from said middle panel along a crease
    line substantially normal to the carrier base.

    (1)     Note.  The strap end, remote from the crease line, may be free or
    secured (stapled or adhered) to an adjacent side panel.


CLS 206/191
TXT A carrier under subclass 189 wherein a strap or separator panel, on one
    side of a middle panel, is erected from both said middle panel and side
    panel along crease lines substantially normal to the carrier base.


CLS 206/192
TXT A carrier under subclass 162 which can be separated into two or more
    smaller carrier units; e.g., with weakened wall portion which can be torn
    or broken to create two six packs from a twelve pack carton.


CLS 206/193
TXT A carrier under subclass 162 formed from an erectable scored or
    crease-marked sheet of material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175+,   for a collapsible folded blank type carrier.

    491,    for a folded blank type container, and see search notes thereunder.


CLS 206/194
TXT A carrier under subclass 193 including a panel with an opening which
    encircles the cylindrical surface of a container.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a carrier wherein two panels, each with a
    notch-like opening along edge, overlap or abut to encircle the container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199,    for a nonfolded blank carrier with an apertured panel to retain
    containers.


CLS 206/195
TXT A carrier under subclass 194 wherein a panel opening retains two or more
    containers.


CLS 206/196
TXT A carrier under subclass 194 including a distinct means, other than the
    panel opening, to space or retain a container relative to another container.


CLS 206/197
TXT A carrier under subclass 193 including a panel slot or opening which
    engages the outer cylindrical surface of a side portion of a container,
    container bead or flange, or a container closure cap.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152+,   for a carrier with spaced slots to secure the chimes or caps of
    retained containers by engagement which radial surface portions of said
    elements.


CLS 206/198
TXT A carrier under subclass 193 wherein the erected carrier is an open-topped
    shallow box with a middle panel-between container rows normal to the
    carrier base and including manual grip means at the upper portion of said
    panel.


CLS 206/199
TXT A carrier under subclass 162 including a plate with one or more openings
    each of which embraces a container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194+,   for a folded blank carrier with an apertured panel to retain
    containers.


CLS 206/200
TXT A carrier under subclass 162 wherein a carrier erected from a scored or
    crease-marked sheet includes a distinct manual grip portion secured to said
    sheet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    491,    for a folded blank type container, and see search notes thereunder.


CLS 206/201
TXT A carrier under subclass 162 wherein the container base or positioning
    means is an openwork, nonflaccid panel.


CLS 206/202
TXT A carrier under subclass 201 wherein the openwork panel is made of
    attenuated metal strands or rods.


CLS 206/203
TXT A carrier under subclass 162 wherein the carrier is a relatively shallow,
    open-topped, box of nonmetallic material cast into shape.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a box distinguished from a "tray" only by
    the relative height of the side or end walls.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    561,    for a partitioned container of the tray type.


CLS 206/204
TXT Container under the class definition including means for removing water; or
    water vapor, from the atmosphere within a container or the surface of
    container content.


CLS 206/205
TXT A container under the class definition with a distinct agent or material
    within which, or against which, content (as article or material) is
    maintained or copackaged.

    (1)     Note.  Such material includes an absorbent (other than moisture
    absorbent), a solvent, a lubricant, an abradant, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    .6,     for a container for gas.

    10+,    for a container with an insect repellant.

    204,    for a container with a moisture    absorbent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 31+ for a container with
    means to treat the contents with a gas or vapor.


CLS 206/206
TXT A container under subclass 205, arranged (either as to shape, interior
    arrangement, or retaining device) for holding a securement means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    338+,   for a container for a fastener.


CLS 206/207
TXT A container under subclass 205 arranged (either as to shape, interior
    arrangement, or retaining devices) for holding a tool or an appliance.

    (1)     Note.  See notes under subclass 349 for details as to "tool",
    "implement" or "appliance".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    349+,   for a tool container.


CLS 206/208
TXT A container under subclass 207 for a cutting instrumentality for shaving.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    351,    for a container for a powered razor.

    352+,   for a container for a razor blade.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 32+ for a razor, per se.


CLS 206/209
TXT Container under subclass 207 for a
    bristle-like implement for cleaning or coating.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a swab or sponge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    361+,   for a brush container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, for a brush, per se.


CLS 206/209.1
TXT A container under subclass 209 wherein work contacting elements of the
    brush are normal to the extent of the handle, e.g., a tooth brush.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    362.1   and 362.2, for other transverse bristle containers.


CLS 206/210
TXT A container under subclass 207 wherein the tool or instrumentality is
    employed for medical or dental purposes.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note under subclass 363 for scope of "body
    treatment", and search notes for related art.

    (2)     Note.  A thermometer is considered to be primarily a measuring
    instrument and a container for the same is to be found in subclass 212 and
    subclass 306.


CLS 206/211
TXT A container under subclass 205 for a space-jumping spark device commonly
    sued for internal combustion engine ignition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327,    for a spark plug container, without a contacting medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 118+ for a spark
    plug, per se.


CLS 206/212
TXT A container under subclass 205 wherein the article is an instrumentality
    for measuring temperature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306,    for a container for a thermometer, per se.


CLS 206/213
TXT A container under subclass 205 wherein the content is an article of
    clothing, e.g., garment, headwear, footwear.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a container for apparel (a) with an insect
    repellant, or with (b) specific provision for holding such insect repellant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278+,   for an apparel container.


CLS 206/213.1
TXT A container under subclass 205 wherein the ancillary agent is in gaseous or
    vapor form.

    (1)     Note.  Subclasses .6+ for patents for a gas container is
    distinguished from this subclass on disclosure and/or claim as primarily
    intended for a gas content, while the subclass (213.1) is primarily
    intended for nongas content plus some "ancillary" gas.

    (2)     Note.  Some liquid agents may inherently also include a vapor
    phase, however, unless so specifically recited such agents will not be
    considered as proper for original classification in this subclass (213.1).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 31+ for a cabinet with gas
    or vapor treatment means.


CLS 206/214
TXT A container under the class definition adapted to house a plurality of
    implements for (or articles related to) a writing operation, which
    container includes means for maintaining at least two dissimilar implements
    or articles apart from one another.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a combination of pen and pencil or crayon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    371,    for a container for a desk-clerical or draftsman tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 69.1+, for a rack to support writing
    implements.


CLS 206/215
TXT A container under the class definition for (a) sets or correspondence
    material (i.e., writing paper and/or envelopes) or (b) coated, or treated,
    paper used to transfer writing or typing onto another underlying surface by
    pressure of the writing or typing action.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a container for a greeting card and an
    envelope.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    449+,   for a container of sheet paper, per se.


CLS 206/216
TXT A container under the class definition either (a) for two or more diverse
    articles (or materials), or (b) wherein the container is structured so that
    at least a portion thereof is capable of rearrangement for a secondary
    purpose.

    (1)     Note.  A mere compartmented container is not considered "combined"
    and is classified on other features.

    (2)     Note.  A provision for refuse (trash, ash, spent items, etc.) is
    also not considered a "combination" feature. See notes under subclass 125
    for the locus of debris receivers.

    (3)     Note.  A container for a named or unnamed article or material
    combined with a second article or material is classified here; e.g., a
    container for cigarettes with a clock mounted on the container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    .81,    for a coin container combination.

    86,     for an igniter for tobacco content combined with other articles.

    102+,   for a match packet combination.

    736+,   for a container convertible to or from a display.


CLS 206/217
TXT A container under subclass 216 wherein at least one article is a
    beverage-holding member from which the beverage is consumed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139+,   for a portable segregating carrier for plural cylindrical beverage
    type receptacles.

    426,    for a stemware container, type receptacles.

    427+,   for a container for plural beverage-type receptacles.


CLS 206/218
TXT A container under subclass 217 wherein the drinking vessel can be folded,
    telescoped or otherwise reduced in size when not being used.


CLS 206/219
TXT A container under the class definition for two or more separated materials,
    which container is modified to permit commingling of said materials by
    manipulation of said container or a portion thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    568,    for a container with two or more separate materials to be
    commingled external of said container.  For example, a partitioned can for
    pigment and oil to be mixed together in another can.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 4 similar subject matter, comprising a
    chemical cooler (endothermic process).

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 263.01+ for similar subject matter,
    comprising a chemical heater (exothermic process).


CLS 206/220
TXT A container under subclass 219 which also encompasses an unrestrained body
    for agitation of contents.


CLS 206/221
TXT A container under subclass 219 configured to allow commingling of contents
    without tearing or breaking of a container partition.


CLS 206/222
TXT A container under subclass 219 with a rip, shear, or punch means to rupture
    a container partition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    498,    for a container with rupture means.


CLS 206/223
TXT A container under subclass 216 wherein the two or more diverse contents are
    (a) useable in concert to effect a unitary result (e.g., toweling and soap,
    wrapping paper with string and ribbon) or (b) the disassembled parts of an
    article.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a assemblage of articles used in concert
    toward some common end and not elsewhere classified.

    (2)     Note.  A container for plural of diverse "tools" is classifiable in
    subclasses 349+.  [See (1) Note of subclass 349 for a definition of
    "tool"].  Such collection per se is not considered a "kit" for subclasses
    223+.


CLS 206/224
TXT A container under subclass 223 for diverse instrumentalities used in making
    an engineering drawing or the reference symbols for said drawing.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is the residual locus for a container for a
    lettering kit whether used for engineering drawing or any title.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.7+,   for a container for artist equipment.

    214,    for a container for plural stationery  implements.


CLS 206/225
TXT A container under subclass 223 wherein at least one of the contents is a
    sheet or strip coiled up upon itself or onto a core element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    389+,   for a roll or reel container or package.

    570,    for wound or rolled bandage or suture as part of a first aid or
    doctor kit.

    574,    for wound or rolled material in a sewing or dressmaking kit.


CLS 206/226
TXT A container under subclass 225 wherein the rolled web material encompasses
    at least one other article, or material, which is useable with the web
    material.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a roll of material with a sample, or
    fasteners, within the core.


CLS 206/227
TXT A container under subclass 223 wherein at least one of the contents is
    filamentary in nature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    388,    for a container for string or thread, per se, in nonspooled form.

    570,    for thread or strip material in a first aid or doctor kit.

    574,    for thread or strip in a sewing or dressmaking kit.


CLS 206/228
TXT A container under subclass 223 for a razor as well as a blade or some other
    article or material, other than a toilet article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    352+,   for a container for a razor blade, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 32+ for a razor, per se.

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 79+ for a toilet kit which may include a razor.


CLS 206/229
TXT A container under subclass 223 including a distinct instrumentality for
    spreading securing or ejecting a content material or article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    361+,   for a brush container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 118+ for a
    coating supply container with an independent applicator.


CLS 206/230
TXT A container under subclass 229 which includes a separate device for
    applying a fastener and the fastener means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    338+,   for a container for a fastener.

    349+,   for a container for a tool.


CLS 206/231
TXT A container under subclass 223 including means to secure a content member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226,    for a rolled web with nails within the core.

    574,    for a sewing or dressmaking kit.

    576,    for an arts and crafts kit.

    582,    for a kit including a patch with means to secure said patch.


CLS 206/232
TXT A container under subclass 216 wherein at least one of the contents is an
    indicia bearing sheet, card or pamphlet, or a form for receiving some data.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    459.1,  for a container with variable information exhibiting means.

    459.5   for a container with static information exhibiting means.


CLS 206/233
TXT A container under subclass 216 wherein at least one of the contents is a
    roll or supply of, thin sheets so held as to be removable one at a time.

    (1)     Note.  See the reference to Class 221 under the class definition
    for "dispensing".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses, for sheet dispensing.


CLS 206/234
TXT A container under subclass 38 configured either as to shape, interior
    arrangement, or retaining device for holding a tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    349+,   and see notes thereunder, for a container for a tool, per se.


CLS 206/235
TXT Container under subclass 38 including a mirror or other toiletry feature,
    not elsewhere provided for.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 73+ for manicuring kits, and subclasses 286+ for
    toilet kits or assemblages having only personal grooming devices of the
    class type.  See particularly subclasses 301+ for compacts having powder,
    applicator and mirror.


CLS 206/236
TXT Container under subclass 38 including means to retain tobacco, a cigar or a
    cigarette.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242+,   for a container for tobacco, pipe or cigarette, per se.


CLS 206/237
TXT Container under subclass 236 including means to retain paper.

    (1)     Note.  Usually, the paper is for rolling a cigarette.


CLS 206/238
TXT Container under subclass 236 including a means to sever content or cover
    material.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a separate cutting blade or a container
    with a sharpened edge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 250 for a tobacco receptacle combined with an
    element for cutting the end of a cigar or cigarette.


CLS 206/239
TXT Container under subclass 238 wherein said severing means cuts the cover of
    a tobacco package placed in the container.


CLS 206/240
TXT Container under subclass 238 wherein said severing means cuts a thin slice
    from a compressed mass of smoking tobacco.


CLS 206/241
TXT Container under subclass 238 wherein said severing means cuts a slice from
    a compressed mass of chewing tobacco.


CLS 206/242
TXT Container under the class definition for (a) tobacco, or tobacco
    substitute, intended for smoking or chewing or use as snuff, (b) a pipe for
    smoking tobacco or (c) a holder for a cigar or cigarette.

    (1)     Note.  Tobacco encased in a wrapper, which wrapper is consumed
    during smoking, is not a container for this class.  See Class 131, below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85+,    for an igniter combined with a tobacco package.

    236+,   for a combined pocket container including a tobacco product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    131,    Tobacco, appropriate subclasses, for tobacco products, per se, and
    appliances specifically adapted for use by smokers.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 70.3 for a support or rack for holding a
    cigar, cigarette, or smoking pipe in storage.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 87.12 - 87.14
    for a cigar, cigarette or  tobacco wrapper, per se.


CLS 206/243
TXT Container under subclass 242 carried by a head cover.


CLS 206/244
TXT Container under subclass 242 for a smoking pipe.


CLS 206/245
TXT Container under subclass 242 including cover material formed, at least in
    part, of multiple bonded layers or materials.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 411+ and 615+
    for nonmetallic and metallic composites, respectively, defined in terms of
    the composition of their components.


CLS 206/246
TXT Container under subclass 242 including a distinct receptacle or retainer
    for spent or burnt tobacco.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is (a) a container with plural compartments,
    each initially holding a tobacco product, one of which receives ash after
    the tobacco content is removed or (b) a container wherein an ash receiving
    space is provided between an outer casing and an inner casing when the two
    are relatively displaced.

    SEARCH THE CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    for a match box with an ash receiver and see search notes
    thereunder for the locus of other ash receivers.


CLS 206/247
TXT Container under subclass 242 including a means which noticeably alters the
    receptacle, or an indicia member affixed thereof, when said receptacle is
    opened or contents removed.

    (1)     Note.  Included here as an indicia member is a revenue stamp.

    (2)     Note.  Included here as "altered" is a receptacle that cannot be
    refilled once opened.


CLS 206/248
TXT Container under subclass 242 including an inner pliable receptacle and
    interengagement structure between said inner receptacle and the enveloping
    container to adjustably fix the relative position of said inner receptacle
    to an outlet of said enveloping container.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is (a) at least one projection carried by a
    wall of the enveloping container which engages the bottom of the inner
    receptacle (b) a hook means on the inner receptacle, or a support element
    therefor, engageable with the outlet edge of the enveloping container, (c)
    a support member for the inner receptacle swingable mounted in the
    container or (d) an invertible support member for the inner receptacle.


CLS 206/249
TXT Container under subclass 242 including means for moving content out of a
    container or to an exposed or more accessible position.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a tobacco container having an opening
    through which a digit may be inserted to shift the content.

    (2)     Note.  The ejector means is not a "dispenser" in that it does not
    segregate the content portion exposed or moved from the balance of content
    material.


CLS 206/250
TXT Container under subclass 249 wherein the means for moving the content is
    interrelated to the shift of container closure means.


CLS 206/251
TXT Container under subclass 250 wherein the container is of the clam shell
    type with two similar tray-like bodies hinged along one edge and disposed
    on opposite sides of the tobacco content.


CLS 206/252
TXT Container under subclass 249 wherein the content is resiliently urged
    toward an opening or to access position.

    (1)     Note.  Included here as a biasing means is a spring or rubber band.


CLS 206/253
TXT Container under subclass 249 wherein the moving means is a elongate member
    which shifts along its own longitudinal axis.


CLS 206/254
TXT Container under subclass 249 wherein the moving means is a member, or
    element, manually drawn.


CLS 206/255
TXT Container under subclass 249 wherein the moving means is manually
    translatable, rigid content support, which extends across the interior of
    the container and is shiftable to at least two different support positions
    relative to a container opening or access.


CLS 206/256
TXT Container under subclass 242 including structure separating contents into
    portions, individual items or groups of items.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are plural tobacco containers secured
    together, each container holding one or more items.

    (2)     Note.  Included here is a clam shell type container with two
    similar tray-like sections hinged along one edge, each or which includes
    means to hold cigarettes against its inner surface.

    (3)     Note.  A container with plural items individually wrapped or boxed
    is not "segregated" unless some means, other than the wrapper or box,
    separates one item from another or the wrappers or boxes are so secured as
    to form a compartment unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251,    for a calm shell type case with a content ejector synchronized to
    cover opening.

    261+,   for a calm shell type case for tobacco content.


CLS 206/257
TXT Container under subclass 256 including pocket-forming members disposed side
    by side and yieldably interconnected by elastic means so that adjacent
    members can be separated to release content from a pocket.


CLS 206/258
TXT Container under subclass 256 formed at least one flaccid strip, or band,
    having plural cells tandemly disposed thereon.


CLS 206/259
TXT Container under subclass 242 including (a) discrete support means for a
    wall of a disposable type cigarette package or (b) a frame or discrete
    holder for such disposable type package.

    (1)     Note.  Usually, the support, frame or holder is applied to the
    cigarette package for carrying in pocket or purse.

    (2)     Note.  Included here is a closure forming section, placed over the
    opened end of a cigarette package and having rigid elongate members
    extending into said package.


CLS 206/260
TXT Container under subclass 242 using flaccid cover material to form a bag of
    sack.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    383,    Flexible Bags, appropriate subclasses for tobacco pouches, per se.
    Class 206 includes the combination of a tobacco pouch and contents.


CLS 206/261
TXT Container under subclass 242 wherein the container is of the clam shell
    type with two similar tray-like bodies hinged along one edge and disposed
    on opposite sides of the tobacco content.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251,    for a similar case with a content ejector synchronized to cover
    opening.

    256+,   for a similar case with segregating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 4.01+ for sectional receptacles.


CLS 206/262
TXT Container under subclass 261 opened by sliding said bodies relative each
    other.


CLS 206/263
TXT Container under subclass 261 including a positioning means to hold content
    adjacent one of said bodies.


CLS 206/264
TXT Container under subclass 242 including parting cover structure to
    facilitate access to, or exposure of, content.

    (1)     Note.  Included here as opening, or separating means, is a score
    line in cover material, a tear string, a pull tab for an adhesive strip, a
    weakened bonded line or an inner member edge against which an outer cover
    member can be severed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    498,    for a container with rupture means.


CLS 206/265
TXT Container under subclass 242 including a movable member, or element, for
    covering or uncovering an opening in the container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236,    for a tobacco container having means to lock a closure member a
    predetermined time after some content has been removed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 24+ for closure structure, per se, and see
    search notes thereunder for the locus of other closure structure.


CLS 206/266
TXT Container under subclass 265 including resilient means urging the closure
    toward open or closed position.


CLS 206/267
TXT Container under subclass 265 wherein the closure is a member translatable
    across the container opening.


CLS 206/268
TXT Container under subclass 265 wherein the closure is a flap, or panel,
    extending from the cover material of a side, or other wall, of the
    container.


CLS 206/269
TXT Container under subclass 265 including a means to seal against entry of
    water.


CLS 206/270
TXT Container under subclass including a skirt portion depending from the
    closure, which skirt is slidably engageable with the container opening.


CLS 206/271
TXT Container under subclass 242 using a membranous or web-like panel as cover
    material.


CLS 206/272
TXT Container under subclass 271 wherein the container is formed by helical or
    spiral interengagement of the sheet material.


CLS 206/273
TXT Container under subclass 271 wherein said panel or cover material is scored
    or crease-marked to be erected along such score line or crease line to form
    a container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    491,    for a folded blank type container, and see search notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, appropriate subclasses
    for similar folded blank containers.


CLS 206/274
TXT Container under subclass 271 wherein the content is hermetically enclosed.


CLS 206/275
TXT Container under subclass 271 including a relatively rigid wall, or panel,
    adjacent which content is placed for protection.

    (1)     Note.  Generally the containers classified in this subclass are
    intended for pocket or purse.


CLS 206/276
TXT Container under subclass 242 formed as a cap-like member to conformably
    engage with an end of a cigar or cigarette.


CLS 206/277
TXT A container under the class definition for a generally cylindrical-body
    receptacle, which receptacle is formed of flaccid material and can be
    compressed to expel the receptacle content.


CLS 206/278
TXT A container under the class definition for an article of clothing; e.g.,
    garment, headwear, footwear.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a container for a garment accessory or
    nonjewelry adornment; e.g., belt, tie, scarf.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6.1,    for a container for, or a package containing, jewelry.

    213,    for an apparel container including a separate means for insect
    repellant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, for a garment, per se.

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, for footwear, per se.

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 425+ for a brassiere, corset or girdle, per se.

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclasses 19+, for trunks and
    subclasses 100, for traveling bags.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 87.15 - 87.17
    for an apparel wrapper, per se.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 31+ for a cabinet with gas
    or vapor treatment means.


CLS 206/278.1
TXT A container under subclass 278 wherein the cover material (a) incorporates
    and ingredient which repels or kills insects, or (b) is so treated as to
    repel or kill insects.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213,    for an apparel container with an ancillary contacting medium to
    repel insects.

    524.1+, for a container made of a particular material which may interact
    with the content.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 31+ for a cabinet with gas
    or vapor treatment means.


CLS 206/279
TXT A container under subclass 278 including a retainer releasably securing an
    apparel holding member on (a) a wall of the container or (b) separate means
    connected to the container.


CLS 206/280
TXT A container under subclass 278 including means for stiffening or
    strengthening a panel thereof.


CLS 206/281
TXT A container under subclass 278 including (a) symbols, numbers, letters, or
    other visual means providing information to a user of the container, or (b)
    structure facilitating placement of such means on the container.


CLS 206/282
TXT A container under subclass 278 with an adjunct, or structural arrangement,
    assisting the placement of an article therein.


CLS 206/283
TXT A container under subclass 282 having (a) means for temporarily increasing
    the distance between opposed walls of the container, or (b) an elongate
    member swingably mounted on the container and attached to a flaccid wall
    thereof, movement of said member carrying said wall to a position
    permitting ready access to the container.


CLS 206/284
TXT A container under subclass 278 including a first member dispose inside the
    container for directly suspending an article of clothing (or for suspending
    a hanger which in turn supports said article) and a second member
    projecting from the container for attachment to an external support, said
    first and second members being (a) integral, or (b) directly connected, or
    (c) indirectly connected by means other than mere attachment of both of the
    members to an exterior wall of the containers.


CLS 206/285
TXT A container under subclass 284 including means for separating, individually
    or in groups, apparel holding members that can be taken out of the
    container.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a container wherein (a) hooks of hangers
    are suspended from supports points spaced a part transversely of the
    container and (b) lower portions of the hangers contact one another in
    overlapping relation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291,    for an article hanger suspended from a container with removable
    hangers in spaced relation.


CLS 206/286
TXT A container under subclass 284 wherein the container is made of a flaccid
    material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, appropriate subclasses for
    other flaccid material receptacles.


CLS 206/287
TXT A container under subclass 286 forming, when closed; a substantially
    imperforate envelope around a retained article.


CLS 206/287.1
TXT Foldable to compact use configuration:

    Subject matter under subclass 287 wherein the container, in its filled and
    closed condition, includes means which allows it to be folded or rolled up
    itself to facilitate carrying.


CLS 206/288
TXT A container under subclass 278 wherein a support for a retained article is
    formed from a portion of container cover material.


CLS 206/289
TXT A container under subclass 278 wherein an apparel holding member hangs from
    (a) wall of the container or (b) a separate means connected to the
    container, e.g., a support bar having its ends respectively attached to
    opposite walls of the container.


CLS 206/290
TXT A container under subclass 289 including more than one apparel holding
    member.


CLS 206/291
TXT A container under subclass 290 including means for separating, individually
    of in groups, apparel holding members that can be taken out of the
    container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    285,    for an article hanger attachment extended from a container with
    movable hangers retained in spaced relation.


CLS 206/292
TXT A container under subclass 278 including means for holding a clothing item
    in a predetermined portion on or in the container.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a container compartmented by an interior
    wall.


CLS 206/293
TXT A container under subclass 292 wherein the holding means tends to return to
    its original shape or position when deflected, stretched, or otherwise
    moved.


CLS 206/294
TXT A container under subclass 292 wherein at least a portion of the retained
    item is positioned in (a) hole extending through a panel of the container,
    or (b) a notch formed in the edge of a panel of the container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    292,    for a container having article-receiving pockets or compartment.


CLS 206/295
TXT A container under subclass 292 wherein the holding means is a flap, loop or
    the like, cut at least in part from a wall of the container and then bent,
    folded or otherwise deflected, either manually or by the retained article,
    to secure said article to the container.


CLS 206/296
TXT A container under subclass 292 wherein the holding means is received with
    an opening in the retained item.


CLS 206/297
TXT A container under subclass 292 wherein the holding means is erected from a
    discrete self-sustaining creased or score-marked sheet.


CLS 206/298
TXT A container under subclass 292 wherein the holding means is an elongate
    member either solid or hollow in form.


CLS 206/299
TXT A container under subclass 278 formed of one self-sustaining scored or
    crease-marked sheet erected into a sheath encircling at least a portion of
    a retained article, no self-sustaining exterior wall or the container being
    separate from said sheet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, appropriate subclasses
    for other receptacles erected from scored or crease-marred panels.


CLS 206/300
TXT A container under the class definition for a movable suspension support
    means for an article of clothing.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a container for packaging a plurality of
    hangers in a compact manner.


CLS 206/301
TXT A container under the class definition for holding a device to measure, or
    indicate, time or a subcombination of such device thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, appropriate
    subclasses for a time device, per se.


CLS 206/302
TXT A container under the class definition for (a) a fluid flow regulating
    element to inflate or deflate an inner tube or tire or (b) a repair panel
    for sealing a leak in an inner tube or tire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    582,    for kit including a patch with means to secure said patch.


CLS 206/303
TXT A container under the class definition for a toroid shaped articles, e.g.,
    wreath.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    309+,   for a container for a phonograph disk.

    423,    for a container for plant or flower formations.


CLS 206/304
TXT A container under subclass 303 wherein the annular article is the outer
    resilient member of a vehicle wheel or an distended inner tube thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for a container for a deflated, and generally folded, inner tube.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, appropriate subclasses for a tire, per
    se.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclasses 42.12+ for a
    vehicle-attached cover or casing which receivers a tire or wheel.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclass 87.01 for a
    tire wrapper which is a single-use, paper-type covering intended to be
    discarded when removed.


CLS 206/304.1
TXT Flaccid encasement:

    Subject matter under subclass 304 wherein the container is made of supple
    material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclass 87.01 for a
    tire wrapper which is a single-use, paper-type covering intended to be
    discarded when removed.


CLS 206/304.2
TXT Partial encasement (i.e., portion of article remains uncovered):

    Subject matter under subclass 304 wherein the container does not completely
    enclose the tire or distended inner tube.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclasses 42.12+ for a
    vehicle-attached cover or casing which receives a tire or wheel.


CLS 206/305
TXT Container under class definition for a device used to exhibit or gage a
    quantitative or qualitative characteristic.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a container for a ruler, a gage or a meter.

    (2)     Note.  The term "instrument" is used here in a very limited sense.
    See subclasses below for other article containers which articles are often
    referred to as an "instrument".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    214,    for a container for plural stationery implements.

    224,    for a draftsman or lettering kit.

    349+,   for a container for a tool or appliance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, appropriate subclasses for a device to
    measure special relationship.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for a device to
    measure quantitative units such as pressure, etc.

    116,    Signals and Indicators for instruments, appropriate subclasses.


CLS 206/306
TXT A container under subclass 305 for an instrumentality to measure
    temperature.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes storage containers for thermometers. For
    protective shields, see search note below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212,    for a container for a thermometer plus a contacting medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 158 for a thermometer
    combined with a protective cover, and subclass 209 for such a protective
    cover, per se, the protective covers surrounding the thermometer during use
    thereof.


CLS 206/307
TXT FOR HOLDING A MACHINE READABLE RECORDING MEDIUM (E.G., COMPACT DISC,
    PHONOGRAPH RECORD, TAPE, FLOPPY DISK):

    A container under the class definition including structure for removably
    containing an information carrier which is configured to include encoded
    information.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses do not include housings for
    recording medium which remain with the medium during play.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    389+,   for a container for removably holding a roll of film.

    455,    for a container for holding a film sheet.

    456,    for a container for holding a photographic slide.

    751+,   for a recording medium holder which upon opening the cover,
    converts the holder into a display configuration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 40 and 41 for a rack for holding
    recording media.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 326+ and 335+ for a
    tape cassette, per se.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 9.1+ for a cabinet for
    holding recording media.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, appropriate
    subclasses for a permanently housed magnetic computer disk or a magnetic
    tape cassette with recording/playback means.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 272+ for a
    permanently housed optical recording medium.


CLS 206/307.1
TXT For holding plural diverse recording media in the same holder:

    A container under subclass 307 including a structure for holding multiple
    different recording media.


CLS 206/308
TXT A container under subclass 307 for an elongate spool which carries a
    perforate sheet for operating player pianos and the like.


CLS 206/308.1
TXT For holding an optical disc (e.g., compact disc):

    A container under subclass 307 including a structure intended for removably
    storing a recording medium on which information retrievable by reflected or
    refracted light is stored.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 40 for a rack for holding optical discs.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 272+ for a
    permanently housed optical recording medium.


CLS 206/308.2
TXT Including structure intended to prevent theft or unauthorized use:

    A container under subclass 308.1 including a structure intended to deter
    pilferage or unapproved access to the contents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.5,    for a container including a structural locking modification.


CLS 206/308.3
TXT For holding a housed computer disk (e.g., floppy disk):

    A container under subclass 307 including a structure to removably store an
    encased flat circular recording medium for computer data.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 133 for
    a housed computer disk, per se.


CLS 206/309
TXT For holding a grooved phonograph disk:

    A container under subclass 307 for holding a thin flat circular form
    including contour variations which serve as a pattern for the reproduction
    of audible signals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    303,    for a container for holding an annular article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports: Racks, subclass 40 for a rack for holding phonograph
    disks.


CLS 206/310
TXT A container under subclass 309 wherein the disk is maintained by engagement
    through a central aperture.

    (1)     Note.  Through a container with such spindlelike retainer means
    meets the definition of subclass 303 as an annular article
    retainer-phonograph disk containers are collected here because of the
    similarity in container details.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 158 for a
    record carrier having a spindlelike retainer.


CLS 206/311
TXT A container under subclass 309 wherein an individual disk holder, or a
    plurality of such holders, are bound or secured in a ply-cover like the
    leaves of a book.

    (1)     Note.  The individual holder may be of the jacket, or folder, type
    provided for in subclass 312, below.


CLS 206/312
TXT A container under subclass 309 wherein a disk is held in a flat pocket,
    envelope or double ply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    311,    for a container with a jacket or folder secured to a cover along
    one edge of said  jacket, like the page of a book.


CLS 206/313
TXT A container under subclass 312 including a discrete element or member,
    within the jacket or folder, to protect the disk.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    521,    for a shock protection type of container.


CLS 206/314
TXT A container under the class definition for a musical device or instrument
    or a specialized component thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Music reproduction devices, e.g., radio, tape, recorder,
    phonograph are considered "household appliances" for subclass 320, below.

    (2)     Note.  The term "instrument" as used here refers to such articles
    as: piano, flute, horn, drum, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, appropriate subclasses, for a musical instrument, per se,
    components and accessories.


CLS 206/315.1
TXT FOR A SPORT IMPLEMENT, EXERCISE DEVICE OR GAME:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a receptacle for a
    device used for amusement, exercise, or competition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    317,    for a container for a weapon (e.g. , bow, shotgun).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, subclass 23.1 for an arrow holder
    disclosed as being attachable to a bow.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, cross-reference art collections 916
    for bow or arrow carriers,  917+ for a  for a body- or vehicle-attached ski
    carrier, and 920 and 922 for fishing equipment carriers and holders.

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, appropriate subclasses for a sport
    device, per se.

    472,    Amusement Devices, for an amusement device, per se, proper
    therefor.


    473,    Amusement Devices:  Games, and its incorporated class (273,
    Amusement Devices:   Games), for a game or sport device, per se, proper
    therefor.

    482,    Exercising Devices, for an exercise device, per se, proper therefor.

    D3,     Travel Goods, Personal Belongings, and Storage or Carrying
    Articles, subclasses 36+ for design patents for golf bags, hunting and
    fishing bags, and other sporting equipment bags.


CLS 206/315.11
TXT For hunting or fishing equipment:

    Subject matter under subclass 315.1 wherein the device is used for fishing
    or for hunting game.


CLS 206/315.2
TXT For a golf club:

    Subject matter under subclass 315.1 wherein the device is a golf club.


CLS 206/315.3
TXT Golf bag:

    Subject matter under subclass 315.2 wherein the receptacle is a bag for
    golf club.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, subclass 159 for a golf
    cart or bag protective cover, per se.


CLS 206/315.4
TXT Including club head protector or cover:

    Subject matter under subclass 315.3 wherein the bag includes an element
    which is adapted to be positioned over or around at least one club head to
    prevent it from being damaged.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, subclass 160 for a golf
    club protective cover, per se.


CLS 206/315.5
TXT Including pocket for golfing accessories:

    Subject matter under subclass 315.3 wherein the bag includes a compartment,
    other than one containing golf clubs, which is designed or adapted to hold
    items which are used during a golf game (e.g., balls, tees, etc.).


CLS 206/315.6
TXT Including means for separating club shafts:

    Subject matter under subclass 315.3 wherein the bag includes an element
    which prevents one golf club shaft from being contacted by another.


CLS 206/315.7
TXT Including means for maintaining bag in upright position:

    Subject matter under subclass 315.3 wherein the bag includes a supporting
    element which prevents it from falling over when placed in an upright
    position.


CLS 206/315.8
TXT Including sidewall stiffener or reinforcement:

    Subject matter under subclass 315.3 wherein the bag includes means which
    rigidify or strengthen the peripheral side wall thereof.


CLS 206/315.9
TXT For a ball:

    Subject matter under subclass 315.1 wherein the devices is a ball.


CLS 206/315.91
TXT Bowling ball:

    Subject matter under subclass 315.9 wherein the receptacle is for a bowling
    ball.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    473,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 125+ for a bowling ball, per
    se.


CLS 206/316.1
TXT FOR AN OPTICAL DEVICE OR ELEMENT (E.G., CAMERA, TELESCOPE, BINOCULARS,
    MICROSCOPE, LENS, FILTER, ETC.):

    A container under the class definition for means which performs a basic
    optical function (i.e., deviates or modifies light).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for a container for a face carried, vision correcting lens, (e.g.,
    a pair of eyeglasses, an eyeglass lens, contact lenses, etc.).

    305,    for a container for a measuring instrument (e.g., light meter,
    etc.).

    387.1+, for a container for a magnetic tape cartridge or cassette, which
    cartridge or cassette must be disassociated from the container during use.
    See the SEARCH CLASS reference below for the location of a tape holding
    cartridge or cassette, per se.

    389+,   for a container for a roll, spool or reel of photographic film
    (either developed or undeveloped) or magnetic tape, which roll, spool or
    reel must be disassociated from the container for winding or unwinding.
    See the SEARCH CLASS references below for the location of a tape or film
    holding roll, spool or reel, per se.

    449,    for a container for pictures or developed negatives.

    454,    for a container for fragile or light sensitive items.

    455,    for a container for undeveloped film sheets.

    456,    for a container for slides or transparencies (glass or film).

    573,    for a container for a signal, lamp or reflector which is in kit
    form.

    578,    for a container for a kit for taking, developing or printing an
    image by a light sensitive technique.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 124+ for a card rack
    which may be used to hold pictures or slides, particularly subclass 124.2
    for a card rack which includes pockets, subclass 124.2 for a card rack
    which includes notches, and subclasses 152+ for a film slide.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclass 908 for a Cross-Reference
    Art Collection of carriers for a camera or other photographic equipment,
    and subclass 909 for a Cross-Reference Art Collection of carriers for
    binoculars.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 326+, 341+, 348+, and
    588+ for a coil enclosed within a housing.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, various subclasses, particularly
    subclasses 145+ for a stack of sheet material (e.g., photographic film) in
    a container for use with a sheet feeding or delivering means of that class
    type.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, particularly subclasses 167+
    for a container having structure limited to use with an X-ray device (e.g.,
    intensifier screen, material opaque to visible light and transparent to
    X-radiation, structure which coacts with the X-ray device, etc.).

    396,    Photography, subclasses 439+, particularly subclasses 511+, for
    photographic film combined with claimed camera structure, and for removable
    film-holder units not provided for elsewhere.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 107+ for a housing arrangement that
    has a replaceable or displaceable configuration for transporting,
    reconfiguration, maintenance, service, or repair.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, various subclasses, particularly
    subclass 788.7 for a container holding a stack of articles which are
    recirculated past a work, treatment or inspection station (e.g., broadly
    recited camera, viewer, etc.), and subclass 932 for a Cross-Reference Art
    Collection of Audio and Video Cassettes.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Compositions, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 496+ for a container holding a single sheet of
    radiation sensitive material which remains with the container/holder during
    exposure.


CLS 206/316.2
TXT Camera:

    Subject matter under subclass 316 wherein the receptacle is for a camera.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, appropriate subclasses for other
    receptacles having means for attachment to an animate bearer (e.g.,
    shoulder straps).

    248,    Supports, subclasses 163.1+ for a tripod.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, DIG 48 for a fastener for a camera cover.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 137+ for
    other article carriers carried and gripped by the hand, particularly
    subclasses 139 and 908 for a camera holder.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    507+ for structure to prevent moisture or foreign matter from coming in
    contact with optical elements.

    383,    Flexible Bags, appropriate subclasses for a bag of general utility.

    396,    Photography, for a camera, per se, and subclasses 419+ for a camera
    mounting or rest.


CLS 206/316.3
TXT Binoculars:

    Subject matter under subclass 316 wherein the receptacle is for binoculars.


CLS 206/317
TXT A container under the class definition for an armament or ordnance means.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a container for both a large or small
    weapon:  e.g., a pistol, a cannon, a rocket missile.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for a container for ammunition.

    349+,   for a container for a knife.


CLS 206/318
TXT A container under the class definition for a device to facilitate motion of
    one part with respect to another by minimizing frictional forces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, subclasses for bearing or journal, per se.


CLS 206/319
TXT Container under the class definition for an energy conversion mechanism,
    e.g., electrical to mechanical as an electric motor, mechanical to
    electrical as a generator, heat to mechanical as a steam or gasoline engine.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are patents on a container for, or package of,
    an outboard motor assembly.


CLS 206/320
TXT A container under the class definition for a home or a business
    establishment mechanism to enhance, sustain, or facilitate functions or
    operations therein.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a container for a plumbing fixture, a sound
    reproducing device such as a phonograph or tape recorder, a washing
    machine, a refrigerator, a sewing machine, a typewriter, or an adding
    machine.

    (2)     Note.  A hand (held or operated) device e.g., a vacuum cleaner, an
    egg beater (but not a mixer-bowl combination), a floor sweeper, an electric
    knife or a poultry shear, etc. is not considered an "appliance".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    349+,   for a container for a tool or implement.

    576,    for a kit including a household or office device, and for a
    container for a household appliance plus an ancillary attachment.


CLS 206/321
TXT A container under the class definition for subassemblies and elements of
    building structure.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a container or package, for a brick,
    window, door, shingle, lumber, tile or hardware; e.g., hinges and doorknobs.


CLS 206/322
TXT A container under subclass 321 for a cast or molded block-like construction
    module generally used to erect a wall or lay a floor.


CLS 206/323
TXT A container under subclass 321 for a sheet-like laminate, or coated
    construction panel, generally used for an outer roofing or wall surface.


CLS 206/324
TXT A container under subclass 323 for a tacky or sticky surfaced panel.


CLS 206/325
TXT A container under subclass 321 for a framed or mounted portal casement
    structure.


CLS 206/326
TXT A container under the class definition for (a) a structure to support the
    human body, e.g., chair, bed, stool, or (b) a structure to support or store
    household utensils, e.g., table, side board, or (c) a curtain.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a container for a specialized furniture or
    drape component or accessory not elsewhere provided for, e.g., a curtain
    rod container.


CLS 206/327
TXT A container under the class definition for a space-jumping spark device
    commonly used for internal combination engine ignition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211,    for a container for a spark plug plus a contacting medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 118+ for a spark
    plug, per se.


CLS 206/335
TXT A container under the class definition for a land, water, air or space
    transportation means.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a container for a specialized vehicle
    component, which component container is not specifically provided for
    elsewhere; e.g., subclasses 318, 319, 327, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    410,    Freight Accommodation on Freight Carrier, subclasses 24+ for a
    multilevel deck freight car body for the transportation of four-wheel
    vehicles.


CLS 206/336
TXT A container under the class definition for a looped, wire-like, resilient
    fastener with a shield, or cover, for a pointed end.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    338+,   for a container for other fasteners.

    348,    for a container for a haberd asherytype fastener.

    372+,   for a container for plural tools, and see search notes thereunder.

    380+,   for a container for a plurality of straight, or unprotected, pins.


CLS 206/337
TXT A container under the class definition for a generally U-shaped member used
    to secure or position human hair.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    380+,   for a container for straight pins.


CLS 206/338
TXT A container under the class definition for a securement element.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are container means for a driven fastener, in
    the sense that the individual fastener is applied by being pushed through,
    around or into, material(s) so as to secure (a) a thing to the material or
    (b) separate portions of material(s) together.  However, see subclasses
    380+ for a pin container.

    (2)     Note.  See (1) Note under subclass 77 of Class 59 for the line note
    among Classes 59, 85 and 206.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230,    for a container for a fastener with a tool for applying said
    fastener.

    348,    for a container for a haberdashery type securement.


CLS 206/339
TXT A container under subclass 338 for a securement means used on living tissue.


CLS 206/340
TXT A container under subclass 338 for a
    U-like, or C-like, securement means which usually has its open ends further
    deformed to effect a holding function.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a container for flaccidly or integrally
    (but severably) connected fasteners.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    343+,   for a container for pin-like fasteners that are flaccidly or
    integrally (but severably) connected.


CLS 206/341
TXT A container under subclass 340 wherein the fastener is positioned in an
    opening of a holding element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    562+,   for a tray-type container including an aperture to hold an article.


CLS 206/342
TXT A container under subclass 338 wherein each fastener is inverted with
    respect to its adjacent fastener.


CLS 206/343
TXT A container under subclass 338 wherein a fastener is so joined (a) to a
    limber sheet (web or band) material, or (b) to another fastener, that the
    fastener may readily be separated from the material or from another
    fastener.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    340,    for a similar container for a staple, clip, belt or lacing hook
    fastener.


CLS 206/344
TXT A container under subclass 343 wherein the fastener is sandwiched by
    supporting material.


CLS 206/345
TXT A container under subclass 343 wherein fasteners are held by the same sheet
    or web of material.


CLS 206/346
TXT A container under subclass 345 wherein each fastener is positioned
    perpendicular to the supporting material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    383,    for a container for pins or needles held normal to a supporting
    member.


CLS 206/347
TXT A container under subclass 345 wherein each fastener is positioned in an
    opening in the supporting material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    382,    for a container for pins or needles held in openings of supporting
    material.

    562+,   for a tray-type container including an aperture to hold an article.


CLS 206/348
TXT A container under the class definition for apparel securement elements.

    (1)     Note.  The fasteners are generally of metal intended for sewing or
    riveting to clothing items.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    338+,   for a container for driven fasteners.

    380+,   for a container for pins or needles.


CLS 206/349
TXT A container under the class definition arranged either as to shape,
    interior compartments, or retaining devices for holding an implement.

    (1)     Note.  As used here, a tool or implement is a means for (a)
    modifying the condition, state, position, shape or appearance or material,
    e.g., soldering iron, shovel, wrench, knife, or (b) exerting a force or
    restraint on an article or material, e.g., hammer, prybar, or (c) applying
    or removing a fastener, coating or lamina, e.g., screwdriver, brush, vacuum
    cleaner which means is manipulated (i.e., applied to said article or
    material) by an operator. The tool may be the entire device as for example
    an electric hand drill or merely the work contacting element a drill bit.
    A device which is actuated by an operator but includes other means to
    establish a tool-work relationship as for example the work support base of
    a drill press is considered an apparatus rather than a tool, though the
    work modifying means, per se, is still a tool.

    (2)     Note.  Included hereunder is a container for, or a collection of,
    plural (or diverse) appliance attachments or tools.  Such tools per se are
    not considered to constitute a "kit" for subclasses 223+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207,    for a tool container including an ancillary medium contacting such
    tool, e.g., antirust composition.

    229+,   for a kit which combines an applicator with the thing or material
    to be applied, e.g., a container for a fastener plus the fastener driver.

    234,    for a pocket or personal use container combination which includes a
    tool.

    304,    for a container for a tool combined with a tire.

    320,    for a container for a household appliance.

    576,    for a container for a household appliance plus an ancillary tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 70.8 for a support or rack for holding a
    tool.


CLS 206/350
TXT A container under subclass 349 wherein the tool is supported by magnetic
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, subclass 8, for a magnetic workholder and see search
    note thereunder.


CLS 206/351
TXT A container under subclass 349 for a motor driven shaver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 42+, for a powered razor, per se.


CLS 206/352
TXT A container under subclass 349 for the cutting element of a shaving
    instrumentality

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208,    for a container for a razor blade including an ancillary contacting
    medium, e.g., oil.

    228,    for a razor kit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 32+ for a razor, per se.


CLS 206/353
TXT A container under subclass 352 erected from a scored or crease-marked sheet
    of material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    491,    for a container formed from an erectable scored or crease-marked
    sheet of material, and see search notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 100+ for a
    folded blank paperboard box.


CLS 206/354
TXT A container under subclass 352 for two or more razor blades.


CLS 206/355
TXT Container under subclass 354 including structure to facilitate taking a
    blade out of the container.

    (1)     Note.  See the reference to Class 221, Article Dispensing, in this
    (206) class definition under Search Class, for the locus of article
    dispensing features.


CLS 206/356
TXT A container under subclass 355 wherein the structure for getting a blade
    out of the container is configured for actuation by a mating portion of a
    razor.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is limited to the container or blade package,
    per se. The combination of blade container, or package, with a razor is in
    Class 30.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 40+ for a razor combined with a blade magazine.


CLS 206/357
TXT Container under subclass 355 with an opening for digital contact with a
    blade to remove it.


CLS 206/358
TXT A container under subclass 357 including means whereby a finger may move a
    blade out of the container in one direction and the next blade in another
    direction.


CLS 206/359
TXT A container under subclass 354 with means to separately hold a "used" blade.


CLS 206/360
TXT A container under subclass 359 wherein a "used" blade inserted into the
    discard container moves a "used" blade, or blades, already in said discard
    container against yielding means to clamp the "used" blades or maintain the
    "unused" blades in proper position for subsequent removal.


CLS 206/361
TXT A container under subclass 349 for a bristle-like implement for cleaning or
    coating.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a swab or sponge container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209,    for a container for a brush plus a contacting medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, for a brush, per se.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclass 129 for a supply
    container with a brush applicator.


CLS 206/362
TXT A container under subclass 361 for two or more brushes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    372+,   for a container for plural tools and see search notes thereunder.


CLS 206/362.1
TXT A container under subclass 362 wherein work contacting elements of the
    brush are normal to the extent of the handle.

    (1)     Note.  The patents for a brush container collected here usually
    pertain to tooth brush holders.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 65+ for a brush rack.


CLS 206/362.2
TXT A container under subclass 361 wherein the work contacting elements of the
    brush are normal to the extent of the handle.


CLS 206/362.3
TXT A container under subclass 362.2 wherein the brush handle extends out of
    the container.


CLS 206/362.4
TXT A container under subclass 361 formed from an erectable scored or
    crease-marked sheet or material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    491,    and see search note thereunder, for other folded blank container
    structure.


CLS 206/363
TXT A container under subclass 349 for a tool or instrumentality employed for
    medical or dental purposes.

    (1)     Note.  While the terms "medical" or "dental" are used in a very
    broad sense, they are not taken to include tools for cosmetic or toilet
    use.  See search notes to Class 132, below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210,    for a container for a body treatment tool including a tool
    contacting medium.

    306,    for a container for a thermometer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, appropriate subclasses for surgery tools, per se.

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 286+ for toilet kits.

    570,    Organic Compounds, for a therapeutic type kit including tools plus
    other medicinal articles or materials, e.g., first aid kit.


CLS 206/364
TXT A container under subclass 363 for an instrumentality to induce fluid into
    the body.

    (a)     Included here is a container for an enema or douche bags, a
    hypodermic syringe, a catheter, etc., and components thereof.


CLS 206/365
TXT A container under subclass 364 for a device, or its component parts, used
    to inject fluid under or through the skin.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a container for a hypodermic needle, per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210,    for a container including an ancillary contacting medium for a body
    treatment tool.

    380+,   for a container to hold a plurality of other needle-like tools.


CLS 206/366
TXT Container under subclass 365 for two or more hypodermic devices.


CLS 206/367
TXT A container under subclass 363 wherein the instrumentality is a splinter,
    or analogous small carrier, charged with a medicinal material, usually
    cowpox and ordinarily meant to be used once and discarded.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 46+ for vaccinating needles and holders.


CLS 206/368
TXT A container under subclass 363 for a dental tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 25+ for a dental tool, per se, especially
    subclass 116 for a protective cover for a dental tool, employed while using
    the tool.


CLS 206/369
TXT A container under subclass 368 for two or more dental tools.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    372+,   for a container for plural tools and see search notes thereunder.


CLS 206/370
TXT A container under subclass 363 for (a) two or more medical tools, or (b) a
    medical tool plus a tool for some other purpose.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    372+,   for a container for plural tools and see search notes thereunder.

    373,    for a container for plural diverse tools.


CLS 206/371
TXT A container under subclass 349 for a hand instrumentality used in (a)
    secretarial activity or (b) technical drawing.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a container for a pen, pencil or drawing
    compass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224,    for a draftman or lettering kit.


CLS 206/372
TXT A container under subclass 349 for two or more tools.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note under subclass 373 for the distinction between
    "plural" and "diverse".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    234,    for a pocket container for tools.

    305,    for a container for plural instruments.

    336,    for a container for plural safety pins.

    337,    for a container for plural forked hairpins.

    354+,   for a container for plural razor blades.

    362,    for a container for plural brushes.

    369,    for a container for plural dental tools.

    370,    for a container for plural or diverse    body treatment tools.


CLS 206/373
TXT A container under subclass 372 wherein at least one of the plural tools is
    a distinctly different instrumentality, e.g., a hammer and a saw.

    (1)     Note.  Variations in size or material are not considered a
    "distinct" difference, and a container for such multiple tools is
    classified under "plural" above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223+,   for a container for an appliance plus ancillary tools.

    234,    for a pocket container for tools.

    370,    for a container for diverse body    treatment tools.


CLS 206/374
TXT A container under subclass 373 wherein each of the diverse tools utilizes
    the same manually held member for actuation.

    (1)     Note.  Because so many of the wrenches of subclasses 376+ and
    drills or taps of subclass 379 also utilize a common handle, no
    cross-references for this feature have been made to this (374) subclass.  A
    full search for a container for diverse tools with a common handle must
    include subclasses 376+ and 379+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    275,    for a container for plural tools with a common handle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 110+, for a handle, per se, and
    see search notes thereunder for loci of other handles.


CLS 206/375
TXT A container under subclass 372 wherein the container also encases a
    manually held actuation member, which member is the same for all the plural
    tools.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    374,    for a container for diverse tools with a common handle.


CLS 206/376
TXT A container under subclass 372 for instrumentalities for applying torque to
    an article, generally for turning (or holding against turning) of a nut or
    bolt.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 53+ for  wrenches, per se.


CLS 206/377
TXT A container under subclass 376 wherein the wrenches are of the type which
    mate internally of an article to be turned, or held against turning.


CLS 206/378
TXT A container under subclass 376 wherein the wrenches are of the type which
    mate externally over the end of an article to be turned, or held against
    turning.


CLS 206/379
TXT A container under subclass 372 for instrumentalities which (a) cut a hole
    in material by advancing along the axis about which they rotate or (b) cut
    a thread interior of a hole.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 199+ for
    a drill or tap, per se.


CLS 206/380
TXT A container under subclass 372 wherein the tools are slender elongated
    elements or similar articles not elsewhere classified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96+,    for a match packet or container. Included with matches are
    toothpicks when such toothpicks are held as a group rather than as
    individual members.

    338+,   for a container for a fastener. Included as a fastener is a nail.

    443,    for a container for plural rod-like articles.


CLS 206/381
TXT A container under subclass 380 for the stylus of an audio recording or
    reproducing device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 172 for a stylus
    holder including a container to hold and permit consecutive replacement of
    plural styli.


CLS 206/382
TXT A container under subclass 380 wherein the needle or needle-like articles
    are retained in holes of a supporting member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    347,    for a fastener held in the aperture of a support member.

    562+,   for a tray-type container including an aperture to hold an article.


CLS 206/383
TXT A container under subclass 382 wherein the "needles" are held perpendicular
    to the general plane of the supporting member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    346,    for a fastener held in a plane normal to that of a flaccid support
    member.


CLS 206/384
TXT A container under the class definition for a measured volume of a
    relatively heavy viscous lubricating material adapted to fit into a
    dispensing means.


CLS 206/385
TXT A container under the class definition for a waxy colored lip cosmetic or a
    measured volume thereof to fit into a dispensing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    132,    Toilet, subclass 79 for a cosmetic stick type toilet kit.


CLS 206/386
TXT A container under the class definition including a characteristic, or
    structure, specialized to an article handling skid (platform or package)
    arranged to be moved by a fork lift truck.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a stack of articles so bundled as to
    provide openings for the forks of a lift truck.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 51.11+ for an
    industrial platform, or skid, per se.

    410,    Freight Accommodation on Freight Carrier, subclass 35 for a group
    of articles packaged together with an on-and-off base for shipment as a
    unit on board a freight carrier; and wherein interengaging means (e.g., a
    load lashing means) is provided between the load unit and the freight
    carrier for retaining or otherwise accommodating the load unit thereon
    against the hazards of transportation; and subclass 46 for a shipping
    support unit on which a single article only is prepackaged on an on-and-off
    base for shipment as a load unit on board a freight carrier, with or
    without the accommodating means interengagingly reacting between the load
    unit or the freight carrier.


CLS 206/387.1
TXT For holding a tape cassette:

    A container under subclass 307 including a structure for removably
    containing an encased elongated strip of recording medium on which
    information may be stored.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, especially subclasses 40 and 41 for a rack for
    holding recording media.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 132 for
    a housed magnetic tape, per se.


CLS 206/387.11
TXT Including structure intended to prevent theft or unauthorized use:

    A container under subclass 387.1 including a structure intended to deter
    pilferage or unapproved access to the contents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.5,    for a container including a structural locking modification.


CLS 206/387.12
TXT Including a reciprocating support:

    A container under subclass 387.1 including a supporting surface which
    slides relative to the container for holding the recording medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 9.1+  for a cabinet for
    recording media.


CLS 206/387.13
TXT Including book-type cover:

    A container under subclass 387.1 including a spine and panels hinged
    thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    472,    for a book-type cover including an attached article retainer not
    intended to hold cassettes.


CLS 206/387.14
TXT For plural different sized cassettes or boxed and unboxed cassettes:

    A container under subclass 387.1 including a structure for containing (a)
    multiple cassettes not of unitary dimensions or (b) both a cassette with a
    removable housing and an unhoused  cassette.


CLS 206/387.15
TXT Including plural slots for plural cassettes:

    A container under subclass 387.1 including multiple narrow grooves for
    holding multiple cassettes.


CLS 206/388
TXT A container under the class definition for attenuated strand or thread in
    hank-like form.

    (1)     Note.  Included here as strand or thread are fiber, line, cord,
    ribbon, twine, braid, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    389,    for similar material arranged in roll form with or without a core
    member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 159+ for similar
    material in roll form with or without a core member.


CLS 206/389
TXT A container or wrapper, under the class definition for coiled or wound
    material with or without supporting structure (e.g., core or spool) wherein
    the coiling or winding, or unwinding, is disclosed as performed while said
    material is disassociated from the encompassing container or wrapper.

    (1)     Note.  The material may be (a) relatively wide fabric (e.g.,
    sheeting, wire fencing, batting, floor covering, etc.), (b) narrow band
    (e.g., tape bandaging, film etc.) (c) attenuated (e.g., strand, tube, wire,
    cable, etc.) and (d) single or multilayer.

    (2)     Note.  The term "encompassing container or wrapper" includes:  (a)
    a box with or without a lid (b) a bag or envelope (c) a sheet
    covering-solid, foraminous or articulated (d) a strand, or band,
    toroid-coiled about the wound material, i.e., transversely through a
    central axially opening (e) a peripheral band, tube or cylinder with end
    closures.

    (3)     Note.  The term "disassociated" is used to indicate that there is a
    destruction (or irreversible modification) of wrapper, package, cover
    material retainer structure in order to wind or unwind content material.
    Thus undoing a mere fold, flap or tuck in cover material is not
    destruction.  However, note that subclasses 53, 54 and 55 have been
    retained in this class (206) though the clamp retainer is not destroyed to
    wind or unwind content. See search note to Class 242, below.

    (4)     Note.  In (2) and (3) Notes, above, the "container" or "wrapper" or
    "securement" may be a single unitary member or put together of multiple
    elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225+,   for a kit including wound material.

    308,    for a music roll container.

    316,    for a container for a photograpic film roll.

    338+,   for a container of fasteners in roll form.

    380+,   for a container of needle type tools in roll form.

    387.1+, for a container for a tape cartridge.

    388,    for a container for nonspooled filamentary material.

    613+,   for a tapelike container for electrical components.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, particularly subclasses 326+,
    341+, 348+, and 588+ for an enclosed coil holder designed for winding or
    unwinding while a coil remains with the container, and subclasses 159+ for
    a coiled storage package, per se.


CLS 206/390
TXT A container under subclass 389 wherein content items are joined together so
    as to form a band or strip, which band or strip is then coiled or wound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    338+,   for fasteners coiled in a similar manner.

    380+,   for needle type tools supported in similar fashion.


CLS 206/391
TXT A container under subclass 389 for two or more distinct coils.


CLS 206/392
TXT A container under subclass 391 wherein the material is textile filamentary
    material.


CLS 206/393
TXT A container under subclass 391 wherein the coiled filament, strip or web is
    continuous from coil to coil.


CLS 206/394
TXT A container under subclass 391 wherein two or more of the coils extend
    along the same axis.


CLS 206/395
TXT A container under subclass 389 erected from a scored or crease-marked sheet
    or panel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    491,    for a folded blank container and see search notes thereunder.


CLS 206/396
TXT A container under subclass 395 including a tab or element struck up from
    the sheet, which tab engages the central opening of the coil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    303,    for a container for an annular article.

    397,    for a nonfolded blank container which utilizes the central opening
    of the coil to secure said coil.


CLS 206/397
TXT A container under subclass 389 which utilizes the central opening of a coil
    to secure said coil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    303,    for a container for an annular article.

    396,    for a folded blank container with a core flap.


CLS 206/398
TXT A container under subclass 389 for a flanged spool with enclosing means,
    completely or partially, bridging the space between spool flanges or spool
    ends.


CLS 206/399
TXT A container under subclass 398 wherein the enclosing means are a plurality
    of bar-like members, spaced or abutting each other.


CLS 206/400
TXT A container under subclass 398 wherein said enclosing material is a band or
    web with juxtaposed and releaseably secured ends.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    398,    for a peripheral fixed sleeve reel cover.


CLS 206/401
TXT A container under subclass 398 wherein said enclosing means are a plurality
    of panels successively disposed around the spool.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are sheet segments with edge portions
    deflected from the arcuate "panel" segments.


CLS 206/402
TXT A container under subclass 397 wherein said enclosing means is the
    cylindrical skirt portion of an open ended can member the radial spool end
    serving as a terminus for said can member.


CLS 206/403
TXT A container under subclass 389 wherein two facing casing sections
    conjointly enclosed coiled or wound material.


CLS 206/404
TXT A container under subclass 403 including means for rapid or snap opening
    action of the casing sections.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are casing sections that effect a quick
    release by translation relative to each other.


CLS 206/405
TXT A container under subclass 404 including latching means is a middle portion
    of the casing sections.


CLS 206/406
TXT A container under subclass 405 including a yieldable or elastic securement
    means for said latch.


CLS 206/407
TXT A container under subclass 389 including a cylindrical casing with a
    distinct radial terminus.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a casing formed by a helically wound strip.

    (2)     Note.  Included here is a casing with concentric, spaced
    cylindrical walls between which material is disposed.


CLS 206/408
TXT A container under subclass 389 including a support or retainer means to
    hold a coil in fixed location in or on the container.


CLS 206/409
TXT A container under subclass 389 having an opening in cover material through
    which content can be incrementally removed.

    (1)     Note.  Access to the opening requires destruction of a sealing
    element or removal of a portion of cover material. See line note to Class
    242 in subclass 389 of this (206) class.


CLS 206/410
TXT A container under subclass 389 including a sheet or panel of pliant or
    supple cover material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    548,    for a camp or lunch kit with a flaccid wrapper.


CLS 206/411
TXT A container under subclass 389 wherein the content material has one surface
    bondable to some other surface subsequent to uncoiling from the container.


CLS 206/412
TXT A container under subclass 389 including two or more like or different
    elements in superposed, unattached relation.


CLS 206/413
TXT A container under subclass 389 including a radial shield against, or
    adjacent, the side of coiled material, with means to hold the shield in
    position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for stock material in the form of a single or plural layer web or pad or
    sheet, from which the shield protector may be made, and especially
    subclasses 182+ for a corrugated web or sheet, and subclasses 304.4+ for a
    composite web or sheet embodying a component or porous or cellular material.


CLS 206/414
TXT A container under subclass 413 including a short cylindrical rim portion.


CLS 206/415
TXT A container under subclass 413 including an element positioned within the
    axial opening of the coil to hold the shield.


CLS 206/416
TXT A container under subclass 415 wherein both sides are shielded and both
    shields are held by the same element within the axial opening of the coil.


CLS 206/417
TXT A container under subclass 389 wherein the content material is an unwoven
    mat of lengths of filamentary material.


CLS 206/418
TXT A container under the class definition of an electric light, or electronic
    valve, in its envelope.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a container for (a) an incandescent,
    fluorescent or flash lamp or (b) a radio TV or radar tube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for a container for an incandescent mantle.

    426,    for a container for stemware.

    521+,   for a shock protection type container.


CLS 206/419
TXT A container under subclass 418 for two or more bulbs or tubes.


CLS 206/420
TXT A container under subclass 419 wherein at least several of the bulbs or
    tubes are of different size or have different electrical characteristics.


CLS 206/421
TXT A container under subclass 419 wherein the bulbs are positioned end to end.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    430,    for a container for coaxial abutting receptacles.


CLS 206/422
TXT A container under subclass 419 wherein the bulbs are positioned side by
    side, with adjacent bulbs inverted end for end.

    (1)     Note.  Such allochiral arrangement permits limited "nesting" of one
    bulb with respect to its adjacent bulb.


CLS 206/423
TXT A container under the class definition for holding growing, freshly cut, or
    imitation vegetation.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a container for an imitation floral
    decoration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    303,    for a container for an annular article (e.g., a floral wreath).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclasses 41+, 66.1+ and particularly subclass 84
    for holders for cut flowers used in floral arrangements, the combination of
    a growing plant and a receptacle, or a receptacle specialized to preserving
    the life of a plant.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 23 for
    artificial or treated natural vegetation combined with a means, other than
    a receptacle or container, to support the vegetation.


CLS 206/424
TXT A container under the class definition for sheets or pages bound together
    by a cover.


CLS 206/425
TXT A container under the class definition for paper record items, which
    container permits removal, inspection or annotation of individual items.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are file subcombinations (such as a follower,
    per se), not elsewhere classified.

    (2)     Note.  The file may include blank or annotated items.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39+,    for a pocket case for tickers, cards, stamps, etc.

    424,    for a container for "bound" sheets.

    556,    for a plate or sheet container with a follower.

    557,    for a tray-type container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 67.1+ for a
    file folder or file envelope.

    281,    Books, Strips, and Leaves, for "bound" records and components
    thereof.

    402,    Binder Device Releasably Engaging Aperture or Notch of Sheet,
    appropriate subclass, for an apertured or notched sheet retainer, which
    sheet can be removed without mutilation of said sheet.


CLS 206/426
TXT A container under the class definition for a goblet type drinking
    vessel-usually one with a stem and foot.


CLS 206/427
TXT A container under the class definition for two or more potable liquid
    vessels, e.g., cans, bottles or jars.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a container for articles - other than cans,
    bottles or jars - when such articles are supported in like manner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139+,   for a similar container which includes spacer means between
    adjacent cans or bottles and means for pendulously hand supporting the
    assemblage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclass 934 for a
    cross-reference art collection of plural blanks of paperboard or similar
    material intended for use as a partitioned receptacle to transport bottles.


CLS 206/428
TXT A container under subclass 427 including a strip of flexible material for
    manual support.


CLS 206/429
TXT A container under subclass 427 wherein the side of a file of adjacent cans
    or bottles is open to view.

    (1)     Note.  Such exposure or opening allows viewing of container content
    when plural containers are stacked one above the other.


CLS 206/430
TXT A container under subclass 427 wherein at least two retained vessel are
    engaged end to end.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    421,    for a container for axially aligned light bulbs.


CLS 206/431
TXT A container under subclass 427 wherein the retained vessels are generally
    of square or rectangular cross-sectional shape.


CLS 206/432
TXT A container under subclass 427 including a generally thin, flaccid material
    drawn against the contents or portions of the container itself.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the shrinking is effected by heat or vacuum
    treatment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    497,    for a shrink film package.


CLS 206/433
TXT A container under subclass 427 including specific means for preventing, or
    minimizing, damage to retained vessels during rough handling of the
    container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    521+,   for a shock protection type container.


CLS 206/434
TXT A container under subclass 427 including (a) parallel side walls
    respectively positioned adjacent opposite sides or ends of a row, or
    parallel rows, of retained vessels and (b) top and bottom walls integrally
    joined to said side walls and positioned adjacent the ends of said vessels,
    said container having no end walls.


CLS 206/435
TXT A container under subclass 427 having (a) a base with vessels aligned in a
    row thereon and (b) a panel, bar, rod or other elongate component shiftable
    relative to said base to engage one side of said vessels, thereby holding
    the vessels, in the container.


CLS 206/436
TXT A container under the class definition for two or more four-sided vessels.

    (1)     Note.  Typically, the vessels are made of flaccid triangular panels
    closed onto each other to completely encompass the content.

    (2)     Note.  Included here are arrangements of four-sided receptacles in
    a container to minimize requirements and provide mutual support.


CLS 206/438
TXT A container under the class definition for an object or substance adapted
    for use in the treatment of wounds or diseased portions of the body.

    (1)     Note.  See search note under subclass 363 for cosmetic or toilet
    body treatment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    363+,   for a container for a therapeutic type tool, per se, or a plurality
    or kit of such tools.

    524.1+, for a container with specified material for the cover or content.

    570,    for an assemblage or kit of the therapeutic type, e.g., a first aid
    kit of tools and medicine.


CLS 206/439
TXT A container under subclass 438 wherein at least a portion of the container
    material permits the ingress or egress of a gaseous state substance.

    (1)     Note.  Generally the gas serves to treat, or protect against
    treatment of, the content.


CLS 206/440
TXT A container under subclass 438 for a wrapping or cover for a wound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    602,    Surgery:  Splint, Brace, or Bandage, subclasses 41+ for bandage
    structure.


CLS 206/441
TXT A container under subclass 440 wherein the wound cover is a relatively
    narrow band of limited length and generally in flat form.


CLS 206/442
TXT A container under the class definition for wire, or strap-like, securement
    elements used to fasten or hold bundled material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83.5,   for a bale package, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 594 for metallic
    stock material having plural layers mechanically fastened together.


CLS 206/443
TXT A container under the class definition for two or more objects generally
    circular in cross-section and relatively long in an axial direction as
    compared to the cross-section dimension.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315.11, for a quiver for arrows.

    338+,   for a container for nails.

    371,    for a container for pencils or pens.

    379,    for a container for drills or taps.

    380+,   for a container for needle type tools including pins and toothpicks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 60.1+ for a support or rack for
    holding an article having an significant elongated portion.


CLS 206/445
TXT A container under the class definition for two or more relatively flat,
    circular panels.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the panels are stacked with faces aligned to form a
    cylindrical assemblage within the container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for a pocket container for disc-like pellets.


CLS 206/446
TXT A container under the class definition for a barrel-like, or drum-like,
    member.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass is a container for a woundup
    reel or roll of material, for which see search notes below.

    (2)     Note.  Included here is a container for a printing roll.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for a phonograph cylinder container.

    308,    for a music roll container.

    389+,   for a container for a roll, or reel, of material and see notes
    thereunder for the locus of other roll, or reel, packages.


CLS 206/447
TXT A container under the class definition for a sticky or adhesive faced
    article, generally so held as to inhibit or avoid cohesion.


CLS 206/448
TXT A container under the class definition configured, or including adjunct
    retainer structure, for a curvilinear plate or plate-like member.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a wrap-around windshield container.


CLS 206/449
TXT A container under the class definition for a generally flat panel, pane or
    leaf.

    (1)     Note.  Generally, plural sheets in this subclass are in
    face-to-face alignment, e.g., a stack or pack, or in spaced parallel
    position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39+,    for a pocket type ticket case.  See (1) Note under subclass 37.

    73+,    for a tray container for card or sheet.

    215,    for a stationery or carbon paper container.

    323+,   for a shingle container.

    386,    for a container including a pallet feature.

    389,    for a container for textile web-like material.

    425,    for a file for plural cards or sheets.

    554,    for a container for paper bags.


CLS 206/450
TXT A container under subclass 449 including a securement member on a folded
    ply holder for said panel, pane or leaf.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 138 for a book
    cover provided with a carrying handle.


CLS 206/451
TXT A container under subclass 449 wherein a plurality of panels or panes are
    secured together, usually by a band or rod-like element or gripper.

    (1)     Note.  A glued edge or adhesive securement is not "bound".


CLS 206/452
TXT A container under subclass 451 wherein the band or rod-like element
    includes a screw-nut arrangement.


CLS 206/453
TXT A container under subclass 449 including a separate element to shield the
    sharp extremities of the panel or pane.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a corner or edge protector, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for stock material in the form of a single or plural layer web or pad or
    sheet, from which the shield protector may be made, and especially
    subclasses 182+ for a corrugated web or sheet, and subclasses 304.4+ for a
    composite web or sheet embodying a component or porous or cellular material.


CLS 206/454
TXT A container under subclass 449 for panel or pane that is frail, weak or
    chemically-physically susceptive to change under normal ambient conditions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    307+,   for a container under the class definition for removably containing
    a machine readable recording medium.

    309+,   for a phonographic disk container.

    524.1+, for an acid proof container.


CLS 206/455
TXT A container under subclass 454 for an undeveloped light-sensitive panel.


CLS 206/456
TXT A container under subclass 454 for a microscope, or projection transparency.


CLS 206/457
TXT A container under the class definition exhibiting a desired visual effect
    by a means which (a) includes coloration, (b) forms a design configuration
    by relationship of container or content component, (c) assumes the
    appearance of a disparate object, e.g., animal or human figure.


CLS 206/458
TXT A container under subclass 457 for an item of apparel, or an accessory
    therefor, (a) so positioned as to display the item as actually worn or (b)
    an item which appears to be such apparel or accessory being worn.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278+,   for a container for apparel.


CLS 206/459.1
TXT WITH INDICATOR (I.E., VARIABLE INFORMATION EXHIBITING MEANS):

    A container under the class definition including (1) means intended to
    change in appearance or in any other sensory-evident way for the purpose of
    conveying information about the container or its contents, or (2) means
    intended to show a change in the container or its contents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    459.5,  for a container with static information exhibiting means.

    534,    for an ampule, capsule, pellet or granule with an indicator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 13+ for a closure of that
    class type with a condition signal or indicator.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 125+ for a refrigeration device with an
    indicator.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for a measuring or
    testing indicator which may be used with a receptacle.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 285 for a coffee maker
    with a signal, indicator or observation means and subclass 342 for a
    cooking device with a signal, indicator or observation means.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclass 31 for a safe
    with a signal or indicator.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclasses for a mechanical
    signal or indicator which may be used on a receptacle, particularly
    subclasses 200+ for an indicator, per se.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 504.2 for a boiler with an
    alarm or indicator.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 388 for a water heater with signal or
    indicator.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 551+ for a fluid handling system or
    device with indicator, register, recorder alarm or inspection means.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 104 for a pipe with indicating
    means.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coating Means,
    subclasses 94+ for a device of that subclass type with signal, indicator,
    recorder, exhibitor or inspection means.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 11.1+ for a device of that class type
    with alarm, indictor, signal, register, recorder test or inspection means.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 365+ for a bottle or jar with content
    indicating means.

    220,    Receptacles, Digest 16 for a digest of receptacles with a pressure
    indicator.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 2+ for a dispenser with a recorder,
    register, indicator, signal or exhibitor and subclass 155 for a dispenser
    with transparent inspection means without indicia.

    232,    Deposit and Collection Receptacles, subclasses 34+ for a mail box
    with a signal or indicator.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 234+ for a receptacle with
    supporting means of that class type with an exhibitor or indicator.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, appropriate subclasses for an
    electrical indicator which may be used in combination with a receptacle.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 87+ for a food container or product with indicating means.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 913 for a
    cross-reference art collection for a material designed to be responsive to
    temperature, light moisture, etc.


CLS 206/459.5
TXT WITH INDICIA OR AREA MODIFIED FOR INDICIA:

    A container under the class definition including a static information
    exhibiting means or a surface portion specifically modified for static
    information exhibiting means.

    (1)     Note.  The information is usually about the container or its
    contents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232,    for a package in combination with a booklet, leaflet or recording
    means.

    281,    for a container including indicia which is intended to hold an
    article of clothing.

    459.1,  for a container with variable information conveying means.

    534,    for an ampule, capsule, pellet or granule with indicia.

    803,    for a cross-reference art collection for a receptacle with a
    detachable coupon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, appropriate subclasses for a
    card or sign with indicia which may be used in combination with a
    receptacle, particularly subclasses 306+ for cylindrical box-carried
    indicia, subclass 308 for basket-carried indicia, subclasses 310+ for
    bottle-carried indicia, subclasses 312+ for box-carried indicia and
    subclass 324 for tableware-carried indicia.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 311.1+ for a static
    structure with indicia.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclass 203 for a closure for a bottle or jar
    with visual indicia intended to warn a user as to the bottle contents,
    subclass 230 for a closure for a bottle or jar with visual indicia, and
    subclasses 365+ for a bottle or jar with content indicating means.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclass 921 for a
    cross-reference art collection for a paper or paperboard receptacle with
    mailing indicia.

    283,    Printed Matter, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclass 81
    for a label for indicia where the invention relates to the printed matter
    rather than the physical characteristics of the label itself.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 234.1+ for a receptacle
    with supporting means of that class type with content indicia.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 87+ for a food container or product with indicating means.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 187 for a
    structurally defined web or sheet with nonplanar uniform thickness in the
    form of indicia.


CLS 206/460
TXT A container under the class definition consisting of a base or backer
    member on to which a content item is held by means of a glue, paste or
    other cementitious substance.


CLS 206/461
TXT A container under the class definition consisting of a relatively rigid
    plate-like backer member to which an enclosing cover for a content item is
    affixed.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are "bubble" or "blister" type packages.


CLS 206/462
TXT A container under subclass 461 including an opening in the backer member
    with the enclosing cover extending through and above the plane of said
    plate-like member.


CLS 206/463
TXT A container under subclass 462 wherein the enclosing cover extends from
    both sides of the plate-like member.


CLS 206/464
TXT A container under subclass 461 in which enclosing cover and backer member
    are joined together by a projection or tab on one frictionally fitting into
    a narrow opening in the other.


CLS 206/465
TXT A container under subclass 464 wherein flaps or tabs on opposite sides of
    said enclosing cover extend into parallel narrow openings in the plate-like
    member.


CLS 206/466
TXT A container under subclass 461 wherein said enclosing cover is a pouch or
    sack.


CLS 206/467
TXT A container under subclass 461 including a displaceable component for
    access to the content.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 24+ for closures, per se, and see search
    notes thereunder for the locus of other similar closure.


CLS 206/468
TXT A container under subclass 467 wherein said movable closure is translated.


CLS 206/469
TXT A container under subclass 467 wherein said movable closure includes a tear
    line or weakened wall portion which must be ruptured to permit movement.


CLS 206/470
TXT A container under subclass 467 wherein said movable closure is swingably
    connected to either said enclosing cover or said backer member.


CLS 206/471
TXT A container under subclass 461 wherein the enclosing cover closely conforms
    to the shape of the content to hold said content.

    (1)     Note.  Generally, the enclosing cover is a thin film of flaccid
    sheet material.


CLS 206/472
TXT A container under the class definition wherein a folded ply enclosure
    includes at least one integral holding means for a content item.


CLS 206/473
TXT A container under subclass 472 including distinct, different, holders for
    each of plural content items.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    483,    for diverse retainers for one or more articles held to a base.


CLS 206/474
TXT A container under subclass 472 wherein the folded ply enclosure includes a
    flap, or projection, frictionally engaging a narrow opening to maintain a
    folded closed position.


CLS 206/475
TXT A container under subclass 472 including an aperture in the folded ply
    enclosure permitting examination of content.


CLS 206/476
TXT A container under the class definition consisting of a planar base member
    with a flap, tab, or loop element and a content item held (a) between said
    element and the base member or (b) within an opening in said element.


CLS 206/477
TXT A container under the class definition consisting of a planar backer member
    to which is secured a holder to grasp the content.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a holder such as a clip, clamp or band.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    560,    for a tray-type container with means to latch or lock content
    against removal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 510 for a clasp-down device, i.e., resilient
    means clasping an article on opposed sides to hold it onto an underlying
    support.   See, too, subclasses 500+ for a hold-down device; i.e., means
    including an element which overlies an upwardly facing surface portion of
    an article to hold the article onto a base. The overlying element may be
    resilient.


CLS 206/478
TXT A container under subclass 477 wherein the holder is a flaccid or flexible
    element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 499 for tie-down structure; i.e., the use of
    flexible element means to secure an article to a base.

    410,    Freight Accommodation on Freight Carrier, subclasses 96+, for
    inventions in load lashing; i.e., the use of flaccid element means to
    secure lading to the base of a freight carrier during shipment.


CLS 206/479
TXT A container under subclass 478 wherein the holder is an extended length of
    band or filamentary material folded into multiple bights.


CLS 206/480
TXT A container under subclass 477 wherein a stiff, or firm, holder is
    yieldably urged to grasp the content.


CLS 206/481
TXT A container under subclass 477 wherein the holder is a stiff, or firm bight
    of material extending around at least a portion of the content.


CLS 206/482
TXT A container under subclass 477 wherein the holder is a flap, or tab, cut
    and folded from the backer member.


CLS 206/483
TXT A container under subclass 477 including at least two different holders to
    grasp a content item or plural content items.

    (1)     Note.  "Different" holders are understood to refer to distinctions
    in kind rather than shape or size, e.g., a spring clip and a loop.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    473,    for a folder ply type cover with diverse retainers for one or more
    articles.


CLS 206/484
TXT A container under the class definition comprising content (an article or
    material) held between two flaccid sheets said sheets being sealed together
    completely around the content.

    (1)     Note.  The "flaccid sheets" may themselves be either single or
    multilayered.  See subclass 524.2 for specified multilayered cover
    construction or material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    524.2,  for a container with specified plural different lamina for the
    cover structure or material.


CLS 206/484.1
TXT A container under subclass 484 wherein at least a portion of the sheet
    cover material permit the ingress or egress of a gaseous state substance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    439,    for a container for a body treatment article or material with a gas
    permeable cover.


CLS 206/484.2
TXT A container under subclass 484 wherein each flaccid sheet includes to or
    more layers of material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    524.2,  for a container including plural different lamina wall structure.

    524.9,  for a container including plural similar lamina wall structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for laminate structure or material, per se.


CLS 206/485
TXT A container under the class definition wherein a content item is supported
    in the openings of parallel (or facing) container sides or in the openings
    of parallel (or facing) portions of retainer structure.


CLS 206/485.1
TXT Cuplike article:

    A container under subclass 485 which is intended to support a small
    handheld receptacle having curved wall structure.

    (1)     Note.  A cup is normally used to hold food such as a beverage, ice
    cream, nuts, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    519,    for a cup, per se, modified for nesting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, appropriate subclasses for a cup, per se, which is
    made of a material other than paper or a paperlike material, particularly
    subclass 675.


CLS 206/486
TXT A container under the class definition wherein a content item is supported
    in the opening of a planar panel or sheet.

    (1)     Note.  Generally, the panel or sheet constitutes the basic
    "container" or "retainer" structure means for this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    562+,   for a tray-type container including an aperture to hold an article.


CLS 206/487
TXT A container under subclass 486 wherein the item includes a projection which
    is engaged in a complementary narrow opening of the panel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    464+,   for an article housing attached to a panel by tongue and slot
    engagement.


CLS 206/488
TXT A container under subclass 486 including a separate and distinct support
    means for the item.


CLS 206/489
TXT A container under subclass 488 wherein the separate support means is a
    flaccid film or lamina.


CLS 206/490
TXT A container under subclass 486 wherein the opening is a slot or groove of
    the edge of the support panel or sheet.


CLS 206/493
TXT A container under the class definition which is received, in whole or part,
    within an aperture of a content item to hold or position said item.

    (1)     Note.  The retainer may be a projection, post, finger, annular
    sleeve, spindle, core, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278+,   for an apparel support that enters an opening in the apparel.

    303+,   for a container for an annular article.

    310,    for a phonograph disk with a spindle-like retainer.

    389+,   for a container for a roll or reel.


CLS 206/494
TXT A container under the class definition wherein a flaccid panel is doubled
    upon itself.

    (1)     Note.  Generally the resultant arrangement is a compact visual
    display of the panel material.

    (2)     Note.  Included here is a container for a plurality of empty bags
    doubled upon themselves.


CLS 206/495
TXT A container under the class definition consisting of a base or backer
    member (a) onto which a content item is pegged or pin-fastened or (b) about
    an edge of which a content item is folded.

    (1)     Note.  When the item is folded about plural edges it is considered
    a winding, for which see subclasses 389+.


CLS 206/496
TXT A container under subclass 37  for trash; e.g., spent matches, tobacco
    refuse, discarded chewing gum.

    (1)     Note.  See search notes under subclass 125 for the locus of other
    debris receivers.


CLS 206/497
TXT A container under the class definition consisting of a generally thin,
    flaccid material drawn against the content or portions thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    432,    for a shrink type wrapper for plural beverage type receptacles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 87.01+ for a
    wrapper, per se.


CLS 206/499
TXT A container under the class definition including a plurality of content
    items (a) either piled one on the other or (b) interfitted or mated.

    (1)     Note.  Included here, as a content item, is an article or a
    receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    501     through 520, for nesting or stacking of receptacles.

    535+,   for ampoules, capsules, pellets or granules stacked within a
    container.


CLS 206/500
TXT A container under subclass 499 for translucent, transparent or opaque
    lighting accessories which diffuse or direct light rays.

    (1)     Note.  Usually, those items are fragile and thus a complete search
    should include subclasses 521+, and see search notes thereunder.


CLS 206/501
TXT Two or more containers under the class definition wherein each of at least
    two, nonidentical or variant, containers has structure to coat with the
    structure of another container so that one may be superposed above the
    other in a relatively stable manner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    499+,   for nesting or vertical stacking within a container.

    503+,   for vertical stacking of similar receptacles.


CLS 206/502
TXT Two or more containers under subclass 501 wherein said containers are
    paired or related in use; e.g., culinary articles such as bowl-plate,
    cream-sugar set.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    508,    for a container closure modification for stacking similar
    receptacles.


CLS 206/503
TXT A container under the class definition configured to engage with the
    configuration of an adjacent portion of another identical superposed
    container to enhance the stability of such piled containers without any one
    container occupying an established capacity of another.

    (1)     Note.  A container with mere planar top and bottom is not
    considered to have structure for vertical stacking for this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  In the pile or stack configuration the content of individual
    containers is not accessible.

    (3)     Note.  The established capacity of a container is considered to be
    the interior space disclosed as for content.  That is, a flanged or rim
    portion at the container top to receive a lid is not part of the
    established capacity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139+,   for a portable segregating carrier for plural beverage type
    containers.

    499+,   for nesting or stacking within a container.

    501+,   for different receptacles with means for stacking.

    514+,   for nesting of different receptacles.

    515+,   for nesting of identical receptacles or closures.

    554,    for stacking of paper bags.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, appropriate subclasses, for pile of
    plural container-like members with access to the content of individual
    container-like members.

    410,    Freight Accommodation on Freight Carrier, subclasses 77+ for a
    device which secures freight unit supports (e.g., pallets) or containers to
    the carrier during shipment, and may further include the use of the device
    for attachment to the support or container for stacking one on another; or
    for a support or container having a particular construction for
    interfitting with the securement device.


CLS 206/504
TXT A container under subclass 503 including particular structure, or
    configuration, for side by side pile arrangement.


CLS 206/505
TXT A container under subclass 503 including particular structure, or
    configuration, which permits selectively (a) piling one container on the
    other or (b) fitting or telescoping one container within the other.

    (1)     Note.  The nesting or interfitting of one container within the
    other totally, or in part, destroys the established capacity of the
    container.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note under subclass 503.


CLS 206/506
TXT A container under subclass 505 wherein an element is movable to (a) provide
    a support for piling or (b) allow interfitting.


CLS 206/507
TXT A container under subclass 505 wherein a relative horizontal rotation of
    one container with respect to another establishes the pile or interfit
    relationship.


CLS 206/508
TXT A container under subclass 503 wherein the particular configuration of a
    removable lid provides structure to engage another identical container for
    piling.


CLS 206/509
TXT A container under subclass 503 wherein the engaging structure includes
    either a distinct upward (downward) protuberance or upward (downward)
    opening cavity.

    (1)     Note.  Often both a protuberance and a mating cavity are provided
    for stable piling of containers.


CLS 206/510
TXT A container under subclass 509 wherein the protuberance is an element
    disclosed as the means for carrying or moving the container.


CLS 206/511
TXT A container under subclass 509 wherein the protuberance is one of several
    ground, or base or table, engaging elements for the containers.


CLS 206/512
TXT A container under subclass 509 wherein the protuberance is one of several
    elements at, or adjacent, the juncture of container sides.


CLS 206/513
TXT A container under subclass 503 formed or consisting substantially of
    attenuated openwork panels; e.g., milk crate, dish tray.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a wire fabric container with a solid sheet
    bottom or bottom cover.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 485+, for wire body containers, per se.


CLS 206/514
TXT Two or more containers under the class definition wherein each of at least
    two, nonidentical or variant, containers has a configuration which permits
    fitting or telescoping one container within the other.

    (1)     Note.  The nesting or interfitting one within the other totally or
    in part-destroys the established capacity of the container.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note subclass 503.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    515+,   for nesting of identical containers or closures.


CLS 206/515
TXT A container under the class definition configured to permit fitting one
    container within another identical container.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) and (2) Notes under subclass 514.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    514,    for nesting of different receptacles.


CLS 206/516
TXT A container under subclass 515 including a distinct buffer element to
    prevent a jam, or force fit, of interfitted or telescoped containers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217,    for a drinking vessel combined with content.

    519+,   for a nestable container with structure to limit interfit.


CLS 206/517
TXT A container under subclass 515 wherein (a) the normal configuration or
    shape is changeable to permit interfitting or (b) container sections
    disclosed as made for repeated assembly and disassembly are configured to
    all interfit with each other or interfit in sets of like parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    546,    for a knockdown, or nested, kit of the mess gear type.

    577,    for an assemblage or kit of an article or device in disassembled or
    collapsed array.


CLS 206/518
TXT A container under subclass 515 of polyhedron configuration.


CLS 206/519
TXT A container under subclass 515 wherein the container or lid has specific
    structure to fix the interfit of one container within the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    516,    for a container with a separate cushion or spacer to limit interfit.


CLS 206/520
TXT A container under subclass 519 wherein the structure is at the terminal or
    bottom wall of the container.


CLS 206/521
TXT A container under the class definition with means to pad, brace, or hold
    the content so that a blow or acceleration force will not damage said
    content.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the structural features provided for, in subclasses
    higher in the class schedule, will protect content against shock; and a
    careful consideration of such features is required to complete the search
    for shock protection characteristics.

    (2)     Note.  Classified here is a container with specific means to
    provide "shock protection" for a content article (or articles) rather than
    to merely reinforce or strengthen the container itself, though such
    specific means often further strengthens the container.  Where a container
    itself is encased for "shock protection", such container is considered to
    be a content article.Reinforcement or multilayer wall structure not
    disclosed for "shock protection" or a content article is classified in
    Class 220, subclasses 400+ and 415+.  A removable liner, or removable
    container, disclosed for "shock protection" of a content article is
    considered a "specific means" for this subclass (subclass 521).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131+,   for a discrete case for a match box.

    139+,   for spacer elements between type receptacles.

    259+,   for a reinforcement or case for a single cigarette package.

    275,    for a tobacco container with shield means.

    280,    for an apparel container with a reinforced wall.

    313,    for a phonograph record jacket with a cushion or sleeve.

    418+,   for a light bulb or tube container.

    426+,   for a stemware container.

    454+,   for a fragile plate container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    217,    Wooden Receptacle, appropriate subclasses for wooden receptacles
    with cushioning means to protect the contents.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 87.02+ for a
    wrapper, per se, having shock protecting means.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for stock material in the form of a single or plural layer web or pad or
    sheet, from which the shield protector may be made, and especially
    subclasses 182+ for a corrugated web or sheet, and subclasses 304.4+ for a
    composite web or sheet embodying a component of porous or cellular material.


CLS 206/521.1
TXT For an egg, fruit, or vegetable (e.g., egg carton):

    Subject matter under subclass 521 wherein the container is disclosed for
    holding one or more eggs, one or more pieces of fruit, or one or more
    vegetables.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    602.1,  for a divisible egg carton.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses 26+ for an egg crate made of wood.


CLS 206/521.15
TXT Divisible container:

    Subject matter under subclass 521.1 wherein the receptacle includes means
    which facilitate separating it into two or more content-holding portions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 120.011+ for
    two or more severably attached boxes.


CLS 206/521.2
TXT Single item:

    Subject matter under subclass 521.1 wherein the container is disclosed for
    holding only one item.


CLS 206/521.3
TXT Including parallel partitions attached to two opposing container walls by
    triangular webs:

    Subject matter under subclass 521.1 wherein the container includes elements
    which divide it into a plurality of content holding sections, the elements
    being equidistant from one another and attached to opposite walls by means
    of triangular segments of material.


CLS 206/521.4
TXT Including a transverse partition folded up from the bottom wall:


    Subject matter under subclass 521.3 wherein the container includes a
    partition which extends cross-wise with respect to the parallel partitions
    and is formed by folding upwardly part of the bottom wall.


CLS 206/521.5
TXT Including parallel partitions which project through openings in opposed
    container walls:

    Subject matter under subclass 521.1 wherein the container includes elements
    which divide it into a plurally of content holding sections, the elements
    being equidistant from one another and extending through silts or apertures
    in opposite container walls.


CLS 206/521.6
TXT Item supported in an opening in a retaining element:

    Subject matter under subclass 521.1 wherein at least one of the content
    items extends through an aperture in an interior element, which maintains
    the item in a fixed position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    521.2,  for a container holding only one item.


CLS 206/521.7
TXT Item supported in openings of spaced retaining elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 521.6 wherein the container includes at least
    two retaining elements, and at least one of the content items extends
    through an opening in each element.


CLS 206/521.8
TXT Including a curved or sloping support surface for an item:

    Subject matter under subclass 521.1 wherein one or more content items rest
    on a surface which is arcuate or oblique to a horizontal plane.


CLS 206/521.9
TXT V-shaped:

    Subject matter under subclass 521.8 wherein the supporting surface is in
    the shape of a "V".


CLS 206/522
TXT A container under subclass 521 wherein the content is positioned or held by
    a gas pressurized bag or bladder.


CLS 206/523
TXT A container under subclass 521 wherein a light multicellular material is
    used to pad or position the content.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 304.4+ for a
    stock material in the form of a composite web or sheet including a
    component of porous or cellular material from which the shock protection
    device may be made.


CLS 206/524
TXT A container under subclass 523 wherein the multicellular material is
    generated in the container.


CLS 206/524.1
TXT A container under the class definition wherein either the content or cover
    is particularly delineated in terms of one or more "chemical" constituents.

    (1)     Note.  The term "chemical" is used here to include compound,
    composition, alloy, mixture, etc.

    (2)     Note.  This and indented subclasses are residual, in this class,
    for "chemical" content and/or cover material so the whole subclass schedule
    must be screened for a more specific locus before assigning a document
    here.  See, for example, subclasses .5, .6+, 205+, 216+, 219+, 384, 385,
    438+, 447, and 484+.

    (3)     Note.  See (1) Note under the class definition for the general line
    with composition or stock material classes.

    (4)     Note.  The term "material" is used here to distinguish from
    "article".  A specified article content, not provided for in a subclass
    higher in the class schedule, is not classifiable in this subclass unless
    some particular "chemical" characteristic is recited with respect to the
    container.  A patent reciting such unprovided for article content is
    classifiable in subclasses 525+.

    (5)     Note.  See appropriate composition classes for packages of
    compositions, e.g.,

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    .5,     for an infusion containing receptacle or package.

    .6      and .7, for a receptacle of package for a gas.

    37+,    for a pocket or personal use package.

    216+,   for a combination package.

    438+,   for a package of surgical supplies.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, particularly subclasses 524+ for compositions for use
    in the processes named.

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, for fuel packages.

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclasses 59 and 60, for carbide
    cartridges.

    53,     Package Making, appropriate subclasses for methods of and apparatus
    for making chemical packages.  See particularly subclasses 400, 401, 402,
    and 428+.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, for materials of that type.

    136,    Batteries: Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, for vessels used or
    designed to hold battery elements.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    appropriate subclasses for processes and apparatus for filling receivers
    with fluent material.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges.

    252,    Compositions, particularly subclasses 10 and 176 for packages of
    composition of matter.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for organic compounds.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, for a
    composition, per se, for preventing, alleviating, treating, curing, or
    diagnosing a disease or condition of an animal (including human) or to
    groom or enhance the appearance of a living body or for a biocidal
    composition, e.g., insecticide, fungicide, etc.

    426,    Food or Edible Material: Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 70+, for a food package.

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, particularly
    subclasses 120, 140, 277, 293, 295+, 406, and 439 for packages of
    compositions of the type included in that class and subclass.

    520,    Synthetic Resins, or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Class 523, subclass 124 for a composition containing a
    synthetic resin or Natural Rubber utility as a battery container or battery
    container cover or to processes of preparing said composition.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclasses 1+ for a hydrocarbon
    compound blended with a stabilizer; and subclass 899 for a process of
    storing a hydrocarbon compound.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 1+ for radioactive material seeds and holders.


CLS 206/524.2
TXT A container under subclass 524.1 wherein the cover material is recited as a
    particular array of varied layer members or in terms of particular layer
    constituents.

    (1)     Note.  Generally, a layer for this subclass is a distinct film,
    sheet, or panel which is contiguous to, or joined to, other like members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    484.2,  for a laminate packet with plural layered walls.

    524.3,  for a container with a specified lining, coating, or impregnant for
    the container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for laminate structure, per se, and see search note to Class 428 under the
    class definition for a line distinction.


CLS 206/524.3
TXT A container under subclass 524.1 wherein the cover material includes (a) a
    distinct inner or outer surface constituent, or (b) has a distinct infused
    constituent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    .5,     for a container with infusing substance content which may be
    infused from or through the walls of said container, and see search notes
    thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 31+ for a cabinet with gas
    or vapor treatment of material.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for film or lining structure, per se.


CLS 206/524.4
TXT A container under subclass 524.1 wherein the material in said container
    includes another material which limits interaction between content and
    container or undesirable changes in the content material itself.

    (1)     Note.  A search for inhibitor or stabilization material, per se,
    requires a consideration of "chemical" classes for which see page IV of the
    Manual of Classification.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213.1,  for a container with a gaseous medium contacting the content.


CLS 206/524.5
TXT A container under subclass 524.1 wherein the material in the container is
    recited specifically as (a) either alkaline or acidic, or (b) subject to
    becoming liquid by absorbing moisture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204,    for a container with means for removing water or water vapor from
    the atmosphere within a container.

    438+,   for a container for body treatment material.


CLS 206/524.6
TXT A container under subclass 524.1 wherein the cover material itself is
    particularly delineated in terms of one or more "chemical" constituents.

    (1)     Note.  See notes under subclass 524.1.


CLS 206/524.7
TXT A container under subclass 524.6 wherein the cover material is recited as
    subject to disintegration, usually in a particular solvent.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are patents, not elsewhere provided for, to a
    content container combination wherein both can be dissolved when subjected
    to a particular solvent, e.g., a dye or bleach package.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    .5,     for an infusion container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    604,    Surgery, subclass 287 for therapeutic material in a container, the
    container being soluble in a body orifice.


CLS 206/524.8
TXT A container under the class definition wherein all, or substantially all,
    gas or vapor content has been removed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 403+, for methods of packaging including
    gas evacuating, and subclasses 79+, for packaging apparatus including gas
    evacuating means.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 48+, for electrical or getter type pumps.


CLS 206/524.9
TXT A container under subclass 524.3 wherein the cover material includes at
    least two or more layers of the same material, usually impregnated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    524.2,  for cover material with plural different layers.


CLS 206/525
TXT A container under the class definition not falling within the scope of any
    subclass higher in the class schedule and which has an article associated
    therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    524.1+, for specified material as container content, that is, a particular
    material rather than an article, is set forth as the container content.


CLS 206/525.1
TXT Content folded with blank:

    A container under subclass 525 combined with a foldable, contained article,
    wherein the contained article and the sheet material of the container are
    bent simultaneously.


CLS 206/526
TXT A container under subclass 525 for two or more articles.

    (1)     Note.  The titles and definitions of the subclasses of this (206)
    class are set forth in the singular. However, unless expressly excluded by
    title and definition these subclasses include plural content.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    540,    for a container for plural ampoules, capsules, pellets or granules.


CLS 206/527
TXT A container under the class definition not falling within the scope of any
    subclass higher in the class schedule.


CLS 206/528
TXT A container under the class definition for a (a) relatively small
    receptacle or vial, usually frangible or made of a gelatinous-like
    substance or (b) a pill, tablet, lozenge or troche; each unit of (a) or (b)
    usually encompasses a single dose or charge for medication or other
    purposes-which in instances of plural unit contents include means for
    limited access to, or limited disposal from, such plural unit container.

    (1)     Note.  content such as (a) or (b) above which is completely
    encapsulated between two or more flaccid sheets bonded together, without
    means for limited access to, or limited disposal from, a plural unit
    container is considered a laminate packet for subclass 484.

    (2)     Note.  The term "limited" connotes the inclusion of structure which
    an operator may manipulate to provide an opening for less than a single
    action removal of total content.

    (3)     Note.  Included here are patents for a similar container or package
    of lighter flints or pyrophoric elements.

    (4)     Note.  This is only the residual locus for an ampoule or capsule,
    per se.  See notes below for other loci.

    (5)     Note.  See the 206 class definition Search Class reference to Class
    221 for the line between Class 206 and Class 221.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    438+,   for a container for a body treatment article or material.

    484,    for a laminate package.  See (2) Note, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 8 for a sectional container with telescoping
    components.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 14+
    for a structured dosage unit intended to be used as a whole without
    disassembly. See II, Class 206 note under the class definition of Class 424.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the containment of hazardous or toxic waste.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 403+ for medicament holding receptacles which
    are adapted for charging; and subclass 72 for gaseous substances held in
    reservoirs or injection.


CLS 206/529
TXT A container under subclass 528 wherein the content is a unit which softens
    or dissolves when inserted into a body opening or subcutaneously.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    604,    Surgery, subclass 288 for soluble suppositories.


CLS 206/530
TXT A container under subclass 528 for one item of content.


CLS 206/531
TXT A container under subclass 528 including means whereby manipu 9lation of
    the container, or parts of the container, rupture or distort the container
    and force an item of content out through the ruptured or distorted portion.

    (1)     Note.  Where the manipulation also serves to separate one item from
    a stack of items for subsequent "disposal" see appropriate subclass of
    Class 221.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    498,    for a container with rupture means.


CLS 206/532
TXT A container under subclass 528 with means to tear or sever a portion of the
    container to allow removal of content.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    498,    for other container rupture means and see search notes thereunder.


CLS 206/533
TXT A short can-like container under subclass 539 with a restricted opening in
    a flat end.

    (1)     Note.  The restricted opening allows passage of only a single unit
    of content at a time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    534.2,  for other lateral access means.

    536+,   for limited access, by component manipulation, to con tent stacked
    within a container.


CLS 206/534
TXT A container under subclass 528 including a means which conveys information
    relative to the container or its content.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    459.1,  for a container with variable information exhibiting means.

    459.5   for a container with static information exhibiting means.


CLS 206/534.1
TXT A container under subclass 528 for plural units in one side-by-side tier.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are patents for a shallow container structured
    to hold pills or tablets in a common place.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    533,    for a compartmented container with limited access via a container
    face parallel to the layer or tier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclass 125.12  for a
    paperboard box having a slide closure and subclass 125.08  for a paperboard
    box having a hinged closure.


CLS 206/534.2
TXT A container under subclass 534.1 including gate structure, generally for
    removal of content one at a time, which structure is in the container wall
    normal to the plane of the content layer or tier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    533,    for other lateral access means.


CLS 206/535
TXT A container under subclass 528 including content units piled one on the
    other.


CLS 206/536
TXT A container under subclass 535 so structured as to permit container parts
    to be moved relative to each other to provide a restricted opening for
    passage of a content unit.

    (1)     Note.  Mere removal of a closure is not considered relative
    movement for this subclass.  See the closure subclasses of Classes 215 and
    220.


CLS 206/537
TXT A container under subclass 536 wherein the container is a slender
    3cylinder-like member, usually with a clip, to be carried on the person in
    the manner of a writing instrument.


CLS 206/538
TXT A partitioned container under subclass 528.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    561,    for a tray-type container including partition means.


CLS 206/539
TXT A container under subclass 538 with partitions so arranged as to hold only
    one unit of content in each section.


CLS 206/540
TXT A container under subclass 528 for two or more units of contents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    526,    for other plural content containers.


CLS 206/541
TXT A container under subclass 223 wherein the divergent contents constitute
    related parts of a portable outfit for dining, e.g., at work, while camping
    or at a picnic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    499     through 520, for stacking and/or nesting of receptacles, per se,
    and 551 for a pastry wedge container, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclass 12 for luggage
    convertible into a desk or table and partitioned or modified so as to be
    usable for transportation of lunch or picnic components.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclass 401 for a cup
    with an attached spoon.


CLS 206/542
TXT A container under subclass 541 including structure for accommodating
    nondining items such as cosmetic or first aide material or tools.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    349+,   for a tool container, per se, and see search notes thereunder.


CLS 206/543
TXT A container under subclass 541 including a distinct double walled container
    for heat insulation of content effected by evacuation of any gases between
    said double walls.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass as an original, include the recital
    of a vacuum type container as part of the claimed subject matter.

    (2)     Note.  Because of the obvious similarity of disclosure in
    subclasses 543 and 544 no cross references have been made from one to the
    other.  Thus, a full search for some features may require a search of both
    subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclass 13, for a vacuum type receptacle, per se.


CLS 206/544
TXT A container under subclass 541 including structure to support or position a
    double walled container for heat insulation of content by evacuation of any
    gases between said double walls.

    (1)     Note.  See (2) Note under subclass 543.


CLS 206/545
TXT A container under subclass 541 including distinct means configuration or
    material to minimize heat transfer to or from all or part of the container
    contents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 412+, 415+ and 467 for spaced wall or
    jacket insulating features.


CLS 206/546
TXT A container under subclass 541 wherein (a) normal configuration or shape is
    changeable to permit interfitting or constituent components or (b)
    components usually intended for use in food preparation or food serving and
    disclosed as made for repeated assembly and disassembly are configured to
    interfit with each other or interfit in sets.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    517,    for nesting of identical receptacles.

    547,    for a container interfitted with a canteen.


CLS 206/547
TXT A container under subclass 541 including a distinct drinking water jug or
    canister.

    (1)     Note.  Because so many of the components disclosed but not claimed
    include a drinking water vessel, few cross-references have been made
    between this subclass and other subclasses under subclass 541.

    (2)     Note.  Patents in this subclass as an original include the recital
    of a canteen as part of the claimed subject matter.


CLS 206/548
TXT A container under subclass 541 including an encompassing sheet or panel of
    pliant or supple cover material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    410,    for a roll or reel receptacle of the flaccid wrapper type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 87.01+ for a
    wrapper, per se.


CLS 206/549
TXT A container under subclass 541 including structure to handle or position
    said container.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass, as an original, include the
    recital of a handle or support means as part of the claimed subject matter.


CLS 206/550
TXT A container under subclass 541 including an aperture or opening in the
    outer cover of the kit to allow air circulation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    454,    Ventilation, appropriate subclasses, for specific ventilation means.


CLS 206/551
TXT A container under the class definition for a sector, or radially cut
    portion, of a baked dish of crusted food.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45.32,  for a display container for a pie.

    541+,   for a camp or lunch kit including means to hold or retain a piece
    of pie.


CLS 206/553
TXT A container under subclass 349 for table flatware or a food utensil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207,    for a container including an ancillary medium contacting a tool,
    e.g., anti-tarnish or anti-rust composition.

    223+,   for a kit including flatware or a food utensil.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 70.6 for a support or rack for holding
    cutlery.


CLS 206/554
TXT A container under the class definition for two or more pliable thin walled
    pouches or sacks.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are pliable bags of plastic or foil-like
    material.

    (2)     Note.  Generally, the individual bags of the stack or pile are
    collapsed or folded and empty.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    449+,   for a container for plates or sheets.

    503+,   for other receptacle stacking or nesting structure.


CLS 206/555
TXT A container under subclass 449 including an aperture, notch or opening
    exposing at least part of a content item so that it may be grasped or
    pushed and taken out of the container.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a secretarial or record tray with a cut out
    for sheet or letter removal.

    (2)     Note.  See line note with Class 211 under subclass 557 of this
    class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.5+,  for a ticket case with an opening for content ejection by finger.

    557+,   for a tray-type receptacle, and see search notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 10+, for sorting racks, subclasses
    50+, for stacked card or sheet racks and subclasses 126.1+ for tray-type
    racks. See (2) Note above.


CLS 206/556
TXT A container under subclass 555 including a pusher or support member urging
    content toward an access position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    425,    for a card file with a follower or for such a follower, per se.


CLS 206/557
TXT A container under the class definition comprising an open shallow container.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a generally flat panel with a raised or low
    rim which includes further article retainer means.

    (2)     Note.  Also included here and in indented subclass is a tray insert
    or retainer, per se, which holds or supports an article, which insert or
    retainer is not provided for elsewhere.

    (3)     Note.  Also included here is a configured panel, which
    configuration holds or positions one or more articles of mating
    configuration either in whole or in contacting part.

    (4)     Note.  Compartments, partitions or cells combined with tray
    structure are also included here where such features are specific or
    peculiar to the article content.  (Classes 217, 220, and 229 for general
    compartmented containers).

    (5)     Note.  The noun "tray" in a claim without some structural
    modification falling within the above definition, is not enough for
    classification in this subclass.  For example, a mere "medicine tray" or a
    "serving tray" is not classified here, while a "shallow tray" or a "tray
    with a flange" may be classified here.

    (6)     Note.  Many of the features provided for in subclasses higher in
    this class schedule are of the "tray type".  A careful consideration of
    such features is required to complete the search for "tray" characteristics.

    (7)     Note.  The "tray" may be made of wood, plastic, paper, metal, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    .8+,    for a coin tray.

    5+,     for an eyeglass or spectacle tray.

    96+,    for match and debris tray structure.

    215,    for a stationery or carbon paper container.

    246,    for tobacco and ash tray structure.

    425,    for a file for plural cards or sheets.

    553,    for a flatware or kitchen tool tray.

    554+,   for a desk tray with access for manual content removal.

    736+,   for a container convertible to or from a display configuration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 446+, for tray
    structure combined with changeable exhibitor means, 380+, for tray
    structure combined with shiftable display means, and 124+, for card rack
    means.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, appropriate subclasses for trays or tray-like
    structure in multiple array.  Class 211 provides for two or more trays
    structurally related so that content of each tray is simultaneously
    accessible. This and indented subclasses (557+) provide for tray structure
    with or without additional article retainer means.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 144 and 172
    for article carrying trays which are not specially configured for
    supporting a particular article.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, appropriate subclasses for a tray
    combined with enclosing structure, with or without means to shift such tray
    relative to its enclosure.

    402,    Binder Device Releasably Engaging Aperture or Notch of Sheet,
    appropriate subclasses for a releasable sheet (card or panel) impaling
    retainer. Nominal recital of tray or container combined with such retainer
    is provided for in Class 402.  The inclusion of specific structural details
    of a tray will effect classification in this (557+) subclass.


CLS 206/558
TXT A container under subclass 557 including two or more open shallow
    containers in side by side position.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a patent to plural trays in lateral array
    which are also displaced vertically.

    (2)     Note.  Included here is a patent to a single tray with features for
    grouping a plurality of such trays in lateral array.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    499,    for nesting or stacking within a container.

    501+,   for different receptacles with means for stacking.

    503+,   for vertical stacking of similar receptacles, especially subclasses
    505+, for nesting or stacking.

    514,    for different receptacles with nesting features.

    515,    for nesting of similar receptacles.


CLS 206/559
TXT A container under subclass 557 including structure to move or shift an
    article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.4,   for a ticket case with ejector mechanism.

    555+,   for a plate or sheet container with access means for content
    removal.


CLS 206/560
TXT A container under subclass 557 including structure to lock or secure an
    article against removal.

    (1)     Note.  Means for a mere resilient grasping of an article is not
    considered a latch structure for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    477+,   for a base with attached clasping type article retainer.

    493,    for an article with a retainer in an aperture of said article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 4+ for a rack with article locking
    structure.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 215 through 222 for lock
    or latch means to secure cabinet components.


CLS 206/561
TXT A container under subclass 577 divided into two or more compartments or
    cells.

    (1)     Note.  The divider structure may be integral with the container or
    a separate member.

    (2)     Note.  See Classes 215, 220, and 229 under subclass entitled
    "compartmented", "cell" or "partition" for other loci of similar structure,
    and search note thereunder for still further loci.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180+,   for specific partition structure in a carrier for plural
    cylindrical beverage type receptacles.

    203,    for a plural cylindrical beverage type receptacle tray carrier of
    molded plastic.

    538+,   for a compartmented ampule or capsule container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 600+ for a compartmented receptacle.


CLS 206/562
TXT A container under subclass 557 including an opening within which an article
    is supported or positioned.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194+,   for cylindrical beverage type receptacles held in apertures of a
    retainer.

    341,    for a staple of clip held in an aperture of a support member.

    347,    for a fastener held in aperture of a member.

    382+,   for pin-like articles held in retainer apertures.

    485,    for an article held in apertures of opposed walls.

    486+,   for an article held in aperture in base.


CLS 206/563
TXT A container under subclass 562 wherein the aperture is contoured for a
    particular article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 286+ for a toilet kit having shaped apertures
    for accommodating specific grooming articles.


CLS 206/564
TXT A container under subclass 557 including a hollow, indentation or niche to
    hold or position an article.

    (1)     Note.  A slot or notch at the edge of a panel or sheet is
    considered an aperture for subclass 562 above.


CLS 206/565
TXT A container under subclass 557 including an article retainer.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the subclasses of Class 206, both higher and lower
    in the subclass schedule, include retainer features.  A careful
    consideration of features is required to complete the search for "retainer"
    characteristics.

    (2)     Note.  See (2) Note under subclass 557.

    (3)     Note.  A lid or cover for a tray is not a "retainer".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., appropriate subclasses, for the
    several specific kinds of article holders, per se, included therein.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, appropriate subclasses, for rack structure
    combined with retainer structure.

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses, for the several specific kinds of
    article holder s, per se, included therein.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, appropriate subclasses, for
    enclosures combined with article retainer structure.


CLS 206/566
TXT A container under subclass 557 for an adornment article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6.1,    for a package including jewelry or a container for jewelry, which
    container is not a tray type container.

    205,    for a container including an ancillary medium contacting a content
    article, e.g., anti-tarnish composition.

    301,    for a container for a watch or clock.

    553,    for a container for silverware eating    utensils.

    736+,   for a convertible display type of tray.


CLS 206/567
TXT A container under subclass 557 for debris, e.g., discarded or burnt tobacco
    products.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136,    for a match container or packet including a debris receiver, and
    use the collected search note under subclass 125 for other similar loci.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 231+, for a tobacco user appliance combined
    with an ash tray.


CLS 206/568
TXT A container under subclass 223 for two or more particular (or named)
    separate materials, disclosed for commingling external of said container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219+,   for a container with two or more separate materials, which
    container is modified to permit commingling by manipulation of said
    container or a portion thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    appropriate subclasses, for a food package with separate materials.


CLS 206/569
TXT A container under subclass 223 wherein content items are usable to exhibit
    or gauge a quantitative or qualitative characteristic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305+,   for a container for a measuring or testing instrument, and see
    search notes thereunder for other related loci.


CLS 206/570
TXT A container under subclass 223 including content items or materials adapted
    for use in the treatment of wounds or diseased portion of the body.

    (1)     Note.  See search note under subclass 363 for cosmetic or toilet
    use content.

    (2)     Note.  A mere assemblage of plural or diverse tools for therapeutic
    use is not considered a kit for this and indented subclasses.  See search
    note below to subclasses 363+, for such "kit".

    (3)     Note.  Unlike the tools, referred to in (2) Note above, an
    assemblage of diverse materials for therapeutic use is classified in this
    and indented subclasses rather than in subclasses 438+ below.  Subclasses
    438+ provide for a container for single or plural articles or materials.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210,    for a container including an ancillary contacting medium for a body
    treatment tool, e.g., a sterilization fluid.

    363+,   for a container for a therapeutic type tool, per se, or a
    collection of such tools, per se, e.g., subclass 370 for a container for
    plural or diverse surgical tools, per se.

    438+,   for a container of therapeutic material, per se.

    581,    for a cosmetic or toilet kit including nongrooming means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, appropriate subclasses for surgery tools, per se.

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 286+ for a toilet kit.

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 25+ for dental tools, per se.


CLS 206/571
TXT A container under subclass 570 including a means to induce material,
    generally fluid, into the body.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is an assemblage of an injection type tool (or
    tools) and the material (or materials) for such injection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    364+,   for a container for a syringe or hypodermic, per se.

    572,    for a container for other type tools with medicinal material.

    828,    for cross-reference collection relating to medicinal content.


CLS 206/572
TXT A container under subclass 570 including a body treatment tool and a body
    treatment material.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is the typical "first aid" kit assemblage of
    surgical tools, dressings, and medicines.

    (2)     Note.  A complete search for this type kit must include subclass
    571.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    438+,   for a container for a single (or plural) body treatment article (or
    material); however, see (3) Note under subclass 570, for diverse articles
    or materials for body treatment.

    571,    for a container for a syringe-type tool with material.


CLS 206/573
TXT A container under subclass 223 for content items or materials which, as
    disclosed, either (a) convey information or attract attention, or (b)
    provide illumination, or (c) are mirror-like.


CLS 206/574
TXT A container under subclass 223 including articles or materials used for
    sewing, stitching, knitting, crocheting, etc., or clothing making.

    (1)     Note.  Attention is directed to subclasses lower in the schedule
    (such as 225+, 227, 231, and 232) which include some characteristics
    similar to those of a needlework or dressmaking kit.


CLS 206/575
TXT A container under subclass 223 including means for the production of (a) an
    article generally within the category of aesthetic or artistic endeavor,
    e.g., carving, painting, scale model making, mosaic assembly, etc., or (b)
    a lettered or symbol display.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a kit for constructing a purse, a pair of
    moccasin slippers, a model airplane, or a poster announcement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.7+,   for a container for artist equipment.


CLS 206/576
TXT A container under subclass 223 including (1) a generally dynamic device, or
    appliance, used in and around a home or business headquarter to enhance,
    sustain, or facilitate functions or operations therein together with, (2)
    an ancillary attachment and/or material used by the device.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a container for a vacuum cleaner plus its
    attachments and container for a chain saw plus its attachments.

    (2)     Note.  See (1) Note under subclass 349.

    (3)     Note.  See (2) Note under subclass 320.

    (4)     Note.  See (2) Note under subclass 223.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    320,    for a container for a household or office appliance, per se.

    349+,   for a container for a tool attachment, per se.


CLS 206/577
TXT A container or assemblage under subclass 223 for an article or device with
    component parts in disassembled or collapsed array.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    517,    for components of a knockdown receptacle in nested array.

    600,    for a container with a pallet feature of the knockdown type.


CLS 206/578
TXT A container under subclass 223 for articles, devices, or materials used in
    conjunction with taking, developing, or printing an image by a light
    sensitive technique.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    316.1+, for a container for a photographic device, per se.


CLS 206/579
TXT A container under subclass 223 for articles, devices, or materials used in
    conjunction with amusement, exercise, competitive, or learning activity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315,    for a container for a manual device, per se, used in a game for
    amusement, exercise, or competition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    434,    Education and Demonstration, and Cryptography, appropriate
    subclasses for a teaching means, per se.


CLS 206/580
TXT A container under subclass 223 for a fastening or latch mechanism with the
    operative tool for such mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, appropriate subclasses for a lock or key, per se.


CLS 206/581
TXT A container under subclass 223 wherein the contents include means for
    personal grooming combined with disparate means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 286+ for a toilet kit limited to grooming
    devices.


CLS 206/582
TXT A container under subclass 223 for a repair panel (or sheet) with the
    securement means for said panel (or sheet).

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a repair item which requires that it, or
    the member to which the item is applied, be trimmed prior to or after
    application.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231,    for a container or kit including other than patch content items
    with associated fastener means.

    302,    for a container for a tire patch, per se.


CLS 206/583
TXT A container under subclass 521 wherein the content is supported or hung in
    a pendent-like or hammock-like fashion.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a container with content supported at both
    top and bottom (or between sides) by attenuated means in festoon-like or
    catenary-like fashion.

    (2)     Note.  An article supported between parallel yieldable sheets or
    pads is not "suspended".

    (3)     Note.  An article supported by or between springs making
    substantial surface contact with the article is not a "suspension"
    arrangement.

    (4)     Note.  Generally, "suspended" connotes limited point contact
    between the supported content and the container. Such support allowing for
    resilient movement between said points plus a measure of twisting from the
    unstressed plane of support.

    (5)     Note.  Included here is an enwrapped content, which wrapper is then
    suspended or slung.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    591+,   for yieldable content support means which afford substantial
    surface contact between said support means and the container.


CLS 206/584
TXT A container under subclass 521 wherein the content is supported by a mass
    of particles which mass behaves like a fluid to generally conform to
    content configuration.

    (1)     Note.  The size of the "particles" is not critical for placement in
    this subclass so long as such "particles" exhibit flow characteristics with
    respect to the contents during and after packaging.


CLS 206/585
TXT A container under subclass 521 wherein the content array, or relative
    position of its components, provides the protection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    499,    for nesting or stacking within a container.


CLS 206/586
TXT A container under subclass 521 including a separate member to shield sharp
    extremities of the content.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    453,    for a sheet or plate container including a separate member to
    protect a corner or edge, or such member, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, Digest 1, for a corner
    pad.


CLS 206/587
TXT A container under subclass 521 wherein the content is held or positioned in
    an elongated furrow-like recess.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note under subclass 592.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    592,    for a yieldable retainer configured for the article.


CLS 206/588
TXT A container under subclass 521 including a retainer with an aperture for
    content support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    485,    for opposed walls, each with an aperture, to hold the same article.

    486+,   for a support or base with an aperture to hold an article.


CLS 206/589
TXT A container under subclass 588 wherein a retainer has two or more apertures
    for different articles.


CLS 206/590
TXT A container under subclass 588 wherein a retainer has two or more apertures
    for the same article.


CLS 206/591
TXT A container under subclass 521 including a resilient, crushable or
    collapsible holding means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    523+,   for "yieldable" retainer of foam-like material.


CLS 206/592
TXT A container under subclass 591 wherein the yieldable retainer is shaped, in
    whole or in part, to match the content contour for a "significant" extent
    of supporting contact.

    (1)     Note.  Groove or furrow support is generally distinguished from
    "significant" extent of support, as afforded by contour configuration, in
    that the groove or furrow provide line contact or corner contact with the
    contact.  Where the content is a simple cylindrical shape and the furrow is
    a mating concavity, the support is more than "groove-like".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    587,    for a container wherein the content is supported in a groove or
    furrow.


CLS 206/593
TXT A container under subclass 591 wherein the yieldable retainer is
    intermediate adjacent articles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    814,    for a space filler.


CLS 206/594
TXT A container under subclass 591 wherein the yieldable retainer is a separate
    member between the content article and the container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    313,    for a phono-record jacket with a distinct liner.

    453,    for a plate or sheet container with a distinct corner or edge
    protector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses 3+ for lining structure; subclass 27
    for box cell structure with plate-like cushion means; subclass 35 for
    cushion means on strips forming the compartments in a box; subclasses 52+
    for cushioned crates, and subclass 127 for bottle mailing cases.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 400+ for lining structure.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclass 14 for a lined
    box.


CLS 206/595
TXT A container under subclass 386 wherein the content arrangement provides one
    or more openings for engagement by manipulative means.

    (1)     Note.  A typical handling means is a forklift truck; however,
    "handling means" may also include a single (rather than dual) engagement
    means.


CLS 206/596
TXT A container under subclass 386 including two or more distinct sets of dual
    openings for manipulative means.

    (1)     Note.  The term "specified" as used here indicates that the patents
    classifiable in this subclass claim the particular structure set forth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclass 58 for an
    industrial platform, per se, with manipulative means entry from all sides.


CLS 206/597
TXT A container under subclass 386 including a strand (band, wire, rope, etc.)
    securement to hold content together or onto a skid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83.5,   for a bale package, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 16+ for bale and package
    ties, per se.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 1+ for binding apparatus and processes.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 87.01+ for a
    wrapper, per se.


CLS 206/598
TXT A container under subclass 386 including a distinct or particular opening
    for handling.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note under subclass 596 for "specified".


CLS 206/599
TXT A container under subclass 386 including distinct support members which
    space the skid, platform or content from the ground.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note under subclass 596 for "specified".


CLS 206/600
TXT A container under subclass 386 capable of rearrangement in a generally more
    compact or disassembled array.

    (1)     Note.  Such collapse or knockdown is performed without element
    distruction or stress beyond elastic limits.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    517,    for components of a knockdown receptacle in nested array.

    577,    for a combined or convertible container of the knockdown type.


CLS 206/701
TXT HOLDER FOR A REMOVABLE ELECTRICAL COMPONENT:

    A container under the class definition for: (a) a subassembly or an
    element, specialized for use in an electrical or electronic device; or (b)
    an electrical energy storage cell; in which the component is intended to be
    disassociated from the container before the component is used.

    (1)     Note. This subclass does not take an integrated circuit or any
    other component having a, per se, nonremovable "package."

    (2)     Note. This subclass does not take a component housing, such as a
    container intended to remain with the component when placed in the
    end-product electronic device.

    (3)     Note. This subclass does not take a removable package for a
    complete electrical device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    319,    for a container for a motor or engine.

    320,    for a container for a household appliance.

    389+,   for a container for coiled wire.

    418+,   for a container for a filament or space discharge bulb or tube.

    521+,   for a shock protection type package.

    820,    for a cross-reference art collection of separably linked articles
    joined in a striplike manner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 500+ for a work holder intended to
    hold an electronic component or the stock material of an electronic
    component during a coating or etching process.

    211,    Supports: Racks, for a rack intended to hold a plurality of
    electrical components, particularly subclass 41.

    312,    Supports: Cabinet Structure, for a cabinet intended to hold a
    plurality of electronic components.

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, for a housing or holder for an
    electronic component which includes structure to facilitate testing of the
    component.

    361,    Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 600+ for a
    permanent housing with plural diverse electronic components and subclasses
    212+ for a) an electrical component claimed in combination with static
    electricity dissipation means, b) static electricity dissipation means
    particularly configured to interact with an electrical component, or c)
    electric shielding means which is used to maintain a charge in a component.

    429,    Chemistry: Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process, for a permanent battery housing or for a battery holder intended
    to hold the battery while it is being charged or discharged.

    432,    Heating, for a housing or holder for an electronic component
    intended to hold the component during a heating process, particularly
    subclass 239 and subclasses 253+.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, for a housing or holder for an electronic
    component, in which the housing or holder includes electrical conducting
    means for electrically contacting with a lead or terminal of the component,
    whereby either a) the electrical contact is intended to operate the
    component or b) the housing or holder is intended to remain with the
    component when the component is placed in an electrical device.


CLS 206/702
TXT For an electrical cord:

    A container under subclass 701 for an elongated flexible means for
    conveying an electrical current, wherein the means is made of wire encased
    in electrical insulation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity: Conductors and Insulators, subclass 135 for an
    electrical cord adjunct that remains with the cord during use.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, for a container with an electrical
    cord which unwinds from the container.


CLS 206/703
TXT For a battery:

    A container under subclass 701 for an electrical storage cell which
    produces electricity by a chemical reaction (e.g., dry cell or wet cell
    battery).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    429,    Chemistry: Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process, subclasses 163+ for a battery housing, and subclasses 96+ for a
    battery pack.


CLS 206/704
TXT Button battery (e.g., watch battery):

    A container under subclass 703 wherein the electrical storage cell   has a
    height of less than its width or diameter (e.g., button battery for a watch
    or thin calculator).


CLS 206/705
TXT Dry cell:

    A container under subclass 703 wherein the chemical reactants in the
    electrical storage cell are in the form of a paste.


CLS 206/706
TXT For a circuit board:

    A container under subclass 701 for an insulated board or panel on which
    interconnected circuits and other components are mounted or printed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports: Racks, subclass 41 for a rack for circuit boards.

    361,    Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices, for a permanent
    housing or holder for a circuit board.


CLS 206/707
TXT Having plural grooves for retaining circuit boards:

    A container under subclass 706 for holding multiple circuit boards and
    including elongated recesses for holding the circuit boards.


CLS 206/708
TXT On adjustable panels:

    A container under subclass 707 wherein the elongated recesses are located
    on movable partitions.

    (1)     Note. The panels are generally adjustable for holding different
    sized circuit boards.


CLS 206/709
TXT Including shielding means for static electricity:

    A container under subclass 706 including means for preventing damage to the
    components from the effects caused by the accumulation of an electric
    charge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 212+ for
    (a) an electrical component claimed in combination with static electricity
    dissipation means, (b) static electricity dissipation means particularly
    configured to interact with an electrical component, or (c) electric
    shielding means which is used to maintain a charge in a component.


CLS 206/710
TXT For a semiconductor wafer:

    A container under subclass 701 for a substrate having, or intended to have,
    a plurality of individual micro-electronic circuit components layered
    thereon (e.g., a silicon disklike wafer which constitutes a plurality of
    unseparated, integrated circuit chips).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    832,    for a cross-reference art collection of semiconductor wafer boats.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 500+ for a work holder intended to
    hold an electronic component or the stock material of an electronic
    component, during a coating or etching process.

    211,    Supports: Racks, subclass 41 for a rack for platelike electrical
    components.

    432,    Heating, for a housing or holder for an electronic component
    intended to hold the component during a heating process.


CLS 206/711
TXT Having plural grooves for retaining wafers:

    A container under subclass 710 for holding multiple semiconductor wafers,
    and having elongated recesses for holding the semiconductor wafers.

    (1)     Note. The containers in this subclass have covers or other
    structure to differentiate them from a mere rack for holding semiconductors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports: Racks, subclass 41 for a rack for semiconductor wafers.


CLS 206/712
TXT Tray having plural circular pockets:

    A container under subclass 710 comprising an open shallow container or a
    configured supporting panel which includes round, recessed compartments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    557+,   for a tray-type container, per se.


CLS 206/713
TXT Bar or tapelike carrier for plural components:

    A container under subclass 701 comprising an elongated, narrow rod or strip
    having means for retaining multiple components.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, for similar structure including contacts for
    electrically contacting with a lead or terminal of the component, whereby
    either (a) the electrical contact is intended to operate the component, or
    (b) the housing or holder is intended to remain with the component when the
    component is placed in an electrical device.


CLS 206/714
TXT Component retaining pockets:

    A container under subclass 713 including recesses formed therein for
    holding components.


CLS 206/715
TXT Leads retained between layers:

    A container under subclass 713 wherein the strip includes juxtaposed
    elongated sheets or sheet portions and wherein elongated electrical
    contacts of the components are sandwiched between the sheets.


CLS 206/716
TXT Component retaining apertures:

    A container under subclass 713 including holes for containing the component
    or a portion thereof.


CLS 206/717
TXT Plural components integrally formed with bar or tapelike carrier:

    A container under subclass 713 wherein the bar or tapelike carrier is
    formed in one piece and connected with plural components, in which the
    connections are intended to be severed before use or placement of a
    component into an electrical device.


CLS 206/718
TXT For aligned, contiguous components:

    A container under subclass 701 for plural abutting components arranged end
    to end or side to side.


CLS 206/719
TXT Including electrical field, magnetic field, or static electricity shielding:

    A container under subclass 701 including means for preventing damage to the
    component from (a) the effects of an electrically charged region of space,
    (b) the effects of a magnetically influenced region of space, or (c) the
    effects of the accumulation of electric charge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    709,    for a container for a circuit board including static electricity
    shielding means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 212+ for
    (a) an electrical component claimed in combination with static electricity
    dissipation means, (b) static electricity dissipation means particularly
    configured to interact with an electrical component, or (c) static
    electricity shielding means which is used to maintain a charge in a
    component.


CLS 206/720
TXT Bag:

    A container under subclass 719 comprising a pouchlike container made of
    shielding material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    383,    Flexible Bags, for bag structure in general.


CLS 206/721
TXT Box formed from foldable sheet material:

    A container under subclass 719 comprising shielding material folded to
    erect the container and wherein the container has a bottom portion for
    supporting content, peripheral wall structure surrounding the content, and
    an access opening for the insertion or removal of content.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, for box structure in
    general.


CLS 206/722
TXT Including component positioning means:

    A container under subclass 701 including means, in addition to the mere
    containment by the container, for restricting the position or orientation
    of the component by the container.


CLS 206/723
TXT In closed box:

    A container under subclass 722 having a bottom portion for supporting
    content, peripheral wall structure surrounding the content, an access
    opening for the insertion or removal of content and a closure for the
    access opening and wherein the component positioning means are within the
    container.


CLS 206/724
TXT Frame for containing single component:

    A container under subclass 722 comprising a peripheral structure which
    completely encompasses the perimeter of a single component about only one
    axis, such that the container is open at opposite ends of said axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, for similar structure including electrical
    conducting means for electrically contacting with a lead or terminal of the
    component.


CLS 206/725
TXT Pockets for plural articles:

    A container under subclass 722 including more than one hollow indentation
    or niche in the container wall structure, each for holding an article in
    position.


CLS 206/726
TXT Including lead or terminal retainer:

    A container under subclass 722 wherein the positioning means includes means
    to retain a contact element of the component in fixed position (e.g., a
    groove or aperture in which a lead wire is disposed, or a wall which lead
    wires straddle).


    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 149+ for a cover which protects
    the only the leads of an electrical component.


CLS 206/727
TXT Lead sandwiched between panels:

    A container under subclass 726 including juxtaposed sheets or sheet
    portions and wherein elongated electrical contacts of the component are
    retained between the sheets.


CLS 206/728
TXT Groove or aperture for containing lead:

    A container under subclass 726 wherein the positioning means includes  (a)
    a channel or (b) an opening for retaining the lead.


CLS 206/730
TXT STOCK AND SAMPLE:

    A container under the class definition including a first compartment for
    holding a relatively large number or amount of similar content and
    including a second compartment for holding a relatively smaller number or
    amount of the same kind of content.

     SEARCH CLASS:

     312,   Supports: Cabinet Structure, subclasses 118+ for a cabinet of the
    show case type having stock and sample compartments.


CLS 206/731
TXT Wall portion movable to expose sample only:

    A container under subclass 730 wherein a part of the outer structure of the
    container is relocated to reveal only the sample.


CLS 206/732
TXT Sample attached to stock closure:

    A container under the subclass 730 including a cover for opening of the
    container, and wherein the sample is connected to the cover.


CLS 206/733
TXT Sample held in aperture:

    A container under the subclass 730 including a hole for receiving the
    sample.


CLS 206/734
TXT Sample held in recess:

    A container under the subclass 730 including a cavity for receiving the
    sample.


CLS 206/735
TXT Means to elevate sample above stock:

    A container under the subclass 730 including structure to move the sample
    upwardly from the stock.


CLS 206/736
TXT CONVERTIBLE TO OR FROM DISPLAY CONFIGURATION (E.G., FROM OR TO  SHIPPING
    CONFIGURATION):

    A container under the class definition which includes structure to (a)
    modify it from a shipping or storage mode to a mode for exhibiting the
    container or its content, or (b) modify it from an exhibiting mode to a
    mode for shipping or storing the content.

     (1)    Note. A cover which is intended to be removed to expose content is
    not proper for this area unless the cover adds to the display beyond mere
    removal or the content is specially displayed or arranged.

    (2)     Note. Content removable to provide an individual self-supporting
    display is proper for this area.  A removable side wall intended to expose
    the content for display also is proper.

    (3)     Note. Appropriate other subclasses may be searched for
    nonconvertible display features.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6.1,    for a jewelry container.

    216+,   for a nondisplay convertible container.

    278+,   for a nonconvertible display container for apparel.

    457+,   for a simulated or ornamental container.

    459.1,  for a container with an indicator.

    459.5,  for a container with indicia.

    460     through 495, for a card type container which may have a display
    feature, which does not include a convertible characteristic required for
    these subclasses.


    525+,   for a container with article content which may include a display
    feature.

    557+,   for a tray-type "display" container which does not include a
    convertible.

    775+,   for a container having positioning means and a window
    characteristic.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 312+ for a box having
    label thereon.

    211,    Supports: Racks, for a rack intended for use as a display device.


    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses 9, 10, 11, 58, and 63 for a wooden
    display box or a display closure.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 602, 662, and 377 for a container of that
    class type including a transparent portion.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclass 71 for a
    display envelope, subclass 102.5 for a paperboard box including a fixed
    upwardly extending display card, and 125.015 for a paperboard box including
    a transparent closure.


    312,    Supports: Cabinet Structure, subclasses 114+ for a display cabinet
    of the show case type.


CLS 206/737
TXT Tilting vertical wall providing flared volume for viewing card or sheet:

    A container under subclass 736, including an upright outer structural
    portion that is pivotable from the upright orientation to an inclined
    orientation for changing the configuration of the interior of the container
    to one which gradually widens from bottom to top, and which is intended for
    planar shaped content.


CLS 206/738
TXT Having removal facilitating means:

    A container under subclass 736 including structure to assist with the
    withdrawal of the content.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for a similar device
    including means to release, eject or control the discharge of articles from
    the display receptacle. See sections I and II of the class definition of
    Class 221 for identification of features which are considered to establish
    a structure as a dispensing structure for Class 221 as distinguished from
    mere removal facilitating structure for this subclass.

    222,    Dispensing, for a fluent material dispenser in general.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 125.04 and
    125.42 for a dispensing paperboard box.

    312,    Supports: Cabinet Structure, subclasses 35+ for a cabinet for
    containing articles in a magazine and having removal facilitating structure
    associated therewith.


CLS 206/739
TXT Plural contents manipulated for removal:

    A container under subclass 738 wherein the content is repositioned to
    facilitate selectively withdrawing some of the content from the container.


CLS 206/740
TXT Terraced or stepped shelves:

    A container under subclass 736 including upper and lower supports for the
    content, wherein a lower support is offset horizontally from an upper
    support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 92+ for terraced
    plural related surfaces.

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclasses 16+ for a sample case
    having terraced trays.

    211,    Supports: Racks, subclasses 128+ for a rack including terraced
    trays.


CLS 206/741
TXT Inclination of container creates stepped shelves:

    A container under subclass 740 intended to be repositioned to change the
    angle of orientation of the shelves or trays with respect to the horizontal
    by less than ninety degrees in order to form the terraced or stepped
    shelves.


CLS 206/742
TXT Cover is attached or includes stepped shelf:

    A container under subclass 740 including a closure, wherein a portion of
    the closure contributes to the formation of a terraced or stepped shelf.


CLS 206/743
TXT Including movable linked shelves:

    A container under subclass 740 wherein the terraced or stepped shelves are
    adapted to be moved with respect to each other while remaining connected.


CLS 206/744
TXT Including exposable shelves:

    A container under subclass 740 wherein a portion thereof is movable so as
    to reveal the terraced or stepped shelves.


CLS 206/745
TXT Sectional or multiple movable compartment type:

    A container under subclass 736 including either (a) a plurality of
    substantially complete content holding sections that are pivotally or
    otherwise interconnected so as to convert from a generally compact
    arrangement to an expanded arrangement or (b) including a single content
    area having separable wall portions so that sections of the container
    formed thereby may be separated from each other or pivoted about each other
    to form a multiple distinct content areas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    740+,   for a display container having terraced or stepped shelves or
    trays.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 4.01+ for a sectional container and
    subclasses 500+ for a compartmented container.

    312,    Supports: Cabinet Structure, for a cabinet having similar structure.


CLS 206/746
TXT Having rupturable wall portion:

    A container under subclass 745 wherein the sections are integrally
    connected by a scored or weakened outer part to permit separation of the
    sections at the weakened part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 25 for a progressively destroyed
    cellular magazine type supply source dispensing device. These devices, in
    some cases, have the construction provided for in this subclass, combined
    therewith means to assist the discharge of the magazine from a holding
    receptacle or of the articles from the magazine.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 120.011 and
    101+ for a paperboard box having similar structure.


CLS 206/747
TXT Sections pivotally movable:

    A container under subclass 745 including content holding portions that are
    interconnected by a hinge or fold.


CLS 206/748
TXT Three or more sections:

    A container under subclass 747 including more than two content holding
    portions interconnected by hinges or folds.


CLS 206/749
TXT Pivoted about horizontal axis:

    A container under subclass 747 wherein the line of the hinge or fold is
    oriented generally normal to vertical.


CLS 206/750
TXT Folded blank:

    A container under subclass 749 comprising material that is creased to form
    the container.


CLS 206/751
TXT Cover-operated positioning means:

    A container under subclass 736 including a closure for opening the
    container and structure for locating the content, wherein (a) the locating
    structure is moved with the closure in its opening movement or (b) the
    content is tilted or is projected by the movement of closure into the open
    position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45.2+,  for a device wherein the receptacle itself may be moved to display
    position by opening the cover.

    759+,   for noncover type pivotable content positioning means

    SEARCH CLASS:

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclass 17 for a sample case
    having link supported trays.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 521+ for a container of that class type
    including a compartmented closure.

    312,    Supports: Cabinet Structure, subclass 269, for a cabinet having
    continuously level compartments, shelves or other article supports
    revolvable about a horizontal axis and interconnected with rigid housing
    wall pivoted on fixed axis and subclasses 272.5, 274, and 275+ for cabinet
    components interconnected with a rigid housing wall pivoted on fixed axis
    so that movement of one causes constrained relative motion of the other.


CLS 206/752
TXT Positioning means on cover:

    A container under subclass 751 wherein the closure comprises a content
    compartment or a means for attaching the closure to the content.


CLS 206/753
TXT Positioning means enlargable:

    A container under subclass 752 wherein the positioning means is an
    expandable closure compartment.


CLS 206/754
TXT Cover opening forces movement of positioning means:

    A container under subclass 751 (a) wherein the closure is interconnected to
    a maneuverable content supporting or retaining means or (b) wherein a
    portion of the closure abuts and pushes the content supporting or retaining
    means into a different location or orientation.


CLS 206/755
TXT Through pivotal link (e.g.,  hinge or fold line):

    A container under subclass 754 including an interconnection between the
    closure and the positioning means that allows the positioning means to
    change its orientation with respect to the closure.


CLS 206/756
TXT Having content positioning means:

    A container under subclass 736 including structure for locating the content
    with regard to remainder of the container.

    (1)     Note. Mere partitions, per se, without additional positioning
    structure are not considered proper for this area.


CLS 206/757
TXT Located on or formed by outwardly swingable sidewall:

    A container under subclass 756 including an outer upright portion of the
    container that is hinged or folded with respect to the remainder of the
    container for pivoting exteriorly thereof and that defines the positioning
    means.


CLS 206/758
TXT Slidable:

    A container under subclass 756 wherein the positioning means reciprocates
    with respect to the remainder of the container.


CLS 206/759
TXT Pivotally mounted:

    A container under subclass 756 wherein the positioning means is connected
    to the remainder of the container by a fold or hinge.


CLS 206/760
TXT At material fold:

    A container under subclass 759 wherein the pivoting structure comprises a
    crease in  material.


CLS 206/761
TXT Follower or adjustable bottom:

    A container under subclass 756 wherein the positioning means is capable of
    being placed in selective, vertical levels within the container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclass 64 for a follower for a wooden box and
    subclass 86  for a follower for a wooden barrel.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 56+, 226+, and 279+ for article
    dispensing combinations including follower structure.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 386+ for a dispensing container with a
    follower.


    312,    Supports: Cabinet Structure, subclasses 61 and 71 for an article
    containing magazine type cabinet having article removal facilitating means
    associated therewith and including follower structure.


CLS 206/762
TXT Movable to inclined support position:

    A container under subclass 756 wherein the positioning means is relocatable
    to a tilted orientation.


CLS 206/763
TXT Aperture:

    A container under subclass 756 wherein the positioning means is an orifice
    intended for receiving the content therethrough.


CLS 206/764
TXT Having separate stand:

    A container under subclass 756 including an easel or receptacle support
    that is or can become independent of the remainder of the container.


CLS 206/765
TXT Supporting bed or platform on receptacle
    bottom:

    A container under subclass 756 wherein the positioning means is spaced
    above the lowest portion of the container and is intended to support the
    weight of the content.


CLS 206/766
TXT Pivotable wall providing side display:

    A container under subclass 736 including an upright outer structure of the
    container that is hinged or folded to the remainder of the container for
    the purpose of swinging outwardly thereof in order to reveal the content.


CLS 206/767
TXT Having movable display card:

    A container under subclass 736 including a panel which is relocated in
    order to exhibit indicia.


CLS 206/768
TXT Exposable pop-up display card:

    A container under subclass 767 wherein the container structure is moved to
    reveal the display card which is then moveable to a new position.


CLS 206/769
TXT Having window or transparent wrapper:

    A container or package under subclass 736 including (a) an aperture within
    a wall or (b) a see-through material constructed to enable inspection of
    the content therethrough.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 662+ for a receptacle having a transparent
    wall portion.


CLS 206/770
TXT Transparent wrapper:

    A container under subclass 769 including an inner supporting means, which
    may be the content or a substantially rigid box, wherein the sheet of
    see-through material substantially covers all sides of the inner supporting
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 87.01+ for a
    wrapper, per se.


CLS 206/771
TXT Entirely covers a wall:

    A container under subclass 769 wherein the transparent sheet completely
    overlies a facet of the outer shape of the container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    770,    for a transparent wrapper which cover substantially the entire
    package.


CLS 206/772
TXT Exposed by moving panel:

    A container under subclass 769 including a portion which relocates to
    reveal the window or transparent section.


CLS 206/773
TXT Pivoted:

    A container under subclass 772 wherein the moving part is hinged or folded
    with the remainder of the container.


CLS 206/774
TXT Portion moves to expose content:

    A container under subclass 736 wherein a part thereof repositions to reveal
    the articles in the container.


CLS 206/775
TXT HAVING POSITIONING MEANS AND DISPLAY OPENING:

    A container under class definition including (a) a particular structure for
    sustaining the weight of the content or locating the content with regard to
    remainder of the container and (b) an opening through which the content is
    viewed.


CLS 206/776
TXT Transparent window:

    A container under subclass 775 wherein the window comprises a see-through
    material.


CLS 206/777
TXT Across aperture:

    A container under subclass 776 wherein the transparent flexible sheet is
    surrounded on four sides by opaque material which defines an opening.


CLS 206/778
TXT Transparent flexible sheet:

    A container under subclass 776 wherein the transparent window is a flaccid
    material.


CLS 206/779
TXT Article projects from display opening:

    A container under subclass 775 wherein the content extends through the
    window.


CLS 206/780
TXT Opposed holes:

    A container under subclass 779 wherein the positioning means or window
    comprises a first enclosing aperture located above a second enclosing
    aperture.


CLS 206/781
TXT Window common to top wall and side wall:

    A container under subclass 775 including an upper, level panel and an
    adjacent, upright panel connected to the level panel, wherein the window is
    extends into each of the upright and level panels.


CLS 206/782
TXT Plural windows:

    A container under  subclass 775 including more than one window.


CLS 206/783
TXT Window defined by flaps:

    A container under subclass 775 wherein the window bordered by bent tabs.


CLS 206/784
TXT FOLDED BLANK HAVING POSITIONING MEANS THEREIN:

    A container under the class definition including bent sheet material and
    including structure for sustaining the weight of the content or locating
    the content with regard to remainder of the container.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 206/800
TXT Container or holder for gum - i.e., wrapped sticks or chewed material.


CLS 206/802
TXT Sausage casings folded in accordion-like pleats so as to greatly reduce the
    tubular length.


CLS 206/803
TXT Container for, or package of, an article(s) or material(s) disclosed for
    use in accident or accident prevention.


CLS 206/804
TXT Container including structure that can be manipulated to shift content at
    least partially out of the container.


CLS 206/805
TXT Container or retainer for a group of relatively narrow elastic loop-like
    elements.


CLS 206/806
TXT Structure to pendulously support container content.


CLS 206/807
TXT Structure to inhibit or minimize unauthorized removal of container content.


CLS 206/809
TXT Cross form container.


CLS 206/810
TXT Container fasteners of the zipper type.


CLS 206/811
TXT Container structure to keep content free of external moisture.


CLS 206/812
TXT Container or package for a generally moistened sheet of wiping material.


CLS 206/813
TXT Container related tacky means to secure closure or enwrapment.


CLS 206/814
TXT Structure to occupy unused volume in container.


CLS 206/815
TXT Container aperture to allow holding or manipulating by hand digit.


CLS 206/816
TXT Container closure of the articulated panel type.


CLS 206/817
TXT A resilient, or gravity, means bearing against container content.


CLS 206/818
TXT Holder or retainer which utilizes magnetic characteristics.


CLS 206/819
TXT Specialized or unconventional material or compositions used in container or
    retainer structure.


CLS 206/820
TXT Articles linked to each other in concatenated fashion but capable of easy
    separation.


CLS 206/821
TXT Element used between items to allow stable stacking.


CLS 206/822
TXT Unusual configured containers relating to the shape of content.


CLS 206/823
TXT Container for vanity or personal adornment content.


CLS 206/824
TXT Openings (slits, holes, notches, etc.) through wound material, a panel or
    band to facilitate severing of such material.


CLS 206/825
TXT A prestressed content holder which prestresses as content is reduced,
    causes the holder to curl or roll so as to continue to secure the remaining
    content; e.g., plastic sheet between layers of soft drink packages.


CLS 206/828
TXT Container or package for a therapeutic article or material, generally
    intended for ingestion rather than external application.


CLS 206/829
TXT Reduced pressure device generally for container support or content handling.


CLS 206/830
TXT BISCUIT PACKAGE:

    Biscuit dough container, generally cylindrical, and usually designed for
    easy opening.


CLS 206/831
TXT DETACHABLE COUPON:

    A container having a premium-like element removable therefrom.


CLS 206/832
TXT SEMICONDUCTOR WAFER BOAT:

    An open container under the class definition configured to hold a plurality
    of substrates having, or intended to have, a plurality of individual
    micro-electronic circuit components layered thereon, the container intended
    to be used to hold the substrates during a treatment process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    710+,   for a container for a semiconductor wafer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 500+ for a work holder intended to
    hold an electronic component or the stock material of an electronic
    component during a coating or etching process.

    211,    Supports: Racks, for a rack intended to hold a plurality of
    electrical components, particularly subclass 41.

    432,    Heating, for a housing or holder for an electronic component
    intended to hold the component during a heating process, particularly
    subclasses 239 and 253+.


CLS 206/833
TXT Apertured side walls:

    Container under art collection 832 including holes in the side walls
    intended to retain semiconductor wafers.


CLS 208/
TTL MINERAL OILS:  PROCESSES AND  PRODUCTS

CLS 208/
TXT

    1.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    This class includes:

    (1)     Processes for the recovery or treatment of natural occurring
    mineral oil which result in the production of a purified or modified
    mineral oil or of coke.

    (2)     Mineral oil products of the above processes or mixtures thereof
    which include only mineral oil components.

    (3)     Processes for the recovery of oily liquid or tar-like
    hydrocarbonaceous material from a solid mineral source.

    2.      DEFINITION OF TERMS

    Asphalt - A brown to black solid bituminous substance either occurring
    naturally or obtained as a residue from certain petroleums, coal tars,
    lignite tar, etc.

    Coal Tar - Mixture of aromatic hydrocarbons obtained by the distillation of
    bituminous coal.

    Coking - A cracking type conversion in which solid, free carbon or coke as
    a product thereof.  Additional liquid or gaseous hydrocarbon may also be
    obtained.

    Conversion - A treatment of the mineral oil which results in an alteration
    of the hydrocarbon molecule making up the mineral oil.

    Cracking - A conversion treatment in which the hydrocarbons of the mineral
    oil are broken down to a shorter carbon chain length, resulting in
    hydrocarbons having a lower boiling temperature, which may be carried out
    in the presence of a catalyst (catalytic cracking) or in the absence of any
    catalyst (thermal cracking).

    Feed - The mineral oil which is subjected to treating processes provided
    for in this class, which in most cases, is a mixture of hydrocarbons.

    Fractionation - The separation of one portion of the hydrocarbons of a
    mineral oil from another, regardless of the steps employed for affecting
    such separation. The separated fractions usually differ from each other in
    some chemical or physical property as for instance in boiling range (in the
    case of distillation) or solubility in a solvent (as in extraction).

    Mineral Oil - Included in this term are natural petroleum, asphalt, tars,
    pitches and waxes which are primarily mixtures of hydrocarbons.  Included
    also are Fischer-Tropsch crudes, that is, the liquid hydrocarbonaceous
    mixture resulting from the hydrogenation of a carbon oxide, wood tars and
    wood tar oils which are similar to coal tar in that they include an
    unidentified mixture, including hydrocarbons.  Solid carbonaceous materials
    such as coal, lignite, peat, etc., (as distinguished from solid asphalts or
    asphalt bearing shales or sands) are not included.

    Periodic Table - In this class metals and metal compounds may be identified
    as belonging to a certain "Group" distinguished by Roman numerals.  These
    groups are taken from Henry D. Hubbard's "Periodic chart of the Atoms"
    (1956 Ed.). The metals making up the various groups are as follows:

    IA.     Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs and Fr (these metals are also identified as
    "alkali metals").

    IB.     Cu, Ag and Au

    IIA.    Be, Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba and Ra (Mg, Ca, Sr and Ba are also identified as
    "alkaline earth metals")

    IIB.    Zn, Cd and Hg

    III.    Al, Ga, In, Tl, Sc, Y, Rare Earth metals and Actinide series metals



    Rare Earth Metals:  La, Ce, Pr, Nd, Pm, Sm, Eu, Gd, Tb, Dy, Ho, Er, Tm, Yb
    and Lu.

    Actinide Series Metals (atomic numbers 89 and greater) Ac, Th, Pa, U, Np,
    Pu, Am, Cm, Bk, Cf, E, Fm and Mv

    IV.     Ge, Sn, Pb, Ti, Zr and Hf

    V.      As, Sb, Bi, V, Nb and Ta

    VI.     Po, Cr, Mo and W

    VII.    Mn, Tc and Re

    VIII.   Fe, Co, Ni, Ru, Rh, Pd, Os, Ir and Pt. (Ru, Rh, Pd, Os, Ir and Pf
    are also known as "Noble Metals")



    Refining - The removal of impurities or nonhydrocarbon, gums or gum forming
    components from a mineral oil or the conversion of such components to some
    less objectionable form (e.g., sweetening: conversion of mercaptans to
    disulfides).

    Reforming - A chemical conversion operation which results in a change of
    the hydrocarbon molecule such that the product has substantially the same
    boiling range but has its "antiknock" or "octane" rating improved or
    increased.  Various types of reaction are believed to be involved including
    cyclization, hydrogenation, dehydrogenation, alkylation, isomerization and
    dealkylation.  Such reactions, if applied to a mineral oil, are classified
    in the subclass providing for reforming.

    3.      PROCESSES OF TREATING MINERAL OIL

    (1)     Note.  Processes which treat a mineral oil to produce both a
    particular carbon compound classified in Classes 260, 518, 560, 562, or 568
    and a mineral oil classified in Class 208 are classified in Class 208.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 428 for a
    process of cooling solids by mere contact with a gas; that is, quenching,
    per se, of a solid by use of a gas.

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, appropriate subclass, for processes
    of producing a heating or illuminating gas from mineral oil wherein no
    liquid mineral oil is recovered.  Processes which result in the production
    of both a modified mineral oil and a gas are classified in this class (208)
    see also the reference of Class 48 in the definitions of subclass 400,
    below.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 64 quenching, per se, of a solid article by
    use of a liquid.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, for a process in which metal (usually considered a catalyst
    poison) is recovered in elemental form from a hydrocarbonaceous material
    which has come out of the ground.  Where a patent has a Class 75 claim and
    a Class 208 claim, it is classified in Class 75 and cross-referenced in
    this class (208).

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, for processes of separation of mineral
    oil from gases; see the notes in subclass 340 of Class 208 for the line
    between these classes.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 244.1+ for processes of treating mineral oils
    involving the use of wells, especially subclasses 256+ for processes
    involving in situ combination, subclass 266 for a process involving
    treating oil after it has left a producing well and placing a separated
    constituent of the oil into an injection well, subclasses 272.1+ for
    processes using injection and producing wells and heating the formation and
    subclasses 302+ for miscellaneous processes involving heating.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclass, for
    the treatment of mineral oil involving the use of electrical or wave energy
    (other than mere electrical heating).

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclass 767 for processes of separating or purifying mineral
    oil by filtering or liquid settling or decanting.  Purification of mineral
    oil by treating with sorptive agents or an agent which exerts some chemical
    or solvent action is classified in Class 208.  The line between the two
    classes with respect to treatment with a solvent chemical or sorbent
    treating agent is as follows:

    A.      Where the disclosure includes both water and a mineral oil, the
    patent is classified in:

    (1)     Class 210 if all claims are broad as to the liquid treated.

    (2)     Class 210 if any claim is limited to the treatment of water
    (whether or not there are other claims limited to the treatment of other
    liquids).

    (3)     Class 208 if the only claimed species of liquid treated is mineral
    oil.

    B.      Where water is the only disclosed liquid treated the patent will be
    classified in Class 210.

    C.      If mineral oil is the only disclosed liquid treated the patent is
    classified in Class 208.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 319+ for processes of breaking emulsions
    including petroleum emulsions where there is no additional treatment of the
    oil.  Combinations of emulsion breaking and a treatment of the mineral oil
    provided for in Class 208 are classified in Class 208.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, subclass 398.6 for processes of
    oxidizing nonaromatic hydrocarbon mixtures.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, appropriate
    subclass for mining mineral oil and oil bearing earth.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 210+ for purifying or
    separating gaseous mixtures by a chemical reaction, and other appropriate
    subclasses for the recovery of an inorganic compound or nonmetallic element
    from a hydrocarbonaceous material which has come out of the ground.  Where
    a patent has a Class 423 claim, and a Class 208 claim, it is classified in
    Class 423 and cross-referenced to this class (208).

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 281 for
    processes of treating or separating mineral oil including a fermenting
    operation.

    494,    Imperforate Bowl:  Centrifugal Separators, subclass 37 for a
    process for breaking up a mixture of fluids or fluent substances into two
    or more components by centrifuging within a generally solid-walled,
    receptacle-like member.

    518,    Chemistry:  Fischer-Tropsch Processes; or Purification or Recovery
    of Products Thereof, for processes of producing hydrocarbons by the
    hydrogenation of carbon oxides.

    560,    Organic Compounds, subclass 241.1 for processes of oxidizing
    nonaromatic hydrocarbon mixtures.

    562,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 512.2 and 512.4 for processes of
    oxidizing nonaromatic hydrocarbon mixtures.

    568,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 398.8, 469.9, 910.5, and 949-959 for
    processes of oxidizing nonaromatic hydrocarbon mixtures.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, for  hydrocarbon compounds,
    certain compositions containing nonmineral oil hydrocarbons and processes
    for synthesizing or purifying such materials.  See the Class Definition of
    that class, sections II and III for statements of the line between Class
    585 and Class 208.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses wherein mineral oils are treated with hazardous or toxic waste
    or they are the hazardous or toxic waste being destroyed or contained.

    4.      PRODUCTS AND COMPOSITIONS

    (1)     Note.  The products and compositions classified in this class are
    those which consist only of a mineral oil or mixtures of mineral oils.
    Compositions including, in addition to a mineral oil, some nonmineral oil
    component are classified in other composition classes, usually upon the
    basis of the use, property or function of the composition.  Class 508,
    Solid Antifriction Devices, Materials Therefor, Lubricant or Separant
    Compositions for Moving Solid Surfaces,and Miscellaneous Mineral Oil
    Compositions, is the residual class for heavy mineral oil compositions not
    otherwise provided for.

    (2)     Note.  A list of superiority of some composition classes appears in
    the main class definition of Class 252, Compositions (5) Note.  This note
    in Class 252 explains classification of a generic composition with several
    disclosed uses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclasses 300+, for liquid fuel
    compositions containing a nonhydrocarbon.  This Class 44 is the residual
    class for lighter hydrocarbons (e.g., gasoline) with nonhydrocarbon
    additives.  Class 44 is the residual place for coke products (see, e.g.,
    subclass 607) useful as fuel not otherwise provided for.  See also the
    reference to Class 44 in the definition of subclass 400 below.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclasses 270+ for paraffin wax containing plastic or coating
    compositions, and subclasses 273+ for asphalt or bituminous material
    containing coating or plastic compositions.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, for jet or rocket
    fuels which contain a nonmineral oil additive.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, for a
    composition including an oil or mixture of oils of this class (208) and
    some other ingredient and which has a utility provided for in Class 424.
    See particularly Class 424, subclasses 168+ for an emulsion of a mineral
    oil and subclasses 346+ for a phenolic composition.

    508,    Solid Antifriction Devices, Materials Therefor, Lubricant or
    Separant Compositions for Moving Solid Surfaces, and Miscellaneous Mineral
    Oil Compositions, especially subclasses 110+ for mineral oil lubricants
    with nonhydrocarbon or solid polymeric hydrocarbon material added thereto
    and for miscellaneous heavy mineral oil compositions with nonhydrocarbon or
    solid polymeric hydrocarbon material added thereto. See (1) Note.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclasses 2+ for a blend of a
    hydrocarbon with a nonhydrocarbon preservative, etc.; subclasses 1+ for a
    blend of a mineral oil hydrocarbon with a nonmineral oil  hydrocarbon; and
    subclasses 16+ for a nonmineral oil hydrocarbon reaction product mixture.

    5.      APPARATUS

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, for apparatus for gas separation.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, for liquid heaters, including those
    disclosed for merely heating mineral oil.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for a heat exchanger not
    specialized to the mineral oil art.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for
    carrying out processes classifiable in Class 208 and not elsewhere
    classified.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclasses 81+ for distillation apparatus
    excluding that disclosed solely for distilling mineral oil.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 193+ for
    electrolytic apparatus and apparatus for treating materials to cause a
    chemical reaction (other than by mere heating).

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus for separating or purifying a liquid within the scope of the
    definition thereof even though mineral oil is disclosed as the liquid
    treated, including apparatus for treating mineral oil with sorbtive agents,
    but excluding apparatus for refining mineral oil with chemical agents.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 302+ for emulsion breaking apparatus.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for gas
    scrubbing devices (e.g., bubble towers).

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 190+ and 211+ for apparatus for
    treating a material (including mineral oil) with a catalyst.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, appropriate
    subclasses for apparatus for carrying out fermentation.

    494,    Imperforate Bowl:  Centrifugal Separators, appropriate subclasses,
    for apparatus for breaking up a mixture of fluids or fluent substances into
    two or more components by centrifuging within a generally solid-walled
    receptacle-like member.



    6.      MISCELLANEOUS

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate
    subclasses, and particularly subclasses 443+ for miscellaneous methods of
    contacting solids with gases or vapors.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 182.11+, particularly subclasses 189+ for
    chemical agents, per se.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, appropriate subclasses for solids
    transferring methods and apparatus.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, for a catalyst or sorbent which may be used in a process of this
    class (208) and a method of making or regenerating such composition.


CLS 208/1
TXT Mineral oil products and compositions under the class definition which have
    the properties of and simulate natural drying oil in that they dry or
    harden in contact with the air and processes of preparing the same.

    (1)     Note.  The mineral oil products classified herein must be claimed
    or disclosed as having drying properties.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14+,    for nondrying mineral oil products and admixtures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses and
    particularly subclass 285 for coating or plastic compositions comprising a
    mineral oil which has drying properties and nonmineral oil components.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, for compositions comprising a
    mineral oil having drying properties and a synthetic resin or natural
    rubber.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 429 and 507+, for the synthesis of nonmineral drying
    oil; and subclass 945 for a collection of patents which disclose products
    having utility as drying oil.


CLS 208/2
TXT Mineral oil products and compositions under the class definition which are
    phenolic in character or have properties of killing, repelling or
    preventing the growth of insects, fungi or bacteria, and the processes of
    preparation thereof.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also includes wood tars, wood tar oils, and
    derivatives thereof which are phenolic or exhibit toxic properties similar
    to coal tar, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14+,    for mineral oil products and admixtures of mineral oils.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, appropriate subclasses, for
    a process of carbonizing wood and recovering wood tar oil.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, for a toxic oil
    of this class (208) with some other ingredient, e.g., active, carrier,
    diluent, etc., and see especially subclasses 168+ for a mineral oil
    emulsion and subclasses 346+ for a phenolic composition.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the destruction or containment of phenolic or toxic oil
    waste.


CLS 208/3
TXT Processes of preparation of a mineral oil under the class definition which
    include an oxidizing treatment to convert a part of the hydrocarbons into
    oxygenated hydrocarbons resulting in the production of a mixture thereof
    with hydrocarbons, and the products of such processes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    554,    Organic Compounds, subclass 132 and indented subclasses for
    processes of oxidizing nonaromatic paraffin mixtures to form mixtures of
    organic compounds.

    560,    Organic Compounds, subclass 241.1 for process of oxidizing
    nonaromatic paraffin mixtures to form mixtures of organic compounds.

    562,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 512.2 and 512.4 for processes of
    oxidizing nonaromatic paraffin mixtures to form mixtures of organic
    compounds.

    568,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 398.8, 469.9, 910.5, and 949-959 for
    processes of oxidizing nonaromatic paraffin mixtures to form mixtures of
    organic compounds.


CLS 208/4
TXT Processes under subclass 3 for producing asphalts, tars or pitches by
    oxidation of mineral oils and products of such processes.


CLS 208/5
TXT Processes under subclass 4 wherein the oxidation is carried out in the
    presence of a solid contact material, e.g., a catalyst.


CLS 208/6
TXT Processes under subclass 4 wherein the material subjected to the oxidizing
    treatment is itself an asphalt, tar or pitch.

    (1)     Note.  The processes classified herein involve the modification of
    the general properties of the asphalt, pitch or tar, e.g., raise the
    melting point thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128     and 130, for processes of converting mineral oils in the presence
    of air or steam respectively involving no oxidation of the oil.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses, and
    particularly subclasses 273.1+ for coating or plastic compositions
    containing oxidized asphalts, tars or pitches and a nonmineral oil additive.


CLS 208/7
TXT Processes under subclass 3 which include a mineral oil cracking step in
    addition to the oxidation treatment.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example, processes of cracking
    mineral oils wherein air or oxidizing gas is introduced into the cracking
    zone during cracking to exercise some oxidizing of the mineral oil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106+,   for mineral oil cracking processes, per se, particularly subclasses
    128+ for cracking mineral oil in the presence of nonreactive gases or
    vapors.  See the definition to subclass 106 for the definition and scope of
    the term "cracking".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    554,    Organic Compounds, subclass 132 and indented subclasses for the
    oxidation of petroleum or other nonaromatic hydrocarbon mixtures to obtain
    definite organic compounds of mixtures thereof.  See (2) Note to the
    definition of subclass 451 for the line.


CLS 208/12
TXT Processes under the class definition of imparting a desired color property
    to mineral oils and products of such processes.

    (1)     Note.  The processes classified herein involve a treatment of the
    oil to give the desired color property which is more than the mere addition
    of a color body thereto.  However, some of the patents classified herein
    recite the treatment of the oil with another mineral oil which may impart
    bloom or fluorescence to the oil being treated.  Treatments with nonmineral
    oil color bodies (pigments or dyes) are classified in the appropriate
    composition class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclass for process and 521 compositions for dyeing
    oils or waxes.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclass 272 for wax with a
    nonmineral oil dye or pigment and subclasses 280-284 for bituminous
    compositions containing nonmineral oil dye or pigment.


CLS 208/13
TXT Processes under the class definition which include the treatment of a
    sludge obtained in the refining of mineral oils to recover additional
    mineral oil values therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example patents dealing with the
    treatment of the sludges obtained as a result of the sulfuric acid or
    aluminum chloride refining of mineral oils.

    (2)     Note.  When the recovery of the inorganic compound (e.g., sulfuric
    acid) is specifically claimed the patent will be classified in Classes 23,
    Chemistry:  Physical Processes and 423, Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds,
    whether or not mineral oil is also recovered.  Processes wherein an organic
    compound such as an organic sulfonic acid or sulfonate is recovered in
    addition to a mineral oil are classified in this subclass and cross
    referenced to Class 260, Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, when desirable.
    Class 260 provides for such organic compound recovery processes when no
    mineral oil is recovered.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266+,   for the sulfuric acid refining of mineral oils.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 522+ for the
    manufacture of sulfuric acid by a chemical reaction.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclasses 240+ for the
    production of a hydrocarbon mixture from nonmineral oil "waste" products.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the destruction of hazardous or toxic waste refining sludge.


CLS 208/14
TXT Products and compositions under the class definition which include only
    mineral oils or mixtures of two or more mineral oils or mineral oil
    fractions, and processes of preparation of such mixtures which include only
    a mixing or blending of the mineral oils with each other.

    (1)     Note.  Mixtures of mineral oils with a nonmineral oil material are
    not included in this or indented subclasses but are classified elsewhere,
    usually on the basis of the use, property or function of the composition.
    See section 4, PRODUCTS AND COMPOSITIONS, in the class definition of this
    class (208).

    (2)     Note.  Processes of preparation of mineral oil compositions which
    involve a chemical conversion of the hydrocarbon, a refining treatment or
    fractionation step, whether or not combined with a mixing or blending step,
    are classified in the subclass providing for the particular treatments
    involved.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for mineral oil products and compositions which exhibit drying
    properties.

    3+,     for products of oxidation of mineral oils.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, appropriate subclasses, especially
    subclasses 591 and 607  for a fuel product containing a carbonized
    component and subclass 599 for a method of making a consolidated fuel
    product which includes carbonizing using a specified condition or technique.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 445+ for elemental
    carbon.

    508,    Solid Antifriction Devices, Materials Therefor, Lubricant or
    Separant Compositions for Moving Solid Surfaces, and Miscellaneous Mineral
    Oil Compositions, for mineral oil lubricants with nonhydrocarbon or solid
    polymeric hydrocarbon material added thereto and for miscellaneous heavy
    mineral oil compositions with nonhydrocarbon or solid polymeric hydrocarbon
    material added thereto. See (1) Note.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclasses 1+ for other
    hydrocarbon compositions.


CLS 208/15
TXT Products and compositions under subclass 14 which are claimed or disclosed
    for use as fuels.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the patents in this subclass are directed to fuels
    for supplying heat or to be used in Diesel engines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, appropriate subclasses, for fuel
    compositions which contain nonhydrocarbon additive.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, for fuels disclosed
    for use in jet or rocket engines and which comprise a mineral oil and a
    nonmineral oil material.  A mixture of mineral oils only which is a jet
    fuel is still classified in this class (208).

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclasses 1+, especially
    subclass 14 for a fuel comprising a mineral oil component with a nonmineral
    oil hydrocarbon component.  Those processes of preparing fuel oils which
    involve a chemical conversion of the mineral oil and subsequent treatment
    of a known hydrocarbon component, separated therefrom or formed in the
    process, which may be reblended with the mineral oil components are
    classified in this class (208) in the subclass providing therefor (see (2)
    Note to the definition of subclass 14).


CLS 208/16
TXT Products and compositions under subclass 15 which are claimed disclosed for
    use as fuels for internal combustion engines and which generally have a
    boiling range of below 400 to 425o.


CLS 208/17
TXT Products and compositions under subclass 16 which are blends or mixtures of
    two or more mineral oils or mineral oil fraction and methods of mixing or
    blending them.

    (1)     Note.  Products classified herein may be a blend or mixture of two
    or more gasoline fractions or a mixture of a gasoline with another mineral
    oil fraction (not a gasoline).  Providing the product has a boiling range
    within the limits set out in the definition of subclass 16.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclasses 300+ for fuel oil
    compositions containing nonhydrocarbon additives.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclasses 1+, especially
    subclass 14 for a composition comprising gasoline and a definite
    hydrocarbon which is not a mineral oil.


CLS 208/18
TXT Products and compositions under subclass 14 which are claimed or disclosed
    for use as lubricants between relatively moving surfaces, and which are
    liquid at normal atmospheric temperatures (lubricating oils).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20+,    for solid lubricants including paraffin wax.


CLS 208/19
TXT Products and compositions under subclass 18 which are blends or mixtures of
    two or more mineral oils or mineral oil fractions and methods of mixing
    such oils.

    (1)     Note.  Mixtures or blends classified in this subclass may include a
    wax or asphaltic component if the mixture is liquid at normal atmospheric
    temperatures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    508,    Solid Antifriction Devices, Materials Therefor, Lubricant or
    Separant Compositions for Moving Solid Surfaces, and Miscellaneous Mineral
    Oil Compositions, particularly subclasses 110+ for lubricants containing
    nonhydrocarbon or solid polymeric hydrocarbon additives. Subclass 110+ is
    the residual place for compositions of heavy mineral oils admixed with
    nonhydrocarbon or solid polymeric hydrocarbon ingredients not disclosed as
    lubricants nor provided for elsewhere.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclasses 1+ for a lubricating
    composition containing a definite hydrocarbon, in particular, subclasses 9
    and 13 for a lubricant blended from a mineral oil fraction and a nonmineral
    oil hydrocarbon.


CLS 208/20
TXT Products and compositions under subclass 14 which include paraffin wax.

    (1)     Note.  Paraffin wax consists of a colorless, odorless, tasteless
    mixture of solid hydrocarbons of the paraffin series and is slightly greasy
    to the touch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24+,    for processes of treating, refining or recovering paraffin wax.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclass 9 for an all
    hydrocarbon composition containing mineral wax plus a nonmineral oil
    hydrocarbon or a synthetically produced wax; and subclass 946 for a
    collection of patents drawn to the production of a greasy or waxy
    nonresinous hydrocarbon polymer.


CLS 208/21
TXT Products and compositions under subclass 20 which are blends or mixtures of
    petroleum waxes or of a wax and a mineral oil, and methods of mixing such
    ingredients.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, particularly subclasses 270+ for
    compositions containing mixtures of petroleum waxes and nonmineral oil
    material.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, particularly Class 524,
    subclasses 487+ and 848 for mixtures of petroleum waxes with synthetic
    resins or natural rubbers.


CLS 208/22
TXT Products and compositions under subclass 14 which include asphalts, tars,
    pitches or resins derived from petroleum, coal tar, or petroleum tar
    sources, or from solid natural sources such as asphaltic rocks or
    bituminous sands.

    (1)     Note.  Asphalts, tars, pitches and resins are relatively high
    boiling, viscous or solid dark colored fractions or residues which may
    result from petroleum distillation or treatment or which may be natural
    occurring.  Resins classified herein are those derived from mineral oils,
    such as asphalts by solvent extraction or which are residues of mineral oil
    treating processes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4+,     for the production of asphalt, tar or pitch by oxidation of a
    mineral oil material.

    8+,     for processes of recovering or extracting asphalts from solid
    natural sources.

    39+,    for processes of preparing, recovering or treating asphalts, tars,
    pitches or resins.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, subclasses 2.01 and particularly
    Class 526 thereunder and, subclass 290 for synthetic resins formed from an
    unsaturated petroleum hydrocarbon fraction.


CLS 208/23
TXT Products and compositions under subclass 22 which are mixtures of a natural
    asphalt, petroleum asphalt, tar, pitch, or resin with each other or with
    some other mineral oil, and methods of mixing such ingredients.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, particularly subclasses 273.1+
    for compositions containing mixtures of asphalt, tar, pitch or petroleum
    resin and a nonmineral oil material.


CLS 208/24
TXT Processes under the class definition for the treatment, preparation,
    separation or purification of paraffin waxes wherein the product retain its
    identity as a wax.

    (1)     Note.  Paraffin waxes are the colorless mixtures of solid
    hydrocarbons of the paraffin series.  Petrolatum which is composed of a
    mixture of heavy residual oils and paraffin wax is considered a paraffin
    wax.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46+,    for the conversion of paraffin wax to another mineral oil nonwax
    product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 14.5 for apparatus for
    separating paraffin wax from a nonwaxy mineral oil.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclass for
    apparatus for purifying paraffin waxes by filtration, decantation or
    dialysis, not combined with a treatment of the wax provided for in this
    class (208).

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for
    treating paraffin waxes with chemicals.


CLS 208/25
TXT Processes under subclass 24 wherein a urea is employed as a treating agent.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are those processes in which urea is used to
    separate paraffin wax from wax containing mixtures by forming an adduct
    with the wax which then is separated from the other material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    564,    Organic Compounds, subclass 1.5 for adducts of ureas and an organic
    compound and processes for their preparation as well as processes of
    separating or purifying organic compounds by forming adducts thereof with
    ureas.


CLS 208/26
TXT Processes under subclass 24 including treatment with a solid contact
    material, e.g., a catalyst or an adsorbent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177+,   and particularly subclasses 299+ for refining of mineral oils other
    than waxes by contact with solid contact materials.


CLS 208/27
TXT Processes under subclass 24 wherein the paraffin wax is treated with a
    material which exerts a chemical reaction on the wax or component
    associated therewith.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are processes of refining paraffin
    waxes and/or modifying their chemical and physical properties, by treatment
    with chemicals, excluding processes of mere solvent extraction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for processes of oxidizing of paraffin waxes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    554,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 124+ and 175+ for similar treatments
    of vegetable waxes.

    570,    Organic Compounds, for processes of halogenating paraffin wax.


CLS 208/28
TXT Processes under subclass 24 for the separation of paraffin wax from another
    mineral oil associated therewith.

    (1)     Note.  The separation may be by mechanical means or by the addition
    of solvents or other materials to the mixture and the oil may be recovered
    separately.

    (2)     Note.  Processes for the removal of paraffin wax from a liquid
    mineral oil is generally known as "dewaxing" (of the mineral oil) and the
    separation of the residual oil associated with a solid paraffin wax is
    generally known as "deoiling".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclasses, for refrigerating processes
    and apparatus.

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses for presses not provided for
    elsewhere, particularly subclasses 104+ for presses having a drain duct or
    channel for liquid expressed from the material pressed.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 14.5 for dewaxing apparatus.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 175+, 737, 766, and 774+ for liquid separating
    processes and apparatus involving the use of heaters or coolers.

    494,    Imperforate Bowl:  Centrifugal Separators, appropriate subclasses,
    for a separator of that class, as explained in the references thereto
    appearing in Sections 3 and 5 of the definition of this class (208).


CLS 208/29
TXT Processes under subclass 28 wherein the oil-paraffin separation involves
    the formation of an emulsion or dispersion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 303 for other processes of separating two or
    more materials differing either chemically or physically which involve
    formation or resolution of colloid systems.


CLS 208/30
TXT Processes under subclass 28 for the separation of residual oil from
    paraffin wax.

    (1)     Note.  Treatments included in this and indented subclasses are
    those in which the material treated is primarily paraffin wax which
    includes a relatively small amount of oil, usually occluded or dissolved
    therein, and the treatments are for the purpose of purifying the paraffin
    wax by the removal of this residual oil.

    (2)     Note.  Processes of separating paraffin wax from a mineral oil
    (dewaxing) which include a broadly recited step of washing the wax to
    remove residual oil are classified on the basis of the dewaxing operation.


CLS 208/31
TXT Processes under subclass 30 wherein the separation is facilitated by the
    use of a nonreactive material which exerts a solvent action upon some
    component of the mixture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33+,    for processes of dewaxing mineral oils by use of solvents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclass, for
    processes and apparatus for separating waxes from mineral oils by filtering.


CLS 208/32
TXT Processes under subclass 30 wherein paraffin wax containing residual oil is
    cooled and then slowly heated to release the lower melting point oils and
    other components.


CLS 208/33
TXT Processes under subclass 28 wherein paraffin wax is separated or recovered
    by the use of a nonreactive material which exerts a solvent action upon
    some component of the mixture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for deoiling processes wherein inert solvents are used.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 14.5 for dewaxing apparatus and
    subclass 14.52 for other solvent extraction apparatus disclosed for use on
    mineral oils.


CLS 208/34
TXT Processes under subclass 33 combined with a step of separating asphalt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for solvent treatment of mineral oils to recover the asphalt
    therefrom as a product.

    309,    for treatments of mineral oils to remove asphalt therefrom which is
    regarded as an undesirable component thereof and no steps to recover or use
    the asphalt are included.


CLS 208/35
TXT Processes under subclass 33 wherein the material is cooled or chilled by
    the evaporation of the solvent usually causing a precipitation of the
    separated paraffin wax.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, solvent dewaxing
    processes wherein the normally gaseous solvents which are used in liquid
    form are vaporized thereby causing a reduction in temperature and
    precipitation of paraffin wax.


CLS 208/36
TXT Processes under subclass 33 combined with a solvent extraction of mineral
    oil which extraction does not result in a separation of paraffin wax from
    the oil.

    (1)     Note.  The nondewaxing extraction may be prior to or subsequent to
    the wax separation by means of a solvent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    311+,   for solvent extraction of mineral oil to separate into a plurality
    of mineral oil fractions.


CLS 208/37
TXT Processes under subclass 28 including a step of lowering the temperature of
    the material treated, usually by refrigeration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33+,    for processes of separating wax from a mineral oil by means of a
    solvent which include a chilling step.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, particularly subclasses 123+ for processes and
    apparatus for cooling or chilling paraffin wax-mineral oil mixtures by
    refrigeration, even though combined with a separation of solidified
    constituents (wax).  Such processes combined with other treatments of the
    mixture or separated wax or oil, for example, solvent extraction, or
    distillation are classified in this class (208).

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 175+, 737, 766, and
    774+ for processes and apparatus for liquid separation combined with
    heating or cooling there provided for.


CLS 208/38
TXT Processes under subclass 37 including the separation of wax by use of a
    filtering medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses for
    liquid filtering, per se.


CLS 208/39
TXT Processes under the class definition for preparing, separating, recovering
    or treating asphalts, tars, pitches and resins of mineral origin wherein
    the asphalt tar, resin, etc., is recovered as a product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4+,     for oxidation of mineral oils to form asphalts as well as the
    oxidation of asphalts, tars, pitches, or resins, per se.

    8+,     for processes of obtaining asphalts, tars, pitches, etc., from
    solid natural sources such as coal or bituminous sands or shales; the
    recovery of such materials from other, nonsolid natural sources is included
    herein (subclasses 39+).

    34,     for the separation of asphalt from an oil in combination with the
    separation of paraffin wax from another mineral oil.

    309,    for treatments of mineral oils to remove asphalt therefrom which is
    regarded as an undesirable component thereof and no steps to recover or use
    the asphalt are included.


CLS 208/40
TXT Processes under subclass 39 wherein asphalt, tar, pitch or resin is
    produced by a chemical conversion of another liquid mineral oil.

    (1)     Note.  Many processes classified herein include conversions of
    mineral oils wherein the residues of which are treated to recover asphaltic
    components therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4+,     for oxidation of mineral oils to form asphalts tars or pitches.

    44,     for processes of chemically modifying an already formed asphalt,
    tar, pitch or resin.


CLS 208/41
TXT Processes under subclass 39 wherein asphalt, tar, pitch or resin is
    obtained by a distillation of an oil feed under nonconversion conditions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, appropriate subclasses, for
    a thermolytic distillation process producing tar, pitch or resin.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, appropriate subclass, for apparatus for
    distillation.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, appropriate subclasses, for a
    process of distilling a liquid under nonconversion conditions.


CLS 208/42
TXT Processes under subclass 41 wherein material distilled is a tar.


CLS 208/43
TXT Processes under subclass 42 wherein the tar is contacted by high
    temperature gas during distillation.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, those processes of
    distilling tars wherein hot gases from another part of the process may be
    used to facilitate the distillation process.


CLS 208/44
TXT Processes under subclass 39 including a chemical modification of an already
    formed asphalt, tar, pitch or resin.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the processes classified herein result in a
    modification of the properties such as hardness, ductility, softening
    point, etc., of the asphalt, tar, pitch or resin treated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4+,     for oxidation of asphalts, tars, or pitches.


CLS 208/45
TXT Processes under subclass 39 including a solvent extraction of the asphalt,
    tar, pitch, or resin.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    309,    for treatments of mineral oils to remove asphalt therefrom which is
    regarded as an undesirable component thereof and no steps to recover or use
    the asphalt are included.


CLS 208/46
TXT Processes under the class definition of treating mineral oils which result
    in a chemical alteration of at least some of the hydrocarbon molecules
    thereof forming mineral oils having different properties, or which result
    in the formation of coke.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses include chemical treatments of
    the mineral oil as cracking (forming shorter chain hydrocarbon, light
    fractions), hydrogenation (saturation of double bonds) polymerization
    (forming longer chain hydrocarbon molecules) reforming (isomerization of
    the hydrocarbon molecules, etc.) and decomposing at least a part of the oil
    to coke.

    (2)     Note.  Within this and indented subclasses 47 to 105 include
    combinations there provided for, whether the conversion is claimed broadly
    or specifically.  Conversion processes which involve contacting mineral oil
    with a solid are classified in the subclass providing for the particular
    conversion when the mineral oil to be converted or the solid material
    (catalyst or inerts) is specifically identified.  Such processes in which
    neither the oil to be converted or the solid material contacted therewith
    are specifically identified, even though the conversion be named, e.g.,
    cracking, are included in subclass 146.  Cross references of patents
    classified in other subclasses which disclose or claim any significant
    solids-oil contacting procedure are placed in subclass 146.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for processes of treatment or recovery of paraffin wax including a
    mineral oil conversion.

    40,     for processes of making asphalt, tar, pitch or resins including a
    conversion of mineral oil.

    44,     for processes of chemical modification of asphalt tar, pitch or
    resin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, appropriate subclass for the
    conversion of a mineral oil to a gas; processes which result in the
    production of a mineral oil and a gas are classified in this class (208)
    unless the production of the mineral oil is only incidental to the process.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, appropriate subclasses, for
    a process of thermolytic distillation of solid hydrocarbon containing
    material to produce coke, whether or not volatiles are recovered.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 172 for
    electrostatic or electrical discharge cracking processes, other than those
    in which the chemical conversions are caused by merely thermal effects
    which are in this class (208).

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, especially subclasses 190+ and 211+ for
    apparatus for treating a material (including mineral oil) with a catalyst.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, appropriate subclasses for
    processes of forming definite identifiable carbon compounds from a mineral
    oil; however, the formation of a definite compound as an intermediate in a
    mineral oil treating process, such as a condensation process wherein a
    paraffin wax is chlorinated and subsequently dechlorinated or
    dehydrochlorinated to produce another mineral oil, is classified in this
    class (208).


CLS 208/47
TXT Processes under subclass 46 including some step to prevent or reduce
    corrosion or erosion of the apparatus employed in the process.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example, those processes
    involving introduction of agents that inhibit or prevent corrosion or
    erosion as well as the removal of materials that tend to cause such
    corrosion or erosion during the conversion of the oil, when claimed in
    combination with conversion or conversion operations which are carried out
    in such manner as to avoid erosion or corrosion of the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85+,    for mineral oil conversion processes combined with preliminary
    treatments of the feed which do not reduce corrosion or erosion of the
    apparatus.

    177+,   for processes of removing nonhydrocarbons from mineral oils.

    347+,   and particularly subclass 348 for processes of preventing corrosion
    during a nonconversion distillation of a mineral oil.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclass 14.05 for
    anti-corrosion coating compositions.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclass 7, for a
    distillation process in which a substance is added to inhibit scale
    formation or to prevent corrosion.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 387+ for anticorrosion compositions.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 7+ for process of maintaining an
    environment nondestructive to metal.


CLS 208/48
TXT Processes under subclass 46 which include (1) the prevention of the deposit
    or precipitation of solid carbon on the surfaces of the apparatus employed
    during a conversion of a mineral oil or (2) the removal of such solid
    deposits of carbon in combination with a conversion step.

    (1)     Note.  Processes classified herein are directed to the prevention
    of or removal of carbon deposits from the surfaces of the apparatus, such
    as would, for example, cause clogging of the pipes, and not carbon which
    might deposit on the catalyst or inert solids employed in the process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166+,   particularly subclass 167 for processes involving solid-liquid
    contacting procedures.  If it is disclosed that such procedures prevent
    deposition of carbon on the apparatus, the process is classified in this
    subclass (48) and cross referenced to the appropriate subclass providing
    for the manipulation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 379+ for vaporizers
    having means to clean the same combined therewith.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, for decarbonizing
    procedures, per se.  Note particularly subclasses 8, 20 and 39.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 122 for mineral oil vaporizers
    provided with means for removing carbon from the oil or the vaporizer.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclass 2 for a process of
    thermolytic distillation including the step of cleaning the apparatus or
    removing adhering char product.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 241 for distillation apparatus
    with means to remove carbon.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclass 7 for a distilling
    process in which material is added to the system to inhibit deposit
    formation.


CLS 208/49
TXT Processes under subclass 46 in which a mineral oil is subjected to two or
    more successive distinct chemical conversions.

    (1)     Note.  Processes classified herein include, for example, those in
    which the total product of the first conversion is subjected to a second
    conversion or those in which only a fraction of the product of the first
    conversion is subjected to further conversion.

    (2)     Note.  Processes of treating a mineral oil to plural, successive
    conversions are included herein, even though one of the conversions is a
    reaction, per se, classifiable in Class 585, Chemistry of Hydrocarbon
    Compounds, etc., e.g., conversion of a mineral oil fraction to a definite
    compound (ethylene, butene, etc.), providing there is produced a converted
    mineral oil product.  In such combination processes, including steps
    classifiable in Class 260, are classified in the subclass including the
    corresponding type of process (e.g., polymerization, hydrogenation, etc.).
    Combinations including dehydrogenation, isomerization, cyclization,
    aromatization, alkylation or dealkylation reactions are classified in the
    subclass providing for combinations including reforming.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78+,    for processes including plural distinct conversions applied to
    separate mineral oils or mineral oil fractions which are either (1)
    fractions from a single mineral oil source or (2) are subsequently blended
    or mixed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, (see (2) Note).

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, etc. (see (2) Note).


CLS 208/50
TXT Processes under subclass 49 wherein coke is a product of at least one of
    the conversion stages.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are processes wherein, in at least one of
    the stages, mineral oils are converted to product coke, per se, or along
    with any hydrocarbons produced.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106+,   particularly subclasses 126 and 131 for single stage coking
    processes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, appropriate subclass, for a
    process of producing coke by distilling a nonmineral oil material and see
    subclass 23 for a process of producing coke by distilling a carbonaceous
    mixture including a minor amount of mineral oil.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 449.1+ for
    manufacturing carbon by a chemical reaction.


CLS 208/51
TXT Processes under subclass 50 including also at least one distinct reforming
    operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     62+ and 69+, for other plural conversions including reforming as at
    least one of the stages.


CLS 208/52
TXT Processes under subclass 50 including also at least one stage of catalytic
    cracking and at least one stage of thermal cracking (not coke forming) in
    addition to the coke producing conversion step.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72+,    for processes in which a mineral oil is subjected only to
    successive stages of cracking.


CLS 208/53
TXT Processes under subclass 50 wherein the coke producing conversion occurs
    prior to any other conversion of the mineral oil.


CLS 208/54
TXT Processes under subclass 53 wherein the coke producing conversion is
    followed by a cracking operation in which no product coke is produced.


CLS 208/55
TXT Processes under subclass 54 wherein the cracking operation is promoted by
    the use of a catalytic material.


CLS 208/56
TXT Processes under subclass 49 wherein one component or product of a
    conversion step is subjected to hydrogenation and then returned or recycled
    to the process as a source of hydrogen (a "hydrogen donor").


CLS 208/57
TXT Processes under subclass 49 wherein mineral oil is subjected to
    hydrogenation treatment which saturates at least a part of the unsaturated
    hydrocarbons present prior to any other conversion step, and the
    hydrogenated material is not employed as a source of hydrogen in a
    subsequent conversion step.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for cyclic hydrogen donor diluent processes.


CLS 208/58
TXT Processes under subclass 49 wherein mineral oil is subjected to a cracking
    step in the presence of hydrogen prior to any other conversion step.

    (1)     Note.  For the purpose of classification in this and indented
    subclasses those plural stage conversions which include processes of
    desulfurizing mineral oils in the presence of hydrogen are classified
    herein if the hydrode sulfurization is carried out under conditions which
    cause cracking of the mineral oil.


CLS 208/59
TXT Processes under subclass 58 wherein mineral oil is subjected only to a
    plurality of steps of destructive hydrogenation (cracking in the presence
    of hydrogen).


CLS 208/60
TXT Processes under subclass 58 including also at least one subsequent step of
    reforming.


CLS 208/61
TXT Processes under subclass 58 including also at least one subsequent step of
    thermal or catalytic cracking.


CLS 208/62
TXT Processes under subclass 49 wherein the mineral oil is subjected to a
    reforming reaction prior to any other conversion step.


CLS 208/63
TXT Processes under subclass 62 wherein the mineral oil is subjected only to a
    plurality of steps of reforming.


CLS 208/64
TXT Processes under subclass 63 wherein at least one of the reforming reactions
    takes place in the presence of catalytic material.


CLS 208/65
TXT Processes under subclass 64 wherein the catalyst employed contains a noble
    metal of compound thereof.  (Ru, Rh, Pd, Os, Ir or Pt).


CLS 208/66
TXT Processes under subclass 62 wherein the reforming reaction takes place in
    the presence of catalytic material.


CLS 208/67
TXT Processes under subclass 49 wherein the mineral oil is subjected to a
    thermal of a catalytic cracking reaction prior to any other conversion step.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50+,    for those plural serial stage conversion reactions including at
    least one step of cracking which results in the formation product coke.

    58+,    for processes of subjecting a mineral oil to plural successive
    steps of conversion, the first of which is cracking in the presence of
    added hydrogen.


CLS 208/68
TXT Processes under subclass 67 including at least one subsequent step of
    cracking in the presence of hydrogen (destructive hydrogenation).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58+,    for processes which include plural serial conversions wherein the
    first stage is an hydrocracking reaction.


CLS 208/69
TXT Processes under subclass 67 including at least one subsequent step of
    reforming.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for plural serial stage conversions wherein first stage cracking
    results in the production of product coke is followed by a reforming
    reaction.


CLS 208/70
TXT Processes under subclass 69 wherein the reforming reaction takes place in
    the present of catalytic material.


CLS 208/71
TXT Processes under subclass 67 including at least one subsequent step of
    polymerization.


CLS 208/72
TXT Processes under subclass 67 wherein the mineral oil is subjected only to a
    plurality of stages of cracking reactions, either thermal or catalytic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52      and 53+, for processes wherein the oil is subjected to combinations
    of cracking reactions in series, at least one of which results in the
    production of product coke.


CLS 208/73
TXT Processes under subclass 72 wherein at least one of the cracking steps
    takes place in the presence of catalytic material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52      and 55, for combinations of catalytic cracking operations which
    also include a coking step.


CLS 208/74
TXT Processes under subclass 73 wherein at least two of the cracking steps take
    place in the presence of catalytic material.


CLS 208/75
TXT Processes under subclass 72 wherein the total undivided product from the
    first cracking step is subjected to a subsequent cracking operation.


CLS 208/76
TXT Processes under subclass 72 wherein the product of the initial cracking
    stage includes a plurality of separate fractions having different boiling
    ranges and in which the nonvolatilized or residual fraction is subjected to
    another cracking operation (all stages noncatalytic).


CLS 208/77
TXT Processes under subclass 72 wherein the product of the initial cracking
    stage includes a plurality of separate fractions having different boiling
    ranges, and includes at least one fraction intermediate the lowest boiling
    fraction and the nonvolatilized or residual fraction and at least one of
    said intermediate fractions is subjected to another cracking operation.


CLS 208/78
TXT Processes under subclass 46 wherein a plurality of mineral oils or mineral
    oil fractions are separately subjected to conditions resulting in a
    conversion or alteration of the hydrocarbons.

    (1)     Note. Processes classified in this or subclasses may involve
    subsequent blending of the products of the separate conversions, or the
    separate fractions may be from a single mineral oil source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49+,    for processes wherein a mineral oil is subjected to a plurality of
    successive conversion operations.


CLS 208/79
TXT Processes under subclass 78 wherein at least one of the conversion stages
    is a reforming reaction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62+,    for processes including plural serial stage conversions wherein the
    first stage is a reforming reaction.


CLS 208/80
TXT Processes under subclass 78 wherein a single mineral oil is separated into
    a plurality of fractions at least two of which are subjected to conversion
    conditions.

    (1)     Note.  In many of the processes classified herein, the separately
    converted mineral oil products are blended to form the desired mineral oil
    admixture.


CLS 208/81
TXT Processes under subclass 46 wherein a conversion operation is combined with
    the contaction of the mineral oil to be converted with a vapor product of
    the conversion operation prior to the conversion step (prior to entering
    the conversion zone) and in which the higher boiling components of the
    vapor product are absorbed by the mineral oil, and the more volatile
    products of the mineral oil feed are volatilized and stripped therefrom.

    (1)     Note. The processes classified herein generally involve the
    stripping of the liquid feed with vapor products of the conversion stage
    prior to the feed entering the conversion zone.  The liquid feed in turn
    scrubs the vapor products of undesirable products.  The contacting must
    take place outside the actual conversion zone even if occurring in the same
    chamber.  In any event, the contaction for mixing or fractionation purposes
    must precede the actual conversion step.


CLS 208/82
TXT Processes under subclass 81 wherein only a part of the vapor product or
    only a part of the mineral oil to be converted are contacted.

    (1)     Note.  The parts being contacted may be obtained by separation of
    the vapor product or mineral oil feed into fractions having different
    properties (e.g., boiling point).


CLS 208/83
TXT Processes under subclass 81 wherein the products are separated into
    fraction having different properties subsequent to contacting the mineral
    oil feed.

    (1)     Note.  This separation is generally by distillation.


CLS 208/84
TXT Processes under subclass 81 wherein a material, other than the vapor
    product or mineral oil feed, is added to the vapor-oil contact zone.


CLS 208/85
TXT Processes under subclass 46 wherein the mineral oil to be converted is
    subjected to some separate and distinct nonconversion treatment combined
    with a subsequent chemical conversion of the treated oil.

    (1)     Note.  Processes which include a single preliminary treatment
    defined by name only are not included in this or indented subclasses.  Nor
    are processes included where the only "preliminary" treatment is heating
    the oil to conversion treatment (even though accompanied by vaporization of
    the oil) or the addition of the conversion catalyst or inerts, etc.


CLS 208/86
TXT Processes under subclass 85 wherein the mineral oil feed is subjected to a
    treatment to remove asphaltic components therefrom prior to the conversion
    stage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39+,    for the separation or recovery asphalt as a product.

    308,    for deasphalting treatments, per se.


CLS 208/87
TXT Processes under subclass 85 wherein the preliminary treatment is a
    treatment of the mineral oil feed with a solvent which separates therefrom
    some component of the mineral oil which may be nonmineral oil component or
    a mineral oil fraction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    311+,   for mineral oil fractionation involving the use of solvent
    extraction.


CLS 208/88
TXT Processes under subclass 85 wherein the preliminary treatment of the
    mineral oil includes the removal of nonhydrocarbon impurities or the
    conversion of the impurity to an inactive form.

    (1)     Note. Many of the patents classified herein involve the removal of
    or the inactivation of impurities which would tend to inactivate or reduce
    the activity of (poison) the catalyst employed in a subsequent conversion
    process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87,     for preliminary removal of impurities by means of solvent
    extraction.

    177+,   for processes for the removal of or inactivation of nonhydrocan
    impurities occurring in mineral oil.


CLS 208/89
TXT Processes under subclass 88 wherein the refining treatment of the mineral
    oil includes the use of hydrogen, either in the free state or by means of a
    hydrogen rich material (hydrogen donor).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58+,    for plural serial stage conversion processes wherein the first
    stage is hydrodesulfurization under cracking conditions.

    209+,   for processes of removing sulfur from mineral oil wherein hydrogen
    is used.

    264,    for processes of refining employing free hydrogen.


CLS 208/90
TXT Processes under subclass 88 wherein the refining treatment includes the use
    of a free acid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219+,   252 and 265+, for refining processes wherein an acid is used.


CLS 208/91
TXT Processes under subclass 88 wherein the refining treatment includes a
    treatment of the mineral oil with solid adsorbents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213+    and 299+, for refining processes, per se, wherein solid adsorbents
    are used to refine the oil.


CLS 208/92
TXT Processes under subclass 85 wherein the mineral oil to be converted is
    subjected to distillation prior to the conversion reaction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     for processes including a fractionation of a feed oil preliminary
    to a treatment of both fraction (split feed).

    347+,   for processes of distilling mineral oils, wherein there is no
    conversion of the mineral oil.


CLS 208/93
TXT Processes under subclass 92 wherein at least one of the fractions produced
    by the distillation is blended with either (1) another of the said
    fractions or (2) with the product of the conversion reaction or a fraction
    thereof.


CLS 208/94
TXT Processes under subclass 92 wherein the mineral oil to be converted is
    subjected to two or more successive distillation stages prior to conversion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    354+    and 364+, for processes of distilling mineral oils in plural stages
    wherein there is no conversion of the oil.


CLS 208/95
TXT Processes under subclass 46 in which a mineral oil conversion step is
    combined with a subsequent separate and distinct nonconversion treatment of
    the mineral oil products of the conversion.

    (1)     Note.  Processes which include a single subsequent treatment
    defused by name only, or include the separation and removal of the catalyst
    or inert material employed in the process as the only subsequent treatment
    are not included in this or indented subclass.


CLS 208/96
TXT Processes under subclass 95 wherein the treatment subsequent to conversion
    includes treatment of the product with a solvent which dissolves and
    separates therefrom a component of the product which may be a nonmineral
    oil component or a mineral oil fraction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    311+,   for mineral oil fractionation involving the use of solvent
    extraction.


CLS 208/97
TXT Processes under subclass 95 wherein the treatment subsequent to conversion
    includes the removal of nonhydrocarbon natural occurring material
    (impurity) from the mineral oil, or the conversion thereof to an inactive
    or unobjectionable material.

    (1)     Note.  Processes which include a single subsequent treatment
    defused by name only, or include the separation and removal of the catalyst
    or inert material employed in the process as the only subsequent treatment
    are not included in this or indented subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177+,   for processes for the removal of or inactivation of nonhydrocarbon
    impurities occurring in mineral oil.


CLS 208/98
TXT Processes under subclass 97 wherein the refining treatment includes the use
    of an acid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219+,   252, 256, and 265+, for refining processes wherein an acid is used.


CLS 208/99
TXT Processes under subclass 97 wherein the refining treatment includes the use
    of solid adsorbents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213+    and 299+, for refining processes wherein adsorbents are used.


CLS 208/100
TXT Processes under subclass 95 wherein the treatment of the products
    subsequent to conversion includes a separation of vapor products from
    liquid involving (1) plural stages of separation, (2) a specifically
    defined separation procedure or (3) the recovery of particular fractions
    identified by some property thereof, (e.g., specific boiling range).

    (1)     Note.  Broadly recited single stage separations, as for example,
    broad rectification, to recover named fractions such as gasoline, gas oil,
    etc., are not included herein as a subsequent treatment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    347+,   for processes of distilling mineral oils.


CLS 208/101
TXT Processes under subclass 100 wherein the separation process includes an
    absorption of one of the components of the vapor products with a liquid
    absorbent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    341+,   for processes of recovering mineral oils from vapors by absorption
    followed by vaporization to recover the mineral oil from the absorbent oil.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, for processes of gas separation,
    particularly subclasses 149+ for gas separation involving liquid contacting.


CLS 208/102
TXT Processes under subclass 100 wherein the liquid product resulting from one
    separation step is subjected to a further separation of vapors from the
    liquid.


CLS 208/103
TXT Processes under subclass 100 wherein the vapor product resulting from one
    separation step is subject to a further vapor from liquid separation.


CLS 208/104
TXT Processes under subclass 103 wherein liquid product from the second
    separation step in additionally subjected to distillation to separate the
    same into desired fractions.


CLS 208/105
TXT Processes under subclass 103 wherein vapors from the second separation step
    are subjected to a condensation treatment to produce liquid products.


CLS 208/106
TXT Processes under subclass 46 wherein hydrocarbons are converted into a
    mixture including lighter, lower boiling hydro-carbons which are liquid at
    atmospheric temperature and pressure, or to coke.

    (1)     Note.  Cracking operations which result in the formation of product
    coke is generally known as "coking".  Cracking operations conducted under
    heat and pressure and in the absence of a catalyst is known as "thermal
    cracking".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50+,    for plural serial stage conversions wherein at least one of the
    stages includes a coking of a mineral oil.

    67+,    for plural serial stage conversions wherein the first stage is a
    thermal or a catalytic cracking of a mineral oil.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, particularly subclasses 211+ for
    processes of cracking an oil to produce a gaseous hydrocarbon, having
    utility as a heating or illumination gas.


CLS 208/107
TXT Processes under subclass 106 wherein the cracking takes place in the
    presence of added hydrogen.

    (1)     Note.  Hydrogenative cracking is generally referred to as
    destructive hydrogenation.

    (2)     Note.  The hydrogen may be added as a free gas or a hydrogen rich
    material may be used under such conditions as to generate or liberate
    hydrogen (hydrogan donor processes).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for, hydrogen donor diluent cyclic processes which includes
    hydrogenation reactions.

    58+,    for plural serial stage conversions, the first stage of which is a
    hydrogenative cracking.


CLS 208/108
TXT Processes under subclass 107 in which a catalytic material is employed.

    (1)     Note.  To be classified in this or indented subclasses the process
    must include (a) the treatment of a specific mineral oil identified by some
    definite physical or chemical property thereof, such as boiling range,
    specific gravity, etc., or (b) the use of a specifically identified
    catalytic material.  Merely identifying the feed as a naphtha, as boiling
    within the gas-oil range or the use of a catalyst of a particular size is
    not itself sufficient to cause classification in this or indented subclass.
     Processes excluded by this note are classified below in subclass 146 which
    provides for mineral oil processes including the contacting of the oil with
    solids.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146+,   for manipulative processes of contacting of mineral oils with solid
    catalysts.  (See (1) Note).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, for a composition comprising a catalyst or sorbent, per se.


CLS 208/109
TXT Processes under subclass 108 wherein the catalytic material contains silica
    or a silicate.


CLS 208/110
TXT Processes under subclass 109 wherein the catalyst includes a free metal or
    metal oxide.

    (1)     Note.  Combinations of a metal oxide and silica are classified
    herein even though they are combined in the form of a metal silicate.
    Similarly metal salts of amphoteric metals, for example, metal chromate are
    classified herein as mixtures of metal oxides.


CLS 208/111
TXT Processes under subclass 110 wherein the catalytic material includes a
    group III metal or oxide thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The catalysts used in the processes classified herein
    include alumina and silica gels, whether obtained separately or
    simultaneously as well as the aluminum silicates.


CLS 208/112
TXT Processes under subclass 108 wherein the catalytic material contains a free
    metal or a metal oxide.

    (1)     Note.  Metal salts of an amphoteric metal, e.g., metal chromates
    are classified herein as a mixture of metal oxides (chromium oxide with the
    other metal oxide).


CLS 208/113
TXT Processes under subclass 106 in which a catalytic material is employed.

    (1)     Note.  To be classified in this or indented subclasses the process
    must include (a) the treatment of a specific mineral oil identified by some
    definite physical or chemical property thereof, such as boiling range,
    specific gravity, etc., or (b) the use of a specifically identified
    catayltic material.  Merely identifying the feed as a naphtha, as boiling
    within the gas-oil range or the use of a catalyst of a particular size is
    not itself sufficient to cause classification in this or indented
    subclasses.  Processes excluded by this note are classified below in
    subclasses 146+ which provides for mineral oil processes including the
    contacting of the oil with solids.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146+,   for manipulative contacting processes which are of general
    application even though claimed as "catalytic cracking" (see (1) Note).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, for a composition comprising a catalyst or sorbent, per se.


CLS 208/114
TXT Processes under subclass 113 wherein the catalyst contains phosphorus,
    boron, nitrogen either as a free element or as a compound thereof.


CLS 208/115
TXT Processes under subclass 113 wherein the catalyst contains a halogen either
    as a free element or as a compound thereof.


CLS 208/116
TXT Processes under subclass 115 wherein the catalyst includes a metal halide.


CLS 208/117
TXT Processes under subclass 116 wherein the catalyst includes a Group III
    metal halide.


CLS 208/118
TXT Processes under subclass 113 wherein the catalyst contains silica or a
    silicate.


CLS 208/119
TXT Processes under subclass 118 wherein the catalyst also contains a free
    metal or a metal oxide.

    (1)     Note.  Combinations of a metal oxide and silica are classified
    herein even though they are combined in the form of a metal silicate.
    Similarly metal salts of amphoteric metals, for example, metal chromate are
    classified herein as mixtures of metal oxides.


CLS 208/120
TXT Processes under subclass 119 wherein the catalyst contains a Group III
    metal or metal oxide.


CLS 208/121
TXT Processes under subclass 113 wherein the catalyst contains a metal or metal
    oxide.

    (1)     Note.  Metal salts of an amphoteric metal, e.g., metal chromates
    are classified herein as a mixture of metal oxides (chromium oxide with the
    other metal oxide).


CLS 208/122
TXT Processes under subclass 121 wherein the catalyst includes a Group III
    metal or metal oxide.


CLS 208/123
TXT Processes under subclass 122 wherein the catalyst additionally contains a
    Group VI metal or metal oxide.


CLS 208/124
TXT Processes under subclass 122 wherein the catalyst additionally contains a
    Group VIII metal or metal oxide.


CLS 208/125
TXT Processes under subclass 106 wherein cracking takes place in the presence
    of an added nonreactive material.

    (1)     Note.  The processes classified in this and indented subclasses are
    thermal cracking processes wherein the mineral oil is either converted to
    lower boiling mineral oils or to coke and wherein nonreactive liquids,
    vapors or solids are added prior to or during the conversion to facilitate
    the same.


CLS 208/126
TXT Processes under subclass 125 wherein cracking takes place in the presence
    of added inert solids.

    (1)     Note.  Many processes classified herein are directed to cracking in
    the presence of heat carriers which may cause formation of coke in addition
    to lighter hydrocarbon products.  The heat carriers may be coke solids or
    inert refractory materials.  The process is generally known as "coking".

    (2)     Note.  To be classified in this or indented subclasses the process
    must include (a) the treatment of a specific mineral oil identified by some
    definite physical or chemical property thereof, such as boiling range,
    specific gravity, etc., or (b) the use of a specifically identified solid
    material. Merely identifying the feed as a naphtha, as boiling within the
    gas oil range, or the use of solids of a particular size is not sufficient
    to cause classification of the process in this or indented subclass.
    Processes excluded are classified below in subclass 146.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50+,    for plural serial stage conversions wherein at least one of the
    conversions includes a coking of mineral oil.

    146+,   for manipulative contacting of mineral oils with solids (see (2)
    Note).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclasses 104+ for apparatus for coking
    a mineral oil and treating vapor products (e. g., fractionating the mineral
    oil product).

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclass 23 for a process of
    coking a carbonaceous mixture including a minor amount of mineral oil.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for
    coking a mineral oil.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 449.1+ for
    manufacturing carbon by a chemical reaction.


CLS 208/127
TXT Processes under subclass 126 wherein cracking takes place in the presence
    of added inert solids which are suspended in a fluid medium, the mixture
    being handled as a fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153+,   for processes of conversion including the use of solid materials
    suspended in a fluid wherein neither the mineral oil treated nor the solids
    is specifically identified.


CLS 208/128
TXT Processes under subclass 125 wherein cracking takes place in the presence
    of an added gas or vapor.


CLS 208/129
TXT Processes under subclass 128 wherein the cracking takes place in the
    presence of added gaseous products of combustion of a gaseous, liquid or
    solid fuel.


CLS 208/130
TXT Processes under subclass 128 wherein cracking takes place in the presence
    of steam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for processes of cracking which also involves oxidation by means of
    oxygen which may be evolved from the decomposition of steam.

    107+,   for processes of hydrogenative cracking employing hydrogen evolved
    from steam.


CLS 208/131
TXT Processes under subclass 106 wherein mineral oil to be cracked is heated to
    the desired temperature and cracking takes place due solely to the heat
    stored during the initial heating, no further heat being added during the
    progress of the cracking operation.

    (1)     Note.  Processes classified herein generally result in the making
    of product coke, the process being generally known as "coking".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 449.1+ for
    manufacturing carbon by a chemical reaction.


CLS 208/132
TXT Processes under subclass 106 wherein the feed oil to be cracked (or coked)
    is heated in a continuous confined zone of generally tubular configuration.

    (1)     Note.  The conversion reaction may be initiated in the heating zone
    but additional heat is required to continue the reaction to completion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131,    for similar cracking processes wherein heating of the feed oil may
    be accomplished in a tubular confined zone but no additional heat is
    required to continue the cracking (or coking) operation.


CLS 208/133
TXT Processes under subclass 46 wherein a mineral oil is converted to an oil of
    similar boiling range, but of generally improved octane rating, the
    reaction being known as reforming.

    (1)     Note.  A reforming process generally includes a number of different
    reactions of the hydrocarbon molecule, including dehydrogenation,
    isomerization, aromatization, cyclization, alkylation and/or dealkylation.
    The subjection of a mineral oil to any of the above mentioned reactions is
    classified in this or indented subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The feed oil in the processes classified herein is generally
    a naphtha, although special fractions thereof may similarly be treated, the
    feed oil in these processes being of generally more volatile nature than
    the feed to a cracking process.


CLS 208/134
TXT Processes under subclass 133 wherein reforming takes place in the presence
    of catalytic material.

    (1)     Note.  To be classified in this or indented subclasses the process
    must include (a) the treatment of a specific mineral oil identified by some
    definite physical or chemical property thereof, such as boiling range,
    specific gravity, etc., or (b) the use of a specifically identified
    catalytic material.  Merely identifying the feed as a naphtha, as boiling
    within the gas-oil range or the use of a catalyst of a particular size is
    not itself sufficient to cause classification in this or indented subclass.
     Processes excluded by this note are classified below in subclasses 146+
    which provides for mineral oil processes including the contacting of the
    oil with solids.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146+,   for manipulative processes of contacting mineral oils with
    catalysts (see (1) Note).


CLS 208/135
TXT Processes under subclass 134 wherein the catalytic material contains a
    Group III metal or metal oxide.

    (1)     Note.  Metal salts of Group III amphoteric metal (metal aluminates)
    are classified in this or indented subclass as mixtures of metal oxides.


CLS 208/136
TXT Processes under subclass 135 wherein the catalyst additionally contains a
    Group VI metal or metal oxide.


CLS 208/137
TXT Processes under subclass 135 wherein the catalyst additionally contains a
    Group VIII metal or metal oxide.


CLS 208/138
TXT Processes under subclass 137 wherein the catalyst includes a noble metal or
    metal oxide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65,     for processes involving plural serial stage reforming conversions
    wherein a noble metal containing catalyst is used in at least one of the
    stages.


CLS 208/139
TXT Processes under subclass 138 wherein the catalyst additionally contains an
    added halogen.


CLS 208/140
TXT Processes under subclass 138 combined with the subsequent recovery of or
    the treatment of the catalyst to rehabilitate the same to condition for
    reuse.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  or Process of
    Making, comprising a catalyst or sorbent, per se, and see especially
    subclasses 12 and 20+ for a process of regeneration of such composition.


CLS 208/141
TXT Processes under subclass 134 directed to the catalytic reforming of a
    specifically identified mineral oil.

    (1)     Note.  To be classifiable in this subclass the process must include
    the treatment of a mineral oil identified by some definite chemical or
    physical property such as the boiling range, specific gravity, etc.  Merely
    naming the oil as paraffinic, olefinic, etc., is not sufficient, per se, to
    identify the mineral oil for this subclass.


CLS 208/142
TXT Processes under subclass 46 wherein mineral oil is subjected to treatment
    with added free hydrogen or under conditions which generate hydrogen and in
    which hydrogen is added to the hydrocarbon molecule to saturate at least
    some of the unsaturated molecules therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56      and 57, for plural serial stage conversions wherein one of the
    conversion stages includes a hydrogenation reaction.


CLS 208/143
TXT Processes under subclass 142 wherein hydrogenation takes place in the
    presence of catalytic material.

    (1)     Note.  To be classified in this or indented subclasses the process
    must include (a) the use of a specifically identified solid catalytic
    material, or (b) the treatment of a specific mineral oil identified by some
    definite physical or chemical property thereof, such as boiling range,
    specific gravity, etc.  Processes of this latter type are specifically
    provided for in subclasses 144+ indented hereunder. Processes excluded by
    this note are classified below in subclasses 146+ which provides for
    broadly claimed processes of contacting mineral oil with solids.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144,    (see (1) Note).

    146,    (see (1) Note).


CLS 208/144
TXT Processes under subclass 143 directed to the catalytic hydrogenation of a
    specifically identified mineral oil.

    (1)     Note.  To be classifiable in this subclass the process must include
    the treatment of a mineral oil identified by some definite chemical or
    physical property such as the boiling range, specific gravity, etc.  Merely
    naming the oil as paraffinic, olefinic, et., is not sufficient, per se, to
    identify the mineral oil for this subclass.


CLS 208/145
TXT Processes under subclass 144 in which an added material which under the
    conditions of the reaction supplies the hydrogen necessary for
    hydrogenation is employed.

    (1)     Note.  Such hydrogen supplying materials are commonly known as
    "hydrogen donors".  Example thereof are naphthenes, asphalts, and tars.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for hydrogen donor diluent cyclic processes.


CLS 208/146
TXT Processes under subclass 46 which are directed to contacting fluid, in
    either the liquid or vapor state, and which may include, in addition to the
    mineral oil treated a solids regenerating or rehabilitating fluid with
    solids, and which are neither directed to the treatment of a specifically
    identified mineral oil nor include the use of specifically identified
    solids.

    (1)     Note.  Process of (a) treating a mineral oil identified by some
    definite physical or chemical property such as the boiling range, specific
    gravity, etc., or (b) using a specifically identified catalyst or heat
    carrier, are classified in a preceding subclass providing for the process
    involved. Processes classifiable in this or indented subclass may identify
    the process as hydrocracking, reforming, etc., or be directed to the
    treatment of a naphtha, feed boiling within the "gas oil range" (without
    giving the temperature range) or specify the use of a catalyst of a
    particular particle size.

    (2)     Note.  Processes of conversion of mineral oil which involve a
    plurality of named conversion steps (of the same type or of a different
    type) or which are in combination with a preliminary treatment of the feed
    oil or a subsequent treatment of the converted products are classified in
    the preceding subclass providing for the combination, (subclasses 49 to
    105) even though the conversion treatment is only broadly defined.

    (3)     Note.  In this and indented subclasses is intended to be collected
    processes of converting mineral oil which are distinguished primarily by
    the manipulative procedure in which solids (catalysts or inert solids) are
    contacted with a fluid, in the liquid or gaseous state which may be either
    the mineral oil to be converted or a solids regeneration medium (e.g.,
    oxygen or air).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49+,    for processes in which a mineral oil is subjected to a plurality of
    successive conversions (see (2) Note).

    78+,    for processes including plural parallel conversions (see (2) Note).

    85+,    for processes including a treatment of mineral oil prior to
    conversion (see (2) Note).

    95+,    for processes including a treatment of the converted products (see
    2) Note).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate
    subclasses, which is the generic class providing for processes and
    apparatus for contacting solids with either gases or vapors.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclass,
    which is the generic class providing for processes and apparatus for
    contacting solids with liquids.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 104.11+ for a heat exchange system in
    which an intermediate fluent receives and discharges heat, and subclasses
    4+ for a heat exchanger having a solid heat storage mass.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, appropriate subclasses, for processes
    and apparatus for conveying solid materials by means of or with the
    assistance of a forced propelling fluid current.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, for processes or apparatus for
    handling materials including manipulative charging and discharging of
    solids, per se.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, especially subclasses 190+ and 211+ for
    apparatus for treating a material (including mineral oil) with a catalyst.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, for a composition comprising a catalyst or sorbent, per se, and
    see especially subclasses 12 and 20+ for a process of regenerating such
    composition. Combinations of treating mineral oil in the presence of solids
    with regeneration of the solids employed are classified in this class (208)
    and in this or an indented subclass when the mineral oil conversion is
    claimed broadly.


CLS 208/147
TXT Processes under subclass 146 wherein a plurality of dissimilar reactions
    are carried out within the same enclosure or chamber, which reactions take
    place in zones which are separated by a common wall, through which heat
    exchange generally takes place.

    (1)     Note.  The reactions involved may be a conversion and catalyst
    regeneration or a plurality of unnamed conversions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49      through 80, for processes involving a plurality of named
    conversions including the use of plural contiguous reaction zones.


CLS 208/148
TXT Processes under subclass 146 which include both fluid contact with a
    gravitating compact bed of solids and contact with solids while suspended
    in the fluid.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example, those plural stage
    unnamed conversions but which embody the two different types of moving
    system conversions or where the solids are regenerated during movement as a
    gravitating bed and are elevated by pneumatic lifting, the lift gas
    including mineral oil which is simultaneously converted in the lift zone,
    the solids being in a suspension state during this reaction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174+,   for gravitating compact bed type contacting including the transfer
    of solids between compact bed zones by entraining the solids in a
    suspending gas stream.


CLS 208/149
TXT Processes under subclass 146 wherein fluid is contacted with a mixture of
    different types of solids in the same zone.

    (1)     Note.  Processes classified herein involve the contact of a fluid
    with a mixture of a catalyst and heat carrier solids (both unnamed).


CLS 208/150
TXT Processes under subclass 146 which include a significant treatment of the
    contact solid to remove therefrom adsorbed or occluded material, other than
    contaminant coke or carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Treatments to remove contaminant coke or carbon are not
    included herein even though the treatment may simultaneously remove other
    occluded or adsorbed material.

    (2)     Note.  "Purging" or "stripping" claimed broadly by name only or
    processes including broadly the use of steam as a stripping medium are not
    considered significant purging or stripping steps for this subclass.  The
    use of steam in a particular manner, e.g., with agitation, or the use of
    other purging mediums to remove occluded hydrocarbons, flue gases, etc.,
    are examples of significant purging for this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 402 and
    443+ for processes of contacting solids with gases, as for example for
    drying.


CLS 208/151
TXT Processes under subclass 150 wherein the purging takes place in a series of
    separate and distinct stages.


CLS 208/152
TXT Processes under subclass 146 wherein during the contacting process solids
    are added to the system to make up losses or selected fractions of the
    solids are withdrawn from the system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example, those solids contacting
    processes wherein (a) catalyst is added to the circulating mass to maintain
    constant catalyst inventory and thus replenish normal losses to maintain a
    constant average catalytic activity, or; (b) solids below the desired
    catalytic activity are discarded from the system or solids that are too
    fine or have grown in size are discarded thereby preventing any
    interruption of normal solids flow in the system.


CLS 208/153
TXT Processes under subclass 146 wherein solids are suspended in a fluid
    medium, and the mineral oil conversion or solids regeneration or
    rehabilitation takes place in the presence of the suspended solids.

    (1)     Note.  The suspending medium may be either a liquid or a gas or
    vapor, and the suspension may flow similar to a liquid from a point of high
    elevation or pressure to one of lower elevation or pressure, or the solids
    may be suspended in a upward flowing fluid (fluidized dense bed), or even
    flow in an upward direction with the fluid, e.g., dilute or transfer line
    system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for processes of cracking in the presence of inert solids (coking)
    employing this type of system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclass 12 for a
    thermolytic distillation process in which the charge is heated by contact
    with a hot disparate, inert solid and subclass 31 for a fluidized bed
    process.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, especially subclasses 20+ for a process of regeneration, per se,
    of a composition of that class.


CLS 208/154
TXT Processes under subclass 153 which include the step of starting up the
    operation fluid suspension system or of shutting down the operation of the
    suspension system.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the processes found herein have for their object to
    properly heat up or cool down the system or the prevention of explosions
    therein.


CLS 208/155
TXT Processes under subclass 153 which include (1) a plurality of separate
    unnamed mineral oil conversions (2) a plurality of separate solids
    regenerations or rehabilitations, or (3) a plurality of zones in which
    mineral oil conversions occur alternately with solids regeneration or
    rehabilitation.

    (1)     Note.  Plural mineral oil conversion processes classified herein
    are claimed broadly as "mineral oil conversion" for example and may be
    disclosed as being of different type, e.g., cracking and reforming.  The
    zones are generally associated with a common solids supply or reactant
    supply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49+,    for processes in which a mineral oil is subjected to a plurality of
    successive named chemical conversion reactions (see (1) Note).

    78+,    for mineral oil conversion processes involving plural parallel
    stages of chemical conversion wherein the reactions are identified at least
    by name (see (1) Note).


CLS 208/156
TXT Processes under subclass 155 in which both the fluid and the solids
    contacted thereby are passed from one reaction zone to the other reaction
    zone successively, either counter-current to each other or concurrent with
    each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49+,    for plural serial stages of named mineral oil conversion processes.


CLS 208/157
TXT Processes under subclass 153 wherein mineral oil to be converted is
    introduced into the reaction zone in the liquid state.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example, those contacting
    processes wherein the liquid feed to the suspension system remains in the
    liquid state and the entire system is in liquid suspension or wherein the
    liquid feed is vaporized by the hot solids and the entire system is in the
    vapor phase or wherein there is a mixed vapor-liquid feed and the vapors
    are in equilibrium with the liquid in the vapor-liquid suspension.  Many of
    the techniques classified here result in uniform wetting and contacting of
    the solids and prevent agglomerating or sticking of the particles due to
    the use of a heavy liquid feed.


CLS 208/158
TXT Processes under subclass 153 wherein the suspended solids are subjected to
    some step to increase the turbulence or mixing thereof which increases the
    motion of the solids beyond that necessary to maintain the solids
    suspension.

    (1)     Note.  Additional mixing or turbulence may, for example, be
    accomplished by use of a mechanical stirrer or by applying some vibrations
    to the solids suspension.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163+,   for processes including steps for decreasing the solids mixing in a
    fluidized bed by retarding the top to bottom movement of the particles.


CLS 208/159
TXT Processes under subclass 153 involving the control of the temperature
    during the fluid-solid contacting over and above that caused by the normal
    heat transfer properties of the moving solid bodies as they circulate in
    and through the system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example, processes of regulating
    temperature in mineral oil conversion in a suspension system wherein
    heating and cooling occurs by indirect heat exchange or by some specific
    manipulation of the circulating solids to cause such change in the
    temperature.

    (2)     Note.  Preheating the feed or quenching the products of the
    reaction are not regarded as temperature controls within the scope of this
    subclass.


CLS 208/160
TXT Processes under subclass 159 wherein the temperature is controlled by
    removing a portion of the solids, circulating the same to an external heat
    exchange, and then back to the zone from which they were removed.

    (1)     Note.  This technique may be used to reheat solids which have been
    used as heat carriers or to cool overheated solids.

    (2)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are processes in which spent
    solids are reheated merely by the regeneration operation.


CLS 208/161
TXT Processes under subclass 153 which include a specifically recited step of
    removing finely divided solids from the effluent gas from the reaction zone.

    (1)     Note.  Particles of 20 microns in diameter and less are considered
    fines for classification in this subclass.  Processes wherein the
    separation of fines is (1) claimed broadly by name only or (2) recites
    broadly the use of centrifugal force or of a "cyclone" are not classified
    herein unless the separated fines are returned other than by gravity to the
    zone from which the effluent comes.


CLS 208/162
TXT Processes under subclass 161 wherein the fines separation is facilitated by
    use of a liquid.

    (1)     Note.  The liquid may act to agglomerate the fines.  The liquid may
    be formed in situ by partial condensation of effluent vapor or may be an
    added liquid.  The technique may involve counter-current scrubbing of the
    effluent product.  Subsequent treatments of the resulting slurry of fines
    such as washing or filtering the same may be included, per se, as
    necessarily involving a separation of fines from the effluent in the
    presence of a liquid.


CLS 208/163
TXT Processes under subclass 153 in which solids are suspended in upward
    flowing gas or vapor, the upward force of the fluid on the solids is
    countered by gravity resulting in the formation of a zone in which the
    particles are compacted into a dense phase.

    (1)     Note.  The particles are in a state of hindered settling and the
    dense bed resembles a boiling liquid and above this dense bed some solids
    may be suspended in a dilute or dispersed phase.


CLS 208/164
TXT Processes under subclass 163 which include a specifically recited procedure
    for transferring solids from one solids suspension zone to another.

    (1)     Note.  Processes classifiable herein may include the transfer of
    solids between fluidized dense beds or between such a bed and a zone having
    another type of solids suspension, as for example, a dispersed phase
    suspension of solids.

    (2)     Note.  Processes of transferring solids from zone to zone set out
    by name only are not included herein.  The use of pressurizing and
    depressurizing zones is one example of transfer process included in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, appropriate subclass for solids transfer
    or conveying by means of a fluid current.


CLS 208/165
TXT Processes under subclass 146 wherein solids move downwardly by gravity as a
    relatively compact mass, the particles being in contact with each other and
    wherein the compactness is not disrupted by the contacting fluids.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, for a composition comprising a catalyst or sorbent, per se, and
    see especially subclasses 20+ for a regeneration process which may include
    treatment by a contacting fluid.


CLS 208/166
TXT Processes under subclass 165 wherein mineral oil to be contacted is
    introduced into the reaction zone in the liquid state.

    (1)     Note.  The feed may be all liquid or a mixed vapor-liquid phase
    feed and the procedure permits uniform contacting and wetting of the solids
    by the liquid feed resulting in a uniform reactant flow through the compact
    bed.


CLS 208/167
TXT Processes under subclass 166 wherein solids are introduced onto the surface
    of a compact bed as a freely falling stream or curtain and liquid mineral
    oil to be converted is sprayed against the freely falling curtain of solids.

    (1)     Note.  In many of the processes classified herein the curtain of
    falling solids prevents the liquid spray of mineral oil from contacting the
    walls of the reaction vessel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for mineral oil processes in which the accumulation of carbon
    deposits on the apparatus employed is prevented.


CLS 208/168
TXT Processes under subclass 165 including a specific step of separating the
    effluent vapors or gases from the contacting zone from the solids and
    removed from the contacting zone.

    (1)     Note.  The disengagement technique generally involves an
    interruption or baffling of the solids flow to form a solids free zone into
    which vapors from the interstices of the bed flow and from which they can
    be removed.


CLS 208/169
TXT Processes under subclass 165 in which (1) a plurality of fluid streams
    separately contact a single stream of solids flowing through a series of
    gravitating compact bed zones or (2) a single stream of fluid serially
    contacts a plurality of gravitating compact bed zones wherein the solids
    flow in the zones is at least partially in parallel, all the contact zones
    being within the same chamber.

    (1)     Note.  Where the mineral oil conversion reaction is named in each
    of the zones, the original patent is classified above in subclasses 49+ or
    78+.  However, plural zone unnamed reactions of the same type are
    classified herein whether the reactions are of the conversion or the
    regeneration type.  The reaction or regeneration zones are generally
    associated with a common solids supply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49+,    for processes of subjecting mineral oil to plural successive
    conversions. (See (1) Note).

    78+,    for mineral oil conversion processes involving plural parallel
    stages of chemical conversion.  (See (1) Note).


CLS 208/170
TXT Processes under subclass 165 which include some step to prevent the solids
    in the gravitating bed from becoming nonuniformly distributed as to
    particle size over the horizontal cross-section of the bed.

    (1)     Note.  The technique provided for in this subclass prevents sizing
    of the solids as might occur when solids are discharged onto the mass from
    a central point and the fines tend to sift downward to form a pile and
    coarser particles roll outward across the surface of the pile.  A baffling
    of the flow, for example, will prevent this stratification of the different
    size particles.


CLS 208/171
TXT Processes under subclass 165 including the step of removing the solids from
    the gravitating bed in such a manner that the solids are withdrawn
    uniformly over the horizontal cross-section of the bed.

    (1)     Note.  The technique provided for in this subclass prevents a flow
    of solids at some point within the bed at a greater velocity than at other
    points as might be the case if solids are withdrawn from a single centrally
    located point and the adjacent solids fill the gap created.  Such
    techniques as baffling the flow of solids withdrawn or providing
    multi-point withdrawal of solids prevent the nonuniform flow within the bed
    by providing a uniform withdrawal of solids.


CLS 208/172
TXT Processes under subclass 165 wherein (1) the heated solids, are employed to
    heat the fluid prior to entry to the gravitating bed or (2) cool solids are
    employed to extract and/or recover heat from the effluent from the
    gravitating bed zone.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example, processes of
    maintaining a better thermal balance in the system by use of the solids to
    preheat the feed or cool the products.  Undesirable side reactions may be
    prevented by quickly cooling the products below reaction temperatures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 104.11+ for a heat exchange system in
    which a recycling intermediate fluent material receives and discharges heat.


CLS 208/173
TXT Processes under subclass 165 including a specific procedure for
    transferring solids from one compact gravitating bed zone to another.

    (1)     Note.  Processes which recite broad transferring of solids between
    zones by name only are not included.  Some particular condition or
    procedure of transferring must be claimed.


CLS 208/174
TXT Processes under subclass 173 wherein solids are taken from the discharge
    end of one gravitating compact bed and transferred to a more elevated inlet
    of another bed by entraining or suspending the solids gas stream.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148,    for contacting processes wherein there are combined gravitating and
    suspension zones.  Thus if a reaction occurs in the dispersed lift step
    (either a mineral oil conversion or a regeneration, stripping, etc., of the
    solids) the process is a combined gravitating bed and suspension zone
    process classified in subclass 148, whereas if the lift gas is used for
    transfer purpose only, the process is classified in this subclass (174).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclasses 141+ and 174 for pneumatic
    lifting apparatus with no treating claimed.


CLS 208/175
TXT Processes under subclass 174 wherein the solid particles are maintained in
    contact with each other, the solids being transferred as a compact mass,
    usually by means of a force applied counter to the upward direction of flow
    of the conveying current.


CLS 208/176
TXT Processes under subclass 146 which include the step of imparting motion of
    the solids being contacted.

    (1)     Note.  The solids particles may be moved relative to each other
    within a fixed mass or bed or motion may be imparted to the whole bulk of
    solids making up the bed.  This subclass includes the movement of solids
    during fluid contacting or either before or after fluid contact.  The
    movement is other than in a fluid suspending medium provided for in
    subclasses 153+ or as a gravitating bed for subclasses 165+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153+,   (see (1) Note).

    165+,   (see (1) Note).


CLS 208/177
TXT Processes under the class definition for treating a mineral oil to (1)
    remove impurities or undesirable nonmineral oil components therefrom or (2)
    to inactivate these contaminants or impurities by converting them to some
    less noxious form, whether or not they are subsequently removed.

    (1)     Note.  An impurity is any component, usually a nonhydrocarbon,
    which renders the mineral oil less fit for use for its intended purpose.
    Gum formers which are olefinic hydrocarbons and may be mineral oil
    components are regarded as impurities within the scope of the term
    "impurity" as are the gums formed by polymerization of such gum formers.
    Water is also regarded as an impurity.

    (2)     Note.  Certain subclasses indented hereunder (subclasses 179-186)
    provide for the treatment of a particular type of mineral oil while other
    subclasses (187-263) provide for a specific type of reaction or the removal
    of specified impurities.  Processes are classified in the above mentioned
    subclasses when (1) the claims specify the particular impurity removed (or
    the treatment of used oil) or (2) the disclosure is limited to the removal
    of a single particular impurity (or the treatment of used oil).  Processes
    wherein the claims do not specify the treatment of used oil or the impurity
    removed or treated and it is disclosed that a number of different
    impurities are removed or treated are classified in other indented subclass
    usually on the basis of the reagent employed.  Patents classified on this
    latter basis may be cross-referenced to the subclasses for the impurities
    removed if necessary.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88+,    processes wherein a refining of mineral oil is combined with a
    subsequent conversion reaction.

    95+,    processes including conversion of a mineral oil combined with a
    refining of the converted products.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 46 for apparatus for refining
    mineral oils.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclass for
    processes and apparatus for separating or purifying liquids not elsewhere
    provided for. See the search notes in Class 210 for the line between that
    class and Class 208.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclasses 258+ and 800+ for
    processes of purifying particular hydrocarbons.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the destruction or containment of hazardous or toxic waste
    in the form of refined hydrocarbons.


CLS 208/178
TXT Processes under subclass 177 which includes the step of controlling of the
    amount of reagent employed in the refining of the mineral oil.

    (1)     Note.  Processes of control classified herein include more than the
    setting out of the amount of reagent employed. This subclass contains, for
    example, the step of controlling the rate of reagent introduction may be
    responsive to some condition of the feed as stopping the flow of the
    reagent when a determination is made that the amount of contaminant
    remaining is no longer harmful.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, particularly subclasses 2+ and 87.01+ for processes
    and apparatus for proportioning the flow of two or more fluids not
    otherwise provided for.


CLS 208/179
TXT Processes under subclass 177 for treating used mineral oils to render them
    suitable for reuse.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the processes classified in this or indented
    subclasses are directed to the treatment of mineral oil dry cleaning
    solvents or lubricating oils.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    187     through 307, for similar processes of refining other mineral oils.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 196 for purifiers contained
    in the lubricating systems peculiar to internal-combustion engines.

    184,    Lubrication, appropriate subclasses for lubricating systems that
    include a filter for the lubricating oil.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, for liquid purification not
    otherwise provided for, see particularly subclasses 234+, 296 and 511 for
    the use of liquid as separating medium; subclasses 737, 766, and 774+ for
    process of separating including heating or cooling; and subclasses 175+ for
    separators combined with heaters or coolers.


CLS 208/180
TXT Processes under subclass 179 wherein an organic material is added to the
    used oil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237+,   for processes of removing sulfur from an mineral oil (other than
    used oil) employing an added organic reagent.

    290+,   for other processes of purifying or refining mineral oil (other
    than used oil) by using organic reagents.


CLS 208/181
TXT Processes under subclass 179 in which a plurality of inorganic materials
    are added to the used oil, either together or in sequence.


CLS 208/182
TXT Processes under subclass 181 wherein at least one of the treating agents is
    an adsorbent or filtering material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    299+,   for processes of refining mineral oil (not used oil) wherein solid
    contact materials are used.


CLS 208/183
TXT Processes under subclass 182 wherein, in addition to the solid contact
    material, an acid or an alkali metal, alkaline earth metal, magnesium or
    ammonium oxide, hydroxide or carbonate is employed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219+,   for processes of removing sulfur from raw mineral oil by use of
    acids.

    226+,   for removing sulfur from raw mineral oil by use of alkali metal or
    alkaline earth metal compounds.

    265+,   for processes of refining raw mineral oil by use of acids.

    283+,   for processes of refining raw mineral oil by use of alkali metal or
    alkaline earth compounds.


CLS 208/184
TXT Processes under subclass 179 wherein the used oil is purified by
    distillation or a mechanical removal of gaseous material as by heating or
    use of reduced pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    347+,   for processes of distilling mineral oils.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, appropriate subclass for apparatus for
    distillation not otherwise provided for.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, appropriate subclass, for a
    process of separatory distillation not otherwise provided for.


CLS 208/185
TXT Processes under subclass 184 wherein distillation or degassing treatment is
    carried out in the presence of an added gaseous treating agent.

    (1)     Note.  Steam is an example of gaseous treating agents provided for
    herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    356     and 362+, for similar processes of distilling raw mineral oils.


CLS 208/186
TXT Processes under subclass 184 which include a specifically defined
    separation of liquid from solid material.

    (1)     Note.  Solid-liquid separation steps recited by name only are not
    included herein.  Many of the processes classified in this subclass are
    directed to the separation of solid treating agents from the treated oil.


CLS 208/187
TXT Processes under subclass 177 for removing water from mineral oils.

    (1)     Note.  The water is generally present as entrained water although
    this and indented subclasses also provide for the separation of water
    emulsified with the oil wherein there is some treatment of the oil in
    addition to the breaking of the colloid system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24+,    for processes of removing water from petroleum waxes.

    39+,    for processes of removing water from asphalts, tars, pitches or
    resins.

    179+,   for processes of removing water from used mineral oils.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclass for
    processes of separating liquids from liquids not otherwise provided for.
    Processes and apparatus for separating water from a mineral oil including
    mere heating within a gravitational separator are classified in Class 210.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 319+ and particularly subclasses 328+ for
    processes of resolving emulsions such as petroleum emulsions.  Processes
    classified in Class 252, involve destroying the colloid system as distinct
    from removing water bound chemically and/or physically as by entrainment.
    If there is some treatment of the mineral oil in addition to the resolving
    step, the process is classified in this class (208).


CLS 208/188
TXT Processes under subclass 187 wherein a material is added to facilitate the
    removal of the water or resolution of the mineral oil-water system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 194 for water-bindive compositions, per se,
    and subclasses 328+ for breaking aqueous petroleum emulsion wherein a
    nongaseous agent is added.


CLS 208/189
TXT Processes under subclass 177 wherein a mineral oil is treated to convert
    mercaptans contained therein to disulfides.

    (1)     Note.  These processes are known as "Sweetening" treatments and
    result in an improvement of the color and odor of the mineral oil.
    Sweetening generally involves an oxidation treatment and the less noxious
    form of sulfur (disulfides) may or may not be removed from the mineral oil.

    (2)     Note.  Sweetening processes are classified herein even though
    carried out in the presence of an anti-oxidant.  This process is known as
    "inhibitor sweetening".  If the resulting sweetened oil is claimed and the
    inhibitor is not a mineral oil, the patent is classified as original in the
    appropriate composition class, e.g., Class 44, Fuel and Related
    Compositions, subclasses 300+ or Class 508, Solid Antifriction Devices,
    Materials Therefor, Lubricant or Separant Compositions for Moving Solid
    Surfaces, and Miscellaneous Mineral oil Compositions, subclasses 110+, or
    Class 585, Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclasses 1+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208+,   for processes of removing sulfur and sulfur containing compounds
    from mineral oil which do not involve the formation of the disulfide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclasses 300+ for mineral oil
    fuels including nonhydrocarbon additives (see (2) Note).

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 182.11+, particularly subclasses 185 and
    189+ for reagents employed in sweetening operations classified herein (in
    Class 208) (see (2) Note).

    508,    Solid Antifriction Devices, Materials Therefor, Lubricant or
    Separant Compositions for Moving Solid Surfaces, and Miscellaneous Mineral
    Oil Compositions, particularly subclasses 110+ for mineral oil lubricating
    compositions including nonhydrocarbon additives.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclasses 1+ for
    all-hydrocarbon compositions containing a nonmineral oil component.


CLS 208/190
TXT Processes under subclass 189 wherein an added hypochlorite is employed.


CLS 208/191
TXT Processes under subclass 189 wherein an added copper compound is employed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246,    for processes (nonsweetening) of removing sulfur using copper or a
    compound of copper.


CLS 208/192
TXT Processes under subclass 191 combined with a nonconversion treatment of the
    mineral oil prior to the sweetening treatment with a copper compound.

    (1)     Note.  The preliminary treatment may, for example, include a
    removal of some other contaminant prior to the sweetening treatment.


CLS 208/193
TXT Processes under subclass 191 wherein the sweetening treatment is combined
    with a subsequent nonconversion treatment of the sweetened oil.

    (1)     Note.  The subsequent treatment may include the removal of the
    disulfide sulfur formed during sweetening or some other contaminant from
    the sweetened oil.


CLS 208/194
TXT Processes under subclass 193 wherein the subsequent treatment includes a
    specifically defined procedure for separation and recovery of the copper
    containing sweetening agent from the sweetened oil.

    (1)     Note.  Recovery of the copper containing sweetening agent when
    recited by name only is not included as a subsequent treatment of the
    sweetened oil.


CLS 208/195
TXT Processes under subclass 191 wherein copper chloride and a free oxygen
    containing gas are employed.


CLS 208/196
TXT Processes under subclass 189 wherein an added peroxide is employed.


CLS 208/197
TXT Processes under subclass 189 wherein an added lead compound is employed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249,    for processes of removing sulfur using lead compound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 185 for compositions containing plumbiferous
    sulfur bindant agents which may be used in processes classified in this
    subclass (197).


CLS 208/198
TXT Processes under subclass 197 wherein the treating agent comprises lead
    sulfide.


CLS 208/199
TXT Processes under subclass 197 wherein the treating agent comprises sodium
    plumbite.


CLS 208/200
TXT Processes under subclass 199 combined with a nonconversion treatment of the
    mineral oil prior to the sweetening treatment with sodium plumbite.


CLS 208/201
TXT Processes under subclass 199 wherein the sweetening treatment is combined
    with a subsequent nonconversion treatment of the sweetened oil.

    (1)     Note.  The subsequent treatment may include the removal of the
    disulfide sulfur formed during sweetening or some other contaminant from
    the sweetened oil.


CLS 208/202
TXT Processes under subclass 201 wherein the sweetened oil is subjected to
    treatment with an added organic material.


CLS 208/203
TXT Processes under subclass 189 wherein added alkali metal hydroxide or
    carbonate is employed.

    (1)     Note.  For the purpose of classification in this or indented
    subclass the alkali metals are Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs and Fr.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example, sweetening processes
    wherein the treating agent may be sodium or potassium hydroxide, carbonate
    or bicarbonate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226,    for processes (nonsweetening) of removing sulfur from mineral oil
    using alkali metal compounds.


CLS 208/204
TXT Processes under subclass 203 wherein an added oxygen containing organic
    compound is employed in addition to the alkali metal hydroxide or carbonate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231,    for processes of removing of sulfur employing an alkali metal
    compound and an oxygen containing organic compound.


CLS 208/205
TXT Processes under subclass 204 wherein the organic oxygen compound is an
    acyclic alcohol, e.g., methanol, ethanol, or propanol.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232+,   for processes of removing sulfur employing an alkali metal compound
    and an acyclic alcohol.


CLS 208/206
TXT Processes under subclass 203 wherein an added nitrogen containing compound
    is employed in addition to the alkali metal hydroxide or carbonate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205,    for sweetening processes using alkanol amines in combination with
    alkali metal hydroxides and carbonates.

    207,    for sweetening processes using nitrogen containing treating agents.


CLS 208/207
TXT Processes under subclass 189 wherein an added nitrogen containing compound
    is employed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206,    for sweetening processes wherein nitrogen containing treating
    agents are used in combination with an alkali metal hydroxide or carbonate.

    236,    for processes of removing sulfur from mineral oils using nitrogen
    containing treating agents.


CLS 208/208
TXT Processes under subclass 177 wherein mineral oil is treated to remove
    sulfur therefrom, whether present as free sulfur or as a compound.

    (1)     Note.  Processes classifiable in this or indented subclass are
    those wherein (1) the claims specify the removal of sulfur or (2) the
    disclosure is limited to the removal of sulfur.  See (2) Note to subclass
    177.


CLS 208/209
TXT Processes under subclass 208 wherein the mineral oil is desulfurized in the
    presence of added hydrogen.

    (1)     Note.  The hydrogen may be added as a free gas or a hydrogen rich
    material may be used under such conditions as to generate or liberate
    hydrogen (hydrogen donor processes).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58+     and 107+, for hydrocracking processes wherein sulfur may also be
    removed. Thus, if the hydrodesulfurization is carried out under conditions
    which will promote chemical conversion of the oil, the process will be
    classified as a chemical conversion rather than as a refining treatment.

    89,     for processes of refining mineral oils with added hydrogen combined
    with a subsequent chemical conversion of the refined oil.


CLS 208/210
TXT Processes under subclass 209 which include desulfurization of mineral oil
    in the presence of hydrogen in each of a plurality of steps or stages.


CLS 208/211
TXT Processes under subclass 209 combined with a nonconversion treatment of the
    mineral oil prior to the hydrodesulfurization treatment.

    (1)     Note.  The preliminary treatment may, for example, include removal
    of sulfur (other than by using hydrogen) or other type of refining.


CLS 208/212
TXT Processes under subclass 209 wherein the hydrodesulfurizing treatment is
    combined with a subsequent nonconversion treatment of the desulfurized oil.

    (1)     Note.  The subsequent treatment may include further refining
    (removal of sulfur other than by use of hydrogen or removal of other
    impurities) or any other subsequent nonconversion type treatment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclasses 300+, for a process of
    desulfurizing a mineral oil fuel and adding a stabilizer to the product.


CLS 208/213
TXT Processes under subclass 209 wherein the hydrodesulfurization takes place
    in the presence of a solid catalyst or adsorbent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    299+,   for other refining processes carried out in the presence of a solid
    catalyst or adsorbent.


CLS 208/214
TXT Processes under subclass 213 wherein an added hydrogen rich material is
    employed under conditions that hydrogen is generated or liberated during
    the process (hydrogen donor processes).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56      and 145, for mineral oil conversion processes wherein hydrogen
    donor agents are used as sources of hydrogen.


CLS 208/215
TXT Processes under subclass 213 wherein the solid catalyst or adsorbent is a
    sulfide of a heavy metal.

    (1)     Note.  A heavy metal is one which has a specific gravity greater
    than 4 and includes all metals except alkali, alkaline earth, magnesium and
    aluminum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    293,    for other refining processes wherein the treating agent contains
    sulfur.


CLS 208/216
TXT Processes under subclass 213 wherein the solid catalyst or adsorbent
    comprises, a Group VI metal, (Cr, Mo, W or Po) or compound, thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243     and 295, for other refining processes wherein Group VI metals or
    compounds thereof are used.


CLS 208/217
TXT Processes under subclass 213 wherein the solid catalyst or adsorbent
    comprises a Group VIII metal (Fe, Co, Ni, Ru, Rh, Pd, Os, Ir or Pt) or
    compound thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244     and 295, for other refining processes wherein Group VIII metals or
    compounds thereof are used.


CLS 208/218
TXT Processes under subclass 208 wherein a mineral oil is divided into several
    fractions, at least one of which is treated to remove sulfur therefrom and
    then the separate fractions are reblended.

    (1)     Note.  Processes wherein mineral oil is fractionated and then at
    least one fraction is desulfurized, there being no reblending of the
    fractions, are classified in the appropriate subclass providing for
    desulfurizing combined with a preliminary treatment of the oil.


CLS 208/219
TXT Processes under subclass 208 wherein sulfur is removed from mineral oil by
    the use of an acid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90,     for processes including acid refining of mineral oils combined with
    chemical conversion of the refined oil.

    98,     for processes of converting mineral oils followed by refining the
    converted products with acid.

    252,    for processes of removing metal contaminants from mineral oils with
    acids.

    256,    for processes of removing gums or gum formers from mineral oils
    with acids.

    265+,   for other processes of refining of mineral oils with acids.


CLS 208/220
TXT Processes under subclass 219 which include desulfurization of mineral oil
    in plural stages, at least one of which includes the use of an acid.


CLS 208/221
TXT Processes under subclass 219 combined with a nonconversion treatment of the
    mineral oil prior to the acid desulfurization.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220,    for processes involving removal of sulfur from oil in plural
    stages, at least one of which is acid desulfurization.


CLS 208/222
TXT Processes under subclass 219 wherein the desulfurizing treatment is
    combined with a nonconversion treatment of the desulfurized oil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220,    for processes wherein sulfur is removed from oil in plural stages,
    at least one of which is acid desulfurization.


CLS 208/223
TXT Processes under subclass 219 wherein an inorganic acid is employed.


CLS 208/224
TXT Processes under subclass 223 wherein sulfuric acid is employed.


CLS 208/225
TXT Processes under subclass 223 wherein hydrochloric acid is employed.


CLS 208/226
TXT Processes under subclass 208 wherein mineral oil is desulfurized by the use
    of an alkali or alkaline earth metal compound.

    (1)     Note.  For the purpose of this classification, the alkali metals
    are sodium, potassium, lithium, rubidium, cesium and francium and the
    alkaline earth metals are calcium, barium, and strontium and also including
    magnesium.

    (2)     Note.  Natural clays which generally contain some alkali metal
    component are not included in this or indented subclasses but are
    classified instead with the aluminum or silicon containing compounds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203+,   for processes of sweetening mineral oils with alkali metal
    hydroxides or carbonates.

    258     and 259, for processes of removing gums or gum formers from mineral
    oils with free alkali metals and alkali and alkaline earth metal compounds,
    respectively.

    283+,   for other processes for refining of mineral oils with alkali or
    alkaline earth metal compounds.


CLS 208/227
TXT Processes under subclass 226 which include desulfurization of mineral oil
    in plural stages at least one of which is in the presence of an added
    alkali or alkaline earth metal compound.


CLS 208/228
TXT Processes under subclass 226 combined with a nonconversion treatment of the
    mineral oil prior to the desulfurization with the alkali or alkaline earth
    metal compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227,    for processes including removal of sulfur from oil in a plurality
    of stages, alkali or alkaline earth metal being employed in one stage.


CLS 208/229
TXT Processes under subclass 226 wherein the desulfurizing treatment is
    combined with a subsequent nonconversion treatment of the desulfurized oil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227,    for processes including removal of sulfur from oil in a plurality
    of stages, alkali or alkaline earth metal being employed in one stage.


CLS 208/230
TXT Processes under subclass 226 wherein an alkali metal compound is employed.


CLS 208/231
TXT Processes under subclass 230 wherein an oxygen containing organic compound
    is employed in addition of the alkali metal compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204,    for mineral oil sweetening processes wherein an alkali metal
    hydroxide or carbonate is employed with an oxygen containing organic
    compound.


CLS 208/232
TXT Processes under subclass 231 wherein an added alcohol is employed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205,    for sweetening treatments wherein an alkali metal hydroxide or
    carbonate and an acyclic alcohol are used.


CLS 208/233
TXT Processes under subclass 232 wherein there is also employed an organic
    compound is addition to an alcohol and an alkali metal compound.


CLS 208/234
TXT Processes under subclass 231 combined with the treatment of the alkali
    metal compound and/or oxygen organic compound employed for desulfurizing to
    restore it to the original condition or to condition for reuse.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, for a composition comprising a catalyst or sorbent, per se, and
    see especially subclasses 20+ for a process of regenerating a catalyst or
    sorbent.


CLS 208/235
TXT Processes under subclass 230 combined with the treatment of the alkali
    metal compound employed for desulfurization to restore it to the original
    condition or to condition for reuse.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, for a composition comprising a catalyst or sorbent, per se, and
    see especially subclasses 20+ for a process of regenerating a catalyst or
    sorbent.


CLS 208/236
TXT Processes under subclass 208 wherein mineral oil is desulfurized by use of
    a nitrogen containing compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206     and 207, for sweetening treatments employing nitrogen containing
    treating agents.

    232,    for desulfurization processes wherein alkanol amines are used in
    combination with alkali metal compounds.


CLS 208/237
TXT Processes under subclass 208 wherein mineral oil is desulfurized by the use
    of an added organic compound.


CLS 208/238
TXT Processes under subclass 237 wherein a hydrocarbon is employed.


CLS 208/239
TXT Processes under subclass 237 wherein a heavy metal soap (heavy metal salts
    of higher fatty acid or naphthenic acid) is employed.


CLS 208/240
TXT Processes under subclass 237 wherein an oxygen containing organic compound
    is employed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204+,   for sweetening processes employing oxygen containing organic
    compounds in combination with an alkali metal hydroxide or carbonate.

    231+,   for desulfurization processes using oxygen containing organic
    compounds in combination with an alkali metal compound.

    239,    for processes of desulfurization with heavy metal soaps.


CLS 208/241
TXT Processes under subclass 208 wherein a mineral oil is desulfurized by the
    use of a free halogen or a halide of a nonmetal.

    (1)     Note.  Boron halides and sulfur halides are examples of reagents
    employed in processes classified in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219+,   for desulfurizing processes wherein a halogen acid is employed.


CLS 208/242
TXT Processes under subclass 208 wherein a mineral oil is desulfurized by the
    use of added oxide of sulfur.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219+,   for desulfurizing processes wherein a sulfur containing acid is
    employed.

    338,    for processes of fractionating mineral oil by extracting with
    liquid sulfur dioxide.


CLS 208/243
TXT Processes under subclass 208 wherein mineral oil is desulfurized by use of
    a Group VI metal (Cr, Mo, W or Po) or compound thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216,    for hydrodesulfurization processes wherein a Group VI metal or
    compound thereof is used.

    295,    for other processes of refining using Group VI metal compounds.


CLS 208/244
TXT Processes under subclass 208 wherein mineral oil is desulfurized by use of
    a Group VIII metal (Fe, Co, Ni, Ru, Rh, Pd, Os, Ir or Pt) or compound
    thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217,    for hydrodesulfurization methods wherein a Group VIII metal or
    compound thereof is used.

    295,    for other processes of refining wherein Group VIII compounds are
    used.


CLS 208/245
TXT Processes under subclass 208 wherein mineral oil is desulfurized by the use
    of silicon or a compound thereof.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example, desulfurization
    processes wherein silicon oxides, per se, or combined as silicates (e.g.,
    clays) are used.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250,    for manipulative processes of desulfurizing mineral oils using
    unnamed solid contact agents, but which may be disclosed as being the clay
    type.

    299+,   for other processes of refining mineral oils by treating the same
    with solid contact agents, and particularly subclass 307 for the use of
    silicon containing treating agents, e.g., clay, in such processes.


CLS 208/246
TXT Processes under subclass 208 wherein mineral oil is desulfurized by the use
    of a Group IB metal (Cu, Ag or Au) or compound thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    296,    for other processes of refining wherein Group IB metal compounds
    are used.


CLS 208/247
TXT Processes under subclass 208 wherein mineral oil is desulfurized by the use
    of a Group IIB metal (Zn, Cd or Hg) or compound thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    296,    for other processes of refining wherein Group IIB metal compounds
    are used.


CLS 208/248
TXT Processes under subclass 208 wherein mineral oil is desulfurized by use of
    a Group III metal (Al, Ga, In, Tl, Sc, Y, a rare earth or actinide series
    metal) or compound thereof.

    (1)     Note.  When carriers such as alumina are used with a metal or oxide
    thereof as distinct compounds or combined as a complex compound, e.g.,
    aluminum molybdate, the original patent is classified with the metal
    provided for first in the schedule.


CLS 208/249
TXT Processes under subclass 208 wherein the treating agent comprises a Group
    IV, V, VII metal (Ti, Zr, Hf, V, Nb, Ta, Mn, Tc, Re, Ge, Sn, Pb, As, Sb or
    Bi) or compounds thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    292,    for other refining processes employing arsenic, antimony or bismuth
    containing agents.

    295,    for other refining processes wherein Group IV, V or VII metal
    compounds are used.


CLS 208/250
TXT Processes under subclass 208 for desulfurizing mineral oil by contacting
    the oil with solid contact agents.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is the collecting place for manipulate
    techniques of desulfurization with solid contacting agents claimed broadly
    and not limited to any specific type of treating agent provided or above.
    If the specific type of treating agent provided for above is set forth in a
    claim as well as the manipulative technique, the patent is classified above
    with the treating agent and cross-referenced herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146+,   for processes of converting mineral oils by contacting with solids.

    299+,   for other refining processes involving manipulative techniques of
    contacting mineral oils with solid catalysts or adsorbents.


CLS 208/251
TXT Processes under subclass 177 wherein a mineral oil is treated to remove a
    metal or metal compound therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  The metals or compounds thereof are contaminants which may
    have an effect of poisoning or rendering less active solid catalyst
    treating agents, e.g., platinum catalysts, and removal is necessary to
    prevent such effects.

    (2)     Note.  Processes classified in this or indented subclasses are
    those wherein (1) the claims specify the removal of metal or metal compound
    or (2) the disclosure is limited to the removal of the metal or metal
    compound.  See (2) Note to subclass 177.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88+,    for processes of removing metal contaminants from mineral oils
    combined with subsequent conversion of the refined oil whereby poisoning of
    the catalyst is prevented.


CLS 208/252
TXT Processes under subclass 251 wherein an acid is employed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90,     for processes of acid refining of mineral oil combined with
    subsequent chemical conversion.

    98,     for processes of chemical conversion of mineral oil combined with
    acid refining a product thereof.

    219+,   for processes of desulfurization of mineral oils with acids.

    256,    for processes removing gum or gum formers with acids.

    265+,   for other processes of refining of mineral oils with acids.


CLS 208/253
TXT Processes under subclass 251 wherein an added metal or a metal compound is
    employed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257+,   for processes of removing gums or gum formers using metals or metal
    compounds.

    283+,   for other refining processes using alkali or alkaline earth metal
    compounds.

    294,    for other refining processes using a free metal as the treating
    agent.

    295     through 297, for other refining processes wherein metal compounds
    are used.


CLS 208/254
TXT Processes under subclass 177 wherein a mineral oil is treated to remove
    nitrogen containing materials therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  Processes classified in this subclass are those in which (1)
    the claims specify the removal of nitrogen containing materials or (2)
    those in which the disclosure is limited to the removal of such materials.
    See (2) Note to subclass 177.


CLS 208/255
TXT Processes under subclass 177 wherein a mineral oil is treated to remove
    monoolefinic or polyolefinic components (gums or gum forming materials)
    therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  The olefinic compounds polymerize into gums and both the
    resulting gum or the gum former, per se, constitute an undesirable
    component of the oil.

    (2)     Note.  Processes classified in this or indented subclass are those
    in which (1) the claims specify the removal of gums or gum formers or (2)
    the disclosure is limited to the removal of such materials.  See (2) Note
    to subclass 177.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    507,    Earth Boring, Well Treating, and Oil Field Chemistry, subclass 90
    for compositions for preventing the formation of deposits in conduits
    carrying petroleum and processes involving the mere use of such
    compositions.


CLS 208/256
TXT Processes under subclass 255 wherein an acid is employed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90,     for processes of acid refining of mineral oil combined with a
    subsequent chemical conversion.

    98,     for processes of chemical conversion of a mineral oil combined with
    acid refining a product thereof.

    219+,   for processes of desulfurization of mineral oils with acids.

    252,    for processes of removing metallic contaminants with acids.

    265+,   for other processes of refining of mineral oils with acids.


CLS 208/257
TXT Processes under subclass 255 wherein a metal or a metal compound is
    employed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    253,    for processes of removing metal contaminants wherein a metal or
    metal compound is employed.

    283+,   for other refining processes wherein an alkali or alkaline earth
    metal compound is employed.

    294,    for other refining processes wherein a free metal is employed.

    295     through 297, for other processes of refining wherein metal
    compounds are employed.


CLS 208/258
TXT Processes under subclass 257 wherein elemental alkali metal is employed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    294,    for other refining processes using an elemental alkali metal.


CLS 208/259
TXT Processes under subclass 257 wherein an alkali or alkaline earth metal
    compound is employed.

    (1)     Note.  The "alkali metals" are lithium, sodium, potassium,
    rubidium, cesium and francium, and "alkaline earth metals" are calcium,
    barium, strontium and also includes magnesium.

    (2)     Note.  Natural clays which generally contain some alkali metal
    component are not included in this subclass but are classified with the
    aluminum or silicon compounds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    260+,   for processes of removing gums or gum formers wherein natural clays
    or alumina are used as the treating agents.

    283+,   for general refining processes wherein alkali or alkaline earth
    metal compounds are used as the treating agents.


CLS 208/260
TXT Processes under subclass 257 wherein aluminum oxide or a natural caly is
    employed.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example, manipulative processes
    of removing gums and gum formers by polymerizing the olefinic constituents
    using solid contact agents such as alumina or natural clays as the catalyst
    and then removing the polymer formed from the oil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    245,    for processes of desulfurizing mineral oils using a silicon
    containing treating agent.

    248,    for processes of desulfurizing mineral oils using aluminum or a
    compound thereof as the treating agent.

    250,    for other desulfurizing processes wherein solid contacting agents
    are used.

    297,    for other refining processes involving contacting mineral oil with
    a solid contact agent (catalyst or adsorbent).

    299+,   for other refining processes involving contacting the mineral oil
    with solid contact agent (catalyst or adsorbent).


CLS 208/261
TXT Processes under subclass 260 wherein the oil is in the vapor state when
    contacted with the clay or alumina.


CLS 208/262.1
TXT Halogen contaminant removal:

    Processes under subclass 177 for removing undesirable halogen containing
    components from mineral oils.

    (1)     Note.  Processes classified herein are those in which (a) the
    claims specify the removal of halogen containing materials or (b) the
    disclosure is limited to the removal of such materials.  See (2) Note to
    subclass 177.


CLS 208/262.5
TXT Polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB):

    Process under subclass 262.1 wherein the contaminant removed is a
    polychorinated biphenyl.


CLS 208/263
TXT Processes under subclass 177 for removing undesirable organic acids or
    phenolic components from mineral oils.

    (1)     Note.  Organic acids such as fatty and naphthenic acids tend to
    form soaps during refining and these soaps form undesirable emulsions,
    hence the necessity for removing the same from the oil.  Also some of these
    acidic materials tend to cause the oil to be corrosive unless removed.

    (2)     Note.  Processes classified in this subclass are those in which (1)
    the claims specify the removal of organic acid or phenol components or (2)
    the disclosure is limited to the removal of such components.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for processes including a conversion of a mineral oil combined with
    some step to prevent corrosion or erosion of the apparatus employed.


CLS 208/264
TXT Processes under subclass 177 wherein the mineral oil is treated with added
    hydrogen.

    (1)     Note.  The hydrogen may be added as a free gas or a hydrogen rich
    material may be used under such conditions as to generate or liberate
    hydrogen (hydrogen donor processes).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89,     for processes of refining mineral oil with hydrogen combined with
    chemical conversion of the oil.

    209+,   for processes of desulfurizing mineral oils wherein hydrogen is
    used.


CLS 208/265
TXT Processes under subclass 177 wherein mineral oil is treated with an added
    acid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90,     for processes of acid refining mineral oil combined with a
    subsequent chemical conversion.

    98,     for processes of chemical conversion of a mineral oil combined with
    acid refining a product thereof.

    219+,   for processes of desulfurizing mineral oils with acids.

    252,    for processes of removing metal contaminants with acids.

    256,    for processes of removing gums or gum formers with acids.


CLS 208/266
TXT Processes under subclass 265 wherein sulfuric acid is employed.

    (1)     Note.  Sulfuric acid treatment of mineral oils results in oils of
    improved odor, color, color stability, stability to heat and oxidation and
    resistance to sludge formation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224,    for processes of desulfurizing mineral oil with sulfuric acid.


CLS 208/267
TXT Processes under subclass 266 involving mixing the acid with the mineral oil
    by some particular procedure of agitating or fluid rotation which is
    recited other than by name only.


CLS 208/268
TXT Processes under subclass 266 for preparing highly refined or medicinal oils
    known as "white" oils.

    (1)     Note.  The treatment removes organic impurities resulting in an oil
    of improved odor and color suitable for pharmaceutical or medicinal
    purposes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263,    for processes for the treatment of mineral oil to remove organic
    acids or phenolic impurities.


CLS 208/269
TXT Processes under subclass 266 wherein mineral oil is separated into two or
    more fractions at least one of which is subjected to a sulfuric acid
    refining treatment combined with reblending of the mineral oil fractions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218,    for processes of desulfurization of mineral oils including
    separating the oil into fractions at least one of which is treated to
    remove sulfur.

    272,    for processes whereby mineral oil is fractionated and then at least
    one fraction is subjected to a sulfuric acid refining treatment, there
    being no reblending of the fractions.


CLS 208/270
TXT Processes under subclass 266 wherein mineral oil is subjected to a
    plurality of distinct refining treatments with acid, sulfuric acid being
    employed in at least one of the treatments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220,    for processes including plural stages of desulfurization, at least
    one of the treatments being with an acid.


CLS 208/271
TXT Processes under subclass 266 combined with a nonconversion treatment of the
    mineral oil prior to the sulfuric acid refining.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221,    for processes of acid desulfurizing a mineral oil combined with a
    treatment of the oil prior to desulfurizing.

    269,    for processes of fractionating the oil, sulfuric acid refining at
    least one fraction and then reblending the fractions ("split treatment").


CLS 208/272
TXT Processes under subclass 271 wherein the mineral oil is subjected to a
    fractionation prior to sulfuric acid refining.

    (1)     Note.  The fractionation may be carried out by distillation,
    solvent extraction, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    269,    for processes including preliminary fractionation combined with
    reblending, known as "split feed" treatments.


CLS 208/273
TXT Processes under subclass 266 wherein the acid treatment is combined with a
    subsequent nonconversion treatment of the sulfuric acid refined oil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222,    for processes of acid desulfurizing a mineral oil combined with the
    treatment of the desulfurized oil.


CLS 208/274
TXT Processes under subclass 273 wherein the sulfuric acid refined oil is
    subsequently treated with an added organic compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237+,   for processes of desulfurizing mineral oils with organic compounds.

    290+,   for processes of refining mineral oil in which an added organic
    material is employed.


CLS 208/275
TXT Processes under subclass 273 wherein the sulfuric acid refined oil is
    subsequently treated with a solid adsorbent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250,    for processes, particularly manipulative techniques of contacting
    mineral oils with solid adsorbents in a desulfurization treatment of the
    oils.

    299+,   for processes, particularly manipulative techniques of contacting
    mineral oils with solid contact treating agents in refining processes.


CLS 208/276
TXT Processes under subclass 266 in which an added material, other than water,
    is used along with the sulfuric acid.


CLS 208/277
TXT Processes under subclass 276 wherein an added organic compound is employed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290+,   for processes of refining mineral oil in which an added organic
    compound is employed.


CLS 208/278
TXT Processes under subclass 276 wherein a solid material, e.g., a carrier for
    the acid, is employed.

    (1)     Note.  The added material must remain in the solid state during the
    refining operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    299+,   for processes of refining mineral oil by use of solid contact
    material, generally involving some manipulative solid-liquid contact
    procedure.


CLS 208/279
TXT Processes under subclass 265 wherein a phosphorus containing acid is
    employed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    292,    for other refining processes wherein phosphorus containing
    materials such as phosphoric anhydride are used.


CLS 208/280
TXT Processes under subclass 265 wherein a halogen containing acid is employed.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example, processes of refining
    mineral oils with hydrofluoric acid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241,    for processes of desulfurizing mineral oils wherein nonmetal halide
    treating agents are used.


CLS 208/281
TXT Processes under subclass 280 wherein an hydrochloric acid is employed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225,    for processes of desulfurizing mineral oil with hydrochloric acid.


CLS 208/282
TXT Processes under subclass 265 wherein an organic acid is employed.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example, processes of treating
    mineral oils with lower aliphatic acids, naphthenic acid, salicylic acid,
    et.


CLS 208/283
TXT Processes under subclass 177 wherein mineral oil is treated with an alkali
    or alkaline earth metal compound.

    (1)     Note.  For the purpose of this classification, the alkali metals
    are sodium, potassium, lithium, rubidium, cesium and francium and the
    alkaline earth metals are calcium, barium and strontium and also including
    magnesium.

    (2)     Note.  Natural clays which generally contain some alkali metal
    component are not included in this or indented subclasses but are
    classified instead with the aluminum or silicon containing compounds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203+,   for processes of sweetening using alkali metal hydroxides and
    carbonates.

    226+,   for processes of desulfurizing mineral oils with alkali or alkaline
    earth metal compounds.

    259,    for processes of removing gums or gum formers with alkali or
    alkaline earth metal compounds.


CLS 208/284
TXT Processes under subclass 283 wherein an alkali metal compound is employed.


CLS 208/285
TXT Processes under subclass 284 combined with a nonconversion treatment of the
    mineral oil prior to the treatment with the alkali metal compound.


CLS 208/286
TXT Processes under subclass 284 combine with a nonconversion treatment of the
    mineral oil subsequent to the treatment with the alkali metal compound.


CLS 208/287
TXT Processes under subclass 284 wherein a solid on which the alkali metal
    compound is supported is employed.

    (1)     Note.  The solid carriers may be clay, alumina, carbon, etc., and
    must remain in the solid state during the refining operation.


CLS 208/288
TXT Processes under subclass 284 in which an added material, other than water,
    is combined with the alkali metal compound.


CLS 208/289
TXT Processes under subclass 177 wherein mineral oil is treated with an added
    nitrogen containing compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206,    for processes of sweetening mineral oils with nitrogen containing
    compounds in combination with an alkali metal hydroxide or carbonate.

    207,    for processes of sweetening mineral oils with nitrogen containing
    treating agents.

    236,    for processes of desulfurizing mineral oils with nitrogen
    containing treating agents.


CLS 208/290
TXT Processes under subclass 177 wherein mineral oil is treated with an added
    organic compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237+,   for processes of desulfurizing mineral oils with organic compounds.

    282,    for refining processes wherein organic acids are used.


CLS 208/291
TXT Processes under subclass 290 wherein an organic compound containing oxygen
    is employed.


CLS 208/292
TXT Processes under subclass 177 wherein mineral oil is treated with boron,
    phosphorus, arsenic, antimony or bismuth or a compound thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249,    for processes of desulfurizing mineral oils with a Group V metal or
    compound thereof.

    279,    for processes of refining mineral oils with phosphorus containing
    acids.

    290+,   for refining processes wherein organic compounds of boron,
    phosphorus, arsenic, antimony or bismuth are used.


CLS 208/293
TXT Processes under subclass 177 wherein mineral oil is treated with an added
    sulfur containing material.

    (1)     Note.  Metal sulfates and sulfides and the various sulfur oxides
    are examples of treating agents used in the processes classified herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242,    for processes of desulfurizing mineral oils using sulfur oxides.


CLS 208/294
TXT Processes under subclass 177 wherein mineral oil is treated with an
    elemental metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    253,    for processes of removing metal contaminants by employing elemental
    metal.

    258,    for processes of removing gums or gum formers with an elemental
    alkali metal.

    292,    for refining processes wherein elemental arsenic, antimony or
    bismuth is used.


CLS 208/295
TXT Processes under subclass 177 wherein mineral oil is treated with a compound
    of a metal of Groups IV, V, VI, VII or VIII.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216,    217, 243, 244, and 249, for processes of desulfurizing mineral oils
    using Groups IV, V, VI, VII or VIII metal compounds.

    292,    for processes of refining employing arsenic, antimony or bismuth
    containing treating agent.

    299+,   for refining processes, particularly those involving manipulative
    techniques, of contacting mineral oils with solid catalysts or adsorbents.


CLS 208/296
TXT Processes under subclass 177 wherein mineral oil is treated with a compound
    of a metal of Groups IB, or IIB, i.e., Cu, Ag, Au, Zn, Cd or Hg.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246,    for processes of desulfurizing mineral oils with Group IB metal
    compounds.

    247,    for processes of desulfurizing mineral oils with Group IIB metal
    compounds.


CLS 208/297
TXT Processes under subclass 177 wherein mineral oil is treated with a Group
    III metal compound, excluding those processes in which the oily such
    compound is clay.

    (1)     Note.  Included in Group III metals are Al, Ga, In, Tl, Sc, Y, rare
    earth and actinide series metals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248,    for processes of desulfurizing mineral oils using Group III metal
    compounds.


CLS 208/298
TXT Processes under subclass 177 involving contacting mineral oil with liquid
    treating agents not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  Slurries of solids are included herein as liquid treating
    agents when handled as a liquid.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is the collecting place for manipulative
    techniques for refining mineral oil with liquid treating agents claimed
    broadly, or treating agents not provided for above.  Processes involving
    some manipulative technique and also specifying the use of a treating agent
    provided for above are cross referenced to this subclass if necessary.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    339,    for solvent fractionation of mineral oils involving some particular
    liquid to liquid contacting procedure.


CLS 208/299
TXT Processes under subclass 177 involving contacting mineral oil with a solid
    catalyst or adsorbent not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses are the collecting places for
    manipulative techniques for refining mineral oil with a solid catalyst or
    adsorbent which is either unidentified, or is not provided for above.
    Processes which involve some manipulative technique and also specify a
    solid provided for above are cross referenced to this or indented subclass
    if necessary.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146+,   for processes including manipulative techniques of contacting
    mineral oils with solid catalysts or heat carriers during the chemical
    conversion of the oil.

    250,    for processes of contacting mineral oil with solids in the
    desulfurizing of mineral oils.

    298,    for mineral oil refining processes involving contacting the oil
    with a slurry of solids handled as a liquid.


CLS 208/300
TXT Processes under subclass 299 wherein a solid treating agent having some
    structural characteristic particularly adapting it for refining mineral oil
    is employed.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of structural characteristics which are regarded as
    peculiar to the use of the solid for refining are size, shape and degree of
    porosity.


CLS 208/301
TXT Processes under subclass 299 combined with a nonconversion treatment of the
    mineral oil prior to the contacting with the solid catalyst or adsorbent.


CLS 208/302
TXT Processes under subclass 299 combined with a nonconversion treatment of the
    mineral oil subsequent to the contacting of the oil with the solid catalyst
    or adsorbent.


CLS 208/303
TXT Processes under subclass 299 wherein mineral oil is subjected to a
    plurality of distinct refining treatments, solid catalyst or adsorbent
    being employed in each of the treatments.


CLS 208/304
TXT Processes under subclass 299 wherein the solid catalyst or adsorbent move
    downwardly in a contacting chamber.

    (1)     Note.  The solids may flow downwardly as a gravitating compact bed
    or as freely falling bodies.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165+,   for mineral oil conversion processes in which the oil is contacted
    with a downwardly moving compact bed of solids.

    176,    for mineral oil conversion process in which the oil is contacted
    with solids moving downwardly other than as a gravitating compact bed, and
    other than in suspension.


CLS 208/305
TXT Processes under subclass 299 combined with a treatment to restore the
    activity of the solid catalyst of adsorbent to the original condition or to
    condition for reuse.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 670+ for processes of
    purifying a liquid by ion exchange or sorption combined with regenerating
    the agents used.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, for a composition comprising a catalyst or sorbent, per se, and
    see especially subclasses 20+ for a process of regenerating a catalyst or
    sorbent.


CLS 208/306
TXT Processes under subclass 299 carried out in the presence of a solid
    contacting agent which is either a physical mixture of several solids or a
    complex chemical combination of such solids.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149,    for processes of conversion of mineral oil involving contacting the
    oil with a mixture of dissimilar solids.


CLS 208/307
TXT Processes under subclass 299 wherein a silicon containing compound or a
    free carbon containing material is employed.


CLS 208/308
TXT Processes under the class definition for the separation of mineral oils
    into hydrocarbon fractions at least one of which is a mineral oil.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example, the separation of
    mineral oil components by physical processes or by treatment with
    emulsifying agents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177+,   for processes of removing nonhydrocarbon impurities, gums or gum
    forming hydrocarbons from mineral oils.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the destruction or containment of hazardous or toxic waste
    in the form of fractionated hydrocarbons.


CLS 208/309
TXT Processes under subclass 308 wherein an asphaltic fraction is separated
    from the remaining portion of the mineral oil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39+,    for processes of recovering, making or treating an asphalt as a
    product.  Note particularly subclass 45 for the recovery of asphalt by
    extraction. Processes classified in this subclass (309) are those in which
    the object is to obtain a refined mineral oil of reduced asphalt content
    and there is no recovery of asphalt as a product.

    86,     for processes of deasphalting combined with a chemical conversion
    of the deasphalted mineral oil.


CLS 208/310
TXT Processes under subclass 308 wherein a mineral oil or mineral oil
    containing fluid mixture is contacted with a solid material which
    selectively adsorbs a mineral oil fraction from the mixture.

    (1)     Note.  Processes classified herein may involve the treatment of a
    liquid mineral oil in order to selectively adsorb certain fractions
    therefrom or the treatment of a mineral oil vapor containing gaseous
    mixture to adsorb the mineral oil vapors therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250,    for desulfurizing processes wherein solid adsorbents are used
    involving solids contacting and mixing procedures.

    299+,   for refining processes wherein solid adsorbents are used to
    separate impurities.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 90+ for processes of gas
    separation involving solid adsorbents.  This subclass (310) provides for
    processes wherein a mineral oil is separated from a gas or vapor by use of
    a solid adsorbent which also include the recovery of a mineral oil product.
     Processes which involve a gas separation classifiable in Class 95 followed
    by the recovery of a mineral oil by name only, e.g., distillation or
    heating, are classified in Class 95.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, particularly subclasses 656+ and
    660+ for liquid separation or purification not elsewhere provided for,
    using solid sorbents.  Processes of fractionating mineral oil by use of
    adsorbents is classified in this subclass (310).


CLS 208/311
TXT Processes under subclass 308 in which mineral oil is mixed with or
    contacted with another liquid which will dissolve or is miscible with a
    portion or fraction of the oil forming a solution or liquid phase which is
    immiscible with another oil fraction not so dissolved.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8+,     for processes of extracting mineral oil from solid natural sources.

    31      and 33+, for processes of recovery or treatment of paraffin wax
    involving solvent extracting.

    45,     for processes of recovery of asphalt, tar, pitch or resin by
    solvent extraction.

    87,     for processes of solvent extracting mineral oil combined with
    conversion of the extracted oil.

    96,     for processes of converting mineral oil combined with solvent
    extracting the converted oil.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 14.52 for apparatus specialized
    for the solvent extraction of mineral oils.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, for processes of separating
    liquids not otherwise provided for.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 255+ for extracting, leaching, or
    dissolving apparatus not otherwise provided for.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses for
    processes directed to extracting, leaching or dissolving therein provided
    for and subclass 658.5 (Class 423) for extracting, leaching or dissolving
    processes not otherwise provided for.

    554,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 9-16 for processes of extraction for
    recovering fatty oil compounds.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclasses 833+ for processes
    of recovering particular hydrocarbons by solvent extraction.


CLS 208/312
TXT Processes under subclass 311 combined with the mixing of an extract mineral
    oil fraction with another mineral oil.

    (1)     Note.  The mineral oil with which the extract fraction is mixed may
    be another fraction of the same or different extraction process or an
    unextracted mineral oil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14+,    for processes of mixing or blending mineral oil fractions not
    combined with the extraction process.


CLS 208/313
TXT Processes under subclass 311 wherein mineral oil is distilled in the
    presence of a solvent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclasses 50+ for a
    separatory distillation process including adding a material to alter the
    relative volatility of the components of a mixture.


CLS 208/314
TXT Processes under subclass 311 in which a mineral oil is subjected to a
    plurality of successive extractions, each involving the use of a different
    oil-miscible solvent, there being a separation of the extract phase from
    the oil between at least two of the extraction steps.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    321,    for mineral oil extraction processes including solvent recovery or
    rehabilitation in which a second solvent miscible with the extraction
    solvent is employed to effect a separation of the extracted oil therefrom.

    323+,   for processes in which a mixture of solvent components is employed
    in a single extraction zone or where a solvent modifier is subsequently
    added to the extraction zone prior to any phase separation.


CLS 208/315
TXT Processes under subclass 314 wherein at least one of the extracted
    fractions of a later extraction step is returned to an earlier extraction
    step.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    318,    for extraction processes involving recycle of a fraction thereof
    which include the use of only one solvent (whether single or plural stage
    operation).


CLS 208/316
TXT Processes under subclass 314 wherein the solvents used in each extraction
    contain essentially the same ingredients but differ from each other in the
    proportions thereof.


CLS 208/317
TXT Processes under subclass 311 wherein mineral oil is subjected to extraction
    in a plurality of stages the oil and the solvent employed flowing from
    stage to stage in opposite directions.


CLS 208/318
TXT Processes under subclass 311 wherein a phase or product of an extraction
    step is returned to either the same or a previous extraction zone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315,    for plural stage extraction processes with different solvents
    including recycle of a product fraction.


CLS 208/319
TXT Processes under subclass 311, (1) wherein there is a change in the pressure
    exerted on a single extraction zone to effect a separation of the phases
    thereof or (2) wherein each of several extraction zones is maintained under
    different pressure.


CLS 208/320
TXT Processes under subclass 311 wherein (1) there is maintained a difference
    of temperature between different locations in a single extraction zone, or
    (2) wherein each of several extraction zones is maintained under a
    different temperature.


CLS 208/321
TXT Processes under subclass 311 combined with a particular treatment to remove
    or recover the solvent from a phase of the extraction.

    (1)     Note.  The mere recitation of the step of recovering the solvent by
    name only is not sufficient for classification in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass provides for the specific separation of the
    mineral oil from the solvent, inferentially, solvent is also recovered.


CLS 208/322
TXT Processes under subclass 311 wherein an organic compound is employed as the
    extracting solvent medium.


CLS 208/323
TXT Processes under subclass 322 in which (1) the solvent initially comprises a
    mixture of compound at least one of which is organic, or (2) a plurality of
    solvents is added sequentially without any intervening separation of the
    phases.

    (1)     Note.  The added component may be an additive which increases or
    decreases the solvent power of the primary solvent and may be added to
    effect phase separation.


CLS 208/324
TXT Processes under subclass 323 wherein an inorganic compound is employed in
    addition to the organic component.


CLS 208/325
TXT Processes under subclass 322 wherein a heterocyclic compound is employed as
    a solvent.


CLS 208/326
TXT Processes under subclass 325 wherein the heterocyclic compound contains
    nitrogen in the ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example, extraction processes
    using pyridine or morpholine as the solvent.


CLS 208/327
TXT Processes under subclass 325 wherein the heterocyclic compound is furfural
    or a derivative thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    325,    for solvent fractionation of mineral oil which involve the use of a
    furane type heterocyclic compound other than furfural or derivative thereof.


CLS 208/328
TXT Processes under subclass 322 wherein a nonoxocarbonylic compound is
    employed as the solvent.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example, extraction processes
    using carboxylic acids, salts or amides, not classified above, as the
    solvent.


CLS 208/329
TXT Processes under subclass 328 wherein the nonoxocarbonylic compound is an
    ester of a carboxylic acid.


CLS 208/330
TXT Processes under subclass 322 wherein a nitrogen containing organic compound
    is employed as a solvent.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example, extraction processes
    using nitro compounds or nitriles.


CLS 208/331
TXT Processes under subclass 330 wherein the nitrogen containing organic
    compound includes an amine group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains for example, extraction processes
    using acyclic or carbocyclic amines, guanidines, oximes and quaternary
    ammonium compounds.


CLS 208/332
TXT Processes under subclass 322 wherein an organic compound including an oxo
    group is employed as a solvent.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example, extraction processes
    using aldehydes or ketones.


CLS 208/333
TXT Processes under subclass 322 wherein an organic compound including an oxy
    group is employed as a solvent.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example, extraction processes
    using alcohols or alcoholates.


CLS 208/334
TXT Processes under subclass 333 wherein the oxy compound is an ether.


CLS 208/335
TXT Processes under subclass 333 wherein an aromatic oxy compound is employed.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example, extraction processes
    using phenols or phenolates.


CLS 208/336
TXT Processes under subclass 322 wherein a halogen containing compound is
    employed as a solvent.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example, extraction processes
    using carbon tetrachloride, trichlorethylene, etc.


CLS 208/337
TXT Processes under subclass 322 wherein a hydrocarbon is employed as a solvent.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example, extraction processes
    using propane.


CLS 208/338
TXT Processes under subclass 311 wherein liquid sulfur dioxide is employed as a
    solvent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242,    for processes for desulfurizing mineral oil in which sulfur dioxide
    is employed.


CLS 208/339
TXT Processes under subclass 311 directed to the particular procedure for
    contacting a mineral oil with liquid solvent.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is the collecting place for manipulative
    techniques for solvent fractionation of mineral oils.  Processes involving
    some manipulative technique and limited to the use of a solvent provided
    for above are cross-referenced to this subclass if necessary.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    298,    for processes of refining mineral oil involving some particular
    liquid to liquid contacting procedure.


CLS 208/340
TXT Processes under subclass 308 including recovery of liquid mineral oils,
    e.g., gasoline, from natural gases or from uncondensed gas-vapor mixtures
    obtained from a mineral oil conversion operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95+,    and particularly subclasses 100+ for mineral oil conversion
    processes combined with the subsequent separation of the vapor and liquid
    products.

    310,    for processes of recovering mineral oils from gas or vapor
    involving the use of solid adsorbents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 72+ for
    apparatus there provided for combined with means to recover vapors or other
    substances from gases.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, for processes for separating gases from
    mixtures of gases, liquids or solids. This and the indented subclasses
    (340+) provide for processes wherein a mineral oil is separated from a gas
    or vapor combined with the recovery of the mineral oil as a product.
    Processes which involve a gas separation procedure classifiable in Class 95
    followed by the recovery of a mineral oil by name only, e.g., reciting only
    rectification, vacuum pressure or flash distillation, are  classified in
    Class 95.  Processes wherein the mineral oil recovery step includes any
    details thereof, or includes some subsequent treatment of the separated
    mineral oil are classified in Class 208.

    62,     Refrigeration, particularly subclasses 600+, 93+ and 272+ for
    processes and apparatus for separating vapors from gases by refrigeration.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses, for gas
    scrubbing apparatus.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 210+ for purifying or
    separating gases by a chemical reaction.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, especially subclasses 331+,
    502+, and 709+ for condensation reactions of hydrocarbon gases to produce
    oily liquids.


CLS 208/341
TXT Processes under subclass 340 wherein a gas mineral oil vapor mixture is
    contacted with a liquid (lean absorbent) which takes up or absorbs the
    mineral oil vapors therefrom (becoming an enriched or rich absorbent)
    combined with a specific step of vaporization to separate the mineral oil
    from the rich absorbent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    347+,   for processes of distilling mineral oil.


CLS 208/342
TXT Processes under subclass 341 wherein the initial gas-vapor mixture is
    cooled to condense desired fractions prior to the absorption step.

    (1)     Note.  In the processes classified here, the fractional
    condensation prior to absorption is carried out to remove fractions boiling
    outside the range of the product desired or to recover a condensate which
    may be used as the lean oil in the absorption stage.


CLS 208/343
TXT Processes under subclass 341 wherein the lean absorbent is passed in
    indirect heat exchange relationship with the rich absorbent.

    (1)     Note.  The heat from the desorbed lean oil is used to preheat or
    vaporize the rich oil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    353     and 365, for heat exchange processes in the distillation of mineral
    oils.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 134 for vaporizing apparatus
    having means to preheat the incoming oil by the heat of the vapors or
    unvaporized residue of distillation.


CLS 208/344
TXT Processes under subclass 341 wherein the gas-vapor mixture is subjected to
    a plurality of separate absorption treatments.


CLS 208/345
TXT Processes under subclass 344 wherein at least one of the absorption steps
    is under a pressure greater than atmospheric pressure.


CLS 208/346
TXT Processes under subclass 341 wherein the absorption is carried out under a
    pressure greater than atmospheric pressure.


CLS 208/347
TXT Processes under subclass 308 wherein mineral oil mixtures are volatilized
    for the purpose of recovering specific fractions from the vapors produced
    by condensation.

    (1)     Note.  The material to be distilled is called the distilland and
    the products produced by condensation are called the condensate or
    distillate. Unvaporized material left in the still after vaporization has
    taken place is the residue.

    (2)     Note.  The absence of the volatilizing or condensing steps from the
    process does not exclude the patent from this and indented subclasses if it
    is evident or well known that the process is designed to be used in
    connection with such step.

    (3)     Note.  This and indented subclasses (347+) take processes of
    distillation of mineral oil, and patents are classified herein if
    distillation of mineral oil is the only species claimed or the only
    material disclosed. However, if distillation of a nonmineral oil is also
    claimed, or distillation of a nonmineral oil is disclosed with all claims
    being generic to both a mineral oil and a nonmineral oil, the patent is
    classified in Class 203, Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, and
    cross-referenced to Class 208.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41+,    for processes of preparing or recovering asphalts, tars, pitches or
    resins by distillation.

    46+,    for vaporizing processes wherein the mineral oils are heated under
    conditions which chemically convert the oil forming a modified mineral
    (e.g., reforming) or to coke.

    92+,    for processes for distillation of mineral oil combined with the
    subsequent chemical conversion thereof.

    100+,   for processes of chemical conversion of mineral oil combined with
    subsequent separating mineral oil vapors and liquid products by procedures
    including distillation.

    184+,   for processes of refining or purification of used mineral oil
    including distillation treatments.

    313,    for processes of distilling mineral oil in the presence of a
    solvent.

    341+,   for processes of recovering mineral oils from natural or converted
    gases by absorption combined with distillation of the rich absorbent to
    recover mineral oil.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclasses 98-141 for apparatus peculiar
    to the distillation of mineral oil.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, appropriate subclasses, for distillation
    apparatus not otherwise provided for.


CLS 208/348
TXT Processes under subclass 347 wherein a nongaseous compound is added to the
    distilland prior to or during the distillation.

    (1)     Note.  The additive materials may aid the distillation, per se, or
    prevent corrosion of the apparatus, or may be volatilized during the
    distillation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for process of converting mineral oil chemically wherein nongaseous
    materials are added to the system to prevent corrosion in the system.

    125     through 127, for cracking processes wherein a nongaseous,
    noncatalytic compound is added.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclasses 6+, for a
    distillation process in which a nongaseous material is added to the
    distilland to inhibit corrosion and subclasses 50+ for a distillation
    process in which the nongaseous material is added to the distilland to aid
    the distillation.


CLS 208/349
TXT Processes under subclass 347 wherein the condensate or residue resulting
    from the distillation, each constituting a liquid product, is subjected to
    a nonvaporization treatment.

    (1)     Note.  The nonvaporization treatment may include a blending of any
    desired condensate fraction with other condensate fractions or with the
    residue, filtering, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclasses 39+, for a
    distillation process including a disparate separation step subsequent to
    the distillation step.


CLS 208/350
TXT Processes under subclass 347 carried out in such a manner that vapor rising
    from the still comes into contact with a descending condensed portion of
    vapor previously evolved from the still.

    (1)     Note.  In rectification processes the refluxing condensate scrubs
    the higher boiling mineral oil constituents from the vapor stream, and at
    the same time is itself stripped of a portion of its content of low boiling
    mineral oil constituents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclasses 153+ and 158+ for distillation
    apparatus including a fractionating column.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, appropriate subclass, for a
    separatory distillation process, and note particularly, subclasses 75, 82,
    93, 94, 97, and 98 for a distillation process in which a separated
    condensate is returned to the distillation zone.


CLS 208/351
TXT Processes under subclass 350 wherein normally noncondensable aliphatic
    hydrocarbon fractions having from 1 to 4 carbon atoms are removed from the
    system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example, processes of
    stabilizing gasoline or pressure distillates from a cracking operation by
    the rectification treatment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    342,    for fractional condensation treatments of mineral oil prior to an
    absorption treatment.


CLS 208/352
TXT Processes under subclass 350 wherein the distilland is heated under
    pressure high enough to prevent ebullition and the heated distilland is
    then introduced into a zone of lesser pressure resulting in the
    volatilization of at least a portion of the distilland.

    (1)     Note.  In flash vaporization, the distilland is usually heated at a
    pressure above atmospheric and released into a zone having a pressure less
    than atmospheric.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    361,    for flash vaporization processes in nonrectification distillation
    processes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclass 88 for a flash
    distillation process.


CLS 208/353
TXT Processes under subclass 350 wherein one component being distilled is
    heated by indirect contact with the same or another component of the
    process.

    (1)     Note.  In the processes classified herein, the heat exchange is
    usually between the hot residue and the incoming distilland.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    343,    for processes of recovering mineral oil from gases including heat
    exchange between lean and rich absorbents.

    365,    for heat exchange in nonrectification distillation processes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 134 for apparatus for distilling
    mineral oil having means to recover heat from the vapor or residuum.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclasses 21+ for a
    distillation process in which material being distilled is heated by
    indirect contact with itself or some other component in the process.


CLS 208/354
TXT Processes under subclass 350 wherein there are either two or more distinct
    rectification zones or at least one rectification zone combined with at
    least one nonrectification distillation zone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    364+,   for plural stages of non rectification distillation processes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclasses 71+ for a
    distillation process including two or more distinct distillation steps.


CLS 208/355
TXT Processes under subclass 354 wherein either the vapors, condensate and/or
    residue from a later distillation zone is returned to an earlier
    distillation zone.

    (1)     Note.  In the processes classified herein, condensate may be
    recycled as a diluent or a condensing medium; heated residue may be
    recycled to effect reboiling of distilland in the earlier stage; or vapor
    may be recycled to assist in vaporizing and stripping of the lower boiling
    constituents from the higher boiling constituents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclasses 75, 78, 82, and
    84, for a distillation process including the step of returning a vapor,
    condensate and/or residue from a later distillation zone to an earlier
    distillation zone.


CLS 208/356
TXT Processes under subclass 350 carried out in the presence of an added gas or
    vapor to effect volatilization of the distilland.

    (1)     Note.  The gas or vapor, for example, may be added prior to or
    during vaporization.  Steam, carbon dioxide, nitrogen, methane, fuel gas,
    and combustion gases are examples of gases or vapors used in the processes
    classified herein, and may, for example, be added to lower the partial
    pressure of the volatile constituents permitting vaporization at lower
    temperatures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128+,   for cracking processes wherein vapors are added to the mineral oil
    being heated prior to or during the cracking.

    362+,   for nonrectification distillation processes carried out in the
    presence of an added gas or vapor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclasses 126 and 127 for mineral oil
    vaporizing apparatus having means to inject gases or vapors into the
    vaporizing zone.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclass 49 for a convective
    distillation process and subclasses 76, 79, 83, 85, 92+, and 95+ for a
    distillation process in which steam is added.


CLS 208/357
TXT Processes under subclass 350 wherein the rectification zone is under a
    pressure greater or less than atmospheric pressure.

    (1)     Note.  The use of pressures varying from atmospheric changes the
    relative volatility of the components of the distilland which may lower the
    boiling point of the respective components of the mixture thereby
    increasing the ease of separation of the components of the distilland.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 114 for vaporizers adapted to
    distill mineral oil under reduced pressure.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclasses 73+ and 91+ for a
    distillation process utilizing pressure or vacuum.


CLS 208/358
TXT Processes under subclass 350 wherein condensate or residue is returned to
    the rectification zone after having been removed therefrom to assist in the
    vaporization process.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclass 98 for a
    distillation process including the step of returning a condensate or a
    residue to the distillation zone and note "SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS" and
    "SEARCH CLASS" thereunder.


CLS 208/359
TXT Processes under subclass 347 wherein the distilland is sprayed into the
    vaporization zone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 128 for vaporizing apparatus
    having means to introduce the mineral oil as a spray into the vaporizing
    zone.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 236 for distillation apparatus
    having means to spray the feed.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclass 90 for a process of
    spraying the feed into the distillation zone.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses
    for the spraying device, per se.


CLS 208/360
TXT Processes under subclass 347 wherein the distilland is introduced into the
    vaporization zone by spreading it as a thin film over a surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 128 for mineral oil vaporizing
    apparatus having means to spread the oil as a film into the vaporizing zone.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 236 for distillation apparatus
    having means to spread the feed in the form of a film.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclasses 72 and 89 for a
    distillation process of spreading the distilland as a thin film over a
    surface.


CLS 208/361
TXT Processes under subclass 347 wherein the distilland is heated under
    pressure high enough to prevent ebullition and the heated distilland is
    then introduced into a zone of lesser pressure resulting in the
    volatilization of at least a portion of the distilland.

    (1)     Note.  In flash vaporization, the distilland is usually heated at a
    pressure above atmospheric and released into a zone having a pressure less
    than atmospheric.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    352,    for processes of rectifying mineral oils including flash
    vaporization.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclass 88 for a separatory
    distillation process of heating the distilland under pressure high enough
    to prevent ebullition and the distilland is then introduced into a zone of
    lesser pressure.


CLS 208/362
TXT Processes under subclass 347 wherein a gas or vapor is employed to effect
    volatilization of the distilland.

    (1)     Note.  The gas or vapor, for example, may be added prior to or
    during vaporization.  Steam, carbon dioxide, nitrogen, methane, fuel gas,
    and combustion gases are examples of gases or vapors used in the processes
    classified herein, and may, for example, be added to lower the partial
    pressure of the volatile constituents permitting vaporization at lower
    temperatures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for processes of obtaining tars and pitches by distilling tars in
    the presence of hot gases (e.g., coal gases).

    128+,   for cracking processes wherein vapors are added to the mineral oil
    being heated prior to or during cracking.

    356,    for processes of rectifying mineral oil in the presence of an added
    gas or vapor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclasses 126 and 127 for mineral oil
    vaporizing apparatus having means to inject gases or vapors into the
    vaporizing zone.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclass 49 for a convective
    distillation processes and subclasses 76, 79, 83, 85, 92+, and 95+ for a
    distillation process in which steam is added.


CLS 208/363
TXT Processes under subclass 362 wherein the added vapor is steam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    348,    for mineral oil distillation processes wherein water has been added
    and which may be vaporized during distillation.


CLS 208/364
TXT Processes under subclass 347 wherein the vaporization is carried out in a
    plurality of separate and distinct zones.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    354+,   for processes including a plurality of vaporization zones, at least
    one of which is a rectification zone.


CLS 208/365
TXT Processes under subclass 364 wherein the distilland is heated by indirect
    contact with a heated product of the distillation from the same or from a
    different stage of vaporization.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    343,    for processes of recovering mineral oil from gases including heat
    exchange between lean and rich absorbents.

    353,    for rectification processes which include indirect heat exchange.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 134 for apparatus for distilling
    mineral oil having means to recover heat from the vapor or residuum.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclasses 14+ for a
    thermolytic distillation process wherein the distilland is heated by
    indirect contact with a heated product of the distillation process.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclasses 21+ for a
    separatory distillation process wherein the distilland is heated by
    indirect contact with a heated product of a distillation step.


CLS 208/366
TXT Processes under subclass 347 wherein the vaporization zone is under a
    pressure greater or less than atmospheric pressure.

    (1)     Note.  The use of pressures varying from atmospheric changes the
    relative volatility of the components of the distilland which may lower the
    boiling point of the respective components of the mixture thereby
    increasing the ease of separation of the components of the distilland.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 114 for vaporizers adapted for
    distilling mineral oil under reduced pressure.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclasses 91+, for a
    distillation process in which the distillation zone is under pressure or
    vacuum.


CLS 208/367
TXT Processes under subclass 347 wherein the distilland is kept in motion as by
    stirring during vaporization.

    (1)     Note.  The agitation of the distilland during vaporization improves
    the circulation and helps prevent undesirable deposits from forming.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for chemical conversion processes wherein carbon accumulations are
    prevented from forming on the equipment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 112 for rotary mineral oil
    stills and subclass 123 for mineral oil vaporizing apparatus having means
    to circulate or agitate the oil.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclasses 31 and 33 for a
    process of thermolytic distillation in which the solid distilland is
    agitated.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclasses 175 and 265 for distillation
    apparatus having means to agitate the distilland.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclass 20 for a
    distillation process in which the distilland is agitated to inhibit foaming
    and subclass 89 for a distillation apparatus in which the distilland film
    is agitated.

    366,    Agitating, appropriate subclass, for the agitating devices.


CLS 208/368
TXT Processes under subclass 347 wherein the volatiles are condensed by direct
    heat exchange with a coolant (there being direct vapor or gas-liquid
    contact).

    (1)     Note.  Water or mineral oil condensate may be coolants used to
    condense volatiles.


CLS 208/369
TXT Processes under subclass 347 involving some noncondensation treatment of
    the volatiles evolved during the distillation.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example, processes of filtering
    or heating the volatiles or utilizing them in some manner in the
    distillation operation.


CLS 208/370
TXT Processes under the class definition not provided for in any other subclass.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are miscellaneous treatments of mineral oils
    during transportation not provided for in any other class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, particularly subclass 13 for processes of improving
    the flow characteristics of fluids by addition of material or energy.

     507,   Earth Boring, Well Treating, and Oil Field Chemistry, subclass 90
    for compositions and processes for preventing contaminant deposits in
    petroleum oil conduits.


CLS 208/390
TXT TAR SAND TREATMENT WITH LIQUID:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which tar sand is contacted
    with a liquid material, ordinarily to dissolve or melt out the tar from the
    sand.


CLS 208/391
TXT Inorgnic (only) liquid:

    Subject matter under subclass 390 in which the liquid is inorganic, usually
    water.

    (1)     Note.  Treatment with a solvent mixture containing any organic
    diluent or adjuvant in admixture with water is classified in subclass 390.

    (2)     Note.  A multistep extraction procedure is classified in this
    subclass only when each extraction step uses an inorganic liquid only.


CLS 208/400
TXT BY TREATMENT OF SOLID MINERAL, E.G., COAL LIQUEFACTION, ETC.:

    Process under the class definition wherein a liquid oily or tarlike
    hydrocarbonaceous mixture is recovered from a solid mineral material feed,
    such as coal, diatomite, oil shale, tar sand, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are processes which may be considered merely
    "physical" such as removal of hydrocarbonaceous liquids from tar sands or
    shale by melting as well as digestion, pyrolysis or other chemical
    conversions of such solids to obtain mineral oils.

    (2)     Note.  The solid feedstock material may be in a form big enough to
    be handled as individual pieces of solids, or may be in particulate form,
    so that it is handled as fluent solids, or may be solid particles slurried
    in a liquid or gas.

    (3)     Note.  The designation of the feed by a term which usually implies
    a solid, e.g., "coal", "oil shale", "tar sands", etc., is sufficient basis
    to classify a patent in this or an indented subclass; however, it should be
    noted that a feedstock referred to as "shale oil", "coal liquids", etc., is
    not a solid and is provided for elsewhere in the class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39+,    for asphalt treatment including the treatment of solid natural
    asphalts found in substantially pure condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, appropriate subclasses for a solid
    product which is coke or modified coal, especially subclasses 620+ for a
    miscellaneous coal-treating process or a product thereof.  A process for
    producing such a solid product from  coal, whether or not also produced, is
    also classified in Class 44 if the process in not suitable for
    classification in Class 201.  Where a patent has a claim suitable for
    placement in Class 44 and another claim for Class 208, it is placed as as
    original in Class 44 and cross-referenced to this class (208).

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclasses 197+ for a fuel gas
    composition and/or a process for manufacture thereof not elsewhere provided
    for.  Where a solid mineral material is treated to recover a solid fuel
    product, the product is classified in Class 44 and the process is
    classified in Class 44 or Class 201, as appropriate, whether or not
    recoverable liquid or solid materials are produced.  Where a solid mineral
    material is treated to produce a liquid hydrocarbon mixture, the product is
    classified in this class (208) and the process also is classified in this
    class, whether or not a recoverable fuel gas is also produced.  However, a
    patent having a Class 48 product claim and a Class 208 process claim is
    classified in Class 48 and cross-referenced to Class 208.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 600+ for the extraction, per se, of a
    component from a mixture of gases by  liquefaction and separation.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 244+ for a process of recovering fluid materials
    or hydrocarbons converted to the fluid state from wells, especially
    subclasses 256+ for processes involving in situ combustion, subclasses
    272.1+ for processes involving injection and producing wells and heating
    the formation and subclass 302 for miscellaneous processes involving
    heating.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, appropriate subclasses for a
    process wherein a solid carboneaceous feedstock is subjected to pyrolysis
    and a solid coke or char is produced as recoveable product, whether or not
    a liquid mineral-oil-lide product is also produced.  Where in all the
    claims of such a patent any char which is produced by pyrolysis is burned
    as fuel in the process etc., the patent is classified as an original in
    Class 208 and cross-referenced to Class 201, where desired.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclasses 91+, 96+, 211+, and 217+ for
    apparatus for the pyrlolytic conversion of solids to coke where there is no
    subsequent treatment of the carbon product to form a mineral oils.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclass 2 for
    tunnel recovery of fluid mineral, and subclasses 3+ for in situ conversion
    of solid material other than  hydocarbon to fluid for recovery.

    518,    Chemistry:  Fischer-Tropsch Processes; or Purification or Recovery
    of  Products Thereof, appropriate subclass for a process wherein a organic
    compound or mixture or organic compounds is produced by the hydrogenation
    of a carbon oxide.  A patent claim to a multi-step process where the carbon
    oxide which is hydrogenated is produced from a solid mineral is classified
    in Class 518  when all of the liquid product follows the route:  Solid to
    carbon oxide to liquid hydrocarbon, but is classified in this class (208)
    when at least some of the liquid product is not derived from carbon oxide.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclasses 240+ for the
    production of a mineral-oil-like mixture from wood or solid nonmineral
    refuse, other appropriate  subclasses for the production of named specific
    hydrocarbon compounds, and subclass 943 for a collection of patents
    concerning conversion of coal or char to a specific hydrocarbon compound.


CLS 208/401
TXT Including a test or measurement:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 in which the process includes a step of
    testing or measuring any parameter involved in the procedure.

    (1)     Note.  Merely abiding by a specified parameter, e.g., operating at
    a prescribed temperature range in performing the process, is not considered
    measuring or testing.

    (2)     Note.  Included in the subclass are those processes wherein a step
    is controlled in response to the result of a test or measurement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses, for certain
    measuring and testing processes, per se, and the notes to the main class
    definition thereof for the locus of other measuring and testing processes.


CLS 208/402
TXT Using electrical, magnetic or wave energy:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 which includes a step of (1) passing an
    electric current directly through a feedstock, intermediate, product or
    other material used in process or (2) subjecting any  material in the
    process to an electric or magnetic field  or (3), directly applying radiant
    energy to the material.

    (1)     Note.  The energy employed must be applied directly to the material
    as part of the total process (including pretreatment or posttreatrment).

    (2)     Note.  Where the electrical energy is not applied directly to the
    material, but is used to generate heat energy that is transferred to the
    material before, during or after the operation, see other subclasses of
    this class.

    (3)     Note.  The wave energy applied to the work may be light, sonic,
    ultrasonic, emanations of radioactive material, infrared rays, ion
    bombardment, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 155+ for
    chemical production of a compound or element by electrical or wave energy
    in a magnetic field, subclasses 157.15+ for wave energy treatment involving
    chemical reaction, subclasses 164+ for chemical treatment of a compound or
    element by an electrostatic field or electrical discharge, subclasses 513+
    for electrophoretic or electro-osmotic separation or purification of a
    hydrocarbon oil, and subclasses 559+ for electrostatic separation or
    purification of a liquid hydrocarbon.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, appropriate subclasses for electrolytic
    treatment of a mineral oil.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 600+ for inductive heating, subclasses
    678+ for microwave heating, and subclasses 764+ for capacitive dielectric
    heating.

    250,    Radiant Energy, appropriate subclasses for general utilization of
    ray energy in all forms.


CLS 208/403
TXT Chemical modification of solids before hydrogenation:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 including a hydrogenation step and a
    step, upstream of the hydrogenation, in which a solid feed to the process
    undergoes a partial chemical reaction, which does not change the essential
    nature of the feed; e.g., coal may be deoxgenated or desulfurized, but it
    is not solublized or converted to coke.

    (1)     Note.  A step of hydrogenation is any chemical conversion step
    specified as being performed in the presence of free hydrogen or a compound
    specified as being a hydrogen donor.

    (2)     Note.  Mere removal of chemically nonbound water is not considered
    to be a chemical modification for this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclasses 620+ for chemical
    modification of coal, per se, without liquefaction.


CLS 208/404
TXT Using molten additive, e.g., heat carrier, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 having a  step wherein a heated liquid
    material is added to a feedstock, an intermediate or a product of the
    process, which material is a solid at normal temperature and pressure.


CLS 208/405
TXT Molten catalyst:

    Subject matter under subclass 404 wherein the heated liquid material is a
    reaction promoter or retarder other than a reactant, a solvent or other
    dispersing agent.


CLS 208/406
TXT Halide-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 405 in which the catalyst contains a compound
    of F, Cl, Br, I or At.


CLS 208/407
TXT Specified agitation or circulation in gas contact zone:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 including a step o contaction a solid or
    liquid with a gas, wherein the circulation pattern of the solid or liquid
    during the gas contacting, e.g., countercurrent flow, etc., is claimed or
    in which the solid or liquid moves in a particular way, e.g., horizontally,
    etc., while being contacted.

    (1)     Note.  A claim that the  contact takes place in a contact apparatus
    having a particular orientation, for example, a "horizontal contactor"
    usually is enough for placement in this subclass.


CLS 208/408
TXT Gas includes hydrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 407 wherein a gas containing elemental
    hydrogen, added to the process, is present in the gas contact zone.

    (1)     Note.  The presence of hydrogen gas normally produced during
    retorting operation is not sufficient fo replacement of a patent in this
    subclass.


CLS 208/409
TXT Vertical gas upflow, e.g., fluidization,etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 407 in which the gas moves vertically upward
    in the contact zone.

    (1)     Note.  The movement of solid or liquid may be concurrent with or
    countercurrent to the movement of the gas.

    (2)     Note.  A mere statement in a claim that fluidization occurs is
    sufficient for placement in this subclass.


CLS 208/410
TXT Using solid heat carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 409 in which a solid material is used to
    provide heat to the feed or to an intermediate in the process by direct
    contact.

    (1)     Note.  The solid material may be catalytic or inert, insofar as it
    provides direct contact heat.

    (2)     Note.  The mere burning of a solid material is usually not
    sufficient for classification in this subclass unless it comes into direct
    contact with the feedstock to be heated.

    (3)     Note.  The heat carrier may comprise solids produced in the process
    which are removed from a feedstock treatment zone and recycled to the same
    zone, with or without an intermediate increase in the heat content of the
    solids.


CLS 208/411
TXT Employing solid heat carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 407 in which a solid material is used to
    provide heat by direct contact with the feed or and intermediate in the
    process.

    (1)     Note.  The solid material may be catalytic or inert, insofar as it
    provides direct contact heat.

    (2)     Note.  The mere burning of a solid material is usually not
    sufficient for classification in this subclass unless it comes into direct
    contact with the feedstock to be heated.


CLS 208/412
TXT Plural hydrogenation steps:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 in which a feedstock is subjected to more
    that one hydrogenation treatment during the process.

    (1)     Note.  The plurality of the steps may be characterized by a
    completely desparate nature of the steps, e.g., one step being a treatment
    with gaseous hydrogen, another being a hydrogen, another being a hydrogen
    donor treatment, or the difference in the steps may be a mere claimed
    change in hydrogenation condition, e.g., a change in temperature, pressure,
    concentration of reactants, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Both hydrogenation must be applied to a material which is
    taken off as a product of the process, whether one or both hydrogenations
    are applied to only the product fraction, the entire feedstock or any
    product stream therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    416,    for a process wherein a recycle stream is hydrogenated.


CLS 208/413
TXT Solid catalyst in at least one step:

    Subject matter under subclass 412 in which the claimed hydrogenation
    conditions of at least one step include the presence of a solid material
    disclosed as being a catalyst.


CLS 208/414
TXT With hydrogen production from water:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 having a step wherein hydrogen contained
    in water is converted to free hydrogen.

    (1)     Note.  The water may be in any form, e.g., steam, water of
    hydration, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Often the water is contacted at an elevated temperature with
    CO or the coke or char formed by pyrolysis of part or all of the solid
    feedstock.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclasses 204+ for a process of
    making a so-called "water gas" mixture.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclass 647.7 for a process, per
    se, of making elemental hydrogen.


CLS 208/415
TXT Including contact of feed with liquid produced in the process, i.e.,
    recycle:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein material derived from the solid
    feed is withdrawn from a later stage of the process and contacted, at an
    earlier stage of the process, with the solid feed to the process or with
    other feed-derived material.


CLS 208/416
TXT With discrete hydrogenation of recycle stream:

    Subject matter under subclass 415 in which the material removed from the
    process stream for recycle is hydrogenated, apart form the main process
    stream.


CLS 208/417
TXT Recycle of bottoms (resid):

    Subject matter under subclass 415 in which a distillation is performed upon
    an intermediate mixture in the process, and the nonvaporized portion from
    the distillation operation is recycled.


CLS 208/418
TXT Including contact with hydrogen gas:

    Subject matter under subclass 415 wherein hydrogen gas, pure or in
    admixture with other gases is present in the reactor during or after the
    contaction with the recycle stream.


CLS 208/419
TXT Using specifically added catalyst during hydrogenation:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 in which the process conditions for
    hydrogenation include the presence of a material claimed as a catalyst,
    added to the hydrogenation zone from a source other than the solid feed
    material.

    (1)     Note.  The presence in the hydrogenation zone of feed-stock derived
    material such as sand from tar sand, char from pyrolysis, etc., does not
    indicate classification in this subclass, even when such material is
    described as having catalytic activity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    405,    for a process which uses a molten catalyst.


CLS 208/420
TXT Dissolved or suspended-thermally-decomposable catalyst, component or
    precursor:

    Subject matter under subclass 419 in which the catalyst, a component
    thereof, or a precursor thereof is dissolved in the reaction mixture or in
    which the reaction mixture contains in suspension a catalyst component or
    catalyst precursor which will decompose under the elevated temperature
    conditions of the reaction.


CLS 208/421
TXT Containing Group VI transition metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 419 in which the catalyst contains one or
    more of chromium, molybdenum or tungsten in free or combined form.


CLS 208/422
TXT And Group VIII metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 421 in which the catalyst contains one or
    more of cobalt, iron or nickel, or a platinum group metal, in free or
    combined form, in addition to the Group VI transition metal.


CLS 208/423
TXT Containing Group VIII metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 419 in which the catalyst contains one or
    more of cobalt, iron or nickel, or a platinum group metal (Pt, Pd, Ir, Rh,
    Ru, or Os), in free or combined form.


CLS 208/424
TXT Specified procedure to improve separation of solids from liquid product:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 in which a procedure, more than mere
    "separation" is claimed for removal of solids from the liquid product of
    the process.


CLS 208/425
TXT Including centrifugation, filtering, flotation or vibration:

    Subject matter under subclass 424 wherein the specified procedure includes
    the use of centrifugal force, shaking, or the attachment of gas bubbles to
    a solid, or the passage of liquid through a septum which holds back solids
    of a certain size.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402,    for a process which involves the use of sonic or supersonic
    vibrations.


CLS 208/426
TXT Including agglomeration, comminution or size-classification of solids:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein a step segregates solids in the
    stream into different locations, based upon difference in size, causes
    solid particles to join to provide larger-size particles, or breaks
    particles into smaller-size particles.

    (1)     Note.  The step may take place before, during or after the chemical
    or physical processing of the solid feedstock.


CLS 208/427
TXT Including burning of feed or product:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 in which the solid feed or a portion
    thereof, or a portion of the product, is combusted with oxygen or
    oxygen-containing material for any purpose.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 428 for a
    process of cooling solids by mere contact with a gas, that is, a quenching
    process, per se.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 256+ for a method of underground combustion of
    carbonaceous materials.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 3+
    for a method of in situ conversion of a  solid material to a fluid.

    518,    Chemistry:  Fischer-Tropsch Processes; or Purification or Recovery
    of  Products Thereof, appropriate subclass for a generalized hydrogenative
    conversion of a carbon oxide to a hydrocarbon mixture.


CLS 208/428
TXT Including contact with extraneous additive other than hydrogen, e.g.
    solvent, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein the feed material, an
    intermediate material, or a product mixture is contacted with a substance,
    other than hydrogen, brought in from outside the process.

    (1)     Note.  The substance may be disclosed as a catalyst, a solvent, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    415,    for a process having a step of liquid recycle.


CLS 208/429
TXT Distinct addition zones:

    Subject matter under subclass 428 in which additive comes into contact with
    feedstock in a plurality of distinct contact zones.

    (1)     Note.  The same additive may be employed in each contacting zone.

    (2)     Note.  An extraction which occurs in a contacting zone may extract
    or dissolve desired hydrocarbon fractions or may be a mere washing or
    leaching of inorganic components, etc.


CLS 208/430
TXT Contact with an additive, followed by chemical conversion:

    Subject matter under subclass 428 wherein a chemical conversion step is
    performed after a feed or intermediate is contacted with an additive, e.g.,
    mixing followed by conversion, extraction followed by conversion of
    extract, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of Chemical conversions are cracking, coking, etc.

    (2)     Note.  The chemical conversion may take place in the same chamber
    to which the additive is added, provided that the conversion is downstream
    of the contacting step.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    427,    for a process which includes combustion of feed or product.


CLS 208/431
TXT Specified hydrogen-donor solvent:

    Subject matter under subclass 428 including contact with a solvent compound
    or mixture of compounds which can be oxidized by contact with the
    hydrogenatable feed or intermediate.

    (1)     Note.  It is not necessary that the solvent material be expressly
    claimed as a hydrogen donor solvent as long as it is understood to provide
    a hydrogenation function.


CLS 208/432
TXT With specified circulation procedure in contact zone:

    Subject matter under subclass 428 wherein a specified agitation or
    circulation pattern, maintained by a fluid within a single contact zone, is
    claimed, or in which the location of streams associated with the contact
    zone are defined to establish a specific circulation pattern, e.g., use of
    a rotating kiln, etc.


CLS 208/433
TXT Simultaneous treatment with gaseous additive and liquid solvent:

    Subject matter under subclass 428 wherein a normally liquid solvent and a
    normally gaseous additive come into direct contact with the feed or
    intermediate material in a single zone.

    (1)     Note.  "Normal" conditions are usually based upon normal operating
    conditions of the process involved.  When such process conditions are not
    stipulated (i.e., temperature, pressure) normal conditions are taken to be
    at standard conditions (i.e., 25o C, 1 atom pressure).

    (2)     Note.  The gas may be hydrogen-containing gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    418,    for a process wherein a feed-stock is contacted with hydrogen and a
    solvent produced in the process and recycled from a late stage, in the same
    zone or different zones.


CLS 208/434
TXT Additive is petroleum or fraction from petroleum refining:

    Subject matter under subclass 428 wherein crude or refined mineral oil from
    an outside source is mixed with the solid feed to the process or with an
    intermediate or product derived from the solid feed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    415+,   for contact of the feed with a fraction from its own refining.


CLS 208/435
TXT Additive is specified catalyst or liquid solvent or dispersant:

    Subject matter under subclass 428 in which  the additive is claimed to be a
    catalyst for a chemical reaction or a liquid which is claimed to dissolve
    or disperse at least one other material in the process.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 208/950
TXT PROCESSING OF FISCHER-TROPSCH CRUDE:

    Collection of documents drawn to chemical conversion, fractionation,
    refining, etc., of hydrocarbonaceous feedstocks produced by the
    hydrogenation of carbon oxides.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    518,    Chemistry:  Fischer-Tropsch Processes; or Purification or Recovery
    of  Products Thereof, subclasses 900+ for hydrogenation of carbon oxides,
    per se, especially subclasses 723+ for such process combined with a further
    treatment.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, appropriate subclasses for the
    production of a specific hydrocarbon from a Fischer-Tropsch crude feedstock.


CLS 208/951
TXT SOLID FEED TREATMENT WITH A GAS OTHER THAN AIR, HYDROGEN OR STEAM:

    Collection of patents in which a solid carbonaceous material feedstock of
    the type of subclass 400 is treated with a gas or gaseous mixture
    containing other than air hydrogen or steam, e.g., H2S, CO, CH4, etc.,
    alone or admixed with each other or another gas.


CLS 208/952
TXT SOLID FEED TREATMENT UNDER SUPERCRITICAL CONDITIONS:

    Collection of patents in which a solid hydrocarbonaceous mineral of the
    type of subclasses 390+ or 400+ is treated to remove mineral oil therefrom,
    or to convert  solid materials therein to mineral oil-like mixture by the
    use, in any step of the treatment, of a treating gas in its supercritical
    stated.  The treating agent may be a liquid, solid or gas at normal
    conditions, but the treatment conditions must include temperature near the
    critical temperature of the extractant.  Under such conditions, the gaseous
    agent can not be liquified at any pressure, although the fluid density may
    be increased significantly by applying sufficient pressure.  The agent need
    not necessarily be a solvent for the hydrocarbonaceous materials at normal
    conditions.



    The treatment may be designed to produce any sort of chemical, physical or
    physico-chemical result.


CLS 209/
TTL CLASSIFYING, SEPARATING, AND  ASSORTING SOLIDS

CLS 209/
TXT The class comprises methods and apparatus for separating solid materials
    and assorting or segregating them in grades or classes according to
    physical characteristics.

    (1)     Note.  The class includes in general separation of grains, fruits,
    vegetables, flour, minerals, and, when the assorting is automatic, various
    manufactured articles.  It, however, does not include the separation of
    straw in threshing machines (Class 460, Crop Threshing or Separating)  or
    certain manufacturing articles the separation of which has attained a
    specialized status (for example, printing type and fraud preventives of
    check-controlled machines).

    (2)     Note.  This class does not include devices, either manually
    operated or automatic, for testing and separating of defective or leaky
    containers from perfect ones unless the separation is based upon some
    characteristics, generally dimensional, which forms the basis of some
    subclass of assorters in this class.

    (3)     Note.  Subclasses 12.1, 13, 16, 17, 18, 155, to 161,  and 208+
    provide for tanks or receptacles or methods involving their use which are
    adapted specially to separate different grades of solid material from each
    other, usually by differential transporting effect of flowing currents of
    liquid impinging on a mixture of such solid materials or by differential
    subsidence of the solids in liquid which may be stationary or flowing.
    Where the structure or process is adapted for the separation of the solids
    from liquid in which they may be suspended, it is classifiable in Class
    210, Liquid Purification or Separation, even though there may be incidental
    separation of one grade of solids from another, when there is no structure
    or process adaptation intended to promote separation of one grade of solids
    from the other. However, in relation to the magnetic separators in
    subclasses 212 and 213+ of this class (209), the combination of magnetic
    separation of particles from a liquid with another type of separation to
    remove nonmagnetic particles for the disclosed purpose of clarifying the
    liquid is properly classifiable in Class 210, subclasses 222+.

    (4)     Note.  Where an apparatus or method depends upon or is adapted
    specially for the separation of solid ingredients from other solids by
    chemical action, as by dissolution of certain of the ingredients to be
    separated, with or without subsequent precipitation, it is classifiable in
    Class 23, Chemistry:  Physical Processes, Class 75, Specialized
    Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein, Consolidated Metal
    Powder Compositions, etc.; Class 252, Compositions;  Class 422, Chemical
    Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing, Preserving, or
    Sterilizing; and Class 423, Chemistry:  Inorganic, according to the nature
    of the materials treated or of the chemical action involved.

    (5)     Note.  The so-called amalgamating apparatuses or methods are
    classified mostly in subclasses 12.1, 14, 15, 16, 41, and 42 of this class
    (when associated with other types of separation); in subclasses 43, 48-50
    (when dependent upon the adhesion of amalgamable materials to surfaces
    coated with mercury or metallic equivalents) and in subclasses 174+ (when
    the metals to be recovered are collected within a body of liquid metal
    which may be mercury, lead, zinc, etc., or alloys, and the ingredients
    lighter than the metals sought are floated by the body of liquid metal).
    Where chemical or electrical action is involved, which is not directed to
    the chemical dissolution of the metals sought or formation of compounds
    thereof, such goes into subclasses 176-181, whether the "amalgamation" is
    adhesion to a coated surface of mercury or its equivalent or collection by
    a liquid metal body.  When chemical dissolution of the metal or formation
    of compounds thereof is involved with subsequent amalgamation, it goes to
    Class 75, Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use
    Therein, Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, etc.; Class 423, Chemistry
    of Inorganic Compounds, or Class 204, Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave
    Energy, according to whether the action involved is merely chemical or also
    involves electrical or wave energy as provided for in Class 204.

    (6)     Note.  This class does not include apparatus or methods which
    involve the use of bowls or receptacles rotating at speed high enough to
    develop sufficient centrifugal force to separate one class of solids from
    others unless there is "amalgamation" involved, in which case such
    apparatus or methods are classifiable in subclass 60 and 199 of this class.
     Cases not falling within the exception noted are classifiable in Class
    494, Imperforate Bowl:  Centrifugal Separators.  This class, however, does
    include some borderline cases where it is not clear that the separation of
    the classes of solids is wholly dependent upon centrifugal force generated
    by high speed rotation of the receptacle.

    (7)     Note.  Subclasses 3.1-3.3, 44.1-44.4, and 509-707 provide for
    methods and apparatus for sorting special items. See (1) Note in the
    definition for Class 209 subclass 509 for examples of special items.  Bulk
    materials (such as grains and ore) are not considered special items and are
    generally sorted by methods and apparatus of the type classifiable in
    subclasses 1-3, 4-44, 45-70, 127.1-508, and 710-734.  However, includible
    in subclasses indented under subclass 509 are methods and apparatus not
    provided for in the subclasses listed in the preceding sentence, and bulk
    material sorting (as well as special item sorting) effected by use of such
    methods and apparatus will be classified in these indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.1,   13, 15 to 18, 42, 43, 155 to 161, 173, 207, 208+, 268 to 273, and
    422+ for the so-called ore and coal washers (see Notes 3 and 5).

    14,     41, 48 to 50, 174+ (see Note 5).

    30+,    311 to 349, 352+ for so-called "winnowers" for grain.

    60,     199 (see Note 6).

    212,    213+ (see Note 3).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, (see Note 4).

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, and see the note to
    Class 209 in the main class definition for the line.

    53,     Package Making, appropriate subclasses for methods of and apparatus
    for encompassing or encasing goods or materials with a separate cover or
    band which serves as means for identifying, protecting or unit handling the
    goods or materials, particularly subclasses 155+ for group forming of
    diverse contents units.

    55,     Gas Separation, appropriate subclasses for methods and apparatus
    for indiscriminately removing all solids from a gaseous suspension. See (3)
    Note in Class 209 subclass 132.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 508 for glass fiber forming apparatus
    combined with assorting means for fibers.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, appropriate subclasses for methods for
    indiscriminately removing all solids from a gaseous suspension. See (3)
    Note in Class 209 subclass 132.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for apparatus
    for indiscriminately removing all solids from a gaseous suspension. See (3)
    Note in Class 209 subclass 132.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 518+, 569+, and 600+
    for apparatus including separating means of that class (99) type.

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 110 and 311+ for separating in connection with
    tobacco feeding and disintegrating.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, and see (4) Note to class
    definition for the line.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, appropriate subclasses for paper
    making processes and apparatus in which a fibrous slurry is placed in
    association with a foraminous screen to form a felted product thereon.

    164,    Metal Founding, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for
    disintegrating a sand mold or core or portion thereof, while in molding
    association with (a) a flask or (b) a casting, except those which involve
    abrading means (Class 451, Abrading) or an agitating screen (Class 209) as
    the sole means for disintegrating the mold or core.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 373+ for an orientation
    control device for rearranging conveyed articles responsive to recognition
    of differences in attitude (rather than characteristics, as in the instant
    class); see for example, subclasses 271 and 275 for conveyor systems
    including divergent paths along which articles of mutually different
    attitudes are respectively directed, one of the paths (in subclass 275) or
    both (271) constituting or including the orienting device.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, (see (5) Note).

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, (see (3) Note).

    221,    Article Dispensing, especially subclasses 156+ for article
    dispensing devices not otherwise classified combined with orienting.  See
    section VII of the class definition of Class 221 for a statement of the
    line between the classes.

    222,    Dispensing, especially subclasses 169+, 189.01, 189.02+, and 565
    for similar structures for mere dispensing and not having the function of
    classifying, separating, or assorting solids.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 24, 68+,
    and the notes thereto for  the subject matter of this class combined with
    comminution of the material.  See sections 8 and 12 of the main class
    definition of Class 241 for a statement of the line.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 281+ for methods and apparatus for the
    ionic separation or analysis of materials utilizing the mass to electric
    charge ratio of particles.

    252,    Compositions, (see Note 4).

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 210.5 for so-called
    "kitchen-cabinets" which include sifters merely as parts of organizations
    which comprise storage means for kitchen supplies or utilities not directly
    related to sifters.

    366,    Agitating, for apparatus or method specially adapted for the
    agitation of materials and not limited to classification of solids to some
    specific chemical reaction or special operation classifiable in some other
    class.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, (see Note 4).

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, (see Note 4).

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 317 for a molding machine for shaping or reshaping nonmetals
    combined with a Class 209 apparatus.

    494,    Imperforate Bowl:  Centrifugal Separators, appropriate subclasses
    for apparatus and processes for breaking up a mixture of fluids or fluent
    substances into two or more components by centrifuging within a generally
    solid-walled, receptacle-like member; see also (6) Note above.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for destroying or containing hazardous or toxic waste.


CLS 209/1
TXT Processes and apparatus under the class definition not classifiable
    elsewhere which relate to or are associated with the separation of solids
    into grades or classes.


CLS 209/2
TXT Methods and apparatus under the class definition applied to particular
    materials or articles in which the invention lies in the application of the
    separation, which may or may not be novel, per se, to such particular
    substances or articles.

    (1)     Note.  Search should be made in the appropriate classes which deal
    with the extraction, manufacture, or preparation of the particular
    substance or articles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, subclasses 293+ for processes of
    preparing or treating inorganic compounds and nonmetallic elements by
    physical action.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for
    preparing or treating inorganic compounds and nonmetallic elements by
    physical action.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 1+ for extraction of
    inorganic materials.


CLS 209/3
TXT Methods and apparatus under the class definition including preparation,
    e.g., treatment of materials or items prior to their separation to
    facilitate the latter.


CLS 209/3.1
TXT Sorting special items or sorting by methods and apparatus includible in
    subclasses 509 through 707:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 3 including a means classifiable in
    subclasses 509 through 707.


CLS 209/3.2
TXT Condition responsive sensor controlling preparation:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 3.1 including means for sensing a
    condition of materials or items and controlling preparation of said
    materials or items in accordance therewith.


CLS 209/3.3
TXT Marking or tagging item:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 3.1 wherein materials or items are
    marked or tagged to facilitate their separation.


CLS 209/4
TXT Methods and apparatus under subclass 3 for the treatment of a mixture of
    materials whereby the physical characteristics of one or more of the
    components are altered relatively to those of other components to permit or
    facilitate subsequent separation.

    (1)     Note.  The characteristics of only one may be altered or those of
    all may be, but in different degree.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass will include such methods and apparatus as are
    not classifiable in the subclasses indented thereunder, and may include
    selective alteration of bulk, specific gravity, or decomposition, as by
    dehydration etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     46, 47, 48, 49, 176-182, for combinations of separation with
    treatment to promote the separation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses, especially subclasses 14 and 102 for processes and apparatus
    for selectively comminuting material to enable better separation of the
    material into grades.


CLS 209/5
TXT Methods and apparatus under subclass 4 by which certain components of a
    mixture may be deflocculated or dispersed relatively to others or by which
    certain components may be flocculated to facilitate subsequent separation.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass receives only methods and apparatus in which
    the deflocculation or coagulation is contributory to a subsequent
    separation of some components from others.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166     through 170, for bubble flotation with treatment for the purpose of
    modifying the factors of flotation and for bubble flotation apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 303 for miscellaneous processes of
    separating materials into different portions, corresponding to physical or
    chemical differences by operations which include formations of colloid
    systems, subclasses 319+ for processes of breaking "emulsions" or resolving
    colloid systems, and other appropriate subclasses for processes of
    dispersion or agents therefor.


CLS 209/7
TXT Methods and apparatus under subclass 4 by which components of a mixture are
    altered in form relatively to other components to permit or facilitate
    subsequent separation into classes or groups having like characteristics.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses and see the reference to Class 209 in section 12 of the class
    definition.


CLS 209/8
TXT Methods and apparatus under subclass 4 for developing or for neutralizing
    or destroying magnetic properties of components of a mixture to permit or
    facilitate subsequent separation of the components of the mixture.

    (1)     Note.  The methods and apparatus hereof, insofar as the magnetizing
    is involved, are ordinarily independent of any particular structure of
    manipulation of the magnetic separator, unless it be adjustment of strength
    to the developed magnetic properties. Demagnetizing may be applied to
    prepare for a gravity or other separation, as by destroying coherence
    between particles which interferes with gravity or other separation.

    (2)     Note.  For processes directed to the mere chemical (i.e.,
    molecular) conversion of a substance or of one or more ingredients in a
    material, and the related apparatus, see the appropriate chemical classes
    particularly Classes 75, Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions
    for Use Therein, Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, ect.; 266,
    Metallurgical Apparatus; and 423, Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds.
    Processes including both a chemical reaction and a magnetic separation are
    classified in the appropriate chemical class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213     through 232, for separation of solids by magnetic attraction of
    materials responsive to the attraction from other materials not responsive
    or responsive to a lesser degree.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, etc., (see (2) Note).

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, (see (2) Note).

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 267 for
    demagnetizing.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds.


CLS 209/9
TXT Methods and apparatus under subclass 4 whereby the surfaces of some
    components of a mixture are altered to permit or facilitate their
    separation from other components.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47+,    for adhesion separation including a coating operation, 163+, 175,
    176, 178, 179, and 181 for flotation involving some surface alteration of
    the material to be separated.


CLS 209/10
TXT Methods and apparatus under the class definition involving treatment of
    material after separation, which are not classifiable elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes separating processes which include
    treatment after separation, or the treatments themselves when said
    treatments cannot be otherwise assigned to some class or subclass elsewhere.


CLS 209/11
TXT Methods and means under class definition for heating or cooling associated
    with separation methods and apparatus, not elsewhere classified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for heating prior to separation for the purpose of affecting the
    magnetic properties of the material to facilitate separation.

    182,    for amalgamation separation processes involving heating for the
    purpose of promoting amalgamation.

    238,    for sifters combined with heaters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, heating in connection with metallurgical processes.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for the
    heating of foods or beverages.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 8 and 11 for the
    separation of bituminous material from solid natural sources such as rocks,
    oil shale, bituminous sands, etc.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses, especially subclass 17 for comminuting combined with heating.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, for metallurgical heating apparatus.

    432,    Heating, subclass 13 for a process and subclass 61 for a residual
    apparatus for heating material in which a portion of the material is
    separated for further heating and the heated portion is returned.


CLS 209/12.1
TXT Plural, diverse separating operations:

    Methods and apparatus under the class definition involving combinations of
    different, distinct types of separation operations.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder do not
    include methods or apparatus which are mere duplications of the same type
    of separation. Some of the patents which involve sifting and assorting,
    automatic or manual, have been placed in the assorting subclasses 509-707,
    and search should be made in such assorting subclasses for such
    combination. See (7) note of the class definition and subclass 509
    definition including the notes appended thereto for the statement of
    classification control.

    (2)     Note. The appropriate subclasses providing for the individual types
    of separations should be searched.

    (3)     Note. This is the residual subclass for separating combinations not
    classifiable in one of the subclasses indented hereunder or elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127.1+, for methods and apparatus employing plural electrostatic charge
    separating operations.

    132+,   for methods and apparatus employing both gaseous and liquid
    suspension of items or materials.

    212,    for a combination of diamagnetic and paramagnetic magnetic
    separating methods or apparatus or plural diamagnetic separating methods or
    apparatus.

    214,    for plural paramagnetic separating processes.

    216,    for a plurality of diverse paramagnetic separators.

    234,    for methods and apparatus employing a plurality of different
    general types of sifters.

    557,    for methods and apparatus employing a combination of a condition
    responsive separating means for either ``bulk material" or ``special items"
    and a noncondition responsive separating means. See (1) Note supra.

    629+,   for combinations of different types of special item separating
    operations. See (1) Note supra.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses for processes, (i.e., subclasses 19, 20, and 24), and apparati,
    (i.e., subclasses 68+), including the combination of material comminution
    and material separation operations properly classifiable in this class as
    subcombinations.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 7+
    for mining combined with separation of materials.


CLS 209/12.2
TXT Including electrostatic:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 12.1 including electrostatic charges
    for assorting materials by segregating those having certain characteristics
    from others having different characteristics.

    (1)     Note. The characteristics may be of weight, size,
    electroconductivity, hysteresis, etc.

    (2)     Note. The appropriate subclasses providing for the individual types
    of separations should be searched.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127.1+, for particulars relating to electrostatic separation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation: Processes, subclasses 57+ for processes of
    electrostatic separation or purification of gases.

    96,     Gas Separation: Apparatus, subclasses 15+ for electrostatic
    separation or purification apparatus for gases.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 186+ for
    processes of electrostatic separation or purification of liquid; and
    subclasses 302+ for electrostatic separation apparatus specialized therefor.


CLS 209/13
TXT Methods and apparatus under subclass 12.1 which include aqueous suspension,
    sifting, and stratifying.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14      and 44,  for a combination including sifting and stratifying.

    17,     for a combination of aqueous suspension and sifting.

    18,     for a combination of aqueous suspension and stratifying.

    155+,   for particulars of aqueous suspension separators.

    233+,   for particulars of sifters.

    422+,   for particulars of stratifiers.


CLS 209/14
TXT Methods and apparatus under subclass 12.1 in which amalgamation, either
    so-called plate amalgamation in which values adhere to mercury coated
    surfaces, or liquid amalgamation in which values sink in a body of mercury
    or equivalent, sifting, and stratifying are employed to extract metallic
    values.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     19 and 44, for a combination including sifting and stratifying.

    41,     for a combination including mercurial adhesion and mercurial
    suspension.

    42,     for a combination including mercurial adhesion or suspension and
    sifting.

    43,     for a combination including mercurial adhesion or suspension and
    stratifying.


CLS 209/15
TXT Apparatus and methods under subclass 12.1 employing both fluid suspension
    and either suspension by or adhesion to liquid mercury or equivalent to
    separate or segregate components of a solid mixture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48      and 50+, for particulars of mercurial adhesion separators.


    132+,   for particulars of fluid suspension separators.

    172+,   for particulars of mercurial suspension separators.


CLS 209/16
TXT Processes and apparatus under subclass 15 in which both free suspension in
    water and amalgamation by mercury are employed to separate metals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     17 and 18, for a combination including aqueous suspension.

    155+,   for particulars of aqueous suspension separators.


CLS 209/17
TXT Methods and apparatus under subclass 12.1 which employ free suspension in
    water and sifting to effect separation or segregation of components of a
    mixture of solid materials.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for a combination including aqueous suspension and sifting
    separations.

    155+,   for particulars of aqueous suspension separators.

    233+,   for particulars of sifters.


CLS 209/18
TXT Methods and apparatus under subclass 12.1 for separating components of
    mixtures of solids which employ both free suspension in water and
    stratifying.

    (1)     Note.  The stratification of this subclass may be either wet or dry.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for a combination including aqueous suspension and sifting
    separations.

    155+,   for particulars of aqueous suspension separators.

    422+,   for particulars of stratifiers.


CLS 209/19
TXT Methods and apparatus under subclass 12.1 employing free suspension in gas,
    sifting and stratifying, for the assorting or segregation of components of
    a mixture of solids.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     14 and 44, for a combination including sifting and stratifying.

    20,     for a combination including gaseous suspension and stratifying.

    21+,    for a combination including gaseous suspension and sifting.

    133+,   for particulars of gaseous suspension separators.

    233+,   for particulars of sifters.

    422+,   for particulars of stratifiers.


CLS 209/20
TXT Means and apparatus under subclass 12.1 employing both gaseous suspension
    and stratifying to separate or segregate components of a mixture of solids
    into grades or classes of like characteristics.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for a combination including gaseous suspension and stratifying.

    133+,   for particulars of gaseous suspension separators.

    422+,   for particulars of stratifiers.


CLS 209/21
TXT Methods and apparatus under subclass 12.1 for separating and segregating
    into grades components of solid mixtures having like characteristics, which
    employ both free suspension in gas and sifting.

    (1)     Note.  Either may precede the other or the operations may be
    simultaneous.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass and those indented thereunder are composed
    mainly of patents relating to the separation of grains, flour, and
    minerals, but are not restricted thereto.

    (3)     Note.  Search this class, subclasses 12 and 19 for the
    combinations, and the subclasses indented thereunder and under Sifting
    (subclass 233) for subcombinations. Where the recovery of material carried
    by the gas is involved, search should be made in Class 55, Gas Separation,
    as well as in the deposition subclasses indented under Gaseous suspension
    and sifting (subclass 21), and Fluid Suspension (subclass 133), in this
    class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for a combination including gaseous suspension and sifting.

    133+,   for particulars of gaseous suspension separators.

    233+,   for particulars of sifters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, see (3) Note above.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 518+ for grain hullers
    and scourers combined with gas separating means.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 49+ for
    comminutors in which material suspended in a gas stream is conveyed to a
    separating screen.


CLS 209/22
TXT Methods and apparatus under subclass 21 in which the material to be
    separated is subjected simultaneously to sifting and gaseous suspension.

    (1)     Note.  In the main the material is supported by the sifter while
    gaseous currents are sent through it to suspend and carry off the lighter
    components, but the subclass is not restricted thereto.

    (2)     Note.  This is generic and receives such cases as do not permit
    assignment to subclasses indented thereunder.  The gaseous suspension must
    be free, and there must be substantial conveyance of the suspended material
    to distinguish from stratification under the influence of the gas.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass and those indented thereunder deal mostly with
    grain, flour, and minerals, but will also take other materials when the
    separations fall within the definitions.


CLS 209/23
TXT Methods and apparatus under subclass 22 in which there is coincident
    sifting and gaseous suspension, such as is defined in connection with
    subclass 22, and also a collection of the material that has been taken up
    by the gas.

    (1)     Note.  This collection may be graded or not and may include part or
    all of the material suspended.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19      and 20, for other combined separations including gaseous suspension.


CLS 209/24
TXT Processes and apparatus under subclass 22 in which there are coincident
    grading suspension and sifting, a horizontal current of gas, generally air,
    being employed to effect the suspension.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass may include cases where the material is
    carried by the sifter while subjected to the suspending current, as well as
    cases where the material selectively suspended by the gaseous current is
    delivered as a horizontal current against sifting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250,    for sifters having means to feed material thereto by suspension in
    a fluid.


CLS 209/25
TXT Methods and apparatus under subclass 24 in which the suspended material
    carried by the current is collected.

    (1)     Note.  This collection may be a grading deposition or a separation
    of all or part of such suspended material without any definite grading in
    the collection.


CLS 209/26
TXT Methods and apparatus under subclass 22 in which there are coincident
    grading suspension and sifting, an inclined current of gas, generally air,
    being employed to effect the suspension.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250,    276, 280, 295, 312, 318, and 321, for sifters employing a gas
    stream for feeding material or for agitation or conveying.


CLS 209/27
TXT Methods and apparatus under subclass 26 in which the suspended material
    carried by the current is collected.


CLS 209/28
TXT Methods and apparatus under subclass 22 in which there are coincident
    grading suspension and sifting, a vertical current of gas, generally air,
    being employed to effect the suspension.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250,    276, 280, 295, 312, 318, and 321, for sifters employing a stream of
    gas for feeding material, or for agitation or conveying.


CLS 209/29
TXT Methods and apparatus under subclass 28 in which the suspended material
    carried by the current is collected.


CLS 209/30
TXT Methods and apparatus under subclass 21 employing both suspension by gas
    and sifting to segregate components of mixtures into grades of like
    characteristics, the two separations being sequential.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19      and 20, for other combined separations including gaseous suspension.


CLS 209/31
TXT Methods and apparatus under subclass 30 for subjecting material to be
    separated successively to gaseous suspension and sifting, and collecting
    one or more of the components suspended by the gas.


CLS 209/32
TXT Methods and apparatus under subclass 30 for separating components of mixed
    solids into grades which successively sift and suspend in gaseous currents
    flowing horizontally.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24      and 25, for the combination in which the sifting and horizontal
    gaseous suspension grading are coincident.

    133+    and 233+, appropriate subclass for the subcombinations of grading
    by gaseous suspension and sifting respectively.


CLS 209/33
TXT Methods and means under subclass 32 for successively sifting and separating
    by current of gas or air where there is also collection of part or all of
    the material carried off in suspension and the suspending current impinges
    horizontally on the material.


CLS 209/34
TXT Methods and means under subclass 30 employing successively sifting and a
    suspending current of air impringing in an inclined direction on the
    material to be separated.


CLS 209/35
TXT Methods and means under subclass 34 including collecting steps or means for
    part or all of the material carried in suspension.


CLS 209/36
TXT Methods and means under subclass 30 for successively sifting and subjecting
    the material to be separated to a vertically flowing current of gas or air.


CLS 209/37
TXT Methods and means under subclass 36 including steps or means for collecting
    part or all of the material suspended by the gaseous current.


CLS 209/38
TXT Apparatus and methods under subclass 12.1 which involve both sifting and
    magnetic separation to segregate components of a mixture.

    (1)     Note.  The separations may be sequential, to separate some
    components according to size and others according to magnetic permeability,
    or they may be simultaneous, as where one separation is made to promote or
    control the other, for instance, where there is a sifting separation to
    obtain one or more sized grades to be subjected to magnetic separation
    appropriate to each size grade.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for magnetic separation with a prior treatment to develop,
    neutralize or destroy the magnetic property of at least one component.


CLS 209/39
TXT Apparatus and processes under subclass 12.1 employing both magnetic
    separation and fluid suspension, either wet or dry, for the segregation of
    components of a mixture according to magnetic permeability and falling
    weight in fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232,    for magnetic separation including feeding material by means of a
    fluid suspension.


CLS 209/40
TXT Apparatus and methods under subclass 12.1 by which there is separation both
    by stratification and by magnetic separation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    478,    for such processes and apparatus as employ magnetic separation
    merely as an aid to stratification by subjecting the material to magnetic
    attraction while being stratified to give the magnetically permeable
    components and apparently increased or decreased specific gravity to modify
    the stratification.


CLS 209/41
TXT Apparatus and methods under subclass 12.1 employing both suspension by a
    liquid body of metal and adhesion to a surface or surfaces lined with a
    film or layer of such liquid metal.

    (1)     Note.  The metal is ordinarily mercury of some alloy thereof, but
    may be lead in molten condition or alloys thereof for the suspension.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for a combination including mercurial adhesion, sifting, and
    stratifying.

    15,     16, 42,  and 43, for other combinations including either mercurial
    adhesion or mercurial suspension.


CLS 209/42
TXT Apparatus and methods under subclass 12.1 employing both sifting and either
    adhesion to a surface coated with mercury or suspension by a body of liquid
    mercury or equivalent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for a combination including mercurial adhesion, sifting, and
    stratifying.

    15,     16, 41,  and 43, for other combinations including either mercurial
    adhesion or mercurial suspension.


CLS 209/43
TXT Apparatus and methods under subclass 12.1 employing both stratification and
    either suspension by or adhesion to mercury or its equivalent to separate
    ingredients from a mixture of solids.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for a combination including mercurial adhesion, sifting, and
    stratifying.

    15,     16, 41,  and 42, for other combinations including either mercurial
    adhesion or mercurial suspension.


CLS 209/44
TXT Apparatus and methods under subclass 12.1 employing both sifting and
    stratifying to segregate components of a mixture of solids.

    (1)     Note.  Either or both may be wet or dry.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     14 and 19, for other combinations including both sifting and
    stratifying.


    233+,   for particulars of sifters.

    422+,   for particulars of stratifiers.


CLS 209/44.1
TXT Including sorting of special items, or sorting methods or apparatus
    includible in subclasses 509 through 707:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 12.1 wherein one of the types of
    separations is classifiable in subclasses 509 through 707.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    557,    for a combination of condition responsive means for controlling a
    separating means and a noncondition responsive separating means.  See (7)
    Note of the class definition and (1) Note of subclass 509 for this class
    (Class 209).


CLS 209/44.2
TXT Fluid jet:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 44.1 including a fluid jet for
    separating materials or items.


CLS 209/44.3
TXT Drum-type sifter:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 44.1 including a drum-type sifter.


CLS 209/44.4
TXT Manual sorting:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 44.1 including a picking station
    wherein material is presented for direct selection by a human observer.

    (1)     Note. The relevant subclasses providing for the respective types of
    separation operations employed in the combination should be searched.

    (2)     Note. The relevant preceding subclasses providing for combinations
    of separating operations with or without manual sorting should be searched.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    630,    for a combination of different types of special item separating
    means including a manual sorting operation.

    702+,   for a picking station feature, per se.


CLS 209/45
TXT Apparatus and methods under class definition employing adhesion of one or
    more components of a mixture of solids to other bodies or surfaces to
    separate them from the rest of the mixture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76,     for separations where the adhesion is due to mechanically
    entangling the components with some part of the surface or body to which
    the components are caused to adhere.


CLS 209/46
TXT Apparatus and methods under subclass 45 for separating some components of a
    mixture of solids by causing them to adhere to a surface or body otherwise
    than by entangling, wherein the mixture is treated to alter some of the
    components to enhance their capabilities to adhere to the selecting surface
    or body relatively to the capabilities of other components.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for separations combined with a treatment precedent to facilitate
    separation.


CLS 209/47
TXT Apparatus and methods under subclass 46 by which some of the components of
    the mixture of solids to be separated are coated with some substance which
    enables such components to adhere to the selecting body or surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for separations combined with a treatment precedent where by the
    surfaces of some components of a mixture are altered to facilitate
    separation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses, for coating apparatus in
    general.

    427,    Coating Processes, for coating processes, per se, and note
    especially subclasses 212+ for processes of coating particles, flakes or
    granules.


CLS 209/48
TXT Apparatus and methods under subclass 47 in which some of the components of
    a mixture of solids are coated with mercury or its equivalent to facilitate
    their adhesion to a surface or body.

    (1)     Note.  The surface or body to which the coated particles adhere
    generally is some substance which is readily wetted by mercury and may
    itself be coated with mercury.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176+,   for metallic liquid type separation including a chemical treatment
    to facilitate separation.

    179+,   for metallic liquid type separation including an electrical
    treatment to facilitate separation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, for separation of metals from ores involving a metallurgical
    operation.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 219+, 250 and
    251 for apparatus for forming amalgams by electrolysis.

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 558+ for forming amalgams by
    electrolysis.


CLS 209/49
TXT Apparatus and methods under subclass 45 wherein coated surfaces or masses
    are employed to which some of the components of the mixture of solids
    adhere while others do not.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171,    for flotation processes and apparatus in which an oil which has a
    selective affinity for some of the constituent of the mixtures to be
    separated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, appropriate subclasses beginning with subclass 474
    for the separation of solids from gases by filters which may be coated.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 60+, 88.1, and 88.2 for physical
    separation agents and for particle adherent compositions respectively.


CLS 209/50
TXT Apparatus and methods under subclass 49 in which some of the components of
    a mixture of solids are caused to adhere to surfaces coated with mercury or
    its equivalent, and are thereby separated from other components which do
    not so adhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14      through 16, and 41-43, for separation combinations provided in
    combination with either mercurial adhesion or mercurial suspension.

    176     through 181,where chemical or electrical action is involved, since
    there is no essential difference in effect whether the separation is a
    gravity or an adhesion separation.  Processes involving such chemical or
    electrical action are classified in said subclasses whether adhesion or
    gravity separation by means of a metallic gravity liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, for the separation of metals from ores involving a metallurgical
    operation.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 219+, 250 and
    251 for apparatus for forming amalgams by electrolysis.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 558+ for forming amalgams by
    electrolysis.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 79+ for
    such arrangements combined with comminutors.


CLS 209/51
TXT Processes and apparatus under subclass 50 for applying to or removing
    coatings of mercury or its equivalent from surfaces which are intended to
    collect such components of a mixture as are wettable by mercury.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses, for coating apparatus in
    general.


CLS 209/52
TXT Elements or parts, generally of an organized apparatus, under subclass 50,
    which are coated with mercury or its equivalent, so that some of the
    components of a mixture of solids will adhere thereto.


CLS 209/53
TXT Elements under subclass 52 employed to agitate the material being treated,
    are coated with mercury or its equivalent, to which certain of the
    components will adhere, and thus be segregated from the other components of
    the mixture.


CLS 209/54
TXT Elements under subclass 52 usually stationary, against which the mixture
    containing the components sought to be removed moves, are coated with
    mercury or its equivalent to which the components sought will adhere.


CLS 209/55
TXT Elements under subclass 52 of disk or spherical shape, generally but not
    necessarily movable, are coated with mercury or its equivalent to cause
    adhesion of such components of a mixture as are wettable by mercury to
    adhere thereto.


CLS 209/56
TXT Elements under subclass 52 intended to line or form walls of receivers, are
    coated with mercury to cause adhesion of some components of a mixture
    thereto.

    (1)     Note.  The liners are usually removable from the receivers to which
    they are attached, but may be permanently attached to the receivers.


CLS 209/57
TXT Elements under subclass 52 forming a multiplicity of narrow passages for
    the material, are coated with mercury or its equivalent to collect certain
    of the components of the mixture.


CLS 209/58
TXT Receivers under subclass 50 having their receiving surfaces or interiors
    coated, in part or in whole, with mercury or its equivalent to cause
    adhesion of some components of a mixture contacting therewith.

    (1)     Note.  The receivers hereof are generally in the form of chutes or
    tables, but may include tanks.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174+,   for separation involving separation by flotation on a metallic
    liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 219+, 221, 250,
    and 251 for apparatus specialized therefor.

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 558+ for electrolytic processes of
    producing mercury alloys.


CLS 209/59
TXT Rotating receivers under subclass 58 for the material being treated have
    portions coated with mercury or its equivalent to collect by adhesion
    certain of the components of the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198+,   for rotating receptacles employed in metallic liquid flotation
    separations.


CLS 209/60
TXT The rotating receptacles under subclass 59 have sufficient speed of
    rotation to make the centrifugal force generated sufficient to be a
    material factor in the separation and have portions coated with mercury or
    its equivalent to separate components of the material treated by adhesion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199,    for rotating receptacles utilizing centrifugal force employed in
    metallic liquid flotation separations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    494,    Imperforate Bowl:  Centrifugal Separators appropriate subclasses,
    for a separator of that class, and see, in the definition of this class
    (209), the reference to that class in (6) Note and the search note thereto.


CLS 209/61
TXT Cylindrical or polygonal devices approximating cylinders under subclass 59
    have their exteriors coated with mercury or its equivalent to which certain
    of the components adhere.


CLS 209/62
TXT Hollow rotating cylinders or drums under subclass 59 have their interiors
    coated with mercury or its equivalent to cause adhesion of certain of the
    components of the material treated.


CLS 209/63
TXT Endless belts under subclass 59 coated with mercury or its equivalent
    contact with the material treated to cause adhesion of some of the
    components of the mixture.


CLS 209/64
TXT Receivers under subclass 58 having the interiors or receiving surfaces
    coated in part or in whole with mercury or its equivalent to cause adhesion
    of some of the components of a mixture contacting therewith and having a
    shaking movement.

    (1)     Note.  The devices hereof are generally chutes or tables, but may
    be tanks.


CLS 209/65
TXT Receivers under subclass 58 having some portion of their receiving or
    contacting surfaces coated with mercury or its equivalent and associated
    with means for agitating the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for combinations where the agitators are essential elements thereof
    of the combination; but this subclass may include those devices which have
    agitators which are merely incidentally mercury coated.

    64,     for mercury coated receivers having a shaking movement.


CLS 209/66
TXT Receivers under subclass 65 having contacting surfaces lined with mercury
    in which fluid, usually air or water is employed to agitate the material
    treated to promote contact with the mercury.


CLS 209/67
TXT Devices under subclass 65 for separating by adhesion of some components of
    material to surfaces coated with mercury or its equivalent which are
    associated with means for subjecting the material to attritive rubbing.

    (1)     Note.  The rubbing elements may be part of the separating device or
    may be external thereto, but closely associated therewith, and the rubbing
    elements may themselves have mercury-coated portions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191,    for metallic liquid flotation separations utilizing a rubbing
    action.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses, especially subclasses 24 and 79+ for comminuting combined with
    separation by mercurial adhesion.


CLS 209/68
TXT Devices under subclass 65 for separating material by adhesion of components
    to surfaces coated with mercury in which the material is forcibly projected
    against the mercury-coated surfaces.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass will include devices in which gravital fall of
    substantial extent is employed to secure the impacting forces, as well as
    those which employ projecting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    190,    for metallic liquid flotation separations in which the material is
    forcibly projected against the surface of the bath.


CLS 209/69
TXT Devices under subclass 65 for separating components of material by adhesion
    to mercury-coated surfaces in which reciprocating agitating means are
    employed to promote contact of the material with the coated surfaces.


CLS 209/70
TXT Devices under subclass 65 having mercury-coated portions to which certain
    components of a mixture of solids adhere and having rotating agitators to
    promote contact of the material with the mercury-coated surfaces.


CLS 209/127.1
TXT ELECTROSTATIC:

    Methods and means under the class definition employing electrostatic
    charges for assorting materials by segregating those having certain
    characteristics from others having different characteristics.

    (1)     Note.  The characteristics may be of weight, size
    electroconductivity, hysteresis, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.2,   for electrostatic separation combined with other separating
    operations classifiable in this class (Class 209).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 1.5 for
    machines and implements employing an electrostatic field for removing
    foreign material from the surface of objects being cleaned.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 554+ for
    electrical (e.g., electrostatic, etc.) or simultaneous electrical and
    magnetic separation or purification of liquids or magnetic treatment of
    liquids (other than separation) and subclasses 660+ for corresponding
    apparatus.


CLS 209/127.2
TXT With heating of particles:

    Methods and means under subclass 127.1 in which the particulate material is
    heated.


CLS 209/127.3
TXT With vibrating trough charging of particles:

    Methods and means under subclass 127.1 wherein electrostatic charges are
    applied to the material while traversing a vibrating trough.


CLS 209/127.4
TXT Free fall type particle charging:
    Methods and means under subclass 127.1 wherein electrostatic charges are
    applied to free falling materials.


CLS 209/128
TXT Methods and means under subclass 127.1 which involve the attraction of
    material toward a charged electrode followed by repulsion from the
    electrode, the material being assorted according to its response to the
    repellant forces.


CLS 209/129
TXT Methods and means under subclass 127.1 for assorting material by attraction
    toward or to a charged electrode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 57+ for processes of gas
    separation using an electric or electrostatic field.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 15+ for apparatus for gas
    separation using an electric or electrostatic field.


CLS 209/130
TXT Methods and means under subclass 127.1 in which material, generally
    precharged, is subjected to the repulsive effect of a charged electrode or
    to the repulsive effect of the charges on the components of the material
    and assorted according to the response to the repulsion.


CLS 209/131
TXT Methods and means under subclass 127.1 in which electrostatic charges are
    employed either alone or associated with other forces to agitate material
    and cause it to stratify to permit separation of the different strata.


CLS 209/132
TXT Methods and means under the class definition in which mixed materials or
    articles are subjected to the suspending influence of a fluid or fluids,
    either gaseous or liquid, generally in motion, under conditions permitting
    the collection of such material or articles as respond equally or in like
    manner to the suspending influence, and where all of the material is
    subjected to the suspending influence and none maintained as a stratum.

    (1)     Note.  All of the materials are subjected to the lifting or
    conveying effect of the fluid, and those that ar not lifted or conveyed
    collected separately from those that are, or the materials may be
    separately collected in accordance with the rates at which they settle out
    or the distances they are conveyed by the fluid.

    (2)     Note.  Where one or more of the materials remain as a stratum or
    strata and the remainder are removed therefrom by the fluid, the case comes
    under Stratifiers, in this class.

    (3)     Note.  The distinction between the fluid suspension of this class
    and Classes 95, Gas Separation:  Processes, 96, Gas Separation:  Apparatus,
    and 210, Liquid Separation or Purification, is that in the fluid suspension
    of this class there is separation of solids according to different
    characteristics thereof, while in Classes 95, 96, and 210 there is sought
    an indiscriminate collection of suspended material without an attempt to
    separate and collect the solids in different grades or classes.  Where the
    operation is a decanting one primarily to separate the solids from liquid,
    and there is a merely incidental overflow of light solids, Class 210 takes
    the case; but where there is provision for the positive removal of one
    solid from another or for the collection of the overflowing solid as such
    separately from the settling solids it finds a place in this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, appropriate subclasses, for
    mechanically isolating fibers and for fiber manipulation to put them in
    condition for use.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, see (3) Note above.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, see (3) Note above.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 518+ for fluid
    separation apparatus.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation (see (3) Note).

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 19, 20,
    38+ for comminutors combined with means to apply fluid to the material to
    effect the separation thereof.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, appropriate subclasses, for fluid
    current conveyors, per se.


CLS 209/133
TXT Methods and means under subclass 132 in which the fluid employed for the
    suspending and classifying of material is gaseous.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.1,   19, 20, and 21+, for gaseous current separation combined with other
    types of separation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 110 and 311+ for gaseous separation employed in
    connection with tobacco feeding or leaf disintegrating.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 19 and 38+
    for gaseous suspension separation combined with solid comminution or
    disintegration.


CLS 209/134
TXT Methods and means under subclass 133 in which the material is subjected to
    the suspending or transporting effect of a horizontally-flowing current of
    gas or air and the components collected according to their relative
    displacement thereby.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.1,   19, 20, 24, 25, 32, and 33, for gaseous suspension separations
    employing a horizontal current combined with other types of separation.


CLS 209/135
TXT Methods and means under subclass 134 in which the material is subjected to
    a horizontally-flowing current of gas to sort the same and the portion of
    the material suspended and transported thereby is collected in part or in
    whole as one or more grades.


CLS 209/136
TXT Methods and means under subclass 133 in which gaseous currents flowing in
    an inclined direction--that is, having both vertical and horizontal
    components of motion--are employed to freely suspend components of material.

    (1)     Note.  There is usually both elevation and horizontal displacement
    of the suspended material; but cases involving the use of currents flowing
    in a downwardly inclined direction maybe included.

    (2)     Note.  Many instances are included in which the material not freely
    suspended flows down an inclined wall or support, resembling to some extent
    those stratifiers which employ an inclined gaseous current for removal of
    the lighter.  The distinction between the two generally is that in the
    suspension subclasses employing the inclined current the inclination of the
    wall is such that the material on the wall or support will normally flow
    freely or rapidly down the support and not be detained to form a definite
    stratum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.1,   19, 20, 26, 27, 34, and 35, for gaseous suspension separation
    employing an inclined current combined with other types of separations.


CLS 209/137
TXT Methods and means under subclass 136 in which an inclined gaseous current
    is employed to assort the material, and provision is made for the
    collection of the material suspended in whole or in part and as one or more
    grades.


CLS 209/138
TXT Methods and means under subclass 133 in which a vertically flowing gaseous
    current is employed to assort the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.1,   19, 20, 28, 29, 36, and 37, for gaseous suspension separation
    employing a vertical current combined with other type of separation.

    466     through 477, for pneumatic type stratifiers.


CLS 209/139.1
TXT With deposition:

    Methods and means under subclass 138 in which a vertically flowing gaseous
    current is employed to assort the material, and provision is made to
    collect in part or in whole and as one or more grades or classes the
    material suspended.


CLS 209/139.2
TXT With centrifugal feed distribution:

    Subject matter under subclass 139.1 wherein the material being assorted is
    fed or distributed employing centrifugal force.


CLS 209/140
TXT Methods and means under subclass 138 in which a vertically flowing gaseous
    current which expands as it rises in the sorting region is employed to
    suspend some of the components of the material treated.


CLS 209/141
TXT Methods and means under subclass 140 in which a vertically flowing gaseous
    current which expands as it rises in the sorting region is employed, and
    provision is made for the collection, in whole or in part and as one or
    more grades, of the material suspended.


CLS 209/142
TXT Methods and means under subclass 133 by which material suspended in gaseous
    media is collected in two or more grades or classes.

    (1)     Note.  The preceding subclasses which involve fluid suspension and
    deposition should be searched.


CLS 209/143
TXT Methods and means under subclass 142 in which there is a collection of a
    plurality of grades or classes of material from gaseous current carrying
    the same in suspension, the gaseous current being deflected to promote
    deposition of suspended material.


CLS 209/145
TXT Methods and means under subclass 133 wherein material is given movement
    with substantial impetus in a direction or directions opposing the flow of
    gaseous suspending current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148,    for separations wherein material is centrifugally projected into
    the suspending gaseous current.


CLS 209/146
TXT Methods and means under subclass 133 for delivering material to be sorted
    to a suspending current or flow of gas.


CLS 209/147
TXT Methods and means under subclass 146 wherein conveyors are employed to
    deliver the material to be assorted to the gaseous suspending current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power Driven, appropriate subclasses, for conveyor
    features.

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, subclasses 15, 59+ and 79+ for
    threshers involving feeding or conveying.


CLS 209/148
TXT Methods and means under subclass 147 wherein material is centrifugally
    projected into the suspending gaseous current, generally by rotating disks
    or bowls.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145,    for separators in which material is given movement with substantial
    impetus in a direction opposing the flow of the gaseous suspending current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 410, and the notes thereto, for centrifugal
    force feeders, per se.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 39+ and
    275 for comminutors including centrifugal force feeders.


CLS 209/149
TXT Methods and means under subclass 147 wherein material is delivered to the
    gaseous suspending current by flow down or along chutes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145,    for separators in which material is given movement with substantial
    impetus in a direction opposing the flow of the gaseous suspending current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, appropriate subclasses,
    for conveying chutes, skids, etc., per se.

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, subclasses 15, 59+ and 79+ for
    threshers involving the use of chute feeders.


CLS 209/150
TXT Methods and means under subclass 147 wherein material is delivered to the
    suspending gaseous current by disks along which it flows.

    (1)     Note.  These disks are generally stationary and conical and deliver
    the material in a plurality of directions from an initial point of feed
    without imparting centrifugal impulse thereto.


CLS 209/151
TXT Methods and means under subclass 147 wherein material is passed over a
    series of planes in stepped relation and subjected to a suspending current
    of gas while passing from step to step, which current generally is
    horizontal or inclined.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    314     through 319, 354 and 355, for plane sifters placed in stepped or
    superposed relation.


CLS 209/152
TXT Methods and means under subclass 146 wherein material carries by hollow
    rotating cylinders or drums is agitated (usually by lifting and dropping)
    by the drum or a cooperating element thereof and subjected to a flow of gas
    which assorts the same.

    (1)     Note.  The distinction between this subclass and subclass 473 is
    that in this subclass all the material is definitely and repeatedly dropped
    into the gaseous current, while in the latter subclass the heavier
    components remain on the bottom of the cylinder or drum and are retained as
    a body or stratum or are conveyed along the bottom as a stratum.  The
    relations of the subclasses are otherwise very close, and search in one
    should always by extended into the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233+,   appropriate subclasses for drum sifters.

    473,    (see (1) Note)

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 45 and 54
    for comminutors or grinders of the horizontal drum type employing a gaseous
    current passing through the grinding zones.


CLS 209/153
TXT Methods and means under subclass 146 wherein agitators toss or project
    material into the path of flow of the sorting current.


CLS 209/154
TXT Methods and means under subclass 133 for controlling the gaseous-fluid
    currents employed for sorting material.


CLS 209/155
TXT Methods and means under subclass 132 wherein liquid is employed as the
    assorting medium.

    (1)     Note.  While some of the subclasses indented hereunder are
    analogous to the subclasses indented under Fluid, Gaseous, above, other
    properties of liquid are availed of, such as specific gravity and surface
    tension.  In the subclasses analogous to those involving gaseous fluid
    water is generally the medium, while where surface tension is involved
    water or aqueous solutions may be employed, and in those cases involving
    specific gravity water, aqueous solutions or suspensions, and liquid or
    liquefied metal may be employed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 20 and 38+
    for comminution combined with liquid application to effect the separation
    of the material.


CLS 209/156
TXT Methods and means under subclass 155 wherein a horizontal flow of liquid is
    employed to assort the components of solids which settle through the stream
    at different distances from the place of introduction or impingement of the
    solids.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173,    for gravity separation employing an aqueous medium.

    207,    for separations depending upon the surface tension of an aqueous
    medium.


CLS 209/157
TXT Methods and means under subclass 155 wherein an inclined current flow of
    liquid involving both horizontal and vertical displacement or motion of the
    suspended material, is employed to assort the components of material.


CLS 209/158
TXT Methods and means under subclass 155 vertically flowing liquid is employed
    to assort material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 792+ for processes of
    rehabilitating a particulate bed filter; subclass 108 for flow, fluid
    pressure or material level backwash control for filter beds, and subclasses
    269+ (particularly subclasses 275+) for particulate material type
    separators with rehabilitation means.


CLS 209/159
TXT Methods and means under subclass 158 wherein the vertically flowing liquid
    and the material subjected to the suspending influence thereof are agitated.

    (1)     Note.  The agitating means may include mechanical stirrers,
    stationary baffles, or fluid jets.


CLS 209/160
TXT Methods and means under subclass 158 wherein vertically flowing currents
    which expand as they flow upwardly are employed to assort material.


CLS 209/161
TXT Methods and means under subclass 160 wherein vertically flowing expanding
    assorting liquid currents and the material subjected to the suspending
    influence thereof are agitated by means which may include mechanical
    stirrers, stationary deflectors, or fluid jets.


CLS 209/162
TXT Methods and means under subclass 155 wherein material to be assorted is
    delivered to a body of liquid, some of the components floating on the
    liquid, while other components are sunk or remain submerged.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass will receive such cases as are not definitely
    classifiable in any of the indented subclasses hereunder and cases which
    are obscure as to the specific factors causing flotation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 60+ for compositions for use in assorting.


CLS 209/163
TXT Methods and means under subclass 162 wherein some material is caused to
    adhere selectively--i.e., to some constituents and not to others--which so
    lightens the material constituents to which it is attached as to cause them
    to float on the liquid, while the other constituents are not floated.

            Fluid suspension, Liquid, Floating, Buoyant material, Bubbles: The
    subclasses hereunder include apparatus and methods by which bubbles are
    caused to attach to some components of a material or mixture of solid
    materials and not to others, the components to which the bubbles are
    attached being caused thereby to float on the surface of the liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163+,   where only selected portions of the mixed materials are floated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 703+ for processes of
    precipitation involving flotation wherein the solids are floated
    indiscriminately, and subclasses 220+ for related apparatus.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 321 for processes and directed to breaking
    down bubbles carrying solids selected thereby.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses, for
    methods and apparatus in which contact is effected between the gas and
    solids suspended in liquid which are not limited to flotation, consequently
    Class 261 will take such methods and apparatus as are applicable to
    flotation as well as other purposes where the flotation step or element is
    not included as a limitation.


CLS 209/164
TXT Processes under subclass in which bubbles are caused to attach to certain
    of the components of the material treated and not to others, and the
    bubbles with adhering material are floated on the liquid.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass will include processes in which reagents may
    be employed for the purpose merely of chemically generating bubbles, but
    not those cases in which a reagent is employed for modifying the surface of
    particles of material, the surface tension of the liquid, or the nature of
    physical properties of the bubbles, which cases go to subclasses 166+ of
    this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166+,   (see (1) Note).


CLS 209/165
TXT Processes under subclass 164 by which certain components of a material are
    separated by bubble flotation from other components which are normally
    flotable, which processes do not involve the use of reagents which modify
    the physical characteristics of the liquid or bubbles.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass will include processes in which the surfaces
    of one or more constituents are changed otherwise than by coating with a
    reagent or adsorption of the reagent and where no reagent is employed to
    modify the physical characteristics of the liquid or the bubbles by which
    the flotation is attained.


CLS 209/166
TXT Processes under subclass 164 of bubble flotation of some constituents of a
    mixture, but not others, in which some reagent is employed to modify the
    factors in the flotation.

    (1)     Note.  The modification may be of surfaces of components, as by
    coating or adsorption of the reagent, by variation of the surface tension
    of the liquid in which the separation is performed, or by modifying the
    nature of the bubbles, or of any combination of such factors.  Mere
    chemical alteration of the surfaces of components does not bring the case
    into this subclass unless there is associated therewith the use of some
    reagent having a function such as indicated above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, for the manufacture of sugar,
    starch or carbohydrates from natural sources.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 1+ for processes of
    chemical liberation, recovery or purification of natural cellulose or
    fibrous material.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, for liquid purification
    including the use of electrical or wave energy.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 703+ for processes
    involving flotation wherein the solids are floated indiscriminately, and
    subclasses 220+ for related apparatus.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 61 for reagents employed in flotation.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses, for means
    for effecting gas and liquid contact, per se.

    366,    Agitating, for method and apparatus for mixing gases and liquids by
    agitation.


CLS 209/167
TXT Processes under subclass 166 of bubble flotation of the type of the
    preceding subclass, employing reagents, in which the selection by the
    bubbles is between a plurality of constituents of which each is normally
    flotable, those of one kind being floated while others are not.


CLS 209/168
TXT Apparatus under subclass 163 for effecting selective separation by bubble
    flotation.

    (1)     Note.  As indicated in connection with subclass 166, the
    distinction between Classes 261, Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, and 366,
    Agitating, and this subclass, is that this subclass includes apparatus
    limited by positive inclusion of the element or elements which complete the
    device as a flotation apparatus, whereas Class 261 and 366 include devices
    which effect contact between gas and liquid not limited to flotation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, for apparatus employed in the
    manufacture of sugar, starch or carbohydrates.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, for apparatus employed in
    purifying a liquid using electrical or wave energy.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 198+ for separators
    of that class combined with means to add treating materials, e.g., a gas,
    particularly subclasses 220+.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses.  (see (1)
    Note).


CLS 209/169
TXT Devices under subclass 168 in which the contact between the gas forming the
    bubbles and the liquid carrying the material to be selectively floated is
    effected by agitation, which devices are limited to flotation by bubbles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, for gas and liquid contact
    apparatus, per se.

    366,    Agitating, for agitators, per se.


CLS 209/170
TXT Devices under subclass 168 limited to selective flotation by bubbles in
    which the gas forming the bubbles is delivered below the surface of the
    liquid.

    (1)     Note.  The gas as delivered may include some liquid or reagent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168,    for apparatus wherein a gas is generated chemically or
    electrolytically within the liquid as are also combinations    involving
    structures or elements belonging to both this and the immediately preceding
    subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses, for gas
    and liquid contact apparatus, per se.


CLS 209/171
TXT Methods and means under subclass 163 wherein oil which has a selective
    affinity for some of the components of the mixture to be separated is
    employed, to which such components adhere and with which they are floated
    to the surface of the bath of liquid.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes cases in which sufficient bulk of oil
    is employed to reduce the specific gravity of the mixture of oil and
    adhering particles of material to a degree below that of the liquid in
    which the separation is effected so that the oily mixture may float.


CLS 209/172
TXT Methods and means under subclass 162 wherein material to be separated is
    delivered to or mixed with a liquid or mixture of liquids having a specific
    gravity greater than that of some constituents and less than that of other
    constituents, the constituents of lesser specific gravity than the liquid
    floating thereon, while those of greater specific gravity sink or remain
    suspended in the liquid.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes such cases as do not fall within the
    subclasses indented thereunder.


CLS 209/172.5
TXT Methods and means under subclass 172 wherein the constituents of a mixture
    having lesser specific gravity are separated from those of greater specific
    gravity by flotation on a liquid system of intermediate specific gravity
    which system is a suspension of solids.


CLS 209/173
TXT Methods and means under subclass 172 wherein the constituents of a mixture
    having lesser specific gravity are separated from those of greater specific
    gravity by flotation on a liquid system of intermediate specific gravity
    which system is water or an aqueous solution.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 570 for apparatus for
    fluid separation including flotation.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 38+
    particularly subclass 46.01 for comminutors combined with such separators.


CLS 209/174
TXT Methods and means under subclass 172 wherein metallic liquid is employed to
    float the constituents of lesser specific gravity from those of greater
    specific gravity.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes those cases which involve the use of
    particular metals or alloys of metals which do not fall into the subclasses
    indented thereunder.

    (2)     Note.  In substantially all the cases of this subclass and those
    indented thereunder the separation is of metal from worthless material with
    which the metal is mixed, the metal sinking in the metallic liquid and the
    worthless material floating thereon, though there may be some instances in
    which one metal may be separated from another.

    (3)     Note.  Owing to the impracticability of drawing a clear line
    between cases where there is a clear flotation of the lighter specific
    gravity components and those cases in which liquid metal is mixed with the
    material and afterwards settled out with the attached or absorbed metals,
    both types are included in the subclasses indented hereunder, since the
    settling of the liquid metal with rejection of the lighter components of
    the material in the supernatant layer may be considered a species of
    flotation of such lighter components.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 227+ for apparatus for treating
    molten material to separate the same into different constituents e.g., slag
    from metal.


CLS 209/175
TXT Processes under subclass 174 involving the use of metallic liquid as a
    medium for the separation of those components of a mixture which have a
    lesser specific gravity from those that have a greater specific gravity
    than the liquid.


CLS 209/176
TXT Processes under subclass 175 including chemical treatment other than
    chemical dissolution or formation of compounds of the metal sought which
    are limited by the inclusion of the amalgamating step or which are
    preparatory for or promotive of the amalgamating step and have no other
    utility.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass will include processes not classifiable in the
    subclass indented thereunder, generally processes in which the chemical
    treatment affects both the material treated and the mercury or its
    equivalent or in which the effect is not definitely assignable to one or
    the other.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass and subclass 178 do not include processes
    involving chemical treatment for decomposing or altering the composition of
    metallic constituents sought to be extracted unless limited to or having
    utility restricted to amalgamation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177     through 181, for other processes of chemical and for electrical
    treatments in connection with amalgamating step.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 219, 220, 221,
    250, and 251 for electrolytic apparatus for the production of amalgams.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 558+ for electrolytic processes of
    producing amalgams.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, subclasses 526+ for amalgams and
    methods of manufacturing them.


CLS 209/177
TXT Processes under subclass 176 involving chemical treatment which are limited
    to amalgamation and in which the effect of the treatment is upon the
    mercury or its equivalent or which involve chemical treatment which
    promotes the action of the mercury in absorbing the substances selectively
    separated or prepares the mercury or equivalent for such action and has no
    other utility.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176,    179 and 180, for other processes of chemical or electrical
    treatment upon the mercury employed.


CLS 209/178
TXT Processes under subclass 176 involving chemical treatment other than
    chemical dissolution or formation of compounds of the metal, limited to
    amalgamation in which the effect of the treatment is upon the material to
    be separated or processes involving chemical treatment, other than chemical
    dissolution or formation of compounds of the metal, of the material to be
    separated to prepare it for separation by mercury or its equivalent and
    having no other utility.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176,    179 and 181, for other processes of chemical or electrical
    treatment of the material to be separated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, for metallurgical treatment of ores.


CLS 209/179
TXT Processes under subclass 175 involving electrical treatment limited to
    amalgamation or which are promotive of amalgamation and have no other
    utility. Such process does not ordinarily include cases involving the use
    of mercury charged with a reagent for decomposing salts or compounds of the
    metal sought, with incidental amalgamation.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes such processes as are not
    classifiable in the subclasses indented hereunder, generally processes in
    which both the material being separated and the mercury or its equivalent
    are affected by the electrical treatment or in which the effect is not
    definitely assignable to either.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass and subclass 181 do not include processes in
    which the material being treated or a portion thereof is electrolytically
    decomposed to facilitate a separation not limited to amalgamation, for
    which see Class 204, Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180     and 181, for other processes involving electrical treatment in
    connection with the amalgamating (see (2) Note).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 194+ for
    electrolytic apparatus.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 558+ for electrolytic processes of
    producing mercury alloys (see (2) Note.).


CLS 209/180
TXT Processes under subclass 179 involving electrical treatment limited to
    amalgamation or promotive of amalgamation and having no other utility, in
    which the effect of the electrical treatment is assigned to the mercury or
    its equivalent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179,    for other processes of electrical treatment of the mercury in
    connection with the amalgamation.


CLS 209/181
TXT Processes under subclass 179 involving electrical treatment limited to or
    promotive of amalgamation and having no other utility in which the effect
    of the electrical treatment is assigned to the material being separated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179,    for other electrical treatment of the material to be separated (see
    (2) Note thereto.)


CLS 209/182
TXT Processes under subclass 175 involving heat treatment limited to or
    promotive of amalgamation and having no other utility.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include heat treatment for the
    purpose of reducing or decomposing ores when not limited to amalgamation or
    not having utility restricted thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for processes of coating material with mercury to facilitate
    separation by adhesion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, for metallurgical processes employing heat.


CLS 209/183
TXT Apparatus and methods under subclass 174 for delivering material to be
    separated below the surface of the body of liquid material which serves to
    float the lighter components and to retain the heavier.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and the subclasses indented under it do not
    include such cases as do not involve the initial subsurface delivery of the
    material, cases where the material is submerged only after a preliminary
    surface delivery which permits the heavier to sink in the metallic bath not
    being ordinarily included.


CLS 209/184
TXT Apparatus and methods under subclass 183 wherein conveying means are
    employed to force the material beneath the surface of the metallic bath.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205,    for the use of a receptacle having a rotating agitating means in
    connection therewith to effect contact between the material to be separated
    and the metallic liquid.


CLS 209/185
TXT Apparatus and methods under subclass 183 wherein suction means are employed
    to draw the material beneath the surface of the metallic bath.


CLS 209/186
TXT Apparatus and methods under subclass 183 wherein means are employed to
    agitate the material while submerged in the metallic bath.


CLS 209/187
TXT Apparatus and methods under subclass 186 wherein baffles or stationary
    deflectors are employed to agitate the material while submerged in the
    metallic bath.


CLS 209/188
TXT Apparatus and methods under subclass 186 wherein mechanical stirrers are
    employed to agitate the material while submerged in the metallic bath.


CLS 209/189
TXT Apparatus and methods under subclass 174 wherein the material to be
    separated is delivered initially to the surface of the metallic bath.


CLS 209/190
TXT Apparatus and methods under subclass 189 wherein the material to be
    separated is delivered forcibly against the surface of the metallic bath.

    (1)     Note.  Projecting means may be employed or the material may be
    delivered gravitally by dropping a sufficient distance to develop
    substantial impetus.


CLS 209/191
TXT Apparatus and methods under subclass 174 wherein means for attritively
    rubbing the particles of material are employed in conjunction with a
    metallic bath which floats the components of lesser specific gravity, while
    those of greater specific gravity remain in the bath.

    (1)     Note.  The rubbing and subjection to the metallic bath may be
    coincident, or one may follow the other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses, especially subclasses 20 and 46.01 for processes and apparatus
    including comminution combined with separation by liquid flotation.


CLS 209/192
TXT Devices under subclass 174 for feeding material to or for discharging
    material to or from a liquid metallic bath or for both feeding and
    discharging such material.


CLS 209/193
TXT Devices under subclass 192 for feeding liquid metal to a metallic bath
    which separates components of material, or for discharging the metal of the
    bath, or for both feeding and discharging such metal composing the bath.


CLS 209/194
TXT Devices under subclass 174 constructed or specially adapted for use in
    connection with the treatment of material by metallic liquid for the
    purpose of separating constituents of such material.

    (1)     Note.  In connection with this and the subclasses indented
    thereunder the titular term is employed in its broadest significance to
    indicate devices which receives the material treated and the liquid metal,
    whether they retain either or both or permit either or both to pass
    continuously through the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183+,   for devices where there is an initial submergence of the material
    in a body of liquid metal.


CLS 209/195
TXT Receptacles under subclass 194 in or on which the material to be separated
    and the liquid metal are brought into contact have a shaking movement.


CLS 209/196
TXT Receptacles under subclass 195 in or on which contact is effected between
    the material to be separated and the liquid metal are in the form of tables
    or shallow chutes or troughs to which a shaking movement is imparted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.1,   14, 15, 41, 42, and 64, for other separation processes and
    apparatus involving the use of tables or chutes with mercurial suspension
    or adhesion.


CLS 209/197
TXT Means under subclass 195 which are provided in the shaking receptacles for
    agitating the material to be separated or both the material and the liquid
    metal.


CLS 209/198
TXT Devices under subclass 194 on or in which contact is effected between the
    material to be separated and the liquid metal are given a rotating movement.


CLS 209/199
TXT Devices under subclass 198 in or on which the contact is effected between
    the material to be separated and the liquid metal which effects the
    separation are given rotation that will generate such centrifugal force as
    to promote the separation, generally by forcing the particles of higher
    specific gravity into the body or bodies of liquid metal in the receptacle.


CLS 209/200
TXT Rotating receptacles under subclass 198 in which contact is effected
    between the material to be separated and the liquid metal is provided with
    means for agitating the material or the material and the liquid metal.


CLS 209/201
TXT Receptacles under subclass 194 in which contact is effected between the
    material to be separated and the liquid metal is stationary.


CLS 209/202
TXT Stationary receptacles under subclass 201 in or on which contact is
    effected between the material to be separated and the liquid metal is in
    the form of a table or shallow trough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.1,   14, 16, 41, 42, and 58, for similar separations in which a table or
    trough is employed.


CLS 209/203
TXT Stationary receptacles under subclass 201 in which contact is effected
    between the material to be separated and the liquid metal is provided with
    means to agitate the material or the material and the liquid metal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and those indented thereunder receive such
    cases as do not include the initial submergence of the material under the
    surface of the liquid metal in which agitating means are employed for the
    submerged material.


CLS 209/204
TXT Stationary receptacles under subclass 203 which receive the material to be
    separated and the liquid metal which effects the separation is provided
    with reciprocating agitating means.


CLS 209/205
TXT Stationary receptacles under subclass 203 which receive the material to be
    separated and the liquid metal which effects the separation is provided
    with a rotary agitating means.


CLS 209/206
TXT Devices under subclass 174 for retaining or collecting liquid metal that is
    employed to separate components of a mixture of solids.


CLS 209/207
TXT Methods and means under subclass 162 wherein material is delivered to the
    surface of a body of liquid, generally water or an aqueous solution, part
    of the material breaking through the surface and another part not breaking
    through, but floating, upon the surface.

    (1)     Note.  In cases coming into this subclass the separation depends
    generally upon different capabilities of the components of the material for
    being surface wetted, those that are wetted sinking, while those that are
    not wetted during the period of contact allowed, float.  The separation is
    independent ordinarily of specific gravities of the components.  The
    subclass will include cases where the material is treated to modify the
    wetting susceptibilities of some of the components, as by coating with a
    film or oil, etc., as well as those in which the natural susceptibilities
    are depended upon.


CLS 209/208
TXT Means and methods under subclass 155 for assorting or grading material by
    deposition from a body of liquid, generally water, which are not dependent
    upon the effect of an impingement of a current flow of liquid upon the
    material.

    (1)     Note.  The body of liquid may be static or may be in motion, and in
    the latter case the material is either initially in suspension in the
    liquid or is delivered to a body of liquid moving in other than the form of
    a current.

    (2)     Note.  The distinction between this subclass and those indented
    thereunder and subclasses 155-161 lies in the dependance of the latter upon
    the effect of a current of liquid upon the material, while the former group
    is substantially independent thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155     through 161, (see (2) Note).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 227+ for apparatus for treating
    molten material to separate the same into different constituents e.g., slag
    from metal.


CLS 209/209
TXT Means and methods under subclass 208 wherein material is delivered to a
    body of liquid, either static or in motion otherwise than as a current, and
    fall of the different grades or sorts of material is checked or the
    material caught after definite time intervals, these intervals being
    different for the different grades or sorts of material.


CLS 209/210
TXT Means and methods under subclass 208 wherein the flow of liquid carrying
    material in suspension is deflected to promote deposition or settlement of
    the material.

    (1)     Note.  One grade of material may be deposited and the rest be
    maintained in suspension and removed from the deposited grade or a
    plurality of grades may be deposited separately.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus and methods where the remaining of a portion in suspension after
    deposition of the material in unclassified condition is merely an incident
    of the decantation of the liquid from the settled mass, and no provision is
    made to definitely suspend a particular portion for removal.

            Magnetic:
    Apparatuses and processes which employ magnetic force to segregate material
    responsive to such force from other material which is not affected by such
    force.


CLS 209/212
TXT Methods and means under Magnetic for separating components of material by
    magnetic repulsion.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes cases where the repulsion is due to
    inherent diamagnetism and cases where it is due to magnetic polarity
    established by electrical currents (eddy or Foucault currents) developed in
    conductive components.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.1+,  particularly subclasses 38-40, for diamagnetic separation combined
    with other separating operations classifiable in this class (Class 209).

    562,    for a magnetic means delaying actuation of a means separating
    special items.

    567+,   for a magnetic test sensing a property of special items to be
    sorted.

    639,    for means sorting special items by use of a magnet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 554+ for
    electrical (e.g., electrostatic, etc.) or simultaneous electrical and
    magnetic separation or purification of liquids or magnetic treatment of
    liquids (other than separation) and subclasses 660+ for corresponding
    apparatus.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 222+ for processes
    and apparatus for applying a magnetic field to a liquid to separate
    particles therefrom for the disclosed purpose of clarifying the liquid.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses using magnetic force in destroying or containing hazardous or
    toxic waste.


CLS 209/213
TXT Methods and means under Magnetic employing magnetic attraction to separate
    material responsive to the attraction from other materials not responsive
    to such attraction or responsive in lesser degree.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes cases which are not classifiable in the
    subclasses indented thereunder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.1+,  particularly subclasses 38-40, for paramagnetic separation combined
    with other separating operations classifiable in this class (Class 209).

    562,    for a magnetic means delaying actuation of a means separating
    special items.

    567+,   for a magnetic test sensing a property of special items to be
    sorted.

    639,    for means sorting special items by use of a magnet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 554+ for
    electrical (e.g., electrostatic, etc.) or simultaneous electrical and
    magnetic separation or purification of liquids or magnetic treatment of
    liquids (other than separation) and subclasses 660+ for corresponding
    apparatus.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 222+ for processes
    and apparatus for applying a magnetic field to a liquid to separate
    particles therefrom for the disclosed purpose of clarifying the liquid.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 606, 737, 793.2+, and
    797.1 for a device of that class which may include a magnet.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses using magnetic force in destroying or containing hazardous or
    toxic  waste.


CLS 209/214
TXT Processes under subclass 213 employing magnetic attraction to separate
    material responsive to such attraction from material not so responsive or
    responsive in lesser degree.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for processes which involve treatment to render components of a
    mixture not normally magnetically attractable so attractable.


CLS 209/215
TXT Methods and means under subclass 213 involving the use of magnetic
    attraction to separate substances which are magnetically attractable from
    other substances, applied to particular substances or under special
    unconventional conditions.


CLS 209/216
TXT Devices under subclass 213 for magnetic separation of magnetically
    attractable substances from other substances which include magnetic
    separating elements of more than one type.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include mere duplications of one type
    of magnetic separating element.


CLS 209/217
TXT Methods and means under subclass 213 wherein the magnetic elements which
    effect the attraction of some components reciprocate.


CLS 209/218
TXT Methods and means under subclass 213 wherein the magnetic elements which
    effect the attraction of some components from other are in the form of
    endless rotating belts.

    (1)     Note.  Said elements may be single or may be made up of a plurality
    of elements arranged in the form indicated.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass will include devices including belts of
    magnetic material which may be "permanently" magnetized or may be
    inductively magnetized by stationary of movable magnets and devices in
    which a plurality of magnets are joined in belt form.


CLS 209/219
TXT Devices under subclass 213 including rotating cylinders or drums having
    other than vertical axes constituting magnetic elements which attract
    responsive components of material to or toward their exterior surfaces.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass will include structures in which the cylinders
    or drums are themselves magnetic or composed of assembled magnetic elements
    or are composed of magnetizable material or assembled elements of
    magnetizable material with movable or stationary inducing magnets.  It does
    not include rotating cylinders or drums surrounding stationary magnets
    where the cylinders or drums themselves are not magnetic and serve merely
    as shields or conveyors.


CLS 209/220
TXT Devices under subclass 219 including rotating cylinders or drums on
    vertical axes which attract magnetically responsive material to or toward
    their outer surfaces.

    (1)     Note.  The cylinders or drums may be of the structure indicated for
    the cylinders or drums of the preceding subclass, and as with said
    preceding subclass, drums or cylinders surrounding nonrotating magnets and
    not themselves magnetic or magnetized are not included.


CLS 209/221
TXT Devices under subclass 213 wherein the magnetic attracting element or
    elements constitute or form part of a hollow rotating cylinder or drum, and
    material to be separated is delivered to the interior of such drum or
    cylinder, and the magnetizable constituents are attracted to the magnetic
    elements and detained or diverted from nonmagnetizable constituents.

    (1)     Note.  Part or all of the rotating cylinder or drum must be
    magnetized, devices in the form of hollow cylinders or drums serving as
    shields or conveyors adjacent magnets, but no portion of which is
    magnetized to operate directly as attracting means, not being included.


CLS 209/222
TXT Devices under subclass 213 wherein the magnetic attracting element or
    elements are in rotating disk form or form part of a disk, the disk being
    rotated.

    (1)     Note.  Disks which operate as shields or conveyors adjacent
    magnetic elements not of rotary disk type, which disks do not include a
    magnetic or magnetized portion, are not included.  The subclass will
    include a series of open-spaced magnetic elements arranged to define a disk
    and rotated.


CLS 209/223.1
TXT Stationary magnets:

    Methods and means under subclass 213 wherein the magnetic attracting
    elements are stationary.

    (1)     Note.  Movable or stationary partitions, shields, or conveyors may
    be interposed between the attracting elements and the material and do not
    control classification if they include in themselves no magnetizable
    attracting elements.


CLS 209/223.2
TXT Cylinder external:

    Subject matter under subclass 223.1 wherein the magnetic elements are
    portion of hollow cylinders or drums and the material being treated is fed
    along the outside surface of each element.


CLS 209/224
TXT Methods and means under subclass 223 wherein the magnetic attracting
    elements are in the form of or constitute portions of stationary hollow
    cylinders or drums, and the material is fed into or through these cylinders
    or drums.


CLS 209/225
TXT Methods and means under subclass 213 wherein means are provided for
    agitating or conveying the material being subjected to magnetic separation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232,    for magnetic separators provided with means for feeding the
    material to be separated suspended in a liquid.


CLS 209/226
TXT Methods and means under subclass 225 wherein the material being
    magnetically separated is agitated by magnetic influence, which may be the
    result of some special construction or relation of the separating magnet or
    magnets or may be attained by supplemental magnets.


CLS 209/227
TXT Methods and means under subclass 226 wherein material being magnetically
    separated is agitated or conveyed by traveling magnetic fields generated by
    the separating magnetic elements or magnetic elements supplemental thereto.


CLS 209/228
TXT Means and methods under subclass 213 for discharging separated components
    from magnetic separators, mainly material attracted by the magnets.


CLS 209/229
TXT Devices under subclass 228 for mechanically removing or wiping off the
    material attracted to the magnetic elements of magnetic separators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses 262+ for textile fiber
    drawing roll clearers.


CLS 209/230
TXT Devices under subclass 229 wherein magnets are employed to remove the
    material attracted to the separating magnets.


CLS 209/231
TXT Means and methods under subclass 213 for feeding material to be separated
    to separating magnets.


CLS 209/232
TXT Means and methods under subclass 231 in which the material to be separated
    is fed into the influence of the attracting magnet or magnets suspended in
    liquid.


CLS 209/233
TXT Means and methods under class definition by which material is separated or
    assorted according to size or dimensions of components by presentation to a
    series of openings or passages through which the components having
    dimensions below those of the openings or passages pass while those having
    dimensions greater than those of the passages or openings do not pass
    through.

    (1)     Note.  The distinction between this subclass and subclasses
    indented hereunder and subclasses 659+, sorting items by size, is mainly
    that subclasses 659+ generally deal with the assortment of special
    articles, such as fruit, vegetables, and various articles of manufacture as
    set forth in (1) Note of subclass 509, and the articles are usually
    presented individually to the sizing passages; while in subclasses 233+,
    the material is ordinarily presented indiscriminately to the series of
    passages.  The distinction is, however, not clearcut, and search in one
    group should be extended into appropriate subclasses of the other group.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.1+,  for sifting separation combined with other separation operations.

    557,    for a combination of a noncondition responsive special item sorting
    by size separating operation with a condition responsive separating
    operation.

    629+,   for a combination of diverse types of special item separating
    operations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 521+ 522, 528, 603+,
    and 605+ for grain hullers embodying sifters.

    241,    Solids Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses, especially subclasses 49+, 69+, 83+ for screens combined with
    or forming part of a comminutor organization.


CLS 209/234
TXT Sifting devices under subclass 233 including a plurality of sifters of
    different general types, but not mere duplications of a single type.


CLS 209/235
TXT Sifting devices under subclass 233 employed for separating particular
    materials or for other than the mere size grading of a given mass of
    particles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251,    for reversible sifters.


CLS 209/236
TXT Sifting devices under subclass 235 employed or adapted for the distribution
    or spreading of material and in which size grading is merely incidental.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclass 121 for sifting devices which
    distribute into a conveying current.


CLS 209/237
TXT Sifting devices under subclass 235 employed or adapted for sifting material
    to determine the proportion of each size in the whole.


CLS 209/238
TXT Sifting means or steps under subclass 233 associated with means or steps
    for heating or cooling the material treated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for other combinations of solid separation with heating or cooling.


CLS 209/239
TXT Sifting means under subclass 233 associated with means for weighing
    material treated.

    (1)     Note.  The weighing may be precedent, coincident, or subsequent.


CLS 209/240
TXT Sifting means under subclass 233 associated with means for feeding and
    discharging.


CLS 209/241
TXT Devices and methods under subclass 240, wherein conveyors are employed both
    for the feeding of material to and for discharging material from sifting
    devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    420,    for portable sifters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, particularly subclasses 111+
    and 138 for separators for sifting and recovering from a mass of earth
    plants or other desired objects embedded therein combined with conveyors
    for moving the earth or recovered objects to or from said separators.


CLS 209/242
TXT Devices and methods under subclass 240 wherein the feeding and the
    discharging means for sifters are connected for simultaneous control other
    than mere actuation from a common source, generally means to set both into
    or out of operation simultaneously or to interrupt one when the other is
    set into operation.


CLS 209/243
TXT Means and methods under subclass 233 for feeding material to sifting
    devices.


CLS 209/244
TXT Means and methods under subclass 243 in which the material is fed from
    hoppers to the sifting devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, for conveyors, chutes
    etc., per se.

    222,    Dispensing, for hopper feeders, per se.


CLS 209/245
TXT Means and methods under subclass 244 wherein agitating or conveying means
    are associated with hoppers which feed material to sifting devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254,    for spreading and distributing the material over the surface of the
    sifter.

    284,    for feeders for drum sifters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, for hopper feeders, per se, with agitators to
    facilitate feeding.


CLS 209/246
TXT Means and methods under subclass 244 wherein cut-offs or valves are
    associated with hoppers to control the delivery of material to sifting
    devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, for conveyors chutes
    etc., per se, with valves or cut-offs.

    222,    Dispensing, for hopper feeders with valves or cut-offs.


CLS 209/247
TXT Means and methods under subclass 243 which include conveyors associated
    with sifting means and delivering material to the latter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    316,    for plural superposed sifters with intermediate conveyors.

    420,    for portable sifters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 307+ for dredgers.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, for conveyor structure, per se.

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, subclasses 15, 59+, 79+, and 123 for
    threshing machines including conveyor feeders.


CLS 209/248
TXT Devices under subclass 247 in which the material is conveyed and delivered
    to sifters by portable receptacles, there generally being some adaptation
    of one for the other or some means facilitating the positioning of the
    receptacle relatively to the sifter.


CLS 209/249
TXT Devices under subclass 248 wherein ash pans are employed to deliver
    material to sifters, generally with some adaptation of one to the other or
    means for attaching the ashpan to the sifter.


CLS 209/250
TXT Devices under subclass 247 in which the material is delivered to sifters,
    generally by projection, suspended in a fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses 202, 204+, and 304+ for
    fiber separators with pneumatic feed.

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 317+ for dredges which include a pump to
    cause a current to flow through the inlet or delusing pipe.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 153+ for flume stream
    type screens, and subclass 405 for filters having a movable prefilt
    distributor.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, appropriate subclasses, for fluid
    current conveyors, per se.


CLS 209/251
TXT Sifters under subclass 243 adapted to sift material through in one
    direction and then to be reversed to sift the material in the opposite
    direction relatively to the sifting element or elements.


CLS 209/252
TXT Means and methods under subclass 243 in which the material is sifted by
    movement of the sifter against a mass of the material instead of the latter
    being delivered to the sifter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 315+ for shell-fish dredgers.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclasses 84+ for reticulated
    devices which comb through the soil or a mass of earth having object
    embedded therein to collect or gather desired objects therefrom.


CLS 209/253
TXT Devices under subclass 243 including a series of sifters and means whereby
    material may be delivered at will to any desired sifter of the series by
    manipulation of the feeding means or shifting of the positions of the
    series of sifters.


CLS 209/254
TXT Devices under subclass 243 which distribute or spread material over the
    surfaces of sifters at points of delivery or which distribute material over
    the surfaces of a plurality of sifters as the material is fed.


CLS 209/255
TXT Means and methods under subclass 233 of discharging material from sifters.

    (1)     Note.  These may include means for discharging oversize or
    undersize material or both.


CLS 209/256
TXT Means and methods under subclass 255 which include conveyors and valves
    which control delivery of material to or from the conveyors for discharge
    from sifters.


CLS 209/257
TXT Means and methods under subclass 255 wherein conveyors are employed to
    discharge material, either oversize, undersize, or both, from sifters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284,    317, 371, and 375, for other combinations including a sifter and a
    discharge conveyor.

    420,    for portable sifter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 307+ for dredgers.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclasses 89, 123, 124+, and
    138 for recovery devices in which a reticulated means for screening desired
    objects from a mass of earth is provided with a cooperating, conveyor means
    for receiving and carrying away from said reticulated means oversize and/or
    undersize material.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses, for conveyor
    structure, per se.

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, subclasses 15, 59+, 79+, and 123 for
    threshers including discharge conveyors.


CLS 209/258
TXT Means and methods under subclass 255 including valves associated with
    sifters to control the discharge of material, either oversize, undersize,
    or both, from the sifters.


CLS 209/259
TXT Means and methods under subclass 255 wherein special receptacles, generally
    portable are employed to receive material, either oversize, undersize, or
    both, from sifting devices.


CLS 209/260
TXT Sifters under subclass 255 adapted to discharge material, usually oversize,
    by tilting or inversion of the sifter.


CLS 209/261
TXT Means under subclass 233 associated with sifters for conveying material
    relatively to the sifting surfaces which do not fall within the feeding
    and/or discharging subclasses or within the agitating subclasses.

    (1)     Note.  This specific subclass takes such cases as do not fall
    within the subclasses indented thereunder and includes generally means for
    conveying material from one part to another of a sifter or series of
    sifters out of contact with the sifting surface and means for conveying
    material around (by-passing) the sifting elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    316     and 317, for other combinations of plural superposed sifters with
    intermediate conveyor or discharge means.


CLS 209/262
TXT Means under subclass 261 including conveying means, other than agitators
    which directly force material through the sifting passages.

    (1)     Note.  These conveying means may be conveyors of a mechanical
    nature operating substantially in the direction in which the undersize
    passes through the sifting passages or may be means for forcing fluid in
    the direction specified.

    (2)     Note.  Where fluid is employed to force material through the
    passages of a sifter, it must be a fluid supply which does not merely
    agitate the material on the sifter, but must exert substantial force in the
    direction of passage through the sifting passages.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250,    for sifters with fluid current feeders.


CLS 209/263
TXT Means under subclass 261 employed to cause particles of material to move in
    some definite relation to the sifting passages of a sifter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    392+,   for sifter structure, per se.

    659+,   for size separation of special items.


CLS 209/264
TXT Means under subclass 263 wherein guides are employed to direct the
    particles of material in some definite relation to the sifting apertures.


CLS 209/265
TXT Sifting devices under subclass 264 associated with an imperforate surface
    or surfaces which operate to position particles of material relatively to
    the sifting passages, generally by causing particles having larger
    dimensions in one or more directions than in others to arrange themselves
    so that the larger dimensions shall be in planes paralleling the sifting
    surface.


CLS 209/266
TXT Guiding devices under subclass 264 which overlie the sifting surfaces to
    maintain particles of material having greater dimensions in one or more
    directions than in others with the greater dimensions paralleling the
    sifting surfaces.


CLS 209/267
TXT Devices under subclass 261 associated with sifters which retard the passage
    of material over the sifting surfaces and which are not primarily agitators.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266     and 314, and the appropriate sifter with agitator subclasses, for
    sifters with guides or agitators, superposed stepped sifters etc., which
    may function to retard the passage of material over the sifting surfaces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, subclasses 59+ and 79+, straw
    carriers for threshing machines and cylinder type threshing machines.


CLS 209/268
TXT Sifting means or methods under subclass 233 adapted for sifting materials
    mingled with liquid or for subjecting the material to the action of a
    liquid to promote the sifting effect.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and the subclasses indented thereunder do not
    include cases where the liquid is employed to promote stratifying or liquid
    suspension separation and the sifting is independent of the liquid
    treatment or a mere incident of some other separation due to the effect of
    the liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.1,   13, 14, 17, 42, and 44, for combinations of sifting and fluid
    suspension or stratifying type separations.

    423     through 427 and 454-457, for stratifiers employing a permeable bed.


CLS 209/269
TXT Reciprocating sifters under subclass 268 adapted to sift material suspended
    in liquid or associated with liquid-supply means adapted to promote the
    sifting operation.

    (1)     Note.  Cases in which the liquid is employed for stratifying or
    liquid suspension separation and sifting is merely incidental are not
    included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.1,   13, 14, 17, 42, and 44, for combinations of sifting and fluid
    suspension or stratifying type separations.

    423     through 427, for stratifiers employing a movable permeable bed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 355+ and 365 for
    vibrating screen molds employed in felting a fibrous product.


CLS 209/270
TXT Means and methods under subclass 268 wherein rotating cylindrical or drum
    sifters are employed to sift material suspended in liquid or liquid-supply
    means are associated therewith to promote sifting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.1,   13, 14, 17, 42, and 44, for combinations of sifting and fluid
    suspension or stratifying type separations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 323+ and 357 for
    paper making machines employing a foraminous cylinder mold.


CLS 209/271
TXT Means and methods under subclass 268 wherein rotating-disk sifters are
    employed to sift material suspended in liquid or liquid-supply means are
    associated with such sifters to promote sifting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.1,   13, 14, 17, 42, and 44, for combinations of sifting and fluid
    suspension or stratifying type separations.

    423     through 427, for stratifiers employing moveable permeable beds.


CLS 209/272
TXT Means and methods under subclass 268 wherein endless-belt sifters are
    employed to sift material suspended in liquid or associated with
    liquid-supply means which promote the sifting action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.1,   13, 17, 42, and 44, for combinations of sifting and fluid
    suspension or stratifying type separations.


CLS 209/273
TXT Means and methods under subclass 268 wherein stationary sifters are
    employed to sift material suspended in liquid or are associated with
    liquid-supply means which promote the sifting action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.1,   13, 14, 42, and 44, for combinations of sifting with fluid
    suspension or stratifying separations.

    454     through 457, for stratifiers employing stationary permeable beds.


CLS 209/274
TXT Sifting devices under subclass 233 curved concavely or convexly on the
    surfaces to which material is delivered and having both reciprocating and
    rotating motion, or not coming under the subclasses indented hereunder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    309,    for reciprocating and rotating horizontal or inclined plane sifters.


CLS 209/275
TXT Sifters under subclass 274 whose material-receiving surfaces are curved or
    bent in concave or convex form and are given a reciprocating movement.


CLS 209/276
TXT Convex or concave sifters under subclass 275 which reciprocate and are
    provided or associated with means for agitating the material being sifted,
    which do not fall within the subclasses indented hereunder.


CLS 209/277
TXT Reciprocating convex or concave sifters under subclass 276 wherein
    reciprocating agitators are employed with reciprocating sifters which are
    curved in concave or convex forms on the material-receiving surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    357,    for stationary, horizontal or inclined plane sifter with
    reciprocating agitators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, subclasses 85+ for rake type straw
    carriers for grain separators.


CLS 209/278
TXT Reciprocating concave or convex sifters under subclass 276 have associated
    therewith rotating agitators.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    358,    for stationary, horizontal or inclined plane sifter with rotating
    agitators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, subclass 22 for over hung rake straw
    carriers for grain separators.


CLS 209/279
TXT Sifters under subclass 274 which are rotating and have material-receiving
    surfaces concave or convex in shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    350+,   for rotating horizontal or inclined plane sifters.


CLS 209/280
TXT Rotating concave or convex sifters under subclass 279 associated with means
    for agitating the material being sifted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    351,    for rotating horizontal or inclined plane sifters having agitating
    means.


CLS 209/281
TXT Stationary sifters under subclass 274 the material-receiving surfaces of
    which are concave or convex.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    352+,   for stationary horizontal or inclined plane sifter.


CLS 209/282
TXT Stationary sifters under subclass 281 the material-receiving surfaces of
    which are concave or convex, having reciprocating agitators associated
    therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    357,    for stationary horizontal or inclined plane sifter with
    reciprocating agitator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus subclasses 528 and 605+ for
    perforated sifters in a grain huller, including agitators and stationary
    sifters.

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, subclasses 85+ for rake type straw
    carriers for grain separators.


CLS 209/283
TXT Stationary sifters under subclass 281 having concave or convex
    material-receiving surfaces and associated with rotating agitators.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    358,    for stationary horizontal or inclined plane sifter with rotating
    agitators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses 38 and 94 for ball hullers
    and fiber picking means involving the use of rotating agitators or elements.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus subclasses 528 and 607 for a
    perforated sifter in a grain huller that may include a rotating agitator.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 73 and 86+
    for comminutors or disintegrators combined with sifter or screen elements
    cooperating with rotary comminuting elements.

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, subclasses 59+, 79+ and 123+ for
    threshers including rotating agitating means.



    Sifting,        Drum sifters.  The subclasses indented under this title
    include sifters whose sifting elements form hollow drums.  The material
    treated may be delivered to the interiors of such drums or may be delivered
    to the exterior of such drums, particles of the material small enough
    passing outwardly in the former case and inwardly in the latter case.


CLS 209/284
TXT Methods and means under subclass 233 for feeding or for discharging
    material to or from hollow drum sifters mounted with their axes horizontal
    or inclined.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    287     through 299, for rotating sifters of this type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 609+ for means that
    feed and discharge to or from a hulling zone.

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, subclasses 123+ for vine and seed
    strippers.


CLS 209/285
TXT Hollow cylinder or drum sifters under subclass 284 having means for
    delivering material to the outside of the drums or cylinders for the
    undersize particles to be passed inside the sifting walls and the oversize
    retained on the outside.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses 304+ for screen condensers
    for forming webs from fibers, and subclass 202 for cleaning by condensing.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 323+ for cylinder
    mold type paper making machines.


CLS 209/286
TXT Hollow cylindrical or drum sifters under subclass 285 having passages or
    inlets through their peripheral walls through which unsifted material is
    passed to the interiors of said sifters to be sifted within the drums, the
    undersize passing out of the drums through the sifting passages of the
    drums.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    407,    for frames to which sectional drum sifters are attached.


CLS 209/287
TXT Cylindrical or drum sifters under subclass 233 mounted with their axes in
    horizontal or inclined position and having both reciprocating and rotating
    motion.


CLS 209/288
TXT Cylindrical or drum sifters under subclass 233 mounted with their axes in
    horizontal or inclined position and having rotary motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 521 and 605+ for
    rotating perforated hulling surfaces.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 91+ for
    comminutors having a rotating comminuting surface having openings.

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, subclasses 59+ and 123+ for cylinder
    threshing machines and vine and vine and seed strippers.


CLS 209/289
TXT Sifting systems under subclass 288 having a plurality of horizontal or
    inclined axis rotating cylindrical or drum sifters.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes such systems as include pluralities of
    sifters of the type indicated which do not fall into the subclasses
    indented hereunder.


CLS 209/290
TXT Rotating cylindrical or drum sifters under subclass 289 mounted on
    horizontal or inclined axes which aline.


CLS 209/291
TXT Series of rotating cylindrical or drum sifters under subclass 290 on common
    horizontal or inclined axes the series being nested or mounted one within
    the other.


CLS 209/292
TXT Series of rotating cylindrical or drum sifters under subclass 289 having
    horizontal or inclined axes, the series being supported one above another.


CLS 209/293
TXT Rotating horizontal or inclined axes cylindrical or drum sifters under
    subclass 288 having means for agitating the material and which do not fall
    into the indented subclasses.


CLS 209/294
TXT Rotating cylindrical or drum sifters on horizontal or inclined axes under
    subclass 293 provided with means for lifting and dropping the material and
    means for deflecting the material along the sifter, generally during the
    drooping movement thereof.


CLS 209/295
TXT Rotating cylindrical or drum sifters on horizontal or inclined axes under
    subclass 293 provided with means for agitating the material by
    gaseous-fluid currents as the major agitating factor.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass will include cases where the sole agitating
    means may be the air-supplying means, but will also include cases which
    employ mechanical stirring or conveying means within the sifter, provided
    the air-supplying means is a major factor and not merely an incident to the
    use of such mechanical devices or a minor factor. In the latter case the
    classification is determined by the type of mechanical agitator.


CLS 209/296
TXT Rotating cylindrical or drum sifters under subclass 293 mounted on
    horizontal or inclined axes associated with rotating agitating means which
    do not fall into the indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 603+ and 608 for a
    moving perforated surface and a cylindrical or conical perforated enclosure
    that enclosed a rotating hulling element.


CLS 209/297
TXT Rotating cylindrical or drum sifters under subclass 296 mounted on
    horizontal or inclined axes and provided with agitating means attached to
    the walls of the sifter and moving therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    392+,   for structures in which the sifting passages of the sifters are
    formed.


CLS 209/298
TXT Rotating cylindrical or drum sifters under subclass 296 on horizontal or
    inclined axes associated with means for lifting and dropping the material
    while within the sifting drums.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    294,    for other drum or cylindrical sifter having a horizontal or
    inclined axis having means for lifting the material.

    392+,   for structures in which the sifting passages of the sifters are
    formed.


CLS 209/299
TXT Rotating cylindrical or drum sifters under subclass 288 having horizontal
    or inclined axes and associated with devices for lifting and dropping
    material within the sifter and means for beating the material so lifted and
    dropped.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 603+ and 608 for a
    moving perforated surface and a cylindrical or conical perforated enclosure
    that encloses a rotating hulling element.

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, subclasses 123+ for vine and seed
    strippers.


CLS 209/300
TXT Stationary cylindrical or drum sifters under subclass 233 having horizontal
    or inclined axes.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass will include sifters of the type indicated
    whether associated with agitators or not.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281+,   for stationary sifters having concave or convex material receiving
    surfaces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 605+ for a cylindrical
    or conical perforated enclosure for hulling grain.


CLS 209/301
TXT Cylindrical or drum sifters under subclass 233 having vertical axes and
    having means for both reciprocating and rotating them.


CLS 209/302
TXT Cylindrical or drum sifters under subclass 233 having vertical axes and
    having means for reciprocating them.


CLS 209/303
TXT Cylindrical or drum sifters under subclass 233 having vertical axes and
    adapted for or associated with means for rotating them.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 603+ for a moving
    perforated surface used in hulling grain.


CLS 209/304
TXT Rotating cylindrical or drum sifters under subclass 303 having vertical
    axes associated with means for agitating the material being sifted.


CLS 209/305
TXT Stationary cylindrical or drum sifters under subclass 233 on vertical axes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 605+ for a cylindrical
    or conical perforated enclosure for hulling grain.


CLS 209/306
TXT Stationary cylindrical or drum sifters under subclass 305 having vertical
    axes associated with means for agitating the material being sifted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    274,    for sifters having concave or convex material receiving surface.


CLS 209/307
TXT Rotating sifters under subclass 233 in the form of endless belts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    393+    and 401, for elongated sifter passages and for sifting elements in
    woven form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 616 for an endless-belt
    grain hulling surface.

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, subclasses 6-10 and 21 for corn
    shellers and straw carriers including endless belts.


CLS 209/308
TXT Sifters in the form of rotating endless belts under subclass 307 associated
    with means for agitating the material, which may be stirring means acting
    directly on the material or means acting indirectly on the material by
    agitating the belt.


CLS 209/309
TXT Flat horizontal or inclined sifters under subclass 233 having both a
    shaking and a rotating motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    274,    for sifters having a concave or convex material receiving surface.


CLS 209/310
TXT Sifters of a generally flat shape under subclass 233 having a shaking
    motion produced by distortion of the sifting element in which the sifting
    passages are formed.


CLS 209/311
TXT Pluralities of flat reciprocating sifters under subclass 233 associated
    otherwise than as defined in the subclasses indented hereunder.


CLS 209/312
TXT Series of flat reciprocating sifters under subclass 311 associated with
    means for pneumatically agitating the material being sifted, the sifters
    being associated otherwise than as defined in the subclasses indented
    hereunder.

    (1)     Note.  In devices entering this subclass the pneumatic agitating
    means must be an essential element of the combination or have some feature
    specially involving such agitating means.


CLS 209/313
TXT Flat reciprocating sifters under subclass 311 arranged end to end or side
    by side in substantially common planes or meeting at angles forming apices
    at the ends of the sifters.


CLS 209/314
TXT Flat reciprocating sifters under subclass 311 arranged end to end in
    stepped relation, material passing from one to another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151,    for fluid suspension type separators involving feeding the material
    over plane elements in stepped relation.

    265     and 266, for sifters having guides to position the particles
    relative to the sifting elements.


CLS 209/315
TXT Pluralities of flat reciprocating sifters under subclass 311 arranged one
    over another.


CLS 209/316
TXT Pluralities of flat reciprocating sifters under subclass 315 associated
    with intermediate conveying elements adapted to convey material generally
    from one sifter to some portion of a succeeding sifter, the material so
    conveyed usually being that which passes through or over the higher sifter.

    (1)     Note.  This and the two succeeding subclasses, while not limited
    thereto, will include the so-called winnowing machines commonly employed
    for sorting threshed grain and flour sifters having the special structures
    or special elements of structure defined.  Where the special feature or
    essential lies in the particular shake or means for producing the shake,
    the device is classified in one of the hereinafter listed subclasses taking
    devices having the shake specified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261+,   for other sifters with conveyors.


CLS 209/317
TXT Pluralities of flat reciprocating sifters under subclass 315 one above
    another associated with some special means for discharging material away
    from the sifters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255     and 257, for other sifters with discharge means of discharge
    conveyors.


CLS 209/318
TXT Pluralities of flat reciprocating sifters under subclass 315 arranged one
    above another associated with special structures or means for pneumatically
    agitating the material being sifted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26      through 29, for combinations of gaseous suspension and sifting
    means.

    276     and 280, for convex or concave sifters with agitating means.

    321,    for horizontal or inclined plane sifters with pneumatic agitator or
    conveyor.


CLS 209/319
TXT Pluralities of flat reciprocating sifters under subclass 315 arranged one
    above another having special structure or means for attaching or adjusting
    the sifting elements.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes only those devices which include the
    defined pluralities of sifters and have attaching or adjusting features for
    one or more of the sifters.  Devices for adjusting or attaching single
    sifters or sifters of other plural types are classified in subclass 404 or
    subclass 405 of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404     and 405, (see (1) Note).


CLS 209/320
TXT Flat reciprocating sifters under subclass 233 associated with means for
    agitating the material being sifted, other than the means for reciprocating
    the sifter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    392+,   for sifter structure, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, subclasses 87, 88 and 90 for straw
    carriers for grain separators having agitating means.


CLS 209/321
TXT Flat reciprocating sifters under subclass 320 associating with pneumatic
    agitating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26      through 29, for combinations of sifting with gaseous suspension
    type separations.

    318,    for plural superposed plane sifters with pneumatic agitating means.


CLS 209/322
TXT Flat reciprocating sifters under subclass 320 associated with reciprocating
    agitators.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277,    for concave or convex sifters with reciprocating agitators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, subclasses 87, 88 and 90 for straw
    carriers for grain separators having agitating means.


CLS 209/323
TXT Reciprocating agitators under subclass 322 associated with flat
    reciprocating sifters are not attached positively to the sifter, but are
    free to move relatively to the sifter element, generally by inertia impulse.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    379+,   for sifting passage clearers.


CLS 209/324
TXT Flat reciprocating sifters under subclass 320 associated with rotating
    agitators.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278,    for concave or convex sifters with rotating agitators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, subclasses 87, 88 and 90 for straw
    carriers for grain separators having agitating means.


CLS 209/325
TXT Flat reciprocating sifters under subclass 233 having movement both
    horizontally and vertically, which do not fall into the indented subclasses.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass will take devices in which horizontal movement
    in more than one direction, including orbital movement in horizontal planes
    associated with means giving a vertical component of motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, subclasses 88 and 90 for straw
    carriers for grain separators of the shaking table and walking rake types.


CLS 209/326
TXT Flat sifters under subclass 325 having circular or orbital motion in
    vertical planes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    366+,   for means for gyrating sifters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses, for the
    mechanical movement, per se.

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, subclasses 88 and 90 for straw
    carriers for grain separators of the shaking table and walking rake type.


CLS 209/327
TXT Flat sifters under subclass 325 having both horizontal and vertical
    movement, the horizontal movement being in a single side-to-side direction
    where there is no definite movement of material toward a discharge point,
    or, where there is such movement of material toward a discharge, across the
    line of movement.


CLS 209/328
TXT Flat sifters under subclass 327 having movement both horizontally and
    vertically, the horizontal movement being transverse to the sifter or the
    line of movement toward discharge of the material and in which one or both
    of the movements are impactive or bumping.


CLS 209/329
TXT Flat sifters under subclass 325 having both horizontal and vertical
    movement, the horizontal movement being in general line with the movement
    of the material toward discharge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, subclasses 88 and 90 for straw
    carriers for grain separators of the shaking table and walking rake type.


CLS 209/330
TXT Flat sifters under subclass 329 having both horizontal and vertical
    movement, the horizontal movement being in general line with the travel of
    the material toward discharge and one or both shakes being impactive or
    associated with bumping means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    393,    for elongated slot sifter elements.


CLS 209/331
TXT Flat sifters under subclass 233 having horizontal shake in a plurality of
    directions or both in general line with and across the direction of travel
    of the material toward discharge.


CLS 209/332
TXT Flat horizontal or inclined sifters under subclass 331 having orbital
    movement in substantially horizontal planes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    366,    for means for gyrating sifters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses, for the
    mechanical movement, per se.

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, subclass 24 for shaking table straw
    carriers for grain separators.


CLS 209/333
TXT Flat horizontal or inclined sifters under subclass 233 having a horizontal
    shake in one direction where there is no definite travel of material toward
    a discharge, or where there is such travel of the material, the shake is
    transverse to the direction of travel.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass will in general take devices which do not fall
    into the indented subclasses, usually those in which no specific type of
    sifter support is involved.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327,    for similar sifters having both horizontal and vertical shake.


CLS 209/334
TXT Flat horizontal or inclined sifters under subclass 333, the shake being
    produced by impact or having a bump or jar at some stage.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes generally such cases of the indicated
    nature as are not associated with any particular or specified mount of the
    sifter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    328,    for similar sifters having both horizontal and vertical shake.


CLS 209/335
TXT Flat horizontal or inclined sifters under subclass 333, the sifter being
    supported to swing on a vertical pivot or axis.


CLS 209/336
TXT Flat horizontal or inclined sifters under subclass 335, the sifter being
    supported to move on a vertical pivot or axis and the shake being produced
    by impact or having a jar or bump at some stage.


CLS 209/337
TXT Flat horizontal or inclined sifters under subclass 333, the sifters being
    supported to slide on supports.


CLS 209/338
TXT Flat horizontal or inclined sifters under subclass 337, the shake being
    produced by impact or being modified by a jar or bump at some stage.


CLS 209/339
TXT Flat horizontal or inclined sifters under subclass 333 supported for
    swinging movement, generally on hangers or standards, the movement being in
    one horizontal direction where there is no definite travel of material over
    the sifter to discharge, or, where there is such travel, in a horizontal
    direction transverse to the direction of travel.

    (1)     Note.  The slight incidental vertical component of motion due to
    support by standards or hangers is disregarded in connection with devices
    placed in this subclass; but where the hanger or standard construction is
    such that there is a marked and material vertical component of motion the
    device generally is classified in subclass 327.  Where there is both
    sliding support and swinging (hanger or standard) support, the device is
    placed according to the sliding support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327,    (see (1) Note)


CLS 209/340
TXT Flat horizontal or inclined sifters under subclass 339, the movement being
    produced by impact or being modified by a jar or bump at some stage.

    (1)     Note.  Where the vertical component of motion due ordinarily to the
    use of swinging standards or hangers is merely incidental, it is
    disregarded as a qualification; but where it is marked and material and
    there is an impact or jar the device is placed in subclass 328.  Where
    there is both sliding and swinging support, the shake is transverse, as
    defined above, and there is an impact or jar, the device is placed in
    subclass 338.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    328,    (see (1) Note).

    338,    (see (1) Note).


CLS 209/341
TXT Flat horizontal or inclined sifters under subclass 233 having a horizontal
    shake in the direction of travel of material over the sifters toward
    discharge.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes devices with the defined shake, with or
    without impact, where the type of support is not involved or is not
    material.


CLS 209/342
TXT Flat inclined or horizontal sifters under subclass 341 supported for
    sliding movement, where the movement is horizontal and in the general
    direction of travel of material over the sifters toward discharge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329,    for similar sifters having both a vertical and horizontal shake.


CLS 209/343
TXT Flat horizontal or inclined sifters under subclass 342 supported for
    sliding movement, the shake being horizontal in the general direction of
    movement of material over the sifters toward discharge and produced by
    impact or modified by a bump or jar at some stage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    330,    for similar sifters having both a vertical and horizontal shake.


CLS 209/344
TXT Flat horizontal or inclined sifters under subclass 341 supported, generally
    by hangers or standards, for a generally horizontal swinging shake in the
    direction of travel of the material over the sifters toward discharge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329,    for similar sifters having both a vertical and horizontal shake.


CLS 209/345
TXT Flat horizontal or inclined sifters under subclass 344 supported, generally
    by hangers or standards, for horizontal swinging shake in the direction of
    travel of the material over the sifters toward discharge, the shake being
    produced by impact or modified by a bump or jar at some stage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    330,    for similar sifters having both a vertical and horizontal shake.


CLS 209/346
TXT Flat inclined or horizontal sifters under subclass 233 having a vertical
    shake.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes such devices as do not come within the
    indented subclasses.


CLS 209/347
TXT Flat horizontal or inclined sifters under subclass 346 having a vertical
    shake produced by impact or modified at some stage by bumps or jars.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    382,    for knocking or hammering devices for clearing sifters.


CLS 209/348
TXT Flat horizontal or inclined sifters under subclass 346 having a vertical
    shake, the sifters moving on horizontal pivots or axes.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes devices moving on fixed pivots or axes
    or on curved rockers.


CLS 209/349
TXT Flat horizontal or inclined sifters under subclass 348 moving vertically on
    horizontal pivots or axes on rockers, the movement being modified by
    impact, jar, or bump at some stage.


CLS 209/350
TXT Flat horizontal or inclined sifters under subclass 233 having a rotating
    motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    279+,   for rotating sifters having concave or convex material receiving
    surfaces.


CLS 209/351
TXT Flat horizontal or inclined sifters under subclass 350 associated with
    means for agitating the material on the sifters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280,    for rotating sifters having concave or convex material receiving
    surfaces with agitators.


CLS 209/352
TXT Flat horizontal or inclined sifters under subclass 233 which have no
    movement, which do not fall within the indented subclasses.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass will include sifters associated with agitating
    means not defined by the indented titles--i.e., means that do not
    reciprocate or rotate--as well as sifters of the indicated type not
    associated with any agitating means.


CLS 209/353
TXT Pluralities of flat stationary horizontal or inclined sifters under
    subclass 352 which do not fall into the subclasses indented hereunder.


CLS 209/354
TXT Pluralities of flat stationary horizontal or inclined sifters under
    subclass 353 in stepped relation such that material has a drop in passing
    from one to another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151,    for fluid suspension separators with stepped plane type material
    feeders.


CLS 209/355
TXT Pluralities of flat stationary horizontal or inclined sifters under
    subclass 353 one over-laying the other.


CLS 209/356
TXT Pluralities of flat stationary horizontal or inclined sifters under
    subclass 355 one over-lying the other and each sifter reversed in
    inclination relatively to the adjacent sifter or sifters.


CLS 209/357
TXT Flat stationary horizontal or inclined sifters under subclass 233
    associated with agitators which reciprocate and operate upon the material
    being sifted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282,    for stationary concave or convex surface sifters with reciprocating
    agitators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, subclasses 87+ for overhung rake and
    walking rake type straw carriers for grain separators.


CLS 209/358
TXT Flat stationary horizontal or inclined sifters under subclass 233
    associated with rotating agitators which operate upon the material being
    sifted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    283,    for stationary concave or convex surface sifters with rotary
    agitators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, subclass 87 for overhung rake type
    straw carriers for grain separators.


CLS 209/359
TXT Flat vertical sifters under subclass 233.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes those flat vertical sifters which
    have no movement.


CLS 209/360
TXT Flat vertical sifters under subclass 359 having a shaking movement.


CLS 209/361
TXT Flat vertical sifters under subclass 359 rotating on horizontal axes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    672,    for rotating disc-type sizing separation of special items.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclasses 70, 97, 112, 115,
    and 132 for sifting wheel-type rotary separators which are disposed in a
    vertical plane and adapted to rotate about a horizontal axis.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 70+ for
    rotary drum comminutors having a screen as a partition therein or as an end
    wall.


CLS 209/362
TXT Sifters under subclass 233 of spiral of involute shape.

    (1)     Note.  The sifting surface itself has the form specified and may be
    plane, curved, or tubular in cross section, and may have movement or be
    stationary.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not include cylindrical or drum sifters
    which have spiral guide walls inside the same, which guide walls define
    spiral passages along the sifting surface; but it will include cylindrical
    sifting surfaces where the cylinders are bent or twisted into spirals.


CLS 209/363
TXT Elements or subcombinations of sifters or attachments under subclass 233
    for sifters which do not find place in the indented subclasses.


CLS 209/364
TXT Actuating means under subclass 363 adapted for the operation of sifters
    which are not classifiable in the indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses, for the
    machine element and mechanical movement, per se.


CLS 209/365.1
TXT Reciprocating:

    Means under subclass 364 for effecting back and forth movement of the
    sifting apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  The motion of the sifting element maybe described as
    vibrating or oscillating.

    (2)     Note.  The device must be especially adapted for the operation of a
    sifter or the sifter must be included as an element of the device to be
    classified herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism and 366, Agitating, appropriate
    subclasses, for similar apparatus not especially adapted for operation of a
    sifter or not including a sifter as an element thereof.


CLS 209/365.2
TXT Cam and linkage:

    Subject matter under subclass 365.1 including a cam and linkage to the
    sifting elements.


CLS 209/365.3
TXT With cushioning:

    Subject matter under subclass 365.1 including means to cushion or limit the
    reciprocating motion.

    (1)     Note.  The cushioning means may be described as, e.g., dampening or
    motion buffering means or as a shock absorber.


CLS 209/365.4
TXT Differential motion:

    Subject matter under subclass 365.1 wherein the recipricatory motion of the
    sifting element is not uniform in all areas or during all time periods.

    (1)     Note.  The nonuniformity may be effected by, e.g., causing
    different areas of a screen to vibrate at different frequencies, or causing
    different velocities of movement in the backward and the forward movements
    of the reciprocating screen.


CLS 209/366
TXT Means under subclasses 365.1+ for gyrating sifters.

    (1)     Note.  Ordinarily the sifter must be included as an element of the
    combination to locate a device in this subclass.  Otherwise the device is
    classifiable in Class 74, Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate
    mechanical movement subclasses, when the novelty lies in the actuating
    means, per se, while if it involves the combination of the actuating means
    broadly with a receptacle without limitation to a sifter it may go to
    appropriate subclasses of Class 366, Agitating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    326     and 332, for plane sifters having gyratory movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses.  (see (1)
    Note).


CLS 209/366.5
TXT Devices under subclass 366, in which gyration is caused or aided by an
    unbalanced weight.


CLS 209/367
TXT Devices under subclasses 365.1+ wherein unbalanced weights operate sifters
    otherwise than as gyrators.

    (1)     Note.  As with gyrators, the sifter ordinarily must be an element
    of the combination to place a device in this subclass or there must be some
    adaptation that limits it to the sifting art.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    326,    332 and 366.5, for plane sifters having gyratory motion and
    unbalanced weight type sifter gyrators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses, for the
    machine elements and mechanical movement, per se.


CLS 209/368
TXT Magnetic devices under subclasses 365.1+ for reciprocating sifters.

    (1)     Note.  Ordinarily the magnetic actuators must be limited to the
    sifting art by inclusion of the sifter as an element or by some special
    adaptation to the art to find a place in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 15+ for
    reciprocating electric motor structure.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 119+ for
    reciprocating electric motor systems.


CLS 209/369
TXT Means under subclass 364 for rotating sifters limited to the sifting art by
    inclusion of the sifter in the combination or by some special adaptation
    that limits it to said art.

    (1)     Note.  The appropriate subclasses which include rotating sifters
    should be searched.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses, for the
    machine element or mechanical movement, per se.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 219+ for agitating devices including a
    rotatable mixing chamber.


CLS 209/370
TXT Structures under subclass 363 inclosing sifting devices in whole or in part
    which are not classifiable in the indented subclasses.


CLS 209/371
TXT Devices under subclass 370 associated with sifters and adapting them for
    connection, either loose or positive, with receivers, other than bag
    holders.

    (1)     Note.  Generally the device adapts the sifter for connection to
    receivers of different sizes or types.


CLS 209/372
TXT Closures under subclass 370 other than feed or discharge controlling valves
    associated with the casings which inclose sifters in part or in whole.

    (1)     Note.  These closures ordinarily open or close portions of the
    casing to give access to the interior for the insertion or removal of
    material or the sifting device or parts thereof.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not include receptacle covers, per se,
    but may include covers of receptacles when a sifter is included in the
    combination or there is some special structure adapting for use with
    sifters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    419,    for sifters associated with shovels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, appropriate subclasses, for closures
    of the type provided for and see the search notes thereto in section IV for
    the loci of closures in other classes.


CLS 209/373
TXT Sifter-casing structures under subclass 370 subdivided into compartments
    for reception of products of sifting either direct or by delivery into
    receptacles retained within the compartments or associated with casings
    subdivided into a plurality of compartments.

    (1)     Note.  The distinction of this subclass over subclass 259 is that
    the receptacles of this subclass must be associated with or within
    compartments of casings, while subclass 259 is broader and includes
    receptacles not associated with casing compartments, although it may
    include cases of a plurality of different receiving elements one of which
    may be a receiver within a casing compartment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259,    (see (1) Note).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 210.5 for cabinet structures
    having compartments and including a sifter.


CLS 209/374
TXT Sifters under subclass 370 having casings inclosing part or all of the
    sifters and specially adapted for household use.

    (1)     Note.  The casing itself may be adapted for household utility
    related to the sifting of flour, ashes, etc., or may be associated with
    some utility not related to the sifting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 210.5 for cabinet structures
    having compartments and including a sifter.


CLS 209/375
TXT Sifters under subclass 374 associated with chutes attached to or forming
    parts of buildings, ordinarily dwellings, for conveying refuse, including
    ashes, to places of deposit or receptacles for such refuse.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, for chutes, etc., per
    se.

    232,    Deposit and Collection Receptacles, for deposit and collection
    receptacles, per se.


CLS 209/376
TXT Sifters under subclass 374 associated with or forming part of the structure
    of manually-portable coal hods or ash pans.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 500+ for compartmented receptacles.


CLS 209/377
TXT Sifting devices under subclass 374 adapted for operation in connection with
    or within stoves or furnaces, but not ordinarily limited to such by
    inclusion of the stove or furnace as an essential element, in such relation
    that the sifter structure may not have utility in other relations.

    (1)     Note.  Merely incidental inclusion of stoves or furnaces will not
    exclude the device from this subclass; but where there is some essential
    relation of structure between the stove or furnace precluding possible
    other utility for the sifter the device is classifiable in class 126,
    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 244.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 244 (see (1) Note).


CLS 209/378
TXT Casings for sifters under subclass 370 having exits or vents for the air
    within the casings, other than passages or conduits for air currents
    propelled or sucked out by fans or equivalent forcing means.


CLS 209/379
TXT Means or devices under subclass 363 for clearing or keeping open the
    sifting passages of sifters which are not classifiable in the subclasses
    indented hereunder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323,    for plane sifters with unattached reciprocating agitators.


CLS 209/380
TXT Means under subclass 379 for projecting fluid jets or streams against the
    sifting elements for the purpose of clearing or keeping open the sifting
    passages.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass dose not ordinarily include devices in which
    the fluid current or jet has an agitating function in the sifting operation
    with or without incidental clearing of the sifting passages.

    (2)     Note.  The appropriate preceding subclasses involving sifting with
    liquid treatment and those involving fluid or pneumatic agitation of the
    material being sifted should be searched.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 294 and 302+ for gas separators combined
    with pneumatic clearers.


CLS 209/381
TXT Devices under subclass 379 for jarring sifting elements to keep the sifting
    passages open, which are not classifiable in the subclasses indented
    hereunder.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not receive structures in which the
    sifting elements are jarred for promotion of the sifting function and
    clearing of the sifting passages is merely incidental.

    (2)     Note.  The appropriate subclasses of reciprocating sifters
    involving impact should be searched.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 293 and 300 for vibrating, shaking or
    jarring means for clearing gas separators.


CLS 209/382
TXT Devices under subclass 381 wherein knocking or hammering devices are
    employed to clear or keep open the sifting passages of sifters.

    (1)     Note.  Devices for knocking sifting elements to promote sifting
    otherwise than by merely keeping open the sifting passages are not placed
    in this subclass, but are placed in preceding subclasses of reciprocating
    sifters which involve impact.

    (2)     Note.  The preceding subclasses of reciprocating sifters should be
    searched.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 293 and 300 for vibrating, shaking or
    jarring means for clearing gas separators.


CLS 209/383
TXT Devices under subclass 381 wherein flexible strips beat the sifting
    elements to keep the sifting passages clear or open.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 293 and 300 for vibrating, shaking or
    jarring means for clearing gas separators.


CLS 209/384
TXT Devices under subclass 379 operating in contact with or in proximity to
    sifting elements which press out pieces of material that catch or wedge in
    the sifting passages.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83      through 87, which include sifters and agitator movable relatively
    to the sifting elements.


CLS 209/385
TXT Devices under subclass 379 movable in contact with sifting elements to wipe
    the surfaces thereof to remove material that clogs the sifting passages,
    which are not classifiable in subclasses indented hereunder.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include devices whose function is to
    agitate the material as a whole on the sifting element with merely
    incidental clearing of the sifting passages.

    (2)     Note.  The preceding subclasses which include sifters and agitators
    should be searched.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 296+ for devices such as wipers or
    brushes having relative traversing motion with respect to the separator to
    clear it of residue and see other related subjects in subclasses 282+.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclasses 12, 13, 25, 43, 87,
    89, and 114 for cleaners which movable cooperate with a reticulated
    separating surface to clear such surface or recovered objects thereon of
    undesired adhering dirt, vegetation or like material.


CLS 209/386
TXT Brushes under subclass 385 which do not reciprocate or rotate are employed
    to wipe the sifting element and keep the sifting passages clear.

    (1)     Note.  The preceding subclasses which include sifters and agitators
    should be searched.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 296+ for devices such as wipers or
    brushes having relative traversing motion with respect to the separator to
    clear it of residue and see other related subjects in subclasses 282+.


CLS 209/387
TXT Devices under subclass 385 wherein reciprocating wipers operate in contact
    with sifting elements to keep the sifting passages clear.

    (1)     Note.  The preceding sifter with reciprocating agitator subclasses
    should be searched.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 296+ for devices such as wipers or
    brushes having relative traversing motion with respect to the separator to
    clear it of residue and see other related subjects in subclasses 282+.


CLS 209/388
TXT Devices under subclass 387 wherein reciprocating brushes wipe the surfaces
    of sifters to keep the sifting passages open.

    (1)     Note.  The preceding sifter with reciprocating agitator subclasses
    should be searched.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 296+ for devices such as wipers or
    brushes having relative traversing motion with respect to the separator to
    clear it of residue and see other related subjects in subclasses 282+.


CLS 209/389
TXT Devices under subclass 385 wherein rotating devices wipe the surfaces of
    sifters to keep the sifting passages open or clear.

    (1)     Note.  The preceding sifter with rotating agitator subclasses
    should be searched.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 296+ for devices such as wipers or
    brushes having relative traversing motion with respect to the separator to
    clear it of residue and see other related subjects in subclasses 282+.


CLS 209/390
TXT Devices under subclass 389 wherein rotating brushes wipe the surfaces of
    sifting elements to keep the sifting passages open or clear.

    (1)     Note.  The preceding sifter with rotating agitator subclasses
    should be searched.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 296+ for devices such as wipers or
    brushes having relative traversing motion with respect to the separator to
    clear it of residue and see other related subjects in subclasses 282+.


CLS 209/391
TXT Devices under subclass 363 for closing and opening the sifting passages of
    sifters to render the sifters inoperative as such or bring them into
    operation.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include means intended primarily to
    adjust or vary the size of sifting passages.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    376,    for sifters associated with coal hods or ash pans.

    394,    398 and 402, for sifter passage structure which has adjustable
    openings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration subclass 89 for
    comminutors combined with adjustable screens.


CLS 209/392
TXT Structures under subclass 363 not classifiable in the indented subclasses
    by or in which the sifting passages of sifters are formed, and special
    combinations or successions of particular types or sizes of passages.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233+,   for sifter structure combined with other attributes of a sifting
    operation.

    659+,   for size separation of special items.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 237 for
    reticulated floors for distributing a drying medium.


CLS 209/393
TXT Sifting passages, under subclass 392, generally of elongated-slot form,
    which are formed by bars or rods which do not intermesh.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    307+,   for endless belt-type sifters.

    675+,   for stationary, elongated gauging passages for separating special
    items by size.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses 61, 62, 89, and 95 for
    cotton gins and fiber picking apparatus employing slots, bars or rods.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 174-180 for grates formed from bars
    or rods.

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, subclasses 59+ and 79+ for straw
    carriers for grain separators and cylinder threshing machines.


CLS 209/394
TXT Sifting passages under subclass 393 which reformed by nonintermeshing bars
    having means for their relative adjustment to vary the size of the passages.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    676,    for adjustable, stationary, elongated gauging passages for
    separating special items by size.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclass 85 and subclasses 90-95 for
    fiber picking apparatus utilizing beaters and elongated slots.


CLS 209/395
TXT Sifting devices under subclass 393 in which sifting passages are formed by
    nonintermeshing bars or rods, and means for attaching the rods or bars are
    included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    675+,   for stationary, elongated gauging passages for separating special
    items by size.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclass 85 and subclasses 90-95 for
    fiber picking apparatus utilizing beaters and having elongated passages.


CLS 209/396
TXT Sifting passages generally of elongated - slot form under subclass 393 are
    formed by bars or rods which have relative movement during the sifting
    operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    667+,   for an elongated, gauging slot formed between rotatable elements;
    particularly subclass 673 wherein the rotatable elements are cylindrical
    rollers.

    674,    for an elongated gauging passage formed between moving elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, subclass 87 for walking rake type
    straw carriers for grain separators.


CLS 209/397
TXT Sifting passages under subclass 392 which are formed through integral
    sheets of material.

    (1)     Note.  Sheets of woven fabric may be included provided the passages
    are formed by perforation of the fabric and not by spacing of the
    intermeshing threads, wires, or bars.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 131+ for a
    stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or sheet
    embodying a component which is apertured, and is not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 209/398
TXT Devices under subclass 397 including means whereby the size of passages
    formed through sheets of material as defined in connection with the
    preceding subclass may be varied or adjusted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    680+,   for sorting special items by size employing gauging apertures.


CLS 209/399
TXT Devices under subclass 397 including integral sheets of material perforated
    with sifting passages and means for attaching said sheets to their supports.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    319     and 405, for sifters or frames including attaching means.


CLS 209/400
TXT Sifting devices under subclass 392 in which the sifting passages are formed
    by nonintermeshing cords, wires, or other flexible strands.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass will include inter alia devices in which
    spaced chains form the sifting passages.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 105+ for a
    stock material product in the form of a composite web or sheet in which
    strands, fibers or filaments in respective layers or components are
    angularly arranged, and subclass 114 for a similar composite product in
    which the strands, fibers or filaments in respective layers or components
    are in parallel relation.


CLS 209/401
TXT Sifting devices under subclass 392 in which the sifting passages are formed
    by spaced intermeshing or crossing connected threads, wires, or bars.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    307+,   for endless belt sifters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 383+ for an uncoated woven fabric of
    general utility.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 175+, 190,
    193, and 196+ for a stock material product in the form of a single or
    plural layer web or sheet embodying mechanically interengaged strands or
    stand portions (e.g., weave, or knit).

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 1+ for an open mesh fabric.


CLS 209/402
TXT Sifting devices under subclass 401 including spaced intermeshing or
    crossing interconnected threads, wires, or rods forming sifting passages
    and means for varying or adjusting the size of the passages.


CLS 209/403
TXT Devices under subclass 401 for attaching woven sifting fabric to supporting
    elements or frames.


CLS 209/404
TXT Devices under subclass 363 wherein frames to which sifting elements are
    attached associated with means for adjusting said frames.

    (1)     Note.  The frames of this subclass and the four following
    subclasses are not the general supporting frameworks of sifting devices,
    but those frames to which sifting elements, such as sifting fabric, sheets,
    or bars, are attached and one or more of these frames may constitute the
    sifter proper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    319,    which includes adjusting means for one or more of a series of flat
    reciprocating sifters.

    347,    and other appropriate sifter subclasses, according to the type of
    adjustment.


CLS 209/405
TXT Devices under subclass 363 including attaching means or structure by which
    frames which carry the sifting elements are attached to supports or
    frameworks.

    (1)     Note.  See note (1) to subclass 404 of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286,    347 and 407, for other frame attaching means.

    319,    for adjusting means for one or more of a series of flat
    reciprocating sifters, and also other appropriate subclasses of sifters,
    according to the type of adjustment.


CLS 209/406
TXT Frames under subclass 363 to which the sifting elements of drum or
    cylindrical sifters are attached.


CLS 209/407
TXT Frames under subclass 406 to which the sifting elements of sectional drum
    or cylindrical sifters are attached.

    (1)     Note.  The sifter may be made up of a plurality of frames carrying
    sifting elements or may be a frame adapted for the reception or attachment
    of a plurality of sections of sifting elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286,    for drum, or hollow cylinder sifter having material inlets in the
    peripheral walls.


CLS 209/408
TXT Frames under subclass 363 to which the sifting elements of flat sifters are
    attached.

    (1)     Note.  See note (1) to this class, subclass 404.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    309     through 361, for plane sifters.


CLS 209/409
TXT Structures and devices under subclass 363 for the support of sifters or of
    frames carrying sifting elements which are not classifiable in the
    subclasses indented hereunder.


CLS 209/410
TXT Structures or devices under subclass 409 for the axial support of drum
    sifters.

    (1)     Note.  The appropriate sifting subclasses which include rotating
    sifters should be searched.


CLS 209/411
TXT Devices or means under subclass 409 which are applied to or bearing on the
    rims or peripheries of drum sifters to support the same.

    (1)     Note.  The appropriate sifting subclasses which include rotating
    sifters should be searched.


CLS 209/412
TXT Frameworks or structures under subclass 409 relating to the general support
    of sifters or frames carrying sifting elements.


CLS 209/413
TXT Frameworks or structures under subclass 412 for the support of sifters or
    frames carrying sifter elements and which have means whereby said
    frameworks or structures may be adjusted to alter the position of the
    sifting elements or frames carrying such or adapt the supporting framework
    or devices to particular locations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    319,    for adjustable plural superposed plane, horizontal or inclined
    sifters.

    421,    for sifters adapted to be mounted on a vehicle.


CLS 209/414
TXT Frameworks or structures under subclass 412 for supporting sifters or
    frames carrying sifting elements which are adapted to be taken apart and
    reassembled at will.


CLS 209/415
TXT Hangers and standards under subclass 409 specially adapted for the support
    of sifting devices, generally reciprocating sifters or which constitute
    essential elements of sifting devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191     through 207, for amalgamators involving the use of reciprocating or
    moving members.


CLS 209/416
TXT Devices or structures under subclass 409 whereby positions of sifters are
    automatically maintained constant relatively to a horizontal plane when the
    supports change positions relatively to the horizontal plane.


CLS 209/417
TXT Sifters under subclass 409 having structure or means specially adapting
    them for manual support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236,    for sifting devices adapted for distribution or spreading material.


CLS 209/418
TXT Special constructions of manually supported and operated sifters under
    subclass 417 adapted to scoop up the material to be sifted by insertion of
    the sifter or a portion thereof into a mass of the material and lifting the
    sifter away with a portion of the material thereon.

    (1)     Note.  Where the devices of this subclass are provided with
    handles, they are of such limited dimension as not properly to be shovel
    handles. Devices having extended handles are ordinarily classified in
    subclass 419.  Scoops, the scooping element of which is the conventional
    type without some special modification, are ordinarily classified according
    to the structure of the sifting element, and in such cases search should be
    made in the appropriate Sifter subclasses according to the structure of the
    sifting element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282     and 283, for concave or convex sifters having reciprocating or
    rotating agitators.

    357     and 358, for horizontal or inclined plane sifters with
    reciprocating or rotating agitators.

    419,    (see (1) Note).


CLS 209/419
TXT Sifters under subclass 417 associated with shovels or having the general
    structure of shovels and adapted to sift the material taken up, and
    generally characterized by a shovel edge adjacent the sifting element and
    an extended handle or other means by which the device may be supported and
    operated.

    (1)     Note.  The device may be adapted for scooping and sifting only or
    may have structure adapting to be converted at will into a shovel only or
    into a shovel sifter.  This subclass may also receive some sifting shovel
    cases where the sifting shovel may be part of an excavating machine, but is
    not limited thereto.


CLS 209/420
TXT Sifters under subclass 409 so mounted or supported as to be movable from
    place to place other than by manual support.

    (1)     Note.  Devices of this subclass are generally mounted on frames
    provided with wheels, skids, or equivalent devices or on scows or wheeled
    vehicles.


CLS 209/421
TXT Sifters under subclass 420 especially constructed or adapted to be mounted,
    generally detachable, upon particular vehicles which have some function
    independent of the sifting.


CLS 209/422
TXT Methods and apparatus under the class definition by which mixtures of
    materials having components of different mass, due to differences in size,
    specific gravity, or both, are assorted by being caused to stratify and at
    least one stratum collected separately from the rest of the material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes such methods and apparatus as are not
    definitely classifiable in the subclasses indented hereunder.

    (2)     Note.  The distinction between the subclasses indented hereunder
    which involve fluid treatment and those preceding involving fluid
    suspension is that in the former the material is not all subjected to free
    suspension by the fluid in such wise as to be all transported substantial
    distances and separated by settling out from the fluid suspension at
    varying distances from the points of initial application of the fluid or
    all subjected to free suspension and the heavier permitted to drop out of
    the suspension in such wise as not to form a stratum.  Where the heaviest
    components form a stratum and the others form one or more strata or are
    carried off by the fluid, the device is classified as a stratifier, while
    where there is no definite stratum of heaviest components it is classified
    as a fluid suspension device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 15+ and
    38+ for comminutors combined with stratifiers.


CLS 209/423
TXT Devices and methods under subclass 422 involving the use of a constant flow
    of liquid through a mass of material containing constituents of different
    mass supported on a perforated or permeable bed or table, through which
    perforations the liquid flows toward the material supported thereon, the
    material's heaviest constituents forming a stratum on the support and the
    lighter constituents either forming one or more strata above the other or
    being carried away by the liquid.


CLS 209/424
TXT Devices and methods under subclass 423 in which the different strata or the
    stratum of the heaviest constituents and the material carried away by the
    liquid move away from each other in diverging or opposite directions.


CLS 209/425
TXT Devices and methods under subclass 422 in which a pulsating or interrupted
    flow of liquid is sent through a permeable or perforated support and
    through material thereon to agitate the material in such manner that the
    constituents are arranged in strata with the heaviest in the lowest
    stratum, or the heaviest is formed into a stratum and the lightest carried
    away by the liquid.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes such processes and apparatus as are not
    classifiable in the indented subclasses, generally cases in which there is
    no definite horizontal movement of the heaviest material.


CLS 209/426
TXT Devices and methods under subclass 425 in which a pulsating or interrupted
    flow of liquid through a permeable or perforated support and mixed material
    thereon to form strata and the upper and lower strata are separated by
    flowing in divergent or opposite directions.


CLS 209/427
TXT Devices and methods under subclass 425 in which a pulsating or interrupted
    flow of liquid through a permeable or perforated support and material
    thereon to cause the components of the material to form overlying strata,
    and these strata as formed are caused to travel together to a place of
    position where they are separately discharged.


CLS 209/428
TXT Devices and methods under subclass 422 wherein material having constituents
    of different masses is delivered with liquid accompanying said material or
    added thereto on the belt to a rotating endless belt on which the heaviest
    constituents settle as a stratum and the lighter either settle as a stratum
    or are carried away by the liquid.

    (1)     Note.  The subclass receives such processes and apparatus as are
    not classifiable in the indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet which is not specifically provided for in any other class.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 202+ for a positive drive belt; and subclasses 237+ for a
    friction drive belt.


CLS 209/429
TXT Belts under subclass 428 on which the heaviest and the lighter material
    move in divergent directions to points of discharge.


CLS 209/430
TXT Belts under subclass 428 on which the lighter and the heavier material move
    in opposite directions to points of discharge.


CLS 209/431
TXT Endless rotating belts under subclass 428 on which material is treated with
    accompanying or added liquid, so that the heaviest constituents may settle
    as a stratum on the belts and the lighter either form an overlying stratum
    or are carried away by the liquid, are mounted on the support so that they
    may be given a reciprocating movement in addition to their rotating
    movement.


CLS 209/432
TXT Endless rotating belts under subclass 331 on which the heaviest and the
    lighter materials move in divergent directions, so that they may be
    separately discharged.


CLS 209/433
TXT Endless rotating belts under subclass 331 on which the lightest and the
    heaviest constituents move in opposite directions to discharge.


CLS 209/434
TXT Devices and methods under subclass 422 wherein material having constituents
    of different mass is treated with accompanying or added liquid on moving
    chutes or tables of spiral form, on which the heaviest constituents settle
    as a stratum and the lighter either form overlying strata or are carried
    away by the liquid.

    (1)     Note.  The motion of the chutes or tables may be either
    reciprocatory or rotary.


CLS 209/435
TXT Chutes or tables under subclass 422 having both reciprocating and rotating
    motion on which material having constituents differing in mass is treated
    with accompanying or added liquid, the heaviest constituents settling as a
    stratum and the lighter either forming an overlying stratum or being
    carried away by the liquid.


CLS 209/436
TXT Chutes or tables under subclass 435 on which the heavier and the lighter
    materials move in diverging or opposing directions to discharge.


CLS 209/437
TXT Tables or chutes under subclass 422 having reciprocating motion on which
    material having constituents differing in mass is treated with accompanying
    or added liquid, the heaviest constituents settling as a stratum and the
    lighter either forming an overlying stratum or being carried away by the
    liquid.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass receives such structures as are not
    classifiable in the indented subclasses, generally devices of the kind
    defined in which there is no definite travel of both the heaviest and the
    lighter along the chute or table surface, the heavier being generally
    retained or discharged through the bottom in proximity to the region of
    settlement.


CLS 209/438
TXT Chutes or tables under subclass 437 of annular or circular form having
    reciprocating motion on which material having constituents differing in
    mass is treated with accompanying or added liquid, so that the heaviest
    constituents settle as a stratum while the lighter form an overlying
    stratum or are carried away by the liquid.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes devices in which there is no definite
    travel of both the heaviest and the lighter along the surface of the chutes
    or tables or in which there is travel of both such heaviest and lighter
    constituents in the same direction.  This subclass will also take devices
    in which the heaviest and the lighter settle as strata in successive zones
    in the direction of flow of liquid along the surfaces.


CLS 209/439
TXT Chutes or tables under subclass 438 on which the heaviest and the lighter
    constituents move in divergent or opposite directions to discharge.


CLS 209/440
TXT Chutes or tables under subclass 437 having associated therewith means or
    devices for agitating the material thereon.


CLS 209/441
TXT Reciprocating noncircular chutes or tables under subclass 437, on which the
    heaviest and the lighter constituents move in diverging direction to
    discharge.


CLS 209/442
TXT Reciprocating noncircular chutes or tables under subclass 437, on which the
    lighter and the heaviest constituents move in opposite directions along the
    chutes or tables to discharge.


CLS 209/443
TXT Reciprocating noncircular chutes or tables under subclass 437, on which the
    heaviest and lighter constituents move in the same direction toward
    discharge.


CLS 209/444
TXT Rotating chutes or tables under subclass 422 on which material having
    constituents of differing mass is treated with accompanying or added
    liquid, so that the heaviest constituents may settle as a stratum, while
    the lighter either form overlying strata or may be carried away by the
    liquid.

    (1)     Note.  Cases in which the lighter constituents form strata
    succeeding the stratum of heaviest in the direction of liquid flow may be
    included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    435,    for chutes and tables which both reciprocate and rotate.

    Stratifiers,    With liquid treatment, Receptacles. The receptacles of the
    hereinunder indented subclasses are distinguished from the tables or chutes
    of the immediately preceding subclasses mainly in that they have
    substantial depth and are adapted to retain liquid and mixed material in
    substantial depth without the same degree of freedom for gravital flow as
    is usual with tables or chutes.


CLS 209/445
TXT Receptacles under subclass 422 having both reciprocating and rotating
    motion in which material having constituents differing in mass is treated
    mingled with liquid, which may   accompany or be added to the material, so
    that the heaviest constituents may settle as a stratum, while the lighter
    either form overlying strata or may be carried away by the liquid.


CLS 209/446
TXT Reciprocating receptacles of substantial depth under subclass 422 in which
    material mingled with liquid, accompanying the material or added, may be
    treated so that the heavier constituents of the material may settle as a
    stratum, while the lighter either form overlying strata or may be carried
    away by the liquid.


CLS 209/447
TXT Receptacles under subclass 446 adapted to be supported and reciprocated
    manually.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass the so-called "miners' pans" and "bateas"
    which are supported and operated by hand.


CLS 209/448
TXT Receptacles under subclass 446 associated with agitators for the material
    other than such as are classifiable in the hereinunder-indented subclasses.


CLS 209/449
TXT Receptacles under subclass 448 wherein the agitators are reciprocating.


CLS 209/450
TXT Receptacles under subclass 448 associated with rotating agitators for the
    material.


CLS 209/451
TXT Receptacles of nontabular form under subclass 422 rotating on horizontal or
    inclined axes in which material mingled with liquid, either added or
    accompanying, is so treated that the heaviest constituents settle out as a
    stratum, while the lighter either form overlying strata or are carried away
    by the liquid.


CLS 209/452
TXT Receptacles under subclass 451 are associated with agitating means for the
    material, which agitating means may be conveyors for one or more strata.


CLS 209/453
TXT Receptacles of nontubular form under subclass 422 (having substantial
    depth) rotating on vertical axes in which material is treated with mingled
    liquid, either accompanying or added, so that the heaviest constituents may
    settle as a stratum, while the lighter either form overlying strata or are
    carried off by the liquid.

    (1)     Note.  Agitators for the material may be present on or absent.


CLS 209/454
TXT Apparatus including stationary perforated or permeable supports under
    subclass 422 to which material is delivered and through which constant
    currents of liquid are sent so that the heaviest constituents of the
    material may settle as a stratum while the lighter either form overlying
    strata or are carried away by the liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclass 162 for fixed strainers in a flume stream, and
    subclasses 409+ for fluid cleaning of fixed strainers.


CLS 209/455
TXT Apparatus including stationary perforated or permeable supports under
    subclass 422 to which material is delivered and having means whereby liquid
    is sent in pulsating or interrupted currents through the support and
    material thereon, so that the heaviest constituents of the material may
    settle as a stratum, while the lighter may either form overlying strata or
    be carried away by the liquid.


CLS 209/456
TXT Apparatus under subclass 455 and having means whereby the lighter and the
    heaviest constituents are caused to move in divergent or opposite
    directions to discharge.


CLS 209/457
TXT Apparatus under subclass 455 in which the heaviest and lighter constituents
    are moved in the same direction to discharge.


CLS 209/458
TXT Stationary chutes or tables under subclass 422 on which material with
    mingled liquid, accompanying or added, is so treated that the heaviest
    constituents of the material may settle as a stratum, while the lighter may
    form overlying strata or be carried off by the liquid.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes noncircular chutes or tables on which
    there is no substantial travel of the heaviest constituents along the
    surface of the chutes or tables.


CLS 209/459
TXT Stationary circular, annular, or spiral tables or chutes under subclass 458
    on which material with mingled, accompanying or added, liquid is treated,
    so that the heaviest constituents may settle as a stratum, while the
    lighter form relatively displaced strata or are carried away by the liquid.


CLS 209/460
TXT Stationary noncircular tables or chutes under subclass 458 on which
    material with mingled liquid, accompanying or added, is treated, so that
    the heaviest constituents may settle as a stratum, while the lighter may
    form relatively displaced strata or be carried away by liquid, and the
    heaviest and lighter constituents are moved in diverging or opposite
    directions to discharge.


CLS 209/461
TXT Stationary receptacles under subclass 422 having substantial depth in which
    material mingled with liquid, either accompanying or added, is treated, so
    that the heaviest constituents of the material may settle as a stratum,
    while the lighter constituents may either form relatively displaced strata
    or be moved away by the liquid, said receptacles being associated with
    agitators of types not classifiable under the hereinunder-indented
    subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 413+ for fixed filter
    mediums and a movable stirrer or cleaner.


CLS 209/462
TXT Receptacles under subclass 461 wherein the agitators are reciprocating.


CLS 209/463
TXT Stationary receptacles under subclass 461 associated with rotating
    agitators of a type not classifiable in the hereinunder-indented subclasses.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes, in general, those devices of the type
    indicated which include agitators or the rotary endless-belt species or
    devices including combinations of different species of rotary agitators
    which are not all included in one of the indented subclasses.


CLS 209/464
TXT Receptacles under subclass 463 wherein the rotating agitators have
    horizontal or inclined axes.


CLS 209/465
TXT Stationary receptacles under subclass 463, said receptacles being
    associated with rotating agitators having vertical axes.


CLS 209/466
TXT Apparatus under subclass 422 including movable perforated or permeable
    supports for material, other than rotating endless belts, and means for
    sending constant gaseous currents through the supports and the material, so
    that the heaviest constituents of the material may settle as a stratum
    while the lighter may either form relatively displaced strata or be removed
    by the gaseous currents, there being either no substantial movement of the
    heaviest constituents along the support or both the heaviest and the
    lighter moving in the same direction toward discharge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    470,    for endless belt type of pneumatic stratifier.


CLS 209/467
TXT Apparatus under subclass 466, the structure being so adapted that the
    heaviest and the lighter constituents may move in diverging or opposite
    directions toward discharge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    470,    for endless belt type of pneumatic stratifier.


CLS 209/468
TXT Apparatus under subclass 422 including movable permeable or perforated
    supports for material, other than rotating endless belts, and means for
    sending pulsating or interrupted gaseous currents through the support and
    the material, so that the heaviest constituents of the material may settle
    as a stratum, while the lighter constituents may either form relatively
    displaced strata or be removed by the gaseous currents, there being no
    substantial movement of the heaviest constituents along the support or the
    heaviest and the lighter constituents both moving in the same direction
    toward discharge.


CLS 209/469
TXT Apparatus under subclass 468 so arranged that both the heaviest and the
    lighter constituents move in diverging or opposite directions toward
    discharge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    470.


CLS 209/470
TXT Apparatus under subclass 422 including endless rotating belts, either
    permeable, or impermeable which support material and means for so treating
    the material by gaseous current that the heaviest constituents settle as a
    stratum on the support, while the lighter constituents either form
    relatively displaced strata or are carried away by the gaseous currents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet which is not specifically provided for in any other class.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 202+ for a positive drive belt; and subclasses 237+ for a
    friction drive belt.


CLS 209/471
TXT Apparatus under subclass 422 including impermeable movable receptacles,
    chutes, or tables not of endless-belt or drum form associated with means
    for treating material thereon with gaseous currents, so that the heaviest
    constituents may settle as a stratum, while the lighter constituents either
    form relatively displaced strata or are carried away by the gaseous
    currents, there being no substantial movement of the heaviest constituents
    along the support, or both the heaviest and the lighter constituents moving
    in the same direction toward discharge.


CLS 209/472
TXT Apparatus under subclass 471 in which the heaviest and the lighter
    constituents move in diverging or opposite directions.


CLS 209/473
TXT Apparatus including rotating drums under subclass 422 in which material is
    subjected to gaseous currents, so that the heaviest constituents of the
    material may settle or remain as a stratum, while the lighter constituents
    either form relatively displaced strata or are removed by the gaseous
    currents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    (see (1) Note thereto for the line).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses, especially subclass 54 for rotary drum comminutors having a
    gaseous current therethrough.


CLS 209/474
TXT Apparatus under subclass 422 including stationary perforated or permeable
    supports for material through which constant gaseous currents are sent to
    cause the heaviest constituents of the material to settle as stratum, while
    the lighter constituents either form relatively displaced strata or are
    removed by the gaseous currents.


CLS 209/475
TXT Apparatus under subclass 422 including stationary perforated or permeable
    supports for material and means for sending pulsating or interrupting
    gaseous currents through the supports and the material thereon, so that the
    heaviest constituents of the material may settle as a stratum, while the
    lighter constituents either form relatively displaced strata or are moved
    away by the gaseous currents, there being no substantial movement of the
    heaviest along the support or both the heaviest and the lighter moving in
    the same direction toward discharge.


CLS 209/476
TXT Apparatus under subclass 475 in which the heaviest and lighter constituents
    move in divergent or opposite directions toward discharge.


CLS 209/477
TXT Apparatus under subclass 422 including stationary impermeable receptacles,
    chutes, and tables which receive material and means for subjecting the
    material to gaseous currents, so that the heaviest constituents of the
    material may settle as a stratum and the lighter constituents either form
    relatively displaced strata or are removed by the gaseous current.


CLS 209/478
TXT Apparatus under subclass 422 including supports for material associated
    with magnets which so operate as to apparently increase or decrease the
    specific gravity of magnetically-influenced constituents, so that said
    magnetically-influenced constituents will settle downward into a stratum as
    if they were the heaviest constituents when the magnetic pull is downward
    or will move into an upper stratum when the magnetic pull is upward.

    (1)     Note.  The distinction between this subclass and the magnetic
    separator subclasses ante is that in this subclass the magnets merely
    assist in the stratifying the material and the separation after
    stratification is effected is by other than magnetic means, while in the
    other subclasses the magnet complete a separation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     39 and 40, for combinations of magnetic separation with sifting,
    fluid suspension separation or stratifying.


CLS 209/479
TXT Apparatus under subclass 422 including moveable receptacles, chutes, or
    tables, other than drums, in or on which material is treated dry and
    without application of gaseous currents, so that the heaviest constituents
    of the material will settle as a stratum and the lighter either form
    relatively displaced strata or move away.


CLS 209/480
TXT Apparatus under subclass 479 in which the heaviest and the lighter
    constituents move in divergent directions to discharge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    441,    for stratifiers with liquid treatment employing chutes or tables
    involving divergent travel of material.


CLS 209/481
TXT Apparatus under subclass 479 in which the heaviest constituents and the
    lighter constituents move in opposite directions to discharge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    442,    for stratifiers with liquid treatment employing chutes or tables
    involving opposite travel of material.

    691+,   for separating items while contacting an inclined surface of a
    moving support.


CLS 209/482
TXT Movable drums, generally rotating under subclass 422 in which material is
    so treated dry and without the application of gaseous currents that the
    heaviest constituents may settle as a stratum, while the lighter either
    form relatively displaced strata or are moved away.


CLS 209/483
TXT Stationary receptacles, chutes, or tables under subclass 422 in or on which
    material is treated dry and without the application of gaseous currents, so
    that the heaviest constituents may settle as a stratum while the lighter
    either form relatively displaced strata or are moved away.


CLS 209/484
TXT Parts or subcombinations of stratifiers under subclass 422 which are not
    classifiable in the hereinunder-indented subclasses.


CLS 209/485
TXT Devices or special constructions under subclass 484 which form supports
    upon which the heaviest constituents of material form strata.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes impermeable supports.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is to be distinguished from subclasses 506 and
    507 in that in this subclass riffles either are not involved or are merely
    elements of a subcombination.  Where the essential or special construction
    involved is that of the riffles, per se, the structure involved is
    classifiable in either subclass 506 or subclass 507.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    506,    (see (2) Note).


CLS 209/486
TXT Special or specific constructions of permeable or perforated supports under
    subclass 485 on which material is stratified by fluid currents passed
    through the supports.


CLS 209/487
TXT Devices under subclass 484 for cleaning surfaces upon which material has
    been stratified of material adhering thereto and which is not gravitally
    discharged.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include conveyors which move strata
    along the stratifying supports to points of discharge, but will include
    generally devices which remove from belt or drum surfaces material adhering
    thereto after gravital discharge of the stratified material and devices for
    finally cleaning the surfaces of other types of stratifiers after gravital
    or other discharge of the heaviest constituents.


CLS 209/488
TXT Elements or structures under subclass 484 which are employed both in
    feeding and discharging stratifiers.


CLS 209/489
TXT Devices under subclass 488 for both feeding and discharging stratifiers
    which are adapted to automatically control both the feed and the discharge,
    the feeding and discharging elements being generally so interrelated that
    when one is interrupted the other is set into operation.


CLS 209/490
TXT Apparatus under methods under subclass 484 for discharging material from
    stratifiers not classifiable in the hereinunder-indented subclasses.


CLS 209/491
TXT Apparatus and methods under subclass 490 for automatically controlling the
    discharge from stratifiers, other than automatically-controlled ports or
    valves.


CLS 209/492
TXT Apparatus and methods under subclass 490 wherein conveying devices are
    employed for or specially adapted for the removal of stratified material
    from stratifiers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    448,    461-465, and all subclasses under stratifiers, having permeable
    beds, for combinations of stratifiers and discharge conveyors.


CLS 209/493
TXT Devices under subclass 490 for dividing two or more strata for separate
    discharge from a stratifier or for removing a surface stratum or layer from
    a mass of stratified material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    423,    427, 443, 454, 457, 458, 466, 468, 471, 474, and 475, for
    stratifiers in which the strata travel together in the same direction and
    employ dividing devices to secure separate discharge of the strata.


CLS 209/494
TXT Special constructions of discharge passages under subclass 490 adapted to
    discharge one or more grades or classes of material from stratifiers.


CLS 209/495
TXT Discharging devices under subclass 494 controlling the discharge of
    material through exit passages which are positively actuated, generally by
    mechanical drive either continuously or at definite intervals, which
    operation is not directly affected automatically by variations in the
    progress of stratification.


CLS 209/496
TXT Automatically-controlled devices under subclass 494 for discharging
    material through exits from stratifiers, the control or variation of the
    discharge being automatically accomplished by the progress of the
    stratification, generally by accumulation of bulk or weight of a given
    stratum.


CLS 209/497
TXT Means and methods under subclass 484 for feeding material to stratifiers
    which are not classifiable in subclasses 488, 489, or the here
    inunder-indented subclasses.

    (1)     Note.  Such means and methods to find a place in this subclass
    should be specially adapted for stratifiers or be elements of a stratifier
    subclass.


CLS 209/498
TXT Devices under subclass 497 for distributing or spreading material to or on
    one or more stratifying devices which form elements of stratifying
    combinations or are specially adapted for stratifiers.


CLS 209/499
TXT Devices under subclass 497 for controlling rate or quantity of material
    supply which are elements of stratifier combinations or specially adapted
    for use with stratifiers.


CLS 209/500
TXT Liquid-supply means under subclass 484 constituting elements of stratifier
    combinations or specially adapted for use with stratifiers and which are
    not elsewhere classifiable.


CLS 209/501
TXT Stratifier combinations under subclass 500 including means for repeated
    return and reuse of the liquid employed to promote stratification,
    generally including special means for removing solids suspended in the
    liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 167+ and 194+ for
    filters having recirculation means.


CLS 209/502
TXT Special devices under subclass 484 for the supply or control of gaseous
    fluid to stratifiers which are not elsewhere classifiable and stratifier
    combinations including special gases supply and control means.


CLS 209/503
TXT Operating means under subclass 484 specially adapted for the operation of
    stratifiers not elsewhere classifiable.

    (1)     Note.  To be placed in this subclass the means should be an element
    of a stratifier combination or specially adapted for the operation of
    stratifiers and not obviously capable of other uses.


CLS 209/504
TXT Means under subclass 503 for reciprocating stratifiers specially adapted
    for such and not obviously capable of other uses or which form elements of
    stratifier combinations.

    (1)     Note.  Reciprocating devices for stratifiers so frequently include
    special supporting devices or structures as an element of the actuating
    means that search in this class, subclass 508, should invariably be carried
    into this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    508,    (see (1) note).


CLS 209/505
TXT Means under subclass 503 for rotating stratifiers which are elements of
    stratifier combinations or are specially adapted for stratifiers, not
    classifiable elsewhere or obviously capable of other use.


CLS 209/506
TXT Devices under subclass 484 including special constructions of projections,
    channels, or depressions on or in stratifying supports for material which
    effect the collection or affect the stratifications of the heavier material.


CLS 209/507
TXT Devices under subclass 506 including projections extending from above into
    material being stratified or which do not extend to the material supporting
    surfaces and which affect the stratification of the material or the flow of
    the lighter constituents.


CLS 209/508
TXT Special devices or structures under subclass 484 which support stratifying
    devices.

    (1)     Note.  Search in this subclass should invariably be extended into
    the operating mechanism subclasses ante, for the reason that special
    supports are very frequently part of the operating mechanisms or associated
    with such.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    503,    for stratifier operating means.


CLS 209/509
TXT SORTING SPECIAL ITEMS, AND CERTAIN METHODS AND APPARATUS (E.G., POCKET TYPE
    AND LIGHT RESPONSIVE SORTING, ETC.) FOR SORTING ANY ITEMS:

    Methods and apparatus under the class definition which separate special
    items by means other than electrostatic, or which separate any items by the
    means named in indents hereunder.

    (1)     Note.  Included as "special" items are the following:  fruits and
    vegetables such as nuts, oranges, apples, potatoes, and tomatoes; food
    items such as fish, poultry, eggs, and potato chips; manufactured items of
    all kinds, including, for example, ball bearings, tools, light bulbs, razor
    blades, silverware, pellets, bullets, shoe heels, rivets, and electronic
    components; and items such as railroad ties, cut flowers, seeds, lumber,
    etc.

    (2)     Note.  Bulk materials (such as grains and ore) are not considered
    special items and are generally sorted by methods and apparatus of the type
    classifiable in subclasses 1-3, 4-44, 45-70 and 127.1-508.  However,
    includible in subclasses indented under subclass 509 are methods and
    apparatus not provided for in the subclasses listed in the preceding
    sentence, and bulk material sorting (as well as special item sorting)
    effected by use of such methods and apparatus will be classified in these
    indented subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  Classifiable in Class 209 are devices which discriminate
    between items on the basis of a physical difference therein and separate
    them accordingly.  For devices which sense a difference in position or
    orientation of articles and separate them accordingly, see appropriate
    subclasses in Class 198, Conveyors:  Power-Driven.

    (4)     Note.  A patent claiming in an apparatus claim sensing or analyzing
    means of the type provided for in Class 33, 73, 235, 250, 324, 340, 356,
    and 374, for example, coupled with a mere recitation of a "reject signal",
    "reject means", "sorting means", or the like, but not claiming a specific
    feature of the reject, separating, or sorting means, will be classifiable
    in the class taking the sensing or analyzing means.

    (5)     Note.  This class does not include methods and apparatus wherein an
    operator selects a destination for an item and utilizes a device such as a
    keyboard to actuate a separating means directing the item to the selected
    destination.  Such methods and apparatus are classifiable in Class 414,
    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 134+.  Where an operator marks or
    tags items for subsequent automatic separation of the items on the basis of
    such marking or tagging, see subclass 3.3 of this class (209).

    (6)     Note.  This class does not include the combination of testing
    containers for fluid leakage and rejecting those items failing to pass such
    testing.  Such methods and apparatus are classifiable in Class 73,
    Measuring and Testing, subclasses 37+.  However, where physical defects
    (e.g., such as flaws in the rim of a container) are sensed by the
    application of a fluid pressure or vacuum to items, see subclasses 522+
    (bottles) and 591 (other items) of this class.

    (7)     Note.  This class does not include methods and apparatus for
    separating items carried on a conveyor wherein a code or distinguishing
    marking is placed on the conveyor or on a special receptacle used for
    holding an item while it is on the conveyor (containers such as envelopes
    and mailbags which are used in handling an item after it is removed from a
    conveyor are not included as "special" receptacles used with a conveyor).
    Such methods and apparatus are classifiable in Class 198, Conveyors:
    Power-Driven.

    (8)     Note.  Included in this class is a patent claiming a process
    wherein items are separated by sensing physical differences therein and
    wherein the step of separating the items is only nominally recited, even
    where no specific separating means is disclosed in the patent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127.1+, for electrostatic methods and apparatus for sorting either special
    or nonspecial items.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, for sorting followed by
    cleaning of the sorted items.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 40+ for the combination of
    testing containers for leakage and the rejection of those failing the test.

    83,     Cutting, particularly subclasses 27, 79+, and 102+ for methods and
    devices which involve a cutting operation followed by sorting.  This
    subclass and subclasses indented thereunder (i.e., subclasses 509+ of Class
    209) include apparatus for cutting combined with inspecting and sorting
    where the cutting apparatus is nominally recited, or no significant
    relation of the cutter to the sorting means is recited.  Classified in
    Class 83 is apparatus in which a cutting device operates in synchronous
    (i.e., timed) relation to a sorting device, or which includes details of
    the cutter.  However, a recitation of the spatial location of a sorting
    means relative to a cutter (e.g., stating that a sorting device is
    longitudinally spaced a certain distance from a cutting device) is not
    considered significant to cause classification in Class 83.  Class 83
    includes apparatus in which the operation of a sorting device is initiated
    by a cutting device, and also includes all methods reciting a cutting step,
    regardless of scope, in combination with a sorting step.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 398 for means distinguishing
    between alternatively faced (e.g., right side up or inverted) items and
    conveying only uniformly faced items.

    199,    Type Casting, subclass 40 for type casting machines with font
    sorting means.

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), subclass 40 for a sorting
    device combined with a selective punch device (e.g., to segregate "error"
    cards, or to stack master and detail cards separately).

    300,    Brush, Broom, and Mop Making, subclass 18 for devices for sorting
    bristles according to their length in brush manufacture.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 4+ for details of a
    thermal leakage test combined with a sorting arrangement responsive to the
    test.

    453,    Coin Handling, subclasses 3+ for coin sorting devices.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, subclasses 164+ for machines for feeding blanks to nail, nut,
    rivet, or screw making machines, and separating the finished article from
    imperfect work, chips, etc.


CLS 209/510
TXT Sorting eggs or components thereof:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 509 for separating eggs.


CLS 209/511
TXT Radiant energy sensing means controls separating means:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 510 including means utilizing radiant
    energy for sensing a condition of eggs and controlling separating means in
    accordance therewith.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 223+ and 226 for a conveyor-carried
    article sensed by a photodetector, the latter subclass specifically
    including color detectors.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 402+ for color detecting
    apparatus and methods; subclasses 432+ for apparatus sensing light
    transmitted or absorbed by articles; subclasses 445+ for apparatus sensing
    reflected light; and subclasses 52+ for egg candling apparatus, per se.


CLS 209/512
TXT By weight:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 510 wherein eggs are separated into
    groups of different weight.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    177,    Weighing Scales, appropriate subclasses for weighting apparatus,
    per se.


CLS 209/513
TXT Sensing egg weight and controlling separating means in accordance
    therewith: Methods and apparatus under subclass 512 including means for
    sensing weight of eggs and controlling separating means in accordance
    therewith.


CLS 209/514
TXT Orbiting or rotating carrier responsive to egg weight:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 512 wherein an egg is supported on an
    orbiting or rotating carrier responsive to weight of the egg, as, for
    example, by being depressible by an egg of particular weight.


CLS 209/515
TXT Carrier tilted by means (e.g., trip, cam, etc.) adjacent travel path when
    depressed to particular elevation:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 514 wherein the egg is discharged from
    the carrier when the latter is depressed by the egg to a particular level
    and is caused to tilt by means located along its path of travel.


CLS 209/516
TXT Same eggs successively placed on means (e.g., balance beams, etc.)
    responsive to different weights:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 512 wherein eggs are successively
    placed on means responsive to different weights, as, for example, by being
    depressible by eggs of different weight.


CLS 209/517
TXT Sorting lumber, logs, pipes, rails, or like items:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 509 for separating lumber, logs,
    pipes, rails, or like large, elongated items.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 745+ for pipe handling
    apparatus, per se.


CLS 209/518
TXT Condition responsive means controls separating means:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 517 including means for sensing a
    condition of items and controlling separating means in accordance therewith.


CLS 209/519
TXT Relatively movable calipers closed against item:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 518 wherein the sensing means
    comprises relatively movable calipers closable against an item.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 783+ for calipering devices,
    per se.


CLS 209/520
TXT Sensor responsive to item contact:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 518 wherein the sensing means responds
    to contact by an item, e.g., a switch engaged by an item of particular size.


CLS 209/521
TXT With endless conveyor belt:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 517 including an endless conveyor belt
    which is either itself part of an item separator or conveys an item to or
    from the latter.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are endless belts having item pushing elements
    thereon as well as apron type endless belts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    518+,   for separating means controlled by a sensor responsive to a
    condition of lumber, logs, pipes, rails, or like items and combined with,
    or consisting of, an endless conveyor belt.


CLS 209/522
TXT Sorting bottles, ampoules, jars, drinking vessels, or like ceramic or glass
    containers:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 509 for sorting bottles, ampoules,
    jars, drinking vessels, or like ceramic or glass containers.


CLS 209/523
TXT Condition responsive means controls separating means:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 522 including means for sensing a
    condition of items and controlling separating means in accordance therewith.


CLS 209/524
TXT Sensing radiant energy reflected, absorbed, emitted, or obstructed by item
    or adjunct (e.g., label, cap, etc.) thereof:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 523 including means utilizing radiant
    energy reflected, absorbed, emitted, or obstructed by an item, or by an
    article associated therewith, for sensing a condition of said item or
    article.


CLS 209/525
TXT Sizing with visible light beam:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 524 wherein a beam of visible light is
    used in sensing a dimension of items so that the items can be separated
    into groups of different size.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 372+ for size or
    dimension measuring apparatus, per se.


CLS 209/526
TXT Detecting internal flaw (e.g., air bubble, crack, etc.) in wall of item:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 524 wherein an internal flaw in the
    wall of an item is sensed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 239+ for flaw inspecting
    devices, per se.


CLS 209/527
TXT By means of radio frequency radiation:
    Methods and apparatus under subclass 526 utilizing radio frequency energy
    for sensing a flaw in said item or article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 658+ for
    capacitative reactance measuring apparatus, per se.


CLS 209/528
TXT Detecting flaw in, or absence or misplacement of, label on item:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 524 including means for sensing a flaw
    in, or absence or misplacement of, a label on an item.


CLS 209/529
TXT Sensing position, shape, or presence of closure:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 523 wherein the position, shape, or
    presence of a closure for an item is sensed.


CLS 209/530
TXT Sensor contacts item:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 523 wherein the sensing means responds
    to contact by an item, e.g., a switch engaged by an item of particular size.


CLS 209/531
TXT Gauge:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 530 wherein the sensing means senses a
    dimension of an item.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, appropriate subclasses for gauging
    apparatus, per se.


CLS 209/532
TXT Plug:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 531 wherein means enters a perforation
    or recess in an item to sense a dimension thereof.


CLS 209/533
TXT Relatively movable calipers closed against item:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 531 wherein the sensing means
    comprises relatively movable calipers closable against an item.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 143+ for calipering devices,
    per se.


CLS 209/534
TXT Sorting paper money:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 509 for separating paper money.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    194,    Check-Actuated Control Mechanisms, subclasses 4+ for currency
    validating apparatus, per se.


CLS 209/535
TXT Sorting cigarettes, cigars, or packages thereof:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 509 for separating cigarettes, cigars,
    or packages thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 280+ for cigar and cigarette making apparatus,
    per se.


CLS 209/536
TXT Sensing radiant energy reflected, absorbed, emitted, or obstructed by item
    or adjunct thereof:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 535 including means utilizing radiant
    energy reflected, absorbed, emitted, or obstructed by an item, or by an
    article associated therewith, for sensing a condition of said item or
    article and controlling separating means in accordance therewith.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 223+ and 226 for a conveyor-carried
    article sensed by a photodetector, the latter subclass specifically
    including color detectors.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 402+ for color detecting
    apparatus and methods; subclasses 432+ for apparatus sensing light
    transmitted or absorbed by articles; and subclasses 445+ for apparatus
    sensing reflected light.


CLS 209/537
TXT Fluid or vacuum sensing means controls separating means:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 535 including means utilizing a fluid
    stream, or a vacuum, for sensing a condition of an item and controlling
    separating means in accordance therewith.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 37+ for testing apparatus
    utilizing fluid pressure.


CLS 209/538
TXT Nonconveying driven means for turning item at separating or inspecting
    station to facilitate sorting:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 509 including driven means which does
    not convey an item but turns it at a separating or inspecting station to
    assist in sorting items.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 411 for a conveyor and driven
    means for turning conveyed items.


CLS 209/539
TXT Traveling items shifted to form line, or into end or edge alignment, to
    facilitate inspection or separation:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 509 wherein traveling items are
    shifted into a line, or ends or edges thereof are brought into alignment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 434+ for a conveyor system for
    rearranging a stream of items.


CLS 209/540
TXT Traveling item turned to predetermined position:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 509 wherein traveling items are turned
    so that they face in a particular direction, e.g., items are inverted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    538,    for means which turns an item at a separating or inspecting station
    to facilitate separating the item from other items, the means not being a
    conveyor.

    701,    for means which turns a traveling item but does not face it in a
    particular direction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, subclasses 44+ for
    gravity conveyors with means for turning conveyed articles to a different
    position.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 373+ for a conveyor having
    means for changing the attitude of a conveyed item relative to the
    conveying direction.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 156+ for dispensing apparatus
    combined with article orienting means.


CLS 209/541
TXT Plural orienting means:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 540 including plural means for turning
    items.


CLS 209/542
TXT Reciprocable or pivotable orienting means: Methods and apparatus under
    subclass 540 wherein the items are turned by a reciprocating or pivoting
    means.


CLS 209/543
TXT Fluid orienting means:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 540 wherein the items are turned by a
    fluid means, e.g., an air jet.


CLS 209/544
TXT Means orienting item moved by gravity:
    Methods and apparatus under subclass 540 wherein the items are turned by a
    means along which they move under the force of gravity, e.g., a twisted
    chute.


CLS 209/545
TXT Driven orienting means:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 540 wherein the items are turned by a
    driven means.


CLS 209/546
TXT Signalling, indicating, or display means:
    Methods and apparatus under subclass 509 including a signalling,
    indicating, or display device by means of which an operator receives
    information about items being separated or about the separating apparatus
    itself.

    (1)     Note.  A light source which illuminates an item so that it can be
    more easily inspected is not considered a display means includible herein.
    Cross-reference collection 938 includes such means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclasses for indicating and
    display apparatus, per se.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+ for alarms, per se.


CLS 209/547
TXT Indicia associated with cards, file folders, or like coded items, or with
    sorting means therefor (including cards, per se, with edge coding):

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 546 including indicia placed on cards,
    file folders, or like items coded to facilitate sorting, or indicia placed
    on means for sorting such items.  Included are cards, per se, having
    indicia in the form of edge coding such as notches.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclass 487 for record cards coded by means other than
    edge coding, e.g., perforations.


CLS 209/548
TXT Operation of apparatus stopped:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 546 wherein the operation of a
    separating means stops if an abnormal condition exists in the working of
    said means or in an item sorted thereby.


CLS 209/549
TXT Signal lamp or audible alarm:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 546 including a signal light or
    audible alarm.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclasses for indicating and
    display apparatus, per se.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+ for alarms, per se.


CLS 209/550
TXT Indicating scale:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 546 including a graduated series of
    indicia, e.g., a dial.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclasses for indicating and
    display apparatus, per se.


CLS 209/551
TXT Item counter:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 546 including means for indicating to
    an operator the number of items which have been separated into one or more
    classes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 959 for a conveyor having means
    for counting the number of load units conveyed.

    235,    Registers, appropriate subclasses for counting devices, per se.


CLS 209/552
TXT Condition responsive means controls separating means:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 509 including means for sensing a
    condition of items and controlling separating means in accordance therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    513,    518 and 523, for apparatus including condition responsive means for
    sorting eggs, lumber, and bottles, respectively.


CLS 209/553
TXT Cards or sheets separated by rotatable suction drum:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 552 wherein cards or sheets are
    separated by means of a rotatable drum against which said items are held by
    suction until delivered to particular locations.


CLS 209/554
TXT Sorting cards or sheets coded by perforation:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 552 for separating cards or sheets
    coded by means of holes formed therein.


CLS 209/555
TXT Diverse:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 552 including different types of
    sensing or separating means.


CLS 209/556
TXT Diverse electrical tests:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 555 including diverse electrical tests
    for sensing at least one condition of an item, e.g., a test of the
    capacitance of an item to measure thickness of a wall thereof and a test of
    the resistance of the item to measure its structural continuity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for
    miscellaneous electrical testing.


CLS 209/557
TXT Including noncondition-responsive separating means:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 555 including means which separates
    items without being under the control of a separate means for sensing a
    condition of the items.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    606+,   for separating means, per se.


CLS 209/558
TXT At single station:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 555 wherein the diverse sensing or
    separating means are at the same location.


CLS 209/559
TXT Means (e.g., information storing device, timer, delaying relay, etc.)
    delaying actuation of separating means:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 552 including means for delaying the
    operation of said separating means after the condition of an item has been
    sensed by said sensing means.


CLS 209/560
TXT Mechanical:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 559 wherein said delaying means is
    mechanically operated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, for automatic mechanical control
    means, per se.


CLS 209/561
TXT Rotatable pin carrier:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 560 wherein said delaying means
    comprises a rotatable disk or other rotatable support carrying a pin which
    actuates said separating means when moved to an operative position.


CLS 209/562
TXT Magnetic:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 559 wherein said delaying means is
    magnetically operated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, appropriate
    subclasses for magnetic information storing apparatus, per se.


CLS 209/563
TXT Electrical:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 562 wherein said delaying means is
    electrically operated.


CLS 209/564
TXT Electronic:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 563 wherein said delaying means is
    electronically operated.


CLS 209/565
TXT Shift register:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 564 wherein said delaying means
    comprises a shift register.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclasses 57 and 64 for shift registers, per se.


CLS 209/566
TXT Controlled by article:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 565 wherein a shift pulse is generated
    for said shift register by detection of movement of an item past a
    particular point.


CLS 209/567
TXT Magnetic test sensing property of item:
    Methods and apparatus under subclass 552 wherein a magnetic means senses a
    condition of items.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 34+ for magnetic
    measuring and testing apparatus, per se.


CLS 209/568
TXT Magnetic core tested:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 567 wherein a magnetic core is tested.


CLS 209/569
TXT Reading indicia:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 567 for reading indicia on an item,
    e.g., magnetic coding.


CLS 209/570
TXT Permeability:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 567 wherein the permeability of an
    item is sensed.


CLS 209/571
TXT Electrical test sensing property of item:
    Methods and apparatus under subclass 552 wherein an electrical test senses
    a condition of items.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for
    electrical measuring and testing apparatus, per se.


CLS 209/572
TXT Detecting flaw in dielectric:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 571 wherein items are tested for a
    flaw in dielectric material included therein.


CLS 209/573
TXT Electrical component tested:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 571 wherein an electrical component is
    tested.


CLS 209/574
TXT Resistor or capacitor:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 573 wherein the electrical component
    is a resistor or a capacitor.


CLS 209/575
TXT Lamp or battery:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 573 wherein the electrical component
    is a lamp or a battery.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 364+ for
    systems, apparatus, and methods which test electric lamps or electric space
    discharge devices but do not involve sorting.


CLS 209/576
TXT Sensing radiant energy reflected, absorbed, emitted, or obstructed by item
    or adjunct thereof:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 552 including means utilizing radiant
    energy reflected, absorbed, emitted, or obstructed by an item, or by an
    article associated therewith, for sensing a condition of said item or
    article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    511,    524 and 536, for apparatus utilizing radiant energy sensing means
    for separating eggs, bottles, and cigarettes, respectively.

    524,    for use of radiant energy sensing means for sorting bottles,
    ampoules, jars, drinking vessels, or like ceramic or glass containers.

    552,    for a condition responsive device controlling sorting by sensing
    light obstruction of a gauge part or other means associated with the
    sorting apparatus itself.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, appropriate subclasses for sonic and ultrasonic
    measuring and testing apparatus, per se.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 281+ for methods and apparatus
    pertaining to mass spectroscopy or calutrons; subclasses 306+ for methods
    and apparatus for inspecting solids or liquids by charged particles;
    subclasses 336.1+ for methods and apparatus for testing material wherein
    material subjected to invisible radiation converts the latter to a
    different form of radiation which is used to generate an electrical signal;
    subclasses 200+ and the classes specified in the notes thereto, for
    photocell electrical circuits and apparatus responsive to radiant energy,
    particularly subclass 223 for photocells which sense objects on a conveyor
    or chute; and subclasses 458.1+ for luminophor radiation detecting
    apparatus, per se.

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, appropriate subclasses for lasers, per
    se.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 402+ for color detecting
    apparatus and methods; subclasses 432+ for apparatus sensing light
    transmitted or absorbed by articles; subclasses 445+ for apparatus sensing
    reflected light; subclass 51 for ultraviolet or infrared measuring and
    testing apparatus, per se; subclasses 372+ for dimension measuring
    apparatus, per se; and subclass 237 for flaw detecting apparatus, per se.


CLS 209/577
TXT Infrared, visible light, or ultraviolet:
    Methods and apparatus under subclass 576 utilizing infrared, visible light,
    or ultraviolet radiation.

    (1)     Note.  To be included in this subclass and its indented subclasses
    as a patent involving visible light, the patent must (1) state that the
    radiant energy employed is light, or (2) set out specific wavelengths known
    to be visible.


CLS 209/578
TXT Ultraviolet:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 577 utilizing ultraviolet radiation.


CLS 209/579
TXT Laser:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 577 utilizing a laser source.


CLS 209/580
TXT Color detection:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 577 wherein color of items is sensed.


CLS 209/581
TXT Intensity:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 580 wherein color intensity of items
    is sensed.


CLS 209/582
TXT Measuring ratio of sensed intensities:
    Methods and apparatus under subclass 581 wherein the ratio between color
    intensities of items is measured.


CLS 209/583
TXT Reading indicia:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 577 for reading indicia on an item.


CLS 209/584
TXT On mail:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 583 for reading indicia on mail.


CLS 209/585
TXT Mirror or prism in optical path:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 577 including a mirror or prism in the
    optical path of said radiation.


CLS 209/586
TXT Sizing:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 577 wherein said radiation senses a
    dimension of items so that they can be separated into groups of different
    size.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    518     and 525, for apparatus sizing lumber and bottles with a visible
    light beam, respectively.


CLS 209/587
TXT Reflected for item:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 577 wherein said radiation is
    reflected from an item.


CLS 209/588
TXT Transmitted through item:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 577 wherein said radiation passes
    through an item.


CLS 209/589
TXT X-Ray or gamma ray:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 576 utilizing X-ray or gamma ray
    radiation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, appropriate subclasses for
    specific sources or detectors of x- or gamma rays.


CLS 209/590
TXT Sonic or supersonic energy:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 576 utilizing sonic or supersonic
    radiation.

    (1)     Note.  To be included here, a patent must (1) state that the
    radiant energy is sonic or supersonic, or (2) set out specific frequencies
    which are known to be sonic or supersonic, i.e., frequencies above 12-15
    per second.


CLS 209/591
TXT Sensing by applying fluid or vacuum to item:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 552 wherein said sensing means applies
    a fluid stream or a vacuum to an item.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    537,    for apparatus sorting cigarettes, cigars, or packages by means of
    fluid or vacuum sensing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 37+ for testing apparatus
    utilizing fluid pressure.


CLS 209/592
TXT Responsive to weight of item:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 552 wherein weight of an item is
    sensed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    513,    for egg sorting apparatus in which a weight sensing means controls
    a separating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclasses 52+ for means weighing and handling
    successive receivers; and subclasses 60+ for weight responsive material
    control.

    194,    Check-Actuated Control Mechanisms, subclass 103 for weight testers
    associated with machines within the class.


CLS 209/593
TXT Detecting movement of item support with electrical sensor:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 592 including an electrical sensor
    which detects movement of a support under the weight of an item.


CLS 209/594
TXT Photodetector:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 593 wherein said sensor is a
    photodetector.


CLS 209/595
TXT Switch:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 593 wherein said sensor is a switch.


CLS 209/596
TXT Pusher or deflector controls movement of item on separate support:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 592 wherein said separating means
    comprises a pusher or deflector controlling movement of an item on a
    separate support.


CLS 209/597
TXT Sensing position, shape, or presence of closure or end wall on container:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 552 wherein the position, shape, or
    presence of a closure, or an end wall, of a container is sensed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclass 53 for apparatus sensing defective
    packages in filling machines.


CLS 209/598
TXT Sensing contour of item having no missing parts:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 552 wherein the contour of an item
    having no missing parts is sensed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 501.7+ for apparatus sensing
    item contour.


CLS 209/599
TXT Sorting items according to susceptibility to deform (e.g., malleability,
    hardness, compressibility, etc.), rupture, or vibrate:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 552 wherein the susceptibility of an
    item to deform, rupture, or vibrate is sensed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 12.01+ for impact testing
    apparatus; subclasses 67+ for vibration testing apparatus; subclasses 78+
    for hardness detecting apparatus; subclasses 87+ for ductility or
    brittleness testing apparatus; and subclasses 760+ for stress or strain
    testing apparatus, particularly subclasses 788+ which include deformation
    testing due to a stress intentionally applied to the specimen.


CLS 209/600
TXT Sensor contacts item:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 552 wherein the sensing means responds
    to contact by an item.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    520     and 530, for item contacting sensors utilized in separating lumber
    and bottles, respectively.


CLS 209/601
TXT Gauge:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 600 wherein the sensing means senses a
    dimension of an item.


CLS 209/602
TXT Relatively movable calipers closed against item:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 601 wherein the sensing means
    comprises relatively movable calipers closable against an item.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    519     and 533, for calipers utilized in separating lumber and bottles,
    respectively.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 783+ for calipering devices,
    per se.


CLS 209/603
TXT Sheet gauging:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 601 wherein thickness of a sheet is
    sensed.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are sensors which detect superposed sheets and
    control means for separating the latter from single sheets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.13+ for
    sheet actuated switches.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclasses 262 and 263 for apparatus
    sensing excess thickness of articles.


CLS 209/604
TXT Sensor generates electrical signal:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 601 wherein the sensing means produces
    an electrical signal for controlling the separating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.4+ for
    stationary feeler detecting a transient object.


CLS 209/605
TXT Items separated into at least three classes:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 604 wherein items are separated into
    three or more classes.


CLS 209/606
TXT Separating means:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 509 of a particular type.


CLS 209/607
TXT Corn silk separator:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 606 for separating silk from corn
    kernels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, subclasses 26+ for corn husking
    machines.


CLS 209/608
TXT Sorting items according to edge coding:
    Methods and apparatus under subclass 606 for separating items according to
    distinguishing characteristics placed at edge portions thereof, e.g.,
    notches.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    598,    for apparatus sensing contour of articles having no missing parts
    and separating the articles in accordance therewith.


CLS 209/609
TXT Magnet attracts or repels item:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 608 wherein a magnet attracts or
    repels an item to separate, or to facilitate separation of, the item from
    other items.


CLS 209/610
TXT Keyboard control:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 608 including a keyboard controlling a
    separating means.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are finger manipulated push buttons, slide
    bars, and like mechanisms.


CLS 209/611
TXT Cards, file folders, or like items sorted by means of necked-down notch
    thereon: Methods and apparatus under subclass 608 for separating cards,
    file folders, or like items by means of a necked-down notch thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    547,    for cards which are sorted by means of edge coding thereon, e.g.,
    notches.


CLS 209/612
TXT Cards, file folders, or like items alternatively having notch or hole at
    particular location thereon:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 608 wherein cards, file folders, or
    like items are separated by means of a notch or a hole alternatively placed
    at edge portions thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    547,    for cards which are sorted by means of edge coding thereon, e.g.,
    notches.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers subclass 487 for record cards, per se, which are coded by
    perforations therein.


CLS 209/613
TXT Sorting cards, file folders, or like items having coded sorting holes:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 606 wherein cards, file folders, or
    like items are separated by means of a hole therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    547,    for cards which are sorted by means of edge coding thereon, e.g.,
    notches.

    554,    for condition responsive means for sorting cards coded by
    perforations.

    608+,   for means for sorting cards, file folders, or like items according
    to an edge coding thereon, e.g., a series of notches on the edge of a data.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclass 487 for record cards, per se, which are coded
    by perforations therein.


CLS 209/614
TXT Hand supported implements:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 606 wherein a hand-supported tool
    separates items.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, appropriate subclasses
    for various hand manipulated implements.


CLS 209/615
TXT Brush, flail, or rake used other than as one of opposed pair of gauge
    elements to separate, or to facilitate separation of, items:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 606 wherein a brush, flail, or rake
    separates, or facilitates separation of, items without being used in
    opposition with another element to form a gauge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    672,    for a pair of spindles or rollers which are disposed in spaced,
    opposed relation and which have projecting elements, such as tines or
    bristles, spaced circumferentially thereof, the space between the
    projecting elements of said spindles or rollers constituting a gauging
    passage through which an item of sufficiently small size will pass.


CLS 209/616
TXT Rotatable:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 615 wherein said brush, flail, or rake
    is rotatable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses 36-38 and 43 for rotary
    boll hulling and delinting apparatus.


CLS 209/617
TXT Item gripped between opposed elements:
    Methods and apparatus under subclass 606 including elements between which
    an item is gripped to separate it from other items.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are (1) elements which selectively grip only
    particular items, and (2) elements which grip all items being sorted but
    release them at different points to effect their separation.


CLS 209/618
TXT Rollers:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 617 wherein said gripping elements are
    rollers.


CLS 209/619
TXT Gauge enters hole in item:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 606 wherein items are separated
    according to their ability to permit movement of gauge means, such as a bar
    of a particular diameter, into and out of a perforation or recess in each
    item.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    532,    for a plug-type gauge which enters the neck opening of a bottle.


CLS 209/620
TXT Gauging passage between orbiting belts:
    Methods and apparatus under subclass 606 including orbiting belts disposed
    in spaced relation along at least a portion of their travel paths to
    provide a gauging passage through which an item of sufficiently small size
    passes to separate it from larger items.


CLS 209/621
TXT Rotating or orbiting carrier having expandable gauging passage passing
    items of different size at different points along carrier travel path:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 606 including a rotating or orbiting
    carrier the structure of which defines an expandable passage, items of
    different size passing through the latter at different points along the
    travel path of the carrier.


CLS 209/622
TXT Belt:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 621 wherein said carrier is a belt.


CLS 209/623
TXT With gauging pocket for individual item:
    Methods and apparatus under subclass 622 wherein said expandable passage of
    said carrier belt is defined by a pocketlike structure which holds an item
    separate from other items until the passage expands sufficiently to release
    it.


CLS 209/624
TXT Pocket formed by rollers, disks, or wheels spaced transversely of belt or
    by contoured transverse rollers, bar, or slat:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 623 wherein items are separately held
    between rollers, disks, or wheels spaced transversely of said carrier belt,
    or in pockets formed by a contoured roller, bar, or slat transversely
    mounted on the carrier belt.


CLS 209/625
TXT Gauge with clearer other than continuous feeder:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 606 including a gauge provided with
    means for moving therefrom or therealong items that are too large to be
    accepted by the gauge, such gauge clearing means not including, however,
    feeding means moving items with continuous motion along a gauge.

    (1)     Note.  In accordance with the definition for this subclass, a
    pusher which intermittently moves an item along a gauge is included here.
    However, a pusher which moves an item along the same type of gauge with
    continuous motion is not included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    379+,   for means for clearing or keeping open the passages of sifters
    classifiable in subclasses 233+.

    684,    for a table having therein pockets for receiving items of a
    particular size from a mixture flowing across the table, the table being
    tiltable to discharge those items lodging in the pockets.


CLS 209/626
TXT Spacing between gauge elements increased to free item:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 625 including gauge elements that
    release an over-size item therefrom by moving away from each other.


CLS 209/627
TXT Rotatable or pivotable clearer:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 625 wherein said gauge clearing means
    comprises a rotatable or pivotable element.


CLS 209/628
TXT Stationary clearer:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 625 wherein said gauge clearing means
    is fixed.


CLS 209/629
TXT Diverse:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 606 including different types of item
    separating operations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    555+,   for diverse separating means including a condition responsive means
    controlling a separating means.


CLS 209/630
TXT Including means supporting items for manual sorting or allowing operator to
    control item destination:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 629 including means, such as a table,
    supporting items for separation by hand, or means allowing an operator to
    control the destination to which items are delivered.


CLS 209/631
TXT Including separation effected by items following different trajectories
    through space:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 629 including separation effected by
    items following different trajectories as they travel through space.


CLS 209/632
TXT Including separation effected by item of particular size passing through
    gauging passage between separate elements:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 629 including separation effected by
    movement of an item of sufficiently small size through a gauging passage
    between separate elements, e.g., opposed bars.


CLS 209/633
TXT Stationary elements:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 632 wherein said elements are fixed.


CLS 209/634
TXT Including separation effected by item of particular size passing through
    gauging aperture in wall (e.g., perforated panel, etc.):

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 629 including separation effected by
    movement of an item of sufficiently small size through an aperture in a
    wall.


CLS 209/635
TXT Including separation effected by different items traveling in different
    directions while contacting a surface:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 629 including separation effected by
    different items traveling in different directions on a surface.


CLS 209/636
TXT Magnet attracts or repels item:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 606 wherein items are separated by
    magnetic attraction or repulsion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212     and 213+, for means for separating bulk material by use of a
    magnetic force.


CLS 209/637
TXT Items thrown or falling through space strike surface and only some rebound:
    Methods and apparatus under subclass 606 wherein items thrown or falling
    through space separate by striking a surface from which only some items
    rebound.


CLS 209/638
TXT Items separate by following different trajectories through space:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 606 wherein items separate by
    following different trajectories as they travel through space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    657,    for a deflector movable into or out of the path of an item thrown
    or falling through space, the item thus being directed to different points
    depending upon the position of the deflector.


CLS 209/639
TXT Fluid jet changes trajectory of item:
    Methods and apparatus under subclass 638 wherein a stream of fluid impinges
    upon an item to change its trajectory.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24      through 27, 32-35, 134-137, 145, 156, and 157, for bulk material
    classifying by use of a gaseous suspension in a horizontal or inclined
    current.


CLS 209/640
TXT Items thrown or falling through space strike surface and rebound with
    different trajectories:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 638 wherein items thrown or falling
    through space strike a surface and rebound in different directions.


CLS 209/641
TXT Takeoff ramp adjustable to different angular positions relative to
    horizontal plane:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 638 wherein items are projected from a
    ramp the angle of which can be adjusted relative to a horizontal plane.


CLS 209/642
TXT Thrower:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 638 wherein said items are thrown into
    space.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, subclass 4 for centrifugal guns or
    projectors.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 638+ for thrower-type box car
    loaders and general thrower-type conveyors.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 5, 39+,
    and 275 for comminutors utilizing a throwing of material.

    273,    Amusement Devices: Games, subclasses 120 and 129 for projector-type
    games.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclass 71 for thrower-type material
    intakes for fluid current conveyors.


CLS 209/643
TXT Suction:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 606 wherein items are separated by
    applying suction thereto.


CLS 209/644
TXT Fluid jet:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 606 wherein items are separated by
    impinging a stream of fluid thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44.2,   for fluid jet separating means combined with separating apparatus
    within the class definition but not included in subclasses 509 through 707.

    537,    for apparatus sorting cigarettes, cigars, or packages thereof by
    means of fluid or vacuum sensing means.

    591,    for condition responsive means utilizing fluid or vacuum sensing
    means.


CLS 209/645
TXT Sorting items by weight:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 606 wherein items are separated into
    groups of different weight.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    512,    for apparatus sorting eggs by weight.

    592,    for a weight responsive sorting apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclasses 52+ for means weighing and handling
    successive receivers; and subclasses 60+ for weight responsive material
    control.

    194,    Check-Actuated Control Mechanisms, subclass 103 for weight testers
    associated with machines within the class.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 504+ for a conveyor having
    weighing or weight actuated means associated therewith.


CLS 209/646
TXT Orbiting or rotating carrier responsive to item weight:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 645 wherein an item is supported on an
    orbiting or rotating carrier responsive to weight of the item, as, for
    example, by being depressible to a particular level by a particular weight.


CLS 209/647
TXT Counterbalance on balance beam moved until beam tilts to item discharging
    position: Methods and apparatus under subclass 646 wherein said carrier
    comprises a balance beam on one end of which an item is supported and a
    counterbalance which is moved along said balance beam until it reaches a
    position at which the balance beam tilts to an item discharging position.


CLS 209/648
TXT Carrier tilted by means (e.g., trip, cam, etc.) adjacent travel path when
    depressed to particular elevation:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 646 wherein the item is discharged
    from the carrier when the latter is depressed by the item to a particular
    level and is caused to tilt by means located along its path of travel.


CLS 209/649
TXT Same items successively placed on means (e.g., balance beams, etc.)
    responsive to different weights:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 645 wherein items are successively
    placed on means responsive to different weights, as, for example, by being
    depressible by items of different weights.


CLS 209/650
TXT Item support swings about fixed horizontal axis to discharge at different
    vertically spaced points:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 645 including an item support which
    pivots about a fixed horizontal axis to discharge the item at different
    vertically spaced points depending on its weight.


CLS 209/651
TXT Pusher moving item on separate surface:
    Methods and apparatus under subclass 606 wherein items are separated from
    other items supported on the same surface by means of a selectively
    actuatable pusher.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 717+ for pusher-type conveyors.


CLS 209/652
TXT Pivotable:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 651 wherein said pusher pivots.


CLS 209/653
TXT Reciprocable:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 651 wherein said pusher reciprocates.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    652,    for an item separating pusher pivotally mounted on a reciprocating
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 736+ for a reciprocating type
    pusher conveyor.


CLS 209/654
TXT Rotatable:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 651 wherein said pusher rotates.


CLS 209/655
TXT Gravity-type conveyor (e.g., chute, etc.) movable between different
    discharge positions:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 606 wherein items are separated by a
    gravity conveyor movable to different positions at which different items
    are discharged.


CLS 209/656
TXT Movement of items along different paths controlled by passive deflector:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 606 wherein items are moved along
    different paths by selective engagement with a passive deflector such as a
    fixed bar or a nondriven roller.


CLS 209/657
TXT Deflector movable into and out of path of item:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 656 wherein said deflector is movable
    into and out of the path of an item.


CLS 209/658
TXT Deflector spaced above conveying means to pass item of particular size
    thereunder: Methods and apparatus under subclass 656 wherein said deflector
    is spaced above a conveying means on which items are supported, short items
    passing under the deflector and tall items striking it and being deflected
    thereby.


CLS 209/659
TXT Sorting items by size:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 606 for separating items into groups
    of different size.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233+,   for sifters for bulk material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 840+ for apparatus for sorting live
    animals by size.

    453,    Coin Handling, subclasses 3+ for machines which sort coins
    according to their size.


CLS 209/660
TXT Item of particular size passed through gauging passage between separate
    elements: Methods and apparatus under subclass 659 including separate
    elements spaced apart to provide therebetween a gauging passage through
    which an item of sufficiently small size passes to separate it from larger
    items.


CLS 209/661
TXT Gauging passage between stationary element (e.g., bar, slat, etc.) and
    orbiting belt: Methods and apparatus under subclass 660 wherein said
    passage is situated between a fixed element and an orbiting belt.


CLS 209/662
TXT Gauging passage between stationary element (e.g., bar, slat, etc.) and
    roller:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 660 wherein said passage is situated
    between a fixed element and a roller.


CLS 209/663
TXT Gauging passage between orbiting belt and roller or wheel:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 660 wherein said passage is situated
    between an orbiting belt and either a roller or a wheel.


CLS 209/664
TXT Gauging passage between elements of rotating cage:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 660 wherein said passage is situated
    between elements of a rotating cage, e.g., bars spaced apart
    circumferentially of the perimeter of a structure having the form of a
    circular treadmill.


CLS 209/665
TXT Gauging passage between elements of orbiting belt:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 660 wherein said passage is situated
    between elements of an orbiting belt, e.g., rollers extending transversely
    of such a belt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    622+,   for a belt having elements, such as transverse bars, which move
    away from one another as the belt travels to provide expanding gauging
    passages through which items of different size pass at different points
    along the orbital path of said belt.

    659,    for a belt formed of plural elements (e.g., rings) each of which
    alone provides a gauge opening but is not like a wall in structural form.

    681,    for an apron-type belt having a gauging aperture in the wall
    thereof.


CLS 209/666
TXT Item moves along curved gauging passage: Methods and apparatus under
    subclass 660 wherein an item moves along a curved gauging passage.

    (1)     Note.  Included here, inter alia, are rings spaced apart to provide
    a gauging passage therebetween, and a disk having its edge spaced from a
    curved bar.


CLS 209/667
TXT Gauging passage between rotatable elements: Methods and apparatus under
    subclass 660 wherein said passage is situated between rotatable elements.

    (1)     Note.  Includible here are (1) a gauge passage between two elements
    each rotating about an axis passing therethrough, and (2) a gauge passage
    between two elements rotating about an axis outside the elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, subclasses 35+ for
    nondriven rollerways.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 780+ for driven roller
    conveyors.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 209/668
TXT Element adjustable to change width of gauging passage:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 667 wherein at least one of said
    elements can be moved to vary the width of said passage.


CLS 209/669
TXT Helical roller:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 667 wherein at least one of said
    elements is a roller, the periphery of which is helical in form.


CLS 209/670
TXT Items move longitudinally of gauging passage varying in width along length
    thereof:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 667 wherein items move lengthwise of a
    tapered passage until they either pass therethrough or are rejected.


CLS 209/671
TXT Spindle or roller having projecting elements spaced circumferentially
    thereof: Methods and apparatus under subclass 667 wherein at least one of
    said elements is a shaft or roller having projecting elements such as tines
    spaced about the circumference thereof.


CLS 209/672
TXT Spindle or roller having axially spaced, flat-sided circumferential
    elements (e.g., flanges, disks, wheels, etc.) projecting therefrom:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 667 wherein at least one of said
    elements is a shaft or roller having flat-sided elements spaced apart
    axially thereon and extending circumferentially thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    361,    for flat vertical sifters which rotate about a horizontal axis and
    separate bulk materials.


CLS 209/673
TXT Cylindrical rollers:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 667 wherein said elements are rollers
    having substantially cylindrical peripheries.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    618,    for rollers which grip an item to carry it through a gap between
    the rollers.


CLS 209/674
TXT Gauging passage between moving elements (e.g., vibrating bars, slats, etc):

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 660 wherein said passage is situated
    between moving elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    393+,   for bar-type elements for sifting bulk material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, subclasses 87 and 90, respectively,
    for shaking table and walking rake type grain separators.


CLS 209/675
TXT Gauging passage between stationary elements (e.g., bars, slats, etc):

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 660 wherein said passage is situated
    between fixed elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    393+,   for bar-type elements for sifting bulk material.

    674,    for a gauging passage between moving elements, such as the bars of
    a vibrating screen.


CLS 209/676
TXT Element adjustable to change width of gauging passage:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 675 wherein at least one of said
    elements can be moved to vary the width of said passage.


CLS 209/677
TXT Items move longitudinally of elongate elements:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 675 wherein said elements are
    elongated and items move lengthwise thereof until they either pass through
    said passage or are rejected.


CLS 209/678
TXT With means moving, or regulating movement of, items along elements:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 677 including means for moving, or
    controlling movement of, items along said elements.


CLS 209/679
TXT Width of gauging passage varies:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 677 wherein the width of said passage
    varies.


CLS 209/680
TXT Item of particular size passed through gauging aperture in wall (e.g.,
    perforated panel, etc.):

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 659 including a wall having therein a
    gauging aperture through which an item of sufficiently small size passes to
    separate it from larger items.

    (1)     Note.  Generally a gauging aperture classifiable in this subclass
    is formed in a single piece of material. Separate plates joined together by
    welding are considered to be a single piece of material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233+,   for sifting apparatus for bulk material.

    660+,   for a gauging passage between separate elements, including separate
    pieces of material which contact along edge portions thereof but which are
    spaced apart between these contacting portions to provide therebetween an
    opening used as a gauging passage.


CLS 209/681
TXT Aperture in orbiting belt:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 680 wherein said aperture is in an
    orbiting belt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    307+,   for endless belt sifters.


CLS 209/682
TXT Aperture in chute or trough:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 680 wherein said aperture is in a
    chute or trough.


CLS 209/683
TXT Aperture in circumferential wall of hollow body (e.g., tube, etc.)
    rotatable about longitudinal axis thereof:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 680 wherein said aperture is in the
    circumferentially extending wall of a hollow body rotatable about its
    longitudinal axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44.3,   for drum-type sifters combined with separating apparatus within the
    class definition, but not included in subclasses 509 through 707.


CLS 209/684
TXT Item of particular size or shape enters pocket:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 659 including a pocket of such
    dimensions that an item of a particular size or shape may enter it and be
    retained for movement relative to an item which cannot fit into the pocket.


CLS 209/685
TXT On orbiting belt:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 684 wherein said pocket is on an
    orbiting belt.


CLS 209/686
TXT On exterior of drumlike body (e.g., roller, etc.) rotatable about
    longitudinal axis thereof:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 684 wherein said pocket is on the
    exterior of a drumlike body rotatable about its longitudinal axis.


CLS 209/687
TXT On interior of hollow drumlike body (e.g., tube, etc.) rotatable about
    longitudinal axis thereof:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 684 wherein said pocket is on the
    interior of a hollow drumlike body rotatable about its longitudinal axis.


CLS 209/688
TXT Means pierces, or enters preformed hole in, item:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 606 including means which pierces, or
    enters a preformed hole in, an item while another item is not so
    penetrated, this action effecting separation of the items.

    (1)     Note.  Means entering an item to convey it, after the item has been
    separated from other items, is not considered a separating means
    classifiable in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    532,    for a plug-type gauge which enters the neck opening of a bottle.

    619,    for a gauging element which enters a hole in an item.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 692+ for a conveyor having
    article impaling elements.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 213+ for impaling type discharge
    assistants, per se.


CLS 209/689
TXT Items separate by traveling in different directions while contacting
    drumlike body (e.g., roller, hollow cylinder, etc.) turning about
    longitudinal axis thereof: Methods and apparatus under subclass 606 wherein
    items separate by traveling in different directions on the
    circumferentially extending surface of a drumlike body turning about its
    longitudinal axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    686     and 687, for drums having item retaining pockets thereon.


CLS 209/690
TXT Items travel circumferentially and longitudinally of turning axis:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 689 wherein some items travel
    circumferentially of the axis of rotation of said body, while other items
    travel in the direction of said axis.


CLS 209/691
TXT Items separate by traveling in different directions while contacting same
    inclined surface of moving support:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 606 wherein items separate by
    traveling in different directions on an inclined surface of a moving
    support.


CLS 209/692
TXT Items contact inclined reach of orbiting belt:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 691 wherein said support is an
    inclined stretch of an orbiting belt.


CLS 209/693
TXT Item separating reach inclined only in direction of belt movement:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 692 wherein said belt stretch is
    inclined only in the direction of movement of the belt.


CLS 209/694
TXT Translating support:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 691 wherein said support translates.


CLS 209/695
TXT Items separate by traveling in different directions while contacting same
    horizontal surface of moving support:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 606 wherein items separate by
    traveling in different directions on a horizontal surface of a moving
    support.


CLS 209/696
TXT Items separate by traveling in different directions while contacting same
    inclined surface of static support:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 606 wherein items separate by
    traveling in different directions on an inclined surface of a fixed support.


CLS 209/697
TXT Helical ramp:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 696 wherein said support is helical in
    form.


CLS 209/698
TXT Means movable between horizontal item-supporting position and gravity
    discharge position:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 606 including means movable between a
    position wherein it is horizontal and supports an item and a position
    wherein the item is discharged therefrom by the force of gravity.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are (1) supports that swing downwardly to
    discharge an item, and (2) supports that move horizontally away from each
    other so that they are removed from supporting position under an item.


CLS 209/699
TXT Sorting items according to susceptibility to deform (e.g., malleability,
    hardness, compressibility, etc.), rupture, or vibrate:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 606 wherein items are separated
    according to their susceptibilities to deform, rupture, or vibrate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    599,    for sensing means responsive to the difference in the
    susceptibilities of different items to deform, rupture, or vibrate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 12.01+ for impact testing
    apparatus; subclasses 67+ for vibration testing apparatus; subclasses 78+
    for hardness detecting apparatus; subclasses 87+ for ductility or
    brittleness testing apparatus; and subclasses 760+ for stress or strain
    testing apparatus, particularly subclasses 788+ which include deformation
    testing due to a stress intentionally applied to the specimen.

    100,    Presses, subclass 91 for presses not elsewhere provided for and
    having additional means for removing one solid substance from another; and
    subclass 99 for presses not elsewhere classified and having a test means.


CLS 209/700
TXT Sorting items according to roughness or adhesiveness:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 606 wherein items are separated
    according to their roughness or adhesiveness.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 688+ for conveyor structure
    including means to enhance the adherence of a load to the conveyor.


CLS 209/701
TXT Item turned while traveling:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 606 wherein an item turns while
    traveling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    538,    for means which turns an item at a separating or inspecting station
    to facilitate separating the item from other items, the means not being a
    conveyor.

    540+,   for means which turn an item to a predetermined position as the
    item is traveling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 234+ for conveyor structure
    including means for orienting articles.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclass
    156 for dispensing apparatus including means for orienting dispensed
    articles.


CLS 209/702
TXT Manual sorting:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 606 wherein like items are separated
    from unlike items directly by hand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    614,    for hand supported sorting implements, such as a rake provided with
    a handgrip and used for removing nails of a particular size from an
    assortment of nails.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 64.1 for
    handling implements utilizing vacuum cup elements.


CLS 209/703
TXT Item supported on table or chute:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 702 wherein items are supported on a
    table or chute to facilitate their separation.


CLS 209/704
TXT Rotated about vertical axis:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 703 wherein said table or chute
    rotates about a vertical axis.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are rigid, rotatable platforms, usually
    annular or disk shaped.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    705,    for an orbiting belt-type carrier the article supporting surface of
    which is disposed in a horizontal plane, articles supported on the carrier
    being manually sorted by workers positioned beside the carrier.


CLS 209/705
TXT Item supported on orbiting or rotating carrier:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 702 wherein items are supported on an
    orbiting or rotating carrier to facilitate their separation.


CLS 209/706
TXT Specific compartment of receptacle brought into alignment with feed means
    by operator:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 606 including a receptacle having
    compartments which can be brought, under the control of an operator, into
    alignment with an item feeding means to thereby place different items in
    different compartments.


CLS 209/707
TXT Items separated by tipping, rolling, or sliding off support under force of
    gravity: Methods and apparatus under subclass 606 wherein certain items on
    a support are separated from other items by tipping, rolling, or sliding
    off the support under the force of gravity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    651+,   for means for pushing an item off a conveyor to separate it from an
    item left on the conveyor.


CLS 209/710
TXT Plural individual interconnected separation means having swirling currents:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 143 including multiple, discrete
    rotary stream creating separating phases to either (1) treat the total
    entrained or suspended material sequentially, (2) treat multiple fractions
    of the entrained or suspended material simultaneously, or (3) treat the
    entrained or suspended material by a combination of sequential and
    simultaneous operations, to promote deposition of entrained or suspended
    material from the gaseous suspension due to resultant centrifugal or
    centripetal forces.

    (1)     Note. Included in this subclass and those indented hereunder as a
    discrete separating phase is the feature of filtering a resultant gaseous
    suspension from a prior discrete separating phase to extract the entrained
    or suspended material therefrom and provide substantially purified gas for
    either release to the environs or for reuse.

    (2)     Note.  The preceding subclasses which involve gaseous suspension
    and deposition should be searched for the separation of entrained or
    suspended material subjected to a suspending and classifying action of an
    impinging gaseous current or a combination therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.1+,  for combinations of diverse types of separating operations
    including gaseous suspension separation.

    725+,   for analogous subject matter for liquid suspension separation. See
    (1) Note in Class 209 subclass 155.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, appropriate subclasses, for the complete removal of
    entrained or suspended material without separation into a plurality of
    grades or classes; especially, subclass 317 for a serial arrangement of
    plural gas separators including one separator having a rotating member;
    subclasses 342+ for combinations of distinct gas separators provided with
    individual inlets and outlets; and subclasses 401+ for arrangements of
    plural gas separator devices each having rotating members.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, appropriate subclasses, for methods
    involving the complete removal of entrained or suspended material without
    separation into a plurality of grades or classes; especially, subclasses
    267+ for gas separation processes involving deflection to create a swirling
    motion.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses, for
    analogous subject matter involving  indiscriminate solids removal from
    liquid suspension. See (3) Note in Class 209 subclass 132 and (1) Note in
    Class 209  subclass 155.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, appropriate subclasses, for delivering
    entrained or suspended material from a gaseous current conveyor.


CLS 209/711
TXT Fluidically induced, oppositely directed axial flows only (e.g., multiple
    cyclone arrangements, etc.):

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 710 wherein, in each of the separating
    phases, coaxial, counter traveling spiraling streams are established to
    effect separation of entrained or suspended material from the gaseous
    suspension into overflow and underflow fractions due to resultant
    centrifugal or centripetal forces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    728,    for analogous subject matter for liquid suspension separation. See
    (1) Note in Class 209 subclass 155.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 338+ for a continuous gas flow path with
    a recirculation of the separated gas to the inlet of the system; and
    subclasses 346+ for plural parallely connected gas separators each
    employing a rotary current. See (3) Note in Class 209 subclass 132.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 267+ for method of
    separation or purification of a gaseous suspension employing centrifugal or
    centripetal forces

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 512.2 for plural
    cyclonic devices for indiscriminately removing solids from a liquid
    suspension; and subclasses 787+ for a cyclonic process of liquid-solid
    separation. See (3) Note in Class 209 subclass 132.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclass 173 for a cyclone separator
    employed as a fluid conveyor outlet means.


CLS 209/712
TXT Serial arrangement:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 711 wherein a separated fraction from
    an upstream separating phase becomes an input of a subsequent separating
    phase.

    (1)     Note. The separated fraction is not restricted to an axially
    discharged fraction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    729,    for analogous subject matter for liquid suspension separation. See
    (1) Note in Class 209 subclass 155.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, appropriate subclasses, for indiscriminate removal
    of entrained or suspended material; particularly, subclasses 338+ for a
    continuous gas flow path with a recirculation of the separated gas to
    either (1) the inlet of the system or (2) to an inlet of one of the
    discrete separator devices in the serial arrangement; and subclass 345 for
    plural sequentially connected gas separators each employing a rotary
    current. See (3) Note in Class 209 subclass 132.


CLS 209/713
TXT Mechanically induced swirling:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 143 wherein a movable member creates a
    rotary stream to promote deposition of entrained or suspended material from
    the gaseous suspension due to resultant centrifugal or centripetal forces.

    (1)     Note. The preceding subclasses which involve gaseous suspension and
    deposition should be searched for the separation of entrained or suspended
    material subjected to a suspending and classifying action of an impinging
    gaseous current or a combination therewith.

    (2)     Note.  A fan, impeller or pump for the sole purpose of creating the
    material entrained or suspended current and not for effecting deflection to
    create the rotary stream is not proper for classification in this or the
    subclass indented hereunder. Such mechanical element, external to the
    separating means, is classifiable with the fluidically induced separation
    means of subclasses 711+ when employed in combination with a plurality of
    interconnected separation means or in an appropriate subclass subsequent
    hereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    710,    for a combination of plural rotary stream creating separating
    phases including a separating phase having a movable member.

    711+,   see (2) note supra.

    715+,   see (2) note supra.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, appropriate subclasses for indiscriminate removal
    of entrained or suspended material; particularly,  subclasses 400+ for a
    gas separation device including a movable means for assisting in removal of
    a constituent of a gaseous material flow; and subclasses 437+ for a gas
    separation device including means for effecting the gas flow.  See (3) Note
    in Class 209 subclass 132.

    95,     Gas Separation: Processes, subclass 270 for a gas separation
    process involving mechanical deflection to create a swirling motion. See
    (3) Note in Class 209 subclass 132.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 787+ for processes
    and subclass 512.3 for apparatus for indiscriminate removal of entrained or
    suspended material from a liquid suspension analogous hereto.


CLS 209/714
TXT Eduction rotor:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 713 wherein the movable member
    provides an egress path for a separated fraction.

    (1)     Note.  The movable member is usually coaxial to the rotary stream
    created but is not limited thereto. So-called ``air-sifters", not employing
    an impinging gaseous current, are classified here because the movable
    member provides an egress path for a separated fraction. See subclasses
    134+ for ``air-sifters" having a horizontally directed impinging current
    and subclasses 138+ for ``air-sifters" having a vertically directed
    impinging current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134+,   see (1) Note supra.

    138+,   see (1) Note supra.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 406+ for a gas separation device
    including a movable means for assisting in the separation and removal of a
    separated constituent of a gaseous material flow. See (3) Note in Class 209
    subclass 132.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclass 270 for a gas separation
    process involving mechanical deflection to create a swirling motion. See
    (3) Note in Class 209 subclass 132.


CLS 209/715
TXT Fluidically induced, oppositely directed axial flows (e.g., reverse
    free-vortexes formed, cyclone, etc.):

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 143 wherein coaxial, counter traveling
    spiraling streams are generated solely due to the configuration of the flow
    path to effect separation of entrained or suspended material from the
    gaseous suspension into overflow and underflow fractions due to resultant
    centrifugal or centripetal forces.

    (1)     Note.  The preceding subclasses which involve gaseous suspension
    and deposition should be searched for the separation of entrained or
    suspended material subjected to a suspending and classifying action of an
    impinging gaseous current or a combination therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.1+,  for combinations of diverse types of separating operations
    including gaseous suspension separation classifiable in this subclass or
    those indented hereunder.

    711+,   for plural, individual and distinct, interconnected  fluidically
    generated counter-current flow separator devices.

    727+,   for analogous subject matter for liquid suspension separation. See
    (1) Note in Class 209 subclass 155.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, appropriate subclasses, for indiscriminate removal
    of entrained or suspended material; particularly, subclasses 447+ for a gas
    separation device involving deflection of the gas flow by a static member
    to effect a separation. See (3) Note in Class 209 subclass 132.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 267+ for a gas separation
    process involving deflection to create a swirling motion. See (3) Note in
    Class 209 subclass 132.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 512.1+ for a cyclonic
    device for indiscriminate solids removal from a liquid suspension; and
    subclasses 787+ for a cyclonic process of liquid-solid separation. See (3)
    Note in Class 209 subclass 132.


CLS 209/716
TXT Including auxiliary fluid:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 715 provided with a secondary fluid to
    facilitate the deposition of a selective fraction.

    (1)     Note.  The secondary fluid may be either gaseous or liquid.

    (2)     Note.  The secondary fluid must be provided to enable or enhance
    the separation rather than operate as an input carrier fluid or as an
    output conveyance fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    730+,   for analogous subject matter for liquid suspension separation. See
    (1) Note in Class 209 subclass 155.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 235+ for a gas separation device
    including an introduced liquid; and subclasses 261+ for a gas separation
    device including an introduced secondary nonliquid material to affect the
    gas separation. See (3) Note in Class 209 subclass 132.


CLS 209/717
TXT Including inlet characteristic (e.g., helix, spiral, volute, etc.):

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 715  provided with a passage formation
    for directing the gaseous suspension to enter the separation device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    734,    for analogous subject matter for liquid suspension separation. See
    (1) Note in Class 209 subclass 155.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, appropriate subclasses, for indiscriminate removal
    of entrained or suspended material in gaseous suspension. See (3) Note in
    Class 209 subclass 132.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 267+ for a gas separation
    process involving deflection. See (3) Note in Class 209 subclass 132.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses, for
    analogous subject matter for indiscriminate liquid-solid separation. See
    (3) Note in Class 209 subclass 132.


CLS 209/718
TXT Guide vane:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 717 provided with a baffle member for
    directing the gaseous suspension to enter the separation device.

    (1)     Note.  The baffle member usually imparts spiraling motion to the
    suspension.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    734,    for analogous subject matter for liquid suspension separation. See
    (3) Note in Class 209 subclass 132.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclass 456 for a gas separator device including a
    helical vane or baffle for deflecting a gas flow. See (3) Note in Class 209
    subclass 132.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses, for
    analogous subject matter for liquid-solid separation. See (3) Note in Class
    209 subclass 132.


CLS 209/719
TXT Tangential:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 717 provided with a connection tangent
    to the separation device for directing the gaseous suspension into the
    separation device.

    (1)     Note.  A nominal recitation of tangential infeed is sufficient for
    classification in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    734,    for analogous subject matter involving liquid suspension. See (1)
    Note in Class 209 subclass 155.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 459.1+ for a gas separation device
    including a tangential inlet.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclass 271 for a gas separation
    method including tangential gas inflow.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 788 for processes and
    subclasses 512.1+ for apparatus for indiscriminate liquid-solid separation
    including tangential introduction. See (3) Note in Class 209 subclass 132
    and (1) Note in Class 209 subclass 155.


CLS 209/720
TXT Including specific underflow outlet feature (e.g., apex discharge, etc.):

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 715 provided with details of a passage
    formation for discharge of heavier or larger constituent that is contained
    in an outer spiraling stream.

    (1)     Note.  A nominal recitation of an underflow outlet without further
    particulars is not proper for classification in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    733,    for analogous subject matter involving liquid suspensions. See (1)
    Note in Class 209 subclass 155.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclass 435 for a gas separation device including
    wear liners or surface characteristics.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses, for
    analogous subject matter for liquid-solid separation. See (3) Note in Class
    209 subclass 132 and (1) Note in Class 209 subclass 155.


CLS 209/721
TXT Including specific overflow outlet feature (e.g., adjustable vortex finder,
    shape, size, etc.):

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 715 provided with details of a passage
    formation for discharge of lighter or smaller constituent that is contained
    in an inner spiraling stream.

    (1)     Note.  A nominal recitation of an overflow outlet or a vortex
    finder, per se, is not sufficient for proper classification in this
    subclass. However, a nominal recitation of an attribute of such overflow
    outlet or vortex finder is proper for classification in this subclass;
    e.g., a named ``vortex finder" is not proper for classification in this
    subclass whereas a named ``adjustable vortex finder" is properly classified
    in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    732,    for analogous subject matter involving liquid suspension.  See (1)
    Note in Class 209 subclass 155.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, appropriate subclass under subclasses 434+ for a
    gas separation device including outlet passage formations for purified gas.
    See (3) Note in Class 209 subclass 132.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 267+ for gas separation
    methods involving deflection. See (3) Note in Class 209 subclass 132

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 788 for processes and
    subclasses 512.1+ for apparatus for indiscriminate liquid-solid separation.
    See (3) Note in Class 209 subclass 132 and (1) Note in Class 209 subclass
    155.


CLS 209/722
TXT Fluidically induced unidirectional swirling (e.g., axial or radial or
    tangential separation, free-vortex, etc.):

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 143 wherein a rotary stream is
    generated solely due to the configuration of the flow path for movement in
    a continuous direction along or about the rotational axis from an inlet
    toward an outlet to promote deposition of entrained or suspended material
    due to resultant centrifugal or centripetal forces.

    (1)     Note.  The preceding subclasses which involve gaseous suspension
    and deposition should be searched for the separation of entrained or
    suspended material subjected to a suspending and classifying action of an
    impinging gaseous current or a combination therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.1+,  for combinations of diverse types of separating operations
    including gaseous suspension separation.

    710,    for plural, individual and distinct, fluidically induced
    unidirectional swirling separating means or a combination including other
    rotary stream gaseous suspension separating means.

    725,    for analogous subject matter involving liquid suspension
    separation. See (1) Note in Class 209 subclass 155.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 434+ for a gas separation device
    involving deflection of the gas flow to effect a separation. See (3) Note
    in Class 209 subclass 132 and (1) Note in Class 209 subclass 155.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 267+ for a gas separation
    process involving deflection to create a swirling motion. See (3) Note in
    Class 209 subclass 132 and (1) Note in Class 209 subclass 155.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses, for
    analogous subject matter for liquid-solid separation. See (3) Note  under
    Class 209 subclass 132 and (1) Note in Class 209 subclass 155.


CLS 209/723
TXT Plural extractions at diverse locations along flow path:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 722 wherein multiple fractions are
    withdrawn during the course of travel at discrete positions.

    (1)     Note.  The multiple fractions merely requires withdrawal at
    different positions rather than being distinct grades or classes separately
    collected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    710,    for plural, individual and distinct, interconnected fluidically
    induced unidirectional swirling separating means.

    725,    for analogous subject matter involving liquid suspension
    separation. See (1) Note in Class 209 subclass 155.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclass 452 for a gas separator device wherein a
    plurality of egress openings are provided in a whirl chamber. See (3) Note
    in Class 209 subclass 132.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses, for
    analogous subject matter for liquid-solid separation. See (3) Note in
    subclass 132 and (1) Note in Class 209 subclass 155.


CLS 209/724
TXT Including circularly flowing liquid separation agent:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 208 wherein material, as particulate,
    pulp, slurry or suspension, is delivered to a liquid assorting medium as
    either (1) a volumetric mass having a rotary movement or (2) as a swirling
    current to promote deposition due to resultant centrifugal or centripetal
    forces.

    (1)     Note.  The liquid assorting medium is usually water or an aqueous
    suspension.

    (2)     Note.  The moving liquid assorting medium is essential to the
    generation of centrifugal or centripetal forces, not merely additive or
    supplemental to any such forces generated by the material movement itself.
    Accordingly, the liquid assorting medium and the material must intersect,
    rather than travel coincidentally.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.1+,  for  combinations of diverse types of separating operations
    including liquid suspension separating operations; particularly subclasses
    13, 16, 17, and 18.

    133+,   for material acted upon by a gaseous assorting medium.

    155+,   for material acted upon by a linearly directed current of liquid
    assorting medium.

    172+,   wherein material is delivered to a static volumetric mass of liquid
    assorting medium for gravitational separation relative to the specific
    gravity of the liquid assorting medium (i.e., sink-float separation).

    725+,   particularly subclasses 730+ for centrifugal or centripetal force
    grading deposition of a liquid suspension including the use of additive or
    supplemental liquid which travels coincidentally with the liquid
    suspension. See (2) Note supra.


CLS 209/725
TXT Rotational hydrodynamic extraction (e.g.,  unidirectional hydrocyclone,
    vortical, whirlpool, etc.):

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 208 wherein a liquid suspension of
    material is caused to circulate about an axis creating sufficient
    centrifugal or centripetal forces to promote deposition of entrained or
    suspended material into respective grades or classes of solids.

    (1)     Note. Gravitational sedimentation from a circularly moving liquid
    suspension of material is included herein.

    (2)     Note.  See (1) Note in Class 209 subclass 155.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.1+,  for a combination of diverse types of separating operations
    including a liquid suspension separating operation.

    208,    for gravitational sedimentation from a linearly flowing liquid
    suspension of material.

    210,    wherein a mechanical deflector promotes the circulation of the
    liquid suspension.

    422+,   for methods and apparatus wherein one or more materials of liquid
    suspension of materials settles as a layer or layers. See (2) Note in Class
    209 subclass 132.

    710+,   for analogous subject matter involving gaseous suspension
    separations including plural, individual and distinct, interconnected
    separating means. See (1) Note in Class 209 subclass 155.

    722,    for analogous subject matter involving gaseous suspension
    separation. See (1) Note in Class 209 subclass 155.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, appropriate subclasses, for analogous subject
    matter for indiscriminate removal of solids from gaseous suspension. See
    (3) Note in Class 209 subclass 132.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 267+, for analogous methods
    for indiscriminate removal of solids from gaseous suspension. See (3) Note
    in Class 209 subclass 132.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 787+ for processes
    and subclasses 512.1+ for apparatus employing cyclonic or centrifugal force
    effects for indiscriminately removing solids from a liquid suspension. See
    (3) Note in Class 209 subclass 132.

    494,    Imperforate Bowl: Centrifugal Separators, appropriate subclasses
    wherein centrifugal force is generated by rapid rotation of a vessel
    containing liquid suspension.


CLS 209/726
TXT Including condition responsive control:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 725 wherein an operational parameter
    or status is sensed and a reactionary procedure is executed.

    (1)     Note.  The sensing and reactionary procedure features may be
    performed by a unitary device (e.g., check valve, etc.) or by distinct
    interconnected devices (e.g., pressure detector actuating a valve
    controller, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for a specifically provided, readily distinguishable body
    undergoing the separating operation used to indicate separating operation
    efficiency (e.g., coded tracers, tags, etc.).

    12.1+,  for combinations of diverse types of separating operations
    including liquid suspension separating, particularly subclasses 44.1+.

    548,    for halting operation of a separating operation as a result of
    sensing an abnormal or improper operational parameter or status. See (7)
    note of the class definition and subclass 509 definition including the
    notes appended thereto for the statement of classification control.

    549,    for actuation of a signal lamp or alarm in response to sensing an
    improper operational parameter or status. See (7) note of the class
    definition and subclass 509 definition including the notes appended thereto
    for the statement of classification control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 210+ for apparatus for analogous subject
    matter involving indiscriminate removal of solids from a gaseous
    suspension. See (3) Note in Class 209 subclass 132.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 1+ for analogous methods for
    indiscriminate removal of solids from gaseous suspension including
    condition responsive control. See (3) Note in Class 209 subclass 132.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 739+ for processes of
    indiscriminate removal of solids from a liquid suspension including
    condition responsive control. See (3) Note in Class 209 subclass 132.


CLS 209/727
TXT Including oppositely directed axial flows around evacuated core (e.g.,
    hydrocyclone having reverse free-vortexes formed, etc.):

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 725 wherein the liquid suspension of
    material circulation creates coaxial, counter traveling spiral currents
    about a reduced pressure or vacuum central region.

    (1)     Note. A named hydrocyclone exhibiting the required coaxial, counter
    traveling spiral currents is appropriate for classification in this
    subclass.

    (2)     Note.  A named hydrocyclone producing only a single vortex is
    classified in subclass 725.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    715,    for analogous subject matter involving a gaseous suspension of
    material. See (1) Note in Class 209 subclass 155.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 434+ for apparatus for analogous subject
    matter for the indiscriminate removal of solids from a gaseous suspension.
    See (3) Note in Class 209 subclass 132.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes,  appropriate subclasses, for analogous
    methods for indiscriminate removal of solids from gaseous suspension.  See
    (3) Note in Class 209 subclass 132.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 787+ for processes
    and subclasses 512.1+ for apparatus employing cyclonic or centrifugal force
    effects for indiscriminately removing solids from a liquid suspension.  See
    (3) Note in Class 209 subclass 132.


CLS 209/728
TXT Plural individual interconnected, oppositely directed axial flow producing
    separation phases (e.g., system arrangements, multiple hydrocyclones, etc.):

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 727 employing multiple, discrete
    separating means associated in an operative configuration wherein each
    separating means produces coaxial, counter traveling spiral currents about
    a reduced pressure or vacuum central region.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    710,    for analogous subject matter involving gaseous suspension
    separation. See (1) Note in Class 209 subclass 155.

    727,    for combinations of hydrodynamic extraction separation and a
    hydrocyclone separator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 346+ for plural parallely connected gas
    separators for indiscriminate solids removal from a gaseous suspension.
    See (3) Note  Class 209 subclass 132.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, appropriate subclasses, for analogous
    methods for indiscriminate removal of solids from gaseous suspension. See
    (3) Note in Class 209 subclass 132.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 787+ for processes
    and subclasses 512.1+ for apparatus employing cyclonic or centrifugal force
    effects for indiscriminately removing solids from a liquid suspension. See
    (3) Note in Class 209 subclass 132.


CLS 209/729
TXT Serially connected:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 728 wherein the total liquid
    suspension is treated sequentially through the multiple separating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    712,    for an analogous configuration employed for separating a gaseous
    suspension. See (1) Note in Class 209 subclass 155.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, appropriate subclasses for analogous subject matter
    involving indiscriminate removal of entrained or suspended material from a
    gaseous suspension; particularly, subclasses 338+ for a continuous gas flow
    path with a recirculation of the separated gas to either (1) the inlet of
    the system or (2) to an inlet of one of the discrete separator devices in
    the serial arrangement; and subclass 345 for plural sequentially connected
    gas separators each employing a rotary current. See (3) Note in Class 209
    subclass 132.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 787+ for processes
    and subclass 512.2 for apparatus employing plural cyclonic or centrifugal
    force effects for indiscriminately removing solids from a liquid
    suspension. See (3) Note Class 209 in subclass 132.


CLS 209/730
TXT Including auxiliary fluid (e.g., air or gas core, dilution water,
    elutriation liquid, etc.):

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 727 provided with a secondary fluid to
    facilitate the deposition of a select fraction of the liquid suspension.

    (1)     Note.  The secondary fluid may be either gaseous or liquid.

    (2)     Note.  The secondary fluid must be provided to enable or enhance
    the hydrodynamic extraction rather than merely operate as an input carrier
    fluid or as an output conveyance fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    716,    for analogous subject matter for gaseous suspension separation. See
    (1) Note in Class 209 subclass 155.

    724,    for grading deposition of a liquid suspension employing a
    circularly flowing liquid separation agent. See (2) note thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 235+ for a gas separation device
    including an introduced liquid; and subclasses 261+ for a gas separation
    device including an introduced secondary nonliquid material to affect the
    gas separation. See (3) Note in Class 209 subclass 132.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 787+ for process and
    subclasses 512.1+ for apparatus employing cyclonic or centrifugal force
    effects for indiscriminately removing solids from a liquid suspension. See
    (3) Note in Class 209 subclass 132.


CLS 209/731
TXT Adjacent or subsequent to underflow discharge (e.g., dilution water,
    elutriation liquid, sedimentation chamber, sump, etc.):

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 730 wherein the secondary fluid acts
    upon heavier or larger material carried in an outer spiraling current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    733,    for particular underflow discharge features without the
    introduction of secondary fluid. See (2) Note therein.


CLS 209/732
TXT Including specific overflow discharge feature (e.g., adjustable vortex
    finder, shape, size, etc.):

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 727 having details of the passage
    formation for egress of lighter or smaller material carried in an inner
    spiraling current.

    (1)     Note.  A mere recitation of an overflow discharge without further
    attribute is not proper for classification in this subclass. However, the
    mere naming of a further attribute is sufficient to attain classification
    in this subclass; e.g., a named ``vortex finder" is not proper for
    classification in this subclass whereas a named ``adjustable vortex finder"
    is properly classified in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    721,    for analogous subject matter involving gaseous suspension
    separation. See (1) Note in Class 209 subclass 155.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, appropriate subclasses, for analogous subject
    matter for indiscriminate removal of solids from a gaseous suspension. See
    (3) Note in  Class 209 subclass 132.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses, for
    indiscriminate removal of solids from a liquid suspension. See (3) Note in
    Class 209 subclass 132.


CLS 209/733
TXT Including specific underflow discharge feature (e.g., apex construction,
    secondary vortex chamber,  etc.):

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 727 having details of the passage
    formation for the egress of heavier or larger material carried in an outer
    spiraling current.

    (1)     Note.  A mere recitation of an underflow discharge without any
    further attribute is not proper for classification in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The inclusion of secondary fluid acting upon the underflow
    discharge is not proper for classification in this subclass but rather
    belongs in subclass 731.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    731,    see (2) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, appropriate subclasses, for analogous subject
    matter for indiscriminate removal of solids from a gaseous suspension. See
    (3) Note in Class 209 subclass 132.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses, for
    indiscriminate removal of solids from a liquid suspension. See (3) Note in
    Class 209 subclass 132.


CLS 209/734
TXT Including specific inlet feature (e.g., shape, size, etc.):

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 727 having details of a passage
    formation for delivering the liquid suspension.

    (1)     Note.  The mere recitation of a particular infeed feature, such as
    a ``tangential", without further attribute is not proper for classification
    in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    717+,   for analogous subject matter involving gaseous suspension
    separation. See (1) Note in Class 209 subclass 155.

    724,    for passage formation details when delivering material, as
    particulate, pulp, slurry or suspension, to a circularly flowing liquid
    separation agent.

    725,    for passage formation details when feeding the liquid suspension in
    a manner to create a swirling current without the creation of coaxial,
    counter traveling spiral currents.

    730+,   for secondary fluid passage formation details.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 209/900
TXT SORTING FLAT-TYPE MAIL:

    Methods and apparatus for sorting flat mail such as letter envelopes.


CLS 209/901
TXT FROTH FLOTATION; COPPER:

    Froth flotation methods of separating copper from an ore.


CLS 209/902
TXT FROTH FLOTATION; PHOSPHATE:

    Froth flotation methods of separating phosphate from an ore.


CLS 209/903
TXT FEEDER CONVEYOR HAVING OPPOSED GRIPPERS:

    Feed conveyors which hold articles by clamping them between opposed
    gripping elements thereon.


CLS 209/904
TXT FEEDER CONVEYOR HOLDING ITEM BY MAGNETIC ATTRACTION:

    Feeder conveyors which hold articles by magnetic attraction.


CLS 209/905
TXT FEEDER CONVEYOR HOLDING ITEM BY SUCTION:

    Feed conveyors which hold articles by suction.


CLS 209/906
TXT PNEUMATIC OR LIQUID STREAM FEEDING ITEM:

    Means for feeding an item by use of gaseous or liquid streams.


CLS 209/907
TXT MAGNETIC FEEDER:

    Means employing magnetic force to feed an article.


CLS 209/908
TXT ITEM FED BY FREE FALL:

    Feeding of articles by permitting them to drop freely through space.


CLS 209/909
TXT ITEM HOLDING FEED MAGAZINE INSERTABLE IN SORTING APPARATUS:

    Sorting apparatus with a magazine removably attachable thereto for feeding
    articles.


CLS 209/910
TXT FEED HOPPER:

    Apparatus having a hopper for feeding articles.


CLS 209/911
TXT FEED MEANS SUPPORTING OR GUIDING ITEM MOVING UNDER INFLUENCE OF GRAVITY:

    Chutes and other gravity-type conveyors for feeding articles under the
    force of gravity.


CLS 209/912
TXT ENDLESS FEED CONVEYOR WITH MEANS FOR HOLDING EACH ITEM INDIVIDUALLY:

    Loop-type feed conveyors on which articles are held in separate relation.


CLS 209/913
TXT SCREW FEED CONVEYOR:

    Feed conveyors of helical form.


CLS 209/914
TXT DIVERSE SEQUENTIAL FEEDING STEPS:

    Apparatus in which different types of article feeding operations are
    employed in succession.


CLS 209/915
TXT CENTRIFUGAL FEEDER:

    Means employing centrifugal force to feed an article.


CLS 209/916
TXT RECIPROCATING PUSHER FEEDING ARTICLE:

    Feed conveyors which reciprocate and push the conveyed articles along
    separate support means.


CLS 209/917
TXT ENDLESS BELT PUSHER FEEDING ITEM:

    Feed conveyors in the form of endless belts which push the conveyed
    articles, either by direct contact of the belts with the articles or
    through separate pushing elements attached thereto.


CLS 209/918
TXT SWINGING OR ROTATING PUSHER FEEDING ITEM:

    Feed conveyors which pivot or rotate and push the conveyed articles along
    separate support means.


CLS 209/919
TXT ROTARY FEED CONVEYOR:

    Feed conveyors in the form of rotatable supports such as disks.


CLS 209/920
TXT VIBRATORY FEED CONVEYOR:

    Feed conveyors which vibrate.


CLS 209/921
TXT RECIPROCATING OR OSCILLATING FEED CONVEYOR:

    Feed conveyors which move back and forth, either by reciprocating or
    swinging.


CLS 209/922
TXT MISCELLANEOUS FEED CONVEYORS:

    Feed conveyors not includible in other cross-reference collections of this
    class.


CLS 209/923
TXT FEED TROUGH INCLUDING AT LEAST ONE ENDLESS CONVEYOR:

    Feed means including a channel in which at least one endless conveyor is
    operated.


CLS 209/924
TXT GRAVITY CONVEYOR MOVING ITEM FROM SEPARATING STATION:

    Apparatus in which a gravity conveyor moves articles away from a point
    where they have been separated from other articles.


CLS 209/925
TXT DRIVEN OR FLUID CONVEYOR MOVING ITEM FROM SEPARATING STATION:

    Apparatus in which a driven conveyor or fluid stream moves articles away
    from a point where they have been separated from other articles.


CLS 209/926
TXT SILVERWARE SORTER:

    Apparatus for sorting knives, forks, and spoons used in dining.


CLS 209/927
TXT COP SORTER:

    Apparatus for sorting cops used in textile manufacture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, subclasses 164+ for the combination of sorting means with
    machines for feeding screw, nut, nail blanks or stock to machines for
    making articles of Class 470 within the sorting involves separating
    finished article from imperfect work or chips.


CLS 209/928
TXT CONTAINER CLOSURE SORTER:

    Apparatus for sorting closures which seal containers, e.g., bottle caps.


CLS 209/929
TXT FASTENER SORTER:

    Apparatus for sorting fasteners such as nails, pins, screws, etc.


CLS 209/930
TXT MUNICIPAL SOLID WASTE SORTING:

    Apparatus for sorting trash, e.g., separating metal or glass containers
    from waste paper.


CLS 209/931
TXT MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION:

    Sorting apparatus having a component formed of a particular material to
    enhance its operational efficiency.


CLS 209/932
TXT FLUID APPLIED TO ITEMS:

    Apparatus in which a fluid, such as water or air, is contacted with items
    being sorted.


CLS 209/933
TXT ACCUMULATOR RECEIVING SEPARATED ITEMS:

    Sorting apparatus having means for accumulating in a particular place items
    separated from other items.


CLS 209/934
TXT MOVING ITEMS TO SORTING MEANS IN SPACED RELATION LENGTHWISE OF FEED PATH:

    Means for feeding items to a sorting apparatus so that they arrive at a
    sorting means one after another with a space therebetween along the feed
    path.


CLS 209/935
TXT AMBULANT:

    Sorting apparatus having wheels or other means which enables it to be moved
    readily to different places.


CLS 209/936
TXT PLURAL ITEMS TESTED AS GROUP:

    Apparatus in which a plurality of items are simultaneous tested for some
    characteristic used as a basis for sorting.


CLS 209/937
TXT LAUNDRY SORTING:

    Apparatus for sorting laundry.


CLS 209/938
TXT ILLUMINATING MEANS FACILITATING VISUAL INSPECTION:

    Means for directing light onto items so that they can be more readily
    inspected for sorting.


CLS 209/939
TXT VIDEO SCANNING:

    Sorting apparatus in which a television system transmits a view of items to
    a person such as an operator.


CLS 209/940
TXT NONCONDITION RESPONSIVE SORTING BY CONTOUR:

    Apparatus which sorts items into different groups in accordance with the
    shape thereof, without utilizing a condition responsive type sensor which
    controls a separating means.


CLS 209/941
TXT ITEM CARRYING BRIDGE RAISABLE TO EXPOSE DISCHARGE OPENING:

    Item separating means comprising a bridge movable between a first position
    wherein items travel thereover and a second raised position wherein a
    discharge opening is uncovered to receive items.


CLS 209/942
TXT OPERATOR SELECTS DESTINATION OF ITEM:

    Sorting apparatus in which an item is directed to different destinations
    under the control of an operator.


CLS 210/
TTL LIQUID PURIFICATION OR  SEPARATION

CLS 210/
TXT

    I.      STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    This is the primary class for patents directed to treating water or waste
    liquid, and when not more specifically provided for, the class for patents
    directed to treating liquids in general or of any kind and provides (1)
    process and apparatus for (a) separating a component from (b) purifying or
    (c) effecting a change in water or waste liquid, such process or apparatus
    not being more specifically provided for in another class; (2) process of
    treating liquids in general and treating liquid compositions of either
    general or diverse utilities; (3) apparatus not provided for in other
    classes, for performing the foregoing processes and treating liquids of any
    kind; (4) filter materials or compositions peculiar to the above-mentioned
    processes; and (5) Processes for purification of liquids containing
    hazardous or toxic waste to produce a nonhazardous or nontoxic product.

    II.     GLOSSARY

    The meaning to be given various "Art" terms appearing in this class, but
    which have not been included in the GLOSSARY below, is the same as that
    generally accepted or in common usage.

    ABSORB

    See SORB.

    ACCELERATOR

    Agent which promotes an action, but does not necessarily cause the action.
    An example is a catalyst as contrasted with a reactant.  In subclasses 696+
    and 702+ no distinction is made between an agent which promotes or one
    which causes and a search for a compound used as a flocculant is the same
    as if the compound reacted to cause precipitation.

    ACTIVATED SLUDGE

    Common term for an aerobic process of treating sewage with micro-organisms
    in which part of the settled sludge from the treatment is diverted and
    introduced into the feed of incoming sewage.

    ADDITIVE

    An agent added to a liquid being treated to either cause a desired result
    or to promote a result which would occur more slowly or incompletely
    without the additive.  Catalysts filter aids, chemical agents, seeding
    agents, buffers are all additives.

    ADSORB

    See SORB.

    AEROBIC

    Treating liquids, generally sewage, with micro-organisms in the presence of
    oxygen generally supplied as air or other source of oxygen but sometimes
    using residual dissolved oxygen.  Best known method is "activated sludge".
    The micro-organisms convert noxious materials to less noxious stuff, e.g.,
    to water, methane, nitrogen oxides, carbon dioxide.

    ALGAECIDE

    Any material capable of inhibiting or destroying algal growth.

    ANAEROBIC

    Treating liquids, generally sewage by micro-organisms which change noxious
    stuff to innocuous materials, in the absence of oxygen.  Some solids are
    made into water and gases as methane, carbon monoxide, etc. A septic tank
    is an example of anaerobic digestion of sewage.

    ANGSTROM

    A unit of length used to measure wavelength of lights and diameters of
    atoms or molecules.

    Designated by A and equal to 10-8cm.

    AQUEOUS

    A liquid containing water.  Generally water is the major part as in blood,
    brine, milk, etc., but may comprise a substantial but not major portion as
    in a water-alcohol mixture of various proportions.  Usually trace amounts
    of water are not considered aqueous.

    BACTERICIDE

    Any material capable of inhibiting or destroying bacteria.

    BRACKISH

    Somewhat salty, but substantially less so than sea water.

    BRINE

    A relatively concentrated salt water solution sometimes from wells or
    industrial sources and including sea water.

    CENTRIFUGE

    A process or means in which a liquid is revolved about an axis at such a
    number of revolutions per unit of time that the apparent weight of
    constituents increases to a point where the constituents tend to
    concentrate in strata similar to gravity-induced separation based on
    relative densities.

    CHROMATOGRAPHY

    A process in which a liquid is flowed along a linear path comprising a
    sorbent, with which the liquid competes in affinity for a constituent of
    the liquid.  The constituent is sorbed from the moving liquid by the
    relatively immobile sorbent and redissolved by a later passing portion of
    the liquid until an equilibrium of the sorbing-dissolving step is set up
    causing the constituent to concentrate in a specific volume of the sorbent
    and to move along the path of the liquid at a slower rate than such liquid.

    A comprehensive treatise on chromatography is to be found in Kirk-Othmer
    Encyclopedia of Chemical Technology 2nd ed. Vol. 5, pp. 413-450.

    COALESCE

    The merging together of small droplets or particles of a material or
    constituent dispersed in a liquid to form larger bodies of the material or
    constituent which may be more easily handled.

    COLLOIDAL

    A state of very fine division of a material dispersed throughout a liquid
    almost to the point of a true solution and either impossible or extremely
    difficult to filter or cause to settle.

    CONDUCTIVITY WATER

    An extremely pure water characterized by high ohmic resistance due to very
    low rate of ionization.  See POLISHING.

    CYCLONE

    A device using centrifugal force to separate.  The process is called
    cyclonic; see centrifuge.

    DESALINATION

    The process of removing inorganic salts, most usually sodium chloride, from
    water.

    DIALYSATE

    See DIALYSIS.

    DIALYSIS

    A process of separating a dissolved constituent from a liquid by transport
    or migration from the liquid through a membrane into a second liquid.  The
    membrane may be semipermeable or the second liquid may have greater
    affinity for the constituent but the net effect of the combined
    membrane-extracting liquid is to selectively remove a constituent from the
    first liquid. The process is provided for in subclasses 644+.  An in-depth
    explanation is given in Kirk Othmer Encyclopedia of Chemical Technology 2nd
    ed. Vol. 7, pp. 1-20.  Dialysate is the product of a dialysis method and
    the term is not always used for the same product, including retentate and
    diffusate.

    DIFFUSATE

    The material passed through in a diffusing process.

    DIFFUSE

    The passing of a constituent through a membrane or septum.

    DIGEST

    Process in which material is acted upon by micro-organisms to cause a
    chemical change. The composting of sludge is a digestion process.

    DISPERSION

    A mixture of a liquid with an insoluble material in very fine subdivision
    almost but not quite a true solution.

    EFFLUENT

    The liquids flowing out of a process, normally the mainstream, can be
    either a desired product or discard.

    FEED

    The liquid to be treated, prior to processing.

    FILTER

    Method of and apparatus for removing solid particles from a liquid by
    passing the same through a medium with openings smaller than the particles.
     Microfiltration is filtration down to coolidal and polymeric molecular
    size.  Ultrafiltration and hyperfiltration are more likely transport or
    diffusion across a membrane process but are called filtration down to
    molecular and ionic size.  See subclasses 650 and 652.

    FILTER ELEMENT

    Filter medium combined with supporting structure or having a specified
    shape.

    FILTER MEDIUM

    Solid separating material or member for separating a constituent from the
    prefilt due to openings between material particles or in the member.

    FILTRATE

    Liquid which has been clarified by passing it through a filter medium.

    FILTRATION

    The separation of solids from a liquid or a liquid from liquids by a solid
    separating medium due to openings in the medium or between discrete
    particles.

    FLOC

    Flocculated clumps of suspended or dispersed small particles resulting from
    accretion and used as sites for further accretion of suspended matter.  See
    subclass 715.

    FLOCCULATION

    A clumping together of finely divided particles of material dispersed in a
    liquid to a state where filtration or settling of the material is possible.
     See subclasses 702+.

    FLUID

    Material that flows, generally gas or liquid but sometimes including
    mixtures of these with particulate solids such as slurry, sludge, gels,
    etc.  Some materials are thixatropic, i.e., fluid when agitated but
    jellylike when at rest.  Pumpable sludge is considered a liquid for
    treatment in this class.

    FOULING

    The act of depositing on the membrane surface something which will impede
    its proper functioning.  Sometimes also termed "blinding".

    GEL

    A colloidal dispersion of a solid in a liquid with a jellylike texture.
    Use of a gel in chromatography is in subclass 635, and separating the
    constituents of a gel are in subclass 702.

    GRAVITY, BY

    A separation process depending on differences in density to separate freely
    movable constituents such as cream rising to the top of the milk.  Draining
    or allowing a liquid to drip from solids held by a screen or grid is not
    gravity separation.

    HYDROPHILIC

    Water attractive or wettable.

    HYDROPHOBIC

    Water-repellent or nonwettable.

    HYPERFILTRATION

    Filtration to the ultimate degree to molecular or ionic size, but most
    likely membrane transport or diffusion phenomenon. See FILTER and subclass
    652.

    IMHOFF

    A two-story septic tank of special design to allow digestion of sludge in
    lower chamber with settling in upper chamber and passage of settled sludge
    from upper to lower chamber.  Process is anaerobic and provided for in
    subclasses 602+.

    INERT MATERIAL

    Stuff that does not cause or promote any change in liquid or component
    being treated.  May act as filler, support, or carrier for active material.
     See subclass 679.

    LIQUID

    A flowable material comprising at least one component that is a true liquid
    under the conditions of treatment.  A slurry, wet sludge, pumpable
    sediment, emulsion, froth, all are considered liquid for treatment in this
    class.

    MAINSTREAM

    The main body of liquid being treated as constrasted with separated
    constituents. The mainstream may comprise several divided streams, some of
    which undergo treatment and which are a substantial part of the overall
    feed but a relatively small stream diverted for a dosing technique in which
    agents are added in a concentrated amount and the diverted stream is
    diluted with the main body is not considered to be the mainstream, per se.
    A recirculated portion of the stream is not considered to be the mainstream.

    MEMBRANE

    A skinlike thin film which acts as a barrier or container wall; the usual
    form of a permeable or semipermeable septum.  A semipermeable membrane is a
    skinlike, relatively thin film which serves to define a barrier or
    container wall to at least one of the constituents of a solution or
    colloidal suspension and allows at least one other constituent to pass
    through by a mechanism which may include but goes beyond mere straining and
    which mechanism is in part due to differences in behavior of the
    constituents of the solution or suspension with respect to the material of
    the membrane.  The constituents vary in their ability to diffuse through or
    to wet the membrane.

    Membranelike includes mambrane, per se, and material which, while not
    strictly in a self-supporting skinlike structure, functions in an analogous
    manner and includes a layer of fine particulate matter or an emulsion as
    set out in subclass 643.

    A process which depends only on the relative size of pores and molecules or
    ions of a constituent is a filtering or straining process and is classified
    under separation, subclass 767.

    MICRON

    A linear measurement equal to one millionth of a meter, one thousandth of a
    mm, 39 millionths of an inch.

    MICRO-ORGANISM

    Living plants or animals of a size normally visible only through a
    microscope and includes bacteria, yeast, fungi, and virus. For purposes of
    this class, algae are not considered micro-organisms.  The scope of this
    term is coextensive with the organisms of Class 435, Molecular Biology and
    Microbiology.

    MICROFILTER

    See FILTER.

    MOLECULAR SIEVE

    A sorbent with an extremely large volume of pores, each of about molecular
    size, capable of selectively sorbing gases and other material in molecular
    form; generally of Zeolite.

    OIL

    Organic material of slick or slippery feel including long chain
    hydrocarbons esters of higher fatty acid and derived from petroleum, fats,
    greases, and oils of animal or vegetable origin.

    OLEOPHILIC

    Oil attractive or wettable by oil.

    OLEOPHOBIC

    Oil repelling.

    OSMOSIS

    Phenomenon in which solvent migrates or is transported across a barrier
    from a less concentrated solution to a more concentrated solution separated
    by the barrier tending to equalize the concentrations.  The force driving
    the solvent is dependent on the materials of the liquids and the barrier or
    septum, and a counter force of greater magnitude will effect reverse
    migration or reverse osmosis causing solvent to migrate from the more
    concentrated to the less concentrated solution.  A comprehensive treatise
    on osmosis and reverse osmosis is given in Kirk-Othmer Encyclopedia of
    Chemical Technology 2nd ed. Vol. 14, pp. 345-355.

    OXIDANT

    An agent which extracts electrons from a chemical moiety and increases its
    positive or decreases its negative valence.  Often an oxygen or halogen
    containing material.

    PERMEABLE

    Property of allowing passage or migration of other material through a
    barrier or septum of the material so designated.  The migration phenomenon
    is due primarily to the chemical nature of the materials involved and may
    include molecular weight or size as a factor.

    PERMEATE

    Material which has passed through a permeable or semipermeable membrane.

    pH

    The measure of the acidity or basicity (alkalinity) of a liquid.  Also
    determines the sweetness or sourness of a liquid.  The original value was
    the log of the reciprocal of the hydrogen ion concentration.

    POLISHING

    An ion exchange process in which the ions released to the liquid are only
    H+ and OH-.  A method of achieving very pure water.  See CONDUCTIVITY WATER.

    PREFILT

    Material to be filtered, also known as feed, influent, intake.

    RESIDUE

    Material retained by membrane, septum, filter, settling tank, etc.

    RETENTATE

    Material held back by membrane or filter, not allowed to migrate or pass
    through.

    REVERSE OSMOSIS

    See OSMOSIS.

    SEMIPERMEABLE

    Permeable to only some of materials which may be in intimate association as
    in a solution.  Usually applied to membrane, see MEMBRANE.

    SLUDGE

    Concentrate of settled colloidal suspension with a mushy or mud texture, a
    gel with up to more than 90 percent usually water) but quite viscous.  It
    may contain indiscriminate solids as grits, fiber, wood chip, and
    emulsions.  While still wet, treatment is proper for this class, but the
    same material when completely dry may be referred to as sludge.  See
    ACTIVATED SLUDGE.

    SORB, SORBING

    The attracting by a solid material of a liquid wherein the liquid permeates
    the body of the solid, either in pores or throughout the material itself or
    of a finely divided constituent, suspended or dissolved in a liquid, on the
    surface of or in pores of the material.  Examples of the former are methods
    using sponges, mops, and pads and of the latter are methods using activated
    charcoal clays and zeolites.  In this class, no distinction is made between
    absorption and adsorption.  Processes using sorption for separation are
    provided for in subclasses 660+.  See Kirk-Othmer Encyclopedia of Chemical
    Technology 2nd ed. Vol. 1, pp. 44-75 and 421-469.

    SUSPENSION

    Liquid carrying throughout its volume in extremely fine subdivision an
    insoluble substance (solid or another liquid) which will not settle under
    gravity nor can be filtered without special treatment such as addition of
    chemical agents.  A DISPERSION.   See FLOCCULATION, GEL, and MEMBRANE.

    SYNTHETIC

    A material not found in nature, but man-made from chemical building blocks,
    with properties resembling naturally occurring materials.  It does not
    include man-made duplicates of natural material or chemical modified
    natural materials.  For example, regenerated cellulose and cellulose
    acetate are not included nor is zein, but polyester, vinyl, and nylon are
    included.

    TRICKLING FILTER

    A particulate bed of designed coarseness through which liquid is gravity
    fed at a rate to maintain relatively thin films on the particles and
    enhance air liquid contact to promote aerobic treatment of the liquid.  An
    alternate method may be programmed flooding and draining of the bed.  The
    treatment using such a bed is in subclasses 616+.

    ULTRAFILTRATION

    Filtration of a solution or colloid, retaining a constituent of
    macromolecule dimension.  See FILTRATION and MEMBRANE.

    VAPOR

    A normally liquid material in a gaseous state, e.g., steam.  Separating or
    purifying a fluid in the gaseous state is proper for Class 55, Gas
    Separation, but treating a liquid with gaseous constituents is provided for
    in subclasses 603+, 640, 664, 707, 718, and 750, and see the line note to
    Class 55 in the class definition of section III, C.

    WASTE

    A liquid that is to be discarded.  The term includes effluent from domestic
    or industrial sources, e.g, sewage wash water spent processing fluids,
    etc., and refers to liquid to be treated and liquid which has been treated
    to allow discharge to the environment.

    III.    CLASS LINES WITH, AND SEARCH NOTES TO, OTHER CLASSES

    A.      General Guidelines

    1.      Placement of Patents

    (a)     A claim directed to the production, regeneration, or purification
    of a particular compound or composition (including) solutions in water is
    classified with the particular compound or composition.  The classes
    providing for these compounds or compositions are set out in section III,
    B, 2.

    A claim directed to purification or separation of water or of liquids in
    general with disclosure of several species each differently classifiable is
    classified in this class (210).

    (b)     In classifying a claim to a combined process in which a liquid
    (e.g., sewage, etc.) is treated, and a useful by-product, energy or
    treatment is also recovered or achieved, placement is in Class 210 where
    the primary purpose is liquid treatment and the by-product, energy or other
    treatment is incidental. Placement is in the other pertinent class if the
    liquid treatment is incidental to the other process.  If it cannot be
    determined which is the primary purpose of the combined process, placement
    is in the appropriate chemical class(es) when a chemical by-product is
    recovered and in this class (210) in all other instances.

    Since the identical combined process may be placed as an original in either
    of two classes, based on intent of the inventor, a cross-reference copy
    should be placed in the other class involved.

    See section III, A, 2 infra, for exceptions to the general rule here stated.

    2.      Specific Exceptions.

    (a)     Class 95, Gas Separation:  Processes, will take a process including
    a liquid separation step in a Class 95 operation (e.g., regenerating a
    scrubbing liquid in a gas scrubbing operation, etc.).

    (b)     A purely physical separation, e.g., filtering, specifically
    directed to mineral oil, is classified in this class (210), subclasses 767+.

    (c)     A claim to a process of drying a flowable slurry or mass by
    physical separation, e.g., centrifuging without a step or means of
    contacting with a gas, is in this class (210) rather than Class 34.  See
    line note to Class 210 in (3) Note to Class 34 definition.

    (d)     Some classes which provide for compositions which may be used in a
    Class 210 process may also take a claim to a mere use of such composition.
    These classes include 424 and 521 and the line notes in section III, C set
    out the conditions which govern placement of patents in these circumstances.

    (e)     The rehabilitation or regeneration of a filter medium, in situ is
    classified in this class (210), subclasses 791+, rather than in Class 134,
    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids.

    (f)     Separating liquids by direct application of electrolysis or
    electric force to the liquid, alone or combined with a step provided for in
    subclasses 767+, is classified in Class 204, Chemistry:  Electrical and
    Wave Energy.

    B.      Classes Providing for Related Subject Matter.

    1.      Classes providing a specific unit  operation treatment of liquids.

    ANALYZING:

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 1+ and
    129.2+.



    BURNING:

    110,    Furnaces.

    431,    Combustion.



    CHLORINATING:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, especially
    subclasses 661+.



    CONDENSING:

    62,     Refrigeration.

    165,    Heat Exchange.



    CRYSTAL FORMING, SINGLE:

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor.



    CRYSTALLIZATION:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 66+ and 532+.



    DEGASSING:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, especially subclasses 241+.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, especially subclasses 155+.

    DISINFECTING:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 1-43.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions.



    DISPENSING:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means.

    222,    Dispensing.



    DISTILLING:

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory.



    DRINKING STORAGE:

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 66+.



    ELECTROLYSIS:

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, appropriate subclasses for a process involving
    electrolysis.  See section III of the Class 204 definition for an
    elaboration of the class line between Class 204 (which encompasses Class
    205) and Class 210.



    EMULSIFYING:

    252,    Compositions, various subclasses based on function of emulsion and
    subclasses 302+.



    EVAPORATING:

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclasses 47.1+

    FLUORIDATING:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 56+.



    FREEZING:

    62,     Refrigeration, especially subclasses 56+.



    HANDLING:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 1+.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing.



    HEATING:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers.

    165,    Heat Exchange.

    219,    Electric Heating.

    432,    Heating.



    MAGNETIZING:

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices.



    MIXING:

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 2+ and 348.



    PRESERVING:

    53,     Package Making.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses
    380+.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 1+.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products.

    REFRIGERATING:

    62,     Refrigeration.

    165,    Heat Exchange.



    SEPARATING, CENTRIFUGALLY:

    494,    Imperforate Bowl:  Centrifugal Separators.



    SOFTENING:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses
    175+.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 13 and 14+.



    SPRINKLING, SPRAYING, DIFFUS-

    ING:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 1+.



    STERILIZING:

    250,    Radiant Energy.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 1+.

    424     and 514, Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating       Compositions,
    especially Class 424, subclasses 127+ and Class 514, subclasses 1+.



    STORAGE:

    53,     Package Making.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing.

    426,    Food or Edible Material: Processes, Compositions, and Products.



    TESTING:

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, subclasses  230+.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, especially subclasses 32+, 53+, 149,
    170.29+, 861+, 290+, Dig. 5+, and Dig. 8.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, appropriate subclasses for a process involving
    electrolysis, especially subclasses 775+ for electrolytic analysis or
    testing.  See section III of the Class 204 definition for an elaboration of
    the class line between Class 204 (which encompasses Class 205) and Class
    210.

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, especially subclasses 29+, 71+,
    204, 425+, and 459+.



    TRANSPORTING:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 1+.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluent Current.



    2.      Classes providing treatment of a specific liquid.



    BEVERAGE:

    426,    Food or Edible Material Processes, Compositions, and Products.



    BLACK LIQUOR:

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation.



    CLEANING FLUID:

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses, especially subclasses 285+, 405+, etc.

    COLLOIDS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses
    302+.



    COOLANT:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 71+.



    CULTURE BROTH:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology.



    DETERGENT:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses
    89.1+.



    DRUG:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions.



    DYE:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers.



    ELECTROLYTE:

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, appropriate subclasses for a process involving
    electrolysis and for a composition intended for use in such a process
    (e.g., electrolyte, etc.).  See section III of the Class 204 definition for
    an elaboration of the class line between Class 204 (which encompasses Class
    205) and Class 210.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product and
    Process, especially subclasses 30+, 101+, and 188+.

    EMULSION:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 302+.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof.

    514,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, especially
    subclasses 939+.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, particularly Classes 523 and
    524.



    FATS:

    554,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 1+.



    FERTILIZER:

    71,     Chemistry: Fertilizers.



    FOOD:

    426,    Food or Edible Material: Processes, Compositions, and Products.



    FUEL:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclass14.



    INK:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 31.13+.



    INORGANIC:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds.



    LUBRICANTS:

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products.

    508,    Solid Antifriction Devices, Materials Therefor, Lubricants or
    Separants for Moving Solid Surfaces, and Miscellaneous Mineral Oil
    Compositions, particularly subclasses 110+.



    MEDICINE:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions.



    OIL:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds.

    508,    Solid Antifriction Devices, Materials Therefor, Lubricants or
    Separants for Moving Solid Surfaces, and Miscellaneous Mineral Oil
    Compositions, particularly subclasses 110+.



    PAINTS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic.

    520,    Series, Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers.



    PHOTOGRAPHIC:

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof.



    3.      Classes having liquid treating apparatus.



    ANALYSIS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 50+.



    CARBURETING:

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus.

    COOLING:

    62,     Refrigeration.

    165,    Heat Exchange.



    CRYSTAL FORMING, SINGLE:

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor.



    CRYSTALLIZER:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 245.1+ for non-coating means not
    including means for chemical reaction and not  provided for elsewhere.

    DISPENSING:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means.

    222,    Dispensing.



    DISTILLING:

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus.



    EVAPORATING:

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators.



    GAS CONTACT:

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus.



    HANDLING:

    137,    Fluid Handling.



    HEAT EXCHANGE:

    165,    Heat Exchange.



    MIXING:

    366,    Agitating.

    OIL REFINING:

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus.



    PACKING:

    53,     Package Making.



    PRESERVING:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing.



    REACTION (CHEMICAL):

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 527+.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 129+.

    REACTION, PHYSICAL:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 243+.



    C.      Lines With Specific Classes

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, appropriate subclasses for a purification process
    claimed or solely disclosed for a dye composition.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, appropriate subclasses
    for apparatus which may remove a liquid from a solid by means provided for
    in that class (15), particularly subclass 1.7 for submerged cleaners; and
    subclass 246.5 for tank cleaners.

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, appropriate subclasses which may
    involve the manufacture of a filter element, particularly subclasses 144+
    for the bringing together of fibers with relation to each other to form a
    coherent mass.

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, subclasses 293+ for a physical
    purification process claimed or solely disclosed for an inorganic compound
    or nonmetallic element (or solution with no art use).

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate
    subclasses.  See the note to the class definition of Class 34 for the line
    with Class 210.

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, especially subclasses 300+ for a
    purification process claimed or solely disclosed for liquid fuel.

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, for a
    purification process claimed or solely disclosed for an abrading
    composition.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 600+ for a separating or purification
    process for liquified gas.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 1 and 18 for means
    to reclaim and revise a solvent combined with a laundry machine.

    71,     Chemistry:  Fertilizers, appropriate subclasses for fertilizer
    producing processes including more than mere treatment of sewage or waste
    liquids for this class (210); and for a purification process claimed or
    solely disclosed for a fertilizer composition.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder  Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, appropriate subclasses for a separating or purification process
    that produces a metal; and especially subclass 2 for beneficiating ores by
    chemical treatment and flotation; and subclasses 97+ for hydrometallurgical
    processes, particularly subclasses 101+ for chemical leaching.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, for processes involving steps resulting
    in separation of a gas from a fluid mixture comprising (a) a gas and solid
    or liquid particles entrained therein, (b) a liquid and gas entrained
    therein, or (c) a plurality of gases.  Class 210 is superior to Class 95
    and takes separating processes, per se, generically disclosed or claimed as
    fluid separation or if the disclosure or a claim is restricted to liquid
    separation.  Class 210 also takes processes which remove or vent gas formed
    incidentally to the handling of the fluid mixture or as a result of a Class
    210 treatment (see particularly subclasses 603, 640, 664, 718, and 750).
    However, Class 95 takes processes operating to remove gas initially present
    in an inflowing liquid mixture, with or without liquid separation.  The
    removal of a volatile organic compound (e.g., ethanol (C2H5OH), gasoline,
    etc.) from a liquid is not taken to be degasification of a liquid for Class
    95 when the volatile organic compound is initially present as a liquid
    mixed with another liquid.  The removal of a volatile organic compound from
    a liquid  may be found in Class 210 for liquid purification or separation
    or Class 203 for separatory distillation processes.  Class 95 will also
    take a process including a liquid separation step in a Class 95 operation
    (e.g., regenerating a scrubbing liquid in a gas scrubbing operation).

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, for apparatus used in separation of a
    gas from a fluid mixture comprising (a) a gas and solid or liquid particles
    entrained therein, (b) a liquid and gas entrained therein, or (c) a
    plurality of gases.  Class 210 is superior to Class 96 and takes separating
    apparatus, per se, generically disclosed or claimed for use in fluid
    separation or if the disclosure or a claim is restricted to liquid
    separation apparatus.  Class 210 also takes apparatus which removes or
    vents gas formed incidentally to the handling of the fluid mixture or as a
    result of a Class 210 treatment (see particularly subclasses 120, 180, 188,
    218, 406, and 436).  However, Class 96 takes apparatus operating to remove
    gas initially present in an inflowing liquid mixture, with or without
    liquid separation.  Apparatus for the removal of a volatile organic
    compound (e.g., ethanol (C2H5OH), gasoline, etc.) from a liquid is not
    taken to be apparatus for the degasification of a liquid for Class 96 when
    the volatile organic compound is initially present as a liquid mixed with
    another liquid.  Apparatus for the removal of a volatile organic compound
    from a liquid may be found in Class 210 for liquid purification or
    separation or Class 202 for separatory distillation.  Class 96 will also
    take apparatus including a liquid separation means in a Class 96, Gas
    Separation: Apparatus (e.g., means to regenerate a scrubbing liquid in a
    gas scrubbing apparatus, etc.).

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus of the type classified in this class (210) when combined with
    other food or beverage preparation means; and subclasses 457+ and 495+ for
    separation apparatus wherein a liquid is separated.

    100,    Presses, subclass 37 for process of separation of liquid from
    expressed material; and subclasses 104+ for presses having drain means for
    expressed liquids, and see the reference to Class 210 in the class
    definition for the general line.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses for a
    purification or regeneration by separation process which is claimed or
    solely disclosed for a composition or ingredient of that class.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, appropriate subclasses for
    conversion of liquid to vapor by application of heat.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, appropriate subclasses for liquid heaters,
    particularly subclasses 344+ for water heaters.

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, appropriate subclasses for
    processes and apparatus peculiar to the treatment of such materials.

    128,    Surgery, appropriate subclasses for a process of or apparatus for
    purifying or separating the fluid (e.g., blood) of a living animal body,
    combined with a claimed specifically detailed step or means of removing or
    returning the fluid from or to the body.  A method of treating the fluid
    including a nominally recital step of or means for removing or returning
    the fluid from or to a patient will be placed in this class (210).
    Similarly, a process of or apparatus for purifying or separating such a
    fluid combined with a step of or means for monitoring a condition of the
    body to control the purifying or separating will be placed in Class 128,
    Surgery.  Terms as "withdrawing", "injecting", and "needle", are considered
    nominal while withdrawing from a named artery or vein or structurally
    defining a needle are considered specific detail.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, and see Note (4) of the
    definition of that class for the line with Class 210.

    137,    Fluid Handling, appropriate subclasses for fluid handling
    generally, particularly subclasses 1+ for processes; and subclasses 98+ for
    proportional flow systems, as chemical feeders.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, appropriate subclasses for
    processes and apparatus for making paper by depositing fibers from a slurry
    on a foraminous screen.  Where the screening step is for the purpose of
    dewatering the slurry and a formless mass of fibers is produced rather than
    a felted product, the patent is classified in Class 210.  Where there is a
    disclosure of a felted self-sustaining product being produced by the
    dewatering step or means are provided to remove the product intact from the
    mold, the patent is classified in Class 162.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 265+ for well processes involving separation of
    fluids leaving the well, appropriate subclasses for corresponding well
    apparatus; subclasses 311+ and subclasses there noted for processes of
    cleaning wells, and appropriate subclasses for corresponding apparatus;
    subclasses 227+ and subclasses there noted for well screens;  and see
    subclass 227 for the line between Classes 210 and 166 as to screens.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, for apparatus peculiar to mineral oil
    treatment other than by mere manipulative treatment for this class (210),
    particularly subclass 14.5 for dewaxing apparatus; and subclass 46.1 for
    refining apparatus including a filter in combination.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for distillation
    apparatus with or without separation means of the type classified in Class
    210.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclasses 28+ and 39+ for a
    liquid distillation process including a chemical treating step or a
    disparate physical separating step not otherwise provided for.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, for the separation or
    purification of a liquid solely by the application of an electrical force
    directly to the liquid or when combined with a separation step classifiable
    in subclasses 767+ of Class 210. Exemplary is electro-osmosis with or
    without filtration or electrophoresis with or without gravitational
    setting.  A Class 204 step combined with a Class 210 process provided for
    higher in the schedule than subclasses 767+ is classifiable in Class 210.
    Such combinations are exemplified by aerobic digestion plus electrolysis,
    sorption plus electro-osmosis, precipitation plus electrophoresis, etc.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, for an electrolytic process which may include a
    preparatory liquid purification step for the process and for a process of
    regenerating or rehabilitating an electrolyte composition used or intended
    to be used for electrolysis as designated for Class 205.



            A Class 204 step combined with a Class 210 process provided for
    higher in the schedule than subclasses 767+ is classifiable in Class 210.
    Such combinations are exemplified by aerobic digestion plus electrolysis,
    sorption plus electroosmosis, precipitation plus electrophoresis, etc.



    Class 204 also takes an electrolytic process which may include a
    preparatory liquid purification step for the process.

    Class 204 further provides for a process of regenerating or rehabilitating
    an electrolyte composition of that class (204).



    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, for a purification or
    separation claimed as solely disclosed for mineral oil and which is not
    purely a physical operation as provided for in subclasses 767+ of this
    class (210).



    Class 210, in subclasses 767+ provides for merely physically separating a
    mineral oil as by filtering, settling decanting, etc. Class 208 provides
    for chemical, including sorption and solvent, processes for purifying or
    separating a mineral oil.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses, and see the reference to Class 210 under (3) Note of the class
    definition of Class 209 for the general line.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses
    for separating means incidental or ancillary to handling a fluid to be
    sprinkled or sprayed, especially subclasses 86, 462, 553+, 575, and 590+
    for nozzle structures in which filtering means are present or are inherent
    in the nozzle.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 24 and 68+
    for the comminution of solids combined with the separation of liquid
    therefrom.  See section 8 of the class definition of Class 241 for the line
    with Class 210.

    252,    Compositions, appropriate subclasses for a purification or
    separation claimed or solely disclosed for a composition classifiable in
    that class, and search subclasses 61, 175+, 182+, and 302+ for a
    composition which may be used in a liquid purification or separation
    process of this class or for a process of mere emulsion breaking.



    Class 252 provides for a purification or separation process specific to a
    single type of composition by claim or by sole disclosure.  Class 210
    provides for a purification or separation process generic to several types
    of compositions, all of which may be classified in Class 252 (e.g.,
    perfumes and denaturants; detergents; fire extinguishing and heat exchange
    materials).



    Class 252 provides for certain compositions for use in Class 210 processes
    and for a process, per se, of regenerating or rehabilitating them.  The use
    of these compositions in a liquid purification or separation, per se, or
    combined with regenerating them is provided for in Class 210.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, appropriate subclasses for such
    compounds and related compound producing or treating processes,
    particularly subclasses 704+ for general physical treatment processes
    peculiar to carbon compounds, and see the references to Class 210 in the
    class definition.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 2+ for separating
    means combined with apparatus to produce an intimate contact between gases
    and liquids to exchange properties or mutually modify conditions.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    appropriate subclasses for processes for shaping or molding plastic
    materials within the class definition, which may involve the manufacture or
    use of fiber elements or separators, or porous articles, per se.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclass 250 for liquid carrier condensation of
    liquid developer material within an electrophotographic device.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, especially subclasses 168+ and 197 for
    transporting a solid by suspending it in a fluid and separating the solid
    from the liquid after transporting.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, for a process of treating water to prevent
    corrosion of a conduit or a container and for chemical apparatus of general
    utility.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses for
    chemical manufacturing involving a chemical reaction and for extracting,
    leaching, or dissolving not elsewhere provided for.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    appropriate subclasses for (a) process of the type classified in this class
    (210) when combined with other food working operations, or (b) a process of
    the type classified in this class (210), which process is limited to
    treatment of a food or edible material except water.

    494,    Imperforate Bowl:  Centrifugal Separators, appropriate subclasses,
    for apparatus and process for breaking up a mixture of fluids or fluent
    substances into two or more components by centrifuging within a generally
    solid-walled, receptacle-like member.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, for a composition comprising a catalyst or sorbent, per se.

    504,    Plant Protecting and Regulating Compositions, subclasses 150+ for
    compositions designed or intended for retarding, inhibiting, or killing
    algae and the processes of using such compositions or compounds which are
    no more than the mere application of the compounds or the compositions.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for separation prior to destruction wherein no desired product
    is removed.

    935,    Genetic Engineering:  Recombinant DNA Technology, Hybrid or Fused
    Cell Technology, and Related Manipulations of Nucleic Acids, which provides
    a search collection for processes of altering the genetic structure of
    micro-organisms; genes and methods of modifying genes and their expression;
    vectors and methods of modifying vectors; methods of introducing DNA into a
    cell; micro-organisms, per se, which have had their genetic sequence
    altered by recombinant DNA techniques or by cell fusion or by uptake of
    DNA; testing; separation techniques; apparatus; and methods of use of
    vectors or of the genetically engineered micro-organisms; methods of gene
    therapy or genetic modification of living organisms.


CLS 210/85
TXT Apparatus under the class definition with an alarm indicator, register,
    recorder or signal, showing a condition of the subject matter of the class;
    or with means which permit inspection of normally hidden parts of the
    apparatus or of the fluid inside the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138+,   for controlled devices including only the driving mechanism of a
    clock without any indication other than that of a conventional clock.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses, for pressure, level,
    temperature, etc., measuring and indicating means, per se, especially
    subclass 61.41 for methods and means for testing which determines a
    characteristic of a separated constituent.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclasses, for mechanical
    signals and indicators, per se.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 712+ for coating apparatus and a
    signal or an indicator.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 23+ for dispensers with recorder, register,
    indicator, signal or exhibitor.

    235,    Registers, appropriate subclasses, for registers, per se.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 603+ for electrical
    automatic fluent material responsive indicating systems.

    346,    Recorders, appropriate subclasses, for recorders, per se.


CLS 210/86
TXT Apparatus under subclass 85, responsive to a change in the level or
    thickness of a material being treated within the apparatus.


CLS 210/87
TXT Apparatus under subclass 85 responsive to flow of fluids.


CLS 210/88
TXT Apparatus under subclass 87 in which a meter controls an operating cycle of
    the apparatus.


CLS 210/89
TXT Apparatus under subclass 88, including means operating during or after a
    predetermined interval of time.


CLS 210/90
TXT Apparatus under subclass 85 responsive to fluid pressure.


CLS 210/91
TXT Apparatus under subclass 85 comprising means which gives information as to
    the position of a movable or adjustable part of the apparatus.


CLS 210/92
TXT Apparatus under subclass 85 including a valve which may be opened for test
    purposes.


CLS 210/93
TXT Apparatus under subclass 85 comprising a section in a conduit downstream
    from treating means.


CLS 210/94
TXT Apparatus under subclass 85 in which the inspection means is a transparent
    part of a treating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 154+ for dispensers with inspection devices.


CLS 210/95
TXT Apparatus under subclass 94 comprising transparent means associated with
    treatment apparatus through which material being treated can be viewed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 323+ for liquid level sight
    glasses of general application.


CLS 210/96.1
TXT CONSTITUENT MIXTURE VARIATION RESPONSIVE:

    Apparatus under the class definition in which an operating condition of the
    apparatus is controlled by variations of a constituent quality of a liquid
    mixture as determined by physical or chemical tests of the liquid mixture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    662,    for composition testing in ion exchange or sorption processes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, subclass 230 for analytical and
    analytical control methods there provided for.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 3+ for processes of mixing plural fluids
    of diverse characteristics; and subclasses 88+ for a system involving
    mixture condition maintaining or sensing.


CLS 210/96.2
TXT With membrane:

    Apparatus under subclass 96.1 having a filtering means composed of a thin,
    enveloping or lining substance, i.e., membrane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257.1,  for a membrane within a storage unit in serially connected distinct
    treating apparatus.

    348+,   for apparatus which uses a semipermeable septum which does not
    provide for continuous streams on both sides of the septum.

    433+,   for similar apparatus which uses in ordinary filter septum.

    500.1,  for membrane, per se.

    541,    for membrane supports, frames, and spaces.

    634+,   for process of using a septum selective as to composition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, subclass 10 for a sugar solution
    dialyzer.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 252+ for a
    similar device using an electric current.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 4+ for membrane separation devices used in
    blood treatment.


CLS 210/97
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means responsive to variations
    in flow, material level or fluid pressure to control means to effect an
    operation or change in an operating condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156+,   for a fluid stream or residue operated flume stream type separator.

    349,    for a filter with pulsation dampening means.

    354,    for a filter medium or cleaner or agitator moved by fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclass 258 for paper making
    apparatus having automatic control of stock consistency, and subclass 259
    for automatic control of stock feed to the foraminous forming screen.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 662 for an
    electrical or magnetic apparatus to separate or purify a liquid with a
    control means responsive to a sensed liquid level.


CLS 210/98
TXT Apparatus under subclass 97 in which an operating cycle is controlled in
    response to the liquid flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88+,    for a meter controlled cyclic system.


CLS 210/99
TXT Apparatus under subclass 97 in which there is means for diverting the
    initial charge of prefilt to drain, said means being responsive to
    accumulation of prefilt in a nonseparating receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130+,   for a fluid pressure responsive bypass.

    421,    for a filter with a manually operated prefilt deflector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 120 for self-controlled branched flow
    systems having alternate outflows including liquid level sensing means.


CLS 210/100
TXT Apparatus under subclass 97 which causes a flow controller to close, after
    which a necessary resetting operation must be preformed by an external
    operator.


CLS 210/101
TXT Apparatus under subclass 97 including means to maintain the ratio between
    plural flows at a predetermined value in response to means sensing a change
    in fluid condition in at least one of the flow lines.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    for diverse condition responsive controls one of which controls an
    auxiliary liquid inlet.

    127,    for a separator having a float controlled auxiliary fluid inlet.

    198+,   for separatory means having means to add treating material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 9 for self-proportioning fluid handling
    processes and subclasses 98+ for self-proportioning apparatus.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 57 for dispensing devices which are
    automatically controlled by the weight, volume or pressure of a second
    dispensed material, and subclass 130 for plural sources at least one of
    which is nondispensing.


CLS 210/102
TXT Apparatus under subclass 97 governing the order in which individual
    separatory units of a plurality of such units are used.


CLS 210/103
TXT Apparatus under subclass 97 which includes plural sensing means differing
    characteristics other than mere size.


CLS 210/104
TXT Apparatus under subclass 103 responsive to a change in the level of the
    liquid or solids.


CLS 210/105
TXT Apparatus under subclass 103 including the control of introduction of an
    auxiliary liquid to a treatment chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    for separatory apparatus combined with means to feed treating
    material thereto proportionately to the material being treated.


CLS 210/106
TXT Apparatus under subclass 97 relating to means to rehabilitate or clean a
    filter medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    407+,   for filter means combined with cleaning means.


CLS 210/107
TXT Apparatus under subclass 106 wherein the filter medium or the
    rehabilitating means is rotated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359+,   for a movable filter medium.


CLS 210/108
TXT Apparatus under subclass 106 comprising backwash or blowback means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    420+,   for a filter provided with a flow controller providing selective
    direction flow therethrough.


CLS 210/109
TXT Apparatus under subclass 97 which controls a treated material discharge
    outlet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 395+ for liquid level responsive outlet
    controls for tanks of general utility, and subclasses 577+ for fluid
    handling tanks of general utility having adjustable outlets, especially
    subclass 578 for float supported outlets.


CLS 210/110
TXT Apparatus under subclass 109 with means controlling an inlet to a separator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103+,   for control by diverse sensing means.


CLS 210/111
TXT Apparatus under subclass 109 responsive to liquid to be treated or to an
    increase in pressure upstream of a filter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99,     for means diverting prefilt to drain responsive to prefilt
    accumulation.

    130+,   for bypass means responsive to pressure.


CLS 210/112
TXT Apparatus under subclass 109 in which the material is a heavier constituent.


CLS 210/113
TXT Apparatus under subclass 112 responsive to weight of accumulated solids.


CLS 210/114
TXT Apparatus under subclass 112 responsive to treated liquid accumulation.


CLS 210/115
TXT Apparatus under subclass 112 controlling a lighter constituent discharge
    outlet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103+,   for apparatus including diverse sensing means.


CLS 210/116
TXT Apparatus under subclass 109 wherein the discharge outlet is normally
    closed and permits discharge of filtrate responsive to filtrate
    accumulation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for means controlling discharge of a heavier constituent responsive
    to treated liquid accumulation.

    117+,   for valve means responsive to change in direction of the flow to
    prevent backflow.


CLS 210/117
TXT Apparatus under subclass 109 including flow control means allowing flow in
    only one direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137,    for means maintaining stream pressure or flow in separatory
    apparatus.


CLS 210/118
TXT Apparatus under subclass 117 comprising a variable restrictor responsive to
    flow direction whereby flow increases during backwash.


CLS 210/119
TXT Apparatus under subclass 117 comprising a float operated valve means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 247.15+ for line condition change
    responsive flow controllers combined with liquid seal traps, subclasses
    409+ for float operated valves, and subclasses 455+ for line condition
    responsive valves, especially subclasses 511+ for check valves.


CLS 210/120
TXT Apparatus under subclass 97 comprising means controlling an opening above a
    liquid level for entrance or exit of a gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130+,   for a liquid bypass which may also serve as a vent.

    472,    for a filter means with vent means.


CLS 210/121
TXT Apparatus under subclass 97 in which the responsive means is a float.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for diverse sensing means responsive to material level.


CLS 210/122
TXT Apparatus under subclass 121 which controls the movement of a separatory
    medium.


CLS 210/123
TXT Apparatus under subclass 121 in which the float controls valve means.


CLS 210/124
TXT Apparatus under subclass 123 in which the valve means is located in the
    flow stream between two separators.


CLS 210/125
TXT Apparatus under subclass 123 in which the float and the valve means are on
    opposite sides of a separatory means.


CLS 210/126
TXT Apparatus under subclass 123 in which the float is located in a separate
    tank or compartment provided for the storage of rehabilitating fluid.


CLS 210/127
TXT Apparatus under subclass 123 in which the valve means controls admission of
    a fluid other than liquid being treated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101+,   for a separator with proportionate feed means for adding treating
    material.

    198+,   for a separator with means to add treating material.


CLS 210/128
TXT Apparatus under subclass 123 in which the float is in a nontreating chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126,    for a float in separate rehabilitating fluid tank.


CLS 210/129
TXT Apparatus under subclass 128 in which the float is in the flow between a
    controlled inlet and a separator.


CLS 210/130
TXT Apparatus under subclass 97 comprising means responsive to pressure to
    bypass liquids around treatment means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99,     for means to divert on initial charge of prefilt to drain.

    790,    for separating processes involving dividing and recombining the
    flow.


CLS 210/131
TXT Apparatus under subclass 130 in which the responsive means is a separating
    element or filter medium which provides a bypass by flexing or compression
    thereof or by movement in its entirety.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    356,    for fluid operated means to flex a filter means during operation.

    398+,   for movable elements within a casing, the movement of which may
    open a bypass.

    738     and 748, for processes including pulsation or oscillation essential
    to the separation or purification.


CLS 210/132
TXT Apparatus under subclass 130 in which the by-pass contains separation or
    treatment means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    294+,   for diverse distinct separators.

    806,    for processes including plural separatory steps.


CLS 210/133
TXT Apparatus under subclass 130 in which a separator casing is closed by a
    unitary attached header which header includes at least an inlet and an
    outlet and the pressure response bypass means therebetween.


CLS 210/134
TXT Apparatus under subclass 97 including plural variable flow affecting
    elements, at least one of which is controlled by the sensing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103+,   for apparatus including diverse sensing means controlling an
    operating phase or phases in a separator.

    110,    for line condition responsive means controlling discharge of
    treated material and the inlet to a separator.

    115,    for line condition responsive means controlling discharge of a
    heavier constituent and discharge of a lighter constituent.


CLS 210/135
TXT Apparatus under subclass 134 including at least one manually operated flow
    controller.


CLS 210/136
TXT Apparatus under subclass 97 having means responsive to a change in a flow
    line condition acting of the face of a valve disc or plug itself to permit
    flow in one direction only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for diverse sensing means.

    117+,   for a check valve controlling discharge of treated material.

    120,    for a check valve controlled vent.

    130+,   for a fluid pressure responsive bypass.

    416,    for valves which form a part of a pump organization.


CLS 210/137
TXT Apparatus under subclass 97 to regulate pressure of or rate of flow of a
    liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111,    for means discharging treated material responsive to filter
    clogging.

    114,    for means discharging the heavier constituent responsive to treated
    liquid accumulation.

    116,    for discharge of treated material responsive to filtrate
    accumulation.

    130,    for a fluid pressure responsive bypass.


CLS 210/138
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the time at which an element
    of an treating means is actuated, or the length of time taken to perform an
    operation thereof is controlled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 12 and 23+ for
    treating machines having centrifugal extractor features and time-controlled
    means associated therewith.


CLS 210/139
TXT Apparatus under subclass 138 which introduces to the treating means a fluid
    in addition to that being treated.


CLS 210/140
TXT Apparatus under subclass 139 in which the additional fluid serves to
    prepare the treating means for a treating operation.


CLS 210/141
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which an actuating means provides
    either a continuously repetitive operation of a treating device or a single
    operation terminating in a position to restart an additional cycle, which
    cycle is more complex than a mere starting or stopping of a single treating
    device.


CLS 210/142
TXT Apparatus under subclass 141 in which there is a plurality of treating
    units or sections which are controlled in sequence.


CLS 210/143
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means to sense some condition
    of a treatment operation and operate a control device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86,     for a material level responsive indicator.

    87,     for a fluid flow responsive indicator.

    90,     for a fluid pressure responsive indicator.

    96.1+,  for control responsive to constituent mixture variation.

    97+,    for control by fluid flow, fluid pressure or material level
    responsive means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 87.01+ for self proportioning or
    correlated fluid handling systems of general utility.


CLS 210/144
TXT Apparatus under subclass 143 responsive to vibration or unbalance of a
    movable part of treating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    363+,   for a centrifugal extractor with rotation stabilizer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 572+ for flywheels and
    rotors with balancing or vibration dampening means defining no specific
    feature of separator construction.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 116+ for power-stop
    control of more general utility.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 445+ for a motor
    control systems, particularly subclass 460 for vibration responsive control.


CLS 210/145
TXT Apparatus under subclass 143 responsive to a condition of rotation of a
    part of the treating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144,    for vibration or unbalance responsive control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 103+ for a speed
    responsive clutch for a centrifugal extractor.


CLS 210/146
TXT Apparatus under subclass 145 in which there is a treatment casing provided
    with a closure and a latch controlled by the rotation responsive means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 136 for an automatic
    cover latch control for a centrifugal extractor.


CLS 210/147
TXT Apparatus under subclass 145 which controls a discharge means for a
    constituent of the class subject matter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109+,   for control of discharge responsive to fluid flow, pressure or
    material level.


CLS 210/148
TXT Apparatus under subclass 143 operated accidentally or unintentionally by
    movement of a container used in a treating operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235,    for actuation of a flow controller on assembly of parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 43 for a vent valve opened or closed by
    the tipping of a container.


CLS 210/149
TXT Apparatus under subclass 143 having means responsive to a thermal condition.


CLS 210/150
TXT Apparatus under the class definition consisting of solid contact means to
    increase the surface area of a liquid in a gas-liquid contact device
    whereby the contact is enhanced.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for gas
    and liquid contact apparatus there provided for.


CLS 210/151
TXT Apparatus under subclass 150 combined with a separator.


CLS 210/153
TXT Apparatus under the class definition combined with (1) means performing an
    operation external to the subject matter of this class, (2) combined with a
    static construction installation, (3) specifically related to a particular
    geographic feature wherein there is included only enough structure foreign
    to this class (210) to associate it with the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241+,   for a separator combined with a movable support.

    244+,   for a draining type separator comprising a portable receptacle with
    a hood or closure.

    419,    for a filter attached to or within a portable prefilt receiver
    having a flow controller for the material being treated.

    464+,   a portable receptacle draining type filter.

    473+,   for a filter resting on a supporting receiver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, appropriate subclasses
    particularly subclass 652 for strainers combined with sink structure and
    subclasses 286+ for strainers and stoppers peculiar to that art.

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 318+ for a dredger combined with a screen
    separator.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 19+ for a laundry
    machine combined with a fluid extractor, and subclasses 235+ for a
    separator combined with a washing machine drain.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 408 for a deep fat fryer
    type cooker having crumb or sediment segregation means.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 431 for a filter in a
    boiler.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 140 for a siphon combined with a
    separatory means, and subclasses 343+ for a structural installation of a
    fluid handling apparatus.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclass 42 for a concentrating
    evaporator combined with a strainer or skimmer.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 189.06+ for a dispenser with a strainer, and
    subclass 565 for a sifting dispenser.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 289.1+
    for fermentation apparatus including separating means, particularly
    subclass 295.3 for a bioreactor with the combination of a draft tube and a
    semipermeable membrane or filter, subclasses 297.1+ for a bioreactor
    including a semipermeable membrane or filter, and subclass 308.1 for an
    apparatus for separating a microorganism from culture media.


CLS 210/154
TXT Apparatus under subclass 153 comprising separating means placed in or at
    the entrance of an open channel confining a flowing stream to prevent
    solids, such as debris or fish, from passing downstream.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131,    for a movable animal stop in a sewer comprising a fluid pressure
    responsive bypass.

    173+,   for flume stream type separators with comminuting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 118+ for specific open
    channel construction or flow control features other than that forming the
    inlet and outlet to a separator.


CLS 210/155
TXT Apparatus under subclass 154 including plural, spaced, straining elements
    or straining elements of different shapes or kinds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    294+,   for diverse distinct separators of general utility.

    322+,   for plural distinct separators of general utility.


CLS 210/156
TXT Apparatus under subclass 154 moved by the flowing stream or by a collection
    of residue on the separator medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    354+,   for filter structure similarly operated.


CLS 210/157
TXT Apparatus under subclass 156 in which the separating medium is a
    cylindrical filter rotating about a central axis.


CLS 210/158
TXT Apparatus under subclass 154 including means for cleaning the filter which
    is movable.


CLS 210/159
TXT Apparatus under subclass 154 including a filter cleaner which is a movable
    solid means, as a brush, with means to remove residue therefrom.


CLS 210/160
TXT Apparatus under subclass 154 in which the separating means is a movable
    endless foraminous belt.


CLS 210/161
TXT Apparatus under subclass 154 in which the separating means is a strainer
    mounted to revolve in the fluid stream.


CLS 210/162
TXT Apparatus under subclass 154 in which the separating means is a strainer
    stationarily mounted in the fluid stream.


CLS 210/163
TXT Structures under subclass 153 including a strainer in outlet means which
    provide drain means for a surface, as a floor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    for a grated surface inlet drain including means responsive to
    filtrate accumulation permitting discharge of treated material.

    119,    for a grated surface drains having back-flow preventing means.

    247,    for a strainer with a filtrate deflector.

    459,    for a pipe or plate attached filter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclasses 268+, 275+, 286+, 596+, 640+, and 650+ for plumbing
    apparatus including drains with grated inlets.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 12 for cover with an
    eave or valley gutter with a separator.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclass 42 for flashed pipe-to-plate
    joint.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 2+ for roadway
    drain or gutter structure.


CLS 210/164
TXT Structures under subclass 163 where the upper face of the strainer is flat
    and is level with its associated surface.


CLS 210/165
TXT Structures under subclass 164 which include means to dispose of subsurface
    seepage e.g., weep holes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclass 14 for a pipe joint including
    leakage or drip disposal means comprising a weep hole.


CLS 210/166
TXT Apparatus under subclass 163 comprising a concentric ring or rib between
    the strainer and its associated surface wherein the ring or rib projects
    above the plane of the surface.


CLS 210/167
TXT Apparatus under subclass 153 with means to recirculate a liquid
    therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194+,   for purifiers or separators with recirculation means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 18 for a
    recirculating system including a fluid textile treating means and purifying
    means for the used solvent.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 600+ for coating apparatus with means
    for treatment of the coating material involving separation and
    recirculation.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 41.55 for internal and
    combustion engine cooling system combined with a strainer, and subclass 196
    for internal combustion engine lubricator means combined with liquid
    purifying means.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 10+ and 109+
    for cleaning and liquid contact processes and apparatus having means for
    rehabilitating the treating fluid.


CLS 210/168
TXT Systems under subclass 167 designed to lubricate moving parts of a machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 196 for lubricators including
    rehabilitating means there provided for.

    184,    Lubrication, subclass 1.5 for crankcase service apparatus including
    separators, and subclass 6 for lubricating systems including separators.


CLS 210/169
TXT Systems under subclass 167 designed to accommodate living animals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220+,   for a submerged fluid inlet means to add treating material to a
    separator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 259+ for specific aquarium structure
    in combination with liquid purification or separation means.


CLS 210/170
TXT Apparatus under subclass 153 in which a separator is part of a system
    installed in the ground or related to a particular geographic feature, as a
    lake.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is in situ purging of flowing or
    still liquid (e.g., drainage ditch, septic system, pond) wherein a
    structural installation in which the separator or purifier is (a) part of a
    system installed on natural or modified terrain to convey rain, snow melt,
    a river, sewage, well water or oil, etc. or (b) related to a particular
    nonland geographic feature, such as a lake, ocean, sea, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154+,   for a flume stream type separator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 236.1 for a distribution system involving
    a geographical feature.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 36+ for drainage
    devices and 52+ for fluid control or inhibiting the formation of,
    containing the spread of, or settling an undesirable floatable or suspended
    material in a body of water (i.e., treatment).


CLS 210/171
TXT Apparatus under subclass 153 including means having moving parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168,    for machinery with lubrication means in recirculating relationship
    with a separator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 208 for fluid textile
    treating means having a drain and strainer means associated therewith.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 610 for reconditioning by separation of
    coating materials.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclass 104 for cleaning
    apparatus having material collectors (e.g., strainers) for escaping
    cleaning liquid.


CLS 210/172
TXT Apparatus under subclass 153 including a supply tank for an apparatus or a
    system having a function external to the subject matter of this class and
    purification is incidental to the storage of the liquid for use in that
    system or apparatus.


CLS 210/173
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising unitary separators and
    means to comminute solids.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154+,   for a flume stream type separator, per se.

    359+,   for a movable filter or separator which may break up "flocs" or
    residue incidental to agitation or material handling.

    407,    for a filter having means for agitation of the liquid.

    769,    for related processes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, and see the reference
    to Class 210 in section 8 of the class definition.


CLS 210/174
TXT Apparatus under subclass 173 in which the separating medium comprises a
    cylindrical filter medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161,    for a revolvable flume screen strainer, per se.

    402+,   for a movable drum type filter.


CLS 210/175
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having heat exchanging means
    comprising an imperforate heat transfer member, radiant heater or heat
    generator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    768+,   for separating processes with treatment of separated solids, and
    subclasses 774+ for separating processes involving treatment by heating or
    cooling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclass 222 for liquid contacting means combined
    with an indirect heat exchanger for the gas and subclasses 267+ for gas
    separating means combined with heating or cooling means for the gas.

    62,     Refrigeration, for refrigeration means or steps combined with fluid
    cooling or gas liquefaction or solidification.  For particular subclasses
    in Class 62 involving refrigeration and fluid separation, see the reference
    to Class 62 in the class definition of this class (210).

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 379+ for processes and
    apparatus for cleaning liquid heaters or vaporizers or for purifying the
    water while the boiler is in operation.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 343.5 for melting furnaces which may
    include liquid separating means.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclass 42 for strainers or skimmers
    specialized for that class.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 119 for a heat exchange with an ancillary
    filter.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 178 for combined distilland
    preheater and strainer, and subclasses 202+ for still with condensate
    treating means.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 362+ for apparatus for resolving colloids
    combined with heating means.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 277+ for apparatus for
    separating molten metal for undesired constituents.


CLS 210/176
TXT Apparatus under subclass 175 which separate a liquid mixture into two or
    more dissimilar fractions by subjecting a thin film of liquid mixture to a
    temperature gradient.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    775,    for related processes.


CLS 210/177
TXT Apparatus under subclass 175 having means for adding a treating fluid.


CLS 210/178
TXT Apparatus under subclass 177 in which the separator is provided with a
    mechanical agitator or in which the separating medium is movable.


CLS 210/179
TXT Apparatus under subclass 175 provided with mechanical agitating means or
    with means for moving a separator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    178,    for similar structure with addition of treating fluid.


CLS 210/180
TXT Apparatus under subclass 175 provided with means to remove vapor or gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    472,    for a vented filter.


CLS 210/181
TXT Apparatus under subclass 175 in which a heater or heat exchanger is
    connected in series by a flow line for the liquid under treatment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252+,   for other serially connected distinct treating or storage units.


CLS 210/182
TXT Apparatus under subclass 175 in which the separators are of different kinds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    294+,   for other diverse distinct separators.


CLS 210/183
TXT Apparatus under subclass 182 wherein the heat exchanger is coaxial with the
    casing enclosing the diverse separators.


CLS 210/184
TXT Apparatus under subclass 175 wherein the separator is a filter.


CLS 210/185
TXT Apparatus under subclass 184 in which the heat exchanger is embedded in the
    filter medium or is sandwiched between filter media.


CLS 210/186
TXT Apparatus under subclass 184 wherein the heat exchanger is external of the
    means confining the liquid undergoing treatment.


CLS 210/187
TXT Apparatus under subclass 175 in which the heat exchanger is within a liquid
    holding container of a gravitational separator.


CLS 210/188
TXT Apparatus under the class definition combined with a gas or vapor
    separator, which is more than a mere vent and must (1) remove gases evolved
    during a treating operation or (2) treat gas removed from a Class 210
    separator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    472,    for a filter with vent means.

    539,    for a gravitational separator having a vent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, for apparatus for gas separation, per
    se.  See section III, C, of the Class 210 class definition for an
    amplification of the line.


CLS 210/189
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means providing distinct
    chambers or areas for solid-liquid contact with means for circulating
    granular separatory material between at least two of the chambers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    268,    for a separator having means providing gravity flow of particles
    therethrough.

    270,    for moving rehabilitation means which pick up and redeposit
    particles on the same bed.

    271+,   for surface traversing rehabilitation means for a particulate
    material bed.


CLS 210/190
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which means is provided for the
    purpose of conveying, preparing or storing a liquid which is used to
    restore a chemical affinity of the separatory medium.


CLS 210/191
TXT Apparatus under subclass 190 including a pump, injector or siphon.


CLS 210/192
TXT Systems under the class definition comprising means to make one or more of
    the chemical reagents used in the treatment combined with apparatus of this
    class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    715,    for processes of seeding with sludge of the system.

    716+,   for processes including reagent manufacture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 186.8+ for ozonizers with
    preparatory or product treating means; and subclass 186.23 for arc or spark
    discharge reactors having preparatory or product treating means.


CLS 210/193
TXT Apparatus under the class definition with means to apply an additional
    solid material usually discrete particles, as a coating to a filtering
    medium, the additional material then acting as a primary filtering medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    503+,   for diverse granular or fibrous filter materials.

    506+,   for a coated or impregnated filter material.

    777+,   for separating processes including use of a filter aid.


CLS 210/194
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which at least a portion of the
    fluent material is circulated in a closed circuit from and back to the
    separator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167+,   for a closed circulating system in a structural installation.

    189,    for separatory apparatus including means to circulate filter
    particles between plural chambers.

    621+,   712+, 765, and 805, for separating processes including
    recirculation.

    779,    for processes with residual returned to prefilt.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 268 for infiltration means ancillary to a
    fluid handling system, and subclass 563 for a closed circulating system of
    general utility.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 238 for an
    electrolytic cell which includes a filter and recirculating means.


CLS 210/195.1
TXT Serially connected distinct treating or storage units:

    Apparatus under subclass 194 including two or more vessels connected in
    series or two or more zones in a single vessel separated by a baffle
    connected in series.

    (1)     Note.  The vessels or zones may be either functionally or
    physically distinct from one another.


CLS 210/195.2
TXT With semipermeable membrane, e.g., dialyzer, etc.:

    Apparatus under subclass 195.1 including a septum selective as to
    composition.


CLS 210/195.3
TXT With sediment recycle means directly to main stream:

    Apparatus under subclass 195.1 including means to return sediment to a
    point upstream with respect to the flow of material to be treated, which
    means provides for recombination of the sediment with the material to be
    treated.


CLS 210/195.4
TXT Means is baffle slot:

    Apparatus under subclass 195.3 in which the means to return sediment is an
    aperture in a wall dividing a vessel into separate treating zones.


CLS 210/196
TXT Apparatus under subclass 194 in which filtrate is returned to prefilt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    409+,   for a filter with fluid cleaning involving mere return of filtrate
    for backwashing.


CLS 210/197
TXT Apparatus under subclass 194 in which the material recirculated is removed
    from a bottom portion of the separator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    713,    for processes of precipitation including return of removed solids
    to the separator.


CLS 210/198.1
TXT WITH MEANS TO ADD TREATING MATERIAL:

    Apparatus under the class definition combined with means to add a treating
    material.

    (1)     Note.  By "treating material" is meant (a) a material, usually a
    fluid, having a function other than rehabilitating a separating medium or
    cleaning a separator, (b) a fluid merely serving as a source of pressure,
    or (c) a fluid not in itself serving as a separating medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96.1+,  for separators with constituent mixture variation controls.

    101,    for flow fluid pressure or material level proportional feed means.

    105,    for diverse sensing including control means for an auxiliary liquid
    inlet.

    127,    for a float controlled valve controlling an additional fluid inlet.

    151,    for a separator and gas-liquid surface contact means.

    177+,   for separators with a heater or heat exchanger and treating fluid
    addition means.

    192,    for a separator with preliminary chemical manufacturing means.

    296     and 511, for separators using a liquid as a separating medium.

    601+,   particularly subclasses 11 and 15+, for processes of teating by
    living organisms.

    633     and 634+, for processes of extraction from liquid by solvent or
    solute.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 87.01+ for self-proportioning and
    correlating systems; and subclass 268 for holders for materials to be
    entrained into a fluid handling system.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 2+ for such apparatus
    combined with means for separating constituents from the contact liquid;
    and subclasses 75+ for gas and liquid contact devices, per se.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, for extracting, leaching, or dissolving
    apparatus.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses for
    extracting, leaching, or dissolving processes therein provided for; and
    subclass 658.5 for extracting, leaching, or dissolving processes not
    otherwise provided for.


CLS 210/198.2
TXT Chromatography:

    Apparatus under subclass 198.1 for carrying out the process of
    chromatography.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    656+,   for process involving chromatography.


CLS 210/198.3
TXT Thin layer, e.g., plate, etc:

    Apparatus under subclass under 198.2 utilizing an absorbent cake spread on
    usually a smooth plate to a depth of about 0.5 mm.


CLS 210/199
TXT Apparatus under subclass 198.1 wherein at least two distinct treating
    material feeding means supply to inlets spaced with respect to the
    direction of the flow of material being treated.


CLS 210/200
TXT Systems under subclass 198.1 comprising a plurality of distinct separating
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    294+,   for diverse distinct separators.


CLS 210/201
TXT Systems under subclass 200 connected in such a manner that at least one of
    the separating means delivers to another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 571+ for plural tanks or compartments
    connected for serial flow.


CLS 210/202
TXT Systems under subclass 201 comprising at least two different types of
    separating means.


CLS 210/203
TXT Apparatus under subclass 200 having two or more filtering units.


CLS 210/204
TXT Apparatus under subclass 203 in which the filters are of the sectional
    chamber press type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224+,   for other sectional press type filters.


CLS 210/205
TXT Systems under subclass 198.1 comprising structure providing a distinct
    reactor tank, trough or compartment wherein the plural in-flows are
    intermingled to enhance reaction (e.g., precipitation), said tank, trough
    or compartment being in series with the separator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209+,   for tanks, troughs or compartments which serve both as a reactor
    and as a separator.


CLS 210/206
TXT Apparatus under subclass 205 comprising a single flow path having the
    separating means in seral relation with means for holding a chemical.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199,    for plural material inlets spaced along a flow path.


CLS 210/207
TXT Apparatus under subclass 205 wherein the reactor tank, trough or
    compartment is located within the separator which is of the gravitational
    type.


CLS 210/208
TXT Systems under subclass 207 comprising movable mechanical means to cause
    materials to commingle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    407+,   for fixed filter and liquid agitating means.


CLS 210/209
TXT Apparatus under subclass 198.1 provided with means to add the treating
    material directly to the separator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    textile treating apparatus combined with a liquid remover, particularly
    subclass 1 for waste reclaiming apparatus, subclasses 5+ for gas steam or
    mist treating, subclass 18 for solvent recovery, and subclasses 19+ for
    fluid extractor combinations.

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, subclasses 16+ for means for
    purging sugar crystals.


CLS 210/210
TXT Apparatus under subclass 209 wherein the material to be separated and the
    treating material are directly introduced into the interior space of the
    separator element which moves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 12 and 237 for
    textile treating apparatus having textile washing features in addition to a
    liquid extractor.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 258+ and 269+ for rotary extractor
    or leacher.


CLS 210/211
TXT Apparatus under subclass 210 in which the separator is supported on a
    rotary shaft having passage means therein through which the treating
    material is introduced.


CLS 210/212
TXT Apparatus under subclass 210 in which the filtering rotor is enclosed in a
    casing having a closure and means attached to or projecting through the
    closure for feeding treating material to the rotor.


CLS 210/213
TXT Apparatus under subclass 210 in which the filter element is rotary and
    there is a rotary impeller or distributor for the treating material which
    is coaxial with the axis of rotation of the filter element.


CLS 210/214
TXT Apparatus under subclass 210 comprising a distributor for the treating
    material mounted upon a stationary support and movable with respect to such
    support.


CLS 210/215
TXT Apparatus under subclass 210 including means for dividing the separated
    effluent into a plurality of fractions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    378,    for a centrifugal extractor with a filtrate receiving means having
    plural filtrate outlets.


CLS 210/216
TXT Apparatus under subclass 209 by which the additional material is applied to
    a moving filter medium.


CLS 210/217
TXT Apparatus under subclass 216 in which the moving filter medium comprises a
    rotary drum.


CLS 210/218
TXT Apparatus under subclass 209 provided with means to remove gases or vapors
    from a liquid treating tank which is closed except for fluid handling
    inlets and/or outlets.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    472,    for a vented filter.


CLS 210/219
TXT Apparatus under subclass 209 in which there is a mechanical agitator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402+,   for a drum having an agitator fixed thereto.

    407+,   for fixed filters with liquid agitating means.


CLS 210/220
TXT Apparatus under subclass 209 in which the exit from the additional fluid
    introducing means is submerged in the liquid being treated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 56+ for minnow
    buckets having aerating means.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 121+ for submerged
    blast liquid and gas contact devices.


CLS 210/221.1
TXT With outlet at surface, e.g., froth:

    Apparatus under subclass 220 in which there is a means to remove a lighter
    constituent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 162+ for
    flotation processes and apparatus for separating one solid component from
    another.


CLS 210/221.2
TXT And gas injecting means other than by mechanical agitation:

    Apparatus under subclass 221.1 having means to produce a gas other than
    mechanical agitation.


CLS 210/222
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including magnetic treating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    695,    for processes of precipitation which may involve magnetic
    separation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, particularly subclasses
    155+ for the production of a compound or element by chemical reaction
    brought about by electrical or wave energy in a magnetic field; subclasses
    157.15+ for processes of treating materials involving a chemical reaction
    brought about by wave energy; and subclasses 660+ for a liquid treatment
    apparatus which is specialized for: magnetic treatment, per se, when some
    effect other than mere separation is desired or produced or simultaneous
    electrical and magnetic separation of the liquid which does not result in
    the production of a compound or element by chemical reaction brought about
    by electrical or wave energy in a magnetic field.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 38, 39,
    40, 212, 213+, and 478 for processes and apparatus involving applying a
    magnetic field to material (which may be suspended in a liquid) for the
    purpose of separating one solid component from another.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 209+ for magnets and electromagnets, per se.


CLS 210/223
TXT Apparatus under subclass 222 in which there is at least one separating
    means, other than the magnet.


CLS 210/224
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising abutting filter plates or
    alternating abutting filter plates and spacing frames which are pressed
    together by at least one movable end member, the end members, plates and/or
    frames when pressed together constituting a casing which is closed except
    for fluid handling connections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185,    for heater or heat exchanger combinations wherein the heater or
    heat exchanger is embedded or between filter media.

    323+,   for plural distinct filters.

    445,    for a filter element clamped in a casing joint.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses particularly subclasses 113+ and
    194+ for presses which force filter plates or frames towards each other to
    express the liquid by mechanical pressure.


CLS 210/225
TXT Apparatus under subclass 224 provided with residue removal or liquid
    agitation means.


CLS 210/226
TXT Apparatus under subclass 224 in which the filtering medium comprises a mass
    of fibers or discrete particles within the filter plates or frames.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263+,   for a particulate material type separator.

    317,    for spaced diverse filters including nonself supporting media.

    343,    for stacked elements having liquid distributors separating filter
    media, including porous masses.

    417,    for a liquid distributor imbedded in a filter mass.


CLS 210/227
TXT Apparatus under subclass 224 in which the filtering medium is clamped at
    and between the peripheral edges of plate or frame sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    445,    for other filter mediums clamped in a casing joint.


CLS 210/228
TXT Apparatus under subclass 227 in which the filtering medium is clamped at
    and between the peripheral edges of the spacing frames and filter plate
    sections.


CLS 210/229
TXT Apparatus under subclass 227 in which the filter sections are of I or
    channel cross-section forming a recess, the web of which is imperforate
    except for filtrate drain openings, and the filter medium abuts the web
    within the recess.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    455,    for modified spacing surfaces or supports for a filter medium.


CLS 210/230
TXT Apparatus under subclass 224 including means for assembly or disassembly or
    to restore or aid in restoring the device to its former condition after
    decay.


CLS 210/231
TXT Apparatus under subclass 224 comprising frame and/or plate structure, per
    se, restricted to use with sectional chamber press type filter elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230,    for plates and frames having supporting means which aid in
    assembling and disassembling.

    541,    for separator adjuncts of general application.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 295+ for platens or pressure surfaces there
    provided for.


CLS 210/232
TXT Apparatus under the class definition which is provided with auxiliary
    means, in addition to the parts making up the separation or treatment
    apparatus or the means to secure said parts in operative relation, to aid
    in assembling or disassembling said apparatus or a subcombination thereof;
    or to restore, or aid in restoring the apparatus or a subcombination
    thereof to its former condition after decay, injury, or partial destruction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230,    for a sectional chamber press having repair or assembly means.

    329,    for separators relatively movable during treatment.

    350+,   for adjustable means compressing a filter medium within a container
    even though the operator for the compressing means can be moved to
    inoperative position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 315+ for other fluid handling assembly
    means.


CLS 210/233
TXT Apparatus under subclass 232 for piercing a container, or for knocking out
    a closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235,    for a device in which placement of a container opens a flow
    controller.

    240,    for a sealed filter unit provided with a frangible or knockout
    section for conversion of flow direction.


CLS 210/234
TXT Apparatus under subclass 232 comprising a treatment part arranged to be
    removable and a valve in flow relationship thereto biased to close but
    being maintained open in normal use of the part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235,    for a device in which placement of a container opens a flow
    controller.


CLS 210/235
TXT Apparatus under subclass 232 in which the placement of a container opens a
    flow controller.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    234,    for a treatment part maintaining a controller open when in position.


CLS 210/236
TXT Apparatus under subclass 232 including guide means, on which the element to
    be assembled or disassembled rolls or slides.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241,    for a separator mounted on a movable support.


CLS 210/237
TXT Apparatus under subclass 232 comprising (1) a handle attached to a
    separating element, or (2) means attached to a separating element
    cooperating with a hoist.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249,    for a leg, hanger or bracket for a filter assembly.


CLS 210/238
TXT Apparatus under subclass 237 which is hand manipulable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244+,   for a portable receptacle having a closure with a handle.

    464+,   for a handled portable receptacle and drainer.

    470+,   for a filter element having handle means.


CLS 210/239
TXT Apparatus under the class definition so constructed that its mode of
    operation can be changed by reassembling all or some of its parts in a
    different relationship to each other or by addition or omission of a part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    473+,   for a filter unit having adjustable supporting means or having
    plural supporting surfaces.


CLS 210/240
TXT Apparatus under subclass 239 comprising selectively assembable separate
    flow connections.


CLS 210/241
TXT Apparatus under the class definition which is movably supported.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236,    for slide or roller guide means for assembly.

    237+,   for assembling hoist or handle means.

    249+,   for a bracket or leg support for a static separator assembly.

    271+,   for the mounting of rehabilitation means for movement with respect
    to a particulate bed.

    359+,   for a filter having a medium movable for treating purposes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 899+ for a vehicle mounted distribution
    system.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 421 for a
    vehicle mounted sifter.


CLS 210/242.1
TXT Float:

    Apparatus under subclass 241 in which the assembly is buoyantly supported.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121+,   for fluid flow or material level responsive floats having a
    controlling function.


CLS 210/242.2
TXT With aerating means:

    Apparatus under subclass 242.1 having means to inject a gas.


CLS 210/242.3
TXT With oil water skimmer:

    Apparatus under subclass 242.1 having means to remove the top layer of the
    oil water system.


CLS 210/242.4
TXT With oil water sorption means:

    Apparatus under subclass 242.1 having means to soak up a portion of the oil
    water system.


CLS 210/243
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which parts are electrically
    insulated or there is means to discharge electricity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 212+ for
    static electricity discharging of more general utility.


CLS 210/244
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a filter incorporated in a
    portable receptacle not having any flow connections attached thereto, which
    receptacle is provided with (1) a hood, or (2) means forming a complete
    closure of the top side thereof, which closure may have a foraminous
    section provided with means for completely covering such section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    380+,   for a rotating centrifugal extractor element having a removable
    closure.

    464+,   for a portable receptacle draining type filter.

    473+,   for a filter removably supported on a portable container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluid Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    appropriate subclasses, for fluent material handling devices, with receiver
    or receiver coacting means.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 24+ for receptacle closures, subclasses
    694+ for attachments for receptacles.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 189.06+ for a dispenser having a filter.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 175+ for a seat combined with a pail
    or the like for milking operations.


CLS 210/245
TXT Apparatus under subclass 244 in which there is a controlling means mounted
    on or supported by the closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    418+,   for a filter and flow controller, per se.


CLS 210/246
TXT Apparatus under subclass 244 provided with means for holding the cover for
    limited movement with respect to the upper edge of the receptacle so that
    solids will be retained and liquid escape between the cover and the
    receptacle upper edge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    382,    for a centrifugal extractor having a discharge between the upper
    edge of a receptacle and a cover therefor.

    464+,   for a portable receptacle with attached strainer for draining.


CLS 210/247
TXT Apparatus under the class definition provided with a splash plate or
    deflector located downstream of and spaced from a filter medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    456,    for a filter with a prefilt flow director or diverter.


CLS 210/248
TXT Apparatus under the class definition with (1) means for receiving drip or
    overflow, or (2) means to receive the contents of a filter unit when it is
    disassembled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    299+,   particularly subclasses 312+ for a filter and sediment trap with
    drain means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 108+ for a dispenser with drip, leakage or
    waste catching features.


CLS 210/249
TXT Apparatus under the class definition provided with a bracket, hanger or leg
    support for an entire separating assembly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    468,    for a filter having means for supporting it from a receptacle spout.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses particularly subclass 94 for a
    support for a strainer or funnel.


CLS 210/250
TXT Apparatus under subclass 249 in which the filter assembly is supported by
    means extending directly below and freely resting on a base or attached to
    a base.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 188 for leg attaching connections for stands,
    and subclasses 188.1+ for supporting substructure for a stand.


CLS 210/251
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a device in addition to or
    combined with separator structure or liquid purification apparatus (1)
    having functions other than purification or separation, or (2) serving to
    perfect the purification or separation apparatus for its intended purpose.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85+,    for apparatus with a single, indicator, register, recorder or
    inspection means.

    151,    for gas liquid surface contact means and a separator.

    153+,   for treating apparatus of this class in another installation not
    sufficiently included to form a basis of classification in the other art
    class.

    173+,   for a separator structurally combined with a comminutor.

    175+,   for treating apparatus with heat exchange.

    188,    for a liquid separator and a gas separator.

    192,    for treating apparatus with preliminary chemical manufacture.

    239+,   for a convertible feature of treating apparatus.

    241+,   for treating apparatus with a movable support.

    243,    for electrical insulating or discharging.

    249+,   for a support for a separator.

    418+,   for a filter and a flow controller.

    456,    for prefilt restrictors or diverters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 286+ for strainers
    in devices of that type.


CLS 210/252
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising plural distinct treating or
    storage casings connected by means for transferring material from one unit
    to another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172,    for a separator ancillary to a storage tank for a system or
    apparatus having a function external of this class.

    181,    for flow line connected heater or heat exchanger.

    201+,   for similar subject matter with means to add material.


CLS 210/253
TXT Apparatus under subclass 252 in which two or more units are in parallel.


CLS 210/254
TXT Apparatus under subclass 252 in which there is a means to bypass one or
    more units.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130+,   for a fluid pressure responsive bypass.

    433+,   for a bypass around a filter.


CLS 210/255
TXT Apparatus under subclass 252 in which the units or parts thereof are in
    stepped relationship.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262,    for serial diverse units one above another.


CLS 210/256
TXT Apparatus under subclass 252 in which one unit is within another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207+,   for a distinct reactor, tank trough or compartment within a
    gravitational separator.

    315,    for a diverse spaced filter within another.

    337+,   for nested distinct separators in series.

    342,    for one separator within another.


CLS 210/257.1
TXT With storage unit:

    Apparatus under subclass 252 in which at least one of the units merely
    holds liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 571+ for plural tanks or compartments
    connected for serial flow.

    184,    Lubrication, subclass 1.5 for crankcase service apparatus including
    separators.


CLS 210/257.2
TXT Having membrane:

    Apparatus under subclass 257.1 constructed with a filtering means composed
    of a thin, enveloping or lining substance, i.e., membrane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96.2,   for a membrane in an apparatus with constituent mixture variation
    responsive.

    348+,   for apparatus which uses a semipermeable septum which does not
    provide for continuous streams on both sides of the septum.

    433+,   for similar apparatus which uses an ordinary filter septum.

    500.1,  for a membrane, per se.

    541,    for membrane supports, frames, and spaces.

    634+,   for process of using a septum  selective as to composition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, subclass 10 for a sugar solution
    dialyzer.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 252+ for a
    similar device using an electric current.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 4+ for drawing blood from the body, treating
    the blood, and returning it the body.


CLS 210/258
TXT Apparatus under subclass 252 provided with (1) a pump, (2) means to supply
    a gas under pressure to cause fluid flow, or (3) means for applying a
    vacuum to at least one of the units.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    406,    for a filter with a vacuumized filtrate receiver.

    416,    for a filter with a pump, gas pressure or vacuum source.


CLS 210/259
TXT Apparatus under subclas 252 in which the units differ from each other as to
    their separating structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    294+,   for diverse distinct separators.


CLS 210/260
TXT Apparatus under subclass 259 in which more than one operation is
    accomplished in a single unit.


CLS 210/261
TXT Apparatus under subclass 259 in which one unit supports another.


CLS 210/262
TXT Apparatus under subclass 259 in which units are at different levels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255,    for serial units in cascade relationship.

    261,    for serial units in which one supports another.


CLS 210/263
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a bed of discrete particles
    each capable of movement within the bed and readily separable from each
    other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118,    for flow of fluid pressure responsive operation of sand valves.

    189,    for plual chambers with movement of granules therebetween.

    190+,   for a separator with external supply means for regenerating
    material in, water softening systems,

    193,    for a filter with precoat adding or supplying means.

    226,    for a sectional chamber press type filter with a porous filler.

    317,    for spaced filters including a nonself-supporting medium.

    350+,   for a filter with movable means to compress a medium.

    500.1+, for filter materials, particularly subclasses 503+ for diverse
    granular or fibrous materials.

    615,    for processes of aerobic treatment utilizing contact surfaces.

    660+,   for processes involving ion exchange or sorption.

    767+,   for separating processes, particularly subclasses 777+ for
    processes employing precoats or filter-aids, and subclass 80 for separating
    and rehabilitation of a particulate bed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 108+ for solid sorbent
    apparatus for gas separation.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 51 and 278 for processes of and apparatus for
    forming gravel filters in wells.


CLS 210/264
TXT Apparatus under subclass 263 comprising a plurality of compartments, and
    means for using and/or rehabilitating the particles in each compartment
    selectively.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for programming of plural units by means responsive to flow, fluid
    pressure or material level responsive means.

    142,    for program actuated sequentially controlled plural units or
    sections.


CLS 210/265
TXT Apparatus under subclass 263 combined with a gravitational separator.


CLS 210/266
TXT Apparatus under subclass 263 combined with an additional separating means
    other than a particulate material type and spaced therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    265,    for a gravitational separator combined with a particulate material.

    273,    279, 289, and 291+, for a particulate material type separator
    having a fluid distributor even though such distributor be foraminous and
    may incidentally separate large particles.

    283,    for a pervious separator contacting and between particulate beds.


CLS 210/267
TXT Apparatus under subclass 263 in which the bed of separating material is
    contained in a casing mounted for rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    399,    for another filter element mounted within a closed movable casing.


CLS 210/268
TXT Apparatus under subclass 263 in which means is provided for removing
    particles from the bottom of the bed so that the bed of separating material
    as a whole moves downwardly by gravity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189,    for apparatus wherein the particles are moved between plural
    containers or plural compartments in the same container.

    270,    for apparatus which is provided with moving means to pick up and
    redeposit the particles during rehabilitation.


CLS 210/269
TXT Apparatus under subclass 263 in which means is provided for restoring the
    separating medium to the condition it was in before separation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189,    for such a device with a separate rehabilitation chamber.

    190,    for a chamber provided with external regenerating medium supply.

    407+,   for a filter combined with residue removal of liquid agitation
    means.

    656+    and 660+, for processes of ion exchange or sorption involving
    rehabilitation of the separation medium.

    791+,   for separating processes involving rehabilitation of a filtering
    medium.


CLS 210/270
TXT Apparatus under subclass 269 having moving means to pick up particles from
    the bed and redeposit them on the bed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189,    for apparatus wherein the particles are moved between plural
    containers or plural compartments in the same container.

    268,    for a particle type separator with gravity flow of the particles
    from the bottom of the bed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 7+
    for mining combined with separating.


CLS 210/271
TXT Apparatus under subclass 269 having rehabilitation means which moves in a
    path parallel to and above the upper bed surface with or without parts
    projecting into the bed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270,    for apparatus having moving means to pick up and redeposit the
    particles of the separating medium.


CLS 210/272
TXT Apparatus under subclass 271 in which the rehabilitation means is rotatable
    about a stationary axis.


CLS 210/273
TXT Apparatus under subclass 271 which is provided with moving means for
    introducing a fluid to the bed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    274,    for nonsurface traversing means to apply gas to a bed.


CLS 210/274
TXT Apparatus under subclass 269 comprising means to introduce gas into the
    separating medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198.1,  for a separator with means to add a treating fluid, particularly
    subclasses 220+ for a separator with submerged fluid inlet.


CLS 210/275
TXT Apparatus under subclass 269 including means for passing a fluid through
    the medium in a direction of flow during separation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    411,    425 and 427, for similar apparatus in another type of filter.


CLS 210/276
TXT Apparatus under subclass 275 in which mechanical means is provided for
    agitating the bed or removing residue therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273,    for apparatus provided with a movable imbedded fluid distributor
    which functions as an agitator as well as a distributor.


CLS 210/277
TXT Apparatus under subclass 275 in which flow of fluid is controlled by a flow
    controller external of the casing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    190,    for external supply for regenerating medium combinations.

    418+,   for a filter with a flow controller.


CLS 210/278
TXT Apparatus under subclass 277 in which a single valve controls communication
    with three or more flow lines.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    424+,   for a filter with a multiway valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 625+ for multiway valves, per se.


CLS 210/279
TXT Apparatus under subclass 275 having a stationary fluid distributor
    extending into the bed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    289     and 291+, for another particulate bed and a fluid distributor.


CLS 210/280
TXT Apparatus under subclass 269 in which means in provided for agitating the
    bed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    271+,   for apparatus including bed surface traversing means which may also
    function as an agitator.

    276,    for a particulate bed separator with backwash means and agitator.

    407+,   for other types of filters with residue remover or agitators.


CLS 210/281
TXT Apparatus under subclass 269 wherein a closed casing which holds
    particulate material is provided with an opening through which the
    separatory material may be reached, or through which solid regenerating
    material may be inserted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    268,    for gravity flow of particulate material in a separator.


CLS 210/282
TXT Apparatus under subclass 263 in which separatory material is encased in a
    magazine type holder or container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237+,   for handle assembly means.

    465,    for a separator provided with handles for draining.

    470,    for a handled filter.

    484,    for a shaped filter element with a foraminous container or sheath.


CLS 210/283
TXT Apparatus under subclass 263 comprising plural beds separated by and each
    contacting pervious means therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266,    for a particulate type separator combined with a spaced
    nonparticulate separating means.


CLS 210/284
TXT Apparatus under subclass 263 which comprises a plurality of beds of
    particulate material which are spaced from each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266,    for spaced particulate and nonparticulate type separators.

    283,    for a pervious separator which contacts and is between beds.

    314+,   for spaced diverse filters.


CLS 210/285
TXT Apparatus under subclass 263 provided with at least one baffle completely
    or partially embedded in the particulate material.


CLS 210/286
TXT Apparatus under subclass 285 in which the baffle extends vertically.


CLS 210/287
TXT Apparatus under subclass 263 wherein the separatory material is confined
    within a container which is imperforate except for fluid conduit openings
    or access openings closed in normal operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    435+,   for fixed filter mediums within a flow line connected closed casing.


CLS 210/288
TXT Apparatus under subclass 287 in which all the inlets and outlets to the
    casing are located at the same end of the casing, one communicating with
    the bed by means of a conduit surrounded by the bed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    439,    for a nonparticulate type filter having similar structure.


CLS 210/289
TXT Apparatus under subclass 287 which comprises particular means for
    introducing the untreated liquid to the bed of separatory material,
    particular means for collecting treated liquid from the bed of separatory
    material, or particular strainer means within the casing.


CLS 210/290
TXT Apparatus under subclass 263 having a bed comprising a plurality of layers
    of particulate material which are in contact with each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    283,    for a pervious divider between and contacting the beds.

    284,    for similar apparatus in which the beds are spaced from each other.

    286,    for vertical layers.


CLS 210/291
TXT Apparatus under subclass 263 comprising particular means for introducing
    liquid into a bed of separating material, particular means for removing
    liquid from a bed of separating material, or particular strainer means
    within the casing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172,    for separators ancillary to a storage tank.

    289,    for apparatus of this type which is within a flow line or flow line
    connected closed casing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 36 for fluid distributing
    or collecting apparatus buried in the earth.


CLS 210/292
TXT Apparatus under subclass 291 in which the liquid distributing means is
    provided with (1) an imperforate cap or hood extending around or over it,
    or (2) caps or hoods over openings in the distributor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118,    for a sand valve, i.e., nonclosing check valve associated with a
    sand bed.

    456,    for a filter with prefilt flow director or distributor.


CLS 210/293
TXT Apparatus under subclass 291 wherein the bed retainer comprises a pervious
    floor.


CLS 210/294
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having plural separation means
    identifiable as separate units, (1) of different kinds, or (2) of the same
    kind but differing in shape or other structure other than different mesh
    size.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124,    for float control between two separators.

    132,    for a fluid pressure responsive by-pass and an additional separator.

    142,    for plural units operated by a program actuator.

    151,    for gas-liquid surface contact means and a separator.

    155,    for plural or diverse flumescreens.

    182+,   for a heater or heat exchanger and diverse separators.

    188,    for a liquid treater and gas separator.

    189,    for plural chambers with movement of granules therebetween.

    195.1,  for recirculation between serially connected distinct treating or
    storage units.

    200+,   for plural distinct separators and means to add a treating material.

    223,    for a magnetic and another separator.

    252+,   for serially connected distinct treating units with or without a
    storage unit.

    263+,   particularly subclasses 265, 266 and 284, for particulate bed type
    separators.

    322+,   for plural distinct separators of the same kind.

    483+,   particularly subclasses 488+ for single filter units formed by
    contacting filter mediums.

    521+,   for superposed compartment gravitational separators.

    663+,   for processes of ion exchange or sorption with preliminary
    separation.

    806,    for plural separating processes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 12.1+ for
    combined classifying, separating and assorting of solids.


CLS 210/295
TXT Apparatus under subclass 294 in which at least one of the diverse distinct
    separators is a filter.


CLS 210/296
TXT Apparatus under subclass 295 in which a separating medium comprises a
    liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    511,    for a single operation apparatus using liquid as a separating
    medium.

    633     and 634+, for separating processes involving extraction from a
    liquid by solvent or solute.


CLS 210/297
TXT Apparatus under subclass 295 in which there is means to give the filter
    medium motion during the filtering operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359+,   for movable medium filters, per se.


CLS 210/298
TXT Apparatus under subclass 295 having driven mechanical means to remove
    residue or sediment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    390+,   for a moving filter medium and a residue remover.

    407+,   for a fixed filter mdedum and a residue remover.

    523+,   for a gravitational separator and a mechanical sediment mover.


CLS 210/299
TXT Apparatus under subclass 295 including a feature depending upon the
    different specific gravities of constituents of a liquid mixture for
    removing a constituent or trapping it in a recess.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248,    for drip or overflow catchers or means for receiving the contents
    of a filter unit when the casing is opened.


CLS 210/300
TXT Apparatus under subclass 299 in which the liquid is passed through (1) at
    least two filter media, a constituent trap being positioned therebetween,
    or (2) at least two constituent traps with a filter medium therebetween.


CLS 210/301
TXT Apparatus under subclass 300 in which at least two constituent traps are
    provided.


CLS 210/302
TXT Apparatus under subclass 299 provided with a valve in a flow line upstream
    of the separating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136,    for a check valve upstream of a separator.


CLS 210/303
TXT Apparatus under subclass 299 having a valve arranged to isolate a sediment
    chamber from a filter unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    418+,   for a filter with a flow controller.


CLS 210/304
TXT Apparatus under subclass 299 in which there is a spiral or convolute baffle
    or tangential liquid inlet to give the liquid a whirling motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    512.1,  for a gravitational separator having tangential flow or centrifugal
    fluid action.


CLS 210/305
TXT Apparatus under subclass 299 provided with a baffle member to deflect
    liquid entering a sediment chamber or a baffle within a sediment chamber to
    catch sediment or quiet flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304,    for a sediment trap and filter with spiral or convolute baffle
    means or a tangential inlet.


CLS 210/306
TXT Apparatus under subclass 305 in which the baffle deflects prefilt from the
    filtering medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    456,    for a filter with prefilt a flow distributor or diverter.


CLS 210/307
TXT Apparatus under subclass 299 in which the sediment removing, trapping or
    removing feature is downstream of the filter, to remove sediment from the
    filtrate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300+,   for alternate traps and filters.


CLS 210/308
TXT Apparatus under subclass 299 in which a sediment trap directly communicates
    with the interior of a tubular filter element.


CLS 210/309
TXT Apparatus under subclass 308 in which the filter element and the sediment
    chamber means are directly attached to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    454,    for a filter within a flow line connected casing which filter
    element is attached to a casing closure.


CLS 210/310
TXT Apparatus under subclass 299 in which the liquid flows generally axially
    through a conduit containing the filter medium and there is means
    communicating with the sediment trap, which extends laterally of the axis
    of the conduit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    447,    for a laterally removable filter element.


CLS 210/311
TXT Apparatus under subclass 299 in which entering liquid flows downwardly and
    then passes through the filter medium in an upward direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305+,   for filter and constituent trap means with a baffle preceding or
    within the sediment trap.

    456,    for a filter with a prefilt flow distributor or diverter.


CLS 210/312
TXT Apparatus under subclass 299 provided with means discharging sediment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    422+,   for a closed casing filter and a variable flow controller which
    casing has plural outlets for flushing the casing or diverting prefilt
    around the filter medium.

    433.1,  for a filter in a casing having filtered and unfiltered passages.

    533+,   for a gravitational separator with a closure or valve controlled
    discharge.


CLS 210/313
TXT Apparatus under subclass 312 in which the drain means is controlled by a
    valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109+,   for automatic discharge of treated material.


CLS 210/314
TXT Apparatus under subclass 295 which comprises a plurality of isolated
    filters or filter elements abutting along a surface to enclose an empty
    space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323+,   for plural distinct similar filters.


CLS 210/315
TXT Apparatus under subclass 314 wherein one of the filters surrounds the other.


CLS 210/316
TXT Apparatus under subclass 314 wherein one filter is arranged in such a
    manner that entering liquid contacts the filter before contacting any part
    of the casing, or leaving liquid once having contacted the filter, does not
    contact the casing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    335+,   for plural similar filters arranged for series prefilt flow.

    338     and 342, for plural distinct similar filter elements arranged one
    within another.

    464+,   for a portable receptacle draining filter.


CLS 210/317
TXT Apparatus under subclass 314 in which one or more of the filters include
    loose or flaccid nonparticulate material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263+,   for particulate material type separators, particularly subclass 266
    for particulate and spaced nonparticulate separators.

    484,    for filter medium within a foraminous container or sheath.

    496,    for shaped bound, fused or matted filter mediums.

    500+,   for filter materials.


CLS 210/318
TXT Apparatus under subclass 314 in which the separate filters are of such
    shapes that they cannot be nested or superimposed.


CLS 210/319
TXT Apparatus under subclass 294 in which there is a mechanical agitator to
    impel liquid to break up, remove or prevent scum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198+,   particularly subclasses 207+ and 219, for a separator with means to
    add material.

    407+,   for a filter having a fixed medium combined with an agitator.


CLS 210/320
TXT Apparatus under subclass 294 in which there is a baffle perpendicular to
    the direction of liquid flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    348+,   for apparatus which uses a semipermable septum which does not
    provide for continuous streams on both sides of the septum.

    513+,   for a gravitational separator.


CLS 210/321.6
TXT CASING DIVIDED BY MEMBRANE INTO SECTIONS HAVING INLET(S) AND/OR OUTLET(S):

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising a casing sealingly divided
    by a barrier comprising a semipermeable membrane into at least two
    sections, each section having means providing liquid inlet and/or outlet
    provided by said semipermeable membrane.


CLS 210/321.61
TXT Membrane secured with adhesive of specified composition:

    Apparatus under subclass 321.6 including an adhesive of specified
    composition securing at least one membrane.


CLS 210/321.62
TXT Antithrombogenic membrane:

    Apparatus under subclass 321.6 including at least one membrane having at
    least a portion thereof modified (e.g., by chemical treatment or ionizing
    radiation) to be antithrombogenic.


CLS 210/321.63
TXT Rotating mechanical agitator adjacent membrane:

    Apparatus under subclass 321.6 including a rotating mechanical agitator
    (e.g., stirrer) adjacent a membrane.


CLS 210/321.64
TXT Plural diverse structured membranes within a single casing:

    Apparatus under subclass 321.6 including plural diverse structured
    membranes (e.g., stirrer) adjacent a membrane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    641,    for processes utilizing plural diverse membranes.


CLS 210/321.65
TXT Permeated liquid quantity measurement or control:

    Apparatus under subclass 321.6 including means to measure and/or control a
    quantity of liquid which has permeated through a membrane (e.g.,
    ultraflitrate, dialysate, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    929,    for hemoultrafiltrate volume measurement or control processes.


CLS 210/321.66
TXT Energy recovery from treated liquid:

    Apparatus under subclass 321.6 including means for energy recovery (e.g.,
    turbine, flow work exchanger, etc.), from a treated liquid.


CLS 210/321.67
TXT Membrane movement during purification:

    Apparatus under subclass 321.6 including means causing membrane movement
    during liquid purification.


CLS 210/321.68
TXT Nontranslatory rotary:

    Apparatus under subclass 321.67 wherein said means causes nontranslatory
    rotary membrane movement during liquid purification.


CLS 210/321.69
TXT With membrane cleaning or sterilizing means (other than by filter movement
    or rotating agitator):

    Apparatus under subclass 321.6 including means providing membrane cleaning
    (removing accumulated undesired material) or sterilizing (destroying a
    pathogenic micro-organism), other than by a rotating mechanical agitator or
    membrane movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    321.63, and 321.67, for membrane cleaning apparatus including a rotating
    mechanical agitator or membrane movement.

    636,    for processes of cleaning or sterilizing.


CLS 210/321.7
TXT Solid cleaning material (e.g., balls):

    Apparatus under subclass 321.69 wherein said means providing membrane
    cleaning or sterilizing includes a plurality of solid discrete object other
    than a rotating mechanical agitator, e.g., particles, granules, sponge
    balls, beads, etc., and means for moving said object, adjacent to and/or in
    contact with, a membrane, for cleaning or sterilizing said membrane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    321.63, for apparatus including a rotating mechanical agitator.


CLS 210/321.71
TXT Dialyzer with dialysate proportioning means:

    Apparatus under subclass 321.6 including a dialyzer and means for
    proportioning dialysate fed to said dialyzer.


CLS 210/321.72
TXT Each section having inlet(s) and outlet(s):

    Apparatus under subclass 321.6 further comprising each said section having
    at least one means providing liquid inlet and at least one means providing
    liquid outlet.


CLS 210/321.73
TXT Noncoiled nonannular cross section tube:

    Apparatus under subclass 321.72 wherein at least on e membrane is, (a)
    generally tubular, (b) noncylindrical in defining a cross section (said
    cross section being taken perpendicularly to the central axis of the tube)
    which is nonannular (e.g., inner and/or outer surface(s) define noncircular
    cross section), and (c) not coiled.

    (1)     Note.  A coiled flatted membrane tube is provided for in subclasses
    321.74 and 321.83.


CLS 210/321.74
TXT Coiled membrane:

    Apparatus under subclass 321.72 said semipermeable membrane is a strip or
    flattened tube (i.e., is noncyclindrical) which is spirally coiled (e.g.,
    including either a planar spiral or a helical spiral).


CLS 210/321.75
TXT Planar membrane:

    Apparatus under subclass 321.72 wherein said semipermeable membrane is in
    an essentially planar configuration.


CLS 210/321.76
TXT Spiral flow:

    Apparatus under subclass 321.75 including means providing spiral liquid
    flow (moving essentially in a plane around a center with increasing or
    decreasing distance from said center) adjacent a membrane(s).


CLS 210/321.77
TXT Pleated membrane:

    Apparatus under subclass 321.72 wherein said semipermeable membrane is
    pleated (i.e., folded back and forth).


CLS 210/321.78
TXT Cylindrical membrane:

    Apparatus under subclass 321.72 wherein said semipermeable membrane
    comprises at least one hollow generally cylindrical tube.


CLS 210/321.79
TXT Plural cylindrical membrane all connected for parallel flow:

    Apparatus under subclass 321.78 including plural cylindrical semipermeable
    membrane tubes all or which, are connected for parallel flow therethrough
    (i.e., each said tube has, a first end directly communicating with a first
    end directly communicating with a first header, and a second end directly
    communication with a second Header), and are within a single casing.


CLS 210/321.8
TXT All cylindrical membranes are parallel:

    Apparatus under subclass 321.79 wherein all said plural cylindrical
    semipermeable membrane tubes are parallel with respect to each other.


CLS 210/321.81
TXT With embedded baffle:

    Apparatus under subclass 321.8 wherein a baffle which is a solid material,
    which serves as a flow restrictor, diverter or distributor, is embedded
    between said plural parallel cylindrical semipermeable membrane tubes such
    that, a straight line drown from an exterior active surface (e.g., a
    membranae tube sheet, etc.), or any one of said tubes, perpendicular to a
    longitudinal axis of that tube, to an exterior active surface of any other
    of said tubes, intersects said baffle.


CLS 210/321.82
TXT Noncoiled nonannular cross section tube:

    Apparatus under subclass 321.6 wherein at least one membrane is, (a)
    generally tubular, (b) noncylindrical in defining a cross section (said
    cross section being taken perpendicularly to the central axis of the tube)
    which is nonannular (e.g., inner and/or outer surface(s) define noncircular
    cross section, and (c) not coiled.

    (1)     Note.  A coiled flattened membrane tube is provided for in
    subclasses 321.74 and 321.83.


CLS 210/321.83
TXT Coiled membrane:

    Apparatus under subclass 321.6 wherein said semipermeable membrane is a
    strip or flattened tube (i.e., is noncylindrical), which is spirally coiled
    (e.g., including either a planar spiral or a helical spiral).


CLS 210/321.84
TXT Planar membrane:

    Apparatus under subclass 321.6 wherein said semipermeable membrane is in an
    essentially planar configuration.


CLS 210/321.85
TXT Spiral flow:

    Apparatus under subclass 321.84 including means providing spiral liquid
    flow (moving essentially in a plane around a center with increasing or
    decreasing distance from said center adjacent a membrane(s).


CLS 210/321.86
TXT Pleated membrane:

    Apparatus under subclass 321.6 wherein said semipermeable membrane is
    pleated, i.e., folded back and forth.


CLS 210/321.87
TXT Cylindrical membrane:

    Apparatus under subclass 321.6 wherein said semipermeable membrane
    comprises at least on hollow, generally cylindrical tube.


CLS 210/321.88
TXT Plural cylindrical membranes all connected for parallel flow:

    Apparatus under subclass 321.87 including plural cylindrical semipermeable
    membrane tubes all of which, are connected for parallel flow therethrough
    (i.e., each said tube has a first end directly communication with a first
    header, and a second end directly communication with a second header), and
    are within a single ceasing.


CLS 210/321.89
TXT All cylindrical membranes are parallel:

    Apparatus under subclass 321.88 wherein all said plural cylindrical
    semipermeable membrane tubes are parallel with respect to each other.


CLS 210/321.9
TXT With embedded baffle:

    Apparatus under subclass 321.89 wherein a baffle which is a solid material,
    which serves as a flow restrictor, diverter or distributor, is  embedded
    between said plural parrallel cylindrical semipermeable membranse tubes
    such that, a straight linek drawn fro an exterior active surface (e.g., a
    membrane tube surface not covered by casting resin, tube sheet, etc.) of
    any one of said tubes perpendicular to a lingitudinal axis of that tube, to
    an exterior active surface of any other of said tubes, intersects said
    baffle.


CLS 210/322
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising two or more distinct
    separators each of which treats a portion of a liquid mixture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252+,   for serially connected distinct treating units with or without
    storage units.

    294+,   for diverse distinct separators.

    488+,   for superimposed contacting filter mediums forming a single element
    even though defined as differing in kind.

    521,    for a gravitational separator with superposed compartments.


CLS 210/323.1
TXT Filters:

    Apparatus under subclass 322 in which there are plural distinct filter
    units.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    314,    for diverse types of filters in a single unit.


CLS 210/323.2
TXT Tublar:

    Apparatus under subclass 323.1 tubelike in form with filtration through the
    perpendicular axis of the tube.


CLS 210/324
TXT Apparatus under subclass 323.1 which are movable for material treating
    purposes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359+,   for a movable filter which may comprise compartments or sections
    abutted to form a single effective surface.


CLS 210/325
TXT Apparatus under subclass 324 in which each rotates about an individual axis
    and also moves about another axis, the construction being such that
    rotation about both axes are or can be continuous during operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370,    for a centrifugal extractor wherein the filter medium has plural
    motions about a fixed point.


CLS 210/326
TXT Apparatus under subclass 324 comprising plural rotary filter drums arranged
    on parallel axes which drums are of the type in which prefilt contacts the
    outer periphery of both drums simultaneously and the filtrate flows to
    their interiors in parallel.


CLS 210/327
TXT Apparatus under subclass 324 with plural cleaning means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    330+,   for plural moving filter units connected for group operation.

    334,    for plural fixed units and alternating cleaners.


CLS 210/328
TXT Apparatus under subclass 324 connected by hinges or mounted on parallel
    pivots so that they can be partially rotated to dump the cake (residue).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370,    for a centrifugal extractor wherein the basket is made up of plural
    sections which are pivotally mounted for discharging the portion of the
    residue thereon.

    385,    for a filter unit having plural motions.


CLS 210/329
TXT Apparatus under subclass 324 in which at least one filter and its support
    moves with respect to another, usually for cleaning while at least one
    remains in filtering service.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232+,   particularly subclasses 237+ for a separator with repair or
    assembly means for removal of a filter from its casing.

    328,    for filters comprising pivotally mounted sections.

    341,    for parallel units individually controlled, so that a selected unit
    can be removed.


CLS 210/330
TXT Apparatus under subclass 324 having means connecting them so that they move
    together as a connected group.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359+,   for moving filter medium types in which the medium is continuous or
    comprises abutting filtering sections forming in effect a continuous medium
    except for separating strips or partitions.


CLS 210/331
TXT Apparatus under subclass 330 comprising spaced wall type filter elements,
    e.g., multiple hollow circular leaves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327,    for alternating moving elements and cleaning means.

    486+,   for similar elements, per se.


CLS 210/332
TXT Apparatus under subclass 323 in which there is means for removing residue
    or for agitating the liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    298,    for diverse separators having mechanical residue or sediment
    removers.

    407,    for a single filter having a residue remover or agitator.


CLS 210/333.01
TXT Backwash of blowback:

    Apparatus under subclass 332 having means for causing a reverse flow
    through the filter medium that is out of service.


CLS 210/333.1
TXT Sequential backwash:

    Apparatus under subclass 333.01 having means to successively clean the
    filter units.


CLS 210/334
TXT Apparatus under subclass 332 in which the filter units and cleaning means
    are arranged in alternation.


CLS 210/335
TXT Apparatus under subclass 323.1 which are in series.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252+,   for serially connected distinct treating units.

    300+,   for alternate traps and filters in series.

    314+,   for spaced diverse filters.

    489+,   for abutted or superimposed members forming a single filter
    element, arranged for series flow through the members.


CLS 210/336
TXT Apparatus under subclass 335 in which the flow of fluid is in a tortuous or
    zig-zag path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    285+,   for baffles imbedded in a particulate bed.


CLS 210/337
TXT Apparatus under subclass 335 arranged in superimposed or nested relation,
    each unit being removable from the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315,    for diverse concentric spaced filters.

    342,    for concentric filter elements arranged for parallel flow.


CLS 210/338
TXT Apparatus under subclass 337 in which the nested units are concentric
    filter elements.


CLS 210/339
TXT Apparatus under subclass 335 comprising a frame or casing having inwardly
    extending flanges or protuberances supporting the filter elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    451+,   for a filter element supported within a casing by an internal fixed
    shoulder.


CLS 210/340
TXT Apparatus under subclass 323.1 having means for interrupting flow to at
    least one filter unit while another remains in service, said filters being
    in parallel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    418+,   for a single filter with a flow controller.


CLS 210/341
TXT Apparatus under subclass 340 in which there is provision for using
    different filter elements with a common receiver and each filter element
    has an individual flow control means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329,    for relatively movable filters which may act to cut off flow.


CLS 210/342
TXT Apparatus under subclass 323.1 wherein the filter units are arranged one
    within another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315,    for spaced diverse filters, one within another.

    337+,   for nested filter units arranged for series prefilt flow.


CLS 210/343
TXT Apparatus under subclass 323.1 in which the units alternate with liquid
    receivers, alternate receivers acting respectively as liquid inlet and
    discharge means, at least one of a pair of liquid receivers separating one
    filter medium from another and contacting the separated filter mediums on
    opposite faces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    417,    for similar devices in which the alternate liquid receivers are
    located within a continuous body of filter medium.


CLS 210/344
TXT Apparatus under subclass 323.1 in which each filter unit comprises a filter
    medium and an imperforate pan-like liquid receiver substantially
    coextensive with the filter medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224,    for a sectional chamber press type filter.

    492,    for stacked dissimilar elements, the entire stack forming a single
    unit.


CLS 210/345
TXT Apparatus under subclass 323.1 in which the units are radially arranged or
    which are connected to means extending radially from a central header.


CLS 210/346
TXT Apparatus under subclass 323.1 in which the units each comprise a filter
    medium enclosing a space, the filter medium having separate or distinct
    walls.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331,    for similar structure among movable elements.

    486+,   for a spaced wall type filter unit.

    492,    for filter elements divided into alternate prefilt and filtrate
    spaces by alternately arranged dissimilar elements.


CLS 210/347
TXT Apparatus under subclass 346 in which there is a header extending centrally
    of the group of spaced wall type filter elements.


CLS 210/348
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which constituents of a prefilt
    (usually solids and liquid) are separated by passing the prefilt through a
    medium having openings which retain at least one constituent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclass 286 for strainers
    specialized for that class.

    55,     Gas Separation, appropriate subclasses beginning with subclass 474
    for gas filters.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 227+ for screens peculiar to wells.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 233+ for
    sifters for solid material.


CLS 210/349
TXT Apparatus under subclass 348 provided with means dampening pulsations in
    liquid flow or for trapping a gas, usually air.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    410,    for a device which traps a gas and then releases it to blowback a
    filter medium.


CLS 210/350
TXT Apparatus under subclass 348 in which a filter medium is enclosed by a
    receptacle and provided with adjustable or movable means to compress the
    filtering material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226,    for a sectional pressure type filter and porous filler.


CLS 210/351
TXT Apparatus under subclass 350 including means external of a closed
    receptacle to actuate or adjust the means which compresses the filter
    medium.


CLS 210/352
TXT Apparatus under subclass 350 wherein the means to compress comprises a
    spring encased by the receptacle.


CLS 210/353
TXT Apparatus under subclass 348 in which there is a cleaning means, as loose
    abrading particles or wiping elements, which are free to move, (not
    attached to a retaining means).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263+,   for a filter having loose material acting as a filter medium.


CLS 210/354
TXT Apparatus under subclass 348 in which either the filter medium, residue
    remover or agitator is moved by the fluid being treated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97+,    for fluid responsive controls, particularly subclasses 121+ for
    float responsive controls.

    242,    for a float supported separator.

    396+,   for a movable medium and solid cleaning member which may be forced
    against the medium by fluid pressure.


CLS 210/355
TXT Apparatus under subclass 354 in which the only element moved by the fluid
    is a residue remover.


CLS 210/356
TXT Apparatus under subclass 354 in which the filter element is so mounted or
    specially constructed as to be flexed or compressed by movement of liquid
    therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359+,   for means to flex an anchored filter.

    391+,   for moving filter mediums and blow back means in which flexing may
    occur incidental to such operation.


CLS 210/357
TXT Apparatus under subclass 348 in which a cleaning member is extendable
    between filter mediums or through openings in the filter medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334,    for distinct filters alternating with residue removers.

    396+,   for a movable filter and an adjacent cleaner.


CLS 210/358
TXT Apparatus under subclass 348 in which there is an imperforate drum having a
    filter element extending across a segment, covering an arc, or covering
    either or both end walls of the drum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    399,    for another type of movable sealed casing enclosing a filter medium.


CLS 210/359
TXT Apparatus under subclass 348 in which the filter medium is capable of
    movement for treatment purposes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for flow fluid pressure or material level responsive movement of a
    filter medium.

    122,    for float control of a movable separator.

    154+,   for a flume type movable filter.

    178,    for a movable separator with a heat exchanger.

    189     and 263+, particularly subclasses 267 and 268 for particulate
    material type separators.

    232,    for separators combined with handling means.

    297,    for diverse distinct separators including a movable filter medium.

    324+,   for plural movable separating elements.

    354+,   for motion due to flowing fluids.

    447,    for a closed casing having provision for laterial removal of the
    filter element.

    680+,   for processes involving movement of filter medium.


CLS 210/360.1
TXT Centrifugal extractor:

    Apparatus under subclass 359 wherein structure including the filter medium
    is particularly adapted for rapid movement about an axis of rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144,    for a filter automatically controlled in response to vibration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 58 for a
    centrifugal filter combined with a distinct and separate drying unit or for
    rotary work holders acting as driers, and see search notes for other
    devices involving the use of centrifugal force.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 76+ for
    centrifugal pots and guides.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 23+ for washing
    machines having centrifugal extractor features.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 52+ for centrifugal coating apparatus.

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, subclass 19 for sugar treatment
    including purging and molding centrifugals.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclass 384 for paper making
    apparatus utilizing centrifugal force to dewater the slurry on the mold
    surface.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 136 for a cover latch
    control interlocked with driving mechanism for a centrifugal extractor.

    494,    Imperforate Bowl:  Centrifugal Separators, appropriate subclasses,
    for apparatus for breaking up a mixture of fluids or fluent substances into
    two or more components by centrifuging within a generally solid-walled,
    receptacle-like member, and see especially subclass 36 for a separator of
    that class provided with filtering means.


CLS 210/360.2
TXT With inward flow of feed component:

    Apparatus under subclass 360.1 wherein at least a portion of the medium
    moves in an inward direction.


CLS 210/361
TXT Apparatus under subclass 360.1 in which means are provided for individually
    supporting articles for the removal of liquid therefrom, e.g., honey
    extractors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 58 for
    centrifugal devices for removing liquid from articles, e.g., honey from
    combs not having any means for separating by filtration or straining.


CLS 210/362
TXT Apparatus under subclass 361 in which the position of the article
    supporting means is reversible relative to the axis of rotation to
    alternaterly present opposite sides of the article away from such axis.


CLS 210/363
TXT Apparatus under subclass 360.1 wherein adjustable means is provided to
    position the center of gravity of the structure on the geometric axis of
    rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145+,   for variable rotation condition responsive control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 572+ for flywheels or
    rotors with balancing or vibration dampening means defining no features of
    separator construction.


CLS 210/364
TXT Apparatus under subclass 360.1 wherein the filter medium is mounted on a
    shaft and is enclosed by a nonrotating casing, both the rotating structure
    and casing being mounted for gyratory movement as a unit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 637+ for machinery supports.


CLS 210/365
TXT Apparatus under subclass 360.1 wherein the filter medium is mounted upon a
    rotating shaft, both the filter medium and shaft being mounted for gyratory
    movement as a unit.


CLS 210/366
TXT Apparatus under subclass 365 wherein the mounting is above the filter
    medium.


CLS 210/367
TXT Apparatus under subclass 360.1 wherein the filter medium is gyratorily
    supported.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    325,    for plural centrifugal extractors with planetary motion.


CLS 210/368
TXT Apparatus under subclass 360.1 with means for slowing or stopping rotation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 4+ for brake and power
    transmission control of general utility.


CLS 210/369
TXT Apparatus under subclass 360.1 including structure to discharge residue.


CLS 210/370
TXT Apparatus under subclass 369 comprising means giving the filter medium, in
    whole or in part, an additional motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232+,   for means assembling and disassembling a filter, particularly
    subclasses 237+ for a filter with hoist or handle means.


CLS 210/371
TXT Apparatus under subclass 369 comprising a variable controller for flow of
    residue.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    418+,   for fixed filter and flow controller and see the search notes
    thereunder.


CLS 210/372
TXT Apparatus under subclass 369 in which discharge of the residue is effected
    or controlled by means engaging it, e.g., doctor blades.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 256.5 for a
    moving surface scraper, wiper or brush of general application.


CLS 210/373
TXT Apparatus under subclass 372 in which the residue engaging means is
    stationarily mounted.


CLS 210/374
TXT Apparatus under subclass 372 in which the residue engaging means is
    rotatably mounted with respect to the filter medium.


CLS 210/375
TXT Apparatus under subclass 374 in which the residue engaging means is
    pivotably mounted.


CLS 210/376
TXT Apparatus under subclass 372 in which the residue engaging means is axially
    reciprocable parallel to the axis of rotation.


CLS 210/377
TXT Apparatus under subclass 360.1 within the rotating filter medium for
    distributing the incoming material feed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213     and 214, for a moving filter element having a movable distributor
    for introducing a treating material to the interior thereof.


CLS 210/378
TXT Apparatus under subclass 360.1 including filtrate receiving means provided
    with a plurality of separate outlets.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215,    for similar structure having means to add a treating material
    within the separator.


CLS 210/379
TXT Apparatus under subclass 360.1 in which the separating structure rotates
    about an upright axis and in which the filtrate discharge therefrom is
    restricted to a zone at or adjacent the top thereof, combined with a
    filtrate receiving trough disposed above the bottom of the rotating
    structure and surrounding the filtrate discharge.


CLS 210/380.1
TXT Rotating element construction:

    Apparatus under subclass 360.1 comprising the rotating separator structure,
    per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    369+,   for a tapered basket for discharging residue.

    483+,   particularly subclass 497 for a cylindrical or conical filter
    medium of general application.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 200+ for a container cover in which no
    special features peculiar to rotatable extractor operation are defined.


CLS 210/380.2
TXT Laundry:

    Apparatus under subclass 380.1 for washing or drying clothes.


CLS 210/380.3
TXT Horizontal axis:

    Apparatus under subclass 380.1 which rotates around horizontal axis.


CLS 210/381
TXT Apparatus under subclass 380.1 including inwardly extending partitions
    dividing the interior of the separating structure into compartments.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 109 for a
    compartmented drier drum.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 143 for a
    compartmented tumbling and washing drum.


CLS 210/382
TXT Apparatus under subclass 380.1 in which the separating structure rotates
    about an upright axis, and its filtrate discharge is restricted to a zone
    at or adjacent the top.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246,    for a portable receptacle having a cover limited as to its opening
    movement.

    379,    for a filtrate receiving trough at or adjacent the top of the
    separating structure.


CLS 210/383
TXT Apparatus under subclass 359 having separate agitating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167+,   for a structural closed circulating system.

    194+,   for recirculation means.

    407,    for a fixed filter medium and an agitator or a cleaner, and see the
    search notes thereto.


CLS 210/384
TXT Apparatus under subclass 359 comprising means for vibrating the filter
    medium which is moving continuously in one direction, e.g., belt or drum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    388,    for other types of vibrating movable filters.


CLS 210/385
TXT Apparatus under subclass 359 in which the filter unit has more than one
    motion, e.g., rotation and translation or rotation on plural axes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323+,   for plural movable filter elements which may have plural motions.

    370,    for a centrifugal extractor having plural motions of the filter
    medium.

    384,    for a unidirectional motion filter and vibrator for the medium.


CLS 210/386
TXT Apparatus under subclass 359 in which there are rolls or confining members
    which contact the residue on the moving medium, e.g., for compacting,
    shielding or takeoff.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401,    for a belt type filter superimposed on a moving support.

    402+,   for a drum filter.


CLS 210/387
TXT Apparatus under subclass 359 unrollable from a spool or equivalent source
    so as to present successive areas for the filtering operation.


CLS 210/388
TXT Apparatus under subclass 359 in which the filter medium vibrates or has
    motion back and forth in a plane parallel to the surface of the filtering
    medium during filtration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    354,    for a filter medium flexed by fluid flow.

    384,    for a vibrator acting on a unidirectional motion filter medium.

    385,    for a filter having plural motions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 325+,
    331, 333+, and 341 for shaking sifters for solids, and subclasses 437+ for
    reciprocating liquid treatment stratifiers.


CLS 210/389
TXT Apparatus under subclass 388 in which the prefilt is fed in at one point of
    a filter medium, usually one end, and moves along it.


CLS 210/390
TXT Apparatus under subclass 359 supported by a movable valve part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    385,    for a filter element having at least two motions.

    395,    for a moving filter with cleaning means so connected to a valve
    that movement of the medium actuates the valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 547+ for a movable strainer for gas
    separation combined with flow control means.


CLS 210/391
TXT Apparatus under subclass 359 having means for removing residue.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for flow, fluid pressure or material level responsive cleaning
    movement of a filter medium.

    158,    for a movable flume stream type strainer with cleaning means.

    216+,   for moving filter medium and means for adding a treating material.

    369+,   for a centrifugal extractor with residue removing means.

    386,    for rolls or confining members which may act as residue removers.

    399,    for a movable casing which may clean by merely reversing the casing
    position.

    407,    for residue remover for a fixed filter medium and see the search
    notes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 274+ for paper making
    apparatus having means to clean or condition a porous or foraminous member.


CLS 210/392
TXT Apparatus under subclass 391 having (1) a member fixed in position which
    contacts the filter medium or its support, or (2) a member actuating valves
    attached to a moving filter medium or its support; either (1) or (2) acting
    to block fluid flow through part of the moving filter medium.


CLS 210/393
TXT Apparatus under subclass 391 having blowback or backwash cleaning means and
    another cleaning means, e.g., scraper or brush.


CLS 210/394
TXT Apparatus under subclass 391 in which the moving filter medium encloses a
    space and the cleaning means acts to return residue to said space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194+,   for recirculation.

    403,    for an internal feed type rotary drum  filter without cleaning
    means.


CLS 210/395
TXT Apparatus under subclass 391 in which flow of fluids is controlled by valve
    means actuated by the moving medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142,    for valves connected to a moving filter medium in combination with
    programming means.

    390,    for filter medium supported by and movable with a valve member.

    392,    for a fixed member operating valves attached to a moving filter
    unit.


CLS 210/396
TXT Apparatus under subclass 391 comprising a scraper, wiper, abrader, cutter,
    brush or similar solid member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    372,    for a centrifugal extractor with a residue engaging means.

    393,    for a scraper, cutter or brush combined with backwash or blowback.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 256.5 for
    moving surface scrapers of general application.


CLS 210/397
TXT Apparatus under subclass 396 having plural outlets from a casing for the
    medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    433,    for divided filtered and unfiltered liquid passages and see notes
    thereunder.


CLS 210/398
TXT Apparatus under subclass 359 within a casing sealed except for necessary
    fluid inlet or outlet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    267,    for a trunnion mounted particulate material type separator.

    358,    for an imperforate drum with the medium on an arc, chord or end
    wall.


CLS 210/399
TXT Apparatus under subclass 398 in which the closed casing is mounted for
    motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    390,    for a filter medium or casing attached to a movable valve element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 258+ and 269+ for rotary extractor
    or leacher.


CLS 210/400
TXT Apparatus under subclass 359 comprising a closed loop or filter elements
    attached to a closed loop carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160,    for a flume stream type endless belt filter.

    370,    for an endless belt type filter element forming the wall of a
    centrifugal extractor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 348+ for flexible
    endless band type mold paper making machines (e.g., Fourdrinier machines).

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 307+ for
    endless belt sifters for solids.


CLS 210/401
TXT Apparatus under subclass 400 supported on an additional moving means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    386,    for running strand residue removers.


CLS 210/402
TXT Apparatus under subclass 359 in the shape of a drum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161,    for a revolving flume stream type filter.

    174,    for a movable cylindrical filter having comminuting means.

    210+    and 217, for a drum type separator having means to add a treating
    material.

    326,    for plural drums on parallel axes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 323+ and 357 for
    cylinder mold type paper making machines.


CLS 210/403
TXT Apparatus under subclass 402 in which prefilt enters the inside of the
    rotating filter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    394,    for an internally fed rotary drum with cleaning means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 288+ for
    rotating drum sifters for solids.


CLS 210/404
TXT Apparatus under subclass 402 comprising an inner wall surrounded by a
    filter element forming an annular space divided into segments by partitions.


CLS 210/405
TXT Apparatus under subclass 348 having moving means which receives and
    distributes the prefilt against a filter medium, e.g., rotary thrower.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    377,    for an internal work distributor for a centrifugal extractor.

    456,    for a fixed prefilt flow distributor and diverter.


CLS 210/406
TXT Apparatus under subclass 348 in which there is means to apply a vacuum to a
    closed filtrate receiver with no liquid being removed to the vacuum source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    416,    for liquid pump, gas pressure or liquid suction source combinations.

    459+,   for a pipe end attached filter which pipe may be a suction pipe.

    481,    for a filter element of the type often used with a reflux or vacuum
    coffee maker.


CLS 210/407
TXT Apparatus under subclass 348 having means for removing residue from the
    filter medium or for agitating either the prefilt or filtrate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106+,   for automatic filter cleaning.

    159,    for means to remove residue from a cleaner for a flume stream
    strainer.

    179,    for a mechanical agitator in a heat exchanger.

    208,    for a mechanical agitator in a reactor tank.

    219,    for a mechanical agitator and means to add treating material.

    225,    for similar structure in a sectional chamber press filter.

    251,    for means for cleaning the outer casing of a separator.

    269+,   for rehabilitation means for a particulate bed separator.

    298,    for diverse separators having residue removing means.

    319,    for diverse separators having agitating means.

    332+,   for plural separators with residue removal.

    353,    for a filter with free cleaning means.

    345+,   for movement of the medium, cleaner or agitator by fluid.

    791,    for processes of rehabilitating filter mediums.


CLS 210/408
TXT Apparatus under subclass 407 provided with diverse residue removal or
    agitating means, e.g., agitators, scrapers, brushes, means to add a gas,
    means to blowback through the filter medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 379+ for
    sifting screen cleaners.


CLS 210/409
TXT Apparatus under subclass 407 having (1) means to add a fluid to or trap a
    fluid within the filter unit for cleaning purposes or (2) constructed to
    backwash the filter medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    433,    for a bypass around a filter including those whereby a filter is
    cleaned by prefilt flow.


CLS 210/410
TXT Apparatus under subclass 409 in which a fluid is trapped within the filter,
    which fluid, upon a release of pressure or cessation of normal flow, acts
    to force itself or a portion of the filtrate through the filter medium or
    acts to discharge trapped residue.


CLS 210/411
TXT Apparatus under subclass 409 having means to pass a fluid, usually a
    liquid, through the filter medium in a direction reverse to normal
    filtering flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    427,    for a flow controller for backwash and see the search notes
    thereunder.

    678,    793, and 798, for processes of rehabilitating a separation medium
    by reverse flow.


CLS 210/412
TXT Apparatus under subclass 411 having means to cause a backwash liquid,
    usually filtrate, to traverse the filter medium as a pressure wave, i.e.,
    having pressures varying between two or more peaks, e.g., pistons
    reciprocating within a cylindrical filter medium or an intermittently
    actuated pulsator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    349,    for a filter having pulsation dampeners or gas trapping means.

    356,    for a filter constructed to cause flexing of the medium by a fluid.

    359,    for a filter having mechanical means for flexing the medium.

    384     and 388+, for a filter having vibrating means.

    748,    for processes involving pulsation or oscillation.


CLS 210/413
TXT Apparatus under subclass 407 in which the filter medium is stationary and
    an agitator and mechanical cleaning means moves relative to it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    357,    for a filter having interleaved members for cleaning.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 246+ for
    cleaning attachments there provided for.


CLS 210/414
TXT Apparatus under subclass 413 in which the fixed filter medium is mounted
    within a closed casing having plural outlets.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    397,    422+ and 433, for other filter combinations having plural outlets
    from a closed casing.


CLS 210/415
TXT Apparatus under subclass 413 in which the filter medium has a curved
    surface and in which the cleaning or agitating means moves about a fixed
    axis and has nontranslatory rotary motion.


CLS 210/416.1
TXT With pump, gas pressure, or suction source:

    Apparatus under subclass 348 provided with a pump or other source of vacuum
    or pressure which is particularly defined as other than a suction of
    pressure conduit, acting to aid the flow of fluid through the strainer or
    filter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    for structural installations with a closed circulating system.

    194+,   for recirculation which may include a pump.

    251,    for a filter combined with a mouthpiece.

    258,    for serially connected units including a pump.

    406,    for a filter combined with a vacuum source which does not pump the
    liquid.

    412,    for a liquid pulsator acting during backwash of blowback.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 78+ for the combination of
    an expansible chamber device and fluid purifying means which enhances the
    operation of the device; and see (2) Note in subclass 78 of Class 92 for
    statement of the line.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 105.1+ for well pumps having sediment traps or
    deflectors; and subclasses 105.5+ for well pumps having liquid-gas
    separator; i.e., gas anchors.

    417,    Pumps, appropriate subclasses for the combination of a pump and a
    filter wherein the specific disclosure of the filter is to protect or
    enhance the operation of the pump.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 47 for the combination
    or a rotary expansible chamber pump and a filter wherein the filter is
    specially disclosed as protecting or enhancing the operation of the pump.


CLS 210/416.2
TXT For aquarium or swimming pool:

    Apparatus under subclass 416.1 adapted for use in an aquarium or swimming
    pool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169,    for closed circulating systems involving swimming pools.


CLS 210/416.3
TXT For drinking water:

    Apparatus under subclass 416.1 used to produce drinking water.


CLS 210/416.4
TXT For fuel system:

    Apparatus under subclass 416.1 used in a fuel system.


CLS 210/416.5
TXT For lubricating or oil treating system:

    Apparatus under subclass 416.1 adapted for use in a lubricating or oil
    treating system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168,    for closed lubricating system structurally installed.


CLS 210/417
TXT Apparatus under subclass 348 in which there are liquid distributors
    embedded in a filter medium, alternate distributors acting respectively as
    liquid inlet and discharge means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    343,    for similar devices in which the filter elements form plural units.


CLS 210/418
TXT Apparatus under subclass 348 with a variable flow controller for the
    material being treated, or a constituent thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97+,    for flow, fluid pressure or material level responsive means.

    138+,   for a separator with time control means.

    141+,   for a separator with a program actuator.

    143+,   for automatic control of a separator.

    302,    for a filter and a constituent trap with a flow line valve.

    313,    for a filter, a constituent trap and valve controlled sediment
    discharge means.

    340,    for parallel similar filters with flow control means.

    371,    for a variable flow controller for residue in a centrifugal
    extractor.

    390,    for a movable medium mounted on a movable valve element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 544+ for a flow controller combined with
    a gas separator.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 41 for a restrictor and a
    screen.

    166,    Wells, subclass 205 for a well screen with a valve or changeable
    restrictor.


CLS 210/419
TXT Apparatus under subclass 418 in which the flow controller is attached to or
    within a portable prefilt receiver, e.g., funnel or hand manipulated
    receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244+,   for a portable receptacle with hood or closure.


CLS 210/420
TXT Apparatus under subclass 418 in which the controller selects the direction
    of fluid flow from a given source through or by the filter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130+,   for a fluid pressure responsive bypass.

    190+    and 269+, for valve controlled means for bypassing a water
    softening apparatus during regeneration thereof.


CLS 210/421
TXT Apparatus under subclass 420 in which a deflector is pivoted for limited
    motion for diverting the prefilt to one or more alternate paths, e.g.,
    dirty rain to a receiver and clean rain water to a filter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99,     for a similar organization having means responsive to prefilt
    accumulation.


CLS 210/422
TXT Apparatus under subclass 420 in which the filter element is within a closed
    casing, which casing has a residue or prefilt outlet in addition to a
    prefilt inlet and filtrate outlet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    299+,   particularly subclasses 312+ for a filter combined with a
    constituent trapping feature and sediment discharge means.


CLS 210/423
TXT Apparatus under subclass 422 having at least one inlet and one outlet in a
    unitary header.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    for a fluid pressure responsive bypass in a unitary header.

    340,    for parallel filters with flow control means.


CLS 210/424
TXT Apparatus under subclass 420 including a multiway valve which may be
    adjusted to direct flow in different directions.


CLS 210/425
TXT Apparatus under subclass 424 to control backwash.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278+,   for a multiway valve unit controlling backwash in a particulate
    material type separator.


CLS 210/426
TXT Apparatus under subclass 425 wherein the valve is within the same housing
    as the filter.


CLS 210/427
TXT Apparatus under subclass 420 to control backwash.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for flow, fluid pressure or material level control of backwash.

    190+,   for external regenerating medium supply combinations.

    425+,   for control of backwash by a selective directive multiway valve
    controller.


CLS 210/428
TXT Apparatus under subclass 418 in which there are at least two inflow
    passages and one outflow passage with the filter in the outflow or (2) at
    least two outflow passages and one inflow passage with the filter in the
    inflow; and with a flow controller for any one or more of said passages.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    378+,   for a centrifugal extractor having plural filtrate outlets.


CLS 210/429
TXT Apparatus under subclass 418 in which the seat or the stem of the flow
    controller is coaxial with the filter.


CLS 210/430
TXT Appartus under subclass 429 in which the filter surrounds the controller
    seat or head.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    371,    for a centrifugal basket having valve means coacting with the
    bottom of the basket.

    426,    for a multiway valve unit encased in a filter housing for
    controlling cleaning by a backwash fluid.


CLS 210/431
TXT Apparatus under subclass 429 in which the filter is fixed to the controller
    seat opposite the controller head.


CLS 210/432
TXT Apparatus under subclass 418 in which the filter is in a chamber or recess
    in the controller body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    426,    for an encased multiway valve unit to control fluid cleaning of a
    filter by backwashing.


CLS 210/433.1
TXT Divided filtered, and unfiltered liquid outlet passages:

    Apparatus under subclass 348 comprising two outlet passages for liquid
    under treatment, one for untreated liquid and one for filtrate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130+,   for a pressure-responsive bypass.

    254,    for serially connected units with a bypass.

    321.6+, for devices having plural inlets and outlets in which the medium is
    a dialyzing membrane.

    385,    for axially reciprocable and rotary filter medium which may act as
    a bypass.

    420+,   for a variable directive flow controller.

    428,    for combining and dividing flow passages with a filter in the
    combined passage.

    436     and 472, for a vended filter.


CLS 210/434
TXT Apparatus under subclass 433.1 in which the untreated part joins the
    filtrate.


CLS 210/435
TXT Apparatus under subclass 348 wherein the filter medium is totally
    positioned in a casing which is imperforate except for flow line means for
    introducing and discharging fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    287+,   for similar structure for a particulate bed.

    459+,   for filters attached to a plate or the end of a pipe.

    473+,   for filter and receptacle combinations in which part of the
    receptacle may resemble a pipe, e.g., funnel neck.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 208 for fluid textile
    treating apparatus having a drain and strainer means associated therewith.


CLS 210/436
TXT Apparatus under subclass 435 wherein means for venting the casing is
    provided.


CLS 210/437
TXT Apparatus under subclass 435 in which a liquid receiving means such as a
    tube or equivalent means forming a flow passage is located centrally of a
    filter medium or element.


CLS 210/438
TXT Apparatus under subclass 437 in which the tube is imperforate at least
    along a substantial length thereof directing fluid axially of the filter
    element.


CLS 210/439
TXT Apparatus under subclass 438 in which the liquid to be treated flows
    through the imperforate tube in one direction and through the filter
    medium, for treating purposes, in a direction opposite to the first
    mentioned direction of flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    288,    for a particulate material type separator having similar structure.


CLS 210/440
TXT Apparatus under subclass 437 in which the prefilt inlet and the filtrate
    outlet are in the same end of a closed casing.


CLS 210/441
TXT Apparatus under subclass 437 in which the central liquid receiving means is
    directly attached to a part of the casing.


CLS 210/442
TXT Apparatus under subclass 441 in which the central liquid receiving means is
    attached, at each of its ends, to opposed parts of the casing.


CLS 210/443
TXT Apparatus under subclass 435 in which the prefilt inlet and the filtrate
    outlet are in the same end of a closed casing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    for fluid pressure responsive bypass in an inlet and outlet closure
    header.

    420+,   particularly subclass 423 for flow controller combinations with a
    prefilt inlet and outlet at the same end of the casing.

    440,    for similar structure with a central liquid receiver.


CLS 210/444
TXT Apparatus under subclass 443 in which the filter element is attached to and
    extrudes downwardly from an upper part of the casing, usually a removable
    head.


CLS 210/445
TXT Apparatus under subclass 435 in which the filter medium is clamped in a
    joint of the casing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227+,   for sectional pressure type filters in which the medium is clamped
    in a casing joint.


CLS 210/446
TXT Apparatus under subclass 435 in which the prefilt inlet and the filtrate
    outlet are in substantial axial alignment.


CLS 210/447
TXT Apparatus under subclass 446 in which the strainer or filter element is
    insertable in and removable from the casing by movement generally lateral
    to the direction of flow of the liquid to be treated, e.g., the axis of the
    casing or pipe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310,    for a filter and a constituent trap in which the trap is lateral of
    a flow line.

    454,    for a filter element attached to a closure.


CLS 210/448
TXT Apparatus under subclass 446 in which the filter element is a hollow filter
    element having one end open.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    452,    for a single open end type filter supported on an internal fixed
    shoulder.


CLS 210/449
TXT Apparatus under subclass 446 in which the closed casing is attached to and
    extends beyond the end of a pipe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    459+,   for a similar filter not enclosed in a casing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 549+ for a flow controller combined with
    gas separating means.


CLS 210/450
TXT Apparatus under subclass 435 having (1) opposed members at each end of the
    element which are separable from the casing with the filter element
    supported between them, or (2) a gasket between the element and the walls
    of the casing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    445,    for a filter element clamped in a casing joint which may include a
    gasket.


CLS 210/451
TXT Apparatus under subclass 435 in which the casing is provided with an
    internal shoulder from which the filter element is supported.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    477,    for a filter resting on an internal stop or surface of a receiver
    of more general construction.


CLS 210/452
TXT Apparatus under subclass 451 in which the filter element is a hollow filter
    element having a single open end.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    448,    for an axially aligned inlet and outlet to a casing enclosing a
    single open end filter element.


CLS 210/453
TXT Apparatus under subclass 435 wherein the strainer or filter element is
    clamped between a removable cover and an opposed wall of the casing.


CLS 210/454
TXT Apparatus under subclass 435 in which the filter element is fixed to a
    removable closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244+,   for a portable receptacle type filter with a closure.

    309,    for a filter element attached to a sediment trap.

    447,    for a filter element laterally removable from a flow line even
    though attached to a closure.


CLS 210/455
TXT Apparatus under subclass 348 comprising (1) a supporting receptacle for a
    filter medium an inner surface of which is modified as by grooves or ribs,
    or (2) a separate spacing member engaging the inner surface of the
    receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224+,   particularly subclass 231 for a sectional chamber press filter.

    283,    for a pervious divider in a particulate bed separator.


CLS 210/456
TXT Apparatus under subclass 348 in which the prefilt passes into contact with
    an imperforate member which serves as a flow restrictor, diverter or
    distributor for the prefilt, usually to absorb the force of the incoming
    prefilt or prevent swirling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247,    for a filtrate splash plate or deflector.

    279     and 291+, for particular liquid receiving means for a particulate
    bed type separator.

    305+,   for distinct separators having baffle means cooperating with a
    sediment trap.

    377,    for a work distributor in a centrifugal extractor.

    405,    for a movable prefilt distributor.

    421,    for a filter with variable flow control means and a pivoted prefilt
    deflector.


CLS 210/457
TXT Apparatus under subclass 348 in which there is a pervious member centrally
    located within a filter medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    437+,   for a filter with a central liquid receiver, which filter is within
    a flow line or closed casing.

    459+,   for a filter attached to and extending beyond the end of a fluid
    conducting tube.


CLS 210/458
TXT Apparatus under subclass 457 in which there are two or more liquid
    receivers having a common axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315,    for one diverse filter spaced within another.

    338,    for nested concentric filters.

    342,    for one filter with another.

    489+,   for superimposed filter mediums arranged for series flow.


CLS 210/459
TXT Apparatus under subclass 348 in which the filter element is mounted on a
    pipe, plate or wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103+,   for grated inlet surface drains.

    172,    for a separator ancillary to a tank for storage of fluid for use
    other than that of this class (210).

    457+,   for a filter element having a central pervious liquid receiving
    tube.

    473+,   for a filter attached to a portable receiver, as a funnel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclasses 227+ for well screens and see the Notes thereto.


CLS 210/460
TXT Apparatus under subclass 459 in which the filter element or its supporting
    structure is mounted on the open end of the pipe and extends beyond the
    open end.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    449,    for a filter element totally enclosed in a flow confining casing
    attached to a pipe.

    482,    for a filter secured to the lower end of a prefilt receiver, said
    lower end being similar in structure to a pipe.


CLS 210/461
TXT Apparatus under subclass 460 in which the filter element encloses a space
    except for a single inlet or outlet, other than those in the filter medium,
    the filtering medium having walls which are spaced from each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224+,   particularly subclass 231 for a sectional chamber press type filter.

    346+,   for plural units of the spaced wall type.

    486+,   for spaced wall type elements.


CLS 210/462
TXT Apparatus under subclass 460 in which the pipe or tube is in turn connected
    to a plate or wall.


CLS 210/463
TXT Apparatus under subclass 460 comprising means forming a part of or attached
    to a filter element, which means is inserted into the open end of a pipe.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 12 for a cover with
    an eave or valley gutter and a separator.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 189.06+ for dispensers having a filter.


CLS 210/464
TXT Apparatus under subclass 348 mounted at the top of or on the spout of a
    portable receptacle functioning when the receptacle is tipped.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    473+,   for a filter mounted at the inlet to a receptacle.


CLS 210/465
TXT Apparatus under subclass 464 comprising a handle on the receptacle and on
    the filter positioned for cooperation with each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    470,    for a filter with a handle and see the Notes thereto.


CLS 210/466
TXT Apparatus under subclass 464 in which the filter is mounted on or adjacent
    the receptacle spout.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    316,    for spaced filters, one adjacent an inlet or outlet conduit.

    460+,   for a filter attached to an open end of a pipe.


CLS 210/467
TXT Apparatus under subclass 466 in which the filter is within the receptacle
    so as to block flow of solids to the spout inlet.


CLS 210/468
TXT Apparatus under subclass 466 in which the filter is mounted at the
    discharge end of the spout spaced from such end.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248,    for a device having drip catching features or means.


CLS 210/469
TXT Apparatus under subclass 464 in which the filter is mounted on or adjacent
    the upper edge of the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    245,    for a similar device including a valve or flow restrictor.

    474+,   for a similar device mounted on a filtrate receiver.

    479+,   for a filter mounted on the upper edge of a filtrate receiver.


CLS 210/470
TXT Apparatus under subclass 348 provided with handle means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237+,   for repair and disassembly means having a handle.

    244,    for a portable receptacle with a hood or closure which may include
    a handle.

    465,    for a handled portable receptacle and handled drainer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 417+ for
    a sifter provided with manual manipulating means.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 465.1 for a dispensing container having a
    handle.


CLS 210/471
TXT Apparatus under subclass 470 comprising a ring member fixedly attached to
    the filter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    495,    for a ring and screen type filter element.


CLS 210/472
TXT Apparatus under subclass 348, including means to vent the filter or
    filtrate receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for flow, fluid pressure or material level responsive vent control.

    180,    for vapor or gas removal in a treatment device with heating means.

    436,    for a vented filter within a flow line.


CLS 210/473
TXT Apparatus under subclass 348, including structure to support the filter on
    or readily attach the filter to a liquid receiver or container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    419,    for a portable prefilt receiver with a flow controller.

    451+,   for a filter in a flow line or closed casing supported on an
    internal shoulder.

    464,    for a portable receptacle draining type filter.


CLS 210/474
TXT Apparatus under subclass 473 supported at the upper edge of the receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    471,    for a device having a ring and handle which may rest on the upper
    edge of receptacle.


CLS 210/475
TXT Apparatus under subclass 474 in which the filter is offset from the center
    of a cover of the filtrate receiver.


CLS 210/476
TXT Apparatus under subclass 474 in which two or more liquid receivers are
    telescoped within each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    445,    for a filter element clamped between means providing a joint in a
    pipe or casing.

    446,    for a filter medium attached to a telescopic pipe section.


CLS 210/477
TXT Apparatus under subclass 473 in which the filter medium or its support
    rests on an internal stop or surface of the receptacle wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    455,    for a filter on a modified spacing surface of a casing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 279+ for beverage
    infusors including more than a filter medium or such medium and a
    supporting receptacle.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 189.06+ for dispensers having a filter.


CLS 210/478
TXT Apparatus under subclass 477 in which a radially expansible retainer, such
    as a resilient ring or downwardly projecting spring arms, and the filter
    form an integral unit.

    (1)     Note.  The term "integral unit" means a filter medium and a
    retainer so connected that the unit cannot be disassembled without
    destroying the unit or can be disassembled only be removing mechanical
    connectors, such as a bolt or rivet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    463,    for a filter element which may be expandable in a pipe.


CLS 210/479
TXT Apparatus under subclass 477 in which there is a member within the prefilt
    receiver usually a ring or cylinder, which clamps or retains the filter
    medium and/or its supporting structure against the inner wall of the
    prefilt receiver or against the stop member.


CLS 210/480
TXT Apparatus under subclass 479 in which the retainer is expandable and has
    means for contracting the retainer to effect release of the filter medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238,    for a filter element and a handle for removing the element from a
    casing.


CLS 210/481
TXT Apparatus under subclass 477 extending longitudinally of the prefilt
    receiver, e.g., reflux type coffee makers or funnels having means extending
    into the funnel neck to hold the filter unit in place.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 292 for pressure-vacuum
    or reflux type beverage infusors having more than filter and its support.


CLS 210/482
TXT Apparatus under subclass 473 attached or supported at the lower end of a
    prefilt receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    449,    for a filter medium within a closed casing attached to a pipe end.

    459+,   for a filter element attached to a fixed pipe or plate.


CLS 210/483
TXT Apparatus under subclass 348 comprising: (1) a filter medium and supporting
    means therefore, (2) a filter medium having a defined significant gross
    structure or shape, or (3) super-imposed or abutted members forming a
    single filter element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500+,   for filter material, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 363+,
    especially subclasses 409+, for filter elements for separating solids.

    413,    Sheet Metal Container Making, subclasses 1+ for sheet-metal ware
    making processes which may include processes of making filter elements.


CLS 210/484
TXT Apparatus under subclass 483 in which the filtering medium is retained
    within a foraminous supporting container or sheath, e.g., removable
    cartridges.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    317,    for similar structures with plural spaced filters.


CLS 210/485
TXT Apparatus under subclass 483 comprising supporting structure outside of the
    filter medium formed of spaced bars supporting a nonplanar filter medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    455,    for similar structure in which the supporting structure spaces the
    filter medium from a receptacle wall.

    497,    for a cylindrical filter having external reinforcing means.


CLS 210/486
TXT Apparatus under subclass 483 in which the medium comprises spaced walls.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    461,    for similar structure attached to the open end of a pipe.


CLS 210/487
TXT Apparatus under subclass 486 comprising (1) concentric walls, (2) spirally
    arranged, or (3) pleated.


CLS 210/488
TXT Apparatus under subclass 483 comprising separable members which abut on
    their surfaces of greatest dimension or which are aranged in superposed
    relation.


CLS 210/489
TXT Apparatus under subclass 488 so arranged that the liquid passes through
    them in succession.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    335+,   for plural distinct filters arranged for series flow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 482, 485, and 486+ for layered or
    serially arranged gas filters.


CLS 210/490
TXT Apparatus under subclass 489 in which (1) the layers are integrally united
    as by an adhesive or one material is partially diffused into another, or
    (2) each layer comprises a coated or impregnated material.


CLS 210/491
TXT Apparatus under subclass 490 in which all of the layers are fibrous.


CLS 210/492
TXT Apparatus under subclass 488 comprising alternating members dissimilar in
    shape, size openings within them or similar shaped members arranged in
    different relative positions.


CLS 210/493.1
TXT Pleated:

    Apparatus under subclass 483 in which the filter medium is folded back and
    forth upon itself.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 497+, 500, and 521 for gas filters of
    zig-zag form.


CLS 210/493.2
TXT Bonded end caps:

    Apparatus under subclass 493.1 wherein the filter medium is permanently
    attached to the end caps.


CLS 210/493.3
TXT Rectangulary shaped:

    Apparatus under subclass 493.1 in the form of a rectangle.


CLS 210/493.4
TXT Spirally formed:

    Apparatus under subclass 493.1 having a helically shaped filter medium.


CLS 210/493.5
TXT Filter element:

    Apparatus under subclass 493.1 consisting of a single component of the
    pleated filter apparatus.


CLS 210/494.1
TXT Convolute:

    Apparatus under subclass 483 in which the filter medium is arranged so that
    it is coiled upon itself and recedes or approaches a center axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    493.4   and 497.1, for pleated spirally formed and helically wound filters,
    respectively.


CLS 210/494.2
TXT Metal:

    Apparatus under subclass 494.1 made from metal.


CLS 210/494.3
TXT With edge spacer:

    Apparatus under subclass 494.1 having means at the edge of the filter
    medium to space consecutive convolutions.


CLS 210/495
TXT Apparatus under subclass 483 in which the supporting means comprises a ring
    or noncircular frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    471,    for a filter having a handled ring frame.

    485,    for a filter enclosed in a cage support.


CLS 210/496
TXT Apparatus under subclass 483 in which the medium is composed of particles
    or fibers bound together into a single integral unit, by fusing, an
    adhesive or the intertwining of fibers.


CLS 210/497.01
TXT Cylindrical, conical, or trough shaped:

    Apparatus under subclass 483 in which the filter medium is shaped to form a
    cylinder, cone, or open trough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    380.1+, for a centrifuge basket.

    433.1+, for a through flow tubular type filter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 498, 500, and 521 for gas filters of
    cylindrical or conical form.


CLS 210/497.1
TXT Apparatus under subclass 497.01 which comprises a filter formed from
    indefinite length material coiled in such a manner as to generate
    convolutions about an axis with each convolution displaced along said axis
    from the previous convolutions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    494.1+, for convolute wound filters.


CLS 210/497.2
TXT Filter blank:

    Apparatus under subclass 497.01 in an unassembled form capable of being
    formed in a cylindrical, conical, or trough shape.


CLS 210/497.3
TXT Conical:

    Apparatus under subclass 497.01 in the form of a cone.


CLS 210/498
TXT Apparatus under subclass 483 comprising a perforated plate or a plate
    having grooves in its surface to form liquid flow passages.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 397+ for
    perforated sheet sifter elements.


CLS 210/499
TXT Apparatus under subclass 483, comprising meshed fabric.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 383+ for fabrics having no
    particular shape or specific structure peculiar to filtering.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 277+ for well screens, particularly subclass 230
    for woven mesh well screens, and subclass 234 for well screens comprising
    spaced strips or bars.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 392+ for
    sifter elements there provided for.

    245,    Wire Fabrics and Structure, appropriate subclasses, for such
    structure of general utility.


CLS 210/500.1
TXT Material:

    Compositions under subclass 348 comprising materials to be used in filter
    apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  Materials consisting of fibers (e.g., paper) comprising a
    homogeneous mass of fibers, with or without binders or randomly dispersed
    fillers made by a Class 162 method are in Class 162 even though defined as
    a filter material.  Such material having additional features peculiar to
    filtration are in Class 210, subclasses, 500.1+ e.g., perforations, fibers
    on a perforated backing, strata of fibers of different kinds, etc.

    (2)     Note.  A patent for stock material which may have filtering
    properties but in which there is no claimed internal or external structure
    particularly adapting the material for use as a filter will be placed in
    the appropriate stock material class.  See, especially, Class 428, Stock
    Material or Miscellaneous Articles, and the search notes thereunder.

    (3)     Note.  A composition claimed or disclosed solely as a sorbent or
    claimed as a filter aid and disclosed to aid filtering solely as a sorbent
    is classifiable in Class 502.  A composition claimed as filtering material
    i.e., by presenting apertures or interstices of a size functioning to
    retain solid matter by a screening or sieving action with or without a
    sorbing action is classifiable in Class 210, subclasses 500.1+.  Class 210,
    subclass 500.1 filter material is superior to Class 502.  A copy of a
    patent properly classified in 210, subclasses 500.1+ will be crossed to
    Class 502 only on the basis of a novel sorbent material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    483+,   for supported, shaped, or superimposed filter mediums.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses for
    plastic compositions in general, and see (2) Note of that class definition.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 383+ for fabrics having no
    particular shape or specific structure peculiar to filtering.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, (see (1) Note).

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 295+ for
    diaphragms or membranes to be used in electrolytic apparatus.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 175+ for water softening or purifying
    compositions; subclasses 182.11+ for filter materials which exert a
    chemical action.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 304.4+ for a
    product of composite form in which one component is either porous or
    cellular and subclasses 357+ for a mass or layer of structurally defined or
    coated elements (e.g., fibers, filaments, particles).

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product and
    Process, subclasses 129+ and 247+ for separators (diaphram) specialized for
    that class.

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 409+ for an autogenously bonded nonwoven fabric.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, for a composition comprising a catalyst or sorbent, per se.


CLS 210/500.21
TXT Semipermeable membrane:

    Subject matter under subclass 500.1 directed to semipermeable membrane
    specified primarily in terms of the nature of the composition or
    compositions of which it is made.

    (1)     Note.  See "membrane" and the reference therein to "semipermeable
    membrane" in the Glossary of the main class definition of this class.

    (2)     Note.  For a membrane having structure (said structure may, for
    example, be described in terms of, being semipermeable or selective or
    permselective, defining pore dimension or shape, flux or permeation rate,
    retention characteristics, porosity, overall membrane shape (e.g., tube or
    hollow fiber), pore configuration (for example, symmetric (e.g., isotropic
    or unskinned) or asymmetric (e.g., anisotropic or skinned), bubble point,
    birefringence, etc.), which is disclosed to be solely or primarily useful
    in a Class 210, Liquid Purification or Separation process (e.g., dialysis,
    reverse osmosis, ultrafiltration, hyperfiltration, microfiltration)
    classification in Class 210 is proper.  For a membrane which is a stock
    material disclosed to be of more general utility (e.g. not primarily useful
    for such a Class 210 process)  and for which no such structure is claimed,
    classification in the appropriate stock material class is proper.  A
    membrane of only nominally recited structure, i.e., simply characterized as
    a membrane or film without any other significant structure such as that
    referred to above, of a specific chemical composition, is properly
    classifiable in the appropriate chemical composition class.  Class 210 is
    superior to Class 96.  Consequently, membranes claimed for use in Class 96,
    Gas Separation:  Apparatus (including membranes for removal of a gas from a
    liquid) and claimed for use in Class 210, Liquid Purification or Separation
    apparatus (or membranes for "fluid" separation) are classified in Class 210
    as originals and cross-referenced to Class 96.  For membranes or diaphragms
    useful for:  (a) processes of electrical, radiant, wave energy or magnetic
    separation or purification of liquids (including more than the mere
    application of a magnetic field to liquid to separate magnetic particles
    therefrom) classification in Class 204 is proper; (b)  processes of use as
    a battery separator, classification in Class 429 is proper:  however, in
    regard to membranes useful in processes of both Classes 210 and 204 and/or
    429, Class 210 subclasses 500.1+ has superiority over both Classes 204 and
    429, based upon 210 subclasses 500.1+ occurring first in the Patent Office
    classes of the Manual of Classification.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    321.6+, for membrane containing apparatus and see the search notes
    thereunder.


CLS 210/500.22
TXT Isotropically pored:

    Subject matter under subclass 500.21 comprising a membrane structure,
    defining two major surfaces, and which includes pores which extend between
    the major surfaces, the pores having a substantially uniform cross section
    throughout.


CLS 210/500.23
TXT Hollow fiber or cylinder:

    Subject matter under subclass 500.21 in the shape of either an annulus or
    of a cylindrical hollow structure which is relatively elongated compared
    with its diameter.

    (1)     Note.  Such a structure maybe described as, e.g., a tube, a
    capillary, or a hollow fiber.


CLS 210/500.24
TXT Antithrombogenic coating on membrane:

    Subject matter under subclass 500.21 wherein the membrane comprises a
    surface coating of a material specialized to prevent the formation of blood
    clots.


CLS 210/500.25
TXT Metal containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 500.21 wherein the membrane comprises a metal
    present ineither elemental form or in a compound of that metal.


CLS 210/500.26
TXT Glass:

    Subject matter under subclass 500.21 wherein the membrane comprises a glass.

    (1)     Note.  Glasses are inorganic compositions which solidify from the
    molten state without crystallizing, to have that molecular disorder
    characteristic of the glassy state, which have no definite melting point,
    are incapable in the solid state of permanent deformation, which fracture
    when subjected to deformation tension and include as components at least
    one "glass former" material.

    (2)     Note.  Typical glass formers are, e.g., oxides of silicon,
    beryllium, boron, germanium, phosphorus, vanadium, lead, tin, zinc,
    zirconium, and titanium, as well as such nonoxide compounds as GeS, metal
    fluorides, or iodides, and some metallic selenides, tellurides, arsenides,
    and phosphides.  These compositions may also include other oxides devoid of
    glass forming tendencies, e.g., oxides of alkali metals, alkaline earth
    metals, and magnesium.

    (3)     Note.  Many ceramic compositions contain primarily slag, the
    byproduct of metal refining and smelting, which are considered to be
    glasses.

    (4)     Note.  Neither transparency to light nor the absence of color are
    necessary for a composition to be considered as a glass for the purpose of
    this subclass.

    (5)     Note.  Water glass, Plexiglas, and isinglass are not considered to
    be glass for the purpose of classification in this subclass.

    (6)     Note.  Organic, noncrystalline solid materials, such as synthetic
    resins which may referred to as organicglasses, e.g., Plexiglas, are not
    considered to be glass for the purpose of classification in this subclass.

    (7)     Note.  The so-callled metallic glasses or glassy metals, which are
    amorphous solid forms of metals ar not included herein.


CLS 210/500.27
TXT Organic:

    Subject matter under subclass 500.21 comprising an organic substance.

    (1)     Note.  Organic is intended to include substances which have a
    carbon atom bonded to another carbon atom, or to a halogen atom, or to a
    hydrogen atom, or to a nitrogen atom by a single or a double bond.


CLS 210/500.28
TXT Cyclic:

    Subject matter under subclass 500.27 comprising an organic substance which
    includes a ring structute, i.e., a series of atoms bonded one to another in
    such a fashion that the chain closes upon itself.


CLS 210/500.29
TXT Cellulosic:

    Subject matter under subclass 500.28 comprising the structure known as
    cellulose, or derivatives thereof in which the basic cellulose structure
    remains intact.


CLS 210/500.30
TXT Cellulose acetate:

    Subject matter under subclass 500.29 comprising esters of cellulose with
    acetic acid, i.e., containing at least one -O-C(=O)-CH3 group.


CLS 210/500.31
TXT Cellulose diacetate:

    Subject matter under subclass 500.30 comprising a cellulose acetate in
    which the cellulose ester includes two and only two-O-C(=O)-CH3 groups.


CLS 210/500.32
TXT Cellulose triacetate:

    Subject matter under subclass 500.30 comprising a cellulos acetate in which
    the cellulose ester includes three -O-C(=O)-CH3 groups.


CLS 210/500.33
TXT Homocyclic:

    Subject matter under subclass 500.28 comprising at least one ring wherein
    all the ring atoms are carbon atoms.


CLS 210/500.34
TXT Styrene:

    Subject matter under subclass 500.33 comprising a six membered carbon ring
    having attached thereto a -CH=CH2 groups.


CLS 210/500.35
TXT Acrylate:

    Subject matter under subclass 500.27

    comprising a O-C-C=C group.


CLS 210/500.36
TXT Alkene other than vinyl:

    Subject matter under subclass 500.27 comprising an aliphatic unsaturated
    hydrocarbon containing a nonterminal carbon to carbon double bond.


CLS 210/500.37
TXT Amine:

    Subject matter under subclass 500.27 comprising an atom of carbon bonded to
    an atom of nitrogen, which structures are the equivalent of a structure
    formed from ammonia (NH3) by replacement of one, two, or three of the
    hydrogens with carbon atoms.


CLS 210/500.38
TXT Amide:

    Subject matter under subclass 500.37 comprising a -C(=O)-NH2 group or
    similar groups derived from acid other than a carboxylic acid by replacing
    the acidic hydrogen with an NH2 Group.

    (1)     Note.  Such  materials may be identified as, e.g., Nylon.


CLS 210/500.39
TXT Imide:

    Subject matter under subclass 500.38 including the group:  R-C-N-C-R.


CLS 210/500.40
TXT Carbonate:

    Subject matter under subclass 500.27 comprising a -CO3 group.

    (1)     Note.  Such materials may typically be, e.g., polycarbonate resins.


CLS 210/500.41
TXT Sulfone:

    Subject matter under subclass 500.27

    comprising an R-S-R group.


CLS 210/500.42
TXT Vinyl:

    Subject matter under subclass 500.27 comprising a CH2=CH2 group.

    (1)     Note.  When polyvinyl synthetic resins are present, various of the
    hydrogens may be replaced by other atoms.


CLS 210/500.43
TXT Acrylonitrile:

    Subject matter under subclass 500.42 comprisiang a CH2 = CH-C=N group.

    (1)     Note.  When polyacrylonitrile resins are present, various of the
    hydrogen atoms may be replaced by other atoms.


CLS 210/501
TXT Compositions under subclass 500 including a sterilizing component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 175+ for a water softening or purifying or
    scale inhibiting composition.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclass for a composition which is biocidal to a micro-organism (other
    than algae), e.g., bacterium, fungus, etc.

    504,    Plant Protecting and Regulating Composition, subclasses 150+ for an
    algicidal composition.


CLS 210/502.1
TXT Sorptive component containing:

    Compositions under subclass 500 including a component having the property
    of removing at least one constituent from a liquid mixture by surface
    attraction or allowing said constituent to penetrate within the component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    660+,   especially 679, for processes which use such compositions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, for a composition comprising a catalyst or sorbent, per se, and
    see especially subclasses 60+ and 400+ for a sorbent.


CLS 210/503
TXT Subject matter under subclass 500 comprising (1) granules differing in
    shape or composition, (2) fibers differing in shape or composition, or (3)
    combined granules and fibers.

    (1)     Note.  The materials may be laminated, imbedded in each other or be
    of one layer having differing sections, e.g., precoated elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    488+,   for formed laminated members forming a unitary filter element.

    510,    for fused or sintered porous material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 292.1+ for a
    stock material product in the form of a composite sheet or web embodying a
    component having structurally defined fibers, subclasses 323+ for such a
    product embodying a component having structurally defined particles, and
    subclasses 357+ for a mass or layer of structurally defined or coated
    element (e.g., fibers, filaments, particles).


CLS 210/504
TXT Compositions under subclass 503 having a coating or impregnant, permanently
    adhered thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 323+ for stock
    material product in the form of a composite web or sheet embodying a
    component having structurally defined fibers or particles, respectively,
    which product may be coated or impregnated, subclasses 357+ for a mass or
    layer of structurally defined or coated elements (e.g., fibers filaments or
    particles, etc.), which may be coated or impregnated in addition to the
    defined structure.

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 59+ for a coated or impregnated fabric.


CLS 210/505
TXT Compositions under subclass 503 in which at least one component is fibrous.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 292.1+ for a
    fiber-containing web or sheet subclasses 375+ for a mass or layer of
    structurally defined or coated fibers or filaments.


CLS 210/506
TXT Compositions under subclass 500 in which the material is coated or
    impregnated or held together by a binder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    504,    for coated or impregnated diverse granules or fibrous materials.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 175+, 190, 193, and 196+ for fabrics or textiles in
    general, which may be coated or impregnated.

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 59+ for a coated or impregnated fabric.


CLS 210/507
TXT Compositions under subclass 506 comprising a woven or knitted fabric.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 59+ for a coated or impregnated woven or knitted fabric.


CLS 210/508
TXT Compositions under subclass 506 which include fibers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    489+,   for abutted fibrous members.

    496,    for bound, fused or matted fibrous    structures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 242, 282, 699+, and
    711 for coating or plastic compositions containing fibers.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 105+ and 114
    for a stock mate rial product in the form of a composite web or sheet in
    which filamentary or fibrous elements in respective layers or components
    are in angular or parallel relationship, respectively; subclasses 357+ for
    a layer or mass of structurally defined or coated fibers or filaments.

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 59+ for a coated or impregnated fabric.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, subclasses 35+ for glass compositions
    containing fibers; and subclass 95 for refractory composition containing
    fibers.


CLS 210/509
TXT Compositions under subclass 508 in which the fibers are inorganic, e.g.,
    asbestos or glass wool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 210, 317.9,
    325, 426+, and 443+ for a stock material form of a single or plural layer
    web or sheet which may include glass or asbestos fibers or filaments.

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 20+, 54+, 172+, 266, 331, 348, and 367 for a fabric which may
    include glass or inorganic fibers or filaments.


CLS 210/510.1
TXT Porous unitary mass:

    Compositions under subclass 500 in which the material is held together by
    fusing or sintering.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclass .5 for metal powders.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 122, 601+ and 672+
    for coating or plastic pore forming compositions.

    166,    Wells, subclass 228 for porous material well screens.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, subclass 2 for processes of making
    sintered porous articles from metal.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 566 for metal
    particle-containing stock material distinguished by an interconnected void
    structure.

    521,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 50+ for pore
    forming, per se in a synthetic resin or natural rubber composition.


CLS 210/511
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which a separating medium comprises
    a liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    634+,   for processes of solvent extraction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 14.52 for apparatus for
    separating mineral oil by solvents.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 256+ for apparatus for extracting a
    liquid with a liquid.


CLS 210/512.1
TXT TANGENTIAL FLOW OR CENTRIFUGAL FLUID ACTION:

    Apparatus under the class definition wherein fluid flows tangentially of a
    container in a manner to produce a whirling motion or there is driven means
    to rotate the fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304,    for a tangential inlet,or spiral or convolute baffle in combination
    with a filter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 400+ and 447+ for similar type gas
    separators.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 725+ for
    methods and apparatus for removing plural grades or classes of solids from
    a liquid suspension and subclasses 710+ for analogous treatment of a
    gaseous suspension.


CLS 210/512.2
TXT Multiple cyclone:

    Apparatus under subclass 512.1 in the form of plural cyclone separators.


CLS 210/512.3
TXT With movable means affecting flow:

    Apparatus under subclass 512.1 having means which is movable, e.g.,
    rotatable, etc., by either an external source or a fluid within the
    apparatus.  The means functions to impart a whirling or rotary motion to
    the fluid.


CLS 210/513
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a container or tank in
    which a mixture of liquids or liquids and solids are separated from one
    another by forming constituent layers in accordance with their respective
    sepcific gravities.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    187+,   for a heat exchanger within a gravitational separator.

    207+,   for a distinct reactor tank within a gravitational separator.

    265,    for a particulate material separator with a gravitational separator.

    299+,   for a filter and a constituent trap.

    800+,   for a process of gravitational     separation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 434+ for gas separators in which the gas
    current is deflected to effect separation.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 456 for separation of a
    dairy food one of which is a liquid.

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, subclasses 13 and 27 for sugar or
    amylaceous material separating and purifying settling tanks.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 172 for fluid handling apparatus including
    means to separate two liquids from each other.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 110 for ladles usable with gravitational separators.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 105.1+ for well pumps having sediment traps or
    deflectors and subclasses 105.5+ for liquid-gas separators; i.e., gas
    anchors.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 155+ for
    separating solids by suspending them in a liquid.


CLS 210/514
TXT Apparatus under subclass 513 comprising means which cooperates with an
    invertible, portable container to isolate one constituent after inversion
    of the container; or after isolation with a single opening of the container
    extending upwardly, one constituent is withdrawn by inversion of the
    container.


CLS 210/515
TXT Apparatus under subclass 514 in which an isolating means and an inverting
    position of the container determines which constituent will be withdrawn.


CLS 210/516
TXT Apparatus under subclass 514 in which the isolating means is resilient and
    deformable to permit insertion into the container.


CLS 210/517
TXT Apparatus under subclass 516 in which the isolator is hinged to a handle.


CLS 210/518
TXT Apparatus under subclass 514 in which the isolator is formed of parts to
    permit angular rearrangement for insertion in the container.


CLS 210/519
TXT Apparatus under subclass 513 having a distributor at an inlet for supplying
    the material to the container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273,    for a moving distributor to a particulate material separator.

    343     and 417, for alternately opening distributors.

    377,    for a centrifugal extractor having a prefilt distributor.


CLS 210/520
TXT Apparatus under subclass 519 which is rotatable.


CLS 210/521
TXT Apparatus under subclass 513 having baffle or partition means arranged
    above the bottom and laterally of the side of the container forming
    compartments and heavier constituent receiving surfaces.


CLS 210/522
TXT Apparatus under subclass 521 with means to withdraw the lighter constituent
    from at least two compartments.


CLS 210/523
TXT Apparatus under subclass 513 including mechanical means for moving a
    constituent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221,    for froth flotation with a scum remover.

    298,    for a sediment mover in a diverse operation separator.

    407,    for residue removing means for a filter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 324+ for spoons.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 110+ for ladles.


CLS 210/524
TXT Apparatus under subclass 523 comprising different serially associated
    movers.


CLS 210/525
TXT Apparatus under subclass 523 which removes sediment from the tank bottom
    and scum at the surface.


CLS 210/526
TXT Apparatus under subclass 523 comprising an endless belt or chain.


CLS 210/527
TXT Apparatus under subclass 523 comprising a carriage which moves
    rectilinearly.


CLS 210/528
TXT Apparatus under subclass 523 comprising a scraper which rotates
    horizontally.


CLS 210/529
TXT Apparatus under subclass 528 wherein the scraper is so constructed that in
    its movement it conforms with the outline of a polygonal tank.


CLS 210/530
TXT Apparatus under subclass 528 wherein the scraper is supported by a carriage
    moving on the rim of the tank.


CLS 210/531
TXT Apparatus under subclass 528 in which the scraper is elevatable.


CLS 210/532.1
TXT Heavier constituent trap, chamber, or recess:

    Apparatus under subclass 513 providing a trap, chamber, or recess for
    receiving the heavier constituent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclasses 105.1+ for well pumps having sediment traps or
    deflectors; and subclasses 105.5+ for liquid-gas separators; i.e., gas
    anchors.


CLS 210/532.2
TXT Septic tank:

    Apparatus under subclass 532.1 in the form of a septic tank.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170,    for a septic tank installed in a geographicial feature.


CLS 210/533
TXT Apparatus under subclass 532 wherein the heavier constituent is discharged
    through a closure or valve controlled port.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112+,   for control by flow material level or fluid pressure responsive
    means.

    312+,   for similar structure in diverse separators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 144 for a valve mounted on a
    tank of general utility.


CLS 210/534
TXT Apparatus under subclass 533 in which the bottom wall of the separator has
    a portion with at least one sloping wall into which the heavier constituent
    drains.


CLS 210/535
TXT Apparatus under subclass 534 in which the valve is spaced in a flow line
    for the heavier constituent and is downstream from the separator.


CLS 210/536
TXT Apparatus under subclass 533 in which the closure or valve is in the side
    wall of the separator.


CLS 210/537
TXT Apparatus under subclass 533 wherein the container has discharge means for
    two or more lighter constituents.


CLS 210/538
TXT Apparatus under subclass 513 in which a lighter constituent is prevented
    from escaping from an outlet for a heavier constituent.


CLS 210/539
TXT Apparatus under subclass 538 having a gas vent or bypass from the
    separating compartment of the tank.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 587+ for a tank with a gas vent and
    inlet and outlet.


CLS 210/540
TXT Apparatus under subclass 538, with a discharge port for a lighter
    constituent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    522,    for a superposed compartments each with a lighter constituent
    discharge.

    537,    for discharge means for heavier and lighter constituents.


CLS 210/541
TXT Apparatus under the class definition which aids a device of this class to
    perform a separating function.


CLS 210/542
TXT Subject matter under the class definition not provided for elsewhere.


CLS 210/600
TXT PROCESSES:

    Process under the class definition by which a liquid (a) of no specific
    utility, (b) of general utility, or (c) water (either for use or discharge)
    is treated by mechanical, physical, or chemical means to perfect it for an
    intended use or render it less noxious.

    (1)     Note.  A process of treating a specific liquid material, other than
    water, is provided for on the basis of the classification of that material.
     See section III, B, 2 of the main class definition.  A process of treating
    a liquid for which there is no other classification, e.g., blood, per se,
    is provided for in this class.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass provides for a chemical treatment of a liquid
    if no chemical is added but constituents already in the liquid react as by
    heating.  See subclasses 749+ for a process including addition of a
    chemical agent.

    (3)     Note.  The processes provided for in subclasses 633, 634+, 656+,
    and 660+ utilize similar functions based on relative attraction or
    repellancy of materials and an explanation of the distinction between the
    concepts of subclasses 633 and 634+ on the one hand and of subclasses 656+
    and 660+ on the other hand, is given in the definition of subclass 634.


CLS 210/601
TXT Treatment by living organism:

    Process under subclass 600 in which the treatment is effected by an agent
    which has the ability to reproduce itself.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass, living organism includes
    animals, plants, and micro-organisms (e.g., bacteria, fungus, algae, etc.)
    but not enzymes.  The organism may reproduce either sexually, asexually, or
    by mechanical division (caused by external agents) and regeneration (e.g.,
    layering or cloning, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    922,    for an oil spill clean up process which may use micro-organisms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 260 for an aquarium having a
    biological-type liquid filter.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, for a process of
    culturing micro-organisms and methods in general, using such
    micro-organisms.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the containment of hazardous or toxic micro-organisms.


CLS 210/602
TXT Including plant or animal of higher order:

    Process under subclass 601 in which the living organism is
    chlorophyl-bearing and vegetative or is sentient, i.e., fish, fowl, insect
    or mammal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for processes in which the active
    agent is what is generally referred to as a higher animal or plant,
    normally visible to the naked eye and is distinguished from micro-organisms
    such as bacteria, fungi, and viruses and includes worms and algae.  In
    general, the living organisms of this subclass are the same as those
    provided for in Classes 47, Plant  Husbandry; and 119, Animal Husbandry,
    while the living organisms of Class 435 are excluded.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, for a process of culturing or growing plants in
    which a sludge or effluent of water treatment may be used.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, for a process of raising fish or worms in which a
    sludge or effluent of water treatment may be used.


CLS 210/603
TXT Including collecting or storing gas (e.g., fuel, carbon monoxide, etc.):

    Process under subclass 601 in which a gas, either added or generated, is
    collected.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclasses 197+ for a process for
    the manufacture of gas from sewage.


CLS 210/604
TXT And reusing oxidant:

    Process under subclass 603 wherein the collected gas is an oxidizing agent
    which is reused or recirculated in the treatment.


CLS 210/605
TXT Anaerobically, with subsequently aerobically treating liquid:

    Process under subclass 601 in which the mainstream is acted upon by living
    organisms which thrive in the absence of oxygen followed by a treatment of
    that stream with living organisms which thrive on oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  Processes which include the sequential steps of aerobic
    treatment, anaerobic treatment and aerobic treatment of the mainstream
    belong in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    630,    for an aerobic treatment, followed by an anaerobic treatment.


CLS 210/606
TXT Adding enzyme or releasing same by treating micro-organism:

    Process under subclass 601 wherein an enzyme is added directly or released
    (through rupture of the living organism cells) to enhance treatment of the
    liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    632,    for process which treats liquid with an enzyme.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 41+ for
    a general chemical process using an enzyme; and subclasses 183+ for an
    enzyme, per se.


CLS 210/607
TXT Dividing, treating, and recombining liquid:

    Process under subclass 601 in which the main process stream is divided into
    plural flow paths, at least one of which receives some treatment prior to
    subsequently being recombined.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    790,    for a physical liquid separation process in which the liquid is
    divided and later recombined.


CLS 210/608
TXT Regulating floating constituent:

    Process under subclass 601 in which solid constituents are separated by
    discriminating flotation, or floating constituents are treated or prevented
    from collecting, or flotation is prevented.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    703+,   for a process of precipitation and flotation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 12.1+ for
    processes of that class including flotation.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, especially subclasses
    16 and 39 for processes and apparatus for breaking up solid accumulations.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 321 and 361 for process and apparatus for
    breaking foams.


CLS 210/609
TXT Including dewatering sludge:

    Process under subclass 601 including a step of drying or compression of
    solids to lower the liquid content.

    (1)     Note.  For placement in this subclass, a treatment by living
    organism step must be positively recited.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    702+,   for dewatering of sludge by addition of a precipitant.

    767+,   for dewatering of sludge, per se, which sludge may have been
    derived by treatment by living organism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses
    for processes and apparatus for drying sewage sludge which do not include
    decomposition of the sewage.

    71,     Chemistry:  Fertilizers, subclasses 12+ for processes of making
    fertilizer from sewage which go beyond mere drying of the sludge.


CLS 210/610
TXT Including adding ancillary growth medium for micro-organism:

    Process under subclass 601 in which a nutrient is added to promote
    multiplication of the living organism.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass, and addition of growth medium
    by mere recirculation of sludge is not considered ancillary.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, particularly
    subclasses 243+ and 822+ for specific classes of micro-organisms and
    methods of culturing.


CLS 210/611
TXT For or with specific micro-organism:

    Process under subclass 610 wherein a specific strain of micro-organism is
    named.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 822+ for
    specific micro-organisms and method of culturing them.


CLS 210/612
TXT And regulating temperature during biological steps:

    Process under subclass 601 including a step of temperature control.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    603,    for a process in which a generated gas is collected and which may
    include temperature regulation.

    609,    for a process of sludge dewatering including temperature regulation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, appropriate
    subclasses, especially subclass 500 for a computerized system of
    controlling a chemical process.


CLS 210/613
TXT Digesting sludge:

    Process under subclass 612 in which fermentation of sludge is effected.


CLS 210/614
TXT Controlling process in response to stream constituent or reactant
    concentration:

    Process under subclass 601 in which a probe or sensor conveys to an
    actuating means a change in or the existence of a predetermined parameter,
    of a condition in the liquid being treated and the actuating means varies,
    ceases, or initiates at least one element of a treatment.

    (1)     Note.  The sensing of the condition may be prior to or sequent to
    the treatment and includes the condition of either influent or effluent.

    (2)     Note.  The operation is "automatic" and requires action by the
    apparatus and does not include use of for example an overflow standpipe or
    a human attendant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, especially
    subclasses 500+ for computerized control of a chemical process.


CLS 210/615
TXT Utilizing contact surfaces supporting micro-organism (e.g., trickling,
    filter, etc.):

    Process under subclass 601 wherein the liquid is treated with solid
    surfaces which support the living organisms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150+,   for gas-liquid contact means of the trickling-filter type; see the
    search notes thereunder.


CLS 210/616
TXT Particulate media:

    Process under subclass 615 wherein the contact surfaces are granular, or
    comprise a mass of small particles, e.g., sand, powder, etc.


CLS 210/617
TXT In bed form:

    Process under subclass 616 wherein the particulate media is relatively
    closely packed in a dense mass rather than being dispersed through the
    liquid.


CLS 210/618
TXT And rehabilitating or regenerating same:

    Process under subclass 617 wherein the particulate media is restored to the
    condition in which it was before the treatment process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    791+,   for a process of rehabilitating or regenerating a similar
    particulate bed used for filtering.


CLS 210/619
TXT Rotating contactor:

    Process under subclass 615 wherein the contact surfaces are rotating
    contactors such as discs, drums, cylinders, brushes, etc.


CLS 210/620
TXT Aerobic treatment:

    Process under subclass 601 wherein the liquid is acted upon by living
    organisms which thrive on oxygen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    602,    for aerobic treatment processes utilizing plants or animals.

    604,    for aerobic treatment processes wherein the gaseous oxidant
    employed or generated is collected and reused in the treatment.

    606,    for aerobic treatment processes by living organisms in conjuction
    with enzymes.

    615,    for aerobic treatment processes which utilize a contact surface.


CLS 210/621
TXT Recirculating to prior step:

    Process under subclass 620 wherein a portion of the stream is withdrawn
    subsequent to the aerobic treatment step and returned thereto.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for recirculation of a portion of the
    stream without a separation of the constituents.  Recirculation of a
    constituent after separation is provided for in an indented subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194+,   for apparatus including recirculating means.

    603+,   for collection and recirculation of a gaseous component to an
    aerobic treatment step.


CLS 210/622
TXT Of separated liquid:

    Process and under subclass 621 wherein supernatant or filtrate is
    recirculated.


CLS 210/623
TXT Of sludge or separated solid:

    Process under subclass 621 wherein sediment is recirculated.

    (1)     Note.  Sludge includes solids separated by various methods and
    which retain considereable liquid, having a muddy or gelatinous texture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    713,    for a precipitation process including recirculation of separated
    solids.


CLS 210/624
TXT And returning to or withdrawing from diverse treating zones:

    Process under subclass 623 including plural steps of sediment recirculation
    from or to different treating areas.


CLS 210/625
TXT Treating outside mainstream:

    Process under subclass 623 wherein the sediment being recirculated is
    treated after removal from the process stream and prior to reintroduction
    into the process stream.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    710+,   for a process of treating separated solids in a precipitating
    method.


CLS 210/626
TXT To mainstream oxygenation (e.g., activated sludge, etc.):

    Process under subclass 623 in which the prior step comprises treatment with
    oxygen.


CLS 210/627
TXT Utilizing specific oxidant other than air alone (e.g., oxygen-enriched air,
    ozone, peroxide, etc.):

    Process under subclass 626 wherein the oxygen-containing agent is a
    particulate oxidant (e.g., oxygen-enriched air, oxygen, ozone, hydrogen
    peroxide, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    721+,   for a process involving oxidation in combination with precipitation.

    758+,   for a process involving chemical oxidation.


CLS 210/628
TXT Utilizing mechanical aeration means (e.g., stirring):

    Process under subclass 626 wherein the oxygen is introduced into the liquid
    by disturging or agitating the liquid to more effectively expose its
    surface to the atmosphere.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for processes other than diffusing
    air under the surface of the liquid and includes methods of stirring the
    surface, pouring or squirting liquid into the air, among others, to
    increase solution of air into the surface of the liquid.

    (2)     Note.  A process utilizing a rotating surface such as a rotating
    contactor, disc, brush, drum, cylinder, etc., which supports the living
    organisms, and which obviously circulates and stirs the liquid, will not
    ordinarily be placed in this subclass, but will be provided for in subclass
    619.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    619,    for a process utilizing a rotating contact surface which may also
    stir the liquid.

    926,    for a collection of art disclosing the use of an oxidation ditch,
    sometimes called a carousel.


CLS 210/629
TXT An internally circulating the liquid:

    Process under subclass 620 which includes a step of agitating or imparting
    movement of material within a vessel, other than mere flow through from
    inlet to outlet.


CLS 210/630
TXT And anaerobic treatment:

    Process under subclass 620 wherein additionally the liquid is acted upon by
    living organisms which thrive in the absence of oxygen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    605,    for a liquid being acted upon by living organisms in any of the
    following sequences:



    (1)     aerobic - anaerobic - aerobic

    (2)     anaerobic - aerobic - anaerobic

    (3)     anaerobic - aerobic


CLS 210/631
TXT And additional treating agent other than mere mechanical manipulation
    (e.g., chemical, sorption, etc.):

    Process under subclass 601 including a step of treating with an additional
    agent (e.g., chemical).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    606,    for a process wherein the additional agent is an enzyme.

    632,    for a process of using an enzyme without a living organism.

    749+,   for a chemical treatment process.


CLS 210/632
TXT Treating by enzyme:

    Process under subclass 600 in which the liquid is treated with a
    proteinaceous catalyst derived from a living organism.

    (1)     Note.  An enzyme is generally specific in the chemical reaction it
    causes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    606,    for a process wherein the liquid is treated with a living organism
    and an enzyme is added thereto or released from the organism to aid in the
    treatment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the containment of hazardous or toxic micro-organisms.


CLS 210/633
TXT Extracting utilizing solid solute:

    Process under subclass 600 in which a solid material is added to a liquid
    into a constituent of which it preferentially dissolves and in which the
    resulting solution is readily separable from other constituents of the
    original liquid.

    (1)     Note.  Adding a solid inorganic salt to a water alcohol mixture
    with formation of a brine phase and an alcohol phase is exemplary of this
    process.


CLS 210/634
TXT Liquid/liquid solvent or colloidal extraction or diffusing or passing
    through septum selective as to material of a component of liquid; such
    diffusing or passing being effected by other than only an ion exchange or
    sorption process:


    Process under subclass 600 in which either (a) a dissolved or suspended
    constituent of the liquid is preferentially dissolved or dispersed into a
    second liquid, or (b) a constituent of the liquid is selectively allowed to
    migrate through a barrier.

    (1)     Note.  The liquid/liquid extraction may be by direct contact of the
    liquids or through a permeable barrier (dialysis). While in the second
    situation (b of this definition) the barrier allows selective migration (is
    semipermeable), in liquid/liquid extraction, the barrier, per se, need not
    be semipermeable.

    (2)     Note.  The constituent which transfers must be dissolved or
    colloidally suspended in the second liquid and not merely removed as a
    floated or precipitated solid.

    (3)     Note.  No distinction is made as to the nature of the constituent
    which is removed; it may be considered a solute, solvent, or both, or
    additive, etc.

    (4)     Note.  The mechanism by which the constituent is separated from the
    liquid through the membrane is more than mere microfiltration, being based
    on the materials of the liquid and the membrane, and is discussed in
    Kirk-Othmer Encyclopedia of Chemistry-Dialysis-Vol. 7; and Osmosis, Osmotic
    Pressure - Vol. 14.

    (5)     Note.  The processes provided for in subclasses 633, 634+, 656+,
    and 660+ utilize similar functions based on relative attraction or
    repellancy of materials and it may be well to explain the distinction
    between the concepts of 633 and 634+ on the one hand and of 656+ and 660+
    on the other hand.

            The processes of subclasses 656+ and 660+ require solid material as
    an agent (often granular or in divided form) which tends to trap or capture
    on its surface or within its cavities, a constituent to be removed from a
    liquid.  The method of subclasses 656+ is a species of the art of subclass
    660 and in both situations the agent utilized remains a solid and retains
    the constituent which is removed.

            In subclasses 633 and 634, processes which are directed to
    extraction utilize a liquid (or a solid which becomes liquid-the solute).
    In processes which are directed to diffusing through a septum, a
    constituent appears to become incorporated temporarily into the material of
    the septum (not merely at the surface or in cavities, but throughout) and
    is not retained but exudes from the downstream side of the septum.  During
    the diffusion the material passed and the material of the septum appear to
    form a solid solution with a concentration gradiant along the path of
    diffusion.

            It should be noted that liquid/liquid chromatography is provided
    for in subclass 635 rather than in subclass 656, because a liquid/liquid
    solvent or colloidal extraction function is performed and this appears
    before chromatography in the schedule.

            Filtration to an extremely fine degree, e.g., ultra- or
    hyper-filtration, where separation is achieved by using an element with
    interstices so small that it prevents passage of very small particles (even
    down to colloidal size) is provided for in subclass 767.  Some documents
    refer to dialysis and osmosis (reverse) as ultrafiltration or
    hyperfiltration.  When there is confusion or doubt whether hyperfiltration
    or ultrafiltration is due to pore or interstices size or
    attraction-repulsion due to chemical nature of a membrane or septum,
    placement of the document should be in the appropriate first appearing
    subclass, i.e., subclasses 634+.


CLS 210/635
TXT Liquid/liquid or gel type (i.e., jelly like) chromatography:

    Process under subclass 634 in which the extracting liquid is relatively
    immobile and an equilibrium of the dissolution or suspension of a
    constituent between the two liquids is set up such that the constituent
    moves through the extracting liquid at a slower rate than the movement of
    the treated liquid and said constituent tends to concentrate in a specific
    volume of the extracting liquid.

    (1)     Note.  See subclasses 656+ for chromatography using a solid sorbent
    and note the distinction between gel-type chromatography of this subclass
    and chromatography using a solid, e.g., silica gel found in subclasses 656+.

            For the purpose of this subclass, gel type includes only those
    suspensions which have a liquid or jellylike texture or property and does
    not include material of a solid character as silica gel.  The gel or liquid
    stationary phase may be (and generally is) associated with a solid which
    tends to immobilize it, usually being coated on small particles of such a
    solid to increase surface area.


CLS 210/636
TXT Including cleaning or sterilizing of apparatus:

    Process under subclass 634 which includes a positive step of either
    removing accumulated undesired material from the apparatus or destroying a
    pathogenic micro-organism.

    (1)     Note.  The continuous removal of a more concentrated feed stream
    apart from the processed effluent is not considered cleaning for purposes
    of this class.

    (2)     Note.  An example of undesired material may be a buildup of
    retentate on the upstream side of a membrane serving to pass desired
    constituents.


CLS 210/637
TXT Including regulating pressure to control constituent gradient at membrane
    or to prevent rupture of membrane:

    Process under subclass 634 in which the force driving the liquid to be
    treated or a counter force of an effluent is controlled or varied such that
    (a) the concentration of a constituent in adjacent layers is maintained at
    a desirable level, or (b) the burst strength of a septum is not exceeded.

    (1)     Note.  Some examples of the art classifiable in this subclass are
    pulsating or oscillating the feed in a dialysis method to prevent buildup
    of a rejected constituent on the upstream side and partially equalizing of
    the pressure on the downstream side of a reverse osmosis membrane.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, especially
    subclasses 500+ for a computerized monitoring of a chemical process.


CLS 210/638
TXT Including ion exchange or other chemical reaction:

    Process under subclass 634 in which a constituent of the liquid takes up,
    gives away, or replaces a chemical moiety such that a different compound is
    formed.

    (1)     Note.  A process in which a dissolved constituent, after having
    migrated into an extracting liquid or through a septum, is precipitated is
    classifiable here but a process in which precipitation is caused by
    addition of a second liquid without extractive solution, e.g., adding a
    halide solution to a silver salt solution to cause precipitation, is
    classifiable in subclass 702.

    (2)     Note.  Adding a pH or surfactant agent is not considered to cause a
    chemical reaction and such a process is classifiable in subclass 639 infra.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    660,    for an ion exchange process, per se.


CLS 210/639
TXT Including prior use of additive (e.g., changing ph, etc.):

    Process under subclass 634 in which a nonreactive material is added to the
    liquid before the extraction or diffusion.

    (1)     Note.  The additive generally aids or perfects the extraction or
    diffusion, and may include as an example, a flocculant to prevent fouling
    of a membrane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    638,    for a process in which the additive chemically reacts with a
    component of the liquid.


CLS 210/640
TXT Passing through membrane in vapor phase:

    Process under subclass 634 in which a constituent of the liquid diffuses
    through a septum and exists in the gaseous state.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclass 46 for degasification of a
    liquid by selective diffusion of gases through a substantially solid
    barrier, in which the constituent that is removed is initially present as a
    gas in the liquid.  Class 210 takes processes of separating a constituent
    through a membrane or septum wherein the constituent is not initially
    present as a gas in the liquid and passes through the membrane or septum in
    vapor phase.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, for a process in which a
    constituent of a liquid is vaporized and condensed to separate it from the
    liquid mixture. If the phase change occurs during diffusion through a
    septum, the process is classifiable here.


CLS 210/641
TXT Utilizing plural diverse membranes:

    Process under subclass 634 in which at least two membranes of differing
    constitution are used.

    (1)     Note.  The differing constitution may be different materials or the
    same material with identified different internal structure (e.g., different
    permeability, degrees of cross-linking, specified methods of making, etc.).


CLS 210/642
TXT Extracting water from brine utilizing liquid/liquid solvent or colloidal
    extraction:

    Process under subclass 634 in which a liquid selectively dissolves water
    from a salt-water mixture, resulting in (a) a salt-water mixture, more
    concentrated in salt, and (b) a water-liquid mixture allowing the two
    mixtures to be separated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 532+ for a process of desalinating water
    by freezing.


CLS 210/643
TXT Utilizing liquid membrane (e.g., emulsion) in liquid/liquid solvent or
    colloidal extraction:

    Process under subclass 634 in which a liquid serves as a selective septum
    through which a constituent diffuses, thereby being separated from the
    liquid being treated.

    (1)     Note.  In many of the processes of this subclass the septum is a
    thin film, sometimes the dispersand of an emulsion and the diffused
    constituent collects in fine droplets of the dispersed phase.

    (2)     Note.  A common use of this technique is to extract water from
    brine and such a process is classifiable in subclass 642.


CLS 210/644
TXT Diffusing or passing through septum selective as to material of a component
    in liquid/liquid solvent or colloidal extraction:

    Process under subclass 634 in which a constituent of the liquid being
    treated diffuses through a material which acts as a barrier to other
    constituents of the liquid and a constituent is preferentially dissolved in
    a second liquid usually contacting the other side of the barrier material.

    (1)     Note.  The selectivity of the diffusion and extraction of
    constituents may be due to the combination of the septum and extracting
    (dialysing) liquid.

    (2)     Note.  The septum is referred to as a membrane and is generally a
    thin film or skinlike material and may swell or soften but not dissolve in
    certain liquids.

    (3)     Note.  The mechanism by which the constituent is separated from the
    liquid through the membrane is more than mere microfiltration, being based
    on the materials of the liquid and the membrane and is discussed in
    Kirk-Othmer Encyclopedia of Chemistry-dialysis-Vol. 7; and Osmosis, Osmotic
    Pressure and Reverse Osmosis-Vol. 14.

    (4)     Note.  While most of the disclosures in this subclass are directed
    to  process in which the same constituent passes through the barrier into
    the second liquid, a claim to a two-step process which includes
    liquid/liquid extraction and selective diffusion through a membrane will be
    placed here.


CLS 210/645
TXT Biological fluid (e.g., blood, urine, etc.):

    Process under subclass 644 in which the liquid treated is from an animal or
    contains living organisms (e.g., ferment).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, for a method of treating a biological fluid and a
    significant step of withdrawing from, or returning to, the body such a
    fluid.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, appropriate subclass for a method of
    obtaining an organic compound from a biological fluid.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, for a
    composition comprising a biological fluid for treating a body and a process
    of making such a composition.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 1+ for
    a method of testing or analysing a biological fluid.


CLS 210/646
TXT Hemodialysis:

    Process under subclass 645 in which blood is treated or purified.

    (1)     Note.  The process generally duplicates the function of the kidney.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, for a method of treating blood and a significant step of
    withdrawing from or returning to a living body the blood being treated.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 44+ for blood oxygenating apparatus;
    however, combined blood purifying and oxygenating apparatus is in this
    class (210).

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 2 for a
    process of oxygenating blood, but the combined process of purifying and
    oxygenating blood is classifiable in this class (210).


CLS 210/647
TXT Maintaining critical concentration(s):

    Process under subclass 646 in which the amount of at least one constituent
    of the treated fluid is kept at or between predetermined limits.

    (1)     Note.  The concentration of either the constituent it is desired to
    remove or of some other constituent is included, e.g., maintaining the
    potassium level in an artificial kidney process.


CLS 210/648
TXT Including regenerating or rehabilitating the extracting liquid in
    liquid/liquid solvent or colloidal extraction:

    Process under subclass 644 in which the liquid into which a constituent has
    migrated from the treated liquid is itself treated to remove such
    constituent and thereby placed in condition for reuse.

    (1)     Note.  The extracting liquid is sometimes referred to as the
    dialysizing liquid and usually is recycled.


CLS 210/649
TXT Diffusing or passing through septum selective as to material of a component
    of liquid:

    Process under subclass 634 in which a constituent of a liquid migrates
    through a skinlike partition as set forth in the Glossary under
    Semipermeable membrane.

    (1)     Note.  The process provided for in this subclass is more than
    filtration or screening to a very fine stage, but includes diffusion of
    usually a solvent through a material based on the chemical potential of the
    various materials of the liquid and membrane. A rather complete treatment
    of the process is given in Kirk-Othmer Encyclopedia of Chemical
    Technology-Dialysis-Vol. 7 pp. 1-21; and Osmosis, Osmotic Pressure and
    Reverse Osmosis-Vol. 14, pp. 345-355.


CLS 210/650
TXT Filtering through membrane (e.g., ultrafiltration):

    Process under subclass 649 in which a liquid is passed through a skinlike
    barrier which serves to retain dissolved or colloidally suspended matter,
    passing only those constituents which are, per se, fluid, e.g., solvent.

    (1)     Note.  For placement in this subclass, some, but not all, dissolved
    matter must be retained, e.g., a solute such as protein, soluble synthetic
    resins or starch may be retained while ionized salts may pass through the
    membrane. Retention of ionized material is provided for in indented
    subclasses 652+.


CLS 210/651
TXT Removing specified material:

    Process under subclass 650 in which a constituent removed from the liquid
    is positively identified.

    (1)     Note.  The material itself rather than a characteristic must be
    identified. For example, oily material, and food waste, or organic are not
    considered to be identified material; however, protein and named bacteria
    are considered to be specified material.


CLS 210/652
TXT Hyperfiltration (e.g., reverse osmosis, etc.):

    Process under subclass 650 in which dissolved material (i.e., including
    ionic) is removed from a liquid.

    (1)     Note.  Reverse osmosis is the usual process for which this subclass
    provides.  See OSMOSIS under the GLOSSARY.


CLS 210/653
TXT Utilizing specified membrane material:

    Process under subclass 652 reciting named membrane material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    641,    for a process using diverse membranes.


CLS 210/654
TXT Synthetic resin:

    Process under subclass 653 in which the membrane is constructed of a
    manufactured polymeric material exhibiting properties similar to those of a
    natural resin (e.g., film forming).

    (1)     Note.  Synthetic resins, per se, are classified in Class 260,
    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, subclasses 201+ (including the 520 series of
    classes).


CLS 210/655
TXT Cellulosic:

    Process under subclass 653 in which the membrane is constituted of a
    naturally occurring polymeric carbohydrate, usually derived from wood,
    cotton, or flax.


CLS 210/656
TXT Chromatography:

    Process under subclass 600 in which a solid sorbent competes in affinity
    with a relatively moving carrier liquid or solvent for a constituent such
    that the constituent is moved through the sorbent at a rate slower than the
    liquid and determined by the equilibrium or partition coefficient of the
    liquid-sorbent combination.

    (1)     Note.  The process may separate more than one constituent with
    different partition coefficients, selectively spacing said constituents in
    consequence of the differing equilibria in the constituent liquid-sorbent
    combinations.

    (2)     Note.  The processes provided for in subclasses 633, 634+, 656+,
    and 660+ utilize similar functions based on relative attraction or
    repellancy of materials and an explanation of the distinction between the
    concepts of subclasses 633 and 634+ on the one hand and subclasses 656+ and
    660+ on the other hand, is given in the definition of subclass 634.

    (3)     Note.  A process in which a liquid or organic gel acts as a sorbent
    is a liquid/liquid solvent extraction process and a patent to such a
    process will be placed in subclass 635.  The organic gels exhibit a
    resilient or plastic property indicative of the underlying liquid nature.
    Silica gel (inorganic) which has the characteristic of a solid granular
    mass is not a gel-type sorbent for that subclass (635) and a process using
    silica gel is classifiable in this or an indented subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    635,    for a liquid/liquid or gel-type chromatography, such as partition
    chromatography process, and see (2) Note supra.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 19.02, 23.35+ and 61.43 for a
    test involving chromatography.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 82+ for processes of gas
    separation using chromatography.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, for a composition comprising a catalyst or sorbent, per se.


CLS 210/657
TXT Utilizing rotating column:

    Process under subclass 656 in which the sorbent is contained in a tube or
    column which is revolved about a point.

    (1)     Note.  The point about which the column rotates may lie on or be
    remote from an axis of the column.


CLS 210/658
TXT Utilizing paper or thin layer plate:

    Process under subclass 656 in which the sorbent comprises a fibrous web or
    a thin coating or sorptive material on a flat substrate and wherein
    separation occurs along the plane of the web or coating.


CLS 210/659
TXT Including liquid flow diversion:

    Process under subclass 656 in which the liquid being treated follows
    different flow paths, exteriorly of a column, in either a simultaneous or
    alternative manner.


CLS 210/660
TXT Ion exchange or selective sorption:

    Process under subclass 600 in which the liquid is contacted with a solid
    insoluble material which (a) captures from the liquid a dissociated charged
    chemical moiety and releases to the liquid a different charged moiety of
    the same polarity by dissociation thereby effecting a chemical replacement
    reaction, (b) holds by attraction on its surface or within its pores a
    constituent dissolved or colloidally dispersed in the liquid, or (c)
    preferentially attracts one of two or more liquids in contact with each
    other.

    (1)     Note.  The processes provided for in subclasses 633, 634+, 656+,
    and 660+ utilize similar functions based on relative attraction or
    repellancy of materials and an explanation of the distinction between the
    concepts of subclasses 633 and 634+ on the one hand and of subclasses 656+
    and 660+ on the other hand, is given in the definition of subclass 634.

    (2)     Note.  The ion exchanger or sorbent (separatory material) is
    usually granular or porous for more surface contact and the preferential
    attraction may be exhibited by sorption of the entire liquid with
    preferential release of the constituents.

    (3)     Note.  Processes directed to the production of a particular
    compound or composition (including solutions of either the compound or
    composition in water), or directed to the purification thereof are
    classified with the particular compound or composition. Processes wherein
    all claims are limited to the deposition of specific materials on ion
    exchangers or sorbents with subsequent recovery of the specific materials
    are classified with the materials so operated upon.

    (4)     Note.  The line between this class (210) and Class 521, Synthetic
    Resins or Natural Rubbers is as follows: Where a patent contains a claim to
    an ion exchange synthetic resin and also a claim to a process involving the
    mere treatment of a liquid, which process is classifiable in Class 210 [see
    (2) Note], the patent is classifiable in Class 521 and cross-referenced to
    this class (210).  If all the claims are drawn to a process of treating
    liquids with ion exchange resins or any claim includes a significant liquid
    treating step the patent is classified in this class (210) and
    cross-referenced to Class 521 when necessary.  The presence or absence of a
    significant step of regenerating the resin in a process of treating a
    liquid does not effect this line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189,    for separatory apparatus including plural chambers with movement of
    granules therebetween.

    190,    for separatory apparatus with external means to supply regenerating
    medium thereto.

    263+,   for a particulate material-type separator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 90+ for processes of gas
    separation using solid sorbents.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclass 25 for processes
    of treating solids in bulk.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 179 for a water insoluble base exchange
    agent containing water treating compositions.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses for a
    process employing a chemical reaction to produce inorganic compounds which
    may be useful in ion exchange.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, for composition comprising a catalyst or sorbent, per se, and
    see especially subclasses 60+ and 400+ for a sorbent which may be used in
    purifying liquid.

    521,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubber, for a resinous ion exchanger
    composition, and especially subclass 26 for a regeneration process, per se.

    554,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 191+ and 708 for adsorption processes
    involving organic materials, see (3) Note.


CLS 210/661
TXT By passing through suspended bed:

    Process under subclass 660 wherein the liquid being treated is passed
    through a mass of particulate separatory material suspended within a
    definite zone by the velocity of the liquid in a direction opposite to the
    force of gravity (e.g., a fluidized bed).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    715,    for passing a liquid through a sludge or floc blanket.


CLS 210/662
TXT And liquid testing or volume measuring:

    Process under subclass 660 including testing a liquid to determine its
    chemical composition or measuring its volume.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88+,    for meter controlled cyclic separatory systems.

    96+,    for constituent mixture variation responsive separatory apparatus.

    98+,    for fluid current controlled cyclic separatory systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 194+ for volume or rate-of-flow
    meters.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 1+ for
    chemical analytical methods.


CLS 210/663
TXT Including diverse separating or treating of liquid:

    Process under subclass 660 in which the liquid being treated is subjected
    to an additional operation other than ion exchange or sorption, which
    operation (a) removes constituents from the liquid, or (b) neutralizes or
    inhibits the effects of constituents in the liquid.

    (1)     Note.  The additional treatment may be prior to, or subsequent to
    the ion exchange or sorption treatment.

    (2)     Note.  Plural ion exchange or sorption treatments, or ion exchange
    in combination with sorption treatments, are not classified in this
    subclass unless additional other treatments are also provided.

    (3)     Note.  A process of retaining exchange or sorbent material by
    screening subsequent to agitation of loose such material in a liquid is not
    considered to be a separate treating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    638,    for an ion exchange process combined with liquid/liquid separation
    or with use of a semipermeable membrane.


CLS 210/664
TXT By distilling or degassing:

    Process under subclass 663 in which a constituent is removed from the
    liquid by converting part of the liquid to a gaseous or vapor phase in
    which the gas or vapor is not sorbed nor chemically changed to a nongaseous
    element or compound.

    (1)     Note.  Included are processes in which an initially dissolved gas
    in evolved or liquid is vaporized, leaving behind a nonvapor constituent
    and the vapor is then condensed.

    (2)     Note.  The distillation or degassing treatment must be applied to
    the liquid undergoing treatment, not to an additional liquid (e.g., a
    regenerant) which may come in contact with the ion exchanger or sorbent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188,    for apparatus of this class (210) combined with means to separate a
    gas evolved during a treating operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 241+ for processes to remove
    gas initially present in a liquid mixture.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, for liquid purification
    involving distillation, per se.


CLS 210/665
TXT By making an insoluable substance or accreting suspended constituents:

    Process under subclass 663 in which a liquid is treated by a chemical or
    physical agent to cause a dissolved constituent to separate from the
    solvent or to cause a constituent, dispersed in such a finely divided state
    that it is not filterable or settleable, to agglomerate, coagulate,
    coalesce, or flocculate.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass requires a positive step to cause the
    precipitation or accretion, and merely allowing suspended material to
    settle will not warrant classification here, but is provided for in
    subclass 663.

    (2)     Note.  Precipitation may be either by chemical reaction, (e.g., of
    silver by addition of sodium chloride, by salting out or addition of
    alcohol to sugar solution, etc.) or by physical means as agitation, heat,
    etc.

    (3)     Note.  A process using a single inorganic flocculant or precipitant
    is classified in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    601,    especially 626 and 631, for a process utilizing a living organism
    and in which flocculation may occur.

    695,    for a process utilizing magnetic energy and which may precipitate
    or flocculate material in a liquid.

    702,    for a liquid purification or separation process using precipitation
    or flocculation, per se.

    800+,   for a process of separation including only settling of suspended
    material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, subclasses 295+ and 313+ for
    physical processes of crystallizing or agglomerating a specific nonmetallic
    element or an inorganic compound.

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes and non-coating apparatus for
    growing therein-defined single-crystal of all types of materials, including
    inorganic or organic.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, appropriate subclasses, and
    subclasses 701+ and 704+ for a process of obtaining or purifying a specific
    organic compound.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses for a
    chemical process of crystallizing a specific nonmetallic element or an
    inorganic compound.


CLS 210/666
TXT Utilizing organic agent:

    Process under subclass 665 in which a carbon compound is added to the
    liquid to cause precipitation or accretion of a dissolved or suspended
    material.

    (1)     Note.  The carbon compound is one that is classifiable in Class
    260, Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, and does not include metal carbonates
    or cyanides.


CLS 210/667
TXT Utilizing aluminum, calcium, or iron containing agent:

    Process under subclass 665 in which an element of atomic number 13, 20, or
    26 or an inorganic compound of such an element is added to the liquid to
    cause precipitation or accretion of a dissolved or suspended material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    666,    for a similar process using an organic compound of aluminum,
    calcium, or iron.


CLS 210/668
TXT By chemically modifying or inhibiting dispersed constituent:

    Process under subclass 663 in which the additional treatment includes
    rendering constituents of the liquid unobnoxious in a comtemplated use of
    the liquid, by chemical destruction or neutralization of the component or
    by chemical inhibition of the effects of the component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    673,    for a process of regeneration which includes application of a
    destructive agent to the ion exchanger or sorbent.

    749,    for a process including destruction or inhibition as a chemical
    treatment, especially subclass 764 for destruction of micro-organisms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the destruction or containment of hazardous or toxic waste
    by way or chemically modifying or inhibiting dispersed constituent(s).


CLS 210/669
TXT Prior to ion exchange or sorption:

    Process under subclass 663 in which the additional separation or treatment
    is carried out before contact with an ion exchanger or sorbent.


CLS 210/670
TXT Including rehabilitating or regenerating exchange material or sorbent:

    Process under subclass 660 including restoring the separatory material to
    the condition in which it was before the separatory process.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 101+ for processes of chemical leaching peculiar to
    hydrometallurgy.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 10+ for a
    process of regeneration or purification of the agent used in a process
    there provided for.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 411+ for a process of regenerating solid
    adsorbents.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses for
    extracting, leaching, or dissolving processes therein provided for; and
    subclass 658.5 for extracting, leaching, or dissolving processes not
    otherwise provided for.

    521,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 26 for a process of
    regenerating ion exchange polymers.


CLS 210/671
TXT Of oil sorbent material:

    Process under subclass 670 wherein the separatory material is a sorbent
    having oil deposited thereon or therein as a result of contact between the
    sorbent and the liquid undergoing treatment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    680,    for removal of oil from a liquid with a sorbent material which is
    associated with an inert material.

    693,    for removal of oil from an aqueous stream using a synthetic resin.


CLS 210/672
TXT Fractional, selective, or partial type:

    Process under subclass 670 in which only a portion of a static body of ion
    exchange or sorbent material is regenerated, or parts of the body are
    regenerated to different levels of activity; in which two or more
    components of the original liquid, deposited on the ion exchanger or
    sorbent, are removed separately from the insoluble material by an eluant
    and collected in fractions containing varying proportions of the
    components; or in which two or more components are removed separately by
    the use of an eluant specific for the removal of each, e.g., selective
    elution.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    656,    for a process involving chromatography.

    676,    for a process in which the separatory material is regenerated in a
    continuous cyclic process; i.e., portions are sequentially regenerated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry of Physical Processes, subclasses 296+ for selective
    crystallization.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 23.35+  for gas analysis by
    chromatography; and subclasses 863+ for gas samplers.


CLS 210/673
TXT Utilizing gas, water or chemical oxidizing or reducing agent:

    Process under subclass 670 wherein the separatory material is restored to
    use by contact by a gas (including drying) except to merely loosen a bed,
    or by water, or by a chemical agent which oxidizes or reduces the sorbed
    constituent.

    (1)     Note.  Mere backwashing with water, without the water causing a
    regeneration of the separatory material, is not intended to be included in
    this subclass.  Elution by a solvent, except water, is not proper for this
    subclass, see subclass 674.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    668,    for destruction or inhibition of a dispersed constituent.

    764,    for a chemical treatment involving destruction of micro-organisms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclass 310 for
    distillation of mineral oils from adsorbents.


CLS 210/674
TXT Utilizing organic regenerant:

    Process under subclass 670 in which the separatory material is contacted
    with a carbon compound which serves to restore it by elution or exchange.

    (1)     Note.  The carbon compound is one that is classifiable in Class
    260, Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, and does not include metal carbonates
    or cyanides.


CLS 210/675
TXT Rehabilitating or regenerating in diverse zone or chamber:

    Process under subclass 670 wherein the ion exchange or sorbent material is
    conveyed out of a liquid treating zone into a rehabilitation zone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for processes of fractional or selective rehabilitation of static
    beds.

    189,    for apparatus having means for moving granules between plural
    chambers.


CLS 210/676
TXT Continuous cyclic process:

    Process under subclass 675 in which portions of the separatory material are
    sequentially conveyed from, restored and returned to the treating zone in a
    repetitive mode, with some part of the separatory material treating liquid
    while another part is concurrently being regenerated.


CLS 210/677
TXT Using conserved or recirculated fluid:

    Process under subclass 670 in which a liquid which has once been contacted
    with the separatory material is again contacted with the same or a
    different separatory material at a different step in the
    treating-regenerating cycle.

    (1)     Note.  The second contacting must perform the restoration of
    separatory material and not further treat the liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194+,   for separatory apparatus including means to recirculate a
    constituent.


CLS 210/678
TXT Including liquid flow direction change:

    Process under subclass 670 including a flow of fluid through the separatory
    material in a direction different from the flow of liquid during the
    separating treatment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    275+,   for backwash or blowback means combined with a particular
    material-type separator.

    420+,   for a filter with valve means providing selective directive flow
    relative to the filter.


CLS 210/679
TXT Utilizing exchange or sorbent material associated with inert material:

    Process under subclass 660 including passing a liquid through ion exchange
    or sorbent material which is mixed with, coated on, or impregnated into
    inert material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    504,    for a coated or impregnated filter material having diverse
    constituents.

    506,    for coated or impregnated filter materials.


CLS 210/680
TXT Including oil sorbent:

    Process under subclass 679 wherein the separatory material comprises a
    sorbent which has an affinity for oil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    671,    for rehabilitating an oil sorbent material.

    693,    for removing an oil from an aqueous stream with a synthetic resin.


CLS 210/681
TXT Removing ions:

    Process under subclass 660 in which a constituent removed comprises a
    dissociated charged chemical moiety.


CLS 210/682
TXT Radioactive:

    Process under subclass 681 in which the ion removed contains an atom the
    nucleus of which emits subatomic particles or rays and changes in either
    atomic weight or number.

    (1)     Note.  Most of the radioactive ions comprise the actinide or
    lanthanide series of elements.


CLS 210/683
TXT Anions:

    Process under subclass 681 wherein the contituent is negatively charged.


CLS 210/684
TXT Metal complexed (e.g., chromate, ferricyanide, chlorplatinate, etc.):


    Process under subclass 683 in which the ion comprises a metal atom
    chemically bound with nonmetal(s).


CLS 210/685
TXT Including cation:

    Process under subclass 683 including removing a positively charged
    constituent from the liquid being treated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    681,    687, or 688, for a process involving removal of cations.


CLS 210/686
TXT Utilizing mixed bed or amphoteric material:

    Process under subclass 685 wherein the separatory material is (a) a mixture
    of distinct cation exchanging particles and anion exchanging particles, or
    (b) a single material exhibiting both cation exchanging and anion
    exchanging properties.


CLS 210/687
TXT Calcium or magnesium (e.g., hardness, water softening, etc.):

    Process under subclass 681 wherein the ion is of a Group IIA element with
    atomic number 12 or 20.


CLS 210/688
TXT Heavy metal:

    Process under subclass 681 wherein the constituent is a positively charged
    ion of a metal whose specific gravity is greater than four.


CLS 210/689
TXT Sorbing water from diverse liquid:

    Process under subclass 660 in which the liquid being treated comprises
    water in mixture with a second liquid and water is retained by the
    separatory material.


CLS 210/690
TXT Sorbing organic constituent:

    Process under subclass 660 in which the constituent retained by the
    separatory material comprises a carbon compound.

    (1)     Note.  The carbon compounds that are considered organic are those
    classifiable in Class 260, Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, and do not
    include metal cyanides or carbonates.


CLS 210/691
TXT From aqueous material:

    Process under subclass 690 in which the liquid from which the organic
    constituent is sorbed comprises water.

    (1)     Note.  The liquid may be considered as a functional or known liquid
    other than water but contains a substantial amount of water (e.g., blood,
    sap, concentrated aqueous solution, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, subclasses 49 and 55 for
    adsorption processes applied to sugar solutions.


CLS 210/692
TXT Utilizing synthetic resin:

    Process under subclass 691 wherein the separatory material comprises a
    manufactured polymeric material exhibiting properties similar to those of a
    natural resin (e.g., film forming).

    (1)     Note.  Synthetic resins, per se, are classifiable in the 520 series
    of classes.


CLS 210/693
TXT Oil removed:

    Process under subclass 692 wherein the organic constituent removed from the
    liquid is an oil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    671,    for rehabilitating an oil sorbent material, combined with a sorbing
    step.

    680,    for removal of oil from a liquid with a sorbent material which is
    associated with an inert material.


CLS 210/694
TXT Utilizing activated carbon:

    Process under subclass 691 in which the sorbent comprises the element of
    atomic number 6 in a highly porous state.

    (1)     Note.  The sorbent is also known as charcoal and can be produced by
    pyrolysis, or carbonizing often with subsequent treatment as by steam or
    carbon dioxide.


CLS 210/695
TXT Using magnetic force:

    Process under subclass 600 which includes the use of a magnetic field or of
    magnetic material to achieve purification or separation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222+,   for apparatus including magnetic separation means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, particularly subclasses
    155+ for the production of a compound or element by chemical reaction
    brought about by electrical or wave energy in a magnetic field; subclasses
    157.15+ for processes of treating materials involving a chemical reaction
    brought about by wave energy; and subclasses 554+ for magnetic treatment,
    per se, when some effect other than mere separation is desired or produced
    or for simultaneous electrical and magnetic liquid separation which does
    not  result in the production of a compound or element by chemical reaction
    brought about by electrical or wave energy in a magnetic field.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 29 for a
    process of separating solids while in a fluid suspension.


CLS 210/696
TXT Preventing, decreasing, or delaying precipitation, coagulation or
    flocculation:

    Process under subclass 600 in which ions or solute are maintained in
    solution or their separation is impeded, or in which the gathering together
    of suspended solids (including colloids) is impeded.

    (1)     Note.  A claim to a process for preventing scale formation by
    precipitation or flocculation, etc., in a prior step or up stream in a
    system is not proper for this subclass and should be searched in subclass
    702 infra.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 5 for
    flocculation or deflocculation there provided for.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 175+ for a scale inhibiting composition;
    subclasses 193.1 for bindant containing compositions; and subclass 363.5
    for solids with solution or dispersion aid.


CLS 210/697
TXT Utilizing inorganic phosphorus agent:

    Process under subclass 696 in which the solution or suspension is
    maintained or the gathering together of particles is impeded by use of an
    inorganic compound which includes phosphorus.

    (1)     Note.  Search this class subclass for a process using inorganic
    compounds or compositions including metaphosphate, polyphasphate or P2O5
    radicals.


CLS 210/698
TXT Utilizing organic agent:

    Process under subclass 696 in which the solution or suspension is
    maintained or the gathering together of particles is impeded by use of a
    carbon compound.

    (1)     Note.  The carbon compounds are those classifiable in Class 260,
    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, and do not include metal cyanides or
    carbonates.


CLS 210/699
TXT Phosphorus containing:

    Process under subclass 698 wherein the organic compound contains phosphorus.


CLS 210/700
TXT Nitrogen containing:

    Process under subclass 699 wherein the organic compound also includes
    nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  Search this subclass for a process using aminophosphonic
    acids to prevent precipitation or agglomeration.


CLS 210/701
TXT Acrylic polymer:

    Process under subclass 698 wherein the organic compound contains recurring
    units formed by the addition reaction of acrylic acid, alpha-substituted
    acrylic acid or functional deriatives of such acids.

    (1)     Note.  The functional derivatives include the salts, esters,
    nitriles, amides, acyl halides, and anhydrides of the acids.  The compound
    may include units of other monomers such as, e.g., stryrene or butadiene.


CLS 210/702
TXT Making an insoluable substance or accreting suspended constituents:

    Process under subclass 600 in which a liquid is treated by a chemical or
    physical agent to cause a dissolved constituent to separate from the
    solvent or to cause a constituent, dispersed in such a finely divided state
    that it is not filterable or settleable, to agglomerate, coagulate,
    coalesce, or flocculate.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses require a positive step to
    cause the precipitation or accretion, and merely allowing suspended
    material to settle will not warrant classification here, but is provided
    for in subclasses 800+.

    (2)     Note.  Precipitation may be either by chemical reaction (e.g., of
    silver by addition of sodium chloride, by salting out or addition of
    alcohol to sugar solution, etc.), or by physical means as agitation, heat,
    etc.

    (3)     Note.  A process using a single inorganic flocculant or precipitant
    is classified in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    631,    for a process using a living organism and which may include a
    precipitation or flocculating step.

    695,    for a process utilizing magnetic energy and which may precipitate
    or flocculate material in a liquid.

    800+,   for a process of separation including only settling of suspended
    material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, subclasses 295+ and 313+ for
    physical processes of crystallizing or agglomerating a specific nonmetallic
    element or an inorganic compound.

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes and non-coating apparatus for
    growing therein-defined single-crystal of all types of materials, including
    inorganic or organic.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, appropriate subclasses, and
    subclasses 701+ and 704+ for a process of obtaining or purifying a specific
    organic compound.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses for a
    chemical process of crystallizing a specific nonmetallic element or an
    inorganic compound.


CLS 210/703
TXT Effecting flotation:

    Process under subclass 702 in which a dissolved or dispersed constituent in
    the liquid is caused to rise toward an upper surface by use of an agent
    which reduces the apparent density of such constituent.

    (1)     Note.  The agent may cause gas bubble which attach themselves to
    particles or it may be a light liquid which wets and associates with the
    constituent, causing it to float.


CLS 210/704
TXT Including chemical addition (with or without bouyancy gas):

    Process under subclass 703 which includes the step of adding a material
    which serves to insolubilize or accrete a constituent or effect a chemical
    change in the liquid and which is in addition to any bouyancy gas which may
    be used.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass, a gas used merely to float
    the substance is not considered to be a chemical and would ordinarily be
    classified in subclass 703.


CLS 210/705
TXT Chemically specified precipitant, coagulant, or flocculant:

    Process under subclass 704 in which an accreting or insolubilizing agent is
    identified.


CLS 210/706
TXT And significant characteristic of the bouyancy gas, other than mere
    addition of same:

    Process under subclass 705 wherein the bouyancy gas has a significant
    characteristic, such as, bubble size, manner of introducing or composition.


CLS 210/707
TXT Generating gas in situ:

    Process under subclass 706 including the formation of the bouyancy gas by a
    chemical reaction within the liquid being treated.


CLS 210/708
TXT Including emulsion breaking:

    Process under subclass 702 wherein a liquid is finely dispersed within a
    second liquid, immiscible therewith, and the dispersed droplets are caused
    to gather or accrete such that each of the liquids tends to concentrate in
    separate phases.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    665+,   for a step of emulsion breaking in an ion exchange or sorption
    process.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 319+ for colloid resolution, per se, and
    see the line with that class in the class definition.


CLS 210/709
TXT Controlling process in response to stream condition:

    Process under subclass 702 in which a probe or sensor conveys to an
    actuating means a change in or the existence of a predetermined parameter,
    of a condition in the liquid being treated and the actuating means varies,
    ceases, or initiates at least one element of a treatment.

    (1)     Note.  The sensing of the condition may be prior to or sequent to
    the treatment and includes the condition of either influent or effluent.

    (2)     Note.  The operation is "automatic" and requires action by the
    apparatus and does not include use of, for example, an overflow standpipe
    or a human attendant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, especially
    subclasses 500+ for computerized control of a chemical process.


CLS 210/710
TXT Treating the insoluble substance:

    Process under subclass 702 wherein a constituent is insolubilized and
    further manipulated other than merely separating from the liquid (e.g.,
    subsequently being dried, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    609,    for sludge dewatering combined with a treatment by living organisms.


CLS 210/711
TXT For recovery of a treating agent:

    Process under subclass 710 wherein the insoluble substance is treated to
    produce the treating agent usually for further use in the same process.


CLS 210/712
TXT Including recycling:

    Process under subclass 702 including the step of externally recirculating
    all or part of any substance, i.e., gas, liquid, or solids.


CLS 210/713
TXT Of separated solids:

    Process under subclass 712 wherein the recycled substance is a separated
    solid.


CLS 210/714
TXT Seeding:

    Process under subclass 702 in which the liquid is contacted with solid
    divided inert material which serves as nucleating sites for accretion of
    constituent.

    (1)     Note.  The material may be the same as or similar to that being
    precipitated.


CLS 210/715
TXT Utilizing sludge or floc blanket:

    Process under subclass 714 wherein the contact is effected by passage
    through a suspended or dense bed of agglomerated material.


CLS 210/716
TXT Including step or manufacturing inorganic treating agent:

    Process under subclass 702 including a positive step of preparing the
    inorganic treating agent to be used to act upon the constituent.


CLS 210/717
TXT In situ:

    Process under subclass 716 wherein the treating agent is formed in place in
    the liquid, i.e., by the interaction of two or more materials or by the
    interaction of one or more materials with one or more constituents in the
    liquid.


CLS 210/718
TXT Including degassing:

    Process under subclass 702 which include a step of removal of a gaseous
    constituent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, for processes of gas separation.  See
    particularly subclasses 241+ for degasification of a liquid.  See section
    III, C, of the Class 210 class definition for an amplification of the line.


CLS 210/719
TXT Including chemical reduction:

    Process under subclass 702 which include a step of chemical reducing a
    constituent of the liquid.


CLS 210/720
TXT Of chromium material:

    Process under subclass 719 wherein the constituent being reduced is
    chromium.


CLS 210/721
TXT Including oxidation:

    Process under subclass 702 which include a step of oxidizing a constituent
    of the liquid.


CLS 210/722
TXT Of iron or manganese material:

    Process under subclass 721 wherein the constituent being oxidized is iron
    or manganese.


CLS 210/723
TXT Utilizing precipitant, flocculant, or coagulant, each with accelerator or
    with each other or plural precipitants, flocculants, or coagulants:

    Process under subclass 702 wherein two or more materials are added to the
    liquid, at least one of which causes precipitation, flocculation, or
    coagulation, and the other either acts similarly or promotes the activity
    of the first material.


CLS 210/724
TXT Regulating pH:

    Process under subclass 723 in which a pH adjusting substance is added in
    addition to the precipitant.


CLS 210/725
TXT Utilizing organic precipitant:

    Process under subclass 724 wherein the material which acts to insolubilize
    or agglomerate the constituents is organic containing.


CLS 210/726
TXT Sequential introduction:

    Process under subclass 723 in which a time interval occurs between one
    addition and another.


CLS 210/727
TXT Including organic agent:

    Process under subclass 726 wherein at least one of the sequentially added
    precipitants is organic containing.


CLS 210/728
TXT Including organic agent:

    Process under subclass 723 wherein at least one of the precipitants added
    is organic containing.


CLS 210/729
TXT Utilizing organic precipitant:

    Process under subclass 702 in which an organic compound or composition
    brings about the precipitation.


CLS 210/730
TXT From natural source or chemical modification thereof:

    Process under subclass 729 in which the organic compound or composition
    exist in nature.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes organic compositions derived from
    plants or micro-organisms.


CLS 210/731
TXT Starch:

    Process under subclass 730 in which the organic compound or composition is
    a starch or a derivative thereof.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes synthetically modified starches.


CLS 210/732
TXT Synthetic polymer:

    Process under subclass 729 in which the organic compound or composition is
    an artifically produced polymer.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes organic compositions polyalkylene
    oxide homopolymers and copolymers.


CLS 210/733
TXT Acrylic:

    Process under subclass 732 wherein the organic compound contains recurring
    units formed by the addition reaction of acrylic acid, alpha-substituted
    acrylic acid or functional derivatives of such acids.

    (1)     Note.  The functional derivatives include the salts, esters,
    nitriles, amides, acyl halides, and anhydrides of the acids.  The compound
    may include units of other monomers such as, e.g., stryrene or butadiene.


CLS 210/734
TXT Nitrogen containing (e.g., amine, azo, etc.):

    Process under subclass 733 in which the polymer includes acrylic units and
    amino, azo, or N-cyclic units.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes acrylic polymers containing
    aminoalkyl units.


CLS 210/735
TXT Nitrogen containing (e.g., amine, azo, etc.):

    Process under subclass 732 in which the polymer includes amino, azo, or
    N-cyclic units.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes nonacrylic polymers containing
    nitrogen such as nylon.


CLS 210/736
TXT Derived from alkyl halide or epihalophydrin reactant:

    Process under subclass 735 in which the polymer is prepared using alkyl.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes polymers containing amino, azo, and
    N-cycle units which have been reacted with alkyl or epihalohydrins.


CLS 210/737
TXT Including temperature change:

    Process under subclass 702 including the step of changing the temperature,
    e.g., by heating or cooling.


CLS 210/738
TXT Including agitation:

    Process under subclass 702 including stirring or inducing turbulence.


CLS 210/739
TXT Including controlling process in response to a sensed condition:

    Process under subclass 600 in which a probe or sensor conveys to an
    actuating means a change in, or the existence predetermined parameter, a
    condition in the liquid being treated and the actuating means varies,
    ceases, or initiates at least one element of a treatment.

    (1)     Note.  The sensing of the condition may be prior to or subsequent
    to the treatment and includes the condition of either influent or effluent.

    (2)     Note.  The operation is "automatic" and requires action by the
    apparatus and does not include use of, for example, an overflow standpipe
    or a human attendant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, especially
    subclass 500 for a computerized control of a chemical process.


CLS 210/740
TXT Density or specific gravity sensing:

    Process under subclass 739 in which the mass per unit volume (either actual
    or relative to that of water) is determined by the sensing means.


CLS 210/741
TXT Pressure sensing:

    Process under subclass 739 in which the force per unit area is sensed.

    (1)     Note.  The pressure may be positive (usually expressed in p.s.i.,
    kilogram per cm. or atmospheres) or negative (i.e., vacuum usually
    expressed in inches, mm or cm of mercury or water or in Torrs).


CLS 210/742
TXT Temperature sensing:

    Process under subclass 739 which the heat content of the liquid is
    determined and is the basis for response by the actuating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    612+,   for a process regulating the temperature in a treatment utilizing a
    living organism.

    737,    for a process of precipitation or flocculation including a change
    in temperature.


CLS 210/743
TXT pH Sensing:

    Process under subclass 739 in which the hydrogen (or hydronium) ion
    concentration is measured and used as a basis for response by the actuating
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    639,    for a dialysis or osmosis process including a change in pH.

    724,    for a precipitating or flocculating process, including regulating
    pH.


CLS 210/744
TXT Level sensing:

    Process under subclass 739 in which the height of a material, either
    absolute or relative to the height of another material is determined and
    used as the basis for response by the actuating means.

    (1)     Note.  The level may be determined (by disclosure) by pressure
    sensing and if so claimed is classifiable in subclass 742, but if claimed
    in terms of height (e.g., linear measure) is classifiable here.


CLS 210/745
TXT Turbidity or optically sensing:

    Process under subclass 739 in which the transmission, scattering,
    polarization, or dispersion of light shined into or through the liquid is
    sensed and is the basis for response to the actuating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    744,    for a process using an optical sensor to determine the level of a
    material.


CLS 210/746
TXT Electrical property sensing:

    Process under subclass 739 in which the conductivity, impedance, or
    capacitance of the liquid or constituent is determined and is the basis for
    response by actuating means.

    (1)     Note.  The use of an electrical property to determine some other
    property (e.g., pH, temperature) is classifiable in the appropriate
    subclass above providing for those concepts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    742     and 743, and see (1) Note.


CLS 210/747
TXT Including geographic feature:

    Process under subclass 600 in which a relationship to or a feature of the
    terrain is positively recited, other than mere discharge to the earth or to
    a body of water.

    (1)     Note.  While septic tanks are normally found to be underground, the
    term septic tank is not considered a geographic feature.

    (2)     Note.  While discharge to the ground is not a geographic feature,
    discharge at a specified depth or in a particular strata or formation, or
    in a particular location in a body of water is considered a geographic
    feature.

    (3)     Note.  Included in this subclass is in situ purging of flowing or
    still liquid (e.g., drainage ditch, septic system, pond) wherein the method
    of separating or purifying has (a) at least part of a system installed on
    natural or modified terrain to convey rain, snow melt, a river, sewage,
    well water or oil, etc. or (b) a relationship to a particular nonland
    geographic feature, such as a lake, ocean, sea, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 36+ for drainage
    devices and 52+ for fluid control or inhibiting the formation of,
    containing the spread of, or settling an undesirable floatable or suspended
    material in a body of water (i.e., treatment).


CLS 210/748
TXT Utilizing electrical or wave energy (directly applied to liquid or material
    being treated):

    Process under subclass 600 in which the liquid is directly subjected to an
    electric field or current or to a regular pulsating source of energy (e.g.,
    irradiation, ultrasonic vibration, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  The process of electrolysis of liquid to generate a treating
    agent for a process of this class will be classified here but electrolysis
    to directly separate a constituent is classified in Class 205.  For
    example, electrolysis of a liquid to produce chlorine which kills bacteria
    in the liquid would be classified here but removing mercury salts by
    plating out mercury would be classified in Class 204.

    (2)     Note.  The wave energy must be applied to the liquid and vibrating
    a filter to clean it is not classifiable here but in subclass 785.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    627,    for a treatment of liquid by a micro-organism including the use of
    ozone.

    697,    for a process using magnetic energy.

    738,    for a process of precipitation or    flocculation by agitation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, especially subclasses 450+
    for electrophoresis or electro-osmosis, and subclasses 554+ for electrical
    or simultaneous electrical and magnetic separation or purification of a
    liquid or magnetic treatment of a liquid (other than separation).  See
    section III of the Class 204 definition and section III, C, of the Class
    210 definition for an elaboration of the class line between Class 204
    (which encompasses Class 205) and Class 210.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, for electrolysis, in general, especially
    subclasses 742+ for electrolytic treatment of water, sewage, or other waste
    water.  See section III of the Class 204 definition and section III, C, of
    the Class 210 definition for an elaboration of the class line between Class
    204 (which encompasses Class 205) and Class 210.


CLS 210/749
TXT Chemical treatment:

    Process under subclass 600 wherein a material is added which chemically
    reacts with a constituent in the liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    606     and 631, for a chemical treatment combined with a treatment by a
    living organism.

    634+,   for a process wherein a solute is removed from a solvent by
    contacting a solution thereof with a second solvent which has a greater
    affinity for the solute than the original solvent.

    660+,   for a process including ion exchange.

    696+,   for a process wherein a chelating or sequestering agent is added in
    order to prevent, decrease, or delay precipitation.

    702+,   for a process in which a chemical is added to cause precipitation
    or flocculation of a constituent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 379+ for processes and
    apparatus for cleaning liquid heaters or vaporizers or for purifying the
    water while the boiler is in operation.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 1+ for processes of feeding additives to
    a mainline flow.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 177+ for
    purification of mineral oils with chemicals.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 175+ for scale inhibitors; and subclass
    321 for foam prevention compositions.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, subclasses 701+ for chemical
    purification of carbon compounds.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, for processes of corrosion inhibition.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, for a
    composition to cure or alleviate a disease and for a process involving the
    mere addition of a compound or composition to water, etc.; for a
    composition which is biocidal to an animal or a micro-organism (other than
    algae) or for a process involving the addition of a biocidal compound or
    composition with no significant or additional water treatment; or for a
    process of adding a chemical to water as a carrier to form a compsition
    with a utility of Class 424.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the destruction of hazardous or toxic waste by way of
    chemical treatment.


CLS 210/750
TXT Including degassing:

    Process under subclass 749 in which the addition of the chemical causes the
    evolution of a constituent as a gas or in which the process includes a step
    of stripping a dissolved gas from the liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    603,    for a treatment by a living organism with collection or storage of
    a gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, for processes of gas separation.  See
    particularly subclasses 241+ for degasification of a liquid.  See section
    III, C, of the Class 210 class definition for an amplification of the line.


CLS 210/752
TXT Plural spaced feedings:

    Process under subclass 749 wherein at a specified interval of time or
    distance from the addition of the chemical the chemical is again added or a
    second chemical is added.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199,    for apparatus to add treating material spaced along a flow path.

    726,    for a process of sequential chemical addition including
    precipitation.


CLS 210/753
TXT Utilizing halogen or halogen containing material:

    Process under subclass 749 wherein a material containing an element from
    group VII A, either free or as a compound, is added.

    (1)     Note.  The halogen or halogen-containing material may be either the
    reactant or a catalyst.  However, when it is a catalyst a reactant must be
    added.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, especially
    subclasses 673+ for a process of fluoridating water to prevent dental
    caries.


CLS 210/754
TXT Chlorine or bromine containing:

    Process under subclass 753 wherein the material contains element number 17
    and 35.


CLS 210/755
TXT Organic:

    Process under subclass 754 wherein the chlorine or bromine-containing
    material also contains carbon.

    (1)     Note.  The compounds used in this subclass are those classifiable
    in Class 260.


CLS 210/756
TXT Hypochlorite:

    Process under subclass 754 wherein the material contains the CIO radical.


CLS 210/757
TXT By chemical reduction:

    Process under subclass 749 wherein the positive valence (oxidation state)
    of a constituent in the liquid is decreased.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    719,    for a precipitation process involving a chemical reduction.


CLS 210/758
TXT By oxidation:

    Process under subclass 749 wherein the positive valence (oxidation state)
    of a constituent of a liquid being treated is increased.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198+,   for means to aerate, especially subclass 219 for a mechanical
    aerator.

    220,    for a submerged fluid inlet.

    242.2,  for a floating mechanical aerator.


CLS 210/759
TXT Utilizing peroxy compound (e.g., hydrogen peroxide, peracid, etc.):

    Process under subclass 758 wherein the oxidant is hydrogen peroxide or a
    compound which will release it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    627,    for a treatment by a living organism using a specific oxidant.


CLS 210/760
TXT Utilizing ozone:

    Process under subclass 758 wherein the oxidant is ozone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    192,    for apparatus for preliminary manufacture of ozone.

    748,    for a process of ozone generation combined with liquid treatment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 186.08+ for an electrical ozonizer
    with preparatory or product treating means.


CLS 210/761
TXT Liquid phase high temperature and pressure (e.g., "wet air", etc.):

    Process under subclass 758 in which an aqueous fluid is heated to a point
    below the critical temperature and under such pressure that autogenic
    oxidation of constituents proceeds in the liquid phase.


CLS 210/762
TXT Catalytic:

    Process under subclass 761 including the use of an agent which promotes the
    wet air oxidation reaction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, for a composition comprising a catalyst or sorbent, per se.


CLS 210/763
TXT Catalytic:

    Process under subclass 758 including the use of an agent which promotes the
    oxidation reaction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, for a composition comprising a catalyst or sorbent, per se.


CLS 210/764
TXT Destroying micro-organisms:

    Process under subclass 749 in which a living organism is killed or is
    prevented from normal propagation by the addition of a chemical agent.

    (1)     Note.  The process involving the mere addition of a biocidal
    algicidal compound or composition with no significant or additional water
    treatment is classified in Class 424 or Class 504.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    753+,   for a process including treatment with a halogen containing a
    compound.

    758+,   for a process comprising oxidizing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclass for a biocidal, e.g., bactericide, fungicide, etc., composition.
    See (1) Note.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    appropriate subclasses for preservation of foods by destruction of
    micro-organism.

    504,    Plant Protecting and Regulating Compositions, subclasses 150+ for
    algicidal compositions.  See (1) Note.


CLS 210/765
TXT With liquid recirculation:

    Process under subclass 749 including a step of recirculating all or part of
    the liquid being treated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194+,   for apparatus including means for recirculating.

    621+,   for a process by treatment with aerobic living organisms including
    recirculation.

    712+,   for a precipitation process including recirculation.


CLS 210/766
TXT Including temperature change:

    Process under subclass 749 including the step of adding or removing heat
    during the chemical reaction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    737,    for a precipitation process including a temperature change.

    761+,   for a process in which an autogenic oxidation (e.g., wet air)
    maintains high temperature.


CLS 210/767
TXT Separating:

    Process udner subclass 600 for separating one constituent of a
    liquid-liquid or liquid-solid mixture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, subclass 55 for a filtering
    process peculiar to sugar solutions.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclass 43 for a separatory
    distillation process combined with a liquid-liquid extraction operation not
    otherwise provided for.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 179+ for
    purifying used mineral oils; and subclasses 299+ for treatment of mineral
    oils with solid adsorbents.  See the reference to Class 208 under "SEARCH
    CLASS", in the class definition of this class (210).

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, subclasses 704+ for physical
    treatment of carbon compounds.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, for a method of and apparatus for
    separating a solid or a liquid from a carrier liquid as part of fluid
    conveying is provided for the Class 406, Conveyors:  Fluid Current.


CLS 210/768
TXT Including treating separated solids:

    Process under subclass 767 with the treatment of solids separated from the
    mixture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217,    for a rotary drum-type filter with means to wash the separated
    solids.

    710,    for processes involving precipitation with treatment of separated
    solids.

    791,    for processes of merely removing residue from a filter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 35 for processes of compressing a filter cake.


CLS 210/769
TXT Destroying cake or solid component:

    Process under subclass 768 in which the cake or its solid constituent is
    destroyed or removed from the liquid fraction thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Process which recite a nominal step of waste treatment,
    i.e., dewatering in combination with an incineration step are not proper
    for this subclass and are provided for in subclass 346 of Class 110.
    However, processes which provide significant steps of liquid treatment in
    combination with an incineration step are appropriate for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    656,    for a chromatograph process.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 346 for processes of burning of solids which may
    include a nominal step of separation; and subclasses 219+ for apparatus
    provided with means for conditioning refuse to be incinerated prior to
    burning.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 8 and 11 for the
    separation of mineral oils from solid natural sources (rock, shale, etc.).

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses for
    extracting, leaching, or dissolving processes therein provided for; and
    subclass 658.5 for extracting, leaching, or dissolving processes not
    otherwise provided for.


CLS 210/770
TXT Including drying (e.g., by squeezing or heating, etc.):

    Process under subclass 768 in which the solids are dewatered by application
    of heat or a pressure differential.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    766,    when the process involves a step of chemical treatment.


CLS 210/771
TXT By gas contact:

    Process under subclass 770 in which the solids are contacted with a gas or
    a vapor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses
    for processes of and apparatus for separating and drying of solids after
    removal from the separatory medium, and see (3) Note of the class
    definitions of Class 34.


CLS 210/772
TXT Washing with a fluid other than the prefilt:

    Process under subclass 768 in which the solids are contacted with a fluid
    different from the prefilt to wash same.


CLS 210/773
TXT Including preliminary conversion to liquid state:

    Process under subclass 767 including treating a normally solid mixture to
    convert one constituent thereof to a liquid, solution or liquid-solid
    suspension and then separating the resulting liquid or liquid mixture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, subclasses 295+ for crystallization
    processes involving purification.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 532+ and 123+ for separating a
    constituent from a liquid mixture by refrigeration.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 343.5 for melting furnaces.

    554,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 8+ for processes of recovery or
    extraction from residues or organic material; subclasses 175+ for processes
    of purification of fats, oils, and waxes by physical treatment only; and
    subclass 707 for purification involving crystallization.


CLS 210/774
TXT Including temperature change:

    Process under subclass 767 in which the temperature of the mixture is
    modified (during its treatment).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175+,   for separatory apparatus with a heater or heat exchanger.

    198+,   for a separator with means to add a treating material.

    612+,   for processes of treatment by living organisms including
    temperature regulation.

    737,    for processes of precipitating by or with a temperature change.

    766,    for processes of chemical treatment with temperature change.

    770+,   for processes of drying separated solids.

    773,    for processes of separating with preliminary conversion to a liquid
    state.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, subclasses 295+ for separation by
    selective crystallization.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 532+ and 123+ for separating a
    constituent from a liquid mixture by refrigeration.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 33+ and 37+ for
    processes of removing paraffin from mineral oils which include a chilling
    treatment.


CLS 210/775
TXT Thermal diffusion:

    Process under subclass 774 wherein the temperature modification comprises
    exposing the mixture to opposed surfaces which have different temperatures
    whereby stratification occurs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176,    for diffusion apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclass 289 for processes of gas
    separation involving cold wall-hot wall thermal diffusion.


CLS 210/776
TXT Skimming:

    Process under subclass 767 wherein scum or floating matter is removed from
    the mixture surface by skimming.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    703+,   for processes of skimming including flotation.


CLS 210/777
TXT Including precoating filter medium with filter aid:

    Process under subclass 767 in which a basic separating member or retainer
    is coated with a filter medium or filter aid prior to the purification step.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193,    for precoat adding means.

    500+,   for precoat material or filter aid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, for coating processes, per se, and note
    especially subclasses 180+ for coating with particles or fibers.


CLS 210/778
TXT With or by addition or prefilt:

    Process under subclass 777 wherein the filter aid material is added to the
    influent before or during filtration.


CLS 210/779
TXT Discharging residue to prefilt:

    Process under subclass 767 in which the separated solids or residue is
    returned to the influent or prefilt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194+,   for separatory apparatus with means to recirculate a constituent.

    621+    and 629, for treatment by living organisms with recirculation to a
    prior step or internal recirculation.

    712+,   for precipitation processes with external recirculation.

    765,    for processes of chemical treatment with liquid recirculation.

    805,    for process with recirculation.


CLS 210/780
TXT Including movement of filter during filtration:

    Process under subclass 767 in which relative motion is imparted to the
    filter medium with respect to its support or housing during filtration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359+,   for filter apparatus including a movable medium.


CLS 210/781
TXT Centrifugally extracting:

    Process under subclass 780 in which the prefilt is forced through a filter
    by centrifugal force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    360+,   for a centrifugal extractor.

    787,    wherein the centrifugal force is    cyclonic, without filter
    movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, subclass 56 for centrifugal
    separation peculiar to sugar solutions.

    494,    Imperforate Bowl:  Centrifugal Separators, subclass 37 for a
    process for breaking up a mixutre of fluids or fluent substances into two
    or more components by centrifuging within a generally solid-walled,
    receptacle-like member.


CLS 210/782
TXT Blood:

    Process under subclass 781 in which the separated components are those of
    blood i.e., serum and plasma, wherein the filter medium is caused to pass
    through the blood by the centrifugal force or the filter medium is passed
    through the separated blood components after centrifugation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359,    for apparatus in which the filter medium is capable of movement for
    treatment purposes.

    780,    for a method in which the filter moves through the blood by other
    than centrifugal force.


CLS 210/783
TXT Rotating belt:

    Process under subclass 780 in which the movable filter medium is a rotating
    or endless belt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400,    for filter apparatus made in a closed loop or for filter elements
    attached to a closed loop carrier.


CLS 210/784
TXT Rotating drum:

    Process under subclass 780 in which the movable filter medium is a rotating
    drum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402,    for apparatus in which the movable filter medium is in the shape of
    a drum.


CLS 210/785
TXT Cleaning filter utilizing wave energy (e.g., vibrating, pulsating, etc.):

    Process under subclass 780 in which the filter is oscillated or agitated in
    a to and from manner, serving to dislodge entrapped material.


CLS 210/786
TXT Of particulate bed (e.g., fluidized or moving bed, etc.):

    Process under subclass 780 in which the movable filter medium is a movable
    bed or fluidized bed of particulate filter material.


CLS 210/787
TXT Cyclonic, or centrifugal (e.g., whirling or helical motion or by vortex,
    etc.):

    Process under subclass 767 wherein the influent flows tangentially of a
    container in a manner to produce a whirling motion or there is an agitator
    to rotate the influent to form a vacuum at its center.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304,    for apparatus including a filter in which there is a spiral or
    convolute baffle or tangential liquid inlet to give the liquid a whirling
    motion.

    512,    for apparatus wherein fluid flows tangentially to produce a
    whirling motion or there is driven means to rotate the fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 345+ and 447+ for apparatus for,
    separating gases using cyclonic or centrifugal force.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 34+ for processes of
    separating a plurality of gases by the effect of centrifugal force and
    subclasses 269+ for processes of separating solid or liquid particles from
    gas by the effect of centrifugal action.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, especially
    subclasses 139, 199, and 710 through 734 for a patent directed to fluid
    suspension classifying of solids using centrifugal force or a vortex.


CLS 210/788
TXT Introducing liquid tangentially:

    Process under subclass 787 wherein the influent is introduced tangentially
    into the separator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304     and 512, for the corresponding apparatus.


CLS 210/789
TXT Isolating layer:

    Process under subclass 787 in which an isolating means is positioned
    between the separated constituent layers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    514+,   for gravitational separation apparatus including an isolating means.

    782,    for processes of blood centrifugation.


CLS 210/790
TXT Dividing and recombining:

    Process under subclass 767 in which the stream of liquid being treated is
    separated into two distinct steams, which streams are later recombined.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194+,   for separating apparatus with means to recirculate a constituent.

    253+,   for parallel flows including serially connected distinct treating
    units.

    340+,   for parallel filters with flow control means.

    607,    for processes of treatment by living organisms including dividing
    and recombining.

    625,    for processes of treatment by living organisms with sludge
    treatment outside of the mainstream and recirculation of such treated
    sludge to the mainstream.


CLS 210/791
TXT Rehabilitating or regenerating filter medium:

    Process under subclass 767 in which a residue is removed from or
    redistributed through a filter medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    269+,   for apparatus provided with means to restore the filter medium to
    the condition it was in before separation.

    391+,   for a movable separation medium having means for removing residue.

    407+,   for apparatus having means for removing residue from the filter
    medium.

    420+,   for a filter with means to clean by backwashing.

    777,    for precoat processes many of which remove the precoat and deposit.

    779,    for processes including discharging residue to prefilt.

    780+,   in which movement of the filter may prevent clogging of the filter
    medium.

    785,    for processes including cleaning the filter medium by electrical or
    wave energy.


CLS 210/792
TXT Particulate bed:

    Process under subclass 791 in which the filter medium is of the loose
    particulate material type, e.g., sand bed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    269+,   for a particulate material type separator having rehabilitation
    means.

    670,    for ion exchange or sorption processes with rehabilitation.

    710+,   for precipitation processes including reagent recovery.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses beginning with subclass 474 for gas
    filter apparatus including loose material, especially subclasses 512+.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 274+ for processes of gas
    separation using particulate solids.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses for
    processes there provided for including rehabilitation of the agent used.


CLS 210/793
TXT Reverse flow:

    Process under subclass 792 in which a cleaning fluid passes through the
    particulate bed oppositely to the direction of flow during filtration.


CLS 210/794
TXT Including addition of diverse fluid:

    Process under subclass 793 in which the fluid is other than the prefilt and
    can be a gas.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass, the effluent from the
    filtration step is not considered to be diverse fluid.


CLS 210/795
TXT Expanded bed:

    Process under subclass 794 wherein the fluid causes the bed to expand or
    fluidize resulting in scouring of the particulates.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    786,    for a separation process through a movable particulate bed.


CLS 210/796
TXT Including mechanical agitation:

    Process under subclass 792 wherein mechanical stirring of the particulate
    bed results or aids in its cleaning.


CLS 210/797
TXT By diverse fluid:

    Process under subclass 791 of cleaning the filter medium by contact with a
    fluid other than the prefilt.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass, the effluent from the
    filtration step is not considered to be a diverse fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    792+,   for processes involving the rehabilitation of loose particulate
    material type of filter bed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, especially subclasses 137+ for processes of cleaning
    textile filter cloths independently of the filtering operation.


CLS 210/798
TXT Reverse flow:

    Process under subclass 797 in which a cleaning fluid passes through the
    filter medium oppositely to the direction of flow during filtration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    601+,   for analogous processes applied to a filter which contains
    bacterial growths.

    777+,   for processes including applying a precoat to a filter medium.

    779,    for processes including discharging the residue to the prefilt.

    793+,   for processes of rehabilitating a particulate material bed by
    reversal of flow.


CLS 210/799
TXT Filtering immiscible liquids:

    Process under subclass 767 in which a mixture of mutually insoluble liquids
    are passed through a sieve or strainer.


CLS 210/800
TXT Utilizing gravitational force:

    Process under subclass 767 in which the liquid and solids contained therein
    are stratified and selectively removed by utilizing gravitational force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    513+,   for gravitational separation apparatus.

    781+,   for separation processes including centrifugal extraction.

    787,    for processes including whirling or helical motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, subclass 57 for settling
    processes for separating impurities from sugar solutions.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 208+ for
    grading deposition in a liquid-type separator and related processes.


CLS 210/801
TXT Including change of mainstream flow direction:

    Process under subclass 800 in which the direction of the main flow stream
    is changed to enhance separation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    311,    for apparatus in which entering liquid flows downwardly and then
    passes through a filter medium in an upward direction.

    738,    for precipitation processes including agitation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 267+ for processes of gas
    separation using deflection.


CLS 210/802
TXT Utilizing parallel separation passages:

    Process under subclass 801 in which the flow direction change is through or
    by parallel plates or elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    521+,   for apparatus utilizing parallel plates.


CLS 210/803
TXT Including specified feature of settled solids removal:

    Process under subclass 800 in which the settled solids are removed by
    scraping or some other specific means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    523+,   for gravitational separators including mechanical means for moving
    a constituent.


CLS 210/804
TXT And additional diverse separation:

    Process under subclass 800 in which an addition diverse separation is
    preformed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    294+,   for apparatus including a gravitational separator and an additional
    diverse separator.


CLS 210/805
TXT And recirculating liquid:

    Process under subclass 767 including a step of recycling all or part of the
    liquid being treated or the separated constituent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    for combined apparatus including means to recirculate a liquid
    therebetween.

    194+,   for purifiers or separators with recirculation means.

    621+,   for process of treatment by living organisms including
    recirculation.

    629,    for internal recirculation with treatment by living organisms.

    677,    for ion exchange or sorption processes with rehabilitation by
    conserved or recirculated fluid.

    712+,   for precipitation processes including external recirculation.

    765,    for chemical treatment processes with liquid recirculation.


CLS 210/806
TXT Plural separating:

    Process under subclass 767 including plural steps of separating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for plural separatory units combined with programming means
    responsive to flow, fluid pressure or material level.

    124,    for a float controlled valve between separators.

    141,    for separating means combined with programming means.

    155,    for plural screens of the flume stream type.

    181,    for a flow line connected heat exchanger in series with distinct
    separators.

    182,    for diverse separators combined with heat exchange means.

    195.1+, for serially connected distinct treating units having means to
    recirculate.

    200+,   for plural distinct separators with means to add treating material.

    252,    for serially connected distinct treating units.

    263+,   for a particulate material-type separator with plural separatory
    mediums.

    294+,   for diverse distinct separators.

    322+,   for plural distinct separators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 12.1+ for
    combined classifying, separating, and assorting of solids.


CLS 210/807
TXT Utilizing particulate bed:

    Process under subclass 767 in which the filter medium is of the loose
    particulate material type, e.g., sand bed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263+,   for apparatus utilizing a bed of discrete particles.

    616+,   where there are living organisms supported on such particulates.

    660+,   when the particulate material is of the sorption or ion exchange
    type.

    792+,   for processes of separation through a particulate bed including
    rehabilitation of such bed.


CLS 210/808
TXT Including specified pressure change:

    Process under subclass 767 in which a change in pressure causes or aids in
    the separating of constituents.

    (1)     Note.  Processes which involves the mere squeezing of an already
    formed filter cake belong in subclasses 770+. Processes which involve the
    use of vacuum to draw filtrate through a filter medium, utilize pressure to
    drive the prefilt through the filter medium, or where a mere change in
    pressure causes the separation, belong in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    703+,   for processes in which the pressure change results in flotation.

               CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS

            The following subclasses are collections of published disclosures
    pertaining to various specified aspects of the liquid treating art which
    aspects do not form appropriate bases for subclasses in the foregoing
    classification (i.e., subclasses superior hereto in the schedule), wherein
    original copies of patents are placed on the basis of the type of process
    employed.  These subclasses assist a search based on particular the liquid
    treated, material removed or desired result and may be of further
    assistance to the searcher, either as a starting point in searching this
    class or as an indication of further related fields of search inside or
    outside the class.  Thus, there is here provided a further path of access
    for retrieval of a limited number of types of disclosures.

    (1)     Note.  Disclosures are placed in these subclasses for their value
    as references and as leads to appropriate main or secondary fields of
    search, without regard to their original classification of their claimed
    subject matter.

    (2)     Note.  The disclosures found in the following subclasses are
    examples, only, of the indicated subject matter, and in no instance do they
    represent the entire extent of the prior art.

    (3)     Note.  Where a subclass is directed to a concept, do not cross
    here.  For example, do not cross-reference a subclass 646 patent to
    subclass 927 or a subclass 688 patent to subclass 912.


CLS 210/900
TXT ULTRA PURE WATER (E.G., CONDUCTIVITY WATER):

    Collection of disclosures directed to the production of extremely pure
    water; the technique may involve "polishing" (an ion exchange process) or
    combinations of processes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclasses 10+ for a
    distillation purification of water.


CLS 210/901
TXT SPECIFIED LAND FILL FEATURE (E.G., PREVENTION OF GROUND WATER FOULING):

    Collection of disclosures directed to details of disposal of waste liquid
    treatment residue upon or into the earth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, especially subclasses 128+ for
    earthworking.


CLS 210/902
TXT MATERIALS REMOVED:

    Collection of disclosures directed to the removal of a particular
    constituent from a liquid; these disclosures are primarily concerned with
    removal of the material from the liquid to perfect the liquid for
    subsequent use or disposal; however, the same technique could be used where
    the specific material removed is the desired product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, subclasses 230+ for a chemical test
    for a specific material; and subclasses 293+ for a physical method of
    recovering a nonmetallic element or an inorganic compound from a mixture.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, especially subclasses .5+ and 97+ for method of recovering metal
    from a liquid.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, appropriate subclasses for the
    recovery of an organic compound and not the physical process subclasses
    (704+) in that class.


CLS 210/903
TXT Nitrogenous:

    Collection of disclosures under collection 902 in which the material is or
    contains nitrogen.  The material may be organic (e.g, amines) or inorganic
    (e.g., nitrates).


CLS 210/904
TXT -CN Containing:

    Collection of disclosures under  collection 903 in which the material is a
    nitrile or a cyanide.


CLS 210/905
TXT Protein:

    Collection of disclosures under collection 903 in which the material
    includes a chain of N-acylated amino acids.


CLS 210/906
TXT Phosphorus containing:

    Collection of disclosures under collection 902 in which the material
    contains phosphorus.


CLS 210/907
TXT Phosphate slimes:

    Collection of disclosures under collection 906 in which the liquid treated
    is a suspension resulting from processing phosphate rock, usually in making
    fertilizer.

    (1)     Note.  Mere drying of a phosphate slime is provided for in Class
    34, Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids.


CLS 210/908
TXT Organic:

    Collection of disclosures under collection 902 in which the material
    removed contains a carbon compound, usually with hydrogen and often with
    oxygen and/or nitrogen and/or sulfur.

    (1)     Note.  The organic materials are those that are classifiable in
    Class 260, Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, and do not include metal
    carbonates or cyanides.


CLS 210/909
TXT Aromatic compound (e.g., PCB, phenol, etc.):

    Collection of disclosures under collection 908 in which the material
    contains a benzene radical.


CLS 210/910
TXT Nonbiodegradable surfactant:

    Collection of disclosures under collection 908 in which the material
    resists decomposition and functions as a wetting agent, generally in
    cleaning processes.

    (1)     Note.  Nonbiodegradable surfactants are also known as hard
    detergents.


CLS 210/911
TXT Cumulative poison:

    Collection of disclosures under collection 902 in which the material
    removal is one that tends to accumulate in the body and becomes toxic upon
    repeated or continuous exposure or ingestion.


CLS 210/912
TXT Heavy metal:

    Collection of disclosures under collection 911 in which the material
    removed is a metal with a density greater than four.


CLS 210/913
TXT Chromium:

    Collection of disclosures under collection 912 in which the material
    removed contains the element of atomic number 24.


CLS 210/914
TXT Mercury:

    Collection of disclosures under collection 912 in which the material
    removed contains the element of atomic number 80.


CLS 210/915
TXT Fluorine containing:

    Collection of disclosures under collection 902 in which the material
    removed contains the halogen of atomic number 9.


CLS 210/916
TXT Odor (including control or abatement):

    Collection of disclosures under collection 902 in which the smell, usually
    of an offensive type, is removed or reduced.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 241+ for a process of
    degassing a liquid in which the gas may be odorous.


CLS 210/917
TXT Color:

    Collection of disclosures under collection 902 in which a liquid is at
    least partially clarified, i.e., tint or hue is reduced and the liquid is
    made more light transmissive.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    745,    for a process which is controlled in response to sensed turbidity.


CLS 210/918
TXT MISCELLANEOUS SPECIFIC TECHNIQUES:

    Collection of disclosures including a novel manipulative step, not
    classifiable under collection 600, to which significance is attached in the
    success of the intended treatment.

    (1)     Note.  As examples, may be noted, process in which point of entry
    of liquid is deemed critical, particular sequence of operations,
    orientation of flow of materials (e.g., clockwise, etc.), particular time
    of year (e.g., spring) or relation to ground water table level, etc.


CLS 210/919
TXT Using combined systems by merging parallel diverse waste systems:

    Collection of disclosures under collection 918 in which the output of two
    independent and different water treatment processes coact to effect a
    further treatment.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for such processes as (a) the
    combining of the effluent of two chemical plants one being acidic and the
    other caustic to produce an overall neutral effluent, (b) combining sludge
    or  solid matter from a slaughter house sewage with the effluent from an
    electroplating plant whereby soluble heavy metals are removed from the
    effluent and pathogens are killed in the sludge, or (c) an effluent with a
    high BOD is merged with an effluent with a high concentration of chlorine
    and the BOD is thereby reduced.

    (2)     Note.  A disclosure of merely discharging the effluent from several
    systems into a common stream is not sufficient basis for placement of a
    document in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    920,    for a system in which parallel similar systems may be merged and
    treated in water steps as a single system.


CLS 210/920
TXT Using combined systems of sequential local and regional or municipal sewage
    systems:

    Collection of disclosures under collection 918 wherein a generally
    relatively small system for treatment of sewage from a single source has an
    output combined with the output of similar such systems for further
    treatment of the combined outputs.

    (1)     Note.  An example of the disclosures of this collection include the
    collecting and combining of the effluents from domestic septic systems and
    treating the combined effluent in an activated sludge type plant rather
    than using individual drain fields.


CLS 210/921
TXT Flow equalization or time controlled stages or cycles:

    Collection of disclosures under collection 918 in which a process has
    provision to even surges and lapses in the flow of liquid being treated, or
    in which the operation proceeds according to a schedule based on time or
    demand on the systems.

    (1)     Note.  Among various examples encompassed in this collection are
    disclosures wherein a holding tank may be utilized to prevent discharge
    into an over loaded conduit, a rest period for recovery or regeneration of
    equipment or parts of a system may be set to operate in off-peak periods to
    reduce demand capacity.


CLS 210/922
TXT Oil spill cleanup (e.g., bacterial, etc.):

    Collection of disclosures under collection 918 directed to recovery or
    removal of petroleum from a body of water or adjacent shore usually as the
    result of a mishap during transport or handling of crude.

    (1)     Note.  These references are concerned with offshore drilling
    accidents, discharge of oil from tankers, ship collisions, etc., and are
    not concerned with oily emulsions in industrial sewage such as removal of
    cutting oil.

    (2)     Note.  The indented subclasses will provide for the majority of the
    art on oil spill cleanup, but the use of plants, animals, or
    micro-organisms is classifiable in this subclass.


CLS 210/923
TXT Using mechanical means (e.g., skimmers, pump, etc.):

    Collection of disclosures under collection 922 in which machinery or
    devices function primarily based on structure or organization of parts to
    effect the cleanup.


CLS 210/924
TXT Using physical agent (e.g., sponge, mop, etc.):

    Collection of disclosures under collection 922 in which material operates
    in accordance with a property (e.g., sorption, repellency, etc.) but does
    not chemically react to effect the cleanup.


CLS 210/925
TXT Using chemical agent:

    Collection of disclosures under collection 922 in which a material is used
    which reacts chemically to effect the cleanup.

    (1)     Note.  The chemical reaction may involve any constituent and
    includes burning, i.e., oxidation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    924,    for an oil spill cleanup using sorption.


CLS 210/926
TXT Using oxidation ditch (e.g., carousel, etc.):

    Collection of disclosures directed to treatment of sewage in which the
    water is run through a circular flume or sluice.

    (1)     Note.  The running water appears to increase the dissolved oxygen
    and enhance aerobic activity.


CLS 210/928
TXT PAPER MILL WASTE (E.G., WHITE WATER, BLACK LIQUOR, ETC.) TREATED:

    Collection of disclosures directed to the treatment of liquid by products
    or effluents from a paper making operation.


CLS 210/929
TXT HEMOULTRAFILTRATE VOLUME MEASUREMENT OR CONTROL PROCESSES:

    Collection of disclosures directed to the measurement or control of the
    volume of hemoultrafiltrate which migrates from blood through a
    semipermeable membrane as defined in the Glossary under semipermeable.


CLS 210/930
TXT PAINT DETACKIFYING:

    Collection of disclosures directed to the detackification of paint
    particles dispersed in water.

    (1)     Note.  The disclosures placed herein generally involve detackifying
    oversprayed paint in paint spray booth waste water to facilitate separation
    of the paint.


CLS 211/
TTL SUPPORTS:  RACKS

CLS 211/
TXT This class includes built-up open framework structures designed to support
    articles. Racks in the nature of upright stands or standards carrying
    article supports are also included, and also self-supporting articles
    supports, frequently built up of sheet material.

    The term "racks" includes frame structures and supports having flexible
    supporting elements, such as strands or straps, as the article-supporting
    elements.

    (1)     Note.  For racks involving devices for holding rolls where the
    material on the roll can be wound or unwound therefrom by operation of the
    roll see Class 242, Winding and Reeling.  See also Class 226, Advancing
    Material of Indeterminate Length, for roll holders in which there are also
    involved devices for feeding or removing the material from the roll other
    than by operation of the roll, and Class 83, Cutting, in such cases where
    there is also involved means for cutting the material unrolled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses
    for racks combined with means in addition to the movable or immovable rack
    structure to promote drying and/or gas or vapor contact with the material
    supported.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, appropriate subclasses for racks
    designed to support matter only for advertising, as cards, pictures, signs
    or dummies, or constituting a display machine; and especially subclass 120
    for stands to hold calendars.

    114,    Ships, subclass 190 for life-preserver racks.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 337+ for racks combined with a
    stove oven.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses for
    racks combined with washing apparatus.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, appropriate subclasses for a rack
    combined with a crating or shipping container and generally having article
    holding or securing means.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for article dispensing
    devices, including rack type structures claimed or disclosed in connection
    with a cabinet-type support or other cabinet feature as the source of
    supply for the articles to be dispensed.  Class 211 has rack structures
    including features recognized as dispensing features by Class 221 (see
    sections I and II of the class definition of Class 221).  Until further
    steps can be taken to clear the line between Classes 211 and 221, patents
    and applications will be disposed in accordance with the present
    disposition of the art.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses for other supports and see the
    class definition of that class for the line between the two classes.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 55 for tobacco
    hangers and subclasses 87.1+ and 159 for racks in the form of article
    carriers having handles.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, appropriate subclasses for racks
    combined with an inclosure, such as a cabinet structure.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 866+ for loop type
    antennas with frames therefor; and subclasses 878+ for antennas with
    supports.

    452,    Butchering, subclasses 177+ and 185+ for  racks with means
    especially relating them to butchering.


CLS 211/1
TXT Subject matter under the class definition and not classifiable in any of
    the subclasses below.


CLS 211/1.3
TXT Racks under the class definition which are movable into or out of a
    housing, or which are merely removable from a housing, and which cannot
    function as racks when in housed position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172,    for racks having pivoted article supports in the form of
    telescoping bars or arms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, for patents claiming cabinet storage
    space in addition to that required for a rack housing, or for cabinets
    having a rack that can support articles when the rack is in housed position.


CLS 211/1.51
TXT POWER OPERATED:

    Device under the class definition comprising means to utilize stored energy
    to reposition the article with respect to a load bearing stand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144,    for a rotatable shelf type rack.

    163+,   for a rotatable rack, generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    483,    Tool Changing, subclasses 58+ for an apparatus for storing a tool
    combined with a tool transfer means.


CLS 211/1.52
TXT Revolvable:

    Device under subclass 1.51 wherein the article is repositionable along an
    orbital path.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes patents to a device wherein the
    article is supported by a stationary guide or track.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.56,   for a power operated rack wherein the article support comprises a
    chain or belt.


CLS 211/1.53
TXT Article support rotatable about spindle:

    Device under subclass 1.52 comprising a generally rigid article support
    mounted for turning about an axis on a central bearing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    483,    Tool Changing, subclass 67 for an indexable rotary disc type tool
    storage means combined with a tool transfer means.


CLS 211/1.54
TXT Radial arm:

    Device under subclass 1.53 wherein the article support comprises an
    elongate member extending generally perpendicularly from the axis.


CLS 211/1.55
TXT Plural article supports:

    Device under subclass 1.53 comprising more than one framework each adapted
    for carrying an article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    483,    Tool Changing, subclasses 63+ for an apparatus having plural tool
    storage means with a transfer means.


CLS 211/1.56
TXT Article support comprising chain or belt:

    Device under subclass 1.52 wherein the framework comprises an endless loop
    article carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121+,   for nonpower endless carrier type racks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    483,    Tool Changing, subclass 68 for an indexable endless tool carrier
    with a transfer means.


CLS 211/1.57
TXT Linearly movable:

    Device under subclass 1.51 wherein the motion of the framework moves the
    article in a path comprising a straight line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 415 for three
    dimensional motor operated figures which have a movement of translation.


CLS 211/2
TXT Devices under the class definition designed to be converted into another
    structure having usually a different function.


CLS 211/4
TXT Devices under the class definition not in the form of cabinet structures,
    combined with a lock controlled by a key, check, electric or other means
    for the purpose of safely locking articles in place.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclass 62 for supporting stands with locks wherein the
    support features claimed are only those sufficient for the accommodation of
    the lock mechanism.

    194,    Check-Actuated Control Mechanisms, subclasses 247+ for similar
    article securing stands.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 551+ for a support having means for locking an
    article thereto.


CLS 211/5
TXT Devices under subclass 4 specially designed to support and lock articles of
    the velocipede type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for the velocipede support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 297 for velocipede props or steadying
    devices combined with locking means.


CLS 211/6
TXT Devices under subclass 4 designed to hold a supply of towels or toweling
    locked in position where they may be used progressively, but not removed
    without proper operation of the lock.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 27+ for similar devices including a
    dispensing feature, and see the definition of subclass 27 and the Notes
    thereto for a statement of the class line.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 34.1+ for cabinets with
    towel service type dispensers.


CLS 211/7
TXT Devices under subclass 4 which are essentially only modified forms of a
    horizontal bar or rod rack combined with a lock.


CLS 211/8
TXT Devices under subclass 4 comprising a combined lock and article clamp.


CLS 211/9
TXT Devices under subclass 8 with means to retain the key and check in the lock
    when the clamp is open or unlocked.


CLS 211/10
TXT Devices under the class definition specially designed to facilitate the
    sorting of articles by hand.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 555+ for a plate or sheet
    container including an access aperture for manual removal of content, and
    subclasses 557+ for a tray-type container with article holding or
    positioning means.


CLS 211/11
TXT Devices under subclass 10 usually portable and adapted for desk use to
    receiver, file, and hold papers.


CLS 211/12
TXT Devices under subclass 10 provided with means to support bags, for instance
    mail bags, in open position to receive the sorted articles.


CLS 211/13.1
TXT SPECIAL ARTICLE:

    Device under the class definition having a structure which is designed to
    support a particular item.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., particularly subclasses 457+ for a
    mounted clasp.


CLS 211/14
TXT Devices under subclass 13.1 designed to support balls, eggs or like shaped
    articles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 440 for food cooking
    devices adapted to support a ball or egg shaped food article.

    473,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 21+ for a ball rack attached
    to a billiard or pool table.


CLS 211/15
TXT Devices under subclass 14 provided with means for facilitating discharge of
    the articles from the rack.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for similar devices
    having a dispensing feature as defined in the class definition of Class
    221, and see the class definition of this class (211) for a statement of
    the class line.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 35+ for similar structures
    including cabinet features.


CLS 211/16
TXT Devices under subclass 13.1 designed to hold a supply of towels or toweling
    in position to be used progressively.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for such devices with article locking means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 27+ for cabinets or other supply
    sources for holding a supply of towels in position to be used progressively
    and including dispensing means.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 34.1+ for cabinets with
    towel service type dispensers.


CLS 211/17
TXT Devices under subclass 13.1 specially designed to support velocipedes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for these supports with locking means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 293+ for velocipede props or steadying
    devices.


CLS 211/18
TXT Devices under subclass 17 designed to be mounted on or secured to a wall
    surface.


CLS 211/19
TXT Devices under subclass 18 designed to engage the tires or wheels.


CLS 211/20
TXT Devices under subclass 17 designed to engage the tires or wheels.


CLS 211/21
TXT Devices under subclass 20 which are foldable.


CLS 211/22
TXT Devices under subclass 17 in which the main support is in the nature of a
    vertical standard.


CLS 211/23
TXT Devices under subclass 13.1 designed to support tires or wheels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for velocipede racks designed to engage tires or wheels.


CLS 211/24
TXT Devices under subclass 23 in the form of stands.


CLS 211/26
TXT Electrically powered:

    Device under subclass 13.1 specially designed to support an  article which
    is caused to operate by electricity (e.g., an electric appliance).


CLS 211/26.1
TXT Remote control unit:

    Device under subclass 26 designed to support a hand held electrically
    powered controller for equipment not directly connected thereto (e.g., for
    a television set, a video cassette recorder, a phonograph etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 176.1 for stand to hold a particular-type
    article,subclass 205.2 for brackets using VelcroR and subclass 309.1 for an
    article holding bracket.


CLS 211/26.2
TXT Supporting part of article:

    Device under subclass 26 designed to support an element or component of the
    electrically powered article (e.g., light bulb, fuse, battery etc.).


CLS 211/27
TXT Devices under subclass 13.1 designed to support articles such as tables,
    beds, chairs, couches, etc.


CLS 211/28
TXT Devices under subclass 13.1 designed to support bed mattresses or articles
    of a similar type.


CLS 211/29
TXT Devices under subclass 13.1 designed to support shocks of grain ordinarily
    in the field.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 431 for shocker props.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 85-88, 96, 155, and 156 for ground inserted
    supports.


CLS 211/30
TXT Devices under subclass 13.1 designed to support hats or head coverings, not
    stacked.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for hat holders of the locking type.

    74+,    for racks for bottles or jars.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 9 for hat holders of the
    packing type for shipping receptacles.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 24+ for devices of hat form to hold a
    hat in shape for pouncing and other operations and to impart a definite
    shape in forming, subclass 66 for hat supports fitting inside of a hat and
    having form or shape imparting characteristics, and subclasses 85+ for
    garment hangers.


CLS 211/31
TXT Devices under subclass 30 for supporting the articles, beneath a
    substantially horizontal surface, such as the ceiling of a car or the under
    side of a seat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclass 188.03 for a seat with an apparel holder
    or receptacle and subclasses 188.09+ for the combination of a chair with a
    holder or receptacle located directly under the seating portion.


CLS 211/32
TXT Devices under subclass 30 designed to be mounted in or on or secured to a
    wall surface.


CLS 211/33
TXT Devices under subclass 30 in the form of upright standards with special
    means for supporting the articles.


CLS 211/34
TXT Devices under subclass 13.1 designed for supporting articles of footwear,
    as shoes.


CLS 211/35
TXT Devices under subclass 34 designed to be mounted in or on a wall surface.


CLS 211/36
TXT Devices under subclass 34 in the form of shelves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, appropriate subclasses for
    horizontally supported planar surfaces of general utility.


CLS 211/37
TXT Devices under subclass 34 in the form of upright standards.


CLS 211/38
TXT Devices under subclass 34 which are foldable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 85+ for garment hangers.


CLS 211/39
TXT Devices under subclass 13.1 designed to support hand stamps.


CLS 211/40
TXT Devices under subclass 13.1 designed to support phonograph records so that
    any selected record may be removed without removing other records.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 307+ for a container
    under the class definition for removably containing an article which
    includes machine readable information registered thereon, and particularly
    subclasses 309+ for a container for holding a phonographic record.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 9.1+ for phonograph
    cabinets.


CLS 211/41.1
TXT Platelike:

    Device under subclass 13.1 specially designed to support a substantially
    flat, i.e, planar article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20      and 23, for a rack for tires or wheels.

    40,     for a phonograph record rack.


CLS 211/41.11
TXT Receptacle closure:

    Device under subclass 41.1 specially designed to support a top or lid of
    article capable of containing a substance.


CLS 211/41.12
TXT Data storage medium:

    Device under subclass 41.1 specially designed to support units of stored
    information (e.g., VCR tape, floppy disc, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports: Cabinet Structure, subclasses 9.1+ for cabinets for
    supporting data storage media, including such a cabinet in combination with
    a data storage rack.


CLS 211/41.13
TXT Photographic material:

    Device under subclass 41.1 specially designed to support substantially
    rigid photographic film plate or slide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 455 for special packages
    for photographic films or plates.


CLS 211/41.14
TXT Glass type:

    Device under subclass 41.1 specially designed to support a rigid sheet of
    glass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 454 for a special package
    for glass plates.


CLS 211/41.15
TXT Construction panel:

    Device under subclass 41.1 specially designed to support planar article to
    be used in fabrication of a building.

    (1)     Note. The construction panel of this subclass may be comprised of a
    sheet of gypsum board or plywood.


CLS 211/41.16
TXT Building closure:

    Device under subclass 41.15 specially designed to support panel which is
    used to block opening in static structure (e.g., door, window, screen etc.).

    (1)     Note. The device supported by the rack of this subclass may be
    intended for use in cleaning, polishing, painting etc. (e.g., may comprise
    a broom, comb, mop, roller etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 110 for a brush or broom support.


CLS 211/41.17
TXT Circuit board:

    Device under subclass 41.1 specially designed to support a plate-like
    member comprising an electrical circuit mounted on a planar substrate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, subclass 903 for a work holder used when assembling a
    circuit board.


CLS 211/41.18
TXT Semiconductor wafer:

    Device under subclass 41.1 specially designed to support semiconductor
    wafer (e.g., wafer boat).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 500 for a wafer holder or handling
    device for a wafer coating apparatus.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 454 for a special package
    for wafers.


CLS 211/41.2
TXT Culinary plate:

    Device under subclass 41.1 specially designed to directly support the plate
    type article (e.g., dinner plate, dish, etc.) which is used to support
    comestible product.

    (1)     Note. A rack for supporting a culinary article (dish) that is not
    "platelike", e.g., a cup, is included herein because of the similarity of
    the rack to one for holding a plate.


CLS 211/41.3
TXT Drying rack:

    Device under subclass 41.2 specially designed to support a culinary plate
    during drying subsequent to washing.

    (1)     Note. A rack, similar in construction to a drying rack, but used
    when washing dishes by hand is included herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    D32,    Washing, Cleaning, or Drying Machine, design subclass 56 for
    drainboards.


CLS 211/41.4
TXT Of wire:

    Device under subclass 41.3 constructed of thin metallic rod.


CLS 211/41.5
TXT Foldable or collapsible:

    Device under subclass 41.4 which may be altered in shape or size by moving
    one portion in relation with another attached portion.


CLS 211/41.6
TXT Foldable or collapsible:

    Device under subclass 41.3 which may be altered in shape or size by moving
    one portion in relation with another attached portion.


CLS 211/41.7
TXT Single display type:

    Device under subclass 41.2 specially designed to support a single article
    or  disparate articles which form a group (e.g., place setting including a
    plate, cup, bowl, etc.), particularly for viewing purposes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 469 and 473 for a stand for supporting an
    individual framed (platelike) article, subclass 488 for a bracket for
    supporting an individual framed (platelike) article, and subclass 490 for a
    suspended support for an individual framed (plate type) article.


CLS 211/41.8
TXT Dishwashing machine rack:

    Device under subclass 41.2 specially designed to support a culinary article
    for cleansing in a power-operated dishwashing machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports: Cabinet Structure, subclass 228.1 for a dishwasher rack
    combined with diswasher cabinet structure.


CLS 211/41.9
TXT Component:

    Device under subclass 41.8 comprising less than a complete rack, i. e., an
    element of the rack for dishwashing machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclass 318 for a flexible hold down.


CLS 211/42
TXT Devices under subclass 13.1 designed to laterally support a closed book,
    usually stood on end.


CLS 211/43
TXT Devices under subclass 42 in which the book supports can follow the end
    book of a row or be adjusted to book rows of various lengths.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184,    for racks which support books, etc., on both its sides.


CLS 211/44
TXT Devices under subclass 13.1 designed to hold bolts or cards of fabric.


CLS 211/45
TXT Devices under subclass 13.1 designed to support sheets of paper or textile
    material, such as sample sheets or books of wall paper, or rugs, curtains,
    etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     for racks for holding sheets stacked together for individual
    removal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 446+ for devices for
    manipulating textile sheets for display purposes.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 85+ for garment hangers, particularly
    subclasses 95+ for skirt or trousers hangers.


CLS 211/46
TXT Devices under subclass 45 provided with a trackway or guideway upon which
    the paper or textile sheets are mounted for movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 67.1+ for a
    file folder or file envelope.


CLS 211/47
TXT Devices under subclass 45 provided with a pivoted support for mounting the
    sheets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 530+ for racks to
    support sheets having intangible matter thereon, such as signs, maps,
    charts, drawings, blue prints, etc., subclass 388 for hinge mounted files.


CLS 211/48
TXT Devices under subclass 47 designed to be mounted on a wall surface.


CLS 211/49.1
TXT Stacked articles:

    Device under subclass 13.1 designed to support a group of articles which
    (a) are in a superposed or juxtaposed relationship with each other, or (b)
    have one of the articles either at least partially supporting or
    constructed to align with complementary portions of, another one of the
    articles in the group.

    (1)     Note.  In this and the indented subclasses it is not essential that
    the stack be formed from specifically named or shaped articles, since a
    stacked group of nondistinct article is itself considered a "special
    article".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for article dispensers
    both otherwise provided for, including cabinet structures, and see
    particularly subclasses 282+ for casings or supports combined with article
    dispensing devices.  See the class definition of this class (211) for a
    statement of the class lines.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 42 for stacked-article type
    cabinets.


CLS 211/50
TXT Devices under subclasses 49.1+ designed to hold articles in the nature of
    cards or sheets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 403 for a paperweight.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 19.5 and 124 for
    racks to hold a single card by itself.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 215 for a container for
    stationery or carbon paper, subclass 425 for file for plural cards or
    sheets, and subclasses 555+ for a plate or sheet container including an
    access aperture for manual removal of content.


CLS 211/51
TXT Devices under subclass 50 provided with a follower to press against and
    maintain the articles in superposed or juxtaposed relation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 556 for a plate or sheet
    container including a follower.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 56+ for dispensers for flexible
    articles including follower structures, and subclasses 226+ and 279+ for
    other article dispensers having followers.


CLS 211/52
TXT Devices under subclass 51 in which the holding means for the sheet-like
    article are terraced or placed one above and behind the one next below it
    and provided each with a follower.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 130 for plural source article
    dispensers in which the plural sources are superposed, one upon the other.


CLS 211/53
TXT Devices under subclass 51 which are rotatable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 113 and 119+ for article dispensers
    not otherwise provided for comprising plural sources, stacks or
    compartments which are rotatably mounted.


CLS 211/54.1
TXT Devices under subclass 51 provided with a spike-like or otherwise
    relatively sharp supporting structure on which the articles are to be
    strung or otherwise impaled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 26 for similar structures also having
    dispensing means.

    248,    Supports, for structure wherein part of the supporting means is
    pierced.

    402,    Binder Device Releasably Engaging Aperture or Notch of Sheet,
    appropriate subclasses for loose-leaf binder including sheet retainer
    means, which means passes through a sheet and releasably secures such sheet
    so as to avoid destruction of the sheet upon removal therefrom.


CLS 211/55
TXT Devices under subclass 50 with article pockets terraced or placed one above
    and behind the one next below it.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 130 for plural source article
    dispensers in which the plural dispensers are superposed, one upon the
    other.


CLS 211/56
TXT Devices under subclass 55 which are rotatable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 113 and 119+ for article dispensers
    not otherwise provided for comprising plural sources, stacks or
    compartments which are rotatably mounted.


CLS 211/57.1
TXT Devices under subclass 50 provided with a spike-like or otherwise relating
    sharp supporting structure on which the articles are to be strung or
    otherwise impaled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for similar devices.

    54.1,   for racks of this type with followers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, for structure wherein parts of the supporting means is
    pierced.

    402,    Binder Device Releasably Engaging Aperture or Notch of Sheet,
    subclass 25 for a device of that class including a sheet retainer with
    means to force a sheet thereon, and subclasses 70+ for a device of that
    class including a sheet retainer with base.


CLS 211/58
TXT Devices under subclass 50 which are rotatable.


CLS 211/59.1
TXT Devices under subclasses 49.1+ provided with a spike-like or otherwise
    relatively sharp supporting structure on which the articles are to be
    strung or otherwise impaled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54.1,   for racks of this type with followers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, for structure wherein part of the supporting means is
    pierced.


CLS 211/59.2
TXT Having feature perfecting the dispensing of articles:

    Device under subclass 49.1 having a specific structural modification which
    utilized in the discharging of the articles from the device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 15+ for a cabinet having
    structure which allows selective ejection of records therefrom, and
    subclasses 42+ for a cabinet including structure which facilitates the
    removal of stacked articles therefrom.


CLS 211/59.3
TXT Including follower:

    Device under subclass 59.2 including means which (a) moves relative to the
    structure supporting the articles, and (b) exerts a force directly on one
    of the articles to maintain them in a superposed or juxtaposed relationship
    with each other during or after dispensing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51+,    for stacked cards or sheets having a follower exerting a force
    thereon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 556 for a plate or sheet
    container including a follower.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 56+ for dispensers for flexible
    articles including follower structures, and subclasses 226+ and 279+ for
    other article dispensers having followers.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 71 for a cabinet including a
    follower which moves a stack of articles towards an opening in the cabinet.


CLS 211/59.4
TXT With distinct separator positioned between articles:

    Device under subclass 49.1 in which at least two of the articles in the
    group have structurally distinct means located between them separating
    portions of their structure form contact with each other.

    (1)     Note.  Stacks having a separator placed between individual articles
    are considered proper for this subclass when at least part of the weight of
    one of the articles is transmitted through the separator to the another
    article.  See subclasses 211-194 for nonweight transmitting separating
    units which are in a stack.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194,    for plural supporting structures which are stacked upon each other
    when in use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    283,    Printed Matter subclasses 36+ for index cards which separate filed
    articles.


CLS 211/60.1
TXT Article includes elongated portion:

    Device under subclass 13.1 designed to support in a stored or nonuse
    position at least one article which either (a) is slender along its total
    length or (b) has an predominate component slender along its total length
    (e.g., tool handle).

    (1)     Note.  To be proper for this subclass, an article must be in either
    a stored or nonuse position when supported by the device.  On the other
    hand, articles are considered to be in either nonstored or use position
    when the device supporting them (a) is mounted on a structure associated
    with their work function (e.g., a spoon support mounted on a pan), (b) is
    carried by the article when doing its work function (e.g., a stand attached
    to pipe being smoked), (c) is intended to be placed adjacent to a work area
    and receive the article only for intervals in the work operation (e.g. a
    spoon support located near a plate during meals), (d) holds the article in
    a position in which it is intended to operate (e.g., a fishing pole having
    its line extended), or (e) has a structural feature which enhances the
    ability of the article to remain ready for use (e.g., a pipe held in a
    particular attitude which allows it to remain lit).  In addition, although
    the mere display of an article is normally considered a nonuse position  in
    this and the indented subclasses, in the case of articles having only
    visual utility (e.g., flag pole Christmas tree), it is considered as a use
    position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 443 for a receptacle or
    package which holds plural rod-like articles,

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, Digest 1 for tie hanger.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 511+ for a support staff type means which
    either (a) hold the staff in at least one position in which it is intended
    to be used or (b) is intended to be placed adjacent to the work area of the
    staff (e.g., fishing seat) and receive the staff (e.g., fishing rod) only
    for intervals in the work operation (e.g., fishing).


CLS 211/61
TXT Devices under subclasses 60.1+ designed to support a supply of short
    lengths of thread-like articles, as shoe laces, cut cords, etc., so that
    some or one may be removed without disturbing the remainder.


CLS 211/62
TXT Devices under subclasses 60.1+ designed to support umbrellas or canes.


CLS 211/63
TXT Devices under subclasses 62 designed to be mounted on or secured to a wall
    surface.


CLS 211/64
TXT Devices under subclasses 60.1+ designed to support guns and rifles.


CLS 211/65
TXT Brush or brushlike:

    Device under subclass 60.1 designed to support an article consisting of a
    handle and working bristiles or other flexible working surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 361 for a brush receptacle.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 110+ and 683+ for supports for a single brush
    or broom.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 206+ for cabinets for
    brushes and brooms.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 118+ for the
    combination of a receptacle to hold a supply of coating material and to
    also support a separable brush applicator.


CLS 211/66
TXT Devices under 65 designed to be suspended from an overhead support, as the
    ceiling.


CLS 211/67
TXT Devices under subclasses 60.1+ designed to support whips.


CLS 211/68
TXT Devices under subclasses 60.1+ designed to support cues.


CLS 211/69
TXT Devices under subclasses 60.1+ designed to support drills or bits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 379 for special receptacles
    for bits and drills.


CLS 211/69.1
TXT Device under subclass 60 designed to support pens, pencils, or crayons.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 358 for a penrack
    combined with means to support a card, picture, or sign.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 214 for a container for
    plural stationery implements.


CLS 211/69.2
TXT Device under subclass 69.1 including (a) an ink supply receptacle and (b)
    structure for supporting a writing implement, which structure is so
    displaced from the supply of ink as to required removal of the implement
    from the support structure and manual carriage thereof to the location
    where it receives the ink.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 192 for a dispensing receptacle in combination
    with an implement support, (e.g., penrack).

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 118+ for the
    combination of a material supply receptacle, a coating implement support,
    and the coating implement; see, in particular, subclasses 123+ for this
    combination wherein the implement is supported out of communication with
    the supply.


CLS 211/69.3
TXT Device under subclass 69.2 wherein the implement support is so related to a
    closure for the supply receptacle that the positioning of the implement on
    the support overcomes the normal tendency (due to, for example, a
    counterweight or spring means) of the closure to assume the position
    affording access to the receptacle, and the removal of the implement from
    the support causes the closure to move according to its normal tendency.


CLS 211/69.4
TXT Device under subclass 69.2 further including an underlying support for the
    ink supply receptacle, which support includes the structure for supporting
    the implement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69.2,   for a device wherein the penrack is attached directly to the ink
    supply receptacle or is an integral part thereof.


CLS 211/69.5
TXT Device under subclass 69.1 wherein the support for the writing implement
    includes a hollow receptacle dimensioned to enclose an end portion of only
    a single implement.


CLS 211/69.6
TXT Device under subclass 69.5 wherein the socket is supported for arcuate
    adjustable movement, relative to a fixed pivot.


CLS 211/69.7
TXT Device under subclass 69.6 wherein the support for the socket includes
    means limiting the swinging movement of the socket to that about a single
    axis.


CLS 211/69.8
TXT Device under subclass 69.1 wherein the support includes an element,
    spring-biased in a direction to exert a gripping force on the implement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for a device which has a series of resilient members to retain an
    article other than a writing implement, by a spring-grip action between an
    adjacent pair of elements.


CLS 211/69.9
TXT Device under subclass 69.1 wherein the implement support includes two
    projections, spaced from one another, which are adapted to engage the
    implement at portions spaced along the length thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69.4,   for a penrack and inkstand combination in which the penrack
    comprises a pair of spaced arms.


CLS 211/70
TXT Devices under subclass 60.1 which are rotatable.


CLS 211/70.1
TXT Special article support or rack made from sheet material:

    Device under subclass 60.1 which is constructed from relatively thin
    planner rigid or semirigid material and will support a special article
    having an elongated portion.


CLS 211/70.2
TXT Golf club:

    Device under subclass 60.1 designed to support a golf club.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    473,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 282+  for a support combined
    with a golf club.


CLS 211/70.3
TXT Cigar, cigarette, or smoking pipe:

    Device under subclass 60.1 designed to support a cigar, cigarette, or
    smoking pipe in a stored position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 240+ and 257-260 for a cigar, cigarettes, or
    pipe support which either (a) is in combination with additional structure
    associated with tobacco smoking (e.g., ashtray, tobacco compactor), (b) is
    fixedly or removably attached to a stays with the tobacco smoking device
    during the smoking operation, or (c) has a structural feature which allow,
    or enhances the ability of, the smoking device to remain lit during
    intervals in the smoking operation.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 242+ for a receptacle or
    package which holds a pipe or cigarette.


CLS 211/70.4
TXT Well pipe or pump sucker rod:

    Device under subclass 60.1 designed to support a pipe or pump sucker rod
    disclosed as being used with well drilling apparatus.


CLS 211/70.5
TXT Ski:

    Device under subclass 60.1 designed to support a ski when the ski is not in
    use (e.g., not being carried by hand or vehicle and not being used in
    skiing).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 315 for a receptacle or
    package which holds a ski.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, cross-reference art collection 917
    for ski carriers and cross-reference art collection 917.5 for a ski carrier
    attached to a vehicle.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 814+ for clamps, ties, or cases for
    storing or carrying skies.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-line implements, subclass 147 for an
    article carrier gripped and carried by hand which supports a ski and a
    diverse article.


CLS 211/70.6
TXT Cutlery (e.g., spoon, fork, knife):

    Device under subclass 60.1 designed to support stored cutlery.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 198 and 231 for a hand shear having support;
    subclass 298.4 for  a cutting tool having a nonuse support or attaching
    means therefor in general, subclass 323 for a fork with a support therefor
    and subclass 327 for  a spoon with a support therefor.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 553 for a receptacle or
    package for holding an eating or kitchen type tool.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 37.3+ for a cutlery type support for wither on
    structure associated with the use of the cutlery (e.g., pans, plates,
    chopping blocks), (a) is carried by the cutlery while the latter is being
    used, or (b) is intended to be placed adjacent to the work area (e.g., a
    pan) of the cutlery and receive the cutlery only for intervals in the work
    operation (e.g., cooking).


CLS 211/70.7
TXT Fishing rod:

    Device under subclass 60.1 designed to support a stored fishing rod.


CLS 211/70.8
TXT Tool:

    Device under subclass 60.1 designed to support a stored tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 349+ for a receptacle or
    package which holds a tool.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, cross-reference art collection 904
    for a tool holder carried by a belt.


CLS 211/71.01
TXT Receptacle support:

    Device under subclass 13.1 specially designed to support a means for
    holding or containing an article or substance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126.1,  for a tray-type rack in which the tray is part of the rack.


CLS 211/72
TXT Devices under subclass 71.01 built up of flexible sheet material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 152, 174 and 198 for other sheet material
    supports.


CLS 211/73
TXT Devices under subclass 72 built up from a single piece or blank of flexible
    sheet material.


CLS 211/74
TXT Devices under subclass 71.01 designed to support articles, as bottles or
    jars, flowerpots, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69.2+,  for an ink-bottle support combined with a support for a pen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 139+ for a carrier, for
    potable beverage containers in a desired arrangement, and additionally
    having hand or finger engaging means to pendulously support the containers.


CLS 211/75
TXT Devices under subclass 74 designed to be mounted against a wall or window.


CLS 211/76
TXT Devices under subclass 74 provided with a closure to close the mouths of
    the bottles or jars when placed in the rack.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 106 for bottle type carriers having covers or
    closures for open articles on the carrier.


CLS 211/77
TXT Devices under subclass 74 which are rotatable.


CLS 211/78
TXT Devices under subclass 71.01 which are rotatable.


CLS 211/79
TXT Devices under subclass 71.01 in which the means for supporting the
    receptacles is reciprocable relative to the rack in a straight line.


CLS 211/80
TXT Devices under subclass 79 in which the receptacle supports are designed to
    swing about a pivotal point.


CLS 211/81
TXT Devices under subclass 71.01 in which the receptacle supports are designed
    for pivotal movement.


CLS 211/82
TXT Devices under subclass 81 provided with means to close the top of the
    receptacle or to assist in the operation of its closure into closed
    position upon movement of the receptacle to normal position within the rack.


CLS 211/83
TXT Devices under subclass 71.01 designed with means to operate the closure of
    the receptacle as it is moved to or from its normal position in the rack.


CLS 211/84
TXT Devices under subclass 71.01 having a closure for the receptacle as an
    inherent part of the rack.


CLS 211/85
TXT Devices under subclass 71.01 which are foldable or collapsible.


CLS 211/85.1
TXT Eyeglasses:

    Device under subclass 13.1 specially designed to support, when not in use,
    vision adjustment lenses with a frame intended to be worn over the eyes of
    the user.

    (1)     Note. Included among the special articles of this subclass are
    prescription glasses, sun glasses etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 5 for special packages for
    eyeglasses and subclass 902 for an art collection of supports for
    eyeglasses.


CLS 211/85.11
TXT Horse saddle:

    Device under subclass 13.1 specially designed to support, when not in use,
    rider seating equipment for equestrian activities.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86+,    for a specially mounted saddle rack.

    87+,    for a wall mounted saddle rack.

    104+,   for a foldable saddle rack.


CLS 211/85.12
TXT Soap:

    Device under subclass 13.1 specially designed to support,for ready access,
    cleaning material.

    (1)     Note. The cleaning material of this subclass is usually in bar form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    D6,     Furnishings, design subclasses 524+ for a soap holder.


CLS 211/85.13
TXT Medical implement:

    Device under subclass 13.1 specially designed to support, when not in use,
    an article used in care or treatment of a life form.


CLS 211/85.14
TXT Lamp shade:

    Device under subclass 13.1 specially designed to support, when not in use,
    a glare shield for a light producing article.


CLS 211/85.15
TXT Bag type:

    Device under subclass 71.01 wherein the receptacle is specially designed to
    have the form of a sack.


CLS 211/85.16
TXT Casket type:

    Device under subclass 71.01 wherein the receptacle is specially designed to
    have the form of a coffin.


CLS 211/85.17
TXT Box type:

    Device under subclass 71.01 wherein the receptacle is specially designed to
    have the form of a rectangular container covered by a lid.


CLS 211/85.18
TXT Cylindrical shape:

    Device under subclass 71.01 wherein the receptacle is specially designed to
    have the shape of a cylinder.


CLS 211/85.19
TXT Garbage can:

    Device under subclass 85.18 wherein the cylindrical receptacle is a trash
    container.


CLS 211/85.2
TXT Jewelry:

    Device under subclass 13.1 specially designed to support when not in use,
    an article generally composed of real or similated precious metal or stone
    which is intended to be worn upon a person as ornament (e.g., earring,
    bracelet, necklace etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 6.1 for a special package
    for jewelry, subclass 495 for a panel having jewelry pinned or wrapped
    thereon, and subclass 566 for a tray for jewelry.


CLS 211/85.21
TXT Bucket:

    Device under subclass 85.18 wherein the cylindrical receptacle is a vessel.


CLS 211/85.22
TXT Barrel:

    Device under subclass 85.18 wherein the cylindrical receptacle is made of
    wooden staves bound together with hoops and has a flat top and bottom of
    equal diameter.


CLS 211/85.23
TXT Plant or flower pot:

    Device under subclass 85.18 wherein the cylindrical receptacle is specially
    designed to contain a plant or flower.


CLS 211/85.24
TXT Laundry:

    Device under suclass 71.01 wherein the receptacle is specially designed to
    support soiled clothes before laundering and clean clothes subsequent to
    laundering.


CLS 211/85.25
TXT Drainer:

    Device under subclass 71.01 wherein the receptacle is specially designed to
    hold and drain newly washed dishes.


CLS 211/85.26
TXT Display:

    Device under subclass 71.01 wherein the receptacle is specially designed to
    contain object for viewing purposes.


CLS 211/85.27
TXT Cremated remains:

    Device under subclass 71.01 wherein the receptacle is specially designed to
    reposite the cremated remains.


CLS 211/85.28
TXT Wrapper:

    Device under subclass 71.01 wherein the receptacle is specially designed to
    contain a material which is used to wrap.


CLS 211/85.29
TXT Suspended:

    Device under subclass 71.01 wherein the receptacle is hung from below its
    support (e.g.,from a ceiling etc.).


CLS 211/85.3
TXT Apparel:

    Device under subclass 13.1 specially designed to support, when not in use,
    clothing (e.g., shirt) or accessory (e.g., tie, belt, glove etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 85+ for a garment hanger intended to
    be hung from the rack of this subclass.


CLS 211/85.31
TXT Of wire:

    Device under subclass 71.01 wherein the receptacle support is constructed
    of thin metallic rod.


CLS 211/85.4
TXT Food:

    Device under subclass 13.1 specially designed to support comestible product.


CLS 211/85.5
TXT Spool type:

    Device under subclass 13.1 specially designed to support an article having
    a cylindrical surface for receiving flexible material removably wrapped
    thereon.

    (1)     Note. A support for a reel, beam, coil etc. is included herein.
    Also, a support for a wound package of freely coiled flexible material is
    included herein since the same support will receive a spool or wound
    package.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, for general winding and reeling.


CLS 211/85.6
TXT Musical instrument:

    Device under subclass 13.1 specially designed to support, when not in use,
    an article used in producing live music (e.g., drum, cymbal, saxophone
    etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, subclass 453 for a rack for a musical instrument.


CLS 211/85.7
TXT Recreational equipment:

    Device under subclass 13.1 specially designed to support, when not in use,
    equiment for game, sport, exercise, or amusement.


CLS 211/85.8
TXT Mobile:

    Device under subclass 13.1 specially designed to support and transport an
    article.

    (1)     Note. Included herein is a wheeled shipping rack.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    410,    Freight Accommodation on Freight Carrier, subclasses 2+ for freight
    accommodation of special articles on a long-haul motor vehicle or trailer.


CLS 211/85.9
TXT Key:

    Device under subclass 13.1 specially designed to support, when not in use,
    an article which is used to open or close a lock.


CLS 211/86.01
TXT SPECIALLY MOUNTED:

    Device under the class definition which is specially designed to be
    attached or secured to a definite locus (e.g., wall, window, stovepipe,
    column, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 188.01+ for a seat and a rack.


CLS 211/87.01
TXT Wall or window:

    Device under subclass 86.01 specially designed to be mounted  on or secured
    to a wall surface or to a window.


CLS 211/88.01
TXT Tray:

    Device under subclass 87.01 specially designed to have a bottom surface and
    at least one side extending upwardly therefrom to at least partially
    contain article located therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 42+ for a
    structural installation having a supported horizontal planar surface.


CLS 211/88.02
TXT Expandable:

    Device under subclass 88.01 wherein the tray is specially designed to be
    adjustable in size.


CLS 211/88.03
TXT Plant or flower pot:

    Device under subclass 88.01 wherein the tray is specially designed to
    support plant or flower pot.


CLS 211/88.04
TXT Towel:

    Device under subclass 87.01 specially designed to support a piece of
    absorbent cloth used for wiping or drying.


CLS 211/89.01
TXT Having article-gripping means:

    Device under subclass 87.01 specially designed to have means to grasp the
    article to be supported.


CLS 211/90.01
TXT Shelf:

    Device under subclass 87.01 in which the article supporting element is a
    horizontally rectangular surface fixed at right angles to a wall or other
    vertical surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclasses 39+ for a plant stand.

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, appropriate subclasses for
    horizontally supported planar surfaces in general.


CLS 211/90.02
TXT Adjustable:

    Device under subclass 90.01 wherein the shelf is specially designed to be
    movable from one position to another.


CLS 211/90.03
TXT Of wire:

    Device under subclass 90.01 wherein the shelf is specially designed to
    construct of thin metallic rod.


CLS 211/90.04
TXT Plural:

    Device under subclass 90.01 wherein the article supporting element
    comprises more than one horizontal supporting surface.


CLS 211/94.01
TXT Having trackway:

    Device under subclass 87.01 provided with  guideway upon which the article
    support is guided when moved.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102     and 103, for a rack of this type in which the trackway is vertical.

    119.16+, for a clothesline which is supported by isolated support and which
    has line which is displaceable bodily.


CLS 211/94.02
TXT Horizontally spaced:

    Device under subclass 94.01 which comprises horizontally spaced guides for
    article carrying bars (e.g., garment hangers etc.) which are supported at
    each end by the guides and are movable therealong.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports: Cabinet Structure, subclass 321 for similar device
    combined with significant cabinet structure.


CLS 211/94.03
TXT Cloth drier:

    Device under subclass 94.01 wherein the article supporting element is
    specially designed to support fabric material to be dried.


CLS 211/95
TXT Devices under subclass 87.01 which are rotatably mounted.


CLS 211/96
TXT Devices under subclass 87.01 in which the article support is mounted for
    pivotal movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for such racks for supporting papers or textile sheets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 248 for cabinets pivotally
    mounted on a wall, ceiling panel or spaced panels.


CLS 211/97
TXT Devices under subclass 96 in which the article support is mounted for
    pivotal movement about both a vertical and horizontal axis.


CLS 211/98
TXT Devices under subclass 97 in which the article support is also mounted to
    be vertically adjustable.


CLS 211/99
TXT Devices under subclass 96 in which the article support is mounted for
    pivotal movement on a horizontal axis.


CLS 211/100
TXT Devices under subclass 99 in which the article supports are bars or arms
    mounted for pivotal movement about a practically horizontal axis to swing
    or to swing and slide into a position closely adjacent the wall surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171,    for other bar or arm horizontal axis pivoted racks.


CLS 211/101
TXT Devices under subclass 100 in which the article supports are also mounted
    for vertical adjustment.


CLS 211/102
TXT Devices under subclass 96 in which the article support is also vertically
    adjustable.


CLS 211/103
TXT Devices under subclass 87.01 in which the article supports are vertically
    adjustable.


CLS 211/104
TXT Devices under subclass 87.01 specially designed to be folded or collapsed
    or in which the article supports are relatively fixed when in use but may
    be moved or folded to hang down close to the base or wall section of the
    rack.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96+,    for simple foldable or merely pivoted article supports.


CLS 211/105
TXT Devices under subclass 104 embodying lazy tongs to make them foldable.

    (1)     Note.  For the applications of lazy tongs, see the Index to the
    Classification of Patents, at the back of the Manual, under the title,
    "Lazy tongs".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 521 for lazy tong levers.

    248,    Supports, for other supports utilizing lazy tongs, subclass 157 for
    stands, subclass 277.1 for brackets, and subclass 324 for suspended
    supports.


CLS 211/105.1
TXT Devices under subclass 87.01 in the form of a single horizontal rod or bar
    and the means for supporting the same.

    (1)     Note.  Many of these devices are disclosed for hanging curtains or
    other hanging or drape type fabrics.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123+,   for other horizontal rod type supports.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, particularly
    subclasses 330+ and the places noted in the search notes thereunder, for
    this type of rack having also claimed means for fastening or operating a
    hanging or drape type fabric.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 251+ for rod type brackets even though claimed
    in combination with the rod where only such characteristics of the rod
    structure as combine with the bracket are claimed.


CLS 211/105.2
TXT Devices under subclass 105.1 in which (a) the ends of the rod are curved or
    directed angularly relative to the body of the rod or (b) the support means
    has a projecting portion, the end of which is curved or directed angularly
    toward the rod.


CLS 211/105.3
TXT Devices under subclass 105.1 in which the rod is constructed to have its
    length changed.

    (1)     Note.  The change in length may be small and for mounting purposes
    only.


CLS 211/105.4
TXT Devices under subclass 105.3 in which screw means are provided to change
    the length.


CLS 211/105.5
TXT Devices under subclass 105.3 in which the rod is in the form of a spring or
    other elastic element or such means are provided to cause or assist in
    change of rod length.


CLS 211/105.6
TXT Devices under subclass 105.5 in which the spring or other elastic element
    is enclosed.


CLS 211/106
TXT Devices under subclass 87.01 in which the salient parts are made of wire.


CLS 211/106.01
TXT Hook type:

    Device under subclass 87.01 comprising a free projecting element  which is
    bent upwardly to constitute retaining tip for loosely receiving article in
    suspended relationship.


CLS 211/107
TXT Devices under subclass 86.01 designed to be clamped around and to a
    stove-pipe or column.


CLS 211/110
TXT Devices under subclass 107 which can be pivoted.


CLS 211/111
TXT Devices under subclass 110 in which the pivotal axis is horizontal.


CLS 211/112
TXT Devices under subclass 107 made of wire.


CLS 211/113
TXT Devices under subclass 86.01 designed to be hung from an overhead support
    as, for instance, from a ceiling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 85+ for specific garment hangers,
    such as coat hangers, etc.


CLS 211/115
TXT Devices under subclass 113 which are rotatable.


CLS 211/116
TXT Devices under subclass 113 in which the article-supporting element is
    pivotally mounted.


CLS 211/117
TXT Devices under subclass 113 in which the article supports are vertically
    adjustable.


CLS 211/118
TXT Devices under subclass 113 which are knockdown or foldable.


CLS 211/119
TXT Devices under subclass 113 in which the salient parts are made of wire.


CLS 211/119.001
TXT Ironing Board:

    Device under subclass 86.01 which is specially designed to be mounted on a
    long narrow padded board used as a working surface for ironing.


CLS 211/119.002
TXT Casket lid:

    Device under subclass 86.01 which is specially designed to be mounted on a
    lid of a burial casket.


CLS 211/119.003
TXT Shelf:

    Device under subclass 86.01 which is specially designed to be mounted on a
    horizontally rectangular surface fixed at right angle to a wall or other
    vertical surface.


CLS 211/119.004
TXT Door or hinge:

    Device under subclass 86.01 which is specially designed to be mounted on a
    movable panel used to close off an entrance or on its pivoting part.


CLS 211/119.005
TXT Table or desk:

    Device under subclass 86.01 which is specially designed to be mounted upon
    a horizontal surface supported by one or more legs, or upon a supporting
    structure with a horizontal surface for writing and drawers.


CLS 211/119.006
TXT Bed or baby crib:

    Device under suclass 86.01 which is specially designed to be mounted on a
    supporting structure for sleeping on a child's bed with high sides.


CLS 211/119.007
TXT Chair or seat:

    Device under subclass 86.01 which is specially designed to be mounted on a
    means for supporting the weight of a person in a seated position.


CLS 211/119.008
TXT Heat radiator:

    Device under subclass 86.01 which is specially designed to be mounted on a
    heating means consisting of a series of connected pipes for the circulation
    of steam or hot water.


CLS 211/119.009
TXT Bathroom accessory:

    Device under subclass 86.01 which is specially designed to be mounted on a
    component of facility for taking bath or shower (e.g., shower pipe, curtain
    rod, bathroom wall, etc.).


CLS 211/119.01
TXT Devices under the class definition which comprise isolated supports with a
    flexible article supporting strand or strands joining the supports.

    (1)     Note.  For means for gripping and holding a clothesline or for
    coupling the ends of a looped line see Class 24, Buckles, Buttons, Clasps,
    etc., subclasses 115+, and Class 188, Brakes, subclass 64 and subclasses
    65.1+.

    (2)     Note.  For devices for supporting rods or tubes from a messenger
    cable see Class 248, Supports, subclass 61 and Class 191, Electricity:
    Transmission to Vehicles, subclasses 40+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    189+, and other appropriate subclasses for clotheslines supported
    by a single support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, appropriate subclasses,
    for strand cleaners, particularly subclass 246 for strand guides having
    cleaner attachments.

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 455+ for clothespins and
    see Note 1.

    81,     Tools, subclass 487 for tools for pulling clotheslines.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 370+ for a reeling
    device that may wind clothesline or other elongated material.

    248,    Supports, subclass 353 for props for supporting intermediate
    portions of a clothesline which is strung between isolated supports.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 389+ for a device or member for contacting and guiding a
    load-moving cable.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave, subclass 886 for antennas horizontally
    suspended between poles or standards.


CLS 211/119.011
TXT Bathtub:

    Device under subclass 119.32 which is specially designed to be mounted on a
    tub for bathing.


CLS 211/119.012
TXT Telephone:

    Device under subclass 86.01 which is specially designed to be mounted on a
    telephone component.


CLS 211/119.013
TXT Cash register:

    Device under subclass 86.01 which is specially designed to be mounted on a
    cash register component.


CLS 211/119.02
TXT Devices under subclass 119.01 wherein the strand is in the form of an
    endless loop trained about pulleys.


CLS 211/119.03
TXT Devices under subclass 119.02 in which the looped strand has its runs
    arranged so that a plane passing through the runs is out of the vertical.


CLS 211/119.04
TXT Devices under subclass 119.02 in which the looped strands pass through a
    building opening and about a pulley within the building to enable the
    loading of the strand within the building.


CLS 211/119.05
TXT Devices under subclass 119.02 in which the looped strands pass through a
    building opening and about a pulley in the building and in which the pulley
    is shiftable to a position outside of the opening to enable the closing of
    the building opening with the strands wholly outside of the building.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87+,    for window attached racks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 208 for window brackets.


CLS 211/119.06
TXT Devices under subclass 119.05 in which the support for the pulley is
    swingable through the opening.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 278.1+ for brackets with vertical and
    horizontal pivots.


CLS 211/119.07
TXT Devices under subclass 119.06 in which the support for the pulley is
    mounted on a vertical axis and is swingable through the opening.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 289.11 for brackets mounted on a vertical pivot.


CLS 211/119.08
TXT Devices under subclass 119.06 in which the support for the pulley is
    mounted on a horizontal axis and is swingable through the opening.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 291.1 for brackets mounted on a horizontal pivot.


CLS 211/119.09
TXT Devices under subclass 119.02 comprising means for tightening and
    preventing sagging of a looped strand, usually by shifting one of the
    pulleys about which the strand is trained.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119.05+, for looped line tighteners due to the motion of a pulley support
    through a building opening.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power Driven, subclasses 709 and 813+ for conveyor belt
    tighteners.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 388 for means to prevent sagging of looped lines by devices
    interengaging the runs of the lines.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 101+ for devices for tensioning power transmission belts.


CLS 211/119.1
TXT Devices under subclass 119.01 in which isolated supports with a flexible
    strand or strands, joining the supports.


CLS 211/119.11
TXT Devices under subclass 119.1 in which the strands are provided with article
    gripping means and in which means are provided for moving the gripping
    means along the supporting strand or for separating the jaws of the
    gripping means.


CLS 211/119.12
TXT Devices under subclass 119.1 in which there is provided means suspended
    from a strand and which function to support articles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 455+ for clothespins,
    per se.


CLS 211/119.13
TXT Devices under subclass 119.1 in which the strand is provided with means to
    grip an article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119.02, for article supports associated with looped lines.


CLS 211/119.14
TXT Devices under subclass 119.13 in which the flexible strands are made up of
    linked members.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclasses 84+ for linked
    chains.


CLS 211/119.15
TXT Devices under subclass 119.1 comprising tighteners for strands.

    (1)     Note.  For line tighteners and stretchers, in general, see Class
    242, Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 68+ for strap and line
    tighteners, particularly subclasses 71.1+ for midline tighteners.

    256,    Fences, subclasses 37+ for fence wire stretchers.


CLS 211/119.16
TXT Devices under subclass 119.1 mounted so that they may be bodily displaced
    for convenience in loading or for subsequent positioning for ready drying
    of clothes suspended from the line.


CLS 211/119.17
TXT Devices under subclass 119.16 in which the line is capable of being
    translated bodily in a vertical plane.


CLS 211/119.18
TXT Devices under subclass 119.01 comprising means for covering strands to
    prevent transfer of soil accumulated during nonuse of the strands to the
    object supported thereby.


CLS 211/120
TXT Devices under the class definition having a series of projecting members
    between which an article may be placed and retained by a spring-grip action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69.8,   for a device which includes a series-spring means for gripping and
    supporting writing implements.


CLS 211/121
TXT Devices under the class definition whose article-supporting elements are
    mounted on flexible endless carriers designed for travel over guides
    ordinarily rotatable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses
    for similar structure.

    312,    Supports: Cabinet Structure, subclasses 134 and 268 for similar
    structure in cabinets.


CLS 211/122
TXT Devices under subclass 121 having the flexible endless carrier mounted in a
    horizontal plane or in which the article-supporting elements have a
    horizontal travel.


CLS 211/123
TXT Devices under the class definition which are essentially only modified
    forms of a horizontal rod or bar.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for racks of this type provided with locks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 29+ for a rod
    type support combined with a horizontal planar surface, and subclass 31 for
    a similar device in which the rod is positioned above the surface.


CLS 211/124
TXT Devices under subclass 123 having means to grip the articles to be
    supported.


CLS 211/125
TXT Devices under the class definition designed to support articles by means of
    spikes, spurs, or prongs, upon which they are to be speared.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54.1,   57.1 and 59.1, for stacked article type racks with impaling means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 419+ for food spits and
    impaling devices.


CLS 211/126.1
TXT TRAY:

    Device under class definition having a botto surface and at least one side
    extending upwardly therefrom to at least partially contain article located
    therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71.01+, for a rack designed to hold a receptacle distinct from the rack.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, for a traylike planar
    support, i.e., a horizontally supported planar surface having an upstanding
    flange around the perimeter thereof when the flange is not involved in the
    relationship between the surface and the support, particularly subclasses
    44+ for a vehicle supported horizontal planar surface, and subclasses 59+
    for plural related horizontally supported surfaces. The device of class 108
    is of the type structure to be held by the support structure of this
    subclass.

    294,    Handling: Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, for a device of that
    class including, in subclass 144 a tray provided with legs and in subclass
    172 an article carrier in the form of a tray, generally.


CLS 211/126.11
TXT Distinct seat for stacked element:

    Device under subclass 126.9 wherein the second tray includes means for sole
    purpose of receiving the first tray in the nonuse position.


CLS 211/126.12
TXT Distinct seat for stacked element:

    Device under subclass 126.2 wherein second tray includes the means for sole
    purpose of receiving the first tray in the nonuse position.


CLS 211/126.13
TXT Adapted to receive file folder:

    Device under subclass 126.1 comprising a tray for receiving a paper sheet
    container having opposing planar sides hingedly connected at their lower
    edges.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports: Cabinet Structure, subclass 184 for file cabinet adapted
    to receive suspended file folders.


CLS 211/126.14
TXT Plural distinct:

    Device under subclass 126.1 having two trays, one of which being different
    from the other.


CLS 211/126.15
TXT Slidably supported:

    Device under subclass 126.1 wherein the tray is supported in a manner to
    allow it to be skidded laterally.


CLS 211/126.16
TXT Of sheet material:

    Device under subclass 126.1 constructed of thin planar material.


CLS 211/126.2
TXT Serially supported:

    Device under subclass 126.1 wherein a first tray is designed to engage and
    be supported by a second similar tray.

    (1)     Note. The lower support may, in turn, be supported by a third
    similar support, which may be supported by a fourth similar support, and so
    forth.


CLS 211/126.3
TXT Juxtaposed:

    Device under subclass 126.2 wherein the first tray is designed to laterally
    engage and be supported by the second tray.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 504 for laterally attached
    special receptacles.


CLS 211/126.4
TXT Second tray engagable at alternative locations:

    Device under subclass 126.2 wherein the first tray is capable of engaging
    the second tray in more than one selectable site thereon.


CLS 211/126.5
TXT Cantilevered:

    Device under subclass 126.2 wherein the first tray is generally
    superimposed over the second, with one tray overhanging the other to extend
    a greater lateral extent.


CLS 211/126.6
TXT Foldable or collapsible:

    Device under subclass 126.2 which may be altered in shape and/or size by
    moving one portion in relation with another, attached portion.


CLS 211/126.7
TXT Nested:

    Device under subclass 126.2 designed so that at least a portion of the
    first tray may be located within a portion of the second tray in a nonuse
    position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 505+ for nested special
    receptacles.


CLS 211/126.8
TXT Of wire:

    Device under subclass 126.7 constructed of a thin metallic rod.


CLS 211/126.9
TXT Of wire:

    Device under subclass 126.2 constructed of a thin metallic rod.


CLS 211/127.1
TXT With sprinkler:

    Device under subclass 126.1 provided with means for dispersing liquid over
    the tray.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports: Cabinet Structure, subclass 115 for a show-case-type
    cabinet with a sprinkler.


CLS 211/128.1
TXT Terraced:

    Device under subclass 126.1 wherein one tray is located above and rearward
    of another tray.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling: Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 161 for an
    article carrier comprising terraced trays.


CLS 211/129.1
TXT Rotatable:

    Device under subclass 128.1 wherein the tray is adapted to be   moved about
    an axis.


CLS 211/130.1
TXT Foldable or collapsible:

    Device under subclass 128.1 which may be altered in shape and/or size by
    moving one portion in relation with another, attached portion.


CLS 211/131.1
TXT Rotatable:

    Device under subclass 126.1 wherein the tray is adapted to be moved about
    an axis.


CLS 211/131.2
TXT Horizontal axis:

    Device under subclass 131.1 wherein the axis about which the tray is
    adapted to be moved is horizontal.


CLS 211/132.1
TXT Foldable or collapsible:

    Device under subclass 126.1 which may be altered in shape and/or size by
    moving one portion in relation with another, attached portion.


CLS 211/133.1
TXT Stand:

    Device under subclass 126.1 wherein the tray is arranged on a generally
    upright framework.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 231+ for a tobacco user's appliance combined
    with a stand supporting an ash receiving receptacle.


CLS 211/133.2
TXT Of wire:

    Device under subclass 133.1 wherein the stand is constructed substantially
    of thin metallic rod.


CLS 211/133.3
TXT Cantilevered:

    Device under subclass 133.1 wherein the tray is mounted by means adjacent
    one end thereof.


CLS 211/133.4
TXT Mounted solely on central support:

    Device under subclass 126.1 wherein the tray is arranged on a single
    upright element at a point substantially coincident with the center of the
    tray.


CLS 211/133.5
TXT Of wire:

    Device under subclass 126.1 comprising a tray constructed substantially of
    thin metallic rod.


CLS 211/133.6
TXT Single:

    Device under subclass 126.1 which is not designed to be used in conjunction
    with another tray or is distinguished by the specific details of
    construction thereof.


CLS 211/134
TXT Devices under the class definition in which the article-supporting element
    is in the form of a shelf.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for shelf racks for shoes.

    71.01+, for receptacle support type racks.

    121,    for shelves mounted on endless carriers.

    126.1+, for tray type racks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, appropriate subclass for
    horizontally supported planar surfaces in general.


CLS 211/135
TXT Devices under subclass 134 built up from sheet material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 259+ for knockdown
    cabinets with cardboard type walls.


CLS 211/144
TXT Devices under subclass 134 which are rotatable or which have rotatable
    shelves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 94+ for terraced
    horizontal planar surfaces which are rotatable, subclasses 103+ for plural
    related horizontal planar surfaces which are rotatable about a vertical
    axis, and subclasses 139+ for a horizontal planar surface which rotates
    about a vertical axis.


CLS 211/149
TXT Devices under subclass 186 designed to be knocked down by having foldable
    parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142,    for foldable terraced shelves.


CLS 211/150
TXT Devices under subclass 134 in which the shelves are pivotally mounted.


CLS 211/151
TXT Devices under subclass 134 in which the article-supporting elements are in
    the form of roller bearings or shelves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the notes thereunder.


CLS 211/153
TXT Devices under subclass 134 consisting of shelves.


CLS 211/162
TXT Devices under the class definition having a guideway or trackway by which
    movement of the article supports is guided.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 307, 318, 321, 331, 332,
    334.1+, 349, and 350 for cabinet structures having guides or trackways.


CLS 211/163
TXT Devices under the class definition in which the article-supporting element
    is designed to be rotated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     56, 58, 70, 77, 78, 95, 115, 129.1, 131.1, and 144, for other
    rotatable racks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 113 and 119+ for article dispensing
    combinations in which the supply sources are rotatably mounted.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, "Rotatable" subclasses for cabinets
    with rotatable components.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 869 and 882 for
    antennas with a rotatable support.


CLS 211/164
TXT Devices under subclass 163 in which the rotation is about a horizontal axis.


CLS 211/165
TXT Devices under subclass 163 in which the article-supporting element is
    pivotally mounted or in which the rotatable part is itself mounted for
    independent pivotal movement.


CLS 211/166
TXT Devices under subclass 163 in which the article-supporting element is
    vertically-adjustable.


CLS 211/167
TXT Devices under subclass 163 which are foldable.


CLS 211/168
TXT Devices under the class definition in which the article-supporting element
    is pivotally mounted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 882 for antennas
    with a pivoted support.


CLS 211/169
TXT Devices under subclass 168 in which the article-supporting element is the
    form of an open-work frame or a planar surface member, with or without a
    surrounding frame.


CLS 211/169.1
TXT Devices under subclass 169 in which the article-supporting element moves
    between vertical and horizontal positions of adjustment about a
    horizontally disposed axis.


CLS 211/170
TXT Devices under subclass 168 in which the article-supporting element is
    pivotally mounted on a horizontal axis.


CLS 211/171
TXT Devices under subclass 170 in which the article supports are bars or arms
    which swing, or swing and slide into a position closely adjacent the main
    support or standard.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    for such racks which are wall or window mounted.


CLS 211/172
TXT Devices under subclass 171 in which the axis is also mounted to telescope
    within a part of the rack.


CLS 211/173
TXT Devices under subclass 170 in which there is also means for vertical
    adjustment.


CLS 211/174
TXT Devices under subclass 168 in which the article-supporting element is also
    vertically adjustable.


CLS 211/175
TXT Devices under the class definition in which the article-supporting element
    is adjustable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 880+ for antennas
    with an adjustable support.


CLS 211/180
TXT Devices under the class definition designed with or provided with means to
    support a screen or curtain to shield the rack.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 3 for canopy or curtain type
    cabinets.


CLS 211/181.1
TXT OF WIRE:

    Device under class definition constructed substantially of thin metallic
    rod.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports: Cabinet Structure, subclass 3 for a canopy or
    curtain-type cabinet wherein a canopy or curtain may be supported by a thin
    metal rod.


CLS 211/182
TXT Devices under the class definition built up of pipes, tubes, bars, etc., in
    combination with their connectors.


CLS 211/183
TXT Elements:

    Devices under the class definition comprising elements of special
    construction used in building a rack.


CLS 211/184
TXT Adjustable partition:

    Devices under subclass 183 comprising adjustable partition adapted to
    separate articles or stacks of articles, usually on a flat surface, as for
    instance, a shelf.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for adjustable book support type rack.


CLS 211/186
TXT Device under subclass 134 wherein significance is attributed to a
    construction of a built-up open framework for supporting a shelf, which
    construction is readily assembled or erected to a form that is usable as a
    shelf support, or is readily disassembled or collapsed to a form that is
    not so usable but occupies less space, any of the operations being capable
    of performance without the use of tools.

    (1)     Note.  The limitation "without the use of tools" applies to the
    constructing of a framework that is "assembled" by connecting together
    previously separate members or that is "erected" by positioning members
    that were previously loosely connected and tightening the connection
    between the properly positioned member, and also applies to the "knockdown"
    of a framework that is "disassembled" by disconnecting the members and
    separating them or that is "collapsed" by loosening the connection between
    the members and moving them together into a smaller space with the members
    still loosely connected together.  However, the disclosed use of a common,
    multi-purpose tool such as, for example, a wrench, screwdriver or pair of
    pliers to tighten or loosen a nut-and-bolt arrangement would not bar a
    patent having such disclosure from this or an indented subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189+,   for a knockdown rack that is not specifically for a shelf.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surface, subclasses 162+ or 180+ for
    shelf structure having plural related horizontal surfaces with separable or
    folding components; and subclass 157.13 for shelf structure having a
    horizontal planar surface with separable components.


CLS 211/187
TXT Device under subclass 186 wherein the shelf, or a member that supports the
    shelf, is repositionable within the framework in an up and down direction
    to one of a plurality of usable positions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    190,    for a rack wherein an article-supporting member is vertically
    adjustable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 106+ for plural,
    vertically adjustable shelves, and subclasses 147.11+, for vertically
    adjustable shelf structure.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 243+ for vertically adjustable shelf or
    scaffold bracket structure.


CLS 211/188
TXT Device under subclass 186 provided with a plurality of shelves, or a
    plurality of members that support the shelves, each of which plurality
    resembles the other(s), the plurality being arranged one above the
    other(s), and each shelf or members above the lowermost being supported by
    the shelf or member immediately therebelow.

    (1)     Note.  The units may also be arranged in plural side-by-side
    vertical columns, or in staggered array wherein one unit is only partly
    over an underlying unit.

    (2)     Note.  The units may be interconnected by separate means that
    facilitate the stack arrangement.  In the instance of stacked similar
    shelves those above the lowermost include interconnecting means that
    maintain the shelves apart.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194,    for a rack including stacked similar units.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclass 91 for plural
    shelves including nested or stacked units.


CLS 211/189
TXT Device under the class definition wherein significance is attributed to a
    construction of a built-up open framework for supporting an article, which
    construction is readily assembled or erected to a form that is usable as an
    article support or is readily disassembled or collapsed to a form that is
    not so usable but occupies less space, any of the operations being capable
    of performance without the use of tools.

    (1)     Note.  See the (1) Note to subclass 186 for a discussion of the
    phrase "without the use of tools", and of the terms "assembled", "erected",
    "disassembled" and "collapsed".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186+,   for a knockdown shelf rack.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:   Apparatus, subclass 449 for a collapsible,
    expansible or sectional food-cooking support.


CLS 211/190
TXT Device under subclass 189 wherein an article-supporting member or portion
    of the framework is repositionable within the framework in an up-and-down
    direction to one of a plurality of usable positions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    187,    for a rack wherein a shelf-supporting member is vertically
    adjustable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 243+ for vertically adjustable shelf or
    scaffold bracket structure.


CLS 211/191
TXT Device under subclass 190 wherein the framework is constructed of at least
    two connected sets of interconnected members each interconnected set
    including two vertically-disposed members and a horizontally-disposed
    member connected adjacent each of its two ends to one of the two vertical
    members, and one interconnected set being connected to a similar
    interconnected set spaced therefrom, whereby the horizontal members of two
    spaced sets of members form an article support, and wherein the horizontal
    members are repositionable in an up-and-down direction relative to their
    vertical members.

    (1)     Note.  In practice, one vertical upright may be a common support
    for a plurality of horizontal beams so that a plurality of interconnected
    sets may be connected together using fewer uprights than the number of
    interconnected sets.


CLS 211/192
TXT Devices under subclass 191 provided with element(s) separate and distinct
    from any of said members, which element(s) fasten the connected members one
    to another in the assembled framework, and which elements may be unfastened
    to permit disassembly of the framework.


CLS 211/193
TXT Device under subclass 190 wherein the article-supporting member is
    connected to the framework at only one end of said member and extends from
    the framework substantially perpendicular thereto.


CLS 211/194
TXT Device under subclass 189 provided with a plurality of article-supporting
    members, each of which members resembles the other(s), the members being
    arranged one above the other(s), and each member above the lowermost being
    supported on the member therebelow.

    (1)     Note.  The units may also be arranged in plural side-by-side
    vertical columns, or in staggered array wherein one unit is only partly
    over an underlying unit.

    (2)     Note.  The units may be interconnected by separate means that
    facilitate the stack arrangement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59.4,   for stacked articles having distinct separating structure there
    between.

    188,    for shelves including stacked similar units.


CLS 211/195
TXT Device under subclass 189 wherein the framework is erected to usable form
    by positioning framework members that were previously loosely connected and
    tightening the connection(s) between the members after they have been
    properly positioned, or wherein the framework is collapsed to space saving
    form by loosening connection(s) between the framework members and moving
    them together into a smaller space with the members still loosely connected
    together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     38, 85, 104+, 118, 130.1, 147, and 149, for other rack structure
    that is foldable or collapsible.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 460+ for a collapsible easel.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 871, and subclasses
    880+ for antenna structure on a foldable or collapsible frame or support.


CLS 211/196
TXT Device under subclass 195 wherein the framework includes a generally
    vertically-disposed member located approximately midway of the outward
    extremes of the framework, and further includes article-supporting elements
    extending outwardly of said member.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the article-supporting elements extend generally
    radially of the central member or lie in generally radial plane(s) relative
    to the central member, and the article-supporting elements approximately
    resemble a tree.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205,    for a rack having a central support to which article-supporting
    elements are secured.


CLS 211/197
TXT Device under subclass 196 wherein the article-supporting elements are
    pivotally connected to a ring component that surrounds and is slidably
    movable relative to the central member to facilitate the erecting and
    collapsing of the article-supporting elements.


CLS 211/198
TXT Device under subclass 195 wherein the framework includes two or more
    framework sections, each of which sections includes article-supporting
    element(s) and element-connecting members lying in a common plane
    surrounded by an edge or border and each of the sections resembling the
    other(s) in appearance and construction, which sections are connected each
    to the other(s) by an articulated connection located at a portion of the
    border of each section, whereby the sections meet one another along an axis
    of articulation common to all the sections.

    (1)     Note.  The framework taken as a whole resembles a letter "A" or
    letter "V" when it is viewed along the pivot axis.


CLS 211/199
TXT Device under subclass 198 wherein axis of articulation extends in an
    upright or generally vertically-disposed direction.


CLS 211/200
TXT Device under subclass 195 wherein the framework includes two or more
    framework sections, each of which sections includes article-supporting
    element(s) and element-connecting members lying in a common plane
    surrounded by an edge or border and each of the sections resembling the
    other(s) in appearance and construction, which sections are connected each
    to the other(s) by an articulated connection located within nonadjacent
    portions of the border of each section, whereby the sections intersect one
    another along an axis of articulation common to all the sections.

    (1)     Note.  The framework taken as a whole resembles a letter "X" when
    it is viewed along the pivot axis.


CLS 211/201
TXT Device under subclass 195 wherein the framework included two or more
    framework sections, each of which sections includes article-supporting
    elements and element-connecting members lying in a common plane, which
    sections are disposed in parallel relationship one with another, that is,
    the planes in which the sections lie are equidistant one from another at
    all corresponding points, and which sections are connected one to another
    so as permit movement relative to each other while maintaining their
    parallel relationship.


CLS 211/202
TXT Device under subclass 195 wherein the framework comprises a series of pairs
    of crossing members, each pair of members lying in a plane and being
    pivotally connected at approximately the midpoints of each of the members,
    each pair being pivotally connected to at least one adjacent pair of
    crossing members at approximately the extremities of adjacent members, and
    the pairs all lying in a common plane.

    (1)     Note.  The term "lazy-tong" is illustrated in some college
    dictionaries.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    for other lazy-tong rack structure.


CLS 211/203
TXT Device under subclass 195 wherein the framework includes at least three
    supporting members, one portion of each of the members meeting and being
    articulated at a connection common to all the members.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 168+ for a folding support having legs pivoted
    to a head.


CLS 211/204
TXT Device under subclass 195 wherein the framework includes at least one
    elongated, slender, horizontally-disposed, article-supporting element
    connected to an held by one or more vertically-disposed members.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is for a single upright from which a
    cantilevered arm extends, as well as for a pair of uprights between which a
    pole is supported.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193,    for a vertically adjustable cantilevered arm.

    206,    for a horizontal rod between uprights in a nonfoldable construction.


CLS 211/205
TXT Device under subclass 189 wherein the framework includes a generally
    vertically-disposed member located approximately midway of the outward
    extremes of the framework, and further includes article-supporting elements
    extending outwardly of said member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196,    for a foldable rack having a central support to which
    article-supporting elements are secured.


CLS 211/206
TXT Device under subclass 189 wherein the framework includes at least one
    elongated, slender, horizontally-disposed, article-supporting element
    connected to and held by at least two vertically-disposed members adjacent
    the opposite ends of said element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204,    for a foldable rack having a horizontal rod between uprights.


CLS 211/207
TXT Device under subclass 175 wherein the article-supporting element is
    repositionable within an element-supporting framework in an up-and-down
    direction to one of a plurality of usable positions.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass an article-supporting element is positioned
    manually in one of an infinitely variable (within the limits of vertical
    adjustment) positions, and is locked in place, usually by friction means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 157+ and 161+ for other vertically adjustable
    support structure.


CLS 211/208
TXT Device under subclass 207 wherein the element-supporting framework is
    provided with a pre-determined number of element-supporting stops, detents
    or apertures that cooperate with the article-supporting elements to
    position the elements in one of a finite number of up-and-down positions.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the positioning means includes a slidable pin
    receivable into one of a number of vertically spaced apertures.


CLS 211/209
TXT Device under subclass 207 wherein repositioning means includes a
    mechanical-advantage linkage or movement-converting system by which the
    article-supporting element is raised or lowered.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is a device using a hoist
    comprising a screw and nut arrangement wherein relative rotation of the
    elements produces a relative axial travel of the elements, and a device
    using a hoist comprising a cable trained over a pulley (or a plurality of
    pulleys).

    FOREIGN ART COLLECTIONS

    The definitions for FOR 100-FOR 107 below correspond to the definitions of
    the abolished subclasses under Class 211 from which these collections were
    formed. See the Foreign Art Collection schedule for specific
    correspondences. [Note: The titles and definitions for indented art
    collections include all the details of the one(s) that are hierarchically
    superior.]


CLS 211/FOR100
TXT  Devices designed to support receptacles.


CLS 211/FOR101
TXT  Devices which are designed to be attached or secured to a
    definite locus, as a wall, window, stovepipe, column, or suspended from a
    support.


CLS 211/FOR102
TXT  Devices designed to be mounted in or on or secured to a wall
    surface or to a window.


CLS 211/FOR103
TXT  Devices of the tray or receptacle type.


CLS 211/FOR104
TXT  Devices having means to grip the articles to be supported.


CLS 211/FOR105
TXT  Devices in which the article-supporting element is in the form of
    a shelf.


CLS 211/FOR106
TXT  Devices provided with a trackway or guideway upon which the
    article support is guided when moved.


CLS 211/FOR107
TXT  Racks which comprise horizontally spaced guides or tracks for
    article carrying bars, such as garment hangers, which are supported at each
    end by the guides and are movable therealong.


CLS 212/
TTL TRAVERSING HOISTS

CLS 212/
TXT Apparatus and methods for lifting a load and shifting it laterally by an
    elevating means applied through a support from which a load engager is
    suspended and including one of the following:



    (a)     A load engager freely suspended by a flexible member.

    (b)     A bridge* or a boom* on which a load-supporting trolley* is adapted
    to move to shift the load laterally.

    (c)     A trolley,* per se.

    (d)     A vertically swinging boom* claimed without regard to a
    self-loading or  unloading feature (e.g., a bucket, fork, or grab type load
    engager).

    (1)     Note.  Regarding part (d) above, apparatus having a vertically
    swinging boom comprised of relatively movable segments and disclosed as
    having a self-loading load engager (e.g., a backhoe or steam shovel) are
    self-loading apparatus and should be considered for Class 414, Material or
    Article Handling.  (Note, however, that in accordance with part (a), if the
    load engager is suspended by a flexible member, the apparatus is proper for
    Class 212).

    (2)     Note.  The "lateral shifting" criterion specified in the class
    definition requires more than merely supporting a hoist on a wheeled
    vehicle to render the hoist ambulant.  See search notes to Class 254 below.

    (3)     Note.  As indicated in the general search notes below, many classes
    provide for traversing hoists of specific application, which generally
    include but are not limited to those patents which claim load engager
    structure peculiar to the specified application.

    (4)     Note.  Class 212 is the residual locus for boom sluing or luffing
    apparatus and subcombinations thereof which are otherwise unprovided for.

    (5)     Note.  Subclasses 71 through 123, inclusive, were not screened
    during reclassification of the remaining subclasses.  Accordingly, those
    subclasses preceding subclass 71 will be found to contain all relevant
    patents except those claiming overhead hoists.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclass 87.1 for a traversing hoist having structure
    peculiarly adapted for the transfer of invalids to or from a bed.

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 115+ for traversing hoist-type excavators
    having specifically claimed ground-engaging (digging) structure.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 111+ for a rigid
    elongated member, a section of which is movable relative to another section
    or a base, and mechanical motive means to effect such movement; subclass
    632 for a passive, axially extensible elongated member; and subclasses 633+
    for the specific structure of an elongated rigid member, per se.  Class 212
    is the residual locus for combinations of a load-handler boom and a sluing
    or luffing mechanism therefor.  Class 212, subclasses 247+, contain patents
    to boom structure, per se, where structure peculiar to load handling is
    recited (e.g., cable guide, chafing strip, etc.).

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 163.1 for overhead crane trucks
    (trolleys). Hoisting means or structure peculiar thereto must be claimed
    for original placement in Class 212.

    114,    Ships, subclasses 365+ for life craft handling, particularly
    subclasses 368+ for a davit peculiarly adapted for lowering a life craft.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 76+ for
    cleaning apparatus of the Class 134 type claimed in combination with a
    traversing hoist to transfer the work.

    187     Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclasses 222+ for an industrial lift truck or required component thereof
    (e.g., forklift), and subclasses 240+ for transportable elevator.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 84+ for traversing jacks which lift a load from below and shift
    it laterally; subclasses 266+ for hoisting drum features; and subclasses
    389+ for cable guide structure.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 143.1 for ship-charging or
    discharging apparatus in the nature of a hoist line bucket; subclass 191
    for the charging of a chamber of a type utilized for a heating function by
    means of a driven device for transporting material to and/or into, or into
    and within, the chamber, and wherein the device comprises a traversing
    hoist having a material-underlying support or a material-attracting and
    gripping means; subclasses 391+ for the combination of a driven device
    external of a wheeled, load-transporting type vehicle for raising or
    lowering a load which is to be taken from the vehicle, and the vehicle
    being unloaded thereby; subclass 399 for the combination of a device
    external of a wheeled, load-transporting type vehicle for raising or
    lowering a load which is to be moved to the vehicle, and the vehicle being
    loaded thereby; subclasses 486+ for a self-loading or -unloading vehicle
    having a load-receiving portion which is pivotable relative to the
    horizontal, and wherein the vehicle has means to raise a load above said
    portion for deposit thereon or therein, by way of further explanation, a
    self-loading or unloading vehicle of that class (414) handles only a load
    being moved to or from the vehicle; subclasses 540+ for a self-loading or
    unloading vehicle having a load-handling means which raises or lowers a
    load in a path which includes vertical, rectilinear movement; subclasses
    560+ for traversing hoists combined with additional material-handling
    means; subclasses 564, 569, and 571 for hoists combined with additional
    material-handling means; subclass 591 for apparatus having a self-loading
    grasp suspended below a boom or bridge for guided vertical movement;
    subclasses 592+ for a hoist with loading or unloading means; and subclasses
    680+ for vertically swinging load supports.  Class 414 takes the following
    patents to apparatus having means to raise a load and shift it horizontally:

    (a)     Those which specifically claim a self-loading engager (e.g.,
    bucket, fork, grab, magnet, etc.) which is not suspended by a flaccid
    member.

    (b)     Those which disclose a self-loading engager only and claim a
    vertically swinging boom comprised of relatively movable segments.

    (c)     Those which claim the vehicle portion of a vehicle-mounted hoist
    which is disclosed solely for loading or unloading the vehicle, with the
    exception of those patents claiming means to facilitate assembly and
    disassembly of the traversing hoist from the vehicle (Class 212, subclasses
    180+).

    (d)     Those which claim a separate load-transporting vehicle which is to
    be loaded by the hoist (as disclosed).

    (e)     Those which are claimed in combination with additional handling
    means not of the Class 212 type.

    452,    Butchering, subclasses 79 and 178  for a handling device (e.g.,
    traversing hoist) which is peculiar to that art.

    483,    Tool Changing, generally for a process or apparatus including means
    to transfer a tool combined with tool support or storage means.



    GLOSSARY

    BOOM

    An elongated member protruding from a mast, crane body, trolley, or other
    supporting structure and from which the load is suspended.

    BRIDGE

    An elongated member supported horizontally at two spaced points and which
    either serves as or bears a track or guide between the supporting points on
    which a load-supporting trolley or a traveling bridge is adapted to move.

    TROLLEY

    A movable carriage adapted to shift a load laterally by moving along a
    track or other guiding means and which supports or guides a member from
    which the load is suspended.


CLS 212/71
TXT OVERHEAD:

    Miscellaneous traversing hoists under the class definition comprising means
    for raising a load from above and traversing it, either in a straight or
    curved line.

    (1)     Note.  In these instruments there is no means for shifting the load
    laterally in respect to the track or corresponding element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223+,   for hoists having a swinging movement about a fixed point.

    312+,   for hoists capable of moving the load in two directions by
    independent movements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 124 for elevated track details of general
    application.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 370+, particularly
    subclasses 390+ for a motor powered reeling device.


CLS 212/72
TXT Cable, ship coaling type:

    Linear hoists under subclass 71 comprising a cable supported at two points,
    the distance between which is subject to variations, a trolley traveling on
    the cable, and means for changing the elevation of the load.

    (1)     Note.  Devices fulfilling the requirements of the above definition,
    but comprising some feature whereby the load is transferred from the
    hoisting means to the carrying means are excluded, in accordance with the
    general scope of the class.  Similar devices comprising means for carrying
    or receiving the load, additional to the corresponding elements of the
    traversing hoist, are excluded.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclasses 112 and 180 for track and cable details.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 410+ for
    cable-tensioning devices adapted to cooperate with winding mechanism of
    general application.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 274 for apparatus for hauling or hoisting a load, the apparatus
    including a driven drum which pulls on or travels along a cable and a
    mechanism linked to the drum, or a rotating element of the drive for
    generating a control impulse to rotation-retarding means or motor when the
    torque on drum varies.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 6+ for
    tension-maintaining type electric motor control system.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, for various hoisting mechanisms
    combined with other article handling means, and particularly subclass 138
    for means to load or unload ships at sea.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclasses 80+ for ship to ship
    or ship to shore cables for transport of personnel therebetween.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, appropriate
    subclasses for drive systems using a belt and pulley, and particularly
    subclasses 101+ for belt-tensioning means.


CLS 212/73
TXT Shiftable track:

    Linear hoists under subclass 71 comprising miscellaneous shiftable tracks.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for linear hoists extending from ship to ship or from ship to shore.

    225+,   for horizontally swinging tracks.

    312+,   for tracks movable bodily in a direction at an angle to their
    length to transport the load.


CLS 212/74
TXT Longitudinally movable:

    Linear hoists under subclass 73 mounted to move bodily in the direction of
    their length.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 410+ for a cable
    tensioning device adapted to cooperate with winding mechanism of general
    application.


CLS 212/75
TXT Tilting:

    Miscellaneous linear hoists under subclass 73 comprising a track, either
    rigid or flexible, supported at two points, a trolley carriage or load
    adapted to move along the track but not beyond either track support, and
    means for elevating a portion of the track to cause the trolley or load to
    move along it by gravity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 53 for similar devices comprising some
    additional element specific to amusement purposes, and subclass 112 for
    similar devices comprising a trolley adapted to move beyond a track support.

    186,    Merchandising, subclasses 4+ for similar devices designed to
    operate within the limits of a building.


CLS 212/76
TXT Cable:

    Linear hoists under subclass 71 comprising a cable or cables operated from
    a fixed source of power for hoisting and transferring a load.

    (1)     Note.  If a track is used, it may be either rigid or flexible.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    186,    Merchandising, subclass 18 for similar devices designed to operate
    within the limits of a building.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.


CLS 212/77
TXT Load handling:

    Linear cable hoists under subclass 76 comprising some special means for
    receiving, engaging, gripping, discharging, or releasing a load.


CLS 212/78
TXT Draft rope:

    Load-handling hoists under subclass 77 comprising a tack, a carriage
    thereon, a hoisting machine fixed in relation to the track, and one or more
    cables extending from the hoisting machine to the carriage for hoisting and
    traversing the load, the latter being partly or wholly suspended during
    traversing movement from the hoisting means or the traversing means, or
    both.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87+     and 94+, for similar devices comprising no special means for
    receiving, engaging, gripping, discharging, or releasing the load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 394+ for traversing draft-rope hoists
    comprising some means for loading of filling a carrying bucket or scoop by
    moving it laterally through the material.


CLS 212/79
TXT Dumping:

    Draft-rope hoists under subclass 78 of the above type comprising a bucket
    or receptacle and means for dumping the load.


CLS 212/80
TXT Double tackle:

    Dumping draft-rope hoists under subclass 79 of the above type in which the
    receptacle is supported by two tackles or cables capable of relative
    movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     for similar devices for operating grab buckets and the like.


CLS 212/81
TXT Grab:

    Dumping draft-rope hoists under subclass 79 comprising some form of a grab,
    such as a clamshell bucket or grapple.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     for similar devices in which the grab is attached to the trolley
    during traversing movement.


CLS 212/82
TXT Sling:

    Dumping draft-rope hoists under subclass 79 comprising a sling carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85,     for similar devices in which the sling is attached to the trolley
    during traversing movement.


CLS 212/83
TXT Load suspension:

    Load-handling hoists under subclass 77 comprising a track, a carriage
    thereon, a hoisting machine fixed in respect to the track, and one or move
    cables extending from the hoisting machine to the carriage for hoisting and
    traversing the load, and means for supporting the load directly from the
    carriage during traversing movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97+,    for similar devices comprising no special means for receiving,
    engaging, gripping, discharging, or releasing the load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, appropriate subclasses for similar devices comprising
    means for filling a bucket by dragging it through the material.


CLS 212/84
TXT Grab:

    Linear Load-suspension cable hoists under subclass 83 comprising some form
    of grab, such as a clamshell bucket or grapple.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     for similar devices in which the load is not attached to the
    carriage during traversing movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 341, 182, and  461 for the structure of the
    bucket.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 86.4+ for the
    structure of the grapple.


CLS 212/85
TXT Sling:

    Linear cable load-handling hoist under subclass 83 of the load-suspension
    type comprising a sling carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     for similar devices in which the sling is not attached to the
    carriage during traversing movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 74+ and
    82.24+ for slings and releasing hooks, respectively.


CLS 212/86
TXT Automatic stop:

    Linear cable hoists under subclass 76 comprising means for automatically
    cutting out the power when the load has reached a predetermined position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281,    for traversing hoists having a hoisting cable which is
    automatically stopped when the load reaches a predetermined height.

    329,    for a self-propelled hoisting trolley which is automatically
    stopped while traversing.


CLS 212/87
TXT Draft-rope, hoist-rope traverse:

    Hoists under subclass 76 comprising a track, a carriage thereon, a hoisting
    machine fixed in relation to the track, a hoisting cable extending from the
    hoisting machine to the carriage for hoisting the load and traversing the
    carriage in one direction, the load being partly or wholly suspended during
    traversing movement from the hoisting means, and elements thereof not
    elsewhere classifiable.


CLS 212/88
TXT Divided hoist-rope:

    Linear cable hoists under subclass 87 of the draft-rope, hoist-rope type,
    comprising a track, a carriage thereon, and a hoist-rope consisting of two
    sections, one extending toward each end of the track, which serves to
    traverse the load in both directions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89,     for similar devices in which the hoist-rope is arranged to
    positively lower the hook or block.


CLS 212/89
TXT Hook lowering:

    Hoist-rope traverse devices under subclass 87 of the above type in which
    there is some means other than the weight of the parts themselves for
    lowering the end of the hoisting rope or for lowering the fall-block at the
    loading or unloading point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     for similar devices in which the trolley is moved in both
    directions by a cable other than the hoisting cable.

    99,     for similar devices comprising a traveling drum, an endless cable
    for rotating the drum, and a clutch between the cable and drum.


CLS 212/90
TXT Running track:

    Hoist-rope traverse systems under subclass 87 which include a carriage and
    a track therefore, the track serving also as means for traversing the
    carriage in one direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for cable hoists comprising a track, a trolley or load thereon, and
    means for raising a portion of the track to cause the trolley or load to be
    moved along it by gravity, and classes indicated in the search notes under
    subclass 75.


CLS 212/91
TXT Cable return:

    Draft-rope linear cable-hoist systems under subclass 87 comprising a
    carriage, a hoisting cable which moves the carriage along its track in one
    direction, and a cable, not a hoisting cable, for moving it in the opposite
    direction.


CLS 212/92
TXT Gravity return:

    Systems of the type set forth in subclass 87 in which the hoisting rope
    moves the carriage in one direction, it being returned by gravity.


CLS 212/93
TXT Cable:

    Systems of the type set forth in subclass 92 comprising a carriage, a
    hoisting cable which moves the carriage in one direction, and a
    gravity-actuated cable for moving it in the opposite direction.


CLS 212/94
TXT Draft rope, independent traverse:

    Linear cable-hoists under subclass 76 comprising a track, a carriage
    thereon, a hoisting machine fixed in relation to the track, a hoisting
    cable extending from the hoisting machine to the carriage, and means
    separate from the hoisting cable for traversing the carriage in both
    directions, the load being partly, or wholly suspended during traversing
    movement from the hoisting means.


CLS 212/95
TXT Anchored hoist-rope:

    Systems of the type set forth in subclass 94 comprising a hoist-rope, one
    end of which is anchored at some fixed point.


CLS 212/96
TXT Hook lowering:

    Draft-rope systems of the type set forth in subclass 94 comprising some
    means other than the weight of the parts themselves for lowering the end of
    the hoisting cable or for lowering the fall-block at the loading or
    unloading point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89,     for similar devices in which the trolley is moved in one direction
    by the hoisting cable.

    99,     for similar devices comprising a traveling drum, an endless cable
    for operating the drum, and a clutch between the cable and drum.


CLS 212/97
TXT Load suspension:

    Linear cable hoists under subclass 76 comprising a track, a carriage
    thereon, a hoisting machine fixed in relation to the track, and one or more
    cables extending from the hoisting machine to the carriage for hoisting and
    traversing the load, and means for supporting the load directly from the
    carriage during traversing movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323,    for a traveling bridge having a hoisting motor fixed in relation to
    a track along which a trolley traverses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 61+ for similar devices particularly
    adapted to shift illuminating devices.


CLS 212/98
TXT Hoist, carry and lower:

    Miscellaneous linear cable load-suspension hoists under subclass 97 which
    hoist the load, automatically secure it to a carriage, traverse the
    carriage, and detach the load from the carriage at a second point, thereby
    allowing it to be lowered by slacking the hoist-rope.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110+,   for similar devices in which the hoisting rope is secured to the
    carriage by a rope-gripping device.

    115,    for similar devices comprising a traveling drum or sheave, around
    which the hoisting rope passes, and a pawl and ratchet cooperating
    therewith.


CLS 212/99
TXT Running rope:

    Linear hoists under subclass 97 comprising a hoisting carriage, a track,
    and endless running flexible member, and a clutch mounted on the carriage
    for intermittently connecting the  running member with a member carried by
    the carriage to effect the hoisting of the load or to traverse the carriage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89      and 96, for similar devices in which the endless flexible member is
    permanently connected with the hoisting member.

    115,    for similar devices comprising a ratchet mechanism for suspending
    the load from the carriage during traversing movement.

    312+,   for traveling cranes comprising similar hoists.


CLS 212/100
TXT Sheave catch:

    Load-suspension carriers under subclass 97 comprising a catch on the
    carriage for engaging directly with and wholly or partly supporting the
    sheave of a block and tackle hoisting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102+,   for similar devices which engage with the frame of the hoisting
    sheave.


CLS 212/101
TXT Pivoted cable extension:

    Sheave-catch carriers under subclass 100 comprising a catch consisting of
    an extension or continuation of the hoisting cable, which extension is
    pivoted to the carriage and upon which the sheave rests while the load is
    being traversed.


CLS 212/102
TXT Sheave-frame catch:

    Load-suspension carriers under subclass 97 comprising a catch on the
    carriage for engaging with the sheave frame of a block and tackle hoisting
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100+,   for suspending devices which engage directly with the sheave.


CLS 212/103
TXT Sliding:

    Sheave-frame catch carriers under subclass 102, each comprising a catch
    which has a sliding movement to engage with and wholly or partly support
    the sheave frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for similar devices comprising a sliding catch which supports the
    load by means of a button or stop on the hoisting cable or by engagement
    with a link of the hoisting chain.


CLS 212/104
TXT Pivoted:

    Sheave-frame catch carriers under subclass 102 comprising a catch which has
    a swinging movement to engage with and wholly or partly support the sheave
    frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97,     for pivoted catches which hold the sheave frame on a support, but
    do not themselves bear whole or part of the weight.

    108,    for similar catches which engage with a stop or button on the
    hoist-rope.


CLS 212/105
TXT Double:

    Sheave-frame catch carriers under subclass 104 comprising two movable
    pivoted parts, acting in opposition to each other, for engaging with and
    supporting the sheave frame or for retaining the sheave frame upon some
    other support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    for similar devices which engage directly with the sheave.

    109,    for similar devices which engage with a stop or button on the
    hoisting rope.


CLS 212/106
TXT Rope catch:

    Load-suspension carriers under subclass 97 comprising a traveling carriage,
    a hoisting cable or chain, a stop, button, or the like, mounted thereon or
    forming a part thereof, and means on the carriage for engaging with and
    supporting the stop or button.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110+,   for similar devices in which the rope is held by being gripped by
    the suspending means.


CLS 212/107
TXT Sliding:

    Rope-catch carriers under subclass 106 comprising a catch which has a
    sliding movement to and from supporting position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for similar catches which engage with the frame of the hoisting
    sheave.


CLS 212/108
TXT Pivoted:

    Rope-catch carriers under subclass 106 comprising a single pivoted catch
    for supporting the rope stop.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for similar catches which engage with the frame of a hoisting
    sheave.


CLS 212/109
TXT Double:

    Rope-catch carriers under subclass 108 comprising two pivoted catches which
    move to supporting position from opposite sides of the hoisting rope.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    for similar devices which engage with a sheave.

    105,    for similar devices which engage with a sheave frame.


CLS 212/110
TXT Rope grip:

    Traversing cable hoists under subclass 97 comprising a traveling carriage,
    a hoisting rope, and means on the carriage for gripping the rope to support
    the load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 115+ for rope grips of
    general application.


CLS 212/111
TXT Variable elevation:

    Rope-grip carriers under subclass 110 in which the hoisting rope may be
    gripped to the carriage at different elevations of the load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for variable elevation rope-gripping devices which consists in a
    member adapted to press against a sheave on the moving carriage.


CLS 212/112
TXT Carriage release:

    Miscellaneous rope-grip variable elevation carriers under subclass 111
    comprising means, usually manually operated, for releasing the carriage
    from a stop on the track and simultaneously causing the setting of the rope
    grip.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for similar devices in which the rope is gripped by some member
    which coacts with and presses against the surface of a sheave.


CLS 212/113
TXT Side draft:

    Variable elevation rope-grip hoists under subclass 111 comprising means
    independent of the hoisting cable for traversing the hoisting carriage.
    The hoist-rope during the hoisting operation extends at or about right
    angles to the track.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87+     and 94+, for draft-rope systems comprising particular arrangements
    of hoisting and traversing cables.


CLS 212/114
TXT Coacting sheave:

    Rope-grip carriers under subclass 110 including a traveling carriage, a
    sheave thereon, and means acting directly on the sheave to grip the
    hoisting rope between it and the sheave.


CLS 212/115
TXT Ratchet sheave:

    Cable hoists under subclass 97 including a carriage, a hoisting rope
    passing over a sheave or drum thereon, and a ratchet mechanism interposed
    between the drum or sheave and the carriage, and wholly supporting the load
    from the carriage during traversing movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99,     for similar devices comprising an endless operating cable passing
    over a drum on the trolley, a hoisting rope connected with the drum, and a
    clutch mechanism interposed between the operating cable and the hoisting
    cable.

    114,    for similar devices comprising a pivoted member which presses the
    hoisting rope against a sheave and thereby prevents motion in one direction.


CLS 212/116
TXT Trips, stops, and knockers:

    Details of the knocker blocks, stops, and trips under subclass 97 which are
    used in load-suspension cable hoists for the purpose of tripping the
    load-suspending means and allowing the load-hook or support to be detached
    from the carriage.  They also usually hold the carriage in a fixed position
    on the track until the next load is hoisted and attached to the carriage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83+     and 97+, for load suspension cable hoists having some special means
    for receiving, engaging, gripping, discharging, or releasing a load.


CLS 212/117
TXT Rope carriers:

    Carriers under subclass 76, for supporting carriage-moving or load-hoisting
    ropes of linear cable hoists to prevent excessive sag between the ends
    thereof.


CLS 212/118
TXT Cable stop operated:

    Rope carriers under subclass 117 which are placed in carrying position
    partly through contact with a stop or button fixed on a cable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 115+ for cable stops,
    per se.


CLS 212/119
TXT Trolley supported:

    Rope carriers under subclass 117 normally carried by the hoisting carriage
    or trolley and which are disengaged therefrom by means mounted on the
    carriage itself, said means being operated by the movement of the carriage
    along the track.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118,    for similar devices in which the carrier is disengaged from the
    trolley by a cable stop or button.


CLS 212/120
TXT Carrier sheave operated:

    Rope carriers under subclass 117 which are placed in position by the
    coaction of a traveling rope and a sheave on the carrier.


CLS 212/121
TXT Permanently spaced:

    Rope carriers under subclass 117 permanently located at fixed points along
    the line of the trackway.


CLS 212/122
TXT Carriage holders, track clamp:

    Devices under subclass 76 comprising a clamp for gripping the track which
    secure a hoisting carriage of a cable hoist in a fixed position during
    hoisting or lowering operation and thereafter release it for traveling
    movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78+,    83+, 87+, 94+, and 97+, for this type of carriage holder in
    combination with other elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 43 and 44 for track-clamping devices of general
    application.


CLS 212/123
TXT Pulley changes:

    Details of cable hoists under subclass 76 comprising a track, a pulley,
    pulley supports at two points along the track, and means for changing or
    shifting the pulley from one support to the other.


CLS 212/166
TXT CLOSURE REMOVER:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising means specifically adapted
    for raising a door or other closure from above and shifting it laterally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 210 and 324+ for a hoist
    permanently attached to the closure.

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 176 for a door or cover lifter claimed in
    combination with a furnace or soaking pit.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclasses 262+ for door or closure
    lifters claimed in combination with coke ovens.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 684.3 for door removers
    which include a vertically swinging door-supporting member.


CLS 212/167
TXT WITH HAUL-IN LINE:

    Apparatus under the class definition wherein an elongated flexible means is
    provided in addition to the load-supporting flexible member for pulling the
    load horizontally across a supporting surface to the vicinity of the load
    support, the load contacting the supporting surface as it is pulled to the
    load support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handing, subclass 538 for a self-loading
    vehicle provided with a cable for hauling the load to the vehicle; subclass
    569 for a self-loading, vertically swinging load support combined with a
    hoist or a drag line to hoist or drag the load to the vicinity of the
    vertically swinging load support; and subclass 571 for a guideway and a
    cable for hauling a load along the guideway.


CLS 212/168
TXT AND MEANS TO PROJECT LOAD ENGAGER BEYOND END OF BOOM:

    Apparatus under the class definition wherein means are provided for
    propelling or positioning a load-engaging means suspended by flexible cable
    beneath a boom* outwardly from its position under the boom toward the load.


CLS 212/169
TXT GROUND WHEEL OPERATED:

    Apparatus under the class definition including a wheel which is caused to
    contact a surface upon which the apparatus is supported and which rotates
    in response to movement of the apparatus across the surface, and wherein
    power transmission means is provided to utilize the wheel's rotational
    motion to operate the hoist (e.g., hoisting drum, boom*, trolley*, etc.).


CLS 212/170
TXT HAVING CLUTCH OR VARIABLE SPEED TRANSMISSION:

    Apparatus under the class definition including either (a) a selectively
    engageable drive between a motor and a load moving mechanism adapted to be
    driven by the motor, or (b) means to vary the ratio of the speed at the
    output of a motor to the speed at which a load-moving mechanism is driven
    by the motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    276+,   for a clutch combined with means to disengage the clutch in
    response to a predetermined randomly occurring condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Push ing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 301, 309, 317+, 346+, and 365+ for hoist having a clutch.


CLS 212/171
TXT Traveling bridge:

    Apparatus under subclass 170 comprising a bridge* supported above a surface
    for translational movement over the surface, and wherein the selectively
    engageable coupling or ratio varying means is provided between a motor and
    a mechanism for driving the bridge or a mechanism thereof.


CLS 212/172
TXT Power takeoff:

    Apparatus under subclass 170 comprising a selectively engageable drive
    connection between the motor of a motor-driven vehicle and a load-moving
    mechanism of a traversing hoist.


CLS 212/173
TXT Variable speed transmission:

    Apparatus under subclass 170 including means to vary the ratio of the speed
    at the output of a motor to the speed at which a load moving mechanism is
    driven by the motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 187.6 for hoisting drums having a variable speed drive.


CLS 212/174
TXT Including means to selectively couple plural hoist functions to common
    power shaft:

    Apparatus under subclass 170 including means by which the working member of
    a motor may be engaged and disengaged with each of a plurality of
    load-moving mechanisms.


CLS 212/175
TXT HAVING MEANS FACILITATING ASSEMBLY OR DISASSEMBLY:

    Apparatus under the class definition including means to permit the ready
    removal or replacement of either (a) an element or subassembly of the
    apparatus from or on the remainder thereof, or (b) the entire traversing
    hoist from or on a supporting structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 686 for a self-loading
    (e.g., shovel or fork type) handler having means to facilitate attachment
    of a vertically swinging boom* to a vehicle.


CLS 212/176
TXT Of sectional vertical support from boom:

    Apparatus under subclass 175 including an elongated vertically disposed
    boom* support comprising a plurality of serially arranged segments
    connected longitudinally in end-to-end fashion, and wherein the connections
    between the segments permit the ready assembly or disassembly of one
    segment to or from another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199+,   for climbing cranes wherein the vertical support comprises a
    building being erected by the crane.


CLS 212/177
TXT Of boom sections:

    Apparatus under subclass 175 including a boom* having means to permit the
    ready removal or replacement of a portion of the boom from another portion.

    (1)     Note.  Removal of a connector or locking means between boom
    sections to enable the sections to be pivoted or telescoped relative to
    each other is not considered to be disassembly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    299+,   for foldable or collapsible booms.


CLS 212/178
TXT Of counterweight from hoist:

    Apparatus under subclass 175 including a mass specifically employed to
    offset the weight of the load and means to permit the ready removal or
    replacement of the mass from or on the load support.


CLS 212/179
TXT Of traversing hoist from support:

    Apparatus under subclass 175 including means to permit the ready removal or
    replacement of a traversing hoist from or on a supporting structure.


CLS 212/180
TXT Vehicle support:

    Apparatus under subclass 179 wherein the supporting structure is provided
    with ground-engaging means to render it ambulant.


CLS 212/181
TXT And having motor to swing boom:

    Apparatus under subclass 180 having a pivotally mounted boom* and power
    means to pivot the boom.


CLS 212/195
TXT HAVING COUNTERWEIGHT OR COUNTERBALANCING MEANS:

    Apparatus under the class definition including (a) a mass specifically
    employed to offset the weight of the load, or (b) a dynamic device for
    exerting a force in opposition to that exerted by the load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    178,    for apparatus having a removable counterweight.

    279,    for apparatus having means to regulate (e.g., position) a
    counterweight or counterbalancing means in response to a sensed condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 266+ for nontraversing hoists having a counterbalance feature.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 673 and 719 for
    counterweight features for other load handlers.


CLS 212/196
TXT Counterweight movable relative to load support:

    Apparatus under subclass 195 wherein the mass is mounted for movement with
    respect to the load support (e.g., boom*) to compensate for varying tilting
    effects of the load on the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  Pivotal movement of a boom with respect to a base carrying a
    stationary counterweight will not in itself cause classification in this
    subclass.  The counterweight itself must be moved relative to its
    supporting structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    279,    for apparatus having means to move a counterweight in response to a
    sensed condition.


CLS 212/197
TXT Along rectilinear path:

    Apparatus under subclass 196 wherein the mass is mounted for movement along
    a straight line with respect to the support above the load.


CLS 212/198
TXT On wheeled carriage:

    Apparatus under subclass 197 wherein the mass is either provided with
    wheels or is carried by a wheeled vehicle, and is adapted to travel along a
    guideway provided with the apparatus.


CLS 212/199
TXT HAVING BOOM SHIFTABLE VERTICALLY ALONG A LINEAR PATH:

    Apparatus under the class definition Including a boom* and structure
    supporting the boom which permits up or down translational movement of the
    entire boom along a rectilinear path.

    (1)     Note.  A boom movable along its longitudinal axis to change its
    effective length (i.e., moment arm) is not considered to be a vertically
    shifting boom on that basis alone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176+,   for booms which are moved vertically on a support comprised of
    longitudinal sections connected end-to-end.

    179,    for hoists which are moved vertically by selective assembly of the
    hoist at different heights on a separate structure (e.g., building, pole,
    etc.).

    230+,   for a horizontally swinging boom which is movable along its
    longitudinal axis relative to a support to increase its effective length.

    295+,   for a vertically extending boom support which is collapsed into a
    transport or nonuse position.

    317,    for a vertically shiftable traveling bridge*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 385+ for other vertically adjustable derricks which have no
    means for traversing the load.


CLS 212/200
TXT Movable along nonvertical rectilinear path:

    Apparatus under subclass 199 wherein the boom* is mounted for movement
    along an inclined path and the up and down movement of the boom is the
    vertical component of motion along the inclined path.


CLS 212/201
TXT Length of hoisting cable between boom and load decreases automatically as
    boom is raised:

    Apparatus under subclass 199 wherein the load is suspended beneath the
    boom* by an elongated flaccid strand and means are provided whereby the
    strand is drawn in toward the boom as the boom moves upwardly.


CLS 212/202
TXT Vertically spaced fastening means along boom support:

    Apparatus under subclass 199 wherein the structure supporting the boom* is
    provided with a plurality of securing means spaced vertically along the
    structure whereby the boom is supported at a selected one of a plurality of
    positions on the support.


CLS 212/203
TXT Fluid actuated:

    Apparatus under subclass 199 wherein means are provided to move the boom*
    up or down relative to its support by application of a liquid or gas under
    pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 93+ for fluid-actuating jacks.


CLS 212/204
TXT By mounting on vertically extensible support:

    Apparatus under subclass 199 wherein the structure supporting the boom*
    comprises a plurality of interconnected segments movable longitudinally
    with respect to one another to increase the length of the support and
    thereby raise the boom supported thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    296,    for a boom support comprising a plurality of telescoping segments
    and which is collapsible to a nonuse position.


CLS 212/223
TXT HAVING HORIZONTALLY SWINGING BOOM OR BRIDGE:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising a boom* or a bridge* which
    is mounted to a support for movement about a vertical axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280,    for means to stop the horizontal rotation of a boom as a result of
    its movement beyond a predetermined point or its proximity to a powerline.

    286,    for apparatus including means to cyclically reverse the direction
    of boom rotation.

    317,    for a traveling bridge having a horizontally swinging boom.

    347,    for traversing hoist boom structure, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 114 for miscellaneous
    elongated members which are moved about an axis normal to a supporting base
    by mechanical motive means.  A horizontally rotatable boom is classified in
    Class 212 when disclosed as traversing hoist structure.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 591 for a horizontally
    swinging boom from which is suspended a grab mounted for guided vertical
    movement; and subclass 744.1 for a horizontally swinging load support
    having no means to raise the load.


CLS 212/224
TXT Boom mounted for guided horizontal translation (e.g., trolley mounted):

    Apparatus under subclass 223 comprising a boom* and means on the boom or
    the boom support for engaging a guideway whereby the boom translates along
    the guideway.

    (1)     Note.  The guideway must be of a discrete length, i.e., a railway
    car having a boom thereon is classified below as an ambulant apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249,    for other ambulant horizontally swinging booms.

    317,    for a horizontally swinging boom carried on a trolley which in turn
    moves along a traveling bridge.


CLS 212/225
TXT Having trolley thereon:

    Apparatus under subclass 223 comprising a bridge* or a boom* having a track
    or guideway along which a load-supporting trolley* is adapted to move.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71+,    for an overhead hoist having a trolley, or a trolley, per se.

    242,    for a trolley carried by a vertically swinging boom.

    312+,   for a trolley carried by a traveling bridge.


CLS 212/226
TXT Having vertical support remote from pivot (i.e., swinging bridge):

    Apparatus under subclass 225 including a bridge* pivotally mounted for
    horizontally swinging movement at one of the two spaced supporting points,
    and wherein the other supporting point either (a) rides over a horizontally
    extending vertical support, or (b) comprises a leg fixed to the bridge at
    one end and is provided with means to facilitate its movement over a
    surface or guideway at the other end.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312+,   for a traveling bridge which follows a circular path.


CLS 212/227
TXT And vertically swinging:

    Apparatus under subclass 225 wherein the boom* or bridge* is also capable
    of pivotal movement about a horizontal axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257,    for a trolley carried by a boom which swings only vertically.


CLS 212/228
TXT And means acting independently of hoist mechanism to shift trolley:

    Apparatus under subclass 225 including means other than load-lifting means
    for moving the trolley* along the guideway.


CLS 212/230
TXT Extensible by movement of boom or boom segment along longitudinal axis
    thereof:

    Apparatus under subclass 223 including a horizontally swinging boom* and
    wherein either (a) means are provided which permits translational movement
    of the boom along its longitudinal axis and relative to the boom-supporting
    structure, or (b) the boom consists of a plurality of interconnected
    segments slidably related to one another whereby the effective length of
    the boom may be changed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264,    for a vertically swinging extensible boom.

    299+,   for booms or masts which are collapsible for transport or storage.

    348+,   for extensible boom structure, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 111+ for other
    extensible shaft structure combined with mechanical motive means to extend
    the shaft; and subclass 632 for an axially extensible shaft, per se.


CLS 212/231
TXT And vertically swinging:

    Apparatus under subclass 230 wherein the boom* is also capable of pivotal
    movement about a horizontal axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168,    for a boom extension which is employed to project a grab beyond the
    edge of the boom but is retracted before the load is lifted.

    264,    for an extensible boom claimed as being swingable only in a
    vertical plane.

    296,    for an extensible boom supporting tower which is pivoted vertically
    to a horizontal position for transportation but remains vertical during use.

    300,    for a vertically swinging boom having sections which are pivoted
    together for collapsing the boom to a transport or nonuse position.


CLS 212/232
TXT And vertically swinging:

    Apparatus under subclass 223 wherein the boom* is also capable of pivotal
    movement about a horizontal axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225+,   for apparatus having a boom claimed as being swingable about a
    horizontal axis only.

    310,    for a ship mounted horizontally and vertically swinging boom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 120+ for a load-lifting lever.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 687+ for a shovel or fork
    type load handler having a boom swingable horizontally and vertically.


CLS 212/233
TXT Plural booms:

    Apparatus under subclass 232 including second boom* mounted for movement
    about vertical and horizontal axes and having its own load engager or
    flexible member suspended therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  Flexible members of the first and second booms may support a
    common load or load handler.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    311,    for plural, ship-mounted horizontally and vertically swinging,
    cable-actuated booms.


CLS 212/234
TXT With adjacent load-supporting rack:

    Apparatus under subclass 232 wherein a supporting means is provided
    adjacent the boom* and adapted to receive the load therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article handling, subclass 496 for self-loading
    vehicles having transversing hoists; and subclasses 446, 498, and 608 for
    material handlers having a separable load-supporting rack.


CLS 212/235
TXT Including means for sluing boom as it is swung vertically:

    Apparatus under subclass 232 wherein means are provided for simultaneously
    swinging the boom* about a vertical axis in response to the boom's movement
    about a horizontal axis.


CLS 212/236
TXT Including plural actuating means converging toward boom tip to effect both
    horizontal and vertical swinging:

    Apparatus under subclass 232 including two elongated members, each of which
    engages the boom* adjacent the point from which the load is suspended, and
    diverges to engage either the boom support or points fixed relative
    thereto, wherein means are provided to selectively change the length of the
    members to pivot the boom about both horizontal and vertical axes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310+,   for a ship-mounted derrick swung horizontally and vertically by
    flexible cables.


CLS 212/237
TXT Including means to swing boom vertically:

    Apparatus under subclass 232 including a motor, power transmission, or a
    force multiplying linkage for swinging the boom* about a horizontal axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    260,    for means to swing a boom vertically, with no horizontal swinging
    claimed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 116+ for an
    elongated rigid member movable relative to a supporting base and mechanical
    motive means for applying power to affect such movement.


CLS 212/238
TXT Fluid-actuated ram:

    Apparatus under subclass 237 wherein the motor comprises a relatively
    reciprocating piston and cylinder actuated by fluid pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261,    for a fluid-actuated vertically swinging boom where no horizontal
    swinging is claimed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 115 for miscellaneous
    elongated members which are pivoted relative to a supporting base by a
    fluid pressure actuated mechanism.


CLS 212/239
TXT Flexible cable:

    Apparatus under subclass 237 wherein the means for swinging the boom*
    vertically includes a greatly elongated strand of flaccid material.


CLS 212/240
TXT Having passage for luffing cable through boom supporting member:

    Apparatus under subclass 239 wherein the support on which the boom* is
    swingably mounted is provided with a passageway through which the strand
    passes to swing the boom vertically.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252,    for a boom support having a passage for a hoist cable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 389+ for hoisting cable guides.


CLS 212/241
TXT Human or animal powered:

    Apparatus under subclass 239 wherein means are provided by which a person
    or animal may apply a force to the strand of flaccid material to swing the
    boom vertically.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249,    for a human- or animal-powered horizontally swinging boom.

    263,    for a human- or animal-powered vertically swinging boom.


CLS 212/242
TXT Having specific engager for load:

    Apparatus under subclass 232 wherein significance is attributed to a
    particular device for engaging and retaining the load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251,    for a horizontally swinging boom having a specific type load
    handler.

    259,    for a vertically swinging boom with a specific type of load handler.

    326,    for a gantry having a specific type load handler.

    327,    for a traveling bridge having a specific type of load handler.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, appropriate subclasses
    for a specific load engager, per se.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, appropriate subclasses for handlers
    of that class having specific types of load engagers; particularly
    subclasses 186, 225+, 618+, 729+, 751+, and 792.9 for grippers or grabs;
    and subclasses 444+ and 785 for load engager structure in general.


CLS 212/243
TXT Grab:

    Apparatus under subclass 242 wherein the load handler comprises a plurality
    of relatively movable members for gripping the load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, appropriate subclasses
    for a grab, per se.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 186, 225+, 618+, 729+,
    751+, and 792.9 for handlers of that class having a gripper or grab (e.g.,
    load-handling apparatus having a swinging boom* and a grab directly
    connected to the boom, rather than by a cable).


CLS 212/245
TXT And means to swing boom horizontally:

    Apparatus under subclass 223 including a motor, power transmission, or
    force multiplying linkage to move the boom* about a vertical axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    276+,   for a motor for swinging a boom horizontally and which is activated
    or regulated in response to a sensed random condition.

    280,    for a motor for swinging a boom horizontally which is stopped or
    disable in response to a sensed random condition.

    284+,   for means, such as a switch or valve, for manually or cyclically
    controlling the flow of energy to a sluing motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 114 for miscellaneous
    elongated members which are moved about an axis normal to a supporting base
    by mechanical motive means.  A horizontally rotatable boom is classified in
    Class 212 when disclosed as traversing hoist structure.


CLS 212/246
TXT Including flexible member driving gear or pulley having axis collinear with
    boom pivot:

    Apparatus under subclass 245 including a member of flaccid material which
    partially encircles a disc or annular member having an axis of rotation on
    a vertical line defining the axis about which the boom* swings, and means
    are provided to engage and drive the endless or elongated member whereby
    the boom is swung horizontally about said axis.


CLS 212/247
TXT Gear drive:

    Apparatus under subclass 245 wherein the means to swing the boom*
    horizontally comprises a power transmission which includes a disc or
    annular member having a tooth surface which is interdigitated with a second
    toothed member whereby movement of one of the members causes movement of
    the other member.


CLS 212/248
TXT Including rack or worm:

    Apparatus under subclass 247 wherein the second toothed member comprises
    either (a) a rectangular member having teeth formed across a longitudinal
    face and which is reciprocated to cause rotation of the disc or annular
    member, or (b) an elongated cylindrical member having helical teeth on its
    periphery and which is rotated about its longitudinal axis to cause
    rotation of the disc or annular member.


CLS 212/249
TXT Human or animal powered:

    Apparatus under subclass 245 wherein means are provided by which a person
    or animal may apply a force to swing the boom* horizontally.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241,    for a horizontally and vertically swinging boom having means by
    which a person or animal may swing the boom vertically.

    263,    for a human or animal powered vertically swinging boom.


CLS 212/250
TXT Having fluid ram directly actuating load cable or sheave therefor:

    Apparatus under subclass 223 including a relatively reciprocating piston
    and cylinder which are actuated by fluid pressure and are employed to lift
    the load by directly connecting the piston or cylinder to either the
    flexible member or a pulley about which the flexible member is entrained.


CLS 212/251
TXT Having specific engager for load:

    Apparatus under subclass 223 wherein significance is attributed to a
    particular device for engaging and retaining the load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242,    for a horizontally and vertically swinging boom having a specific
    type of load handler.

    259,    for a vertically swinging boom having a specific type of load
    handler.

    326,    for a gantry having a specific type of load handler.

    327,    for a traveling bridge having a specific type of load handler.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, appropriate subclasses
    for a specific load engager, per se.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, appropriate subclasses for handlers
    of that class having specific types of load engagers; particularly
    subclasses 186, 225+, 618+, 729+, 751+, and 792.9 for grippers or grabs;
    and subclasses 444+ and 785 for load engager structure in general.


CLS 212/252
TXT Having passage for hoist cable through boom supporting members:

    Apparatus under subclass 223 provided with an elongated strand of flaccid
    material which is drawn in or payed out to raise or lower the load with
    respect to the boom*, and wherein the support on which the boom is
    swingably mounted is provided with a passageway through which the strand
    passes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240,    for a boom support having a passage for a luffing cable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 389+ for hoisting cable guides.


CLS 212/253
TXT Having specific bearing structure:

    Apparatus under subclass 223 wherein significance is attributed to that
    structure at or adjacent the immediate area of contact between the boom*
    and the support on which the boom is swingably mounted.


CLS 212/255
TXT HAVING VERTICALLY SWINGING BOOM:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising an elongated member pivoted
    for movement about a horizontal axis to a mast, crane body, trolley*, or
    other supporting structure and projecting therefrom to support or guide a
    flexible member from which the load is suspended.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232+,   for a vertically swinging boom which is additionally mounted for
    horizontal movement.

    299,    for apparatus provided with specific means which allows the boom to
    collapse to a position for transport or storage.

    317,    for a bridge-mounted trolley having a vertically swinging boom
    thereon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclasses 373+ for similar devices for raising and lowering
    boats.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 680+ for residual
    vertically swinging load supports.


CLS 212/256
TXT And compensating means to maintain horizontal movement of load:

    Apparatus under subclass 255 wherein means are provided to keep the load at
    the same vertical distance above a surface as it is moved across the
    surface by the vertically swinging boom*.


CLS 212/257
TXT And trolley:

    Apparatus under subclass 255 wherein the vertically swinging boom* serves
    as or bears a separate track or guide on which a load-supporting trolley*
    is adapted to move.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225+,   for a horizontally and vertically swinging boom having a trolley
    thereon.

    346+,   for trolley structure, per se.


CLS 212/258
TXT Protruding laterally from vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 255 wherein the boom* is pivotally carried on a
    vehicle for swinging movement in a vertical plane which is substantially
    perpendicular to the direction in which the vehicle normally moves.


CLS 212/259
TXT Having specific engager load:

    Apparatus under subclass 255 wherein significance is attributed to a
    particular device for engaging and retaining the load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242,    for a horizontally and vertically swinging boom* having a specific
    type of load handler.

    251,    for a horizontally swinging boom having a specific type of load
    handler.

    326,    for a gantry having a specific type of load handler.

    327,    for a traveling bridge* having a specific type of load handler.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, appropriate subclasses
    for a specific load engager, per se.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, appropriate subclasses for handlers
    of that class having specific types of load engagers; particularly
    subclasses 186, 225+, 618+, 729+, 751+, and 792.9 for grippers or grabs;
    and subclasses 444+ and 785 for load engager structure in general.


CLS 212/260
TXT Having means to swing boom vertically:

    Apparatus under subclass 255 including a motor, power transmission, or a
    force multiplying linkage for swinging the boom* about a horizontal axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237+,   for a horizontally and vertically swinging boom and including means
    to swing the boom vertically.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 116+ for an
    elongated member tiltable relative to supporting base and mechanical motive
    means for applying power to effect such movement.


CLS 212/261
TXT Fluid actuated ram:

    Apparatus under subclass 260 wherein the motor comprises a relatively
    reciprocating piston and cylinder actuated by fluid pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238,    for similar structure in a horizontally and vertically swinging
    boom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 115 for miscellaneous
    elongated members which are pivoted relative to a supporting base by a
    fluid pressure actuated mechanism.


CLS 212/262
TXT Flexible cable:

    Apparatus under subclass 260 wherein the means for swinging the boom*
    vertically includes a greatly elongated strand of flaccid material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239,    for corresponding structure for a horizontally and vertically
    swinging boom.


CLS 212/263
TXT Human or animal powered:

    Apparatus under subclass 262 wherein means are provided by which a person
    or animal may apply a flexible force to the cable to swing the boom*
    vertically.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241,    for similar apparatus having booms which additionally swing about a
    vertical axis.


CLS 212/264
TXT Extensible by movement of boom or boom segment along longitudinal axis
    thereof:

    Apparatus under subclass 255 including a vertically swinging boom* and
    wherein either (a) means are provided which permits translational movement
    of the boom along its longitudinal axis and relative to the boom-supporting
    structure, or (b) the boom consists of a plurality of interconnected
    segments slidably related to one another whereby the effective length of
    the boom may be change.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231,    for a horizontally and vertically swinging extensible boom.

    299+,   for booms collapsible for transport or storage.

    348+,   for extensible boom structure, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 111+ for other
    extensible shaft structure.


CLS 212/270
TXT METHODS:

    Process under the class definition including a step of lifting a load and
    shifting it laterally.


CLS 212/271
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition which is not provided for under
    any of the preceding subclasses.


CLS 212/272
TXT HAVING MEANS TO PREVENT OR DAMPEN LOAD OSCILLATIONS:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means to arrest or
    reduce the periodic vertical or swinging movement of the load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    308,    for oscillations of ship mounted crane loads.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 900 for winches with wave compensation damping.


CLS 212/273
TXT Antisway (i.e., horizontal movements):

    Subject matter under subclass 272 wherein means are provided to arrest or
    reduce the undesired swinging movement about an axis orthogonal to a
    vertical axis.


CLS 212/274
TXT By triangulation of load cables:

    Subject matter under subclass 273 wherein the arresting or movement
    reducing means comprise at least two load lifting cables or cable portions
    arranged to diverge or converge at the load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    for an in-haul line extending to the load.

    236     and 310, for cables extending to the boom tip for luffing and
    slewing.


CLS 212/275
TXT By cyclic control of trolley acceleration or deceleration:

    Subject matter under subclass 273 including a load depending from a trolley
    with a traveling velocity and means to control the velocity of the trolley
    to reduce load oscillations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98      and 286, for cyclic movements of the trolley which include raising
    and lowering the load automatically.


CLS 212/276
TXT HAVING RANDOM CONDITION SENSOR COMBINED WITH AN INDICATOR OR ALARM OR
    CONTROLLING MEANS OR DISABLING MEANS:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means for detecting the
    random occurrence of a predetermined situation and releasing, terminating,
    or modifying a flow of energy which in turn either produces a visually or
    audibly perceptible manifestation of the event or regulates a controlling
    or disabling means (e.g., motor, valve, solenoid, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  The term ``random" excludes cyclic or repetitive operations
    or movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 685 for a condition-responsive
    indicating system for a crane wherein no structural details of the crane
    are recited.


CLS 212/277
TXT Senses crane tilt (e.g., outrigger sensors):

    Subject matter under subclass 276 wherein the apparatus is a crane and the
    detecting means is responsive to movement of the crane about a horizontal
    axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity, Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 61.52 for a
    tilt-responsive switch, per se.


CLS 212/278
TXT Means determining overloading produced by load (e.g., strain gauges):

    Subject matter under subclass 276 comprising means which directly determine
    overloading, such as strain gauges, or means to compute mechanically or
    electronically, the overturning moment of the hoist using two or more
    sensed variables.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    276,    277, 279, and 280 for the specific individual variables.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 272-274 for overload sensors on winches.


CLS 212/279
TXT Sensor regulates counterweight or counterbalancing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 wherein the detecting means and the
    controller governs either (a) the movement of a mass employed to offset the
    weight of the load or (b) operation of a dynamic device to exert a force in
    opposition to that exerted by the load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195+,   for other apparatus having a counterweight or counterbalancing
    means.


CLS 212/280
TXT Boom movement stops responsive to overtravel or proximity to powerline:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 wherein stopping or disabling occurs in
    response to either (a) the pivotal movement or telescopic extension of a
    boom* beyond a predetermined limit or (b) the electromagnetic field of an
    adjacent electrical power transmission wire.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 139+ for a stop
    mechanism (residual or of general application) in which the drive of a
    machine is discontinued at the limit of travel.

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for a
    magnetic or electric field sensor, per se.


CLS 212/281
TXT Hoisting stops upon load being raised to a predetermined position (e.g.,
    anti-two blocking):

    Subject matter under subclass 276 wherein the raising or lowering of a load
    lifting cable is  halted in response to the load being moved to a
    predetermined position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280,    for boom raising or lowering to a predetermined position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 269 for winches with stop means on the hoistrope.


CLS 212/282
TXT WITH MECHANICAL INDICATOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition combined with mechanically
    activated means for producing a visual manifestation of a property or
    occurrence.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    276,    for an indicator which is activated or regulated by a flow of
    energy in response to a sensed condition, the sensor being claimed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclasses for a mechanical
    indicator or alarm provided on a nominaly recited crane.  See the main
    definition of Class 116, section IV, for the general line.


CLS 212/283
TXT With weight indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 282 wherein means are provided to indicate
    the mass of the load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278,    for an apparatus which is controlled in response to a moment
    calculator or overload condition..

    SEARCH CLASS:

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclass 147 for weighing scales combined with a
    hoist for merely loading or unloading the scales.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 21 for weighing during load
    handling.


CLS 212/284
TXT WITH MOTOR CONTROL:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising means to initiate,
    terminate, or modify a flow of energy to control a power means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    276,    for means to initiate or regulate (e.g., cutoff) the flow of energy
    to a motor in response to a randomly occurring sensed condition.


CLS 212/285
TXT Remote control or at dual control positions:

    Subject matter under subclass 284 wherein the means for controlling the
    power means is (a) movable to or provided at a location substantially
    removed from the remainder of the apparatus or (b) located at two separate
    control stations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclass 148 for a ``cherry
    picker" type crane having control cables passing through the boom* whereby
    movement of the boom may be controlled by a person carried thereby.


CLS 212/286
TXT Cyclic operation:

    Subject matter under subclass 284 wherein the power means is controlled in
    response to a predetermined periodic event.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98,     for an overhead cyclic hoist.

    275,    for cyclic control of trolleys.


CLS 212/287
TXT Manual fluid valve actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 284 including means adapted to be manipulated
    by an operator to stop or start the flow of a working fluid to a fluid
    motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284,    for a manually actuated fluid pump for supplying pressure fluid to
    a motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors: Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclasses for a
    reciprocating or oscillating fluid motor combined with means for
    controlling the flow of fluid to the motor.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, appropriate subclasses for a valve or
    an actuator therefore, per se.


CLS 212/288
TXT Plural fluid motors:

    Subject matter under subclass 287 including multiple power means which
    convert the energy of a working fluid to mechanical movement of a working
    member, the flow of working fluid to each power means being controlled by a
    manually actuated fluid valve.


CLS 212/289
TXT Controlled by common actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 288 wherein the means adapted to be engaged
    by an operator comprises a single member by which the flow of working fluid
    to plural power means may be controlled.


CLS 212/290
TXT In control cab:

    Subject matter under subclass 284 wherein the means to control the power
    means is located in an enclosure or partial enclosure for an operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291,    for a cab or support for the operator.


CLS 212/291
TXT HAVING OPERATOR SUPPORT OR CAB:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means adapted to carry
    a person controlling the operation of the apparatus.


CLS 212/292
TXT BOOM POSITION LOCK:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a boom or boom sections
    and means to selectively prevent movement of the boom or boom sections.


CLS 212/293
TXT HAVING SNUBBER OR BOOM BACKSWING STOP:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein (a) a damper is provided
    to prevent sudden uncontrolled upward or backward movement of the boom* or
    (b) means are provided to limit upward or backward movement of the boom by
    direct contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    276+,   for traversing hoists having means to disable or stop boom rotation
    in response to an unplanned or unpredictable occurrence, and to control
    boom rotation in response to a sensed condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 673 and 719 for similar
    devices on other load handlers.


CLS 212/294
TXT ADJUSTABLE TO TRANSPORT OR NONUSE POSITION (E.G., COLLAPSIBLE):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein means are provided
    whereby either the orientation or dimension of an element of the apparatus
    may be changed to specifically render the apparatus or a portion thereof
    more easily transportable or storable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclass 366 for devices for lowering life craft which can
    be used from a nonuse position to a launching position.


CLS 212/295
TXT Crane boom supported by foldable or collapsible tower:

    Subject matter under subclass 294 including a boom* supported in operative
    position by a vertically disposed elongated member and means are provided
    whereby either the orientation or a dimension of the vertically extending
    member may be changed to render the apparatus more easily transportable or
    storable.

    (1)     Note.  The member (tower) must remain vertical during load-handling
    operations to be considered as a boom support as defined above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 111+ for an
    elongated member or construction at least part of which is movable relative
    to another part or a base, and motive means to effect such movement.


CLS 212/296
TXT Extensible tower of relatively sliding sections:

    Subject matter under subclass 295 including a vertically disposed elongated
    boom* support consisting of telescoping segments whereby the length of the
    support may be changed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204,    for a vertically extensible boom support by which the boom is
    supported at different hoisting heights.

    348+,   for extensible boom or mast structure, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 118 for an elongated
    member or construction comprised of a plurality of telescoping segments and
    which is mounted on a base for tilting movement.


CLS 212/297
TXT Hydraulically pivoted tower or tower sections:

    Subject matter under subclass 295 wherein the elongated boom* support is
    (a) pivoted to or from a horizontal transport attitude by pressure of a
    working fluid or (b) comprised of a plurality of longitudinal segments
    pivotally connected in end-to-end fashion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238,    for apparatus having a horizontally and vertically swinging boom
    and a fluid-actuated ram for swinging the boom vertically.

    261,    for apparatus having a boom swingable vertically by a
    fluid-actuated ram.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 115 for an elongated
    member or construction moved relative to a base by a fluid-actuated
    mechanism and subclasses 116+ for a tiltable member having relatively
    moving sections.


CLS 212/298
TXT Collapsible inverted ``V" frame supports boom rigging:

    Subject matter under subclass 294 including a boom* and a system of cables
    or the like to raise and lower the boom, wherein the cables are in turn
    supported by or guided over a member in the shape of a vertical inverted
    ``V", which is mounted on a base by means which permit the ``V" to be
    pivoted substantially parallel to the boom.


CLS 212/299
TXT Collapsible or foldable boom:

    Subject matter under subclass 294 including a boom* and means by which
    either the orientation of the boom or dimension of the boom can be changed
    to render the device more easily transportable or storable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230+,   for horizontally swinging extensible booms.

    264,    for vertically swinging extensible booms.

    348+,   for extensible boom structure, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 116+ for a tiltable
    elongated member or construction and means to tilt it about a base and
    subclass 646 for an open work truss, mast, or the like, having adjustably
    or collapsibly connected components.


CLS 212/300
TXT Vertically swinging boom having pivoted sections:

    Subject matter under subclass 299 wherein the boom* is pivoted to a support
    structure for movement about a horizontal axis, and wherein the boom
    comprises a plurality of sections hingedly connected in end-to-end fashion
    whereby a section may be swung to a position alongside another section for
    transport or storage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237+,   for a vertically and horizontally swinging boom having a jibboom or
    other extension which is pivoted relative to the main boom to manipulate
    the load.

    260+,   for a vertically swinging boom having a jibboom or other extension
    which is pivoted relative to the main boom to manipulate the load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 117+ for a tiltable
    elongated member or construction having relatively moving sections.


CLS 212/301
TXT Vehicle stabilizing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 294 including means to prevent undesired
    movement of the apparatus during the operation thereof, said means being
    provided with a portion for engaging a support surface, the apparatus
    including a position to render it more easily transportable.


CLS 212/302
TXT Lowered from vehicle body (e.g., outrigger):

    Subject matter under subclass 301 wherein a ground engaging stabilizing
    means is extended downwardly from the vehicle body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    digest 1 for jack bases and subclasses 418+ for vehicle attached jacks,
    including retractable ground supports which are extended by power to
    stabilize the vehicle when not in use.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 763.1+ for a vehicle provided with a
    retractable prop or support for stabilizing the vehicle when not in motion.


CLS 212/303
TXT Gear or screw drive to extend foot:

    Subject matter under subclass 302 wherein said ground engaging stabilizing
    means is attached to the vehicle body and includes a portion which is
    extensible to engage a support surface by means of a toothed or threaded
    drive.


CLS 212/304
TXT Hydraulic means to extend foot:

    Subject matter under subclass 302 wherein said ground engaging stabilizing
    means is attached to the vehicle body and includes a portion which is
    extensible to engage a support surface by fluidic means.


CLS 212/305
TXT Pivoted lever or link to extend foot:

    Subject matter under subclass 302 wherein said ground engaging stabilizing
    means is attached to the vehicle body and includes a portion which is
    extensible to engage a support surface by means of a fulcrumed arm or
    interconnector.


CLS 212/306
TXT Boom or mast attached:

    Subject matter under subclass 301 wherein said stabilizing means is
    connected to a boom or mast.


CLS 212/307
TXT SHIP MOUNTED OR FLOATING (E.G., A CRANE FIXED TO A PLATFORM ADAPTED TO
    FLOAT):

    Subject matter under the class definition peculiarly adapted to be fixed to
    a marine vessel or adapted to remain suspended within or on the surface of
    a fluid without sinking.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclasses 44+ for hoisting devices designed for raising
    sunken or submerged vessels; and subclass 268 for vessels with lifting and
    hauling apparatus not elsewhere provided for; and subclasses 368+ for
    cranes specially adapted to raise and lower small boats.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 137.1+ for a ship loading
    or unloading hoist having a claimed bucket, scoop, or scraper-type load
    engager.


CLS 212/308
TXT Including counterweight or means to compensate for list, trim or skew of
    vessel:

    Subject matter under subclass 307 including either (a) a mass specifically
    employed to offset the weight of the load or (b) means to neutralize the
    effect of a tilting attitude about the longitudinal, lateral, or vertical
    axis of the vessel or platform.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272+,   for means to prevent or dampen oscillations of the load as it moves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 900 for winches with wave compensation damping.


CLS 212/309
TXT Having horizontally and vertically swinging boom:

    Subject matter under subclass 307 including a boom* pivotally mounted on
    the vessel or platform for movement about two mutually orthogonal axes, one
    disposed vertically and the other horizontally.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232+,   for other horizontally and vertically swinging booms.


CLS 212/310
TXT Cable actuated horizontally and vertically:

    Subject matter under subclass 309 including at least one flexible rope, or
    rope-like element, for swinging the boom about both axes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236,    for other apparatus having a boom which is swung both horizontally
    and vertically by cables.


CLS 212/311
TXT Plural booms:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 including additional cable-actuated
    swiveled booms* carried on the marine vessel or platform.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233,    for other apparatus having a plurality of horizontally and
    vertically swinging booms.


CLS 212/312
TXT TRAVELING BRIDGE:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising an elongated member
    supported horizontally at two spaced points above a surface for
    translational movement across the surface, and which serves as or bears a
    track or guide between the supporting points on which a load-supporting
    trolley* or another traveling bridge* is adapted to move.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171,    for a traveling bridge having a clutch or variable transmission.

    226,    for a bridge which is supported for pivotal movement, rather than
    translational movement.

    285,    for a pendant control mechanism suspended below a traveling bridge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 186, 225+, and 561+ for a
    device which may be in the nature of a traveling crane including means for
    gripping its load.


CLS 212/313
TXT Flexible:

    Subject matter under subclass 312 wherein the member, movably supported at
    two points, comprises an elongated pliant member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76+,    for overhead cable hoists.


CLS 212/314
TXT Having vertically adjustable track:

    Subject matter under subclass 312 wherein means are provided to raise or
    lower the track or guide with respect to the surface over which the bridge*
    translates.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 90 for portable platforms for supporting hoisting apparatus
    mounted upon multiple lifting means, so as to straddle a track or roadway.


CLS 212/315
TXT Supporting second traveling bridge:

    Subject matter under subclass 312 including a second bridge* carried by the
    first and mounted for translational movement along the track or guide of
    the first bridge.


CLS 212/316
TXT Having plural trolleys:

    Subject matter under subclass 312 wherein two trolleys* are provided which
    are concurrently supported for movement along the track or guide of the
    traveling bridge.


CLS 212/317
TXT Having vertically or horizontally swinging boom on bridge or trolley:

    Subject matter under subclass 312 wherein a boom* is pivotally attached to
    (a) the traveling bridge* or (b) a trolley* adapted to travel along the
    bridge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224,    for a trolley-mounted horizontally swinging boom wherein the track
    or guide on which the trolley moves is not carried by a traveling bridge.


CLS 212/318
TXT Having horizontally swingable track- or load-rotating means on trolley:

    Subject matter under subclass 312 wherein (a) the traveling bridge*
    comprises an elongated member having a track or guide mounted thereon for
    pivotal movement about a vertical axis or (b) a trolley* is carried by the
    traveling bridge and comprises a first portion engaging track or guide and
    a second pivotally mounted portion from which the load is suspended.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334,    for grabs with load rotating means on the trolley.


CLS 212/319
TXT Having load engager mounted for guided vertical movement beneath trolley:

    Subject matter under subclass 312 including a load carrier beneath a rigid
    vertically oriented member which engages structure on the trolley* to guide
    the load carrier in up-and-down movement with respect to the trolley.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333,    for guide bars for guided vertical movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclasses 9+ for an ambulant elevator comprising a platform upon which a
    load is to be placed and which is mounted for guided vertical movement.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 591 for analogous structure
    having a claimed self-loading grab for engaging the load.


CLS 212/320
TXT Motor fixed to bridge-supporting structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 312 including a power means for raising or
    traversing the load. The power means is mounted adjacent the traveling
    bridge whereby the bridge translates with respect to the power means.


CLS 212/321
TXT Trolley mounted motor for trolley traversal via cable means:

    Subject matter under subclass 312 wherein the traveling bridge* carries a
    trolley* on which is mounted a power means employed to pull an elongated
    flexible member, thereby moving the trolley along the bridge.


CLS 212/322
TXT Bridge mounted motor for trolley traversal via cable means:

    Subject matter under subclass 312 wherein the bridge carries a trolley
    which is moved with a flexible rope-like member by a motor supported on the
    bridge and remote from the trolley.


CLS 212/323
TXT Bridge mounted motor for load lifting:

    Subject matter under subclass 312 wherein the load carried by the trolley
    is lowered and raised by means of a motor supported on the bridge and
    remote from the trolley.


CLS 212/324
TXT Having vertical supporting legs (e.g., gantry):

    Subject matter under subclass 312 wherein the bridge* is supported above
    the surface by two elongated vertical-supporting members, each of which is
    fixed at its upper end to the elongated member of the bridge and is
    provided at the lower end with means to facilitate movement of the bridge
    over a supporting surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    343,    for vehicles with supporting legs which stradle a load and have a
    means to translate the load with respect to the vehicle, wherein the load
    is primarily moved by movement of the loaded vehicle.


CLS 212/325
TXT Overhanging end:

    Subject matter under subclass 324 including track or guiding structure for
    a trolley* which extends beyond one of the elongated vertical-supporting
    members in cantilever fashion.


CLS 212/326
TXT Having specific engager for load:

    Subject matter under subclass 324 wherein significance is attributed to the
    particular structure for carrying the load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242,    for a specific load handler suspended from a horizontally and
    vertically swinging boom.

    251,    for a specific load handler suspended from a horizontally swinging
    boom.

    259,    for a specific load handler suspended from a vertically swinging
    boom.

    327,    for a specific load handler suspended from a traveling bridge other
    than a gantry.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling, Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, appropriate subclasses
    for a specific load engager, per se.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, appropriate subclasses for handlers
    having specific types of load engagers; particularly subclasses 186, 225+,
    618+, 729+, 751+, and 792.9 for grippers and grabs; and subclasses 444+ and
    785 for load engager structure in general.


CLS 212/327
TXT Having specific engager for load:

    Subject matter under subclass 312 wherein significance is attributed to the
    particular structure for carrying the load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242,    for a specific type load handler suspended from a horizontally and
    vertically swinging boom.

    251,    for a specific type load handler suspended from a horizontally
    swinging boom.

    259,    for a specific type load handler suspended from a vertical swinging
    boom.

    326,    for a specific type load handler for a gantry.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling: Hand and Hoist-line Implements, appropriate subclasses
    for a specific load engager, per se.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, appropriate subclasses for handlers
    having specific types of load engagers; particularly subclasses 186, 225+,
    618+, 729+, 751+, and 792.9 for grippers or grabs; and subclasses 444+ and
    785 for load engager structure in general.


CLS 212/328
TXT Self-propelled trolley:

    Subject matter under subclass 71 comprising a carriage provided with means
    for moving itself along a track.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    186,    Merchandising, subclass 29 for similar devices specially adapted
    for store service use.


CLS 212/329
TXT Automatic traversing stop:

    Subject matter under subclass 328 comprising a means for automatically
    stopping the trolley when a predetermined point on the track is reached.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281,    for an automatic stop for hoisting means.


CLS 212/330
TXT Load-handling:

    Subject matter under subclass 328 comprising some special means for
    receiving, engaging, gripping, discharging, or releasing a load.


CLS 212/331
TXT Electric:

    Subject matter under subclass 330 comprising an electric power means for
    traversing and for hoisting the load.


CLS 212/332
TXT With grab:

    Subject matter under subclass 331 including gripping means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243,    for a grab suspended from a horizontally and vertically swinging
    boom.

    334,    for a self-propelled overhead hoist equipped with a grab.


CLS 212/333
TXT With guide bar:

    Subject matter under subclass 331 which comprises some form of rigid or
    semirigid linkage or similar device for connecting the hoisting trolley
    with the load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    318,    for similar devices using a trolley on a traveling bridge.


CLS 212/334
TXT With grab:

    Subject matter under subclass 333 including gripping means.


CLS 212/335
TXT With ladle:

    Subject matter under subclass 333 including a scoop or similar container.


CLS 212/336
TXT Nonmotor traverse:

    Subject matter under subclass 71 in which the carriage is moved along the
    track by gravity or by an attendant.


CLS 212/337
TXT Nonmotor hoisting:

    Subject matter under subclass 336 in which the load is raised or lowered by
    an attendant.


CLS 212/338
TXT With load handler:

    Subject matter under subclass 336 comprising some special means for
    receiving, engaging, gripping, discharging or releasing a load.


CLS 212/339
TXT Discharging:

    Subject matter under subclass 338 comprising a carrier and means for
    discharging the carrier as by releasing or dumping the load.


CLS 212/340
TXT Automatic:

    Subject matter under subclass 339 comprising a carrier and means for
    discharging a load when the carrier reaches a predetermined point.


CLS 212/341
TXT Fluid Hoist:

    Subject matter under subclass 336 comprising a fluid cylinder hoist.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    319,    for similar devices in combination with a traveling bridge.


CLS 212/342
TXT Lever Hoist:

    Subject matter under subclass 336 comprising a single fulcrum for lifting
    the load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224     and 317, for booms mounted on trolleys.


CLS 212/343
TXT Surface vehicle:

    Subject matter under subclass 71 comprising an ambulant carriage having an
    elevated support portion including a flexible hoist attached to the
    elevated support portion and means to shift the load horizontally with
    respect to the support portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312+,   for supports designed to travel laterally on rails.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, for reels mounted on vehicles.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 323+ for vehicles with hoists which do not include horizontal
    shifting of the load with respect to the support.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 542+ for devices on
    self-loading vehicles.


CLS 212/344
TXT Self-propelled:

    Subject matter under subclass 343 comprising means for moving the vehicle
    from place to place.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 6.2 and 6.28 for driving and steering
    means for similar vehicles.


CLS 212/345
TXT Drum:

    Subject matter under subclass 343 comprising a hoisting winch.


CLS 212/346
TXT Trolley having wheels which contact different sides or planes of abeam:

    Subject matter under subclass 71 wherein the trolley includes plural wheels
    arranged in non-parallel axes for contacting off-set surfaces on the beam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198,    for apparatus having a counterweight mounted on a wheeled carriage
    for rectilinear movement relative to the support above the load.

    225+,   for a boom* mounted for movement about a vertical axis and having a
    trolley thereon.

    257,    for a boom mounted for movement about a horizontal axis only and
    having a trolley thereon.

    312+,   for a traveling bridge* having a trolley* thereon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclasses 89+ for suspended trolley railways and
    subclasses 188+ monorail railways (no hoisting feature claimed).

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 163 for overhead crane trucks
    (trolleys) where no hoisting structure is claimed.


CLS 212/347
TXT BOOM OR MAST:

    Subcombination under the class definition comprising an elongated
    structural member disclosed as being part of a traversing hoist and which
    serves to either support the load, a boom*, or boom rigging.

    (1)     Note.  To be proper for original placement in Class 212, a claim to
    a boom or mast as defined above must include structural limitations
    peculiar to a traversing hoist.  (See search note to Class 52 in main
    definition.)

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177,    for a boom having means to facilitate assembly or disassembly of
    plural longitudinal segments of the boom to one another.


CLS 212/348
TXT Extensible by sliding sections:

    Subject matter under subclass 347 wherein the elongated structural member
    comprises telescoping segments whereby the overall length of the member can
    be changed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177,    for a boom* whose length is changed by assembling or disassembling
    boom sections.

    204,    for a boom supported on an extensible mast.

    230+,   for extensible booms which are mounted for horizontal swinging
    movement.

    264,    for extensible booms which are mounted for vertical swinging
    movement only.

    294+,   for a boom or mast having an extending and collapsing feature for
    transport only.

    296,    for an extensible tower which collapses to a nonuseposition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 118+ for a
    miscellaneous elongated structural member which is comprised of telescoping
    segments and is mounted to a base for tilting movement relative thereto.


CLS 212/349
TXT By fluid pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 348 wherein the overall length of the member
    can be changed by application of a working fluid under pressure to the
    member or an associated motor.


CLS 212/350
TXT Having bearing means between extensible sections:

    Subject matter under subclass 348 wherein significance is attributed to
    specific structure of the areas of contact between respective relatively
    sliding sections of the structural member.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTION


CLS 212/901
TXT Dolley-type cranes:

    A collection of art under the class definition comprising a wheeled base
    supporting a mast, a boom, and a hoist means whereby the apparatus is sized
    to be pushed by the operator.


CLS 213/
TTL RAILWAY DRAFT APPLIANCES

CLS 213/
TXT This class contains patents involving means for connecting together the
    various elements of a railway train.  It also contains patents involving
    means for resiliently absorbing the shocks and blows incident to the
    movement of the train and to give cushioning effect to starting and
    stopping thereof.  Devices relating to this purpose may be formed as a part
    of the coupling devices or may be separate devices secured to or built into
    the car construction, either to cooperate with the coupling device or to
    engage and cooperate with similar structure on another car.

    (1)     Note.  Elements of a car, which are also elements of the subject
    matter of this class, but are modified in structure for use in combination
    with other elements of the car, the problem involved being more that of car
    construction than relating to the subject matter of this class, will be
    found in Class 105, Railway Rolling Stock. Copies of the patents in Class
    105 which might be of value as references in this class have been placed in
    the class as cross references.

    (2)     Note. Patents claiming combinations between car couplers and
    devices for other purposes incident to the use and operation of the car
    will be found in the classes in which such other devices are classified.
    The combination of a car coupler and means for coupling train-pipe service
    for air or steam forms an exception to the rule above noted and will be
    found in this Class 213, subclass 76.  However, where such train line is
    secured to a coupler or drawbar and its operation is the same as though
    hung to any other part of the car the combination will be found in Class
    285, Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 24+ and 62+.  The combination of
    a car coupler and connecting means for electric circuits forms another
    exception to the above rule and will be found in this Class 213, subclasses
    1.3+.  Where the combination is between a coupler and a brake see Class
    188, Brakes.  Where the combination is between a car coupler and means for
    unloading or loading a car, see Class 414, Material or Article Handling.

    (3)     Note.  Devices adapted to attach draft animals to cars will be
    found in Class 278, Land Vehicles: Animal Draft Appliances.

    (4)     Note.  For coupling and draft devices for trains of vehicles other
    than track vehicles see Class 180, Motor Vehicles, subclasses 14.1+, and
    Class 280, Land Vehicles, subclasses 400+.


CLS 213/1
TXT Devices not falling specifically within the definitions of the following
    subclasses.


CLS 213/1.3
TXT Combinations under the class definition of railway draft couplers with
    electrical connecting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 422 for electric service connections in
    land vehicle trains.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, for electric connectors, per se, especially
    subclasses 34+ for combinations of electric connectors with vehicle
    structures other than draft couplers.


CLS 213/1.6
TXT Combinations under subclass 1.3 having an electric switch or other means
    for opening or controlling a circuit through the connector contacts without
    separating said contacts.

    (1)     Note.  The switch or other circuit opening or control means is
    usually, but not necessarily, located at a point remote from the car
    coupler and electric connector, and may be interlocked therewith so as to
    require operation of the switch before the connector contacts or
    car-couplers can be separated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, for
    miscellaneous electrical systems in general especially subclasses 9.1+ for
    vehicle mounted systems.


CLS 213/2
TXT Draft devices under the class definition for connecting together a
    locomotive and tender, the forward end of the locomotive or the rear end of
    a tender to the other cars of a train.


CLS 213/3
TXT Devices under subclass 2 where the connecting means is between the
    locomotive and tender.


CLS 213/4
TXT Draft device under subclass 2 which is capable of being moved to an
    inoperative or out-of-the-way position when not in use.


CLS 213/5
TXT Devices under subclass 4 having in combination therewith means for raising
    the draft device in a vertical direction.


CLS 213/6
TXT Devices under subclass 2 made in the form of a pocket secured to an end
    portion (usually the rear end of a tender) for holding a coupling device.


CLS 213/7
TXT Patents under the class definition providing means for cushioning the
    movement of the draft device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, subclass 120 for a spring device of the
    expansible-chamber fluid spring type, for cushioning a rail vehicle body on
    its undercarriage.


CLS 213/8
TXT The draft device under subclass 7 is continuous from one end of the car to
    the other.


CLS 213/9
TXT Means under subclass 7 wherein a cushioned draft device is operatively
    connected to a car end buffer and functions therewith for any purpose.

    (1)     Note.  See the definition of this class, subclass 220 for
    definition of a car end buffer.


CLS 213/10
TXT Devices under subclass 7 where the car is of the type having a single
    center sill.


CLS 213/11
TXT Devices under subclass 7 where the cushioning means extends into or through
    the bolster of the car and the bolster is modified to cooperate therewith.


CLS 213/12
TXT Wherein the draft device is movable angularly in any direction.

    (1)     Note.  Patents showing looseness of parts which permits angular
    movement do not fall in this subclass unless the structure is specially
    designed to take advantage of such looseness to give angular movement.


CLS 213/13
TXT Means under subclass 12 wherein the movement of the draft device is in a
    vertical direction.


CLS 213/14
TXT Structure under subclass wherein vertical movement of the draft device is
    combined with a horizontal movement.


CLS 213/15
TXT Structure under subclass 12 wherein the movement of the draft device is
    controlled by the movement of the car truck.


CLS 213/16
TXT Devices under subclass 12 wherein means are provided to move by hand the
    draft device to bring the coupling part to a position to facilitate
    coupling.


CLS 213/17
TXT Devices under subclass 16 wherein the hand- controlling means also operates
    as means for unlocking or uncoupling the coupler.


CLS 213/18
TXT Means under subclass 12 wherein the center of radial movement of the draft
    device is on a pivot connecting the coupler head to the drawbar.


CLS 213/19
TXT Devices under subclass 18 wherein self-acting means are employed to return
    the head and drawbar into alignment.


CLS 213/20
TXT Devices under subclass 18 wherein self-acting means are employed to move
    the draft devices into alignment with the center line of the car.


CLS 213/21
TXT Structure under subclass 20 wherein the centering means for the draft
    device is carried by or formed as part of the drawbar carrier.


CLS 213/22
TXT Devices under subclass 7 using the combined action of springs and friction
    as means for cushioning movement of the draft devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 196+ for spring and friction retarder
    devices specifically disclosed as having utility other than as a railway
    draft appliance and in which no claim sets forth a spring device limited to
    use as railway draft appliance.


CLS 213/23
TXT Devices under subclass 22 wherein the cushioning action is against the
    action of a spring preliminary to the combined action of spring and
    friction.


CLS 213/24
TXT Cushioning devices under subclass 23 is of a type comprising a casing with
    friction shoes engaging the casing and wedges to force the shoes into
    engagement therewith.


CLS 213/25
TXT Means under subclass 22 wherein spring action only cushions a draft
    movement of the device, with combined spring and friction on buffing
    movement.


CLS 213/26
TXT Combined spring and friction devices under subclass 22 in which compression
    of the springs is greater or less than the movement of the draft device.


CLS 213/27
TXT Devices under subclass 26 wherein the friction is generated by rotative
    movement of friction elements.


CLS 213/28
TXT Devices under subclass 22 wherein the friction is generated by the rotative
    movement of friction elements.


CLS 213/29
TXT Devices under subclass 22 wherein interengaging springs generate the
    frictional resistance by movement upon each other.


CLS 213/30
TXT Devices under subclass 29 wherein the springs are plate springs.


CLS 213/31
TXT Devices under subclass 22 wherein one of the friction elements of the
    device is a casing.


CLS 213/32
TXT Devices under subclass 31 wherein the friction is generated by wedging of
    shoes outwardly against the inner walls of the casing.


CLS 213/33
TXT Devices under subclass 32 wherein there are also provided interleaved
    friction plates, some being movable relative to others.


CLS 213/34
TXT Devices under subclass 33 wherein the wedges are formed of a plurality of
    parts.


CLS 213/35
TXT Devices under subclass 22 wherein one of the friction elements is in the
    form of a post centrally disposed.


CLS 213/36
TXT Devices under subclass 35 wherein the wedges are employed to force shoes
    into engagement with the friction post.


CLS 213/37
TXT Devices under subclass 22 wherein the friction is generated by movement of
    friction devices transversely thereof.


CLS 213/38
TXT Devices under subclass 37 wherein spring resistance is disposed
    transversely thereof.


CLS 213/39
TXT Devices under subclass 38 wherein the movement of the friction element is
    in an inward direction.


CLS 213/40
TXT The cushioning device under subclass 7 for the draft is in the form of a
    spring.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, for spring devices specifically disclosed as having
    utility other than as a railway draft appliance and in which no claim sets
    forth a spring device limited to use as a railway draft appliance.


CLS 213/41
TXT Devices under subclass 40 wherein the spring resistance is increased to
    give greater resistance to movement of the draft device per unit of travel
    according to the amount of travel of the draft device or to provide a
    greater resistance to impact shock than to pulling strains.


CLS 213/42
TXT Devices under subclass 40 wherein the springs are tension springs.


CLS 213/43
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the spring is the compression of a
    pneumatic fluid or dashpot action of a liquid fluid.


CLS 213/44
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated a plurality of springs are employed
    in the device.


CLS 213/45
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the springs are arranged in tandem
    relation.


CLS 213/46
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated one spring or set of springs are
    used for draft strains and another spring or set of springs are used for
    buffing shocks, the springs or sets of springs having tandem relation.


CLS 213/47
TXT Wherein a tandem-spring device a U-shaped member surrounds the springs and
    is engaged to the drawbar by the legs of the member.


CLS 213/48
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated overlapping plungers adapted for
    movement in opposite directions are employed as means for compressing the
    springs.


CLS 213/49
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated springs are arranged so that lines
    through their axes of compression are parallel to each other.

    (1)     Note.  This does not include a plurality of springs where this line
    is common to all the springs.


CLS 213/50
TXT That part of the car construction or separate means fixed thereto which
    cooperates with the draft devices.


CLS 213/50.5
TXT Devices under subclass 50 in which parts of the car construction or
    separate means attached thereto prevent unintentional displacement of the
    draft key which couples the draft means to the cushioning means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for draft key retainers in cushioned draft connections which do not
    include parts fixed to the car.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, subclass 351 for a draft key fastener, per se.


CLS 213/51
TXT That part of the car through which the force of pull or buff on the draft
    devices is transferred to the car.

    (1)     Note.  Only the construction of the draft sills which directly
    cooperates with the draft device will be found in this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 413 and indented subclasses.


CLS 213/52
TXT Devices of the class indicated adapted for use with parallel-arranged type
    of draft gear.


CLS 213/53
TXT Devices of the class indicated adapted for use with tandem-arranged type of
    draft gear.


CLS 213/54
TXT Plates adapted to be secured to the faces of car sills to provide means
    whereby the force of buff or draft is transferred to the car through the
    sills.


CLS 213/55
TXT Devices of the class indicated adapted for use with tandem-arranged type of
    draft gear.


CLS 213/56
TXT Devices secured to the car in the form of a single means for acting as a
    stop for an individual follower element of a draft device.


CLS 213/57
TXT Where the stops of the class indicated also form an element of the bolster
    of the car.


CLS 213/58
TXT Means secured to the end of a car and adapted to receive and limit the
    inward movement of the draft device.

    (1)     Note.  The coupler is provided with an upwardly-projecting part
    (called the coupler horn) which engages the striking block at the end of
    its inward movement.


CLS 213/59
TXT Where the striking block is resiliently supported to cushion the inward
    movement of the coupler.


CLS 213/60
TXT Where the striking block also acts as drawbar carrier.


CLS 213/61
TXT Means for supporting the drawbar in a horizontal position.


CLS 213/62
TXT That part of a draft device to which the coupler head and the cushioning
    element are secured.


CLS 213/63
TXT Means secured to the rear end of the drawbar and adapted to lengthen it.


CLS 213/64
TXT Means for connecting the rear end of the drawbar or drawbar extension to
    the cushion.


CLS 213/65
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the cushion consists in part of a
    friction case and special means are employed to connect the drawbar to the
    casing.

    (1)     Note.  Types of means for this purpose that are capable of use with
    other types of cushion will be found in other subclasses of this class.


CLS 213/66
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the connecting means are in form of
    links.


CLS 213/67
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the connecting means are U-shaped,
    surround the cushion, and are connected to the drawbar at the ends of the
    legs of the U.


CLS 213/68
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the yoke is longitudinally divided
    into separate parts.


CLS 213/69
TXT Devices of the class indicated where the novelty lies in the manner of
    connecting the drawbar to the yoke.


CLS 213/70
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the yoke is provided with a hooded
    end.


CLS 213/71
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the connection is such as to pivot
    the yoke to the drawbar.


CLS 213/72
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the connection is such as to pivot
    the yoke to the drawbar.


CLS 213/73
TXT Where the draft device extends continuously the length of the car and is
    not of such character that it falls in any subclass noted above.


CLS 213/74
TXT Where the draft device is radially movable and is not of such character
    that it falls in any subclass noted above.


CLS 213/75
TXT The element of a draft device by which cars are coupled together.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for connections
    between two members in general.


CLS 213/76
TXT Couplings that are adapted for securing together cars and when coupled or
    during the coupling operation also coupling the train service pipe for air
    or steam.

    (1)     Note.  Couplings to which are secured automatic devices for
    coupling air or steam pipes and in which the coupling thereof is
    independent of the coupling action of the car coupler will be found in
    Class 285, Pipe Joints or Couplings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.3+,   for couplings of the type provided for herein (subclass 76) when
    claimed in combination with electrical connecting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 347+ for valved couplings on railway car
    structure and subclasses 614+ for pipe couplings having plural serial
    valves.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 148+ for a valved pipe
    coupling.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 24+ and 62+.  See the Note
    above.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 191+ for combinations of electric
    connectors with fluid line conduits or couplings.


CLS 213/77
TXT Coupling devices that are alike in all their elements and can be coupled to
    each other without use of any additional element or elements.


CLS 213/78
TXT Those in which a link or bar is used as the coupling means.


CLS 213/79
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated a selection of a coupling element of
    either coupler is made to effect the coupling. The selection may be either
    manual or automatic.


CLS 213/80
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated a beveled link on one coupler is
    engaged and held by a swinging catch on the other coupler.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91      and 176.


CLS 213/81
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the beveled link is formed at one
    end like and arrowhead.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92      and 177.


CLS 213/82
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated a link on one coupler engages a hook
    on the other coupler.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93,     178, 179, and 180.


CLS 213/83
TXT Where the link is in the form of a bail.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94      and 181.


CLS 213/84
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated each coupler comprises a hook and
    link formed together, the link of either coupler adapted to engage the hook
    of the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95.


CLS 213/85
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated a headed link is adapted to be
    engaged in a slot having fixed shoulders.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     97, 182, 183, and 184.


CLS 213/86
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated an open link on one coupler is
    engaged and held by a pin passing through the opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98,     188 and 189.


CLS 213/87
TXT Where the pin is pivotally supported to be swung rearwardly by an entering
    link and to move by gravity or a spring to engaged in the opening in the
    link.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99      and 190.


CLS 213/88
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated each coupler is provided with a hook
    and catch and when coupled the hooks on both couplers engage with the
    catches on the opposing coupling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79      and 175.


CLS 213/89
TXT Where the hooks are pivoted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79      and 175.


CLS 213/90
TXT Where the hooks are pivoted to swing in a horizontal plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79.


CLS 213/91
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated a beveled link on each coupler
    engages a swinging catch on the other coupler.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80      and 176.


CLS 213/92
TXT Where the end of each link is fashioned like an arrowhead.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81      and 177.


CLS 213/93
TXT Where each coupler is provided with a hook and a link and the link on each
    coupler engages with the hook on the other coupler.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     178, 179, and 180.


CLS 213/94
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the link is in the form of a bail.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83      and 181.


CLS 213/95
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated each coupler comprises a hook and
    link formed together and the link on each coupler engages with the hook on
    the other coupler.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84.


CLS 213/96
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated a headed link on each coupler is
    adapted to be engaged in a slot having fixed shoulders.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85,     182, 183, and 184.


CLS 213/97
TXT Where a head on the link or the link itself is adapted for rotative
    movement to engage or disengage from the shouldered slot.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184.


CLS 213/98
TXT Where each coupler is provided with a pin and an open link and the pin on
    each coupler engages with the open link on the other coupler.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86,     188 and 189.


CLS 213/99
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the pin is a pivotally supported to
    be swung rearwardly by an entering link and to be moved by gravity or a
    spring to engage in the opening in the link.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87      and 190.


CLS 213/100
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated a hook or knuckle on one coupler is
    adapted for engagement with a similar hook or knuckle on a mating coupler.


CLS 213/101
TXT Wherein a device of the class indicated the hook or knuckle is formed as an
    arrowhead.


CLS 213/102
TXT Where a plurality of arrowheads are used in each coupler.


CLS 213/103
TXT Where the hook or knuckle is formed with a transversly-sliding bill.


CLS 213/104
TXT When the hook or knuckle is pivoted to swing in a horizontal plane.


CLS 213/105
TXT A type of coupler known when used by the railroads of this country as the
    Miller hook and consisting of a drawbar pivoted to swing in a horizontal
    plane and provided with a hooking bill at its outer end.


CLS 213/106
TXT Where the bill of the hook in this type of coupler is also movable.


CLS 213/107
TXT Where the knuckle is in the form of a rotatable star wheel, any one of the
    branches of the wheel adapted to be engaged in the coupled position.


CLS 213/108
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated each coupling is formed of a
    plurality of horizontally swinging hooks or knuckles.


CLS 213/109
TXT A type of coupler now used on the railroads of this country and known as
    the Janney type, which consists essentially of a coupling head having a
    guard arm on one side and an angular knuckle pivoted to the other side
    thereof, one of the legs of the knuckle being the coupling part and the
    other the knuckle tail, and means to lock the knuckle in coupling position.
    This means usually engages the knuckle tail. More highly developed couplers
    of this type have additional features, as is indicated by some of the
    subclasses indented hereunder.


CLS 213/110
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the coupler when disconnected from a
    companion coupler can be automatically coupled without manipulation or
    change in position of parts at the hands of a trainman.


CLS 213/111
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated modification of structure or
    additional devices function to adapt the coupler for auxiliary or emergency
    coupler purposes.


CLS 213/112
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the modification of structure or the
    use of the additional device are to adapt the coupler to couple with other
    used types of couplers. The purpose is to adapt the Janney type for use on
    railroads equipped with other types during the transition period from the
    type used to the Janney type.


CLS 213/113
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the knuckle is provided with a
    plurality of tails.


CLS 213/114
TXT Where other means than a pin is employed to pivot the knuckle to the head.


CLS 213/115
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated means are employed to throw the
    knuckle to its open position after the lock for the knuckle is released.


CLS 213/116
TXT Where a spring performs this function.


CLS 213/117
TXT Where the force of gravity is employed to perform this function.


CLS 213/118
TXT Where a downward movement of the knuckle operates to swing it on its pivot
    to an open position.


CLS 213/119
TXT Where the knuckle-opening device is formed as a part of or secured to the
    lock and the knuckle opening operation follows a preliminary movement to
    unlock the knuckle.


CLS 213/120
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the lock is both vertically movable
    and horizontally rotatable, the latter movement opening the knuckle.


CLS 213/121
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the lock is both vertically movable
    and tilting, the latter movement opening the knuckle.


CLS 213/122
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the lock has vertical movement only,
    the latter part of the vertical movement opening the knuckle.


CLS 213/123
TXT Where the opening operation is effected by a member pivoted to the knuckle.


CLS 213/124
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the lock is pivoted or rotatable,
    the latter part of this movement opening the knuckle.


CLS 213/125
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the coupler is provided with means
    for opening the knuckle which is operated by movement of the lock after a
    preliminary movement thereof to unlock the knuckle.


CLS 213/126
TXT Where the lock is vertically sliding only and in the latter part of its
    vertical movement engages means to open the knuckle.


CLS 213/127
TXT Where the lock is vertically sliding and rearwardly swinging and in the
    latter movement engages means to open the knuckle. This type is the basis
    of the coupler which is standard on the railroads of this country.


CLS 213/128
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the lock in the latter part of its
    vertical movement engages a vertically-swinging lever to open the knuckle.


CLS 213/129
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the lock is vertically swinging only
    and in the latter part of this movement engages and operates
    knuckle-opening means.


CLS 213/130
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the lock is horizontally sliding
    only and in the latter part of this movement engages and operates means to
    open the knuckle.


CLS 213/131
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated means which is employed for
    operating the lock to its unlocked position can upon further movement
    thereof operate to open the knuckle.


CLS 213/132
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the movement of the means to open
    the knuckle is continuing and in the same direction as that by which it
    operated the lock.


CLS 213/133
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the lock operator comprises a
    horizontally-rotating shaft.


CLS 213/134
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the lock operator comprises a
    pivoted lever or levers.


CLS 213/135
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the lock operator is a sliding
    element.


CLS 213/136
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the direction of movement of the
    sliding element is vertical.


CLS 213/137
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the means for operating the lock has
    a movement in another direction for opening the knuckle.


CLS 213/138
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the means rotates for one purpose
    and slides for the other purpose.


CLS 213/139
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the lock moves by gravity to its
    locking position.


CLS 213/140
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the lock is attached to and carried
    by the knuckle tail.


CLS 213/141
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the lock is pivoted to swing in a
    vertical plane.


CLS 213/142
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated means is provided for holding the
    lock temporarily in its unlocking position until the knuckle swings towards
    open position. This means is called the lock set and there is also provided
    means to prevent accidental movement of the lock to unlocking position
    during service of the coupler, this means being called the anti-creep.


CLS 213/143
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated means is provided for holding the
    lock temporarily in its unlocking position until the knuckle swings towards
    open position.


CLS 213/144
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated means is provided to prevent
    accidental movement of the lock to unlocking position during service of the
    coupler.


CLS 213/145
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the lock has sliding movement in a
    vertical direction.


CLS 213/146
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated means is provided for holding the
    lock temporarily in its unlocking position until the knuckle swings towards
    open position. This means is called the lock set and there is also provided
    means to prevent accidental movement of the lock to unlocking position
    during service of the coupler, this means being called the anticreep.


CLS 213/147
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated means is provided for holding the
    lock temporarily in its unlocking position until the knuckle swings towards
    open position.


CLS 213/148
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated means is provided to prevent
    accidental movement of the lock to unlocking position during service of the
    coupler.


CLS 213/149
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the lock has sliding movement in a
    horizontal direction.


CLS 213/150
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the lock is pivoted to swing in a
    horizontal plane.


CLS 213/151
TXT Patents relating to the contour of the coupler.


CLS 213/152
TXT Patents showing interengaging means on the knuckle and coupler head,
    usually to relieve the knuckle pin from strain.


CLS 213/153
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated means are employed to prevent
    disengagement of the coupler due to excessive vertical movement.


CLS 213/154
TXT Patents relating to the construction of the guard arm of the coupler.


CLS 213/155
TXT Patents relating to the knuckle and the knuckle pin.


CLS 213/156
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated means positioned below the pin are
    employed to hold the knuckle pin as a whole or in part, if accidentally
    broken, against downward movement.


CLS 213/157
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the ears are removable. The ears are
    that part of the coupler head to which the knuckle is pivoted.


CLS 213/158
TXT Patents showing closures for the opening in the top of a coupler head
    through which passes a lifter for the lock or the lock itself. These
    closures are generally used when bottom operating means are used for the
    lock.


CLS 213/159
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated auxiliary means are employed for
    moving the lock to permit uncoupling of the coupler.


CLS 213/160
TXT Automatic devices adapted to function under abnormal conditions--viz., when
    the car leaves the track or when the draft gear breaks.


CLS 213/161
TXT Where the uncoupling device has a plurality of possible movements, any one
    of which may be selected by a trainman.


CLS 213/162
TXT Where the uncoupling device is operated by pull upon a rod, chain or rope.


CLS 213/163
TXT Where the uncoupling device comprises a plurality of interengaging levers.


CLS 213/164
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated at least one of the levers is
    fulcrumed to swing in a vertical plane.


CLS 213/165
TXT Where the uncoupling device has a single lever pivoted to swing in a
    vertical plane.


CLS 213/166
TXT Where the uncoupling device comprises a horizontal rotating shaft.


CLS 213/167
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the inner end of the shaft is
    journaled to the coupler head.


CLS 213/168
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the shaft is directly connected to
    the lock.


CLS 213/169
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated a horizontally-extending link
    connects the shaft to the lock.


CLS 213/170
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated a single substantially vertically
    extending link connects the shaft to the lock.


CLS 213/171
TXT Brackets adapted to secure the uncoupling devices to the car.


CLS 213/172
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the hook or knuckle is pivoted to
    swing in a vertical plane.


CLS 213/173
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the hook or knuckle is vertically
    disposed.


CLS 213/174
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the hook or knuckle is adapted for
    rotation about its vertical axis.


CLS 213/175
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated coupling is effected by a hooked
    member engaging a catch and which would not be classified in subclass 77 of
    this class or any indented subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79      and 88.


CLS 213/176
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated coupling is effected by a beveled
    link being engaged and held by a swinging catch, and which would not be
    classified in subclass 77 of this class or any indented subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80      and 91.


CLS 213/177
TXT Where an end of each link is fashioned like an arrowhead.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81      and 92.


CLS 213/178
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated coupling is effected by a hook
    engaging an opening in a link, and which would not be classified in
    subclass 77 of this class or any indented subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82      and 93.


CLS 213/179
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the hooks are pivoted.


CLS 213/180
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated there are provided a plurality of
    hooks.


CLS 213/181
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the link is in the form of a bail.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83      and 94.


CLS 213/182
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated coupling is effected by a headed
    link engaging in a shouldered slot, and which would not be classified in
    subclass 77 of this class or any indented subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85      and 96.


CLS 213/183
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the head of the link moves on a
    pivot.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85      and 96.


CLS 213/184
TXT Where a head on the link or the link itself is adapted for rotative
    movement to engage or disengage from the shouldered slot.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97.


CLS 213/185
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the link is formed with a beveled
    end which is engaged by a sliding catch, and which would not be classified
    in subclass 77 of this class.


CLS 213/186
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the link is formed as an arrowhead,
    at its engaging end, and which would not be classified in subclass 77 of
    this class.


CLS 213/187
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated coupling is effected by a beveled
    link engaging a fixed catch, and which would not be classified in subclass
    77 of this class.


CLS 213/188
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated coupling is effected by a pin
    passing through an opening in an open link, and which would not be
    classified in subclass 77 of the class or any indented subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86      and 98.


CLS 213/189
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated means are employed to automatically
    move the pin to a position to permit the link to enter the coupler, the pin
    then being permitted to move to a position to lock the link, or with the
    pin in an uncoupling position is positively moved by the entering link to
    its coupling position.


CLS 213/190
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the pin is pivotally supported to be
    swung rearwardly by an entering link and to be moved by gravity or a spring
    to engage in the opening in the link, or with the pin in an uncoupling
    position is positively moved by the entering link to its coupling position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87      and 99.


CLS 213/191
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the pin is swung by the entering
    link to the coupling position.


CLS 213/192
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated means are employed to hold the pin
    in a position to permit the link to enter the coupler, there being a
    subsequent release to permit the pin to move to a position to lock the link.


CLS 213/193
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the pin is tilted to engage a part
    of the coupler.


CLS 213/194
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the action of gravity moves the
    support to a pin-engaging position when the pin is manually raised.


CLS 213/195
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the support also acts as means for
    holding the link in a horizontally extending position.


CLS 213/196
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the supporting means is in the form
    of a roller.


CLS 213/197
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the supporting member is in the form
    of a pivoted latch.


CLS 213/198
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the latch is attached to the pin.


CLS 213/199
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the latch is in the form of a
    stirrup.


CLS 213/200
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the supporting member is a spring or
    a spring operated member.


CLS 213/201
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the support also acts as means for
    holding the link in a horizontally-extending position.


CLS 213/202
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the support is horizontally sliding.


CLS 213/203
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the supporting member is moved from
    its supporting position by the entering link.


CLS 213/204
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the supporting member is pivoted.


CLS 213/205
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated means are provided for holding or
    lifting the link in a horizontal position to enter an engaging coupler.


CLS 213/206
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated a lifting means on one car engages a
    link on an opposed car to guide it to coupled position.


CLS 213/207
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the holding or lifting means is a
    lever.


CLS 213/208
TXT That element of a coupler of the type indicated known as the link.


CLS 213/209
TXT Where the link is provided with means permitting its opening at the end.


CLS 213/210
TXT Where the link is provided with a handle.


CLS 213/211
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated auxiliary means are employed for
    moving the lock means to permit uncoupling of the couplers.


CLS 213/212
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated control of the uncoupling means is
    located at a central station (usually the cab of the engine), permitting
    uncoupling selectively at any point in the train.


CLS 213/213
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the uncoupling means can be operated
    from either the top or side of the car.


CLS 213/214
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the uncoupling means comprises a
    rotating vertical shaft.


CLS 213/215
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the uncoupling means is operable
    from the car top only.


CLS 213/216
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the coupling means comprises a
    rotating vertical shaft.


CLS 213/217
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the means for operating the
    uncoupling means comprises a flexible element.


CLS 213/218
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the uncoupling means comprises a
    vertically-swinging lever.


CLS 213/219
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the uncoupling means comprises a
    rotating horizontal shaft.


CLS 213/220
TXT Means secured to the end of the car and adapted to engage similar means on
    another car to receive the force of impact therebetween.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, subclass 115, for a fluid spring draft gear
    cushioning device, positionable between bodies in tow relation; and
    subclass 138, for a draft-gear-cushioning spring device, other than the
    fluid spring type.


CLS 213/221
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the buffer is resiliently supported.


CLS 213/222
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the construction of the buffer
    adapts it for use as a whole or part of the car platform.


CLS 213/223
TXT Wherein devices of the class indicated the buffer is supported by a fluid
    cushion.


CLS 213/224
TXT Means whereby a motive power on one track can be used to move a car or cars
    located on a parallel track.


CLS 215/
TTL BOTTLES AND JARS

CLS 215/
TXT

    CLASS DEFINITION

    This class includes receptacles, usually of glass or ceramic material, of
    the bottle, jar, or jug type, not special to some particular art and not
    separately classified.  It includes features of construction in the
    receptacle itself, closures for the receptacle, and attachments of a
    temporary character--that is, which are not a permanent fixture on the
    receptacle, but may be used repeatedly on different receptacles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 310+ for bottle
    labels or mere modification of the bottle to receive a label.

    222,    Dispensing, for dispensing containers in general.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 31+, for bottles and jars
    combined with gas or vapor treatment of contained material.


CLS 215/2
TXT Receptacles under class definition which are filled from the bottom.  These
    receptacles usually have closed necks, which are adapted to be broken to
    withdraw the contents from the container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for bottles having breakable necks for dispensing contents and not
    limited to bottom filling.


CLS 215/3
TXT Receptacles under class definition having means for positively ejecting the
    contents.


CLS 215/4
TXT Receptacles under subclass 3 from which the contents are forced by
    gas-pressure.  The novelty usually lies in the valve mechanism by which the
    contents are allowed to escape.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 394+ for dispensers in which material is
    discharged by fluids under pressure that directly contact the material.


CLS 215/5
TXT Receptacles under subclass 4 in which the closure-valve is spring-actuated.


CLS 215/6
TXT Receptacles under class definition which are divided into compartments.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 600+ for compartmented metallic receptacles.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 92+ for article dispensers not
    otherwise classified having plural sources, stacks or compartments.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 129+ for dispensers with compartments.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 123+ for a
    receptacle for a coating material supply including an applicator in a
    separate compartment.


CLS 215/10
TXT Receptacles under the class definition which are formed in a manner to
    particularly adapt them for nesting or stacking with others of the same
    kind.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 499 through 520 for
    container heating or stacking means.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 503+ for stacking device for containers.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 130+, and 143 for dispensers with nesting or
    stacking features.


CLS 215/11.1
TXT NURSING BOTTLES AND NIPPLES:

    Subject matter under the class definition including bottles and/or nipples
    intended for use in feeding infants.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 235.5 for an apparatus for applying nipples
    to nursing bottles.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 102+ for nursing bottle holders or supports.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 77+ for a bottle and/or nipple used for
    therapeutic purposes wherein significance is attributed to the
    configuration, structure, or components for engaging part of the head of
    the user for introducing a body treating material into the oral cavity or
    esophagus of the user.


CLS 215/11.2
TXT With temperture responsive indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 11.1 including a temperature measuring or
    responsive device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 207 and 218+ for a temperature
    responsive indicator which does not give a quantative output.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 100+ for a quantative
    temperature responsive indicator, per se, particularly subclass 150 for a
    nuring bottle combined with a temperature measuring device wherein
    significant temperature measuring details are claimed.


CLS 215/11.3
TXT Collapsible liner or wall:

    Subject matter under subclass 11.1 including a flexible or flaccid liner
    for the liquid content, or having a wall or portion thereof which moves
    inwardly as the liquid content is withdrawn.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 400+ and 470 for a liner for a receptacle
    of general utility.


CLS 215/11.4
TXT With valve for liquid:

    Subject matter under subclass 11.1 including a flow control device in the
    path of the liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, appropriate subclass for a valve, per
    se.


CLS 215/11.5
TXT With vent or valve for air:

    Subject matter under 11.1 including a flow control device which affects the
    entry of air into the bottle in response to the displacement of the liquid
    content.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, appropriate subclass for a valve, per
    se.


CLS 215/11.6
TXT With cover:

    Subject matter under subclass 11.1 including a protective or insulating
    cover for the bottle or nipple or both.


CLS 215/12.1
TXT MULTILAYER BARRIER STRUCTURE:

    A receptacle under the class defintion wherein at least one of the walls
    includes substantially coextensive plural piles, laminas, layers, strata or
    panels.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are spaced or contiguous piles,
    self-sustaining or nonself-sustaining layers, planar or nonplanar strata,
    free or secured laminas as well as solid, foraminous, particulate, gas, or
    liquid layers.

    (2)     Note.  Included here as multilayer barrier struture is a receptacle
    with an internal or external "lining".

    (3)     Note.  Generally, specific multilayer structure as defined above
    combined with a specific receptacle characteristic is considered
    classifiable in this and indented subclasses.  However, mere "nominal"
    inclusion of a receptacle in such combination is not considered
    "specific"and, as such, is considered merely multilayer barrier structure,
    per se, for Class 428.  See (1) Note of Class 206.

    (4)     Note.  The stated utility of a receptacle multilayer barrier, e.g.,
    reinforcement, insulation, partition "shock protection", etc., will not
    exclude a patent for such structure (otherwise meeting the above
    definition) from this or indented subclasses.

    (5)     Note.  Multilayer structure limited to a seam or joint is not
    provided for here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 521+ for multilayer shock
    protection structure.

    217,    Wooden, Receptacles, subclass 3 for a wooden container lining.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 415+ for a residual locus for patents
    directed to a container with multilayer barrier structure, and subclass 903
    for a cross reference art collection of insulating jackets for beverage
    containers.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 566+ for a multilayer bottle, jar or jug
    including claimed spout or pouring lip features.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 89+ for a
    bottle wrapper.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for multilayer material, per se.


CLS 215/12.2
TXT Coating or lamination:

    Subject matter under subclass 12.1 wherein a wall of the receptacle has
    been coated (i.e., painted, plated, impregnated, sprayed or overspread) or
    is laminated (i.e., comprised of firmly united layers of material.

    (1)     Note.  A heat shrunk structure is a type of lamination.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 903 for a cross reference art collection of
    insulating jackets for beverage containers.


CLS 215/13.1
TXT Insulating material between spaced wall panels:

    Subject matter under subclass 12.1 wherein a wall of a receptacle includes
    at least two self sustaining layers separated from one another in face to
    face relationship, and a material which inhibits the transfer of heat is
    located between the layers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.1,   for a receptacle having spaced wall panels with air or a vacuum
    between them.

    12.2,   for a receptacle having a coating or lamination.


CLS 215/14
TXT Receptacles under class definition which have positive means to prevent
    refilling when the original contents are once withdrawn.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7       and 8, for receptacles having means to indicate that the original
    contents have been tampered with but which do not prevent refilling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 86.1+ for filling attachments for metallic
    receptacles.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 147 for dispensers with refill preventing
    means.


CLS 215/15
TXT Nonrefillable receptacles under subclass 14 in which the refilling is
    prevented by a construction in the form of an air-trap.


CLS 215/16
TXT Nonrefillable receptacles under subclass 14 having means for positively
    ejecting the contents and which cannot be refilled when the contents have
    been ejected.


CLS 215/17
TXT Nonrefillable receptacles under subclass 14 in which the invention lies in
    a peculiar valve construction or in a guard to prevent tampering with a
    valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, appropriate subclasses for valve
    structures of general utility.


CLS 215/18
TXT Nonrefillable receptacles under subclass 17 in which the novelty lies
    particularly in a valve construction.  The valves are adapted to allow
    outflow of the contents, but prevent refilling.


CLS 215/19
TXT Nonrefillable receptacles under subclass 18 having a single spring-actuated
    valve.


CLS 215/20
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 which operate either owing to an inherent
    ability of float or which are controlled by a separate float member.  These
    float-actuated valves are usually to prevent filling of the bottle while in
    an inverted position.


CLS 215/21
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 which are actuated by gravity.  These
    valves depend on their own inherent weight and not on any external weight
    for their operation.


CLS 215/22
TXT Subject matter under subclass 21 assisted in operation by a separate
    weight, which is not connected to the valve.  This weight may serve either
    to seat or to unseat the valve.


CLS 215/23
TXT Subject matter under subclass 21 assisted in operation by a weight in the
    form of a pendant attached to the valve.


CLS 215/24
TXT Subject matter under subclass 21 which are pivoted.


CLS 215/25
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 in which the novelty lies not in the
    specific construction of the valve but in the combination of a plurality of
    valves.


CLS 215/26
TXT Nonrefillable receptacles under subclass 17 in which the novelty lies in
    some form of guard for the purpose of preventing access to and tampering
    with the valve. The valve is usually conventional.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18+,    for guard structure with peculiar valve construction, and subclass
    30 for guards in a separate receptacle neck.


CLS 215/27
TXT Subject matter under subclass 26 formed as an integral part of the
    container and not as a separate organization.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for guards in separate necks.


CLS 215/28
TXT Subject matter under subclass 26 in the form of a cap, which fits on the
    bottle-mouth.


CLS 215/29
TXT Subject matter under subclass 26 having means by which the guard
    organization is held in the bottle-neck to prevent removal.


CLS 215/30
TXT Subject matter under subclass 17 in which the valve and guard--is mounted
    in a neck, which is not an integral part of the bottle, but is cemented or
    otherwise attached thereto.


CLS 215/40
TXT NECK:

    Bottle, jug, or jar under the class definition including specified features
    of the narrowed top portion of the container.


CLS 215/41
TXT Drip-preventing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 40 wherein the neck includes a structure to
    catch dribble.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    393+,   for a drip-catching attachment for a bottle or jar.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 695+ for an attachment having an edge for
    removing excess material.


CLS 215/42
TXT Reinforcing structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 40 wherein the neck includes a structure to
    strengthen it.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 640+ for a receptacle of that class type
    having an open end edge which is reinforced by a separate reinforcing
    element and subclasses 656+ for a receptacle wherein the open end edge is
    integrally strengthened (i.e., does not include a separate reinforcing
    element).


CLS 215/43
TXT Structure to receive a particular closure:

    Subject matter under subclass 40 wherein the neck includes a structure for
    receiving a specified type of closing means.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is a structure for receiving
    closures such as snap closures and stoppers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222,    for a receptacle-closure interlocking means constructed so that
    rotation of the closure with respect to the bottle, jug, or jar is less
    than 360 degrees.

    224,    for closure-receptacle interlocking portions, at least one of which
    is flexibly distorted while traversing the other portion (e.g., snap-type).

    317,    for a resiliently distortable cap of general application (i.e., not
    including closure removal impeding means).

    318,    for a snap-on, twist-off cap for a bottle or jar.

    324+,   for a crimped cap for a bottle or jar.

    355+,   for a stopper-type closure for a bottle or  jar.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 563 for a plug-type closure for a dispenser.


CLS 215/44
TXT Structure includes threads:

    Subject matter under subclass 43 wherein the structure includes a helical
    ridge for reception of a screw-type closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    214,    for a closure which is attached to the bottle, jug, or jar by
    means of threads, interrupted threads, or lugs.

    217,    for a closure in which threadlike means are provided for permitting
    simultaneous rotating and reciprocating movement between the bottle, jug,
    or jar and the closure; the threadlike means being either continuous or
    discontinuous.

    276,    for a closure secured by a screw-threaded ring.

    329,    for a cap-type closure secured by threads which have no means to
    impede closure removal.

    356,    for a stopper-type closure secured by threads which have no means
    to impede closure removal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclass 107 for a bung hole closure with
    screw-thread or bayonet locking means.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 288+ for a screw closure for a receptacle
    of that class type.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 549+ for dispensers with a screw-type
    closure, particularly subclass 552 for a dispenser with a screw plug.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclass 220 for a paper
    box having a screw-threaded closure.


CLS 215/45
TXT Structure includes a seal:

    Subject matter under subclass 43 wherein the structure includes a member
    acting at the junction of the closure and closure support or container
    mouth to oppose the passage of fluid therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232,    for a closure sealed or bonded to the bottle, jug, or jar; the
    sealing or bonding agent having been applied to the closure or receptacle
    prior to placing the closure in position.

    233,    for a closure which is placed in its closed position and
    subsequently sealed to the bottle, jug, or jar by application of a
    hardenable liquid or plastic material such as paraffin.

    341,    for a closure provided with a definite, identifiable gasket seal or
    liner, which may or may not be integral with the closure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 378 for a receptacle closure of that class
    type having a gasket or packing.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 628+ for a static contact seal for other than an
    internal combustion engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable.


CLS 215/46
TXT Means to aid in removing closure:

    Subject matter under subclass 40 wherein the neck has a specific structure
    to assist in removing a closure.

    (1)     Note.  The closure is intended to be removed without breaking a
    portion of the receptacle neck.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215,    for a closure which requires insertion or use of a handheld
    instrument or tool to facilitate closure removal.

    250+,   for a closure having a portion or a connecting means which must be
    broken or smashed to give access to the      receptacle or secondary
    closure.

    295+,   for a closure with means to facilitate closure removal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 3.7+ for a closure cap or a cork-removing tool.

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 604 for a receptacle of that class type
    having a one-piece side and end wall.


CLS 215/47
TXT Frangible neck:

    Subject matter under subclass 40 in which the neck is specially configured
    to be broken in order to dispense the container contents.

    (1)     Note.  Usually there is no way to open the container other than to
    break the neck.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for a bottle having a breakable neck and adapted to be filled from
    the bottom.

    252,    for a closure which is broken away from its attaching means upon
    rotation of the closure.

    258,    for a closure which when removed leaves a portion with the
    receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 45.12 for a receptacle of
    that class type including a structure to tear or break at least a portion
    of the receptacle so that it may be subdivided or the content may be
    removed or exposed and subclass 532 for a unit dose container with means to
    tear or sever a portion to permit removal of the contents.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclass 132 for a supply
    cartridge for a hand-manipulable coating implement with material supply,
    which cartridge has a frangible part which is broken for establishing flow
    to the tool, and indented subclasses 133+ for such an implement which
    includes means for cutting or piercing the frangible part.


CLS 215/48
TXT Broken by manipulation of closure:

    Subject matter under subclass 47 in which the closure portion is maneuvered
    in order to fracture the neck.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    253,    for structure wherein the closure or bottle, jug, or jar has one or
    more points of weakness which will fracture upon application of pressure.

    258,    for tamper-evident-type closure wherein a portion of the closure
    remains with the bottle, jug, or jar when the closure is removed.


CLS 215/49
TXT Nonreclosable container:

    Subject matter under subclass 47 in which the bottle, jug, or jar is
    configured so that once it is opened, it cannot be reclosed.


CLS 215/50
TXT Stopper:

    Subject matter under subclass 47 having a plug.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    294,    for a stopper with a nonintegral clamp means engaging the interior
    receptacle surface.

    296+,   for a stopper-type closure having means to facilitate removal.


CLS 215/51
TXT Multiple stoppers:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 having a plurality of plugs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251+,   for a closure structure wherein the outer closure breaks or tears
    away to expose a second closure.


CLS 215/52
TXT Spring retainer:

    Subject matter under subclass 51 having resilient means to secure the
    stoppers.


CLS 215/53
TXT Seal:

    Subject matter under subclass 51 including means for sealing the stoppers
    (e.g., cement or wax).


CLS 215/54
TXT Stopper fastener:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 having means for securing a stopper in the
    container neck so that it cannot be removed without breaking the neck.


CLS 215/55
TXT Spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 54 including a  resilient catch to secure the
    stopper.


CLS 215/200
TXT Closures under the class definition which are movable or removable and not
    special to some classified art.

    (1)     Note.  Patents prior to 1940 have been classified on disclosure,
    not necessarily on the claims.

    (2)     Note.  Patents claiming more receptacle detail than necessary to
    cooperate with the closure structure will not be found in this or any
    indented subclass.  The broad recitation of common elements of a receptacle
    (bottom, sides, ends etc.) are not considered receptacle detail and are
    proper for this and the indented subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  Where the closure is claimed with no significant closure
    structure but merely in terms of the composition or material of which it is
    composed, it will be classified in the appropriate composition or material
    class, even though there is no claim to the composition, per se.  In this
    connection the following classes should be considered.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic. Note particularly the class
    definitions for the type of composition within the scope of Class 106.

    148,    Metal Treatment, particularly subclasses 400+ for materials which
    are products of processes of treating metals classifiable in Class 148, or
    for products distinguished only by the internal structure or
    characteristics of the metals, metallic composition or alloys comprising
    such structures.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, for articals defined solely by
    their metal or alloy composition.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    262 for methods of applying a liner to a closure cap including a cutting or
    punching operations.

    427,    Coating  Processes, for processes of coating or impregnating a base
    and the resultant product or treating such a coated product.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses for
    synthetic resins or natural rubber and compositions thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closure, appropriate subclasses for closures
    of the type there provided for and see the search notes thereto in section
    IV for the loci of closures in other classes.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 200+ and see the notes thereto for
    receptacle closures in general.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclass for dispensing containers or for
    closures used with such containers where a dispensing feature, e.g., trap
    chamber, flow guide, etc., is specifically recited as part of the closure.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material laminate in the form of a web or sheet, particularly
    subclasses 544+ for such stock which is all metal or has adjacent metal
    components.


CLS 215/201
TXT Device under subclass 200 provided with means to (1) call the attention of
    the user to the dangerous character of the contents of the receptacle or
    (2) otherwise provide obstructive means to negate easy or what would appear
    normal removal of the closure.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses are intended to provide a
    loci for patents relating to closures designed in such a manner as to make
    it difficult, if not impossible,  for uninformed children or mentally
    deficient persons to remove the closure.  Most, if not all of the patents
    herein, deal with closures for receptacles containing potentially dangerous
    or toxic material.

    (2)     Note.  "Tamperproof" closures which involve a breaking or tearing
    of the closure or a component thereof will be found in this class (215),
    subclasses 250+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7+,     for receptacles having means for indicating that the contents have
    been tampered with or for indicating the quantity of material in the
    receptacle;

    206,    for closures provided with combination actuated locks.

    207,    for closure fasteners provided with key actuated locks;


CLS 215/202
TXT Devices under subclass 201 in which the closure comprises pointed
    prong-like members engageable by the hand to call the attention of the user
    to the dangerous character of the receptacle contents.


CLS 215/203
TXT Devices under subclass 201 in which the closure is provided with visible
    means by which attention is directed to the dangerous aspect of the closure
    contents.

    (1)     Note.  The visible means may include readable matter, distinctive
    closure shape or any other type of indicia appealing to the sense of sight.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Car, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, sub- classes 310+ for bottle
    carried indicia and see the search notes thereunder for related art areas.


CLS 215/204
TXT Devices under subclass 201 in which there are provided more than one
    closure for the same receptacle opening, the closures being sequentially
    removable.


CLS 215/205
TXT Devices under subclass 201 which (1) form the receptacle base or (2), are
    located in, at or about the receptacle base.

    (1)     Note.  The devices in this subclass are usually for the purpose of
    subterfuge in that the top portion of the receptacle may be made to include
    that which resembles a normal closure.


CLS 215/206
TXT Devices under subclass 201 in which alignable markings are provided on the
    closure and the receptacle or on relatively movable closure portions to
    facilitate removal of the closure from the receptacle.


CLS 215/207
TXT Devices under subclass 201, including locking means that requires for
    unlocking the use of a separate hand held key, such key being unique to the
    specific locking means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215,    for a closure which is specifically adapted for use with a hand
    held tool, such tool not being unique to the specific locking or closure
    means;

    302,    for "nonchildproof" closure having means to facilitate closure
    removal utilizing a hand held tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, appropriate subclasses indented under subclass 158 for locks
    for covers, lids, caps and enclosing shields.


CLS 215/208
TXT Devices under subclass 201 in which the closure or the closure and
    receptacle are provided with means by which rotative effort in opposite
    directions is required for removing the closure from the receptacle.


CLS 215/209
TXT Devices under subclass 201 in which the receptacle includes a flexible
    portion having closure engaging means integral therewith, flexing of the
    flexible portion either (1) disengages the closure engaging means from the
    closure to allow for closure removal or (2) exerts a force on the closure
    for removing the closure from the receptacle.


CLS 215/210
TXT Devices under subclass 201 wherein the obstruction means comprises a
    gravity influenced part movable to alternate positions for either
    permitting or not permitting removal of the closure from the receptacle, at
    least a partial inversion of the receptacle being required to move the part
    into one or the other of its alternate positions.


CLS 215/211
TXT Devices under subclass 201 in which the closure or portion thereof has a
    sealing relationship with an inner surface portion of the receptacle
    opening about the inner periphery thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    355+,   for stopper type closures not so constructed as to impede closure
    removal.


CLS 215/212
TXT Devices under subclass 211, provided with means to deform the closure into
    sealing relationship with the inner surface of the receptacle neck or mouth.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses do not include closures
    formed solely from a mass of resilient or deformable material which deforms
    as the closures are inserted into the receptacle mouth, e.g., corks.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280,    for separate expanding fasteners which are applied to the closure;

    358,    for expanding stoppers of the "nonchildproof" type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses 78, 79, 108, and 109 for expanding
    type closures and bungs.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 233+ for expansible plugs for metallic
    receptacles.


CLS 215/213
TXT Devices under subclass 211, in which there is provided means obstructing
    ready removal of the closure which means having at least portions thereof
    either repositioned to an alternate portion on the receptacle or entirely
    removed therefrom to enable the closure to be grasped for removal.


CLS 215/214
TXT Devices under subclass 211 which are attached to the receptacle by means of
    threads, interrupted threads or lugs which require a rotary movement of the
    closure for removal thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329+,   for cap type closures secured by threads and subclasses 356+ for
    stopper type closures secured by threads, neither of which are so construed
    as to impede closure removal.


CLS 215/215
TXT Devices under subclass 201, wherein the obstruction means comprises
    insertion or use of a hand held instrument or tool to facilitate closure
    removal.

    (1)     Note.  A tool is differentiated from a key in that a key is unique
    to the lock to be opened, where as a tool may be improvised, e.g., knife
    substituted for a screwdriver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207,    for closures with key actuated lock; 302, for closures of the
    "nonchildproof" type having tool engaging means to facilitate closure
    removal.


CLS 215/216
TXT Devices under subclass 201, in which the closure includes a flexible
    obstruction means, either integral therewith or attached thereto, for
    cooperating with complementary means on the receptacle for securing the
    closure on the receptacle, the obstruction means being movable to allow for
    closure removal.


CLS 215/217
TXT Devices under subclass 201 in which threads or thread-like means are
    provided allowing for simultaneous rotating and reciprocating movement
    between the closure and the receptacle, the thread-like means being either
    continuous or discontinuous and may have a length substantially less than
    the circumference of the receptacle neck.


CLS 215/218
TXT Devices under subclass 217, wherein a threaded rotatable obstruction
    surrounds the neck of the receptacle and is attached to the closure in such
    a manner that relative rotation between the closure and the obstruction
    must be achieved in a prescribed manner to allow closure removal.


CLS 215/219
TXT Devices under subclass 217 in which the closure included an overlying
    buffer or obstacle for shielding the closure from direct hand engagement,
    and mounted for relative rotary and/or axial movement therewith, but being
    either movable to or having a portion thereof movable to engage the closure
    in clutching relationship for simultaneous opening and/or closing movement
    therewith.


CLS 215/220
TXT Devices under subclass 219 wherein the overlying obstacle means or portion
    thereof is movable in a direction along the axis of the receptacle mouth to
    engage the closure for simultaneous axial movement therewith.


CLS 215/221
TXT Devices under subclass 217 in which there is provided obstacle means which
    are movable to an alternate position to enable the closure to be grasped
    for removal from the receptacle.


CLS 215/222
TXT Devices under subclass 217 wherein the closure and receptacle include
    interlocking means constructed to permit rapid removal of the closure,
    rotation of the closure to be either secured to or removed from the
    receptacle being less than 360o.


CLS 215/223
TXT Devices under subclass 201 wherein the closure and receptacle portion
    cooperating therewith include structure requiring sequential rotary and
    axial movement therebetween, such sequential movement allowing closure
    removal in a step-by-step manner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208,    for similar structure where the direction of rotation or axial
    movement of the closure must be reversed at least once when removing the
    closure from the receptacle.


CLS 215/224
TXT Device under subclass 201 wherein the closure and receptacle include mating
    interlocking portions, at least one of the portions being flexibly
    distorted while traversing the other, the interlocking portions serving to
    fixedly maintain the closure in closed position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    317,    for resiliently distortable caps of general application, i.e., not
    including closure removal inpeding means.


CLS 215/225
TXT Devices under subclass 224, wherein a guard or retainer means is provided
    to normally shield the closure thereby preventing normal closure removal
    action, the guard or retainer means or a part thereof being movable to an
    adjusted position whereby the closure may be removed from the receptacle.


CLS 215/226
TXT Devices under subclass 200, wherein the closure is a substitute or
    replacement closure and has attached thereto means, such as a corkscrew or
    a crown-cap remover, for removing the closure to be replaced.


CLS 215/227
TXT Device under subclass 200 wherein a disparate article or material is
    separable from (1) the closing means, or (2) a retainer associated with the
    closing means.


CLS 215/228
TXT Devices under subclass 200 wherein the closure is (1) associated with a
    disparate article or (2) when not in use as a closure will function as a
    disparate article or is modifiable or rearrangable to function as a
    disparate article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231,    for a closure or means associated therewith, which purposely
    depresses or contacts the receptacle contents.


CLS 215/229
TXT Devices under subclass 228 combined with a drinking straw.


CLS 215/230
TXT Devices under subclass 200 in which the closure includes or is provided
    with claimed characteristic marks, colors, signs, etc. comprising visible
    means to impart information to a would-be user of the receptacle contents.

    (1)     Note.  Mere displacement of a member or a part or adjunct thereof
    to a position where it may be more readily seen is not considered to be
    indicia for classification here.


CLS 215/231
TXT Devices under subclass 200, wherein the closure or means associated with
    the closure (1) depresses the receptacle contents below a given or desired
    level or (2) is specifically designed to contact the receptacle contents
    for an expressed purpose.


CLS 215/232
TXT Devices under subclass 200 wherein (1) the closure is attached, welded or
    fused to the receptacle by the application of thermal, sonic or other
    energy form or (2) the closure is secured by adhesive or other bonding
    material which was applied to the closure or receptacle mouth prior to
    placing the closure in closed position.


CLS 215/233
TXT Devices under subclass 200, which are placed in their closed position and
    subsequently sealed to the receptacle by the application of a hardenable
    liquid or plastic material such as parafin.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232,    for closures sealed or bonded to the receptacle, the sealing or
    bonding agent having been applied to the closure or receptacle prior to
    placing the closure in closed position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 650+ for a static contact seal for other than an
    internal combustion engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable having a
    particular sealing material or construction.


CLS 215/234
TXT Devices under subclass 200, in which a reservoir of liquid is located at
    the closure-receptacle interface to seal the interior of the receptacle
    from the ambient atmosphere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 590+ for a seal between fixed parts or having static
    contact against relatively movable parts.


CLS 215/235
TXT Devices under subclass 200, wherein the closure is pivotally attached to
    the receptacle about the mouth or opening thereof in such a manner as to
    swing to and from a closing position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 334+ for pivoted closures for metallic
    receptacles.


CLS 215/236
TXT Devices under subclass 235, wherein the closure pivot is perpendicular to
    the plane of the closure.


CLS 215/237
TXT Devices under subclass 235, wherein the pivoted closure is provided with
    means to positively fasten it in its closed position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273,    for separate applied fasteners for nonpivoted closures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 315 for means for fastening closures to
    metallic receptacles.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, for general closure fasteners.


CLS 215/238
TXT Devices under subclass 237, utilizing a camming action to fasten the
    closure in place.


CLS 215/239
TXT Devices under subclass 237, wherein the closure is pivoted on a yoke or
    bail and is fastened in closed position by a lever action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284,    for separate applied fasteners of the lever actuated clamp type.


CLS 215/240
TXT Devices under subclass 239, wherein the novelty lies in the specified
    structure of the closure itself.


CLS 215/241
TXT Devices under subclass 240, wherein the closure is provided with a peculiar
    hole or slot through which the yoke or bail passes.


CLS 215/242
TXT Devices under subclass 239, wherein the closure is clamped in place by
    means of a lever which bears directly on the closure.


CLS 215/243
TXT Devices under subclass 237 wherein the closure is fastened in place by
    means of a screw type clamp bearing on the closure or by mating screw
    threads on the closure and receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 334+, for pivoted closures for metallic
    receptacles in which the closure is also mounted for rotation about a
    central axis.


CLS 215/244
TXT Devices under subclass 237, wherein the fastening means is in the form of
    one or more springs.


CLS 215/245
TXT Devices under subclass 244, wherein the closure is fastened in place by
    means of a resilient catch or hook which cooperates with a mating indent,
    detent or like member.


CLS 215/246
TXT Devices under subclass 200, in which a closure, or a fastener or seal
    associated therewith, shrinks into its applied position on the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273,    for nonshrinkable, separately applied closure fasteners.


CLS 215/247
TXT Devices under subclass 200, wherein the closure includes an elastic or
    rubber like portion intended to be penetrated by a hollow needle or like
    means through which the contents of the receptacle may be removed.The
    elastic or rubber like portion seals itself about the needle when inserted,
    and likewise, seals itself after the needle has been withdrawn.


CLS 215/248
TXT Devices under subclass 247, wherein the closure means includes a vent means
    provided with a porous substance to cleanse air entering the receptacle in
    response to removal of contents therefrom.


CLS 215/249
TXT Devices under subclass 247, wherein the piercable closure is provided with
    an overlying cover or cover portion, the removal of such cover requiring
    the breaking of its connection to the remainder of the closure means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250+,   for frangible closures, per se.


CLS 215/250
TXT Devices under subclass 200 which are attached to the receptacle in such a
    manner that all or a portion of the closure or its connecting means must be
    broken or smashed in order to give access to the receptacle or secondary
    closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249,    for pierceable type closures protected by a frangible cover.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 265+, for metallic receptacles having
    frangible closures.

    401,    Coating Implement With Material Supply, subclass 132 for a supply
    cartridge for a hand-manipulable coating implement with material supply,
    which cartridge has a frangible closure which is broken for establishing
    flow to the tool; and indented subclasses 133+ for a hand implement which
    includes means for cutting or piercing the frangible closure.


CLS 215/251
TXT Devices under subclass 250, wherein an outer closure or seal is designed to
    be totally or partially destroyed to give access to an inner or secondary
    closure.


CLS 215/252
TXT Devices under subclass 250, wherein rotation of the closure causes it to
    fracture from the means which retained or connected the closure to the
    receptacle. The closure itself is not damaged and may be reused until the
    contents of the receptacle have been consumed.


CLS 215/253
TXT Devices under subclass 250, wherein the closure or its receptacle attaching
    means is provided with one or more points or lines of weakness which will
    fracture upon the application of pressure.


CLS 215/254
TXT Devices under subclass 253, wherein the weakened lines or points define a
    strip which can be grasped and torn away.


CLS 215/255
TXT Devices under subclass 254, wherein the tearstrip has attached thereto by
    means of a rivet, weld, etc., an actuator which may be grasped to initiate
    the fracture of the weakened areas.


CLS 215/256
TXT Devices under subclass 254, wherein the lines of weakness extend around the
    circumference of the neck or mouth of the receptacle.


CLS 215/257
TXT Devices under subclass 250, having a string, wire or the like, which when
    pulled will rip or tear the closure and allow it to be removed.


CLS 215/258
TXT Devices under subclss 200, wherein the closure includes a part normally
    secured thereto, but which separates therefrom and remains with the
    receptacle in the act of removing the closure.

    (1)     Note.  The separated part remaining with the closure is usually
    intended to indicate unauthorized tampering.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250+,   for closures of the same type which are frangible rather than
    merely separable.


CLS 215/259
TXT Devices under subclass 200, provided with a liquid barrier through which
    gas must pass as it enters or escapes from the closed receptacle.


CLS 215/260
TXT Devices under subclass 200, wherein the closure is (1) provided with a
    valve means which is automatically responsive to a positive pressure within
    the receptacle, or (2) the closure itself acts as a valve and moves
    responsive to internal pressure.


CLS 215/261
TXT Devices under subclass 200, wherein gas enters or escapes from a receptacle
    by flowing through a member impervious to liquid.

    (1)     Note.  Aged or very dry cork may naturally be permeable to gas and
    impermeable to liquid.The mere usage of cork in a closure, without a clear
    indication that the cork was used for this quality, will not permit
    classification in this subclass.


CLS 215/262
TXT Devices under subclass 200, wherein the closure is provided with means to
    manually release a negative pressure within the receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  The devices in this subclass are usually for the purpose of
    assisting in closure removal.


CLS 215/263
TXT Devices under subclass 200, wherein the closure is not removable from the
    receptacle, and when moved to its open position may not be moved back to
    its closed position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    307+,   for movable, resealable closures.


CLS 215/264
TXT Devices under subclass 200, wherein the closure is of the stopper type and
    is drawn from its nonclosing position within the interior of the
    receptacle, to its closing position within the neck or mouth of the
    receptacle.


CLS 215/265
TXT Devices under subclass 264, wherein the receptacle opening is provided with
    at least two closures, at least one of which is drawn from its nonclosing
    position within the interior of the receptacle to its closing position
    within the neck or mouth of the receptacle.


CLS 215/266
TXT Devices under subclass 264, wherein the closure is in the shape of a sphere
    or ball and is usually made of elastic or rubber like material.


CLS 215/267
TXT Devices under subclass 264, wherein the closure is provided with means
    extending to the exterior of the receptacle, forming a manipulator to move
    the closure to its open and closed positions.


CLS 215/268
TXT Devices under subclass 267, wherein the manipulator is of wire or like
    material.


CLS 215/269
TXT Devices under subclass 200, wherein the closure includes means having a
    closed chamber with at least one deformable wall, and means to introduce
    fluid into or to pressurize fluid within said chamber to expand and move
    said wall to effect sealing of the closure to the container.


CLS 215/270
TXT Devices under subclass 200, whererin the closure is provided with sealing
    means which is responsive to a pressure differential existing between the
    container interior and the ambient to effect sealing of the closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    260,    for a closure with a pressure responsive valve.


CLS 215/271
TXT Devices under subclass 200, wherein the closure is provided with means
    allowing it to expand in response to an increase in internal receptacle
    pressure, thus providing an increase in total receptacle-closure sealer
    without unseating the closure from its closed position.


CLS 215/272
TXT Devices under subclass 200, having some positive manually actuated means
    for contracting the depending skirt portion of the closure or parts
    thereof, about the external wall of the receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  Depending lugs would be considered skirt portions for the
    purposes of this subclass.


CLS 215/273
TXT Devices under subclass 200, wherein the closure is held in its closed
    position by a separate and distinct fastening means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237+,   for pivoted closures provided with fastening means.

    293     and 294, for closures with attached fastening means.

    329,    for cap closures with integral screw threads.

    346,    for a gasket, seal or liner which seal or liner secures the closure
    to the receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    292,    Closure Fasterners, for closure fasteners, per se.


CLS 215/274
TXT Devices under subclass 273, wherein the fastener is in the form of a ring
    which surrounds the receptacle mouth and closure binding them together.A
    ring of this type would not, in and of itself, form a closure.

    (1)     Note. An example of a ring type fastener is the screw threaded ring
    which holds the closure in place on the standard "Mason" jar. This note is
    meant purely as an example as the inclusion of a screw thread would place
    the patent in indented subclass 276.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 319+ for closure fasteners for metallic
    receptacles in the form of a ring.


CLS 215/275
TXT Devices under subclass 274, in which the ring fastener contracts or is
    provided with means to contract it into engagement with the receptacle and
    closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272,    for closures with attached contracting fastening means.


CLS 215/276
TXT Devices under subclass 274, in which the ring fastener fits into
    screw-threaded engagement with the receptacle.


CLS 215/277
TXT Devices under subclass 273, wherein the closure is held in its closed
    position by a retainer which completely surrounds, overlies or envelopes
    the closure.As defined, a cap must have a depending skirt or portion
    thereof.


CLS 215/278
TXT Devices under subclass 277, wherein the cap type retainer is bound or tied
    to the receptacle by means of a wire, cord, integral strand like portion,
    or the like.


CLS 215/279
TXT Devices under subclass 273, wherein the fastener includes means which
    expand or may be expanded into contact with the receptacle or closure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 320 for expanding-ring closure-fasteners.


CLS 215/280
TXT Devices under subclass 273, wherein the fastening means exerts a positive
    force on the closure or a part thereof causing the closure to remain in a
    closed position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 315+ for closure fasteners for metallic
    receptacles.


CLS 215/281
TXT Devices under subclass 280, wherein the fastening means exerts a clamping
    action by reason of a sliding engagement with one or more inclined surfaces
    or interrupted threads.The sliding action is caused by a rotation of the
    closure or the fastener about a vertial axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    285     and 286, for bail type fasteners which clamp by means of sliding
    contact with an inclined surface.


CLS 215/282
TXT Devices under subclass 281, wherein the fastening means comprises a spring
    type clamp acting in cooperation with inclines or interrupted threads.


CLS 215/283
TXT Devices under subclass 280, wherein the clamp fastening means is actuated
    by means of a rotatable screw or nut type device.


CLS 215/284
TXT Devices under subclass 280, wherein the clamp type fastening means is
    actuated by means of a lever.


CLS 215/285
TXT Devices under subclass 284, wherein a lever actuates a generally "U" shaped
    element, the legs of which are either directly or indirectly pivotally
    connected to the receptacle on opposite sides of the passage to be closed,
    and the cross member of which bears directly or indirectly against the
    closure to clamp it in the closed position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286,    for nonlever actuated bails.


CLS 215/286
TXT Devices under subclass 280, wherein the clamping member is a "U" shaped
    element, the legs of which are either directly or indirectly pivotally
    connected to the container on opposite sides of the passage to be sealed
    and the cross-member of which directly or indirectly bears against the
    closure to hold it in the sealing position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    285,    for lever actuated bails.


CLS 215/287
TXT Devices under subclass 280, wherein the clamping action is obtained by
    means of a resilient spring member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    293,    for spring type fasteners which are attached to the closure.


CLS 215/288
TXT Devices under subclass 287, wherein at least a portion of said spring
    member includes a plurality of consecutively disposed windings.


CLS 215/289
TXT Devices under subclass 287, wherein said spring member is a wire, bar, or
    other elongate single-piece body having one end thereof permanently hinged
    to the receptacle, or to a separate stationary support on the receptacle,
    for rotation about a horizontal axis, and releasably engageable with (1)
    the closure alone, or (2) the closure and the receptacle, or (3) the
    closure and a separate retainer on the receptacle.


CLS 215/290
TXT Devices under subclass 287, wherein said spring member is a wire, bar, or
    other elongated single-piece body forming (1) a cross-member extended
    completely across, and engaged, directly or indirectly with at least one
    point on the upper surface of a closure, and (2) end portions turned
    downward from said cross-member and releasably gripping the exterior side
    surface of the receptacle at points substantially diametrically apposed
    thereon, whereby said cross-member is biased downward against said closure
    upper surface.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a clip the cross-member of which (1)
    carries a separate member that contacts a closure, or (2) contacts a
    separate member seated on a closure, e.g., a wedge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286,    for a bail type clamping fastener the cross-member of which carries
    a spring engageable with a closure to resiliently bias it against a
    receptacle.


CLS 215/291
TXT Devices under subclass 280, consisting of flexible members such as string,
    wire, paper, etc., which wrap around, extend through or otherwise secure
    the closure to the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14+,    for receptacles modified in such a manner as to provide a wire or
    flexible tie which renders the receptacle substantially nonrefillable.

    278,    for such devices combined with cap type fasteners.


CLS 215/292
TXT Devices under subclass 273, wherein the closure is retained by a disk
    superposed thereon, both closure and disk being positioned within the neck
    or mouth of the receptacle and the disk exerting a radical force on the
    closure, against the internal wall of the receptacle.


CLS 215/293
TXT Devices under subclass 200, wherein a spring type fastener is permanently
    attached to the closure, or is designed in such a manner as not to be
    intentionally removed during normal use, and engages the exterior walls of
    the receptacle about the neck or mouth thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    287+,   for spring type fasteners which are separately applied to and
    removable from the closure during normal use.


CLS 215/294
TXT Devices under subclass 200, wherein the closure is of the stopper type and
    has attached thereto a clamping type fastener which engages the inner walls
    of the receptacle usually in the area about the neck or mouth thereof.  The
    fastening means usually expands or is caused to expand to provide the
    clamping action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    279,    for separate expanding fasteners applied to the closure;

    358,    for stopper type closures which expand.


CLS 215/295
TXT Devices under subclass 200, wherein the closure was specifically designed
    or is provided with specific means, the sole purpose of which is to
    facilitate or assist in the removal or opening thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250,    for closures designed to be broken or smashed but having no means
    for breaking the closure.

    296,    for opening devices for stopper-type closures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 3.7+ for closure cap and/or cork removing tools.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 260+ for opening devices for closures for
    metallic receptacles.


CLS 215/296
TXT Devices under subclass 295, wherein the opening means is designed to assist
    in removing a closure which has no external depending flange, skirt or
    portion thereof, and which depends into the mouth or neck of the receptacle
    and engages the internal walls thereof.


CLS 215/297
TXT Devices under subclass 296, including a separate member having at least one
    spike thereon that is thrust into or through the closure when the closure
    is to be removed, the member then being moved away from the mouth of the
    receptacle to withdraw the impaled closure from the latter.


CLS 215/298
TXT Devices under subclass 296, wherein the stopper type closure is in the form
    of a disk and is modified to provide a hand or finger pull tab.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305,    for hand or finger tabs on cap or crown type closures.


CLS 215/299
TXT Devices under subclass 296, wherein (1) the closure is formed with a cavity
    such as an aperture or a groove, and (2) a portion of a wire, cord, or
    other means facilitating removal of the closure is permanently positioned
    in said cavity and serves as a pre-assembled part of the receptacle-closure
    package supplied to a consumer.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a closure under the class definition having
    a closure removing member, or part associated therewith, either thrust into
    the closure or inserted into a preformed cavity therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    296,    for a stopper having a wire cord or other member pressed into its
    side surface as the stopper is pushed into the mouth of a receptacle with
    the aforesaid element lying between the receptacle and the stopper.


CLS 215/300
TXT Devices under subclass 299, wherein said cavity is formed in the wall of
    the closure which faces the inner surface of the mouth of the receptacle.


CLS 215/301
TXT Devices under subclass 295, wherein the closure has a receptacle gripping
    means, and such means is disengaged from the receptacle when the closure
    receives a downwardly applied force. Usually the applied force causes a
    depending flange or skirt to flare outwardly.


CLS 215/302
TXT Devices under subclass 295, wherein the closure or receptacle is modified
    in such a manner as to accept a tool for the purpose of closure removal.


CLS 215/303
TXT Devices under subclass 295, wherein the opening means is separate and
    distinct from the closure and may or may not be physcially attached thereto.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a closure with a nonintegral tab or
    projection that can be pulled to remove the closure from the receptacle.


CLS 215/304
TXT Devices under subclass 303, wherein the opening means is in the form of a
    lever.


CLS 215/305
TXT Devices under subclass 295, wherein the closure is modified to provide hand
    or finger engaging projection or to facilitate closure removal.


CLS 215/306
TXT Devices under subclass 200, having means to loosely attach the closure to
    the receptacle when the closure is in open position to prevent the loss or
    accidental misslaying of such closure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 375 for metallic closures having a single
    strand type retainer.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 538+, 543 and 544+ for dispensers with
    retaining means for discharge guides, removable outlet elements and
    closures respectively, and see the notes thereto.


CLS 215/307
TXT Devices under subclass 200, wherein the closure (1) has a aperture
    extending therethrough, (2) a portion of the closure is spaced from the
    receptacle wall when in closed position, or (3) is nonremovable, but
    movable to an open or partially open position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 366.1 and 367.1+ for vented closures for
    metallic receptacles.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 478+ for dispenser with plural openings or
    discharge guides.


CLS 215/308
TXT Devices under subclass 307, wherein the passage includes a filtering means.


CLS 215/309
TXT Devices under subclass 307, provided with a separate passage to admit fluid
    into the receptacle as the contents are removed.


CLS 215/310
TXT Devices under subclass 307, wherein the closure is of the disk type which
    has a small, openable aperture therein which usually serves as a pouring
    opening or aperture through which a drinking straw is received.


CLS 215/311
TXT Devices under subclass 307, wherein the aperture or passage is provided
    with a flow regulating or retarding valve.


CLS 215/312
TXT Devices under subclass 311, wherein the valve is a ball type valve.


CLS 215/313
TXT Devices under subclass 311, wherein the valve or an element thereof is
    rotated to an open and closed position.


CLS 215/314
TXT Devices under subclass 311, in which the valve is operated by a screw type
    actuator.


CLS 215/315
TXT Devices under subclass 311, in which the valve is operated by a spring type
    actuator.


CLS 215/316
TXT Devices under subclass 200, wherein the closure rests on top of the
    receptacle and has a depending skirt or flange or portion thereof, which
    envelopes the mouth of the receptacle and embraces the external walls
    thereof.

    (1)     Note.  A cap type closure combined with stopper structure
    (structure which depends into the mouth or neck of the receptacle and
    engages the internal walls thereof) is classified in this (316) subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    355+,   for stopper structure, per se.


CLS 215/317
TXT Devices under subclass 316, which are (1) made of an elastic, flexible or
    semi-flexible material or (2) are constructed in such a manner that
    flexibility is inherent in order that the closure will "snap" into a closed
    position or otherwise frictionally engage the external portion of the
    receptacle mouth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272,    for cap closures having positive means, usually hand manipulable,
    to contract the depending skirt portion about the receptacle neck.

    293,    for closures having attached thereto spring type fastening means.

    322,    for closures that slide in a plane transverse to the receptacle
    axis in the opening and closing movement.


CLS 215/318
TXT Devices under subclass 317, wherein the closure is pushed over the mouth of
    the receptacle and elastically conforms to thread like members on the
    receptacle and requires a twisting or turning movement for removal thereof.


CLS 215/319
TXT Devices under subclass 317, wherein the closure is designed in such a
    manner that it will fit more than one size of receptacle.


CLS 215/320
TXT Devices under subclass 317, wherein a portion of the closure depends into
    the mouth or neck of the receptacle and engages the interior surface
    thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    321,    for closures wherein the closure and receptacle have preformed,
    coating configurations.


CLS 215/321
TXT Devices under subclass 317, wherein the closure and receptacle have
    preformed or shaped areas, such as indents and detents, which coact with
    each other to hold the closure in closed position.


CLS 215/322
TXT Devices under subclass 316, wherein the closure or receptacle is provided
    with structure which requires the closure to slide into the closed or open
    position in a direction which is transverse to the axis of the receptacle
    mouth or opening.


CLS 215/323
TXT Devices under subclass 316, including (1) a strip formed into a cylinder by
    bringing opposite ends thereof adjacent each other, and (2) a disc closing
    one end of said cylinder.


CLS 215/324
TXT Devices under subclass 316, wherein the depending flange or skirt portion
    is crimped or pleated about the receptacle neck to hold it in place.Such
    crimping is usually done in-situ.


CLS 215/325
TXT Devices under subclass 324, wherein the closure structure includes stopper
    type structure which extends into and engages the internal receptacle walls.


CLS 215/326
TXT Devices under subclass 324, which are made of thin flexible material such
    as paper, cardboard or thin metal foil.


CLS 215/327
TXT Devices under subclass 324, wherein a resilient seal member is deformed or
    compressed by the crimped portion of the cap against the exterior wall of
    the receptacle, thus holding the cap on the receptacle.


CLS 215/328
TXT Devices under subclass 324, wherein at least a part of depending portion of
    the cap skirt is deformed (crimped) into circumferentially alternating,
    vertically disposed ridges and crests, the crimping action forcing the
    ridges into contact with the external walls of the receptacle neck.


CLS 215/329
TXT Devices under subclass 316, wherein (1) the closure and the receptacle are
    respectively provided with keepers, and (2) relative rotation between said
    keeper secures the closure in, or releases it from, a closing position on
    the receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  The keepers may be in the form of indents, detents, slots,
    grooves, bends or any other form which produces threads, lugs or bayonet
    joint.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 288+ for screw closures for a metallic
    receptacle.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 549+ for dispensers with screw type closures.


CLS 215/330
TXT Devices under subclass 329, having means preventing unintentional rotation
    of the closure in the direction which releases the closure from the
    receptacle.


CLS 215/331
TXT Devices under subclass 329, including a member that juts from a wall of the
    closure or the receptacle and engages a keeper to stop its rotation when
    the closure has reached a predetermined applied position on the receptacle.


CLS 215/332
TXT Devices under subclass 329, wherein one keeper projects from the closure or
    receptacle wall, and the other keeper is a slot having substantially
    vertical and horizontal portions that successively receive the projecting
    keeper as the closure and receptacle are being interlocked.


CLS 215/333
TXT Devices under subclass 329, wherein (1) the lower portion of the closure
    skirt is turned upward around its entire perimeter to form a narrow
    reinforcing rim thereon, and (2) rim is displaced inwardly, flattened, or
    otherwise deformed to form a keeper engageable with a keeper on the
    receptacle.


CLS 215/334
TXT Devices under subclass 329, wherein (1) the keeper on the closure is a
    separate member, or (2) the closure skirt includes a first wall formed with
    a keeper, and a second wall disposed outside the first wall and not formed
    with a keeper.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include a double-wall cap having a
    smooth exterior surface if the inner cap wall is a liner which conformably
    abuts a keeper-forming corrugation by keeper indentation on the inner
    surface of the outer cap wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    337,    for a cap in which abutting inner and outer walls are corrugated or
    indented as a unit in forming a keeper.


CLS 215/335
TXT Devices under subclass 329, wherein the keeper is on the receptacle and is
    nonintegral or has been separately applied thereto.


CLS 215/336
TXT Devices under subclass 329, wherein (1) at least one slit extends through a
    sheet forming the closure skirt, said slit being spaced from the edge of
    said sheet, and (2) a portion of said sheet is deflected inward to separate
    the opposed edges of said slit and form a projection engageable with a
    keeper on the receptacle.


CLS 215/337
TXT Devices under subclass 329, wherein a sheet forming the closure skirt is
    bent to form (1) a keeper-forming indent extending circumferentially of,
    and inclined relative to, the axis of revolution of the skirt, or (2)
    keeper-forming indents spaced circumferentially of said skirt.

    (1)     Note.  The keeper forming indent may be concave toward either the
    interior or exterior of the cap skirt.


CLS 215/338
TXT Devices under subclass 329, wherein a superficial of the closure skirt wall
    is cut away to form a keeper strip attached at one end to said wall and
    projecting inwardly therefrom.


CLS 215/339
TXT Devices under subclass 329, wherein the lower edge of the closure skirt is
    curled upward and inward at points spaced apart circumferentially thereof,
    forming projections engageable with keepers on the receptacle.


CLS 215/340
TXT Devices under 329, wherein a projection extends substantially, horizontally
    inward from the lower edge of the closure skirt to form a keeper.


CLS 215/341
TXT Device under subclass 316, wherein the closure is provided with a definite,
    indentificable gasket, seal or liner, which may or may not be integral with
    the closure.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses are intended to provide a
    loci for patents in which the inventive concept lies in the structure of
    the gasket, seal or liner, or in the manner in which the gasket seal or
    liner cooperates with the closure, receptacle or there-between. The mere
    claiming of a gasket seal or liner would not, in and of itself, be
    sufficient to place a patent in this or the indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 378 for packing for metallic receptacle
    closures.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 628+ for a static contact seal for other than an
    internal combustion engine, or a pipe, conduit or cable.


CLS 215/342
TXT Device under subclass 341, wherein the seal means is held in sealing
    position by a resilient, deformable means compressed between the closure
    and the seal.The closure itself may be so structured as to function as the
    spring.


CLS 215/343
TXT Device under subclass 341, wherein the closure, gasket or seal has an
    annular depending portion which fits into sealing engagement at or about
    the top of the receptacle opening.


CLS 215/344
TXT Device under subclass 343, wherein the annular sealing depending part
    comprises an inseparable component of the closure.


CLS 215/345
TXT Devices under subclass 343, wherein said annular portion depends from a
    substantially horizontal portion of a seal ring.


CLS 215/346
TXT Devices under subclass 341, wherein the closure and/or receptacle is
    provided with a rib, groove or like means against which the seal coacts to
    simultaneously seal and positively secure the closure of the receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  The seal means may or may not be deformable.


CLS 215/347
TXT Devices under subclass 341, in which the gasket, seal or liner comprises a
    unitary layered structure wherein at least one of the layers or sheets is
    made of a material or has properties differing from other layers or sheets
    of the seal.


CLS 215/348
TXT Devices under subclass 341, wherein the seal means comprises an elastic
    material having voids or cells uniformly distributed therein.


CLS 215/349
TXT Devices under subclass 341, wherein the seal means is an imperforate member
    extending across the mouth of the receptacle and having a substantially
    circular perimeter and no depending skirt.


CLS 215/350
TXT Devices under subclass 349, wherein the closure includes means, integral
    with or attached thereto, to hold the disk type seal in a fixed position
    therewith.


CLS 215/351
TXT Devices under subclass 349, wherein the closure is deformed to provide an
    annular depending ring shaped portion which engages the disk and holds it
    against the mouth of the receptacle.


CLS 215/352
TXT Devices under subclass 341, wherein the seal means is a separate annular
    member and may or may not be mounted on the closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    345,    for an annular ring type seal having an annular rib depending
    therefrom.


CLS 215/353
TXT Devices under subclass 316, wherein the depending portion of the cap has a
    larger diametral dimension at its rim than at its connection to the top of
    the cap.


CLS 215/354
TXT Devices under subclass 316, wherein the closure structure includes stopper
    type structure which extends into and engages the internal receptacle walls.


CLS 215/355
TXT Devices under subclass 200, wherein the closure extends into and is
    encircled by the receptacle mouth and engages the interior walls of the
    receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  See the appropriate class for stoppers peculiar to a
    classified art.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittons, subclass 295 for plugs for
    sink strainers.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 801+ for slip type closures for metallic
    receptacles.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 563 for plug closures for dispensers.


CLS 215/356
TXT Devices under subclass 355, wherein the closure is concurrently or
    successively directed in rotary and reciprocatory movement about continuous
    or discontinuous screw threads or thread like means in an ever tightening
    or loosening action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329,    for like devices for cap type closures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclass 107 for bung-hole closures with
    screw-thread or bayonet locking means.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 288+ for screw-type closures for metallic
    receptacles.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 552, for dispensers with screw plugs.


CLS 215/357
TXT Devices under subclass 356, wherein the screw threads are interrupted or do
    not extend continuously around the receptacle.


CLS 215/358
TXT Devices under subclass 355, wherein the stopper is expanded into scaling
    engagement with the mouth of the receptacle to be sealed.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses do not include stoppers
    formed solely from a mass of resilient or deformable material which deforms
    as the stoppers are inserted into the receptacle mouth, e.g., corks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses 78, 79, 108, and 109, for expanding
    type closures and bungs.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 233+, for expansible pluts for metallic
    receptacles.


CLS 215/359
TXT Devices under subclass 358, provided with means having a specially
    configured surface or a pivoted actuating bar to effect expansion of the
    stopper.


CLS 215/360
TXT Devices under subclass 358, wherein threaded means are employed to effect
    expansion of the stopper.


CLS 215/361
TXT Devices under subclass 358, wherein a rod-like member coacts with the
    stopper to effect expansion and contraction of the stopper.


CLS 215/362
TXT Devices under subclass 358, wherein the stopper is composed of material
    which is expanded beyond its elastic limit into permanent sealing
    relationship with the receptacle.


CLS 215/363
TXT Devices under subclass 355, wherein the stopper type closure is in the form
    of a disk.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is intended to include all simple disk type
    stopper closures whether they are flat or slightly convex or concave.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227,    for disk closures with hand engageable tab opening means.

    292,    for disk type fasteners for stopper type closures.

    310,    for disk closures with a small, openable aperture therein.


CLS 215/364
TXT Devices under subclass 355, which are composed of a plurality of specified
    parts or materials.


CLS 215/365
TXT Receptacles under the class definition having means to indicate: (1) an
    amount of content, either within the receptacle or being withdrawn, (2) the
    nature of the content, usually that of being dangerous to human
    consumption, or (3) that the content has been altered in some way.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     and 250, for frangible necks and closures respectively.

    201+,   for "childproof" closures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 310+ for bottle
    labels or mere modification of the bottle to receive a label.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 427+ for measuring receptacles
    having means for indicating quantity of material therein.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 23+ for dispensing receptacles with
    indicators.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclass 194 for a coating
    implement with material supply having signal or indicator means perceptible
    for determining the amount, condition or rate of flow of the material.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses
    10.1+ for a combination of a Class 424 composition with an identification
    or warning feature.


CLS 215/366
TXT Receptacles under subclass 365 wherein the structure to indicate is located
    interior of the receptacle.


CLS 215/367
TXT Receptacles under subclass 365 wherein the indicating means is designed to
    warn the potential user as to the harmful or poisonous nature of the
    contents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 72 for poison-containers which
    make a noise or produce an alarm when moved.


CLS 215/370
TXT END WALL STRUCTURE:

    Bottle, jug, or jar under the class definition wherein a structure forming
    the end or bottom wall of the container is claimed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 600+ for an end wall structure of a
    receptacle of that class type.


CLS 215/371
TXT One-piece side and end wall:

    Subject matter under subclass 370 wherein the side and end wall are of
    one-piece construction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 604 for a receptacle of that class type
    having a similar structure.


CLS 215/372
TXT Support structure permanently affixed:

    Subject matter under subclass 371 including a structure attached to or part
    of the side or end wall, which structure is not removable, and which
    supports the bottle, jug, or jar against the pull of gravity when resting
    on a surface.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    376,    for a similar support structure for a bottle, jug, or jar which
    does not have a one-piece side and end wall.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 605 for a receptacle under the class
    definition having a similar structure.


CLS 215/373
TXT One-piece with the container:

    Subject matter under subclass 372 wherein the support is formed one-piece
    with the end wall or side wall.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 606 for a receptacle of that class type
    having a similar structure.


CLS 215/374
TXT Footed support:

    Subject matter under subclass 373 wherein the support structure includes at
    least one foot (i.e., a protrusion) extending from the bottom wall.

    (1)     Note.  A foot is considered to encompass a portion extending beyond
    the bottle, jug, or jar bottom which supports the container against the
    pull of gravity when resting on a supporting surface. This can be a
    goblet-type container which includes a base portion and an elongated stem
    connecting the container and base portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    376,    for a similar support structure which does not have a one-piece
    side and end wall.


CLS 215/375
TXT Plurality of feet:

    Subject matter under subclass 374 wherein the bottle, jug, or jar is
    supported by more than one foot.


CLS 215/376
TXT Support structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 370 including a structure attached to or part
    of the side wall or end wall, which structure supports the bottle, jug, or
    jar against the pull of gravity when resting on a surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    372,    for a similar support structure for a bottle, jug, or jar which has
    a one-piece side and end wall.

    394,    for a support structure which holds as well as supports the bottle,
    jug, or jar.

    399,    for means attached to a bottle, jug, or jar for fastening it to a
    wall or similar support member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 628 for a receptacle of that class type
    having a similar structure.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 682+ for an article carried support in general.


CLS 215/377
TXT Footed support:

    Subclass matter under subclass 376 wherein the structure includes at least
    one foot or protrusion.

    (1)     Note.  A foot is considered to encompass a portion extending beyond
    the bottle, jug, or jar bottom which supports the container against the
    pull of gravity when resting on a supporting surface. This can be a
    goblet-type container which includes a base portion and an elongated stem
    connecting the container and base portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    374,    for a similar support structure for a bottle, jug, or jar which has
    a one-piece side and bottom wall.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 426 for a package or
    receptacle for a goblet-type drinking container.


CLS 215/378
TXT Apertured end wall:

    Subject matter under subclass 370 having an opening, other than for
    dispensing, in the end wall (e.g., an opening for venting).


CLS 215/379
TXT SIDEWALL STRUCTURE:

    Bottle, jug, or jar under the class definition including a structure which
    constitutes the main or side walls of the container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.1,   for a bottle, jug, or jar having spaced wall panels with air or a
    vacuum there between.

    12.2,   for a bottle, jug, or jar having coated or laminated walls.

    13.1,   for a bottle, jug, or jar having spaced wall panels with an
    insulating material between them.

    364,    for an end wall structure in a closure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 660 for a sidewall structure in a receptacle
    of that class type.


CLS 215/380
TXT Having an inlet or outlet opening:

    Subject matter under subclass 379 wherein the sidewall has an opening
    intended to receive or permit removal of the container contents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coating Means,
    various subclasses, particularly subclasses 297+ for a container having a
    funnel.

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 661 for a receptacle of that class type
    having an inlet or outlet opening.

    222,    Dispensing, various subclasses, particularly subclasses 566+  for a
    nozzle, spout, or pouring device.


CLS 215/381
TXT Pressure-responsive structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 379 wherein the sidewall is designed to move
    outwardly in response to pressure within the bottle, jug, or jar.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    900,    for a cross-reference art collection of containers having a
    collapsible wall structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 666 for a receptacle of that class type
    having a collapsible wall feature and cross-reference art collection 907
    for beverage cans having a collapsible wall structure.


CLS 215/382
TXT Contoured sidewall (e.g., curved, corrugated, ribbed, variable thickness,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 379 wherein the sidewall has a nonplanar
    configuration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 669 for a receptacle of that class type
    wherein the sidewall has a similar nonplanar configuration.


CLS 215/383
TXT Recess in sidewall:

    Subject matter under subclass 382 wherein the sidewall structure includes a
    depression.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for a bottle, jug, or jar having a recess for stacking.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 310 for a modification
    of a bottle to receive a label.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 23.2+ for horizontally attached receptacle
    sets having attachment recesses.


CLS 215/384
TXT Specified gripping structure:

    Subject matter under 383 wherein the sidewall has a one recessed portion
    intended to be used to grasp the bottle, jug, or jar.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 465.1+ for a dispensing container with a
    handle or handgrip.


CLS 215/385
TXT Apertured sidewall:

    Subject matter under subclass 379 wherein the sidewall has an opening which
    is not an access opening for the bottle, jug, or jar.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 676 for a receptacle of that class type
    wherein the sidewall has an opening which is not an access opening.


CLS 215/386
TXT ATTACHMENT OR ADJUNCT:

    Miscellaneous attachment for a bottle, jug, or jar under the class
    definition in the form of an additional or supplemental device to be
    secured to or in combination with the container.

    (1)     Note.  An attachmentlike structure which is unitary or one-piece
    with a bottle, jug, or jar for which there is no other classification will
    be classified here.


CLS 215/387
TXT Drinking device:

    Subject matter under subclass 386 wherein the attachment includes a
    structure to aid in the consumption of the liquid contents of the container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 703+ for attachments of that class type
    having structure intended to aid in the consumption of liquid contents.


CLS 215/388
TXT With straw or drinking tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 387 combined with a tubular element which is
    intended to be used to suck liquid from the bottle, jug, or jar.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229,    for a closure combined with a straw or drinking tube.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 705+ for an attachment of that class type
    including a tubular element which is intended to be used to suck liquid
    from the receptacle.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclass 103.1 for a
    paper receptacle having a drinking straw or tube.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 33 for a
    portable drinking tube or straw.


CLS 215/389
TXT Integral or nonseparable:

    Subject matter under subclass 388 wherein a portion of the straw or
    drinking tube is either integral with, or not removable from, the container
    or its closure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 709 and 710 for a receptacle of that class
    type having a straw or drinking tube which may form part of a closure or
    container.


CLS 215/390
TXT Tool or implement holder or attachment:

    Subject matter under subclass 386 wherein the attachment has structure for
    supporting a tool or implement intended to be used to manipulate a bottle,
    jug, or jar or its contents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    Dig. 5, for a spoon associated with a bottle, jug, or jar.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports: Racks, subclass 69.2 for a pen-rack attachment to an ink
    bottle.

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 697 for a holder for a tool or brush having a
    scraper element and subclasses 735+ for a holder for a tool or implement.


CLS 215/391
TXT For withdrawing contents from the container:

    Subject matter under subclass 390 wherein the implement or tool is
    configured and intended to be used to withdraw contents from the bottle,
    jug, or jar.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3+,     for a bottle, jug, or jar having means for positively ejecting the
    contents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 574.1 for a table dish with an attached
    device which aids in removing food from the dish.


CLS 215/392
TXT Drip-catching attachment:

    Subject matter under subclass 386 including a structure to absorb or
    collect moisture of condensation or drip accumulation on the exterior of a
    bottle, jug, or jar.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.1+,  for a protective jacket on a bottle and subclass 41 for a
    drip-catching feature as part of the neck structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 695+ for attachments having an edge
    intended to remove surplus material from a tool or implement when scraped
    across the edge and Dig. 5 for a collection of antidrip structures.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 108+ for a drip-catching structure on a
    dispenser and the search references under section 7 of that class
    definition for other drip and waste catchers.


CLS 215/393
TXT Container base support:

    Subject matter under subclass 392 wherein the drip-catching structure
    supports the bottle, jug, or jar when resting on a surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    372+,   for a bottle, jug, or jar, with a one-piece side and end wall,
    having support structure.

    376+,   for a bottle, jug, or jar, without a one-piece side and end wall,
    having support structure.

    399+,   for means attached to a bottle, jug, or jar for securing it to a
    wall or similar support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 502 for a cup and saucer.

    248,    Supports, subclass 346.11 or a coaster, per se, not attached to a
    container.


CLS 215/394
TXT Absorbent layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 393 wherein the support includes a layer
    which has moisture-absorbing properties.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 346.11 for a coaster which may have
    moisture-absorbing properties.


CLS 215/395
TXT Container support:

    Subject matter under subclass 386 including a structure intended to receive
    and support a bottle, jug, or jar when resting on a surface or when lifted.

    (1)     Note.  These holders usually remain with the container (i.e.,
    bottle, jug, or jar) during use, are removed after use, and then are reused
    with another container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 3.07+ and 3.49 for a jar holder.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 737+ for a structure intended to receive
    and support a receptacle of that class type and subclass 756 for a handle
    having a secondary function other than hand manipulation (e.g., as a
    support).

    222,    Dispensing, various subclasses for a holder combined with
    dispensing means.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 1.5+ for a
    holder for a disposable cup.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 682+ for an article carrier.

    294,    Handling: Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 27.1+ for
    hand-type receptacle grasping lifters not claiming any particular
    receptacle structure.


CLS 215/396
TXT Handle:

    Subject matter under subclass 395 including a structure intended to
    facilitate manual lifting or carrying of a bottle, jug, or jar.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    384,    for a bottle, jug, or jar having a recess in the side wall which is
    used for grasping.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 110+ for a handle, per se.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 752+ for a receptacle of that class type
    having a handle.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 210+, 323+, 441, and 465.1+ for a dispensing
    container having a handle or handgrip.


CLS 215/397
TXT Bail-type:

    Subject matter under subclass 396 including a member having the general
    shape of an inverted U with opposite ends configured to be attached to a
    bottle, jug, or jar.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 322 for a bail handle which acts as a
    closure-securing means, subclass 330 for a closure mounted for compound
    movement about a container bail, subclass 760 for a bail handle removably
    attached to a container, subclass 768 for a handle on a receptacle top
    wall, subclass 769 for a handle or handle-attaching means attached to the
    top edge (e.g., rim) of a receptacle sidewall, and subclasses 773+ for a
    nonremovable bail handle.


CLS 215/398
TXT Permanent:

    Subject matter under subclass 396 wherein the handle is not intended to be
    removed from the bottle, jug, or jar.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    385,    for a bottle, jug, or jar having an aperture in the sidewall for
    gripping.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 771 for receptacle of that class type having
    a handle which is of one-piece construction with the receptacle.


CLS 215/399
TXT Hanger:

    Subject matter under subclass 395 which includes structure which permits a
    bottle, jug, or jar to be suspended from a wall or support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 67 for a hanging support for a plant
    receptacle.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, cross-reference art collection 806
    for suspending means.

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 751 for a device for hanging a receptacle of
    that class type from a support.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, for a box having a
    lifting or suspending element.

    248,    Supports, subclass 317 for a suspended support intended for use
    with a receptacle or bowl.

    294,    Handling: Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, appropriate subclasses
    for a device for hoisting a receptacle.


CLS 215/400
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Container under the class definition of the bottle, jar, or jug type,
    usually made of plastic, glass, or ceramic material, which is not
    classifiable in any of the preceding subclasses.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 215/900
TXT COLLAPSIBLE WALL STRUCTURE:

    Bottle, jug, or jar under the class definition in which the wall structure
    includes means (e.g., fold lines, corrugations, etc.) which permit the
    container to assume a configuration of reduced dimension or to be
    compressed into compact form, when empty.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11.3,   for a nursing bottle having a collapsible wall structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 218 for a drinking vessel
    which is reduced in size when not in use and subclass 277 for a squeeze
    tube for dispensing contents.

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 666 for a receptacle of that class type
    having a collapsible wall structure.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 92+ for a collapsible wall-type container
    for dispensing.


CLS 215/901
TXT TAMPER-RESISTANT STRUCTURE:

    Bottle, jug, or jar under the class definition having structure to inhibit
    or minimize unauthorized use of the container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14+,    for a bottle, jug, or jar having positive means to prevent
    refilling after the original contents have been withdrawn.

    49,     for a frangible neck bottle, jug, or jar which is not reclosable.

    250+,   for a closure for a bottle or jar having a frangible member or
    portion.

    258,    for a closure for a bottle or jar wherein a portion of a closure
    remains with the bottle, jug, or jar upon removal of the closure.

    263,    for a closure for a bottle, jug, or jar that is nonresealable and
    nonremovable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, cross-reference art collection 807
    for receptacles of that class type having a structure to inhibit or
    minimize unauthorized removal of the receptacle contents.

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 214 for a receptacle closure having sealing
    means for indicating unauthorized closure movement and Dig. 34 for a
    collection of antitamper pharmaceutical capsules.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclass 102 for a box
    with tamper-indicating means.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 5 for a bag with tamper-indicating means.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, cross-reference art
    collection 916 for fraud- or tamper-detecting means.


CLS 215/902
TXT VENT:

    Bottle, jug, or jar under the class definition including a structure which
    provides a venting passageway from the interior to the exterior of the
    container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11.5,   for a nursing bottle having a valve or vent for gas.

    307+,   for a bottle, jug, or jar closure having a vent.


CLS 216/
TTL ETCHING A SUBSTRATE:   PROCESSES

CLS 216/
TXT
    Class 216 is an integral part of Class 156. It incorporates all the
    definitions, rules, and hierarchy pertaining to subject matter of Class 156.

    I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS 216 SUBJECT MATTER:

    A.)     This is the Generic class for chemical etching  processes for
    treating articles of commerce or intermediate articles not otherwise
    provided for in which one of the manufacturing steps includes a chemical
    etching step (use of an etchant) and wherein the material treated is not
    completely removed.

    (1)     Note.  The chemical etching required for placement in this class is
    any intentional change of shape of an article or substrate by the removal
    of material involving a chemical reaction or physical solvation using a
    chemical agent (the etchant).  This is the residual class for removing a
    surface by chemical reaction or solvent action regardless of the substrate
    acted on.  Bright Polishing of a metal with acid solution is considered
    etching and appropriate for this class.  The processes of the patents in
    this class often include the formation of a design, but the production of a
    design is not required to place the patents here.

    (2)     Note.  Reduction in size using a chemical etchant of an unmasked
    article, substrate or unmasked geometric figure, e.g., sphere, etc. is
    proper for this class.

    (3)     Note.  Etching of a masked article, to direct the etchant to only a
    portion of the article or substrate is proper for this class.

    (4)     Note.  This class is not intended for the total dissolving of an
    article or substrate.  Furthermore, the remaining article or substrate must
    be the desired product and not the removed material. An example of a
    process not proper for Class 216 would be ore beneficiating where the
    dissolved material is what is desired and useful and not the remaining
    residue material. Additionally a process of dissolving out impurities or
    unwanted material to leave a desired article is proper for this class when
    said process is not provided for elsewhere.


    (5)     Note.  Chemical milling is considered within the scope of the term
    etching.

    (6)     Note.  Class 216 provides only for etching processes. Etching
    compositions are in Class 252, subclasses 79.1+ (see the class line below
    in regards to Class 252 and nominal etching processes) and etching
    apparatus is classifiable in Class 156, subclass 345.  Compounds disclosed
    as useful in etching are classified in the respective compound classes and
    articles which are produced as the result of an etching process are
    classified in the appropriate article class or stock material class.

    II.     LINES WITH OTHER CLASSES:

    A.      SPECIAL CLASS LINES:

    (1)     Class 29, Metal Working

            Class 216 has several important relationships with this Class 29.
    Both classes take designated single-step processes, and both are locations
    for multistep processes for manufacturing designated products or using
    certain combinations of steps.

            Single-step processes to produce a Class 29 special product,
    include shaping particulate metal by pressure alone. In addition Class 29
    provides, for example, for processes of burnishing, filing, or the
    mechanical joining of parts to manufacture the special article.  Where only
    an etching step is claimed, the process is assigned to Class 216, even
    though a product designated for Class 29 is manufactured.

            Multistep processes for Class 29 are of two types:

    (a)     Those for making specified articles, enumerated in that part of
    Class 29 schedule which precedes subclass 400.1.

    (b)     Multistep manufacturing processes not provided for elsewhere.

            Insofar as processes of type (a) are concerned, these are assigned
    to Class 29, even when an etching step is claimed as part of the multistep
    process, except for processes classifiable in subclasses 825+, which
    follows the category (b) rule given in the next paragraph.


            Processes of type (b) are provided for in Class 216 when they claim:

    1.)     Etching combined with the shaping of a nonmetal.

    2.)     Etching either nominal or specific combined with broad or nominally
    claimed metal shaping steps.

    3.)     Specific etching including steps for assembling parts that have
    been etched or are to be etched.

            Processes of type (b) are classified in Class 29 when they claim:

    4.)     Nominal etching combined with specific metal shaping steps.

    5.)     Nominal etching combined with mechanical joining, either broad or
    specific.

    (2)     Class 438 Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process.

            Classification is proper for Class 438

    (A)     When the specification contains only disclosure of semiconductive
    material, precursor, substrate, or device and the claims are generic in
    nature the classification is proper for Class 438.

    (B)     When the specification contains disclosure to species of
    semiconductive material, precursor, substrate,  or device and
    nonsemiconductive species and the claims are directed to the semiconductive
    material species only classification is proper for Class 438.

    (C)     When the specification contains disclosure to species of
    semiconductive material, precursor, substrate, or device only and the
    claims are directed to semiconductive material species only classification
    is proper for Class 438.

            Classification is proper for Class 216 Etching.

    (D)     When the specification contains disclosure to species of
    semiconductive material, precursor, substrate, or device and
    nonsemiconductive species and the claims are generic in nature the
    classification is proper for Class 216 Etching.

    (E)     When the specification contains disclosure to species of
    semiconductive material, precursor, substrate, or device and
    nonsemiconductive species and the claims contain semiconductive species and
    nonsemiconductive species classification is proper for Class 216 Etching.

    (F)     When the specification contains disclosure to semiconductive
    material used in a nonelectrical function and the claims contain
    semiconductive material used in nonelectrical function classification is
    proper for Class 216 Etching.

    B.      GENERAL LINE WITH OTHER CLASSES:

    (1)     Class 134 Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids

            Class 134 is noted for cleaning processes wherein a surface is
    treated to remove or separate unwanted adherent material, e.g., dirt,
    scale, coatings, etc. Class 134, subclasses 1.1 through 1.3 provide for
    processes of cleaning using a plasma and for cleaning of semiconductive
    material. Subclasses 2 and 3 are noted for chemical bleaching, oxidation,
    or reduction of a metallic siliceous or calcareous base.

    (2)     Class 204 Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy

            Class 205 Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein and
    Methods of Preparing the Compositions

            Chemical etching performed on a composition, product, or article
    made by a Class 204 process (e.g., an entire article previously etched by
    electrolysis, a product portion modified by electrolytic material
    treatment, etc.) is considered to provide a significant modification of the
    composition, product, or article made by the Class 204 process, therefore
    placing the combination of a Class 204 process followed by Class 216
    chemical etching in Class 216.  However, the combination of a Class 205
    electrolytic coating step followed by Class 216 chemical etching  performed
    (1) to allow at least a portion of the electrolytic coating to remain and
    (2) to only significantly modify the electrolytic coating, per se, is
    considered to be an electrolytic coating process followed by a mere
    perfecting step for the electrolytic coating, therefore placing the
    combination in Class 205.  The significant modification of only the
    electrolytic coating allows for mere incidental alterations to other
    portions of a coated article such as the substrate provided that such
    changes are clearly unintentional (e.g., chemical etching through an
    electrolytic coating which may also progress into the substrate in some
    areas to allow complete penetration through all desired other areas of the
    electrolytic coating, etc.).  Class 216 also provides for the original
    classification when the claims are alternative (claims to a Class 216
    process and claims to a Class 205 electrolytic etching, or when a generic
    claim is present and no species is specifically claimed).  When, however, a
    generic claim is present (disclosure includes both Class 216 and Class 204
    or Class 205 subject matter) and a Class 204 or Class 205 species is
    specifically claimed, and there is no specific claim to a Class 216 etching
    process, the original classification is in Class 204 or Class 205 and a
    mandatory cross-reference is placed into Class 216 based on the generic
    claim.  Other combinations of Class 204 step(s) with Class 216 step(s) will
    follow the general class line for the combination of Class 204 step(s) with
    those from other classes as stated at the beginning of Class 204.  In
    particular, see Class 205, subclasses 123+, for electrolytic coating of or
    with semiconductor material, subclasses 125+ for electrolytic coating to
    produce a circuit board or a printed circuit, subclasses 206+ for
    contacting a substrate with a solid member or material (e.g., polishing,
    rolling, etc.) combined with a subsequent step of electrolytic coating,
    subclasses 210+ for treating a substrate with a liquid other than tap water
    (e.g., chemical etching, etc.) combined with a subsequent step of
    electrolytic coating, subclasses 640+ for electrolytic erosion of a
    workpiece to change the shape or surface configuration thereof, and
    subclasses 687+ for electrolytic material treatment, in general (e.g.,
    electrolytic stripping of an entire coated layer from a substrate, etc.).

    (3)     Class 219 Electric Heating

            Subclasses 121.36+ for removing or altering material by the use of
    a high temperature thermal plasma. Class 216 provides for the use of a cold
    plasma which is a chemical etching process involving reactive ions and a
    substrate whereas the high temperature thermal plasma proper for Class 219
    alters the substrate solely by thermal means. Class 219 subclasses 68+
    provide for processes of cutting or disintegrating metal by metal heating,
    subclasses 121.19+ for processes of using an electron beam or etching or
    trimming metal, subclasses 121.36+ for processes of using a high
    temperature thermal plasma to etch metal, and subclasses 121.6+ for
    processes of using a laser to etch metal.

    (4)     Class 264 Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:
    Processes

            Combinations of shaping a plastic material and etching the shaped
    product, or combinations of shaping, laminating, and etching are proper for
    Class 216. Laser ablation of a Class 264 material in the absence of an
    added reactive chemical is proper for Class 264, however, when a reactive
    chemical is used in the laser ablation process the process is classifiable
    in Class 216.  Subclasses 22+ for the shaping of an article by removing a
    portion by electrical or wave energy, e.g., laser ablation wherein no
    chemical etchant is employed, etc., subclass 49 for forming pores in situ
    by treating an occluded solid, subclasses 82+ for reactive gas or vapor
    treatment of an article, subclasses 211.12+ for processing or treating
    after extruding, subclasses 219+ for processes of preparing a mold which
    includes an etching step in the mold manufacture followed by a shaping
    operation, and subclass 341 for the solvent polishing of a shaped or solid
    article.

    (5)     Class 427 Coating Processes

            Subclasses 307+ for processes limited to etching for making a base
    more compatible with or adherent to the coating wherein the base is the
    substrate (work) onto which a coating is to applied.

    (6)     Class 430 Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or
    Product Thereof

            For processes of radiation imagery including claimed exposing and
    finishing by a post imaging process, e.g., developing, etching, etc. or
    finishing an image, e.g., developing, etching, etc. where the claim is
    silent as to an exposure step.

            Subclass 5 for producing a radiation mask, subclasses 313+ for a
    post imaging process of treating a resist to remove a portion of the same.

    (C)     SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dying; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, appropriate subclasses for chemical methods of dyeing
    fabric and the like and/or forming an ornamental effect by the chemical
    modification of a fiber or fabric.

    28,     Textiles: Manufacturing, is the generic class for textile
    operations, especially subclasses 167+, 178+, 261, and 265+ for
    significantly claimed textile operations combined with steps of coating,
    dyeing, fluid treatment.

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, subclasses
    293+ for processes of making an abrading tool.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 31 for etching or leaching a glass
    preform, and subclass 61 for the wearing away, abrading, or grinding of
    surface material.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions For Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Particulate Mixtures,
    subclasses 715+ for the etching of a metal to recover it from another metal.

    101,    Printing, subclass 463.1, for processes of making a printing plate.

    112,    Sewing, subclass 403 for a sewn web or sheet including a
    decomposable thread or component.

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 358 for embossing or imprinting of wood.

    148,    Metal Treatment, for treating of metal to modify or maintain the
    internal physical structure (microstructure) or chemical properties of the
    metal.  Heating and working is most often used to effect these changes.

    166,    Wells, subclass 307 for methods of treating a geologic formation in
    a well bore which may include an etching step.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 79.1+ provides for patents which in
    addition to an etching composition claim also contain a claim to a nominal
    process of etching even though the composition of the material treated is
    recited. Any detail in the treating step, e.g., dipping, spraying, etc., is
    sufficient to render the process more than nominal and proper for Class
    216.  Class 216 is proper for a nomimal etching process when the etching
    composition is not claimed. Subclasses 80+ for descaling agents and 89.1+,
    appropriate subclasses, for detergents containing acid or alkaline agents
    which may etch the substances treated and for mere methods of use when the
    composition is claimed.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 31 for  methods of
    determining the orientation of the cystallographic axis of a crystal which
    includes etching a surface and then optically observing the etched surface.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, for etching combined with a metal
    powder consolidation step, subclasses 5+ for etching or dissolving of a
    preformed component, e.g., core, etc. to form a hollow metal article.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 1+ for processes of
    treating a mixture to obtain an inorganic compound or free elemental
    nonmetal which may involve a leaching or dissolving step.  Also this class
    generally provides for processes involving a chemical reaction.

    521,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers,  subclasses 61+ for forming a
    cellular product without expanding of the matrix.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the destruction or containment of hazardous or toxic etching
    waste.

    III.    GLOSSARY:

            Terms used throughout the schedule and definitions are to have the
    meaning ascribed below.

            Generally accepted or commonly used art terms retain their meaning
    found in their everyday usage and are not found in this glossary.  Certain
    specialized terms are employed in these subclasses and they have been given
    definitions altered to meet the needs of this class.  Some or all of the
    terms may be broader or more restricted as well as different in meaning
    compared to normal usage.

    ACID
    A chemical compound which yields hydrogen ions when dissolved in water,
    whose hydrogen can be replaced by metals or basic radicals, or which reacts
    with bases to form salts and water (neutralization).

    GAS
    Matter of very low density and viscosity, and relatively great expansion
    and contraction with changes in pressure and temperature, that is readily
    diffusive, with a tendency to expand indefinitely, with molecules or atoms
    in free movement. The term gas includes vapor.

    GLASS
    Must have all of the attributes described in 1-5 below.

    1.      An inorganic product the constituents of which generally include a
    glass former (e.g., As2O3, B2O3, GeO2, P2O5, SiO2, V2O5) which has an
    essential characteristic of creating or maintaining, singularly, or in a
    mixture that type of structural disorder characteristic of a glassy
    condition, other oxides which approach glass forming properties (e.g.,
    Al2O3, BeO, PbO, Sb2O3, TiO2, ZnO, and ZrO2), as well as oxides that are
    practically devoid of glass forming  tendencies (e.g. BaO, CaO, K2O, Li2O,
    MgO, Na2O, and SrO).  Pure and modified silica, silicon, and slag are also
    included.

    2.      Formed by fusion and cooled to a rigid condition generally without
    crystallization.

    3.      Having no definite melting point, whereby the mass has the
    characteristic of passing through a plastic state before reaching a liquid
    state when heated.

    4.      Incapable in the solid state of permanent deformation.

    5.      Fractures when subject to deformation tension.

    INORGANIC
    Pertaining to compounds that do not generally contain carbon and to
    elements in their free form. It relates to any of the compounds not
    encompassed under the term Organic defined below in this Glossary.

    METAL
    As found in the Sargent - Welsh Periodic table (copyright date 1979) of the
    elements, is any element not named in the following listing, all group
    VIII, VIIB, VIB elements except polonium, nitrogen, phosphorus, carbon,
    silicon, and boron.

    ORGANIC
    Is a compound containing carbon, which is further characterized by the
    presence in the molecule of two carbon atoms bonded together; or one atom
    of carbon bonded to at least one atom of hydrogen or halogen; or one atom
    of carbon bonded to at least one atom of nitrogen by a single or double
    bond.  The following compounds are specifically excluded as being Organic
    for classification purposes, to-wit:  hydrocyanic acid, cyanogen, isocyanic
    acid, cyanamide, cyanogen halides, isothiocyanic acid, fulminic acid, and
    metal carbides.

    PLASMA
    A gas that is sufficiently ionized for its properties to depend on the
    ionization.  It contains approximately equal numbers of positive ions and
    electrons, so the mixture is electrically neutral, highly conductive, and
    affected by magnetic fields.  A thermal plasma is produced by temperatures
    above 20,000 degrees centigrade.

    RADIATION
    The propagation of energy through space or through a material. It may be in
    the form of electromagnetic waves, corpuscular  emissions or sound waves.
    The format is usually categorized according to frequency, e.g., Hertzian,
    infrared, visible light, ultraviolet, X-ray, gamma ray, etc. Corpuscular
    emissions are categorized as alpha, beta, or cosmic rays.

    SUBSTRATE
    The entire article or workpiece contacted by the chemical reagent, except
    for materials which have been applied to an article or workpiece for the
    sole expressed purpose of protecting at least a portion thereof from the
    action of the chemical material, i.e., a resist.




CLS 216/2
TXT ETCHING OF SEMICONDUCTOR MATERIAL TO PRODUCE AN ARTICLE HAVING A
    NONELECTRICAL FUNCTION:

    Process under class definition of etching a semiconductive precursor,
    substrate, or device to produce an article whose function is not related to
    the conduction of electricity.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is directed to the manufacture of a
    semiconductor containing article which has a stated function which is
    nonelectrical in nature, e.g., pressure diaphragm, spring, or coil, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, for (a) combined
    processes and (b) unit operation not elsewhere provided for manufacturing a
    semiconductive electrical substrate or device.


CLS 216/3
TXT FORMING OR TREATING JOSEPHSON JUNCTION ARTICLE:

    Process under the class definition wherein etching is used in the forming
    or treating of a superconductive material which is joined in a Josephson
    Junction containing a pair of superconductive electrodes which are
    separated by a thin, less conductive portion through which superconductor
    tunneling may occur.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 31+ for a Josephson Junction device.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process, subclass
    329 and subclasses 410+ for the use of high temperature superconductor
    material in applications, apparatus, and the materials, per se, not
    provided for elsewhere.


CLS 216/4
TXT FORMING OR TREATING A SIGN OR MATERIAL USEFUL IN A SIGN:

    Process under the class definition wherein etching is used in the forming
    or treating of a sign for the display of intelligence by way of symbols or
    for material useful in preparing a sign.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for forming or treating a cylindrical or tubular article having
    pattern or design on its surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 541+ for an
    illuminated sign.


CLS 216/5
TXT Sign or material is electroluminescent:

    Process under subclass 4 wherein the sign or material adiabatically emits
    light in an electric field.


CLS 216/6
TXT FORMING OR TREATING MATERIAL USEFUL IN A CAPACITOR:

    Process under the class definition wherein etching is used in the forming
    or treating of materials that may be used in a device composed of two
    conductors separated by a dielectric capable of storing electrical energy
    blocking the flow of direct current to a degree dependent upon the
    capacitance and the frequency.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, for making special articles as defined in the
    etching class definition, note subclass 25.03 for electrolytic device
    making, e.g, capacitor, etc., and subclasses 25.41+ for electric condenser
    making.

    174,    Electricity: Conductors and Insulators, subclass 143 for
    bushing-type condenser.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices,  subclasses 268+ for
    induction apparatus combined with electrical capacitors, subclasses 271+
    for  electrostatic capacitors, subclasses 277+ for variable-type electrical
    capacitors, and subclasses 500+ for electrolytic-type condensers.


CLS 216/7
TXT FORMING OR TREATING FIBROUS ARTICLE OR FIBER REINFORCED COMPOSITE STRUCTURE:

    Process under the class definition wherein etching is used in the forming
    or treating of an article or structure containing fibers.


CLS 216/8
TXT FORMING OR TREATING CYLINDRICAL OR TUBULAR ARTICLE HAVING PATTERN OR DESIGN
    ON ITS SURFACE:

    Process under the class definition wherein etching is used in the forming
    or treating of a cylindrical or tubular article having a pattern or design
    on the article surface, e.g., pattern roll, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclass 118 for electrolytic coating of
    selected areas.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 256+ for nonuniform coating.


CLS 216/9
TXT Forming or treating an embossing cylinder or tubular article:

    Process under subclass 8 wherein the cylinder or tubular article has a
    design or pattern raised in relief above its surface and which is intended
    to impress the design or pattern on other work.


CLS 216/10
TXT Forming or treating liquid transfer cylinder or tubular article (e.g.
    printing roll, etc.):

    Process under subclass 8 wherein the cylinder or tubular article is
    intended to transfer liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclasses 212+ for rolling contact printing machines.


CLS 216/11
TXT FORMING OR TREATING AN ARTICLE WHOSE FINAL CONFIGURATION HAS A PROJECTION:

    Process under the class definition wherein etching is used in the forming
    or treating of an article whose final shape has at least one raised area
    above the normal planar surface, e.g.; pointer, sound needle, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, subclass 20 for
    manufacturing an electron emissive device utilizing a semiconductive
    substrate.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    subclasses 46+ for making an electrode having a projection.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 187+ for an aspirator syringe or injector.


CLS 216/12
TXT FORMING OR TREATING MASK USED FOR ITS NONETCHING FUNCTION (E.G., SHADOW
    MASK,  X-RAY MASK, ETC.):

    Process under the class definition wherein etching is used in forming or
    treating a mask whose function is other than as an etch mask or etch
    resist, e.g., shadow mask, X-ray mask, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41+,    for the masking of a substrate using an etch resist.

    56,     for making a porous or perforated article not used for masking.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclass 35 for mask used in
    a nonetching function.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclass 5 for a radiation mask produced by a photographic step.


CLS 216/13
TXT FORMING OR TREATING ELECTRICAL CONDUCTOR ARTICLE (E.G., CIRCUIT, ETC.):

    Process under the class definition wherein etching is used in the forming
    or treating of an electrical conductor.

    (1)     Note.  The conductor maybe either a self sustaining conductor or a
    conductor on a supporting substrate, e.g., a printed circuit, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclass 125 where the product is a circuit
    board or printed circuit.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 96+ for integrated circuit, printed
    circuit or circuit board making processes.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, cross-reference art
    collection 901 for a printed circuit.


CLS 216/14
TXT Forming or treating lead frame or beam lead:

    Process under subclass 13 directed to the forming or treating of (a) a
    group of metal leads held together in the proper relationship to permit
    connection to a semiconductor die (integrated circuit), or (b) an
    intermediate article of manufacture utilized to produce electrical
    connecting structure for circuits consisting of a generally flat
    electrically conductive strap or band section which has been stamped, cut
    or otherwise deformed, to produce an open encasing structure provided with
    a plurality of generally rectangular cross-sectional inwardly facing bodies
    designed to be attached to the circuit in a cantilever fashion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 827 for beam lead frame or beam lead device
    manufacturing including a metal working step.


CLS 216/15
TXT Forming or treating a crossover:

    Process under subclass 13 directed to the forming or treating of a circuit
    where one conductor crosses over another without electrical contact due to
    the presence of an insulator therebetween.


CLS 216/16
TXT Forming or treating resistive material:

    Process under subclass 13 directed to the forming or treating of material
    which is generally used in a circuit containing a conductor, and which
    material is intended to impede the flow of a steady or fluctuating
    electrical current passing through the mass by conversion of electrical
    energy to heat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 610.1 for resistor making and subclass
    621.1 for electrical strain gauge making.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 500+ for an electrically conductive or
    emissive composition.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes)
    which include resistive materials in their construction.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, for electrical resistor structure.


CLS 216/17
TXT Forming or treating of groove or through hole:

    Process under subclass 13 directed to forming or treating (a) a depression
    of relatively small area which is formed partially or completely through an
    electrical conductor or a substrate supporting an electrical circuit, or
    (b) an elongated relatively narrow trench which is partially or completely
    through an electrical conductor or substrate.


CLS 216/18
TXT Filling or coating of groove or through hole with a conductor to form an
    electrical interconnection:

    Process under subclass 17 directed to filling or coating of groove or
    through hole with an  electrically conductive material so as to provide an
    electrical interconnection in a circuit.


CLS 216/19
TXT Filling or coating of groove or through hole in a conductor with an
    insulator:

    Process under subclass 17 directed to filling or coating of groove or
    through hole with an insulator to thus form an insulated region in or on a
    conductor.


CLS 216/20
TXT Adhesive or autogenous bonding of self-sustaining preforms (e.g.,
    prefabricated base, etc.):

    Process under subclass 13 including a step of adhesively or autogeneously
    bonding two or more self-sustaining preforms and wherein the final product
    contains the two or more adhered layers.

    (1)     Note.  A preformed etching mask or resist is not considered as
    being a preform proper for this subclass if it ultimately to be removed.
    See subclasses 41+ for etching processes involving a preformed etch mask or
    resist.


CLS 216/21
TXT Repairing circuit:

    Process under subclass 13 directed to the refurbishing, repairing, or
    recovery of a circuit as to its electrical function.


CLS 216/22
TXT FORMING OR TREATING ARTICLE CONTAINING MAGNETICALLY RESPONSIVE MATERIAL:

    Process under the class definition wherein etching is used in the forming
    or treating of an article which contains material therein which is
    responsive to magnetism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 607+ for the making of permanent magnets
    and electromagnets.


CLS 216/23
TXT FORMING OR TREATING ARTICLE CONTAINING A LIQUID CRYSTAL MATERIAL:

    Process under the class definition wherein etching is used in the forming
    or treating of an article which contains an ordered liquid, i.e., liquid
    crystal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 299.01+ for liquid crystal compositions.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 1 for liquid
    crystal containing stock material.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, subclass 30 for
    manufacturing a liquid crystal display device utilizing a semiconductive
    substrate having an electrical device formed therein or thereon.


CLS 216/24
TXT FORMING OR TREATING OPTICAL ARTICLE:

    Process under the class definition wherein etching is used in forming or
    treating of an article which is either responsive to light, e.g., visible,
    UV, etc. or which is intended to transmit, modify, or otherwise alter
    light, e.g., visible, UV, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 37+ for lens making.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 1.1+ for optical article shaping or treating.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclass 321 for optical device manufacturing using an imaging
    technique.


CLS 216/25
TXT Phosphor screen:

    Process under subclass 24 wherein the optical article is a screen
    containing phosphor elements, these elements phosphorescing (continuous
    emission of light) when stimulated by an external energy source which is
    usually radiation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 458.1+ for luminophor irradiation, and
    subclasses 483.1+ for luminescent device.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 301.16 for an organic luminescent material
    containing composition, subclass 301.4 for an inorganic luminescent
    composition.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 525+ for a device
    containing a phosphor screen.


CLS 216/26
TXT Lens:

    Process under subclass 24 wherein the optical article contains transparent
    material which converges or diverges light by refraction.


CLS 216/27
TXT FORMING OR TREATING THERMAL INK JET ARTICLE (E.G., PRINT HEAD, LIQUID JET
    RECORDING HEAD, ETC.):

    Process under the class definition wherein etching is used in the forming
    or treating of an article whose ultimate use is to expel an ink droplet,
    and in which the ink droplet is produced by the action of thermal energy to
    form a propelling vapor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, subclass 1.1 for processes of using thermal ink jet
    devices, subclass 75 for the use of a gas blast against a receiver in
    printing.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, subclass 21 for
    manufacturing an electrical device controlled printhead utilizing a
    semiconductive substrate having an electrical device formed therein or
    thereon.


CLS 216/28
TXT FORMING OR TREATING AN ORNAMENTED ARTICLE:

    Process under the class definition wherein etching is used in the forming
    or treating of an article, which article possesses an effect which is
    intended to be decorative in nature, and which effect possess little or no
    utilitarian function or character, and wherein the article itself may or
    may not possess some form of utility.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    63,     Jewelry, for ornamented jewelry.


CLS 216/29
TXT Wood surface treated or wood grain produced:

    Process under subclass 28 wherein the treating is performed on the surface
    of a wood product to produce a decorative wood product, or wherein a
    nonwood product is treated to produce a wood grain appearance.


CLS 216/30
TXT Treating stone (e.g., marble, etc.):

    Process under subclass 28 wherein stone is treated, to produce a decorative
    effect thereon, e.g., marble, etc.


CLS 216/31
TXT Treating glass (e.g., mirror, etc.):

    Process under subclass 28 wherein glass is treated to produce a decorative
    effect thereon, e.g., mirror, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     for etching of a silicon containing glass by a gas phase etchant.

    97,     for etching of glass by nonliquid phase etchant.

    99,     for etching of a silicon containing substrate by a nonliquid phase
    etchant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 31 for etching or leaching of glass
    preform in combination with a glass manufacturing step.


CLS 216/32
TXT Treating elemental metal or alloy thereof:

    Process under subclass 28 wherein metal or an thereof is treated to produce
    a decorative effect thereon.


CLS 216/33
TXT ADHESIVE OR AUTOGENOUS BONDING OF TWO OR MORE SELF-SUSTAINING PREFORMS
    WHEREIN AT LEAST TWO OF THE PREFORMS ARE NOT INTENDED TO BE REMOVED (E.G.,
    PREFABRICATED BASE, ETC.):

    Process under the class definitions including the step of adhesively or
    autogenously bonding two or more self sustaining preforms.

    (1)     Note.  A preformed etching mask or resist is not considered as
    being a preform proper for this subclass if it is ultimately to be removed.
     See subclasses 41+ for etching processes involving a preformed etch mask
    or resist.

    (2)     Note.  Processes appropriate for this subclass require the forming
    of intended composite materials having two or more layers and wherein the
    final intended material is a composite having two or more layers.  A
    multilayered substrate as a preform without the claimed forming of the
    multilayers by adhesive or autogenous bonding is not appropriate herein
    unless a self-sustaining preform is bonded thereto and remains with the
    multilayered substrate.  Removing the self-sustaining preform (etch mask or
    resist) after the etching process results in a product which does not meet
    the required parameters for this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, for mechanical assembly combined with etching of
    special articles.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, for
    adhesive bonding or laminating without etching.


CLS 216/34
TXT Etching improves or promotes adherence of preforms being bonded:

    Process under subclass 33 wherein etching is used to improve or promote
    adherence or bonding between two or more preforms.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is the use of etching to improve or promote
    the adherence of an adhesive and a preform.


CLS 216/35
TXT Bonding of preform of metal or an alloy thereof to a preform of a nonmetal:

    Process under subclass 34 of improving or promoting the adherence or
    bonding of a preform of metal or an alloy thereof to a nonmetal preform.


CLS 216/36
TXT Removing at least one of the self-sustaining preforms or a portion thereof:

    Process under subclass 33 wherein a delamination  occurs between any two or
    more laminated preforms.

    (1)     Note.  The preform or portion delaminated may be the same or
    different from the preform bonded initially. An example of a different
    preform is one which has been chemically treated after it has been united
    and then removed.


CLS 216/37
TXT ETCHING AND COATING OCCUR IN THE SAME PROCESSING CHAMBER:

    Process under the class definition wherein etching and coating occur in the
    same vessel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, for etching used to perfect a coating operation.


CLS 216/38
TXT PLANARIZING A NONPLANAR SURFACE:

    Process under the class definition directed to the smoothing or leveling of
    a surface.

    (1)     Note.  The planarizing may include the use of a planarizing coating
    layer.


CLS 216/39
TXT FORMING GROOVE OR HOLE IN A SUBSTRATE WHICH IS SUBSEQUENTLY FILLED OR
    COATED:

    Process under the class definition directed to the filling or coating of a
    groove or hole in a substrate after the groove or hole is formed.


CLS 216/40
TXT FORMING PATTERN USING LIFT OFF TECHNIQUE:

    Process under the class definition directed to placing a mask on a
    substrate, coating, or depositing material over the mask and substrate,
    then removing the mask to remove the deposited layer on the mask, thus
    leaving the deposited layer in a pattern where the mask was not present,
    and etching using the pattern as a mask.

    (1)     Note.  Any means of removal may be used to include dissolution.


CLS 216/41
TXT MASKING OF A SUBSTRATE USING MATERIAL RESISTANT TO AN ETCHANT (I.E., ETCH
    RESIST):

    Process under the class definition directed to using a patterned material
    which is resistant to the etchant.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass rather than subclass 49 and subclass 51
    specifically provides for etch resistant material where the disclosure of
    the patent is silent as to whether the material is organic or inorganic in
    nature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for making a porous or perforated article having a  nonmasking
    function.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclass 5 for a radiation mask.


CLS 216/42
TXT Resist material applied in particulate form or spray:

    Process under subclass 41 wherein the masking is applied by a coating
    process involving the application of particulate material or by a spray
    coating procedure.


CLS 216/43
TXT Adhesively bonding resist to substrate:

    Process under subclass 41 wherein the masking is applied by adhesively
    bonding a self-sustaining patterned resist to a substrate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, for
    production of bonded materials.


CLS 216/44
TXT Mechanically forming pattern into a resist:

    Process under subclass 41 directed to the forming of a pattern into the
    etch resist by mechanical means, e.g., cutting, punching, scribing using a
    stylus, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52+,    for a separate step of mechanically shaping, deforming, or abrading
    of a substrate.


CLS 216/45
TXT Mask is reusable (i.e., stencil):

    Process under subclass 41 using a prefabricated stencil or mask which may
    be reused in the subsequent etching of another substrate.


CLS 216/46
TXT Masking of sidewall:

    Process under subclass 41 of using masking on a side wall of a substrate to
    prevent or direct etching.


CLS 216/47
TXT Mask is multilayer resist:

    Process under subclass 41 of using an etch resist comprising plural layers.


CLS 216/48
TXT Mask is exposed to nonimaging radiation:

    Process under subclass 41 of exposing the etch resist to nonimaging
    radiation, e.g., U.V. light, laser beam, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for altering of the etchability of a substrate by irradiation, ion
    implantation, alloying, diffusing, or chemically reacting the substrate
    during gas phase etching.

    63+,    for gas phase etching with application of energy to the substrate
    being etched, e.g., ultrasonic, substrate heating, radiation, plasma, ion
    beam, etc.

    87,     for altering of the etchability of a substrate during liquid phase
    etching by treatment with high energy radiation, alloying, diffusion, or
    chemically reacting.

    94,     for liquid phase etching with high energy irradiation, e.g., laser,
    e-beam, or ion beam, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, for the production of an image formed by use of radiation or light
    combined with etching.


CLS 216/49
TXT Mask resist contains organic compound:

    Process under subclass 41 wherein the resist material contains an organic
    compound.

    (1)     Note.  See Glossary for a definition of the term  Organic.

    (2)     Note.  See subclass 41 for masking material where the patent
    disclosure is silent as to its chemical nature.


CLS 216/50
TXT Mask resist contains a color imparting agent:

    Process under subclass 49 wherein the organic resist further contains a
    material expressly added for imparting color to the resist.


CLS 216/51
TXT Mask resist contains inorganic material:

    Process under subclass 41 wherein the resist material is inorganic and
    includes material in an  elemental state.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 41 for masking material where the patent
    disclosure is silent as to its chemical nature.

    (2)     Note.  See Glossary for a definition of the term Inorganic.


CLS 216/52
TXT MECHANICALLY SHAPING, DEFORMING, OR ABRADING OF SUBSTRATE:

    Process under the class definition including a step of subjecting a
    substrate to physical force of sufficient magnitude to cause permanent
    distortion thereof or removal of material therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein, e.g., are embossing, bending, abrading,
    cutting, breaking, etc.

    (2)     Note.  For the line between this class and the metal working
    classes wherein a step of metal working is included, see the definitions of
    this class, IIA.


CLS 216/53
TXT Nongaseous phase etching:

    Process under subclass 52 wherein the etchant is employed in a nongaseous
    phase.

    (1)     Note.  Most of the patents herein are to the use of a liquid
    etchant. See the Glossary for a definition of the term Liquid.


CLS 216/54
TXT PATTERN OR DESIGN APPLIED BY TRANSFER:

    Process under the class definition wherein a separately existing pattern or
    design is temporarily adhered to a carrier and this pattern or design is
    transferred to a substrate.


CLS 216/55
TXT HEATING OR BAKING OF SUBSTRATE PRIOR TO ETCHING TO CHANGE THE CHEMICAL
    PROPERTIES OF SUBSTRATE TOWARD THE ETCHANT:

    Process under the class definition wherein the chemical properties of a
    substrate toward an etchant are altered by contacting the substrate prior
    to etching with a source of heat, e.g., alloying, curing, annealing, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 117+ for annealing of glass preform.


CLS 216/56
TXT ETCHING TO PRODUCE POROUS OR PERFORATED ARTICLE:

    Process under the class definition wherein the action of the etchant
    produces relatively small holes or channels throughout a substrate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for forming a mask used for a nonetching function.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclass 122 for pore forming.

    521,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 50+ for cellular
    products or processes of preparing a cellular product.


CLS 216/57
TXT GAS PHASE AND NONGASEOUS PHASE ETCHING ON THE SAME SUBSTRATE:

    Process under the class definition involving etching a substrate with a
    plurality of etchants and wherein at least one of the etchants is in a
    nongaseous phase and at least one of the etchants is in the gas phase.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term Gas.

    (2)     Note.  Most of the patents relating to nongaseous etching involve a
    liquid etchant.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for gas phase etching.

    83,     for nongaseous phase etching


CLS 216/58
TXT GAS PHASE ETCHING OF SUBSTRATE:

    Process under the class definition wherein the etchant is in a gaseous
    state when it contacts the substrate.

    (1)     Note.  See Glossary for a definition of the term Gas.

    (2)     Note.  This and indented subclasses include etching employing
    ionized gas with approximately equal numbers of positive ions and electrons
    so the mixture is highly conductive and affected by magnetic fields, i.e.,
    plasma.


CLS 216/59
TXT With measuring, testing, or inspecting:

    Process under subclass 58 including the step of visually, chemically, or
    physically determining or measuring a variable condition or property of the
    substrate or the etching process.

    (1)     Note.  Included here under is a process of monitoring or
    controlling the etching process in response to a sensed condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84+,    for measuring, testing, inspecting, monitoring or controlling of a
    nongaseous phase etching process.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    subclass 3 for testing or adjusting.


CLS 216/60
TXT By optical means or of an optical property:

    Process under subclass 59 where the test is performed optically or
    determines an optical property, e.g., reflectance, etc.


CLS 216/61
TXT By electrical means or of an electrical property:

    Process under subclass 59 where the test is performed electrically or
    determines an electrical property, e.g. resistance, etc.


CLS 216/62
TXT Irradiating, ion implanting, alloying, diffusing, or chemically reacting
    the substrate prior to etching to change properties of substrate toward the
    etchant:

    Process under subclass 58 wherein a substrate is altered by contacting
    prior to etching with a material or irradiation which (a) forms an alloy,
    (b) diffuses into, or (c) chemically reacts with the substrate, or causes a
    chemical reaction within the substrate to alter the effect of the etchant
    on the substrate or any part thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, subclass 705 for
    processes of altering the etchability of a semiconductor substrate prior to
    chemical etching for manufacturing a semiconductive electrical substrate or
    device; see the search notes thereunder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87,     for altering of the etchability of a substrate before nongaseous
    phase etching by treatment with high energy radiation, alloying, diffusing,
    or chemically reacting.


CLS 216/63
TXT Application of energy to the gaseous etchant or to the substrate being
    etched:

    Process under subclass 58 directed to the application of energy to the
    gaseous etchant or to the substrate being etched, e.g.,  Ultrasonic
    substrate heating, radiation, plasma, ion beam, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73,     for preparing etching vapor by evaporation, boiling, or sublimation.

    87,     altering of the etchability of a substrate prior to nongaseous
    phase etching by the use irradiation, ion implantation, alloying,
    diffusing, or chemically reacting.

    94,     for nongaseous phase etching using high energy irradiation, e.g.,
    laser, e-beam, or ion beam, etc.


CLS 216/64
TXT Etchant is devoid of chlorocarbon or fluorocarbon compound (e.g., C.F.C.,
    etc.):

    Process under subclass 58 wherein the etchant is devoid of a compound
    containing at least one chlorine and/or fluorine atom and at least one
    carbon atom.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass requires that all of of the etching materials
    recited be devoid of the a chlorocarbon or flurocarbon carbon (etching
    mixtures).  Also excluded are multistep processes wherein one of etching
    steps uses a chlorocarbon or fluorocarbon compound.  See appropriate
    subclasses below for etching processes using etchants excluded from this
    subclass.


CLS 216/65
TXT Using laser:

    Process under subclass 63 wherein the energy source is a laser.

    (1)     Note.  Either visible or invisible laser may be used in this
    etching process.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    522,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 2 for forming or
    modifying a solid polymer by laser, or compositions therefor.


CLS 216/66
TXT Using ion beam, ultraviolet, or visible light:

    Process under subclass 63 wherein the energy source is an ion beam,
    ultraviolet, or visible light.


CLS 216/67
TXT Using plasma:

    Process under subclass 63 wherein the energy source is a plasma.

    (1)     Note.  See Glossary for a definition of the term Plasma.


CLS 216/68
TXT Using coil to generate the plasma:

    Process under subclass 67 wherein a plasma is produced by the use of a
    coil, e.g., external induction coil, etc.


CLS 216/69
TXT Using microwave to generate the plasma:

    Process under subclass 67 wherein the plasma is produced by the use of
    microwaves.


CLS 216/70
TXT Magnetically enhancing the plasma:

    Process under subclass 69 where the plasma is intensified by the use of a
    magnetic field.

    (1)     Note.  The magnetic field establishes a resonant motion of the
    electrons in the chamber.


CLS 216/71
TXT Specific configuration of electrodes to generate the plasma:

    Process under subclass 67 wherein the plasma is produced using electrodes
    which are in a specific enumerated configuration in relation to each other.


CLS 216/72
TXT Etching a multiple layered substrate where the etching condition used
    produces a different etching rate or characteristic between at least two of
    the layers of the substrate:

    Process under subclass 58 involving the etching of a multilayered
    substrate, using a single etching step, where the process parameters used
    causes a difference of the etching rate or characteristic in at least two
    different layers of the substrate.


CLS 216/73
TXT Etching vapor produced by evaporation, boiling, or sublimation:

    Process under subclass 58 wherein the etching process includes the
    formation of the etchant vapor by the evaporating or boiling of a liquid,
    or is directly produced from a solid without the formation of a liquid
    phase.


CLS 216/74
TXT Etching inorganic substrate:

    Process under subclass 58 wherein the etching step is performed on an
    inorganic substrate and may include  elemental material.

    (1)     Note.  See Glossary for what is meant by the term Inorganic.


CLS 216/75
TXT Substrate contains elemental metal, alloy thereof, or metal compound:

    Process under subclass 74 wherein the substrate contains metal in
    elemental, alloy, or compound form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100+,   for nongaseous phase etching of an elemental metal, alloy, or metal
    compound containing substrate.


CLS 216/76
TXT Etching of substrate containing at least one compound having at least one
    oxygen atom and at least one metal atom:

    Process under subclass 75 wherein the material  etched contains a compound
    having at least one metal atom and at least one oxygen atom, e.g., indium
    titanium oxide (I.T.O.), a ceramic oxide, etc.

    (1)     Note.  The metal oxygen compound may also contain other elements.


CLS 216/77
TXT Etching of substrate containing elemental aluminum, or an alloy or compound
    thereof:

    Process under subclass 75 wherein the material  to be etched contains
    elemental aluminum or an alloy thereof, or a compound containing aluminum.


CLS 216/78
TXT Etching of substrate containing elemental copper, or an alloy or compound
    thereof:

    Process under subclass 75 wherein the material to be etched contains
    elemental copper or an alloy thereof, or a compound containing copper.


CLS 216/79
TXT Etching silicon containing substrate:

    Process under subclass 74 wherein the material to be etched contains
    silicon in either elemental or combined form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97+     for nongaseous phase etching of glass.

    99,     for nongaseous phase etching of a silicon containing substrate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, for (a) combined
    processes and (b) unit operation not elsewhere provided for manufacturing a
    semiconductive electrical substrate or device.


CLS 216/80
TXT Silicon containing substrate is glass:

    Process under subclass 79 wherein the material is composed of glass.

    (1)     Note.  See Glossary for a definition of the term Glass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing subclass 31 for etching or leaching of a glass
    preform, made by a Class 65 glass manufacturing method, e.g., molding,
    shaping, etc. of the glass in a plastic or softened state by heating,
    subclass 61 for wearing away of surface material, e.g., abrading or
    grinding, etc.


CLS 216/81
TXT Etching elemental carbon containing substrate:

    Process under subclass 74 wherein the material to be etched contains
    elemental carbon in any of its allotropic forms, e.g., diamond, etc.


CLS 216/83
TXT NONGASEOUS PHASE ETCHING OF SUBSTRATE:

    Process the class definition wherein the etchant used is employed in a
    nongaseous phase:

    (1)     Note.  Most of the patents found in this subclass involve liquid
    phase etching processes. See Glossary for a definition of the term Liquid.


CLS 216/84
TXT With measuring, testing, or inspecting:

    Process under subclass 83 including the step of visually, chemically, or
    physically determining or measuring a variable condition or property of the
    substrate or the etching process.

    (1)     Note.  Included hereunder is a process of monitoring or controlling
    the etching process in response to a sensed condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59,     for measuring testing, inspecting, monitoring, or controlling of
    gas phase etching.

    93,     for recycling, regenerating, or rejuvenating an etchant including a
    testing, measuring, inspecting, monitoring, or controlling step.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    subclass 3 for testing or adjusting.


CLS 216/85
TXT By optical means or of an optical property:

    Process under subclass 84 where the test is performed optically or
    determines an optical property, e.g., reflectance, etc.


CLS 216/86
TXT By electrical means or of an electrical property:

    Process under subclass 84 where the test is performed electrically or
    determines an electrical property, e.g., resistance, etc.


CLS 216/87
TXT Irradiating, ion implanting, alloying, diffusing, or chemically reacting
    the substrate prior to etching to change properties of substrate toward the
    etchant:

    Process under subclass 83 wherein a substrate is altered by contacting
    prior to etching with a material or irradiation which (a) forms an alloy,
    (b) diffuses into, or (c) chemically reacts with the substrate, or causes a
    chemical reaction within the substrate to alter the effect of the etchant
    on the substrate or any part thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, subclass 705 for
    processes of altering the etchability of a semiconductor substrate prior
    the chemical etching for manufacturing a semiconductive electrical
    substrate or device; see the search notes thereunder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94,     nongaseous phase etching using high energy irradiation, e.g.,
    laser, electron-beam, ion beam, etc., where the substrate is not modified
    by irradiation prior to etching.


CLS 216/88
TXT Using film of etchant between a stationary surface and a moving surface
    (e.g., chemical lapping, etc):

    Process under subclass 83 in which the etching occurs at the interface at a
    film between the substrate and a conforming surface with relative motion
    between the substrate and the conforming surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, subclasses 691+ for
    chemical-mechanical polishing processes for manufacturing a semiconductive
    electrical substrate or device.


CLS 216/89
TXT Etchant contains solid particle (e.g., abrasive for polishing, etc.):

    Process under subclass 88 wherein the etchant also contains solid particles.


CLS 216/90
TXT Relative movement between the substrate and a confined pool of etchant:

    Process under subclass 83 including the step of causing a relative motion
    between a substrate being etched and an etchant which is confined in a
    container, (e.g., dipping, ultrasonic vibrating., etc.):

    (1)     Note.  The substrate being etched may also serve as the container.

    (2)     Note.  Boiling a liquid etchant is not considered sufficient for
    this subclass without disclosure that it is boiled to establish relative
    motion.


CLS 216/91
TXT Rotating, repeated dipping, or advancing movement of substrate:

    Process under subclass 90 wherein the substrate is (a) rotated with respect
    to the pool of etchant, (b) repeatedly dipped into and removed from the
    same pool of etchant, or (c) moved through a pool of etchant.


CLS 216/92
TXT Projecting etchant against a moving substrate or controlling the angle or
    pattern projection of the etchant or controlling the angle or pattern of
    movement of the substrate:

    Process under subclass 83 wherein an etchant is transported through space
    by mechanical force and (a) brought into contact with a substrate while the
    substrate is in motion, (b) the etchant or substrate is transported at a
    predetermined angle, or (c) the etchant or substrate is transported in a
    particular pattern.


CLS 216/93
TXT Recycling, regenerating, or rejunevating etchant:

    Process under subclass 83 which includes the steps of reconstituing or
    reusing an etchant.

    (1)     Note.  Removal of etchant from an etching bath and its return to an
    etching bath is considered recycling for this subclass.


CLS 216/94
TXT Etching using radiation (e.g., laser, electron-beam, ion-beam, etc):

    Process under subclass 83 wherein radiation is used separately or
    simultaneously during etching.


CLS 216/95
TXT Substrate is multilayered:

    Process under subclass 83 wherein the substrate is plural layered.

    (1)     Note.  The presence of a resist layer whose sole function is to
    protect some part of the substrate from etchant will not be considered
    sufficient to make the substrate plural-layered if it is to be removed.


CLS 216/96
TXT Etching inorganic substrate:

    Process under subclass 83 wherein at least one of layers of the substrate
    contains inorganic material.

    (1)     Note.  See Glossary for a definition of the term Inorganic.


CLS 216/97
TXT Substrate is glass:

    Process under subclass 96 wherein at least one of the layers of the
    substrate contains glass material.

    (1)     Note.  See Glossary for a definition of the term Glass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 31 for etching or leaching of glass
    preform, during manufacturing of a glass preform as per Class 65 definition.


CLS 216/98
TXT Frosting glass:

    Process under subclass 97 of producing a frost like opaque surface on the
    glass by etching.


CLS 216/99
TXT Substrate contains silicon or silicon compound:

    Process under subclass 96 wherein the substrate contains silicon in either
    elemental form or combined form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, for (a) combined
    processes and (b) unit operation not elsewhere provided for manufacturing a
    semiconductive electrical substrate or device.


CLS 216/100
TXT Substrate contains elemental metal, alloy thereof, or metal compound:

    Process under subclass 96 wherein the substrate contains metal in
    elemental, alloy, or compound form.


CLS 216/101
TXT Etching of a compound containing at least one oxygen atom and at least one
    metal atom:

    Process under subclass 100 wherein the substrate etched contains a compound
    having at least one metal atom and at least one oxygen atom, e.g., indium
    titanium oxide (I.T.O.), a ceramic oxide, etc.

    (1)     Note.  The substrate may also contain other elements.


CLS 216/102
TXT Metal is elemental aluminum, an alloy, or compound thereof:

    Process under subclass 100 wherein the substrate etched contains elemental
    aluminum, its alloys, or a compound thereof.


CLS 216/103
TXT Etchant contains acid:

    Process under subclass 102 wherein the substrate is etched with H+ ion
    producing or containing material.

    (1)     Note.  See Glossary for a definition of the term Acid.


CLS 216/104
TXT Etchant contains fluoride ion:

    Process under subclass 103 wherein the etchant contains fluoride ion.


CLS 216/105
TXT Metal is elemental copper, an alloy, or compound thereof:

    Process under subclass 100 wherein the substrate etched contains elemental
    copper, its alloys, or a compound thereof.


CLS 216/106
TXT Etchant contains acid:

    Process under subclass 105 wherein the substrate is etched with H+ ion
    producing or containing material.

    (1)     Note.  See Glossary for a definition of the term Acid.


CLS 216/107
TXT Etchant contains fluoride ion:

    Process under subclass 106 wherein the etchant contains fluoride ion.


CLS 216/108
TXT Etchant contains acid:

    Process under subclass 100 wherein the substrate is etched with H+ ion
    producing or containing material.

    (1)     Note.  See Glossary for a definition of the  term Acid.


CLS 216/109
TXT Etchant contains fluoride ion:

    Process under subclass 108 wherein the etchant  contains fluoride ion.


CLS 217/
TTL WOODEN RECEPTACLES

CLS 217/
TXT This class contains wooden receptacles of all kinds and their accessory
    parts, except special receptacles for special articles, as, for example,
    hat-boxes, musicians' cases, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 404 for hardware devices of the
    type there provided for to space stacked wooden receptacles for shipping or
    the like.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, particularly
    subclasses 233, 237+ for drying trays or receptacles.

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, appropriate subclasses for closures
    of the type provided for, and see the search notes thereto in Section IV
    for the loci of closures in other classes.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 371+ for a portable commodity containing
    a refrigerator, and see the reference to Class 217 in the class definition
    of Class 62.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, appropriate subclasses for a
    container particularly configured to hold a specific article or material
    including an article(s) or material(s) put up as a mercantile unit.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 200+ and see the notes thereto for
    receptacle closures in general.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, appropriate subclass,
    particularly subclass 137 for hand-held article carriers which are not
    receptacles.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 31+ for wooden receptacles
    combined with gas or vapor treatment of contained material.


CLS 217/1
TXT Receptacles under the class definition in which the side walls are formed
    of strips or sheets bent into the proper shape.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, for bent-wood vessels in
    which the form, method of manufacture, etc., do not differ essentially from
    paper vessels.


CLS 217/2
TXT Receptacles under subclass 1 having pieces forming the side walls bent at
    an angle, so that the receptacle is angular and not curved, in contour.


CLS 217/3
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising linings of various
    materials for boxes, barrels, crates, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses for
    compositions and paints for coating the interior of such receptacles.


CLS 217/4
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to the structure of a
    simple wooden tank independent of the various attachments, filling or
    emptying means, valves, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, appropriate subclass for fluid handling apparatus
    including tanks in combination with other fluid handling devices.

    220,    Receptacles, appropriate subclasses for tanks generally, subclasses
    200+ for tank closures and subclasses 694+ for miscellaneous tank
    attachments.


CLS 217/5
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising wooden boxes not
    classifiable elsewhere.


CLS 217/6
TXT Boxes under subclass 5 made from solid blocks by cutting or boring out the
    interior.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25.5,   and see notes thereunder, for analogous structures.


CLS 217/7
TXT Boxes under subclass 5 divided into compartments.


CLS 217/8
TXT Compartment-boxes under subclass 7 in which the compartments can be folded
    or knocked down.


CLS 217/9
TXT Boxes under subclass 8 for displaying the contents.


CLS 217/10
TXT Compartment-boxes under subclass 7 specially adapted for displaying the
    contents.


CLS 217/11
TXT Boxes under subclass 5 specially adapted for displaying the contents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 736+ for a container
    convertible to or from a display device and see search notes thereunder for
    the locus of other display means.


CLS 217/12
TXT Boxes under subclass 5 which fold, collapse, or knock down to form a
    compact package.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for knock down crates.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 6 for sectional folding receptacles of the
    type there provided for.


CLS 217/13
TXT Subject matter under subclass 12 comprising two or more sections assembled
    to form a package, each section being itself a receptacle or box.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for sectional crates.


CLS 217/14
TXT Folding boxes under subclass 12 whose walls and base have a hinged
    connection with each other to permit folding without complete
    disengagement.  In this subclass each box has one or more sides hinged to
    the base by a pivot whose axis is horizontal.  To these are hinged the
    remaining sides on vertical pivots.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for similarly hinged folding crates.


CLS 217/15
TXT Folding boxes under subclass 12 in which the sides are connected with the
    base by horizontal hinges and have no hinged connection with each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for similarly hinged folding crates.


CLS 217/16
TXT Folding boxes under subclass 12 in which the sides are connected to each
    other by vertical hinges and have no hinged connection to the base.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for similarly hinged folding crates.


CLS 217/17
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5 comprising box-walls distinct from the
    manner of assembling the same, the form of the receptacle, etc.


CLS 217/18
TXT Boxes under subclass 5 fitted with a series of compartments identical or
    similar in form, each for holding a single article as an egg, fruit,
    bottle, etc., of which the commercial egg-case is typical; also the
    structure of such a series of compartments irrespective of the means for
    supporting them in the receptacle.  This group of subclasses also include
    means for holding a single article when such means is similar structurally
    to those covered by the subclass definitions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 139+ for a portable
    segregating carrier for plural cylindrical beverage type receptacles and
    see search notes thereunder for the loci of similar containers.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclass 120.36 for
    other cell structures.


CLS 217/19
TXT Cells under subclass 18 peculiarly adapted for holding bottles.


CLS 217/20
TXT Bottle-cells under subclass 19 formed by cord or wire partitions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for other cord or wire cells.


CLS 217/21
TXT Bottle-cells under subclass 19 formed by cutting openings in a thin plate
    in which the bottles fit

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for other cells formed by plates.


CLS 217/22
TXT Bottle-cells under subclass 19 formed of partitions consisting of crossed
    flat strips.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30+,    for other cells formed of flat strips.


CLS 217/23
TXT Cells under subclass 18 made by bending a strip of flexible material to
    form one or a series of cells.


CLS 217/24
TXT Cells under subclass 18 formed of spring metal, which hold the article with
    a positive grip.


CLS 217/25
TXT Cells under subclass 18 formed of crossed cords or wires.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for similar cells for holding bottles.


CLS 217/25.5
TXT Cells under subclass 18 formed by depressions in a block of substantial
    depth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      21, 26, 26.5, and 27, for analogous cells.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    239 and 245 for similar structure.


CLS 217/26
TXT Cells under subclass 18 in which the articles are supported by relatively
    thin plates so disposed that the plane of the plate lies intermediate the
    planes defined by the ends of the objects supported.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for plate type bottle cells.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 9 for analogous supports
    for head-wear.


CLS 217/26.5
TXT Plate-cells under subclass 26 having cups as means for receiving the
    objects supported.


CLS 217/27
TXT Plate-cells under subclass 26 having cushioning means to prevent breakage
    or damage to the fragile articles therein.


CLS 217/28
TXT Cells under subclass 18 of flexible material forming pocket-like
    receptacles in which the articles rest.


CLS 217/29
TXT Cells under subclass 18 of various kinds, each being separate and
    detachable from the others.


CLS 217/30
TXT Cells under subclass 18 formed of flat strips crossed or otherwise disposed
    so that each strip forms part of a series of cells.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for bottle cells formed of flat strips.


CLS 217/31
TXT Cell-strips under subclass 30 having means by which the strips are secured
    together to prevent disengagement.


CLS 217/32
TXT Cell-strips under subclass 31 in which the slits by which the strips are
    interlocked are angular or otherwise varied from the straight form to
    provide more positive engagement.


CLS 217/33
TXT Cell-strips under subclass 31 bent to form the cells and locked in position.


CLS 217/34
TXT Locking-cells under subclass 31 having cushioning means to prevent breakage.


CLS 217/35
TXT Cells under subclass 18 having cushioning means of various forms to prevent
    breakage of the fragile articles held therein.


CLS 217/36
TXT Miscellaneous crates under subclass 5 not classifiable elsewhere.


CLS 217/37
TXT Crates under subclass 36 which are by their form, peculiarly adapted for
    holding bicycles.


CLS 217/38
TXT Bicycle-crates under subclass 37 which can be collapsed or folded into a
    compact package.


CLS 217/40
TXT Crates under subclass 36 for holding a number of small boxes of fruit,
    berries, etc.


CLS 217/42
TXT Crates under subclass 36 having means by which ventilation of the crate and
    its contents is effected.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    454,    Ventilation, subclass 77 for ventilation of an aircraft cargo
    cabin, subclass 79 for ventilation of a cargo hold on-board a ship,
    subclass 88 for ventilation of a freight-carrying railcar or trailer, and
    subclass 118 for the ventilation of other freight-carrying vehicles.


CLS 217/43
TXT Crates under subclass 36 which knock down into a compact package.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12+,    for knockdown boxes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 4.01+ for other sectional receptacles.


CLS 217/44
TXT Knockdown crates under subclass 43 which are cylindrical or bilge in form,
    including knockdown barrels.


CLS 217/45
TXT Knockdown crates under subclass 43 formed by assembling a number of
    sections, each section being itself a receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for sectional, knockdown boxes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 4.01+ for other sections receptacles.


CLS 217/46
TXT Knockdown crates under subclass 43 whose walls have a hinged connection
    with each other to permit folding without complete disengagement.  In this
    subclass each crate has one or more sides hinged to the base by a pivot
    whose axis is horizontal.  To these are hinged the remaining sides on
    vertical pivots.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for similarly pivoted boxes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 6+ for other folding sectional receptacles.


CLS 217/47
TXT Knockdown crates under subclass 43 in which the sides are connected with
    the base only by horizontal hinges and have no hinged connection with each
    other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for similarly hinged folding boxes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 6 for other folding sectional receptacles.


CLS 217/48
TXT Knockdown crates under subclass 43 in which the sides are connected with
    each other only by vertical hinges and have no hinged connection with the
    base.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for similarly hinged folding boxes.


CLS 217/49
TXT Crates under subclass 36 which are cylindrical in form.


CLS 217/51
TXT Crates under subclass 36 in which sides are made of slats interwoven with
    wire.


CLS 217/52
TXT Crates under subclass 36 having various cushioning means to prevent injury
    to the contents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for similar boxes.


CLS 217/53
TXT Cushioned crates under subclass 52 in which the cushioning is effected by
    padding the interior of the crate in various ways.


CLS 217/54
TXT Crates under subclass 52 cushioned by means of springs of various kinds.


CLS 217/55
TXT Crates under subclass 54 cushioned by means of spiral springs.


CLS 217/56
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5 comprising closures of various forms for
    wooden boxes and crates.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70      and 71, for closure fastening devices which are driven into place.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclasses 137 and 194 for fastening devices for
    such closures.


CLS 217/57
TXT Closures under subclass 56 for boxes having hinged connection thereto and
    mechanism for operating such closures for opening and closing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 267+ for similar
    closures for spittoons.


CLS 217/58
TXT Hinged closures under subclass 57 having means for displaying the contents
    of the box or a sample thereof.


CLS 217/59
TXT Hinged closures under subclass 57 having also a sliding motion in opening
    or closing the box.


CLS 217/60
TXT Devices under subclass 57 forming no part of the hinge for holding open a
    hinged closure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 61.62 for
    closure supports of the type associated with an electric circuit-controller
    which is responsive to the opening and closing movements of the closure.


CLS 217/61
TXT Supports under subclass 60 having no permanent connection with the box and
    being readily detachable, so as to be used on other than the original box.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 313 for box supports
    having indicia or means to mount indicia thereon.


CLS 217/62
TXT Closures under subclass 56 which are opened or closed by a sliding movement.


CLS 217/63
TXT Sliding closures under subclass 62 having means for displaying the contents
    of the box or a sample thereof.


CLS 217/64
TXT Devices under subclass 5 in the nature of movable partitions, usually with
    means for fastening the same against the contents of a partly-filled box to
    prevent displacement of such contents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86,     for similar followers for barrels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclass 36 for similar followers
    in trunks.


CLS 217/65
TXT Receptacles under subclass 5 in which the meeting edges of all the walls,
    including top and bottom, are modified in various ways or provided with
    fastening means to secure a firm joint.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for joints in
    general.


CLS 217/66
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5 comprising straps of wood or metal for
    binding the sides of the box firmly together.


CLS 217/67
TXT Straps under subclass 66 having strengthening corrugations, flutings, etc.


CLS 217/68
TXT Straps under subclass 66 formed of a single wire or a number of wires
    twisted or woven together.


CLS 217/69
TXT Devices under subclass 5 for bracing, strengthening, or protecting the
    corners and edges of boxes, crates, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for joints in
    general.


CLS 217/70
TXT Stays and fastening devices under subclass 69 which are fastened in place
    by driving, having nails, tacks, integral prongs, etc., for that purpose.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclasses 137 and 194, for fastenings in the
    nature of latches which lock and unlock.


CLS 217/71
TXT Driven stays and fastenings under subclass 70 made of wire.


CLS 217/72
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising bilge or staved
    vessels, including buckets, tubs, etc.


CLS 217/73
TXT Barrels under subclass 72 having outside casings for protecting or
    strengthening purposes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 415+ and 466, for similar receptacles
    having spaced walls or jackets.


CLS 217/74
TXT Barrels under subclass 72 having means by which ventilation of the interior
    and contents is effected.


CLS 217/75
TXT Barrels under subclass 72 having compartments of various kinds.


CLS 217/76
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72 comprising closures for barrels.


CLS 217/77
TXT Barrel-closures under subclass 76 having a rod extending from head to head
    to brace the same.


CLS 217/78
TXT Closures under subclass 76 held in position by expanding part or parts of
    the head.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108     and 109, for expanding bungs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 358+ for expanding stoppers.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 233+ for expansible plugs.


CLS 217/79
TXT Closures under subclass 78 expanded by means of a wedge which usually forms
    part of the closure itself.


CLS 217/80
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 relating to modifications in the croze of
    the stave and chamfer of the head.


CLS 217/81
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 comprising temporary closures for use
    after removal of the original head or closure.


CLS 217/82
TXT Covers under subclass 81 having a compartment for holding and displaying a
    sample of the contents of the barrel.


CLS 217/83
TXT Covers under subclass 81 hinged to the chime or having two parts hinged
    together, one being secured to the chime.


CLS 217/84
TXT Covers under subclass 81 having a sliding or rotary connection with the
    barrel or having a sliding or rotating part to disclose the interior of the
    barrel.


CLS 217/85
TXT Covers under subclass 81 made of woven wire, usually without fastening
    means.


CLS 217/86
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72 comprising partitions parallel to the head
    and adjustable to keep the solid contents of the barrel from shifting.


CLS 217/87
TXT Removable closures under subclass 76 for small openings in the head,
    whereby the contents may be reached without removing the entire head.


CLS 217/88
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72 relating to the stave alone as
    distinguished from the barrel as a whole or any other of its parts.


CLS 217/89
TXT Devices under subclass 76 for securing a chamfered head in the croze,
    usually of spring metal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclasses 137 and 194 for other devices for
    fastening barrel-closures in place.


CLS 217/90
TXT Barrels and other hooped vessels under subclass 72 having the hoops wholly
    or partially embedded in the walls.


CLS 217/91
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72 relating to hoops structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 16+ for hoops consisting
    of a strip, with means for securing the ends together, except for
    tightening the hoop.


CLS 217/92
TXT Subject matter under subclass 91 comprising yielding and contracting hoops
    to allow expansion and contraction of the vessel.


CLS 217/93
TXT Devices under subclass 91 for retaining the hoop in position and hoops with
    such devices forming a part thereof.


CLS 217/94
TXT Devices under subclass 91 forming a permanent part of the hoop itself for
    tightening the same.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 19 for analogous structure.

    140,    Wireworking, subclasses 93.2+ for apparatus for tensioning an
    article encircling band and securing spaced portions, the apparatus being
    supported manually or on the work.

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclasses 86+ for analogous
    structure.


CLS 217/95
TXT Tighteners under subclass 94 consisting of a screw mechanism between the
    ends of the hoop, the tightening being effected by turning a nut or
    screwbolt.


CLS 217/96
TXT Barrels and other staved vessels under subclass 72 having the meeting edges
    of the staves tongued and grooved or otherwise modified.


CLS 217/97
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72 comprising means for keeping the vessel
    moist to prevent shrinkage by drying and consequent falling apart of the
    staves.


CLS 217/98
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72 comprising miscellaneous bung hole
    closures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 317+ for fluid handling apparatus
    including means for gaining access to a barrel or other closed container by
    means of a connectable device or tap.


CLS 217/99
TXT Bungs under subclass 98 having valves therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 320+ for fluid handling apparatus
    including means for gaining access to a barrel or other closed container by
    means of a valved closure.


CLS 217/100
TXT Valved bungs under subclass 99 in which the valves operate automatically.


CLS 217/101
TXT Subject matter under subclass 100 comprising valves for relieving excessive
    pressure within the barrel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 455+ for pressure relieving valves of
    general utility.

    435,    Chemistry: Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 286.6+
    for safety devices which maintain a uniform pressure in a system of
    connected barrels.


CLS 217/102
TXT Subject matter under subclass 100 in which the action of the valve becomes
    automatic after the manipulation of a controlling part.


CLS 217/103
TXT Subject matter under subclass 100 in which the valve consists of a
    collapsible tube normally closed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 844+ for collapsible valves, per se.


CLS 217/104
TXT Subject matter under subclass 100 in which the valve consists, essentially,
    of a flexible diaphragm of rubber or other material placed over an opening
    which communicates with the interior of the barrel.  When the pressure
    within falls below atmospheric pressure, the diaphragm is raised or
    distended, exposing the opening, through which air is admitted into the
    barrel, thus restoring the equilibrium and permitting the liquid contents
    to be freely drawn.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 843+ for diaphragm valves, per se.


CLS 217/105
TXT Subject matter under subclass 100 comprising valves of various forms sealed
    by a liquid.


CLS 217/106
TXT Miscellaneous bungs under subclass 98 having means for positively securing
    the bung in position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclass 371 for portable locks wherein a cylinder lock
    constitutes a detachable or removable locking unit in the form of a plug.


CLS 217/107
TXT Locking means under subclass 106 consisting of screw-threaded or bayonet
    fastenings of some form.


CLS 217/108
TXT Locking-bungs under subclass 106 in which parts expand into frictional or
    interlocking engagement with the walls of the hole.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     for expanding barrel closures, and see the notes thereunder.


CLS 217/109
TXT Expanding bungs under subclass 108 in which a flexible gasket is expanded
    against the walls of the hole to hold the bung in position or secure a
    tight joint, or both.


CLS 217/110
TXT Subject matter under subclass 98 comprising simple plug-like stoppers held
    in position by frictional contact.


CLS 217/111
TXT Plugs under subclass 110 having a portion to be broken out for venting the
    barrel, inserting a spigot, etc.


CLS 217/113
TXT Subject matter under subclass 98 comprising bushings for bung holes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 2.3+ for analogous structure.


CLS 217/114
TXT Devices under subclass 98 for protecting or canceling a revenue stamp or
    other label placed over the bung.


CLS 217/122
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising miscellaneous wooden
    basket structures and parts.


CLS 217/123
TXT Subject matter under subclass 122 comprising the bottom closure of the
    basket body.


CLS 217/124
TXT Subject matter under subclass 122 comprising closures for baskets and means
    for fastening the same in place.

    (1)     Note.  Driven fasteners are classified in subclass 70 this class,
    and latches in Class 292, Closure Fasteners, subclasses 137 and 194.


CLS 217/125
TXT Subject matter under subclass 122 comprising the handle or means for
    securing it to the body of the basket.


CLS 217/126
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising bucket-ears peculiarly
    adapted for attachment to a wooden bucket.


CLS 217/127
TXT Boxes under subclass 5, for packaging bottles for transmission in the mails.


CLS 217/128
TXT Boxes under subclass 5 made from wall structure comprising mutually
    conforming inner and outer wall elements entirely spaced from one another
    to inhibit transfer of a temperature condition there past into the contents
    space.

    (1)     Note.  The temperature barrier space may be void or may be packed
    with insulation material or panels.  Thus, the requirement for this
    subclass is met by structure consisting of outer wall elements, an
    intervening lining, and an innermost wall or lining construction.

    (2)     Note.  The inner wall structure may be removable as a unit, in
    which case it is distinguishable from mere removable receptacle structure
    by the requirement that the removal involves an act of disconnecting some
    element; as opposed to mere lifting from the box, involving nothing more
    than the possible displacement of a closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for a tank comprising walls defining an insulating space for the
    contents of the tank.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 415+ and 467 for metallic double walled
    receptacles, either with or without packing or insulation between the
    walls; or receiving a refrigerant inserted into the interior thereof.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 214 for a cabinet including
    spaced or insulating wall structure.


CLS 217/129
TXT Boxes under subclass 128 including means dividing the contents space into
    separated spaces for the reception of a refrigerant (e.g., ice, water) and
    refrigeratable contents, respectively.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 236 for a cabinet including
    a space for an insertable refrigerant (e.g., ice, water).


CLS 217/130
TXT Box under subclass 5 for the reception of a container for refrigeratable
    contents and for a refrigerant, the box and the container being so related
    that substantially no container wall structure capable of direct contact
    with its contents is further capable of contact with wall or bottom
    structure of the box.


CLS 217/131
TXT Boxes under the class definition made from wall structure comprising
    mutually conforming inner and outer wall elements entirely spaced from one
    another to inhibit transfer of a temperature condition therepast into the
    contents space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4       or 28+, for a tank or a box, respectively, comprising spaced walls
    defining a temperature barrier to the contents; and see the search notes in
    the latter locus.

    130,    for a box accommodating a refrigerant and a container for
    refrigeratable contents, the container being supported spaced from the box
    walls and bottom to avoid the influence of temperature conditions outside
    the box.


CLS 218/
TTL HIGH-VOLTAGE SWITCHES  WITH ARC PREVENTING OR  EXTINGUISHING DEVICES

CLS 218/1
TXT Arc preventing or extinguishing devices:

    Subject matter under the class definition of Class 200 comprising a main
    contact assembly having a movable and stationary contact and means for
    preventing the formation of electric arcs when the circuit is made or
    broken, or extinguishing or smothering the arc if it forms.

    (1)     Note.  This class has been created from former subclasses 144
    through 151 in Class 200, Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, and is
    to be considered an integral part of that class.  See the subclass schedule
    of Class 200 for the hierarchical position of this subject matter relative
    to other subclasses in that class.

    (2)     Note.  Arc preventing by special operation of the contacts as a
    snap or quick movement is not included.  See Class 200, subclasses 402+.

    (3)     Note.  The medium in which circuit interruption is performed may be
    designated by a suitable prefix, for example, vacuum circuit breaker,
    air-current blowout circuit breaker, magnetic blowout circuit breaker,
    interposed non-conductor circuit breaker, etc.

    (4)     Note.  The terms ``circuit breaker", ``circuit interrupter", or
    ``switch" are synonymous in this class.

    (5)     Note.  Electrical systems or circuits which include arc
    interrupting switches, comprising the subject matter of this class, are
    excluded from this class. These systems or circuits are classified in the
    various electrical or art classes depending upon the type of system or
    apparatus controlled.  Furthermore, multiple circuit control type of
    circuit breakers are excluded from this class, and classified in Class 200.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 1+ for
    multiple circuit breaker control, subclasses 48+ for high potential type
    manually operated disconnect switch, subclasses 82+ for fluid pressure
    piston operated means, subclasses 237 through 292 for switch contact
    details, subclasses 293 through 307 for housing features, and subclass 308
    for indicator features.

       313, Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 238+ for support
    and spacing structure for electrode and shield, and subclasses 567 through
    643 for detail of gas or vapor type discharge devices.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 415 through 424 for
    testing electromechanical switching devices, and subclasses 500+ for fault
    detecting in electric circuits and of electric components.

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 2+ for electromagnetically actuated switches.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclasses 14+ for electrothermally actuated switches.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 20, 21, 22, and 68+ for
    mechanically variable resistors.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1 through
    138 for safety and protection of systems and devices with arc suppression
    at switching point, and miscellaneous structual details of housing or
    mounting assemblies with diverse electrical components.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 183 through 187 for arc
    suppressing or extinguishing environment for electrical connectors.


CLS 218/2
TXT Multiple break:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the means for preventing or
    extinguishing electric arc comprises two or more circuit breakers arranged
    to break at plural points of the circuit.


CLS 218/3
TXT Hybrid-type:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the multiple break consists of a
    combination of two or more different types of switches such as a vacuum
    switch and a gas switch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for sealed chamber of air-current blowout type circuit breaker.


CLS 218/4
TXT Series connected break:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 in which two or more breakers are connected
    end to end so that the same current flows between them.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for sealed chamber of air-current blowout type circuit breaker.



CLS 218/5
TXT Simultaneous break:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 including means to actuate two or more
    circuit breakers at the same time.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also includes multiple break operations which
    occur at substantially the same time.


CLS 218/6
TXT Sequential break:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the means for preventing or
    extinguishing electric arc comprises a low impedance resistor in series
    with each of the circuit breakers to establish a plurality of breaks in
    succession.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143,    for resistance inserting feature.


CLS 218/7
TXT Operating mechanism structure or arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 including details of the structure or
    arrangement of parts that actuate the main contact assembly of the multiple
    break interrupter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for auxiliary shunt circuit interrupter with operating mechanism.

    78,     for sealed chamber circuit interrupter with operating mechanism.

    84,     for air-current blowout circuit interrupter with operating
    mechanism.

    92,     for liquid circuit interrupter with operating mechanism.

    120,    for polyphase vacuum circuit interrupter with operating mechanism.

    140,    for vacuum circuit interrupter with operating mechanism.

    153,    for polyphase arc preventing device with operating mechanism.

    154,    for general arc preventing device with operating mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 400 for spring
    charge mechanism.


CLS 218/8
TXT Auxiliary shunt:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 in which an arcing contact is arranged in
    parallel to the main contact assembly so that when opening the circuit the
    main contact opens first and the auxiliary contact later.

    (1)     Note.  The shunt contact is made of highly resistant material.

    (2)     Note.  Any arc is formed on the auxiliary contact.


CLS 218/9
TXT Polyphase:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 wherein the circuit breaker breaks two or
    more separate conducting paths for two or more phases of alternating
    current.

    (1)     Note.  Devices known as bipole or double pole which complete the
    circuit in each conductor of a direct current circuit will also be found
    here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for air-current blowout circuit interrupter.

    58,     for puffer piston circuit interrupter.

    71,     for sealed chamber circuit interrupter.

    101,    for liquid circuit interrupter.

    119+,   for vacuum circuit interrupter.

    152+,   for general arc preventing devices.


CLS 218/10
TXT Vacuum switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 wherein the contacts are enclosed in an
    evacuated housing.

    (1)     Note.  The housing may be referred to as a tube or bulb.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for magnetic blowout circuit interrupter.

    118+,   for general arc preventing devices.


CLS 218/11
TXT Tubular shaped:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 wherein the interrupter is shaped like a
    hollow elongated cylinder.


CLS 218/12
TXT Disconnect switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 including an electrical switch of the
    bypass type for removing a load from its electrical supply source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for air-current blowout circuit interrupter.

    67,     for puffer piston circuit interrupter.

    80,     for sealed chamber circuit interrupter.

    100,    for liquid circuit interrupter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 48+ for
    details of a high potential type disconnect switch.


CLS 218/13
TXT Gas type:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 including a tank filled with arc
    extinguishing aeriform fluid, e.g., compressed air, helium, hydrogen,
    sulfur hexafluoride, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85,     for specific arc extinguishing gaseous medium.


CLS 218/14
TXT Operating mechanism structure or arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 including details of the structure or
    arrangement of parts that actuate the main contact of the auxiliary shunt
    interrupters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for general arc preventing device with operating mechanism.

    78,     for sealed chamber with operating mechanism.

    84,     for air-current blowout with operating mechanism.

    92,     for liquid with operating mechanism.

    120,    for polyphase vacuum switch with operating mechanism.

    140,    for vacuum switch with operating mechanism.

    153,    for polyphase arc preventing device with operating mechanism.

    154,    for general arc preventing device with operating mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 400 for spring
    charge mechanism.


CLS 218/15
TXT Arc chute assembly:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 including a plurality of spaced-apart
    plates to divide up an arc into smaller segments during extinguishment and,
    particularly, to metal plates which are coated with arc resistant
    insulating material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34+,    for magnetic blowout.

    81,     for air-current blowout.

    149+,   for general arc preventing device.


CLS 218/16
TXT Contact structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 wherein structural details of an electrode
    which engages or disengages to open or close the circuit within the circuit
    interrupter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30+,    for magnetic blowout circuit interrupter.

    48+,    for air-current blowout circuit interrupter.

    65+,    for puffer piston circuit interrupter.

    74+,    for sealed chamber circuit interrupter.

    107+,   for liquid circuit interrupter.

    123+,   for vacuum circuit interrupter.

    146+,   for general arc preventing devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 237-292 for
    switch contact features.

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, appropriate subclasses for feature of electrical switch
    contact.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    appropriate subclasses for feature of electrical switch contact.


CLS 218/17
TXT Movable contact assembly:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 wherein the contact members are so
    arranged and are adjusted or controlled relative to each other along an
    axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     for air-current blowout circuit interrupter.

    108,    for liquid circuit interrupter.

    124,    for vacuum interrupter.


CLS 218/18
TXT Arcing contact:

    Subject matter under subclass 17 including special contacts on which the
    arc is drawn after the main contacts of the circuit breaker have opened.


CLS 218/19
TXT Movable contact assembly reciprocates:

    Subject matter under subclass 17 wherein the movable contact assembly moves
    in a linear direction alternately backward and forward along a common axis.


CLS 218/20
TXT Movable contact assembly pivots:

    Subject matter under subclass 17 including means to permit the movable
    contact assembly to rotate about a common axis in alternate directions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for magnetic blowout circuit interrupter.


CLS 218/21
TXT Arcing contact pivots relative to movable main contact assembly:

    Subject matter under subclass 20 including means to permit the arcing
    contact to move from and rotate in the same direction about a common axis
    of the movable contact assembly.


CLS 218/22
TXT Magnetic blowout:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the circuit interrupter contains an
    electromagnetic coil or a permanent magnet whose field is used to aid the
    interruption of an arc drawn between the contacts.


CLS 218/23
TXT Permanent magnet:

    Subject matter under subclass 22 comprising a piece of hardened magnetized
    steel or other magnetic material used in the extinguishment of the arc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for arcing chamber in liquid switch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 2+ for details of permanent magnets used in
    electromagnetically operated switches.


CLS 218/24
TXT Magnetic yoke structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 including the structural details of a
    contrivance for magnetically interconnecting a pair of pole plates which
    belong to the magnet.



CLS 218/25
TXT Located outside switch housing:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein the permanent magnet is placed
    exterior to a switch enclosure.



CLS 218/26
TXT Located inside switch housing:

    Subject matter under subclass 26 wherein the permanent magnet is placed
    within a switch enclosure.


CLS 218/27
TXT Connected to contact:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein the magnetic material is
    electrically connected to the stationary contact, and is so arranged to
    transfer the arc to the contact as soon as contact continuity is broken.


CLS 218/28
TXT Plural coils:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein the magnetic blowout circuit
    breaker consists of more than one conductor wound up in a spiral form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for arcing chamber in liquid switch.

    141+,   for magnetic coil used in vacuum switch.


CLS 218/29
TXT Arc spinner:

    Subject matter under subclass 22 wherein the arc is transferred to a ring
    electrode and is spun by the action of magnetic forces created on the ring
    electrode within a vacuum or gaseous medium.


CLS 218/30
TXT Contact structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 22 comprising structural details of an
    electrode which engages or disengages to open or close the circuit within
    the circuit interrupter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16+,    for auxiliary shunt circuit interrupter.

    48+,    for air-current blowout circuit interrupter.

    65+,    for puffer piston type circuit interrupter.

    74+,    for sealed chamber circuit interrupter.

    107+,   for liquid circuit interrupter.

    123+,   for vacuum switch.

    146+,   for general arc preventing devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 237 through
    292 for switch contact features.

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, appropriate subclasses for feature of electrical switch
    contact.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    appropriate subclasses for feature of electrical switch contact.


CLS 218/31
TXT Bridging contacts:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 including a set of contacts in which the
    moving contact touches two stationary contacts substantially simultaneously
    during operation of the circuit breaker.

    (1)     Note.  The simultaneous operation referred to above does not
    preclude the well known prior art equivalent structure in which a
    substantially simultaneously operation occurs, e.g., contact wiping.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 16 and 243
    for bridging contact features.

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, appropriate subclasses for feature of electrical switch
    contact.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    appropriate subclasses for feature of electrical switch contact.


CLS 218/32
TXT Pivot:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 including a pin or shaft on the end of
    which the contact is rested and turned or rotated.


CLS 218/33
TXT Reverse looped or flexible stationary contact:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein the stationary contact is capable
    of being bent in a u-shaped or sinusoidal configuration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 275 for
    particular contact shape.


CLS 218/34
TXT Arc chute:

    Subject matter under subclass 22 comprising spaced sidewalls of insulating
    material and metal plates extending between the sidewalls for chopping an
    arc into a family of series related arclets.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for auxiliary shunt circuit interrupter.

    81,     for air-current blowout circuit interrupter.

    149+,   for general arc preventing device.


CLS 218/35
TXT With vent means:

    Subject matter under subclass 34 including means to release excess arc
    gases generated within the chute.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99,     for liquid circuit breaker housing.

    157,    for general arc preventing device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 306 for details
    of venting means in a switch housing.


CLS 218/36
TXT Arc runner (e.g., arc horn):

    Subject matter under subclass 34 including one of a pair of diverging
    electrodes on which an arc is extended to the point of extinction or to the
    point of transferring the generated arc into the portion of the arc chute
    where the generated arc is divided into sub-arcs after the main contacts of
    the switching device have parted.

    (1)     Note.  Arc runner is sometimes referred to as arc horn.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for arc runner, per se.

    148,    for general arc prevention devices.


CLS 218/37
TXT Insulated conductor structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 34 including details of a conductor covered
    with a dielectric having a rated insulating strength equal to or greater
    than the voltage of the circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147,    for general arc preventing devices with arc shielding means.


CLS 218/38
TXT Arc splitting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 37 including means to promote current
    interruption by aggressive cooling of arcs and subdivision of arcs into a
    series of sub-arcs, partial arcs, or arclets.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103+,   for arcing chamber in the liquid circuit breaker.


CLS 218/39
TXT Skew, parallel, or vertical position:

    Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein a plurality of insulated
    conductors extend in an oblique in respect to the axis of the arc, in the
    same direction and never converging or diverging, or in a position
    perpendicular to the axis of the arc.



CLS 218/40
TXT Arc runner (e.g., arc horn):

    Subject matter under subclass 22 including one of a pair of diverging
    electrodes on which an arc is extended to the point of extinction, or to
    the point of transferring the generated arc into a portion of an arc chute
    where the generated arc is divided into sub-arcs after the main contacts of
    the switching device have parted.

    (1)     Note.  Arc runner is sometimes referred to as arc horn.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for arc runner combination with arc chute.

    148,    for general arc prevention devices.


CLS 218/41
TXT Barrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 22 wherein the circuit interrupter includes a
    partition for the insulation or isolation of electric arcs.


CLS 218/42
TXT Within vacuum:

    Subject matter under subclass 22 wherein the switch whose contacts are
    enclosed in an evacuated bulb.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118+,   for vacuum switch in general arc preventing devices.


CLS 218/43
TXT Air-current blowout:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including means for directing a blast of
    gas, such as air, across the arc to extinguish it.


CLS 218/44
TXT Polyphase:

    Subject matter under subclass 43 wherein the circuit breaker breaks two or
    more separate conducting paths for two or more phases of alternating
    current.

    (1)     Note.  The poles are insulated from each other and are coupled in
    such a manner as to operate simultaneously.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for auxiliary shunt circuit interrupter.

    58,     for puffer piston circuit interrupter.

    71,     for sealed chamber circuit interrupter.

    101,    for liquid circuit interrupter.

    119+,   for vacuum circuit interrupter.

    152+,   for general arc preventing devices.


CLS 218/45
TXT Disconnect switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 43 including a mechanical switch that is
    intended to disconnect the air-current blowout circuit breaker from the
    electric power source for maintenance, changing connections, or opening and
    closing circuits.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for auxiliary shunt circuit interrupter.

    67,     for puffer piston circuit interrupter.

    80,     for sealed chamber circuit interrupter.

    100,    for liquid circuit interrupter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 48+ for
    details of a high potential type disconnect switch.


CLS 218/46
TXT Arcing chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 43 including an enclosed compartment in which
    the arc is confined and brought into contact with gas-evolving material or
    another arc extinguishing substance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103+,   for arcing chamber in liquid circuit interrupter.

    156+,   for arcing chamber in general arc preventing device.


CLS 218/47
TXT Plural chambers:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 wherein the chamber has two or more
    compartments.


CLS 218/48
TXT Contact structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 43 comprising structural details of an
    electrode which engages or disengages to open or close the circuit within
    circuit interrupter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16+,    for auxiliary shunt circuit interrupter.

    30+,    for magnetic blowout circuit interrupter.

    65+,    for puffer piston circuit interrupter.

    74+,    for sealed chamber circuit interrupter.

    107+,   for liquid circuit interrupter.

    123+,   for vacuum circuit interrupter.

    146+,   for general arc preventing devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 237-292 for
    switch contact features.

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, appropriate subclasses for feature of electrical switch
    contact.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    appropriate subclasses for feature of electrical switch contact.


CLS 218/49
TXT Fixed:

    Subject matter under subclass 48 including a conducting part having a
    contact surface which remains substantially stationary.


CLS 218/50
TXT Movable:

    Subject matter under subclass 48 including a conducting part which bears a
    contact surface arranged for movement to and from the stationary contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17+,    for auxiliary shunt circuit interrupter.

    108,    for liquid circuit interrupter.

    124,    for vacuum circuit interrupter.


CLS 218/51
TXT With gas flow means:

    Subject matter under subclass 43 including means defining a confined
    channel for conveying a dielectric gas along a path from a source through
    the confined channel.


CLS 218/52
TXT Exhaust port:

    Subject matter under subclass 51 wherein the confined channel has an
    orifice to direct the gas onto the arc to extinguish the arc.



CLS 218/53
TXT With nozzle:

    Subject matter under subclass 43 including a terminal discharging pipe
    member which is attached to a first of the two contact members and in which
    compressed gas is caused to flow from a compression space into an expansion
    space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for compressing cylinder in puffer piston circuit interrupter.

    63+,    for puffer piston circuit interrupter.

    72+,    for sealed chamber circuit interrupter.


CLS 218/54
TXT With throat region:

    Subject matter under subclass 53 wherein the nozzle has a narrow
    constricted passage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for puffer piston circuit interrupter.

    73,     for sealed chamber interrupter.


CLS 218/55
TXT Grounding switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 43 including a mechanical switching device by
    means of which the air-current blowout circuit breaker is electrically
    connected to earth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     for sealed chamber circuit interrupter.


CLS 218/56
TXT Self extinguishing:

    Subject matter under subclass 43 including a material which ignites and
    burns when exposed to a flame or elevated temperature to extinguish an arc.


CLS 218/57
TXT Puffer piston:

    Subject matter under subclass 43 including a relatively movable piston and
    cylinder, whereby the movement of the contact to the open position causes
    the relative movement of the piston and cylinder to create a high pressure
    region which forces the flow of gas through the separating contacts for
    extinguishing the generated arc.

    (1)     Note.  The words ``puffer piston" and ``puffer" are used to
    describe the dynamic characteristics of this type of switch.

    (2)     Note.  The contact assembly usually has a hollow, tubular, or
    cylindrical configuration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    for liquid circuit interrupter.


CLS 218/58
TXT Polyphase:

    Subject matter under subclass 57 wherein the circuit breaker breaks two or
    more separate conducting paths for two or more phases of alternating
    current.

    (1)     Note.  The poles are insulated from each other and are coupled in
    such a manner as to operate simultaneously.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for auxiliary shunt circuit interrupter.

    44,     for air-current blowout circuit interrupter.

    71,     for sealed chamber circuit interrupter.

    101,    for liquid circuit interrupter.

    119+,   for vacuum circuit interrupter.

    152+,   for general arc preventing devices.


CLS 218/59
TXT With gas blast means:

    Subject matter under subclass 57 including details of means which compress
    air to a certain pressure.


CLS 218/60
TXT Piston structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 including structural details of a solid or
    hollow disc-like plunger moving linearly in a close fitting bored
    receptacle termed its cylinder.


CLS 218/61
TXT Compressing cylinder structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 including structural details of a tubular
    of an air-compressing unit located within the puffer piston circuit
    interrupter for extinguishing a generated arc.


CLS 218/62
TXT With nozzle:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 including a terminal discharging pipe
    member which is attached to a first of the two contacts members and in
    which compressed gas is caused to flow from a compression space into an
    expansion space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for air-current blowout circuit interrupter.

    63+,    for puffer piston circuit interrupter.

    72+,    for sealed chamber circuit interrupter.


CLS 218/63
TXT With nozzle:

    Subject matter under subclass 57 including a terminal discharging pipe
    member which is attached to the first of the two contacts members and in
    which compressed gas is caused to flow from a compression space into an
    expansion space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for air-current blowout circuit interrupter.

    62,     for compressing cylinder in puffer piston circuit interrupter.

    72+,    for sealed chamber circuit interrupter.


CLS 218/64
TXT With throat region:

    Subject matter under subclass 63 wherein the nozzle has a narrow passage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for air-current blowout interrupter.

    73,     for sealed chamber interrupter.


CLS 218/65
TXT Contact structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 57 wherein structural details of an electrode
    which engages or disengages to open or close the circuit within the circuit
    interrupter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16+,    for auxiliary shunt circuit interrupter.

    30+,    for magnetic blowout circuit interrupter.

    48,     for air-current blowout circuit interrupter.

    74+,    for sealed chamber circuit interrupter.

    107+,   for liquid circuit interrupter.

    123+,   for vacuum circuit interrupter.

    146+,   for general arc preventing devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 237-292 for
    switch contact features.

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, appropriate subclasses for feature of electrical switch
    contact.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    appropriate subclasses for feature of electrical switch contact.


CLS 218/66
TXT Valve (e.g., blast valve or pressure relief valve):

    Subject matter under subclass 57 wherein a movable cover or lid which
    regulates the ingress and egress of fluids and gases, such as a blast valve
    or pressure relief valve, are included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109,    for liquid circuit interrupter.


CLS 218/67
TXT Disconnect switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 57 including a mechanical switch that is
    intended to disconnect the air-current blowout circuit breaker from the
    electric power source for maintenance, changing connections, and opening
    and closing circuits.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for auxiliary shunt circuit interrupter.

    45,     for air-current blowout circuit interrupter.

    80,     for sealed chamber circuit interrupter.

    100,    for liquid circuit interrupter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 48+ for
    details of a high potential type disconnect switch.


CLS 218/68
TXT Sealed chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 43 wherein the air-current blowout
    interrupter units are enclosed in a gas tight or watertight vessel.


CLS 218/69
TXT Plural switch connected in series:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 including two or more circuit interrupting
    breakers are connected in succession; that is, the same current passes
    through each breaker in completing its path to the source of supply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for series connected multiple break circuit interrupter.


CLS 218/70
TXT Hybrid-type:

    Subject matter under subclass 69 wherein the plural switches connected in
    series consist of a combination of two or more different types of switches
    such as a vacuum switch and a gas switch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for multiple break circuit interrupter.


CLS 218/71
TXT Polyphase:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein the circuit breaker breaks two or
    more separate conducting paths for two or more phases of alternating
    current.

    (1)     Note.  The poles are insulated from each other and are coupled in
    such a manner as to operate simultaneously.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for auxiliary shunt circuit interrupter.

    44,     for air-current blowout circuit interrupter.

    58,     for puffer piston circuit interrupter.

    101,    for liquid circuit interrupter.

    119+,   for vacuum circuit interrupter.

    152+,   for general arc preventing devices.


CLS 218/72
TXT With nozzle:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 including a terminal discharging pipe
    member which is attached to the first of the two contacts members and in
    which compressed gas is caused to flow from a compression space into an
    expansion space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for air-current blowout circuit interrupter.

    62,     for compressing cylinder in puffer piston circuit interrupter.

    63+,    for puffer piston circuit interrupter.


CLS 218/73
TXT With throat region:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the nozzle has a narrow passage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for air-current blowout circuit interrupter.

    64,     for puffer piston circuit interrupter.


CLS 218/74
TXT Contact structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein structural details of an electrode
    which engages or disengages to open or close the circuit within the circuit
    interrupter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16+,    for auxiliary shunt circuit interrupter.

    30+,    for magnetic blowout circuit interrupter.

    48+,    for air-current blowout circuit interrupter.

    65+,    for puffer piston circuit interrupter.

    107+,   for liquid circuit interrupter.

    123+,   for vacuum circuit interrupter.

    146+,   for general arc preventing devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 237-292 for
    switch contact features.

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, appropriate subclasses for feature of electrical switch
    contact.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    appropriate subclasses for feature of electrical switch contact.


CLS 218/75
TXT Busbar:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein heavy copper straps or bars are
    used (a) to carry high currents or (b) to make a common connection between
    several circuits having a specific structural order or relationship.


CLS 218/76
TXT Arcing chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 including an enclosed compartment in which
    the arc is confined and brought into contact with gas-evolving material or
    other arc extinguishing substance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46+,    for air-current blowout circuit interrupter.

    103+,   for arcing chamber in liquid circuit interrupter.

    156+,   for arcing chamber in general arc preventing device.


CLS 218/77
TXT Shielding:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 including a protecting or screening means
    to protect terminals or conductors from electric or magnetic fields
    generated within the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136+,   for vacuum circuit interrupter house shielding.

    147,    for general electrical connecting means with arc shielding.


CLS 218/78
TXT Operating mechanism structure or arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 including details of the structure or
    arrangement of parts that actuate the main contact assembly of the sealed
    chamber air-current blowout interrupters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for multiple break circuit interrupter.

    14,     for auxiliary shunt circuit interrupter with operating mechanism.

    84,     for air-current blowout circuit interrupter with operating
    mechanism.

    92,     for liquid circuit interrupter with operating mechanism.

    120,    for polyphase vacuum circuit interrupter with operating mechanism.

    140,    for vacuum circuit interrupter with operating mechanism.

    153,    for polyphase arc preventing device with operating mechanism.

    154,    for general arc preventing device with operating mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 400 for spring
    charge mechanism.


CLS 218/79
TXT Grounding switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 including a mechanical switching device by
    means of which air-current blowout circuit breaker is electrically
    connected to earth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for air-current blowout circuit interrupter.


CLS 218/80
TXT Disconnect switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 including a mechanical switch that is
    intended to disconnect the air-current blowout circuit breaker from the
    electric power source for maintenance, changing connections, and opening
    and closing circuits.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for auxiliary shunt circuit interrupter.

    45,     for air-current blowout circuit interrupter.

    67,     for puffer piston circuit interrupter.

    100,    for liquid circuit interrupter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 48+ for
    details of a high potential type disconnect switch.


CLS 218/81
TXT Arc chute:

    Subject matter under subclass 43 including a structure affording a confined
    space or passageway, usually lined with arc-resisting material, into or
    through which an arc is directed for extinction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for auxiliary shunt circuit interrupter.

    34+,    for magnetic blowout.

    149+,   for general arc preventing device.


CLS 218/82
TXT Identical units back-to-back:

    Subject matter under subclass 43 wherein a pair of circuit breaking units
    are connected in series with each other.


CLS 218/83
TXT Recirculating systems:

    Subject matter under subclass 43 comprising a high-pressure compressed air
    enclosure and a low-pressure air vessel and compressor means compressing
    air taken from the low-pressure vessel to supply compressed gas to the
    high-pressure enclosure.


CLS 218/84
TXT Operating mechanism structure or arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 43 including details of the structure or
    arrangement of parts that actuate the main contact assembly of the
    air-current blowout interrupters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for multiple break circuit interrupter.

    14,     for auxiliary shunt circuit interrupter with operating mechanism.

    78,     for sealed chamber circuit interrupter.

    92,     for liquid circuit interrupter with operating mechanism.

    120,    for polyphase vacuum circuit interrupter with operating mechanism.

    140,    for vacuum circuit interrupter with operating mechanism.

    153,    for polyphase arc preventing device with operating mechanism.

    154,    for general arc preventing device with operating mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 400 for spring
    charge mechanism.


CLS 218/85
TXT Arc extinguishing medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 43 comprising a specific material or
    substance which enhances or facilitates current interruption and arc
    extinguishing.


CLS 218/86
TXT Low pressure cut-off valve means:

    Subject matter under subclass 43 comprising a valve which shuts off
    according to the detection of pressure either below or above a few pounds
    in excess of the atmospheric pressure.


CLS 218/87
TXT Magnetic synchronous contacts:

    Subject matter under subclass 43 including secondary contacts which operate
    by electrodynamic drive means controlled by a zero-current after the
    opening of the main contacts.


CLS 218/88
TXT Control of blast valve and contacts:

    Subject matter under subclass 43 comprising a movable valve member that can
    be operated from a normally closed position to an open position to create a
    gas blast.


CLS 218/89
TXT Interposed non-conductor:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including an insulator which is used to
    smother the arc by being positioned between the contacts and across the
    path of the arc when the contacts are separated to break the circuit.



CLS 218/90
TXT Gas-evolving chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 including a container composed of
    material, which under the influence of the arc heat, emits gases or vapors
    tending to extinguish the arc.


CLS 218/91
TXT Liquid:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the interposed non-conductor is
    composed of molecules that move freely among themselves but do not tend to
    separate like those of gases.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes the circuit controllers or
    interrupters referred to as ``oil-switches".


CLS 218/92
TXT Operating mechanism structure or arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 including details of the structure or
    arrangement of parts that actuate the main contact assembly of the liquid
    circuit interrupters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for multiple break circuit interrupter.

    14,     for auxiliary shunt circuit interrupter with operating mechanism.

    78,     for sealed chamber circuit interrupter with operating mechanism.

    84,     for air-current blowout circuit interrupter with operating
    mechanism.

    120,    for polyphase vacuum circuit interrupter with operating mechanism.

    140,    for vacuum circuit interrupter with operating mechanism.

    153,    for polyphase arc preventing device with operating mechanism.

    154,    for general arc preventing device with operating mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 400 for spring
    charge mechanism.


CLS 218/93
TXT Piston:

    Subject matter under subclass 92 including details of a solid or hollow
    disc-like plunger moving linearly in a close fitting bored receptacle.


CLS 218/94
TXT Delay means (e.g., dashpot):

    Subject matter under subclass 92 including the structure details of means
    for retarding the activation of the operating mechanism; for example,
    dashpot.


CLS 218/95
TXT Chemical explosive primer:

    Subject matter under subclass 92 including means of chemical propellants to
    close or open the interrupter.


CLS 218/96
TXT With oil flow feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 92 including specific structure details of
    flow path for the oil circuit interrupter.


CLS 218/97
TXT Housing or tank structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 including structural details of a casing
    or a container for holding the insulating liquid and components of the
    liquid circuit interrupter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134+,   for details of single-phase vacuum circuit interrupter housing.

    139,    for details of vacuum circuit interrupter housing or tank.

    155+,   for details of housing of general arc preventing  device.


CLS 218/98
TXT With raising and lowering means:

    Subject matter under subclass 97 wherein the circuit breaker includes a
    lifter mechanism to lift up and down any given number of tanks.


CLS 218/99
TXT With venting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 97 including means to release excess pressure
    occurring within the housing of the liquid circuit breaker.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     for magnetic blowout arc chute.

    106,    for liquid circuit interrupter arcing chamber.

    157,    for general arc preventing device.


CLS 218/100
TXT Disconnect switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 including a mechanical switch that is
    intended to disconnect the insulating circuit breaker from the electric
    power source for maintenance, changing connections, and opening and closing
    circuits.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for auxiliary shunt circuit interrupter.

    45,     for air-current blowout circuit interrupter.

    67,     for puffer piston circuit interrupter.

    80,     for sealed chamber circuit interrupter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 48+ for
    details of a high potential type disconnect switch.


CLS 218/101
TXT Polyphase:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 wherein the circuit breaker breaks two or
    more separate conducting paths for two or more phases of alternating
    current.

    (1)     Note.  The poles are insulated from each other and are coupled in
    such a manner as to operate simultaneously.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for auxiliary shunt circuit interrupter.

    44,     for air-current blowout circuit interrupter.

    58,     for puffer piston circuit interrupter.

    71,     for sealed chamber circuit interrupter.

    119+,   for vacuum circuit interrupter.

    152+,   for general arc preventing devices


CLS 218/102
TXT With resistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 including a component made of a material
    that has a specific resistance or opposition to the flow of electrical
    current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, appropriate subclasses for electrical
    resistor.


CLS 218/103
TXT Arcing chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 including an enclosed compartment in which
    the arc is confined and brought into contact with gas-evolving material or
    other arc extinguishing substance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46+,    for air-current blowout circuit interrupter.

    76,     for sealed chamber circuit interrupter.

    156+,   for arcing chamber in general arc preventing device.


CLS 218/104
TXT Including magnet or coil:

    Subject matter under subclass 103 including a conductor wound up in a
    spiral form, or a piece of iron or steel that possesses the property of
    attracting certain substances as iron.


CLS 218/105
TXT Grid or baffle stack:

    Subject matter under subclass 103 including a plate or wall for directing
    the arc in a desired flow pattern in the arcing chamber.


CLS 218/106
TXT With venting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 103 including means to release excess
    pressure occurring within the arcing chamber of the liquid circuit breaker.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     for magnetic blowout arc chute.

    99,     for details of liquid circuit interrupter housing.

    157,    for general arc preventing device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 306 for details
    of venting means in a switch housing.


CLS 218/107
TXT Contact structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 wherein structural details of an electrode
    which engages or disengages to open or close the circuit within the circuit
    interrupter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16+,    for auxiliary shunt circuit interrupter.

    30+,    for magnetic blowout circuit interrupter.

    48+,    for air-current blowout circuit interrupter.

    65+,    for puffer piston circuit interrupter.

    74,     for sealed chamber circuit interrupter.

    123+,   for vacuum circuit interrupter.

    146+,   for general arc preventing devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 237-292 for
    switch contact features.

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, appropriate subclasses for feature of electrical switch
    contact.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    appropriate subclasses for feature of electrical switch contact.


CLS 218/108
TXT Movable:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 including a conducting member which
    supports a contact surface arranged for movement to and from the stationary
    contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17+,    for auxiliary shunt circuit interrupter.

    50,     for air-current blowout circuit interrupter.

    124,    for vacuum interrupter.


CLS 218/109
TXT Valve (e.g., spring biased valve plate):

    Subject matter under subclass 91 wherein a movable cover or lid which
    regulates the ingress and egress of fluids, such as a spring biased valve
    plate is included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66,     for puffer piston circuit interrupter.


CLS 218/110
TXT Bridging contacts:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 including a set of contacts in which the
    moving contact touches two stationary contacts substantially simultaneously
    during operation of the circuit breaker.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 16 and 243
    for bridging contact features.

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, appropriate subclasses for feature of electrical switch
    contact.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    appropriate subclasses for feature of electrical switch contact.


CLS 218/111
TXT Explosion pot:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 including a strong shell which totally
    encloses the arcing area at the contacts.


CLS 218/112
TXT Oil poor breaker:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 wherein the circuit breaker has an
    arc-enclosing switching chamber containing a quantity of oil sufficient for
    arc  extinction by blast action, but much smaller than the quantity needed
    in conventional tank-type oil breakers.


CLS 218/113
TXT Rotary contact:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 including a substantially annular
    rotatable contact member that precludes the displacement of the insulating
    fluid in which they are disposed.


CLS 218/114
TXT Pressure generating arc control means:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 including an enclosure of insulating
    material within which the arc is drawn by the separating movement of the
    circuit breaker contacts, a relatively high-pressure being developed in the
    enclosure by the arc to cause a blast of deionizing fluid to be discharged
    through the arc path and out from the enclosure at one side thereof.


CLS 218/115
TXT Plural series connected:

    Subject matter under subclass 114 in which two or more pressure generating
    arc control means are connected end to end so that the same current flows
    throughout the circuit.


CLS 218/116
TXT Puffer-piston:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 including a movable contact, at least one
    other contact, a relatively movable piston, and cylinder whereby the
    movement of the contact to the open position causes the relative movement
    of the piston and cylinder to create a high pressure region which forces
    the flow of liquid through the separating contacts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for air-current blowout circuit interrupter.


CLS 218/117
TXT Solid:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the interposed non-conductor is
    composed of a matter having a definite shape and volume in which the motion
    of the molecules is restricted.


CLS 218/118
TXT Vacuum:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the contacts are enclosed in an
    evacuated housing.

    (1)     Note.  The housing may be referred to as a tube or bulb.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for auxiliary shunt circuit interrupter.

    42,     for magnetic blowout circuit interrupter.


CLS 218/119
TXT Polyphase:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein the circuit breaker breaks two or
    more separate conducting paths for two or more phases of alternating
    current.

    (1)     Note.  Devices which are known as bipole or double pole and which
    complete the circuit in each conductor of a direct current circuit will
    also be found here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for auxiliary shunt circuit interrupter.

    44,     for air-current blowout circuit interrupter.

    58,     for puffer piston circuit interrupter.

    71,     for sealed chamber circuit interrupter.

    101,    for liquid circuit interrupter.

    152+,   for general arc preventing devices.


CLS 218/120
TXT Operating mechanism structure or arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 119 wherein details of the structure or
    arrangement of parts of the polyphase vacuum switch are included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for multiple break circuit interrupter.

    14,     for auxiliary shunt circuit interrupter with operating mechanism.

    78,     for sealed chamber circuit interrupter with operating mechanism.

    84,     for air-current blowout circuit interrupter with operating
    mechanism.

    92,     for liquid circuit interrupter with operating mechanism.

    140,    for vacuum circuit interrupter with operating mechanism.

    153,    for polyphase arc preventing device with operating mechanism.

    154,    for general arc preventing device with operating mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 400 for spring
    charge mechanism.


CLS 218/121
TXT Single-pole:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 including a contact arrangement in which
    all contacts in the arrangement connect in one position or another to a
    common contact.


CLS 218/122
TXT Pressure monitoring means:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 including means having a vacuum pressure
    detector element for supervising the exertion of force in the vacuum switch
    or detecting the loss of vacuum within the vacuum switch housing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 415, 424, and other
    appropriate subclasses for testing of electromechanical circuit breakers.


CLS 218/123
TXT Contact structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein structural details of an
    electrode which engages or disengages to open or close the circuit within
    the circuit interrupter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16+,    for auxiliary shunt circuit interrupter.

    30+,    for magnetic blowout circuit interrupter.

    48+,    for air-current blowout circuit interrupter.

    65+,    for puffer piston circuit interrupter.

    74+,    for sealed chamber circuit interrupter.

    107+,   for liquid circuit interrupter.

    146+,   for general arc preventing devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 237-292 for
    switch contact features.

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, appropriate subclasses for feature of electrical switch
    contact.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    appropriate subclasses for feature of electrical switch contact.


CLS 218/124
TXT Movable:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 including a conducting member which
    supports a contact surface arranged for movement to and from the stationary
    contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17+,    for auxiliary shunt circuit interrupter.

    50,     for air-current blowout circuit interrupter.

    108,    for liquid circuit interrupter.


CLS 218/125
TXT Fixed:

    Subject matter under subclass 123 including a conducting part having a
    contact surface which remains substantially stationary.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for air-current blowout circuit interrupter.


CLS 218/126
TXT Auxiliary:

    Subject matter under subclass 123 including additional contacts located
    between the contacts of the main contact assembly.


CLS 218/127
TXT Significant shape:

    Subject matter under subclass 123 wherein significant configuration details
    of electrical contacts are included.


CLS 218/128
TXT Slotted or grooved:

    Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein the shape is an elongated
    depression or a narrow cut.


CLS 218/129
TXT Coil:

    Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein the electrode is wound into
    regularly spaced rings one above the other or one around the other.


CLS 218/130
TXT Specific material:

    Subject matter under subclass 123 including significant details of
    substances of which electrical connecting means is composed.


CLS 218/131
TXT Getter:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 including a substance introduced into the
    vacuum switch to increase the degree of vacuum by chemical or physical
    action on the residual gases generated by the arc.


CLS 218/132
TXT Alloy:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein the substance composed of two or
    more metals, or of a metal or metals with a non metal, intimately mixed as
    by fusion, electrodeposition, etc.


CLS 218/133
TXT Beryllium:

    Subject matter under subclass 123 wherein the substance is a steel-gray,
    bivalent, hard, light, metallic element of the magnesium group atno. 4.


CLS 218/134
TXT Housing structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 including structural details of an
    envelope or casing used in the single-pole vacuum switch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97+,    for details of liquid circuit interrupter.

    134+,   for details of single-phase vacuum circuit interrupter housing.

    139,    for details of vacuum circuit interrupter housing or tank.

    155+,   for details of housing of general arc preventing  device.


CLS 218/135
TXT Bellows:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 including a folding, flexible, or
    collapsible header to maintain air-tightness of the vacuum switch housing.

    (1)     Note.  The bellows is usually mounted to the contact rod supporting
    the movable contact and to the housing.  This flexible component allows the
    movable contact to reciprocate in contrast to Class 313 and Class 315 space
    discharge devices wherein the electrode assemblies are spaced and held
    fixed with respect to one another.


CLS 218/136
TXT Shielding:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 wherein the vacuum switch is provided
    with shielding means for preventing arc generated metallic vapor from
    condensing on the insulating housing of the switch or with means for
    electrostatically shielding the seal between the associated metal end cap
    and the insulating housing of the switch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for sealed chamber circuit interrupter.

    147,    for general electrical connecting means with arc shielding.


CLS 218/137
TXT With support:

    Subject matter under subclass 136 wherein the vacuum switch includes
    structural means to position the shielding means with respect to a
    cylindrical inner wall support of the vacuum switch housing to a base or
    structure.


CLS 218/138
TXT Potted or encapsulated:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 wherein in the space between the box or
    housing and the electrical switch contained therein is occupied by a solid
    or semi-solid mass of insulating material; or wherein the electrical switch
    is directly encapsulated in a mass of insulating material with such mass
    itself forming the housing.


CLS 218/139
TXT Housing structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 including specific structure details of a
    casing or an envelope for enclosing the vacuum switching elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97+,    for details of liquid circuit interrupter housing.

    134+,   for details of single-phase vacuum circuit interrupter housing.

    155+,   for details of housing of general arc preventing  device.


CLS 218/140
TXT Operating mechanism structure or arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 including details of the structure or
    arrangement of parts that actuate the main contact assembly for vacuum
    circuit breaker.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for multiple break circuit interrupter with operating mechanism.

    14,     for auxiliary shunt circuit interrupter with operating mechanism.

    78,     for sealed chamber circuit interrupter with operating mechanism.

    84,     for air-current blowout circuit interrupter with operating
    mechanism.

    92,     for liquid circuit interrupter with operating mechanism.

    120,    for polyphase vacuum circuit interrupter with operating mechanism.

    153,    for polyphase arc preventing device with operating mechanism.

    154,    for general arc preventing device with operating mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 400 for spring
    charge mechanism.


CLS 218/141
TXT With magnetic coil:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 including a winding of an electromagnet
    disposed so as to develop an axial magnetic field for diffusing an arc.


CLS 218/142
TXT Located inside housing:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the magnetic coil is placed
    within the vacuum switch housing


CLS 218/143
TXT Resistance inserting:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including a series circuit including an
    impedance means and an impedance contact assembly coupled in parallel with
    the main contact assembly.

    (1)     Note.  The impedance may be inserted into the circuit during the
    closing or opening operations.

       (2)  Note.  The resistance or impedance inserting means may be used in
    combination with any type of circuit interrupter assembly.


CLS 218/144
TXT With capacitor:

    Subject matter under subclass 143 including means having two conducting
    surfaces separated by an insulating or dielectric material.

    (1)     Note.  The capacitor may be used solely as the impedance means or
    in combination with another impedance means such as resistor, varistor,
    etc.


CLS 218/145
TXT With capacitor:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including means having two conducting
    surfaces separated by an insulating or dielectric material.


CLS 218/146
TXT Contact structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein structural details of an electrode
    which engages or disengages to open or close the circuit within the circuit
    interrupter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16+,    for auxiliary shunt circuit interrupter.

    30+,    for magnetic blowout circuit interrupter.

    48+,    for air-current blowout circuit interrupter.

    65+,    for puffer piston circuit interrupter.

    74+,    for sealed chamber circuit interrupter.

    107+,   for liquid circuit interrupter.

    123+,   for single-phase vacuum circuit interrupter.

    146+,   for general arc preventing devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 237-292 for
    switch contact features.

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, appropriate subclasses for feature of electrical switch
    contact.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    appropriate subclasses for feature of electrical switch contact.


CLS 218/147
TXT Arc shielding means:

    Subject matter under subclass 146 including means surrounding the contacts
    to provide an electrically insulating barrier between the contacts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for sealed chamber circuit interrupter.

    136+,   for vacuum circuit interrupter.


CLS 218/148
TXT Arc runner (e.g., arc horn):

    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising a structural element connected
    to the stationary contact providing a path for movement of one end of the
    arc to a remote point where the arc is subsequently extinguished.

    (1)     Note.  Arc runner is sometimes referred to as arc horn.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for arc chute of magnetic blowout circuit interrupter.

    40,     for magnetic blowout circuit interrupter.


CLS 218/149
TXT Arc chute assembly:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including a plurality of spaced apart
    plates to divide up an arc into smaller segments during extinguishment and,
    particularly, two metal plates which are coated with arc resistant
    insulating material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for auxiliary shunt circuit interrupter.

    34+,    for magnetic blowout circuit interrupter.

    81,     for air-current blowout circuit interrupter.


CLS 218/150
TXT Material:

    Subject matter under subclass 149 where significant details of the arc
    chute constituent are included.


CLS 218/151
TXT Metal plates structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 149 including specific structural details of
    arc chute plates.


CLS 218/152
TXT Polyphase:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the circuit breaker breaks two or
    more separate conducting paths for two or more phases of alternating
    current.

    (1)     Note.  Devices which are known as bipole or double pole and which
    complete the circuit in each conductor of a direct current circuit will
    also be found here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for auxiliary shunt circuit interrupter.

    44,     for air-current blowout circuit interrupter.

    58,     for puffer piston circuit interrupter.

    71,     for sealed chamber circuit interrupter.

    101,    for liquid circuit interrupter.

    119+,   for vacuum circuit interrupter.


CLS 218/153
TXT Operating mechanism structure or arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 152 including details of the structure or
    arrangement of parts that actuate the main contact assembly of the
    polyphase arc preventing or extinguishing devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for multiple break circuit interrupter with operating mechanism.

    14,     for auxiliary shunt circuit interrupter with operating mechanism.

    78,     for sealed chamber circuit interrupter with operating mechanism.

    84,     for air-current blowout circuit interrupter with operating
    mechanism.

    92,     for liquid circuit interrupter with operating mechanism.

    120,    for polyphase vacuum circuit interrupter with operating mechanism.

    140,    for vacuum circuit interrupter with operating mechanism.

    154,    for general arc preventing device with operating mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 400 for spring
    charge mechanism.


CLS 218/154
TXT Operating mechanism structure or arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including details of the structure or
    arrangement of parts that actuate the main contact assembly of the arc
    preventing or extinguishing devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for multiple break circuit interrupter with operating mechanism.

    14,     for auxiliary shunt circuit interrupter with operating mechanism.

    78,     for sealed chamber circuit interrupter with operating mechanism.

    84,     for air-current blowout circuit interrupter with operating
    mechanism.

    92,     for liquid circuit interrupter with operating mechanism.

    120,    for polyphase vacuum circuit interrupter with operating mechanism.

    140,    for vacuum circuit interrupter with operating mechanism.

    153,    for polyphase arc preventing device with operating mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 400 for spring
    charge mechanism.


CLS 218/155
TXT Housing structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including structural details of an envelope
    or casing used for the arc preventing or extinguishing devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97+,    for details of liquid circuit interrupter housing.

    134+,   for details of single-phase vacuum circuit interrupter housing.

    139,    for details of vacuum circuit interrupter housing.


CLS 218/156
TXT Arcing chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 including an enclosed compartment in
    which the arc is confined and brought into contact with gas evolving or
    other arc extinguishing material in a manner that results in the limitation
    of the voltage at the line terminal and the interruption of the arc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46+,    for air-current blowout circuit interrupter.

    76,     for sealed chamber circuit interrupter.

    103+,   for arcing chamber in liquid circuit interrupter.


CLS 218/157
TXT With venting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 156 including means to release excess
    pressure occurring within the arc chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     for magnetic blowout arc chute.

    99,     for liquid circuit interrupter housing or tank.

    106,    for liquid circuit interrupter arcing chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 306 for details
    of venting means in a switch housing


CLS 218/158
TXT Arc extinguishing material:

    Subject matter under subclass 156 comprising a material which facilitates
    current interruption and extinguishment of an arc.


CLS 219/
TTL ELECTRIC HEATING

CLS 219/
TXT I.      This class includes all those devices commonly known as electric
    heaters, electric-heating metal working apparatus, electrically-heated
    tools and instruments. Processes are classified with the apparatus unless
    otherwise indicated by the subclass title.

    II.     This is the generic class for electric heating devices, per se.
    Devices and systems equipped with electric heating means in which the
    electric heating means is combined with or includes specific other art
    structure whereby the heated material is withdrawn, stored or otherwise
    utilized will be classified in the appropriate other art class to which it
    pertains and cross referenced back to Class 219.

    (a)     An example of other classes mentioned above is Class 122, Liquid
    Heaters and Vaporizers in which such terms as steam dome, super heaters,
    steam separators, condensers, traps, etc., are considered to be art
    structure over and beyond the mere heating of a liquid and comprising
    specific means for further storing or utilizing the liquid or vapor
    resulting from a heating step and sufficient to exclude the claimed subject
    matter from this class.

    (b)     The liquid heaters to be found in this class, subclasses 281+ are
    very similar to those classified in Class 122 and in Class 126, subclasses
    344+.  The general line to be followed in distinguishing between this and
    those classes is as follows:  Where the claims recite specific electrical
    means for heating a liquid only and the end result recited is a heated
    liquid only and no further means is claimed for withdrawing the liquid for
    further use the device will be considered a liquid heater for this class.
    For an understanding of the lines between Classes 122 and 126 consult the
    class definitions and the notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclass 284 for bed structures with devices for heating or
    cooling of, and subclass 421 for devices for supporting bed clothing with
    heating means.

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclass 1 for miscellaneous shoe machinery
    with heaters, subclasses 32.1, 33.2 and 41.5 for sole machines with
    electric heaters, subclasses 53.1, 53.3 and 69.7 for heel machines with
    electric heaters, subclass 78.5 for sole and/or heel burnishing machines
    with heating means, and subclasses 114.2, 114.6, 116.2, 117.4, and 129.4
    for tools or forms used in shoe manufacturing with heating means.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 1.5 for
    electrostatic cleaning, subclasses 300.1+ for cleaning by air blast or
    suction wherein the fluid may be heated and subclasses 104.001+ for
    implements which may be heated.

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclass .27 for drying apparatus.

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclasses 3+ for singeing devices
    which may utilize electric heating means.

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 32 for wire razor devices, subclasses 34.05+ for
    razors combined with heated blade, and subclass 42 for the combination
    where the blade is movable.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 519+ for
    processes which may utilize electric heaters particularly subclass 283 for
    drying the hair on the head and the subclasses under the title "Apparatus"
    for particular drying apparatus which may utilize electric heating means.

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclass 2.6 for boots and shoes with
    heating means.

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing, or Smoothing, subclasses 74+ for flat irons
    which may include electrical heating devices by name only.

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions.

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclass 65 for cupola gas
    generators wherein electric current is used for heating purposes, and
    subclass 103 for retorts in which is located an electric heater for
    gasifying the oil.

    55,     Gas Separation, subclass 267 for apparatus with heating or cooling
    means for the gas.

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 523 for a motor operated by the expansion
    and contraction of a unit mass where the expansion is caused by an
    electrical heating means.

    62,     Refrigeration, particularly subclasses 148, 159+, 167, 238, 275+,
    324+, and 351 for heating means associated with refrigeration apparatus.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, appropriate subclasses for glass working
    apparatus utilizing electrical heating means particularly subclass 40 for
    means employing dielectric or joule effects and subclasses 152+ for fusion
    bonding devices.

    70,     Locks, appropriate subclasses for heater lock combinations
    according to the particular lock structure.

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses for heating metal by a
    means other than electricity and deforming it.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for measuring or
    testing devices with electrical heating means for testing purposes or for
    maintaining constant temperature.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, for patents claiming a metal composition, e.g., an alloy or a
    composition having a continuous phase of free metal made by consolidating
    metal particles.

    81,     Tools, appropriate subclasses for particular tool structure which
    may be combined with heating means.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 170+ for cutting apparatus combined with means
    to modify or control the temperature of the apparatus or work.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus peculiarly adapted for the preparation and preservation of food
    and utilizing electrical heating devices.  As between Class 219 and Class
    99 the structure shown and described may be the same in both classes;
    however those patents claiming a significant heating device structure as
    being in a device normally adapted for a cooking operation and not
    specifically claiming a means for handling food or   holding food while
    heating or for performing a function of cooking or otherwise preserving a
    food or beverage will ordinarily be classified in Class 219 while those
    patents containing limitations restricting the device to the cooking art
    will be classified in Class 99.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 92+ for presses for heating or drying the
    material operated upon, and subclass 102 for presses combined with other
    means which may be heating means.

    101,    Printing, see subclasses 3.1+, especially subclasses 8, 9+, 21, 25,
    27, and 31 for embossing or penetrating devices utilizing heated dies.

    104,    Railways, subclass 15 for electric welders for track joints and
    subclass 279 for track clearing devices comprising rail heaters.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, especially subclass 451 for heating devices
    which may be electrical.

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 194 for cremation apparatus that may utilize
    electric heating means; and subclass 250 for a refuse incinerator provided
    with an electric heater.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses, especially subclass 47
    for coating burning apparatus, and subclasses 50.1, 58+, 620+, 663+, and
    723+ for coating devices with means for applying electrical or radiant
    energy to work and or coating material, particularly subclasses 641+ for
    radiant heating devices.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, particularly subclasses 301, 302+ and 311+ for
    brooders and/or incubators especially subclasses 318+ for electrical
    incubators.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, appropriate subclasses for steam
    generating devices which may utilize electric heating means.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, particularly subclasses 543+ for means
    for heating the carburetor, subclass 142.5 for the combination of an
    internal combustion engine combined with external heating means for heating
    the engine or some adjunct thereof and subclass 145 for incandescent
    igniters.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, appropriate subclasses for structural features
    peculiar to stoves and furnaces, see particularly subclass 273.5 for
    domestic ovens with heat accumulators and subclass 400 for heat
    accumulators, per se.

    128,    Surgery, appropriate subclasses for various instruments combined
    with heating means or designed for the utilization of heat energy for
    therapeutic treatment of the human body.

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 185 for tobacco users' appliances with igniter
    means.

    132,    Toilets, subclass 7 for methods of hair treating comprising
    permanent waving with heat and subclass 118 for hair combs with heaters and
    subclass 148 for combs combined with other features; see also subclasses
    31+ for hair crimpers or curlers which may include heaters.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 105+ for
    apparatus with heating, cooling or heat exchange means.

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric for batteries in that
    class having heating means.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 341 for electric heating means for the
    system.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 33 for electric thawing or
    freeze protection means therefor.

    140,    Wireworking, subclass 112 for processes for joining of wires by
    electric welding.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 82 for the treatment of material by heating or cooling.

    148,    Metal Treatment, particularly subclasses 520, 525, and 565 for
    processes of significant heat treatment of metal to modify or maintain the
    internal physical structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical property of
    metal wherein electrical heating is utilized.  See section III, A, of Class
    148 to determine what constitutes significant heat treatment.

    164,    Metal Founding, appropriate subclasses for metal casting apparatus
    which may employ an electric heater.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for systems comprising both
    heating and cooling means or heat transfer, particularly subclasses 200+
    for automatic control; subclass 42 for vehicle heating and cooling and
    subclasses 47+ for structural installations such as radiant building panels.

    166,    Wells, subclass 60 for well structure with an electric heater in
    the well.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, appropriate subclasses for
    insulator devices and structural details of electrical conductors, per se.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 16 for an electrical
    heating process or device for forming a hole in the earth by directly
    applying heat to fluidize or comminute the material forming the earth.
    (See sections IV and VI of the class definition of Class 175 for the line
    between Class 175 and Class 219).

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 94 for pyrographic code recorders.

    184,    Lubrication, subclass 104 for heating and cooling devices for
    lubricators.

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, subclass 62 for trolley
    heads with heated ice clearers or preventers.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 121 for vaporizing devices with
    electric heating means.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses
    for specific switching structure.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclass 19 for a
    thermolytic distillation in which electrical energy is applied.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, particularly subclasses
    210, 236, 239, 241, 262, and 274 for electrolytic apparatus utilizing
    heating or cooling means.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 175+ for devices with
    heating or heat exchange means.

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, with the use of a plasma, note
    subclasses 67+.  The use of a cold plasma, which is a chemical reaction
    involving reactive ions and an article or substrate is not proper for Class
    219, Electric Heating. However, cold plasma is proper for Class 216,
    Etching a Substrate:  Processes.  The use of a high temperature thermal
    plasma which removes or alters material by thermal means is proper for
    Class 219, Electric Heating.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 143 for dispensing devices with
    electrical ignition means and subclass 150 for such devices with article
    treatment involving heating or cooling.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 146 for dispensers with heating or cooling.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 26 for heated hat forms, subclasses 51,
    70, 73, and 76 for apparatus including heating and steaming means and
    subclass 79 for heated glove forms.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, appropriate subclass
    for heating systems beyond the scope of Class 219 and involving automatic
    temperature control devices.

    237,    Heating Systems, appropriate subclasses for complete heating
    systems in which the heat source may be electrical.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 128+ for
    heating or cooling means for the fluid or system.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 134 for ice prevention devices utilizing
    electric heating means.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 316+ for infrared or thermal pattern
    recorders or document copiers, subclass 337 for a radiant energy electric
    signalling device responsive to luminous energy emitted from a heated
    luminophor irradiated by invisible radiation subclass 352 but conduction to
    or from some part of an infrared responsive electric signalling means,
    subclass 429 for temperature control of contained supported transferred
    fluent material, subclass 443.1 for a support for an object to be
    irradiated with charged particles with heat transfer to or from the object,
    and subclass 495.1 for plural invisible radiation sources including an
    infrared source, subclass 504 for an infraradiation source with a radiaton
    modifying member and subclass 238 for photocells with temperature control.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 139 and 142 for such
    apparatus with an electrical external heat supply.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for such apparatus
    with electrical heating devices.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclass 41 for such devices with heating
    or cooling means.

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants for prime mover dynamo plants for
    producing heat.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 117
    for heat responsive switching systems.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 341+ for
    piezoelectric crystals with temperature control means in which electrical
    circuit connections and the crystal are claimed.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 236 for such structures with
    heating, cooling or heat exchange means.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses for
    electric lamp, filament or cathode heaters, particularly subclasses 11+
    including indented subclass 14 for pyroelectric devices and subclasses 15+
    for such devices with electric heater temperature modifier means.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Consumable Electrodes,
    particularly subclasses 26+ for such devices with temperature modifying
    means.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, particularly
    subclasses 46+ 49, 50, 94+, and 112+ for systems with heated filaments,
    cathodes or device temperature modifiers.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, particularly
    subclass 236 for voltage magnitude control systems responsive to thermal
    conditions.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 70 for oscillator with temperature modifier.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 55+ for inductors with temperature
    modifiers.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    appropriate subclasses for specific switch structure with thermal actuating
    means.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, appropriate subclasses for electrical
    resistors, per se.  The mere claiming of a resistor having a heat
    insulating or heat conducting casing or housing does not exclude Class 338.
     However, as between Classes 219 and 338 the combination of a resistor used
    for heating purposes surrounded or incased by the structure to be heated or
    a resistor with structure or configuration for distributing, directing or
    concentrating the heat produced by the resistance is classified in this
    class (219), especially subclasses 200+.  See also section X of the class
    definition of Class 338 for a more detailed treatment of the line between
    the two classes.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 387.1 for weatherproofed
    audible signals (e.g., with ice melter).

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 704 for antennas
    with ice clearer or preventers which may utilize electric heaters.

    346,    Recorders, subclass 76.1 for thermal recording of phenomenon.

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, subclasses 171.1+ for
    thermal marking processes or apparatus.

    355,    Photocopying, subclasses 3+ for electrophotography devices
    utilizing heating means.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    safety and protection of systems and devices; indented subclasses 24, 25+,
    32, 34, 37, and 103+ provide thermal sensing devices in various circuits or
    systems; subclasses 99 and 211 for combinations including thermal relays
    and control circuits for thermal relays; subclass 158 for thermal
    indicating instrument; subclasses 161+ for control circuits including a
    thermal device and subclasses 247+ for igniting systems.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 92+ for the combination of illuminating
    means and a heating device.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, for furnaces which are
    especially adapted to metallurgical and related work.  Such furnaces are
    generally characterized by electrical heating means within the chamber
    containing the material to be heated, the heating means being either an
    arc, a resistance, the material itself or a combination of such means and
    are further characterized by adaptation for operation on a granular
    material, such as crushed ore or for handling molten material fusing at a
    very high temperature, the material in both cases being received
    immediately within the body of the furnace.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, including electric heating
    arrangements to perfect a measurement or test or to maintain a constant
    temperature.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 1+ for a
    hand-manipulated coating implement with means to heat the material supply
    contained therein.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 56 and 131 for devices
    for heating the earth which may use electrical heating means; and subclass
    234 for a heating means employed in the installation of piling.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 21 and 22+ for processes of
    sterilizing with electric energy subclasses 186.19 and 186.2 for radiant
    energy chemical reactors with heating or cooling means; and subclasses 242
    and 295+ fo autoclaves.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    appropriate subclasses for a molding machine for shaping or reshaping
    nonmetals combined with means to heat or cool, see subclass 407 and the
    search notes thereunder.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 457+ for coating processes utilizing
    direct application of electrical magnetic, wave, or particulate energy.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product and
    Process, subclass 62 for battery having a temperature control and subclass
    120 for battery having heat exchange feature.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 258+ for a burner having an electrical
    heater or igniter.

    432,    Heating, appropriate subclass for a residual heating apparatus that
    may include a broadly recited electrical heater as a source of heat.

    452,    Butchering, subclass 73 for hot wire singers for fowl.

    454,    Ventilation, especially subclasses 83, 93, 121+, and 198 for
    condensation prevention devices which may use hot or heated air blown on a
    window or windshield.

    606,    Surgery, subclass 2.5 for subject matter relating to removal of a
    calculus (e.g., stone) from the body wherein the calculus is fractured or
    disintegrated by use of light energy.

    901,    Robots, subcollection 10 for a robot arm in which a sensor
    physically contacts and follows the work contour to control the arm
    movement and subcollection 42 for an art collection of welding robots.

    D23,    Environmental Heating and Cooling, Fluid Handling and Sanitary
    Equipment, subclasses 314+ for heating equipment.


CLS 219/50
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to the electrical
    heating of metal.

    (1)     Note.  The heating in this and indented subclasses is often, but
    not necessarily, accompanied by working of the metal.

    (2)     Note.  The metal heated is a workpiece and is separable and
    distinct from the heater, which is a tool.  However, heat may be developed
    within the metal by the passage of electric current.

    (3)     Note.  The heating may be for welding, brazing, soldering, heat
    treating or other purpose.

    (4)     Note.  The art in miscellaneous subclass 50 relates, for example,
    to mere heating of metal by the passing of an electric current through it.

    (5)     Note.  Subclasses 7.5, 8.5, 9.5, and 50 to 162 were formed in 1956
    by making official some unofficial digests which had been established
    during the previous two decades by the Examiners of Divisions 37 and 60.  A
    caveat is given:  While it is believed that the titles and definitions are
    reasonably correct, no assurance can be given that all of the patents,
    issued prior to the date of reclassification, are in the proper subclass,
    since the individual patents were not read during the reclassification
    project. Consequently, in making a thorough search in these subclasses, it
    is advisable to investigate every subclass which may possibly be pertinent
    and not, in order to shorten the search, to rely upon the principle of
    superiority of subclass subject matter because of position in the schedule,
    since the principle is applicable only in classes where each patent has
    been analyzed and placed in the schedule in accordance with that portion of
    the disclosed subject matter which is claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    600+,   for this subject matter where the heating is inductive heating.

    678+,   for microwave heating.

    764+,   for capacitive dielectric heating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, particularly subclasses 520, 525, and 565 for
    processes of significant heat treatment of metal to modify or maintain the
    internal physical structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical property of
    metal wherein electrical heating is utilized. See section III, A, of Class
    148 to determine what constitutes significant heat treatment.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, appropriate subclasses where
    the metal is heated in an electric furnace.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 934 for metallic
    stock produced by an electrical process, and subclass 939 for stock having
    a molten or fused coating.

    483,    Tool Changing, generally for a process or apparatus including a
    tool transfer means combined with either a tool support or storage means.
    A process or apparatus for electric heating wherein the sole significantly
    recited feature is changing a tool (e.g., a nonconsumable electrode) is
    properly classified in Class 483, and may be cross referenced into this
    class (Class 219, Electric Heating).


CLS 219/51
TXT Subject matter under subclass 50 relating to the manufacture of chain link.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclasses 1+, and the search
    notes thereto, for miscellaneous chain making, not involving significant
    electric heating.


CLS 219/52
TXT Methods under subclass 51.


CLS 219/53
TXT Subject matter under subclass 50 relating to the making of rail bonds.

    (1)     Note.  The bond may be for the purpose of furnishing a low
    resistance electrical shunt around the mechanical joint between rail
    sections of a railroad track or it may be for the purpose of mechanically
    uniting rail sections.


CLS 219/54
TXT Subject matter under subclass 53 in which the rail bond is made by means of
    an arc weld.


CLS 219/55
TXT Subject matter under subclass 53 relating to resistance welding methods.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for resistance welding apparatus for making rail bonds.


CLS 219/56
TXT Subject matter under subclass 50 relating to the bonding of wire or bar.

    (1)     Note.  The wire, for example, may be part of a fabric mesh, or the
    bar may form a grating or a metal window.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156,    for mere electric heating of rods or bars.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    140,    Wireworking, subclass 112 for this subject matter not having
    significant welding.


CLS 219/56.1
TXT Of wire leads:

    Subject matter under subclass 56 wherein the wire is connected to or from a
    circuit element.


CLS 219/56.21
TXT By microbanding:

    Subject matter under subclass 56.1 wherein the bonding is produced between
    miniature or microminiature workpieces.


CLS 219/56.22
TXT Methods:

    Subject matter under subclass 56.1 including processes of bonding wire
    leads.


CLS 219/57
TXT Subject matter under subclass 56 relating to butt bonding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    for miscellaneous butt bonding.


CLS 219/58
TXT Methods under subclass 56.


CLS 219/59.1
TXT Of cylinders (e.g., pipes and tubes):

    Subject matter under subclass 50 relating to the bonding of a seam of a
    cylinder.

    (1)     Note.  The seam may be helical, as in indented subclass 62.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101+,   for resistance butt bonding of cylindrical shaped tubing.

    607+,   for this subject matter where the heating is inductive.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    413,    Sheet Metal Container Making, subclasses 58+ for the longitudinal
    seaming of containers, such as cans, where no significant electric heating
    is involved.


CLS 219/60
TXT Subject matter under subclass 59.1 in which the bonding is accomplished by
    an electric arc.


CLS 219/60.2
TXT Tube sheet welding:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 wherein heat exchange tubes are arc butt
    welded to a perforated plate.


CLS 219/61
TXT Methods under subclass 60.


CLS 219/61.1
TXT Having internal support means:

    Subject matter under subclass 59.1 including support means for the
    cylinder, positioned inside the cylinder during the welding process.


CLS 219/61.11
TXT With forming means:

    Subject matter under subclass 61.1 including means for shaping the
    workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78.16,  for tube sealing apparatus.

    91.23,  for tube sealing methods.


CLS 219/61.12
TXT With cleaning means:

    Subject matter under subclass 61.1 including means to remove excess or
    undesirable material from the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78.14,  for work cleaning in bonding with pressure.


CLS 219/61.13
TXT With edge guidance means:

    Subject matter under subclass 61.1 including means to direct the path of
    the edges to be welded through the welding process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61.3,   for edge guidance subject matter without cylinder internal support
    means.


CLS 219/61.2
TXT Utilizing high frequency resistance heating:

    Subject matter under subclass 59.1 wherein the welding apparatus is
    operated by high frequency current.


CLS 219/61.3
TXT With edge guidance means:

    Subject matter under subclass 59.1 including means to direct the path of
    the workpiece edges through the welding process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61.13,  for this subject matter along with cylinder internal support means.


CLS 219/61.4
TXT With adjustable electrode means:

    Subject matter under subclass 59.1 including means to change the position
    of an electrode used in the welding process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86.33+, for spot bonding adjustable electrodes.

    86.8,   for interchangeable electrodes.

    88,     for positioning an electrode along a bus bar.


CLS 219/61.5
TXT With condition responsive control of the welding process:

    Subject matter under subclass 59.1 wherein the control means of the welding
    apparatus responds to a sensed condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86.41+, for spot bonding with electrode condition responsive control means.

    91.1,   for spot bonding with condition responsive control means.

    124.1+, for automatic positioning of an arc.


CLS 219/61.6
TXT Using three or more electrodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 59.1 including the use of three or more
    electrodes in the welding process.


CLS 219/61.7
TXT With cooling means:

    Subject matter under subclass 59.1 including means to maintain or lower the
    temperature of part or all of the welding apparatus or work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76.11,  for deposition welding with cooling means.

    86.31,  for spot bonding electrode support with cooling means.

    137.62, for consumable electrode gun with cooling means.


CLS 219/62
TXT Subject matter under subclass 59.1 in which the longitudinal bond or seam
    is helical.


CLS 219/63
TXT Subject matter under subclass 59.1 having a transformer of which at least a
    portion rotates in relation with the feed of the workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  The entire transformer, including its secondary terminals
    and their electrodes may rotate in unison as the electrodes ride along the
    work, or only a portion of the transformer, such as the secondary and
    electrodes, may rotate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for the structure of
    rotary transformers, per se.


CLS 219/64
TXT Subject matter under subclass 59.1 in which the tube is a container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    413,    Sheet Metal Container Making, subclasses 58+ for the longitudinal
    seaming of containers, such as cans, where no significant electric heating
    is involved.


CLS 219/65
TXT Subject matter under subclass 59.1 having nonrotating electrodes.

    (1)     Note.  The electrodes, for example, may oscillate to and from each
    other with the longitudinally split tube between them.


CLS 219/66
TXT Subject matter under subclass 59.1 having at least one electrode inside the
    cylinder being bonded.

    (1)     Note.  The inside electrode, for example, may be opposed to an
    exterior electrode, with the current flow between them traversing the
    region of the cylinder adjacent the longitudinal seam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for this subject matter where the cylinder is a container.


CLS 219/67
TXT Resistance heating methods under subclass 59.1.


CLS 219/68
TXT Subject matter under subclass 50 utilized for cutting or disintegrating.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to the severing of a
    wire cable by passing a fusing current through a short section thereof, or
    to the etching of a monogram into the surface of the metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for similar subject matter not having metallic workpieces as, for
    example, perforating of paper by sparks and machining of nonmetal by
    electron beams.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 16 for an electrical
    heating process or device for forming a hole in the earth by directly
    applying heat to fluidize or comminute the material forming the earth.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 640+ for electrolytic erosion of a
    workpiece to change the shape or surface configuration thereof.

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, subclasses 75 and 100 for the
    etching of metal.


CLS 219/69.1
TXT Electric arc:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 utilizing a continuous or sustained
    electric space discharge between an electrode and a work piece.

    (1)     Note.  The disintegrating action of the arc may be assisted, e.g.,
    by a flow of compressed air or oxygen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121+,   for this subject matter not utilized for cutting or disintegrating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclass 9.5 for using heat to desurface or gorge
    metal.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 224 for apparatus
    used for electrochemical machining.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclass 48 for flame cutting apparatus.


CLS 219/69.11
TXT Electric spark machining:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 utilizing a brief electric space discharge
    between an electrode and a work piece (i.e., A. C. voltage).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder were
    formerly unofficial digests.  Hence, the placement of documents therein
    might not reflect schedule hierarchy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus and methods of electrochemical machining.


CLS 219/69.12
TXT Wire cutting:

    Subject matter under subclass 69.11 utilizing a wire electrode for cutting
    a workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69.13,  for electrical circuits specially adapted to subject matter under
    subclass 69.1.

    69.2,   for vibrating a wire electrode during cutting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 206 for apparatus
    used in wire cutting use electrochemical machining.


CLS 219/69.13
TXT Circuits:

    Subject matter under subclass 69.11 utilizing an electrical circuit
    specially adapted for cutting or gouging.

    (1)     Note.  The electrical circuit may, for example, be the power supply
    or a control circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    subclasses 166+ for capacitor charging or discharging.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 474
    and 475 for machining using a numeric controller.


CLS 219/69.14
TXT Dielectric composition and purification:

    Subject matter under subclass 69.11 involving a dielectric medium between a
    workpiece and an electrode and any reuse or purification of the dielectric
    medium.

    (1)     Note.  The dielectric medium may be a gas or a liquid.

    (2)     Note.  The medium under this definition does not include
    electrolyte.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses for
    liquid purification in general.


CLS 219/69.15
TXT Electrodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 69.11 involving an electrode's shape,
    composition or holder used in an electric arc or electric spark cutting
    (EDM) operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 280+ for
    electrodes used in electrochemical machining.


CLS 219/69.16
TXT Gap spacing control:

    Subject matter under subclass 69.11 including apparatus to control the gap
    distance between an electrode and a workpiece.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 652+ for electrolytic erosion of a
    workpiece to change the shape or surface configuration thereof in which the
    gap between a tool and a workpiece is either maintained or defined.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 560+ for positional
    servo systems.


CLS 219/69.17
TXT Methods:

    Subject matter under subclass 69.11 including a method of machining
    specially adapted for treating particular objects or for obtaining special
    results.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 640+ for electrolytic erosion of a
    workpiece to change the shape or surface configuration thereof.


CLS 219/69.18
TXT Pulse:

    Subject matter under subclass 69.11 including a circuit used to shape a
    particular electric pulse to be applied between an electrode and a
    workpiece.


CLS 219/69.19
TXT Safety circuits:

    Subject matter under subclass 69.11 utilizing a safety circuit in the event
    of electric arcing or a short circuiting or in the event of danger (e.g.,
    an earthquake or fire).


CLS 219/69.2
TXT Vibrating electrodes or workpiece:

    Subject matter under subclass 69.11 wherein the electrode or workpiece is
    vibrating during machining.

    (1)     Note.  Any movement of the electrode or workpiece during machining
    will cause vibrationary movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 671 for electrolytic erosion of a
    workpiece to change the shape or surface configuration thereof which
    provides for agitation or vibration of the electrolyte.


CLS 219/70
TXT Subject matter under subclass 69 relating to hand held tools.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138+,   especially subclass 139, for similar subject matter not utilized
    for disintegration or cutting.


CLS 219/71
TXT Subject matter under subclass 50 in which the metal is heated by means of
    current flow between it and a surrounding liquid.

    (1)     Note.  The liquid may be quiet, as in a tank, or flowing, as in a
    jet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72+,    for analogous subject matter where the liquid is not used as an
    electrode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclasses for
    analogous subject matter utilized for electrochemistry.


CLS 219/72
TXT Subject matter under subclass 50 in which a nonatmospheric environment is
    created at the region of electric heating.

    (1)     Note.  The environment may, for example, be a bath of oil which
    prevents overheating and oxidation during resistance welding, or it may be
    a vacuum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68+,    for similar subject matter utilized for cutting or disintegrating.

    71,     for similar subject matter in which a liquid environment acts as an
    electrode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 218+ for formation of a metallic
    bond in a nonatomospheric environment wherein heating is other than
    electrical.


CLS 219/73
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72 in which the non-atmospheric environment
    is slag or a slag forming material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124.1+, for this subject matter in combination with means to automatically
    position an electric arc.

    145.22, 145.23 and 146.1+, for mere arc electrodes having fluxing or
    slagging means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclasses 21+ for arc lamps having an auxiliary material supply to the arc.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, subclass 28 for glass batch forming
    compositions containing slag.


CLS 219/73.1
TXT Including electroslag welding:
    Subject matter under subclass 73 including welding processes wherein
    coalescence is produced by molten slag which melts the filler metal and the
    surfaces of the work being welded.


CLS 219/73.11
TXT For coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 73.1 wherein at least one layer of weld
    material is applied to cover a portion of the surface area of a workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73.21,  for submerged arc coating.

    76.1+,  for deposition welding.


CLS 219/73.2
TXT With granular flux supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 73 including means for depositing particulate
    weld protection material.


CLS 219/73.21
TXT For deposition welding:

    Subject matter under subclass 73.2 including welding processes wherein
    coalescence is produced by heating with an arc or arcs between a bare metal
    electrode or electrodes and the work, with the arc being shielded by a
    blanket of granular, fusible material on the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73.11,  for electroslag coating.

    76.1+,  for other deposition welding subject matter.


CLS 219/74
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72 in which the nonatmospheric environment is
    a gas whose composition is not that of air or in which the nonatmospheric
    environment is compressed or rarified air.

    (1)     Note.  The environment may be formed by the gases liberated by the
    coating of a "shielded" electrode (e.g., coated electrode) when an arc is
    struck from the electrode, or by an external gas supply connected to a hand
    held torch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    for this subject matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 231.01+ for
    analogous subject matter, not utilized to heat metal.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 22 for arc lamps having auxiliary fluent material feed to the arc.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 111.01+
    for systems, not utilized to heat metal, analogous to the systems of this
    subclass.


CLS 219/75
TXT Subject matter under subclass 74 in which the electric heating arc is of
    the nonconsumable electrode type.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to arc torches utilized
    in atomic hydrogen welding, in which the tungsten electrodes wear away only
    slowly.


CLS 219/76.1
TXT For deposition welding (e.g., coating or building up):

    Subject matter under subclass 50 relating to the coating or building up of
    a base by means of deposited metal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclasses for coating in general.


CLS 219/76.11
TXT With cooling means:

    Subject matter under subclass 76.1 including means to maintain or lower the
    temperature of part or all of the welding apparatus or work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86.31,  for spot bonding electrode support with cooling means.

    137.62, for consumable electrode arc welding with cooling means.


CLS 219/76.12
TXT Of multiple distinct layers:

    Subject matter under subclass 76.1 wherein the deposited weld material is a
    composite of separate strata.

    (1)     Note.  The layers are usually, but not necessarily, dissimilar in
    composition.


CLS 219/76.13
TXT By spark discharge:

    Subject matter under subclass 76.1 wherein a mixture of powders and
    combustible gases is detonated by an electrically produced spark, thereby
    simultaneously heating the powders and propelling them onto the workpiece
    surface at very high velocities.


CLS 219/76.14
TXT By electric arc:

    Subject matter under subclass 76.1 wherein the welding process includes
    heating with an electrically produced arc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121.11+, for electric arc welding.


CLS 219/76.15
TXT With nonconsumable electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 76.14 including electrode arc producing means
    without consumption of the electrode.


CLS 219/76.16
TXT Plasma:

    Subject matter under subclass 76.14 wherein coalescence is produced by
    heating with a constricted arc between an electrode and the work or the
    electrode and the constricting nozzle, and with shielding obtained from hot
    ionized gases.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121.36+, for other arc plasma heating subject matter.


CLS 219/76.17
TXT By resistance heating:

    Subject matter under subclass 76.1 including heating processes wherein
    coalescence is produced by the heat obtained from resistance of the work to
    electric current in a circuit of which the work is a part, and by the
    application of pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53      and 55, for rail bond resistance welding.

    59.1,   61.1+, 61.2, 61.3, 61.4, 61.5, 61.6, 61.7, and 67 for cylinder
    resistance heating methods.

    78+,    for other resistance heating subject matter.


CLS 219/77
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76.1 in which the part coated or built up is
    the cutting edge of a tool.


CLS 219/78.01
TXT For bonding with pressure (e.g., resistance welding):

    Subject matter under subclass 50 relating to the bonding of metal by means
    of pressure while heated by the electric current.

    (1)     Note.  The bond is usually, but not necessarily, a metal-to-metal
    weld.

    (2)     Note.  The heat is generally created by resistance heating, but
    may, as in the case of indented subclasses 97+, be created by an electric
    arc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53      and 55, for rail bond resistance welding.

    59.1,   61.1+, 61.2, 61.3, 61.4, 61.5, 61.6, and 61.7 for cylinder
    resistance welding subject matter.

    76.17,  for deposition welding by resistance heating.

    603+,   for this subject matter where the electric current is induced in
    the metal by electromagnetic or electrostatic induction.


CLS 219/78.02
TXT By solid-state bonding (e.g., diffusion):

    Subject matter under subclass 78.01 wherein the workpiece joint interface
    coalescence is produced essentially at temperatures below the melting point
    of the metals being joined, without the addition of a brazing filler metal.


CLS 219/78.11
TXT Honeycomb:

    Subject matter under subclass 78.01 wherein the bonded work has the
    structure or appearance of a honeycomb.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclass 181 for metal fusion bonding
    processes for honeycombs.


CLS 219/78.12
TXT Methods:

    Subject matter under subclass 78.11 including processes of making
    honeycombs.


CLS 219/78.13
TXT With additional heating device:
    Subject matter under subclass 78.01 including means for heating part or all
    of the work being welded other than the heating means used principally for
    accomplishing the welding process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91.22,  for methods of additional heating to the same spot.


CLS 219/78.14
TXT With work cleaning means:

    Subject matter under subclass 78.01 including means to remove excess or
    undesirable material from the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61.12,  for electric heating of metal cylinders with internal support
    having cleaning means.


CLS 219/78.15
TXT With work cutting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 78.01 including means to sever work during or
    after the welding process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124.21, for work cutting with automatic positioning of an electric metal
    heating arc.


CLS 219/78.16
TXT With work deforming means (e.g, tube sealing):

    Subject matter under subclass 78.01 including means for forging or shaping
    of the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61.11,  for forming means with the electric heating of cylinders having
    internal support means.

    91.23,  for methods of spot bonding with work deforming.


CLS 219/79
TXT Subject matter under subclass 78.01 having a conveyer for handling the
    workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124.1   and 125.1+, for similar subject matter in arc welding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses (e.g., subclasses
    373+ for a conveyor provided with an orienting device) for power driven
    conveyors, per se, and consult the search notes for related art.


CLS 219/80
TXT Subject matter under subclass 79 in which the bond is a spot bond.


CLS 219/81
TXT Subject matter under subclass 78.01 in which the electric current is
    applied to the metal by roller type electrodes.

    (1)     Note.  The roller electrode may produce a continuous weld or an
    interrupted weld, consisting of distinct spots.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for similar subject matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, appropriate subclasses for
    current collecting and current distributing rollers.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the notes thereunder.


CLS 219/82
TXT Subject matter under subclass 81 in which the workpiece is stationary and
    the roller moves.


CLS 219/83
TXT Methods under subclass 81.


CLS 219/84
TXT Roller electrodes under subclass 81.


CLS 219/85.1
TXT Brazing or soldering:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 in which the metal is heated and filler
    metal is used to produce a weld by means of brazing or soldering.

    (1)     Note.  The filler metal (flux or solder) is to be applied to at
    least one surface of the metals to be joined.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder were
    formerly unofficial digests.  Hence, the placement of documents therein
    might not reflect schedule hierarchy.

    SEARCH  THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129,    for brazing or soldering where an electric arc (torch) provides the
    required heat.

    615     and 616, for specific means of applying the heat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, for generic brazing and soldering means and methods.


CLS 219/85.12
TXT Utilizing radiant energy:

    Subject matter under subclass 85.1 in which the heat is applied to the
    metal by means of radiant energy (e.g., infrared lamps, resistance heaters,
    lasers, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121+,   for additional metal heating where the radiant energy source is an
    electron beam or laser.

    347+,   for heat energy reflector means.

    523+,   for the particular structure of resistance heater.


CLS 219/85.13
TXT Methods:

    Subject matter under subclass 85.12 including methods of brazing or
    soldering.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121,    for methods of welding metal workpieces by means of electron beam
    heating or by means of laser heating.


CLS 219/85.14
TXT With filler metal in circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 85.1 wherein the filler metal is melted by
    the passage of electrical current therethrough.


CLS 219/85.15
TXT Methods:

    Subject matter under subclass 85.14 which includes methods of brazing or
    soldering.


CLS 219/85.16
TXT Electrically heated tool (e.g., electrodes, heaters, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 85.1 in which the required heat is applied to
    the metal workpiece by means of a resistance heated tool having a
    particular structure.  Electrical current passes through the tool and
    produces the heat (e.g., electrodes, heaters, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    for the particular structure of an electrode.

    229+,   for a hand-manipulative tool with heated tip or heat applied to
    localized area.

    523+,   for resistance heater structure.


CLS 219/85.17
TXT Furnaces or enclosures:

    Subject matter under subclass 85.1 in which the required heat is applied to
    the metal by means of a particular furnace or enclosure (e.g., a heating
    chamber).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    388+,   for oven type enclosures including means whereby the material to be
    heated may be passed continuously through heated area.

    651,    for inductively heated furnaces or enclosures.


CLS 219/85.18
TXT Wire lead bonders:

    Subject matter under subclass 85.1 wherein the metal workpiece to be joined
    is wired.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56.1+,  for the electrical bonding of wire leads.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 4.5 and 904 for miscellaneous wire
    lead bonders (i.e., bonders which do not necessarily specify electric
    heating).


CLS 219/85.19
TXT Machine for predetermined operation:

    Subject matter under subclass 85.1 in which the required heat and filler
    metal are applied to the metal workpiece by means of a machine including
    means for conveying the workpiece and/or positioning the heated tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59.1+,  where the predetermined operation is the welding of pipes or tubes.

    79,     for electrical heating machines with a conveyor for workpiece.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 4.1+ for machines with means to
    apply the flux, to handle or move the work, and to align and bond the work.


CLS 219/85.2
TXT Fluxes or solders:

    Subject matter under subclass 85.1 in which the composition of a filler
    metal (flux or solder) can be used in a brazing or soldering operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146.1+, for the composition of a weld rod.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 122.1+ for alloy of metallic compositions; and
    subclass 257 for flux composition.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 23+ for fluxing compositions.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 262.1+ for a process of bonding
    wherein the work component, temperature, or pressure is critical.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, for the particular alloy
    composition.


CLS 219/85.21
TXT Solder preforms:

    Subject matter under subclass 85.1 in which the structure or shape of the
    filler metal (flux or solder) is predetermined to form the resultant joint
    (braze or weld).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85.2    and 146.1, for the specific composition of the solder preform.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclass 56.3 for additional solder forms
    used in bonding.


CLS 219/85.22
TXT Methods:

    Subject matter under subclass 85.1 with miscellaneous methods of brazing or
    soldering.


CLS 219/86.1
TXT By spot bonding:

    Subject matter under subclass 78.01 wherein welding is made between or upon
    overlapping members, coalescence may start and occur on the faying surfaces
    or may have proceeded from the surface of one member, and the weld cross
    section is approximately circular.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to spot welding of two
    overlapped plates where the spot weld is a substitute for a bolt or rivet
    connection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for spot bonding of wires, rods, or bars.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    140,    Wireworking, subclass 112 for nonelectric spot welders utilized to
    join wire.


CLS 219/86.21
TXT With hand-manipulative portable devices:

    Subject matter under subclass 86.1 wherein the bonding apparatus includes
    structure adapted to manually hold or manipulate the bonding tool or
    instrument while in use.


CLS 219/86.22
TXT With separately applied pressure and heat:

    Subject matter under subclass 86.1 wherein the pressure and heat are not
    applied simultaneously during the welding process.


CLS 219/86.23
TXT With welding pressure controlled by the work support:

    Subject matter under subclass 86.1 wherein the welding pressure is
    controlled by work support condition responsive means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86.41+, for significant electrode support condition responsive control
    means.


CLS 219/86.24
TXT With work orientation means:

    Subject matter under subclass 86.1 including means for positioning the work
    with respect to the welding apparatus.


CLS 219/86.25
TXT With significant electrode support:

    Subject matter under subclass 86.1 including means to position or orient
    the welding electrode with respect to the work.


CLS 219/86.31
TXT Having cooling means:

    Subject matter under subclass 86.25 including means to maintain or lower
    the temperature of part or all of the welding apparatus or work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61.7,   for cylinder welding with cooling means.

    76.11,  for deposition welding with cooling means.


CLS 219/86.32
TXT Having magnetic force actuated electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 86.25 wherein the bonding electrode is
    controlled by magnetically actuated means during the welding process.


CLS 219/86.33
TXT Having adjustment means:

    Subject matter under subclass 86.25 including means to change the position
    of the electrode.


CLS 219/86.41
TXT With condition responsive control means:

    Subject matter under subclass 86.33 wherein the electrode is automatically
    controlled in response to a sensed condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61.15,  for cylinder bonding with condition responsive control means.

    91.01,  for spot bonding with condition responsive control means.

    108+,   for automatic output control circuits.


CLS 219/86.51
TXT Responsive to pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 86.41 wherein the control means is affected
    by changes in the force applied to the work.


CLS 219/86.61
TXT By force balancing:

    Subject matter under subclass 86.51 including means to equalize the welding
    pressure of plural, simultaneously applied electrodes.


CLS 219/86.7
TXT For predetermined welding operation:
    Subject matter under subclass 86.33 wherein the welding process is
    performed in accordance with a preset schedule of operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125.1+, for arc welding with predetermined welding operation.


CLS 219/86.8
TXT Having interchangeable welding electrodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 86.25 having means for allowing plural
    electrodes to be used in place of each other.


CLS 219/86.9
TXT For one-face welding:

    Subject matter under subclass 86.1 wherein all electrical welding contact
    is applied to one side of the work.


CLS 219/87
TXT Subject matter under subclass 86.1 in which multiple spot bonds are
    produced.

    (1)     Note.  The multiple spot bonds can be produced, simultaneously by
    plural pairs of electrodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81+,    for this subject matter where the multiple bonds are produced by
    roller type electrodes.


CLS 219/88
TXT Subject matter under subclass 86.1 having fixed bus bars of extended length
    for supplying the heating current and having electrodes for transferring
    the current to the work, said electrodes being movably positioned along the
    bus bar.

    (1)     Note.  The bus bars, for example, may serve as backing members for
    absorbing mechanical thrust produced when the electrodes are clamped to the
    workpiece.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, subclasses 43+ for trolleys
    for transferring electric current from a stationary conductor to a movable
    load.


CLS 219/89
TXT Subject matter under subclass 86.1 in which the electrode is actuated by
    fluid pressure means.

    (1)     Note.  The electrode may, for example, have a hydraulic cylinder
    attached to it to obtain a high clamping or indenting force.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclasses, for
    miscellaneous fluid pressure actuated motors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclasses for
    rotary expansible chamber type pumps or motors, per se.


CLS 219/90
TXT Subject matter under subclass 86.1 in which opposing electrodes are mounted
    on the jaws of a plier or tong.


CLS 219/91.1
TXT With condition responsive control of the welding process:

    Subject matter under subclass 86.1 wherein the spot bonding process is
    automatically controlled in response to a sensed condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61.5,   for cylinder bonding with condition responsive control means.

    86.41+, for spot bonding electrode support condition responsive means.

    108+,   for automatic output control circuits.


CLS 219/91.2
TXT Methods:

    Subject matter under subclass 86.1 including processes of spot bonding.


CLS 219/91.21
TXT Of welding through insulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 91.2 including the processes of bonding
    through material through which essentially no current will flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92+,    for methods of welding current limitation including interposed
    insulation.


CLS 219/91.22
TXT With additional heating to same spot:

    Subject matter under subclass 91.2 including means to apply heat more than
    once to same area of the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78.13,  for additional heating devices.


CLS 219/91.23
TXT With work deforming:

    Subject matter under subclass 91.2 including means for forging or shaping
    of the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61.11,  for forming means with the electric heating of cylinders having
    internal support means.

    78.16,  for forming means with resistance welding.


CLS 219/92
TXT Subject matter under subclass 91.2 in which the heating current is made to
    localize at particular points of the workpiece by means other than the
    electrodes.

    (1)     Note.  The workpieces to be bonded, for example, may be coated with
    insulating paint on the contacting faces except at those points where
    bonding is to take place.


CLS 219/93
TXT Subject matter under subclass 92 in which the current localizing means
    comprises localized projections on the workpiece.


CLS 219/94
TXT Subject matter under subclass 92 in which the current localizing means
    comprises a member which is interposed between either the workpiece and
    electrode or between the workpieces being bonded, said member becoming part
    of the bond.


CLS 219/95
TXT Subject matter under subclass 78.01 in which the members to be bonded are
    brought together percussively to developed the bonding pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 940 for metallic
    stock comprising components bonded by percussive or explosive-type force.


CLS 219/96
TXT Methods under subclass 95.


CLS 219/97
TXT Subject matter under subclass 78.01 in which the metal workpieces to be
    bonded are heated by an electric arc created between them before pressure
    is applied.

    (1)     Note.  The metal workpieces may or may not be further heated, after
    pressure is applied, by means of resistive heating arising from current
    flowing through the workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95+,    for this subject matter in which the pressure is developed
    percussively.


CLS 219/98
TXT Subject matter under subclass 97 in which the metal workpiece is a stud
    which is bonded to a base.


CLS 219/99
TXT Methods under subclass 98.


CLS 219/100
TXT Methods under subclass 97.


CLS 219/101
TXT Subject matter under subclass 78.01 in which the bond is a butt joint
    between the end of a member and another member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95+,    for this subject matter using percussively developed pressure.

    97+,    for this subject matter in which the heat is developed by an
    electric arc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    304.1+ for processes of butt joining nonmetallic elements.


CLS 219/102
TXT Subject matter under subclass 101 in which the bond is an extended seam.

    (1)     Note.  Two narrow sheets of metal, for example, may be edge bonded
    to form a wide sheet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81+,    for similar subject matter utilizing roller electrodes.


CLS 219/103
TXT Subject matter under subclass 101 in which one workpiece only is fed to
    develop the bonding pressure.


CLS 219/104
TXT Methods under subclass 101.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 615+ for
    composite metallic stock comprising welded joints characterized by the
    composition of the parts joined and/or the filler metal.


CLS 219/105
TXT Subject matter under subclass 104 relating to the preparation of the edges
    to be bonded.

    (1)     Note.  The edges, for example, may be preshaped.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73,     for arc welding with flux.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, appropriate subclasses for metallurgical
    bonding by nonelectrical heating; particularly subclasses 141.1+ when
    combined with work shaping; and subclasses 203+ when combined with other
    pretreating of the work.


CLS 219/106
TXT Subject matter under subclass 104 in which a bridging member is utilized in
    bonding the butt joint.


CLS 219/107
TXT Subject matter under subclass 104 relating to the bonding of an edge or end
    to a surface.


CLS 219/108
TXT Subject matter under subclass 78.01 relating to the system for supplying
    the electric current which produces the heating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130.1+, for similar subject matter used in arc welding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, for miscellaneous
    voltage or current control systems.


CLS 219/109
TXT Subject matter under subclass 108 having indicating means.

    (1)     Note.  The indicator may be, for example, a signal, alarm or
    recorder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for
    electric testing.  Note subclasses 76.11+ for electric meters.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, appropriate subclasses for
    miscellaneous electric signals.


CLS 219/110
TXT Subject matter under subclass 108 which is controlled in response to
    current in, voltage at or temperature of the workpiece.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    234-298 for automatically controlled voltage or current regulation systems.


CLS 219/111
TXT Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein the current is repeated or
    interrupted automatically.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to systems where the
    current is interrupted so as to give alternate periods of heating and
    cooling at the same weld, and to systems where the current is interrupted
    so that it may be distributed to different weld areas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81+,    for roller electrode bonding, some of which utilize interrupted
    current supply systems.


CLS 219/112
TXT Subject matter under subclass 108 in which the heating current is derived
    from a stored energy source.

    (1)     Note.  The stored energy source, for example, may be an inductor
    with a large flux in its core or it may be a storage battery.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 289+ for
    miscellaneous space discharge tube systems having a surge generator, and
    consult the search notes thereto for related art.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass for charging or discharging a battery or capacitor
    energy storage system.


CLS 219/113
TXT Subject matter under subclass 112 having a condenser to store the energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclasses for charging or discharging a battery or capacitor
    energy storage system, especially subclasses 166+ for capacitor charging or
    discharging.


CLS 219/114
TXT Subject matter under subclass 108 having a space discharge control tube.

    (1)     Note.  The tube may be, for example, an ignitron or thyratron.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 246+ for
    miscellaneous gas tube systems having alternating current supply and
    consult the search notes thereto for related art.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 291 for
    miscellaneous space discharge tube type voltage or current control systems.


CLS 219/115
TXT Subject matter under subclass 108 having means to energize or deenergize
    the system in timed relation to the voltage oscillation of an alternating
    current supply system.

    (1)     Note.  Switching may be accomplished, for example, only at the
    voltage or current zero, or in such a manner as not to cause saturation of
    a transformer.


CLS 219/116
TXT Subject matter under subclass 108 having a transformer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 355 for
    miscellaneous transformer systems.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses, for transformers, per se.


CLS 219/117.1
TXT Methods:

    Subject matter under subclass 78.01 comprising processes of electric
    heating of metal for bonding with pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78.12,  for resistance welding methods of making honeycombs.


CLS 219/118
TXT Subject matter under subclass 117.1 involving a particular metal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to the welding of
    dissimilar metals, and to the welding of aluminum, titanium and molybdenum.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 650 for a
    metallic composite in which a component has an aluminum base.


CLS 219/119
TXT Subject matter under subclass 78.01 relating to the electrodes utilized in
    pressure welding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for terminals.


CLS 219/120
TXT Subject matter under subclass 119 having cooling means for the electrode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 11+ for analogous
    subject matter in the electric lamp and space discharge device art.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclass 112 for cooled terminals.


CLS 219/121.11
TXT By Arc:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 where a working arc of charged particles
    is caused to impinge on a workpiece.


CLS 219/121.12
TXT Using electron beam:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.11 wherein the working arc is an electron
    beam in a vacuum.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 492.1 for irradiation of objects or
    material and subclass 492.2 for irradiation of semiconductive devices.


CLS 219/121.13
TXT Welding:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.12 for joining two workpieces.


CLS 219/121.14
TXT Methods:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.13 including methods of joining two
    workpieces.


CLS 219/121.15
TXT Deposition (e.g., sputtering):

    Subject matter under subclass 121.12 wherein an electron beam impinges on a
    workpiece to evaporate material therefrom.


CLS 219/121.16
TXT Melting:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.12 wherein the electron beam liquifies
    the workpiece.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclass 65 for nonferrous electron beam melting processes.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 10 and 11 for an
    electron beam furnace device.


CLS 219/121.17
TXT Methods:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.16 including methods of liquifying a
    workpiece.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclass 65 for nonferrous electron beam melting processes.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 10 and 11 for an
    electron beam furnace device.


CLS 219/121.18
TXT Cutting:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.12 wherein a workpiece is severed by an
    electron beam.


CLS 219/121.19
TXT Etching or trimming:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.18 wherein the cut is superficial or
    partially through the workpiece.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, subclasses 63 and 94 for the use
    of an election beam in etching.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, particularly subclass
    661 for combined processes for trimming a conductive pathway on a
    semiconductive substrate.


CLS 219/121.2
TXT Methods:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.19 including processes of cutting a
    workpiece.


CLS 219/121.21
TXT Chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.12 wherein an evacuated housing structure
    is provided for partially or completely enclosing the workpiece.


CLS 219/121.22
TXT Sealing:

    Subject matter subclass 121.21 wherein vacuum or subatmospheric pressure
    securing means is provided on the chamber.


CLS 219/121.23
TXT Monitoring:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.21 wherein means are provided for visual
    or electronic communication with the interior of the chamber.

    (1)     Note.  Communication includes such things as microscope and T.V.
    view.


CLS 219/121.24
TXT Nonvacuum environment:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.12 wherein the working electron beam is
    in the ambient atmosphere.


CLS 219/121.25
TXT Shaping:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.12 wherein the working are of the charged
    particle beam is geometrically configured by using a plate, mask
    electromagnetic lens electrostatic and electromagnetic deflectors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 396 for focusing and magnetic lenses.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclass 14 for deflection
    control.


CLS 219/121.26
TXT With focusing:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.25 wherein the location of the charged
    particle beam is directed to a particular location by focusing (e.g.,
    dynamic of static coil means).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 396 for beam focusing.


CLS 219/121.27
TXT With electrode or gun structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.25 wherein a particular electrode
    configuration is provided or a particular electron beam generator housing
    structure is set forth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclass 13 for electron beam
    gun assembly.


CLS 219/121.28
TXT Position control:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.12 wherein the charged particle beam is
    located by deflecting the beam or moving the workpiece.


CLS 219/121.29
TXT Swept or scanned:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.28 wherein the beam of charged particles
    is continuously deflected in opposite directions by electrostatic or
    electromagnetic means.


CLS 219/121.3
TXT Condition responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.28 wherein the charge particle beam is
    located in response to a position detector (e.g., a detector circuit
    encoder and computer or a secondary emission detector).


CLS 219/121.31
TXT Workpiece position control:

    Subject under subclass 121.12 wherein the workpiece or a support therefore
    is located by moving the workpiece or the support (e.g., by servo control
    driving circuit for an XY table).


CLS 219/121.32
TXT Condition responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.31 wherein the workpiece or the support
    is moved in response to secondary emission detection of a faulty location.


CLS 219/121.33
TXT With fluid supply (e.g., shielding gas or coolant):

    Subject matter under subclass 121.12 wherein the particle beam generator
    structure is provided with means for receiving and utilizing a fluid as a
    working fluid in machining or as a cooling or shield fluid.

    (1)     Note.  Machining includes welding, cutting, etching, etc.


CLS 219/121.34
TXT Power supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.12 including a source of electrical
    energy.


CLS 219/121.35
TXT Method:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.12 including methods of heating a
    workpiece.


CLS 219/121.36
TXT Using plasma:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.11 wherein the working arc is an ionized
    gas plasma.

    (1)     Note.  A plasma torch exclusive of furnace structure can be
    employed to heat the workpiece under this gas plasma.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, subclasses 67+ for the use of
    plasma in an etching process.


CLS 219/121.37
TXT Melting:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.36 wherein the ionized gas plasma
    liquifies the workpiece.


CLS 219/121.38
TXT Methods:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.37 including a process of liquifying a
    workpiece by a plasma.


CLS 219/121.39
TXT Cutting:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.36 wherein a plasma torch is used to
    server a workpiece.


CLS 219/121.4
TXT Etching:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.39 wherein eroding or abrading is
    accomplished with a plasma torch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    345 for differential etching apparatus.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 192.32+ for a
    sputter etching process and subclasses 298.31+ for the corresponding
    apparatus.

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, subclasses 67+ for chemically
    etching a substrate with a plasma.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 231.31+ fluid
    supply with plasma devices.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 111.21+
    for plasma generating systems.


CLS 219/121.41
TXT Methods:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.4 relating to the process of eroding and
    abrading a workpiece with a plasma torch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    345 for differential etching apparatus.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 192.32+ for a
    sputter etching process.

    216,    Etching a Substrate: Processes, subclasses 67+ for chemically
    etching a substrate with a plasma.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 231.31+ fluid
    supply with plasma devices.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 111.21+
    for plasma generating systems.


CLS 219/121.42
TXT Rate control:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.4 wherein the speed of removal of
    material from a workpiece by a plasma torch is regulated (e.g., by
    controlling gas flow or power to the torch).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 231.31+ fluid
    supply with plasma devices.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 111.21+
    for plasma generating systems.


CLS 219/121.43
TXT With chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.4 wherein eroding or abrading of the
    workpiece is accomplished in an enclosure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 231.31+ fluid
    supply with plasma devices.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 111.21+
    for plasma generating systems.


CLS 219/121.44
TXT Methods:

    Subject matter under subclass 131.39 relating to the process of eroding or
    abrading of a workpiece by a plasma torch.


CLS 219/121.45
TXT Welding:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.36 wherein workpiece are fused together
    by the plasma gas from a torch.


CLS 219/121.46
TXT Method:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.45 relating to processes of fusing
    workpieces by a plasma gas from a torch.


CLS 219/121.47
TXT Spray coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.36 wherein material is deposited on a
    workpiece with a plasma.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76.16,  for deposition welding (e.g., coating or building up with a plasma).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 446+ for spraying involving flame or
    plasma coating agent.


CLS 219/121.48
TXT Plasma torch structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.36 having a housing including at least
    one electrode, a nozzle for fluid flow passage and a power supply.

    (1)     Note.  The fluid flow passage may carry the working fluid,
    shielding fluid or cooling fluid.


CLS 219/121.49
TXT Cooling system:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.48 wherein a fluid is supplied to the
    torch for cooling the nozzle.


CLS 219/121.5
TXT Nozzle system:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.48 relating to the structural
    configuration of the distal end of the torch structure which influence the
    exit gas flow rate.


CLS 219/121.51
TXT Gas supply system:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.48 including structure for delivering
    working and shielding gases.


CLS 219/121.52
TXT Electrode structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.48 relating to the cathode configuration.


CLS 219/121.53
TXT Consumable electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.48 wherein a feed wire electrode is
    consumed during heating.


CLS 219/121.54
TXT Control systems:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.36 including a system to regulate the
    associated components of a plasma system.


CLS 219/121.55
TXT Gas supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.54 relating to various gas supplies to
    the plasma torch and specific control of the same.


CLS 219/121.56
TXT Arc positioning:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.54 relating to controlling the location
    of the arc of the plasma torch (e.g., by magnetic deflection, XYZ control,
    etc.).


CLS 219/121.57
TXT Arc ignition:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.54 including means for starting an arc.

    (1)     Note.  Between a starter nonconsumable electrode and the workpiece.

    (2)     Note.  Between a consumable electrode and the workpiece.

    (3)     Note.  Between the nonconsumable electrode of the torch and the
    torch structure.

    (4)     Note.  Arc ignition includes interalia straight and reverse
    polarity and the control of power to the electrode.


CLS 219/121.58
TXT With work holder:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.36 including the support of the
    workpiece, (e.g., by roller support, XY table, clamp, etc.).


CLS 219/121.59
TXT Methods:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.36 relating to processes of heating by an
    ionized gas plasma in a furnace or by a plasma torch.


CLS 219/121.6
TXT Using laser:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.11 using coherent source of amplified
    light.

    (1)     Note.  Produced by the relaxation of stimulated molecules or atoms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, subclass 65 for the use of a laser
    in etching.

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, appropriate subclasses for a particular
    coherent light generator or cavity structure.


CLS 219/121.61
TXT Beam energy control:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.60 which regulates the output of the beam
    (e.g., controlling the excitation source, switching, etc.).


CLS 219/121.62
TXT Condition responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.61 which controls the beam energy in
    response to a detected condition (e.g., reflected radiation).


CLS 219/121.63
TXT Welding:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.60 wherein a coherent light beam is used
    to cause two workpieces to unite by heating.


CLS 219/121.64
TXT Methods:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.63 including processes of uniting
    workpieces.


CLS 219/121.65
TXT Melting:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.60 wherein the coherent light beam
    liquifies the workpiece.


CLS 219/121.66
TXT Methods:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.65 including processes of melting a
    workpiece using a coherent light beam.


CLS 219/121.67
TXT Cutting:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.60 wherein the workpiece is severed by a
    coherent light beam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses
    303.1, 84, and 88 for lasers used in surgery for cutting, coagulation, etc.


CLS 219/121.68
TXT Etching or trimming:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.67 wherein the cut is superficial or
    partially through the workpiece.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, particularly subclass
    662 for combined processes for trimming a conductive pathway on a
    semiconductive substrate.


CLS 219/121.69
TXT Methods:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.68 including processes of etching or
    trimming the workpiece.


CLS 219/121.7
TXT Hole punching:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.67 including perforating a workpiece.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 281 for cigarette making including perforating.


CLS 219/121.71
TXT Methods:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.70 including the processes of perforating
    a workpiece.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 281 for cigarette making including perforating.


CLS 219/121.72
TXT Methods:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.67 including the process of severing a
    workpiece.


CLS 219/121.73
TXT Shaping:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.60 including focusing of a coherent light
    beam.


CLS 219/121.74
TXT With mirror:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.73 wherein mirrors are used to focus the
    coherent light beam.


CLS 219/121.75
TXT With lens:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.73 wherein lenses are used to focus the
    coherent light beam.


CLS 219/121.76
TXT Multiple beams:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.60 having plural coherent light beams.


CLS 219/121.77
TXT With single source:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.76 having plural beams using a beam
    splitter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    618+ for beam deflection or splitting.


CLS 219/121.78
TXT Beam position control:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.60 wherein the coherent light beam is
    positioned on a workpiece by relative movement of the beam (e.g., X-Y table
    movement reflector movement, rotary discs).


CLS 219/121.79
TXT Path adjustment:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.78 relating to changing the location of
    the light beam by changing the path.

    (1)     Note.  The beam path can be changed by telescopic movement, fiber
    optics movement, robotic movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    901,    Robots, subclass 42 for welding devices.


CLS 219/121.8
TXT Swept or scanned:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.78 including oscillating or reciprocating
    the coherent light beam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    212 and 223+  for light deflection using a reflective element.


CLS 219/121.81
TXT Condition responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.78 wherein the coherent light beam is
    positioned in response to a detected condition.

    (1)     Note.  For example, a feed back signal from reflected light is used
    to control an XY movement.  Position sensors are used for computer control
    of digital deflector and XY movement.


CLS 219/121.82
TXT Workpiece position control:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.60 including control of the movement of a
    workpiece in an XY or XYZ position.


CLS 219/121.83
TXT With monitoring:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.60 including observation of the position
    of the coherent light beam on the workpiece (e.g., by microscope, C.R.T.,
    etc.).


CLS 219/121.84
TXT With fluid supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.60 including fluid supply means for
    cooling or cleaning the laser apparatus or workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  A working fluid is one which gives an exothermic reaction
    with the operation of the applied beam.  A cooling fluid is used to cool
    some part (mirror, etc.) of the light beam apparatus and a cleaning fluid
    is used to clean a particular element of the apparatus such as the lens.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, subclass 35 for liquid coolant.


CLS 219/121.85
TXT Method:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.60 including processes applying a
    coherent light beam to a workpiece (e.g., welding, cutting, perforating,
    etching, etc.).


CLS 219/121.86
TXT Chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.60 wherein the workpiece is in a
    hermetically sealed enclosure.


CLS 219/122
TXT Subject matter under subclass 121 in which the path of the arc through
    space is controlled.

    (1)     Note.  The arc, for example, between stationary electrodes may be
    deflected, so as to impinge against the work, by means of a gas blast.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69+,    for this subject matter utilized for metal cutting or
    disintegrating.

    73,     for the feeding of slag to an electric metal heating arc.

    74+,    for this subject matter.


CLS 219/123
TXT Subject matter under subclass 122 in which the means for controlling the
    course of the arc is a magnetic means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 153+ for this
    subject matter, not utilized for metal heating, and consult the search
    notes thereto for related art.


CLS 219/124.01
TXT With ignition by retraction:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the arc heating means is
    initiated by a drawn arc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130.4,  for arc ignition and stabilization arrangements with arc-power
    supplies.


CLS 219/124.02
TXT With gap control:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the arc torch is regulated by
    sensor means responsive to an arc current or voltage characteristic
    occurring in the gap between the arc torch and the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for gap spacing control in cutting or disintegrating electric
    heating.

    130.01, for circuits for monitoring arc parameters.

    130.21+, for automatic output control of arc-power supplies.


CLS 219/124.03
TXT By arc voltage:

    Subject matter under subclass 124.02 having sensor means responsive to the
    voltage occurring in the gap between the arc torch and the work.


CLS 219/124.1
TXT With automatic positioning of arc:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein sensor means in response to a
    sensed condition controls automatic control means to position the arc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    901,    Robots, subcollection 10 for a robot arm in which an sensor
    physically contacts and follows the work contour to control the arm
    movement and subcollection 42 for an art collection of welding robots.


CLS 219/124.21
TXT Including work cutting:

    Subject matter under subclass 124.1 including means to sever work during or
    after the welding process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78.15,  for resistance welding with work cutting means.


CLS 219/124.22
TXT In response to work shape:

    Subject matter under subclass 124.1 wherein the sensor responds to the form
    of the work to be welded.


CLS 219/124.31
TXT Having carriage supported by work:
    Subject matter under subclass 124.22 wherein the arc torch support is
    provided by the work during the welding operation.


CLS 219/124.32
TXT Having variable welding head travel rate (e.g., gravity feed):

    Subject matter under subclass 124.22 wherein the arc torch moves at
    different speeds over the weld area of the work.


CLS 219/124.33
TXT Having electrode angle control:
    Subject matter under subclass 124.22 including means for regulating the
    orientation between the arc torch and the work.


CLS 219/124.34
TXT By using probe means:

    Subject matter under subclass 124.22 including mechanical, optical, or
    magnetic work shape sensor means.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes feedback circuit for control.


CLS 219/124.4
TXT In response to work position:

    Subject matter under subclass 124.1 wherein sensed changes in the work
    orientation regulate movement of the arc torch.


CLS 219/124.5
TXT In response to the transfer rate of the weld metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 124.1 wherein sensor means respond to the
    weld metal deposit rate to control the arc torch position.


CLS 219/125.1
TXT With predetermined welding operation:
    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the welding process is performed
    in accordance with a preset schedule of operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86.7,   for predetermining welding operation of adjustable electrode
    support, spot bonding means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    901,    Robots, subcollection 10 for a robot arm in which a sensor
    physically contacts and follows the work contour to control the arm
    movement and subcollection 42 for an art collection of welding robots.


CLS 219/125.11
TXT For closed path welding (e.g., circumferential welding):

    Subject matter under subclass 125.1 wherein during a continuous welding
    operation, the welder returns at least once to a point in the previously
    welded path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60.2,   for annular arc butt welding of heat exchange tubes to a perforated
    plate.


CLS 219/125.12
TXT For oscillating electrode welding:
    Subject matter under subclass 125.1 wherein the arc torch welds across the
    width of the work seam with a reciprocal motion.


CLS 219/126
TXT Subject matter under subclass 125.1 in which the work is vertical.

    (1)     Note.  The bonding operation may take place, for example, at a
    horizontal or a vertical seam of a vertical wall of a metal tank.


CLS 219/127
TXT Subject matter under subclass 121 in which the arc is not moved
    continuously with respect to the work but touches it only at isolated
    points and in which the heat of the arc is used for bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This is sometimes known as arc riveting or plug welding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87,     for similar subject matter in resistance welding.


CLS 219/128
TXT Subject matter under subclass 121 in which the metal heated by the arc is
    worked after being deposited.

    (1)     Note.  A deposited weld bead, for example, may be peened while it
    is cooling.


CLS 219/129
TXT Subject matter under subclass 121 relating to brazing or soldering.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for spark producing.

    85.1,   for similar subject matter utilizing pressure.

    121,    for initiating plasma arc.

    136,    for similar subject matter utilized for welding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, for spark producing
    circuits.


CLS 219/130.01
TXT Including circuits for monitoring arc parameters:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 including circuit means for sensing and
    indicating arc conditions.

    (1)     Note.  The monitoring does not include a control function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109,    for resistance welding indicating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for
    circuits for measuring and testing electricity.


CLS 219/130.1
TXT Including arc-power supplies:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 including circuit means for providing
    electrical energy for arc welding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69+,    for electric arc machining.

    108+,   for resistance welding power supplies.


CLS 219/130.21
TXT With automatic output control (e.g., short circuit, infrared):

    Subject matter under subclass 130.1 including circuit means for regulating
    the output in response to a sensed condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    resistance welding with control in response to current, voltage, or
    temperature.

    124.02, for gap control in arc welding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for automatic output control.


CLS 219/130.31
TXT Responsive to arc voltage only:
    Subject matter under subclass 130.21 wherein the sensed condition pertains
    to the arc voltage

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124.03, for gap control by arc voltage in arc welding.


CLS 219/130.32
TXT Responsive to arc current only:
    Subject matter under subclass 130.21 wherein the sensed condition pertains
    to the arc current.


CLS 219/130.33
TXT Responsive to both arc voltage and arc current:

    Subject matter under subclass 130.21 wherein the sensed condition pertains
    to arc voltage and arc current.


CLS 219/130.4
TXT With arc ignition and stabilization arrangements:

    Subject matter under subclass 130.1 including circuit means to initiate and
    maintain an electric welding arc.


CLS 219/130.5
TXT With predetermined time variation of arc voltage or current (e.g.,
    programmed):

    Subject matter under subclass 130.1 including circuit means to constrain
    the arc voltage or current to follow a preestablished temporal pattern.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125.1,  for predetermined arc welding operation.


CLS 219/130.51
TXT Pulsating or periodic output:

    Subject matter under subclass 130.5 wherein the preestablished temporal
    pattern exhibits a nonsinusoidal repeating waveform.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter will include square waves or rectified
    sinusoids.


CLS 219/132
TXT Subject matter under subclass 130.1 having remote control.

    (1)     Note.  A weld rod holder, for example, may be provided with means
    to remotely start a motor-generator set which supplies the current for the
    arc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 201 for
    miscellaneous motor-generator systems.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825+ for miscellaneous
    remote control systems.


CLS 219/133
TXT Subject matter under subclass 130.1 having a generator for generating the
    current used in the electric arc.

    (1)     Note.  The generator, for example, may be driven by a prime mover.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants, appropriate subclasses for engine driven
    generator systems.


CLS 219/134
TXT Subject matter under subclass 133 in which the generator is driven by an
    electric motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 10+
    for miscellaneous motor-generator systems.


CLS 219/136
TXT Subject matter under subclass 121 relating to welding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129,    for similar subject matter utilized for soldering.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 615+ for
    composite metallic stock comprising welded joints characterized by the
    composition of the parts joined and/or the filler metal.


CLS 219/137
TXT Processes under subclass 136.


CLS 219/137.2
TXT With consumable electrode device:
    Subject matter under subclass 121 including means having current carrying,
    fusible weld material as a welding electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72+,    for consumable electrode welding with nonatmospheric environment at
    hot spot.

    75,     for nonconsumable electrode devices.

    124.32, for gravity feed consumable electrode arc welding.


CLS 219/137.31
TXT Gun:

    Subject matter under subclass 137.2 including means for projecting the weld
    material or necessary weld environmental elements to the weld site.


CLS 219/137.41
TXT Having fume extractor:

    Subject matter under subclass 137.31 including means for the removal of
    gaseous material from the arc weld site.


CLS 219/137.42
TXT Having gas flow limiting shape (e.g., gas diffuser):

    Subject matter under subclass 137.31 wherein the nozzle is of a form which
    restricts the travel of gas toward the weld site.


CLS 219/137.43
TXT Having spatter shield:

    Subject matter under subclass 137.31 including means to protect nozzle
    elements from weld splash back.


CLS 219/137.44
TXT Having integral electrode guide:
    Subject matter under subclass 137.31 including means to direct an electrode
    through the welding gun.


CLS 219/137.51
TXT With flexibility:

    Subject matter under subclass 137.44 wherein the guide is capable of being
    bent.


CLS 219/137.52
TXT With wear resistant liner:

    Subject matter under subclass 137.44 including durable insert means for
    protection against deterioration of the guide means.


CLS 219/137.61
TXT Having filler electrical contact structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 137.31 including structural means to ensure
    electrical connection between a traveling filler and an electrically
    conductive component of the nozzle.


CLS 219/137.62
TXT Having cooling means:

    Subject matter under subclass 137.31 including means to maintain or lower
    the temperature of the welding gun.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61.7,   for cylinder resistance welding with cooling means.

    76.11,  for deposition welding with cooling means.


CLS 219/137.63
TXT Having supply connection means (e.g., quick disconnect):

    Subject matter under subclass 137.31 including means to attach the nozzle
    to source of weld current or materials.


CLS 219/137.7
TXT Rate control:

    Subject matter under subclass 137.2 including means to regulate the feed
    speed of the filler material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130.21+, for automatic output control for arc-power supplies.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclasses 40+ for oscillating or rotating, nonconsumable electrodes with
    interconnected feed mechanisms.


CLS 219/137.71
TXT Circuits:

    Subject matter under subclass 137.7 including electrical circuits for
    controlling the rate of feeding consumable filler to the welding arc.


CLS 219/137.8
TXT Including filler wire deforming:
    Subject matter under subclass 137.2 including means to bend filler wire
    prior to passage to the welding torch.


CLS 219/137.9
TXT Supply cables (e.g., for current, shielding gas, coolant):

    Subject matter under subclass 137.2 including conduit means for providing
    weld current or materials.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 15.7 for welding
    cables.


CLS 219/138
TXT Subject matter under subclass 121 relating to arc electrode holders.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for the subject
    matter when not disclosed as useful in electric arc heating of metal.  Note
    especially subclasses 241+.


CLS 219/139
TXT Subject matter under subclass 138 having means for holding plural
    electrodes in adjustable relation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 147 for similar
    subject matter not used for metal heating.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 134 for analogous structure in arc lamps.


CLS 219/140
TXT Subject matter under subclass 138 in which the electrode is held in a
    spring jaw.

    (1)     Note.  The electrode rod, for example, may be used to spring
    resilient jaws sufficiently far apart so that it may be inserted between
    them.


CLS 219/141
TXT Subject matter under subclass 140 having means, separate from the spring
    jaws, for actuating the spring jaws.


CLS 219/142
TXT Subject matter under subclass 138 having a jaw which moves longitudinally
    of the axis of the electrode holder.


CLS 219/143
TXT Subject matter under subclass 142 in which the longitudinally moving jaw is
    spring biased.


CLS 219/144
TXT Subject matter under subclass 138 in which means are provided for
    positively gripping the electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142,    for this subject matter where the electrode jaw moves
    longitudinally of the axis of the electrode holder.


CLS 219/145.1
TXT Weld rod structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 including physical organization of the
    electrode or filler used in arc welding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Process, subclasses 58+ for processes of forming weld rods
    by coating.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 379+ for a rod
    which is merely coated and may be utilized as an arc welding electrode and
    is not classified elsewhere.


CLS 219/145.21
TXT Nonconsumable:

    Subject matter under subclass 145.1 wherein the weld rod electrode is of a
    nonfiller material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146.21, for subject matter related to composition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 231.03+ for similar
    electrodes not for welding.


CLS 219/145.22
TXT Flux cored:

    Subject matter under subclass 145.1 wherein a granular arc shielding
    material is encased by a sheath of filler metal.

    (1)     Note.  Weld rods defined merely as cored rods are not classified
    herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146.3+,  for composition of flux.


CLS 219/145.23
TXT Flux coated:

    Subject matter under subclass 145.1 wherein a granular arc shielding
    material covers the outer surface of filler metal.

    (1)     Note.  A weld rod defined merely as a flux-coated rod is not
    classified herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146.3+, for composition of flux.


CLS 219/145.31
TXT Partially:

    Subject matter under subclass 145.23 wherein only part of filler metal
    outer surface is covered.


CLS 219/145.32
TXT With wire wrap:

    Subject matter under subclass 145.23 including a metal strand wound around
    the filler metal.


CLS 219/145.41
TXT Nonmetal cover:

    Subject matter under subclass 145.1 including a sheath of a material other
    than metal.


CLS 219/146.1
TXT Weld rod composition:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 relating to the chemical makeup of the
    arc electrode or filler.

    (1)     Note.  Weld rods defined merely as alloy rods are not classified
    herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    420,    Alloy or Metallic Compositions, subclasses 122.1+ for arc electrode
    or filler alloys, per se.


CLS 219/146.21
TXT Nonconsumable:

    Subject matter under subclass 146.1 wherein the material of the arc
    electrode is of a nonfiller material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145.1,  for structure of nonconsumable electrodes.


CLS 219/146.22
TXT Nonferrous:

    Subject matter under subclass 146.1 relating to weld rods containing metal
    other than iron as primary constituent.


CLS 219/146.23
TXT Containing nickel, chromium, and iron:

    Subject matter under subclass 146.1 wherein the electrode contains at least
    some quantity of each of nickel, chromium, and iron.


CLS 219/146.24
TXT Metal deoxidizer or denitrogenizer:
    Subject matter under subclass 146.1 including a scavenger of oxygen or
    nitrogen of a metallic material within the filler.


CLS 219/146.30
TXT Particulate:

    Subject matter under subclass 146.24 wherein a scavenger material is
    included within a granular material.


CLS 219/146.31
TXT Particulate:

    Subject matter under subclass 146.1 including a granular material.


CLS 219/146.32
TXT Alloying:

    Subject matter under subclass 146.31 wherein at least a part of the
    granular material is to be added to the weld deposit.


CLS 219/146.41
TXT Nickel or chromium:

    Subject matter under subclass 146.32 wherein the material to be added to
    the weld deposit includes nickel or chromium.


CLS 219/146.51
TXT Containing carbide:

    Subject matter under subclass 146.31 wherein at least part of the granular
    material is a carbide.


CLS 219/146.52
TXT Shielding:

    Subject matter under subclass 146.31 including materials which decompose to
    provide protection to the weld site from atmospheric contamination.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73.2,   for this subject matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 23+ for fluxing compositions, per se.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 500+ for arc shielding compositions.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, subclass 28 for glass batch forming
    compositions containing slag.


CLS 219/147
TXT Subject matter under subclass 121 having means for protecting the eyes of
    the operator from the effects of the arc.

    (1)     Note.  The eye shield may, for example, have a shutter which is
    caused to automatically shut when arc current is drawn.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 432 for goggles having an antiglare lens.

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclasses
    44+ for eyeglasses with light reducing means.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    885+ for visual filters.


CLS 219/148
TXT Subject matter under subclass 50 related to the bonding of metal by the
    heat developed by an electric current.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to miscellaneous bonding
    accessories, not above provided for, such as grounding clamps.


CLS 219/149
TXT Subject matter under subclass 50 combined with forging or shaping of the
    workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51+,    for this subject matter where the workpiece is chain.

    56+,    for this subject matter where the workpiece is wire, rod or bar.

    59.1+,  for this subject matter where the workpiece is a tube.

    68+,    for this subject matter where the shaping is cutting.

    78.01+, for this subject matter where the workpiece is bonded to another by
    application of pressure while heated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses for plastic metal shaping
    not involving significant electric heating.


CLS 219/150
TXT Subject matter under subclass 149 in which the forging or shaping is
    upsetting.


CLS 219/151
TXT Subject matter under subclass 150 in which one of the electrodes utilized
    to apply electric current to the workpiece also acts as an anvil for
    upsetting the work.


CLS 219/152
TXT Subject matter under subclass 150 in which the upsetting takes place
    simultaneously with the heating.

    (1)     Note.  Either heating or upsetting may also, in addition to the
    defined mode, occur by itself.


CLS 219/153
TXT Subject matter under subclass 149 in which the forging or shaping is
    bending or twisting.


CLS 219/154
TXT Subject matter under subclass 149 in which the forging or shaping takes
    place after the electric heating.


CLS 219/155
TXT Subject matter under subclass 50 in which the metal heated is an endless
    strip.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, appropriate subclasses for
    winding, tensioning, or guiding elongated material in general which may
    include endless material.


CLS 219/156
TXT Subject matter under subclass 50 in which the metal heated is a rod or bar.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56+,    for similar subject matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.


CLS 219/157
TXT Subject matter under subclass 50 in which the metal heated is a rivet.


CLS 219/158
TXT Subject matter under subclass 50 relating to workpiece holders.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, for unheated devices.


CLS 219/159
TXT Subject matter under subclass 158 having a rotating support for the
    workpiece.


CLS 219/160
TXT Subject matter under subclass 158 having a mandrel.


CLS 219/161
TXT Subject matter under subclass 158 having clamping means.


CLS 219/162
TXT Methods under subclass 50.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for wire, rod or bar electric heating methods.

    83,     for electric pressure bonding methods utilizing roller electrodes.

    91.1+,  for miscellaneous spot pressure electric bonding methods.

    96,     for percussive electric bonding methods.

    99,     100, for flash electric bonding methods.

    104+,   for butt electric bonding methods.

    117.1+,for miscellaneous pressure electric bonding methods.

    137,    for arc welding methods.

    603+,   for induction heating.


CLS 219/200
TXT Subject matter under the class definition which includes significant
    structural details of miscellaneous devices of general utility whereby
    electrical energy is converted to thermal energy and in which thermal
    energy is utilized to raise the temperature of some material or object from
    a first value to a second higher value and not otherwise classifiable above
    in this class or other art class.  In order to be classifiable in this
    class the claimed subject matter should include only means for utilizing
    the thermal energy generated in general terms.

    (1)     Note.  The patents in this and the indented subclasses include only
    those devices in which the claimed subject matter includes specific details
    of electrical heating means whereby thermal energy is generated and
    transmitted to a space or an object (load) with no significant structural
    details of the load recited.

    (2)     Note.  The heating devices to be found herein include specifically
    recited electrical heating devices combined with material to be heated in
    which the claimed combination does not constitute a part of a system or
    apparatus properly classified in another art class and subcombinations or
    elements of such heating devices which do not of themselves comprise
    subject matter classifiable elsewhere.

    (3)     Note.  Patents in which the claimed subject matter is restricted to
    methods of heating and in which no apparatus claims appear will not
    ordinarily be classified in this or the indented subclasses, except in
    cases where an apparatus of the type, which if claimed, would be
    classifiable in this class, is shown and disclosed and there is no other
    appropriate class for the method alone.

    (4)     Note.  Patents claiming the combination of particular art device
    structure with electric heater structure are, in general, classified with
    the particular art device.

    (5)     Note.  Patents in which the claimed subject matter includes means
    to effect a change of physical state or of chemical composition of a
    material, and which may include electric heating means, will not be found
    in this class, but in the appropriate physical or chemical change class to
    which it appertains.  The only exceptions provided for in this class are
    electric water heaters which may in the process of  heating the water,
    generate steam or vapor and wherein no specific use of the steam or vapor
    aside from assisting in the heating function is claimed and electrically
    heated vessels and crucibles which may be utilized for melting material at
    low melting temperatures.

    (6)     Note.  Patents in which the claimed subject matter includes both
    heating and cooling of a material in sequence will not ordinarily be found
    in this class.  Class 165 is the generic class relating to the transfer of
    heat from one material to another and includes all means for modifying
    temperature not found in other classes.  Subclass 58 of Class 165, e.g.,
    provides for selectively or simultaneously heating and cooling external
    material.  For other classes and subclasses utilizing heat exchange, see
    "SEARCH CLASS" under the class definition of Class 165.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50+,    for electrical metal heating apparatus or methods.

    600+,   for inductive heating.

    678+,   for microwave heating.

    764+,   for capacitive dielectric heating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    See "SEARCH CLASS" under Paragraph II in the class definition above and
    particularly:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 250.05+ for
    window cleaning attachments combined with heating means (including
    electrical heaters).

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclass 2.6 for those with heaters.

    53,     Package Making, subclass 373.7, and see the "Notes" thereto for
    heat seaming combined with a packaging operations.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 324+ for cooking
    apparatus, and see "Note 2" to the definition of subclass 324 for the line,
    subclass 358 having devices for cooking food by the heat resulting from
    passage of an electric current therethrough.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 204+ for body warmers having
    nonelectrical heating means.

    165,    Heat Exchange, see (6) Note above. 196, Mineral Oils:  Apparatus,
    subclass 121, for electrically heated mineral oil apparatus.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclass 19 for a
    thermolytic distillation process in which the distilland is heated by
    electrical energy.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, for chemical processes and
    apparatus for utilizing electrical energy for purposes other than mere
    heating.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 324 for methods and apparatus to irradiate
    objects by corona irradiations, subclasses 428+ for methods and apparatus
    to contain, support or transport fluent material with or without
    irradiating the material, subclasses 453.11+ for methods and apparatus to
    support an object with or without an irradiating source and subclasses
    492.1+ for methods and apparatus to irradiate objects or material.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 337 for indirectly
    heated cathodes for electric space discharge devices which consist of a
    heater and a separate cathode surface which is to be heated thereby.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, appropriate subclasses, for electrical
    resistors commonly called heaters but not characterized by some feature
    especially adapting the unit for use as a heater.  See also the reference
    to Class 338 under the class definition above, and also section "X" of the
    class definition of Class 338.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 182 for a thermocouple
    thermometer having reference junction temperature control.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 901 for nonelectrical heating bag.

    604,    Surgery, subclass 114 for electrical means for heating or cooling
    the body device, or the treating material introduced or removed from the
    body.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclass 96
    for devices for modifying the temperature of the body limited by claimed
    structure to therapeutic use.


CLS 219/201
TXT Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the heating device is combined
    with other devices or mechanical structure having an added purpose or
    utility independent of the heating device and in which the utility of the
    other art device is not destroyed by the removal of or deactivation of the
    heating device and which claimed combination does not include sufficient
    specific structure of the other art device as to be classified either with
    the other art device, per se, or elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    See the appropriate other art class in the Manual of Classification for
    specific other art devices which are combined with heating means.


CLS 219/202
TXT Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the diverse type art device
    comprises a vehicle or component thereof.  The component may be a device
    which aside from and taken separately from the combination with a vehicle
    may have attained a separate status in the art; for instance, carburetor,
    radiator, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 451 for heating devices for rolling
    stock.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 543+ for carburetors with
    heating, subclasses 41.01+ for cooling systems, subclasses 145+ for
    incandescent igniters, and subclass 142.5 for heating means.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, appropriate subclasses for a motor vehicle,
    generally, and for a motor vehicle having a component of a kind which is
    specifically provided for therein.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 5+ for automatic air heaters,
    subclasses 12.4+ for heat and power plants for cars and subclasses 28+ for
    vehicle heaters in general.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 134 for ice prevention devices for air craft.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 84.1+ for windshields.


CLS 219/203
TXT Subject matter under subclass 202 wherein the diverse type art device
    comprises a windshield or other transparent surface of a vehicle provided
    for the purpose of admission of light or air or viewing the area exterior
    to the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    522,    for wherein a housing or casing may perform plural functions (e.g.,
    heated transparent housing).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 121 for shields and other protective devices,
    and subclass 134 for ice prevention devices.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 84.1+ for windshields.


CLS 219/204
TXT Subject matter under subclass 202 wherein the other art device comprises
    the steering wheel or other steering device for a vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 552 for hand steering wheels.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 400+ for motor vehicle steering gear.


CLS 219/205
TXT Subject matter under subclass 202 wherein the diverse type art device
    comprises the motor or a component thereof of a vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 142.5 for internal combustion
    engines with external heating means and subclasses 145+ for engines with
    incandescent igniters.


CLS 219/206
TXT Subject matter under subclass 205 wherein the other art device comprises
    the manifold of an internal combustion engine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 142.5 for internal combustion
    engines with external heating means for heating some part or adjunct
    thereof.


CLS 219/207
TXT Subject matter under subclass 205 wherein the other art device comprises
    carburetor means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    271+,   for heating devices with vaporizing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 26 for carburetors providing
    additional air supply, and subclasses 434+ for charge forming devices for
    internal combustion engines.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 127+ for devices
    combined with external supply or removal of heat, particularly indented
    subclasses 139 and 142 for such devices with electric heaters.


CLS 219/208
TXT Subject matter under subclass 205 wherein the other art device comprises
    the radiator or other part of the cooling system of an automobile.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    296+,   for liquid heaters having forced circulation means, subclasses 379+
    for fluid heaters in general utilizing forced circulation, and subclasses
    375, 404, 434, 443, 466, 530, and 540 for heaters with heat storage or
    transfer means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 41.04+ for cooling system
    structure, and subclass 142.5 for the combination of an internal combustion
    engine with external means for heating the radiator.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 341 for means for heating or cooling fluid
    handling systems combined with electrical heating means for the system.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 41+ for heat exchange devices combined
    with vehicle feature.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 68.4+ for a motor vehicle having means
    for mounting a radiator for the vehicles motor.


CLS 219/209
TXT Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the other art device comprises a
    device which is electrically operated or whose operative function is to
    control the condition of an electrical circuit, such as a motor or switch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    511,    for thermally responsive circuit actuating means with auxiliary
    heating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 341+ for
    piezoelectric crystals combined with temperature control means, subclass 16
    for reciprocating dynamoelectric devices with temperature modification
    means and subclass 110 for clutches or brakes with means to dissipate
    induced energy in an external impedance.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 15+ for discharge
    devices with electric heater temperature modifying means.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 32+ for
    systems with load device temperature modifying means and electrical circuit
    device, particularly subclasses 46+ and 49+.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 81 for thermally
    varied resistance impedance circuit control means.

    329,    Demodulators, subclass 202 for detectors wherein the signals effect
    a thermal charge in an impedance.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 70 for oscillators with a temperature
    modifier and, subclass 78 for electrical noise or random wave generators of
    a gaseous type with heating coil means.

    332,    Modulators, appropriate subclasses for thermal modulators.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 55+ for inductor devices with
    temperature modification means.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclasses 75, 102+, 120, 141, and 377 for specific type electrothermal and
    thermal responsive actuating means.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 7 for temperature compensated
    resistive value of a resistor, and subclass 23 for an indirectly heated
    thermistor.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 387.1+ for audible signals
    with weatherproofing (e.g., means to melt sleet off signal device).

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 704 for antennas
    with ice clearer or prevention means.


CLS 219/210
TXT Subject matter under subclass 209 wherein the other art device comprises a
    piezo crystal or other vibratory device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 341+ for
    piezoelectric crystals with temperature control means, and subclass 16 for
    reciprocating or vibratory motors with temperature modification.


CLS 219/211
TXT Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the other art device comprises a
    garment or other article of wearing apparel, usually having means whereby
    the apparel may be attached to or supported by the human body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    527,    for heating unit adapted to be body supported.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, appropriate subclasses for particular structure of devices
    of wearing apparel for the body which may be combined with heating means.

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclass 2.6 for boots and shoes
    combined with electric heating means.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 204+ for body warmers consisting of
    a garment combined with nonelectric heating means.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclass 1.5
    for electrically heated garments combined with means for setting up an
    electric field for the treatment of the body, subclass 96 for light,
    thermal, or electrical applicators adapted to be worn on the body for
    therapeutic reasons, and subclass 143 for body member enclosing thermal
    applicator.


CLS 219/212
TXT Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the other art device comprises a
    blanket or other bed covering.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    529,    for flexible heating unit structure utilizing cloth or other fabric.

    549,    for heating element with support of flexible material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 421+ for a bed, bed clothing, or a bed accessory
    combined with heating means.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclass 1
    for beds with thermal or electrical energy applicators, and subclass 96 for
    thermal applicators in general.


CLS 219/213
TXT Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the other art device comprises an
    element of a building, road, pavement or other permanently fixed static
    structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 279 for electric rail heaters.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 302+ for brooder houses with heating
    means, and subclass 73 for stock watering troughs with temperature control.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 49 for radiant building panels.

    191,    Electricity: Transmission to Vehicles, subclass 27 for heated
    conductors of the third rail type.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclass 428 for heated switches.

    392,    Electric Resistance Heating Devices, subclasses 453+ for panel-type
    radiant heating devices adapted to form a part of or be attached to a
    building structure.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 131 for radiant panels
    used for thawing the earth.


CLS 219/214
TXT Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the other art device comprises a
    vending, dispensing or display device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    267,    for igniters of the cigar or cigarette lighter type which may be
    disclosed as combined with a particular housing such as a display or
    dispensing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 88 and 237
    for dryers combined with display, inspection or illuminating means.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 461 for cigar lighters
    combined with a changeable exhibitor.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    beverage or food preparation devices with dispensing or display means.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 82 for fluent material handling apparatus with material heating or
    cooling means.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for article dispensing
    devices which may be combined with igniting (subclasses 143+) or
    temperature, (subclass 150) control devices such as cigarette dispensers.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses, especially subclass 146 for
    dispensing devices combined with heating or cooling means.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, appropriate subclasses, especially
    subclass 114 for cabinets of the display case type which may be combined
    with heating means, and subclass 236 for cabinets in general with heating
    means.


CLS 219/215
TXT Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the other art device comprises
    mechanisms specifically designed for the manufacture and repair of foot
    coverings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, appropriate subclasses for shoe machinery
    combined with adhesive material heating or melting, thread warming or wax
    melting devices.


CLS 219/216
TXT Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the other art device comprises a
    printing or other type of reproduction device.

    (1)     Note.  Thermal print heads and similar devices which use a
    plurality of heaters to form a character to be printed are classified in
    Class 347, subclasses 171+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclasses 8, 9, 21, 25, 27, and 31 for embossing devices
    utilizing heated dies.

    346,    Recorders, subclass 76.1 for phenomenal recording using heat.

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, subclasses 171+ for
    thermal print head and similar devices which use a plurality of heaters to
    form symbolic information.

    355,    Photocopying, subclasses 100 and 106+ for devices for successively
    printing portions of a sensitized surface which may employ heating means.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 328+, 330+, and 335+ for devices for
    fixing or fusing a toner image surface which use heating means.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclass 203 for transferring image using heat; and subclass 336
    for heat developing.


CLS 219/217
TXT Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the other art device comprises a
    chair, seat, bed or other support means for the human body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    528+,   for flexible or resilient housing structure adapted for use with
    electrical heating devices under the class (219) definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 237+ for toilet
    seats and covers.

    5,      Beds, subclass 284 for beds with heating or cooling devices, and
    subclasses 421+ for heated mattresses.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 180.1+ for chairs or seats combined
    with heat exchange means.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclass 1
    for couches, beds, chairs and seats adapted for thermal application or
    therapeutic treatment.


CLS 219/218
TXT Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the other art device comprises an
    article of furniture consisting of (1) a smooth flat slab, board or the
    like supported on legs or (2) a cabinet type enclosure means for storage of
    articles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213,    for heaters associated with buildings, roads, pavements and the
    like.

    214,    for heaters associated with dispensing cabinets.

    443+,   for heating devices combined with a horizontal or planar heating
    surface which may be supported on a working counter, heating cabinet, stove
    top or other table like surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 275+ for electric refrigerator cabinets
    with electrically heated defrosters.

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, appropriate subclasses for
    specific table structure.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, appropriate subclasses especially
    subclass 236 for cabinet structures with heating, cooling or heat exchange
    means.


CLS 219/219
TXT Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the diverse type art device
    comprises a mirror.

    (1)     Note.  Mirror devices with electrical heating means are ordinarily
    classified here, provided that the mirror structure is claimed broadly or
    in name only.  For heated mirror structure combined with significant
    optical features the search will be in Class 359, Optics:  Systems
    (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses 507+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclasses 100+ for plasma heating, laser heating, or electron or ion beam
    heating of a material or a plasma to obtain a nuclear fusion reaction.


CLS 219/220
TXT Apparatus under subclass 201 wherein the other art device comprises
    illumination means, broadly with significant electrical heating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230,    for heated-tip hand tool with illumination means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 495.1 for plural radiant energy sources
    including heat generator.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 15 for electric lamp
    or discharge device with electric heating means.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 92+ for the combination of specific light
    means with other structure which may be a heating device.


CLS 219/221
TXT Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein an electrical means heats a tool
    or instrument which is not otherwise classified.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this and the indented subclasses are patents in
    which the claimed subject matter includes the combination of a tool or
    instrument with a stand or support when the tool or instrument is not a
    hand held or manipulative tool or instrument.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201+    for electric heaters combined with a diverse type art device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 140 for cutting tools with heater.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 226+ for tool heaters of the
    nonelectric type and subclasses 401+ for a self-heated tool utilizing
    liquid or gaseous fuel.


CLS 219/222
TXT Subject matter wherein the tools or instruments under the definition of
    subclass 221 are for hair heating, treating or curling purposes, are formed
    into systems which utilize a plurality of tools or instruments for heating,
    treating or curling the hair with or without voltage or current control of
    the system, or wherein the tools, instruments or the system have manual or
    automatic connection and/or disconnection devices.

    (1)     Note.  If in the claim the hair is included in the electrical
    circuit of the tool, instrument or the system, or the hair somehow is held
    or contained by the tool or instrument, the claim is properly classified in
    Class 132, Toilet.  See Class 132, subclass 7 for all hair treating methods
    involving the hair on the scalp and subclasses 31+ for crimpers or curlers
    having crimping jaws, winding forms or mandrels which include rotating
    means and hair clamping jaws.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass are instruments to produce a vapor
    which will contact the hair for hair treating purposes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156,    for means for electrically heating metal rods or bars.

    271+,   for vaporizer means where the vapor is not used specifically for
    heat transfer or for hair heating, treating or curling purposes.

    284+,   for electrolytic liquid heaters where the liquid to be heated forms
    part of the electric heating circuit.

    520+,   for housings, casing, and support means for heating units which
    include means to hold or support the material to be heated, flexible
    casings, housings specially formed or adapted to fit the material to be
    heated, and hinged or separable compartments.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 160 and 504
    for brushes with heating means.

    30,     Cutlery, for hand held cutlery implements for cutting hair,
    particularly subclasses 195+ for hair shears and thinners.  See the notes
    under subclass 223 of this class.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 283, for
    processes for drying human hair while on the head and subclasses 96+ for
    apparatus for drying the hair on the head which includes structure to adapt
    the apparatus to the head of a person.

    132,    Toilet, subclass 7 for methods of treating the hair on the scalp
    which includes cutting, softening or straightening and subclass 118 for
    heated combs or combs combined with additional features.

    604,    Surgery, subclass 23 for applying gas to the body; and subclass 291
    for heating or cooling material applied to or removed from the skin.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclass 79
    for brushes and combs for thermal applications.


CLS 219/223
TXT Subject matter under subclass 222 wherein the structure includes electrical
    heating means adapted to contact the hair or to be used with additional
    structure to transmit its heat to the hair for the purpose of hair singing.

    (1)     Note.  Since the singeing instruments could be used for cutting, a
    search should also be made in Class 30, Cutlery.  See subclasses 32+ for
    electrically heated hot wire type hand held razors for fixed or moving hot
    wire cutters and subclass 140 for cutters in general combined with heater.
    A claim to a hand held apparatus for cutting hair by an electrically heated
    wire would be classified in Class 30, Cutlery.

    (2)     Note.  Class 606, Surgery, subclasses 27+, for heat applying
    surgical instruments, subclasses 32+, for heated surgical instruments which
    include cauterizers for cutting, sterilizing and coagulation of a wound.
    These instruments are structurally similar to those instruments found in
    this subclass and those listed in the search class notes of this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  Class 132, Toilet, subclass 7 will take methods for cutting
    or singeing the hair on the scalp but this class will not take any
    instruments which are not specifically adapted for use on the head of a
    person.  See subclass 9 for hair singers specifically adapted for use on a
    person's head and subclass 118 for hair singers combined with combs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233+,   236+ or 260+, for similar hand held instruments which utilize a
    heated wire or other type of electrically heated tip to cauterize, mark,
    burn or ignite material, or to heat material for soldering purposes.  Note
    the cauterizers in this class are similar to those found in Class 128.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclasses 3+ for cloth singers.

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclasses 174 and 239 for singeing
    apparatus for warp and thread.

    30,     Cutlery, see the (1) Note to this subclass and (4) Note under the
    class definitions of Class 30.

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 229 for an electrically  heated hot wire mower
    of crops.

    83,     Cutting, particularly subclass 171 and other appropriate subclasses
    for electrically heated nonhand held machine type cutters of the hot wire
    type, which include those for making ice cubes and cutting plastics where
    there is no shaping or forming other than that caused by the cutting.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 47 for means for burning off of coating
    ingredient.

    128,    Surgery, see the (2) Note to this subclass.

    132,    Toilet, see the (3) Note to this subclass.

    452,    Butchering, subclass 73 for hot wire singers for hog or fowl.


CLS 219/224
TXT Subject matter under subclass 222 wherein there are hair heaters of the
    type which utilize an electrolyte which when placed in an appropriate
    electrical circuit will produce anions and cations, the movements of these
    anions and cations cause the heat which is used for hair heating and/or
    treating purposes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    271+,   for vaporizers with the specific use of the vapor other than heat
    transfer.

    284+,   for liquid heaters which have the liquid to be heated in the
    electrical heating circuit.

    360,    for convection type fluid heaters with ionizing or ozonizer means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, for electrolysis, in general, which is employed
    for a purpose other than merely for heating.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 500+ for
    electrolytic devices (capacitors, rectifiers, active elements, e.g.,) and
    systems therefor.


CLS 219/225
TXT Subject matter under the subclass 222 wherein the structure comprises
    clamping devices which encompass strands of hair usually wound on winding
    forms or mandrels.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are all patents to hand held
    scissors type electrically heated curling irons in which the claims or
    specification do not recite that the iron is used for curling human hair.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    524+,   for housing, casings, or supports comprising hinged or separable
    compartments with or without a plurality of heating unit means not
    restricted to any special use.

    536+,   for housings, casings, or supports with significant heating unit
    mounting or attaching means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 400 for heat accumulator structures
    whose material composition is such that it may be utilized for hair heating
    clamps.

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 32, 34 and 37 wherein the art includes structure
    whereby the hair on the scalp is clamped between electrically heated
    members to form the wave, the hair on the scalp is clamped by a hand held
    jaw and wound about on the clamped jaw to form the wave, or the hair is
    wound on a form or mandrel, clamped and held in place by an electrically
    heated member.


CLS 219/226
TXT Subject matter under subclass 222 wherein the structure includes
    electrically heated casings which encompass strands of hair usually wound
    on winding forms or mandrels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    460,    for heaters with means to adjust heating unit to shape of material
    heated.

    524+,   for significant housing or casings which comprise hinged or
    separable compartments with or without a plurality of heating units not
    restricted to any special use.

    534,    for rigid tubular housings or casings which include an electrical
    heating device.

    535,    for casings or housings specially formed or adapted to fit the
    material to be heated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 36+ for hair winding forms or mandrels with
    surrounding electrical heaters and heat protectors or tubes and wrappers.


CLS 219/227
TXT Subject matter under subclass 221 wherein the tool or instrument includes
    structure adapted to manually hold or manipulate the tool or instrument
    while in use.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are branding irons which have
    fixed characters or indicia but not those irons which can be used for other
    purposes.  See subclasses 229+ for these irons.  If the claim states the
    branding unit is in the form of letters or numerals, classification will be
    in Class 101, Printing, appropriate subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass are tools to partially delaminate
    the plastic liner or multiple ply glass sheets.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222+,   for hand held or manipulatable tools or instruments for heating,
    treating or curling the hair on the head of a person.

    245+,   for hand manipulatable tools or instruments involving the use of
    pressure such as laundry irons.

    346,    for transportable radiant type fluid heaters.

    386+,   for portable heater containers with material support.

    533,    for portable (with handle, e.g.,) heater structures in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous hand held
    compound tools which are not classified elsewhere.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, particularly subclass
    160 for brushes which may be electrically heated.

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 110+ for handles in general.

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclass 6 for electrically heated
    singeing elements which may be hand held.

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclasses 174 and 239 for electrically
    heated singers for preparing the warp or finishing thread which may be hand
    held.

    30,     Cutlery, particularly subclasses 32+ and 140 for hand held tools
    electrically heated which include heated blade type razors, cutting shears
    and hole forming devices where no molding takes place in the forming of the
    hole.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, particularly subclass 20 for hand held
    electrically heated wires or blades to remove hair from hides and tools for
    combing and glazing fur.

    81,     Tools, for hand held and bench type electrically heated wire
    strippers and appropriate subclasses for nonheated hand held tools not
    specifically provided for elsewhere.

    83,     Cutting, subclass 171 for a cutting tool which is heated.

    101,    Printing, subclasses 3.1+ for hand held electrically heated
    instruments that burn, emboss, or penetrate the material to produce
    characters or designs and subclass 371 for mail cancelling stamps.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 220+ for heaters for tools and
    subclasses 401+ for a self-heated tool.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 33 and 35 for electric
    heaters which may be hand manipulable for thawing or preventing the
    freezing of fluid pipes.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, for
    methods and apparatus for making laminar material, particularly subclass
    579 for hand manipulative devices having structure particularly adapted for
    bonding laminar material including plastic.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 46 for handles in
    general relating to electrical conduits, cables, and conductors.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 49+ for hand
    forks or shovels which may include electrically heated ice cream scoops or
    dippers.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 1+ for a
    hand-manipulated coating implement including means to heat the coating
    material (e.g., sealing wax appliers).

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclass 71 for hand
    manipulatable impellers which may be electrically heated.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 12 for a hand manipulable tool including a shaping surface
    disclosed for product repair; subclasses 276+ for a shaping means of the
    ice cream scoop type; and subclasses 318+ for a hand manipulable shaping
    couple.

    452,    Butchering, subclass 73 for fowl and hog singers which may be
    electrically heated and hand held or manipulated.

    606,    Surgery, subclasses 32+ for electrical applicators which include
    hand held electrically heated needles for cutting and coagulation which are
    structurally similar to the corresponding instruments found in this
    subclass.


CLS 219/228
TXT Subject matter under subclass 227 wherein electrical heating means is
    contained within or on an extended housing, casing or support designed to
    form a hand manipulative tool or instrument for distributing heat over a
    substantial surface area.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, by way of example, means for heating
    a substantial area of a painted surface combined with a scraper for
    scraping off the heated paint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    245+,   for hand held pressure application means such as laundry irons
    which heat a substantial surface area.

    447+,   for heaters in general with a planar heating surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 235.4+ for
    mason's trowels and floats and subclasses 236.01 for scrapers having a
    blade like edge used for cleaning and which trowels or scrapers may be
    electrically heated.

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 140 for hand held electrically heated scrapers,
    and subclasses 169+ for hand held scrapers, per se.  See (1) Note to this
    class relative to the combination of a surface heater and a paint scraper.

    81,     Tools, subclass 3.5 for hand held or work-bench supported,
    electrically heated truncated mandrels for expanding spectacles frames.


CLS 219/229
TXT Subject matter under subclass 227 wherein the hand held tools or
    instruments have electrically heated tips rather than heated expansive
    areas forming the working area of the tool or instrument.

    (1)     Note.  Class 113 will take soldering tips, per se, which are heated
    as a result of heat transfer from some heating means, including electrical,
    where the tip is not stated as being in an electrical circuit or a tip of
    the soldering gun type.

    (2)     Note.  Hand held electrically heated burning in tools for filling
    in dents or scratches in furniture in general are placed here.  However,
    Class 425, Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 12 provides for such tools which will fill or mold to a
    predetermined depth or dimension.

    (3)     Note.  The subcombination of a tip and its heater of a tip-type
    hand held or manipulated tool or instrument is classified in the subclass
    containing the complete tool or instrument.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 140 for hand held electrically heated cutting
    knives including honey uncapping knives and other sharpened-edge type tools
    or instruments, including tire treading and detreading and scrapers for
    defrosting windshields.


CLS 219/230
TXT Subject matter under subclass 229 wherein cooling, clamping or lighting
    means is combined with a hand held or manipulative tool or instrument.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are adjustable tips and solder and
    flux feeding means combined with a hand  held soldering iron which include
    the tip, solder, and/or flux in an electrical circuit with the work.

    (2)     Note.  The line between Class 113 and Class 219 for the combination
    of an electrically heated, hand held soldering iron with solder feeding is:
    Class 113 will take the combination of solder and/or flux feeding with a
    hand held soldering iron when the tip, solder and or flux fed is not part
    of an electric circuit completed through the work which latter combination
    is provided for in Class 219.  See (1) Note above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    129 and 158+, for the cooling of electrodes used in bonding under
    pressure, arc heating, electrodes which are adjustable, and workpiece
    holders used with the electrical heating of metal.

    220,    for a light combined with an electrically heated device which is
    not a hand tool or instrument.

    421,    for an electrically heated container which holds meltable material,
    i.e., melting pot.

    521,    for an electrical heating device combined with a housing, casing,
    or support which includes holding or support means for material to be
    heated.

    531,    for the combination of a housing, casing or support and cooling
    means with an electrical heating device.

    540,    for a significant heating unit with heat storage or transfer means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding subclasses 212+ for processes of soldering,
    brazing or welding employing clamps.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    498 and 538+ for cooling of the work and means to clamp laminae in
    assembled relationship.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for the cooling of heated
    tools or instruments.

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses for the generic class for
    structure to hold a workpiece.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 11+ and 146+ for
    temperature modifying devices and movable electrodes used with lamp or
    discharge devices respectively.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 134 for adjustable electrode supports.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 92 for a portable combination of a device
    with an illuminator.


CLS 219/231
TXT Subject matter under subclass 229 wherein the tool or instrument is so
    constructed that the adjustment, addition, removal or reassembly of one or
    more parts to or of the tool or instrument, causes the iron to be capable
    of performing some other function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249,    below, for hand manipulable tools or instruments with pressure
    application means which are convertible to other forms or devices capable
    of performing a different function.

    340,    for fluid heaters of the radiant type convertible to another heater
    or nonheating device.

    361,    for convection heaters convertible to another type of heater or
    nonheating device.

    416,    for deep well type heaters convertible to another type of heater.

    454,    for planar (e.g., hot plate) heaters convertible to another type of
    heater.

    472,    for devices for performing plural functions simultaneously (e.g.,
    heating and illumination) or convertible to another type heater or
    noncoating device.


CLS 219/232
TXT Subject matter under subclass 229 wherein the tool or instrument utilizes
    an electric arc for the source of heat for the tip of the tool or
    instrument.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121.11+, particularly subclass 129 for arc type heaters where the arc is
    drawn between the metal to be heated and an electrode or the arc is
    contiguous to the metal rather than internally of a tool or instrument.
    See also subclasses 54, 60+ and 69+ where an arc heater is utilized in the
    heating, cutting, or disintegration of metals.

    383+,   for electric arc heaters wherein the arc influences or passes
    through nonmetallic material to be heated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses for
    space discharge devices, per se.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    appropriate subclasses for arc lamp, per se, of the consumable electrode
    type.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for systems for supplying electrical energy to discharge
    apparatus.  See the Class 315 "Search Class" note to Class 219 for the line
    between Class 219 and Class 315.


CLS 219/233
TXT Subject matter under subclass 229 wherein the heated tip is in an
    electrical circuit and the tip itself or the tip and a highly resistive
    element part of the same circuit form the electrical heater of the tool or
    instrument.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is the subcombination of the hand held or
    manipulative tool or instrument which is the "gun" type tip, per se, with
    or without electrical terminals which is also the electrical heater of the
    tool or instrument.

    (2)     Note.  The patents in this and the indented subclasses may use a
    granular, solid, loop or coiled wire type heater. Where the novelty resides
    in this type of heater, a search must be made in the appropriate subclasses
    of this class.

    (3)     Note.  Cloth markers utilizing tip heaters which are part of the
    electrical circuit will be placed in this group of subclasses.

    (4)     Note.  Included in this group of subclasses are needles,
    caponizers, cauterizing, coagulating, and cutting instruments of the same
    type found in the appropriate subclasses of Class 606, Surgery, subclasses
    32+ for example.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129+    for electrodes which are in the circuit for soldering or brazing
    purposes but use an arc heater rather than resistance heating of the tip
    and/or some high resistance material in the tool or instrument itself.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 140 for hand held electrically heated wires used
    as cutters which go beyond mere heating of the material such as the forming
    of ice cubes from a block of ice, dairy products cutters, and hot wire type
    razors.

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 229 for a hand held electrically heated hot
    wire mower.

    83,     Cutting, for machine type cutters employing hot wire cutters and
    the cutting of plastic material where no molding or shaping takes place in
    addition to the cutting.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 16 for hot wire cutting
    of natural ice formations.

    606,    Surgery, see (4) Note to this subclass.


CLS 219/234
TXT Subject matter under subclass 233 wherein the tip is composed of one or
    more electrodes which comprise the heater, per se, or the heater may be
    formed of one or more highly resistive elements contiguous to or adjacent
    the tip which heater completes its electrical circuit through means,
    usually the work, not part of the tool or instrument and its electrical
    circuitry to its power source.

    (1)     Note.  If the claimed combination includes the solder or brazing
    material in addition to the hand tool or instrument the patent should be
    placed in subclass 230 and cross referenced in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137.2+, for metal heating apparatus for producing a heating arc between the
    work and an electrode.

    230,    for clamping means combined with a heated tip tool where the
    clamping means is not part of the heating circuit.

    284+,   for heaters wherein the liquid heated is in the electrical circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 40 and 135.6+ for processes of
    heating glass by passing an electric current therethrough; subclass 511 for
    means to heat a fiber or filament utilizing electric or electromagnetic
    heat.

    81,     Tools, subclass 9.22 for an implement with electrical circuitry to
    simultaneously mark on and perforate the surface (e.g., pen, tattooing
    device).

    148,    Metal Treatment, particularly subclasses 520, 525, and 565 for
    processes of significant heat treatment of metal to modify or maintain the
    internal physical structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical property of
    metal wherein electrical heating is utilized.  See section III, A, of Class
    148 to determine what constitutes significant heat treatment.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    275 for methods of surface bonding wherein the work constitutes a conductor
    in an electrical circuit.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 120+ for furnaces
    wherein the charge may be in circuit.


CLS 219/235
TXT Subject matter under subclass 233 wherein the electrical circuitry includes
    a transformer whose secondary usually is in circuit with the tip.

    (1)     Note.  Hand manipulative tools such as soldering brazing, burning,
    writing and surgical tools or instruments, which utilize inductive
    electrostatic or electromagnetic means to heat these tools, are excluded
    from subclasses 6.5+ of Class 219.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    234,    for the tip and work coupled to a transformer forming part of the
    power supply.

    240,    for significant power supplies or voltage or current controls which
    may include a transformer in its circuitry.

    618+,   for closed transformer secondaries with or without a high resistive
    element in the circuit forming a heat exchange arrangement with the
    material to be heated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 140 for heated cutting blades which could utilize
    a soldering "gun" type heating means.


CLS 219/236
TXT Subject matter under subclass 229 wherein the electrical heater of the hand
    held tool or instrument comprises a coiled or looped wire resistance heater.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are plural heating elements
    forming a heating unit which includes a switching arrangement to control
    the current to the heating unit or heating elements of diverse resistance
    characteristics and which automatically controls the current through the
    heating elements.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein is the subcombination of a hand held
    electrically heated tool or instrument which includes the heating unit and
    the tip but not the heating unit, per se, or the tip, per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222+,   for hair treating, heating or curling instruments which are hand
    manipulatable and which utilize coil or loop type heating means in a
    similar manner.

    254+,   for sole plate pressure application means which may use coil or
    loop type heating means.

    520+,   for significant housing casing or support means, particularly
    subclass 530 for a heating unit which includes heat storage or transfer
    means.

    538+,   for significant heating unit structure, particularly subclass 540
    which includes heat storage or transfer means.

    552+,   for heating elements, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, appropriate subclasses for a resistor which
    is not stated as being an electrical heater.


CLS 219/237
TXT Subject matter under subclass 236 wherein the tool or instrument comprises
    a subcombination of elements which comprise an integral heater and tip or a
    heater plus tip unit, significantly adapted for use with the tool or
    instrument.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    544,    for heating unit structure wherein the heating elements are
    embedded within or completely surrounded by a core, sheath, or support
    means.


CLS 219/238
TXT Subject matter under subclass 236 wherein means are provided for enabling
    the tip and the heater to be readily attached to or separated from each
    other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, for means for making a readily releasable
    connection between a holder and a body.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, appropriate subclasses, for pipe joint
    type couplings in general.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for joints and
    connections in general.


CLS 219/239
TXT Subject matter under subclass 238 wherein the means for effecting the
    separation or attachment of the tip and heater unit comprises a threaded
    connection.


CLS 219/240
TXT Subject matter under subclass 227 wherein the structure includes details of
    means to supply current to the electrical heating means of the tool or
    instrument, or voltage or current control means responsive to the condition
    within or externally of the tool or instrument, or connection and/or
    disconnection means in the electrical circuit of the heating means of the
    tool or instruments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108+,   for systems of current supply for resistance welding apparatus.

    130.1+, for systems of current supply for arc welding apparatus.

    222+,   for systems utilizing hair treating, heating and/or curling which
    include power supplies, current or voltage control and connection and/or
    disconnection means.

    250+,   for significant power supplies and voltage or current control means
    used with hand held sole plate type pressure application means.

    482+,   for power supplies, voltage or current regulation or control means
    not associated with any particular type of electrically heated tool,
    instrument or device.

    507+,   for significant current connection and/or disconnection means not
    associated with any particular type of electrically heated tool or
    instrument or device set forth in this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 51+ for the
    combination of a Class 439 quick make and break connector with or acting as
    a Class 200 circuit maker and breaker in an integral unit, subclasses
    332.1+ for mechanical quick make and break switches including those mounted
    on handles.

    218,    High-Voltage Switches With Arc Preventing or Extinguishing Devices,
    subclasses 1+ for arc preventing and extinguishing combined with switches.


    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for plural supply and/or plural load circuits for controlling
    the current or load circuits.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for current or load regulation, transformer, impedance and phase
    control systems involving a single source of power and a solitary load
    device where no particular art devices are involved.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ for
    electromagnetic device control circuit.


CLS 219/241
TXT Subject matter under subclass 240 including thermally expansible bars,
    bimetallic elements, expansible fluids, thermomagnetic elements,
    thermocouples or other thermal devices which are responsive to the
    temperature of the tool or instrument to control the voltage or current to
    the electrical heating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251+,   for thermally responsive current control means for heaters used in
    sole plate type pressure application means.

    494+,   for thermally responsible voltage or current regulation or control
    systems which are more complex or comprehensive than a thermally operated
    switch, per se.

    510+,   for thermally responsive switches which include expansible solids,
    fluids and fusible elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    337,    Electricity: Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    appropriate subclasses for thermal current actuated or thermally responsive
    switches of the same type found in Class 219, subclasses 510+ but not in
    combination with an electric heating load.


CLS 219/242
TXT Subject matter under subclass 227 including support means for hand held
    electrically heated metallic tip type tools or instruments and which means
    are more than mere stands or brackets and which include electrical
    circuitry to transmit and/or control the electrical energy supplied to
    electrical heating means on the support and/or the tool or instrument and
    which support may include heat exchange means to the tool or instrument.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are electrically heated supports
    with or without current control for heating hand held or manipulative tools
    or instruments which include curling irons and clamps which do not have a
    self-contained heater and supports including electrical circuitry for
    transmitting power to self-contained heater type hand held or manipulative
    tools or instruments not otherwise provided for.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246+,   for stands for hand held flatirons or the like with electrical
    circuitry.

    259,    for supporting devices for electric flatirons, for example.

    267,    for support for electrical igniters.

    429+,   for electrically heated vessels and stands therefor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 80.1+ for retainers for removable
    articles where a heat exchange is involved.

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses for supports for hand held or
    manipulable tools or instruments where a stand or support does no more than
    support the tool or instrument.  See particularly subclasses 51+, 127+,
    511+.


CLS 219/243
TXT Apparatus under subclass 200 including heating devices combined with
    pressure application means cooperating with the heating device in such a
    manner that pressure is applied to an object to be heated simultaneously
    with the heating operation and such apparatus not being provided for in
    another art class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 137+ for general laundry processes which
    may include ironing.

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclass 57.1 for shoe making machinery
    involving the upper part of the shoe where a seam is turned and the seam is
    pressed by any type of structure.

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, for the generic class for devices
    and processes for producing a smooth appearance on a surface of a textile
    article or fabric, particularly subclasses 1+ for smoothing machines
    including platen pressers under subclasses 17+ and roller pressers under
    subclasses 44+, subclass 99 for stationary nonplanar pressing surfaces
    including electrically heated pressing irons, subclass 100 for smoothing
    implements consisting of a roller or rollers, subclasses 103+ for ironing
    tables including electric heaters and vaporizers, subclass 141 for
    miscellaneous devices necessary to ironing and subclass 144 for processes
    relating to the smoothing and ironing of fabrics not otherwise provided for.

    53,     Package Making, appropriate subclasses for package making apparatus
    which may utilize physical pressure and electric heating simultaneously.

    69,     Leather Manufacturers, particularly subclass 7 for seam pressing
    machines for leather goods, subclass 27 for fur smoothing and subclasses 37
    to 48 which may include a surface to iron or smooth the leather goods.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 200+ for a method or apparatus for
    heating or cooling metal in conjunction with deforming it between rollers.

    100,    Presses, for the generic class for apparatus for subjecting
    material to compressive force by causing solid surfaces to approach one
    another while the material is between them, particularly subclasses 92+ for
    presses combined with heating, cooling or drying means.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, particularly subclasses 227+ for nonelectrical
    stoves or furnaces and attachments for the stoves or furnaces specially
    designed for heating of sadirons and subclass 230 for the heating of
    sadirons by nonelectrical stoves or furnaces using gaseous or liquid fuel.

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 315+ and 324+ for tobacco treatment including
    the smoothing of tobacco leaves by pressing with stemming and booking which
    could include heating of the leaves for the purpose of smoothing.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 254+ for heating of wood and bending it to
    conform to a desired shape which may utilize electrically heated means.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    499 for separate nonpress heating means for work, subclass 579 for handle
    or hand grip heated tools for heat bonding laminar plastic sheet, subclass
    580 for presses which include heated presses not of general application
    specific to the forming of laminar material.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 35+ which includes combined sad and
    fluting irons and hand irons housing teeth intermeshing with a bed and
    subclasses 52+ for collar, cuff and neckband ironers.


CLS 219/244
TXT Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein the pressure application means
    comprises rotatable cylinder or other means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    388,    for the combination of an electrically heated container for
    enclosure with a conveyor which may be of the roller type to transport
    material through the enclosure.

    469,    for the combination of an electrically heated roller whereby
    material may be heated while passing over or around the roller or roller
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclasses 44+ for ironing
    machines including one or more rollers associated with heat for the purpose
    of pressing textile fabrics, subclass 76 for a roller pressing element
    combined with a hand held flatiron, and subclasses 100+ for hand held
    smoothing elements consisting of a roller or rollers for the purpose of
    ironing.

    100,    Presses, for the generic class for apparatus for the subjecting of
    material to compressive force by causing solid surfaces to approach each
    other while the material is between them.  Subclasses 92+ includes the
    heating of material in addition to pressing the material and subclasses
    155+ where rolls are used for the concurrent pressing and conveying of the
    material where the rolls may be heated.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    583.1+ heated presses or press platens which could involve a heated roll
    for presses which are not of general utility or are combined with means to
    assemble or bring workpieces into association with each other.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 23 and 65+
    for processes and apparatus which may include a heated roll or rolls.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the notes thereunder.


CLS 219/245
TXT Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein the structure comprises pressure
    application means consisting of a manually held sole plate which generally
    includes hand held laundry irons.

    (1)     Note.  Irons electrically heated by induction, electrostatics,
    radiation including infrared, the flow of anions and cations in a
    conducting medium such as impure water are classified herein.

    (2)     Note.  Hand held irons of the electrostatic and electromagnetic
    type will be found herein (subclasses 245+) rather than in subclasses
    6.5-10.73 supra.

    (3)     Note.  The line between Class 38, Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing
    and Class 219 Electric Heating with regard to machine and hand held
    smoothing implements is:  A claim including details of the pressure
    application means or smoothing surface with a detailed or in name only
    electrical heating means shall be classified in Class 38.  A claim
    including a broad smoothing surface and a detailed electrical heating unit
    shall be classified in Class 219.  A claim which includes a nondetailed
    heating unit and a nondetailed smoothing surface shall be classified in
    Class 38.

    (4)     Note.  Claims dealing with safety features such as means to have
    the soleplate assume a raised position off the ironing surface when not in
    use, means to increase the ironing pressure of the soleplate, sole
    surfaces, travel irons and attachments for flatirons shall be classified in
    Class 38 rather than Class 219.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227+,   for electrically heated hand manipulative tools or instruments
    where the heated surfaces do not involve pressure application in addition
    to heat transfer to the material being treated.  See subclass 228 for heat
    applied to extensive areas by radiation, and subclasses 229+ for heat
    applied to localized areas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclasses 74+ for hand held
    heated flatirons including electrically heated flatirons combined with
    structure for performing some other function in subclasses 75+, including a
    roller in the plane of the pressing surface, all  electrically heated steam
    irons in subclasses 77.1+, subclass 82 for means including electricity for
    heating a flatiron internally, subclasses 88+ for structure relating to the
    general shape or form of materials which form the flatiron including heat
    insulation to hinder radiation of heat from the body of the iron, subclass
    90 for handle structure of a flatiron, subclass 93 for the structure of the
    plate which forms the ironing surface, subclass 94 for attachments for
    flatirons not otherwise provided for and subclasses 100+ for smoothing
    implements consisting of a roller or rollers.  See also (3) Note and (4)
    Note above for the line between Class 38 and Class 219.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 227+ for stoves or furnaces
    designed to be used alone or in connection with a flatiron structure and
    subclasses 411+ for a hand held flatiron that utilizes a liquid or gaseous
    fuel burner integral with the iron.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    579 for hand held or manipulative electrically heated bonding tools or
    instruments which are specifically devices for use in the adhesive bonding
    of material.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 21+ for machines and hand irons for
    making and ironing hats, subclasses 35+ for hand held fluting irons
    including combined sad and fluting irons, and subclasses 52+ for special
    ironers for collars, cuffs, neckbands and edge irons for those items which
    may be hand held and electrically heated.


CLS 219/246
TXT Subject matter under subclass 245 including stand means combined with
    electrically heated irons of the soleplate type where the stand may or may
    not include electrical circuitry connecting an electrical power source,
    directly or indirectly, such as by induction, to the iron, or the stand has
    cam means including thermal means cooperating with electrical circuitry
    such as switches and disconnect devices in the heater circuit of the iron.

    (1)     Note.  Included in the circuitry may be indicators, electrical
    switches and disconnect devices or any means which may control or convey
    directly or indirectly the electrical current to the iron from the power
    source.

    (2)     Note.  The devices to be found here generally include means whereby
    the external electrical circuit terminates in the iron itself.

    (3)     Note.  See subclass 259 for the same stands or supporting devices
    claimed alone rather than in combination with a hand held electrically
    heated iron.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222+,   for the combination of a self-heated hair heating means combined
    with a support or stand which forms part of the electrical power supply to
    the heating means.

    231,    for the combination of an electrically heated tip type hand tool or
    instrument with stands which are more than a mere support for a hand held
    tool and generally would include electrical circuitry in circuit with the
    iron.

    242,    for supports or stands, per se, for hand held or manipulative tools
    or instruments which have integral electrical heaters or for hand
    manipulative or hand held tools or instruments which are heated by heat
    transfer on and from electrically heated stands.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclass 79 for supports which are
    formed integral with the flat irons, subclass 97 for a support for the
    flatiron in the form of an attachment, and subclass 107 for the combination
    of a flat iron with an ironing table.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 120 for supports, bases and stands
    claimed in connection with apparatus of this class.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 51+ for supports for a pipe or cable which
    support a conductor chord or tube of an electrically or gas energized tool
    and hold the conductor chord or tube away from the work and subclasses
    117.1+ for supports for a sadiron which include stands, clamps, or
    hold-down means.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, for supports in the form of cabinets
    or enclosures, and particularly subclass 242 for such structures mounted in
    an aperture or recess in a wall, floor, ceiling or panel and subclass 245
    for such structures having mounting means associated with a wall, ceiling,
    vertical panel, underside of a horizontal panel, or a pair of spaced
    vertical panels.


CLS 219/247
TXT Subject matter under subclass 246 wherein the stand and iron each have
    contiguous complementary electrical circuit connections or the iron has a
    complementary contiguous electrical connector which connector forms a
    direct or contiguous complementary circuit connection with the electrical
    connection on the stand.

    (1)     Note.  The devices found here include means whereby the external
    electrical circuit terminates in the stand rather than the iron itself as
    found in subclass 246 above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    541,    for heater unit, per se, with terminal or connector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, particularly subclasses
    51+ for the combination of a Class 439 connection device and an electrical
    switch or disconnection device where the combination is an integral unit.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    appropriate subclasses especially 113, 187+ and 380 for thermal current or
    thermally actuated switches with a Class 439 connector coupling.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclass 45 for quick make and break
    connections with plug ejecting or coupling separating means, subclass 147
    for quick make and break connectors combined with other art devices where
    the combination is more than in name only, and sockets, receptacles and
    plugs, per se, in subclasses 176+.


CLS 219/248
TXT Subject matter under subclass 245 and which includes electrical, audible,
    visual or mechanical type indicator means which is responsive to some
    internal condition of the iron.

    (1)     Note.  A scale associated with an adjustable member to control the
    position at which a thermally actuated switch operator will operate its
    switch contacts or on-off, high-low switch position indicia is considered
    to be a setting position marker rather than a qualitative or quantitative
    indicator for this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  A thermometer combined with the electrical heater to show
    the temperature of the iron is considered to be a perfecting feature of the
    iron rather than a separate art device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    487,    for indicator means for a power supply, voltage or current
    regulation or control means for controlling or regulating plural separate
    distinct resistance elements selectively and/or alternately.

    506,    for signal or indicating means for automatic power supply, voltage
    or current regulation or control means, for heating means in general under
    the class definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 200+ for nonelectric signals and
    indicators, particularly subclasses 327+ for pointers and indicator arms,
    and subclasses 101+ and 216+ for thermostatically operated signals or
    signals giving only a qualitative indication of temperature.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 56 for circuit
    controllers arranged to cooperate with a pointer of an indicating
    instrument or for a common operator for a pointer and the circuit
    controller.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, particularly
    subclass 94 for thermostatically controlled devices combined with
    temperature indicating means.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 338.1+ for methods and apparatus
    including invisible energy responsive electric signalling devices for
    detecting and measuring infrared radiation.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, for measuring qualitatively
    and quantitatively electrical conditions and nonelectric properties in
    terms of electrical properties.

    337,    Electricity: Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    appropriate subclasses especially subclasses 79, 206, 241+, 265, 332, 376,
    and 417 for particular types of electrothermal and thermally actuated
    switches with condition indicating means.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 577-600 for signalling in
    response to temperature, flame or radiant energy, subclasses 635+ for
    electrical apparatus condition responsive signals, particularly subclass
    640 for heater element responsive systems, subclasses 815.4+ for visual
    signals, and subclasses 384.1+ for audible signals.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 141 for a nominally claimed
    iron combined with a thermometer.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclass 113 for quick make and break
    connectors associated with means providing an indication of a condition,
    nature or position of an indicator.


CLS 219/249
TXT Subject matter under subclass 245 including means by which the adjustment,
    addition, removal, or reassembly of one or more parts to or of the hand
    held, pressure application means causes the pressure application means to
    be capable of performing some other function other than heating and
    pressing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231,    for hand held, heated tip devices convertible to another structural
    arrangement to perform a different function.

    340,    for radiant heaters convertible to a nonheating device or to a
    different type heater.

    361,    for convection type fluid heaters convertible to another type
    heater or to a nonheater.

    416,    for deep well heaters convertible to another type of heater.

    454,    for planar type heaters convertible to structure for use in a
    different environment.

    472+,   for electric heaters in general convertible to another type heater
    or to nonheaters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclasses 75+ for flatirons
    combined with other structures for performing some other function than
    ironing.


CLS 219/250
TXT Subject matter under subclass 245 including detailed means either
    self-contained or external of the sole plate pressure application means
    whereby power is supplied to the electrical heating unit of the iron, means
    to effect voltage or current control, or current regulation means
    responsive to conditions within or externally of the iron.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222+,   for power supplies and voltage or current control or regulation
    means which are utilized with hair treating or heating instruments or
    systems utilizing such instruments.

    240,    for significant power supply voltage or current control or
    connections and/or disconnection means for hand manipulative tools or
    instruments.

    482+,   for power supplies, voltage or current regulation or control means
    which include manual or automatic control for heating devices combined with
    enclosure, container or support.

    507+,   for significant current connection and disconnection means combined
    with electrical heating devices in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 51+ for the
    combination of a Class 439 connector with a switch integrally formed,
    subclass 61.85 for switches associated with manipulating, operating or
    carrying handles, and subclasses 144+ for arc preventing and extinguishing
    means for circuit makers and breakers.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 112+
    for switching systems not claimed with any particular art device and
    subclasses 149+ for miscellaneous systems including power packs and
    conversion systems.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging
    appropriate subclass for a method or apparatus to charge a battery used in
    a portable power system.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for current or voltage regulation systems including impedance
    systems when the regulation or control is not claimed with a specific art
    device.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 530+ for miscellaneous circuits with specific source of
    supply or bias voltage.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ for
    control circuits for relays and electromagnets when they are not claimed
    with any particular art device.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, for systems involving the
    conversion of direct current to alternating current and/or alternating
    current to direct current.


CLS 219/251
TXT Subject matter under subclass 250 including at least one thermal operator
    with means for controlling a connection and/or disconnection means, or the
    voltage or current, in an electrical circuit to the heating unit or units
    of an iron.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222+,   for electrical hair heating or treating instruments or systems
    utilizing these instruments which could utilize thermal control of the
    individual heaters or of the system.

    241,    for thermal control means of electrically heated hand manipulative
    tools or instruments.

    494+,   for a thermally controlled power supply, or voltage or current
    regulation or control means of electrical heating means in general where
    more than a thermal switch or disconnect device is utilized.

    510+,   for thermally responsive current connection and/or disconnection
    means for electrical heating devices in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 101+ and 216+ for qualitative
    thermostatically operated, mechanically actuated signals or indicators.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 56 for switches
    of special application and having indicating means and subclass 167 for
    indicators, per se.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, particularly
    subclass 7 for thermally motivated operators combined with pressure
    application surfaces of sadirons.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 117
    for thermally responsive electrical switching systems.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    appropriate subclasses for thermally actuated switches adapted to control
    the connection or disconnection of an electrical circuit to the heating
    unit of an iron.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 161+ for
    relay operating circuits which are thermally responsive.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 141 for a nominally claimed
    iron combined with a thermometer.


CLS 219/252
TXT Subject matter under subclass 251 including a thermal responsive means,
    usually a bimetallic device, having means whereby the predetermined
    temperature at which it operates may be adjusted or preset by an operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    515,    for adjustable thermally responsive switches for controlling an
    electrical heating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclass 77.7 for electrically
    heated hand held steam irons which generally have an adjustable thermal
    control for the heating element, and subclasses 82+ for hand held laundry
    irons which have claimed detailed sole plate structure and detailed or in
    name only electrical heating means combined with an adjustable thermally
    controlled switch to control the electrical heating means.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for irons which may have
    adjustable, thermally controlled electrically heated units.

    337,    Electricity: Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclass 141 for electrothermally actuated switches which may be adjustable
    and subclasses 298+ for thermally actuated switches with adjusting means.


CLS 219/253
TXT Subject matter under subclass 251 wherein the thermal responsive means
    comprises a fusible solid, an expansible liquid, or expansible bar.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    512,    for current connection and/or disconnection means for electric
    heaters which have thermally responsive linear expansible metal operators
    for the connection and/or disconnection means.

    513,    for current connection and/or disconnection means for electric
    heaters which have a thermally responsive expansible fluid operator for the
    connection and/or disconnection means.

    517,    for current connection and/or disconnection means for electric
    heaters which are thermally responsive fusible links.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 99+ and
    101+ for thermally responsive solid or fluid elements which act as
    operators to perform some regulatory act.

    337,    Electricity: Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    appropriate subclasses for electrothermally or thermally actuated switches
    with actuating means comprising an expansible, liquid or bar or a fusible,
    combustible or explosive means.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 106 and 160 for measuring
    the temperature by means of fusible elements, subclasses 187+ for expanding
    solid type elements responsive to heat for measuring quantitatively the
    temperature, and subclasses 201+ for devices which measure the temperature
    as a function of the contraction or expansion of a confined fluid.


CLS 219/254
TXT Subject matter under subclass 245 including significant details of the
    heating unit structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    520+,   for an electrical heating unit structure in general combined with a
    significant housing, casing or support means.

    538+,   for significant heating unit structure, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing and Smoothing, subclasses 82+ for means to heat
    the flatiron including electrical means, hot solid and fluid substances and
    solid fuels.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 21, 36 and 52.5+ for irons which may
    have detailed electrical heating units alone or combined with apparel
    making apparatus.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, appropriate subclasses for electrical
    resistors, per se.


CLS 219/255
TXT Subject matter under subclass 254 wherein the heating unit structure
    comprises at least two or more separate heating units. The separate units
    may be adapted to operate singly or simultaneously, either in series or
    parallel arrangement, by way of example.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    476+,   for plural heating devices, particularly subclass 478 for unitary
    housings, support or casing means and subclass 480 for selectively
    activated plural heating devices,

    483+,   for the regulation or control of plural resistance elements
    including subclass 486 for selectively and/or alternatively activated
    plural resistance elements.

    520+,   for significant housings, casings, or support means particularly
    subclass 537 for plural heating units combined with significant mounting
    means on a single support, housings or casing,

    539,    for plural resistive elements forming significant heating unit
    structure and

    552,    for heating elements having plural sections.


CLS 219/256
TXT Subject matter under subclass 245 including significant details of the
    terminal block, electrical connections within or on the hand held pressure
    application means, or connection and/or disconnection devices whereby the
    heating means may be electrically connected to or disconnected from an
    external source of power.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240,    for hand held, heated tip type tools or instruments combined with
    connection and/or disconnection devices.

    507,    for significant current connection and/or disconnection devices
    combined with electrical heating means in general.

    541,    for heater unit, per se, with terminal or connector means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, particularly subclass 46
    for handles which are associated with conductors or insulators of
    electricity, and subclasses 84+ for conductor joints which are not of the
    quick make and break type found in Class 439.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 51+ for a
    Class 439 connection and/or disconnection device with an integral Class 200
    switch or a Class 439 connector acting as a switch, and the appropriate
    subclasses for the various types of switches including subclass 152 for
    liquid contact switches, subclass 332.2 for handgrip type switches, and
    subclass 520 for pushbutton switches.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 139+
    for switching systems having means for actuating a switch.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ for
    electrical circuits for relays and electromagnets.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 6+ for conducting joints for
    relatively movable conductor parts combined with a connector, subclass 58
    for electrical tool or appliance handle mounted quick make and break
    connections, subclasses 75+ for locking means for coupled connectors,
    subclass 101 for flexible or pivoted guards or supports for the line cord
    or conductor combined with a quick make and break connection, subclasses
    103+ for strain relieving means for a conductor attached to a terminal
    joint, subclass 108 for connectors combined with a detachable part or
    having a portion specifically shaped to facilitate the handling of the
    connector, subclasses 119+ for mounting or supporting means for a complete
    coupling or a coupling part, and subclasses 176+ for quick make and break
    sockets, receptacles, and plugs.


CLS 219/257
TXT Subject matter under subclass 256 including means whereby the completion or
    interruption of an electric current to an external source of current at the
    beginning or end of the use of the iron is accomplished automatically.

    (1)     Note.  The term "automatic" is construed to include the operation
    of a switch in the circuit of the electrical heating means by a switch
    operator which is motivated by the grasping of the handle and the guiding
    of the soleplate type iron in the normal manner of using the iron.

    (2)     Note.  The line between Class 200, Electricity:  Circuit Makers and
    Breakers and this class is:  where an electric iron is claimed by name only
    with no inclusion of a specific electric heater and just enough structure
    of the iron to support the switch, the patent shall be classified in Class
    200, appropriate subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250+,   for voltage or current control means for the iron responsive to
    variations in the voltage or current delivered to the heating means or
    thermal conditions of the iron which may involve connection and/or
    disconnection of the heater from a source while in use.

    489,    for combined manual and automatic regulating or control means for
    the current to an electric heater in general.

    490+,   for automatic control means of the voltage or current to an
    electrical heater in general.

    509+,   for automatically operated switches for connecting and/or
    disconnecting electrical heating means in general from a power supply.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses
    for condition operated switch structures, particularly subclass 61.42 for a
    switch operator responsive to impingement against an object or motion of a
    feeler support, subclasses 61.45+ for switch closures responsive to the
    motion of or the change of inclination of an object including conducting
    fluid and tilt responsive switches, and subclass 61.85 for switches
    operable by the volitional use of guiding, lifting or actuating members
    used in the normal or intended manner.


CLS 219/258
TXT Subject matter under subclass 245 including significant means whereby heat
    energy is stored for transmission at a later time, or is transmitted to a
    sole plate by conduction or reflection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    347+,   for radiant type fluid heaters with reflector means.

    405,    for oven type devices with heat energy directing or reflecting
    means.

    461,    for planar type heaters with heat energy reflecting or directing
    means.

    530,    for the combination of an electrical heating unit combined with
    housing, casing, or support structure in general and which includes means
    whereby heat energy is stored or is transmitted to a material or object to
    be heated.  For a list of other electric heaters in this class provided
    with heat exchange or storage means consult "Search This Class, Subclass"
    under subclass 530.

    540,    for the combination of an electric heating unit structure in
    general and significant heat transfer or storage means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclass 89 for structure to heat
    insulate the body of the iron to hinder the radiation of heat from the
    soleplate and storage means of the iron to the nonworking surfaces of the
    iron such as the handle.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for heating and cooling
    systems with the heat generator and heat transfer structure when claimed
    without the means forming the heat source.


CLS 219/259
TXT Subject matter under subclass 245 including significant details of a stand
    or support apparatus which, while not comprising a complete iron,
    nevertheless is so specifically adapted for use with an iron as to be
    peculiar to the art classifiable in this class.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are structures which are more than
    mere stands or supports for hand held or manipulative sole plate type
    pressure application means and include electrical circuitry which includes
    electric switches, thermal and otherwise, disconnection devices of the
    Class 439 type and indicators alone or in combination, to connect the
    pressure application means to a suitable power source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242,    for supports for hand held heated tip instruments.

    246+,   for sole plate pressure device combined with a stand.


CLS 219/260
TXT Subject matter under subclass 200 relating to devices including electrical
    resistive means adapted, when heated to incandescence, to be brought into
    intimate contact with a material or object whereby the material or object
    is caused to be ignited, at least in part, or wholly consumed and which
    devices are not elsewhere classifiable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 250 for refuse burners which may employ
    electrical heating means.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 2 for garbage burners.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 143+ for dispensing means with
    electrical igniting means.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 247+ for
    igniters which utilize the electric spark; particularly subclasses 264+ for
    incandescent feature.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 258+ for an electrical igniter combined with
    a fuel burner.


CLS 219/261
TXT Subject matter under subclass 260 including means whereby a draft of air is
    circulated through or around the object or article to be ignited whereby
    ignition thereof is expedited or accelerated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    296,    for liquid heaters with forced circulation means.

    369,    for convection type fluid heaters with forced fluid circulating
    means.

    380,    for fluid heaters with fluid impeller to control the fluid pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 144+ for dispensing devices having
    electrical igniter means combined with vacuum or draft producing means.


CLS 219/262
TXT Subject matter under subclass 260 including means whereby the current
    traversing the ignition unit of the device is controlled either
    automatically or at the will of an operator or whereby the ignition unit is
    connected to or disconnected from an external source of electricity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    482+,   for power supply, current regulation or control means for heating
    devices in general under the class definition.

    507+,   for heating devices in general with electric current connection
    and/or disconnection means.


CLS 219/263
TXT Subject matter under subclass 262 wherein the current control or external
    circuit connecting or disconnecting means is automatically responsive to
    some predetermined condition of the igniter device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    490+,   for automatically actuated power supply, voltage or current
    regulation or control means, and subclasses 509+ for automatically actuated
    current connection or disconnection means for heating devices in general
    under the class definition.


CLS 219/264
TXT Subject matter under subclass 263 wherein the current control or external
    circuit connection or disconnection means is thermally responsive to the
    condition of the ignition unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    494+    and 510+, for thermally responsive current control or external
    circuit connection means for heaters in general under the class definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 117
    for thermally responsive switching systems.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    appropriate subclasses for electrothermally and thermally actuated switches.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 161+ for
    thermally actuated relay circuits.


CLS 219/265
TXT Subject matter under subclass 264 wherein the significant circuit
    connection means includes at least one or more bimetallic or other elements
    capable of flexing when heated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclasses 333+ for bimetallic and subclasses 382+ for longitudinally
    expansible solid actuated thermal switches.


CLS 219/266
TXT Subject matter under subclass 262 wherein the significant external electric
    circuit connection or disconnection means claimed comprises resilient
    spring material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.58+ for
    switches actuated concurrently with the operation or use of an art device,
    especially subclasses 61.76+ for spring actuated switches and subclasses
    402+, for spring actuated snap switches.


CLS 219/267
TXT Subject matter under subclass 260 including significant details of the
    housing, casing or support device within or upon which the igniter unit is
    mounted.  The structure to be found here will be generally restricted to
    the igniter plug or removable part of the device but may include details of
    the fixed receptacle which act to cooperate with features of the igniter in
    a manner to complete an electrical circuit, lock the two against
    displacement etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270,    for structure of resistance igniter element, per se.

    520+,   for significant housing or casing structure for heating devices in
    general under the class definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 143+ for article dispensing devices
    combined with electrical igniter means.


CLS 219/268
TXT Subject matter under subclass 260 including significant details of means
    comprising a source of current or power for utilization in providing
    heating current in the resistive element heating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    482+,   for power supplies for heating devices in general under the class
    definition.


CLS 219/269
TXT Subject matter under subclass 260 including means whereby some
    predetermined condition of the resistive element is communicated to the
    user by audible or other means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248,    for electric irons with indicators.

    487,    for selectively controlled plural resistance elements with
    indicator means.

    506,    for power supply, current or voltage regulation or control means
    for heating devices in general under the class definition and having signal
    or indicating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 167 for
    switches with indicators.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+ for electrical
    automatic condition responsive indicating systems.


CLS 219/270
TXT Subject matter under subclass 260 including significant details of the
    resistance heating unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    267,    for the resistance heating structure associated with additional
    housing or support means.

    538+,   for significant heating unit structure useful in heating devices in
    general under the class definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, appropriate subclasses for resistor element
    structure, per se.


CLS 219/383
TXT Apparatus under subclass 200 including at least two spaced apart electrodes
    associated with a voltage generating means whereby when voltage is applied
    from the generating means to the electrodes an electrical discharge is
    established between the electrodes.  The subject matter classified herein
    includes devices wherein the electrical discharge takes place directly
    through a nonmetallic material to be heated as well as apparatus where the
    electrical arc occurs through air or other gases with the material to be
    heated confined within the influence of the arc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121.11+, for miscellaneous heating of metal by an electrical arc produced
    between opposed electrodes or between an electrode and the metal.

    232,    for hand held heated tip devices utilizing an internal arc heater
    unit.

    234,    for hand held heated tip devices with tip and work in circuit.

    284,    for liquid heaters with liquid in circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 542+ for electrical arc means
    specialized for carrying out chemical reactions wherein the electrical
    energy is more than a mere heating means.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses for the
    structure for electric space discharge devices designed to produce an
    electric arc.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    appropriate subclasses for electric space discharge devices, including arc
    discharge devices of the consumable electrode type and the circuits for
    supplying electric current thereto.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses, for systems for supplying electric current to arc discharge
    devices.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 61+ for furnaces
    in which a charge is heated by means of an electric arc produced between
    opposed electrodes.


CLS 219/384
TXT Subject matter under subclass 383 including means whereby a nonmetallic
    material is positioned between the electrodes of the device in such a
    position that, upon application of a voltage to the electrodes, the
    material within the influence of the electrodes is caused to be
    disintegrated thereby causing a permanent void or perforation therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 16 for processes utilizing means for heating
    material at a localized area such as a line of separation and subclass 170
    for heat apparatus for heating the work.

    283,    Printed Matter, subclasses 72+ for fraud prevention devices
    utilizing perforating or other material marking devices which are of the
    electric arc type.

    346,    Recorders, particularly subclasses 150.2 for phenomenal electric
    recorders in general wherein an electric arc penetrates the recording
    medium.

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, subclasses 159+ for
    generic electric recorder wherein an electric arc penetrates the recording
    medium.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 596 for metallic
    stock material which has apertures that may be the result of a metal
    heating process.


CLS 219/385
TXT Apparatus under subclass 200 including significant details of at least one
    heating device combined with a container, enclosure or support means for
    the material to be heated and wherein the combination claimed is not
    specifically provided for above or in another art class.

    (1)     Note.  Class 219 is the generic class for electric heating. Class
    373 is specific to the electric furnace structures or method for
    electrically melting or fusing refractory materials, usually granular in
    nature (ores, oxides, sulphides, etc.), the materials having a melting
    point of lead or above.  Class 373 also provides for the electrically
    stirring of such high temperature melts.  Class 373 also provides for
    electrical furnaces for melting or treating glass or silica (subclasses
    27+) and for treating carbon (subclasses 109+). Subclasses 17 and 139 of
    Class 373 provides also for miscellaneous electric furnaces, such as the
    zone refining or melting type (e.g. semiconductor materials) and wherein
    electric furnace structure is claimed. See, also, the definition of Class
    373 and the reference to Class 373 under Search Class in the class
    definitions of Class 219.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    520+,   for the structure of the heater unit and housing, casing and
    support therefor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 201 for
    drying apparatus combined with kilns or containers.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    containers specifically adapted for the preparation, cooking or treatment
    of foods and beverages.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 301 for brooders and incubators,
    subclasses 302+ for brooders, and subclasses 318+ for incubators utilizing
    electrical energy.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 33 for steam tables, subclass 55 for
    combined base and hot closet, subclass 224 for domestic refuse burners, and
    subclasses 273+ for ovens.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 32 for tubular conduits with
    heater means.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 341+ for
    crystal ovens.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 7 and 22 for process and apparatus of heated
    mortar mixing, and subclasses 144+ for heated mixers of general utility.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, see (1) Note, above.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses
    81+ for cabinets for enclosing the human body during application of heat.


CLS 219/386
TXT Subject matter under subclass 385 including means whereby the special
    container may be lifted and carried bodily from place to place by hand or
    is provided with wheels or casters whereby it may be transported from one
    location to another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227,    for electrically heated hand tools or instruments.

    346,    for transportable fluid heaters.

    533,    for portable heater unit with housing, casing or support means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for various
    containers adapted for the heating or processing of foods which may be
    portable.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 11 for portable magazine stoves,
    subclass 268 for heated lunch wagon devices, and subclass 276 for wagon
    ovens.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, appropriate subclasses for a
    container particularly configured to hold a specific article or material
    including an article (s) or material (s) put up as a mercantile unit.

    600,    Surgery, subclass 22 for incubators.


CLS 219/387
TXT Subject matter under subclass 386 wherein the significant container
    comprises a device specifically adapted for the heating or maintaining the
    temperature of foodstuffs such as a lunch box.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    containers specifically adapted for the treatment, cooking or storing of
    foods which may be and generally are portable.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 261+ for lunch heaters,
    particularly subclasses 262 and 266+.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclass 22 for lunch wagons.


CLS 219/388
TXT Subject matter under subclass 385 including means whereby material to be
    heated is continuously passed through a container or enclosure while being
    subjected to the effects of a heating device or devices, usually by means
    of conveyor means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 201+,
    especially subclasses 203+ for houses, kilns and containers combined with
    conveyor means.

    53,     Package Making, subclass 127 for apparatus including heating or
    cooling the material contents of packages while being conveyed past a
    station.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 641+ for coating apparatus combined
    with radiant heating devices in which the coated work may be passed through
    the heating area, see particularly subclasses 65, 67 and 68.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus, for
    an injection type molding machine having distinct means for heating or
    cooling to enhance feeding of the work, and subclasses 378.1+ for an
    extrusion shaping apparatus including heating or cooling means for the
    material being shaped.


CLS 219/389
TXT Subject matter under subclass 385 including means whereby the container or
    enclosure is adapted to be rotated about an axis.  The container along with
    the heated material may be made to rotate about or around a fixed heating
    means or the heating means may be so fixed to the rotating container as to
    rotate therewith as a unit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 108+ for
    rotary drums or receptacles combined with drying means.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 7 and 22+ for process and apparatus for
    heating and mixing mortar, and subclass 146 for nominal electric heating
    with an agitator of general utility.

    494,    Imperforate Bowl:  Centrifugal Separators, subclasses 13+ for a
    separator of that class provided with heat exchange means.


CLS 219/390
TXT Subject matter under subclass 385 wherein the container or enclosure
    structure comprises an inner compartment for holding the material to be
    heated, the compartment wall, or walls, preventing direct transmission of
    heat energy derived from the heating means to the material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, particularly subclasses 19+ and 273+ for
    externally heated domestic ovens.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 212 and 319 for a residual muffle type furnace
    heated by nonelectric or merely nominally recited electrical heating means.


CLS 219/391
TXT Subject matter under subclass 385 wherein the special container or
    enclosure structure consists of a chamber designed for baking, heating or
    drying utilizing heated air and in which the material heated retains its
    original physical condition, shape or form and which chamber usually
    constitutes a part of a stove.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter classified here and in the indented
    subclasses differs from that to be found in subclasses 420+ below in that
    in the lower subclasses the device is constructed of very high refractory
    material adapted to withstand extremely high temperatures whereby the
    heated material may be melted or otherwise treated to alter its chemical
    composition, condition, form or shape.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 201+ for
    houses, kilns and containers adapted for drying.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 324+ for devices for
    the preparation of food combined with oven means.

    110,    Furnaces, appropriate subclasses for furnace structure combined
    with a container which is adapted for the burning of a particular material,
    particularly subclasses 230+ for solid fuel furnaces provided with coking
    means; and subclass 242 for a closed retort refuse incinerator.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 58+ for coating apparatus combined
    with drying means for the coated material.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 19+ for cooking ovens and
    subclasses 273+ for domestic ovens in general.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for kilns and
    ovens.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 92+ for oven structure combined with light
    means.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, for high temperature
    furnaces, usually for melting highly refractory materials.


CLS 219/392
TXT Subject matter under subclass 391 wherein the structure includes an oven
    with an additional separate and distinct container, enclosure or support
    for material to be heated both of which are contained within or share a
    common housing, container or support means and are adapted for simultaneous
    or selective use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    283,    for liquid heater combined with a nonliquid heater.

    314,    for liquid heaters with plural containers or compartments.

    394,    for plural ovens.

    475,    for heaters in general with plural heat utilization means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 1+ for cooking stove structure
    comprising oven means combined with other cooking or heating devices.


CLS 219/393
TXT Subject matter under subclass 391 including means whereby the oven
    structure in whole or in part is adapted to function both as an enclosure
    for material to be heated and for a diverse purpose; such as, a support for
    vessels; a support for a further heating device or as a working surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    283,    for liquid heater combined with a nonliquid heater.

    393,    for oven combined with additional material supporting means.

    394,    for plural ovens.

    472+,   for heaters in general that simultaneously perform plural diverse
    functions.

    475,    for single heater in general with plural heat utilization means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 19 for convertible ovens and subclass
    275 for portable ovens which may be utilized in plural manners.


CLS 219/394
TXT Subject matter under subclass 391 including a plurality of separate and
    distinct oven type enclosures.  The enclosures may be separately supported
    each with its own individual heating means or may be collectively attached
    to a single unitary support with or without individual heating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    314,    for liquid heaters with plural containers or compartments.

    428,    for heaters in general associated with a plurality of separate and
    distinct enclosures.

    475,    for single heater in general with plural heat utilization means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 20.1+ for plural ovens heated by
    steam or hot water.


CLS 219/395
TXT Subject matter under subclass 391 wherein the heating device structure
    includes at least two or more separate and distinct heating units.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    417,    for deep well heaters with plural separate heating units.

    422,    for crucible or furnace structures with plural separate heating
    units.

    445+,   for planar heating surface structures with plural heating units or
    elements.

    470,    for cylindrical or roller support structures with plural heating
    units.

    539,    below for significant heating unit structure comprising plural
    resistive elements, subclass 478 for plural heating devices under the class
    definition combined with a single housing support or casing for the
    heaters, and subclasses 483+ for significant power supply, voltage or
    current regulation or control means combined with plural separate and
    distinct resistance elements.


CLS 219/396
TXT Subject matter under subclass 395 wherein each of the plurality of heating
    units is of a different mechanical construction or the heat energy produced
    thereby is utilized in a different manner, as for example by direct heat
    conduction and by radiation.



    To complete the search for this subject matter see search notes under
    subclass 479 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    479,    for plural separate electrical heating devices of diverse type.


CLS 219/397
TXT Subject matter under subclass 395 wherein each of the plurality of heating
    units is of a different resistive value.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    484,    for heater control system in general for plural resistance elements
    of diverse resistance characteristics.

    539,    for heater unit structure comprising plural separate and distinct
    resistive elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 325+ for cooking
    apparatus with automatic control which utilize a plurality of heating units
    separately activated.


CLS 219/398
TXT Subject matter under subclass 395 including means whereby the separate
    heating units are adapted to be selectively energized in a predetermined
    manner or at will.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    446,    for planar type heating surfaces with plural selectively activated
    heating units.

    480,    below for separate heating devices in general under the class
    definition combined with means whereby they are selectively activated and
    subclasses 483+ for plural separate resistance elements combined with
    control means.


CLS 219/399
TXT Subject matter under subclass 391 including means whereby heat energy
    derived from the heating unit or units is transferred by means other than
    direct conduction to the oven to be heated, is distributed evenly to all
    parts of the heated oven type enclosure or is accumulated for later
    distribution to the heated oven.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    325+,   for liquid heaters with heat storage or transfer means.

    347,    for fluid heaters of the radiant type with heat storage or transfer
    means.

    365,    for fluid heaters of the convection type with heat storage or
    transfer means.

    378,    for fluid heaters in general with heat storage or transfer means.

    390,    for muffle type heater.

    430,    for vessel and stand with heat storage or transfer means.

    439,    for vessel with heat storage and transfer means.

    530,    for housing or casing in general with  heat storage or transfer
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 389, 401, 433, and 447
    for heat distributors associated with various types of cooking apparatus.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 273.5 for domestic ovens with heat
    accumulator means (e.g., fireless), and subclass 274 for Dutch ovens.


CLS 219/400
TXT Subject matter under subclass 399 including means whereby heat energy
    transfer is accomplished by convection currents.

    (1)     Note.  Devices of a similar nature where the entire heating of a
    closed space is attained by convection currents will be classified above in
    subclasses 369+ according to the specific details of the heating means
    utilized with appropriate cross referencing to this subclass whenever the
    claimed subject matter includes oven structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359+,   for fluid heaters of the convection type, particularly subclass 375
    for such heaters with heat storage or transfer means (see also (1) Note
    above).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 467+ for subjecting
    food to an enclosed modified atmosphere that may be steam.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 274 for Dutch ovens heated by
    convection currents from an open fireplace or stove.


CLS 219/401
TXT Subject matter under subclass 391 including steam of vapor pressure
    generating means whereby the heating of an enclosed oven space is caused to
    take place at an elevated pressure above that of the external atmosphere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    271+,   for fluid heaters with vaporizer means.

    362,    for fluid heaters of the convection type with vaporizer means.

    444,    for heating devices under the class definition combined with
    pressurized vessels.


CLS 219/402
TXT Subject matter under subclass 391 including significant details of housing,
    casing or support means for the heating unit, or units, of the heating
    device.

    (1)     Note.  The housing, casing or support structure forming the subject
    matter to be found here is for the purpose of enclosing or supporting the
    heating unit, or units of the combination only and does not include the
    details of the oven or either container of the combination.  Housing,
    casing or support means in combination with heaters in general under the
    class definition are classified below in subclasses 520+.


CLS 219/403
TXT Subject matter under subclass 402 including means whereby the heating unit,
    or units, may be supported within or readily inserted or removed from
    within the heated enclosure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    316+,   for liquid container or tank with immersible heating unit.

    381,    for fluid heaters in general with immersion type heater.

    437,    for vessel and stand with immersible heating unit.

    523,    for heating devices in general under the class definition combined
    with a housing or casing means and which are adapted to be inserted as a
    unit with the housing or casing, into a space intended to be heated.

    541,    for heater unit, per se, with terminal or connector means.


CLS 219/404
TXT Subject matter under subclass 402 including means whereby the housing,
    casing or support including the heating unit or units are hingedly or
    adjustably supported within a heated enclosure.


CLS 219/405
TXT Subject matter under subclass 402 wherein the housing, casing or support
    structure includes heat energy reflecting or directing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    347+,   for fluid heaters of the radiant type with heat energy reflector
    means.

    461,    for planar surface type heaters with heat energy reflecting or
    deflecting means.

    538,    below for significant heating unit structure utilizable with
    heating devices under the class definition and including reflector or
    focusing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 274 for Dutch ovens utilizing
    reflector.


CLS 219/406
TXT Subject matter under subclass 391 including resistance means surrounding at
    least a major portion of the heating area of an oven type enclosure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210,    for heating devices combined with electrical devices of a vibrating
    type (e.g., piezoelectric crystals and employing ovens with an external
    heating winding).

    300,    for heaters wherein the liquid conveying tube is the heater.

    301,    for liquid heaters wherein the heater unit surrounds the liquid
    conveying tube.

    424,    for crucible or furnace with the heating element surrounding the
    wall of the crucible or furnace.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 341+ for
    crystal ovens with electric heating means.


CLS 219/407
TXT Subject matter under subclass 406 wherein the resistance heating means is
    described as embedded within or located between the inner and outer walls
    of the oven type enclosure means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    424,    for crucible or furnace with resistance heating element embedded in
    the wall thereof.

    438+,   for electrically heated vessels having resistance elements embedded
    within or between the walls thereof.


CLS 219/408
TXT Subject matter under subclass 391 including significant fixed heating means
    enclosed by or permanently attached within the heating area of an oven type
    enclosure.


CLS 219/409
TXT Subject matter under subclass 391 including significant heating unit
    structural elements or composition whereby the heating unit means is
    particularly adapted for use in combination with an oven type enclosure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    538+,   for significant heating unit structure of a general nature under
    the class definition.


CLS 219/410
TXT Subject matter under subclass 409 comprising a single heating element
    having a plurality of sections which may be energized simultaneously to
    provide an element of one resistance value or selectively to provide
    variable resistance means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    539,    for heating element structure in general under the class definition
    and comprising plural sections.


CLS 219/411
TXT Subject matter under subclass 409 wherein the particular heating unit
    structure comprises infrared generating means particularly adapted for use
    with an oven type enclosure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    353,    for radiant heaters with particular heating unit structure.

    553,    for infrared generators in general and adapted for use with the
    heating devices under the class definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 519+ for
    drying with radiant or conducting heating and subclasses 201+ for houses,
    kilns and containers combined with heating means which may be of the
    infrared generating means.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 493.1+ for radiant energy generators and
    sources.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclass 1
    for thermal applicators which may utilize infrared sources, particularly
    subclasses 81+ for cabinets combined with such heat sources.


CLS 219/412
TXT Subject matter under subclass 391 including means whereby the current
    traversing the heating element or elements of the device is maintained
    between levels or is applied at a predetermined time or for predetermined
    intervals of time by either electromechanical or electrical means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    482+,   for power supply, voltage or current regulation or control means
    applicable to heating devices under the class definition.


CLS 219/413
TXT Subject matter under subclass 412 comprising means automatically responsive
    to the conditions prevailing within the heated area such as the degree of
    temperature at any given time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    490+,   below to complete the search for this subject matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 325+ for cooking
    apparatus with automatic control of the heater means.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 374 for heating vessels with
    automatic control.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for voltage and current regulators in general.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 13+ for electrical resistors whose
    resistance value is responsive to a condition, particularly subclasses 25+
    for resistors responsive to ambient temperature.


CLS 219/414
TXT Subject matter under subclass 391 including significant details of means
    whereby a circuit is completed between the heating unit or units of the
    device and an external current source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    507+,   below for heaters under the class definition combined with external
    circuit completion or disconnection means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses
    for electric switch structure.


CLS 219/415
TXT Subject matter under subclass 385 including a casing structure, usually
    cylindrical, extending vertically below a supporting plane or surface
    structure and having a vertical dimension greater than its horizontal
    dimension, and having an open end contiguous with an opening in the
    supporting surface whereby a vessel or container, adapted to contain
    material to be heated, may be inserted into the interior thereof and
    subjected to the influence of heat energy generated by an associated
    heating unit or units.  The heating unit generally is attached to the outer
    casing in a position to surround the inner container or to contact or
    transfer heat energy to the bottom of the container in the manner of a hot
    plate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    433+,   for vessel and stand combinations with heating devices in which the
    stand may completely enclose the vessel somewhat similar to a deep well
    cooker.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 359+ for heated
    receptacles modified to contain jars or cans of food, and subclasses 403+
    for heated vessels modified to contact a food material with a heated liquid
    contained therein.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 348 for devices comprising an open
    tank or boiler structure beneath which is located a heater and designed for
    cooking by steam, food products in an open tank or receptacle.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 292+ for sterilizing devices similar
    in structure to Class 219 deep well devices and sterilizing apparatus using
    steam.


CLS 219/416
TXT Subject matter under subclass 415 including means whereby the device may be
    adapted to function as a deep well type heater or a diverse type.  Some
    examples of diverse types to which the deep well type heater may be
    converted are hot plate (surface cooker) and broiler type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    454,    for hot plate heaters which may be converted to different mode of
    operation and subclass 521 for heating devices under the class definition
    combined with significant housing, casing or support means having holding
    means for material to be heated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 340 for convertible
    cooking devices.


CLS 219/417
TXT Subject matter under subclass 415 including at least two or more separate
    heating units.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    476+,   for plural separate heater devices in general.


CLS 219/418
TXT Subject matter under subclass 415 including means whereby at least one
    heating unit of the device may be adjusted in position relative to the well
    structure.


CLS 219/419
TXT Subject matter under subclass 415 including means whereby the current
    traversing the heating element, or elements of the device, is regulated or
    maintained between predetermined limits, or applied to or withdrawn from
    the device thereby assuring that the temperature of the heating space is
    maintained at a predetermined value or between predetermined limits.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    482+,   below for heating devices in general under the class definition
    combined with power supply, voltage or current regulation or current
    control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 331+ for cooking
    devices with automatic control of the heat or heater.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 374 for water heating vessels with
    automatic control.


CLS 219/420
TXT Subject matter under subclass 385 wherein the special container or
    enclosure structure includes:  (1) a vessel or melting pot of some very
    refractory substance, such as clay, graphite, porcelain, or a relatively
    infusible metal, used for melting solid substances which require a high
    degree of heat or (2) an enclosed structure comprised of a very highly
    refractory substance whereby a very high degree of heat may be transferred
    to a solid material contained therein.

    (1)     Note.  The patents in this and the indented subclasses are directed
    to subject matter similar in nature to the subject matter classified in
    Class 373, subclasses 109+, the difference being that herein significant
    details of the electric heating means are claimed with the furnace being
    either broadly claimed or recited only as an environment for a specific
    heating device.

            Class 219 is the generic class of electrical heating and generally
    takes only those patents which do not claim (or in some cases disclose)
    sufficient structure to be classified in a specific art class. In order to
    complete the search for the subject matter classified in this and indented
    subclasses, the appropriate subject matter in Class 13 should be considered.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 347 for melting pot or furnace
    structure adapted for the manufacture of glass.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 284 for devices primarily designed
    for the melting of glue and analogous substances (the pots are usually
    water or steam jacketed), subclass 343.5 for heaters especially adapted for
    melting substances by the application of heat to a receptacle, conduit or
    support for the material to be melted and other appropriate subclasses for
    significant furnace structure.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 335+ for metal casting apparatus
    including a ladle or crucible type metal receptacle.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 171+ and 220+ for furnaces
    adapted for the treatment of metals and metal bearing ores.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 156+ for a residual nonelectric furnace or one
    having a merely nominal electrical heater particularly adapted to heat
    material in a crucible; and subclasses 262+ for a residual crucible, per se.


CLS 219/421
TXT Subject matter under subclass 420 including container means comprising a
    vessel, usually constructed of a highly refractive material, peculiarly
    adapted for the heating of some material which constitutes a solid at room
    temperature and assumes a liquid state at some higher temperature. The
    patents to be found in this subclass for the most part specifically state
    in the claims that the device is for the purpose of melting some solid to a
    molten state; however where the claims do not so specifically state, but
    contain structure which would restrict the device to use as a melting pot
    and in which the ranges of temperatures disclosed or claimed are not such
    as to classify the patent elsewhere in some other art class the patent is
    classified here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    415+,   for deep well heaters.

    429+,   for vessel with stand with heater.

    438+,   for vessel with heater.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 347 for glass melting pot or furnace
    with fining or delivery zone.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 284 for glue pots and subclass 343.5
    for melting furnaces.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 200+ for melting furnaces.


CLS 219/422
TXT Subject matter under subclass 420 including at least two or more separate
    and distinct heating units.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    476+,   for a plurality of heating devices, under the class definition,
    especially subclass 478 for such a plurality combined with a unitary
    housing or support.


CLS 219/423
TXT Subject matter under subclass 420 including means whereby the heating unit
    or units are protected from damage, deterioration, or destruction either
    from causes arising from normal usage, such as burn out due to excessive
    current, or from external forces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    481,    for heating devices in general under the class definition combined
    with protective means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    electrical power systems or devices combined with safety or protection
    means.


CLS 219/424
TXT Subject matter under subclass 420 including resistance heating element
    means surrounding or permanently embedded within the walls of a crucible or
    furnace type container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    406,    for heating means combined with and surrounding an oven type
    container and subclass 407 for heating means embedded within or between the
    walls of an oven.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclass 119 for resistance
    heater type furnaces with the resistance heater in the walls.


CLS 219/425
TXT Subject matter under subclass 420 wherein the structure claimed includes
    means whereby the voltage or current applied to the heating unit or units
    of the apparatus can be varied at will, maintained between preselected
    limits or cut off completely. The controlling means may be either manual,
    automatic or a combination of the two.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    482+,   below for heating devices under the class definition combined with
    power supply, voltage or current regulation or current control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 135+ for electric
    furnaces combined with control systems.


CLS 219/426
TXT Subject matter under subclass 420 wherein the structural combination
    includes significant details of at least one heating unit in heat exchange
    relationship with a container of the crucible or furnace type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    538+,   for significant heating unit structure applicable to heating
    devices in general under the class definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 94+ for electrode
    holders and adjustment means for arc furnaces and subclasses 128+ for
    significant resistance elements and mountings for resistance furnaces.


CLS 219/427
TXT Subject matter under subclass 426 wherein the heating element of the device
    is comprised of at least a portion of the container walls or structure.

    (1)     Note.  The heating effect in this subclass is caused by the 2R loss
    in the resistive wall and should be differentiated from the arc type
    furnace where the furnace wall may constitute one electrode of the heating
    means or those resistance furnaces where the charge constitutes the
    electrical resistance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300,    for circulatory water heating devices where the liquid conveying
    conduit comprises the resistance element.

    436,    for heaters wherein the vessel wall may comprise the heating
    element.


CLS 219/428
TXT Subject matter under subclass 385 wherein the enclosure or container
    structure comprises a plurality of separate and distinct enclosures.  The
    enclosures may be separately supported, each with its own heating device,
    or may be collectively attached to a single unitary support with or without
    individual heating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    314,    for liquid heaters with plural containers or compartments.

    394,    for plural oven type heater apparatus.

    475,    for single heater in general associated with plural heat
    utilization means.

    476+,   for plural heating devices under the class definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 127+ for
    plurality of rotary containers with drying means, subclass 180 for plural
    stationary receptacles or tubes with agitator or conveyor means, subclass
    190 for plural elevator type and subclasses 209+ for plural housings, kilns
    or containers.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 20.1+ for a plurality of cooking
    ovens of the steam or hot water type.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclasses 113+ for plural retorts,
    subclasses 172+ for plural still type enclosures and subclass 242 for
    closures under the Class 202 definition.


CLS 219/429
TXT Subject matter under subclass 385 wherein the enclosure for the material to
    be heated comprises a hollow or concave utensil such as is normally used in
    a kitchen or dairy as, for example, for the heating of foodstuffs, boiling
    of water etc., and which is usually portable, combined with significant
    stand or support structure for the utensil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    415+,   for deep well heaters with utensil immersible therein.

    421,    for furnace or crucible type melting pot with heater.

    438+,   for vessel and heater, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 324+ for apparatus
    adapted to support food articles or materials while subjecting the food to
    a heat treatment; i.e., cooking.  See (2) Note under the Class 99, subclass
    324, definitions for the line between this class (219) and Class 99,
    subclasses 324+.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 373+ for vessels adapted for the
    heating of water.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclasses 105+ for retorts adapted for
    the holding of material to be distilled or decomposed by heat.


CLS 219/430
TXT Subject matter under subclass 429 including means whereby heat energy
    generated by an electric heating device is transmitted to the contents of a
    vessel via a conducting or other medium, the vessel to be heated not being
    in direct heat transfer contact with the generating means, or whereby the
    generated heat energy is stored for use at a future time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    439,    for vessels and heaters, per se, with heat storage or transfer
    means.

    540,    for significant heating unit structure under the class definition
    including heat storage or transfer means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 389, 401, 433, and 447
    for cooking apparatus combined with means to direct heat or heated vapors
    to various portions of the food.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 400 for heat accumulator structures.


CLS 219/431
TXT Subject matter under subclass 429 including means whereby a pressure;
    greater than normal atmospheric pressure, is generated or maintained within
    a vessel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280,    for fluids heaters in general.

    401,    for ovens having steam generating means.

    440,    for electrically heated vessels, per se, of the pressure
    maintaining type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 323.4+ for cereal
    puffing apparatus utilizing means for producing sudden changes in pressure,
    subclasses 324+ for pressure cooking apparatus, and subclasses 467+ for
    apparatus subjecting food to an electric field or current discharge.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, appropriate subclasses for high
    pressure steam generators.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 20 for steam or hot water heated
    ovens.

    220,    Receptacles, appropriate subclass for metallic receptacles to be
    used as pressure cookers.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 292+ for sterilizing devices similar
    in structure to Class 219 deep well devices and sterilizing apparatus using
    steam.


CLS 219/432
TXT Subject matter under subclass 429 including means whereby the vessel may be
    readily attached to or separated from the stand.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 279+ for infusors (e.g.
    coffee makers) and appropriate subclasses under subclass 324 for cooking
    devices, such as subclasses 372+ (waffle irons subclasses 385+ (toasters)
    or subclasses 403+ (boiler or deep fat fryer) for vessels which are adapted
    for cooking and which may be separable from the stand.


CLS 219/433
TXT Subject matter under subclass 429 comprising heating unit means unitary
    with or otherwise attached to the stand or base structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 221 for sterilization and
    pasteurization means utilizing an electric field, current or discharge,
    subclasses 279+ for infusors which may utilize electric heating means in
    the stand, subclasses 324+ for cooking apparatus with electric heating
    means, and subclasses 358 and 451 for subjecting food to an electric field
    or current discharge.


CLS 219/434
TXT Subject matter under subclass 433 including means whereby the heating unit,
    or units, may be adjusted relative to the vessel to be heated or to the
    stand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310+,   for vessels utilized or claimed strictly as water heaters,
    particularly subclasses 328 and 331 for heating units readily detachable,
    removable or replaceable.


CLS 219/435
TXT Subject matter under subclass 429 including significant details of means
    whereby the electrical circuit between the heating device and an external
    source of electrical current may be completed or interrupted either
    automatically or at the will of an operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    507+,   for heating devices in general under the class definition combined
    with significant current connection or disconnection means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 331+ for vessels
    adapted for cooking use combined with automatic control means for the heat
    or heater.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 215 for resistors, per se, combined
    with switch means.


CLS 219/436
TXT Apparatus under subclass 429 including significant details of structure
    whereby the heating unit or units are attached to or supported relative to
    the vessel which is to be heated.  Included are heated vessels wherein the
    walls, or a wall, of the vessel itself comprise the resistive heating unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    336,    for liquid heaters combined with particular mounting or attachment
    means for the heating unit or units.

    427,    for crucibles or furnaces wherein the container constitutes the
    heating element.

    536+,   for particular means for attaching heating unit means, of a general
    nature under the class definition, to a housing, casing or support.

    541,    for heating unit, per se, with terminal or connector means.


CLS 219/437
TXT Subject matter under subclass 436 wherein the heating unit is specifically
    claimed as immersible in the material to be heated within a vessel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    316+,   for liquid heaters of the tank type with immersible heating means.

    381,    for fluid heaters in general with immersible heating unit.

    523,    for heating devices under the class definition combined with a
    housing or casing which is immersible within a material or space to be
    heated.


CLS 219/438
TXT Subject matter under subclass 385 comprising only a vessel and associated
    heater.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    429+,   for vessel combined with significant stand structure.


CLS 219/439
TXT Subject matter under subclass 438 including means whereby the interior of
    the vessel or material contained therein is indirectly heated from an
    electrical source of heat energy by means of a heat transmission medium
    other than air, such as metallic or liquid heat transfer means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    430,    for similar subject matter combined with a vessel and stand.

    530,    for heating devices under the class definition combined with
    particular housing means including heat storage or transfer means.

    540,    for significant heating unit structure including heat storage or
    transfer means.


CLS 219/440
TXT Subject matter under subclass 438 including means whereby the internal
    pressure within the vessel is maintained between predetermined limits or
    whereby a pressure in excess of normal atmospheric pressure is generated as
    a result of the action of the heating unit or units.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    431,    for combined vessel and stand wherein the vessel is of the pressure
    maintaining type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, appropriate subclasses for high
    pressure steam generators.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 348 for steam generators and cookers.


CLS 219/441
TXT Subject matter under subclass 438 including means whereby the amount of
    current traversing the heating unit, or units, of the device is controlled
    between predetermined limits, current is completely cut off from the device
    or the temperature of the material to be heated is controlled between
    predetermined limits.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    482+,   for heating devices of a general nature under the class definition
    combined with power supply, voltage or current regulation or current
    control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 325+ for cooking
    apparatus combined with automatic temperature control means.


CLS 219/442
TXT Subject matter under subclass 441 including significant apparatus whereby
    the temperature control means may be adjusted between predetermined limits.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    494+,   for automatic heater control means in general of the thermally
    responsive type.


CLS 219/443
TXT Subject matter under subclass 385 comprising the combination of an
    electrical heating device, under the class definition, with an exposed
    horizontal planar heating surface for the support of some material to be
    heated.  The devices found in this subclass are generally of the type known
    in the art as hot plates or plate heaters. The planar heating surface need
    not be a separate plate or grid but may be constituted by the surface of
    the heating unit itself.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228+,   for hand tools with a planar heat applying surface.

    245+,   for soleplate pressure applying heaters (e.g. flat irons).

    392,    for oven type enclosure or supports combined with other, which
    other may be a hot plate type cooking top or griddle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 385+ for cooking
    apparatus of the broiler or grid type and subclasses 422+ for griddles.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 92+ for heated presses.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 318+, 322+ for electrical heated
    incubators with horizontal egg trays.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclasses 4+ for cooking surfaces combined with heating stove devices,
    subclass 14 for broiling attachments for cooking stoves, subclass 33 for
    steam tables, subclass 211 for stove lids and tops, and subclasses 332+ for
    stove shelves.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    380 for material holding platens or presses with means for applying
    electrical energy to the work.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 227+ for a residual heat generator with an
    associated work support.


CLS 219/444
TXT Subject matter under subclass 443 including means whereby the planar
    heating surface may be concealed or folded up within the confines of an
    oven or other storage space when not in use and adjusted to a horizontal
    exposed position when used.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 337 for oven structure
    combined with plural surface heating  elements adapted to be folded into
    the recessed oven walls when not in use.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 236 for cabinets combined
    with heating or heat exchange means.


CLS 219/445
TXT Subject matter under subclass 443 including at least two separate and
    independent devices under the subclass 447 definition, each of which
    devices is operable as a complete heating device independently of the other.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in which the separate heating devices may have a
    common housing, casing or support such as a stove top, will be classified
    here as long as the devices are in fact separate and operate independently
    of each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255,    282, 298, 320, 350, 376, and 382, for other heating devices under
    the class definition having plural heating units.

    476+,   for plural heating devices under the class definition.

    483,    for plural separate resistance elements with control means.

    525,    for a housing of the waffle iron type combined with plural heating
    units.

    539,    for significant heating unit structure under the class definition
    comprising plural resistive elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 374 for waffle irons with
    plural units and subclasses 389+ for toasters with plural heating units or
    elements.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 295 for a plurality of resistive
    elements, per se, connected by a jumper.


CLS 219/446
TXT Subject matter under subclass 445 including means whereby different ones of
    the plurality of heating units or elements are adapted to selectively
    activate either automatically or at the will of an operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    480,    for plural separate heating devices in general which may be
    selectively activated.

    486+,   for heater systems in general for selectively controlling plural
    resistance elements.


CLS 219/447
TXT Subject matter under subclass 445 including means whereby at least some of
    the plurality of heating units or elements may be removably detached from
    or replaced in the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    318,    for tank type water heaters with readily detachable or removable
    immersion heaters.

    336,    for liquid heaters in general with heating unit mounting or
    attachment means.

    351,    for radiant type fluid heaters with interchangeable or readily
    detachable heating units.

    403,    for ovens with retractable or detachable heating units.

    541,    for heater unit, per se, with terminal or connector means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, for cooking or sterilizing
    apparatus for the preparation or cooking of food which may have a plurality
    of heating units, particularly subclasses 288+ for infusors (e.g. coffee
    makers), subclasses 323.4+ for puffing means, and subclass 390 for toasters
    with adjustable heating means.


CLS 219/448
TXT Subject matter under subclass 443 including means whereby the current
    traversing the heating element, or elements, of the device is maintained at
    a value between predetermined limits, or for a predetermined time interval,
    or whereby the unit, or units, are energized or deenergized according to a
    predetermined condition or at a predetermined time either automatically or
    manually at the will of an operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    482+,   for heating devices in general under the class definition combined
    with power supply, voltage or current regulation or current control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 325+ for cooking
    devices combined with automatic control means.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems.


CLS 219/449
TXT Subject matter under subclass 448 including means responsive to the thermal
    condition of the heating element or of the material to be heated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    494+,   for heating devices under the class definition combined with
    thermally responsive control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 236 for
    thermally responsive automatic impedance control systems.


CLS 219/450
TXT Subject matter under subclass 449 wherein the thermally responsive control
    structure includes a sensing means in direct thermal contact with the
    material to be heated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    516,    for heater current switching means in general controlled by a
    thermally responsive means insertable or in direct contact in the material
    being heated.


CLS 219/451
TXT Subject matter under subclass 443 including means whereby an electrical
    connection may be made between the heating element, or elements and an
    external source of electrical energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    507+,   for heating devices under the class definition combined with
    external circuit connection or disconnection means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclass for
    the structure of circuit makers and breakers.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 112+
    for switching systems in general.


CLS 219/452
TXT Subject matter under subclass 451 wherein the significant connector
    structure includes means whereby the heating element or elements are
    energized or deenergized either wholly or in varying degree automatically
    in response to some condition of the heating unit or the presence or
    absence of material or an object to be heated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    509+,   for heating devices under the class definition combined with
    automatically actuated switching means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses
    for automatic switch structure.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 116+
    for condition responsive switching systems.


CLS 219/453
TXT Subject matter under subclass 451 including means whereby the electrical
    condition at any given instant of the heating circuit, or the degree of
    heat present in the heating device may be ascertained, either visually,
    orally or otherwise.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248,    for electric flat irons with operating condition indicator.

    266,    for resistive type igniter with indicating means.

    487,    for selectively controlled plural resistance elements with
    indicator.

    506,    for automatically controlled heaters in general with signal or
    indicator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 167 for
    switches combined with indicating means.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 635+ for electrical
    apparatus condition responsive signalling devices.


CLS 219/454
TXT Subject matter under subclass 443 including means whereby a heating device
    comprising the combination of a heating unit and an exposed planar heating
    surface may be utilized in a plurality of ways and in different
    environment.  One example of apparatus classified here consists of a heater
    device primarily designed for utilization as a hot-plate cooker which may
    be adapted to operate as a heating element for an oven.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231,    for convertible heated tip hand tool.

    249,    for convertible electric flat iron.

    340,    for convertible fluid heaters of the radiant type.

    361,    for convertible fluid heaters of the convection type.

    393,    for an oven that may perform plural diverse functions.

    416,    for a convertible deep well type heating device.

    472+,   for plural function or convertible heaters in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 340 for cooking
    apparatus, which by means of a modification of its adjustment, assembly, or
    position, is adapted for different types of cooking or cooking and food
    heating operation and subclass 376 for apparatus connectable to either a
    waffle iron or a sandwich grill.


CLS 219/455
TXT Subject matter under subclass 443 including means whereby the heating unit
    is adapted to function as the support for material to be heated and whereby
    heat energy originating therein is transferred to the heated material
    directly by conduction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    457,    for planar surface heaters wherein the heater unit is embedded in
    the surface.

    459,    for planar surface heaters wherein the heating unit comprises a
    housing, casing or support therefor combined with the planar surface.

    521,    for heater unit structure combined with housing, casing or support
    therefor which is capable of supporting the material to be heated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 422+ for griddles,
    adapted to support a material, to be treated, directly.


CLS 219/456
TXT Subject matter under subclass 455 including means whereby the heating unit
    is adapted to adjust to the shape or contour of the material supported
    thereon or is adjustable as to the relative distance separating the heated
    material from the unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    528+,   for electric heating units with flexible or resilient housing or
    casing means which are conformable to the shape of an object to be heated.

    535,    for heater units with housing or casing formed to fit object to be
    heated.

    549,    for heater unit with core or sheath of flexible material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 426+ for cooking
    devices adapted for conforming to the shape or contour of food to be heated.


CLS 219/457
TXT Subject matter under subclass 443 including a planar heating surface
    combined with a heating unit, the heating unit being cast into, embedded
    within or otherwise secured to the planar heating surface in such a manner
    to form a rigid unitary whole.

    (1)     Note.  The devices to be found here generally comprise the
    so-called surface heating unit means where the heating element is embedded
    within a heat conducting surface upon which the vessel or other material to
    be heated is directly supported during the heating operation and in which
    no additional housing or casing for the heating unit is provided.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    455+,   for planar surface heaters wherein the heater unit supports the
    material heated.

    459,    for planar surface heaters wherein the heater unit housing or
    casing supports the material heated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 226+ for electrical resistors, per
    se, which are encased, embedded or housed in a metallic or other sheath
    means.


CLS 219/458
TXT Subject matter under subclass 443 comprising a combination of a heating
    unit comprising a core and element with means whereby the unit is enclosed
    and supported relative to a heating surface or wherein the heating unit is
    housed or enclosed in such a manner that the whole forms a unitary
    structure adapted to be attached to a planar surface. The apparatus
    classified here may include means whereby the unit is supported relative to
    an exterior plane surface; such as a table, providing, that the additional
    means does not prevent the device from acting as an independent unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    520+,   for heating units, per se, under the class definition combined with
    housing, casing or support means therefor.


CLS 219/459
TXT Subject matter under subclass 458 wherein a planar material support surface
    performs a double function; both as a heating surface for an object or
    material to be heated and as a component of the housing or support for the
    heating unit or units.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    455+,   for planar surface heaters wherein the heater unit supports the
    material heated.

    457,    for planar surface with heating unit embedded therein.

    521,    for a unit of heating device under the class definition combined
    with a housing which acts as a support for material to be heated.


CLS 219/460
TXT Subject matter under subclass 458 wherein the significant housing or
    support structure includes means whereby the different elements of the
    housing or the heating unit and housing are thermally insulated one from
    another and from the exterior atmosphere or whereby the casing structure
    may be ventilated by the admission or circulation of air therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    531,    below for heating unit structure under the class definition
    combined with housing, casing or support means including thermal insulation
    or cooling means.

    538+,   for significant heating unit structure including electrical
    insulation means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 21 for ovens with ventilating means.


CLS 219/461
TXT Subject matter under subclass 458 including means whereby at least a
    substantial portion of the heat energy generated by a heating unit, or
    units, is directed to the planar surface via reflection or deflection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    347+,   for fluid heaters of the radiant type with heat energy reflecting
    means.

    405,    for ovens with heat energy reflecting or directing means.

    538+,   for significant heating unit structure under the class definition
    combined with deflector or focusing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 274 for domestic ovens portable in
    nature and having an open side and adapted to receive radiated heat from an
    open fire or stove.


CLS 219/462
TXT Subject matter under subclass 458 including means whereby heat energy
    originating in the heating unit, or units, is stored for subsequent use via
    the material support or is transmitted to the material support other than
    by direct conduction.  The storage transfer or exchange means may consist
    of metallic or other solid matter, liquid or a vapor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    530,    for heating units under the class definition combined with a
    housing, casing or support means including heat storage or transfer means.

    540,    for heating unit structure in general with heat storage or transfer
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 447 for cooking apparatus
    combined with heat distributing means.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 400 for heat accumulator structure.


CLS 219/463
TXT Subject matter under subclass 458 wherein the significant housing, casing
    or support structure includes means whereby the heating unit, or units, is
    attached to or secured within the housing or support means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    536+,   below for significant heating unit structure under the class
    definition combined with a housing, casing or support therefor provided
    with a particular mounting, attaching or securing means.


CLS 219/464
TXT Apparatus under subclass 443 including significant details of the physical
    structure or the chemical, metallurgical or other composition of the planar
    material support means (e.g., aluminum, chromium, etc.).


CLS 219/465
TXT Apparatus under subclass 443 including significant details of the heating
    unit or units.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    538+,   for significant structure of the heating unit, per se.


CLS 219/466
TXT Subject matter under subclass 465 wherein the significant heating unit
    structure includes a plurality of resistive heating units.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    539,    for heating units in general under the class definition and
    comprising plural resistive elements.

    552,    for the heating elements, per se, under the class definition and
    which may comprise plural sections.


CLS 219/467
TXT Subject matter under subclass 465 wherein the significant heating unit
    structure includes means whereby the resistive heating element, or elements
    of the unit are attached to or supported by a core or sheath means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    542,    for heating unit structure in general under the class definition
    and comprising particular or significant means whereby the heating element
    or elements are attached to the core or sheath means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 226+ for resistive elements, per
    se, which are incased, embedded or housed within a sheath or casing,
    subclasses 306+ for resistive element printed or coated upon a base member
    and subclasses 315+ for resistive elements with mounting or supporting
    means.


CLS 219/468
TXT Subject matter under subclass 465 wherein the significant heating unit
    structure includes at least one resistance element peculiarly adapted for
    heating use only and of particular material or construction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    354,    for fluid heaters of the radiant type with heating unit structure
    of particular construction or composition.

    548,    for heating element with core, sheath, or support means of
    particular construction or material.

    553,    for heating elements, per se, under the class definition and of
    particular construction or material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, appropriate subclasses for resistive
    elements, per se, of significant structure or material.


CLS 219/469
TXT Apparatus under subclass 385 comprising the combination of at least one
    heating device, under the class definition, combined with  cylindrical or
    roller means whereby a material may be heated while passing over or around
    the roller means.

    (1)     Note.  Class 219 is the generic class for heating rolls combined
    with electric heating devices and whose function is strictly that of
    heating a material passing over or around the heated roll surface.  Other
    heated rolls forming an element of a larger combination or machine
    specifically classified elsewhere in an other art class will be found in
    the other art class; for instance, heated rolls forming an element of a
    heating or drying assembly will be found in Class 34, Drying and Gas or
    Vapor Contact With Solids, and heated rolls utilized as ironing or pressing
    means are found in Class 38, Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244,    for heaters combined with a rotary pressure application means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclasses 44+ for roller presser
    smoothing machines, and subclasses 100+ for roller pressers, per se.  See
    also (1) Note, above.


CLS 219/470
TXT Subject matter under subclass 469 including at least a plurality of heating
    units.  The heating units may be contained in or associated with a single
    roller or may be distributed among a plurality of rollers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    476+,   for plural separate and distinct heating devices under the class
    definition in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 113+ for
    plural rolls in which the material to be dried is external of the roll
    structure.

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclasses 49+ for smoothing
    apparatus comprising plural cooperating rolls and subclass 101 for plural
    roller presser, per se.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 200+ for metal rolling apparatus with
    means for heating or cooling the rolls.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 60 for coating apparatus utilizing
    heated roll means for heat exchange and which may include plural rolls or
    plural heater.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 89+ for rotary drum heating surfaces.


CLS 219/471
TXT Subject matter under subclass 469 including significant details of means
    whereby an electrical connection is completed between the heating element,
    or elements, of the device and an external source of current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    507+,   for heating devices of general utility under the class definition
    with significant external circuit completion or disconnection means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses
    for the structure of electric switches.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, appropriate
    subclasses especially subclasses 112+ for switching systems.


CLS 219/472
TXT Subject matter under subclass 200 including a single heating device with
    means whereby the structure which comprises the heating device, as a whole
    or in part, is adapted to perform both a heating function and a nonheating
    function, to perform plural separate heating functions or to perform the
    heating function in a different mode. Some examples of the patents
    classified here are; heater-fan, heater-light, convection type radiant type
    or radiant-hot plate, to name a few.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231,    for convertible heated type hand held instruments.

    249,    for convertible soleplate type heater devices.

    285,    for fluid heaters operating in different modes.

    350,    for convertible radiant heaters.

    371,    for convertible convection heaters.

    421,    for heaters for deep well type enclosures adapted for conversion to
    hot plates.

    458,    for convertible hot plates.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 340 for convertible
    cooking devices and subclass 357 for a cooking device combined with means
    performing another function.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 58+ for apparatus adapted for both
    heating and cooling and subclass 137 for convertible heat exchange devices.


CLS 219/473
TXT Subject matter under subclass 472 including means whereby the heating
    device structure may be caused to function as a nonheating device.  An
    example of the structure to be found in this subclass is a convection
    heater convertible to a fan.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 137 for convertible heating and/or cooling
    devices.


CLS 219/474
TXT Subject matter under subclass 472 including means whereby the heating
    device may be converted to or caused to function as a diverse type
    electrical heating device. One example of the structure classifiable here
    is a heating device which functions in one mode as a hot plate type heater
    and alternately as a convection heater.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    279,    for an electric heater combined with a nonelectric heater.


CLS 219/475
TXT Subject matter under subclass 200 including a single heating device of the
    kind falling within the subclass definition with means whereby the heat
    energy generated in the device may be applied to more than a single space
    or object.  For example a range type device having both hot plate type and
    oven type article support means jointly heated by a single heating unit is
    exemplary of the type devices classified herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    392,    394 and 395, for heating devices under the class definition with
    plural ovens, single oven with plural compartments or for ovens combined
    with other heat utilization means.

    428,    for heaters in general comprising plural enclosures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 339 for cooking apparatus
    comprising diverse type cookers.


CLS 219/476
TXT Subject matter under subclass 200 including or comprising at least two or
    more separate and distinct heating devices under the class definition, each
    of which comprises a complete heating device capable of performing its
    function if utilized alone and not specifically provided for above in this
    class or classifiable elsewhere in another art class.

    (1)     Note.  The heating devices may all be of the same type or each of a
    different type provided that each must fall within the class definition.
    For a heating device of the Class 219 type combined with diverse art type
    nonelectric (e.g. gas) heating means see subclass 283.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282,    for liquid heaters in general with plural separate heaters.

    314,    for plural interconnected container liquid heaters.

    394,    for plural ovens.

    428,    for plural separately heated enclosures.

    474,    for electric heater of one type convertible to another type, or
    simultaneously operable as at least two different types of heater.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 339 for cooking devices
    of diverse type which may utilize plural heaters.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, appropriate subclass 4 for cooking stove
    combined with heating means and subclasses 99+ for hot air furnaces
    combined with cooking stove, etc.


CLS 219/477
TXT Subject matter under subclass 476 wherein the plurality of separate heating
    devices each depends, for its activation and current supply, upon a common
    source of power or wherein the current traversing each of the devices is
    regulated or controlled by a common means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    483+,   for a plurality of heater resistance elements under the class
    definition deriving power from, or being controlled by, a single means and
    where the power supply or control means is claimed specifically and in
    detail with the resistance elements broadly claimed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 11+
    for power supply or control system in general for supplying plural loads.


CLS 219/478
TXT Subject matter under subclass 476 wherein the plural heating devices share
    a common housing, casing or support means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    537,    for plural heating units combined with a single housing, casing or
    support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 209 for
    drying apparatus comprising houses, kilns or containers combined with
    plural treating units or compartments.


CLS 219/479
TXT Subject matter under subclass 476 wherein the plural heating devices
    comprise two or more diverse types as set out above in this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    283,    for liquid heater and associated nonliquid heater.

    474,    for plural function or convertible heaters which may comprise
    plural diverse electric heating devices.

    484,    for power supply, voltage or current regulation or current control
    means controlling diverse heating elements under the class definition and
    each having different resistance characteristics.


CLS 219/480
TXT Subject matter under subclass 476 including means whereby the separate
    heating devices may be selectively activated either automatically or at the
    will of an operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    486+,   for means for selectively or sequentially controlling plural heater
    resistance elements in general.


CLS 219/481
TXT Subject matter under subclass 200 including structural details of heating
    devices under the class definition combined with protective means whereby
    the heating unit is prevented from overheating or is protected against
    damage due to external sources and wherein the heating device structure is
    not classifiable elsewhere above in the Class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322,    for liquid heaters with protective means for the heater.

    363,    for fluid heaters of the convection type with protective means for
    the heater.

    423,    for crucible or furnace type apparatus with protective means for
    the heating unit or switch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 326+
    for systems having self-protective, safety or limit control features and
    subclasses 116+ for condition responsive switches.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 11+ for discharge
    devices combined with temperature modification means.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, appropriate subclasses for electrical
    resistors, per se, with cooling or other protective means.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    power systems with safety and protection devices.


CLS 219/482
TXT Devices under subclass 200 combined with an external source of power or
    current and wherein the significantly recited subject matter includes
    structure whereby the heating current applied to the heating device or
    devices from the external source is controlled or regulated as to level or
    amplitude, length of time applied, sequence of time applied, voltage level
    at which applied or in proper phase.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108+,   130.1+, 240+, 250+, 262+, 272, 327, 358, 379, 419, 448+, and 650,
    for other voltage or current regulation or control means applied to special
    heating devices under the class definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 325+ for electric
    cooking devices with automatic control means.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 200+ for automatic control systems
    combined with heating and cooling systems.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 2+ for automatic control devices for
    heating systems.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, appropriate
    subclasses, especially subclasses 17 for transformer connections, 31+ for
    plural load circuits with control or current or power, 52+ for plural
    supply circuits or sources with load current control, 64+ for emergency or
    stand-by source and 149+ for miscellaneous systems.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, appropriate subclasses for
    the structure of electrical generators.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    dynamoelectric or nonmagnetic single generator systems.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for current, voltage or phase control systems in general.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 68+ for electrical resistors, per
    se, with mechanical means for varying the resistance value.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ for
    electric circuits for relays and electromagnets.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    current, phase or frequency conversion systems.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process, appropriate subclasses for battery construction.


CLS 219/483
TXT Subject matter under subclass 482 including means whereby a plurality of
    separate and distinct resistance heating units or elements, within or
    forming a subcombination of a single heating device, may be activated
    either as a unit or selectively, or whereby the current applied to each
    selectively or to the whole may be regulated between predetermined values
    or for predetermined intervals of time.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 11+
    for systems of electrical supply to plural loads, especially subclasses 31+
    and 38+ for control of current or power and for selectively connected or
    controlled loads, respectively.


CLS 219/484
TXT Subject matter under subclass 483 wherein the plural separate resistance
    elements have diverse resistance characteristics or values.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    539,    for significant heating unit structure under the class definition
    and comprising plural distinct resistive heating elements, and subclass 552
    for heating elements, per se, consisting of plural sections.


CLS 219/485
TXT Subject matter under subclass 483 including means whereby the total current
    traversing the plurality of resistance elements at any time is maintained
    at or below a predetermined value or whereby the total power consumed by
    the plurality of heating elements is maintained constant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 33+
    for load current control systems for maintaining a constant load or current
    in plural loads.


CLS 219/486
TXT Subject matter under subclass 483 comprising means whereby the plurality of
    resistance heating elements may be selectively activated alternately one at
    a time, in a predetermined group of two or more, or consecutively one after
    the other in an order determined by the internal conditions prevailing in
    the heating device of which they form a part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401,    for ovens with plural selectively energizable heater units.

    446,    for planar surface heaters with selectively activated heating units.

    480,    for plural separate heating devices selectively activated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 29
    and 38+ for systems involving selectively connected or controlled load
    circuits.


CLS 219/487
TXT Subject matter under subclass 486 including means whereby some condition of
    the heating device is indicated either visually or audibly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for pressure type electric metal welding systems with indicator.

    248,    for electric flatiron type devices with condition responsive
    indicator.

    269,    for resistive element igniters with indicating means.

    453,    for planar surface heater with circuit condition indicator.

    506,    for automatically regulated heater systems in general with signal
    or indication means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 167 for switch
    condition indicators.

    337,    Electricity: Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    appropriate subclasses for thermally actuated switches with indicator means.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+ for electrical signals
    automatically responsive to a condition particularly subclass 523 for
    signalling means automatically responsive to the sequence of operation of
    plural devices.


CLS 219/488
TXT Subject matter under subclass 482 including means whereby a supply voltage
    of a first value may be maintained within given limits, may be converted to
    a second different value or means whereby a heating device adapted to
    operate on an alternating voltage may be adapted to operate on a D.C.
    voltage or vice versa.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    490+,   for automatic voltage or current regulating means for electric
    heaters in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for current or voltage limiters.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, appropriate subclass for
    electric power, voltage, phase or frequency conversion systems.


CLS 219/489
TXT Subject matter under subclass 482 consisting of at least one means
    operative by hand at the will of an operator and one or more additional
    self-acting means operative upon the occurrance of a predetermined
    condition or set of conditions within the heating device or heated material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    234-298 for output responsive regulators.


CLS 219/490
TXT Subject matter under subclass 482 consisting of self-actuating means
    responsive to one or more predetermined conditions or states occurring
    either within the heating device, the heated material or both.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for pressure welding systems controlled in response to current,
    voltage or temperature.

    509+,   for automatically operated heater connection and disconnection
    means.

    608     and 650, for induction heater systems with automatic control.

    702+,   for microwave heating system with automatic control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 325+ for automatic
    control means for cooking devices.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 200+ for automatic control means for
    heating or cooling devices.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 2+ for systems with automatic control
    means.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, appropriate
    subclasses, especially subclasses 31+ and 52+.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    234-298 for output responsive regulators.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 74+ for current
    conversion systems with automatic voltage or current magnitude control.


CLS 219/491
TXT Subject matter under subclass 490 wherein the automatic control structure
    includes at least two or more means each of which operates independently
    and on a different principle.  An example of the devices to be found in
    this subclass comprises mechanical timing means and thermally responsive
    thermostatic means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 328 and 333 for
    automatic control of heating and cooking apparatus by time and heat
    responsive means.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 14 for resistors in general
    responsive to plural conditions.


CLS 219/492
TXT Subject matter under subclass 490 comprising means whereby the heating
    element or elements of a heating device may be energized at a particular
    predetermined time, or for a given interval or time or may be cyclically
    energized and deenergized and at regular predetermined intervals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    for synchronously switched resistance welding systems.

    334,    for liquid heaters with timing means for power supply or current
    control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 327+ and 332+ for
    automatic control means for cooking devices comprising timing means.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems involving make
    or break at a predetermined time in a cycle, and subclasses 141+ for
    electrically timed switching systems.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 195+ for
    relay circuits with time delay means.


CLS 219/493
TXT Subject matter under subclass 492 wherein the timing or cycling structure
    comprises electro-mechanical means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 90 for the
    structure of periodically operated electromagnetic switches.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 97 for
    intermittent regulatory interruption of a system in response to a condition
    and subclass 132 for repetitive make and break switching systems.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    201-204 for control systems utilizing dynamoelectric machines.


CLS 219/494
TXT Subject matter under subclass 490 including at least one means which is
    responsive to the temperature of the heated material, the heating element
    itself, or the surrounding atmosphere, by means of which the amount of
    current traversing the heating element or elements is controlled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for resistance type metal welding control systems responsive to
    temperature.

    241,    for heated tip hand tools with thermal control means.

    251+,   for electric flatiron type heaters with thermally controlled
    current supply.

    328+,   for liquid heaters with thermally controlled current supply.

    413,    for ovens with current supply responsive to condition of heating
    area.

    449+,   for planar surface heaters with thermally controlled current supply.

    505,    for regulators utilizing nonlinear or negative temperature
    coefficient resistance means.

    510+,   for heaters in general with thermally controlled switching means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 328, 329 and 333 for
    automatic control means for cooking devices employing thermal responsive
    means.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 281+; 287+ for heat exchange systems with
    temperature responsive automatic control devices.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems.


CLS 219/495
TXT Subject matter under subclass 494 compromising or including magnetic
    apparatus which is adapted to change its permeability, (magnetic
    characteristics with change of temperature).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 306 for the
    structure of pyromagnetic devices in general.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 146 for electromagnetically actuated switches
    utilizing thermomagnetic devices.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 161+ for
    electromagnetic control circuits including a thermal device, and subclass
    211 includes control circuits for thermal relays.


CLS 219/496
TXT Subject matter under subclass 490 including means responsive to the
    pressure within the space or material heated or within the control means
    itself, due to a change of condition therein, whereby the current supplied
    to the heating device is regulated, or controlled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    287,    for liquid in circuit heaters with resistance path automatically
    responsive to pressure.

    332,    for liquid heaters with current control means responsive to
    hydrostatic or vapor pressure.

    333,    for liquid heaters with current control responsive to liquid level.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 281+ for pressure responsive control
    devices for heating or cooling systems.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 81+ for fluid
    pressure operated electric switch structures.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 118
    for fluid pressure controlled switching system and subclass 144 for fluid
    pressure actuated switches.


CLS 219/497
TXT Subject matter under subclass 490 including means for deriving at least one
    first voltage, the magnitude of which is dependent upon some variable of a
    heated space or material, means for producing a second reference voltage
    representative of a desirable condition, means for comparing or combining
    the two derived voltages and further means whereby the condition of a
    heating device is adjusted by application of the voltage resulting from the
    combination or comparison of the two or more derived voltages.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    494+,   for heaters wherein the voltage or current combined or compared
    with the standard is derived from the temperature of the heater.

    496,    for heater control systems wherein the variable voltage or current
    compared or combined with the standard is derived from changes in pressure
    of the heated medium or structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    234-298, which regulators or systems may be controlled by comparing a
    change in the electrical condition controlled with some standard or pre-set
    voltage or current.


CLS 219/498
TXT Subject matter under subclass 497 including follow-up or servo-motor means
    whereby the current applied to the heating device is responsive to a
    reference voltage as derived by the means of that subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, particularly
    subclasses 74+ for electric motor servo systems utilizing automatic
    temperature or humidity control systems.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 609+ for "Reset"
    position servomechanisms which may be used for temperature control, and
    subclass 641, for position servomechanisms in which the error detector is a
    temperature measuring instrument.


CLS 219/499
TXT Subject matter under subclass 497 wherein the voltage or current measuring
    or comparison structure includes or comprises resistance or capacitance
    bridge means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 663+, position
    servo-mechanisms utilizing potentiometers as position measuring
    instruments, the potentiometers may take the form of a wheatstone bridge
    circuitry.


CLS 219/500
TXT Subject matter under subclass 490 wherein the condition responsive
    regulation means claimed includes electron or glow discharge tube means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    501,    for condition responsive regulators utilizing semiconductor means
    (e.g., transistors).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 149+ for
    gaseous space discharge devices responsive to or controlled by radiant
    energy.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 291 for
    automatic voltage control systems with electric space discharge devices.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ for
    control circuits for electromagnets and relays including tube means.


CLS 219/501
TXT Subject matter under subclass 490 wherein the regulating or control
    structure includes devices comprised of semiconductor material such as
    transistors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500,    for heater regulators utilizing electron tubes or gaseous discharge
    tubes.

    505,    for heater regulator utilizing nonlinear or negative temperature
    coefficient resistance resistors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 53-56, 108, 414, and 467-470 for such as temperature responsive
    devices, per se.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous circuits utilizing a
    transistor.


CLS 219/502
TXT Subject matter under subclass 490 wherein the automatic regulating or
    control means includes photoelectric or other light responsive means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 336.1 for methods and apparatus involving
    the detection of invisible radiant energy by electric signalling means and
    subclass 472.1 for methods and apparatus to detect invisible radiant energy
    nonelectric signalling devices and subclasses 200+ for photo-cell circuits
    and apparatus in general.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 149+ for
    gas tube or electric lamp systems controlled by radiant energy.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 221 for
    automatic control systems comprising photosensitive controlled electron
    tube systems.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 15+ for resistance devices whose
    resistance value is responsive to light means.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 173+ for
    electric circuits for relays and electromagnetic utilizing photo-sensitive
    devices.


CLS 219/503
TXT Subject matter under subclass 490 including apparatus whereby the power
    supply for, or the voltage or current applied to a heating device is
    controlled through the action of inductive reactance of an inductive
    reactor means (e.g., saturable reactor).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112+,   for resistance welder current supply systems with stored energy
    discharge means, (e.g., inductor).

    116,    for resistance welder current supply systems with transformer.

    495,    for heaters in general with thermomagnetic means to automatically
    regulate the power, voltage or current in response to temperature.

    514,    for heaters in general with thermally controlled solenoid in the
    current supply switching circuit.

    519,    for heaters in general with automatically controlled
    electromagnetic relay means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 401+
    for nonlinear (saturable) reactor systems.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 209+ for work magnet and electromagnetic
    structure, per se.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for the structure self
    and/or mutual inductive devices in general.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ for
    control circuits for electromagnetic devices.


CLS 219/504
TXT Subject matter under subclass 490 wherein the automatic regulating or
    control means includes a resistance device, or devices, whose resistance
    value or characteristics change or are changed in some way with a change in
    the condition of the heater or its environment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    483+,   for heaters wherein the current or voltage is controlled by
    controlling or regulating plural distinct resistance heating elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 13+ for resistors, per se, whose
    resistive value is responsive to a condition.


CLS 219/505
TXT Subject matter under subclass 504 wherein the structure includes a
    nonlinear or negative temperature coefficient of resistance resistor device
    or devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    494,    for heater control systems utilizing thermally responsive
    resistors, for example.

    501,    for heater control systems utilizing semiconductor means, e.g.,
    transistor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 22+ for current or voltage
    responsive thermistors, per se, and subclasses 25+ for ambient temperature
    responsive or adjustable resistors.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 161+ for
    control circuits for electromagnetic devices including a thermal device,
    e.g., thermistors.


CLS 219/506
TXT Subject matter under subclass 490 including a signaling or indicating means
    whereby the electrical condition of the power supply and voltage or current
    regulation or control apparatus or the amount of current traversing the
    controlled heating device is readily discernable and which is peculiarly
    adapted for use with heating devices under the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109,    for resistance welder systems with indicator.

    248,    for electric flatiron type devices with condition indicator.

    269,    for resistive igniters with indicating means.

    453,    for planar surface heaters with circuit condition indicator.

    487,    for selectively or sequentially controlled resistance heating
    elements with indicator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 342+ for cooking
    apparatus with signal, indicator or testing means.

    116,    Signal and Indicators, subclasses 216+ for thermal indicators or
    signals.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 504.2 for safety devices
    comprising alarms or indicators.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 388 for water heating vessels
    combined with signal or indicator means.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 94 for
    thermostatic control devices with indicators or alarm means.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 76.11+ for devices
    for measuring, testing or sensing electricity, per se.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 635+ for electrical
    apparatus condition responsive, signals and alarms in general.


CLS 219/507
TXT Devices under subclass 200 including significant structure whereby the
    heating unit or units of a heating device, are adapted to be connected to
    or disconnected from an external source of electrical energy.

    (1)     Note.  For heating devices, such as are classified in this class,
    combined with means for controlling the level or amplitude of heating
    current or voltage between certain limits or for a certain interval of time
    the search should be in subclasses 482+ above, or in the particular
    subclass relating to specific type heating devices elsewhere in the class.

    (2)     Note.  Heating devices directed to particular types of heaters set
    out elsewhere in the schedule and including significant circuit connection
    or disconnection means are listed under "Search This Class, Subclass" below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111,    for resistance welding systems with repeat or interrupted current
    systems.

    115,    for resistance welders with means for synchronously switching the
    current on or off.

    240+,   for hand held heating tools with current switching means.

    250+,   for electric flatiron type devices with current control means.

    256+,   for electric flatiron type devices with current switching means.

    262+,   for resistive element igniters with switching means.

    272,    for vaporizer with external circuit switching means.

    295,    for liquid in circuit heaters with switching means.

    308+,   for forced circulation liquid heaters with switching means.

    327+,   for liquid heaters with current control means.

    337,    for liquid heaters with external circuit switching means.

    356,    for radiant type fluid heaters with external circuit switching
    means.

    364,    for convection type fluid heaters with external circuit switching
    means.

    379,    for fluid heater with external circuit switching means.

    419,    for deepwell heaters with external circuit switching means.

    451+,   for planar surface heaters with external circuit switching means.

    482+,   see (1) Note, above.

    541,    for heater unit structure with    connector means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 112+
    for switching systems in general.

    337,    Electricity: Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    appropriate subclasses.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, for subclass 215 for resistance devices, per
    se, combined with a switch.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ for
    control circuits for electromagnetic devices.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclass for electrical quid
    detachable connector structure.


CLS 219/508
TXT Subject matter under subclass 507 comprising two or more circuit connecting
    and disconnecting means.  The claimed means may consist of a single main
    switch relay, for example, which in turn is controlled by the condition of
    a plurality of secondary means which operate in sequence periodically or
    selectively.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    398,    for ovens with plural heating units which are selectively
    energizable.

    446,    for planar type surface heaters with plural selectively controlled
    heater units.

    480,    for plural separate heating devices which may be selectively
    activated.

    486+,   for selectively controlled system of plural resistance elements in
    general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 115
    for switching systems utilizing plural selectively activated switches.


CLS 219/509
TXT Subject matter under subclass 507 wherein the current connection or
    disconnection function is automatically accomplished as a result of some
    existing condition within the heated medium or of the heating element
    itself.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257,    for automatically controlled electric flatiron type device.

    263+,   for automatically controlled resistive type igniter.

    309,    for forced flow liquid heater with flow responsive switching means.

    332,    for liquid heater with vapor pressure responsive current control
    means.

    333,    for liquid heater with liquid level current control means.

    452,    for planar surface heater with automatically operated switch means.

    490+,   for heaters in general with automatic current regulating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 116+
    for condition responsive switching systems.


CLS 219/510
TXT Subject matter under subclass 509 wherein the current connection or
    disconnection means is responsive to the internal temperature of the
    heating element, that prevailing within the heated medium or both.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241,    for hand held heated tool with thermal control means.

    251+,   for electric flatiron type device with thermally responsive control
    means.

    264+,   for resistive element igniter with thermally controlled switch.

    328+,   for liquid heaters with current control means responsive to liquid
    temperature.

    413,    for oven with current control responsive to oven condition (e.g.,
    temperature).

    494+,   for heaters in general with current regulator responsive to thermal
    condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 117
    for heat responsive electric switch systems.

    337,    Electricity: Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclass 298+ for the structure of thermally actuated switches.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 161+ for
    relay control circuits including a thermal device.


CLS 219/511
TXT Subject matter under subclass 510 including means responsive to the
    temperature of the heated medium with auxiliary means whereby additional
    heat is provided for at least one of the temperature responsive means. The
    auxiliary heating means does not constitute a part of the primary heat
    source of the heating device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209,    above, for heating devices under the class definition combined with
    other electrical devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclasses 14+ for thermal current actuated switches with external heater
    means.


CLS 219/512
TXT Subject matter under subclass 510 wherein the particular thermally
    responsive current connection or disconnection structure comprises or
    includes linearly expansible metal bar means whereby the expansion or
    contraction of the bar initiates or controls the opening or closing of a
    circuit to the heating element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    253,    for electric flatiron type device with thermally responsive
    expansible bar current control means.

    265,    for resistive element igniter with bimetallic thermally responsive
    current switching means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 363+ for expanding solid type
    thermometers.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 96 for flue
    attached thermostats of the expanding solid type, and subclasses 101+ for
    other expanding solid type.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclasses 333+ and 382+ for thermally actuated switches employing
    expansible solid actuating means.


CLS 219/513
TXT Subject matter under subclass 510 wherein the particular thermally
    responsive current connection or disconnection structure comprises
    expansible fluid whereby the expansion or contraction of the fluid
    initiates or controls a switching action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    253,    for electric flatiron type device with current control responsive
    to thermally expansible liquid means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 368+ for expanding fluid type
    thermometers.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 95 for flue
    attached thermostats which are of the expanding fluid type and subclasses
    99+ for other expanding liquid type.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclasses 114+ and 306+ for switches utilizing a heat expansible fluid.


CLS 219/514
TXT Subject matter under subclass 510 wherein the current connection or
    disconnection means includes at least one solenoid winding, controlled or
    influenced by a thermal responsive means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    495,    for heaters in general with thermomagnetic current control or
    regulating means.

    519,    for heaters with automatically operated electromagnetic relay means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 91+ for
    thermostatic controls which may control solenoid means.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 161+ for
    relay control circuits including a thermal device.


CLS 219/515
TXT Subject matter under subclass 510 wherein the particular current connection
    or disconnection means includes structure whereby the thermally responsive
    element may be adjusted to operate at different degrees of temperature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252,    for electric flatiron type device with adjustable thermally
    responsive current control means.


CLS 219/516
TXT Subject matter under subclass 510 wherein the particular current connection
    or disconnection means is adapted to inserted into or attached in direct
    heat transfer contact with the material to be heated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    450,    above for hot plate type heating devices combined with thermostatic
    control devices in direct contact with a vessel or other cooking device to
    be heated.


CLS 219/517
TXT Subject matter under subclass 510 wherein the thermally responsive means
    comprises fusible material.  The material may be either directly in the
    electrical circuit so that upon fusing it opens the circuit directly or may
    comprise some securing device which upon fusing allows a circuit completion
    means to open or close.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    253,    for electric flatiron type devices with thermally responsive
    fusible means in the power supply circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 61.08 for
    circuit breakers of the frangible or destructible type.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclasses 142+ and 401+ for electrothermal and thermally actuated switches
    utilizing fusible material.


CLS 219/518
TXT Subject matter under subclass 509 wherein the particular current connection
    or disconnection means includes switch means operative by the weight of or
    the placing, in a certain location, of a body to be heated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.45+ for
    inertia and tilt type switches, especially subclass 61.59 for article
    inserted type and subclass 61.83 for gravity actuated switches.  See also
    subclasses 85+ for weight actuated switches.


CLS 219/519
TXT Subject matter under subclass 509 wherein the automatically operated
    current connection or disconnection structure includes electromagnetic
    relay means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    514,    for heaters with thermally controlled solenoid means in the
    switching circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 87+ for the
    structure of electromagnetic switches.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ for
    control circuits for relays and electromagnets.


CLS 219/520
TXT Subject matter under subclass 200 comprising the combination of a
    resistance heater unit with a particular housing, casing or support means
    therefor.

    (1)     Note.  In order to be classified here the heating unit and housing,
    casing or support must comprise an operative whole independent of any art
    device with which it may be used.  The heating unit may or may not be
    permanently attached to the housing or casing as long as the two are
    specifically adapted for use only with each other. Either the heating unit
    or the housing may be adapted for diverse use aside from its primary
    purpose, for example the heating unit may be embedded in a glass or plastic
    which serves also as a windshield as long as the claimed subject matter
    does not comprise details of the windshield which makes the device
    primarily a part of a vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    385+,   for the combination of at least one heating device or unit with a
    container, enclosure or support means for the material to be heated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 226+ for resistor means, per se,
    which is incased, embedded or housed and subclasses 315+ for electrical
    resistors, per se, combined with mounting or support means.


CLS 219/521
TXT Subject matter under subclass 520 wherein the significant housing, casing
    or support structure includes broadly defined means whereby an object or
    material to be heated is supported in heat exchange relationship to a
    heating unit or units.

    (1)     Note.  Where the material support means is specifically defined
    classification is above, particularly subclasses 385+ for example, hot
    plate type heating devices are to be found in subclasses 462+.  The
    significant housing, casing, or support means in subclasses 520+ has for
    its primary function the housing or support of a heating unit with the
    resulting combination being adapted for use with devices in general under
    the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS:

    458+,   for planar heating surfaces combined with housed heater units.  See
    also (1) Note, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for heating
    means combined with a housing means specifically adapted for use in brewing
    of a beverage or the cooking of food.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 226+ for electrical resistors
    incased, embedded or housed in which the housing may be adapted for
    supporting an article to be heated.


CLS 219/522
TXT Subject matter under subclass 520 wherein the particular housing, casing or
    support means includes structure whereby the housing, casing or support is
    adapted to perform a secondary function other than that of a support or
    enclosure for a heating unit or units.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201+,   for electric heating devices combined with diverse art type device.


CLS 219/523
TXT Subject matter under subclass 520 wherein the particular housing, casing or
    support means includes particular structural features whereby the housing,
    casing or support means is adapted to be insertable into and removably
    retained within a space or material to be heated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277+,   for subsurface (e.g., oil well) heaters.

    316+,   for immersible liquid heaters.

    381+,   for immersion type heaters for fluid.

    403,    for heating unit combined with a housing capable of being inserted
    into and removed from an oven type enclosure.

    415+,   for deep well heaters.

    437+,   for vessel and stand  immersion heater.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclass 545 for bathtub
    heaters.

    5,      Beds, subclass 284 for bed heaters.

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclass 2.6 for boot heaters.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 11+ for boring in the
    earth by directly applying heat particularly subclass 16 which provides for
    electrically produced heat.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 229 for resistors encased in probe
    type casing.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 131 for apparatus for
    applying heat to the earth.


CLS 219/524
TXT Subject matter under subclass 520 wherein the particular housing, casing or
    support structure consists of two or more hinged or otherwise separable
    sections or compartments.  The sections or compartments may or may not be
    adjustable relative to each other and each containing a separate heating
    unit or one or more sections of a single unit.  Heat transfer may be
    accomplished by radiation, convection, conduction or a combination of one
    or more of these.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225,    for hair heating devices with heated clamp means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, appropriate subclasses for opposed
    heated platen, ironing machines or implements.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 372+ for waffle iron
    type cooking apparatus and subclasses 385+ especially subclasses 393+ for
    toaster devices with opposed heaters.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 92+ for heated presses.


CLS 219/525
TXT Subject matter under subclass 524 wherein the heating means consists of a
    plurality of heating units or a single unit consisting of plural sections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus subclasses 374 and 389+ for cooking
    apparatus comprising hinged compartments, molds or grill combined with
    plural heating units or elements.


CLS 219/526
TXT Subject matter under subclass 520 wherein the significant housing, casing
    or support structure includes means whereby the housing, casing or support
    may be secured or attached to an object or surface to be heated.  The
    transfer of heat energy may be of convection, conduction or radiation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201+,   for electric heaters combined with diverse type art device.


CLS 219/527
TXT Subject matter under subclass 526 wherein the significant casing or support
    structure includes straps or other devices whereby it may be attached to or
    supported by, some portion of an animal body, (e.g., human body).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211,    for electric heaters associated with wearing apparel.

    227+,   for hand held electrically heated tools or instruments.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, appropriate subclasses for body and
    belt attached article carriers in general.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclass 149
    for devices for the application of heat or electricity to the  human body
    and adapted for body attachments.


CLS 219/528
TXT Subject matter under subclass 520 wherein the significant housing, casing
    or support structure is pliable or capable of being flexed or bent without
    permanent distortion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    456,    for heater with a support adjustable to the shape of material to be
    heated.

    535,    for heating unit specially formed to fit material to be heated.

    549,    for heating element support of flexible material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 35 for portable pipe heaters.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 210+ for flexible or folding
    resistors and subclass 259 for resistors, per se, combined with a round,
    braided or woven casing or housing.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclass 149
    for heating devices for the human body, particularly for bands and belts.


CLS 219/529
TXT Subject matter under subclass 528 wherein the significant container or
    support structure consists of cloth or other fabric material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211,    for electrical heater combined with wearing apparel.

    212,    for electrical heater combined with bed covering (e.g., blanket).

    545,    for resistive element interwoven with fabric support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 482+ for structural details of bed clothing which
    may include electric heating means and subclass 423 for heated mattresses
    or cushions.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 208 for mesh, woven or braided
    resistance element.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclass 96
    for thermal applicators in general for therapeutic purposes.


CLS 219/530
TXT Subject matter under subclass 520 wherein the significant housing, casing
    or support structure includes means whereby heat energy is stored or is
    transferred to a material or object to be heated.  The transfer of the heat
    energy may be conduction or radiation, as by a reflector, or convection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258,    for sole plate pressure application heating devices (sad irons)
    with heat storage or transfer means.

    276,    for vaporizers with heat transfer means.

    302,    for forced circulation heater with heat storage.

    325+,   for liquid heaters with heat storage or exchange means.

    341,    for radiant fluid heaters with heat storage or transfer means.

    365,    for convection heaters with heat transfer or storage means.

    378,    for fluid heaters with heat storage means.

    399+,   for ovens combined with heat transfer distribution or accumulator
    means.

    430,    for a vessel and stand combined with heat storage or transfer means.

    439,    for a vessel alone combined with heat storage or transfer means.

    462,    for electrical hot plates with heat storage or transfer means.

    540,    for a heating unit structure per se with heat storage or exchange
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 400 for heat accumulator structure in
    general.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for heat transfer or exchange
    means in general.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 59 for resistors, per se, combined
    with heat storing means.


CLS 219/531
TXT Subject matter under subclass 520 wherein the significant housing, casing
    or support structure includes thermal insulation or other means whereby
    unwanted heat is dissipated or prevented form effecting at least some
    portion of the housing, casing or support means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    460,    for planar surface heater with heating unit support with thermal
    insulation or ventilating means.

    540,    for heating element for heat transfer plate or fins.

    542+,   for resistive element with particular electrical insulation means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 51+ for resistors, per se,
    combined with heat dissipating vanes and subclasses 53+ for resistors
    combined with cooling gas or liquid circulation.


CLS 219/532
TXT Subject matter under subclass 520 wherein the significant support means is
    comprised of an open frame or grid with the heating unit or units supported
    on or by the grid members usually by tubular or spool type insulator means.
     The heating element or elements in this subclass are generally exposed
    straight resistance wire or coils but they may be sheathed, as in a
    "Calrod" type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, appropriate subclasses for open frame or grid
    supported resistance elements, particularly subclasses 226+ for incased
    resistors, which may be comprised of zigzag or helical wound type,
    subclasses 283+ for zigzag or sinuous type, subclasses 296+ for helical or
    wound type elements in general and subclasses 315+ for resistors, per se,
    combined with mounting or supporting means.


CLS 219/533
TXT Subject matter under subclass 520 wherein the significant housing, casing
    or support structure includes handle or other means whereby the housing,
    casing or support is adapted to be carried by or held in the hand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227+,   for hand held or manipulative tool devices combined with heater
    devices.

    245+,   for sadirons with heating means.

    260+,   for portable igniters.

    346,    for portable containers combined with heating devices.

    386+,   for portable containers combined with heating devices.

    527,    for body supported (e.g., human body)  heaters.


CLS 219/534
TXT Subject matter under subclass 520 wherein the significant housing, casing
    or support structure comprises rigid tubes.  The structure usually
    comprises a flattened tube but may include tubes adapted to have the
    heating unit mounted in such a manner as to allow the material to be heated
    to flow through or be contained within the housing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300,    for liquid heater wherein the liquid conveying tube is the heater
    unit.

    301,    for liquid heater wherein the heater unit is attached to or
    surrounds the liquid conveying tube.

    306+,   for liquid heater, wherein the heater unit is enclosed within the
    liquid conveying path.

    374,    for fluid heater wherein the heating element is directly in the
    fluid path.

    544,    for heater unit structure wherein the resistance element is
    embedded within or surrounded by a core sheath or support.


CLS 219/535
TXT Subject matter under subclass 520 wherein the housing, casing or support
    structure claimed includes significant details of means whereby the device
    may be applied to or shaped to fit the contours of an object to be heated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201+,   for electric heaters combined with other art devices.

    301,    for liquid heater with heater unit attached to or surrounding the
    liquid conveying means.

    456,    for planar surface heaters wherein the material support is
    adjustable to the shape of the material heated.

    528+,   for heating unit of flexible or resilient construction.

    545,    for heating element interwoven with fabric.

    549,    for heating element on flexible support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 279 for rail heaters.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 451 for seat heaters.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 543+ for charge forming
    devices (carburetors) with heating means and subclass 142.5 for heating
    devices adapted to be applied to a motor.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 33 for electric pipe heaters.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 48.1+ for heating or cooling apparatus
    adapted for special structural installation.

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, subclass 27 for heated
    conductors.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 236 for cabinet structure
    combined with heating means.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 11+ for discharge
    devices combined with temperature modifying means.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process, for battery having heat exchange feature.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, appropriate
    subclasses under subclass 1 for heat applicators adapted to fit various
    parts of the human body.


CLS 219/536
TXT Subject matter under subclass 520 wherein the housing, casing or support
    structure includes significant structure whereby the heating unit is
    attached to or mounted upon or within the housing, casing or support means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    463,    for planar surface heater with heating unit attachment or securing
    means.

    542+,   for resistive element attaching or securing means.


CLS 219/537
TXT Subject matter under subclass 536 wherein a single housing, casing or
    support structure is combined with a plurality of heating units having
    significant attachment means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    478,    for plural separate heating devices with unitary housing, support
    or casing means.


CLS 219/538
TXT Subject matter under subclass 200 consisting of a heating element, usually
    resistive, with a core, sheath or support means, the combination comprising
    a basic heating unit adapted to form a subcombination of a more
    comprehensive combination which is classifiable higher up in this class or
    in another art class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119+,   for metal heating resistance welding electrodes.

    145.1+  and 146.1+, for metal heating arc welding electrodes.

    221+,   for specific heating unit means combined with a hand tool.

    254+,   for a specific heating unit combined with an electric iron.

    270,    for a specific igniter unit.

    275,    for specific heating unit means combined with a vaporizer.

    278,    for a specific heating unit combined with an oil well heater.

    335+,   for a specific heating unit combined with a liquid heater.

    353,    for a specific heating unit combined with a radiant heater.

    385,    for a specific heating unit combined with a convection heater.

    414+,   for a specific heating unit combined with an over type enclosure.

    431+,   for significant heating unit means combined with a crucible or
    furnace.

    469+,   for significant heating unit means combined with a hot plate.

    520+,   for the combination of a heater unit with a particular housing or
    casing therefor in general.

    600+,   for induction heating system and subsystem.

    678+,   for microwave heating system and subsystem.

    764+,   for capacitive dielectric heating system and subsystem.


CLS 219/539
TXT Subject matter under subclass 538 comprising a plurality of heating
    elements combined with core, sheath or support means.  The plurality of
    elements may or may not be attached to a single core, sheath or support
    means.

    (1)     Note.  To complete the search for this subject matter, search
    should be made above in the indented subclass under each special type
    heating devices listed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, particularly subclass 48, for plural separate
    diverse resistors, subclasses 76, 120, 122+, and 128+ for mechanically
    variable resistor which may involve a plurality of resistors with a
    support, subclass 203, for structures readily separable into a plurality of
    resistors, subclasses 235, 239 and 260+ for plural resistors which are
    embedded, incased or housed, subclass 295, for plural resistance elements
    connected by a jumper, subclass 299, for plural helix or winding type
    resistor with support, subclass 319, for plural resistors extending between
    supports and subclass 320, for plural resistors with mounting or supporting
    means in general.


CLS 219/540
TXT Subject matter under subclass 538 including significant heat transfer or
    storage means, such as fins or plates whereby the heat energy generated in
    the heating unit is transferred to a space or body of material which is to
    be heated.

    (1)     Note.  To complete the search for this subject matter consult the
    appropriate subclasses under each special type heating device listed under
    "Search This Class, Subclass" of subclass 530.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 51+ for resistors with heat
    dissipating projections (e.g, vanes); subclasses 53+ for resistors with
    cooling gas or liquid circulation means and subclass 59 for resistors with
    heat storing means.


CLS 219/541
TXT Subject matter under subclass 538 including specific terminal or connector
    elements whereby an electrical connection with an external electrical
    circuit may be made.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247,    for electric flatiron with stand and electrical connector means.

    256+,   for electric flatiron with terminal structure.

    318,    for readily detachable liquid heater units.

    321,    for liquid heater with plural selectively replaceable heater units.

    351,    for radiant heaters with interchangeable or readily detachable
    heating units.

    403,    for ovens with heating units detachable from heated enclosure.

    436+,   for vessel and stand with heating unit attaching means.

    447,    for vessel with plural detachable or interchangeable heater units.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, appropriate subclasses for particular
    resistors with terminals and subclasses 322+ for electrical resistors, per
    se, with terminal means in general ("Search This Class, Subclass" under
    subclass 322 lists particular resistors with connectors or terminals in
    Class 338).

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses, for terminals of the
    separable type, per se, which may be applied to heater units.


CLS 219/542
TXT Subject matter under subclass 538 including a heating element secured or
    attached to, or insulated from, a core, sheath or support by specific means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    536,    for heater unit with a mounting or attaching means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 226+ for resistor means incased,
    embedded or housed and subclasses 306+ for a resistor element with a base
    extending along the element.


CLS 219/543
TXT Subject matter under subclass 542 including a core, sheath or support means
    having a heating element attached thereto by printing or deposited thereon
    by other coating or bonding means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 250+ for
    preformed panel circuit arrangements, such as printed circuits.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 307 for printed resistance element
    and subclasses 308+ for coated resistance element resistors.


CLS 219/544
TXT Subject matter under subclass 542 comprising a heating element embedded in
    or completely surrounded by a core, sheath or other support means.  The
    element may be enclosed or surrounded by electrical insulating material
    within a groove or recessed in the core or sheath or may be simply inserted
    into a recess in the core or sheath.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    534,    for heater unit combined with a rigid, tubular housing, casing or
    support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 226+ for resistor, per se,
    incased, embedded or housed within a sheath.


CLS 219/545
TXT Subject matter under subclass 542 consisting of an element of electrical
    resistive material interwoven with a support means of nonconductive
    material. The nonconductive material generally consists of glass or
    asbestos fibers but may consist of any other nonconductive fabric.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211,    for electrical heater combined with wearing apparel.

    212,    for electrical heater combined with bed covering (e.g., blanket).

    529,    for heater unit with a support of cloth or other fabric.

    549,    for heater resistance element with flexible core, sheath or support
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclass 425 for interwoven fabric and metal in
    general.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 208 for mesh woven or braided
    resistance element, per se, and subclass 259 for resistor means combined
    with a wound, braided or woven casing or housing.


CLS 219/546
TXT Subject matter under subclass 538 wherein the significant structural
    details relate to the particular core, sheath or support means for the
    resistive or other heating element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 321 for resistive element cores and
    frames.


CLS 219/547
TXT Subject matter under subclass 546 wherein the significant core, sheath or
    support means is comprised wholly, or in part, of the material to be
    heated; such as a glass panel having a resistive heating element adhered
    thereto or imbedded therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 226+ for resistor means incased or
    embedded in a support.


CLS 219/548
TXT Subject matter under subclass 546 wherein the core, sheath or support means
    is compromised of a significant material or is constructed in a particular
    manner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    354,    for fluid heaters of the radiant type with heating unit structure
    of particular construction or material.

    409+,   for oven with heating unit structure or composition.

    426,    for furnace with heating unit of particular structure or
    composition.

    468,    for planar surface heater with heating unit with particular
    resistance element structure or material.

    553,    for heating element of particular construction or material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, appropriate subclasses for resistor means
    with a significant core or sheath.


CLS 219/549
TXT Subject matter under subclass 548 wherein the significant core, sheath or
    support means is comprised of material which is adapted to be flexed,
    folded or rolled upon itself without becoming permanently deformed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211,    for electric heater combined with wearing apparel.

    212,    for electric heater combined with bed clothing.

    456,    for heater with a support adjustable to the shape of the material
    to be heated.

    528+,   for heater unit with flexible or resilient support.

    545,    for resistive element interwoven with fabric support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 210+ for flexible or folding
    resistor devices.


CLS 219/550
TXT Subject matter under subclass 548 wherein the significant core, sheath or
    support means consists of plural sections or elements of insulative
    material adapted to be joined together to form a single whole device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 137+ and
    appropriate subclasses for insulators which may be joined or sectional.


CLS 219/551
TXT Subject matter under subclass 548 wherein the significant core, sheath or
    support means is recited as comprising a thin plate or wafer element of
    insulating material and including means whereby the element may be rigidly
    inserted between two external members; usually metallic, in the manner of a
    conventional gasket.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 137+,
    especially subclass 138 for special application and subclasses 151+ for
    through wall or plate insulators.


CLS 219/552
TXT Subject matter under subclass 538 wherein the heating unit structure
    comprises significant details of a particular resistance or other type
    heating element.

    (1)     Note.  The resistor structures in this and the indented subclasses
    are similar to the electrical resistor structure to be found in Class 338,
    but are restricted to those resistive devices peculiarly adapted to
    efficiently convert electrical energy into heat energy and limited to use
    in the heating devices under the class definition of this class (219).  The
    resistor structures in Class 338 are primarily and peculiarly adapted for
    use as current impeding or limiting electrical resistors where the heat
    generated is incidental or undesired and secondary to the primary current
    impeding or limiting function.  See the class definition of Class 338,
    Electrical Resistors, section X, for a more detailed explanation of the
    line between Class 318 and Class 219.


CLS 219/553
TXT Subject matter under subclass 552 wherein the significant resistance or
    other type element comprises particular structural elements or is made from
    a specific material; such, for example, as carbon pellets or granular
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    354,    for fluid heaters of the radiant type with heating element of
    particular construction or composition.

    548+,   for heater unit element core, sheath or support means of particular
    construction or material.


CLS 219/600
TXT INDUCTIVE HEATING:
    Subject matter under the class definition for electric heating whereby an
    electromagnetic field interacts in close proximity to an electrically
    conducting material or object causing current to flow through a material or
    object and producing heat proportional to a resistance of the material or
    object.

    (1)     Note.  Inductive, capacitive dielectric, and microwave heating
    applications are in the radiofrequency region of the electromagnetic
    spectrum, with the exception of inductive heating which may be in a
    frequency range as low as 50 hertz.  Specifically, inductive and capacitive
    dielectric heating are commonly in the frequency ranges from


            1000 hertz to 1 gigahertz, and microwave heating is in the
    frequency ranges from 1 gigahertz to 3 gigahertz (also called microwave
    range).

    (2)     Note.  For claims reciting both food (edible) and nonfood
    (nonedible) heating by an electric heating device or method, classification
    is proper for Class 219.  If the claims recited are limited to food
    (edible) heating methods, composition, product, or processes,
    classification is proper for Class 426.


    (3)     Note.  The heating may be combined with working the metallic or
    nonmetallic material heated.

    (4)     Note.  The work may have electric current or potential induced
    therein and thus constitute the secondary of a transformer, or it may be a
    continuation of the inductor core.

    (5)     Note.  A closed transformer secondary may be the inductively heated
    member for the purpose of heat transfer.

    (6)     Note.  An inductive heating apparatus with corona prevention means,
    shock protection means, and the like, is classified herein.

    (7)     Note.  An inductive heater with means to heat the inductor to
    prevent condensation thereon is classified herein.

    (8)     Note.  An inductive heating apparatus with means to prevent
    dissipation of heat from the work by simultaneously heating the work holder
    or support is classified herein.

    (9)     Note.  This subclass and the indented subclasses include inductive
    heating having means for applying pressure to the work (see subclass 659)
    or for cooling the inductor apparatus during the application of electrical
    energy (see subclass 632).  If the cooling apparatus is provided for use
    subsequent to the heating or is for the purpose of treating the material or
    object being heated, classification is proper with the art collection to
    which it pertains.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108+,   especially indented subclass 116 for electric supply systems for
    heating metal where the work is heated by connecting it in series with the
    secondary of a transformer so as to complete a conductive current path from
    the secondary through the work. In subclasses 108+, the transformer
    secondary is not the heated member, nor is the workpiece a part of the
    secondary of the transformer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 50.1, 620+, and 724+ for means to
    apply electrical and/or radiant energy to work and/or coating.

    148,    Metal Treatment, for metal fusion bonding or working of metal, is
    combined with significant heat treatment of metal as defined in the Class
    148 definition, section III, A.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    272.2+ for methods and subclasses 379.6+ for means of surface bonding
    and/or assembly thereof with direct application of electrical, magnetic, or
    radiant energy to work.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 193+ for
    apparatus for treating substances with electrical or radiant energy to
    effect a chemical change.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous
    apparatus particularly adapted for the treatment of metals and
    metalliferous material. Class 266, subclass 129, provides for apparatus
    having inductive heating means in combination with other heat treatment
    means such as quenching apparatus.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, appropriate subclasses for
    miscellaneous electrical furnaces; see subclasses 4, 6, 7, and 138+ for
    induction furnaces.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 9+ for a magnetic field applied to the body for
    therapeutic purposes.

    606,    Surgery, subclasses 27+ or 32+ for instruments for heat or
    electrical application.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses 1+
    for light and thermal application to the body and subclasses 114 through
    156 for an electrical energy applicator.


CLS 219/601
TXT With diverse-type heating:
    Subject matter under subclass 600 wherein both an inductive heater and a
    different type of heater are provided for in a heating arrangement.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of different types of heaters are resistance
    heaters, incandescent lamps, infrared lamps, microwave and capacitive
    dielectric heating, etc.

    (2)     Note.  The meaning of "workpiece" is any object or material that
    work (in the form of heat) is applied to.

    (3)     Note.  An inductive heater whose circuit is completed through a
    workpiece in order to obtain both resistive and inductive heating effects
    is classifiable here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    680+,   for microwave heating with other types of heating elements included
    in the heating apparatus.


CLS 219/602
TXT Metal working:
    Subject matter under subclass 600 wherein a metallic workpiece is
    physically changed in shape or deformed by inductive heating.

    (1)     Note.  Metal working is defined as the changing of the physical
    shape of the metal (as, for example, by plastic deformation or by cutting)
    as, for example, by heat treatment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50+,    for especially indented subclasses 149+ for similar subject matter
    not having inductive heating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 400.1+ for methods of mechanical
    manufacturing.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 342.1+ for a device with a temperature
    modification of a tool or specific portion of work.


CLS 219/603
TXT Bonding:
    Subject matter under subclass 602 wherein two or more opposing metallic
    surfaces are permanently joined together by inductive heating.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to welding, brazing, or
    soldering of metal-to-metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    633,    for bonding with a heat exchange.

    765,    for bonding in which the object or material is nonmetallic.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 428+ for assembling or joining.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    272.2+ for methods and subclasses 379.6+ for means of surface bonding
    and/or assembly thereof with direct application of electrical, magnetic, or
    radiant energy to work.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, appropriate subclasses for nonelectric metal
    fusion bonding.


CLS 219/604
TXT Container sealing:
    Subject matter under subclass 603 wherein the bonded surfaces result in a
    tightly enclosed vessel having the capacity for holding material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    769,    for bonding containers by capacitive dielectric heating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 477+ for closing a package by heat
    sealing and digest 2 for high frequency electric sealing.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    272.2+ and 379.6+ for methods and means of surface bonding and/or assembly
    thereof with direct application of electrical, magnetic, or radiant energy
    to work, and subclass 69 for application of end closures to containers.


CLS 219/605
TXT Wire (e.g., cable, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 603 wherein the bonding is between plural
    ends of elongated solid flexible cylindrical conductors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56+,    for wire, rod, or bar bonding by resistance heating.

    636,    for hardening wire or cable by inductive heating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 825+ for conductor or circuit
    manufacturing.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 173.1+ for bonding a rod, bar, or
    wire-like object by deforming.


CLS 219/606
TXT Ring:
    Subject matter under subclass 603 wherein a circular band is bonded to a
    conductor.

    (1)     Note.  The circular band may be a seat on which a flap or lid rests
    (e.g., a valve seat).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    641,    for hardening a valve seat by inductive heating.

    642,    for hardening a ring or link by inductive heating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 890.12+ for valve making.


CLS 219/607
TXT Tube (i.e., pipe):
    Subject matter under subclass 603 wherein the metal workpiece is bonded
    together to form a hollow cylinder or plural hollow cylinders forming one
    unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59.1+,  for similar subject matter involving resistance heating.

    643+,   for heating a preformed tubular object.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclass 60 for tube end closing and
    subclasses 144+ for edge joining of a piece blank or strip.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclass 41 for heating or cooling
    thereof.


CLS 219/608
TXT With electrical control (e.g., speed, temperature, gaging thickness,
    etc.):Subject matter under subclass 607 wherein an electric device
    continuously adjusts the forming of a tube according to a specific result.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    663,    for an inductive heating system with condition responsive
    controlled power supply.


CLS 219/609
TXT Layering (e.g., coating, lining, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 607 wherein a coating or lining is applied to
    an interior or exterior surface of a tube wall, or a tube is formed around
    an object.

    (1)     Note.  A tube may be formed around other objects such as wire,
    cable, or another tube.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 50.1 and 620+ for means applying
    electrical and/or radiant energy to work and/or coating material.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 543 and 591 for processes with
    dielectric or induction heating or utilizing radio or microwave energy.


CLS 219/610
TXT With preheating or postheating:
    Subject matter under subclass 607 wherein the metal workpiece is heated
    prior to, or after, the forming of the tube.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus for operating on the material or object prior to
    the heating may be included only if the sole purpose of such a preparatory
    operation is to facilitate the inductive heating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    601,    for inductive heating with another diverse type of heating.

    656,    for an inductive heating system with multiple stations of plural
    heating zones.


CLS 219/611
TXT Plural (e.g., end to end, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 607 wherein a tube end is bonded together
    with another tube thereby forming one unit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclass 41 for heating or cooling
    thereof.


CLS 219/612
TXT Seam bonding:
    Subject matter under subclass 607 wherein a tube is formed by permanently
    joining together two opposing outer edges of a C cross-sectional elongated
    metal strip.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 144+ for edge joining of one piece
    blank or strip.


CLS 219/613
TXT With impeder:
    Subject matter under subclass 612 including a device which modifies or
    intensifies a current path traveling along the seam of the tube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    670,    for inductive heating systems with a specific transformer core
    structure.


CLS 219/614
TXT With guiding device:
    Subject matter under subclass 612 including an arrangement of roller-type
    apparatus that curves outer edges of an elongated metal strip inward to
    form a C cross-section or arranged to direct the tube movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61.13   and 61.3, for resistance heating cylinders with edge guidance means.

    647,    for an inductive heating device with workpiece support.


CLS 219/615
TXT Brazing (e.g., cladding, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 603 wherein a melted alloy of copper or brass
    is used to fill the joint between the opposing surfaces.

    (1)     Note.  The melting point of braze metal is usually lower than the
    base metal to be bonded, therefore base metal fusion is not required.
    Braze metal is also called hard solder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85.1+,  for brazing or soldering by resistance heating.


CLS 219/616
TXT Soldering:
    Subject matter under subclass 603 wherein a melted alloy of lead and tin is
    melted and used to fill the joint between the opposing surfaces.

    (1)     Note.  The melting point of solder is usually lower than the base
    metal to be bonded, therefore base metal fusion is not required.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85.1+,  brazing or soldering by resistance heating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 33+ for means to apply flux and
    subclasses 51+ for a metallic heat applicator.


CLS 219/617
TXT Welding:
    Subject matter under subclass 603 wherein the opposing surfaces are heated
    until soft enough to adhere to each other.

    (1)     Note.  Welding may be accomplished with the application of heat and
    mechanical force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50+,    for similar subject matter using resistance heating.


CLS 219/618
TXT With heat exchange:
    Subject matter under subclass 600 wherein an intermediate member is
    inductively heated so as to transfer heat to another member, material, or
    object.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for a heat exchange structure.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for
    heating and cooling (by quenching, for example) solid metal, including such
    apparatus where inductive heating means are provided.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 55+ for the structure of transformers
    and inductive reactors with means to modify the temperature thereof.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 381+ for
    an electronic system with cooling means.


CLS 219/619
TXT Roller (e.g., godet, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 618 wherein an intermediate member is a
    rotatable drum-like cylinder.

    (1)     Note.  This includes, for example, a godet which is defined as a
    roller around which synthetic filaments are passed under tension for
    stretching.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    469+,   for a cylindrical or roller-type support for material to be heated
    by resistance heating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 300+ for a roll press with heating means.


CLS 219/620
TXT Cooking:
    Subject matter under subclass 618 wherein the intermediate member is
    arranged to transfer heat to warm, defrost, or cook (edible) food.

    (1)     Note.  For claims reciting both food (edible) and nonfood
    (nonedible) heating by an electric heating device or method, classification
    is proper for Class 219.  If the claims recited are limited to food
    (edible) heating methods, composition, product, or processes,
    classification is proper for Class 426.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    385+,   for similar subject matter utilizing resistance heating.

    725+,   for cookware for microwave cooking.

    771,    for cooking by capacitive dielectric heating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 451 for electric radiant
    or vibrational treating means and digest 14 with induction heating.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 1+ for cooking.

    392,    Electric Resistance Heating Devices, for appropriate subclasses
    having similar subject matter using resistance heating.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 237+ for direct application of electrical or wave energy to food
    material.


CLS 219/621
TXT Utensil (e.g., pot, pan, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 620 wherein the intermediate member is a
    container or vessel used to hold food (edible) while cooking.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    725+,   for cookware for microwave heating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, digest 14 for cooking with
    induction heating.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 373+ for vessels.

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 912 for cookware.


CLS 219/622
TXT With support:
    Subject matter under subclass 620 wherein a rigid structure is useable for
    sustaining a utensil and an inductive heating element within close
    proximity of each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    385+,   for a resistance heating device combined with a container,
    enclosure, or support for material to be heated.

    647+,   for inductive heating device having a workpiece support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 236 for support with
    heating, cooling, or heat exchange means.


CLS 219/623
TXT Having cooling device:
    Subject matter under subclass 622 including a device to remove heat from an
    inductive cooking support or food serving support.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for inductive heaters
    combined with devices for cooling only the work.  Such excluded subject
    matter may be found in the classes which provide for the apparatus which
    treats the specific materials and object which are cooled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    399+,   for an electrical oven with heat energy transfer distribution or
    accumulator means.

    632,    for an inductive heater with cooling arrangement.

    757,    for a microwave oven with cooling or ventilation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 21 for ventilated ovens and subclass
    299 for a stove with stove surface ventilation.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 381+ for
    an electrical system with cooling means.


CLS 219/624
TXT Core or coil structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 620 wherein (a) a magnetic conductor of a
    particular geometric shape links an inductive winding (primary) to the
    intermediate member (secondary) or (b) a conducting wound wire (primary)
    induces an alternating current in the intermediate member (secondary).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    670,    for an inductive heating system with specific transformer.

    672+,   for an inductive heating system with specific inductor
    configuration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, for appropriate subclasses for core or coil
    structures.


CLS 219/625
TXT Intermediate member condition responsive:
    Subject matter under subclass 620 wherein an automatic controlling device
    is regulating or adjusting an inductive heating element interaction upon an
    intermediate member according to a preselected result.

    (1)     Note.  The automatic controlling device must include means to sense
    a condition and means to vary a condition in response to the sensed
    condition.  Means to maintain a condition constant is included as an
    automatic control where the system includes means to sense deviations from
    the condition and to adjust the system to maintain the desired value
    constant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    482+,   for a resistance heating device with a control system.

    663,    for inductive heating systems with automatic control.

    702,    for a microwave heating device with a control system.

    779,    for a capacitive dielectric heating device with a control system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 325+ for a cooking
    device with automatic control.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for the miscellaneous power distribution and supply systems.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for the miscellaneous systems for controlling phase angle or
    voltage and/or current magnitude and for the miscellaneous transformer and
    impedance systems.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    inverter and/or converter systems.


CLS 219/626
TXT Load sensing:
    Subject matter under subclass 625 wherein a device is condition responsive
    to a presence or absence of an intermediate member or to the ability of the
    intermediate member to conduct.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    665+,   for an inductive heating control system responsive to a load
    condition.


CLS 219/627
TXT Temperature:
    Subject matter under subclass 625 wherein a device is condition responsive
    to an increase or decrease in a thermal change of the intermediate member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    494+,   for an electrical resistive heating device with thermally
    responsive automatic regulating or control means.

    667,    for an inductive heating device with a power control responsive to
    load temperature.

    710+,   for a microwave heating device with a power control responsive to
    load temperature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, for subclass 149 for temperature
    measurement combined with a cooking compartment.


CLS 219/628
TXT Fluid or liquid heater:
    Subject matter under subclass 618 wherein the intermediate member is
    arranged to transfer heat to a fluent material.

    (1)     Note.  A fluent material is one that flows easily from container to
    container and may be a fine granular material, liquid, or air.

    (2)     Note.  An inductively heated intermediate member is usually a
    conduit or container where the heat is to be supplied to a fluent material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    687+,   for a microwave fluid heater.

    772,    for apparatus for dielectric heating a fluent material where the
    electromagnetic field acts directly on the fluent material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 341 having an electric heater.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 33 for fluid conduits with
    electric thawing and freeze protection means.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 55+ for the structure of transformers
    and inductive reactors with means to modify the temperature thereof.

    392,    Electric Resistance Heating Devices, subclasses 311+ for a
    noninductive electrical fluid heater.


CLS 219/629
TXT By tube (i.e., pipe):
    Subject matter under subclass 628 wherein the intermediate member is a
    hollow cylinder which transports a fluent material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    392,    Electric Resistance Heating Devices, subclasses 320+ for an
    electrical resistance heater with a tube or pipe forming a flow path.


CLS 219/630
TXT Core or coil structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 629 wherein (a) a magnetic conductor of
    particular geometric shape links an inductive winding (primary) to the tube
    (secondary) or (b) a conducting wound wire (primary) induces an alternating
    current in the tube (secondary).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    670,    for a power supply system with a specific transformer structure.

    677,    for specific inductor configuration having a cooling arrangement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 221 through 234 for coil and core
    structures.


CLS 219/631
TXT Core rotation:
    Subject matter under subclass 630 wherein the core is subjected to a
    spinning or circular motion relative about its axis.


CLS 219/632
TXT With cooling arrangement:
    Subject matter under subclass 618 including an apparatus to remove heat
    from the intermediate member.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for inductive heaters
    combined with devices for cooling only the work.  Such excluded subject
    matter may be found in the classes which provide for the apparatus which
    treats the specific materials and object which are cooled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    677,    for a specific inductor having a cooling arrangement.


CLS 219/633
TXT Bonding (e.g., nonmetallic, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 618 wherein the intermediate member is
    arranged to transfer heat to permanently unite two or more surfaces
    together.

    (1)     Note.  Bonding by inductive heat exchange (using an intermediate
    member to transfer heat) is most common when the materials or workpieces
    are nonmetallic substances or when bonding metal to plastic using thermal
    sensitive glue.

    (2)     Note.  Apparatus for operating on the material or object prior to
    the heating may be included only if the sole purpose of such a preparatory
    operation is to facilitate the inductive heating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    603+,   for bonding metal by direct inductive heating.

    765+,   for bonding by capacitive dielectric heating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses
    36+ for a process of bonding glass by a glassworking operation to a
    preformed part and subclasses 152+ for glassworking apparatus including
    fusion bonding means.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, etc., appropriate subclasses for
    bonding particulate metal by heat and/or pressure.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    272.2+ for laminating processes which include heating or other effects
    produced by electrical energy; see subclasses 379.6+ for apparatus therefor.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, appropriate subclasses for nonelectric
    metallurgical fusion bonding.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    subclasses 460+ for direct application of electrical or wave energy for
    heating purposes in processes of molding or shaping plastic materials
    within the class definition and subclasses 109+ for forming articles by
    uniting discrete, bulk assembled particles.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, appropriate subclasses for
    electric furnaces involving sintering.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, appropriate subclasses for processes
    for making articles by uniting discrete, bulk assembled metal particles.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    subclasses 174+ for means applying electrical or wave energy directly to a
    workpiece.


CLS 219/634
TXT Susceptor:
    Subject matter under subclass 618 wherein the intermediate member has
    highly absorbing thermal energy properties and transfers the thermal energy
    to a workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  The meaning of "workpiece" is any object or material that
    work (in the form of heat) is applied to.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    730,    for microwave cookware with a susceptor.

    759,    for a microwave heating device with a heat exchange susceptor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 724+ for a gas or vapor deposition
    coating device with heater.


CLS 219/635
TXT Specific heating application:
    Subject matter under subclass 600 wherein an object or material of a
    particular shape or form is subjected to inductive heating.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses are intended primarily as
    subclasses for specific applications of electric inductive heating.
    Examples of specific applications are an inductive heater claimed in
    combination with an article of unique configuration or with a specific
    material, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    770+,   for a specific capacitive dielectric heating application.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 566+ for induction heating of metal.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 121 through 129 for metal
    quenching with heating means.


CLS 219/636
TXT Wire (e.g., cable, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 635 wherein the heating is applied to an
    elongated solid flexible cylindrical conductor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    605,    for bonding wire or cable ends together.


CLS 219/637
TXT Rod:
    Subject matter under subclass 635 wherein the heating is applied to an
    elongated solid nonflexible bar of material or object.


CLS 219/638
TXT Semiconductor:
    Subject matter under subclass 637 wherein the rod material has conductivity
    ranges between that of a conductor and an insulator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, particularly subclasses 7+ for solid phase
    single crystallization techniques, subclasses 13+ for liquid phase single
    crystallization techniques of the melt-pull type, subclasses 51+ for liquid
    phase single crystallization techniques of the float zone type utilizing
    electromagnetic induction, subclass 102 for chemical vapor deposition
    techniques of forming a single crystal utilizing inductive heating, and
    subclass 222 for apparatus for forming a single crystal involving a moving
    solid-liquid-solid interface, such apparatus having details of the heating
    means for use therein.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclass 139 for an induction
    furnace device for zone melting.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 349+ for the
    chemically reactive production of elemental silicon utilizing as a starting
    material a silicon containing compound, wherein the production may be
    affected through the use of inductive heating.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, appropriate subclass
    for methods of making semiconductor electrical devices; see the search
    notes therein.


CLS 219/639
TXT Irregular (e.g., camshaft, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 637 wherein the rod is nonsymmetrical about
    its cross-sectional area.


CLS 219/640
TXT Gear:
    Subject matter under subclass 635 wherein the heating is applied to a
    cylindrical disk with a serrated (teeth) outer edge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 566+ for processes of heat treating
    ferrous metal gears using electrical energy.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 125+ for the miscellaneous
    apparatus for the heat treatment of metal gears.


CLS 219/641
TXT Valve:
    Subject matter under subclass 635 wherein the heating is applied to a
    circular band having a flap or lid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    606,    for bonding a valve seat to a conductor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 890.12+ for valve making.


CLS 219/642
TXT Ring or link:
    Subject matter under subclass 635 wherein the heating is applied to a
    circular band or a series of circular bands that are interlocked together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    606,    for bonding a circular band to a conductor.


CLS 219/643
TXT Tube (i.e., pipe):
    Subject matter under subclass 635 wherein the heating is applied to a
    hollow cylinder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59.1+,  for similar subject matter involving resistance heating.

    607+,   for bonding tubes.


CLS 219/644
TXT Interior surface:
    Subject matter under subclass 643 wherein the heating is applied to an
    inner tube wall.


CLS 219/645
TXT Strip (e.g., sheet, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 635 wherein the heating is applied to a thin
    flexible broad object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    619,    for an inductive heating roller for a strip.

    773,    for capacitive dielectric heating devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of and apparatus for feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus for winding or unwinding a web or strand in general use, and
    particularly Cross-Reference Art Collection 909 for heating or cooling that
    may be appropriate to winding, tensioning, or guiding elongated material.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 103+ for miscellaneous heat
    treating apparatus for heating metal webs, sheets, or strands.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 59+ for a residual device for heating a
    longitudinally moving web, strand, or sheet.


CLS 219/646
TXT Slab (e.g., ingot, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 635 wherein the heating is applied to a
    thick, nonflexible, broad object.


CLS 219/647
TXT With workpiece support:
    Subject matter under subclass 600 wherein a material or an object is
    contained in, held in place by, or set to rest upon an arrangement during
    inductive heating.


    (1)     Note.  The meaning of "workpiece" is any object or material that
    work (in the form of heat) is applied to.

    (2)     Note.  An inductor of the heating device may constitute the support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    385+,   for an electrical resistance heater combined with a container,
    enclosure, or support for material.

    622,    for an inductive cooking support structure.

    676,    for support of the inductor.

    774+,   for workpiece support in which capacitive dielectric heating is
    applied.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, appropriate subclasses for
    electric furnaces wherein a crucible forms the work support.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, for appropriate subclasses for
    workpiece handling.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 227+ for a residual heating device with
    associated work support.


CLS 219/648
TXT Levitation:
    Subject matter under subclass 647 wherein the workpiece is subjected to
    electromagnetic forces in order to maintain it in a position without
    physical contact.


CLS 219/649
TXT Materials:
    Subject matter under subclass 647 wherein the workpiece support is of a
    particular substance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 957 for conveyor material.


CLS 219/650
TXT With monitoring (e.g., regulating, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 647 including a device for checking or
    regulating the workpiece support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    663,    for a switching power supply system responsive to a load condition.


CLS 219/651
TXT Gas environment:
    Subject matter under subclass 647 wherein an atmospheric condition other
    than air is surrounding the workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  A gaseous environment in combination with an enclosure
    surrounding the material or object is classified within.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    686,    for a microwave heating device with a specific gas environment.


CLS 219/652
TXT Rotation of workpiece:
    Subject matter under subclass 647 wherein the workpiece is subjected to a
    spinning or circular motion relative about its axis.

    (1)     Note.  To be classified here, the workpiece must be turning or
    spinning as the heating is being applied.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    657,    for a conveyor moving in a curved path.

    752+,   for microwave heating devices with a load support turntable.


CLS 219/653
TXT Conveyor:
    Subject matter under subclass 647 wherein the workpiece support provides
    continuous movement of the workpiece from one location to another.

    (1)     Note.  No details of a conveyor are classified herein, for
    conveyors, per se, see SEARCH CLASS below.

    (2)     Note.  The meaning of "workpiece" is any object or material that
    work (in the form of heat) is applied to.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    388,    for an electrical resistance heater with conveyor means.

    700,    for conveying a workpiece in a microwave tunnel furnace.

    775,    for conveying a workpiece in which dielectric heating is applied.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, for appropriate subclasses for specific
    conveyor structure.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 150+ for a chamber of a
    type utilized for a heating function and either a driven device or an
    inclined flow path for carrying or conveying material into, within, and out
    of the chamber.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 239+ for a residual heating device having work
    feeding, agitating, discharging, or conveying subcombination.


CLS 219/654
TXT Charge or discharge:
    Subject matter under subclass 653 wherein a force is applied to guide or
    move forward the workpiece onto the conveyor or to move the workpiece from
    the conveyor.


CLS 219/655
TXT Multiple stations:
    Subject matter under subclass 653 wherein the workpiece is conveyed to a
    plurality of different work locations.

    (1)     Note.  Work locations or stations, besides heating, may provide
    operations such as pressing, cooling, cutting, etc., on the workpiece.


CLS 219/656
TXT Plural heating zones:
    Subject matter under subclass 655 wherein the workpiece is subjected to
    inductive heating at two or more stations along the conveyor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    662,    for systems with plural inductors having a switching power supply.

    671,    for an inductive heating device with plural inductors.

    701,    for a conveyor with plural microwave heating zones.

    776,    for a conveyor with plural dielectric heating zones.


CLS 219/657
TXT Curve path:
    Subject matter under subclass 653 wherein the line of movement of the
    conveyor is circular or approximates an arc of a circle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    652,    for the rotation of a workpiece.


CLS 219/658
TXT Lift (i.e., vertical movement):
    Subject matter under subclass 653 wherein the line of movement of the
    conveyor is vertical (an up and down direction).


CLS 219/659
TXT Pressure applicator (e.g., clamp, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 647 wherein the workpiece support applies a
    force on the workpiece to keep the workpiece from moving about.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include a heating apparatus wherein
    the heater and the work are brought into proper relationship, the heat
    applied, and the heater and work then separated.  In this subclass, the
    work must be moved with respect to the heater during the heating operation.

    (2)     Note.  Apparatus for molding, shaping, or metal working are
    excluded from this subclass.  For such excluded subject matter see SEARCH
    THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS and SEARCH CLASS below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149+,   for resistance heating.

    602,    for inductive metal working.

    777,    for a capacitive dielectric heating device with pressure applicator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 405+ for processes of molding or shaping plastic materials
    within the class definitions which include a heating step by means of
    direct application of electrical or wave energy.

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses for a clamp structure.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 174 for a molding machine for shaping or reshaping nonmetals
    combined with means for applying radiant energy (e.g., electrical,
    electromagnetic, etc.) to the work.


CLS 219/660
TXT With power supply system:
    Subject matter under subclass 600 wherein electrical energy is fed to an
    inductive heating apparatus for operation.

    (1)     Note.  The combination of a specific inductor and a power supply,
    therefor, where the power supply is recited by name only and is not
    classified in this or the indented subclass.  Details of an inductor and
    power supply must be recited.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    482+,   for an electrical resistance heater with a power supply and control
    means.

    702+,   for a microwave heating device with a control system.

    778+,   for a power supply system for capacitive dielectric heating systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for the miscellaneous power distribution and supply systems.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for the miscellaneous systems for controlling phase angle or
    voltage and/or current magnitude, and for the miscellaneous transformer and
    impedance systems.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    inverter and/or converter systems.


CLS 219/661
TXT Power switching:
    Subject matter under subclass 660 wherein a device controls the on and off
    periods of energy being supplied from the power supply to the inductive
    heating apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    715,    for a microwave heating device with power switching.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 112+
    for switching systems.


CLS 219/662
TXT Plural load inductors:
    Subject matter under subclass 661 wherein the power switching device
    controls the energy being supplied to two or more inductive heating
    apparatuses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    476+,   for electrical resistance heating with plural separate heating
    devices.

    656,    for a workpiece support with plural heating zones.

    671,    for a power supply with plural inductors.

    717,    for a microwave heating device with plural power supplies.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 11+
    for plural load circuit systems.


CLS 219/663
TXT Condition responsive:
    Subject matter under subclass 661 wherein the on and off periods of the
    power supplied to the inductive heating apparatus are automatically
    regulated according to a preselected result.

    (1)     Note.  The automatic controlling device must include means to sense
    a condition and means to vary a condition in response to the sensed
    condition.  Means to maintain a condition constant are included as an
    automatic control where the system includes means to sense deviations from
    the condition and to adjust the system to maintain the desired value
    constant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    704+,   for a microwave heating device with a load condition sensor.

    779,    for capacitive dielectric heating systems with automatic control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for the miscellaneous power distribution and supply systems.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for the miscellaneous systems for controlling phase angle or
    voltage and/or current magnitude, and for the miscellaneous transformer and
    impedance systems.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems.


CLS 219/664
TXT Input monitoring:
    Subject matter under subclass 663 including an arrangement for checking or
    regulating input power supplied to the inductive heating apparatus.


CLS 219/665
TXT Load sensing:
    Subject matter under subclass 663 wherein a device is indicative of or
    condition responsive to a physical state of a material or an object being
    heated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    626,    for an inductive cooking system with load sensing.

    704,    for a microwave heating device with a load condition sensor.


CLS 219/666
TXT With tuning:
    Subject matter under subclass 665 wherein the sensing device matches
    electrical parameters of an input energy signal with that of an impedance
    of the load.


CLS 219/667
TXT Temperature:
    Subject matter under 665 wherein the sensing device is responsive to a
    thermal change of the load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    494+,   for electrical resistance heating with a thermally responsive
    control system.

    627,    for an induction cooking system responsive to temperature.

    710,    for a microwave heating system with temperature sensing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 584+ for an indicating
    system responsive to thermal conditions.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for
    temperature measuring devices.


CLS 219/668
TXT With protection:
    Subject matter under subclass 661 wherein an arrangement is provided to
    prevent damage to the power switching device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    716,    for microwave heating devices having a power switching system with
    detectors.

    723,    for a microwave heating device with interlock circuiting and an
    additional safety feature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for the
    safety and protection of systems and devices.


CLS 219/669
TXT Polyphase:
    Subject matter under subclass 661 wherein the power supply provides two or
    more phases of alternating current.


CLS 219/670
TXT With specific transformer:
    Subject matter under subclass 660 wherein a device is provided to transfer
    power from one or more circuits to one or more other circuits at a constant
    frequency and with voltage and current changes in direct proportion to a
    ratio of turns between a primary coil winding and a secondary coil winding.

    (1)     Note.  A specific structure of the transformer core for modifying
    the magnetic flux is appropriate under this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    630+,   for an inductive fluid or a liquid heater with a specific core or
    coil structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for a transformer and core
    structure.


CLS 219/671
TXT With plural load inductors:
    Subject matter under subclass 660 wherein an arrangement is provided to
    supply power to two or more inductive heating apparatuses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    662,    for an inductive switching power supply for plural inductors.

    656,    for an inductive heater with workpiece support for a plurality of
    heating zones.


CLS 219/672
TXT Specific inductor configuration:
    Subject matter under subclass 600 wherein a wire wound around an iron core
    or a coil having a distinctive external contour or unique shape induces
    currents for inductive heating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    624,    for an inductive cooking system with a core or coil structure.

    635+,   for an inductive device specifically designed for various heating
    applications.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 620 for methods of making coils.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for the structure of
    transformers  and inductive reactors of general utility and subclasses 225+
    for coils of special configuration.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 9, 10, and 15 for inductor coils for use in
    high frequency diathermy and for treatment of the human body.


CLS 219/673
TXT U-coil section:
    Subject matter under subclass 672 wherein the coil or core configuration is
    in a fork-like shape.


CLS 219/674
TXT Cylindrical coil:
    Subject matter under subclass 672 wherein the coil or core configuration is
    in a cylinder shape.


CLS 219/675
TXT Planar coil:
    Subject matter under subclass 672 wherein the coil or core configuration
    lies substantially in a single plane.


CLS 219/676
TXT With inductor support:
    Subject matter under subclass 672 wherein the inductor is held in place in
    close proximity to a conductive workpiece (material or object).


CLS 219/677
TXT With cooling arrangement:
    Subject matter under subclass 672 including an apparatus to remove heat
    from the inductor.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for inductive heaters
    combined with devices for cooling only the work.  Such excluded subject
    matter may be found in the classes which provide for the apparatus which
    treats the specific materials and object which are cooled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    632,    for an inductive heating system having a cooling arrangement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 55+ for inductor devices with a
    temperature modifier.


CLS 219/678
TXT MICROWAVE HEATING:
    Subject matter under the class definition for the electric heating of a
    material or object by applying a field of electromagnetic wave radiation in
    a frequency range from about 1 gigahertz to 3 gigahertz.

    (1)     Note.  The work may be exposed to the emanations of a free space
    antenna or placed at an appropriate position in a wave guide or resonant
    cavity, etc.

    (2)     Note.  For claims reciting both food (edible) and nonfood
    (nonedible) heating by an electric heating device or method, classification
    is proper for Class 219.  If the claims recited are limited to food
    (edible) heating methods, composition, product, or processes,
    classification is proper for Class 426.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids,  subclass 1 by
    electromagnetic energy.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 451 for apparatus for
    treating food by radiant electrical energy and digest 14 for cooking by
    induction heating.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 19+ and 273+ for oven structure.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 35 for shielded
    or screened anti-inductive structures.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 193+ for
    treating substances with electrical or radiant energy to effect a chemical
    change.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 324+ for a method and apparatus for a
    fluent material or object for corona irradiation; subclasses 428+ for a
    method and apparatus for fluent material containment, support, or transfer
    means with or without an irradiating nuclear or electromagnetic radiation
    source; and subclasses 453.11+ for methods and apparatus to support an
    object for nuclear or electromagnetic radiation.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 405+ for direct application of electrical or wave energy to work.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclasses 39+ for a
    discharge device load with a distributed parameter-type transmission line,
    subclasses 39.51+ for a distributed parameter resonator-type magnetron, and
    subclasses 94+ with a cathode or cathode heater supply circuit.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for power supplies and regulators of electrical device systems.

    331,    Oscillators, appropriate subclasses 86+ for a magnetically
    controlled space discharge device (e.g., magnetron).

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, appropriate subclasses for
    wave transmission lines and networks, particularly subclasses 24+ for
    coupling networks and subclasses 219+ for resonators (e.g., cavity or wave
    guides).

    334,    Tuners, appropriate subclasses for tuners which may be adapted for
    use as a heating device, especially subclasses 26+ for tuning units which
    may be adapted for use as a heating device and which have means for
    automatically centering the frequency to which the tuner is adjusted.

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), appropriate subclasses for radio wave energy.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 700+ for antenna
    structures.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, appropriate subclasses for an
    inverter and/or converter system.

    392,    Electric Resistance Heating Devices, for heating devices using
    resistance heaters.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 21 and 22+ for processes of the
    class using microwave or other electrical or electromagnetic radiation and
    subclasses 186+ for apparatus for the chemical treatment of material using
    radiant electrical energy.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 174+ for means of applying electrical or wave energy directly to
    work.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 107+ for a packaged or wrapped product having a specific
    electrical or wave feature and subclasses 234+ for the direct application
    of electrical or wave energy to food material.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 9+ for a magnetic field applied to the body for
    therapeutic purposes.

    606,    Surgery, subclasses 27+ and 32+ for heat or electrical application.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses 1+
    for light and thermal application to the body and subclasses 114 through
    156 for an electrical energy applicator.


CLS 219/679
TXT With diverse device:
    Subject matter under subclass 678 wherein both a microwave heater and a
    functionally different type of device are provided for in an arrangement.

    (1)     Note.  A functionally different type of device is a device that
    performs a function other than heating, for combination with different
    types of heaters see SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    601,    for inductive heating with diverse-type heaters.

    680,    for microwave heating with diverse-type heaters.


CLS 219/680
TXT With diverse-type heating:
    Subject matter under subclass 678 wherein both a microwave heating
    arrangement and a different type of heater are provided for in a heating
    apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of different types of heaters are resistance
    heaters, incandescent lamps, infrared lamps, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    601,    for inductive heating with diverse-type heaters.


CLS 219/681
TXT Convection heating:
    Subject matter under subclass 680 wherein the diverse-type heating is
    transferring heat to a load by a bodily movement of heated particles of
    matter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400,    for heat transfer by convection.

    757,    for an enclosed cavity structure with cooling or ventilation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 21+ for ventilated ovens.


CLS 219/682
TXT Steam generating:
    Subject matter under subclass 681 wherein the convection heating produces
    vapor particles (mixture of gas and liquid particles).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401,    for a resistive heating device generating steam.

    731,    for cookware with heat exchange by fluent material.


CLS 219/683
TXT Gas burner:
    Subject matter under subclass 681 wherein the convection heating is
    produced by burning a gaseous fuel.

    SEARCH CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126,    for gas burning stoves and furnaces.


CLS 219/684
TXT Tunnel type:
    Subject matter under subclass 681 wherein the convection heating takes
    place in an elongated hollow cavity with opening or closing ends.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    698+,   for a microwave tunnel furnace.


CLS 219/685
TXT Resistive heating:
    Subject matter under subclass 680 wherein the diverse type of heating is
    applying an electric current through a load or conductor which produces an
    impedance to the current flow that results in a dissipation of energy in a
    form of heat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50+,    for resistance heating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    392,    Electric Resistance Heating Devices, for heating devices using
    resistance heaters.


CLS 219/686
TXT Gas environment (e.g., pressurized, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 678 wherein an atmospheric condition other
    than air is surrounding a material or an object to be heated.

    (1)     Note.  A gaseous environment in combination with an enclosure
    surrounding the material or object is classified within.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    440,    for an electrical resistance heating vessel with pressure
    generating or maintaining means.

    651,    for inductive heating under a gas environment.


CLS 219/687
TXT Fluid heater:
    Subject matter under subclass 678 wherein a microwave heating apparatus is
    arranged to heat a fluent material.

    (1)     Note.  A fluid material is one that flows easily from container to
    container and may be a fine granular material or just air.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    628+,   for inductive heating of fluid or liquid.

    772,    for apparatus for dielectric heating a fluent material where the
    electromagnetic field acts directly on the fluent material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 341 for fluid handling apparatus having an
    electric heater.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 33 for fluid conduits with
    electric thawing and freeze protection means.

    166,    Wells, subclass 60 for an electrical heater in  a well and subclass
    248 for processes of passing electric current or electrical wave energy
    through earth for treating it.

    392,    Electric Resistance Heating Devices, subclasses 301+ for fluid
    heating by electric resistance heating devices, also see subclass 341 for
    electric well heaters.


CLS 219/688
TXT Water:
    Subject matter under subclass 687 wherein the fluid being heated is a
    chemical compound of two hydrogen atoms combined with one oxygen atom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 344+ for water heaters.

    392,    Electric Resistance Heating Devices.


CLS 219/689
TXT Beverage (e.g., coffee, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 687 wherein the fluid being heated is any
    drinkable liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 451 for apparatus for
    treating food by radiant electrical energy and subclasses 275+ for beverage
    makers.


CLS 219/690
TXT Waveguide applicator:
    Subject matter under subclass 678 wherein the microwave energy passes
    through an elongated hollow conductor which confines a traveling microwave
    propagation to its physical boundaries to heat a material or an object.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 248+ for waveguide
    elements and components.


CLS 219/691
TXT Slotted:
    Subject matter under subclass 690 wherein a narrow slit opening is located
    on a waveguide applicator.


CLS 219/692
TXT Meander (e.g., zigzag, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 691 wherein an inlet and outlet openings are
    provided in a serpentine configuration on the waveguide applicator.


CLS 219/693
TXT Having load passage:
    Subject matter under subclass 691 wherein a pair of slotted inlet and
    outlet openings are aligned at diametrically opposite locations on the
    waveguide applicator through which a material or an object is passed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    698,    for a microwave tunnel furnace.


CLS 219/694
TXT With dummy load:
    Subject matter under subclass 690 wherein a device dissipates microwave
    energy entering the waveguide applicator not adsorbed by the workpiece.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 22 for dissipating
    terminations for long lines.


CLS 219/695
TXT Input power port arrangement:
    Subject matter under subclass 690 wherein an energy source is introduced in
    a specific orientation or placement in the waveguide applicator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    746,    for a microwave heating device with a feed structure for field
    modification.


CLS 219/696
TXT With tuning:
    Subject matter under subclass 695 wherein the input power port is adjusted
    to optimize an amount of microwave energy being applied to a load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    750,    for a microwave heating device with feed structure having tuning or
    a particular mode for field modification.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 17.3 for a system
    with impedance matching and subclasses 223+ for resonators with tuning
    means.

    334,    Tuners, appropriate subclasses for tuners which may be adapted for
    use as a heating device, especially subclasses 26+ for tuning units which
    may be adapted for use as a heating device and which have means for
    automatically centering the frequency to which the tuner is adjusted.


CLS 219/697
TXT Plural feed:
    Subject matter under subclass 695 wherein two or more input power ports are
    located within the waveguide applicator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    701,    for a tunnel furnace with plural heating zones.


CLS 219/698
TXT Tunnel furnace:
    Subject matter under subclass 678 wherein an elongated hollow cavity with
    open ends having microwave conducting interior walls is provided.

    (1)     Note.  A tunnel furnace may also be called a tunnel oven.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    684,    for a microwave tunnel-type oven with convection heating.


CLS 219/699
TXT With leakage suppression:
    Subject matter under subclass 698 wherein an arrangement is provided to
    reduce or prevent microwave energy from escaping the open ends of the
    tunnel furnace.

    (1)     Note.  The reduction of microwave energy may be by filtering,
    shielding, reflection, or absorption.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    736+,   for radiation protection of microwave energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 35+ for
    shielded or screened anti-inductive structure.


CLS 219/700
TXT Conveyor:
    Subject matter under subclass 698 wherein a workpiece is supported by a
    continuously moving assembly through a tunnel furnace.

    (1)     Note.  No details of a conveyor are classified within, for
    conveyors, per se, see SEARCH CLASS below.

    (2)     Note.  The meaning of "workpiece" is any object or material that
    work (in the form of heat) is applied to.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    388,    for an electrical resistance heating device with conveyor means.

    653,    for an inductive heating device with conveyor.

    775,    for conveying a workpiece in which capacitive  dielectric heating
    is applied.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses for a conveyor
    structure.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 150+ for a chamber of a
    type utilized for a heating function and either a driven device or an
    inclined flow path for carrying or conveying material into, within, and out
    of the chamber.


CLS 219/701
TXT Plural heating zones:
    Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein the workpiece is subjected to
    microwave heating at two or more stations along the conveyor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    656,    for a conveyor with plural inductive heating zones.

    776,    for a conveyor with plural capacitive dielectric heating zones.


CLS 219/702
TXT With control system:
    Subject matter under subclass 678 wherein a device is provided that
    indicates, maintains, or changes a condition on how the microwave energy
    acts upon a material or an object to be heated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    428+,   for an electrical resistance heating device with power supply and
    voltage or current regulation or current control means.

    625+,   for inductive cooking with a condition responsive system.

    663+,   for an inductive heating switching power supply with a condition
    responsive system.

    779,    for a capacitive dielectric heating device with  a condition
    responsive power supply system.


CLS 219/703
TXT Defrost:
    Subject matter under subclass 702 wherein a device is controlling the
    microwave heating apparatus to remove frost or ice from a material or an
    object so as to thaw out or become unfrozen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 134+ for ice prevention.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclass 524 for cooling, freezing, or treating cooled or frozen product;
    e.g., thawing, etc.


CLS 219/704
TXT Load condition sensor:
    Subject matter under subclass 702 wherein a device is indicative of or
    responding to a physical state of the material or object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    626,    for an inductive cooking system with load sensing.

    665,    for an inductive heating device with load sensing responsive
    switching power supply.


CLS 219/705
TXT Plural diverse types:
    Subject matter under subclass 704 wherein the sensing device is indicative
    of or responding to more than one condition of the load.

    (1)     Note.  A plural sensing device must include two or more conditions
    being sensed or different sensors which may or may not be at separate
    locations.


CLS 219/706
TXT By ultrasonic or acoustic:
    Subject matter under subclass 704 wherein the sensing device is responsive
    to sound waves at or above audible frequency.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, for measuring and testing devices.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices, for
    acoustic wave communications.


CLS 219/707
TXT Gas or vapor:
    Subject matter under subclass 704 wherein the sensing device is responsive
    to (a) a state of matter being of an aeriform fluid having an ability to
    spread out and occupy an entire enclosure in which it is present or (b) an
    aeriform fluid having particles of liquid mixed within having an ability to
    spread out and occupy an entire enclosure in which it is present.

    (1)     Note.  Vapor may also be called fog, mist, humidity, or steam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, for the measuring and testing of fluid
    pressure.


CLS 219/708
TXT Weight:
    Subject matter under subclass 704 wherein the sensing device is indicative
    of a force of gravity acting on the load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    518,    for resistive heating with automatic switching responsive to
    weight, position, or the presence of the body to be heated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    177,    Weighing Scales, for weighing devices.


CLS 219/709
TXT Field intensity/reflection:
    Subject matter under subclass 704 wherein the sensing device is responding
    to feedback from a quantity of microwave energy being applied to the load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:   Measuring and Testing, subclasses 600+ for
    impedance, admittance, or other quantities representative of electrical
    stimulus response relationships.


CLS 219/710
TXT Temperature:
    Subject matter under subclass 704 wherein the sensing device is responsive
    to an increase or decrease in thermal change to the load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    494,    for the automatic regulating of a power supply responsive to
    thermal properties.

    627,    for inductive cooking with a temperature sensor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 325 for an automatic
    control and subclass 421 for a cooking device with an impaling temperature
    control device.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 100+ for temperature
    measurement.


CLS 219/711
TXT By infrared:
    Subject matter under subclass 710 wherein the temperature sensor is
    responsive to the radiation of wavelengths just beyond the red end of the
    visible spectrum.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 120+ for temperature
    measurement in spaced noncontact relationship to specimens.


CLS 219/712
TXT Probe:
    Subject matter under subclass 710 wherein the temperature sensor penetrates
    into the load and senses an interior temperature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    516,    for an electric resistance heater with a thermally responsive
    device insertable into or in direct contact with heated material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 421 for a working device
    with impaling-type temperature serving means.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 155 for a temperature
    measurement with piercing element.


CLS 219/713
TXT Wireless type:
    Subject matter under subclass 712 wherein the probe transmits through the
    air the temperature of the load to the control system.


CLS 219/714
TXT Remote (e.g., card, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 702 wherein a device is controlling the
    microwave heating apparatus from a distance or transporting the controlling
    device to another microwave heating apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 435+ for coded record sensors.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825+ for selective
    communication.

    704,    Data Processing:  Speech Signal Processing, Linguistics, Language
    Translation, and Audio Compression/Decompression, subclass 274 for speech
    signal controlled systems.


CLS 219/715
TXT Power switching:
    Subject matter under subclass 702 wherein a device controls on and off
    periods of energy being supplied from the power supply to the microwave
    heating apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    661,    for an inductive heating device with a switching power supply
    system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems.


CLS 219/716
TXT With detector:
    Subject matter under subclass 715 wherein a device senses the power being
    supplied to the microwave heating apparatus.


CLS 219/717
TXT Plural power supplies:
    Subject matter under subclass 715 wherein two or more power sources are
    feeding microwave energy to the load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    476+,   for an electric resistance heating device with plural separate
    heaters.

    662,    for an inductive heating device with a switching power supply for
    plural load inductors.

    697,    for a waveguide applicator with plural input power.

    701,    for a microwave tunnel furnace with plural heating zones.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 11+
    for a plural load circuit system and subclasses 43+ for plural supply
    circuits or sources.


CLS 219/718
TXT Having duty cycle:
    Subject matter under subclass 715 wherein a device is controlling an
    intermittently operating microwave heating apparatus from an on-time period
    to an off-time period.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    492+,   for an electrical resistance heating device with automatic
    regulating or control means comprising timing or cycling means.

    507+,   for an electrical resistance heating device with current connection
    and/or disconnection means (e.g., switch).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 112+
    for switching systems.


CLS 219/719
TXT With timer:
    Subject matter under subclass 702 wherein a device controls an operating
    timing period or the duration of a microwave heating apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    492+,   for an electric resistance heating device with automatic regulating
    or control means comprising timing or cycling means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 38 for a cam
    operated resettable interval timer for an oven or range.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 309.15 for timer controlled
    systems.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 1+ for a
    timer controlled by a disparate device and subclasses 10+ for a timer
    combined with a disparate device.


CLS 219/720
TXT With display or alarm:
    Subject matter under subclass 702 wherein the sensing device produces a
    humanly perceptive visual or hearing indication of a condition sensed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    506,    for an electric resistance heating device with signal or indicating
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 67+ for alarms.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+ for alarms or display
    communications for condition responsive indicating systems.


CLS 219/721
TXT Starting circuitry:
    Subject matter under subclass 702 wherein a device controls the power
    supply at the beginning of the energization of a microwave heating
    apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 901 for
    starting circuit and subclass 908 for inrush current limiters.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, for control devices.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclass 49 with starting
    arrangement.


CLS 219/722
TXT Interlock circuitry and structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 702 wherein a device controls deenergizing a
    power source by opening a door handle or an access cover of a microwave
    heating apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    739,    for a microwave heating device with a door assembly for leakage
    prevention.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 50.01+ for
    interlocking switch.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 112+
    for switching systems.


CLS 219/723
TXT With additional safety feature:
    Subject matter under subclass 722 wherein an additional safeguard other
    than the interlock device provides deenergization of the power supply when
    a door or access cover is opened.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for the
    safety and protection of systems and devices.


CLS 219/724
TXT With latch assembly:
    Subject matter under subclass 722 wherein the interlock device is locked
    into a specific condition or state and must be energized or deenergized to
    change its condition or state.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 197 for stove doors and windows
    combined latch and operator.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, for fastening objects together to form a closure.


CLS 219/725
TXT Cookware (e.g., vessel, utensil, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 678 wherein a supporting or containing
    structure is subjected to microwave energy to warm, defrost, or cook edible
    material (food).

    (1)     Note.  Also may be called a cooking utensil or cooking vessel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    620+,   for cooking by inductive heating through a heat exchange.

    771,    for capacitive dielectric heating of food.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 451 for  apparatus for
    treating food by radiant electrical energy and  digest 14 for induction
    heating.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 373+ for vessels.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 902+ for a
    box for prepared or processed food.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 106+ for packaged or wrapped product and subclasses 234+ for the
    treatment of a food product by electrical or wave energy.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 34.1+ for a
    hollow or container-type article.


CLS 219/726
TXT With food mixer:
    Subject matter under subclass 725 including a device to stir or agitate an
    edible material (food) during microwave cooking.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 348 for a cooking device
    with stirring means.

    366,    Agitating.


CLS 219/727
TXT Expandable:
    Subject matter under subclass 725 wherein the cookware provides an ability
    to increase in size and volume during microwave cooking.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclass 111 for a packaged or wrapped product having a telescoping feature
    to allow for a decreased package dimension or having a packaging structure
    cooperating with food expansion.


CLS 219/728
TXT With field modifier:
    Subject matter under subclass 725 wherein the cookware provides an
    arrangement to vary the microwave energy intensity at a specific location.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    745,    for a microwave heating device with a field modification.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclass 107 for a packaged or wrapped product having a specific electrical
    or wave energy feature.


CLS 219/729
TXT Shielding:
    Subject matter under subclass 728 wherein the cookware provides an
    arrangement to prevent microwave energy from heating a specific location.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    736,    for a microwave heating device with radiation protection.


CLS 219/730
TXT With heat exchange (e.g., susceptor, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 725 wherein the cookware has highly absorbing
    microwave energy properties that convert microwave energy into thermal
    energy and transfer the thermal energy to an edible material (food).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    634,    for inductive heating with a heat exchange susceptor.

    759,    for general heat exchange devices, noncookware related.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclass 109 for a  packaged or wrapped product having heat exchange
    material.


CLS 219/731
TXT By fluent material (e.g., steaming, boiling, or frying, etc.):Subject
    matter under subclass 730 wherein the heat exchange is arranged to transfer
    heat to a fluent material.

    (1)     Note.  A fluent material is one that flows easily from container to
    container and may be a fine granular material, liquid, or air.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401,    for an electrical resistance oven with steam generating means.

    682,    for a microwave heating device combined with steam generating.

    772,    for apparatus for the capacitive dielectric heating of a fluent
    material where the electromagnetic field acts directly on the fluent
    material.


CLS 219/732
TXT With stand or handle:
    Subject matter under subclass 725 wherein (a) the cookware is supported in
    an upright position by legs, feet, or pedestal or (b) a part is provided on
    or attaches to the cookware for grasping or gripping the cookware by hand
    or a mechanical apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    762,    for a microwave heating device with load support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 110+ for handles.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 212.5, 710.5, and 752 for a container with
    handle.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclass 110 for a packaged or wrapped product having package attached
    support means.


CLS 219/733
TXT With drainage:
    Subject matter under subclass 725 wherein an arrangement to draw or carry
    away liquid from a region containing edible material is used during cooking.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 425 and 444+ for a
    cooking device having drip segregating, receiving, or directing means.


CLS 219/734
TXT With cover:
    Subject matter under subclass 725 wherein a lid is arranged to place on,
    over, or in front of to seal or enclose edible material within the cookware.


CLS 219/735
TXT Having vent:
    Subject matter under subclass 734 wherein a small opening in the cookware
    cover provides for a release of gas or vapor within the cookware.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    757,    for a microwave heating cavity with cooling or ventilation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 360+ for a container having a closure with
    vent means and subclass 913 for a ventilated container.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclass 118 for a packaged or wrapped product having packaging structure
    cooperation with food generated gas.


CLS 219/736
TXT Radiation protection:
    Subject matter under subclass 678 wherein an arrangement is provided to
    eliminate any exposure to microwave energy emissions outside of a confined
    zone.

    (1)     Note.  A confined zone may be a microwave oven; i.e., a closed
    cavity or tunnel furnace.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    699,    for a microwave-tunnel furnace with leakage suppression.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 35+ for
    shielded or screened anti-inductive structures.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 505.1 for radiation shielded receptacles
    for a radioactive source.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclass 85 for
    electromagnetic wave radiation preventing or shielding means.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 424 for a
    shielding device for housings and mounting assemblies with electrical
    components.


CLS 219/737
TXT With leakage detector:
    Subject matter under subclass 736 wherein a device is indicative of the
    presence of electromagnetic radiation from a specific region of a microwave
    heating apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 95+ with a
    waveguide or long line.


CLS 219/738
TXT With leakage prevention:
    Subject matter under subclass 736 wherein microwave energy is impeded from
    escaping a cavity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 35 for
    anti-inductive shielded or screened conductors and insulators.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 12 for transmission
    line inductive or radiation interference reduction systems.


CLS 219/739
TXT Door assembly:
    Subject matter under subclass 738 wherein a movable structure which turns
    on a hinge or slides on a groove is used for opening or closing an access
    entrance to a cavity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 190 for stove doors and windows.


CLS 219/740
TXT With screen or window:
    Subject matter under subclass 739 wherein a door panel consisting of a mesh
    or grid or transparent material is held in place by a door assembly.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 200 for stove doors and windows
    having a transparent panel.


CLS 219/741
TXT With choke or seal:
    Subject matter under subclass 739 wherein a device is used to prevent
    microwave energy from escaping past the door assembly.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 12 for a
    transmission line inductive or radiation interference reduction system.


CLS 219/742
TXT Slotted choke:
    Subject matter under subclass 741 wherein the choke device comprises narrow
    slit openings.


CLS 219/743
TXT Choke cavity cover:
    Subject matter under subclass 741 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    enclosing the choke.


CLS 219/744
TXT Absorption:
    Subject matter under subclass 738 wherein microwave energy is absorbed as a
    result of its interaction with leakage prevention materials.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 35 for shielded
    materials, stock, and screen rooms.

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 1+ for a radio wave absorber.


CLS 219/745
TXT Field modification:
    Subject matter under subclass 678 wherein the microwave energy is altered
    in its distribution throughout a cavity or to a load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    728,    for microwave cookware with a field modifier.


CLS 219/746
TXT With power feed structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 745 wherein an apparatus receives microwave
    energy that is being supplied to the cavity from a power source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    695,    for a microwave waveguide applicator with an input power port
    arrangement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 219+ for
    resonators, waveguide elements, and components.


CLS 219/747
TXT Phase shifting:
    Subject matter under subclass 746 wherein a fractional or residual part of
    the microwave energy is changed in frequency to match the impedance of the
    cavity and load.


CLS 219/748
TXT Radiator (e.g., antenna, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 746 wherein the feed structure provides a
    device which spreads and distributes the microwave energy into the cavity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    343,    Communications:  Radar Wave Antennas, for radio wave antennas.


CLS 219/749
TXT Rotating:
    Subject matter under subclass 748 wherein the radiator (antenna) moves
    about its axis while radiating microwave energy.


CLS 219/750
TXT With tuning or particular modes:
    Subject matter under subclass 746 wherein (a) an arrangement matches
    electrical parameters of an input microwave energy signal with that of an
    impedance of the cavity or a load within or (b) a power source generates a
    specific form of wave propagation within the cavity.

    (1)     Note.  Electrical parameters are commonly voltage, current,
    amplitude, or frequency.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    696,    for a microwave waveguide applicator having an input power port
    arrangement with tuning.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 231+ for cavity
    resonators with tuning.


CLS 219/751
TXT Mixer (e.g., rotating stirrer, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 745 wherein a device is provided which
    combines and distributes microwave energy of various strengths within the
    cavity.


CLS 219/752
TXT By load support movement:
    Subject matter under subclass 745 wherein the load is contained in, held in
    place by, or set to rest upon a moving device within the cavity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    388,    for an electric resistance heating device with means whereby
    material is continuously passed through a heated area.

    700,    for a microwave tunnel furnace with a conveyor.

    762,    for a microwave heating device with a load support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 421+ for cooking
    movably or adjustably supported and subclasses 443+ for a cooking device
    with  conveyor or movably supported.


CLS 219/753
TXT Horizontal and vertical:
    Subject matter under subclass 752 wherein the load support provides
    movement in both perpendicular and parallel planes to the horizon.


CLS 219/754
TXT Horizontal (e.g., turntable, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 752 wherein the load support provides
    movement in a parallel plane to the horizon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 338 for a rotary oven shelf or rack.


CLS 219/755
TXT Portable:
    Subject matter under subclass 754 wherein the load support provides an
    ability to be transported or moved by hand (carried) in and out of the
    cavity.


CLS 219/756
TXT Enclosed cavity structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 678 wherein the microwave energy is applied
    to a material or an object within a closed chamber.

    (1)     Note.  The chamber described above may also be referred to as a
    microwave oven.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 227+ for a cavity
    resonator.


CLS 219/757
TXT With cooling or ventilation:
    Subject matter under subclass 756 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    reducing heat or an opening is provided for escaping or releasing gas or
    vapor pressure within the enclosed cavity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    623,    for an inductive cooking device with a support having a cooling
    device.

    632,    for an inductive heating device with a cooling arrangement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 21+ for ventilated ovens.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 381+ for
    electronic systems and devices having cooling means.


CLS 219/758
TXT With cavity illumination:
    Subject matter under subclass 756 wherein a source (lamp) provides light to
    the enclosed cavity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 92+ for illumination with heater or
    refrigerator.


CLS 219/759
TXT With heat exchange (e.g., susceptor, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 678 wherein an arrangement provides highly
    absorbing microwave energy properties that convert microwave energy into
    thermal energy and transfers the thermal energy to a material or an object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    618+,   for an inductive heating device with heat exchange.

    730,    for microwave cookware with a heat exchange to an edible material.


CLS 219/760
TXT With specific transformer:
    Subject matter under subclass 678 wherein an electromagnetic induction
    transfers electric energy from one or more circuits to one or more other
    circuits at a constant frequency with voltage and current changes in direct
    proportion to a ratio of turns between a primary coil winding and a
    secondary coil winding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    670,    for an inductive heating device having a power supply system with a
    specific transformer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 355+
    for a power supply including a transformer or an inductor.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 182+ for a transformer structure.


CLS 219/761
TXT With specific generator:
    Subject matter under subclass 678 including a device which produces
    microwave energy in the heating apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclasses 39.51+
    for a distributed parameter resonator-type magnetron.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 86+ for a device with a magnetically
    controlled space discharge device.


CLS 219/762
TXT Load support:
    Subject matter under subclass 678 wherein an apparatus provides an
    arrangement that a material or an object is contained in, held in place by,
    or set to rest upon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    385,    for an electric resistance heating device combined with a
    container, enclosure, or support for material to be heated.

    647+,   for an inductive heating device having a workpiece support.

    752,    for a microwave heating device with a field modification by load
    support movement.

    774,    for a capacitive dielectric heating device having workpiece support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, for supporting structure, per se.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 236 for support combined
    with heating, cooling, or heat exchange means.


CLS 219/763
TXT Shelf:
    Subject matter under subclass 762 wherein a load support is attached to a
    cavity wall.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 337+ for an oven shelf or a rack.


CLS 219/764
TXT CAPACITIVE DIELECTRIC HEATING:
    Subject matter under the class definition for electric heating whereby a
    normally insulating (nonconducting) material or object interacts between
    conducting surfaces having an alternating electric field thereby causing
    internal energy losses in the material or object and a rise in temperature.

    (1)     Note.  Typical dielectric materials are air, wood, plastic,
    ceramic, mica, and wax-impregnated paper.  The internal losses are from the
    molecular friction of the dielectric material.

    (2)     Note.  A conductive dielectric heater with means to heat the
    electrodes to prevent condensation thereon is classified herein.

    (3)     Note.  A conductive dielectric heating apparatus with means to
    prevent dissipation of heat from the work by simultaneously heating the
    work holder or support is classified herein.

    (4)     Note.  For claims reciting both food (edible) and nonfood
    (nonedible) heating by an electric heating device or method, classification
    is proper for Class 219.  If the claims recited are limited to food
    (edible) heating methods, composition, product, or processes,
    classification is proper for Class 426.

    (5)     Note.  A capacitive dielectric heater with a diverse heater
    included is classified herein.  If the diverse heater is an inductive or
    microwave type, classification is above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 1+ for
    material subjected to electromagnetic energy.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 358 for cooking with an
    electrode-type heater; subclass 451 for treating food by electric, radiant,
    or vibrational energy; and digest 14 for induction heating food materials.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    272.2+ for methods of and subclasses 379.6+ for means of surface bonding
    and/or assembly thereof with direct application of electrical, magnetic, or
    radiant energy to work.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 193+ for
    apparatus for treating substances with electrical or radiant energy to
    effect a chemical change.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    subclasses 402+ for processes of heating a mold utilizing direct
    application of electrical or wave energy, digest 46 for molding processes
    utilizing electrical heat, and subclasses 405+ for processes utlizing
    direct application of electical or wave energy to the work.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 271+ for
    electrostatic capacitors.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping  or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 174+ for a device with means for applying electrical or wave
    energy directly to work.

    426,    Food and Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 237+ for the direct application of electrical or wave energy to
    food material.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 9+ for a magnetic field applied to the body for
    therapeutic purposes.

    606,    Surgery, subclasses 27+ and 32+ for devices for heat or electrical
    applications.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses 1+
    for light and thermal application to the body and subclasses 114 through
    156 for an electrical energy applicator.


CLS 219/765
TXT Bonding:
    Subject matter under subclass 764 wherein two or more opposing surfaces are
    permanently joined together by dielectric heating.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to the bonding of wood,
    plastic, or paper by thermal-sensitive glue.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    603,    for bonding by inductive heating in which the object or material
    bonded is metallic.

    633,    for bonding by inductive heating in which an intermediate member
    transfers heat (heat exchange) to the material or objects (usually
    nonmetallic) being bonded.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    272.2+ for laminating processes which include heating or other effects
    produced by electrical energy; see subclasses 379.6+ for apparatus therefor.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 405+ for direct application of electrical or wave energy to work.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 174+ for a device with means for applying electrical or wave
    energy directly to work.


CLS 219/766
TXT Shoe:
    Subject matter under subclass 765 wherein the bonded material or object
    results in forming or repairing footwear apparel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, appropriate subclasses for apparatus and
    processes for making shoes.

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclass 2.6 for heated boots and shoes.


CLS 219/767
TXT Die embroidery:
    Subject matter under subclass 765 wherein a geometric pattern is formed
    (imprinted) on the material or object while being bonded.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    380.8 for an electrode with a shaping or deforming workpiece function.


CLS 219/768
TXT Sewing machine type:
    Subject matter under subclass 765 wherein an apparatus is applying
    mechanically driven rollers to bond together a seam, or a needle-like point
    is spot welding two or more materials together.


CLS 219/769
TXT Container sealing:
    Subject matter under subclass 765 wherein the bonded surfaces result in a
    tightly enclosed vessel having the capacity for holding material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    604,    for bonding containers by inductive heating.

    633,    for bonding nonmetallic objects by inductive heating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, digest 2 for high frequency electric sealing,
    subclass 557 for heat shrinking, and subclasses 477+ for heat sealing.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    272.2+ for processes and subclasses 379.6+ for apparatus therefor for
    laminating.


CLS 219/770
TXT Specific heating application:
    Subject matter under subclass 764 wherein a material or an object of a
    particular shape or form is subjected to dielectric heating.

    (1)     Note.  This and other indented subclasses are intended primarily as
    subclasses for specific applications of dielectric heating.  Examples of
    specific applications are a dielectric heater claimed in combination with
    an article of specific configuration, with a specific material, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    635+,   for an inductive heater for a specific heating application.


CLS 219/771
TXT Food:
    Subject matter under subclass 770 wherein the heating application is to
    warm, defrost, or cook (edibles) food.

    (1)     Note.  For claims reciting both food (edible) and nonfood
    (nonedible) heating by an electric heating device or method, classification
    is proper for Class 219.  If the claims recited are limited to food
    (edible) heating methods, composition, product, or processes,
    classification is proper for Class 426.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    620+,   for inductive cooking.

    725+,   for microwave cooking.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Food and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 358 for cooking with an
    electrode-type heater; subclass 451 for treating food by electric, radiant,
    or vibrational energy; and digest 14 for induction heating food materials.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 237+ for the direct application of electrical or wave energy to
    food material.


CLS 219/772
TXT Fluent material:
    Subject matter under subclass 770 wherein the heating application is to a
    fluid or liquid substance.

    (1)     Note.  A fluent material is one that flows easily from container to
    container and may be a fine granular material, liquid, or air.

    (2)     Note.  The dielectric heating must act directly on the fluent
    material.  If the heating is inductive with an intermediate member such as
    a conduit or container which in turn heats the fluent material, see SEARCH
    THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    628,    for inductively heating a fluent material through an intermediate
    member (heat exchange).

    687,    for a microwave fluid heater.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 451 for apparatus for
    sterilizing foods by electrical energy.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 155+ and 157.15+
    for methods involving chemical reactions induced by radiant energy, and
    subclasses 193+ for the corresponding apparatus.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 432 for methods and apparatus for
    subjecting fluent material to a radiant energy source.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    subclasses 405+ for processes utlizing direct application of electical or
    wave energy to the work, especially subclasses 413+ for treating or
    producing a porous product, subclasses 437 for conveying or aligning
    particulate material, subclasses 454+ for direct application of fluid
    pressure, subclasses 464+ for extrusion molding, subclass 478 for injection
    molding.

    392,    Electric Resistance Heating Devices, appropriate subclasses for
    fluid heating by resistance heaters.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 21 and 22+ for processes of the
    class using microwave or other electrical or electromagnetic radiation and
    subclasses 186+ for apparatus for the chemical treatment of material using
    radiant electrical energy.


CLS 219/773
TXT Sheet (e.g., board, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 770 wherein the dielectric heating
    application is to a flat, rectangular-shaped material or object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    645,    for the inductive heating of metal sheet materials.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of and apparatus for feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, appropriate subclasses for winding
    and reeling apparatus.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 59+ for a residual device for heating a
    longitudinally moving web, strand, or sheet.


CLS 219/774
TXT With workpiece support:
    Subject matter under subclass 764 wherein a material or an object is
    contained in, held in place by, or set to rest upon an arrangement during
    dielectric heating.

    (1)     Note.  The meaning of "workpiece" is any object or material that
    work (in the form of heat) is applied to.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes the subject matter of the subclass in
    combination with an enclosure therefor.

    (3)     Note.  An electrode of the heating device may constitute the
    support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    385+,   for an electrical resistance heater combined with a container,
    enclosure, or support for material.

    647+,   for workpiece support in which inductive heating is applied.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, appropriate subclasses for
    electric furnaces wherein a crucible forms the work support.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, for appropriate subclasses for
    workpiece handling.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 227+ for a residual heating device associated
    with work support.


CLS 219/775
TXT Conveyor:
    Subject matter under subclass 774 wherein the workpiece support provides
    for a line of continuous movement of the workpiece from one location to
    another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    388,    for an electrical resistance heater with conveyor means.

    645,    for apparatus to move a web, strand, or sheet through an inductive
    heating zone.

    653+,   for an inductive heating system with a conveyor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, for appropriate subclasses for specific
    conveyor structure.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 150+ for a chamber of a
    type utilized for a heating function and either a driven device or an
    inclined flow path for carrying or conveying material into, within, and out
    of the chamber.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 239+ for a residual heating device having work
    feeding, agitating, discharging, or conveying subcombination.


CLS 219/776
TXT Multiple stations:
    Subject matter under subclass 775 wherein the workpiece is conveyed to a
    plurality of heating zones or work locations.

    (1)     Note.  The plural heating zones may be for simultaneously heating
    plural objects or different portions of one object or for heating one
    object in diverse manners.

    (2)     Note.  A nonuniform or progressively increasing or decreasing field
    in the direction of travel of the work is considered to come within the
    meaning of plural heating zones.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    656,    for a conveyor with plural inductive heating zones.

    701,    for a conveyor with plural microwave heating zones.


CLS 219/777
TXT Pressure applicator (e.g., clamp, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 774 wherein the workpiece support applies a
    force on the workpiece to keep the workpiece from moving about.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include heating apparatus wherein the
    heater and the work are brought into proper relationship, the heat applied,
    and the heater and work then separated.  In this subclass, the work must be
    moved with respect to the heater during the heating operation.

    (2)     Note.  Means for molding, shaping, or metal working are excluded
    from this subclass.  For such excluded subject matter see SEARCH THIS
    CLASS, SUBCLASS and SEARCH CLASS below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149+,   for electrical metal heating and working.

    659,    for an inductive heating device with a pressure applicator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 405+ for processes of molding or shaping plastic materials
    within the class definitions which include a heating step by means of
    direct application of electrical or wave energy.

    269,    Work Holders, for appropriate subclasses for a clamp structure.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 174+ for a molding machine for shaping or reshaping nonmetals
    combined with means for applying radiant energy (e.g., electrical,
    electromagnetic, etc.) to the work.


CLS 219/778
TXT With power supply system:
    Subject matter under subclass 764 wherein an electrical energizing source
    is fed to a dielectric heating apparatus for operation.

    (1)     Note.  The combination of a specific electrode and a power supply
    therefor where the power supply is recited by name only is not classified
    in this or the  indented subclass.  Details of an electrode and power
    supply must be recited.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    482+,   for an electrical resistance heater with a power supply and control
    means.

    660+,   for a power supply system for inductive heating systems.

    702+,   for a microwave heating device with a control system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for the miscellaneous power distribution and supply systems.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for the miscellaneous systems for controlling phase angle or
    voltage and/or current magnitude and for the miscellaneous transformer and
    impedance systems.

    331,    Oscillators, appropriate subclasses for electrical oscillator
    systems in general.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 34+ for coupling
    networks for coupling electric energy which varies over a band of
    frequencies to another transmission line or network.


CLS 219/779
TXT Condition responsive:
    Subject matter under subclass 778 wherein the power supplied to the
    dielectric heating apparatus is automatically regulated according to a
    preselected result.

    (1)     Note.  The automatic control means must include means to sense a
    condition and means to vary a condition in response to the sensed
    condition.  Means to maintain a condition constant is included as an
    automatic control where the system includes means to sense deviations from
    the condition and to adjust the system to maintain the desired value
    constant.

    (2)     Note.  The automatic control may be in response to or control the
    working temperature, duration of heating cycle, tuning of the load circuit
    or power supply, or the coupling impedance between the power supply and
    heating apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    663+,   for inductive heating systems with automatic control.

    704+,   for a microwave heating device with a load condition sensor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for the miscellaneous power distribution and supply systems.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for the miscellaneous systems for controlling phase angle or
    voltage and/or current magnitude and for the miscellaneous transformer and
    impedance systems.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 34+ for coupling
    networks for coupling electric energy which varies over a band of
    frequencies to another transformer line or network.


CLS 219/780
TXT Specific electrode configuration:
    Subject matter under subclass 764 wherein a conducting surface having a
    distinctive exterior contour or unique shape generates an electromagnetic
    alternating field for dielectric heating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 25.41+ for methods of making condensers.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 271+ and
    503+ for capacitors of general utility.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses
    154+ for condenser-type electrodes for use in high frequency diathermy and
    for treatment of the human body.


CLS 220/
TTL RECEPTACLES

CLS 220/
TXT This is the residual class of receptacles comprised of a peripheral wall
    with at least one closed end, and having an access opening which may be an
    open end of the receptacles, or which may be provided in the peripheral
    wall or closed end of the receptacle.  Receptacles of this class type must
    function, by disclosure, to hold contents which in turn are to be
    eventually removed from the receptacle.  This is also the residual locus
    for closures for receptacles.  This is also the residual locus for
    attachments for receptacles.

    (1)     Note.  Some specific art structures remain in this class which do
    not function by disclosure to hold contents which in turn are to be
    eventually removed from the receptacle; particularly those in subclasses
    2.1+, subclasses 3.2+, and some electrical and sectional housings.

    (2)     Note.  Designs for receptacles are in the design classes, see
    particularly classes:



    D6,     Furnishings, for desks, furniture, showcases, etc.

    D7,     Equipment for Preparing or Serving Food or Drink Not Elsewhere
    Specified, subclasses 509+ for drinking vessels; and subclasses 354+ for
    various food preparation vessels.

    D9,     Packages and Containers for the Transport or Handling of Goods.

    D11,    Jewelry, Symbolic Insignia, and Ornaments, subclasses 143+ for
    vases.

    D99,    Miscellaneous, subclasses 28+ for safes.

    (3)     Note.  For other receptacles, see the following classes:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, for receptacles of that type.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 257.05+ for a
    receptacle which is particularly constructed to facilitate loading of an
    applicator; including indented subclasses 257.07+ for inkwells.

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 110.5, and the notes thereto, for
    handles which also serve as receptacles.

    27,     Undertaking, particularly subclasses 2+ for coffins.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, particularly
    subclasses 233 and 237+ for drying receptacles.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 306+ for cans with
    labels thereon.

    70,     Locks, subclasses 63+ and 77+ for receptacle and closure locks
    where no particular structure of the receptacle is involved.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 169+ for a detailed cylinder
    or working chamber or closure therefor for an expansible chamber device.
    See section III, under "SEARCH CLASS 220", of the class definition of Class
    92, for a statement of the line between Class 92 and Class 220.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 428, 430-433 and 439
    for cooking molds of particular application.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, for safes.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, for aquariums, nests, feed bags, etc.

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, subclasses 41.1 and 45+ for
    projectile holders and carriers and magazines.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 373+ for liquid heating receptacles.

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 231+ for tobacco users' appliance combined with
    ash receiving receptacles.

    137,    Fluid Handling, for tanks in combination with other fluid handling
    means, especially subclass 268 for receptacles holding a supply of solids
    to be mixed with a liquid.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 389+ for woven bags.

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, for a purse, wallet, card
    container or coin container used to carry money, credit cards or items of
    identification on the person.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 162+ and the subclasses there noted for
    receptacles specialized to use in wells.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, particularly subclasses 30+ for receptacles for
    holding and dispensing fire extinguishing materials.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 17+ and 50+ and
    the subclasses specified in the Notes to the definition of these subclasses
    for boxes and housings which involve electrical features. See the Notes to
    subclasses 2.1+ of this class (220) for the distinction between the
    envelopes, boxes and housings for electric lamps, discharge devices, and
    similar devices in this class and those in other classes, and the Notes to
    subclasses 3.2+ of this class (220) for the distinction between the boxes
    and housings for electrical devices in this class and those in other
    classes.

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, for receptacles of that
    description.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.62+ for
    switches combined with closure members, locks and letter boxes.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, appropriate subclasses, for a
    container particularly configured to hold a specific article or
    material-including an article (s) or material (s) put up as a mercantile
    unit.  See subclasses 139+ for a portable segregating carrier for plural
    cylindrical type beverage containers and subclasses 499 through 520 for
    containers with nesting or stacking features.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, for receptacles of that description.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, for receptacles of that material.

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclasses for electrically heated
    vessels and ovens.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for article dispensing
    receptacles not otherwise provided for, and see sections I and II of the
    class definition of Class 221 for identification and explanation of those
    features which are considered to be dispensing features and to indicate
    classification of a receptacle structure in Class 221.

    222,    Dispensing, and see the notes to the class and subclass definitions
    for receptacles for dispensing fluent materials.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, for receptacles of that
    material.

    232,    Deposit and Collection Receptacles, for receptacles of that
    description.

    235,    Registers, subclasses 32 and 100 for registering boxes.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, especially subclasses
    302+ for receptacles combined with sprayers receiving their supply from the
    receptacle, subclasses 34+ for holders for slow diffusers, and subclasses
    146+ for vehicular type supply receptacles.

    249,    Static Molds, appropriate subclasses, for receptacles intended for
    molding fluent material.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 475.2+ for invisible radiation
    responsive photographic cassettes, and subclasses 506.1+ for a shielded
    receptacle for a radioactive source.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 275+ for receptacles for
    treating molten material.

    273,    Amusement Devices: Games, subclasses 144+ for chance mixing or
    dispensing devices such as dice cups.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 825 for scabbards for skates.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 68.22+ for
    hoist buckets.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, for cabinets and for receptacle and
    receptacle combinations not provided for elsewhere.  Subclasses 35+ provide
    for removal facilitating structure such as a receptacle having a spring
    loaded bottom portion which moves in response to the weight of contents.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 317+ and the
    subclasses specified in the Notes thereto for electric lamps and discharge
    devices which are provided with an envelope, housing or container.  See the
    Notes to subclasses 2.1+ of this class (220) for the distinction between
    the envelopes, boxes and housings for electric lamp and discharge devices
    which are in this class and those in other classes.

    362,    Illumination, particularly subclasses 159+ for receptacles combined
    with illumination means.

    366,    Agitating, for a fixed or movable receptacle forming or including
    apparatus to effect agitation.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 276+ for
    clock and watch cases.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclass 272 for a storage container system for irradiated core elements.

    396,    Photography, appropriate subclasses and particularly subclasses
    589+ for dark cabinets and 636+ for trays.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 118+ for a
    supply container in combination with an applicator which is removable
    therefrom for a coating application independent thereof.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 254+ for a metallic receptacle the sole
    disclosed use of which is to support work within a furnace to be annealed
    or carburized by heat.

    454,    Ventilation, particularly subclasses 173+ for ventilating chambers
    for storage of hay, grain, fruit, vegetables, etc.

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, subclasses 516+ for a player held
    and powered, nonmechanical projecting implement for projecting a projectile
    into the air (e.g., a tennis racket, etc.) which may be combined with a
    container or package therefor.  See especially the Search Notes to Classes
    150 and 206 under subclass 516 for the locations for a flaccid protective
    cover (e.g., a  flaccid case, etc.) for, or for a container or package
    (e.g., a rigid case, etc.) for, containing such a projecting implement.

    (4)     Note.  For related subject matter, see classes:



    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 110+ for handles, and subclasses
    128+ for hinges.

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 400, for can openers.

    72,     Metal Deforming, for manufacture of a sheet metal container by mere
    plastic deformation, with or without cutting.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 331+ for funnels.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    262 for methods of making closures involving apply liners thereto by a
    punching and laminating operation.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 233+
    particularly subclasses 248+, 259, 376, and 377, for sifting screens for
    coal buckets and similar receptacles.

    211,    Supports: Racks, subclasses 71.01+ for receptacle support type.

    248,    Supports, for receptacle supports.  In general, as between the
    receptacle classes and the support classes, the receptacle classes provide
    for the combination of a receptacle plus support:  except, the support
    classes will accept a claim to a support combined with a receptacle,
    wherein the claim (1) nominally recites the receptacle, or (2) recites only
    so much of the receptacle structure as is needed to cooperate with the
    support, or (3) recites only those receptacles features which have been
    modified specifically to cooperate with the support.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, for seams and joints similar to those
    used in receptacles.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, for closure fasteners.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet, especially subclasses 426+ and 630+ for composites including a glass
    layer, and subclasses 411+ and 615+ for nonmetallic and metallic
    composites, respectively, defined in terms of the composition of their
    components, especially subclass 648 for tin-plate stock. See also the main
    Class Definition of that class (428), section VI, C, 3, a, for the
    distinction between a stock material and a receptacle.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclass 16
    for the process of containing radioactive waste in receptacles, subclasses
    249+ for the process of containing hazardous or toxic waste in receptacles.


CLS 220/1.5
TXT Containers under the class definition constructed for individual handling
    to be placed on and removed from cars, trucks, etc., generally to
    constitute part of the body thereof.  They are usually of the type known as
    less than Car-Load Lot containers and are of such size and form that one or
    more constitute a car body or load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    410,    Freight Accommodation on Freight Carrier, subclasses 2+ for a
    freight container disclosed as being part of the vehicle and constructed to
    accommodate for haulage a particular particle (as opposed to a load bearer
    or indiscriminate freight.  See this class (410) subclasses 2+ for the
    particular article accommodation concept); and subclasses 52+ for a freight
    container for intermodel accommodation on a freight carrier, for which
    technique of freight shipment the container is provided with means
    interengageably associable with a freight carrier body for on-and-off
    accommodation.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 77, 79, 88, and 118 for the ventilation of
    cargo areas on freight-carrying vehicles.


CLS 220/2
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising coal-buckets, including
    guards, feeding devices, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    Appropriate subclass, for closures, handles, compartments, end structures,
    or other special features of coal buckets, etc.

    20,     for sifting-partitions and hopper constructions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 233+
    especially subclass 376, for sifting features alone.


CLS 220/2.1
TXT Envelopes, casings and housings, designed for use with electric lamps,
    electric space discharge devices and similar devices.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes envelopes made of vitreous, ceramic
    or nonmetallic plastic material for electric lamps, electric space
    discharge devices, electric switches and similar devices where the claimed
    structure is of general application and not limited to use with any
    specific electric device or is not limited by claimed structure to
    electrical use.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass provides only for the structure of the
    envelope and associated accessories such as an attached base but does not
    provide for any structure which is limited to electrical use such as
    lead-in wires for conducting electricity through the wall of the envelope,
    casing or housing.

    (3)     Note.  An envelope is defined for the purpose of classification in
    this and the indented subclasses as being a gas tight enclosure designed to
    be evacuated or filled with a gas or vapor.  In general the distinction
    between an envelope and a jacket or casing is that the envelope is to be
    sealed so as to be gas tight.

    (4)     Note.  Many of the receptacles in this and the indented subclasses
    are made in whole or part of glass or other ceramic material but this and
    the indented subclass are not limited to receptacles made of such material.

    (5)     Note.  As this and the indented subclass are based on the function
    of the casing or housing, the art in these subclasses is cross-referenced
    into the succeeding subclasses of this class for structural features which
    are of general utility.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.2,    for outlet or junction box type receptacles and housings which are
    designed for use with electrical apparatus.

    581+,   for a high-pressure-gas tank.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 138+ for glassworking apparatus for
    making electronic envelope headers, terminals or stems.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 74 for an envelope, casing, housing or coil
    device projecting into and covering an opening in an enclosure containing a
    fluid for modifying the temperature of the device; subclasses 80.1+ for a
    means retaining a removable device in a heat exchanger; subclasses 177+ for
    a tubular structure with heat exchanging features; and subclass 185 for a
    heat transmitter, per se.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, appropriate subclasses,
    provides for envelopes, casings and housings for use with electrical
    devices, such as discharge devices and lamps, which include electrical
    features (such as the lead-in conductors for a lamp) but which do not
    include any significant characteristics of the electrical device.  See
    paragraph 7 of the class definition of Class 174 for the subclasses in
    Class 174 which provide for this subject matter.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 152 and the
    subclasses specified in the Notes thereto for liquid contact circuit makers
    and breakers (e.g, mercury switches) which are provided with an envelope.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 317+ and the
    subclasses specified in the Notes thereto for electric lamps and electric
    space discharge devices which are provided with an envelope which is sealed
    so as to maintain an atmosphere of gas or vapor within the envelope or to
    maintain a vacuum within the envelope, and  subclass 324 and the subclasses
    specified in the Notes thereto for other lamps and discharge devices which
    are provided with a jacket or a casing. Class 313 is the generic class for
    discharge devices and lamps which have an envelope formed as an integral
    part thereof.  Class 313 is also the generic class for discharge devices
    which have combined therewith a separable casing for the discharge device.
    See sections IX, XII, 1 and XII, 5 of the main class definition of Class
    313 for the other classes which provide for significant lamp structure or
    discharge device structure in combination with either an integral envelope
    or a separable casing or jacket.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 34 for a
    plurality of light transmissive or translucent glass sheet, sealed at their
    edges and spaced so as to enclose a gas space therebetween, and subclasses
    426+ and 630 for composites having a glass component.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 358+ for an illuminating flash device
    comprising a fuel charge within a sealed transparent container.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, subclasses 11+ for lamp and discharge
    device envelopes defined only as being made of a glass composition and
    glass compositions, per se.


CLS 220/2.2
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2.1 which are provided with an evacuating
    stem or opening for evacuating the envelope.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24+,    for receptacle structure of general application provided with
    ordinary removable closures.

    44,     for closures which provide venting means for receptacles including
    connectors for evacuating purposes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 34 for a process of sealing off an
    exhaust opening in a glass envelope by a glassworking operation, subclass
    153 for apparatus to fusion bond an exhaust tube to an envelope by
    glassworking, subclass 155 for electronic device making apparatus including
    fusion bonding means, and subclass 270 for apparatus for "tipping-off" a
    glass envelope.

    174,    Electrically:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 8+ for
    envelopes, casings, and housings which are restricted by claimed subject
    matter to electrical use and in which a vacuum or fluid (gas) is employed
    or which have means peculiarly adapted for use in connection with a vacuum
    or with a material in a fluid condition.  See subclasses 17.05+ and the
    subclasses specified in the Notes thereto for hermetically sealed envelopes
    which include electrical features (e.g., lead-in wires, electrical
    connectors, etc.) and which are provided with an evacuating stem or opening.


CLS 220/2.3
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2.1 in which the envelope is made in whole or
    in part of conductive material (e.g., metal).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 400.1+ for miscellaneous processes of
    making hollow articles composed in whole or part of metal, subclass.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 50.5+ provides
    for envelopes formed of conductive material which have a lead wire for
    conducting electricity passing through the wall of the envelope, casing or
    housing.  See especially subclass 50.53 where the metal wall portion is
    formed as an electrical connector and subclass 50.56 and the subclasses
    specified in the Notes thereto where the lead wire passes through and is
    insulated from the metal wall.  See section 7 of the class definition for
    the other subclasses in Class 174 which provide for envelopes, casings, and
    housings limited by claimed structure to electrical use.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, appropriate subclasses for making containers
    by uniting metal to metal, metal to nonmetal, or nonmetal to nonmetal
    utilizing a metallurgical bond, i.e., a bond in which bond is effected by a
    metallic cement or by fusion of a metallic part.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 28+ for a joint between two
    members which is specially constructed to utilize the thermal
    characteristics of the members.


CLS 220/3.2
TXT Receptacles under the class definition having provision for extending
    devices, such as strands, rods, pipes, etc., through the receptacle wall or
    for coupling them to the receptacle wall.

    (1)     Note.  Such receptacles combined with apparatus contained therein
    are in the appropriate class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 17, 18 and 50+
    for receptacles in combination with electrical structure, such as
    insulators, conductors or contained electrical equipment, in addition to
    the structure of the receptacle or coupling means.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 18+ for a coupling combined
    with assembly means, subclasses 149.1+ for a joint between a pipe or cable
    and box, subclasses 136.1+ for a cable to tubular member-to-plate joint,
    and subclasses 189+ for an end to plate, especially subclasses 194+ for
    secant joints having hole edge clamps.


CLS 220/3.3
TXT Receptacles under subclass 3.2 having means specialized for mounting the
    same on or in a panel, such as a wall, ceiling, floor, door frame, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.9     and 3.92, for such receptacles having supporting means which are
    equally useful for mounting the receptacle on or between poles, joists,
    beams, or on structures other than panels and walls.

    476+,   for a wall supported container which is not of the outlet or
    junction box type.

    628+,   and the notes thereunder, for supporting end structure of the
    receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 36 for a specific
    building structure with a built-in horizontal surface type article of
    furniture, and subclasses 220.1+ for a specific building structure with a
    surface duct within a barrier.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 201, for volume or rate of flow
    meter boxes, and subclasses 273 and 274, for volume or rate of flow meter
    casings and their mountings.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 357+ for fluid handling devices provided
    with means to support or mount them on buildings or building parts.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 48 and 49, for
    wall mounted conduits and housings.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, particularly subclasses 87.01+ for wall mounted
    racks.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 27.1+ for instrument in panel supports.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 242 and 245+ for cabinets
    mounted on or in a wall, ceiling or panel.


CLS 220/3.4
TXT Receptacles under subclass 3.3 having means specialized for mounting in or
    for engaging concrete, laths or plaster.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes devices for keeping plaster,
    concrete, paint, etc., out of the box during the plastering, painting or
    other operations.


CLS 220/3.5
TXT Receptacles under subclass 3.3 mounted in an opening in the wall or panel.


CLS 220/3.6
TXT Receptacles under subclass 3.5 having at least two means for engaging the
    wall or panel on opposite sides thereof and in opposed relation.


CLS 220/3.7
TXT Receptacles under subclass 3.2 having at least two parts whose relative
    position may be adjusted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for receptacles having telescoping sections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 57 for
    combinations of a plug receptacle or wall switch with a box or housing
    therefor in which two or more of the parts of the box or mounting means are
    relatively adjustable.


CLS 220/3.8
TXT Receptacles under subclass 3.2 in combination with a closure.  Such closure
    may be of the face plate type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24+,    for closures.

    24.2,   for closures of the face plate type.

    27,     for frangible and knock-out type of closures.


CLS 220/3.9
TXT Receptacles under subclass 3.2 in combination with supporting means
    therefor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.3+,   and the notes thereunder, for other receptacle supporting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 58 and 63 for
    similar structures combined with an electrical device or mounting means
    therefor.

    248,    Supports, for supports of general application.


CLS 220/3.92
TXT Receptacles under subclass 3.9 in which the receptacles are made in
    sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.01+,  for such devices in which the characteristics that make the
    receptacle an outlet or junction box are not claimed.


CLS 220/3.94
TXT Receptacles under subclass 3.2 in which the receptacles are made in
    sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.92,   and the notes thereunder for this type receptacle provided with
    supporting means therefor.


CLS 220/4.01
TXT SECTIONAL:
    Receptacle under the class definition constructed of separate and distinct
    sections which are assembled together to form a complete container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.92    and 3.94, for a sectional outlet box.

    600+,   for specific end wall structure or a specific joint connecting the
    end wall to the sidewall.

    660+,   for specific wall structure or a specific joint connecting wall
    sections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses 12+ for a sectional wooden box, and
    subclasses 43+ for a sectional wooden  crate.


CLS 220/4.02
TXT Electrical housing:
    Receptacle under subclass 4.01 wherein the container is designed to contain
    an electrical component (e.g., washing, machine, razor, toaster, or other
    appliance).

    (1)     Note.  Only the housing, per se, is found in this subclass.  Search
    the appropriate class for a specific electrical device.


CLS 220/4.03
TXT Extension:
    Receptacle under subclass 4.01 wherein the container is provided with an
    additional section to form an extension of the sidewall.

    (1)     Note.  The additional section is usually located around an open
    end, and normally functions to provide additional capacity or to prevent
    overflow.


CLS 220/4.04
TXT Barrel-shaped container:
    Receptacle under subclass 4.01 wherein the sectional container has a
    generally cylindrical shape with a slightly bulging sidewall and with
    generally parallel end walls.

    (1)     Note.  A drum-shaped sectional container similar in construction
    and size to a barrel-shaped container is classified with the barrel-shaped
    containers.

    (2)     Note.  The capacity of a barrel is normally 31 1/2 gallons or less,
    and it is generally portable or movable by hand.


CLS 220/4.05
TXT Formed of thermoplastic material:
    Barrel under subclass 4.04 wherein the sections are made (usually molded)
    of a resinous material.


CLS 220/4.06
TXT Comprising only two similar cup-shaped sections:
    Barrel under subclass 4.04 having two basically like parts each of which
    has a cup-like shape.


CLS 220/4.07
TXT Separable sections:

    Barrel under subclass 4.06 wherein the two parts include means which permit
    them to be readily disassociated.


CLS 220/4.08
TXT Knockdown:

    Barrel under subclass 4.04 wherein the sections are separate parts, and
    including means which permit the parts to be readily assembled or
    disassembled (e.g., for shipment, storage, etc.).


CLS 220/4.09
TXT Separable sidewall and end walls:

    Barrel under subclass 4.08 wherein the end walls are detachable from the
    sidewall, which itself may include one or more separable parts.


CLS 220/4.11
TXT Sidewall formed of separable stave-like parts:

    Barrel under subclass 4.09 wherein the sidewall comprises a plurality of
    thin, narrow, similar elements which are detachably secured together.


CLS 220/4.12
TXT Tank for fluids:

    Receptacle under subclass 4.01 wherein the sectional container is
    constructed to hold a liquid or gas and constructed and dimensioned so as
    to be movable.

    (1)     Note.  A tank in this subclass is distinguished by its size and
    construction from those which obviously cannot be moved in one piece (i.e.,
    "stationary tanks"), and those which are intended to be carried by hand
    when full (e.g., "cans"), such as milk cans, gas cans, garbage cans, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85+,    for an attachment for a tank.

    562+,   for a large container intended to be mounted on a vehicle and used
    for transporting fluent material.

    565+,   for a stationary tank.

    610+,   for a joint between a sidewall and end wall.

    677+,   for a joint between sidewalls.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 561+ for a fluid handling system which
    includes a tank.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    various subclasses for a tank combined with a filling attachment.

    222,    Dispensing, various subclasses for a tank combined with dispensing
    means.


CLS 220/4.13
TXT Formed of thermoplastic material:
    Tank under subclass 4.12 wherein the sections are made (usually molded) of
    a resinous material.


CLS 220/4.14
TXT Vehicular fuel tank:
    Tank under subclass 4.12 wherein the container is an automotive, aircraft
    or the like tank for supplying fuel to the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    562+,   for a large container intended to be mounted on a vehicle and used
    for transporting fluent material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 830+ for a tank combined with vehicle
    structure.


CLS 220/4.15
TXT Removable aircraft fuel tank:
    Tank under subclass 4.14 wherein the tank is the type normally fitted to an
    aircraft wing and quite frequently jettisoned in flight.


CLS 220/4.16
TXT Knockdown:
    Tank under subclass 4.12 wherein the sections are separate parts, and
    including means which permit the parts to be readily assembled or
    disassembled (e.g., for shipment, storage, etc.).


CLS 220/4.17
TXT Bolted construction:
    Tank under subclass 4.16 wherein the sections are secured to each other by
    one or more bolts.


CLS 220/4.21
TXT Container formed of only two similar sections:  Receptacle under subclass
    4.01 wherein the container is formed of two basically like segments.


CLS 220/4.22
TXT Sections hinged together:
    Receptacle under subclass 4.21 wherein the two similar sections are secured
    to one another by a hinge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334+,   for a closure hinged to a body    structure.


CLS 220/4.23
TXT Hinge integral with sections:
    Receptacle under subclass 4.22 wherein the two similar sections and the
    hinge are formed as one-piece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    339,    for a similar hinge connecting a  closure and body.


CLS 220/4.24
TXT Identical halves:
    Receptacle under subclass 4.21 wherein each section is essentially a
    duplicate of the other.


CLS 220/4.25
TXT Hemispherical sections:
    Receptacle under subclass 4.24 wherein the similar sections are each formed
    as a half sphere.


CLS 220/4.26
TXT Stacked or aligned similar sections:
    Receptacle under subclass 4.01 wherein the container is formed of a
    plurality of sections, generally having the same configuration, which are
    positioned on one another to form the container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package,   subclasses 503+ for a stack of
    containers of that class type.


CLS 220/4.27
TXT Sections are container units:

    Receptacle under subclass 4.26 wherein each of the sections is in the form
    of an independent container, and capable of functioning as an independent
    container.


CLS 220/4.28
TXT Knockdown:
    Receptacle under subclass 4.01 wherein the sections are separate parts or
    have separate parts, such as a bottom wall and sidewalls, which can be
    readily assembled or disassembled (e.g., for shipping, storage, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses 12+ for a knockdown wooden box, and
     subclasses 43+ for a knockdown   wooden crate.


CLS 220/4.29
TXT Sidewalls vertically hinged to each other:        Receptacle under subclass
    4.28 wherein some or all of the sidewalls are flexibly connected together
    along a vertical joint to permit folding into collapsed condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6       and 7, for sidewalls hinged to the   base or bottom wall of the
    container in addition to being   hinged to each other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclass 16 for  a knockdown wooden box having
    vertically hinged sides, and  subclass 48 for a knockdown wooden  crate
    having vertically hinged  sides.


CLS 220/4.31
TXT Sidewalls slide vertically to engage each other:
    Receptacle under subclass 4.28 wherein some or all of the sidewalls are
    assembled or disassembled to one another by a vertical motion.


CLS 220/4.32
TXT Sidewall slides horizontally to engage the base:
    Receptacle under subclass 4.28 wherein a  sidewall is assembled to the
    container bottom wall by a horizontal motion.


CLS 220/4.33
TXT Removable fastening element:
    Receptacle under subclass 4.28 including a separate securing device for
    releasably holding the container in an erected or assembled condition.


CLS 220/4.34
TXT Retaining pin extends through aligned openings in knuckle-like
    elements:Receptacle under subclass 4.33 wherein the removable fastening
    element is a pin, pintle, or rod-like member which passes through
    interengaging knuckle-like or socket-like projections extending from two
    adjacent container walls (e.g., two sidewalls or a sidewall and the bottom
    wall).


CLS 220/6
TXT Structures under subclass 4.01 where the several parts fold into compact
    form for shipping or similar purposes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    666,    for a sidewall structure that includes means (e.g., fold lines,
    corrugations, etc.) which permits the receptacle to be compressed.


CLS 220/7
TXT Devices under subclass 6 comprising fastening means for folding structures
    which hold the structure in its set-up position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.01+,  for those structures where the fastening device is an integral part
    thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, the subclasses indented under "Boxes, Crates,
    Knockdown, Folding" and those indented under "Boxes, Knockdown, Folding",
    for knockdown and folding wooden receptacles.


CLS 220/8
TXT Devices under subclass 4.01 in which the parts of the sectional structure
    nest within each other.  Includes also nesting receptacles which form a
    compartmented whole.

    (1)     Note.  Receptacles formed of sections joined by a lap-joint are not
    considered "telescoping".

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes receptacles having telescoped
    sections whose relative positions may be adjusted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    489,    for a wire receptacle having an adjustable or contortable sidewall
    structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 429 for measuring vessels with
    movable means to alter the size of the vessel.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclass 182 for knockdown elbow fittings
    comprising nesting parts, and subclasses 298+ for joints between tubular
    bodies providing variable length (e.g., telescoping).


CLS 220/9.1
TXT FLACCID WALL MATERIAL PERMANENTLY UNITED WITH A SKELETAL FRAMEWORK:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising wall material which is
    supple and is permanently attached to and sustained on a rigid, open three
    dimensional frame.

    (1)     Note.  Not all of the wall material must be supple.

    (2)     Note.  A three dimensional frame is capable of standing alone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.01+,  for sectional receptacles.

    400+,   for a receptacle having a separable liner or encasement,
    particularly 401 for a skeletal encasement.

    415+,   for multilayer barrier structure.

    485+,   for a wire frame receptacle, per se.

    647,    for a receptacle body reinforcement comprising an open framework.

    668,    for skeleton framework wall structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 54.1+ for a
    receptacle having means specialized to holding bait or catch.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 386+ for a receptacle
    having a pallet feature.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, appropriate subclasses for a fruit
    picker's bag having shoulder straps or means for attaching it to a person.

    232,    Deposit and Collection Receptacles, appropriate subclasses for a
    harvesting bag having separate inlet and outlet openings.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 95+ for a bag holder which may be a skeletal
    framework, but which is not permanently united with the bag.  A bag may be
    claimed in combination with the holder so long as the claimed bag features
    are restricted to those which cooperate with the support.  If the skeletal
    framework is capable of functioning as a receptacle by itself, it is
    provided for in Class 220, Receptacles, subclasses 400+.

    280,    Land Vehicles, for similar devices having wheels which are claimed,
    particularly subclasses 79.1+ for caster type wheels.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 137+ for an
    article carrier combined with a handle and having means peculiarly adapted
    to engage and support an article being carried.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 35+ for a receptacle
    having a spring loaded bottom portion which moves in response to the weight
    of contents.

    383,    Flexible Bags, for a bag having reinforcing frame-like elements,
    which elements do not provide a three dimensional self-sustaining
    framework.  For example, a bag having a two dimensional frame, a mouth
    frame, or spaced apart rigid elements (i.e., reinforcements) is provided
    for in Class 383 particularly subclasses 33+, 119 and 121.1.


CLS 220/9.2
TXT Collapsible or foldable framework:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.1 wherein the skeletal framework includes
    means which permit it to be folded into a compact configuration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.28+,  for a knockdown type sectional receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 98 and 625+ for a stretcher or crib made of
    flaccid or flexible material sustained on a frame which may be a folding
    type.

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclass 107, for hand luggage
    which is collapsible.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 600 for a collapsible
    receptacle having a pallet feature.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses 12+ and 43+ for a foldable or
    collapsible of that class type.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 95+ for a bag holder which may be foldable or
    collapsible.  This Class 220, Receptacles, provides for a bag holding
    framework which is permanently united with the bag.  Class 248, Supports,
    subclasses 165 and 166+ provide for a knockdown or folding stand,
    respectively.


CLS 220/9.3
TXT Laterally collapsible or foldable:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.2 wherein the framework can be collapsed or
    folded into a compact configuration having a reduced horizontal dimension.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclass 45 for a laterally collapsible chair
    having a fabric bottom and back.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 35+ for a receptacle
    having a spring loaded bottom portion which moves in response to the weight
    of contents.


CLS 220/17.1
TXT Devices under the class definition including means integrally formed with
    or to be attached to pails for supporting the pail from the leg or by the
    lap of a person.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, appropriate subclasses, for body and
    belt attached carriers wherein the carrying feature predominates.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 175+ for a milker stool combined with
    mere pail support.


CLS 220/17.2
TXT Devices under subclass 17.1 wherein the means or attachment is a
    constituent part of, is in abutting engagement with, or is separable from a
    bail ear.


CLS 220/17.3
TXT Devices under subclass 17.1 including a band or ring which encircles the
    pail.


CLS 220/23.2
TXT Receptacles under the class definition comprising a group of two or more
    distinct receptacles joined together in a side-by-side relationship.

    (1)     Note.  Each receptacle of the set must be sufficiently distinct so
    that it could be removed from the set without destroying the identity of
    another receptacle of the set.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    507+    and 529+, for receptacles having partitions, defining a plurality
    of compartments therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 119+ for molds for forming plural articles.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 107+ for sectional unit
    cabinet structures.


CLS 220/23.4
TXT Devices under subclass 23.2 in which at least one of the individual
    receptacles is so joined to the set of receptacles as to facilitate its
    separation from the set.


CLS 220/23.6
TXT Devices under subclass 23.2 including means to facilitate the placing of
    one set of receptacles upon another to form a pile or stack.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97,     for means for stacking individual receptacles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 126 for stacked molds.


CLS 220/23.8
TXT Devices under subclass 23.2 in which the attachment of at least one
    receptacle to another receptacle of the set is by the fabrication of a part
    or all of the wall or bottom portions of two or more of the respective
    receptacles from a common sheet member or mass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23.2,   for two or more receptacles joined by "integral" bonds, such as by
    welding, brazing or soldering.


CLS 220/23.83
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising a plurality of specially
    related, distinct receptacles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23.2+,  for horizontally attached receptacle sets.

    63+,    for lined receptacles 97 for plural receptacles disposed in a
    stacked or nested relation, and see the Notes thereunder.


CLS 220/23.86
TXT Devices under subclass 23.83 wherein at least one of the receptacles (1) is
    combined with a nonreceptacle feature not provided for elsewhere in this
    class or (2) has means or parts permitting structural rearrangement to
    provide either a receptacle of some other kind or a device of some other
    description.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23.2+,  for horizontally attached receptacle sets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 198 for arrangements of
    plural cabinets.


CLS 220/62
TXT Blank:
    A two dimensional sheet of material which has been cut, scored or otherwise
    modified so as to be ready to be folded into a container of this class type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 100+ for
    blank for a box.


CLS 220/62.1
TXT Corner fold:
    Blank under subclass 62 wherein the blank is formed with structure that
    constitutes a unitary corner when the blank is folded to form a container.


CLS 220/86.1
TXT Filling member:
    Receptacle under subclass 85 wherein the attachment is a means which
    affects the supply of contents to the interior of a container.

    (1)     Note.  The attachment may take the form of a guard, funnel, fill
    pipe, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 306+ for a float gauge structure
    combined with a filling device.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 331+ for a funnel, and subclass 343 for a detachable filling
    accessory.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 244+ for a portable
    receptacle type filter provided with a hood or closure, subclasses 464+ for
    a portable receptacle draining-type filter, and subclasses 473+ for a
    filter resting upon a supporting receiver (e.g., receptacle).

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 478+ for a dispenser having, in addition to
    a dispensing outlet (e.g., nozzle, valved outlet, etc.), an additional
    opening which may be for filling.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process, subclasses 72+ for a battery having fluid feeding and venting
    means.


CLS 220/86.2
TXT Automotive type:
    Receptacle under subclass 86.1 wherein the filling member is associated
    with a supply container (e.g., gas tank, radiator, etc.) for an internal
    combustion operated vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 69.4 for a vehicle tank wherein the motor
    is positively recited.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 830+ for a vehicle tank wherein vehicle
    structure is claimed.


CLS 220/86.3
TXT With anti-siphon means:
    Receptacle under subclass 86.2 wherein the attachment includes an element
    which is intended to prevent the theft or removal of fuel from the vehicle
    container (e.g., gas tank) by blocking the insertion of a siphon tube
    therein.


CLS 220/86.4
TXT Nonrefillable:
    Receptacle under subclass 86.1 wherein the filling attachment include means
    which prevents the container from being filled again once it has been
    emptied.


CLS 220/87.1
TXT Disinfectant device:
    Receptacle under subclass 85 wherein the attachment includes structure
    which is intended to receive means for disinfecting the interior of the
    container or the container contents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    521+,   for a compartment in a closure which may be structurally similar to
    an attachment of this type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses for a disinfecting composition, per se.


CLS 220/87.2
TXT Spray:
    Receptacle under subclass 87.1 wherein the disinfecting means is in the
    form of a vapor dispenser (e.g., pump, aerosol, etc.).


CLS 220/88.1
TXT Fire prevention:
    Receptacle under subclass 85 wherein the attachment includes means which
    prevents fire or flame from passing to the contents of the container, or
    prevents the contents from sustaining combustion (e.g., by shutting off the
    air supply) thereby extinguishing a fire already started.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, subclasses 66+ for a storage tank with a fire
    prevention system.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 54 for a dispenser with a temperature
    responsive control.


CLS 220/88.2
TXT Screen (flame arrester):
    Receptacle under subclass 88.1 wherein the attachment is a body of
    foraminous material which prevents a flame from passing through it.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 189.01 for a dispenser with a flame arrester
    and subclasses 53 and 152 for a dispenser with means for maintaining an
    inert atmosphere in or around the dispenser.


CLS 220/88.3
TXT By inert gas:
    Receptacle under subclass 88.1 wherein a fire is prevented from being
    sustained by the presence of a noncombustible atmosphere.


CLS 220/89.1
TXT Pressure relief means:
    Receptacle under subclass 85 wherein the attachment includes means to
    relieve excess pressure (usually gas) within the container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203.01+, for a receptacle closure comprising a pressure responsive vent or
    valve.


CLS 220/89.2
TXT Frangible pressure relief means:
    Receptacle under subclass 89.1 wherein the pressure relief means is a
    diaphragm or diaphragm-like device which bursts to relieve excess pressure
    within the container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 506 for a liquid heater or
    vaporizer with a pressure controlled fire extinguisher.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 68.11+ for a frangible fluid-control
    element.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, subclasses 19+ and 56+ for a fire extinguishing
    mechanism with a frangible control element.


CLS 220/89.3
TXT With cutting means:
    Receptacle under subclass 89.2 including an additional member having a
    knife edge or point intended to facilitate the bursting of the diaphragm.


CLS 220/89.4
TXT Fusible pressure relief means:
    Receptacle under subclass 89.1 wherein the pressure relief means is a
    diaphragm or diaphragm-like device which melts to relieve excess pressure
    within the container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 504.1 and 504.3 for a
    liquid heater or vaporizer with a fusible control for a safety device.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 72+ for a fusible fluid-control element.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, subclasses 19+, 37+, 42, and 56+ for a fire
    extinguishing mechanism with a fusible control element.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 21 for a fusible control element for a
    combustion device (e.g., a burner).


CLS 220/200
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising removable closures and also
    those closures where solder is applied to hold them in place temporarily.
    Includes closures and plugs for pipes, boilers, etc. when not limited by
    structure to that use but which could be used just as well with a metallic
    receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    521+,   for a container having a compartment within a closure for the
    container.

    523+,   for a closure for a compartment of a container.

    558,    for a file drawer having a hinged front panel.

    582,    for a high-pressure gas tank having a removable closure.

    600+,   for end wall structure (e.g., a  permanent closure).

    610,    for a seam or joint between a container body and an end member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, appropriate subclasses, for a
    movable or removable closure not associated with a receptacle, and see the
    notes in section IV of Class 49 for the loci of closures in other
    subclasses.

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, subclasses 118+ for a
    closure for a purse or a handbag.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, and see the
    notes to the definition of such class for a closure of the flexible or
    portable panel type; i.e., for a closure in the form of (1) a panel unit in
    which a flexible fabric or other flexible sheet material forms the panel
    portion, (2) a panel unit formed of plural strips, slats or panels
    interconnected for relative motion (excluding those connected only by a
    common operator or mounted only in a common frame or on a common support),
    or (3) parts (1) and (2) combined with each other or with another type
    (e.g., rigid) of closure.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 40+, 43, and 200+ for a closure for a
    bottle or  jar.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses:

    56+,    for a box closure.

    76+,    for a barrel closure.

    98+,    for a barrel bung.

    124,            for a basket closure.

    222,    Dispensing, for a closure constructed for dispensing, specially
    related to a  receptacle or container to assist in dispensing, or combined
    with other dispensing structure.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, for a closure associated
    with an envelope, wrapper, or paperboard box.

    232,    Deposit and Collection Receptacles, particularly subclasses:

    14,     for a change gate.

    22,     for a letter box having a door or window.

    25+, for a compartmented letter box having a closure for the compart-ment.

    42,     for a milk receptacle having a  protective door or window.

    43.1+, for a deposit and collection receptacle having separate inlet and
    outlet openings.

    44+,    for a passage, trap, or chute having a closure.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, for a closure on a receptacle or
    enclosure combined with article supporting means, such as a drawer, rack,
    shelf, etc.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 33+ for means to hold a bag opening in an
    open position, and subclasses 42+ for a bag closure in general.


CLS 220/201
TXT Device under subclass 200 provided with means for retaining the closure in
    a desired position, or with means for imparting movement to the closure,
    said means including a second device which when under the influence of heat
    will release the retaining means or set in motion actuating means to permit
    or cause the closure to move to a different position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 48.5 for a thermally released door
    check or closure.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclass 33 for a bank
    protection device with thermally controlled fluent material means.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 101+ for thermal alarms.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 287.5 for a fusible released damper.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 72+ for valves controlled by a fusible
    or heat destructible element, and subclasses 79+, 457 and 468 for other
    heat responsive valves.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, subclass 19 for automatic valves, subclasses
    37+ for sprinkler heads, and subclass 42 for fusible connections.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 136+, for
    electrical thermally controlled switches.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 54 for a thermally controlled dispensing
    device.

    454,    Ventilation, subclass 28 for a thermally released outlet cowl and
    subclass 369 for thermally actuated fire dampers used in ventilating
    systems.


CLS 220/202
TXT Device under subclass 200 comprising means responsive to a condition or
    change of condition, to effect the control of a vent or valve on a closure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 455+ for valves responsive to a change
    in line condition.


CLS 220/203.01
TXT Responsive to pressure:

    Device under subclass 202 wherein the vent or valve is operable as a result
    of a variation in pressure occurring within or without the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89.1+,  for an attachment to a container including means to relieve excess
    pressure.

    231,    for means provided in the closure for breaking a vacuum within a
    closed receptacle, but where said means are not pressure responsive.

    360,    for a receptacle provided with a vent or valve through a wall of
    the receptacle, and a closure is provided with means to regulate said vent
    or valve.

    367.1+  for a receptacle closure comprising a nonpressure responsive vent
    or valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclass 260 for a pressure responsive valve in a
    closure for a receptacle of the bottle, jar, or jug type.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 491+ for a dispenser having a movable outlet
    element operated by the pressure of the container contents.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 100+ for a flexible bag comprising
    pressure relief means.

    426,    Food or Edible Material: Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclass 118 for a package containing food, wherein the package comprises
    means to release gases produced by the food.


CLS 220/203.02
TXT In each of plural, isolated passages:

    Device under subclass 203.01 wherein a separate vent or valve is provided
    in each of two or more flow paths which are not coaxial.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203.23, for separate spring-biased vents or valves provided in each of two
    or more coaxial flow paths.


CLS 220/203.03
TXT Liquid trap:

    Device under subclass 203.01 wherein the vent or valve includes a liquid
    barrier through which the contents of the receptacle must pass if such
    contents are to be passed into the atmosphere.


CLS 220/203.04
TXT Manually adjustable:

    Device under subclass 203.01 wherein the vent or valve is provided with
    manually operable means to (a) adjust the position of the vent or valve to
    a venting or nonventing position or (b) adjust the vent or valve to respond
    to varied pressures.


CLS 220/203.05
TXT Having rotatably adjustable closure which places vent or valve in operative
    position:

    Device under subclass 203.04 wherein means are provided to prevent
    functioning of the vent or valve, said means being adjustable through
    rotation of the closure about the opening of a receptacle to place the vent
    or valve in a venting position.


CLS 220/203.06
TXT Rotation of closure causes actuation of vent or valve:

    Device under subclass 203.05 wherein said means to prevent functioning of
    the vent or valve comprise an element of the receptacle, said means
    physically engaging the vent or valve upon rotation of the closure about
    the opening of the receptacle, such that the engagement of the receptacle
    element with the vent or valve causes the venting or valving function to be
    performed (e.g., spring-biased plate engaged in bayonet-type groove in
    mouth of receptacle).


CLS 220/203.07
TXT Valve operated by distinct actuator or closure:

    Device under subclass 203.04 wherein the manually operable means includes a
    separate implement, such as a push rod or a pivoted arm on the closure,
    which is mechanically coupled to the venting or valving mechanism.
    Operation of said implement causes the venting or valving function to be
    performed.

    (1)     Note.  When a mechanism is provided on the receptacle closure which
    serves the sole purpose of adjusting the pressure at which the valve will
    operate, the invention will be classified in subclass 203.04 above.


CLS 220/203.08
TXT Rupturable:

    Device under subclass 203.01 wherein the vent or valve is designed to tear
    or burst when exposed to excessive pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89.2,   for a rupturable pressure relief means contained in an attachment
    for a receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 68.19+ for a fluid handling system
    having both a frangible fluid flow control element and a pressure
    responsive valve.


CLS 220/203.09
TXT Relatively movable closure and receptacle rim parts:

    Device under subclass 203.01 wherein the vent or valve comprises a closure
    part which is moveable with respect to (a) the rim of a receptacle with
    which it coacts or (b) a rimlike part intermediate the closure and
    receptacle rim.


CLS 220/203.10
TXT Closure is spring-biased:

    Device under subclass 203.09 wherein the closure is urged by a resilient
    mass to a closed position, so that the relative movement between the
    closure and receptacle rim is against the urging force of the resilient
    mass.


CLS 220/203.11
TXT Flexible, resilient vent closing member:

    Device under subclass 203.01 wherein the vent or valve comprises a
    deformable member yielding in response to a changing pressure within a
    receptacle.


CLS 220/203.12
TXT Flexible ringlike vent closing member (e.g., O-ring):

    Device under subclass 203.11 wherein said vent closing member comprises a
    resilient loop deformable in the radial or longitudinal direction in
    response to pressure within or without a receptacle.


CLS 220/203.13
TXT Stopper-type vent closure:

    Device under subclass 203.11 wherein said flexible member comprises a
    flexible plug engaged in a vent opening in the closure, said plug being
    deformable in response to pressure within or without a receptacle.


CLS 220/203.14
TXT Flexible opening in stopper:

    Device under subclass 203.13 wherein said flexible plug engaged in a vent
    opening in the closure deforms in response to pressure in order to open
    passageways through the plug to relieve pressure.


CLS 220/203.15
TXT Resilient sheetlike member retains separate vent closure:

    Device under subclass 203.11 wherein said vent closing member comprises a
    vent closure member or valve structure which is held in place by a
    separate, flexible sheetlike member, said vent closure member moving
    against said flexible sheet member in response to pressure.


CLS 220/203.16
TXT Resilient sheetlike member closes vent opening:

    Device under subclass 203.11 wherein said vent closing member comprises a
    flexible sheetlike member which covers said vent, and moves away from said
    vent in response to pressure.


CLS 220/203.17
TXT Self-closing aperture in member:

    Device under subclass 203.16 wherein said sheetlike member contains a slit
    therein, said slit opening in response to pressure, and closing due to the
    member's elasticity after the pressure condition is removed.


CLS 220/203.18
TXT Diaphragm-type member:

    Device under subclass 203.16 wherein said sheetlike member comprises a
    relatively thin membranelike member having a peripheral edge portion, said
    member being adapted to be associated with a surrounding or encompassing
    tubular rigid structure to extend transversely thereof to form a closing
    wall for said tubular structure, the outer peripheral edge of said membrane
    being in sealing relationship with the encompassing wall of said tubular
    structure.


CLS 220/203.19
TXT Specified valve structure to provide a diverse function (e.g., leakage
    preventing, lock releasing):

    Device under subclass 203.01 wherein one or more valves are provided, and
    at least one of the valves has a specific structure which provides an
    auxiliary function, such as preventing leakage of receptacle contents, or
    providing means to release a safety lock.

    (1)     Note.  To be classified in this subclass, the diverse function must
    be something other than that which is inherent to the valve structure, such
    as sealing the receptacle during normal operation and venting and valving
    the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    316,    for a closure having pressure responsive means to release the
    closure from its closed position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 38+ for a fluid handling system which
    responds to a change in the position of the system as a whole.


CLS 220/203.20
TXT Float or gravity valve:

    Device under subclass 203.19 wherein said valve structure includes an
    element that moves to provide the secondary function by (a) its own
    buoyancy, due to fluid level in the receptacle (e.g., float valve), or by
    (b) its own weight, due to gravity (e.g., gravity valve).


CLS 220/203.21
TXT Ball valve:

    Device under subclass 203.19 wherein said valve structure includes a
    spherical element which moves to close a vent opening to provide the
    secondary function.


CLS 220/203.22
TXT Locking feature:

    Device under subclass 203.19 wherein said secondary function comprises a
    feature which maintains the closure in a locked condition so as to
    eliminate the risk of unintentional removal.


CLS 220/203.23
TXT Spring-biased, axially translating member:

    Device under subclass 203.01 wherein a plate, plunger or other member is
    provided within the vent or valve for reciprocation along the major axis of
    the closure, wherein the member is urged by a resilient mass such that a
    change in pressure in the receptacle works against the resilient mass to
    translate the member.


CLS 220/203.24
TXT Two-way pressure relief valve:

    Device under subclass 203.23 wherein the vent or valve provides for flow of
    the pressure medium in two or more directions.


CLS 220/203.25
TXT Annular sealing member deflecting along axis perpendicular to surface:

    Device under subclass 203.24 wherein in addition to the spring-biased,
    axially translating member, a flexible, washerlike sealing member is
    provided which generally spans the vent or valve opening, and which
    deflects inwardly or outwardly with respect to the closure in response to
    pressure.


CLS 220/203.26
TXT Plural springs biasing individual members:

    Device under subclass 203.24 wherein an individual resilient mass is
    provided to each of a plurality of pressure responsive axially translating
    members, so that each member is individually urged in the appropriate
    direction.

    (1)     Note.  For valves which have only one pressure responsive member
    biased by a spring, and have another member either of a different nature
    (ball valve, flexible valve, etc.) or simply not spring-biased, the
    invention will not be classified in this subclass, but in subclass 203.24
    above.


CLS 220/203.27
TXT One-way, outwardly venting pressure relief valve:

    Device under subclass 203.23 wherein the vent or valve provides for flow of
    the pressure medium in only one direction.


CLS 220/203.28
TXT Two-way pressure relief valve:

    Device under subclass 203.01 wherein the vent or valve provides for flow of
    the pressure medium in two or more directions.


CLS 220/203.29
TXT One-way, outwardly venting pressure relief valve:

    Device under subclass 203.01 wherein the vent or valve provides for flow of
    the pressure medium in only one direction.


CLS 220/210
TXT Device under subclass 200 including a means responsive to the insertion of
    a key for operating or permitting the operation of a closure.


CLS 220/211
TXT Device under subclass 200 including means to open and close the closure and
    a motor to operate the means.


CLS 220/212
TXT Device under subclass 200 wherein the closure is 1) associated with a
    disparate article or 2) when not in use as a closure will function as a
    disparate article or is modifiable or rearrangeable to function as a
    disparate article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclass 228 for combined or convertible closures
    of that class.


CLS 220/212.5
TXT With handle:
    Subject matter under subclass 212 wherein the closure includes an element
    which is to be grasped by a human hand for the purpose of manipulating the
    closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    269     and 270+, for a closure having a frangible member or portion and a
    gripping means for use in tearing open the closure.

    317,    for a handle which secures a closure while pouring.

    318,    for a handle attached closure securing means.

    330,    for a closure mounted for compound movement about a closure bail.

    751,    for a hanging means for a container.

    752+,   for a handle, handle component, or handle adjunct.


CLS 220/213
TXT Devices under subclass 200 wherein the closure is convex or concave in
    cross-section and closes an opening in a wall, such wall having the same or
    similar curvature in cross-section.


CLS 220/214
TXT Device under subclass 200 provided with means in addition to the closure
    for the purpose of indicating unauthorized movement of the closure, said
    means being removable without destruction of the closure.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the sealing means consists of a wire or chain
    element looped through the closure and a locking hasp and the ends of such
    element being connected by a lead seal.


CLS 220/215
TXT Device under subclass 200 constructed to reduce conductivity of heat by
    having (1) an insert having a low heat conducting capacity or (2) being
    made of hollow form providing a dead air space.


CLS 220/216
TXT Closures under subclass 200 which float on the top of the contained liquid
    and are in the nature of followers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 3+ for article
    supported covers.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 322.5 for floats, per se.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 202 for float controlled discriminating
    outlet (or vent) for gas, subclasses 430+ for rectilinearly moving floats
    which are co-axial with the valve or part controlled thereby, note
    particularly subclass 433 in which the float is the valve or closure or is
    rigid therewith.


CLS 220/217
TXT Devices under subclass 216 including a confined liquid acting at the
    juncture of the closure and the receptacle mouth to prevent the escape of
    gaseous contents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228,    for liquid or semiliquid gaskets in general.


CLS 220/218
TXT Device under subclass 216 wherein the closure is constructed of sections
    movable relative to one another.


CLS 220/219
TXT Device under subclass 216 wherein the closure is provided with means
    providing for the drainage or discharge of liquid flowing from the upper
    surface thereof.


CLS 220/220
TXT Device under subclass 216 provided with means for supporting or sustaining
    the weight of the closure when the closure is not floating on top of the
    container contents.


CLS 220/221
TXT Device under subclass 216 including means acting at the juncture of the
    closure and on adjacent member to oppose the passage of fluid therebetween.


CLS 220/222
TXT Device under subclass 221 wherein the means is secured to the closure.


CLS 220/223
TXT Device under subclass 222 wherein the gasket means is retained in operative
    position by magnetic means.


CLS 220/224
TXT Device under subclass 222 wherein the gasket means is retained in operative
    position by mechanical means.


CLS 220/225
TXT Device under subclass 222 wherein the gasket is distended by captive gas or
    liquid.


CLS 220/226
TXT Device under subclass 222 wherein the gasket means is formed of resilient
    foam or is distended by a material stuffing.


CLS 220/227
TXT Device under subclass 216 wherein the closure means is provided with an
    opening for the escape of gas from the receptacle which it closes.


CLS 220/228
TXT Device under subclass 200 including a confined liquid or semiliquid (paste)
    acting at the juncture of the closure and receptacle mouth to prevent the
    escape of gaseous contents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217,    for liquid gaskets acting with floating closures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 17.06 for
    hermetic sealed envelopes, boxes and housings where a liquid is used to
    seal a joint, and subclass 31.5 for electric bushings, terminal and lead-in
    structures where a liquid is used to seal a joint.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclass 105 for automatic valved bungs with
    liquid seal.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 188 for dispensers with a fluid trap means to
    seal inlets or outlets.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 590+ for a seal between fixed parts or having static
    contact against relatively movable parts.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 10+ for liquid sealed pipe
    joints.


CLS 220/229
TXT Device under subclass 200 wherein the closure is constructed from a
    resilient type material having an access opening therethrough formed by a
    plurality of radially disposed intersecting slits terminating at their
    outer ends inwardly of the periphery of the closure.  Ingress or egress
    therethrough is gained by deforming the access opening formed by said slits.


CLS 220/230
TXT Device under subclass 200 wherein the closure is retained in covering
    relation to the receptacle mouth by magnetic means.


CLS 220/231
TXT Device under subclass 200 wherein a vacuum within the closed receptacle is
    broken by (1) means to impart an initial opening movement to the closure
    which then disengages to permit the opening to be concluded by another
    operator or manually or (2) a separate manually operated valve means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203.01+, for a receptacle closure comprising a pressure responsive vent or
    valve.

    271,    for vents in "POP-TOP" type closures and 367 for closures in
    general having vent means therein.


CLS 220/232
TXT Device under subclass 200 including seal means positioned at the juncture
    of the closure and the receptacle to oppose the passage of fluid
    there-between, said seal means having a closed chamber with at least one
    deformable wall and externally accessible means to introduce fluid into
    said chamber to expand and move said wall to effect the sealing of the
    closure to the container.


CLS 220/233
TXT Device under subclass 200 wherein a plug or stopper type closure or gasket
    therefor is provided with adjustment means by which the plug or gasket may
    be expanded or contracted to or from its operable position, such adjustment
    means being located at a point external of the closed receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  Plugs and gaskets therefor are found together in this
    subclass for it is impossible to determine, in most instances, when the
    expandable portion is a gasket or part of the closure itself.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 358+ for expanding stopper for bottles
    and jars.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses 78, 79, 108, and 109 for expanding
    closures and bungs for wooden barrels.


CLS 220/234
TXT Device under subclass 233 wherein the gasket or packing is carried by the
    closure and is radially deformable between its operative and inoperative
    positions and wherein the manipulation of said gasket or packing is
    effected by expansion means likewise carried by said closure.


CLS 220/235
TXT Device under subclass 234 wherein a threaded element is employed to effect
    the coaction between the deformable means and the expander member.


CLS 220/236
TXT Device under subclass 235 wherein means in addition to the deformable means
    and the expander member are provided for securing the closure to the
    container.


CLS 220/237
TXT Device under subclass 235 wherein the expander member is provided with a
    tapered surface which engages and expands the deformable means.


CLS 220/238
TXT Device under subclass 234 wherein means are provided which have a specially
    configured surface to effect the coaction of the deformable means with the
    expander member.


CLS 220/239
TXT Device under subclass 233 wherein the gasket or packing is manipulated or
    adjusted by fluid pressure.


CLS 220/240
TXT Devices under subclass 200 wherein the gasket or seal is biased into
    sealing engagement between the closure and receptacle opening by means of
    fluid pressure generated from or contained within the receptacle.


CLS 220/241
TXT Device under subclass 200 provided with one or more openings for
    communicating with devices concealed by the closure.  Such openings may
    have means for coupling a device in the opening.

    (1)     Note.  Devices of this kind are placed in this subclass even though
    disclosed solely for covering an opening in a building wall, floor or
    ceiling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.7,    for outlet type boxes with adjustable parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclasses 423+ for keyhole guards, 450 for structures
    involving that portion of a lock housing through which the bolt projects
    and 452 for escutcheons.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 66 and 67 for
    covers or face plates for boxes housing electrical apparatus.

    248,    Supports, subclass 345 for canopies for protecting or concealing
    the connection between a bracket or suspension device and the fixed support.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 76 for face plates provided with
    fluorescent or phosphorescent material.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclass 357 for door knob rose plates.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 404+ for devices applied to a pipe or
    conduit of brackets or chandeliers where they are secured to a wall or
    ceiling to hide the joint.


CLS 220/242
TXT Device under subclass 241 having additional closures for the face plate
    opening or openings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 67 for such means
    in face plates for boxes housing electrical apparatus.


CLS 220/243
TXT Device under subclass 200 comprising outer and inner members, such as
    closures and bars, joined by operating means, such as a screw, whereby the
    material of the receptacle is clamped between these members.

    (1)     Note.  The inner member may be a lug or cross member integral with
    the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for such devices in which the bar is fastened in place by special
    bayonet-slot connection.

    46,     for packing features.


CLS 220/244
TXT Device under subclass 243 wherein the closure is mounted for a turning
    motion about a pivot to open or close a passage.


CLS 220/245
TXT Device under subclass 243 wherein two or more operating means interjoin the
    closure and bar.


CLS 220/246
TXT Device under subclass 243 wherein a spring biased operating means
    interjoins the closure and the bar.


CLS 220/247
TXT Device under subclass 243 wherein the operator is provided with eccentric
    means which must be actuated to remove the closure.


CLS 220/248
TXT Device under subclass 243 wherein the bar consists of two or more
    individual sections.


CLS 220/249
TXT Device under subclass 243 provided with flexible means extending between
    the bar and closure support by means of which the relative movement is
    limited.


CLS 220/250
TXT Device under subclass 243 wherein the bar and the operator are of integral
    construction.


CLS 220/251
TXT Device under subclass 243 wherein the bar and operator are attached to the
    closure and removable therewith.


CLS 220/252
TXT Device under subclass 200 wherein the closure is a semispherical dome
    movably mounted to allow at least a portion thereof to be shifted to an
    underlying or overlying position relative to a corresponding dome section
    or the receptacle.


CLS 220/253
TXT Device under subclass 200 comprising superposed closure members, each
    member being provided with an opening therethrough, alignment of said
    openings defines the open position of the closure and disalignment thereof
    defining the closed position of the closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    525,    for a compartmented container with a closure that permits access to
    one compartment while blocking another.


CLS 220/254
TXT Device under subclass 200 provided with a supplementary closure to close
    opening in primary closure.


CLS 220/255
TXT Device under subclass 200 wherein two or more closures are joined by
    connecting means so that movement of one of the closures affects
    simultaneous movement in another.


CLS 220/256
TXT Device under subclass 200 wherein an opening is closed by a primary closure
    and a supplementary closure which may underlay or overlay the primary
    closure.


CLS 220/257
TXT Device under subclass 256 wherein removal of the outer closure destroys
    same.


CLS 220/258
TXT Device under subclass 256 wherein removal of the inner closure destroys
    same.


CLS 220/259
TXT Device under subclass 256 wherein at least one of the closure is hingedly
    mounted.


CLS 220/260
TXT Device under subclass 200 wherein the closure is specifically designed or
    is provided with specific means, the sole purpose of which is to facilitate
    or assist in the opening or removal thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Handgrips, threads, guide means, etc., are not considered
    opening or removing adjuncts.

    (2)     Note.  The device may open some other part of the receptacle than
    the end member or "closure".

    (3)     Note.  For tools, per se, which are capable of repeated use for
    removing closure caps and/or corks from receptacles, see Class 7, Compound
    Tools, subclasses 126 and 151+ and Class 81, Tools, subclasses 3.07+,
    especially subclass 3.15 for  a receptacle or closure having an attached
    opener for use only on other receptacle or closures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 257.075 for a
    closure which is movable away from the opening toward which it is normally
    biased, by pressure thereagainst of an applicator, to permit entry of the
    applicator into a coating material supply container.

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 400+ for can openers which operate by cutting
    and see the Notes to Class 30, Cutlery, subclass 3 for the line.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 69.3 for an inkstand and penrack
    combined, including counterweight or spring biasing means to displace a
    closure to permit access to the ink, which means are made effective by
    removal of a pen from its support.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 250+ for frangible closure.

    295+    for bottle and jar opening devices.


CLS 220/261
TXT Device under subclass 200 wherein the opening means consists of or is
    assisted by an explosive charge.


CLS 220/262
TXT Device under subclass 260 wherein the closure is provided with a mechanical
    operator means for imparting movement thereto in the opening and closing
    movement.


CLS 220/263
TXT Device under subclass 262 wherein the closure is hingedly attached to the
    receptacle.


CLS 220/264
TXT Device under subclass 263 provided with means for (1) urging the closure to
    an open or a closed position, or (2) retaining the closure in an open or
    closed position by a biasing action thereon, e.g., spring or weight.


CLS 220/265
TXT Device under subclass 260 wherein the closure, or a portion thereof, is
    constructed to be ruptured or cut away in order to gain access to the
    receptacle contents. Rupturable solder joints are included.

    (1)     Note.  Includes inner frangible closures which do not serve as
    packing means for the outer closure.

    (2)     Note.  Includes puncturing devices for diaphragms, which permits of
    gas discharge.

    (3)     Note.  Includes other parts of the receptacle than the end member
    or "closure".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89.1+,  for frangible diaphragms which act as outlets, when ruptured, for
    gas or a liquid at high pressure.

    610+,   for a seam or joint between a side wall and end wall.

    612+,   for closures fastened in place by solder or cement or other
    conventional means, and which are not of the "knockout type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 68.11+ for fluid flow control means
    controlled by a frangible member.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 250+ for frangible caps for bottles
    and jars.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 541.1+ for dispensing devices with frangible
    elements for outlets.


CLS 220/266
TXT Device under subclass 265 wherein the rupture or cut is about a
    predetermined line or point of weakness.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 250+ for frangible closures under that
    class definition.


CLS 220/267
TXT Device under subclass 266 provided with means to cut at the predetermined
    line or point of weakness.


CLS 220/268
TXT Device under subclass 266 wherein the closure, or portion thereof, e.g.,
    strip, remains attached to the receptacle following the opening operation.

    (1)     Note.  Devices of this type are usually intended to solve a litter
    or disposal problem by not allowing the opening portion to become
    completely unattached from the receptacle.


CLS 220/269
TXT Device under subclass 268 provided with means to grip the member or
    portion, said gripping means being integral with or attached to the strip
    or portion.


CLS 220/270
TXT Device under subclass 266 provided with means to grip the member or portion.


CLS 220/271
TXT Device under subclass 270 having a vent which is opened when the pull tab
    or gripping means is pulled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231,    for closures provided with a vacuum breaker or manually operable
    vent; and 366 for specific vent means in a closure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 307+ for bottle and jar closures
    having vents therein.


CLS 220/272
TXT Device under subclass 270 wherein the pull tab and removable portion
    connected by rivet from and integral with the pull tab.


CLS 220/273
TXT Device under subclass 270 wherein the pull tab and removable portion are
    connected by a rivet formed from and integral with the removable portion.


CLS 220/274
TXT Device under subclass 270 wherein the means to grip the member or portion
    is constructed to accommodate a special tool such as, for example, a
    slotted key.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284,    for special tool engaging means associated with nonfrangible
    closures.


CLS 220/275
TXT Device under subclass 274 provided with means to guide the portion (strip)
    or to guide the tool during the opening operation.


CLS 220/276
TXT Device under subclass 266 wherein the line of weakness extends about the
    circumference of the receptacle or closure, near or at the juncture of the
    receptacle and closure.


CLS 220/277
TXT Device under subclass 265 wherein the closure, or portion thereof, is
    constructed to be ruptured or cut away by a cutting or punching operation;
    or constructed to receive a cutting or punching tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 400+ for opening devices which are cutting
    implements and which may be mounted on the receptacle for the cutting
    operation but which are completely disassociated from the receptacle to
    empty the receptacle contents.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 30+ for article dispensing devices
    including or combined with cutter or punch means to form an outlet opening
    in the supply receptacle or in the wrapper therefor.


CLS 220/278
TXT Device under subclass 277 comprising a puncturing element which also serves
    as a closure for the punched opening.


CLS 220/279
TXT Device under subclass 277 comprising a cutting operation, the cutter being
    a wire, cord or the like.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclass 133 for machines to form a package having
    an opening device incorporated therewith (e.g., a tear strip).


CLS 220/280
TXT Device under subclass 279 in which the wire, cord or the like is located in
    a seam joining parts of a receptacle.


CLS 220/281
TXT Device under subclass 260 wherein the closure is constructed to be released
    from interlocking engagement with the passage mouth upon the application of
    axial or radial pressure on the closure or receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclass 301 for opening devices under that class
    definition actuated by downwardly applied force.


CLS 220/282
TXT Device under subclass 281 wherein the closure or passage mouth is provided
    with fulcra or rocking points, downward pressure applied to the closure in
    the area adjacent said points will effect a tilting action of the closure
    and cause the opposite edge of the closure to abruptly pop up, thereby
    loosening the closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    283,    for a hinged closure provided with fulcra portions or rocker points.


CLS 220/283
TXT Device under subclass 282 wherein the closure is hinged to the receptacle.


CLS 220/284
TXT Device under subclass 260 wherein the closure is provided with (1) means to
    receive or accommodate a tool which is specially constructed to limit its
    use to the particular receiving means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210,    wherein the tool is a "lock type" key.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 3.07+ for a receptacle closure remover tool, per
    se.


CLS 220/285
TXT Device under subclass 284 wherein the special tool is a lever or pry-off
    means and is attached to the closure or receptacle.


CLS 220/286
TXT Device under subclass 285 wherein the closure removing tool may be moved to
    various points around the periphery of the closure.


CLS 220/287
TXT Device under subclass 200 wherein the closure is adaptable to fit
    receptacle openings of various sizes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclass 319 for resilient cap type closures
    designed to accommodate plural size.


CLS 220/288
TXT Device under subclass 200 wherein the closure is directed in rotary and
    reciprocatory movement about screw threads or thread like elements so as to
    be readily, physically disassociated from its supporting structure.

    (1)     Note.  Screw-threaded rings for holding a closure in place will be
    found in this class (220) subclass 319.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 329+ for screw thread structure used
    on closures for bottles and jars.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, particularly subclasses 189+,  especially
    subclasses 201+ for bushings and similar fittings applied to plates, even
    though disclosed for receiving closures.


CLS 220/289
TXT Device under subclass 288 wherein the closure, or closure receiver, is
    deformed in situ to correspond with preformed threads on the closure
    receiver or closure, upon positioning said closure member.


CLS 220/290
TXT Device under subclass 288 wherein the closure is provided with structure to
    hold it in a position other than fully closed.


CLS 220/291
TXT Device under subclass 288 in which the closure element has motion of
    rotation about a central axis and is also mounted for a swinging motion.


CLS 220/292
TXT Device under subclass 288 in which the connection for swinging motion is a
    biased pivot or is in the form of a spring.


CLS 220/293
TXT Device under subclass 288 wherein the closure and receptacle are provided
    with interlocking means constructed to permit quick and easy removal or
    replacement of the closure, said means allowing the closure, when in
    passage blocking position, to be removed therefrom by rotating the closure
    less than 360 degrees.


CLS 220/294
TXT Device under subclass 293 wherein the interlocking means consists of an
    oval shaped closure, closure flange or passage mouth allowing the closure
    and passage mouth to be interlocked upon relative rotation therebetween;
    the interlocking of these parts occurs when the short axis of the ellipse
    is in contact with its coacting surface.


CLS 220/295
TXT Device under subclass 293 provided with a gasket or packing member and
    means apart from the inherent resilience of the gasket or packing for
    urging it into a sealing engagement between the closure and receptacle
    mouth.


CLS 220/296
TXT Device under subclass 293 wherein the interlocking means consists of a
    spiral, thread like member with a break or gap in the continuity of the
    spiral for the insertion or withdrawal of a member cooperating therewith to
    secure the closure across the passage.


CLS 220/297
TXT Device under subclass 293 wherein the interlocking means includes a headed
    stud projecting into a coacting slot, said slot having one end thereof
    designed to receive the headed stud and the opposite end thereof designed
    to retain the stud.


CLS 220/298
TXT Device under subclass 293 wherein the interlocking means includes a
    plurality of horizontally spaced, radially extending lugs, having surfaces
    in the same horizontal plane cooperating with radially outwardly extending
    lugs of similar structure.


CLS 220/299
TXT Device under subclass 298 wherein the lug engaging surfaces are provided
    with means to lessen the friction therebetween.


CLS 220/300
TXT Device under subclass 293 wherein the interlocking means comprises a lug
    member extending from either the closure or the receptacle neck portion,
    the lug member extending into an "L" shaped or "C" shaped slot to cooperate
    therewith in a closing and locking movement.


CLS 220/301
TXT Device under subclass 293 wherein the interlocking means comprises a
    fingerlike or lug projection which cooperatively engages a cammed keeper.


CLS 220/302
TXT Device under subclass 301 wherein the lugs or projections are constructed
    of resilient, spring-like material.


CLS 220/303
TXT Device under subclass 288 wherein the closure is provided with a valve or
    vent, such valve or vent usually for the purpose of allowing gas to escape
    from the closed receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202+,   for a condition responsive (e.g., to pressure) vent or valve on a
    closure.

    231,    for vacuum breakers and/or manually operable vents or valves;

    366.1,  for vent means located at the juncture of the closure-closure
    support;

    367.1,  for closure having vent means therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclass 176 for bell and tank type
    gas holders.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, for apparatus for gas separation, per
    se.  Class 220 takes vents for closures for receptacles combined with gas
    separating means wherein the gas separator is recited by name only, or the
    claim includes details of the receptacle (e.g., splash plate in the
    receptacle or vent, etc.) or of the closure (e.g., configuration or means
    for attaching to the receptacle, etc.).

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 493 for valves which open in response to
    either pressure or vacuum, and subclass 587 for fluid handling systems
    having two or more openings one of which is a gas vent for a tank and the
    other is a liquid inlet and/or outlet.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 307+ for devices under that class
    definition having vents or valves therein.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 144 for closure-mounted or
    receptacle-mounted valves where no more of the closure or container is
    claimed than is necessary to mount, support or accommodate the valve.  The
    closure or receptacle all may form part of the valve structure, e.g., the
    valve seat where no further structural modification of the closure or
    receptacle is involved other than the means to mount, support or
    accommodate the valve.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process, subclasses 53+ and 82 for battery having venting structure.

    454,    Ventilation, subclass 195 for means combined with a door for
    ventilating a room.


CLS 220/304
TXT Device under subclass 288 including means acting at the juncture of the
    closure and an adjacent member to oppose the passage of fluid therebetween.


CLS 220/305
TXT Device under subclass 200 wherein the closure:  (1) is pre-stressed so as
    to normally assume a warped shape and must be force toward an unwarped
    position during application, the inherent force trying to assume the
    pre-stressed warped shape being the force which holds in the closure in
    place; (2) is normally unwarped or warped in shape while unapplied and is
    warped in or further warped during application, the force of trying to
    assume an unwarped or less warped position being the force which holds the
    closure in place.


CLS 220/309.1
TXT Removable closure retained by ductile in situ deformation (e.g., crimp):

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the closure or closure support is
    intended to be crimped, rolled, or folded together forming a juncture which
    must be destroyed in removing the closure.


CLS 220/309.2
TXT Noncontinuous interlock along perimeter of closure, closure support
    juncture:

    Subject matter under subclass 309.1 wherein the deformation does not extend
    around the entire length of the closure, closure juncture.


CLS 220/310.1
TXT With gasket or packing:

    Subject matter under subclass 309.1 wherein the closure includes means
    intended to act at the closure, closure juncture to oppose the passage of
    material or fluid therebetween.


CLS 220/314
TXT Device under subclass 200 in which the closure is carried by a cross bar
    which serves both as a mounting for the closure and as a closure fastener.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94+,    for receptacle handles which also serves as closure fasteners but
    which involve more modification of the handle than is necessary to perform
    the closure-fastening function.

    243+,   for bar fastening means located inside of the receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclasses 256+ for closure clamps which embody
    cross bars, and subclasses 259+ for closure fasteners in the form of cross
    bars.


CLS 220/315
TXT Device under subclass 200 having means to retain, secure or otherwise
    fasten the closure in its closed position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     for bail ears which also serve as closure fasteners but in which
    the modification of the bail ear involves features which are not solely
    related to the fastening function.

    94+,    for receptacle handles which also serves as closure fasteners but
    which involve a modification of the handle for an independent function in
    addition to that which is necessary to perform the closure-fastening
    function.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclasses 77+ for locks, per se, as applied to closures
    when no particular structure of the closure is involved.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 273+ for independent fastening device
    which are separately applied to closures for bottles and jars.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclass 89 for fasteners for the closures of
    wooden barrels.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 45+ for
    fasteners for the closures of paper boxes and subclasses 77+ for fasteners
    for the closures of paper envelopes.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, appropriate subclasses for fasteners, per se,
    for closures and for receptacles and closures having fasteners wherein
    there is included only so much of the receptacle and closure as cooperate
    with the fasteners to maintain the closure fastened or which recite, as
    hinged, a type of closure but no particular details which are independent
    in function.

    384,    Bearings, subclass 190.7 for latch means for lids of railway car
    journal boxes.


CLS 220/316
TXT Device under subclass 315 in which the securing members of the fastener are
    combined with internal pressure elements which block the movement of the
    member to closure releasing position while pressure remains in the
    receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203.19+, for a receptacle closure comprising a pressure responsive vent or
    valve which also acts as a lock releasing means.


CLS 220/317
TXT Device under subclass 315 in which the securing members of the fastener
    constitute handles which perform the fastening function while tilting the
    receptacle, as in pouring.


CLS 220/318
TXT Device under subclass 315 in which the securing means of the fastener are
    attached to a handle on a closure member or a receptacle member and movable
    relative thereto to engage the other member.


CLS 220/319
TXT Device under subclass 315 wherein the fastener is in the form of a ring
    which surrounds the receptacle mouth and closure periphery, binding them
    together.  A ring of this type would not, in and of itself, form a closure.


CLS 220/320
TXT Device under subclass 319 wherein the closure retaining device is in the
    form of a ring capable of exerting a converging or diverging force in a
    direction parallel to the face of the closure.


CLS 220/321
TXT Device under subclass 320 wherein the ring is expanded or contracted by a
    force multiplying means such as a lever.


CLS 220/322
TXT Device under subclass 315 wherein the closure retainer is a U-shaped or
    bifurcated element, the legs of which are directly, or indirectly connected
    on opposite sides of the passage to be closed and the light of which bears
    against the closure.


CLS 220/323
TXT Device under subclass 315 wherein the closure retainer comprises an
    elongated element acting to exert an axial force between the face of the
    closure and the passage to be closed.


CLS 220/324
TXT Device under subclass 315 wherein the closure retainer is in the form of
    miscellaneous hardware as reflected in the title.


CLS 220/325
TXT Device under subclass 324 wherein the clamp is screw actuated.


CLS 220/326
TXT Device under subclass 324 wherein a resiliently urged locking member,
    carried by either the closure or the container, cooperates with means
    carried by the other element to effect fastening of the closure to the
    container.


CLS 220/327
TXT Device under subclass 315 in which the fastening means includes a threaded
    member.


CLS 220/328
TXT Device under subclass 327 where in some additional means other than threads
    of the threaded members interposed between the closure and fastening means
    to prevent displacement from and/or maintain sufficient pressure on the
    closure to hold the same in the sealed position.


CLS 220/329
TXT Device under subclass 200 provided with means mounting the closure for
    movement along two or more different lines or planes of travel or about two
    or more axes of rotation or a combination thereof, in a single opening and
    closing movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 550 for dispensers having rotary and swinging
    motion.


CLS 220/330
TXT Device under subclass 329 wherein the closure is mounted relative to a
    container having a carrying bail, and said bail being utilized as the same
    mounting means.


CLS 220/331
TXT Device under subclass 329 in which the compound movement is that of sliding
    or reciprocating and swinging.


CLS 220/332
TXT Device under subclass 329 in which the closure is mounted so as to swing in
    two or more planes.


CLS 220/333
TXT Device under subclass 329 provided with a plurality of pivots, the axes of
    which are in the same plane or planes parallel to the plane of the closure.


CLS 220/334
TXT Device under subclass 200 wherein the closure is mounted on the receptacle
    by means of a hinge or other pivotal connection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, for hinges capable of application to any
    receptacle of conventional form.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 517 for dispensers with pivoted, biased outlet
    elements.


CLS 220/335
TXT Device under subclass 334 having means to maintain the closure in a
    position other than closed relative to the receptacle opening.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 257.075 for a
    spring-closed container for a supply of coating material, the closure for
    which is movable away from an opening by force applied thereto by an
    applicator, to permit entry of the applicator into the container.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 69.3 for an inkstand and penrack,
    combined, including a spring-opened closure kept closed by the positioning
    of a pen or a pen support.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 134 and 147 for receptacle closure operating
    devices, combined with a receptacle stand.


CLS 220/336
TXT Device under subclass 334 mounted to swing in a single plane on a pivot
    which is perpendicular to the plane of the closure.


CLS 220/337
TXT Device under subclass 334 wherein cooperating hinging members on the
    closure and closure support are formed integral with the closure and
    closure support respectively.


CLS 220/338
TXT Device under subclass 337 wherein mating hinge elements are readily snapped
    into an interlocking relationship without the use of tools, the force
    holding them together being that of friction.


CLS 220/339
TXT Device under subclass 337 wherein the hinging connection is constructed of
    flaccid or flexible material allowing the closure to swing relative to the
    closure support about said connecting material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    375,    for closures provided with a cord strand or wire tether means.


CLS 220/340
TXT Device under subclass 337 wherein the closure hinges about an upwardly bent
    continuation of the closure flange which interlocks with a downwardly bent
    continuation of the body mouth.


CLS 220/341
TXT Device under subclass 337 wherein at least one of the hinging elements is
    deformed to swingably cooperate with its mating element during the step of
    interconnecting said elements.


CLS 220/342
TXT Device under subclass 337 wherein the interconnection between mating hinge
    members is completed by an additional separate member.


CLS 220/343
TXT Device under subclass 342 wherein the separate member is a pintle or pivot
    pin.


CLS 220/344
TXT Device under subclass 334 including means acting at the juncture of the
    closure and the closure support or receptacle mouth to oppose the passage
    of fluid therebetween.


CLS 220/345
TXT Device under subclass 200 provided with means supporting the closure for
    rectilinear movement in alternate directions, e.g., sliding.


CLS 220/346
TXT Device under subclass 345 comprising means preventing unintentional
    relative motion between the closure and its support.


CLS 220/347
TXT Device under subclass 346 wherein the securing means includes a cam member.


CLS 220/348
TXT Device under subclass 345 including spring means urging the closure in its
    opening or closing movement.


CLS 220/349
TXT Device under subclass 345 provided with antifriction means interposed
    between the closure and its support to lessen the friction therebetween
    during closure movement.


CLS 220/350
TXT Device under subclass 345 wherein the closure is (1) constructed of
    flexible material, or (2) comprises a plurality of rigid strips, slots or
    panels interconnected with each other for relative motion therebetween,
    thus giving the overall impression of being flexible.


CLS 220/351
TXT Device under subclass 345 wherein the closure is provided with a depending
    flange which fits closely over and around the passage mouth.


CLS 220/359
TXT Device under subclass 200 wherein the closure is affixed to and retained on
    the passage mouth by adhesion or fusion means.


CLS 220/360
TXT Device under subclass 200 wherein the receptacle is provided with a vent or
    valve through a wall thereof and the closure is provided with means by
    which the vent or valve may be regulated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203.01+, for a receptacle closure comprising a pressure responsive vent or
    valve.


CLS 220/361
TXT Device under subclass 200 wherein the closure is provided with a vent or
    filling opening and such vent or opening is provided with means to seal or
    otherwise close it off.


CLS 220/362
TXT Device under subclass 361 in which the closure is subjected to a deforming
    action to effect a closing of a normally open vent or opening.


CLS 220/363
TXT Device under subclass 361 in which the sealing or closing means is
    nonmetallic.


CLS 220/364
TXT Device under subclass 361 wherein the vent or opening is sealed or closed
    by the application of a hardenable material.


CLS 220/365
TXT Device under subclass 364 wherein a shield is provided to prevent the
    receptacle contents from being contaminated by the hardenable material.


CLS 220/366.1
TXT Vent at closure, closure support juncture:

    Device under subclass 200 wherein a ventilating passage is located
    intermediate the closure and the support for the closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203.09, for a closure comprising a pressure responsive vent or valve, said
    vent or valve comprising means moving the closure with respect to the
    receptacle rim.

    745,    for a vent structure attached to the container body.


CLS 220/367.1
TXT Vent in closure:

    Device under subclass 200 having a ventilating passage therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203.01+, for a receptacle closure comprising a pressure responsive vent or
    valve.

    745,    for a vent structure attached to the container body.


CLS 220/368
TXT Device under subclass 367.1 wherein the closure is provided with a
    collector for fluid which may be discharged during the venting operation.


CLS 220/369
TXT Device under subclass 367.1 in the form of a cover for a cooking utensil,
    the cover allowing the passage of heat, steam, etc., therethrough, but
    intercepting drops of liquid splashed or splattered during a cooking
    operation for returning the same to the utensil.

    (1)     Note.  Devices of this type are usually made of a metal mesh like
    material.


CLS 220/370
TXT Device under subclass 205 wherein at least a portion of the cover comprises
    a mesh, netting or gauze type material.


CLS 220/371
TXT Device under subclass 367.1 wherein the vent means is provided with
    filtering means permitting the passage therethrough of vapors, such as
    gases, steam, or air, while preventing the passage of liquids.


CLS 220/372
TXT Device under subclass 371 wherein the filtering element is constructed of
    screen-like material.


CLS 220/373
TXT Device under subclass 367.1 wherein the closure or vent is provided with
    means to prevent the receptacle contents from escaping through the vent or
    opening.


CLS 220/374
TXT Device under subclass 373 wherein a tortuous or serpentine passage prevent
    the receptacle contents from escaping through the vent or opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    745,    for a vent structure attached to the container body.


CLS 220/375
TXT Device under subclass 200 provided with flexible means between the closure
    and the closure support, said means limiting relative movement between said
    closure and support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    339,    for closures having a flexible hinge integral with the receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 543 for similar connectors for removable
    outlet element of dispensing receptacles.


CLS 220/376
TXT Device under subclass 200 including means forming an exposed surface which
    exhibits a particular desired visual effect, which effect is gained by (1)
    having a defined simulation of an animate or inanimate object or (2) having
    a surface or surfaces thereof defining a desired ornamental design.


CLS 220/377
TXT Device under subclass 200 wherein a substantial portion of the closure is
    visually transparent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 294+ for
    watch bezel with crystal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    602,    for an endwall structure having a transparent area.

    662+,   for a side wall structure having a transparent area.


CLS 220/377.1
TXT Percolator top type:
    Closure under subclass 377 in which the transparent portion protrudes from
    the closure.

    (1)     Note.  The transparent protuberance constitutes an inspection
    window, and is usually hollow and may be disclosed as a knob, deflector,
    etc. for the top of a coffee or other beverage percolator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 307+ for percolator
    tops claiming significant beverage deflection or in combination with the
    beverage infuser.


CLS 220/378
TXT Device under the class definition comprising means acting at the juncture
    of the closure and closure support or receptacle mouth to oppose the
    passage of fluid therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    614,    for sealing means comprising an inner closure seamed to the
    receptacle body, or for particular means for soldering the inner frangible
    closure in place.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 341+ for gaskets and seals peculiar to
    that class.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 542 for dispensers with a packing seal for the
    outlet.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 628+ for a static contact seal for other than an
    internal combustion engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable.


CLS 220/379
TXT Device under subclass 200 comprising a device other than the means to guide
    the closure in its movement, secured to the closure or adjacent the closure
    opening, to brace or hold the closure when the closure is disassociated
    from its closing position.

    (1)     Note.  "Tethering" means are not considered as a support for a
    displaced closure and are classified in 375.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    744,    for a removable attachment which performs the same function.


CLS 220/380
TXT Device under the class definition wherein the closure has a particular
    configuration to engage mating configurations on another superimposable
    closure to enhance the stability of such closures when placed one upon the
    other in a stacked or nested relationship.


CLS 220/400
TXT WITH SEPARABLE LINER OR ENCASEMENT:

    A container under the class definition including a "complete" inner (or
    outer) barrier which, as specified, is capable of application or removal
    without irreversible modification of either securement means or other
    barrier structure.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a container with a liner that collapses
    within the outer barrier when empty.

    (2)     Note.  The term "complete" is used to emphasize that the inner (or
    outer) barrier is by itself capable of functioning as a container, though
    it need not necessarily constitute a full "water tight" enclosure.

    (3)     Note.  See (1) Note and (8) Note under subclass 415.

    (4)     Note.  The term "barrier" is used here to encompass a wall, side,
    end, top, bottom, or partition of a receptacle.


CLS 220/401
TXT Skeleton encasement (i.e., outer lattice work):

    A container under subclass 400 wherein the outer barrier is an open
    framework.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is an open framework with means to rest on the
    ground.  See Class 220, subclass 18 for a container with a similar open
    framework secured to or set into the ground.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70.1,   for an end structure support of the open framework type.

    72.1,   for an open framework body reinforcement.

    668,    for an open framework wall structure, per se.


CLS 220/402
TXT Including shield for liner:

    A container under subclass 400 with a distinct protective member for an
    inner barrier.

    (1)     Note.  Generally, such protective member is itself removable after
    serving its shield function as in a trash compactor.

    (2)     Note.  Such shield may protect either side of a liner.


CLS 220/403
TXT "Flexible" or "flaccid" liner:

    A container under subclass 400 wherein the inner barrier member is supple.

    (1)     Note.  A "flaccid" layer can be draped or collapsed without
    permanent distortion and thus connotes more than mere elasticity of
    material.

    (2)     Note.  The term "flexible" is used here to include a
    self-supporting member capable of considerable temporary deformation, such
    as a thin plastic cup or dish.

    (3)     Note.  Some material may be considered "flexible" or "flaccid", but
    classification here requires that the material in the form, shape, or size
    utilized is supple.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    460+,   for "flaccid" multilayer barrier structure and see search notes
    thereunder.


CLS 220/404
TXT Supported at open terminus (e.g., bag, sack):

    A container under subclass 403 wherein the inner barrier member is held,
    relative to outer structure, adjacent the mouth of said member.


CLS 220/405
TXT Plate or tray-type (e.g., foil ashtray, paper dish):

    A container under subclass 403 wherein the inner barrier member is a
    generally flat or shallow receptacle-like member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    441+,   for a multilayer barrier structure including a corrugated layer.

    450+,   for a multilayer barrier structure including a foil layer.

    460+,   for a multilayer barrier structure including a "flaccid" layer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 557+ for a tray-type
    receptacle, per se.


CLS 220/406
TXT Plural stack or nest:

    A container under subclass 405 including a "pile" of two or more flat or
    shallow members.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 499 for nesting or vertical
    stacking within a receptacle.


CLS 220/407
TXT With liner supply:

    A container under subclass 403 including two or more supple liners arrayed
    so that as one is removed another is available for use.

    (1)     Note.  Generally, the individual liners are in a "collapsed" state
    and in roll, stack, or folded array.


CLS 220/408
TXT Erected liner for erected container:

    A container under subclass 400 wherein each of at least two "complete"
    barriers is a preformed receptacle and either insertable into another
    preformed receptacle or placeable over another preformed receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  The term preformed includes a carton folded into receptacle
    form, a molded receptacle or any other receptacle in a content-holding
    state.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 514 and 515+ for
    structure for nesting receptacles not in a content-holding manner.


CLS 220/409
TXT With liner lifter mechanism:

    A container under subclass 408 including structure for raising the inner
    receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  An opening or a handle or a hook which permits manual or
    machine grasping for a lift purpose is not such structure.

    (2)     Note.  Included here is a container with a linkage or lever
    arrangement to raise a liner by operating a foot pedal.

    (3)     Note.  A mechanism or structure, not part of a container, used to
    engage and raise a liner is classified elsewhere on the basis of such
    mechanism or structure, per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262+,   for a similar means to actuate a closure.


CLS 220/410
TXT Nonmetallic liner:

    A container under subclass 408 wherein the inner receptacle material is
    other than metal, e.g., plastic, paper, wood.

    (1)     Note.  The nonmetallic nature of the material should be clearly
    disclosed and not be merely deduced from other "facts".


CLS 220/411
TXT Prefilled "can" type:

    A container under subclass 408 wherein an inner receptacle is disclosed as
    filled (or with content) prior to installation of said inner receptacle
    within an outer receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  Generally, an inner receptacle for this subclass is filled,
    handled, and/or transported in the absence of the outer receptacle.
    However, as set forth in the patent, the inner and outer receptacle are
    later associated for some particular mode of use and such combination is
    classified herein.

    (2)     Note.  The prefilled state of an inner receptacle should be clearly
    disclosed and not be merely deduced from other "facts".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403+,   for a removable "flexible" or "flaccid" liner which may be filled
    while in assembled relationship with an outer receptacle and then removed
    and emptied, e.g., a trash can liner.


CLS 220/412
TXT "Hot", "cold", "insulated" chest-type:

    A container under subclass 411 disclosed as structured to maintain an
    elevated, or lowered, temperature of the content and which structure may
    include multilayer barrier means.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is an ice cream tub container, a "fireless"
    cooker, and a milk can holder.

    (2)     Note.  See specific subclasses under  415 for similar structure
    without the separable characteristic.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclass, for specific cooling means
    combined with a cabinet.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, appropriate subclasses, for combustion means
    combined with a cabinet.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses, for a specific
    heat-transferring relationship between an exchange means and a cabinet.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 541+ for a similar lunch
    or camp kit arrangement.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses 4, 128+, and 131 for a tank, box, or
    other receptacle including a temperature barrier for the contents.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 214 for a hollow wall or
    insulated cabinet; subclass 236 for a cabinet combined with heating,
    cooling, or heat exchange means.


CLS 220/413
TXT With specified liner retainer:

    A container under subclass 412 including a distinct means to secure or hold
    an inner receptacle relative to an outer receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  The distinct means may be integral with, or attached to,
    either liner or outer container but should be clearly delineated as such
    means for the retainer function, rather than deduced from other "facts".


CLS 220/414
TXT FILAMENTARY WOUND BARRIER STRUCTURE:

    A container under the class definition wherein at least one wall is made or
    reinforced by wrapping an attenuated element into abutting or close
    overlapping relation with itself.

    (1)     Note.  The attenuated element may be wire, glass fiber, textile
    material, paper strip, metal bar, or strap, etc.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not take patents which include barrier
    structure of attenuated material first made into sheet form (such as woven
    fabric) and then worked into receptacle form.  See other subclasses below,
    especially subclass 19 for a wire receptacle.

    (3)     Note.  See (4) Note under subclass 400.

    (4)     Note.  See (1) Note under subclass 415.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    589,    for a high-pressure-gas tank having a filament wound layer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclass 4.5 for a
    cylindrical tube or a conical body or wall.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 299+ and 303+ for a device to wind a paper
    strip into a tube.


CLS 220/415
TXT MULTILAYER BARRIER STRUCTURE:

    A container under the class definition wherein at least one wall, panel, or
    end includes substantially coextensive plural plies, laminas, layers, or
    strata.

    (1)     Note.  This is an initial attempt to provide a residual locus for
    patents directed to a container with multilayer barrier structure.  To date
    (1977) only patents from parts of Classes 220 and 229 have been utilized to
    create this locus; therefore, the search notes appended to this and
    indented definitions must be carefully considered for other existing loci
    of similar patents.

    (2)     Note.  Included here are spaced or contiguous plies,
    self-sustaining or nonself-sustaining layers, planar or nonplanar strata,
    free or secured laminas as well as solid, foraminous, particulate, gas, or
    liquid layers.

    (3)     Note.  Included here as multilayer barrier structure is a container
    with an internal or external "lining".

    (4)     Note.  Generally, specific multilayer structure as defined above
    combined with a specific receptacle characteristic is considered
    classifiable in this and indented subclasses.  However, mere "nominal"
    inclusion of a receptacle in such combination is not considered "specific"
    and, as such, is considered merely multilayer barrier structure, per se,
    for Class 428.  See (1) Note of Class 206.

    (5)     Note.  The stated utility of a container multilayer barrier, e.g.,
    reinforcement, insulation, partition, "shock protection", etc., will not
    exclude a patent for such structure (otherwise meeting the above
    definition) from this or indented subclasses.

    (6)     Note.  Multilayer structure limited to a seam or joint is not
    provided for here.  See appropriate subclasses in Classes 220 and 229.

    (7)     Note.  An end or side of a receptacle with folded flaps
    constituting the multilayer structure for that end or side is so common
    that such flap structure, not otherwise combined with additional
    coextensive plies or lamina, will not be classified in this and indented
    subclasses.  See subclass 62 of this class (220) and Class 229, subclasses
    16+.

    (8)     Note.  Classified here is a container with plural wall structure
    not more specifically provided for elsewhere. Mere disclosure, or claim, of
    strengthening a container by such plural wall means is included here rather
    than considered "shock protection" for Class 206.  However, a removable
    liner (for one wall or plural walls) disclosed for "shock protection" of a
    content article combined with a container therefor, is classified with the
    "shock-protection" structure of Class 206, subclasses 521+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.5,    for a freight container with a multilayer wall.

    400,    for a container with separable liner or encasement.

    470,    for a container lining, per se.

    586+,   for a high-pressure-gas tank with a multilayer wall.

    626+,   for an end wall of multi-layer construction.

    639+,   for container body reinforcing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 521+ for multilayer shock
    protection structure and see (8) Note above.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 12.1+ for a bottle, jug or jar having
    multilayer barrier structure.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclass 3 for a wooden container lining.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 89+ for a
    bottle wrapper.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for multilayer material, per se.


CLS 220/416
TXT Folded single blank-type:

    A container under subclass 415 wherein a unitary piece of stock material,
    e.g., sheet, web, fabric, etc., is bent, or doubled, upon itself to erect a
    container in such fashion as to provide at least one multilayer barrier.

    (1)     Note.  See (6) Note and (7) Note of subclass 415.

    (2)     Note.  As of this date, 1977, patents in Class 229, subclasses 31
    and 34 have not been screened for structure classifiable in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    453,    460+ and 468, for a sheet coiled, rather than bent, upon itself to
    form a multilayer tube or cylinder-like container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 492 for an article folded
    with a blank.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes,subclasses 100+ for a
    folded, blank paperboard box.


CLS 220/417
TXT Including coated layer:

    A container under subclass 416 wherein the material is painted, plated,
    impregnated, sprayed, or overspread before or after folding.


CLS 220/418
TXT Plural lamina blank:

    A container under subclass 416 wherein the stock material is a multilayer
    structure.


CLS 220/419
TXT Metallic blank:

    A container under subclass 416 wherein the stock material is metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    418,    for a multilayer blank of the same type, one layer of which is
    metal.


CLS 220/420
TXT Evacuated space between layers:

    A container under subclass 415 wherein a space between at least two plies
    or laminas is below atmospheric pressure.

    (1)     Note.  Generally, the evacuated space of this subclass type is
    coextensive with the two plies.  However, this subclass is the residual
    locus for any evacuated space between two plies regardless of the extent of
    the evacuated space relative to the two plies.

    (2)     Note.  The evacuated space of this subclass type includes
    individual voids in solid or fluent material between the two plies.  For
    such voids within an intermediate insulating material, however, see
    subclasses 421+ indented hereunder, particularly subclass 422 for evacuated
    voids within individual particles of an insulating fluent mass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 12+, for spaced wall or jacket
    structure with or without a vacuum feature.


CLS 220/421
TXT With intermediate insulating means:

    A container under subclass 420 including heat transfer inhibiting material
    or structure between the two plies in addition to the evacuated space.


CLS 220/422
TXT Fluent material:

    A container under subclass 421 wherein the heat transfer inhibiting
    material is comprised of particles, flakes, granules, or other material
    capable of free flow.

    (1)     Note.  The individual particles of this subclass type may contain
    evacuated space and/or be contained within evacuated space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    429,    for an intermediate fluent mass layer not contained within or
    containing evacuated space.


CLS 220/423
TXT Plus distinct reflector means:

    A container under subclass 421 including additional specific structure or
    material between the two plies or laminas which radiates heat back toward
    its source.

    (1)     Note.  Such additional structure or material may include a
    coextensive foil sheeting, a coating, embedded particles in the insulation,
    etc.


CLS 220/424
TXT With intermediate reflector means:

    A container under subclass 420 including material between the two plies or
    laminas which radiates heat back toward its source.

    (1)     Note.  Such material may include a coextensive foil sheet, a
    coating, etc.


CLS 220/425
TXT Layer-space-layer only:

    A container under subclass 420 having at least two spaced plies with
    nothing between them other than a gas at a pressure lower than atmospheric
    pressure.

    (1)     Note.  The gas between the layers is, for example, air.

    (2)     Note.  There may be spacer means, support means, or other nonlayer
    means between the two plies in addition to the gas.


CLS 220/426
TXT Fluid-filled space between layers (fluid other than "dead" air):

    A container under subclass 415 wherein a space between at least two plies
    or laminas contains a specific liquid or gas.

    (1)     Note.  Generally, the fluid-filled space of this subclass type is
    coextensive with the two plies. However, this subclass is the residual
    locus for any fluid-filled space between two plies regardless of the extent
    of the fluid-filled space relative to the two plies.

    (2)     Note.  The fluid-filled space of this subclass type includes
    individual fluid-filled spaces within solid or fluent material intermediate
    the two plies.

    (3)     Note.  Included here is a space filled with liquid or gaseous
    material other than water or steam for which see subclass 428 below.

    (4)     Note.  Mere entrapped air ("dead" air) is not considered a fluid
    for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    429,    for an intermediate fluent mass layer not contained within or
    containing fluid-filled space.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 457.1+, for similar devices with a
    specifically formulated fluid for freezing.  Note that as of this date
    (1977) patents in Class 62 have not been screened for structure properly
    classifiable in this and the indented subclasses.


CLS 220/427
TXT Compartmented dish or tray (e.g., baby server):

    A container under subclass 426 including a generally open and partitioned
    plate, bowl, or shallow receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    575,    for a compartmented table dish which is not of spaced wall
    construction.

    600+,   for a compartmented container.


CLS 220/428
TXT Water or steam:

    A container under subclass 426 wherein the fluid is water or steam.

    (1)     Note.  The space may include ice as well as water since, in fact,
    such a container often provides for the transformation of water from or to
    ice or steam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 396+ for liquid dispensers indirectly
    cooled in an ice bath.


CLS 220/429
TXT Intermediate fluent mass layer (e.g., powder, loose hair, particles, etc.):

    A container under subclass 415 wherein particles, flakes, granules (or
    other material capable of relatively free flow) form at least one stratum
    within a multilayer barrier.

    (1)     Note.  This is the locus for a fluent material layer; see
    appropriate subclasses above for a fluid (gas or liquid) layer.


CLS 220/430
TXT Separate edge-bridge (e.g., "breaker-strip"):

    A container under subclass 415 wherein an exposed terminus of plural plies
    is covered, or lapped, by a distinct member other than a portion of one of
    said plural plies or a portion of a container closure.

    (1)     Note.  While a separate closure is not considered an edge-bridge
    for this subclass, included herein is an edge-bridge configured to coact or
    interfit with such closure, e.g., a gasket member for an ice chest which
    gasket laps the plural plies of the chest.

    (2)     Note.  The member may be permanently affixed or readily removable.


CLS 220/431
TXT Spaced wall-contacting:

    A container under subclass 430 wherein at least two of the plural plies,
    separated or apart from each other, are lapped by the edge-bridge or
    "breaker-strip" member.

    (1)     Note.  The "breaker-strip" usually serves both to space the plies
    and to seal off the space between said plies.


CLS 220/432
TXT With fastener means:

    A container under subclass 431 wherein the member is fixed to the plies by
    one or more securement means.

    (1)     Note.  Mere adhesive, friction, or weldment means, per se, for a
    "breaker-strip" is not considered securement means for this subclass and is
    classified in subclass 431 above.


CLS 220/433
TXT Pronged bridge:

    A container under subclass 432 wherein the securement means includes a
    channel-like, or fork-like, element overlying the plies.


CLS 220/434
TXT Separate resilient fastener:

    A container under subclass 432 wherein the securement means is a distinct
    yieldable element.

    (1)     Note.  The yieldable characteristic relates to the securement
    function of the fastener.


CLS 220/435
TXT Specified structure for relative layer movement:

    A container under subclass 415 including particular means providing, in
    assembled position, for limited shifting of at least one layer, or layer
    portion, with respect to another.

    (1)     Note.  The particular means must clearly be set forth in terms of
    the movement function and not be inferred from other "facts".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    448,    for a resilient spacer means.


CLS 220/436
TXT Articulated layer members:

    A container under subclass 435 including jointed lamina portions which move
    relative to each other to accommodate movement.

    (1)     Note.  Generally, the means joining one portion of a lamina to
    another permit such movement.


CLS 220/437
TXT Distinct nonlayer member:

    A container under subclass 435 including at least one means, substantially
    of lesser extent than the coextensive walls, connecting one wall to
    another, which connecting means provides for relative wall shifting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    445+,   for a specified spacer means between layers disclosed for movement
    functions.


CLS 220/438
TXT With corrugated layer:

    A container under subclass 437 including at least one ply or lamina of
    generally sinusoidal cross-section form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    441+,   for other multilayer or barrier structure including a corrugated
    layer.


CLS 220/439
TXT Plural slip elements:

    A container under subclass 437 including two or more connecting means which
    slide relative to each other.


CLS 220/440
TXT Corrugated layer:

    A container under subclass 435 wherein a layer of generally sinusoidal
    cross-section form is the means for shifting.

    (1)     Note.  See (3) Note under subclass 441.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    441+,   for other multilayer barrier structure including a corrugated layer.


CLS 220/441
TXT Including a corrugated layer:

    A container under subclass 415 wherein at least one ply or lamina has a
    generally sinusoidal cross-section form.

    (1)     Note.  The sinusoidal form may be a smooth curve or a series of
    sharp angular bends.

    (2)     Note.  See (8) Note under subclass 415.

    (3)     Note.  The term corrugated as used here (and in other subclasses of
    this class) includes (a) a single sinusoidal layer or (b) plural sinusoidal
    layers, or (c) plural sinusoidal layer faced on one side or both sides by a
    flat sheet [unless there is specific disclosure in re  critically of such
    (a), (b), or (c), or combinations thereof] i.e., the term corrugated
    standing alone means either (a), (b), or (c).  Thus (c) may be specifically
    disclosed as for relative layer movement and be classified in subclass 438
    or 440.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    438     and 440, for relative layer movement means including a corrugated
    layer.

    450,    for multilayer structure with a metal foil layer.

    460,    for multilayer barrier structure with a flaccid layer.


CLS 220/442
TXT Metallic corrugation:

    A container under subclass 441 wherein the generally sinusoidal ply is of
    metal.


CLS 220/443
TXT Coextensively bonded:

    A container under subclass 441 wherein the corrugated layer is cemented, or
    fused, to at least one other layer throughout substantially all of their
    contact extent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    453,    for multilayer barrier container with other coextensively bonded
    layers.


CLS 220/444
TXT Intermediate foamed-in-situ layer:

    A container under subclass 415 wherein a stratum of expanded cellular
    material is chemically formed or produced within or between previously
    established layers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    429,    for evacuated or fluid-filled voids in a fluent mass layer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 524 for a foamed-in-situ
    shock-protection retainer.


CLS 220/445
TXT Specified spacer means (nonlayer):

    A container under subclass 415 including at least one defined or particular
    element, intermediate barrier layers, to maintain a distance between said
    layers.

    (1)     Note.  A spacer may also have a "support" function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    437+,   for a nonlayer member between layers to enable relative movement.


CLS 220/446
TXT Adjacent an open and/or neck-like portion:

    A container under subclass 445 wherein a spacer means is situated near a
    free terminus of a receptacle or near a reduced or contracted portion of a
    receptacle body.


CLS 220/447
TXT And a closed-end spacer:

    A container under subclass 446 with another distinct spacer means adjacent
    a bottom or terminus barrier.


CLS 220/448
TXT Resilient:

    A container under subclass 445 wherein the defined spacer element is so
    configured, or mounted, as to be yieldable.

    (1)     Note.  A solid spacer made of "elastic" material is not considered
    "configured" or "mounted" for this subclass. Multilayer structure with such
    "elastic" spacer means is classifiable in subclass 445.


CLS 220/449
TXT Pliant wrapper supported by content:

    A container under subclass 415 wherein a generally flaccid multilayer
    barrier structure is shaped, or fitted about, and supported by, content.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a plural ply insulation cover draped around
    a hot water tank or at least over the top of such tank.


CLS 220/450
TXT Including a foil layer:

    A container under subclass 415 wherein at least one ply is a very thin
    metal sheeting.

    (1)     Note.  Sheeting material other than metal is not considered foil
    for this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Generally, a foil layer is so identified and should not be
    inferred. Except in certain configurations, a foil layer is not considered
    to be self-sustaining.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    441,    for multilayer barrier structure with a corrugated layer.

    460,    for multilayer barrier structure with a flaccid layer of rubber,
    cloth, paper, or plastic.


CLS 220/451
TXT Including asbestos filler:

    A container under subclass 415 including at least one ply, or lamina, of
    asbestos material.

    (1)     Note.  The asbestos may be in loose, woven, batt, or sheet form.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is intended to provide a locus for a
    multilayer barrier which includes asbestos material and which asbestos is
    not so characterized as to fit into subclasses higher in this class
    schedule.


CLS 220/452
TXT Including a batt layer:

    A container under subclass 415 wherein at least one ply is a generally
    self-sustaining member (or members) of interrelated, or intertwined, fibers
    or particles.

    (1)     Note.  Included here, in combination, is a compressed matt of hair,
    glass, wool, asbestos, cotton, etc., capable of being handled as a panel or
    block.

    (2)     Note.  Loose material in a bag, sack, or sheath is not a batt and
    should be classified on other characteristics.

    (3)     Note.  Matted or pressed material including an outer "skin" of
    similar coated or sintered material is considered a batt.


CLS 220/453
TXT Coextensively bonded self-sustaining layers:

    A container under subclass 415 wherein at least two laminas are fused, or
    cemented, to each other throughout substantially all of their extent.

    (1)     Note.  A "self-sustaining" layer is considered to be a lamina, or
    ply, disclosed as capable of retaining its planar form while free standing.

    (2)     Note.  A foil is not considered to be self-sustaining.  See
    subclass 450.


CLS 220/454
TXT Specified coated or impregnated layer (e.g., dipped, sprayed):

    A container under subclass 415 wherein a defined or particular initially
    fluent material forms a surface film on, or fills the voids in, another
    generally self-sustaining substrate layer.

    (1)     Note.  "Coated" includes deposited, brushed, painted, plated,
    stained, sintered, etc.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note under subclass 452.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    453,    for a multilayer barrier of plural self-sustaining layers bonded
    together by a coating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 524.3+ for a container
    with a specified material for a lining, coating, or impregnant.


CLS 220/455
TXT External:

    A container under subclass 454 where such film, or impregnant, is on the
    outside of the container wall.


CLS 220/456
TXT Specified plural coatings:

    A container under subclass 454 wherein there are at least two or more
    distinct coating layers particularly set forth.

    (1)     Note.  These plural coating layers need not be contiguous to each
    other.


CLS 220/457
TXT Specified nonmetal coating:

    A container under subclass 454 wherein the particular initially fluent
    material is other than "metal".

    (1)     Note.  See Class 75, subclass 84 for a working line between "metal"
    and nonmetal.

    (2)     Note.  For example, silicone, oxides, fluorides, most compounds of
    metal, plus nonmetal, boron, selenium, and tellurium are considered
    "metals" for purposes of this subclass.


CLS 220/458
TXT Compatible with food content:

    A container under subclass 457 wherein a disclosed utility for the
    receptacle is to hold comestible material without adverse effect to either
    content or receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    appropriate subclasses, for a container with food content.  See search note
    to Class 426 under Class 206 in the main class definition.


CLS 220/459
TXT Hot water boiler-type:

    A container under subclass 457 wherein a disclosed utility for the
    receptacle is to hold water during or after heating.


CLS 220/460
TXT Including flaccid veneer-like layer (e.g., cloth, paper):

    A container under subclass 415 wherein at least one thin sheet-like layer
    is distinctly flexible or supple in the finished receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note, (2) Note, and (3) Note, under subclass 403.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403,    for a receptacle with a separable flaccid liner.

    441,    for a receptacle including a corrugated layer which may be flexible
    in one plane.

    449,    for a receptacle with a pliant wrapper supported by content of the
    receptacle.

    450,    for a receptacle including a metal foil layer.


CLS 220/461
TXT "Plastic" (e.g., polyethylene, rubber, latex, etc):

    A container under subclass 460 wherein the flexible or supple layer is made
    of a synthetic material.

    (1)     Note.  Rubber or latex is considered a synthetic material for this
    subclass.


CLS 220/462
TXT Within erected blank:

    A container under subclass 461 wherein the plastic flaccid layer is
    contained in a folded container formed from a blank.

    (1)     Note.  The blank from which the container of this subclass type is
    formed is usually cardboard.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    410,    for a separable nonmetallic liner for an erected container.

    418,    for a folded single blank-type of multilayer barrier structure with
    a plastic lamina.


CLS 220/463
TXT Within erected blank:

    A container under subclass 460 wherein the flaccid layer is contained in a
    folded container formed from a blank.

    (1)     Note.  The blank from which the container of this subclass type is
    formed is usually cardboard.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    410,    for a separable nonmetallic liner for an erected container.

    418,    for a folded single blank-type of multilayer barrier structure with
    a plastic lamina.


CLS 220/464
TXT Intermediate self-sustaining panel:

    A container under subclass 415 wherein a member, which may itself be
    multilayer, substantially fixed in size and shape and substantially
    coextensive with other layers is placed between such previously established
    layers.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note, (2) Note, and (3) Note, under subclass 453.


CLS 220/465
TXT Including specified barrier aperture fitting (e.g., flange, bung):

    A container under subclass 415 with structural details of ingress or egress
    means through the barrier layers.

    (1)     Note.  Mere recital of an "opening", "aperture", "passage", "pipe",
    "vent", etc., is not considered structural detail for this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  As of this date (1977) Class 189, subclass 36 and Class 285,
    subclass 189 have similar structure.


CLS 220/466
TXT Double-walled barrel or drum-type:

    A container under subclass 415 of a closed, generally cylindrical, (often
    bulged) form with both cylindrical and radial portions having spaced walls
    and a relatively restricted opening through the spaced walls into the
    container.


CLS 220/467
TXT Refrigerator cabinet-type:

    A container under subclass 415 disclosed as a means to lower or retain the
    temperature level of content stored therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses 128+ for a similar structure mainly
    of wood. See search notes thereunder.


CLS 220/468
TXT Plural self-sustaining layers:

    A container under subclass 415 wherein at least two of the layers are
    disclosed as capable of independently retaining their configuration.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note and (2) Note under subclass 453.


CLS 220/469
TXT Spaced walls:

    A container under subclass 415 wherein at least one wall of a receptacle
    includes at least two laminas separated one from the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    415,    for a wall of plural laminae, not separated.

    420+,   for a wall with evacuated space between layers.

    425+,   for a wall fluid-filled space between layers.

    428+,   for a wall with an intermediate fluent mass layer.

    445+,   for a wall with specified spacer means.

    464,    for a wall with an intermediate
    self-sustaining panel.

    466,    for a double-walled barrel or drum.


CLS 220/470
TXT LINING, PER SE:

    Subject matter under the class definition limited to a single ply or single
    lamina, inner (or outer) barrier which is disclosed as intended for use
    within (or without) other barrier structure, which other barrier structure
    is not claimed.

    (1)     Note.  A lining for this subclass cannot be of plural ply or
    multilamina structure, such lining being provided for in subclasses 415+.

    (2)     Note.  Included here is a lining, per se, of metal, paper, plastic,
    or analogous material.

    (3)     Note.  A lining, per se, by disclosure, which lining otherwise
    meets the definition of a receptacle for any other receptacle class, should
    be classified here and cross-referenced to such other class.  As of this
    date (1977) there may still be patents in such classes (150, 190, 206, 215,
    229) which should be classified here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclass 3.5 for a metal
    foil material.


CLS 220/475
TXT POLE OR ROD SUPPORTED CONTAINER:
    Receptacle under the class definition including structure attached to or
    part of the container, which structure is intended to coact with an
    elongated member to support the container above the ground or floor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 146+ for a stationary receptacle stand.


CLS 220/476
TXT WALL SUPPORTED CONTAINER:
    Receptacle under the class definition including structure attached to or
    part of the container, which structure is intended to coact with an upright
    surface to support the container above the ground or floor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    408+,   for a container having a removable, erected liner.

    445+,   for container wall spacing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 317+ for a suspended support for a container.


CLS 220/477
TXT Recessed wall mounting:
    Receptacle under subclass 476 wherein the container support structure
    supports the container so that the container or a portion thereof is set
    into the upright surface.


CLS 220/478
TXT Container pivotally attached:
    Receptacle under subclass 476 wherein the container support structure
    includes hinge means whereby the container may be swung relative to the
    wall.


CLS 220/479
TXT Container pivots through or over the wall:
    Receptacle under subclass 478 wherein the container is supported in such a
    manner that the container goes through or over the upright surface.

    (1)     Note.  The container is normally filled on one side and emptied on
    the other side of the wall.


CLS 220/480
TXT Detachably supported container:
    Receptacle under subclass 476 wherein the container support structure
    includes means which permits the container to be readily removed from the
    wall.


CLS 220/481
TXT Separate support means secured to wall:
    Receptacle under subclass 480 wherein the support structure is affixed to
    the wall and the container is readily removable from the support structure.


CLS 220/482
TXT Container has hook means engaging wall upper edge:
    Receptacle under subclass 480 wherein the support structure takes the form
    of curved or an inverted J-shaped member which hooks over the top edge of
    the upright surface.


CLS 220/483
TXT Suction cup or magnetic support structure:
    Receptacle under 480 wherein the removable support structure is a vacuum
    cup or magnetic means attached to the container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 363 for a support having a vacuum cup attaching
    means.


CLS 220/484
TXT IN GROUND, NONTANK CONTAINER (E.G., METER BOX, GARBAGE CAN,
    ETC.):Receptacle under the class definition including structure which
    permits the container to be placed into a hole in the ground and accessed
    from above ground.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    565,    for stationary tanks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 53+ for underground
    storage of fluid in a container having a specific relationship with the
    surrounding earth.


CLS 220/485
TXT WIRE CONTAINER:
    Receptacle under the class definition wherein at least a portion of the
    container is an arrangement of wires, openwork or other analogous structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    668,    for a skeleton framework container having a wire sidewall member
    extending between frame members.


CLS 220/486
TXT Compartmented:
    Receptacle under subclass 485 wherein the wire container includes at least
    one partition or partition-like member which provides two or more separate
    content holding sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500+,   for a nonwire compartmented container, particularly subclass 511
    for a nonwire container having a wire partition for forming cells.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 181.1 for an upright rack made of wire.


CLS 220/487
TXT Dish holding (e.g., dish rack):
    Receptacle under 486 wherein a compartment is intended to hold tableware
    (e.g., plates, bowls, glasses, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    572,    for similar structure in combination with a drain pan.


CLS 220/488
TXT Dishwasher rack:
    Receptacle under subclass 487 wherein the container is the type normally
    found in a dishwasher.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 84+ for the
    combination of a dishwasher and a dish rack.


CLS 220/489
TXT Adjustable or contortable wall provides multiple configurations of use
    (i.e., alternative shapes):A receptacle under subclass 485 wherein the
    wires forming a portion of a wall or the top wall (i.e., closure) are
    intended to be moved from one configuration to another so as to provide
    alternative shapes in which the container may be used.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are wire receptacles which are
    intended to be changeable in shape, size or configuration, or convertible
    from a receptacle to a nonreceptacle form (e.g., stand).  However, a
    container which is merely collapsible is not included here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for a receptacle having a telescoping wall or wall portions.


CLS 220/490
TXT Spiral sidewall:
    A receptacle under subclass 485 wherein the wire sidewall is in the form of
    a helix.


CLS 220/491
TXT Rigid wire bent to form portion of bottom wall and sidewall:Receptacle
    under subclass 485 wherein one or more wires or wire-like members extend
    along and form part of the end wall and curve to also extend along and form
    part of the sidewall.


CLS 220/492
TXT Blank:
    Receptacle under subclass 491 wherein the container is formed from a flat
    arrangement of connected wires, intended to be folded into final container
    configuration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62+,    for a container formed from a non-wire blank.


CLS 220/493
TXT Wall formed of flexible wire cloth (e.g., screen wire):
    Receptacle under subclass 485 wherein a wall is at least partially formed
    of a woven wire material (i.e., "wire screen", "hardware cloth", etc.).


CLS 220/494
TXT End wall structure:
    Receptacle under subclass 485 wherein structure constituting the end or
    bottom wall of a wire container is claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    600+,   for end wall structure of nonwire containers.


CLS 220/495
TXT Nonwire bottom (e.g., sheet metal, wood, plastic, etc.):
    Receptacle under subclass 494 wherein the bottom wall of a wire container
    is formed of a material other than wire.


CLS 220/500
TXT COMPARTMENTED CONTAINER:
    Receptacle under the class definition including at least one element (e.g.,
    partition, insert, etc) which provides two or more separate content holding
    sections.

    (1)     Note.  A patent for a partition, per se, which is disclosed as
    being for use with a receptacle of this class type, is classified in this
    or indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    486+,   for a compartmented wire container.

    564,    for a compartmented vehicular tank.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 139+ for bottle type
    carriers (e.g., "six-packs") which frequently have compartments or cells.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses 7-10 and 18-35 for wooden
    receptacles having compartments or cells, respectively.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 129+ for a dispenser having compartments.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 120.02+ for
    paper receptacles having compartments.

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 129+ for a mold having a partition between
    mold cavities.


CLS 220/501
TXT Intercommunicable compartments:
    Receptacle under subclass 500 wherein means is provided which permits
    contents to move from one content holding section to another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    563,    for a vehicular tank having a baffle which deflects, dampens or
    regulates the flow of contents within the tank.


CLS 220/502
TXT With externally operable means for establishing and blocking
    communication:Receptacle under subclass 501 having means controllable from
    outside the receptacle which alternately permits and prevents content
    movement from one compartment to another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    232,    Deposit and Collection Receptacles, subclasses 1 and 43.1+ for
    compartmented receptacles having means for dumping material from the lower
    compartment.


CLS 220/503
TXT Compartments accessible from different planes:
    Receptacle under subclass 500 wherein at least two compartments extend into
    the container from different surfaces.


CLS 220/504
TXT Accessible from parallel, opposing planes:
    Receptacle under subclass 503 wherein the surfaces are on opposing sides of
    the container (e.g., top and bottom, front and back, etc.).


CLS 220/505
TXT Compartments of differing vertical extent:
    Receptacle under subclass 500 wherein the compartments have different
    depths.


CLS 220/506
TXT Substantially concentric compartments:
    Receptacle under subclass 500 wherein one compartment essentially surrounds
    another compartment.


CLS 220/507
TXT Cells (i.e., identical or similar compartments each intended to hold a
    single item):Receptacle under subclass 500 having a plurality of
    substantially identical compartments, each of which is intended to hold one
    item.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses 18+ for a wooden receptacle having
    cells.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 120.31 and
    120.36 for a paper receptacle having cells.


CLS 220/508
TXT Egg carrier:
    Receptacle under subclass 507 wherein the cells are intended to hold eggs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 521.1+ for an egg carton
    disclosed to protect eggs from shock.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses 26+ for an egg crate made of wood.


CLS 220/509
TXT Bottle case:
    Receptacle under subclass 507, normally in the form of a crate, having
    cells intended to hold bottles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 139+ for a portable,
    segregating, beverage-type carrier (i.e., six pack), and subclasses 427+
    for a noncell type container for plural liquid holding bottles, cans or
    jars.


CLS 220/510
TXT Removable partition:
    Bottle case under subclass 509 wherein the cell forming elements can be
    removed from the container.

      (1)   Note.  Cell forming elements can be detachable from each other or
    ofone-piece construction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    532,    for noncellular compartments formed by removable partitions
    received in vertical grooves or notches on the container sidewall.

    555,    for noncellular compartments formed by removable intersecting
    partitions.


CLS 220/511
TXT Wire partition:
    Bottle case under subclass 509 wherein the cell forming element is made of
    wire or wire-like material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    486+,   for a compartmented container made of wire, which may have a wire
    partition.


CLS 220/512
TXT Cells formed by apertures in a horizontal plate:
    Bottle case under subclass 509 wherein the bottle holding cells are formed
    by openings in a horizontally supported plate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclass 21 for similar cells in a wooden
    receptacle.


CLS 220/513
TXT Cells formed by upwardly opening cup-like or cylindrical members:Bottle
    case under subclass 509 wherein the cell forming elements have the shape of
    a cup or cylinder.


CLS 220/514
TXT Cell bottom includes structure intended to engage inverted bottle
    mouth:Bottle case under subclass 509 wherein the cells include structure or
    are configured to receive bottles in alternate positions (e.g., right side
    up or upside down).


CLS 220/515
TXT Case includes structure to receive bottles individually or packaged (e.g.,
    six packs, etc.):Bottle case under subclass 509 which is configured to
    receive bottles either individually or bundled together, or both (e.g., six
    pack, etc.).


CLS 220/516
TXT Molded in one piece:
    Bottle case under subclass 509 wherein the case and cells are molded as a
    single unitary member.


CLS 220/517
TXT Blow molded:
    Bottle case under subclass 516 wherein the case was formed by a blow
    molding process.


CLS 220/518
TXT Cells have bottle locating finger-like members:
    Bottle case under subclass 516 wherein the cells include one or more
    elongated elements intended to position the bottle.


CLS 220/519
TXT Case bottom configured to stack on top of bottle in underlying case:Bottle
    case under subclass 516 wherein the case bottom is formed with specific
    structure that cooperates with the bottles of one or more lower cases to
    facilitate stacking.

    (1)     Note.  Structure to promote cross stacking is common in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 503+ for stacking
    receptacles.


CLS 220/520
TXT Compartments fold together:
    Receptacle under subclass 500 wherein two or more content holding sections
    pivot about a hinge to form a compartmented container.

    (1)     Note.  A content holding section may itself be compartmented.


CLS 220/521
TXT Compartment in closure:
    Receptacle under subclass 500 wherein a compartment is located in a closure
    for a receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   for other container closures.

    520,    for a compartmented container having similar compartments which
    fold together.


CLS 220/522
TXT Closure compartment only accessible when closure is in its open
    configuration:Receptacle under subclass 521 wherein the access opening to a
    compartment located in the receptacle closure is only accessible when the
    closure is in its open position (or removed).


CLS 220/523
TXT Closure for compartment:
    Receptacle under subclass 500 wherein the container is provided with
    closure means specifically related to the closing of one or more
    compartments.

    (1)     Note.  The closure means may also close the container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   for a closure for a container which is not compartmented.


CLS 220/524
TXT Separate closure for each compartment:
    Receptacle under subclass 523 wherein each compartment is provided with its
    own closure means.


CLS 220/525
TXT Closure permits access to one compartment while blocking access to
    another:Receptacle under subclass 523 wherein a closure is provided with
    means which permits entry into one compartment while blocking entry into at
    least one other compartment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    253,    for closures having alignable openings.


CLS 220/526
TXT Closure has means to engage compartment forming elements (e.g., forms seal
    between closure and compartment):Receptacle under subclass 523 wherein the
    closure has means that contacts the partition or walls of the compartment,
    usually to form a barrier between the closure and compartment.


CLS 220/527
TXT Compartment forming element includes a bottom wall:
    Receptacle under subclass 500 wherein the compartment forming structure
    includes wall elements disposed at an angle to one another so as to provide
    a bottom wall and body wall when associated with the receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  The compartment forming element may be permanently attached
    to or removable from the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23.2+,  for two or more distinct receptacles joined together in a
    side-by-side relationship.


CLS 220/528
TXT Compartmented insert:
    Receptacle under subclass 500 wherein the compartments are located in a
    member intended to be placed in the container.


CLS 220/529
TXT Compartment partition is movable or removable:
    Receptacle under subclass 500 wherein a compartment forming element is a
    partition which is either movable within the receptacle or removable from
    the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    553+,   for a compartmented receptacle having a partition which is stiff
    and fixed in position.


CLS 220/530
TXT Flexible partition provides a variable volume:
    Receptacle under subclass 529 wherein a compartment forming partition is
    made of flexible material intended to yield so as to provide a compartment
    of changeable capacity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85,     for attachments having a variable volume.


CLS 220/531
TXT Hinged partition:
    Receptacle under subclass 529 wherein the partition is stiff and hinged to
    one of the container walls so that its position can be changed.


CLS 220/532
TXT Vertical partition received in groove or notch in the container:Receptacle
    under subclass 529 wherein the compartment forming partition is
    substantially vertically oriented and removably received in a channel or
    indentation in the receptacle.


CLS 220/533
TXT Plural partition-receiving grooves or notches:
    Receptacle under subclass 532 wherein more than one partition receiving
    location is provided with a channel or notch.

    (1)     Note.  The plural partition receiving locations may provide for
    plural partitions or alternative positions for a single partition.


CLS 220/534
TXT Vertical partition horizontally slidable:
    Receptacle under subclass 529 wherein a compartment forming partition is
    mounted so as to be horizontally slidable within the receptacle.


CLS 220/535
TXT Horizontal rod extends through opening in partition:
    Receptacle under subclass 534 including a horizontally extending elongated
    member which projects through an aperture or slot in the partition or in
    the means attached to the partition.

    (1)     Note.  The partition is horizontally slidable along the horizontal
    member which generally functions to keep the partition in the container.


CLS 220/536
TXT Including spring means biasing the partition:
    Receptacle under subclass 535 including biasing means urging a partition to
    slide in one direction.


CLS 220/537
TXT Including screw threaded interengaging means on rod and
    partition:Receptacle under subclass 535 wherein the rod is threaded and the
    partition has threaded means engaging the rod whereby the partition can be
    adjusted (moved) by rotation of the rod.


CLS 220/538
TXT Including locking means engaging the rod:
    Receptacle under subclass 535 wherein a partition can be secured in a
    desired position by means which grip the horizontal rod.


CLS 220/539
TXT Frictional locking means:
    Receptacle under subclass 538 wherein the locking means utilizes a friction
    contact with the horizontal rod.


CLS 220/540
TXT Including locking means engaging the container:
    Receptacle under subclass 535 wherein a partition can be secured in a
    desired position by means which contact the receptacle.


CLS 220/541
TXT Partition has reciprocating locking member acting between partition and
    sidewall:Receptacle under subclass 534 wherein a partition is provided with
    one or more arms which move away from the partition into engagement with
    the receptacle sidewall to secure the partition in place.


CLS 220/542
TXT Locking member received by means on or in container sidewall:Receptacle
    under subclass 541 wherein at least one receptacle sidewall is provided
    with means which are contacted by a locking member to hold the partition in
    place.


CLS 220/543
TXT Partition includes means to slidably engage the edge of container
    sidewall:Receptacle under subclass 534 wherein the partition includes one
    or more extensions which contact and slide along the upper edge of the
    container sidewall to permit adjustment of the partition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    532,    for similar structure including notches in the receptacle wall to
    position the partition in a particular location.


CLS 220/544
TXT Partition slides along guide means (e.g., groove, track, etc.) on or in
    container sidewall:Receptacle under subclass 534 wherein the partition
    includes means which slidably engages structure extending along the
    receptacle sidewall.

    (1)     Note.  The sidewall structure can be a groove or channel in the
    wall, or a guide or track attached to or formed in the wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    543,    for a partition having arms which slide along the top of the
    receptacle wall.


CLS 220/545
TXT Partition includes releasable means locking it in position:
    Receptacle under subclass 544 wherein the partition includes releasable
    locking means which engage the sidewall guide means to secure the partition
    in adjusted position.


CLS 220/546
TXT Guide means has spaced apertures or ribs to receive the locking
    means:Receptacle under subclass 545 wherein the guide means has holes or
    projections which the releasable locking means can engage to secure the
    partition in adjusted position.


CLS 220/547
TXT Locking means includes a gear-like member which engages the spaced
    apertures or ribs:Receptacle under subclass 546 wherein the locking means
    includes a gear-like member having teeth which engage the spaced apertures
    or ribs in the guide means to secure the partition in position.


CLS 220/548
TXT Partition locking means is engaged with the guide means by
    rotation:Receptacle under subclass 545 wherein the partition locking means
    binds against the guide means upon rotation of the partition or partition
    locking element.


CLS 220/549
TXT Partition slides along guide means (e.g., groove, track, etc.) on or in
    container bottom wall:Receptacle under subclass 534 wherein the partition
    includes means which slidably engages structure extending along the
    receptacle bottom wall.

    (1)     Note.  The bottom wall structure can be a groove or channel in the
    bottom wall, or a guide or track attached to or formed in the bottom wall.


CLS 220/550
TXT Partition includes releasable means locking it in position:
    Receptacle under subclass 549 wherein the partition includes releasable
    locking means which engage the bottom wall guide means to secure the
    partition in adjusted position


CLS 220/551
TXT Extendable partition:
    Receptacle under subclass 529 wherein the length of the partition is
    extensible or contractible to permit the partition to be moved or removed.

    (1)     Note.  An extendable partition is sometimes used to fit different
    receptacles or receptacle areas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    541+,   for a partition having extendable locking means.


CLS 220/552
TXT Intersecting partitions:
    Receptacle under subclass 529 including at least two removable partitions
    which intersect with or cross each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    510,    for removable partitions which form cells in a bottle case.


CLS 220/553
TXT Compartment partition is stiff and fixed in position:
    Receptacle under subclass 500 wherein a compartment forming element is a
    partition which is relatively rigid and permanently united with the
    receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    529+,   for a compartment forming partition which is movable within or
    removable from the receptacle.


CLS 220/554
TXT Horizontal partition:
    Receptacle under subclass 553 wherein the partition is positioned
    horizontally across the container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    512,    for cells formed by apertured, horizontal plates.


CLS 220/555
TXT Partition and walls molded or cast together:
    Receptacle under subclass 553 wherein the receptacle walls and compartment
    forming partition are molded or cast together as a one-piece unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    516,    for molded cellular bottle cases.


CLS 220/556
TXT Configured for use as a food service tray:
    Receptacle under subclass 555 wherein the compartmented receptacle is
    configured for and intended for use as a tray for serving food.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    575,    for compartmented dishes, bowls, etc.


CLS 220/557
TXT Partition one-piece with and folded from a container wall:
    Receptacle under subclass 553 wherein the partition is part of a receptacle
    wall and folded permanently into compartment forming position.


CLS 220/558
TXT TILTABLE FRONT PANEL FOR DRAWER OR TRAY (E.G., FILE DRAWER HAVING HINGED
    FRONT PANEL):Receptacle under the class definition of the drawer or tray
    type wherein the front wall is hinged so as to be tiltable to facilitate
    access to contents.

    (1)     Note.  A "front" panel is generally the wall facing the files or
    cards within the drawer or tray.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   for a container closure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, for a drawer wherein means (e.g.,
    runners, etc.) are claimed which are disclosed as cooperating with cabinet
    structure to support the drawer within the cabinet.


CLS 220/559
TXT COMPRESSOR OR FOLLOWER PLATE FOR DRAWER OR TRAY:
    Receptacle under the class definition of the drawer or tray type normally
    intended to hold file cards or the like which includes an adjustable or
    spring biased panel member which supports the contents in a snug, upright
    arrangement within the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    558,    for a drawer or tray having a tiltable front panel which may
    function as a "compressor".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, for a drawer wherein means (e.g.,
    runners, etc.) are claimed which are disclosed as cooperating with cabinet
    structure to support the drawer within the cabinet.


CLS 220/560
TXT FLOATING CONTAINER:
    Receptacle under the class definition including claimed structure intended
    to cause the receptacle to float in water.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, for structures of that class
    type.


CLS 220/561
TXT CONTAINER HAVING RECONDITIONED OR RECONDITIONABLE END WALL:
    Receptacle under the class definition wherein the end wall either 1) has
    been remanufactured or repaired or 2) is constructed to facilitate its
    remanufacture or repair.


CLS 220/562
TXT VEHICLE MOUNTABLE TANK:
    A large receptacle under the class definition for holding a fluent material
    to be transported and intended to be mounted on a vehicle or vehicle
    running gear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for a sectional tank.

    565,    for a stationary tank.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, for a tank combined with vehicle structure.

    410,    Freight Accommodation on Freight Carrier, subclass 68 for a tank
    combined with a land vehicle freight carrier.


CLS 220/563
TXT With baffle:
    Tank under subclass 562 wherein the tank is provided with a partition-like
    member that functions to deflect, dampen or regulate the surge or flow of
    contents within the tank, but which does not divide it into separate
    content holding compartments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    501,    for a nonvehicular container having intercommunicating compartments.

    564,    for a tank having a solid partition which functions to divide the
    tank into two or more content holding compartments.


CLS 220/564
TXT Compartmented:
    Tank under subclass 562 wherein the tank includes at least one solid
    partition which provides two or more separate content holding sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500,    for a nonvehicular compartmented container.

    563,    for a tank having a baffle which functions to deflect, dampen, or
    regulate the surge or flow of contents, but does not divide the tank into
    separate content holding sections.


CLS 220/565
TXT STATIONARY TANK:
    Receptacle under the class definition comprising a usually large, immobile
    container intended to be used to store fluent material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for a sectional tank.

    562,    for a vehicular tank.


CLS 220/566
TXT Toroidal (i.e., doughnut shaped):
    Tank under subclass 565 wherein the tank has the shape of a torus.


CLS 220/567
TXT Elevated (e.g., municipal water tank):
    Tank under subclass 565 wherein the tank, or a major portion thereof, is
    supported a substantial distance above the ground.


CLS 220/568
TXT COCKTAIL SHAKER:
    Receptacle under the class definition which is specifically constructed and
    configured to mix one or more liquids together or with ice when shaken by
    the user.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    366,    Agitating, for a receptacle including a deflector to enhance mixing.


CLS 220/569
TXT MILK CAN:
    Receptacle under the class definition intended to be used to transport
    fresh milk from a farm to a processing plant or dairy.


CLS 220/570
TXT PAINT TRAY:
    Receptacle under the class definition in the form of a shallow, generally
    rectangular pan intended to hold paint and be used in combination with a
    paint roller.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 257.05+ for a
    paint tray including or combined with structure intended to facilitate
    loading a roller with a desired amount of material.


CLS 220/571
TXT DRAIN PAN OR DRIP PAN:
    Receptacle under the class definition comprising a shallow container
    intended to catch and collect liquid from (1) a device containing liquid
    which is expected to be removed from the device or leak from the device, or
    (2) a wet article placed within the container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    various subclasses for receptacle filling means.

    184,    Lubrication, subclass 106 for a drain or drip pan combined with a
    lubrication device.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclass 38 for a drip pan which
    is attached to a vehicle.


CLS 220/571.1
TXT With means to attach pan to bucket or paint can:
    Subject matter under subclass 571 wherein the drip pan includes structure
    for securing it to a scrub pail, paint container, etc.


CLS 220/572
TXT With article drying support (e.g., dish-rack pan):
    Receptacle under subclass 571 including means to support an article while
    drying.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    487+,   for a compartmented wire receptacle for holding dishes (i.e., "dish
    rack").

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, various subclasses for an upright rack which may
    hold dishes.


CLS 220/573
TXT For a vehicle:
    Receptacle under subclass 571 which is intended to be used to collect or
    catch a liquid being removed or leaking from an automobile.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 331+ for a similar receptacle having a funnel.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclass 38 for a drip pan which
    is attached to a vehicle.


CLS 220/574
TXT TABLE DISH (E.G., PLATE, BOWL, PLATTER, ETC.):
    Receptacle under the class definition comprising tableware intended to be
    used to hold food.


CLS 220/574.1
TXT With eating aid:
    Subject matter under subclass 574 wherein the table dish has attached
    thereto a separate device which assists in removing food from the dish.


CLS 220/575
TXT Compartmented table dish:
    Receptacle under subclass 574 including one or more elements which provide
    two or more separate food holding sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500+,   for other compartmented containers.


CLS 220/576
TXT SMOKING STAND:
    Receptacle under the class definition comprising a tobacco ash receiving
    container in the form of a floor supported stand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    501+,   for a receptacle having intercommunicating compartments.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 231+ for a tobacco user's appliance combined
    with ash receiving means.


CLS 220/577
TXT RIGID HEAT TRANSFER CONTAINER (I.E., HEAT IS CONDUCTED THROUGH CONTAINER
    WALL):Receptacle under the class definition comprising an inflexible
    thermally conductive container having structure to hold hot or cold
    material and to be used in the manner of a hot water bottle or an ice bag.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 440+ for an enclosure having a cooling
    means contained therein, and subclass 530 for a receptacle containing a
    composition for refreezing after use.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 263.01+ for a container having a
    chemical heating means contained therein.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, appropriate subclasses for a receptacle of glass,
    ceramic or similar material for retaining a heating or cooling material.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 901 for receptacles of the type known as
    hot water bags and ice bags.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclass 96
    for other heated or cooled material receptacles limited to therapeutic use.
    The structure may, for example, be used to:

    (1) Apply substances to the body.
    (2) Absorb substances from the body.
    (3) Permit insertion into a body cavity.


CLS 220/578
TXT INTERNAL CLOSURE-LIKE MEMBER WHICH RESTS ON THE UNUSED CONTENTS OF A
    CONTAINER:Device under the class definition comprising an inner member
    which lies upon the remaining contents of a container to reduce exposure of
    the contents to the atmosphere.

    (1)     Note.  The internal closure-like member prevents, for example,
    unused paint from skinning and coffee from loosing its aroma or flavor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   for a closure, per se.

    216+,   for a floating closure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 349+ for a food cooking
    device having a follower which presses against the food.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 240+ for box and piston type reciprocating
    platen not elsewhere provided for.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclass 231 for a bottle or jar provided with a
    means to purposely depress or contact receptacle contents.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclass 86 for a follower for a wooden barrel.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 386+ for a dispenser having a follower type
    discharge assistant.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclass 141 for a
    reservoir containing a floating follower.


CLS 220/579
TXT Foldable for insertion into a container:
    Device under subclass 578 wherein the closure-like member is intended to be
    temporarily collapsed or bent to fit through the mouth of a container.


CLS 220/580
TXT Vent means through closure-like member:
    Device under subclass 578 wherein the closure-like member includes an air
    passage therein which allows for pressure equalization on opposite sides of
    the closure-like member.

    SEARCH THE CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    367.1+, for similar vent means in a removable closure.


CLS 220/581
TXT HIGH-PRESSURE-GAS TANK:
    Receptacle under the class definition comprising a container having
    structure for containing gas under a pressure which is well in excess of
    the ambient pressure surrounding the container.

    (1)     Note.  The gas can be a liquefied gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.12+,  for a sectional tank.

    646+,   for a receptacle of general utility having a separate reinforcing
    element.

    669+,   for a receptacle having a contoured sidewall for reinforcing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 54.2 for an apparatus wherein a product of
    refrigeration in solid phase is transformed at a regulated rate into either
    a liquid or gaseous phase.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 3+ for a gas tank including a discharge or
    inlet valve or other dispensing feature.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclasses 294+ for a nuclear reactor pressure vessel.


CLS 220/582
TXT With removable closure:
    Receptacle under subclass 581 wherein the container has a detachable
    closure which forms a gas-tight seal with the container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   for a closure, per se.


CLS 220/583
TXT With pierceable member:
    Receptacle under subclass 581 wherein the container is provided with a
    region intended to be punctured so as to cause the release of the contained
    gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    265+,   for a frangible closure.


CLS 220/584
TXT Having interconnected semi-spherical portions:
    Receptacle under subclass 581 wherein the container wall has a plurality of
    sections, each section comprising a major portion of a sphere.


CLS 220/585
TXT Sequential container wall structure provides plural pressure
    differentials:Receptacle under subclass 581 wherein at least a portion of
    the wall of the container has a zone for containing a pressure intermediate
    the ambient pressure and the inside pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    592,    for a high-pressure-gas tank having a separate reinforcing element.


CLS 220/586
TXT Multilayer container:
    Receptacle under subclass 581 wherein the container wall has at least one
    area (e.g., sidewall, end wall, etc.) which comprises a plurality of
    superimposed layers, plies or laminas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    415+,   for a container of general utility having a multilayer barrier
    structure.

    592,    for a high-pressure-gas tank having a separate reinforcing element.


CLS 220/587
TXT With weep hole in outer layer:
    Receptacle under subclass 586 wherein the superimposed layers have a gas
    passage in the outer layer to prevent a build up of excessive pressure
    between the layers due to a leak in the inner layer of the container.

    (1)     Note.  The gas passage may also facilitate the detection of a leak
    in the container.


CLS 220/588
TXT Wound layer:
    Receptacle under subclass 586 wherein at least one of the layers is formed
    by wrapping an elongated element into abutting or close overlapping
    relationship with itself.

    (1)     Note.  The element may be wire, glass fiber, carbon fiber, sheet
    material, metal tape, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    414,    for a container of general utility having a wound barrier structure.


CLS 220/589
TXT Filament layer:
    Receptacle under subclass 588 wherein the elongated element comprises an
    elongated fiber or thread like object.


CLS 220/590
TXT With bonding material:
    Receptacle under subclass 589 wherein the wound filament is secured in
    position by an adhesive or resinous material.


CLS 220/591
TXT Tape layer:
    Receptacle under subclass 588 wherein the elongated element is a narrow
    strip or band.


CLS 220/592
TXT With separate reinforcing element:
    Receptacle under subclass 581 including an element which is attached to a
    wall of the container and is intended to strengthen the container wall
    structure.

    (1)     Note.  The element can be either inside or outside the receptacle
    wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    585,    for sequential container wall structure which provides plural
    pressure differentials.

    586,    for a multilayer high-pressure-gas tank.


CLS 220/600
TXT END WALL STRUCTURE:
    Receptacle under the class definition wherein structure constituting the
    end or bottom wall of a receptacle is claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   closures, for end wall structure intended to be removed from the
    receptacle to gain access to contents, and particularly subclass 359 for a
    receptacle end closure which is soldered in place and intended to be
    removed.


CLS 220/601
TXT Having an outlet or inlet opening (e.g., bunghole, etc.):
    Receptacle under subclass 600 wherein the sidewall is formed with a hole,
    normally intended to be used in filling or emptying the container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    661,    for end wall structure having an outlet or inlet opening.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, with Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    various subclasses, particularly 297+ for a container having a funnel.

    222,    Dispensing, various subclasses, particularly 566+ for a nozzle,
    spout or pouring device.


CLS 220/602
TXT Transparent:
    Receptacle under subclass 600 where at least a portion of the end wall
    transmits light without appreciable scattering so that objects are visible
    therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    377+,   for a removable closure having a transparent area.

     662+,  for sidewall structure having a transparent area.


CLS 220/603
TXT With weight or counterweight:
    Receptacle under subclass 600 wherein the end wall is a bottom wall and is
    provided with a weight or counterweight to maintain the receptacle is a
    desired orientation, usually upright.

    (1)     Note.  A receptacle having an extra thick bottom wall for the
    purpose of maintaining a desired orientation due to its extra weight is
    classified here.


CLS 220/604
TXT One-piece side and end wall:
    Receptacle under subclass 600 wherein the sidewall and the end wall are of
    one-piece construction.


CLS 220/605
TXT With support structure:
    Receptacle under subclass 604 including structure attached to or part of
    the sidewall or end wall, which structure supports the receptacle against
    the pull of gravity when resting on a surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    628+,   for similar support structure for a receptacle which does not have
    a one-piece side and bottom wall.


CLS 220/606
TXT One-piece with container:
    Receptacle under subclass 605 wherein the support is formed one-piece with
    the end wall or sidewall.


CLS 220/607
TXT End wall formed as a one-piece grid or mesh structure:
    Receptacle under subclass 604 wherein the end wall is formed as a one-piece
    open work (e.g., grid or mesh) structure.


CLS 220/608
TXT Contoured end wall (e.g., curved, corrugated, ribbed, etc.):Receptacle
    under subclass 604 wherein the end wall has a nonplanar configuration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    623+,   for similar structure wherein the sidewall and end wall are not of
    one-piece construction.

    669+,   for contoured sidewall structure.


CLS 220/609
TXT Pressure responsive contour:
    Receptacle under subclass 608 wherein the contoured end wall structure is
    designed to move outwardly under high internal pressure or inwardly in
    response to relatively low internal pressure (e.g., vacuum) conditions
    within the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    624,    for similar subject matter wherein the sidewall and end wall are
    not of one-piece construction.


CLS 220/610
TXT Joint or seam between sidewall and end wall:
    Receptacle under subclass 600 wherein structure connecting the sidewall and
    end wall is claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    677,    for similar structure, usually a seam, connecting portions of the
    sidewall together.


CLS 220/611
TXT End wall and sidewall of dissimilar materials:
    Receptacle under subclass 610 wherein the sidewall and the end wall are
    made of different materials (e.g., steel and tin, metal and wood, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    613,    for an end wall or sidewall made of plastic.


CLS 220/612
TXT Adhered (e.g., welded, cemented, soldered, bonded, etc.):
    Receptacle under subclass 610 wherein the joint is secured by welding,
    cementing, soldering, bonding or the like.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    678,    for a sidewall seam or joint which is adhered.


CLS 220/613
TXT Plastic end wall or sidewall:
    Receptacle under subclass 612 wherein at least one of the end wall or the
    sidewall is made of a thermoplastic material.


CLS 220/614
TXT Including a packing element (e.g., gasket):
    Receptacle under subclass 610 including a gasket or packing means received
    in the joint, usually intended to seal the joint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    617,    for a sidewall joint which includes a packing element.


CLS 220/615
TXT Interlocked joint:
    Receptacle under subclass 610 wherein a flange-like portion of the sidewall
    and a similar flange-like portion of the end wall are folded or bent
    together to form a mechanical securement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    612,    for a joint or seam which is both interlocked and adhered.

    622,    for a joint or seam having a mechanical fastener passing
    therethrough.

    682+,   for a sidewall seam or joint having interlocking structure.


CLS 220/616
TXT Joint includes separate reinforcing element:
    Receptacle under subclass 615 wherein an additional element is
    interconnected with the joint to strengthen it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    692,    for a separate fastener in a sidewall seam or joint.


CLS 220/617
TXT Sidewall received in a channel in the end wall:
    Receptacle under subclass 615 wherein an extension of the sidewall is
    received in a groove, trough, or furrow, etc., which usually extends around
    the periphery of the end wall.


CLS 220/618
TXT Sidewall includes both a ledge-like area receiving the end wall and means
    engaging the outer surface of the end wall:Receptacle under subclass 615
    wherein the sidewall has either an inwardly bent portion forming a ledge or
    a separately applied member on the interior of the sidewall on which the
    end wall is supported, and additionally a securing element which engages
    the exterior surface of the end wall.


CLS 220/619
TXT Joint bent or rolled outwardly:
    Receptacle under subclass 615 wherein the sidewall and end wall joint
    flanges are folded or curled together away from the container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    689,    for a sidewall joint which is bent or rolled.


CLS 220/620
TXT Joint bent or rolled inwardly:
    Receptacle under subclass 615 wherein the sidewall and end wall joint
    flanges are folded or curled together toward the container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    689,    for a sidewall joint which is bent or rolled.


CLS 220/621
TXT Sidewall and end wall have interlocking grooves:
    Receptacle under subclass 615 wherein a depression or channel is formed in
    the sidewall or end wall which matingly engages a similar depression or
    channel formed in the other wall.

    (1)     Note.  The mating depressions or channels are usually formed
    simultaneously in the sidewall and end wall.


CLS 220/622
TXT Joint includes separate fastener (e.g., rivet, nail, screw,
    etc.):Receptacle under subclass 610 wherein the joint is secured by a
    separate mechanical fastening means which extends into the joint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    692,    for a separate fastener in a sidewall seam or joint.


CLS 220/623
TXT Contoured end wall (e.g., curved, corrugated, ribbed, variable thickness,
    etc.):Receptacle under subclass 610 wherein the end wall has a nonplanar
    configuration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    608+,   for similar structure wherein the sidewall and end wall are of
    one-piece construction.

    669+,   for contoured sidewall structure.


CLS 220/624
TXT Pressure responsive contour:
    Receptacle under subclass 623 wherein the contoured end wall structure is
    designed to move outwardly under high internal pressure or inwardly in
    response to relatively low internal pressure (e.g., vacuum) conditions
    within the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    609,    for similar subject matter wherein the sidewall and end wall are of
    one-piece construction.


CLS 220/625
TXT Removable bottom wall (i.e., not a closure):
    Receptacle under subclass 600 wherein an end wall (usually a bottom member)
    which does not function as a closure is configured to be readily removable.

    (1)     Note.  The removable wall is normally not removable when contents
    are in the container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    561,    wherein the end wall is manufactured so as to be able to be
    replaced for reconditioning the container.


CLS 220/626
TXT Multi-layer end wall structure:
    Receptacle under subclass 600 wherein the end wall structure includes
    substantially coextensive plural plies, laminas, layers, strata or panels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    415+,   for an entire container formed of a multi-layer structure.


CLS 220/627
TXT Spaced layers:
    Receptacle under subclass 626 wherein the multi-layer structure includes at
    least two laminas separated from one another.


CLS 220/628
TXT Support structure:
    Receptacle under subclass 600 including structure attached to or part of
    the sidewall or end wall, which structure supports the receptacle against
    the pull of gravity when resting on a surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    476+,   for means attached to a receptacle for fastening it to a wall or
    similar surface.

    605,    for similar support structure for a receptacle which has a
    one-piece side and bottom wall.


CLS 220/629
TXT Movable on container (e.g., adjustable):
    Receptacle under subclass 628 wherein the support structure includes means
    permitting the position of the supporting elements on the receptacle to be
    adjusted so as to (1) maintain the container in more than one position, or
    (2) move the supporting elements to a storage position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    631,    for nonmovable support structure which can maintain the container
    in more than one position.


CLS 220/630
TXT Removable support structure:
    Receptacle under subclass 628 wherein the support is formed as a separate
    member and is detachably secured to the container to support the container.


CLS 220/631
TXT Fixed support structure provides alternate container orientations (e.g.,
    angled bottom support areas):Receptacle under subclass 628 wherein the
    support structure includes means configured to provide more than one
    orientation at which the container can be selectively supported.

    (1)     Note.  A receptacle having plural flat bottom areas, at an angle to
    one another, which support the receptacle in different orientations is
    proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    629,    for support structure which is adjustable to provide more than one
    orientation of the container.


CLS 220/632
TXT Cushioned support structure:
    Receptacle under subclass 628 wherein the support structure includes shock
    absorbing material normally to protect either the container or the surface
    on which the container rests.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    655,    for similar cushioning material adjacent an open end edge of a
    container.

    732,    for receptacle sidewall cushioning means.


CLS 220/633
TXT Support formed by downward extension of sidewall:
    Receptacle under subclass 628 wherein the support is formed by a portion of
    the sidewall which extends away from the receptacle past the bottom wall.


CLS 220/634
TXT Chime (i.e., supporting ring circumferentially attached to
    sidewall):Receptacle under subclass 628 wherein the support is formed by a
    separate member extending around the sidewall and secured to the sidewall,
    which member is normally a chime member.


CLS 220/635
TXT Support and bottom wall are of one-piece construction and attached to
    sidewall:Receptacle under subclass 628 wherein the support is formed
    one-piece with the bottom wall, and secured to the sidewall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    606,    for similar support structure for a receptacle which has a
    one-piece side and bottom wall.


CLS 220/636
TXT Support attached to bottom wall:
    Receptacle under subclass 628 wherein the support is a separate member
    secured to the bottom wall.


CLS 220/637
TXT Support formed by rod or wire encased in bead folded under bottom
    wall:Receptacle under subclass 628 wherein the support is formed by a
    portion of the sidewall being bent under the bottom wall and then formed
    into a curl-like portion, and wherein a wire or rod-like member is confined
    within the curl-like portion.


CLS 220/638
TXT Sidewall, bottom wall and support are separate elements, and attached at a
    common joint:Receptacle under subclass 628 wherein the sidewall, bottom
    wall and support member are each individual pieces which are secured
    together at the same location.


CLS 220/639
TXT SEPARATE REINFORCING ELEMENT:
    Receptacle under the class definition including an element which is either:
    (1) attached to an end wall or sidewall or (2) extends between walls; and
    is intended to strengthen the container wall structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    592,    for a high-pressure-gas tank having a separate reinforcing element.

    608+,   for contoured (reinforcing) end wall structure in a one-piece
    container.

    623+,   for contoured (reinforcing) end wall structure in a container which
    is not of one-piece construction.

    669+,   for contoured (reinforcing) sidewall structure.


CLS 220/640
TXT Open end edge reinforcing means:
    Receptacle under subclass 639 wherein the separate reinforcing element is
    attached   adjacent an open end edge of the container to strengthen the
    container edge.


CLS 220/641
TXT Edge (e.g., rim, lip, brim, etc.) bent or rolled around a reinforcing
    element:Receptacle under subclass 640 wherein at least the container edge
    is folded or curled around a separate reinforcing element to form a
    strengthened, beaded edge.


CLS 220/642
TXT Edge encompassed by u-shaped reinforcing element:
    Receptacle under subclass 640 wherein a reinforcing member is folded around
    the edge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    616,    for an end wall joint including a separate reinforcing element
    intended to strengthen the joint.


CLS 220/643
TXT Molded container including separate edge reinforcing element:Receptacle
    under subclass 640 wherein the container sidewall and edge is a molded
    one-piece construction and the reinforcing element is intended to
    strengthen the edge.


CLS 220/644
TXT Embedded element:
    Receptacle under subclass 643 wherein the reinforcing element is encased
    within the container material when it is molded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    645,    for a molded container having an embedded reinforcing element in
    the wall structure.


CLS 220/645
TXT Molded container with embedded reinforcing element:
    Receptacle under subclass 639 wherein the reinforcing element is encased
    within the container material when it is molded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    644,    for a molded container having an embedded reinforcing element
    reinforcing the edge.


CLS 220/646
TXT Externally attached sidewall reinforcing element:
    Receptacle under subclass 639 wherein the reinforcing element is secured to
    the exterior of the container to strengthen the sidewall.

    (1)     Note.  Structure disclosed as "protecting" the sidewall which also
    inherently reinforces the sidewall is classified in this and indented
    subclasses.


CLS 220/647
TXT Spaced element supports container (e.g., cradle, end frame,
    etc.):Receptacle under subclass 646 wherein the reinforcing element takes
    the form of a fixed framework or cradle type structure spaced from the
    container and attached to the container.


CLS 220/648
TXT Circumferential band or belt:
    Receptacle under subclass 646 wherein the reinforcing element takes the
    form of at least one, separate strap-like member encircling the exterior of
    the sidewall(s).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    732,    for receptacle sidewall cushioning means.


CLS 220/649
TXT Handling ring or collar:
    Receptacle under subclass 648 wherein at least one band or belt includes
    means intended to permit the container to be manipulated or moved through
    engagement of the band or belt.


CLS 220/650
TXT Longitudinal element:
    Receptacle under subclass 646 wherein the reinforcing element extends in an
    axial direction along the sidewall.


CLS 220/651
TXT Internally attached reinforcing element:
    Receptacle under subclass 639 wherein the reinforcing element is secured to
    the interior of the container to strengthen the container.


CLS 220/652
TXT Extending between adjacent walls:
    Receptacle under subclass 651 wherein the reinforcing element is secured to
    and connects two or more contiguous walls of the container.

    (1)     Note.  The reinforcing element can extend between adjacent
    sidewalls or a sidewall and adjacent end wall.


CLS 220/653
TXT Attached to and extending between opposite walls across the
    container:Receptacle under subclass 651 wherein the reinforcing element is
    secured to and connects two walls which are facing one another.

    (1)     Note.  The reinforcing element can extend between two sidewalls or
    between two end walls.


CLS 220/654
TXT Circumferential:
    Receptacle under subclass 651 wherein the reinforcing element is secured to
    and extends around the interior of the sidewalls of the container.


CLS 220/655
TXT OPEN END EDGE CUSHIONING MEANS:
    Receptacle under the class definition including shock absorbing material
    attached adjacent an open end edge of the container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    632,    for container support structure having similar cushioning material
    attached thereto.

    732,    for receptacle sidewall cushioning means.


CLS 220/656
TXT ONE-PIECE, REINFORCED OPEN END EDGE:
    Receptacle under the class definition wherein an open end edge is
    integrally strengthened (i.e., does not include a separate reinforcing
    element).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    640+,   for a receptacle having an open end edge which is reinforced by a
    separate reinforcing element.


CLS 220/657
TXT Flange:
    Receptacle under subclass 656 wherein the top portion of the edge is bent
    at an angle in the form of a lip.


CLS 220/658
TXT Bead:
    Receptacle under subclass 656 wherein the top portion of the edge is rolled
    in the form of a curled rim.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    641,    for a receptacle having an open end edge folded around a separate
    reinforcing element.


CLS 220/659
TXT Molded:
    Receptacle under subclass 656 wherein the reinforced open end edge is
    molded as a single unitary member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    643+,   for a molded container having a separate edge reinforcing element.


CLS 220/660
TXT SIDEWALL STRUCTURE:
    Receptacle under the class definition wherein structure constituting the
    main or sidewall(s) of a receptacle is claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    414,    for sidewall structure that is made or reinforced by wrapping a
    filament in abutting or close overlapping relationship with itself.

    415+,   for a sidewall structure which is a multilayer barrier structure
    (i.e., coextensive plural plies, laminas, layers or strata).

    600+,   for end wall structure.


CLS 220/661
TXT Having an outlet or inlet opening (e.g., bunghole, etc.):
    Receptacle under subclass 660 wherein the sidewall is formed with a hole,
    normally intended to be used in filling or emptying the container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    600,    for end wall structure having an outlet or inlet opening.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    various subclasses, particularly 297+ for a container having a funnel.

    222,    Dispensing, various subclasses, particularly 566+ for a nozzle,
    spout or pouring device.


CLS 220/662
TXT Transparent wall or portion:
    Receptacle under subclass 660 wherein at least a portion of a sidewall
    transmits light without appreciable scattering so that objects are visible
    therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    377+,   for a removable closure having a transparent area.

    602,    for end wall structure having a transparent area.


CLS 220/663
TXT Sight glass:
    Receptacle under subclass 662 wherein the transparent wall portion is in
    the form of a viewing port.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 426+ for a sight glass having
    measuring indicia.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 276 for a sight glass in a fluid
    flow indicator.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 365+ for a glass receptacle having a
    contents indicating wall portion.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 154+ for a dispensing container having
    transparent wall portions.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 194 for an
    implement having a transparent portion through which the material supply
    can be viewed.


CLS 220/664
TXT Instrument casing (e.g., for a meter, etc.):
    Receptacle under subclass 662 wherein the transparent area is in the form
    of a housing for an electrical or mechanical measuring device.

    (1)     Note.  The transparent area may be a portion of a wall, one or more
    walls, or the entire housing.


CLS 220/665
TXT Two or more walls:
    Receptacle under subclass 662 wherein more than one wall has a transparent
    area.


CLS 220/666
TXT Collapsible wall feature:
    Receptacle under subclass 660 wherein the wall structure includes means
    (e.g., fold lines, corrugations, etc.) which permit the receptacle to
    assume a configuration of reduced dimension or to be compressed into
    compact form when empty.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for a knockdown receptacle wherein the walls are hinged so as to be
    folded into and out of a nonuse configuration.

    907,    for a Cross-Reference Art Collection of beverage cans having
    collapsible wall structure.


CLS 220/667
TXT Wall permanently deformed when collapsed:
    Receptacle under subclass 666 wherein the sidewall structure remains
    distorted when crushed.

    (1)     Note.  A receptacle herein is normally a beverage can intended to
    be compacted for disposal purposes.


CLS 220/668
TXT Skeleton framework:
    Receptacle under subclass 660 wherein the container has a rigid, open work
    frame, intended to have attached thereto one or more wall panels.


CLS 220/669
TXT Contoured sidewall (e.g., curved, corrugated, ribbed, variable thickness,
    etc.):Receptacle under subclass 660 wherein the sidewall has a nonplanar
    configuration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    608+,   for contoured end wall structure in a one-piece container.

    623+,   for contoured end wall structure in a container which is not of
    one-piece construction.


CLS 220/670
TXT Corrugated:
    Receptacle under subclass 669 wherein the contour is in the form of
    alternating grooves and ridges.


CLS 220/671
TXT Axially extending only:
    Receptacle under subclass 670 wherein the corrugations extend only in the
    direction of the longitudinal axis of the container.


CLS 220/672
TXT Circumferentially extending only:
    Receptacle under subclass 670 wherein the corrugations extend only around
    the container.


CLS 220/673
TXT Circumferentially and axially extending:
    Receptacle under subclass 670 wherein some corrugations extend axially and
    others extend circumferentially of the container, essentially at right
    angles to each other.


CLS 220/674
TXT Embossed:
    Receptacle under subclass 669 wherein the contour is in the form of a
    raised or relief design or shape.


CLS 220/675
TXT Molded container:
    Receptacle under subclass 669 wherein the container sidewall and
    corrugations is a molded one-piece construction.


CLS 220/676
TXT Apertured sidewall (e.g., hole, slot, etc.):
    Receptacle under subclass 660 wherein the sidewall has one or more openings
    which are not access openings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    485,    for openwork containers made of wire.


CLS 220/677
TXT Sidewall seam or joint:
    Receptacle under subclass 660 wherein the structure connecting portions of
    the sidewall together is claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    610+,   for similar seams or joints between the sidewall and end wall.


CLS 220/678
TXT Adhered (e.g., welded, cemented, soldered, bonded, etc.):
    Receptacle under subclass 678 wherein the joint is secured by welding,
    cementing, soldering, bonding or the like.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    612,    for adhered seams or joints between the sidewall and end wall.


CLS 220/679
TXT Butt welded joint:
    Receptacle under subclass 678 wherein the joint is formed by uniting
    sidewall portions edge to edge without overlapping.


CLS 220/680
TXT Overlapped:
    Receptacle under subclass 678 wherein the joint is formed by uniting
    sidewall portions with their edges overlapped.


CLS 220/681
TXT Including packing element (e.g., gasket):
    Receptacle under subclass 677 including a gasket or packing means received
    in the joint, usually intended to seal the joint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    614,    for an end wall joint having a packing element.


CLS 220/682
TXT Interlocked joint:
    Receptacle under subclass 677 wherein the edge portions of the sidewall are
    connected together to form a mechanical securement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    612,    for an end wall joint or seam which is both interlocked and adhered.

    615,    for an end wall joint having interlocking structure.

    622,    for a joint or seam having a mechanical fastener passing
    therethrough.

    681,    for a sidewall joint having a packing element.

    678,    for a sidewall joint or seam which is both interlocked and adhered.


CLS 220/683
TXT Separate strip-like element:
    Receptacle under subclass 682 wherein the sidewall edge portions are joined
    by the use of an independent, distinct, narrow piece of material.


CLS 220/684
TXT Slide connector (e.g., "C" shaped rigid strip):
    Receptacle under subclass 683 wherein the sidewall edges have flange-like
    portions which are engaged by inwardly bent edges of a separate,
    strip-like, relatively rigid connector.

    (1)     Note.  The joint is normally assembled by sliding the connector
    along the sidewall edges.


CLS 220/685
TXT H-shaped connector:
    Receptacle under subclass 683 wherein the separate strip is in the form of
    an "H", and the edge portions of the wall sections are received within the
    legs of the "H".


CLS 220/686
TXT Exterior circumferential clamping band:
    Receptacle under subclass 683 wherein the strip is a belt-like member which
    girds the container and is provided with means for tightening the belt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    319+,   for a ring securing or retaining a closure in its closed position
    on a container.


CLS 220/687
TXT With interior circumferential backup band:
    Receptacle under 686 wherein the joint is provided with an additional
    relatively stiff belt-like member inside the container substantially
    coextensive with the outer clamping belt, with the edges of the sidewall
    portions captured therebetween.


CLS 220/688
TXT Exterior strip and interior strip secured together by transverse
    connector:Receptacle under subclass 683 wherein a strip is provided on the
    outside of a sidewall joint and an additional strip is provided on the
    inside of the joint substantially coextensive with the outer strip, and the
    strips are connected by a means which extends transversely between the
    strips thereby clamping the edge portions of the sidewall between the
    strips.


CLS 220/689
TXT Joint bent or rolled:
    Receptacle under subclass 682 wherein the edge portions of the sidewall
    have flanges which are folded or curled together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    619     and 620, for a similar bent or rolled joint between a sidewall and
    end wall.


CLS 220/690
TXT Including tab on one edge which passes through slot on other edge and is
    bent:Receptacle under subclass 682 wherein one edge portion is provided
    with at least one projection which extends through an opening in the other
    edge portion and is folded or deformed.


CLS 220/691
TXT Snap-type (i.e., secured by resilient distortion):
    Receptacle under subclass 682 wherein one edge portion has a
    projection-like member and the other edge portion has a receiver into which
    the projection-like member is secured by resilient distortion.


CLS 220/692
TXT Joint includes separate fastener (e.g., rivet, bolt, screw,
    etc.):Receptacle under subclass 677 wherein the joint is secured by a
    separate mechanical fastening means which extends into the joint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    622,    for similar structure in an end wall seam or joint.


CLS 220/693
TXT Removable fastener:
    Receptacle under subclass 692 wherein the fastener is designed to be taken
    out, normally for disassembly of the container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.01+,  for a sectional container.


CLS 220/694
TXT CONTAINER ATTACHMENT OR ADJUNCT:
    Miscellaneous attachment under the class definition in the form of an
    additional or a supplemental device to be secured to or in combination with
    a container.

    (1)     Note.  An attachment to a container normally will require
    modification of the container.  However, an attachment specifically
    provided for will be classified in the pertinent subclass even though the
    container is not specifically modified to receive the attachment.

    (2)     Note.  An attachment-like structure which is unitary or one piece
    with a container for which there is no other classification will be
    classified here.

    (3)     Note.  Means for fastening an article to a container which is not
    specifically classified elsewhere will be classified here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.03,   for a sidewall extension.

    17.1+,  for a leg or lap supported container.

    23.2+,  for a receptacle set or an arrangement of plural containers.

    86.1,   for a filling member.

    94.1+,  for a handle.

    500+,   for an element forming compartments.

    639+,   for a separate reinforcing element.


CLS 220/695
TXT Includes edge for removing excess material (i.e., scraper):
    Subject matter under subclass 694 wherein the attachment has an edge
    intended to wipe surplus material from a brush, spoon, tool, or similar
    implement when scrapped across the edge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 57.05+ for a
    material supply containing means, or attachment or accessory thereof, so
    constructed as to facilitate "loading" a coating implement with a desired
    amount of coating material.  The shaping of the coating implement by a
    device having a plurality of scraping edges is also included in subclasses
    257.05+.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 110+ for a brush support, per se.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 121+ for a
    supply container combined with a separable applicator and including means,
    other than a sidewall of the supply container, for removing surplus
    material from the applicator.


CLS 220/696
TXT With handle structure for lifting container:
    Subject matter under subclass 695 wherein the attachment has a portion that
    is intended to be grasped by a hand to carry the receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 110+ for miscellaneous handles.


CLS 220/697
TXT With tool or brush holder:
    Subject matter under subclass 695 wherein the attachment has structure for
    supporting a tool, brush, spoon, or similar article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94.1,   for a handle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 60.1+ for a similar support not
    specifically for a receptacle.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 110+ for a support for a brush or broom.


CLS 220/698
TXT Annular scraping edge:
    Subject matter under subclass 695 wherein the edge for removing excess
    material has a circular shape.


CLS 220/699
TXT With specific mounting structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 695 including structure for fastening the
    attachment to the receptacle.


CLS 220/700
TXT Rim mounted:
    Subject matter under subclass 699 wherein the receptacle has an opening
    surrounded by a lip or flange and the attachment mounting structure is
    intended to overlap the lip or flange.


CLS 220/701
TXT Mounting structure coacts with rim groove:
    Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein the attachment mounting structure
    includes a projection which is intended to be received in a channel in the
    rim of the receptacle.


CLS 220/702
TXT Internally mounted:
    Subject matter under subclass 699 wherein the mounting structure is
    intended to contact only an inside wall of the receptacle.


CLS 220/703
TXT Drinking device:
    Subject matter under subclass 694 wherein the attachment includes structure
    intended to aid in the consumption of liquid contents of the receptacle.


CLS 220/704
TXT Mustache guard:
    Subject matter under subclass 703 wherein the drinking device has structure
    intended to prevent the mustache of a user from coming into contact with
    the liquid.


CLS 220/705
TXT With straw or sucking tube:
    Subject matter under subclass 703 wherein the drinking device includes a
    tubular element which is intended to be used to suck liquid from the
    receptacle.


CLS 220/706
TXT Internal straw includes float means:
    Subject matter under subclass 705 wherein the straw is located inside the
    receptacle and is provided with a buoyant means to assist in elevating the
    straw to a drinking position.


CLS 220/707
TXT Internal straw attached to movable closure:
    Subject matter under subclass 705 wherein the receptacle includes a closure
    intended to be moved to gain access to the receptacle, and the straw is
    located inside the receptacle and is attached to the closure.


CLS 220/708
TXT Straw stored within closure:
    Subject matter under subclass 705 wherein the receptacle includes a closure
    having an area for receiving the straw prior to its being used.


CLS 220/709
TXT Straw extends through removable closure:
    Subject matter under subclass 705 wherein the receptacle includes a
    removable cover having an opening through which the straw passes.

    (1)     Note.  The straw and closure can be one-piece.


CLS 220/710
TXT Attached to or within sidewall of  container:
    Subject matter under subclass 705 wherein the straw or tube is connected to
    or constitutes a portion of a sidewall of the receptacle.


CLS 220/710.5
TXT With handle:
    Subject matter under subclass 703 wherein the attachment is an element
    which is to be grasped by a human hand for the purpose of manipulating the
    drinking device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    752+,   for a handle usable with other types of containers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 396+ for a bottle or jar having a
    handle.


CLS 220/711
TXT Removable closure having specific drinking means:
    Subject matter under subclass 703 wherein the drinking device is a
    removable cover having means for the passage of the liquid therethrough.

    (1)     Note.  This is the residual locus for closures for baby training
    cups.

    (2)     Note.  This is the residual locus for disposable lids having a
    tear-out drinking portion.


CLS 220/712
TXT With tear-out portion:
    Subject matter under subclass 711 wherein the removable closure includes
    structure intended to be removed to form the means for passage of the
    liquid.


CLS 220/713
TXT Having aperture:
    Subject matter under subclass 711 wherein the means for the passage of the
    liquid comprises an opening in the removable closure.


CLS 220/714
TXT With valve means:
    Subject matter under subclass 711 wherein the passage of liquid is
    controlled by a mechanical regulating device.


CLS 220/715
TXT Finger operated:
    Subject matter under subclass 714 wherein the mechanical regulating device
    is controlled manually by a finger.


CLS 220/716
TXT Sanitary lip guard:
    Subject matter under subclass 703 wherein the drinking device has structure
    intended to prevent contact between a wall of the receptacle and the lips
    of the user.


CLS 220/717
TXT With outwardly extending mouthpiece:
    Subject matter under subclass 716 wherein the sanitary lip guard has a
    protruding portion which is intended to come in contact with the user's
    lips or mouth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 570 for a rim mounted nozzle, spout, or
    pouring device.


CLS 220/718
TXT Annular:
    Subject matter under subclass 716 wherein the sanitary lip guard has a
    circular shape.


CLS 220/719
TXT Internal anti-splash or anti-spill device:
    Subject matter under subclass 703 wherein the drinking device is intended
    to be mounted within the receptacle and has means for inhibiting liquid
    from splashing or spilling from the receptacle.


CLS 220/720
TXT Expanding or contracting portion or component:
    Subject matter under subclass 694 wherein the attachment can be located
    either within or outside the receptacle, or form a section of the
    receptacle or receptacle wall, and has structure which is changeable in
    shape or size to permit either an increase or decrease in volume of either
    a portion of the attachment or a portion of the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    530,    for a flexible partition that changes the volume of a receptacle
    compartment.


CLS 220/721
TXT Pressure or temperature compensating:
    Subject matter under subclass 720 wherein the attachment structure varies
    in response to a change of pressure or temperature of the receptacle or
    contents.


CLS 220/722
TXT In holder separate from container:
    Subject matter under subclass 721 wherein the variable structure is within
    or a portion of an enclosure distinct from the receptacle.


CLS 220/723
TXT Internal bladder-like bag for contents:
    Subject matter under subclass 720 wherein the variable structure is a
    flexible sack or pouch located within the receptacle for holding contents.


CLS 220/724
TXT Valve protector:
    Subject matter under subclass 694 wherein the attachment has structure
    which is intended to prevent a valve attached to the receptacle from being
    damaged.


CLS 220/725
TXT With provision for locking device:
    Subject matter under subclass 724 wherein the valve protector is provided
    with means for receiving a locking device to prevent unauthorized access to
    the valve.


CLS 220/726
TXT Rotatably mounted:
    Subject matter under subclass 724 wherein the valve protector includes
    structure which provides a revolving connection to the receptacle.


CLS 220/727
TXT Removably attached by rotary motion (e.g., screw, bayonet, etc.):Subject
    matter under subclass 724 wherein the valve protector includes structure
    for detachably connecting the valve protector to the receptacle by a
    twisting motion.


CLS 220/728
TXT Pivotable portion permits access to valve:
    Subject matter under subclass 724 wherein the valve protector includes a
    portion connected by a hinge-like element which provides for access to a
    valve.


CLS 220/729
TXT End wall attachment:
    Subject matter under subclass 694 wherein the attachment is configured to
    extend primarily over at least a portion of a receptacle end wall.


CLS 220/730
TXT Protective guard (e.g., animal deterrent):
    Subject matter under subclass 694 wherein the attachment has structure
    intended to prevent an animal from tampering with the receptacle.


CLS 220/731
TXT Splatter shield or deflector:
    Subject matter under subclass 694 wherein the attachment has structure
    which is intended to partially cover an opening of the receptacle to
    prevent contents from splashing.


CLS 220/732
TXT Sidewall cushioning means:
    Subject matter under subclass 694 wherein the attachment is configured to
    reduce shocks to a receptacle sidewall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    632,    for receptacle end wall cushioning means.

    648,    for receptacle sidewall reinforcing means.

    655,    for receptacle open end edge cushioning means.


CLS 220/733
TXT Annular groove guard (e.g., paint can shield):
    Subject matter under subclass 694 wherein the attachment includes an
    annular member intended to cover the annular channel in the rim of a
    receptacle to exclude foreign matter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    701,    for similar structure in configuration with a scrapper element.


CLS 220/734
TXT Loose fill anti-slosh means:
    Subject matter under subclass 694 including a plurality of separate
    elements intended to be placed in a receptacle which functions as a baffle
    means to deflect, dampen, or regulate the surge or flow of a fluid within
    the receptacle.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88.1,   for similar structure which is designed to prevent explosion or
    fire.


CLS 220/735
TXT With tool or implement holder:
    Subject matter under subclass 694 wherein the attachment has structure for
    supporting a tool or implement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94+,    for similar structure combined with a handle means.

    697,    for similar structure combined with a scraper element.


CLS 220/736
TXT Brush:
    Subject matter under subclass 735 wherein the tool is a brush.


CLS 220/737
TXT Container holder:
    Subject matter under subclass 694 including structure intended to receive
    and support a receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  These attachments normally remain with the receptacle during
    use.  The receptacle is normally discarded after use and the holder reused.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 386+ for an attachment to a bottle or
    jar.

    222,    Dispensing, various subclasses for a holder combined with
    dispensing means.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 359+ for an article carrier.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 137+ for an
    article carrier gripped and carried by a hand.


CLS 220/738
TXT Disposable cup holder:
    Subject matter under subclass 737 wherein the holder is intended to receive
    and support a plastic or paper cup which is discarded after use.


CLS 220/739
TXT Insulated:
    Subject matter under subclass 737 wherein at least a portion of the
    receptacle holder is made of a low heat conducting material.


CLS 220/740
TXT Holder has lid for closing container:
    Subject matter under subclass 737 wherein the holder includes structure
    which functions as a closure for a receptacle in the holder.


CLS 220/741
TXT Spaced upper and lower elements connected by a handle structure:Subject
    matter under subclass 737 wherein the receiving holder has a base means
    intended to engage a receptacle bottom, a top means separated from the base
    means intended to engage an upper portion of a receptacle, and an element
    connecting the base means and top means which functions as a handle.


CLS 220/742
TXT Upper element secures container:
    Subject matter under subclass 741 wherein the upper element of the holder
    includes means to clamp or affix the receptacle in the holder.


CLS 220/743
TXT Wire:
    Subject matter under subclass 737 wherein the receiving structure of the
    holder is an arrangement of wires, open work, or other analogous structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    465+,   for a receptacle made of wire.


CLS 220/744
TXT Removable support for displaced closure:
    Subject matter under subclass 694 wherein the attachment is a removable
    support element which is attachable to a receptacle wall and which holds a
    receptacle cover when the cover is disassociated from its closing position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    379,    for a similar structure permanently secured to a closure or a
    receptacle adjacent the closure opening.


CLS 220/745
TXT Container vent means:
    Subject matter under subclass 694 wherein the attachment includes structure
    which provides a ventilating passageway for the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    366.1,  for a vent structure between the receptacle body and a closure.

    367.1+, for a similar vent structure in a closure.


CLS 220/746
TXT Automotive type:

    Subject matter under subclass 745 wherein the ventilating passageway is
    associated with a supply container (e.g., gas tank, radiator, etc.) for an
    internal combustion operated vehicle.


CLS 220/747
TXT Tortuous path:

    Subject matter under subclass 745 wherein the passageway is in the form of
    a tortuous or serpentine passage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    374,    for a tortuous vent in a closure.


CLS 220/748
TXT Liquid trap:

    Subject matter under subclass 747 wherein the tortuous passage includes a
    body of liquid material through which vapors must pass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228,    for a similar liquid trap between the receptacle body and a closure.


CLS 220/749
TXT Vapor reservoir:

    Subject matter under subclass 745 including means for collecting and
    storing any vapors emitted from the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    722,    for a holder separate from the receptacle for similar subject
    matter having an expanding or contracting portion or component.


CLS 220/750
TXT For multiple containers:

    Subject matter under subclass 749 wherein the reservoir is connected to and
    serves more than a single receptacle.


CLS 220/751
TXT Container hanging means (i.e., for hanging from an inanimate supporting
    device):

    Subject matter under subclass 694 wherein the device is a means for
    suspending a container from an inanimate object.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 67 for a hanging support for a plant
    receptacle.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 806 for a cross-reference
    art collection of suspending means.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 117.09+ for a
    paperboard box having a lifting or suspending element.

    248,    Supports, subclass 317 for a suspended support intended use with a
    receptacle or bowl.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, appropriate subclasses
    for a hoistable receptacle.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 22+ for a flexible bag having a hanging
    element.


CLS 220/752
TXT Handle, handle component, or handle adjunct:

    Subject matter under subclass 694 wherein the device comprises (1) an
    element or a plurality of interrelated elements which form a construction
    which is attached or is intended to be attached, to a container for the
    purpose of manipulating the container, (2) a subcombination of such a
    construction, or (3) an accessory which cooperates with the construction
    while it is attached to the container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212.5,  for a closure combined with a handle.

    269     and 270+, for a closure having a frangible member or portion and a
    gripping means for use in tearing open the closure.

    317,    for a handle which secures a closure while pouring.

    318,    for a handle-attached closure securing means.

    322,    for a bail handle which acts as a closure securing means.

    330,    for a closure mounted for compound movement about a container bail.

    696,    for a container combined with a scraper and a handle.

    710.5,  for a handle for a drinking device.

    741+,   for a container holder having a handle.

    751,    for a hanging means for a container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 110+ for a handle not classified
    elsewhere, Digs.12 and 19 for art collections of handles, Dig.28 for a
    mattress handle, and Digs.24 and 25 for a handle fastening means.

     150,   Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, subclasses 107+ for a
    handle for a purse or handbag.

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclass 39 for a handle for a
    trunk, and subclasses 115+ for an item of luggage in combination with a
    handle.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 396+ for a bottle or jar having a
    handle.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclass 125 for a wooden basket having a
    handle.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 210+, 323+, 441, and 465.1+ for a dispensing
    container with a handle.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 117.09+ for a
    lifting or suspending element for a paperboard box, subclass 68.2 for an
    envelope with a carrying handle, and subclass 914 for an cross-reference
    art collection of basket-type paperboard boxes with a handle.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 27.1+ for a
    detachable receptacle lifter.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 6+ for a flexible bag with a handle.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process, subclass 187 for battery having a handle.


CLS 220/753
TXT Insulated handle:

    Subject matter under subclass 752 including a handle and means for
    preventing it from becoming too hot to hold.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    912,    for a cross-reference art collection of cookware.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 116+ for an insulted handle of a
    general nature.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 46 for an
    electrically insulated handle.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclass 3 for a coating
    implement with material supply having a heat-insulated handle or hand grip
    portion.


CLS 220/754
TXT Flexible handle (e.g., rope, cord, chain, web, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 752 comprising a handle that is pliant or
    yielding.


CLS 220/755
TXT Specified gripping structure (i.e., the handle portion that is contacted by
    the hand):Subject matter under subclass 752 including a handle having a
    grasping area which has particular defined characteristics.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, Dig.12 for a handgrip and Dig.19 for a cast
    or molded handle.


CLS 220/756
TXT Handle having secondary function (e.g., as a support):

    Subject matter under subclass 752 including a handle which is specifically
    configured to perform a function in addition to hand manipulation of a
    container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    317,    for a container having a handle that fastens the closure during
    pouring.

    318,    for other handle-attached closure securing means.

    330,    for a closure mounted for compound movement about a container
    carrying bail.

    696,    for a container combined with a scraper and a handle.

    735+,   for a handle which holds a tool or an implement.


CLS 220/757
TXT Handle having variable size or configuration (i.e., handle has relatively
    movable components):

    Subject matter under subclass 752 including a handle having two or more
    elements which are movable relative to one another to change the dimensions
    or shape of the handle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    762+,   for means to retain a movable handle in at least one fixed position.


CLS 220/758
TXT Handle or handle attaching means for encircling a container:Subject matter
    under subclass 752 including a handle or a handle securing means which
    extends substantially completely around the circumference of a container
    when the handle is secured to the container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    741+,   for a container holder having spaced upper and lower elements
    connected by a handle structure.


CLS 220/759
TXT Means for detachably securing a handle to a container:
    Subject matter under subclass 752 including means which facilitate removing
    a handle from a container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 114+ for a detachable handle not
    classified elsewhere.

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclass 116 for a detachable
    handle for an item of hand luggage.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 467 for a dispenser having plural detachable
    handles.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclass 117.19 for a
    detachable handle for a paperboard box.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 13 for a detachable handle for a flexible
    bag.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process, subclass 187 for a detachable battery handle.


CLS 220/760
TXT Bail handle (i.e., inverted U-shaped handle):
    Subject matter under subclass 759 including a removable handle having the
    shape of an inverted U with the opposite ends of the handle removably
    attachable to a container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    773+,   for a nonremovable bail handle.


CLS 220/761
TXT Container having a handle and a handle storage recess:
    Subject matter under subclass 752 including a container having a handle and
    a depressed area for receiving the handle when it is not in use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclass 117.22 for a
    paperboard box having a provision for positioning a handle in a nonuse
    location.


CLS 220/762
TXT Means for retaining a movable handle in at least one fixed position:Subject
    matter under subclass 752 including a container in combination with a
    handle wherein the handle can assume different orientations with respect to
    the container and further including structure which will positively
    maintain the handle in at least one orientation.

    (1)     Note.  A handle which stays in a position solely by the force of
    gravity is not proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    757,    for a handle having an adjustable size or configuration.

    765,    for means intended to limit the range of the swinging movement of a
    pivoted handle.


CLS 220/763
TXT Nonuse position:
    Subject matter under subclass 762 wherein the retaining means will maintain
    the handle in an orientation from which it must be moved in order to use it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    761,    for a container having a handle and a handle storage recess.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclass 117.22 for a
    cardboard box having a handle and a provision for positioning the handle in
    a nonuse location.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 14 for a flexible bag having a handle and
    which makes provision for positioning the handle in a nonuse location.


CLS 220/764
TXT Including means for retaining the handle in at least two fixed
    positions:Subject matter under subclass 762 wherein structure is provided
    which will positively maintain the handle in at least two given
    orientations with respect to a container.


CLS 220/765
TXT Means for limiting the range of swinging movement of a pivotable handle
    (e.g., a stop to prevent contact of a bail-type handle with a container
    wall):Subject matter under subclass 752 including structure which prevents
    a movable handle from moving to a position which would otherwise be within
    its range of movement

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    760,    for a detachable bail handle.

    762+,   for means other than gravity for retaining a movable handle in at
    least one fixed position.

    773+,   for a nonremovable bail handle.


CLS 220/766
TXT Swinging handle which doesn't straddle container mouth during use (or means
    for attaching said handle):Subject matter under subclass 752 including a
    pivoting handle or means for pivotally attaching a handle to a container
    such that all points of connection between the handle and the container are
    on the same side of the access opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    760,    for a detachable bail handle.

    762+,   for means to retain a movable handle in at least one fixed position.

    765,    for means intended to limit the range of swinging movement of a
    pivoted handle.

    773+,   for a nonremovable, and generally pivotally attached bail handle,
    which straddles the container mouth during use.


CLS 220/767
TXT Handle or handle attaching means secured within a container seam:Subject
    matter under subclass 752 including a container having a joint which
    secures together two or more parts of the container and which also secures
    a handle or handle attaching means to the container.


CLS 220/768
TXT Handle or handle attaching means attached to a container top wall:Subject
    matter under subclass 752 wherein a handle is secured to the upper-most
    wall of a container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212.5,  for a handle secured to a closure.


CLS 220/769
TXT Handle or handle attaching means attached to the top edge of a container
    sidewall (e.g., rim, bead, flange, etc.):Subject matter under subclass 752
    including a handle or handle attaching means attached to the upper border
    of a container sidewall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    768,    for a handle or handle attaching means attached to a container top
    wall.


CLS 220/770
TXT Handle extends through an aperture, or into a recess, in container
    material:Subject matter under subclass 752 including a handle which extends
    through an opening or into a depression in the container material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    761,    for a container with a handle storage recess.


CLS 220/771
TXT Handle is of one-piece construction with a container:
    Subject matter under subclass 752 including a handle which is part of the
    same piece of material as the container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclass 398 for a similar handle structure in a
    bottle or jar.


CLS 220/772
TXT Plural handles or means for attaching plural handles to a container:Subject
    matter under subclass 752 including at least two handles or structure for
    securing at least two handles to a container.


CLS 220/773
TXT Bail handle (i.e., inverted U-shaped handle) which straddles container
    mouth during use (or means for receiving a bail handle):Subject matter
    under subclass 752 including a generally semi-circular-shaped handle which
    extends across the container mouth when in use, or means for receiving said
    handle.

    (1)     Note.  The bail handle receiving means are intended to be attached
    to the container, but are generally more complex than the attaching means
    in preceding subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    760,    for a detachable bail handle.


CLS 220/774
TXT Handle receiving means extends above the container rim:
    Subject matter under subclass 773 wherein the receiving means extends above
    the top edge of the container.


CLS 220/775
TXT Handle receiving means, which is not of one-piece construction with the
    container, extends through an aperture or into a recess in the container
    material:Subject matter under subclass 773 wherein the receiving means
    extends through an opening in the container material or into a depression
    in the container material and is a separate element or plurality of
    elements that have been attached to the container.


CLS 220/776
TXT Handle receiving means, which is not of one piece construction with the
    container, includes an aperture for receiving a handle end:Subject matter
    under subclass 773 wherein the receiving means includes an opening in it
    for accepting an end of the handle and is a separate element or plurality
    of elements that have been attached to the container.


CLS 220/780
TXT Removable closure situated by resilient distortion and retained by
    preformed configuration (e.g., detent):

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the closure or closure support is
    provided with structure designed to induce a deformation of the closure or
    the closure support during their mating cooperation, the return of the
    deformed


    portion to its normal position serves to cause an

    interlock between the closure and the closure support, thus preventing
    their casual separation.

    (1)     Note.  The closure support may be the container end wall or
    sidewall or it may be a retaining ring attached to the end wall or sidewall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.01+,  for a sectional container including similar retaining structure.

    254,    for a secondary closure within the parameter of primary closure one
    of which includes similar retaining structure.

    796+,   for a removable closure retained by friction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 96+ for a closure including
    similar retaining structure limited for use with a pipe.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for a closure including similar
    retaining structure and including a dispensing feature.

    301,    Land Vehicles: Wheels and Axles, subclasses 37.1+ for a wheel cover
    including similar retaining structure.


CLS 220/781
TXT Having structure to stack or nest when not in use:

    Subject matter under subclass 780 wherein the closure includes a particular
    configuration to engage a mating configuration on another superimposable
    closure to enhance the stability of such closures when placed one upon the
    other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    380     for a closure not retained by resilient distortion of a preformed
    configuration having stacking or nesting structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 508 for a closure including
    structure specified for stacking a container on the closure.


CLS 220/782
TXT Closure reinforced:

    Subject matter under subclass 780 wherein the closure includes structure
    intended to strengthen it.


CLS 220/783
TXT Closure interlocked by upward opening trough at passage mouth:

    Subject matter under subclass 780 wherein the closure is intended to be
    retained by a preformed configuration in an upwardly open channel
    surrounding the access opening of a container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    797,    for a removable closure received by an upwardly open channel and
    retained by friction (e.g., a paint can lid retained by friction).


CLS 220/784
TXT Noncontinuous interlock along perimeter of closure, closure support
    juncture:

    Subject matter under subclass 780 wherein the interlock formed by the
    preformed configuration does not extend around the entire length of the
    closure, closure support intersection.


CLS 220/785
TXT Vented at interlock:

    Subject matter under subclass 784 wherein a ventilating passage is located
    intermediate the closure and the closure support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202.1+, for a removable closure having a condition responsive vent.

    366.1,  for a closure not retained by resilient distortion of a preformed
    configuration and having vent means at the closure, closure support
    juncture.

    367.1+, for a removable closure having vent means in the closure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 307+ for a bottle or jar including a
    vented closure.


CLS 220/786
TXT Apertured interlock:

    Subject matter under subclass 784 wherein the closure or closure support
    includes an opening in the wall material intended to form part of the
    interlock.


CLS 220/787
TXT Interlock internal to passage mouth (e.g., stopper type closure):

    Subject matter under subclass 784 wherein the interlock occurs between the
    closure and the access opening inner wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    789,    for a similar closure including a continuous interlock between the
    closure and a passage mouth inner wall.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 355+ for a bottle or jar including a
    stopper type closure.


CLS 220/788
TXT Both closure and closure support modified for noncontinuous interlock:

    Subject matter under subclass 784 wherein both the closure and  closure
    support include specified structure intended for a noncontinuous interlock.


CLS 220/789
TXT Interlock internal to passage mouth (e.g., stopper type closure):

    Subject matter under subclass 780 wherein the interlock occurs between the
    closure and the access opening inner wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    787,    for a similar closure including a noncontinuous interlock between
    the closure and the passage mouth inner wall.

    DIG 19,  for a digest of rubber plugs and caps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 355+ for a bottle or jar including a
    stopper type closure.


CLS 220/790
TXT Closure flange interlocks closure support outer wall:

    Subject matter under subclass 789 wherein the closure is intended to
    interlock the closure support outer wall.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for a closure which interlocks on
    both the internal and external walls of the closure support.


CLS 220/791
TXT Closure includes integral lifting tab:

    Subject matter under subclass 789 wherein the closure includes a projection
    formed as one-piece with the closure which is intended to aid in removing
    the closure from the closure support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212.5,  for a closure combined with a handle.

    269     and 270+, for a closure including a frangible member or portion
    about a line of weakness and which includes a gripping means.


CLS 220/792
TXT Closure flange has noninterlocking contact internal to passage mouth:

    Subject matter under subclass 780 wherein the closure is intended to
    contact an inner portion of the container access opening however does not
    interlock with it.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for a closure which is intended to
    interlock the closure support outer wall and frictionally contact a
    container passage mouth wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    790,    for a closure which is intended to interlock on both the internal
    and external wall of the closure support.


CLS 220/793
TXT Closure includes integral lifting tab:

    Subject matter under subclass 780 wherein the closure includes a projection
    formed as one-piece with the closure which is intended to aid in removing
    the closure from the closure support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212.5,  for a closure combined with a handle.

    269     and 270+, for a closure including a frangible member or portion
    about a line of weakness and which includes a gripping means.


CLS 220/794
TXT Interlock surface on  closure is bent or impressed:

    Subject matter under subclass 780 wherein the interlock region of the
    closure is formed by nonelastic deformation of the closure.


CLS 220/795
TXT With gasket or packing:

    Subject matter under subclass 780 wherein the closure includes means
    intended to act at the closure, closure juncture to oppose the passage of
    material or fluid therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304,    for a screw type closure with a gasket or packing.

    310.1,  for a crimped type closure with a gasket or packing.

    344,    for a hinged closure with gasket or packing.

    378,    for a removable closure with a gasket or packing not provided
    elsewhere.

    796+,   for a friction retained closure with a gasket or packing.


CLS 220/796
TXT Removable closure retained by friction:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the closure is intended to engage
    the closure support with such close tolerance the inherent frictional
    resistance to motion prevents their casual separation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    780+    for a removable closure situated by a resilient distortion and
    retained by a preformed configuration.


CLS 220/797
TXT Closure embraced by upwardly opening trough at passage mouth:

    Subject matter under subclass 796 wherein the closure is intended to be
    retained by an upwardly open channel surrounding the passage mouth through
    frictional wall contact.

    (1)     Note.  This class provides a home for the structure found in a
    common commercial house-paint can including a frictional lid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    783     for a removable closure received by an upwardly open channel and
    retained by a preformed configuration.


CLS 220/798
TXT And includes juncture internal of passage mouth:

    Subject matter under subclass 797 wherein the closure includes an
    additional friction contact surface between the closure and closure support
    inner wall.


CLS 220/799
TXT Noncontinuous overlap along perimeter of closure, closure support:

    Subject matter under subclass 796 wherein the overlap of the closure and
    closure support does not extend around the entire length of the closure,
    closure support intersection.


CLS 220/800
TXT Juncture internal of passage mouth (e.g., stopper type closure):

    Subject matter under subclass 799 wherein the frictional resistance occurs
    between the closure and closure support inner wall.


CLS 220/801
TXT Juncture internal of passage mouth (e.g., stopper type closure):

    Subject matter under subclass 796 wherein the frictional resistance occurs
    between the closure and closure support inner wall.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 355+ for a bottle or jar including a
    stopper type closure.


CLS 220/802
TXT And includes closure flange embracing closure support outer wall:

    Subject matter under subclass 801 wherein frictional resistance occurs
    between the closure and the closure support outer wall.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for a closure which is intended to
    include frictional resistance on both the internal and external walls of
    the closure support.


CLS 220/803
TXT With gasket or packing:

    Subject matter under subclass 802 wherein the closure includes means acting
    at the closure, closure juncture intended to oppose the passage of material
    or fluid therebetween.


CLS 220/804
TXT With gasket or packing:

    Subject matter under subclass 801 wherein the closure includes means acting
    at the closure, closure juncture intended to oppose the passage of material
    or fluid therebetween.


CLS 220/805
TXT Closure includes integral lifting tab:

    Subject matter under subclass 796 wherein the closure includes a projection
    formed as one-piece with the closure which is intended to aid in removing
    the closure from the closure support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212.5,  for a closure combined with a handle.  269 and 270+ for a closure
    including a frangible member or portion about a line of weakness and which
    includes a gripping means.


CLS 220/806
TXT With gasket or packing:

    Subject matter under subclass 796 wherein the closure includes means acting
    at the closure, closure juncture intended to oppose the passage of material
    or fluid therebetween.


CLS 220/890
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:
    Receptacle under the class definition not provided for elsewhere.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS

    The following subclasses are collections of published nonpatent
    disclosures, foreign patents and copies of U.S. patents having original
    classifications elsewhere pertaining to various aspects of the metallic
    receptacle art, which aspects do not form appropriate bases for subclasses
    in the foregoing classification (i.e., subclasses superior hereto in the
    schedule).  These subclasses especially assist a search based on the use or
    special characteristic of the receptacle.  They may be of further
    assistance to the searcher either as a starting point in searching this
    class or as an indication of further related fields of search inside or
    outside this class.  Thus, there is provided a second access for retrieval
    of a limited number of types of disclosures.

    (1)     Note.  Disclosures are placed in these subclasses for their value
    as references and as leads to appropriate main or secondary fields of
    search without regard to their original classification or their claimed
    subject matter.

    (2)     Note.  The disclosures found in the following subclasses are
    examples only of the indicated subject matter, and in no instance do they
    represent the entire extent of the prior art.


CLS 220/900
TXT RUPTURE PROOF:

    A container having wall structure designed to either prevent tears in said
    wall structure or to seal or correct them.


CLS 220/901
TXT LIQUIFIED GAS CONTENT (CRYOGENIC):

    A container having wall structure designed to withstand extreme temperature
    and/or pressure variations due to the containment of a liquid that becomes
    a gas at atmospheric temperatures and pressures.


CLS 220/902
TXT Foam:

    A container having at least one wall or layer made of an expanded material.


CLS 220/903
TXT INSULATING JACKET FOR BEVERAGE CONTAINER:

    A holder or covering for a container which retards the transfer of heat to
    or from the container and its liquid contents.


CLS 220/904
TXT PAIL OR BUCKET OF FLEXIBLE OR FLACCID MATERIAL (E.G., FABRIC, RUBBER, ETC.):

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a generally
    cylindrical container made of a supple, usually waterproof material, and
    having an access opening at the top and frequently provided with a
    bail-type handle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9.1+,   for a pail or bucket having flaccid walls supported on a rigid
    framework.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 566+ for a pail or bucket having claimed
    spout features.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 121.1 for a pail or bucket having flexible
    walls and a rigid bottom.


CLS 220/905
TXT FLEXIBLE FUEL TANK FOR A VEHICLE:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a container made of
    flexible material and intended to receive and hold fuel in a vehicle.


CLS 220/906
TXT BEVERAGE CAN (I.E., BEER, SODA, ETC.):
    Receptacle under the class definition including a generally cylindrical
    sidewall which is dimensioned to be hand-held, and intended to hold a
    liquid for human consumption.


CLS 220/907
TXT Collapsible:
    Beverage container under subclass 906 wherein a wall, normally the
    cylindrical sidewall, includes means (e.g., fold lines, corrugations, etc.)
    which facilitate compaction.


CLS 220/908
TXT TRASH CONTAINER:
    Receptacle under the class definition which is intended to receive a
    discarded item.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are examples of containers of both small and
    extremely large size which may be properly classified in this or other
    classes.


CLS 220/909
TXT Segregated:
    Trash container under subclass 908 including means (e.g., compartments,
    bags, etc.) within the container which permit discarded items of different
    types to be separated from one another.


CLS 220/910
TXT Table-top type:
    Trash container under subclass 908 which is dimensioned and intended to be
    placed on top of a table or counter.


CLS 220/911
TXT Can converted to ash container:
    Table-top type container under subclass 910 wherein the container is a can
    (usually a used beverage can) combined with means to facilitate its use as
    an ash receptacle.


CLS 220/912
TXT COOKWARE (I.E., POTS AND PANS):
    Container under the class definition comprising a kitchen vessel intended
    to be used for cooking food.


CLS 220/913
TXT VENTILATED CONTAINER:
    Container under the class definition having at least two openings in its
    wall(s) intended to permit the circulation of air through the container
    wall(s).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    676,    for an apertured container.


CLS 220/914
TXT CONTAINER CONTOURED TO FIT A BODY PART:
    Container under the class definition having at least a portion thereof
    shaped to fit a part of the human body.

    (1)     Note.  The contoured is normally intended to facilitate carrying or
    holding the container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclasses 101+ for a container
    including means for carrying it on the human body.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses
    149 and 153 for a hot water bag specifically configured for a body part.


CLS 220/915
TXT AEROSOL VALVE CAP OR PROTECTOR:
    Receptacle under the class definition including structure intended to
    prevent unauthorized or unintentional use or damage to an aerosol
    dispensing valve on the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    724,    for an attachment to a receptacle to protect a valve.


CLS 220/916
TXT CONTAINER INCLUDING AXIALLY
    OPPOSED REMOVABLE CLOSURES:

    Containers under the class definition including two closures which are
    located at opposite ends of the containers.

    FOREIGN ART COLLECTIONS

    The definitions for FOR 100-FOR 111 below correspond to the definitions of
    the abolished subclasses under Class 220 from which these collections were
    formed.  See the Foreign Art Collection schedule for specific
    correspondences.  [Note:  The titles and definitions for indented art
    collections include all the details of the one(s) that are hierarchically
    superior.]


CLS 220/FOR100
TXT Foreign art collection wherein the closure or the passage mouth is
    provided with a preformed configuration designed to induce a distortion of
    the cover or passage mouth during their mating cooperation, the return of
    the distorted portions to normal position serves to cause an interlock
    between the closure and passage mouth, preventing their casual separation.


CLS 220/FOR101
TXT Foreign art collection  wherein the closure is of the stopper or
    plug type and the performed detents are internal of the receptacle mouth.


CLS 220/FOR102
TXT Foreign art collection including means acting at the juncture of
    the closure and passage mouth to oppose the passage of material or fluid
    therebetween.


CLS 220/FOR103
TXT Foreign art collection wherein the closure or passage mouth is
    crimped, rolled, or folded together forming a juncture which must be
    destroyed in removing the closure.


CLS 220/FOR104
TXT Foreign art collection including means acting at the juncture of
    the closure and an adjacent member to oppose the passage of fluid
    therebetween.


CLS 220/FOR105
TXT Foreign art collection wherein the closure engages the receptacle
    mouth with such close tolerance that casual separation therefrom is
    resisted by the inherent frictional resistance to motion therebetween.


CLS 220/FOR106
TXT Foreign art collection having means in addition to the closure
    structure or the passage mouth structure to guide the closure in its
    opening or closing movement.


CLS 220/FOR107
TXT Foreign art collection wherein the receptacle mouth is provided
    with an upwardly opening channel providing friction wall contact for a
    vertical wall surrounding a depression in the closure.


CLS 220/FOR108
TXT Foreign art collection wherein the closure is provided with a
    downwardly opening channel providing friction wall contact for a vertically
    extending portion of the passage mouth.


CLS 220/FOR109
TXT Foreign art collection wherein the closure is provided with a
    depending flange which fits closely over and around a passage mouth.


CLS 220/FOR110
TXT Foreign art collection including means acting at the juncture of
    the closure and the closure support or receptacle mouth to oppose the
    passage of fluid therebetween.


CLS 220/FOR111
TXT Foreign art collection including means acting at the juncture of
    the closure and the closure support or receptacle mouth to oppose the
    passage of fluid therebetween.


CLS 221/
TTL ARTICLE DISPENSING

CLS 221/
TXT

    The class definitions and notes are arranged in the following sections:



    I       GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    II      EXPLANATORY NOTES ON SCOPE OF CLASS

    III     DEFINITIONS OF TERMS USED

    IV      ARTICLE TREATMENT OR MODIFICATION (INCLUDING ASSEMBLY)

    V       COMBINATIONS WITH THE SUBJECT MATTER OF OTHER CLASSES

    VI      ARTICLE AND MATERIAL HANDLING

    VII     ARTICLE ASSORTING AND/OR ORIENTING

    VIII    RECEPTACLES, CABINETS, RACKS AND OTHER STATIC STRUCTURES

    IX      INDEX TO CLASSES REFERRED TO IN THIS CLASS

    I       GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    A.      The word "dispensing" is of such broad connotation in both
    dictionary definition and in the language of the published art relative to
    material handling that it is too indefinite to serve as a base for defining
    the limits and nature of a technological classification.  Therefore a
    series of limits are set forth in detail to outline a definition of the
    phrase "article dispensing" as it is used in this class.  Subsequent
    reference to the phrase "article dispensing" always refers to devices
    within such limits.

    B.      Article dispensing in a broad sense is that type of material
    handling which deals with certain types of methods of structures which
    allow or cause permissive or compulsive separation or a discrete article or
    articles from a source of supply of such articles which includes more
    articles than the number removed in any one operation.  There must always
    be a supply container or other source means for providing a plurality of
    articles to be handled, and the article or articles must be handled by
    mechanism or be subject to manual handling, as a discrete solid entity, as
    distinguished from a fluent mass.  The source means must be one in which
    there is an accumulation of articles and may be a skeletal chute structure
    or a mere support for a stack of articles.

    C.      The types of means controlling separation of articles from sources
    of supply included in this class are described in the following
    subsections. Processes and apparatus not within limits of subject matter
    therein described are not considered to be dispensers under this class
    definition and are classified in appropriate other existing
    classifications.  Article dispensers which are included are characterized
    by the subject matter of the following sections:

    (1)     Discharge Outlet Means

    (2)     Supply source Container or Holder Structure (Static Structure)

    (3)     Releasing Means Structure

    (4)     Discharge Assisting Means

    (5)     Cellular Magazine Type (Miscellaneous)

    (1)     Discharge Outlet Means

    A mere opening coextensive with some dimension of articles to be dispensed,
    or larger with a normal mode of operation involving mere manual removal or
    gravity discharge, is not enough to characterize a dispenser for this
    class.  An outlet having means to retard successive articles is considered
    to be a dispensing type outlet characteristic of article dispensers
    properly classifiable in this class.

    The means to retard must be something other than the first article and
    something other than mere static outlet opening shapes and includes
    arrangements wherein an article is deformed in passing a rigid outlet or
    vice versa, i.e., the outlet is too small to pass the article in any of its
    dimensions as stored, either the article or the edges of the outlet being
    deformed.

    The above limitations are not affected by the presence or absence of a
    closure member.  Thus, a supply source provided with outlet means as
    described in the preceding paragraphs, and having also closure means is
    proper subject matter for this class, whereas a source of supply
    (container) provided with a conventional opening and a closure therefor is
    proper subject matter for the appropriate receptacle or support class.

    (2)     Supply Source Container or Holder Structure (Static Structures)

    Devices in which the configuration or internal structure of the container
    or holder for the articles to be dispensed is specialized to the problem of
    the separation of articles being dealt out from a source, are considered to
    be dispensers and are included in this class.  Examples of such structures
    included in this class with the limits thereof are:

    (a)     Internal structure of supply receptacles, as means at or near the
    outlet for retarding a succeeding article while the leading article is
    removed or for imparting a transverse article segregating motion to the
    articles.

    (b)     Trap chamber structure, that is, supply container configuration
    which creates identifiable trap means to isolate the leading article from
    the remainder of the articles for ease of removal.  It is usually
    characterized by abrupt change of direction of the path of movement of the
    articles to hold back otherwise freely sliding or rolling succeeding
    articles in contact with the article or articles available for removal at
    one operation.

    (c)     Container, chute or rack structures of nonrectilinear configuration
    may be included in this class under certain circumstances such as (1) when
    the curve or angular turn in the container, chute or rack is such as to
    change the nature of a stack or arrangement of articles (as from end to end
    to side by side, or from a double row to a single row) so that article
    removal from the ultimate arrangement is easier than it would otherwise
    have been or, (2) when the curve or angular turn is specifically  modified
    at or near the egress point to present an article or articles in such a way
    that they are relatively easily removable, as by changing the relative
    bearing on such article or articles of the succeeding articles on such
    article or articles.  In this connection it is noted that it is common for
    article supporting rack structure to be curved or angular for purposes of
    space conservation or for controlling the direction or disposition of the
    inlet and/or outlet, and it is not intended that such structures should be
    classified in this class.  It is also recognized that as a rack structure
    approaches a horizontal disposition the relative ease of removing articles
    increases, but this is considered to be a mere incident to the rack problem
    of space conservation and directional disposition and not to warrant
    classification in this dispensing class.

    (3)     Releasing Means Structure

    A source of supply of articles having an outlet or outlet path provided
    with mechanical means to control the movement of articles through the
    outlet or along the path by releasing the foremost article or articles for
    unassisted gravity movement while restraining movement of succeeding
    articles is a dispenser under this class.  In the cellular magazine type
    this release may be effected by the progressive collapse of a collapsible
    or flexible cellular structure.

    (4)     Discharge Assisting Means

    A source of supply of articles having means to assist discharge from the
    source by separation of an article or articles from the source, is a
    dispenser classifiable in this class, unless otherwise classified.  For
    this purpose, any nongravity means for urging articles toward or through an
    outlet opening or for removing the remainder of the articles away from the
    article or articles to be segregated, is a discharge assistant.

    For example, an ejector element acting directly on an article to be
    dispensed to force it through a related outlet is a discharge assistant.
    Agitating or vibrating means acting on articles in a supply container may
    also be considered to be discharge assistant means.

    A follower or a conveyor element acting on the entire supply of the source
    at one time, (while not of itself a discharge assistant, see Class 220,
    Receptacles, subclasses 578+, and Class 198, Conveyors:  Power-Driven,
    respectively) may serve to establish a dispensing combination for this
    class if a discharge outlet or other arrangement is provided whereby
    actuation of the conveyor or follower is effective to affirmatively
    separate an article or articles from the remainder of the supply.  However,
    a supply container having a follower which urges articles simultaneously
    toward an outlet but which does not have some other feature which is
    recognized as characteristic of a dispenser in this class is not
    classifiable herein.  Operation of the follower to cause successive
    affirmative separation of an article or articles from a source of supply as
    by the article falling off its support is considered a dispensing
    characteristic which meets the requirements of section I,C (1), and such
    devices are classified as a dispenser in this class.

    (5)     Cellular Magazine Type (Miscellaneous)

    The special type of article dispenser which has a supply source container
    in which each article is retained in a separate compartment, cell or
    holder, and which is designated a "cellular magazine" in this class (see
    subclasses 25 and 69+) presents certain problems in its relationship to the
    various cabinet and receptacle arts and requires some deviation from the
    general pattern described hereinabove.

    Cellular sources or magazines are included in this class if:

    (1)     a common discharge assistant operates at different times or to
    different degrees in more than one of the compartments;

    (2)     a unitary control is provided for discharging means operating at
    different times or to different degrees on articles in more than one of the
    compartments;

    (3)     a single discharge outlet of less extent than the combined width of
    all the cells is common to more than one of the compartments and articles
    are released (as by unassisted gravitational movement without inversion of
    the apparatus), impelled (as by a discharge assistant), or carried by
    relative movement of the said magazine to or through an outer housing
    outlet so that manual grasping thereof is enhanced by such movement, or are
    at least partially released or ejected therefrom; or

    (4)     movement of the cellular structure, or portions thereof relative to
    an enclosure or support (including collapse of the cell structure) results
    in gravity or nongravity discharge of articles from the cells.

    Generally the failure to include at least one of the features outlined in
    the preceding paragraph or in sub-sections (1) to (4) is evidence that
    classification is not in this class but in appropriate other cabinet,
    support or rack classification.  For example, cellular sources or
    magazines, with the various cells movable past an outlet door or opening in
    an enclosing cabinet or casing, in which articles are removed by reaching
    inside and grasping the articles are not included, nor are such devices
    requiring inversion or other bodily movement to cause or allow the removal
    of articles.  Such devices are classified in appropriate subclasses of
    Class 312, Supports:  Cabinet Structure, and of the various other
    receptacle classes (see section VIII of this class definition).

    The type of article dispenser in which articles are released to or
    discharged upon an article catching member or trap for manual removal is
    treated as a special type (see subclasses 191+).  In general, such devices
    are included in this class on the basis of the inclusion of at least one of
    the dispensing features described in sub-sections (1) to (4) of this
    section of the class definition.  However, as a special case, combinations
    in which a mere closure, which is not of a dispensing type, controls
    release of articles to a trap for manual removal therefrom are classified
    in this class (221).  This placement of art is predicated upon the
    proposition that the trap is an element which goes beyond mere
    receptacle-closure structure and is better classified in a dispensing art.

    In general the heading "miscellaneous" is restricted because at least one
    of the separation or segregation means mentioned in sub- sections (1) to
    (4) of this section of the class definition is actually present in most of
    the "special types" of article dispensers included in this class.

    Dispensers of the captive article type (subclasses 27+) and of the article
    orienting type (subclasses 156+) are classifiable in this class subject
    only to the general limitations of preceding subsections (1) to (4).
    Dispensers of the type in which flexible articles are distorted
    concurrently with their separation from the supply source (subclasses 33+)
    are similarly classifiable in this class subject to the general limitation
    of the subsections (1) to (4), it being noted that the underlying and
    characterizing feature of this entire group is expressed in the second
    paragraph of subsection (1). Dispensers of the type in which the supply
    container is movably mounted for dispensing (subclasses 186+) are
    characterized in that, in some cases, the relative movement required to
    effect release or ejection of articles is effected by movement of the
    supply container relative to releasing or discharge assisting means which
    may be stationary, such relative motion resulting in a mode of operation
    which fulfills the requirement of one of the subsections (1) to (4).

    II.     EXPLANATORY NOTES ON SCOPE OF CLASS

    This class is intended to provide a residual classification for the basic
    subject matter defined in Section I of this class definition and takes such
    subject matter where not otherwise provided for.

    This class also takes combinations of article dispensers with other subject
    matter not otherwise provided for.  In this connection it should be noted
    that the basic subject matter herein provided for is found in many other
    arts, including the manufacturing, material treating and material handling
    arts, as a subcombination, per se, and as an included part of more
    comprehensive combinations provided for in such classes.

    Sections IV and VII of this class definition specifically outline the
    relationships of this class to the various manufacturing, treating and
    handling classes and to other related classes and the statements of class
    lines contained therein is indicative of present classification and
    placement of art.

    It is contemplated that the various combination classes and related
    material handling classes will eventually be cleared of subcombinations
    which are within the class subject matter of this class as defined in
    section I of this definition. As such classes are cleared of such art the
    statement of the line between such classes and this class (221) will be
    altered to indicate the disposition of the art.

    III     DEFINITIONS OF TERMS USED

    DISCHARGE ASSISTANT

    Any means (other than the weight of the article alone) which affirmatively
    segregates, separates or moves an article from a supply to a point of
    egress.  All of the supply less one article may be moved to leave a
    segregated or separated article in discharge position or subject to further
    manipulation.

    DISCHARGE MEANS

    Any means which either (1) affirmatively segregates, separates or moves an
    article from a supply to a point of egress or (2) permits separation or
    segregation of articles by gravitational movement thereof.  A discharge
    means may be either a discharge assistant or a releaser.

    EJECTOR

    Any discharge assistant which acts directly upon an article or articles to
    be dispensed at any one operation to segregate or separate the same from
    the remainder of the supply.

    Followers are discharge assistants which are not included in this term
    since they exert force through the entire supply rather than directly on
    the articles to be dispensed.

    HOPPER

    A container, bin or receptacle for retaining a quantity of articles in a
    jumbled mass.

    OUTLET  CLOSURE

    A means associated with the egress opening of a dispenser which obstructs,
    inhibits, or prevents passage of articles out of the dispenser in one
    position, such means being down stream of the point of separation or
    segregation of the articles.

    RELEASER

    A means permitting segregation or separation of articles by unassisted
    gravitational movement thereof, supports or restraining means being
    rendered inoperative as to the articles to be dispensed and operative as to
    those to be retained, with return to the previous state after the
    dispensing operation.  Such means are permissive as distinguished from
    discharge assistants which are affirmative force applying means
    (compulsive).

    RESILIENT

    This term as used herein includes elastic means (spring form) and spring
    biased means as well.

    SOURCE  (SUPPLY SOURCE)

    Any means for supporting or retaining a quantity of articles either in an
    orderly fashion or arrangement or as a jumbled mass such as provided by a
    magazine, hopper, stack, compartment, container, bin or receptacle.

    STACK

    A single, contiguous, continuous, orderly sequence or linear arrangement of
    articles which may constitute an article supply or result from operation on
    articles previously disposed as a jumbled mass.

    IV.     ARTICLE TREATMENT OR MODIFICATION (INCLUDING ASSEMBLY)

    Article dispensers are found in all classes dealing with the manufacture or
    treatment of articles, and particularly in classes having feeding, magazine
    or article handling subclasses.  In general, the assignment of patents in
    manufacturing and article treating classes has been on the basis of the
    nondispensing operation, when the means or steps for performing the
    nondispensing operation are claimed in any detail.  When the means or steps
    for performing the nondispensing operation are not claimed or are claimed
    broadly assignment has been and will continue to be to the class taking the
    disclosed operation when magazine and work material or article feeding
    subclasses occur in such art class and are designated and defined to
    receive such patents.  Classes not having special subclasses of this type
    will continue to take article dispensers which are not claimed in
    significant combination with, or as structurally specifically adapted for,
    the machines or work of the art classes, only when such classes have large
    bodies of art on dispensing, per se.  In the absence of such large bodies
    of art or special subclasses of the type mentioned, classification is in
    the appropriate subclass of this class (221).

    Means or steps for performing the material modifying or treating operation
    are not considered to be claimed significantly when they are included only
    nominally or merely as a means for receiving or supporting a separated or
    segregated article.  Thus, inclusion of a holder, turret, arbor or receiver
    of some other nature, disclosed as an element of a work modifying or
    treating machine parts and/or their working relationship with one another
    are included, classification is in the appropriate work modifying or
    treating art.

    Many dispensers include means to manipulate articles after the segregation
    of articles from the supply, and such organizations are common as
    subcombinations of work modifying and treating combination disclosures.
    This class (221) takes article feeders under its class definition including
    subsequent manipulation to and from disclosed work stations where such work
    stations are included by name only. This class will also take article
    feeders including such manipulation of the work as is considered to involve
    simple movement of the article characteristic of general utility handling
    as distinguished from specialized work modifier feeding.  As examples, this
    class will take article feeders which bodily move articles along a
    rectilinear or a simple curved path, either continually or intermittently,
    towards or through the position of a nominally included tool.  However,
    movement of the tool, axial rotation of the articles for purposes other
    than segregation, orienting or mere handling, retrograde motion, combined
    oscillation and forwarding motion, and other complex motions of the
    articles having utility only in combination with a disclosed tool are
    excluded and devices having such motion are classified in the appropriate
    work modifying class.

    Class 221 provides for article feeding including delivery of articles to a
    claimed work holder or to a hold-down means (see subclasses 239 and 294).
    Subject to otherwise existing class lines, therefore, Class 221 will take
    such subject matter disclosed as a subcombination of an article modifying
    or treating combination.

    Article dispensing means within the class definition combined with a
    nominal work modifying machine and including a mere common drive or simple
    synchronization are included in this class.  But where a modifying machine
    is nominally included and there is some automatic intercontrol between the
    modifying machine and the dispenser, classification is in the appropriate
    work modifying class.

    (1)     Note.  Classes dealing with article treatment or modification are
    each subject to the general line note as expressed hereinabove in this
    section of the class definition.  In the SEARCH CLASS note, below, a
    specific statement of the class line indicating that this class (221) takes
    such subcombinations is an indication that the art class involved does not
    have subclasses relating to article feeders, per se, which are adapted to
    general article handling utility and does not contain an appreciable body
    of art relating to such subject matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, especially subclasses 809+ for magazines, supply
    means for assembling and disassembling apparatus.

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 124+, for cutlery combined with material
    holding means.

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, particularly subclass 47 for
    acetylene gas generators having means to feed carbid cartridges.

    53,     Package Making.  as between Classes 53 and 221, Class 221 takes
    article feeding subcombinations and combinations subject to the limitations
    of the class definition of Class 221.  See subclasses 384.1+ and 571+ of
    Class 53 for devices for dispensing and opening bags.

    62,     Refrigeration.  See the class definition of Class 62 for a
    statement of the line between the classes.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 138+ for glassworking apparatus for
    making electronic envelope headers, terminals, or stems including means to
    dispense parts thereto, and subclasses 146+ for means to feed diverse
    material to glassworking apparatus.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, particularly subclass 210 for
    loaders and unloaders for textile fluid treating apparatus.

    72,     Metal Deforming, for plastic deformation of metal combined with
    work and/or product feed.  As between Classes 72 and 221 takes article
    feeding subcombinations and combinations subject to the limitations of the
    class definition of Class 221.

    82,     Turning, particularly subclasses 124+ for lathes having work
    feeding and/or removing means included therewith.

    86,     Ammunition and Explosive-Charge Making, particularly subclasses 45+
    and 47+ for feeding devices and for cartridge packing including feeding
    devices, respectively.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 450.1, for an edible
    laminated product (e.g., pie, sandwich, etc.), making apparatus including
    means to feed edible preforms to an assembly or stacking station.

    100,    Presses, particularly subclasses 215+ for press structures having
    means to deposit material thereon and subclass 218 for means to eject
    material therefrom.  As between Classes 100 and 221, Class 221 takes
    article feeding subcombinations and combinations

    101,    Printing, particularly subclasses 11, 37, 40, 43, and 44, for
    special article feeding and delivering.

    112,    Sewing, particularly subclasses 106 and 113 for feeding devices in
    combination with article attaching machines.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 209+ for solid applicator type
    coating apparatus including work handling or work supporting means, and
    subclasses 500+ for coating apparatus including work holders or handling
    devices.  For a statement of the line between the classes see section IX of
    the class definition of Class 118.

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 74 for tube filling type of cigar or cigarette
    making machines with means to feed the tubes to be filled to such machines,
    and subclass 250.1 for article dispensers combined with cigar or cigarette
    end cutters.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, as between Classes 134 and
    221, Class 221 takes article feeding subcombinations and combinations
    subject to the limitations of the class definition of Class 221.  The line
    is also stated in the class definition of Class 134 in section (5).

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, particularly subclasses 248 to 250 for rotary
    bobbin delivering magazines.

    140,    Wireworking, subclasses 27, 38, 53, and 54 for magazine feeders for
    feeding slats, wire, etc.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 173+ for combinations of receiver dispensers and fluent material
    dispensers where the apparatus includes means for relating the dispensed
    receiver to the fluent material dispenser, and see section IV of the
    definition of that class (141).

    144,    Woodworking, particularly subclass 61 for match box filling
    machines; subclass 64 for hopper feed of match splints for filling, dipping
    and frames; subclass 66 for miscellaneous match splint feeding machines;
    and subclass 245 for blank feeders.

    164,    Metal Founding, in the various "work feeding" subclasses therein.

    199,    Type Casting, particularly subclasses 15+, 19+ and 44+ for type
    casting machines with magazines.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 48 for bead stringing.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclasses 107+, for magazine
    dispensing combined with apparatus to apply a member, e.g., nail.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 521 and 522+ for
    cutting followed by convolute winding of an elongated material.

    276,    Typesetting, for type setting apparatus with magazine type feeders,
    particularly subclasses 3, 4, 15, and 45.

    300,    Brush, Broom, and Mop Making, subclass 4 for brush making machines
    including tuft feeding means.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 578+ for paper feeding and see
    particularly subclasses 624+ for sheet magazine paper feeding to
    typewriting machines.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, particularly subclasses 72 and
    145+ for a milling machine including means for placing or removing a blank
    or work feeding means, respectively.

    413,    Sheet Metal Container Making, particularly subclass 70 for blank
    feeding.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 110+ for a machine for making a composite product in a molding
    cavity including means to feed preforms to the cavity.

    431,    Combustion, appropriate subclass for a residual combustion or
    igniting device. The combination of such device with an article dispenser
    of the type provided for in Class 221, is classified in Class 221, in
    subclasses 136+ thereof.

    451,    Abrading, particularly subclasses 331+ for a work feeder, per se,
    used for abrading.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, subclasses 164+ for distributors and feeders for articles of the
    type provided for therein and specialized for use in machine operations on
    such articles.  As between Class 470 and Class 221, Class 221 takes article
    feeding subcombinations and combinations subject to the limitations of the
    class definition of Class 221.

    V.      COMBINATIONS WITH THE SUBJECT MATTER OF OTHER CLASSES

    Combinations with article treatment or modification classes (including
    assembly) are fully treated in section IV.  Article dispensers involving
    article handling, assorting and/or orienting are considered to be species
    of article handling rather than combinations and are elsewhere treated (See
    sections VI and VII).

    Other combinations of the subject matter of this class with that of other
    classes are classified in this class when no other existing classification
    provides for such combinations.  It should be noted that the mere fact of
    the combination is not conclusive, since in many cases, the degree of
    inclusion of details of either the outside subject matter or the article
    dispenser has been and is now determinative of the classification.  The
    lines stated in the following Search Class note indicate, insofar as is
    known, the disposition of such combinations in other arts and therefore the
    degree to which this class (221) may provide for them.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 40 for razors claimed in combination with blade
    holding magazines.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, appropriate subclasses for
    exhibitors where no significant dispensing features are claimed, even
    though a dispenser is named as operating the exhibitor, and especially
    subclasses 380+, 476, 491+, and 508+ for exhibitors having display handling
    means in the nature of dispensers.  See the class definition of Class 40,
    which also states the line between the classes.

    42,     Firearms, various magazine subclasses for cartridge magazines and
    combinations thereof with guns.

    53,     Package Making, for butter and cheese cutters combined with plate
    dispensers.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses.  As between Classes
    221 and 73, the combination of an article dispenser and means to test some
    quality of the article other than its mere presence, is classified in
    appropriate subclasses of Class 73.  However, the mere inclusion, in an
    article dispenser, of means to sense the presence or absence of an article
    is properly classifiable in this class (221).

    89,     Ordnance, appropriate subclasses, for article feeding or dispensing
    structures specific to the purpose of the apparatus provided for in that
    class, and see specifically subclasses 33.01+ for subcombinations involving
    cartridge feeding to guns and for nominal combinations with such guns.
    Class 89, has its own article subcombination subclasses and as between
    Classes 221 and 89, Class 89 takes such subcombinations.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclass 504 for line carrying or
    filamentary material distributing projectiles.

    111,    Planting, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 34+ for
    dispensing devices combined with means for loosening the soil or forming
    cavities therein or otherwise treating the soil.  The class lines are set
    forth in the class definition of Class 111 and in (2) Note thereto.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, for signal structure combined with article
    dispensing where no significant dispensing features are claimed, even
    though a dispenser is named as operating the signal or indicator. Class 221
    takes combinations of dispensers under the class definition with signaling
    means except in such cases where the article dispensing means is not
    specifically defined and is claimed as associated with specific signal
    means.  See subclass 32 of Class 116 for devices for releasing
    identification tags on vehicle collision.

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, subclasses 45+ for projectile
    feeding magazines or mechanical projecting devices, and subclasses 51.1+
    for magazines operating to feed projectiles mechanically into position to
    be projected by other mechanical means. As between Class 221 and Class 124,
    subcombinations disclosed for use in a Class 124 combination remain in that
    class, since Class 124 has such magazine feeding subcombination subclasses.

    194,    Check-Actuated Control Mechanisms, for article dispensing devices
    having specific check-control mechanism.  The class lines of Class 194 are
    expressed in the class definition of that class (194), and particularly in
    (2) Note. thereof.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclasses 196, 600+ and cross
    reference art collection 931 for magazine type cartridge carriers.

    235,    Registers, appropriate subclasses, especially subclass 98, for
    registers combined with article dispensing means when the article
    dispensing means is not specifically defined and is claimed as associated
    with specific register structure.  When the article dispensing means is
    significantly or specifically claimed classification is in subclasses 2+
    and particularly in subclass 7 of this class (221).

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclasses 210+ for torpedo mechanism
    including torpedo feeders, subclasses 212+ providing for magazine type
    torpedo feeders in this combination.

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses for supports for article
    dispensers where the dispensing means is not significantly or specifically
    claimed. Casing or support structure is considered incidental to the basic
    subject matter of this class (221) and significant article dispensing
    combined with casing or support structure as provided for in subclasses
    282+ of Class 221.

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, for devices for projecting various
    aerial or surface projectiles, particularly subclasses 108+, 119+, 129, and
    317+; and for chance devices having dispensing features, see subclasses
    139+ and 144+.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, for cabinet and support structures
    adapted to house and support article dispensing devices and not including
    article dispensing features characteristic of this class (221).  See
    particularly subclasses 35+ for removal facilitating magazine type article
    containing cabinet structures.  The line between the classes is stated in
    section V of the class definition of Class 312.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 5 for electric lamps and discharge devices having electrode
    magazines.

    346,    Recorders, appropriate subclasses for recorder structure where no
    significant dispensing features are claimed even though a dispenser is
    named as operating the recorder.  This class (221) provides for the
    combination of recorder and article dispenser where the article dispenser
    is significantly or specifically claimed, (see subclass 2).

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 178+ for
    record changers and subclass 172 for stylus changers in sound recording and
    reproducing apparatus.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 360+ for magazine camera structure which
    feeds photographic plates to an exposure position.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, appropriate subclasses for apparatus
    wherein carriers are pneumatically dispatched between stations or
    terminals.  See particularly subclasses 108+ for 221 type dispensers which
    serve as intakes to fluid current conveyors.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclass 168 for marble runways, subclass
    403 for a cane for detonating explosives and  including a magazine for
    explosives, and subclass 475 for other toys having a dispenser.

    473,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclass 107 for a mechanical projector
    for a bowling ball.

    483,    Tool Changing, subclasses 58+ for a tool storage means combined
    with a tool transfer means which bodily moves a tool to or from the storage
    mean.



    VI.     ARTICLE AND MATERIAL HANDLING

    This class is the residual classification for the types of article handling
    defined as article dispensing in sections I and II. As such, it may be
    properly considered a species under generic article or material handling
    Class 214.  This class therefore, takes article handling of the dispensing
    type, as defined in sections I and II and in the combinations and special
    types set forth in sections IV, V  and VII, subject to the limitations and
    class line notes of the aforementioned sections, where it is not otherwise
    provided for.

    This class includes combinations of dispensing as defined in sections I and
    II with means to further handle or manipulate the segregated articles
    subsequent to the separation from the source of supply, where such
    subsequent handling or manipulation is not otherwise provided for.  In this
    connection attention is directed to subclasses 171+, 290+ and particularly
    subclasses 224+ of this class.  This subject matter is related to article
    treatment or modification combination disclosures and is fully treated in
    section IV of this class definition.

    The following SEARCH CLASS note lists known loci of related article and
    material handling art.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    111,    Planting, subclasses 104+ for a plant dispenser claimed in
    combination with a plant setting machine; and subclasses 170+ for seed
    dispensers claimed in combination with drilling machines.

    186,    Merchandising, subclasses 38+ and 52+, respectively, for article
    dispensers combined with or included in dining room or store service
    combinations.

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, subclasses 32 and 40
    for chutes having means for retarding the velocity of articles therein,
    which means may release the articles successively.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 311, 359+, and 523+ for a
    power-driven conveyor combined with a gravity conveyor such as a hopper or
    chute; subclass 373 for a conveyor having means for changing the attitude
    of the conveyed load relative to the conveying direction; subclass 418 for
    a system of plural conveyors for establishing and moving a group of items;
    and subclass 434 for a system of plural conveyors of arranging or
    rearranging a stream or streams of items.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses, for fluent material dispensing
    devices and see the class definition of that class (222) and the notes
    thereto for the disposition of other fluent material handling disclosures.
    The line between Class 221 and Class 222, is as follows:


    (a)     Article Dispensers for Class 221 are arrangements to dispense
    articles one at a time, or a definite number less than the total available
    at the source of supply at a time.  Where the dispenser handles articles in
    heterogeneously intermingled bulk and dispenses them in bulk without regard
    to their shape or relative position the dispenser is considered to be a
    fluent material dispenser and is classified in Class 222.  Where the
    dispenser has features specialized to engage the discharged articles as
    individual units as by gripping, impaling, etc., or is otherwise
    structurally limited to the handling of discrete articles (e.g., orienting)
    the dispenser is classified as an article dispenser in Class 221.

    (b)     The trap chamber or segregating chamber type of dispenser, even
    though disclosed only for dispensing a single article, is not classified as
    an article dispenser in the case where the trap is a closed trap of a type
    from which fluent material could not escape where there is nothing special
    to the shape of the trap relative to the shape of a single article, and
    where no other feature specific to the handling of articles is included.
    All other segregating chamber type dispensers are classified in Class 221,
    on the basis of the disclosure that a discrete article or group of articles
    is dispensed.

            The dispensing by trap chamber discharge assisting means, of
    elongated (cylindrical) articles which have been prearranged according to
    one axis thereof, is considered to be subject matter for Class 221 even
    though the trap chamber used to dispense such articles is a closed chamber.

    (c)     Dispensers capable of use with either articles or fluent material
    of granular, plastic, or liquid forms are classified in Class 222, that
    class being generic to the concept of the two classes. Dispensing devices
    involving material guiding means and outlet means of a type adapted to
    handling either articles or fluent material and not including any other
    feature to clearly indicate classification in either of Classes 221 and 222
    are considered to present a special problem.  Class 221 takes such
    apparatus when it is disclosed for use with discrete articles and when the
    disclosed arrangements are such that the articles are previously arranged
    at least as to one dimension.  As examples, cylindrical articles with their
    lengths reposed in one direction, or pills in a flat pill box of a
    thickness smaller than the largest dimension of the pills, having claimed
    interior guide means and outlet means are proper subject matter for Class
    221.  Class 222 takes similar dispensing apparatus where there is no such
    disclosed or claimed arrangement of the articles.

    (d)     Article dispensers of the types provided for in this class (221),
    claimed in combination with fluent material dispensers of the type provided
    for in Class 222 are classified in this class (221). See subclass 96 of
    Class 221 for such subject matter.

    226,    Advancing Material and Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.  As between
    Class 221 and Class 226 it should be noted that Class 226 is limited to the
    handling of indeterminate-lengths and that if there is a claimed source of
    supply of a plurality of lengths of  material, the lengths of the pieces
    must be considered to be determinate and classification is in Class 221 if
    the process or apparatus is under the definition of Class 221.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, for apparatus for forming stacks of
    sheets and for apparatus for delivering sheets from a stack to a point of
    use.

    453,    Coin Handling, particularly subclasses 1+ and 18+ for various coin
    dispensers.  The line between the classes is stated in (5) Note of the
    class definition of Class 453.

    483,    Tool Changing, subclasses 58+ for a tool storage means combined
    with a tool transfer means which bodily moves a tool to or from the storage
    mean.


    VII.    ARTICLE ASSORTING AND/OR ORIENTING

    Article handling, as defined in sections I and II of this class definition,
    including means to arrange or align asymmetric articles so that the
    variations for symmetry are all turned (oriented) in a desired direction,
    is considered to be a special type of article dispensing and is included in
    this class, in subclasses 156+, unless otherwise provided for.

    Orienting, when separation from a supply as provided for in this class is
    involved, is distinguishable from assorting, which is generally provided
    for in Class 209, Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, in that
    assorting involves the separation of articles one from the other based upon
    an actual physical difference of such articles, while orienting deals with
    similar articles (asymmetric in nature) on the basis of the alignment of
    one or more axes of the articles.  Class 221 includes both the separation
    of articles from the supply on the basis of the different relative
    orientation of articles in a confused mass, so that only articles having a
    desired position are separated, and also the orienting of articles as a
    manipulation following dispensing of the type provided for in this class
    and Class 222.

    When a construction or claims are generic to assorting and orienting, as
    when oversize or improperly positioned articles are both prevented from
    passing through shaped outlets, classification is in Class 209.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 373+ for a conveyor having
    means for changing the attitude of the conveyed load relative to the
    conveying direction, particularly subclasses 393 and 396+ for the
    withdrawal of articles from a scrambled supply; and subclass 395 for a
    control means responsive to the sensing of an improperly oriented item,
    234+, for a device for orienting articles in the seriatim progress along
    the conveyor; compare the subclasses 171+ in this instant class (221).

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 509+ for
    assorting devices including article feeding or discharging.  The
    distinction between orienting and assorting is set forth in the second
    paragraph of this section (VII) of the class definition of this class
    (221).  Processes and apparatus for feeding or dispensing articles will be
    classified in Class 209 when claimed in combination with assorting means
    provided for in Class 209, or when generic to assorting and orienting by
    disclosure.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclasses 107+, for apparatus
    for arranging and feeding loose member, e.g., nails, combined with
    apparatus to apply a member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    287,    for device or for a structural arrangement for the oriented
    withdrawal of articles from random supply (compare with subclasses 163+ in
    this instant class); and, 288+, for a device for eliminating the
    misoriented one of seriatim advancing articles (typically, returning them
    to the random supply), leaving only those properly oriented on the conveyor
    for continued advance; compare with subclasses 159+ in this instant class
    (221).


    VIII.   RECEPTACLES, CABINETS, RACKS AND
            OTHER STATIC STRUCTURES

    This class is the residual classification for the types of article
    dispensing identified in sections I and II of this class definition.
    Therefore, relative to the package, receptacle, cabinet, rack and static
    structure arts, this class takes dispensing structures, unless the
    existence in one of such classes of a body of art or of a subclass directed
    to similar dispensing means indicates that the particular dispensing
    structure is classified there.  In this connection particular attention is
    directed to subsection (2) of section I, C of this class definition for a
    discussion of static structures and the nature of the structural variations
    therein which are considered to be characteristic of article dispensing.

    If a closure means does not, of itself, incorporate a feature requiring
    classification in this class (as set forth in sections I and II) its
    presence or absence does not affect classification as between this class
    and the appropriate receptacle class.  See the final paragraph of section
    I, C (1) of this class definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, appropriate subclasses for a
    container particularly configured to hold a specific article or material.
    Class 206 also provides for any container including an article (s) or
    material (s) put up as a mercantile unit.  Although some subclasses in
    Class 206 (e.g., 233) have "dispensing" titles, Class 221 takes article
    dispensers identifiable as such according to sections I and II of this
    (221) class definition the "dispensers" for fluent material or articles in
    Class 206 do not come within the class limitation of Class 221.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, appropriate subclasses for rack structures
    designed to support articles.  For a statement of the line between the
    classes, see the class definition of Class 211.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, appropriate subclasses for bottle and jar
    receptacle structures.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, appropriate subclasses for wooden receptacle
    structures.

    220,    Receptacles, appropriate subclasses for metallic receptacle
    structures.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 424.5, 454+ and 457, for fluent material
    dispensers provided with stationary structures defining trap chambers and
    subclass 564 for such dispensers having static interior material guide
    means or restricting means.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes subclass 122.1 for a
    paperboard box intended to permit removal of articles gravity fed to the
    egress opening, even if the lead article must be lifted over a llp to be
    withdrawn. The inclusion of dispensing fractures recited in section I, C,
    of this class definition would result in classification in this Class 221,
    Article Dispensing.

    232,    Deposit and Collection Receptacles, appropriate subclasses, for
    deposit and collection receptacles.  Unless a body of dispensing art exists
    in a special use subclass in Class 232, to indicate the existence of a home
    for a particular type of article dispenser, classification of deposit and
    collection receptacles embodying recognized dispensing features is in Class
    221.

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses, for supports, per se, and in
    combination with the devices supported thereby, when the latter are
    nominally included. Class 221 provides for the specific combination in
    subclasses 45+ and 282+.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, appropriate subclasses for cabinet
    structures for holding articles, not including dispensing features.  See
    especially subclasses 35+ for magazine type cabinet structures having
    article removal facilitating means.  The line between Classes 312 and 221
    is stated in section V of the class definition of Class 312.

     483,   Tool Changing, subclasses 58+ for a tool storage means combined
    with a tool transfer means.


    IX.     INDEX TO CLASSES REFERRED TO IN THIS CLASS

    SECTION OF CLASS

    CLASS   DEFINITION      SUBCLASSES

    24                      210

    29      IV

    30      IV, V           30, 214, 232

    40      V               2

    42      V

    44                      136, 137

    48      IV

    51      IV

    53      IV              33

    62      IV

    65      IV

    68      IV

    72      IV

    73      V

    74                      243

    81                      30

    82      IV

    86      IV

    88      V

    89      V

    99      IV

    100     IV

    101     IV

    102     V

    109                     154

    111     V

    112     IV

    116     V               2, 3, 4

    118     IV

    124     V

    131     IV              136

    132                     33, 135

    133     IV

    134     VI

    137                     4, 5, 243

    139     IV

    140     IV

    141     IV              96

    144     IV

    146     IV              25, 156

    156                     73

    161     V

    164     IV              25

    186     VI

    193     VI, VII         156, 157

    194     V

    198     I(4), VI,VII            77, 156, 210,

                            212, 213, 218,

                            243, 253

    199     IV
    206     VIII            49, 136, 246

    209     IV, VII         156, 213

    211     VIII            26, 27, 113

    215     VIII

    216     IV              210

    217     VIII

    219                     136, 143

    220     I(4), VIII              302

    222     VI, VIII                1, 2, 3, 4, 5,
                            7, 9, 15, 17,
                            24, 25, 30, 31,
                            46, 61, 64, 92,
                            96, 97, 113,
                            115, 123, 126,
                            129, 133, 135,
                            150, 154, 155,
                            174, 183, 185,
                            186, 188, 191,
                            197, 198, 200,
                            201, 202, 203,
                            204, 206, 208,
                            213, 224, 225,
                            226, 233, 236,
                            237, 238, 243,
                            244, 245, 247,
                            252, 253, 255,
                            258, 260, 262,
                            263, 265, 266,
                            268, 270, 272,
                            276, 277, 278,
                            279, 281, 282,
                            283, 284, 286,
                            287, 288, 289,
                            295, 298, 299,
                            302, 303, 312

    223     IV

    224     V               185

    225                     25, 26

    226     VI              71

    227     IV, VII

    229     VIII            305

    232     VIII            102

    235     V               7

    242     IV

    246     V

    248     V, VIII         282, 283

    251                     243

    270                     112, 175

    271     VI              33

    273     V

    276     IV

    294     IV              210, 211, 212

    300     IV

    312     I(5), V, VIII           27, 33, 70, 113,
                            119, 136, 150,
                            221, 279, 282,
                            297

    314     V

    340                     2, 3

    346     V               2

    354     V

    361                     136

    369     V

    400     IV

    409     IV

    414                     174, 224

    425     IV

    431     IV              136, 148

    432                     150

    446     V               24

    453     VI

    470     IV              179

    483     V, VI, VIII


CLS 221/1
TXT Processes under the class definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 1 for processes for dispensing fluent
    materials.


CLS 221/2
TXT Dispensers under the class definition having (1) signals, indicators,
    registers, recorders or gauges for indicating a condition, or the position
    of a dispenser part such devices consisting of relatively movable
    changeable, or audible information giving parts, or (2) changeable indicia
    bearing or display devices which are operable by the movement of dispenser
    parts.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this subclass there must be either an
    indicia or audible signal of some type. Relative to visual indicia, there
    must be graduations or markings in the disclosure as claimed and, for
    display devices, some visual indication, sign or disposition of material
    (other than the source of supply).  Where it is indicated that the mere
    position of a dispenser part is indicative of a condition of the dispenser,
    classification is in the appropriate subclass below unless some cooperating
    indicia are included.  A mere transparent viewing means is not considered
    to be a signal, indicator or display device in the absence of indicia, and
    such dispensers are classified in subclass 155 of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155,    see (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, appropriate subclass for
    exhibitors where no significant dispensing features are claimed, and see
    the reference to that class in section V of the class definition of this
    class (221).

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclasses for signal structure
    combined with article dispensing where no significant dispensing features
    are claimed even though a dispenser is named as operating the signal or
    indicator.  See section V of the class definition of this class (221) for a
    statement of the class lines.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 23+ for similar combinations in fluent
    material dispensers, and see the notes thereto.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+ for electrical
    automatic condition responsive condition indicating systems.


CLS 221/3
TXT Devices under subclass 2 in which the condition indicating device emits a
    sound which is capable of being heard.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclasses 137+, 147 and 148+ for audible signals and indicators.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 39, for fluent material dispensers having
    audible signals.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 384.1+ for electrical
    audible signals or alarms.


CLS 221/4
TXT Devices under subclass 2 having means giving information as to the position
    or range of motion of a movable or adjustable dispenser element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 200+ for scale and pointer
    combinations.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 553+ for fluid handling systems having
    position or extent of motion indicators.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 41+ for similar combinations in fluent
    material dispensers.


CLS 221/5
TXT Dispensers under subclass 4 in which the position or range of motion of the
    dispenser element indicates a selection from one of a plurality of articles
    or of sources of supply of articles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92+,    for devices for dispensing articles from plural sources and not
    including selection indicating means, particularly subclasses 119+ and 123+
    which involve combinations in which means for selecting from plural sources
    is usually present.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 555 for fluid handling systems having
    means for indicating selection from among plural branches.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 42 for fluent material dispensers having means
    for indicating selection from plural outlets, valves, or traps.


CLS 221/6
TXT Devices under subclass 2 in which the condition indicated is the depletion
    of articles in the supply receptacle.


CLS 221/7
TXT Devices under subclass 2 having an information device of the type which
    counts and gives an indication or total of the number of occurrences of
    some function of the apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 23+ for fluent material dispensing devices
    having recorders, registers, indicators, signals or exhibitors associated
    therewith, and especially subclasses 24 and 27 which relate specifically to
    such combinations including register means.

    235,    Registers, appropriate subclasses for register structure where no
    significant article dispensing features are claimed, even though an article
    dispenser is named as operating the register.


CLS 221/8
TXT Devices under subclass 2 having changeable indicia bearing or display
    devices which are operable by the movement of dispenser parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4+,     for article dispensers in which a changeable indicia bearing device
    which is a part of the dispenser indicates a condition by its position.

    155,    for dispensers having transparent inspecting or viewing means
    permitting observance of the dispenser operation or contents.

    199,    for display devices combined with article dispensers when the
    display devices do not indicate a dispenser condition or are not activated
    by dispenser operation.


CLS 221/9
TXT Article dispensers under the class definition having means to sense a
    condition (or absence thereof) or a change of condition, which condition
    may or may not change, said means causing operation or control of a
    separate device for effecting a control function on the dispenser.

    (1)     Note.  Machines which operate on a repeating cycle of operation are
    not considered to be "automatic" even though they are often so designated
    in the art, unless there are included means sensitive to conditions subject
    to change, from cycle to cycle, and separate means controlled thereby to
    effect a control function on the machine.  Thus, a machine including means
    to sense condition changes which necessarily take place to the same degree
    at the same time in each cycle of operation are not included in this
    subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Where the means responsive to condition change directly
    effect a control function, i.e., where the sensing and the control means
    are the same instrumentality, the device has been considered to be
    condition responsive rather than automatic in the sense intended in this
    and the indented subclasses.  See subclasses 17+, 21, 22+, 107+, and 151+,
    for example.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17+,    see (2) Note above.

    21,     see (2) Note above.

    22+,    see (2) Note above.

    107+,   see (2) Note above.

    151+,   see (2) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 52+ for fluent material dispensing devices
    having automatic control means, and see the notes thereto.

    235,    Registers, subclasses 379, 380, 381, and 383 for banking and credit
    card systems and mechanized stores, respectively, wherein either money or
    merchandise is released upon the sensing of a valid credit card and
    including means to debit the account of the individual receiving the money
    or merchandise.


CLS 221/10
TXT Devices under subclass 9 in which the device which is operated or
    controlled is a means for feeding of replacement articles to the supply
    container of the dispensing device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66,     for nonautomatic article dispensers in which a replacement article
    must be inserted as an incident to the removal of the leading article.

    68,     for nonautomatic devices having hopper feed means to supply plural
    dispensing stacks.

    174,    for nonautomatic devices having means to feed a supply or articles
    to a dispensing hopper.


CLS 221/11
TXT Devices under subclass 10 in which the condition sensed is the depletion of
    articles in a supply portion which is a single, continuous orderly sequence
    or linear arrangement of such articles and the feeding is one which
    operates to cause another similarly arranged new supply portion of articles
    to become available to be dispensed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103+,   for similar devices not including the automatic feature.


CLS 221/12
TXT Devices under subclass 9 in which the device which is operated is a gate
    member which is removable or interposable in the path of the articles as
    they are dispensed.


CLS 221/13
TXT Devices under subclass 9 in which the device which is operated or
    controlled is a means to affirmatively segregate, separate or move the
    articles from a supply source toward a point of egress.


CLS 221/14
TXT Devices under subclass 13 in which the condition sensed is the lack of
    articles in the supply source receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for similar devices including empty supply source indicating means.

    110,    for plural source article dispensing devices in which the discharge
    assistant to a succeedingly available stack is directly actuated by means
    responsive to the depletion of supply of a previous stack.


CLS 221/15
TXT Article dispensers under the class definition having means which
    substantially limits or retards the period of operation of a discharging
    means or the period between successive operations of a discharging means to
    a predetermined time interval.

    (1)     Note.  Devices in which the time for complete cycles of operation
    is predetermined solely by the speed at which the actuator for the
    discharging means is operated are excluded and are classified in
    appropriate subclasses below.  However, the specific provision of structure
    having the disclosed function of causing a pause or retardation of motion
    during a portion of each cycle is included.  The provision for lost motion
    in an actuating linkage is not considered to be delay mechanism within the
    meaning of this subclass definition, it being required for classification
    here that some structure other than the actuating linkage or mechanism
    itself be provided to cause and/or control a time delay in the operation of
    the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243,    for lost motion arrangements in the actuating means for the
    discharge assistants of article dispensing devices and see the search notes
    thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 638+ for fluent material dispensers having
    timing or delay mechanism and see the notes thereto for further related
    search fields; and see also subclass 477 for fluent material dispensers
    having means for retarding the normal rate of operation of discharge
    controllers or closures.


CLS 221/16
TXT Devices under subclass 15 in which the means which affects discharge of the
    articles is braked or retarded by a fluid damping or checking device.


CLS 221/17
TXT Article dispensers under the class definition having means which senses
    depletion of the entire source of supply and in which the same means
    directly effects control of the actuation of an article segregating means
    or of a supply receptacle locking or unlocking function.

    (1)     Note.  Those devices having a plurality of stacks or sources of
    supply and having means to feed from a subsequent stack or source upon
    depletion of the initial source are not considered to have means responsive
    to depletion of the entire supply and are not classified in this or
    indented subclasses unless means responsive to depletion of the final stack
    or source are also included.  Such subject matter is classified in
    subclasses 103+, and especially in subclass 108.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for similar devices including empty supply source indicating means.

    11      and 14, for article dispensers having means responsive to the
    depletion of a stack or the entire supply, respectively, having separate
    means controlled thereby to effect a control or a cut-off of the dispenser.

    103+,   and especially 108+.  See (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 64+, for fluent material dispensers having
    material level control means and particularly subclasses 65 and 66 for full
    and/or empty interlocks and empty container cut-offs, respectively.


CLS 221/18
TXT Devices under subclass 17 in which the sensing means directly acts to
    prevent or preclude movement of discharging means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    for plural source dispensing devices having separate discharge
    means for each source and lockout means to inhibit motion or operation of
    the discharge means of nonselected sources.

    151+,   for article dispensers having means for blocking or disabling the
    ejector or releaser means thereof but not involving an empty supply source
    responsive means.


CLS 221/19
TXT Devices under subclass 18 in which the motion inhibiting sensing means is a
    catch type fastening or holding means which acts to inhibit motion of the
    discharge means in response to the empty supply source condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    for article dispensers having means for blocking or disabling the
    ejector or releaser thereof by engagement with a slot, notch or
    protuberance on such ejector or releaser.


CLS 221/20
TXT Devices under subclass 19 in which an element of the catch type fastening
    or holding means is on a discharge assistant of the type which applies a
    force which is exerted through all of the articles tending to move the
    entire supply in the direction of the egress opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for dispensers for flexible articles having a follower, and a
    replenishment interlock in the form of a means to fasten or hold the
    follower in retracted position while refilling the source of supply.

    227,    for article dispensers having follower disabling, retracting or
    releasing means, neither of the aforementioned subclasses including devices
    involving empty supply source responsive means.


CLS 221/21
TXT Article dispensers under the class definition having means which senses
    failure of a dispenser to perform a desired function properly and directly
    effects stopping of the operation of the dispenser or effects a correction
    of the  improperly performed function by the operation of auxiliary means
    or by changing the mode of operation of the dispenser.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17+,    for similar devices in which the failure of the dispenser to
    perform is due to the complete depletion of the source of supply.

    243,    for lost motion devices in actuators for discharge assistant type
    dispensers and for yieldable confining means for the contents to provide
    for relief or escape of articles which have been segregated from a supply
    and see the search notes thereto for relief of jamming and over-supply
    conditions in handling devices generally.


CLS 221/22
TXT Article dispensers under the class definition having article segregating
    means so associated with a supply source receptacle that the removal of a
    previously segregated article from the device is effective to activate the
    segregating means to act directly on the next available article in the
    supply receptacle to segregate it from the supply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38      and 47+, for dispensers in which interleaved flexible articles are
    concurrently separated and distorted and in which by virtue of the
    interleaving, the leading fold of a subsequent article is pulled from the
    supply receptacle by movement of the first article.

    66,     for devices in which article delivery is dependent upon the
    insertion of a replacement article.  These patents are distinguished from
    the patents in this subclasses 22+ in that the former do not have
    segregating means (other than, or in addition to the articles themselves)
    which act on the second article as the first article is removed.


CLS 221/23
TXT Devices under subclass 22 in which the segregating means is one which
    applies an affirmative segregating force to the article and is activated by
    an affirmative force applied thereto by the previously segregated article
    in the course of removal of said article from the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for similar devices in which the removal of the leading article is
    sensed by means which in turn actuate separate control means for a
    discharge assistant.


CLS 221/24
TXT Article dispensers under the class definition having claimed features of
    external configuration which imitate or assume the appearance of some
    object.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 78+ for fluent material dispensers with
    special object simulating configurations.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 268+ for a figure toy which
    may include a dispenser (e.g., egg-laying chicken), and subclass 475 for
    other article dispensing toys.


CLS 221/25
TXT Article dispensers under the class definition in which the source of supply
    of articles is a continuous carrying or conveying means which is in the
    form of a structure by which material is removably retained in or on such
    structure by individual compartment or holding means, such compartment or
    holding means being (a) a separate means affixed to the carrying or
    conveying means or (b) being formed in or by elements of the carrying or
    conveying means, and in which the carrying or means, in either case, is
    progressively demolished as by detachment of sections thereof, so that the
    detached sections of the compartment or carrying means with the contained
    material and/or separate means is dispensed as a discrete article.

    (1)     Note.  Demolishment, in the sense in which it is used in this
    definition means complete destruction so that the cell structure cannot be
    reused. Examples of types elsewhere classified in this class in which the
    cell structure has relatively movable compartments which are removable to
    collapse the structure to release the articles are to be found in
    subclasses 70+ and 84+, and especially in subclasses 86 and 89+.

    (2)     Note.  The demolishment must be by virtue of the action of or by
    cooperation with structure provided for the performance of such a function.
    Receptacle structure adapted to be destroyed solely by the application of
    manual force is classified in the appropriate receptacle art.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70+,    see (1) Note above.

    84+,    see (1) Note above.

    86,     see (1) Note above.

    89+,    see (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 80+ for fluent material dispensing devices
    having means to cut or punch the supply container.

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, appropriate subclasses, for
    devices having fixed blades for dispensing web or strand material from a
    supply source by manually tearing portions of the material thereagainst.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 340+ for device for feeding and cutting web
    or sheet material.


CLS 221/26
TXT Article dispensers under the class definition having means associated with
    the supply receptacle which either (1) pass through the articles so that
    the articles must be severed or deformed to be removed or (2) clamp a
    portion of the articles so that the portion to be removed must be torn from
    the retained portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27+,    for captive article type article dis- pensing devices which are
    similar in construction but in which the article is not permanently removed
    from the source of supply but remains associated therewith.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 54.1 and 57.1 for racks having
    impaling means upon which articles are supported.

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, subclass 106 for web or strand
    dispensers with means to restrain the web so as to create a stress when the
    work is pulled to effect a severance of the work at a weakened zone.


CLS 221/27
TXT Article dispensers under the class definition in which the articles are
    retained in position on an element of the supply container or on a support
    associated therewith so that they cannot be separated therefor, the
    articles being removed from the supply source or receptacle, used and left
    in an attached state, in the normal use of the device.

    (1)     Note.  It is considered that removability of an entire supply
    source or stack with or from the element to which the articles are attached
    for replacing stacks of used articles is a normal incident to the subject
    matter of this subclass and does not preclude classification herein.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is not intended to take devices which hold
    captive only a part of an article, allowing a portion to be removed (as the
    contents of a captive receptacle).  The entire article must be made
    available for use and remain attached to the supply source.  Devices for
    feeding captive bottles, opening and dumping them are classified in Class
    312, in subclasses 35 and 36.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for structures which are similar but in which the article is torn
    or deformed and actually disconnected permanently from the source of supply
    when it is separated therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 6 and 16 for racks designed to hold a
    supply of towels locked thereon.  This class (Class 221) takes such
    structures combined with dispensing means.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 34.1+ for similar
    combinations not including a dispensing feature but including cabinet
    structure.  See also subclasses 35 and 36 in connection with (2) Note above.


CLS 221/28
TXT Devices under subclass 27 having affirmative means to withdraw or move the
    captive articles from the station or location at which they are used after
    having been dispensed.


CLS 221/29
TXT Devices under subclass 27 in which the articles are locked on a supporting
    guide in such a manner that the entire article may be moved relative to the
    guide in a direction along the guide.


CLS 221/30
TXT Article dispensers under the class definition having means in addition to
    the supply container or its wrapping to pierce, slit, rupture or otherwise
    penetrate or sever the material of which said supply container or its
    wrapping is constructed by passing from one side of said material to the
    other.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this group to be proper there must be
    a dispensing feature present. Cutters and/or punches, per se, are
    classified in appropriate other arts, as Class 30, Cutlery and Class 81,
    Tools, for example.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for cutters cooperating with cellular magazine type supply sources
    which are used to sever and thereby destroy the said magazine.

    26,     for article dispensers in which an article supporting element
    passes through the article so that the article must be torn to be moved.

    135+,   for dispensers combined with means for cutting or punching articles
    as an article treatment or modification, when no other existing
    classification provides for such subject matter.

    213+,   for discharge assistants including means to impale articles to hold
    them while assisting the discharge thereof from a source of supply.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, see (1) Note above.

    81,     Tools, see (1) Note above.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 80+ for fluent material dispensers including
    cutter or punch means.


CLS 221/31
TXT Devices under subclass 30 in which the cutting or punching means acts on
    the supply container or its wrapping to form an article egress opening.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 80+ for similar devices for fluent material
    dispensers, and particularly subclasses 81+.  See the search notes to
    subclass 80 for related fields of search.


CLS 221/32
TXT Devices under subclass 31 in which the cutting means is in the form of a
    piece of flexible strip material in addition to the supply container or its
    wrapping but so related thereto that movement of the strip rips or tears
    the supply container or its wrapping.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302,    for article dispensers having frangible elements for the outlets
    and not including the breaking or cutting means, the distinction being that
    in patents classified in that subclass, frangibility may be due to
    weakening of the material of the supply container or its wrapping rather
    than to the presence of another attached element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 200+ for
    severing means for opening a paperboard box.


CLS 221/33
TXT Article dispensers under the class definition for dispensing articles,
    which by nature are capable of changing shape and having means effective to
    cause a change in the shape of such articles simultaneously with the
    segregation thereof from a supply source.

    (1)     Note.  Many devices which are disclosed for dispensing articles
    which by nature are deformable are in fact of such structure as to be
    equally well adapted to dispense rigid articles.  Patents are not placed in
    this and the indented subclasses unless the mode of operation of the
    claimed structure is such that the deformation of the dispensed article
    must occur as an incident to separation from the supply.

    (2)     Note.  Articles which are distorted from their normal shape for
    storage in a dispensing magazine and assume their normal shape upon being
    separated from the magazine due to their inherent resilience are here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 384.1+ and 571+ for devices for
    dispensing and opening flexible bags.

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 330+ for "bobbypin" and "hairpin" dispensers
    combined with means for separating or spreading the pin as by wedging
    action concurrently with the dispensing thereof.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, appropriate subclasses for sheet
    feeding or delivering devices having similar structures and modes of
    operation, for feeding sheets from a stack to a point of use.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 50+ for cabinet structures
    having article removal facilitating means especially adapted for stacked
    cards or sheets.


CLS 221/34
TXT Devices under subclass 33 having, for concurrently separating and
    distorting flexible articles.

    (1)     one or more additional article dispensing devices of either similar
    or dissimilar nature

    (2)     one or more additional receptacles or compartments for receiving
    material or articles, or

    (3)     a jacket surrounding the article dispenser and spaced therefrom, at
    least impart, to provide a material or article receiving space.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is parallel to subclasses 92+ and the
    explanatory and search notes to that subclass apply to searches made herein
    insofar as they are applicable to particular search problems relating to
    details of plural  compartment devices involving the concurrent separation
    and distortion of flexible articles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92+,    see (1) Note above.


CLS 221/35
TXT Devices under subclass 34 in which there are an even number of dispensers
    for concurrently separating and distorting articles and in which the
    article egress outlets are disposed as pairs which open diametrically away
    from one another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for plural source alternately operated general type dispensers
    having oppositely faced outlets.


CLS 221/36
TXT Devices under subclass 33 having discharge assisting means which directly
    engages and applies a force to the article being separated to distort said
    article and force it from the source of supply towards or through an egress
    outlet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208+,   appropriate indented subclasses for general type article dispensers
    having discharge assisting means of a similar nature.


CLS 221/37
TXT Devices under subclass 36 in which the supply source container is a
    receptacle having at least one movable wall portion and this portion is so
    connected to the discharge assisting means that, in the normal operation of
    the device, movement of the wall portion results in operation of the
    discharge assistant to discharge an article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229,    for general type article dispensers including followers, in which
    movement of a supply container closure section causes operation of an
    ejector.

    246,    for general type dispensers in which articles are segregated by
    sliding movement of the cover relative to the supply container.

    249,    for general type article dispensers in which movement of an outlet
    closure results in movement of an ejecting member.

    269,    for general type article dispensers having reciprocating discharge
    assistants and integral outlet closure means connected thereto.


CLS 221/38
TXT Devices under subclass 36 for dispensing flexible articles which are each
    bent upon themselves at least once, and in which such articles are stacked
    in such a manner as to have the resulting bent portions interfolded with
    one another, the discharge assisting means acting on the leading fold of
    the leading article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240,    for general type article dispensers in which discharge assistants
    act on folds or noncoextensive parts of the articles to be dispensed.


CLS 221/39
TXT Devices under subclass 36 having means, either apart from, or incorporated
    in the discharge assisting means for moving the article in a direction away
    from the egress opening before urging it toward the egress opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for similar dispensers for flexible articles in which the ejector
    has compound motion.


CLS 221/40
TXT Devices under subclass 36 in which the discharge assistant partakes of more
    than one character of motion, either simultaneously or successively, in the
    normal operation thereof, to discharge articles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for similar dispensers for flexible articles having means imparting
    a preliminary motion in a direction away from the outlet.

    262,    for general type article dispensers in which the discharge
    assistants have compound motion, and see the notes thereto.


CLS 221/41
TXT Devices under subclass 36 having deflecting means for altering the
    direction of travel of the leading edges of articles as they are forced to
    the egress outlet by the discharge assistant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for similar dispensers for flexible article having stationary guide
    or abutment means acting on noncoextensive folds but not including ejecting
    means in the combination.

    312,    for general type article dispensers having interior article guiding
    means and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 221/42
TXT Devices under subclass 36 in which the discharge assistant has movement
    about a fixed axis in one direction only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277,    for general type dispensers having rotary discharge assistants, and
    see the search notes to that subclass.


CLS 221/43
TXT Devices under subclass 42 in which the discharge assistant is an element of
    circular cross-section which has peripheral surface contact with the
    articles to assist their movement to an egress outlet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259,    for general type dispensers which use surface contact discharge
    assisting means.


CLS 221/44
TXT Devices under subclass 33 in which the dispenser or some portion thereof is
    so constructed that the dispenser is capable of selective use with articles
    of different proportions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241+,   for general type article dispensers having size adjusting means,
    and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 221/45
TXT Devices under subclass 33 having either (1) an outer covering enclosing the
    dispenser or the supply receptacle in whole or in part or (2) particular
    means for maintaining a dispenser unit or entity against the force of
    gravity, such means being more than the mere means of sustaining one part
    of the device relative to another or mere nominal base or pedestal means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282+,   for general type article dispensers having casings or supports and
    see the notes to subclass 282 for a discussion of the nature of the subject
    matter involved and for other related search fields.


CLS 221/46
TXT Devices under subclass 45 in which the supply receptacle is so related to a
    surrounding enclosure or to the specific supporting structure that it is at
    least partially displaceable therefrom for refilling or replacement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for refill packages and see the notes thereto regarding the
    distinction between a removable supply magazine and refill package.

    197+,   for general type article dispensers having supply cartridges or
    containers removably mountable within enclosing casing or housing structure.

    287,    for general type article dispensers having supply enclosing
    containers removably associated with dispensing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 325+ for fluent material dispensing devices
    having insertable cartridges or removal containers as elements thereof.


CLS 221/47
TXT Devices under subclass 33 for dispensing flexible articles which are bent
    upon themselves at least once, and in which one of the resulting bent
    portions is urged to a position at least partially removed, and from which
    it may be more readily removed, the portion so urged being either of a
    length different from a connected portion or portions of the article or
    being deformed, as by flexing, from the connected portion or portions of
    the article.


CLS 221/48
TXT Devices under subclass 47 in which the articles are stacked in such a
    manner as to be interfolded with one another and in which an unequal fold
    or deformed portion of each successive article is urged or pulled to the
    position of more ready removal by virtue of the coordination of the portion
    of the preceding article which is interfolded therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for similar devices including means to eject the leading article
    from the supply source receptacle.


CLS 221/49
TXT Devices under subclass 48 in which the supply of articles is in the form of
    a prearranged stack of interfolded articles contained in an outer wrapping
    and designed to be placed within a supply container to be dispensed.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also takes refill packages, per se, as used in
    combinations identified by the subclass definition.

    (2)     Note.  The package, per se, is never adapted to be used as a
    dispenser except in conjunction with a supply receptacle which has the
    necessary dispensing feature.  Where the package is a complete dispenser,
    i.e., has a covering embodying a dispensing outlet, or has a discharge
    assistant, etc. and an outer casing or support for such a package is
    claimed classification is in subclass 46 of this class.  Where the package
    outer wrapper has dispensing features so that the package may be used as a
    dispenser without the use of other structure, classification is based on
    the nature of the dispensing combination so formed.

    (3)     Note.  Where the outer holder, casing, or wrapper of a
    "prearranged" stack is a removable part of a dispenser organization which
    must be taken out, refilled and replaced, the filled part is not considered
    to be a refill package, but is merely a removable supply magazine. See
    subclass 46.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     see (2) Note and (3) Note above.

    197+,   for general type article dispensers having removable supply
    cartridges or containers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 449+ for a container for
    plates or sheets and subclasses 499 through 520 for nesting or stacking
    features.


CLS 221/50
TXT Devices under subclass 48 in which the stack of articles has associated
    therewith an independent element which cooperates with the first available
    article to withdraw a fold thereof from the supply receptacle.


CLS 221/51
TXT Devices under subclass 48 in which the interfolded stack is either formed
    of articles which are normally of a curved configuration relative to the
    longitudinal axis of the stack or of normally flat articles which have been
    flexed to a similar curved configuration and in which the articles are
    removed from the side of the stack which comprises the inner face of the
    curve.


CLS 221/52
TXT Devices under subclass 48 having means to apply a force which is exerted
    through all of the articles tending to move the entire supply relative to
    article enclosing supply container structure in a direction towards an
    egress opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56+,    for similar devices in which the flexible articles are not
    interleaved with one another, and see the search notes thereto.

    279+,   for general type article dispensers having followers, and see the
    search notes thereto.


CLS 221/53
TXT Devices under subclass 48 having means in addition to a mere article
    supporting surface to push back or hold back subsequent articles as the
    first article is removed so that the normal constraining force of the stack
    of articles on the article being removed is reduced.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251,    for general type article dispensing devices having discharge
    assistant means and also separate means for holding back subsequent
    articles.


CLS 221/54
TXT Devices under subclass 53 in which the pushing or holding means has motion
    relative to the portion of the device on which it is mounted.


CLS 221/55
TXT Devices under subclass 47 in which the means urging noncoextensive folds of
    the articles to a removal position are a static directing or restraining
    means in the normal path of removal of the articles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for dispensers for flexible articles in which ejecting means
    cooperate with stationary guide or abutment means to distort and/or direct
    such articles upon discharge.

    312,    for general type article dispensers having interior article guiding
    means, and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 221/56
TXT Devices under subclass 33 having means to apply a force which is exerted
    through all of the articles tending to move the entire supply relative to
    article enclosing supply container structure in a direction towards an
    egress opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     for similar devices in which the flexible articles are interleaved
    with one another.

    279+,   for general type article dispensers having followers and see the
    search notes thereto.


CLS 221/57
TXT Devices under subclass 56 having means associated with the follower and the
    supply receptacle to cause the follower to be held in a retracted position
    for facilitating the replacement of the supply of articles when depleted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227,    for general type article dispensers having plural discharge
    assistants, one of which is a follower having disabling, retracting, or
    releasing means.


CLS 221/58
TXT Devices under subclass 56 which are inherently resilient.


CLS 221/59
TXT Devices under subclass 56 in which the follower is resiliently urged in a
    direction to force the articles towards the egress opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    271     and 276, for general type article dispensers having spring biasing
    means for reciprocating discharge assistant.


CLS 221/60
TXT Devices under subclass 59  in which the resiliently biased follower is
    mounted for angular motion relative to means which support it in or on the
    supply receptacle.


CLS 221/61
TXT Devices under subclass 33 in which the supply container has, in addition to
    an egress outlet, some other opening, the latter opening being for
    replacing the supply when depleted, or for affording admittance for some
    other purpose.

    (1)     Note.  The "other" opening may be merely a larger openable panel
    which contains the egress opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for similar structures which include also a follower and in which
    there is an interlock between the follower and the operation of the
    replenishment means.

    228+,   for article dispensers in general, having a source container cover
    (for an opening other than the outlet opening) with related discharge
    assisting means.

    281,    for general type article dispensers having separate inlet means for
    replenishment of the source of supply or for other access to a dispenser.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 478+ for fluent material dispensers having
    plural outlets.  In this collection of art one of the outlets may be for
    replenishment or access for other purposes.


CLS 221/62
TXT Devices under subclass 61 in which the replenishment opening is formed by
    movement or removal of a receptacle wall or closure portion which has
    angular motion relative to the means which connects it to the receptacle.


CLS 221/63
TXT Devices under subclass 33 in which the supply containers have egress
    outlets which are of lesser cross-section than that of the articles as
    presented thereto so that the articles are distorted thereby as they are
    segregated from the supply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    303+,   for article dispensers having outlets which are distorted as the
    articles are withdrawn therethrough, this organization representing a
    reversal of the mode of operation of this subclass 63.


CLS 221/64
TXT Article dispensers under the class definition in which the article supply
    receptacles have one or more walls or portions thereof which may be
    distorted or deflected by application of a force, such distortion or
    deflection being effective to release or expel articles from such
    receptacles.

    (1)     Note.  The flexibility must be in at least some wall portion other
    than or in addition to flexibility of an article dispensing outlet.
    Resilient type article dispensing outlets are classified in subclasses 307+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    307+,   see (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 92+ for fluent material dispensers having
    collapsible wall type supply containers, and subclasses 206+ for fluent
    material dispensers having resilient walls.


CLS 221/65
TXT Article dispensers under the class definition in which the supply
    receptacle decreases in size or contracts as articles are dispensed
    therefrom, by sliding of the container walls within one another or by
    otherwise reducing the container wall structure area.

    (1)     Note.  Supply containers having followers are not included herein.
    See subclasses 279+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for article dispensers in which the supply container size may be
    decreased by the flexibility of supply container wall structure.

    242,    for article dispensers having discharge assistant means and in
    which the supply sources are adjustable in size to accommodate different
    size articles.

    279+,   see (1) Note above.


CLS 221/66
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which addition of an article to the
    supply or movement of an article through a supply inlet is a necessary
    concurrent incident to the ejection, release, or removal of an article
    therefrom or to the movement of the leading article in a direction axially
    towards the outlet.

    (1)     Note.  Where a replacement article is pushed into or through a
    source of supply inlet and acts through all the articles to eject the
    leading article or to move it axially towards an outlet, it is considered
    to be a discharge assistant and included herein as a special case, even
    though no dispensing type outlet is claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281,    for article dispensers having separate openings for replenishment
    or access, and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 221/67
TXT Article dispensers under the class definition in which a plurality of
    superposed articles are disposed in a single continuous orderly sequence
    and in which alternate articles are interdigitated with contiguous articles
    and are misaligned therewith in such fashion that they are partially but
    not completely coextensive therewith so that each of said articles helps to
    support the adjacent superposed article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118,    for articles disposed in vertically staggered or stepped relation
    in separate or spaced columns.


CLS 221/68
TXT Article dispensers under the class definition in which articles from a
    single supply of such articles are formed into a plurality of continuous,
    orderly, linear sequential arrangements, each such arrangement having means
    associated therewith for separating, segregating or discharging articles
    therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of classification in this subclass, the
    dispensing means associated with each orderly arrangement or stack of
    articles may be disclosed but not necessarily claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175+,   for means for forming stacks (single) from articles otherwise
    arranged in supply containers.


CLS 221/69
TXT Article dispensers under the class definition in which the source of supply
    is in the form of a structure in which each article is individually
    retained in or by a separate compartment or holding means.

    (1)     Note.  See section I C, subsection 5 of the class definition for a
    discussion of cellular magazine type devices and the features combined
    therewith which constitute dispensers under the class definition of this
    class and for class lines with the various receptacle and cabinet arts.


CLS 221/70
TXT Devices under subclass 69 in which the holding means or compartments are
    contained on or in or are formed by a coiled or bent flexible strip which
    is of substantial length but is not continuous.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for article dispensing devices in which cellular magazine type
    supply sources are progressively destroyed to effect a dispensing operation.

    77+     and 84+, for cellular magazine type dispensers having continuous
    flexible belt conveyors for carrying the articles past a discharge point.

    253,    for article dispensers of general types having endless belt type
    discharge assistants.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 91 for cabinet structures
    having article removal facilitating means including a web conveyor.


CLS 221/71
TXT Devices under subclass 70 having means to move the flexible strip toward or
    through a point of discharge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material or Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.


CLS 221/72
TXT Devices under subclass 71 in which the movement of the flexible strip is
    such, relative to other structure, as to cause or allow the articles to be
    separated or released from the holding means or compartments in which they
    are carried.


CLS 221/73
TXT Devices under subclass 72 in which the articles are held to the flexible
    strip by adhesive means which cause abutting portions of the strip and the
    articles to cohere and having means to engage the article, the strip, or
    the line of adhesion, to separate the articles from the strip.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    584 for delaminating, per se.


CLS 221/74
TXT Devices under subclass 71 having means to directly engage the articles in
    the cells to move them in a direction of discharge from the cells.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79+,    for similar combinations in which the articles are carried on
    conveyor type magazines other than the multiple strand type, and see the
    notes thereto.


CLS 221/75
TXT Devices under subclass 69 in which the cellular structure is such that the
    articles are moved from one compartment or holding means to another in the
    normal operation of the device.

    (1)     Note.  A spiral surface, which is so arranged, per se, or in
    combination with other structure, that separately retained articles move
    progressively along the surface thereof to a point of discharge is included
    in this subclass.


CLS 221/76
TXT Devices under subclass 69 in which the cellular source of supply is mounted
    for movement relative to a support so that the articles may be carried from
    point to point as the cellular structure is moved.


CLS 221/77
TXT Devices under subclass 76 having a plurality of belts, cables, ropes, or
    the like, arranged side by side to form a movable cellular supply source,
    either by themselves, or in combination with other structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70+,    for noncontinuous web type cellular magazines.

    84+,    for other belt type cellular magazine conveyor structures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 817 for multiple strand
    conveyors, per se.


CLS 221/78
TXT Devices under subclass 77 having also force applying means acting directly
    upon the articles in the cells to move such articles from the cells.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79+,    for similar combinations in which the articles are carried on
    conveyor type magazines of other types, and see the notes thereto.


CLS 221/79
TXT Devices under subclass 76 having means to apply an affirmative force to the
    articles to segregate, separate, or move such articles from the various
    cells.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for rolled or folded web type magazines having ejecting means.

    78,     for cellular magazine type dispensers mounted upon multiple strand
    conveyors and having ejecting means.

    87+,    for nonconveyor type cellular magazine type dispensers having
    ejecting means.


CLS 221/80
TXT Devices under subclass 79 in which the force applying means is
    substantially rigidly mounted on the support to be contacted by the
    articles in the cells as the cell structure advances.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186+,   for supply containers movably mounted for dispensing, such supply
    containers being of the noncellular magazine type and often involving
    movement relative to a stationary article releasing or discharge assisting
    structure.


CLS 221/81
TXT Devices under subclass 79 having means to cause movement of the cellular
    source of supply, said means being operatively connected to the ejecting
    means for relative manipulation therewith.


CLS 221/82
TXT Devices under subclass 76 in which the articles are carried to a point at
    which, by virtue of their own weight, they fall from their respective
    compartments, or holding means.


CLS 221/83
TXT Devices under subclass 82 having movable gate means to normally prevent the
    gravity discharge of articles from the cells and having means to cause
    movement of the cellular source of supply, the movable gate means being
    operatively connected either (1) to said means to cause movement of the
    cellular source of supply; or (2) to a means for locking the cellular
    source of supply against movement.


CLS 221/84
TXT Devices under subclass 82 in which the cellular source of supply is
    incorporated in or supported upon a nonrigid continuous or endless member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70+,    for noncontinuous web type cellular magazines.

    77+,    for similar combinations in which the conveyor is of the multiple
    strand type.


CLS 221/85
TXT Devices under subclass 84 in which the nonrigid continuous or endless
    member is so disposed that the article carrying compartments or cells
    carried thereby have motion in a horizontal direction for at least a part
    of their path of movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    253,    for article dispensers having endless belt carried discharge
    assistant means.


CLS 221/86
TXT Devices under subclass 82 in which the articles are released for gravity
    discharge by motion relative to one another of either the compartments or
    holding means, or of the structural parts comprising such compartments or
    holding means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84+,    for flexible conveyor belt carried cell structures, motion of which
    belt results in relative movement of the cells.

    89+,    for cellular magazine type article dispensers in which the cellular
    magazine is not of the conveyor type but in which articles are discharged
    by relative movement of cell structure components.


CLS 221/87
TXT Devices under subclass 69 having means affirmatively applying a force to
    the articles in the cells to cause discharge of such articles from the
    cells.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79+,    for conveyor mounted cellular magazine type article dispensers
    having means to remove articles from the cells, and see the notes thereto.


CLS 221/88
TXT Devices under subclass 87 in which the means affirmatively applying a force
    is a single instrumentality which is adapted at different times, to apply
    discharging forces on the articles in each of the cells.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     78 and 79+, for special types of cellular magazine type article
    dispensing devices having ejectors, in many of which a single ejector acts
    on all of the various cells.


CLS 221/89
TXT Devices under subclass 69 in which the separate compartments or holding
    means each includes a portion or component which has motion relative to
    another portion which supports an article, the separation of the article
    being effected by relative movement between such portions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86,     for movable conveyor type cellular magazines having cells with
    movable components.


CLS 221/90
TXT Devices under subclass 89 in which the movable portion or component is a
    shelf or door which has angular motion about its support.


CLS 221/91
TXT Devices under subclass 89 in which the separate compartments or holding
    means each has an opening, the movable supporting portion or component
    comprising a single gate member which closes all the openings and has
    sliding motion relative to the remainder of the cell structure to
    progressively release articles therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86,     for similar structures in which the cellular magazine is of a
    conveyor type.


CLS 221/92
TXT Article dispensers under the class definition having (1) Two or more
    separate supply compartments, sources or stacks, at least one of which
    delivers to an article dispensing means (2) Two or more containers claimed
    in combination, at least one being an article dispensing container and the
    other or others being material or article receivering means, or (3) an
    article dispensing container which has a jacket surrounding the same and
    spaced therefrom, at least in part, to provide a material or article
    receiving space.

    (1)     Note.  Where the dispenser is divided or sectioned to provide a
    spaced jacket for the reception or holding of the dispenser actuating
    mechanism or the like such compartment has been considered as a casing or
    support feature.  Such structures not otherwise including a second source,
    stack or compartment are classified in subclasses 282+ of this class.

    (2)     Note.  The plural sources, stacks or compartments of this and
    indented subclasses are not disposed in series arrangement for feeding from
    one source, stack or compartment to another.  For such series arrangement
    see subclasses 68, 174 or 175+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34+,    for similar combinations in which at least one compartment embodies
    a dispenser of the type which concurrently separates and distorts flexible
    articles.

    68,     see (2) Note, above.

    174,    see (2) Note, above.

    175+,   see (2) Note, above.

    282+,   see (1) Note, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 129+ for fluent material dispensers having
    plural sources, compartments, and containers.


CLS 221/93
TXT Devices under subclass 92 arranged so that at each operation of the
    dispensing means, dispensing takes place from at least two sources.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206+,   for dispensers having quantity preselection means operating
    relative to a single source.


CLS 221/94
TXT Devices under subclass 93 in which the number of sources may be selectively
    chosen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    for plural source article dispensing devices having lockout means
    to permit dispensing from one, only, of the sources.  This subclass 94 has
    similar devices in which dispensing takes place from a plurality of sources
    less than all of the sources available.

    126+,   for plural source article dispensing devices having common selector
    means to permit or cause dispensing from one, only, of the plural sources.


CLS 221/95
TXT Devices under subclass 93 in which one, only of an article releasing or
    force applying segregating means moves to receive articles in turn from
    plural sources.


CLS 221/96
TXT Devices under subclass 92 having a dispenser for fluent material as well as
    a separate article dispensing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 450.4 for a similar
    combination in a machine for making a composite edible (e.g., sandwich,
    etc.), from preforms.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 174 for combinations including means for dispensing a drinking cup
    and means for dispensing a beverage thereto.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses, for fluent material dispensers,
    per se, and especially subclasses 129+ for plural source fluent material
    dispensing devices.  See section VI of the class definition of this class
    (221), for a statement of the line between Classes 221 and 222 relative to
    such subject matter.


CLS 221/97
TXT Devices under subclass 92 in which two or more containers are claimed in
    combination, at least one being an article dispensing container and at
    least one being a material or article receiving means which has no
    dispensing means associated therewith.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this subclass the type source must
    have neither article dispensing means of the type required for
    classification in this class nor fluent material dispensing means of the
    type recognized by Class 222.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 130+ for similar combinations for fluent
    material dispensing devices.  See (1) Note above.


CLS 221/98
TXT Devices under subclass 97 in which the material or article containing or
    receiving means partakes of motion relative to or may be withdrawn from the
    article receptacle from which articles are dispensed.


CLS 221/99
TXT Devices under subclass 98 in which the nondispensing compartment is an open
    topped box or container which slips or is guided in ways.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224+,   for dispensers of this type depositing the dispensed article into a
    sliding drawer or the like, for subsequent manipulation by movement of the
    drawer.


CLS 221/100
TXT Devices under subclass 98 in which the nondispensing compartment is
    pivotally supported for movement.


CLS 221/101
TXT Devices under subclass 97 in which a member serving as a partition between
    the article dispensing container and the other compartment means may have
    motion or may be withdrawn from therebetween.


CLS 221/102
TXT Devices under subclass 97 in which the nondispensing compartment is a
    material receiving compartment for items to be disposed of such articles
    before use having been dispensed by the dispensing device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27+,    for article dispensers which retain the article against complete
    removal after dispensing and which may conduct the used article to a
    collection or storage compartment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    232,    Deposit and Collection Receptacles, appropriate subclasses for
    deposit and collection receptacles for devices in which articles, including
    used articles, are placed in receptacles from time to time to be there
    collected for simultaneous removal at a later time.  Such subject matter
    represents a subcombination of the subject matter classified in this
    subclass.


CLS 221/103
TXT Devices under subclass 92 in which each of the separate supply sources is
    exhausted in turn, i.e. one source is exhausted before a subsequent source
    is made available.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass are placed patents which include plural
    aligned sources from which the bottom article in each of the several
    sources is first dispensed by the movement of the bottom article of the
    most remote stack against the said bottom articles as it passes under the
    several sources in reaching the egress opening. Thereafter the rearmost
    source is exhausted and so on through the several sources in turn from the
    rearmost to the most proximate relative the egress opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for similar devices including empty supply source indicating means.

    11,     for similar devices having means responsive to the depletion of one
    stack of articles to actuate a separate control for means for causing a
    replacement stack to replace the depleted stack.  If the sensing means and
    the control are the same element or instrumentality, classification is in
    this and the indented subclasses, and especially in subclasses 108+.

    112+,   in which articles are dispensed from plural sources sequentially,
    i.e., one from the first source, one from the second, and so on.


CLS 221/104
TXT Devices under subclass 103 in which a subsequent stack or source has or may
    have motion relative to an article releasing or ejecting means for
    establishment of an operative relationship with such means upon depletion
    of a preceding source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186+,   for single source article dispensing devices in which the supply
    container is movable mounted for dispensing.

    209,    for single source article dispensing devices in which the supply
    container is movably mounted for movement into or out of position for
    cooperation with a discharge assistant.


CLS 221/105
TXT Devices under subclass 104 in which the replacement source or stack supply
    means has a hingedly swinging movement about a fixed axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188+,   for single source article dispensing devices in which the supply
    container is pivotally mounted for dispensing.


CLS 221/106
TXT Devices under subclass 104 in which the replacement source or stack supply
    means moves as a unit in one direction only in a straight line.


CLS 221/107
TXT Devices under subclass 103 in which articles present in the normal flow
    path between the dispensing stack and an egress outlet of the dispenser
    hold back or control means to block other possible replenishment or
    additional sources.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104+,   for plural source dispensers in which replacement sources or stacks
    move relative to the discharge means and in some of which such movement may
    take place prior to the complete discharge of the original or preceding
    stack so that initial dispensing from the replacement stack is prevented by
    the remaining articles of the preceding stack.


CLS 221/108
TXT Devices under subclass 107 having means preventing feeding of articles from
    other sources, such means being directly controlled by the articles in the
    discharge path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for similar automatic devices.  See the note to subclass 11 in the
    Search Class Notes of subclass 103 for a full discussion of the distinction
    between automatic and condition responsive means in devices of this type.


CLS 221/109
TXT Devices under subclass 108 in which the means preventing feeding are
    gate-like members individual to at least three sources which members
    operate in turn.


CLS 221/110
TXT Devices under subclass 103 in which the plurality of separate supply
    compartments, sources or stacks are associated with a plurality of force
    applying article separators, segregators or force appliers, which are made
    effective one after the other in turn to discharge articles from the
    plurality of supply compartments, sources or stacks.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for similar devices having means for indicating the empty condition
    of a source.

    14,     for similar devices having automatic means responsive to depletion
    of supply in a primary source to control operation of discharge assistant
    means for a succeeding source.


CLS 221/111
TXT Devices under subclass 103 in which the articles present in the dispensing
    stack preclude dispensing from subsequent stacks.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104+,   for plural source dispensers in which replacement sources or stacks
    move relative to the discharge means and in some of which such movement may
    take place prior to the complete discharge of the original or preceding
    stack so that initial dispensing from the replacement stack is prevented by
    the remaining articles of the preceding stack.


CLS 221/112
TXT Devices under subclass 92 having means or some arrangement which assures
    that the articles are dispensed (one from each source) from the several
    sources in a fixed order.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103+,   for dispensers having sources which are each completely depleted
    sequentially.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 450.4 for a similar
    combination in a machine for making a composite edible (e.g., sandwich,
    etc.), from preforms.

    270,    Sheet-Material Associating, subclass 58 for devices which arrange
    items having different characteristics into stack form.


CLS 221/113
TXT Devices under subclass 112 in which the several sources are supported to
    have turning movement about an axis relative to a single egress opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119+,   for rotatably mounted assemblies without regard to the order of
    dispensing, and particularly subclasses 121+ in which such assemblies
    rotate relative to single common outlet means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, in appropriate "rotatable" subclasses, for
    rotatable rack structures.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 144 for rotatably mounted plural source fluent
    material dispensing combinations.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, in appropriate "rotatable" or
    "rotating" subclasses for cabinet structures involving rotation of the
    article or material handling portion thereof, and see particularly subclass
    97.1 for cabinets of the removal facilitating magazine type which are of a
    rotating nature.


CLS 221/114
TXT Devices under subclass 112 in which individual article separating or
    ejecting means are provided for each source of supply and are so
    interrelated the the normal cycle of operation of the device necessarily
    results in sequential dispensing from the various sources.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124,    for plural source article dispensing devices, having separate
    discharge means for each source but not limited to sequential dispensing
    arrangement.


CLS 221/115
TXT Devices under subclass 114 in which the article separating or ejecting
    means are arranged in side by side relation along a common axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 139 for plural source fluent material
    dispensing devices in which plural discharge assistants for the various
    sources are coaxially arranged and have a rotary or swinging type of motion.


CLS 221/116
TXT Devices under subclass 114 in which there are two article separating or
    ejecting means which operate one after the other in order, each on its own
    source of supply, whereby each acts to eject an article on every second
    operation of the device.


CLS 221/117
TXT Devices under subclass 116 having article egress outlets which are
    diametrically disposed either away from or toward each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     for plural dispensers of the concurrent separation and distortion
    type having oppositely faced, outwardly disposed egress outlet openings.


CLS 221/118
TXT Devices under subclass 116 having the sources arranged in two side by side
    columns of similar articles, said articles of one column being staggered
    with respect to those of the other column along the longitudinal axes of
    the columns.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     for articles which are disposed in staggered relation in a single
    column in which each article partially supports the superposed contiguous
    article.


CLS 221/119
TXT Devices under subclass 92 in which the plural sources, stacks or
    compartments are mounted upon a rigid support in such a manner as to have
    turning movement as a group about an axis or are mounted upon a continuous
    web for movement as a group along a path traversed by the web.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113+,   for plural source article dispensers rotatable mounted relative to
    common discharge means, and see the search notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 97 and 97.1 for cabinet
    structures having article removal facilitating means including endless belt
    carried and rotatably mounted source assemblies, respectively.


CLS 221/120
TXT Devices under subclass 119 having plural circularly arranged and radially
    spaced sources, such arrangement being about and longitudinally of the axis
    of rotation.


CLS 221/121
TXT Devices under subclass 119 in which the dispenser rotates relative to a
    single egress opening for passage of the articles to the exterior of the
    dispenser.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for plural source article dispensing devices in which the sources
    rotate relative to a common outlet for sequential dispensing from such
    plural sources.

    133,    for article dispensers which are not rotatably mounted, comprising
    plural sources, stacks, or compartments and having a common discharge
    outlet.


CLS 221/122
TXT Devices under subclass 121 having means to properly orient the source
    receptacle or the like with respect to the egress opening to thereby
    prevent a mismatching or jamming of the mechanisms.

    (1)     Note.  The means assuring alignment as hereinbefore defined must be
    other than the mere means, if any, to rotate the assembly.


CLS 221/123
TXT Devices under subclass 92 in which each of the supply sources has
    associated therewith a means to separate, segregate, or move articles
    toward an egress outlet, either by the application of a force to or by
    permissive release of such articles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 135+ for fluent material dispensers having
    plural sources and discharge assistant means for each source.


CLS 221/124
TXT Devices under subclass 123 in which each supply source has an individual
    affirmative force applier or releasing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for similar structures in which the arrangement is such that
    dispensing from the various sources is sequential.


CLS 221/125
TXT Devices under subclass 124 in which each source has its own separate
    discharging means and actuation initiator and a means available to all such
    separate means to prevent operation of the others upon operation of any one
    of said initiating means.

    (1)     Note.  Selective connection of an actuating element with the
    individual discharge means of plural sources does not constitute lockout
    means.  Such arrangements are classified in subclasses 126+, of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126+,   and see (1) Note above.

    151+,   for article dispensing devices having means for blocking or
    disabling the ejectors or releasers thereof.


CLS 221/126
TXT Devices under subclass 124 in which the force appliers or releasing means
    have actuator initiating means selectively related thereto by a manual
    control means common to more than one source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 144.5 for plural source fluent material
    dispensing devices having selecting means, including means common to the
    plurality of sources.


CLS 221/127
TXT Devices under subclass 126 in which the manual control means is also the
    actuator initiating means.


CLS 221/128
TXT Devices under subclass 127 in which selectivity and actuation are effected
    by motion of the actuator-selector in opposite directions in a
    substantially fixed path.


CLS 221/129
TXT Devices under subclass 124 in which the force applying or releasing means
    includes electrical initiation or selection.


CLS 221/130
TXT Devices under subclass 124 in which two or more dispensers each complete
    with its own discharge means, actuator and outlet are similarly oriented
    and placed one upon the other.


CLS 221/131
TXT Devices under subclass 124 in which two or more dispensers, each complete
    with its own discharge means, actuator and outlet are arranged in side by
    side linear relationship.


CLS 221/132
TXT Devices under subclass 124 in which at least three dispensers, each
    complete with its own discharge means, actuator and outlet are similarly
    arranged about a point in a place.


CLS 221/133
TXT Devices under subclass 92 in which the plural sources, stacks or
    compartments discharge articles to a common ultimate outlet path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 145.1+ for plural source fluent material
    dispensing devices having a common discharge path.


CLS 221/134
TXT Article dispensers under the class definition having means operative with
    respect to the articles of an orderly sequence or supply arrangement to
    remove one or more of the articles from the arrangement without regard to
    consecutive order.


CLS 221/135
TXT Article dispensers under the class definition having some additional
    provision or means to bring about a physical or chemical change in the
    articles either before or after separation from the source.

    (1)     Note.  See section IV of the class definition of this class (221),
    which is devoted to article dispensing as included in treating or modifying
    combinations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 330+ for "bobbypin" and "hairpin" dispensers
    provided with means for spreading the pin either concurrently with or
    subsequent to dispensing.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 190 for fluent material dispensers with
    material treatment or conditioning means combined therewith.


CLS 221/136
TXT Devices under subclass 135 in which the change effecting means either
    assists in or directly brings about ignition of the article.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is the home for nominally claimed
    combinations, or merely associated flint or other type lighters and
    dispensers without requiring an interrelationship of the two devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclass 643 for match scratchers,
    per se.

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 7 for match-scratching surfaces combined with
    cigars and cigarettes, and subclasses 185, 234 and 249 for match-scratching
    surfaces combined with tobacco users' appliances.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 85+ for a tobacco
    container with an igniter of the tobacco content and subclasses 98+ for a
    match packet, container or holder with a striker surface in withdrawal path
    of match.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 86 for article magazines
    having removal facilitating means for slender articles in combination with
    igniting means.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 247+ for
    electric igniting devices.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 271+ for a device dispensing a cap or pellet
    type igniting charge from a plural charge holder and firing the charge.


CLS 221/137
TXT Devices under subclass 136 in which the igniter is a friction surface for a
    match.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclass 643 for match scratchers,
    per se.


CLS 221/138
TXT Devices under subclass 137 in which the friction surface partakes of
    movement which is affirmatively controlled by some motion transmitting
    means to cause ignition of the match.


CLS 221/139
TXT Devices under subclass 137 in which the friction surface and an egress
    opening or a separated match retaining means are so arranged that the
    manual withdrawal of the match through or by said opening or retaining
    means results in the contacting of the match head with the said friction
    surface to ignite said match.


CLS 221/140
TXT Devices under subclass 137 having an affirmative means to segregate,
    separate or move a match from the source of supply, said means additionally
    moving the match against the friction means.


CLS 221/141
TXT Devices under subclass 140 in which the motion of the discharge assistant
    and the arrangement of the matches in the receptacle cause the match to
    move in a direction corresponding to the longitudinal axis of the match.


CLS 221/142
TXT Devices under subclass 140 in which the motion of the discharge assistant
    and the arrangement of the matches in the receptacle cause the match to
    move in a direction normal to the longitudinal axis of the match.


CLS 221/143
TXT Devices under subclass 136 in which the igniting means is an electrical
    means.


CLS 221/144
TXT Devices under subclass 143 additionally including static or dynamic means
    to cause a flow of air.


CLS 221/145
TXT Devices under subclass 144 in which the flow causing means is a dynamic air
    moving means.


CLS 221/146
TXT Devices under subclass 144 in which the flow causing means is a tubular
    flue-like means.


CLS 221/147
TXT Devices under subclass 143 in which the electrical igniting means is caused
    to be made operative by the act of dispensing an article from the said
    article dispenser.


CLS 221/148
TXT Devices under subclass 136 in which a lighter of the fire striking flint
    type and a dispenser are so related that the said lighter is made active by
    the act of dispensing an article from the dispensing assembly.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 267+ for a frictional, chemical or
    percussive type igniter, per se.


CLS 221/149
TXT Devices under subclass 148 in which the lighter action and the dispenser
    operation are brought about by the motion of some article receptacle part
    relative to the dispenser.


CLS 221/150
TXT Devices under subclass 135 in which the change producing means effects the
    temperature of the articles either to positively elevate or lower such
    temperature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 146 for fluent material dispensers having
    heating or cooling means.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 36 for cabinet structures
    having article removal facilitating means in combination with article
    cooling means.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 122+ for a residual heated work chamber having
    means for manipulating individual articles.


CLS 221/151
TXT Article dispensers under the class definition having a mechanical linkage
    or other means to apply a force to operate an article discharging
    instrumentality other than a follower and having also separate means to
    interpose a solid member in the path of a portion of said linkage, the
    force applying means, or the discharging instrumentality; to remove a force
    translating member from the linkage or force applying means, or to
    otherwise divert the action of the article discharging instrumentality.

    (1)     Note.  Dispensers having a discharge assistant which is biased to
    discharging position and which may be cocked or latched in the article
    receiving or retracted position and then released to discharge an article
    under the influence of the biasing means are not included in this or
    indented subclasses but are classified in subclass 271.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13+,    for similar devices in which means responsive to a changing
    condition operate separate control means to block or disable an ejector or
    releaser.

    18,     for similar devices which also have means responsive to depletion
    of the entire source of supply to directly cause the blocking or disabling
    of the operation of the discharge means.



    125,    for plural source article dispensers having lockout means under
    control of an actuating initiator whereby discharge means of all but a
    selected source are locked against operation.

    154,    for article dispensers having lock, latch or sealing means for the
    container or support.

    271,    see (1) Note above.

    295,    for article dispensers having article releasing means which are
    latch released and article weight operated.


CLS 221/152
TXT Devices under subclass 151 in which the solid member enters or engages a
    cut-out, groove or projection in or on the linkage, force applying means or
    discharging instrumentality.


CLS 221/153
TXT Devices under subclass 151 in which the blocking or disabling means is
    motor operated.


CLS 221/154
TXT Article dispensers under the class definition having (1) means to prevent
    or deter unauthorized separation, removal, or access to or into a
    dispensing receptacle or its means of support, (2) a catch type holding or
    fastening means for a dispensing receptacle part or support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19+,    for similar devices in which the latch means is embodied in an
    empty supply source responsive means.

    248,    for outlet closures which are locked by the discharge assistant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclasses 50+ for
    supports and mountings for safes and bank protection and related devices.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 153.01+ for fluent material dispensing
    devices having locks or fastening seals.


CLS 221/155
TXT Article dispensers under the class definition having a claimed transparent
    sight means whereby the dispenser operation or its contents may be
    observed, in whole or in part.

    (1)     Note.  Disclosure that a claimed element is transparent is not
    enough to warrant classification in this subclass.  The feature must be
    specifically set forth in the language of the claims.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for indicia bearing exhibitors, especially subclass 8 for dispenser
    operated display devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 154+ for fluent material dispensing devices
    having inspection means including sight openings and transparent containers
    or flow line sections.


CLS 221/156
TXT Article dispensers under the class definition for articles which are each
    similarly asymmetric about at least one axis and having means to align,
    arrange, or selectively engage such articles so that the variations from
    symmetry are all turned in a desired direction or directions.

    (1)     Note.  The characteristics claimed must include the specific means
    for effecting the orienting.  The broad inclusion of an element of general
    dispensing utility, even though disclosed as an orienting element is not
    enough to warrant classification in this subclass or the indented
    subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  To be classified in this subclass and the indented
    subclasses, a patent must include a claimed disclosure of a dispensing
    combination under the class definition of this class which includes the
    orienting feature.  Where the orienting feature is claimed, per se,
    classification is in the appropriate other article handling class.  There
    must be an actual rearrangement or turning of the articles as distinguished
    from a mere perfecting of the alignment of substantially similarly oriented
    articles to warrant classification in this and the indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175+,   for article dispensing devices having means to form stacks of
    articles from sources in which the articles are differently arranged,
    including hoppers.  Many of such devices disclose but do not claim the
    orientation of the articles dispensed, and the modes of operation, insofar
    as the article handling means are concerned, are the same.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 485+ for apparatus
    especially adopted for treating food under the class definition, note
    especially subclasses 549+ for removing core-pits wherein the food is
    particularly oriented

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 373+ for a conveyor having
    means for changing the attitude of the conveyed load relative to the
    conveying direction.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses, and especially in subclasses 509+ for methods and apparatus,
    including dispensing, for assorting physically unlike articles.  If a
    device is in fact a dispenser under the class definition of Class 221 and
    all the articles handled are physically alike and means are provided for
    either turning the articles in a desired direction or for dispensing
    selectively only those which are in a desired orientation, classification
    is in Class 221.  See (2) Note above.  The line between Classes 209 and 221
    is stated in section VII of the class definition of this class (221).


CLS 221/157
TXT Devices under subclass 156 in which the asymmetric articles are arranged
    one behind the other in a continuous row and having means for dividing the
    continuous row of articles according to desired orientation and removing
    either the properly or the improperly oriented articles from the continuous
    row.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, subclass 31 for chutes,
    per se, which separate or turn aligned articles into different positions.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 234+, for a device for
    orienting articles on conveyors, generically, including the nonpower
    conveyors normally found in Class 193, Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides,
    and Ways.  This class (198) will include the turning of articles, referred
    to in the preceding search note (i.e., to Class 193) which amounts to
    orientation.


CLS 221/158
TXT Devices under subclass 157 in which articles removed from the continuous
    row of articles are returned to the remainder of the row to reform a single
    continuous row, usually after turning the articles in either group so that
    all the articles in the reconstituted row are faced in the same direction.


CLS 221/159
TXT Devices under subclass 157 having means to return to a source of supply
    such of the articles as are not oriented as desired.


CLS 221/160
TXT Devices under subclass 159 in which the means to return improperly oriented
    articles to supply is positioned either to overhang the supply source
    receptacle or within the bounds thereof.


CLS 221/161
TXT Devices under subclass 160 in which the means to return improperly oriented
    articles to supply has motion relative to an egress opening through which
    properly oriented articles finally pass.


CLS 221/162
TXT Devices under subclass 161 in which the means to return improperly oriented
    articles to supply is a wheel or a brush which is mounted to have movement
    about an axis in one direction only.


CLS 221/163
TXT Devices under subclass 156 in which the source of supply retains the
    asymmetric articles to be dispensed in a jumbled mass and articles are
    segregated from the source by means which choose or allow passage of only
    such articles as are turned in the desired direction as they contact or are
    contacted thereby.


CLS 221/164
TXT Devices under subclass 163 in which the segregation of only such articles
    as are turned in the desired direction is effected by movable segregating
    means which engage and support such properly positioned articles by a slot,
    notch, hole or protuberance in such articles and lift them from the source
    of supply.

    (1)     Note.  The construction is such that articles lacking the head,
    slot notch, etc., could not be handled therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167+,   especially subclass 170, for dispensers having shaped outlets,
    which may be formed by pins which lift the article, but by surrounding it
    or forming a shaped passage for it.

    179+,   for article dispensing devices in which movable elements within
    hopper sources of supply raise articles to be dispensed above the mass of
    articles in such hoppers, as an incident to the segregation and dispensing
    of such articles.

    254,    for article dispensing devices in which a discharge assistant moves
    through a hopper to separate and elevate articles as an incident to the
    dispensing of such articles.


CLS 221/165
TXT Devices under subclass 164 for handling articles which have a body and an
    enlarged end in which the means permitting or compelling passage engage
    under the enlarged end portions to lift them from the source of supply.


CLS 221/166
TXT Devices under subclass 164 in which the segregating means reaches into or
    passes through the source of supply and removes articles one at a time from
    the source of supply when such articles are properly oriented.


CLS 221/167
TXT Devices under subclass 163 in which articles are segregated from the source
    of supply by means which has a rotary or oscillatable motion about a point
    approximately at its center, which means may be a rotary or oscillating
    supply container, a rotary or oscillating discharge assistant within a
    stationary supply container or any combination of movable and stationary
    members.

    (1)     Note.  Segregation is usually effected by the articles being
    compelled or allowed to pass through egress openings which are of such
    dimensions and irregular form as to permit passage of only such articles as
    are properly oriented.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182,    for stack forming article dispensing devices having members
    rotatable or oscillatable about inclined axes.


CLS 221/168
TXT Devices under subclass 167, having in addition to the rotary or oscillating
    discharge means one or more of the following means, which may or may not be
    rotary; (1) an agitator within the supply container, (2) means operating on
    articles which have passed through at least one segregation-orientation
    stage to forward them along or through the discharge path, which means may
    perform a second orienting operation, (3) means operating on the articles
    to take care of an over supply or jamming of articles which have passed
    through at least one segregation-orientation stage, whether they remain in
    the confines of the supply container or have passed into a chute or stack
    holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243,    for lost motion devices to relieve actuator pressure on discharge
    means when the outlet is blocked and for mere expansible chutes or outlets
    to relieve jamming, and see the search notes thereto for overload relief
    searches generally.


CLS 221/169
TXT Devices under subclass 167 in which a plurality of shaped egress openings
    are provided between or in wall-forming elements of the dispenser which
    have rotary or oscillating motion, so that the openings pass successively
    by the point or points at which the oriented articles are diverted into
    chutes or stacks.

    (1)     Note.  Shaped egress openings are those of irregular form
    corresponding to that of the articles so that only those articles having
    the desired orientation can pass through.


CLS 221/170
TXT Devices under subclass 169, in which the shaped egress openings are formed
    by pins or applied projections carried by or opposed to a rotary member.
    The pins may be more closely spaced than the width of the articles being
    handled, with one pin entering in a cavity of the article as it passes
    between the pins on either side.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166,    for pins which pick up and carry a cupped or hollowed article by
    entering the depression therein and thus carry only properly oriented
    articles to the exit.


CLS 221/171
TXT Devices under subclass 156 in which the articles are turned in the desired
    direction or directions by means acting individually on each article as it
    passes, if such article is not turned in the desired direction.


CLS 221/172
TXT Devices under subclass 171 in which the articles are moved along a path of
    travel by the force of gravity and in which the means acting to turn the
    articles are stationary elements which are interposed in said path of
    travel and which successively engage and turn such of said articles as are
    not oriented as desired.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    311,    for deflectors for separating articles from sources of supply.

    312,    for article dispensers having stationary interior guiding means,
    and see the notes thereto for other collections of art relating to
    stationary deflector elements in article dispensing devices.


CLS 221/173
TXT Devices under subclass 171 in which the means acting to turn the articles
    is a mechanical instrumentality which has motion relative to the path of
    movement of the articles and successively engages and turns such of said
    articles as are not oriented as desired.


CLS 221/174
TXT Articles dispensers under the class definition in which a source of supply
    delivers articles to a receptacle in which they are retained in a
    nonstacked or disorderly fashion, said receptacle having means to discharge
    said articles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10+,    for similar combinations including means to automatically control
    the supply to the receptacle.

    175+,   for dispensers in which a supply feeds to a dispensing receptacle
    in such a manner as to form stacks therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 56 for similar combinations, automatically
    controlled, in fluent material dispensing devices.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 266+, 287, 288+, and
    others for means to charge or discharge a material storage container.


CLS 221/175
TXT Article dispensers under the class definition having means other than or in
    addition to supply container configuration to affirmatively cause articles
    from a supply container or other supply source to be formed into a single,
    continuous, orderly sequence, or linear arrangement which is different as
    to type or as to direction of orientation than the arrangement of the
    articles prior to the operation of said means.

    (1)     Note.  There must be an actual formation of a stack from some
    substantially different arrangement to warrant classification in this and
    the indented subclasses.  Therefore, means to merely perfect the alignment
    of a stack as by mere straightening are not included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for plural dispensing stacks formed from a single source.

    156+,   for similar devices including, also, means to orient asymmetric
    articles in the dispensing operation.

    157+    and 163+, for similar combinations including, also, means for
    orienting asymmetric articles.

    174,    for means to supply articles to a dispensing hopper in which the
    articles are not stacked.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    270,    Sheet-Material Associating, subclasses 58.01+ for devices which
    arrange items having different characteristics into stack form.


CLS 221/176
TXT Devices under subclass 175 in which the supply source is in stack form.


CLS 221/177
TXT Devices under subclass 175 in which the stack forming means includes a
    movable supply source receptacle which has angular back and forth movement
    about an axis, said axis being in a direction substantially perpendicular
    to the normal line of flow of the articles through the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188+,   for article dispensers in which the supply container is movably
    mounted for dispensing, there being no stack forming arrangement included.


CLS 221/178
TXT Devices under subclass 175 in which the stack forming means includes an
    article guideway, channel, way or the like to receive the orderly sequence
    of articles, all or part of which has motion for the stated function.


CLS 221/179
TXT Devices under subclass 178 in which the moving chute or part thereof has
    such motion within the physical bounds of the supply receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164+,   for orienting type article dispensers having movable lifting
    elements for engaging and removing articles from a source of supply.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, subclasses 164+ for distributors and feeders specialized to the
    purpose of Class 470 or combined with Class 470 machines in which inclined
    chutes (sometimes movable) are operated to remove articles from a source of
    supply.


CLS 221/180
TXT Devices under subclass 179 in which the moving chute part has a rocking
    motion about a fixed axis.


CLS 221/181
TXT Devices under subclass 179 in which the moving chute or part thereof has
    motion in a direction along the longitudinal axis of the said chute.


CLS 221/182
TXT Devices under subclass 175 in which the stack forming means includes a
    member which has rotary or to-and-fro movement about a fixed axis, which
    axis is angularly disposed to the horizontal.

    (1)     Note.  The "member" may be the entire supply source container, a
    portion thereof, or any other structure for performing the stack forming
    function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    for orienting type article dispensing devices having rotatable or
    oscillatable means causing segregation and orientation of the articles.


CLS 221/183
TXT Devices under subclass 175 in which the stack forming means includes a
    shaking or stirring means co-related with, operated by, or fixedly
    supported on or within the structure of means which applies an affirmative
    force to or permits release of an article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168,    for agitators combined with discharge assistants of a rotary or
    oscillatable type which orient articles by selective separation from the
    supply.

    178+,   for similar combinations in which the agitator serves as a chute or
    part thereof in guiding articles toward an outlet.

    202+,   for agitating means rigidly mounted on or incorporated in discharge
    assistants.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 226+ for fluent material dispensing devices
    having agitators followed by discharge assistants and/or interconnected
    discharge controllers.


CLS 221/184
TXT Devices under subclass 183 in which the agitator is fixedly supported on or
    included in or within the discharging means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202+,   for agitating means rigidly mounted on or incorporated in discharge
    assistants.


CLS 221/185
TXT Article dispensers under the class definition having

    (1)     means especially adapting them to be carried and supported by the
    body, or

    (2)     means providing for the mobility of the said dispensers over the
    surfaces on which they are supported.

    (1)     Note.  The means especially adapting the article dispenser to be
    carried and supported by the body must be an additional claimed structure
    over and above that which is essential to the dispensing operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282+,   for dispensers provided with other supporting means not restricted
    to mobility and body carrying features.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 175, for body carried and/or operated fluent
    material dispensers, and subclasses 608+ for ambulant fluent material
    dispensers.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, appropriate subclasses for body and
    belt catch devices, and see particularly subclass 196 for magazine type
    cartridge carriers.


CLS 221/186
TXT Article dispensers under the class definition having means supporting a
    supply means or receptacle for articles for motion relative to such
    support, the motion imparted to the said receptacle being effective to
    separate, segregate or move the articles from the receptacle to a point of
    egress.

    (1)     Note.  Substantially all of the articles and the immediate
    supporting or confining means move as a unit either with a discharge
    assistant or relative to a discharge assistant, the supply quantity being
    substantially determinate and varied only by the number of articles
    dispensed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76,     for article dispensers of the cellular magazine type, in which the
    cellular magazine sources of supply are mounted on conveyors for movement
    relative to a support.

    113,    for article dispensers having plural rotatably mounted supply
    sources movable as a unit past common outlet means for sequential
    dispensing from the plural sources.

    119+,   for plural source article dispensing devices in which the plural
    sources are rotatably mounted or carried upon an endless belt.

    209,    for movably mounted supply containers which move the entire supply
    with respect to a discharge assistant as an incident to dispensing, the
    container movement however, not being effective to separate or segregate
    the articles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 160+ for fluent material dispensers having
    movably mounted supply containers.


CLS 221/187
TXT Devices under subclass 186 provided with an article manipulator or other
    motion directing means which causes the article to have movement in a
    direction at right angles to the normal direction of dispensing movement of
    the supply container.


CLS 221/188
TXT Devices under subclass 186 in which the supply container is mounted for
    angular back and forth movement about a fixed axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    for plural source article dispensing devices in which replacement
    sources have pivotal movement about a fixed axis relative to discharge
    means.

    177,    for pivoted hoppers which form part of a stack forming organization.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 164+ for fluent material dispensers having
    supply containers which are tiltably mounted.


CLS 221/189
TXT Devices under subclass 188 in which the supply container moves with respect
    to a fixed article compartment or holding means to deposit the article
    therein and which compartment or means substantially embraces the separated
    article.


CLS 221/190
TXT Devices under subclass 186 in which the receptacle has relative up and down
    movement, such movement raising or lowering all but the segregated
    articles, thereby isolating said articles for removal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164+,   for orienting type article dispensers in which articles are
    selectively separated from supply by movably lifting means which have
    movement relative to the source of supply to relatively lift the selected
    articles from said supply.

    254,    for dispensers having a discharge assistant movable through a
    stationary hopper to separate and elevate articles.


CLS 221/191
TXT Article dispensers under the class definition having a fixed supporting
    surface or shelf which is positioned to receive the dispensed articles and
    hold such articles so that they can be removed by the hand of an operator.

    (1)     Note.  The supporting surface or shelf must not be that part of a
    discharge assistant, an article releaser or a dispensing type outlet which
    causes or controls article segregation.

    Articles retained for manual removal by article adhering or gripping type
    discharge assistants are in subclasses 210+, and by other types of
    discharge assistants in subclasses 255+.

    Articles retained for manual removal by a relatively movable closure after
    ejection from the source of supply by a claimed ejector are in subclasses
    247+.

            Articles retained for manual removal by an article releaser element
    are classified with the appropriate article releasing combination in
    subclasses 289+.

            Articles retained for manual removal by a dispensing type outlet
    are in subclasses 303+.

    Segregated articles delivered to hold-down means are not in this or the
    indented subclasses but may be found in subclass 239 when included in
    combinations involving discharge assistant means, and in subclass 294 where
    segregated articles may release holddown means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189,    for movably mounted supply containers delivering articles to
    stationary trap structures.

    210+,   see (1) Note above.

    239,    see (1) Note above.

    247,    see (1) Note above.

    255+,   see (1) Note above.

    289+,   see (1) Note above.

    294,    see (1) Note above.

    303+,   see (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 205 for fluent material dispensers in which
    nongravity means are used to feed materials to traps for manual removal.


CLS 221/192
TXT Devices under subclass 191 in which the fixed supporting surface or shelf
    is disposed above the level of the point of separation of the article from
    the source and the article is deposited thereon either by the discharge
    assistant or by some additional manipulating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254,    for dispensers having a discharge assistant movable through a
    stationary hopper to separate and elevate articles.


CLS 221/193
TXT Devices under subclass 191 in which the entrance or the path leading to the
    supporting means is provided with a static means for contact with a moving
    article approaching such support for the purpose of arresting at least part
    of its velocity.


CLS 221/194
TXT Devices under subclass 191 in which separated articles are free to fall to
    the stationary article support without the intervention of an affirmative
    carrying means.


CLS 221/195
TXT Devices under subclass 194 in which an affirmative means causes the
    separation of the article from the source prior to its deposit on a support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255+,   for article dispensers in which segregated articles are retained by
    the discharge assistant for manual removal.


CLS 221/196
TXT Devices under subclass 195 in which the affirmative separating means is
    provided with a compartment or cooperates with relatively fixed structure
    to form a compartment which substantially embraces the articles being
    discharged.


CLS 221/197
TXT Article dispensers under the class definition in which the receptacle for
    the articles to be dispensed is so related to a surrounding enclosure which
    has a discharge means or a dispensing type outlet that it is separable
    therefrom for either refilling or to be replaced by a full supply
    receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for similar combinations in dispensers which dispense flexible
    articles by concurrent separation and distortion of such articles.

    49,     for refill packages for article dispensers of the concurrent
    separation and distortion type.

    61+     and 281, for article dispensers having inlet means other than the
    egress outlet for replenishing the supply.

    287,    for article dispensers in which the articles are enclosed by a
    supply container which is removable from the remainder of the structure
    either with the articles or separate therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 325+ for similar arrangements in fluent
    material dispensers, and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 221/198
TXT Devices under subclass 197 having a force applying member operative through
    the articles in the separable and replaceable supply receptacle to urge
    such articles to a point of egress.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    279+,   for article dispensers having followers and see the search notes to
    that subclass for other pertinent search fields.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 326+ for similar combinations in fluent
    material dispensers.


CLS 221/199
TXT Article dispensers under the class definition (1) claimed in combination
    with features other than the supply container structure, the casing or
    support therefor, and discharge assisting or controlling means and not
    provided for in other classes or in preceding subclasses of this class; or
    (2) having means or parts capable of structural rearrangement or
    modification to selectively provide either a dispenser of some other kind
    or a device of some other description.

    (1)     Note.  This class is residual as to combinations of article
    dispensers and subject matter classifiable in other classes and takes such
    combinations only when such other classes do not provide for them.
    Examples of such combinations which are included in this subclass are;
    capped bottle dispensers with bottle uncapping means and straw delivery to
    the said bottle, substance penetrating and capsule feeding, dispensers with
    lubricating means, dispensers combined with a tray (such tray not
    qualifying as a second compartment), dispensers with fixed nondispenser
    operated display means, dispensers combined with article cleaning (e.g.,
    air draft) means, and dispensers combined with certain art devices which
    serve as supports or means for mounting such dispensers.

    See section IV of the class definition of this class for a listing of other
    classes which provide for article treating and modifying combinations which
    include article dispensing and note also in section IV a listing of classes
    having related material handling combinations.


CLS 221/200
TXT Article dispensers under the class definition having means to shake or stir
    either the supply container or the articles therein to impart either a
    small or large amplitude of motion to the articles relative to one another
    for the purpose of facilitating passage of the articles towards the
    discharge means.

    (1)     Note.  The agitating means must be means other than a discharge
    assisting means.  Thus, a dispenser having an element which applies an
    affirmative force to segregate articles from a supply container and which
    is so constructed that it inherently agitates articles in the supply
    container and does not have any structural addition or modification to
    perform an agitating function, is classified in the appropriate subclass
    under subclasses 208+.  See for example, subclass 254 in which are
    classified dispensers having discharge assistants movable through hoppers
    to elevate articles, such discharge assistants having an inherent
    incidental agitating function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156+,   for orienting type article dispensing devices, in which it is
    common to provide agitating means to stir a jumbled mass of articles in
    causing the orientation and dispensing of such articles.  See particularly
    subclasses 167+ directed to rotatable or oscillatable means for agitating
    and discharging the articles.

    175+,   for dispensers having means to form stacks of articles from sources
    of supply of articles originally otherwise arranged, and in which,
    generally, either the supply container or the outlet path is agitated or
    shaken.

    186+,   for dispensers in which the articles supply container is so mounted
    as to be movable to effect a dispensing operation.

    208+,   see (1) Note above.

    254,    see (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 161+, 195+, 196+, 216+, and 226+ for fluent
    material dispensers including agitating means.


CLS 221/201
TXT Devices under subclass 200 which include at least three serially acting
    agitating, vibrating or jarring means and/or means applying an affirmative
    force to push articles towards a point of egress, there being at least one
    agitating, vibrating or jarring means in the combination.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225,    for dispensers having three or more serially acting discharge
    assistants or article manipulating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 227 for similar combinations in fluent
    material dispensers, and subclass 254 for fluent material dispensers in
    which three or more discharge assistants are included.


CLS 221/202
TXT Devices under subclass 200 in which the shaking or stirring means is
    fixedly supported on or included in or within the structure of means which
    applies an affirmative force to articles to push them towards a point of
    egress.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183+,   for similar structures in stack forming article dispensers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 248 for fluent material dispensers having
    reciprocating agitator-discharge assistant constructions which are unitary.


CLS 221/203
TXT Devices under subclass 202 in which the discharge assistant and the
    associated shaking or stirring means are mounted to have movement about a
    fixed axis in one direction only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237,    for article dispensers having plural, serially acting rotary
    discharge assistants.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 242 for rotary coaxial agitator-discharge
    assistant constructions in which the agitator is rigidly mounted on the
    discharge assistant.


CLS 221/204
TXT Devices under subclass 200 in which the shaking or stirring of the articles
    in the supply container is caused by means imparting motion to one portion
    of the container structure relative to another portion thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    178+,   for dispensers having stack forming means in which a portion of the
    supply hopper or an element associated with the outlet is movable to stir
    or shake the article and/or form a stack thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 198 through 203 for fluent material
    dispensing devices involving jarring and/or vibrating of the fluent
    material in the operation of such dispensing devices and in which, in
    various ways, container sections are moved to effect such jarring and/or
    vibrating.


CLS 221/205
TXT Devices under subclass 204 in which the portion of the container structure
    which is moved has angular back and forth motion about a point of mounting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180,    for article dispensers having stack forming means including
    oscillating pivoted chute sections operating within the supply hopper.


CLS 221/206
TXT Article dispensers under the class definition having means to selectively
    vary the number of articles delivered as a result of a single operating
    cycle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94,     for devices for dispensing from plural sources by a single
    actuation, such devices being selective as to the number of sources
    dispensed therefrom.

    252,    for dispensers having article discharge assisting means and feeding
    to plural material outlets which are not selectively operable.

    296,    for dispensers in which plural controllers are spaced to dispense
    plural articles, no selective adjustability feature being present.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 14+ for fluent material dispensers having
    means to terminate material discharge, such mechanism being preset at the
    desired volume before discharge begins.


CLS 221/207
TXT Devices under subclass 206 in which the means to selectively vary the
    number of articles delivered per cycle is by a rearrangement of the
    relative position or size of parts of the dispenser organization.


CLS 221/208
TXT Article dispensers under the class definition having means to affirmatively
    segregate, separate or move the articles from a supply source toward a
    point of egress.

    (1)     Note.  The weight of the articles, alone, is not considered as an
    affirmative means for this and the indented subclasses.  The application of
    a force other than gravity tending to move an article or articles relative
    to other articles to effect a segregation or separation is necessary.

    (2)     Note.  Where an element applying a force to segregate articles has
    an agitating function as an incident thereof and has combined therewith
    some other discharge assisting means classification is in subclasses 200+.
     See also the note to the definition of subclass 200.

    (3)     Note.  Included in this group (see subclass 246 as an exception to
    the requirement that an affirmative force be applied to the article to
    effect segregation) are devices in which the sliding movement of the cover
    of a supply receptacle effects segregation of an article from the remainder
    of the supply, but does not necessarily affirmatively move any of the the
    articles.

    (4)     Note.  See section I, C subsection (4) of the class definition for
    a discussion of discharge assisting means as provided for in this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 251+ for equivalent discharge assistant
    dispensing combinations for the handling of fluent materials.


CLS 221/209
TXT Devices under subclass 208 in which the supply source is mounted upon a
    support for motion relative thereto and for positioning or alignment
    relative to the discharge assistant whereby the supply as a whole may be
    selectively positioned with respect to or advanced toward the discharge
    assistant to place the supply of articles, or a portion thereof, in the
    operative path of the discharge assistant.

    (1)     Note.  Substantially all of the articles and the immediate
    confining means move as a unit relative to the discharge, the supply
    quantity being substantially determinate and varied only by the number of
    articles dispensed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92+,    and especially subclasses 113 and 119+, for a plurality of
    dispensing sources which may move relative to a discharge means.

    186+,   for movably mounted supply containers in which the movement of the
    container is effective to separate or segregate the articles.

    197+,   for supply containers removable from an enclosing casing for
    refilling or replacement.


CLS 221/210
TXT Devices under subclass 208 in which the discharge assistant is provided
    with means or is of such form as to affirmatively hold articles during
    separation thereof from the supply as, for example, by gripping, piercing,
    adhesion, etc., as distinguished from structures which rely upon gravity or
    attitude or relatively stationary walls of the dispensing device to
    maintain the articles and discharge assistant in cooperative relationship.

    (1)     Note.  Oppositely disposed discharge assistants having
    ever-changing surface contact with opposite sides of articles as they are
    dispensed are not considered to be grippers for this and the indented
    subclasses and are classified in other appropriate subclasses, see for
    example subclass 259.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164+,   for orienting type article dispensing devices in which articles are
    selectively separated from the source of supply by movable lifting means
    engageable with portions of such articles.

    259,    see (1) Note, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 455+ for clasps, per se.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses for power-driven
    conveyors with such means, particularly subclasses 468.2+ and 688.1+.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, appropriate subclasses
    for hand and hoist-line grapples.


CLS 221/211
TXT Devices under subclass 210 in which the affirmative holding means operates
    by reducing the air or other fluid pressure on at least a part of articles
    to be engaged, the articles being thus affirmatively held thereto by the
    pressure of surrounding air or other fluid pressure medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    111,    Planting, subclasses 179+ and 185+ for bacuum type discharge
    assistants for dispensers claimed in combination with planting machines.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 428, 438, 449, and 689.1 for a
    conveyor having a suction type load holder.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 64.1+ for
    handling, hand and hoist-line implements in which the load engaging means
    is in the nature of a vacuum-cup element.


CLS 221/212
TXT Devices under subclass 210 in which the affirmative holding means is a
    magnet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 679 and 690.1 for a conveyor
    having magnetic load retaining means.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 65.5 for such
    implements in which magnetic means are incorporated for raising articles or
    material.


CLS 221/213
TXT Devices under subclass 210 in which the affirmative holding means is in the
    form of an element which penetrates the articles for transfer and discharge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30+,    for article dispensers including cutter or punch means for forming
    dispensing openings and for other purposes not related to a discharge
    assisting function.

    166,    for orienting type article dispensing devices in which selective
    separation of properly oriented articles from supply is effected by
    individual picker fingers entering apertures or depressions, etc., in such
    articles.

    240,    for discharge assistants which cooperates with preformed holes or
    apertures in the articles.

    259,    for discharge assistants which frictionally engage surfaces of the
    articles to discharge same and which may have projections or be roughened
    but do not penetrate the articles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 692 for a conveyor having load
    impalers.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 688 for
    assorting devices which assort and remove articles by the use of
    penetrating means.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 80+ for fluent material dispensers including
    cutters and punchers.


CLS 221/214
TXT Devices under subclass 213 having means to disengage or remove the articles
    from the impaling means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 128+ for cutlery implements combined with means
    to eject or strip material from such implements.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 693 for a conveyor having load
    impalers and means for assisting load removal from the latter.


CLS 221/215
TXT Devices under subclass 214 in which either a stripper element or an
    impaling element is actuated by a cam to impart motion relative to the
    normal position or path of travel of the other, to perform a stripping
    function.


CLS 221/216
TXT Devices under subclass 214 in which the means to disengage or remove the
    articles is a stripper element which is supported in a fixed position to a
    stationary part of the dispenser.


CLS 221/217
TXT Devices under subclass 210 in which the affirmative holding means engage
    the articles by pressure on several opposite sides of their exterior to
    transfer them for discharge and in which such holding means are mounted
    upon either a revolving or continuous member to be conveyed thereby through
    the transfer and discharge cycle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 468.2+ and 470.1+ for a rotary
    conveyor having load gripping members.


CLS 221/218
TXT Devices under subclass 217 in which the holding means are mounted on a
    continuous or endless member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 468.2+ and 470.1+ for an
    endless belt conveyor having load gripping members.


CLS 221/219
TXT Devices under subclass 217 in which the article holding means comprises
    article engaging elements which are mounted for swinging motion and to
    which relative motion is imparted by contact with tapered or curved
    surfaces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 468.2 and 470 for a conveyor
    having cam actuated load gripping members.


CLS 221/220
TXT Devices under subclass 210 in which the affirmative holding means comprise
    elements made of elastic material which exert a return pressure when bent
    out of their normal rest position.


CLS 221/221
TXT Devices under subclass 208 in which there are two or more discharge
    assistants positioned at spaced points about the periphery of the discharge
    path of the articles and acting on the same articles at the same time to
    compel discharge of the articles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    297,    for article dispensers having plural, circumposed and
    simultaneously acting mechanical releasing elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 43 for cabinet structures
    for cup shaped articles not including a dispensing feature.


CLS 221/222
TXT Devices under subclass 221 in which the multiple discharge assistants each
    has movement about a fixed axis in one direction only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277,    for dispensers having rotary article discharge assisting means, and
    see the notes thereto.


CLS 221/223
TXT Devices under subclass 221 in which the discharge assistants each has
    movement which is alternately forward and backward, to and fro, in
    alternate direction in an arcuate path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    268+,   for article dispensers having oscillating and reciprocating
    discharge assistants.


CLS 221/224
TXT Devices under subclass 208 having two or more discharge assistants or
    having at least one discharge assistant combined with article handling
    means which apply force to cause nongravity movement of the articles.

    (1)     Note.  Plural similar instrumentalities which are actuated by a
    common power source or linkage to concurrently engage one article and apply
    a discharging force to that article are considered to be a single discharge
    assistant and are excluded from this and the indented subclasses and are
    classified in appropriate subclasses below.

    Similarly, unitary or substantially unitary devices having pluralities of
    article engaging and discharge assisting surfaces (i.e., endless belt
    carried discharge assistants as in subclass 253, segregating chamber
    structures having plural chambers as in subclasses 263+, etc.) in which the
    surfaces carry successive articles through the same path to the outlet are
    excluded and placed in other appropriate classifications as indicated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157+    and 171+, for dispensing and orienting combinations including means
    for handling the articles subsequent to segregation from the source of
    supply.

    187,    for devices in which an article is dispensed in response to motion
    of a supply container, means being provided to subsequently move the
    dispensed article in a direction normal to that of the movement of said
    supply container.

    290+,   for dispensers having means to release articles, as by gravity, and
    to subsequently manipulate such articles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 252+ for fluent material dispensers having
    plural discharge assistant means.


CLS 221/225
TXT Devices under subclass 224 having three or more distinct discharge
    assistants or manipulating means arranged to serially act on the articles.

    (1)     Note.  One of the discharge assistants may be a follower.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201,    for similar combinations including at least one means for
    agitating, vibrating, or jarring articles in the supply container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 254, for similar combinations in fluent
    material dispensers, and subclass 227 for such combinations in which the
    first of the series is an agitator.


CLS 221/226
TXT Devices under subclass 224 in which one of the discharge assistants is for
    the type which applies a force which is exerted through all of the articles
    tending to move the entire supply toward the egress outlet, and which is
    movable relative to other supply supporting or containing structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    279+,   for article dispensers having followers and not including other
    discharge assisting means, and see the search notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 256+ for fluent material dispensing devices
    having followers combined with casing enclosed impellers.


CLS 221/227
TXT Devices under subclass 226 having (1) means to render the follower useless,
    (2) means to draw the follower back into the supply container, or (3) means
    to disengage the follower from movement obstructing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for article dispensers of the concurrent separation and distortion
    type having followers and replenishment interlocks therefor.


CLS 221/228
TXT Devices under subclass 226 in which the supply receptacle has an opening
    and a lid or closure therefor, and a discharge assistant which cooperates
    with or operates in said closure or lid to segregate articles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248+,   for similar structures not including a follower, and see the search
    notes thereto.


CLS 221/229
TXT Devices under subclass 228 in which the cooperation between the lid or
    closure and the discharge assistant is such that in the normal operation of
    the device, actuation of the discharge assistant to discharge articles is
    effected by movement of the closure or lid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for dispensers for concurrently separating and distorting flexible
    articles in which movement of a wall portion causes ejector operation, no
    follower being included.

    249,    for similar devices not including a follower.


CLS 221/230
TXT Devices under subclass 226 in which the follower and at least one other
    discharge assistant are provided with separate actuating means which are
    physically connected together so as to give controlled relative motion to
    the follower and discharge assistant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    234,    for article dispensers having segregating chamber and ejector means
    which are mechanically interconnected.


CLS 221/231
TXT Devices under subclass 226 in which a discharge assistant which has motion
    about a fixed axis in one direction only to act directly upon the article
    being separated to force the article from the source is included in
    combination with the follower.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277,    for article dispensers having rotary discharge assistants and see
    the search notes thereto.


CLS 221/232
TXT Devices under subclass 226 in which a discharge assistant which has a
    backward and forward, or to and fro motion to act directly upon the article
    bring separated to force the article from the source of supply is included
    in combination with the follower.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    268+,   for dispensers having reciprocating discharge assistants and see
    the search notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 40 for razors claimed in combination with
    dispensing type blade magazines, many of which include reciprocating
    discharge assistant means combined with followers.


CLS 221/233
TXT Devices under subclass 224 having a discharge assistant in the form of a
    movable compartment which embraces articles as they are separated from the
    supply source, and having other means to exert a force to discharge such
    articles from the compartment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263,    for dispensers having segregating chambers from which articles are
    removed by gravity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 216+ for similar combinations in fluent
    material dispensers.


CLS 221/234
TXT Devices under subclass 233 in which the segregating chamber and the means
    to exert a force to discharge the articles therefrom are physically
    connected together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246,    for dispensers for articles in which sliding cover movement is
    interrelated to discharge assistant actuation.

    248+,   for article dispensers having mechanically linked discharge
    assistants and outlet closures.


CLS 221/235
TXT Devices under subclass 233 in which the means to exert a force to discharge
    the articles is a movable element which is capable of extending into the
    segregating chamber and is gravity or spring biased so as to be normally so
    extended.


CLS 221/236
TXT Devices under subclass 224 in which the plurality of discharge assistant or
    handling means act individually and serially upon the articles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202+,   for article dispensers in which an agitator is rigidly mounted on
    or incorporated in a discharge assistant.

    225,    for similar combinations in which there are three or more serially
    acting discharge assistants.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 252+, for fluent material dispensers having
    plural discharge assistants.


CLS 221/237
TXT Devices under subclass 236 in which the plurality of discharge assistant
    and/or handling means each has movement about a fixed axis in one direction
    only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277,    for article dispensers having rotary discharge assistants, and see
    the search notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 236+ for fluent material dispensing devices
    in which a rotary agitator or discharge assistant is followed by another
    rotary discharge assistant to cause discharge of the fluent material.


CLS 221/238
TXT Devices under subclass 236 in which the plurality of discharge assistants
    and/or handling means each has a character of motion which is alternately
    forward and backward, to and fro, or in alternate directions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    268+,   for article dispensers having reciprocating discharge assistants
    and see the search notes to subclass 268.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 243+ for reciprocating (including
    oscillating) agitators or discharge assistant means followed by other
    reciprocating or oscillating discharge assistant means in fluent material
    dispensing devices.


CLS 221/239
TXT Devices under subclass 208 having means to receive and support segregated
    articles after they have been dispensed by the discharge assisting means
    and having associated therewith some means to detachably clamp or grip such
    articles.

    (1)     Note.  See section IV of the class definition for a discussion of
    the relationship of this subclass and of Class 221 in general to the
    various work modifying and work feeding classes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255+,   for article dispensers in which the articles dispensed are retained
    by the discharge assistant means for manual removal therefrom.

    294,    for similar devices in which the article segregation is by
    mechanical release rather than be discharge assisting means.


CLS 221/240
TXT Devices under subclass 208 in which the discharge assistant exerts its
    force either on irregularities or protuberances on the general outlines of
    the articles or upon portions of the articles which are doubled over upon
    the remainder of the articles or upon the material connecting such doubled
    over portions.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes discharge assistants which cooperate
    with a preformed hole or aperture in the articles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for dispensers in which flexible articles are discharged and
    concurrently distorted by ejecting means which cooperate with folds in the
    articles.

    156+,   for dispensers which segregate and orient articles with respect to
    irregularities or (protuberances) in the shapes of the articles, and
    especially subclasses 164+, wherein the articles are selectively separated
    from the supply by means engaging such irregularities.


CLS 221/241
TXT Devices under subclass 208 in which means are provided to selectively vary
    the dimensions of the dispenser or some part thereof to thereby accommodate
    different size articles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for dispensers for flexible articles which are adaptable to use
    with different size articles.

    304,    for outlet size adjusting means for article dispensers.


CLS 221/242
TXT Devices under subclass 241 in which the supply source dimensions are
    selectively variable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65,     for article dispensers in which the supply container telescopes or
    collapses as the articles are dispensed therefrom.


CLS 221/243
TXT Devices under subclass 208 wherein the connection between the actuating
    means and the discharge assistant is such that during part of its discharge
    assisting actuating travel the actuator or a part thereof may move without
    producing any movement of the discharge assistant, or wherein a wall or
    walls of the outlet area or receiving area for the dispensed articles are
    movably mounted and biased to normal position, yielding under pressure of
    jammed or over supplied articles to provide additional space for articles
    or to allow some of them to escape from the desired dispensing path.

    (1)     Note.  The lost motion in the actuator may be for delay or
    correlation of operations, although its usual purpose is to avoid breakage
    if the articles jam or an over-supply accumulates.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for article dispensing devices having timing or delay mechanism.

    21,     for article dispensers with malfunctioning responsive means which
    (1) supply the deficiency of articles by means other than restoring the
    device to operative condition, (2) change the mode of operation of the
    device to overcome the difficulty or (3) stop the operation of the
    dispenser.

    64,     for dispensers having yieldable walls which are manipulated to
    release or expel articles.

    160+,   for means for removing improperly positioned articles from a
    previously aligned row in a dispenser for orienting and discharging
    asymmetrical articles.

    168,    for means to relieve jamming or over supply in rotary or
    oscillating feeders which orient articles by selective separation from the
    supply.

    233+,   for article dispensers having means to remove articles from a
    movable segregating chamber, and see the search notes to those subclasses.

    252,    for plural material outlets in article dispensers having discharge
    assistants.

    267,    for dispensers which normally eject the article through a
    resiliently restricted outlet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses for mechanical
    movements and control lever and linkage systems having lost motion
    provisions.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 455+ for line condition change
    responsive valves, especially subclass 527 for direct response pivoted
    valves.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 318 for discharge assistants for fluent
    material which have means to return dispensed material to the supply;
    subclasses 337+ and 512 for fluent material dispensers having material
    confining walls which are yieldably mounted and normally biased to joint
    sealing position; subclasses 345+ for striking or cleaning means for
    movable or conveyor type trap chambers for dispensing fluent materials.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 77+ for valve actuators
    having lost motion provisions.


CLS 221/244
TXT Devices under subclass 208 in which the discharge assisting means is of
    such a nature and is so supported that it changes its position of rest
    relative to the container and the plane of its action in order to engage
    successive article as the supply is progressively depleted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 405 for fluent material dispensing devices
    having discharge assistants in which the discharge of material is from the
    top of the supply.


CLS 221/245
TXT Devices under subclass 208 in which the discharge assistant includes means
    to prevent retrograde motion prior to completion of a full discharging
    cycle to insure a full stroke of the mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 375 for fluent material dispensers having a
    discharge assistant and provided with full stroke mechanism.


CLS 221/246
TXT Devices under subclass 208 in which the supply container is a receptacle
    having an opening and lid or closure which has sliding motion across the
    said opening and in which segregation is caused by the sliding motion of
    the lid or closure.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes devices in which sliding movement of
    the cover acts to segregate an article from the remainder of the supply,
    but does not necessarily affirmatively move any of the article.  See (3)
    Note to the definition of subclass 208.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149,    for article dispensers combined with igniting means in which
    movement of a container part initiates operation of the lighter and
    dispenser combination.

    269,    for article dispensers having reciprocating discharge assistants
    with integral outlet closures, and see the search notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 37+ and 38+ for a pocket
    type receptacle not including discharge assistant means, or other structure
    of a nature to define an article dispenser under the class definition of
    Class 221.


CLS 221/247
TXT Devices under subclass 208 in which the discharge assistant directly
    engages and pushes the article to be dispensed toward an egress outlet, the
    egress outlet having a closure member which operates independently of the
    segregating function and which has motion relative to the ejector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for dispensers for flexible articles having ejecting means which
    are actuated by source container section movement.

    228,    for article dispensing devices having followers and having also
    ejecting elements which are related to source container cover structures.

    246,    for article dispensing devices in which segregation is caused by
    sliding movement of a cover element relative to the container, and see the
    search notes thereto.

    267,    for ejectors pushing articles individually through a dispensing
    type outlet.

    306,    for article dispensers having a dispensing type outlet and separate
    closure means to control access to the segregated articles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 380 and 387 for fluent material dispensers
    having discharge assisting means and valved outlets.


CLS 221/248
TXT Devices under subclass 247 in which (1) the discharge assistant and the
    closure means are physically interconnected so as to have controlled
    movement relative to one another or to the egress opening, or (2) the
    discharge assistant is so arranged as to prevent operation of the closure
    in certain positions of its operating cycle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for flexible article dispensers having ejecting means which are
    actuated by source container movement.

    81,     for cellular magazine type article dispensers having interrelated
    ejector and magazine advancing means.

    83,     for cellular magazine type article dispensers having interrelated
    magazine advancing and outlet operating means.

    228+,   for similar combinations including also a follower.

    246,    for article dispensing devices in which discharge assisting means
    are so related to a sliding container cover that movement of the cover
    causes segregation of articles from the source of supply.

    269,    for article dispensers having reciprocating discharge assistants
    with outlet closure structures integral therewith.

    293,    for dispensers having mechanical release means followed by article
    manipulation means, the two being mechanically interrelated.


CLS 221/249
TXT Devices under subclass 248 in which the connection between the closure and
    the discharge assistant is such that, in the normal operation of the
    device, movement of the closure results in operation of the discharge
    assistant to discharge articles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for dispensers for concurrently separating and distorting flexible
    articles in which movement of a wall portion causes ejector operation, no
    follower being included.

    229,    for follower and ejector combinations, the ejector being operated
    by the movement of a source container cover.


CLS 221/250
TXT Devices under subclass 247 in which the closure is opened by a force
    imparted to it through an emerging article by a discharge assistant.


CLS 221/251
TXT Devices under subclass 208 having means other than the discharge assistant
    or the edge of the egress opening for engaging articles other than the
    article to be discharged to restrain such articles from movement in an
    egress direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221+,   for dispensers having multiple, simultaneously acting and
    circumposed discharge assistants which are mostly for separating and
    dispensing stacked cup shaped articles and usually include holdback means.


CLS 221/252
TXT Devices under subclass 208 having a plurality of points of egress towards
    which the discharge assistant forces the article to be dispensed.

    (1)     Note.  One egress point may be a pressure operated release for
    surplus article discharged or those which are rejected by the discharge
    assistant, through which articles leave the system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for devices for forming plural stacks from a single source of
    supply.

    93+,    for devices for dispensing plural articles from plural sources by a
    single actuation.

    243,    for article dispensing devices having discharge assistant means and
    in which yieldable walls are provided in the outlet path which move under
    the pressure of jammed or over supplied articles to allow such articles to
    escape from or be removed from the discharge path, and see the search notes
    to that subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 330+ for fluent material dispensers provided
    with discharge assistants and having plural material outlets, and
    subclasses 478+ for such dispensers not having claimed discharge assistants.


CLS 221/253
TXT Devices under subclass 208 in which the discharge assistant is carried by
    or formed in or by a continuous web.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77+     and 84+, for conveyor belt mounted cellular magazine type article
    dispensing devices.

    218,    for dispensers having article gripping, conveyor belt mounted
    discharge assistant means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses for conveyor
    formed of or including in their structure, an endless belt; particularly
    subclasses 688.1+ for an endless belt having load adhering or friction
    enhancing means; subclasses 701+ for an endless belt carrying buckets;
    subclasses 793+ for an endless belt carrying platforms; and 804+ for an
    apron type endless belt conveyor supporting a load on a surface thereof.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 415 for fluent material dispensing devices
    having endless belt type discharge assisting means.


CLS 221/254
TXT Devices under subclass 208 in which the discharge assistant comprises means
    movable within the supply container and through the supply to segregate and
    raise articles to a point of discharge, said point of discharge being at a
    higher elevation than the articles in the container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164,    for orienting type article dispensing devices in which movable
    lifting means engage the articles and lift them to separate them from the
    source of supply.

    179+,   for stack forming article dispensers in which movable chutes or
    parts thereof within the supply hopper lift the articles therefrom in
    dispensing them and forming stacks thereof.

    190,    for dispensers having a vertically movable supply container which
    may have a normally stationary ejector extending into the supply container
    to segregate an article in response to the vertical movement.

    192,    for similar devices in which the elevated articles are deposited
    upon a raised support for manual removal.

    253,    for endless belt carried discharge assistants which move through a
    supply hopper to separate articles and raise them to an elevated point of
    discharge.


CLS 221/255
TXT Devices under subclass 208 in which the discharge assistant has means or a
    surface other than the means or surface which imparts the segregating
    motion to articles for supporting or holding the segregated articles for
    removal by hand after their removal from the source of supply.

    (1)     Note.  The surfaces of a trap chamber of the single inlet and
    outlet type, as provided for in subclass 266 serve variously to push the
    article in a segregating direction and to support the article.
    Accordingly, such devices are classified in subclass 256, indented under
    this subclass, when they retain the articles for manual removal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239,    for article dispensers in which discharge assisting means deliver
    segregated

    254,    for devices having a discharge assistant which separates and raises
    articles to an elevated point of discharge, the discharge assistant usually
    retaining the article for manual removal.

    266,    see (1) Note above.

    294,    for article dispensers in which mechanical means release articles
    for delivery to hold-down means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 205 for fluent material dispensers having
    nongravity means to feed to traps for manual removal of the material
    therefrom.


CLS 221/256
TXT Devices under subclass 255 in which the discharge assistant has a recess or
    pocket for holding the articles for manual removal.


CLS 221/257
TXT Devices under subclass 256 wherein the discharge assistant is so formed as
    to facilitate ready removal of an article from the recess or pocket as, for
    example, with a finger receiving slot.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    309,    for devices having dispensing type outlets which are relieved to
    permit ready grasping of articles for manual removal.


CLS 221/258
TXT Devices under subclass 208 in which the discharge assistant is actuated by
    a motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 333+ for motor-operated discharge assistants
    for fluent material dispensers, and see the search notes thereto for other
    subclasses in Class 222 which may involve motor operation of such
    dispensers.


CLS 221/259
TXT Devices under subclass 208 wherein the discharge assistant applies force to
    an article only by frictional contact with a surface of the article, the
    force being substantially tangent or parallel to the surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for dispensers of the concurrent separation and distortion type
    having positive roller type discharge assisting means.

    213+,   for impaling type discharge assistants which pierce the surface of
    the article to discharge same.


CLS 221/260
TXT Devices under subclass 208 in which the discharge assistant or the actuator
    therefor includes at least one member which is flexible, such member
    necessarily flexing incident to the discharge operation.

    (1)     Note.  A spring biased discharge assistant as distinguished from a
    spring form discharge assistant is not here included, but is classified
    elsewhere in this group according to the type of discharge assistant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    253,    for article dispensers having deformable discharge assistants of
    the endless belt type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 406+ for fluent material dispensers having
    deformable discharging elements.


CLS 221/261
TXT Devices under subclass 208 in which the discharge assistant acts directly
    upon the article being separated and pushes the article against a guide to
    alter its direction of travel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233+,   for article direction changing deflectors or ejectors which
    cooperate with and enter movable segregating chambers to displace articles
    therefrom.

    312,    for article dispensers having interior article guiding means and
    see the search notes thereto for related search fields.


CLS 221/262
TXT Devices under subclass 208 in which the discharge assistant in discharging
    articles partakes of more than one character of motion, either
    simultaneously or successively, in the normal operation thereof (as
    rotating and reciprocating or reciprocating and swinging, etc.) or partakes
    of motions which are discontinuous and in different unaligned paths if of
    the same character.

    (1)     Note.  Rotation is considered to be only one character of motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for article dispensers which distort flexible articles as they are
    separated and in which the discharge assistants have compound motion.

    214+,   for article dispensers with discharge assistants which have
    impaling means and which strip articles from the impaling means by a motion
    of the discharge assistant which may be a compound motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 357 for fluent material dispensing devices
    having trap chamber structures which partake of a compound movement in
    performing the dispensing function, and subclass 404 for fluent material
    dispensers having other types of discharge assistants with compound motions.


CLS 221/263
TXT Devices under subclass 208 in which the discharge assistant is provided
    with a compartment or cooperates with relatively fixed structure to form a
    compartment which substantially embraces the article being discharged for
    at least a portion of the discharge movement.

    (1)     Note.  See the reference to Class 222, paragraph (d) in search
    class notes to section VI of the class definition of this class (221) for a
    statement of the line between Classes 222 and 221 as to trap (segregating)
    chamber structures.

    (2)     Note.  The compartment may be of skeleton or lattice form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189,    for pivotally mounted supply containers delivering to fixed trap
    chambers, the relative motion and the nature of the elements being similar
    to those classified in this and the indented subclasses.

    196,    for article dispensers of the type in which articles are released
    for gravity deposit on a support for manual removal and in which the
    articles are so released by movable segregating chamber discharge assisting
    means.

    210+,   for article adhering or gripping type discharge assistants in which
    the articles are affirmatively held or gripped as they are removed from the
    source of supply.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 344+ for fluent material dispensers having
    movable or conveyor trap chambers.


CLS 221/264
TXT Devices under subclass 263 in which the segregating chamber has both an
    ingress and egress which are in line so as to provide a through passage.


CLS 221/265
TXT Devices under subclass 264 in which the segregating chamber partakes of a
    rotary motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 370 for fluent material dispensers having
    rotary conveyor type trap chambers with axial inlets and outlets.


CLS 221/266
TXT Devices under subclass 263 in which the segregating chamber has one opening
    which serves both for the ingress from the supply and for discharge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256+,   for article dispensers which have segregating chambers in which
    articles are retained for manual removal after being separated from the
    supply.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 363+, 366 and 368, for fluent material
    dispensers having trap chambers of the single inlet-outlet type.


CLS 221/267
TXT Devices under subclass 208 in which the egress is provided with elastic or
    spring biased means which serve to retain and hold back the articles in the
    supply source and against which means articles are successively brought to
    bear by an ejector as they are discharged.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247+,   for ejector combinations involving relatively movable closure
    means, which closure means act to release articles only after they have
    been segregated from the supply source.

    307,    for resilient dispensing type outlets.


CLS 221/268
TXT Devices under subclass 208 in which the discharge assistant has a character
    of motion which is alternately forward and backward, to and fro, or in
    reverse directions in the same path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180,    for stack forming article dispensers in which oscillating pivoted
    chute sections operate within the supply hopper to assist discharge of
    articles therefrom.

    232,    for article dispensing devices having a follower mechanism combined
    with reciprocating (including oscillating) ejector means.

    238,    for article dispensing devices having plural discharge assistants
    separately acting in series, all of which are reciprocating (including
    oscillating).

    292,    for article dispensers in which articles which have been segregated
    by gravity release means are acted upon by force applying means to cause a
    reciprocating movement thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 409+ for fluent material dispensers having
    reciprocating (including oscillating) discharge assistants, and see the
    search notes thereto.


CLS 221/269
TXT Devices under subclass 268 in which the egress opening is provided with a
    closure, the closure, and the discharge assistant being rigidly connected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for dispensers which concurrently separate and distort flexible
    articles and in which ejecting means are actuated by source container
    section movement.

    149,    for article dispensers combined with igniting means in which
    movement of a container part initiates operation of the combination device.

    228+,   for article dispensers having follower structures combined with
    ejecting means in which the ejecting means is interrelated with the source
    container cover for cooperation therewith.

    246,    for dispensers which segregate by sliding movement of a cover
    relative to container.

    247,    having ejecting means and relatively movable outlet closure
    structures.


CLS 221/270
TXT Devices under subclass 268 in which the discharge assistant includes an
    article engaging part or section which is drawn back toward or within its
    supporting means to avoid jamming or interference with other articles on
    its return stroke.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262,    for article dispensing devices in which discharge assistant means
    have compound motion for effecting the segregating function.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 343 for fluent material dispensing devices
    having discharge assisting means provided with retractable projections.


CLS 221/271
TXT Devices under subclass 268 in which a discharge assistant is resiliently
    urged to discharge an article in its return to rest position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    276,    for article dispensers having other types of spring biasing for
    reciprocating discharge assistants, and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 221/272
TXT Devices under subclass 268 in which the motion of the discharge assistant
    is imparted by means having motion relative to the discharge assistant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 505+ for fluent material dispensers having
    relatively movable actuators for outlet elements, and see the search notes
    thereto.


CLS 221/273
TXT Devices under subclass 272 in which motion of the discharge assistant is
    imparted by the movement of a tapering or eccentrically curving body.


CLS 221/274
TXT Devices under subclass 272 in which motion of the discharge assistant is
    imparted by the movement of rigid linkages turnable on pivots.


CLS 221/275
TXT Devices under subclass 272 in which the motion of the discharge assistant
    is imparted by the movement of a rotatable body by rolling contact.


CLS 221/276
TXT Devices under subclass 268 in which the discharge assistant is resiliently
    urged in either of its directions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 336+ for fluent material dispensers having
    biasing means generally, and see particularly subclasses 340+ for such
    devices in which the biasing means is for a reciprocating piston or
    follower type material impelling device.


CLS 221/277
TXT Devices under subclass 208 in which the discharge assistant has movement
    about a fixed axis in one direction only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42+,    for article dispensers of the concurrent separation and distortion
    type having rotary ejecting means.

    167,    for orienting type article dispensers having rotatable or
    oscillatable means to effect the selective separation of articles from a
    source of supply.

    182,    for article dispensers of the stack forming type in which members
    rotatable or oscillatable about inclined axes are effective to segregate
    articles from a source of supply.

    203,    for article dispensers having means to agitate the articles in the
    supply container and including rotary discharge assisting and agitating
    means.

    222+,   for dispensers having multiple, simultaneously acting and
    circumposed, rotary discharge assistants.

    231,    for dispensers including followers combined with rotary ejectors.

    237,    for dispensers having other types of plural discharge assistants,
    all of which have rotary motion.

    265,    for article dispensers having movable segregating chamber type
    discharge assistants which partake of a rotary motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    111,    Planting, subclasses 177+ for rotary discharge assistants for seed
    dispensers claimed in combination with a planting machine.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 410+ for fluent material dispensers having
    rotary discharge assisting means, and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 221/278
TXT Devices under subclass 208 in which the discharge assistant comprises a
    nonsolid force applying medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211,    for discharge assistants comprising suction carriers for articles.

    258,    for article dispensers which are operated by motors, including
    fluid motors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 630+ for fluent material dispensing devices
    having fluid flow discharge means, and subclasses 394+ for fluid pressure
    discharge assistant means in fluent material dispensers.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, appropriate subclasses for apparatus
    wherein carriers are pneumatically dispatched between stations or
    terminals.  See particularly subclasses 108+ for 221 type dispensers which
    serve as intakes to fluid current conveyors.


CLS 221/279
TXT Devices under subclass 208 in which the discharge assistant applies a force
    which is exerted through all of the articles tending to move the entire
    supply of articles toward the egress outlet, and has motion relative to
    other structure which supports or contains the supply of articles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for article dispensers in which latch means on a follower engage a
    discharge means to inhibit further actuation of the discharge means when
    the source of supply is empty.

    52      and 56+, for dispensers for concurrently separating and distorting
    flexible articles, said dispensers having followers.

    226+,   for article dispensers having plural discharge assistants one of
    which is a follower.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 386+ for fluent material dispensing devices
    including follower structures, and see the search notes thereto.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 71 for cabinet structures
    having article removal facilitating means and a follower for stacked
    articles.


CLS 221/280
TXT Devices under subclass 279 including additional static means in the path of
    the moving supply serving to effect movement of the leading articles
    sidewise of the said supply toward the outlet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    311,    for article dispensers, having deflector means for partially
    separating articles from a supply source.

    312,    for article dispensers having interior article guiding means, and
    see the search notes thereto.


CLS 221/281
TXT Article dispensers under the class definition in which a supply container
    or dispensing means associated therewith has an egress opening and some
    other opening, the latter opening being for replacing the supply when
    depleted, or for affording admittance for some other purpose, as for
    example, for adjustment or for clearing of jams.

    (1)     Note.  Shifting or removal of the container or a part thereof to
    give access to the handling means is included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61+,    for article dispensers of the type which concurrently distort
    articles as they are dispensed and which are provided with separate
    replenishment inlet means.

    66,     for similar structures in which the separate inlet is for the
    insertion of a replacement article to cause dispensing.

    228+,   for other source container covers which additionally include a
    discharge assistant which cooperate with or operate in said cover to
    segregate articles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 478+ for fluent material dispensers having
    plural openings or discharge guide for purposes of refilling access, etc.


CLS 221/282
TXT Article dispensers under the class definition having either (1) an outer
    covering enclosing the dispenser in whole or in part or (2) particular
    means for maintaining a dispenser unit or entity against the force of
    gravity, such means being more than the mere means of sustaining one part
    of the device relative to another or mere nominal base or pedestal means.

    (1)     Note.  The maintaining or supporting means or the exterior casing
    must be in addition to the wall structure of the article holding container
    or magazine and its discharge means.  Thus, if the casing serves directly
    as a magazine or hopper and its extended sidewall merely houses the
    actuating means or an outlet chute or spout, classification is not in this
    group but in appropriate other subclasses.  Conversely, if supporting means
    or casing structure in addition to that which merely houses the articles or
    dispensing means is significantly claimed, or if a particular supporting or
    maintaining means or casing structure is claimed, classification is in this
    and the indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45+,    for similar combinations in dispensers which concurrently separate
    and distort flexible articles.

    185,    for article dispensers which are supported on the body or otherwise
    supported for mobility.

    186+,   for supply containers which are mounted in such a way that
    dispensing of articles depends upon motion of the containers.

    191+,   for enclosed dispensers including means delivering the segregated
    articles to an exterior stationary article receiving support.

    197+,   for article dispensing combinations including a supply cartridge or
    container removable from an enclosing casing.

    287,    for article dispensers having a removable container which encloses
    the supply of articles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 173+ for fluent material dispensing
    combinations including casing or support structures, subclasses 325+ for
    fluent material dispensers having cartridges or removable chambers as the
    supply source thereof, and subclass 179 for foot pedal operated fluent
    material dispensers.

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses for support structures, per se, or
    in combination with nominally included containers of various types.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, appropriate subclasses for cabinet
    structures including article holding means of types not involving
    dispensing under this class definition.


CLS 221/283
TXT Devices under subclass 282 in which the article dispensing device is
    supported in its operative position, by either (1) means of greater height
    than the dispensing device and from which the dispensing device is hung, or
    (2) by a frame member attachable to the dispensing device and, at one side
    thereof, to a wall or other supporting surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 180 for fluent material dispensers which are
    bracket or suspension supported.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 200+ and 317+ for brackets and suspended
    supports in general.


CLS 221/284
TXT Devices under subclass 282 in which the support has weight means
    incorporated therein to stabilize the structure against movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 463 for fluent material dispensers having
    weights incorporated in the receptacle structure.


CLS 221/285
TXT Devices under subclass 282 in which the support is of such structure that
    the receptacle which forms the source of supply is held in a position in
    which its longitudinal axis is inclined to the horizontal.


CLS 221/286
TXT Devices under subclass 282 in which the casing or outer covering is of such
    proportions and so positioned relative to the dispenser as to provide an
    intervening space between the casing and the dispenser.

    (1)     Note.  The space between the dispenser and the outer casing must
    not be for removable storage of articles or other material but merely for
    dead air or nonremovable material.  Where such a space stores matter for
    dispensing or for other types of removal, classification is in this class,
    in subclasses 92+ and especially in subclasses 97+ where the spaced
    covering provides a nondispensing compartment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92+,    and especially 97+.  See (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 131 for fluent material dispensers having at
    least one compartment, container or spaced jacket which is not for
    dispensing, and subclass 183 for jacketed fluent material dispensers.


CLS 221/287
TXT Article dispensers under the class definition having a receptacle
    disconnectibly associated with dispensing, release or outlet means in such
    a manner as to house the articles to be dispensed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    197+,   for article dispensers in which a supply enclosing container
    (cartridge) is removably insertable within an enclosing casing or housing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 325+ for fluent material dispensers having
    an insertable supply cartridge or removable supply container.


CLS 221/288
TXT Article dispensers under the class definition having a segregating chamber
    so connected to the source of supply that the organization must be tilted
    either to segregate an article to place it in the chamber or to discharge
    the article therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  The distinction between this subclass 288 and subclasses
    186+ is that in the patents placed in the latter group there must be a
    claimed mounting for the container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186+,   for dispensing supply containers movably mounted for article
    dispensing purposes.  See (1) Note above.

    246,    for dispensers, usually of the pill-box type, in which the
    receptacle cover and container are slidingly moved relative to one another
    to segregate an article, and the dispenser is then titled to discharge the
    article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 454+ for similar tiltable container trap
    type dispensing devices for fluent material.


CLS 221/289
TXT Article dispensers under the class definition in which articles to be
    dispensed are segregated from a source of supply by the alternate
    interposition and removal of means in the path of normal gravitational
    movement of the articles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 476 for fluent material dispensers having
    spaced, alternately seated flow controllers or closures for a single outlet.


CLS 221/290
TXT Devices under subclass 289 having means for applying a force to cause
    nongravity movement of the segregated articles subsequent to the
    segregation of such articles from the source of supply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156+    and 171+, for dispensing devices including article orienting means
    and especially subclasses 171+ for orienting by the manipulation of
    successive individual articles which have been previously segregated from a
    source of supply.

    224+,   for article dispensing devices including discharge assistant means
    and having subsequent article manipulating means.


CLS 221/291
TXT Devices under subclass 290 in which the means for applying a force is of a
    type which rotates the vertical axis of the articles through substantially
    180o.


CLS 221/292
TXT Devices under subclass 290 in which the means for applying a force has a
    back and forth straight line motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    268+,   for article dispensing devices provided with discharge assisting
    means of a reciprocating nature, and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 221/293
TXT Devices under subclass 292 in which the means interposable and removable
    from the path of the articles to effect segregation thereof and the means
    to apply a force to subsequently move said articles are mechanically
    co-related so as to have controlled movement relative to one another.


CLS 221/294
TXT Devices under subclass 289 having means to receive and support segregated
    articles after they have been dispensed by the releasing or separating
    means and having associated therewith some means to detachably clamp or
    grip such articles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239,    for similar devices in which article segregation is caused by
    discharge assisting means and see section IV of the class definition for a
    discussion of the relationship of this subclass and of Class 221 in general
    to the various work modifying and work feeding classes.


CLS 221/295
TXT Devices under subclass 289 having a blocking means preventing the operation
    of the article segregating means, such latter means in the normal
    gravitational path of movement of the articles being operated by the weight
    of the articles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151+,   for means blocking or disabling an ejector or releaser and having a
    force applying means operative to affirmatively operate said ejector or
    releaser, and see the search notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 491+ for fluent material dispensers having
    outlet elements operated by the pressure (weight) of the contents.


CLS 221/296
TXT Devices under subclass 289 in which the means interposable and removable
    from the path of the articles is so arranged, either by the placing of
    pluralities of such elements or otherwise, as to result in the segregation
    of more than one article at each cycle of operation of the device.


CLS 221/297
TXT Devices under subclass 289 in which there are two or more sets of removable
    and interposable members, the sets being positioned at spaced points about
    the periphery of the discharge path of the articles, and acting on the same
    article at the same time to control the release of the articles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221+,   for article dispensers having multiple discharge assistants which
    are similarly placed and actuated, i.e., multiple, simultaneously acting
    and circumposed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 43 for cabinet structures
    for cup shaped articles but not including a dispensing feature.


CLS 221/298
TXT Devices under subclass 289 having a plurality of interposable and removable
    members which are separately mounted at positions spaced along the
    discharge path of the article and which have movement relative to each
    other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 425+, especially subclass 445 for fluent
    material type dispensers having stationary trap chambers with cut-offs
    therefor.


CLS 221/299
TXT Devices under subclass 289 having a plurality of alternately interposable
    and removable members which are spaced along the discharge path and are
    immovably connected with one another by virtue of attachment to a common
    supporting element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263+,   for discharge assisting movable segregating chambers, some of which
    are in the form of plural integral transversely acting article embracing
    members which not only control gravity movement of articles but also impart
    an affirmative segregating force thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 451+ for fluent material type dispensers
    having stationary trap chambers with rigidly interconnected or unitary
    cut-offs for both the inlets and outlets thereof.


CLS 221/300
TXT Devices under subclass 299 in which there are at least three commonly
    supported, interposable and removable members spaced along the path of
    egress.


CLS 221/301
TXT Devices under subclass 299 in which the supporting element is so mounted as
    to have angular back and forth movement about the point of mounting.


CLS 221/302
TXT Article dispensers under the class definition in which the egress opening
    for the articles is provided with means which initially block passage of
    article through said opening and which must be broken, torn, or otherwise
    ruptured to allow the passage of articles therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31+,    for article dispensers having frangible outlets in which a separate
    instrumentality is included in combination with the frangible or knockout
    portion, to cut, pierce or break it.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 265 for frangible or knockout type closures
    for metallic receptacles, and subclass 260 for opening devices of the
    closures of metallic receptacles which are combinations of cutting,
    puncturing or ripping means with weakened or frangible portions of such
    receptacles.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 541.1+ for dispensing devices of the fluent
    material type provided with frangible elements for the outlets thereof, and
    subclasses 81+ for combinations of such structures with cutters or punches
    to form dispensing openings in the containers.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 200+ for
    severing means for opening a paperboard box.


CLS 221/303
TXT Article dispensers under the class definition comprising an egress opening
    of lesser extent than the dimensions of the articles to be delivered as
    stored, or having some other means whereby succeeding articles are
    successively retarded or held back from escape therethrough.

    (1)     Note.  See section I, C, of the class definition subsection (1) for
    a discussion of discharge outlet means as provided for in this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33+,    for dispensers for flexible articles in which the outlet openings
    are of lesser extent than the articles and in which the articles are
    distorted as they are separated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 566+ for fluent material dispensers having
    nozzles, spouts or pouring devices.


CLS 221/304
TXT Devices under 303 in which the dimensions of the opening or the retarding
    means are selectively variable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for dispensers from which flexible articles are concurrently
    distorted and separated and which are adaptable for use with different size
    articles.

    241+,   for article dispensers having discharge assistants and size
    adjusting means, particularly subclass 241 for outlet size adjusting means.


CLS 221/305
TXT Devices under 303 in which the dispensing unit is initially in
    substantially planar knock-down form, and which is folded to form the
    dispensing assembly.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 100+ for a
    folded blank paperboard box.


CLS 221/306
TXT Devices under subclass 303 in which the egress opening is provided with a
    closure means.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition, section III for a definition of
    the term "closure".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247+,   for article dispensers having discharge assistants and relatively
    movable outlet closure means.

    269,    for article dispensers having reciprocating discharge assistants
    with integral outlet closures.


CLS 221/307
TXT Devices under subclass 303 in which the egress opening is provided with
    elastic means which tend to return to normal shape after being distorted by
    the withdrawal of an article.

    (1)     Note.  In this and the indented subclasses, "resilient" or
    "elastic" is construed to include spring biased article retaining or hold
    back means which means is effective on each article successively.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243,    for yieldable wall structures for emergency release of articles
    being forcibly discharged, in case of jamming or over-supply by the
    discharge assistant.


CLS 221/308
TXT Devices under subclass 307 comprising a plurality of elastic means which
    are spaced along the discharge path to successively engage the articles
    upon withdrawal thereof.


CLS 221/309
TXT Devices under subclass 307 in which the egress opening is relieved exposing
    a portion of the article to thereby permit grasping of the article for
    removal.

    (1)     Note.  These devices are by disclosure mostly adapted for slender,
    cylindrical articles, such as matches.


CLS 221/310
TXT Devices under subclass 307 in which the elastic means comprises a
    multiplicity of members supported along one edge only.


CLS 221/311
TXT Article dispensers under the class definition in which a means to conduct
    the dispensed articles to a discharge point in provided with a portion near
    said point which abruptly deviates from the normal direction of the
    conducting means in order to dispose the last article or articles in a more
    accessible location or position.

    (1)     Note.  See section I, C, subsection 2 (c) and section VIII of the
    class definition for further discussions of this subject matter, including
    statements as to the lines with other classes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312,    for article dispensers having interior article guiding means, and
    see the search notes thereto.


CLS 221/312
TXT Article dispensers under the class definition not otherwise provided for.

    (1)     Note.  For example, in this subclass are accumulated, as originals
    and cross-references, interior guiding means for directing articles to the
    outlet as in a thin stream, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41+,    for dispensers of the concurrent separation and distortion type
    having stationary guide or abutment means to deflect the leading edges of
    flexible articles as they are moved toward or through a discharge outlet.

    55,     for dispensers of the concurrent separation or distortion type
    having stationary guide or abutment means acting on noncoextensive folds.

    261,    for article dispensers in which an ejector acts directly on an
    article being separated and pushes the article against a guide to alter the
    direction of travel.

    280,    for article dispensers in which a follower and a static means in
    the path of the moving supply causes movement of the leading article
    sideways of said path towards an outlet point.

    311,    for article dispensers having a deflector or material guide for
    partially separating articles being conducted along a path to a discharge
    point.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 564 for fluent material dispensers having
    interior material guides or restrictors.


CLS 222/
TTL DISPENSING

CLS 222/
TXT EXPLANATION OF MAIN CLASS DEFINITIONS AND NOTES:

    The main class definition and notes are divided into the following sections:

    1,      2:      General statement of class subject matter

    3:      General line with other classes

    4:      Gas and vapor dispensers

    5:      Article dispensing

    6:      Volume or rate of flow meters, recorders, registers

    7:      Drip, leakage or waste catchers

    8:      Combinations of dispenser and independent receiver

    9:      Pumps

    10:     Discharge assistants (e.g., impellers, pumps, conveyors, movable
    trap chambers, etc.)

    11:     Stationary traps

    12:     Pattern or sifter form outlets and with material separator

    12.5:   Hand manipulable shakers

    13:     Dipping and sampling

    14:     Shaping material by extrusion

    15:     Furnace charging and discharging

    16:     Sanding and abrading

    17:     Throwers, sprayers, scatterers, dusters

    18:     Vehicle loading and unloading

    19:     Puncturing injectors, and other nozzles, spouts, and pouring devices

    20:     Container or receptacle structure

    21:     Closures

    22:     Restricters and pipe and tubular conduit structure

    23:     Valves and valve actuation

    24:     Miscellaneous notes and index to all notes to the main class
    definition

    DEFINITIONS AND NOTES



    1.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER:

    This is the generic class for processes and apparatus for dispensing
    material, and takes all such subject matter that must be classified on such
    basis and not provided for in other main classes.

    2.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER (Cont'd.):

    This class is not limited as to the character of the materials dispensed
    which may be in any physical state, i.e., it may be in a gas, vapor,
    liquid, viscous, paste-like or solid state and if in a self sustaining
    state may have any form or shape.

    3.      GENERAL LINE WITH OTHER CLASSES:

    Dispensers are found in all classes dealing with the manufacture, treatment
    or handling of fluent materials, and particularly in classes having feeding
    or material handling subclasses.  In general, the assignment of patents to
    the manufacturing and material treating classes has been on the basis of
    the non-dispensing operation, when the means or steps for performing the
    nondispensing operation are claimed.  When the means or steps for
    performing the nondispensing operation are not claimed, assignment has been
    to the class taking the disclosed operation when material feeding
    subclasses occur in such art class and are designated and defined to
    receive such patents.  Classes not having special subclasses of this type
    will not take devices falling in the scope of Class 222, when not claimed
    in combination with, or especially adapted for the machines or work of the
    art class, unless such class has a large body of art on dispensing, per se.

    Patents having claims to a dispenser classifiable in this class, and also
    claims to a method of, or apparatus for, making such dispenser, are
    classified in this class, in the subclass appropriate to the dispenser
    claimed and cross-referenced to the appropriate manufacturing class.

    4.      GAS OR VAPOR DISPENSERS:

    Dispensing of material in a gas or vapor state is provided for in
    subclasses 3+. These subclasses were formed on the basis of apparatus
    disclosed solely for dispensing a gas or vapor as the proximate purpose of
    the apparatus and have, in subclass 4, the combination of such dispensing
    means with means to additionally dispense materials other than gases or
    vapors.

    Many devices in this class use gas, vapor, or liquid materials to contact
    other materials to cause dispensing of such other materials, or to operate
    motors or followers to cause dispensing of other materials, and some
    devices in this class utilize gas or vapor to agitate another material
    while the latter is being dispensed.  Such combinations are not in
    subclasses 3+, but are in other following subclasses appropriate to the
    invention claimed.  Since most of these devices involve the movement of
    gases or vapors from one place to another in the organization, significant
    gas dispensing apparatus is often disclosed and claimed as a part of the
    liquid or solid dispensing combination.  Where the combination is claimed
    the gas dispensing subcombination is cross-referenced to subclasses 3+.  It
    is classified as an original in subclasses 3+ when the gas or vapor
    dispensing subcombination only is claimed.

    Most dispensers have vents for the chambers from which materials are
    dispensed, either to permit escape of gas or vapor as the chamber fills or
    to admit the same as the chamber empties.  Vents were not classified in
    this class as dispensers.

    For the various combinations within the class having a vent, or which
    utilize a gas, vapor, or liquid in various combinations as above set forth,
    see the notes to subclass 3.

    For gas or vapor dispensers, per se, and for various combinations having
    such subject matter as a part thereof provided for in other classes:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 300.1+ for
    air blast and/or suction cleaning devices.

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclass 9 for devices utilizing an
    air blast to assist in liberation of fibers from plants, and subclass 205
    for pneumatic feeding of fibers.

    23,     Chemistry:  Analytical Processes, subclasses 293+ for physical
    processes; and subclasses 230+ for analytical and analytical-control
    processes.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, for processes and
    apparatus for contacting solids with gases or vapors for drying or other
    purposes.

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclasses 3+, 14+ and 77.1+ for
    moistening combinations using vapors.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 213 for skywriting
    using smoke or luminous material.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 125+, for
    vermin destroying fumigators.

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, particularly subclasses 174+, 180+
    and 190+, for gas holding, mixing, and distributing means and methods.

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclasses for processes and apparatus
    involving steps or means specialized to refrigeration processes and
    apparatus, solidified or liquefied gas product manufacturing and stored
    liquefied or solidified gas handling, particularly subclasses 45.1+ for
    processes and apparatus for the handling of liquefied gas involving more
    than that required for any gas or liquid under pressure, and subclasses
    389+ for a withdrawable liquid cooler having specific cooling means.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 5+ for apparatus
    for applying a gas, steam or mist to textiles to treat the same, subclass
    20 for combinations with a drier in which a gas contacts the textiles for
    drying purposes and subclasses 183 and 207, for apparatus in which a gas or
    vapor is supplied to the treating liquid.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for gas
    separators having special flow connections, valves, pumps, separated gas
    out-flow control means and residue flow control.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 334 and 367+ for such devices
    for emitting gases or smoke for tracing or other purposes.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclasses 20 and 29+,
    for combinations involving releasing, generating, or distributing gases or
    vapors.

    110,    Furnaces, appropriate subclasses, for combinations with means for
    feeding gases or vapors to the fuel or for cooling purposes.

    111,    Planting, subclasses 118+, for process and apparatus for
    impregnating the ground with a gas, vapor or liquid.

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 203.12+, for inhalers and subclasses 204.18+
    having gas holder combinations.

    137,    Fluid Handling, which is the generic class for gas distribution;
    see particularly subclasses 154+ for diverse fluid containing pressure
    systems, especially subclasses 206+ for gas pressure storage over or
    displacement of liquid; 223+ for inflatable article, e.g., tire, filling
    chuck and/or stem; subclasses 505+ for fluid pressure regulators, per se,
    this class (222) taking combinations of such regulators with significantly
    included supply containers; and subclasses 624.11+, for a fluid
    distribution system including a programmer or timer.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 4+ for filling with gas and/or evacuating, including tire
    inflation with gas, and subclass 38 for filling tires with nongaseous
    materials.

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclasses 415+ for resilient tire
    inflating devices combined with vehicle or wheel structure for inflating
    means more or less permanently associated with an individual tire or for
    means for inflating one tire from another.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, subclasses 11+, for those using a gaseous fire
    extinguishing agent.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclass 39, for a
    thermolytic distillation process including quenching the char with an inert
    gas.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 227, for apparatus for cooling
    residues with gas.

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 246, 256, 258,
    265, 270, and 277, for cells having means to feed gas thereto.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses .6+ for gas storage means.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, particularly
    subclasses 19-37, 133+, for gaseous suspension type and 466-477 and 502,
    for stratifiers with gas treatment means.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 581+ for a high-pressure-gas tank.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 43 for devices for turning garments,
    bags, and tubular articles inside out by applying fluids under pressure
    thereto, and subclass 67 for inflatable forms.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 98 and 99, for arrangements for inflating
    and releasing buoyant gas from lighter-than-air craft.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, for dispensing organizations
    combined with gas and liquid contact means where the gas pressure discharge
    assistant means is arranged to secure intimate contact and mixing of the
    gas pressure medium and the liquid being dispensed.  Such arrangements
    include (1) projection or positioning of an additional gas pressure fluid
    inlet below the surface of a liquid for contact purposes, (2) particular
    configuration or perforation of a gas inlet to secure more intimate
    contact, and (3) provision of mixing means to insure more intimate contact.
    Dispensing devices disclosed as contact devices (as aerators, carbonators,
    etc.) are classified in Class 222 unless contact means of the nature
    described in the statement of the line hereinabove are claimed.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 3+ and 10+ for process and apparatus for
    incorporating gas in a mortar mix, or utilizing gas for mixing,
    discharging, or conveying.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, for feeding gas in pneumatic conveyor
    combinations.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, for rotary expansible chamber
    pumps, per se.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, appropriate subclasses for chemical apparatus
    involving chemical reactors and apparatus for carrying out physical
    reactions of the chemical type.  Also fume generators.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 210+ for purifying or
    separating gaseous mixtures by a chemical reaction.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclasses 88+ and 92+ for
    self-inflating body supporting buoyant devices for sustaining a user
    partially immersed in liquid.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 24+ for smoke dispensers;
    subclasses 166+ for a toy operated by a gravity fed fluent operated toys;
    and subclass 475 for other dispensing toys.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 75+ for a sandblasting machine.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 23+ for gas application to the body for
    therapeutic treatment.



    5.      ARTICLE DISPENSING:

    Article dispensers are classified in Class 221, Article Dispensing and the
    definitions and Notes to that class should be consulted for the statements
    of the lines of that class with this class and with other related article
    dispensing and feeding classes, including strip feeding.

    Dispensers capable of use with either articles or fluent material of
    granular, plastic or liquid nature, and claimed generically are classified
    in Class 222, that class being generic to the concept of the two classes
    (221 and 222).

    6.      VOLUME OR RATE OF FLOW METERS, RECORDERS, REGISTERS:

    This class has volume or rate of flow meters combined with means for
    predetermining the total quantity dispensed in subclasses 14+; volume or
    rate of flow meters combined with signals, indicators, registers or
    recorders specialized for use with repeated dispensing operations, as
    registers with zero-setting or price and volume indicating combinations in
    subclasses 23+; volume or rate of flow meters combined with structure (in
    addition to that necessary for an operative volume or rate of flow meter)
    limited to dispensing in subclasses 52-73.

    The dispensing features, in addition to meter structure, which, in general,
    determine classification in Class 222, are (1) meters having predetermined
    or preset cut-offs, (2) meters of the expansible chamber type having
    ingress or egress valves which are manually thrown, (3) meters having
    manual flow termination, (4) meters combined with storage tank features
    where the stored material is dispensed through the meter, (5) meters with
    nozzles, spouts, or equivalent dispensing outlets, and (6) meters combined
    with a pump significantly claimed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    For related subject matter:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 861+ for volume or rate of flow
    meters, per  se. The mere naming of a pump supply does not exclude such
    meters from Class 73; such meters are in the class both when the
    registering means are and are not claimed.  Class 222 has dispensing
    devices which determine a volume dispensed which do not repeat the
    operation as a result of, or under the control of, the completion of the
    preceding operation, see particularly Class 222, subclasses 282+ for those
    with volume varying means, 344+ for movable or conveyor type trap chambers,
    and 425+ for stationary trap chambers with cut-offs, these various types
    combined with a recorder, register, indicator, signal, or exhibitor being
    in subclasses 23+.

    235,    Registers, for register structure where no significant dispensing
    features are claimed, even though a dispenser or meter is named as
    operating the register.

    346,    Recorders, for recorder structure, where no significant dispensing
    features are claimed, even though a dispenser or meter is named as
    operating the recorder.


    7.      DRIP LEAKAGE OR WASTE CATCHERS:

    Devices auxiliary to dispensing organizations for catching drip or waste
    material are in this class, including receivers or supports for receivers
    to be placed to collect material overflowing or not received by the
    intended receiver and also other material escaping from the desired
    discharge path.  For such devices, see subclasses 108+, and for related art:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 248.1+, for
    drip cups and shields.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 85 for such
    apparatus combined with means to collect escaping material.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 11+ for building
    cover with an eave, or valley gutter, subclasses 302.1+ for building
    structure or component with a fluid handling feature open to the ambient,
    and subclass 553 for a subsurface drainage device related to a lapped
    multiplanar or strip covered surfacing.

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 207 for harvesters combined with means to
    catch loosened (shelled out) grain that would otherwise be lost.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 208 for drains and
    overflows for such apparatus.

    104,    Railways, subclass 133, for drip pans, nets, et cetera, for
    catching liquid, dirt, or articles that might fall from an elevated railway.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclass 28, for
    drains or sumps associated with containers to remove explosives to prevent
    their successful use.

    114,    Ships, subclass 182, for scuppers i.e., arrangements of passages or
    holes so that water may drain from decks.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 504+ for devices used by painters to
    protect one of two adjacent surfaces while the other is being coated.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 51, for devices for oil drip or
    overflow catching for oil burning cook stoves.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, particularly subclasses
    43, 62, 84+, and 135 for drainers in combination with cleaning or liquid
    contact apparatus.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 312+ for drip and leakage collecting in
    fluid handling systems.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 86+ for combinations of a filling device and means for catching
    material overflowing from the receptacle filled, and subclasses 106 and 364
    for means supporting inverted supply receptacles upon receivers for
    draining.

    184,    Lubrication, subclass 106 for drip pans placed beneath a bearing to
    catch unused oil and either hold it or return it to a reservoir.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 248 for separators for
    that class having a drip, overflow or content draining feature.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 120+ for
    spray fluid systems having means to catch or otherwise dispose of material
    escaping or leaking from the system through uncontrolled paths or beyond
    the last point of control.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclass 38, for drip pans located
    between the load and running gear to catch liquid dripping from the load.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclass 15, for a hand
    manipulated coating device with material supply having a splash guard or a
    drip catcher.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclass 107, for means for discharging
    from the tube material that flows backwardly by gravity in the tube.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 117 for a liquid fuel burner having means to
    discharge overflow fuel from a vaporization or combustion zone; and
    subclass 119 for a burner having an escaping material collector.


    8.      COMBINATIONS OF DISPENSER AND INDEPENDENT RECEIVER:

    Dispensers under the class definition claimed in combination with either
    (1) a container or other receiver which is independent of the dispenser
    organization, i.e., such receiver not being a part of the means necessary
    to the dispensing operation, or (2) means which perform their function only
    in connection with such independent receiver.

    The combination defined above is common to all apparatus for performing any
    character of operation on material, from those combinations in which the
    independent receiver is a mere receptacle to which the dispenser delivers
    material for filling purposes, to those combinations in which the receiver
    is a complicated manufacturing or treating apparatus and the dispenser is a
    feeding device to deliver material to such manufacturing or treating
    apparatus for operation thereon.  Therefore, the great bulk of the patents
    granted on such combinations will be found in other classes classified on
    the basis of particular adaptation to deliver to receivers of particular
    kinds, or on the basis of the particular receiver (including manufacturing
    or treating apparatus) claimed.

    Where the receiver is defined in such broad terms as to fail as a basis of
    classification (i.e., in broad terms, cover receivers of two or more types
    separately classified), it is classified in this class, or other
    classification appropriate to the dispenser claimed.

    Since the above subject matter occurs primarily in other classes,
    classification is in this class only when no other class provides for such
    subject matter.  For notes on gas dispensing, see section 4, and for
    article dispensing, see section 5.  The following notes do not attempt to
    be exhaustive, specifying only those classes that are known to have
    apparatus closely resembling the apparatus in this class. For such related
    art, see the following classes and the notes to the definitions thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, for such devices having means
    for dispensing water, disinfectants, and other materials thereto, and for
    dispensers specially designed for such purposes, flush tanks for closets
    being in subclasses 353+.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, for apparatus operating
    by brushing, beating, scraping, shaking, wiping, shotting, or use of a
    squeegee in combination with means to dispense cleaning or other materials
    to such operating devices.  The dispenser subcombination for delivering
    materials to such instrumentalities so that such instrumentalities may
    operate thereon are in Class 222 or other appropriate dispenser
    classification.



    Relative to the cleaning of dispensers:  Classes 15 and 134 take cleaning
    devices of the types provided for in those classes, per se, or in
    combination with dispensers or fluid flow systems which are so broadly
    recited as to appear to constitute parts of the cleaning means rather than
    the articles to be cleaned. Specific dispenser or fluent material handling
    structures, including such details as to give a basis for classification in
    Class 222 or in Class 137, combined with means for cleaning such dispensing
    or handling structures are classified in Class 222, in subclasses 148+, or
    in Class 137, in subclasses 237+.

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, for apparatus for feeding materials
    to acetylene generators, other gas generators and other devices specialized
    to heating and illuminating gases.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, specialized to spreading coating materials over
    surfaces to be coated.  The dispenser subcombination (i.e., the means for
    merely discharging coating materials from a bulk supply) is in Class 222,
    or other appropriate dispenser classification.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids.  See the reference to
    Class 15 in this group of Search Class Notes for a statement of the line
    between Classes 15, 134 and 222.



    Some liquid cleaning subcombinations involve no more than dispensing a
    cleaning fluid to the article to be cleaned (as a receiver). Classes 137
    and 222 take such devices as fluent material handling or dispensing
    inventions, but where a cleaning feature (as dissolving of a cleansing
    material, surging of the cleaning fluid, etc.) is present, classification
    is in Class 134, in appropriate subclass subclasses thereof.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    and see the Notes thereto, particularly section I, for a statement of the
    line with Class 222.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, for apparatus and processes for extinguishing
    fires.

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclasses 59 and 60+ for weigh chamber responsive
    material control.  See subclass 77 of Class 222 and the note thereto.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses for processes of molding or shaping plastic
    materials within the class definition; and see section 14 of Class 222 for
    the reference to Class 264.

    291,    Track Sanders.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, appropriate subclasses for the moving
    of material from a source to a destination, the source, in some instances,
    being in the nature of a dispenser.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous
    chemical apparatus.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    appropriate subclasses for a molding machine for shaping or reshaping a
    nonmetal combined with means to feed stock material to a shaping surface;
    see the search notes under subclass 447 of Class 425.



    9.      PUMPS:

    This class has pumps in various combinations with dispensing features.
    Dispensing features combined with pumps are:

    (a)     selectively preset volume responsive cutoff means to control the
    quantity discharged (e.g., those which can be preset to operate through a
    desired number of cycles), see subclasses 14+.

    (b)     totalizing or  other registering means, or recording means, the
    combination being specialized for repeated operations (as those provided
    with zero-setting means or combined price and volume devices) see
    subclasses 23+.

    (c)     position or extent of motion indicators, when other dispensing
    features are claimed (e.g., as set forth in (d), (e), and (f) see
    subclasses 41+.

    (d)     measuring means in addition to the pump, see subclasses 23+ and 71+.

    (e)     the combination between a pump and a significantly claimed
    container which forms the source of supply for the pump.  A supply
    container is considered to be significantly claimed when any one or any
    combination of the following are recited:  (1) the structural features of
    the container; (2) the mounting of the pump on a container closure, (3)
    particular relationships between the pump or its controls and the
    container, see appropriate subclasses such as 252+ and 372+.

    (f)     the provision of means in addition to pump structure and its
    operator to prevent the start of intake before the pump has reached the end
    of its discharge operation, see for example, subclass 34.

    (g)     discharge outlet (e.g., nozzle) features significantly claimed, see
    for example, subclasses 74, 320, 322, 330, 378, and 379.

    For the most part, the notes on dispensers and combinations of dispensers
    with other things, in which a pump is part of the dispenser organization,
    are placed in Section 24.

    For pump structure, and for means to operate and control the same,
    including means to vary the pump capacity both with or without an indicator:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 145 and 147+ for siphon starting pumps,
    and 565+ for distribution systems including a pump.

    366,    Agitating, subclass 262 for pump type agitators.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclasses 96+ for pumps having, in
    addition to a fluid intake, a solid material intake or some other structure
    peculiar to conveying solids in a fluid current generated by the pump.

    417,    Pumps.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices.





    10.     DISCHARGE ASSISTANTS: (e.g., impellers, pumps, conveyors, movable
    trap chambers, etc.)

    Devices combined with containers, or specially adapted for use with
    containers, and comprising means acting in addition to, or against, gravity
    for either removing material from a container, or which move, or tend to
    cause material to move, to or through a container outlet, have been herein
    designated generically "discharge assistants."

    The discharge assistants as above comprise any means in either fluid or
    solid form, which moves or tends to urge material to move toward a
    discharge outlet or into or out of a trap chamber. Included are means to
    apply pressure fluids directly to the material to cause material motion,
    jarring, or vibrating means, pumps, pulsators, impellers, pushers,
    ejectors, vanes, rolls, screws, mechanical and fluid current conveyors of
    all kinds, followers (including followers moved only be atmospheric
    pressure), agitators functioning primarily to cause discharge, and devices
    for breaking material bridges or arches.

    Movable trap chambers are devices which, when moved to one position,
    receive material from a supply and, when moved to another position,
    discharge the trapped material.  These may act against or with gravity,
    sometimes offering no assistance to discharge except the physical
    separation of a portion of the material, and its confinement and control
    during downward movement, but they were found so closely related to
    nongravity discharge assistants as to cause it to be advisable to associate
    the two in the classification (e.g., many movable trap chambers were, in
    addition, mechanical conveyors).

    The above character subject matter occur in numerous subclasses throughout
    the class, attention being particularly called to subclasses 92+ and 193
    through 415, in which subclasses the discharge assistant constitutes the
    primary basis of classification.

    Since, in most classes, dispensers and combinations thereof with other
    things are not separated on the basis of whether or not they have discharge
    assistants, notes on this type are not separately set out, and the notes to
    section 9 and 24 should be consulted.

    11.     STATIONARY TRAPS:

    Stationary material trapping devices auxiliary to a bulk supply are
    included in the class more particularly as follows: (1) containers having
    means for separating from the contained material a quantity less than the
    whole and maintaining the same in a position for access thereto by some
    removing agency; these may be barometric in type, or a mere wall or well to
    reduce the area of material exposed in the main container (e.g., dispensing
    inkwells); (2) containers having receptacles or funnels for receiving or
    guiding the container contents, which are carried by, or form part of, the
    container and must be separated therefrom before use; (3) containers having
    detachable auxiliary chambers which receive part of the container contents
    while in place on the container, but which must be separated for discharge;
    (4) containers having auxiliary chambers which receive part of the
    container contents and discharge the same through tilting of the entire
    organization and which are provided with passages and baffles arranged to
    prevent additional material from entering the trap while the container is
    tilted; (5) containers having serial alternately opened valves so related
    as to perform a measuring function, the so-called predetermined-bulk
    stationary trap, and subcombinations disclosed as continuously connected to
    a source of supply.

    These devices are related to the movable trap chambers and other discharge
    assistants treated in section 10.

    Attention is particularly called to subclasses 424.5 through 457, and other
    subclasses, specified in the notes thereto, for this type of subject matter.

    For related art in other classes-

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclasses 46+ for carbid feed
    devices for delivering measured charges.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 426 for measuring vessels.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 56.1+ for feeding troughs with charge
    delivering means.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 156+ for gas pressure discharge of feed
    traps to boilers; subclasses 171+ for fluid separating traps; subclasses
    571+ for plural tanks or compartments, including traps, connected for
    serial flow; subclass 596 for stop and waste systems; subclasses 602+ for
    multiple inlet with single outlet systems; subclasses 861+ for systems
    having flow control means for plural passages; subclasses 613+ for single
    flow path devices with serial valves which may comprise alternately seated
    inlet and outlet valves subclasses 625+ for multiway valve units; and
    subclass 627.5 for sequentially closing and opening alternately seating
    flow controllers.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    appropriate subclasses.

    184,    Lubrication, subclass 83 for gravity feed lubricators with
    measuring valves.



    12.     PATTERN OR SIFTER FORM OUTLET AND WITH MATERIAL SEPARATOR:

    This class includes the combination of a dispenser with means to sift,
    strain, or filter the material dispensed as an incident to the dispensing
    operation (see subclasses 189.01, 189.02+ and 189.06+), and also dispensers
    having a pattern or sifter form of outlet (see subclasses 480, 564 and 565,
    and the notes thereto).  Relative to sifters, strainers, or filters,
    combined with a dispenser, this class has this combination when the
    separating device is incidental to the dispenser, while the appropriate
    separating class has the separating means with means to deliver material
    thereto or therefrom. Relative to pattern or sifter forms of outlet, this
    class has the same where there is no structure specialized to, or intent
    of, separating, the foraminous nature of the outlet being for the purpose
    of holding back the bulk of the material while permitting the escape of
    limited quantities, or assisting to distribute the material delivered.  For
    related art, see sections 12.5, 16 and 17 to the main class definition and-

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 490+ and those following for gas filters.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 140 and 544+ for fluid handling systems
    having means for separating solid material from the fluid, as strainers,
    filters, separators and sediment traps.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, particularly
    subclasses 233+ for sifters.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 348+ for filters, per
    se.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 374 and 548+,
    for pattern flow outlets for fluid spraying nozzles.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 197+ for a molding machine for nonmetals having a strainer for
    stock material upstream of the shaping area.







    12.5    HAND MANIPULABLE SHAKERS:

    Hand manipulable shaker type dispensers are those which are adapted to
    dispense nonfree flowing granular material when it is kept in motion within
    the container, which is held in the hand and moved to and fro to shift the
    material.  In these dispensers, the outlet is restricted to such an extent
    that bridging of the material occurs immediately after the material is
    initially brought into contact with the outlet, usually as a result of
    tilting the container as for gravity flow. Dispensing occurs only as a
    result of repeated contacts or impacts of the bulk of the material against
    the outlet area, as in the use of the ordinary condiment holder or salt
    shaker.  If a discharge assistant or agitator is present, it is inertia
    operated only, having no actuator connected thereto.

    Special provision for this subject matter is made in this class under the
    title Hand Manipulable Shaker Type in the following instances; subclasses
    142.1+, for those having plural sources of supply, e.g., combined salt and
    pepper shakers; 196.1+, for those having an inertia operated movable member
    which jars or has an impact effect, although it may also serve as a closure
    or discharge controller or as a discharge assistant; 457.5 for those having
    a generally U-shaped path through which material is shaken; and 480, for
    those having multiple diverse type outlet openings.  Hand manipulable
    shakers having manually operated discharge assistants having been
    classified in the dispenser subclass appropriate to the type.

    Where the outlet is of pattern form, distribution of the dispensed material
    is also effected.  For pattern or sifter type dispensing outlets, see
    section 12 and the Search Classes thereunder.

    For hand manipulable devices having material agitating or comminuting
    features see the search classes below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 125, for hand manipulable shakers forming the
    handle of a cutlery implement.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 168, for
    hand supported comminutors for condiments.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 129+ for hand manipulated agitators, and see
    section III of the class definition of Class 366 for the line between these
    classes.





    13.     DIPPING AND SAMPLING:

    This class has dipping type dispensers and dispensers related to samplers,
    see subclasses 576+ and 356+ and the notes to other subclasses in Class 222
    for such art.  For related art in other classes-

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 324+, for spoons.

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 126.4, for sounding type of
    distance measuring means combined with sampling devices.

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclasses 41+ and 45, for dip type
    carbid feeders for acetylene generators.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 863+ for samplers.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 110+ for filling by immersion.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclass 30, for samplers for closed
    evaporating chambers.

    166,    Wells, subclass 162 and the subclasses there noted for well
    receptacles for receiving or depositing material in the well.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 92 for filters with a
    test valve, subclasses 198.1+ for means to add treating material to a
    separator, and subclasses 514+ for portable invertible separators.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 49+ for hand
    shovels and subclasses 68.2+ for hoisting buckets adapted for dumping a
    load.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 157 for a thermometer
    combined with a sampling cup.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 269+ for a molding machine comprising a dipping type shaping
    mandrel on which an article is formed; and subclasses 276+ for apparatus
    including means excavating from a bulk source with simultaneous shaping
    (e.g., ice cream scoop, etc.).


    14.     SHAPING MATERIAL BY EXTRUSION:

    Where the outlet of a dispenser has a particular shape, so that the
    operation of the dispenser causes a plastic material to be delivered having
    a desired shape, classification is in the class appropriate to the plastic
    shaping involved.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 253.1+ for die-expressing metal.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 174 for die expressing apparatus for sand
    molds or cores and subclasses 418+ for continuous metal casting apparatus.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses for processes of shaping or molding of plastic
    materials within the class definition.  See particularly subclasses 176.1+
    for formation of indefinite length or continuous articles by extrusion, and
    subclasses 299+ for casting or mold or die casting for processes not more
    specifically provided for above, therein.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 376.1+ for an extrusion type molding machine for a nonmetal; see
    the search notes thereunder.

    452,    Butchering, subclasses 35+ for sausage stuffers.





    15.     FURNACE CHARGING AND DISCHARGING:

    This class has dispensers, per se, for fuel and other materials which are
    intended for delivery to furnaces.  Where features are claimed that
    specialize the apparatus to charging or discharging a furnace,
    classification is in some other class-

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 249+ and 309+ for reversing valves for
    regenerative furnaces.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 147+ for a chamber of a
    type utilized for a heating function and a material charging or discharging
    means therefor.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 159+ for a furnace with means dispensing
    fluid fuel into its combustion chamber.


    16.     SANDING OR ABRADING (see also sections 12 and 17):

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 395, for cleaning such
    apparatus by sand blast.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 159+ for sand mold forming apparatus and
    particularly subclasses 192 to 202 for means for delivering sand to the
    molding device.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 650+ for a
    vehicular type road sander comprising a container for nonfluid material and
    means to scatter or strew the material over an extended area.

    291,    Track Sanders.

    451,    Abrading, particularly subclasses 37 and 38+ for a sandblasting
    process, subclasses 75+ for a sandblasting machine, subclasses 446+ for an
    abradant-supplying accessory, and subclass 450 for an accessory for wetting
    a grindstone.



    17.     THROWERS, SPRAYERS, SCATTERERS, AND DUSTERS (see also sections 12,
    16).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 59 for
    combinations with a rotary scattering member.

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 104+ for fuel feeders which blow the fuel into
    a furnace.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 300+ for coating apparatus in which
    the coating material is projected, flung, sprayed or dripped on the work.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 159 for antivermin dust scatterers.

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, particularly subclasses 4+ for
    centrifugal guns.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 638+ for a thrower type
    conveyor.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 642 for
    assorters involving throwing.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses
    for devices which project streams of fluid (as fireman's nozzles) and for
    sprinkling liquids; subclasses 650+ for a container for nonfluid material
    and means to scatter or strew the material over an extended area, the
    material being of any type (e.g., fertilizer, seed, insecticide, etc.).
    Liquid dispensers not having the special features for Class 239 are in
    Class 222.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, particularly subclasses 71 and 157+ for
    such conveyors involving throwing or scattering.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 80.1+ for a molding means including a scattering type material
    depositor for placing the material to be shaped on the shaping surface.





    18.     VEHICLE LOADING AND UNLOADING:

    This class has some vehicular dispensers, see subclasses 176+, but has no
    other characters of vehicle loading and unloading.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, appropriate subclasses (e.g., 137+,
    140+, 265, 328+, 333-402, 406+, etc.) for the loading or unloading of
    vehicles.




    19.     PUNCTURING INJECTORS AND OTHER NOZZLES, SPOUTS, AND POURING DEVICES:

    The class includes container structures in combination with one or more
    dispensing outlet structures; with or without other openings (as filling or
    vent openings), or dispensing outlet structures, per se, and such
    structures formed to cut or punch other things, or combined with a cutter
    or punch for forming openings in the receiver of the material dispensed.

    Dispensing outlet structures comprise the following features or any
    combination therebetween:  (1) material guide means (as nozzles, spouts,
    pouring lips, et cetera), i.e., any means specialized to guiding the
    material being discharged and located either on the interior or exterior of
    the container or both.  Such structure must be in addition to mere
    container openings with or without surrounding flanges or necks to receive
    closures.  Such guide means may be stationary relative to the container or
    movably related thereto; (2) nonguiding type outlets with flow controllers
    (e.g., valves).

    Additional openings for nondispensing purposes, such as filling openings
    and vents, may be included, and also closures (as distinguished from flow
    controllers) for any opening, means for connecting the various elements
    together or means for mounting or operating movable parts. Cutter or punch
    combinations are in subclasses 80+.

    Patents claiming only the container in combination with the features above
    outlined (excepting cutter or punch features) are in this class starting
    with subclass 476 and including all following subclasses.  Such features in
    combination with other features are in the preceding subclasses, for
    example, the combination with a casing or support for the dispenser is in
    subclasses 173+, with discharge assistant in subclasses 251+, with
    container handle or handgrip in subclasses 465+.

    Containers in combination with such features are found in substantially all
    classes which involve handling of material in bulk, and in substantially
    all classes which involve container structure, classified on special bases
    and features in addition to the dispensing features.  For such devices for
    purposes other than dispensing, and for such devices that are for
    dispensing, but are specialized to particular uses, see sections 22 and 23
    for restricters and valves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 322 and 415+
    for air blast and suction cleaner nozzles.

    27,     Undertaking, subclass 24.1 for embalming injectors.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 11 for sap spouts and gutters for
    gathering sap from pine and rubber trees, subclass 48.5 for irrigators or
    fertilizers of container or cartridge form which are buried in the earth,
    usually discharging their contents over a period of time, 51 and 52+ for
    spouts for conveying sap from other trees, and 57.5 for miscellaneous
    injection devices.

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 32 for pneumatic cotton picker nozzles.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 201, for needle type
    liquid injectors.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 215+ and 861.61+ for pressure
    differential type meter nozzles and weirs, respectively.

    81,     Tools, subclass 15.6 for cement injectors for resilient tire repair.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 532+ hollow injecting
    needles for pickling foods.

    104,    Railways, subclass 11 for tampers with pneumatic injector.

    111,    Planting, appropriate subclass for forming openings in the earth,
    depositing material in the openings and usually covering over with earth,
    and including in subclasses 118+, the depositing of liquid or gases.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 405 for washout nozzles for
    cleaning boilers.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 119+ and 872+ for branched downspouts
    with flow deflectors; subclass 318 for devices for tapping a pipe or tank
    under pressure by forming an aperture therein under conditions which
    prevent loss of fluid; subclasses 614.02+ for separable flow path sections
    with a coupling operated valve in each wherein one section may be of the
    barrel bushing type and the other section a spout; subclasses 615+ for
    distribution systems having swinging or articulated flow conduits; and
    subclass 801 for faucets and spouts, per se.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for processes and apparatus for laminating in
    general and see especially subclasses 145+ for filling hollow laminae with
    fluent material.

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, subclasses 2+, for
    chutes.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 40+ for neck structure, and subclasses
    307+ for closures providing means whereby the interior of the closure is
    communicable with the exterior.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses 98+, for barrel bungs.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, for a paperboard box
    combined with an external material flow guide means (e.g., nozzle, spout,
    pouring lip, etc.) except when such guide means has a cutting or punch
    feature. Class 229 also provides for a paperboard box combined with
    internal material guide means which means are limited to utilizing the
    force of gravity to guide material contents (e.g., internal inclined ramp
    which utilizes gravity to urge material toward an egress opening), also,
    search subclasses 214, 215+, and 248+ for a paperboard box having a
    reusable closure which is opened by tearing along a weakened line or
    adhesive seam, and which forms a pour spout when in its open configuration.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 271 for
    spraying devices with attached penetrating means; subclass 309 for seal
    puncturing means for providing a discharge opening in a supply holder;
    subclass 445 for nozzles having means for selectively delivering a high or
    low pressure stream of fluid; other appropriate subclasses for desired
    nozzle structure, per se.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 75+ for hose and/ or nozzle supports.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 149+ for separable flow path
    sections with a coupling operated valve in one wherein one section may be
    of the barrel bushing type and the other section a spout; and subclass 155
    for valve nozzles and spouts.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 154.1+ for a joint between a
    pipe or cable and box, subclasses 136.1+ for a pipe or rod-to-pipe-to-plate
    coupling, and subclasses 189+ for an end-to-plate coupling.

    291,    Track Sanders, subclasses 46+ for sand delivery nozzles.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 212+ for
    nozzles and spouts combined with means discharging or preventing
    accumulation of electric charges.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 154+, for a process or
    apparatus for laying pipe or cable into a submerged or subterranean
    location.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclasses 154+ for outlets for fluid
    current conveyors.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 412 for a device for
    emptying a portable receptacle wherein the device is provided with means
    for opening the receptacle prior to emptying and further wherein the means
    is of the rapturing or cutting type.

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, appropriate subclasses for a
    nozzle combined with turbine structure.  See section 9, above, for a
    statement of the line with pumps.

    417,    Pumps, subclass 198 for jet pump nozzles.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 344 for a flame holder, fuel tank assembly.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 90 and 102 for a sandblast nozzle.

    452,    Butchering, subclasses 35+ for sausage stuffer nozzles.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 187+ for hypodermic syringes; subclasses 272+
    for needles, per se; and subclasses 275+ for nozzles inserted in the body.


    20.     CONTAINER OR RECEPTACLE STRUCTURE:

    This class does not have receptacle or container structure unless combined
    with dispensing features.  Collapsibility, per se, is considered to be a
    dispensing feature, relative to structures disclosed as dispensing
    containers.  For receptacles, containers and tubular conduit structures,
    not involving dispensing features:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, appropriate subclasses for tubular
    conduit structures not disclosed as dispensing containers and not including
    dispensing features.  For a statement of the line between Class 138 and
    Class 222 see the reference to Class 222 in the SEARCH CLASS note to the
    class definition of Class 138.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, and see the notes for related art.

    220,    Receptacles, and see the notes for related art.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, and see the Notes for
    related art.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, appropriate subclasses (e.g., 288+)
    for receptacle structure which cooperates with, or is otherwise peculiarly
    related to, means for charging or discharging the receptacle.


    21.     CLOSURES:

    Mere closure structures for containers and other devices having openings,
    not claimed in combination with a nozzle, spout, pouring lip, discharge
    assistant, or other dispensing feature, and also closures for spouts where
    no features of spout structure are claimed other than those necessary for
    the mounting and operation of the closure, are not in Class 222, but in
    other appropriate classes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, for flexible
    closures and see the places set forth in the notes thereto.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 200+ for closures under that class
    (215) definition.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 200+, and the places set forth in the notes
    thereto for rigid closures.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclass 125.04 for a
    paperboard box having a nonunitary (i.e., separate, attached) closure
    usable egress opening).


    22.     RESTRICTERS, PIPE AND TUBULAR CONDUIT STRUCTURES:

    This class has neither flow restrictors except those in the interior of
    dispenser supply containers, provided for in subclasses 547 and 564, nor
    pipe and tubular conduit structures, per se.  For such subject matter:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 801 for restrictors comprised in outlets,
    nozzles or spouts.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, and see the notes thereto.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 117 with restrictor in
    parallel to main valve, and 118+ for serial valves and flow restrictors.


    23.     VALVES AND VALVE ACTUATION:

    This class has both single and plural valves and their actuating means (1)
    when claimed in combination with a dispenser, (2) when arranged to control
    inlet from a bulk supply into a trap chamber and discharge of the trapped
    material from such chamber, and (3) when claimed in combination with
    receptacle structure so as to control and regulate discharge of the
    container contents.  For valves and valve actuating means not involving
    such combinations:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, and see the places set forth in the
    notes thereto.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 221 for apparatus for moving
    material between zones having different pressures and inhibiting any change
    in the pressure gradient existing therebetween, and wherein a path having a
    vertical component includes serially arranged valves.



    24.     MISCELLANEOUS NOTES AND INDEX TO ALL NOTES TO THE MAIN CLASS
    DEFINITION:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, section 8.

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, for manufacturing apparatus with dispensing
    means, and dispensers specially designed for use in connection with boot
    and shoe manufacture, e.g., subclasses 41.3, for pliabilizing soles, 79.5,
    waxing and polishing and 18.2 shoe filling.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, sections  4, 7, 8, 19,
    section 8 stating the general line.

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, section 4, subclasses 200+ having
    fiber feeding and cleaning.

    23,     Chemistry:  Analytical and Physical Processes, section 4.

    27,     Undertaking, section 19.

    30,     Cutlery, section 12.5, 13, subclasses 41+ for razors combined with
    means to dispense fluent material such as water or lather,and subclasses
    483 for lubricating attachments

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, section 13; and see appropriate subclasses
    for geometrical instruments with means for dispensing fluids operable in
    connection with the use of the instruments, e.g., subclasses 34+ for
    straight line scribers using ink.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, section 4, 7, 17
    having apparatus having features specially designed for the drying of solid
    material, or for contacting solid material with gases or vapors for
    purposes other than mere agitation, and such apparatus combined with
    feeding and/or discharging means, dispensers, per se, being in class 222,
    or other appropriate dispenser classification.

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, section 4.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, section 4.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, section 4, 17

    47,     Plant Husbandry, section 19.

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, section 4, 8, 11, 13; and see
    subclasses 4+ and 38+ for acetylene generator water and carbide feeds,
    respectively.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 192+ for specific
    structure of a fluent material container with a single material port, e.g.,
    outlet at a hopper bottom.

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 395 and 396+ for processes, and
    especially subclasses 147+ for apparatus to feed the contents to and from a
    machine to form a package.

    55,     Gas Separation, section 12.

    56,     Harvesters, section 7, 19.

    62,     Refrigeration, section 4.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 324+ for molten glass dispensers,
    per se.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, section 4, 7, 19; subclass 210
    having loaders, unloaders and dumpers for such machines.

    72,     Metal Deforming, section 14.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, section 6, 11, 13, 19, section 6 stating the
    general line on volume or rate of flow meters.  See the definition of
    subclass 426 in class 73, for the line between this class (222) and the
    measuring vessels provided for in Class 73.

    81,     Tools, section 19, for some combinations with dispensing means,
    e.g., subclasses 2 and 15.5+, dispensers, per se, being in subclass 15.6
    when specially designed for injecting cement into tires.

    ---CDEF---83,     Cutting, subclass 169, for means to lubricate tool or
    work.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, section 4.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, section 19, appropriate subclasses
    having apparatus specialized to treating food and beverages materials which
    include dispensing features, dispensers, per se, being in Class 22 or other
    appropriate dispenser classification.  Subclass 275 , Class 99, as the
    residual beverage making apparatus subclass, has apparatus for carbonating
    a liquid by specific contact means, combined with means for adding
    flavoring material to form a beverage.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 215+ for presses not elsewhere classified
    having means for feeding material to the press, and see the Notes thereto
    for other press structures having means for feeding material thereto, and
    see subclasses 104+ for presses provided with drain means for expressed
    liquids.

    101,    Printing, subclasses 335+ having inkers.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, section 4, appropriate subclasses having
    oil, gas, smoke, incendiary material containing devices.

    104,    Railways, section 7, 19.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, section 4, 7;
    subclasses 20 and 29 having fluent material dispensing combinations, and 46
    having movable safes or compartments with dumping mechanism.

    110,    Furnaces, section 4, 17; and see section 15 for a general statement
    on furnace charging and discharging.

    111,    Planting, section 4, 19.

    114,    Ships, section 7; subclasses 86, 224 and 232+ for caulking and
    seaming and oil distributing apparatus.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, 7, 8, 17, section 8, stating the general line.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, section 11, 17; subclasses 10, 18, 51.01+, and
    72+ having feeding and watering devices.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, section 16, 19; subclasses 451+
    having feeders.

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, section 17.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, section 7.

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 38+, 108+, and 180+, having tobacco feeders.

    132,    Toilet, section 5 (I), subclasses 112+ for liquid applying combs,
    and subclass 74.5 for manicuring devices with fluent material feed.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, section 7, 8.

    137,    Fluid Handling, sections 4, 7, 8, 9, 11, 12, 15, 19, 22:  this
    class is the generic class for the handling of fluids, and has
    miscellaneous distributing systems, valve actuation, fluid handling tanks,
    etc. Since many of the systems of the two classes are analogous or
    identical and most of the subcombinations are freely interchangeable, the
    search fields in the two classes must always be studied and compared.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, section 20 and 22.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    sections 4, 7, 8, 11, 13; subclasses 331+ having funnels and subclass 65.

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, section 4.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, section 19.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, section 13,  subclasses 43.1+ having
    fluid feed or discharge devices.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, section 21.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 407+ for mold
    charging means employed in the making of a fibrous article from a liquid
    suspension of fibers.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 192+, 198+ and 200+ for apparatus for
    charging mold forming materials into a flask, subclasses 303+ for apparatus
    for injecting metal into a mold, subclasses 335+ for metal casting
    apparatus including a ladle or crucible type metal receptacle and
    subclasses 437+ for continuous casting apparatus including means to
    dispense molten metal into a mold.

    166,    Wells, section 13.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, section 8; this class having fluid systems,
    automatic valves, tanks, portable receptacles, et cetera, having dispensing
    features specially adapted for the purposes of the class.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 8+ having fluid
    feeding combinations.

    177,    Weighing Scales, section 8.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 96 for inking devices for code receivers.

    184,    Lubrication, sections 7, 11; see particularly subclasses 14+ for
    dispensing devices specially adapted for structural association with a
    bearing that receives the lubricant.

    186,    Merchandising.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 125 for stop mechanism
    controlled by material fed.

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, section 19.

    194,    Check-Actuated Control Mechanisms, see appropriate subclasses for
    check actuator.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 135 for feeders for vaporizing
    apparatus.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, section 17;

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclass 39 for a process
    including quenching the char with an inert gas.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, section 4; subclasses 95, 227+ and 253
    for quenchers.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 245+, 255-258,
    263+, 269+, and 275+ for electrolytic cell feeders.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, sections 4, 19, 20.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, sections 4, 12, 17,
    section 12 stating the general line.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, sections 12, 13; subclasses
    198.1+ for, inter alia, means for dispensing materials in combination with
    a Class 210 separator, and subclasses 523+ for mechanical means for
    removing a constituent from a gravitational separator.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, section 19; and see all subclasses classified on
    a dispensing basis.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, section 19.

    220,    Receptacles, sections 4, 20, 21.

    221,    Article Dispensing, section 5.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, section 4.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, section 5 (II).

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 33+ and 52 for fusion bonding
    apparatus having dispensing means.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, sections 19, 20, 21.

    232,    Deposit and Collection Receptacles, for receptacles (such as ballot
    fare and letter boxes, etc.) specially designed to have one person deposit
    and another collect the deposited article.

    235,    Registers, section 6.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, sections 12, 17 and 19;
    the line being stated in the class definition of Class 239.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, for comminuting
    processes and apparatus and such steps or means combined with feeding
    and/or discharging, dispensers, per se, being in Class 222 or other
    appropriate dispenser classification. See section 9 of the main class
    definition of Class 241, for a further statement of the line.  See also
    section 12.5 of the class definition of Class 222.

    244,    Aeronautics, section 4.248.  Supports, section 19, subclasses 128+
    and 146+, for receptacle stands, 196, for receptacle easels 311.2+, for
    receptacle holding brackets, and 318, for suspended supports for
    receptacles or bowls.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, sections 19, 23.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, section 4; and see appropriate
    subclasses for feeding and discharging liquids to and from discharge
    apparatus.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    sections 8, 14.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, section 19.

    291,    Track Sanders, sections 8, 16, 19.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, section 13; subclasses
    68.2+, having the hoisting bucket type of implement with discharging means.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, section 7.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Consumable Electrodes,
    subclasses 21+ for combinations with means for feeding materials to the
    discharge space.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclasses 111.01+
    for combinations with means to feed fluent materials to the discharge space.

    346,    Recorders, section 6.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, section 19.

    366,    Agitating, sections 4, 9, 12.5; the line with Class 222 is set
    forth in section III of the class definition of Class 366.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 470+ for a typewriter having a
    dispenser for liquid ink.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, appropriate subclasses,
    for the combination of a coating tool including dispensing means which
    supplies coating material either to the tool or to a work surface for a
    spreading operation by the tool (see particularly subclasses 136 and 137+,
    for the latter).

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, sections 4, 7, 17, 19, the line being
    stated in the class definition of this class.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, sections 8, 15, 18, 19, 20, 23.

    417,    Pumps, sections 9, 19.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, section 9.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, sections 4, 8.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    sections 8, 12, 13, 14, and 17.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product and
    Process, subclasses 72+ for batteries having electrolyte feeding means.

    431,    Combustion, sections 7, 15, 19.

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 80+ for intra-oral dispensing apparatus used
    by dentists.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclass 34 having buoys with
    oil distributors.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, section 4, subclasses 15+ for bubble
    blowing toys.

    449,    Bee Culture, subclasses 9+ for a bee hive having a bee feeding
    provision, and subclass 48 for a free standing bee feeder.

    451,    Abrading, sections 4,16,19.

    452,    Butchering, sections 14, 19.

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, subclasses 16+ for feeders for
    shellers and huskers.

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclass 65 for an amusement
    illusion caused by visual imitation of an event occurring in nature, e.g.,
    rain, snow, fire, etc.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, see subclasses 269+ for making a tube from a sheet or
    web.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 289+ for applying or removing material from the
    external surface of the body or the cutaneous layer.


CLS 222/1
TXT Dispensing processes under the class definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 1 for processes for dispensing
    articles not otherwise provided for.


CLS 222/2
TXT Dispensers under the class definition having check control means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153.01+, where check control means is claimed only as locking means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    194,    Check-Actuated Controlled Mechanisms, appropriate subclass for
    patents disclosing a check controlled dispensing apparatus and claiming a
    specific feature of the control mechanism.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 151+ for article dispensers not
    otherwise provided for, and having means for blocking or disabling the
    ejector or releaser means thereof, such means often being disclosed as
    check-control means.

    235,    Registers, subclasses 379, 380, 381, and 383 for banking and credit
    card systems and mechanized stores, respectively, wherein either money or
    merchandise is released upon the sensing of a valid credit card and
    including means to debit the account of the individual receiving the money
    or merchandise.


CLS 222/3
TXT Dispensers under the class definition disclosed for dispensing gas or vapor
    as its proximate purpose.

    (1)     Note.  The terms "gas" and "gaseous" are used in the definitions of
    the indented subclasses to include vapor.

    (2)     Note.  See section 4 of the main class definition for the
    distinction between dispensing of gases and vapors, and the use of gases
    and vapors to dispense other materials and for notes to other classes
    having gas or vapor dispensing, per se,  or in various combinations.

    (3)     Note.  The following notes to other subclasses in this class
    specifies the subclasses dealing by title or definition with devices that
    handle fluids (gases, vapors, or liquids) not involving dispensing of such
    fluids as the proximate purpose of the combination.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53      and 152, for inert atmosphere providing means with and without
    automatic control means.

    61+,    258, 261 through 263, 373, 389, 394+, for dispensers with fluid
    pressure discharge assistants in various combinations.

    69,     332, 442, 468, and 478+, for vent passages in various combinations.

    72,     for dispensers having volume or rate of flow meters with gas
    separating means.

    113,    for dispensers with illuminator or burner.

    130+,   for combinations of dispensers with nondispensing container
    compartment or jacket.

    146,    for dispensers with heating or cooling means.

    188,    for dispensers with a fluid-trap-seal, for inlets or outlets.

    190,    for dispensers with material treatment or conditioning means.

    195,    for dispensers with gas agitation.

    206+,   for resilient wall dispensers in which the resilient wall device
    compresses contained fluids or feeds fluids under pressure to cause
    discharge.

    334,    for dispensers having fluid operated motors.

    630+,   for dispensers in which a flowing fluid contacts, picks up, and
    carries the material to be dispensed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 63+ for respiratory control devices and
    subclasses 223+ for tire filling chucks and/or inflation stems.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 4+ for gas filling methods including tire inflating, and
    subclass 38 for means for filling tires with nongaseous materials.

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclasses 415+, for tire inflating
    devices combined with tire or wheel, for inflating means intended to be
    associated with only one particular tire and for means for inflating one
    tire from another.


CLS 222/4
TXT Dispensers under subclass 3 having means, in addition to the gas dispensing
    means, to dispense nongaseous material.

    (1)     Note.  If the gas is dispensed by itself, it may also be used as a
    discharge assistant, to aid in dispensing nongas materials.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 171+ for fluid separating traps and
    vents in fluid handling systems.


CLS 222/5
TXT Dispensers under subclass 3 claimed in combinations with a punch or a
    cutter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80+,    for nongas dispensers with cutter or punch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 19 for organizations in which a cutter or punch opens a gas cell
    to deliver gas pressure discharge assistant to refill a dispenser.


CLS 222/6
TXT Dispensers under subclass 3 having plural sources of supply connected to
    the outlet in parallel but controlled for successive use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129+,   for other plural sources.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 113 for similar devices comprising plural
    inflows to a system controlled by the depletion of a source.


CLS 222/14
TXT Dispensers under the class definition having means to terminate material
    discharge (i.e., cut-off), which means is caused to operate by some
    character of interconnection with mechanism which senses or determines
    volume or rate of flow, which mechanism is designed to be preset, (i.e.,
    set at the desired volume or rate of flow) prior to initiation of the
    dispensing operation or at any time during the dispensing to discharge the
    final unit of a desired volume.  The mechanism may be a volume meter, rate
    of flow meter, float, follower, pump, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Selective presetting may involve only a choice between two
    or more fixed quantity dispensing mechanism which are volume or rate of
    flow controlled.

    (2)     Note.  Cut-off in the case of reciprocating pump mechanism requires
    holding the pump against further operation not merely determining the
    length of a stroke.

    (3)     Note.  Preset devices which operate mechanically, as by counting a
    number of mechanical movements, without regard to whether or not material
    is actually dispensed, are not here, nor under "automatic", but in
    appropriate following subclasses, especially under indicators, subclasses
    23+ or timing mechanism, subclass 70.

    (4)     Note.  See section 6 of the main class definition for the general
    line on volume or rate of flow meters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23+,    for dispensers combined with recorders, registers, etc., without
    selectively preset volume or rate of flow operated cut-off, see note 3.

    59+,    for rate of flow mechanism operated cut-off without selective
    presetting means.

    70,     see note 3, for dispensers with mechanism to time discharge by
    operations other than counting dispensing cycles or units dispensed.

    71+,    for dispenser with volume or rate of flow metering without a
    cut-off operated thereby.

    282+,   for dispensers having discharge assistants with means to vary or
    adjust the volume discharged.


CLS 222/15
TXT Dispensers under subclass 14 having means for preventing a change of
    position of the volume selecting means while material is being discharged.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for means to prevent setting a register to zero during discharge of
    material.

    435,    for dispensers having means to prevent adjustment of a volume
    varying means in a stationary trap chamber during discharge.


CLS 222/16
TXT Dispensers under subclass 14 in which the element that caused operation of
    the cut-off mechanism is brought to its beginning position as a part of the
    dispensing operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for registers in which the operating cycle includes reset to zero,
    there being no selectively preset cut-off.


CLS 222/17
TXT Dispensers under subclass 14 having (1) means controlled by the rate of
    flow and moving with the flow sensing means from a variably determined
    initial position to a fixed cut-off position, or having (2) means
    controlled by the accumulation of successive trapped volumes to set the
    cut-off operating means back step-by-step from a variably predetermined
    initial position to a fixed cut-off position.


CLS 222/18
TXT Dispensers under subclass 17 in which the controller member or indicator
    may make more than one rotation on its axis, which is also the axis of its
    scale or dial, before reaching its cutting-off point.

    (1)     Note.  The member or indicator may follow a spiral path around its
    axis, as in following a screw or a spiral in a single plane.


CLS 222/19
TXT Dispensers under subclass 18 in which a dial type presetting member or
    indicator is connected with one or more additional dials by means of
    transfer mechanisms.


CLS 222/20
TXT Dispensers under subclass 17 in which the cut-off is effected by closing a
    valve.


CLS 222/21
TXT Dispensers under subclass 14 having means capable of being set in advance
    of dispensing to accumulate a single trapped volume selected from different
    possible quantities, and having means controlled by the trapped volume for
    cutting off the supply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64+,    for material level controls for dispensing operations, not
    selectively preset, though in some cases capable of minor adjustment to
    insure accuracy in delivering the intended volume.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 13+, for adjustable stroke
    expansible chamber devices where no dispensing features are claimed.


CLS 222/22
TXT Dispensers under subclass 14 in which the cut-off is set during a metered
    discharge, to operate after the discharge of the unit which is being
    measured at the time the cut-off is set.


CLS 222/23
TXT Dispensers under the class definition having signals, indicators,
    registers, recorders, gauges, or display devices for indicating a condition
    or performing a measuring function, such devices consisting of relatively
    movable, changeable, or audible information giving parts.  A dispenser part
    as a piston, wall or drain pipe, may cooperate with a graduated part to
    form the indicator but devices in which one of the means to be inspected or
    compared is merely the material to be dispensed or its surface are not
    included.

    (1)     Note.  See section 6 of main class definition for the general line
    on volume or rate of flow meters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52+,    for automatic controls without the features of this subclass (23).

    71,     for volume or rate of flow meters without the features of this
    subclass (23).

    77,     for dispensers combined with weighing means.

    113,    for dispensers with an illuminator or fuel burner.

    154+,   for mere inspection devices.

    192,    for display and exhibiting means which do not indicate a condition
    or perform a measuring function.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 88 and 89.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting.

    116,    Signals and Indicators.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 141, 213+ and 551+ for fluid handling
    systems combined with recorders, registers, signals or indicators.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 502.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 227, 230 and 365+.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 2+ for article dispensing devices
    combined with recorders, registers, signals or indicators.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclass 83.

    235,    Registers, subclasses 379, 380, and 381 for banking and credit card
    systems and 383 for mechanized stores, respectively, wherein either money
    or merchandise is released upon the sensing of a valid credit card and
    including means to debit the account of the individual receiving the money
    or merchandise, and see section 6 of the definition of Class 222.

    291,    Track Sanders, subclass 17.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+ for electric alarms or
    signals automatically responsive to a condition.

    346,    Recorders, and see section 6 of the definition of class 222.


CLS 222/24
TXT Dispensers under subclass 23 having means in the nature of a shutter for
    concealing the significant part of the recorder, register, etc., during
    portions of the dispensing cycle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 7 for article dispensers not otherwise
    classified including dispenser operated register means.

    235,    Registers, subclass 24 for cash register indicator shutters.


CLS 222/25
TXT Dispensers under subclass 23 having two or more recorders, registers,
    indicators, signal devices, or exhibitors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for register and shutter combinations in which the shutter has a
    signalling function.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 552 for fluid handling systems having
    plural recorders, etc.


CLS 222/26
TXT Dispensers under subclass 25 having two or more information devices
    relating to a volume measuring function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14+,    for such devices having also a selectively preset cut-off mechanism.


CLS 222/27
TXT Dispensers under subclass 25 having a register for counting or totalizing
    volumes discharged and a signal which usually gives information as to the
    operation or condition of the totalizer or counter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for registers and signals in which the signal conceals the register
    indication.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 7 for article dispensing devices
    having dispenser operated registers.


CLS 222/28
TXT Dispensers under subclass 25 having a common operating factor for two or
    more information devices, so that they operate simultaneously or
    proportionately.  Volume and cost registers are included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     where at least two of the information devices have a volume
    measuring function.


CLS 222/29
TXT Dispensers under subclass 23 having a signal reading point marker and a
    scale or set of indications consisting of plural lines or columns of
    different values or significance, or a plurality of scales or sets of
    indications.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25+,    for pairs of registers each having a pointer or reading point
    marker and a common operator.


CLS 222/30
TXT Dispensers under subclass 23 in which the information device is a recording
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders.


CLS 222/31
TXT Dispensers under subclass 23 in which the dispensing means operates an
    information device or a portion thereof by an adjustable connection so that
    the indication may be varied proportionately with relation to the
    discharge, usually to correct a measuring indication, or to transpose it
    into different terms, or in which an element of the information device is
    adjustable with reference to its mounting, or for adjustable information
    device elements where the effect is not felt proportionately through the
    range of the dispenser, but is merely an adjustment of a part and its
    support for accuracy.


CLS 222/32
TXT Dispensers under subclass 23 having an information device of the register
    or counter type in which provision is made for returning the parts to their
    initial or zero position, manually or by operation of the dispenser.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 7 for article dispensing devices
    including dispenser operated registers.

    235,    Registers, subclass 144, for register zero setting means not
    restricted to dispensers.


CLS 222/33
TXT Dispensers under subclass 32 in which the register parts are set to zero by
    the operation of the dispenser as a part of a discharge cycle.  The
    indication to be set back is usually one remaining from the previous
    dispensing operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for registers, etc., having an element that causes operation of the
    cut-off mechanism, and set to starting position as a part of the discharge
    cycle.


CLS 222/34
TXT Dispensers under subclass 32 having means to prevent setting the register
    to zero while material is being discharged.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for selectively preset mechanism with means to prevent change of
    setting during discharge.

    435,    for means for preventing change of volume adjusting means of a
    stationary trap chamber during discharge.


CLS 222/35
TXT Dispensers under subclass 32 having means to prevent the initiation of a
    discharge operation unless the register is at its initial or zero position.


CLS 222/36
TXT Dispensers under subclass 23 having a totalizer which counts the successive
    operating cycles of the dispenser.

    (1)     Note.  An operation cycle consists of the period from the beginning
    of a discharge until the dispenser parts and the state of the trap, if any,
    as regards material level, again reach the condition at which discharging
    started. Thus one discharging operation may include either one or any
    desired number of cycles.

    (2)     Note. Dispensers of the forcer type, gravity trap, conveyor trap,
    or flow meter type may be included, and groups of cycles may be counted
    instead of single cycles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclasses 18+ for a weigher with a cycle
    totalizer.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 7 for article dispensing devices
    having dispenser operated registers.

    235,    Registers, particularly subclass 94.


CLS 222/37
TXT Dispensers under subclass 36 in which the volume discharge per operating
    cycle may be varied, or the dispenser has different or varying cycles of
    operation, and the totalizer is operable in accordance therewith.


CLS 222/38
TXT Dispensers under subclass 36 in which the dispenser part operating the
    totalizer has a to and fro motion.


CLS 222/39
TXT Dispensers under subclass 23 in which the information device is audible.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclasses particularly
    subclasses 137+, 147 and 148+.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 213+ for whistle type vents in diverse
    fluid containing pressure systems.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 3 for article dispensing devices
    having audible signal or indicator means.

    291,    Track Sanders, subclass 17.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 384.1+ for electrical
    audible signals or alarms.


CLS 222/40
TXT Dispensers under subclass 23 in which (1) the information device is
    operated by the flow of material either through the usual dispenser
    channels or overflowing therefrom, or (2) the surplus material flows out of
    an opening specially provided for signaling purposes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for totalizers operated by flow meters. The mere fact that flow is
    taking place is shown here.

    159,    for transparent devices for observing flow, without the aid of a
    flow-operated movable element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 112 and 264+.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 603+ for electrical
    automatic fluent material responsive indicating systems.


CLS 222/41
TXT Dispensers under subclass 23 having means giving information as to the
    position or range of motion of a dispenser part, as a valve, follower,
    piston, or adustable wall. The means ordinarily comprises a scale and
    pointer, but a dispenser part, as an edge of a wall or the end of a
    projecting part may serve as a pointer or reference point.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, particularly subclasses 200+ for scale and
    pointer subcombinations.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 553+ for fluid handling systems having
    position or extent of motion indicators.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 4+ for article dispensing devices in
    which a dispenser part, position or adjustment is indicated by indicating
    means.


CLS 222/42
TXT Dispensers under subclass 41 in which the position or selection for use, of
    one of a plurality of valves, outlets, traps, or other dispenser parts
    having equivalent functions, is shown.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 555 for fluid handling systems having
    means for indicating selection from among plural branches.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 5 for plural source article dispensing
    devices having article selection indicating means.


CLS 222/43
TXT Dispensers under subclass 41 in which the indicator serves as a stop for
    the movable part as well as showing its position or extent of motion.
    Indicators showing the setting of one of a plurality of selectively usable
    stops are here also.


CLS 222/44
TXT Dispensers under subclass 41 in which the indicator comprises a scale and
    pointer, having a series of detents accompanying or serving as the
    graduations of the scale, the effect being to check or hold the indicator
    and the dispenser part in the indicated position.


CLS 222/45
TXT Dispensers under subclass 41 in which the moving element of the indicator
    is flexibly connected with the movable dispenser part. The scale indicia
    may be placed on the flexible part.

    (1)     Note.  Actuation by an endless drive means is not included, even
    though the means is flexible.


CLS 222/46
TXT Dispensers under subclass 41 in which a movable dispenser part is operated
    by a screw which also carries or serves as an indicator element.


CLS 222/47
TXT Dispensers under subclass 41 in which the indicator part is rigidly carried
    by a movable dispenser part.  The dispenser part may itself constitute an
    element of the indicator, as the end of an inlet or outlet pipe, or of a
    piston.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 556 for fluid handling systems having an
    indicator element rigidly carried by a movable system part.


CLS 222/48
TXT Dispensers under subclass 47 in which the dispenser part carrying or
    serving as the indicator element has a pivoted or rotary motion.


CLS 222/49
TXT Dispensers under subclass 47 in which the indicator element comprises or is
    carried by a reciprocable dispenser element projecting from the container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for telescoping container parts carrying indicator elements.


CLS 222/50
TXT Dispensers under subclass 49 in which the scale is placed on the container
    wall or mounted to extend therefrom.


CLS 222/51
TXT Dispensers under subclass 23 in which the information device is a float
    level indicator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 717+ for sounding type distance
    measuring.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 305+ for float type liquid level
    or depth gauges, and subclass 322.5 providing for floats, per se.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 110+ for float operated liquid
    level indications.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 558 for liquid level responsive indicator,
    recorder or alarm.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 612+ for electrical
    automatic fluent material level responsive indicating systems.


CLS 222/52
TXT Dispensers under the class definition having means to sense some condition,
    which means causes operation of a control device.

    (1)     Note.  The above definition excludes valves, closures, and nozzles,
    directly operated by the pressure or flow of the material (e.g., check
    valves), or by gravity or inertia.  See the following notes.

    (2)     Note.  Automatic controls are associated with subject matter of
    most of the classes.  Only those will be set forth in the notes to this and
    the indented subclasses which appear most nearly related to the
    combinations of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14+,    for cutoffs operated by selectively preset volume or rate of flow
    mechanism.

    23+,    for automatic controls where a recorder, register, indicator,
    signal or exhibitor is claimed.

    332,    375, 380, 387, 396, 400, 490, and 491+, for various combinations
    including valves, closures, and movable nozzles directly operated by the
    pressure or flow of material.

    353,    437, 457, and 479, for barometric and angle of repose devices in
    various combinations.

    500,    for gravity and inertial operated closures and valves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, appropriate subclasses for
    automatic controls associated with the subject matter of such class.  It is
    noted that this class includes such dispensing, per se, for the special
    purposes of the class (4).

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 524+
    particularly subclasses 573+, for automatic controls for the subject matter
    of such class.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 663+ for coating apparatus having
    automatic control features.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, appropriate subclasses.  Many of the devices in
    this class, particularly in subclasses 51+ and 72+ are dispensers, per se,
    for the special purposes of this class.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 446 through 458 and 504+.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 38+ for control by change of position or
    inertia of the system; subclasses 47+ for speed responsive valve control;
    subclasses 59+ for freeze condition responsive safety systems; subclasses
    65+ for combustion failure responsive fuel safety cutoffs; subclasses 67+
    for destructible or deformable element control; subclasses 78.1+ for
    atmospheric change responsive control; subclasses 82+ for pressure
    modulators, relays or followers; subclasses 87.01+ for self-proportioning
    or correlating systems; subclasses 386+ for liquid level responsive or
    maintaining systems; and subclasses 455+ for line condition change
    responsive valves, including safety cut-off, pop, pressure regulating and
    directly responding safety and check valves.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 192+ for filling apparatus having automatic control of flow
    cut-off or diversion of material to the receiver.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclass 44 for automatic fluid feed and
    discharge devices.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, subclasses 7+ for automatic chemical pressure
    generating systems, subclasses 19+ for automatic valves, 26+ for automatic
    receptacles, 56+ for condition responsive control for special applications.

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclasses 60+ for material control responsive to
    a weigh chamber.

    184,    Lubrication, subclasses 66+ for gravity feed lubricators with
    automatic cutoff.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 116.5+ for automatic
    stop mechanism.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses for different
    types of conveyors or systems of plural conveyors having operation control
    means responsive to a condition of a conveyor or to a condition of the
    conveyed load.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 509+, for
    automatic assorting, subclasses 491 and 496, for automatic control of
    discharging.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 97+ for fluid
    pressure, flow or material level responsive devices which may include
    material feed controls, particularly subclass 101.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses 100+ for automatic valved bungs.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 9+ for article dispensing devices
    not otherwise provided for, having automatic control means.

    235,    Registers, subclasses 379, 380, 381, and 383 for banking and credit
    card systems and mechanized stores, respectively, wherein either money or
    merchandise is released upon the sensing of a valid credit card and
    including means to debit the account of the individual receiving the money
    or merchandise.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 34+ for
    automatic feed controls associated with comminutors.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 15+ for valves having a
    compulsory cut-off after a flow period initiated automatically.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, appropriate subclasses (e.g., 161,
    270, 294+, 307, 315+, etc.) for a chamber or receptacle and material
    charging or discharging means therefor, and wherein the means is responsive
    to a condition of the chamber/receptacle, the material or the means.


CLS 222/53
TXT Automatic control means under subclass 52 applied to dispensers having
    either or both (1) means to jacket the material conveying conduits, or (2)
    means to provide a nonmaterial discharging inert atmosphere for the
    material to be dispensed, including means to evacuate gases from the
    container.

    (1)     Note.  The inert atmosphere may be chemically inert, i.e., not
    reactive chemically with the material, or it may be one which is not
    combustible with vapors given off by the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for automatic controls for a fluid pressure medium which causes
    material discharge, even though such fluid  pressure medium provides an
    inert  atmosphere.

    152,    for the means provided for in this subclass (53) without automatic
    control.

    190,    for means to humidify a dispenser receptacle or means to absorb
    moisture from its atmosphere.

    195,    209, 258, 261-263, 334, 373, 389, 394+, and 630+, for fluid flow
    discharge, gas agitation, or fluid pressure mediums causing discharge by
    acting on pumps, followers, etc., or by acting directly on material, even
    though the  fluids used for such purposes are  inert to the material being
    dispensed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, for means to provide inert atmosphere to
    smother or prevent starting of fires, particularly subclasses 66+.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 42+ for preserving processes
    involving providing a protective layer.


CLS 222/54
TXT Dispensers under subclass 52, in which the condition sensing means is
    either soluble in a liquid or is responsive to a change in temperature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, sub- classes 1+ for a thermal
    control for closures.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, particularly subclass
    33 for fusible, combustible or thermal actuators.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 73 for temperature controlled watering
    devices.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 504.1 and 504.3 for
    fusible safety devices.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 287.5 for fusible release dampers.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 59+ for freeze condition responsive
    safety systems; subclasses 65+ for combustion failure responsive fuel
    safety cut-offs; subclasses 67+ for frangible, fusible or soluble control
    elements; subclasses 79+ for atmospheric temperature change responsive
    control; subclass 457 for thermally responsive safetycut-offs requiring
    reset; and subclass 468 for valves responding automatically to changed
    thermal condition of the fluid controlled.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 1+,
    for both thermal and soluble actuators.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclass
    42 for fusible connections, 56+ for condition responsive controls.

    184,    Lubrication, subclass 68 for thermostatic cut-offs for gravity feed
    lubricators.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 89.1 - 89.4 for frangible or fusible safety
    attachments.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, which includes
    valves actuated by temperature responsive means and especially subclasses
    12.1+ for automatic mixture control by temperature or heat content.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    appropriate subclasses for electrothermal or thermally actuated switches.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 100+ for a thermometer.

    454,    Ventilation, subclass 28 for a thermally released outlet cowl and
    subclass 369 for thermally actuated fire dampers used in ventilating
    systems.


CLS 222/55
TXT Dispensers under subclass 52 having means which responds to the volume,
    weight, or pressure of material already discharged without restraint on
    such material and correspondingly affects the discharge means employed,
    usually to secure uniformity of discharge regardless of varying conditions
    of the material as to specific gravity, etc., thus giving a constant feed
    from the source regardless of rate of use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for dispensers having a source delivering to a receiver which is
    also discharging, there being means responsive to the quantity of material
    in the receiver to control discharge from the source thus containing a
    variable feed from the source due to the rate of use.

    57,     for dispensers controlled by the volume, weight, pressure or rate
    of flow of a second material.

    353,    437, 457, and 479, for barometric or angle of repose devices in
    various combinations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses 204+ for regulation of the
    fibers fed during cleaning.

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclasses 116+ for a weigher which cuts off the
    feed after a predetermined weight is accumulated in the weigh chamber.


CLS 222/56
TXT Dispensers under subclass 52, having means controlling the rate of
    discharge from a source, the means being responsive to the quantity of
    material in a receiver which is also discharging material thus giving a
    variable feed from the source due to the rate of use.

    (1)     Note.  Valved material discharge guides are included where means
    responsive to the pressure of the material is provided in the guide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for control by volume, weight, or pressure of material delivered
    from dispenser thus giving a constant feed regardless of rate of use.

    57,     for dispenser controlled by the volume, weight, pressure, or rate
    of flow of a second material.

    353,    437, 457, and 479, for barometric or angle of repose devices in
    various combinations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses 204+, for regulation of
    fibers fed during cleaning.

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclass 53.4 for float valves for
    carbid dispensers controlled by the liquid level in an acetylene generator.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 386+ for level maintaining devices which
    may regulate inflow to a receptacle from which material is being removed.


CLS 222/57
TXT Dispensers under subclass 52 having means controlling the rate of discharge
    from a source, the means being responsive to the volume, weight, pressure,
    or rate of flow of second material, for which dispensing means may or may
    not be provided.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55      and 56, for dispensers controlled by the volume, weight or pressure
    of the material dispensed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 3 for processes of mixing under conditions
    of automatic control, subclasses 87.01+ for self-proportioning or
    correlating fluid handling systems, especially subclasses 88+ for automatic
    mixture control, subclass 94 for fuel control by boiler or water system
    condition, subclasses 98+ for self-proportioning flow systems, and
    subclasses 111+ for self-controlled branched flow systems comprising plural
    inflow branches.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 109+ for discharge of
    treated material from a separator there provided for.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity, Regulation, subclasses 12.1+,
    for thermal control of mixing of two fluids.


CLS 222/58
TXT Dispensers under subclass 52 having means responsive to the weight of
    material in the supply container for controlling the discharge.

    (1)     Note.  Valves or closures operated directly by material weight are
    not included (see note 1 to subclass 52), but movably mounted containers,
    self-adjusting by weight of their contents, and cut-offs interconnected to
    a relatively movable wall, false wall, or baffle which responds to varying
    weights in the container are here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332,    375, 380, 387, 396, 490, and 491+, for various combinations
    including valves, closures, and movable nozzles directly operated by the
    pressure or flow of material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 403+ for fluid handling systems
    controlled by the weight of accumulated fluid.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclasses 24+ and 32+ for conveyors
    controlled by the weight of the load in an intake receptacle.


CLS 222/59
TXT Dispensers under subclass 52 in which means responsive to rate flow causes
    operation of cut-off means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14+,    for cut-offs operated by a selectively preset volume or rate of
    flow means, the selective preset being to select one from definitely
    different volumes or rates as distinguished from mere adjustment of the
    mechanism to secure accuracy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 459+, 486+ and 497+ for line condition
    responsive valves operated by change in the rate of fluid flow in the line.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 15+ for valves which are
    fluid controlled for automatic cut-off after being opened by nonautomatic
    means.


CLS 222/60
TXT Dispensers under subclass 59 in which the controller element is a cam which
    operates the cut-off at the end of a single complete revolution.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, for devices of this general type which are
    not manually tripped, but repeat their operation indefinitely for metering
    purposes.


CLS 222/61
TXT Dispensers under subclass 52 in which the automatic control is (1) of a
    dispenser utilizing a fluid under pressure to cause dispensing, or (2) of
    dispensers with fluid pressure discharge assistant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3+,     for dispensers for dispensing gases or vapors and see the Note for
    the distinction between gas or vapor dispensers and gas or vapor discharge
    assistants.

    53,     and see the Notes thereto for nondispensing inert atmosphere
    providing means.

    209,    258, 261 through 263, 373, 389, 394+, for fluid pressure discharge
    assistants in other combinations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 154+ for diverse fluid containing
    pressure systems comprising traps for boiler feed and fluid separating
    traps.


CLS 222/62
TXT Dispensers under subclass 61 in which the fluid pressure medium is a liquid
    and the responsive means is a float, usually of lower specific gravity than
    one of the liquids and higher than the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    395,    for nonautomatic dispensers with a pressure liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 154 for diverse fluid containing pressure
    systems for which the diverse fluids are liquids, and subclass 172 for
    fluid separating traps separating liquid from liquid.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 119, 120 and 121+ for
    float controls there provided for.


CLS 222/63
TXT Dispensers under subclass 52 in which the device controlled is a motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333,    and see the notes thereto for motor combinations not involving
    automatic control.


CLS 222/64
TXT Dispensers under subclass 52 having means responsive to the level of
    material to cause operation of some device.  The material may be in a
    supply container, trap, passage, overflow receptacle, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for selectively preset level responsive mechanism for determining a
    single trapped volume.

    56,     for control by level in a dispensing-receiver.

    62,     for float controlled pressure liquids.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, appropriate subclasses for
    water closets with liquid level controls.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 386+ for liquid levels responsive or
    maintaining systems.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 192+ for automatic control of flow cut-off or diversion.

    184,    Lubrication, subclasses 103.1+ for constant level lubricators.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for article dispensing
    devices not otherwise provided for including empty supply source responsive
    means, such devices being classified in subclasses 17+ and/or 108+ of that
    class (221).

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 295 and 296 for a static
    receptacle and means for charging or discharging the receptacle and wherein
    either the position of the charging means (subclass 295), or the drive of a
    charging conveyor (subclass 296), is responsive to the level of material in
    the receptacle.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 64 for a fuel burner having means maintaining
    a constant fuel level in a combustion zone.


CLS 222/65
TXT Dispensers under subclass 64 in which the level-responsive means operates
    to prevent manual operation of some part of the dispenser unless the
    material is at the proper level.


CLS 222/66
TXT Dispensers under subclass 64 having means which senses the empty condition
    of a supply container and prevents further operation of the discharging
    means or prevents the forcing of air through a metering device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 399 for low level safety cut-offs of tanks.


CLS 222/67
TXT Dispensers under subclass 64 in which the means which respond to the level
    of material is a float or float operated mechanism which operates a flow
    controller. The flow controller may be for inlet, outlet, vent, overflow,
    drain, or any dispenser outlet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 78+ for float controlled watering
    devices.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 409+ for      float actuated valves.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 42, 199+, 212+, 216, 220+, 229, and 303 for float controls in
    various combinations.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 119, 120 and 121+ for
    various combinations of float controls.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 216+ for float type closures.


CLS 222/68
TXT Dispensers under subclass 67 having two or more outlet elements controlled
    by a float or two or more level responsive float mechanisms for the same
    trap or container. They may be for the same or different types of outlet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 391, 411 and 423 for liquid level
    responsive or maintaining systems involving plural floats and/or plural
    float controlled passages.


CLS 222/69
TXT Dispensers under subclass 67 having a float-operated controller for a
    venting outlet only.


CLS 222/71
TXT Dispensers under the class definition having a volume or rate of flow meter
    for determining the quantity dispensed.

    (1)     Note.  See section 6 of the main class definition for the general
    line on volume or rate of flow meters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14+     for volume and rate of flow meters with selectively preset cut-off
    mechanism.

    23+,    for volume and rate of flow meters combined with a recorder,
    register, indicator, signal, or exhibitor.

    52+,    for automatic control combinations, particularly subclasses 59+.


CLS 222/72
TXT Dispensers under subclass 71 having means for meter by-passing, gas
    separation, antisiphoning devices and/or means for priming the meter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    318,    for discharge assistant by-pass means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 198+ for the volume or rate of
    flow meter subcombination.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, for apparatus for gas separation, per
    se.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 171+ for fluid separating trap and vents
    in diverse fluid containing pressure systems.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 26+, for pressure
    compensators.


CLS 222/73
TXT Dispensers under subclass 71 having means for maintaining full pressure
    and/or relieving excess pressure in a fluid filled hose at the outlet side
    of the meter (wet-hose type).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 276.


CLS 222/74
TXT Dispensers under the class definition having means for supporting or
    guiding a movable discharge guide interconnected with means for controlling
    or causing discharge to prevent discharge when the guide is in nonuse
    position, or having actuators for switch or motor control means for
    dispensing mechanism interconnected with the movable material discharge
    guide or with an actuator for a discharge controller carried thereby.

    (1)     Note.  Movable discharge guides which are connected to flow
    controllers or closures, so that when one is operated the others operate,
    are excluded, see subclass 537 and the notes thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    320+,   for movable nozzles connected to a discharge assistant to move
    therewith, and see the notes thereto.

    538+,   and see the notes thereto for miscellaneous movable discharge
    guides having means for housing or securing discharge guides in a position
    of nonuse.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 87 for
    interlocks.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 355.16 for combined hose holders and fluid
    supplies, especially subclass 355.18 in which hose movement controls flow
    of fluid.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 116+ for power stop
    interlocks.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 195 for
    spraying and discharging devices having combined therewith hose holders and
    fluid supplies, especially subclass 196 in which movement of the hose
    controls fluid flow.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 370+ for a reeling
    device which may wind various materials including a hose.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 75+ for hose and/or nozzle type supports.


CLS 222/75
TXT Dispensers under subclass 74 having connections or interlocks between a
    switch or motor control and an actuator for a discharge controller carried
    by a movable material discharge guide.


CLS 222/77
TXT Dispensers under the class definition combined with weighing mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  This is the residual subclass involving weighing.  For
    weighing means in other combinations, the preceding subclasses should be
    considered.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for constant weight control by output.

    57,     for control by weight of a second material.

    58,     for automatic control by weight of the material in the supply
    container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclasses 60+ for weigh pan responsive control of
    filling, or both filling and emptying, of the weigh pan; subclasses 145+
    for a weigher having loading or unloading means; and subclasses 161+ for a
    weigher having a load guide.


CLS 222/78
TXT Dispensers under the class definition where features of external
    configuration simulating some object are claimed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 24 for article dispensing devices not
    otherwise provided for and having external configurations simulating other
    things.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 827+ for velocipedes having means to
    simulate other things.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 268+ for a figure toy which
    may include a dispenser; and subclass 475 for other dispensing toys.


CLS 222/79
TXT Dispensers under subclass 78 made in simulation of a fire-arm.

    (1)     Note.  The so-called "gun-type" dispensers are not here, even
    though they may have pistol type grips or other individual features
    simulating fire-arms.  This subclass takes those devices which in their
    entirety simulate fire-arms, e.g., water guns.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms.

    89,     Ordnance.

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, subclass 55, for a projector that
    impels a puff of gas.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 112, for imitation firearm type flash lights.


CLS 222/80
TXT Dispensing devices claimed in combination with a punch or a cutter.  The
    cutter or punch must be combined with dispensing features, or claimed in
    combination with a dispenser.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass are placed patents where the cutter or
    punch does not form a dispensing opening.  Where two or more cutters or
    punches are provided and at least one forms a dispensing opening, see the
    subclasses below.

    (2)     Note.  The punch or rupturing means does not have to function by
    cutting but may operate to knockout previously weakened portions or
    frangible closures.

    (3)     Note.  See section 19 of the main class definition for related art
    in other classes involving hollow needles for puncturing a receiver of
    material dispensed and other dispensers associated with means to cut or
    puncture that which receives dispensed material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85+     and 87, for devices in which a nondispensing opening is formed in
    addition to forming a dispensing opening.

    345+,   for devices which strike off or level the charge in a conveyor type
    trap chamber, even though such device is designated a cutter.

    544+,   for discharge controllers not having an edge sharpened to cut off
    the dispensed material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 2 for carton openers and subclass 6.3, for can
    openers including means for forming a material guide in connection with the
    opening, and see the notes to the main class and subclass definitions of
    Class 30 for the search field on cutting processes, implements and machines.

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses, for a cutting or punching device,
    and particularly subclass 660.

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 278, where the punch also serves as or is
    carried by a closure for the puncture, and there are no dispensing features
    (e.g., nozzles or pouring lips).

    248,    Supports, subclasses 216.1+, for brackets with support penetrating
    means.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tools, subclasses 199+
    for augers adapted to form dispensing openings in barrel-heads or bottle
    corks, when no dispensing feature is claimed.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 412, as explained in the
    reference thereto appearing in section 19 of the definition of this class
    (222).


CLS 222/81
TXT Dispensers under subclass 80 in which at least one cutter or punch is
    designed to form a dispensing opening in the container which holds the
    material to be dispensed.

    (1)     Note.  Devices for dispensing gases are not included in this
    subclass and the indented subclasses.  Such devices have been set up as a
    special group in preceding subclasses 3+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for gas pressure reservoirs, per se, combined with a cutter or
    punch to form an opening for dispensing the gaseous contents.  (See (1)
    Note.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 318 for devices for tapping a system under
    pressure including means to form an aperture therein.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 30+ for article dispensers not
    otherwise provided for, including cutter or punch means for forming
    openings in supply containers or in the wrapper thereof.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 132+ for hand
    manipulated applicators of general utility having a tool, and a container
    for the material which must be ruptured in order that the material may be
    available to the tool.


CLS 222/82
TXT Dispensers under subclass 81 having discharge assistant means to discharge
    the contents of the container in which the opening has been formed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251+,   for definitions of "discharge assistant" and various types thereof,
    and see the notes to such subclasses for the location of the other
    combinations and subcombinations involving such means.


CLS 222/83
TXT Dispensers under subclass 81 having at least one cutter or punch mounted
    movably relative to other portions of the structure with which it is
    associated so that it may be moved relative to such associated structure to
    perform its cutting or punching operation.

    (1)     Note.  The cutter or punch may be a permanent part of the
    receptacle whose contents are to be dispensed, as by being permanently
    mounted on or within the receptacle, or it may be a part of a device
    separate from the receptacle and movable relative to other parts of such
    separate device.

    (2)     Note.  Where there are cutters or punches for forming plural
    openings, the relatively movable cutter or punch may be either the one for
    cutting the dispensing opening, or for cutting, venting and/or mutilating
    openings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85+,    for other devices for forming plural openings, where none of the
    devices are mounted for relative motion.


CLS 222/83.5
TXT Dispensers under subclass 83 having a sleeve or rest into or on which the
    receptacle to be cut is placed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86,     for similar devices with nonmovable cutters for cutting plural
    holes.

    88,     for sleeves and/or rests combined with cutters.


CLS 222/85
TXT Dispensers under subclass 81 in which two or more distinct apertures are
    formed in the container whose contents are to be dispensed by the cutting
    or punching operation.

    (1)     Note.  Where plural cutters or punches cooperate together to form a
    single aperture, the patent is not in this or the indented subclass but in
    other appropriate subclasses of this group.

    (2)     Note.  Where plural cutters or punches which are alternatively
    usable but the organization and arrangement thereof is such that they are
    not operable on the same receptacle to form plural openings, the patent is
    not in this or the indented subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83,     for plural devices in which at least one is mounted for relative
    motion.


CLS 222/86
TXT Dispensers under subclass 85 having a sleeve or a rest into or on which the
    receptacle to be cut is placed.

    (1)     Note.  The sleeve or rest is ordinarily associated with a funnel or
    nozzle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83.5,   for similar devices with one or more relatively movable cutters.

    88,     for such devices having means to cut a single opening.


CLS 222/87
TXT Dispensers under subclass 81 having means for mutilating by cutting,
    crushing, or otherwise destroying the container, usually to prevent reuse.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     for cutters for preventing reuse where no dispensing outlet is
    formed.

    85+,    for cutting of openings in addition to the dispensing opening
    including openings to prevent reuse.


CLS 222/88
TXT Dispensers under subclass 81 in which there is a sleeve or rest into or on
    which the receptacle to be cut or punched is placed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83.5,   for similar devices with one or more relatively movable cutters.

    86,     for such devices for cutting plural openings and see the notes
    appended thereto.


CLS 222/89
TXT Dispensers under subclass 81 in which there is a nozzle associated with a
    cutter or punch, and in which there is means to secure the nozzle to the
    receptacle whose contents are to be dispensed.

    (1)     Note.  Mere friction fit is excluded for which see other
    appropriate subclasses of this group.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    567+,   for such attaching means without an associated cutter or punch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 18+ for couplings combined
    with assembly means, especially subclass 40 for a coupling comprising
    thread cutting means, and subclasses 189+ for end-to-plate joints,
    especially subclass 193 for a joint between a faucet and plate.


CLS 222/90
TXT Dispensers under subclass 89 in which that portion of the nozzle which
    extends within the receptacle whose contents are to be dispensed has
    associated with it a part which extends beyond the nozzle wall to engage or
    abut the inner side of the wall of the receptacle to hold the nozzle in
    place.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     where the only inner wall surface engaging means is a screw helix.

    569,    for similar mounting means without a cutter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclass 191 for an end-to-plate coupling
    with means holding the members together comprising a bolt or hook in the
    flow.


CLS 222/91
TXT Dispensers under subclass 89 in which the means for securing the nozzle to
    the receptacle is of the screw type.

    (1)     Note.  The screw helix may only partially surround the part which
    is inserted through the opening in the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    568,    for such securing means without a cutter or punch.


CLS 222/92
TXT Dispensing devices under the class definition in which one or more walls of
    the material container are made of nonresilient material which will deform
    (collapse) when pressure is applied thereto and will not return to its
    initial position.

    (1)     Note.  Where characteristics of the collapsible wall or
    characteristics, of other parts of the combination which are present
    because of the collapsible wall are not claimed, the patent is not in this
    or the indented subclasses, but in the subclasses following this group,
    even though the container is broadly identified in the claims as a
    collapsible wall type.

    (2)     Note.  This group of subclasses takes patents wherein the outer
    walls are collapsible as defined in the subclass definition.  Internal
    collapsible members (as followers) are not included.

    (3)     Note.  Tube deflating means comprising force exertive means applied
    to the exterior portions of the tube are here included as collapsible wall
    type receptacles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206+,   for resilient wall type dispensers, even though the actual wall
    structure is collapsible if means for returning the wall structure to its
    initial position is provided.

    386.5,  for collapsible wall followers.  See (2) note.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 17.1+ for sheet metal and foil
    manufacturing; and subclasses 400.1+ for miscellaneous processes of making
    hollow articles.

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses for a method or machine for
    making a metal tube or cup from a single-piece blank, particularly subclass
    267 for "impact extrusion" and subclasses 347+ for "deep drawing".

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 89+, for collapsible wall
    expansible chamber devices.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, appropriate subclasses for mere tubular
    conduit structures not disclosed as dispensing containers and not involving
    any other dispensing features.  For a statement of the line, see the
    reference to Class 222 in the Search Class note to the class definition of
    Class 138.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 327 and 328
    for a sprinkling or spraying device comprising a supply holder with
    resilient or collapsible walls.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 65 for tube deflation accomplished by drawing a vacuum on the
    interior of the tube to deflate same where other necessary characteristics
    of Class 141 are present.

    220,    Receptacles, appropriate subclasses for collapsible container
    subcombinations, per se, not involving characteristics of the collapsible
    walls and not involving other dispensing features.  See (1) Note to the
    definition of this subclass, above.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 64 for article dispensers having
    flexible supply container walls and in subclass 65 for such dispensers
    having collapsible or telescoping supply container wall structure.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, for paper container
    subcombinations not involving characteristics of collapsible walls and not
    involving dispensing features at present classified in Class 229. Certain
    subclasses (such as subclasses 7 and 17) of Class 229 contain dispensers
    and structures of the nature of the types now retained in that class (229)
    are classified in those subclasses.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses for processes of molding or shaping plastic
    materials, within the class definitions, to produce collapsible wall tubes.
     For specific subclasses pertaining to production of hollow articles, see
    subclasses 150,171.26+ 209.1+, 267+, 312, 512+, and   523+.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, appropriate subclasses,
    for an implement comprising a collapsible wall type reservoir in
    combination with a coating tool; and see (4) Note to the definition of
    subclass 143 of that class (401).

    417,    Pumps, appropriate subclasses for collapsible wall type pumps.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 45 for a rotary
    expansible chamber device having a collapsible progressively deformed
    working chamber wall.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 269+ for making a tube from a sheet or web.


CLS 222/93
TXT Dispensers under subclass 92 having means to support or hold articles in
    addition to the collapsible wall receptacle.


CLS 222/94
TXT Dispensers under subclass 92 in which (1) two or more receptacles are
    claimed in combination and/or (2) a receptacle having plural compartments
    is claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129+,   for other plural receptacle or plural compartment receptacles.


CLS 222/95
TXT Dispensers under subclass 92 having means other than or in addition to mere
    manual squeezing or gravity flow to assist or cause discharge of the
    receptacle contents.

    (1)     Note.  The majority of such means act on the wall structure to
    collapse the same.  Some patents, all in this subclass (95), do not act on
    the wall structure, such as pumps, with the receptacle connected to the
    intake, atmosphere pressure causing collapse of the wall, and receptacles
    having a material follower therewithin, the walls being collapsed by hand.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclass 152 and indented
    subclasses 153, 154, and 155 for a hand manipulated coating device with
    material supply and a reservoir which has a nonresilient deformable wall or
    wall portion, the implement being provided with means to deform or collapse
    the wall or wall portion to force material to the tool from the reservoir.


CLS 222/96
TXT Dispensers under subclass 95 having means interconnected with the wall
    collapsing means for operating the valve or other discharge outlet flow
    controller or closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    544+,   and see the search notes for other valve and closure operators in
    this class.


CLS 222/97
TXT Dispensers under subclass 95 having at least two means of different types
    for acting on the receptacle wall to collapse same.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass, for example, and combined winding type and
    clamping type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95,     or other appropriate type subclass, for plural wall collapsing
    means of the same type.


CLS 222/98
TXT Dispensers under subclass 97 having both the winding type of wall
    collapsing means as defined in subclass 99 and the roller type as defined
    in subclass 101.


CLS 222/99
TXT Dispensers under subclass 95 having an element which causes the tube wall
    to collapse and wind up into roll form.

    (1)     Note.  These devices generally have an element (frequently called a
    key) to engage the closed end of the receptacle and a handle to turn the
    same to perform the winding operation.  It may be either separable or built
    into the receptacle structure.


CLS 222/100
TXT Dispensers under subclass 99 claiming (1) a casing to enclose the
    receptacle in whole or in part and/or (2) means to support the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95      through 98, 101 through 105, to complete the search on support or
    casing combinations since the patents in such subclasses have not been
    cross-referenced on this combination.

    160+,   for movably mounted receptacles of other types and see the notes to
    such subclasses.

    173+,   for other types of receptacles with casing or support and see the
    notes to such subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 351+ for receiver actuated discharge means.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 108+ for supports for paste-tubes.


CLS 222/101
TXT Dispensers under subclass 95 in which the wall collapsing means comprises a
    roller which rolls over and applies pressure to the wall of the receptacle
    to cause the same of collapse and the contents to be forced out.

    (1)     Note.  The rolling element may be of spherical or other
    noncylindrical form, and/or of irregular surface configuration.


CLS 222/102
TXT Dispensers under subclass 101 having more than one roller.


CLS 222/103
TXT Dispensers under subclass 95 in which the wall collapsing means operates by
    moving transversely against the receptacle wall to collapse the same by a
    clamping action.

    (1)     Note.  The pressure applying elements may have motion
    longitudinally of the receptacle from the closed end toward the outlet in
    addition to the clamping motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95,     for those devices operating by a sliding motion only.

    101+,   for slidable rollers.


CLS 222/104
TXT Dispensers under subclass 95 in which the wall collapsing means operates by
    twisting the collapsible walls.


CLS 222/105
TXT Dispensers under subclass 92 claiming (1) a casing to enclose the
    receptacle in whole or in part and/or (2) means to support the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    and see the notes thereto for the complete field of search.


CLS 222/106
TXT Dispensers under subclass 92 claimed in combination with features other
    than the receptacle structure and not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  Receptacle structure includes handles and/or handgrips,
    inlets and/or outlets and their valves, feed controllers and/or closures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    192,    and the subclasses preceding it in the schedule for combinations as
    defined in this subclass (106) where the receptacle is other than the
    collapsible wall type.


CLS 222/107
TXT Dispensers under subclass 92 in which the walls are made, at least in part,
    of nonmetallic material.  The nonmetallic material may be a coating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    and the other subclasses noted for casings in addition to the
    collapsible wall receptacle and which may be of nonmetallic materials.

    215,    for resilient, nonmetallic wall receptacles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes.


CLS 222/108
TXT Dispensers under the class definition in which means are provided to catch
    or otherwise dispose of material dripping, leaking, or being discharged as
    waste material.

    (1)     Note.  By drip, leakage or waste is meant material which escapes to
    the exterior of a dispenser and which is not caught or received by the
    intended receiver, including condensate.

    (2)     Note.  See section 7 of the main class definition for a general
    statement on drip, leakage, or waste catchers, and for notes to other
    classes having related art.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    571,    for antidrip nozzle, spout, or pouring device structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 312+ for leakage or drip collecting in
    fluid handling systems.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 364 for a filling supply of dumping or draining type supported
    upon a receiver and see the search notes there included.


CLS 222/109
TXT Dispensers under subclass 108 having one or more passages formed for the
    special purposes of returning the drip, leakage, or waste to the dispensing
    receptacle interior from which it escaped.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118,    for material return to supply from an independent receiver.

    318,    for material return to supply from a discharge assistant.

    424,    for miscellaneous combinations involving material return to supply.


CLS 222/110
TXT Dispensers under subclass 109 having a valve controlling the return passage.


CLS 222/111
TXT Dispensers under subclass 109 having a cover which may be moved to expose
    some or all of the operating parts of the dispenser.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182,    for other patents having the feature.


CLS 222/113
TXT Dispensers under the class definition having either, or both, (1) an
    illuminating means, or (2) a fuel burner which may be for either heating or
    illuminating purposes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131,    where a jacket about a dispenser provides for heat exchange, there
    being no burner.

    146,    for miscellaneous heating and cooling means not having a burner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 260 for a solid fuel furnace provided with a
    fluid fuel burner.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 335+ for burners for heating material in
    fluid handling systems.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 18 for
    illuminated fountains, and subclasses 128+ for heating means for the spray
    apparatus of spray fluid.

    362,    Illumination, appropriate subclasses for other combinations of
    illuminator with other devices.

    431,    Combustion, appropriate subclass for a fuel burner, per se.


CLS 222/129
TXT Dispensers under the class definition in which (1) the dispensing container
    is provided with a plurality of separate compartments at least one having
    dispensing means, (2) two or more containers are claimed in combination, at
    least one being a dispensing container, or (3) a dispensing container has a
    jacket surrounding the same and spaced therefrom, at least in part, to
    provide a material or article receiving space.

    (1)     Note.  Under (3) the jacket is usually provided for heat exchange
    purposes.

    (2)     Note.  One or more devices arranged in series with the supply
    chamber, or with each other so that in the normal dispensing operation the
    material passes from one to the next in series to be discharged from the
    last of the series, are not in this subclass (129) or the indented
    subclasses, but are in subclasses following in the schedule, unless there
    is also claimed the subject matter of this subclass (129). Such series
    devices may be a discharge assistant, trap chamber, removable discharger,
    nozzle, etc.

    (3)     Note.  The combination of plural dispensing compartments (one of
    which is a fluent material dispenser) is provided for in Class 221, Article
    Dispensing, and is classifiable in that class in subclass 96, thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for parallel connected gas or vapor dispensing devices serially
    used.

    57,     for automatic control of one dispensed material by the weight,
    volume, or pressure of a second dispensed material.

    94,     for plural receptacle or compartment devices of the collapsible
    wall type.

    100     and 105, and the subclasses set forth in the Notes to the
    definitions, for collapsible wall type receptacles having casings, some of
    which are of the spaced jacket type.

    188,    for dispensers with a fluid trap seal for an inlet and/or outlet.

    399,    for gas pressure supplying reservoirs for fluid pressure dispensers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 147+ for apparatus to form groups of
    contents units and to subsequently package same.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 401 for chemical feeders
    for boiler cleaners.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 3+ for processes of controlling
    mixtures; subclasses 87.01+ for apparatus for automatically controlling
    plural flows, especially subclasses 88+ for mixture condition maintaining
    or sensing controls;   subclasses 111+ for plural inflows in branching
    systems; subclass 127 for sequentially parallel siphoning from plural
    tanks; subclass 240 for addition of separate material for cleaning
    purposes; subclasses 255+ for plural tanks or compartments with parallel
    inflow and/or outflow; subclass 268 for holders for solid, flaky or
    pulverulent material to be dissolved or entrained in the fluid; subclass
    387 for washing machine cycle control by liquid level; subclasses 561+ for
    distribution systems, especially subclass 566 for plural pump systems;
    subclasses 594+ for systems having plural noncommunicating flow paths;
    subclasses 597 and 602+ for systems having multiple inlets and multiple and
    single outlets respectively.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 9 and 100+ for processes of and apparatus for filling with
    plural materials.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, particularly subclasses 14+, 27 and 71+ for
    such subject matter involving plural sources.

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclass 61 for a weigh chamber translatable among
    plural sources.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 101 for flow, fluid
    pressure or material level proportionate feed means, and subclasses 198.1+
    for means to add treating material to a separator.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 92+ for article dispensing having
    plural sources, stacks or compartments, and see (3) Note, above.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 12.1+.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 656 for a
    device for scattering or strewing nonfluid material over an extended area
    and comprising plural containers for the material feeding to a single
    scatterer.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclasses 117+ for fluid current
    conveyors having plural intakes.


CLS 222/129.1
TXT Dispensers under subclass 129 for supplying a mixed beverage, comprising a
    cabinet or counter associated installation, plural sources of supply for
    the ingredients of the beverage, and means for dispensing the constituent
    parts of a single drink and intermingling such parts, within the apparatus,
    either before or during discharge.

    (1)     Note.  These subclasses are limited to drink mixers as an art
    collection, as distinguished from dispensers for other materials, since the
    special problems of temperature conditioning, sanitation, attractive
    housing and ingredient mixing led to the development of peculiar
    associations of subcombinational features which appear best classified
    together.  As examples, patents included in this group include claimed
    disclosures of heat exchange or cooling means (Classes 62 and 257), cabinet
    structures (Class 312) mixing nozzle means (Classes 137 and 299), and other
    fluid handling systems of the types classified in Class 137 and in later
    subclasses of Class 222.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145,    for dispensers having plural material sources in which the plural
    materials are dispensed from a single, common discharge outlet, but not
    having the cabinet or counter associated installation required for
    classification in this subclass.

    146,    for dispensers having heating or cooling means, and see the search
    notes to that subclass for other related search fields.

    173+,   for dispensers having supports, casings, etc., and see the search
    notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 336,
    338+ and 389+ (particularly subclass 390), and see the reference to Class
    62 in the class definition, section 4, of this class (222).

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 275 for similar beverage
    making and mixing combinations including specific material treatment means,
    as carbonating or cooking.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 170.5+ for drink dispensing of the type
    involving foam control in handling gas charged liquids; subclass 263 for a
    tank or trap receiving flowable material from at least two tanks or
    compartments;  subclass 268 for holders having a supply of solid, flaky or
    pulverized material to be dissolved or entrained; subclasses 571+ for fluid
    handling systems comprising serial flow tanks or compartments; subclasses
    583+ for fluid handling systems having plural openings, one a gas vent or
    access opening; subclasses 602+ for fluid handling systems having multiple
    inlets and a single outlet, especially subclasses 888+ and 896+ for those
    with means for mixing or combining plural diverse fluids.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 174 for drink dispensers combined with cup dispensers, and
    subclasses 105+ for those having plural materials which are discharged
    through a common outlet.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 75 for a coil in an enclosure with a
    removable cover giving access to the space about the coil; and subclasses
    140+ for a device providing heat exchange between three or more
    noncommunicating fluids.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 302+, 398+ and 549 for spray apparatus or nozzles
    which mix and then discharge plural materials.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, appropriate subclasses for cabinet
    structures not involving specific fluid dispensing means.

    366,    Agitating, for dispensers including mixed drink cabinet type
    dispensers having agitating means of the type classifiable in Class 366.
    The line between Classes 222 and 366 is set forth in section III of the
    class definition of Class 366.


CLS 222/129.2
TXT Dispensers under subclass 129.1 in which the pressure of one of the
    constituent materials or energy derived from the flow thereof is
    instrumental in causing the dispensing or feeding of another material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for dispensers in which the rate of discharge from a source is
    automatically controlled in response to the volume, pressure or rate of
    flow of a second dispensed material.

    133,    for dispensers from plural sources in which there is a measured
    discharge from one source and indeterminate flow to another.  In these
    devices the flow of one material is often instrumental in causing measured
    discharge of the other.


CLS 222/129.3
TXT Dispensers under subclass 129.1 having means for delivering metered or
    predetermined amounts of one or more of the constituent materials of the
    beverage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    for dispensers from plural sources in which there is a measured
    discharge from one source and indeterminate flow from another.


CLS 222/129.4
TXT Dispensers under subclass 129.3 in which there are means for the metered
    dispensing of more than one of the constituents of a single mixed drink.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135+,   for plural source dispensers having a discharge assistant for each
    source which may measure the quantity dispensed from each source at every
    operation or cycle of the apparatus.

    145.1+, for plural source dispensers in which the plural materials are
    discharged from a common discharge outlet which may have provision for
    discharging measured quantities of more than one of the plural materials.


CLS 222/130
TXT Dispensers under subclass 129 having at least one compartment, container,
    or spaced jacket which is not for dispensing.

    (1)     Note.  The spaced jackets here are usually for heat exchange
    purposes or for receiving insulating material.

    (2)     Note.  The additional containers or compartment here is usually for
    storing materials or articles and have nondispensing means associated
    therewith including exhibiting samples.

    (3)     Note.  For plural receptacles or receptacles having plural
    compartments, none of the dispensing type, see the appropriate receptacle
    class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for compartments to catch waste leakage or drip.

    182,    where the nondispensing compartment merely houses or encloses some
    or all of the operating parts of the dispenser.

    325+,   for discharge assistant associated with a compartment, container or
    jacket which is solely for receiving a separable material supply container
    or cartridge.

    538,    where a nondispensing compartment is provided solely to house a
    discharge guide in a position of nonuse.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 389+ for a withdrawable liquid cooler
    having means specialized to cooling, particularly subclass 400 for a
    concentric ice holder and liquid container.

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, particularly subclasses
    112+ for plural compartment type.

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, there being many patents on plural
    compartment types, see particularly subclasses 3+, 29+ and 109+.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclass 6 for plural compartment type.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, appropriate subclasses, for those having plural
    compartments, particularly subclasses 7+.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 600+ for compartment type.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 97+ for article dispensers having
    similar compartment arrangement.

    312,    Supports: Cabinet Structure, substantially all types of which may
    involve plural compartments, subclasses 118+ being of the stock and sample
    showcase type.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 38+ for plural compartment type.


CLS 222/131
TXT Dispensers under subclass 130 in which the nondispensing compartment or
    receptacle is a jacket or double wall spaced from a dispensing container
    wall, usually for heat exchange or insulation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    for conveying conduits with spaced jackets.

    182,    where the actuating parts of a dispenser are enclosed, and a cover
    therefor may be moved to expose the same.

    183,    for dispensers having jackets not spaced.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 375 for fluid handling systems having
    jacketed parts, in which the jackets may or may not be spaced form the
    jacketed part.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 141 and 154+ for a receptacle having
    spaced jackets for heat exchanging mediums.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 12.1+ for spaced wall or jacket
    devices.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 415+ for other spaced wall or jacket
    receptacles.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 286 for article dispensers having
    spaced casing structures included therewith.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 35+ for magazine type
    article retaining cabinets, and other appropriate subclasses, for
    miscellaneous cabinet structures where no combination with bulk dispensing
    means is claimed.

    366,    Agitating, subclass 149 for an agitator with a spaced jacket.


CLS 222/132
TXT Dispensers under subclass 129 having at least three sources of supply or
    supply containers which are not duplicates as to the manner of discharging
    or supplying material.


CLS 222/133
TXT Dispensers under subclass 129 having provision for the discharge of a
    measured quantity from one source of material and an indeterminate or
    unlimited discharge from another.

    (1)     Note.  The materials are usually intermingled after discharge.

    (2)     Note.  For other combinations involving this character of
    operation, see the notes to other classes appended to subclass 129 of this
    class.


CLS 222/134
TXT Dispensers under subclass 129 having means for varying the discharge from
    the plural sources interconnected for uniform or proportional variations in
    each of the discharging volumes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    267+,   for single sources of supply having sets of discharging assistants
    with common discharge volume varying means.

    282+,   for single discharge assistants with discharge volume varying means.

    434+,   for trap chamber cut-off combinations with trap chamber volume
    varying means.

    482+,   for single supply containers having plural openings with flow
    controllers or closures for at least two of the openings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 87.01+ for self-proportioning or
    correlating fluid handling systems.


CLS 222/135
TXT Dispensers under subclass 129 having a discharge assistant in connection
    with each source.  Two or more may or may not be duplicates, or a single
    assistant or trap may act on the material from two or more sources.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251+,   for definitions of "discharge assistant" and see the notes thereto
    for the location of such means in other combinations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses 145+ involving assembling
    of different materials.

    111,    Planting, subclasses 73 and 80 for depositing plural materials.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 123+ for plural source article
    dispensing devices having discharge means for each source.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying and Diffusing, subclass 656 for plural
    containers holding nonfluid material and a single means to scatter or strew
    the material, with a discharge assistant for each container to force or
    deliver the material to the scattering or strewing means.


CLS 222/136
TXT Dispensers under subclass 135 having a discharge assistant in which the
    same structure acts on material from all sources, the material either
    contacting the discharge assistant on opposite faces or at different
    points, or inlets, but the material from all sources following the same
    path in or through the discharge assistant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139+,   where there are more than one common rotary or swinging material
    contacting elements even though they are interconnected structurally to
    operate as a unit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 126+ for article dispensers having
    plural sources of articles to be dispensed and common selector means for
    the actuation of the discharging means for the plural sources.


CLS 222/137
TXT Dispensers under subclass 135 having unitary discharge assistants, in which
    those portions which contact the material dispensed have a reciprocating
    motion (i.e., do not rotate or swing about an axis) and which unit acts on
    material from all sources.

    (1)     Note.  By "unitary discharge assistants" is meant those structures
    which are so interconnected structurally by means other than or in addition
    to relatively moving operating means as to both prevent relative motion and
    compel motion together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    361,    and see the notes thereto for other combinations having
    reciprocating trap chambers or discharge assistants.


CLS 222/138
TXT Dispensers under subclass 135 in which that portion of a discharge
    assistant for each source which contacts the material discharged has either
    a rotary or a swinging motion about an axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136,    for such devices in which a rotary or swinging assistant is common
    to all sources.

    361+    and 367+, and see the notes thereto for other combinations having
    rotary and swinging trap chambers and discharge assistants.


CLS 222/139
TXT Dispensers under subclass 138 having a common axis for the discharge
    assistants.


CLS 222/140
TXT Dispensers under subclass 139 in which the axis is substantially vertical.


CLS 222/141
TXT Dispensers under subclass 140 having the portions of the discharge
    assistant forming the discharge paths for the materials lying in
    substantially the same plane.


CLS 222/142
TXT Dispensers under subclass 138 having the axes of the discharge assistants
    parallel.


CLS 222/142.1
TXT Dispensers under subclass 129 in which the plural supply compartments are
    adapted to be supported together in the hand and shaken to cause material
    to move through an outlet.

    (1)     Note.  See class definition, section 12.5.


CLS 222/142.2
TXT Dispensers under subclass 142.1 in which the position of the plural supply
    compartments relative to one another or relative to a casing which supports
    and/or partially encloses both compartments must be altered in order to
    dispense from one of the compartments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144,    for rotatably mounted assemblies of dispensing compartments, not of
    the hand shaker type.

    160+,   for single supply containers movable supported with reference to a
    base or casing.


CLS 222/142.3
TXT Dispensers under subclass 142.1 in which the supply compartments are
    containers mounted upon a common base or within a common casing from which
    they all may be separated either together as a unit or individually.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include dispensers having plural
    containers in which one container supports another separably but there is
    no base or casing from which both are removable. The inner container in the
    subject matter of subclass 142.5, for example, is frequently supported by
    and separable from the outer coaxial container.

    (2)     Note.  Each of the containers continues to be a container after
    removal from the common base or casing, i.e., each still has a bottom and
    sidewalls.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142.5,  see (1) Note.

    179.5,  for single dispensers separable from base or casing for use.


CLS 222/142.4
TXT Dispensers under subclass 142.1 in which the outlets of the supply
    compartments are in such position relative to one another or the internal
    structure of the compartments is such that the outlet from which material
    is dispensed is determined by orienting the container assembly relative to
    the direction of fall of the material to be dispensed from the selected
    container.

    (1)     Note.  Closures for the individual outlets may be provided, but
    they are not essential to the restriction of flow from the unselected
    source.


CLS 222/142.5
TXT Dispensers under subclass 142.1 in which plural containers or supply
    compartments are arranged one within the other about a common axis so that
    one container surrounds the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142.2,  for this subject matter where the containers are movable relative
    to one another for selecting the source of material to be dispensed.


CLS 222/142.6
TXT Dispensers under subclass 142.1 in which opening movement of the outlet
    element of one compartment causes or insures closing of the outlet of the
    other compartment, either because there is a single closure, including
    plural closures rigidly connected, for the plural outlets or because
    relatively movable closures are interconnected to operate selectively.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144.5,  for similar organizations in nonshaker type dispensers.


CLS 222/142.7
TXT Dispensers under subclass 142.6 in which the plural compartments have
    closures movable relatively to one another and a single element, which is
    usually an actuator or a biasing means (or both), operably connected to
    both closures.


CLS 222/142.8
TXT Dispensers under subclass 142.6 in which a unitary or integrally connected
    closure member is movable as a whole in a straight line across the outlets
    of the several compartments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    559+,   for reciprocating flow controllers or closures for single chamber
    dispensers.


CLS 222/142.9
TXT Dispensers under subclass 142.6 in which a unitary or integrally connected
    closure member is movable in rotation about an axis extending in the
    direction toward which the outlets of the several compartments open.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142.5,  for this subject matter where the several compartments are coaxial
    or concentrically arranged.

    548,    for rotary discharge controllers or closures for single chamber
    dispensers.


CLS 222/143
TXT Dispensers under subclass 129 having features of construction specially
    designed to permit of either stacking the receptacles one on another or
    placing plural receptacles alongside one another in the minimum of space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173,    for single dispensers with jackets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 499 through 520 for
    container nesting and stacking means.


CLS 222/144
TXT Dispensers under subclass 129 in which the plural receptacles or
    compartments are mounted to rotate as an assembly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167+,   and see the notes thereto for rotatably mounted single sources.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 109 for
    compartmented or pocketed rotary devices and subclasses 127+ for
    combinations of two or more rotary drums or receptacles.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 77 and 78 for rotatable receptacle
    support racks.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 113 and 119+ for plural source
    article dispensing devices in which the plural sources are rotatably
    mounted.


CLS 222/144.5
TXT Dispensers under subclass 129 having means common to a plurality of the
    sources, compartments, or containers, to dispense selectively from one or
    more of said sources, compartments or containers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    for similar selecting means combined with structure for delivering
    a measured quantity from one of the sources of material, and an
    indeterminate quantity from another, or selectively from one of the sources.

    142.6,  for this subject matter where the plural chambers are of the hand
    manipulable shaker type.


CLS 222/145.1
TXT With common discharge:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein the plural sources, compartments
    or containers each have an individual feed path for feeding materials from
    the sources, compartments or containers and wherein the individual feed
    paths empty into a common feed path leading to a common outlet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 602+ for a distribution system having
    plural inlets and a single outlet.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 133 for an article dispenser having
    plural sources, stacks or compartments for the article to be dispensed and
    a common egress outlet for all of such sources, stacks or compartments.


CLS 222/145.2
TXT Including discharge path cleaning:

    Subject matter under subclass 145.1 including means which operates to clean
    parts of the common path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148+,   for cleaning of the dispenser.


CLS 222/145.3
TXT Dispensed product retains identity of individual material (e.g., striped
    toothpaste):

    Subject matter under subclass 145.1 wherein individual materials from the
    sources are recognizable in the product dispensed.


CLS 222/145.4
TXT Movable material discharge guide:

    Subject matter under subclass 145.1 wherein there is associated with the
    common outlet a material discharge guide, so constructed as to be movable
    relative to a part to which the guide is attached for the purposes other
    than mere attachment or detachment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74+,    for a hose or other movable discharge guide interlocks and
    interconnections.

    160+,   where the dispensing container is mounted for motion.

    257+,   for combinations of a follower and a casing enclosed impeller, at
    least one of them being interconnected with a movable nozzle.

    320+,   for a movable nozzle interconnected with a single discharge
    assistant.

    461,    for a funnel type outlet movably interconnected with a container.

    507,    for annular, outlet surrounding discharge guides which are movable
    relative to and constitute an actuator for a second movable outlet element.

    522+,   for an axially slidable tube, sleeve, or apertured cap.

    526+,   for a movable material discharge guide.

    567+,   for a nozzle, spout and pouring device having separable means for
    mere attachment and detachment purposes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 615+ for an articulated or swinging flow
    conduit in distribution system.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 149+, 150, 341+, and 349+
    for other moving flow pipe section and spout.

    291,    Track Sanders, subclass 31 for a flexible or movable pipe operable
    to cutoff sand feed.


CLS 222/145.5
TXT Having mixing chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 145.1 wherein the common feed path includes a
    space in which the materials from the individual feed paths are blended.


CLS 222/145.6
TXT Including mixing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 145.5 comprising a structure located in the
    space to aid in blending of the materials.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    459,    for stationary agitator.

     SEARCH CLASS:

    366,    Agitating, for agitating or mixing, in general, and see the line
    between Classes 222 and 366 as set forth in Section III of the class
    definition of Class 366.


CLS 222/145.7
TXT Having variable flow control:

    Subject matter under subclass 145.1 comprising means for adjustably
    regulating a material flow in (a) at least one of the individual feed paths
    or (b) the common feed path.

    (1)     Note.  Check valves or mere outlet closures or valves are not
    included in this subclass.


CLS 222/145.8
TXT For common path:

    Subject matter under subclass 145.7 wherein the flow regulating means is
    located in the common feed path.


CLS 222/146.1
TXT WITH HEAT OR COOLING MEANS:

    Dispensers under the class definition having means for raising or lowering
    the temperature of material dispensed above or below ambient temperature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, for the combination of a nominally claimed Class 222
    disperser, e.g., a dispensing means, with a cooling means; a Class 222
    dispenser specifi-cally claimed in combination with a specifically claimed
    cooling means is classified in Class 222.

    219,    Electric Heating, for the combination of a nominally claimed Class
    222 dispenser, e.g., a dispensing means, with an electrical heating means;
    a Class 222 dispenser specifically claimed in combination with a
    specifically claimed electrical heating means is classified in Class 222.


CLS 222/146.2
TXT Heating only:

    Dispensers under subclass 146.1 having only means for raising the
    temperature of the material dispensed above ambient temperature.


CLS 222/146.3
TXT Having an aerosol:

    Dispensers under subclass 146.2 which include an aerosol, e.i., a device in
    which the material dispensed is caused to be discharged from a container by
    a fluid under pressure that directly contacts the material dispensed.


CLS 222/146.4
TXT By steam:

    Dispensers under subclass 146.2 wherein the temperature of the material
    dispensed is raised by a vapor which has been created by raising the
    temperature of water above it boiling point.


CLS 222/146.5
TXT By electrical energy:

    Dispenser under subclass 146.2 wherein the temperature of the material
    dispensed is raised by electrical current.


CLS 222/146.6
TXT Cooling only:

    Dispenser under subclass 146.1 having only means for lowering the
    temperature of the material dispensed below ambient temperature.


CLS 222/147
TXT Dispensers under the class definition having means to prevent or render
    difficult the introduction of material into the dispenser.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80+,    particularly, subclasses 80, 85+, and 87 for structures which cut
    or punch a container for the purpose of refill preventing.

    476,    and subclasses following the same, for mere valve, flow controller
    or closure structure for the dispensing outlet. Refill preventing means
    requires more than such structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 346+ and 348+ for receivers which have features of structure to
    prevent filling except by use of a dispenser having special cooperative
    features.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 14+ for other devices having this
    combination.


CLS 222/148
TXT Dispensers under the class definition having (1) devices which operate to
    clean parts of the apparatus other than or in addition to the material
    storage chamber or discharge paths, and (2) devices which operate to clean
    the storage chamber or discharge path and which are capable of functioning
    only when dispensing is not taking place or which do not assist with a
    dispensing operation.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses do not take devices which
    assist normal discharge (such as agitators and other discharge assistants)
    nor devices which remove material from such discharge assistants, nor does
    it take mere openings (with or without closures therefor) which provide
    access to the interior for cleaning or other purposes, such subject matter
    being provided for in the following subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196.3,  for hand manipulable shaker type dispensers having inertia operated
    movable means promoting dispensing by jarring or impact and also comprising
    elements adapted to clear the openings of a sifter or plural opening
    pattern dispensing outlet.

    216+,   for ejectors for the material in either (1) conveyor type discharge
    assistants with trap chambers or grooves, and (2) movable trap chambers.

    226+,   for discharge assistants having agitator type discharge assistants
    preceding them in acting on the material, and frequently having a wall
    cleaning function.

    252+,   for other plural sequentially operable discharge assistants, the
    second of which may be a cleaner type of agitator.

    342,    for scrapers or wipers for or carried by a discharge assistant.

    345+,   for strikers or clearers for conveyor type trap chambers.

    478+,   for dispensers having openings other than and in addition to
    dispensing outlets, including openings for access to the interior for
    cleaning or other purposes, there being no cleaning means claimed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 85.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, and see the notes thereto
    for cleaning in general.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 237+ for fluid handling systems having
    installed cleaning means.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 89 and 92 for receiver inlet cleaners in a dispensing and
    receiving combination.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 106+ for
    spray nozzles combined with cleaning or flushing means therefor.

    291,    Track Sanders, subclasses 12 and 42+ for blast nozzle and
    sand-delivery pipe cleaners.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 121+ for a burner having a purging or
    cleaning means.


CLS 222/149
TXT Dispensers under subclass 148 having means constructed to pass through the
    dispenser outlet passage to clean the same.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322,    for dispensers having discharge assistant with an actuator (for a
    movable dispenser element) projecting through the dispenser outlet.

    501,    for valve or closure elements, capable of stopping flow through the
    dispenser outlet and leaving an actuator projecting through an outlet.  If
    there is no element capable of stopping flow, the device is in subclasses
    149+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 244+ for cleaning means in which a
    mechanical member passes through a flow passage.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 114+ for
    cleaners which pass through the nozzle outlet to clean same, and subclasses
    569+ for nozzles having restrictors combined therewith, some of which pass
    through and clean the nozzle outlet.


CLS 222/150
TXT Dispensers under subclass 149 in which the receptacle is of the resilient
    wall type and in which mechanism or connections between the cleaner and a
    wall causes motion of the cleaner on deflection of the wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206+,   for resilient wall type receptacles, particularly subclass 213 for
    wall actuated valves or closures.  If the valve or closure or its actuator
    extends through and protrudes beyond the nozzle outlet, it is in subclass
    150, even though the cleaning function is not alleged.


CLS 222/151
TXT Dispensers under subclass 149 in which the cleaning element is caused to
    pass from the exterior inwardly through the outlet to perform its cleaning
    function.


CLS 222/152
TXT Dispensers under the class definition having either or both (1) means to
    jacket a material conveying conduit, or (2) means to provide a nonmaterial
    discharging inert atmosphere for the material to be dispensed, including
    means to evacuate gases from the container.

    (1)     Note.  The inert atmosphere may be provided by means to conserve
    the gases in the container by bells with seals or by storage containers, or
    by otherwise preventing free exhaust of such gases during refilling.

    (2)     Note.  The inert atmosphere may be chemically inert, i.e., not
    reactive chemically with the material to be dispensed, or it may be one
    which is not combustible with the vapors given off by the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for such devices combined with automatic control and see the notes
    thereto.

    190,    for means to humidify or remove moisture from the dispenser
    atmosphere.

    195,    209, 258, 261-263, 334, 373, 389, 394+, and 630+, for fluid flow
    discharge, gas agitation, or fluid pressure mediums causing discharge by
    acting on pumps, followers, etc., or by acting directly on material even
    though the fluids used for such purposes are inert to the material being
    dispensed.


CLS 222/153.01
TXT WITH LOCK OR FASTENING SEAL:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a device to secure the
    dispenser for impeding (a) an unauthorized use of the dispenser or (b)
    disassembly of parts of the dispenser from each other or (c) actuation or
    deactuation of a discharge assistant, flow controller or closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147,    for a refill preventing means

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, for locks, per se.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 383+ for a fluid handling system with
    lock or seal.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 154 for an article dispenser having a
    lock, latch, or seal means for the supply container or its support.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclasses 307+ for a seal.


CLS 222/153.02
TXT Plural:

    Subject matter under subclass 153.01 including two or more securing devices.


CLS 222/153.03
TXT Lock actuated by key or tool:

    Subject matter under subclass 153.01 wherein the lock is operated by use of
    a key or some other hand manipulated instrument.


CLS 222/153.04
TXT Lock operation dependent upon dispenser position:

    Subject matter under subclass 153.01 wherein the securing device impedes an
    operation of the dispenser unless the dispenser is moved to a predetermined
     orientation.


CLS 222/153.05
TXT Single-use fastening seal:

    Subject matter under subclass 153.01 wherein the fastening seal includes an
    element associated with the dispenser for (a) retaining the dispenser or
    the dispenser closure in a closed position or (b) indicating to a
    subsequent user that the dispenser or the dispenser closure has been
    previously opened or manipulated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147,    for a refill preventing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclass 50 for padlock with seal.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 383+ for a fluid handling system with
    lock or seal.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 154 for an article dispenser having
    lock, latch, or seal means for the supply container or its support.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclasses 307+ and 327 for a seal.


CLS 222/153.06
TXT Frangible:

    Subject matter under subclass 153.05 wherein the seal element is easily
    broken to gain access to the dispenser.


CLS 222/153.07
TXT Pull tab:

    Subject matter under subclass 153.06 wherein a tab or similar projecting
    device is associated with the seal element to be grasped by a user for
    breaking the seal element.


CLS 222/153.08
TXT Cord:

    Subject matter under subclass 153.05 wherein the seal element is an
    elongated string-like member.

    (1)     Note.  The string-like member may be made of metal or non-metal
    material.


CLS 222/153.09
TXT Inhibiting disassembly:

    Subject matter under subclass 153.01 wherein the securing device operates
    to impede the separation of the parts of the dispenser from each other.


CLS 222/153.1
TXT Overcap:

    Subject matter under subclass 153.09 wherein the securing device is
    associated with a secondary closure covering a primary flow controller or
    closure member of the dispenser to impede access to the dispenser.


CLS 222/153.11
TXT For a fluid pressure discharge assistant:

    Subject matter under subclass 153.01 wherein the securing device is
    associated with a dispenser of the type utilizing a gas or liquid under
    pressure which directly contacts the material to be dispensed to cause a
    discharge.

    (1)     Note.  A discharge assistant is defined in section 10 of the main
    class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153.13, for a lock to inhibit actuation of the discharge assistant which is
    not of the fluid pressure type.

    394+,   for a fluid pressure discharge assistant.

    402.11, for an aerosol type dispenser having means for rendering the valve
    actuator inoperable.


CLS 222/153.12
TXT Maintain dispenser in open position:

    Subject matter under subclass 153.11 wherein the securing device maintains
    the dispenser in a dispensing mode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402.14, for an aerosol type dispenser (i.e., the dispenser where a valve is
    actuated by a nozzle or through a valve outlet) with means to hold the
    valve open.


CLS 222/153.13
TXT Inhibiting actuation of discharge assistant:

    Subject matter under subclass 153.01 wherein the securing device impedes
    the actuation of the discharge assistant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153.11, for a dispenser with a fluid pressure discharge assistant in
    combination with a locking device.

    384,    for a dispenser including piston holding means to prevent motion of
    the piston of a pump or pulsator.


CLS 222/153.14
TXT Inhibiting operation of flow controller or closure:

    Subject matter under subclass 153.01 wherein the securing device impedes
    the opening or closing of the flow controller or closure of the dispenser
    for regulating the flow of the material through the discharge outlet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153.1,  for an overcap with lock denying access to a valve outlet or flow
    controller.

    153.11, for a dispenser with a fluid pressure discharge assistant in
    combination with a locking device.


CLS 222/154
TXT Dispensers under the class definition having means for permitting
    inspection of the contents or a part thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Included for example are transparent graduated receptacles,
    receptacles, having transparent sight openings, transparent inserts in
    discharge passages, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Mere transparent receptacles, mere filling and/or dispensing
    openings with or without their closures or valves are not considered
    inspection devices and occur in appropriate subclasses below.

    (3)     Note.  The container may be either the supply container or a trap.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23+,    for such subject matter combined with pointers, indicators,
    exhibitors, etc.

    205,    215, 420, and 458, for example, for dispensers having mere
    transparent walls.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 323+ for liquid level or depth
    sight glasses and subclasses 426+ for measuring vessels having no
    dispensing features but which are provided with inspection means.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 264+ for fluid flow sight
    devices.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 559 for inspection means for fluid
    handling systems.

    184,    Lubrication, subclasses 96+ for sight feeds.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses 9-11, 58 and 63, for those having
    display features.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 155 for article dispensing devices
    having transparent inspecting or viewing means.


CLS 222/155
TXT Dispensers under subclass 154 having gauge tubes mounted exteriorly of the
    container to show the material level within the container.


CLS 222/156
TXT Dispensers under subclass 154 in which a portion of the container is
    transparent and is so placed that the level or condition of the material
    may be seen.


CLS 222/157
TXT Dispensers under subclass 156 in which the sight opening is of such an
    extent and so marked that the level of the contents may be determined by
    comparison with the marks.


CLS 222/158
TXT Dispensers under subclass 154 in which the entire container or its side
    walls are transparent and provided with graduations forming a scale for
    measuring the contents. The graduations may be placed on a separate member
    either inside or outside of the container.


CLS 222/159
TXT Dispensers under subclass 154 in which pipes or conduits are provided with
    transparent sections so that the fact of flow or the presence of material
    may be determined.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for transparent flow line sections having an indicator moved by
    flowing material or for moving indicators exterior to the flow line section.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 264+.

    184,    Lubrication, subclasses 96+.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclass 36.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 13 for a burner  having a transparent viewing
    area.


CLS 222/160
TXT Dispensers under the class definition in which at least the dispensing
    supply container is mounted for motion relative to its support or casing
    for some purpose other than mere attachment or detachment.

    (1)     Note.  Where a discharge assistant is connected to the supply
    container for motion relative thereto, the supply container not being
    mounted for motion, the patent is in subclasses 173+, if means for
    immovable support is claimed, and in the appropriate following discharge
    assistant subclasses where no support means for the supply container is
    claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173,    see note 1.

    176+,   where the supply container is mounted on a vehicle but has no
    motion relative to the vehicle chassis.

    216+,   for agitator-conveyor type discharge assistant or agitator-movable
    trap chamber combinations.

    282+,   for discharge assistants with volume varying means.

    344+,   for conveyor type or movable trap chambers, including barometric or
    angle of repose (355) and dipping (358+).

    437     and 457, for other barometric and angle of repose traps in various
    combinations.

    463,    for rockable or weighted dispensing containers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, particularly subclasses 365,
    592+, 627, and 644.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclasses 45+, for
    movably mounted safes.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 581 for fluid handling systems involving a
    movable tank.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 335+ for ladle or crucible type melt
    receptacle associated with molten metal shaping apparatus.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, which has many
    subclasses on movably mounted receptacle type devices.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 71+ for movably mounted receptacle
    support racks.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 186+ for article dispensing devices
    in which the supply container is movably mounted for dispensing.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 128+ for movable receptacle stands; and
    subclass 202.1 for swinging receptacle brackets.

    298,    Land Vehicles:  Dumping, appropriate subclasses.

    366,    Agitating, for a movably mounted mixing chamber, particularly
    subclasses 53+ and 219+.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, appropriate subclasses for a
    receptacle or other load holder which may move relative to its support for
    receiving or releasing a load.


CLS 222/161
TXT Dispensers under subclass 160, in which the movement of the dispensing
    container is of relatively small amplitude, for the purpose of shaking the
    contents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196+,   for supply containers not movably mounted and flexible walled
    containers, designed to be jarred or have the walls vibrated for the same
    purpose.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    184,    Lubrication, subclass 69 for vibrator cut-offs for gravity feed
    lubricators.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses, particularly subclasses 195+ and 446+.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 200+ for article dispensers having
    means to agitate, vibrate or jar the articles in the supply container, and
    see also appropriate subclasses indented under subclasses 156+ and 175+ for
    orienting and stack forming article dispensers, most of which involve
    agitation of articles in the supply container.

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, subclass 96 for vibrators for grain
    separator straw carriers.


CLS 222/162
TXT Dispensers under subclass 160 in which the supply container is mounted to
    move relatively to a trap chamber, impeller, or valve element so that its
    movement causes a dispensing operation.


CLS 222/163
TXT Dispensers under subclass 160 in which the container is adjustable
    relatively to some discharge assistant either to select one of several of
    different capacities or to vary the size of the outlet or the material
    surface exposed to the discharge assistant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    285,    for dispensers in which an element carried by the supply container
    and a discharge assistant are relatively movable to vary the discharge
    volume, but the supply container is not movably mounted.


CLS 222/164
TXT Dispensers under subclass 160 having a tiltably mounted container, i.e.,
    mounted for a back and forth motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    463,    for weighted dispensers and those in which the receptacle
    configuration permits rocking or tilting.

    577,    for an inkstand including an inkwell tiltable on a base.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclass 18 for tilting water
    feeders for acetylene generators.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 261.1+ for dumping car body
    involving tilting thereof.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 349, for tilting kettle furnace type
    water heaters.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 231+ for portable systems or track mounted supply means, and
    subclass 284 for combinations including movably mounted supply means.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 335+ for ladle or crucible type melt
    receptacles associated with molten metal shaping apparatus.

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclass 115 for a weigh chamber that discharges
    by tilting.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 260 for
    sifters involving tilting discharge.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 188+ for article dispensers in which
    the supply container is mounted for angular back and forth movement about a
    fixed axis.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 133+ for stands for tilting receptacles.

    291,    Track Sanders, subclass 30, for oscillatory hopper sand feeders.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 68.26+ for
    tilting hoisting-bucket type.

    298,    Land Vehicles:  Dumping, subclasses 7, 9, 11, 12+, and 47 for a
    vehicle having a body mounted for tilting movement (i.e., dumping vehicle)
    and a dispensing feature.


CLS 222/165
TXT Dispensers under subclass 164 in which the container is tilted for
    refilling with fluent material or for removal and insertion of cartridge
    containing material to be dispensed.

    (1)     Note.  See the search notes to subclass 164.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    325+,   for other removable cartridges.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclass 199, for cartridge carriers
    having tilting pockets.


CLS 222/166
TXT Dispensers under subclass 164 having a container that is tilted for
    dispensing by the force of gravity alone.

    (1)     Note.  See the search notes to subclass 164.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 36 and 39 for tilting skip feeders for mortar
    mixers.


CLS 222/167
TXT Dispensers under subclass 160 in which the container rotates about an axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144,    for plural sources, compartments or containers so mounted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 108+ for
    rotary drums or containers.

    111,    Planting, subclasses 74 and 90+ for combinations with revolving
    hoppers.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 88 for a heat exchanger comprising a rotary
    chamber.

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclasses 83+ for weigh chambers that rotate to
    discharge.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, particularly
    subclasses 198+ for rotating receptacle amalgamators, subclasses 270, 284
    through 306 for drum sifters, many mounted for rotation and subclasses 451
    through 453 for rotating container stratifiers.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclass 196, for body or belt
    attached, revolving cartridge carriers.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 130 and 131, for stands supporting rotating
    containers.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 243+, for rotary converters.

    298,    Land Vehicles:  Dumping, particularly subclasses 9 and 10 for those
    having rotating motion.

    366,    Agitating, particularly subclasses 45+ and 185 for a mixing chamber
    which is tilted for discharge.


CLS 222/168
TXT Dispensers under subclass 167 in which the axis of rotation is vertical or
    substantially so.


CLS 222/168.5
TXT Dispensers under subclass 168 having a plurality of trap chambers which are
    positioned at the periphery of the apparatus and are arranged to discharge
    a measured quantity of contents material supplied by the supply container.


CLS 222/169
TXT Dispensers under subclass 167 in which the discharge passage or passages
    open through the periphery of the rotatable container.


CLS 222/170
TXT Dispensers under subclass 169 having trap chambers in the periphery of the
    container.


CLS 222/171
TXT Dispensers under subclass 169 having a sleeve or similar telescoping part
    acting as a discharge controller for the peripheral outlets.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    519+,   for axially rotary and longitudinally slidable sleeve type outlet
    elements.

    522+,   for axially slidable sleeve-type outlet elements.

    553,    for axially rotary apertured sleeve type discharge controllers.


CLS 222/172
TXT Dispensers under subclass 169 in which the discharge outlet is an annular
    slot between separate parts of the rotary container.


CLS 222/173
TXT Dispensers under the class definition having either (1) a casing enclosing
    the dispenser in whole or in part, or (2) means for supporting the
    dispenser.

    (1)     Note.  The casing must be in addition to the wall structure of the
    material holding container.

    (2)     Note.  The sidewalls of dispensing containers (in which the bottom
    wall is above the lower edge of the side walls) are considered supports;
    see subclass 184.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74+,    for hose or discharge guides having interlock supports.

    80+,    where there is a cutter or punch, particularly subclass 80 where a
    cutter or punch is provided to penetrate some element in order to support
    the dispenser therefrom.

    100,    for collapsible wall type receptacles with casing or support and
    see the Notes thereto.

    129.1+, for cabinet housed drink mixing and dispensing apparatus.

    143,    for packing or stacking arrangements for plural dispensers.

    160+,   and see the Notes thereto for movably mounted supply containers.

    184,    see Notes 1 and 2.

    191,    for dispensers combined with tool or implement handles.

    325+,   for cartridges or containers separably supported on bases or in
    jackets connected with discharge assistants.

    437     and 457, for supply container supports involved in barometric type
    trap organizations.

    463,    for rockable or weighted dispensing containers.

    465.1+, and see the notes thereto for dispensers having handles for
    manipulating the dispenser.

    577,    for an inkstand; i.e., a dispensing inkwell and a supporting base
    therefor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclasses 50+ particularly 53 for sap bucket
    supports.

    104,    Railways, subclasses 275+ for hose bridges.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclasses 50+.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 125 and 267 for plural tank truck
    carried systems; subclass 236.1 for distribution systems involving
    geographic features; subclasses 343+ for fluid systems having casings,
    supports or protectors, or having static constructional installation
    features, especially subclasses 899+ for vehicle mounted systems;
    subclasses 357+ for systems installed in buildings; subclasses 363+ for
    systems installed in the ground; subclass 374 for those associated with
    furniture and house furnishings; and subclasses 377+ for guards and
    protectors for limited areas of the system, as outlets.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 364+ for a filling supply means supported on the receiver, and
    subclasses 369+ for dispensers having supporting means for independent
    receivers.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, particularly sub- classes 71+ for receptacle
    support type.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 3.3+, 3.9+, 476+, and 628+ for supports,
    subclasses 415+ for casings, and subclass 470 for linings.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 282+ for article dispensers having
    casing or support features.

    232,    Deposit and Collection Receptacles, subclass 39 for letter boxes
    with supports.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses
    especially subclasses 146+ for vehicular type supports for spray apparatus,
    subclasses 195+ for hose holders combined with spray apparatus, subclasses
    200+ for fixed or ground installed supports for spray apparatus, and
    subclasses 273+ for spray apparatus connected to or supported from a device
    which, per se, is elsewhere classified.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 398+ for a reel carrier
    which may be adapted to support a hose reel.

    248,    Supports, for supports in general, particularly subclasses 75+ for
    hose and/or nozzle type, 94 for strainer or funnel type 95, 102, 108, 128,
    146, 196, 311.1, and 318 for receptacle type.


CLS 222/174
TXT Dispensers under subclass 173 having a pole or other extension device
    connected thereto.  These are for the most part for providing an
    arrangement so that the dispenser may deposit its contents at a place
    remote from the person operating the same.  The pole may carry the entire
    dispenser or only an elongated discharge passage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191,    for dispensers combined with tool or implement handles.

    379,    for material supply container and discharge assistant casing having
    a telescopic material discharge guide.

    398,    for containers with fluid pressure discharge assistants having a
    telescopic supply container or discharge guides.

    465.1+, for handle and handgrips for dispensers.

    523,    for miscellaneous telescoping material discharge guides.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 280+, 375 and
    532 for spraying apparatus which is attached to a pole.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 19.1+ for
    pole structures having handling implement terminals and see the notes to
    the definitions thereof for related devices.


CLS 222/175
TXT Dispensers under subclass 173 having means adapting the container to be
    supported on the body of the user, or having an actuator adapted to be
    operated by parts of the body other than the hand or foot.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179,    for containers with supports having foot operated means for
    actuating some part of the combinations.

    465.1+, for dispensers with handles, there being no means for supporting on
    the body of the user.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 17.1+ for leg or lap supported milking
    pails.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 185 for article dispensers having
    means especially adapting them to be carried and supported by the body.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclass 49 for body harness
    and see the notes to such subclass for other combinations involving body
    carried devices.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 652 for a
    scatterer comprising a container for nonfluid material and a manually moved
    tube; subclass 653 for a body supported device  comprising a container for
    nonfluid material and a scattering or strewing means; subclass 686 for a
    device comprising a container for nonfluid material and a scattering or
    strewing means operated by a manual or pedal driving means; subclasses 152+
    for a sprinkling or spraying device which is body or animal carried.


CLS 222/179
TXT Dispensers under subclass 173 having an actuator for the dispensing means
    adapted to be operated by the feet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186,    for a foot piece or rest to hold the dispenser in place.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 249, 272+ and 308.

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 263+ for a pedal or
    treadle actuated closure.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclasses 474, 478, 481, 512+, 539, 542, 560+, and 594.1+, for pedals and
    pedal actuated mechanisms in general.

    84,     Music, subclasses 72+, 353, 357+, and 366 for wind instruments with
    pedal control.

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 178 for pedal actuated furnace doors.

    111,    Planting, subclass 98 for foot plate controlled dibbles.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 295 for pedal operated valves.


CLS 222/179.5
TXT Dispensers under subclass 173 in which the dispenser is separable from the
    casing or support and is removable from such casing or support for
    dispensing.  The dispensing outlet may be closed by the base, making
    removal necessary for dispensing, or the relation between the dispenser and
    base may be such that removal is necessary for other reasons, as the size
    of the base or the lack of a firm connection between the base and dispenser.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142.3,  for plural supply containers of the hand manipulable shaker type
    which are bodily separable from their support or casing for various
    purposes, as use, refilling or mere assembly.


CLS 222/180
TXT Dispensers under subclass 173 in which bracket or suspension means are
    provided for supporting the dispenser.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 283 for article dispensers which are
    bracket or suspension supported.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 200+ and 317+ for brackets and suspended
    supports in general.


CLS 222/181.1
TXT For bottom discharge:

    Subject matter under subclass 180 wherein the dispenser in a normally
    supported position will have a discharge through an outlet at or adjacent
    the lowermost portion of the dispenser.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100     and 105, for a support for a collapsible wall-type dispenser.

    160+,   for a dispenser mounted for a motion relative to its support.

    173+,   for a dispenser with a casing or support.

    185.1,  for a dispenser mounted in a bottom discharge position on a
    horizontal surface.


CLS 222/181.2
TXT Suspension supported:

    Subject matter under subclass 181.1 wherein the dispenser is supported by a
    suspension means.


CLS 222/181.3
TXT Supported on vertical wall by container integral with wall or by a plate
    support means:

    Subject matter under subclass 181.1 wherein a support for the dispenser is
    located on a vertical surface.


CLS 222/182
TXT Dispensers under subclass 173 having a cover which may be moved to expose
    some or all of the actuating parts of the discharge means.

    (1)     Note.  Included are covers soldered in place and broken away to
    expose the operating parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111,    for this feature where there is also means to return drip, leakage,
    or waste to the main supply.

    130,    for spaced jackets surrounding the supply container.

    183,    for jacketed dispensers.

    325+,   where the cover is solely to permit insertion of a cartridge or
    container for material to be dispensed into a dispenser organization having
    a discharge assistant.

    402.17, for fluid pressure discharge assistant dispensers having a
    container end cover with an opening through which discharging material
    passes and means by way of which a valve is actuated, such cover remaining
    in place during dispensing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 377+ for guards and shields for portions
    of fluid handling systems, usually the outlet.


CLS 222/183
TXT Dispensers under subclass 173 having a jacket about the dispensing
    container.

    (1)     Note.  The jacket may be of skeleton form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83.5,   86 and 88, for dispensers having a sleeve or rest for a container
    on which a cutter or punch operates.

    131,    for dispensing containers having spaced jackets, and see the notes
    thereto for related art.

    182,    for enclosing covers for actuating parts of discharging means, and
    see the notes thereto for related art.

    210,    323+ and 465+, for dispenser handles and handgrips, including those
    fastened to the dispenser by an encircling band.

    325+,   for removable containers and cartridges enclosed in the casings or
    supports of discharge assistants.

    457.5,  for supply containers of the hand shaker type having a hood or
    shield which forms a discharge passage for material emitted from the
    container at a point within the shield, so that the dispensed material
    follows a generally U-shaped path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 375 for jacketed fluid handling systems.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclass 12, for those having protective jackets.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 415+ for jacketed type.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 286 for article dispensers having a
    casing or outer covering (jacket) which provides a nonmaterial holding
    intervening space between such casing or covering and a dispenser.


CLS 222/184
TXT Dispensers under subclass 173 in which the side walls of the dispensing
    container are extended below the bottom on which the material rests to form
    a supporting base.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183,    for jackets so formed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, particularly subclasses 605+ and 628+ for such
    structures in general.


CLS 222/185.1
TXT For bottom discharge dispenser supported on horizontal surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 173 wherein the dispenser is supported on a
    horizontal surface  and will have a discharge  through an outlet at or
    adjacent the lowermost portion of the dispenser.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181.1+, for other bottom discharge dispenser.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    321.5,  for an inlet trap in a material supply container having a discharge
    assistant casing.

    328,    for a material discharge guide on the container side of the outlet.

    377,    for an inlet trap in the supply container with a pump.


CLS 222/186
TXT Dispensers under subclass 173 having an element positioned to be engaged by
    the foot of the operator for holding the dispenser in place.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179,    for pedal controlled discharge means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 361+ for hold-downs in general.


CLS 222/187
TXT Dispensers under the class definition in which the discharge or dispensing
    feed is by means of a wick or absorbent material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189.06+, for filters of absorbent material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 264+ for static absorbent or porous
    applicators.

    184,    Lubrication, particularly subclasses 3.1+, 16, 64, and 102 for swab
    or absorbent applicators.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 34+ for slow
    diffusers utilizing wicks or other absorbent means.

    384,    Bearings, subclass 379 for capillary feed to a bearing surface and
    see search notes.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 198+, wherein
    the implement includes a wick means to feed coating material from its
    reservoir to a tool which is porous and through which material passes to
    the work surface; and subclass 283, for such an implement wherein the tool
    is of the brush, broom or mop type.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 429 for coating processes utilizing a
    web, wick, or absorbent applicator.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 298+ for a fuel burner in which the flame is
    fed by a wick.


CLS 222/188
TXT Dispensers under the class definition having a fluid trap means to seal
    inlets or outlets.

    (1)     Note.  The fluid traps, for the most part, are to prevent the
    vapors formed by volatile contents (such as gasoline) escaping through the
    dispensing and/or vent openings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids subclass 242, for
    chamber seals, and see the notes thereto.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 247+ for liquid valves and liquid trap
    seals.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 163+ for catch basins
    or traps having grated inlet surface drains.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclass 105, for valved barrel bungs with a
    liquid seal.

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 228 for closures with a liquid seal.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, appropriate subclasses for hydraulic
    conveyors.


CLS 222/189.01
TXT WITH FLAME ARRESTER:

    Subject matter under the class definition having a means associated with a
    venting or discharge passage for preventing a flame from passing through it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53      and 152, for maintaining an inert atmosphere in or around the
    dispenser.

    187,    for a wick or absorbent material feed.

    188,    for a fluid trap seal, some of which are disclosed for washing
    material passing therethrough.

    190,    for an absorbent material used for other characters of dispensed
    material treatment or conditioning.

    195,    for a gas filter for the gas used in agitating the material to be
    dispensed.

    394+,   for a filter for fluid pressure discharge assistant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas: Heating and Illuminating, subclass 192 for a flame guard.

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 490+ for means securing or retaining a
    separating media.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 140 and 544+ for fluid handling system
    having means for separating solid material from the fluid including screen,
    strainer and filter and subclasses 377+ for a foraminous guard for fluid
    handling system.

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 88.2 for a fire preventing screen.


CLS 222/189.02
TXT WITH SIFTER:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the dispenser includes a
    container for granular material consisting of large particles and small
    particles, and the container further includes a device having a plurality
    of openings smaller than the large particles and larger than the small
    particles, so that the small particles will pass through the device and the
    large particles will be retained, or the device disintegrates the large
    particles to permit the particles to pass through the openings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    480,    for a hand-manipulable shaker, having diverse-type openings.

    565,    for a sifter, sprinkler, or plural opening patterns.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages, subclasses 521, 522, 528, 603+ and 605+ for a
    grain huller embodying sifter.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, particularly
    subclasses 233+, for a sifter.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 49+, 69+,
    and 83+ for a sifter combined with or forming part of a comminuter.


CLS 222/189.03
TXT Integral with container:

    Subject matter under subclass 189.02 wherein the sifter is permanently
    connected to the container.


CLS 222/189.04
TXT Plural:

    Subject matter under subclass 189.02 including two or more sifters.


CLS 222/189.05
TXT Including moving mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 189.02 including a device to move the sifter
    to assist in removing the material from the container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196+,   for a jarring or vibrating means.

    216+,   for an agitator or ejector.

    226+,   for an agitator followed by discharge assistant or an
    interconnected discharge controller.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 224+ for plural discharge assistants
    combined with a manipulating means.


CLS 222/189.06
TXT WITH FILTER (E.G., STRAINER):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the dispenser includes a
    container for a liquid material and the container further includes a
    separating device having a plurality of openings for (a) retaining matter
    (e.g., solid or fluid) within a container when a fluid is removed from the
    container or (b) preventing matter (e.g., solid or fluid) from entering the
    container from surrounding atmosphere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    187,    for a wick or absorbent material feed.

    188,    for fluid-trap-seals, some of which are disclosed for washing
    material passing therethrough.

    189.01, for a flame arrester.

    189.02, for a sifter.

    190,    for a material treatment or conditioning means.

    195,    for a gas filter for the gas used in agitating the material to be
    dispensed.

    394+,   for filter for fluid discharge assistant.

    480,    for mere pattern or sifting type openings such as hand-manipulable
    shaker.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas: Heating and Illuminating, subclass 192 for a flame guard.

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 490+ for a means securing or retaining a
    separating media.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 140 and 544+ for a fluid handling system
    having means for separating solid material from the fluid including a
    screen, strainer, and filter and subclasses 377+ for a foraminous guard for
    fluid handling system.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, particularly
    subclasses 233+ for a sifter for separating solid materials.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 296 for a gravitational
    separator using liquid as a separating medium combined with a filter,
    subclasses 348+ for a filter, and subclasses 464+ for a portable receptacle
    of draining type.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 88.1+ for a fire prevention screen or flame
    arrester.

    291,    Track Sanders, subclasses 13 and 48 for a screen combination.

    312,    Supports: Cabinet Structure, subclass 210.5 for a sifter
    combination.


CLS 222/189.07
TXT Portable drainer:

    Subject matter under subclass 189.06 wherein (a) the liquid is in a
    hand-held container tiltable from an erect to a pouring position and (b)
    the filter is located relative to a pouring outlet so that the solid matter
    is retained in the container when the container is tilted.


CLS 222/189.08
TXT Plural:

    Subject matter under subclass 189.06 including two or more filters.


CLS 222/189.09
TXT Associated with vent passage:

    Subject matter under subclass 189.06 wherein the filter is associated with
    an air passage other than a dispensing passage.


CLS 222/189.1
TXT Internally extended outlet pipe (e.g., diptube):

    Subject matter under subclass 189.06 wherein (a) the filter is located
    within a tube through which the fluid is dispensed and (b) the tube extends
    into the fluid within the container.


CLS 222/189.11
TXT With discharge assistant:

    Subject matter under subclass 189.06 wherein the filter is associated with
    a discharge assistant.

    (1)     Note.  A discharge assistant is defined in section 10 of the main
    class definition.


CLS 222/190
TXT Dispensers under the class definition having means to modify, preserve or
    otherwise treat the material dispensed.

    (1)     Note.  These are disclosed for various purposes such as moisture
    regulating by draining, humidifying or absorbing moisture, ventilating, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Other main classes appropriate to the type of treating or
    conditioning means must be searched.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for burner combinations.

    131,    for dispensers having heat exchange jackets.

    146,    for dispensers having miscellaneous heating or cooling means.

    152,    for dispensers having inert atmosphere providing means.

    160+,   for movably mounted dispensers.

    187,    for wick or absorbent material feed.

    188,    for fluid-trap-seals.

    189.01, 189.02+ and 189.06+, for filter or strainer combinations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 111+ for packaging apparatus combined
    with means to subject the contents material to an agency which alters a
    physical or chemical characteristic of the contents material.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 135+ for article dispensers having
    combined therewith means to modify, preserve or otherwise treat the
    articles dispensed.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 31+ for gas or vapor
    treatment of material.


CLS 222/191
TXT Dispensers under the class definition combined with the handles of tools or
    implements, either for support or for interconnection of the handles and
    dispenser actuators.  The dispenser container may serve as, or be contained
    in, the tool or implement handle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174,    for dispensers mounted on pole or extension devices.

    192,    for dispensers combined with firearms.

    465.1+, and see the notes thereto for dispensers having handles or
    handgrips.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 110+, especially subclass 110.5
    for receptacles combined with handles, and see Note 3 to subclass 110, for
    handles for tools, implements and analogous devices.

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 125, for cutlery implements having salt and
    pepper shakers forming or contained in the handles.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 138 and 140,
    wherein the implement includes a supply reservoir mounted on an elongated
    handle, which reservoir feeds material directly to the work (subclass 138)
    or the work-engaging portion of the implement (subclass 140).


CLS 222/192
TXT Dispensers under the class definition claimed in combination with features
    other than the container structure and discharge assistant means and not
    provided for in preceding subclasses.

    (1)     Note.  Container structure includes handles and/or handgrips, the
    inlets and/or outlets and their check-valves, manually actuated valves,
    discharge controllers and/or closures and actuating devices for such parts.

    (2)     Note.  Discharge assistants include all mechanism that moves or
    tends to move material toward or through a discharge outlet, fluid currents
    for the same purpose and actuating means therefor.

    (3)     Note.  In this subclass, for example, are combinations with a
    firearm, bicycle, mirror, tools, or implements (cutters and punches are in
    subclasses 80+ and dispensers combined with tool or implement handles are
    in subclass 191), supports for additional articles, bumpers to absorb
    shock, protector rings, display or exhibiting means which do not display
    the material (subclasses 154+), display or exhibit a condition, or perform
    a measuring function (subclasses 23+), specific material to be dispensed,
    hand shields and sediment traps, or other material separating means (other
    than those in subclasses 188 and 189).

    (4)     Note.  All preceding subclasses must be investigated for particular
    combinations within this definition and shown by the preceding subclass
    titles.

    (5)     Note.  See the notes to the main class definition for combinations
    of dispensers with other devices located in other classes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23+,    see note 3.

    80,     see note 3.

    93,     for collapsible wall type containers combined with additional
    article holding means.

    106,    for collapsible wall type containers combined with miscellaneous
    other type devices.

    154+,   see note 3.

    188,    189, see note 3.

    191,    see note 3.

    538+,   and see the notes thereto, for means to house or secure discharge
    guides in a nonuse position.

    564,    and see the notes thereto for containers having interior material
    guides, including splash deflectors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 246, for
    bumpers attached to the implements of that class.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 234.6 for a system having a fluid handling
    guide or support and a fluid supply means for it, and subclass 560 for
    miscellaneous fluid handling systems combined with nonfluid handling means.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 69.2+, for an inkwell combined with a
    penrack.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 199 for combined article dispensing
    devices not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 222/195
TXT Dispensers under the class definition having means to agitate the contents
    by gas; including, for example, gas pressure force feed arrangements in
    which the gas is discharged into the container contents below the surface
    thereof; also pump devices with means to disconnect the pump from the
    discharge and operate it to agitate contents; also means to discharge gas
    pressure exhaust into supply means for agitation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    630+,   for fluid flow discharge type dispensers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 183, for such
    apparatus where gas is supplied to a liquid.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 295 and
    321, for pneumatic agitation associated with sifting.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, particularly subclasses 121+ for
    the submerged blast type.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 3+ and 10+ for mortar mixing chambers in
    which gas performs the agitating function, and subclasses 101+ for such gas
    type agitators of general utility.


CLS 222/196
TXT Dispensers under the class definition having means either to jar the
    container and/or to cause some part of the container (including its outlet
    agitator or other discharge assistant adjacent its outlet) to vibrate,
    i.e., to move in reciprocations or oscillations of such small amplitude
    that the effect is to accelerate gravity flow rather than to move the
    material bodily toward or through the discharge outlet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161,    for supply containers mounted for vibrating, i.e., small amplitude,
    motion as distinguished from having a wall or wall portion mounted for such
    motion relative to other walls or wall portions, causing a wall or wall
    portion to jar or vibrate due to its resilience or flexibility and/or have
    an agitator or other discharge assistant or trap chamber have small
    amplitude vibratory motion.

    206+,   for resilient wall dispensers designed for flexing the resilient
    wall to cause the dispensing operation, no jarring or vibrating means being
    provided.

    226+,   for agitators removed from the outlet and followed (in the
    direction of material flow) by other discharge assistants, even though the
    agitator has movements of small amplitude, unless the agitator and/or the
    following discharge assistant is the container wall or part thereof with
    means to cause small amplitude movement, for which see subclasses 196+

    275,    and 409, for agitators and other discharge assistants having
    reciprocating motions, not mere vibrations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 164 for those
    having treated material vibrating means.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 203+ for sand mold forming apparatus
    employing a vibrating means for compacting the sand.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 533 for a chute or other gravity
    conveyor that is vibrated and subclasses 521, 594+, 609, and 752.1 for a
    vibratory conveyor.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses, particularly the impact or jarring subclasses under sifters
    (330, 334, 336, 338, 340, 343, 345, 347, 349, and 381+).

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 163+ for article dispensers
    including orienting and in which means to selectively separate properly
    oriented articles from a source of supply involves agitation of the
    articles in the source; subclasses 175+ for article dispensers having stack
    forming means, and in many of which agitating serves to assist discharge of
    articles from a hopper to a stacking outlet; and subclasses 200+ for
    article dispensers in general having means to shake or stir the supply
    container or the articles for agitating purposes.

    366,    Agitating, subclass 39 for skip feeds for mortar mixers having
    jarring or vibrating means.


CLS 222/196.1
TXT Dispensers under subclass 196 adapted to be supported in the hand and
    shaken to cause material to move through the outlet and having an
    inertia-operated movable part associated with the supply container for
    shifting movement when the container is shaken, whereby jarring results
    from the impact of the inertia operated member on the material or container
    and the material is loosened, shifted, dragged or impelled through the
    outlet.

    (1)     Note.  See class definition, section 12.5.

    (2)     Note.  The movable element may be a discharge controller or
    closure, or a discharge assistant, the latter term including devices
    analogous to agitators or grinding bodies but not falling within the
    definitions of Classes 241 and 366.  Mere motion of the material as a
    result of shaking is not considered a jarring element.

    (3)     Note.  Since many manually movable elements are capable of shifting
    by inertia on movement of the dispenser, only those designed and
    constructed solely for this mode of operation and having no manual
    actuating means in connection with the movable element have been placed
    here.

    (4)     Note.  Discharge assistants of the movable trap chamber type and
    stationary trap type dispensers have not been included, since the presence
    of the measuring function is inconsistent with the mode of operation
    characteristic of this group.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251,    for members mounted in a stationary supply container to move only
    when shifting of the material displaces them, the shifting of the material
    being caused by dispensing.

    404,    415, for conveying type discharge assistants having manually
    operated actuators.  See (2) Note.

    454+,   for tiltable containers having traps which may have
    inertia-operated valves.  (See (4) Note).

    476,    for dispensers which have spaced discharge controllers alternately
    seated in a single outlet of a container which is not a hand manipulable
    shaker.

    500,    for gravity or inertia-operated outlet elements for dispensers
    other than hand manipulable shakers.  See class definition, section 12.5.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 86+, for
    comminuting devices comprising a rotary comminuting element cooperating
    with a perforated stationary surface, and subclass 168, for hand support
    comminutors, characterized by positive manual operation of crushing
    mechanism or by a loose grinding body type of comminuting element.  See (2)
    Note.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 129+ for hand manipulable shaker type
    agitators.  See (2) Note above, and see Class 366, section III of the class
    definition for the line.


CLS 222/196.2
TXT Hand manipulable shakers under subclass 196.1 in which the movable
    inertia-operated member is associated with the dispensing outlet, either
    forming or closing the outlet, or passing through it or approaching it so
    closely as to force or tend to force material through it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149+,   for cleaning means passing through the dispenser outlet but not
    serving as either closure or discharge assistant.


CLS 222/196.3
TXT Hand manipulable shakers under subclass 196.2 in which the outlet is of the
    plural opening pattern type and an inertia-operated movable element or a
    part of such element passes through or moves into each opening of the
    pattern outlet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149+,   for cleaning means extending through dispenser outlets.

    501,    for outlet element actuators projecting through dispenser discharge
    guides.


CLS 222/196.4
TXT Hand manipulable shakers under subclass 196.2 in which the inertia-operable
    member does not have enlarged portions on both sides of the dispensing
    outlet but is loosely confined in a guide or housing adjacent the outlet so
    that it is freely movable toward or away from the outlet either to loosen
    or shift the material by impact thereon or on the container or to open and
    close the outlet, or both.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes balls inertia elements movable
    adjacent the dispensing outlet.  See Class 241, Solid Material Comminution
    or Disintegration, subclasses 86+, for comminuting devices which have a
    stationary comminuting surface with openings which cooperate with a rotary
    comminuting element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500,    for other caged outlet elements operated by gravity or inertia.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 86+, see
    (1) Note, and subclass 168, for hand supported comminutors for condiments
    in which the movable element is confined only by the walls of the supply
    container whereby lumps may be crushed between the movable element and the
    walls.


CLS 222/196.5
TXT Hand manipulable shakers under subclass 196.1 in which an inertia-operated
    movable element is mounted or formed for limited movement within the supply
    container so that its primary effect is to jar the dispenser, or loosen or
    shift the material by impact thereon, and any resultant crushing of the
    material between the movable element and the container walls is incidental,
    being prevented by the restrictions on the movement of the inertia-operated
    element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution and Disintegration, subclass 168, for
    loose grinding body type hand supported comminutors.


CLS 222/197
TXT Dispensers under subclass 196 having vibrating means operating on or
    carried by a conveyor type or movable trap chamber so as to jar or vibrate
    the trap to dislodge or settle its contents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216+,   for agitators and ejectors for conveyor type or movable trap
    chambers.


CLS 222/198
TXT Dispensers under subclass 196 having a container with a single outlet, the
    container walls adjacent the outlet comprising or being covered by a
    plurality of vibrating members which bound or define the outlet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280,    for outlets bounded by other discharge assistants.


CLS 222/199
TXT Dispensers under subclass 196 having a container with a movable bottom
    vibrating in substantially its own plane, or swinging toward and away from
    the outlet, which usually is located in a short arc, at one edge of the
    movable bottom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 249 for such
    devices acting as feeds for comminutors.


CLS 222/200
TXT Dispensers under subclass 196 having a vibrating member movable across the
    outlet or near it and in a plane transverse to the material flow.


CLS 222/201
TXT Dispensers under subclass 196 having a vibratable container wall or false
    wall and a rotary discharge assistant, the wall receiving its motion from
    the rotary assistant or a projection or cam carried thereby.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231,    for free engagement type connection between agitators and other
    discharge assistants or valves.


CLS 222/202
TXT Dispensers under subclass 196 in which a wall of the supply container body
    or a portion thereof is jarred or vibrated to cause flexure thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Means for causing such jarring or vibration other than
    motion of the hand (hand shaking) of the entire container must be included.
     Means movable with respect to the container to jar or vibrate a wall when
    it is hand shaken are here.

    (2)     Note.  Where the wall is mounted on pivots or is mounted for
    sliding motion, see the preceding subclasses.


CLS 222/203
TXT Dispensers under subclass 202 in which the container wall or part thereof
    which receives the force causing vibration, is constructed of flexible
    material in whole or in part.

    (1)     Note.  In the patents in subclass 202 in which a wall receives a
    blow or force to impart vibrations, the wall is of rigid or resilient
    material which may flex slightly due to the blow or force.  The patents in
    subclass 203 have the wall made of flexible material (as a fabric) or if
    made of rigid material for the most part involve at least some flexible
    material (as in the joint) to permit motion.


CLS 222/204
TXT Dispensers under the class definition having (1) a siphon, i.e., a
    discharge conduit having an outlet below the material level and an
    intermediate portion at an elevation above the material level so that once
    flow is started it will continue, combined with (2) a discharge assistant.

    (1)     Note.  Inlets for discharge assistants (for example pump inlets)
    even though called siphons which do not function as siphons independently
    of the discharge assistant are not here, but are in the appropriate
    following subclasses; see subclasses 251+ and the subclasses referred to in
    the notes to the definitions thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251,    see (1) Note.

    416,    for miscellaneous dispensers with  siphons.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 123+ for siphons, especially subclasses
    130+ and 142+ for siphon starting means, and subclasses 132+ for periodic
    or level responsive siphons.


CLS 222/205
TXT Dispensers under the class definition having both a supply and a trap
    chamber, and having feed means to cause feed from the supply to the trap
    other than gravity (including forming a vacuum in the trap to cause feed
    thereto), discharge from the trap being by gravity or by manual removal,
    i.e., by means not requiring a discharge assistant.

    (1)     Note.  Where discharge assistant means are provided to assist in
    removing material from the trap chamber, see the appropriate following
    subclass, subclasses 251+ defining "discharge assistant" and see the notes
    to such subclasses for other such art.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251,    see (1) Note.

    416,    and 420 through 457, for other trap chamber combinations in which
    discharge from the trap is by gravity or manual removal.

    576,    and indented subclasses 577, 578+ and 583, for a dispensing inkwell
    including nongravity feed to a trap chamber which is a dip well.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 191+ for article dispensing devices
    in which the articles are delivered to stationary article supports for
    manual removal, and subclasses 255+ for article dispensers in which
    dispensed articles are retained by discharge assistant means for manual
    removal therefrom.


CLS 222/206
TXT Dispensers under the class definition having one or more walls or portions
    thereof which may be distorted or deflected by application of a force, to
    expel material which wall or walls return to their original position when
    the force is removed.

    (1)     Note.  The wall return motion may be due to its own resilience or
    due to a spring or other biasing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92+,    for collapsible wall containers.

    150,    for this subject matter with a cleaner for the dispenser outlet and
    see the reference to subclass 206 for the line.

    202+,   for dispensers with means to jar or otherwise cause a wall to
    vibrate.

    490,    for outlets in the form of slitted resilient diaphragms or nipples.

    491+,   where the resilient element, even though of wall form, is deflected
    by the pressure of the container contents to open the outlet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 89+ for collapsible wall
    type expansible chamber devices.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 64 for article dispensers having
    flexible supply container walls, and subclass 65 for such dispensers having
    collapsible or telescoping supply container wall structure.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 650+ for a
    device comprising a container for nonfluid material and means to strew or
    scatter the material, and in which the container walls may be resilient or
    compressible.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 183+, wherein
    the implement has a resilient-wall material container which is deformed by
    digital engagement to force the material either into or away from the
    container (to the applying tool).

    417,    Pumps, appropriate subclasses for collapsible wall pumps.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 45 for a rotary
    expansible chamber device having a collapsible progressively deformed
    working chamber wall.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 185 and 212+ for bulb type syringes.


CLS 222/207
TXT Dispensers under subclass 206 in which there is (1) a supply container for
    material to be dispensed; and (2) a second chamber which receives material
    from the supply container and from which the material is delivered.  The
    second chamber is usually a pump or pulsator and either or both the
    container and chamber has a resilient wall.


CLS 222/209
TXT Dispensers under subclass 206 in which either (1) a resilient wall type
    pump or pulsator generates fluid pressure for causing discharge of the
    material from the container, or (2) a removable flexible wall closure (that
    usually serves as a pump or pulsator) is provided.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207+,   in which a removable resilient wall forcing device receives
    material from a supply container.

    394+,   for other dispensers in which the material is caused to dispense by
    a fluid under pressure, and see the notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 150 for collapsible bulb fluid pressure
    generating pumps for starting siphons.


CLS 222/210
TXT Dispensers under subclass 206 having a handle or handgrip connected to the
    dispenser container and by means of which the dispenser may be handled.

    (1)     Note.  Where the handle or handgrip is connected only to a movable
    dispenser part to actuate the same, classification is with the type of
    element actuated, such actuating handles being in this subclass only when
    combined with a container handle or handgrip.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323+,   for other container handles or handgrips for dispensers with
    discharge assistants.

    441,    for trap chambers with cutoffs combined with container handles or
    handgrips.

    465.1+, for miscellaneous dispenser-container handle and handgrip
    combinations.


CLS 222/211
TXT Dispensers under subclass 206 in which there is a pipe communicating with
    and constituting an extension of the dispensing outlet and extending
    internally of the receptacle.  For the most part, these pipes extend to
    adjacent the receptacle bottom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    214,    for foraminous or apertured tubes within the receptacle
    constituting an element of the wall biasing means.

    376,    377 and 382, for internally extending outlet pipes in combinations
    involving a supply container with an encased impeller, follower, or other
    discharge assistant.

    464.1+, for miscellaneous dispensers with an internally extending outlet
    pipe.


CLS 222/212
TXT Dispensers under subclass 206 having flow controllers or closures for
    openings in the dispenser.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149+,   for cleaners extending through a dispenser outlet, and see the note
    to subclass 150 for the line.

    476     through 563, for other types of dispensers having flow controllers
    and closures, and also closures and/or flow controllers for resilient wall
    containers where characteristics pertaining to the resilient wall features
    are not claimed.


CLS 222/213
TXT Dispensers under subclass 212 provided with mechanism or connections
    between the flow controller or closure and one or more of the resilient
    walls so that flexure thereof causes operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150,    for cleaners so operated, the note under such subclass stating the
    line.


CLS 222/214
TXT Dispensers under subclass 206 having means to bias or deflect one or more
    walls either to (1) cause them to return to their normal position after
    having been forcibly distorted or deflected, or (2) to deflect the same to
    cause discharge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 156+ for
    hand-manipulable coating implement having a resilient-wall reservoir and
    means to deform the wall either to fill the reservoir or to force material
    therefrom to the applying tool.


CLS 222/215
TXT Dispensers under subclass 206 made of material at least part of which is
    not metallic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for corresponding collapsible wall receptacles.

    209,    for nonmetallic flexible wall pumps or pulsators, and nonmetallic,
    flexible wall, removable closures.


CLS 222/216
TXT Dispensers under the class definition having means directed toward or
    moving in or through (1) the chambers or pockets of a conveyor type
    discharge assistant having trap chambers or transverse grooves, or (2) the
    material pocket of a movable trap chamber to stir or dislodge the contents
    thereof and acting at or near the discharge point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195,    for gas agitation.

    196+,   where the agitation and/or ejection is due to jarring and/or
    vibrating means.

    226+    and 251+, for agitators and/or ejectors in other combinations,
    subclass 342 having scrapers or wipers for or carried by a discharge
    assistant.

    630+,   for fluid flow discharge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 463.1 for a conveyor having load
    engaging elements and means for ejecting the load from the elements, and
    subclass 705 for a bucket type conveyor having means for ejecting loads
    from its buckets.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 233+ for article dispensing devices
    having means for removing articles from movable segregating chamber
    structures.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclass 67 for rotary trap chamber
    discharge assistants feeding pneumatic conveyors, in which the fluid
    current clears the traps of material carried therein.


CLS 222/217
TXT Dispensers under subclass 216 having the agitator or ejector mounted on or
    in the conveyor or movable trap chamber and acting on or in the traps or
    grooves thereof.


CLS 222/218
TXT Dispensers under subclass 217 having a rotary conveyor or chamber with
    radial trap chambers and radially movable members therein, usually
    constituting movable bottoms for the trap chambers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 472+, for rotary
    cylinder pumps or motors with reciprocating pistons.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 269+ and 462+, for rotary cylinder pumps with
    reciprocating pistons.


CLS 222/219
TXT Dispensers under subclass 218 having two diametrically opposite traps or a
    plurality of such trap pairs, each pair having a common ejector which moves
    alternately to the periphery of the rotor at opposite sides, ejecting at
    the trap that is in discharge position.


CLS 222/220
TXT Dispensers under subclass 216 having a conveyor with trap chambers or
    grooves and a rotary ejector having a projection, projections or a spiral
    flange meshing with the chambers or grooves at or near the discharge point
    to stir or dislodge material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    342,    for similar means for removing material from the discharge
    assistant at points other than the discharge point.


CLS 222/221
TXT Dispensers under subclass 216 having the agitator and/or ejector actuated
    by cam means.


CLS 222/222
TXT Dispensers under subclass 216 having an ejector so pivoted as to rest on
    the conveyor or movable trap chambers and enter the traps or grooves as
    they are presented successively at the discharge point.


CLS 222/223
TXT Dispensers under subclass 222 combined with an additional pivoted member
    which levels the charge in the trap or groove as it approaches the
    discharge point.

    (1)     Note.  The two pivoted members are usually mounted in the same
    housing which serves as a cover for the outlet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    350,    for pivoted strikers not combined with ejectors.


CLS 222/224
TXT Dispensers under subclass 216 in which the ejector terminates in a ball or
    roller having roller contact with the conveyor or movable trap chambers and
    entering the traps or grooves in turn.


CLS 222/225
TXT Dispensers under subclass 216 having an ejector element of resilient
    material, the ejector being biased to enter the traps or grooves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206+,   for resilient wall dispensers.


CLS 222/226
TXT Dispensers under the class definition having means of the agitator type
    adapted to mix the material to be discharged and/or move it toward the
    discharge outlet and either, or both, (1) a discharge assistant acting on
    the material subsequently or (2) a subsequent cutoff interconnected with
    the agitator means for operation simultaneously therewith.  The first of a
    series of discharge assistants is considered an agitator if it is not a
    follower, pump, or pulsator or a conveyor type or movable trap chamber.

    (1)     Note.  Cut-offs or other discharge controllers or closures for
    dispenser outlets and also other movable dispenser outlet elements having
    actuating means which contact the material being discharged, but which
    actuating means have neither added features of structure for, nor
    particular relationships to cause, agitation are not in this nor the
    indented subclasses, but are in the appropriate following subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251+,   for agitator type discharge assistants not having a cut-off
    interconnected therewith and for discharge assistants other than agitators
    as above defined combined with cut-offs, see particularly subclasses 310+,
    356, 357, 380, 387, and 400.

    252+,   for serially arranged discharge assistants where the first of the
    series is not an agitator as above defined.

    505+,   for movable outlet elements with relatively movable actuating means.

    510,    for movable outlet elements having a rod actuator passing through
    the dispenser container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses for serially
    arranged conveyors, including 570+.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 200+ for article dispensers
    including means to agitate, vibrate or jar the articles in the supply
    container.  See also subclasses 182, 183+ and 202+ for article dispensing
    combinations involving agitating means mounted on, incorporated in, or
    otherwise interrelated with discharge assistants for operation therewith.

    366,    Agitating, particularly subclasses 184+ for specified discharge
    means.


CLS 222/227
TXT Dispensers under subclass 226 having at least three discharge assistants or
    two discharge assistants and a discharge controller arranged for successive
    action on the material being discharged.

    (1)     Note.  Sets of two or more elements having the same function are
    included as only a single assistant, as are other plural elements which act
    together as a single device, such as the plural vanes or blades of screws
    or propellers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 201 for devices including at least
    three means for assisting the discharge of articles from the supply
    container, at least one of said means being an agitating, vibrating or
    jarring means.


CLS 222/228
TXT Dispensers under subclass 226 in which the first means is a flexible or
    freely pivoted element mounted on a second means movable about an axis, the
    first means partaking of the rotary or swinging motion, but having
    additional unconstrained movements determined by the resistance of the
    material.


CLS 222/229
TXT Dispensers under subclass 226 in which the agitating means and subsequent
    serially arranged means are axially aligned and so related to each other
    and the container that axially longitudinal movement of one is translated
    into axially rotary movement of the other, or both have combined axially
    rotary and longitudinal movement.


CLS 222/230
TXT Dispensers under subclass 226 in which the agitating means comprises a
    resilient or resiliently mounted means so constructed and organized as to
    have a definite agitating function, and which operates to bias the serially
    arranged subsequently acting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    336+,   for discharge assistants having biasing means, which means have no
    added features of structure for, nor particular relationship to cause,
    agitation.

    511+,   for movable dispenser outlet elements having biasing means, which
    means have no added features of structure for, nor particular relationship
    to cause, agitation.


CLS 222/231
TXT Dispensers under subclass 226 in which the interconnection between the
    first and second means consists in a mere contact or abutting relation of
    the means which transmits the movement of one to the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196+,   for discharge assistants in series and having direct operating
    connection (1) where the relationship is between two vibrating members, (2)
    where the operation of either is vibratory and not limited to a single
    stroke for each discharge cycle of the other, or (3) where the vibrating
    member carries all or part of the supply load.


CLS 222/232
TXT Dispensers under subclass 226 having one rotary means (i.e., the agitator,
    discharge assistant or valve is rotary) to which the other means (which may
    be rotary or nonrotary) is connected for relative motion at a point removed
    from the axis, as by a crank, cam, or other eccentric element.


CLS 222/233
TXT Dispensers under subclass 226 in which at least one of the serial means
    rotates and at least one reciprocates (including oscillates).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404,    for miscellaneous compound motion discharge assistants.


CLS 222/234
TXT Dispensers under subclass 233 in which the means that reciprocates is not
    pivoted.


CLS 222/235
TXT Dispensers under subclass 234 in which the first of the series, i.e., the
    agitator, is rotary.


CLS 222/236
TXT Dispensers under subclass 226 in which each of the serially arranged means
    rotates about an axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    271+,   for plural rotary discharge assistants and trap chambers arranged
    in sets.

    293+    and 311+, for rotary devices with discharge volume varying means.

    367+,   for rotary trap chambers.

    410+,   for miscellaneous rotary discharge assistants.


CLS 222/237
TXT Dispensers under subclass 236 in which the serial means comprise juxtaposed
    rings or plates rotating in opposite directions, or at different speeds in
    the same direction.


CLS 222/238
TXT Dispensers under subclass 236 in which the axes of the serial rotary means
    are parallel or substantially so.


CLS 222/239
TXT Dispensers under subclass 236 in which the serial rotary means have a
    common axis.


CLS 222/240
TXT Dispensers under subclass 239 having (1) the first of the serial means
    (i.e., the agitator) in the form of a screw, helix, or one or more vanes,
    and (2) the second means operating at the discharge end thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241,    for combinations where the agitator is not of screw, helix, or vane
    but a following discharge assistant is.


CLS 222/241
TXT Dispensers under subclass 239 in which (1) the agitator (first of the
    series) is of any form, and (2) a following discharge assistant is in the
    form of a screw, helix, or one or more vanes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240,    for this combination where the agitator is of screw, helix, or vane
    form.


CLS 222/242
TXT Dispensers under subclass 239 having the first or agitator means (which may
    be merely one or more projections), mounted rigidly on a second means in
    the series, either axially or eccentrically.

    (1)     Note.  If the mounting is on a common shaft or support rather than
    direct, see the preceding subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 203 for article dispensing devices
    having rotary agitating means rigidly mounted on discharge assistant means.


CLS 222/243
TXT Dispensers under subclass 226 in which all of the serially arranged means
    reciprocate (including oscillate).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    275+,   for plural reciprocating (including oscillating) discharge
    assistants arranged in sets.

    361+,   for reciprocating (including oscillating) trap chambers.

    409,    for miscellaneous reciprocating (including oscillating) discharge
    assistants.


CLS 222/244
TXT Dispensers under subclass 243 having the serial means relatively movable in
    parallel planes.


CLS 222/245
TXT Dispensers under subclass 243 having one of the serial means reciprocating
    about a pivot (oscillating) and a second means reciprocating, but not
    pivoted.  Such means may occur in any sequence.


CLS 222/246
TXT Dispensers under subclass 243 having the serial means moving toward and
    away from the outlet and along or parallel to the axis of the outlet.

    (1)     Note.  Where the outlet from the receptacle is a bent conduit, the
    motion is along or parallel to at least that portion thereof that
    communicates with the receptacle interior.


CLS 222/247
TXT Dispensers under subclass 243 having the serial means all reciprocating
    about pivots (i.e., oscillating).


CLS 222/248
TXT Dispensers under subclass 247 in which the serial means are rigidly
    connected or integral and oscillate together as a unit.


CLS 222/249
TXT Dispensers under the class definition having a chamber containing a piston
    impelled successively in opposite directions by material entering under
    pressure, the material in the contracting side being expelled by the piston
    movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    253,    for material operated differential piston.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 239+ for reciprocating piston
    meters.  A device as defined in this subclass (249) having means controlled
    by piston movement, material pressure, etc., for reversing the flow control
    means to admit the material to the contracted chamber and thus be
    continuously operated so long as material flows, is considered a meter.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 392+, for pumps having a single piston common to
    motor and pump chambers.


CLS 222/250
TXT Dispensers under subclass 249 having means for varying the capacity of the
    chamber and/or the stroke of the piston to vary the volume discharged.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282+,   and see the notes thereto for other combinations involving
    discharge volume varying means.

    309,    for adjustable stops for limiting the movement of a pump piston,
    pulsator, or follower in a chamber to vary the discharge volume.


CLS 222/251
TXT Dispensers under the class definition having one or more discharge
    assistants, as impellers, pumps, conveyors, or movable trap chambers, as
    defined in section 10 of the main class definition.

    (1)     Note.  Elements suspended in supply containers for movement by
    pressure of the material and/or gravity to prevent material bridging are in
    this subclass (251).

    (2)     Note.  In subclass 416 siphons are considered as means to be
    excluded by the above definition.

    (3)     Note.  Any preceding subclass may have the subject matter defined
    as going into this and the indented subclasses, in particular combinations
    hereinbefore provided for.  Those considered worth special mention are set
    forth in notes to this and the indented subclasses. Also noted are those
    subclasses which follow this group that have subject matter sufficiently
    related to be specially mentioned.

    (4)     Note.  See section 9 and 24 for notes to related subject matter in
    other classes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3+,     for gas or vapor dispensers and such dispensers combined with means
    to dispense liquids and solids, i.e., nongaseous materials.  Where gases or
    vapors are used for the purpose of causing nongaseous materials to be
    dispensed but there are no means for dispensing the gases or vapors other
    than to the nongaseous material dispenser and/or venting the same, the
    patent is not in subclass 3, but in subclasses 251+ or other preceding
    subclass appropriate to the type of nongaseous material dispenser.

    9+,     for article dispensers.

    80+,    particularly subclass 82 for cutter and/or punch combinations.

    92+,    for combinations with a collapsible wall receptacle.

    129+,   where there are plural sources from which to dispense plural
    compartments or receptacles with means to dispense from at least one or a
    receptacle with a spaced jacket.

    160+,   where dispenser supply receptacle is mounted for motion.

    173+,   where a casing or support for the dispenser is claimed,
    particularly subclass 177 for combinations where a vehicle ground engaging
    wheel is interconnected with a discharge assistant to operate the same.

    195,    where a gas is used to agitate the material to be dispensed.

    196+,   where dispensing is aided by jarring dispenser parts or having
    vibrating dispenser parts.

    204,    where a siphon is combined with a nongravity discharge assistant.

    206+,   where one or more walls or portions thereof are resilient.

    216+,   where there is an agitator or ejector so related to (1) a conveyor
    type discharge assistant having trap chambers or grooves, or (2) a movable
    trap chamber, as to stir or otherwise help to dislodge material therein.

    226+,   for combinations of discharge assistants and/or movable trap
    chambers serially arranged, the first discharge assistant of the series to
    operate on the material dispensed being an agitator.

    249+,   for dispensers having a floating piston movable alternately in
    opposite directions to discharge material.

    416,    see (1) Note.

    425     through 458, for nonmovable trap chambers.

    464.1+, for dispensers comprising a container and internally extending
    outlet pipe so arranged that suction is necessary to cause discharge, no
    suction means being claimed.

    491+,   for dispenser outlets having movable elements (such as flow
    controllers, closures, nozzles, or other discharge guides) which are caused
    to move due to pressure of the material to be dispensed, the means for
    creating such pressure not being claimed.

    576,    and indented subclasses 577, 578+ and 583 for a dispensing inkwell
    including a discharge assistant.

    630+,   where a flowing fluid picks up and carries the material to be
    dispensed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 324+ for glass melt dispensing
    means including a discharge assistant.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 565+ for distribution systems comprising
    pumps.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 208+ for article dispensing devices
    having discharge assisting means.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 143+, wherein
    the implement includes force-producing means for either filling the
    reservoir thereof or for moving material from the reservoir to the applying
    tool.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, appropriate subclasses (e.g., 209+,
    304+, etc.) for a chamber, receptacle, or other load holder provided with a
    driven or nongravity type of material discharging means, and other
    appropriate subclasses (e.g., 216, 328+, etc.) for a chamber, receptacle,
    or other load holder which discharges material by gravity, and wherein a
    guide, gate, or other flow-affecting device is provided.


CLS 222/252
TXT Dispensers under subclass 251 having at least two distinct discharge
    assistants claimed in combination.

    (1)     Note.  The plurality may be arranged in series and/or in parallel.
    One may be an arrangement to apply fluid under pressure directly to the
    material to be dispensed to cause dispensing.

    (2)     Note.  Plural elements which act together as a single discharge
    assistant have been so treated (as plural vanes or blades, plural screws,
    plural movable sequentially operable traps, etc.) but where pumps or
    pulsators have plural chambers, each chamber having a forcing device
    therein, the structure has been treated as plural and not as a single pump
    or pulsator with plural cylinders.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135+,   for this subject matter where there are at least two sources of
    material to be dispensed.

    216+,   for combinations of agitator and/or ejector for removing and/or
    assisting in removing material from either (1) a conveyor type discharge
    assistant having trap chambers or grooves, or (2) movable trap chambers.

    226+,   for this subject matter in series arrangement, the first of the
    series being an agitator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 138+ for diverse type presses not otherwise
    classified in which one of the presses is of the type which forwards
    material while it compresses it.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses for plural
    conveyors, including 570+.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 224+ for article dispensing devices
    having plural discharge assisting means or discharge assisting means
    combined with manipulating means.


CLS 222/253
TXT Dispensers under subclass 252 having two forcing devices, a quantity being
    fed by one device at one pressure, the second forcing device taking a part
    of such quantity and delivering it under higher pressure to the point of
    use by energy derived from the said quantity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 225+, for pumps in which a quantity of fluid at
    one head is divided with the head of one portion being utilized to increase
    the head of the other.


CLS 222/254
TXT Dispensers under subclass 252 having three or more distinct discharge
    assistants arranged in series, i.e., the material from the supply chamber
    is operated upon by the first of series, and the others of the series
    sequentially operate upon the same until it is discharged.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227,    for this subject matter in series arrangement, the first of the
    series being an agitator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 225 for article dispensing devices
    having three or more distinct discharge assistants or manipulating means
    arranged to serially act on articles to be dispensed and see also subclass
    201 for similar combinations in which at least one of the means is an
    agitating means.


CLS 222/255
TXT Dispensers under subclass 252 in which all the discharge assistants are
    pumps.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254,    for plural dispensing pumps with one or more discharge assistants
    of other types.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 566+ for distribution systems comprising
    plural pumps.


CLS 222/256
TXT Dispensers under subclass 252 having two discharge assistants, one being a
    follower and one being a casing enclosed impeller (such as a pump or a
    pulsator).

    (1)     Note.  For the most part, the follower acts on the material in the
    supply container while the casing enclosed impeller receives material
    therefrom and discharges the same.

    (2)     Note. Discharge assistants, even though casing enclosed, which will
    not operate to increase pressure on the material dispensed, were not
    considered casing enclosed impellers.  Those functioning merely to convey
    without increase in pressure or merely to agitate are examples.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    372+,   for supply containers having no means for creating pressure on the
    contents which deliver to a chamber enclosing an impeller (i.e., a pump or
    pulsator) or to a chamber having a follower or other form of discharge
    assistant and from which the material is in turn discharged, and see the
    notes to such subclasses for related art.

    386+,   for containers having a follower therein, and see the notes for
    related art.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 226+ for article dispensing devices
    having plural discharge assisting means or discharge assisting means
    combined with manipulating means and in which at least one of the discharge
    assisting means is of the follower type.


CLS 222/257
TXT Dispensers under subclass 256 in which the tubular outlet through which the
    material is dispensed is movably mounted on the dispenser, which tubular
    outlet is interconnected with at least one of the two discharge assistants
    (follower or casing enclosed impeller) as defined in subclass 320.

    (1)     Note.  Where the nozzle is so mounted on the dispenser as not to be
    movable relative thereto, it is not in this or the indented subclasses,
    even though the nozzle is made of flexible material (as a hose) and is
    capable of motion due to this fact.  Also where the nozzle is movably
    mounted on the dispenser, but the defined interconnection is not  present,
    it is not in this and the indented subclass, but in other appropriate
    subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    320+,   where there is a single discharge assistant.

    344+,   for movable trap chambers and conveyor type trap chambers
    resembling movable nozzles, particularly subclasses 361+.

    492+,   499, 513+, 519+, 522+, and 526+, for movable nozzles not associated
    with discharge assistants.


CLS 222/258
TXT Dispensers under subclass 257 which utilize either fluid under pressure or
    a motor to operate either or both the follower or impeller.

    (1)     Note.  The motor may be of any type including those operated by
    fluid pressure and may directly operate the discharge assistants or it may
    operate devices which develop fluid pressure which in turn operates to
    apply pressure to the discharge assistant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261     through 263, for other combinations of plural discharge assistants
    with motors or utilizing fluids under pressure.

    333+,   and the notes thereto, for other motor combinations.

    394+,   and the notes thereto, for other fluid pressure combinations.


CLS 222/259
TXT Dispensers under subclass 257 in which the follower and the casing enclosed
    impeller are both (1) either arranged coaxially or with their axes parallel
    and (2) interconnected.

    (1)     Note.  The interconnection may be that the casing enclosed impeller
    is arranged to pass into or through an opening in the follower.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    260+,   for this subject matter where there is no interconnection between
    one of the discharge assistants and a movable nozzle, even though the
    nozzle is movably mounted on the dispenser.


CLS 222/260
TXT Dispensers under subclass 256 in which the follower and the casing enclosed
    impeller are both (1) coaxial or with their axes parallel and (2)
    interconnected.

    (1)     Note.  The interconnection may be that the casing enclosed impeller
    is arranged to pass into or through an opening in the follower.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259,    where there is also an interconnected movable nozzle.

    378,    for coaxially arranged outlet nozzle, supply container and single
    discharge assistant.


CLS 222/261
TXT Dispensers under subclass 260 which utilize either fluid under pressure or
    a motor to operate either or both the follower or impeller.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258,    and see the notes to the definition therof for related subject
    matter.


CLS 222/262
TXT Dispensers under subclass 256 utilizing either fluid under pressure or a
    motor to operate either or both the follower or impeller.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258,    and see the notes thereto for related subject matter.


CLS 222/263
TXT Dispensers under subclass 252 utilizing either fluid under pressure or a
    motor to operate one or more of the plural discharge assistants, or one or
    more fluid pressure discharge assistants.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258,    and see the notes thereto for related subject matter.


CLS 222/264
TXT Dispensers under subclass 252 having two or more co-axial rotors with
    axially opening trap chambers or a single rotor with two or more concentric
    rows of such trap chambers, so that two or more discharge paths for
    material are provided.

    (1)     Note.  Where there are co-axial rotors they may lie in the same
    plane, as one being an annulus surrounding the other.


CLS 222/265
TXT Dispensers under subclass 252 having plural discharge assistants all of
    which perform substantially the same function and have similar structure,
    so that the general effect is duplication of dispensing units.

    (1)     Note.  Such means may be of unitary structure where it provides
    plural separate discharge paths even though they all deliver to a common
    outlet, but a unitary device which both provides a single discharge path
    and delivers to a single outlet is classified as a single discharge
    assistant.

    (2)     Note.  Plural discharge assistants which are alternatively usable
    only may be considered to be in sets if they have similar structure.  If
    the structures are dissimilar, see subclasses 278+.

    (3)     Note.  Plural discharge assistants, even though they move in
    different directions, which are so related as to form a single outlet
    between them and thus move material therethrough in the same general
    direction are not considered to be in sets, see subclasses 280+.

    (4)     Note.  Discharge assistants having plural vanes or blades movable
    as a unit and all of which move the material in a single discharge path to
    a single outlet are not considered to be plural discharge assistants.

    (5)     Note.  A single rotor having plural vanes is regarded as being in
    sets only if each has a separate discharge outlet associated with it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278,    see note 2.

    280,    see note 3.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 426+ for receptacles provided
    with separable partition means which are applied to the receptacle to
    divide its contents into a plurality of measured charges.


CLS 222/266
TXT Dispensers under subclass 265 having means to prevent discharge from
    certain of the discharge assistants while others are in use, i.e., having
    some means by which the desired one or more discharge assistants are caused
    to be operative to discharge while the other one or more are prevented from
    causing discharge (whether maintained in motion or not).

    (1)     Note.  Individual discharge controllers for each outlet or
    discharge assistant path are not included, see subclasses 310+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278+,   for alternatively usable discharge assistants of different types,
    where the arrangement provides for discharging from one at a time only.
    Plural devices comprising a unitary rotor structure are ordinarily
    considered of similar types, even though the several devices have different
    characteristics.

    310+,   see note 1.


CLS 222/267
TXT Dispensers under subclass 265 in which unitary or interconnected means is
    provided for changing the discharge capacity of all the discharge
    assistants.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282+,   for discharge volume varying means for devices not arranged in sets
    and see the notes for other combinations having such means.


CLS 222/268
TXT Dispensers under subclass 267 in which the devices whose discharge volume
    is varied are rotors.


CLS 222/269
TXT Dispensers under subclass 265 having a supply receptacle having a sectional
    bottom or wall construction, each section being related to one of the
    discharge assistants.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270,    where miscellaneous means are provided within the supply
    receptacles for guiding material to the discharge assistant.

    329,    for movable or removable depending cups for discharge assistants of
    rotor form.


CLS 222/270
TXT Dispensers under subclass 265 having means within the supply receptacle for
    guiding material toward the adjacent discharge assistants.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    269,    for sectional walls related to the discharge assistant.

    328,    for similar guides for dispensers having single discharge
    assistants.


CLS 222/271
TXT Dispensers under subclass 265 in which the discharge assistants rotate each
    around its own axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233+    and 236+, for such subject matter having a serially arranged
    preceding agitator.

    282+,   particularly 293+, and 311+, for rotors with discharge volume
    varying means, the rotors not being arranged in sets.

    344+,   particularly subclasses 367+, for miscellaneous rotary conveyor
    type or movable trap chambers.

    410+,   for miscellaneous rotary discharge assistants (not of the conveyor
    type trap chamber or movable trap chamber type).


CLS 222/272
TXT Dispensers under subclass 271 having discharge assistants related as right
    hand and left hand members moving the material in opposite directions
    either toward the same outlet or simultaneously toward different outlets.

    (1)     Note.  Drum and cup type rotors having oppositely directed material
    contacting faces are not included, see subclasses 273+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273,    see note 1.

    280,    where plural discharge assistants form a single opening between
    them, and thus operate together to move material between them in the same
    general direction.


CLS 222/273
TXT Dispensers under subclass 271 in which the rotary devices are coaxial or
    substantially so.


CLS 222/274
TXT Dispensers under subclass 273 in which the rotary devices are substantially
    spaced along the common axis.


CLS 222/275
TXT Dispensers under subclass 265 in which the discharge assistants reciprocate
    (including oscillate).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243+,   for serially arranged devices, the first being an agitator, all
    having such motion.

    361+,   for conveyor type or movable trap chambers having such motion.

    409,    for miscellaneous discharge assistants having such motion.


CLS 222/276
TXT Dispensers under subclass 275 having unitary or rigidly connected discharge
    assistants forming a set.


CLS 222/277
TXT Dispensers under subclass 276 having a to and fro movement about an axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclasses 94+ and 115 for an oscillating weigh
    chamber.


CLS 222/278
TXT Dispensers under subclass 252 in which each of the plural discharge
    assistants is used or intended to be used by itself.

    (1)     Note.  These devices are usually separately usable depending upon
    the type of material placed in the dispenser, or to give a different mode
    of discharge of the same type of material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    265+,   for devices arranged in sets, note 2 of subclass 265 stating the
    line, subclass 266 having devices arranged in sets with means for selecting
    less than all for discharge.

    288,    for interchangeable, removable or selectively usable discharge
    assistants or elements and see the notes thereto for the line.


CLS 222/279
TXT Dispensers under subclass 278 having means such as removable or shiftable
    covers or baffles for preventing access of material to the discharge
    assistant that is not in use.


CLS 222/280
TXT Dispensers under subclass 252 having the plural devices forming the edges,
    walls, or borders of a single discharge outlet and all movable together to
    cause material motion through such single outlet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198,    for outlets bounded or formed by plural vibrating members.

    265,    for devices arranged in sets, and see note 3 for the line.


CLS 222/281
TXT Dispensers under subclass 280 in which the plural devices are all in the
    form of parallel rotary rolls (drums) of any cross sectional shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    271+,   for rotary sets, and see the notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 155+ for roll type presses, not elsewhere
    classified, for concurrently pressing and conveying material.


CLS 222/282
TXT Dispensers under subclass 251 having means to vary the output (discharge
    volume) from the discharge assistant for a given cycle of operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14+,    especially subclass 21, for preset means for selective dispensing
    of different volumes from a dispenser.

    134,    for dispenser involving plural sources and having interconnected
    discharge volume varying means.

    163,    for supply receptacles mounted for motion for discharge volume
    varying purposes.

    250,    for dispensers having a floating piston with plural or alternate
    discharge paths and discharge volume varying means.

    266,    where there are plural discharge assistants arranged in sets and
    discharge volume is varied by selecting less than all for discharge.

    267+,   where there are plural discharge assistants arranged in sets with
    common discharge volume varying means.

    278,    for plural alternatively usable discharge assistants which may
    discharge different volumes.

    434+,   for trap chamber cutoff combinations with discharge volume varying
    means, the trap chamber not being movable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 13+ for stroke varying means
    for expansible chamber devices.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, for a conveyor having means for
    controlling the flow of conveyed material, particularly subclasses 525+,
    577, 670, and 761.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 241+ for article dispensing devices
    having means to adjust the size of the device to accommodate different size
    articles, and subclasses 206+ for article dispensing devices having
    quantity preselection means included therewith.

    417,    Pumps, appropriate subclasses for pumps with capacity varying means.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 16+ for capacity
    varying means for rotary expansible chamber pumps.


CLS 222/283
TXT Dispensers under subclass 282 having two or more independent means for
    varying the discharge volume.

    (1)     Note.  Sectional devices, each part of which controls a
    corresponding part of the outlet are not considered plural. See appropriate
    following subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    486,    for plural discharge controllers for plural dispensing outlets
    variably related.


CLS 222/284
TXT Dispensers under subclass 282 having a plurality of conveyor type or
    movable trap chambers, usually joined, so arranged that discharge can be
    terminated after any desired number have been discharged. Endless and drum
    types are included when provided with detent means to check movement after
    a variable number of chambers have been discharged.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    436,    for nonmovable trap chambers in series for discharge volume varying.


CLS 222/285
TXT Dispensers under subclass 282 having (1) an element forming part of or
    carried by the source of supply and (2) a discharge assistant movable
    relatively to each other in a direction axial to the source outlet to widen
    the discharge path, place varying areas of the discharge assistant in
    operative position or otherwise vary the output.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163,    for supply receptacles mounted for movement for discharge volume
    varying purposes.


CLS 222/286
TXT Dispensers under subclass 285 having the section of the discharge conduit
    or receptacle adjacent the discharge assistant telescopically related to
    the main part for adjustment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 144+ for presses not elsewhere classified, in
    which material is concurrently compressed and conveyed.


CLS 222/287
TXT Dispensers under subclass 282 having a relatively movable actuator for the
    discharge assistant which embodies the output adjusting means.


CLS 222/288
TXT Dispensers under subclass 282 having a part or parts of the discharge
    assistant means exchangeable or removable bodily or to an inoperative
    relation or position to vary the output.

    (1)     Note.  The discharge assistant may have its capacity or its mode of
    operation changed, as from conveyor type trap chamber to conveyor type, but
    it remains in use as the discharge assistant, as distinguished from
    alternatively usable discharge assistants, where one goes out of use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278+,   for alternatively usable devices.


CLS 222/289
TXT Dispensers under subclass 288 in which the part or parts are reversible in
    their relation to the rest of the device to bring one of two alternatively
    usable elements into operation.  Mere shifting of a rotary or pivoted part
    about its usual axis is not considered reversibility.


CLS 222/290
TXT Dispensers under subclass 282 having a means for conveying material past
    the outlet and adjustably positioned means for deflecting a desired part of
    the material into the outlet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    408,    for similar structure having no volume varying means claimed.


CLS 222/291
TXT Dispensers under subclass 282 having a movable discharge assistant having
    blades or other projections which are alternatively projected from and
    withdrawn into the body of the discharge assistant as it moves, and means
    to vary the extent of maximum projection.


CLS 222/292
TXT Dispensers under subclass 282 having a rotary conveyor type discharge
    assistant or rotary trap chamber with radially movable projections or trap
    elements interconnected to be adjusted by a common means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    303,    for rotor parts having traps or grooves and a second rotor part
    having elements to block the traps or grooves, the two parts being
    relatively adjustable axially.


CLS 222/293
TXT Dispensers under subclass 282 in which there is a rotor, which is made up
    of at least two rotor parts, each rotary about the same axis, with means to
    relatively adjust the same to vary the discharge volume.

    (1)     Note.  These are of two general types, (1) those in which the two
    rotor parts extend radially about the same axis (including complete annuli)
    and swing or rotate about such axis for adjustment, and (2) those in which
    the two rotor parts are axially adjacent or spaced and move axially for
    adjustment.

    (2)     Note.  A rotor form element must be either (1) symmetrically
    disposed about the axis of the whole rotor, or (2) mounted on the axial
    support of the whole rotor.

    (3)     Note.  The adjustment is usually to either change a trap chamber
    size or to change the size of a material passage through or past the rotor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    268,    for sets of rotors with common discharge volume varying means.

    311+,   for rotors with discharge controllers acting as discharge volume
    varying means.

    367+,   for miscellaneous rotary trap chambers and see the notes thereto
    for other rotors.


CLS 222/294
TXT Dispensers under subclass 293 having the rotor form parts, each of
    generally disk or annular form, of substantially equal diameter and
    coaxial, and adjustable relative to each other by a motion of rotation
    about the axis of rotation to change the discharge volume.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302,    for disks adjustable linearly along the axis for volume adjusting
    purpose.


CLS 222/295
TXT Dispensers under subclass 293 having the rotor form parts adjustable
    relatively to each other linearly in the direction of the axis of rotation
    to vary the discharge volume.


CLS 222/296
TXT Dispensers under subclass 295 comprising a disk rotor having a face
    contacting the material and a rotor member having pins which project
    through or past the disk in the direction of the axis of rotation, at least
    a portion of the pins being in the material passage formed in part by the
    material contacting face of the disk, the pins and disk being relatively
    axially adjustable.

    (1)     Note.  The pins may have any shape in cross-section.


CLS 222/297
TXT Dispensers under subclass 295 having one rotor part of a generally cup
    shape, with the material discharge path along the inner wall of the cup,
    the cup rotating about its center on a horizontal axis, the cup volume
    being varied by an axially adjustable rotor part.

    (1)     Note.  The cup may be divided into plural pockets.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315,    for horizontal axis cup rotors having a discharge controller to
    vary discharge volume.


CLS 222/298
TXT Dispensers under subclass 295 having at least one grooved or trap carrying
    rotor part bodily movable in and/or through a discharge channel and
    relative to another rotor part so as to vary either (1) the area available
    for passage of the material or (2) the character of the means acting on the
    material to produce discharge.


CLS 222/299
TXT Dispensers under subclass 298 having means associated with axially
    adjustable rotor parts to block the portion of the discharge channel not
    directing material to or from the discharge effecting portion of the rotor.

    (1)     Note.  Such channel blocking means is not independent of the
    slidable rotor part and usually is movable an amount proportionate to the
    slidable adjusting motion thereof.


CLS 222/300
TXT Dispensers under subclass 299 having the channel blocking means comprising
    in part at least a sleeve which does not rotate.

    (1)     Note.  The sleeve is usually slidably adjustable.


CLS 222/301
TXT Dispensers under subclass 298 in which one rotor part is peripherally
    fluted and another is a correspondingly interiorly fluted annular disk-like
    member, the interior flutes of which interfit with the peripheral flutes,
    the annular disk bearing on the stationary structure and closing the space
    between it and the first rotor part (to thereby prevent material leakage).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    299     and 300, in which search must be completed.


CLS 222/302
TXT Dispensers under subclass 295 in which the axially adjustable rotor parts
    each have at least one material passage extending therethrough in alignment
    with each other and parallel to the axis of rotation.

    (1)     Note.  The two material passages generally have telescopic
    interengagement so that relative axial adjustment changes the volume of the
    passage, the passage functioning as a trap chamber, receiving material at
    one location and discharging it at another. Usually the two rotor elements
    are constructed to have plural such chambers which sequentially fill at one
    location and discharge at another.


CLS 222/303
TXT Dispensers under subclass 295 in which one rotor part has either (1) one or
    more trap chambers therein, or (2) peripheral grooves, and the second
    relatively adjustable rotor part has one or more elements to block or fill
    such trap chambers or grooves to different extents to vary their volume
    upon relative axial adjustment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    292,    for related structures where the relative motion is radial of the
    rotor.


CLS 222/304
TXT Dispensers under subclass 303 in which the relative axial adjustment is
    between a single trap chamber coaxial of one rotor part and an axially
    adjustable wall or block forming the other rotor part.


CLS 222/305
TXT Dispensers under subclass 282 having means for varying either the actual or
    the effective capacity of material traps of the conveyor or movable chamber
    type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    344+,   for conveyor type or movable trap chambers not having volume
    adjusting means.


CLS 222/306
TXT Dispensers under subclass 305 having trap chambers with a single opening
    for both the entrance and discharge of the material received from the
    supply and having only the wall opposite the opening, i.e., the bottom of
    the trap chamber, adjustable to vary the capacity of the trap chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    444,    and see the notes thereto, for other trap chambers having
    inflow-outflow passages.


CLS 222/307
TXT Dispensers under subclass 305 having at least one wall of the trap chamber
    adjustable by bodily inward or outward movement to the same extent in all
    its parts to vary the capacity of the trap chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304,    for axial pocket rotary trap chambers having an adjustable wall to
    vary the capacity.

    440,    for straight line motion adjustable walls for stationary trap
    chambers.


CLS 222/308
TXT Dispensers under subclass 307 having the wall adjustable by screw means.


CLS 222/309
TXT Dispensers under subclass 282 in which a pump, piston, pulsator or follower
    is caused to move through a chamber to eject or force material the volume
    delivered being varied by adjusting a stop means which limits the motion of
    the forcing device or the position of the ejecting means with reference to
    a stationary stop.

    (1)     Note.  There may be plural spaced stops selectively movable to
    operative position, which plural stops may, in addition, be individually
    adjustable, or there may be a single adjustable stop means.  Such stop
    means may be carried or supported in any way to perform their function, as
    on the frame, container, or movable forcer element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250,    for discharge volume varying means including adjustable stop, for
    floating pistons having plural or alternate discharge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 429, for measuring vessels having
    adjustable bottoms but in which the bottom is not adapted to force the
    material from the container.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 13+ for stroke adjusting
    means for expansible chamber devices.


CLS 222/310
TXT Dispensers under subclass 282 having the discharge capacity varied by means
    of movable gates, valves, or other discharge controller.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    417,    and the subclasses following the same, for dispensers having gates,
    valves, closures, and other discharge controllers in various combinations
    not involving a discharge assistant.


CLS 222/311
TXT Dispensers under subclass 310 having a rotary discharge assistant and a
    discharge controller for varying the discharge volume by relative
    adjustment therebetween.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the preceding subclasses indented under subclass 282
    have rotors with other types of discharge volume varying means, all
    conveyor type or movable trap chambers with trap capacity varying means
    being in preceding subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282,    see note 1 above.

    367+,   and see the notes thereto for other rotary conveyor type and
    movable trap chambers.

    410+,   and see the notes thereto for other rotary discharge assistants.


CLS 222/312
TXT Dispensers under subclass 311 having the variable material passage between
    a drum type rotor and the discharge controller.


CLS 222/313
TXT Dispensers under subclass 312 having the discharge controller urged toward
    a desired position by spring, weights or other biasing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    511+,   and see the notes to the definition thereof for biased flow
    controllers in other combinations.


CLS 222/314
TXT Dispensers under subclass 312 having a nonpivoted discharge controller
    movable in a single plane toward and from the rotor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    351,    for a similarly movable element forming a striking or clearing
    element for a conveyor type trap chamber.


CLS 222/315
TXT Dispensers under subclass 311 in which the rotary discharge assistant is of
    cup shape rotating on a horizontal axis, material flow being from the
    supply to the interior of the cup to discharge, the discharge controller
    varying the size of the material passage inside the cup to vary discharge
    volume.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    297,    for discharge assistants of this type having axially adjustable
    rotor parts for varying the discharge volume.


CLS 222/316
TXT Dispensers under subclass 311 having the discharge controller made up of
    two or more sections each controlling part of the discharge path.

    (1)     Note.  The sections are usually independently biased or adjusted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    502+,   for miscellaneous dispensers having sectional discharge controllers.


CLS 222/317
TXT Dispensers under subclass 311 having the discharge controller in advance of
    the rotor, i.e., on the side of the rotor that receives material to be
    dispensed.

    (1)     Note.  The discharge controller usually is adjustable relative to a
    container wall to vary the size of the passage leading to the rotor.


CLS 222/318
TXT Dispensers under subclass 251 in which material being dispensed may be
    by-passed around the pump, forcer, movable trap chamber or other discharge
    assistant, either (1) from the inlet side thereof to the discharge side
    thereof, (2) from the discharge side thereof back to the inlet side, (3)
    from the discharge side back to the supply, or (4) any combination of the
    preceding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for volume or rate of flow meter by-pass arrangements.

    108+,   for drip, leakage, or waste catching or disposal, including return
    to supply.

    330+,   for discharge assistants having plural outlets not involving a
    by-pass or return to supply.

    345+,   for striking and clearing means for conveyor type and movable trap
    chambers.

    375,    for miscellaneous casing enclosed discharge assistants and provided
    with antileak or antisiphon means.

    424,    for miscellaneous dispensers not having discharge assistants
    provided with means to return material to the supply.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 563+ for closed circulation type
    distribution systems subclass 569 for pump by-passes; subclasses 599+ for
    by-passes in fluid handling systems.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 159+ for article dispensing devices
    including means to orient the dispensed articles and having means to return
    to supply such articles as are not properly oriented.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 90 and 124+
    for spraying systems having means to bypass some of the fluid back to the
    supply, or to vent the system by permitting the fluid to escape to the
    atmosphere other than through the usual spray outlet.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclass 105 for by-pass means around
    the fan.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 279+ and 440+ for pumps with by-pass valves.


CLS 222/319
TXT Dispensers under subclass 251 in which the outlet for material to be
    dispensed from a supply receptacle or trap chamber is above the material
    surface level thereof, and there are structural means (as distinguished
    from fluids) which enters the mass of material in a supply receptacle, with
    a resultant displacement of a volume of material equal to the volume of
    that portion of the structural means that has entered the material, and
    thus cause the upper surface of the material to rise to or above the level
    of the outlet to overflow for discharge or for a step preliminary to
    discharge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    373,    for devices which introduce a liquid into contact with the material
    in a trap chamber to displace the material.

    395,    for devices which introduce liquid into a supply chamber into
    contact with the material to displace the same.

    405,    for miscellaneous discharge assistants which cause discharge from
    the top of the supply.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclass 14, for such means for
    feeding water to acetylene generators.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 101.11 for such means in a fluid handling
    system.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 245 for such means associated with filling apparatus.


CLS 222/320
TXT Dispensers under subclass 251 in which (1) the nozzle is connected to and
    bodily movable with a follower, (2) the nozzle is movable relative to the
    dispenser container and coacts with an element stationary relative to the
    dispenser container to cause forced discharge (as the movable nozzle
    constitutes a part of a pump or pulsator), (3) the nozzle is movable
    relative to the dispenser container and is interconnected in any way with a
    discharge assistant so that motion of the nozzle is necessary for or occurs
    because of motion of the discharge assistant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257+,   for this subject matter where there is claimed both (1) a follower
    and (2) a casing enclosed impeller.

    526+,   and see the notes thereto for movable nozzles not claimed in
    combination with discharge assistants.


CLS 222/321.1
TXT With material supply container and discharge assistant casing:

    Subject matter under the subclass 320 wherein the movable nozzle and
    interconnected discharge assistant are associated with a casing, and there
    is a container supplying a material to such casing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252+,   for plural discharge assistants.


CLS 222/321.2
TXT With precompression:

    Subject matter under subclass 321.1 including means for preventing a flow
    of material from the discharge assistant until a predetermined discharge
    pressure is reached.


CLS 222/321.3
TXT With antileak or antisiphon means:

    Subject matter under subclass 321.1 including means to prevent leakage of
    the material from a discharge passage or  means to prevent siphoning
    following the operation of the discharge assistant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for a volume or rate of flow metering with a by-pass, gas
    separation or anti-siphon means.

    73,     for a volume or rate of flow metering with means for relieving or
    maintaining hose pressure.

    108+,   for means for catching or disposing of leakage, drip, or waste,
    including those which also return the same to the supply.

    318,    for means for by-passing a discharge assistant or for returning
    material from the discharge side thereof to the supply.

    424,    for a miscellaneous dispenser having means to return material to
    the supply.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 215+ for a back flow or siphon
    preventing in fluid handling system.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 245 for an article dispensing device
    having a return stroke inhibiting means (i.e., full stroke-mechanism).

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 34 for a reverse flow
    prevention in fluid pressure type servo-motor valve actuator.


CLS 222/321.4
TXT With plural-point inlet to casing:

    Subject matter under subclass 321.1 wherein there is a structure provided
    for  inlet of the material from the supply container  to discharge
    assistant casing from at least two spaced points.

    (1)     Note.  This may be by providing plural inlet pipes or a single
    inlet pipe which may move from place to place within the dispenser due to
    flexibility or joints or any other means or which may have plural openings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    381,    for a movable discharge assistant casing which does not position
    the inlets at plural points.


CLS 222/321.5
TXT Inlet trap (e.g., sump):

    Subject matter under subclass 321.1 wherein an inlet to the discharge
    assistant casing extends into a supplemental chamber communicating with the
    supply container.

    (1)     Note.  The trap chamber may be formed by walls within the supply
    container, or by a depression in the bottom wall of the container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    328,    for a material discharge guide on the container side of the outlet.


CLS 222/321.6
TXT Aligned discharge assistant, actuator, container and nozzle:

    Subject matter under subclass 321.1 wherein the discharge assistant, an
    actuating means on the discharge assistant, the container and the nozzle
    are arranged substantially coaxially.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259     and 260+, for a similar arrangement involving more than one
    discharge assistant.

    510,    for a container having an oulet element in one wall and the
    actuator therefor passing through the container interior and another wall.


CLS 222/321.7
TXT Container-mounted pump:

    Subject matter under subclass 321.1 wherein the encased discharge assistant
    is a pump which is mounted on the supply container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    382,    for a pump mounted on a supply container and having an internally
    extending pipe constituting an extension of the pump or the pulsator inlet.


CLS 222/321.8
TXT With relatively movable actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 321.7 including an actuator for the pump
    which is mounted for a relative movement with respect to a nozzle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 272+ for an article dispenser having
    discharge assisting means with a relatively movable actuator.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses for valve operating
    mechanisms (e.g., mechanical movement actuators for valves, subclasses
    213+; lever actuated, subclasses 231+; geared, subclasses 248+; cam
    actuated, subclasses 251+; toggle actuated, subclasses 280; push or pull
    button, subclasses 319+).


CLS 222/321.9
TXT Pump casing within supply container:

    Subject matter under subclass 321.7 wherein a casing or cylinder of the
    pump is located within the supply container.


CLS 222/322
TXT Dispensers under subclass 251 in which an actuator for a movable dispenser
    part projects through the dispenser outlet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149+,   for cleaning elements extending through the dispenser outlet.

    402.1+, particularly subclass 402.25 for dispensers with a fluid pressure
    discharge assistant which have a valve closing an opening for material
    which is opened by motion of an actuator extending through the opening,
    such opening not being the dispenser outlet discharging to atmosphere.

    501,    for such actuators for dispensers not having discharge assistants.


CLS 222/323
TXT Dispensers under subclass 251 claiming a handle or handgrip connected to
    the supply container and by means of which the dispenser may be handled.

    (1)     Note.  The handle must be secured to the dispensing container for
    handling the container.  The handles which are for operation of the
    discharge assistant means and/or its controls but not for handling the
    container are not included except when in combination with a container
    handle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     for devices of this type simulating a firearm.

    210,    for this subject matter associated with resilient wall dispensers.

    384,    for pump or pulsator handles held against motion in a position to
    serve as handles for the supply containers.

    402,    for handles for operating fluid pressure generating pumps and
    pulsators and capable of use as container handles when held against motion.

    441,    for this subject matter associated with trap chambers having
    cutoffs, there being no discharge assistant.

    465.1+, for miscellaneous dispensers having this subject matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 185 for body supported article
    dispensing devices including specific handle arrangements.


CLS 222/324
TXT Dispensers under subclass 323 in which the handle is associated with a
    combination which includes a material supply container which delivers
    material to a casing, the discharge assistant being associated with the
    casing.


CLS 222/325
TXT Dispensers under subclass 251 in which the container for the material to be
    dispensed is so related to the rest of the dispenser organization that it
    is separable therefrom (leaving the remaining portions in substantially
    normal operative relation) for either refilling or to be replaced by a full
    container.

    (1)     Note.  A frame (carrying the nongravity discharge assistant or
    movable trap chamber) and comprising more than a mere closure for the
    separable container, into or from which the material container may be
    inserted or removed is included.

    (2)     Note. A cartridge is an auxiliary container to be inserted within
    another container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95+,    where the inserted cartridge or container, is of the collapsible
    wall type designed to expel material when the wall is collapsed.

    131,    for dispensers with spaced jackets not for the sole purpose of
    receiving a separable supply container or cartridge.

    182     and 183, for dispensers having enclosures or jackets not for the
    sole purpose of receiving a separable supply container or cartridge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 46+ for article dispensers of the
    napkin holder type having removable supply magazines associated therewith,
    subclasses 197+ for article dispensers having supply cartridges or
    containers removable from enclosing casings, and subclass 287 for article
    dispensers in which the container enclosing the articles and comprising a
    source of supply is removable from the remainder of the dispensing device.


CLS 222/326
TXT Dispensers under subclass 325 in which a follower is included in the
    dispenser organization with which the separable supply container or
    cartridge is associated, which follower operates to expel the contents of
    the container or cartridge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    386+,   for containers or cartridges having followers, the features for
    this subclass (326) not being claimed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 198 for article dispensers having
    removable supply cartridges or containers with followers operating therein.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclass 135, wherein the
    implement includes an insertable, frangible-wall reservoir having a piston
    movable to force material into the reservoir or from the reservoir to the
    applying tool; and see the search notes to subclass 386 of this class (222).


CLS 222/327
TXT Dispensers under subclass 326 in which the follower forms part of the
    separable supply container or cartridge assembly.


CLS 222/328
TXT Dispensers under subclass 251 having means in addition to the necessary
    wall structure of the supply container on the container or supply side of
    the discharge assistant to guide material thereto for discharge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266,    for covers for units of a set of discharge assistants.

    270,    for interior guide structure related to discharge assistants
    arranged in sets.

    279,    for guides constituting removable or shiftable baffles or covers
    for discharge assistants not in use.

    547,    for interior guide structure related only to dispensers having
    outlets with flow controllers or closures.

    564,    for miscellaneous interior guides.


CLS 222/329
TXT Dispensers under subclass 251 in which the material guides are removable or
    movable shaped casings for guiding material to rotary discharge assistants
    located below the main receptacle body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    269,    for supply containers having a lower wall composed of separable
    sections, each relating to or mounting one of a set of discharge assistants.


CLS 222/330
TXT Dispensers under subclass 251 having more than one outlet for material at
    least one being on the discharge side of a single discharge assistant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249+,   for floating pistons having plural or alternate discharge.

    478+,   for miscellaneous dispensers having plural outlets, there being no
    discharge assistant claimed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 262 for fluid handling means comprising
    flow dividing compartments; subclasses 597 and 861+ for distribution
    systems having plural outlets.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 252 for article dispensing devices
    having discharge assisting means and plural outlets for the articles
    dispensed.


CLS 222/331
TXT Dispensers under subclass 330 having at least two of the plural outlets of
    different character.

    (1)     Note.  For example, there may be a gravity discharge outlet in
    addition to the outlet for the discharge assistant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    318,    for plural outlets, one of which is a by-pass or return to supply
    passage.


CLS 222/332
TXT Dispensers under subclass 251 in which there is a vent passage for a
    movable trap chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    478+,   for miscellaneous dispensers with vent passages, and see the notes
    thereto for other dispensers with vent passages.


CLS 222/333
TXT Dispensers under subclass 251 having a motor to operate same.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14+,    where there is means to stop feed due to operation of a selectively
    preset volume or rate of flow responsive mechanism.

    23+,    for recorder, register, indicator, signal, or exhibitor
    combinations.

    52+,    especially subclass 63 for dispensers in which the motor is
    automatically controlled.

    70,     for timing mechanism combinations.

    74+,    for motors having an interlock or interconnection with a hose or
    other discharge guide.

    76,     for motors with nonautomatic electrical controls

    178,    for ambulant support-motor combinations.

    252+,   where one or more of plural discharge assistants are motor operated.

    504,    for dispensers outlet element-motor combinations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 258 for article dispensers having
    motor operated discharge assisting means.

    291,    Track Sanders, subclass 20 for electric motor operated sanders.


CLS 222/334
TXT Dispensers under subclass 333 in which the motor is operated by fluid under
    pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    184,    Lubrication, subclass 29 for fluid pressure operated pumps for
    lubricators.

    291,    Track Sanders, subclass 24 for fluid motor operated sanders.


CLS 222/335
TXT Dispensers under subclass 251 in which there is a discharge assistant which
    is actuated by the pressure of the material being dispensed, or by suction
    on such material, the pressure of suction creating means not being claimed.

    (1)     Note.  The discharge assistant may be moved by the pressure of
    material and also require additional actuation (as manually) to cause
    discharge assisting function.

    (2)     Note.  The pressure on the material may fill a trap chamber, and
    thereafter operate on a piston to cause the piston to move and force the
    material from the trap chamber.

    (3)     Note.  Valve or closure elements on the interior of the receptacle
    caused to move toward closing position due to pressure on the contents and
    thus push material through the outlet are included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92+,    for patents which claim characteristics of the collapsible wall or
    means for collapsing the same.

    249+,   for floating piston devices operated by material pressure.

    252+,   where a second means for creating pressure on the contents is
    claimed.

    322,    where means for operating the discharge assistant extends through
    the dispensing outlet.

    491+,   where the valve or closure does not push material through the
    outlet due to motion caused by pressure of the material.


CLS 222/336
TXT Dispensers under subclass 251 in which there are biasing means of spring or
    other form for moving to a desired position, either (1) the discharge
    assistant or (2) its enclosing casing.

    (1)     Note.  Under section (1) of the above definition, the biasing means
    must act to move the discharge assistant to operative (discharging) or
    nonoperative (nondischarging) position.   Biasing means operating on
    movable parts but not having such function are not included.

    (2)     Note.  For section (2) of the above definition, see the definition
    of subclass 337.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    337,    see note (2) above.

    394+,   for biasing means for fluid pressure generating pumps and pulsators.

    407,    for biased deformable discharge assistant elements, the biasing
    means not operating as in note (1) above.

    511+,   for biasing means for dispenser outlet elements, such as movable
    nozzles, valves, closures, or other flow controllers.

    581     and 582, for a dispensing inkwell including a dip well which is a
    movable trap chamber biased toward resetting position; and see the search
    notes to these subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    184,    Lubrication, subclasses 45.1+ and 46, for lubricators with spring
    and weight operated followers.


CLS 222/337
TXT Dispensers under subclass 336 in which the biasing means has the sole
    function of increasing the resistance to material flow through a joint
    (contacting surfaces) between two relatively movable parts.

    (1)     Note.  Where the biasing means has either the sole function of
    moving the movable part to operative (discharging) or nonoperative
    (nondischarging) position, or has such function in addition to the joint
    sealing function, see subclass 336 or other appropriate indented subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    512,    for mere outlet structures with joint sealing biasing means.


CLS 222/338
TXT Dispensers under subclass 337 in which one or more of the walls for
    enclosing the discharge assistant is biased by spring or other means to
    engage the discharge assistant closely.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    345+,   for a mere lip or attachment for leveling or striking off the
    charge in a trap chamber to prevent the passage of surplus material from
    the supply container.  These may be biased, but do not enclose the trap
    chamber.


CLS 222/339
TXT Dispensers under subclass 336 in which the device biased has a motion of
    oscillation about its axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    516,    for biased rotary outlet structures.

    517,    for oscillating outlet elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 257.072 for an
    inkwell which includes penpoint-actuated diaphragm means for forcing ink
    into a dip cup which is not a trap chamber because it is incapable of
    retaining the ink after cessation of the applied force.


CLS 222/340
TXT Dispensers under subclass 336 in which the device is either a piston or a
    follower type impeller having a reciprocating motion and operating in
    either the supply receptacle or in a casing which receives material from
    the supply container, so that motion of the piston or follower applies
    pressure to the material to cause discharge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    336,    for reciprocating piston form conveyors or movable trap chambers,
    including movable trap chambers in the form of a stem having plural
    concentric enlargements thereon.

    372+,   for supply receptacles delivering to casings having pistons or
    followers therein, no biasing means for causing piston or follower motion
    being claimed.

    386+,   for receptacles having followers therein, there being no biasing
    means for causing follower motion being claimed.

    449,    for trap chamber cutoffs with biasing means.

    518,    for biased, reciprocable outlet elements such as valves, nozzles,
    closures, etc.

    582,    for a dispensing inkwell including a discharge assistant which is
    biased toward a resetting position following an actuating stroke, usually
    in the direction of the supply.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 276 for article dispensers having
    spring biased reciprocating discharge assisting means, and subclass 271 for
    similar devices in which the reciprocating discharge assistant is spring
    biased to a discharging position.


CLS 222/341
TXT Dispensers under subclass 340 in which at least one biasing means is within
    a chamber or passage containing material to be dispensed.


CLS 222/342
TXT Dispensers under subclass 251 having means for cleaning, scraping or wiping
    the discharge assistant or means carried by the discharge assistant for
    cleaning, scraping or wiping the adjacent parts of its casing or the
    discharge path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148+,   for cleaning means operating independently of the discharge
    assistant or for cleaning the supply container, material discharge guide or
    receiver.

    216+,   for agitators and/or ejectors for removing material from conveyors
    having trap chambers or grooves or from movable trap chambers of any kind.

    345+,   for conveyor type or movable trap chamber striking or clearing
    means.

    636,    for fluid flow discharge for movable conveyor type trap chambers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 494+ for a conveyor having
    installed as part of its structure a means for cleaning a component of the
    conveyor.


CLS 222/343
TXT Dispensers under subclass 251 having projecting parts of the discharge
    assistant following a path variable with respect to other parts, to
    increase and decrease the extent of projection.  The purpose is to
    facilitate picking up and discharging material, not to vary the discharge
    volume.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 270 for article dispensers having
    reciprocating discharge assistants having retractable pusher elements.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 259+ for rotary
    expansible chamber devices of the positively actuated vane type and
    subclass 270, for similar devices in which the vane is not actuated or
    biased.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282+,   for discharge assistants having discharge volume varying means and
    especially subclass 291 for devices similar to those having volume varying
    function.


CLS 222/344
TXT Dispensers under subclass 251 having a chamber so constructed and related
    to the supply as to receive material therefrom, which chamber is movable
    mounted relative to the supply.  The material in the trap chamber is
    isolated from the supply either by the relative movement of the supply and
    trap chambers or by special means as flow controllers, closures, etc.

    (1)     Note.  A conveyor type trap chamber functions to convey (translate)
    the material from the inlet from the supply to a spaced outlet while some
    are movable chambers which, when moved to one position, permit material
    flow thereinto from the supply and in a second position cut off the supply
    and permit discharge.  The isolation of material must be accompanied by the
    motion of the trap chamber relative to the supply, and the trapped material
    must be either discharged or made accessible for use.  The isolation may be
    accomplished by the travel of the trap chamber beyond a wall of a casing or
    supply container, by removal beyond the point where the angle of repose of
    the material in the supply is established, preventing further flow into the
    trap chamber, or by raising the chamber above the level of the material in
    the supply container.

    (2)     Note.  Many conveyor type or movable trap chambers are provided for
    in preceding subclasses in other combinations, some of these being
    specially noted below.

    (3)     Note.  Movable trap chamber structures (designated as segregating
    chambers) may be found in Class 221, Article Dispensing.  In many instances
    the structure and mode of operation is entirely similar.  A statement of
    the line between the classes, outlining the specific disposition of the
    art, is included in section VI of the Class definition of Class 221.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135+,   for conveyor type of movable trap chambers where there are plural
    sources, compartments, receptacles and/or with spaced jacket, not serially
    arranged in the dispensing path.

    160+,   where the supply receptacle is movably mounted.

    216+,   where an agitator receptacle or ejector operates to remove material
    from the trap chambers.

    226+,   where there is a serially precedent agitator.

    252+,   where there are plural conveyor type or movable trap chambers or
    combinations with other discharge assistants.

    282+,   where there is discharge volume varying means.

    332,    where there is a vent passage.

    336+,   where there is a biasing means.

    425+,   which have nonmovable trap chambers (i.e., trap chambers which do
    not require motion to trap material, though they may be movable for mere
    adjustment purposes) and which have valves or other cut-offs to control
    inflow of material from a source and/or discharge of material. Chambers
    having movable wall parts which perform a definite material conveying
    (translating) motion are in subclass 344 and indented subclasses, as are
    chambers which move and substantially completely surround the trapped
    material, as distinguished from chambers which are stationary and merely
    have valves or other cut-off elements which move to permit entry and/or
    discharge of material from the trap chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 217 through 226, for tank type
    volume or rate of flow meters.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 110+ and 358 for devices including scoop, drawer, or tube type
    devices which must be removed from the supply container for discharge of
    material therefrom.

    184,    Lubrication, subclasses 61+ for conveyor type lubricators.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 263+ for article dispensing devices
    having movable segregating chamber structures. See (3) Note, above.


CLS 222/345
TXT Dispensers under subclass 344 in which either (1) the supply container wall
    adjacent the trap inlet is modified to level or strike off surplus material
    in the trap chamber as it moves away from the bulk of material, or (2) in
    which an attachment is provided for this purpose.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     for cutter combinations, and see the Note referring to this
    subclass (345) for the line.

    108+,   for drip, leakage, or waste catching or disposal including return
    of same to the supply.

    148+,   for cleaning means for dispenser parts other than discharge
    assistants see Note 1 stating the line.

    216+,   for agitators or ejectors for removing material from movable trap
    chambers.

    342,    for scrapers or wipers for or carried by a discharge assistant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 218+ for a molding machine for nonmetals with means for striking
    off excess stock material from a mold inlet.


CLS 222/346
TXT Dispensers under subclass 345 having striking or clearing means located
    within the supply container but removed from the point where the material
    separated by the conveyor trap leaves the bulk of the material.


CLS 222/347
TXT Dispensers under subclass 345 having unitary or interconnected striking or
    clearing means operable both at the point where the movable trap chamber
    leaves the supply chamber and where it re-enters.

    (1)     Note.  Some of these are for use with plural oppositely acting trap
    chambers which are not claimed.


CLS 222/348
TXT Dispensers under subclass 345 having the striking or clearing means made up
    of relatively movable sections each cooperating with a portion of the trap
    chamber pathway.


CLS 222/349
TXT Dispensers under subclass 345 having the striking or clearing means either
    movably mounted or formed of yieldable material to be movable from its
    normal position.

    (1)     Note.  This is usually to allow the passage of pieces of material
    too large to be received in the trap chambers or which for other reasons
    are caught between the striking or clearing means and the moving trap
    chamber element.


CLS 222/350
TXT Dispensers under subclass 349 having pivoted striking or clearing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223,    for this subject matter combined with a pivoted ejector to remove
    material from movable trap chambers.


CLS 222/351
TXT Dispensers under subclass 349 having nonpivoted striking or clearing means
    movable in its own plane toward and from the trap chamber element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    314,    for discharge controllers adjustable to vary discharge volume
    mounted for similar motion.


CLS 222/352
TXT Dispensers under subclass 349 having a striking or clearing means
    comprising a brushlike structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, for brushes used in
    other combinations and for brush structure, per se.


CLS 222/353
TXT Dispensers under subclass 344 in which the flow from the main receptacle to
    the movable trapping chamber is (1) of the barometric control type, or (2)
    is of the type where solid material in the trapping chamber builds up to
    its angle of repose and stops flow from the main chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    437,    for nonmovable barometric or angle of repose trap chambers with
    means to adjust the cut-off point to vary the volume trapped.

    457,    for miscellaneous combinations between a supply and a barometric or
    angle of repose trap chamber, and see the notes for related art.

    479,    for containers having plural, coterminous openings (usually tubular
    spouts), many of which are disclosed as operating on a barometric principle
    when used to deliver to an unclaimed receptacle.


CLS 222/354
TXT Devices under subclass 344 in which there is a cut-off for either or both
    the inlet to the trap chamber or the outlet from the trap chamber, which is
    carried by the trap chamber element to move therewith and also so mounted
    and operated as to move relative to the trap chamber element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    355,    for trap chamber operated cut-offs, not carried by the trap chamber.

    425+,   for cut-offs associated with trap chambers other than the movable
    type.


CLS 222/355
TXT Devices under subclass 344 in which there is a cut-off for a material
    passage which is interconnected with the trap chamber or its operating
    means to be caused to assume its open or closed position upon operation of
    the trap chamber.

    (1)     Note.  The interconnection may be merely that some element carried
    by the trap chamber engages the cut-off to operate it due to trap chamber
    motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    354,    for trap chamber carried cut-offs.


CLS 222/356
TXT Dispensers under subclass 344 in which the trap chamber, other than the
    rotary or endless belt types, is dipped below the surface of the contents
    of the chamber for filling and is raised to a position with its inlet above
    the surface before discharge.

    (1)     Note.  See section 13 of the main class definition for notes on
    related dipping and sampling art in other classes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    367+,   for similarly operating rotors.

    371,    for similarly operating endless belt carried chambers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 110+ and 358 for devices including those of chamber form for
    obtaining material from a supply container and completely separable
    therefrom for discharge.


CLS 222/357
TXT Dispensers under subclass 356 in which the trap chamber has motion about a
    plurality of axes or has other combined motions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 262 for article dispensers having
    discharge assistants (including trap chamber structures) having compound
    motions.


CLS 222/358
TXT Dispensers under subclass 356 in which the trap chamber moves about a
    single axis eccentric to the center or axis of such chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    367+,   for dipping rotors.


CLS 222/359
TXT Dispensers under subclass 344 in which the actuating means is so connected
    to the conveyor type or movable trap chamber as to move relative thereto
    when operated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177,    for dispensers having ambulant supporting means and means
    interconnected with a ground engaging wheel to operate a dispensing means.

    179,    for dispensers having pedal operated dispensing means.

    333+,   and see the notes thereto for motor operated movable dispensing
    parts.

    336+,   for combinations involving biasing means.

    505+,   for movable nozzles, valves, closures, etc., with relatively
    movable actuating means.


CLS 222/360
TXT Dispensers under subclass 359 in which the relatively movable actuating
    means imparts step-by-step rotary motion to the conveyor type or movable
    trap chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    367+,   for other rotary conveyor type trap chambers and see the notes
    thereto.


CLS 222/361
TXT Dispensers under subclass 344 in which the movable trap chamber or trap
    forming elements are reciprocated between supply and discharge positions to
    control the material flow and transport the trapped material relatively to
    the supply container.

    (1)     Note.  In the case of two rigidly connected reciprocating
    trap-forming members the passage from the supply container to the dispenser
    outlet must cooperate with the members to prevent continuous flow in the
    normal and intended operation of the dispenser.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137,    for combinations involving plural sources, compartments or
    receptacles.

    164+,   for tilting supply containers.

    216+,   for combinations with an agitator or ejector to remove material
    from the trap chamber.

    233+    and 243+, for combinations with a precedent, serially arranged
    agitator.

    275+,   for plural devices arranged in sets.

    282+,   for combinations with discharge volume varying means.

    336+,   for combinations with biasing means.

    356+,   for nonreciprocating dipping trap chamber type.

    409,    for reciprocating discharge assistants not of trap chamber type.

    559+,   and see the notes thereto for reciprocable flow controllers or
    closures.

    583,    for a dispensing inkwell including a movable trap chamber which is
    a dip well immersible in the supply for filling and elevatable to a
    position accessible to a penpoint.


CLS 222/362
TXT Dispensers under subclass 361 in which the trap chamber element is pivoted
    to move about an axis.

    (1)     Note.  For the most part, the axis is eccentric to the center or
    axis of the trap chamber or plural trap chamber assembly, but may be
    coaxial therewith where there are means restricting the same to oscillation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    367+,   for trap chambers which are pivoted to rotate about their own axis
    and for plural trap chambers radially disposed about a common axis, where
    the trap chamber is capable of continuous rotation in the same direction.


CLS 222/363
TXT Dispensers under subclass 362 in which the pivoted trap chamber has a
    single opening which serves both as an inlet and outlet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    366,    for other single inlet-outlet reciprocating trap chambers.

    368+,   for rotary trap chambers with single inlet-outlet.

    444,    and see the notes thereto for other trap chambers having single
    inflow-outflow passages.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 266 for article dispensers having
    movable trap chamber structures of the single inlet-outlet type.


CLS 222/364
TXT Dispensers under subclass 363 having the pivot of the movable trap lying in
    the trap chamber rim.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    531+,   for related movable discharging guide structures not having
    material trapping features.


CLS 222/365
TXT Dispensers under subclass 361 having the trap forming members consisting of
    a stem connecting the central portions of bodies capable of filling the
    chamber to close off the material holding part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    453,    for stems having cut-off enlargements thereon which do not function
    to convey (shift) the material.

    476,    for spaced alternately seated cut-offs for a single outlet.


CLS 222/366
TXT Dispensers under subclass 361 in which the trap chamber has a single
    passage for both filling and discharging.  The assembly may be inverted for
    discharge or the contents of the trap chamber are dipped out.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 266 for article dispensers having
    movable trap chamber structure of the single inlet-outlet type.


CLS 222/367
TXT Dispensers under subclass 344 in which the movable trap chamber element is
    of the conveyor type and has a motion of rotation about its own axis or
    plural trap chambers are assembled to rotate about a common axis.

    (1)     Note.  The trap chamber element has a generally circular periphery
    and may have one or more pockets, the axis being the center of the unit as
    a whole.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138+,   for combinations involving plural sources, compartments, or
    receptacles.

    167+,   for rotatable supply receptacles.

    216+,   for combinations with an agitator or ejector to remove material
    from the supply container.

    233+    and 236+, for combinations with a precedent, serially arranged
    agitator.

    264     and 271+, for plural such devices.

    282+,   for combinations with discharge volume varying means, particularly
    293+.

    336+,   for combinations with biasing means.

    356+,   for dipping trap chamber type which are nonrotary.

    360,    for rotary devices having a relatively movable actuator for
    imparting intermittent motion.

    362+,   where means are provided to require oscillation.

    410+,   for rotary discharge assistants not of the trap chamber type.

    452,    for rigidly connected rotary valves for controlling the inlet and
    outlet of a trap chamber, but not forming a complete enclosure for the
    trapped material, so as to constitute a conveyor type trap chamber.

    548+,   and see the notes thereto for rotary closures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclass 48+, for rotary carbid
    feeders.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 217+ for volume or rate of flow
    meters of the rotary tank or bucket type.

    184,    Lubrication, subclass 63, for rotary bucket conveyors.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses for rotary
    conveyors, including 441, 450, 469.1+, 608, 611+, and 803.16.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclasses 63+ for those having feeders
    having pockets which successively register with the conveyor.

    417,    Pumps, appropriate subclasses for rotary pumps.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, for rotary expansible chamber
    type pumps.


CLS 222/368
TXT Dispensers under subclass 367 in which the trap chamber or each trap
    chamber of the group has a single opening which serves both for inlet from
    the supply and for discharge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    363+    and 366, for oscillating and reciprocating trap chambers with
    single inlet-outlet.

    444,    and see the notes thereto for other trap chambers having single
    inflow-outflow passages.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 266 for article dispensers having
    movable trap chamber structure of the single inlet-outlet type.


CLS 222/369
TXT Dispensers under subclass 368 having the chamber or chambers arranged so
    that the outlet-inlet is positioned radially, forming a scoop or bucket.


CLS 222/370
TXT Dispensers under subclass 367 in which the trap chamber has both an inlet
    and an outlet both of which are axial, i.e., material passes through the
    trap chambers along a path parallel to the axis of rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302,    for such trap chambers comprising axially adjustable rotor parts
    each having axial material trap sections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 265 for article dispensing devices
    having rotary trap chamber structures of the axial inlet and outlet type.


CLS 222/371
TXT Dispensers under subclass 344 having trap chambers carried by or formed in
    or by an endless belt or belt elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    415,    for endless belt dispensers without trap chambers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclass 49, for endless belt
    carbid feeders.

    184,    Lubrication, subclass 62.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, for endless  belt conveyors.


CLS 222/372
TXT Dispensers under subclass 251 in which a supply container delivers to a
    casing which casing houses a discharge assistant (such as an impeller,
    piston, follower, etc.) which assists in discharge of material from the
    casing.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter occurs in many preceding subclasses in
    special embodiments or in other combinations.

    (2)     Note.  In the subclasses following this group are patents for
    supply containers having discharge assistants (not associated with a
    casing) operating directly on the material in the supply container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95,     where the supply container is of the collapsible wall type.

    129+,   where there are plural sources, compartments, or receptacles and/or
    a spaced jacket, where the additional compartment or receptacle is other
    than a casing which houses the discharge assistant and receives material
    from the source.

    205,    for combinations in which a supply container has a discharge
    assistant associated therewith for delivery of material to a trap chamber
    having no discharge assistant.

    252+,   and see the notes thereto for plural discharge assistants including
    those in which a discharge assistant is associated with the supply
    container to deliver material to the casing which houses a second discharge
    assistant.

    320+,   where a movable nozzle is connected to the discharge assistant in
    the casing.

    324,    where a handle for the combination is claimed.

    335,    where a source of supply under pressure (the pressure creating
    means not being claimed) operates a discharge assistant.

    336,    where the discharge assistant is biased to move by spring or other
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclasses for an
    expansible chamber device comprising a piston and cylinder.  See section
    III, under "SEARCH CLASS 222", of the class definition of Class 92, for a
    statement of the line between Class 92 and Class 222.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 565+ for distribution systems including
    a pump.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, subclass 33 for portable fire extinguishers
    with pumps, 72+ for gas pressure vessels having discharge assistance.

    184,    Lubrication, subclasses 64+ for lubricators using pumps.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 88+, 124+,
    157, 319, and 329+ for combinations of pumps with spray apparatus or spray
    nozzles.

    366,    Agitating, particularly subclass 196 for discharge effected by a
    stirrer, and subclasses 262+ for a pump type stirrer.

    417,    Pumps, for pump structure.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, for rotary expansible chamber
    pumps.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 131+ for pressure devices; subclasses 151+ for
    pumps and subclasses 218+ for pistons.


CLS 222/373
TXT Dispensers under subclass 372 in which the casing which receives material
    from the supply container by gravity is fed fluid under pressure to cause
    discharge therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    394+    and see the notes thereto for related art.

    630+,   for fluid flow discharge.


CLS 222/375
TXT Dispensers under subclass 372 having (1) means to prevent leakage from the
    discharge passage, (2) means to prevent siphoning following operation of
    the discharge assistant and (3) means to insure a full stroke of the pump
    mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  Pressure relief devices, as valves or expansion chambers,
    are included in section 1.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for volume or rate of flow metering with by-pass, gas separation
    and/or anti-siphon means.

    73,     for volume or rate of flow metering with means for relieving or
    maintaining hose pressure.

    108+,   for means for catching or disposing of leakage, drip, or waste,
    including those which also return the same to the supply.

    318,    for means for by-passing a discharge assistant and/or for returning
    material from the discharge side thereof to the supply.

    424,    for miscellaneous dispensers having means to return material to the
    supply.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 215+ for back flow or siphon preventing
    in fluid handling systems.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 245 for article dispensing devices
    having return stroke inhibiting means (full stroke-mechanism).

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 34 for reverse flow prevention
    in fluid pressure type servo-motor valve actuators.


CLS 222/376
TXT Dispensers under subclass 372 in which there is structure providing for the
    inlet of material from the supply container to the discharge assistant
    casing from at least two spaced points.

    (1)     Note.  This may be by providing plural inlet pipes or a single
    inlet pipe which may move from place to place within the dispenser due to
    flexibility or joints or any other means or which may have plural openings.

    (2)     Note.  Inlets connected with pump pistons or movable pump cylinders
    to move therewith are here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    381,    for movable discharge assistant casings which do not position the
    inlets at plural points.


CLS 222/377
TXT Dispensers under subclass 372 in which the inlet to the discharge assistant
    casing extends into a supplemental or trap chamber communicating with the
    supply chamber.

    (1)     Note.  The trap chamber may be formed by baffles or walls within
    the supply chamber, or by a depression in the bottom wall (including
    conical bottom walls).

    (2)     Note.  These are for two general purposes, i.e., (1) to be able to
    substantially completely exhaust the supply, and (2) to be able to trap a
    small amount about the force feeder inlet so as to be able to dispense same
    even though the main body of the supply is not about the inlet due to
    tipping of the dispenser.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    328,    for material discharge guides on container side of the outlet.


CLS 222/378
TXT Dispensers under subclass 372 in which the discharge assistant, the
    actuating means therefor, the supply container and the nozzle are arranged
    substantially coaxially.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259     and 260+, for similar arrangements involving more than one
    discharge assistant.

    321.1+, for similar arrangements where a movable nozzle is connected to the
    discharge assistant.

    510,    for containers having an outlet element in one wall and the
    actuator therefor passing through the container interior and another wall.


CLS 222/379
TXT Dispensers under subclass 372 in which the dispenser outlet is telescopic
    and/or the inlet to the discharge assistant casing is telescopic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    398,    for fluid pressure type dispensers having telescopic supply
    containers or outlets.

    523,    for miscellaneous telescopic outlets.


CLS 222/380
TXT Dispensers under subclass 372 in which the dispenser outlet has a valve
    therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    375,    for anti-leak or anti-siphon means.

    387,    for follower type dispenser with valved outlet.

    544+,   and see the notes thereto for dispensers with valved outlets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 247+ for article dispensing devices
    having ejector means and relatively movable outlet elements associated
    therewith.


CLS 222/381
TXT Dispensers under subclass 372 in which the discharge assistant casing is
    movable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    376,    for movable casings which position the inlet at plural points.


CLS 222/382
TXT Dispensers under subclass 372 in which there is a pipe communicating with
    and constituting an extension of the inlet to the discharge assistant
    casing and extending internally of the receptacle. For the most part these
    pipes extend to adjacent the receptacle bottom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211,    for this structure associated with resilient wall dispensers.

    376,    where there are plural such pipes, or where a single such pipe is
    movable for plural point inlet.

    377,    for such pipes associated with an inlet trap.

    464.1+, for miscellaneous dispensers having such outlet pipes.


CLS 222/383.1
TXT Container-mounted pump:

    Subject matter under subclass 372 wherein the encased discharge assistant
    is a pump, which is mounted on the supply container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    382,    for a pump or pulsator mounted on a supply container and having an
    internally extending pipe constituting an extension of the pump or the
    pulsator inlet.


CLS 222/383.2
TXT Rotary pump:

    Subject matter under subclass 383.1 wherein a working member of the pump
    undergoes a rotary motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, for rotary pump.


CLS 222/383.3
TXT Movable material discharge guide:

    Subject matter under subclass 383.1 in wherein there is associated with the
    pump a material discharge guide which is so constructed as to be movable
    relative to the pump for the purposes other than mere attachment or
    detachment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74+,    for a hose or other movable discharge guide interlocks and
    interconnection.

    83,     for a nozzle or other material guide that has a cutter or punch
    associated therewith and is mounted for motion.

    160+,   where the dispensing container is mounted for motion.

    257+,   for combination of a follower and a casing enclosed impeller, at
    least one of them being interconnected with a movable nozzle.

    320+,   for a movable nozzle interconnected with a single discharge
    assistant.

    461,    for a funnel type outlet movably interconnected with a container.

    507,    for an annular outlet surrounding discharge guide which is movable
    and constitute an actuator for a second movable outlet element.

    522+,   for an axially slidable tube, sleeve, or apertured cap.

    526+,   for a movable material discharge guide.

    567+,   for a nozzle, spout and pouring device having a separable means for
    mere attachment and detachment purposes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 615+ for an articulated or swinging flow
    conduit in a distribution system.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 149+, 150, 341+, and 349+
    for other moving flow pipe section or spout.

    291,    Track Sanders, subclass 31 for a flexible or movable pipe operable
    to cutoff the sand feed.


CLS 222/384
TXT Dispensers under subclasses 383.1+ in which means is provided for holding
    or preventing motion of the pump or pulsator piston.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    309,    for similar means for adjusting discharge volume.

    402,    for similar means for holding the piston of a fluid pressure
    generating pump or pulsator.


CLS 222/385
TXT Dispensers under subclasses 383.1+ in which the casing or cylinder of the
    pump or pulsator is within the supply container.


CLS 222/386
TXT Dispensers under subclass 251 in which there is an element acting as a
    supply container wall which follows the material as it is dispensed.

    (1)     Note.  The follower may be caused to move by atmospheric pressure
    only, or there may be means associated therewith to cause motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95+,    for collapsible wall dispensers.

    205,    where the material ejected from the supply container by the
    follower is delivered to a trap chamber having no discharge assistant.

    206+,   for resilient wall dispensers.

    252+,   for combinations with other discharge assistants.

    320,    for followers connected to movable nozzles.

    323+,   for follower type dispensers having handles for handling the
    organization.

    326+,   for insertable cartridge or removable container combinations.

    333+,   for motor for biased followers.

    336+,   for baised Followers.

    372+,   for casings having followers, there being a supply container to
    deliver to the casing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclasses for an
    expansible chamber device comprising a piston and cylinder, and
    particularly subclasses 172+ for a piston, per se, even though disclosed as
    a follower for a dispenser.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 179+ for presses not elsewhere classified in
    which a plunger forces material through a constricted tubular casing.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 205.5 and 564.5 for fluid handling
    systems in which there is a follower type discharge assistant for the
    material in a receptacle to be mixed in a flowing liquid.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, subclass 33 for portable fire extinguishers
    with followers.

    184,    Lubrication, subclasses indented under "Follower" starting with
    subclass 37.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 578+ for a closure-like member which rests
    on the unused contents of a container.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 279+ for article dispensing devices
    having follower members included therein, and see also subclasses 56+ for
    dispensers for flexible articles having followers, and subclasses 226+ for
    article dispensers of general types having plural discharge assisting means
    one of which is a follower means.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 23, 313 and
    320+ for spaying apparatus in which the fluid is discharged by means of a
    follower type discharge assistant.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 171+, wherein
    the implement has a cylindrical wall reservoir for the material and a
    piston movable relative to the wall to force the material from the
    reservoir.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 87 for shaping apparatus of the caulking gun type having a molding
    material supply and means shaping a deposited material in plural dimensions.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 218+ for pistons or plungers expelling material
    from reservoirs.


CLS 222/386.5
TXT Dispensers under subclass 386 in which the follower member is of a nonrigid
    (flexible or resilient) material.

    (1)     Note.  Outer receptacle wall structure is not considered to be a
    follower and structures wherein a collapsible or resilient outer wall
    follows the material being dispensed are not included in this subclass.
    For such devices, see subclasses 92+ of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92+,    for collapsible wall type containers, and particularly subclasses
    95+, for such containers in combination with wall collapsing means
    therefor.  See (1) Note.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 564.5 for nonrigid type followers in fluid
    handling systems.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 323 for
    nonrigid followers in spraying systems.


CLS 222/387
TXT Dispensers under subclass 386 in which (1) the outlet is valve controlled,
    (2) the nozzle or other discharge guide is movable relative to the
    dispenser, and/or (3) means are provided for venting gas from the material
    side of the follower.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    320,    for movable nozzles connected to the follower.

    380,    for valved outlets for casing enclosed discharge assistants which
    receive material from a supply.

    526+,   and see the notes thereto for movable discharge guides.

    544+,   and see the notes thereto for other dispensers with flow
    controllers or closures.


CLS 222/388
TXT Dispensers under subclass 386 having an opening in the side wall of the
    container through which the container is refilled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327,    where a cartridge or container with a follower is removable from
    and insertable into the dispenser organization.


CLS 222/389
TXT Dispensers under subclass 386 in which the follower is operated by fluid
    under pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258,    261 and 262, for combinations with other discharge assistants.

    386.5,  for dispensers having nonrigid followers which are operated by
    fluid under pressure.

    394+,   and see the notes thereto for related art.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 564.5 for a follower type feeder
    responsive to a main line flow in a fluid handling system.

    184,    Lubrication, subclasses 39+.


CLS 222/390
TXT Dispensers under subclass 386 in which the follower is operated by a screw
    mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 324 for screw
    type followers for the fluid in a spraying system.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 172+, wherein
    the implement has a cylindrical wall reservoir for the material and a
    piston movable relative to the wall by screw means to force the material
    into the reservoir or from the reservoir to the applying tool.

    604,    Surgery, subclass 224.


CLS 222/391
TXT Follower type dispensers under subclass 386 in which the operating means
    for the follower involves an intermittent grip type mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 111+, for intermittent
    grip mechanisms, per se.

    128,    Surgery, subclass 236.


CLS 222/392
TXT Follower type dispensers under subclass 386 in which there is either or
    both (1) a follower in the form of a ribbon, (2) a strand for operating a
    follower of any form.


CLS 222/393
TXT Dispensers under subclass 386 in the form of scoops with followers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 128+ for cutlery (including spoons) with
    ejectors or strippers.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Im- plements, subclasses 50+ for
    fork and shovel clearers, and subclass 55 for scoops.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 282+ for a scoop type shaping means (e.g., ice cream dishes,
    etc.), having means to release a product therefrom.


CLS 222/394
TXT Dispensers under subclass 251 in which the material is caused to discharge
    from the container by fluids under pressure that directly contact the
    material to be dispensed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3+,     for gas or vapor dispensers.

    51,     for float level indicators.

    61+,    for automatic control of fluid pressure discharge type of dispenser.

    64+,    for material level controls.

    95,     for fluid pressures used to collapse the walls of receptacles.

    152,    for inert atmosphere providing means where the gas pressure does
    not operate to cause material discharge.

    195,    for gas agitation.

    204,    for siphons combined with discharge assistants.

    206,    for resilient wall dispensers.

    258,    261, 262, and 263, where there is a second discharge assistant.

    320+,   where the gas pump piston rod is also the nozzle.

    323+,   for gas pumps located in the supply container handle.

    333+,   for motors including those operated by pressure fluids.

    373,    where fluids are applied to the material in a casing to cause
    discharge, the casing receiving material from a supply by gravity.

    386.5,  for fluid pressure operated, nonrigid followers.

    389,    for followers that are fluid pressure operated.

    630+,   for fluid flow discharge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 39.48, for combustion products power plants
    with fluid pressure feeding of oxidizer, fuel or water.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 206+ for fluid handling systems having
    gas displacement means as gas storage over liquid in a pressure system.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 19 for dispensers having a cutter or punch to open a gas pressure
    cell to deliver gas under pressure to the dispenser's container to force
    out the contents material.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, subclasses 9 and 71+

    184,    Lubrication, the subclasses indented under "Fluid operated"
    starting with subclass 49.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 278 for article dispensing devices
    having fluid pressure discharge assisting means.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 22, 364+,
    372, and 373 for spraying apparatus in which the discharge of one fluid is
    caused at least in part by the pressure of another fluid in contact
    therewith.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, for dispensers of the gas
    pressure discharge assistant type claimed in combination with means to
    secure an intimate contact between and/or a mixing of the gaseous medium
    and the fluid to be dispensed.

    291,    Track Sanders, subclasses 3-16, 18 for sanders operating by fluid
    pressure or fluid flow.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 184+, wherein
    the implement includes a reservoir for the material and means to vary the
    pressure of the contained gas (usually air) so as to vary the pressure on
    the material to force the material into the reservoir or from the reservoir
    to the applying tool.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclass 146.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 140+ for material impelled by pressurized
    charge or gas.


CLS 222/395
TXT Dispensers under subclass 394 having a liquid only disclosed as the
    pressure fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 154 and 172 for diverse liquids in a
    pressure system.

    184,    Lubrication, subclasses 49 through 54.

    604,    Surgery, subclass 150 for material impelled by water or hydrant
    pressure.


CLS 222/396
TXT Dispensers under subclass 394 having means, such as pressure operated
    relief valves, to limit the maximum fluid pressure exerted on the contents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52+,    if automatic control means (other than mere valves operated
    directly by pressure) are claimed.

    397,    for manually operated relief valves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 171+ for fluid separating traps or vents
    in diverse fluid containing pressure systems.


CLS 222/397
TXT Dispensers under subclass 394 having means for discharging the pressure
    fluid from the container.

    (1)     Note.  Such pressure fluid discharging means must be in addition to
    the pressure fluid introducing means and/or the dispenser outlet and/or
    their controls, even though such means may be disclosed as relief means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    396,    and see the notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 171+ for fluid separating traps or vents
    in diverse fluid containing pressure systems.


CLS 222/398
TXT Dispensers under subclass 394 in which (1) the container is made of at
    least two telescopically related sections which are moved relative to each
    other to generate the fluid pressure which acts on the material to cause
    discharge, and/or (2) there is an outlet pipe having telescopically related
    sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    379,    for telescopic outlets associated with a supply container having a
    casing enclosed discharge assistant.

    523,    for miscellaneous telescopic outlets.


CLS 222/399
TXT Dispensers under subclass 394 having a reservoir separate from but
    communicating with the container whose contents are to be dispensed, which
    reservoir contains gas under pressure which is fed to the material
    container to cause dispensing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 209+ for gas maintenance or application
    in gas storage over or displacement of liquid in a diverse fluid containing
    pressure system.


CLS 222/400.5
TXT Dispensers under subclass 394 in which the operator for the material outlet
    valve is so related to a fluid pressure generating pump or pulsator that
    manipulation of the operator causes operation of the pump or pulsator.


CLS 222/400.7
TXT Dispensers under subclass 394 in which the fluid pressure inlet and the
    material discharge outlet element have a common mounting adapted for
    manipulation as a unit for positioning on or removal from a container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    399,    for similar structures in which a gas reservoir is connected to the
    fluid pressure inlet.

    400.5,  for similar structures also including interconnected operating
    means for the outlet and for a fluid pressure generating pump or pulsator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 212 for unitary mounting for gas inlet and
    fluid outlet in a diverse fluid containing displacement type pressure
    system.


CLS 222/400.8
TXT Dispensers under subclass 400.7 in which there is a fluid pressure
    generating pump or pulsator associated with the fluid pressure inlet.


CLS 222/401
TXT Dispensers under subclass 394 in which a fluid pressure generating pump or
    pulsator is mounted on the container whose contents are to be dispensed, or
    is adapted to be so mounted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209,    where the pump or pulsator has a resilient wall.

    383.1+, for pumps and pulsators mounted on a supply container to receive
    therefrom material to be dispensed.

    400.5,  for such devices where the pump actuator also operates an outlet
    valve.

    400.8,  where the pump is mounted on the same element as the material
    discharge outlet and movable therewith to and from operative position on
    the container.


CLS 222/402
TXT Dispensers under subclass 401 provided with means for securing the fluid
    pressure generating pump or pulsator in one position whereby operation is
    precluded.

    (1)     Note.  Many of these devices are inter-engaging means on the piston
    rod and some part stationary relative to the container, so that the
    inter-engaged parts assist in removing the pump from the container.  The
    piston rod handle may serve in its secured position as a handle for the
    supply container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    384,    for pumps and pulsators having such means and mounted on a supply
    container to receive therefrom material to be dispensed.


CLS 222/402.1
TXT Dispensers under subclass 394 in which a valve closing an opening for
    material under fluid pressure is opened by motion, relative to a wall of
    the container holding the material, of an actuator which  is either (1) a
    tubular flow guide through which the material passes from the opening
    toward discharge or (2) a member moving inwardly of the container through
    the opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322,    for dispensers with discharge assistants in which an actuator for a
    movable dispenser part projects through the final dispenser outlet
    discharging to the atmosphere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, subclasses 71+ for devices of that class
    adapted to be transported by an operator to the fire and comprising a
    container for an extinguishing agent and gas pressure means for causing the
    discharge of the agent at the wall of the operator.


CLS 222/402.11
TXT Dispensers under subclass 402.1 having means for rendering the valve
    actuator inoperable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153.01+, for dispensers with locks or seals.

    182,    for dispensers with covers barring access to the actuator.


CLS 222/402.12
TXT Dispensers under subclass 402.1 having means associated with the opening
    through which the dispensed material discharges to the atmosphere to
    protect the material at the opening from exposure to the atmosphere when
    not dispensing.


CLS 222/402.13
TXT Dispensers under subclass 402.1 having a cover which grips the container
    and encloses the portion of the end wall of the container on which the
    valve is mounted with such cover having an opening through which
    discharging material passes and means by way of which the valve is actuated
    to open.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182,    for dispensers with enclosing covers that may be removed to expose
    the actuating parts of the dispenser discharge means.


CLS 222/402.14
TXT Dispensers under subclass 402.1 having means for maintaining the valve in
    open position after the actuator which opened it has discontinued its
    opening movement.

    (1)     Note.  The opening of the outlet valve may be due to human finger
    pressure and the dispensers in this subclass may have means to relieve the
    need for holding the valve open by the finger when continuous dispensing is
    desired.


CLS 222/402.15
TXT Dispensers under subclass 402.1 having a lever mounted or mountable on the
    container which can be actuated to move the valve actuator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for dispensers with timing devices which may have a lever in the
    system for actuating the dispenser.

    402.13, for pressurized dispensers with over-caps which may have a
    lever-like portion to actuate the outlet valve.


CLS 222/402.16
TXT Dispensers under subclass 402.1 in which there is a flow path provided for
    fluid entering the container and such flow path is, at least in part, other
    than a flow path along which the material moves toward discharge in
    dispensing.

    (1)     Note.  Disclosures of filling by mere reverse flow along the
    dispensing flow path are classified according to the dispensing structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400.7+, for fluid pressure dispensers under subclass 394 having a fluid
    pressure inlet and a material discharge outlet element in a common mounting
    adapted for manipulation as a unit for positioning on or removal from a
    container.


CLS 222/402.17
TXT Dispensers under subclass 402.1 in which there are available alternative
    flowpaths for the material to move along toward discharge and there is a
    means outside the container which can be moved relative to the container
    for electing the flowpath to be used in dispensing.


CLS 222/402.18
TXT Dispensers under subclass 402.1 in which the material passes to the valve
    which closes the opening through a duct which has an entrance for the
    pressure fluid as well as one for the material and these entrances are
    spaced apart.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402.19, for dispensers in which there are separate openings in the duct to
    the outlet valve and such openings are used alternatively for the material
    dispensed.


CLS 222/402.19
TXT Dispensers under subclass 402.1 having a separate flowpath entrance for
    material going to the valve at each end of the container and means to cause
    a flowpath entrance which is closed in one position of the container to be
    open when the container is turned over.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402.11, for dispensers which disable actuation of the outlet valve when the
    container is not appropriately oriented to dispense material.

    402.18, for separate openings in the duct going to the outlet valve one
    opening being for gas propellant and the other for the material dispensed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 38+ for fluid handling devices
    controlled by change of position of the system particularly subclass 43 for
    vent opening or closing by the change.


CLS 222/402.20
TXT Dispensers under subclass 402.1 having a chamber in which material for
    discharge next is separate from the supply of material in the container
    between serially alternately open elements for closing the outlet flowpath.

    (1)     Note.  See section 11 of the definition of this class (222) and the
    notes thereto as to the inclusion of trap chamber devices in this class and
    in other classes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 627.5 for fluid handling systems with
    sequentially closing and opening alternately sealing flow controllers.


CLS 222/402.21
TXT Dispensers under subclass 402.1 in which moving the flow guide laterally
    through an angle relative to the container opens the outlet flowpath.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 577 for a spray
    means having an unhinged tilting type valve in the flow line.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 149.8 for valves in which the
    closing element is operated as a result of imparting motion to the
    flowpath, and subclasses 349+ for valves in which the valve actuator is an
    inlet or outlet means for material passing through the valve.


CLS 222/402.22
TXT Dispensers under subclass 402.21 in which the flow guide which is angularly
    moved to open the valve comprises a tube with a closed inner end, the tube
    plugging a hole in the container wall, and having a radially outwardly
    extending flange fixed to the tube and surrounding it within the container
    and seating against a surface adjacent the hole to control flow of the
    material from the container into the tube.


CLS 222/402.23
TXT Dispensers under subclass 402.21 in which the valve has a stem portion
    which extends into the flow guide and the angular motion of the flow guide
    causes the stem to move the valve to open position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402.25, where a stem is pushed through the valve outlet and not actuated by
    the nozzle.


CLS 222/402.24
TXT Dispensers under subclass 402.1 in which the discharge guide in moving to
    open the valve either slides inwardly through an annular member fitting the
    discharge guide circumferentially or deforms an annular closure member
    surrounding the outlet flowpath.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402.2,  for fluid pressure dispensers in which the valve is opened by a
    discharge guide sliding inwardly through an annular member and having a
    lock trap chamber.


CLS 222/402.25
TXT Dispensers under subclass 402.1 in which the valve is opened by a member
    moved inwardly of the container through the opening, the material flowing
    along the outer surface of the member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322,    for dispensers with discharge assistants in which an actuator for a
    movable dispenser part projects through the final dispenser outlet
    discharging to atmosphere.

    402.23, for dispensers in which a valve stem extends through the valve
    outlet and into the outlet nozzle and is actuated by moving the outlet
    nozzle laterally.


CLS 222/403
TXT Dispensers under subclass 251 which remove from the supply only the layer
    or film adhering to the discharge assistant surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    423,    for miscellaneous film accumulating dispensers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 110+ for film accumulating devices which must be removed from
    the supply container for discharge.


CLS 222/404
TXT Dispensers under subclass 251 having a discharge assistant having more than
    one character of motion, either simultaneously or successively in the
    normal operation thereof (as rotating and reciprocating or reciprocating
    and swinging, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229,    for serially arranged devices, the first being an agitator, having
    axially rotary and longitudinal motion.

    233+,   where serially arranged devices, the first being an agitator, have
    different motions, one rotary and one reciprocating.

    357,    for dipping type trap chambers (other than rotary and endless belt
    types) having compound motions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 262 for article dispensing devices
    having discharge assistants which have motion which is compound in
    character.


CLS 222/405
TXT Dispensers under subclass 251 having a discharge assistant which promotes
    discharge of the material that is uppermost in the supply container.


CLS 222/406
TXT Dispensers under subclass 251 having discharge assistants comprising
    members which occupy positions during discharge operations different from
    their normal or unstressed position.

    (1)     Note.  The distortion may be caused by contact with the material or
    with the casing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 260 for article dispensing devices
    having deformable discharging elements either forming a part of a discharge
    assistant or otherwise associated directly therewith.


CLS 222/407
TXT Dispensers under subclass 406 having the deformable elements urged by their
    own resilience or by spring or other means to normal or undistorted
    position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    336+,   for biasing means which actuate discharge assistants toward either
    discharging or nondischarging position.


CLS 222/408
TXT Dispensers under subclass 251 having means tending to convey or move
    material along a path adjacent a discharge point, and a means interposed in
    the path of material being moved to divert it from the conveyor means for
    discharge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290,    for similar devices in which the diverting means is adjustable to
    vary the volume discharged.

    344+,   for conveyor type having trap chambers, and see the notes thereto
    for related art.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 367+, 370.07 through 370.09,
    370.1, 370.11 through 370.13, 426+, 463.1+, 497, 597+, 599, and 637 for
    means for moving an article or material off a conveyor.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclasses 79+, for endless circuit
    material conveyors from which material is removed by a fluid current
    conveyor.


CLS 222/408.5
TXT Dispensers under subclass 251 in which the discharge assistant is an
    agitator rigidly mounted on a movable closure of the supply receptacle, the
    rigid closure and agitator being movable relative to the receptacle.  The
    closure may or may not have dispensing openings therein, and the opening
    which is closed is usually a filling opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226+,   for dispensers in which an agitator is rigidly mounted on a
    discharge controller which is operated in connection with discharge.

    459,    for agitators fixed relatively to the supply receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    366,    Agitating, appropriate subclasses, for agitators associated with
    hand manipulable shakers, and see the class definition of Class 366 for the
    line.


CLS 222/409
TXT Dispensers under subclass 251 having a reciprocating (including
    oscillating) discharge assistant.

    SEARCH THE CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    361+,   and see the notes thereto for other reciprocable and oscillatable
    discharge assistants.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclass 51, for acetylene
    generators with piston type carbid feed.

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 109, for hopper type fuel feeders with
    reciprocating pushers.

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 409, 429+, 468.01+, 517, 602,
    614, 621.1+, 736+, and 750.1+ for reciprocating conveyors.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 268+ for article dispensers having
    reciprocating (including oscillating) discharge assisting means.

    291,    Track Sanders, subclasses 28+, 34, 35, and 36+, for reciprocating
    (including oscillating) sand feeders.


CLS 222/410
TXT Dispensers under subclass 251 having a rotary discharge assistant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    367+,   and see the notes thereto for other rotary discharge assistants.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclasses 48+, for rotary carbid
    feeders.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 642, for rotary thrower type and
    subclass 441, 450, 469.1+, 608, 611+, and 803.16, for other rotary
    conveyors.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 277 for article dispensing devices
    having rotary discharge assistants, and see the search notes thereto for
    other fields of search in Class 221 involving rotary discharge assisting
    elements.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 665+, 668+,
    672+, and 681+ for a device comprising a container for nonfluid material
    and a rotary scattering or strewing means to distribute the material over
    an extended area.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 225 for
    rotary feeds to roll mills.

    291,    Track Sanders, subclass 32, for rotary sand feeders.


CLS 222/411
TXT Dispensers under subclass 410 having the discharge point at or near the
    axis of rotation of the discharge assistant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    413,    for discharge assistants in the form of a (solid shaft) screw with
    a terminal outlet.


CLS 222/412
TXT Dispensers under subclass 410 having a discharge assistant with helically
    arranged projections, either interrupted or continuous, e.g., screws.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    411,    for hollow rotors having internal spiral projections, so that the
    discharge path lies axially of the rotor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclass 54 for screw carbid feeds.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 145+ for presses not elsewhere classified which
    concurrently compress and convey the material and in which the material is
    conveyed by a helix type compressor.

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 110 for furnace feeding hoppers having screw
    feed.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 64 and subclass 467.1, 513, 545,
    548, 550.6, 550.10, 582, 608, 625, and 657+ for screw feeds.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 246+ for
    screw feeds to disk or cone mills.

    291,    Track Sanders, subclass 33 for screw feeds.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclasses 56+ for screw feeds.


CLS 222/413
TXT Dispensers under subclass 412 having the sole discharge point at or near
    the end of the screw.


CLS 222/414
TXT Dispensers under subclass 410 having the peripheral surface of the rotor in
    contact with the material to move the same, the material moving
    circumferentially of the rotor axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 259 for article dispensing devices
    having discharge assistant means of the surface contact type, most of which
    have motion which is rotary in character.


CLS 222/415
TXT Dispensers under subclass 251 having an endless belt conveyor as the
    discharge assistant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    371,    for endless belt dispensers with trap chambers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclass 39 for apron or belt
    carbid feeders for acetylene generators.

    100,    Presses, subclass 151 for presses not elsewhere classified in which
    the material is concurrently compressed and conveyed by an endless conveyor
    belt.

    184,    Lubrication, subclasses 61+ for conveyor type lubricators.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses, for endless
    conveyors, especially subclasses 56+, subclasses 550.9, 550.13, 582, and
    for an endless belt conveyor combined with a hopper or bin.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 253 for article dispensing devices
    having endless belt carried discharge assistant means.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 223 for such
    devices combined with comminutors.

    291,    Track Sanders, subclass 27 for chain type sand feeders.


CLS 222/416
TXT Dispensers under the class definition having siphons to remove the
    container contents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204,    for siphons combined with discharge assistants.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, appropriate subclasses.

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclass 17, for acetylene
    generator water feeders with siphon.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 123+ for siphons, per se, and in fluid
    handling systems.

    184,    Lubrication, subclass 85 for gravity feed lubricators with siphon.


CLS 222/420
TXT Dispensing devices under the class definition specially designed to
    dispense flowable materials in the form of drops.

    (1)     Note.  The majority of the devices disclosed for this purpose were
    structurally and functionally more closely related to other devices and
    have been placed in preceding subclasses on the basis of the combination
    involved, means employed and mode of operation.  This and the indented
    subclasses take only the residual patents specially designed to dispense
    material in the form of drops not having the features above provided for.
    Some of the preceding subclasses having such subject matter are referred to
    below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206+,   for resilient wall devices.

    386+,   for those having followers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 72.5 for drop delivering watering
    devices.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 40+ for flow restrictors in
    pipes and tubular conduits.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 23+ for drop formers having pistons or other discharge
    assistants which are removable from the supply container for discharge.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 38, 40+, 46,
    and 51 for slow diffusers with drop-by-drop escape of the liquid.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 330 for a fuel burner in which the fuel is fed
    to the combustion area in the form of drops or as a flowing film.


CLS 222/421
TXT Dispensers under subclass 420 in which either or both (1) the closure for
    the container, or (2) the wall defining the container neck or outlet, have
    one or more grooves therein providing for drop form discharge.


CLS 222/422
TXT Dispensers under subclass 420 utilizing valves.

    (1)     Note.  Mere openings adapted to be closed by the finger are not
    considered valves.


CLS 222/423
TXT Dispensers under the class definition having means which separate from a
    supply a layer of material which adheres to a surface exposed thereto, the
    layer being removed from such surface for use by a separate instrument, not
    claimed, as a brush, sponge, the fingers, etc.

    (1)     Note.  This group is analogous to traps, and differs therefrom in
    having no means to confine the material, which remains separated from the
    source material merely by adhesion to the surface which has been exposed to
    it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403,    for discharge assistants of the film accumulating type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 256+ for coating apparatus in which a
    solid applicator separates a film of coating material from a bulk supply
    for application to a work piece.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclasses 5+.


CLS 222/424
TXT Dispensers under the class definition in which overfilling or unused
    material is returned from a trap to the supply container or source of
    supply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109+,   for dispensers having means to cause drip, leakage, or waste to
    return to the supply.

    318,    for dispensers having discharge assistants and means to return
    material to the supply from the discharge side of the assistant.


CLS 222/424.5
TXT Dispensers under the class definition involving combinations of supply
    container and trap chamber.

    (1)     Note.  These traps are stationary or rigidly associated with the
    supply container, as distinguished from the movably related combinations
    previously provided for, although they may have movable parts as cutoff or
    volume varying means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129+,   for trap chamber dispensers combined with additional material
    sources or additional compartments, receptacles, or with a spaced jacket
    (forming part of a second dispenser or having a non- dispensing use).

    205,    where there is a nongravity feed to a trap chamber which does not
    have a discharge assistant.

    252+,   where there is a supply having a discharge assistant which delivers
    to a trap chamber or casing having a discharge assistant associated
    therewith.

    335,    for devices in which the supply of material to be dispensed must be
    under pressure (by means not claimed) and which operate a discharge
    assistant which may be associated with a trap chamber.

    344+,   and see the notes thereto for movable trap chambers.

    372+,   where there is a source having no discharge assistant which
    delivers to a casing housing a discharge assistant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 156+ for gas pressure discharge of feed
    traps to boilers, etc., subclasses 171+ for fluid separating traps in
    diverse fluid containing pressure systems; subclasses 571+ for plural tanks
    or compartments, including traps, in series flow relation; subclass 596 for
    stop and waste systems.


CLS 222/425
TXT Dispensers under subclass 424.5 having a supply, a chamber to which
    material is delivered from the supply and cut-off means for either or both
    the inlet to or the outlet from the trap chamber.

    (1)     Note.  The cutoff may be a valve, closure or other means for the
    purpose.  The separation of the predetermined charge from the main supply,
    or the discharge from the trap chamber may be effected by tilting the
    assembly where only one of the trap openings is positively controlled for
    effecting the trapping operation.

    (2)     Note.  Trap chambers where the valve or closure has no material
    cutoff function in connection with the trapping operation are not included.

    (3)     Note.  In the handling of discrete articles for dispensing, the
    release of individual articles from a hopper or stack source of articles is
    often effected by alternately closing and opening plural series controller
    members in the manner typical of the operation of many of the trap chamber
    cutoffs of this and the indented subclasses (Class 222, subclasses 425+).
    In appropriate cases, the search should be completed in Class 221,
    particularly in subclasses 289+ thereof, where such article dispensing
    devices are classified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    454,    for supply container and trap chamber assemblies where separation
    and delivery of the charge are both effected only by tilting the assembly,
    even though a closure or cutoff for the trap outlet is present but not
    necessary for the trapping operation.

    544+,   and see the notes thereto for dispensers with flow controllers and
    closures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 571+ for distribution systems comprising
    plural tanks in series flow relation; subclass 596 for stop and waste
    systems; subclasses 613+ for distribution systems comprising a single flow
    path, which may be a tank or trap with serial valves and/or closures.

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclasses 60+ for the control of feed and
    discharge of a weigh chamber.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 289+. See (3) Note, above.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 27+ for mortar mixers with dynamic charging
    and delivery, and subclasses 131+ for mixers of general utility having
    interrelated feed and discharge.


CLS 222/426
TXT Dispensers under subclass 425 having more than one trap chamber, at least
    two trap chambers being arranged so that one does not discharge into the
    other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    436,    for serial traps arranged so that the material passes from one
    through another in order.


CLS 222/427
TXT Dispensers under subclass 426 having a single controller element having a
    motion of rotation about its own axis and controlling the outlets of at
    least two trap chambers.

    (1)     Note.  The inlets may be controlled by the same element, or by
    another similar member, or by other cutoff elements.


CLS 222/428
TXT Dispensers under subclass 426 in which at least two of the trap chambers
    have their discharge controllers having a common operating member or other
    interconnecting means for positively relating the operations of the
    respective controllers.


CLS 222/429
TXT Dispensers under subclass 428 having the discharge controllers
    interconnected for simultaneous movement to open or closed position.


CLS 222/430
TXT Dispensers under subclass 426 in which at least two of the plural trap
    chambers are of different capacities.

    (1)     Note.  The trap chambers may have a common outlet, but their
    discharges are independent and separately controlled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    436,    for trap chambers in series where the material discharged from the
    more remote chambers passes through the chambers nearer the final outlet,
    or through passages continuously connected with such chambers.


CLS 222/431
TXT Dispensers under subclass 425 having plural discharge outlets from a single
    trap chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    424,    for arrangements for returning material from the trap chamber to
    the source of supply, usually through a separate outlet.  The material
    returned may be over-fill material or merely unused.

    443,    for arrangements for discharging material from the supply without
    its passing through the trap chamber.

    478+,   and see the notes thereto for dispensers having plural openings not
    restricted to trap chambers, including plural dispensing openings (one of
    which may serve as a vent when material is not being discharged
    therethrough).


CLS 222/432
TXT Dispensers under subclass 431 having the outlets at different levels in the
    trap chamber (with reference to the trap chamber contents) for the purpose
    of discharging different volumes from one trap chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    434+,   for trap chambers having other means for varying discharge volume.


CLS 222/433
TXT Dispensers under subclass 432 having discharge controllers for the
    different outlets operable independently.


CLS 222/434
TXT Dispensers under subclass 425 having means for varying the discharge volume
    per trapping operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282+,   for dispensers with movable trap chambers and having discharge
    volume varying means, and see the notes thereto for related devices.

    430,    for plural, nonserial, trap chambers, at least two being of
    different capacities.

    432+,   for trap chambers having outlets at different levels to vary the
    discharge volume.


CLS 222/435
TXT Dispensers under subclass 434 having means to prevent adjustments of volume
    varying means during dispensing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for registers with means to prevent zero setting during discharge.


CLS 222/436
TXT Dispensers under subclass 434 having plural trap chambers in series with
    provision for dispensing from one or more of the series to vary the volume
    discharged.

    (1)     Note.  The traps may be constituted by a series of cutoffs in a
    passage of more or less uniform size.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284,    for trap chambers in series where there is also a discharge
    assistant.


CLS 222/437
TXT Dispensers under subclass 434 in which the flow from the supply to the trap
    chamber is (1) of the barometric control type, or (2) is of the type where
    solid material in the trapping chamber builds up to its angle of repose and
    stops flow from the supply, and means are provided to vary the volume
    delivered to the trap chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    353,    for movable trap chambers of this type.

    457,    for miscellaneous chambers of this type not having volume varying
    means, and see the notes thereto for related art.

    479,    for dispensers having plural coterminous openings (usually tubular
    spouts), many of which are disclosed for operation on a barometric
    principle when used to deliver to an unclaimed receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 261 and 453+ for barometric type fluid
    handling systems.


CLS 222/438
TXT Dispensers under subclass 434 having movable means which changes the
    volumetric capacity of the chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251+,   or the places set forth in the notes thereto, where the movable
    means which changes the chamber volume also assists in causing discharge
    because of such motion, particularly subclasses 305+.


CLS 222/439
TXT Dispensers under subclass 438 in which the means movable to change the
    volumetric capacity carries a cutoff and/or its seat.


CLS 222/440
TXT Dispensers under subclass 438 in which a volume changing means is
    adjustable in a direction at right angles to the related trap surface.  The
    adjustment may be accomplished by rotation with axial movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    307+,   for movable trap chambers having such means.


CLS 222/441
TXT Dispensers under subclass 425 having container handles or handgrips
    connected to a dispenser container by means of which the dispenser may be
    handled.

    (1)     Note.  The handle must be secured to dispensing container for
    handling the container; operating handles for movable dispenser parts are
    not included except when in combination with a container handle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210,    for dispensers with resilient walls having handles or handgrips.

    323+,   for dispensers with discharge assistants having handles or
    handgrips.

    465.1+, for miscellaneous dispensers with handles or handgrips.


CLS 222/442
TXT Dispensers under subclass 425 having passages for venting the trap other
    than the dispensing passages or openings to accommodate the actuating
    members (even though such passages for dispensing or for actuating means
    are claimed as vents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332,    for movable trap chambers with vents.

    478+,   for miscellaneous dispensers with plural openings, one or more of
    which may be vents, and see the notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 171+ for fluid separating traps and
    vents in diverse fluid handling pressure systems.


CLS 222/443
TXT Dispensers under subclass 425 having either an outlet other than the trap
    chamber or having the cutoffs adjustable to provide for free flow through
    the trap chamber.

    (1)     Note.  Many unitary cutoffs for both inlet and outlet may be held
    in an intermediate position, permitting free flow of the material, for
    which see subclasses 451+.  When special means is provided for holding the
    cutoff in such position, the patents are here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    431+,   for a trap chamber having plural outlets.

    451,    see note 1.


CLS 222/444
TXT Dispensers under subclass 425 in which the trap is filled and emptied
    through a single passage, and the cutoff alternately connects this passage
    with the supply and the dispenser outlet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306,    for movable trap chambers with adjustable bottom volume varying
    means, with a single inflow-outflow passage.

    363+,   for oscillating trap chambers having a single inflow-outflow
    passage.

    366,    for miscellaneous reciprocating trap chambers having a single
    inflow-outflow passage.

    368+,   for rotary trap chambers having single inflow-outflow passages.


CLS 222/445
TXT Dispensers under subclass 425 having valves or other cutoffs for both inlet
    and outlet of the trap connected for relative motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    450+,   for those not interconnected at all and those rigidly
    interconnected.

    487,    for miscellaneous dispensers having plural openings and plural,
    nonrigidly interconnected valves and/or closures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 304+ for relatively movable stop and
    waste valves in hydrants.


CLS 222/446
TXT Dispensers under subclass 445 in which the connection consists of an
    element rigidly carried by one valve or cutoff to engage the other or a
    rigid element carried thereby by a mere friction or abutting contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52+,    for connections operated by the trapped material for preventing
    operation of cutoff until trap is entirely filled or emptied.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 305 for stop and waste valves in hydrants
    having a similar abutting relation.


CLS 222/447
TXT Dispensers under subclass 445 in which the cutoffs both reciprocate
    nonpivotally to perform the trapping operation, but have no other character
    of motion.


CLS 222/448
TXT Dispensers under subclass 425 having a portion of the cutoff actuating
    means relatively movable with respect to the cutoff.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177,    for actuation by the ground wheel of an ambulant support.

    445+,   for cutoffs interconnected for relative movement.

    505+,   for miscellaneous dispensers having relatively movable actuators
    for nozzles, valves, closures or other movable outlet elements.


CLS 222/449
TXT Dispensers under subclass 425 in which some of the trap forming elements
    are biased to a desired position by spring or other means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    511+,   and see the notes thereto for dispensers of other types having
    biasing means.


CLS 222/450
TXT Dispensers under subclass 425 having valves or other cutoffs for both inlet
    and outlet passages of the trap.

    (1)     Note.  A single valve which closes the two passages alternately is
    here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    445+,   for nonrigidly interconnected inlet and outlet cutoffs.

    476,    for two valves which alternately close the same outlet, without
    structure defining a trap chamber.


CLS 222/451
TXT Dispensers under subclass 450 having valves or cutoffs connected for
    operation without relative movement of the cutoff members or surfaces to
    one another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    344+,   for cutoff units which shift the included charge of material bodily
    to a discharge position removed from the intake position.


CLS 222/452
TXT Dispensers under subclass 451 in which the cutoff unit rotates and/or
    pivots in the trapping operation but has no other character of motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    367+,   for rotary trap chambers, and see the notes thereto.

    444,    for a cutoff or valve which alternately connects the single orifice
    of a trap with separate inlet and outlet passages of the dispenser.


CLS 222/453
TXT Dispensers under subclass 451 in which the cutoff unit is mounted for
    reciprocable motion substantially along the axis of the openings
    controlled, but having no other character of motion.

    (1)     Note.  A single cutoff element alternately closing the inlet and
    outlet passages of the trap is here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    361+,   for reciprocating trap chambers, particularly subclass 365, for
    those having plural concentric enlargements on a stem.

    476,    for plural cutoffs alternately seating at a single outlet, there
    being no structure defining a trap.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 307+ for unitary reciprocating stop and
    waste valves in hydrants; subclasses 596+ for other stop and waste systems;
    subclasses 602+ for multiple inlet with single outlet systems; subclasses
    861+ for systems with flow control means for plural passages; subclass 613
    for systems comprising a single flow path having plural serial valves; and
    subclass 627.5 for sequentially closing and opening alternately seating
    flow controllers.


CLS 222/454
TXT Dispensers under subclass 424.5 having a trap chamber so connected to the
    main container that the organization must be tilted both to fill the trap
    and discharge material therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    425+,   for such devices having valves or other cutoffs necessary to the
    trapping operation, and see the notes thereto.

    457.5,  for dispenser organizations having a U-shaped path for material to
    be discharged, but no enlargement or other arrangement forming a trap
    chamber, so that material is caused to traverse the path by shaking the
    container to and fro.

    584,    for a dispensing inkwell organization which must be tilted to fill
    the trap from the supply chamber and righted for access of a penpoint to
    the trap.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 288 for article dispensers comprising
    tiltable container sources of supply having trap means associated therewith.


CLS 222/455
TXT Dispensers under subclass 454 having a supplementary trap which fills as
    final trap dispenses, so that each charge dispensed is segregated by the
    tilting movements of the preceding dispensing operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    547     and 564, for material discharge guides which direct material toward
    or away from the outlet but do not segregate the position to be discharged.


CLS 222/456
TXT Dispensers under subclass 454 having a single discharge passage which
    functions also as the trap chamber.


CLS 222/457
TXT Dispensers under subclass 424.5 in which flow from the supply to the
    trapping chamber is (1) of the barometric control type, i.e., the vent to
    the supply is closed by material accumulated in the trapping chamber, or
    (2) is of the type where solid material in the trapping chamber builds up
    to its angle of repose and stops flow from the supply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    353,    for movable trap chambers of this type.

    437,    for trap chambers of this type having cutoffs and means to vary the
    volume delivered to the trap chambers.

    476,    and following subclasses, for flow controllers which do not close
    outlet but cause solid material to build up to its angle of repose and stop
    flow from the supply, there being no trap.

    479,    for dispensing having plural coterminous openings (usually tubular
    spouts), many of which are disclosed for operation on a barometric
    principle when used to deliver to an unclaimed receptacle.

    585+,   for a barometric dispensing inkwell; and see the search notes
    thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, for barometric watering devices.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 261 and 453+ for barometric type fluid
    handling systems.

    184,    Lubrication, subclass 84 for barometric lubricators.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclass 73 for barometric liquid
    supply means for such apparatus.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclass 120 for the
    combination of a container having a reservoir of coating material, a
    material trap chamber to which flow from the reservoir is controlled by
    atmospheric pressure, and a hand-manipulable applicator separable from the
    container for use independently thereof.


CLS 222/457.5
TXT Dispensers under the class definition of the hand shaker type having means
    to form an outlet passage extending generally parallel to the path taken by
    the material in reaching the container end of the passage so that the
    material discharged follows a generally U-shaped path.

    (1)     Note.  The passage may be an internally extending outlet or it may
    be formed externally of the supply container by a spaced shield or jacket.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    454,    for dispensers in which the material is discharged through a
    U-shaped path but in which a portion of the path forms a trap chamber which
    is filled and emptied by successive tilting movements of the dispenser.

    547     and 564, for dispensers of the gravity discharge type having
    material guide means for the interior of the container.


CLS 222/459
TXT Dispensers under the class definition having means fixed relatively to the
    supply receptacle but acting on movement of the receptacle or of the
    material to cause an admixing of the material to loosen compacted material.
    etc.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes dispensers having fixed structure
    which inhibits compacting of the material in the vicinity of the outlet by
    providing a space into which the material may spread, such as a downwardly
    diverging side wall or a laterally disposed connecting compartment, so that
    pressure at the outlet is reduced and bridging or compacting is prevented.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160+,   where the receptacle is movably mounted.


CLS 222/460
TXT Dispensers under the class definition having outlets of funnel type, i.e.,
    outlets so shaped and so related to the receptacle with which they are
    connected as to be capable of use as funnels.

    (1)     Note.  The term "funnel" is used in its conventional sense as
    guiding the flow from a pouring type container to a desired point, as into
    a receiver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 331+ for a funnel type filling means with receiver or receiver
    coacting means.


CLS 222/461
TXT Dispensers under subclass 460 in which the funnel is connected to the
    dispensing container by means permitting relative motion.


CLS 222/462
TXT Dispensers under subclass 460 in which the funnel is permanently connected
    to the container.


CLS 222/463
TXT Dispensers under the class definition (1) having features specially
    designed to permit the receptacle to be rocked on the surface on which it
    may be resting, usually to a dispensing position and/or (2) having weights
    incorporated in the receptacle structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160+,   for movably mounted dispensers.

    173+,   for dispensers with a casing or     support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 284 for article dispensers having
    weighted base or support structures.


CLS 222/464.1
TXT INTERNALLY EXTENDING OUTLET PIPE:

    Subject matter under the class definition including  an outlet pipe
    extending internally from the container.

    (1)     Note.  A dispenser adapted to operate by suction is placed here
    when only the container and internal outlet pipe are claimed, even though
    the arrangement is such that suction is necessary to cause dispensing.
    Certain types of canteens and those containers for use with spray guns
    having the internally extending outlet pipe as part of the container
    assembly are included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211,    for a resilient wall dispenser having an internally extending
    outlet pipe.

    382,    for a discharge assistant casing having an internally extending
    outlet pipe.

    434,    for a trap chamber (disclosed as continuously connected to a
    supply) provided with an internally extending outlet pipe which may be
    adjusted relative to the trap and its content to vary the discharge volume.

    456,    for a tiltable container trap having a single discharge passage
    forming a trap.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 434+, especially 440 and 442+ for a
    level responsive fluid handling system including an internally extending
    inlet pipe; subclasses 577+ and 590+ for a distribution system comprising
    an internally extended flow pipe.


CLS 222/464.2
TXT Porous or having plural apertures:

    Subject matter under subclass 464.1 wherein at least a portion of the
    outlet pipe is made of a porous material or the pipe has more than one
    inlet passages.

    (1)     Note.  An outlet pipe having a porous material or plural inlets for
    the purpose of separating are not in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189.11, for an internally extended outlet pipe with a filter


CLS 222/464.3
TXT Movable:

    Subject matter under subclass 464.1 wherein the outlet pipe is (a) so
    constructed as to be movable relative to a part to which it is attached, or
    (b) so connected to other part as to be movable relative thereto for
    purpose other than mere attachment or detachment.


CLS 222/464.4
TXT Weighted:

    Subject matter under subclass 464.3 wherein the outlet pipe includes a
    weight to keep an inlet of the pipe within a content to be dispensed.


CLS 222/464.5
TXT Telescopic:

    Subject matter under subclass 464.3 including an outlet pipe constructed of
    two or more sections connected to one another in a manner such that one
    section projects into another to provide a relative movement therebetween.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 8 for a telescopic receptacle.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclass 32 for a threaded telescopic
    insertable section and subclasses 145.1+ for a joint system comprising
    serial relatively movable diverse joints, in which one is telescopic.


CLS 222/464.6
TXT Float:

    Subject matter under subclass 464.3 wherein a floating means is associated
    with the outlet pipe to provide a buoyancy to the pipe.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 442+ for a level responsive fluid
    handling system.


CLS 222/464.7
TXT Including sump:

    Subject matter under subclass 464.1 wherein an inlet to the outlet pipe
    extends into a supplemental or a trap chamber communicating with a supply
    chamber intended for completely exhausting the dispensing material or
    trapping a small amount of dispensing material.

    (1)     Note.  The trap chamber may be formed by walls within the supply
    chamber, or by a depression in the bottom wall (including conical bottom
    walls).


CLS 222/465.1
TXT WITH CONTAINER HANDLE OR HANDGRIPS:

    Dispensers under the class definition having a handle or handgrip connected
    to the dispenser container and by means of which the dispenser may be
    handled.


CLS 222/466
TXT Dispensers under subclass 465.1 having at least two handles.

    (1)     Note.  One of the handles may be an auxiliary handle which
    facilitates tilting the receptacle for pouring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164+,   for tiltably mounted receptacles.


CLS 222/467
TXT Dispensers under subclass 466 in which at least one handle is detachable.


CLS 222/468
TXT Dispensers under subclass 465.1 having a vent in the container handle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    478+,   for dispensers having plural openings, one or more of which may be
    vents, and see the notes to such subclasses.


CLS 222/469
TXT Dispensers under subclass 465.1 having a handle for the supply container
    and movably connected thereto, connected also to a valve, closure, or other
    flow controller or its actuating means.


CLS 222/470
TXT Dispensers under subclass 465.1 having the container handle and the
    actuator for the valve, closure or other flow controller are so disposed as
    to be conveniently manipulated by one hand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142.1+, for plural containers which may be grasped in the hand and which
    have an actuator for a closure so related to the grasped surface that the
    grasping hand may be employed to actuate the closure.


CLS 222/471
TXT Dispensers under subclass 470 having the actuator movable to and fro in a
    straight line in the direction of the length of the handle.


CLS 222/472
TXT Dispensers under subclass 470 having the actuator pivotally mounted.


CLS 222/473
TXT Dispensers under subclass 472 having the actuator pivotally mounted on the
    container handle.


CLS 222/474
TXT Dispensers under subclass 472 having the pivoted actuator extending
    substantially in the same direction as the main or hand fitting position of
    the handle.


CLS 222/475
TXT Dispensers under subclass 465.1 having the spout serving as a handle, or
    having the handle positioned to protect or support the spout or as a nonuse
    housing for the spout.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    538+,   for nonuse positioning or housing of discharge guides in general.


CLS 222/475.1
TXT Handle and spout for hot liquid decanters (e.g., coffee servers):

    Dispensers under subclass 465.1 in which both a handle and spout are
    attached to a dispensing decanter for hot liquids.

    (1)     Note.  Most of these dispensers are "coffee decanters".


CLS 222/476
TXT Dispensers under the class definition in which plural spaced discharge
    controllers or closures are alternately seated in a single container outlet.

    (1)     Note.  The structure necessary for a trap chamber is lacking and
    the quantity discharged being determined only by the duration of the
    interval of free flow from the unseating of the first to the seating of the
    second flow controller or closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196.1+, for this subject matter where the dispenser is of the hand
    manipulable shaker type.

    365,    for reciprocating trap chambers having plural concentric
    enlargements on a stem.

    425+,   for plural, spaced discharge controllers associated with a trap
    chamber, and see the Notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, see search note under section 11, this class
    definition.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 298 for article dispensers having
    separately acting series controllers, and subclasses 299+ for similar
    structures in which the series controllers are of integral structures.


CLS 222/477
TXT Dispensers under the class definition having means in connection with
    operating means for the discharge controllers or closures for retarding the
    normal rate of operation and thus providing an interval between the
    actuating operation and the effective action of the controller or closure
    to cut off discharge, during which interval dispensing occurs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59+,    for cut offs operated by rate of flow responsive mechanism.

    476,    where there are spaced alternately seated flow controllers or
    closures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 15+, and particularly subclass 16
    for article dispensing devices having timing or delay mechanism associated
    therewith.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 48+ for nonstop valves, many
    of which have means, such as dash-pots or current rotating elements for
    retarding or delaying the closing action of the valve.


CLS 222/478
TXT Dispensers under the class definition having (1) two or more openings at
    least one of which is a dispensing outlet, or (2) two or more separate
    discharge guides, or (3) a combination between (1) and (2).

    (1)     Note. Provided that there is one dispensing outlet, the additional
    openings may be for filling, venting or other nondispensing purpose.

    (2)     Note.  Pattern type openings formed in either the container wall an
    interior guide or baffle or in a flow controller, are treated as a single
    opening; see subclasses 564 and 565 and the notes thereto.

    (3)     Note.  Plural openings may comprise (1) containers having two or
    more separate openings through the walls thereof, at least two of which are
    for purposes other than the mere passage of actuating elements, mounting or
    connecting means for movable dispenser parts, (2) containers having a
    single opening thereinto and a discharge controller having plural openings
    (one or all of which may be pattern type) so related to the container
    opening as to permit flow through the controller openings alternatively,
    (3) containers having a single opening, and a discharge controller having a
    single opening (which may be of pattern type) so mounted as to present its
    opening over the container opening or to uncover the container opening
    (this type usually having a third position in which the container opening
    is closed with the flow controller opening out of register therewith).

    (4)     Note.  In subclasses following 478+ are a container having a single
    opening (other than openings for the mere passage of actuating elements,
    mounting or connecting means for movable dispenser parts) and a discharge
    controller having a single opening (including pattern type) the discharge
    controller being movable from outlet closing position to a position to
    cause its opening to partially or wholly register with the container
    opening.

    (5)     Note.  In the subclasses following 478+ are dispensers having a
    single discharge opening with movable elements associated therewith (as
    movable discharge guides, closures, valves, or other flow controllers,
    etc.) and actuating, mounting, or connecting means for such movable
    elements, in which the actuating, mounting, or connecting means may pass
    through the container walls through openings formed for such purposes.
    Where structure or relations are claimed by means of which the actuator
    mounting or connecting means or its opening also function as vents or for
    any purpose in addition to permitting passage of the actuating, mounting,
    or connecting means, classification is in this (478) or the indented
    subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for indicator combinations to indicate which of plural outlets are
    selected for operation.

    69,     for float controlled vents.

    85+,    for cutter combinations which cut plural openings in a container
    whose contents are to be dispensed.

    129+,   for combinations of two or more dispensers.

    188,    for fluid-trap-seal for outlets and vents.

    189.01, 189.02+, and 189.06+, for dispensers having porous and/or
    foraminous material for outlets and vents, the purpose being the separation
    of diverse types of material.

    249+,   for dispensers with a floating piston and plural or alternate
    discharge.

    252+,   for dispensers with plural discharge assistants delivering to the
    same or different outlets.

    318,    for miscellaneous discharge assistants with material by-pass or
    return to supply.

    330+,   for miscellaneous discharge assistant and devices having plural
    material outlets.

    332,    for movable trap chambers having a vent passage.

    375,    for dispensers having a supply delivering to a casing enclosed
    discharge assistant and having antileak or antisiphon means.

    387,    for material containers having a follower with means to vent gas
    from the material side of the follower.

    396     and 397, for material containers in which fluid under pressure
    contacts the material to cause discharge and having fluid pressure limiting
    means, usually a pressure actuated check valve or manual valve for venting.

    397,    see reference to 396 above.

    425+,   and see the notes thereto for trap chambers, which have an inlet
    connected to a supply and an outlet, 426+, having plural nonserial trap
    chambers connected to the same supply, 431+, having trap chambers with
    plural or alternate discharge outlets and 442, trap chambers with vents.

    468,    for vents in a dispenser receptacle handle.

    564,    for serial discharge guides, flow restrictors or flow restrictor
    and discharge guide, none of which are controllable.  See (2) Note.

    565,    see note 2 above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 561+ for distribution systems comprising
    plural outlets, inlets, overflows and/or vents, especially subclasses 583+
    for systems with plural openings, one an access opening or gas vent,
    subclasses 861+ for plural controlled passages and 613+ for single flow
    path, including tanks, with plural valves or closures, as for tank inlets
    and outlets.

    184,    Lubrication, subclasses 88.1+, for single receptacle lubricators
    having plural gravity feeds, and see subclasses 88+ for oil cup closures.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 307+ for closures providing means
    whereby the interior of the receptacle is communicable with the exterior.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 366.1 and 367.1+, for closures with vents.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 252 for article dispensing devices
    having discharge assisting means and plural article outlets, and subclasses
    61+ and 281+ for article dispensers having separate inlets for
    replenishment or ac-cess.


CLS 222/479
TXT Dispenses under subclass 478 in which the openings at the ends remote from
    the supply container (usually the ends of tubular spouts) terminate
    adjacent each other.  One is usually the dispensing outlet and the other a
    vent to be closed by accumulation of material in an unclaimed trap or
    independent container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    353,    for movable, barometric trap chambers.

    437,    for nonmovable, barometric trap chambers with means to vary the
    volume trapped.

    457,    for miscellaneous barometric trap chambers, and see the Notes
    thereto, for related art.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 295+, especially subclass 308, for multiple passage filling
    means for diverse flows.


CLS 222/480
TXT Devices under subclass 478 of the "dredge top" type, i.e., hand
    manipulable, shaker type in which there are claimed a plurality of
    dispensing openings having different characteristics in the top thereof, or
    different functions.

    (1)     Note.  For example, there may be plural dispensing openings of
    different size to be selectively used, arrangements to have one large
    pouring opening and a multiplicity of small sifter openings, etc.

    (2)     Note.  See notes (1) through (4) of subclass 478 for a more
    complete statement on plural openings.

    (3)     Note.  See section 12, and 12.5 of the main class definition and
    see the notes thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    478,    see note (2) above.

    486,    for devices not of the hand manipulable shaker type that have
    plural outlets and common or interconnected discharge controllers and/or
    closures operable to expose selected one or groups of outlets.

    547,    for dispensers having a foraminous baffle in the container at a
    point removed from the outlet, which is provided with a closure or
    discharge controller.  The baffle serves to hold back or restrict the
    passage of material to the outlet or to distribute the flow.

    564,    for dispensers having foraminous baffles remote from the outlet,
    which serve to distribute and/or restrict the passage of material to the
    outlet, particularly for use in hand manipulable shakers.

    565,    and see the notes thereto for openings of sifter, sprinkler or
    pattern type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 205+ for valves with
    graduated ports.


CLS 222/481
TXT Dispensers under subclass 478 having at least one element in the form of
    either a closure or a flow controller (e.g., restrictor or valve) for at
    least one of the openings.

    (1)     Note.  A flow controller may interrupt discharge by establishing
    the angle of repose of the material, when the outlet is not entirely closed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    425+,   and see the notes thereto for trap chambers having single or plural
    cutoffs.

    502+,   for sectional controllers or closures for a single outlet.

    544+,   and see the notes thereto for flow controllers and closures in
    other relations.


CLS 222/481.5
TXT Dispensers under subclass 481 having vent means related to one of the
    openings, which vent means comprises a flexible pipe, a pipe mounted for
    movement relative to an outlet element, or means having an inlet connected
    to the supply container at a point remote from the material outlet and
    connected to said material outlet or controlled by the operation of the
    means for controlling said material outlet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400.5   through 402, and especially subclass 400.5 for similar
    organizations having a fluid pressure operating pump attached to the remote
    opening.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses 98+, for wooden barrel bung vent
    structures.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 366 and 367+, for vents associated with
    metallic receptacle structure.


CLS 222/482
TXT Dispensers under subclass 481 having at least two closures and/or flow
    controllers or one closure or controller for at least two openings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    506,    and see the notes thereto for plural closures and/or flow
    controllers for single openings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 625+ for multiway valve units.


CLS 222/483
TXT Dispensers under subclass 482 having means interconnected with the
    discharge controllers or closures preventing manipulation of one unless
    another is in a certain desired position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 87 for
    interlocks applied to such apparatus.

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclass 36 for acetylene generator
    water feeds with interlocking devices.

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclass 49 for means to direct or
    control traffic through a closure passage.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 586 for tank access and outlet interlock
    or telltale.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 116.5+ for stop
    mechanism interlocks.


CLS 222/484
TXT Dispensers under subclass 482 having at least two of the flow controllers
    and/or closures either (1) interconnected to be moved together, or (2)
    integral with each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    425+,   for interconnected discharge controllers that form a trap chamber.

    476,    for spaced alternately seated controllers for a single outlet.


CLS 222/485
TXT Dispensers under subclass 484 in which the plural interconnected flow
    controllers and/or closures are for two or more dispensing outlets.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    431+,   for plural outlets from a trap chamber.

    480,    and the notes thereto for pattern, sprinkler or sifter type.  The
    presence of some structure to give the outlets individual significance is
    required for this subclass (485) as interior or external material discharge
    guides, separate controller or closure element for the outlets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 861+ for plural controlled flow passages
    in a distribution system.


CLS 222/486
TXT Dispensers under subclass 485 having the discharge controllers and/or
    closures operable to expose or control certain groups of the outlets
    selectively or having them relatively operable or adjustable individually
    either by adjustment of the actuators or by additional discharge
    controllers and/or closures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142.6   and 144.5, for plural compartment dispensers in which closure means
    associated with the outlets of the various compartments permit selective
    opening and closing of such outlets.

    142.7,  for plural compartment dispensers having plural, relatively movable
    outlet valve means.

    283,    for plural discharge volume varying means for discharge assistants.

    485,    where only provision for variable discharge is due to the
    simultaneous movement of all of the flow controllers and/or closures to
    less than their fully open position.

    502,    for sectional discharge controllers or closures for single outlet
    openings, each section being movable relative to the other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 627, 627.5, 628, 635, and 636 for
    sequentially or selectively operated plural valves.


CLS 222/487
TXT Dispensers under subclass 484 in which at least two discharge controllers
    and/or closures are connected together for relative movement by nonrigid
    connecting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    445+,   for trap chambers having nonrigidly interconnected cutoffs.


CLS 222/488
TXT Dispensers under subclass 481 in which at least two passages merge into a
    single passage, which single passage has a flow controller or closure.

    (1)     Note.  The plural passages may be either external or internal with
    respect to the flow controller or closure.


CLS 222/489
TXT Dispensers under subclass 488 in which the flow controller or closure is of
    the screw type, i.e., carries or is rigid with an element that carries
    screw threads for connection to some other part, so as to be movable
    because of screw motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    549+,   for miscellaneous dispensers with screw type flow controller or
    closures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 215+ and 264+ for screw
    actuated valves.


CLS 222/490
TXT Devices under the class definition in which a diaphragm or nipple of
    resilient material (such as rubber) has an aperture therethrough, the walls
    of which contact each other in the normal unstressed condition, the walls
    separating when stressed to permit passage of material and resiliently
    returning into contact when the stress is removed.

    (1)     Note.  In many of these devices the pressure of the contents causes
    the diaphragm or nipple to be stressed. Where the pressure creating means
    is claimed, see appropriate preceding subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92+,    for collapsible wall receptacles. Where this type outlet is claimed
    in combination with a collapsible wall type receptacle recited by name (no
    characteristics thereof being recited, and no combined feature for
    operating on the wall), the patent is placed in subclass 490.

    206+,   for resilient wall dispensers.

    251+,   and see the notes thereto for dispensers having means for creating
    pressure on the contents to be dispensed.

    491+,   for other types of resilient outlets operated by pressure of the
    container contents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 525 for resilient material valves opened
    by pressure of material in the line.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclass 11 for nipples.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, sub- classes 4+ for tube compressors.


CLS 222/491
TXT Dispensers under the class definition in which there is a movable outlet
    element operated by the pressure of the container contents, where the
    pressure creating means are not claimed.

    (1)     Note.  The movable element is usually a discharge guide, flow
    controller or closure.  Since many types of such devices having manual
    actuators are capable of actuation by the pressure of the contents, though
    not intended to so operate, only those disclosed for pressure operation and
    having no manual actuator are placed here.

    (2)     Note.  Where the means for creating the pressure on the contents is
    claimed, see appropriate preceding subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92+,    for collapsible wall type receptacles. Where the pressure operable
    outlet element is claimed in combination with a collapsible wall receptacle
    recited by name (no characteristics thereof being recited and no combined
    feature for operation on the wall) the patent is placed in 491+.

    251+,   and see the notes thereto for dispensers having means for creating
    pressure on the container contents.

    335,    for valves, closures, followers, pistons, etc., arranged on the
    receptacle interior, the pressure of the material dispensed causing the
    same to move toward the outlet and push material ahead of the same.

    490,    for slitted resilient diaphragms or nipples.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 455+ for valves operated by a change of
    line fluid condition, as by increased pressure; subclasses 602+ for systems
    having multiple inlet with single outlet; subclasses 861+ for systems with
    flow control means for plural passages; and subclasses 613+ for single flow
    path systems with plural serial valves and/or closures.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 203.01+ for a receptacle closure comprising
    a pressure responsive vent or valve.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 295 for article dispensers which are
    latch released and article weight operated.


CLS 222/492
TXT Dispensers under subclass 491 in which the pressure moved element is of
    tubular, sleeve or apertured cap form and through which the material is
    dispensed and which is slidable along its axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    522+,   for miscellaneous axially slidable tubes, sleeves and apertured
    caps, and see the notes thereto.


CLS 222/493
TXT Dispensers under subclass 492 in which the contents are discharged axially
    of the movable element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    525,    for miscellaneous axially slidable tubes, sleeves or apertured caps
    and see the notes thereto.


CLS 222/494
TXT Dispensers under subclass 491 in which the element moved by the pressure of
    the contents is (1) in the form of a spring, (2) is resilient, and/or (3)
    is compressible.

    (1)     Note.  Rigid devices, spring biased, are in subclass 491 or other
    appropriate indented subclasses, but resilient or compressible devices are
    here (subclass 494) even though there is an additional spring bias.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    490,    for resilient diaphragms or nipples having slits.

    491,    see note 1.


CLS 222/495
TXT Dispensers under subclass 491 in which the pressure moved element is in the
    form of a nonpivoted element that reciprocates.


CLS 222/496
TXT Dispensers under subclass 495 in which the movable element is biased by
    spring or any means other than its own weight.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    511+,   for miscellaneous dispensers having biasing means for movable parts
    and see the notes thereto.


CLS 222/497
TXT Dispensers under subclass 496 in which means are provided (in addition to
    the biasing means) to hold the movable element against motion.


CLS 222/498
TXT Dispensers under the class definition in which means are provided for
    causing a movable outlet element to move with snap action.

    (1)     Note.  Such means may be applied to the movable element itself, or
    applied to the actuating means therefor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    542,    for compression of a resilient packing type seal for an outlet
    member, which is not considered snap action.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., particularly subclasses 588+, for
    head and socket-type fasteners operating with a snap action.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, particularly subclasses 97 and 100,
    for snap acting mechanical movements.

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 60, for closures forced into place and held
    by interfitting integral, snap acting parts of the closure and receptacle.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 75 for snap action of valves.


CLS 222/499
TXT Dispensers under subclass 498 in which the movable element is in the form
    of a tube, sleeve or apertured cap that moves along its own axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    522+,   and see the notes thereto for miscellaneous axially slidable tubes,
    sleeves or apertured caps.


CLS 222/500
TXT Dispensers under the class definition in which a movable discharge guide,
    flow controller and/or closure is constructed and mounted to move, relative
    to the container due to action of gravity when the position of the
    container changes (as by setting on its base which operation causes an
    element to be actuated) or due to inertia when the container is rapidly
    moved.

    (1)     Note.  Since many manually movable elements are capable of this
    operation, only those designed and constructed for such purpose and having
    no manual actuating means in addition to the movable element have been
    placed here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196.1+, for this subject matter where the dispenser is of the hand
    manipulable shaker type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 38+ for flow control by change of
    position or inertia of a fluid handling system.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 186+ and 288 for movably mounted and
    tiltable container trap type article dispensers, respectively, such devices
    including means responsive to gravity or inertia to effect segregation or
    ejection of the articles to be dispensed.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclass 274, wherein the
    implement is of the brush, broom, or mop type and has means controlling the
    flow of material from a reservoir to the tool, which means is actuated by a
    change in position or inclination of the entire implement.


CLS 222/501
TXT Dispensers under the class definition in which means are provided for
    operating a movable outlet element, which actuator or some part thereof
    extends through the material passage of a nozzle or other discharge guide.
    The actuator may be an integral part of the movable element.

    (1)     Note.  Dispensers having closures of this same type disclosed to be
    operated by contact with an applicator, as a pen or brush dipped in the
    contents, are here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149+,   for cleaning elements extending through a dispenser outlet, and see
    the note to subclass 501 for the line.

    322,    for discharge assistants having an actuator extending through the
    dispenser outlet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 771 for valve actuators extending through
    fluid inlet or outlet.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 208+, where the
    implement includes a tool which is movable upon contact with the work
    surface (e.g., roller, ball, endless belt) to transfer material from the
    reservoir to the work surface; and subclasses 206, 235, 258+, 264, and
    272+, for other implements wherein flow-regulating means (e.g., valve) is
    actuated upon contact of the work-surface-engaging means with the work.


CLS 222/502
TXT Dispensers under the class definition where the the discharge controller or
    closure is formed of two or more parts, each covering part of the outlet
    opening and each movable both relative to each other and relative to the
    container.

    (1)     Note.  Slat type devices where all slats are connected together to
    move as a unit are not included.

    (2)     Note.  The movement may be for adjustment of the outlet size.

    (3)     Note.  For plural outlets having flow controllers or closures, see
    preceding subclasses, and for single outlets having serial flow controllers
    or closures, see subsequent subclasses, these being referred to in the
    following notes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198,    for single outlets bounded by plural vibrating members.

    316,    for discharge assistants of rotor type with sectional discharge
    controllers.

    481+,   for discharge controllers, for plural openings.

    545+,   and see the notes thereto for plural nonsectional flow controllers
    or closures for single outlets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 1.1+ for valve type blowout
    preventers comprising an annular valve or segments closing around a well or
    drill pipe.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 68.24, for
    hoisting-bucket type with twin doors.

    298,    Land Vehicles:  Dumping, particularly subclasses 25 and 33+.


CLS 222/503
TXT Dispensers under subclass 502 in which actuation of one section of the
    controller or closure causes relative movement of another part.


CLS 222/504
TXT Dispensers under the class definition having a movable element pertaining
    to the outlet actuated by a motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for cutoff valves operated by preset volume or rate of flow
    mechanism.

    333,    and see the notes thereto for other motor combinations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclass 53.3 for diaphragm; e.g.,
    fluid motor, operated poppet valves for carbid dispensers.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 240 for motor operated doors for
    dumping car bodies.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 11 for heat or bouyancy motor
    actuated valves; subclasses 12+ for fluid actuated or retarded valves,
    especially subclasses 25+ for the servo-motor type, and subclasses 129+ for
    electric motor actuated valves.


CLS 222/505
TXT Dispensers under the class definition in which a movably mounted discharge
    guide, flow controller and/or closure has some means to actuate it which
    means is so connected with such movable element as to be capable of
    relative motion.  Where two or more of the enumerated elements are
    interconnected for relative motion, one may be the actuator for another.  A
    swivel connection (as between a screw actuator and its operated element) is
    included.

    (1)     Note.  For biased outlet elements having biasing means but not
    other relatively movable actuator, see subclasses 511+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177,    for ambulant supports having means operated by a ground wheel to
    actuate movable dispenser elements.

    359+,   and see the notes thereto for conveyor type or movable trap
    chambers with relatively movable actuator.

    448,    for miscellaneous trap chambers having cutoffs with relatively
    movable actuator.

    469,    for dispensers with movable handles interconnected with flow
    controllers or closures.

    470+,   for containers with handles and an actuator for flow controllers or
    closures so related to the handle as to provide for one-handed manipulation.

    481+,   for flow controllers or closures for dispensers having plural
    openings.

    503,    for sectional flow controllers or closures, with the sections so
    interconnected that actuation of one section causes relative movement of
    another.

    511,    see note 1 above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 272+ for article dispensers having
    discharge assisting means with relatively movable actuators associated
    therewith.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, appropriate subclasses for valve
    operating mechanisms; e.g., mechanical movement actuators for valves,
    subclasses 213+; geared, subclasses 248+; cam actuated, subclasses 251+;
    lever actuated, subclasses 231+; toggle actuated, subclass 280; push or
    pull button, subclasses 319+.


CLS 222/506
TXT Dispensers under subclass 505 in which there are two or more flow
    controllers and/or closures at least one thereof having a relatively
    movable actuator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    476,    for spaced alternately seated flow controllers or closures for a
    single outlet.

    481+,   for dispensers having plural openings and either single or plural
    flow controllers or closures associated therewith.

    502,    for sectional flow controllers or closures for single openings, the
    sections being movable relative to each other and to the container and each
    section covering part of the opening.

    532,    for closure type movable discharge guide with an additional flow
    controller or closure for the outlet with which the guide is associated.

    545+,   for miscellaneous single outlet dispensers with plural flow
    controllers or closures.


CLS 222/507
TXT Dispensers under subclass 505 in which the relatively movable actuator is
    an annular form and surrounds the container outlet.

    (1)     Note.  Such movable actuator may be an apertured cap or a nozzle,
    or other form of discharge guide, for a second movable outlet element.

    (2)     Note.  The actuated movable outlet element may have any character
    of motion.


CLS 222/508
TXT Dispensers under subclass 505 in which the movable element, located within
    the container, is pivoted or otherwise mounted to swing about an axis
    displaced from the axis of the discharge opening with which the movable
    element is associated.  The relatively movable actuating means for such
    movable outlet element may have any character of motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    535,    for material discharge guides mounted to swing in the container
    interior to a position of use, there being no relatively movable actuator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 298+ for pivoted valves.


CLS 222/509
TXT Dispensers under subclass 505 in which a movable outlet element (having no
    rotary motion) is mounted for reciprocable motion substantially along the
    axis of a discharge opening.  The relatively movable actuating means for
    such movable outlet element may have any motion and may be pivotally
    connected to the stem of the reciprocable element.


CLS 222/510
TXT Dispensers under the class definition in which the discharge outlet with
    its movable feed controller, closure or discharge guide is located in one
    wall, and an actuating rod therefor extends through the container and
    through a wall (or a portion of a circular wall) displaced from the wall in
    which the discharge opening is located.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    378,    for aligned container, nozzle, actuator, and discharge assistant
    having a casing.

    505+,   for similar arrangements where the actuator moves relative to the
    movable outlet element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 326 for systems in which a foot valve may
    be removed through an opening in the top of the tank; subclasses 585+ for
    tanks having an access opening and a foot valve.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 144 for valves mounted on
    tanks in which no more tank is claimed than is necessary to mount the valve.


CLS 222/511
TXT Dispensers under the class definition having resilient means biasing a
    movable discharge guide, a flow controller and/or a closure to a desired
    position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142.7,  for plural compartment hand shaker type dispensers in which plural
    relatively movable closures have a common biasing means.

    230,    for biasing means that are agitators and see note 1 for the line.

    313,    for drum type rotors having biased discharge controllers for
    controlling discharge volume.

    336+,   for biasing means for a discharge assistant or a casing therefor.

    349+,   for yielding striking or clearing means for conveyor type or
    movable trap chambers.

    449,    for biasing means for trap chamber cutoffs.

    491+,   for biased outlet elements that are operable by the pressure of the
    dispensed material.

    550,    for devices weight biased.

    505+,   for biased actuators so connected to the movable outlet element as
    to be movable relative thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclass 315 for those having tube closures and
    spring operated valves.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 336+ for biased valves not
    otherwise provided for.


CLS 222/512
TXT Dispensers under subclass 511 in which the biasing means has the sole
    function of increasing the resistance to material flow through a joint
    (contacting surfaces) between two relatively movable parts.

    (1)     Note.  Where the biasing means either has the sole function of
    moving the movable element to operative (discharging) or nonoperative
    (nondischarging) position, or has such function in addition to the joint
    sealing function, see subclass 511 or other appropriate indented subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    337+,   for discharge assistants with joint sealing biasing means.

    490,    for slitted, resilient diaphragms or nipples, the resilience of the
    diaphragm or nipple closing the slit.

    494,    for spring form, resilient or compressible flow controllers or
    closures that are pressure operable to open.

    511,    see note 1 above.

    542,    for packing type seals whether resilient or not where there is no
    additional resilient biasing means.


CLS 222/513
TXT Dispensers under subclass 511 in which the element biased is in the form of
    a movable tube or apertured cap.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    522+,   and see the notes thereto for movable tubes, sleeves or apertured
    caps in other relations.


CLS 222/514
TXT Dispensers under subclass 513 in which the movable tube or apertured cap
    has a single motion of sliding along its axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    522+,   for such devices without biasing means.


CLS 222/515
TXT Dispensers under subclass 511 in which the movable element has motions of
    two or more types and in definite paths.


CLS 222/516
TXT Dispensers under subclass 511 in which the movable element rotates about
    its own axis. Such motion may be less than 360 degrees.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    339,    for biased oscillating discharge assistants.


CLS 222/517
TXT Dispensers under subclass 511 in which the movable element is (1) pivoted,
    or (2) otherwise mounted to have swinging motion.


CLS 222/518
TXT Dispensers under subclass 511 in which the movable element reciprocates
    axially of an opening through which material flows.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246,    for agitator combinations having the same motion.

    336+,   for biased discharge assistants having the same motion.

    496+,   for biased reciprocable outlet elements operable by the pressure of
    the dispensed contents.

    509,    for outlet elements having this motion and a relatively movable
    actuator.

    510,    for outlet elements having this motion and a rod actuator extending
    through the container interior and out through a wall thereof.


CLS 222/519
TXT Dispensers under the class definition in which there is associated with the
    outlet a tube, sleeve, or apertured cap, at least one of which is
    constrained to have both a motion of rotation about and a motion
    longitudinally of its own axis.  The motion must be for some purpose other
    than or in addition to mere attachment or detachment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    522+,   for axially slidable devices of this type so mounted as to be
    capable of being rotated about its axis if desired, but having no means
    that requires this motion and including those having detent means which
    operate by rotation after an axial sliding motion.  See the notes for
    related art.

    549+,   for flow controllers or closures not of tube, sleeve or apertured
    cap form and having this motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 325 for tubular piston valves.


CLS 222/520
TXT Dispensers under subclass 519 in which the contents discharge axially of
    the outlet end of the tube, sleeve or apertured cap.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    525,    for such devices which do not have a constrained motion of rotation.


CLS 222/521
TXT Dispensers under subclass 520 in which there is a stationary plug located
    along the axis of the tube sleeve or apertured cap, which plug closes the
    passage therethrough when the tube or apertured cap is moved to one
    position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    525,    for similarly arranged plugs for slidable tubes, sleeves or
    apertured caps not having a constrained motion or rotation.


CLS 222/522
TXT Dispensers under the class definition in which there is associated with the
    outlet a tube, sleeve or apertured cap, at least one of which is mounted
    for slidable motion along its axis.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses have such devices having
    detent means which operate by rotation of the tube, sleeve or apertured cap
    after completion of the sliding motion.

    (2)     Note.  The motion must be for some purpose other than mere
    attachment or detachment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257+,   for plural discharge assistants, one being interconnected with a
    movable nozzle.

    320+,   for nozzles interconnected with discharge assistants.

    492+,   for similar devices operated by the pressure of the container
    contents.

    499,    for similar devices having snap acting means to control motion.

    513+,   for similar devices having resilient biasing means.

    519+,   for similar devices having also means constraining them to axially
    rotary motion.

    526+,   for material discharge guides mounted for miscellaneous types of
    motions.

    567+,   for nozzles, spouts and pouring devices having separable means for
    mere attachment and detachment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 325 for reciprocating tubular
    valves, and subclasses 341+ and 349+ for valve actuation by manipulation of
    one of the valve components, as casing or outlet or inlet elements.


CLS 222/523
TXT Dispensers under subclass 522 in which the tube, sleeve or apertured cap is
    made up of sections telescoping over one another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    379,    for encased discharge assistants having either or both an outlet or
    inlet made of telescoping sections.

    398,    for dispenser containers whose contents are caused to discharge by
    fluid under pressure where either or both the container or its outlet are
    made of telescoping sections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    291,    Track Sanders, subclass 45 for telescopic sand delivery pipes.


CLS 222/524
TXT Dispensers under subclass 522 in which there is a pin mounted on the
    container interior and over which the tube, sleeve, or apertured cap
    telescopes.


CLS 222/525
TXT Dispensers under subclass 522 in which discharge takes place axially of the
    outlet end of the tube or apertured cap.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    493,    for such devices operable by the pressure of the material dispensed.

    499,    for such devices having snap acting means to control motion.

    513+,   for such devices having biasing means.

    520+,   for such devices having also means constraining them to having an
    axially rotary motion.

    526+,   for axially discharging material discharge guides having
    miscellaneous motions.


CLS 222/526
TXT Dispensers under the class definition in which there is associated with the
    material outlet a material guide (1) so constructed as to be movable
    relative to the parts to which it is attachable, or (2) so connected to
    other parts as to be movable relative thereto for purposes other than mere
    attachment and detachment, or (3) both of the above.

    (1)     Note.  Such devices in special combinations, of particular form or
    attached and movable in particular ways are in the preceding subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74+,    for interlocks between a hose or other discharge guide and some
    other operable part.

    83,     for nozzles or other material guides that have a cutter or punch
    associated therewith and are mounted for motion.

    160+,   where the dispensing container is mounted for motion.

    257+,   for combinations of a follower and a casing enclosed impeller, at
    least one of them being interconnected with a movable nozzle.

    320+,   for movable nozzles interconnected with a single discharge
    assistant.

    461,    for funnel type outlets movably interconnected with a container.

    507,    for annular, outlet surrounding discharge guides which are movable
    relative to and constitute an actuator for a second movable outlet element.

    522+,   for axially slidable tubes, sleeves or apertured caps and see the
    notes thereto for related art.

    567+,   for nozzles, spouts and pouring devices having separable means for
    mere attachment and detachment purposes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 615+ for articulated or swinging flow
    conduits in distribution systems.

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, appropriate subclasses,
    for movable chutes.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 149, 150, 341+, and 349+ for
    other moving flow pipe sections and spouts.

    291,    Track Sanders, subclass 31, for flexible or movable pipes operable
    to cutoff sand feed.


CLS 222/527
TXT Dispensers under subclass 526 in which the guide is constructed, arranged,
    and intended to be foldable, bendable, collapsible, or flexible.  This may
    be because of either (1) the material used in, or (2) the structure of, the
    guide,

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    490,    for slitted, resilient diaphragms or nipples.

    523,    for sectional, axially telescoping, tubes, sleeves or apertured
    caps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 525+ for collapsible valves.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 4+ for tube compressors.

    291,    Track Sanders, subclass 44, for flexible sand delivery pipes.


CLS 222/528
TXT Dispensers under subclass 527 in which a wall of the discharge guide when
    in one (closed) position forms a closure for the outlet opening with which
    the guide is associated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    531+,   for other closure type movable guides.


CLS 222/529
TXT Dispensers under subclass 527 having also a flow controller or closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    537,    and see the notes thereto for other movable discharge guide
    combinations with flow controller or closure.


CLS 222/530
TXT Dispensers under subclass 527 having some means for securing the guide in a
    position of nonuse.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    538+,   and the notes thereto for other nonuse housing or securing means.


CLS 222/531
TXT Dispensers under subclass 526 in which a wall of the guide when in one
    (closed) position forms a closure for the outlet opening with which the
    guide is related.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    364,    for similar structures having material trapping features.

    528,    for closure type movable guides that are foldable, bendable,
    collapsible or flexible.

    536,    for swingable guides having integral or attached means not forming
    a guiding wall and operable as a flow controller or closure.


CLS 222/532
TXT Dispensers under subclass 531 having an additional flow controller, closure
    or seal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    537,    and see the notes thereto for other combinations of movable
    discharge guides with flow controllers or closures.


CLS 222/533
TXT Dispensers under subclass 526 in which the discharge guide has a swinging
    motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    531+,   for swinging discharge guides of the closure type.

    556+,   for swinging closures or flow controllers, there being no movable
    discharge guide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, subclasses 17 through
    23, for swingable chutes.

    291,    Track Sanders, subclass 47, for pivoted nozzles.


CLS 222/534
TXT Dispensers under subclass 533 in which the container has a recess in a wall
    thereof and the guide is mounted to swing into or out of the recess.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    540,    for stationary guides in a receptacle recess.


CLS 222/535
TXT Dispensers under subclass 533 in which the guide is mounted to swing from
    the container interior.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    508,    for outlet elements of various kinds mounted for swinging motion
    inside the receptacle and having relatively movable actuating means.


CLS 222/536
TXT Dispensers under subclass 533 having a flow controller or closure
    associated with the swingable guide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    537,    for other combinations of movable discharge guide with flow
    controller or closures, and see the notes thereto.


CLS 222/537
TXT Dispensers under subclass 526 having a flow controller or closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    507,    for annular, outlet surrounding actuators movable (usually by axial
    rotation or oscillation) relative to some other movable outlet element
    operated thereby, the actuator frequently being a discharge guide.

    522+,   for axially slidable tubes, sleeves or apertured caps, many of
    which have flow controllers or closures associated therewith and see the
    notes thereto for other sleeves, tubes, or apertured caps having axial
    slidable, rotary or combined motions.

    529,    for foldable, bendable, collapsible or flexible discharge guides
    combined with a closure or flow controller.

    531+,   for movable discharge guides of closure type.

    536,    for swingable discharge guides with flow controller or closure.

    544+,   for miscellaneous flow controllers or closures.


CLS 222/538
TXT Dispensers under the class definition having some means for securing the
    dispensing guide in some position other than the position in which it
    functions as an outlet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74+,    where, in the position of nonuse, the discharge guide interlocks
    with some means for controlling or causing discharge.

    475,    where the handle is the nonuse housing or supporting means.

    526+,   and see the Notes thereto for movably mounted material discharge
    guides, many of which are so mounted as to be movable to a nonuse position,
    e.g., to a housed position.

    540,    for outlets seated in a receptacle recess.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 338 and 343 for supply means having funnels requiring separation
    from the said supply for use.

    248,    Supports, subclass 79, for receptacle attached hose and/or nozzle
    supports.


CLS 222/539
TXT Dispensers under subclass 538 in which the dispensing outlet is detachable
    from the container, in order to be reversed in position and reattached to
    the container, extending thereinto.


CLS 222/540
TXT Dispensers under the class definition in which the dispensing outlet is
    seated in a recess formed in the container exterior.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    534,    for guides mounted to swing into a container recess.


CLS 222/541.1
TXT WITH FRANGIBLE CLOSURE FOR OUTLET:

    Subject matter under the class definition having a closure for an outlet of
    the dispenser intended to be broken, torn, cut, or punched for opening the
    same.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5       and 80+, for a cutter in combination with a punch for opening such
    closure.

    153.1+, for a fastening seal.

    532,    for a closure-type movable material guide combined with such
    closures.

    542,    for a packing-type seal that is not frangible.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclass 32 for a breakable receptacle neck and
    subclasses 250+ for a frangible bottle or jar closure.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 89.1+ and 265+ for a structure of this kind
    where no dispensing feature is claimed.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 302 for an article dispensing device
    having a frangible element for the outlet.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 200+ for a
    container structure to tear, cut, or break the container cover material.


CLS 222/541.2
TXT With cutting or punching or with cutter or puncher accommodating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 541.1 wherein the closure or a portion
    thereof, is constructed to be severed or ruptured by a cutting or rupturing
    operation, or constructed to receive a cutting or rupturing tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 400+ for a can opening device which is a
    cutting implement and which may be mounted on the can for the cutting
    operation but which is completely disassociated from the can to empty the
    can.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 30+ for an article dispensing device
    including or combined with a cutter or punch means to form an outlet
    opening in a supply receptacle or the wrapper therefor.


CLS 222/541.3
TXT Closure or closure portion broken by pressure of container content:

    Subject matter under subclass 541.1 wherein the closure or a part thereof
    is broken, torn, ruptured, or separated by the pressure of a dispensing
    material within the container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    491+,   for an outlet element that is not frangible but is movable by the
    pressure of the content in the dispenser.


CLS 222/541.4
TXT About line or point of weakness:

    Subject matter under subclass 541.3 wherein the tear, rupture, or
    separation occurs about a predetermined line or point of weakness.


CLS 222/541.5
TXT Having reusable closure:

    Subject matter under subclass 541.1 wherein the frangible closure is reused
    to close the outlet of the dispenser.


CLS 222/541.6
TXT About line or point of weakness:

    Subject matter under subclass 541.1 wherein the break, tear, or cut occurs
    about a predetermined line or point of weakness.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    541.4,  for a closure or a closure portion broken about a line or point of
    weakness by the pressure of container content.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 250+ for a frangible closure under
    that class definition.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 266+ for a frangible closure about a line
    or point of weakness.


CLS 222/541.7
TXT Adapted for engagement with special tool (e.g., slotted key):

    Subject matter under subclass 541.6 wherein the closure element or portion
    thereof is constucted to accommodate a distinct or special tool such as a
    slotted key.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 274+ for a frangible member with gripping
    means having a special tool.


CLS 222/541.8
TXT Tool serves as closure:

    Subject matter under subclass 541.7 wherein the tool is used for providing
    a cover for the outlet of the dispenser.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 278 for a puncturing tool which serves as a
    closure.


CLS 222/541.9
TXT With integral gripping means (e.g., pull tab):

    Subject matter under subclass 541.6 comprising a member formed as a unit
    with the closure element and adapted to be firmly grasped for opening the
    closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153.7+, for a frangible fastening seal having a pull tab.


CLS 222/542
TXT Dispensers under the class definition in which packing, gasket, or sealing
    material is provided for joints, closures or flow controllers to prevent or
    reduce leakage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    512,    for resilient means exerting a joint sealing bias only.

    541.1+, for frangible seals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 341+ for closures with packing type
    seal.

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 378 for packing type seals.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 345+ for a seal between relatively movable parts (i.e.,
    a dynamic seal) or subclasses 628+ for a static contact seal for other than
    a an internal combustion engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable.


CLS 222/543
TXT Dispensers under the class definition in which an otherwise separable
    element is retained on the container through the medium of single cord,
    wire, or other strand form connector.  The wire may be stiff and pivotally
    or otherwise connected to the container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 375, for similar holding means for closures,
    there being no dispensing features claimed.


CLS 222/544
TXT Dispensers under the class definition having a flow controller or closure
    for the discharge outlet.

    (.5)    Note.  Outlet arrangements which operate to vary the flow of
    material though not capable of cutting it off entirely are included.

    (1)     Note.  The preceding subclasses having such devices with the
    specific additional characteristics there provided for.  The following (not
    exhaustive) are specially mentioned).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14+,    for cutoffs operable by selectively preset volume or rate of flow
    responsive mechanism.

    23+,    for recorders, register, indicator signal or alarm combinations.

    52+,    for automatic control combinations.

    70,     for combinations involving timing mechanism.

    76,     for electrical controls.

    92+,    for combinations with collapsible wall receptacles where
    characteristics of the collapsible wall are claimed or other features are
    claimed which are present because of the collapsible wall.  Where the
    collapsible wall is merely claimed by name, the patent is classified with
    the subcombination specifically recited.

    110,    for drip, leakage, or waste catching or disposal including a valved
    return to the main supply.

    153.01+, for lock or fastening seal combinations.

    162,    for movably mounted supply receptacles which move relative to a
    discharge controlling valve.

    187,    for wick or absorbent material feed for dispensing devices in which
    the wick or absorbent material controls the discharge.

    196.1+, for hand manipulable shaker type dispensers having outlet elements
    which may have impact on the container or contents, especially subclass
    196.4, for those having an element caged in the outlet, which element is a
    ball acting as a closure when the shaker is at rest.

    212+,   for resilient wall dispensers with flow controllers or closures.

    226+,   for flow controllers interconnected with an agitator.

    310+,   for flow controllers associated with discharge assistants to vary
    discharge volume.

    354,    for relatively movable cutoffs carried by movable trap chambers.

    355,    for cutoffs, interconnected with movable trap chambers for
    operation.

    380,    for valved outlets for casing enclosed discharge assistants which
    are associated with a material supply chamber.

    387,    for containers having followers and a valved outlet.

    420,    for drop forming outlet devices especially 422 for such devices
    with valves.

    425+,   for trap chambers having cutoffs where more than the mere outlet
    with its flow controller and/or closure is claimed.

    469,    for movable handles interconnected with flow controllers or
    closures.

    470+,   for a handle and actuator for a flow controller or closure
    juxtaposed for one-handed manipulation.

    476,    and the subclasses following the same and preceding subclass 544,
    for flow controllers and closures in the special combinations or of the
    particular types provided for.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 40+ for flow restrictors in
    pipes and tubular conduits.

    184,    Lubrication, subclasses 65+ for gravity 65+ feed lubricators,
    subclass 69 having a cutoff (usually a ball) that opens due to vibration of
    the device with which the lubrication is used.

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, subclasses 20, 21 for
    vertically swingable valved chutes.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 200+ closures for recptacles having no
    dispensing features and see the notes to subclass 200 for the distribution
    of the closure arts.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 289+ for article dispensing devices
    having closure or other means to effect mechanical release or separation of
    articles.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 142+ for flow path devices
    with a single valve, especially subclass 144 for tank mounted valves.


CLS 222/545
TXT Dispensers under subclass 544 having (1) two or more discharge controllers
    or closures for a single discharge outlet, or (2) either single or plural
    controllers or closures carried by an element (as a spout) separably
    attached to the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    425+,   for plural flow controllers or closures associated with trap
    chambers.

    476,    for spaced alternately seated flow controllers or closures for a
    single outlet.

    482+,   for plural flow controllers or closures associated with receptacles
    having plural openings.

    502+,   for flow controllers or closures formed of two or more sections
    which each covers part of the outlet area.

    506,    for plural flow controllers or closures, for a single outlet at
    least one of which has a relatively movable actuator.

    532,    for plural flow controllers or closures one of which is a closure
    type discharge guide.

    541.1+, for plural flow controllers or closures one of which is frangible.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 613+ for a single flow path system
    having plural serial valves.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 253, 254, 255, and 256+, for plural
    closures not associated with dispensing features.


CLS 222/546
TXT Dispensers under subclass 545 in which a cap, i.e., a closure element which
    has an annular flange which surrounds the outlet neck and carriers a plug
    (surrounded by the flange) that enters the outlet axially.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    408.5,  for agitator rigidly mounted on movable closure.

    551,    for screw caps without axial plugs.

    562,    for miscellaneous caps without plugs.


CLS 222/547
TXT Dispensers under subclass 544 having means within the receptacle or within
    the outlet for guiding, distributing, restricting or directing the gravity
    flow of the material toward the outlet.  The means may comprise a baffle
    having either single or plural perforations therein, and the closure or
    discharge controller may be associated with the baffle rather than the
    outlet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    564,    and see the notes thereto for other interior material guides,
    distributors or restrictors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 590+ for flow guides in the interior of
    a tank.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 118+ for valves associated
    with flow guides or restrictors within the flow line.


CLS 222/548
TXT Dispensers under subclass 544 in which the movable feed controller or
    closure element has a motion of rotation about its own axis.  Such motion
    may be less than 360 degrees.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142.9,  for rotary flow controllers associated with plural compartment
    dispensers of the hand manipulable shaker type.

    516,    for rotary flow controllers or closures with resilient biasing
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclass 313 for tube type closures with rotary
    valves.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 304+ for rotary valves.


CLS 222/549
TXT Dispensers under subclass 548 in which the feed controller or closure also
    moves longitudinally of its own axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    489,    for screw type flow controllers or closures for a single passage
    into which plural passages merge.

    519+,   for combined rotary and axially movable tubes, sleeves and
    apertured caps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 215+ and 264+ for screw
    actuated valves.


CLS 222/550
TXT Dispensers under subclass 549 having an additional element so connecting
    the flow controller or closure to the receptacle as to provide for a
    swinging motion thereof in addition to the axially rotary and longitudinal
    motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 329+, for receptacle closures having this
    combined motion not having dispensing features.


CLS 222/551
TXT Dispensers under subclass 549 having a nonapertured screw cap, i.e., the
    closure element has an annular, internally screw-threaded flange that
    surrounds and screws onto the outlet neck.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    489,    for screw caps for closing a single passage into which plural
    passages merge.

    519+,   for apertured screw caps having axial and longitudinal motion.

    546,    for screw caps with an axial plug.

    553,    for other axially rotary caps.

    562,    for caps other than the screw type.

    568,    for nozzles, spouts and pouring   devices with screw attaching
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclass 329 for screw caps.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 288+ for screw caps.


CLS 222/552
TXT Dispensers under subclass 549 in which the dispensing opening is filled by
    a plug or disc which screws thereinto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    551,    for screw caps and see the notes thereto.

    554,    for other types of axially rotary plugs.

    563,    for miscellaneous plugs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 356+ for screw plug closures and
    subclass 314 for tube type closures with screw valves.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 288+ for screw plug closures.


CLS 222/553
TXT Dispensers under subclass 548 in which the movable element is in the form
    of an apertured sleeve, tube or cap which is mounted either outside or
    inside of the flange or neck that surrounds the discharge opening, and in
    which the structure provides for discharging the material in some direction
    other than along or parallel to the axis of rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    519+,   for apertured tubes, sleeves or caps having both axially rotary and
    longitudinal motion.


CLS 222/554
TXT Dispensers under subclass 548 in which the rotary element is of plug form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    507,    for plugs for closing outlets that have an annular, outlet
    surrounding, relatively movable actuator.

    546,    for cap carried axial plugs.

    552,    for screw plugs.

    563,    for miscellaneous plug closures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 309+ for rotary plug valves.


CLS 222/555
TXT Dispensers under subclass 548 in which the axially rotary member is held in
    place by flanges and/or plates located on opposite faces of the rotary
    member.  The flanges may be formed by upsetting or grooving the stationary
    parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    561,    for similarly mounted reciprocable elements.


CLS 222/556
TXT Dispensers under subclass 544 in which the flow controller or closure is
    pivoted to the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    508,    for swingable outlet elements mounted in the receptacle interior
    and having relatively movable actuating means.

    533,    for swingable material discharge guides.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 334+ for swingable closures.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 298+ for pivoted valves.

    291,    Track Sanders, subclass 35.


CLS 222/557
TXT Dispensers under subclass 556 in which the pivoted element swings about an
    axis displaced from and parallel to the axis of the opening controlled, and
    thus swings in a single plane transversely of the axis of the opening
    controlled.


CLS 222/558
TXT Dispensers under subclass 556 in which the pivoting means is of bail form,
    i.e., of U-form, the ends of the legs of the U being pivoted to the
    receptacle, the closure or flow controller either forming or being
    connected to the bend of the U.


CLS 222/559
TXT Dispensers under subclass 544 in which the movable element is of nonpivoted
    type and is mounted for guided reciprocable motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142.8,  for reciprocating closure elements associated with plural
    compartment dispensers of the hand manipulable shaker type.

    447,    for trap chambers having reciprocating, nonrigidly interconnected
    cutoffs.

    453,    for trap chambers having reciprocating, rigidly interconnected
    cutoffs for both inlet and outlet.

    495+,   for reciprocating movable outlet elements operably by pressure of
    the container contents.

    509,    for movable outlet elements reciprocable axially of the outlet and
    having relatively movable actuating means.

    510,    for reciprocable outlet elements having a rod actuator extending
    through a container wall and the container interior to the element.

    518,    for reciprocable outlet elements with resilient biasing means.

    522+,   and see the notes thereto for axially movable tubes, sleeves or
    apertured caps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 345+ for sliding closures.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 318 for reciprocating valves
    for flow devices not elsewhere provided for.

    291,    Track Sanders, subclass 34.


CLS 222/560
TXT Dispensers under subclass 559 in which the movable, nonpivoted, element
    reciprocates in an arcuate path.


CLS 222/561
TXT Dispensers under subclass 559 in which a movable element is held in place
    by flanges and/or plates located on opposite faces of the movable element.
    The flanges may be formed by upsetting or otherwise grooving the stationary
    part.

    (1)     Note.  Closures or flow controllers having their side edges bent
    down and then in toward the axis of reciprocation, the reentrant portion of
    the flanges engaging under guiding or holding flanges, entering guiding and
    holding grooves, are in subclasses 559 or 560.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    555,    for similarly mounted rotary elements.

    559,    see note 1.

    560,    see note 1.


CLS 222/562
TXT Dispensers under subclass 544 in which the dispensing opening is closed by
    a cap, i.e., by a closure element having an annular flange surrounding the
    outlet neck.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    546,    for caps carrying a plug that enters the opening axially when the
    cap is applied.

    551,    for screw caps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 800 for closures for flow devices.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 316+ for cap closures.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 796+ for caps of the slip type, i.e., held
    in place by friction.


CLS 222/563
TXT Dispensers under subclass 544 in which the dispensing opening is filled by
    a plug.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    552,    for screw plugs.

    554,    for rotary plugs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 355+ for plug closures.


CLS 222/564
TXT Dispensers under the class definition in which material guide, distributors
    or restricting means are on the interior of the container.  The material
    may be directed toward or away from the outlet, or distributed or
    restricted or held back from free access thereto, baffles having either
    single or plural openings therein and splash guards being included.

    (1)     Note.  The formation of the container walls in such a way that they
    direct material from the receptacle interior toward the opening, or
    container walls formed with grooves or channels for so directing material
    are treated as nozzles, spouts and pouring devices for subclasses 566+.
    The interior discharge guide for subclass 564 must be in addition to such
    structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142.4,  for plural source hand manipulable shakers having interior baffles
    to hinder discharge from one source when material from another source is
    being dispensed.

    189.06+, for foraminous baffles in dispensing passages where the baffle
    functions as a strainer, as in teapots having a strainer in the spout.

    270,    for interior material discharge guides between discharge assistants
    arranged in sets.

    328,    for material discharge guides on the container side of discharge
    assistants.

    377,    for inlet traps for material supply container having an encased
    discharged assistant.

    457.5,  for hand shaker type dispensers having an outlet passage which
    extends from the outlet of the supply container in a direction reverse to
    the travel of the material toward the outlet, so that the material
    dispensed travels through a generally U-shaped path within the supply
    container and through the passage to its outlet.

    547,    for interior material discharge guides distributors or restrictors
    for containers having flow controllers or closures associated with either
    the baffle or the outlet.

    565,    for foraminous or plural opening pattern type outlets.

    566,    see note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 590+ for flow guides in the interior of
    a tank.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 312 for article dispensing devices
    including interior article guiding means.


CLS 222/565
TXT Dispensers under the class definition in which the only dispensing feature
    claimed, pertains to the sifter or sprinkler or other plural opening patter
    form outlet.

    (1)     Note.  An outlet of plural opening pattern form may be of any
    foraminous nature and need not be for sifting or sprinkling purpose.

    (2)     Note.  Since the type of outlet provided for in this subclass has
    been treated as a single outlet, patents having this type of outlet appear
    in numerous preceding subclasses which provide for special characteristics
    or combinations of which this type opening may be a part.  For the line
    between this type of opening and the plural openings of subclasses 478+,
    see the notes to subclass 478.  Some of the preceding subclasses will be
    separately noted below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    478,    see note 2 above.

    480,    for hand manipulable shaker or dredge top type and see the notes
    thereto.

    511+,   for combinations with resilient biasing means.

    547,    for a plural opening pattern type flow distributor or restrictor
    within a container having an outlet with a closure or discharge controller.

    548     and 555, for axially rotary flow controllers or closures.

    555,    see reference to 548.

    559+,   for reciprocably attached flow controllers or closures.

    564,    for baffles comprising a flow restrictor or distributor within a
    container at a point removed from the outlet.  Both the baffle and the
    outlet may be either the single or plural opening type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, particularly subclasses 490+ and those following
    for gas filters.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, for sifters,
    particularly subclasses 233+.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 374 and 376+
    for gravity feed or shaker type sprinklers or sprayers, and subclasses 266+
    for sprinkler pipes.


CLS 222/566
TXT Dispensers under the class definition in which the only dispensing feature
    claimed pertains to the nozzle, spout, pouring lip or other material
    pouring guide, including the mode of connection to the receptacle. These
    are herein generically called pouring devices.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter appears throughout the class in the
    combinations and in the special forms provided for in the preceding
    subclasses, some being specially noted below.

    (2)     Note.  See section 19 of the main class definition for notes to
    other classes having related nozzle, spout and pouring device art.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     for cutter or punch type.

    475,    where the spout also functions as the container handle.

    478+,   for containers having plural openings and plural nozzles, spouts,
    and pouring devices and see the notes to such subclasses for related art.

    526+,   for nozzles, spouts and pouring devices movably connected to the
    receptacle for purpose other than mere attachment or detachment, and see
    the notes thereto for related art.

    538+,   and see the notes thereto for non-use housing or securing means.

    544+,   for combinations with a flow controller or closure, and see the
    notes.

    564,    for interior material guides.

    565,    for sifter, sprinkler or plural opening patterns.

    575,    for outlet shapes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 801 for flow devices comprising nozzles or
    spouts.


CLS 222/567
TXT Dispensers under subclass 566 having means to separably attach the pouring
    device to the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89+,    where a cutter or punch is claimed as part of the combination.

    526+,   and see the notes thereto for nozzles, spouts and pouring devices
    connected for motion for purposes other than for mere attachment or
    detachment.

    538+,   and see the notes thereto for means for securing discharge guides
    in a nonuse position.

    543,    for single strand, cord, or wire connectors for removable outlet
    elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 338 and 343 for supply means having funnels requiring separation
    from the said supply for use.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 154.1+ for a coupling between
    a pipe and box, subclasses 136.1+ for pipe-to-pipe-to-plate couplings, and
    subclasses 189+ for an end-to-side or plate coupling.


CLS 222/568
TXT Dispensers under subclass 567 in which the attaching means is of the screw
    type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     for such screw connectors combined with a cutter or punch.

    519+,   for screw type connectors for tube, sleeve or apertured cap movable
    outlets involving functions more than mere attachment or detachment.

    549+,   for screw type flow controllers and closures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 206+ for a screw clamp type
    sput-to-plate joint, and subclasses 219+ for a pipe screw coupled to a
    plate.


CLS 222/569
TXT Dispensers under subclass 567 in which the pouring device has a portion
    engaging the exterior of a receptacle wall and a second portion which
    engages the interior thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90,     for similar mounting means in combination with a cutter or punch.


CLS 222/570
TXT Dispensers under subclass 567 in which the pouring device engages the rim
    of a receptacle opening, either the pouring device or such rim having a
    groove, and the other part having a bead or flange that enters the groove.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 703+ for an attachment to a receptacle
    intended to aid in drinking from the receptacle.


CLS 222/571
TXT Dispensers under subclass 566, the pouring device having integral or added
    means formed with a surface or configuration adapted to prevent dropping of
    residues remaining at the edge of the pouring device after the desired
    dispensing operation is completed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108+,   for drip, leakage or waste catching or disposal.


CLS 222/572
TXT Dispensers under subclass 566 in which the pouring device is formed
    integrally with a wall of the container, i.e., is formed from the same
    piece of material with a joint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    462,    for integral, funnel type outlets.


CLS 222/573
TXT Dispensers under subclass 566 in which (1) the pouring device has some
    reinforcing means in addition to mere shape of the device, as grooves or
    corrugations, or (2) there is a brace extending from the pouring device to
    the receptacle wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    574,    for folded seams, even though they have a reinforcing function.


CLS 222/574
TXT Dispensers under subclass 566 in which any or all of (1) the receptacle
    body, (2) the pouring device, or (3) the joint between the two, involve a
    folded seam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 610+ and 677+.


CLS 222/575
TXT Dispensers under the class definition not hereinbefore provided for.

    (1)     Note.  For example, in this subclass are accumulated, as originals
    and cross-references, dispenser outlet shapes of types not provided for in
    preceding subclasses as set forth in notes below.

    (2)     Note.  The various classes which provide for shaping extrudable
    plastics (such as metal, earthenware, etc.) have patents on shapes of
    outlets to impart desired shape to the plastic.  For such art, see the
    notes to Sec. 14 of the main class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    478+,   for dispensers having two or more openings, at least one being a
    dispensing opening, particularly subclass 480 for hand manipulable, shaker
    type dispensers having plural openings of different characteristics in the
    top thereof.

    480,    see the reference to subclass 478 above.

    490,    for slitted resilient diaphragms or nipples.

    565,    for sifter, sprinkler or plural opening patterns.

    566+,   for nozzles, spouts, or pouring devices.  Such devices as have an
    unusual outlet shape are cross-referenced down to subclass 575.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 802 for miscellaneous flow devices
    including especially outlet shapes and/or deflectors and flow conduits not
    otherwise classified.


CLS 222/576
TXT Dispenser under the class definition in which the supply container is
    adapted to store ink and in which the trap chamber is a dip well accessible
    to the penpoint of a pen for the removal of a quantity of ink therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  Related subject matter, as between dispensing inkwells (in
    this, and in the indented subclasses) and dispensers of general utility (in
    existing subclasses therebelow), is tabulated as follows:

                    Inkwell General utility
                    subclass        dispenser subclass

            576             424.5+ (except 457)
            577             160+, 173+
            578             205
            583             361+
            585             457


    A patent to a dispensing inkwell, the original of which is classified in
    subclasses 576+, as a rule, has been added as a cross-reference in the
    appropriate subclass, from 129+ to 424, if it is not included in the
    above-listed loci for general dispensers.  It is expected that this
    procedure will be followed as to future placement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 257.07+ for
    an inkwell which includes a supply of ink and a chamber or zone accessible
    to a penpoint for removal of ink, which inkwell is not a dispenser because
    the chamber or zone is not a trap chamber; see, particularly, subclass
    257.072 for an inkwell including a diaphragm-type discharge assistant for
    moving ink from the supply to such a nontrapping  chamber or zone, and
    subclass 257.076 for such a nontrapping chamber or zone formed along the
    bottom wall of the inkwell.

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclass 26.2 for an
    inkwell which is not a dispenser and which is attached to a desk.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 20.5 for the fluent-material-handling combination of a source of
    supply (e.g., ink) and a coacting receiver which is a dispenser (e.g.,
    fountain pen), which, upon being supplied with ink, is removed from the
    source for independent use remote from the receiver; and see (1) Note
    thereto for the distinction between comparable combinations of that class
    (141) and Class 401, Coating Implements With Material Supply.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, and 220, Receptacles, appropriate subclasses, for
    ink receptacles which are not dispensers for this class (222) nor include
    means facilitating loading of a pen for Class 15, Brushing, Scrubbing, and
    General Cleaning, subclasses 257.07+.


CLS 222/577
TXT Dispenser under subclass 576 combined with support means therefor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160+    and 173+, for general utility dispensers combined with support or
    casing structure therefor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 69.2+ for a (nondispensing) inkstand
    and penrack, combined.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 128+ for a stand for a movably related
    nondispensing ink receptacle, and subclasses 146+ for a stand on which such
    a receptacle is immovably mounted.


CLS 222/578
TXT Dispenser under subclass 576 provided with means, including an element
    movable relative to the supply container, for moving ink from a point in
    the supply container to a level, at the dip well inlet or feed means outlet
    portion, which is higher than said point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205,    for a dispenser of general utility including nongravity feed to a
    trap for manual removal of material.


CLS 222/579
TXT Dispensers under subclass 578 in which the feed means includes a conduit
    from the supply which has a discharge portion which commences at a higher
    level than the dip well for discharge thereinto or which terminates at an
    opening through a wall of the chamber sufficiently higher than the bottom
    thereof so as to trap a predetermined volume of ink above said bottom.


CLS 222/580
TXT Dispenser under subclass 578 in which the nongravity feed means includes a
    discharge assistant which supports or is integral with the dip well to
    constitute a conjointly movable unit therewith for moving the ink.

    (1)     Note.  This, and the indented, subclasses include patents to
    inkwell dispensers wherein movement of the discharge assistant is actuated
    by the force of the application of a penpoint thereto or to the dip well;
    see, also, subclass 589, for a penpoint-opened closure or valve at the
    pen-entry outlet of the dip cup of a barometric dispensing inkwell.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    578,    for a discharge assistant which, in the inactive position thereof,
    constitutes only the bottom wall of the dip well.


CLS 222/581
TXT Dispenser under subclass 580 in which the discharge assistant comprises a
    resilient wall which supports the dip cup so as to be resiliently flexed
    (as when movement is imparted to the dip well), to cause the feed of ink.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    578,    for a diaphragm-type discharge assistant which constitutes only the
    bottom wall of the dip well.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 257.072 for an
    inkwell including implement-actuated diaphragm means to force a quantity of
    ink from the main body of the supply to a removal zone, which zone is not a
    trap chamber because the ink recedes back into the supply due to the
    incapacity of the zone to retain the ink.


CLS 222/582
TXT Dispenser under subclass 580 in which the conjointly movable unit is
    buoyant or otherwise biased for movement to return the unit to its starting
    position.


CLS 222/583
TXT Dispenser under subclass 576 in which the dip well is supported for
    movement, relative to the supply container, between a position wherein an
    inlet wall portion thereof is below the level of the supply in the
    container, to receive a supply of ink, and another position above said
    level, for access by a penpoint.


CLS 222/584
TXT Dispenser under subclass 576 in which the dip well is so connected to the
    supply container that the entire organization must be tilted to fill the
    trap, which organization is then righted for access of a penpoint to the
    dip well.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    454,    for a dispenser organization of general utility which, in its
    entirety, is tilted to fill the trap and tilted again for dispensing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 257.076, for an
    inkwell including a zone accessible to, and particularly useful for,
    loading a penpoint when the inkwell is in a stable tilted position or other
    stable position angularly related to a first, similarly stable position.


CLS 222/585
TXT Dispenser under subclass 576 in which the dip well provides the sole
    dispensing outlet from the supply container, and the container is otherwise
    airtight; whereby establishment of a level of ink in the dip well to bridge
    said outlet serves, by atmospheric pressure, to prevent further flow of a
    ink thereinto and removal of ink by means of a penpoint permits resumption
    of a corresponding increment of flow of ink into said dip well.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    457,    for barometric dispensers of general utility; and see the search
    notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclass 120, for the
    combination of a barometric inkwell and a pen.


CLS 222/586
TXT Dispenser under subclass 585 including a base within which the dip well is
    formed, and a removable receptacle retained upon the base with its
    discharge opening lowermost to constitute the supply container.


CLS 222/587
TXT Dispenser under subclass 586 provided with means including an element which
    is positioned to close the outlet of the supply container or to interrupt
    flow between the container and the dip well, which element is displaceable,
    while the container is supported on the base, to a flow-establishing
    position; or is displaceable to a flow-establishing position by contact
    with an element of the base during the act of associating the container
    therewith.


CLS 222/588
TXT Dispenser under subclass 585 in which the penpoint-receiving entrance to
    the dip well is at a height below that of the uppermost portion of the
    supply container to which ink is capable of rising, in the
    normally-supported use position of the dispenser.


CLS 222/589
TXT Dispenser under subclass 588 including displaceable or removable means for
    closing the penpoint-receiving outlet portion of the dip well.

    (1)     Note.  The provision of a vent through the valve or closure will
    not bar placement of a patent in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 257.075, for
    implement-opened access means to an inkwell which is not a dispenser.


CLS 222/590
TXT Processes under subclass 1 relating to dispensing molten metal.


CLS 222/591
TXT Apparatus under the class definition for discharging molten metal from a
    receptacle or the like.

    (1)     Note.  See the main class definition of Class 266 for the line
    between that class (266) and subclasses 590 and 591+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 324+ for similar devices for
    dispensing glass.


CLS 222/592
TXT Apparatus under subclass 591 provided with heat exchange means.

    (1)     Note.  Heating a receptacle to either melt or maintain metal in a
    molten state is considered to be treating and proper subject matter for
    Class 266. However, heating at the nozzle or vicinity thereof of a
    receptacle to perfect the dispensing function is considered proper subject
    matter for Class 222.


CLS 222/593
TXT Apparatus under subclass 592 wherein the heat exchange means includes a
    heating means.


CLS 222/594
TXT Apparatus under subclass 591 for evacuating molten metal from the
    receptacle either by regulating its flow through an exit opening or by the
    action of a discharge assistant acting thereon.

    (1)     Note.  For a definition of a discharge assistant, see section 10 of
    the main class definition of this class (222).


CLS 222/595
TXT Apparatus under subclass 594 wherein the molten metal is evacuated from the
    receptacle by the action of a pressurized gaseous fluid acting thereon.


CLS 222/596
TXT Apparatus under subclass 594 wherein the flow of molten metal is regulated
    by the action of a movable wall of an expansible chamber device, the
    movable wall directly engaging the molten metal.


CLS 222/597
TXT Apparatus under subclass 594 wherein the evacuation of the molten metal
    from the receptacle is regulated by a flow stop means at the opening either
    removable therefrom or movable to a position allowing for molten metal
    egress.


CLS 222/598
TXT Apparatus under subclass 597 wherein the flow stop means is moved about an
    axis to a position allowing for molten metal egress.


CLS 222/599
TXT Apparatus under subclass 598 wherein the flow stop means is moved about an
    axis substantially at right angles to the direction of molten metal flow.


CLS 222/600
TXT Apparatus under subclass 597 in which the flow stop means is linearly moved
    in a direction transverse to the direction of molten metal flow through the
    receptacle opening, movement of the flow stop means regulating molten metal
    flow.


CLS 222/601
TXT Apparatus under subclass 597 wherein the flow stop means is regulated or
    adjusted by an apparatus, at least part of which is beneath the pour
    opening.


CLS 222/602
TXT Apparatus under subclass 597 wherein the flow stop means is regulated or
    adjusted by an apparatus, at least part of which is above the pour opening.


CLS 222/603
TXT Apparatus under subclass 591 in which a gas is introduced at, about or
    downstream of an exit opening of the receptacle, the gas having intimate
    contact at some time with the molten metal.

    (1)     Note.  The gas may cool, lubricate or otherwise enhance the
    dispensing of the molten metal.  However, such a gas, if it should react
    with the molten metal or otherwise provide a claimed treatment, e.g.,
    agitation, to the molten metal in the receptacle it would then be
    considered proper subject matter for classification in Class 266.


CLS 222/604
TXT Apparatus under subclass 591 wherein the receptacle is canted or otherwise
    caused to move so that an upper portion thereof is lowered to allow molten
    metal to flow thereover whereby to evacuate the receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  The evacuating receptacle may either receive a charge of
    molten metal or be dipped into a vessel containing molten metal to be
    charged thereby.


CLS 222/605
TXT Apparatus under subclass 604 wherein the receptacle is provided with an
    elongate passage generally vertically disposed having an inlet to the
    receptacle and an outlet through which molten metal flows when being
    evacuated from the receptacle.


CLS 222/606
TXT Apparatus under subclass 591 wherein in addition to the nozzle or opening
    of the receptacle from which molten metal is evacuated there is provided a
    funnel, tube or like beneath the receptacle for conducting or otherwise
    perfecting flow of molten metal exiting therefrom.


CLS 222/607
TXT Apparatus under subclass 606 wherein the funnel, tube or the like is
    separate from the receptacle.


CLS 222/608
TXT Ambulant:

    Device under subclass 173 provided with wheels, skids, or other special
    means to facilitate translation of the device over the surface on which it
    rests.

    (1)     Note.  This includes such dispensers so mounted as to move within a
    jacket.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160+,   where the supply container is mounted for motion on the ambulant
    support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 18+ for casters.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 239+ for dumping freight cars.

    111,    Planting, subclasses 25+ and 34+ for planting apparatus, usually
    vehicular, involving dispensing.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 125, 267 and 899+ for vehicle carried
    fluid handling systems.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, subclasses 52+ for movably mounted
    extinguishers.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, appropriate subclasses, for a land vehicle
    propelled by a motor and whose sole function is transportation.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 185 for article dispensers having
    means providing for the mobility of said dispensers over the surfaces on
    which they are supported.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 650+,
    appropriate subclasses 146+, and 722+ for ambulant type spraying,
    sprinkling, or scattering devices.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 370+ for a reeling
    device which may wind various materials including a hose.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 98 and 128 for wheeled bag and receptacle
    supports.

    280,    Land Vehicles, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous vehicles
    adapted to travel on land and unprovided for elsewhere.

    298,    Land Vehicles:  Dumping, subclasses 7, 9, 11, 12+, and 47+ for a
    vehicle having a body mounted for tilting movement (i.e., dumping vehicle)
    and a dispensing feature.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, appropriate subclasses for a
    vehicle-mounted, or otherwise portable, receptacle or other load holder.


CLS 222/609
TXT With assembly or disassembly feature:
    Device under subclass 608 wherein means are provided to facilitate either
    (1) the putting together or taking apart of the various elements of the
    device, or (2) attachment or detachment of the dispensing means upon a
    vehicle.


CLS 222/610
TXT Dispensing means detachably carried upon vehicle:

    Device under subclass 609 provided with means to facilitate selective
    attachment or detachment of a dispensing apparatus upon a vehicle, wherein
    the vehicle, per se, is of the general purpose type or may be used to
    perform a nondispensing function with the dispensing apparatus detached.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 351+ for automotive mounts for fluid
    handling systems.


CLS 222/611.1
TXT With guide or guide line marker:

    Device under subclass 608 wherein means are provided either (a) to engage a
    wall or edge on or adjacent to the surface over which the device moves to
    guide the same over the surface, or (b) to mark a line or point on the
    surface to serve as a visual aid for an operative in guiding the device
    over the surface.

    (1)     Note.  The guide line marker must be in addition to a primary
    dispensing means, e.g., a lime dispenser, per se, for making grid lines on
    an athletic field would be excluded under this definition, even though the
    lines themselves would serve as a guide to the operative.

    (2)     Note.  Devices having a grooved or flanged wheel adapted to travel
    on a rail or track will be found herein.


CLS 222/611.2
TXT Mortar applying machine:

    Device under subclass 611.1 applying mortar to masonry with means for
    guiding the device along the masonry in place.


CLS 222/612
TXT With height adjustment:

    Device under subclass 608 in which the material being dispensed is applied
    via a dispenser outlet to the surface over which the device is translated,
    and wherein means are provided to adjustably support the outlet at various
    distances from the surface.


CLS 222/613
TXT Dispensing means driven or controlled by surface contact:

    Device under subclass 608 wherein the dispensing means, which may be a
    forcer, trap, agitator, discharge controller, etc., is driven or has its
    operation controlled either by direct contact with the surface or by a
    wheel which may or may not provide support for the device, and which
    rotates while contacting the surface over which the device translates.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 155+ indented
    under mobile tank type supply means for a ground wheel operated spray
    apparatus.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 437+ for a motion or draft
    responsive load handler and transporter wherein a load handling means
    operates in response to the engagement of another means with the ground.


CLS 222/614
TXT Ground wheel operated discharge controller: Device under subclass 613
    including a gate, valve, or other means to vary or cut off the flow of
    material through the discharge outlet, and wherein the state or position of
    said means is regulated in response to rotation of a ground wheel.

    (1)     Note.  A reciprocating or rotating apertured feed plate is
    considered to be a discharge controller if during the operation of the
    device the aperture(s) intermittently assumes a position in simultaneous
    registry with a supply and an outlet, and is considered to be a discharge
    assistant when the aperture acts as a trap, i.e., the aperture alternately
    registers with the supply and then the discharge outlet, thereby separating
    and carrying a portion of material from the supply to the outlet. Devices
    of the latter type will be found in subclasses 620 and 623+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    620,    for a device having a reciprocating feed plate.

    623+,   for a device having a rotary feed plate.


CLS 222/615
TXT With variable transmission:

    Device under subclass 613 including means to vary the ratio of the speed of
    rotation of a ground wheel to the rate at which a ground wheel driven
    dispensing means is reciprocated, rotated, oscillated, etc.


CLS 222/616
TXT With clutch:

    Device under subclass 613 including a disengageable coupling between a
    ground wheel and a dispensing means driven by the ground wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 30+ for a clutch, per
    se.


CLS 222/617
TXT Fluid flow discharge:

    Device under subclass 613 having means to direct a stream of fluid into
    contact with the material to be dispensed so that the fluid picks up the
    material to be dispensed and carries the same to the place of delivery.


CLS 222/618
TXT Plural ground wheel driven discharge assistants in series:

    Device under subclass 613 including two or more distinct ground driven
    discharge assistants arranged in succession along the path of the material
    to be discharged such that the material is operated upon sequentially by
    each discharge assistant.


CLS 222/619
TXT Ground wheel driven vibrator or jarring means:

    Device under subclass 613 having ground wheel driven means either to shake
    the container or to cause some part of the container (including an outlet
    agitator or discharge assistant adjacent the container outlet) to move in
    reciprocations or oscillations of such small amplitude that the effect is
    to accelerate gravity flow rather than to move the material bodily toward
    or through the discharge outlet.


CLS 222/620
TXT Rotary motion of ground wheel to reciprocating, oscillating, or linear
    motion:

    Device under subclass 613 including a transmission between a ground wheel
    and a dispensing means which transforms rotary motion of the ground wheel
    into reciprocating, oscillation, or linear motion to operate or control the
    dispensing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    614,    for a reciprocating or oscillating feed plate, and see the notes
    thereto.


CLS 222/621
TXT Fluid pump:

    Device under subclass 620 in which the reciprocating, oscillating, or
    linear motion derived from the ground wheel is employed to actuate a means
    to transport or compress a  fluent material.


CLS 222/622
TXT Endless conveyor:

    Device under subclass 613 including a ground wheel driven discharge
    assistant in the form of an endless flexible member.


CLS 222/623
TXT Ground wheel driven rotary discharge assistant or rotary agitator:

    Device under subclass 613 wherein rotary motion of a ground wheel is
    transmitted to a discharge assistant or an agitator to rotate the same.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    614,    for a rotary apertured feed plate, and see the notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 437+, as explained in the
    reference thereto appearing in subclass 613 above, and see particularly
    subclasses 439+ of that area.


CLS 222/624
TXT With adjustable discharge controller:
    Device under subclass 623 including a gate, valve, or other flow controller
    at or adjacent to the discharge outlet by means of which the discharge
    volume may be varied.

    (1)     Note.  A closure element for the discharge outlet which merely
    serves as a cut off is excluded from this subclass.


CLS 222/625
TXT Sliding gate or shutter:

    Device under subclass 624 wherein the adjustable flow controller comprises
    a plate-like member which is adapted to be shifted in a direction generally
    perpendicular to its thickness to vary the quantity of material being
    discharged.


CLS 222/626
TXT Motor operated dispensing means:

    Device under subclass 608 wherein the dispensing means, which may be a
    forcer, trap, agitator, discharge controller, etc., is operated by a prime
    mover.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333+,   and see the notes thereto for other dispenser-motor combinations.


CLS 222/627
TXT Power taker off:

    Device under subclass 626 wherein the dispensing means is carried on,
    pulled by or pushed by a motor vehicle, and wherein the motor propelling
    the vehicle operates the dispensing means via a power transmission.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 53 for a motor vehicle provided with a
    device (e.g., a power takeoff) for enabling the motor of the vehicle to
    supply the power to drive another mechanism.


CLS 222/628
TXT Manually actuated fluid pump:

    Device under subclass 608 including means to facilitate movement over a
    surface of an apparatus for transporting or compressing a fluent material,
    wherein the force input to actuate said apparatus is supplied by an
    operative.


CLS 222/629
TXT Submersible dipper or trap chamber:

    Apparatus under subclass 591 comprising receptacle means submersible below
    the surface of molten metal in a supply source to acquire a given quantity
    of molten metal and discharging the given quantity of molten metal after
    the receptacle is raised to a position above the surface level of the
    molten metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    356,    for a nonrotary, nonendless belt type dipping trap chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 366 for a ladle or melt receptacle
    rotatable with mold or dipper type dispenser.


CLS 222/630
TXT FLUID FLOW DISCHARGE:

    Dispenser under the class definition having means to direct a flow of fluid
    into contact with the material to be dispensed so that the fluid picks up
    material and carries the same to or through the container outlet.

    (1)     Note.  The fluid flow arrangement may be completely exterior of the
    container, and container contents may be delivered to the flowing fluid in
    any way, as by gravity, by aspirating action, by an agitator, by force
    feed, etc.  There must be means to direct the flow either of the fluid to
    the material or of the material into the fluid current.  Mere creation of
    fluid pressure in a supply container is in the appropriate following
    subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  Where the fluid does not entrain the material to carry it to
    a place of delivery but agitates or applies pressure to the material to
    cause discharge, it is not in this or the indented subclasses, but in the
    appropriate following subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3+,     for a gas or vapor dispensed by itself, i.e., does not carry
    another material to the delivery place.

    195,    for gas agitation of the material to be dispensed.

    394+,   for fluid pressure discharge without entraining the dispensed
    material.

    464.1+, for dispensers comprising a container and internally extending
    outlet pipe so arranged that suction is necessary to cause discharge.

    617,    for ambulant dispensers having fluid flow discharge means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, particularly subclass 205 for
    pneumatic feeding to and cleaning of fiber working machines; subclasses 148
    and 304+ for air current deposition of fibers on screen condensers.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 576+ for
    combinations involving fluid current conveying of material.

    37,     Excavating, subclass 202 for railway snow excavators with fluid
    current conveyor.

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 104+ for blower-type feeders.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 300+ for coating apparatus in which
    the coating material is projected, sprayed, flung, or dripped on the work.

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 173+ for atomizers;

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 268 and 888+ for fluid handling systems
    having means to entrain or dissolve one fluid in another.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses for such apparatus using fluid currents, particularly subclasses
    21+ and 132+.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 198.1+ for means to
    add material to a separator.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 278 for article dispensers in which
    the discharge assistant is a nonsolid force applying medium.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 77+ for an
    orchard-type mobile distributor in which fluent material is discharged into
    a gaseous conveying current; subclasses 654+ for a device comprising a
    container for nonfluid material and a scattering or strewing means, there
    being a source or a generator of gaseous fluid to mix with and aid in
    scattering of the material; and subclasses 310+ (except 313), 337+, 379;
    and 398+ for apparatus for mixing or dissolving one fluid in another with
    subsequent distribution.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    subject matter relating to contacting one fluid with another to exchange
    properties of the fluids or mutually modifying conditions.

    291,    Track Sanders, subclasses 3+ for those involving fluid delivery.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, appropriate subclasses for conveying of
    solids by entraining them in a fluid current. See the search note to this
    class (222) in the main definition of Class 406 for the class lines.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 151+ for jet pumps.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 305 for apparatus for preparing
    disinfecting material by use of gaseous currents.

    433,    Dentistry, subclass 88 for intra-oral dental dispensers wherein the
    dispensed material is discharged by a fluid current; and subclasses 91+ for
    fluid current saliva ejectors.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 75+ for a sandblast machine.

    604,    Surgery, subclass 58 for powder dispensers; subclasses 313+ for
    material removed from the body by suction; and subclasses 319+ for
    aspiration collection container or trap.


CLS 222/631
TXT Fluid flow generated by manually actuated working member:

    Dispenser under subclass 630 including a chamber whose volume is varied by
    manually moving or deflecting all or a portion of the chamber wall whereby
    the resulting increase or decrease in pressure within the chamber is
    utilized to move the fluid into contact with the material to be dispensed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 328 for a
    supply holder having a collapsible wall; and subclasses 329+ for a supply
    holder having a moving surface for the material to be sprayed.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclass 38 for portable fluid current
    conveying devices.


CLS 222/632
TXT Flexible working member:

    Dispenser under subclass 631 wherein at least a portion of the chamber wall
    comprises a pliant material which is deflected to change the volume of the
    chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92+,    for a supply holder having a collapsible wall which does not return
    to its original position.

    206+,   for dispensers having a resilient wall which is deflected to expel
    the material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 327 for a
    supply container having a resilient wall; and subclasses 362 and 363 for
    flexible wall gas pumps which generate fluid pressure to dispense material.


CLS 222/633
TXT Bellows or bulb:

    Dispenser under subclass 632 wherein either (a) substantially the entire
    chamber wall is formed of an elastically deformable material, or (b) the
    chamber wall comprises a pair of opposed rigid members connected together
    by pliant material.


CLS 222/634
TXT Telescoping supply container:

    Dispenser under subclass 631 wherein the chamber wall comprises a plurality
    of circumferentially continuous interconnected nested segments which are
    moved, one into another, to decrease the volume of the chamber, and wherein
    the material to be dispensed is carried inside the chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    398,    for a telescopic container for generating fluid pressure to
    discharge the material, with no entraining of the material in the fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 357 for a
    telescoping liquid supply container for generating fluid pressure to
    discharge the container.


CLS 222/635
TXT Pressurized aerosol container:

    Dispenser under subclass 630 comprising a chamber which contains both the
    material to be dispensed and a charge of compressed fluid to discharge the
    material to or through the container outlet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    394+,   for fluid pressure discharge of material with no entraining of the
    material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 340+ for
    aerosols; and subclass 573 for aerosol nozzles.


CLS 222/636
TXT From movable trap chamber:

    Dispenser under subclass 630 comprising one or more material receiving
    cavities which are alternately moved into communication with a supply of
    material and a discharge location.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251+,   for other dispensers having movable trap chambers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclasses 63+ and 74 for a fluid
    current conveyor combined with a movable trap chamber.


CLS 222/637
TXT Open blast:

    Dispenser under subclass 630 including means to deliver the material to be
    dispensed into the fluid current path to discharge the material from the
    delivery means directly into the dispenser environment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 77+ for
    orchard-type distributors wherein a fluent material is discharged by a
    gaseous current.


CLS 222/638
TXT INCLUDING TIMER:

    Dispenser under the class definition having means to limit either the
    period of discharge, or the period between the occurrence of a
    predetermined event and the beginning of a subsequent discharge period.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 231+ for timer actuation of a
    refrigeration device.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 132+ for periodic discharging siphons,
    and subclasses 623.11+ for a fluid distribution system including a
    programmer, or timer (no supply container being claimed).

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 19+ and 33+
    for periodic and retarded switches, respectively.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 138+ for timer
    controlled liquid treatment, and subclasses 141+ for programmer controlled
    liquid treatment.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 15+ for article dispensing devices
    having a timing, or delay mechanism.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 66 for serially
    operated means distributing fluid to a diffuser, and subclasses 67+ for
    selectively preset means serving to cut off flow to a diffuser.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 15+ for valves having a
    compulsory cutoff after a nonautomatic opening; subclasses 25+ for fluid
    servomotor operation of valves; subclasses 48+ for dashpot, or fluid
    controlled retarders, or timers for valve actuators; and subclass 64 for
    nonfluid retarders in valve actuation.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, appropriate
    subclasses, for a timer, per se.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 18+ for a burner assembly having a timer,
    programmer, or condition responsive control.


CLS 222/639
TXT For timing dispensing period:

    Dispenser under subclass 638 including means to limit the period of
    discharge.


CLS 222/640
TXT Of beverage or beverage component dispenser:

    Dispenser under subclass 639 wherein the material being discharged
    comprises a liquid for drinking, or an adjunctive substance therefor.

    (1)     Note.  The "adjunctive substance" above may be, for example, foam
    head for beer.


CLS 222/641
TXT Including electrical timing circuit:
    Dispenser under subclass 640 including an electrical circuit, the inherent
    electrical properties of which determine the period of discharge.


CLS 222/642
TXT Of discharge assistant:

    Dispenser under subclass 639 including means to limit the period of
    operation of a device which acts to move, or tends to cause movement of,
    material toward, or through a container outlet.


CLS 222/643
TXT Rotary:

    Dispenser under subclass 642 wherein the device which moves material
    toward, or through the container outlet turns about an axis.


CLS 222/644
TXT And means for timing the period between dispensing cycles:

    Dispenser under subclass 639 which also includes means to limit the period
    between the end of one discharge and the beginning of the succeeding
    discharge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 624.13+ for fluid distribution systems
    including a timer, or a programmer capable of causing a cycle of operation
    of one, or more valves to be repeated.


CLS 222/645
TXT Of aerosol dispenser:

    Dispenser under subclass 644 comprising a gas-pressurized container for
    dispensing a solid, or liquid contained therein by entraining fine
    particles of the solid, or liquid in gas allowed to escape from the
    container through a valve controlled by the period limiting means.


CLS 222/646
TXT Including electrical timing circuit:

    Dispenser under subclass 645 including an electrical circuit, the inherent
    electrical properties of which determine the period of discharge, or the
    period between the end of one discharge and the beginning of the succeeding
    discharge.


CLS 222/647
TXT And mechanical timer element:

    Dispenser under subclass 646 including a mechanism for limiting the period
    of discharge, or the period between the end of one discharge and the
    beginning of the succeeding discharge.


CLS 222/648
TXT And battery power supply:

    Dispenser under subclass 647 including a chemical cell, or cooperating
    structure therefor, which energizes the electrical circuit.


CLS 222/649
TXT For aerosol dispenser:

    Dispenser under subclass 638 comprising a gas-pressurized container for
    dispensing a solid, or liquid contained therein by entraining fine
    particles of the solid, or liquid in gas allowed to escape from the
    container through a valve controlled by the period limiting means.


CLS 222/650
TXT For plant or animal feed dispenser:

    Dispenser under subclass 638 comprising a container for food, or liquid for
    consumption by a plant, or lower animal, wherein the discharge of the food,
    or liquid is controlled by the period limiting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 51.11+ for a timer controlled feeding
    device having structure peculiar to animal feeding and including more than
    a mere dispenser.


CLS 222/651
TXT Of wash cycle ingredient dispenser:

    Dispenser under subclass 638 including a container for a cleansing agent
    and means for discharging the cleansing agent into an article washing
    machine, wherein the discharge of the cleansing agent is controlled by the
    period limiting means.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are patents having claims to
    apparatus which time the actuation period of agitators, or those which
    merely item the closure of outlet elements, or flow controllers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 17 for clothes
    washing machine claimed with soap dispensing means. Patents nominally
    reciting a clothes washing machine combined with soap dispensing structure
    are properly classified in Class 222.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 56+ for
    dishwashing machines having automatic controls.


CLS 222/652
TXT Movably mounted ingredient container:

    Dispenser under subclass 651 wherein the discharge of the cleansing agent
    is effected by movement of the entire container with respect to the machine.


CLS 223/
TTL APPAREL APPARATUS

CLS 223/
TXT This class is the generic class for machines and machine methods of making,
    repairing, and maintaining in proper condition articles of apparel and
    analogous articles except as provided for in other classes.

    It also includes certain devices and methods of plaiting, folding, turning,
    etc., applied to table linen, bed linen, curtains, bags and like articles
    not apparel, because of their similarity to apparel-treating devices.

    The group of trimming making also includes devices and methods of making
    trimmings not necessarily used with garments but which may be so used and
    are analogous to those which are so used as e.g., making tassels for
    curtains are here since their making is like that of muff or garment
    tassels.

    (1)     Note.  For apparel articles and article processes, see Class 2,
    Apparel, which is the broad class for articles of apparel and article
    processes not coming under this class or the classes noted below.

    (2)     Note.  For dyeing and fluid treatment of fabrics see Class 8,
    Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of Textiles
    and Fibers, for apparatus for dyeing and fluid treatment of textiles and
    fabrics, see Class 68, Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus.

    (3)     Note.  For making shoes, see Class 12, Boot and Shoe Making.

    (4)     Note.  For brushing and general cleaning, see Class 15, Brushing,
    Scrubbing, and General Cleaning.

    (5)     Note.  For the Treatment, finishing, and ornamentation of cloth,
    see Class 26, Textiles:  Cloth Finishing.

    (6)     Note.  See Class 34, Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids,
    for garment drying apparatus and processes of general utility, not claiming
    features of a form to fit or hold a garment, or process steps
    correspondingly limited. The mere naming of the garment in a process, or
    the recitation of a garment form generally or for a particular garment
    (e.g., by reciting forms, flat forms, garment forms, boards, stocking
    forms, etc.) will not exclude the case from Class 34.

    (7)     Note.  For boots and shoes, see Class 36, Boots, Shoes, and
    Leggings.

    (8)     Note.  For the manufacture of garments by knitting, weaving or
    sewing, see Class 66, Textiles:  Knitting; Class 139, Textiles:  Weaving;
    and Class 112, Sewing, respectively.

    (9)     Note.  For washing garments and for dry cleaning thereof, see Class
    68, Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus. For ironing and smoothing
    garments, see Class 38, Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing.

    (10)    Note.  For coating or impregnating, per se, search Class 427,
    Coating Processes, and Class 118, Coating Apparatus.

    (11)    Note.  For making of garments, etc., by braiding, netting, or lace
    making, see Class 87, Textiles: Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making.

    (11.5)  Note.  For making sanitary pads or garmet pads by depositing a
    fibrous pad on a cloth base and folding the base around the pad see Class
    19, Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclass 147.  For processes and
    apparatus for laminating in general and for forming a pad by a Class 19
    operation combined with a laminating step see Class 156, Adhesive Bonding
    and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, appropriate subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, appropriate subclasses, for a method of an
    apparatus for packaging stockings which includes some significant packaging
    operation beyond the mere insertion of a form in the stocking (e.g.,
    banding, wrapping, etc.).

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, appropriate subclass for body forms, frames or
    structures used to replace portions of a living human body.


CLS 223/1
TXT Inventions coming under the definition of the class, but not under any
    subclass below.


CLS 223/1.1
TXT Devices under the class definition including means to cut the lower end of
    a garment so as to fix the height of the hem above the ground when worn.

    (1)     Note.  This art grouping includes the combination of marking and
    cutting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 2+ for garment marking, per se.

    82,     Turning, subclasses 46+ for severing of tubular material by turning.


CLS 223/2
TXT Machines, tools and processes for performing various manufacturing
    operations on a collar, cuff, or the bosom of a shirt. Cutting, pressing,
    embossing and folding, and combinations of these acts, restricted to
    collar, cuffs and bosoms, are here.

    (1)     Note.  For folding, per se, see this class, subclasses 37 and 38.

    (2)     Note.  For stretching, per se, see this class, subclass 61, and
    indented subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  For coating or impregnating, per se, search Class 427,
    Coating Processes, and Class 118, Coating Apparatus.

    (5)     Note.  For cutting and punching, per se, see Class 83, Cutting.
    For tearing, per se, see Class 225, Severing by Tearing or Breaking.

    (6)     Note.  For cutting button-holes, see Class 83, Cutting, appropriate
    subclasses, particularly subclass 905.

    (7)     Note.  For sheet folding in general, see Class 270, Sheet-Material
    Associating.

    (8)     Note.  For sheet feeding, see Class 271, Sheet Feeding or
    Delivering; and for web feeding, see Class 226, Advancing Material of
    Indeterminate Length, and Class 242, Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 428+ for methods and subclasses 117+ for
    apparatus to form a package including means to fold or roll up sheet
    material or garments.


CLS 223/3
TXT Devices and methods under subclass 2 for pasting, folding and drying, and
    combinations of these acts.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 37.

    (2)     Note.  For coating apparatus and processes search Class 427,
    Coating Processes, and Class 118, Coating Apparatus, especially subclass 32
    for coating apparatus combined with means to fold the work, and subclasses
    58+ for coating apparatus combined with means to dry the work.

    (3)     Note.  For sheet folding, see Class 270, Sheet-Material Associating.


CLS 223/4
TXT Devices for and methods of applying a reinforce around the button holes of
    a collar, cuff, or bosom.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 2, Apparel, subclasses 118+, 122, 123+, 127, 129+,
    136, and 241.


CLS 223/6
TXT Devices for forming hoop skirts.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 52, 53, 68, and indented
    subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 140, Wireworking, subclasses 90, 92.1, and
    indented subclass.  For a method of or means for making a conical spring,
    see Class 72, Metal Deforming, subclasses 138+.


CLS 223/7
TXT Devices for and processes of making and renovating hats coming under the
    class definition not provided for below or in other classes.

    (1)     Note.  Combinations of methods or devices falling in Classes 19,
    Textiles: Fiber Preparation; 26, Textiles:  Cloth Finishing; 28, Textiles:
    Manufacturing, with a device or method falling in this class are placed
    here and cross-referenced into the other classes.

    (2)     Note.  Devices and methods for compacting, dipping, sizing,
    pinning, clearing, napping, clipping, pouncing, pressing, shaping,
    stretching, steaming, or otherwise operating on a formed hat or hat body
    are in this class, with this exception that if adapted for general
    application to textiles the device goes to Class 26, Textiles:  Cloth
    Finishing, or Class 28, Textiles:  Manufacturing; e.g., devices for
    operating on a hat body in flattened, rolled up, folded or similar
    condition, are in Classes 26 or 28; the hat in such case being regarded as
    a stock fabric.

    (3)     Note.  For heating and steaming hats, see this class, subclass 51.

    (5)     Note.  Devices and processes directed to assembling fur or other
    fibers into a cone or blank are in Class 19, Textiles: Fiber Preparation.

    (6)     Note.  For singeing, see Class 26, Textiles:  Cloth Finishing,
    subclasses 3-6, and Class 28, Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclass 239.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 171+ for a hat structure.

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 12+ for a hat sewing machine, and subclass
    475.11 for a method of sewing hats.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, for
    methods and apparatus for forming rubber bathing caps by a laminating
    operation.


CLS 223/8
TXT Devices and methods for forming wire frames for hats.

    (1)     Note.  For adjustable blocks, see this class, subclass 25.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 140, Wireworking, subclasses 71, 77, 92.1, and
    indented subclass.


CLS 223/10
TXT Means for wetting or sizing hat bodies by dipping, brushing, or in other
    ways.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 28, Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclass 116 for
    felting apparatus of general utility.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for coating apparatus of
    general application.

    427,    Coating Processes, for coating processes in general.


CLS 223/11
TXT Devices for removing excess water or size from hat bodies after felting or
    sizing, usually by roll-pressing or brushing.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 28, Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclass 116, and
    indented subclasses.


CLS 223/12
TXT Includes devices and methods for blocking, pressing, molding, stretching,
    and otherwise permanently shaping a hat or hat part.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 8 and 21.

    (2)     Note.  See this class, subclass 51 for heaters, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles: Manufacturing, subclasses 116+ and especially subclass
    124 for processes of an apparatus for felting hats or hat blanks where no
    specific step of or mechanism for forming hat structure, e.g., a brim is
    present. There mere felting of a parabolic, conical or cylindrical blank
    will not exclude a patent from Class 28.

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses for presses not elsewhere provided
    for.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses for processes for molding or shaping plastic
    materials within the class definition, see for example subclass 292
    pertaining to processes which include the step of stretching or stretch
    drawing over a form and subclass 296 for plural sequential shaping
    processes wherein one step reshapes only a portion of an article.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 383+ for a molding machine comprising preform reshaping or
    resizing means, or vulcanizing means with a conforming preform support.


CLS 223/13
TXT Devices under subclass 12 in which the pressure is applied through fluid
    means.


CLS 223/14
TXT Devices coming under subclass 12 peculiarly designed to shape the brim.

    (1)     Note.  For brim heaters, see this class, subclass 51.


CLS 223/15
TXT Devices for stretching or for shaping a hat including stretching.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 12, 25, and indented subclasses.


CLS 223/16
TXT Devices for trimming the brim of a hat to its proper contour.

    (1)     Note.  For severing sheets in general, see Class 83, Cutting.


CLS 223/17
TXT Devices for wiring a brim or binding the brim edge.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 22.

    (3)     Note.  See Class 36, Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclass 78.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 175.3+ for a hat including an edge binding; and
    subclass 274 for an edge binding for garments not specifically provided for
    elsewhere.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 243.57+ for a device for adding a binding
    or covering of metal to an article by overedge assembly therewith.


CLS 223/18
TXT Devices and methods for raising the nap on a hat, usually by the use of
    brushes.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 20 and 23.

    (2)     Note.  For carding, see Class 19, Textiles:  Fiber Preparation.

    (3)     Note.  For napping fabrics in general, see Class 26, Textiles:
    Cloth Finishing, subclass 29, and indented subclasses.


CLS 223/19
TXT Devices and methods for clipping, shaving, and cutting a nap or for pulling
    out the long or rough fibers of the nap.

    (1)     Note.  For singeing, see Class 26, Textiles:  Cloth Finishing.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 26, Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclass 7, and
    indented subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  For cutters in general, see Class 30, Cutlery; and Class 83,
    Cutting.

    (4)     Note.  See Class 69, Leather Manu- factures, subclasses 24+ for the
    removal of coarse or water hairs from a fur skin.


CLS 223/20
TXT Devices and methods for smoothing or polishing the nap of a hat by
    abrading, rubbing, brushing, or the like operation. The use of a
    sand-papering device or a polishing and coating device is here.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 21.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, for abrading in general.


CLS 223/21
TXT Machines, implements, and processes for ironing hats, caps, etc.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 20.

    (2)     Note.  For fluting irons, see this class, subclasses 35 and 36.

    (3)     Note.  For ironing or smoothing machines and implements in general,
    see Class 38, Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, appropriate subclasses.


CLS 223/22
TXT Devices and methods for preparing bands, bindings and linings, and applying
    them to a hat, not provided for in other classes.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 16 and 17.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 181+ for a liner for a head covering, a head
    covering having a liner, a method of making a liner for a head covering, or
    a method of making a head covering having a liner and subclass 175.3 for an
    exterior band for a hat, a hat having an exterior band, a method of making
    an exterior band for a hat, or a method of making a hat having an exterior
    band.


CLS 223/23
TXT Miscellaneous devices and methods of cleaning hats during manufacture or to
    renovate them.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 20.

    (2)     Note.  For brushing devices in general, see Class 15, Brushing,
    Scrubbing, and General Cleaning.

    (3)     Note.  For rubbing and beating to clean, see also Class 15,
    Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning; and Class 26, Textiles:  Cloth
    Finishing.


CLS 223/24
TXT Devices of hat form to hold the hat in shape for pouncing and other
    operations and to impart a definite shape in forming.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 211, Supports:  Racks, subclass 30, and indented
    subclasses.


CLS 223/25
TXT Devices under subclass 24 adjustable to the size of the hat or to stretch
    the same.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 15.


CLS 223/26
TXT Devices under subclass 25 having heating means.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 51, for heaters, per se.


CLS 223/27
TXT Devices and methods for making and attaching garment stiffeners; including
    many devices for making corset parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for molding and shaping corsets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 255+ for garment stiffeners.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 33.5+ for apparatus for binding or
    covering and cutting residually, and subclasses 243.57+ for binding or
    covering.

    140,    Wireworking, subclass 91 for making wire garment stays.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for methods and apparatus for making laminated
    articles.

    450,    Foundation Garments, subclasses 41+ and 143+ for brassieres and
    corsets, respectively, with stays.


CLS 223/28
TXT Devices for plaiting, fluting, or shirring fabrics in the manufacture of
    garments, ornaments therefor, and similar material.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 26, Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclass 21.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 493, Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper;
    or Other Manufacturing From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 395+.

    (3)     Note.  See Class 112, Sewing, subclass 25, and indented subclasses;
    144, and indented subclasses; for rufflers or gatherers, subclass 132, and
    indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses for presses not elsewhere provided
    for.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacturing,
    subclasses 339+ for methods for deforming or reshaping paper or paper like
    materials.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 72+ for bags having drawstrings.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 363+ for a press reshaping means including an endless surface
    and subclasses 383+ for a preform reshaping means for nonmetallic materials
    not provided for elsewhere.


CLS 223/29
TXT Devices under subclass 28 and having additional means to crease or flatten
    across previously made plaits.


CLS 223/30
TXT Devices making plaits by means of one or more reciprocating blades
    operating generally against a slotted bed or between rolls or other
    plaiting elements.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 33.


CLS 223/31
TXT The blades operate against a series of slots in a bed.


CLS 223/32
TXT Devices forming plaits by passing the fabric through rolls, bands, or other
    elements having intermeshing teeth, which form the plairs or flutes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    339+ for methods for deforming or reshaping paper or paper like materials.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 369+ for a preform corrugating means comprising opposed endless
    shaping means.


CLS 223/33
TXT Devices and methods under subclass 28 having a boardlike form having means
    in the form of rods or projections on which the material is plaited.  In
    some instances the board serves merely to hold the material which is
    plaited by a hand implement or by a pattern element.

    (1)     Note.  For boards in which the surface is made up by adjustable
    blocks, see this class, subclass 28.

    (2)     Note.  See this class, subclass 36.


CLS 223/34
TXT Fixed guides for producing (usually) longitudinal plaits in a strip of
    material by a relative motion of the material guide.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 37.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 112, Sewing, subclass 136, and indented subclasses.


CLS 223/35
TXT Hand implements for fluting or crimping material.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 132, Toilet, subclass 31, and indented subclasses.


CLS 223/36
TXT Hand implements coming under the definition of subclass 35.  These include
    combined sad and fluting irons, and hand irons, having teeth intermeshing
    with a bed.


CLS 223/37
TXT Devices and methods for folding garments and the like or parts thereof.
    Devices for folding collars and cuff blanks, for folding selvage edges,
    cuffs, or borders, on stockings, pants, and the like, are here.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 2, 3, 27, 28, and indented
    subclasses; and 35.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 493, Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper;
    or Other Manufacturing From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 405+ for folding a
    nonmetal sheet or web, generally.

    (3)     Note.  For folders in connection with sewing machines, see Class
    112, Sewing, subclass 136, and indented subclasses.

    (5)     Note.  For the general folding art, see Class 270, Sheet-Material
    Associating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 428+ for methods and subclasses 117+ for
    apparatus to form a package including means to fold or roll up sheet
    material or garments.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacturing,
    appropriate subclasses for processes and apparatus for laminating combined
    with a shaping step and see especially subclasses 339+.


CLS 223/38
TXT Machines, implements, and processes for folding coming under subclass 37,
    and having a templet over which the edge of the material is folded by
    movable folder blades.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 112, Sewing, subclass 120.


CLS 223/39
TXT Devices and methods of turning inside out and reversing garments, bags, and
    tubular fabric material.

    (1)     Note.  For devices for turning a cuff or sleeve partly over on
    trousers bottom, or stocking top, or the like, see this class, subclass 37.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclasses 57+ for apparatus for turning
    boots and shoes or the uppers or upper parts.


CLS 223/40
TXT Devices coming under subclass 39 having opposed members telescopically
    related, one passing within or between the opposing member or members.


CLS 223/41
TXT Devices coming under subclass 39 and having supports arranged end to end in
    abutting relation, the article being pulled from one to the other and
    thereby reversed.


CLS 223/42
TXT The devices have a rod on one end of which is an article engaging clamp.


CLS 223/43
TXT Devices which effect the turning operation by fluid pressure impressed
    directly on the article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 304 for similar
    devices having additional cleaning means.


CLS 223/44
TXT This is the general subclass for making and attaching trimmings to apparel,
    table ware and similar objects unless provided in other classes as noted
    below.

    (1)     Note.  For plaiting, shirring and fluting, see this class, subclass
    28.

    (2)     Note.  For making ornamentations by sewing, weaving, knitting,
    dyeing, or other processes provided for in the textile classes, see the
    appropriate class.

    (3)     Note.  For trimmings, per se, see Class 2, subclasses 244+.

    (4)     Note.  For ornamental articles of apparel and similar ornamental
    articles, see Class 2, subclasses 244+.

    (5)     Note.  Button setters not provided for in another class are placed
    in this subclass, except for hooked-needle or eyed-needle types, for which
    see subclass 102 herebelow.  Search Class 227, Elongated-Member-Driving
    Apparatus, subclasses 31+ for apparatus which attaches a button by driving
    it or a securing member (e.g., a staple) into a workpiece, Class 2,
    Apparel, subclasses 265+ for other means or for methods of attaching a
    button to apparel, and Class 112, Sewing, subclasses 104+ and 265.1 for
    means or methods of attaching a button by using a sewing machine.

    (6)     Note.  For methods of ornamenting cloth, see Class 26, Textiles:
    Cloth Finishing, subclasses 16, 30 and 69.

    (9)     Note.  For ornamentation of fabrics or articles while being woven
    or knit, see Class 66, Textiles:  Knitting; and class 139, Textiles:
    Weaving.

    (10)    Note.  For embossing methods and machines in general, see Class
    101, Printing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, appropriate subclasses for sewn trimming stock material.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses, for methods and apparatus for securing elements
    together by a laminating operation.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for trimming material which is not sewn, and subclasses 102+ for stock
    material which may be used as trimming material and which includes
    stitching and discrete fasteners, coating or an adhesive bond.


CLS 223/45
TXT Devices and methods for spotting fabrics usually by applying tufts of
    chenille to fabrics.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 26, Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclasses 2, 7,
    and indented subclasses; 13, and indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 66, Textiles:  Knitting, subclass 91, and indented
    subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  See Class 112, Sewing, subclasses 80.01+ for tufting type
    sewing apparatus.

    (4)     Note.  See Class 139, Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 2, and
    indented subclasses; 37, and indented subclasses; and 391, and indented
    subclasses.


CLS 223/46
TXT Machines and processes for making bows, tassels, and the like.

    (1)     Note.  For binding thread or yarn in bundles to form tufts, see
    Class 28, Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclass 147.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 4+ for a bow,
    pompom or rosette article structure, per se, and subclass 28 for a tassel,
    per se.


CLS 223/47
TXT Devices for preparing features for plumes, boas, dusters, etc., for curling
    feathers, attaching feathers to fabrics, and otherwise preparing feather
    ornaments not otherwise provided for.

    (1)     Note.  For reducing feathers to upholstery and cloth making
    materials, see Class 19, Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclass 4.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, subclass 404 for stock material including feathers sewn
    thereto; subclass 121.17 for a machine for sewing feathers to a base
    fabric; and subclass 470.19 for a method of sewing feathers to a base
    fabric.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous 428, subclass 6 for an article
    comprising feathers or a group of feathers.


CLS 223/48
TXT Devices and methods of stringing pearls, beads, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 241+ for other apparatus for assembling
    by stringing.

    63,     Jewelry.


CLS 223/49
TXT Devices for assembling parts of suspenders, garters, and the like.

    (1)     Note.  For assembling generally, see Class 29, Metal Working,
    subclass 700, and indented subclasses.


CLS 223/50
TXT Devices for inserting a tape, thread or cord into a garment, lace and the
    like.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 103 and 105.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 24, Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 34,
    and 712+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 241+ for apparatus that assembles and
    disassembles by a stringing action, either by stringing parts on an
    attenuated or elongated means or by passing such means through a part or
    parts.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 72+ for bags having drawstrings.


CLS 223/51
TXT Devices for heating and/or steaming hats and other articles in this class
    in making or remodeling the same.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 26, 60, 69, 73, 76, and 79.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 38, Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclasses
    14, and indented subclasses, and 71 and indented subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  See Class 68, Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass
    5 and indented subclasses.

    (4)     Note.  See Class 126, Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 348, 369 and
    any indented subclass.


CLS 223/52
TXT The miscellaneous subclass for forming, molding, pressing, stretching
    articles of apparel and similar things not otherwise provided for in this
    class.

    (1)     Note.  For like treatments of other articles of apparel, see this
    class, subclasses 53, 54, 57, and other appropriate subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  For shaping and forming shoe parts, see Class 12, Boot and
    Shoe Making.

    (3)     Note.  For stretching cloth, see Class 26, Textiles:  Cloth
    Finishing, subclasses 71+ for apparatus for stretching running length webs
    of cloth; and Class 38, Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclasses 102+
    for stretching apparatus for sheets of cloth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses for presses not elsewhere provided
    for.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for laminating combined with a shaping step and see
    especially subclasses 339+.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 383+ for molding apparatus comprising a preform reshaping or
    resizing means, or a vulcanizing means including a conforming preform
    support.


CLS 223/52.1
TXT Special machines for ironing collars, cuffs, or neckbands.

    (1)     Note.  For ironing machines in general, see Class 38, Textiles:
    Ironing or Smoothing.


CLS 223/52.2
TXT Collar or cuff ironers which fold the collar or cuff on a fold line and
    which curl the collar or cuff.


CLS 223/52.3
TXT Collar or cuff ironers which fold the collar or cuff on a fold line.


CLS 223/52.4
TXT Collar or cuff ironers which curl the collar or cuff.


CLS 223/52.5
TXT Collar, cuff or neckband ironers which iron an edge of the collar, cuff or
    neckband.


CLS 223/52.6
TXT Collar ironers which iron the folded edge of a collar.


CLS 223/53
TXT Machine methods of and machines for manufacturing corsets.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for devices and methods for making and attaching garment
    stiffeners, including devices for making corset parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 255+ for garment stiffening and staying.

    450,    Foundation Garments, subclasses 7+ and 94+ for corsets combined
    with brassieres and for corsets, respectively, and subclasses 92 and 155
    for hand methods of making the above-noted articles, respectively.


CLS 223/54
TXT Machine methods of and machines for making dress shields.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 57.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 2, Apparel, subclass 53.

    (2.5)   Note.  See (11.5) Note in class definition for the line with regard
    to garment and sanitary pads.


CLS 223/57
TXT Devices and methods of shaping or reshaping an article of apparel or part
    thereof and similar articles as pads, bandages, and the like, by a pressing
    or molding operation.

    (1)     Note.  For pressing hats, see this class, subclasses 12 and
    indented subclasses; and 24, and indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  For pressing garments on a form conforming to the shape of
    the garment, and by one operation see this class.

    (3)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 2+, 12+, 21 and 52+.

    (4)     Note.  For apparatus and methods for molding of plastics, see
    Classes 44, Fuel and Related Compositions, 162, Paper Making and Fiber
    Liberation and 264, Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:
    Processes.

    (5)     Note.  For pressing cloth, see Class 38, Textiles:  Ironing or
    Smoothing.

    (6)     Note.  For ironing clothing and analogous articles as e.g., table
    and bed linens, see Class 38, Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing.

    (7)     Note.  For pressing and forming leather articles, see Class 69,
    Leather Manufactures, subclasses 7, 8 and 37 to 48; Class 12, Boot and Shoe
    Making, subclasses 21, 22, 48, 64+.

    (8)     Note.  For presses in general, see Class 100, Presses.


CLS 223/60
TXT Means and methods for pressing a stocking. Usually the form is heated
    either by the press plates or an internal steam or hot-air or water current.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 76 and 77.


CLS 223/61
TXT Various devices and methods of stretching not otherwise provided for below.

    (1)     Note.  For collar and cuff stretching, see this class, subclass 2.

    (2)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 67, 69, 70, 74, 77, 79, and 80.

    (3)     Note.  For stretching cloth, see Class 26, Textiles:  Cloth
    Finishing, subclasses 71+ for apparatus for stretching  running length webs
    of cloth; and Class 38, Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclasses 102+
    for stretching apparatus for sheets of cloth.

    (4)     Note.  See Class 69, Leather Manufactures, subclasses 1.5 and 46.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for hat shaping devices employing stretching.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 235 for devices for stretching resilient
    sleeves for assembling articles within them.

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclasses 102.1 for a cloth
    stretcher frame.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclasses 19.1+ for a skin or hide stretcher.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 296+, 302, 378 and 392 for a method or
    an apparatus for stretching metal beyond its elastic limit.


CLS 223/63
TXT Frames or the like to be placed inside the sleeve or leg and expanded to
    stretch and/or crease the same.

    (1)     Note.  For inside forms of fixed form or adjustable over which
    other articles may be placed for exhibition, drying, shrinking, or
    stretching, see this class, subclasses 72, and indented subclasses; 75 and
    indented subclasses; and 78, and indented subclasses.


CLS 223/65
TXT Devices coming under subclass 61 in which the stretching is effected by a
    stretching frame inside the tie.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 82.


CLS 223/66
TXT Miscellaneous structures in the nature of a form over which a garment may
    be fitted and which serves to impart a shape to the garment preventing
    wrinkling and simulating its appearance when worn, and for purposes of
    storage or display.

    (1)     Note.  These devices also serve to prevent shrinkage and when
    adjustable in size may serve as stretchers. Stretchers when stretching is
    due to the size, character or adjustability of the form itself are here or
    in subclasses 63 and 65; otherwise, for stretching search the subclasses of
    stretchers.

    (2)     Note.  For hat blocks, see this class, subclasses 24, 25 and 26.

    (3)     Note.  For lasts, see Class 12, Boot and Shoe Making.

    (4)     Note.  See Class 211, Supports:  Racks, subclasses 30, and indented
    subclasses; and 34, and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 402 for a preform reshaping surface, per se.


CLS 223/67
TXT Forms coming under subclass 66 which are inflatable in whole or part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclass 114.4 for forms for shaping and
    stretching shoes, which are inflated by pneumatic pressure while inserted
    in the shoe.


CLS 223/68
TXT Devices coming under subclass 66 simulating the appearance of dress, coat,
    or skirt.

    (1)     Note.  For devices for and methods of laying out and measuring,
    using sometimes forms expansible and contractile to fit the person, see
    Class 33, Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 11-16.


CLS 223/69
TXT Devices in the nature of flat expansible frames simulating the outline of a
    coat, skirt, etc., on which the garment may be stretched to shrink, dry, or
    display it.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 51, 63, 76, and 79.


CLS 223/70
TXT Devices coming under subclass 68 having heating or steaming means.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 51, 73, 76, and 79.


CLS 223/71
TXT Devices in the nature of substantially flat or planar forms to assist in
    retaining the shape or form of a laundered dress, coat or skirt for use in
    display, storage, or as a laundry or travel accessory.


CLS 223/72
TXT Constructions coming under subclass 66 in the general form of a tubular
    article as a sleeve or trouser-leg upon which an article may be placed for
    display, or to dry and shrink, or for other purposes.

    (1)     Note.  For internal trouser stretching frames, see this class,
    subclass 63.


CLS 223/73
TXT Devices coming under subclass 72 having means internal or external to heat
    or steam the article placed on the form.

    (1)     Note.  For heating and steaming hats, see this class, subclass 51;
    for heating and steaming forms for coats, gloves and stockings, see
    subclasses 69, 70, 76, and 79.


CLS 223/74
TXT Devices coming under subclass 72 which are expansible to fit different
    sized garments or to stretch the same.

    (1)     Note.  If specific stretching means other than the mere
    adjustability to size of the form are present, see this class, subclass 61,
    and indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  For inside expansible frames as stretchers, see this class,
    subclass 63.


CLS 223/75
TXT Devices coming under subclass 66 in form of a stocking or stocking-foot.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 60.


CLS 223/76
TXT Devices coming under subclass 75 having forms combined with heating means
    as electrical, hot water, or steam systems. Also forms per se specially
    adapted to be used in connection with such heating means.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 51, 60, 70, 76, and 79.


CLS 223/77
TXT Forms coming under subclass 76 having means to expand them in one or more
    directions.


CLS 223/78
TXT Forms coming under subclass 66 in the form of a hand or part of a hand.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Part Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, subclasses 57+ for artificial hands designed to
    replace missing members of a living human body.


CLS 223/79
TXT Devices coming under subclass 78 having heating or steaming means.

    (1)     Note.  For heating forms for other articles, see this class,
    subclasses 51, 60, 70, 73, and 76.


CLS 223/80
TXT Devices coming under subclass 78 which are expansible, usually to stretch a
    glove or finger.

    (1)     Note.  For other expansible forms, see this class, subclasses 74
    and 77.

    (2)     Note.  For heated expansible forms, see this class, subclass 79.


CLS 223/81
TXT Forms coming under subclass 66 shaped to conform to articles of neckwear as
    collars and ties.

    (1)     Note.  For inside stretcher frames, see this class, subclass 65.


CLS 223/82
TXT Devices coming under subclass 81 to be placed inside the tie or other
    article.

    (1)     Note.  For stretching frames inside a tie, see this class, subclass
    65.


CLS 223/83
TXT Miscellaneous devices for retaining the form of collars, ties, etc.,
    usually in connection with putting up laundered articles, or as baggage,
    packing or traveling accessories.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 71 and 84.


CLS 223/84
TXT Miscellaneous devices for retaining the shape or form of an article of
    apparel, usually to retain the form of a laundered article but, also, for
    display purposes.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 71 and 83.


CLS 223/85
TXT Devices having features specially adapting them to suspend garments.

    (1)     Note.  These are distinguished from forms, this class, in that the
    latter are designed to simulate to a greater or less extend the human form
    to support and shape the garment as it is when worn.  The mere rounded top
    coat hanger is in hangers.

    (2)     Note.  For hat and shoe supports, and hangers, see Class 211,
    Supports: Racks, subclasses 30, and indented subclasses; and 38.  For other
    suspending supports, see the various subclasses of suspended supports in
    Class 248, Supports, which are in general for supporting single articles;
    and Class 211, Supports:  Racks, subclasses 113, and indented subclasses;
    45, and indented subclasses, which are in general for supporting plural
    articles.  Devices which may be used for suspending a garment and equally
    well for suspending other articles, having no special adaptation for
    garment hanging, are in classes 211, Supports:  Racks; and 248, Supports.

    (3)     Note.  For hooks, per se, see Class 248, Supports, and Class 24,
    Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 716 for a hanger device (e.g.,
    hook) for portable article support (e.g., coat hanger).

    (4)     Note.  For processes and apparatus for forming wire garment
    hangers, see Class 140, Wireworking, subclass 81.5.

    (5)     Note.  See Class 206, Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses
    278+ for a container specially adapted to contain garments and made-up
    articles of cloth.  Includes a former, coacting with the container, for
    holding the article in shape and a special former for packing and not
    capable of use for display.


CLS 223/86
TXT Hangers coming under subclass 85, having means to retain perfumery or
    insect repelling material.


CLS 223/87
TXT Hangers coming under subclass 85, made of sheet material, usually a
    flexible cardboard.


CLS 223/88
TXT Garment hangers constructed to support more than one garment at a time, the
    garments being of different types.


CLS 223/89
TXT Combined type hangers constructed to be either foldable or telescopic.


CLS 223/90
TXT Foldable or telescopic hangers of the combined type having a clamp or
    clamps for supporting garments.


CLS 223/91
TXT Combined type hangers having a clamp or clamps for supporting garments.


CLS 223/92
TXT Garment hangers constructed to support a coat or dress.  These hangers for
    the most part are of the simple single supporting bar type.


CLS 223/93
TXT Coat or dress hangers having a clamp or clamps for supporting garments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90      and 91, for clamp type garment hangers in combined form.


CLS 223/94
TXT Coat or dress hangers constructed to be either foldable or telescopic.

    (1)     Note.  Coat or dress hangers which are both "with clamp" and
    "foldable or telescopic", will be classified in subclass 93, and
    cross-referenced into subclass 94.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89,     for combined type hangers which are foldable or telescopic.


CLS 223/95
TXT Garment hangers constructed to support a skirt or trousers.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 211, Supports:  Racks, subclasses 45, and indented
    subclasses, and 113, and indented subclasses.


CLS 223/96
TXT Skirt or trousers hangers having a clamp or clamps for supporting garments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90      and 91, for clamp type garment hangers in combined form.


CLS 223/97
TXT Garment hangers constructed to support a fur scarf or muff or both.


CLS 223/98
TXT Devices, frequently cardboard, to be placed over the hanger, or over the
    hanger and garment to protect the latter from dust or from injury by the
    hanger.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 150, Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers,
    subclasses 154+ for a flaccid protective cover which is configured for and
    supported by the article it protects.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 312, Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 3, and
    indented subclasses.


CLS 223/99
TXT Devices for threading needles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 241 for apparatus for assembling and
    disassembling by a stringing action, either by stringing parts on an
    attenuated or elongated means or by passing such means through a part or
    parts.

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 222 to 225 for threading devices in connection
    with sewing machines.


CLS 223/100
TXT Forms over which material is placed to hold in position for darning.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 28, Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclasses 149+ for
    thread frames not provided for elsewhere.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 66, Textiles:  Knitting, subclass 2.


CLS 223/101
TXT Hand devices for pushing and/or pulling a needle or pin through the work.

    (1)     Note.  For combined thimbles and threaders, see class, subclass 99.

    (2)     Note.  For finger cots, see Class 2, Apparel, subclass 21.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, subclass 121 for thread cutters combined with
    thimbles, and 30, Cutlery, appropriate subclasses, for thread cutters, per
    se.


CLS 223/102
TXT The general subclass for pointed instruments having an eye, hook or
    equivalent to attach to a thread, tape, or the like, for sewing, threading,
    or attaching the thread to a fabric.

    (1)     Note.  For knitting needles, see Class 66, Textiles:  Knitting,
    subclass 116, and indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  For sewing machine needles, see Class 112, Sewing, subclass
    222, and indented subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  For marlin spikes, see Class 57, Textiles:  Spinning,
    Twisting, and Twining, subclass 23.

    (4)     Note.  For surgical needles, see Class 606, Surgery, subclasses
    222+, for surgical needles.

    (5)     Note.  For needle making, see Class 163, Needle and Pin Making.

    (6)     Note.  For needle packages, see Class 206, Special Receptacle or
    Package, subclasses 380+ for a needle package.

    (7)     Note.  This subclass includes button setting apparatus having an
    eye or hook which engages a button-eye or button-attaching thread means.
    See (5) Note under subclass 44 above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for other button-attachers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 241 for apparatus for assembling and
    disassembling by a stringing action, either by stringing parts on an
    attenuated or elongated means or by passing such means through a part or
    parts.

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclass 30 for
    method of puncturing, subclass 95 for means to stack a product by spindling
    or perforating, and subclass 660 for a pointed perforator, per se.

    289,    Knots and Knot Tying, subclass 16 for needles or machines for tying
    cords or strands.

    402,    Binder Device Releasably Engaging Aperture or Notch of Sheet,
    subclass 7 for a device of that class including a sheet retainer which
    impales one or more sheets and inserts a binder strand therethrough.


CLS 223/103
TXT Devices coming under subclass 102 and specially constructed to insert a
    tape as distinguished from a cord or thread.


CLS 223/104
TXT Devices coming under subclass 102 and in the nature of awls.  They usually
    have handles and frequently carry in the handle a thread supply.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 12, Boot and Shoe Making, subclass 103.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 112, Sewing, subclasses 48 and 169.

    (3)     Note.  See Class 606, Surgery, subclasses 144+, for mechanical
    suture or ligature applying devices including spool thread supply devices
    carried on the needle handle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclass 660 for a
    pointed perforator, per se.


CLS 223/105
TXT Devices used to thread a curtain pole or rod through a curtain or shade
    loop.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 241 for apparatus for assembling parts by
    stringing.


CLS 223/106
TXT Miscellaneous stands, racks, and holders, especially designed to hold
    sewing accessories such as work, spools needles, pins, scissors, etc.

    (1)     Note.  For darning lasts hollowed to contain needles, spools etc.,
    see this class, subclass 100.

    (2)     Note.  For toilet kits, see Class 132, Toilet.

    (3)     Note.  For special receptacles, see Class 206, Special Receptacle
    or Package, subclass 227 for a kit package including thread, subclasses
    349+ for a tool or appliance container and subclasses 389+ for a roll, reel
    or spool container.

    (4)     Note.  Compartment boxes will be found in Classes 206, Special
    Receptacles and Packages; 217, Wooden Receptacles; 220, Receptacles, and
    229, Paper Receptacles.

    (5)     Note.  For racks, see Class 211, Supports:  Racks.

    (5.5)   Note.  For stands, racks and holders including article dispensing
    means, see Class 221, Article Dispensing.

    (6)     Note.  For spool holders, per se, see Class 242, Winding,
    Tensioning, or Guiding.

    (7)     Note.  For cabinets generally, see Class 312, Supports:  Cabinet
    Structure.


CLS 223/107
TXT Devices coming under subclass 106 distinguished in that they have as
    important or dominant features a basket or box to hold the spools,
    implements, or work.


CLS 223/108
TXT Devices for holding pins, needles, thimbles, and other implements for use
    in sewing.

    (1)     Note.  For implement holders combined with spool holders, search
    also in this class, subclasses 106 and 107.


CLS 223/109
TXT Devices for holding needles and pins.

    (1)     Note.  To complete a search for pin cushions, see this class,
    subclasses 106, 107 and 108.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, see (3) Note under subclass 106
    above.


CLS 223/111
TXT Devices to assist in putting on or removing garments from the person.

    (1)     Note.  Tools which are intended to pull the slider of a zipper up
    or down have been classified in Class 294, subclass 3.6 even when the only
    disclosed use is to assist in the putting on or taking off of a garment.


CLS 223/112
TXT Devices to remove stockings and other garments from forms, usually of
    drying or treating machines.


CLS 223/113
TXT Various types of devices for aiding in putting on or taking off boots,
    shoes, or overshoes.


CLS 223/114
TXT Devices for engaging the heel or the heel and toe of a boot or shoe to aid
    in its removal.  Some are straps in the form of a kind of harness.


CLS 223/115
TXT The jack can be folded upon itself or against the wall, chair, or other
    support to which attached.


CLS 223/116
TXT The heel-engaging jaws move generally through not always automatically to
    grip the heel of the boot or shoe more firmly.


CLS 223/117
TXT The jack has means for engaging both the heel and the toe of the boot or
    shoe.


CLS 223/118
TXT Devices to be temporarily inserted in shoes to facilitate putting on the
    latter.


CLS 223/119
TXT The horn has means for gripping the shoe-upper, so a pull can be applied to
    the shoe.


CLS 223/120
TXT Supports, bases and stands claimed in connection with apparatus in this
    class.

    (1)     Note.  For supports, bases and stands for more general application,
    see Class 248, Supports.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses. Class 269 is the residual
    locus for patents to a device for clamping, supporting and/or holding an
    article (or articles) in position to be operated on or treated.  See notes
    thereunder for other related loci.


CLS 224/
TTL PACKAGE AND ARTICLE CARRIERS

CLS 224/
TXT The inventions included within this class are themselves specially adapted
    to be supported upon some person or object.

    The carrying feature predominates.  Lifters and grapples are excluded
    because the hoisting or lifting feature is considered to control.

    The articles carried also affect the classification for the same reason.
    Holders for bouquets, tickets, and other small objects of personal wear or
    use are excluded because they are carried for the use only and not with the
    idea of transportation.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 182, Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses
    3+, for body harness, per se, of general application, and see the notes
    under the definition of such subclass for other combinations utilizing body
    harness.

    (2)     Note.  Vehicle attached carriers - subclasses 29+ - include
    receptacles attached for use during transportation as well as receptacles
    attached for transportation only.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, for a garment or other device to be worn by a person to
    adorn, cover, or protect the body,  especially subclass 460 for a garment
    having a shoulder strap protector attached to it, or a shoulder strap
    protector which protects the wearer from a garment strap; subclass 49.2 for
    an infant's bib having a pouch for receiving debris or an article; subclass
    94 for a coat adapted for carrying game, ammunition, or other article; and
    subclass 300 for a garment supporter having combined therewith an
    additional device or feature which is for other than garment supporting or
    adjusting purposes, including garment supporters having a guard, putting-on
    aid, pocket, article holder, indicator, a decorative feature such as a
    sash, bow, or bead, etc., where the garment-supporting feature is not
    merely incidental.

    42,     Firearms, for a portable firearm; i.e., one which is supported by
    hand when operated, such as a shoulder gun, pistol, toy firearm, or cane
    gun (except the automatic or explosive firearm, which is found in Class
    89), also for a firearm combined with a cleaner, entrenching device,
    bayonet, and other cutters (including specifically a pistol-sword). See
    especially subclass 85 for the combination of a gun and gun trimming,
    subclass 86 for the combination of a gun and a bayonet, and subclasses 87+
    for the combination of a gun and a magazine charger.

    63,     Jewelry, for an article generally composed of precious metals and
    stones or for an article of an analogous nature which is composed of other
    materials. See especially subclasses 3+ for a bracelet and subclasses 21+
    for subject matter relating to an ornamental or safety attachment for a
    watch or for an ornamental chain.

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 44+ for a rigid
    planar horizontal support surface attachable to a vehicle where the carried
    article is not intended to be carried.

    114,    Ships, for a marine vehicle or accessory, such as a merchant
    vessel, warship, submarine, torpedo boat, etc., the spar, sail, or fitting
    specific thereto and not otherwise classifiable. See especially subclass
    364 for an attachment to either an exposed portion of a boat deck or on or
    at the top of a boat side. For a boat having an article carrier, placement
    is in Class 114 if the boat structure is more than merely nominally recited
    in the claims.

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, for a portable covering, formed of
    flexible material, for protection from mosquitoes, flies, or other insects,
    and from the weather, also a frame or support for the same, and a cane and
    other stick or staff used as aids to locomotion. See especially subclasses
    87+ for a portable shelter, subclass 88 for a portable shelter at least
    partially supported by vehicular structure, subclasses 65+ for a cane,
    stick, crutch, or walking aid, especially subclass 66 for the
    aforementioned structure which is (a) associated with, supports, or houses
    a disparate article or (b) is so modified or modifiable as to function as a
    disparate article.

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, subclasses 100+ for a purse
    (i.e., a container which is used to carry personal items, such as money,
    keys, or identification on one's person); subclasses 131+ for a receptacle
    which is of such a size that it can be carried in one's pocket or purse and
    is intended for the reception of relatively small personal items such as
    money, credit cards, driver's license, etc.; and subclasses 154+ for a
    flaccid protective cover which is configured for and supported by the
    article it protects.

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, for an article of hand-carried
    luggage which is intended to be grasped by the hand. For the line between
    Class 224 and Class 190, the test to be used is: If one of the bearer's
    hands must remain occupied in order to carry the luggage, it is proper for
    Class 190; if it is also intended to be simultaneously slung over the
    bearer's shoulder (and is not carrying items of personal use, the subject
    matter of Class 150), it is proper for Class 224.

    211,    Supports: Racks, for a built-up open framework structure designed
    to support articles. A rack in the nature of an upright stand or standard
    carrying article support and also self-supporting articles supports,
    frequently built up of sheet material, are also included.

    248,    Supports, for a device which carries the weight of an article or
    articles or otherwise holds or steadies it or them against the pull of
    gravity, and devices for holding an article to its support, which are not
    otherwise provided for.

    (1)     Note.  A devices having structural features limiting it to use in a
    particular art remains with the art and not Class 248.

    280,    Land Vehicles, for a vehicle adapted to travel on land and not
    elsewhere classified and including some form of running gear as an
    essential element, which running gear usually supports a load carrier but
    may support a load directly, and adapts the vehicle to move over a surface.
    The basic purpose of the device is the carrying or towing of a load, either
    freight or passengers, from one place to another. Search especially
    subclasses 809+, 202, 288.4+, 33.992, and 727+ for an attachment/accessory
    to a wheeled vehicle where the organization of the vehicle is changed.

    293,    Vehicle Fenders, for a device attached to a vehicle for the purpose
    of removing persons and animals from the path of a moving vehicle or of
    catching and retaining the same or for receiving or fending off blows from
    other vehicles or objects.

    296,    Land Vehicles: Bodies and Tops, for a device relating to that
    portion of a land vehicle, secured to the running-gear thereof, which
    operates as a receptacle or load carrier, together with the top or cover
    therefor. See especially subclasses 37.1+ for a land vehicle having a
    compartment or receiver formed or "built in" to the body or top of a
    vehicle for the storage or receipt of articles or debris.

    383,    Flexible Bags, for a receptacle having a peripheral wall made of
    flaccid or flexible material, with at least one closed end, and having an
    access opening which may be an open end of the receptacle or which may be
    provided in the peripheral wall or closed end of the receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  Class 383 includes a bag having a handle which is intended
    to be grasped by the hand. The test to be used is: A bag having a strap or
    other means intended to  support the bag on the bearer's body while
    allowing the bearer's hands to remain free. Any bag of this type is proper
    for Class 224 even if it also includes an element which optionally may be
    gripped by the bearer's hand. If the bearer's hand must remain occupied in
    order to carry the bag, it is proper for this class (383) even if it is
    also intended to be simultaneously slung over the bearer's shoulder.

    410,    Freight Accommodation on Freight Carrier, for the generic class of
    accommodation of discrete units of freight which have been loaded on board
    a freight carrier for transportation.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, for receptacles of that class type,
    particularly subclasses 315.3+ and 315.11 for golf bags and arrow quivers,
    respectively, which may include a shoulder strap.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 137 for article
    carriers which are gripped and carried by the hand.


CLS 224/.5
TXT Package and article carriers not otherwise classifiable.


CLS 224/29.5
TXT Patents for various types of package or article carrying racks, baskets,
    etc., used on railway-cars.


CLS 224/42.11
TXT Carriers under subclass 401 including a plurality of spaced carrier units
    positioned on different sides of a vehicle, and interconnected by a yoke or
    saddle.


CLS 224/42.12
TXT Carriers under subclass 401 which are specially constructed to receive a
    wheel, rim and/or tire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    489+,   for wheel carriers combined with bumper structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    157,    Wheelwright Machines, subclass 1.11 for wheel rim and/or tire
    carriers which are combined with or convertible to a device for applying a
    tire to and/or removing the same from a wheel or rim.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 304+ for a receptacle for
    a tire.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 23+, for racks and stands specially
    designed to support tires or wheels.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 152.05, for fender-well type tire or wheel
    carriers.


CLS 224/42.13
TXT Carriers under subclass 42.12 which are combined with a rack or receptacle.


CLS 224/42.14
TXT Combinations under subclass 42.13 in which the rack or receptacle and
    wheel, rim or tire carrier are recessed one within the other.


CLS 224/42.15
TXT Carriers under subclass 42.12 in which distinct means are provided for
    receiving each of a plurality of wheels, tires and/or rims.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 464 for vehicle attached
    plural carriers for rims, tires or wheels which are movable mounted to
    facilitate or permit placement of the load on the carrier which has been
    moved or removal of the load therefrom.


CLS 224/42.16
TXT Carriers under subclass 42.15, comprising supporting means engageable with
    or attachable to a spare tire, a spare rim or a spare tire mounting ring
    for supporting a second spare tire, wheel or rim.


CLS 224/42.18
TXT Carriers under subclass 42.15 which are provided with hasps, straps, bands
    or the like forming loops about the tires, wheels or rims to secure them to
    their support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.26,  for loop fasteners for a single tire, wheel and/or rim.


CLS 224/42.19
TXT Carriers under subclass 42.15 in which the sole article securing means in
    each distinct receiver comprises means for engaging rims only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.26+, for similar devices adapted to carry             single rims.


CLS 224/42.2
TXT Carriers under subclass 42.12 comprising a cover or casing adapted to
    surround or encase at least half of the tire, wheel and/or rim.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 304+ for a receptacle for
    a tire.


CLS 224/42.21
TXT Carriers under subclass 42.12 which are movably mounted on a vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 462+ for vehicle attached
    auxiliary carriers which are movably mounted to facilitate or permit
    placement of the load thereon or removal therefrom.


CLS 224/42.23
TXT Carriers under subclass 42.12 positioned on the underside of a vehicle and
    depending below the point of support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.41,  for carriers suspended below a vehicle.

    309,    for carriers associated with the roof of a vehicle.

    489,    for carriers suspended from the bumper of a vehicle.

    538,    for carriers suspended from various parts of a vehicle not
    otherwise classified.


CLS 224/42.24
TXT Carriers under subclass 42.12 including (1) a spindle or other projecting
    device adapted to pass through a wheel hub or hub-receiving opening to
    provide a supporting means therefor, or (2) cooperating elements on the
    carrier adapted to clamp the marginal portion of a wheel hub-opening or
    engage the conventional lugbolt holes to secure a wheel in place.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.2,   for hub-carried wheels including a casing for the wheel and its
    mounting.


CLS 224/42.25
TXT Carriers under subclass 42.12 in which locking means is integrated into the
    construction of the carrier to form an intimate part of the carrying or
    holding portions of the carrier.

    (1)     Note.  Separable or removable locking means such as padlocks or the
    like and associated hasps or aligned openings adapted to cooperate
    therewith are held to be conventional and not significantly combined with
    the carrier.

    (2)     Note.  Inventions classified here must include definite carrier
    structure as well as a locking means therefor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclasses 259+, for wheel, tire or rim locks, per se.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 551+ for a support having means for preventing
    unauthorized removal of articles therefrom.


CLS 224/42.26
TXT Carriers under subclass 42.12 including a clamping means adapted to clamp a
    rim and/or a tire in fixed position on the carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.19,  for devices for clamping multiple tire carriers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 152.05, for wheel-clamping means adapted to
    secure a wheel in a fender well.


CLS 224/42.27
TXT Carriers under subclass 42.26 in which the clamping or holding means expand
    or move outwardly toward the rim or tire to engage the same.


CLS 224/42.28
TXT Carriers under subclass 42.27 in which the outwardly moving clamping means
    are pivotally mounted.


CLS 224/42.29
TXT Carriers under subclass 42.27 in which the outwardly movable clamping
    elements move rectilinearly on a chord or radially of the tire or rim.


CLS 224/42.3
TXT Carriers under subclass 42.26 in which the gripping or holding elements
    move in the direction of the axis of the tire and/or rim which they engage,
    i.e., toward and away from the plane of the tire or rim.


CLS 224/42.31
TXT Carriers under subclass 400 which are designed to be attached to the mud
    guards of a vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  Patents disclosing a carrier attached to the fender of a
    vehicle and claiming only the portion of the carrier designed to engage the
    fender are also classified here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.32+,for similar carriers attached to the running board of a vehicle.

    488+,   for similar carriers attached to the bumper of a vehicle.

    545+,   for various bracket-type carriers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 200+, for bracket constructions, per se,
    particularly subclasses 226.11+, for brackets clamped to a support.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 152.05, for fender well-types of carriers.


CLS 224/42.32
TXT Carriers under subclass 400 which are adapted to be mounted upon a
    conventional platform or platform-like portion of a vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  Patents claiming only the carrier are placed here if the
    platform-engaging means is claimed and the device is illustrated as
    attached to a vehicle.

    (2)     Note.  Auxiliary platforms attached to a vehicle solely to support
    carriers are not a conventional portion of a vehicle and are classified in
    this class, subclasses 564+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    538,    for carriers suspended from a running board.

    564+,   for auxiliary attached platforms. See (2) Note.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 200+, for article supporting brackets, per se,
    particularly subclasses 226.11+, for brackets clamped to a support.  See
    (1) Note.


CLS 224/42.33
TXT Carriers under subclass 42.32 which comprise an upright retaining wall
    member mounted on or adjacent to an end or edge portion of a platform.

    (1)     Note. These carriers normally are spaced from the sides of a
    vehicle to form an article-receiving trough.


CLS 224/42.34
TXT Carriers under subclass 42.33 which are either collapsible or flexible.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.01,  for convertible running board carriers.


CLS 224/42.35
TXT Carriers under subclass 42.34 which are movable to a position below the
    platform.

    (1)     Note.  Positioning of the carrier below the platform is normally
    for the purpose of storage.


CLS 224/42.36
TXT Carriers under subclass 42.34 in the form of lazy-tongs.

    (1)     Note.  See Index to Classification of Patents for classes involving
    various applications of "lazy-tongs".


CLS 224/42.37
TXT Carriers under subclass 42.32 which include means for penetrating the
    article to secure it in position.

    (1)     Note.  These patents are, for the most part, devices for carrying
    blocks of ice.


CLS 224/42.38
TXT Carriers under subclass 42.32 comprising shiftable means for clamping
    articles in the carrier or engaging articles of different sizes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 309.1+, for bracket supports having
    article-holding means.


CLS 224/42.39
TXT Clamping carriers under subclass 42.38 comprising a strap or the like for
    securing an article to a vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  Patents claiming only an anchor means for such strap
    fastener when designed for mounting on a vehicle platform are also
    classified here.


CLS 224/42.4
TXT Carriers under subclass 42.32 comprising means which secure an article to a
    vehicle platform, but carry none of the weight of the article.

    (1)     Note.  The article secured may be an article or package carrier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 499 for tie-downs and 500+ for holdowns not
    limited in use to a vehicle platform.


CLS 224/44.5
TXT Carrier under subclass 101 in the firm of a receptacle for bricks or mortar
    and adapted to be supported on the shoulder of the person using the carrier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 3.5 for hand
    trays used for holding mortar.


CLS 224/101
TXT CARRIED BY ANIMATE BEARER:
    Carrier under the class definition supported by a living bearer.

    (1)     Note.  Carriers of the type included in this subclass and in
    subclasses intended thereunder have been placed in other classes on the
    basis of claims referring to particular articles or devices which are held
    by the carriers and which are classifiable in said classes.  In addition,
    classification of the same type of carriers in different classes will
    continue to exist until all related classes have been reclassified.  Hence,
    a searcher should consult search notes included in this schedule for a
    partial listing of classes wherein similar body-supported carriers are
    included.

    (2)     Note.  The guards and holders found in Class 24, Buckles, Buttons,
    Clasps, etc., are generally for eyeglasses, bouquets, tickets, and other
    small articles carried more for personal use than for transportation.
    Chatelaine hooks are classified in Class 24 unless the support used
    therewith is specified further than as a mere ring or hook.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, appropriate subclasses for garments having article
    carriers such as pockets.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, appropriate subclasses
    for devices of the class which are attached to the body of the user.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, appropriate subclasses for body
    supported carriers for devices in the class.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 54.1+ for
    holders for fish, bait, lures, and other articles in the class, some of
    which are body supported.

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 328.1+ for fruit-gathering receivers
    attached to a user's limb.

    84,     Music, appropriate subclasses, including subclass 37 for
    body-attached supports for musical instruments.

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclass 43 for
    body-supported clip boards and the like.

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 257+ for body- attached supports for tobacco
    articles such as cigarettes and pipes.

    132,    Toilet, appropriate subclasses for carriers holding articles or
    devices in the class, e.g., body-attached carriers for hairpins, shaving
    gear, or make-up materials and their applicators.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 104+ for wood boring equipment supported by
    the user.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 101 for means for securing
    a match packet, container, or holder to a person or garment, and other
    appropriate subclasses for patents which disclose body-attaching means for
    holders for particular types of articles.

    248,    Supports, subclass 444 for body supported easels.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 103+ for  body-attached supports for
    flashlights and other lights.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 6+ for a flexible bag having a handle
    which is intended to be grasped by the hand.  If the bearer's hand must
    remain occupied in order to carry the bag, it is proper for Class 383 even
    if it is also intended to be slung over the bearer's shoulder.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 420+ for an operator supported camera.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 6+ for
    body-supported carriers for implements in the class.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for particular types
    of connections between body-supported straps and articles carried by said
    straps.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 185+ for belts and
    shoulder-engaging harness supporting weights used as ballast by divers.

    433,    Dentistry, appropriate subclasses for body supported carriers for
    devices used by dentists.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclasses 88+ for garments and
    other body-attached buoyant structures comprising pockets or other carriers
    for provisions or potable water; subclasses 114+ for body harness or the
    like, combined with buoyant structure secured to the back of a person or
    animal; and subclasses 117+ for similar structure adapted to be secured to
    the chest.

    450,    Foundation Garments, subclasses 86+ for brassiere shoulder strap
    arrangements, and subclasses 100+ for attaching mean engaged with a
    person's leg.

    602,    Surgery: Splint, Brace, or Bandage, subclass 4 for slings.

    604,    Surgery, subclass 345 for colostomy having body-support means; and
    subclasses 351+ for urine receptors for males having body-support means.


CLS 224/103
TXT Fish or game stringer or holder therefor:

    Carrier under subclass 101 including a line, hook, or other means on which
    a fish or game animal is strung, or a holder for such means.


CLS 224/148.1
TXT For liquid or liquid-holding container:

    Carrier under subclass 101 including either means for supporting a
    removable liquid-holding receptacle or which is configured to hold liquid
    therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    926,    for a vehicle attached carrier for a beverage or bottle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, appropriate subclasses for a bottle or jar, per
    se.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 737+ for a container holder.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 175 for a dispenser having means adapting a
    container to be supported on the body of the user, or having an actuator
    configured to be operated by parts of the body other than the hand or foot.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 102+ for a nursing bottle holder and
    subclasses 311.2+ for a bracketed receptacle holder.

    D7,     Equipment for Preparing or Serving Food or Drink not Elsewhere
    Specified, subclasses 602+ for a beverage container and subclass 620 for a
    beverage container having means to secure it to another surface.


CLS 224/148.2
TXT Including elongated delivery or filling tube:

    Carrier under subclass 148.1 including an elongated  hollow duct through
    which liquid can pass either to the liquid-holding portion of the carrier
    or from the liquid holding portion of the carrier.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include a liquid-holding container
    having a delivery or fill tube of limited height such as a baby bottle, a
    tapered plastic beverage bottle, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclass 229 for a bottle or jar having a closure
    and straw.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 705+ for a drinking device having a straw.


CLS 224/148.3
TXT Including insulation:

    Carrier under subclass 148.1 wherein the liquid holding carrier or the
    liquid-holding receptacle held by the carrier further includes means
    configured to prevent the passage of heat either to or from the liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclass 13.1 for a multilayered bottle or jar
    having an intermediate insulating layer.

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 739 for an insulated container holder and
    subclass 903 for an insulated jacket for a beverage container.

    D7,     Equipment for Preparing or Serving Food or Drink not Elsewhere
    Specified, subclasses 605+ for an insulated beverage container.


CLS 224/148.4
TXT Removable liquid-holding container held by carrier:

    Carrier under subclass 148.1 wherein the article carrier includes a
    liquid-holding receptacle and means to releasably secure the receptacle to
    the carrier.


CLS 224/148.5
TXT Secured by flaccid member:

    Carrier under subclass 148.4 wherein the means for releasably securing the
    liquid holding receptacle to the carrier is formed of a pliant or flexible
    material.


CLS 224/148.6
TXT Strap-type flaccid member:

    Carrier under subclass 148.5 wherein the pliant or flexible material is in
    the form of a long, narrow band or loop.


CLS 224/148.7
TXT Rigid or semirigid liquid-holding container or carrier:

    Carrier under subclass 148.1 wherein the liquid-holding receptacle or the
    receptacle engaging portion of the carrier is formed of an inflexible
    material or is formed of a material which can undergo only a limited amount
    of flexing.

    (1)     Note. Included in this subclass is a container which is rigid
    enough to support its own weight but can flex slightly for the purpose of
    discharging the fluid therefrom.

    (2)     Note. This subclass also includes a carrier with a rigid container
    encompassing portion.


CLS 224/149
TXT Receiver holding butt end of rifle or shotgun stock:

    Carrier under subclass 101 including means enclosing, or partially
    enclosing, the butt end of the stock of a rifle or shotgun.


CLS 224/150
TXT Sling attached to rifle or shotgun:

    Carrier under subclass 101 comprising a flaccid support attached to a rifle
    or shotgun, the latter generally being carried in upright position on a
    bearer's back by looping said support over a shoulder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149,    for a sling having attached thereto a receiver, such as cup, which
    supports the butt end of a rifle or shotgun stock.


CLS 224/152
TXT Water carrier:

    Carrier under subclass 151 supporting a watch, e.g., a carrier having means
    usable for attaching a watch to a bearer's wrist or alternatively for
    supporting the watch on a dresser top.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    903,    for a holder for a timepiece not carried on the wrist.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    63,     Jewelry, subclasses 21+ for an attachment to a watch or chain.


CLS 224/153
TXT Backpack or component thereof:

    Carrier under subclass 151 supporting an article on a person's back.


CLS 224/154
TXT Forming tent or component thereof:

    Carrier under subclass 153, all or a portion of which is usable as a tent,
    or a component thereof.


CLS 224/155
TXT Forming seat or component thereof:

    Carrier under subclass 153, all or a portion of which is usable as a seat,
    or component thereof.


CLS 224/156
TXT Forming bead or litter or component thereof:

    Carrier under subclass 153, all or a portion of which is usable as a bed or
    litter or component thereof.


CLS 224/157
TXT Article or person supported by plural bearers:

    Carrier under subclass 101 in which an article or person is supported by
    plural living bearers.


CLS 224/158
TXT Carrier for person:

    Carrier under subclass 101 supporting a person.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157,    for a person carrier supported by more than one bearer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 625+ for field stretchers carried by a person or
    persons.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 712+ for a harness or tether for
    controlling or handling an animal, especially subclass 770 for a tether for
    a human being, subclasses 856+ for a body- or appendage-encircling collar
    or band, especially subclass 857 for one for a human being, and subclass
    907 for a harness of general utility.


CLS 224/159
TXT In upright or sitting position:

    Carrier under subclass 158 in which the carried person is supported in
    either an upright or a sitting position.


CLS 224/160
TXT Two attaching means (e.g., straps, etc.) crossing different shoulders:


    Carrier under subclass 159 including two straps or other supports
    respectively crossing the bearer's shoulders to attach the carried person,
    or another portion of the carrier assembly which supports said person, to
    said bearer.


CLS 224/161
TXT And seat mounted on or formed as part of framework or right shield:


    Carrier under subclass 160 including (1) a rigid plate or framework held
    against the bearer by said shoulder-crossing support means, and (2) a seat
    attached to, or formed as an integral part of, said plate or framework.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclass 4 for a portable seat attached to the
    user.


CLS 224/162
TXT Including or carrying a reel:

    Carrier under subclass 101 detachably supporting a reel or including a reel
    as a permanent part of the structure thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 404.1 and 345+ for a
    hand or body supported reeling device, and subclasses 588.1 and 588.2 for a
    hand or body held coil holder.


CLS 224/163
TXT Mounted on or formed as part of belt buckle:

    Carrier under subclass 101 supported on or formed as an integral part of a
    belt buckle.


CLS 224/164
TXT Watch attaching means extending circumferential of wrist:

    Carrier under subclass 101 including means extending partially or
    completely about a bearer's wrist for attaching a watch thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    for a wrist-type strap for a watch, which strap is usable for
    supporting the watch in some other way.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 265 for a device attaching
    the end of a strap to a watch, the strap not being claimed or being claimed
    nominally.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclasses 304 and 625+ and 633 for bands associated with
    devices in the class.


CLS 224/165
TXT And supporting different article:

    Carrier under subclass 164 wherein another article is also carried by said
    attaching means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 107+ for calendars
    attached to wrist watch straps.


CLS 224/166
TXT Means retaining watch if primary attaching means fails:

    Carrier under subclass 164 including safety means for retaining the watch
    on the wrist if a portion of the primary-attaching means breaks or
    otherwise fails in its holding function.


CLS 224/167
TXT Means connecting watchcase to end of attaching means for motion about axis
    transverse to wrist:

    Carrier under subclass 164 including a swivel or other means attaching the
    case of said watch to an end of said attaching means for motion relative
    thereto about an axis disposed cross-wise of the wrist.


CLS 224/168
TXT Separate fastener securing watch pin or bail bar to middle portion of
    attaching means:

    Carriers under subclass 164 wherein said watch is secured to the middle
    portion of said attaching means by separate fastening means engaging (1)
    said middle portion of said attaching means, and (2) a pin extending
    between mounting lugs on the case of said watch, or a bar forming a portion
    of a bail on said case.


CLS 224/169
TXT Fingers gripping watchcase at spaced points on periphery thereof:


    Carrier under subclass 164 wherein said watch is held on said attaching
    means by fingers spaced around the periphery of the case of the watch in
    gripping engagement therewith.


CLS 224/170
TXT Receiver disposed around watchcase:

    Carrier under subclass 164 including means enclosing, or partially
    enclosing, the case of said watch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 286+ for
    means covering a watch or portion thereof to protect the same.


CLS 224/171
TXT Separate spacer or positioner between wrist and watch or attaching means:

    Carrier under subclass 164 including separate means disposed between the
    bearer's wrist and said watch or said attaching means to (1) position the
    watch on the wrist, or (2) keep the watch or the attaching means out of
    contact with the wrist.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 281+ for
    means disposed between a watch and a person's wrist to protect the watch,
    e.g., a sweat shield.


CLS 224/172
TXT Cord-type attaching means:
    Carrier under subclass 164 wherein said attaching means is a cord.


CLS 224/173
TXT Separate decorative means secured to attaching means:

    Carrier under subclass 164 including means mounted on said attaching means
    to ornament it or said watch, e.g., a decorative plate attached to the end
    of a wrist-encircling strap to cover the connection between the strap and a
    pin secured to lugs on the case of the watch.


CLS 224/174
TXT Curved arm hinged to watchcase and biased by separate means toward wrist
    clasping position:

    Carrier under subclass 164 wherein said attaching means comprises (1) two
    rigid members pivotally connected to the case of said watch on opposite
    sides thereof and curved to conform with the wrist, and (2) means for
    resiliently biasing said members toward each other so that they grip the
    wrist.


CLS 224/175
TXT Expandible strap:

    Carrier under subclass 164 wherein said attaching means is expandable to
    fit wrists of different size, e.g., a band formed of elastic material.


CLS 224/176
TXT Attaching means tightener other than buckle with pivoting tongue:


    Carrier under subclass 164 wherein said attaching means includes means for
    adjusting it to fit wrists of different size, such means not including a
    buckle having a pivoting tongue which is engageable in different holes
    spaced along a strap.


CLS 224/177
TXT Separate fastener securing watch pin or bail bar to end of attaching means:

    Carrier under subclass 164 wherein said watch is secured to said attaching
    means by separate fastening means engaging (1) an end of said attaching
    means, and (2) a pin extending between mounting lugs on the case of said
    watch, or a bar forming a portion of a bail on said case.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 265 for a device attaching
    the end of a strap to a watch, the strap not being claimed or being claimed
    nominally.


CLS 224/178
TXT Multiple ply strap:

    Carrier under subclass 164 wherein said attaching means comprises layers of
    material joined together to form a unitary strap.


CLS 224/179
TXT Rigid or semirigid band or arm:

    Carrier under subclass 164 wherein said attaching means comprises a band or
    arm formed of metal, plastic, or other material capable of holding its
    shape.


CLS 224/180
TXT Watch attaching means secured to watchcase pin:

    Carrier under subclass 101 wherein a watch is secured to a bearer by means
    engaging a pin extending between mounting lugs on the case of said watch.


CLS 224/181
TXT Head supported:

    Carrier under subclass 101 supported by the bearer's head, e.g., a hat
    having means attached thereto for carrying an article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 57.1 for fly or
    hook holders attached to head cover such as a hat.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 106 for a hat- supported holder for a
    flashlight or other light.


CLS 224/182
TXT Article or carrier attached or garment by means entering hole therein:


    Carrier under subclass 101 comprising a pin or other means which passes
    through a holder in a garment worn by the bearer to attach the carried
    article, or another portion of the carrier assembly holding the article to
    said garment.


CLS 224/183
TXT Including magnet:
    Carrier under subclass 101 including a magnet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 57.1 for
    magnetic holders for files or hooks.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclass 242 for a magnetic article
    holder.


CLS 224/184
TXT Including towing means attached to person:

    Carrier under subclass 101 including means enabling a bearer to pull an
    object along a surface, e.g., shoulder harness having a line attached
    thereto for dragging a game animal along the ground.


CLS 224/185
TXT Article supported on upper end of elongate stanchion rotatably or swingably
    mounted on attaching means:

    Carrier under subclass 101 wherein an article is carried on the upper end
    of a bar, tube, or like elongate member projecting upwardly from, and
    pivotally or rotatably supported on, means held on the bearer.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is an article supporting stanchion which is
    either (1) freely swingable or rotatable relative to a support means, or
    (2) lockable in different positions after swinging or rotating relative to
    a support.


CLS 224/186
TXT Canopy support:

    Carrier under subclass 101 supporting a protective shield above a bearer,
    e.g., a coat-attached device gripping the handle of an umbrella so that the
    umbrella is held over the head of the person wearing the coat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclasses 87+ for canopies
    supported by the body of a person or animal.


CLS 224/187
TXT Plural stanchions holding canopy:

    Carrier under subclass 186 including a plurality of upright members
    supporting said shield.


CLS 224/188
TXT Attaching means looped around neck or crossing shoulder:

    Carrier under subclass 186 wherein the means attaching said shield to a
    bearer includes a flaccid strap, rigid hook, or other support looped around
    the bearer's neck or crossing at least one of his shoulders.


CLS 224/189
TXT Rigid attaching means:

    Carrier under subclass 188 wherein said strap, hook, or other support is
    formed of a rigid material such as metal.


CLS 224/190
TXT Two flaccid attaching means crossing different shoulders:

    Carrier under subclass 188 including two flaccid supports such as straps
    formed of soft leather, respectively extended over a bearer's shoulders.


CLS 224/191
TXT Article held by receiver:

    Carrier under subclass 101 including means enclosing, or partially
    enclosing, the carried article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255,    for a carrier having a component that passes through an aperture in
    an article, e.g., a key ring attached to belt clip.


CLS 224/192
TXT Handgun receiver usable or either side of torso:

    Carrier under subclass 191 wherein a handgun is carried by a holder
    provided with specialized means permitting it to be worn on either side of
    the bearer's torso.


CLS 224/193
TXT Handgun receiver having vertically extending side edges spaced apart or
    separable for withdrawal of handgun therebetween:

    Carrier under subclass 191 wherein a handgun is carried by a holder having
    side walls, two vertically extending edges of which are spaced apart or
    separable so that said handgun can be withdrawn from said holder by moving
    it in a general horizontal direction.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a U-shaped clip, the opposed legs of which
    are disposed horizontally and grip opposite sides of a handgun, as well as
    holsters formed of opposed walls joined together along one vertically
    extending edge and separate from each other at the opposite vertically
    extending edge.


CLS 224/194
TXT Receiver attached to clothing by opposed means gripping gathered material:


    Carrier under subclass 191 wherein said article enclosing means is attached
    to a garment worn by the bearer by means of opposed clamping members which
    grip a fold gathered in the material forming said garment.


CLS 224/195
TXT Receiver supported for movement around torso by rigid means fixed on belt:

    Carrier under subclass 191 including a belt extending around the bearer's
    toros and rigid means mounted on said belt, such as a track or closely
    spaced guide lugs, on which said article-enclosing means is supported for
    movement circumferentially of said belt.


CLS 224/196
TXT Means for ejecting article or moving it to accessible position:

    Carrier under subclass 191 including (1) means for moving an article out of
    said enclosing means, or (2) means for moving an article from an
    inaccessible position within said enclosing means to a position where the
    article can be grasped by the bearer, e.g., a gravity feed arrangement in a
    cartridge dispenser, or an opening in a container wall through which a
    person's finger can be inserted to push an article toward an outlet in the
    container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 182+ for smoking devices having ejectors, and
    subclass 250.1 for cigar and cigarette end cutters combined with a
    dispensing-type receptacle.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for devices for
    dispensing articles to a point of delivery or use, particularly subclass
    185 for ambulant or body-supported article dispenser of general utility.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 35+ for removal
    facilitating, magazine-type structures for holding articles.


CLS 224/197
TXT Receiver rotatably or swingably mounted on attaching means:

    Carrier under subclass 191 wherein said article-enclosing means is
    pivotally or rotatably mounted on a supported positioned on the bearer.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a receiver-type carrier which is either (1)
    freely swingable or rotatable relative to a support means, or (2) lockable
    in different positions after swinging or rotating relative to a support
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 54.1+ for
    receivers which are swingably attached to a person's body, which carry
    fish, bait, lures, and other articles in the class.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 103+ for a flashlight holder adjustably
    attached to a person so that light can be directed toward a selected point.


CLS 224/198
TXT Handgun receiver:

    Carrier under subclass 197 holding a handgun.


CLS 224/199
TXT Closable receiver:

    Carrier under subclass 197 wherein said article-enclosing means is closable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 54.1+ for
    closable receivers which are swingably attached to a person's body, and
    which carry fish, biat, lures, and other articles in the class.


CLS 224/200
TXT Receiver holding end of rod-like article:

    Carrier under subclass 197 wherein one end of an elongate article is held
    by said article-enclosing means, e.g., a flagpole or fishing rod one end of
    which is held in a socket attached to a waist-encircling belt.


CLS 224/201
TXT Rigid support or attaching means looped around neck or crossing shoulder:


    Carrier under subclass 191 wherein said article-enclosing means is attached
    to a bearer by at least one rigid member looped around the bearer's neck or
    crossing at least one of his shoulders.


CLS 224/217
TXT Attaching means engaged with finger:

    Carrier under subclass 191 including means attaching said article enclosing
    means to at least one of the bearer's fingers, e.g., a container having
    attached thereto a strap which engages one or more fingers, or a container
    mounted on a ring worn on a finger.

    (1)     Note.  Being engaged with a wearer's finger, a glove having a
    receiver attached thereto is included here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 232, 291, 298, and 323 for cutting implements
    combined with finger-attaching means.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 95.2 for a
    finger-attachable blotting device.

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 258 for finger rings having cigar or cigarette
    supports thereon.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 7 and 8 for
    finger- engaged attaching means for carriers holding implement in the class.


CLS 224/218
TXT Attaching means engaged with hand:

    Carrier under subclass 191 including means attaching said article-enclosing
    means to the metacarpal portion of the bearer's hand, e.g., a container
    having attached thereto a strap which crosses the palm of a hand.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 232, 291, 298, and 323 for cutting implements
    combined with means for attaching the same to a hand.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 95.2 for a
    hand-attachable blotting device.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 7 and 8 for
    hand- engaged attaching means for a coating implement.


CLS 224/219
TXT Attaching means extending circumferentially of wrist:

    Carrier under subclass 191 wherein said article-enclosing means is attached
    to a bearer by means which extends circumferentially of one of his wrists.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a receiver type carrier held by a strap or
    other attaching means which extends either partially or completely about
    the circumference of one of the bearer's wrists, e.g., arcuate arms
    respectively projecting from oppositie sides of a small container and
    gripping one of the bearer's wrists, although not extending completely
    therearound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclasses 304 and 665, for bands associated with devices in
    the class.

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 328.1+ for fruit-gathering receivers
    attached to a user's wrist.


CLS 224/220
TXT Freely suspended receiver:

    Carrier under subclass 219 wherein said article-enclosing means hangs at
    one end of a soft leather strap, cord, chain, or other means attached to
    one of the bearer's wrists.


CLS 224/221
TXT Attaching means tightener:

    Carrier under subclass 219 wherein said attaching means includes means for
    adjusting it to fit wrists of different size.


CLS 224/222
TXT Attaching means extending circumferentially of limb:

    Carrier under subclass 191 wherein said article-enclosing means is attached
    to a bearer by means which extends circumferentially of one of his limbs.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a receiver held by a strap or other
    attaching means which extends either partially or completely about the
    circumference of one of the bearer's limbs, e.g., arcuate arms respectively
    projecting from opposite sides of a casing and gripping one of the bearer's
    limbs, although not extending completely therearound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 311+ for limb-encircling garment supporters,
    such as hose-supporting garters.

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 328.1+ for fruit-gathering receivers
    attached to a user's limb.


CLS 224/223
TXT Plural receiver pockets formed by strip attached to backing at spaced
    points:

    Carrier under subclass 191 including a strip attached at spaced points
    along the length thereof to another means, such as a panel or second strip,
    to therby provide a plurality of article-holding pockets as the areas where
    said strip and said other means are separated from each other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    89,     Ordnance, subclass 35.01 for pocket-type belts for feeding
    cartridges to a gun.


CLS 224/230
TXT Receiver held in clothing pocket:

    Carrier under subclass 191 wherein said article-enclosing means is held in
    a pocket of a garment worn by the bearer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 249 and 250 for garment pockets having article
    attaching and retaining features, respectively, and subclasses 248+ for
    garment pockets having reinforcing means.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 5 and 37 for receptacles
    held in a garment pocket.


CLS 224/231
TXT Receiver shaping means:

    Carrier under subclass 191 including means maintaining said
    article-enclosing means in a predetermined shape, e.g., a rigid frame
    positioned inside a knapsack to keep it from collapsing, or means embedded
    in walls of a receptacle to resiliently bias them toward one another
    adjacent to an access opening.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 255+ for garment-stiffening means.

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclasses 122+ for frames for
    shaping traveling bags.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 259 and 280 for
    receptacle- reinforcing means.


CLS 224/232
TXT Receiver holding knife, bayonet, sword, or ice pick:

    Carrier under subclass 191 holding a knife, a bayonet, a sword, or an ice
    pick.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 151+ for sheathed cutlery where no carrying
    means is provided.


CLS 224/233
TXT Components separate to facilitate cleaning:

    Carrier under subclass 232 having components which can be moved away from
    each other so that interior surfaces thereof can be easily cleaned.


CLS 224/234
TXT Receiver holding axe, hatchet, or splitting wedge:

    Carrier under subclass 191 holding an axe, a hatchet, or a wood splitting
    wedge.


CLS 224/235
TXT Receiver closing means:

    Carrier under subclass 191 including means for closing an access opening in
    said article-enclosing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199,    for rotatable or swingable receivers having closing means.

    660+,   for fabric cover flaps for belt-mounted receivers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, subclasses 118+ for
    closures for receptacles in the class.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses .82+, 45.2+, 45.28+,
    265+, 467, and other appropriate subclasses for closures for receptacles in
    the class.

    220,    Receptacles, for closures for containers in the class.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 42+ for closures for receptacles of that
    class type.


CLS 224/236
TXT Flap flexed between open and closed positions:

    Carrier under subclass 235 wherein said closing means is a panel, a portion
    of which is flexed to serve as an integral hinge for said closing means.


CLS 224/237
TXT Plural flaps on same receiver:

    Carrier under subclass 236 including a plurality of closing panels attached
    to the article-enclosing means.


CLS 224/238
TXT Handgun receiver:

    Carrier under subclass 236 holding a handgun.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    192,    for a handgun receiver usable on either side of a person's torso.

    198,    for a handgun receiver swingably attached to a support on the
    bearer.


CLS 224/239
TXT Cartridge receiver:

    Carrier under subclass 236 holding a gun cartridge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 3, for a container holding
    ammunition for storing or shipping.


CLS 224/240
TXT Receiver removably attached to torso-encircling belt:

    Carrier under subclass 236 wherein said article-enclosing means is
    detachably connected to a belt extending around the bearer's torso.


CLS 224/241
TXT Hinged to receiver:

    Carrier under subclass 235 wherein said closing means swings about a hinge
    joint formed of separate elements, e.g., two plates pivoted to a hinge pin.


CLS 224/242
TXT Retainer or positioner for article held by receiver:

    Carrier under subclass 191 including (1) means preventing accidental
    removal of the carried article from said enclosing means, or (2) means
    holding the carried article in a desired position in said enclosing means,
    e.g., a holster having on its inner surface a groove in which the front
    sight of a handgun is received to orient the handgun relative to the
    holster.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 250 for a garment pocket having an
    article-retaining feature.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, appropriate subclasses for
    receptacles and packages having article retaining or positioning means,
    particularly subclasses 256+, 292+, 408, 472+, 477+, 488+, and 722+.


CLS 224/243
TXT Handgun receiver:

    Carrier under subclass 242 holding a handgun.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    192,    for a holster usable on either side of a person's torso.

    198,    for a holster swingably attached to a support on the bearer.

    230,    for a holster shaped so that it can be carried in a garment pocket
    (usually a hip pocket of trousers) and, in some cases, provided with means
    for retaining the holster in said pocket as the carried handgun is drawn.

    238,    for a holster having a flap-type closing means.


CLS 224/244
TXT Retainer extending into trigger guard opening:

    Carrier under subclass 243 wherein the handgun is retained in said
    enclosing means by a member positioned in the opening defined by the
    trigger guard of said handgun.


CLS 224/245
TXT Located in receiver:

    Carrier under subclass 242 wherein the article restraining or positioning
    means is located in a box, a bag, or other means comprising said
    article-enclosing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 253 for multiple- compartment garment pockets.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 54.1 for bait,
    lure, and fish catch holders having means for positioning or retaining
    items carried therein.

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclasses 109+ for traveling bags
    having compartment-forming partitions therein.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, appropriate subclasses for
    receptacles having partitions therein for segregating articles, including
    subclasses 174+, 196, and 538.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses 18+ for cells formed in wooden boxes.


CLS 224/246
TXT Flaccid retainer for receiver formed of rigid or semirigid material:


    Carrier under subclass 242 wherein the carried article is held in said
    enclosing means by a soft leather strap, cord, or other flaccid means, said
    enclosing means not being formed of flaccid material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250,    for a receiver formed of plural flaccid straps, each of which
    extends around the carried article.


CLS 224/247
TXT Opposed article gripping means:

    Carrier under subclass 191 wherein the carried article is gripped between
    opposed members, such as the opposed portions of a C-shaped clamp formed of
    resilient material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 103+ for body supported clamps holding a
    flashlight or other light.


CLS 224/248
TXT Formed of wire or rod:

    Carrier under subclass 247 wherein said opposed members are formed of wire
    or like means.


CLS 224/249
TXT Article held in perforation in receiver wall:

    Carrier under subclass 191 wherein the carried article is received in an
    aperture extending through a panel, a lug, or other body having opposed
    wall surfaces.


CLS 224/250
TXT Flaccid strap-type holding means extending across or about article:


    Carrier under subclass 191 wherein the carried article is (1) encircled by
    a soft leather strap, cord, or like flaccid means, or (2) held against
    another carrier component by such flaccid means extending across the side
    of said article facing away from said other component.


CLS 224/251
TXT Article held in ring or tube:

    Carrier under subclass 191 wherein said article-enclosing means is a ring
    or tube.


CLS 224/254
TXT Article suspended by resiliently stretchable hanger:

    Carrier under subclass 101 including an elastic strap, coil-type spring, or
    like resilient means hanging from a support on the bearer and supporting
    the carried article at the lower end thereof.


CLS 224/255
TXT Carrier component positioned in aperture in article or in retaining loop
    mounted thereon:

    Carrier under subclass 101 having a component thereof positioned in a hole
    in the carried article or in the opening of a retaining loop mounted on
    said article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclasses 456+ for key holders which are body supported and
    include a member that passes through an aperture in a key.


CLS 224/256
TXT Tongue secured to separate support means on bearer:

    Carrier under subclass 255 wherein said component is an elongate member
    mounted on separate attaching means supported by the bearer, e.g., a bar,
    strap, or other elongate member connected to a belt worn by the bearer, the
    free end of said bar, strap, or member being passed through a loop attached
    to the carried article.


CLS 224/257
TXT Flaccid attaching means looped around neck or crossing shoulder:

    Carrier under subclass 101 wherein the means attaching the carried article
    to the bearer includes a flaccid support, such as a soft leather strap or a
    cord, looped around the bearer's neck or crossing at least one of his
    shoulders.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    600+,   for straps, cords, chains, or other flexible means having a claimed
    receiver attached thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 3+ for a
    torso-attached harness used by firemen, window washers, and other workmen
    for safety purposes.

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclass 157
    for neck- engaging straps, cords, or the like attached to spectacles to
    support the same when they are not in use.

    396,    Photography, subclass 423 for cameras supported by a strap engaging
    an operator's neck or shoulders.


CLS 224/258
TXT Means for adjusting loop size or hanger length of attaching means looped
    around neck:

    Carrier under subclass 257 including means for adjusting the length of said
    flaccid support looped around the bearer's neck, either to change the size
    of the loop portion of said support or the length of a portion of said
    support hanging from said loop portion.


CLS 224/259
TXT Two attaching means crossing different shoulders:

    Carrier under subclass 257 including two flaccid members respectively
    crossing the bearer's shoulders.


CLS 224/260
TXT Article-suspending hanger on each side of torso: Carrier under subclass 259
    including straps or other means respectively hanging on opposite sides of
    the bearer's torso and supporting the same article, or different articles,
    at the lower ends thereof.


CLS 224/261
TXT And framework or rigid shield:

    Carrier under subclass 259 including a rigid plate or framework.


CLS 224/262
TXT And attaching means extending circumferentially of torso:

    Carrier under subclass 261 including means extending circumferentially of
    the bearer's torso.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a carrier having a pair of straps or other
    attaching means respectively crossing the bearer's shoulders, and a strap
    or other attaching means which extends either partially or completely about
    the circumference of the bearer's torso to secure the carrier assembly to
    the bearer.  Hence, a strap which extends between two shoulder straps at
    the bearer's back for the purpose of keeping the shoulder straps from
    spreading apart is not considered to serve the purpose of attaching the
    carrier assembly to the bearer's torso. However, two strap respectively
    connected to opposite lower corners of a knapsack supported on the bearer's
    back, and joined in front of the bearer's torso by a buckle, are considered
    to serve as means for attaching the knapsack to the bearer's torso.


CLS 224/263
TXT Load-distributing web extending between vertical frame members:

    Carrier under subclass 261 including a strap or a panel extending between
    upright members of said framework and positioned against the bearer's torso
    to distribute the force exerted thereon.


CLS 224/264
TXT Strap cushion or positioner located at shoulder:

    Carrier under subclass 257 including means located on the bearer's shoulder
    for either cushioning or positioning said flaccid member, e.g., a pad
    secured to a shoulder strap, or a pin secured to the shoulder portion of a
    coat worn by the bearer and engaged with a shoulder strap to hold the
    latter in position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 460 for protective pads for garment shoulder
    straps, and for means attached to a garment at the shoulder for holding a
    strap thereon.


CLS 224/265
TXT Rigid support or attaching means looped around neck or crossing shoulder:


    Carrier under subclass 101 wherein the means attaching an article to the
    bearer includes at least one rigid member looped around the bearer's neck
    or crossing at least one of his shoulders.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 289+ for means which carries shaving equipment,
    such as a mirror, and which includes rigid shoulder-engaging supports.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    880 for mirrors supported by rigid carriers suspended from a person's
    shoulders or neck.


CLS 224/266
TXT Yoke-type carrier:

    Carrier under subclass 265 including a bar or other elongate means crossing
    one or both of the bearer's shoulders and supporting an article at each end
    thereof.


CLS 224/267
TXT Attaching means extending circumferentially of wrist or limb:

    Carrier under subclass 101 wherein an article is attached to a bearer by
    means extending circumferentially of one of his wrists or limbs, e.g., a
    cord tied around a wrist and having a hook attached to one end thereof for
    suspending an article.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a carrier held by a strap or other
    attaching means which extends either partially or completely about the
    circumference of one of the bearer's wrists or limbs, e.g., arcuate arms
    (a) respectively projecting from opposite sides of a base plate to which an
    article is secured by a screw, and (b) gripping one of the bearer's wrists
    although not extending completely therearound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 311+ for limb-encircling garment supporters,
    such as hose-supporting garters.


CLS 224/268
TXT Article held by hook:

    Carrier under subclass 101 wherein the carried article is supported on a
    hook attached to the bearer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255,    for an article impaled on a hook attached to a bearer.


CLS 224/269
TXT Clip or hook attaching article carrier to support means bearer:

    Carrier under subclass 101 attached to the bearer by means hooked over a
    belt or other support on said bearer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    666+,   for an article held in a receiver attached a support on the bearer
    by means of a hook or clip.


CLS 224/270
TXT Article supported or horizontally extending member:

    Carrier under subclass 101 wherein the carried article rests on a
    horizontal shelf, bar, or other rigid member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 49.3 for an infant's bib having a fastener for
    attachment to a tray or table.

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclass 43 for a
    body-attached support in the class.


CLS 224/271
TXT Rigid means fixedly mounted on article and detachably connectable to
    support means on bearer:

    Carrier under subclass 101 wherein a rigid member fixedly mounted on the
    carried article is detachably secured to a support on the bearer, e.g., a
    pistol having a lug projecting from one side thereof and means attached to
    the bearer, such as a socket, for engagement with said lug.


CLS 224/272
TXT Rigid means connecting carrier components:

    Carrier under subclass 101 including rigid means interconnecting components
    thereof, e.g., a snap fastener, two separable portions of which are fixedly
    attached to different components of a carrier so that the components can be
    detachably joined together.


CLS 224/274
TXT Carrier attached to golf cart:

    Carrier under subclass 401 attachable to a golf cart.


CLS 224/275
TXT Seat associated:
    Carrier under subclass 400 associated with the seat of a vehicle.


CLS 224/276
TXT Carrier attached to steering wheel or support column:

    Carrier under subclass 400 attachable to a vehicle steering wheel or its
    support column.


CLS 224/277
TXT Holder for sheet, card, or document:

    Carrier under subclass 400 for holding, a sheet, card, or document, e.g., a
    map or license holder.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a receiver holding a box of cleaning
    tissues.


CLS 224/278
TXT Holder for diverse smoking items or materials (e.g., matchbox attached to
    ash tray, etc.):

    Carrier under subclass 400 for simultaneously holding different things
    related to tobacco smoking.


CLS 224/279
TXT Intercommunicable carriers:

    Carrier under subclass 400 in which one carrier communicates with another
    carrier so that an item or material can be transferred therebetween.


CLS 224/280
TXT Dumpable receiver:

    Carrier under subclass 400 supported on a vehicle surface, e.g., a
    dashboard, so that it can be dumped.


CLS 224/281
TXT Slidable receiver:

    Carrier under subclass 400 slidably mounted on a vehicle support, e.g., a
    tray slidably mounted in a recess in a dashboard.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280,    for a receiver that is dumped by sliding it out of a support
    structure.


CLS 224/282
TXT Pivotable or rotatable receiver:

    Carrier under subclass 400 swingably or rotatably mounted on a vehicle
    support, e.g., a tray swingably mounted in a recess in a dashboard.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280,    for a receiver that is dumped by pivoting or rotating it relative
    to a support structure.


CLS 224/309
TXT Carrier associated with vehicle roof or trunk lid: Apparatus under subclass
    400 comprising load carrier means which may be supported by or attached to
    the roof or trunk lid of a vehicle, or which may be attached to or
    supported by a portion of the vehicle adjacent to the roof or trunk lid
    thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Carriers suspended from the underside of the roof or trunk
    lid of a vehicle are classified here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 809+ for skaters and skiers appliances
    and attachments.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 156+, for vehicles
    having bodies usable for camping, and subclasses 37.1+ for vehicles having
    auxiliary article compartments.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, appropriate subclasses for details of
    compartments, drawer constructions, knockdown structures, and stacked
    housings.

    403,    Joints and Connections, various subclasses for means for connecting
    elongated members together.


CLS 224/310
TXT Carrier having structure to facilitate loading (e.g., rollers, tracks,
    angled sides, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 309 having means as a part thereof whereby a load
    may be more readily placed on or removed from said carrier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 529+, and 537+ for vehicle
    carriers which are arranged to facilitate their loading or unloading.


CLS 224/311
TXT Vehicle roof or trunk lid associated carrier mounted within vehicle
    compartment:

    Apparatus under subclass 309 wherein the carrier may be mounted inside the
    compartment which is either under the vehicle roof or trunk lid.


CLS 224/312
TXT On sun visor:

    Apparatus under subclass 311 wherein said carrier is attached to a sun
    visor means within the vehicle compartment under the roof therefor.


CLS 224/313
TXT For clothes hangers:

    Apparatus under subclass 311 wherein the carrier is constructed to support
    clothes hangers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    545+    and 927, respectively, for vehicle- attached brackets and suspended
    carriers for clothes hangers.


CLS 224/314
TXT Removable carrier collapsible for storage:

    Apparatus under subclass 309 having foldable, telescopic or other means
    whereby a dimension of the carrier may be reduced without removing parts
    therefrom, whereby said carrier may be changed from a usable configuration
    to a nonusable configuration in which it may be stored.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, appropriate subclasses for foldable or knockdown
    supports or racks.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses 12+ and 43+ for knockdown-type
    receptacles made of wood.


CLS 224/315
TXT Carrier with locking means:

    Apparatus under subclass 309 in combination with a locking means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, appropriate subclasses for locks.


CLS 224/316
TXT Carrier having wind deflecting means:

    Apparatus under subclass 309 having means to direct the apparent flow of
    air passing through or around the carrier as it is moved by the vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 180.1+ and 91 for air
    flow control devices.


CLS 224/317
TXT Carrier and mounting therefor extend across half or less of vehicle:


    Apparatus under subclass 309 specifically constructed so that the greatest
    extent of the carrier, including all adjuncts and vehicle- attaching means,
    is no greater than half the transverse dimension of the vehicle to which it
    is to be attached.


CLS 224/318
TXT Flexible carrier:

    Apparatus under subclass 309 made of flexible material.


CLS 224/319
TXT Carrier attached to carrier:

    Apparatus under subclass 309 having means to cooperate with and support
    another carrier which in turn may be specifically constructed to engage and
    support a particularly shaped load.


CLS 224/320
TXT Expandable carrier:

    Apparatus under subclass 309 having means whereby the effective area
    available to support a load may be increased or decreased while maintaining
    its ability to support a load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclasses 88+ for tents and
    canopies, per se.


CLS 224/321
TXT Carrier having means to adjust position or attitude:

    Apparatus under subclass 309 having means whereby the position or attitude
    of a portion of the carrier may be changed relative to the vehicle to which
    it is attached.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses for adjustable supports.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 529+, and 537+ for vehicle
    carriers which are arranged to facilitate their loading or unloading.


CLS 224/322
TXT Single bar-type article supporting means removable attached exteriorly and
    transversely of vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 309 comprising no more than one elongated means
    for supporting a load, said elongated means extending transversely of said
    vehicle and being removably attached to the exterior side of the roof or
    trunk lid thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 60.1+ for carriers for slender
    articles.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 226.11+ for clamp associated with support.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 809+ for ski carriers mounted on vehicles
    of the class.


CLS 224/323
TXT Having opposed gripping elements to clamp supported article:

    Apparatus under subclass 322 having opposed means which may cooperate to
    grip the load which the carrier is to support to prevent relative movement
    between the carrier and the load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 226.11+ for clamps associated with supports.


CLS 224/324
TXT Carrier having article retaining means:

    Apparatus under subclass 309 having means to engage the load and prevent
    the load from moving relative to the carrier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 60.1+ for carriers for slender
    articles.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 226.11+ for clamps associated with supports.


CLS 224/325
TXT Carrier comprises plurality of spaced members:

    Apparatus under subclass 309 having a load engaging and supporting means
    comprising a plurality of elongated members spaced one from the other and
    having  means interconnecting or associating said members so that they
    cooperate to support the load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 716.1+ for channels
    or trim strips and means to attach the same to static structures.

    293,    Vehicle Fenders, subclasses 1 and 102 for channel-like bumpers.


CLS 224/326
TXT Members fixedly attached to vehicle surface:

    Apparatus under subclass 325 wherein said members are interconnected by
    being attached directly to the vehicle roof or trunk lid.


CLS 224/327
TXT Article supporting portion of carrier contoured to conform to contour of
    vehicle surface:

    Apparatus under subclass 309 in which at least a portion of the carrier is
    shaped or formed to conform to at least a part of the vehicle roof or trunk
    lid over which the carrier is placed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, appropriate subclasses for a
    vehicle having an auxiliary compartment conforming to the contours of its
    body structure.


CLS 224/328
TXT Having enclosure or cover means:

    Apparatus under subclass 309 having means to cooperate therewith to act as
    a cover for said carrier singly or with a load thereon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 95.1+ for auxiliary
    protectors, subclass 98 for roll-up covers, and subclass 136 for dust
    covers.


CLS 224/329
TXT Carrier to vehicle attaching means releasably engages the vehicle proximate
    the edge of the roof or trunk lid thereof:

    Apparatus under subclass 309 having means by which the carrier is attached
    to the vehicle, said means being operable to releasably secure the carrier
    to the vehicle and being engageable with a portion of said vehicle which is
    in the area of the edge of the roof or trunk lid over which said carrier
    extends.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 200+ for brackets, especially subclasses
    205.3+, 205.5+, 206.5, 309.3, and 309.4 for brackets utilizing adhesive,
    vacuum or magnetic means and subclasses 226.11+ and 316.1+ for clamps
    associated with brackets.


CLS 224/330
TXT Carrier adjustably connected to rigid support intermediate carrier and
    attaching means:

    Apparatus under subclass 329 having means to adjust or manipulate the
    interconnection between the carrier and a means intermediate the carrier
    and the attaching means.


CLS 224/331
TXT Attaching means is an individually acting clamp:

    Apparatus under subclass 329 wherein the carrier to vehicle-attaching means
    comprises opposed relatively movable jaw members.


CLS 224/400
TXT VEHICLE ATTACHED:

    Carrier under the class definition including means to secure it to a
    vehicle.

    (1)     Note. The means to secure the carrier to the vehicle may be the
    friction which exists between the carrier and the vehicle.

    (2)     Note. A vehicle is any device used to support and transport a
    passenger, load or package.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surface, subclasses 44+ for a rigid
    planar horizontal support surface attachable to a vehicle where the carried
    article is not intended to be transported.

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 231+ for an ash tray, per se.

    280,    Land Vehicles, for a vehicle that has some form of running gear as
    an essential element, which running gear usually supports a load carrier,
    but may support a load directly, and adapts the vehicle to move over a
    surface. The class also includes an attachment or accessory to a wheeled
    vehicle if the organization of the vehicle is changed to received the
    device. Search especially subclasses 33.992+ for the aforementioned
    attachment or accessory combined with a shopping cart, subclasses 288.4+
    for the aforementioned attachment or accessory combined with an occupant
    propelled type vehicle, subclasses 727+ for the aforementioned attachment
    or accessory combined with a land vehicle, and subclasses 809+ for the
    aforementioned attachment or accessory combined with a ski or skate
    appliance, and especially subclasses 814+ for a ski having attachment means
    (a) for securing a plurality of skis together in a manner whereby they may
    not be used for skiing, or (b) for the purpose of securing a ski or skis to
    a relatively stationary object for storage.

    296,    Land Vehicles: Bodies and Tops, subclasses 37.1+ for a compartment
    or receiver formed in the body or top of a vehicle for storage or receipt
    of articles or debris, the compartment or receiver being built into the
    vehicle structure rather than added on.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 462+ for a vehicle
    attached carrier which is translatably mounted relative to the vehicle to
    facilitate or permit placement of a load thereon or removal therefrom.


CLS 224/401
TXT Carrier attached to special purpose vehicle:

    Carrier under subclass 400 wherein the vehicle is especially adapted to
    preform a function other than or in addition to that of transporting a
    small group of passengers across a paved road.

    (1)     Note. This subclass is intended to include a carrier especially
    adapted to attach to a vehicle other than a typical passenger car.

     SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

     905,   for a carrier attached to a pack animal.


CLS 224/402
TXT Carrier attached to pickup truck:

    Carrier under subclass 401 wherein the special purpose vehicle is a light
    truck having a cargo carrying body portion surrounded by low side walls.

    (1)     Note. This subclass includes an article carrier on a pickup truck
    having a cargo cover.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 727+ for an attachment or accessory to a
    wheeled vehicle wherein the organization of the vehicle is changed to
    receive the device.

    296,    Land Vehicles: Bodies and Tops, subclass 37.6 for a compartment or
    receiver formed in the body or top of a truck for storage or receipt of
    articles or debris, the compartment or receiver being built into the
    vehicle structure rather than added on.


CLS 224/403
TXT Carrier attached to truck bed portion of vehicle:

    Carrier under subclass 402 which is secured to a portion of the bottom or a
    side wall of a cargo carrying portion of the vehicle.


CLS 224/404
TXT Receptacle:

    Carrier under subclass 403 comprising a container.


CLS 224/405
TXT Rack for an elongated article:

    Carrier under subclass 403 including a support frame for holding an article
    having a length much greater than its width.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    296,    Land Vehicles: Bodies and Tops, subclass 3 for a car body in the
    form of a rack usually designed to carry a special load where the vehicle
    structure was modified to receive the device (i.e., "built in" rather than
    as an "add on").


CLS 224/406
TXT Carrier attached to aquatic vessel:

    Carrier under subclass 401 wherein the special purpose vehicle is adapted
    for use in or on the water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    934,    for a cross-reference art collection of carriers specifically
    constructed for use underwater.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, and Sign Exhibiting, subclass 904 for a map or a
    chart holder.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 21.2 for a
    holder, support or steadying device for a fishing rod, subclasses 54.1+ for
    a holder for fishing equipment such as bait, a hook, etc.

    114,    Ships, subclass 190 for a device for holding or supporting a life
    preserver on a vessel, subclasses 343+ for a boat having an attachment,
    especially subclass 364 where the attachment is to the deck or gunwale of
    the boat, where the boat structure is more than nominally recited.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 315.11 for a receiver for
    fishing equipment.

    211,    Supports: Racks, subclasses 60.1+ for a support for an elongated
    article, especially subclass 70.8 for a support for a fishing rod.


CLS 224/407
TXT Carrier attached to invalid device:

    Carrier under subclass 401 wherein the special purpose vehicle is a device
    to assist an infirm or sickly person to move about.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclasses 66+ for a cane, stick,
    crutch, or a walking aid combined with an article carrier, where the aid is
    more than nominally claimed.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 311.2+ for a bracket-type support having a
    receptacle-type article holding means.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 250.1 for a wheelchair, subclass 304.1 for
    the combination of a wheelchair and article carrier where the organization
    of a wheelchair is changed to receive the carrier.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 5+ for a walker, and subclasses 188+
    for a chair or seat combined with a holder or receptacle.

    D12,    Transportation, subclass 133 for an element or attachment to an
    invalid chair.


CLS 224/408
TXT Carrier attached to snowmobile:

    Carrier under subclass 401 wherein the special purpose vehicle has a
    skilike member, an endless track type propulsion element and is adapted for
    traveling on or through snow.

      SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 182+ for a motor vehicle having a
    skilike member and especially subclasses 190+ for a motor vehicle having a
    skilike member and an endless track type propulsion element (e.g., a
    snowmobile).


CLS 224/409
TXT Carrier attached to stroller or baby carriage:

    Carrier under subclass 401 wherein the special purpose vehicle is a light
    multiple-wheeled device for transporting a small child.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 647+ for a folding wheeled chair,
    stroller, or baby carriage, and subclasses 657+ for an extensible baby
    carriage.

    296,    Land Vehicles: Bodies and Tops, subclass 37.4 for a compartment or
    receiver formed in the body or top of a child's vehicle for storage or
    receipt of articles or debris, the compartment or receiver being built into
    the vehicle structure rather than added on.


CLS 224/410
TXT Carrier attached to tractor:

    Carrier under subclass 401 wherein the special purpose vehicle includes an
    engine and is intended to be used on a farm for pulling farm machinery and
    equipment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, appropriate subclasses for a tractor.


CLS 224/411
TXT Carrier attached to grocery or shopping cart:

    Carrier under subclass 401 wherein the special purpose vehicle is
    configured for use in a store for storing an article prior to purchase.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 33.991+ for a shopping cart, and
    subclasses 33.992+ for a shopping cart combined with an attachment or
    accessory where the cart is more than just nominally recited.


CLS 224/412
TXT Carrier attached to cycle:

    Carrier under subclass 400 including means for attachment to a bicycle or
    motorcycle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400+,   for an article carrier for a unicycle or a tricycle.


CLS 224/413
TXT Motorcycle:

    Carrier under subclass 412 specially configured for attachment to a vehicle
    with two wheels in tandem and propelled by an engine.

    (1)     Note. This subclass includes electric powered two wheeled vehicles.


CLS 224/414
TXT Liquid-holding receptacle carried by or formed as structural part of the
    carrier:

    Carrier under subclass 412 (a) supporting a separate liquid-holding
    receptacle or (b) including a liquid-holding receptacle as a nondetachable
    part thereof.


CLS 224/415
TXT Carrier for a person:

    Carrier under subclass 412 specially configured for carrying a person other
    than the operator.

    (1)     Note.  Devices which are part of the cycle such as a side car are
    found in the appropriate areas of Classes 180, 280 and 297.


CLS 224/416
TXT Convertible:

    Carrier under subclass 412 wherein a portion of the device is relatively
    moveable or interchangeable to convert the carrier to a different type of
    device or a different type of carrier.


CLS 224/417
TXT Convertible to device used off cycle:

    Carrier under subclass 416 wherein the transformation of the carrier
    presents a device which is utilized away from the cycle.


CLS 224/418
TXT Combined:

    Carrier under subclass 412 including a divergent art device.


CLS 224/419
TXT Means for mounting carrier to a particular portion of the cycle:

    Carrier under subclass 412 including means specially configured to be
    attached to a specific part of the bicycle or motorcycle.


CLS 224/420
TXT Handlebar or stem:

    Carrier under subclass 419 wherein the specific part is a steering bar of
    the cycle or its support member.


CLS 224/421
TXT Attached at a second point on another portion of the cycle

    Carrier under subclass 420 including means for attaching the carrier to a
    different part of the cycle.


CLS 224/422
TXT Wheel axle:

    Carrier under subclass 419 wherein the specific part is a supporting shaft
    or member upon which the wheel revolves.


CLS 224/423
TXT Fender:

    Carrier under subclass 419 wherein the specific part is a guard or
    protective covering over a cycle wheel.


CLS 224/424
TXT Fork:

    Carrier under subclass 419 wherein the specific part is a two-prong support
    frame providing connection between a wheel axle and the rest of the frame.

    (1)     Note. The fork can be the front or rear fork of the cycle.


CLS 224/425
TXT Frame tube:

    Carrier under subclass 419 wherein the specific part is a skeletal
    supporting framework of the cycle.


CLS 224/426
TXT Carrier attached to more than one tube:

    Carrier under subclass 425 secured to a multiple number of tubes.


CLS 224/427
TXT Seat or seat post:

    Carrier under subclass 419 wherein the specific part is the portion of the
    cycle which is sat upon or directly supports the portion sat upon.


CLS 224/428
TXT Receiver:

    Carrier under subclass 412 including means for enclosing, or partially
    enclosing, the carried article.


CLS 224/429
TXT Straddle type:

    Carrier under subclass 428 including a plurality of spaced receivers
    positioned on different or opposite sides of a cycle and interconnected by
    a yoke.


CLS 224/430
TXT Detachable to support structure:

    Carrier under subclass 429 wherein at least one of the receivers can be
    separated or disconnected from the yoke.


CLS 224/431
TXT Receiver and support structure separable:

    Carrier under subclass 428 formed of at least two detachable components,
    one remaining attached to the cycle when the other is removed.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 430, for a straddle-type receiver
    which is detachable from the yoke.


CLS 224/432
TXT Collapsible:

    Carrier under subclass 428 which can be folded, telescoped, or otherwise
    reduced in size.


CLS 224/433
TXT Rigid container:

    Carrier under subclass 428 in the form of a receptacle made of an
    inflexible material.


CLS 224/434
TXT Walls of container formed by wire:

    Carrier under subclass 433 wherein at least one of a side or bottom of the
    receptacle is further formed by interwoven metal strands or rods.


CLS 224/435
TXT With closure:

    Carrier under subclass 433 wherein the rigid receptacle includes a cover or
    lid which with the receptacle provides to totally enclose the carried
    article.


CLS 224/436
TXT Flaccid member:

    Carrier under subclass 428 wherein the means for enclosing or partially
    enclosing is formed of a pliant or flexible material.


CLS 224/437
TXT Flaccid container:

    Carrier under subclass 436 wherein the means for enclosing or partially
    enclosing is in the form of a receptacle.


CLS 224/438
TXT With framework:

    Carrier under subclass 437 including structure for supporting or shaping
    the container.


CLS 224/439
TXT With closure:

    Carrier under subclass 438 including a lid or cover.


CLS 224/440
TXT With means for retaining article:

    Carrier under subclass 428 including means to engage an article and prevent
    the article from moving relative to the carrier.


CLS 224/441
TXT Bracket:

    Carrier under subclass 412 in the form of a simple rigid support structure.


CLS 224/442
TXT Two or more separate carriers used together:

    Carrier under subclass 441 wherein two or more distinct brackets are
    positioned on the cycle to carry the same article.

    (1)     Note.  The two or more brackets can be identical or different in
    shape.


CLS 224/443
TXT Movable:

    Carrier under subclass 441 which is displaceable relative to the cycle.


CLS 224/444
TXT Collapsible:

    Carrier under subclass 443 which can be folded, telescoped, or otherwise
    reduced in size.


CLS 224/445
TXT Adjustable to different size cycles:

    Carrier under subclass 443 wherein a portion of the device is relatively
    movable to fit a different size cycle.


CLS 224/446
TXT Adjustable to different size articles:

    Carrier under subclass 443 relatively moveable to fit a different size of
    carried article.


CLS 224/447
TXT With particular connection to cycle:

    Carrier under subclass 441 wherein the portion of the carrier attached to
    the cycle is of peculiar construction.


CLS 224/448
TXT Clamp:

    Carrier under subclass 447 wherein the particular connection includes
    opposed parts that may be brought closer together to hold the carrier to
    the cycle.


CLS 224/449
TXT Hook:

    Carrier under subclass 447 wherein the connection includes a curved or
    sharply bent device to suspend the carrier from the cycle.


CLS 224/450
TXT Fastener receiving eye or slot:

    Carrier under subclass 447 wherein the connection includes a hole, long,
    narrow, groove opening, or notch in the carrier which receives a securing
    device.


CLS 224/451
TXT With particular means for supporting article:

    Carrier under subclass 441 including means for holding the article in
    position.


CLS 224/452
TXT Platform type:

    Carrier under subclass 451 in the form of a horizontal flat surface.


CLS 224/453
TXT Cantilevered:

    Carrier under subclass 452 wherein the horizontal flat surface is supported
    only at one end.


CLS 224/454
TXT Having means for retaining article:

    Carrier under subclass 452 including means to engage an article and prevent
    the article from moving relative to the carrier.


CLS 224/455
TXT Tie down:

    Carrier under subclass 454 wherein the portion to engage the load is of a
    pliant or flexible material.


CLS 224/456
TXT Clamp:

    Carrier under subclass 454 wherein the portion to engage the load includes
    opposed parts that may be brought closer together to hold the article in
    place.


CLS 224/457
TXT Framework:

    Carrier under subclass 451 wherein the means for supporting the article
    includes a skeletal or open structure to give support.


CLS 224/458
TXT Article held by hook:

    Carrier under subclass 451 wherein the means for supporting the article
    includes a curved or sharply bent device for suspending the article.


CLS 224/459
TXT Means for retaining article to bracket:

    Carrier under subclass 451 including means to engage a load and prevent the
    load from moving relative to the carrier.


CLS 224/460
TXT Tie down:

    Carrier under subclass 459 wherein the portion to engage the load is of a
    pliant or flexible material.


CLS 224/461
TXT Clamp:

    Carrier under subclass 459 wherein the portion to engage the load includes
    opposed parts that may be brought closer together to hold the article in
    place.


CLS 224/462
TXT Spring biased:

    Carrier under subclass 461 wherein the clamp is an elastic device that
    retains its original shape or position after being compressed or extended.


CLS 224/463
TXT Flaccid member attaching carrier to cycle:

    Carrier under subclass 412 wherein the means for attachment is in the form
    of a pliant or flexible material.


CLS 224/482
TXT Carrier attached to window or window frame:

    Carrier under subclass 400 wherein the means to secure the carrier to the
    vehicle engages a portion of the vehicle which permits the passage of
    visible light into the vehicle, or is the frame for the portion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surface, subclass 46 for a rigid
    planar horizontal support surface which extends over the window sill of the
    vehicle door and into the space which accommodates the window and where the
    article is not intended to be transported.


CLS 224/483
TXT Carrier attached to dashboard:

    Carrier under subclass 400 wherein the means to secure the carrier to the
    vehicle engages a portion of the panel under the windshield of a vehicle.

    (1)     Note. Included in this subclass is a carrier attached to the glove
    compartment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surface, subclass 45 for a rigid
    planar horizontal support surface in the form of a dashboard attachable to
    a vehicle where the article is not intended to be transported.

    296,    Land Vehicles: Bodies and Tops, subclass 37.12 for a compartment or
    receiver formed in the body or top of a truck for storage or receipt of
    articles or debris, the compartment or receiver being built into the
    vehicle structure (i.e., formed from a modification of the vehicle
    structure) rather than added on.


CLS 224/484
TXT Convertible to different device or a different type of article carrier:

    An article carrier under subclass 400 wherein a portion of the device is
    relatively movable or interchangeable to convert the carrier to a different
    type of device or a different type of carrier


CLS 224/485
TXT Convertible to hold different type of article:

    Carrier under subclass 42.01 including a portion which is relatively
    movable to convert the device from a carrier for one type of article to a
    carrier for another type of article.


CLS 224/486
TXT Convertible to different device:

    Convertible article carrier under subclass 484 transformed into a device
    with a use other than that of transporting articles.


CLS 224/487
TXT Different device is furniture:

    Convertible article carrier under subclass 486 wherein the use of the
    device is as an article of convenience or decoration used to furnish a
    house or similar articles used outdoors.

    (1)     Note. The term furniture refers to articles such as chairs, tables,
    beds, desks, cabinets, and stoves.


CLS 224/488
TXT Carrier attached to the front or rear end of vehicle:

    Carrier under subclass 400 wherein the securing means engages a
    longitudinal end portion of the vehicle.


CLS 224/489
TXT Integrated into bumper:

    Carrier under subclass 488 which forms a large portion of the
    shock-absorbing portion of the vehicle.

       (1)  Note. This subclass and those indented hereunder are exceptions to
    the general rule that inventions involving modifications of vehicle
    structure are classified in the vehicle arts, since the combination of
    bumper and carrier is considered superior.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    293,    Vehicle Fenders, subclasses 102+ for a vehicle bumper.


CLS 224/490
TXT Impact receiving carrier or article:

    Carrier under subclass 489 wherein the carrier, or article held by the
    carrier, supplements the shock-absorbing quality of the bumper member.


CLS 224/491
TXT Displaceable bumper:

    Carrier under subclass 489 wherein the bumper or a section thereof is
    movable relative to the rest of the vehicle.


CLS 224/492
TXT Attached at second point on another region of the vehicle:

    Carrier under subclass 488 wherein the securing means attaches the carrier
    to a second region of the vehicle, the second region being spaced from the
    location of the first region.

    (1)     Note. A region is defined as an area bound by the borders of any
    continuous piece of material on the vehicle. For example, the hood, fender,
    bumper, window, and door are all continuous independent sheets of material
    and therefore form independent regions for the purposes of this definition.


CLS 224/493
TXT Carrier attached to vehicle by an elongated, flexible member (e.g., rope,
    strap, cord, etc.):

    Carrier under subclass 492 wherein the means to secure the carrier to the
    vehicle includes a long, pliant member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    534,    for a flaccid article retainer used in an article carrier which is
    attached to the end of a vehicle.

    568,    for a bracket-type article carrier having flaccid article holding
    means.

    572,    for package or article carrier having flaccid holding means.


CLS 224/494
TXT Attached at front and rear of vehicle:

    Carrier under subclass 492 wherein the second point of attachment is the
    other longitudinal end of the vehicle.


CLS 224/495
TXT Movable carrier or carrier portion:

    Carrier under subclass 488 which includes structure which permits the
    carrier or a portion of it to be displaced relative to the rest of the
    carrier or the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310,    for a carrier associated with the vehicle roof or trunk lid having
    structure to facilitate loading.

    491,    for a movable bumper-type article carrier.

    548+    for a movable bracket-type article carrier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 462+ for a vehicle
    attached carrier which is translatably mounted relative to the vehicle to
    facilitate or permit placement of a load thereon or removal therefrom.


CLS 224/496
TXT Movable to within vehicle or under vehicle:

    Carrier under subclass 495 which is movable between a first and second
    position, wherein the first position extends outside of the vehicle and the
    second position is either within the body of the vehicle or underneath the
    body of the vehicle.


CLS 224/497
TXT Collapsible to nonuse position:

    Carrier under subclass 495 which can be folded, telescoped, or otherwise
    reduced in size when not in use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    549,    for a bracket-type article carrier which is collapsible.


CLS 224/498
TXT Having plural walls to retain article:

    Carrier under subclass 497 further including at least two side walls
    intended to secure an article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    526+,   for an end attached platform-type carrier having a retaining wall.

    565+,   for a bracket-type carrier having an upright wall.


CLS 224/499
TXT Folding platform type:

    Carrier under subclass 497 including a generally horizontally extending
    segmented member and including at least one hinge which connects the
    segments of the member.


CLS 224/500
TXT Adjustable to size of vehicle:

    Carrier under subclass 495 which includes relatively movable portions to
    fit a different size of vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    550+,   for a bracket-type article carrier which is adjustable to the size
    of the vehicle.


CLS 224/501
TXT Adjustable to size of article:

    Carrier under subclass 495 which includes relatively movable portions to
    fit a different size of carried article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    552,    for a bracket-type article carrier which is adjustable to the size
    of the article.


CLS 224/502
TXT Pivotable:

    Carrier under subclass 495 wherein the carrier or a portion is displaceable
    in a pivoting manner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    553,    for a bracket-type article carrier which is rotatable about an axis.


CLS 224/503
TXT Multiple nonparallel axes:

    Carrier under subclass 502 having portions which are rotatable about two or
    more nonparallel axes.


CLS 224/504
TXT Axis parallel to bumper axis:

    Carrier under subclass 502 which is rotatable about an axis which is
    parallel to the normal location of a vehicle bumper.

    (1)     Note. It is not necessary for the bumper to actually be present.


CLS 224/505
TXT Position retaining means:

    Carrier under subclass 504 which includes means for holding the article
    carrier in a predetermined angular position.


CLS 224/506
TXT Pin and aperture:

    Carrier under subclass 505 wherein the means for holding the article
    carrier in the predetermined angular position includes an elongated rod and
    a receiver for the rod.


CLS 224/507
TXT Abutting stop:

    Carrier under subclass 505 wherein the means for holding the article
    carrier in a predetermined angular position includes a stationary extending
    member (e.g. detent, etc.).


CLS 224/508
TXT Supporting link:

    Carrier under subclass 505 wherein the means for holding the article
    carrier in a predetermined angular position includes a connecting arm.


CLS 224/509
TXT Axis perpendicular to bumper axis:

    Carrier under subclass 502 which is rotatable about an axis which extends
    at right angles to the normal location of a vehicle bumper.

    (1)     Note. It is not necessary for the bumper to actually be present.


CLS 224/510
TXT Rectilinear movement:

    Carrier under subclass 495 which is displaceable along a straight line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    554,    for a bracket-type article carrier which is displaceable along a
    straight line.


CLS 224/511
TXT Cooperating coupling member on article carrier and vehicle:

    Carrier under subclass 488 wherein the means to secure the carrier to the
    vehicle includes an interconnecting coupling member.


CLS 224/512
TXT Attached to bumper or bumper support:

    Carrier under subclass 511 wherein said interconnecting coupling member is
    attached to the impact absorbing portion of the vehicle or its support
    structure.


CLS 224/513
TXT Attached to bumper and a secondary point at end of vehicle:

    Carrier under subclass 512 wherein the device has an additional coupling at
    the end of the vehicle.

    (1)     Note. This subclass includes devices attached to the same bumper at
    two different locations.


CLS 224/514
TXT Securing means encircles at least a portion of the bumper:

    Carrier under subclass 512 wherein said interconnecting coupling member
    extends around a portion of the bumper.


CLS 224/515
TXT Clamp:

    Carrier under subclass 514 wherein the interconnecting coupling member
    includes at least two opposed parts and means to urge the two opposed parts
    closer together.


CLS 224/516
TXT Attached to bumper support:

    Carrier under subclass 512 wherein the interconnecting coupling member is
    attached to the support structure of the bumper.


CLS 224/517
TXT Fastened through vehicle body:

    Carrier under subclass 511 wherein the interconnecting coupling member is
    attached directly to the vehicle body by a fastening member which extends
    through a portion of the body.

    (1)     Note. The vehicle bumper is not considered part of the vehicle body.


CLS 224/518
TXT Attached to undercarriage:

    Carrier under subclass 511 wherein the interconnecting coupling member is
    attached to the supporting framework of the vehicle.


CLS 224/519
TXT Trailer hitch:

    Carrier under subclass 518 wherein the supporting framework of the vehicle
    further includes an outwardly extending tube, hitch plate, or tongue.


CLS 224/520
TXT Ball hitch:

    Carrier under subclass 519 wherein the hitch plate or tongue includes a
    spherical member.


CLS 224/521
TXT Telescoping:

    Carrier under subclass 519 wherein the hitch plate or tongue includes
    overlapping sections which slide inwardly or outwardly.


CLS 224/522
TXT Article-confining support means:

    Carrier under subclass 488 including means especially configured to hold an
    article and restrict its movement to a predetermined region.

    (1)     Note. This subclass contains an article carrier which confines an
    article within a predetermined region relative to the vehicle, but which
    does not prevent movement of the article within that region.


CLS 224/523
TXT Laterally extending member:

    Carrier under subclass 522 wherein the means to hold the article in a
    predetermined region includes a generally horizontally extending support.


CLS 224/524
TXT Platform type:

    Carrier under subclass 523 wherein the generally horizontally extending
    support includes a generally horizontally extending planar surface.

    (1)     Note. The surface need not be perfectly planar to be classified
    here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    554+,   for a bracket-type article carrier having a horizontally extending
    shelflike member.


CLS 224/525
TXT Upright member:

    Carrier under subclass 524 wherein the horizontally extending planar
    surface further includes an upwardly extending member to aid in confining
    an article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    565,    for a bracket-type article carrier having a horizontally extending
    shelflike member having an upright member.


CLS 224/526
TXT Upright retaining wall:

    Carrier under subclass 525 wherein the upright member has a flat area
    intended to confine an article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    498,    for a movable carrier having plural article retaining walls and
    where the carrier is attached to the end of the vehicle.

    566,    for a bracket-type article carrier having a horizontally extending
    shelflike member having an upright retaining wall.


CLS 224/527
TXT Cover or closure:

    Carrier under subclass 526 including a portion which extends over or across
    the article confining area.

    (1)     Note. The closure may be on the side of the article confining area.


CLS 224/528
TXT Diagonal support brace:

    Carrier under subclass 524 wherein the platform-type article support
    includes a bar positioned in a slanted or oblique direction to maintain the
    carrier in position.

    (1)     Note. Since subclasses are "inclusive", additional support braces
    in other directions may be present.


CLS 224/529
TXT Horizontal support brace:

    Carrier under subclass 524 wherein the platform-type article support
    includes a bar positioned in a horizontal direction to maintain the carrier
    in position.

    (1)     Note. Since subclasses are "inclusive," additional support braces
    in other directions may be present.


CLS 224/530
TXT Vertical support brace:

    Carrier under subclass 524 wherein the platform-type article support
    includes a bar positioned in a direction perpendicular to a horizontal
    plane to maintain the carrier in position.


CLS 224/531
TXT Upright member:

    Carrier under subclass 522 including an element which extends upwardly from
    the means which secures the carrier to a vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    525,    for a platform-type article carrier having an upright member.


CLS 224/532
TXT Laterally extending arms:

    Carrier under subclass 531 wherein the upright member has at least one
    generally horizontally projecting member at its upper end.


CLS 224/533
TXT Article retaining means:

    Carrier under subclass 488 wherein the carrier includes means to engage the
    load and prevent the load from moving relative to the carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    567,    for a bracket-type article carrier having means to engage and
    prevent the load from moving relative to the carrier


CLS 224/534
TXT Tie-down:

    Carrier under subclass 533 wherein the means to engage and prevent the load
    from moving is an elongated flexible member (e.g., rope, strap, cord, etc.)

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    568,    for a bracket-type article carrier having a flaccid member to
    engage and prevent the load from moving.


CLS 224/535
TXT Antitheft means:

    Carrier under subclass 533 wherein the article retaining means includes
    means to prevent unauthorized removal of the article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    569,    for a bracket-type article carrier having means to engage and
    prevent the load from moving relative to the carrier and further including
    means to prevent the unauthorized removal of the article.

     SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, for a lock, per se.


CLS 224/536
TXT Clamp:

    Carrier under subclass 533 wherein the article retaining means includes at
    least two opposed parts and means to urge the two opposed parts closer
    together.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    570,    for a bracket-type article carrier having means to engage and
    prevent the load from moving relative to the carrier, and wherein the means
    to prevent the load includes a clamp.


CLS 224/537
TXT Article held in channel:

    Carrier under subclass 533 wherein the article is positioned in a recess or
    groove in the carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    571,    for a bracket-type article carrier having a channel and in which
    the carrier is not attached to the end of a vehicle.


CLS 224/538
TXT Underslung:

    Carrier under subclass 400 positioned on the underside of the vehicle and
    depending below the point of support.


CLS 224/539
TXT Complementary to vehicle:

    Carrier under subclass 400 which is complementary to a specific portion of
    a vehicle and so related to such portion: (a) as to be partially or
    entirely housed thereby, (b) as to complete therewith an article or package
    carrier, or (c) that a significant portion of the carrier overlaps or
    conforms to a specific portion of the vehicle.

     SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.32, for a carrier attached to a vehicle platform.

    327,    for a carrier conforming to the curvature of a vehicle roof or
    trunk lid.

    496,    for a shelf type carrier movable into a nonuse position in a recess
    in the vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    296,    Land Vehicles: Bodies and Tops, subclass 37.2 for modified vehicle
    construction adapted to receive or house a carrier.


CLS 224/540
TXT Curved wall:

    Carrier under subclass 539 having a portion which overlaps or conforms to a
    curved portion of the vehicle.


CLS 224/541
TXT Stepped:

    Carrier under subclass 539 which has a notch formed therein which has a
    vertical and horizontal surface which engages a conforming portion of the
    vehicle.


CLS 224/542
TXT Sized to fill vehicle compartment:

    Carrier under subclass 539 which is dimensioned and configured to conform
    to the interior perimeter of an opening in a vehicle.


CLS 224/543
TXT Positioned adjacent to vertical wall:

    Carrier under subclass 539 wherein the specific portion of the vehicle is a
    vertical wall.


CLS 224/544
TXT Socket in vehicle:

    Carrier under subclass 539 which includes a portion which is insertable
    into an opening or cavity in a vehicle.


CLS 224/545
TXT Bracket connected to vehicle:

    Carrier under subclass 400 wherein the means for securing the article
    carrier to the vehicle is a relatively compact rigid device.


CLS 224/546
TXT Two or more separate carriers used together:

    Carrier under subclass 545 having at least two article carrying components
    positioned on the vehicle at spaced apart locations.


CLS 224/547
TXT Bracket and article holding means are separable:

    Carrier under subclass 545 wherein the carrier is formed of at least two
    separable components, one remaining attached to the vehicle when the other
    is removed.


CLS 224/548
TXT Movable carrier or carrier portion:

    Carrier under subclass 545 which includes structure which permits the
    carrier or a portion of it to be displaced relative to the rest of the
    carrier or the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    491,    for a displaceable bumper-type article carrier.

    495+    for a movable carrier attached to the end of the vehicle.


CLS 224/549
TXT Collapsible to nonuse position:

    Carrier under subclass 548 which can be folded, telescoped, or otherwise
    reduced in size when not in use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    497,    for a carrier collapsible to a nonuse position attached to the end
    of the vehicle.


CLS 224/550
TXT Adjustable to size of vehicle:

    Carrier under subclass 548 which includes relatively movable portions to
    fit a different size of vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500,    for a carrier adjustable to the size of the vehicle attached to the
    end of the vehicle.


CLS 224/551
TXT Telescoping:

    Carrier under subclass 550 including relatively movable overlapping
    sections which slidably interfit within one another.


CLS 224/552
TXT Adjustable to size of article:

    Carrier under subclass 548 which includes relatively movable portions to
    fit a different size of carried article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    501,    for an adjustable carrier attached to the front or rear of a
    vehicle.


CLS 224/553
TXT Pivotable:

    Carrier under subclass 548 which is rotatable about an axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    502,    for a pivotal carrier attached to at least one end of the vehicle.


CLS 224/554
TXT Rectilinear movement:

    Carrier under subclass 548 which is displaceable along a straight line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    510,    for a carrier which is displaceable along a straight line and is
    attached to an end portion of the vehicle.


CLS 224/555
TXT Specified bracket attaching means:

    Carrier under subclass 545 wherein significance is attributed to the means
    which connects the bracket to the vehicle.

    (1)     Note. This subclass is intended to include bracket-type carriers
    having securing means, where the securing means is more than just nominally
    recited.


CLS 224/556
TXT Positioned in vehicle crevice:

    Carrier under subclass 555 wherein the portion of the bracket connected to
    the vehicle is placed in a narrow crack of the vehicle.


CLS 224/557
TXT Fastened through vehicle body:

    Carrier under subclass 555 which is secured directly to the vehicle body by
    a fastening member which extends through a portion of the vehicle body.


CLS 224/558
TXT Clamp:

    Carrier under subclass 555 wherein the means for securing the carrier to
    the vehicle includes at least two opposing parts and means to urge the two
    opposing parts closer together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    515,    for a carrier attached to a bumper by a clamp.

    536,    for a carrier having an article retainer in the form of a clamp.


CLS 224/559
TXT Suction cup:

    Carrier under subclass 555 wherein the means for securing the carrier to
    the vehicle includes an element held in position by suction created by a
    flexible, semihemispherically shaped member.


CLS 224/560
TXT Hook:

    Carrier under subclass 555 wherein the means for securing the carrier to
    the vehicle includes a hook.


CLS 224/561
TXT And brace:

    Carrier under subclass 560 wherein the means to secure the carrier to the
    vehicle includes a structural element extending from the article carrier to
    the vehicle which provides additional support.


CLS 224/562
TXT Magnet:

    Carrier under subclass 555 wherein the means for securing the carrier to
    the vehicle includes an element which utilizes a magnetic force to attached
    the bracket to the vehicle.


CLS 224/563
TXT Flaccid receiver:

    Carrier under subclass 545 wherein the article carrier includes a flexible
    section into which an article is intended to be placed.


CLS 224/564
TXT Horizontally extending shelflike member:

    Carrier under subclass 545 further including a generally horizontally
    extending article support surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    524,    for a platform-type article carrier mounted to the front or rear
    end of the vehicle.


CLS 224/565
TXT Upright member:

    Carrier under subclass 564 including an element extending upwardly from the
    horizontal shelf to provide additional support for the carried article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    525,    for a platform-type article carrier mounted to the front or rear
    end of a vehicle and having an upright member.


CLS 224/566
TXT Upright member forms container:

    Carrier under subclass 565 wherein the upright member include connecting
    walls which constitute an article receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    526+,   for a platform-type article carrier having an upright retaining
    wall mounted to the end of a vehicle.


CLS 224/567
TXT Article retaining means:

    Carrier under subclass 545 further including means to engage the load and
    prevent the load from moving relative to the carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    533,    for an article carrier attached to the end portion of a vehicle and
    having means to support and retain an article being carried.


CLS 224/568
TXT Tie-down:

    Carrier under subclass 567 wherein the article retaining means includes an
    elongated flexible member (e.g., cord, strap, rope, etc.)

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    543,    for an article carrier attached to the end portion of a vehicle and
    having means to support and retain the article being carried and wherein
    the means to retain the article is a flaccid member.


CLS 224/569
TXT Antitheft means:

    Carrier under subclass 567 wherein the article retaining means includes
    means to prevent unauthorized removal of the article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    534,    for an article carrier attached to the end portion of a vehicle and
    having means to prevent the unauthorized removal of the article from its
    support.

     SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, for a lock, per se.


CLS 224/570
TXT Clamp:

    Carrier under subclass 567 wherein the article retaining means includes at
    least two opposed parts and means to urge the two opposed parts closer
    together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    536,    for an article carrier attached to the end of the vehicle and
    having means to support and retain the article being carried and wherein
    the retaining means is a clamp.


CLS 224/571
TXT Article held in channel:

    Carrier under subclass 567 wherein the article is positioned in a recess or
    groove in the carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    537,    for an article carrier having a channel, and which is attached to
    the end of a vehicle.


CLS 224/572
TXT Article carrier secured to vehicle by flaccid securing means:

    Carrier under subclass 400 wherein the carrier securing means includes a
    thin flexible member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    493,    for an article carrier attached to an end portion of the vehicle
    and another portion of the vehicle and having a flaccid member which
    secures the carrier to the vehicle

    534,    for a movable article carrier having means to support and retain
    the article and wherein the means to retain the article is a flaccid member.

    563,    for an article carrier held by a flaccid member.

    568,    for a bracket-type article carrier having means to secure and
    retain the carrier on the vehicle and wherein the article is held in place
    by a flaccid member.


CLS 224/575
TXT Convertible or combined:

    Carrier under subclass 101 wherein (a) a portion of the carrier is
    relatively movable or interchangeable to convert the carrier into a
    different device or different type of carrier, or (b) the carrier is
    combined with a device which has a function other than that of carrying an
    article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    416+,   for a convertible carrier attachable to a bicycle.

    484,    for a vehicle attached article carrier which is convertible.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 94 for a coat adapted for carrying game,
    ammunition, or other articles.

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclasses 1+ for an article of
    luggage which is convertible to or from nonluggage device, subclass 107 for
    hand luggage includes folding or disassembling means for facilitating its
    manipulation into a nonuse configuration.

    294,    Handling: Hand and Hoist Line Implements, subclasses 141+ for a
    convertible hand-held article carrier.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 4 for a bag transformable into a nonbag
    device.


CLS 224/576
TXT Combined with a different art device:

    Carrier under subclass 575 combined with a device having a function other
    than other than for transporting an article.

    (1)     Note. The article being transported by the article carrier does not
    qualify as the other device.

    (2)     Note. This subclass includes, for example (a) an article carrier
    having a built in radio, (b) a shoulder-supported, cartridge-carrying strap
    having a pad attached thereto for absorbing recoil of a rifle stock rested
    thereon, etc.


CLS 224/577
TXT Convertible to a different art device:

    Carrier under subclass 575 wherein the article carrier includes a portion
    which is relatively movable or interchangeable to convert the carrier into
    a device which has a function other than that of carrying an article.


CLS 224/578
TXT Carrier having a rearrangeable strap:

    Carrier under subclass 575 including an elongated flexible band and wherein
    the band is relatively movable to convert the carrier into a different type
    of carrier.


CLS 224/579
TXT Multiple rearrangeable straps:

    Carrier under subclass 578 including at least two elongated flexible bands.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    580,    for a convertible carrier having two straps which are not
    relatively moveable.


CLS 224/580
TXT Multiple independently useable straps:

    Carrier under subclass 575 having at least two elongated flexible bands
    each positioned for immediate use and usable independently of the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    579,    for a carrier having two straps which are relatively moveable and
    are used in concert.


CLS 224/581
TXT Carrier having a rearrangeable receiver:

    Carrier under subclass 575 wherein the means for enclosing the carried
    article can be modified

    to permit an additional or different article to be carried therein or to
    permit the device to be carried in a different manner.


CLS 224/582
TXT Multiple rearrangeable receivers:

    Carrier under subclass 581 including at least two article enclosing
    portions.


CLS 224/583
TXT Receiver detachable and independently usable:

    Carrier under subclass 582 wherein the article enclosing portions may be
    separated to be used independently from each other.


CLS 224/584
TXT Including means to secure the carrier to a nonanimate support:

    Carrier under subclass 575 including additional structure to allow the
    carrier to be held by something other than the animate bearer.

    (1)     Note. The additional structure to allow the carrier to be held by
    something other than an animate bearer can be a stand for supporting the
    carrier on a piece of furniture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    for a watch carrier convertible to a watch stand.

    154,    for a backpack which is convertible to a tent.


CLS 224/585
TXT Securing means for vehicle attachment:

    Carrier under subclass 584 wherein the additional structure permits the
    carrier to be positioned on a device having a wheel or runner and which is
    designed to transport an article or person.


CLS 224/586
TXT Collapsible to nonuse position on user's body:

    Carrier under subclass 575 transformed in such a manner as to allow for
    storage of the carrier on a person when not in use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154,    for a backpack which is convertible to a tent.


CLS 224/587
TXT Holding article in concealment (e.g., money belt worn under clothing or
    having hidden pocket, etc.):

    Carrier under subclass 191 wherein the means to enclose the carried article
     is constructed or arranged on the body to hide an article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 300 for a garment supporter combined with an
    additional device or feature which are for other than garment supporting or
    adjusting purposes (e.g., decorative features such as sashes, bows, or
    beads, guards, putting-on aids, pockets, article holders, indicators, etc.)

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, subclass 101 for a theft
    deterrent purse, subclass 102 for a theft resistant purse,  subclass 133
    for a theft deterrent wallet, and subclass 134 for a theft resistant wallet.


CLS 224/600
TXT Flaccid attaching means looped around neck or crossing shoulder:

    Carrier under subclass 191 wherein the means for enclosing the carried
    article is connected to a bearer by a flexible support member positioned
    around (a) a portion of a body connecting a head to a trunk, or (b) a
    portion of the body between a neck and an upper arm.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257,    for a carrier having means attaching the carried article to the
    bearer which includes a flaccid support, such as a soft leather strap or a
    cord, looped around the bearer's neck or crossing at least one's shoulders.

    908,    for a cross reference art collection of a carrier for a camera.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclass 94 for shoulder or neck-supported sling.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 3+ for a
    torso-attached harness used by firemen, window washers, or other workmen
    for safety purposes.


    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 315.3+ and 315.11 for a
    golf bag or arrow quiver, respectively, which may include a shoulder strap.


    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 6+ for a flexible bag having a handle
    which is intended to be grasped by the hand. If the bearer's hand must
    remain occupied in order to carry the bag, it is proper for Class 383 even
    if it is also intended to be slung over the bearer's shoulder.


CLS 224/601
TXT Attaching means formed as part of or attached to receiver closure:

    Carrier under subclass 600 wherein the means for enclosing the carried
    article includes


    a cover and wherein the pliant or flexible support member is either
    attached to the cover or forms an integral portion of the cover.


CLS 224/602
TXT Receiver formed as part thereof or continuation thereof attaching means:

    Carrier under subclass 600 wherein the means for enclosing the carried
    article is an integral part of the pliant or flexible support member.

    (1)     Note. An article carrier in this subclass generally has a receiver
    with a width around the same size as the attaching means and usually has
    one wall in common.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    931,    for an ammunition carrier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 300+ for a garment supporter.


CLS 224/603
TXT Receiver attached at nonend points of flaccid attaching means:

    Carrier under subclass 600 wherein the means for enclosing the carried
    article is either


    (a) connected at a point between the ends of the flexible support member
    member or (b) connected to flexible support member which forms a continuous
    uninterrupted loop.


CLS 224/604
TXT Receiver and attaching means relatively movable:

    Carrier under subclass 603 wherein the means for enclosing the carried
    article and the flexible support member can be repositioned with respect to
    each other.


CLS 224/605
TXT Detachable:

    Carrier under subclass 603 wherein the means for enclosing the carried
    article and the flexible support member can be separated with respect to
    each other.


CLS 224/606
TXT Single attaching means crossing both shoulders and extended
    circumferentially of torso under arms:

    Carrier under subclass 600 wherein the pliant or flexible support member is
    constructed of one continuous piece of material which extending over both
    shoulders and further extending either partially or completely about the
    circumference of the bearer's torso and under the bearer's arms.


CLS 224/607
TXT Carrier having single shoulder or neck engaged attaching means with
    receiver attached to terminal end of attaching means:

    Carrier under subclass 600 wherein the pliant or flexible support member is
    constructed of a single piece of material which extends over one shoulder
    or around the neck and wherein the means for enclosing the carried article
    is attached to at least one end portion of the support member.


CLS 224/608
TXT Having at least three distinct attachment points between the attaching
    means and the receiver:

    Carrier under subclass 607 wherein the means for enclosing the carried
    article is attached to the support member in at least three locations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    901.8,  for a VelcroR-type fastener connecting the receiver to the article
    attaching means.


CLS 224/609
TXT Separate receivers attached to each end of attaching means:

    Carrier under subclass 607 including at least two distinct article
    enclosing means connected to different terminal ends of the attaching means.

    (1)     Note.  The receivers may or may not be of similar shape.


CLS 224/610
TXT Terminal ends attached to receiver wall on opposite sides of a receiver
    opening:

    Carrier under subclass 607 wherein the article enclosing means includes a
    passage to allow entry and exit of the carried article between the terminal
    ends.


CLS 224/611
TXT Terminal ends attached to frame on receiver:

    Carrier under subclass 610 wherein the means for enclosing the carried
    article includes a skeletal structure and wherein the terminal ends of the
    support member are connected to the skeletal structure.


CLS 224/612
TXT Terminal ends extending down sides of receiver:

    Carrier under subclass 610 wherein at least one of the terminal ends is
    attached to the article enclosing means along a significant length of the
    side of the article enclosing means; the contact between the ends and the
    article enclosing means is spread out over a higher to lower portion of the
    article enclosing means surface.

    (1)     Note. It must be attached to the receiver at multiple points along
    the length of the side of the receiver.


CLS 224/613
TXT One terminal end attached by receiver opening and the other terminal end
    attached at a point spaced from the opening:

    Carrier under subclass 607 wherein one terminal end is spaced a greater
    distance from a passage for entry and exit of the article than the other.


CLS 224/614
TXT Having particular connection between receiver and terminal end:

    Carrier under subclass 607 wherein significance is attributed to the means
    which connects the article enclosing means to the terminal end of the
    flexible support member.


CLS 224/615
TXT Shoulder or neck engaged attaching means held in aperture in receiver wall:

    Carrier under subclass 614 wherein the flexible support member is received
    in an opening in a surface of the article enclosing means.


CLS 224/616
TXT Connection via ring (e.g., O-ring, D-ring, etc.):

    Carrier under subclass 614 wherein the connection includes a small rigid
    continuous band.


CLS 224/617
TXT And clip:

    Carrier under subclass 616 including a device which grips or clasps the
    ring.


CLS 224/618
TXT With rotatable locking tongue (e.g., buckle):

    Carrier under subclass 616 wherein the ring includes a projection
    displaceable relative to the rest of the ring and engages the attaching
    means to complete the connection.


CLS 224/619
TXT Rivet:

    Carrier under subclass 614 wherein the connection is formed at least in
    part by a bolt or pin having a head on one end used to fasten objects
    together by inserting a shank through a hole in carrier components and
    hammering down a second end to form a second head.


CLS 224/620
TXT Loop and hook fastener:

    Carrier under subclass 614 wherein the connection is formed by separable
    pile-type fabric.  (e.g., VelcroR).


CLS 224/621
TXT Hook:

    Carrier under subclass 614 wherein the connection is formed by a curved or
    sharply bent device.


CLS 224/622
TXT Connection is sewn:

    Carrier under subclass 614 wherein the connection is formed by stitching.


CLS 224/623
TXT Receiver held against upper chest:

    Carrier under subclass 600 wherein the receiver is positioned adjacent a
    front portion of the bearer's body between a neck and an abdomen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    192,    for a handgun receiver usable on either side of torso

    243,    for a retainer or positioner for a handgun held by receiver

    911,    for a handgun holder formed of leather, fabric, or other flexible
    material.


CLS 224/624
TXT Attaching means encircles arm:

    Carrier under subclass 623 wherein the attaching means goes completely
    around an upper limb of the bearer's body.


CLS 224/625
TXT Carrier having single shoulder or neck engaging means and attaching means
    extending circumferentially of torso:

    Carrier under subclass 600 including (a) one flaccid support looped around
    the bearer's neck

    or crossing at least one shoulder, and (b) a second flaccid support
    extending partially or completely around the circumference of the bearer's
    torso.


CLS 224/626
TXT At least part of the engaging means is directly attached to attaching means:

    Carrier under subclass 625 wherein at least a portion of the engaging means
    and attaching means are fastened together in immediate contact.


CLS 224/627
TXT Two attaching means crossing different shoulders:

    Carrier under subclass 600 including two separate flaccid members crossing
    disparate shoulders.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153,    for a convertible backpack.

    259,    for an article carrier which crosses both shoulders.


CLS 224/628
TXT Including rigid or semirigid support structure:

    Carrier under subclass 627 including a component which is at least
    partially inflexible to give shape or support to the carrier.


CLS 224/629
TXT Rigid or semirigid container:

    Carrier under subclass 628 wherein the rigid or semirigid structure is in
    the form of a receptacle.


CLS 224/630
TXT Insert:

    Carrier under subclass 628 wherein the rigid or semirigid structure is
    positioned between walls of the flaccid receiver.


CLS 224/631
TXT Including means for adjusting receiver relative to the support structure:

    Carrier under subclass 628 wherein the receiver can be repositioned with
    respect to the rigid or semirigid structure.


CLS 224/632
TXT Means for adjusting includes a track:

    Carrier under subclass 631 including a rail or set of parallel rails for
    guiding the receiver to a new location.


CLS 224/633
TXT Framework:

    Carrier under subclass 628 wherein the rigid or semi-rigid structure is in
    the form of a skeletal or open structure.


CLS 224/634
TXT Parts of framework movable relative to each other:

    Carrier under subclass 633 wherein a portion of the framework can be
    displaced with respect to another portion of the framework.


CLS 224/635
TXT Load distributing web extending between vertical frame members:

    Carrier under subclass 633 wherein the framework includes at least two
    generally vertically extending members and wherein the device including a
    strip or a panel extending between the upright members of the framework and
    positioned against the bearer's torso distributes the force exerted thereon.


CLS 224/636
TXT Knapsack supported by two upstanding, elongated members having lower ends
    thereof supported by torso:

    Carrier under subclass 633 including two rigid elongate members,
    respectively, disposed in upright position on opposite sides of the
    bearer's torso, the members being attached at their upper ends to a
    knapsack and at their lower ends to support means on the bearer.


CLS 224/637
TXT And attaching means extending circumferentially of torso:

    Carrier under subclass 627 including a member which at least partially
    surrounds the bearer's trunk and provides at least part of the securement
    of the article enclosing means to the bearer.


CLS 224/638
TXT Attaching means positioned at chest:

    Carrier under subclass 637 wherein the attaching means encircles the wearer
    at a region which is located between a neck and an abdomen.


CLS 224/639
TXT Attaching means is a continuation of the shoulder straps:

    Carrier under subclass 637 wherein the attaching means extending
    circumferentially of the torso is integral with at least one of the two
    attaching means crossing different shoulders.


CLS 224/640
TXT Attaching means segmented by receiver:

    Carrier under subclass 637 wherein the attaching means is formed of at
    least two components which are separately attached to the article enclosing
    means.


CLS 224/641
TXT Having stabilizers connected between attaching means and receiver:

    Carrier under subclass 637 including a member having a first end attached
    to the attaching means and a second end attached to the article enclosing
    means for providing resistance to sudden change or dislodgement of the
    article enclosing means relative to the bearer.


CLS 224/642
TXT Cushioning:

    Carrier under subclass 627 including a resilient pad used for protecting
    the bearer against jarring, scraping, or other injury.


CLS 224/643
TXT In shoulder straps:

    Carrier under subclass 642 wherein the cushioning is located in at least
    part of the shoulder straps.


CLS 224/644
TXT Adjacent receiver wall:

    Carrier under subclass 642 wherein the cushioning is located adjoining an
    article enclosing means surface.


CLS 224/645
TXT Specified receiver details:

    Carrier under subclass 642 wherein significance is attributed to the means
    enclosing or partially enclosing the article.


CLS 224/646
TXT Receiver positioned in front of bearer:

    Carrier under subclass 645 including at least one receiver which is located
    on the forward part or the side of the bearer.

    (1)     Note. The carrier may include a receiver on the bearer's back as
    well as at least one receiver in front of the bearer's back.


CLS 224/647
TXT Attached on shoulder strap:

    Carrier under subclass 646 wherein the article enclosing means is connected
    on the shoulder straps.


CLS 224/648
TXT Attached on attaching means extending circumferentially of torso:

    Carrier under subclass 646 wherein the article enclosing means is connected
    to a member which at least partially surrounds the bearer's torso and
    provides at least part of the securement of the article enclosing means to
    the bearer.


CLS 224/649
TXT Detachable:

    Carrier under subclass 648 wherein the article enclosing means is separable
    from the attaching means extending circumferentially of torso.


CLS 224/650
TXT Means attached to receiver wall for retaining article:

    Carrier under subclass 645 including means secured to a wall of the article
    enclosing means to engage a carried article and to prevent the article from
    moving relative to the carrier.


CLS 224/651
TXT Strap:

    Carrier under subclass 650 wherein the means for retaining an article is an
    elongated flexible member.


CLS 224/652
TXT Additional pocket:

    Carrier under subclass 650 wherein the article enclosing means is a
    receptacle with a smaller receptacle attached to one of its walls for
    carrying an additional article.


CLS 224/653
TXT Compartmented:

    Carrier under subclass 645 wherein the article enclosing means is
    subdivided into smaller spaces.


CLS 224/654
TXT Receiver closing means:

    Carrier under subclass 645 including means extending over or across the
    access opening of the article enclosing means.


CLS 224/655
TXT Flaps flexed between open and closed positions:

    Carrier under subclass 654 wherein a portion of the closing means is
    repeatably bendable to serve as an integral hinge.


CLS 224/656
TXT Drawstring:

    Carrier under subclass 654 wherein the closing means includes a cord or
    ribbon running through a hem of the article enclosing means and pulled to
    tighten or close the opening.


CLS 224/657
TXT Zipper:

    Carrier under subclass 654 wherein the closing means includes parallel rows
    of teeth on adjacent edges of the opening that are interlocked by a sliding
    tab.


CLS 224/658
TXT Loop and hook fastener:

    Carrier under subclass 654 wherein the closing means includes separable
    pile-type fabric.  (e.g., VelcroR).


CLS 224/659
TXT Buckle:

    Carrier under subclass 654 wherein the closing means includes a frame with
    one or more rotatable tongues to fasten strap ends.


CLS 224/660
TXT Receiver mounted on, or formed as part of, means at least partially
    encircling the torso for attaching carrier to bearer:

    Carrier under subclass 191 wherein the receiver is (a) joined to, or (b)
    integrated into, the attaching means encircling a trunk of the bearer's
    body.


CLS 224/661
TXT With leg strap:

    Carrier under subclass 660 including an additional attaching member
    extending around the bearer's limb used for locomotion or support.


CLS 224/662
TXT Torso encircling attaching means provided with cushioning or padding:

    Carrier under subclass 660 including a resilient member used for protecting
    the bearer against jarring, scraping, or other injury.


CLS 224/663
TXT Receiver separate from attaching means:

    Carrier under subclass 660 wherein the receiver is distinct from the
    attaching means and is connected to the attaching means encircling a trunk
    of the bearer's body.


CLS 224/664
TXT Torso encircling carrier segmented by receiver:

    Carrier under subclass 663 wherein the article encircling means separates
    portions of the attaching means.


CLS 224/665
TXT Removable connection:

    Carrier under subclass 663 wherein a link between the article encircling
    means and attaching means allows separation without destroying either
    component.


CLS 224/666
TXT Clip or hook attaching receiver to support means on bearer:

    Carrier under subclass 665 wherein the connection includes a clasp or
    clamp, or a curved or sharply bent device.

    (1)     Note.  In order to be originally classified in Class 224, the clip
    or hook must be attached to a receiver for the carried article which is
    separate from the article housing structure. The combination of an article
    with a clip or hook is classified in the appropriate area for the article
    while the subcombination of the clip or hook is found in Class 24.


CLS 224/667
TXT Means mounted on or formed as part of clip or hook for further securing or
    positioning receiver to torso encircling means:

    Carrier under subclass 666 wherein the clip or hook includes additional
    structure for reducing movement between the receiver and attaching means.


CLS 224/668
TXT A portion of the clip or hook being surrounded by or inserted into receiver
    wall:

    Carrier under subclass 666 wherein the clip or hook is at least partially
    covered by the article encircling means surface.


CLS 224/669
TXT Spring biased clip:

    Carrier under subclass 666 wherein the clip includes elastic device which
    regains its original shape or position after being compressed or extended.


CLS 224/670
TXT Torsion spring:

    Carrier under subclass 669 wherein the clip includes a coiled spring member
    which is twisted as the clip is operated.


CLS 224/671
TXT Apertured member or loop attaching receiver to attaching means:

    Carrier under subclass 665 wherein (a) a portion of the carrier includes an
    opening or hole for receiving the attaching means, or (b) a portion of the
    carrier is folded over itself or overlies another portion to form an
    aperture for receiving the attaching means.


CLS 224/672
TXT Means mounted on or formed as part of apertured member or loop for further
    securing or positioning receiver to torso encircling member:

    Carrier under subclass 671 wherein the apertured member or loop includes
    additional structure for reducing movement between the article encircling
    means and attaching means.


CLS 224/673
TXT Slots in receiver wall:

    Carrier under subclass 671 wherein the aperture is in the form of a long,
    narrow opening.


CLS 224/674
TXT Loop:

    Carrier under subclass 671 wherein a portion of the carrier is folded over
    itself or overlies another portion to form an aperture for receiving the
    attaching means.


CLS 224/675
TXT At least one end of the loop being releasable:

    Carrier under subclass 674 wherein the folded- over portion is secured
    together by a separable fastener.


CLS 224/676
TXT Specified receiver details:

    Carrier under subclass 660 wherein significance is attributed to the
    structure of the article enclosing means.


CLS 224/677
TXT Receiver hanging below attaching means:

    Carrier under subclass 676 wherein most of the article enclosing means is
    positioned below the attaching means.


CLS 224/678
TXT Receiver formed of rigid material:

    Carrier under subclass 676 wherein the article enclosing means is formed of
    a material which holds its shape.


CLS 224/679
TXT Rigid material forms a container:

    Carrier under subclass 678 wherein the article enclosing means is in the
    form of a receptacle.


CLS 224/680
TXT Means holding additional article on outside of receiver:

    Carrier under subclass 676 wherein article enclosing means includes
    additional structure to allow another article to be carried on an external
    portion of a main receiver.


CLS 224/681
TXT Compartmented receiver:

    Carrier under subclass 676 wherein the article enclosing means is
    subdivided into separate sections or chambers by a partition.


CLS 224/682
TXT Multiple receivers:

    Carrier under subclass 676 including two or more distinct article enclosing
    means.


CLS 224/683
TXT Superposed:

    Carrier under subclass 682 wherein the receivers are either (a) situated
    vertically one above


    another, or (b) situated one behind another in a direction perpendicular to
    the bearer's torso.


CLS 224/684
TXT Multiple receivers positioned on panel:

    Carrier under subclass 682 wherein the article enclosing means are secured
    to a flat planar member.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 224/901
TXT CARRIER COMPONENT HAVING ADHERENT SURFACE:

    Carrier including a component having an adherent surface, e.g, a backpack
    with a waist belt, the ends of which include hook and loop material of the
    type sold under the trademark Velcro.


CLS 224/901.2
TXT Loop and hook fastener:

    An article carrier under subclass 901 wherein the adherent material is in
    the form of a readily dissociable fastener having numerous, protruding,
    unitary filaments, randomly interlocking with and simultaneously moving
    towards, mating structure.


CLS 224/901.4
TXT On strap:

    An article carrier under subclass 901 wherein at least one of the loop or
    hook fasteners is positioned on a long, narrow strip of pliant material.


CLS 224/901.6
TXT Closure fastener:

    An article carrier under subclass 901 wherein the loop and hook fastener
    closes an opening in the carrier.


CLS 224/901.8
TXT Connection between support and article or receiver:

    An article carrier under subclass 901 wherein the fastener provides a
    removable connection between either (a) the article carrier and an article,
    (b) the article carrier and the bearer or vehicle, or  (c) article carrier
    components.


CLS 224/902
TXT BATTERY CARRIER:

    Carrier for a battery.


CLS 224/903
TXT HOLDER FOR TIMEPIECE NOT CARRIED ON WRIST:

    Carrier holding a watch or other timepiece and not attached to a person's
    wrist, e.g., a watch having fixed to the case thereof a pin readily
    attachable to wearing apparel.


CLS 224/904
TXT TOOL HOLDER CARRIED BY BELT:

    Carrier holding a tool and supported on a belt.


CLS 224/905
TXT ATTACHING MEANS CROSSING BACK OF PACK ANIMAL:

    Carrier including a strap or other attaching means extended over the back
    of pack animal.


CLS 224/906
TXT CONTAINER FORMED OF FOLDED PAPERBOARD:

    Carrier including a container formed of cardboard or the like.


CLS 224/907
TXT RIGID SHIELD OR PAD POSITIONED BETWEEN ARTICLE AND BEARER:

    Carrier including a rigid shield or pad situated between the carried
    article and the bearer, e.g., a plate conformably fitting a person's back
    and supporting an air tank.


CLS 224/908
TXT CARRIER FOR CAMERA OR OTHER PHOTOGRAPHIC EQUIPMENT:

    Carrier for a camera, photographic film, or other items used in photography.


CLS 224/909
TXT BINOCULAR CARRIER:

    Carrier for a binocular.


CLS 224/910
TXT CARRIER FOR MUSICAL INSTRUMENT:

    Carrier for a musical instrument.


CLS 224/911
TXT HANDGUN HOLDER FORMED OF LEATHER, FABRIC, OR OTHER FLEXIBLE MATERIAL:


    Carrier holding a pistol made of leather, fabric, or like material,
    including pliant polymeric material.


CLS 224/912
TXT HANDGUN HOLDER FORMED OF METAL OR OTHER RIGID MATERIAL:

    Carrier holding a pistol made of metal or like material, including rigid
    polymeric material.


CLS 224/913
TXT CARRIER FOR RIFLE OR SHOTGUN:

    Carrier holding a rifle or a shotgun.


CLS 224/914
TXT CARRIER FOR HANDCUFFS, BLACKJACK, CLUB, OR OTHER EQUIPMENT CARRIED BY
    POLICEMEN:

    Carrier for handcuffs, a blackjack, a nightstick, or other items used by
    policemen.


CLS 224/915
TXT CARRIER FOR FOLDED UMBRELLA:

    Carrier for a collapsed umbrella.


CLS 224/916
TXT CARRIER FOR BOW OR ARROW:

    Carrier for a bow or an arrow.


CLS 224/917
TXT SKI CARRIER:

    Carrier for a ski.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclasses 58+ for a lock specifically provided for a
    portable article to prevent its unauthorized or surreptitious removal or
    combined with the article to prevent movement of a portion thereof, where
    the modification of the portable article is limited to that necessary to
    accommodate the lock.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 315.1+ for a receptacle
    for a sport implement.

    211,    Supports: Racks, subclass 70.5 for a support rack for storing skis
    which are not carried by a person or vehicle.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 601+ for skis and subclass 814 for a
    clamp tie or case for carrying or storing of skis not provided for
    elsewhere.


CLS 224/917.5
TXT Vehicle attached:

    Carrier under cross-reference art collection 917 including means for
    securing it to a vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.01,  for a convertible carrier.

    309+    for a roof or trunk mounted article carrier.

    400,    for a vehicle attached carrier.


CLS 224/918
TXT CARRIER FOR GOLF TEE OR MARKER:

    Carrier for a golf tee or means used to mark temporarily the position of a
    golf ball.


CLS 224/919
TXT BALL CARRIER:

    Carrier for a ball e.g., a tennis ball holder mounted on a belt.


CLS 224/920
TXT CARRIER FOR FISHING BAIT OR LURE, OR FISH CARRIER OTHER THAN STRINGER:


    Carrier for bait or a lure used in fishing, or which holds fish by means
    other than a stringer.


CLS 224/921
TXT GAME CARRIER OTHER THAN STRINGER:

    Carrier which holds bagged animals by means other than a stringer.


CLS 224/922
TXT FISHING ROD HOLDER:

    Carrier which holds a fishing rod.


CLS 224/923
TXT CARRIER WITH SLEEPING COMPARTMENT:

    Carriers which include a sleeping compartment.


CLS 224/924
TXT VEHICLE ATTACHED CARRIER FOR BICYCLE OR MOTORCYCLE:

    An article carrier under the class definition specifically configured for
    holding a two-wheeled vehicle.


CLS 224/925
TXT CARRIER FOR GROCERY BAG:

    An article carrier under the class definition having means for preventing
    the shifting or spilling of a grocery or shopping bag in a vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 95+ for a bag holder.


CLS 224/926
TXT VEHICLE ATTACHED CARRIER FOR BEVERAGE CONTAINER OR BOTTLE:

    An article carrier under the class definition specifically configured for
    transporting a fluid container on a vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 311.2 for a bracket with a receptacle-type
    holding means.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclass 194 for a container support on or in an
    arm rest.


CLS 224/927
TXT CARRIER FOR CLOTHES HANGER:

    An article carrier under the class definition configured to hold an apparel
    hanger during transport on a vehicle.


CLS 224/928
TXT TRASH RECEPTACLE:

    An article carrier under the class definition in the form of a container
    for holding waste material.


CLS 224/929
TXT ARTICLE CARRIER FOR ELECTRICAL DEVICE:

    An article carrier under the class definition specifically constructed and
    intended to hold equipment which requires a source of electric power.


CLS 224/930
TXT Attached to animate bearer:

    An article carrier under cross-reference art collection 929 wherein the
    carrier is supported by a living being.


CLS 224/931
TXT CARRIER FOR AMMUNITION:

    An article carrier under the class definition specifically configured for
    holding a projectile that is to be fired from a firearm.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, subclasses 49.01+ for a magazine, and subclass 86 for a
    device for temporarily holding a series of cartridges or gun charges and
    inserting them in the gun-magazine, where the device does not include a
    Class 224 carrying means.

    206,    Receptacles, subclass 3 for a container specifically restricted to
    the function of containing ammunition for storage and shipping.


CLS 224/932
TXT CARRIER FOR TOWEL OR HANDKERCHIEF:

    An article carrier under the class definition specifically configured for
    holding an absorbent cloth used by a person for wiping or drying.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 1 and 279 for a handkerchief.


CLS 224/933
TXT CARRIER FOR GLOVE:

    An article carrier under the class definition specifically configured for
    holding a hand covering.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 16+ for a guard or protector for the hand and
    subclasses 158+ for a hand covering.


CLS 224/934
TXT UNDERWATER CARRIER:

    An article carrier under the class definition specifically constructed for
    use beneath the surface of the water.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclass 201.27 for a diving or swimming apparatus.


CLS 224/935
TXT CARRIER FOR CYCLE LOCK:

    An article carrier under the class definition specifically configured for
    holding a lock on a cycle when the lock is not being used in the prevention
    of the theft of the cycle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclasses 233+ for a cycle lock, 182+ for a locking
    mechanism for a rotary shaft (e.g., a locking mechanism for the steering
    post of a cycle) and 207+ for a locking mechanism designed to prevent the
    free operation of the usual steering handle or to provide for free relative
    movement between the handle and the shaft to prevent controllable steering
    of the cycle.


CLS 225/
TTL SEVERING BY TEARING OR  BREAKING

CLS 225/
TXT This class provides for devices for, and methods of, severing by manually
    forcing work against a fixed edge or by breaking or tearing, as more
    specifically defined below:

    PART I

    SEVERING BY MANUALLY FORCING

    WORK AGAINST A FIXED EDGE

    This subject matter includes devices or processes accomplishing manual
    severing of indefinite length material such as strands or webs or of fixed
    length material such as sheets, cards, or tickets wherein a blade having a
    severing edge is provided and wherein the severing edge is fixed in
    position with respect to a portion of the work material during severance,
    the work itself is directly manually grasped on one side of the edge and
    forced against the edge to effect severance along that edge while at least
    some portion of the work on the opposite side of the edge is restrained
    from movement during severance to thereby prevent any portion of the work
    from being transported across the edge.

    (1)     Note.  Although the severing blade is not moved to effect
    severance, such blade may be moved or adjusted for any other purpose.

    (2)     Note.  This section of the class includes the combination of
    claimed means for performing an additional severing operation by a diverse
    type of severing instrumentality.  For example, included is the combination
    of slitting a web longitudinally by moving the web past a relatively fixed
    cutting edge followed by severing the slit web laterally by means under the
    class definition (see subclass 7).

    (3)     Note.  Excluded from this section of the class are those devices
    wherein the work is manually twisted or tensioned to rupture or break along
    a pre-determined weakened line which is not registered with and
    co-extensive with a fixed edge disclosed as functioning to cooperate with
    the weakened line to effect severance of the work.  See subclasses 93+ and
    the "SEARCH CLASS" notes below to Classes 206, 242, and 312 for excluded
    subject matter.

    (4)     Note.  This section of the class does not include claimed means for
    accomplishing any work-treating operation other than severing or claimed
    means which are ancillary to a nonsevering work-treating operation, on the
    same or different work from that treated by the fixed severing edge. For
    example, the combination of a severing device under the class definition
    with a means to apply a coating to the work is classified in Class 118,
    Coating Apparatus.

    (5)     Note.  This section of the class does not include claimed
    combinations of a severing device under the class definition with an art
    device elsewhere classified, except for diverse type cutters, as in (2)
    Note above, and for subclasses in this class specifically providing for
    combinations with timers, web or strand feed means, indicators, housings
    for work supply, brakes, clamps and guides.  For example, the combination
    of a dental floss holder with means to manually sever the floss is found in
    Class 132, Toilet; or a holder for sticky tape for cleaning lint, etc.,
    from surfaces combined with a severing edge is found in Class 15, Brushing,
    Scrubbing, and General Cleaning.

    PART II

    BREAKING OR TEARING

    This subject matter includes devices or processes for breaking or tearing
    the work.  For the purpose of this class breaking or tearing is defined as
    a failure by tension of the work at the point or line of separation,
    effected by moving one part of the work relative to another part or by
    causing internal stresses to be built up within the workpiece.  The tension
    is applied by stretching, bending, twisting or applying thermal shock so as
    to stress and strain the work beyond its yield and failure point.  This
    effectuation of the failure by means of the relative movement of the parts
    distinguishes breaking and tearing from other types of separating, e.g.,
    where the separation is effected by moving a tool relative to the work (as
    e.g., through the work) which may incidentally move the severed parts
    relative to each other.

    (1)     Note.  Where a breaking or tearing function is alleged or
    disclosed, the claimed structure must be such as to be capable of inducing
    in the work a force of tension.  A structural limitation in the claim which
    precludes the induction of such force will direct classification of such
    claim on some more appropriate structural basis.  For example, where a
    punch and die are claimed as having a close fit, or one tool of a pair is
    claimed in contact with the other tool or in closely spaced relation, such
    limitations would exclude the patent from this group of subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  This section of the class does not include claimed means for
    accomplishing any work treating operation other than severing.  Merely
    incidental shaping or deformation of the product produced solely by the
    severing instrumentality in its severing motion will not be excluded;
    however, where the severing instrumentality is specially designed or
    modified so as to impose a desired shape on the product the patent will be
    classified elsewhere.  For example, a device for breaking and bending sheet
    metal to a desired configuration will be classified in Class 72, Metal
    Deforming.

    (3)     Note.  Tension, as contemplated in this class, should extend over a
    substantial continuous area of the work, as contrasted with tension applied
    to extremely small, even if contiguous, local areas as in sawing wood, for
    example, or crushing brittle cellular material such as that disclosed in
    Patent No. 2, 781, 838.

    (4)     Note.  Where a work-contacting tool is utilized but there is no
    tension failure specifically alleged, the following guide lines should be
    applied to the disclosure:



    (a)     If the work is tensioned across and against a fixed severing edge,
    whether sharp or dull, the patent will be placed in Class 225.

    (b)     If a dull edged tool and supported work are moved relatively to one
    another to cause tensioning and rupture of the work the patent will be
    placed in Class 225.

    (c)     If a sharp-edged tool is moved into the work with the work support
    or holder at a substantial distance from the plane in which the blade moves
    but there is no clear teaching of a "slicing" cut (i.e., into and through
    the work and also with a component of force or motion transverse thereto,
    as in a "draw cut" or "progressive" cut) the patent will be placed in Class
    225.

    (d)     Where relatively flaccid work material is held in two spaced zones
    and a tool, whether sharp or dull, is relatively moved so as to first
    tension the work between the zones of support and then to cause rupture of
    the work along the localized line of stress at the blade edge, the patent
    will be classified in Class 225.

    (e)     Where relatively stiff work is held or supported at one or both
    ends and a dull tool moves to engage the work in a zone spaced
    substantially from the support zone or zones, the patent will be classified
    in Class 225.

    (f)     Where relatively stiff work is held or supported at an end zone or
    at two spaced zones and a sharp-edged tool is directed into the work in
    spaced relation to the zone or zones of support and the work is parted by
    movement of the tool therethrough rather than by stressing of the work
    beyond its yield point the patent will be classified in Class 83.

    (g)     Where a severing tool has an edge which moves in contact with or in
    substantially close relation to the edge of a cooperating tool so as to
    sever the work therebetween, or where an edged tool is directed into work
    supported on a surface underlying the edge, the patent will be classified
    in Class 83 (or some other appropriate class).

    DEFINITION OF TERMS



    WORK:

    A web, sheet or strand (including tube, rod or bar) which is to be acted on.

    WORK SUPPLY:

    A mass or quantity of work material in any regular or irregular arrangement.

    WORK SUPPLY PACKAGE:

    Work supply in regular form such as a wound roll, a folded strip or a pack
    or stack of work material may include a core, a flanged core or other
    support to which the material is fixed.

    BRAKE OR CLAMP:

    A means for applying friction directly or indirectly to the work, the means
    as disclosed being intended to slow, stop or prevent work motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 104.002 for
    sticky tape lint or dust collectors with tape severing means.

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses .35+ for processes and
    apparatus for breaking or tearing combined with textile handling or textile
    treating.

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 126 and 127 for strand cutters combined with
    means to hold or guide the strand to be cut and wherein use the strand is
    severed by manipulating the blade rather than by manually forcing the
    strand against the edge as required in this class (225).

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 112+ for a process of severing or
    perforating and treating a glass preform, and subclass 174 for glassworking
    or treating apparatus combined with severing, scoring or scribing means;
    see the "Search Notes" under each of these subclasses.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 835 for the tensile strength
    testing of materials by tearing.

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses for processes or devices for
    severing material by penetrating the material with a solid tool or a fluid
    current operating against an edged tool.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 551 for removing a pit by
    a tongue, subclass 585 for skin removal by a pinching roller, subclass 587
    for skin removal by pulling, subclasses 600+ for hulling or grain by
    tearing or abrading, subclasses 623+ for skin removal by abrading, and
    subclasses 637+ for a device that pulls or tears the stem from fruit.

    112,    Sewing, subclass 252 for sewing machine elements which cut threads
    at end of seam; see subclass 83 in this class (225) for sewing machine
    presser foot attachments for cutting threads by manually forcing the thread
    against a severing edge.

    125,    Stone Working, subclasses 23.01+ for stone splitting apparatus, and
    subclasses 40+ for apparatus for severing stone by a breaking operation.

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 324+ for dental floss holders with floss-supply
    container and severing means.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for apparatus and methods pertaining to severing
    and/or laminating of delaminating.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 39 for strip, ticket or
    stamp dispensing devices having no disclosed use of a severing edge, and
    see (3) Note above.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 277+ for rip strip can opening devices.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 25 for article dispensing involving a
    progressively destroyed cellular magazine supply source, and subclass 26
    for article dispensers which clamp a portion of the articles so that the
    portion to be removed must be torn from the retained portion.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 106+ for spool and sewing-implement
    holders which may include a cutter.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses, for processes or devices for breaking material into smaller
    portions where there is no claimed provision for maintaining or determining
    the product shape or size, or where the material being worked upon is not
    disclosed as modified so as to determine a specific size or shape for the
    product.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 521 and 522+ for
    tearing or cutting combined with subsequent convolute winding, and
    subclasses 19, 21, and 48 for cutting a strand being wound, and subclass
    911 for a cutter that may otherwise be appropriate for winding, tensioning,
    or guiding.

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses. Class 269 is the residual
    locus for patents to a device for clamping, supporting and/or holding an
    article (or articles) in position to be operated on or treated.  See notes
    thereunder for other related loci.

    281,    Books, Strips, and Leaves, subclasses 6+ for strip holders
    providing a platen disclosed as a backing surface for writing and which may
    include a blade arranged for severing sheets from the strip by manually
    forcing the strip thereagainst.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 34.1+ for continuous strip
    cabinet devices having no claimed severing edge against which the strip may
    be forced for severing purposes, and see (3) Note above.

    452,    Butchering, subclass 49 for  sausage delinkers and subclass 125 for
    skinning by tearing.

    462,    Books, Strips, and Leaves for Manifolding, subclass 51 for device
    for feeding and severing strips utilized for manifolding.


CLS 225/1
TXT Processes of severing under the class definition.


CLS 225/2
TXT Processes under subclass 1 which include a step of providing a line of
    lesser strength in the work, and then severing the work on a line which
    intersects or coincides with the line of lesser strength.

    (1)     Note.  The preliminary weakening may be of a type not classified,
    per se, in this class; as for example, perforating, milling, cutting by a
    torch or scoring.  Such steps in combination with breaking or tearing steps
    have been classified here because such other step has been considered to
    effect a necessary or desirable preparation of the work for the breaking or
    tearing operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     for corresponding apparatus.


CLS 225/3
TXT Process under subclass 1 wherein the line of breaking or tearing occurs
    along a line parallel to the path of movement of the work feed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99,     for apparatus for longitudinally separating work by a breaking or
    tearing operation by diverting the moving work into separate paths.


CLS 225/4
TXT Processes under subclass 1 wherein the line of breaking or tearing is
    generally across the direction of feed of the work and occurs during the
    feed thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are methods of developing tensile stresses by
    relative acceleration of the feed velocity of a leading portion of the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    for corresponding apparatus.


CLS 225/5
TXT Processes under subclass 4 wherein the line of separation proceeds to or
    from an edge of the traveling work.


CLS 225/6
TXT Devices under Part I of the class definition.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is the residual or miscellaneous repository
    for devices coming within Part I of the class definition but not
    classifiable in any of the subclasses indented hereunder.


CLS 225/7
TXT Devices under subclass 6 combined with additional means for separating work
    completely, thicknesswise.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94,     for breakers combined with nonbreaking cutters; except that where
    the non-breaking cutter is a tearing device the combination is in this
    subclass (7).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), appropriate subclasses, and
    particularly subclass 131 for the combination of tearing or breaking means
    with selective cutting means.


CLS 225/8
TXT A device under subclass 6 including means to hold the work from moving
    toward the blade, means to deactivate said work-holding means, and means
    providing a predetermined time delay between the application of said
    holding means to the work and its subsequent deactivation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclass 131 for manual
    material movers having timed interlocks that prevent subsequent material
    movement for a predetermined period of time.


CLS 225/9
TXT Devices under subclass 6 in which the blade edge is so arranged as to
    produce a line of severance in the work which is oblique relative to an
    edge of the work.


CLS 225/10
TXT A device under subclass 6 having structure which as disclosed causes or
    permits a definitely determined linear length of work to be moved from the
    work supply past the severing blade for subsequent manipulation against the
    blade to sever such length.

    (1)     Note.  With a wound supply package the predetermined length may be
    one which diminishes progressively as the package is reduced in diameter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27+,    for stacks or pads of individual work pieces held in contact with
    the severing blade and wherein the stack or pad as a whole may be moved
    relative to the blade edge to determine the line of severance; these are
    excluded from this and the indented subclasses because the work supply as a
    whole is moved.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclass 120 for
    devices that advance a predetermined amount of material where severing is
    not claimed.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 34.1+ for dispensing
    predetermined lengths from strip material in which there is no fixed
    severing edge or the severing edge is not claimed.


CLS 225/11
TXT Devices under subclass 10 having means for setting the device to feed out
    any desired one of a plurality of predetermined work lengths.

    (1)     Note.  This is intended to include infinitely adjustable strip
    lengths as well as multi-step devices such as postage stamp strip
    dispensers.


CLS 225/12
TXT A device under subclass 10 in which the work is moved from the source of
    supply past the blade by manually grasping and pulling the lead-end of the
    work and in which means is provided for preventing further movement of the
    work after the predetermined length of work has been so moved.


CLS 225/13
TXT A device under subclass 12 in which the means for preventing further
    movement of the work is a member which extends into the path of movement of
    the work and engages either a transversely extending edge portion of the
    work or of an article attached to the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 25 for article dispensing involving a
    progressively destroyed cellular magazine type supply source.


CLS 225/14
TXT Devices under subclass 12 having means which operates to place or expose a
    short leading end portion of the work in position for manual grasping and
    subsequent manual pull-out or feeding.


CLS 225/15
TXT Devices under subclass 10 in which the structure, as disclosed, causes or
    permits feed-out of a relatively short length sufficient for manual
    grasping so as to permit subsequent withdrawal of an addition indeterminate
    length of work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclass 121 for
    devices that absorb energy from material to later be utilized in feeding
    out the lead end of the material, where severing of the material is not
    claimed.


CLS 225/16
TXT Devices under subclass 10 having hand-operated parts which directly
    function mechanically to transport the predetermined length of work so as
    to locate it in position for severing.

    (1)     Note.  Devices requiring manual operation of an electric switch or
    the like to control electrically-operated means for moving the work have
    not been placed herein.


CLS 225/17
TXT Devices under subclass 6 having visual means or indicia for measuring or
    identifying the material to be dispensed or denoting any characteristic
    thereof (e.g., width of supply material or length of material dispensed or
    remaining in the supply source or package).


CLS 225/18
TXT A device under subclass 17 in which the indicating means aids the operator
    in determining when a desired length of work extends past the blade.


CLS 225/19
TXT A devices under subclass 6 including a member disclosed as functioning for
    preventing or inhibiting inadvertent contact of the operator's hand (or any
    object) with the blade edge.


CLS 225/20
TXT A device under subclass 19 in which the guard is mounted so as to be
    capable of motion.


CLS 225/21
TXT Devices under subclass 6 in which an element of the device contacts the
    lead-end portion of the work and imparts motion thereto so as to separate
    the work from contact with the blade.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the work has an adhesive coating and the stripper
    functions to free the lead-end for the next succeeding feed-out operation.


CLS 225/22
TXT Devices under subclass 21 in which the blade is mounted so as to be capable
    of motion relative to the remainder of the device.

    (1)     Note.  The movement may or may not be related to the stripping
    function.


CLS 225/23
TXT A device under subclass 6 including means to impart motion to the work to
    transport at least a portion thereof in a path leading to the severing edge
    so as to locate it in position for co-action with the severing edge.

    (1)     Note.  Where a claimed work feed-out means is disclosed as
    functioning to supply a predetermined length, such means has been
    classified above in subclasses 10+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10+,    for feed-out of predetermined lengths and see (1) Note, above.

    28,     for devices which have means to move the severed stub portion of a
    work piece in pad or stack arrangement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 521 and 522+ for
    tearing or cutting combined with subsequent convolute winding, and
    subclasses 19, 21, and 48 for cutting a strand being wound, and subclass
    911 for a cutter that may otherwise be appropriate for winding, tensioning,
    or guiding.


CLS 225/24
TXT A device under subclass 23 including means to separate the work from a
    surface of the work-moving means.

    (1)     Note.  Either the work itself or some surface of the work-moving
    means may have adhesive characteristics, thus requiring separation means.


CLS 225/25
TXT Devices under subclass 6 which include structure providing an area adjacent
    the blade and in the path of movement of adhesively coated work to which
    area, as disclosed, the free-end portion of said work may remain
    temporarily adhered.

    (1)     Note.  Guide or feed rollers mounted for turning about a fixed axis
    are excluded from this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  These devices usually provide for anchoring the feed-out
    portion of the work to prevent retrograde movement or to facilitate manual
    grasping.

    (3)     Note.  Either the work or the surface may be adhesive.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for means to strip work from work  moving means; see (1) Note,
    above.


CLS 225/26
TXT A device under subclass 25 in which a finger notch, recess or aperture is
    provided in the paster surface to permit grasping of the work for detaching
    it from the paster surface.


CLS 225/27
TXT Devices under subclass 6 associated with means to retain a plurality of
    individual work pieces for successive application to the blade, said pieces
    being generally planar and usually identical in size and juxtaposed one
    against another and with or without means to bind the edges thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Devices for severing a single sheet or ticket, without a
    supply package or compartment, will be found in the appropriate subclass at
    the end of the schedule beginning with subclass 81.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 39 for pocket cases
    specially constructed to hold tickets, cards, stamps, etc., and subclass
    40.5 for ticket holders to be carried by the person and designed for ready
    dispensing of the tickets successively from the holder, where no fixed
    severing edge is claimed.


CLS 225/28
TXT Devices under subclass 27 provided with structure for manipulating the cut
    end of the remaining stub portion of a severed work piece to move it, at
    least temporarily, away from or retain it in spaced relation with the
    remaining uncut work pieces of the pad or stack.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for devices having compartments for loose stubs.


CLS 225/29
TXT Devices under subclass 27 in which the configuration of the severing edge
    of the blade may be varied by rearrangement of relatively movable parts
    thereof.


CLS 225/30
TXT Devices under subclass 29 in which a protruding element is movable along
    the blade edge for producing a reentrant portion of the severed edge of the
    work at any desired location.


CLS 225/31
TXT Device under subclass 27 in which the blade structure may be manually moved
    bodily over the surface of the topmost work piece of the pad or stack to
    locate the blade in a selected severing position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29+,    for devices in which parts of the blade structure are slidable
    relative to each other to provide for a changeable blade edge contour.


CLS 225/32
TXT Devices under subclass 6 associated with means for retaining an elongated
    strip of work material which, as disclosed, is arranged in juxtaposed
    successively reversed folds and adapted to be unfolded and moved across the
    blade.


CLS 225/33
TXT Devices under subclass 6 including two or more distinct and spaced severing
    edges combined with one work supply and capable of use one after the other
    or independently of one another.


CLS 225/34
TXT Devices under subclass 6 having means to retain two or more distinct work
    supplies and including one or more blades.

    (1)     Note.  A laminated web which is presented to the blade while still
    in adhered condition is considered a single supply source and is classified
    on some other appropriate feature.

    (2)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses include devices having a
    plurality of individual webs rolled or folded together in face-contacting
    relation where (a) the juxtaposed webs are presented to a single blade, or
    (b) nonlaminated webs are separated and two or more are presented to the
    blade; excluded, however, are those devices where only one of the separated
    webs is presented to the blade.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for devices excluded under (2) Note, above, and not classifiable in
    Class 242, Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for apparatus and methods pertaining to severing and
    delaminating, particularly subclasses 152, 247+, 344, and 584 for
    delaminating.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 521 and 522+ for
    tearing or cutting combined with subsequent convolute winding.


CLS 225/35
TXT Devices under subclass 34 wherein each of the work supplies, usually in
    package form, is mounted on a rotatable carrier means near or at the
    periphery thereof, there being a severing edge adjacent the carrier, the
    arrangement being such that the carrier may be rotated to selectively
    locate any one of the supplies in a position convenient to the severing
    edge.


CLS 225/36
TXT Devices under subclass 34 wherein a member having a severing edge thereon
    is connected to the supply holding means for motion relative thereto and
    this member may be moved so as to locate the severing edge in a position
    convenient to the work feed-out path from each supply source.


CLS 225/37
TXT Devices under subclass 34 provided with two or more distinct severing edges.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for devices having plural distinct blades useable alternatively or
    sequentially on a single work supply.


CLS 225/38
TXT Devices under subclass 37 wherein each supply source is provided with an
    individual severing edge.


CLS 225/39
TXT Devices under subclass 6 in which the blade is attached to an enclosure
    which substantially covers the work supply on at least the top and four
    sides, as seen in its position of normal use.

    (1)     Note.  A surface in or against which the device is intended to be
    attached so as to complete the enclosure may be considered as part of the
    housing to meet the above requirements.

    (2)     Note.  The enclosure may have apertured, foraminous or reticulated
    wall structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 438+ for a surgical
    package including a severing blade.


CLS 225/40
TXT Housings under subclass 39 including claimed structure which is disclosed
    as acting to seal the work exit passageway to prevent ingress of luminary
    rays or of liquids or gases into an otherwise sealed housing.

    (1)     Note.  These housings usually protect specially treated paper such
    as photographic or litmus paper.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 242 for
    chamber seals and see the Notes thereto for completing the search for this
    subject matter.


CLS 225/41
TXT Devices under subclass 39 wherein the enclosure is provided with an opening
    or transparent wall for viewing the work or a portion thereof without
    opening the housing.


CLS 225/42
TXT Devices under subclass 39 in which the housing structure for attaching the
    housing to a supporting surface or within a recess.


CLS 225/43
TXT Devices under subclass 39 in which the blade is formed on or attached to a
    hinged cover for an opening in the container through which the supply
    package may be inserted.


CLS 225/44
TXT A device under subclass 39 in which the housing is formed of separate
    parts, at least portions of which are slidably nested one within another,
    whether permanently joined or separable.

    (1)     Note.  Housings having flanged pivoted covers are not considered to
    fall within the means of "telescoping".


CLS 225/45
TXT A device under subclass 44 in which the work supply is wound on a core
    having at least one flange and there is a tubular member, open at one or
    both ends, telescoping over the flange so as to completely enclose the work
    supply and is at least partially removed in order to provide access to the
    work.


CLS 225/46
TXT Devices under subclass 39 in which the work supply is in the form of a
    wound package and the housing has means to contact with the core or spindle
    of the package to thereby mount the package for rotation about its axis;
    or, alternatively, the interior of the housing is modified to supportingly
    engage the periphery of the package by any means other than merely a flat
    bottom wall intended to be horizontal in normal position of use.


CLS 225/47
TXT Devices under subclass 46 in which the housing has means to contact with
    the core or spindle of the package to thereby mount the package for
    rotation about its axis.


CLS 225/48
TXT Devices under subclass 39 in which the housing as set forth by the language
    of the claim(s) is made from one sheet of material cut and folded along
    lines such as to form an enclosure meeting the requirements of subclass 39.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 100+ for a
    folded, blank paperboard box.


CLS 225/49
TXT Devices under subclass 48 wherein the severing edge is integral with the
    material of the blank.

    (1)     Note.  A hardening agent may be used to coat or impregnate the
    severing edge area of a paper blank.  However, an additive preformed edge
    is excluded from this subclass.


CLS 225/50
TXT Devices under subclass 48 wherein a cover-forming panel member of the
    housing is provided with means interengaging other parts of the housing to
    inhibit movement away from closed or folded position.


CLS 225/51
TXT Devices under subclass 39 which include a work contacting friction device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclass 195 for
    devices for placing tension on material of indeterminate-length, where
    severing is not claimed.


CLS 225/52
TXT Devices under subclass 51 in which the exit passageway for the work is, or
    is capable of being made, sufficiently limited so as to frictionally engage
    the work, or there is a friction element applied to the running work
    immediately adjacent to or within the passageway.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for housings in which the blade is on a pivoted closure which
    serves to clamp the work against a container wall during the severing
    operation.

    44,     for sectional telescoping housings having juxtaposed walls forming
    a restricted or restrictable work outlet.

    48+,    for folded single blank containers having overlapping or juxtaposed
    panels forming a work passageway therebetween, some of which disclose that
    the two panels can exert a braking force on the work.


CLS 225/53
TXT Devices under subclass 39 provided with an aperture which permits the work
    supply to be directly contacted by the thumb and/or finger for the purpose
    of moving a running length of the work toward or through an egress
    passageway.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90,     for additional types and arrangements of means to facilitate
    lead-end grasping.


CLS 225/54
TXT Devices under subclass 39 including means located interiorly of the housing
    between the supply source and the work exit passageway functioning to
    direct or control the path of the moving work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for sectional telescoping housings having juxtaposed walls forming
    a work passageway therebetween.

    48+,    for folded single blank containers having overlapping or juxtaposed
    panels forming a work passageway therebetween.


CLS 225/55
TXT Devices under subclass 6 in which the blade is attached to and carried by
    supporting structure which is separate and independent from the work supply
    source, and this assembly is hand-held and includes a guide member through
    which the work in running length form is threaded, thus maintaining the
    work and the blade carrier assembly in continuing association and
    permitting the carrier and the work to be manually moved relative to each
    other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27+,    for blade carriers mounted on a pad or stack of tickets or the like.

    56+,    for blade carriers mounted on a wound work supply package.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 127 for similar devices wherein it is clearly
    disclosed that the device is manipulated solely like a knife for cutting
    rather than the twine being itself gripped manually and forced against the
    blade; also, that subclass contains similar devices wherein the severing is
    accomplished by a cutting tool pair such as a shearing cutter.


CLS 225/56
TXT Devices under subclass 6 in which the blade is provided with mounting
    structure which structure is adapted to engage and be assembled with a
    wound work supply package.

    (1)     Note.  The normal mode of operation, as disclosed, is for the
    operator to hold the entire assembly of work and severing instrumentality
    in one hand while withdrawing a portion of work from the supply package
    with the other hand and forcing the work against the blade to sever it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25+,    for such devices having a paster surface.

    39+,    for such devices having a housing substantially enclosing the
    supply package.


CLS 225/57
TXT Devices under subclass 56 in which the work supply is a permanently tacky
    adhesive web and means is provided for breaking the adhesive bond between
    the leading end portion of the work and the body of the package.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for strippers which separate adhesive web material from work moving
    means.

    69,     for lead-end strippers operative on nonadhesive webs.


CLS 225/58
TXT Devices under subclass 56 including means which surround and resiliently
    engage a major portion of the outer circumference of the package to hold
    the blade on the package.


CLS 225/59
TXT Devices under subclass 56 provided with means for association with a work
    supply fixedly mounted on a core which has a radially extending rim at or
    near at least one end thereof.


CLS 225/60
TXT Devices under subclass 59 wherein the blade is free to move peripherally
    with respect to the package but is confined against disassociation
    therefrom by engagement with ribs, grooves or beads on the flanges.


CLS 225/61
TXT Devices under subclass 59 wherein the spool has an axial through passage or
    axial recesses at its ends and the mounting structure engages the passage
    or the recesses to permit the spool to rotate on its axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66,     for work supply packages having a hollow core and mounted on
    bearing means engaging within the interior of the core.


CLS 225/62
TXT Devices under subclass 59 wherein a reentrant portion is provided on the
    periphery of the rim, and either this portion itself provides the severing
    edge or a separate severing edge is provided adjacent the portion whereby
    the work (usually of strand form) may be guided into contact with the
    severing edge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for blade edge guards.


CLS 225/63
TXT Devices under subclass 59 providing means to grip the free end of work in
    strand form, usually to prevent unwanted unwinding of the strand from the
    spool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 579+ and 125+ for means
    to attach an end of an elongated material to a winding take-up.


CLS 225/64
TXT Devices under subclass 63 in which the gripping element bears directly on a
    flange of the spool so as to grip the strand therebetween.


CLS 225/65
TXT Devices under subclass 56 in which the blade mounting structure includes
    means which resiliently clamps over both ends of the package or within the
    package core to hold the blade on the package.


CLS 225/66
TXT Devices under subclass 56 in which the work is wound on a hollow core and
    the mounting structure has means engaged in the core to permit the package
    to rotate thereabout.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for such devices in which the work supply is wound on a hollow
    flanged spool.


CLS 225/67
TXT Devices under subclass 6 having means to rotatably support a wound web
    supply package and a blade arranged with its edge substantially parallel to
    the axis of the supported package so as to be constantly urged toward the
    outer decreasing periphery of the package.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27+,    for blades biased into contact with a pad or stack of work pieces.


CLS 225/68
TXT Devices under subclass 67 including means for temporarily retaining the
    blade out of contact with the supply roll.


CLS 225/69
TXT Devices under subclass 67 which include a guide element lying in close
    contact with the peripheral surface of the supply roll so as to engage
    under and deflect the lead-end edge portion of the work away from the
    surface.

    (1)     Note.  Devices which are manually threaded so as to continuously
    deflect the outermost layer of the wound package to form a running length
    are not considered to be "strippers" for this subclass but are merely
    guides; see, for example, subclasses 54 and 88.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for strippers acting to separate work from a work-moving surface.

    57,     for lead-end strippers for tacky-adhesive-coated work in hand-held
    wound packages.


CLS 225/70
TXT Devices under subclass 67 wherein the means supporting the supply package
    against the force of gravity is able to move under the influence of gravity
    on the package and there is a mechanical interconnection with the means
    mounting the blade so that a component of the gravitational force on the
    package is transmitted to the blade mounting to urge the blade toward the
    package.


CLS 225/71
TXT Devices under subclass 67 wherein the blade or its supporting structure is
    constrained or permitted to follow a pre-determined path of movement which
    path is defined by an elongated track or slot or by a relatively movable
    rod and sleeve.

    (1)     Note.  Blades which are mounted to move about a pivot or to flex
    about a cantilever type anchorage are excluded from this subclass and will
    be found above.


CLS 225/72
TXT Devices under subclass 6 in which either feed-out motion of the work causes
    the claimed blade to move to the location in which (as disclosed) the
    severing operation takes place or the work is forced against a movably
    mounted blade and such contact moves the blade to the severing location.


CLS 225/73
TXT Devices under subclass 72 in which a braking force is initially applied to
    the work or increased at the same time as the blade is moved to severing
    position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for devices wherein there is a feed-out of a predetermined length
    of work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclass 195 for
    devices for placing tension on material of indeterminate-length, where
    severing is not claimed.


CLS 225/74
TXT Devices under subclass 73 in which the brake or clamp is applied directly
    to the work after it has left the supply package.


CLS 225/75
TXT Devices under subclass 74 in which both jaws of a clamp are moved to grip
    the work therebetween.


CLS 225/76
TXT Devices under subclass 6 in which the blade is immovably attached to a
    support and a wound supply package is rotatably mounted on the support with
    its axis substantially parallel to the blade edge and is constantly urged
    to move toward the blade as the radius of the package is diminished.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for housings in which the package is so supported as to be biased
    toward the blade by gravity.


CLS 225/77
TXT Devices under subclass 6 in which the blade and a wound supply package are
    mounted on a common base and the blade is immovable relative to the base.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39+,    for devices where the wound package is supported in a housing.

    76,     for devices in which the supply roll is bodily biased toward the
    fixed blade.


CLS 225/78
TXT Devices under subclass 77 having means for supporting them from the human
    body or from a garment or belt worn on the body.


CLS 225/79
TXT A device under subclass 77 in which a friction device directly engages a
    surface of the work supply package.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclass 195 for
    devices for placing tension on material of indeterminate-length, where
    severing is not claimed.


CLS 225/80
TXT Devices under subclass 77 provided with passive means between the supply
    source and the blade acting to control or direct the path of movement of
    the work and in which there is a gap between the guide and the blade edge
    to permit manual grasping of the remaining free end portion of the work
    after a severing operation has taken place.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for movable blade strippers which act as guides and provide access
    to the lead-end.


CLS 225/81
TXT Devices under subclass 6 provided with an obstacle located in or movable
    into the path of movement of the work, as it is brought into severing
    position, for engaging an edge of the work and preventing further movement
    thereof in at least one direction so as to locate some portion of the work
    in a desired position with respect to the blade.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for devices having an abutment stop for predetermined length
    feed-out of work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 125+ for
    work abutments where severing is not claimed.


CLS 225/82
TXT Devices under subclass 6 including a brake or clamp as defined in the
    Definition of Terms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51+,    for a brake or tensioner combined with a housing for the work
    supply.

    67+,    for devices in which the blade or holder is biased toward the
    supply package and carries a brake or tensioner acting directly on the
    package.

    79,     for devices having a fixed blade and a support for a wound package
    combined with a brake applied to the package.

    85+,    for devices in which the brake is spaced from the blade in order to
    provide a lead-end therebetween.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.


CLS 225/83
TXT Devices under subclass 82 which, as disclosed, are adapted to be mounted on
    the presser foot of a sewing machine.


CLS 225/84
TXT Devices under subclass 82 in which the brake or clamp is applied directly
    to the work after it has left the supply package.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     for housings having a restricted or restrictable outlet for braking
    or tensioning the running work.

    55,     for blade carriers bodily and slidably supported on running length
    work and including a brake or clamp.

    63+,    for strand clamps associated with blades mounted on hand-held wound
    spools.

    74,     for brakes continuously applied to running work in which the
    braking action is increased when the blade is moved to severing position.


CLS 225/85
TXT Devices under subclass 84 in which there is a gap between the brake and the
    blade edge to provide for manual grasping of the remaining free end portion
    of the work after a severing operation has taken place.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     for strand-holding spools having a severing device mounted thereon
    which includes a clamp for the free-end of the strand almost always spaced
    from the cutting edge to provide a readily grasped lead-end.


CLS 225/86
TXT Devices under subclass 85 in which the blade is moved by hand from its
    severing position in order to make the free-end of the work accessible for
    grasping.


CLS 225/87
TXT Devices under subclass 82 in which the brake or clamp is spring-biased away
    from its operative position and is brought to operative position by hand
    pressure.


CLS 225/88
TXT Devices under subclass 6 provided with passive means located between the
    supply source and the blade edge and acting to control or direct the path
    of movement of moving work.

    (1)     Note.  Many brakes, etc., having a guiding function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for housings having internal guides.

    55,     for blade carriers bodily and slidably supported on running length
    work and including a guide for the work.

    80,     for devices in which the guide is spaced from the blade in order to
    provide a lead-end therebetween.

    82+,    for brakes, etc., which may also have a guiding function.


CLS 225/89
TXT Devices under subclass 6 in which the blade is engaged by hand and moved
    toward or away from the position in which it serves its severing function.

    (1)     Note.  The blade may, for example, be movable to facilitate
    threading work through the device, or to permit grasping the work at the
    severing zone, or to store the blade in a nonuse position; or it may be
    selectively adjustable to a plurality of severing positions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for a notcher device slidable on a severing edge.

    36,     for a single movable blade which may be manually moved to be
    adjacent to any selected one of a plurality of work supplies.

    43,     for blades mounted on pivoted closures for supply package housings.

    68,     for blades continually biased toward wound web supply packages with
    a latch for the blade when manually moved to inoperative position.

    72,     for devices in which the blade is moved to severing position by the
    moving work, which work itself may be moved by hand.

    86,     for devices wherein the blade is moved by hand to gain access to
    the lead-end of the work, there being a claimed brake applied to the
    running work for immobilizing the work so that blade movement will expose
    the lead-end of work.

    87,     for devices in which the brake and blade are integral and spring
    biased away from operative position.


CLS 225/90
TXT Devices under subclass 6 in which means is provided which permits or
    assists the operator to grip the remaining cut end portion of the work
    after a severing operation for pulling the work past the blade edge for the
    next severing operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for predetermined length feed-out stops for manually pulled work
    including means to aid initial grasping of lead-end.

    15,     for devices which feed-out a predetermined length of work merely to
    provide a lead-end for grasping.

    26,     for stationary paster surfaces having a finger access opening to
    facilitate grasping the lead-end.

    53,     for supply package housings having a finger access opening to
    facilitate work feed-out.

    69,     for movable blades continually biased toward the supply package and
    including means to separate the lead-end from the package.

    72+,    for blades which are movable to the severing position by the moving
    work, and in which the return movement of the blade makes the lead-end
    accessible for grasping.

    85+,    for devices in which the blade is spaced from a brake to provide a
    lead-end therebetween, including movable blades to facilitate grasping the
    lead-end.

    88+,    for guides which have means or are otherwise arranged to facilitate
    lead-end grasping.

    89,     for blades manually movable to gain access to the work at the
    severing zone.


CLS 225/91
TXT Edged severing devices, per se, under subclass 6 disclosed (1) as
    implements which are manually placed and held on the surface of work, (2)
    as elements to be mounted on supports or housings for work supplies or (3)
    in combination with supports for individual work pieces.

    (1)     Note.  Devices claiming the sub-combination of a blade and its
    mounting or support means have been classified in appropriate subclasses
    above, based on their disclosed relationship with other elements or their
    mode of operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for blade on pivoted container closure.

    49,     for blade unitary with single blank  container.


CLS 225/92
TXT Devices under subclass 91 in which the configuration of the severing edge
    of the blade may be changed by rearrangement of relatively movable parts
    thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29+,    for pad or stack holders having changeable-edge-contour blades.


CLS 225/93
TXT Devices under Part II of the class definition.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is the residual or miscellaneous repository
    for devices coming within Part II of the class definition but not
    classifiable in any of the subclasses indented hereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclass 3 for implements which cause rupture of work by
    repeated bending.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 263 for continuous casting and breaking
    apparatus.


CLS 225/93.5
TXT Device under subclass 93 which includes means to perform the operation of
    this class by abruptly changing the temperature of a portion of the work.

    (1)     Note.  Device herein breaks the work, at least in part, by causing
    internal stresses to be built up within the workpiece along the line at
    which severance is to occur.

    (2)     Note.  Many of the devices herein sever very brittle material such
    as glass.


CLS 225/94
TXT Devices under subclass 93 which include a tool which partially or
    completely severs so separates by an operation which is not a breaking
    operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for devices in which the nonbreaking cutter is a fixed edge against
    which the work is manually forced.


CLS 225/95
TXT Devices under subclass 94 comprising two tools, one being keen-edged and
    one being relatively blunt, and mechanism to (1) initially engage the work
    with the keen-edged tool to start a cut along a line of separation, (2)
    remove the keen-edged tool and move the blunt tool into the cut, and (3)
    cause the relative movement of the blunt tool and work to finish the
    separation.


CLS 225/96
TXT Devices under subclass 94 in which a nonbreaking tool partially separates
    the product from the work, as by perforating or scoring, or otherwise
    provides a line of lesser strength, which line intersects or coincides with
    a line of separation effected by the breaking means.

    (1)     Note.  The preliminary weakener may be of a type not classified,
    per se, in this class; as for example, a cutting torch, a milling tool or a
    scoring device. Such tools in combination with a breaking device have been
    classified here because such other tool has been considered to effect a
    necessary or desirable preparation of the work for the breaking operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for corresponding methods.

    95,     for devices which initially contact the work with a sharp tool to
    begin a line of separation and complete a severance by a dull tool, which
    dull tool may be a breaking tool.


CLS 225/96.5
TXT Devices under subclass 96 wherein the breaking means includes means to
    apply pressure to a workpiece in a zone offset from a line of separation in
    order to rotate one portion of the workpiece with respect to another about
    the said line.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are patents to apparatus for scoring and
    breaking glass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 879+ for machines for, and processes of scoring
    material. See the collection of "Search Notes" under subclass 879 for other
    classes providing for scoring of material.


CLS 225/97
TXT Devices under subclass 93 which include more than one breaking or tearing
    tool.

    (1)     Note.  The patents collected here have either (1) plural tools
    which contact separate parts of the work to break the work in a plurality
    of places, or (2) plural tools which break the work on the same line of
    separation in a series of operations.


CLS 225/98
TXT Devices under subclass subclass 93 in which the work is continuously fed to
    the breaking means, which means changes the direction of work movement and
    thereby effects separation.

    (1)     Note.  The work is usually weakened, as by scoring, transverse to
    the direction of feed, and the separation is effected along these weakened
    lines.


CLS 225/99
TXT Devices under subclass 98 which include means to direct different parts of
    the moving work in different directions to thereby break or tear the work
    at the point where the direction changes.


CLS 225/100
TXT Devices under subclass 93 in which means are provided to grip the work on
    opposite sides of the portion which is to be severed, comprising two sets
    of gripping elements; and in which each set of elements is caused to impart
    movement to the work in a different direction or at a different speed than
    the movement imparted to the work by the other set of elements, so as to
    stress the work beyond its yield point and thereby sever it between said
    two sets of elements.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are patents wherein the work is
    moved in a single direction by a plurality of feed roll pairs, which pairs
    are driven at different speeds to stress the work between the pairs of
    rolls.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 205 for a rolling-mill which includes
    means to tension the work, subclasses 274+ for a drawing apparatus which
    pulls work through a die, subclass 302 for the stretching of work between
    and by means to end clamps, subclass 392 for means to stretch work by
    relatively receding work-engaging tool faces, and subclass 395 for means to
    stretch flat work by using paired coplanar tool-faces engaging the work
    face and moving in opposite directions.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 826+ and 856+ for gripping
    devices for determining tensile strength of material.


CLS 225/101
TXT Devices under subclass 100 wherein each set of gripping elements comprises
    a pair of closable jaws.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., appropriate subclasses for a single
    clamp disclosed for use in breaking or tearing.


CLS 225/102
TXT Devices under subclass 93 which have means for holding immobile a portion
    of the work and rotating an adjacent portion about a generally longitudinal
    axis of the work to effect severing by a torsional force.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 199 for similar devices which sever by applying a
    rotary shearing force to the work.


CLS 225/103
TXT Devices under subclass 93 which include a work contacting tool which
    applies stress to the work at the desired line of severance, as by bending
    the work about such line, and means to move the tool into contact with the
    work, either at such line or remote therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 193.1+ for a device for splitting wood by
    means of a wedge.


CLS 225/104
TXT Devices under subclass 103 which include two rests with an interval
    therebetween, against which rests the work is placed, and in which the tool
    is moved to contact the work between the said rests.


CLS 225/105
TXT Devices under subclass 104 in which the spaced supports are provided with
    means to grip and hold the work while the tool is contacting the work.


CLS 225/106
TXT Devices under subclass 93 wherein there is provided a device which contacts
    a portion of the work to (1) prevent movement of the contacted portion or
    (2) constrains the work for movement in a particular path, so that when the
    work is pulled a stress will be created which will effect a severance of
    the work at a weakened portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100+,   for devices to restrain a portion of a web and pull another portion
    of the web to break or tear the web between the restrained and pulled
    portions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclass 195 for means
    to place tension on material of indeterminate-length, where severing is not
    claimed.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 410+ for means; e.g., a
    brake, to apply tension to an elongated material.


CLS 226/
TTL ADVANCING MATERIAL OF   INDETERMINATE LENGTH

CLS 226/
TXT This class definition and notes are divided into the following Sections:


    I       INTRODUCTORY NOTES

    II      SUBJECT MATTER AND SCOPE OF THE CLASS

    III     DEFINITIONS OF TERMS

    IV      RELATIONSHIP TO SPECIFIC CLASSES

    V       RELATIONSHIP TO MATERIAL-MODIFYING CLASSES WHICH INCLUDE FEEDING OR
    INDETERMINATE-LENGTH* WORK

    VI      RELATIONSHIP TO OTHER CLASSES WHICH INCLUDE ADVANCING OF
    INDETERMINATE-LENGTH* MATERIAL

    VII     RELATIONSHIP TO OTHER MATERIAL HANDLING CLASSES

    VIII    RELATIONSHIP TO CLASSES WHICH INCLUDE SUBCOMBINATIONS UTILIZABLE IN
    ADVANCING INDETERMINATE LENGTH* MATERIAL

    IX      NUMERICAL INDEX TO CLASSES REFERRED TO ABOVE.

    I       INTRODUCTORY NOTES

    (11)    References under each section have been assigned coordinating nomen
    clature.  Every reference is given a two digit number in which the tens
    digit is the Arabic equivalent of the Roman numeral applied to that section
    in which the reference is listed.

    (12)    The classes referred to in notes 52, 62 and 82 below have been
    grouped according to common subject matter and a short index of the
    groupings made appears in the first few lines of each note.

    (13)    In the class definition and in the subclass definitions, terms
    which are followed by an asterisk (*) will be found to be defined in
    section III, DEFINITION OF TERMS.

    II      SUBJECT MATTER AND SCOPE OF THE CLASS

    This is the residual class of inventions directed to a process or apparatus
    for handling indeterminate-length* material in one of the following ways:

    (A)     moving such material in a direction generally along said length
    dimension, or,

    (B)     sensing such material (which material is disclosed as moving as in
    part (A) above) and imparting additional movement to, or otherwise
    controlling movement of, said material responsive to said sensing, or,

    (C)     threading a new portion of such material into or through material
    moving apparatus of the type defined in part (A) above, or,

    (D)     constraining such material through a certain path of movement
    relative to a disclosed material moving apparatus of the type defined in
    part (A) above, including insuring contact of the material with said
    apparatus.

    (21)    Note.  With certain exceptions, stated below in subclasses 11, 91+,
    and 125+, there are no means recited in the claims contacting the leading
    end nor the trailing end of such material, nor is the leading or trailing
    end of material utilized to effect movement thereof.

    (22)    Note.  Patents placed as originals in this class (226) usually
    disclose means to advance material to a material modifying machine or from
    such machine to a destination.  The mere naming of the material modifying
    machine or of the destination, in a claim, will not serve to exclude a
    patent including such a claim from this class.  See section IV for further
    notes to work treating classes which include feeding means.

    (23)    Note.  This class (226) is intended as the repository for patents
    disclosing the feeding material to a station where an operation* is
    performed on the material.  It is not intended as the locus for original
    placement of disclosures wherein the material being advanced is part of a
    machine, and that material will itself operate or help to operate on work.

    III     DEFINITIONS OF TERMS

    CARRIER
    (n) as used in this class, a member on which a material engaging part is
    slidingly or rotatably (including pivotally) mounted, which member entirely
    supports the part against gravity while allowing relative movement between
    the member and the part.  This term is applied only to that member of a
    device which is immediately connected to the material-engaging part.  A
    member can be a complex of parts which move integrally together.

    DISPENSER
    (n) a device which moves material to an operative (e.g, a person who
    operates such device and who will use the material).  (Compare with Feeder).

    FEED
    (v)-to move material to an operation*. (n)- the act of moving material to
    an operation*.

    FEEDER
    (n) a device which moves material to an operation*.  (Compare with
    Dispenser).

    FEED-ROLL
    a roll* which is disclosed as driven so as to impart motion to the material
    whereby the material is moved to an operation.

    GRIPPER
    (n) as used in this class, a movable device comprising a plurality of
    substantially opposed surface elements (commonly termed jaws) relatively
    movable toward and away from a common line or plane (to engage
    corresponding opposed areas on material) and hold such material
    frictionally to the elements, whereby additional movement imparted to the
    elements in a material advancing direction will also be imparted to the
    material.

    INDETERMINATE LENGTH
    an extent of material having the characteristic that the longitudinal
    dimension of the material is effectively infinite insofar as can be
    determined from the claimed structure for advancing such material.  The
    term applies to an extent of material in which the distance between the
    ends is irrelevant to the manner of, or structure for, handling and/or
    moving such material. Thus, except for the lead-end threaders of subclass
    91, the leading or trailing end of the material is not utilized by the
    claimed means for moving the material, nor recognized in a claimed method
    of moving.  The term as used in this class also applies to material which
    is formed in a closed loop, (i.e., the leading end and the trailing end of
    definite length material have been joined together).  However, the lead end
    may be used in stopping the material to effect intermittent advance as in
    subclasses 125+, and a trailing end (effected by a break or depletion of
    material) may be sensed to stop operation of the advancer.

    LATERAL
    as used in this class, the term refers to that direction simultaneously
    perpendicular to the longitudinal* direction of movement of a web* and
    parallel to the surface of the web.

    LONGITUDINAL
    as used in this class, the term refers to the direction along the length of
    the indeterminate-length* material.

    MATERIAL
    the work, stock, web, strand or other interconnected stuff which is being
    advanced.

    OPERATION
    (n) a performing of work or a doing of an act.  Exemplary operations are:
    cutting, recording, viewing, dyeing.

    RECESSED-ROLL
    a roll* having a radially stepped periphery, the radially outward portion
    engaging material and the radially inward portion(s) not engaging the
    material.

    ROLL
    a shaft-mounted rotatable body, usually cylindrical, a portion of the
    periphery of which engages material. Although a roll is usually
    cylindrical, the term is used in this class to include a conical, truncated
    conical, or spherical body, a portion of the periphery of which engages the
    material to be moved.

    ROLL-COUPLE
    a group of at least two rolls*, material being disposed therebetween in
    simultaneous tangential and/or peripheral engagement with all rolls, the
    roll(s) on one side of the material counter-rotating relative to the
    roll(s) on the other side of such material.  An example of a roll-couple
    comprising more than two elements, is a plurality of equal-diameter rolls
    co-axially mounted, all of which rolls are opposed by a single, parallel
    roll.

    STRAND
    material having a cross-section (transverse of the longitudinal* dimension)
    of substantially similar width and depth dimensions (compare with Web).
    Exemplary strand materials are:  rod, tube, cordage (i.e., rope, cable,
    etc.) chain, filaments, yarn, wire.

    WEB
    material having a cross-section (transverse of the longitudinal* dimension)
    of relatively thin dimension perpendicular to a relatively wide dimension
    (compare with Strand).  Thus, the material  has two side edges defining its
    lateral* boundaries, and two surfaces defining its other cross-sectional
    boundaries.  Exemplary web materials are:  fabric, screening, strip.

    IV      RELATIONSHIP TO SPECIFIC CLASSES

    (41)    Note.  The following classes (or subclasses within a class, where
    noted) have been screened for patents classifiable in this class (226) on
    the basis of the lines set out below in Note (42):

    83,     (Cutting)

    140,    (Wireworking)

    225     (Severing by Tearing or

            Breaking)

    254,    (Implements of Apparatus for

            Applying Pushing or PullingForce).

    312,    (Supports:  Cabinet Structure) subclasses 34.1+

    400, (Typewriting Machines) subclasses 611+ Except as amplified below in
    this section the line between this class (226) and the above classes is as
    stated in the general relationships set forth in section V through VIII
    below.

    Other classes listed below in sections V through VIII may contain patents
    claiming feeder subcombinations in subclasses not investigated as of the
    date of this publication.  Such feeder subcombination patents will remain
    as presently classified until screening of these subclasses has been
    accomplished.  The lines formerly existing between this class (226) and the
    "other" classes referred to above has not been changed, except as noted in
    (42) Note.

    (42)    Note.  The relationship of this class (226) to classes which
    warrant specific mention, is as follows:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, includes in subclasses 732+ the feeding
    fabric or cord through a distance measuring device. Subclasses 740+
    specifically provides for a stopping of the fabric or cord in response to
    predetermined rotation of a roll which is in contact with the fabric or
    cord.  Thus, this class (226) will only take, as an original patent, one
    claiming a device in which a measuring element is moved by contact with
    another part of the device and not by contact with the material.

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, includes some structures similar to those
    found in this class (226).  The previous line between class 198 and the web
    feeding class remains unchanged.  Patents disclosing the feeding of
    material (i.e., to an operating station), will be placed in this class
    (226). Patents disclosing movement of material for the purpose of
    transporting such material will remain in Class 198.

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, includes the combination of
    material-moving or material-guiding means in combination with a tearing
    edge.  Any recitation in a claim of such an edge is sufficient to cause
    placement of a patent including such a recitation originally in Class 225
    and will bar placement of the patent in this class (226).

     242,   Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, for more than a nominal supply or
    take-up coil structure (e.g., a support for such a coil, a cooperative
    relationship between a tension or exhaust detector and reel driving or reel
    stopping means, etc.), subclasses

    147+, a residual locus for a strand* tensioning device,

    157+, a residual locus for a strand* guide,

    377, for a reeling device with a spring motor having a particular guide
    structure,


    410+, a residual locus for a tension control or brake, or

    615+, a residual locus for a material* guide or guard.

            (Class 226 currently provides for an "orbitally traveling
    material*-engaging surface(s)" in subclasses 168+ and "with means to retard
    material* movement (e.g., "tensioner")" in subclass 195 which conflict with
    Class 242 subclasses 147+, 157+, 410+, and subclasses 615+. Plans are
    underway to resolve this conflict by making Class 242 subclasses 147+,
    157+, 410+ and 615+ the residual location for their respective features,
    with Class 226 subclasses 168+ and 195 being limited to their respective
    features combined with a material* feeder*. This has already been resolved
    for Class 226 subclass 196.1.)

    270,    Sheet-Material Associating includes movement of web material to a
    claimed web associating operation, in subclass 52.  The mere naming of "an
    associating station", (or equivalent term) will not bar placement of an
    original patent in this class (226). However, claimed recitation of such
    station plus inherent associating structure (e.g., "turning bars", "guide
    bars", etc.,) wherein it is clear that plural webs are directed to a common
    line of travel, will be reason for placing an original patent so claimed in
    Class 270.  A patent claiming the movement of plural webs out of a common
    line of travel into plural lines of travel, or claiming a subcombination of
    plural guide bars disclosed as for the above-stated purpose, will be placed
    as an original in Class 270.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, includes movement of sheets to an
    operation or from an operation.  The line between this class (226) and
    Class 271 is based on disclosure of the material acted upon.  Patents which
    clearly disclose feed or delivery of sheet-like articles only, will be
    placed in Class 271, even though such structure is capable of feeding web
    material. Original patents which clearly disclose movement of web material
    as well as sheets and claim means which is capable of moving either, will
    be placed in this class (226).

    281,    Books, Strips, and Leaves, includes patents directed to a casing
    having supported therein a roll of web material, and a writing platen over
    which such material is trained.  Movement of such material may be as a
    result of direct contact of the operative's hand with the material or as a
    result of a roller manipulated by the operative; but the environment,
    especially the provision of a casing and a writing platen, will be reason
    for placing a patent claiming such features in Class 281.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, includes continuous strip towel
    dispensers in subclasses 34.1+.  This class (226) will take an original
    patent claiming means for positively moving such indeterminate-length*
    strip provided that the supply roll and its mounting is not specifically
    recited (See line between this class (226) and Class 242).  A patent
    claiming a device wherein the strip is directly grasped to pull the strip
    out of the cabinet, will be placed as an original in Class 312.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, includes the combination of material
    moving means and an optical system.  This class (226) will take an original
    patent claiming a device for moving material (e.g., a film) past a named
    "lens", "shutter", "gate", or equivalent motion picture means.  However;
    the recitation in a claim of mechanism for operating such named element, or
    a plurality of such elements recited as to establish optical or mechanical
    cooperation between such elements as to make an optical system, will bar
    original placement in this class (226).  For example a patent claiming "a
    gate and means for moving the gate" or " a gate and a lens" will be placed
    originally in Class 352.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 14+ includes stock lead
    end pullers and stock-end face pushers.  Patents disclosing lead end
    pulling of material have been placed in this class (226) when the purpose
    disclosed is for threading into a material moving means within a class
    definition.  Where the lead end pulling is for feeding (to a work station),
    patents claiming such devices have been placed in Class 414.

    462,    Books, Strips, and Leaves, for manifolding  includes patents
    directed to a casing having supported therein a manifold set (which is the
    name applied to a plurality of strips alternately interleaved with carbon
    strip) and a writing platen over which such material is trained. Placement
    of a patent in Class 282 will be on the basis of the environment, including
    the writing platen, or on the basis of claims directed to the manifold set.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, includes
    power transmission systems using an endless belt, and structure for
    driving, guiding, tensioning, or shifting a belt.  See particularly the (4)
    Note in section II of the class definition of Class 474 for the line
    between Class 226 and Class 474.



    (43)    Note.  The relationship between this class (226) and other classes
    set out in section IV through VIII have been arranged so that a
    relationship set out in the first appearing section shall govern over a
    relationship set out in any of the later appearing sections in the event of
    any apparent discrepancy.

    V       RELATIONSHIP TO MATERIAL-MODIFYING CLASSES WHICH INCLUDE FEEDING OF
    INDETERMINATE-LENGTH* WORK

    (51)    Note.  The following considerations will govern the decision as to
    original placement of a patent in this class (226) or in one of the subject
    classes:

    (A)     This class (226) takes original patents directed to apparatus for
    feeding material in combination with means to modify, treat or operate on
    such material only if said means is recited as a named means or element,
    and only if said means is not claimed as moving or operating in timed or
    synchronous relationship to the operation of the feeding apparatus.  For
    example, any one of the following recitations in a claim will not (in and
    of itself,) bar original placement in this class:  "press", "cutter",
    "dryer", (or "drying chamber"), "recorder", "impression cylinder" "wrapping
    machine", or "transducer head".  Claim language directed to a nominal
    combination expressed as an operation station (e.g., cutter, press,
    printer, etc.), spatially located with respect to a feeder also will not
    bar original placement in this class (226).  However, the following
    recitations in a claim will be considered as details which will bar
    original placement in this class, and will be reason for placing a patent
    claiming such details in the appropriate treating class; "a rotary printing
    press", "a reciprocating cutter", "a heated drying chamber"; or operative
    structure such as "means to synchronize the operation of a cutter and a
    feed means", "means to stop tape feed as the recorder head is moved out of
    recording position".  (It should be understood that the above words and
    phrases are exemplary, and that equivalent terms will be given the same
    effect where appropriate).

    (B)     This class does not take original patents claiming processes for
    feeding material in combination with any process for modifying material
    even though such modifying step is broadly recited (e.g., "and treating the
    material").  Patents reciting such combinations will be placed as originals
    in the appropriate class or suclass pertaining to the treating process on
    the basis of the material modifying step or steps.

    (52)    Note.  The locus of patents disclosing web or strand feeding
    combinations classified in the subject classes is as follows:

    (A)     Classes pertaining to Textile Arts;

    (B)     Classes pertaining to Printing Communications and Analogous Arts;

    (C)     Classes pertaining to Article Manufacturing Arts;

    (D)     Classes pertaining to other Material-Working or Material-Treating
    Arts.

            (The specific subclasses numbered below, in the respective classes,
    are to be considered merely indicative of the art in the class, and should
    not be considered as exhaustive).

    (A)     Textile Arts:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 151+.

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses .2+, .48 and 204+.

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclasses 71+ for structure for
    feeding a cloth web while simultaneously stretching or otherwise expanding
    the cloth. See, for example:  subclass 71 (the principal subclass) for web
    feed means in series, each successively accelerated whereby stretchingly to
    tension the web (compare with class (226) subclass 195); 74+ for web
    condition- responsive means to control the simultaneous feed and stretch
    operation (compare with Class 226 subclasses 10+; particularly Class 226
    subclasses 15+, since edge detection and registration control is frequently
    involved); subclasses 97 and 99+ for means simultaneously to stretch and
    feed the cloth web by contact with orbitally traveling surface means.

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclasses 185+ and 191.

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclasses 44+.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 90, 91 and
    326.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclasses 125+ and 128+.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 97+, 159+ and 244+.

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, subclasses 18+ and
    20+.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 97+.

    (B)     Printing and Communications and Analogous Arts:

    101,    Printing, appropriate subclasses (see 101 schedule).

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 672+, and other appropriate
    subclasses.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 42.

    235,    Registers, subclass 60.51.

    281,    Books, Strips, and Leaves,    subclasses 8 and 11.

    346,    Recorders, subclass 136.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 88+
    and other appropriate subclasses.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 258+,
    particularly subclass 259.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 223+ and 611+.

    462,    Books, Strips, and Leaves, for manifolding appropriate subclasses.



    (C)     Article Manufacturing Arts:

    29,     Metal Working, appropriate subclasses, (see schedule).

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 64+ and 389.

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclasses 24+.

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses.

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclasses 22+, 35+ and 75+.

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 60+.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclasses 80 and 82+.

    413,    Sheet Metal Container Making, subclasses 42, 45+ and 56+.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, appropriate subclasses.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, appropriate subclass.



    (D)     Other Material-Working or Material-Treating Arts:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation,  subclasses 236+.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 611+ and
    other appropriate subclasses.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 90+ for process of forming sheet
    glass including advancing material of indeterminate length, and subclasses
    193+ for glass sheet drawing apparatus including sheet advancing means.

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses.

    83,     Cutting, Appropriate subclasses.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 155+.

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 47+ and 303+.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 9, 15, 64, and
    122.

    140,    Wireworking, subclasses 59+.

    142,    Wood Turning, subclass 54.

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 245.

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, appropriate subclasses.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclass 80.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    appropriate subclasses.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 102+.

    270,    Sheet-Material Associating, subclasses 5, 10+, 41+, 43+, and other
    appropriate subclasses.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, especially
    subclasses 67+ and 69+ for material advancing means combined with a tool of
    that class type.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 66, 71, 83.1, 113, 224, and 377.

    432,    Heating, subclass 59 for a structure heating sheet, web or strand
    material by advancing it through a heating zone.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclass 182 for means to feed a sheet
    through a toy film burster.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 188+, 207, and 139 for an abrading machine
    with a roller work feed; subclasses 331+ for a work feeder, generally, for
    an abrading device.

    VI      RELATIONSHIP TO OTHER CLASSES WHICH INCLUDE ADVANCING OF
    INDETERMINATE-LENGTH* MATERIAL

    (61)    Note.  The subject classes referred to in this section include
    patents directed to the combination of advancing such material plus an
    operation other than a treatment of, or a working on, such material (i.e.,
    the material is not changed during its movement).  This class (226) will
    not take original patents disclosing the combination referred to above, if
    such material is disclosed as being an intimate part of the apparatus (or
    method of using the apparatus), or is claimed in combination with elements
    not performing a material advancing function.  For example, a patent
    disclosing a cable, one or more sheaves, cable-moving means, and a load on
    the cable to be moved thereby, will be placed in an appropriate "pulling"
    class, listed in (62) Note, paragraph (A), on the basis that the cable and
    its mover are intimate parts of the pulling apparatus.  Similarly, moving
    picture projecting apparatus (or method involving use of such apparatus)
    will be placed in one of the "viewing" classes listed in (62) Note,
    paragraph (B) on the basis of claimed projection lens plus film gate
    (comprising an optical system).  The class lines between this class (226)
    and the subject classes (especially those classes listed in (62) Note
    paragraph (C) are more fully discussed in section IV of this definition.

    (62)    Note.  The locus of patents disclosing combinations classified in
    the subject classes is as follows:

    (A)     Classes pertaining to Pulling or Hoisting Arts;

    (B)     Classes pertaining to Viewing or Exhibiting or Analogous Arts;

    (C)     Other classes pertaining to Advancing of Indeterminate Length*
    Material.

            (The specific subclasses listed below should not be considered as
    exhaustive of material advancing).

    (A)     Pulling Arts:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 104.31+.

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 302, 303, 394+, and 398.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 27.4.

    104,    Railways, subclasses 173+ and 202+.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 77.1+.

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclasses 235, 251+, and 404+.

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclasses 76+.

    221,    Article Dispensing,  subclasses 71+.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 47+, 199+, and 264+.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 74+ and 82.1+.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, appropriate
    subclasses.



    (B)     Viewing Arts:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, appropriate subclasses.

    84,     Music, subclasses 128+, 132 and 136+.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 42.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 166+.

    355,    Photocopying, subclasses 97+ and 104+.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 88+
    and other appropriate subclasses.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 258+,
    particularly subclass 259.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 16+ and 361+ for document handling.



    (C)     Other Arts Including Material Advancing:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 155 and 156.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 38  and 39+.

    270,    Sheet-Material Associating,  appropriate subclasses.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 34.1+.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclasses 59, 68, and other appropriate subclasses.

    VII     RELATIONSHIP TO OTHER MATERIAL HANDLING CLASSES

    (71)    Note.  The subject classes referred to in this section include
    original patents directed to a moving means capable, as disclosed, of
    moving various types of material.  This class (226) is the locus of
    inventions whose sole disclosed use is the advancing of
    indeterminate-length* material.  Other appropriate classes referred to in
    this section will take patents wherein the disclosure is vague, or is
    specific to handling of various types of material.  It should be noted that
    specific exceptions to this last-mentioned line are provided for in section
    IV.

    (72)    Note.  The locus of patents disclosing material handling
    combinations is as follows:

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, appropriate subclasses.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 71+ and other appropriate subclasses.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, appropriate subclasses.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, appropriate subclasses.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, appropriate subclasses.

    453,    Coin Handling, appropriate subclasses.

    VIII    RELATIONSHIP TO CLASSES WHICH INCLUDE SUBCOMBINATIONS UTILIZABLE IN
    ADVANCING INDETERMINATE LENGTH*  MATERIAL

    (81)    Note.  This class does not take original patents directed only to
    subcombinations of general utility in either this class (226) or other
    classes, which subcombinations are specifically provided for in other
    classes.  Specific exceptions to this line may appear in section IV above.
    A patent, to be placed originally in this class, should claim more than the
    subcombination, that is, it should recite the means for, or a step of,
    advancing of material as the end result, and/or the cooperation of the
    subcombination with the material-advancer.

    (82)    Note.  The locus of patents disclosing subcombinations which are
    utilizable in advancing indeterminate length* material, listed below in
    groups pertaining to common subject matter, is as follows:

    (A)     Classes including subclasses pertaining to detection of breaking or
    exhaustion of indeterminate length material.

    (B)     Classes including subclasses pertaining to means to detect other
    conditions of indeterminate length material.

    (C)     Classes including subclasses pertaining to a driven feed-roll.

    (D)     Classes including subclasses pertaining to active, but nondriven
    means (e.g., a roll, or a pulley) for guiding material.

    (E)     Classes including subclasses pertaining to passive means for
    guiding material.

    (F)     Classes including subclasses pertaining to a material-movement
    retarding element (e.g., a "tensioner").



    In general, the classes listed fall into one of two categories; (a) those
    combination classes having therein subclasses pertaining specifically to
    subcombinations which are also subcombinations for this class (or
    pertaining to combinations found in this class (226) excluded herefrom
    because of the combinational aspect of the class wherein the subclass is
    located), or (b) those classes which are of themselves subcombination
    classes, the devices of which are of general utility.  The classes referred
    to as falling within (a) above may be identified by their having been
    discussed or listed in sections V, VI and VII.  Thus the classes referred
    to as falling within (b) above may be identified by their being listed only
    in this section (VIII).

    (A)     Detection of material breaking or exhaustion:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber preparation, subclasses .25+.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 525 includes
    control of heater by material tension and/or breaking. 72,Metal Deforming,
    subclass 5.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 61.18.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 29, 37+, 534+, and 563+.



    (B)     Other detection of material:

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclasses 51.4+ includes controlled
    weft-adjusting, subclass 51.5 includes a photo-electric scanner, and
    subclasses 74+ for apparatus for expanding; e.g., stretching (or spreading
    in subclasses 75+, thereunder) running length webs of cloth which include
    cloth-condition-responsive operation control.

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclasses 185 and 194 include tension
    control, subclass 189 includes a pivoted detector to control stopping of a
    fabric weaving machine.

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 133 includes work-driven means
    for measuring a length of material and stopping the movement of the
    material responsive to such measurement.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 80+.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclasses 158+.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 10+.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 37+ includes subjecting a
    specimen directly to fluid pressure (positive or negative), to determine
    properties of the specimen, and see especially subclass 37.7 where the
    specimen is sheet or filament material.

    83,     Cutting, includes material sensing to control work feed to a
    cutting operation, see appropriate subclasses therein.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 672+ includes "automatic control",
    hence inherently provides a detector.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, includes weft-thread feeling mechanism in
    subclasses 269+ and 370.1+, warp-thread detecting in subclasses 354, 355+
    and 368, and tension sensing to regulate speed of takeup in subclass 311.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 125+ includes stop
    mechanism under control of material (e.g., indeterminate-length web).

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.13+
    includes electrical switch detector means actuated by running length
    material.

    242,    Winding, Tension, or Guiding, includes detector or stop means for a
    thread winding machine in subclasses 28+ and 36+, for a cordage winder in
    subclass 49, for a convolute winding machine in subclasses 534+, and in an
    unwinding machine in subclasses 563+.  The tensioning means of subclasses
    410+ tend to inherently include tension detecting means to enable the
    tension to be controlled.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 548, includes means for detecting and
    controlling a web, strand, strip, or sheet, subclasses 555+ and 559.01+
    include a coded record, web, strand, strip, or sheet in the optical system
    and photocell circuitry, subclasses 566+ include the detection of a coded
    record, web, strand, strip, or sheet.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 6+ include means to
    control an electric motor system in response to the tension in a run of
    material driven by such system.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 675+ include electric
    automatic web, film, or strip responsive indicating systems.



    (C)     Driven feed roll:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclass 143.

    72,     Metal Deforming, in appropriate subclasses involving the treatment
    of indeterminate length material, includes work feeding or guiding or tool
    adjusting means.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the notes thereunder.



    (D)     Nondriven roll:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 210+ includes sash cord guide
    means.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 126 includes a roll
    squeezer mounting.

    72,     Metal Deforming, as indicated in the reference thereto in (C) above.

    100,    Presses, includes roll adjustment means in subclasses 168+ and roll
    pairs in subclass 176.

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, subclasses 35+ includes
    a roller way.



    (E)     Passive guide means:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 2.1+ for a brushing or lining
    thimble for an opening or socket, or subclasses 108+ for a ferrule, ring,
    or thimble applied to the exterior opening of a rod, pipe, conduit,
    strand*, or other device.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 242 includes
    a chamber seal.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 24 for a line
    guide or tip for a fishing rod.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 352+
    includes strand guarding or guiding structure.

    72,     Metal Deforming, as indicated in the reference thereto in (C)
    above.  Subclasses 250+ include means to handle or guide work in the type
    of rolling there provided for.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 373 and 438+ include means to guide moving work.

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 136+ for a work manipulating guide combined with
    a specified sewing process or apparatus, or subclass 302 for a thread
    guiding or handling means combined with a specified sewing process or
    apparatus.

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, subclass 88 includes a guide for
    running length work.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, includes a guide or guard: in
    subclasses 326.4, 346+, and 348 combined with a film or tape cartridge; in
    subclasses 332+ with a tape or film threading arrangement leading to or
    from a coil; in subclasses 273+, 377, and 397+ combined with reel
    structure; in subclasses 548+ combined with a convolute winding machine; in
    subclass 566 combined with an unwinding machine, subclasses 615+ for
    running material, and subclasses 157+ for a strand guide, per se.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 389+ for devices or members for guiding load-pulling cable.

    289,    Knots and Knot Tying, subclass 15 includes a cord guide.

    396,    Photography, subclass 646 for photographic fluid treating apparatus
    which includes a film guide.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclass 248 includes an ink ribbon guide.

    (F)     "Tensioner":

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing,   subclass 185 and 194.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclass 146.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 151, 183 and 205 include a method of or
    means for tensioning running length work in connection with a deflecting or
    rolling operation thereon.

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, subclass 61.

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 59, 97 and 254+.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 212+ and 256+.

    188,    Brakes, includes a strand brake in subclass 65.1+, a rod brake in
    subclass 67, and a strand-engaging, speed-responsive brake operator in
    subclass 188.

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, includes a brake or tensioner in
    subclasses 51+, 73+, 79, 82+, and 106.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 410+ and 147+.

    IX      NUMERICAL INDEX OF CLASSES REFERRED TO IN PREVIOUS NOTES.

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers: Section A, (52) Note

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning: Section A, (62) Note

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware: Section D, (82) Note, Section E, (82) Note

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation: Section A, (52) Note; Section D, (52)
    Note; Section A, (82) Note; Section C, (82) Note

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing: Section A, (52) Note; Section B, (82)
    Note

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing: Section A, (52) Note; Section B, (82)
    Note; Section F, (82) Note

    29,     Metal Working: Section C, (52) Note; Section C, (82) Note

    33,     Geometrical Instruments: (42) Note; Section B, (82) Note

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids: Section D, (52) Note;
    Section A, (82) Note; Section E, (82) Note

    37,     Excavating: Section A, (62) Note

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing: Section A, (52) Note

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting: Section B, (62) Note

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying: Section A, (62) Note;
    Section E, (82) Note

    53,     Package Making:  Section C, (52) Note

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining: Section A, (52) Note;
    Section B, (82) Note; Section E, (82) Note

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making: Section C, (52) Note

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting:  Section A, (52) Note; Section B, (82) Note;
    Section F, (82) Note

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus: Section A, (52) Note; Section
    D, (82) Note

    72,     Metal Deforming:  Section D, (52) Note; Sections A, B, C, D, E, F,
    (82) Note

    73,     Measuring and Testing: Section B, (82) Note

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making: Section C, (52) Note

    83,     Cutting: (41); Note Section D, (52) Note; Section B, (82) Note;
    Section E, (82) Note

    84,     Music: Section B, (62) Note

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making: Section A, (52)
    Note; Section F, (82) Note

    100,    Presses: Section D, (52) Note; Section D, (82) Note

    101,    Printing: Section B, (52) Note

    104,    Railways: Section A, (62) Note

    112,    Sewing: Section D, (52) Note; Section E, (82) Note; Section F, (82)
    Note

    118,    Coating Apparatus: Section B, (52) Note; Section B, (82) Note

    131,    Tobacco: Section C, (52) Note

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids: Section D, (52) Note

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving: Section A, (52) Note; Section B, (82) Note;
    Section F, (82) Note

    140,    Wirework: (41) Note; Section D, (52) Note

    142,    Wood Turning: Section D, (52) Note

    144,    Woodworking: Section D, (52) Note

    166,    Wells: Section A (62) Note

    178,    Telegraphy: Section B, (52) Note; Section B, (62) Note

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or
    Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclasses 235, 251+, 404+:  Section A, (62) Note

    188,    Brakes: Section F, (82) Note

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control: Section B, (82) Note

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways: (72) Note; Section D,
    (82) Note

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven: (42) Note; (72) Note

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers: Section A, (82) Note;
    Section B, (82) Note

    212,    Traversing Hoists: Section A, (62) Note

    219,    Electric Heating: Section C, (62) Note

    221,    Article Dispensing: Section A, (62) Note; (72) Note

    222,    Dispensing: (72) Note

    225,    Severing by Tearing Or Breaking: (41) Note; (42) Note; Section D,
    (52) Note; Section E, (82) Note; Section F, (82) Note

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus: Section C, (52) Note

    235,    Registers: Section B, (52) Note

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding: (42) Note; Section C, (62) Note;
    Section A, (82) Note; Section B, (82) Note; Section E, (82) Note; Section
    F, (82) Note

    250,    Radiant Energy: Section B, (82) Note

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force: (41)
    Note; Section A, (62) Note; Section E, (82) Note

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus: Section D, (52) Note

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus: Section D, (52) Note

    270,    Sheet-Material Associating:  (42) Note; Section C, (62) Note;
    Section D, (52) Note

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering: (42) Note; (72) Note

    281,    Books, Strips, and Leaves: (42) Note; Section B, (52) Note

    289,    Knots and Knot Tying:  Section E, (82) Note

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements:  Section A, (62) Note

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure: (41) Note; (42) Note; Section C, (62)
    Note

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes: Section
    C, (62) Note

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems:  Section B, (82) Note

    340,    Communications:  Electrical: Section B, (82) Note

    346,    Recorders: Section B, (52) Note

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures: (42) Note; Section B, (62) Note

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, Section B, (52)
    Note; Section B, (62) Note

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, Section B, (52) Note;
    Section B, (62) Note

    396,    Photography: 82E

    400,    Typewriting Machines: (41) Note; Section B (52) Note, Section E,
    (82) Note

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current: (72) Note

    414,    Material or Article Handling: (42) Note; (72) Note

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys:  Section D, (52) Note

    451,    Abrading: Section D, (52) Note

    453,    Coin Handling: (72) Note

    462,    Books, Strips, and Leaves for Manifolding: (42) Note; Section B,
    (52) Note

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus:  Section C, (52) Note

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components: (42) Note;
    Section A, (62) Note


CLS 226/1
TXT Method under the class definition.

    (1)     Note.  See section V, (52) Note, of the Class Definitions for
    considerations relating to a feeding process in combination with a material
    modifying step or steps.


CLS 226/2
TXT Method under subclass 1 in which is recited the step of aligning material
    with respect to a predetermined point (fixed or movable) either (1)
    transversely* or (2) longitudinally* of the direction of feed of the
    material.

    (1)     Note.  In patents wherein the material is disclosed as stopped
    during the operation it is clear, because of the fact of stopping, that
    there is a particular duration of time in which the material is aligned
    with a fixed point.  However, the disclosed alignment of material is not
    limited to alignment of the material with respect only to a fixed point.
    In the event that continuously moving material is operated on during
    movement thereof, especially in such arts as printing or cutting,
    longitudinal registration involves alignment of a particular point or zone
    of the material with respect to a particular reference point or zone on the
    operating machine during only a particular instant of time, during which
    instant a moving operating element of the machine is also aligned with
    respect to the same reference point on the machine.  Thus, the moving point
    of the material is in registry with the moving element of the machine. In
    those disclosures, wherein an index (e.g., a printed spot, a perforation,
    etc.) is provided on the material, longitudinal registration, as disclosed,
    involves sensing of the index, comparing the signal produced by the sensing
    with reference to the moving operating element, and correcting the speed of
    the material (or of the element) to effect the registration as defined.
    The operating element may be broadly recited in the claims of a patent
    placed originally in this class (see section V, 52 (A) Note).  Patents
    disclosing structure to perform longitudinal registration are to be found
    in subclasses 27+ and structure to perform lateral registration are to be
    found in subclasses 15+.

    (2)     Note.  Correction of material speed, not responsive to material
    indicia, but responsive to undesired speed changes, is related in concept
    to index-responsive speed correction, and patents disclosing structure to
    perform such speed correction are to be found in subclasses 24+ except
    subclasses 27+.

    (3)     Note.  An original patent disclosing correction of the speed of the
    material and, alternatively, the speed of the operating element, and
    claiming correction of speed, without specifying in the claims which speed
    is corrected, is properly placed in this class (226) in this subclasses 2+
    as processes or in the appropriate apparatus subclasses 24+.  A patent
    which discloses correction of the speed of either the operating element
    station; or, a patent which discloses correction of the speed of the
    material and of the element station; will regardless of how claimed, be
    placed in the operating class such as Class 101 (Printing) or Class 83
    (Cutting), in appropriate subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24+,    for analogous apparatus and see (2) Note above.


CLS 226/3
TXT Method under subclass 2 in which the aligning is laterally* of the
    direction of movement of the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    for analogous apparatus.


CLS 226/4
TXT Method under subclass 1 in which is recited a step of feeding* by one
    feeder* and another step of feeding by another feeder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108+,   for analogous apparatus.


CLS 226/5
TXT Method under subclass 1 in which is recited a step of removing material
    from a material mover.

    (1)     Note.  Cross-reference copies of patents which disclose "stripper"
    apparatus have been placed herein so that a search may be started here for
    both method and apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     for apparatus to strip material from a material-advancing sprocket.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses for a method or a means for
    handling work or product in a metal shaping apparatus.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 111+ for a cutting device, provided with means
    to strip a product from a cutting tool.

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, subclass 24 for a stripper in
    combination with a stationary blade.


CLS 226/6
TXT Methods under subclass 1 in which is recited a step of moving material
    having variations in the shape, thickness or cross-section recurring
    therein along its direction length, by applying the moving force to said
    variations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52+,    for analogous apparatus.


CLS 226/7
TXT Method under subclass 1 in which is recited a step of advancing material by
    the use of flowing substance (e.g., gas, liquid or discrete, finely divided
    particles), movement being imparted to said substance in the desired
    direction of advance and thereby moving the material by the substance
    impinging on the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95,     for a device in which pneumatic pressure effects adherence of
    material to a material advancer.

    97.1+,  for analogous apparatus capable of performing the method of this
    subclass (7).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles: Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 279+
    threading up apparatus or process that may use fluid current to advance the
    material*.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 22 and 24 for analogous method in combination
    with severing means.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, for apparatus and methods conveying
    solid material or articles which are guided or supported to travel along a
    path by means of or with assistance of a fluid current.


CLS 226/8
TXT Method under subclass 1 in which is recited a step of moving material in
    (1) a step-by-step manner or (2) a manner to move an increment of material
    and stop such movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120+,   for analogous apparatus; and see search notes therein.


CLS 226/9
TXT Device under the class definition provided with detection means for sensing
    a programme, and with mechanism, actuated by said detection means, for
    regulating a part which stops, or guides, or moves the material.

    (1)     Note.  A patent claiming the control of an auxiliary programme tape
    itself as well as the control of indeterminate length material, in response
    to indicia on such tape, is placed in this subclass (9).  A patent claiming
    control of the movement of only the programme tape itself, in response to
    such indicia, will be placed in subclasses 10+ below.  A patent claiming
    movement of a control tape will be placed in this class in an appropriate
    subclass, even though there is disclosure (unclaimed) of mechanism which is
    controlled by such tape.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 7 for similar apparatus combined with a
    metal-deforming means.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 76.1+ for similar apparatus combined with
    cutting means.

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), subclasses 25+ for similar
    apparatus combined with selective cutting apparatus.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, appropriate subclasses for similar apparatus
    combined with a typewriter.


CLS 226/10
TXT Device under the class definition provided with detection means for sensing
    a condition of the advancing material, which condition is related to the
    movement of said material, and with mechanism actuated by said detection
    means (i.e., "control means") for regulating a part which stops, or guides,
    or moves the material.

    (1)     Note.  Conditions of the material within this definition include
    (but are not limited to) speed, path, position, marks or indicia and the
    presence or absence of the material.

    (2)     Note.  For a listing of classes having analogous apparatus see
    section VIII, Note 82B, of this bulletin.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for an analogous process.

    48+,    for randomly actuated stopping means.

    74,     for web-condition responsive means to stop, start, or control the
    rateof feed operation;

    75,     for structure to detect and responsively adjust the web edge
    registration (compare with Class 226, subclasses 15+);

    78,     for web condition responsive nip control (compare with Class 226,
    subclass 35).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclasses 74+ for structure for
    simultaneously feeding and stretching a web of cloth, including means
    responsive to a condition (e.g., location--compare with Class 226
    subclasses 15+) to control the operation; see for example, subclasses:

    53,     Package Making, subclass 64 for control of cover feed in a package
    making machine.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 83+ and 326
    for control of strand feeding in combination with spinning, twisting or
    twining apparatus.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 6+ for an analogous
    condition-responsive means controlling a metal-deforming means.

    83,     Cutting, particularly subclasses 72 and 360+ for similar apparatus
    in combination with cutting means.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 672+ for control of motion of work in
    coating apparatus.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 105+ and 309+ for control of feeding
    in warp manipulation apparatus and take-up control, respectively.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 125 for
    material-responsive power-stops, and see notes thereto.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, particularly subclasses 333+,
    390+, 28, 36, 514+, and 543+ for control means that regulate winding,
    tensioning or unwinding.


CLS 226/11
TXT Device under subclass 10 wherein the detector is caused to be in a first
    state by reason of the material being in the device, and is caused to be in
    a second state by reason of the material not being in the device, and is
    responsive to a change of state, from first to second, caused by rupture or
    exhaustion of the material.

    (1)     Note.  Usually, the feed mechanism is prevented from being operated
    by the regulating means.

    (2)     Note.  See section VIII, 82 Note (A), of this bulletin for the
    locus of similar apparatus in other classes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for a patent disclosing dancer detectors which inherently are
    capable of performing this function, but whose function is stated to be
    that of detecting tautness rather than break or depletion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, particularly subclasses 333+,
    390+, 28, 36, 514+, and 543+ for control means that may respond to material
    breakage or depletion.


CLS 226/12
TXT Device under subclass 10 wherein the part regulated is a means to lead the
    material to and through a material moving means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91+,    for a threading device without claimed material-responsive control
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 47.03, 332+, 532.7, and
    562.1 for threading means associated with a winding or unwinding device.


CLS 226/13
TXT Device under subclass 10 wherein the part regulated is a rotating body
    which by its inertia moderates any tendency toward speed fluctuations in a
    material-moving member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60+,    for fluctuation damping means without material-responsive control
    means.


CLS 226/14
TXT Device under subclass 10 wherein the part regulated is a festooner or part
    thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 104 and notes thereto for a definition and
    further discussion of the term "festooner".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104+,   for festooner means; and see (1) Note above.


CLS 226/15
TXT Device under subclass 10 wherein the control means acts to maintain the
    material in a predetermined longitudinal* path by moving, or preventing
    movement of, the material in a direction lateral* to the longitudinal* path
    of travel.

    (1)     Note.  An example of patents placed herein, is one which discloses
    a roller which is braked to put a sidewise-biasing drag on a web.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for an analogous method.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclasses 51.4+ and 74+ for similar
    apparatus in a napping or spreading machine.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 810 for condition responsive
    means for controlling lateral movement of an endless belt conveyor.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, particularly subclasses 534.1 and
    563.1 for lateral material control in a winding or unwinding device.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 102+ for a sensor to control operation of a shifter to correct
    belt training deviation.


CLS 226/16
TXT Device under subclass 15 wherein the longitudinal* travel of the material
    (in the direction of its length) is also regulated.

    (1)     Note.  The longitudinal movement of the material may be regulated
    by starting, stopping, or varying the rate of such material advancement
    (see definition of subclass 24).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24+,    for control of longitudinal movement only in response to material
    detection means.


CLS 226/17
TXT Device under subclass 15 wherein the material which is moved is a web* and
    the control means comprises a pair of rollers* placed for engagement with
    longitudinal* areas of opposing web surfaces closely adjacent the side
    edges of the web.

    (1)     Note.  For definition of surfaces and side edges, see definitions
    of "web", in section III of this bulletin.

    (2)     Note.  The rollers are usually positioned angularly with respect to
    the longitudinal direction of web travel.


CLS 226/18
TXT Device under subclass 15 wherein the control means comprises a machine part
    which at least partially underlies and is in contact with the material; and
    is movable with respect to the longitudinal* direction of travel of the
    material.

    (1)     Note.  An example of patents placed herein is a patent disclosing
    an oscillatory material-supporting bar which is moved angularly in response
    to the detection means whereby a sidewise bias on the material effects the
    necessary correction.


CLS 226/19
TXT Device under subclass 18 wherein the support is reciprocated laterally* of
    the material, whereby said material is shifted laterally.


CLS 226/20
TXT Devices under subclass 19 wherein the sensing means responds to light by
    varying its electrical characteristics or by generating an electric current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 548, includes means for detecting and
    controlling a web, strand, strip, or sheet, subclasses 555 and 559.01+
    include a coded record, web, strand, strip, or sheet in the optical system
    and photocell circuitry, subclasses 566+ include the detection of a coded
    record, web, strand, strip, or sheet.


CLS 226/21
TXT Device under subclass 18 wherein the support is a roll* which is
    oscillatable about an axis perpendicular to the axis of rotation of the
    roll.

    (1)     Note.  Typical patents placed in this subclass (21) disclose
    photocell detector means.


CLS 226/22
TXT Device under subclass 21 wherein the detection means senses changes in
    pressure of a gaseous fluid directed against the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for a material-responsive machine element control for a pneumatic
    pressure system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 37.7  for a pneumatic detection
    means, per se.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 82+ for pressure modulating relays which
    may detect traveling material.


CLS 226/23
TXT Device under subclass 21 wherein the detection means comprises a machine
    part, other than the support, which abuts the material, whereby said part
    is moved if the material deviated laterally* from its desired longitudinal*
    direction.


CLS 226/24
TXT Device under subclass 10 wherein the control means acts to initiate, or
    maintain, or stop or otherwise vary the longitudinal* travel of the
    material.

    (1)     Note.  For further discussion of regulation of longitudinal
    movement and registration see (1) Note of subclass 2.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for an analogous method.

    16,     for control of lateral position combined with control of
    longitudinal movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclasses 185+ and 194 for similar
    apparatus in warp preparing machines.


CLS 226/25
TXT Device under subclass 24, wherein the detection means senses a blocking,
    jamming or excessive pulling of the material.


CLS 226/26
TXT Device under subclass 24 wherein the detection means senses the
    gravitational pull on a mass of temporarily stored material.

    (1)     Note.  The patents placed herein usually disclose a material
    confining structure comprising a "J" box.

    (2)     Note.  The term "mass" does not include a free running loop of
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118.2+, for plural material-moving means having intermediate storage in a
    loop having a displaceable support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 177+ for similar apparatus in a textile treating
    machine.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, particularly subclasses 333.5,
    334.5, 413.2, 421.3, 534.2, and 563.2 for length or weight control system
    for a winding, tensioning, or unwinding device.


CLS 226/27
TXT Device under subclass 24 wherein the regulating means acts to
    longitudinally* align a particular point on the material with respect to a
    particular point in space at a particular instant of time.

    (1)     Note.  For further elaboration of the term "registration", see (1)
    Note to subclass 2.

    (2)     Note.  In this subclass 27 are found patents for devices which
    overfeed and retract.

    (3)     Note.  Some patents may disclose, but not claim, that an operating
    machine is changed in response to the signal produced by the detection
    means.

    (4)     Note.  To register material, means must be provided to indicate the
    relative position of a reference point, hence, devices herein must disclose
    two "sensing" means, although the means to indicate the relative position
    of the reference point may be only a particular part of a machine which
    controls the material-detection means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 72+ for similar apparatus combined with cutting.

    101,    Printing, appropriate subclasses for similar apparatus combined
    with printing.


CLS 226/28
TXT Device under subclass 27 wherein the material neither starts nor stops for
    the purpose of registration, but is constantly traveling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclasses 74+ for edge detection and
    responsive registration correction means for structure which simultaneously
    advances and stretches cloth webs.


CLS 226/29
TXT Device under subclass 28 wherein the material is aligned by changing its
    velocity for a short duration of time.

    (1)     Note.  Herein are, for example, patents to devices which slow the
    material by applying a braking or retarding force to slow the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for similar apparatus not effecting registration.


CLS 226/30
TXT Device under subclass 29 wherein the material is caused to move by a
    feedroll*, and the velocity change of the material is effected by changing
    the rate of rotation of said feedroll.


CLS 226/31
TXT Device under subclass 30 wherein the change in the rate of rotation of the
    feedroll* is effected by an auxiliary motive means for the feedroll.

    (1)     Note.  Exemplary patents herein are to a device with a feedroll
    driven by a main power source through differential gearing.  The ancillary
    power source rotates normally stationary gear(s) momentarily to speed up or
    slow down the feedroll.


CLS 226/32
TXT Device under subclass 27 provided with an intermittent type material moving
    apparatus (as defined in subclass 120) and the regulating means aligns the
    material by adjusting the length of material moved in each increment of
    material movement.

    (1)     Note.  Feed* stroke in the above title is considered to be either
    (1) the amount of rotation of feed rolls or (2) the length of forward
    travel of a reciprocating or oscillating gripper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139+,   for adjustable intermittent feeder means without
    material-responsive control means.


CLS 226/33
TXT Device under subclass 27 provided with means which stops the travel of the
    material* in aligned position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    for material stopping abutment for an intermittent material-mover.


CLS 226/34
TXT Device under subclass 24 wherein longitudinal travel of the material
    (effected by a material-moving force) is varied by adjusting the degree of
    moving force on the material, or by adjusting the duration of contact
    between the material and the apparatus for moving the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176+,   for similar apparatus in which the engagement is varied, but not in
    response to material condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclass 84 for similar
    roll separating apparatus.


CLS 226/35
TXT Device under subclass 34 wherein the apparatus for moving material is
    shifted to an inactive location where at contact between the material and
    the apparatus is prevented.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclass 78 for web condition
    (generally web edge location) responsive means to control the driving
    engagement of a feed roller pinch-pair which simultaneously advances and
    stretches a continuously moving cloth web.


CLS 226/36
TXT Device under subclass 24 wherein the travel of the material is varied by a
    secondary material moving means, which secondary means is normally out of
    contact with the material and is brought into contact with the material in
    response to the sensing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113+,   for "bight former" means not condition-responsive.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 159 for loop forming structure
    in motion picture apparatus.


CLS 226/37
TXT Device under subclass 24 wherein the control means stops the material by a
    separable mechanism (such as a clutch) constituting part of a power
    transmission member between the material moving means and a power source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, appropriate subclasses for similar
    apparatus, per se.


CLS 226/38
TXT Device under subclass 24 wherein the movement of material is regulated by a
    member (such as a brake) which slows or stops the material travel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, appropriate subclasses for similar apparatus, per se.


CLS 226/39
TXT Device under subclass 38 wherein the means to retard directly engages the
    material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 184 for intermittent film
    arresting means used in motion picture apparatus.


CLS 226/40
TXT Device under subclass 24 wherein the movement of material is regulated by a
    changeable connection in a drive train between a power source and the
    material moving means, which connection changes the speed of the material
    moving means relative to that of the power source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses for similar
    apparatus, per se.


CLS 226/41
TXT Device under subclass 40 wherein the changeable connection comprises a
    shaft-mounted pulley comprising two belt engaging tapered members, which
    members may be adjusted along the axis of the shaft.


CLS 226/42
TXT Device under subclass 24 wherein the movement of material is regulated by a
    motor, the rate of rotation of which may be adjusted.


CLS 226/43
TXT Device under subclass 42 wherein the motor speed is either increased from
    zero or decreased to zero whereby the material travel is initiated or
    halted.


CLS 226/44
TXT Device under subclass 24 wherein the detection means is an element in
    continuous contact with a surface of the material whereby any change in the
    path of travel of the material will be sensed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for similar structure wherein the function of the structure is
    disclosed or claimed as for detecting breaking or exhaustion of material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 17+ for an analogous "dancer" means
    controlling metal-deforming means.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 324+, 410+, 520+, and
    550+ for a material contacting control for regulating winding, tensioning,
    or unwinding.


CLS 226/45
TXT Device under subclass 10 in which the means to sense the path or position
    of the material is particularly recited in the claim, and is not otherwise
    classifiable.

    (1)     Note.  The patents in this subclass are for devices which are
    detector subcombinations clearly disclosed as being used with means to
    control movement of the material within the class definition, not provided
    for in other classes.  For example, a photocell detector not effecting
    material correcting means will be placed as an original in Class 250,
    Radiant Energy, especially since subclass 219, Web, strand or record in
    optical path (in Class 250) is specifically provided to take such a
    subcombination.

    (2)     Note.  See (82) Note, (B) of this publication for other classes
    including material sensing material.


CLS 226/46
TXT Device under the class definition provided with means to prevent motion of
    any part of the device in any manner (except said means itself) until said
    means is moved so as to allow movement of said any part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 399+ for interlock means in combination with
    cutting means.


CLS 226/47
TXT Device under subclass 46 provided with means to start said other part in
    motion simultaneously with the release of the interlock.


CLS 226/48
TXT Device under the class definition provided with means to terminate
    operation of any or all parts of the device in response to a condition or
    signal or impulse the time of occurrence of which cannot be precisely
    predicted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10+,    for stopping means actuated in response to detection of the
    material.

    66      and 161, for devices which prevent material movement without
    stopping  the movement of any part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 58+ for similar structure in combination with
    cutting means.


CLS 226/49
TXT Device under the class definition provided with means to optionally advance
    material either in one longitudinal* direction or in an opposite
    longitudinal* direction.

    (1)     Note.  The patents in this and indented subclasses disclose more
    than a mere retraction or retrograde movement such as is found in the
    patents of subclass 143 below.  In this subclass (49) the patents disclose
    the totality of material-movement to be alternatively selectable either in
    one direction or the reverse direction, whereas the patents of subclass 143
    disclose the normal operation of the device to be a two-stage advancing
    comprising (1) a forward movement of material beyond a point on the device
    and (2) a retraction movement of the material relative to the point whereby
    the totality of material-movement is in one direction only.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 316 and 317
    for a reversible feed for a sewing machine.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 124 for motion picture apparatus
    with provisions for film rewind, and subclass 173 for motion picture
    apparatus with selectively reversible film feed.


CLS 226/50
TXT Device under subclass 49 provided with at least two driven
    material-engaging advancing elements, only one or only another of which is
    selected for advancing engagement with the material at any one time.

    (1)     Note.  The usual example of claimed subject matter placed herein
    involves a feed-roll-couple* comprising one driven roll* and one pressure
    roll engaging material on opposite sides thereof, and another
    feed-roll-couple separate from the first-mentioned couple.  However, a
    patent claiming a first feed couple comprising a first driven roll
    cooperating with a pressure roll to feed material which is between the
    rolls and a second feed couple comprising a second driven roll cooperating
    with the same pressure roll, the pressure roll engaging with either the
    first or the second driven roll to move the material either in one
    direction or in an opposite direction, would also be placed herein since
    the common pressure roll is alternatively part of the first feed couple or
    the second feed couple.

    (2)     Note.  Also included herein are exemplary patents disclosing two
    separate feedroll*, each rotated by its own drive shaft, in which one shaft
    is connected through a clutch to a power source or the other shaft is
    connected through another clutch to the same power source.  The shafts are
    oppositely and alternatively driven through their respective clutches
    whereby the material is advanced in a forward or reverse direction.  For
    other patents wherein the same roll is driven alternatively in opposite
    directions, see subclass 51.


CLS 226/51
TXT Device under subclass 49 provided with a material-engaging advancing means
    connectable to first means moving said advancing means in one direction, or
    to second means moving said advancing means in a second, reverse direction.

    (1)     Note.  For patents wherein two feed rolls are alternatively and
    oppositely driven, see subclass 50, and see (2) Note to that subclass.


CLS 226/52
TXT Device under the class definition including means (hereafter referred to,
    in the definitions of the indented subclasses, as a prong) to contact
    variations of indeterminate length* material, said variations recurring
    along the length-direction of said material.

    (1)     Note.  In original patents placed in this and indented subclasses,
    the variations described above are usually perforations, holes, or notches
    in web material (the most common example being motion picture film), and
    the means contacting said variations comprises one or more claws, sprocket
    wheels, pin-belts, or other toothed members, the teeth of which enter into
    the perforations successively and are moved to feed the perforated web.
    For simplicity and brevity, the term "prong" (or "prongs") will be used
    hereafter where appropriate to refer generally to a toothed member
    described above.

    (2)     Note.  To be placed as an original in this or indented subclasses,
    a patent must (1) disclose the material as having a modified surface such
    as perforations, and (2) claim the prong (or prongs) or equivalent term
    (for an exemplary listing of which, see (1) Note above).  A patent which
    claims a prong or its equivalent will be originally placed into these
    subclasses only if it is clear from the disclosure that material is moved
    (or stopped, as in subclasses 55+) thereby.  However, since material such
    as perforated film is sometimes handled and fed as ordinary strand or web
    without using such perforations (e.g., motion picture film passing a sound
    head by friction drive means), mere recitation of perforated film will not
    of itself warrant original placement into these subclasses of a patent
    including such recitation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for analogous method.

    116,    for disclosure wherein a perforation is used to effect
    discontinuity in the contact between the feeder and the material, thus
    stopping movement of the material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclass 35 for similar
    apparatus in a saw making machine.

    83,     Cutting, subclass 423 for similar apparatus combined with cutting
    means.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, for more than a nominal supply or
    take-up coil structure (e.g., a support for such a coil, a cooperative
    relationship between a tension or exhaust detector and reel driving or reel
    stopping means, etc.), subclass 354 for a particular linear feeder* (e.g.,
    capstan or sprocket, etc.) spaced from the supply or take-up coil.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 191+ for motion picture drive
    apparatus with claw film feed.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclass 248.3 for similar apparatus combined
    with typewriting means.


CLS 226/53
TXT Device under subclass 52 in which the prong penetrates the material surface
    at points or areas of such surface which have not been previously modified,
    whereby the prong makes the recurrent variations.

    (1)     Note.  The patents in this subclass are not to be confused with the
    patents of Class 83, Cutting.  To be placed herein, the perforating or
    penetrating means must be disclosed solely as means facilitating feed and
    the perforations produced must be unused at any other time for any purpose.
     Furthermore, if the patent discloses a nonfeeding use for such
    perforations, placement of the original patent will be in Class 83 on the
    basis of the structure producing such perforations or in another class on
    the basis of the use for the perforations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses, especially subclass 218 for
    similar apparatus wherein a nonfeeding use of the modifications produced is
    disclosed.


CLS 226/54
TXT Device under subclass 52, provided with at least two prongs (or sets of
    such prongs) in which one or another of such prongs is optionally operable
    to contact the variations and move the material.

    (1)     Note.  A "set" comprises a plurality of prongs all of which partake
    of the same movement.  Included within the meaning of the term "set", as
    used above, is a pinwheel assembly comprising two coaxial, equal-diameter
    sprockets, or a claw having at least two teeth spaced laterally* of the
    material, where in either case all the teeth of a set coact simultaneously
    in at least two laterally opposite marginal perforations in the same web to
    move said web.  To be placed herein as an original, a patent disclosing
    such a set would also disclose and claim another sprocket of pitch diameter
    or lateral spacing or speed of movement different from the first-mentioned
    set, thereby, for example, to feed one web at a speed different than
    another even through the rotational speed of the sprocket remains
    unchanged, or to feed webs of different lateral widths, or such patent
    would disclose and claim another set of prongs (on the same claw described
    above, or on a different claw) wherein the speed of movement or the lateral
    spacing of the prongs comprising such other set, is different from that of
    the first-mentioned set.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     for selectively reversible feed means which may include prong
    structure.


CLS 226/55
TXT Device under subclass 52 in which said prong contacts the variations
    periodically to hold said material against motion in any of (1) a forward
    direction or (2) a rearward direction or (3) both directions.

    (1)     Note.  The prong of the patent placed herein may produce movement
    of the material either forwardly or rearwardly of normal travel, by reason
    of the shape of the prong and/or movement thereof, as it engages the
    variation to effect registration of the material. However, such additional
    material movement is deemed to be incidental since no material movement
    takes place if the material is properly located when the prong engages the
    variation.

    (2)     Note.  See (1) Note of subclass 2 for further discussion of
    "registration".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for analogous method of registration; and see (2) Note above.

    27+,    for apparatus effecting material-responsive registration.


CLS 226/56
TXT Device under subclass 55 provided with means to volitionally incapacitate
    the prong whereby the prong cannot hold the material against motion.

    (1)     Note.  The purpose of the disabling means is usually to remove
    temporarily any barrier to the threading of the perforated web through the
    feeder.  For other means permitting threading see subclasses 91+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91+,    and see (1) Note above.

    161,    for means to disable operation of an  intermittent material-mover.


CLS 226/57
TXT Device under subclass 55 provided with means to drive the prong both into
    and out of engagement with the material modifications.

    (1)     Note.  To be included herein a patent must claim a device provided
    with more than a biasing means (e.g., a spring) to move the prong into and
    out of engagement with the material.


CLS 226/58
TXT Device under subclass 55 provided with spring means to bias the prong into
    material engaging position.


CLS 226/59
TXT Device under subclass 52 provided with (1) supplementary material-engaging
    means for clamping the material, thereby to stop movement thereof, or (2)
    means for otherwise restraining the material against movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195,    for similar apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 410+ and 147+ for a
    tension control system for a running length of elongated material.


CLS 226/60
TXT Device under subclass 59 wherein the material retarding means operates to
    moderate or prevent sudden changes in the velocity of the moving material.


CLS 226/61
TXT Device under subclass 60 wherein the fluctuation damping means includes a
    rotatable body having a high inertial mass which body resists velocity
    changes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for a flywheel provided with material-responsive control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 572+ for a flywheel, per
    se.


CLS 226/62
TXT Device under subclass 52 provided with either (1) only one prong, or (2) a
    plurality of prongs, all spaced longitudinally*, all mounted in fixed
    relationship with, or integral with, each other, and all acting as a single
    group; the prong of (1) or the prongs of (2) as a single group being given
    a compound motion involving (a) movement into contact with a variation in
    the material, (b) rectilinear or arcuate movement longitudinally* of the
    material while in contact therewith to move said material, (c) movement
    away from contact with the variation and (d) longitudinal movement in a
    reverse direction while out of engagement, back to a starting position from
    which the movements are repeated.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this and indented subclasses are distinguished
    from patents in such subclasses 74+ and 76+ by the nature of the movement
    imparted to the prong(s).  The patents placed in this and indented
    subclasses disclose a prong which is substantially constantly oriented with
    respect to the perforated material; that is, a free end of the prong always
    points toward the material.  For patents disclosing prongs constantly
    oriented with respect to the material but which are not fixed with respect
    to each other as required by (2) of the definition of this subclass (62),
    see subclasses 75 and 81.

    (2)     Note.  The patents placed in subclasses 74+ disclose a prong
    mounted on an endless belt, chain or the like traveling about two spaced,
    parallel, rotated shafts or driving sprockets. In some disclosures (of
    subclasses 74+) the prong may be relatively fixed to the belt to rotate,
    during one orbit of a prong, once about an axis through the prong and
    parallel to the shafts.  In other disclosures the prong may be mounted on
    two chains such that it is oriented to always point towards the material,
    but no confusion should exist since the prong is mounted on an endless belt
    or chain.

    (3)     Note.  The patents placed in subclasses 76+ disclose a rotated
    wheel or drum having prongs radially mounted thereon, such devices being so
    different in structure and operation as to be readily distinguishable from
    a claw. However, attention is specifically called to certain patents placed
    in subclass 81 (indented under subclass 80) in which a rotating disc is
    provided with a plurality of pins rotating oppositely with respect to the
    disc in a one-to-one ratio, whereby the prongs point always toward the
    material during feed thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75      and 81, for other prong means which may be constantly oriented, and
    see (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclass 323 for a
    four-motion feed disclosed with a sewing machine.


CLS 226/63
TXT Device under subclass 62 provided with at least two prongs (or sets of
    prongs), each mounted separately from the other(s), in which first one
    prong (or set) engages and moves the material and subsequently another
    prong (or set) engages and moves the material, in successive
    material-feeding movements of the separate prongs (or sets).

    (1)     Note.  The term "set" is used herein in the same sense as in (1)
    Note of subclass 54.


CLS 226/64
TXT Device under subclass 62 provided with means volitionally to adjust or vary
    either (1) the distance, or (2) the route, traversed by the prong in its
    orbital to-and-fro movement.

    (1)     Note.  The term "range", as used in these subclasses is applied to
    the path of claw movement and not to the throw of the claw, i.e., the
    amplitude of claw movement.  The mechanisms are sometimes referred to as
    "framers".

    (2)     Note.  The patents placed in this subclass (64) are to devices
    which only vary the extent of claw movement.  For those devices which vary
    the range only, or the range and extent, see subclasses 65 and 66 indented
    hereunder.


CLS 226/65
TXT Device under subclass 64 wherein said means changes the route traversed by
    the prong without varying the distance traversed.

    (1)     Note.  The patents placed herein may have additional means to
    adjust the extent to claw movement.


CLS 226/66
TXT Device under subclass 65 in which the range of claw movement is moved so as
    not to intercept the path of material, whereby material movement is stopped.


CLS 226/67
TXT Device under subclass 62 provided with a carrier* movable to-and-fro in a
    straight line or plane parallel to the direction of movement of the
    material, on which carrier the prong is mounted for movement into and out
    of engagement with the perforations in the material.


CLS 226/68
TXT Device under subclass 67 wherein the claw is oscillatable on the carrier*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for a claw pivotable on a pivoted carrier.


CLS 226/69
TXT Device under subclass 62 provided with two carriers* on which carriers the
    prong (or prong set) is mounted for movement into and out of engagement
    with the material variations.


CLS 226/70
TXT Device under subclass 62 provided with a carrier* oscillatable on a
    stationary centerline of a spindle or axle, on which carrier the prong is
    mounted for movement into and out of engagement with the variations in the
    material.


CLS 226/71
TXT Device under subclass 70 in which the prong is oscillatable on the carrier*.


CLS 226/72
TXT Device under subclass 70 in which the prong is reciprocable relative to the
    carrier along a line passing through, and perpendicular to, the axis of the
    spindle on which the carrier* oscillates.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note of subclass 73 for the differences between the
    structures of this subclass (72) and subclass 73.


CLS 226/73
TXT Device under subclass 62 provided with a stationary rod, in which device
    the prong is integral with, or fixed to, a slotted member having a compound
    movement combining both (1) a reciprocation along the slot radially of said
    rod and (2) oscillation about the rod.

    (1)     Note.  The claw member of this subclass (73) is similar to that of
    subclass 72 and usually the motion is similar.  The basic difference
    between the patents of the subclasses, lies in the joint between the claw
    member and the fixed stud or axis.  In patents placed in this subclass (73)
    a slotted claw member slides directly on the fixed stud as the member
    oscillates about the stud.  In some patents placed in subclass 72 a
    pivotable block is interposed between a slotted claw member and the fixed
    axis or stud; the slot of the claw member slides on the block, and the
    block oscillates about the axis.


CLS 226/74
TXT Device under subclass 52 including a continuous (i.e., closed-loop) member,
    which may comprise a concatenation of elemental parts which form or make up
    such a continuous (i.e., closed-loop) member, which member, in either case,
    is trained about a plurality of separated, noncoaxial pulleys or sprockets,
    and on which member one or more prongs is mounted for feeding movement
    therewith.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note to subclass 62 for the differences between the
    structures of this subclass (74) and subclasses 62+ and 76+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170,    for other endless-belt material-advancer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 183 for motion picture apparatus
    with film feeding apparatus employing an endless belt.


CLS 226/75
TXT Device under subclass 74 provided with means to impart motion to the prong
    additional to its material-advancing movement.

    (1)     Note.  The supplementary pin-movement described above may be to
    move the pin perpendicularly to the surface of the material whereby the
    pins enter into and retract from the variations in the material, or may be
    to move the pin transversely of the direction of movement thereof, parallel
    to the material surface, whereby to adjust for various width of, or lateral
    spacings of variations in, material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     for laterally adjustable sprocket means.

    81,     for supplementary pin movement in a sprocket wheel.

    179,    for an axially movable roll.


CLS 226/76
TXT Device under subclass 52 provided with a member rotatable about an axis
    perpendicular to longitudinal* travel of the material, and said member
    provided with a prong(s) extending radially from said axis and, if a
    plurality of prongs is provided, spaced circumferentially around said
    member.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note of subclass 62 for the differences between the
    structures of this subclass (76) and subclasses 62 and 74.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 187+ for motion picture
    apparatus with sprocket film feed.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 152+ for a positive drive pulley.


CLS 226/77
TXT Device under subclass 76 wherein the rotating sprocket moves material which
    comprises a plurality of interlinked or articulated members, e.g., a chain.


CLS 226/78
TXT Device under subclass 76 in which a first portion of material is engaged by
    one or more first prongs of a sprocket, a second portion of said material
    is free of [i.e., out of engagement with, and (as disclosed) usually in a
    loop about, a sound or projection head] said sprocket, and a third portion
    of said material is engaged by one or more second prongs of the same
    sprocket, said second prong(s) being peripherally separated (usually, as
    disclosed, by substantially 180_ of arc) from said first prong(s) by prongs
    which are not in engagement with said second portion of material.

    (1)     Note.  The patents placed herein disclose, and often broadly claim,
    the named operating station (e.g., a sound head, or a motion picture taking
    or projecting lens) which station operates on the free loop or bight of the
    material, and which station the sprocket feeds the material to, and takes
    the material away.


CLS 226/79
TXT Device under subclass 76 wherein the sprocket(s) is (are) movable along the
    axis of rotation.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are patents disclosing structure for
    changing the axial distance between plural sprockets.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for laterally adjustable pin belt means.

    179,    for an axially movable advancing roll.


CLS 226/80
TXT Device under subclass 76 provided with means to detach the material from
    the prong(s).

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are patents disclosing a stationary member
    guiding the material away from a pin-wheel as well as a movable member
    contacting with and moving the material away from the pin-wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for method of "stripping".

    83,     for means to permit disengagement of the material from the prong
    usually while the material is stationary.


CLS 226/81
TXT Device under subclass 80 wherein said means imparts a motion of the
    prong(s) additional to the feed movement thereof, the additional motion
    serving to disengage the prong(s) from the material.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are patents disclosing a prong (or prongs)
    always pointed toward the material, similar functionally, but not
    structurally, to the patents of subclasses 62+.  See (1) Note to subclass
    62.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for supplementary movement of a chain or belt-carried pin.


CLS 226/82
TXT Device under subclass 76 provided with means closely adjacent the prong(s)
    or adjacent the sprocket to ensure engagement of the material with said
    prong(s).


CLS 226/83
TXT Device under subclass 82 in which said means is movable out of adjacency
    with prong(s) or the sprocket (or vice versa) thereby to permit the
    material to be put into, or taken out of, engagement with the prong(s).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56+,    89+ and 91+, for other means to permit threading of material into
    feeder structure.

    80+,    for means to disengage material from prongs, usually while the
    material is moving.


CLS 226/84
TXT Device under subclass 83 in which said means comprises a roll*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85,     for a roller retainer which is not relatively displaceable from the
    sprocket.


CLS 226/85
TXT Device under subclass 82 in which said means comprises a roll*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     for a roller retainer which is relatively displaceable from the
    sprocket.


CLS 226/86
TXT Device under subclass 76 provided with means other than the sprocket
    periphery to hold material against the force of gravity.


CLS 226/87
TXT Device under subclass 52 in which the configuration or form or structure of
    the material engaging portion of the prong(s) or claw member is
    specifically recited in the claim(s).


CLS 226/88
TXT Device under the class definition provided with means to bend the material
    laterally* within its elastic limit to facilitate the moving thereof.

    (1)     Note.  To be placed here as an original, a patent must positively
    recite that the bending in some way significantly alters or enhances the
    operation of the advancer thereon. Thus, for example, a patent claim
    reciting a shaped roller or guideway which bends the material into an
    arcuate cross-section will be placed herein only if the purpose is stated
    to be for stiffening the material to make the material self-supporting.

    (2)     Note.  Longitudingal bending is not considered to be significant
    for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104+,   for a festooner that advances material in loop form.

    113+,   for a bight former using one of the material moving means to push
    or pull the material into a loop.

    118.2+, for plural material-moving means having intermediate storage in a
    loop having a displaceable support.

    192,    for centering roll structure which may tend to bend the material
    laterally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 176 for similar apparatus combined with cutting
    means.


CLS 226/89
TXT Device under the class definition having means movable for the purpose of
    permitting the manual insertion of material into the advancing mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes patents which merely claim the
    shiftable device without claiming the material moving means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83+,    for other devices having shiftable parts which could permit
    threading.


CLS 226/90
TXT Device under subclass 89 provided with a roll* which is movable to
    facilitate material loading.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176+,   for a shiftable roller not disclosed as for threading.


CLS 226/91
TXT Device under the class definition characterized by means to lead or convey
    a lead-end of material to or through material moving mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  The device must clearly be disclosed as being for the
    purpose of threading the lead-end of a new portion of material or of broken
    material to or through a material mover within the class definition.  A
    device which pulls a lead-end of material through or to an operating
    station, such means being the primary feeding means provided, is found
    elsewhere.  See (42) Note of this publication.

    (2)     Note.  For placement herein, a patent need only claim the threading
    device itself and need not claim it in combination with a material
    advancing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     83 and 89+, for other means permitting threading.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 120 for
    threading means in a drying machine.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclass 306 for
    combined twisting and waste or loose end collecting means; and subclass 353
    for strand catching means.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 47.03, 332+, 532.7, and
    562.1 for threading means associated with a winding or unwinding device.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 158 for self-threading motion
    picture apparatus.


CLS 226/92
TXT Device under subclass 91 provided with means, usually a gripper*, to
    positively drag the forward edge of new or broken material to or through
    the material advancing means.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note of subclass 91 and (42) Note of this
    publication.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 14+ for devices for
    pulling the lead end of stock material.


CLS 226/93
TXT Device under the class definition wherein a force, other than a mere
    frictional force, is utilized to facilitate the grip of a material moving
    means on the material, the force being exerted in some manner other than
    (1) the weight of the material itself, or (2) an element opposite the
    advancing means, which element urges the material against the advancing
    means.

    (1)     Note.  As indicated by the subclasses indented hereunder, these
    forces are electrostatic, pneumatic, or the adhesive nature of the material
    being moved.  An example, of a patent left in this subclass (93) is one for
    a device which utilizes magnetism as the attracting force.


CLS 226/94
TXT Device under subclass 93 wherein the force utilized is of the type created
    by moving a dielectric through a high potential electric field.


CLS 226/95
TXT Device under subclass 93 wherein the force utilized is the thrust of
    gaseous fluid.

    (1)     Note.  The patents herein are for devices which utilize air
    pressure to facilitate adherence of the material to the material advancer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97.1+, for apparatus using fluid current to advance the material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 332.3, 417.1, 419.4,
    538+, and 564.3+ for material feeding means or pneumatic structure for
    winding, tensioning, or unwinding elongated material.


CLS 226/96
TXT Device under subclass 93 wherein the force utilized is the sticky or tacky
    nature of the material moved.


CLS 226/97.1
TXT BY FLUID CURRENT:

    Device under the class definition comprising means to impinge a gas,
    liquid, or other fluent substance to move the material*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for a process of using fluid current to move material*.

    95,     for pneumatic pressure means to make the material* adhere to the
    material*-advancer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles: Manufacturing, subclasses 271+ for a method or apparatus
    of thread surface texturing (e.g., crimping, etc.) by using a fluid jet.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 640+ for a
    fluid support or guide for a running length of a flexible sheet, web*, or
    strand* of treated material* contacted by gas or vapor circulation
    apparatus.

    57,     Textiles: Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 279+
    threading up apparatus or process that may use fluid current to advance the
    material*.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 182.1+ for a fluid support means
    for an article or preform.

    83,     Cutting, subclass 24 for a process of cutting and subsequent
    product handling by using fluid means, subclasses 98+ a fluid current
    handling means for product of cutting, or subclass 402 for fluid current
    means to convey work relative to a tool station.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, for more than a nominal supply or
    take-up coil structure (e.g., a support for such a coil, a cooperative
    relationship between a tension or exhaust detector and reel driving or reel
    stopping means, etc.), subclass 332.3 unwinding and rewinding a machine
    convertible information carrier (e.g., magnetic tape or photographic film.
    etc.) including a threading means using pneumatic assistance, or subclasses
    615.11+ a residual locus for a material* fluid suspension guide or guard.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclass 80 for a contact device
    for a traveling strip.

    406,    Conveyors: Fluid Current, for apparatus and methods conveying solid
    material or articles which are guided or supported to travel along a path
    by means of or with assistance of a fluid current.


CLS 226/97.2
TXT And web* storage:

    Device under subclass 97.1 and means to accumulate web* material*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118.1+, for intermediate storage means between plural material*-moving
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 331+ for an unwinding
    and rewinding a machine convertible information carrier (e.g., magnetic
    tape or photographic film, etc.) having intermediate storage (e.g., low
    inertia bin, etc.), subclasses 364+ for a unidirectional winding and
    unwinding coil that may involve storage or subclasses 417+ for a tension
    control brake supply controlled reserve loop former.


CLS 226/97.3
TXT Floating web*:

    Device under subclass 97.1 including means to buoy or levitate the web*.


CLS 226/97.4
TXT Vacuum jet for strand*:

    Device under subclass 97.1 wherein the device uses an enclosed flow path
    where a high velocity fluid flow imparts energy by entraining and
    frictionally contacting fluid within or adjacent to the enclosed flow path
    to create suction to move the strand*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    139,    Textiles: Weaving, subclasses 435.1+ for weaving means where weft
    is inserted by fluid jet from nozzle.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 134.4 for a method or apparatus of placement of conductive wire by
    fluid pressure differential in conduit (e.g., parachute sacked through
    conduits, etc.).


CLS 226/100
TXT Device under the class definition including means to sense a condition in
    the moving operation, and to cause the occurrence of some sign, mark,
    warning noise, or other manifestation of the condition in response to said
    sensing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclasses for a mechanical
    signal or indicator.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+ for electrical
    automatic condition responsive indicating systems.


CLS 226/101
TXT Device under the class definition having means by which an adjustment,
    addition, removal or reassembly of one or more of the parts of the
    apparatus causes the apparatus to perform (1) the function of advancing
    material in a different manner or (2) some function other than to advance
    material, not provided for in some other class.


CLS 226/102
TXT Device under the class definition having means, in addition to that
    structure falling within the definition of this class, (but specifically
    additional means for braking or slowing material movement) which additional
    means is not provided for in previous subclasses of this class.

    (1)     Note.  In general, such additional means is a part of a work
    treatment device of another class, which part is not sufficient to cause
    placement of the patent in the work treatment class in accordance with
    section V, (51) Note of this publication.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein are, for example, feeding combinations with
    means to absorb or minimize shock, jars or noise as the material is
    advanced, means to collect excess material following a break in the
    material, means to clean the advancing mechanism, and means to mount the
    device to make it portable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195,    for structure to move material and means to brake or slow movement
    of said material.


CLS 226/104
TXT Device under the class definition including at least one member (hereafter
    referred to, in the definition of the indented subclasses as girt) having
    an axis extending laterally* of the material to be moved, in which device
    as disclosed, (1) a plurality of such members receive and support a loop of
    indeterminate length* material, the material depending downwardly from
    supporting contact with one such member and then upwardly to supporting
    contact with another such member, (2) means are provided to give
    translatory movement to said member(s) in a direction simultaneously
    perpendicular to said axis and broadside to said loop, and (3) the material
    has substantially no movement relative to said member(s) during such
    translatory movement.

    (1)     Note.  The terms bar, stick, rod, etc., are synonymous with the
    term "girt" in this art.

    (2)     Note.  In usual operation, a portion of the material at a loading
    end of the festooner is draped or held relatively stationary over a girt, a
    succeeding portion of that material is advanced longitudinally, (generally
    in a vertical direction) until a quantity of material is looped between the
    girt and the loading (or infeed) means, a portion of that material is
    draped over a succeeding girt while all or some of the girts move bodily in
    a direction perpendicular to the axis of the girts and broadside to the
    loop thus formed (generally in a horizontal direction) and the material is
    removed from the individual girts as the girts advance.

    (3)     Note.  To be placed in this group of subclasses a patent must claim
    the device in such terms that it is clear, or it can reasonably be
    inferred, that a definite loop is found between girts. Devices not clearly
    within this group may be found in subclass 170, endless conveyors.

    (4)     Note.  The mere naming of a device as a "festooner" or equivalent
    phrase does not warrant placement of a patent with such a recitation in
    this group.  The significant characteristic herein is the translatory
    movement of the girts broadside to the loops.  Other devices, sometimes
    named as festooning machines, but in which the material moves in a sinuous
    path over and under rotated or rotatable rolls.





    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for a festooner controlled by material-responsive means.

    118.2+, for plural material-moving means having intermediate storage in a
    loop having a displaceable support.

    170+,   and see (3) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 645+ for
    similar apparatus in combination with drying means.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 159+ for similar
    apparatus in a textile treating machine.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 32 for similar apparatus in combination
    with a coating device.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, for more than a nominal supply or
    take-up coil structure (e.g., a support for such a coil, a cooperative
    relationship between a tension or exhaust detector and reel driving or reel
    stopping means, etc.), subclasses 417+ for a tension control brake supply
    controlled reserve loop former.


CLS 226/105
TXT Device under subclass 104 provided with means to rotate or pivot the
    loop-supporting girt about the axis of the girt or about a line parallel to
    said axis, whereby the girt will contact another portion of the loop and
    have another orientation in relation to the girt-translating means.

    (1)     Note.  The usual disclosed purpose of a device provided with such
    girt shifting means is to present all portions of the supported material to
    drying air.  If a patent claims a source of drying air, such patent will be
    placed in Class 34 (see Note 51 (A) of this publication).

    (2)     Note.  The shifting herein described is the only other exception to
    the restriction (in the definition of subclass 104) that the material has
    no movement relative to the girt during translatory movement thereof.


CLS 226/106
TXT Device under subclass 104 provided with clamping means to retain material
    on a girt.

    (1)     Note.  Usually, the clamping means functions primarily to start a
    festoon on a girt.


CLS 226/107
TXT Device under subclass 104 provided with means to move a girt from a stored
    location onto the girt-translating means.

    (1)     Note.  The stored location referred to above is one at which the
    girts do not participate in the motion of the girt-conveyor.


CLS 226/108
TXT Device under the class definition provided with more that one driven
    material-advancing means.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this and indented subclasses are patents for
    devices which have plural material movers which are simultaneously driven
    at the same speed by the same drive means, since the movers are deemed to
    be capable of moving material independently if separate drive means were
    provided.

    (2)     Note.  A roll-couple* is not considered to be plural moving means
    since the two rolls* cooperate as one entity to produce movement of the
    material.


CLS 226/109
TXT Device under subclass 108 wherein the moving means direct (1)
    indeterminate-length* material along one of several different routes, or
    (2) several indeterminate-length materials along several different routes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclass 91 for similar
    means in spinning, twisting and twining apparatus.


CLS 226/110
TXT Device under subclass 109 wherein material is moved along only one path of
    the several provided, at any one time.


CLS 226/111
TXT Device under subclass 108 provided with means to adjust the rate of motion
    of one of the moving means without changing the velocity of the others.


CLS 226/112
TXT Device under subclass 108 wherein, during any instant of time, any one of
    the material moving means is moving all of the material whereby the travel
    of the material is maintained without interruption.

    (1)     Note.  The patents placed herein are directed to devices which
    cause all of the material to move continuously with no storage of the
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118.1+, for plural material-moving means having intermediate storage.


CLS 226/113
TXT Device under subclass 108 wherein one of the material moving means is a
    means to push or pull material into a loop.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 235 for similar apparatus combined with cutting
    means.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 159 for loop forming means in a
    motion picture apparatus.


CLS 226/114
TXT Device under subclass 113 provided with means to mount the bight former for
    movement in an arcuate path.


CLS 226/115
TXT Device under subclass 108 wherein one of the material movers advances
    material discontinuously.


CLS 226/116
TXT Device under subclass 115 wherein one of the other movers advances material
    to the intermittent mover so that the latter may grasp the material and
    cause the material to continue to advance.

    (1)     Note.  Exemplary patents placed herein disclose feeders for moving
    perforated web material, wherein movement is effected by peripheral contact
    of a feedroll with the surface* of the web and stopping is caused by a
    perforation underlying the feedroll so that peripheral contact is lost.
    Thereafter, to effect starting, a recessed roll coaxial with the feedroll
    engages a portion on the surface laterally spaced from the perforation as
    shown by Patent Number 1,648,483, or the recessed roll may be on an axis
    parallel to and spaced from axis of the feedroll as in Patent Number
    1,415,721.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55+,    for disclosure wherein the material is positively engaged to stop
    the material.


CLS 226/117
TXT Device under subclass 115 wherein one of the other means advances material
    uninterruptedly.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclass 452 for measuring or storing weft for
    a weft manipulation method or apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    139,    Textiles: Weaving, subclasses 435.1+ for weaving means where weft
    is inserted by fluid jet from nozzle.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 134.4 for a method or apparatus of placement of conductive wire by
    fluid pressure differential in conduit (e.g., parachute sacked through
    conduits, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189,    for orbitally traveling material*-engaging surface(s) to advance
    material* of indeterminate length* and plural spaced apart rolls* (e.g.,
    guide rolls*, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 647+ for
    zigzag running lengths of treated flexible sheet, web*, or strand*
    material* contacted by circulating gas or vapor or subclass 657 for zigzag
    running lengths of treated flexible sheet, web* or strand* material*.


CLS 226/118.1
TXT And intermediate storage:

    Device under subclass 108 and means to accumulate material* temporarily
    between plural material*-moving means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97.2,   for fluid current material* moving means and means to store the
    web*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles: Manufacturing, subclasses 263+ for a method or apparatus
    of thread surface texturing (e.g., crimping, etc.) by axial compression in
    a stuffer box.

    139,    Textiles: Weaving, subclass 452 for measuring or storing weft for a
    weft manipulation method or apparatus.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 331+ for unwinding and
    rewinding a machine convertible information carrier (e.g., magnetic tape or
    photographic film, etc.) having intermediate storage (e.g., low inertia
    bin, etc.), subclasses 364+ for a unidirectional winding and unwinding coil
    that may involve storage or subclasses 417+ for a tension control brake
    supply controlled reserve loop former .


CLS 226/118.2
TXT In a loop having displaceable support:

    Device under subclass 118.1 wherein the storage means is a guide having the
    material* curved around it and is moveable to increase or decrease the
    length of material* between the plural material*-moving means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189,    for orbitally traveling material*-engaging surface(s) to advance
    material* of indeterminate length* and plural spaced apart rolls* (e.g.,
    guide rolls*, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 647+ for
    zigzag running lengths of treated flexible sheet, web*, or strand*
    material* contacted by circulating gas or vapor or subclass 657 for zigzag
    running lengths of treated flexible sheet, web* or strand* material*.


CLS 226/118.3
TXT Where support is upheld by the material* (e.g., dancer roller, etc.):

    Device under subclass 118.2 wherein the guide is supported by the material*.


CLS 226/118.4
TXT In a container:

    Device under subclass 118.1 wherein the storage means is a receptacle
    having an entrance and exit for the material*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200,    for miscellaneous art that may include a container having other
    than plural feeding means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    400,    Typewriter Machines, subclasses 196+ for storage of endless ribbon
    or cartridge therefor including interposed inking device (e.g., ribbon,
    etc.) for record medium.


CLS 226/118.5
TXT Having conveying means within:

    Device under subclass 118.4 including means to propel the material* inside
    the container.


CLS 226/120
TXT Device under the class definition having means for advancing material in a
    step-by-step manner, including advancing an increment of material and
    stopping movement of the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for an analogous method.

    115+,   for an intermittent mover cooperating with another material mover.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Cards, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 342+ for a copy
    holder including means to advance a web of copy intermittently;
    particularly, subclass 346 for such a copy holder including a cyclically
    acting actuator for rotary-pinch-pair advancing means.

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 235+ for apparatus for depositing strips
    or rods in preformed receptacles.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 111+ for an intermittent
    grip type mechanical movement and subclasses 144+ for grip units and
    features.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 202+ for similar mechanism combined with
    cutting means.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 750+ for a conveyor having to
    and fro movements which carry material a distance and then return for
    another hold on the same material.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for a device for
    dispensing or feeding articles from a source of supply to a point of use,
    and not otherwise provided for; and see the class definition of Class 221
    for a statement of the class lines and for the disposition of other related
    article feeding disclosures.

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, subclasses 10+ for a device which
    feeds out a predetermined amount of material to a manual tearing edge.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclasses 82+ for a device for
    applying a member e.g., nail to work combined with means for forming the
    member and having means for feeding and cutting a blank from which the
    member is made.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, for more than a nominal supply or
    take-up coil structure (e.g., a support for such a coil, a cooperative
    relationship between a tension or exhaust detector and reel driving or reel
    stopping means, etc.), subclass 354 for a particular linear feeder* (e.g.,
    capstan or sprocket, etc.) spaced from the supply or take-up coil.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 82 through 128 for an arc
    lamp or other similar electric discharge device which is provided with
    means for feeding an electrode (rod, bar, or tube) into position as the
    electrode is consumed, where the feeding mechanism includes an intermittent
    grip mechanism.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 65+ for an
    implement including means to feed a rod of solid coating material
    incrementally.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 14+ for devices for moving
    stock by means of lead-end pullers or end face pushers.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, subclasses 162+ for feeding of work blanks of stock pieces not
    provided for in the several machining classes and yet so specialized to the
    functions of a machining class as to preclude classification in a general
    article feeding or dispensing class (221).  See the reference to Class 221
    hereinbelow.


CLS 226/121
TXT Device under subclass 120 wherein power absorbed from the movement of
    material itself is subsequently utilized in a later material-moving effort.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include patents disclosing a spring
    motor in which the spring is tensioned by means other than a movement of
    the material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, subclass 15 for similar apparatus
    combined with a tearing edge.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 184 for motion picture apparatus
    where a film is fed by the action of a film buckle.


CLS 226/122
TXT Device under subclass 120 including means for changing the rate of travel
    of material during an increment of movement.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes only those patents in which the
    claims specifically set forth the change of rate of travel during each
    step.  It is obvious that in any intermittent feeder the material must
    accelerate from zero and decelerate to a halt, thus patents have not been
    placed in this subclass on that basis.  The patents herein disclose devices
    which provide specific means which may, for instance, provide a slow
    acceleration to start the material, than a faster acceleration for some
    duration of time and then a deceleration to bring the material to a halt.

    (2)     Note.  Exemplary of the patents herein is a device disclosing
    planet and sun gear train in which the planet gear is described as having
    hypotrochoidal motion.


CLS 226/123
TXT Device under subclass 120 whereby the material is advanced in recurring
    series of material movements, each series comprising a number of material
    movements which are different in extent, one from any of the others within
    the series.


CLS 226/124
TXT Device under subclass 120 provided with a continuously driven roll* mounted
    on a carriage, which carriage moves to and fro, (either rectilinearly or
    arcuately).

    (1)     Note.  In the operation of the devices classified herein, the
    average speed of the carriage in retrograde direction (i.e., opposite to
    feed direction) approximates the peripheral speed of the roll in feed
    direction such that retrograde movement of the carriage nullifies the feed
    movement imparted by the roll, to effect interruption of material-advance.


CLS 226/125
TXT Device under subclass 120 in which material movement is stopped by
    engagement of an element with the leading edge of said material.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this or indented subclasses are patents
    disclosing a constantly rotating feed roll and an abutment intermittently
    interposed in the feed path:  the feeding operation of the device as an
    entity is thus interrupted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55+,    for a device wherein a pin engages a perforation in material to
    prevent material movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, subclass 81 for similar apparatus
    combined with a tearing edge.


CLS 226/126
TXT Device under subclass 125 wherein the abutment moves with the material in
    the direction of material advancement before stopping movement.


CLS 226/127
TXT Device under subclass 120 in which the advancing means (i.e., the mover) is
    powered by an operative (e.g., a person who operates the device).


CLS 226/128
TXT Device under subclass 127 having means for positively holding the advance
    material when the material is not being moved by the material-mover.

    (1)     Note.  Exemplary patents placed herein disclose feed means for
    lathes in which the chuck grips the material when the feeder is not in
    operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    82,     Turning, subclasses 124+ for a work feeder combined with a lathe.

    83,     Cutting, subclass 282 for a similar device combined with cutting
    means.


CLS 226/129
TXT Device under subclass 127 having structure restricting the extent of
    movement of the material-mover.

    (1)     Note.  It is clear that any material-advancer which fits the
    limitation that advance is intermittent must inherently provide for some
    limit on the increment of advance.  To be placed in this and indented
    subclasses, a patent must disclose and claim more than inherent limit on
    advance, that is, it must specifically claim a limiting element in, or
    acting on, the drive train of a manually powered material mover.


CLS 226/130
TXT Device under subclass 129 provided with structure for moving the
    restricting means to an inoperative position, thereby allowing subsequent
    material advancement.

    (1)     Note.  For example, (1) a limiting part which is moved out of a
    position wherein material advancer is limited or (2) an element on which
    such part is mounted for movement, are both considered to be means to
    disable operation of the limit means.


CLS 226/131
TXT Device under subclass 130 wherein the means to disengage the restricting
    means is moved after a predetermined interval of time after
    material-movement stops, whereby the material may be moved again only after
    said interval.


CLS 226/132
TXT Device under subclass 129 provided with at least two separate limiting
    means any one of which means may be chosen by an operative to control the
    extent of movement of the material in any increment.


CLS 226/133
TXT Device under subclass 129 provided with means for changing the position of
    the restricting means with respect to the material advancing structure.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a patent disclosing a device having a
    reciprocable operating handle in which either the reverse (nonadvancing) or
    forward (advancing) movement of the lever is restricted by an adjustable
    stop.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136     and 137+, for other adjustable material-mover.


CLS 226/134
TXT Device under subclass 120 in which the material is (1) started (from a rest
    position), (2) advanced through an extent of material-movement and (3)
    stopped (in a rest position), and in which further advance from said
    last-named position requires the intervention of a randomly operating
    agency or stimulus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 203+ for a unicyclic feeding and cutting device.


CLS 226/135
TXT Device under subclass 134 provided with two or more elements, any one of
    which elements may be actuated to effect a predetermined extent of material
    advance different from, or additive to, the extent(s) of advance effected
    by another (or other) elements(s) in the single cycle.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are patents disclosing a device in which one
    of a plurality of keys (similar to those on a typewriter keyboard) is
    moved, or a dial (similar to a telephone dial) is rotated, to actuate a
    switching relay circuit, in which the manipulation of a particular key or
    particular finger hole of the dial causes a predetermined extent of
    movement of the advancer.


CLS 226/136
TXT Device under subclass 134 provided with means for changing the extent of
    material advance during the cycle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    for other means to vary increment of advance.

    137,    for adjustable material-advancing means for a disclosed operating
    station.


CLS 226/137
TXT Device under subclass 120 wherein a part, or parts, of an intermittent
    feeder* may be moved volitionally relative to other part(s) of the device,
    whereby the direction or increment of feed may be varied.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132,    133, 135, and 136, for other means to adjust or select increments
    of material-advance.


CLS 226/138
TXT Device under subclass 137 having a moving portion of the feeder that
    strikes an element, which element is moved relative to the striking
    portion, causing actuation of the movable part one of said members (i.e.,
    either the portion or the element), being manually movable into (or out of)
    a position whereat the striking engagement occurs.


CLS 226/139
TXT Device under subclass 137 wherein movement of the part(s) effects a change
    in the extent of material advanced during each step of operation.


CLS 226/140
TXT Device under subclass 139 provided with a recessed-roll* and means to
    modify the peripheral extent of the radially outward material-engaging
    portion of said recessed-roll.


CLS 226/141
TXT Device under subclass 139 provided with means to vary the extent of
    movement of the feeder while moving in contact with the material.


CLS 226/142
TXT Device under subclass 141 provided with a lever which is rotated or
    oscillated about an axis and is provided with a pivotal connection between
    the lever and a link to move the feeder*, the axis and the pivotal
    connection being a distance apart and provided with means for changing the
    distance between said axis and connection.


CLS 226/143
TXT Device under subclass 120 including means to retract at least a portion of
    the material.

    (1)     Note.  Patents disclosing a device wherein the means which directly
    engages the material for causing forward movement thereof is separate and
    distinct from the means for causing retrograde movement thereof have been
    placed in plural material-moving means, above.


CLS 226/144
TXT Device under subclass 120 having means to preclude excess advancing
    movement of the material.

    (1)     Note.  The device may include (1) means to brake the movement of
    the material by direct engagement therewith or (2) mover-blocking means to
    prevent excess advancing movement.


CLS 226/145
TXT Device under subclass 144 having means acting periodically to preclude
    excess material movement at the end of the advancing step.


CLS 226/146
TXT Device under subclass 144 provided with means to preclude reverse motion of
    the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147,    for other retrograde movement preventer.


CLS 226/147
TXT Device under subclass 120 provided with means to preclude reverse movement
    of the material.

    (1)     Note.  The preventer is additional to the material-advancer and
    must be claimed as means (or equivalent term) which is clearly disclosed as
    prohibiting reverse movement of the material.


CLS 226/148
TXT Device under subclass 147 in which the preventing means comprises a roll*
    incapable of turning in a reverse direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156,    for a unidirectional (feed) roll not claimed as preventing
    retrograde motion.


CLS 226/149
TXT Device under subclass 147 wherein the preventing means is driven into
    holding engagement by an unyielding member.


CLS 226/150
TXT Device under subclass 149 wherein the preventing means is driven by means
    which derives its proximate actuating force from fluid-pressure or
    electricity.


CLS 226/151
TXT Device under subclass 147 wherein the preventing means is resiliently urged
    toward engagement.


CLS 226/152
TXT Device under subclass 120 wherein the material is advanced in a
    step-by-step manner by a roll*.


CLS 226/153
TXT Device under subclass 152 provided with a recessed-roll*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    for a recessed-roll combined with another material-mover.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 260 for a recessed-roll combined with cutting
    means.


CLS 226/154
TXT Device under subclass 152 provided with means for moving the roll* and
    material relatively, into and out of material-advancing engagement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 259+ for a
    similar device combined with cutting means.


CLS 226/155
TXT Device under subclass 154 wherein the roller* does not stop turning in the
    same direction.


CLS 226/156
TXT Device under subclass 152 wherein the roll* is incapable of turning in a
    reverse direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148,    for a unidirectional roll comprising a retrograde motion preventer.


CLS 226/157
TXT Device under subclass 156 provided with a peripherally toothed disc and
    oscillating pawl drivingly engaging the disc to move the roll*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclasses 575+ for ratchet systems, per se.


CLS 226/158
TXT Device under subclass 120 wherein the intermittent material-mover is a
    material-advancing member which moves to-and-fro (either rectilinearly or
    arcuately), and engages the material at least while moving in the
    material-advancing direction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 750+ for a reciprocating
    conveyor of general utility.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 14+ for means which pull
    the lead-end or push the end face of the material to a work modifying
    station.


CLS 226/159
TXT Device under subclass 158 wherein the material-advancer is mounted on a
    reciprocating or oscillating carrier, provided with means for resisting the
    movement of said carrier.

    (1)     Note.  Exemplary of the patents herein is a patent disclosing a
    device comprising a gripper mounted on a carrier which carrier reciprocates
    on a slideway, and a brake or a slack take-up to constrain the carrier
    against undesired movements.


CLS 226/160
TXT Device under subclass 158 wherein the material-advancer is on a carrier*,
    which carrier is mounted for arcuate movement about an axis.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are patents wherein, (1) the arcuately
    moving carrier moves the material in a corresponding arcuate path, or (2)
    the arcuately moving carrier moves the material in a straight path.


CLS 226/161
TXT Device under subclass 158 with volitionally actuated means to prevent the
    material engaging means from advancingly engaging the material.


CLS 226/162
TXT Device under subclass 158 provided with means for driving a clamping
    portion of the material-mover into contact with the material.

    (1)     Note.  In this and indented subclasses are patents for devices
    which clearly disclose that the material-advancing elements(s) move into
    and out of contact with the material.  Thus, a patent disclosing a
    spring-biased gripping element will be placed herein only if it clearly
    discloses and claims means for moving the element out of material-engaging
    position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    for a spring-biased gripper constantly in engagement with material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclass 65 or 67,
    respectively for a coating implement of that class including a
    reciprocating chuck, or a pair of reciprocating chucks acting in
    alternation, for advancing a rod of solid coating material to compensate
    for attrition.


CLS 226/163
TXT Device under subclass 162 wherein the driving means includes a point on a
    pitman pivotally fastened to a point on, or integral with, the grip element.

    (1)     Note.  Included within the meaning of the term "integral" as used
    above is a construction in which any part(s)  between the grip element and
    the point thereon may be disconnected, removed or shifted, but which
    part(s) partakes of all movement imparted to said grip element during use
    thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165,    for a device having a slidable connection between a link and a grip
    element.


CLS 226/164
TXT Device under subclass 163 wherein the same link also causes the grip
    element to move in a material-forwarding direction.


CLS 226/165
TXT Device under subclass 162 wherein the driving means includes a member
    having a face in sliding engagement with a surface on a sub-assembly
    integral with the grip element.

    (1)     Note.  Included within the meaning of the term "integral" as used
    above is a construction in which any part(s) of the sub-assembly between
    the grip-element and said surface may be disconnected, removed or shifted,
    but which part(s) partakes of all movement imparted to said grip element
    during use thereof.


CLS 226/166
TXT Device under subclass 165 wherein the same cam-surface also causes the grip
    element to move in a material-forwarding direction.


CLS 226/167
TXT Device under subclass 158 provided with means for resiliently urging a
    clamping portion of the material-mover into engagement with the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162+,   for a device wherein a grip element is (1) spring-biased away from
    the material or (2) spring-biased toward material, but moved away from the
    material by some other means.


CLS 226/168
TXT Device under the class definition having a circumambulating material
    contacting face, i.e., any given element of the face moves in a closed loop.

    (1)     Note.  In this and indented subclasses are, for example, patents
    disclosing devices wherein endless belts and rollers engage and advance
    material.

    (2)     Note. A patent placed in this and indented subclasses may merely
    guide the material* relative to the advancing material* of the
    indeterminate length* apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52+,    for means engaging longitudinally spaced modifications in the
    material* where the prong means may move in a closed loop and engaging
    modifications in the material.

    120+,   for intermittent (interrupted) material*-mover where the gripper
    means may travel in a closed loop in which only a portion of the gripper
    travel effects intermittent material advance.

    196.1,  for a passive guide, for other than orbitally traveling
    material*-engaging surface(s), for the advancing material* of indeterminate
    length* apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 210+ for a roller guide for
    sash-cord.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, for more than a nominal supply or
    take-up coil structure (e.g., a support for such a coil, a cooperative
    relationship between a tension or exhaust detector and reel driving or reel
    stopping means, etc.), subclasses

    354,    for a particular linear feeder* (e.g., capstan or sprocket, etc.)
    spaced from the supply or take-up coil,

    364+,   for a unidirectional winding and unwinding apparatus that may
    involve storage,

    548,    for particular guide or guard for convolute winding of material*,


    566,    for an unwinding apparatus having a particular guide or guard, or


    615.2,  for a residual locus for a rotatable material* guide or guard.


CLS 226/169
TXT Device under subclass 168 wherein the surface is on a material-advancer,
    and provided with mechanism for momentarily applying power to the advance,
    additional to that power which normally causes movement of the advancer, in
    order to overcome the starting inertia of the advancer.


CLS 226/170
TXT Device under subclass 168 wherein the material-engaging surface is on, or
    part of, either an integral, or concatenated band; the member, in either
    case, being trained about a plurality of separated, noncoaxial pulleys or
    sprockets.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74+,    for prong on endless belt or chain.


CLS 226/171
TXT Device under subclass 170 provided with another material-engaging face
    wherein the material is disposed between the face of the endless member and
    said other face.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are patents disclosing devices wherein the
    other face is on, or a part of, a roll*.

    (2)     Note.  The cooperating surface need not be orbitally traveling.


CLS 226/172
TXT Device under subclass 171 wherein the other face is also on, or part of, an
    endless member such as is defined in subclass 170, above.


CLS 226/173
TXT Device under subclass 170 provided with a gripper* or grippers supported on
    the endless member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162+,   for a reciprocating material-advancing gripper.


CLS 226/174
TXT Device under subclass 168 provided with means for regulating or altering
    the material-advancing operation of the material-advancer.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this and indented subclasses are patents
    disclosing devices wherein the control or adjustment is effected by an
    operative, as well as patents claiming a subcombination of control or
    adjustment means responsive to material condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10+,    for control means combined with means responsive to
    material-condition.

    188,    for drive means for a material-advancer not having claimed
    regulating means.


CLS 226/175
TXT Device under subclass 174 wherein the regulating means radially expands or
    contracts a roll*.


CLS 226/176
TXT Device under subclass 174 provided with at least two material-engaging
    surfaces, at least one of which is orbitally traveling, between which
    surfaces the material is disposed, and wherein the regulating means changes
    the space (i.e., "nip") between said surfaces.


CLS 226/177
TXT Device under subclass 176 wherein the spacing between the surfaces is
    changeable to any distance (ranging from zero to that imposed by the limits
    of the device) in an unlimited number of small variations, whereby
    different thicknesses of material may be accommodated therebetween.


CLS 226/178
TXT Device under subclass 174 wherein the control means regulates the rate of
    movement of the material-advancing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111,    for plural material-movers, the speed of which is varied.


CLS 226/179
TXT Device under subclass 174 wherein the regulating means adjusts a roll*
    along its axis of rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75      and 79, for an axially movable sprocket for a pin-belt or
    perforated material.


CLS 226/180
TXT Device under subclass 174 wherein the regulating means pivots a roll* about
    an axis other than the axis of rotation of the roll.


CLS 226/181
TXT Device under subclass 168 including two instrumentalities, each having
    material engaging surfaces, between which surfaces the material is
    disposed, said instrumentalities, during engagement with the material, each
    being rotated-about an axis-in a material-advancing direction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 352.4+, 354+, 418+,
    535+, and 564.3+ for a winding, tensioning, or unwinding device that
    includes material feeding means.


CLS 226/182
TXT Device under subclass 181 wherein the material-contacting face of at least
    one of the instrumentalities lies in a plane perpendicular to the axis of
    rotation of said instrumentality.


CLS 226/183
TXT Device under subclass 181 in which one instrumentality of the pinch-pair is
    a roll*, and is provided with means for retaining the material in contact
    with a portion of the periphery of said roll.

    (1)     Note.  This contact is more than just tangential, or point or line,
    contact with the roll.


CLS 226/184
TXT Device under subclass 181 wherein either (1) at least one of the
    instrumentalities is a cone or truncated cone; or (2) the spacing between
    the material-engaging surfaces of the instrumentalities, as viewed in a
    plane common to both axes, varies, regularly along a line parallel to the
    axes and lying in said plane.


CLS 226/185
TXT Device under subclass 181 wherein at least one of the instrumentalities
    comprises a plurality of rolls*, which rolls are all of like radius and are
    all mounted on commonly aligned centers.

    (1)     Note.  Patents placed herein include disclosures wherein the
    plurality of coaxial rolls are opposed by (1) a single roll or (2) another
    plurality of coaxial rolls.


CLS 226/186
TXT Device under subclass 181 wherein the material-contacting surfaces of the
    instrumentalities define an expansible or contractible nip or opening.

    (1)     Note.  The devices of patents placed in this subclass (186)
    generally have surfaces which are resilient.


CLS 226/187
TXT Device under subclass 186 wherein the axis of at least one of the
    instrumentalities is biased toward the other instrumentality.


CLS 226/188
TXT Device under subclass 168 provided with powered means to move the
    material-engaging surface in the material-advancing direction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 343 for a copy holder
    including motor-driven orbitally-traveling means for advancing a
    charactered web.


CLS 226/189
TXT Device under subclass 168 provided with two or more separated rolls*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108+, for plural material-moving means.


CLS 226/190
TXT Device under subclass 168 which, as claimed, includes a roll* or
    roll-support of specific structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclasses 99+ for roll structure of
    such shape or surface configuration as to spread, and thereby expand,
    running length increments of a cloth web; see, too, subclass 97 for selvage
    engaging roll spreader (forwardly) angulated, relative to the running
    length direction.


CLS 226/191
TXT Device under subclass 190 including a roll* whose peripheral face may move
    toward and away from the center of the roll in a direction perpendicular to
    the axis of rotation of the roll.


CLS 226/192
TXT Device under subclass 191 wherein the face of the roll* may also move
    relative to the center of the roll in a direction parallel to the axis of
    rotation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 101+ for means for tensioning a belt or shifting a pulley or
    guide roll.


CLS 226/193
TXT Device under subclass 190 including a roll* having uneven surface
    characteristics which (1) increase the coefficient of friction between the
    surface and the material, or, (2) has other means on the surface to hold
    and grip the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52+,    for a device comprising a modified material engaging surface which
    engages modifications in material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses 258+ for the surface
    structure of a drawing roll for fiber-containing structures, such as
    slivers.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, appropriate
    subclasses for pulleys having surfaces for increasing frictional grip, and
    for pulleys with auxiliary gripping means.


CLS 226/194
TXT Device under subclass 190 including specific means for mounting the roll of
    rotation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 126 for a squeezer
    roll mounting.


CLS 226/195
TXT Device under the class definition including means for moving material and
    with means for braking or slowing the material movement.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is the locus of patents claiming means at one
    location for moving material plus means at a second location for retarding
    such movement, whereby a pull is effected on such material between said
    locations. This subclass is not the locus of patents disclosing a "dancer"
    roll [i.e., a roll for tautening that slack, (i.e., tendency toward
    looseness) occurring in material suspended between two spaced
    material-supports]; for such a "dancer", see subclasses 27+ (and
    specifically subclass 44), 21, and 168+ (specifically subclasses 190+).

    The word "tensioner" has acquired a variety of meanings in all of the arts
    relating to advancing of indeterminate-length* material. Patents disclosing
    a means (often termed "tensioner") for retarding the advance of material
    moving to a work station may be found in the classes and subclasses
    referred to in (82) Note, Paragraph (F), in which classes "tensioner" may
    also mean a "dancer" as used herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     27+, 44, and 168+, and see (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclasses 240+ and see the notes
    thereto, for other method and apparatus for stretching (which may be
    accomplished by the same instrumentality that accomplished tensioning).

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclass 146 for feeding and tensioning
    apparatus in a knitting machine.

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 254+ for a tensioning device in a sewing machine.

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclasses 51+, 73+, and 82+ for similar apparatus combined
    with a tearing edge.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 410+ and 147+ for
    tensioning means for elongated material.


CLS 226/196.1
TXT PASSIVE GUIDE:

    Device under the class definition comprising means to direct or confine the
    material* acted upon or affected only by external force.

    (1)     Note. The mere support, or prevention of downward movement, of
    material* under the influence of gravity is not significant as a guiding
    function. An inclined plane or the like, (which is utilized not for mere
    support of the material*, but to conduct it, or facilitate its deflection,
    to a different level) has a guiding function.

    (2)     Note. The "passive guide", in this and indented subclasses,
    performs its function without the necessary application of power thereto;
    it directs, deflects, orients, etc., the material* without furnishing any
    propelling force in the general direction of material* movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70+,    for guide means retaining the material* in contact with a
    reciprocating or oscillating prong.

    168+,   for an orbitally traveling material*-engaging surface(s) that may
    merely guide the material* relative to the advancing material* of
    indeterminate length* apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 2.1+ for a brushing or lining
    thimble for an opening or socket, or subclasses 108+ for a ferrule, ring,
    or thimble applied to the exterior opening of a rod, pipe, conduit,
    strand*, or other device.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 341+ for a copyholder
    where the copy is advanced relative to a static guide by manual force
    applied directly to the copy, or to guide or advance material* relative to
    a viewing locus; or  an indicator (e.g., line guide or pointer) relative to
    the copy and a support therefor.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 24 for a line
    guide or tip for a fishing rod.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 438+ for passive guide means in a cutting
    device.

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 136+ for a work manipulating guide combined with
    a specified sewing process or apparatus, or subclass 302 for a thread
    guiding or handling means combined with a specified sewing process or
    apparatus.

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways; in general, for devices
    limited to guiding material either vertically, horizontally, or at an
    inclination.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclass 150 for a guide to
    move a workpiece relative to the elongated-member-driving apparatus.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 157+ for a residual
    guide that directs a strand*, subclasses 346+ for a particular guide or
    guard for an unwinding and rewinding coil to coil machine convertible
    information carrier (e.g., magnetic tape or photographic film, etc.)
    cartridge system, subclass 377 for a reeling device with a spring motor
    having a particular guide structure, subclass 548 for particular guide or
    guard for convolute winding of material*, subclass 566 for an unwinding
    apparatus having a particular guide or guard, or subclasses 615+ for a
    residual guide or guard that directs elongated flexible material* that may
    be combined with more than nominal winding structure.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus For Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 389+ for a device or member for contacting and guiding moving
    cable.

    396,    Photography, subclass 646 for a film guide for a fluid treating
    apparatus.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclass 140
    for a belt guide having a surface in sliding contact with belt.


CLS 226/200
TXT Device under the class definition not provided for elsewhere.


CLS 227/
TTL ELONGATED-MEMBER-DRIVING APPARATUS

CLS 227/
TXT TABLE OF CONTENTS



    I.      Introductory Notes

    II.     Class Definition

    III.    Glossary of Terms

    IV.     Scope of the Class

    V.      Relationship to Other Classes Containing
    Elongated-Member-Driving Means, Per se

    VI.     Relationship to Combination Classes

    VII.    Relationship to Subcombination Classes

    VIII.   Other Class Relationships

    IX.     Listing of Other Classes Referred to Above

    X.      Art Term Index to Class 227

    XI.     Subclass Definitions

    I.      Introductory Notes

    This is a restricted class for the art of elongated-member-driving
    apparatus as defined in section II.  For original placement of a patent in
    this class, its claimed disclosure should meet the minimum requirements of
    the class definition, and should fall within the boundaries expressed in
    sections IV-VIII.

    The term "member", appearing throughout this Bulletin, is a defined term in
    Class 227 (see section III, Glossary), denoting an elongated object to be
    driven; usually, but not necessarily disclosed as a nail, stud, staple, or
    the like.

    Terms followed by an asterisk (*) will be found defined in section III,
    Glossary of Terms.  Throughout this Bulletin, certain very frequently
    appearing terms, such as work, product, member, and driver, are accompanied
    by the asterisk only where the exact meaning of the term is deemed
    particularly important.

    section X, Art Term Index, affords additional entries to Class 227 and
    closely associated art, by listing many well-known art terms and their most
    nearly corresponding subclasses in this class or in related classes.

    II.     Class Definition

    CLASS DEFINITION



    This class provides for a device comprising a pushing or driving element,
    disclosed as being guided for movement in a predetermined path and as being
    effective:

    (1)     to engage a member, or end portion of indeterminate length
    material, and to impart translatory motion to the same with respect to a
    workpiece, or

    (2)     to engage a workpiece and to translate the same or a portion
    thereof with respect to a member; said member or said end portion
    comprising a pointed and/or generally elongated rod-like or tubular
    projection substantially aligned with the direction of such translatory
    motion, said pushing or driving element serving, in either case, to
    initiate and/or increase a penetrating relationship between said workpiece
    and member (or workpiece and end portion); and further comprising at least
    one of the following: means to (a) modify, (b) position or (c) support, a
    workpiece or member.

    III.    Glossary of Terms

    ANVIL

    A nonactuated (fixed or adjustably positionable) tool having a face portion
    designed and intended to react against a driven member to restrict the
    movement of the material of said member in at least one direction during
    the driving of said member.

    DEFORM

    In this class is used in the sense imparted by the class definition of
    Class 72 (section II of the bulletin of that class).

    DRIVER

    A tangible instrumentality having a surface portion which is specifically
    designed and intended, upon actuation of said instrumentality, to act upon
    a member (or work) with sufficient force, to impart translatory motion
    there to effect an operation of the class type.

    DRIVER-CARRIAGE

    Structure to support the driver in a device of the class type.

    DRIVING-STATION

    That region of a machine wherein work must be located for an intended
    driving operation of the class type to be performed thereon.

    MATING-MEMBER

    A "mating-member".  A. discrete element which has as its sole  disclosed
    function that of aiding in maintaining a driven member in its penetrated
    relationship with the work, or has such a peculiar shape as to be obviously
    intended to perform this sole function; this sole function being
    accomplished by permanent interassociation or interlocking of the member
    and the "mating-member". (Note-A "mating-member" for the purposes of this
    class is considered a workpiece.)

    MEMBER

    An object, or the end portion of indeterminate length material, comprising
    at least one pointed and/or generally elongated rod-like or tubular
    projection disclosed as being intended to penetrate* work* when the member,
    or the work, is engaged and bodily moved by a driver* substantially in the
    directing of said projection(s).

    PENETRATE

    Act of inserting or imbedding (e.g., by piercing, etc.) all or a portion of
    an elongated member in work material, by bodily movement of the member or
    the proximate portion of the work material (as distinguished from relative
    deflection or deformation of plural portions of an exteriorly applied
    fastener, as in pinching, binding, clipping, hog-ringing, etc.).  The term
    may also refer to increasing or advancing an already established
    penetrating relationship, by bodily movement of the member relative to the
    work.

    PRODUCT

    Article or material into which a member* has been driven.

    (1)     Note.  The member is not considered part of the product but retains
    its identity as a member for any further operation to be performed on it.

    WORK, WORKPIECE

    Article or material other than the surface of the earth into which a
    member* is to be driven; or an assemblage of juxtaposed workpieces (objects
    and/or layers of material) into at least one of which a member is to be
    driven.

    IV.     Scope of the Class

    The subject matter of Class 227 relates to apparatus for applying a member
    (having an elongated rod-like or tubular projection) to one or more
    workpieces by relative movement between the member and the workpiece
    generally in the direction of a projection of the member.

    A patent claiming apparatus for driving a member may, however, be excluded
    from the class because of additional claimed subject matter, not expressly
    covered in the subclass titles and definitions.  Claimed subject matter
    which bars a patent from original placement in Class 227 may be summarized
    as follows (see sections V-VII of this Bulletin for more detailed
    discussion):

    A.      A method of applying a member, for which see Class 29, subclasses
    592+.

    B.      Apparatus for positively rotating a member during driving.  (See
    section V, A).

    C.      Apparatus for applying a clip, edge binding or hog ring (for which
    see Classes 29 and 72), except where there is bodily movement of the clip,
    etc., along a line in extension of a pointed portion of the clip, etc.,
    during work penetration.  A patent to the latter type of device is proper
    for Class 227.

    D.      A means for performing a particular operation or for making a
    special product, which is recognized as subject matter of some other
    existing class, e.g., pile-driver, boot or shoe making machine, etc., for
    which see the Index to Classification under the heading of the operation
    performed or product made.

    E.      Means for treating a product made by a device of this class, see
    section VI C, 1,a.

    V.      Relationship to Other Classes Containing Elongated-Member-Driving
    Means, Per se

    A.      Prefatory Note

    Class 227 definition (section II of this Bulletin) limits the movement of
    the member or work, imparted to it directly by a driver, to a rectilinear
    path but permits the member or work to turn; however, a positive means to
    rotate the member or work is excluded from Class 227 (see section VIII for
    loci of patents claiming positive means to rotate a member or work).

    B.      Ordnance Classes

    A patent claiming a firearm is placed in the appropriate ordnance class,
    unless it teaches that a barrel is intended to be in contact with work when
    the device is fired to propel a member, in which case the patent is proper
    for Class 227.  See Class 42, Firearms, and Class 89, Ordnance.

    C.      The Class of Tools (Class 81)

    Generally, a hand-wielded hammer is proper subject matter for Class 81.
    However, where there is claimed means to permit a device (e.g.,
    hammer-head) to move relative to handle, other than by a whipping or
    bending of the handle (which is subject matter for Class 81), placement of
    the patent is proper in Class 227, subclass 133.  See this section V, A
    above regarding the exclusion of member-rotating means (e.g., a screw
    driver) from this class.

    D.      Earthworking or Particular-Work Treating Classes

    A patent claim directed to means for driving a member into the earth or
    into certain specified kinds of work will be placed in the class providing
    for such earthworking or for operations on such work, of which the
    following are noted with examples of typical subject matter:

    1.      Class 104, Railways, subclass 17.1, railway-car-mounted means to
    drive a spike into a railway tie

    2.      Class 131, Tobacco, subclasses 106 and 113+, means for tagging
    tobacco products

    3.      Class 175, Boring or Penetrating the Earth, means for driving a
    casing, or means to drive a pile with means to remove the pile.

    4.      Class 405, Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 232+ for
    means for driving a pile into the earth.

    5.      Class 606, Surgery, subclass 187 for hair or artificial hair
    injectors or anchors.

    E.      Tool Actuation (Class 173)

    A patent claim directed only to apparatus for causing a driver to move a
    member, will be placed in Class 173, Tool Driving or Impacting

    VI.     Relationship to Combination Classes

    A.      Prefatory Note

    Class 227 is the locus for a patent claiming a combination of means to
    drive a member (e.g., nail) with any of the following:

    1.      means to perform a different operation on work prior to the
    member-driving operation, except for some special combinations in other
    classes, as noted in B and C below; or

    2.      means to treat a member or mating-member* before, during or after a
    class- type operation (e.g., clinching a driven nail) and including making
    or forming of such member; or

    3.      means to handle or cut the product of a class type operation; or

    4.      a device or feature, per se, classifiable in another class.

    B.      Classes of Particular Work or Product

    1.      As stated generally in VI A, above, a patent claim directed to a
    combination of means to assemble or treat work, with means to drive a
    member, is generally in Class 227, except where the combination is
    specifically provided for in another class based on the nature of the work.

    2.      Among such classes (or portions of classes) which are loci of
    patents to such combination are the following:

            Class 12, Boot and Shoe Making, subclasses 13.1, 18.3, 33.1, 43,
    43.5, 50+, 85.4+ and 108

            Class 128, Surgery

    Class 147, Coopering

            Class 270, Sheet-Material Associating, subclasses 37+ and 53

            Class 300, Brush, Broom, and Mop Making, subclasses 2+, 13 and 20

            Class 412, Bookbinding:  Process and Apparatus.

            Class 445, Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device
    Manufacturing.

            Class 493, Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other
    Manufacturing From a Sheet or Web.


    C.      Classes of Assembly Apparatus

    1.      Class 227 in the locus of patents directed to the combination of
    member-driving apparatus with apparatus for assembling workpieces, with the
    following exceptions:

    a.      A patent claim directed to apparatus for treating (other than by
    cutting; see this Section Paragraph A-3) a product consisting of
    work-pieces that have been assembled by an operation of the class type, is
    found, for example, in Class 29 or Class 118.

    b.      A patent claim directed to apparatus for either filling a
    receptacle, or for assembling workpieces or articles and bonding or
    strapping the assembled workpieces or articles, combined with apparatus for
    driving a member; which is proper for the appropriate packaging or wrapping
    class, principally Classes 53 and 100.


    2.      The following list of classes, in addition to those listed above in
    section VI. B (which also see), illustrates the location of patented art
    involving means for driving a member, in combination with assembly
    apparatus:

    Class 29, Metal Working, subclasses 33+

    Class 53, Package Making

    Class 100, Presses, subclasses 1+



    D.      The Class of Adhesive Bonding

    1.      Class 227 is the locus of patents directed to the combination of
    apparatus for applying a cement, for securing purposes, to a workpiece and
    means to drive a member into said workpiece, (or apparatus for applying
    cement to a member and driving the cemented member into a workpiece).

    2.      A patent directed to the method followed by the above apparatus is
    excluded from Class 227 and is placed in Class 156.

    E.      Miscellaneous Combinations

    A patent to the combination of member-driving apparatus with manufacturing
    or nonmanufacturing apparatus, not provided for in other classes (as, for
    instance, those classes set forth in paragraphs B and C of this section) or
    in preceding subclasses of this class, will be found in this class (227),
    subclass 156.

    VII.    Relationship to Subcombination Classes

    A.      Classes of Apparatus for Making a Member (e.g., nail, rivet, etc.)

    A patent claiming the combination of apparatus for making a member with
    means to drive the member will be found in Class 227, subclasses 33 or 82+.
     A patent claiming apparatus for making a member, per se, may be found in
    one of the following classes:

            Class 59, Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclasses 71-77 for
    making a staple   Class 72, Metal Deforming, subclasses 324 to 341 and 343
    to 378 for eyelet makingClass 470, Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer
    Making:  Process and Apparatus, subclasses 27+ for methods of making a
    rivet or nail and subclasses 110+ for machines of making a rivet or nail.

    B.      Work or Product Handling Classes

    1.      A patent claiming specific means to drive a member (e.g., nail) in
    combination with means to handle work or product is placed in Class 227.
    However, a patent claiming a device for handling work or product, per se,
    or in combination with a merely named driving means (e.g., "stapler",
    "nailer"), will be found in the proper material or article handling class.
    But if there is claimed means to synchronize a work or product handling
    device with a driving device (e.g., stapler), whether claimed specifically
    or by name only, the patent will be placed, as an original copy, in this
    class (227).

    2.      Among the classes directed to material or article handling means
    are the following:

    Class 198, Conveyors:  Power-Driven

            Class 209, Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids

            Class 221, Article Dispensing

            Class 226, Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length

            Class 242, Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding

            Class 271, Sheet Feeding or Delivering

            Class 294, Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements

            Class 414, Material or Article Handling


    C.      Classes of Heading Apparatus

    A patent claiming means to drive a member (e.g., rivet) with means to head
    the member will be found in this class (227), subclasses 51+.  However, a
    patent claiming means to head a member, in the absence of a limitation to
    driving means, will be found in Class 72 if no assembly apparatus is
    recited, otherwise in Class 29 (see section VI A 2 of Class 72 Bulletin for
    the line between Classes 29 and 72 in this respect).

    D.      Classes Relating to Tool Actuation

    1.      A patent claiming means to drive a member (e.g., nail) in
    combination with means to guide, modify, position or support the member or
    a workpiece is proper for Class 227. However, a patent claiming mere
    actuating means, or means to move a nominally recited driver (e.g.,
    "nailer") will be placed in a class appropriate to the power source or
    transmission means.

    2.      Among the classes directed to such subcombinations are the
    following:

    Class 60, Power Plants

            Class 74, Machine Element or Mechanism

            Class 91, Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type

    Class 173, Tool Driving or Impacting

            Class 418, Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices.


    E.      Classes Relating to Cutting Means

    A patent claiming means to cut work, product, or a member (e.g., nail,
    before or after driving), in combination with means to drive a member, is
    proper for Class 227. However, a patent claiming only means to cut may be
    found in one of the following classes:

    Class 83, Cutting

            Class 408, Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool.

    F.      The Class of Pressing (Class 100)

    A patent claiming means to apply a lid by pressing in combination with
    means to apply a member thereto is proper for Class 227.  However, a patent
    claiming only means for applying a lid by pressure will be found in Class
    100, subclasses 54 to 64.

    G.      The Class of Implements or Apparatus for Applying a Pushing or
    Pulling Force (Class 254).

    1.      A patent claiming means to apply and means to withdraw a member is
    proper for Class 227.  However, a patent claiming only structure to extract
    a nail will be found in Class 254, subclasses 18 to 27; and to extract a
    staple, in Class 254, subclass 28.

    2.      A patent claiming means to stretch material and means to apply a
    member thereto is proper for Class 227 (subclasses 12+), while portable
    tensioning implements or apparatus for flexible material, per se, is
    generally classifiable in Class 254, subclasses 199+.

    VIII.   Other Class Relationships

    A.      Classes of Articles

    Class 227 excludes a patent to an article, per se, (e.g., nail, staple,
    etc.), whose placement may be proper in one of the following classes:

    Class 24, Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 713.6+, for an eyelet
    used with a drawstring or laced-fastener.

    Class 206, Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 338+ for a package of
    fasteners.

    Class 411, Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, subclasses 439+ for impact driven fasteners
    (e.g., nails, spikes, staples, etc.); and subclasses 500+ for rivets.

    B.      The Classes of Tools

    Class 227 excludes patents to tools having a positive means to rotate a
    member or having no claimed structure to guide a driver.  Placement thereof
    may be in one of the following classes:

    Class 7, Compound Tools

            Class 81, Tools, subclass 52 for wrenches or screwdrivers which
    rotate a piece of work (e.g., nut, bolt, screw).

    IX.     Listing of classes referred to in the class definition (previous
    sections) and in the subclass definitions (section XI which follows) in
    this Bulletin.

            Section in      Subclass(es)

    Class   This Bulletin   in This Bulletin



    7       VIII B
    12      VI A    12
            VI D    2
    24      VIII A
    29      IV A, B, C      15, 19, 32, 51
            VI C 1a
            VI C 2
            VII C
    42      V B
    53      VI C 1b
            VI C 2
    59      VII A   33, 82
    60      VII D   29

    72      IV B, C         2, 4, 9, 51,
                            61, 64
            VII A
            VII C
    74      V C

            VII D   2
    81      V C VIII B

    83      VII E   1, 2, 5, 8,
                            21, 27, 74, 97,
                            100, 142, 150
    89      V B
    91      VII D   2
    100     VI C 1b 24
            VI C 2
            VII F
    104     V D 1   12,31
    118     VI C 1a
    125     V D
    128     V D
            VI D 2
    131     V D
    147     VI B 2
    156     VI D 2  14
    173     V C             132, 142, 146,
    175     V B
    192                     1, 8
    193                     150
    198     VII B 2 99
    206     VII A   65
    209     VII B 2
    221     VII B 2 45, 48
    226     VII B 2 1, 2, 5, 150
    228                     2
    234                     1, 4, 5
    242     VII B 2
    254     VII G 1, 2      12, 63
    269                     29, 149,
                                                   151,154270      VI D
    2   VI271   VII B 2294  VII B 2300      VII D 2405      V D408  VII
    E   27411   VIII, A412  VI B 2414       VII B 2445      VI D 2470       VII
    A   33, 82493   VI B    64



    X.      Subclass Definitions


CLS 227/1
TXT Device under the class definition provided with means capable of bringing
    at least one of the moving parts of the device to a halt or to such a
    condition as to terminate its intended operation, such means acting to
    accomplish its halting effect in response to a signal or impulse which
    cannot be predicted to occur during any particular one of a number of
    recurring cycles of operations (either of the machine as whole, or the
    driver, or of any part of the machine which has a cyclic law of operation).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 58+ for randomly actuated stopping means in a
    cutting machine.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, for stopping means in general; and
    subclass 134 for stopping of a machine responsive to part of an operative's
    body.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclass 48 for
    material moving means provided with randomly-actuated stopping means.

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), subclass 20 for selective
    cutting means provided with randomly actuated stopping means.


CLS 227/2
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including means for:

    (a)     detecting any of the following characteristics:  a state or
    property, a change in a state or property, or the occurrence of a
    predetermined event, in any of the following: the work*, the product of a
    machine, the machine itself, any part of the machine, or the environment of
    the machine affecting the operation thereof; and

    (b)     initiating (as a direct result of such detection) a force or energy
    impulse other than that generated or transmitted by the detecting means; and

    (c)     regulating or modifying (as a direct result of such initiation) the
    operation of said machine.

    (1)     Note.  This definition requires a patent to claim at least four
    instrumentalities for original placement herein.  One of these must be a
    member driving machine, or a device (e.g., work feeder, work-heater,
    product-handler) necessary to the proximate function of member driving. The
    other three are:

    (a)     a senser (e.g., photo-cell system, trip-lever, pressure diaphragm)
    to detect a condition as stated in (a) of the definition:

    (b)     an activator (e.g., an element to make or break an electric
    circuit, a clutch, a valve) to cause a release of energy more than, or
    different from, that accounted for by mere change in condition (e.g.,
    position or movement) of the senser while it is functioning; and

    (c)     a controller (e.g., a motor or driver for said machine or device)
    to change or cause the operation of said machine or device.

            Therefore, a cam follower (or senser) directly linked to a
    controller, whereby follower movement directly effects controller movement,
    is not proper subject matter for this subclass due to lack of an activator
    as defined. On the other hand, disclosure of a cam follower that makes and
    breaks an electrical circuit that energizes a motor, may be placed herein.

    (2)     Note.  A voluntary act of the person operating the machine is not
    proper subject matter for this subclass.  For example, disclosure of an
    on-off switch manipulated by an operative to start and/or stop the machine
    (even though the switch initiates a release of energy), should be
    considered for subclass 1, but is not classified herein.

    (3)     Note.  The machine that is regulated by the control means is not
    limited to a member driving machine of this class. It can be another
    machine associated with the member driver if the claim reciting the other
    machine and member driver is acceptable for original placement into this
    class (227).

    (4)     Note.  The control systems disclosed in the patents of this and
    indented subclasses are similar in concept to control systems of other
    classes, particularly Class 226, Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length
    and Class 83, Cutting.  The total operations and the claimed combinations
    are, of course, different, but the control systems, per se, found in
    Classes 83 and 226 are usually analogous to those herein, and may be
    applicable to the machines of this class (227).  In the "SEARCH CLASS"
    notes for the subclasses indented hereunder, reference to this (4) Note
    indicates that the other class and subclass should be considered because
    the control system, per se, of a patent in the other class may be similar
    to a control system, per se, of this (227) class.  The notes to Class 83,
    subclass 399 (which see) summarize all the subclasses in Class 83
    pertaining to "control" subclasses therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 6+ for control means in a metal
    deforming machine, wherein the control means, per se, is similar to those
    of this and indented subclasses.

    83,     Cutting, and see (4) Note, above.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, and see (4) Note, above.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 8+ for control means in a metal
    fusion bonding machine, wherein the control means, per se, is similar to
    those of this and indented subclasses.


CLS 227/3
TXT Device under subclass 2 comprising actuated mechanism for moving or
    assuring movement of work toward a driving-station*, and wherein the
    detector is arranged to sense a given condition or position of some portion
    of said actuated mechanism.


CLS 227/4
TXT Device under subclass 2 comprising a movable anvil* and/or movable means
    adapted to hold work at a driving-station*, and wherein the detector is
    arranged to sense the presence or absence of said anvil or said
    work-holding means at a given location.

    (1)     Note.  An element positioned adjacent a surface which supports
    work, which element presents an obstacle to movement of the work in a
    desired direction, is not means to hold work but a work-stop abutment.  If
    this element acts as a detector for the work, patents claiming such element
    will be placed in subclasses 5+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 10.1+, 13.4+, 17.1, 17.2, and 20.1+ for
    control means responsive to position of a tool (e.g., anvil) or tool-linked
    part.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclass 12 for control means responsive to
    position of a work holder in a fusion bonding machine.


CLS 227/5
TXT Device under subclass 2 wherein the means for detecting is arranged to
    sense the presence, absence, position, size, or some other property or
    condition of work* associated with the device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 211, 286+, 360+ for a control system responsive
    to work in a cutting machine. Also see (4) Note under Class 227, subclass 2.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 10+ for a
    control system responsive to work for feeding the work.  Also see (4) Note
    under Class 227, subclass 2.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 9+ for a control system responsive
    to work.


CLS 227/6
TXT Device under subclass 5 wherein the detecting means is arranged to sense
    the location of a workpiece in the device.


CLS 227/7
TXT Device under subclass 6 comprising means to move the driver* through a
    driving stroke, and wherein the regulating means governs the said driver
    moving means.


CLS 227/8
TXT Device under the class definition provided with means to prevent motion of
    some part of the device in any manner (except said means itself) until said
    means is moved so as to permit movement of said part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 399+ for cutting means provided with an
    interlock.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 129+ for a safety
    device or interlock.


CLS 227/9
TXT Device under the class definition comprising means to hold and/or guide a
    member, a chamber or barrel designed to direct the force of an expanding
    gas therein against such member, and means to cause a violent expansion of
    gas within said chamber or barrel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 632+ for a motor actuated by fluid
    pressure generated by an explosion and see search Class notes thereunder
    for other loci of explosive-type device similar to those in this and
    indented subclasses.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 56 for means to deform metal by the
    direct application of a shock wave thereto.


CLS 227/10
TXT Device under subclass 9 including an element movable in the chamber or
    barrel adapted to transmit the force from the gas to a member.


CLS 227/11
TXT Device under subclass 9 comprising means to block or deflect the flight of
    chips or particles away from a given location, as for the purpose of
    preventing injury to an operative.


CLS 227/12
TXT Device under the class definition provided with means adapted to impale or
    grip a portion of flexible material, and said means being movable to exert
    a tensile force upon said flexible material, and wherein the driver* is
    arranged to force a member through said flexible material and into a solid
    supporting surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 199+ for portable implements or apparatus for tensioning
    flexible material.


CLS 227/13
TXT Device under subclass 12 comprising force transmitting linkage capable of
    moving said impaling or gripping means with respect to another portion of
    said device.


CLS 227/14
TXT Device under the class definition including means to apply an adhesive
    coating to a work surface and means to bring said work surface into contact
    with another work surface, or means to apply an adhesive coating to a
    member* prior to an operation of the class type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for means to sequentially secure layers together by a member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    91 for a method followed by the above apparatus.


CLS 227/15
TXT Device under the class definition comprising means to move or guide a
    mating-member* to a position in the driving path of the member* and/or to
    maintain a mating-member in such position, so as to receive in an
    interassociated manner the member during the driving operation.

    (1)     Note.  The positioning of the "mating-member" must take place
    before completion of the driving of the member.

    (2)     Note.  Figure 1 represents a member (lacing hook) with projections
    to be driven through work and into a mating-member, which has no disclosed
    function other than to aid in the securement of the driven member.  In
    Figure 2, the pronged member is to be driven through work and secured in
    the lacing hook; the latter constitutes "work" rather than a
    "mating-member" because it has a function (i.e., to hold a lace), in
    addition to its function of securing the driven member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19+,    for a disclosure of a workpiece similar to a mating-member and
    assembling it with another workpiece.

    143+,   for a disclosure of a workpiece similar to mating-member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 243.521+ and 243.53+ for apparatus for
    securing objects together by means which may comprise a mating-member
    (e.g., a rivet and bur).


CLS 227/16
TXT Device under subclass 15 wherein the positioning means is designed and
    intended to coact with an elongated mating-member and into which a
    plurality of members are driven in spaced relationship in the direction of
    elongation.

    (1)     Note.  A member having a plurality of projections which penetrate
    the work (e.g., staple) is not considered a plurality of members.


CLS 227/17
TXT Device under subclass 15 comprising means to fashion, shape, deform or cut
    a mating-member.


CLS 227/18
TXT Device under subclass 15 including a positively actuated means to move or
    transport a mating member into the driving path of the member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99+,    for means to feed a member, and see search notes for other loci of
    feed means.


CLS 227/19
TXT Device under the class definition comprising means to move or guide a
    workpiece* into juxtaposition with another workpiece, and including (a)
    means to hold or position a member* between said workpieces before they are
    moved into juxtaposition or (b) means to hold or position said workpieces
    in alignment with a driver* for application of a member thereto.

    (1)     Note.  One or both of the workpieces being assembled may be
    indeterminate-length material.

    (2)     Note.  For placement as an original in this subclass area, a patent
    must be directed to a member-inserting device with means at least to direct
    or guide two workpieces or lengths of material into contact at some point
    and to present such assembled work to the action of a driver.  Usually, but
    not necessarily, the inserted member will serve to secure the workpieces
    together.

    (3)     Note.  A work stop abutment, disclosed as being useful for
    facilitating the registry, of two or more workpieces at a driving-station,
    is insufficient to constitute "means to move or guide a workpiece" under
    the subclass definition.

    (4)     Note.  A fastener member is not generally regarded as "work", for
    the purposes of this class.  A device provided with means to feed a member
    to driving position, on or near a workpiece, is not classifiable as an
    assembly device but is subject matter for the following subclasses 107+.
    Means for performing an operation on the member (such as cutting, shaping,
    heading, etc.) is specifically provided for in appropriate subclasses of
    this class (e.g., subclasses 79+, with means to cut member after
    penetration).

    (5)     Note.  For the line between this subclass (and those indented
    hereunder) and classes relating to combined driving and assembly, see
    section VI of this Bulletin and for classes relating to assembly, see
    section VII of this Bulletin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 700+ for assembly apparatus, in general.


CLS 227/20
TXT Device under subclass 19 comprising means to alter the form, configuration,
    dimension, proportion or contour of a workpiece either with or without
    removal of material.

    (1)     Note.  Means to feed a flexible, resilient or flaccid workpiece
    from a coil or other source and to straighten it for assembly to another
    workpiece is not considered "shaping means"; disclosures of such means will
    be found in subclasses 44+, Endless conveyor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12+,    for means to stretch flaccid work and fasten it to rigid work.

    44+,    for a disclosure of means to straighten flexible work before
    assembly to other work on an endless conveyor.

    64+,    for means to shape work prior to application of a member.


CLS 227/21
TXT Device under subclass 20 provided with means to sever, incise, pierce or
    abrade a workpiece or some part thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for a disclosure of means to punch or drill work before assembly.

    47,     for a disclosure of work cutting means associated with reel-type
    supply means.

    69,     70+ and 76, for various disclosures of work-cutting means
    associated with a device of the class type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, for cutting apparatus, generally.


CLS 227/22
TXT Device under subclass 20 including means to revolve a workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  The work may rotate about a fixed mandrel or the mandrel
    rotate with the work.

    (2)     Note.  The rotation of the work may cause an element (hoop strip)
    to be coiled or wrapped around the workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for means to rotate work, associated with magazine-type work supply
    means, in a device of the class type.


CLS 227/23
TXT Device under subclass 22 comprising configured mating elements between
    which the workpiece is formed to a desired configuration.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are patents to a device for forming a basket
    from a blank of slatted material termed "basket mat".

    (2)     Note.  Means to clamp a piece of work to a mandrel and rotate the
    mandrel to form the work around it is not die shaping means for this
    subclass; such disclosures will be found in subclasses 22 and 24.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22      and 24, for a disclosure of work-shaping means other than dies for
    rotating work.


CLS 227/24
TXT Device under subclass 22 including means to position and/or hold a
    workpiece within an opening of a second workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are patents to a device for inserting and
    securing an end or bottom in a rotatably supported container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 54+ for presses for applying lids to portable
    receptacles.


CLS 227/25
TXT Device under subclass 20 wherein said means is effective, as disclosed, to
    gather, or pucker a nonrigid, limber and flexible workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  The work is generally gathered and after another workpiece
    is applied thereto member is driven through the gather to secure the pieces
    together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65,     for means to buckle a flaccid workpiece.


CLS 227/26
TXT Device under subclass 19 including means to introduce a member*
    intermediate workpieces.

    (1)     Note.  For example, workpieces are forced together, causing the
    member positioned between them to penetrate the workpieces and form a
    laminated assembly.


CLS 227/27
TXT Device under subclass 19 including a tool that moves relative to a
    workpiece while cutting material out of the confines of the workpiece so
    that the cut does not intersect any edge (exterior or interior) of the
    workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for a rotatable cutting tool to form an opening in a workpiece for
    a member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, for punching apparatus, generally.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, for drilling
    apparatus generally.


CLS 227/28
TXT Device under subclass 19 comprising means, made effective after an
    actuation of the driver, to move or guide an additional workpiece into
    juxtaposition with said first-mentioned workpieces and into alignment with
    said driver, and means to cause another actuation of said driver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for means to cement work or member and apply a member to a layer(s)
    of work.


CLS 227/29
TXT Device under subclass 28 wherein the means to move or guide successive
    workpieces into juxtaposition comprises relatively movable work-engageable
    elements and means to force or bias said elements into gripping engagement
    with a workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  A work clamp, for the purposes of this and other subclasses
    in this class, must comprise relatively movable jaws or their equivalent;
    i.e., a closely fitting unitary last or form is not a "clamp".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40      and 124, for a work clamp interrelated to other mechanism in a
    device of the class type.

    152+,   for a work clamp in a device of the class type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, for a work holder (e.g., clamp), generally.


CLS 227/30
TXT Device under subclass 19 wherein said means to hold or position the
    workpieces comprises relatively movable work-engageable elements, and means
    to force or bias said elements into gripping engagement with said
    workpieces, one of said elements being configured to accommodate the
    passage of a driver toward and from the gripped workpieces.


CLS 227/31
TXT Device under subclass 19 wherein, as disclosed, one of the workpieces has a
    projecting loop or apertured portion, and wherein the device is effective
    to secure the workpieces together by applying a member which passes or is
    driven through the loop or apertured portion of said workpiece.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 104+ for a machine for attaching a button by
    thread.


CLS 227/32
TXT Device under subclass 31 comprising means effective to pass said member
    through the loop or apertured portion of said one workpiece.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 241 for stringing articles, and
    particularly for a device for producing threaded buttons as articles of
    manufacture.


CLS 227/33
TXT Device under subclass 32 comprising means to shape or fashion said member
    prior to the completion of its application to the workpieces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82+,    for means to shape or form a member prior to its application to
    work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, for a machine to manufacture
    staples.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, subclasses 27+ for methods of making a rivet or nail and
    subclasses 110+ for machines of making a rivet or nail.


CLS 227/34
TXT Device under subclass 32 comprising means effective to force said member
    through the other of said workpieces prior to its passage through the loop
    or apertured portion of said one workpiece.


CLS 227/35
TXT Device under subclass 34 which, as disclosed, applies tack or other
    one-prong type member to the workpieces.


CLS 227/36
TXT Device under subclass 34 comprising means effective to forward a workpiece
    to a driving-station*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99+,    for means to convey work to a driving-station and see search notes
    thereunder for other loci of a work conveying device.


CLS 227/37
TXT Device under subclass 31 comprising means effective to forward a workpiece
    to a driving-station*.

    (1)     Note.  See search notes under subclass 36 for location of other
    work feed means in devices of the class type.


CLS 227/38
TXT Device under subclass 37 comprising a power-transmitting linkage connected
    to the driver to move same through an effective member-applying stroke.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129+,   146 and 147, for various specific driver-actuating means in a
    device of the class type.


CLS 227/39
TXT Device under subclass 19 comprising dynamic means to effect movement of a
    workpiece with respect to the driving-station*, or a device associated and
    movable with the workpiece to hold or support the workpiece and facilitate
    movement thereof with respect to the driving-station.

    (1)     Note.  The work-moving means may comprise any structure by which
    the work is moved relative to a driving-station even though the structure
    itself may be actuated manually.  Examples of such structure are a pivoted
    work-support, a pusher, etc.

    (2)     Note.  The conveyor means of this subclasses (39+) may move one
    workpiece, or more than one, according to the design and mode of operation
    of the particular machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99+,    for work feed means in a device of the class type and see search
    notes thereunder for other loci of work conveying or feeding devices.


CLS 227/40
TXT Device under subclass 39 wherein the means to effect movement of the
    workpiece comprises a gripping element which holds the workpiece in its
    moved position.


CLS 227/41
TXT Device under subclass 39 provided with means to permit a work holder or
    support to oscillate or turn about an axis.

    (1)     Note.  The pivotal movement may constitute the work-forwarding
    motion of the conveyor, or may be an additional, work-orienting or indexing
    motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99+,    for a pivoted work carrier, per se, in a device of the class type.


CLS 227/42
TXT Device under subclass 41 wherein the work holder or support is movable
    about two distinct pivotal centers or axes.


CLS 227/43
TXT Device under subclass 39 comprising means supplemental to said work moving
    means for positioning or repositioning an apertured work-piece at the
    driving-station with its opening(s) in alignment with a member in position
    to be driven into or through said opening(s).


CLS 227/44
TXT Device under subclass 39 wherein the workpiece moving means comprises a
    series of workpiece engaging portions arranged in a circular array or as a
    belt-like loop of articulated portions, each such portion being adapted to
    engage and move a workpiece relative to a driving-station.

    (1)     Note.  The conveyor portions usually, but not necessarily, provide
    support for the work as it is being moved and while it is at rest at one or
    more treating stations.


CLS 227/45
TXT Device under subclass 44 including means supplemental to the work-moving
    means which supplemental means temporarily stores discrete workpieces
    which, as disclosed, are fed to or dispensed onto the work-moving means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for magazine-type work supply means combined with other than an
    endless conveyor, in a device of the class type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for an article-storing
    magazine in a dispensing device.


CLS 227/46
TXT Device under subclass 44 including a drum or capstan-like means upon which
    work may be wrapped or coiled for storage.


CLS 227/47
TXT Device under subclass 46 comprising means to sever a workpiece from the
    supply of material stored on the reel or from another workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  See search notes under subclass 21 for other loci of cutting
    means.


CLS 227/48
TXT Device under subclass 39 having means to temporarily store a plurality of
    discrete workpieces which, as disclosed, are to be fed to a driving-station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for magazine-type work supply means combined with an endless
    conveyor, in a device of the class type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for an article-storing
    magazine combined with a dispensing device.


CLS 227/49
TXT Device under subclass 48 including means supplemental to the magazine work
    supply means which supplemental means turns the work for successive
    application of members at one or more driving-stations.

    (1)     Note.  The work may be turned about its own axis at the
    driving-station, or turned as it is moved from one driving-station to
    another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for means to rotate work, combined with an assembly device, in a
    device of the class type.


CLS 227/50
TXT Device under subclass 48 including means supplemental to the magazine work
    supply means which supplemental means transports, as a unit, a plurality of
    workpieces which have been juxtapositioned.

    (1)     Note.  The workpieces are fed from a magazine supply to a work
    holding device which holds the workpieces in an assembled position and then
    the work holder is moved to a driving-station.


CLS 227/51
TXT Device under the class definition including means to deform an end portion
    of the member in such a manner as to increase the size, and/or to change
    the form, of the cross-section of said end portion after the member has
    penetrated the work.

    (1)     Note.  A simple bending or deflecting (i.e., clenching) of a member
    during or after driving, is not regarded as "heading" for this subclasses
    (51+). Disclosures of clenching means are to be found in many subclasses
    throughout the Class 227 schedule; patents directed to this feature are
    placed as originals in subclass 155.

    (2)     Note.  For the purposes of this subclass (51), the device must
    deform the member during or at the end of the driving stroke.  The shaping
    or forming of a member prior to its penetration into work is effected by
    the machines classified in subclasses 82+.

    (3)     Note.  Figure 3 diagrammatically illustrates various means to head
    a member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for means to bend a projecting end portion of a driven member
    remote from a surface of work.

    82+,    for a device which shapes or forms a member prior to its
    application to work.

    155,    for a nailing device having clenching means, and see (1) Note,
    above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 243.521+ and 243.53+ for a device which
    upsets or heads a rod, wire or other elongated work associated with an
    assembly device.

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses for a device which upsets
    or heads a rod, wire or other elongated work.


CLS 227/52
TXT Device under subclass 51 wherein the member is disclosed as being driven
    through the wall of a hollow elongated workpiece, with either the driver or
    the "heading" means functioning within the confines of the hollow portion
    of the workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  The tubular workpiece operated upon by the devices of this
    subclass may have other than a cylindrical cross-section and also may be
    closed on one end, but this end portion is not considered as the "wall" of
    the subclass definition.


CLS 227/53
TXT Device under subclass 51 wherein the driver constitutes the means which
    deforms the end portion of the member.


CLS 227/54
TXT Device under subclass 51 wherein the heading means has a member engaging
    face which tapers to either a point or a line such that in operation, this
    point or line penetrates the member and initiates deformation thereof.


CLS 227/55
TXT Device under subclass 51 wherein a portion of the heading means, before
    initial contact of the means with the member, projects into a void space
    within the confines of the shank of the member.

    (1)     Note.  A hollow shank member for the purposes of this subclass
    includes those members that have an opening extending through their entire
    length (e.g., tubular rivet) as well as those members that have only a
    recess in the end portion which does not extend entirely through the
    member.  A simple "split" rivet is not regarded as a hollow member within
    the meaning of the subclass definition.


CLS 227/56
TXT Device under subclass 55 including a plurality of heading means made
    effective during a single driving stroke to head a plurality of members.


CLS 227/57
TXT Device under subclass 55 including dynamic means to effect movement of the
    work or product relative to the driving-station*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99+,    for means to convey work to a driving-station, and see search notes
    thereunder for other loci of a work conveying device.


CLS 227/58
TXT Device under subclass 55 including means for making an aperture in the
    workpiece into which said element is driven.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67+,    for a device of the class type having means to form an opening in
    work for a member.


CLS 227/59
TXT Device under subclass 58 wherein the means for heading the member
    additionally functions to make an aperture in the workpiece.


CLS 227/60
TXT Device under subclass 55 wherein either the driver or the heading means has
    an elongated projection adapted to enter the hollow portion of the member
    prior to the heading of the member to hold the member in a position to be
    driven and/or headed.


CLS 227/61
TXT Device under subclass 51 wherein the heading means comprises a tool having
    a member-engaging face which restricts the flow of the material of the
    member in at least one direction during the deformation of the end portion
    of the member (e.g., a flat or plane faced tool).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 462+ for a tool (e.g., anvil),
    generally.


CLS 227/62
TXT Device under subclass 61 wherein the member-engaging face is so configured
    as to restrict the flow of the material of the engaged end portion of the
    member in at least two directions during the deformation of the end portion
    of the member (e.g., concave tool face).


CLS 227/63
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising means engageable with a
    member for extracting said member from a workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  The extracting means, for the purposes of this subclass, may
    be a tongue or claw to be manipulated in the manner of a claw-hammer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 18+ for a nail extractor.


CLS 227/64
TXT Device under the class definition including means (a) for altering the
    form, configuration, dimension, proportion or contour of a workpiece either
    with or without removal of material, or (b) for severing, incising,
    piercing, or abrading work or product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses for metal deforming means,
    generally.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 395+ for paper shaping, generally.


CLS 227/65
TXT Device under subclass 64 including means to shape, gather or pucker a
    nonrigid limber and flexible workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  The work is generally gathered and a fastener is driven
    through the gather, by what is generally designated as a pinning machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for patents wherein the fastener is driven through the gather to
    secure two or more workpieces together.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 380+ for a pin package,
    per se.


CLS 227/66
TXT Device under subclass 64 wherein a tool is moved in alternate directions in
    a straight line, for example, toward and away from a cooperating tool to
    deform* the work and to retract from the work placed there between.


CLS 227/67
TXT Device under subclass 64 wherein the shaping means makes an aperture(s) in
    said workpiece into which a member is to be driven.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for means to form an opening for a member, in combination with
    heading means for the member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    402,    Binder Device Releasably Engaging Aperture or Notch of Sheet,
    subclass 1 for a sheet retainer device which includes in combination, an
    impaling- type sheet retainer and a discrete sheet aperture forming device,
    (i.e., paper punch) which perforates a sheet prior to placing the same on
    the retainer; subclass 7 for an impaling-type sheet retainer which
    penetrates and inserts a pliant strand through a sheet surface and subclass
    25 for an impaling-type sheet retainer including means to force a sheet
    upon the sheet retainer.


CLS 227/68
TXT Device under subclass 67 wherein said shaping means comprises a driver*
    which is adapted to penetrate work.


CLS 227/69
TXT Device under subclass 67 in which said shaping means comprises drilling or
    boring apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for a drilling device combined with assembly means in a device of
    the class type.


CLS 227/70
TXT Device under subclass 67 in which said shaping means comprises two or more
    incising, piercing or severing elements.


CLS 227/71
TXT Device under subclass 70 wherein said incising, piercing, or severing
    elements are arranged to produce a pair of holes for the reception of a two
    pronged member (e.g., staple).


CLS 227/72
TXT Device under subclass 70 comprising a rotatably mounted holder for said
    incising, piercing, or severing elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for a pivoted carrier for one cutting tool, in a device of the
    class type.


CLS 227/73
TXT Device under subclass 67 provided with actuated means to effect movement of
    the work with respect to a driving-station*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99+,    for work feeding means to a driving-station, and see search notes
    thereunder for loci of other work feed devices.


CLS 227/74
TXT Device under subclass 73 wherein said actuated work-moving means consists,
    at least in part, of a tool element of said work-shaping means, which tool
    element is caused to move in the direction of work feed motion while it is
    in contact with the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 218 for a cutting tool having work feed motion.


CLS 227/75
TXT Device under subclass 74 provided with means to permit the holder or
    support of said tool element to oscillate or turn about an axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for a pivoted carrier for plural tools, in a device of the class
    type.


CLS 227/76
TXT Device under subclass 64 provided with means to sever, incise, pierce or
    abrade work or product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for cutting means combined with assembly means, and see search
    notes thereunder for other loci for cutting means.


CLS 227/77
TXT Device under the class definition having means to change the shape of a
    portion of a member at a point distant from a workpiece after initiation of
    work penetration by such member, said portion being spaced from the work
    both before and after the change in shape is effected.

    (1)     Note.  Means to cut a driven member is not proper subject matter
    for this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Any deformation of a driven member which increases the size,
    and/or alters the form, of the cross-section of an end portion is provided
    for in preceding subclasses 51+.

    (3)     Note.  Figure 4 illustrates a member driven into work and a portion
    of the member (i.e., hook) deformed at a point from the work surface by
    apparatus typical of this subclass.

    (4)     Note.  This subclass will include patents which disclose an
    additional workpiece in substantial contact with the shaped portion of the
    member other than a workpiece into which the member is driven.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51+,    for means to head a driven member, and see (2) Note, above.

    79+,    for means to cut a driven member after the member is driven.


CLS 227/78
TXT Device under the class definition having a plurality of applying devices
    any one of which is separately useable at the option of the operator.


CLS 227/79
TXT Device under the class definition provided with means to sever a protruding
    end portion of a driven member, or to sever a driven member from stock
    material.


CLS 227/80
TXT Device under subclass 79 wherein said means is adapted to detach the driven
    end portion of stock material.

    (1)     Note.  The machine in this subclass is sometimes known as "Wire
    Inserting and Cutting Machines".

    (2)     Note.  The material before being applied is usually in the form of
    a spool or wire.


CLS 227/81
TXT Device under the class definition which includes means to move one or more
    drivers* into driving engagement with the work while the work is being
    moved to and through a driving-station* and in which the driver's movement
    includes, as a necessary factor, motion in the direction of such work
    movement.


CLS 227/82
TXT Device under class definition comprising means to shape or fashion a
    member* before its application to a workpiece.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclasses 71+ for means to
    make staples, per se.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, subclasses 27+ for methods of making a rivet or nail and
    subclasses 110+ for machines of making a rivet or nail.


CLS 227/83
TXT Device under subclass 82 wherein the shaping means comprises an element(s)
    for diverting all or part of the member away from the path in which the
    member would be moved by a driver* in the absence of said diverting element.


CLS 227/84
TXT Device under subclass 82 wherein said shaping means comprises a portion
    which is capable of adjustment to effect the production of members of
    different lengths.


CLS 227/85
TXT Device under subclass 82 wherein the shaping means comprises a plurality of
    elements and means to move or to guide one of said elements with respect to
    another element so that at least one of said elements is moved past the
    other while in contact with a web, strand or other material to produce a
    member from said material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92,     for opposed tools to form a member.


CLS 227/86
TXT Device under subclass 85 comprising a driver* having a severing element
    integral therewith or secured thereto.


CLS 227/87
TXT Device under subclass 85 wherein one of the shaping elements is configured
    to accommodate the passage of a driver* during a driving operation.


CLS 227/88
TXT Device under subclass 87 comprising means to move another of said shaping
    elements toward and away from its forming position and from the path of the
    driver.


CLS 227/89
TXT Device under subclass 88 including means to support the formed member and
    means to allow said support to move away from the path of a driver during a
    driving operation.


CLS 227/90
TXT Device under subclass 88 comprising means to restrain the motion of said
    other shaping element to an arcuate path.


CLS 227/91
TXT Device under subclass 87, said shaping means comprising means, distinct
    from the driver, to divide the material.


CLS 227/92
TXT Device under subclass 82, said shaping means comprising a plurality of
    elements each having a material-engaging surface portion wherein one of
    said elements moves in a direction such that said surface portions of two
    or more elements approach each other to form a member, such motion
    continuing until said portions move (1) into contact, or (2) toward
    ultimate contact but restrained therefrom by the presence of an intervening
    web, strand, or other material.


CLS 227/93
TXT Device under subclass 82 wherein the shaping means consists only of means
    to divide or cut a web, strand or other material.

    (1)     Note.  For placement of a patent as an original in this or indented
    subclasses it should contain no claimed forming operation other than
    cutting or punching in making a finished member.

    (2)     Note.  Apparatus for breaking or cutting apart fully formed members
    that are glued or adhered together is not regarded as forming means for
    this or indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120+,   for means to break or cut apart formed members glued or adhered
    together.


CLS 227/94
TXT Device under subclass 93 comprising additional cutting means, and means,
    made effective after an actuation of the first-named cutting or dividing
    means, to actuate said additional cutting means to complete the formation
    of a member.


CLS 227/95
TXT Device under subclass 93 including a positively actuated means to move,
    into position for driving, a series of partially formed members integrally
    linked together by uncut portions of material.


CLS 227/96
TXT Device under subclass 95 comprising means to restrain the motion of said
    actuated means to an arcuate path.


CLS 227/97
TXT Device under subclass 93 wherein the shaping (i.e., severing) means has a
    motion, in addition to its severing motion, towards the path of a driver to
    convey a member into said path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 218 for a cutting tool having work feeding motion.


CLS 227/98
TXT Device under subclass 93 including a member holder and means to move said
    holder toward and away from the path of a driver.


CLS 227/99
TXT Device under class definition comprising dynamic means to effect movement
    of work or product with respect to the driving-station*, or a device
    associated and movable with the work or product to hold or support the work
    or product and facilitate movement thereof with respect to the
    driving-station.

    (1)     Note.  The work-moving means may comprise any structure by which
    the work is moved relative to a driving-station even though the structure
    itself may be actuated manually.  Examples of such structure are a movable
    table, a pivoted work-support, etc.

    (2)     Note.  For the lines between this subclass (and those indented
    hereunder) and classes relating to work handling, see section VII B 1 of
    this Bulletin.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      36, 37, 39+, 57, and 73+, for a disclosure for means to feed work
    to a driving station.

    18,     95+, 97, 98, and 107+, for a disclosure for means to feed a member
    to a driving-station.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, for conveyors of general utility and see
    Note (2), above.


CLS 227/100
TXT Device under subclass 99 wherein the work or product conveying means
    comprises a movable means which cooperates significantly with means to move
    the driver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 426 for interrelated work-conveying and a cutting
    tool moving means.


CLS 227/101
TXT Device under subclass 100 comprising common means to move both the conveyor
    and a driver carriage*.


CLS 227/102
TXT Device under subclass 100 comprising a common means to drive said
    cooperating means, and means to adjust the speed or position of one of said
    cooperating means with respect to the other.


CLS 227/103
TXT Device under subclass 100 comprising at least two means to move the work or
    product.


CLS 227/104
TXT Apparatus under subclass 100 comprising a work support movable in a path
    which is neither solely rectilinear nor solely circular, during contact
    with the work.


CLS 227/105
TXT Device under subclass 100 comprising a work support movable in a circular
    path during contact with the work.


CLS 227/106
TXT Device under subclass 99 comprising a work support movable in a path which
    is not rectilinear during contact with the work.


CLS 227/107
TXT Device under class definition provided with means to transport a member or
    passive means which is operative to define or limit the path of movement
    (i.e., to direct wholly or partially, the course) of a moving member*, or
    to orient such member, to a suitable zone for an operation on said member
    by a claimed driver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99,     for means to move work, product or member relative to a
    driving-station, and see search note thereunder for other related places
    and classes.


CLS 227/108
TXT Device under subclass 107 provided with an element(s) which enters the work
    and engages a portion of a driven member to bend that portion into
    interlocking engagement with the work.


CLS 227/109
TXT Device under subclass 107 wherein the means to transport or guide the
    member is designed and intended to allow passage of members of different
    dimensions or adjustment to supply a different number of members.


CLS 227/110
TXT Device under subclass 107 provided with means to adjust, position or guide
    the driver with respect to a workpiece for the application of a member
    thereto.


CLS 227/111
TXT Device under subclass 110 wherein the means to position the driver
    comprises means to move the driver-carriage* between successive operation
    of the driver.


CLS 227/112
TXT Device under subclass 107 wherein the means to transport the member
    comprises a direct impingement of a stream of liquid or gaseous material.

    (1)     Note.  The pressure of the fluid current may be superatmospheric or
    subatmospheric.


CLS 227/113
TXT Device under subclass 107 which effects movement of the member or supports
    the member in a position to be driven by forces exerted by a magnetic field.

    (1)     Note.  The magnet may be part of a driver or a work carrier.

    (2)     Note.  The magnetic field may be that of a "permanent" magnet or
    that induced by an electric current.


CLS 227/114
TXT Device under subclass 107 provided with means distinct from a driver* to
    isolate an individual member from a set of members and to position said
    member in alignment with the path of the driver.


CLS 227/115
TXT Device under subclass 114 wherein the means to isolate the member is
    integral with, or connected through mechanism with, an element to restrain
    the group of members.


CLS 227/116
TXT Device under subclass 114 wherein the isolating means moves in a straight
    line.


CLS 227/117
TXT Device under subclass 114 comprising means to cause the isolating means to
    move in a curved path.


CLS 227/118
TXT Device under subclass 117 comprising means to move the isolating means
    toward and away from the compartment for storing the members.


CLS 227/119
TXT Device under subclass 107 comprising means to engage the member and
    position said member with its pointed end or shank in proper alignment for
    driving or means to remove the member if its pointed end or shank is not in
    proper alignment for driving.


CLS 227/120
TXT Device under subclass 107 comprising a compartment for storing a plurality
    of members in which the transporting means operates to bias the members
    toward driving position.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this and indented subclasses are patents to
    subcombinations in which the driver is not always claimed.


CLS 227/121
TXT Device under subclass 120 comprising means effective to prevent return
    motion of the driver until a full driving stroke has been completed.


CLS 227/122
TXT Device under subclass 120 provided with means to divide a member(s) which
    becomes stuck along the path of its movement.


CLS 227/123
TXT Device under subclass 120 comprising means to enclose a guide path of the
    driver which is detachable or biased toward said guide path to allow a
    deformed member to be driven or removed from the path of the driver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109,    for means adapted to allow oversized members to be driven, in a
    device of the class type.


CLS 227/124
TXT Device under subclass 120 comprising a plurality of opposed jaws or surface
    elements adapted to engage work and means to move one or more of said jaws
    or surface elements, which means cooperates with means to actuate a driver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153,    for interrelated driver and work clamp.


CLS 227/125
TXT Device under subclass 120 comprising means to render the biasing means
    ineffective (e.g., an abutment or lock).


CLS 227/126
TXT Device under subclass 125 wherein the means to render the biasing means
    ineffective comprises a securing element.


CLS 227/127
TXT Device under subclass 120 wherein the compartment for storing the members
    comprises a movable element to allow access to the interior thereof.


CLS 227/128
TXT Device under subclass 127 comprising means to restrain the motion of the
    movable element to an arcuate path.


CLS 227/129
TXT Device under subclass 120 comprising means to apply a force to the driver
    to effect at least part of a driving stroke or cycle.


CLS 227/130
TXT Device under subclass 129 wherein the force applying means is a liquid or
    gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9+,     for explosive-type driving means.


CLS 227/131
TXT Device under subclass 129 wherein the force applying means is an
    electromechanical transducer in which reciprocatory or oscillatory motion
    between a coiled conductor carrying electric current and a ferrous or
    iron-like armature is effected by varying the instantaneous value of
    current in the conductor.


CLS 227/132
TXT Device under subclass 129 wherein the force applying means comprises a
    resilient element, means to compress said element, and means to release the
    compressed element for actuating the driver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146,    for a spring-type driver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 202+ for spring-actuated
    hammer head.


CLS 227/133
TXT Device under subclass 129 wherein the force applying means comprises the
    mass of the driver and any parts secured thereto, which mass tends to
    continue in motion when the device is swung with a hammer-like blow against
    supported work, thereby projecting the driver from its initial position
    with respect to other portions of the device which are brought to a halt
    against the work.


CLS 227/134
TXT Device under subclass 120 comprising a resilient element which opposes the
    motion of the driver during the driving stroke and which returns the driver
    to its initial or nondriving position.


CLS 227/135
TXT Device under subclass 107 wherein the means to transport the member
    comprises structure to hold at least two members during the time they are
    being transported.


CLS 227/136
TXT Device under subclass 135 comprising means to move an elongated strip of
    material carrying a plurality of members.

    (1)     Note.  The strip-type carrier is usually disposable and not a
    permanent part of the device.


CLS 227/137
TXT Device under subclass 135 comprising means to cause the member transporting
    means to move in a curvilinear path.


CLS 227/138
TXT Device under subclass 107 wherein the means to transport a member comprises
    means connected to the driver so that movement of the driver transmits
    power from itself to the transporting means to feed the member.


CLS 227/139
TXT Device under subclass 107 wherein said means comprises nonactuated
    structure which directs wholly or partially the course of a moving member
    or which orients such member to a suitable zone for an operation on said
    member by the driver.


CLS 227/140
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means to hold a member* and/or
    work* in a position to receive the reaction of a driver*.


CLS 227/141
TXT Device under subclass 140 wherein said means is effective to hold a member
    in a fixed location during the driving operation.

    (1)     Note.  In a device of this subclass type, the driver impels the
    work against a fixedly held member.


CLS 227/142
TXT Device under subclass 140 comprising means to change the distance a tool
    moves during a driving or clenching operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 530 for mechanism to change a cutting tool stroke.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclass 115 for mechanism to change a
    tool stroke.


CLS 227/143
TXT Device under subclass 140 comprising a plurality of movable tools and means
    to cause simultaneous actuation of said tools toward each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154+,   for mechanism where plural tools are moved independently of each
    other.


CLS 227/144
TXT Device under subclass 143 comprising means to restrain the motion of said
    tools to an arcuate path.


CLS 227/145
TXT Device under subclass 140 comprising means to guide a driver in a nonlinear
    course.


CLS 227/146
TXT Device under subclass 140 comprising a resilient element connected to a
    driver, means to compress said element, and means to release the compressed
    element for actuating said driver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132,    for spring-type driver in combination with means to move a member
    into driving position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 202+ for spring-actuated
    hammer head.


CLS 227/147
TXT Device under subclass 140 wherein a driver has a surface intended to
    receive a blow, from a moving mass of material, (e.g., hammer head), for
    actuating said driver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 90+ for impact devices of
    general utility.


CLS 227/148
TXT Device under subclass 140 comprising means to adjust or position said
    member-holder, or means to guide a member in a path that is oblique to the
    plane of the surface of the work at which the member is to be driven.


CLS 227/149
TXT Device under subclass 140 comprising means tending to urge a portion of the
    member-holder into gripping relationship with a member held therein.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are patents to a holder with means which rely
    upon springs or resiliency of structural element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, subclass 254 for a bias- type work holder.


CLS 227/150
TXT Device under subclass 140 comprising passive means which is operative to
    define or limit the path of movement (i.e., to direct, wholly or partially,
    the course) of moving work, or to orient such work relative to its path of
    movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99+,    for means to guide moving work in combination with means to move
    the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 438+ for a device to guide moving work at a
    cutting station.

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, appropriate subclasses
    for a material guide of general utility.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, may include a nominal
    recitation of a supply or take-up coil (e.g., less than a support for such
    a coil or a cooperative relationship between a tension or exhaust detector
    and reel driving or reel stopping means, etc.), subclass 196.1 for a
    passive guide with a material feeder.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 615+ for a residual
    guide or guard that directs elongated flexible material that may be
    combined with more than nominal winding structure.


CLS 227/151
TXT Device under subclass 140 comprising structure to maintain or retain the
    work in fixed position relative to immovable parts of the work-holder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses for patents to hold or
    immobilize work.


CLS 227/152
TXT Device under subclass 151 wherein said structure comprises a plurality of
    opposed jaws or surface elements which are made effective, by movement of
    one or more of said jaws or surface elements, to grip the work frictionally.


CLS 227/153
TXT Device under subclass 152 comprising means to move one or more of said work
    clamping jaws or surface elements, which means cooperates with means to
    actuate a driver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124,    for interrelated driver and work clamp including a supply magazine.


CLS 227/154
TXT Device under subclass 140 wherein the means to hold the work comprises a
    surface that is positioned beneath at least a part of the work and is
    intended to engage said part of the work to support the work against the
    force of gravity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 289+ for a work-underlying support of
    general utility.


CLS 227/155
TXT Device under subclass 154 including means to deform or facilitate
    deformation of a protruding end of a member*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for clenching means including a supply magazine.


CLS 227/156
TXT Apparatus under the class definition which is not in conformance with the
    definition of any prior subclass in this schedule.


CLS 227/175.1
TXT SURGICAL STAPLER:

    Device under the class definition comprising means to drive a member into
    human or animal fascia.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 409.02+ for a device which applies a
    clip or staple by deforming the ends thereof without driving the clip or
    staple, and subclass 409.05 for an apparatus for similarly deforming a
    surgical staple to close a wound.

    606,    Surgery, subclasses 139+ for a surgical stapler for applying a
    wound closing staple that does not pierce the tissue, and subclasses 219+
    for surgical staples,  per se.


CLS 227/175.2
TXT With lockout:

    Device under subclass 175.1 provided with means to prevent motion of some
    part of the device (e.g. actuating means) in any manner to prevent an
    accidental stapling operation.

    (1)     Note. A stapling operation may consist of expelling a staple from
    the device to perform a securing function.

    (2)     Note. The lockout is to prevent accidental firing of staples.


CLS 227/175.3
TXT Responsive to a condition or position of a staple magazine:

    Device under subclass 175.2  wherein said means to prevent motion precludes
    motion of said part in response to the presence or absence of a staple
    magazine, (e.g., whether the staples are properly loaded with a magazine),
    or a specific condition of said magazine (e.g., the number of remaining
    staples in said cartridge).


CLS 227/175.4
TXT Lockout prevents firing of a spent staple
    magazine:

    Device under subclass 175.3 wherein said means to prevent motion precludes
    motion of said part due to the absence of staples in the magazine, that is,
    when all of the staples in the magazine have been consumed.


CLS 227/176.1
TXT With magazine:

    Device under subclass 175.1 comprising a compartment for storing a
    plurality of member and transport means, operative within the compartment,
    for moving a member into a driving position or such a compartment with
    passive means which is operative to define or limit the path of movement
    (i.e., to direct wholly or partially, the course) of a moving member within
    the compartment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107+,   for means to move a guide member into driving position.

    120,    for magazines supply for constantly urged member.


CLS 227/177.1
TXT Including biasing means:

    Device under subclass 176.1 wherein the transporting means operates to
    constantly urge the members toward a driving position.


CLS 227/178.1
TXT Multiple driving means:

    Device under subclass 176.1 including multiple drivers operative to drive a
    plurality of members substantially simultaneously.


CLS 227/179.1
TXT Tubular driving path:

    Device under subclass 178.1 wherein the path traveled by the plural drivers
    defines a generally cylindrical surface.


CLS 227/180.1
TXT With cutting means:

    Device under subclass 176.1 provided with means to sever, pierce, or incise
    the fascia.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76,     for cutting means to make an opening in the work.


CLS 227/181.1
TXT With means to position a mating-member in alignment with driver:

    Device under subclass 175.1 provided with means to move or guide a
    mating-member to a position in the driving path of the member and/or to
    maintain a mating-member in such position, so as to receive in an
    interassociated manner the member during the driving operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    for means to position "mating-member" in alignment with the driver.


CLS 227/182.1
TXT With means to prevent partial drive cycle:

    Device under subclass 175.1 comprising means to prevent return motion of
    the driver until a full driving stroke has been completed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121,    for means to prevent partial drive cycle.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 227/901
TXT SURGICAL CLIP APPLIERS:

    Devices which are adapted to apply clips to human or animal fascia.


CLS 227/902
TXT SURGICAL CLIPS OR STAPLES:

    Clips or staples adapted for use in surgical procedures.


CLS 228/
TTL METAL FUSION BONDING

CLS 228/
TXT CLASSIFICATION DEFINITION

    TABLE OF CONTENTS


    I.      INTRODUCTORY NOTES

    II.     CLASS DEFINITION

    III.    GLOSSARY

    IV.     SCOPE OF THE CLASS

    V.      RELATIONSHIP TO CLASSES INVOLVING, PER SE, METAL FUSION BONDING

    VI.     RELATIONSHIP    TO   COMBINATION               CLASSES

    VII.    RELATIONSHIP TO OTHER CLASSES

    VIII. LISTING OF OTHER CLASSES REFERRED TO ABOVE AND IN THE SUBCLASS
    DEFINITIONS

    I.      INTRODUCTORY NOTES

    This is a residual class for metal fusion bonding as defined in Section II
    of this definition.

    For placement of a patent in this class, its claimed disclosure should meet
    the minimum requirements of the class definition, and should not extend
    beyond the boundaries indicated in section IV, Scope of the Class, and
    discussed in sections V-VII, Relationships to other Classes.

    Terms followed by an asterisk (*) in the definitions are defined in section
    III, Glossary.

    II.     CLASS DEFINITION

    This class provides for an apparatus for or a method of joining the meeting
    faces of juxtaposed or engaged metal work parts or of the same part
    originally in a form-sustaining state, by the direct application of heat
    and/or mechanical energy to either of:

    (A)     such work parts, to such an extent as to effect a flowing or
    blending together of some of the metal in neighboring regions of said work
    parts into a continuous metallic zone interconnecting said work parts, or

    (B)     such work parts and a metallic filler, to such an extent as to
    effect a flowing or blending together of the filler and some of the metal
    of said work portions into a continuous metallic zone interconnecting said
    work portions with filler and thus with each other.

    Additionally, this class provides for methods of joining a metal work part
    to a juxtaposed or engaged nonmetal work part wherein bonding there between
    is effected by intermingling of the molecules of the metal part with the
    nonmetal part; and for methods of joining juxtaposed or engaged nonmetal
    work parts when utilizing metallic cement.

    III.    GLOSSARY

    APPLICATOR

    A device by or through which heat, pressure, vibratory energy, flux* and/or
    filler* may be applied directly to the work*.

    FILLER

    A metallic material to be applied to the work in order to join meeting
    face* together and become an integral part of the product*.

    FLUX

    A nonmetallic material to be applied to the work in order to:

    (1)     shield the work from atmospheric oxygen or other harmful gases,

    (2)     chemically remove oxides or other films, or

    (3)     otherwise augment bonding.

    MEETING FACE

    That portion of a work part* intended to abut and  be fusion bonded to
    another similar portion of the same or another work part.

    METAL

    Material which may be subjected to an operation of the class type; an
    elemental metal or alloy of mixture of metals in self-shape-sustaining
    state (i.e., not molten, gaseous, or powdered).

    PRODUCT

    Solid material or article after an operation of the class type has been
    performed thereon.

    (1)     Note.  The product of one operation may constitute work* for a
    subsequent operation.

    ROLLER

    A tangible instrumentality having a peripheral surface which is generated
    by a line revolving about an axis, said instrumentality being disclosed as
    revolving about said axis so that successive peripheral portions thereof
    cyclically move into and out of engagement with a generally planar surface
    of another member, with relative movement occurring between said axis and
    the planar surface along a direction parallel to the planar surface,
    thereby producing a relative rolling motion between the roller surface and
    the planar surface as contrasted with a sliding motion, (i.e., the surfaces
    move in the same direction at substantially the same linear speed so that
    there is no relative linear movement between the roller surface and the
    planar surface at point of engagement).

    (1)     Note.  The generating line of the peripheral surface of the roller
    may have any continuous profile (e.g., straight, curved, or irregular), and
    the line may have any desired inclination, other than at right angles,
    relative to the axis.  Thus, to be considered a ROLLER, any and all
    cross-sections taken at right angles to the axis must show a circular
    material engaging periphery.

    ROLLER-LIKE MEMBER

    A tangible rotating instrumentality having a peripheral surface with some,
    but not all, of the characteristics of a roller*.

    (1)     Note.  (a) In a first type of roller-like member the surface is
    generated by a line revolving about an axis (thus the member looks like a
    roller), but there is relative movement between the surface of the
    roller-like member and another member to produce sliding action
    therebetween; or; (b) In a second type of roller-like member the relative
    movement of the roller-like member and another member and another member
    produces rolling engagement between their respective surfaces (thus the
    roller-like member acts like a roller), but the surface is not generated by
    a revolving line (e.g., the roller-like member is rough, gear-like, or
    recessed).

    WORK

    Material which is intended to be subjected to a treatment of the class type.

    WORK  PART

    An article to be subjected to the class type operation.

    IV.     Scope of the Class

    A.      Placement of an original patent into Class 228 may be made on the
    basis of a claim reciting means for or the step of applying to work
    portions energy in the form of:

    (1) heat

    (2) pressure, and/or

    (3) vibratory energy

    Provided that there is a teaching that a metal fusion bonded product is
    produced by the applied energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions.



    B.      Class 228 also includes patents disclosing and claiming certain
    steps or instrumentalities useful for a proper operation of fusion bonding
    which are partially listed as follows:

    (1)     a metallic heat applicator (subclasses 51+)

    (2)     seam back-up means (subclasses 50 and 216)

    (3)     specialized solder pot (subclass 56)

    (4)     solder form (subclass 56)

    C.      A patent claiming closing of a minute opening in a single workpiece
    (e.g., tipping) is proper subject matter for Class 228, in that the
    periphery of a single work opening is considered to constitute meeting
    faces of a single work part as required by the definition of this class.
    Coating of a work part which may, incidentally, cover small openings in the
    part is not considered to be proper subject matter for this class.

    V.      Relationship to Classes Involving, per se, Metal Fusion Bonding

    A.      Classes or Article Making

    1.      Generally a patent claiming making of a particular article will be
    found in the appropriate class directed to making of that article except
    that a patent claiming performing a single fusion bonding operation is
    placed in this class (228).  Fusion bonding combined with additional
    operations which are considered to be ancillary to the bonding (e.g.,
    preheating, positioning for bonding, or pretinning) will also be found in
    this class (228).

    2.      Among such classes providing for the manufacture of particular
    articles are the following:

    a.      29, Metal Working, subclasses 1.1 through 25.42, 91+, 592.1 through
    623.5 and 825 through 899.1

    b.      59, Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making;

    c.      140, Wireworking, subclasses 71+; and

    d.      163, Needle and Pin Making.

    3.      Because of the technology in the making of semiconductor and
    related devices, certain art terms used to designate operations specially
    recognized in that discipline are listed below which, when combined with
    fusion bonding, will cause placement of a patent in Class 29, Metal
    Working, and Class 438, Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process,
    particularly subclasses 26+, 51, 55, 64+, and 106+ for methods of packaging
    a semiconductor device and subclasses 455+ for laminating or bonding plural
    semiconductor substrates; see the search notes thereunder.

    a.      diffusion (not diffusion bonding)

    b.      assembling two semiconductors for an electrical function (Note that
    each semiconductor may be, for example, a player, an n layer, a chain of p
    or n layers or a laminated article of p and n layers).

    c.      shaping a metal layer to form a conductor.

    d.      cutting

    e.      assembling other than to bond (i.e., other than juxtapose)

    f.      bonding to create a junction

    g.      doping

    B.      The Class of Wireworking

    Placement of a patent claiming apparatus for joining metal wire by a fusion
    bonding operation is generally in Class 140, Wireworking, subclasses 111+.

    Methods of bonding wire are to be found in this class (228) unless combined
    with another operation peculiar to the making of wire material.

    C.      The Class of  Metal Casting

    Class 164, Metal Founding, includes fusion bonding plural metallic work
    portions by metal casting involving the use of a "mold".  In the apparatus
    portion of this class (228), in order to constitute a "mold" and thereby
    exclude a claim from this class, a device must confine molten metallic
    material in all directions against the force of gravity and at least a
    portion of such device must be readily removable from the product of the
    casting operation.  On the other hand, in the process portion of this class
    (228) in order to constitute "molding" and exclude a patent from this
    class, significant shaping must be set forth.

    D.      The Class of Electric Fusion Bonding

    Class 219, Electric Heating, includes patents for joining metallic work
    parts provided that the work parts or the filler material constitute part
    of an electrical circuit that supplies the energy to produce the bond.  For
    placement of a patent therein, there must be some indication in a claim
    that the fusion bonding apparatus is in fact an electrical apparatus or
    that the process includes electrical current through the work parts or the
    filler. Hence, placement of a patent will be in this class (228), if such
    claim recites only a "welding device", "welding", or "spot welding"
    regardless of the disclosure.

    VI.     Relationship to Combination Classes

    A patent claiming a combination of metal fusion bonding with a different
    operation, whether manufacturing or nonmanufacturing, is proper subject
    matter for Class 228, except as specifically noted in the following
    paragraphs, relating to combination classes:

    A.      The Class of Package Making:

    Class 53, Package Making, includes patents for the combination of fusion
    bonding to make or close a metal receptacle, with receptacle filling or
    contents material treating or for gas filling and/or evacuating, regardless
    of whether or not such additional operation occurs before, during or after
    the fusion bonding operation.

    B.      The Classes Including Post-Fusion Treatment

    (1)     Class 148, Metal Treatment, particularly subclass 127, includes
    metal treatment comprising changing of the crystalline structure of metal
    combined with metal fusion bonding.

    (2)     Class 29, Metal Working, particularly subclasses 33+, includes the
    combination of metal fusion bonding apparatus with another type of
    manufacturing apparatus, if the other operation occurs subsequent to the
    metal fusion bonding, or if the disclosure is silent as to whether such
    other type of manufacturing operation occurs before or after the bonding
    operation generally.  (Note that the combination of metal fusion bonding
    apparatus with another type of manufacturing apparatus is found in Class
    228 if the bonding occurs subsequent to the other operation.)  Class 29,
    particularly subclasses 592+, includes a method of metal fusion bonding
    combined with another type of manufacturing operation, other than when it
    is clear that the metal fusion bonding occurs subsequent to the other
    operation.

    VII.    Relationship to Other Classes

    A.      The Heating Classes:

    1.      Placement of a patent claiming heating is in the appropriate
    heating class, even though the sole disclosed application of the heat is in
    the production of a metal fusion-bonded product of this class (228).  In
    this connection, the term "heating" includes the usually accepted auxiliary
    means or step such as supporting or holding material to be heated, or
    causing or permitting relative movement between the material and the
    heating means.

    2.      But if, in addition to the above recited heating structure or step,
    a claim recites a means to further metal fusion bonding, placement is in
    this class (228).  Examples of such claimed limitations are:

    a.      moving or guiding one work part relative to another work part, into
    a position for mutual fusion bonding;

    b.      forcing or urging one work portion against another work portion at
    the immediate zone of fusion; or

    c.      moving or guiding flux or filler.

    3.      A claim to the combination of a Class 228 application (e.g.,
    "soldering") with supplying of heat to such applicator is considered to
    define heating, proper for one of the heating classes (see paragraph 4,
    below), even though details of the applicator are also recited, such as:

    a.      its alloy composition or its shape; or

    b.      adjusting such applicator relative to its support.

            "Means for supplying heat" may be, for example, nothing more
    elaborate or detailed than a claimed pair of terminals for connection of
    the applicator to an electrical circuit.

    4.      Among the classes providing for heating are the following:

    a.      75, Specialized Metallurigical Processes, Compositions for Use
    Therein, Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal
    Particulate Mixtures

    b.      126, Stoves and Furnaces

    c.      165,  Heat Exchange

    d.      219, Electric Heating

    e.      266, Metallurgical Apparatus

    f.      432, Heating

    B.      The Work Handling or Product Handling Classes:

    1.      The placement of patents claiming handling work for, or product of,
    a metal fusion bonding operation, and also claiming fusion bonding is in
    this class (228) except where the fusion bonding is recited by name only,
    i.e., in terms that name but do not describe any characteristics of a metal
    fusion bonding operation.  The so excepted patents are placed in
    appropriate classes related to material handling, per se.

    2.      Among the classes providing for handling the work or product of a
    fusion bonding operation are the following:

    a.      193, Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways

    b.      198, Conveyors: Power-Driven

    c.      209, Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids

    d.      226, Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length

    e.      242, Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding

    f.      271, Sheet Feeding or Delivering

    g.      294, Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements

    h.      414, Material or Article Handling

    i.      901, Robots

    C.      The Classes of Coating

    1.      Class 118, Coating Apparatus, includes patents to apparatus for
    coating metal upon a single, individual, form-sustaining metallic work
    part, or a plurality of discrete parts, even when the sole use of the
    coating lies in the subsequent fusion bonding of such individual work
    part(s) to another work part.

    2.      Class 427, Coating Processes, includes the step of coating metal
    upon a single, individual, form-sustaining metallic work part or a
    plurality of discrete work parts, even when the sole use of the coating
    lies in the subsequent fusion bonding of such individual work part(s) to
    another work part.

    D.      The Class of Adhesive Bonding

    1.      Class 156, Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    includes fusion bonding wherein:

    a.      nonmetallic work parts are bonded directly together;

    b.      metallic and/or nonmetallic work parts are bonded together by
    non-metallic filler (adhesive); or

    c.      a metallic work part is bonded directly to nonmetallic work part by
    at least slightly melting the nonmetallic material (to effect a
    nonmetallurgical bond).

    2.      This class (228) includes fusion bonding wherein:

    a.      metallic work parts are bonded directly together;

    b.      metallic and/or nonmetallic work parts are bonded together by
    metallic filler; or

    c.      a metallic work part is bonded directly to a nonmetallic work part
    where there is no melting of the nonmetal (and a metallurgical bond is
    effected).

    E.      The Class of Static Structures.

            Class 52, Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), includes in situ
    construction of a static structure, even if claimed in combination with
    metal fusion bonding.


    VIII. Listing of Other Classes Referred to Above and in the Subclass
    Definitions.

    Classes Above   Subclasses of
            Sections        Class 228

    15                      18, 22
    29      VA              2, 3.1, 4.1, 15.1,
                            18,19, 56,
            VIB     101, 119,
                            123.1, 126-128,
                            131, 157, 159,
                            176, 179.1, 182,
                            199, 203, 208,
                            214, 263, 903
    53      VIA
    59      VA              141, 144, 192
    65                      101
    72                      1, 3.1, 8,15.1,
                            19, 26, 30, 56.5,
                            144,145, 156, 158,

                            173

    73                      103

    75      VIIA    19, 218, 244, 248

    81                      3.1

    83                      7, 8, 160, 170

    100                     3.1, 44.1

    101                     30

    118     VIIC    19, 20.1, 23,30,

                            31, 33-36, 38,

                            39, 41, 256

    126     VIIA    51, 53, 56

    134                     214

    140     VA              145

            VB

    148     VIB     1-56, 218, 223, 227

    156     VIID    101, 112.1, 118,
                            121, 141, 159, 903

    163     VA

    164     VC              101, 216

    165     VIIA

    73                      3.1, 24

    193     VIIB

    198     VIIB

    204                     101, 903

    209     VIIB

    219     VD              15.1, 47.1, 50,51,

                            53, 141, 192

            VIIA    196, 224, 227, 244,

                            263

    220                     56, 137

    226     VIIB    7, 8, 52

    227                     8

    234                     7

    242     VIIB

    263     VIIA    47.1, 59

    264                     101

    266     VIIA

    269                     44.1

    271     VIIB

    285                     50

    287                     101

    294     VIIB

    374                     103

    403                     101, 245

    414     VIIB

    419                     101, 903

    420     VIIA    56, 263

    427     VIIC    121, 215, 256

    428                     56, 224

    429                     58

    432     VIIA

    451                     162, 172, 214

    493                     144, 145


CLS 228/1.1
TXT MEANS TO APPLY VIBRATORY SOLID-STATE BONDING ENERGY (E.G., ULTRASONIC,
    ETC.) TO WORK:

    Device under the class definition for subjecting work to an oscillation
    having a cyclic frequency within or above that of audible sound, which
    oscillation is disclosed as effecting fusion-bonding by a scrubbing type
    action of two work parts in intimate contact thereby tending to disrupt any
    bond inhibiting substances therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for means for causing vibratory motion in either the work or an
    applicator for the purpose of cleaning the work or applicator.

    44.3,   for means for applying continuous pressure to work parts without
    the application of ultrasonic energy.

    56.2,   for a solder pot or bath provided with means to apply ultrasonic
    energy to liquid flux or filler.

    110.1+, for the process of metallurgically bonding by the effect of
    vibration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 56, for a method of or apparatus for,
    deforming metal by the application of kinetic energy of fluid or field.

    148,    Metal Treatment, particularly subclass 558 for a process of
    treating solid or semi-solid metal with high frequency vibration.


CLS 228/2.1
TXT INCLUDING MEANS TO PROVIDE HEAT BY FRICTION BETWEEN RELATIVELY MOVING
    SURFACES (I.E., FRICTION WELDER):Device under the class definition having
    means for causing motion, one with respect to the other, of either (a) two
    mutually engaging work portions or (b) a work portion and a work-engaging,
    tangible instrumentality, which rubbing contact generates heat sufficient
    to produce a flow of the metal work portion(s) for subsequent fusion
    bonding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112.1+, for a method of fusion bonding using frictional heat.


CLS 228/2.3
TXT Means to rotate one surface relative to the other about a fixed axis:Device
    under subclass 2.1 wherein the relative movement comprises rotation of one
    of the surfaces about a line passing generally normally therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114.5,  for a method of fusion bonding including heating of the work by
    rotating one surface relative to another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 67+ for a device for deforming work
    turning about an axis by causing relative rubbing motion between such work
    and a tool.


CLS 228/2.5
TXT Device under the class definition including means to release a high energy
    shock wave and cause the energy released to directly engage the meeting
    face of a work part and thereby cause that face to intimately engage and
    become united with the corresponding face of another work part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for the process of bonding by release of explosive energy.


CLS 228/3.1
TXT Device under the class definition having means for applying a mechanical
    force to the meeting faces* of two work parts to produce a fusion bond at
    said area without the aid of any other force or energy (e.g., heat).

    (1)     Note.  A patent disclosing the bonding of work heated to any degree
    above and beyond room temperature is excluded herefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44.3+,  for a device for applying pressure to work which has been or is
    being heated.

    115+,   for a method of bonding by pressure alone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 199+, for a roller or roller-like
    tool-element for deforming metal work; and see the search notes thereto.

    81,     Tools, subclasses 300+, for pliers of general utility.

    100,    Presses, for a press of general utility.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 90+, for an impacting device
    of general utility.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the notes thereunder.


CLS 228/4.1
TXT Device under the class definition, having means for causing relative
    movement between separate workpieces to position such workpieces in
    adjacency or engagement and means for fusion bonding one of said workpieces
    to the other, forming more than one distinct bonded joint.

    (1)     Note.  Multiple "spot" welds along a single pair of meeting faces
    are not considered to be distinct for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    49.1+, for a fusion bonding device having means for juxtaposing two
    portions of a single workpiece.

    178+,   for a process of forming plural metallurgical joints.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 33+, for the combination of apparatus for
    producing a fusion bonded product plus apparatus using such product as work
    in subsequent assembling operation; subclasses 700+, for apparatus for
    assembling, per se; subclasses 428+, for a corresponding method; and see
    section VIB of this bulletin.


CLS 228/4.5
TXT Device under subclass 4.1 including means to metallurgically unite a first
    part to an additional part(s) at first and second points on the first part
    to transmit electrical energy from the additional part(s) with respect
    thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179.1+, for a process of making an electrical device involving plural bonds.


CLS 228/5.1
TXT Device under subclass 4.1 including an instrumentality capable of altering
    some property, characteristic, or condition of at least one workpiece
    before it has become a part of a fusion-bonded product*.

    (1)     Note.  The alteration, for example, may include cleaning, cutting,
    deforming, insulation stripping, etc., before bonding.


CLS 228/5.5
TXT Device under subclass 4.1 including a flexible member generally adapted to
    conform to the surface behind the meeting face of one of the parts and
    distribute energy from a power supply to that surface and cause the meeting
    faces to be united.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    for the process of bonding including use of a compliant cushioning
    medium.


CLS 228/5.7
TXT Device under subclass 4.1 particularly adapted to cut to shape and unite
    the rear longitudinal extent of a first web or work to the front
    longitudinal extent of a second web to form a product of the combined
    length of the webs.


CLS 228/6.1
TXT Plural discrete workpieces:

    Device under subclass 4.1 which juxtaposes workpieces, all of whose
    dimensions are determinable.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass excludes means for bonding material of
    indeterminate length; e.g., forming bimetallic strip, by rolling laminae
    together, welding wire (from a reel) onto a workpiece, etc.  Patents to
    means for bonding such workpieces are found in subclass 4.1.


CLS 228/6.2
TXT With electrical connection made at joint:

    Apparatus under subclass 6.1 wherein the discrete workpieces are electrical
    devices such that the bonded joint provides and electrically conductive
    path therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44.7,   for apparatus for forcing work parts together one of which is an
    electrical device.


CLS 228/7
TXT Device under the class definition provided with detection means for sensing
    a particular shape, dimension of property of (e.g., holes, indentations,
    marks, magnetic or optical characteristics, etc.) a tangible object
    temporarily presented to the device; and with mechanism, actuated by or
    responsive to the detection means, for regulating an operation of the
    device.

    (1)     Note.  Placement into this subclass requires the disclosure that
    the temporarily presented tangible object be capable of being exchanged
    with a different object, or its form be capable of being changed, for the
    purpose of performing a different or modified operation.  Therefore, an
    integral part of a machine (e.g., cam) is not included even though there is
    a disclosure that the part may be removed from the machine for purposes of
    replacement with a like part.

    (2)     Note.  The tangible object, may be a workpiece, provided that the
    controlled operation is performed upon another workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10+,    for a device controlled by the presence or absence of work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 76.1+, for a cutting means provided with
    similar control apparatus.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclass 9, for
    material advancing means provided with similar control apparatus.

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), subclasses 59+, for a
    pattern-controlled selective cutting machine.

    901,    Robots, subcollection 2+, for the controlling of a robot arm,
    particularly subcollection 10, for the guiding of the arm by direct contact
    with the work, and subcollection 42, for an art collection of welding
    robots.


CLS 228/8
TXT Device under the class definition including means for:  1) detecting any of
    the following characteristics:

            a state or property, a change in a state or property, or the
    occurrence of a predetermined event, in any of the following:  the work,
    the product of a machine, the machine itself, any part of the machine, or
    the environment of the machine affecting the operation thereof; and 2)
    initiating (as a direct result of such detection) a force or energy impulse
    other than that generated or transmitted by the detecting means:  and 3)
    regulating or modifying (as a direct result of such initiation) the
    operation of said machine.

    (1)     Note.  This definition requires a patent to claim at least four
    instrumentalities for original placement herein.  One of these must be a
    fusion-bonding machine or a device (e.g., work feeder, work-heater,
    product-handler) necessary to the proximate function of fusion-bonding. The
    other three are: (a) a senser (e.g., photo-cell system, trip-lever,
    pressure diaphragm) to detect a condition as stated in (a) of the
    definition. (b) an activator (e.g., an element to make or break an electric
    circuit, a clutch, a valve) to cause a release of energy more than, or
    different from, that accounted for by mere change in condition (e.g.,
    position or movement) of the senser while it is functioning; and (c) a
    controller (e.g., a motor or driver for said machine or device) to change
    or cause the operation of said machine or device.  Therefore, a cam
    follower (or senser) directly linked to a controller, whereby follower
    movement directly effects controller movement, is not proper subject matter
    for this subclass due to lack of an activator as defined.  On the other
    hand, disclosure of a cam follower that makes and breaks an electrical
    circuit that energizes a motor, may be placed herein.

    (2)     Note.  A voluntary act of the person operating the machine is not
    proper subject matter for this subclass.  For example, disclosure of an
    on-off switch manipulated by an operative to start and/or stop the machine
    (even though the switch initiates a release of energy) is not included
    herein, but is placed on the basis of claimed features of the machines.

    (3)     Note.  The machine that is regulated by the control means is not
    limited to a fusion-bonding machine of this class. It can be another
    machine associated with the fusion-bonding machine if the claim reciting
    the combination of the other machine and fusion-bonding machine is
    acceptable for placement into this class (228).

    (4)     Note.  The control systems disclosed in the patents of this and
    indented subclasses are similar in concept to control systems of other
    classes, particularly Class 72, METAL DEFORMING, Class 83, CUTTING, and
    Class 226, ADVANCING MATERIAL OF INDETERMINATE LENGTH.  The total
    operations and the claimed combinations are, of course, different, but the
    control systems, per se, found in Classes 72, 83 and 226 are usually
    analogous to those herein, and may be applicable to the machines of this
    class (228).  The notes to Class 83, subclass 399 summarize all the
    subclasses in Class 83 pertaining to "control" subclasses therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 6+ and see (4) Note, above.

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses and see (4) Note, above.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 10+.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclasses 2+, for elongated
    member driving means provided with control apparatus.


CLS 228/9
TXT Device under subclass 8, whose detecting means is arranged to sense the
    presence, absence, size, temperature, or other property or condition of
    work associated with the device.


CLS 228/10
TXT Device under subclass 9 whose detecting means is arranged to sense the
    presence or absence of a workpiece in the device.


CLS 228/11
TXT Device under subclass 10 whose detecting means modifies or regulates the
    operation of means to move filler.


CLS 228/12
TXT Device under subclass 8 comprising a work-holding device which conveys the
    work to or past a fusion-bonding device, the detecting means being arranged
    to sense the presence or absence of such work-holding device at a given
    location.


CLS 228/13
TXT Device under the class definition including means for severing or dividing
    a portion of the work, filler, flux or product* from a large body thereof,
    thus changing at least one of the dimensions of such body.


CLS 228/14
TXT Device under subclass 13 including means for bringing work, and that
    portion of the filler or the flux which has been cut, into mutual
    engagement.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are patents disclosing melting of
    the cut filler or flux before application to the work.


CLS 228/15.1
TXT Device under the class definition including means for deforming (and
    defined below) the work, filler, or flux wherein the deformation occurs
    prior to the fusion bonding.

    (1)     Note.  The term "deformation" for this subclass and the indented
    subclasses requires a permanent change in the shape or size of a member
    without removal of material therefrom.  See section II of the Class 72
    bulletin for a definition of metal deformation.

    (2)     Note.  A single, integral instrumentality (e.g., welding bell, may
    be used to deform and then fuse the work.

    (3)     Note.  Placement into this subclass or the indented subclasses
    requires only that there be some deformation of a work part prior to fusion
    of that work part; the additional occurrence of simultaneous deformation is
    immaterial. For example, a patent to a device for making helical tubing,
    wherein a leading portion of a blank is deformed into a convolution of a
    tube and then fused to a following portion of the blank prior to the
    deformation of that following portion, is included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19+,    for apparatus for deforming applied filler material.

    141.1+, for the method of bonding combined with shaping.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 33+, for the combination of apparatus for
    producing a fusion-bonded produce with apparatus using such product as work
    in a subsequent deforming operation.

    72,     Metal Deforming, for a metal deforming device, particularly
    subclasses 49+, for production of a helical seam by deformation; subclasses
    51+, for production of a longitudinal seam by deformation; subclass 66, for
    formation of a helical coil by means of a work-guide member orbiting about
    the longitudinal centerline of the formed coil; subclasses 135+, for
    formation of a helical coil by deflection running-length work; and
    subclasses 176+, for production of a longitudinal seam by deflecting
    running-length work.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 128, 149+, 603+, 633, and 765 for
    apparatus for electric fusion bonding and deforming.


CLS 228/16
TXT Device under subclass 15.1 having an open ended, tapered passageway,
    through which the work is moved in the direction of decreasing taper.

    (1)     Note.  The inner periphery of the conduit is closed or
    substantially closed along at least a portion of its length.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 274+, for a similar device for
    deforming metal without fusion-bonding.


CLS 228/17
TXT Device under subclass 15.1 wherein the deformation is directly caused by a
    roller* or a roller-like* member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for a roller for deforming applied filler material.

    30,     for a roller that accomplishes fusion-bonding itself, without
    producing any prior deformation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 50, for formation of a helical seam by
    shaped deforming roll(s); and subclasses 199+, for a roller or roller-like
    tool-element for deforming work.


CLS 228/17.5
TXT Device under subclass 15.1 including means to shape or distort a single
    generally planar part to a cylindrical configuration and means to surface
    bond the meeting faces thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144+,   for the method of uniting the margins of a one-piece blank.


CLS 228/17.7
TXT Device under subclass 17.5 including means to shape or distort a long
    attenuated web into a tubular coil to juxtapose the faces of opposite side
    edges along a line running spirally axially along the tube so formed, and
    means for bonding the resulting seam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145,    for the method of forming a helically bonded tube.


CLS 228/18
TXT Device under the class definition to which has been added a sub-combination
    or assembly which is recognized as the subject matter of some other class.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of the specific subclasses herein
    following (19-56.5) are considered so basic to the operation characterizing
    this class that they are dealt with as manifestations of that operation,
    rather than as combinations.  Thus, fusion-bonding devices with means to
    handle or cool work or product, or provided with gauge, indicator or stop,
    are considered to be so common in the art that they do not merit the
    special characterization of "combined".

    (2)     Note.  See section VI of this bulletin for a statement of the line
    between combinations of apparatus proper for this class (228), and
    combinations appropriate to other classes.

    (3)     Note.  Many patents in this subclass are directed to apparatus for
    performing a metal fusion-bonding operation combined with apparatus for
    mechanically cleaning work or applicator.  However, means for supplying an
    acid to the work is considered to be fluxing, even though a cleaning
    operation is also performed thereby.  Patents claiming means for performing
    such an operation will be found in subclasses 33+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, for a cleaning device,
    per se.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 33+, for the combination of metal
    fusion-bonding apparatus with apparatus for performing a subsequent
    manufacturing treatment other than fusion bonding; and see section VI B of
    this bulletin.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 39+, for apparatus for cleaning plus
    deforming metallic work.


CLS 228/19
TXT Device under the class definition having means for exerting a force on, or
    transmitting energy to flux or filler material after said material has been
    applied to the work for the purpose of changing either the quantity,
    density or configuration of such material.

    (1)     Note.  Placement of patent into this and the indented subclasses
    requires that the modifying means be a device independent of the
    fusion-bonding means.  Therefore, seam modification accomplished by an
    applicator that applies flux or filler to the work will be found in the
    appropriate applicator subclasses, such as 25+, 33+, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass and the indented subclasses are
    patents claiming a desoldering device not elsewhere classified.

    (3)     Note.  Also included in this subclass (19) are patents directed to
    means for applying centrifugal force, or to a compressing roller, for
    modifying the applied material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 113, 199+, for deforming means, per se,
    which may be effective to roll a fusion-bonded seam.

    75,     Specialized Metallurigical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 228+ for a composition having a continuous phase of
    free metal made by consolidating metal particles.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 63 and 100+ for apparatus for acting
    on an applied coating.


CLS 228/20.1
TXT By fluid blast or suction:
    Device under subclass 19 whose force applying or energy transferring means
    comprises an instrumentality for directing a gas, liquid, or other fluid in
    a stream under pressure, or for directing a gas, liquid, or other fluid by
    subatmospheric pressure.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is a patent claiming the
    combination of fusion bonding means and means for removing fumes of acid
    flux during a fusion bonding operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for a device for applying a fluid blast or suction to work or
    product for cooling purposes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 63 for apparatus for applying a fluid
    blast to an applied coating.


CLS 228/20.5
TXT Hand tool:
    Device under subclass 20.1 intended to be supported manually by an
    operative.


CLS 228/21
TXT Device under subclass 19 comprising means (e.g., a barrier or a tube) in
    addition to the force-exerting or energy transmitting means, for directing
    the material separated from the work.


CLS 228/22
TXT Device under subclass 19 where force applying means engages said material,
    with a relative rubbing or sliding motion, for effecting the change of
    quantity, density or configuration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     for an applicator pad.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, for a wiper, per se.


CLS 228/23
TXT Device under subclass 22 having a material engaging surface generally
    defining a closed loop and means to permit every portion of said surface to
    continuously travel in and along said loop during work engagement.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are patents disclosing a rotary
    brush wherein the ends of the bristles constitute a substantially
    continuous material engaging surface.

    (2)     Note.  A roller which only compresses a seam, and thus has no
    sliding engagement therewith is not considered to be a wiper, but will be
    found in subclass 19.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for a roller for compressing a seam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 110, for a rotary member acting on an
    applied coating.


CLS 228/24
TXT Device under the class definition comprising an applicator and means to
    move said applicator to deliver a series of blows against the work, which
    series of blows contributes to the formation of a fusion-bonded seam.

    (1)     Note.  Any deformation of the work by such applicator is considered
    to occur simultaneously with the fusion-bonding thereof, not before fusion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    for fusion-bonding apparatus including means for deforming work
    before fusion.

    44.3+,  for a device for delivering a single blow against the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 90+ for an impacting device
    of general utility.


CLS 228/25
TXT Device under the class definition having means for moving or guiding an
    applicator while said applicator contributes to the formation of a
    fusion-bonded product*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for means for moving an applicator before or after fusion-bonding.

    47.1+,  for means for moving work past a stationary applicator during
    fusion-bonding.


CLS 228/26
TXT Device under subclass 25 whose applicator is moved or guided along a
    predetermined path, a length of which substantially coincides in location
    and direction with that of work moving through a zone of fusion-bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are patents disclosing some
    relative movement between the applicator and work during fusion along part
    or all of the applicator path length.

    (2)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are patents disclosing
    tangential contact between the applicator and work (e.g., roller
    applicator).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29+,    for a device comprising a roller or roller-like applicator which
    makes tangential contact with work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 184+, for a "flying tool" for deforming
    metal work and see the search class notes thereof.


CLS 228/27
TXT Device under subclass 25, whose applicator is moved or guided along a
    zig-zag or looped path which follows the direction of a seam to be formed
    and generally defines the width of such seam.


CLS 228/28
TXT Device under subclass 25, whose applicator is moved to and fro along a
    generally straight or curved path with fusion occurring during both a
    forward and return stroke of the applicator.

    (1)     Note.  Also included is a patent disclosing an applicator
    progressing along a seam to be formed by increments while in a continuous
    to-and-fro motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for means to reciprocate an applicator with fusion occurring only
    during the forward or return stroke, but not both.


CLS 228/29
TXT Device under subclass 25, whose applicator is moved or guided, during
    fusion either in a closed-loop path or along a portion of a planar,
    closed-loop path, which portion is curved through-out its length.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this and the indented subclasses are patents
    disclosing orbital applicator movement and mutual engagement of the
    applicator and work at a tangential point or line.

    (2)     Note.  The movements known as "rotating", "revolving", or "orbital"
    are all considered as having a "closed-loop path".


CLS 228/30
TXT Device under subclass 29, wherein the moving applicator is a roller* or a
    roller-like* member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 199+, for a roller or roller-like
    tool-element for deforming metal work; and see the search notes thereto.

    101,    Printing, appropriate subclasses, for a roller or roller-like
    member employed in a printing operation.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 244+ and 258+, for a roller for
    coating work.


CLS 228/31
TXT Device under subclass 30, whose movable roller or roller-like applicator is
    submerged, at least partially, in a reservoir of liquid flux or filler
    material; or is supplied with liquid flux or filler by a roller (or
    roller-like member) which is so submerged; or is supplied with liquid flux
    or filler by a train of rollers (or roller-like members) at least one of
    which is so submerged.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 244+ and 258+, for a coating device
    having a rotary applicator associated with a bath of liquid coating
    material.


CLS 228/32
TXT Device under subclass 25, including means to positively impart motion of
    the applicator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for movement of an applicator other than during fusion.


CLS 228/33
TXT Device under the class definition having means effective to bring work or
    applicator (on the one hand), and flux or filler (on the other), into
    mutual engagement.

    (1)     Note.  A hand-maneuvered applicator is excluded from this and
    indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52+,    for means for applying or supplying flux or filler material,
    mounted on a hand-maneuvered applicator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, for similar apparatus for supplying material in
    a coating operation.


CLS 228/34
TXT Device under subclass 33, comprising means for physically removing scum or
    oxide from a portion of an exposed surface of liquid flux or filler.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 422, for coating apparatus including
    pool surface skimming or conditioning means.


CLS 228/35
TXT Device under subclass 33, comprising either a filamentary member or a
    plurality thereof for transmitting, or a porous member for absorbing and
    transmitting flux or filler material in a liquid state to the work or
    applicator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 264+, for a pad, or absorbent or
    porous applicator, for coating work.


CLS 228/36
TXT Device under subclass 33, comprising means to move or guide at least part
    of such work or applicator into liquid flux or filler material contained in
    a reservoir.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25+,    for a reservoir that moves during fusion,

    31,     for a bath associated with a roller operating to ultimately
    transmit flux or filler to work.

    56.1+,  for a solder pot having passive means for guiding work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 400+, for immersion means for coating
    a single work portion.


CLS 228/37
TXT Device under subclass 36 including means to create or support a stream of
    flux or filler, or to disturb the surface of a pool of flux or filler, with
    which stream or pool the work is brought into contact.

    (1)     Note.  As disclosed by a number of the patents in this subclass,
    the work may be partially immersed in the stream or pool only to the extent
    necessary to establish a substantial surface-to-surface contact of the work
    and liquid.


CLS 228/38
TXT Device under subclass 36, wherein the immersion means functions either to:

    (1)     simultaneously translate and turn the work over and over, or

    (2)     move the work in a closed-loop path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 416, for apparatus for rotating work
    during coating.


CLS 228/39
TXT Device under subclass 36, including means for:

    (a)     placing a barrier member or layer into engagement with an area of
    the work for effectively separating such area from the liquid, or

    (b)     physically limiting movement of the work into the liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 406, for similar masking means
    associated with coating apparatus.


CLS 228/40
TXT Device under subclass 36, which functions to move or guide only the work,
    rather than an applicator.


CLS 228/41
TXT Device under subclass 33 whose applying or supplying means is designed and
    intended to bring the flux or filler into engagement with the work or
    applicator which at least a portion of such flux or filler is in a
    form-sustaining state.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    245+,   for a corresponding method.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 76+, for coating apparatus including
    means to transfer solid coating material to work.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 49+, for a
    hand-manipulable implement including a piece of solid coating material for
    coating a work surface by sliding frictional contact therewith.


CLS 228/42
TXT Device under subclass 33 whose applying or supplying means is designed and
    intended to bring the flux into engagement with the work or applicator
    while the flux is in a gaseous state.


CLS 228/43
TXT Device under subclass 33 including means to impart motion to, or to guide,
    the work.


CLS 228/44.3
TXT INCLUDING MEANS TO FORCE OR CLAMP WORK PORTIONS TOGETHER DURING BONDING:

    Device under the class definition having means to apply, either directly or
    indirectly, a continuous pressure to work parts being bonded, such pressure
    urging or holding the portions against one another and being effective at
    the immediate zone of fusion.

    (1)     Note.  No attempt has been made to distinguish between various
    degrees of pressure.  Therefore, patents in this subclass will include
    those directed to devices having opposed work engaging surfaces whose
    disclosed use is only to hold the work during fusion (where some pressure
    will inherently be present at the area of fusion), as well as those whose
    disclosure teaches the use of pressure to complete or produce the fusion
    bond.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass are patents claiming the
    combination of a pair of opposed dies acting upon juxtaposed work portions,
    even though there may inherently be some further applicator movement after
    engagement with the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for a device for producing a fusion bond by pressure only.

    15+,    for a device for applying pressure for deforming work before fusion
    bonding.

    24,     for means to apply a series of blows which produce a fusion bond.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, for a press of general utility.

    269,    Work Holders, for means to grip, hold or clamp a work part, per se.


CLS 228/44.5
TXT Device under subclass 44.1 wherein the pressure applying means includes
    particular provision to coaxially position a pair of hollow cylindrical
    members for subsequent metallurgical bonding.


CLS 228/44.7
TXT Work portion comprises electrical component:

    Device under subclass 44.3 particularly adapted to a work part intended to
    be used in the transmission or regulation of electrical energy.


CLS 228/45
TXT Device under the class definition having means to positively impart motion
    to, or to direct the motion of, an applicator other than for the direct
    purpose of accomplishing fusion-bonding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for means to impart repetitive movements of a pressure applicator
    toward and against work, to accomplish bonding of the work by successive
    impacts.

    25+,    for means to move or guide an applicator while such applicator is
    taking part in a bonding operation.

    36,     for means to move or guide an applicator into a bath of liquid flux
    or filler.


CLS 228/46
TXT Device under the class definition having means for bringing work or
    product*, and a heat absorbent medium, into mutual engagement.

    (1)     Note.  A device for presenting the work or product to, or
    transporting it through, ambient atmosphere is not considered to be means
    to cool. However, apparatus (e.g., a fan) for circulating air over or
    around work or product is considered to constitute such cooling means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20.1,   for a device for removing flux or filler by means of a fluid blast
    or suction.

    50,     for a seam backup which inherently, or by disclosure, acts to chill
    hot metal in contact therewith.


CLS 228/47.1
TXT WITH MEANS TO HANDLE WORK OR PRODUCT:
    Device under the class definition having means for moving, guiding, or
    affecting the motion of work or product*, relative to a fusion bonding
    apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, for electric means to heat combined with means to
    move or guide work before, during, or after the heating operation; and see
    section VII, A of this definition.

    432,    Heating, subclass 230 for a residual heating device including means
    for moving or guiding work relative to a heat emitter during heating.


CLS 228/48
TXT Device under subclass 47.1, wherein said means to move or guide causes
    work, circular in cross-section, to turn about a single, stationary
    internal axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for means for rotating work in a bath of liquid flux or filler.


CLS 228/49.1
TXT Including means to orient work or position work portion relative to another
    work portion:

    Device under subclass 47.1 wherein said means for moving or guiding either:
     (a) causes, or facilitates, motion of the work in a path other than
    rectilinear, (b) causes relative movement between portions of the same work
    to be bonded, or (c) maintains a desired spatial relationship between
    portions of work being bonded.


CLS 228/49.2
TXT Means to rotate work and to position work about a different axis:

    Apparatus under subclass 49.1 wherein the means is provided for moving the
    work or product about a rotary axis and further wherein the means is
    provided for moving the work of product in a path other than the rotary
    axis.


CLS 228/49.3
TXT Pipe joint aligner:

    Apparatus under subclass 49.1 wherein the means is provided for juxtaposing
    meeting faces of a pair of hollow cylindrical bodies.


CLS 228/49.4
TXT Sheet aligner:

    Apparatus under subclass 49.1 wherein the means is provided for juxtaposing
    meeting faces of the thickness dimension of a pair of bodies each having
    one dimension much smaller that its other two.


CLS 228/49.5
TXT Work portion comprises electrical component:
    Apparatus under subclass 47.1 wherein the device is particularly adapted to
    a work part intended to be used in the transmission or regulation of
    electrical energy.


CLS 228/49.6
TXT Work portion comprises can body:
    Device under subclass 47.1 wherein the device is particularly adapted to
    work on a work part to be used as a contents holding vessel.


CLS 228/50
TXT Device under the class definition comprising a tangible instrumentality
    having a surface portion designed and intended to engage directly the
    surface area of the work or material being fused, on the side of the work
    opposite to the side which receives energy for fusion-bonding, for the
    purpose of reacting against such energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for a similar instrumentality (a "chill") provided with means to
    bring it into engagement with work or product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 160, for back-up means for an electric
    welder.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, for a backup member that constitutes part
    of, or remains with, the joint as a coupling.


CLS 228/51
TXT Device under the class definition comprising a tangible instrumentality
    having a surface of metal, designed and intended to engage work and/or flux
    or filler material for transferring heat energy thereto so that a fused
    bond may be produced.

    (1)     Note.  A "soldering iron" under this subclass is a handtool (i.e.,
    one which is entirely held and fully manipulated by hand), and may have
    attachments that move relatively during treatment, such as an iron combined
    with means to feed flux or filler. However, a hand tool comprising the
    combination of an iron and an additional work engaging member that moves
    relative to the iron during bonding (e.g., "capping iron", which is a
    soldering iron and a work engaging tool guide) is not considered to be a
    "soldering iron", per se, but will be found in subclasses 25+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25+,    for a hand operated applicator movable with respect to a work
    engaging tool guide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 236+, for a heater for a "soldering
    iron", subclasses 413+, for a "soldering iron" having an integral liquid or
    gaseous fuel burner; and see section VII A of the definition of Class 228.

    219,    Electric Heating, for the combination of a "soldering iron" and
    electrical heating means, and see section VII A of this definition.


CLS 228/52
TXT Device under subclass 51, including means for moving or guiding the flux or
    filler material relative to the surface of the instrumentality or the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material or Indeterminate Length, for means for moving
    solid flux or filler of indeterminate length either, per se, or to a
    "soldering iron" which is recited by name only.


CLS 228/53
TXT Device under subclass 52, including means to raise the temperature of the
    instrumentality.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 236+, for the combination of a
    "soldering iron" and a heater, and see section VII A of this definition.

    219,    Electric Heating, for the combination of a "soldering iron" and
    electrical heating means, and see section VII A of this definition.


CLS 228/54
TXT Device under subclass 51, wherein the material of said instrumentality, at
    or adjacent to the surface, is composed of a mixture of concatenation of
    two or more different metals*.


CLS 228/55
TXT Device under subclass 51, including means for (a) changing, or facilitating
    a change in, the relative position of the instrumentality and a supporting
    member (e.g., handle), or:  (b) releasing, or facilitating a release of,
    the instrumentality from a supporting member (e.g., handle).

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are patents disclosing means for
    permitting the relative position to be changed for purposes of storage or
    tip heating, as well as for the purpose of permitting the head or tip to
    occupy different positions.


CLS 228/56.1
TXT SPECIALIZED POT:

    Device under the class definition comprising a receptacle for containing
    liquid flux or filler and having passive means for directing work into, or
    holding work within the receptacle, or having means to treat the flux or
    filler by means other than heating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for a bath associated with a roller operating to ultimately
    transmit flux or filler to work.

    36+,    for a "solder pot" combined with means for bringing work into the
    liquid material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 240, for the combination of a "solder
    pot" and a heater.


CLS 228/56.2
TXT Having means to treat flux or filler:

    Device under subclass 56.1 comprising a receptacle for containing liquid
    flux or filler provided with means to subject the flux or filler to an
    action which produces a change in the flux or filler.


CLS 228/56.3
TXT SOLDER FORM:

    Device under the class definition comprising an article (i.e., a discrete
    three-dimensional body substantially in its ultimate use form) adapted to
    be applied to work as filler material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, and subclasses 263.01+ for an exothermic
    article, per se.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 23-26, for a fluxing composition, per
    se.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions,subclasses 122+, for a solder
    alloy, per se.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, for a stock material
    product in the form or a rod, bar or single or plural layer web or sheet
    with structure (e.g., shape or size) not provided for elsewhere.


CLS 228/56.5
TXT Device under the class definition having means for either:

    (1)     visually or audibly communicating or making known the physical
    state or location of, or

    (2)     establishing, by abutment therewith, the location of work, filler,
    flux, product* or machine part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 31.01+ for, metal deforming apparatus
    having means for indicating the condition or position of work, product or
    machine element.


CLS 228/57
TXT Device under the class definition which does not meet the definition of any
    prior subclass in this schedule.


CLS 228/58
TXT Device for bonding together a plurality of assembled and juxtaposed
    galvanic cells.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product and
    Process, subclasses 158+, 160 and 161 for plural galvanic cells having
    means to bind the cells together.


CLS 228/59
TXT Means for directing the transmission of heat while a fusion-bonding
    operation is being performed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    432,    Heating, subclass 226 for a residual heating device having a mask,
    baffle or conductor concentrating heat on or protecting a section of an
    article being heated.


CLS 228/60
TXT A bonding device for deforming, and completely joining by bonding, material
    at one end of a tube.


CLS 228/101
TXT Process under the class definition including the securing discrete
    juxtaposed meeting faces of work parts or spaced juxtaposed meeting faces
    of a single work part by adherence or coherence at the interface of the
    juxtaposed areas.

    (1)     Note.  This is the generic locus for the process of bonding work
    faces together.  In this and the subclasses indented hereunder, for
    example, is a process of securing metal parts together by welding, brazing
    or soldering, a process of bonding a metal and a nonmetal surface together,
    as well as a process of joining two nonmetal parts when using a metallic
    filler.

    (2)     Note.  The process of coating or casting a layer of material on a
    base in which the casting or coating joins as by bonding to the base is not
    considered to be surface bonding for this subclass; however, if
    solidification of the cast or coated layer is followed by a treatment,
    e.g., rolling or forging, to effect or improve the bond between the base
    and the layer, such process, if it is otherwise eligible, is classified in
    this and the indented subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  Where the process claimed includes coating either the
    meeting face of a metal work part or a nonmetal work part with a layer of
    metallic or nonmatellic material and then uniting the two such faces
    together by use of nonmetallic cement or adhesive or by making of a
    nonmetallic part plastic and pressing the parts together so that their
    meeting faces adhere to each other, the process will be classified with the
    art which provides for the method of making the joint, the coating
    operation being only a step in preparation for the uniting operation.  See
    section VII D of the definition of this class (228).

    (4)     Note.  Faces of parts are considered to be "meeting" for this and
    the indented subclasses if they are bonded together, even if it is through
    an intermediate filler material and even if the faces are oppositely
    bevelled for the reception of filler material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 527.2+, for a process of casting and/or
    coating a layer on a base followed by subsequent treatment of the layer and
    base, in which the initial casting or coating step effects the bond between
    the layer and base and the subsequent treatment is for purposes other than
    to effect or perfect such bond, and see (2) Note above.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 59.2+ for a process of bonding
    glass to metal wherein a uniting operation involves a glassworking
    operation, e.g., fusing or softening of the glass; see the "Search Notes"
    thereunder.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    60+ for a process for joining parts utilizing a nonmetallic cement or by
    making a nonmetallic part tacky or adhesive by means of an activating agent
    and causing it to adhere to another part.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 91+ for a uniting process involving
    metal casting.

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclass 114 for a process of bonding parts
    together by electro-deposition.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    for a miscellaneous process of molding and at the same time uniting two or
    more substances.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 265+ for a joint between two
    members which joint comprises a fusion bond between the members.

    413,    Sheet Metal Container Making, subclasses 24+ for a process of
    making receptacles and containers including the closures therefor from
    sheet metal, which process may include joining the parts together by a
    soldering operation.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, subclasses 5+ for a process of
    applying one or more layers of particulate metal to a metal base and
    heating the assembly so as to sinter the particulate metal and concurrently
    bond that layer or layers to the base.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 939 for a
    metallic stock material made by a process of this subclass.


CLS 228/102
TXT Process under subclass 101 including a step of using means for:

    (a)     detecting any of the following characteristics:  a state or
    property, or the occurrence of a predetermined event, in any of the
    following:  the work, the product of the machine, the environment of the
    machine affecting the operation thereof, an external preplanned information
    supply, or a time period limiting means; and

    (b)     initiating (as a direct result of such detection) a force or
    impulse other than that generated or transmitted by the detecting means; and

    (c)     regulating or modifying (as a direct result of such initiation) the
    operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    901,    Robots, subcollection 2+ for the controlling of a robot arm,
    particularly subcollection 10, for the guiding of the arm by direct contact
    with the work, and subcollection 42 for an art collection of welding robots.


CLS 228/103
TXT Process under subclass 101 especially to enable an operative to (1)
    determine the occurrence or extent of a variation in an operating condition
    or (2) observe or determine the location or condition of an element or
    material by direct observation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, for structure similar to that of this
    subclass, but lacking the step of surface bonding.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 5+ for flaw determination
    by thermal testing, absent a step of surface bonding.


CLS 228/104
TXT Process under subclass 103 including determining a condition of the
    product, while making no change therein, if the product is determined to be
    good.

    (1)     Note.  A faulty product may be damaged by a test of this subclass.


CLS 228/105
TXT Process under subclass 103 including observing by use of means which
    modifies the path of light rays from that observed to the eye of the
    observer.


CLS 228/106
TXT Process under subclass 101 including the use of a flexible member generally
    adapted to conform to the surface behind the meeting face of one of the
    parts and distribute energy from a power supply to that surface and cause
    the meeting faces to be bonded.


CLS 228/107
TXT Process under subclass 101 including release of a high energy shock wave
    and causing the energy released to directly engage the meeting face of one
    of the work parts and thereby cause that face to intimately engage and
    become united with the corresponding face of the other work part.

    (1)     Note.  Energy that reaches the part via a gaseous or liquid medium
    is considered to directly engage the part as required by this subclass;
    however, energy that reaches the part via a solid element, e.g., an
    explosively driven ram, is not considered to directly engage the part.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein is deformation by chemical or electrical
    explosion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.5,    for apparatus utilized in explosive bonding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 940 for metallic
    stock material made by a process of this subclass.


CLS 228/108
TXT Process under subclass 107 wherein the explosion progresses at a
    numerically prescribed, claimed velocity.


CLS 228/109
TXT Process under subclass 107 wherein the distance that the parts are spaced
    or their angular relation prior to the explosion is numerically recited in
    the claim.


CLS 228/110.1
TXT Using high frequency vibratory energy (e.g., ultrasonic):
    Process under subclass 101 including subjecting work in the vicinity of the
    juxtaposed meeting faces to oscillating force having a cycle frequency
    within or above that of audible sound, which oscillation is for effecting
    the fusion bonding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.1,    for apparatus for welding by use of means for producing high
    frequency vibratory energy.

    18,     for means causing vibratory motion in either the work or the
    applicator for the purpose of cleaning the work or the applicator.

    27      and 28, for a device for causing vibratory motion in an applicator
    for the purpose of agitating a melt.

    262,    for the process of utilizing vibration to distribute fused filler
    material in fusion bonding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 940 for metallic
    stock material made by a process of this subclass.


CLS 228/111
TXT Process under subclass 110.1 including subjecting of the work part(s) or of
    the filler material to action which brings about a change in the part or
    material, either before or after the bonding operation.

    (1)     Note.  Positional change or thermal change is not considered to be
    a treatment for this subclass.


CLS 228/111.5
TXT Soldering or liquid phase bonding:
    Process under 110.1 comprising fusion bonding by use of filler material
    that (a) is made liquid by application of heat which is insufficient to
    make the material being bonded liquid or (b) is liquid before being
    subjected to vibratory energy.


CLS 228/112.1
TXT Using dynamic frictional energy (i.e., friction welding):
    Process under subclass 101 in which the bond is effected at least in part
    by means of heat generated (a) by the rapid relative motion of the meeting
    faces of the parts to be joined, or (b) by the rapid motion of a separate
    part contacting and moving relative to one or more of the work parts to be
    joined.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.1+,   for apparatus for welding by frictional heat.

    234.1+, for a process of joining parts involving a particular manner of
    applying welding heat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    73.1 for the process of friction welding nonmetallic elements.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 940 for metallic
    stock material made by a process of this subclass.


CLS 228/113
TXT Process under subclass 112.1 wherein energy for effecting bonding is stored
    in the moving mass of the work and/or the work-holding portion of the
    machine.

    (1)     Note.  Ordinarily weights are clearly shown and claimed to provide
    bonding energy.

    (2)     Note.  Motor power means may be disconnected or may continue to
    function during bonding.


CLS 228/114
TXT Process under subclass 112.1 including subjecting of the work part(s) or of
    the filler material to action which brings about a change in the part or
    material, either before or after the bonding operation.

    (1)     Note.  Positional change or thermal change is not considered to be
    a treatment for this subclass.


CLS 228/114.5
TXT By rotating one work surface relative to another about an axis:Process
    under subclass 112.1 wherein the relative movement comprises rotation of
    one of the surfaces about a line passing generally normally therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.1,    for a device for fusion bonding including means for heating the
    work by rotating one surface relative to another.


CLS 228/115
TXT Process under subclass 101 in which bonding is effected between the meeting
    faces of juxtaposed metal parts solely by forcing one meeting face to
    contact and bear upon the other without the application of adhesive,
    interface solvent or other extraneous agent, and without the application of
    external heat or heat generating material, or the utilization of residual
    heat from a previous heating step.

    (1)     Note.  The essence of this subclass is bonding by the application
    of pressure in the absence of heat.  Patents recite this phenomenon
    variously as "cold welding", or "solid phase bonding" and are classified
    here if they otherwise come within the terms of the definition.  Further
    note that these terms are confused in the art and that the simple naming in
    disclosure will not necessarily cause placement in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233.1,  for a process of metal fusion bonding at a specific rate of varying
    pressure or schedule of distinct pressures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 940 for metallic
    stock material made by a process of this subclass.


CLS 228/116
TXT Process under subclass 115 including prior to bonding, subjecting the work
    part(s) to action which brings about a change in the part.

    (1)     Note.  Positional change or thermal change is not considered to be
    a treatment for this subclass.


CLS 228/117
TXT Process under subclass 115 wherein the forcing action is effected by the
    action of a roller* moving relatively to the work part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233.1,  for a process of roll bonding at a specific rate of varying
    pressure or schedule of varying pressures.

    233.3,  for a process of roll bonding at a specific rate of varying
    temperature or schedule of varying temperatures.

    235.1+, for a process of bonding by a specific mode of applying pressure,
    particularly subclasses 235.2+ for roll bonding.


CLS 228/118
TXT Process under subclass 101 which include, prior to the bonding operation,
    (1) treating portions of the work parts so as to prevent bonding, where so
    treated; (2) juxtaposing a series of parts, portions of which are of
    materials that will not bond; or (3) treating tools to be used in the
    bonding operation to prevent adherence of bonding material thereto.

    (1)     Note.  The bond preventing of this subclass is intended to prevent
    uniting of certain areas of the parts at the temperatures and pressure of
    the welding operation.  Also, the "materials that will not bond" include
    those materials previously treated in the manner of phrase (1).

    (2)     Note.  The bond inhiting material of this subclass is of
    insignificant thickness.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189,    for fusion bonding of plural joints with use of spacing means for
    holding bonded parts a significant distance apart.

    215+,   for fusion bonding with use of means which prevents bonding
    material from flowing to those portions of the parts where bonding is not
    desired.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    289 for a laminating process utilizing a bond inhibiting parting material.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 72+, for a process of coating a mold
    surface with an agent to prevent adherence of cast metal to the mold.


CLS 228/119
TXT Process under subclass 101 including operation on a previously constructed
    but damaged work part(s) to renew, mend, fix or otherwise treat the part so
    as to put it into better or usable condition or to the state of newness as
    originally manufactured.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 402.01+ especially 402.18, for a process
    of reclaiming, renewing or repairing articles for reuse by operations other
    than surface bonding; see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 228/120
TXT Process under subclass 101 in which one of the parts being secured by
    fusion bonding is non-metallic, and which includes securing a metal
    intermediate member to the nonmetal work part by means of a nonbonded
    interlock, the sole function of the metal part being to facilitate the
    joiner of two work parts, and then bonding an exposed surface of the metal
    intermediate member to the second metallic part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135+,   for mechanically joining two metallic parts in addition to bonding
    of those parts.


CLS 228/121
TXT Process under subclass 101 including securing two or more nonmetal parts
    together by means of a liquified metallic intermediate bonding material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, forming a coating of
    metallic material on the parts and then soldering, brazing or deposit
    welding the coated parts together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for a process of mechanically attaching a metallic bonding layer of
    lamina to each of two nonmetallic parts, and then effecting a bond between
    the metallic laminae with a molten metallic cement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, for
    bonding metal parts by nonmetallic cement (filler).

    427,    Coating Processes, for a process of coating metallic objects with
    nonmetallic coatings and for coating nonmetallic articles with metallic
    coatings.


CLS 228/122.1
TXT Metal to nonmetal with separate metallic filler:
    Process under subclass 101 including securing a metallic work part to a
    nonmetallic work part by means of a liquified metallic intermediate bonding
    material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes a process of forming a surface layer
    of metallic material on the nonmetallic part and then bonding that surface
    to the metallic part if (a) during bonding the surface layer flows to fill
    the space between bonded parts, or (b) additional filler material is
    supplied to fill the space between the bonded parts.

    (2)     Note.  For this class, a metal/nonmetal mixture is considered to be
    a metal.

    (3)     Note.  Silicon (Si) is considered to be a nonmetal and germanium
    (Ge) is considered to be a metal in the manufacture of a semiconductor.
    Broadly, a "semiconductor material" is considered to be a nonmetal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179.1,  for the manufacture of a semiconductor including metal-to-metal
    bonding at plural joints.  Also, that subclass serves as a collecting place
    for cross-reference of patents to the manufacture of semiconductors not
    meeting the requirements of this subclass.

    188,    for a method of metallic fusion bonding of plural joints without
    use of an intermediate metallic filler.

    194,    for a method of coating and subsequently diffusion bonding a
    workpiece (which may be nonmetallic) to another, if there is no use of
    filler material.

    262.2+, for a method of joining a nonmetal workpiece to another workpiece
    without use of a metallic filler.

    903,    for an art digest of bonding a metal to a nonmetal.


CLS 228/123.1
TXT Semiconductor-type nonmetallic material:
    Process under subclass 122.1 wherein the  nonmetal part exhibits
    asymmetrical voltage-current conduction characteristics due to either: (a)
    the presence, in the crystal lattice of constituent material, of mobile
    electrons or electron vacancies (i.e., holes) in the valance shells of
    atoms of the material; or (b) the presence of a layer of interface in
    mutual contact with two adjacent conductors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179.1+, for a process of metal fusion bonding including uniting multiple
    terminals to a semiconductor device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, particularly
    subclasses 26+, 51, 55, 64+, and 106+ for methods of packaging a
    semiconductor device; see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 228/124.1
TXT With treating:
    Process under subclass 122.1 including subjecting of the work part(s) or of
    the filler material to an action which brings about a change in the part or
    material.

    (1)     Note.  Positional change or thermal change is not considered to be
    a treatment for this subclass.


CLS 228/124.5
TXT Active or reactive filler component:
    Process under subclass 122.1 comprising use of material intended to effect
    bonding, which material serves to (a) chemically engage the molecular
    structure of the member being bonded to another member or (b) be chemically
    engaged by the molecular structure of another member.


CLS 228/124.6
TXT Forming hermetic seal (e.g., welding lid to container):
    Process under subclass 122.1 intended to completely join two surfaces
    (i.e., to make an airtight joint).


CLS 228/124.7
TXT Forming joint of rotary shaft:
    Process under subclass 122.1 intended to connect the ends of two rodlike
    members to produce a member which is to be used to transmit rotary energy.


CLS 228/125
TXT Process under subclass 101 with modifying the shape or position of material
    at the interface of the bonded juxtaposed meeting faces wherein such
    material is the result of flow created by the bonding operation.


CLS 228/126
TXT Process under subclass 101 including enclosing an inner cylindrical part
    with a separate co-extensive hollow outer cylindrical part and bonding the
    parts to each other along substantially their entire contacting faces.

    (1)     Note.  The inner cylindrical part may be tubular.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143,    for a process of coiling a web upon itself to form a tube having
    two or more thicknesses.

    154,    for a process of shaping a portion of either or both of a
    telescoping tube and an inner rod-like member prior to bonding of those
    parts, wherein only a location such as the end of the tube is joined to the
    inner member; the sleeve and the core piece are not co-extensive.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 422, for a process of encasing an article
    in a container and deforming the end of the container to confine the
    article therein.  Subclass 455.1, for a process of encasing a tube or rod
    with a sheath radially spaced therefrom.  Subclasses 515+, particularly
    subclasses 517+, for a process of enclosing a tube or rod with a separate
    coextensive tubular member and joining them by a deforming operation.


CLS 228/127
TXT Process under subclass 126 including heating and/or cooling one or more of
    the parts being joined to effect relative radial expansion and/or
    contraction of the parts and force the parts into close contact with each
    other to effect bonding at contacting area.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 447, for a process of distorting one part
    by heating or cooling to change a dimension of that part, and then joining
    it to another part while so distorted, e.g., shrink fitting.


CLS 228/128
TXT Process under subclass 126 which in addition to bonding include providing
    the parts with mating structural features which restrict relative movement
    of the parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135+,   for fusion bonding in general combined with mechanical joining.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 521, for a process of joining parts by
    interlocking mating projections and recesses carried by opposed faces of
    the parts.


CLS 228/129
TXT Process under subclass 126 including  juxtaposing a substantially flat
    sheet or ribbon external part and the inner cylindrical part by folding the
    sheet or ribbon part around or otherwise causing it to be cylindrical and
    conform to the inner part and encase the same.


CLS 228/130
TXT Process under subclass 129 in which the folding or conforming of the sheet
    or ribbon part progresses from one end to the other of that part.


CLS 228/131
TXT Process under subclass 126 including inserting the inner cylindrical part
    into the outer cylindrical part and bonding the assembled parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 517+, for a process of joining a core
    part to a sheath part by deforming the walls of the sheath inwardly to grip
    the core without fusion bonding of the parts. Subclass 523, for a process
    of joining parts by expanding an internal tubular part radially outwardly
    to grip a surrounding part without fusion bonding of the parts.


CLS 228/132
TXT Process under subclass 131 in which bonding is effected by means of an
    intermediate bonding material, i.e., a filler*.

    (1)     Note.  In the patents of this subclass, the intermediate bonding
    material has no structural or functional characteristics other than those
    necessary to the bonding operation.


CLS 228/133
TXT Process under subclass 132 including assembling a preformed cylinder of
    bonding material between the inner and outer cylindrical work parts.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is placement of a coating of filler material
    on the part(s) which solidifies prior to bonding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249,    for a miscellaneous process of joining parts by means of a separate
    solid preplaced filler interposed between the parts.


CLS 228/134
TXT Process under subclass 132 including pouring or distributing fused metallic
    bonding material into the space between the assembled inner and outer
    cylindrical parts from a receptacle above the assembled parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256+,   for a miscellaneous process of applying or distributing fused
    filler metal in a joint.


CLS 228/135
TXT Process under subclass 101 which in addition to securing by fusion bonding
    includes use of structural means to restrict movement of the parts, wherein
    the structural means remains a part of the product.

    (1)     Note.  The use of structural means of this subclass may include the
    interfitting of the work parts or the use of a separate fastening member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for cladding a cylindrical member with interfitting of the work
    parts.

    175,    for bonding by fusion bonding combined with additionally bonding by
    use of adhesive or another fusion operation.

    212,    for bonding using clamping means which is not intended to remain as
    a part of the product.


CLS 228/136
TXT Process under subclass 135 wherein the structural securing comprises
    stressing the work part(s) beyond the elastic limit thereof.


CLS 228/137
TXT Process under subclass 136 in which the use of structural means includes
    the interfolding of two or more sheet material edges followed by a pressing
    or flattening of the folds so as to mechanically prevent dislodgement of
    the edges.

    (1)     Note.  The "interfolding" of the edges of the material is intended
    to be such as to prevent all movement of the edges except axial of the
    fold(s).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5       and 15+, for apparatus for joining work portions first by deforming
    and then by fusion bonding.

    150,    for forming a one-piece blank into a tube and bonding the seam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 610+ and 677+ for seam structures of
    metallic receptacles.

    413,    Sheet Metal Container Making, particularly subclasses 27+ for
    seaming.


CLS 228/138
TXT Process under subclass 135 in which the additional structural means
    includes a member straddling the surface bonded joint at the location of
    said joint, which member is attached to each of the sheet material parts
    being bonded together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189,    for use of a bridging member that is fusion bonded to the sheets in
    addition to fusion bonding of the sheets together.

    212,    for a process in which a member is attached to the parts being
    bonded to hold them relatively positioned during the bonding operation,
    which member is not intended to remain as a part of the bonded assembly.

    216,    for a  process employing a back-up member that spans the space
    between the parts to be bonded and retains the molten filler metal therein
    but is removed after solidification of the filler metal.


CLS 228/139
TXT Process under subclass 135 wherein the structural means used includes a
    part distinct from the part(s) being bonded together, wherein the distinct
    part remains as a component of the assembled product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213,    for clamping means adapted to be removed from the bonded product.


CLS 228/140
TXT Process under subclass 139 wherein the distinct structural part includes a
    helically ribbed portion adapted to interfit with either one of the parts
    being fastened together or with another cooperatively grooved member to
    hold together the parts being bonded.


CLS 228/141.1
TXT With shaping:

    Process under subclass 101 including in addition to fusion bonding,
    physically shaping the parts bonded either before, during, or after the
    bonding operation.

    (1)     Note.  "Shaping" of the subclass is intended to describe the
    physical act of permanently altering the form, configuration, dimensions,
    proportions, or contour of a part either with or without the removal of
    material.

    (2)     Note.  Effecting a bonded joint utilizing pressure that shapes the
    work parts in the vicinity of the bond is not considered shaping for this
    subclass.  For example, roll bonding in which there is substantial
    reduction of the parts is not included in this and the indented subclasses
    unless there is shaping remote from the bonding operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235.2+, for roll bonding in which there is significant shaping of the parts
    in the vicinity of the bond, but no remote shaping claimed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclass 35 for a process of
    soldering, brazing, or welding combined with the bending particular to the
    formation of a chain link.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    196+ for a process of permanently bending or reshaping or embossing of
    self-sustaining lamina combined with lamination by nonmetallurgical bonding.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 149+ and 602+ for electrical heating
    of metal combined with the shaping thereof.

    413,    Sheet Metal Container Making subclasses 1+ for a process of
    soldering, brazing or welding combined with shaping of sheet metal parts at
    other than the areas to be joined for making particular products, e.g.,
    automobile radiator making and can making.


CLS 228/142
TXT Process under subclass 141.1 wherein each of the meeting faces of the
    separate parts or portions of the same part are shaped so that the parts
    are matched and united upon a line joining the apexes of the angle of
    junction of the parts.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is the making a picture frame wherein the
    corners (meeting faces) are beveled at 45 degrees and then joined.  The
    making of a picture frame where the corners are formed by parts cut normal
    to the frame part are not included herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 599 for metallic
    stock material having a defined corner configuration.


CLS 228/143
TXT Process under subclass 141.1 including shaping or distorting a sheet to
    coil upon itself at least two convolutions to produce a tube having a wall
    of at least two thicknesses of said sheet, and then bonding one or more
    extending edge(s) of the sheet to that part of the body of the sheet
    juxtaposed thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130,    for a process of progressively forming a sheath around a core, and
    bonding the sheath to the core.

    144+,   for a process of forming a tube of single thickness by bending a
    web into tubular form and joining the meeting edges of the web.


CLS 228/144
TXT Process under subclass 141.1 including shaping or distorting a single part
    to juxtapose marginal portions thereof and surface bonding the meeting
    faces thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5       and 15+, for bonding apparatus combined with shaping means.

    192,    for a process of soldering, brazing or welding the joints of chain
    links.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, for apparatus for making chain
    links which may include bending the link into a circular shape and securing
    the juxtaposed ends to form a link.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 48+, for metal tube seaming by
    deformation.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclass 269 for making a tube from a sheet or web.


CLS 228/145
TXT Process under subclass 144 including bending a long attenuated web into a
    tubular coil to juxtapose the faces of opposite side edges along a line
    running spirally axially along the tube so formed, and bonding the
    resulting seam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15.7,   from apparatus for forming and edge bonding to form a helically
    seamed tube.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 49+, for metal tube seaming by
    deformation.

    140,    Wireworking, subclass 76 for a process of making ferrules by
    winding wire into a helix and soldering the adjacent convolutions together.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet of Web, subclasses 299+ for making a helical tube from a sheet
    or web.


CLS 228/146
TXT Process under subclass 144 in which the shaping of the marginal portions of
    the part are juxtaposed progressively from one end of the part to the other
    end.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    for apparatus for progressively forming and bonding a one-piece
    blank to form a tube.

    130,    for a process of progressively bending a web around a core and
    joining the web to the core.

    143,    for a process of forming a web into a multilayer tube and joining
    the resultant seam.


CLS 228/147
TXT Process under subclass 146 wherein a tubular article is produced that has
    no defined trailing end.


CLS 228/148
TXT Process under subclass 147 wherein the tubular article is formed about a
    member to permanently encase that member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130,    for a process of forming a sheath member about a coextensive core
    with bonding of the sheath to the core.


CLS 228/149
TXT Process under subclass 144 in which the single part is of constant
    thickness throughout and that thickness is relatively thin compared to the
    lateral dimension of the part.


CLS 228/150
TXT Process under subclass 149 wherein the part is formed into an elongated
    tubular member and the margins being bonded extend in a plane common to the
    axis thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15.5+,  for apparatus for forming a seamed tube.


CLS 228/151
TXT Process under subclass 150 wherein the meeting faces to be bonded extend
    along the axis of the formed part and extend from the radially inner
    surface to the radially outer surface thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Faces of parts are considered to be "meeting" for this
    subclass if they are bonded together even if it is through an intermediate
    filler material and even if the faces are oppositely bevelled for the
    reception of filler material.


CLS 228/152
TXT Process under subclass 144 wherein the single part is of varying thickness
    dimension and is relatively thick when compared to the lateral dimension
    thereof.


CLS 228/153
TXT Process under subclass 141.1 including shaping a first part to match a
    meeting face of a second part which is other than flat, so that the first
    part overlaps the second part followed by joining the meeting faces of the
    parts.


CLS 228/154
TXT Process under subclass 153 in which the lapped portion is annular in shape
    and is caused to surround at least a portion of the part to which it is
    joined.


CLS 228/155
TXT Process under subclass 141.1 in which the securing together of the meeting
    faces of work part(s) is followed by shaping of the part(s).


CLS 228/156
TXT Process under subclass 155 wherein the shaping is brought about by pulling
    a work part along its axial extent through an orifice to apply tensile
    force to the part and elongate that part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 274+ for the process of shaping a metal
    part by drawing the part through a closed die without surface bonding.


CLS 228/157
TXT Process under subclass 155 including bonding a first work part to a second
    work part at a first point or line, bonding the first work part at a second
    point or line to the second work part or to a third work part, followed by
    stretching of the first work part.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass there is deliberate elongation of a portion
    of the work part remote from the bonded faces with no corresponding
    significant change in the parts at the bonded faces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 6.1+ for cutting of a single work part at
    spaced, offset lines and deforming the severed portions apart from each
    other.


CLS 228/158
TXT Process under subclass 155 wherein the shaping is brought about by the
    action of a roller*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235.2+, for roll bonding wherein the roller not only serves to force the
    meeting faces of the work parts together to effect surface bonding but also
    may deform the work in the vicinity of the bond.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 199+ for rolling to form metal work in
    the absence of surface bonding.


CLS 228/159
TXT Process under subclass 155 in which the shaping operation includes
    separating some of the substances of the joined parts therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 557+ for a process of reshaping a
    one-piece blank by removing material therefrom.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    2+ for etching shape a workpiece in the absence of metal fusion bonding.


CLS 228/160
TXT Process under subclass 155 wherein the shaping includes the use of a sharp
    cutting edge to pierce and sever one portion of the work part(s) from
    another.

    (1)     Note.  The severed portion of the part may be scrap or may be a
    usable product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, and see the search notes of that class for cutting of
    general utility.


CLS 228/161
TXT Process under subclass 159 wherein the shaping operation produces a void or
    recession in the work part(s) such that a cross-section can be taken there
    across which will show the void to be completely encircled by material of
    the part(s).

    (1)     Note.  The void in the work part(s) may extend all the way from one
    side to the other or may extend only part way therethrough.


CLS 228/162
TXT Process under subclass 159 wherein the shaping is done by the action of a
    crystalline cutting tooth.

    (1)     Note.  The crystalline cutting tooth may be a naturally formed
    element or may be artificially formed to be similar to a naturally formed
    element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, for shaping by a crystalline tool in the absence of
    fusion bonding.


CLS 228/163
TXT Process under subclass 159 wherein shaping and removal of material is done
    by heating the work part(s) beyond the melting point and removing the
    flowable material.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is cutting by use of oxyacetelene torch.


CLS 228/164
TXT Process under subclass 141.1 in which one or more of the parts to be joined
    is subjected to a shaping operation prior to the joining operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135+,   for a process of surface of fusion bonding combined with shaping of
    the parts to effect supplementary physical joining.


CLS 228/165
TXT Process under subclass 164 wherein the shaping includes the formation of an
    elongated recess in the meeting face of at least one of the parts, which
    recess is specifically intended for receipt of metallic intermediate
    bonding material.

    (1)     Note.  The groove, channel or trough is frequently of V- or
    U-shape, and is formed in one of the parts rather than in the juncture of
    the parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137,    for a process involving supplementary lock seaming which may result
    in formation of a groove.

    170,    for cutting of a bevel on each of a pair of mating parts which may
    be recited as "grooving".


CLS 228/166
TXT Process under subclass 165 wherein the parts are joined along their greater
    generally straight margins.


CLS 228/167
TXT Process under subclass 165 wherein generally flat work parts are angularly
    joined to form the walls of an elongated chamber.


CLS 228/168
TXT Process under subclass 165 wherein the meeting faces of the parts engage
    along a circular line, as in the bonding of tubular members.


CLS 228/169
TXT Process under subclass 158 including forming in at least one of the meeting
    faces a channel for the reception of filler material, and subsequent fusion
    bonding of the meeting faces.


CLS 228/170
TXT Process under subclass 164 wherein the shaping includes the use of a sharp
    cutting edge to pierce and sever one portion of the part(s) from another.

    (1)     Note.  The severed portion of the part may be scrap or may be a
    usable product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, for severing by a sharp cutting edge without fusion
    bonding.


CLS 228/171
TXT Process under subclass 170 wherein the shaping serves to cause the meeting
    faces of the parts to correspondingly meet and fit against each other.


CLS 228/172
TXT Process under subclass 170 wherein the shaping operation is done by the
    action of a crystalline cutting tooth.

    (1)     Note.  The crystalline cutting tooth may be a naturally formed
    element or may be artificially formed to be similar to a naturally formed
    element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, for shaping by a crystalline tool in the absence of
    fusion bonding.


CLS 228/173.1
TXT By deforming:

    Process under subclass 164 wherein the shaping is done by stressing a part
    beyond its elastic limit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    265,    for a process of simultaneously shaping and bonding metal working
    parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, for deforming of metallic parts in the absence of
    fusion bonding.


CLS 228/173.2
TXT Pressing first work part against second work part:

    Process under subclass 173.1 wherein a first work part is physically urged
    against a second work part with sufficient force to cause their mating
    surfaces to complement one another by deformation.


CLS 228/173.3
TXT Preforming work faying surface:

    Process under subclass 173.1 wherein a faying surface, i.e., a meeting face
    of a work part designed to mate with a meeting face of a second work part,
    is altered in shape by deformation thereof to facilitate a bonding
    operation.


CLS 228/173.4
TXT Tube or frame member:

    Process under subclass 173.1 wherein a work part being deformed is a hollow
    elongated body whose longitudinal dimension is much greater than its
    lateral cross-sectional dimension, i.e., a tube, or therein a work part
    being deformed is an elongated element specially configured to be used as a
    structural load bearing member, i.e., a frame member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 897+, for method of making structural
    members proper in that class (29).  See Note VI.B.(2) of this class (228)
    for the classification line between Class 29 and Class 228.


CLS 228/173.5
TXT Rod, bar, or wirelike object:

    Process under subclass 173.1 wherein a work part being deformed is an
    elongated body whose longitudinal dimension is much greater that its
    lateral dimension.


CLS 228/173.6
TXT Sheet  material:

    Process under subclass 173.1 wherein a work part being deformed is a
    metallic body having one dimension much smaller that its other two.


CLS 228/173.7
TXT Continuously feeding sheet material:

    Process under subclass 173.6 wherein the metallic body is fed continuously
    to means performing the shaping operation.


CLS 228/174
TXT Process under subclass 164 wherein the shaping includes the formation of an
    elongated recession in at least one of the work parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165,    for a similar operation wherein the elongated recession is for the
    express purpose of receiving filler material.


CLS 228/175
TXT Process under subclass 101 including a bonding operation as provided for
    under that definition and including another distinct bonding operation of a
    different type.

    (1)     Note.  The two bonding operations of this subclass may both be
    provided for in this class, e.g., welding plus brazing or tack welding
    followed by diffusion welding.  Also, the two bonding operations may
    include a first bonding operation of this class type and a second operation
    of another class type, e.g., welding and adhesive bonding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135,    for fusion bonding combined with mechanical securing.

    187,    for a first bonding operation between a first pair of meeting faces
    and a second bonding operation between a second pair of meeting faces
    wherein both operations are of the same basic type but include the use of
    fillers that fuse at different temperatures.

    230,    for a first bonding operation between a pair of meeting faces and a
    second bonding operation between that pair of meeting faces wherein both
    operations are of the same basic type.


CLS 228/176
TXT Process under subclass 101 in combination with either (1) an operation to
    perfect the basic operation of this class or (2) an operation for treating
    or working the work part(s) or the filler prior to during bonding wherein
    the additional operation is other than that within this class definition.

    (1)     Note.  Not included in this subclass is fusion bonding combined
    with another operation so intimately associated with the bonding operation
    as to be generally considered in the art to be part of the bonding
    operation when recited in combination therewith and specifically provided
    for under subclass 101 and below this subclass. Specifically, application
    of a coating of flux, filler or bond facilitating metal, cleaning, heating,
    handling or the application of a special environment, combined with bonding
    is provided for below and is excluded from this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for fusion bonding apparatus combined with apparatus for performing
    other operations.

    103+,   for fusion bonding combined with measuring or testing.

    135+,   for fusion bonding combined with mechanical joining.

    141.1+, for fusion bonding combined with shaping.

    175,    for fusion bonding combined with other securing.

    199+,   for fusion bonding followed by product treatment, e.g., cooling and
    cleaning.

    203+,   for treating of work parts or filler material prior to fusion
    bonding, e.g., cleaning, application of a preliminary bond facilitating
    coating or other chemical treatment.

    214+,   for bonding and protecting the work part(s) or filler, e.g., by a
    getter, protective vapor, vacuum or by application of flux.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 1.1 through  25.42, 91+, 592.1 through
    623.5 and 825 through 899.1 (subclasses for making "special articles") for
    an operation involving fusion bonding and an additional step peculiar to
    manufacture of an article, as provided for therein, subclasses 592+ for
    combined operations involving metal fusion bonding and subsequent,
    unrelated, additional work  treatment, and subclasses 428+, for fusion
    bonding combined with bringing work parts together and orienting the parts
    prior to bonding.


CLS 228/177
TXT Process under subclass 101 wherein fusion bonding is set forth in a claim
    as any of multiple forms thereof, e.g., "welding", "brazing", "sweating",
    "soldering", or "diffusion bonding".


CLS 228/178
TXT Process under subclass 101 which includes securing together a plurality of
    distinct pairs of meeting faces.

    (1)     Note.  Bonding at several locations between a single pair of
    meeting faces (e.g., spot welding along a pair of overlapped margins or
    bonding a corrugated panel to a planar panel in face-to-face relation) is
    not considered to meet the requirements of this and the indented subclasses.


CLS 228/179.1
TXT Of electrical device (e.g., semiconductor):
    Process under subclass 178 for the manufacture of product members intended
    to be used in the transmission or regulation of electrical energy.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass serves as a collecting place for
    cross-references of patents directed to the manufacture of a semiconductor
    device even though only a single joint is formed, except when bonding a
    metal to a nonmetal with a metallic filler.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.5,    for means for bonding a terminal(s) to an electrical device.

    123.1,  for bonding of a semiconductor device involving uniting a metal to
    a nonmetal utilizing a metallic filler.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 592.1+ for the manufacture of an
    electrical device wherein fusion bonding is combined with an additional
    operation not incidental to the bonding operation.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, particularly
    subclasses 26+, 51, 55, 64+, and 106+ for methods of packaging a
    semiconductor device; see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 228/180.1
TXT Simultaneous bonding of multiple joints (e.g., dip soldering of printed
    circuit boards):

    Process under subclass 179.1 wherein plural distinct meeting faces are
    caused to be secured at the same time.


CLS 228/180.21
TXT Component terminal to substrate surface (i.e., nonpenetrating
    terminal):Process under subclass 180.1 wherein electrical terminals of a
    component are bonded to contact on a face of a substrate wherein the
    terminals do not extend into or through the substrate.


CLS 228/180.22
TXT Lead-less (or "bumped") device:
    Process under subclass 180.21 wherein the terminal extends above the
    surface of the substrate.


CLS 228/180.5
TXT Wire bonding:
    Process under subclass 179.1 of fusion bonding a small strand member to
    another member.


CLS 228/181
TXT Process under subclass 178 including securing of parallel coextensive
    generally cylindrical cells to an intersecting plate.

    (1)     Note.  Securing of multiple cells to a single plate is included
    herein even though the multiple joints may run together.


CLS 228/182
TXT Process under subclass 178 for the manufacture of individual distinct
    definite dimension products*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 1.1 through  25.42, 91+, 592.1 through
    623.5, and 825 through  899.1  inclusive for the manufacture of a specified
    article wherein welding is combined with another operation that is peculiar
    to the manufacture of that article and is not ancillary to the welding
    operation.


CLS 228/183
TXT Process under subclass 182 used in the manufacture of articles intended to
    contain a first fluent material separate from a second fluent material and
    transmit thermal energy from one fluent material to the other.


CLS 228/184
TXT Process under subclass 182 used in the manufacture of enclosed chambers to
    be used for the storage of fluent material.


CLS 228/185
TXT Process under subclass 178 which includes the bonding of a plurality of
    similar work parts to a common base work part in a symmetrical or orderly
    arrangement.


CLS 228/186
TXT Process under subclass 178 in which there are first and second fusion
    bonding operations, the first bonding operation serving to seal the
    environment about the meeting faces of the second bonding operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175,    for bonding of the class type preceded by another bonding operation.


CLS 228/187
TXT Process under subclass 178 in which the forming of the plural joints
    includes the utilization of different degrees of heat.

    (1)     Note.  The operation of this subclass normally uses filler
    materials of differing melting temperatures whereby the initially formed
    joints are not disturbed by successive joining steps which occur at
    temperatures below the preceding fusion temperatures.


CLS 228/188
TXT Process under subclass 178 in which one of the work parts is a material
    other than metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for a process of mechanically attaching a metallic bonding lamina
    to a nonmetal base, and then bonding that metallic bonding lamina to
    another work part.

    122.1,  for bonding a nonmetal to a metal, using a metallic filler.

    903,    for an art collection of bonding of a metal part to a nonmetal part.


CLS 228/189
TXT Process under subclass 178 which includes placing an independent part (1)
    to overlap the meeting faces of the work part(s) being secured then bonding
    said independent part to each of the two work parts or (2) to separate the
    parts during bonding, wherein the independent part is intended to remain as
    a part of the secured assembly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    for a process of using a mechanically secured bridge member.

    213,    for a process of using a securing member to hold work parts, which
    securing member is intended to be removed from the bonded assembly.


CLS 228/190
TXT Process under subclass 178 which includes assembling a plurality of
    generally coextensive laminae, one upon another, and the simultaneous
    bonding of the adjacent interfaces thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118,    for the process of fusion bonding using bond inhibiting separating
    material of insignificant thickness.


CLS 228/191
TXT Process under subclass 101 including securing by fusion bonding the meeting
    faces and subsequent separating of the faces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264,    for the process of disassembling a fusion bonded joint in the
    absence of the step of fusion bonding.


CLS 228/192
TXT Process under subclass 101 for securing by soldering, brazing or welding
    the meeting faces of an element making up one of the parts of a chain.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144+,   for forming and uniting the meeting faces of a one-piece blank
    other than a chain link.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclass 35 for a process of
    soldering, brazing or welding chain links combined with an additional chain
    making operation such as, for example bending or forming the links.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 52 for heating and/or welding in the
    manufacture of chain having significant electric heating, as in utilizing
    the work part(s) as a part of the electric circuit.


CLS 228/193
TXT Process under subclass 101 wherein the meeting faces are heated to a
    prescribed temperature below the melting point and are subjected to
    intimate engagement such that the molecules of one face intermix with those
    of the other face.

    (1)     Note.  A solid filler material may or may not be used in the
    process of this subclass; however, the filler is heated up to but below its
    melting point and/or any molten filler produced during the process must be
    substantially absorbed by the work parts to fall within the scope of this
    subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Most of the patents including a claim proper for this
    subclass include specific reference to the time period of exposure of the
    meeting faces to heat and pressure; e.g., the parts will be subjected to
    heat and pressure for approximately half hour.


CLS 228/194
TXT Process under subclass 193 including use of filler material or other
    material which either unites with one or both of the meeting faces or
    influences the faces to help bring about bonding therebetween.


CLS 228/195
TXT Process under subclass 193 wherein the temperature of the parts is such
    that there is some slight melting and flowing at the points of highest
    pressure but wherein the melting point has not been reached and wherein the
    bonding is of the type relying on the intermix of the surface molecules of
    the faces.


CLS 228/196
TXT Process under subclass 101 in which one self-sustaining work part is joined
    to another at their meeting faces by locally heating at least a portion of
    the meeting faces to the fusion point of at least one of the work parts,
    the fused material joining the parts being derived solely from the parts.

    (1)     Note.  The joining of two or more parts by use of a filler material
    of the same constituency as the work parts is sometimes designated as an
    "autogenous" joint but is not so considered for this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Only minor melting of the work parts is found in this
    subclass so that the work parts substantially retain their original
    configuration. Formation of a substantial pool of liquid at the meeting
    faces of the work parts will be found elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254,    for joining of "pre-tinned" or filler coated parts either with or
    without the application of additional filler material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 117+ for a process of bonding with
    pressure by the use of electrically generated heat, and subclasses 137 and
    148 for a similar process not utilizing pressure.


CLS 228/197
TXT Process under subclass 196 utilizing the phenomonon of molecular
    intermixing of engaged meeting faces to augment bonding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193+,   for bonding by molecular intermixing without melting (other than
    incipient melting) of the parts.


CLS 228/198
TXT Process under subclass 101 wherein filler material is delivered to the
    meeting faces in a different chemical form from that to be used as the
    final bonding filler and wherein a reaction is utilized to release the
    filler for the desired function.


CLS 228/199
TXT Process under subclass 101 including, after the bonding operation,
    subjecting the work part(s) or of the filler material to action which
    brings about a change in the part or material.

    (1)     Note.  Positional change or thermal change is not considered to be
    a treatment for this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The treatment of this subclass is limited to treatment
    related to a welding process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176,    for metallic fusion bonding combined with other operations taking
    place before or during bonding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 592+ for combined operations involving
    metal fusion bonding and subsequent unrelated additional work treatment.


CLS 228/200
TXT Process under subclass 199 wherein the change brought about is a reduction
    in the thermal level of the product of the bonding operation and wherein
    the change is brought about in a prescribed order or rate or manner.


CLS 228/201
TXT Process under subclass 199 wherein the change brought about is removal of
    the foreign material from the product.


CLS 228/202
TXT Process under subclass 201 wherein the foreign material is removed at least
    in part by a molecular change in the product or the foreign material.


CLS 228/203
TXT Process under subclass 101 including, before the bonding operation,
    subjecting the work part(s) or the filler material to action which brings
    about a change in the part or material.

    (1)     Note.  Positional change or thermal change is not considered to be
    treatment for this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 81.01+ for a process of removing scale
    from metal.


CLS 228/204
TXT Process under subclass 203 in which a material which inherently acts to
    facilitate the movement of molten filler by capillarity is placed on one or
    more of the work parts or in the space between the meeting faces of the
    work parts so as to direct filler material to the joint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256,    for general application of filler to the work parts.


CLS 228/205
TXT Process under subclass 203 wherein the change brought about is removal of
    the foreign material from the work parts or from the filler.


CLS 228/206
TXT Process under subclass 205 wherein the foreign material is removed at least
    in part by a molecular change in the parts, filler or foreign material.


CLS 228/207
TXT Process under subclass 206 wherein the cleaning includes the application to
    the meeting faces of material which assists in the bonding operation by
    protecting the parts during bonding or by being involved directly in the
    bonding operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223,    for the application of flux in a bonding operation wherein no
    change in the work parts or the filler is made prior to bonding.


CLS 228/208
TXT Process under subclass 203 including, prior to securing, coating one or
    more of the meeting faces of the work parts with a metal of such nature as
    to cooperate with the filler material to facilitate securing, wherein the
    coating metal does not melt during bonding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122.1+, for a process which includes coating a nonmetallic part with metal
    and then soldering, brazing, or welding the coated part to either a metal
    or a metal coated nonmetal part.

    254,    for a process of soldering, brazing or welding in which the fusible
    filler material is supplied from a "pre-tinned" layer or coating on at
    least one of the parts to be joined.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 615+ for a
    metallic composite defined in terms of the composition of its components.


CLS 228/209
TXT Process under subclass 208 wherein the coating is applied to the meeting
    face of the work part(s) by molecular transfer between the coating and the
    part.


CLS 228/210
TXT Process under subclass 208 wherein the coating is attached to the meeting
    face of the work part(s) by physically interlocking the part therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135+,   for bonding workpiece with mechanical interlocking therebetween.


CLS 228/211
TXT Process under subclass 203 wherein the change in the work part(s) or the
    filler includes a molecular change.


CLS 228/212
TXT Process under subclass 101 including use of means temporarily establishing
    the position of the work parts for securing by fusion bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is use of work holders as well as clamping
    means carried by the work but securing one work part relatively to another
    and moldable material such as plaster which holds the work temporarily.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139,    for the process of securing work parts which includes attaching the
    parts together by a separate fastening means which is intended to remain as
    a part of the bonded product.


CLS 228/213
TXT Process under subclass 212 including specific recitation of removing
    clamping means from the product after fusion bonding of the parts together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212,    for holding work parts during bonding by use of plaster and
    subsequent removal of the plaster.


CLS 228/214
TXT Process under subclass 101 (a) including shielding of the filler, a metal
    part (or component thereof) or both against detrimental effects prior to,
    during, or subsequent to joining or (b) including application of a
    substance to the meeting faces or the filler to promote union of the
    meeting faces.

    (1)     Note.  A process of protecting metal parts where not combined with
    fusion bonding is classified elsewhere in accordance with the operation
    performed.

    (2)     Note.  During the bonding operation the flux substance of clause
    (b) may protect the work from oxidation, may clean, or may catalytically
    enter into the reaction between the materials being united.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199,    for fusion bonding combined with subsequent treatment of the bonded
    joint.

    203,    for fusion bonding combined with treatment of work or filler prior
    to bonding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 81.01+ for a process of removing scale
    from metal.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 1 to 42 for
    article cleaning including the application of a liquid.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 588 and 560+
    for stock material having as a component metal particles mixed with a flux.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 32+ for a process of abrading including
    tumbling and subclasses 36+ for a process of abrading utilizing a fluent
    abradant.


CLS 228/215
TXT Process under subclass 214 which includes provision of means other than the
    shape of the work parts being joined for confining the flow of fluent
    filler material to the vicinity of the bonded joint.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 5.5 for a process in which a base is
    protected during a coating operation by a protective coating, and see the
    search notes therein.


CLS 228/216
TXT Process under subclass 215 in which the confining means comprises either
    (1) a body of sufficiently high melting point or heat conductivity to
    establish, with respect to the fused filler contacting it, a cooled zone,
    or (2) a body which acts to retain the fused filler within the space
    between the meeting faces of the work part(s).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 127 for a process of casting employing a
    "chill". Note that Class 164 takes molding apparatus and a process of
    molding where the mold acts to contain and shape cast metal for producing a
    casting, whereas the body, or "chill", of this subclass acts to simply
    retain the filler within the joint; i.e., for all practical purposes the
    retainer of this subclass acts only as a back-up, the joining surfaces
    providing the other retaining surfaces.


CLS 228/217
TXT Process under subclass 214 wherein for bonding the work is isolated within
    a chamber within which a solid material having an affinity for undesirable
    gas(es) is placed to rid the environment of the bond of such gas(es).

    (1)     Note.  The gas most commonly gettered is oxygen.


CLS 228/218
TXT Process under subclass 214 wherein normal atmosphere is restricted from the
    environment of the bonding operation (1) by replacement with a different
    gaseous atmosphere, (2) by placing the work within a chamber and removing a
    portion or all gas from that chamber; or, (3) by engulfing the area about
    the bond operation with a flame that serves to consume that portion of the
    atmosphere considered undesirable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclass 709 for processes of covering the surface of molten
    metal to prevent contact with the ambient atmosphere.

    148,    Metal Treatment, for a process of significant heat treatment of
    metal to modify or maintain the internal physical structure (i.e.,
    microstructure) or chemical property of metal and, also, for using a
    reactive or protective atmosphere.  See section III, A, of Class 148 to
    determine what constitutes significant heat treatment.  Also, see Class 148
    for processes of chemical heat removing (e.g., flame cutting etc.) or
    burning (i.e., oxidizing) of metal that use a reactive or protective
    atmosphere.


CLS 228/219
TXT Process under subclass 218 as set forth under clause (1) of that definition.

    (1)     Note.  The atmosphere utilized to replace the normal atmosphere may
    be held in the area of the bond by an enclosing vessel or by the action of
    a directed blast which serves to expel the normal atmosphere.


CLS 228/220
TXT Process under subclass 219 wherein the atmosphere replacing the normal
    atmosphere reacts with any available oxygen to eliminate that gas as an
    available material from the environment, thereby preventing oxidation of
    the work or filler.


CLS 228/221
TXT Process under subclass 218 as set forth under clause (2) of that definition.


CLS 228/222
TXT Process under subclass 214 wherein the work or filler is shielded against
    excessive heat by means which absorbs thermal energy therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is the use of a heat shield or heat sink to
    protect the work remote from the meeting faces as well as the use of means
    to protect the meeting faces from being brought to a damaging temperature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199,    for cooling of the work after the fusion bonding has been completed.


CLS 228/223
TXT Process under subclass 214 including application of a substance to the
    meeting faces of the work or the filler to promote union of the meeting
    faces.

    (1)     Note.  The flux substance of this subclass may protect the work
    from oxidation, may clean, or may catalytically enter into the reaction
    between the materials being united, during the bonding operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207,    for bonding with the application of flux wherein the flux is active
    prior to the bonding operation to modify a condition of the work or filler.
     By comparison, the process of this subclass serves to modify a condition
    of the work or filler during or after the bonding operation.

    218,    for the application of fluxing material in the form of a gas or
    vapor, which establishes a protective or reactive atmosphere about the
    vicinity of the bond.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 23+ for a fluxing composition or method
    of fluxing using a particular fluxing composition, even when that method is
    designated to be a method of soldering, brazing, welding, or fusion bonding.


CLS 228/224
TXT Process under subclass 223 in which the fluxing substance is incorporated
    with a affixed to the filler prior to application of the filler for their
    concurrent application to the meeting faces.

    (1)     Note.  The flux of this subclass may be incorporated with the
    filler either as a core or as a coating on a filler wire or rod.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56.1+,  for a single or plural layer metal article which is useful as
    filler material in a metal fusion bonding operation and which includes
    metal united or combined with a flux.

    223,    for a process involving passing the meeting faces through a
    supernatant layer of flux on a bath of molten filler.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 145.22, 145.23+ and 146.1+ for weld
    rods for gas flame (Class 228) or electric arc (Class 219) use having a
    flux incorporated therein, and consult the search notes in that subclass
    and those indented thereunder for related art.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, for a stock material
    product in the form of a rod, bar or layer, with structure (i.e., shape),
    or in the form of plural layers not including a metal-next-to-metal
    laminate.


CLS 228/225
TXT Process under subclass 101 including a first application of filler and a
    subsequent application of filler to the same meeting faces for bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is the application of successive strata of
    filler one upon the other, as well as successive depositions on opposite
    sides or spaced areas of the joint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175,    for plural bonding operations wherein different bonding techniques
    are used.

    178,    for plural bonding operations at  different meeting faces.


CLS 228/226
TXT Process under subclass 225 wherein the filler material of the first
    application is chemically different from that of the second application.


CLS 228/227
TXT Process under subclass 101 including a first application of thermal energy
    to the work or to the filler and a second application of thermal energy to
    the work or filler to raise the temperature thereof and thereby effect or
    influence the bonding of a single joint.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is the distinct application of heat to
    opposite sides of a single workpiece.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, particularly subclass 516 for combined processes
    of metal fusion bonding and significant heat treatment of metal to modify
    or maintain the internal physical structure (i.e., microstructure) or
    chemical property of the metal.  See section III, A, of Class 148 to
    determine what constitutes significant heat treatment.

    219,    Electric Heating, for the application of electrical energy passing
    through the bonded joint to effect heating thereof.


CLS 228/228
TXT Process under subclass 227 including in addition to the plural applications
    of thermal energy, the application of force to cause the meeting faces to
    bond together.


CLS 228/229
TXT Process under subclass 227 wherein the first application of thermal energy
    is applied to the work and the second independent application of thermal
    energy is applied to the filler.


CLS 228/230
TXT Process under subclass 227 including different types of application of
    thermal energy.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein, for example, is the application of heat
    from an electrical resistance element combined with heating by a torch.

    (2)     Note.  Heating to a first temperature and subsequently heating to a
    different temperature is not considered to be "diverse" for this subclass.
    Similarly, heating at a first rate and then at a second rate is not
    considered to be diverse.


CLS 228/231
TXT Process under subclass 227 wherein at least one application of thermal
    energy is made after bonding has occurred.


CLS 228/232
TXT Process under subclass 227 wherein at least one application of thermal
    energy is made before bonding has occurred.


CLS 228/233.1
TXT Specific rate of varying pressure or schedule of distinct pressures:

    Process under subclass 101 (a) including applying changing force between
    the meeting faces to effect bonding, expressed in a claim in precise,
    numerical language with regard to the rate of change; or (b) including
    applying a first force between the meeting faces expressed in a claim in
    precise, numerical language and subsequently applying a second, different
    force thereto, also expressed in a claim in precise, numerical language.


CLS 228/233.2
TXT Specific rate of varying temperature or schedule of distinct
    temperatures:Process under subclass 101 (a) including applying thermal
    energy to the meeting faces or to the filler, to raise the thermal level
    (i.e., temperature) thereof, expressed in a claim in precise, numerical
    language with regard to the rate of change of the temperature or expressed
    as the rate of applying thermal energy to the work; or (b) including
    establishing a first temperature to the meeting faces or to the filler
    expressed in a claim in precise, numerical language and subsequently
    establishing a second, different temperature thereto, also expressed in a
    claim in precise, numerical language.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    234.1+, for bonding by use of critical temperature or heating when metal
    fusion bonding; particularly subclasses 235.1+ when combined with
    application of critical pressure between the meeting faces.


CLS 228/234.1
TXT Specific mode of heating or applying pressure:
    Process under subclass 101 wherein a procedure of or an implement for
    applying thermal energy or force to the meeting faces of the work is set
    forth in a claim.

    (1)     Note.  Cooling is considered to be "applying temperature."

    (2)     Note.  Heating ancillary to welding in a furnace which may be
    disclosed, but NOT claimed, as electrically heated is included herein.

    (3)     Note.  Heating by engulfing a work in a liquid or by a "wave" of
    liquid over a portion of work is included herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, for welding using an electrical heating means,
    particularly subclasses 56+ for wire, rod, or bar bonding; subclasses 76.1+
    for deposition welding; subclasses 78.01+ for resistance welding;
    subclasses 121.13+ for welding using an electron beam; subclasses 121.45+
    for plasma welding; subclass 121.63 for welding with a laser; subclass 129
    for brazing or soldering using an arc; and subclasses 136+ for welding
    using an arc.


CLS 228/234.2
TXT Vapor phase heating:
    Process under subclass 234.1 including utilizing the latent heat of
    vaporization of a heat exchange medium to heat the work or filler material.

    (1)     Note.  Commonly, work to be bonded is placed with filler in a
    chamber filled with a normally liquid heat exchange medium, some of which
    is in the gaseous state, to transfer heat to the work and filler material
    (and liquify some of the medium) without heating the work above the
    temperature of vaporization of the medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    234.1,  for a similar operation including transfer of heat from a liquid
    medium to filler.


CLS 228/234.3
TXT Exothermic reaction heating:
    Process under subclass 234.1 including utilization of material placed on or
    about the vicinity of the meeting faces, which material is adapted to burn
    to supply sufficient heat to effect securing by fusion bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is applying pressure by use of a vacuum, by
    use of a magnet, isostatically, etc.


CLS 228/235.1
TXT Mode of applying pressure:
    Process under subclass 234.1 wherein the procedure of or implement for
    applying force between the meeting faces to effect bonding is expressed in
    a claim.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is applying pressure by vacuum, by magnetic
    attraction, isostatically, etc.


CLS 228/235.2
TXT Roll bonding:
    Process under subclass 235.1 including applying bonding pressure by the
    action of a roller*.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass as well as elsewhere in this class,
    deforming a work part by a bonding tool simultaneously with bonding is
    considered to be incidental to the bonding and is accordingly classified
    therewith.  Therefore, included herein is bonding by use of a roller with
    simultaneous deforming of the work part(s).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141.1+, particularly subclass 158 indented thereunder for bonding combined
    with independent rolling to deform a workpiece.


CLS 228/235.3
TXT At specific temperature level:
    Process under subclass 235.2 including claimed numerical thermal level.


CLS 228/244
TXT Process under subclass 101 in which unfused filler is caused to melt at an
    area of contact with the meeting faces of the work part(s) and is then
    progressively advanced toward said meeting faces simultaneously with the
    fusion of additional quantities of filler.

    (1)     Note.  The unfused filler usually is in the form of a rod or wire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56.1+,  for preformed solder for fusion bonding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 303+ and subclasses 252+ for a composition of loose
    metal particles mixed with particles of a nonmetal, which may be a flux.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 145.1+ and 146.1+ for weld rods, per
    se, used in either an electric or a nonelectric welding process.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 588 and 560+
    for stock material having as a component metal particles mixed with a flux.


CLS 228/245
TXT Process under subclass 101 which includes locating a quantity of unfused
    filler on or adjacent the meeting faces prior to applying fusing heat to
    the filler so located.

    (1)     Note.  The placement of filler may occur either before or after
    juxtaposing the parts to be joined.

    (2)     Note.  The solid filler as preplaced frequently is pre-shaped or in
    the form of a powder to facilitate placement.

    (3)     Note.  The filler of this subclass may be liquid when located but
    will solidify prior to bonding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 265+ for a fastener or connector
    having a supply of fusible material incorporated therein.


CLS 228/246
TXT Process under subclass 245 wherein the filler is a solid, preformed article
    shaped to fit prescribed work.


CLS 228/247
TXT Process under subclass 246 wherein the preformed filler is not limited in
    length by a trailing end.


CLS 228/248.1
TXT Applied in powdered or particulate form:
    Process under subclass 245 wherein the filler is in the form of relatively
    small metal particles such that the particles can flow into position on the
    work similarly to a liquid.

    (1)     Note.  The filler particles of this subclass may be suspended in a
    paste or liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 255+ for a composition of loose metal particles.


CLS 228/248.5
TXT Nonhomogeneous metal filler particles:
    Process under subclass 248.1 wherein the metal particles of the filler are
    of distinct, different size, shape, or material.


CLS 228/249
TXT Process under subclass 245 wherein the filler is placed in position to be
    between the meeting faces for securing by fusion bonding.


CLS 228/250
TXT Process under subclass 249 wherein the work parts are generally sheet-like
    and wherein the meeting faces to be secured by fusion bonding comprise
    directly abutting marginal edge faces.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is the bonding of adjacent plates oppositely
    bevelled for reception of filler material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151,    for butt joining the edges of a one-piece blank.


CLS 228/251
TXT Process under subclass 249 wherein the work parts are generally sheet-like
    and are secured to each other at their margins such that their meeting
    faces overlap.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes securing the edges of work if there
    is only slight overlap (e.g., as occurs when the edges of adjacent plates
    or sheets are bevelled in the same direction), just so a portion of one
    sheet when considered in cross-section extends beyond a portion of the
    other sheet.


CLS 228/252
TXT Process under subclass 249 wherein the work parts comprise a pair of
    superposed sheet-like members of generally the same surface area which are
    secured together by fusion bonding, one directly on top of the other and
    wherein the meeting faces comprise virtually all of the upper surface of
    the first sheet and virtually all of the lower surface of the second sheet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    190,    for a similar operation wherein at least three superposed sheets
    are simultaneously secured by fusion bonding.


CLS 228/253
TXT Process under subclass 249 including securing filler to at least one of the
    meeting faces prior to securing by fusion bonding.


CLS 228/254
TXT Process under subclass 253 wherein filler is secured to a meeting face by
    metallurgical (fusion) bonding or by adhesive bonding.


CLS 228/255
TXT Process under subclass 253 wherein the filler is secured to a meeting face
    by the structural shape of the work part, the filler part or by separate
    fastening means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135+,   for structurally securing work parts together.


CLS 228/256
TXT Process under subclass 101 which includes contacting the meeting faces with
    molten filler or distributing molten filler to the meeting faces.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is soldering, brazing or welding in which
    contact of fused filler with the meeting faces of the metal parts is
    effected by scraping, scratching, brushing or other surface exposure with
    some instrumentality while the surfaces are in contact with the fused
    filler. Aluminum is soldered or brazed by this process.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes joining parts together while
    subjecting molten filler to vibration to distribute the filler.

    (3)     Note.  Included herein is a process in which the meeting faces are
    moved relatively to one another while there is molten filler between them
    so to better distribute the filler throughout the joint.

    (4)     Note.  This subclass includes immersing the assembled meeting faces
    in a bath of molten filler to effect fusion bonding as well as immersing a
    single meeting face in a bath of molten filler followed by bringing that
    face with its still liquid coating of filler to a corresponding meeting
    face to effect securing by fusion bonding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204,    for a process using porous or capillary feed material on or between
    the meeting faces to facilitate distribution of the filler throughout the
    joint.

    212,    for application of a resilient clamping pressure to urge the parts
    together which, as an incident thereto, causes flow of filler from between
    the meeting faces as the filler metal fuses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 100+ for coating means having a solid
    self-sustaining member physically in contact with the previously applied
    coating, which member works or otherwise modifies or distributes the
    coating on the work.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 431+ for the process of coating
    articles by immersion in a molten metal bath.


CLS 228/257
TXT Process under subclass 256 wherein the molten filler is caused to flow by
    the action of the earth's gravity field thereon.


CLS 228/258
TXT Process under subclass 256 wherein the molten filler is drawn by surface
    tension through the narrow space between the meeting faces of the work
    parts.


CLS 228/259
TXT Process under subclass 256 wherein molten filler is distributed to the
    meeting faces by either (1) plunging the previously assembled faces beneath
    a generally nonflowing bath of filler or (2) plunging one of the meeting
    faces beneath such a pool and then assembling that face to the
    corresponding meeting face prior to solidification of the molten filler
    coating the first face.

    (1)     Note.  "Dip soldering", is included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180.1+, for dip soldering plural joints.


CLS 228/260
TXT Process under subclass 256 wherein the filler is moved by the action of a
    pump into engagement with the meeting faces of the work part(s) as a solid
    current either passing unconfined through space or passing along a confined
    passage.

    (1)     Note.  "Wave soldering", is included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180.1+, for simultaneously wave soldering plural joints.


CLS 228/261
TXT Process under subclass 256 wherein the molten filler is pressurized and
    forced through an orifice to form moving droplets which travel through
    space and engage the meeting face(s) of the work.


CLS 228/262
TXT Process under subclass 256 wherein travel of the molten filler is promoted
    by imparting high frequency, short duration, to-and-fro motion thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110.1,  for fusion bonding wherein high frequency energy causes adherence
    of the meeting faces of work parts to each other or mutually to filler
    material to effect bonding of the parts.


CLS 228/262.1
TXT Critical work component, temperature, or pressure:
    Process under subclass 101 including (a) use of specifically  claimed work
    material, (b) applying force between the meeting faces to effect bonding,
    claimed expressly in precise, numerical language, or (c) applying thermal
    energy to the meeting faces or to the filler, claimed expressly in precise,
    numerical language with regard to the thermal level (temperature) or the
    rate of applying thermal energy.

    (1)     Note.  Lead (Pb), zinc (Zn), tin (Sn), chromium (Cr), germanium
    (Ge), manganese (Mn), as well as material claimed as "metal," are materials
    included in this and the indented subclasses, in addition to those
    specifically named in those titles or definitions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233.1,  for a process of metal fusion bonding including a specific rate of
    applying pressure or schedule of distinct pres-sures.

    233.2,  for a process of metal fusion bonding including a specific rate of
    applying temperature or schedule of distinct temperatures.

    234.1,  for a process of metal fusion bonding including a specific mode of
    applying temperature or pressure.


CLS 228/262.2
TXT Nonmetal work component without metallic filler:
    Process under subclass 262.1 of bonding either a nonmetallic material to
    another material or a nonmetallic material having a thin metallic coating
    to another material.


CLS 228/262.21
TXT Solid state bonding:
    Process under subclass 262.2 wherein, during the bonding process, the
    filler material never goes into the vapor or liquid state.


CLS 228/262.3
TXT Nickel or cobalt member:
    Process under subclass 262.1 of bonding a work article, the greatest
    percentage of which is nickel (Ni) or cobalt (Co), to another or like
    material.

    (1)     Note.  The work article of this subclass may be considered to be
    nickel or cobalt "based."

    (2)     Note.  "Inconel," "Kovar," or "Monel" is considered to be nickel
    based.


CLS 228/262.31
TXT Brazing or soldering:
    Process under subclass 262.3 of bonding with liquid filler material at
    temperature less than the solidus of the material being bonded by either
    "brazing" or "soldering."

    (1)     Note.  If the liquidus of the filler material is less than 840o F
    (450o C), the operation is "soldering."  If the liquidus of the filler
    material is 840o F (450o C) or more, the operation is "brazing."  Actually,
    in some areas the terms have become somewhat interchangeable.

    (2)     Note.  An operation described as "brazing" or "soldering" is
    included in this subclass without limitation to the specific temperature
    range.  An operation described as "welding" is included in this subclass
    only if the disclosure clearly is within the limits of the subclass
    definition.


CLS 228/262.4
TXT Ferrous metal member:
    Process under subclass 262.1 for bonding a work article, the greatest
    composition percentage of which is iron (Fe), to another article.

    (1)     Note.  The work article of this subclass may be considered to be
    ferrous "based."

    (2)     Note.  The second article may or may not be ferrous.


CLS 228/262.41
TXT Steel member:
    Process under subclass 262.4 wherein composition of the iron (Fe) work
    article comprises an alloy containing carbon (C), but not more than 1.7%
    carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Steel may be comprised of iron and carbon alloyed with any
    of many other materials.


CLS 228/262.42
TXT Brazing or soldering:
    Process under subclass 262.41 of bonding with liquid filler material at
    temperature less than the solidus of the material being bonded by either
    "brazing" or "soldering."

    (1)     Note.  If the liquidus of the filler material is less than 840o F
    (450o C), the operation is "soldering."  If the liquidus of the filler
    material is 840o F (450o C) or more, the operation is "brazing."  Actually,
    in some areas the terms have become somewhat interchangeable.

    (2)     Note.  An operation described as "brazing" or "soldering" is
    included in this subclass without limitation to the specific temperature
    range.  An operation described as "welding" is included in this subclass
    only if the disclosure clearly is within the limits of the subclass
    definition.


CLS 228/262.43
TXT And nonferrous metal member:
    Process under subclass 262.42 wherein the composition of the other work
    article is less than half iron (Fe).


CLS 228/262.44
TXT And nonferrous metal member:
    Process under subclass 262.41 wherein the composition of the other work
    article is less than half iron (Fe).


CLS 228/262.45
TXT Brazing or soldering:
    Process under subclass 262.4 of bonding with liquid filler material at
    temperature less than the solidus of the material being bonded by either
    "brazing" or "soldering."

    (1)     Note.  If the liquidus of the filler material is less than 840o F
    (450o C), the operation is "soldering."  If the liquidus of the filler
    material is 840o F (450o C) or more, the operation is "brazing."  Actually,
    in some areas the terms have become somewhat interchangeable.

    (2)     Note.  An operation described as "brazing" or "soldering" is
    included in this subclass without limitation to the specific temperature
    range.  An operation described as "welding" is included in this subclass
    only if the disclosure clearly is within the limits of the subclass
    definition.


CLS 228/262.5
TXT Aluminum or magnesium member:
    Process under subclass 262.1 of bonding a work article, the greatest
    percentage of which is aluminum (Al) or magnesium (Mg), to another or like
    material.

    (1)     Note.  The work article of this subclass may be considered to be
    aluminum or magnesium "based."


CLS 228/262.51
TXT Brazing or soldering:
    Process under subclass 262.5 of bonding with liquid filler material at
    temperature less than the solidus of the material being bonded by either
    "brazing" or "soldering."

    (1)     Note.  If the liquidus of the filler material is less than 840o F
    (450o C) the operation is "soldering."  If the liquidus of the filler
    material is 840o F (450o C) or more, the operation is "brazing."  Actually,
    in some areas the terms have become somewhat interchangeable.

    (2)     Note.  An operation described as "brazing" or "soldering" is
    included in this subclass without limitation to the specific temperature
    range.  An operation described as "welding" is included in this subclass
    only if the disclosure clearly is within the limits of the subclass
    definition.


CLS 228/262.6
TXT Copper or noble metal member:
    Process under subclass 262.1 of bonding a work article, the greatest
    percentage of which is copper (Cu) or a noble metal (i.e., a material
    resistant to oxidation), to another or like material.

    (1)     Note.  The work article of this subclass may be considered to be
    copper or noble metal "based."

    (2)     Note.  In this art, the term "doping" usually describes diffusion
    of dopant in a work article.  Therefore, in the absence of specific
    disclosure otherwise, such disclosure will not be considered to be
    "brazing" or "soldering."

    (3)     Note. Noble metals (precious metals) are considered inactive or
    stable, and are usually found in elemental form in nature.  Gold (Au),
    silver (Ag), and platinum group metals (i.e., platinum (Pt), ruthenium
    (Ru), rhodium (Rh), palladium (Pd), osmium (Os), and iridium  (Ir)) are
    considered to be "noble" metals.


CLS 228/262.61
TXT Brazing or soldering:
    Process under subclass 262.6 of bonding with liquid filler material at
    temperature less than the solidus of the material being bonded by either
    "brazing" or "soldering."

    (1)     Note.  If the liquidus of the filler material is less than 840o F
    (450o C), the operation is "soldering."  If the liquidus of the filler
    material is 840o F (450o C) or more, the operation is "brazing."  Actually,
    in some areas the terms have become somewhat interchangeable.

    (2)     Note.  An operation described as "brazing" or "soldering" is
    included in this subclass without limitation to the specific temperature
    range.  An operation described as "welding" is included in this subclass
    only if the disclosure clearly is within the limits of the subclass
    definition.


CLS 228/262.7
TXT Refractory metal member:
    Process under subclass 262.1 for bonding a work article, the greatest
    percentage of which is a relatively hard-to-fuse metal, to another or like
    material.

    (1)     Note.  The work article of this subclass may be considered to be
    refractory metal "based."

    (2)     Note.  Refractory metals have the highest melting points and the
    lowest vapor pressures of all metals.  Hafnium (Hf), molybdenum (Mo),
    niobium (Nb) (also known as columbium (Cb)), rhenium (Re), tantalum (Ta),
    titanium (Ti), tungsten (W), zirconium (Zr), vanadium (V), and base alloys
    of such are considered to be refractory metals.  Other materials may be
    refractory metals in certain uses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262.5+, for fusion bonding of aluminum (Al) (which in some ways is similar
    to a refractory metal); or for fusion bonding of any of a group of
    (refractory) metals including aluminum.


CLS 228/262.71
TXT Titanium or zirconium member:
    Process under subclass 262.7 wherein the hard-to-fuse metal is titanium
    (Ti), zirconium (Zr), or an alloy thereof.


CLS 228/262.72
TXT Brazing or soldering:
    Process under subclass 262.71 of bonding with liquid filler material at
    temperature less than the solidus of the material being bonded by either
    "brazing" or "soldering."

    (1)     Note.  If the liquidus of the filler material is less than 840o F
    (450o C), the operation is "soldering."  If the liquidus of the filler
    material is 840o F (450o C) or more, the operation is "brazing."  Actually,
    in some areas the terms have become somewhat interchangeable.

    (2)     Note.  An operation described as "brazing" or "soldering" is
    included in this subclass without limitation to the specific temperature
    range.  An operation described as "welding" is included in this subclass
    only if the disclosure clearly is within the limits of the subclass
    definition.


CLS 228/262.8
TXT Brazing or soldering:
    Process under subclass 262.7 of bonding with liquid filler material at
    temperature less than the solidus of the material being bonded by either
    "brazing" or "soldering."

    (1)     Note.  If the liquidus of the filler material is less than 840o F
    (450o C), the operation is "soldering."  If the liquidus of the filler
    material is 840o F (450o C) or more, the operation is "brazing."  Actually,
    in some areas the terms have become somewhat interchangeable.

    (2)     Note.  An operation described as "brazing" or "soldering" is
    included in this subclass without limitation to the specific temperature
    range.  An operation described as "welding" is included in this subclass
    only if the disclosure clearly is within the limits of the subclass
    definition.


CLS 228/262.9
TXT Brazing or soldering:
    Process under subclass 262.1 of bonding with liquid filler material at
    temperature less than the solidus of the material being bonded by either
    "brazing" or "soldering."

    (1)     Note.  If the liquidus of the filler material is less than 840o F
    (450o C), the operation is "soldering."  If the liquidus of the filler
    material is 840o F (450o C) or more, the operation is "brazing."  Actually,
    in some areas the terms have become somewhat interchangeable.

    (2)     Note.  An operation described as "brazing" or "soldering" is
    included in this subclass without limitation to the specific temperature
    range.  An operation described as "welding" is included in this subclass
    only if the disclosure clearly is within the limits of the subclass
    definition.


CLS 228/264
TXT Process under the class definition for separation of meeting faces of work
    part(s) which faces were previously bonded together by used metallic filler
    or were previously metallurgically bonded directly together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191,    for similar separation of meeting faces combined with metallurgical
    bonding therebetween.


CLS 228/265
TXT With concurrent bonding:

    Process under subclass 141.1 wherein the work is simultaneously
    metallurgically fused and physically shaped.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 228/901
TXT Art collection of the process for bonding together a plurality of assembled
    and juxtaposed galvanic cells.


CLS 228/902
TXT Art collection of the process for bonding by use of flame in direct contact
    with the work or filler.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218,    for protection of work parts or filler by use of a reactive flame.


CLS 228/903
TXT Art collection of the process for uniting a metal part to a nonmetal work
    part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122.1,  for bonding a metal and nonmetal by use of metallic intermediate
    filler.

    188,    for making of plural metallurgically bonded joints including a
    nonmetallic base.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, for a
    process of joining utilizing a nonmetallic cement and see the search notes
    in the definition to subclass 101 of this class.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclass 114 for process of uniting metal parts
    to nonmetallic parts by means of electro-deposition.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, subclasses 10+ for process of
    producing articles in a solid or compact state from particulate material in
    which some of the particulate material is metal and some is nonmetal.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, particularly
    subclasses 26+, 51, 55, 64+, and 106+ for methods of packaging a
    semiconductor device; see the search notes thereunder.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    subclasses 24+ for a method of making a display or gas panel, subclass 26
    for a method of making a fluorescent lamp, and subclass 27 for a method of
    making an incandescent lamp.


CLS 228/904
TXT Art collection of the process peculiar to the uniting of small, elongated
    strands.


CLS 229/
TTL ENVELOPES, WRAPPERS, AND PAPERBOARD BOXES

CLS 229/
TXT
    I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER:

    This class provides for certain special types of receptacles called
    Paperboard Boxes, File Folders, and Envelopes, and further provides for
    certain special types of articles called Postal Cards and Packets, and
    Wrappers for a mercantile unit.

    A.      This is the class for envelope being defined as a substantially
    flat receptacle having two walls joined at their edges to form a
    pocket-like enclosure made of paper or paper substitute material, which is
    disclosed for enclosing a sheet-like article (e.g., document) while it is
    being transported (e.g., mailed).

    (1)     Note.  An envelope is usually made of paper or paper-like material
    such as a flexible sheet of cellulosic or resinous material (e.g., plastic
    film).

    B.      This is the class for file folders, a file folder being defined as
    a substantially flat receptacle having two walls connected at a bottom fold
    line, or to an expandable bottom wall; and which is disclosed for storing a
    sheet-like article (e.g., document) in a file cabinet.

    (1)     Note.  A file folder can have closed ends, and may be expandable to
    a nonflat shape.

    (2)     Note.  A file folder is usually placed in a file cabinet under a
    heading which facilitates retrieval.

    (3)     Note.  A file folder may have the secondary function of holding an
    article while being transported.

    C.      Wrappers- This is the class for wrappers, a wrapper being defined
    as a single-use covering having a structural element (e.g., fastener, seal,
    etc.) or a specified shape adapting it for wrapping a mercantile unit, and
    as being made of paper paper-substitute material.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a paper-substitute material is a flexible
    sheet of cellulosic or resinous material (e.g., plastic film).

    (2)     Note.  A mercantile unit includes means in or by which goods
    (article or material) are displayed, protected, packaged or arranged in a
    particular manner to facilitate sale, transportation in commerce, use or
    storage.

    (3)     Note.  A "single-use" covering is one which is discarded after use.
     (By contrast, Class 150, Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, provides
    for flexible protective article covers which are reusable).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    923,    for the combination of a wrapper and paperboard box.



    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclass for
    stock material in form of a single or plural web or sheet.

    D.      This is the class for paperboard boxes, a paperboard box being
    defined as a container made from material similar in composition to paper
    but thicker and stiffer in character, the container having a bottom portion
    for supporting content, peripheral wall structure for at least partially
    surrounding the content, and an access opening intended for the insertion
    or removal of content.

    (1)     Note.  A box made of cellulosic or resinous material (e.g.,
    plastic) which is similar in character to paperboard, and which is
    manipulated in the same manner as paperboard (e.g., folded from a blank) is
    included here.  Class 220, Receptacles, takes containers not provided for
    elsewhere.

    E.      This class also provides for postal cards, letter sheets, and
    packets, a post card being defined as a card peculiarly adapted carry
    information and be mailed by itself; a letter sheet being defined as a
    sheet peculiarly adapted to carry information, and is disclosed as being
    defined as a mailing sheet having an enclosure, the packet being peculiarly
    adapted to carry information and be mailed as a unit.

    II.     RELATION TO SUPPORT CLASSES:

    In general, as between the receptacle classes and the support classes, the
    receptacle classes provide for the combination of a receptacle plus
    support; except, the support classes will accept a claim to a support
    combined with a receptacle, wherein the claim (a) nominally recites the
    receptacle, or (b) recites only so much of the receptacle structure as is
    need to cooperate with the support, or (c) recites only those receptacle
    features which have been modified specifically to cooperate with the
    support.

    III.    RELATION TO OTHER CLASSES AND INDEX:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and general Cleaning, subclass 257.06 for a
    paperboard paint tray.

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 110+ for a handle, per se.

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., appropriate subclass for a
    fastener, per se.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 299+ for a check,
    label or tag, per se, subclass 312 for a box having a check, label or tag
    with indicia; and subclass 359 for a file folder with indicia.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping and Vermin Destroying, appropriate subclass for a
    box having means specialized to a use provided for in that class.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclasses 66+ for a box having means specialized
    to a use provided for in that class.

    53,     Package Making, for a method or apparatus for folding a box,
    particularly subclasses 381.1+, 456, 458, 491, 565, and 566.

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclass for a box including means to
    produce a refrigeration effect.

    86,     Ammunition and Explosive-Charge Making, subclass 11 for a method or
    apparatus for making paper shells.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 456 and 473+ for a paper
    cartridge or paper shell, respectively.

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, appropriate subclass for a
    device of that class type made of paperboard.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 428+, 489+, 491+, 498+, 513+ for a box
    including means specialized to an animal (e.g., food support).  Vent and
    closure structures are not considered to be means specialized to an animal.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 118-178 for a paper tube of
    indefinite length to be used as stocking for making a paperboard box, and
    having no added structure limiting it to use as a receptacle.

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, subclasses 154+ for a
    reusable flaccid/flexible protective cover which is configured to cover a
    specific article, and see I C (3) Note above for a description of the
    single use wrapper provided for in this class (229).

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, for
    adhesive bonding in general, and particularly subclass 69 for the
    application of end closures to containers.

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, appropriate subclass for a
    traveling container of that class type made of paperboard.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, for a box having a specialized use
    provided for in that class, or a box having content therein; and in
    particular, search the following subclasses:

    44+,    for a box convertible to or from  display.

    123+,   for a matchbox utilizing gravity  feed to an egress opening.

    139+,   for a paperboard bottle carrier.

    256+,   for a box having a compartment forming partition.

    265+,   for a cigarette box with a closure.

    273+,   for a cigarette box formed from a folded blank.

    278+,   for a box for apparel.

    336,    for means to position content within a box.

    389+,   for a box for a roll or reel.

    418+,   for a box for a light bulb.

    424,    for a box for a book.

    427+,   for a paperboard receptacle for plural beverage containers.

    436,    for a box for plural tetrahedron shaped receptacles.

    491+,   for a folded blank for a box provided for in Class 206.

    521+,   for a box having means to pad, brace or hold the content to protect
    it from a shock.

    551,    for a box for a pastry wedge, per se.

    557+,   for a tray type structure, comprising an open shallow container.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 132.1 and 195 for a foldable and/or
    collapsible receptacle type rack, and see II above.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses 18+ for a box provided for in that
    class having compartment features, particularly subclasses 26+ for an egg
    box divider, subclass 29 for separable partitions, and subclasses 30+ for
    crossed partitions.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 725+ for a box having means
    specialized to microwave cooking.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 62+ for a foldable blank not made of
    paperboard, subclasses 400+ for a paperboard box having multilayer barrier
    structure around the entire content-holding portion, and see the notes
    under that class.

    221,    Article Dispensing, for a paperboard box combined with a discharge
    assistant or with means to retard removal of successive articles from the
    box.  For example, such means are found in subclasses 33+ and 303+ wherein
    the egress opening of a box is of lesser extent than the articles to be
    removed from the box.  Thus, either the articles or the box opening must be
    deformed to permit removal.  A box having an egress opening which is as big
    as an article to be removed remains in this Class 229, Envelopes, Wrappers,
    And Paperboard Boxes, even if the article must be lifted over a lip to be
    withdrawn.  See the Class Definition of Class 221, Article Dispensing,
    section 1,C, for examples of dispensing features of that class type.  This
    Class 229, Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, provides for boxes
    having an internal inclined ramp which merely utilizes gravity to urge
    articles toward the egress opening.

    222,    Dispensing, for a paperboard box combined with a dispensing
    feature, such as a discharge assistant, cutter or punch feature, quantity
    control means, collapsibility, or internal material guide means beyond a
    mere inclined ramp utilizing gravity.  See the Class Definition of Class
    222, Dispensing, for a recitation of dispensing features. Class 222,
    Dispensing, subclasses 526+ and 566+ provide for a container having an
    external material flow guide (e.g., pour spout) which container is not made
    of paperboard.  This Class 229, Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes,
    provides for a paperboard box combined with an external material flow guide
    means (e.g., nozzle, spout, pouring lip, etc.) except when such guide means
    has a cutting or punch feature.  Further, this class provides for an
    internal material guide means which is limited to utilizing the force of
    gravity to guide material contents (e.g., internal inclined ramp which
    utilizes gravity to urge contents toward an egress opening).

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, subclasses 48+ for a box having an
    integral severing means (e.g., serrated edge).

    248,    Supports, subclasses 127+ for a stand, particularly subclass 174
    for a stand made of sheet material, and see II above.

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 117+ for a container type mold.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-like Implements, subclass 1 for a pet
    excreta holder.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 259+ for a foldable or
    collapsible cabinet.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 61 for a portable egg
    receptacle used during candling of the egg.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 106+ for a box having food content therein.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    and in particular subclasses 34.1+ for stock material nominally claimed as
    a box.

    454,    Ventilation, appropriate subclass for a ventilation feature, per se.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, appropriate subclasses for a method or apparatus of
    that class type for making a box, and in particular subclasses 52+ for box
    making, a box, and subclasses 901+ for cross-reference art collections for
    boxes.

    D9,     Packages and Containers for Goods (1), subclass 346 for a
    compartmented box design, and subclasses 414+ for a box design.




CLS 229/3.1
TXT Receptacles under the class definition coated with some composition to
    render them impervious to liquid.  There may be modification of a box to
    adapt it to a specific waterproofing composition or application of the
    composition to a paper box.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses for
    coating compositions, per se.

    427,    Coating Processes, for coating processes in general.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of (1) a coated or impregnated
    sheet or web not provided for in any other class or (2) a composite web or
    sheet.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses for
    synthetic resins or natural rubber and compositions thereof.


CLS 229/3.5
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which a particular material is
    used in a special way, in which there is special adaptation of the material
    to form a paper box or in which there is modification of a box to adapt it
    to the use of the material (for reinforcing or other purpose).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet, and especially subclasses 174+ for such a product embodying a
    component which is of nonplanar uniform thickness (e.g., corrugations or
    pleats).


CLS 229/4.5
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to the structure of the
    body or walls of boxes of cylindrical or conical form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.1,    for waterproofed boxes.

    93,     for open ended paper mailing tubes.

    120.02+, for compartmented boxes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, appropriate subclasses for similar receptacle
    structure.


CLS 229/5.5
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to the end structure of
    the receptacle or in the method of attaching it to the side walls other
    than by crimping or by means of separate fasteners.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 600+ for analogous end structures.


CLS 229/5.6
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5.5 in which the end is held in place by
    being rolled on the edge of the side walls, or the wall is rolled over the
    end, or the two are rolled together.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 316+ for cap closures for bottles and
    jars.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 615+ for similar seams or joints.

    413,    Sheet Metal Container Making, subclasses 9+ for processes of making
    container closures or of closing a container.


CLS 229/5.7
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5.5 wherein the end and body are secured
    together by a separate member, as a channeled annular ring or hoop or
    body-reinforcements bent over the end, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 410+ for methods and subclasses 128+ for
    apparatus to form a package and to apply to the cover thereof some
    accessory, characteristic or device in addition to or beyond the mere
    enclosure of the contents.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses 91+ for barrel hoops.


CLS 229/5.8
TXT Pressed bottom or top:
    Subject matter under subclass 5.5 relating to bottoms and tops for
    cylindrical or conical boxes made by pressing the material in dies.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    406+,   for a molded paperboard receptacle.


CLS 229/23
TXT Folded-blank boxes under subclass 16 made up of more than one blank.  The
    blanks are generally placed crosswise of each other and may or may not be
    secured together.


CLS 229/67
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising paper barrels having a
    curved bilge.


CLS 229/67.1
TXT FILE FOLDER OR FILE ENVELOPE:

    Receptacle under the class definition comprising a substantially flat
    receptacle having two walls connected at a bottom fold line, or to an
    expandable bottom wall; and which is disclosed for storing a sheet-like
    article (e.g., document) in a file cabinet.

    (1)     Note.  A file folder or envelope can have closed ends, and may be
    expandable to a nonflat shape.

    (2)     Note.  A file folder or envelope is usually placed in a file
    cabinet under a heading which facilitates retrieval.

    (3)     Note.  A file folder or envelope may have the secondary function of
    holding an article while being transported.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 359 for a file folder
    including display element such as a discrete label, label holder, or a
    portion of the folder intended to receive a number, letter of an alphabet,
    marks, etc., where the claim (1) nominally recites the file folder or (2)
    recites only so much of the file folder needed to cooperate with the
    display element.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 425 for a file box for
    plural cards or sheets.

    211,    Supports: Racks,  especially subclass 46 for a rack including a
    support upon which sheets are mounted for movement.

    283,    Printed Matter, appropriate subclasses for a file folder or other
    folded sheet including printed matter thereon, where the file folder is
    nominally claimed or is conventional.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, especially subclasses 183 and 184 for
    a cabinet including support means for a sheet-like member.

    402,    Binder Device Releasably Engaging Aperture or Notch of Sheet,
    appropriate subclasses for a binder, and subclass 80 for a sheet or folded
    sheet such as a file folder, notched or apertured for use in binder.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclass 947 for a cross-reference art collection of
    operations involving the construction of a file folder.


CLS 229/67.2
TXT Hanging type:

    File folder or file envelope under subclass 67.1 including structure
    intended to suspend the file folder or envelope.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks,  especially subclass 46 for a rack including a
    support upon which sheets are mounted for movement.

    248,    Supports, especially subclasses 317+ for a hanging-type support.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, especially subclasses 183 and 184 for
    a cabinet including support means for a sheet-like member.


CLS 229/67.3
TXT Expandable:

    File folder or file envelope under subclass 67.1 including means to allow
    adjustment of its size.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101+,   for a variable volume paperboard box.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 2 for a bag having a selectively adjustable
    volume and subclass 120 for a bag having a pleat or gusset.


CLS 229/67.4
TXT Including Closure:

    File folder or file envelope under subclass 67.1 including structure
    intended to obstruct the passage of material into or out of the folder or
    envelope.


CLS 229/68.1
TXT ENVELOPE:

    Receptacle under the class definition comprising a substantially flat
    container having two walls joined at their edges to form a pocket-like
    enclosure made of paper or paper substitute material, which is disclosed
    for  enclosing a sheet-like article (e.g., document) while it is being
    transported (e.g., mailed).

    (1)     Note.  An envelope is usually made of paper or paper-like material
    such  as a flexible sheet of cellulosic or resinous material (e.g., plastic
    film).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 309 for an envelope
    configured to hold a compact disc or record.

    235,    Registers, various subclasses, for systems including a
    machine-readable data-bearing envelope.

    283,    Printed Matter, subclass 116 for a conventional envelope including
    printed matter.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 186+ for method or apparatus under the
    class definition for making a pliable container, subclass 917 for a
    cross-reference art collection of operations involving the construction of
    an envelope, and subclass 918 for a cross-reference art collection of
    operations involving the construction of an expandable envelope.


CLS 229/68.2
TXT Including handle:

    Envelope under subclass 68.1 including structure intended to aid in
    manually holding or carrying the envelope.


CLS 229/69
TXT Subject matter under subclass 68 comprising two or more envelopes so
    connected together as to permit their being separated without opening the
    pockets.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for compartmented envelopes.


CLS 229/70
TXT Envelopes under subclass 68 having a coupon attached and intended
    principally for sending goods by express.


CLS 229/71
TXT Envelopes under subclass 68 having openings through which the contents may
    be seen.


CLS 229/72
TXT Envelopes under subclass 68 having more than one pocket, but not so formed
    as to avoid any liability of opening the pockets if an attempt is made to
    separate them. The envelope may be made from one blank or more than one
    blank, and it is not essential that all the pockets have closing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for plural, connected envelopes.


CLS 229/74
TXT Envelopes under subclass 68 constructed to be used in the manner of a tag
    for attachment to goods.


CLS 229/75
TXT Subject matter under subclass 68 relating to the cut and folded blank for
    forming an envelope.


CLS 229/76
TXT Subject matter under subclass 68 relating to means for closing the mouth of
    the envelope.


CLS 229/77
TXT Including a fastener:
    Envelope closures under subclass 76 provided with some special means of
    fastening.


CLS 229/78.1
TXT Metallic:

    Envelope under subclass 77 wherein the fastener is made of metal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., appropriate subclasses for a
    fastener, per se.


CLS 229/78.2
TXT Reusable:

    Envelope under subclass 78.1 wherein the metallic closure element can be
    used to close the envelope more than once.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 81, 86+, 95, and 99 for a flexible bag
    including a reusable closure.


CLS 229/79
TXT Envelope closures under subclass 77 in which the closure is effected by
    sealing-wax or other adhesive form of seal. Also included are those
    closures in which a fastener is protected by means of a seal.


CLS 229/80
TXT Envelope closures under subclass 76 comprising some special mode of closing
    the envelope by means of an ordinary gummed flap.


CLS 229/80.5
TXT Releasable or frangible bond (e.g., peel seal):
    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein two parts of the envelope (one of
    which is usually a closure flap) are secured together by a peelable or
    frangible adhering means (e.g., glue, heat seal, etc.) so that the parts
    may be easily separated without tearing to gain access to the interior of
    the envelope.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123.1,  for a box having a separate, peelable closure or securing element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 210+ for a bag having a releasable or
    frangible bond.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 43 for a sheet,
    web or layer which has been weakened to facilitate tearing and subclasses
    131+, particularly subclass 136, for sheet material having slits or
    apertures.


CLS 229/81
TXT Envelope closures under the subclass 80 of the gummed type, but in which
    there are perforations for the purpose of preventing the opening of the
    envelope without detection.


CLS 229/82
TXT Envelope closures under subclass 80 of the gummed flap form, which is
    provided with a tucked-in tongue.


CLS 229/83
TXT Envelope closures under subclass 80 having sealing-flaps which are printed
    with or have concealed in them a soluble dye which spreads if the envelope
    is tampered with by the use of water or steam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    283,    Printed Matter, subclasses 72+ for safety paper or printed matter
    having fraud preventing characteristics wherein there are structural
    features other than the coating or impregnant.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 7 for processes of coating wherein the
    product produced includes a fraud or tamper detecting feature.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 199 for a single
    or plural layer web or sheet including a developable image or soluble
    portion which would indicate an attempt to tamper therewith (e.g., safety
    paper), and subclasses 915 and 916 (cross-reference art collections for
    products which are made to detect attempts at tampering.


CLS 229/84
TXT Envelope closures under subclass 76 wherein the closing is effected simply
    by a tucked-in tongue with no sealing-flap.


CLS 229/87.01
TXT WRAPPER:
    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a single-use covering
    made of paper or paper-substitute material and having a structural element
    (e.g., fastener, seal, etc.) or a specified shape adapting it for a
    wrapping a mercantile unit.

    (1)     Note.  A "single-use" covering is one which is discarded after use.
     (By contrast, Class 150, Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, provides
    for a flexible, protective article cover which is reusable).

    (2)     Note.  An example of a paper-substitute material is a flexible
    sheet of cellulosic or resinous material (e.g., plastic film).

    (3)     Note.  A mercantile unit includes means in or by which goods are
    displayed, protected, packaged, or arranged in a particular manner to
    facilitate sale, transportation in commerce, use or storage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 72 for a wrapper for a flower pot.

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 365, for a cigar or cigarette, per se, which may
    have a paper or tobacco leaf wrapper which remains in place during smoking
    and is normally consumed.

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, subclasses 154+ for a
    flexible, protective article cover made of flaccid material, which cover is
    intended to be reused.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, for an article and its containment
    means (wrapped goods), particularly subclass 597 for a package with a
    pallet feature and a binder wrap for content, and subclass 497 for a shrink
    film package.

    383,    Flexible Bags, for a receptacle having a flaccid or flexible wall,
    at least one closed end, and an access opening through which contents may
    be inserted or removed.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 106+ for a wrapped or packaged food product.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Article, subclasses 68+ for a sheet
    of material having a cover or casing.


CLS 229/87.02
TXT Shock protection:
    Subject matter under subclass 87.01 wherein the wrapper includes means for
    protecting its contents from damage caused by a blow or an accelerating
    force.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 521+ for a special
    receptacle or package having means for protecting contents from shock.


CLS 229/87.03
TXT Expansible (e.g., pleated, stretchable, etc.): Subject matter under
    subclass 87.01 wherein the wrapper includes means for increasing its size.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 120 for a pleated or gusseted bag and
    subclass 118 for a bag made of stretchable material.


CLS 229/87.04
TXT With handle:
    Subject matter under subclass 87.01 wherein the wrapper includes structure
    which is intended to be gripped for lifting or carrying wrapped goods.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68.2,   for an envelope having a carrying handle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 6+ for a flexible bag having a handle.


CLS 229/87.05
TXT Including means to facilitate severing the wrapper (e.g., cutting, tearing,
    etc.):                             Subject matter under subclass 87.01
    wherein the wrapper includes means to promote or enable severing it for
    access to wrapped goods.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   for a paperboard box having a severing means, and in particular
    subclass 203 wherein the box has a flexible outer wrapper.

    307+,   for an envelope having a severing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 200+ for a flexible bag having severing
    means.


CLS 229/87.06
TXT Including transparent portion or window:
    Subject matter under subclass 87.01 wherein a section of the wrapper is
    provided with means enabling wrapped goods to be viewed.

    (1)     Note.  An aperture extending through the wrapper may constitute a
    window.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for an envelope having a transparent portion or window.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 769+ and 776+ for a
    container or package of that class type including a covering which is
    transparent or has a transparent portion through which contents may be
    viewed.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 106 for a flexible bag having a transparent
    portion or window.


CLS 229/87.07
TXT For chewing gum:
    Subject matter under subclass 87.01 wherein the wrapper is intended to be
    used for wrapping chewing gum.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclass 5 for packaged chewing gum.


CLS 229/87.08
TXT For food:
    Subject matter under subclass 87.01 wherein the wrapper is intended to be
    used for wrapping food.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 106+ for a food product enclosed in a wrapper.


CLS 229/87.09
TXT Bread wrapper:
    Subject matter under subclass 87.08 where in the food intended to be
    wrapped is bread.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 106+ for bread enclosed in a wrapper.


CLS 229/87.11
TXT Meat wrapper:
    Subject matter under subclass 87.08 wherein the food intended to be wrapped
    is meat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclass 129 for a meat product enclosed in a wrapper.


CLS 229/87.12
TXT For a single cigar or cigarette:
    Subject matter under subclass 87.01 wherein the wrapper is for wrapping a
    single roll of tobacco intended to be smoked.

    (1)     Note.  A wrapper that is consumed during smoking is not a wrapper
    for this class, since it cannot be discarded after use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87.13,  for a wrapper for a pack of cigarettes or cigars.

    87.14,  for a wrapper for tobacco.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 365 for a cigar or cigarette, per se, which may
    have a paper or tobacco leaf wrapper which remains in place during smoking
    and is normally consumed.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 242+ for a packaged
    tobacco product.


CLS 229/87.13
TXT For a pack of cigarettes or cigars.
    Subject matter under subclass 87.01 wherein the wrapper is for wrapping
    slender rolls of tobacco intended to be smoked.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87.12,  for a wrapper for a cigar or cigarette.

    87.14,  for a wrapper for tobacco.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 365 for a cigar or cigarette, per se, which may
    have a paper or tobacco leaf wrapper which remains in place during smoking
    and is normally consumed.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 242+ for a packaged
    tobacco product.


CLS 229/87.14
TXT For tobacco:
    Subject matter under subclass 87.01 wherein the wrapper is intended to be
    used for wrapping the leaves of cultivated tobacco.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87.12,  for a wrapper for a cigar or cigarette.

    87.13,  for a wrapper for a pack of cigarettes or cigars.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 365 for a cigar or cigarette, per se, which may
    have a paper or tobacco leaf wrapper which remains in place during smoking
    and is normally consumed.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 242+ for a packaged
    tobacco product.


CLS 229/87.15
TXT For apparel:
    Subject matter under subclass 87.01 wherein the wrapper is intended to be
    used for wrapping clothing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 278+ for a special
    receptacle for, or package containing apparel.


CLS 229/87.16
TXT Glove or mitten:
    Subject matter under subclass 87.15 wherein the apparel intended to be
    wrapped is a hand covering.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 278+ for a special
    receptacle for, or package containing a glove or mitten.


CLS 229/87.17
TXT Shirt or blouse:
    Subject matter under subclass 87.15 wherein the apparel intended to be
    wrapped is a garment for the upper part of the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 278+ for a special
    receptacle for, or package containing a shirt or blouse.


CLS 229/87.18
TXT For a paperboard box (e.g., cardboard):
    Subject matter under subclass 87.01 wherein the wrapper is intended to be
    used for wrapping a self-supporting container made of paperboard-type
    material.


CLS 229/87.19
TXT Gift wrap:
    Subject matter under subclass 87.18 wherein the wrapper is decorative and
    is intended to be used for wrapping a box containing a gift.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    923,    for a cross reference art collection of gift-wrapped boxes.


CLS 229/87.2
TXT Wrappers under subclass 87 peculiarly adapted for wrapping stacked
    cylindrical articles such as coins, checks, tokens, lozenges, and paper
    packages of coins, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses .82+ for coin packages
    not made of paper.


CLS 229/87.5
TXT Wrappers under subclass 87 comprising sheets and cards having pockets which
    may be formed either by an attachment or by folding a portion of the blank
    to form a pocket separated from the main inclosed space.


CLS 229/89
TXT Wrappers under subclass 87 comprising paper coverings fitted around bottles
    to prevent breakage when packed for shipment.


CLS 229/90
TXT Paper wrappers under subclass 89 which are crimped, so as to produce a
    thick and elastic wrapping to prevent breakage.


CLS 229/91
TXT Paper wrappers under subclass 89 for bottles, which are thickened by means
    of padding material placed between the layers of the wrapper.


CLS 229/92
TXT Wrappers under subclass 87 for newspapers or for general mailing purposes.


CLS 229/92.1
TXT Subject matter under subclass 87 comprising sheets designed to receive a
    written or printed communication and then to be folded into a form
    generally resembling the conventional envelope.  Devices which when folded
    form flat open-ended tubes are included, but not mere single-folded cards,
    unless some special fastening means is formed in the blank.


CLS 229/92.3
TXT Subject matter under subclass 92.1 having an opening through which written
    indicia can be seen.


CLS 229/92.5
TXT Subject matter under subclass 92.1 having special fastening means for
    securing the folded packet.


CLS 229/92.7
TXT Subject matter under subclass 92.1 having flaps, generally resembling those
    of the conventional envelope, for securing the folded packet by means of an
    adhesive.


CLS 229/92.8
TXT Cards under the class definition peculiarly adapted to be transmitted
    through the mails, either flat or folded, unless the invention lies in so
    forming the card as to provide means for holding it folded; also, packets
    comprising a mailing sheet and enclosures.  Generally the mailing sheet
    bears advertising matter and the enclosure is a return card.


CLS 229/92.9
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising devices to receive
    coins and analogous articles for transmission through the mails and prevent
    them from moving in the package while in transit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72      and 87.5, for envelopes and wrappers having compartments and
    pockets which may be used for receiving coins.


CLS 229/93
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising paper tubes having
    open ends and intended generally for mailing drawings and similar articles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 118-178 for paper tubes of
    indefinite length to be used as stock for making paper receptacles, and
    having no added structure limiting them to use as a receptacle.


CLS 229/100
TXT PAPERBOARD BOX:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a receptacle made from
    material similar in composition to paper but thicker and stiffer in
    character, the receptacle having a bottom portion for supporting content,
    peripheral wall structure for at least partially surrounding the content,
    and an access opening for the insertion or removal of content.

    (1)     Note.  A box of cellulosic or resinous material (e.g., plastic)
    which and is similar in character to paperboard which is manipulated in the
    same manner as paperboard (e.g., folded from a blank) is included here.
    Class 220, Receptacles, takes receptacles not provided for elsewhere.

    (2)     Note.  The bottom portion of the box may consist of a planar wall,
    or may have any shape (e.g., flat, curved, inverted pyramid, etc.) or
    construction (e.g., reinforced, hollow wall, etc.).

    (3)     Note.  The peripheral wall structure may be formed from a series of
    planar side walls (e.g., a cylindrical box), or any combination of planar
    and curved side walls.

    (4)     Note.  The box may or may not have a top wall.

    (5)     Note.  An access opening is an opening which is used for the
    insertion or removal of contents and may be either open or closed.
    Normally, the access opening is at the top of the box or located in the
    wall (if the box has one), but it may be located in the peripheral side
    wall or the bottom wall.

    (6)     Note. The paperboard may vary in thickness and rigidity according
    to the purpose  for  which it is to be used.  In any event, it must be
    rigid enough that a box made from it is self-sustaining, i.e., it is
    capable of maintaining its content-holding configuration without the use of
    external props or supports.

    (7)     Note.  The paperboard may be combined with one or more layers of
    other materials.


CLS 229/101
TXT Variable volume:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein means are provided for changing
    the capacity of the box.

    (1)     Note.  A box which is adjustable only between a collapsed position
    and a set-up position is not proper for this subclass.


CLS 229/101.1
TXT Plural, parallel tearing means for sequentially reducing the box
    volume:Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein the box includes two or
    more spaced-apart severing means, each of which extends completely around
    the box, has the same orientation as each of the others, and is used in
    turn to remove box material to make the box progressively smaller.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101.2,  for a reclosable box having a reduced volume when reclosed.

    235,    for a box having a tearing means which completely encompasses the
    box.


CLS 229/101.2
TXT Tearing provides a reclosable box having reduced volume when reclosed:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein tearing the box material forms a
    box which has a reclosing means and which is smaller than the original
    unopened box after it is reclosed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101.1,  for a box having plural, parallel tearing means for sequentially
    reducing the box volume.

    210,    for a box which has a reusable closure but that remains its
    original size after it is reclosed.


CLS 229/102
TXT Tamper indicating:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the box includes means which
    reveals when unauthorized entry has been attempted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 807 for a cross-reference
    art collection of tamper resistant or tamper indicating receptacles.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 5 for a tamper indicating bag.


CLS 229/102.5
TXT Having fixed upwardly extending display card:

    A container under subclass 100 including  substantially immobile panel for
    exhibiting indicia.


CLS 229/103
TXT Convertible:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the box is disclosed as being
    transformable into a nonbox device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 736+ for a paperboard box
    convertible to or from a display device.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 71+ for  boxes convertible
    into toys.


CLS 229/103.1
TXT Combined with drinking tube (e.g., straw):

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the box includes a hollow element
    used for imbibing its contents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 388+ and 229 for a bottle or jar
    combined with a straw.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 33 for a
    portable drinking tube or straw.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclass 85 for a box having food content and a drinking  tube.


CLS 229/103.2
TXT Wrapper type (i.e., box formed around content):

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the box is folded and secured in
    its containing configuration only after the contents are in position.

    (1)     Note.  The box may be partially formed prior to positioning the
    contents as long as the box is not in its containing configuration.

    (2)     Note.  Merely closing a preformed box after the contents have been
    inserted does not constitute forming the box around the contents and is
    classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87.01+, for a flexible wrapper, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 155 for a sleeve-type
    container with end walls for beverage receptacles, subclass 424 for a book
    wrapper, subclass 434 for a four-sided wrapper for plural beverage-type
    receptacles, and subclass 485.1 for a wrapper for a cuplike article.

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 449 for a multilayer pliant wrapper supported
    by content and subclasses 460+ for the combination of a paperboard box and
    a flexible wrapper.


CLS 229/103.3
TXT Top or bottom wall includes four folded flaps or panels:

    Subject matter under subclass 103.2 wherein the uppermost or lowermost wall
    of the completed wrapper is formed from four segments of box material which
    are hingedly attached to the rest of the wrapper and which overlie the
    contents when closed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126+,   for a box having folded closure flaps.

    183+,   for a box bottom having folded flaps.


CLS 229/104
TXT Elevated bottom wall included in a one-piece box construction:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the box includes a bottom wall
    which is held above an external support surface by structure which is part
    of the same piece of material as the box bottom and remainder of the box.



CLS 229/105
TXT Edges of rectangular bottom wall are at 45 degrees to edges of rectangular
    stock material:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein a piece of rectangular stock
    material is disclosed as having fold lines connecting the side walls to the
    bottom rectangular wall of a box to be formed, and the fold line are
    oriented at 45o to the edges of the stock material.


CLS 229/106
TXT Including a polygonal bottom wall and a curved sidewall:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the bottom wall is a closed
    planar figure bounded by straight edges; and a cross section through the
    peripheral wall structure comprises a curved cross section, usually
    circular or oval, spaced from the bottom wall.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 822 for a cross-reference
    art collection of receptacles of that class type having a special shape.



CLS 229/107
TXT Including a sector-shaped wall (e.g., pie-shaped, semicircular, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the box has a wall which has the
    shape of a geometrical figure bounded by two radii and the included arc of
    a circle.

    (1)     Note.  The sector-shape must be the overall shape of an entire
    wall, not the shape of a mere portion of a wall.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 551 for a box for a pastry
    wedge, per se, and subclass 822 for a cross-reference art collection of
    receptacle of that class type having a special shape.


CLS 229/108
TXT Including a polygonal, nonrectangular wall:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein a wall of the box (bottom, top or
    a side wall) is a planar figure bounded by straight edges.

    (1)     Note.  The wall may include two or more parts glued together or
    mechanically interlocked.

    (2)     Note.  The polygonal shape must be the overall shape of an entire
    wall, not the shape of a mere portion of a wall.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 822 for a cross-reference
    art collection of receptacles of that class type having a special shape.




CLS 229/108.1
TXT Collapsible along supplemental fold line:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein the box includes one or more fold
    lines which are in addition to the usual fold lines (which give the box its
    in-use form or shape, e.g., those which form corners, etc.) and which
    additional fold line or lines facilitate folding the box to a nonuse
    configuration without damaging it.

    (1)     Note.  A box which is described as "collapsible" but which has no
    supplemental fold lines is classified elsewhere on other features.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    for a variable volume box which may include supplemental fold lines
    for reducing the size of the box.

    117,    for a box having an automatic bottom which may include supplemental
    fold lines.

    117.01+, for other boxes collapsible along one    or more supplemental fold
    lines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclass 107 for a collapsible
    item of hand carried luggage.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 170+ for a collapsible
    bottle carrier, and subclass 577 for a knock-down type assemblage or kit.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses 12+ and 43+ for a knock-down type
    wooden receptacle.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 108 for a knock-down
    sectional unit, and subclasses 259+ for a knock-down or set-up type cabinet
    structure having cardboard walls.


CLS 229/109
TXT Octagonal:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein the wall has exactly eight edges.


CLS 229/110
TXT Hexagonal:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein the wall has exactly six edges.


CLS 229/111
TXT Trapezium-shaped:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein the edges of the wall form a
    quadrilateral having only two parallel sides.

    (1)     Note.  A quadrilateral is a polygon having exactly four sides.


CLS 229/112
TXT Trapezoidal:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein the edges of the wall form a
    quadrilateral having only two parallel sides.


CLS 229/113
TXT Three or more trapezoidal walls (e.g., truncated pyramid-shaped box):

    Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein the box includes at least three
    walls which are of trapezoidal shape.


CLS 229/114
TXT Including a sidewall which slants upwardly and outwardly:

    Subject matter under subclass 113 wherein one of the side walls flares
    outwardly from the bottom wall toward the top of the box.


CLS 229/115
TXT Triangular:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein the wall has exactly three edges.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 436 for a box for holding
    plural tetrahedron-shaped receptacles, and subclass 551 for a box pastry
    wedge.


CLS 229/116
TXT Three or more triangular walls (e.g., pyramid-shaped box):

    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein the box includes at least three
    triangular walls.


CLS 229/116.1
TXT Decoration or novelty feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the box includes either a) means
    for enhancing its appearance or b) means for providing it with an unusual
    appearance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87.19,  for gift wrapping.

    922+,   for an art collection of boxes with a decorative feature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 457+ for a box of that
    class type including ornamentation or simulation and subclass 822 for an
    art collection of containers having an unusual configuration related to the
    shape of the content.

    220,    Receptacles, digest 13 for an art collection for containers having
    an odd shape and subclass 376 for an ornamental closure.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 4+ for a bow,
    per se, and subclasses 7+ for an special occasion ornament, per se.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, appropriate subclasses for a toy and
    particularly subclass 488 for a foldable or collapsible toy formed from
    sheet material.


CLS 229/116.2
TXT Heart-shaped box:

    Subject matter under subclass 116.1 wherein the box is configured to
    resemble a conventional representation of a heart (i.e., has rounded
    sidewalls which meet in a point at one location and curve inward to a cusp
    at a location opposite the point).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 822 for an art collection
    of containers of that class type having an unusual configuration related to
    the shape of the content.

    220,    Receptacles, digest 13 for a digest for containers having an odd
    shape.


CLS 229/116.3
TXT Including a representation of an animate being:

    Subject matter under subclass 116.1 wherein at least a portion of the box
    has the appearance of a person or animal.

    (1)     Note.  The representation may be a drawing or photograph on the box
    or it may be the shape of the box itself.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 457+ for a box of that
    class type including simulation.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 71+ for a toy which is
    convertible from, or which serves as, a diverse article, in particular
    subclasses:

    73+,    for a figure toy (i.e., a simulation of an animate being) which is
    convertible from, or serves as, a container;

    75,     for a toy which is convertible from, or which serves as, a
    container;

    76,     for a toy which is convertible from, or which serves as, a
    container having the shape of a specific article; and

    80,     for a toy which includes a fold line to facilitate conversion to or
    from a toy.


CLS 229/116.4
TXT Including a representation of a vehicle or building:

    Subject matter under subclass 116.1 wherein at least a portion of the box
    has the appearance of a a) means of transportation or b) static structure,
    including walls and roof, used for dwelling, working, etc.

    (1)     Note.  The representation may be a drawing or photograph on the box
    or it may be the shape of the box itself.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 457+ for a box of that
    class type including simulation.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 93+ for a toy vehicle and
    subclasses 476+ for a toy building.


CLS 229/116.5
TXT Decorative wrapping or lamination (e.g., gift wrap):

    Subject matter under subclasses 116.1+ wherein the box includes a covering
    which enhances the appearance of the box.

    (1)     Note.  The covering may be inside the box.

    (2)     Note.  The covering may be permanently attached or separable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87.18+, for a wrapper, per se, for a paperboard box.

    923,    for a cross-reference art collection of gift-wrapped boxes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, subclass 105 for a cover
    for a purse, and subclasses 154+ for a flaccid protective cover not
    provided for elsewhere.


CLS 229/117
TXT Automatic bottom (i.e., multipart bottom wall forms automatically during
    erection of collapsed box):

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the bottom wall includes two or
    more relatively movable sections which are forced into their wall forming
    positions by the movement of other box parts, and without manipulation by a
    person or machine, when the box is changed from its collapsed or flattened
    configuration to its set-up, receptacle configuration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183,    for similar subject matter in a box bottom wall which is not
    automatically erected.


CLS 229/117.01
TXT Collapsible along supplemental fold line:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the box includes one or more fold
    lines which are in addition to the usual fold lines (which give the box its
    in-use form or shape, e.g., those which form corners, etc.) and which
    additional fold line or lines facilitate folding the box to a nonuse
    configuration without damaging it.

    (1)     Note.  A box which is described as "collapsible" but which has no
    supplemental fold lines is classified elsewhere on other feathers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    for a variable volume box which may include supplemental fold lines
    for reducing the size of the box.

    108.1,  for a box having a polygonal, nonrectangular wall and which is
    collapsible along one or more supplemental fold lines.

    117,    for a box having an automatic bottom which may include supplemental
    fold lines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclass 107 for a collapsible
    item of hand carried luggage.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 170+ for a collapsible
    bottle carrier, and subclass 577 for a knock-down type assemblage or kit.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses 12+ and 43+ for a knock-down type
    wooden receptacle.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 108 for a knock-down
    sectional unit, and subclasses 259+ for a knock-down or set-up type cabinet
    structure having cardboard wall.


CLS 229/117.02
TXT Separate end cap contains the sidewalls in collapsed configuration:

    Subject matter under subclass 117.01 wherein the box includes a separate
    top and/or separate bottom element that has an end wall with a vertically
    extending peripheral lip, which top or bottom element is dimensioned to
    contain the side walls of the box when they are folded into a nonuse shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125.19+, for a separate closure having a de-              pending flange.



CLS 229/117.03
TXT Including anticollapse feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 117.01 wherein the box includes structure
    which prevents it from collapsing unintentionally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 171+ for a collapsible
    beverage receptacle carrier having an anti-collapse feature.


CLS 229/117.04
TXT Flat anticollapse element overlies supplemental fold line:

    Subject matter under subclass 117.03 wherein the structure which prevents
    the box from collapsing unintentionally is planar and overlaps a
    supplemental fold line in a box wall.


CLS 229/117.05
TXT Two opposed sidewalls and the bottom wall fold upon themselves:

    Subject matter under subclass 117.01 wherein the box has supplemental fold
    lines which permit two upwardly extending box walls, which are on opposite
    sides of the box, and the bottom wall to be doubled-over upon  themselves.



CLS 229/117.06
TXT Bottom wall collapses outwardly:

    Subject matter under subclass 117.05 wherein the bottom wall, when
    doubled-over upon itself, extends downwardly from the box.


CLS 229/117.07
TXT Two opposed sidewalls fold inwardly and downwardly:

    Subject matter under subclass 117.01 having supplemental fold lines,
    wherein each of two upwardly extending box walls, which are on opposite
    sides of the box, can be folded into the box toward the bottom wall.


CLS 229/117.08
TXT Two other opposed sidewalls fold outwardly and downwardly:

    Subject matter under subclass 117.07 wherein the box has two additional
    upwardly extending box walls, which are on opposite sides of the box, which
    can be folded out of the box toward its bottom plane.


CLS 229/117.09
TXT Lifting or suspending element (e.g., handle):

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the box includes structure
    designed to cooperate directly with an unclaimed extraneous support for the
    purpose of pendently supporting the box on said support.

    (1)     Note.  "Pendently supporting" is defined as either hanging or
    lifting against the pull of gravity.

    (2)     Note.  An "extraneous support" may be a peg, a hook, a human hand,
    etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 110+ for a handle, per se, not
    classified elsewhere.

    53,     Package Making, subclass 413 for a method of applying a handle to a
    package.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 139+ for a compartmented
    beverage receptacle carrier having a handle, subclass 806 for a cross
    reference art collection of suspended containers, and subclasses 427+ for a
    non-compartmented beverage receptacle carrier having a strap-type handle.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 94+ for the combination of a handle with a
    container not classified elsewhere.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, for a handle-like
    implement which includes elements which engage an article.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 6+ for a flexible bag having a lifting or
    suspending element.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclass 88 for a method of attaching a handle or
    suspending means to a rigid container, and subclass 909 for a
    Cross-Reference Art Collection of rigid containers having a handle or
    suspending means


CLS 229/117.11
TXT Element portion or extension crosses all or part of the box bottom:

    Subject matter under subclass 117.09 wherein either (1) part of the lifting
    or suspending element or (2) a member secured to the lifting or suspending
    element, extends across at least some of the box bottom.

    (1)     Note.  This type of structure frequently functions as reinforcement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 17+ for a lifting or suspending element
    which includes reinforcing or stress distributing means attached to or
    adjacent it.


CLS 229/117.12
TXT One-piece with the box:

    Subject matter under subclass 117.09 wherein the lifting or suspending
    element is of one-piece construction with the box.

    (1)     Note.  A unitary lifting or suspending element that is reinforced
    by a separate reinforcing element is included here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 7+ for a lifting or suspending element
    that is one-piece with a bag.


CLS 229/117.13
TXT Box includes hand-receiving aperture:

    Subject matter under subclass 117.12 wherein the box includes an opening in
    the box material which is intended to receive a hand.

    (1)     Note.  A box having an opening which is sized to receive more than
    one finger but not a whole hand is classified here.

    (2)     Note.  A box having a slit which defines the perimeter of a flap
    which can be folded out of the plane of the box material to form an
    aperture is proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117.18, for a box which includes an opening sized to receive a single
    finger or other rod-like support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 10 for a flexible bag having a
    hand-receiving aperture.




CLS 229/117.14
TXT Handle elements or portions located above the box top include aligned,
    hand-receiving apertures:

    Subject matter under subclass 117.13 wherein there are a plurality of
    handles or portions of handles having holes which are, or can be,
    relatively positioned such that all handles may be gripped simultaneously
    with one hand, and which are all located above the top of the box when they
    are being gripped.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 162+ for similar handle
    structure in a beverage receptacle carrier.




CLS 229/117.15
TXT A handle element or portion extends through a hole or gap in the box:

    Subject matter under subclass 117.14 wherein the handle or a portion of the
    handle extends through an opening or break in the box material.

    (1)     Note.  A flap extending through the hand receiving opening does not
    constitute, by itself, proper subject matter for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117.24, for a single handle element which is not one-piece with the box and
    which extends through an opening in the box material.


CLS 229/117.16
TXT Hand-receiving aperture extends through a box sidewall:

    Subject matter under subclass 117.13 wherein the box material which extends
    upwardly from the box bottom has a hole therethrough intended to receive a
    hand.




CLS 229/117.17
TXT Apertured sidewall includes a downwardly folded extension of itself:

    Subject matter under subclass 117.16 wherein the apertured side wall
    includes a portion which has been doubled-over so as to extend toward the
    bottom of the box.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165+,   for other boxes having downwardly folded extensions of sidewalls.



CLS 229/117.18
TXT Box includes aperture for rodlike support:

    Subject matter under subclass 117.12 wherein the box material has an
    opening therethrough which is intended to receive a slender, elongated,
    cylindrically-shaped support or similar element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117.13+, for a box which includes an opening
      sized to receive more than one finger.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 161 for a bottle carrier
    having finger holes and subclass 806 for a cross reference art collection
    of suspended containers.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 9 for a bag having an aperture for a
    rod-like support.


CLS 229/117.19
TXT Detachable:

    Subject matter under subclass 117.09 including means permitting the lifting
    or suspending element to be separated from the box without damaging the box.

    (1)     Note.  A handle detachable by tearing along a tear line is included
    here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclass 116 for an item of hand
    carried luggage having a detachable handle.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 13 for a bag having a detachable handle.


CLS 229/117.21
TXT Wire:

    Subject matter under subclass 117.09 wherein the lifting or suspending
    element is made of metal in the form of a usually flexible, slender rod.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 510 for a similar element
    used to secure boxes in a stacked relationship.

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 19 for a wire receptacle.


CLS 229/117.22
TXT With provision for positioning element in a nonuse location:

    Subject matter under subclass 117.09 wherein the box or the lifting or
    suspending element is provided with specified means which can function to
    maintain the lifting or suspending element in a given position or
    configuration from which (or out of which) it must be at least partially
    moved or removed before it can function as a handle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117.21, for a box having a wire handle rotatable to different positions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 163+ for a beverage
    container carrier having a shiftable handle.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 14 for a flexible bag having a shiftable
    handle.




CLS 229/117.23
TXT Single lifting or suspending element:

    Subject matter under subclass 117.09 wherein the box includes only one
    lifting or suspending element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 25+ for a bag having a single lifting or
    suspending element.


CLS 229/117.24
TXT Element extends through a hole or gap in the box:

    Subject matter under subclass 117.23 wherein the lifting or suspending
    element or portion thereof extends through an opening or break in the box
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117.15, for a box having a handle element which is one-piece with the box
    and which extends through an opening in the box material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 26+ for a bag having a handle element
    which extends through an opening  in the bag material.


CLS 229/117.25
TXT Element extends through a hole in each of two opposed sidewalls:

    Subject matter under subclass 117.24 wherein the lifting or suspending
    element, or a portion thereof extends through an opening in each of two
    upwardly extending box walls which are on opposite sides of the box.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 29 for a bag having a single lifting or
    suspending element that straddles the bag mouth.


CLS 229/117.26
TXT Element secured to opposed sidewalls:

    Subject matter under subclass 117.23 wherein the lifting or suspending
    element is attached to two upwardly extending box walls which are on
    opposite sides of the box.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 29 for a bag having a single lifting or
    suspending element that straddles the bag mouth.


CLS 229/118
TXT With detachable product-information band:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the box includes an elongated,
    relatively narrow piece of material removably secured to it, which piece of
    material carries markings which identify or otherwise relate to the
    intended contents of the box.


CLS 229/119
TXT With drainage feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the box includes means for
    facilitating the gravitational escape of fluent material.




CLS 229/120
TXT With venting or ventilation means:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the box comprises either (a)
    means for relieving positive or negative pressure inside the box  or (b)
    means which allows circulation of fluid (e.g., air) into and out of the box.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclass 385 for an apparatus for separating a gas
    from a mixture of gas and solid particles which is combined with a vented
    box.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses 42 and 74 for ventilation of
    receptacles of that class type.


CLS 229/120.01
TXT Plural:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 comprising two or more independently
    usable boxes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120.11, for a box, walls of which are formed by two or more separate
    tubular elements which also form compartments.

    120.37, for a box, the interior of which is divided into compartments by
    box-like elements which remain with the box.



CLS 229/120.011
TXT Severably attached boxes (i.e., the boxes include means which facilitate
    severing a connecting element or box material uniting them):Subject matter
    under subclass 120.01 wherein two or more boxes which are secured to one
    another include means which enable  parting of box material or securing
    means for the purpose of separating the boxes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 521.15 for a divisible
    container for eggs, fruit, or vegetables.


CLS 229/120.012
TXT Including means which facilitate severing by a sharp-edged cutting
    implement:

    Subject matter under subclass 120.011 wherein the boxes include structure
    which expedites their separation by a keen-edged instrument.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204,    for a box combined with, or modified for opening by, a cutting
    implement.

    308,    for an envelope combined with, or modified for opening by, a
    cutting implement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 202 for a bag combined with, or modified
    for opening by, a cutting implement.


CLS 229/120.02
TXT Compartmented:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the box includes one or more
    elements (e.g., "partitions") which provide two or more separate content
    holding sections.

    (1)     Note.  A patent for a partition, per se, which is disclosed as
    being for use with a paperboard box, is classified in this or indented
    subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 180+, 193+, 256+, and 561
    for a special receptacle having one or more partitions.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses 18+ for a wooden box having one or
    more partitions.


CLS 229/120.03
TXT Including independently operable closures for at least two compartments:

    Subject matter under subclass 120.02 wherein the box includes plural
    content-holding sections, and at least two of said sections have a closure
    capable of opening or closing its respective section without opening or
    closing the other.


CLS 229/120.04
TXT A closure includes a folded flange which forms a partition when the box is
    closed:

    Subject matter under subclass 120.03 wherein a portion of one closure is
    folded so that it will extend into the box and function as a partition when
    the closure is in its closed position.


CLS 229/120.05
TXT Partition includes securing means for a closure:

    Subject matter under subclass 120.02 wherein the partition includes
    structure which maintains a box closure in closed position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125.21+, for a nonunitary securing element for
     a closure having a depending flange or
     tab.

    125.37+, for other nonunitary securing ele-
      ments for closures.


CLS 229/120.06
TXT Partition detached from box blank:

    Subject matter under subclass 120.02 wherein the partition is initially of
    one-piece construction with the box blank and subsequently is severed from
    the blank and utilized to divide the erected box into compartments.



CLS 229/120.07
TXT Partition made of plastic:

    Subject matter under subclass 120.02 wherein the partition is made from a
    synthetic resin (i.e. plastic).


CLS 229/120.08
TXT Partition unitary (i.e., of one-piece construction) with and folded from a
    box wall:

    Subject matter under subclass 120.02 wherein the box includes a partition
    which is of one-piece construction with the box and is attached to it along
    a fold line.




CLS 229/120.09
TXT Relatively movable compartments:

    Subject matter under subclass 120.08 wherein the relative orientation of
    two content-holding sections of the box can be changed while they remain in
    set-up configuration.




CLS 229/120.1
TXT Live animal shipping box (e.g., chick box, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 120 wherein the box is disclosed for holding
    living animals while being transported from one location to another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 15+ for a box including means
    specialized to an animal (e.g., perch, support for food or food container,
    etc.).  A vent, divider or closure structure is not considered to be a
    means specialized to an animal.




CLS 229/120.11
TXT Partition includes adjoining walls of tubular box sections:

    Subject matter under subclass 120.08 wherein the box is formed of at least
    two adjacent, hollow, elongated elements, adjacent walls of which combine
    to form a partition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120.01, for a plurality of separately usable boxes.

    120.37, for similar structure in which hollow elongated elements are
    located inside an outer  box.




CLS 229/120.12
TXT Oblique partition:

    Subject matter under subclass 120.08 wherein the partition defines either
    an acute or an obtuse angle with a box wall or with another partition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120.23  and 120.35, for other oblique.




CLS 229/120.13
TXT Partition folded from a downwardly extending sidewall extension:

    Subject matter under subclass 120.08 wherein the partition is of one-piece
    construction with the box, and attached along a fold line to an elongation
    of an upwardly extending box wall, which elongation has been folded into
    side-by-side relationship with the box wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165+,   for other boxes having a downwardly extending side wall extension.




CLS 229/120.14
TXT Partition cut and folded from a box wall:

    Subject matter under subclass 120.08 wherein the partition is formed by
    severing part of the box wall material and folding that part out of the
    plane of the box wall.

    (1)     Note.  In the completed box, the absence of the severed material
    leaves a gap in the box wall or in a layer of material forming the box wall.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 521.3+ for similar
    structure in an egg carton.




CLS 229/120.15
TXT Sidewall:

    Subject matter under subclass 120.14 wherein the partition has been severed
    from a generally upwardly extending box wall.




CLS 229/120.16
TXT Bottom wall:

    Subject matter under subclass 120.14 wherein the partition has been severed
    from the lowermost wall of the box.




CLS 229/120.17
TXT Partition folded from bottom wall:

    Subject matter under subclass 120.08 wherein the partition is attached to
    the lowermost wall of the box along a fold line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 521.4 for similar partition
    structure in an egg carton.




CLS 229/120.18
TXT Partition folded from a sidewall:

    Subject matter under subclass 120.08 wherein the partition is attached to
    an upwardly extending wall of the box along a fold line.




CLS 229/120.19
TXT Including a nonunitary horizontal partition (i.e., in addition to the
    unitary partition):

    Subject matter under subclass 120.18 wherein the box includes an additional
    partition which is not of one-piece construction with the box and which
    extends parallel to the box bottom and divides the box into upper and lower
    compartments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120.28  and 120.32, for other boxes which include a horizontal partition.



CLS 229/120.21
TXT Unitary partition is horizontal:

    Subject matter under subclass 120.18 wherein the partition is parallel to
    the bottom of the box and divides the box into upper and lower
    compartments.


CLS 229/120.22
TXT Curved partition:

    Subject matter under subclass 120.02 wherein the box includes a partition
    which has an arcuate shape.


CLS 229/120.23
TXT Oblique partitions folded from a single sheet of material:

    Subject matter under subclass 120.02 wherein the box includes at least two
    partitions which are formed by folding a unitary sheet of material and
    which define either an acute or an obtuse angle with a wall of the box.

    (1)     Note.  Two separate partitions which were originally part of the
    same sheet of material but which have been cut apart are not included here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120.12, for similar oblique partitions unitary with a box wall.

    120.35, for similar oblique partitions but not formed from a single sheet
    of material.


CLS 229/120.24
TXT Parallel partitions folded from a single sheet of material:

    Subject matter under subclass 120.02 wherein the box includes at least two
    partitions which are formed by folding a unitary sheet of material and
    which are everywhere equidistant from one another.

    (1)     Note.  Two separate partitions which were originally portions of
    the same sheet of material but which have been cut apart are not included
    here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120.08, for similar partition construction wherein the partitions are of
    one-piece construction with a box wall.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclass 23 for partitions formed by bending a
    strip of flexible material.


CLS 229/120.25
TXT Including a nonunitary transverse partition (i.e., not of one-piece
    construction with the parallel partitions):

    Subject matter under subclass 120.24 wherein

    the box includes a partition which defines an angle with the parallel
    partitions but is part of a different piece of material.


CLS 229/120.26
TXT Including a transverse partition which is part of the single sheet of
    material:

    Subject matter under subclass 120.24 wherein the box includes a partition
    which defines an angle with the parallel partitions and is part of the same
    piece of material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120.08, for similar partition construction wherein the partitions are of
    one-piece construction with the box.


CLS 229/120.27
TXT The parallel partitions are cut and folded from the transverse partition:

    Subject matter under subclass 120.26 wherein each parallel partition is
    formed by severing part of the transverse partition and folding that part
    out of the plane of the transverse partition.

    (1)     Note.  When the partitions are in erected form, the absence of the
    severed sections of material leaves visible gaps in that portion of the
    single sheet which forms the transverse partition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120.14, for similar partition structure cut and folded from a box wall.



CLS 229/120.28
TXT The transverse partition is horizontal:

    Subject matter under subclass 120.26 wherein the transverse partition is
    parallel to the bottom of the box.


CLS 229/120.29
TXT Perpendicular partitions are part of a single sheet of material:

    Subject matter under subclass 120.02 wherein the box includes at least two
    partitions which are formed by folding a unitary sheet of material and
    which extend at a right angle to one another.

    (1)     Note.  Two separate partitions which were originally portions of
    the same sheet of material but have been cut apart are not included here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120.08+, for similar partition construction wherein the partitions are of
    one-piece construction with a box wall.


CLS 229/120.31
TXT Collapsible compartments formed by partitions permanently attached to each
    other:

    Subject matter under subclass 120.02 wherein two or more partitions are
    secured together in such a way that (1) they cannot be separated without
    tearing or cutting them and (2) they are configured so as to be readily
    foldable into a relatively compact nonuse arrangement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120.36, for partitions which are not permanently attached to each other but
    which may form collapsible compartments.


CLS 229/120.32
TXT Horizontal partition:

    Subject matter under subclass 120.02 wherein the box includes a partition
    which extends parallel to the box bottom and divides the box into upper and
    lower compartments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120.19, 120.21 and 120.28, for other box constructions which include a
    horizontal partition.


CLS 229/120.33
TXT Including partition retaining means which is not unitary with the partition:

    Subject matter under subclass 120.02 wherein the box includes means for
    maintaining the partition in position, which means are part of a different
    piece of material than the partition.


CLS 229/120.34
TXT Retaining means includes channels or grooves for ends of the partition:

    Subject matter under subclass 120.33 wherein the box includes structure in
    the form of a depression, trough, or gap in the box material for receiving
    the ends of a partition and maintaining them in position.

    (1)     Note.  The "retaining means" may include a gap formed between the
    edges of two, coplanar box flaps.



CLS 229/120.35
TXT Oblique partition:

    Subject matter under subclass 120.02 wherein the box includes a partition
    which defines either an acute or an obtuse angle with a box wall or with
    another partition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120.35, for an oblique partition which is folded from a box wall.


CLS 229/120.36
TXT Nonunitary, intersecting partitions:

    Subject matter under subclass 120.02 wherein the box includes two
    individual partitions which meet and cross one another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses 22 and 30+ for a wooden receptacle
    having partitions formed from crossed strips of material.


CLS 229/120.37
TXT Self-sustaining container-like compartment-forming structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 120.02 wherein one of the compartments of the
    box is formed by a separate construction which remains in erected,
    compartment-forming condition of its own accord, and has a substantially
    continuous peripheral wall which will surround its contents.

    (1)     Note. The compartment-forming structure may include additional
    compartment-forming elements within the confines of the peripheral wall.
    However, none of these additional elements may extend outwardly of the
    peripheral wall to form a compartment exteriorly thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120.01, for a plurality of separately usable boxes.

    120.11, for tubular box sections having a partition folded from, and
    one-piece with, a box wall.


CLS 229/120.38
TXT Partition folded from an entire sheet of material separate from the box:

    Subject matter under subclass 120.02 wherein the box includes at least one
    partition which is formed by folding a sheet of material which is used only
    to form that partition, and which material is not one-piece with the box
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120.23, for two or more oblique partitions folded from a single sheet of
    material.

    120.24, for two or more parallel partitions folded from a single sheet of
    material.

    120.29, for perpendicular partitions folded from a single sheet of material.


CLS 229/121
TXT Including two or more separate access openings:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the box includes at least two
    different access openings usable individually for insertion or removal of
    content.

    (1)     Note.  The separate access openings may be either in the same box
    or in different box walls.


CLS 229/122
TXT Including an access opening in a sidewall intended to permit lateral
    insertion or removal of content:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the peripheral wall structure of
    the box includes an opening which is intended to permit insertion or
    removal of content in a generally horizontal direction.

    (1)     Note.  An access opening may be either open or closed.

    (2)     Note.  An access opening for this subclass must be expressly
    disclosed as being for lateral insertion or removal of content.

    (3)     Note.  A box having an opening in its side wall for another reason
    (e.g., for viewing or as thumb notch for gripping the contents) is not
    proper for this subclass unless it is also disclosed as being for lateral
    insertion or removal of content.




CLS 229/122.1
TXT Contents gravity-fed to access opening:

    Subject matter under subclass 122 wherein the access opening is constructed
    to facilitate the flow of content outwardly therethrough due to pull of
    gravity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 33+ and 303+ for a discharge opening
    of lesser extent than an article which may utilize utilizing gravity feed
    of articles.


CLS 229/122.2
TXT Including an access opening in the box bottom:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the box includes a bottom wall
    and the bottom wall includes an opening which is used for insertion or
    removal of contents.


CLS 229/123
TXT Tiltable sidewall provides enlarged access opening in box top:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein a box includes a generally
    upright wall which is pivotable outwardly and downwardly to increase the
    size of the access opening to facilitate insertion or removal of content
    through the top of the box.

    (1)     Note.  The access opening may be either open or closed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    for a box having a tiltable side wall which provides an access
    opening intended for lateral insertion or removal of content.




CLS 229/123.1
TXT Nonunitary, peelable closure or securing element (i.e., not of one-piece
    construction with the box):

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the box includes an individual
    element which is not of one-piece construction with the box and which is
    either (1) a closing means which is openable by means of a releasable bond
    or (2) an element which maintains a closing means in closed position and
    which is removable by means of a releasable bond.

    (1)     Note.  A box having a closure which is unitary with it and having a
    separate securing element may be proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    245,    for a releasable or frangible bond between unitary box parts.




CLS 229/123.2
TXT Including tearing or breaking means for opening a nonunitary closure or
    releasing a nonunitary securing element (i.e., the closure or securing
    element is not of one-piece construction with the box):

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the box includes either (1) an
    individual closing means (i.e., not of one-piece construction with the box)
    which includes means for rupturing it to gain access to the box or (2) an
    individual element which maintains a closing means in closed position and
    which has means for rupturing it to facilitate opening the closing means
    and gaining access to the contents of the box.

    (1)     Note.  A box having both a closure which is of one-piece
    construction with the box and a nonunitary securing element may be proper
    for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   for a paperboard box having means for severing unitary box material.


CLS 229/123.3
TXT Tearing or breaking provides hinged reclosure element:

    Subject matter under subclass 123.2 wherein the act of rupturing the
    closure results in a closure element which pivots about an axis and is
    usable to reclose the box.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221+,   for a hinged reclosure element formed by tearing unitary box
    material.


CLS 229/124
TXT With closure for an access opening:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the box includes means for
    blocking the insertion of removal of content through an access opening.

    (1)     Note.  An access opening is an opening which is intended to be used
    for the insertion or removal of content.

    (2)     Note.  The closure does not necessarily have to block the entire
    opening as long as it blocks the insertion or removal of the disclosed
    intended content.

    (3)     Note.  A closure, per se, is classified here if it is disclosed for
    use with a paperboard box.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9+      and 19+, for a box that is closed by sliding it into a shell.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 265+ for a cigarette box
    with a closure.


CLS 229/125
TXT With means for securing closure element in an open configuration:

    Subject matter under subclass 124 wherein the box includes means for
    holding a closure element in its open condition.


CLS 229/125.01
TXT Nonunitary closure (i.e., not of one-piece construction with the box):

    Subject matter under subclass 124 wherein the box includes a closure
    element which is not unitary with the box (i.e., not of one-piece
    construction with the box).

    (1)     Note.  A "nonunitary" closure may be permanently attached to the
    box, so long as it is not of one-piece construction with the box.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 200+ for a separate closure for a
    bottle or jar.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 200+ for a separate closure for a container
    not classified elsewhere.



CLS 229/125.015
TXT Transparent:

    A container under subclass 125.01 wherein the closure is made of a
    see-through material.


CLS 229/125.02
TXT With means to bias closure into closed position:

    Subject matter under subclass 125.01 wherein the nonunitary closure
    includes means which tend to force it to move toward, or to remain in, its
    closed condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128,    for a foldable wall extension having means for biasing it into
    closed position.


CLS 229/125.03
TXT Closure has secondary use (e.g., as an eating utensil):

    Subject matter under subclass 125.01 wherein the nonunitary closure is
    disclosed as having a use in addition to its use as a closing means.


CLS 229/125.04
TXT Pour spout:

    Subject matter under subclass 125.03 wherein the nonunitary closure is
    disclosed as being used to guide the flow of contents when they are poured
    or dumped from the box.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125.42, for a box with a unitary closure useable as a pour spout.

    214,    215+, and 248+,  for a box having a pour spout formed by severing
    unitary box material or separating releasably bonded box parts.



CLS 229/125.05
TXT Separately operable, superposed closures for one access opening:

    Subject matter under subclass 125.01 including two closures which are (1)
    nonunitary with the box, (2) large enough to individually close the box,
    (3) positioned in overlying relationship, and (4) manipulated individually
    during opening or closing of the box.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 256+ for similar closure structure for a
    container not classified elsewhere.


CLS 229/125.06
TXT Closure adjustable for different size access openings:

    Subject matter under subclass 125.01 wherein the nonunitary closure
    includes means for modifying it to enable it to close access openings of
    different sizes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 287 for a closure adaptable for various sizes
    of openings in containers not classified elsewhere.


CLS 229/125.07
TXT Closure mounted for compound movement:

    Subject matter under subclass 125.01 wherein the nonunitary closure is
    attached to the box by means which permit opening movement along two or
    more different lines or planes of travel or about two or more axes of
    rotation, or a combination thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 329+ for a similar closure for a receptacle
    not classified elsewhere.


CLS 229/125.08
TXT Closure mounted for swinging movement (e.g., hinged):

    Subject matter under subclass 125.01 wherein the nonunitary closure is
    mounted to the box by means which permit it to rotate about an axis between
    its opened and closed positions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126+    and 160.1, for a box having a hinged closure which is one-piece
    with the box.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 235+ for a closure which pivots about
    the opening of a bottle or jar.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 334+ for a hinged closure for a receptacle
    not classified elsewhere.




CLS 229/125.09
TXT Plug-type closure:

    Subject matter under subclass 125.08 wherein the nonunitary closure extends
    into the access opening in the box and sealingly engages the box material
    around substantially the entire periphery of the opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125.17, for plug-type closures not mounted for swinging movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 294, 296+, 354, and 355+ for a
    container not classified elsewhere.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 787 and 789+ for a closure of the stopper
    or plug type having preformed detents that are internal of the receptacle
    mouth.


CLS 229/125.11
TXT Including a nonunitary hinge (i.e., not of one-piece construction with the
    box or closure):

    Subject matter under subclass 125.08 wherein the mounting means is an
    individual piece of material (i.e., not part of either the box or the
    closure).


CLS 229/125.12
TXT Laterally slidable closure element (i.e., slides across access opening):

    Subject matter under subclass 125.01 wherein the nonunitary closure
    includes a part which, during opening and closing of the box, moves in a
    plane which is generally parallel to the plane of the access opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125.08, for a swinging closure that slides across an access opening.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 468 for a sliding closure
    for an article housing attached to a panel.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 345+ for a similar closure for a container
    not classified elsewhere.


CLS 229/125.125
TXT Sleevelike closure element:

    Subject matter under subclass 125.12 wherein the laterally slidable closure
    element is an opened-ended shell which extends around the box and covers
    the access opening.


CLS 229/125.13
TXT Closure secured to open box end by frame or ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 125.01 wherein the box includes an access
    opening formed by an initially open end, the access opening being closed by
    a nonunitary closure, the closure being maintained in position by an
    element which is in the shape of a closed geometrical figure which conforms
    to the shape of the periphery of the box end.


CLS 229/125.14
TXT For an access opening extending through a nonunitary box end-closing
    element (i.e., the element is not of one-piece construction with the box):

    Subject matter under subclass 125.01 wherein the box includes an initially
    open end which is closed by a nonunitary element, the nonunitary element
    including an access opening which is closed by the nonunitary closure.

    (1)     Note.  The initially open box end is not considered to be an access
    opening because no content is inserted or removed through it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125.15, for a closure for an access opening formed by a cut-out in a box
    wall.

    131.1,  for an access opening cut out of a foldable wall extension.



CLS 229/125.15
TXT For an access opening formed by a cut-out in a box wall:

    Subject matter under subclass 125.01 wherein the nonunitary closure closes
    an access opening which has been formed by the removal of box material from
    a box wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125.14, for a closure for an access opening extending through a nonunitary
    box end-closing element.

    131.1,  for an access opening cut out of a foldable wall extension.



CLS 229/125.16
TXT Including a gasket:

    Subject matter under subclass 125.01 wherein the nonunitary closure
    includes an element which is made from flexible material and which aids in
    the formation of a fluid-tight seal between the closure and the box.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 341+ for a gasket for a bottle or jar.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 217, 221, 226, 228, 287, 295, 304, 344,
    357, 358, 378, and 795, for a gasket for a container not classified
    elsewhere.


CLS 229/125.17
TXT Plug-type closure:

    Subject matter under subclass 125.01 wherein the nonunitary closure extends
    into the access opening and sealingly engages the box material around
    substantially the entire periphery of the opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125.09, for plug-type closures mounted for swinging movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 294, 296+, 354, and 355+ for a similar
    closure for a bottle or jar.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 787 and 789+ for a similar closure for a
    container not classified elsewhere.


CLS 229/125.18
TXT Tethered closure:

    Subject matter under subclass 125.01 wherein the nonunitary closure is
    secured to the box by a flexible attaching means which allows limited
    movement of the closure away from the box without complete detachment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclass 306 for a closure tethered to a bottle
    or jar.

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 375 for a tethered closure for a receptacle
    not classified elsewhere.



CLS 229/125.19
TXT Closure includes a depending flange or tab which extends along an adjacent
    box wall:

    Subject matter under subclass 125.01 wherein the nonunitary closure
    includes a downwardly extending element which, when the closure is in its
    closed position, overlies all or part of a box wall bordering the access
    opening.

    (1)     Note.  The element may extend either exteriorly or interiorly of
    the box.

    (2)     Note.  The element may be anything from a relatively small "leg" or
    "ear" which is attached along only a fraction of the length or width of the
    closure (i.e., a tab), to a piece of material which is attached along the
    entire length or width of the extension and may cover most or all of an
    adjacent box wall (i.e., a flange).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141,    for similar structure which is part of a foldable wall extension.




CLS 229/125.21
TXT With a nonunitary securing element (i.e., not of one-piece construction
    with the box):

    Subject matter under subclass 125.19 wherein the nonunitary closure is
    maintained in closed position by an element which is not of one-piece
    construction with either the box or the closure.

    (1)     Note.  The securing element may be permanently secured to either
    the box or the closure as long as it is not of one-piece construction with
    either.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125.37, for a closure that is of one-piece construction with the box but
    has a nonunitary securing element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 273+ for a nonunitary securing element
    for a closure for a bottle or jar.



CLS 229/125.22
TXT String, cord, or ribbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 125.21 wherein the nonunitary securing
    element is an elongated, slender, flexible element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for a similar securing element for a closure flap for an envelope.

    125.37, for a similar securing element for a closure that is one-piece
    construction with the box.


CLS 229/125.23
TXT Nonunitary securing element on closure engages nonunitary securing element
    on box (i.e., securing elements are not of one-piece construction with the
    box):

    Subject matter under subclass 125.21 wherein the box includes a means
    attached to one of its walls and a means attached to the nonunitary closure
    which means, when the box is closed, interengage with one another to
    maintain the closure in its closed position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77+,    for a similar securing element for a closure flap for an envelope.


CLS 229/125.24
TXT Threaded:

    Subject matter under subclass 125.19 wherein the flange extends around the
    circumference of the nonunitary closure and has screw threads which engage
    with mating screw threads on the box when the box is closed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 217+ and 356 for a screw-threaded
    closure for a bottle or jar.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 288+ for a screw-threaded closure for a
    container not classified elsewhere.



CLS 229/125.25
TXT Flange or tab overlaps rolled container rim or bead:

    Subject matter under subclass 125.19 wherein the top edge of the peripheral
    wall of the box is curved outwardly and downwardly and engages the flange
    or tab of the nonunitary closure when the box is closed.


CLS 229/125.26
TXT Flange or tab interlocks with downwardly extending flange of tab on box:

    Subject matter under subclass 125.19 wherein the top edge of the box has
    attached to it an angularly related element which overlies all or part of a
    box wall and which physically interconnects with the closure flange or tab
    to maintain the nonunitary closure in closed position.



CLS 229/125.27
TXT Flange or tab interlocks with horizontal flange or tab on box:

    Subject matter under subclass 125.19 wherein the top edge of the box wall
    has attached to it a horizontally extending element which physically
    interconnects with the closure flange or tab to maintain the nonunitary
    closure in its closed position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125.36, for a box closure that has no depending flange or tab and
    interlocks with a horizontal flange on the box.


CLS 229/125.28
TXT Flange or tab extends through opening in box material:

    Subject matter under subclass 125.19 wherein the box material includes a
    slit or aperture for receiving the closure flange or tab of the nonunitary
    closure.


CLS 229/125.29
TXT Closure includes slit or aperture to receive a projection from a box wall:

    Subject matter under subclass 125.19 wherein the nonunitary closure has an
    opening in it which accepts a protrusion from a wall of the box for
    maintaining the closure in its closed position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148,    for a box having a wall extension which has a depending flange
    which includes a slit or aperture for receiving a projection from a box
    wall.


CLS 229/125.31
TXT Flange or tab extends between two layers of box material:

    Subject matter under subclass 125.19 wherein the flange or tab lies between
    two thickness of box material when the nonunitary closure is in its closed
    position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151,    for a box having a wall extension which includes a flange or tab
    which extends between two layers of box material.


CLS 229/125.32
TXT Flange or tab extends into box interior:

    Subject matter under subclass 125.19 wherein the flange or tab lies inside
    the box when the closure is in its closed position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    for a box having a wall extension which includes a depending flange
    or tab which lies inside the box when the box is closed.



CLS 229/125.33
TXT Closure bonded to box:

    Subject matter under subclass 125.01 wherein the nonunitary closure is
    adhesively secured or welded to the box.


CLS 229/125.34
TXT Including a flexible sheet bonded to one or more closure flaps:

    Subject matter under subclass 125.33 wherein the nonunitary closure is a
    separate sheet of flexible material which is secured to one or more box
    wall extensions.

    (1)     Note.  The box wall extensions may be folded after the sheet of
    flexible material has been secured.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126+,   for a box closure which comprises a unitary elongation of a wall,
    which elongation is attached to the wall along a fold line.



CLS 229/125.35
TXT Bonded to box rim or adjacent flange:

    Subject matter under subclass 125.33 wherein the nonunitary closure is
    adhesively secured or welded to the box material which surrounds the access
    opening.


CLS 229/125.36
TXT Closure interlocks with horizontal flange on box:

    Subject matter under subclass 125.01 wherein the top edges of the box walls
    have attached to them horizontally extending elements which physically
    interconnect with the nonunitary closure to maintain the closure in its
    closed position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125.27, for a box closure that has a depending flange or tab which
    physically interconnects with a horizontal flange on the box.


CLS 229/125.37
TXT Including a nonunitary securing element for a closure (i.e., element is not
    of one-piece construction with the box):

    Subject matter under subclass 124 wherein the closure is maintained in
    closed position by an element which is not of one-piece construction with
    the box.

    (1)     Note.  Each patent that is original in this subclass will
    necessarily be drawn to a box having a closure that is of one-piece
    construction with it.  All boxes having a nonunitary closure, including
    those permanently secured to the box, will be found in subclasses 125.01+.



CLS 229/125.38
TXT String, cord, or ribbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 125.37 wherein the nonunitary securing
    element is an elongated, slender, flexible element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for a similar securing element for a closure flap for an envelope.

    125.22, for a similar securing element for a closure which is nonunitary
    with the box (includes those permanently secured to the box).



CLS 229/125.39
TXT For securing two  or more closure flaps in place:

    Subject matter under subclass 125.37 wherein the box closure includes at
    least two wall extensions which overlie the access opening and wherein the
    nonunitary securing element maintains them in position when the box is
    closed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126+,   for a box having one or more wall extensions used as closure flaps
    which do not utilize a nonunitary securing element.


CLS 229/125.41
TXT Securing element extends through the outer of two overlapping closure flaps:

    Subject matter under subclass 125.39 wherein a first closure flap overlies
    a second closure flap and the securing element projects through the first
    closure flap.


CLS 229/125.42
TXT One-piece box construction includes a closure useable as a pour spout
    (e.g., gable-top carton):

    Subject matter under subclass 124 wherein the box includes a unitary
    closure (i.e., of one-piece construction with the box) which, in its open
    configuration, acts as a flow guide for dispensing the contents of the box.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125.04, for similar structure wherein the closure is not of one-piece
    construction with the box.

    214,    215+ and 248+, for a box having a pour spout formed by severing
    unitary box material or separating releasably bonded box parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 526+ and 566+ for similar structure for
    containers made of a material other than paperboard.


CLS 229/126
TXT Foldable wall extension (e.g., closure flap):

    Subject matter under subclass 124 wherein the closure comprises a unitary
    elongation of a wall, (i.e., of one-piece construction with the wall) which
    elongation is hingedly attached to the wall along a fold line.



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125.34, for a box having foldable wall extensions which have a flexible
    sheet bonded to them.

    125.37+,for a box having one or more foldable wall extensions which are
    maintained in position by a separate closure securing element.



CLS 229/127
TXT Two opposed extensions have folded confronting flanges:

    Subject matter under subclass 126 wherein each of two opposite box walls
    has a foldable wall extension hingedly attached to it and wherein (a) each
    extension projects only partway across the access opening when it is closed
    and (b) each extension has either an inwardly or outwardly projecting
    foldable element which faces the corresponding foldable element of the
    opposed extension.


CLS 229/128
TXT Including means for biasing extension into closed position:

    Subject matter under subclass 126 wherein the box includes means which tend
    to force the extension to move toward, or to remain, in its closed
    condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125.02, for a separate closure having means to bias it into its closed
    position.


CLS 229/129
TXT Telescoping closure formed from plural extensions:

    Subject matter under subclass 126 wherein portions of wall extensions are
    connected together to form a cap-like closure which is guided in
    reciprocating movement to open and close the access opening.


CLS 229/129.1
TXT Slide-operated closure flap:

    Subject matter under subclass 126 wherein a closure flap is connected to an
    element which is mounted for movement along the surface of the box and
    which can be operated to move the closure flap between open and closed
    positions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129,    for similar structure in which a telescoping closure is formed from
    plural extensions.


CLS 229/130
TXT Including stop to limit opening movement of closure:

    Subject matter under subclass 126 including means to prevent the closure
    from opening past a given position.


CLS 229/131
TXT Closed extension includes fixed and movable portions joined at a hinge line:

    Subject matter under subclass 126 wherein the extension, in closed
    condition, includes a first part which remains immobilized with respect to
    the box wall to which it is attached and a second part, which is pivotally
    attached to the first part along a fold line.


CLS 229/131.1
TXT Access opening cut out of a foldable wall extension:

    Subject matter under subclass 126 wherein a foldable wall extension
    includes an access opening formed by removal of material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125.14, for a closure for an access opening extending through a nonunitary
    box end-closing element.

    125.15, for a closure for an access opening formed by a cut-out in a box
    wall.


CLS 229/132
TXT Overlapping extensions bonded together:

    Subject matter under subclass 126 wherein the closure includes two or more
    extensions which overlie one another and are adhesively secured or welded
    to one another.


CLS 229/133
TXT Including a sealing web formed by partial delamination of a wall extension:

    Subject matter under subclass 132 wherein the closure includes a lamina of
    box material which has been partially torn from a wall extension, formerly
    part of its thickness, and which aids in the prevention of leakage along at
    least part of the perimeter of the across opening.

    (1)     Note.  An indentation may be a point, a line or an area.


CLS 229/134
TXT Including embossing or scoring to enhance the bond:

    Subject matter under subclass 132 wherein at least one of the extensions
    includes an indentation to facilitate or enhance the bonding of the
    extensions to one another.

    (1)     Note.  An indentation may be a point, a line or an area.






CLS 229/135
TXT Including means to restrain inward movement of inner extensions during
    bonding:

    Subject matter under subclass 132 wherein means are provided to limit the
    inward movement of the inner extension while it is being bonded to the
    outer extension.


CLS 229/136
TXT Extensions bonded by means of a cohesive or pressure sensitive type
    adhesive:

    Subject matter under subclass 132 wherein a portion of one of the
    extensions has a coating of material which causes the extensions to adhere
    together when overlapped in response to pressure, or each extension has a
    coating of material which sticks to itself upon contact when the extensions
    are overlapped.


CLS 229/137
TXT Extensions of adjacent box walls hingedly attached together:

    Subject matter under subclass 132 wherein the closure includes extensions
    of two walls that are next to each other, which extensions are attached to
    one another along a fold line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    for similar subject matter involving extensions which are not
    bonded together.


CLS 229/138
TXT Extensions of adjacent box walls hingedly attached together:

    Subject matter under subclass 126 wherein the closure includes extensions
    of two walls that are next to each other, which extensions are attached to
    one another along a fold line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137,    for similar subject matter including bonded overlapping extensions.

    184,    for similar structure in a bottom wall.


CLS 229/139
TXT Three extensions form a pocket to receive fourth extension:

    Subject matter under subclass 138 wherein three hingedly connected
    extensions are foldable to form a partially enclosed recess which will
    accept insertion of a fourth extension.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184,    for similar structure in a bottom wall.


CLS 229/140
TXT One extension extends along an adjacent box wall:

    Subject matter under subclass 138 wherein, when the access opening is
    closed, one of the hingedly attached extensions overlies a box wallwhich
    borders the access opening.


CLS 229/141
TXT Extension includes a depending flange or tab which extends along an
    adjacent box wall:

    Subject matter under subclass 126 wherein the extension includes a foldable
    element which, when the extension is in its closed position, overlies all
    or part of a box wall bordering the access opening.

    (1)     Note.  The "foldable element" may extend either exteriorly or
    interiorly of the box.

    (2)     Note.  The "foldable element" may be anything from a relatively
    small "lug" or "ear" which is attached along only a fraction of the length
    or width of extension (i.e., a "tab") to a piece of paperboard which is
    attached along substantially the entire length or width of the extension
    and may cover most or all of an adjacent box wall (i.e., a "flange").

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125.19+, for a separate closure having similar         flange or tab
    structure.


CLS 229/142
TXT Two or more extensions include a depending flange or tab:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the closure includes at least two
    extensions having a depending flange or tab.


CLS 229/143
TXT Each of two opposed extensions includes flanges or tabs depending from two
    opposite edges:

    Subject matter under subclass 142 wherein the closure includes (a) two
    extensions which are attached to opposing box walls, and (b) at least two
    flanges or tabs attached to opposing edges of each extension.


CLS 229/144
TXT Flange connected to two box walls by a foldable web:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the extensions includes a
    depending flange which is attached to two side walls by means of a segment
    of box material which is unitary with all three elements and is folded upon
    itself when the box is closed.


CLS 229/145
TXT Plural flanges interconnected to form a skirt:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the extension includes two or
    more depending flanges, each of which is connected to the flange or flanges
    which are adjacent to it to form a border which overlaps the box walls.


CLS 229/146
TXT Box wall or portion thereof pivots with extension during opening of the box:

    Subject matter under subclass 145 wherein at least a portion of the wall to
    which the extension

    is attached remains movable with respect to it when the box is closed, and
    pivots when the extension is moved to an open position.


CLS 229/147
TXT Flange or tab folded to extend along two or more box walls:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the extension includes a
    depending flange which is folded to overlie at least two box walls.

    (1)     Note.  The flange may overlie two adjacent side walls or a side
    wall and the bottom wall.


CLS 229/148
TXT Flange or tab includes slit or aperture to receive a projection from a box
    wall:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein a depending flange or tab has an
    opening in it disclosed for accepting a protrusion from a wall of the box
    to aid in maintaining the closure in its closed position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125.29, for a separate closure having a slit or aperture which receives a
    projection from a box wall.


CLS 229/149
TXT Flange or tab extends through opening in box material:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the box material includes a slit
    or  aperture disclosed for receiving the flange or tab which depends from
    the extension.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125.28, for a separate closure having similar flange or tab structure.

    157     and 158, for interlocking extensions which include at least one
    projection extending through at least one opening in the box material.

    185,    for mechanically interlocked bottom wall flaps.


CLS 229/150
TXT Opening extends through a wall extension:

    Subject matter under subclass 149 wherein the slit or aperture is located
    in and extends through an extension of a box wall.


CLS 229/151
TXT Flange or tab extends between two layers of box material:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the flange or tab lies between
    two thicknesses of stock material when the access opening is closed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125.31, for a separate closure having a flange or tab when extends between
    two layers of box material.


CLS 229/152
TXT Flange or tab extends into box interior:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the flange or tab lies inside the
    box when the access opening is closed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS SUBCLASS:

    125.31+ and 125.37+, for a closure securing element which separate from the
    box.

    125.32, for a separate closure having a flange or tab which extends into
    the box interior.

    149,    for a flange or tab which extends into the box interior through an
    opening in the box material.

    151,    for a flange or tab which extends between two layers of box
    material and has a portion inside the box.


CLS 229/153
TXT Including means for securing flange or tab in closed position:

    Subject matter under subclass 152 including means which tend to resist the
    removal of the flange or tab from the box when the access opening is
    closed.


CLS 229/154
TXT Extension includes two or more depending flanges or tabs:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the foldable wall extension has
    at least two flanges or tabs depending from it.


CLS 229/155
TXT Plural extensions mechanically interlocked with each other:

    Subject matter under subclass 126 wherein two or more extensions are
    physically interconnected in such a manner that movement of each extension
    is constrained by at least one of the others, even in the absence of a bond
    or separate fastener.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for interlocking bottom flaps which automatically form a bottom
    wall during erection of collapsed box.

    132+,   for extensions which are bonded together.

    139,    for an extension which extends into a pocket formed by three others.

    185,    for similar subject matter comprising a box bottom wall.


CLS 229/156
TXT One extension interlocks with at least two others:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 wherein one extension is physically
    interconnected with two or more other extensions.


CLS 229/157
TXT The one extension projects through an opening in each of the others:

    Subject matter under subclass 156 wherein the interconnection is formed by
    a portion or portions of the one extension extending through a slit or
    aperture in each of the other extensions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149+    for a foldable wall extension having depending flange or tab which
    extends along an adjacent box wall and through an opening in the box
    material.


CLS 229/158
TXT One extension projects through two separate openings in another extension:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 wherein the interconnection is formed by
    at least a portion of one extension extending through two spaced openings
    (an opening being either a slit or an aperture) in another extension.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149+,   for a foldable wall extension having a depending flange or tab
    which extends along an adjacent box wall and through an opening in the box
    material.


CLS 229/159
TXT Extension formed of two or more thicknesses of box material:

    Subject matter under subclass 126 wherein the extension is formed of at
    least two layers of stock material.


CLS 229/160
TXT Access opening includes a rim for supporting a wall extension:

    Subject matter under subclass 126 wherein the box includes a ledge which
    extends around a portion of the perimeter of the opening and upon which the
    foldable wall extension rests when it is in its closed position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125.35, for a separate closure which is bonded to a box rim or horizontal
    flange.


CLS 229/160.1
TXT Hinged closure includes material cut from a box sidewall (e.g., cigarette
    box):

    Subject matter under subclass 124 wherein the box includes a closure which
    rotates between its open and closed positions and which is made in part
    from box material which forms part of a box side wall when the box is
    closed.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass must necessarily be limited to boxes with
    unitary hinged closures since boxes with nonunitary closures (i.e., not of
    one-piece construction with the box) are found in subclasses 125.01+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125.08, for a box having a nonunitary hinged closure.


CLS 229/160.2
TXT Including means to facilitate the application of an opening force to the
    closure (e.g. pulltab, thumb notch, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 124 wherein the closure includes means which
    make it easier to apply a force to the closure to move it from its closed
    position to an open position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    924+,   for cross reference art collections of means to facilitate gripping
    a tear strip.





CLS 229/161
TXT A box wall includes box material cut from another box wall:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein a section of box material is at
    least partially severed from one box wall, and has been moved out of the
    plane of said one box wall and into a position to form part of a different
    box wall.

    (1)     Note.  Normally the box material remains hingedly attached to the
    wall from which it is severed and is folded into its new position.

    (2)     Note.  In the completed box, the absence of the severed material
    leaves a gap in the box wall, or one of the layers of the box wall, from
    which the severed material has been removed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120.114+, for a partition cut and folded from a
       box wall.

    120.27, for parallel partitions cut and folded from a transverse partition.


CLS 229/162
TXT Window or transparent portion:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein a box wall is provided with means
    for viewing a portion of the box content.

    (1)     Note.  A "window" may be nothing more than an aperture extending
    through the box material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 45.31+ for a box of that
    class type having a window.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 662+ for other receptacles having a
    transparent wall.


CLS 229/163
TXT Horizontal, outwardly extending bottom flange:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein a relatively flat segment of box
    material extends laterally outwardly from the bottom of a box side wall.



CLS 229/164
TXT Different height sidewalls:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the box includes two upwardly
    extending sidewalls having different vertical dimensions.


CLS 229/165
TXT A sidewall includes a horizontally or downwardly extending panel attached
    along a horizontal fold line which is spaced above the box bottom:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the box includes a flap which
    projects laterally or downwardly from a wall and is connected to the wall
    along a laterally extending fold line which is located above the bottom of
    the box.

    (1)     Note.  The panel does not add to the content holding volume of the
    box.

    (2)     Note.  The panel can be attached to a corner connector (i.e.,
    "corner fold" or "corner flap") which has become part of a side wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120.13, for a partition folded from a downwardly extending sidewall
    extension.

    126+,   for a foldable wall extension which closes an access opening.


CLS 229/166
TXT Separate reinforcing member located within fold:

    Subject matter under subclass 165 wherein a strengthening element lies
    adjacent the fold line between the side wall and the panel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199,    for a separate reinforcing element for a box not specific to this
    subclass.


CLS 229/167
TXT Panel forms a hollow sidewall or sidewall portion:

    Subject matter under subclass 165 wherein the panel forms a double layer
    side wall or sidewall section having a significant air space between
    layers.




CLS 229/168
TXT Hollow sidewall has a nonrectangular cross- section:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 wherein the panels forming the periphery
    of the hollow side wall provide it with a nonrectangular cross section.


CLS 229/169
TXT Panel forms planar, horizontal flange or flap spaced from box bottom:

    Subject matter under subclass 165 wherein the panel extends laterally from
    the side wall to which it is connected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126,    for a foldable wall extension which closes an access opening.


CLS 229/170
TXT Flange or flap includes a portion of a folded corner connector (i.e.,
    "corner fold" or "corner flap"):

    Subject matter under subclass 169 wherein the laterally extending panel
    includes a horizontal portion of a corner connector, the vertical portion
    of the corner connector joining a sidewall along a vertical fold line.

    (1)     Note.  A corner connector is a folded extension of a side wall
    which overlaps an adjacent side wall to connect the walls together.  It may
    be unitary with one or both walls.


CLS 229/171
TXT Panel is located outside the box:

    Subject matter under subclass 165 wherein the panel is located on the
    exterior of box.


CLS 229/172
TXT Panel includes a folded flap or tab which overlaps an adjacent box wall
    (e.g., sidewall or bottom wall):

    Subject matter under subclass 165 wherein the panel includes a hinged
    portion which overlies a box wall which adjoins the sidewall from which the
    panel extends.


CLS 229/173
TXT One or more flaps combine to cover entire bottom wall:

    Subject matter under subclass 172 wherein one or more hinged portions of
    one or more panels combine to completely cover all of the bottom wall.


CLS 229/174
TXT Flap or tab overlaps an adjacent sidewall:

    Subject matter under subclass 172 wherein the box wall which the flap or
    tab overlaps is a side wall which adjoins the sidewall from which the
    panels extends.


CLS 229/175
TXT Flap or tab is coplanar with a downwardly extending panel of the adjacent
    sidewall:

    Subject matter under subclass 174 wherein the flap or tab lies in the same
    plane as a downwardly folded extension of the adjoining sidewall.

    (1)     Note.  Normally the adjacent sidewall extension will have a
    notched-out or cut away portion sized to receive the flap or tab.



CLS 229/176
TXT Flap or tab underlies a downwardly extending panel of the adjacent sidewall:

    Subject matter under subclass 174 wherein the flap or tab lies between the
    adjoining side wall and a downwardly folded extension of the adjoining
    sidewall.


CLS 229/177
TXT Panel has opening or notch to receive a portion of a folded corner
    connector (i.e., "corner fold" or "corner flap"):

    Subject matter under subclass 165 wherein at least a part of a laterally
    folded extension of an adjacent sidewall extends through a slit or cut-out
    in the panel.

    (1)     Note.  The "laterally folded extension" (corner connector) may be
    either a foldable web element unitary with both side walls or a folded flap
    element which is unitary with only one of the adjacent sidewalls.

    (2)     Note.  A cutout may include an aperture which is totally surrounded
    by box material or an aperture which extends to an edge and is only
    partially surrounded by box material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186+,   for a box having a folded web corner element.

    190+,   for a box having a folded flap corner
    element.


CLS 229/178
TXT Panel or panel portion projects into an opening or notch in the box
    material:

    Subject matter under subclass 165 wherein at least a portion of the panel
    extends through a slit or a cutout in the box material.

    (1)     Note.  A cutout may include an aperture which is totally surrounded
    by box material or an aperture which extends to an edge and is only
    partially surrounded by box material.


CLS 229/179
TXT Opening or notch located in folded corner connector (i.e., "corner fold" or
    "corner flap"):

    Subject matter under subclass 178 wherein the slit or cutout extends
    through a laterally folded extension of an adjacent sidewall.

    (1)     Note.  The "laterally folded extension" (corner connector) may be
    either a foldable web element unitary with both sidewalls or a folded flap
    element which is unitary with only one of the adjacent sidewalls.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186+,   for a box having a folded web corner element.

    190+,   for a box having a folded flap corner element.


CLS 229/180
TXT Panel or panel portion is located between two layers of box material:

    Subject matter under subclass 165 wherein at least a portion of the panel
    extends between two thicknesses of box material.


CLS 229/181
TXT Panel secured in folded position by a separate fastening device (e.g.,
    adhesive tape, staple, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 165 wherein the panel is fixed in its final
    location by an attached fastener.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182,    for a panel secured by a heat weld or adhesive, per se.


CLS 229/182
TXT Panel secured in folded position by a heat weld or adhesive, per se:

    Subject matter under subclass 165 wherein the panel is fixed in its final
    location by means of adhesive or a thermoplastic weld (e.g., as between two
    layers of paperboard coated with a thermoplastic material).


CLS 229/182.1
TXT Box includes straight sidewalls and rounded corners:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein at least two of the box sidewalls
    are of linear extent and at least two of the corners are curved.


CLS 229/183
TXT Bottom wall includes a folded extension of a sidewall:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the box includes a bottom wall
    which is formed at least in part from a unitary elongation of a sidewall,
    which elongation is connected to the sidewall along a fold line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS SUBCLASS:

    117,    for a multipart bottom wall which forms automatically during
    erection of collapsed box.

    155+,   for similar construction constituting a closure for an access
    opening.


CLS 229/184
TXT Extensions of adjacent sidewalls foldably attached together:

    Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein the bottom includes elongations
    of two sidewalls that are next to each other, which elongations are
    attached to one another along a fold line.


CLS 229/185
TXT Plural extensions mechanically interlocked with each other:

    Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein two or more extensions are
    physically interconnected in such a manner that movement of each extension
    is constrained by at least one of the others.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for interlocking bottom flaps which automatically form a bottom
    wall during erection of the collapsed box.

    155+,   for similar subject matter forming a closure.


CLS 229/186
TXT Adjacent sidewalls connected by a folded web unitary with both (i.e.,
    "corner fold"):

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein two adjoining sidewalls are
    attached together by means of segment of box material which is an extension
    of both walls and which is doubled upon itself along a fold line when the
    box is in erected condition.


CLS 229/187
TXT And by a laterally folded extension which is unitary with only one of the
    sidewalls (i.e., corner flap):

    Subject matter under subclass 186 wherein the same two sidewalls are
    additionally attached together by an elongation which is connected to only
    one of the walls along a folded line and overlies and is secured to the
    other wall.


CLS 229/188
TXT Tablike member on web extends through opening in box material:

    Subject matter under subclass 186 wherein the folded web includes a
    projection which extends through a slit or aperture in part of the box.


CLS 229/189
TXT Web secured in folded position by a separate fastening device (e.g.,
    adhesive tape, staple, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 186 wherein the web is fixed in its final
    location by an attached fastener.


CLS 229/190
TXT A sidewall includes a folded lateral extension of an adjacent sidewall
    (e.g., "corner flap"):

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein an elongation of a first,
    generally upright box wall forms at least a part of an adjoining, generally
    upright box wall, the elongation being joined to the first wall along a
    fold line.


CLS 229/191
TXT Extension forms hollow, upstanding corner element:

    Subject matter under subclass 190 wherein the extension is folded to form,
    either by itself or with the two adjoining box walls, a generally vertical
    and substantially empty box part.


CLS 229/192
TXT Each of two adjacent sidewalls has a folded lateral extension where they
    join:

    Subject matter under subclass 190 wherein each of the adjoining sidewalls
    has an extension which overlaps at least part of the other wall where they
    come together.


CLS 229/193
TXT Folded extensions of opposed sidewalls overlap one another:

    Subject matter under subclass 190 wherein each of the two sidewalls, which
    form opposite sides of the box, has a laterally folded extension which
    extends toward and overlies the other extension.


CLS 229/194
TXT And are mechanically interlocked with each other:

    Subject matter under subclass 193 wherein the overlapped extensions are
    physically interconnected in such a manner that movement of each extension
    is constrained by the other even in the absence of a bond or separate
    fastener.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155,    for mechanically interlocked closure flaps.


CLS 229/195
TXT Extension projects into an opening in the box material:

    Subject matter under subclass 190 wherein at least a portion of the
    extension extends through a slit or a cutout in the stock material.



CLS 229/196
TXT Extension projects into two or more separate openings:

    Subject matter under subclass 195 wherein the extension extends through at
    least two spaced opening (e.g., slits or cutouts) in the box material.


CLS 229/197
TXT Extension includes a downwardly opening slit or notch:

    Subject matter under subclass 195 wherein the extension includes a cut line
    or cutout which has box material above it and on two sides of it, but not
    below it, and is laterally bounded by two downwardly extending free edges
    of box.


CLS 229/198
TXT Extension secured in folded position by a separate fastening device (e.g.,
    adhesive tape, staple, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 190 wherein the extension is fixed in its
    final location by an attached fastener.


CLS 229/198.1
TXT Adjacent sidewalls connected only by a separate securing element:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein two adjoining, upwardly extending
    box walls are attached together by a device which is not of one-piece
    construction with the box, and which is the only connection between them.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189     and 198, for a separate fastening device for securing a "corner
    fold" or a "corner flap" in position.

    199,    for a separate reinforcing element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses 69+ for a wooden receptacle having a
    stay.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 115+ for a method of forming a box by
    securing two distinct members together with a distinct securing element.


CLS 229/198.2
TXT Miscellaneous joint construction:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the box includes means, not
    classified elsewhere, for connecting two box parts together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.5+,   for a box end structure which may include a joint construction for
    connecting it to the box walls.

    117,    for a joint construction which forms an automatic bottom.

    124+,   for a joint construction which forms a closure for an access
    opening.

    183+,   for a joint construction which connects together box sidewall
    extensions to form a bottom wall.

    186+,   for a joint construction which uses a "corner fold" to connect
    adjacent sidewalls together.

    190+,   for a joint construction which uses a "corner flap" to connect
    adjacent sidewalls together.

    198.1,  for a joint construction which uses only a separate securing
    element to connect adjacent sidewalls together.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    272.2+ for a method of forming a joint by application of electrical,
    magnetic or radiant energy.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 75+ for a seam or joint for a container not
    classified elsewhere, and digest 31 for a container having a sonic seal.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 107+ for specified seam structure in a
    flexible bag.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 57+ for sheets
    or webs which are edge-spliced or joined, and subclasses 346+ for a seam
    which has been formed by heat or solvent activation.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 121+ for a method of forming a box by
    securing distinct members together, and subclasses 331+ for a method of
    forming a box including the step of coating with adhesive.


CLS 229/198.3
TXT Including separate securing element:

    Subject matter under subclass 198.2 wherein the connecting means includes
    an element which is not of one-piece construction with the box.

    (1)     Note.  Adhesive, per se, is not considered to be a separate element.


CLS 229/199
TXT Separate reinforcing element:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein either: (a) the box material
    includes structure which has been added to it at a selected location to
    strengthen it (e.g., strand of wire or cord, slat of stiff material such as
    wood or plastic) or (b) a brace extends between wall panels to prevent
    bulging.

    (1)     Note.  A reinforced structure formed by mere folding or multiple
    thicknesses of box material is not considered to be a separate element for
    this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166,    for a separate reinforcing element located within the fold of a
    downwardly extending panel attached to a sidewall.


CLS 229/200
TXT Having means to facilitate opening the box by severing (e.g., tearing,
    cutting, piercing, etc.) box material or outer wrapper:Box under subclass
    100 which includes means that expedite or enable parting of box material or
    flaccid exterior covering to gain access to the box interior to insert or
    remove content.

    (1)     Note.  The "means to facilitate opening" may include one or more of
    the following: (a) an inherent characteristic of the box material (e.g.,
    grain direction), or (b) a weakening of the box material (e.g., a score
    line), or (c) an additional element (e.g., a tear string).

    (2)     Note.  Tearing is defined as failure of the box material by tension
    at a line of separation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87.05,  for a wrapper, per se, including means to facilitate opening by
    tearing.

    123.2+, for a separate closure (i.e., not of one-piece construction with
    the box) having means to facilitate opening by severing (e.g., tearing,
    cutting, piercing, etc.).

    307+,   for an envelope having means to facilitate opening by severing
    (e.g., tearing, cutting, piercing, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 2 for a carton opener.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 45.12 for a display-type
    box having a rupturable wall portion, subclass 222 for a mixing container
    having a tear strip or piercing means, subclass 264 for a tobacco
    product-containing package having severing means, subclass 469 for a
    blister pack having a frangible closure, and subclass 532 for an ampule,
    capsule, pellet, or granule container having rupture means for access to
    the contents.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, for a closure for or combined with a bottle or
    jar, and in particular, subclasses 247+ for a self-sealing pierceable-type
    closure and subclasses 250+ for a closure having a frangible member or
    portion.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 200+ for a closure, per se, or a closure
    combined with a container not classified elsewhere, in particular, subclass
    207 for a closure having a rupturable vent, subclass 257 for superposed
    closures having a destructible outer closure, subclass 258 for superposed
    closures having a destructible inner closure, and subclasses 265+, for a
    closure having a frangible member or portion.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 31+ for a dispensing means having a
    cutter or punch for forming an outlet opening.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 80+ for a dispensing means having a cutter
    or punch for forming an outlet opening in a container and subclass 541 for
    a frangible element for an outlet.

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, subclasses 39+ for a housing
    (e.g., a box) for a work supply (e.g., aluminum foil, plastic wrap, etc.)
    and, in particular, subclasses 48+ for a single blank container having a
    cutting edge.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 200+ for a flexible bag having severing
    means.

    426,    Food or Edible Material: Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclass 76 for frangible food having a score line or weakened portion,
    subclass 122 for a food package having a scored or perforated line and
    subclass 123 for a food package having a tearing appendage.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 43 for a sheet,
    web, or layer which has been weakened to facilitate tearing and subclasses
    131+, particularly subclass 136, for sheet material having slits or
    apertures.


CLS 229/201
TXT Box includes a curved sidewall (e.g., cylindrical, conical, etc.):Subject
    matter under subclass 237 wherein the box sidewall is arcuate in shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.5,    for a box having a cylindrical or conical body or wall structure
    but no severing means.

    93,     for open-ended cylindrical tubes, usually used for mailing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 830 for a cross-reference
    art collection of biscuit packages, which are usually cylindrical in shape.


CLS 229/202
TXT Helical severing path:
    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the box is severed along a
    spiral-shaped path during the opening process.


CLS 229/203
TXT Box includes flexible outer wrapper:
    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the box is covered by an external
    sheet of flaccid material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87.05,  for a wrapper, per se, having tearing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 264 for a wrapped package
    of cigarettes having severing means.


CLS 229/204
TXT Combined with, or modified for opening by, a sharp-edged cutting implement
    or a piercing implement:Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the box
    is combined with, or modified for opening by, an instrument having a keen
    edge or a sharp point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238+,   for a box having a separate tearing element (e.g., tear string)
    which is gripped and pulled to open the box.

    308,    for an envelope combined with, or modified for opening by, a
    cutting or piercing implement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 2 for a carton opener.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 277+ for a closure having cutting,
    punching, or cutter accommodating means.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 31+ for a dispensing means having a
    cutter or punch for forming an outlet opening.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 81+ for a dispensing means having a cutter
    or punch for forming a dispensing opening in a container.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 202 for a bag combined with, or modified
    for opening by a cutting or piercing implement.


CLS 229/205
TXT Tearing facilitated by specified fiber or molecular orientation:Subject
    matter under subclass 200 wherein the box material includes either
    filaments or molecules arranged in a particular way to make it easier to
    tear open the box.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.5+,   for an article made from a material which may have either fibers or
    molecules aligned in a specified direction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 201 for a bag made from a material which
    has either fibers or molecules aligned in a specified direction and
    subclass 908 for an art collection of bags having specified grain direction
    or molecular orientation.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 105+ for
    grain, strips, or filamentary elements in respective layers, or components
    in angular relation; subclass 114 for grain, strips, or filamentary
    elements in different layers or components in parallel relation; and
    subclass 910 for a cross-reference art collection of products made from a
    material having molecular orientation.


CLS 229/206
TXT Including a coating or lamination (e.g., adhesive tape) covering a line of
    weakness:Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the box material
    includes a line of reduced strength which is overlain by a layer of
    material.


CLS 229/207
TXT Tearing means includes offset score lines in opposite faces of a layer of
    box material:Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein a layer of box
    material includes a groove or slit extending only partially through it from
    one side of the material and another generally  parallel groove or slit
    extending only partially through it from the obverse side of the material
    and wherein the two slits or grooves are spaced from one another in a
    direction parallel to  the surface of the layer.


CLS 229/208
TXT Surface portion of box material stripped away during opening (e.g.,
    delaminating, tearing surface fibers, etc.):Subject matter under subclass
    200 wherein tearing through less than the entire thickness of box material
    occurs during the opening process.


CLS 229/209
TXT Coating of adhesive-repelling material adjacent the surface portion:Subject
    matter under subclass 208 wherein the surface of the box material next to
    the surface portion to be stripped includes a coating or layer of material
    which diminishes or eliminates the ability of the box material to form a
    bond.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246,    for a releasable or frangible bond formed using an adhesive
    repellent or other "resist" material.


CLS 229/210
TXT Tearing provides reusable closure:
    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein tearing the box material frees a
    portion of the box, which portion is used to reclose the box.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101.2,  for a reclosable box having reduced volume when reclosed.

    123.3,  for a closure element or a closure securing element which is not of
    one-piece construction with the box and which provides a hinged reusable
    closure element when torn.


CLS 229/211
TXT Reusable closure includes an initially separate box closure:Subject matter
    under subclass 210 wherein the reusable closure includes a closure which
    was unattached to the box prior to closing it for the first time.

    (1)     Note. The initially separate closure is not torn during the tearing
    process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123.2+, for an initially separate box closure which is torn during opening.


CLS 229/212
TXT Including a releasable or frangible bond (e.g., peel seal) for securing the
    reusable closure in position prior to tearing:Subject matter under subclass
    210 wherein a peelable or frangible adhering means (e.g., glue, heat seal,
    etc.) is provided between two box parts to help retain the reusable closure
    in position before the box is torn open.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80.5,   for an envelope having a releasable or frangible bond.

    123.1,  for a box having a separate closure or securing element having a
    releasable or frangible bond.

    245+,   for other boxes closed by a releasable or frangible bond but having
    no tearing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 210 for a bag closed by a releasable or
    frangible bond.


CLS 229/213
TXT Gable-top box (e.g., milk carton):
    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein the box has a gabled top (i.e.,
    two opposing sides of the receptacle terminate in upwardly and inwardly
    extending portions which meet to form triangles which face two other
    opposing sides of the box).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249,    for a gable-top box having a pour spout formed by unsecuring a
    releasable or frangible bond.


CLS 229/214
TXT Pour spout:

    Subject matter under subclass 213 wherein the reusable closure is disclosed
    as being used to guide the flow of contents when they are poured or dumped
    from the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125.04, for a separate closure having a secondary use as a pour spout.

    215+,   for similar pour spout structure which is not part of a gable-top
    box.

    248,    for a box having a pour spout formed by separating releasably
    bonded box parts.


CLS 229/215
TXT Pour spout:
    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein the reusable closure is disclosed
    as being used to guide the flow of contents when they are poured or dumped
    from the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125.04, for a separate closure having a secondary use as a pour spout.

    214,    for a pour spout formed by tearing a gable top box.

    248,    for a box having a pour spout formed by separating releasably
    bonded box parts.


CLS 229/216
TXT Pour spout formed by tearing a sealing fin:
    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein the pour spout is formed by
    tearing the material of a seam formed by adhering to one another the inside
    surfaces of two opposing edge portions of the box.


CLS 229/217
TXT Pour spout includes at least part of the top wall:
    Subject matter under subclass 215 wherein the pour spout includes a portion
    of the top wall of the box.


CLS 229/218
TXT Pour spout located in top wall at the intersection of only two
    sidewalls:Subject matter under subclass 217 wherein the pour spout is
    positioned in a corner of the upper-most receptacle wall above a corner
    formed by two upwardly extending receptacle walls and does not extend
    laterally past any other corner of the receptacle.


CLS 229/219
TXT Pour spout includes joined parts of two or more overlapped closure
    flaps:Subject matter under subclass 217 wherein the pour spout includes
    secured portions of two segments of box material which are hingedly
    attached to two or more upwardly extending box walls before the box is torn
    open.


CLS 229/220
TXT Reusable slide closure:
    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein the reusable closure is an
    element which, during reclosing and reopening of the box, moves in a plane
    that is generally parallel to the plane of the access opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9+,     19+, and 125.12,  for a box having a slide closure which is not
    formed by tearing.


CLS 229/221
TXT Reusable hinged closure:
    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein the reusable closure rotates
    between its open and closed positions about an axis (usually a fold line).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125.08+ and 126+, for other boxes having hinged closures not formed by
    tearing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 334+ for a container not classifiable
    elsewhere having a hinged closure.


CLS 229/222
TXT Reusable hinged closure includes interlocking closure flaps hingedly
    attached to opposite box walls:Subject matter under subclass 221 wherein
    the reusable closure includes two segments of box material which are
    foldably attached to opposing box walls and which can be physically
    interconnected in such a manner that movement of each is constrained by the
    other, even in the absence of a bond or a separate fastener.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155+,   for a box having interlocking closure flaps not formed by tearing.


CLS 229/223
TXT Reusable hinged closure provides an access opening which is coextensive
    with the entire top wall of the box:Subject matter under subclass 221
    wherein the reusable closure includes all of the uppermost wall of the box.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    for a reusable closure in a box sidewall wherein the access opening
    formed by tearing open the box to provide the reusable closure is the same
    size as the sidewall of the box.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 334+ for a container not classifiable
    elsewhere having a hinged closure.


CLS 229/224
TXT Reusable hinged closure includes three depending flanges or tabs:Subject
    matter under subclass 223 wherein the reusable closure includes three
    downwardly extending segments of box material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141+,   for a box with a closure flap having one or more depending flanges
    or tabs which are not formed by tearing.

    125.19, for a separate closure having one or more depending flanges or tabs
    which are not formed by tearing.


CLS 229/225
TXT Each flange or tab is detachably secured to a sidewall prior to
    tearing:Subject matter under subclass 224 wherein each flange or tab is
    removably attached to an upwardly extending box wall before the box is torn
    open.

    (1)     Note. The flanges or tabs may be unitary parts of the box walls, or
    they may be separate from the box walls, but adhered to them.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160.1,  for a hinged closure which includes material cut from a box
    sidewall.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 264 for a cigarette
    container with tearing means.


CLS 229/226
TXT Including a segment of box material bonded to a sidewall and severably
    attached to a flange or tab prior to tearing: Subject matter under subclass
    225 wherein an extension of at least one flange or tab secured to a box
    sidewall and separated from the flange or tab by at least one tear line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 264 for a cigarette
    container with tearing means.


CLS 229/227
TXT Segment severably attached via a removable strip of box material (i.e.,
    tear strip):Subject matter under subclass 226 wherein the segment is
    separated from flange or tab by two spaced-apart lines of weakening which
    define section of box material which is torn off when the box is opened.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 264 for a cigarette
    container with tearing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101.1,  for plural, parallel tear strips removable to sequentially reduce
    the box volume.

    235,    for a tear strip which completely encompasses the box.

    240,    for a nonreclosable box which is opened by completely removing a
    tear strip.


CLS 229/228
TXT Only one of the flanges or tabs is detachably secured to a sidewall prior
    to tearing:Subject matter under subclass 224 wherein only one of the
    downwardly extending segments of box material is attached to a sidewall
    before the box is opened.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 264 for a cigarette
    container with tearing means.


CLS 229/229
TXT Reusable hinged closure provides an access opening which is coextensive
    with only a portion of the top wall:Subject matter under subclass 221
    wherein the access opening formed by tearing open the box to provide the
    reusable closure is smaller than the top wall of the box.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131,    for similar closure structure not formed by tearing.


CLS 229/230
TXT Hinge line located in a sidewall and spaced from the top wall:Subject
    matter under subclass 229 wherein the axis of rotation of the reusable
    closure is located in an upwardly extending box wall and below the top wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146,    for similar closure structure without severing means.


CLS 229/231
TXT Reusable hinged closure includes two or more downwardly depending tabs or
    flanges:Subject matter under subclass 229 wherein the reusable closure
    includes at least two downwardly extending segments of box material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131,    for similar closure structure not formed by tearing.

    160.1,  for similar closure structure formed by cutting material from box
    sidewalls.


CLS 229/232
TXT Reusable hinged closure includes only one depending tab or flange:Subject
    matter under subclass 229 wherein the reusable hinged closure includes only
    one downwardly extending segment of box material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131,    for similar closure structure not formed by tearing.


CLS 229/233
TXT Reusable hinged closure includes bonded segments of two overlapped flaps
    which are attached to the sidewalls by fold lines prior to tearing (e.g.,
    plug-type):Subject matter under subclass 232 wherein the reusable hinged
    closure includes adhered portions of two segments of box material which are
    hingedly attached to two upwardly extending box walls before the box is
    torn open.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241,    for a nonreclosable box having a removable tear strip which
    includes bonded segments of overlapped closure flaps.


CLS 229/234
TXT Reusable hinged closure includes bonded segments of two overlapped flaps
    which are attached to the sidewalls by fold lines prior to tearing (e.g.,
    plug-type):Subject matter under subclass 229 wherein the closure includes
    adhered portions of box wall extensions which are hingedly attached to two
    upwardly extending box walls before the box is torn open.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241,    for a nonreclosable box having a removable tear strip which
    includes bonded segments of overlapped closure flaps.


CLS 229/235
TXT Tearing means completely encompasses the box (i.e., the box is in two parts
    after it is torn open):Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the means
    which facilitates or enables severing of box material extends around the
    entire periphery of the box.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120.011,        for a plurality of boxes separably attached.


CLS 229/236
TXT Tearing allows box to unfold to generally planar form:
    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein severing of the box material
    permits the box sidewall to be unfolded to lie in the same plane as the
    bottom wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117.01+, for a box collapsible along one or more    supplemental fold lines
    but without            tearing.


CLS 229/237
TXT Specified detail of a score or perforation (e.g., size, spacing,
    etc.):Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein a claim recites a
    particular characteristic of a component part of a line of weakness (i.e. a
    slit or groove which extends only part way through the box material or a
    slit or aperture which extends completely through the box material).

    (1)     Note. The "particular characteristic" may be the depth of a score
    line (i.e., slit or groove); the size of the slit, groove, or aperture; the
    spacing between them, etc.


CLS 229/238
TXT Box includes a separate tearing element which is gripped and pulled to open
    the box:Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the tearing means
    includes a member which is not of one-piece construction with the box but
    is attached to it and is manually grasped and drawn away from the box
    during tearing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    309+,   for an envelope which is openable by pulling a separate tearing
    element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 254+ for a bottle or jar closure which
    is openable by pulling a separate tearing element.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 279+ for a closure which is opened by
    pulling a separate tearing element.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 205 for a bag which is openable by
    pulling a separate tearing element.


CLS 229/239
TXT Thread, string, cord, or wire:
    Subject matter under subclass 238 wherein the separate tearing element is a
    slender, flexible, filament-like element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    311,    for an envelope having a thread, string, cord or wire for tearing
    it open.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclass 257 for a bottle or jar closure having a
    wire or string rip cord.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 279+ for a closure having a thread, string,
    cord, or wire for tearing it open.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 206 for a flexible bag having a cord,
    string, wire, or thread for tearing it open.


CLS 229/240
TXT Nonreclosable box having a section of box material which is completely
    separated from the box during tearing (e.g., tear strip):Subject matter
    under subclass 200 wherein the box is torn open by totally removing a
    portion of box material and is not intended to be reclosed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101.1,  for a box having plural, parallel tear strips for sequentially
    reducing the box volume.

    230,    for a reusable closure formed by removing a tear strip.

    243,    for a nonreusable box having means to open it without completely
    removing box material.


CLS 229/241
TXT Separated section includes bonded segments of two overlapped closure
    flaps:Subject matter under subclass 240 wherein the  separated section
    includes portions of two box wall extensions which have been secured
    together in overlying relationship to initially close the box.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    234,    for a box having a reusable closure which includes bonded segments
    of overlapped closure flaps.


CLS 229/242
TXT Tearing forms an access opening bounded by entire torn edge:Subject matter
    under subclass 240 wherein the edge of the access opening includes all of
    the torn edge of box material.


CLS 229/243
TXT Nonreclosable box includes means for tearing it open without completely
    removing box material:Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the box
    includes means which facilitates or enables the box to be opened by
    severing box material but without completely detaching the severed material
    from the box.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240,    for a nonreclosable box which is opened by completely removing
    severed material.


CLS 229/244
TXT Including a line of weakness in a closure flap:
    Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein the severing means includes a
    line of reduced strength located in a box wall extension which is used to
    initially close the box.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241,    for a removable tear strip which includes bonded segments of two
    overlapped closure flaps.


CLS 229/245
TXT Releasable or frangible bond between box parts provides means for opening
    the box (e.g., peel  seal):Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein at
    least two segments of box material are secured together by a peelable or
    frangible adhering means (e.g., glue, heat seal, etc.) so that the segments
    may be easily separated, without tearing box material to gain access to the
    contents of the box.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80.5,   for an envelope having a releasable or frangible bond.

    123.1,  for a box having a separate, peelable closure or securing element.

    208,    for a box having means for stripping away a surface portion of a
    layer of box material by tearing only part way through its thickness.

    212,    for a box having tearing means which provides a hinged closure,
    which closure is releasably or frangibly bonded in place prior to tearing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 359 for a removable closure retained by
    adhesive or fusion means.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 210+ for a bag having a releasable or
    frangible bond.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 40.1+ for a
    composite sheet having one layer removable to expose adhesive, subclass 202
    for a structurally defined web or sheet having an outer strippable or
    release layer, and subclass 352 for a sheet coated with adhesive and having
    a release or anti-stick coating.


CLS 229/246
TXT Including means for reducing the effectiveness of the bonding material
    (e.g., adhesive repellent, "resist" material, etc.):Subject matter under
    subclass 245 wherein one or more of the box parts include one or more areas
    coated with material which diminishes the strength of the connection
    between those parts.


CLS 229/247
TXT Reusable closure:
    Subject matter under subclass 245 wherein opening the box by separating the
    releasably bonded parts frees a portion of the box to be used to reclose
    the box.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210+,   for a box having a reusable closure formed by tearing box material.


CLS 229/248
TXT Pour spout:
    Subject matter under subclass 247 wherein the reusable closure is disclosed
    as being used to guide the flow of contents when they are poured or dumped
    from the box.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125.04, for a separate box closure having a secondary use as a pour spout.

    214,    for a pour spout formed by tearing a gable-top box.

    215,    for a pour spout formed by tearing a nongable-top box.


CLS 229/249
TXT Gable-top box (e.g., milk carton):
    Subject matter under subclass 248 wherein two opposing sides of the
    receptacle terminate in upwardly and inwardly extending portions which meet
    to form triangles which face two other opposing sides of the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    214,    for a spout formed by tearing a gable-top receptacle.


CLS 229/300
TXT Including remailing means (e.g., envelope, postcard, address label,
    etc.):Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein the envelope is provided
    with structure which is part of the envelope, attached to the envelope, or
    inside the envelope and which is usable to remail the entire envelope, part
    of the envelope, an insert, or another envelope.


CLS 229/301
TXT Remailable envelope:
    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein the remailing means is an
    envelope.

    (1)     Note. The remailable envelope may include all or part of the
    original envelope, or it may be a completely separate envelope which was
    initially mailed inside the original envelope.


CLS 229/302
TXT Having original and remail closure flaps attached to opposite walls of the
    original envelope:Subject matter under subclass 301 wherein the original
    envelope includes a first closure flap attached to one wall for sealing the
    envelope during the original mailing and a second closure flap attached to
    an opposed wall for sealing the envelope when it is remailed.


CLS 229/303
TXT Including an address window:
    Subject matter under subclass 301 wherein either the original envelope or
    the remailable envelope includes an opening for displaying an address.


CLS 229/304
TXT Including means for removing the window- containing portion of an
    envelope:Subject matter under subclass 303 wherein the envelope which has
    the address window includes means (e.g., perforations) for separating the
    window containing portion from the rest of the envelope.


CLS 229/305
TXT Including means for removing at least part of the original mailing address
    from the original envelope:Subject matter under subclass 301 wherein the
    original envelope includes a modification which permits separation of a
    portion of the original address from the original envelope.


CLS 229/306
TXT Including means for concealing at least part of the original mailing
    address when remailed (e.g., reversible  envelope):Subject matter under
    subclass 301 wherein the original envelope includes means which permit it
    to be modified for use as a remailable envelope by hiding at least some of
    the original address from view.


CLS 229/307
TXT Having means to facilitate opening the envelope by severing it (e.g.,
    tearing, cutting, piercing, etc.):Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein
    the envelope includes means which enables splitting of the envelope
    material to gain access to the envelope interior to insert or remove
    content.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 200+ for a bag with severing means.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 43 for a sheet,
    web or layer which has been weakened to facilitate tearing and subclasses
    131+, particularly subclass 136, for sheet  material having slits or
    apertures.


CLS 229/308
TXT Combined with, or modified for opening by, a sharp-edged cutting implement
    or a piercing implement:Subject matter under subclass 307 wherein the
    envelope is combined with, or modified for opening by, an instrument having
    a keen edge or a fine point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204,    for a box combined with, or modified for opening by, a sharp-edged
    cutting implement or a piercing implement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, for a cutting implement, per se.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 202 for a bag combined with, or modified
    for opening by, a sharped-edged cutting implement or a piercing implement.


CLS 229/309
TXT Envelope includes a separate tearing element which is gripped and pulled to
    open the envelope:Subject matter under subclass 307 wherein the opening
    means includes a member which is not of one-piece construction with the
    envelope but is attached to it and is manually grasped and drawn away from
    the envelope during tearing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238+,   for a box which is openable by pulling a separate tearing element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 254+ for a bottle or jar closure which
    is opened by pulling a separate tearing element.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 279+ for a closure which is opened by
    pulling a separate tearing element.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 205 for a bag which is openable by pulling
    a separate tearing element.


CLS 229/310
TXT Gripped portion of tearing element secured to envelope exterior:Subject
    matter under subclass 309 wherein the portion of the tearing element that
    is grasped during the tearing process is attached to the outer side of the
    envelope.


CLS 229/311
TXT Cord, string, wire, or thread:
    Subject matter under subclass 309 wherein the separate tearing element is a
    slender, flexible, filament-like element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239,    for a box having a cord, string, thread, or wire for tearing it
    open.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclass 257 for a bottle or jar closure having a
    wire or string rip cord.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 279+ for a closure having a thread, string,
    cord, or wire for tearing it open.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 206 for a flexible bag having a cord,
    string, wire, or thread for tearing it open.


CLS 229/312
TXT Extends along envelope side edge:
    Subject matter under subclass 311 wherein the cord, string, wire, or thread
    is positioned at a lateral margin of the envelope.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    316,    for an envelope having a line of weakness in a similar location.


CLS 229/313
TXT Line of weakness:
    Subject matter under subclass 307 wherein the opening means includes a line
    of reduced strength.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 207+ for a flexible bag having a line of
    weakness for tearing.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 43 for a sheet,
    web or layer which has been weakened to facilitate tearing and subclasses
    131+, particularly subclass 136, for sheet material having slits or
    apertures.


CLS 229/314
TXT Lines of weakness in opposed walls form removable envelope portion:Subject
    matter under subclass 313 wherein two walls which are on opposite sides of
    the envelope include lines of reduced strength which cooperate to provide
    an envelope section which can be completely separated from the remainder of
    the envelope by tearing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301+,   for similar tear line structure which forms a remailable envelope
    when torn.


CLS 229/315
TXT Including means to prevent contents from extending into the removable
    portion:Subject matter under subclass 314 wherein the envelope includes a
    modification which keeps the envelope contents completely within the
    remainder of the envelope prior to the removable envelope portion being
    separated from the remainder.


CLS 229/316
TXT Line of weakness extends along or adjacent envelope side edge:Subject
    matter under subclass 313 wherein the line of reduced strength is located
    at or near, and is generally parallel with, a lateral margin of the
    envelope.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312,    for a cord, string, wire, or thread similarly located.


CLS 229/400
TXT PAPER OR PAPERBOARD CUP:

    Receptacle under the class definition comprising a small hand-held paper or
    paperboard container having curved wall structure and intended to be used
    as a drinking utensil or to hold food.

    (1)     Note.  A cup is normally used to hold food such as a beverage,
    nuts, ice cream, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.5,    for a paperboard box having a cylindrical or conical wall structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, appropriate subclasses for a plastic or styrofoam cup,
    particularly subclasses 703+ for a cup including an attachment-like
    structure intended to aid in the consumption of liquid contents.


CLS 229/401
TXT With attached spoon:

    Cup under subclass 400 combined with a connected eating utensil having a
    handle and a small depression for scooping.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, particularly subclasses 324+ for a spoon, per se.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 541+ for a camp or
    lunch-type assemblage.


CLS 229/402
TXT Including handle:

    Cup under subclass 400 including structure intended to aid in manually
    holding the cup.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117.09+, for a paperboard box including a handle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 6+ for a flexible bag including a handle.


CLS 229/403
TXT Insulated:

    Cup under subclass 400 wherein the cup includes structure intended to
    reduce heat transfer through the cup wall.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 110 for a flexible bag including insulated
    wall structure.


CLS 229/404
TXT Including closure:

    Cup under subclass 400 including structure intended to obstruct the passage
    of material into or out of the cup.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125.01+ for a nonunitary box closure and 125.17 for a plug-type closure.


CLS 229/405
TXT Collapsible cup:

    Cup under subclass 400 including means which permit the cup to assume a
    configuration of reduced dimension or to be compressed into a compact form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117.01+ for a paperboard box that is collapsible along a supplemental fold
    line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 666 for a receptacle of that class type
    including a collapsible sidewall.


CLS 229/406
TXT MOLDED OR PRESSED CONTAINER:

    Receptacle under the class definition wherein the receptacle is 1) shaped
    while in a plastic or molten state or 2) compressed into a particular form
    or shape.

    (1)     Note.  Mere folding into a shape is not proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.8,    for a pressed bottom or top for a cylindrical or conical box.

    100+,   for a folded paperboard box.


CLS 229/407
TXT Tray-type:

    Receptacle under subclass 406 comprising a generally flat shallow container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 557+ for a tray-type
    receptacle of that class type.

    426,    Food or Edible Material: Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclass 129 for packaged or wrapped meat.


CLS 229/800
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition not provided for elsewhere.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 229/900
TXT INCLUDING MEANS TO FACILITATE HANDLING BY A MECHANICAL APPARATUS DURING
    MANUFACTURING OR FILLING:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the box includes
    structure which enhances the ability of a machine to engage or manipulate
    the box during the making, set up, or insertion of contents into the box.


CLS 229/901
TXT BOX STRUCTURE ALTERNATIVELY USEABLE AS A CONTAINER OR A LID:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a box element is
    disclosed as being usable either as a content-holding device or as a
    closure for a container.


CLS 229/902
TXT BOX FOR PREPARED OR PROCESSED FOOD:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the box is used to hold
    matter intended to be consumed by animals.


CLS 229/903
TXT Ovenable (i.e., disclosed to be placed in an oven):

    Subject matter under subclass 902 wherein the box is used for holding food
    in an oven during the heating process.


CLS 229/904
TXT Compartmented fast food holder or lap tray:

    Subject matter under subclass 902 wherein the box has a partition of
    similar structure which defines separate areas into which foods or
    beverages can be placed, usually for ease of transporting the food or
    supporting it on the lap of a user.


CLS 229/904.1
TXT Candy:

    Subject matter under subclass 902 wherein the food is confectionery.


CLS 229/905
TXT Frozen food:

    Subject matter under subclass 902 wherein the box is for the reception of
    food which has been or will subsequently be frozen.


CLS 229/906
TXT Baked goods:

    Subject matter under subclass 902 wherein the box is for the reception of
    food which has been prepared by heating it in an oven.


CLS 229/906.1
TXT CUP LID WITH MEANS FOR FORMING A DRINKING OPENING:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a closure for a
    drinking cup, the closure including means for forming a drinking aperture
    therein.

    (1)     Note.  A drinking opening may be a slit or aperture through which a
    drinking straw is to be inserted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 703+ for drinking cup attachments (e.g.,
    mustache guards).


CLS 229/907
TXT TRASH BOX:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the box is used to
    receive discarded items.


CLS 229/908
TXT PAINT TRAY:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the box is used to hold
    paint and receive a roller-type applicator.


CLS 229/909
TXT CIGAR BOX:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the box is used to hold
    cigars.


CLS 229/910
TXT BUCKET OR PAIL TYPE (I.E., LIQUID PROOF CONTAINER WITH HANDLE):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the construction of a box
    provides structure which prevents the escape of liquid or semi-liquid
    content, and which includes a handle which is attached to opposite sides of
    the box and extends over the box mouth.


CLS 229/911
TXT With closure:

    Subject matter under subclass 910 wherein the box includes means for
    blocking the insertion or removal of content through the box access opening.


CLS 229/912
TXT Separate element:

    Subject matter under subclass 911 wherein the closure includes an element
    which is not a unitary part of the box material.


CLS 229/913
TXT DRAWER-TYPE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the box is disclosed as
    being a drawer for use with a cabinet or other similar structure.


CLS 229/914
TXT BASKET-TYPE WITH HANDLE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the box is a generally
    rectangular, relatively shallow container having rounded corners, and also
    having an inverted U-shaped handle which extends over the top of the box
    and is centrally attached to two opposite sides of the box.


CLS 229/915
TXT STACKING FEATURE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the box includes means
    for enhancing its containing function while in a stack.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 503+ for a container
    which is specifically configured to engage a superposed container to
    enhance the stability of the piled containers.


CLS 229/915.1
TXT Gable-top box:

    Subject matter under subclass 915 including means to enhance the
    stackability of a gable-top box (i.e., a box having two opposing sides
    which terminate in upwardly and inwardly extending portions which meet to
    form triangles which face two other opposing sides of the box).

    (1)     Note.  The means to enhance stackability usually results in
    flattening the gable-top of the box.


CLS 229/916
TXT Means for ventilating while stacked:

    Subject matter under subclass 915 wherein the box includes means which
    facilitates the circulation of air either through it or between it and
    another adjacent stacked box or boxes while in a stacked configuration.


CLS 229/917
TXT Stacking of collapsed container or blank:

    Subject matter under subclass 915 wherein the box includes means which
    facilitate its stacking while it is in either blank form or collapsed
    configuration.


CLS 229/918
TXT Corner construction:

    Subject matter under subclass 915 wherein the structure of the corners of
    the box enhances its stackability, usually by the inclusion or
    strengthening means which support the load of the stack.


CLS 229/919
TXT Reinforced wall:

    Subject matter under subclass 915 wherein one or more of the box walls
    includes a strengthening means to prevent buckling while in a stack.


CLS 229/920
TXT STRESS RELIEF:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the box includes means
    for preventing strains from occurring or means for distributing strains to
    prevent tearing of the box material.


CLS 229/921
TXT WITH MAILING INDICIA:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the box includes means
    for enhancing its appearance.


CLS 229/922
TXT WITH DECORATIVE FEATURE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the box includes markings
    which facilitate its being sent through the mail.


CLS 229/923
TXT Gift wrapped:

    Subject matter under subclass 922 wherein the decorative feature is an
    outer covering of sheet material and/or a ribbon or bow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87.18,  for a wrapper, per se, for a paperboard box, and subclass 87.19 for
    a gift wrapping, per se, for a paperboard box.


CLS 229/924
TXT MEANS TO FACILITATE GRIPPING A TEAR STRIP:
    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a receptacle having a
    tear strip which includes structure which makes it easier to grasp.


CLS 229/925
TXT Finger opening (e.g., slit, aperture, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 924 wherein the means to facilitate gripping
    is an aperture that is large enough to receive at least one finger.


CLS 229/926
TXT Pull tab located in a seam:
    Subject matter under subclass 924 wherein the means to facilitate gripping
    is a small projection which is positioned  within a joint of a receptacle.


CLS 229/927
TXT MEANS FOR TEARING OR BREAKING RIGID OR SEMIRIGID THERMOPLASTIC
    CONTAINER:Subject matter under the class definition wherein a receptacle
    made of relatively stiff thermoplastic material includes a modification
    which facilitates forcibly separating the receptacle material to open it.


CLS 229/928
TXT EXPANDABLE ENVELOPE:
    Envelope under the class definition including means to adjust its size.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.5,    for a file folder.

    101+,   for a variable volume paperboard box.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 2 for a bag having a selectively adjustable
    volume and subclass 120 for a bag having a pleat or gusset.


CLS 229/929
TXT VENTED ENVELOPE:
    Envelope under the class definition including means to facilitate or enable
    entrapped air to escape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for a paperboard box having venting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 100+ for a bag having venting means.


CLS 229/930
TXT FOLD DETAIL:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a particular physical
    characteristic or structure of a receptacle crease is claimed.


CLS 229/931
TXT Fold includes slit or aperture:
    Subject matter under subclass 930 wherein the fold is characterized by one
    or more cuts or openings in the receptacle material.


CLS 229/932
TXT ICE CREAM CONE CARRIER:
    Subject matter under the class definition including structure intended to
    facilitate transporting one or more ice cream cones.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 562+ for a tray-type
    special receptacle having an aperture for an article and subclass 589 for a
    shock protection-type special receptacle having plural apertures for plural
    articles.


CLS 229/933
TXT MATING CONTAINER BLANKS:
    Subject matter under the class definition comprising two or more blanks of
    stock material which are used to form one or more receptacles and are
    relatively positioned to make optimal use of the stock material and to
    minimize waste.


CLS 229/934
TXT Compartmented bottle carrier:
    Blanks under subclass 933 configured so that when erected they form a
    partitioned container to transport bottle-type receptacles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 139+ and 427+ for a
    carrier for plural beverage-type receptacles.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses 19+ for a compartmented wooden
    bottle crate.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 509+ for a compartmented bottle case and
    Digest 15 for a collection of plastic crates for bottles.


CLS 229/935
TXT No waste (i.e., edge-to-edge blanks):
    Blanks under subclass 933 located edge-to-edge and configured to totally
    eliminate leftover stock material.


CLS 229/936
TXT Three or more blanks with alternating orientations:
    Blanks under subclass 933 comprising three or more blanks which are
    delineated in series on the stock material such that every other blank in
    the series is facing in the same direction and adjacent blanks are facing
    in a different direction.


CLS 229/937
TXT Plural blanks for making a single container:
    Blanks under subclass 933 wherein at least two blanks are needed to make a
    single receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23+,    for a paperboard box made from plural blanks.


CLS 229/938
TXT SANDWICH HOLDER:
    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a receptacle having
    structure which is intended to support or grip a edible product comprising
    plural slices or surfaces of bread or a bread-like substance with an edible
    filling (e.g., peanut butter, jelly, meat, cheese, fish, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    426,    Food or Edible Material: Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 106+ for a packaged food product.


CLS 229/939
TXT CONTAINER MADE OF CORRUGATED PAPER OR PAPERBOARD:
    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a receptacle made of
    paper or paperboard which has parallel ridges and grooves forming a wavy
    surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 438, 440, and 441+ for a container with
    multilayer barrier structure including at least one corrugated layer.


CLS 229/940
TXT CONTAINER MATERIAL WITH SPECIFIED GRAIN DIRECTION:
    Paperboard box under the class definition made from paper or paperboard
    material which has a particular fiber orientation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.5+,   for a box made from a particular material.

    205,    for a paperboard box with a tearing opening means facilitated by
    specified fiber or molecular orientation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 908 for a bag made from material having a
    specified grain direction.


CLS 231/
TTL WHIPS AND WHIP APPARATUS

CLS 231/
TXT This class includes apparatus peculiar to the manufacture of whips and also
    novel forms of whips.


CLS 231/1
TXT Machines peculiar to whip manufacture, mostly rolling, pressing, and
    shaping machines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclass 9 for leather splitting and skiving
    machines.

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making.


CLS 231/2.1
TXT Whip:

    Subject matter under the class definition consisting of a device having a
    handle connected to a goad or a lash, whereby selective contact of the goad
    or the lash with an animal controls the movement or behavior of the animal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 712+ for a device related to training,
    breaking or exercising a horse or other animal, and subclasses 801+ for a
    device manipulated by an attendant to catch and hold an animal.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 170+ for a whip socket attached to a
    vehicle.

    463,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 47.2+ for a striking type of
    weapon for use on a human being (e.g., a police club, billy, etc.).


CLS 231/3
TXT Whips that can be readily converted into walking-canes.


CLS 231/4
TXT Lashes or snaps for whips.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, subclass 8, and
    indented subclasses where the novelty resides in a peculiar braid or plat.


CLS 231/5
TXT Means for fastening the lash or snap to the whip stock or handle.


CLS 231/6
TXT Caps, ferrules, or buttons and whip-joints.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 18.1.

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclasses 65+ for canes, crutches
    and umbrella sticks, and tip structures therefor.


CLS 231/7
TXT Electric prod:

    Subject matter under subclass 2.1 wherein the device has a goad which is
    electrically charged and which, when placed in contact with an animal,
    causes an electric shock to be produced in the animal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 232 for
    electric charge generating or conducting means specifically designed to
    provide an electric shock to a living being.  Combinations of subject
    matter in Class 361, subclass 232, with a specifically claimed art device
    are classified with the art device.  If the art device is not provided for
    or is recited by name only (see class definition of Class 361) the
    combination is classified in Class 361.

    463,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 47.3 for a striking type of
    weapon for use on a human being which includes an electric shock feature
    (e.g., an electric prod used by police, etc.).

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclass 1
    for an electric chair for applying electricity to the human body including
    those for electrocution purposes and subclass 115 for miscellaneous devices
    for applying electricity to the human body.


CLS 232/
TTL DEPOSIT AND COLLECTION  RECEPTACLES

CLS 232/
TXT The general characteristics of the types of receivers here included are
    that they are emptied through openings different from those through which
    they are filled, that they receive at intervals and are emptied or
    discharged in bulk, and that they are intended to be filled and emptied by
    different persons.  These need not all be present in each case.

    (1)     Note.  Deposit and collection safes will be found in Class 109,
    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, in the appropriate subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, appropriate subclasses, for closures
    of the type provided for and see the search notes thereto in section IV for
    the loci of closures in other classes.

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 200 and indented subclasses and the notes
    thereto for receptacle closures in general.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses and see the search
    classes listed for the distribution of article dispensing art in general.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses and see the search classes
    listed for distribution of fluent material dispensing art in general.


CLS 232/1
TXT Deposit and collection receptacles under the class definition not otherwise
    classifiable.


CLS 232/2
TXT Receptacles under the class definition for tickets or tokens to represent
    the votes cast.


CLS 232/3
TXT The tokens under subclass 2 used are in the form of balls.


CLS 232/4
TXT Miscellaneous money boxes or banks under the class definition in which the
    money is inserted through a slot or other small opening.  They are
    portable, but as distinguished from portable fare boxes, are not provided
    with such handles as facilitate their presentation to others by the holder
    for coin insertion.

    (1)     Note.  When the box is essentially a toy, as by reason of an
    amusement feature, it is classified in Class 446, Amusement Devices:  Toys,
    subclasses 8+.


CLS 232/5
TXT Wherein the construction or material under subclass 4 permits examination
    of the contents without opening the box.


CLS 232/6
TXT Subject matter under subclass 4 wherein the inventions modify the box
    structure to provide retaining means for the several parts.


CLS 232/7
TXT Receivers under the class definition for tickets, coins, or tokens which
    represent the fare and which are inserted through a slot or other small
    opening.  This subclass contains such fare-boxes as are not otherwise
    herein classified.

    (1)     Note.  Where the term "coin" is used hereinafter, it is intended to
    refer also, when suitable, to tickets or other tokens.


CLS 232/8
TXT Wherein the tickets under subclass 7 are mutilated as they are introduced
    into the device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 167 for a severing apparatus provided with a
    container or platform to receive the product pieces.


CLS 232/9
TXT Receptacles under subclass 7 wherein a series of slots permits insertion of
    coins at any one of a number of points into a common runaway.


CLS 232/10
TXT Wherein the boxes under subclass 7 are subdivided to hold tickets and money.


CLS 232/11
TXT Wherein the ticket holders under subclass 7 are attached to the car or seat
    frame and are particularly adapted for car use.


CLS 232/12
TXT Inventions under subclass 7 relating to the boxes, bags, etc., in which the
    coins are held pending collection.


CLS 232/13
TXT Wherein a portion of the box under subclass 7 is artificially lighted.


CLS 232/14
TXT Devices under subclass 7 in the form of gates permit the passenger to
    secure change or tickets from the driver.


CLS 232/15
TXT The receptacle can not be removed from the box without closing one or both
    of these parts, the contents of which are then not accessible to the
    carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
    31.


CLS 232/16
TXT The collection device under subclass 15 does not here receive or hold the
    coins in the first place, but is independent of and separable from the
    storage compartment of the fare-box and is used for the removal of the
    contents of this compartment at intervals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
    32.


CLS 232/17
TXT The boxes under the class definition receive and hold mail matter either
    awaiting collection by the carrier or which has been delivered by him.

    (1)     Note.  Letter boxes and compartments such as are used in post
    offices are classified in Class 211, Supports:  Racks, subclass 10.


CLS 232/18
TXT Subject matter under subclass 17 wherein these are checks upon the time,
    order, or fact of collection and are obtained by registry or record.


CLS 232/19
TXT Boxes under subclass 17 which are specially adapted to house use by reason
    of some other feature than that of an attached signal or alarm.  This other
    feature may be a pivoted body or other means permitting access from either
    side or a chute for mail delivery into the house, etc.


CLS 232/20
TXT Boxes under subclass 19 specially arranged to deliver outgoing mail as well
    as to receive incoming mail.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
    14      and 27.


CLS 232/21
TXT The receiver under subclass 20 for the outgoing mail is separate from the
    receiver or chute for the incoming mail.


CLS 232/22
TXT The jambs under subclass 19 cooperate with the boxes or fastenings
    therefor, so that access to the boxes can be had when the house doors or
    windows are open, and then only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
    42.


CLS 232/23
TXT Subject matter under subclass 19 wherein the release of the doors upon the
    outer side of the boxes is controlled by means within the house.


CLS 232/24
TXT Separate compartments under subclass 17 wherein are provided for different
    classes of mail or for that intended for different persons.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
    21.


CLS 232/25
TXT Wherein the same closure or cooperating closures under subclass 24 govern
    the opening or openings to the several compartments.


CLS 232/26
TXT Wherein a single entrance or discharge opening under subclass 25 is used
    for all the compartments by relative movement of the compartments and
    opening or by guides connecting at will with any compartment.


CLS 232/27
TXT Boxes under subclass 17 having provision for outgoing mail in addition to
    or in connection with the receptacle for the incoming mail.

    (1)     Note.  Where a separate compartment is provided, the invention is
    classified in this class, subclass 21, or subclass 24, and indented
    subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
    20.


CLS 232/28
TXT The receivers under subclass 17 in which the mail is held, form also the
    doors of the boxes.  They are open upon the inner side, and so are
    accessible for removal of mail when the doors are opened.

    (1)     Note.  When the entire box moves, the construction is classified in
    this Class, subclass 39, and Class 248, Supports, subclass 128, and
    indented subclasses.


CLS 232/29
TXT Boxes under subclass 17 intended for use in connection with other letter
    boxes and modified for this purpose.  The usual modification consists in
    shaping them to conform to such other boxes in shape.


CLS 232/30
TXT Bags or boxes under subclass 17 in which the mail is transported from the
    letter boxes to the post offices and which cooperate with the letter boxes.
     In some cases these receptacles form the receivers of the letter boxes.


CLS 232/31
TXT Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein the construction is such that
    either the receptacle or the box bottom, or both, must be closed and locked
    before the receptacle can be removed from the box.  Usually neither of the
    parts can be unlocked by the carrier except when they are together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
    15.


CLS 232/32
TXT Wherein the letter boxes under subclass 31 themselves contain receivers in
    which the mail is stored pending collection and from which this mail is
    emptied into the auxiliary receptacles at intervals.  The auxiliary
    receptacles usually fit a number of boxes each and are carried from one to
    another, each receiving the contents of a number of boxes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
    16.


CLS 232/33
TXT Clips and open pockets under subclass 17 for holding packages attached
    either to the inside or to the outside of the box proper or independent
    thereof if they do not then themselves form complete boxes.


CLS 232/34
TXT Visual signals indicating the presence of mail in the box.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 569 for electrical automatic
    indicating systems responsive to the placement or removal or articles from
    a mailbox.


CLS 232/35
TXT The signals under subclass 34 are moved or released by the action of the
    door of the box.


CLS 232/36
TXT Alarms operated by movement of the box doors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
    14.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 545+ for electrical
    automatic door movement responsive indicating systems.


CLS 232/37
TXT Indicators moved intermittently by the action of the doors.  They are
    usually for the purpose of showing the times of the next collections.


CLS 232/38
TXT Subject matter under subclass 17 having inventions showing the details of
    frame construction and the materials used, but not special shapes are
    placed here.


CLS 232/39
TXT Letter boxes under subclass 17 combined with their supports or supports for
    letter boxes limited by structure to use with a letter box.

    (1)     Note.  For mere supports for letter boxes, not limited by structure
    to use with letter boxes, see Class 248, Supports, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclass 128, and indented subclasses, and 146, and indented
    subclasses.


CLS 232/41
TXT Subject matter under the class definition having safeguards, generally
    fixed in location, which protect milk from theft after delivery or which
    protect milk receptacle from the weather.

    (1)     Note.  Inventions in the receptacle itself apart from the
    protecting means are not here included.


CLS 232/42
TXT Wherein the jambs under subclass 41 cooperate with the receptacles or
    fastenings therefor, so that access to the receptacles can be had when the
    house doors or windows are open, and then only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
    22.


CLS 232/43
TXT Wherein the milk under subclass 41 is poured in through a chute, tube, or
    funnel.


CLS 232/43.1
TXT Receptacles under the class definition having separate restricted openings
    for deposit and collection, respectively.

    (1)     Note.  "Restricted openings" include openings structurally modified
    in such a manner as to render removal of deposited material difficult or
    impossible without removal of a closure or some act other than mere gravity
    flow (through an open outlet) or dumping.  Receptacles having unrestricted
    open tops for receiving material are specifically excluded and are to be
    found in the appropriate receptacle class.

    (2)     Note.  In the patents classified in subclasses 43.1+, removal
    (collection) is always from an opening other than the receiving (deposit)
    opening.

    (3)     Note.  Plural receptacles under the class definition for general
    purposes and such receptacles combined with accessory devices, except those
    specifically provided for in the subclasses indented under this subclass,
    are in subclass 1 of this class.  Where one of the plural receptacles is an
    article dispenser of the type provided for in Class 221, classification is
    in Class 221, in subclasses 92+, particular attention being directed to
    subclass 102 which provides for article dispensing devices combined with
    structure defining a separate receptacle for receiving used articles.

    (4)     Note.  Structures within the scope of the definition of this
    subclass are classified in subclasses 2 to 43 of this class when the
    function disclosed is in accordance with the definitions of such
    subclasses.  Accordingly, any search made in subclasses 43.1+ should be
    completed by search in appropriate preceding subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 200+, for container closures.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 481+, for dispensing containers having
    plural openings and closures therefor.  Also subclass 544 for dispensing
    containers having flow controllers or closures.


CLS 232/43.2
TXT Receptacles under subclass 43.1 having a removable collection chamber for
    the deposited matter.

    (1)     Note.  A terminal chamber for collecting deposited material and
    removable for dumping, is a restricted outlet opening within the definition
    of subclass 43.1.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 231+, for such receptacles combined with
    tobacco users' appliances.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 501+, for compartmented receptacles
    providing for the dumping of material from one compartment to another, as
    exemplified by the ash receiving receptacle of a smoker's stand.


CLS 232/43.3
TXT Receptacles under subclass 43.1 having structure associated with the
    receptacle or the closures thereof for moving the deposited matter within
    the receptacle. Such motion may be a mere rotation on a rotating inner
    support or a movement towards or through one of the openings.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes trap type closure structures only
    when the trap supports the deposited matter while it remains in the
    receptacle.


CLS 232/43.4
TXT Receptacles under subclass 43.1 having horizontally aligned inlet and
    outlet openings.  Various internal structures as interlocking closures,
    signals and supporting shelves are included.  This subclass includes door
    service cabinets and wall panel type deposit and collection receptacles but
    is not limited thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 27+ for a residual
    specific building structure combined with a disparate article or a support
    thereof, particularly subclass 36.4 for such structure and a shelf.


CLS 232/43.5
TXT Receptacles under subclass 43.1 having means to support the receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  Patents disclosing and claiming supporting means and falling
    within the definitions of subclasses preceding and coordinate with this
    subclass have been cross-referenced here when the disclosure includes a
    significant relationship between such supporting means and other receptacle
    structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 173+, for dispensing containers having
    support structures.

    248,    Supports, in appropriate subclasses, for support structure, per se.


CLS 232/44
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein constructions of the
    passages, traps, or chutes through which letters, packages, coins or tokens
    pass between the point of insertion and the receiving box. There are
    included also covers, flaps, and doors for the inlet and outlet openings,
    operating means for these or for the traps, and body construction in so far
    as it forms the chute or permits inspection of the same.

    (1)     Note.  Complete this search in Class 109, Safes, Bank Protection,
    or a Related Device, subclass 66.


CLS 232/45
TXT Inventions under subclass 44 particularly adapted to letter box use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
    36.


CLS 232/46
TXT The nameplate under subclass 45 is so formed as to combine therewith a mail
    chute.  The plate usually forms the cover of the chute.


CLS 232/47
TXT A pivoted plate, pocket, or other holder under subclass 45 receives the
    mail and by its movement causes or permits the passage of such mail into
    the body of the box.  The flap or door usually cooperates with the trap to
    prevent unauthorized access to the contents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
    57.


CLS 232/48
TXT The closing means under subclass 47 consists of two cooperating traps, each
    covering a part (usually half) of the opening.


CLS 232/49
TXT The trap under subclass 47 incloses or partly incloses the mail matter.


CLS 232/50
TXT Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein these pockets are themselves in
    the nature of chutes.  The cylindrical casing within which they turn acts
    as a bottom or end during a portion of the movement.  One end is sometimes
    closed; but in that case the mail is not supported by this end.


CLS 232/51
TXT The door under subclass 49 is rigid with the pocket.


CLS 232/52
TXT The trap under subclass 47 is in the form of a turnstile.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
    61.


CLS 232/53
TXT Subject matter under subclass 45 having constructions of the door or bottom
    intended to facilitate the withdrawal of mail matter from the box.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
    15,     16 and 30, and indented subclasses.


CLS 232/54
TXT Points or sharp edged strips under subclass 45 project into the chute,
    guiding the mail matter and preventing its abstraction through the chute
    mouth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
    63.


CLS 232/55
TXT Traps under subclass 44 are movable rests, stops, or holders which
    temporarily retain coins, etc., within the chute and which by their
    movement discharge the coins upon another trap or into the receiver.


CLS 232/56
TXT The carrier under subclass 55 is in the form of an endless belt.


CLS 232/57
TXT The trap under subclass 55 turns upon a upon a pivot.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
    47.


CLS 232/57.5
TXT A pivoted member under subclass 57 is so arranged that the coin may be
    directed either to the cash box or to a refunding opening.  These devices
    are used frequently in telephone toll boxes.


CLS 232/58
TXT The operation of the trap under subclass 57 causes or is coincident with
    the closing of the chute.


CLS 232/59
TXT Two or more traps under subclass 58 form the cooperating means of closing
    the chute.  They may act together or in any predetermined order.


CLS 232/60
TXT The traps under subclass 57 move intermittently in the same direction to
    bring successive portions under the chute.


CLS 232/61
TXT The rotatable part under subclass 60 is in the form of a turnstile.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
    52.


CLS 232/62
TXT Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein removal of the contents by
    reversal of a receptacle is prevented by a gravity-actuated closure or by
    the action of a gravity-actuated lock, catch, or release.


CLS 232/63
TXT These extend into the chute to check withdrawal of the contents of the box.
    Shelves having fraud-preventive slits or other openings in the body of the
    shelf are included here, as well as those notched at the edges.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
    54.


CLS 232/64
TXT Devices under the class definition specially designed to receive coins (as
    customer's change) and having one or more movable parts which, when moved,
    will cause delivery of the coins (usually into the customer's hand).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for such devices claimed in combination with a letter box.

    55+,    for coin traps which deliver to a second coin trap, or receiving
    box.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses .8+, for those for coins,
    including mats, trays, and other receptacles specially designed to
    facilitate the picking up of coins lying thereon or contained therein.


CLS 232/65
TXT Devices under subclass 64 in which the element that causes or controls
    delivery is mounted to tilt or swing.

    (1)     Note.  For example, in this subclass are trays mounted to be tilted
    by the customer so that the coins will slide into his hand.


CLS 232/66
TXT Devices under subclass 65 in which a swingable or tiltable element is moved
    to either form or expose and opening through which the coin is discharged.

    (1)     Note.  For example, swingable control gates or closures, trays set
    within the periphery of a counter to be tilted to a position to discharge
    below the counter, etc., are here.


CLS 234/
TTL SELECTIVE CUTTING  (E.G., PUNCHING)

CLS 234/
TXT
    I       INTRODUCTORY NOTES

    II      CLASS DEFINITION

    III     DEFINITIONS OF TERMS

    IV      SCOPE OF THE CLASS

    V       RELATIONSHIP TO OTHER CLASSES INCLUDING PER SE CUTTING OR OTHER
    TREATMENT OF WORK

    VI      RELATIONSHIP TO OTHER CLASSES INCLUDING PER SE HANDLING OR
    TREATMENT OF DATA

    VII     RELATIONSHIP TO OTHER MATERIAL HANDLING CLASSES

    I       INTRODUCTORY NOTES

    This is a restricted class for the art of selective cutting as defined in
    section II.  For placement of a patent as an original in this class, the
    claimed subject matter should meet the minimum requirements of the class
    definition, and should not extend beyond the general boundaries expressed
    in sections  IV-VII, which concern mainly the combination of selective
    cutting with other subject matter elsewhere classified.

    A number of terms currently used in the art have been selected for
    definition in the Definitions of Terms (section III), and will be
    identified by an asterisk (*) hereinafter.

    The accompanying diagrams represent simple embodiments of the various
    concepts treated.  The elements most commonly found in such mechanisms are
    uniformly designated in the diagrams as follows:

    W       workpiece* (typically a sheet or web)

    P       pattern* (typically a marked or perforated
            sheet or web)

    T       active cutting tool

    D       die, or cooperating tool

    H       tool-actuating hammer or press ram (reci-
    procable)

    I       interposer*

    K       key  (representative of a keyboard)

    Other elements necessary to the disclosures are designated, where feasible,
    by terms commonly used in the art, and are discussed in the individual
    diagram notes.  Where only a single tool of a selective cutting device is
    shown, it is to be taken as representative of a plurality of such tools,
    arranged in a row or as a bank (plurality of rows) in proximity to a
    workpiece.

    The placement of a patent as an original in this class will hereinafter be
    referred to as "placement".



    This class is restricted to:

    A.      That kind of cutting device which is characterized by the inclusion
    of a plurality of cutting tool pairs and an actuating power train for each
    pair (one power train may be common to all), so that power may be delivered
    to any or all pairs for any cutting cycle, and wherein each tool pair
    assembled in the machine is constantly available to be chosen for cutting
    or noncutting in any desired number or combination of pairs (from one to
    the total number available) by:

    (1)     a pattern*,

    (2)     combinational-coding-means*, or

    (3)     means not a part of the tool-actuating power train and which does
    not partake of all the movements of either tool of the pair, which pattern
    or means conditions each pair so chosen as to (a) enable, or (b) prevent, a
    cutting operation thereby when its driving power train is actuated; and to:

    B.      That type of procedure not elsewhere classified which comprises

    (1)     the step of selecting one or more cutting tool pairs from a
    constantly available plurality of tool pairs, or

    (2)     the step of utilizing a selective cutting device as defined above.

    (1)     Note.  Placement in this class requires the claimed recital of
    structure or method step set forth above.

    (2)     Note.  Figures 1, 2 and 3 illustrate approximately the minimum
    requirements for placement in this class, in the three correspondingly
    numbered categories (1, 2, 3) of the class definition.  Each figure
    indicates a plurality of independently movable tools and mechanism for
    effecting the actuation of some or all of the tools, in any desired number
    and arrangement (the number of keys, positions, tools, etc., would in
    actual practice be many times the limited number shown in the diagrams).

    Fig.    1 represents a pattern-controlled cutting device, classifiable in
    subclass 77 of this schedule, wherein pattern P acts similarly to a
    stencil, in that it blocks the effectiveness of the nonselected tools T,
    while other tools pass through holes in P and perforate the work W, upon
    downward movement of hammer or tool-head H and consequent compression of
    the springs.

    Fig.    2 represents a single form of combinational-coding, which may be
    termed "coded direct punching" (subclass 106).  Note that an individual
    tool may be actuated, at different times, as a part of several distinct
    subgroups (e.g., to perforate distinctive code symbols) in response to the
    depression of different keys; this is in contrast to the individual,
    independent key linkages indicated in the nonselective device of Fig. 6,
    wherein a given tool responds only to the depression of its own associated
    key.


    Fig. 1.  SELECTIVE CUTTING,
            PATTERN CONTROLLED.
            (subclass 77)




    Fig. 2.  SELECTIVE CUTTING,
            CODED DIRECT ACTUATION
            (subclass 106)



        Fig. 3.  SELECTIVE CUTTING,
            BY INTERPOSER
            (subclass 112)

    Fig.    3 represents mechanism of the subclass 112 type, wherein the gag or
    interposer* I is positioned by means (shown as a manually slidable block on
    the machine frame) which is not a part of the tool drive train and which
    does not move in unison with the selected tool.  (If the interposer I of
    Fig. 3 were manipulable directly, as by a knob fastened to its extending
    rod and thus vertically reciprocable with the tool-head H, the device would
    fail to meet the definition of Class 234, and would instead be classifiable
    in Class 83, Cutting, subclass 573, as a hand-actuated means to connect or
    disconnect a tool and its continuously moving drive means).

    Fig.    4 is presented further to illustrate the line between this class
    and Class 83.  The hand- manipulable interposer I does not meet the
    limitations of part (3) of the class definition, above, but it does qualify
    as combinational -coding-means* under part (2) of the definition, and
    specifically as a differential interposer (234- 98).  This line has been
    developed as a practical measure to distinguish most of the (generally)
    production-type cutting machines of Class   83




    Fig. 4. SELECTIVE CUTTING,
            BY CODED INTERPOSER.
            (subclass 98)
            (see (3) Note in section II)



    Fig. 5.  NONSELECTIVE CUTTING, Class 83
                            type.   (see (4) Note in section II)



    Fig. 6.  NONSELECTIVE CUTTING, Class            83 type.

    From the (generally) data-handling selective cutting machines of Class 234.
     The availability of two or more sub-groups of tools in Fig. 4 makes the
    device selective under the class definition.

    (3)     Note.  Specifically excluded from this class is a patent to a
    cutting method or apparatus which concerns the production of distinctive
    cutting operations solely by varying the position, the cutting stroke, or
    the time of actuation of a single tool (or a group of tools driven always
    as a unit).  Fig. 5 represents such a device having a single tool,
    adjustable in position on a reciprocable ram; there is no "selection" from
    among a number of tools, but a mere adjustment of one tool.  Also excluded
    is a patent to apparatus having a turret of tools, wherein the positioning
    of one tool for a cutting operation necessitates the movement of the other
    tools away from their effective positions.

    (4)     Note.  Further excluded is a patent to cutting apparatus in which
    the distinctive cutting operations are effected by direct (manual or power)
    actuation of one or more independently drivable tools at the will of an
    operative.  Fig. 6 illustrates the excluded combination of tools, each
    driven by an independent key linkage, which is classifiable in Class 83,
    subclass 633, as a reciprocable tool driven by a fixed-axis lever.  Fig. 7
    illustrates the excluded combination of tools which lack a common power
    train or individual power trains for all tools; the single driving cam,
    shiftable along the rod, places this combination in Class 83, subclass 549.
    (see (4) Note in section II)



    Fig. 7.  NONSELECTIVE CUTTING, Class            83 type.

    III.   DEFINITIONS OF TERMS

    ACTUATION - The application of operating energy to a mechanism to cause the
    latter to perform its appointed function.

    ARRAY - A plurality of tools or sensing elements arranged to be driven as a
    group by a common actuator.

    AUXILIARY-OPERATION - Any of the functions to be found in a selective
    cutting machine other than the selection* of tools, (e.g., tool actuation*,
    feed* of pattern or workpiece, change of code*, shift of control to or from
    a keyboard or pattern-senser*, starting or stopping of any portion of the
    machine, etc.).

    CODE - A system of symbols arbitrarily used to represent directions, words,
    letters, or numerical values.  In this class, the term "code" wherever
    employed without further limitation should be regarded as meaning
    Combinational-Code*.

    CODED-INTERPOSER - An element which is movable to and from an effective
    position in which position portions of said element engage tools of a
    plurality of tool pairs, thereby completing a drive train for the
    subsequent effective transmission of actuating power to the corresponding
    tool pairs.  (Cf. Interposer).

    CODED-SELECTOR-MEANS - An element which is movable to and from an effective
    position in which it determines the selection of a plurality of tool pairs
    by other mechanism.  (Note.  This element differs from a coded-interposer*
    in that (a) it does not engage the selected tools, and (b) it has only one
    effective position, as distinguished from the differentially positionable
    coded-interposer* found in subclass 98).

    COMBINATIONAL-CODE  - A system of symbols each comprising two or more marks
    or perforations which by their number and/or position arbitrarily represent
    bits of information.  (Cf.  one-hole- code*, defined below).

    COMBINATIONAL-CODING-MEANS - Means which is differentially responsive to
    distinguishable forces or input-impulses* to prepare corresponding
    predetermined distinct combinations of less than the total number of tool
    pairs for actuation.  (Note.  This is the subject matter of subclass 94 of
    this class).

    COPY (n.) - A tangible object which carries or exhibits a picture, design,
    or record of data, for the guidance or direction of an operative or
    attendant of a selective cutting machine.  (Cf. pattern*).

    FEED (of pattern, card, web, etc.) - The progressive advancement of an
    object through a tool field and/or a field of pattern-sensers*, as
    distinguished from the mere presentation of an object to a machine.

    FULL-BANK - An assemblage of elements (e.g., tools or pattern-sensers*),
    which covers all significant points of an area to be operated on, usually
    in one cycle.

    INDICIUM - A mark or configuration exhibited or carried by an object (such
    as a pattern* or token) intended for use in the control of a machine.

    INPUT-IMPULSE - A force or stimulus applied to a machine from an external
    source (such as the hand of an operative, or the output mechanism of a
    calculator, etc.) or which originates from the sensing of a pattern*
    presented to the machine, and which is capable of controlling tool
    selection and/or auxiliary-operations*.  (Cf. input-means*).

    INPUT-MEANS - An instrumentality which is effective to exert control over
    the operation of tool-selecting mechanism and/or mechanism to perform an
    auxiliary-operation*, in response to the application of an input-impulse*
    to such input-means, (e.g., a keyboard, a dial, a pattern-sensing unit,
    etc.)

    INTERPOSER - An element which is movable to and from two or more positions,
    in one or more of which positions it is effective to condition a tool pair
    for actuation by its engagement with a tool of said pair and by thus
    completing a drive train for transmission of actuating force to the tool
    pair (either by the transmission of energy to an active tool element, or by
    blocking an inactive tool element in effective position).

    JUSTIFICATION - The computation or assignment of interword-spaces and/or
    type-widths, or symbols representative of such spaces or type-widths, in
    connection with the composition of a line of type or the production of an
    instrumentality (perforated tape, etc.) for the control of a type-setting
    machine, for the purpose of predetermining the exact length of a completed
    line of type.

    NOTCHING - The cutting of a discrete product from a workpiece through the
    thickness of the workpiece with the line of cut starting at an edge of the
    workpiece and returning to the same edge.

    ONE-HOLE-CODE - A system of single-hole symbols each distinguished only by
    its position with respect to a datum line.

    ONE-STROKE-STORAGE - Usually a misnomer, denoting merely a one-cyle delay
    in the actuation of selected tools.  (See subclass 91 for examples; also
    cf. Storage*).

    PATTERN - A tangible object, which, when temporarily presented to a
    suitable machine of the class type, affects the control of tool selection.
    (The workpiece itself may function as a pattern).

    PATTERN-FIELD - A complete pattern or any part thereof which may be chosen
    to supply input data for any purpose.

    PATTERN-SENSER - One or more elements which are capable of responding to
    certain indicia or characteristics of a pattern* presented to a machine,
    which response may be utilized to exert a control function on some portion
    of the machine.

    PRODUCT - A workpiece* which has been completely processed by a device of
    the Class 234 type.

    PROGRAM - A predetermined timed sequence of auxiliary-operations* of a
    Class 234 machine (i.e., not directly including the selection of tools, but
    it may include a changeover from one code* system to another; cf.
    Auxiliary-operation*).

    READ-IN (n.) - The transfer of data to a storage* device.

    READ-OUT (n.) - The transfer of data from a storage device or other means,
    to tool selection mechanism.

    SELECTION - The conditioning by a device of one or more of a number of
    available elements. (In this class, the term "selection" is usually
    employed with reference to tools; tool selection is independent of tool
    actuation*).

    SHIFT (n.) - A change in the relative position of data, indicia, etc.,
    incidental to its transfer from one record or medium to another (e.g., data
    in columns 1-5 of a pattern card may be caused to appear in columns 16-19
    and 21 of a newly made card).

    SKIP (n.) - A suspension of cutting and/or pattern-sensing operations,
    accompanied by a predetermined amount of feed* of a workpiece or pattern,
    for the purpose of omitting operations on a portion thereof.

    SLITTING - The cutting of a narrow incision by a single straight or curved
    cutting edge, the incision extending through the thickness of a workpiece,
    being of finite length, and having distinct ends (i.e., not a punched hole).

    STORAGE - The temporary retention, in a portion of machine, of input data,
    after cessation of the input-impulse* and before a corresponding initiation
    of tool selection*.

    TOOL-FIELD - An area embracing all the points which can be operated upon in
    one cycle of acutation of a given plurality of tools.

    WORKPIECE - The object which is cut or punched (before, during, or after
    such operation is effected).  Cf. Product*.

    IV.     SCOPE OF THE CLASS

    The subject matter of Class 234 relates to means for, or steps of,
    accomplishing the selection, or selection and actuation, of one or a group
    of less than the total number of cutting tool pairs from a given number of
    such tool pairs which are constantly available for selection and actuation.
     The great preponderance of patent disclosures of selective cutting or
    punching also include means for, or methods of, handling the work to be
    cut, or handling the product after cutting.  Many of such patents further
    disclose other treatment of the work (e.g., printing, cutting to size, or
    punching feed holes), or nonmanufacturing operations such as computation of
    input data or verification of output data which is related in some degree
    to the selection of tools.

    The sole requirement for placement of a patent in Class 234 is that the
    means for or method of selection of tools be included in the claimed
    subject matter.  Patents which meet this requirement may, however, be
    excluded from this class because of the claimed inclusion of other subject
    matter for which there are existing classes. Specific cases may be decided
    as indicated in the following sections, entitled "RELATIONSHIP TO OTHER
    CLASSES --- ETC".

    In general, a patent which is restricted to means for, or steps of,
    accomplishing the selection of one or more cutting tools as outlined in the
    class definition, will be placed in this class.  Additionally claimed
    ancillary features such as work holding, feeding, handling (e.g., counting
    or sorting), detection of malfunction of machine, handling of pattern,
    provision of specific data input arrangements and other specific data input
    arrangements and other features, normally to be found in a complete machine
    are also accommodated in this class.  Exclusion of a patent from Class 234,
    although cutting tool selection is claimed, is generally based upon
    additional recitation of (a) certain other treatment of the work, (b)
    certain handling or treatment of the control data or (c) other methods or
    devices which are elsewhere provided for.

    In general, a patent will not be originally placed in Class 234, if in
    addition to selective cutting means, it includes a device which does not
    contribute to the ease or effectiveness of operation of the cutting
    machine, or to a general awareness (on the part of an attendant) of the
    conditions or the results of its operation.  The only exception to this
    general exclusion rule is in the case of a patent to the combination of
    selective with nonselective cutting means, which will be placed originally
    in Class 234 (see section V C, below).

    V.      RELATIONSHIP TO OTHER CLASSES INCLUDING, PER SE, CUTTING OR OTHER
    TREATMENT OF WORK

    A.      The class of cutting implements, Class 30.

    A patent to a selective cutting or punching device will not be barred from
    original  placement in Class 234 by reason of the fact that the device is
    intended to be hand-held and/or hand-actuated and/or work-supported.

    B.      The class of severing by tearing or breaking, Class 225.

    A patent to the combination of selective cutting means with means to sever
    (the work or product) by tearing or breaking will be placed originally in
    Class 234.  The combination of tearing or breaking means with other (i.e.,
    nonselective) severing means is found in Class 225, subclass 7.

    C.      The class of cutting, Class 83.

    Class 83 is an elemental or basic class.  That is, its subject matter is
    restricted (so far as possible) to means for, or steps of, accomplishing
    the following functions:  cutting something (the "work"); or cutting and
    handling the work to be cut; or cutting and handling the product of the
    cutting operation.  Class 234 being superior to Class 83, a patent for the
    combination of a cutting device or method classifiable, per se, in Class 83
    and a selective cutting device or method will be placed originally in Class
    234.  For a complete statement of the relationship between Class 83 and
    Class 234, see definition of Class 83, section III D.

    D.      The class of printing, Class 101.

    Generally speaking, the recording or alphabetic or numeric characters by
    cutting is proper subject matter for Class 101, Printing.  More
    particularly, individual cases of selective cutting may be tested for
    aptness to Class 101 by reference to the following statements:

    (a)     If in addition to a selective cutting machine or process of Class
    234 there is claimed a means or step peculiar to Class 101 (e.g., the
    application of ink to the cutting tool to additionally outline or mark an
    aperture made by the punch, or the printing or embossing of characters or
    designs by means other than the cutting tools), the patent directed to such
    combination will be placed in Class 101.

    (b)     A patent directed to the selective cutting of a letter, number or
    aesthetic design will be placed in Class 101, subclass 18.

    (1)     Note.  The term "design" in this instance denotes a picture, a
    decorative or artistic arrangement of perforations or cut edges, or direct
    intelligence-bearing perforations or cuts; as distinguished from coded
    symbols. In case of doubt as to whether a patent discloses direct
    intelligence-bearing or codes symbols, placement will be in this class
    (234).

    (c)     A patent directed to the selective embossing of a letter, coded
    symbol, character or design will be placed in Class 101, subclass 18. (Such
    a patent would a priori be excluded from Class 234 on the ground that it is
    not concerned with cutting).

    E.      The class of typewriting machines, Class 400.

    Patents for key-operated machines for the simultaneous composition and
    production of printed matter generally, are placed in Class 400,
    Typewriting Machines.  The combination of typing and selective punching
    will in all cases be placed in Class 400, subject to the following
    qualifying statements:

    (a)     If only so much typing structure is claimed as is necessary to
    constitute a completely operative selective punching machine, the patent
    will be placed originally in Class 234 on the ground that the combination
    with typing is not positively claimed.  (e.g., the recitation of typewriter
    keys, key levers, type bars, and means responsive to actuation of the type
    bars to select cutting tools is not considered sufficient for placement of
    the patent in Class 400 unless the structure claimed is sufficient to
    effect actual character production on the work; nor is the further
    recitation of escapement means and a movable paper carriage, if it appears
    that the carriage exerts a control on some function of the cutting
    mechanism, such as the feed of a card relative to the cutting tool station).

    (b)     The nominal recitation of a typewriter in combination with specific
    selective punching machine is not considered sufficient for placement of a
    patent to the combination in Class 400.

    (c)     A patent directed to the production of printed matter through the
    agency of a paper tape perforated under control of a keyboard will be
    placed in Class 400.

    F.      The class of recorders, Class 346.

    A process or apparatus which would be otherwise proper for Class 346,
    Recorders, will not be removed from the scope of that class merely by
    virtue of the fact that the recording, as claimed, is accomplished by a
    selective cutting mechanism or method step.

    VI.     RELATIONSHIP TO OTHER CLASSES INCLUDING, PER SE, HANDLING OR
    TREATMENT OF DATA

    A.      The class of telegraphy, Class 178.

    A process or apparatus which would be otherwise proper for Class 178,
    Telegraphy, will not be removed from the scope of that class merely by
    virtue of the fact that the recording of the transmitted message, as
    claimed, is accomplished by a selective cutting mechanism or method step.

    In general, a recording or "printing" telegraph of Class 178 is
    distinguished from a selective punching machine of Class 234 by comprising
    one or a limited number of electrical input channels through which
    messages, unlimited with respect to the variety or extent of information
    they are adapted to convey, are transmitted from a distant point, the
    elements of the messages being selected according to a prearranged code.
    The claimed inclusion of a distant transmitter, or of means to decode
    electrical impulses originating at a distant point and conveyed over a
    relatively small number of channels, exemplifies the type of subject matter
    which would be placed in Class 178 rather than in Class 234, even though
    the recording may be accomplished by selective punching mechanism.

    B.      The class of registers, Class 235.

    There are generally three types of disclosure which contain subject matter
    common to Class 235, Registers, and Class 234, as follows;

    (1)     A patent directed to a calculating machine combined with selective
    mechanism for punching the data set up or the results, or both, which would
    be placed in Class 235.

    (2)     A patent directed to a selective punching machine combined with a
    register to ascertain the number of machine operations or number of
    workpieces treated, which would be placed in Class 234.

    (3)     A patent for a keyboard controlled selective punching machine
    combined with a register for totalizing incremental quantities (e.g.,
    type-widths and interword-spaces) related to the key-selected data, and
    means to indicate the approach of the total toward a predetermined quantity
    (e.g., the required length of a completed line of type composed according
    to the key-selected data), which would be placed in Class 234, subclass 4.

    VII.    RELATIONSHIP TO OTHER MATERIAL HANDLING CLASSES

    This class (234) receives original patents claiming significantly both a
    selective cutting or punching device and (a) means to separate or assort
    portions of the product resulting from the cutting operation, or (b) means
    to move or feed work, or (c) means to hold or move a pattern* or copy*.
    For the placing of patents which refer more broadly to a cutting tool or
    operation in combination with work or product handling, see section V of
    the definition of Class 83, Cutting.


CLS 234/1
TXT A procedure under the class definition which comprises the step of
    selecting one or more cutting tools or utilizing a selective cutting device.


CLS 234/2
TXT Procedure under subclass 1 which comprises the step of detecting the
    indicia or the characteristics of a pattern.


CLS 234/3
TXT Procedure under subclass 2 which comprises the step of varying (1) the
    characteristics of a pattern or (2) the response of a machine to pattern
    characteristics.


CLS 234/4
TXT Device under the class definition comprising means to cut character and
    space-representing code perforations successively in a strip of material
    and, substantially simultaneously, to cut other perforations representative
    of incremental quantities related to said characters (e.g., their widths
    when set up in type), and further comprising means to totalize said
    quantities (by means of a counter or measuring unit) and means to indicate
    the approach of said total toward a predetermined quantity (i.e., the
    length of a completed line of type).

    (1)     Note.  A patent directed to a device for punching a
    typographical-machine- controlling strip will not be placed in this or the
    indented subclasses unless all or a significant portion of a
    justification-space counter and/or indicator or associated structure
    pertaining to justification is claimed.  Other features, such as repeat key
    systems, may be found in appropriate subclasses herebelow, in devices which
    could conceivably be utilized as composing machines.

    (2)     Note.  Some patents have been cross-referenced to this subclass on
    the basis of disclosed features deemed important to selective typographical
    punching machines even though the disclosures are not clearly of the
    selective type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    for a "repeat key" mechanism on a composing machine or other
    selective punching device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 1+ and 77+ for a "composing
    machine" which prints code symbols on a tape, and comprises some
    justification structure.


CLS 234/5
TXT Device under subclass 4 which includes a portion that can be removed and
    replaced by another assembly having characteristics related to a different
    size or style of type which alters the selection of tools in response to a
    given input impulse.

    (1)     Note.  Usual examples are interchangeable keyboards or
    permutation-bar units, usable to adapt a single machine for composing
    matter in different fonts or type styles. Provision is thus made for
    suitably altering the selection of punches and the drive to the
    justification counter and/or indicator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for programmed means to alter a code.

    69,     for code production or conversion means associated with a
    pattern-controlled punching device.

    96,     for means in a selective cutting device for changing a code or
    facilitating change thereof.


CLS 234/6
TXT Device under subclass 4 which includes a modification adapted to simplify
    or reduce the number of operations required to effect the cancellation of a
    portion of the series of perforations made in previous cycles of the
    machine.

    (1)     Note.  Such a device usually operates in two general steps:  (1) to
    restore the justification counter and indicator to the conditions they
    occupied prior to the punching of the canceled subject matter; and (2) to
    overpunch the matter to be canceled, or to insert an error symbol in
    appropriate position to be sensed by the type-casting machine for which the
    tape is intended to be used.


CLS 234/7
TXT Device under subclass 4 including means effective to provide
    subtotalization of said incremental quantities at a plurality of
    predetermined points in the composed line, or means to effect alteration in
    the length of line to be composed.

    (1)     Note.  A device of this subclass type facilitates the composition
    of printed lines of different lengths, and the composition of tubular
    matter (i.e., in vertical columns).


CLS 234/8
TXT Device under subclass 4 including means for cutting in said strip one or
    more perforations which represent the widths of interword-spaces so
    selected at the completion of each line as to cause the completed line
    (when set in type by a machine not claimed here) to be of a predetermined
    length.

    (1)     Note.  Actuation of the selected tools to produce justification
    indicia in the control strip may be effected manually (by special key or
    incidental to another manual operation such as line feed), or may be
    automatic.


CLS 234/9
TXT Device under subclass 8 including means responsive to justification
    conditions as determined by a justification counter or indicator to control
    the conditioning of tools without the intervention of an operative.


CLS 234/10
TXT Device under subclass 9, including means to insert the justification symbol
    or symbols at the beginning of a line or in interword-spaces.

    (1)     Note.  The more conventional system is to insert justification
    symbols at the end of the line, which usually requires later that the
    control tape be fed backward into the typesetting machine; for which see
    subclasses 8 and 9.


CLS 234/11
TXT Device under subclass 4 including means to advance the counter or measuring
    unit.

    (1)     Note.  Also included are arrangements for altering or adjusting
    (rather than exchanging) the counter drive to accommodate different type
    fonts or to space the letters of words.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for a machine including a mere justification indicator (i.e., which
    does not totalize or compute justification data).

    5,      for a machine with exchangeable parts to accommodate different
    fonts.

    7,      for a machine with provision for altering the counter or measuring
    unit drive incidental to tabulating or line length adjustment.


CLS 234/12
TXT Device under subclass 11 wherein the counter consists of a toothed wheel
    driven through assigned increments of rotation by one or more toothed racks.

    (1)     Note.  Counters of this type, termed "unit-wheel", are in wide use
    (see Patent No. 663, 996, granted December 18, 1900, to T. Lanston).


CLS 234/13
TXT Device under the class definition which performs a plurality of operations
    in sequence and which comprises means effective at a predetermined point in
    said sequence to modify or render effective or ineffective certain machine
    controlling impulses other than those impulses which directly control the
    selection of tools.

    (1)     Note.  For example, the changeover from one code system to another,
    and the shift of control from one input source to another, are merely
    preparatory to subsequent tool selection operations, hence they are
    regarded as "auxiliary-operations", rather than as constituting direct
    control of tool selection.  The term auxiliary-operation* implies any
    action, operation, or change of condition of a device or part thereof,
    other than the actual selection of tools for cutting or noncutting action
    in any cycle of tool actuation.  For further examples of
    auxiliary-operations, see Definitions of Terms.

    (2)     Note.  The term "programmed" implies that any of the actions or
    changes of conditions referred to in (1) Note, above is the result of a
    prearranged timing schedule and thus occurs at one or more fixed points in
    the timed sequence of a machine operation, as against any random time
    dependent upon the receipt of signals from an external source (e.g.,
    actuation of a keyboard by an operative), or upon the occurrence of a
    condition which is not definitely related to any particular cycle of
    operation of the machine (e.g., the occurrence of a misfeed overload, or
    other malfunction).

    (3)     Note.  Programming may be effected by sensing a card, tape, or
    other medium while at rest or while progressing through the machine.  Such
    a card or tape is distinguishable from a "pattern" card or tape by the fact
    that a programming medium controls auxiliary-operations of the machine.  If
    it further contains tool-selection-controlling data, it is a combined
    program-pattern element, and the programming feature would prevail in the
    original classification of a patent to the combination.

    (4)     Note.  Certain conventional features commonly found in card
    punches, namely: the so-called "last-column contact" circuits, or automatic
    card-feed and card-eject devices in general, are not deemed as of
    sufficient interest in this class to warrant cross-referencing into
    subclass 13 unless included in the claimed invention.


CLS 234/14
TXT Device under cubclass 13 wherein the program means modifies a code* of
    substitutes one code for another.

    (1)     Note.  The program means found in this subclass does not select
    tools directly, but effects a change in the system of tool selection (i.e.,
    a change of code, such for example as the substitution, at certain points
    only in the sequence of operations, of a "space" symbol for a "zero" in
    response to a "zero" impulse).

    (2)     Note.  The automatic insertion of zeros or suppression of zeros
    while punching numerical data is an example of "change of code".  This
    auxiliary-operation, if arranged to occur only at predetermined points in
    the sequence of machine cycles, is said to be "programmed"; if, however, it
    takes place whenever a certain condition or combination of conditions
    should arise (e.g., upon detection of an initial zero in numerical data
    received from a keyboard or a pattern-reader) it is a randomly effected
    change of code, classifiable in subclasses 22+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for means to automatically insert or to suppress the punching of a
    zero symbol, under the control of randomly effective operating conditions.

    96,     for means to change or facilitate change of code, in a selective
    cutting device.


CLS 234/15
TXT Device under subclass 13 wherein additional means is provided for
    conditioning the device to follow one of a plurality of distinct
    predetermined sequences of operations.


CLS 234/16
TXT Device under subclass 13 wherein the program means terminates the
    transmission of machine-controlling impulses from one specified portion of
    the device and effects initiation of transmission of such impulses from
    another specified portion of the device.

    (1)     Note.  For original placement in this subclass, a patent must claim
    means to connect a second input means, as well as means to disconnect a
    first input means.  The mere addition of an overriding control of a single
    input means (e.g., the operation of keys by a pattern-responsive mechanism
    at certain times) is found in subclass 20.


CLS 234/17
TXT Device under subclass 16 wherein the two specified portions of the device
    differ in both structure and function.

    (1)     Note.  Such portions may be, for example, a keyboard and a pattern-
    senser or data storage device.


CLS 234/18
TXT Device under subclass 13 wherein said program means effects a predetermined
    change in the location of a cutting tool pair with respect to work and/or
    in the location of the effective portion of a pattern-sensing mechanism
    with respect to a pattern.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass disclose means for altering, at
    predetermined times, the relative recorded positions of data being read
    from a pattern or storage means, or being supplied from a keyboard or other
    input means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72+,    for means to effect field selection, skip, elimination, or shift,
    in a pattern controlled device.


CLS 234/19
TXT Device under subclass 18 including means effective during a predetermined
    time interval to speed up, slowdown, or temporarily block the progressive
    movement of work or pattern past the zone of cutting or sensing operations.

    (1)     Note.  "Skip bar" controls are found in this subclass, also
    arrangements for permitting "multiple punching" in given columns.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28+,    for randomly controlled changes in feed of pattern or work.

    72+,    for alteration of the effect of pattern data which may involve
    changes in feed.


CLS 234/20
TXT Device under subclass 13, wherein the program means effects initiation or
    termination of transmission of machine-controlling impulses from a
    specified portion of the device.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is the conventional "column cutout bar"
    control which starts and stops duplicating operations at predetermined card
    columns, permitting an operative to insert manually keyed data in certain
    fields of a card.


CLS 234/21
TXT Device under subclass 13 provided with means to bring one or more parts to
    a halt after the completion of a fixed plurality of cycles of operation of
    the device or of any portion thereof which is periodically actuated.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include "repeat key" mechanisms, for
    their actuation is manually initiated at random times (i.e., at the will of
    an operative), for which see subclass 125.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for means to effect unicyclic tool actuation.

    125,    for repeat key mechanism, and see (1) Note, above.


CLS 234/22
TXT Device under the class definition provided with means for initiating,
    modifying, or terminating the functional effect of some portion of the
    device other than or in addition to the tool selecting mechanism, per se;
    such control-imposing means acting in response to a signal or impulse which
    cannot be predicted to occur during any particular one of a number of
    recurring cycles of operation (either of the machine as a whole, of a tool,
    or of any part of the machine which has a cyclic law of operation).

    (1)     Note.  Such means may comprise, for example, a device effective to
    stop a selective cutting machine upon the detection of a jam in the work
    feed mechanism, or to start such a machine upon the presentation thereto of
    a pattern or a workpiece, or to temporarily suspend tool actuation during
    the passage of a particularly identified card through the punching station
    or to cause automatic change of code under certain operating conditions
    which occur at random times.

    (2)     Note.  The claimed combination of pattern-sensing means and
    tool-selecting means controlled thereby is found in subclass 59, below.
    The selection of tools being in the main characteristic of Class 234, it is
    not included in the meaning of the term

    (3)     Note.  In general, an operation which is specifically voluntarily
    initiated, as by the depression of a claimed special key on a keyboard, is
    not regarded as a random operation within the meaning of this subclass
    definition.  The term "random" is applied in Class 234 to operations which
    occur in response to given conditions or otherwise without voluntary
    initiation by an operative. Means for performing a given operation at the
    will of an operative or attendent will generally be found in a subclass
    relating generally to means for performing the pertinent operation, or in
    the keyboard subclasses 123+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13+,    for programmed control of auxiliary-operation.

    59+,    for pattern control of tool selection.

    124+,   for keyboard control of an auxiliary- operation, (e.g., workfeed,
    repeat operations, column skipping, etc.).


CLS 234/23
TXT Device under subclass 22 provided with additional means which is
    differentially responsive, to two or more diverse bits of data which
    control the selection of tools in the device, in such manner that a certain
    time sequence of transmission of such bits makes said additional means
    effective to transmit said signal or impulse to the control-imposing means.

    (1)     Note.  For example, a device in this subclass may effect an
    automatic change of code, sometimes involving the punching of "letters
    shift" or "figures shift" symbols at appropriate locations in an output
    tape.  The control- imposing means does not select tools, but establishes
    or selects the system by which tool selections are governed, during the
    existence of a given operating condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for means to perform a similar operation under programmed control.


CLS 234/24
TXT Device under subclass 23 wherein the additional means is differentially
    responsive to the occurrence of a zero or a significant digit, and the
    control-imposing means is capable of determining the actuation or
    nonactuation of a tool or group of tools (which has been selected by other
    means) to represent a zero symbol.

    (1)     Note.  The systematic substitution of a "zero" for a space or other
    character, or substitution of a "space" for a zero, at every occurrence, is
    simply a change of code.  A device having this function would be classified
    in one of the appropriate subclasses relating to "coded" punching (e.g.,
    subclass 69).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for programmed means to change code.

    69+,    for change of code in a pattern-controlled selective cutting device.

    96,     for means to change or facilitate change of code in a selective
    cutting device.


CLS 234/25
TXT Device under subclass 22 provided with additional means which is capable of
    sensing data or a characteristic of a pattern* or workpiece*and initiating
    the control-imposing signal or impulse in response to the sensing of a
    predetermined symbol or characteristic.

    (1)     Note.  See (2) Note under subclass 22.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33+,    for a control which may be initiated jointly by work-sensing means
    and other means.

    63+,    for means to control tool selection by detection of indicia in
    workpiece.


CLS 234/26
TXT Device under subclass 25 wherein said control-imposing means governs the
    transfer or nontransfer of data from a pattern to a workpiece, the device
    being further provided with a comparator effective to compare data sensed
    by such additional means with other data stored in the device or
    concurrently sensed from a pattern or workpiece, and means to initiate the
    control-imposing signal or impulse under a given condition of
    correspondence or noncorrespondence of said compared data.

    (1)     Note.  The auxiliary-operation controlled in this case is the tool
    actuation (as distinct from tool selection) or the transmission of
    selection impulses to the tool-selection means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     for control of data reproduction by detection of indicia in a
    workpiece.


CLS 234/27
TXT Device under subclass 26 including means responsive to the control-imposing
    signal or impulse to regulate the feed of pattern and/or work.


CLS 234/28
TXT Device under subclass 25 wherein the control-imposing means is for
    starting, stopping, or modifying the progress of a pattern and/or workpiece
    through the device.

    (1)     Note.  The usual function characterizing the devices of this
    subclass is pattern-controlled skipping of pattern and/or work fields.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for programmed control of pattern or work feed.

    72+,    for broadly, means to alter the effect of pattern data by
    transposition, shift, or suppression field.


CLS 234/29
TXT Device under subclass 28 wherein said control-imposing means regulates the
    progressive movement of a pattern with respect to pattern-sensing means.


CLS 234/30
TXT Device under subclass 22 wherein said control-imposing means operates by
    bringing any or all of the moving parts of the device to a halt or by
    terminating an auxiliary-operation (e.g., tool actuation).

    (1)     Note.  It is not a bar to original placement of a patent in this
    subclass, that the claimed power train disrupting, breaking, or other
    "stopping" means may be activated at a time when the part to be halted is,
    purely adventitiously, at a standstill due to its normal cyclic operation.

    (2)     Note.  Patents in this subclass (30) may claim the combination, in
    a selective cutting device, of stopping means initiated by sensing the
    absence of work or pattern, or sensing misplaced or defective work, etc.,
    wherein the occurrence of such condition, as disclosed, is not by reason of
    defect or malfunction of the device, for which latter condition, see
    subclass 32, indented hereunder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for random control which may include, but is not limited to
    stopping (e.g., means to start a machine upon presentation of work or
    pattern which may be combined with means to stop the machine upon
    withdrawal of work or pattern).


CLS 234/32
TXT Device under subclass 30 provided with additional means responsive to a
    failure of a machine part, or to an abnormal position or functioning
    thereof, to initiate said signal or impulse.

    (1)     Note.  Random stopping means which responds to absence or abnormal
    position of a pattern or workpiece, irrespective of the cause for such
    condition, will be found in subclass 30.


CLS 234/33
TXT Device under subclass 32 provided with means which responds to tool
    actuation or senses characteristics of the workpiece subsequent to tool
    actuation and which initiates said signal or impulse in response to (1) a
    failure of the device to follow a predetermined type of tool operation, or
    (2) the correct completion of such operation, which signal or impulse
    governs the continuance of operation of the machine or of a part thereof.

    (1)     Note.  For example, the means may be used to check the presence of
    a punched hole in each column of a card before it leaves a card punch
    machine.

    (2)     Note.  A check on tool actuation includes, but does not require,
    verification of the correctness of the punching operations, for which see
    subclass 34, indented hereunder.

    (3)     Note.  The term "stopping" in subclasses 30+ is broadly construed
    to embrace a change in the mode of operation of the device which involves
    the cessation of a particular function even though parts concerned may
    still have motion.


CLS 234/34
TXT Device under subclass 33 in which the signal- or impulse-generating means
    responds to a disparity between the selection control impulses received by
    the device and the consequent operations performed by the device.


CLS 234/35
TXT Device under the class definition including input-means* which means
    affects both mechanism for selective cutting as well as mechanism for
    applying embossed or visibly tinted character-representing symbols to a
    workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  The printing and cutting operations may be applied to the
    same or to different workpieces, and either simultaneously or
    nonsimultaneously.

    (2)     Note.  The claimed inclusion of any specific element of a printing
    device, which element is not a necessary part of the control or actuating
    mechanism of the selective cutting device, is a bar to placement of the
    patent in this class.  For example, a patent to a combined
    "typewriter-punch" wherein the typewriter key levers actuate
    punch-selection mechanisms and the paper-carriage movement controls feed of
    a card to the punching station, would be placed as an original in Class
    400, Typewriting Machines, if the claims referred also to "types", or
    ribbon feed or line-feed mechanism, etc.

    (3)     Note.  For the relationship of this group of subclasses to other
    work-treating classes, see section V of the class definition entitled
    "Relationship to Other Classes Including, Per Se, Cutting or Other
    Treatment of Work".


CLS 234/36
TXT Device under subclass 35 wherein the printing means is disclosed as being
    effective to applying printed symbols in sequential order.

    (1)     Note.  Typographical punching machines commonly include
    step-by-step printing incidental to the production of a perforated control
    strip for typesetting purposes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for a typographical punching machine with incidental step-by-step
    printing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, for the combination of specific printing means with
    selective cutting means.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, for the combination of step-by-step printing
    means and work-feed means with selective cutting means.


CLS 234/37
TXT Device under subclass 36 wherein the printing means is disclosed as being
    effective to treat the workpiece upon which the cutting tool pairs are
    effective.


CLS 234/38
TXT Device under the class definition which includes cutting or punching
    mechanism which is not selective in terms of the class definition.

    (1)     Note.  Disclosures of a selective cutting machine combined with
    feed-hole punching mechanism or a work-trimming cutter are found in this or
    the indented subclass.


CLS 234/39
TXT Device under subclass 38 wherein the nonselective mechanism is effective to
    cut the workpiece or product to size or to perforate it at regular
    intervals.


CLS 234/40
TXT Device under the class definition in combination with (1) means to
    systematically distribute the products from the cutting device, or (2)
    means to support and exhibit a record or data source for the convenience of
    an operative using the device.

    (1)     Note.  A patent to a selective punching device comprising a
    manually movable stylus to control tool selection, and a holder for a
    drawing or design to be traced by such stylus, will be placed as an
    original in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The terms copy* and "data source" do not imply direct
    control of a machine therefrom, as in the case of a pattern* or a "program
    device", but merely afford information for the guidance of an operative or
    attendant, who in turn controls the selection of tools.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13      and 22, for respectively, programmed control or random control of
    auxiliary-operation, which latter may include sorting as well as
    interfiling, segregating, counting, etc.


CLS 234/41
TXT Device under the class definition provided with means which, when rendered
    effective, alters the device from the selective cutting device to a device
    lying outside the scope of the class definition.

    (1)     Note.  Example:  A card punch machine which by the manipulation of
    a control switch is usable as a verifying machine, or as a card sorter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 156, statistical record verifying,
    for a verifying device, per se.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 204 and 574 for a device which is convertible
    within that class.


CLS 234/42
TXT Device under the class definition which comprises two or more distinct
    arrays of selectively controlled tools, or one array composed of distinct
    groups of tools controlled by separate tool selection mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  A device in this subclass may consist of a plurality of
    virtually complete selective cutting machines interconnected to some degree
    as by control means or common drive means; or it may be in effect one
    cutting machine provided with distinct arrays of tools and conforming with
    the above definition.

    (2)     Note.  The plural tool fields need not be spaced apart physically:
    tools of the several fields may be adjacent (or even intermingled) if there
    are distinct actuating means and/or distinct selecting means for each field.

    (3)     Note.  The conventional Powers-type card punch, having a full bank
    of punch elements connectable column-by-column to a single input means
    (keyboard and pin-setting carriage) does not constitute a plural tool field
    selective punching device, for the selection means, as well as the
    actuating means is common to all columns of punches.

    (4)     Note.  The addition of a second input means, such as a serial
    numbering attachment, to a selective punching device to control the
    punching in certain columns of a card will not of itself effect patent
    placement in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for a combination of devices which may comprise plural tool fields,
    one of which is not selective.

    61,     for a patent disclosing plural tool fields, one field being devoted
    to serial numbering, and see (4) Note above.

    91,     for a device of the Powers type referred to in (3) Note above.


CLS 234/43
TXT Device under subclass 42 provided with means to determine which one or more
    of the arrays of tools shall be operative.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for programmed control of field selection.

    22,     for control of field selection by random means (e.g., sensed data).


CLS 234/44
TXT Device under subclass 43 wherein the field-selection means is controllable
    at the will of an operative.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124+,   for control of auxiliary-operation by keyboard means in a selective
    cutting device.


CLS 234/45
TXT Device under subclass 42 including distinct means separately controllable
    at the will of an operative to select tools in each of two or more arrays.


CLS 234/46
TXT Device under the class definition in which each tool pair is arranged to
    effect (1) a notching* operation or (2) a slitting* operation.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this and indented subclasses are for instance,
    patents directed to selective cutting machines for (a) notching the edges
    of cards, (b) machines for partially or completely severing a workpiece
    along a particular contour or line of cut, and (c) machines for cutting
    U-shaped slits to constitute "chadless apertures".


CLS 234/47
TXT Device under subclass 46 wherein the tool pairs are arranged to perform
    notching operations only.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 917, and other appropriate subclasses for a
    notching device in general.


CLS 234/48
TXT Device under subclass 47 comprising means to cause selected tools to make
    cuts of equal maximum extent (measured along a line normal to the edge of
    the workpiece) from portions of the periphery of a properly positioned
    workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for a device adapted to cut both deep and shallow notches in
    combination as required in some card coding systems.


CLS 234/49
TXT Device under the class definition including means to advance the workpiece
    at an angle to the direction of motion of the tool(s) during the actuation
    of the selected tool(s).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include patent for a device wherein
    the only movement of the work is incidental to the approach of one tool to
    its cooperating tool, (e.g., work carried by a moving die plate against
    fixed punches).

    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example, patents directed to
    means for recording the actuations of piano keys by selectively punching a
    moving paper strip.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 284+ and 350+ for tool-cutting moving work, in
    general.

    84,     Music, subclasses 461+ for means to record movements of piano keys,
    other than by perforating a sheet; and see (2) Note, above.


CLS 234/50
TXT Device under subclass 49 wherein the acutated tools have a component of
    motion parallel to the direction of work advance.

    (1)     Note.  The component of motion of tools in the direction of work
    advance may be obtained by so mounting the tools that they may be carried
    along by their engagement with the moving work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 284+ for a flying cutter of more general
    utility.


CLS 234/51
TXT Device under the class definition provided with means to bring the tool
    drive train to an ineffective condition after the occurrence of one
    actuation of the selected tool or tools, which condition persists at least
    until the transmission of a subsequent control impulse to the tool
    selection means.

    (1)     Note.  The type of mechanism found in this subclass is frequently
    termed "nonrepeat".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for means to bring part or all of a selective cutting device to a
    halt after a predetermined number of operations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 203+, 484, 524+ for unicyclic operation of a
    cutting tool, in general.


CLS 234/52
TXT Device under the class definition provided with means in addition to the
    tool selecting and tool actuating power trains, which means positively
    prevents operation of the tool-actuating power train in the event of
    partial or incomplete operation of the tool selecting means, or vice versa.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 221, 380 and 399+ for an interlock device in a
    cutting machine.


CLS 234/53
TXT Device under the class definition provided with two or more distinct and
    independent means capable of receiving input-impulses* and initiating or
    transmitting tool-selection control impulses in accordance therewith, and
    further means for determining which of such distinct and independent means
    should be effective.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16+,    for programmed means to select from a plurality of input sources.

    22+,    for randomly-controlled shift from one input means to another.

    65,     for joint control of tool selection by pattern senser and other
    input means.


CLS 234/54
TXT Device under subclass 53 wherein the distinct and independent receiving
    means are dissimilar in general structure and function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for programmed means to select from a plurality of diverse input
    sources.


CLS 234/55
TXT Device under the class definition provided with means effective to receive
    a signal or impulse transmitted from an input-means* and to register and
    retain a distinctive record thereof, after cessation thereof and further
    means effective to read said record and to transmit a corresponding control
    impulse to the tool selection means.

    (1)     Note.  For inclusion in this or an indented subclass, a patent must
    claim means which is selectively conditioned by a signal or impulse
    transmitted by an input-means and which, at some time thereafter, takes
    part in the generation or transmission of another signal or impulse,
    representative of the first, as determined by such selective conditioning.

    (2)     Note.  To constitute data storage there must be retention of
    distinctive information after removal of the input-impulse (e.g.,
    retraction of the depressed key) and before the corresponding tool
    selection has been effected.

    (3)     Note.  Storage may be effected by a recording mechanism, (such as a
    tape punch), and a sensing means, so arranged that data stored in the tape
    is later utilized to control tool selection.

    (4)     Note.  Fig. 8 illustrates the essentials of one type of storage
    system.  Depression of any key K energizes an associated storage relay SR,
    which remains energized over a circuit including its hold contacts a.  When
    at some later time, read-out contacts R-O are closed, circuits are
    completed through contacts b of all energized relays, thus energizing the
    associated magnets M and positioning interposers I in readiness to actuate
    tools T upon the next stroke of ram H. (In practice, relays SR would
    ordinarily be restored after the read-out, by opening their holding
    circuits).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25+,    for control of auxiliary mechanism by detection of predetermined
    indicia, which may involve storage of such indicia.

    26,     for comparison of "group numbers" for auxiliary control purposes,
    which may involve storage of such numbers for control purposes rather than
    for read-out to recording means.

    90,     for means to delay the effectiveness of tool selection; e.g., the
    so-called "one-stroke storage" feature.

    92+,    for means optionally settable to retain or clear a selection of
    tools after their actuation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, appropriate subclasses for a calculating machine having
    data storage and output punching features.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclasses
    for electrical means to store data.


CLS 234/56
TXT Device under subclass 55 comprising a plurality of said receiving means
    effective to register and retain a plurality of such records, and the
    transmitting means being effective to transmit two or more control impulses
    to the tool selecting means in altered sequence from that in which the
    corresponding records are registered.

    (1)     Note.  Within the meaning of the subclass definition, either the
    read-in* or the read-out* may be simultaneous, if the other is in timed
    sequence.

    (2)     Note.  As methods of achieving a different sequence, for example,
    input data may be entered in parallel and read-out serially, or vice versa,
    or data may be entered in column-by-column order and read-out row-by-row.


CLS 234/57
TXT Device under subclass 55 provided with mechanism capable of being moved or
    adjusted from one position or condition to another, said mechanism in the
    one position being effective to prevent restoration of the registering
    means to its idle or empty condition, but in the other position being
    effective to cause such restoration in response to transmission of the
    selection control impulse from the registering means.

    (1)     Note.  A device of this type is, in other words, capable of either
    "destructive" or "nondestructive" read-out.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92+,    for means optionally settable to retain a selection of tools after
    their actuation.


CLS 234/58
TXT Device under subclass 55 including mechanism to effect the transmission of
    control impulses from the registering means in a timed sequence.

    (1)     Note.  A common example of serial read-out is a column-by-column
    read-out to a card or tape punch from a bank of storage relays.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66,     for means to read-out data in sequence from pattern-sensers.


CLS 234/59
TXT Device under the class definition which comprises means for sensing indicia
    or characteristics of a pattern*, or means for sensing a
    specially-configured cylically effective portion of the device, and means
    responsive to such sensing to cause actuation of one or more tools, or to
    tool selection only, or to control both selection and actuation of tools.

    (1)     Note.  Some instance of pattern control are found in preceding
    subclasses (e.g., as specific phases of "program control"; and as phases of
    "randomly actuated" control of auxiliary-operations).

    (2)     Note.  Fig. 9 illustrates a card or sheet which bears indicia such
    as marks or perforations, appearing, for example, in five columns (A-E) and
    comprising four index points per column (in practice, the usual number of
    columns may be 45 or 80, with 6 to 12 index points per column).  Fig. 10
    illustrates a card which has been punched from the pattern of Fig. 9,
    without alteration of the position or the significance of any of the data.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13+,    for a disclosure of a program card or tape which may resemble a
    pattern, but is utilized to control auxiliary-operation(s) instead of, or
    in addition to, tool selection.

    25+,    for a device wherein pattern sensors control auxiliary mechanism.


CLS 234/60
TXT Device under subclass 59 which comprises means responsive to the detection
    of a portion of the device which portion has periodic motion, for selection
    or varying the existing selection of tools.

    (1)     Note.  Sensing may occur while the periodically moving portion is
    at rest.

    (2)     Note.  The aforementioned means is entirely a portion of the
    machine proper, thus excluding pattern-sensing mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62      through 89, for pattern-controlled selective cutting, in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 76.1+ for a pattern-controlled cutting machine,
    in general.

            Fig. 9 A marked or punched card usuable as a pattern. (subclasses
    59+)

            Fig. 10 A card cut from the pattern of Fig. 9. (subclasses 59+)


            Fig. 11 Reperforated or overpunched card. (subclass 63)

            Fig. 12 Inverse or complemental punching from pattern of Fig. 9
    (subclass 68)

            Fig. 13 With code conversion. (subclass 69)


CLS 234/61
TXT Device under subclass 60 in which said responsive means periodically
    effects the selection of tools for cutting successive workpieces or
    predetermined groups of workpieces with coded representations of
    consecutive numbers.


CLS 234/62
TXT Device under subclass 59 including means for causing said sensing means to
    act a plurality of times in succession with respect to a given portion of
    said pattern, or wherein plural sensing means are provided and so arranged
    that two or more sensing means act successively with respect to a given
    portion of said pattern, during operations on one workpiece.


CLS 234/63
TXT Device under subclass 59 wherein said sensing means is caused to act with
    respect to a workpiece* presented to the device for cutting by the tools
    thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Within the scope of this subclass, the work may be sensed
    prior to, during, or after its treatment.

    (2)     Note.  Fig. 11 illustrates an application of the mechanism of this
    subclass; a marked or punched card is sensed and punched, to change marks
    to holes, or to convert small holes to large ones, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for control of an auxiliary function of a device instead of or in
    addition to control of tool selection, by sensing the workpiece.


CLS 234/64
TXT Device under subclass 63 wherein said sensing means is so arranged as to
    act upon a product which has been previously subjected to cutting
    operations in the device.

    (1)     Note.  In the card punching art, the use of a newly-processed card
    as a pattern for the following card is commonly referred to as
    "gang-punching".


CLS 234/65
TXT Device under subclass 59 further provided with input-means* in addition to
    said sensing means, and means for enabling effective transmission of
    signals or impulses from both said input-means during the same operating
    cycle of the machine.

    (1)     Note.  The additional input-means may also be pattern-sensing
    mechanisms thus affording tool selection control by two or more patterns.

    (2)     Note.  Disclosures in this subclass include "edited" or supervised
    selective punching, wherein a pattern-sensing mechanism imposes
    restrictions on the selection of punches by other means (e.g., keyboard).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16+     and 53+, for means to shift control from one input source to
    another, which may include pattern-control means.

    67+,    for means in general to modify the effect of pattern data.


CLS 234/66
TXT Device under subclass 59 which includes a plurality of sensing means
    arranged to coact simultaneously with all significant points of a pattern
    field, and further including means effective to establish, in sequence, a
    plurality of signal or impulse transmission channels, each extending from a
    group of such sensing means to the tool selecting means or to a portion
    thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Fig. 15 illustrates typical mechanism found in a device of
    this subclass.  A pattern card is clamped in a sensing unit which may
    comprise a full bank of spring-biased sensing pins.  Movement of the
    sensing unit and pattern past a microswitch causes successive positionings
    of interposer I corresponding to those sensing pins which have entered
    holes in the pattern and are thus misaligned with the others.  Storage* is
    not involved here, for the input-impulses* are retained (by the positioned
    sensing pins) until tool selection has been effected.

    Fig. 15. FULL-BANK SENSING, READ-OUT STEP-BY-STEP. (subclass 66)


CLS 234/67
TXT Device under subclass 59 provided with means to effect significant
    alteration, in any one cutting cycle, of the relative positions of the
    selected cutting tool pairs with respect to the positions of corresponding
    control indicia or characteristics in the pattern.

    (1)     Note.  The general effect produced by a device of this type is to
    make a product which has cut or punched portions, not all of which
    correspond in spatial position or arrangement to their related pattern
    indicia.

    (2)     Note.  Included here are some patents which claim such arrangements
    of tools, control means, and/or pattern sensers as to enable the use of
    smaller, cheaper, or more simplified mechanisms than could be achieved with
    the use of "facsimile" patterns.

    (3)     Note.  Included in this and indented subclasses are, for example,
    disclosures of means to effect one or more of the following functions:  to
    produce a combinational-code*, to decode such a code into a single cutting
    operation, to convert from one code to another, to produce a complementary
    or "inverse" duplicate of a field of perforations, to reproduce only
    selected fields of a pattern, or to shift the relative positions of data
    being reproduced.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for a method comprising the step of modifying the effectiveness of
    a pattern.

    29      and 43, for other instances of modified reproduction of pattern
    data.

    65,     for joint control of tool selection by a pattern reader and other
    means, which control may modify the effect of the pattern data.


CLS 234/68
TXT Device under subclass 67 wherein the altering means is effective to cause
    nonselection of a cutting tool in response to sensing of a pattern
    indicium, and to cause selection of a cutting tool when no such indicium is
    sensed.

    (1)     Note.  A device of this subclass produces the "inverse" or
    "physical complement" of the pattern field.

    (2)     Note.  A device which produces the "code complement" of a code
    symbol is not classifiable here but in subclass 69 as an instance of code
    conversion, rather than inversion.  The code complement of a code symbol
    may bear no physical resemblance to the "inverse" of the group of
    perforations which constitute the symbol.

    (3)     Note.  Fig. 12 illustrates a card which has been punched with the
    inverse or complement of the indicia from the pattern card of Fig. 9.


CLS 234/69
TXT Device under subclass 67 wherein the altering means effects a change from a
    code* exhibited by the pattern to a different code cut into the workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  Any device of this type effects "code conversion".  In some
    instances it would appear instead that a code is being "generated" (as when
    alphabetical or numerical characters are sensed to control the selection of
    linearly arranged tools), but the operation is always basically the same,
    i.e., the transfer or intelligence from one record to another, with a
    systematic change from one set of arbitrary symbols to another.

    (2)     Note.  Basic mechanisms of the so-called "tape-to-card" or
    "card-to-tape" record-controlled duplicating machines are found here, for
    different codes are ordinarily employed in the two record media.

    (3)     Note.  A device which, upon reading the symbol of a digit in a
    pattern, effects the punching of the symbol of the "tens complement" or
    "nines complement" of that digit, may be found in this subclass.  See (2)
    Note under subclass 68.

    (4)     Note.  Fig. 13 illustrates code conversion.  The data from the
    pattern of Fig. 9 has been reproduced, but the four-element code symbols
    appearing in the pattern have been altered to conform to a different code
    (in this example, another four-element code). In practice, the change may
    be from one statistical system to another, or from Morse to Cable Code,
    five-channel tape code to seven-channel code, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      14 and 96, for code-changing means not limited to a
    pattern-controlled device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, appropriate subclass for means
    to change or convert one electrical code into another (and see search notes
    under said subclass).


CLS 234/70
TXT Device under subclass 69 wherein said altering means is systematically
    effective (a) to cause the selection of two or more tools in response to
    the sensing of one pattern indicium, or (2) to cause the selection of one
    tool in response to the sensing of two or more pattern indicia.

    (1)     Note.  A device of this subclass converts a combinational-code* to
    or from a one-hole-code*.


CLS 234/71
TXT Device under subclass 67 in which the alteration is brought about by means
    effective to interpose variable time delays between the pattern-sensing and
    tool-actuating functions in successive cycles.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass (71) and the following
    subclass (72) concerns generally the relocation (or suppression) of data
    from certain portions of a pattern, while preceding subclasses 68 and 69
    deal generally with modification of the significance of the data itself
    (e.g., the relocation of punched holes in a column).

    (2)     Note.  A typical device of this subclass effects the
    "standardization" of a perforated music roll such that all perforations in
    the reproduced roll have locations and lengths expressable in whole
    multiples of a unit space.


CLS 234/72
TXT Device under subclass 67 wherein the alteration is brought about by varying
    the effect of the sensing means (of the device of subclass 59) with respect
    to a predetermined portion of a pattern, as follows:  (1) disablement of
    the sensing means, (2) interruption of the transmission of tool-selecting
    control impulses from the sensing means to corresponding tool-selecting
    means, or (3) establishment of an alternate or an additional channel for
    transmission of such control impulses to other tool-selecting means.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note under subclass 71, above.

    (2)     Note.  The functions found in machines of this type include the
    "skipping" of a pattern-field* or a zone of a workpiece (i.e., omission to
    sense and/or to punch the field or zone in question), and the
    "transposition" or "shift" of fields (i.e., changing their effective
    position, as by sensing two such fields in altered sequence.

    (3)     Note.  Fig. 14 illustrates shift of data fields, without alteration
    of the significance of the data.  Columns A-E of the pattern (Fig. 9) now
    appear in the order C, D, E, A, and B respectively, which may be
    appropriate to a different form of business record.

    Fig. 14 With shift of pattern fields. (subclass 72)

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13+,    for programmed means which can modify the effect of a pattern data
    (as by skipping over certain fields of data in a pattern).

    25+     and 53, for other instances of pattern- controlled operations which
    may include field suppression, selection, or shift.


CLS 234/73
TXT Device under subclass 72 wherein the means to alter the effect of pattern
    data comprises electrical circuitry with shiftable connections or
    characteristics.

    (1)     Note.  The devices in this subclass include plugboards,
    multi-position switches, and the like, for facilitating changes in machine
    set-ups.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13+     and 22+, for disclosures of such equipment and devices with
    automatic, programmed, or randomly actuated, auxiliary functions.


CLS 234/74
TXT Device under subclass 59 wherein the sensing means is capable of generating
    any one of a plurality of signals or impulses distinct in degree or
    character, in response to different sizes or kinds of pattern indicia or
    characteristics being sensed, and including means to select distinct tools
    or combinations of tools corresponding to such distinct signals or impulses.

    (1)     Note.  For example, the pattern senser may distinguish between
    larger and smaller pattern holes to cause the selection of different tools
    or combination of tools.


CLS 234/75
TXT Device under subclass 59 comprising means for effecting relative
    progressive movement between the pattern and the sensing means during the
    sensing operation.

    (1)     Note.  Either or both of the pattern or the sensing means may move
    (e.g., pattern card or tape sensed while in motion through the device, or a
    stationary record "scanned" by moving pattern sensers.

    (2)     Note.  As an alternative to moving the pattern or the sensers, all
    points of a stationary pattern may be sensed simultaneously and the data
    may be read out in steps (e.g., column-by-column) to the tool-selecting
    means, over a system of shiftable connections (see subclass 66).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for pattern-sensing means which may be disclosed as operating upon
    a moving pattern.

    64,     for a gang-punching* machine which may disclose the sensing of a
    card in motion.

    66,     for means to read data in sequential steps from a full bank of
    pattern sensers, and see (2) Note, above.


CLS 234/76
TXT Device under subclass 59 including means to bring a portion of a tool into
    position of contact with said pattern, whereby said tool functions as a
    sensing means.

    (1)     Note.  Selected tools may be latched in position to relieve the
    pattern of tool-driving stresses, after the pattern has effected
    preliminary tool positioning.


CLS 234/77
TXT Device under subclass 76 including yieldable individual tool-actuating
    power trains so arranged that the tools which do not contact said pattern
    are forced into cutting relationship with a workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  The pattern functions as a mask or stencil to block the
    operation of unselected tools.

    (2)     Note.  See Fig. 1 (described in section II, (2) Note) for
    illustrative mechanism.


CLS 234/78
TXT Device under subclass 76 including individual tool-actuating power trains,
    said power trains comprising spaced driving and driven elements with lost
    motion or misalignment therebetween, and means to support said pattern
    generally between said driving and driven elements so that portions of the
    pattern serve to complete the driving power trains to the so-selected tools.

    (1)     Note.  The pattern has the form of an inverse stencil (i.e., having
    blank areas corresponding to holes to be punched, and holes corresponding
    to areas to be left unpunched).


CLS 234/79
TXT Device under subclass 59 provided with mechanism to impart progressive
    relative movement between the pattern and said sensing means between
    successive sensing operations.

    (1)     Note.  Feed* means is to be distinguished from means which merely
    initially presents the pattern to the sensers, or vice versa.  In the
    majority of pattern-controlled selective cutting machines, the pattern is
    advanced continuously or intermittently during successive sensing and
    cutting or punching cycles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for programmed means to alter the feed of a pattern.

    27      and 29, for randomly-actuated control of pattern feed.

    66,     for a machine having serial read-out to the tool selectors from a
    full bank of sensers (as an alternative to pattern feed means).

    75,     for means to effect relative movement between pattern and sensers
    during the sensing operation.


CLS 234/80
TXT Device under subclass 79 wherein means is provided for (1) changing the
    position of the pattern relative to the sensing means, or vice versa, (2)
    altering the rate of progress of the pattern relative to the sensing means,
    or (3) altering the effectiveness of the sensing means in degree or mode of
    operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for a method comprising the step of modifying the effectiveness of
    a pattern.

    53+,    for means to select from among a plurality of input sources, some
    of which may be pattern-sensing devices.


CLS 234/81
TXT Device under subclass 79 in which the sensing means, in response to
    detection of a pattern indicium or characteristic, moves a selected tool,
    or initiates the transmission of force from a source of energy to move said
    tool, into such position that (1) an actuating power train is completed to
    drive said tool through its working stroke, or (2) a latching or blocking
    mechanism is caused to hold said tool in operative position while a
    cooperating tool is actuated.

    (1)     Note.  No interposer* is employed in mechanism of this type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117+,   for a tool selection means in general which effects completion of a
    power drive train to a selected tool without the use of an interposer.


CLS 234/82
TXT Device under subclass 79 wherein the sensing means directly initiates or
    permits the application of energy to a selected complete individual
    tool-actuating power train.

    (1)     Note.  A device classifiable in this subclass is termed
    "direct-acting" in that the senser, although it does not transmit
    tool-actuating force, controls and determines the application of actuating
    force from a power source to a tool, without the use of an interposer or
    other selecting means.

    (2)     Note.  For example, the pattern-senser may comprise a contact brush
    which completes an energizing circuit for a tool-driving magnet upon
    detection of a hole in the pattern; or the senser, upon detection of a
    pattern indicium, may release a latch or restraining device for a
    yieldably-biased tool, freeing the latter for actuation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106+,   for a device effective to cause the actuation of a plurality of
    selected tools, without interposers (coded direct punching).

    117+,   for means to select a single tool by moving an element of the tool
    drive train into power-transmitting relationship with a drive means.


CLS 234/83
TXT Device under subclass 82 wherein the indicia-detecting means itself
    constitutes drive means for the selected tool or tools.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     for a device wherein the selected tool is driven by a power train
    which comprises the pattern and a senser-like portion of the tool itself.

    81,     for a device wherein the selected tool is latched in
    power-receiving position after having been moved thereto preliminarily by
    the sensing means.


CLS 234/84
TXT Device under subclass 79 wherein the sensing means in response to the
    detection of indicia effects the movement of an interposer*.

    (1)     Note.  In a device of this type, the pattern-senser generally
    controls the motion of the interposer, even though a specific arrangement
    of biasing springs or weights may tend to obscure this relationship.


CLS 234/85
TXT Device under subclass 84 wherein said interposer moves bodily with and is
    effectively unitary with said sensing means.


CLS 234/86
TXT Device under subclass 84 including means which continually tends to move an
    interposer* toward or from its effective position and simultaneously to
    move the associated sensing means toward its most advanced (i.e.,
    indicium-responsive) position.

    (1)     Note.  The mechanism typically comprises cyclically-actuated means
    to retract the sensers from engagement with the pattern, against the force
    of the biasing means.

    (2)     Note.  Fig. 16 illustrates typical mechanism of this subclass.
    Pattern P and workpiece W are usually advanced in step-by-step manner past
    the senser(s) S and tool(s) T.  S is biased by a weak spring toward contact
    with P, and is retracted therefrom after each sensing operation by a
    reciprocating bail B. When, in any cycle of operation, senser S detects a
    hole in P (by entry therein) it causes sufficient movement of its
    interconnected interposer I to control the conditioning of tool T for
    cutting or noncutting, as desired.

    Fig. 16. BIASED INTERPOSER AND SENSER (subclass 86).


CLS 234/87
TXT Device under subclass 79 including means responsive to actuation of the
    sensing means to initiate or terminate the transmission of force from a
    power drive train for moving an interposer* from one of its two (effective,
    ineffective) positions to the other position.

    (1)     Note.  Typical mechanism is illustrated in Fig. 17, wherein the
    progressively advance pattern P is sensed by a contact brush to control a
    circuit for the positioning magnet of an interposer I.



    Fig. 17 SENSER CONTROLS POWER TO MOVE INTERPOSER (subclass 87).


CLS 234/88
TXT Device under subclass 87 wherein said force-transmission initiating or
    terminating means functions by coupling or uncoupling the interposer* (or a
    driving element connected thereto) to or from the power drive train, which
    drive train operates periodically.


CLS 234/89
TXT Device under subclass 59 (and not classifiable in any other class) wherein
    the invention relates to the pattern or record to be used with the device
    and/or the mechanism for reading or sensing a pattern or record.

    (1)     Note.  A patent to a pattern-controlled selective cutting device
    may be placed as an original in this subclass if it discloses but does not
    claim specific pattern-controlled means for selecting tools.

    (2)     Note.  A pattern or a senser for use in the control of auxiliary
    mechanism not claimed, may be found in this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  A patent which is originally classified elsewhere in this
    class should be cross-referenced in subclass 89 if it discloses novel
    pattern or senser structure not elsewhere provided for in the schedule.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13+,    for disclosure of a program card or tape, and for a combined
    program and pattern medium, in connection with the device utilizing it.

    23+,    25+, 53+, and 59-88, for disclosures of pattern media.

    74,     for a differentially responsive sensing means.

    75,     for means to sense a moving record or to scan a stationary record.


CLS 234/90
TXT Device under the class definition including means responsive to a
    tool-selecting operation to partially condition a power drive train for
    subsequent actuation of a selected tool, and means responsive to a
    subsequent tool-selecting operation, or to the passage of time, to complete
    such conditioning of the power drive train.

    (1)     Note.  A common purpose for such a device is to provide what is
    loosely termed one-stroke storage*, thus affording the operative of a
    keyboard machine an opportunity of recitifying an error if it is perceived
    before the next key has been struck.

    (2)     Note. Storage* is not necessarily involved in machines of this type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23+,    for randomly-controlled means which, under certain conditions, will
    delay the punching of input data until a required "letters" or "figures"
    shift symbol has been inserted.


CLS 234/91
TXT Device under subclass 90 comprising an input-means*, a plurality of groups
    of tools and associated selecting mechanisms, and means responsive to the
    operation of a selecting mechanism of one group to shift operating
    connections from the input-means to another group of selecting mechanisms.

    (1)     Note.  The typical disclosure of this subclass comprises a
    keyboard, a pin-setting carriage, a full bank of selecting pins and
    associated punches, and means to step the carriage along column-by-column
    as selections are made.  Punching is effected after all of a predetermined
    group of columns have been set, and may be manually initiated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92,     for a similar disclosure wherein the input-means and shiftable
    operating connections are not claimed.


CLS 234/92
TXT Device under the class definition including means movable or adjustable
    from one position or condition to another; such means, while in the one
    position, being effective to prevent restoration (i.e., return to idle or
    nonselecting condition) of the tool-selection means and, in the other
    position, being effective to cause or permit such restoration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for optionally-settable means to clear a storage instrumentality
    upon read-out therefrom.


CLS 234/93
TXT Device under subclass 92 including a plurality of such movable or
    adjustable means, each operative on the selection means of a distinct group
    of tools.

    (1)     Note.  A device of this type usually enables retention of data or
    clearing (at will) of individual columns, as when punching cards with some
    fixed and some variable data.  For a device in which all the columns are
    treated simultaneously as a group, see subclass 92, generic hereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     for a device of the column-by-column setting type provided with
    selective column clearing means.

    92,     for means to clear all the selection means.


CLS 234/94
TXT Device under the class definition provided with mechanism to condition a
    plurality of tool pairs in response to an input-impulse.*

    (1)     Note.  Tool acutation may follow as a result of selection, or may
    be effected by independent means (e.g., by hand lever) after one or more
    selections have been made.

    (2)     Note.  Means to select a plurality of tool pairs in response to a
    single input-impulse constitutes a combinational-coding means*, as
    distinguished from means to produce a one-hole-(or positional) code.

    (3)     Note.  For original placement in subclass 94, a patent must claim
    specific tool-selection mechanism, i.e., such mechanism must be recited in
    terms of structural relationships.

    (4)     Note.  Fig. 18 illustrates a form of combinational-coding means
    wherein a coding memeber CSM is pivotally mounted to swing in either
    direction from its neutral position upon depression of either key K or K'.
    In either of its actuated positions, member CSM closes circuits to move
    interposers I to condition a group of tools (not shown) to perforate a
    distinctive code symbol in a workpiece.

    Fig.18. COMBINATIONAL-CODIN- MEANS (subclass 94).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59+,    for pattern-controlled means to select tool pairs.

    109+,   for means to select a single tool pair, and see (2) Note, above.


CLS 234/95
TXT Device under subclass 94 wherein the mechanism is effective to condition a
    plurality of tool pairs in timed sequence in response to such input-impulse.


CLS 234/96
TXT Device under subclass 94 provided with means to modify a code or substitute
    one code for another, or means to reduce or simplify the operations
    required for such modification or substitution.

    (1)     Note.  A shift key or equivalent mechanism may be found in this
    subclass if it alters the selection of type bars or the like; but not if it
    merely shifts the bars so that a different portion of the same bars becomes
    effective.

    (2)     Note.  Exemplary devices of this type usually comprise a plurality
    of such parts associated with different portions of the input means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for a programmed means to change code.

    24,     for a randomly-actuated means to change code.


CLS 234/97
TXT Device under subclass 94 wherein the conditioning mechanism comprises a
    coded-interposer*.

    (1)     Note.  The interposer when in effective position, serves either (1)
    as the last link of the power train to the driven tools of the selected
    pairs, or (2) as blocking means to hold the "fixed" tools in effective
    position to cooperate with their associated driven tools.

    (2)     Note.  One of a plurality of elements which is movable into an
    active position to control the selecting of a plurality of tool pairs, but
    which does not contact the tools, may constitute a coded selector member*,
    for which see subclass 102.


CLS 234/98
TXT Device under subclass 97 wherein the interposer has a plurality of
    effective positions in each of which it engages a different combination or
    group of tools.

    (1)     Note.  See Fig. 4 (described in section II, (2) Note) for
    illustrative mechanism.


CLS 234/99
TXT Device under subclass 98 wherein a plurality of interposers are movable as
    a unit to and between said effective positions by rotation of said unit.


CLS 234/100
TXT Device under subclass 99 in which the turret of interposers constitutes a
    part of the drive train to the selected tool pairs.

    (1)     Note.  The interposers in this subclass function as
    power-transmitting elements of the tool-driving train, as distinguished
    from other interposers which serve merely to block the "fixed" tools of the
    selected pairs and thus do not transmit power.

    (2)     Note.  Fig. 19 illustrates mechanism exemplary of this subclass.
    The turret of interposers is adjustable to three positions, in each of
    which a different combination of tools is conditioned for actuation by the
    press ram acting through the tool-aligned interposer lugs.

    Fig. 19,        TURRET OF ACTIVE INTERPOSERS (subclass 100).


CLS 234/101
TXT Device under subclass 97 provided with means to move the interposer other
    than by effort exerted by an operative.


CLS 234/102
TXT Device under subclass 94 wherein the tool- conditioning mechanisms comprise
    a plurality of independent elements each movable, in response to an
    input-impulse*, from an ineffective position to an effective position in
    which it initiates the selection of a plurality of tool pairs for actuation
    by other means.

    (1)     Note.  A coded selector member differs from a coded interposer in
    that (1) it does not engage the selected tools, and (2) it has only one
    effective position (as distinguished from the differentially- positioned
    interposer of subclass 98).  See Fig. 20 (under subclass 105) for a
    specific example of a coded selector member.


CLS 234/103
TXT Device under subclass 102 in which the movable element in effective
    position closes a selection-controlling circuit.


CLS 234/104
TXT Device under subclass 102 wherein each independent element has a companion
    element connected thereto for movement thereby in the opposite direction,
    said elements being so arranged that either one or the other element will
    always be in position to respond to an input-impulse*.

    (1)     Note.  Mechanism of the subclass type affords fast and positive
    response, and eliminates the need for restoring springs.


CLS 234/105
TXT Device under subclass 102 provided with means connecting a plurality of
    interposers to each selector element to be moved to effective position by
    the movement of a selector element.

    (1)     Note.  Mechanism of this subclass type differs from that found in
    subclass 97 above, in that it includes some form of power drive trains
    between the coded element and a number of a single interposers (i.e., each
    interposer controls a single tool pair), while the coded interposer of
    subclass 97 consists of a unitary element which is engageable with a
    pluralty of tools to control a plurality of tool pairs.

    (2)     Note.  Fig. 20 represents typical basic mechanism of this subclass.
     The differently positioned lugs on the levers of keys A and B, constitute,
    with their levers, coded-selector-means which are adapted to drive distinct
    groups of interposers.

    Fig. 20.        CODED SELECTOR MEANS COMBINED WITH INTERPOSERS (subclass
    105).


CLS 234/106
TXT Device under subclass 94 wherein the tool-conditioning mechanism is
    constituted solely of means to drive a plurality of tools through their
    cutting stroke, or to directly initiate the transmission of actuation force
    to a plurality of tools from a source of power.

    (1)     Note.  A device of this type performs "coded direct punching", by
    utilizing the movement of a key-lever or the like, either to drive certain
    of the tools directly or to actuate valves, clutches, or electrical
    contacts to apply power to certain tools.

    (2)     Note.  In this case the tool "selecting means" is not distinct from
    the tool "actuating means"; tool "selection" is achieved by applying power
    to a predetermined group of tools; in other words, tool selection and
    actuation are effected simultaneously by a common impulse through a common
    channel.

    (3)     Note.  See Fig. 2 (described in section II, (2) Note) for an
    illustrative example of mechanism classifiable in this subclass.  Compare
    Fig. 6 (independent tool-actuating linkages lying side-by-side; no coding
    mechanism present).


CLS 234/107
TXT Device under subclass 106 wherein the means directly controls the
    transmission of actuating force to a plurality of tools from a source of
    power.


CLS 234/108
TXT Device under subclass 107 wherein the means controls the application of
    electrical power to electromechanical transducers associated with the tool
    pairs to drive the same.

    (1)     Note.  Fig. 21 illustrates circuitry and mechanism typical of this
    subclass. Depression of a key closes circuits to energize a group of
    tool-actuating solenoids.



    (The lowermost key (D) is shown as controlling only one tool, but at least
    two other keys control distinct subgroups of the total number of tools,
    thus constituting combinational-coding-means* under the class definition).



    Fig. 21.        DIRECT CODED ACTUATION, INDIVIDUAL ELECTRIC DRIVES
    (subclass 108).


CLS 234/109
TXT Device under the class definition provided with mechanism to condition one
    tool pair.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass (109) uncludes devices wherein a member, when
    in effective position, engages and blocks actuation of an associated tool.
    Such a blocking member is not an interposer*, for it does not "engage a
    tool---for actuation".

    (2)     Note.  For original placement in subclass 109, a patent must claim
    specific tool-selection mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59+,    for pattern-controlled means to select one or more tool pairs.

    94+,    for means to select a plurality of tool pairs (i.e.,
    combinational-coding-means).


CLS 234/110
TXT Device under subclass 109 wherein the tool pair and its actuating power
    train are permanently connected by actuating linkage having a portion which
    normally has idling motion rendering the linkage ineffective to transmit
    power to the tool, and wherein the conditioning mechanism comprises an
    element movable into blocking engagement with said portion to furnish a
    fulcrum therefor, whereby said linkage is made effective to actuate said
    tool.

    (1)     Note.  Fig. 22 illustrates basic mechanism of this subclass.  A
    continuously rotating crankshaft carries a crankpin which is slidable in a
    longitudinal slot in the actuating lever.  The lever is restrained against
    longitudinal movement by suitable guides, not shown, so that it oscillates
    idly in a vertical plane during the normal or retracted condition of the
    latch.  Depression of key K projects the latch into the path of idle
    movement of the lever, constraining the latter to pivot about the latch as
    a fulcrum and thus to drive tool T downwardly upon each rotation of the
    crankshaft.



    Fig. 22.        Typical Mechanism of subclass 110.


CLS 234/111
TXT Device under subclass 109 wherein the tool- conditioning mechanism
    comprises an interposer*.


CLS 234/112
TXT Device under subclass 111 wherein the interposer is movable to a plurality
    of effective positions in each of which it engages and effects selection of
    a different tool.

    (1)     Note.  See Fig. 3 (described in section II, (2) Note), for
    illustrative mechanism.


CLS 234/113
TXT Device under subclass 112 wherein a plurality of interposers are movable as
    a unit to and between said effective positions by rotation of said unit.


CLS 234/114
TXT Device under subclass 111 including a source of mechanical energy and means
    effective to transmit or make available said energy to move the interposer
    to or from its effective position.


CLS 234/115
TXT Device under subclass 114 in which the source of energy comprises an
    electro-mechanical transducer for each interposer.


CLS 234/116
TXT Device under subclass 111 in which the interposer in moving to and from an
    effective position moves rectilinearly.


CLS 234/117
TXT Device under subclass 109 in which said tool-conditioning mechanism
    comprises means capable of moving a tool or an element of a tool-actuating
    drive train into power receiving engagement with a movable actuator.

    (1)     Note.  The mechanism of this subclass is distinguishable from the
    interposer mechanism of subclass 111 in that the movable element is at all
    times drivingly connected to its associated tool.

    (2)     Note.  Fig. 23 illustrates typical mechanism of this subclass.  A
    dog or link, pivotally attached to tool T, is movable into and out of
    alignment with reciprocable hammer H, by positioning-linkage controlled by
    a key or other means.

    Fig. 23.        Typical Mechanism of subclass 117.


CLS 234/118
TXT Device under subclass 117 wherein said moving means effects the movement of
    at least a portion of a tool into such position that an actuating drive
    train for the tool is completed.


CLS 234/119
TXT Device under subclass 117 wherein the movable actuator has continuous
    rotary motion.


CLS 234/120
TXT Device under the class definition including means not provided for in the
    preceding subclasses, which is responsive to a signal or impulse
    originating externally of the device or from an unspecified source, to
    control a disclosed tool-selecting mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  A patent to the combination of an input-means* (e.g.,
    keyboard) and a specific tool selecting mechanism is placed as an original
    in subclass 94 or 109 in accordance with the type of selecting mechanism
    claimed.  For original placement in subclass 120, a patent should be drawn
    to a specific input-means associated with a selective cutting device
    whereof the selecting mechanism is disclosed but not significantly claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59,     for an input-means of the pattern sensing type.


CLS 234/121
TXT Device under subclass 120 wherein the responsive means comprises a member
    which is capable of adjustment to two or more positions, in each of which
    positions it generates a distinct signal or impulse effective to control
    the selection of tools to be actuated.

    (1)     Note.  A differentially-positionable input element is typically a
    slide bar, a drum or a pivoted lever, by means of which a plurality of
    distinct tool-selection controls may be obtained, as distinguished from a
    simple key or pushbutton which has only one effective or control position.

    (2)     Note.  The control signal or impulse of the subclass definition is
    to be distinguished from the input-impulse* which effects adjustment of the
    movable input member.

    (3)     Note.  In many cases, a visual guide such as a numbered scale, or a
    design to be reproduced, is associated with the positionable input device
    but does not of itself exert a control on the positioning of the input
    member (i.e., it is not a pattern*).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for means to hold a picture or design to be traced by a
    manually-movable stylus controlling tool selections.

    74,     for a differentially-responsive pattern senser.


CLS 234/122
TXT Device under subclass 120 wherein the responsive means consists of a number
    of distinct mechanisms or electrical circuits each responsive to such
    signal or impulse from an external or unspecified source.

    (1)     Note.  A number of patents which disclose plural input channels are
    originally classified in subclass 121.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for a device having independent manual input means for a plurality
    of tool fields.

    121,    for a disclosure of plural input means of the
    differentially-positionable type.


CLS 234/123
TXT Device under subclass 122 wherein the distinct mechanisms comprise
    manually-actuatable levers or push-buttons.

    (1)     Note.  In general, the actuatable levers or push-buttons found in
    this subclass have only one effective position and one ineffective
    position, as distinguished from the differentially positionable elements of
    subclass 121.

    (2)     Note.  A patent disclosing novelty in keyboard or key-linkage
    structure, or in the connections therefrom to a tool- selecting mechanism,
    and not classifiable in a preceding subclass, may be placed as an original
    in this subclass.  The broad recitation or disclosure of a key or keyboard
    is insufficient for this purpose.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    for an example of a keyboard-controlled coded direct punching
    device.


CLS 234/124
TXT Device under subclass 123 including means, responsive to actuation of such
    keyboard means to initiate, terminate, or modify an operation of the device
    other than the selection of tools.

    (1)     Note.  This feature, particularly with reference to auxiliary keys
    for controlling the advance of a workpiece, is disclosed in many of the
    more complex machines classified in preceding subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36+,    for a combined printing and punching machine which may be of the
    keyboard type having "space bar" or "space key" mechanism.

    91,     for a conventional back-spacing and/or canceling key mechanism in a
    column-by-column keyboard selective punch device.


CLS 234/125
TXT Device under subclass 124 in which the keyboard means is capable of causing
    a plurality of actuations of tools which have been selected by other means.

    (1)     Note.  The mechanism of this subclass is commonly known as a
    "repeat key mechanism".  The key may be arranged to effect, at each
    operation, an unlimited or a predetermined number of repetitions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for means to stop a machine or portion thereof after a
    predetermined number of operations.


CLS 234/126
TXT Device under the class definition provided with mechanism effective to
    advance a workpiece* relative to a tool station with continuous or
    intermittent motion and means for changing the rate of advance or length of
    workpiece fed from one tool cycle to another.

    (1)     Note.  A patent will be placed in an appropriate preceding subclass
    if it includes claimed specific tool-selection mechanism or input means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 241+ for means to vary work feed increment in a
    cutting machine.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 139+ for a
    means to vary feed increments of an advancing web.


CLS 234/127
TXT Device under subclass 126 including means responsive to the selection of a
    particular tool, or to the number or combinational arrangement of the tools
    chosen for a cycle of actuation, to control the work-feed varying means.

    (1)     Note.  For example, in a selective tape punch which records symbols
    of varying length (e.g., Morse or cable code characters), the increment of
    tape feed after each punching cycle may be made equal to the length of tape
    occupied by the character punched.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for means to insert justification symbols related to the widths of
    characters represented by punched symbols.


CLS 234/128
TXT Device under the class definition provided with mechanism for advancing a
    workpiece* into position to be acted upon at a tool station and/or for
    retaining a workpiece in such position.

    (1)     Note.  The feeding, clamping, or other handling of work is included
    in the term auxiliary-operation*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46+,    for a card notching device, which includes means for holding a card
    in fixed position.

    126+,   for means to vary work feed increment in a selective cutting
    machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses, for a work mover or work holder
    associated with a cutting or punching device.

    269,    Work Holders, for means to hold or support work during treatment
    thereof.


CLS 234/129
TXT Device under subclass 128 provided with means capable of advancing a
    workpiece relative to a tool field in either of two opposed directions.

    (1)     Note.  The "back spacing" mechanism on a card or tape punch is an
    example of such a device.

    (2)     Note.  The work advance in this subclass (129) is preparatory to a
    cutting operation, i.e., not the ejection of work from the machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 220 for means to advance work in opposite
    directions, intermittently, in a cutting machine.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 49+ for
    selectively-operated means to reverse the direction of motion of a web.


CLS 234/130
TXT Device under subclass 128 wherein the mechanism comprises a holder which
    moves progressively with the work in timed relation to successive cutting
    operations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 276+ for work feed means which advances
    intermittently with the work in timed relation to cutting operations in a
    cutting machine.


CLS 234/131
TXT Device under the class definition which comprises a feature not provided
    for in any prior subclass in this schedule.

    (1)     Note.  A patent to indicating mechanism associated with
    tool-selecting mechanism will be placed originally in subclasses 94+ or
    109+, and cross-referenced into subclass 131.  If, however, the selecting
    mechanism is only nominally or incompletely claimed, the patent should be
    placed originally in subclass 131.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, for an indicating device of more general
    application.


CLS 235/
TTL REGISTERS

CLS 235/
TXT This class includes machines employed for ascertaining the number of
    movements of various devices or machines; also, indicating devices where
    the purpose is to disclose the numerical extent or quantity of movement of
    a machine and where the device is separate and independent of the machine
    whose movements are to be noted; also organized machines, such as,
    cash-registers, fare-registers, voting machines and calculators having
    registering or counting devices as essential or important elements and
    having in addition certain other features necessary to make up the complete
    machines for the purposes desired.  In this class are also recording
    calculating machines, as--recording cash-registers, and recording
    voting-machines, which are classified herein instead of in classes
    providing for the particular recording means, by reason of the analogy of
    the machines as entireties to other machines (cash-registers, etc.), in
    this class.  These recording devices usually, but not invariably, comprise
    attachments for printing numbers.

    Registers, per se, include attachments to machines where the purpose is to
    ascertain or count the number of movements thereof, such as
    engine-counters, counters for printing-presses, etc.  They also include
    devices comprising indicating hands or pointers (or equivalents thereof),
    whether moved regularly or irregularly, forward or backward, in cooperation
    with a scale or index to disclose the numerical extent of movement.

    In addition to registers, per se, the class is subdivided into various
    groups according to the functions of the machines classified therein.

    The registering mechanisms employed in cash-registers (except those in
    subclass 13) and calculators are capable of being operated to different
    extents--that is, if they comprise drums having numerals from "0" to "9" on
    their peripheries they may be operated one step or more up to the limit at
    one operation, dependent upon the key or equivalent actuated.  Moreover,
    any drum or drums (or equivalent) in the set representing different orders,
    as units, tens, etc., or dollars and cents, may be operated either singly
    or together.  In these respects the registers are different in their
    operation from those in the other groups, where the actuator is in
    operative relation only with the wheel or other device of lowest order and
    moves the same one step at a time, the tens being "carried" as this or any
    other wheel completes its rotation.

    Cash-registers, classified in this class, are classified machines employed
    in mercantile establishments for the purpose of keeping a check upon the
    financial transactions.  These machines usually comprise keys or
    equivalents, registering devices, indicating-tablets, or drums to disclose
    to the purchaser the amount of the sale, a cash-drawer, a bell or other
    alarm, and various subordinate devices mainly for the purpose of compelling
    the clerk or cashier to completely and correctly operate the machine.  It
    also includes machines where an autographic record of the transaction is
    made upon a movable strip of paper, together with means for moving the
    paper, a cash-drawer, and other subsidiary devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 250.001+ for
    attachments for cleaning windows of registers, where only the features of
    the register casing and window are claimed that provide for attachment and
    operation of the cleaning element.  When other register features are
    claimed, for example, an operating connection with the register mechanism,
    classification is in Class 235.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, for all registering measuring instruments
    wherein the register is claimed broadly or specifically in combination with
    significant measuring structure of the type provided for in said class.
    Class 235 includes only registering mechanism, per se, for measuring
    instruments. However, since it is usually necessary to include with the
    register some conventional measuring element to define a locus or setting
    for the register, the mere naming in a claim or claims of such conventional
    measuring element or its description in general terms will not exclude such
    claims from Class 235.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 551+ for fluid handling apparatus
    including a register in combination.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 64 and 250.01+ for well processes and apparatus
    involving registers or counting means.

    221,    Article Dispensing, particularly subclass 7 for article dispensing
    devices, not otherwise provided for, combined with dispenser operated
    registers.

    222,    Dispensing, particularly subclasses 24-38 for registers combined
    with significant dispensing features.

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), subclasses 4+ for a selective
    punching device having means to totalize incremental values assigned to the
    different punches (for justification control); subclass 21 for a selective
    punching device having means to register the number of its operations (for
    control purposes).

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 130+
    for generic data processing control systems; subclass 300 for programming
    methods or procedures; subclasses 400+ for particular application of data
    processing systems or calculating computers; subclasses 550+ for data
    processing systems or calculating computers utilized to effect a measuring,
    testing, or monitoring operation of an external device or quantity;
    subclasses 600+ for hybrid computers; subclasses 700+ for digital
    calculating computers; subclasses 800+ for analog computers.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, for registering thermal measuring
    instruments wherein the register is claimed broadly or specifically in
    combination with significant measuring structure of the type provided for
    in said class.  Class 235 includes only registering mechanism, per se, for
    measuring instruments.  However, since it is usually necessary to include
    with the register some conventional measuring element to define a locus or
    setting for the register, the mere naming in a claim or claims of such
    conventional measuring element or its description in general terms will not
    exclude such claims from Class 235.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 101+ for
    data presentation and computer graphics, and subclasses 180+ for generic
    digital processing systems and methods.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 75+ for machine operation of an
    electrophotographic device reproducing copies, particularly subclasses 79+
    for accounting of usage or copies produced.

    453,    Coin Handling, appropriate subclasses for coin handling
    subcombinations.


CLS 235/1
TXT Subject matter under the class definition not elsewhere classifiable.


CLS 235/2
TXT Cash-registers under the class definition embodying both a register and a
    recording attachment or an attachment for printing the amount of the sale
    registered.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58+,    for calculators having recording mechanism.


CLS 235/3
TXT Cash-registers under subclass 2 having in addition an attachment for
    feeding, printing, and delivering from the machine a check showing the
    amount of the sale, together with additional data, if desired, such as the
    date of the transaction, etc.


CLS 235/4
TXT Machines under the class definition constructed like cash-registers, but
    having the register replaced by a recording device for preserving a record
    of the sales.


CLS 235/5
TXT Cash-recorders under subclass 4 containing a movable strip of paper on
    which a memorandum of the transaction is manually made, together with
    devices ordinarily found in cash-registers for moving the paper and also,
    if desired, other features characteristic of cash-recorders.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 520+ for a machine in
    which an autographic record of a registered transaction is made upon
    movable strips of material, either singly or in duplicate, one or more of
    the strips being rolled up in the machine, and comprising nothing more than
    the strips of paper, together with a means for moving the same and rolling
    them within the machine.


CLS 235/6
TXT Cash-registers under subclass 7 including two or more separate and distinct
    attachments for registering the sales of different clerks or departments, a
    single set of cash-keys, and separate keys or other devices whereby the
    cash-keys may be placed in operative connection with any desired
    registering attachments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     for multiple fare registers.


CLS 235/7
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising cash-registers.


CLS 235/8
TXT Cash-registers under subclass 7 where the keys are employed merely for
    setting certain parts into operative position, which parts by a subsequent
    movement of another part of the machine are so actuated as to cause the
    operation of the machine.


CLS 235/9
TXT Cash-registers under subclass 8 operated by the rotation of a crank or the
    movement of a lever.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for lever operated, dial cash-registers


CLS 235/10
TXT Cash-registers under subclass 8 operated by the movement of the drawer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for drawer operating mechanism, per se.


CLS 235/11
TXT Cash-registers under subclass 8 wherein the movement of the key releases a
    spring or other motor which actuates the machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for motor operated calculators.


CLS 235/12
TXT Cash-registers under subclass 7 in which the pressing of the key causes the
    operation of the various parts of the cash-register, as the indicators,
    registers, drawer-opening devices, etc.


CLS 235/13
TXT Cash-registers under subclass 12 wherein a separate and independent
    register is connected to each key.


CLS 235/14
TXT Cash-registers under subclass 12 wherein several keys act upon the same set
    of register wheels, the wheels being actuated a different distance
    according to the value of the key operated.


CLS 235/15
TXT Cash-registers under subclass 14 having differential mechanism where a
    key-lever when actuated is connected with a coupling or "universal" bar, so
    that when several keys are thus coupled further pressure upon any one of
    such keys will cause the operation of the machine.


CLS 235/16
TXT Cash-registers under subclass 14 having differential mechanism wherein the
    key-levers move a certain distance, depending upon the value of the key,
    before causing any movement of the parts to be actuated.


CLS 235/17
TXT Cash-registers under subclass 7 wherein checks or disks or the like are
    employed for the purpose of registering the sales.


CLS 235/18
TXT Cash-registers under subclass 17 employing a number of balls to register
    the sales, the balls sometimes being superposed in a transparent tube, the
    tube or the casing bearing graduation, so that the number corresponding to
    a column of any height may be ascertained from inspection, or the balls may
    be employed in various other ways.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for ball calculators.

    123,    for ball indicators.


CLS 235/19
TXT Cash-registers under subclass 7 without keys but having a pointer movable
    over a dial, the pointer being moved by hand and in or by its movement
    causing the operation of the various parts of the machine.  In this
    subclass the pointer traveling over the face of the dial serves as the
    indicator.


CLS 235/20
TXT Cash-registers under subclass 19 having a separate indicator.


CLS 235/21
TXT Cash-registers under subclass 19 wherein a pointer or the like connected to
    a lever or its equivalent is moved over a graduated scale, the extent of
    movement determining the operation of the machine by the lever.


CLS 235/22
TXT Mechanism under subclass 7 whereby the drawer of a cash-register is opened
    or by which it is released so that it may be thrown open by means of a
    spring normally pressing against it; also, any mechanism whereby the drawer
    is operated in any way.


CLS 235/23
TXT Mechanism under subclass 7 for operating or for causing to be operated the
    indicators of a cash-register.


CLS 235/24
TXT Subject matter under subclass 23 comprising shutters or screens and
    operating devices therefore, whereby the figures on the indicators are
    obscured during part of the operation of the machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 24 for registers with shutters claimed in
    combination with significant dispensing features.


CLS 235/25
TXT Devices under subclass 23 for causing the dropping of the tablets of a
    cash-register after they have been displayed.


CLS 235/26
TXT Devices under subclass 7 for preventing the simultaneous operation of two
    or more keys or for preventing the operation of more than a pre-determined
    number of keys.


CLS 235/27
TXT Devices under subclass 7 for locking the keys of a cash-register or other
    calculating machine against movement--as, for example, when the proprietor
    leaves the machine for a time and does not wish it operated during his
    absence.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130,    for register locking means in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 663+ for typewriter key locks.


CLS 235/28
TXT Subject matter under subclass 7 comprising registers that count or indicate
    the number of times the lid or cover of a cash-register has been opened.


CLS 235/29
TXT Fare-registers under subclass 33 including two or more separate registers
    for indicating different classes of fare, whether such registers are
    entirely independent of each other or whether they have either a common
    trip-register or a common totalizer.


CLS 235/30
TXT Devices under subclass 33 attached to a cab or other vehicle, adapted to be
    actuated either by a time-train or according to the distance traveled, at
    the option of the passenger, the connection being made by the driver, said
    device indicating to the passenger the time or distance and the amount of
    fare he is to pay for such time or distance.


CLS 235/31
TXT Structures under subclass 33 containing a roll of tickets, one of which,
    either punched or not, is withdrawn and given to each passenger and at the
    same time is counted upon a register.


CLS 235/32
TXT Fare-boxes under subclass 33 for street-cars etc., containing a register
    operated by the fare or the ticket or during the operation of the box to
    cause the fare to be dropped from one part to another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    for coin registering boxes.


CLS 235/33
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising machines employed in
    street-cars, operated by the conductor when taking fares and serving to
    indicate and register the number of fares taken.  These machines include an
    operating-lever or its equivalent actuated by cords or rods accessible from
    any point of the car, registers, trip or total, or both, alarm devices, and
    various auxiliary devices, mainly for the purpose of preventing the
    conductor "beating" the machine.


CLS 235/34
TXT Fare-registers under subclass 33 whose trip-register is a pointer moving
    around a graduated dial and whose totalizer is composed of a series of
    cylinders placed side by side.


CLS 235/35
TXT Fare-registers under subclass 33 whose registering devices are belts or
    short flat links forming endless chains, upon which the numbers are placed.


CLS 235/36
TXT Fare-registers under subclass 33, having a plurality of registers located
    on axes parallel with each other.


CLS 235/37
TXT Fare-registers under subclass 36 having two sets of registering devices, as
    for trip and total, each set composed of a number of cylinders placed side
    by side.


CLS 235/38
TXT Fare-registers under subclass 36 whose registering devices, whether in one
    set only or in two sets--trip and total--are composed of a number of
    pointers, each moving around a graduated dial, the pointers of each set in
    the higher orders being actuated one graduation when the pointer or the
    lower order has made a complete rotation.


CLS 235/39
TXT Fare-registers under subclass 36 including one or more sets of registering
    devices, each set composed of disks numbered upon their faces, the numbers
    showing successively through an aperture in the casing as the disks are
    rotated, the disks of lower orders transferring to those of higher orders
    as they make complete rotations.


CLS 235/40
TXT Fare-registers under subclass 33 having one or more registers arranged on a
    single axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for similarly arranged dial and cylinder fare registers.


CLS 235/41
TXT Fare-registers under subclass 40 whose registering devices comprise a
    plurality of disks numbered on their faces and placed concentrically upon a
    single shaft or axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78      and 116, for other single axis, concentric disk devices.


CLS 235/42
TXT Fare-registers under subclass 40 whose registering devices are composed of
    a series of drums placed side by side upon a single shaft.  In some cases
    these drums are arranged in two sets, a trip and total, the sets being
    separated from each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34      and 37, for other cylinder type fare registers.


CLS 235/43
TXT Fare-registers under subclass 40 wherein the registering attachment
    comprises one or more hands moving over a dial and arranged around the same
    axis in a manner similar to the hour and minute hands of a clock, but
    ordinarily actuated step by step.


CLS 235/44
TXT Devices under subclass 33, other than the internal mechanism of a
    fare-register, for operating the same.


CLS 235/45
TXT Operating devices under subclass 44 for fare-registers composed partly of
    electrical circuits, cut-offs, etc.


CLS 235/46
TXT Subject matter under subclass 44 comprising registering ticket-punches and
    the like.


CLS 235/47
TXT Devices under subclass 33 by which the trip-register of a fare-register is
    set back to zero at the beginning of a trip.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass, while similar to subclass 144, in one respect
    (restoring the register-wheels to zero) differs from it in that while such
    restoration is going on various other operations are or may be
    performed-such as locking the machine against movement, setting the trip or
    direction indicator, moving a zero-register, etc.


CLS 235/48
TXT Subject matter under subclass 47 comprising devices in a fare-register for
    indicating the direction the car is moving and mechanism for actuating the
    same.


CLS 235/49
TXT Subject matter under subclass 33 comprising additions to the trip-register
    of a fare-register by which its capacity is increased.


CLS 235/50
TXT Voting-machines under subclass 51 having a device for recording upon a
    strip of paper or its equivalent the number of votes cast. The machine may
    or may not also have a registering attachment.


CLS 235/51
TXT Machines under the class definition employed for mechanically casting and
    counting votes.  These machines usually comprise keys or equivalents, one
    for each candidate, and in most cases a key whereby a single movement a
    vote can be given for the entire set of candidates for either part,
    interlocking mechanism for preventing votes being given for more than the
    proper number of candidates, and various auxiliary devices.


CLS 235/52
TXT Voting-machines under subclass 51 by means of which legislators or members
    of assemblies can, by operating keys or levers, indicate a "yes" and "no"
    vote, these devices frequently having registers connected therewith for
    counting up the totals of such votes.  In many cases these devices are
    connected with the desks of the legislators.


CLS 235/53
TXT Voting machines under subclass 51 wherein a check or ball is employed to
    operate the registering device.


CLS 235/54
TXT Voting-machines under subclass 51 wherein the movement of the key sets in
    position for further operation certain parts, the operation of such parts
    and through them the registers, etc., being effected by means of a device
    afterwards operated, such as the door of the booth which is operated by the
    voter when he departs, etc.


CLS 235/55
TXT Voting-machines under subclass 51 wherein the registering is effected by
    the direct action of the keys or levers.


CLS 235/56
TXT Voting-machines under subclass 51 whereby the votes are marked upon
    "Australian ballots" are enabled to be rapidly counted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    386,    for systems wherein a ballot is sensed and the results are
    tabulated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    705,    Data Processing: Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/Price Determination, subclass 12 for a system to calculate the totals
    of vote returns.


CLS 235/57
TXT Ballot-boxes under the class definition having attachments for registering
    the number of ballots placed therein.


CLS 235/58
TXT Calculators under subclass 61 which contain adding or other calculating
    mechanism and devices for recording the numbers set up or the results, or
    both.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     432, 433, and 434, see subclass 60 below.


CLS 235/59
TXT Recording calculating-machines under subclass 58, where the actuation of
    the key directly operates the registering and recording devices.


CLS 235/60
TXT Recording calculating-machines under subclass 58 where the depression of a
    key sets certain devices in position and a succeeding movement of another
    part, as a handle or lever, operates the machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     for recording voting machines.

    59,     for recording calculating machines wherein the depression of a key
    directly operates the registering and recording devices.

    432,    433 and 434, for recording calculating machines controlled by the
    sensing of data representing indicia on a record.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclasses 2, 19+ and 93+ for mechanism for concurrently
    printing a plurality of characters, when such printing mechanism is
    disclosed without calculating structure or is not claimed in combination
    with significant calculating structure of the type provided for in Class
    235.

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), appropriate subclasses, for
    manually controlled mechanism which records by selectively punching a sheet
    or web, wherein no calculating machine is included.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 549+ for devices wherein recording is
    effected by photographing selected characters on a movable member, when
    such devices are disclosed without calculating structure or are not claimed
    in combination with significant calculating structure of the type provided
    for in Class 235.


    400,    Typewriting Machines, for digit-by- digit printing mechanism for
    concurrently printing a plurality of characters, when such printing
    mechanism is disclosed without calculating structure or is not claimed in
    combination with significant calculating structure of the type provided for
    in Class 235.


CLS 235/60.11
TXT Subject matter under subclass 60 wherein the recording is effected by other
    than printing or punching means.  This subclass receives calculators
    provided with photographic recording means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    396,    Photography, subclasses 549+ for devices wherein recording is
    effected by photographing selected characters on a movable member, when
    such devices are disclosed without calculating structure or are not claimed
    in combination with significant calculating structure of the type provided
    for in Class 235.


CLS 235/60.12
TXT Subject matter under subclass 60 comprising a typewriter combined with a
    calculator, wherein the two units are each of substantially standard
    construction and are capable of separation and independent use.  These
    machines are generally characterized by the presence of separate and
    complete keyboards for each unit and the provision of locking and
    interlocking devices controlling the operation of the two units and/or
    interconnections between the typewriter keys and calculator keys, or
    differential actuators, to eliminate duplication in indexing amounts.  This
    subclass receives a combined machine of the type defined even though it may
    have a platen common to the typewriting mechanism and to spearate printing
    mechanism in the calculator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59,     for typewriter calculating machines, wherein digital entries are
    effected in a totalizer by or with the operation of numeral keys of the
    typewriter.

    60.38+, for typewriter calculating machines, wherein the typewriter keys
    control typing in the ususal fashion, but digital values are set up in
    indexing mechanism under control of the typewriter numeral keys and are
    entered concurrently in a plurality of orders of the totalizing mechanism
    after the completion of a multi-digit typing operation.


CLS 235/60.13
TXT Subject matter under subclass 60 provided with a plurality of distinct
    recording means for recording on different portions of the same record
    receiving medium or for recording on different record receiving mediums.


CLS 235/60.15
TXT Subject matter under subclass 60 comprising devices for recording other
    than numerical data.


CLS 235/60.16
TXT Subject matter under subclass 60.15 in which alphabetical data is recorded.
     The alphabetical recording elements may be mounted on a member which also
    carries numerical recording elements or on separate members, as in a
    typewriter calculator. This sublcass only receives typewriter calculators
    where some feature peculiar to alphabetical printing is claimed in
    combination with subject matter under subclass 60.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60.38+, see subclass 60.12 above.


CLS 235/60.17
TXT Subject matter under subclass 60.15 in which the recorded data comprises
    signs or characters for indicating the zeroizing or clearing of a totalizer
    or totalizers. This subclass receives devices for indicating totalizer
    clearance by printing in a distinctive color.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144,    for zero setting or totalizer clearing devices, per se, or when
    combined with means for signalling the cleared condition of a totalizer.


CLS 235/60.18
TXT Subject matter under subclass 60.15 in which the recorded data comprises
    distinctive characters or symbols for the purpose of indicating the nature
    of some phase of a calculating operation.  These characters or symbols may
    be indicative of the totalizer or totalizers selected for entering or total
    taking operations, the nature of an entering operation, as addition or
    subtraction or the positive or negative condition of the amount standing in
    a totalizer, etc.


CLS 235/60.19
TXT Subject matter under subclass 60 wherein recording is effected in a
    distinctive color, as by shifting a multicolor ribbon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60.17,  for mechanism for recording distinctive characters for indicating
    the zeroizing or clearing of a totalizer.

    60.18,  for mechanism for recording distinctive characters for the purpose
    of indicating the nature of some phase of a calculating operation, other
    than clearing a totalizer.


CLS 235/60.2
TXT Subject matter under subclass 60 comprising mechanism for controlling the
    recording means to record the true total from totalizer or result receiving
    elements which contain a negative or overdraft amount, as a result of the
    subtraction of an amount or amounts which exceed the total of positive or
    additive entries therein, or such means as is necessarily incidental to a
    true negative total recording operation.


CLS 235/60.22
TXT Subject matter under subclass 60.2 in which electrical means are employed
    for reading the total from the totalizer or result receiving elements or in
    controlling the elements which record the true negative total.


CLS 235/60.23
TXT Subject matter under subclass 60 comprising devices for selectively
    splitting a continuous series of printing devices into distinct and
    separately operating sections, generally by rendering the zero print
    controlling devices ineffective at the point at which splitting is effected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60.28,  for devices for controlling zero recording in the operation of gang
    recording mechanism.


CLS 235/60.24
TXT Subject matter under subclass 60 including devices for causing the printing
    of a total by a greater number of printing elements than are employed in
    printing the items which are entered to form the total. Such devices are
    employed where overflow orders of the totalizer extend beyond the printing
    elements which are allocated to and are operative in item printing
    operations, and it is necessary to call additional printing elements into
    operation during total taking operations to print a total under control of
    these overflow orders.


CLS 235/60.25
TXT Subject matter under subclass 60 comprising means to disable or render
    ineffective the recording mechanism, whereby an amount may be entered into
    the calculator without being recorded.  These controls are of the type
    usually known as "nonprint" devices.


CLS 235/60.26
TXT Subject matter under subclass 60 comprising means to disable or render
    ineffective the mechanism for entering amounts into the register or
    totalizing means, whereby an amount may be recorded without being entered
    into the calculator.


CLS 235/60.27
TXT Subject matter under subclass 60 wherein a plurality of recording elements
    are selectively positioned in an operation and a common operator is
    subsequently effective to cause recording from each of said positioned
    elements.


CLS 235/60.28
TXT Subject matter under subclass 60.27 comprising devices for controlling the
    recording of zeros in orders in which no significant digit appears.

    (1)     Note.  These devices are usually controlled by a higher order
    recording element which is positioned to record a significant digit, to
    cause zero recording by adjacent lower elements in which no such digit
    appears and to suppress zero recording from recording elements in orders
    above the order in which the highest significant digit appears.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass receives manually settable devices in machines
    of the type provided for in subclass 60.27 for enabling or suppressing zero
    recording, whether in combination with the automatic devices mentioned in
    (1) Note or not.


CLS 235/60.29
TXT Subject matter under subclass 60.27 in which recording is effected by
    punching.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    434,    for mechanism for recording by punching when claimed in combination
    with record controlled calculating structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), appropriate subclasses, and
    particularly subclass 91 for selective recording mechanism which comprises
    successively selected and simultaneously actuated cutting tools.


CLS 235/60.3
TXT Subject matter under subclass 60.27 comprising total taking means for
    positioning recording elements in accordance with the settings of totalizer
    or result receiving elements, and such mechanism as is necessarily
    incidental thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for means for taking totals from a totalizer in a cash register.

    50,     for means for taking totals from the counters in a voting machine.

    60.39+, for total taking means of the digit-by-digit recording type.

    432,    433 and 434, for means to record the results of totals taken in
    record-controlled calculators.


CLS 235/60.31
TXT Subject matter under subclass 60.3 wherein the recording elements are
    positioned by restoring the result receiving or totalizer elements to their
    zero position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144,    for zero-setting or totalizer clearing devices, per se.


CLS 235/60.32
TXT Subject matter under subclass 60.31 comprising devices for avoiding the
    blank cycle which is necessary in many types of calculating machines in
    order to condition the totalizer or other calculating structure for a total
    reading operation. These blank cycles are usually necessary in order to
    restore tripped tens carry devices to their normal positions.


CLS 235/60.33
TXT Subject matter under subclass 60.3 wherein the recording elements are
    positioned by sensing the totalizer or result elements or under control of
    devices which sense said totalizer or result elements.  This subclass
    receives total sensing devices wherein the feelers are permanently engaged
    with the result elements.


CLS 235/60.34
TXT Subject matter under subclass 60.33 comprising mechanism for restoring the
    totalizer or result elements to their zero positions after the total
    sensing operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144,    for zero-setting or totalizer clearing devices, per se.


CLS 235/60.35
TXT Subject matter under subclass 60.3 wherein the selection of recording
    elements, or operative portions thereof, which effect recording, is
    controlled by impulses which are differently timed; that is, the relative
    timing of the controlling impulses determines the digits which are to be
    recorded.  The differentially timed impulses are usually electrical in
    nature, as in electrical record controlled calculating machines.  However,
    this subclass receives mechanical machines wherein recording elements are
    selected by mechanically operated means which are operated at differential
    times.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    432,    433 and 434, for printing and punching devices, respectively, which
    are operated by differentially timed impulses, when claimed in combination
    with record controlled calculating structure.


CLS 235/60.37
TXT Subject matter under subclass 60.3 in which a total or result is recorded
    by taking a direct impression from a totalizer or result element, or from a
    recording element directly coupled thereto.


CLS 235/60.38
TXT Subject matter under subclass 60 comprising recording means of the type
    wherein one digit is recorded at a time and escapement of the device which
    carries the record medium permits successive recording. This subclass
    receives typewriter computing means of the type wherein the typewriter keys
    control typing in the usual fashion. In addition, the numeral keys, by
    means of carriage controlled devices, cause the values of digital
    characters typed to be successively set up in an indexing mechanism, which
    mechanism controls entry of said set up values concurrently into a
    plurality of totalizer orders upon the completion of a multidigit typing
    operation. Where denominational selection of the indexing or digit
    receiving set up means is claimed, classification is in this subclass or
    indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60.41+, for carriage control features, other than denominational selection,
    particularly subclasses 60.47+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), appropriate subclasses, for a
    selective step-by-step punching device, and particularly subclasses 120+
    for input means for such a device which may involve calculating machine
    structure.


CLS 235/60.39
TXT Subject matter under subclass 60.38 comprising total taking means for
    selecting digit recording elements in accordance with the settings of a
    totalizer or result receiving elements, and such means as is necessarily
    incidental thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60.3,   for gang recording means combined with total taking structure.


CLS 235/60.4
TXT Subject matter under subclass 60.39 in which the total taking means is
    controlled, at least in part, by electrical means.


CLS 235/60.41
TXT Subject matter under subclass 60 comprising a carriage which carries the
    paper or other medium upon which recording is effected and is so movable as
    to cause recording upon different portions of the record receiving medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60.38+, for carriage controlled selection of the successive denominational
    orders into which digital entries are effected.


CLS 235/60.42
TXT Subject matter under subclass 60.41 comprising devices for controlling
    feeding or positioning of the carriage.


CLS 235/60.44
TXT Subject matter under subclass 60.42 comprising mechanism for moving the
    carriage back and forth, or shutting it, between two positions.


CLS 235/60.45
TXT Subject matter under subclass 60.42 comprising power means, other than the
    usual spring means, for moving the carriage from one position to another.


CLS 235/60.46
TXT Subject matter under subclass 60.42 comprising means for selectively
    positioning the carriage at various columnar positions.


CLS 235/60.47
TXT Subject matter under subclass 60.41 comprising means controlled by the
    position of the carriage for controlling various functions of the machine.


CLS 235/60.48
TXT Subject matter under subclass 60.47 for selecting a totalizer or totalizers
    for either item entering or total taking operation.The totalizer selection
    means may be combined with means for controlling the nature of an entering
    operation and may effect totalizer selection by enabling or disabling
    totalizer actuating or item receiving mechanism.


CLS 235/60.49
TXT Subject matter under subclass 60.47 for controlling devices for locking
    various machine elements or for controlling interlocks between various
    elements of the machine.


CLS 235/60.5
TXT Subject matter under subclass 60.47 comprising structures or elemens, which
    are carried by the carriage for operating some machine control mechanism.


CLS 235/60.51
TXT Subject matter under subclass 60 comprising means for controlling operation
    of the platen or paper feeding mechanism.


CLS 235/60.52
TXT Subject matter under subclass 60 comprising means controlled by the platen
    or paper feeding means for controlling various functions of the machine.


CLS 235/61
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising calculating-machines.
    In this group are classified machines for mechanically performing the
    various mathematical operations, usually those of addition or subtraction,
    frequently that of multiplication, and occasionally of division.  These
    machines generally comprise registers and keys or equivalents for operating
    them, together with necessary auxiliary devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, for means for calculating unknown
    functions of geometrical figures, said means having members designed to
    form representations of said figures.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 861.43+ for integrating means
    combined with flow meter structures.

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclasses 25+ for a weigher with means making a
    calculation using a weight evaluation by the weigher as a factor.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 8.5+ for
    cathode-ray tube systems responsive to electrical pulses for counting or
    storing such pulses, or for translating such pulses from one code to
    another code, and subclass 84.5 for electrical pulse counting or storing
    circuits employing gaseous space discharge devices.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 19 for
    differentiating or integrating networks of the passive type.


CLS 235/62
TXT Calculating-machines under subclass 61 wherein the pressing of a key
    releases a spring or other motor which actuates the devices to the extent
    determined by the value of the key operated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for motor operated cash registers.


CLS 235/63
TXT Calculating-machines under subclass 61 having a single set of keys and
    having devices movable from order to order of the registering mechanism and
    connecting the keys successively therewith.


CLS 235/64
TXT Subject matter under subclass 61 comprising devices attached to a pencil or
    similar instrument which are employed to keep account of the sum of columns
    to be added or the number of tens to be "carried", usually operated by the
    pressure of the point upon the paper or desk.



    Adding devices that are merely adapted to be clamped to a pencil, but do
    not form part thereof and are not operated by the movement of the pencil,
    are not classified herein, but are classified according to the structure of
    the adding device itself.


CLS 235/64.3
TXT Subject matter under subclass 61 comprising devices either in conjunction
    with a logarithmic calculator or apart from such calculator, which devices
    have a scale or scales to determine the location of a decimal point in a
    calculation.


CLS 235/64.7
TXT Calculators under subclass 61 having movable members variably positionable
    with respect to one another, at least one of said members having an index
    or scale positionable opposite a point on a scale on the other member and
    there being at least one scale having values peculiar to the art of
    photography.


CLS 235/65
TXT Subject matter under subclass 61 comprising adding-machines having two
    parts, a bar and a disk, one part being for the lower orders and the other
    for the higher.


CLS 235/66
TXT Subject matter under subclass 61 comprising adding-machines having two
    parts, a cylinder and a disk, or a plurality of either.


CLS 235/67
TXT Subject matter under subclass 61 comprising adding-machines wherein the
    numbers are arranged spirally, either around the surfce of a cylinder or
    upon the face of a disk, there ordinarily being a pointer or its equivalent
    that travels in cooperation with the cylinder or disk in order to indicate
    the proper figure or number.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for spiral registers.


CLS 235/68
TXT Calculators under subclass 61 wherein the registering devices are composed
    of balls.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18      and 123, for other ball devices.


CLS 235/69
TXT Calculating devices under subclass 61 wherein a bar or bars bearing
    numerals are employed instead of disks or cylinders.


CLS 235/70
TXT Subject matter under subclass 69 comprising rules consisting of a
    stationary base, and one or more slides movable therein, both the base and
    the slides being graduated, usually logarithmically, according to the
    different elements of some mathematical formula, so that by placing the
    slide in proper relation to the base, problems embodying such formula may
    be solved without calculation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79.5    and 84, for other types of slide rules.


CLS 235/71
TXT Calculating-machines under subclass 61 wherein movable belts bearing
    numerals are employed instead of cylinders or disks. Machines wherein belts
    are employed as devices whereby to operate registering or calculating
    cylinders, etc., are not classified herein, but are located according to
    the character of the registering mechanism.


CLS 235/72
TXT Calculating-machines under subclass 61, wherein the registering devices are
    placed upon axes parallel with each other.


CLS 235/73
TXT Calculating-machines under subclass 72 whose registering attachments
    comprise cylinders placed either singly or in sets on axes parallel with
    each other.


CLS 235/74
TXT Calculating-machines under subclass 72 whose registering attachments
    comprise disks placed upon axes parallel with each other, the disks being
    actuated by some instrument held in the hand, such as a stylus, pencil, etc.


CLS 235/75
TXT Calculating-machines under subclass 74, wherein the disks are each operated
    by means of keys.


CLS 235/76
TXT Calculating-machines under subclass 72 whose registering devices are on
    axes parallel with each other, these devices being connected by gears
    instead of by intermittent transfer mechanism.


CLS 235/77
TXT Calculators under subclass 61, whose registering devices are placed upon
    the same axis.


CLS 235/78
TXT Calculating-machines under subclass 77 whose registering devices comprise a
    plurality of disks numbered on their faces and mounted in a base, said
    disks being placed concentrically on a single shaft or axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41      and 116, for other concentric disk devices.


CLS 235/79
TXT Calculating machines under subclass 77, whose registering devices are
    composed of cylindrical members mounted for rotation on a common axis.


CLS 235/79.5
TXT Calculating devices under subclass 79 wherein two or more relatively
    movable cylindrical members are so graduated, usually logarithmically
    according to the elements of some mathematical formula, that by placing one
    in proper relation to another problems involving such formula may be solved.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for bar slide rules.

    84,     for disk slide rules.


CLS 235/80
TXT Calculators under subclass 79 whose registering devices comprise cylinders
    placed upon a single axis, these cylinders being operated directly by means
    of the fingers of the operator or by a stylus, pencil, or other instrument
    held in the hand.


CLS 235/81
TXT Calculators under subclass 80 whose registering devices comprise cylinders
    placed side by side upon a single axis, these cylinders being operated by
    levers or equivalents having handles or the like movable to different
    extents over a graduated plate.


CLS 235/82
TXT Calculating-machines under subclass 79 having registering devices composed
    of a series of cylinders placed side by side upon a common shaft and being
    directly operated by the depression of keys, with which the machine is
    provided.


CLS 235/83
TXT Calculators, under subclass 77 whose registering devices comprise a
    rotatable disk mounted on a base, or one or more hands or pointers movable
    over the face of a dial properly graduated.


CLS 235/84
TXT Subject matter under subclass 83 comprising slide rules, as defined in
    subclass 70 wherein the base and the slides instead of being straight are
    circular.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70      and 79.5, for other types of slide rules.


CLS 235/85
TXT Calculators under subclass 61 comprising a table showing results calculated
    from certain data so arranged that by properly manipulating the same any
    desired result is obtained.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclasses 34+ for a tabular type computer
    combined with a weigher.


CLS 235/86
TXT Tabular calculators under subclass 85 having the tables placed upon belts
    which are movable back and forth, as desired.


CLS 235/87
TXT Tabular calculators under subclass 85 having tables formed or placed upon
    cylinders.


CLS 235/88
TXT Tabular calculators under subclass 85 having tables placed upon disks which
    rotate about their centers.


CLS 235/89
TXT Tabular calculators under subclass 85 having tables placed upon sheets, the
    sheets being attached to a frame either permanently or temporarily and a
    guiding-strip or the like being provided to used in connection with the
    sheets.


CLS 235/90
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising boards such as
    cribbage boards and the like, for tallying purposes, the tallying being
    accomplished by means of pegs or the like successively moved to different
    holes as the tally increases.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 325+ for similar peg type
    indicators.


CLS 235/91
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising devices for operating
    registers, the specific construction of the registers not being of the
    invention.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56      and 419+, for record controlled operating devices for registering
    mechanisms.


CLS 235/93
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising registers connected
    with and operated by a turnstile.


CLS 235/94
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising registers operated by
    means of a faucet or other part through or in which the fluid passes,such
    as registering-faucets, registers connected with saucers holding
    beer-glasses, registering bottles, etc.


CLS 235/95
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising registers connected or
    attached to the wheel or axle of a vehicle, such as a carriage or bicycle,
    for the purpose of counting the number of revolutions made by the wheel
    and, with the knowledge of the size of the wheel, of measuring the distance
    traveled, the counting-wheels being marked to indicate the distances
    instead of the number of revolutions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 490 for an odometer combined with a
    speedometer.


CLS 235/96
TXT Subject matter under subclass 95 comprising details or isolated parts of
    odometers or parts connected therewith, such as tappets, brackets, etc.


CLS 235/97
TXT Odometers under subclass 95 having two sets of registering devices, one set
    moving continuously to indicate the entire distance traveled and the other
    set capable of being reset to zero at any desired time and adapted to
    indicate the distance traveled during a single trip or in a day or any
    desired interval of time.


CLS 235/98
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising registers operated by
    a package, barrel, etc., passing through the machines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power Driven, subclass 503 for conveyor organizations
    including broadly claimed counters.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 7 for plural article dispensing
    organizations not otherwise provided for, including dispenser operated
    register structures.


CLS 235/99
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising registers operated
    through the medium of a depressible seat, platform, or the like on which
    the person sits or steps or the article is placed.


CLS 235/100
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising registers operated by
    a coin as it passes into a box or other receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for similar fare or ticket registers.


CLS 235/101
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising registers operated by
    the hand-stamp or by postage stamp dispensing or printing mechanisms.


CLS 235/102
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising devices for counting
    the number of words etc., written by a typewriter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), subclasses 4+ for a keyboard
    operated selective punching machine provided with an inter-word-space
    counter.


CLS 235/103
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising instruments for
    counting the number of rotations made by a shaft or other piece of
    machinery.


CLS 235/103.5
TXT Subject matter under subclass 103 comprising instruments for comparing the
    number of rotations made by two or more shafts or other pieces of machinery.


CLS 235/104
TXT Subject matter under subclass 103 comprising instruments or machines for
    counting or indicating the number of rotations in a given time made by a
    shaft or other piece of machinery--as, for example, the number of rotations
    per second or minute or even the number of miles per hour made by a moving
    vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 488+ for speed sensing mechanism
    for producing similar indications.


CLS 235/105
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising instruments attached
    to the foot or body for counting the number of steps made; also, devices
    for analogous purposes.


CLS 235/106
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising machines having
    several registering devices placed on axes at angles to each other.


CLS 235/107
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising registers wherein the
    numbers are arranged spirally, either around the surface of a cylinder or
    upo the face of a disk, a pointer being sometimes employed which travels
    along the cylinder or disk in order to indicate the proper numeral.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     for spiral calculators.


CLS 235/108
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising registers, counting
    devices on axes parallel with each other.


CLS 235/109
TXT Registers under subclass 108 whose counting devices are connected by
    gearing instead of intermittently-operating transfer mechanism.


CLS 235/110
TXT Registers under subclass 108 whose counting devices comprise several
    cylinders or drums.


CLS 235/111
TXT Registers under subclass 108 whose counting devices include both graduated
    movable disks and pointers passing over graduated dials.


CLS 235/112
TXT Registers under subclass 108 whose counting devices include several
    graduated dials over whose surfaces pass pointers or hands.


CLS 235/113
TXT Registers under subclass 108 whose counting devices include a plurality of
    rotatable disks having numbers on their faces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111,    for dial and disk registers.


CLS 235/114
TXT Registers under subclass 113, the disks being separately operated by hand.
    These registers are generally used in keeping count of the points made in
    games.


CLS 235/115
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising registers whose
    counting devices are placed upon a single axis.


CLS 235/116
TXT Registers under subclass 115 whose counting devices comprise a plurality of
    disks numbered upon their faces and mounted on a base, said disks being
    placed concentrically upon the shaft or axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41      and 78, for other concentric disk devices.


CLS 235/117
TXT Registers under subclass 115 whose counting devices comprise a plurality of
    cylinders placed side by side upon the shaft or axis.


CLS 235/118
TXT Registers under subclass 117 whose counting devices comprise a single
    cylinder numbered on its periphery.


CLS 235/119
TXT Registers under subclass 115 whose counting devices comprise two or more
    cylinders, the cylinders having connected or formed therewith gears having
    different numbers of teeth, but actuated by the same gear, thus causing a
    slow movement of one cylinder with respect to the other.


CLS 235/120
TXT Registers under subclass 115 whose counting devices comprise several
    pointers or hands moving over a dial and turning around the same axis at
    different rates of speed, the relative movements being continuous, as when
    connected by gears or pinions in the same way as the hands of a watch, or
    intermittent, as when caused by transfer devices operating only when one
    hand has completed a rotation.


CLS 235/121
TXT Registers under subclass 115 whose counting devices comprise a graduated
    dial and a single hand or pointer moving thereover.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for similar registers in rotation counters.


CLS 235/122
TXT Registers under subclass 115 whose counting mechanism comprises a rotating
    disk having numbers on its face.


CLS 235/123
TXT Subject matter under the class defintion comprising counting devices where
    balls, buttons or push buttons movable upon a support are employed to count
    or keep tally of a game--such, for instance, as billiards.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     68 and 123, for other ball devices.

    90,     for peg tally boards.


CLS 235/124
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising registers embodying a
    pointer moving along a graduated bar.


CLS 235/125
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising registering-machines
    wherein the registering elements are movable belts bearing numerals.


CLS 235/127
TXT Subject matter under the class defintion comprising devices for keeping
    count of the points in a game or for equivalent purpose, comprising
    indicators pivoted to a base and adapted to be turned on their pivots--as,
    for example, from a horizontal to a vertical position--to indicate the
    desired data.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 309+ for analogous pivoted
    indicators.


CLS 235/128
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising mechanism connected to
    registering devices of any character for sounding an alarm, as by ringing a
    bell or in any other manner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 67+ for other alarms.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+ for electrical
    automatic condition responsive indicating systems.


CLS 235/130
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising devices for positively
    locking a part against movement, either temporarily until the machine shall
    have operated to a certain extent or for such a time as the operator may
    desire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for devices for locking calculating machine keys against movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 663+ for typewriter key locks, and
    subclass 676 for machine locks.


CLS 235/131
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising devices for preventing
    the accidental movement of a part or for preventing a register-wheel or
    other moving part from being carried by momentum farther than it should go.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 148+, particularly
    subclasses 152 for such devices, per se.


CLS 235/132
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising devices under control
    of a register for effecting either the stoppage of the register, or the
    starting, stopping, or other operation of apparatus controlled by the
    register (as the opening or closing of a switch) upon a particular or
    predetermined reading of the register being obtained.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47+     and 144, for means to stop the register wheels at zero during
    resetting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 52+ for packaging machines having as a
    part thereof an automatic or triggered control.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 138+, for similarly
    controlled clutches.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 14+, 27, and 39 for similar devices in
    dispensing mechanism.

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), subclass 21 for a selective
    cutting device with control means operable in response to a predetermined
    register reading.


CLS 235/133
TXT Subject matter under the class defintion comprising devices whereby a
    register-wheel of higher order is advanced one step each time a wheel of
    the next lower order has made a complete rotation.


CLS 235/134
TXT Transfer devices under subclass 133 wherein the wheel of lower order has
    connected therewith or placed thereon a cam or eccentrically-disposed pin
    acting upon a lever connected with which is a pawl or equivalent that
    actuates the wheel of higher order.


CLS 235/135
TXT Transfer devices under subclass 133 wherein the register-wheels have
    attached thereto ratchet-wheels, each wheel having one notch deeper than
    the rest, these notches being of successively-increasing depth in the
    several wheels, whereby the actuating pawl or pawls are permitted at each
    complete rotation of a wheel to move one step the wheels of the next higher
    orders.


CLS 235/136
TXT Transfer mechanism under subclass 133 comprising a pinion or equivalent
    meshing with gears attached to or connected with two register-wheels the
    gears having teeth differing in number, so that one moves at a rate
    different from the other.


CLS 235/137
TXT Transfer mechanism under subclass 133 wherein the complete rotation of a
    register-wheel sets a device into such a position that by a subsequent
    movement and by an independent actuating device it is caused to actuate one
    step the wheel of next higher order.


CLS 235/138
TXT Transfer mechanism under subclass 137 wherein the independent actuating
    device moves successively from one order to another.


CLS 235/139
TXT Transfer devices under subclass 133 comprising a pinion between each two
    register-wheels on a shaft parallel to that of said wheels, said pinion
    being actuated by the gear of one register-wheel and actuating the gear of
    the wheel of higher order, one of the gears or pinions of the set having a
    single tooth, so that the wheel of higher order is moved intermittently
    from one number to the next at each complete rotation of the wheel of lower
    order.


CLS 235/140
TXT Transfer devices under subclass 133 wherein each register-wheel has a
    single tooth upon its side (or periphery) which at each complete rotation
    engages with a ratchet-tooth on the wheel of next higher order, moving it
    one step.


CLS 235/141
TXT Transfer mechanism under subclass 140 wherein the wheel of higher order is
    locked from accidental movement when the transfer is not being effected.


CLS 235/142
TXT Transfer devices under subclass 133 comprising a pawl pivoted to and moving
    with a register-wheel which, when the wheel has completed a rotation, is
    moved radially with respect to the wheel into engagement with a pin or
    tooth on the wheel of next higher order for a time sufficient to move the
    latter one step.


CLS 235/143
TXT Transfer devices under subclass 142 except that the pivoted pawl has a
    movement transverse to the plane of the register-wheel.


CLS 235/144
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising devices by which the
    register of a calculator, cash-register, or other machine is returned to
    zero or "cleared out."

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 32+ for registers with zero-setting
    mechanism claimed in combination with significant dispensing features.


CLS 235/145
TXT Subject matter under the class defintion comprising those portions of
    registers, usually manually actuated, including keys, shift-keys, space
    bars, etc., which control and initiate the action of the calculating
    machine to determine what numbers shall be introduced and how; also to
    control subsidiary operations of the machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), subclasses 123+ for a keyboard
    associated with a selective cutting machine.


CLS 235/146
TXT Keyboards under subclass 145 which are supported above or otherwise
    adjacent to the main keyboard of the machine, often for performing some
    function additional to that of the main keyboard.


CLS 235/200
TXT Subject matter under subclass 61 utilizing fluid which represents
    information content; the system as a whole being specialized to a
    calculating function and having (1) fluid flow varying components which are
    connected by fluid storage or flow passages which, for example, act as a
    "feed back", a "carry" between components, distribute pulsed flow between
    components or act as information memory means or (2) one or more means
    utilizing a fluid, combined with a claculation value indicator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 803+ for devices of more general
    application in which fluid flow of one stream is effected by (1) fluid
    contact with another stream or by (2) use of an energy field and see the
    notes to Class 137, subclass 803 for the line between classes.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, appropriate subclasses for
    code converters which are electrical at least in part.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for electrical calculating systems in which an electrical signal
    and a fluid stream representing calculating information content form
    components of a systems.


CLS 235/201
TXT Subject matter under subclass 200 including means indicating discrete
    pulses in a fluid stream, which pulses indicate digital information content.


CLS 235/375
TXT SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY DATA BEARING RECORDS:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means to sense a
    data-bearing record in combination with a system or apparatus to utilize or
    be activated or controlled by the information sensed from the record.

    (1)     Note.  For classification herein, there must be significantly
    claimed record-sensing means, or record structure, in combination with the
    system being controlled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    419,    for record controlled mechanical or electromechanical calculators.

    435,    for record-sensing devices, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.31+ for selective
    authorization control including nominally claimed data bearing records or
    record sensing.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 400+
    for the application of a data processing system or a calculating computer
    which may include nominal recitation of a data bearing record means.

    382,    Image Analysis, subclasses 181+ for pattern or character
    recognition systems.

    705,    Data Processing: Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/Price Determination, subclasses 1+ for a business or financial data
    processing system, particularly subclasses 17+ for an electronic cash
    register or terminal having a card interface, and subclass 41 for a
    financial data processing system using an IC or "smart" card.


CLS 235/376
TXT Operations analysis:

    Subject matter under subclass 375 wherein records sensed at various
    stations supply the system with an account of materials and labor used in
    an industrial process or the progress of some process or event.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclasses 15 and 16 for counters used in industrial
    production.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 207+ for
    this subject matter having significant data processing.


CLS 235/377
TXT Time analysis:

    Subject matter under subclass 375 wherein various times entered on a record
    are sensed and a total time that has elapsed is determined.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, subclasses 80+ for recorders that provide a record of
    time elapsed.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Divider, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 20 for counters used to determine the
    passage of time.


CLS 235/378
TXT Price determination:

    Subject matter under subclass 377 including means to determine the cost
    based on the time that has elapsed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    705,    Data Processing: Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/Price Determination, subclass 48 for computers to determine price
    based on the elapse of time.


CLS 235/379
TXT Banking systems:

    Subject matter under subclass 375 wherein indicia from a bearer card or
    record and other indicia are compared with computer information regarding
    the bearer and credit reallocated among various accounts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    382,    Image Analysis, subclasses 135+ for sensing images or alphanumeric
    characters on paper money or bank checks to either recognize or classify
    the document.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 201+ for
    data processing and computer systems, per se, used in banking systems.


CLS 235/380
TXT Credit or identification card systems:

    Subject matter under subclass 375 in which an indication is produced from
    the results of comparing information as to the bearer of a record in a
    computer, the indicia sensed from the record and other information supplied
    at the record-sensing station.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.31+ for systems that
    provide a comparison of intelligence, including credit.

    382,    Image Analysis, subclasses 115+ for identification card system
    which include sensing or reading a pattern or alphanumeric characters.

    705,    Data Processing: Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/Price Determination, subclass 5.


CLS 235/381
TXT With vending:

    Subject matter under subclass 380 including means to release an article or
    merchandise.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    194,    Check-Actuated Control Mechanisms, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus responsive to a nonindicia bearing taken to deliver an article,
    particularly subclasses 216+ for a computerized value accumulator in a
    check-actuated control mechanisms.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 9 for apparatus to dispense an
    article, per se.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 2 for apparatus responsive to a nonindicia
    bearing token to provide a dispensing operation.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses
    479.01+ for computers used in article-dispensing systems.


CLS 235/382
TXT Permitting access:

    Subject matter under subclass 380 including means allowing entry of an
    individual into an area or the use of specific equipment.


CLS 235/382.5
TXT Changeable authorization:

    Subject matter under subclass 382 having an arrangement for modifying the
    data required to permit access.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are card key devices which change the card
    key which unlocks a door.


CLS 235/383
TXT Mechanized store:

    Subject matter under subclass 375 wherein purchased articles bearing coded
    indicia are sensed and cost information in the computer associated with the
    particular indicia is supplied to the station where the indicia is sensed
    to provide visual readout and/or a machine printout including total cost.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    705,    Data Processing: Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/Price Determination, subclass 5 for a  reservation data  processing
    system; and subclass 13 for a fare data processing system.


CLS 235/384
TXT Transportation:

    Subject matter under subclass 375 in which data records are used to reflect
    usage in terms of distance to produce an indication of cost.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    705,    Data Processing: Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/Price Determination, subclass 417 for a device that determines price
    (fare) based on the distance travelled.


CLS 235/385
TXT Inventory:

    Subject matter under subclass 375 wherein a record associated with or
    representative of an article is sensed, the data so sensed being used to
    compile a record of items on hand.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    705,    Data Processing: Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/Price Determination, subclasses  28+ for a data processing system for
    calculating an inventory of items on hand.


CLS 235/386
TXT Voting machine:

    Subject matter under subclass 375 including means to read sheets bearing
    hand-coded indicia representative of various categories and providing a
    total for each category.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56      and 57, for means to indicate the total number of votes cast.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    705,    Data Processing: Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/Price Determination, subclass 12 for an election result calculating
    system including significant data processing.


CLS 235/400
TXT ORDNANCE OR WEAPON SYSTEMS COMPUTERS:

    Subject matter under the class definition including apparatus capable of
    rapidly solving those mathematical problems pertaining to the ordnance.

    (1)     Note.  Ordnance includes military weapons, ammunition, and weapon
    delivery systems.

    (2)     Note.  Target includes a location or target area defined relative
    to the point at which a projectile is launched.

    (3)     Note. Projectile includes ammunition or any body projected by
    external force and continuing in motion by its own inertia, as a missile
    from a gun or mortar; or a self propelled weapon (as a rocket or torpedo).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, for straight-line-light-ray-type gun
    sights and aerial bomb sights.

    89,     Ordnance, for ordnance devices, per se, or the combination of
    significant ordnance structure combined with a calculating device.

    250,    Radiant Energy, for photocell tracking devices.

    348,    Television, for television range finders and tracking devices.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, for range finders.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, for devices to instruct in navigation
    and situations encountered in time of war.


CLS 235/401
TXT Bombing:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 including means to determine the position
    in space at which a bomb should be released from an airplane in order to
    hit a specific target.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 229+ for light-ray-type aerial
    bomb sights.

    89,     Ordnance, subclasses 1.51+ for bomb dropping.

    102,    Ammuniation and Explosives, subclass 384 for drop bombs with
    direction control means.


CLS 235/402
TXT Toss:

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein the bomb is released from an
    airplane that is pulling up or out of a dive, resulting in the bomb being
    lobbed toward the target, and including means to determine when during that
    period of pulling up or out of a dive, the bomb should be released to hit
    the target.


CLS 235/403
TXT Torpedo firing:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 including means to determine the course a
    torpedo must be given to hit a target.

    (1)     Note.  The calculations necessary to aim a torpedo differ from
    those found in subsequent subclasses in that they involve only
    considerations in a single plane.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclasses 21.1 and 23-25 for control and steering of
    torpedoes.


CLS 235/404
TXT Aiming (i.e., gun laying):

    Subject matter under subclass 400 including means to calculate the
    elevation and azimuth angles to be imparted to the gun in order to hit a
    given target.

    (1)     Note.  Included in the subclass are means to aim a gun at either a
    stationary or a moving target, from either a stationary or moving weapon.

    (2)     Note.  Factors taken into account in the calculations when aiming
    at a stationary target include ballistic factors for the ammunition used,
    wind factors, the number of times a gun has been fired, the necessary
    elevation for the shell to strike a target at a given range, etc.

    (3)     Note.  Factors taken into account in the calculations when aiming
    at a moving target, besides those mentioned in (2) include speed and course
    of the target, altitude, and the predicted future positions of the target.

    (4)     Note.  Means to calculate the course and roll or pitch angles for
    airborne weapons fixedly mounted on the airframe are excluded.


CLS 235/405
TXT Mechanical computation:

    Subject matter under subclass 404 wherein the calculations are made solely
    by mechanical means.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass, motors may be utilized to drive various
    cams, followers, or ballistic mechanisms, but they do not perform the
    calculations.


CLS 235/406
TXT With tabular chart, scale or graph:

    Subject matter under subclass 405 including means to determine the results
    of the calculation from a tabular chart, scale, or graph.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are hand held calculating devices.


CLS 235/407
TXT Compensating for weapon movement (e.g., tilt):

    Subject matter under subclass 404 including means for providing electrical
    signals or mechanical movements to the calculating device to compensate for
    weapon movement.

    (1)     Note.  Weapon movement included linear as well as angular motions,
    as on a moving platform.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 236 and 237+ for light-ray-type
    gun sight in which compensations are provided for movement of weapon.

    89,     Ordnance, subclass 41 for training mechanisms.


CLS 235/408
TXT Projectile flight time - fuse setting:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 including means to calculate the time of
    flight of the projectile to the target and/or the fuse setting in view of
    the determined time.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    89,     Ordnance, subclasses 27 and 28.05+ for firing devices.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 206+ for settable fuses.


CLS 235/409
TXT Parallax compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 including apparatus to derive a
    correction factor to compensate for errors in aiming due to the
    displacement of the director.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404+,   for subject matter of this subclass used in the generation of the
    aiming signals.


CLS 235/410
TXT Coordinate conversion:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 including apparatus to convert data from
    one system of coordinates to another, i.e., rectangular to polar.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404+,   for subject matter of this subclass used in the generation of the
    aiming signals.


CLS 235/411
TXT With target tracking means:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 including means to determine the position
    of a target and to continuously monitor or provide an indication of the
    target's position over a given period of time.

    (1)     Note.  The position of the target may be represented by determining
    its range and bearing only.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 76+ for aircraft control, and subclass 3.1
    for missile control.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 203 for photocell circuits including means
    to point at or follow an object.

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), appropriate subclasses for radar tracking.

    348,    Television, subclasses 169+ for target tracking systems utilizing
    television systems.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 3+ for range or height
    finding.


CLS 235/412
TXT Position or course prediction:

    Subject matter under subclass 411 including means to calculate the position
    or course of the target at a time in the future.


CLS 235/413
TXT Calculating speed and direction:

    Subject matter under subclass 411 including means to calculate the speed
    and/or direction of the target.


CLS 235/414
TXT Range finding:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein the distance to the target is
    determined at a givent instant or continuously in time.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are determinations of slant or ground range.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 135+ for television systems utilized for
    making measurements, including range.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring, and Testing, subclasses 3+ for range- or
    height-finding devices utilizing optical elements.


CLS 235/415
TXT With range rate change:

    Subject matter under subclass 414 including apparatus to determine or
    indicate the rate at which the range is changing.


CLS 235/416
TXT Range prediction:

    Subject matter under subclass 414 including means to indicate or calculate
    the range the target will be at a given time in the future.


CLS 235/417
TXT Ballistic factor determination:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 including means to determine ballistic
    factors, or solving ballistic equations and not utilized in any specific
    system or application as provided for above.


CLS 235/418
TXT Hand adjusted scale mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein the calculations are made by
    scale mechanisms manipulated by and held in the human hand and not provided
    for in any of the above subclasses.


CLS 235/419
TXT RECORD CONTROLLED CALCULATORS:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the calculating machines
    performing the mathermatical operations are combined with and/or controlled
    by means to sense or analyze data from a record.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass, the calculating machines perform the
    various operations either mechanically or electromechanically.

    (2)     Note.  Calculating devices wherein the calculations are performed
    by only electrical means are classified in Class 364.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   for fluidic calculators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for means to electrically perform particular calculations and
    particular structure of such means.


CLS 235/420
TXT Machine control:

    Subject matter under subclass 419 including means to control or determine
    what mathematical operations are to be performed.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are means to determine when to take a subtotal
    or total or when to switch from one operation to another, i.e., division to
    multiplication.

    (2)     Note.  Control of operations other than mathematical, such as
    printing or punching or record feeding are not classified here but in
    subclasses in this class directed to those specific operations, or data
    comparing.


CLS 235/421
TXT Multiplying:

    Subject matter under subclass 419 wherein the mathematical operation
    performed is that of multiplication.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    422,    for dividing machines which are utilized to provide a check of the
    calculations made by multiplying machines.


CLS 235/422
TXT Dividing:

    Subject matter under subclass 419 wherein the mathermatical operation
    performed is that of division.


CLS 235/423
TXT Subtraction:

    Subject matter under subclass 419 wherein the mathematical operation
    performed is that of subtraction.


CLS 235/424
TXT Item distribution:

    Subject matter under subclass 419 including means to selectively distribute
    information from a sensing means to various output devices or accumulators
    or from accumulators to other output devices.


CLS 235/425
TXT Sorting and accounting:

    Subject matter under subclass 419 in which accumulating or counting devices
    are combined with a sorting machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses for sorting machines, per se.


CLS 235/426
TXT Relay or contact type storing or accumulating:

    Subject matter under subclass 419 wherein the element for storage or
    accumulation of data sensed from the record consists of electromechanical
    relays.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 166 for
    electromechanical relay storage or retieval system, per se.


CLS 235/427
TXT Differential mechanism, synchronous:

    Subject matter under subclass 419 in which an accumulator or indicator
    element moves in synchronism with the relative movement of the record
    member and the sensing element, the accumulator or indicator element taking
    a differential position representative of the value sensed.


CLS 235/428
TXT Differential mechanism, stop set:

    Subject matter under subclass 419 wherein an interponent takes a setting
    according to a sensed value, and a storage device or accumulator then moves
    until stopped by the interponent to take a differential position
    representative of the sensed value.


CLS 235/429
TXT Translators:

    Subject matter under subclass 419 including means to convert coded indicia
    or data on the record into a different code format.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, appropriate subclasses for
    code converters, per se.


CLS 235/430
TXT Key operators:

    Subject matter under subclass 419 wherein the information sensed from a
    record member is entered in a keyboard controlled computing machine by
    devices which press on or actuate keys associated with or corresponding to
    the sensed information.


CLS 235/431
TXT With data comparing:

    Subject matter under subclass 419 including means to perform a comparison
    of two or more sets of data which may be carried upon records,
    accumulators, or other entry-receiving devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 146.2 for digital
    comparators, per se.


CLS 235/432
TXT With printing:

    Subject matter under subclass 419 combined with a mechanism for printing
    the data sensed prior to making a calculation or the results of the
    calculation, or both.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, principally subclasses 2, 19, 20, 93, and 96 for record
    controlled printing devices wherein noncalculating structure is included.


CLS 235/433
TXT With paper feeding:

    Subject matter under subclass 432 including means to advance the paper upon
    which the sensed data or calculation results are printed.


CLS 235/434
TXT With punching:

    Subject matter under subclass 419 combined with a mechanism for punching
    the data sensed or the results of the calculation, or both.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 76.1+ for a record controlled cutting or
    punching machine.

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching) subclasses 59+ for a record
    controlled selective punching machine.


CLS 235/435
TXT CODED RECORD SENSORS:

    Subject matter under the class definition including machines for sensing or
    analyzing coded indicia on a record.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 110+ for
    means to separate particularly marked cards.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 271+, 555+, and 556+ for photocell
    systems wherein a coded record is viewed by the system.

    346,    Recorders, for means to form coded records.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 2 for
    means to record on or reproduce from a card having a uniform magnetic
    coating.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 106 and 120
    for storage and retrieval of information, and subclasses 185.01+ for
    floating gate memory storage (e.g., flash memory).

    382,    Image Analysis, subclasses 181+ for pattern or character
    recognition, see Class 382, section II B (2) Note.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 119+ for devices to
    instruct individuals in cryptography wherein decoding devices may be
    employed.

    483,    Tool Changing, subclasses 8+ for a tool transfer means combined
    with a tool support or storage means, and including a control means
    responsive to tool location or identifying means.


CLS 235/436
TXT Readout control:

    Subject matter under subclass 435 including apparatus to present the
    signals representing indicia analyzed in its correct sequence regardless of
    the direction or angle of scanning.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    467     and 470, for scanning apparatus which orients the coded indicia so
    that it is optically presented to the analyzing machine in the proper
    sequence.


CLS 235/437
TXT Error checking:

    Subject matter under subclass 435 including apparatus to sense the coded
    indicia on a record and determine if it is being accurately interpreted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 157 for means to test record strip
    sprocket holes.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclasses
    48+ for error/fault detection techniques; and subclass 65 for
    missing-bit/drop-out detection.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 180+ for
    reliability and availability, fault recovery, locating, and avoidance in
    digital data processing systems.


CLS 235/438
TXT Testing:

    Subject matter under subclass 435 including apparatus to determine if the
    analyzing machine is operating correctly.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclasses
    48+ for error/fault detection techniques.


CLS 235/439
TXT Particular sensor structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 435 including the particular type of
    structure utilized to sense the coded indicia on the record.


CLS 235/440
TXT Multiple sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 439 in which the coded indicia on the record
    is sensed by more than one complete sensing structure.

    (1)     Note.  Each sensing structure may include an array of or multiple
    sensing elements.

    (2)     Note.  Classification is not proper here if one of two sensing
    structures is that which senses timing marks.

    (3)     Note.  The sensing structures may be used to simultaneously sense
    separate areas of the record or to sense the same areas at different points
    in time.

    (4)     Note.  The sensing structure may include diverse types.


CLS 235/441
TXT Electrical contact:

    Subject matter under subclass 439 wherein the record is sensed by
    completing an electrical circuit at different locations on the record where
    coded indicia exist, each location representative of and conveying
    different information.

    (1)     Note.  Including here are devices that complete an electrical
    circuit through conductive surface marks placed on the record.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    492,    for records, per se, encoded with conductive markings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 46 for means to
    complete a circuit in accordance with a patterned sheet.


CLS 235/442
TXT Perforated:

    Subject matter under subclass 441 wherein the electrical circuit is
    completed through perforations in the record.


CLS 235/443
TXT Static sensed:

    Subject matter under subclass 442 wherein all the perforations in the
    record are sensed simultaneously while the record is held stationary.


CLS 235/444
TXT Electromechanical:

    Subject matter under subclass 439 wherein the sensing structure includes a
    mechanical sensing element that moves in accordance with coded indicia on
    or in the record to close one of a plurality of electrical switches, the
    particular switch closed representative of and conveying different
    information.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 46 for means to
    complete a circuit in accordance with a patterned sheet.


CLS 235/445
TXT Perforated record:

    Subject matter under subclass 444 wherein the sensing element moves through
    or penetrates the record at points where perforations exist.


CLS 235/446
TXT Sensing element in continuous contact with record:

    Subject matter under subclass 445 wherein the sensing element is held in
    continuous contact with the record.


CLS 235/447
TXT Array:

    Subject matter under subclass 445 including a plurality of sensing elements
    forming a two-dimensional array.


CLS 235/448
TXT Raised or depressed portions on record:

    Subject matter under subclass 444 wherein the sensing element is moved in
    accordance with raised or depressed portions of the record, the raised or
    depressed portions representing the coded indicia.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are devices that move light shutter elements
    in accordance with raised or depressed portions.  The movement of the
    shutter elements completing or breaking a light path between a light source
    and a photocell.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    490,    for records, per se, encoded with material that projects from the
    plane of the record.


CLS 235/449
TXT Magnetic:

    Subject matter under subclass 439 wherein the coded indicia is sensed
    magnetically.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the coded indicia is placed on the record
    as discrete elements of magnetic material.  If the magnetic material is
    placed on the record as a continuous coating upon which information is
    subsequently inpressed, classification is in Class 360.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    493,    for records, per se, encoded with magnetic material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclass 15 for magnetic
    pattern reading type analog to digital converters.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, appropriate
    subclasses for particular recording or reproducing structure and particular
    records.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 97 for read only
    memories.


CLS 235/450
TXT Strengthen or diminish field or flux:

    Subject matter under subclass 449 wherein a sensing magnetic field or flux
    is increased or decreased in intensity in accordance with elements on or in
    the record representative of coded indicia.


CLS 235/451
TXT Capacitive:

    Subject matter under subclass 439 wherein the coded indicia is sensed by
    forming a capacitor with the sensing elements.


CLS 235/452
TXT Pneumatic:

    Subject matter under subclass 439 wherein the coded indicia on the record
    is sensed by detecting variations in fluid pressure and converting such
    variations to an electrical signal.

    (1)     Note.  The record is in the form of a perforated record, with the
    fluid penetrating areas where perforations exist.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201,    for fluid sensors utilized in fluid amplifiers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 81+ for fluid
    pressure switches.


CLS 235/453
TXT Mechanical:

    Subject matter under subclass 439 wherein the coded indicia is sensed and
    represented by entirely mechanical means.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are devices such as Bowden wires which actuate
    some other mechanical element.


CLS 235/454
TXT Optical:

    Subject matter under subclass 439 wherein the coded indicia on the record
    is sensed by transmitting light through or reflecting light from the record
    surface, the light detected being converted into an electrical signal
    representative of the indicia.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter in this subclass and those indented
    hereunder differs from that found in Class 250 in that the light detected
    is converted to an electrical signal which is further processed by
    particular circuitry, the particular circuitry including the generating and
    utilization of timing and sync signals, the storage of signals, and means
    to perform counting operations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 566+ for optical or pre-photocell
    systems only used to read coded records, and subclass 555 for photocell
    controlled circuits wherein a coded card is read.


CLS 235/455
TXT Light level control:

    Subject matter under subclass 454 including means to maintain the light
    contrast or compensate for variations in the light contrast between the
    coded indicia to be sensed and the background level of the record.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 205 wherein the intensity of the light
    illuminating an area is controlled.


CLS 235/456
TXT Multiple column code:

    Subject matter under subclass 454 wherein the coded indicia utilizes more
    than one column to represent an item of intelligence.


CLS 235/457
TXT Holographic:

    Subject matter under subclass 454 including means to sense a
    holographically encoded pattern.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 40+ for holographic systems used for
    televising an object or scene.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    1+ for holographic devices, per se.


CLS 235/458
TXT Perforated record:

    Subject matter under subclass 454 wherein the coded indicia is in the form
    of perforations, and is sensed by detecting the light passing through the
    record.


CLS 235/459
TXT Stationary:

    Subject matter under subclass 458 wherein the record is sensed entirely
    while it is stationary.


CLS 235/460
TXT Matrix of cells:

    Subject matter under subclass 459 wherein the means to sense the record
    includes a matrix of light responsive devices.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are photoelectric camera tubes.


CLS 235/461
TXT One dimensional scan:

    Subject matter under subclass 458 including apparatus to scan the record
    along one dimension while the movement of the record provides the other
    scanning component.


CLS 235/462
TXT Bar code:

    Subject matter under subclass 454 including means to sense coded indicia
    formed by a combination of bars having different reflective
    characteristics, spacings, and/or widths.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    382,    Image Analysis, subclasses 182 and 183 for reading a bar code which
    is in the form of an alphanumeric character.


CLS 235/463
TXT Bar width detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 462 including means to detect and indicate
    the width of the bars and/or the spacing between the bars.


CLS 235/464
TXT Radially configured:

    Subject matter under subclass 462 wherein the bars are arranged in a circle
    and located at points or various distances along the radii of the circle.


CLS 235/465
TXT Color:

    Subject matter under subclass 462 wherein the different reflective
    characteristics include three or more colors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    382,    Image Analysis, subclass 312 for optical image sensing, see Class
    382, section II B (4) Note.


CLS 235/466
TXT Timing:

    Subject matter under subclass 462 including means to synchronize the
    sensing apparatus in order to distinguish each indicia position.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are devices responsive to characteristics of
    the coded indicia itself to provide synchronization.


CLS 235/467
TXT Rotating prisms or mirrors:

    Subject matter under subclass 462 including prisms or mirrors for scanning
    or orienting the coded indicia relative to the sensing structure.


CLS 235/468
TXT Invisible:

    Subject matter under subclass 454 wherein the coded indicia is in the form
    of invisible markings which are made visible by illumination by an
    appropriate source and including means to analyze signals representative of
    the indicia.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are devices that sense records encoded with
    fluorescent, etc. material, which records are illuminated by infrared or
    ultraviolet light sources.

    (2)     Note.  The subject matter in this subclass and those indented
    hereunder differs from that found in Class 250 in that the light detected
    is converted to an electrical signal which is further processed by
    particular circuitry, the particular circuitry including the generating and
    utilization of timing and sync signals, the storage of signals, and means
    to perform counting operations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    491,    for records encoded with fluorescent, phosphorescent, or other
    radiation emitting substance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 336.1+ for invisible radiant energy
    responsive systems, per se, and subclass 271 for invisible coded record
    sensors, wherein no processing circuitry as outlined in (2) Note is
    included.


CLS 235/469
TXT Color coded:

    Subject matter under subclass 454 including means to detect and
    differentiate different color markings on the record, the different colors
    representing different information.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    465,    for means to sense bar codes, the individual bars being in
    different colors.


CLS 235/470
TXT With scanning of record:

    Subject matter under subclass 454 including means to scan the coded indicia
    on the record or to properly orient the coded indicia projected to the
    sensor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 234+ for means for moving optical
    systems.

    348,    Television, subclasses 96+ for film, disc, or card scanning.

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 474+ for facsimile scanning systems.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    196+ for rotating or oscillating elements which produce light deflection.

    386,    Television Signal Processing for Dynamic Recording or Reproducing,
    subclasses 42+ and 128+ for photographic television recording apparatus
    including scanning means.


CLS 235/471
TXT Cathode-ray tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 470 wherein the means to scan includes a
    cathode-ray tube.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 485 for means to scan a document with a
    cathode-ray tube.

    386,    Television Signal Processing for Dynamic Recording or Reproducing,
    subclass 130 for photographic television recording apparatus including
    cathode-ray tube.


CLS 235/472
TXT Hand held:

    Subject matter under subclass 454 in which the structural elements of the
    sensor are enclosed within a device capable of being held in the human hand.


CLS 235/473
TXT Light pipes:

    Subject matter under subclass 454 wherein light fibers are utilized to
    convey light from a light source to the coded indicia on the record and/or
    from the coded indicia to a sensor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 227.11+ for light conducting rods
    utilized as pre-photocell optical systems.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, appropriate subclasses for light conducting
    rods, per se.


CLS 235/474
TXT Synchronization:

    Subject matter under subclass 435 including means to activate the sensing
    machine upon detection of a record and at times related to the speed at
    which the record is fed past the sensing machine.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is structure to sense timing marks on a record.

    (2)     Note.  Included here is structure to synchronize the transfer of
    signals from the sensing mechanism to other circuitry.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 354+ for
    synchronization systems, per se.


CLS 235/475
TXT Feed mechanisms:

    Subject matter under subclass 435 including means to automatically insert
    and/or transport the record past the sensing machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, for apparatus to wind web material
    such as a tape.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, appropriate subclasses for particular
    sheet feeding mechanisms.


CLS 235/476
TXT Control circuits:

    Subject matter under subclass 475 including circuits to control the
    operation of the transport means.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are means to control the speed with which the
    record moves past the sensing machine.


CLS 235/477
TXT Direction:

    Subject matter under subclass 476 including means to control the direction
    in which the record passes the sensing machine.


CLS 235/478
TXT Pneumatic feed:

    Subject matter under subclass 475 wherein the record is transported under
    the control of a suction force that maintains the record in contact with a
    motive means, or the record is inserted into an evacuated space causing the
    record to move in the desired direction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclasses 4.01+ and 11+ for pneumatic
    separators, subclasses 90+ for pneumatic feeding devices, and subclasses
    194+ for pneumatic conveyors.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, appropriate subclasses for particular
    devices to pneumatically move articles.


CLS 235/479
TXT Carriage:

    Subject matter under subclass 475 wherein the record is placed in or on a
    support that is moved past the sensing machine.


CLS 235/480
TXT Direction reverse:

    Subject matter under subclass 475 wherein the means to transport the record
    includes means to reverse the direction in which the record is traveling
    after it has passed the sensing machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclasses 184+ and 255 for means to
    intermittently advance a sheet.


CLS 235/481
TXT Intermittent feed:

    Subject matter under subclass 475 including means to progressively step the
    record past the sensing machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclasses 114+ and 266 for means to
    intermittently advance a sheet.


CLS 235/482
TXT Hand feed:

    Subject matter under subclass 435 wherein a single record is manually
    presented to the sensing machine.


CLS 235/483
TXT Guides:

    Subject matter under subclass 435 including means to control the direction
    of movement and/or position of the record as it is transported through the
    sensing machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclasses 184+ and 255 for means to
    change direction of sheet travel or its orientation during delivery.


CLS 235/484
TXT Adjustable:

    Subject matter under subclass 483 wherein the means to control is
    adjustable to accommodate different size records.


CLS 235/485
TXT Aligning records:

    Subject matter under subclass 483 including means to position the record
    such that each item of coded indicia on the record is placed in proper
    orientation relative to the sensing device to insure accurate detection of
    the coded indicia.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclasses 226+ for means to align the
    sheet.


CLS 235/486
TXT Holding devices:

    Subject matter under subclass 435 including means to retain the record in a
    fixed position or configuration as it is being sensed.


CLS 235/487
TXT RECORDS:

    Subject matter under the class definition including an object containing
    coded indicia adapted to be read by a machine.

    (1)     Note.  The term coded indicia is meant to include markings,
    symbols, or combinations thereof, that represent numbers or letters of the
    alphabet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, appropriate subclasses for
    particular card structure, in particular subclass 360 for sheet carrying
    indicia.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 459 for receptacles
    containing indicia which may be in code form.

    250,    Radiant Energy, for X-rays, per se.

    283,    Printed Matter, appropriate subclasses for particular items
    containing different forms of printed matter.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    1+ for holograms.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 131+
    for magnetic record mediums.


CLS 235/488
TXT Laminated:

    Subject matter under subclass 487 wherein the record includes at least two
    substantially planar layers affixed together.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for laminated articles, per se.


CLS 235/489
TXT Perforated:

    Subject matter under subclass 487 wherein the coded indicia is in the form
    of perforations in the record.


CLS 235/490
TXT Projections:

    Subject matter under subclass 487 wherein the coded indicia includes areas
    on the record that project above the plane or surface area of the record.


CLS 235/491
TXT Fluorescent, phosphorescent, radiation emitting:

    Subject matter under subclass 487 wherein the coded indicia is placed on
    the record by the use of fluorescent, phosphorescent, or a radiation
    emitting substance.


CLS 235/492
TXT Conductive:

    Subject matter under subclass 487 wherein the coded indicia on or within
    the record is formed from conductive materials or substances.


CLS 235/493
TXT Magnetic:

    Subject matter under subclass 487 wherein the coded indicia on or within
    the record is formed from magnetic materials or substances.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclass 15 for magnetic
    pattern reading type analog to digital converters.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 131+
    for records having a continuous coating of magnetic material upon which
    information is recorded.


CLS 235/494
TXT Particular code pattern:

    Subject matter under subclass 487 wherein different items of information
    are represented by particular shaped patterns or arrangements of such
    patterns.


CLS 235/495
TXT Templates and guides:

    Subject matter under subclass 487 including aids to scan the record in the
    correct place or to place coded indicia on the record in the correct place.


CLS 236/
TTL AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE AND  HUMIDITY REGULATION

CLS 236/
TXT This class relates only to automatic temperature and humidity regulation,
    and is not to include the system where the thermostatic control constitutes
    but an element of the system, even though the system includes temperature
    regulation, such, for example, as refrigeration, where the refrigerating
    structure or method is claimed.  Systems are also excluded where the
    specific burner structure, specific boiler structure, specific
    heat-exchange element, specific fire extinguishing structure, specific heat
    distributing system, specific internal-combustion engine structure,
    specific furnace structure, specific gas producer structure or method,
    specific heating and molding devices, etc., are claimed--that is, this
    class is confined to automatically operating temperature or humidity
    controlling mechanism, but excludes all patents to the specific mechanism
    controlled, even though the thermostat is claimed, either broadly or
    specifically, in combination therewith.

    (1)     Note.  This class includes only patents for devices which control
    temperature or humidity automatically, but not those which are merely
    operated by temperature variation.  The only apparent exceptions are the
    heating radiator thermostatic air relief valves, the thermostatic steam
    traps and thermostatically operated regulating valves.

    (2)     Note.  This class provides for all heating radiator automatic air
    relief valves including a thermostat.

    (3)     Note.  This class provides for all automatic steam traps including
    a thermostat in the combination.

    (4)     Note.  Patents for devices for controlling the flow of air over an
    automobile radiator by means of a thermostat located either in the cooling
    water or under the hood are classified in this class unless some novelty in
    the engine or cooling system is claimed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 524+ for
    automatic control of such apparatus, including temperature and humidity
    regulation for such specific apparatus.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 132+ for automatically controlled
    apparatus specialized to refrigeration.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 162 for temperature or heater control
    responsive to a condition sensing means combined with glassworking or
    treating apparatus.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 29.02+ for hygrometers and
    hygrostats.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 101+ for thermostatically
    controlled nonelectric alarms.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 451.1+ for devices for
    automatically controlling the feed water to a boiler by means of a
    thermostat and according to the level of the water in the boiler, 504.1 and
    504.3 for fusible plugs where a pressure is released on the plug fusing at
    a certain temperature and 504.2 for devices where a thermostat operates on
    a fall of boiler water level to open a valve to sound an alarm.

    123,    Internal Combustion Engines, appropriate subclasses for devices for
    automatically controlling the flow (or supply) of air to the manifold of an
    internal-combustion engine according to the temperature of the engine or
    manifold.

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 303 for processes and apparatus for treating
    tobacco with fluids combined with means for automatically regulating the
    temperature and/or humidity of the fluids.

    137,    Fluid Handling, appropriate subclass for fluid handling apparatus
    and processes not otherwise provided for, including automatic control of
    fluid flow in response to a change in a condition.  Note particularly
    subclasses 59+, 72+, 79+, 457, and 468 for the control of flow in response
    to a change in thermal conditions.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 201+ for specific heating and cooling
    elements with automatic control, and subclasses 281+; 287+ for specific
    heat exchange elements with automatic temperature or pressure control or
    response.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, subclass 42 for fusible links of general
    application.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclass 39 for fuel or air
    valves in carburetors thermostatically operated.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    220-354 for voltage or current regulators.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclasses 298+ for thermostatic switches.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 584+ for electrical alarms
    automatically responsive to temperature, and subclass 602 for electrical
    alarms automatically responsive to humidity.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 100+ for a thermometer.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 91+ for internal machine environment
    control of an electrophotographic device.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 18+ for (1) a residual specific burner with
    a timer, programmer, or condition responsive control; or (2) for a residual
    temperature modifying apparatus specialized to combustion having a
    nonspecific burner that is merely turned off and on by a conventional off
    and on thermostat sensing the temperature of the chamber or material being
    heated.


CLS 236/1
TXT Subject matter under the class definition not provided for in any of the
    following subclasses.


CLS 236/2
TXT Subject matter under the class definition for incubators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 314, 317, 319, for such devices having
    particular incubator structure.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 3+ for the same with specific heating
    systems.


CLS 236/3
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2 in which the controlling means is
    electrically operated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74+,    for the type of operating apparatus used.


CLS 236/4
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2 in which the regulating means is operated
    directly by a thermostat of the expanding-fluid type.


CLS 236/5
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2 in which the regulating means is operated
    directly by a thermostat of the expanding solid type.


CLS 236/6
TXT Subject matter under the class definition for brooder type of heaters not
    otherwise classifiable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 306 for such devices having particular
    brooder structure.  See (1) note to that subclass definition.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 3+ for the same with specific heating
    system.


CLS 236/7
TXT Subject matter under the class definition for self-heated sad-irons not
    otherwise classifiable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing and Smoothing, subclasses 82+ for such devices
    having particular iron structure.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 490+ for heating systems of general
    utility with automatic control means, and appropriate subclasses for
    specific type electrical heating devices with automatic current, voltage or
    temperature control means.


CLS 236/8
TXT Devices under the class definition controlling the flow of steam or air and
    fuel to an atomizer type of burner, according to changes in pressure or
    temperature in the device heated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26+,    for controlling devices responsive to pressure changes in the
    closed fluid heater.


CLS 236/9
TXT Subject matter under the class definition which are operated by devices
    responsive to temperature changes in a heater and also temperature changes
    in an apartment to be heated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for control by radiator temperature and apartment temperature.

    91,     for other controls responsive to temperatures at different places.


CLS 236/10
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising hot air furnaces which
    are provided with automatic temperature regulating means.  In the devices
    of this subclass the fire is generally regulated by the temperature in the
    air space of the furnace.


CLS 236/11
TXT Subject matter under subclass 10 in which the fire and also the flow of the
    heating air through the air chamber of the furnace is controlled.


CLS 236/12.1
TXT MIXING FLUID OF DISSIMILAR TEMPERATURE:

    Apparatus under the class definition mixing fluid from two or more
    different supplies in which at least one of the supplies of the fluid is
    controlled according to the temperature of the mixed fluid or the
    temperature of one of the fluid supplies.


CLS 236/12.11
TXT Mixing valve with temperature controlled motive means:

    Apparatus under subclass 12.1 comprising flow control means positively
    moved to an adjusted position by a motor means wherein the motor means is
    moved to the adjusted position by a medium or force controlled by but not
    resulting directly from a sensed temperature condition or a change in such
    a condition.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of motors to be found herein are electric motors
    controlled by thermostatic switches, fluid motors with independent sources
    of fluid pressure where a thermal responsive valve senses a system
    conditions and regulates fluid flow from said source to motor.

    (2)     Note.  A valve merely moved by a heat motor which directly senses a
    system condition and responds to move a valve, e.g., bimetal, closed fluid
    system with sensing bulb, etc., will not be found herein.


CLS 236/12.12
TXT Having electrical motive means:

    Apparatus under subclass 12.11 comprising a motor means responding to
    electrical energy input for moving the flow control means.


CLS 236/12.13
TXT Including bypass:

    Apparatus under subclass 12.1 in which the device is provided with separate
    controllable through passages, leading from a source of fluid, at least one
    of the passages having a valving means permitting said fluid to pass
    directly to a point of use, regardless of the temperature existing in the
    system, and at least one other passage being provided with means for
    controlling the flow of said fluid in response to a temperature condition
    or a change in temperature occurring at some point in the apparatus.


CLS 236/12.14
TXT Fluid from only one supply is controlled:

    Apparatus under subclass 12.1 in which the flow of only one of the supplies
    is controlled by the sensed temperature condition of the mix.


CLS 236/12.15
TXT Including separate relatively movable valve for each fluid supply:

    Apparatus under subclass 12.1 wherein the flow of each supply is controlled
    by a separate flow control member movable in response to fluid temperature.

    (1)     Note.  Each member may be movable in response to the temperature of
    either a respective fluid or a fluid mix.


CLS 236/12.16
TXT Having oscillating or reciprocating valve:

    Apparatus under subclass 12.1 wherein a flow control means moves in a
    prescribed straight line or arcuate path of travel to control fluid flow.


CLS 236/12.17
TXT Valving member moves about an axis:

    Apparatus under subclass 12.16 wherein the flow control means comprises a
    flow control portion movable in an arcuate path of travel.


CLS 236/12.18
TXT Tubular valve member:

    Apparatus under subclass 12.17 wherein the flow control means comprises a
    hollow sleeve or cylinder like member or portion.

    (1)     Note.  A cup shape flow control means is proper for classification
    here if the sleeve or cylinder portion performs a flow control function.
    Otherwise classification will be based on other features.


CLS 236/12.19
TXT Axially spaced flow faces:

    Apparatus under subclass 12.17 wherein the flow control means comprises a
    member having a seating face at each of its sides for coacting with seats
    on oppositely disposed fluid inlets.


CLS 236/12.2
TXT Tubular valve member:

    Apparatus under subclass 12.16 wherein the flow control means comprises a
    hollow sleeve or cylinder-like member or portion.


CLS 236/12.21
TXT Axially spaced flow control faces:

    Apparatus under subclass 12.16 wherein the flow control means comprises a
    movable valving member having a seating face at each end for coacting with
    seats on oppositely disposed fluid inlets.


CLS 236/12.22
TXT Seats face outwardly:

    Apparatus under subclass 12.21 wherein the seating faces on the member are
    directed away from each other.


CLS 236/12.23
TXT Ports closed by valve action:

    Apparatus under subclass 12.16 wherein the movable flow control means moves
    to and from contiguously along a surface having fluid ports therein for
    controlling fluid passing therethrough.


CLS 236/13
TXT Devices under subclass 12.1 controlling the mixing of warm and cold air in
    the plenum type of heating systems according to the temperature of the hot
    or cold air, mixed air, or apartment to be heated.


CLS 236/14
TXT Devices under the class definition controlling the fire under a boiler
    according to conditions in the boiler and also according to conditions in
    the furnace.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for devices responsive to changes within the furnace.

    20+,    for control devices operated by changes in the boilers.


CLS 236/15
TXT Devices under the class definition controlling the fire according to
    conditions in the furnace.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for controls responsive to boiler and furnace.

    95      and 96, for furnace control where the thermostat is attached to the
    outside of the heater or flue.

    104,    for furnace controls operated by the expansion or contractions of
    the furnace parts due to temperature changes.


CLS 236/16
TXT Devices under the class definition controlling the draft damper and check
    damper of a stove or furnace according to changes in the temperature of
    apartment or element heated.


CLS 236/17
TXT Devices under the class definition controlling the supply of heating fluid
    to an exchange or surface heater by the pressure of the fluid heated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for the same combined with furnace control.

    26+,    for pressure operated closed fluid heater control.

    85,     for the control, per se.


CLS 236/18
TXT Devices under the class definition controlling the supply of heating fluid
    to an exchange or surface heater directly by means of a thermostat of the
    expanding fluid type responsive to the temperature of the fluid heated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      42, 56+, 64, 95, and 99, for the type of thermostat used and
    control devices operated thereby.

    32,     for closed fluid heaters with similar controls.

    93,     for devices where flow is regulated by the temperature of the
    flowing fluid.


CLS 236/19
TXT Devices under the class definition controlling the supply of heating fluid
    to an exchange or surface heater directly by means of a thermostat of the
    expanding solid type responsive to the temperature of the fluid heater.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      43, 59+, 66, 96, and 101, for the type of thermostat used and
    control devices operated thereby.

    33,     for closed fluid heaters with similar controls.

    93,     for devices where flow is regulated by the temperature of the
    flowing fluid.


CLS 236/20
TXT Devices under the class definition controlling the temperature of the fluid
    heated.


CLS 236/21
TXT Devices under subclass 20 controlling the heating means according to the
    conditions in the heater, with additional means for cutting out the
    regulating means under abnormal conditions, such as failure of the
    regulator, (as by rupture of the diaphragm, for example), the pressure
    exceeding a certain limit, the water-level falling below a certain limit,
    the temperature getting too high, or heating means failing.

    (1)     Note.  The regulator must generally be repaired or reset by hand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89,     for magnetic trip release controls with cut-out features.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 59+, 72+, 79+, 457, and 468 for
    thermally responsive valves in general.


CLS 236/22
TXT Combined radiators and heaters under subclass 20 where the heater is
    controlled according to the temperature of the radiator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26+,    for heaters controlled by the pressure in the radiator.

    32      and 33, for heaters controlled by a thermostat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    237,    Heating Systems, subclass 7 for systems where the unit is
    specifically claimed.


CLS 236/23
TXT Devices under subclass 20 in which the heating means, usually a gas-burner,
    is controlled by the combined action of a thermostat in the fluid heated
    and a flow-motor operated by the flow of the fluid heated, the thermostat
    and motor controlling the movement of a single control-valve.


CLS 236/24
TXT Devices under subclass 20 in which the heating means, usually a gas-burner,
    is controlled by the combined action of a thermostat in the fluid heated
    and a flow-motor operated by the flow of the fluid heated, the thermostat
    and motor operating on separate valves.


CLS 236/24.5
TXT Devices under subclass 20 in which the combined dynamic and static pressure
    of the fluid heated controls the heating means, and those in which this
    combined force is opposed by one of its elements alone or by a different
    combination of them.


CLS 236/25
TXT Devices under subclass 20 in which the heating means is controlled
    according to the rate of flow of the fluid heated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     24, 24.5, and 45, for other temperature or humidity regulators
    comprising flow control of the regulator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 98+, 458 to 460, 486+, 496, and 497+ for
    valves responsive to change in rate of flow.


CLS 236/26
TXT Devices under subclass 20 not otherwise classifiable controlling the
    heating of the closed fluid-heater according to the pressure in the heater.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      14, 17, and 85, for other pressure operated controls.


CLS 236/27
TXT Devices under subclass 26 where the effect of the heater-pressure is
    counterbalanced by a closed pressure-chamber.


CLS 236/28
TXT Devices under subclass 26 with means for increasing the resistance to
    movement of a control element as movement from normal increases.


CLS 236/29
TXT Devices under subclass 26 in which at a given pressure a puppet-valve
    opens, allowing pressure from the boiler to operate a motor, which actuates
    the heat-controlling means.


CLS 236/30
TXT Devices under subclass 26 in which the pressure-responsive element which
    operates the controlling means is a Bourdon tube.


CLS 236/31
TXT Devices under subclass 26 in which the pressure acts on a body of liquid,
    thereby varying the level thereof, and a float or piston rising and falling
    with the change in level of the liquid operates the controlling means.
    Also includes devices where a float is raised more or less by change in
    pressure of steam thereunder when water boils.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    for other float responsive devices.


CLS 236/32
TXT Devices under subclass 20 controlling the heating means directly by a
    thermostat of the expanding-fluid type responsive to the temperature of the
    fluid heated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      42, 56+, 64, 86, 95, and 99, for the type of thermostat used and
    devices operated thereby.

    18,     for similar structure in exchange heaters.


CLS 236/33
TXT Devices under subclass 20 controlling the heating means directly by a
    thermostat of the expanding-solid type responsive to the temperature of the
    fluid heated.  The thermostat may be the walls of the container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      19, 43, 59+, 66, 87, 96, and 101+, for the type of thermostat used
    and devices operated thereby.


CLS 236/34
TXT Devices under the class definition not otherwise classified controlling the
    temperature of the fluid within a cooling-radiator, as the radiator in the
    cooling system of an internal-combustion engine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 41.02+ for specific cooling
    systems peculiar to internal-combustion engines.


CLS 236/34.5
TXT Subject matter under subclass 34 in which a by pass is interposed in the
    cooling circuit to by pass the radiator, usually including a
    thermostatically operated valve responsive to the temperature of the
    coolant or engine and positioned in the circuit to direct the flow of the
    coolant either to the radiator or the by pass.


CLS 236/35
TXT Devices under subclass 34 controlling the flow of air over the radiator
    according to the temperature of the fluid cooled or the cooling-air or the
    engine temperature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 41.04+ and 41.11+ for
    shutter and impeller controls associated with engine cooling.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 98 for radiator with means controlling the
    flow of air therethrough not automatically controlled, and subclasses 281+;
    287+ for a heat exchanger having automatic temperature or pressure control.


CLS 236/35.2
TXT Subject matter under subclass 35 in which the means for controlling the air
    flow is shutters.


CLS 236/35.3
TXT Subject matter under subclass 35 in which the means for operating the
    shutters includes a servo-motor.


CLS 236/36
TXT Devices under the class definition not otherwise classified controlling the
    supply of heating fluid to a heating-radiator.


CLS 236/37
TXT Devices under subclass 36 responsive to conditions in the radiator and
    temperature of the apartment heated thereby.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for systems in which the temperature of a heater and of the
    apartment controls the regulation.

    91,     for controls responsive to temperatures at different places.


CLS 236/38
TXT Means under subclass 36 regulating the flow of air over the radiator
    according to temperature changes in the radiator, the air heated, or the
    apartment to be heated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for similar structure in fluid mixers.


CLS 236/39
TXT Heating-radiators under subclass 36 with means for exhausting the air
    therefrom in which the heating effect of the radiator is controlled by a
    fluid-motor operated by said exhaust, the connection between the exhaust
    and the motor being controlled by a thermostat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for steam traps incorporating a pressure motor and a thermostatic
    pilot therefor.


CLS 236/40
TXT Heating-radiators under subclass 36 provided with a thermostat subjected to
    the exhaust from the radiator and controlling the supply of heating fluid
    to the radiator.


CLS 236/41
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 in combination with an automatic trap for
    discharging the air and water of condensation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53      through 60, under "Traps", for the specific automatic trap
    construction.

    53+,    for steam traps with float valve and thermostatically controlled
    air vent valve.


CLS 236/42
TXT Heating-radiators under subclass 36 with a thermostat of the
    expanding-fluid type for directly regulating the supply of heating fluid to
    the radiator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      18, 32, 56+, 64, 86, and 99, for the type of thermostat used and
    controlling devices operated thereby.

    40+,    for similar devices exhaust operated.


CLS 236/43
TXT Heating-radiators under subclass 36 with a thermostat of the expanding
    solid type for directly regulating the supply of heating fluid to the
    radiator.

    (1)     Note.  This also includes devices operated by the expansion of the
    radiator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      19, 33, 59+, 66, 87, 96, and 101+, for the type of thermostat and
    controlling devices operated thereby.


CLS 236/44
TXT Devices under the class definition controlling the humidity of a room or
    apartment by means of a device responsive to the relative humidity therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 282; 283; 294; 296; and 297 for a heating
    and cooling system having humidity control.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 129+ for temperature
    or humidity controlled gas liquid contactors having heating or cooling
    means.


CLS 236/45
TXT Devices under the class definition controlling the operation of a heater
    according to the draft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 98+, 458 to 460, 486+, 496, and 497+ for
    valves responsive to change in rate of flow.


CLS 236/46
TXT Devices under the class definition in which a clock is employed for
    adjusting the regulating device at a given time or where the clock cuts in
    or cuts out the regulating device; also devices with timing means for
    periodically placing the regulating means into and out of operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 192 for a refuse incinerator or solid fuel
    furnace provided with a timer control.


CLS 236/47
TXT Devices under the class definition controlling the temperature by two
    different devices alternately, one set to maintain the temperature
    relatively high and the other relatively low.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for clock controlled regulators that may be operated to maintain
    different temperatures at different times.


CLS 236/48
TXT Devices under the class definition in which the temperature control valve
    does not move on slight changes in temperature, but its operating force is
    stored up during a certain movement of the temperature responsive device,
    and then the valve (or controlling means) suddenly moves throughout its
    entire movement not provided for more specifically below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81      and 83, for such devices incorporating a fluid motor which is relay
    operated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 100.1+ for snap action
    devices associated with mechanism for converting reciprocating motion to or
    from oscillating motion.


CLS 236/49.1
TXT VENTILATOR TYPE:

    Device under the class definition comprising particular temperature
    responsive means for operating a device which controls air flow to, from,
    or within a ventilated space.

    (1)     Note.  Inclusion in this subclass requires specific temperature
    sensing and coupled operating means structure (i.e., a "means for
    controlling a ventilator in response to temperature" is not sufficient to
    inclusion in this subclass whereas a "bimetallic element operated actuating
    linkage for a ventilator" is sufficient for inclusion).

    (2)     Note.  The means usually detects and responds to air temperature
    within the ventilated space or within an air passage leading to the space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     and the search notes thereunder, for a similar control means
    associated with an incubator.

    44+,    for a humidity response means for operating a device which controls
    air flow to, from, or within a ventilated space.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    454,    Ventilation, appropriate subclasses, for ventilator structures, per
    se, and for ventilator operated by a nominal temperature responsive control
    means for automatic temperature regulation; note, in particular, subclass
    370 for ventilation means with condition responsive control, subclass 258
    for an air distributing, moveable louver responsive to temperature, and
    subclass 369 for an outlet cowl having a spaced cap and a positively
    actuated valve with a fusible release.


CLS 236/49.2
TXT Responsive to fire or smoke:

    Device under subclass 49.1 wherein the air flow control means is responsive
    to a sensing means which detects a presence of (1) a flame due to
    combustion or (2) a vaporous emission resulting from combustion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, appropriate subclasses, for a specific fire
    extinguisher apparatus combined with a fire or smoke responsive control
    means; see, in particular, subclasses 56+ for such a condition responsive
    fire-extinguisher for a special application.

    454,    Ventilation, subclass 257 for an inlet-ceiling-type air diffuser
    having an emergency smoke or fire responsive valve, subclass 342 for an
    outlet airway with an air pump and specific emergency smoke handling
    structure, subclass 357 for an outlet airway having an emergency smoke
    handling feature, and subclass 369 for fire dampers which cut off
    ventilated flow in response to elevated temperatures.


CLS 236/49.3
TXT Electrically actuated:

    Device under subclass 49.1 wherein the means operates the air flow control
    device by way of electricity.


CLS 236/49.4
TXT Pneumatically actuated:

    Device under subclass 49.1 wherein the means operates the air flow control
    device by way of air pressure.


CLS 236/49.5
TXT Mechanical linkage actuated:

    Device under subclass 49.1 wherein the means operates the air flow control
    device by way of a system of interconnected machine elements.


CLS 236/50
TXT Devices under the class definition in which the regulating means controls
    the heating means by means of a liquid valve.


CLS 236/51
TXT Devices under the class definition provided with means for adjusting from a
    distance the effect of the regulating means.


CLS 236/52
TXT Devices under the class definition not otherwise classifiable which are
    operated by the rise and fall of a float.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for heaters controlled by pressure wherein the pressure causes the
    rise and fall of liquid which motion operates a float.

    65      and 100, for regulators operated by expanding fluid and
    incorporating a float moved by the fluid.


CLS 236/53
TXT Automatic steam-traps under the class definition in which the water-drain
    valve is float-operated, but which are provided with a
    thermostatically-controlled air-vent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 171+ for steam traps in which there is
    no thermally controlled air vent.


CLS 236/54
TXT Automatic steam-traps under the class definition with a pressure-motor for
    operating the drain-valve and a thermostatically-operated pilot-valve for
    controlling the action of the motive fluid on the pressure-motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     for the control in other combinations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 191 and 195 for steam traps responsive
    to liquid level operated by float controlled servo or pilot.


CLS 236/55
TXT Automatic steam-traps under the class definition with the drain-valve
    operated by a thermostat and a float-controlled pilot-valve for controlling
    the flow of heating fluid to the thermostat for operating the same.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for similar controls in other combinations.


CLS 236/56
TXT Automatic steam-traps under the class definition in which the drain-valve
    is directly operated by a thermostat of the expanding-fluid type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for radiator heat controls incorporating a similar device.

    64,     for air relief valve of similar type.


CLS 236/57
TXT Automatic steam-traps under subclass 56 in which the drain-valve is
    directly operated by a thermostat of the expanding-fluid type in the shape
    of a Bourdon tube.


CLS 236/58
TXT Devices under subclass 56 in which the drain-valve is operated directly by
    an expanding-fluid thermostat of the wafer type.


CLS 236/59
TXT Automatic steam-traps under the class definition in which the drain-valve
    is directly operated by a thermostat of the expanding-solid type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66,     for air relief valve controlled by thermostat.


CLS 236/60
TXT Devices under subclass 59 in which the drain-valve is directly operated by
    a thermostat of the expanding-solid type, but which is in the shape of a
    conduit, through which the heating fluid passes or is discharged.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for controls operated by the expansions of a conduit.


CLS 236/61
TXT Air relief-valves under the class definition controlled by both
    thermostatic and pressure-controlled means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92,     for controls with pressure and temperature responsive means.


CLS 236/62
TXT Air relief-valves under the class definition controlled by both
    thermostatic and float-controlled means, the float being distinct from the
    thermostat.


CLS 236/63
TXT Air relief-valves under the class definition controlled by both
    thermostatic and float-controlled means, the float being also the expanding
    element.


CLS 236/64
TXT Air relief-valves under the class definition controlled by a thermostat
    only, the thermostat being of the expanding-fluid type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56+,    for traps operated by expanding fluid thermostats.


CLS 236/65
TXT Subject matter under subclass 64 controlled by a thermostat only, the
    thermostat being of the expanding-fluid type, the expanding fluid operating
    a float or piston to operate the valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    for controls in which an expanding fluid operates a float.


CLS 236/66
TXT Air relief-valves under the class definition controlled by a thermostat
    only, the thermostat being of the expanding-solid type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     59 and 62, for other applications of this control.


CLS 236/67
TXT Devices under the class definition which are operated by motors whose
    operation is controlled by means responsive to the temperature to be
    regulated.


CLS 236/68
TXT Devices under subclass 67 in which an expanding element is used to operate
    the controlling means, the expanding element being heated (or cooled) by a
    heater set into operation by means of a separate element responsive to the
    temperature to be regulated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 516+ for the expanding element and heater
    alone or where the heater is not set into operation by a heat responsive
    element.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 11 for heat motor operated
    valves in general.


CLS 236/69
TXT Devices under subclass 67 operated by motors which are controlled by a
    relay consisting of a galvanometer operated by the current generated in a
    thermocouple responsive to the temperature to be regulated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    234-298 for output responsive regulators.


CLS 236/70
TXT Devices under subclass 69 in which an additional beating element is used to
    press the pointer of the galvanometer onto the controlling-contacts at
    regular predetermined intervals.


CLS 236/71
TXT Devices under subclass 67 operated by a balanced motor in which changes in
    temperature destroy the balance of the motor, and thus operate the
    regulating means.


CLS 236/72
TXT Devices under subclass 71 in which changes in temperature destroy the
    balance of the motor by means of a thermostatically-operated relay.


CLS 236/73
TXT Devices under subclass 67 operated by a continuously-driven motor normally
    disconnected from the regulating means, but placed in operative connection
    therewith by means responsive to the temperature to be controlled.


CLS 236/74
TXT Devices under subclass 67 not otherwise classifiable which are operated by
    electric motors whose operation is controlled by means responsive to the
    temperature to be regulated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, Art Collection 934 for
    running-speed control systems with feedback responsive to a thermal
    condition.


CLS 236/75
TXT Devices under subclass 74 of the type where the regulating member is
    operated by an element reciprocated or oscillated by means of a solenoid or
    electric magnet whose operation is controlled by means responsive to the
    temperature to be regulated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     for similar controls which constitute relays for the control of a
    fluid pressure motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 15+ for
    reciprocating electric motor structure, and subclasses 36+ for oscillating
    electric motor structure.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 119+ for
    reciprocating or oscillating electric motor systems.


CLS 236/76
TXT Devices under subclass 74 which do not operate the controlling means to the
    limits at a single operation, but give step-by-step action.


CLS 236/77
TXT Devices under subclass 74 in which the control element is operated by means
    of a vibrator and circuit-make-and-break device.


CLS 236/78
TXT Devices under subclass 74 the motors being set into operation by a relay,
    which is in turn controlled by means responsive to the temperature to be
    controlled.


CLS 236/79
TXT Devices under subclass 67 operated by fluid pressure and controlled by a
    relay, which is in turn controlled by means responsive to the temperature
    to be regulated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 185 for refuse incinerators and solid fuel
    furnaces provided with control means responsive to a sensed condition.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 82+ for fluid pressure relays or
    followers, per se.


CLS 236/80
TXT Devices under subclass 79 in which the fluid for operating the motor is
    shunted from the fluid controlled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     54 and 68, for other controls which employ the fluid of the system
    regulated to motivate the control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 485+ for the type of motors in pressure
    responsive regulators.


CLS 236/81
TXT Devices under subclass 79 in which the relay does not operate on slight
    changes in temperature, but its operating force is stored up during a
    certain movement of the temperature-responsive device and then suddenly
    moves through its entire movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for snap acting controls not a fluid operated relay.

    83,     for the same in a compound relay system.


CLS 236/82
TXT Devices under subclass 79 wherein the fluid-motor controlled by a relay is
    controlled by another relay, which is in turn controlled by the means
    responsive to the temperature to be regulated.


CLS 236/83
TXT Devices under subclass 82 the first relay being of the type which does not
    operate on slight movements in the second relay, but the operating force is
    stored up during a certain movement of the second relay and then suddenly
    the first moves through its entire movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48      and 81, for other snap acting controls.


CLS 236/84
TXT Devices under subclass 79 wherein the fluid-operated motor is controlled by
    an electrically-operated relay-valve, which is in turn controlled by the
    means responsive to the temperature to be regulated.  The electric device
    must actually operate the relay-valve at least in one direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     for means where power for operating the relay-valve is stored up by
    action of the motor and this is released by electric means.


CLS 236/85
TXT Devices under subclass 79 wherein the relay is operated by a device
    responsive to changes in pressure in the fluid to be regulated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     for devices where the pressure controlled operates directly on the
    valve which controls its flow to the motor.

    82+,    for similar devices including compound controls.


CLS 236/86
TXT Devices under subclass 79 wherein the means responsive to the temperature
    is a thermostat of the expanding-fluid type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for similar controls in heating radiator.


CLS 236/87
TXT Devices under subclass 79 wherein the means responsive to the temperature
    is a thermostat of the expanding-solid type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     80, 81, and 82+, for similar responsive means in other controls.


CLS 236/88
TXT Devices under subclass 67 wherein the motor is a spring or weight motor
    which is released by magnetic means controlled by the means responsive to
    the temperature to be regulated.


CLS 236/89
TXT Devices under subclass 88 which is provided with means for opening the
    circuit through the magnetic means when the motor is run down.


CLS 236/90
TXT Devices under subclass 67 wherein the motor is a spring or weight motor
    which is released by the thermostat responsive to the temperature to be
    controlled.


CLS 236/91
TXT Devices under the class definition operated by a plurality of thermostats,
    one or more in a location at low temperature (as the outside of a building)
    and the others at a relatively high temperature, (as the inside of a
    building).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      14, 37, and 47, for systems which are controlled by temperature at
    plural places.

    44,     for opposed thermostats.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 257 for a selective heating or cooling
    arrangement controlled by room and ambient temperature sensors.


CLS 236/92
TXT Devices under the class definition operated by a thermostat and
    pressure-responsive means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for radiator air relief means controlled by thermostat and pressure.


CLS 236/93
TXT Devices under the class definition operated by a thermostat located in the
    fluid controlled, so that its flow is controlled by its own temperature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55      through 60, for trap responsive controls.

    61      through 66, for radiator responsive controls.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 277+ for a fluid- resistance brake having a
    thermostatic valve to regulate resistance.


CLS 236/94
TXT Devices under the class definition thermostatically operated, with an
    indicator or alarm to indicate the operation or failure to operate.


CLS 236/95
TXT Devices under the class definition controlled by a thermostat of the
    expanding-fluid type, attached to the outside of the heater or flue
    controlled and responsive to the temperature thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      18, 32, 40+, 42, 56, and 99, for the type of thermostat with a
    controlling device operated thereby.


CLS 236/96
TXT Devices under the class definition controlled by a thermostat of the
    expanding-solid type attached to the outside of the heater or flue
    controlled and responsive to the temperature thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      19, 33, 43, 59, and 87, for the type of thermostat with a
    controlling means operated thereby.


CLS 236/97
TXT Devices under the class definition operated by a thermostat one element of
    which is provided with means for cooling it or keeping it cool, so as to
    increase the sensitiveness of the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     for plural controls of different temperature.


CLS 236/98
TXT Devices under the class definition operated by a thermostat in which a
    fluid is used to transmit the movement of the thermostatic element to the
    element controlled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for systems wherein the fluid is transmitted to a float.


CLS 236/99
TXT Devices under the class definition in which the regulating means is
    operated directly by a thermostat of the expanding-fluid type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      18, 32, 40+, 42, 56+, 64, 68, 86, and 95, for certain regulator
    systems incorporating such a thermostat.


CLS 236/100
TXT Devices under subclass 99 where the motion of the expanding fluid is
    transmitted by a float or piston operated thereby.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31      and 65, for certain systems employing this type of control.

    52,     for a regulator employing a float not provided for in this subclass
    or subclasses 31 and 65.


CLS 236/101
TXT Devices under the class definition in which the regulating means is
    operated directly by a thermostat of the expanding-solid type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      19, 33, 43, 59, 66, 87, 93, and 96, for certain regulator systems
    employing this type of thermostat.


CLS 236/102
TXT Devices under subclass 101 in which the thermostat of the expanding-solid
    type is made up of two or more elements of different coefficients of
    expansion, and in which these elements are concentrically arranged.  The
    coefficient of expansion of one element might be zero.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     24, and 33, for special combinations using this type of thermostat.


CLS 236/103
TXT Devices under subclass 101 in which the thermostat of the expanding-solid
    type is in the shape of a tube through which the fluid to which the
    thermostat is responsive flows.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for air relief devices in which a conduit acts as part of a
    thermostat.


CLS 236/104
TXT Devices under subclass 101 in which the expansion and contraction of a
    fire-pot, or a combustion-chamber wall of a heater is used to regulate the
    heating effect thereof.


CLS 237/
TTL HEATING SYSTEMS

CLS 237/
TXT Apparatus and processes for heating rooms, chambers, houses, and other
    enclosing structures, including combinations of two or more heat generators
    and combinations of a heat generator with means for distributing a fluid
    heated thereby.

    (1)     Note.  This class does not include the distributing means alone
    unless it is peculiarly adapted for heating, nor the heat generator alone.

    (2)     Note.  The term "water" is used in the generic sense of "liquid".

    (3)     Note.  For steam traps adapted for heating systems see Class 137,
    Fluid Handling, subclasses 171+, and Class 236, Automatic Temperature and
    Humidity Regulation.

    (4)     Note.  For methods and apparatus for heating rooms, chambers,
    houses and other enclosing structures where the source of heat is claimed
    to be a solar collector, classification in in the appropriate subclass in
    Class 126, Stoves and Furnaces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, and see the Note to
    the class definition of Class 34 for the line with Class 237.

    60,     Power Plants, for power plants combined with heating apparatus
    which does not constitute a heating system.

    62,     Refrigeration, particularly subclasses 90, 159+, 238.1+, 260, and
    324.1+ for a refrigeration system, per se, which may utilize the heat
    rejecting portion.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, for steam boilers, which sometimes
    disclose a heating system.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, for air heaters in which the air is heated by
    products of combustion when the combination is included with the furnace or
    burner, also for combined boiler and air heaters.

    137,    Fluid Handling, appropriate subclasses, for fluid handling and
    distributing systems not otherwise classifiable; see particularly
    subclasses 334+ for combinations of such systems with means to heat the
    system or its contents (see (3) Note above).

    148,    Metal Treatment, appropriate subclasses for processes of treating
    solid or semi-solid metal to modify or maintain the internal physical
    structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical property of the metal.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 58+; 201+ for combined heating and
    cooling processes; subclasses 201+ for automatic control of a heating and
    cooling system; subclasses 48.1+ for an installed heating and cooling
    system; subclasses 58+ for a heating and cooling system; and appropriate
    subclasses for structure for exchanging heat between two noncommunicating
    fluids not having features specializing it for use in a heating system.

    219,    Electric Heating, for heating by electric current.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, for automatic heat
    regulation for heating systems when the heating system is not specifically
    defined, the modifications relating wholly to the control  (see (3) Note
    above).

    248,    Supports, for stands, etc., adapted to support heating apparatus.

    252,    Compositions, particularly subclasses 67+ and 71+.  Patents are
    placed in Class 252 (1) claiming admixtures of ingredients, or claims to an
    old compound, limited to use in a heat transfer agent, (2) processes of
    transferring heat comprising known heating system steps broadly recited,
    distinguished solely by the composition or compound used, and (3) apparatus
    with the composition or compound therein, where characteristics of
    apparatus structure are not claimed. The preceding are placed in Class 252,
    Compositions, even though freezing or boiling points or temperatures of use
    are specified.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 402+ for reactor structures
    which may be adaptable for general heating systems purposes.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 56 for a method or
    apparatus for heating or cooling the earth surrounding a fluid storage
    cavity; and subclasses 130+ for heating or cooling of an earthen formation
    in general

    417,    Pumps, for pumps, per se.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, for rotary expansible chamber
    pumps, per se.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 121+ for a residual work chamber having both
    heating and work handling means; subclasses 159+ for a residual work
    heating chamber in which work is heated by contact with combustion
    products; and appropriate subclass for a residual work chamber heated
    without the use of a distribution system between the generator and chamber
    space.

    454,    Ventilation, for means specialized for distributing air to rooms or
    buildings, even with a conventional heating apparatus, and for rooms,
    buildings, cars, etc., with hollow walls for the passage of air.


CLS 237/1
TXT Means under the class definition for heating not otherwise provided for.


CLS 237/2
TXT Heating systems under the class definition with means for regulating
    temperature and pressure independent of manual control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, for automatic
    controllers when the structure of the apparatus for heating is not
    specifically defined.


CLS 237/3
TXT Automatic control under subclass 2 for heating apparatus for brooders and
    incubators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 30, 31+, and 35+ for brooder and
    incubator structure including heating systems.


CLS 237/4
TXT Automatic control under subclass 3 for water-circulating heaters for
    incubators.


CLS 237/5
TXT Automatic control under subclass 2 for heating apparatus for cars, either
    freight or passenger.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, for stove structure.


CLS 237/6
TXT Automatic control under subclass 5 for steam heating apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, especially subclass
    22, for automatic control, per se.


CLS 237/7
TXT Automatic control under subclass 2 of a unitary structure consisting of
    steam or water radiators combined with a boiler.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, for boiler, per se.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, for controller, per
    se.


CLS 237/8
TXT Automatic control under subclass 2 of water heating systems.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for incubator heaters.

    5,      for car heaters.

    7,      for combined heater and boiler.


CLS 237/9
TXT Automatic control under subclass 2 of steam heating systems.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for car heaters.

    7,      for combined heater and boiler.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 535+ and
    549+, for heaters peculiar to Class 34 apparatus.


CLS 237/10
TXT Steam heating systems under subclass 9 which displace the steam in the
    radiators by a gas, such as air or products of combustion.


CLS 237/11
TXT Automatic control under subclass 2 in which air is compressed and thereby
    heated and circulated through the radiators.


CLS 237/12
TXT Processes under subclass 2 for the automatic control of heating systems.


CLS 237/12.1
TXT Systems under the class definition combining means for generating and
    distributing heat to buildings or other inclosures with means for the
    production of power by a motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 648 for a power plant that in operation
    supplies heat for external use or produces a withdrawable hot gas product.


CLS 237/12.2
TXT Combinations under subclass 12.1 including a fire engine.


CLS 237/12.3
TXT Combinations under subclass 12.1 including a heating system for a vehicle
    other than a railway car or train.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for similar systems claiming automatic controls.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 142.5, for internal
    combustion engines combined with means to heat the engine or engine parts
    there provided for and see notes in that subclass (142.5).

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 43+ for a heated and cooled vehicle with
    a common power and heat source.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 159+ for automobile heating and ventilating.


CLS 237/12.4
TXT Heating systems under subclass 12.1 for a car or train, combined with the
    locomotive or other power plant.


CLS 237/12.5
TXT Heating systems under subclass 12.4 in which the car or train is heated
    directly by the furnace gases from the power plant.


CLS 237/12.6
TXT Heating systems under subclass 12.4 in which the car or train is heated by
    a supply of warm air supplied by the power plant.


CLS 237/12.7
TXT Heating systems under subclass 12.6 in which the warm air is passed through
    radiators.


CLS 237/12.8
TXT Heating systems under subclass 12.4 in which the car or train is heated by
    steam, usually from the power plant.


CLS 237/13
TXT Systems under the class definition combining means for generating heat at
    one place and distributing it to other buildings, including mains or
    conduits having no other apparent use than with these systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, for fluid distributing and handling systems not
    otherwise provided for, see particularly subclass 236.1 for fluid
    distributing systems including geographic features and subclasses 356+ for
    such systems having as a support a structural member immovably joined to
    the ground.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, for conduits and underground ways
    adapted for use in heating plants and otherwise.


CLS 237/14
TXT Heating systems under the class definition peculiarly adapted for
    subclasses 302+ and 311+ incubators and brooders.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for automatic control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, for specific brooder and incubator structure
    combined with the heating means.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, for structure of a closed water
    heater.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, for structure of air heaters and stoves.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, for automatic control


CLS 237/15
TXT Systems under subclass 14 in which the heating medium is water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for automatic control

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, for automatic
    control, per se.


CLS 237/16
TXT Heating systems under the class definition comprising steam or water
    radiators combined with a boiler in a unitary structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for automatic control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, for closed boilers.

    219,    Electric Heating, for electrically heated radiators.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, for automatic
    control.


CLS 237/17
TXT Combined radiators and boilers under subclass 16 heated by combustion of
    fluid fuel.


CLS 237/18
TXT Combined radiators and boilers under subclass 16 heated by combustion of
    solid fuel.


CLS 237/19
TXT Heating systems under class definition having means for heating the fluid
    used in the system and also for additional volume of water.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 20, for subsidiary boilers.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 5 for combined cooking and heating
    stoves; 513+ for fireplaces having water backs and 366, for submerged water
    heater systems.


CLS 237/28
TXT Heating sytems under the class definition specialized for a vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 56 and 57 for car stoves.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, subclass 55 for fire extinguishers associated
    with car heaters.

    219,    Electric Heating, for systems including electric heaters.


CLS 237/29
TXT Vehicle-heating systems under subclass 28 comprising stoves combined with
    vehicle structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, for stove structures, especially subclasses 56
    and 57.


CLS 237/30
TXT Vehicle-heating stoves under subclass 29 having a casing for heating the
    air.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 67+ for hot air stoves, per se.


CLS 237/31
TXT Vehicle-heating systems under subclass 29 comprising a stove depending from
    the vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 56 for car stoves.


CLS 237/32
TXT Vehicle-heating systems under subclass 28 utilizing a fluid-fuel burning
    apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, appropriate subclasses, for heater, per se.


CLS 237/33
TXT Vehicle-heating systems under subclass 32 with a radiator through which the
    products of combustion pass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 91 for heater.


CLS 237/34
TXT Vehicle-heating systems under subclass 28 utilizing a hot water circulating
    system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.4,   for car heater combined with power plants.


CLS 237/35
TXT Vehicle-heating systems under subclass 34 having a boiler located on the
    vehicle and piping for heating and circulating water.


CLS 237/36
TXT Subject matter under subclass 35 in which the boiler is heated by fluid
    fuel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, for boilers, per se.


CLS 237/37
TXT Subject matter under subclass 35 with additional means for heating the
    water by steam from the train pipe.


CLS 237/38
TXT Subject matter under subclass 37 having means for injecting steam from the
    train pipe into the water circuit.


CLS 237/39
TXT Subject matter under subclass 34 having means for heating the water circuit
    by steam from the train pipe.


CLS 237/40
TXT Heating systems under subclass 28 utilizing steam radiators.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for automatic control of the system.


CLS 237/41
TXT Steam heating systems under subclass 40 in which the steam is formed in a
    boiler on the car.


CLS 237/42
TXT Subject matter under subclass 41 having also means whereby steam may be
    admitted to the radiators from the train pipe.


CLS 237/43
TXT Heating systems under subclass 28 in which the floor is heated from
    beneath, as by steam, hot water, or hot air circulation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for means for heating floors of other than vehicles.


CLS 237/44
TXT Heating systems under subclass 28 comprising apparatus for storing heat on
    the vehicle by heat absorbing bodies.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for incased radiators.

    75,     for heat accumulators, per se.


CLS 237/45
TXT Heating systems under subclass 28 comprising radiators in casings, through
    which air may pass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    392,    Electric Heating, subclasses 407+ for electrically heated radiators
    including heat, storage or transfer means.


CLS 237/46
TXT Heating systems under the class definition for rooms, chambers, or other
    enclosures provided with means for removing air from the rooms.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus for only admitting fresh air and heating it are
    not included.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 84 for combined stove and ventilator,
    and subclass 293 for combined damper and ventilator.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 248+ for the automatic control of
    ventilation in a heating and cooling system; subclass 54 for heat exchanger
    installed in a wall traversing passage; and subclass 59 for a heating and
    cooling system with a ventilation feature.

    454,    Ventilating, for specific ventilating apparatus combined with an
    undefined heater.


CLS 237/47
TXT Ventilating heating-systems under subclass 46 having a stove as a heater.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 80, 84, 216, and 293, for stove and
    ventilator combinations.

    454,    Ventilation, subclass 43 for flue heated ventilators.


CLS 237/48
TXT Ventilating heating-apparatus under subclass 46 having a hot-air furnace as
    a heater.


CLS 237/49
TXT Ventilating heating apparatus under subclass 46 having radiators enclosed
    in an air flue.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for similar devices on vehicles.

    79,     for radiator shields.


CLS 237/50
TXT Heating systems under the class definition in which air is heated directly
    by a combustion apparatus and distributed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, for structure of heater.


CLS 237/52
TXT Air heating-systems under subclass 50 having a stove as the source of heat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     for similar devices on vehicles.

    47,     for ventilating heating systems using a stove.


CLS 237/53
TXT Air heating-systems under subclass 50 having a hot-air furnace as the
    source of heat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for ventilating heating systems using a furnace.


CLS 237/54
TXT Air heating-systems under subclass 50 having a drum in an upper room of the
    building, through which products of combustion pass.


CLS 237/55
TXT Air heating-systems subclass 50 in which the air is heated in a smoke flue.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 523+ for fireplace-type heater.


CLS 237/56
TXT Heating system under the class definition in which the room or building is
    heated by the circulation of water or some other liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for automatic control.

    12.4,   for car heaters.

    15,     for brooder heaters.

    17      and 18, for combined radiator and boiler.

    34+,    for vehicle heaters.


CLS 237/57
TXT Water heating-systems under subclass 56 in which the water is heated by
    fluid fuel.


CLS 237/58
TXT Water heating-systems under subclass 56 where the water is heated by steam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37+,    for train steam heaters.

    71+,    for steam radiators.


CLS 237/59
TXT Water heating systems under subclass 56 having special means for
    circulating the heating liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 37+ for fittings and pipes
    of general utility having means therein to direct the flow of fluid therein
    and even though intended to be used in a heating system.


CLS 237/60
TXT Subject matter under subclass 59 in which the water is heated and forced
    out of a boiler by intermittent pulsations.


CLS 237/61
TXT Subject matter under subclass 59 having an auxiliary boiler for aiding the
    circulation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37+,    for train steam boiler combinations.


CLS 237/62
TXT Subject matter under subclass 59 in which only a part of the water is
    bypassed through a boiler.


CLS 237/63
TXT Subject matter under subclass 59 having a pump for circulating the water.


CLS 237/64
TXT Subject matter under subclass 63 wherein the pump consists of a chamber
    where water enters and is forced out by means of steam pressure.


CLS 237/65
TXT Water heating-systems under subclass 56 with means for regulating or
    varying the pressure on the circulating system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 455+ for line condition change
    responsive valves, particularly subclasses 505+ for fluid pressure
    regulators, per se.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, appropriate
    subclasses.


CLS 237/66
TXT Tanks or chambers under subclass 56 limited in use to provide for the
    expansion of the water in the circulating pipes and radiators of water
    heating systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, appropriate subclasses for fluid handling apparatus
    including tanks in combination with other fluid handling means, see
    particularly subclass 593 for such systems including an expansion chamber
    in combination.

    220,    Receptacles, for tank structure not necessarily limited to water
    heating systems.


CLS 237/67
TXT Systems under class definition for heating buildings, rooms, or chambers by
    means of steam circulating through conduits or passing through radiators.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for automatic control of car heating.

    9,      for automatic control.

    12.8,   for car heating.

    40,     for vehicle heaters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 119 and 124
    for heaters for dryers.


CLS 237/68
TXT Steam heating systems under subclass 67 with special means for removing the
    incondensable gases in the system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 197+ for discriminating outlets for gas
    (gas vents which do not pass liquid).

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, for thermal valves.

    417,    Pumps, for pumps, per se.


CLS 237/69
TXT Heating systems under the class definition in which the room is heated by
    heated fluid circulated within or beneath or caused to contact with the
    underside of a floor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for the heating of vehicle floors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 185+ for hollow walls and floors having
    vents for passage of air.


CLS 237/70
TXT Hollow bodies under the class definition of considerable surface area
    peculiarly adapted to have a heating fluid passed through it and to radiate
    heat from the surface.  Radiators must be absolutely limited to heating
    purposes by radiation in order to fall within this subclass and those
    indented thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 128+ for a heat exchanger having
    vertically extending flues for producing a thermosyphonic flow of fluid not
    having features specializing it to use in heating air within a chamber;
    subclasses 168+ for a panel with conducting passages for a heat exchange
    fluid; and subclasses 172+ for an assembly of tubes for transferring heat.


CLS 237/71
TXT Radiators under subclass 70 adapted to contain water heated by steam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for steam heat accumulator.


CLS 237/72
TXT Radiators under subclass 71 containing water heated by steam either
    injected into the water or heated by steam passing through conduits that
    heat the water, the steam finally coming into contact with the water in the
    radiator.  These radiators may also be convertible as steam radiators or
    water radiators heated by steam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for injecting means for steam circuits.


CLS 237/73
TXT Radiators under subclass 70 limited to the use of steam as a heating fluid
    and incapable of being used as a condenser for steam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for steam heaters for vehicles.


CLS 237/74
TXT Steam-heated radiators under subclass 73 having injecting means for causing
    a continued circulation of steam through or around within the radiator or
    for injecting air into the radiator or for circulating water therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for means to inject steam into the water.


CLS 237/75
TXT Steam-heated radiators under subclass 73 having either a liquid or solid
    therein which absorb heat from the steam, stores it therein, and radiates
    the heat after the steam is turned off.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for systems having heat accumulators on vehicles.

    69,     for floor heaters.

    76,     for ceramic radiators.


CLS 237/76
TXT Radiators under subclass 70 made in whole or in part of ceramic material
    (earthy plastic) or natural stone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for floor-type heating systems.


CLS 237/77
TXT Radiators under subclass 70 with special features for warming the feet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 204+ for other body warmers.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 205.1+ for a non-heated footrest having
    general utility.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 423.1+ for a nonheated footrest.


CLS 237/78
TXT Radiators under subclass 70 combined with means for moistening the air or
    air moistening apparatus necessitating its application to a radiator when
    in use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 12.1+ for
    fluid mixers and 44, for humidity control.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    contact structure.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 110, 157, 223, 291, 328, and 337 for
    ventilators having liquid contact devices.


CLS 237/79
TXT Heat shields under subclass 70 applied to radiators or air directors
    combined with dust guards.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 640+ for processes which utilize a
    protective or insulating shield of metal from heat in a method of treating
    solid or semi-solid metal to modify or maintain the internal physical
    structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical property of metal.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 55 for a wall mounted heat exchanger with a
    projecting shield; subclass 129 for a heat exchanger equally adapted for
    conducting heating or cooling fluid arranged with a distinct flue forming
    enclosure; and subclass 134 for a heat exchanger with a protector.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 245+ and 284+ for floor and wall registers.


CLS 237/80
TXT Devices under class definition for preventing freezing in heating conduits
    or other hollow heaters or for thawing out heating conduits not provided
    for in other classes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, for fluid handling systems including means to
    prevent freezing see particularly subclasses 59+, 301+ and 375.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 32+ for antifreezing devices
    for pipes of general utility, though intended to be used in a heating
    system.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, apporpriate subclasses,
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet, and especially subclasses 304.4+ for such a product embodying a
    component which is porous or cellular.


CLS 237/81
TXT Processes under class definition for heating houses, rooms, or other
    enclosures, except processes involving automatic control.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for processes including automatic control.


CLS 238/
TTL RAILWAYS:  SURFACE TRACK

CLS 238/
TXT This class includes patents relating to surface railway-tracks which in
    their make-up include road-bed structure, rail-supporting elements--such as
    stringers, ties, rail-chairs, and tie-plates--rails, rail-joints,
    rail-bonds, track and rail-joint fastenings, and electric insulation as
    applied to ties, rails, rail-joints, rail-bonds, and track-fastenings.

    (1)     Note.  This class does not include patents for switches,
    rail-crossings, and frogs, which will be found in Class 246, Railway
    Switches and Signals.

    (2)     Note.  Tracks for panel hangers and travelers are in Class 16,
    Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 96.


CLS 238/1
TXT Patents under the class definition containing subject matter not properly
    belonging in any of the following subclasses.


CLS 238/2
TXT Railroad ballast structure and form under the class definiton for the
    reception of the railway-track.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 544+ for
    nominally claimed metallic track, that is, having some structural
    description, but insufficient to limit its use to that of a railway track,
    element, adjunct or material.


CLS 238/3
TXT Street-railway track under subclass 2 having defined ways for nonflanged
    vehicle-wheels and ordinary street-vehicles.


CLS 238/4
TXT Structure under subclass 3 that is restricted to track using metallic rails
    or paths for the wheels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 544+ for
    nominally claimed metallic track, that is, having some structural
    description, but insufficient to limit its use to that of a railway track,
    element, adjunct or material.


CLS 238/5
TXT Structure under subclass 3 that is restricted to track using concrete or
    plastic-compound rails or paths for the wheels.


CLS 238/6
TXT Structure under subclass 2 wherein the surface of the road-bed has a
    continuous wooden or metal covering between the rails, or the covering may
    also extend outside the rail-bases.


CLS 238/7
TXT Structure under subclass 6 wherein the road-bed covering is of concrete or
    other plastic compound.


CLS 238/8
TXT Highway crossings under subclass 2 at grade over railways to facilitate the
    passage of highway vehicular traffic over railway-tracks.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9.


CLS 238/9
TXT Special forms of paving and paving-blocks for use around railway-rails in
    order to bring the rail-treads substantially flush with a highway-surface,
    so that the rails shall not obstruct highway traffic, as in the case of
    street-railway tracks.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.


CLS 238/10
TXT Railway-track designed for temporary use in different places and usually
    made in portable sections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices: Toys, subclasses 168+ for a toy trackway for an
    unattached rolling or tumbling element (e.g., marble), subclasses 444+ for
    the combination of a toy vehicle and toy trackway for physically guiding
    the vehicle, and subclass 455 for a toy vehicle combined with trackway
    having a conductor therealong which transmits control signals to the
    vehicle.


CLS 238/11
TXT Portable railway-track, usually adapted to hang over the edge or end of an
    embankment or fill to facilitate the dumping of earth or spoil thereover.


CLS 238/12
TXT Portable switch members for temporary connection of two parallel
    railway-tracks.


CLS 238/13
TXT Portable track for house-moving trucks or rollers.


CLS 238/14
TXT Mats or traction-pads adapted to facilitate the extraction of trucks and
    automobiles when stalled in sand or mud.

    (1)     Note.  One end of the mat is usally fastened to the ground.

    (2)     Note.  For anti-skid devices for resilient tires, see Class 152,
    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclass 208 and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 7.1+ for similar structures designed to
    be attached to a traction wheel.


CLS 238/14.05
TXT Joints, couplings, rail-bonds, connector devices and other means for
    electrically connecting a railway rail or other surface track element to
    another rail or to some other stationary device or object.

    (1)     Note.  A "rail-bond" as used herein is any connecting link, wire,
    cable, rod, bar, or the like, of conducting material, either rigid or
    flexible, having terminal portions designed for attachment to adjacent rail
    sections for the purpose of electrically connecting such sections.

    (2)     Note.  For electrical connection features associated or designed
    for use with portable track, see this class, subclass 10 and indented
    subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  Mere mechanical joints designed to join two railway rails
    together in aligning relation for maintenance of the continuity of the
    track are in this class, subclass 151, and indented subclasses even though
    such joints, when made of metal, inherently serve to electrically connect
    the rails. However, when such mechanical joints are provided with
    additional claimed features designed primarily to improve the conducting
    path between the rails, they will be placed in this class, subclass 14.4,
    or indented subclasses, and cross-referenced to the appropriate subclass
    for the mechanical joint.

    (4)     Note.  For electrical connectors in general see Class 439,
    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses.

    (5)     Note.  For electrical connection devices specially designed for
    transmitting electricity from a rail or other element to a vehicle or other
    moving object, see Class 191, Electricity: Transmission to Vehicles.

    (6)     Note.  Mere joints or couplings between wires, rods, bars and the
    like, or between such elements and a base, plate of head, are in Class 403,
    Joints and Connections.  However, where one of the elements or such a joint
    or coupling is a railway rail or other surface track element, the following
    line will determine the placement of patents as between Classes 238 and
    403; where the rail or other surface track element is included broadly, as
    by name only, with no further limitation distinguishing the same from
    plates, bars, etc., in general, classification is in Class 403, subclasses
    230+; the following are considered to distinguish rail-bond joints from the
    joints classifiable in Class 403 and to cause classification in Class 238:


    (a)     an electrical limitation to the effect that the joint or coupling
    is electrically conductive or that the parts connected are electric
    conductors;

    (b)     significant structure of the rail-bond body other than the terminal
    or attaching portions;

    (c)     inclusions, broadly or specifically, of the particular portion of
    the rail to which the bond is attached, as, for example, the head or tread
    portion or the base or flange portion, excepting that the mere limitation
    that the bond is secured to the "web" of the rail will not prevent
    classification in Class 403;

    (d)     all plural-joint features, regardless of breadth, e.g., inclusion
    of both rails or both of the bond terminals;

    (e)     all other features specialized to rail-bed or surface track
    installations or pertaining to vehicular travel over the rails.

    (7)     Note.  For methods of making rail-bonds and/or for attaching them
    to the rails, see the appropriate method classes, especially Class 29,
    Metal Working, subclasses 505+, Class 228, Metal Fusion Bonding,
    appropriate subclasses and Class 219, Electric Heating, subclasses 53+.


CLS 238/14.1
TXT Electrical connections under subclass 14.05 in which a plurality of
    rail-bonds extends from one rail to the other, or in which a single
    rail-bond consists of a plurality of laminations, strands, or other
    elements extending from one rail to the other.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include rail-bonds consisting of a
    single stranded cable.  Such bonds are classified in accordance with their
    other characteristics in this class, subclass 14.05 or indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  For mere plural-strand conductor structure, see Class 174,
    Electricity: Conductors and Insulators, subclass 128.1 and indented
    subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  For mere joints between two or more bond wires, rods, etc.,
    and rail, continue the search in Class 403, Joints and Connections,
    appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 230+.


CLS 238/14.11
TXT Plural bond connections under subclass 14.1 in which at least one bond is
    positioned at each side of the rail.


CLS 238/14.12
TXT Rail bonds under subclass 14.05 having claimed features pertaining to the
    form, structure, or arrangement of the intermediate portion of the bond,
    i.e., the portion between the terminal or attaching portions.

    (1)     Note.  In addition to bonds of novel configuration or
    cross-section, this subclass also includes bonds having connectors,
    vibration dampers, or other appurtenant devices associated with the
    intermediate portion of the bond.

    (2)     Note.  For mere laminated or plural strand bonds, see this class,
    subclass 14.1.

    (3)     Note.  For mere conductor structure, see Class 174, Electricity:
    Conductors and Insulators, subclass 126.1 and indented subclasses.


CLS 238/14.13
TXT Joints or couplings under subclass 14.05 between a rail-bond and the head
    or tread portion of a rail.

    (1)     Note.  For such joints or couplings involving special rail forms,
    see this class, subclass 14.3.

    (2)     Note.  See Notes (6) and (7) to the definition of subclass 14.05 of
    this class.


CLS 238/14.14
TXT Joints or couplings under subclass 14.05 between a rail-bond and the base
    or flange portion of a rail.

    (1)     Note.  For such joints or couplings involving special rail forms,
    see this class, subclass 14.3.

    (2)     Note.  See Notes (6) and (7) to the definition of subclass 14.05 of
    this class.


CLS 238/14.15
TXT Joints or couplings under subclass 14.14 in which the rail-bond is attached
    to the rail-base or flange by casting, welding, soldering, brazing, or
    other method requiring the use of molten material, or cement, or other
    adhesive.

    (1)     Note.  See Note (7) to the definition of subclass 14.05 of this
    class.

    (2)     Note.  For folded joints between wires, cables, rods and the like
    and a base member, in general, see Class 403, Joints and Connections,
    subclasses 265+.


CLS 238/14.2
TXT Electrical connections under subclass 14.05 for connecting a rail to some
    object or device other than a contiguous rail.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, "cross-bonds" for
    connecting a rail to the parallel rail at the opposite side of the track,
    connections between rails and "bootlegs", ground connections, etc.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not include mere joints between a rail
    and a conductor wire, cable, bond, etc., for which see particularly this
    class, subclasses 14.13, 14.14 and 14.15, and note 6 to the definition of
    subclass 14.05.


CLS 238/14.3
TXT Electrical connections under subclass 14.05 involving some special rail
    structure, i.e., a rail having a claimed form or structure distinguishing
    the same from the strandard T-head rail.


CLS 238/14.4
TXT Electrical connections under subclass 14.05 combined with means for
    supporting the rail, or combined with means for mechanically joining two
    rails in aligning relation for maintenance of the continuity of the track,
    such as splice bars, fish plates, ties, chairs, etc.

    (1)     Note.  See Note 3 to the definition of this class, subclass 14.05.


CLS 238/14.5
TXT Combinations under subclass 14.4 in which the electrically conducting
    element is interposed or positioned between the rail and its support, or
    between the rails and one of the elements of the mechanical joint, for
    example, between the rail and the splice bar.


CLS 238/14.6
TXT Combinations under subclass 14.5 in which the interposed conducting element
    is positioned along the web of the rail.


CLS 238/14.7
TXT Combinations under subclass 14.4 having means for securing or supporting
    the intermediate portion of a rail bond, i.e., the portion between the
    attaching or terminal portions.

    (1)     Note.  For bond-wire supports claimed, per se, see Class 248,
    Supports, subclass 65 and indented subclasses.


CLS 238/14.8
TXT Electrical connections under subclass 14.05 including a dowel pin, key, or
    similar element inserted in aligned holes of sockets formed in the abutting
    ends of the rails.

    (1)     Note.  For mere mechanical rail-joints employing similar elements,
    see this class, subclass 179.

    (2)     Note.  For mere rod joints or couplings employing similar elements,
    see Class 403, Joints and Connections, subclasses 292+.


CLS 238/14.9
TXT Devices for protecting the rail bond or its terminal portions from
    mechanical injury, including means for deflecting parts of rolling stock
    away from the bond.

    (1)     Note.  For arrangements whereby the bond is enclosed or protected
    by elements of a rail-joint or support, see this class, subclass 14.4 and
    indented subclass.

    (2)     Note.  For protective boxes or closures designed to protect
    rail-joints or other surface track elements, see this class, subclass 312.


CLS 238/15
TXT Curved rails and rail arrangement for facilitating the passage of railway
    rolling-stock around curves.


CLS 238/16
TXT Rails on curves provided with antifriction-rollers for engagement with the
    vehicle-wheels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the notes thereunder.


CLS 238/17
TXT Rails arranged parallel to and adjacent the traction-rails to prevent the
    vehicle-wheels from leaving the traction-rails.


CLS 238/18
TXT Guard-rails adapted to yield laterally against spring resistance when
    engaged by a vehicle-wheel.


CLS 238/19
TXT Guard-rails having integral parts underlying the adjacent traction-rail, so
    that the weight of the vehicle will tend to hold the guard-rail in place.


CLS 238/20
TXT Rail-chairs or shoes designed to rest upon ties and each support a traction
    and a guard rail.


CLS 238/21
TXT Rail clamps or yokes each designed to hold a traction and a guard rail.
    These clamps do not rest upon the ties, but depend between them.


CLS 238/22
TXT Spacing-blocks between the main guard rails.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     and the preceding subclasses under subclass 17.


CLS 238/23
TXT The same as subclass 22 except that the spacing blocks are formed of
    tapering wedge-blocks for adjustment of the guard-rails.


CLS 238/24
TXT Longitudinal beams and members arranged beneath and parallel with the rails
    for supporting the latter; also beam members parallel with the rails for
    stiffening the road-bed structure.


CLS 238/25
TXT The same as subclass 24 except that the longitudinal beams are made of
    concrete or plastic compounds.


CLS 238/26
TXT The same as subclass 24 except that the longitudinal members are metallic.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 544+ for
    nominally claimed metallic track, that is, having some structural
    description, but insufficient to limit its use to that of a railway track,
    element, adjunct or material.


CLS 238/27
TXT Relative arrangement of cross-ties for support of the rails.


CLS 238/28
TXT Ties diagonally arranged between the rails.


CLS 238/29
TXT Transverse rail-supporting beams or members for parallel railway-rails.


CLS 238/30
TXT Variations in longitudinal form of railway-ties.

    (1)     Note.  Variations in cross-sections of railway-ties are found in
    this class, subclasses 54 to 81, inclusive.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 544+ for
    nominally claimed metallic track, that is, having some structural
    description, but insufficient to limit its use to that of a railway track,
    element, adjunct or material.


CLS 238/31
TXT The ties have joints in the tie-body between the rails.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     for multiplicity of tie-joints, and 108 for insulated tie-joints.


CLS 238/32
TXT The same as subclass 31 except that the joints are flexible or hinged.


CLS 238/33
TXT The ends of the tie are pivotally connected to the middle portion of the
    tie, adjacent each rail-base.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    279.


CLS 238/34
TXT Each end of the tie is detachably connected to the main tie-body adjacent
    the rail-seats.


CLS 238/35
TXT The tie is transversely divided into three or more sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31      and 32.


CLS 238/36
TXT The tie is made up of a plurality of longitudinal vertical platelike
    members fastened together.


CLS 238/37
TXT The tie is made up of a plurality of longitudinal horizontal platelike
    members fastened together.


CLS 238/38
TXT The tie is made up of twin or duplicate longitudinal members usually so
    connected as to lock the rails thereto.


CLS 238/39
TXT Ties made up of two longitudinal sections, one of which is the complement
    of the other.  Usually one slides into the other. The reciprocal sliding of
    the two parts locks the rail in place.


CLS 238/40
TXT Ties including a truss-rod and strut or ties of truss form, so as to form a
    truss in the engineering sense.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86.


CLS 238/41
TXT The same as subclass 40 except that the truss is integrally formed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86.


CLS 238/42
TXT Cross-ties between rails having end portions at right angles thereto and
    parallel with the rails, which may or may not be rectangular frames.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47.


CLS 238/43
TXT The ties are provided with loop or hook shaped ends adjacent the rail-seats.


CLS 238/44
TXT The ties are provided with Y-shaped or double ends to form extended
    rail-seats.


CLS 238/45
TXT Ties for supporting rails and switch-stands or track elements other than
    the rails.


CLS 238/46
TXT Ties structurally modified, so as to practically form portions of
    rail-joints.


CLS 238/47
TXT Tie modification for rail-joints bridged between two ties.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.


CLS 238/48
TXT Ties so formed that the top portion, carrying two rails, is adapted to have
    a spring-yielding movement relatively to the bottom section of the tie.

    (1)     Note.  Spring-bearings in ties, permitting the rails to have spring
    motion independently of each other, are found in this class, subclasses
    283, 284 and 285.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40.


CLS 238/49
TXT Ties in which old rails are utilized to make up the ties.


CLS 238/50
TXT Rods for the cross connection of the rails, stringers, or pot-sleepers.


CLS 238/51
TXT Rods or bars cross-connecting two rails passing beneath and in contact with
    the rail-bases.  These rods are usually between the ties.

    (1)     Note.  Rods adapted to rest upon the ties and provided with flat
    rail-seats are found in this class, subclasses 116 and 288.


CLS 238/52
TXT The same as subclasses 50 and 51 with turn-buckles for coupling the
    rod-sections.


CLS 238/53
TXT The same as subclasses 51 and 52 for utilizing nuts and threaded ends other
    than turn-buckles for adjustments.


CLS 238/54
TXT Cross-sectional forms of integral ties not otherwise classified below.


CLS 238/55
TXT Ties made up of two longitudinal parts of cross-sectional form not
    otherwise classified below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38.


CLS 238/56
TXT Ties made up of pairs of channel-bars.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 595 for metallic
    stock material of uniform thickness and of channel shape.


CLS 238/57
TXT Ties made up of pairs of I-beams.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 598 for metallic
    stock of "T" or "I" cross-section.


CLS 238/58
TXT Ties made up of pairs of angle or T irons.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 598 for metallic
    stock having an I-type cross-section, and subclass 603 for metallic stock
    of L-type cross section.


CLS 238/59
TXT Ties made up of singles bars of channel cross-section with
    downwardly-projecting flanges.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 595 for metallic
    stock material of uniform thickness and of channel shape.


CLS 238/60
TXT The same as subclass 59 except that the channels are made from rolled sheet
    metal and bent to shape.


CLS 238/61
TXT The same as subclass 59 except that the channels are of rolled metallic
    sections.


CLS 238/62
TXT Ties made of single bars of channel cross-section with upwardly-projecting
    flanges.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 595 for metallic
    stock material of uniform thickness and of channel shape.


CLS 238/63
TXT The same as subclass 62 except that the channels are made from rolled sheet
    metal and bent to shape.


CLS 238/64
TXT The same as subclass 62 except that the channels are of rolled metallic
    sections.


CLS 238/65
TXT Ties having cross-sectional form of I-beam shape.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 598 for metallic
    stock of "T" or "I" cross-section.


CLS 238/66
TXT The same as subclass 65 except that the I-beams are rolled metallic
    sections.


CLS 238/67
TXT Ties having cross-sectional form of T-shape.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 598 for metallic
    stock of "T" or "I" cross-section.


CLS 238/68
TXT The same as subclass 67 except that the T-beams are of cast metal.


CLS 238/69
TXT Ties having cross-sectional form of inverted-T shape.


CLS 238/70
TXT Ties formed of longitudinal tubular members.


CLS 238/71
TXT Ties having a plurality of longitudinal tubular apertures therethrough.


CLS 238/72
TXT Ties formed with rectangular tubular apertures therethrough.


CLS 238/73
TXT Ties of rectangular box form with overlapping side plates having vertical
    telescopic engagement.


CLS 238/74
TXT Ties of rectangular box form having separately-formed top and bottom plates.


CLS 238/75
TXT Ties of rectangular box form having separately-formed bottom plates.


CLS 238/76
TXT Ties of rectangular box form with separate cover-plates.


CLS 238/77
TXT Ties of rectangular box shape formed by folding up a sheet metal.


CLS 238/78
TXT Ties of rectangular box shape integrally formed.


CLS 238/79
TXT The same as subclass 78 except that the ties are integrally formed by
    casting.


CLS 238/80
TXT Ties which are triangular in cross-section.


CLS 238/81
TXT Ties which are circular or elliptical in cross-section.


CLS 238/82
TXT Ties formed longitudinally from corrugated plates.


CLS 238/83
TXT Ties involving nonmetallic substance in their structure.


CLS 238/84
TXT Ties formed of cement, concrete, or other plastic compounds.

    (1)     Note.  For special compositions of plastics for tie manufacture see
    Class 106, Compositions:  Coating or Plastic.


CLS 238/85
TXT Metallic or wooden stiffening members embedded in the interior of
    plastic-compound ties to strengthen the same.


CLS 238/86
TXT Cement-tie internal-reinforcement members of truss form.


CLS 238/87
TXT Tubular reinforcement members for cement ties.


CLS 238/88
TXT Internal-reinforcement members of cast metal for cement ties.


CLS 238/89
TXT Internal-reinforcement members of rolled metallic sections for cement ties.


CLS 238/90
TXT Internal-reinforcement members of loop form for cement ties.


CLS 238/91
TXT Reinforcing rods and bars for cement ties.


CLS 238/92
TXT The same as subclass 91 except that the rods or bars are cross-connected by
    small frames or wire-tied.


CLS 238/93
TXT Wire-netting, expanded metal, or perforated sheet metal for cement-tie
    reinforcement.


CLS 238/94
TXT Wire used for cement-tie reinforcement.


CLS 238/95
TXT Exterior metallic protective and strengthening members for cement ties.


CLS 238/96
TXT Metal box casings for cement ties.


CLS 238/97
TXT Tubular casings for cement ties.


CLS 238/98
TXT Side and bottom cover-plates for cement ties.


CLS 238/99
TXT Side casings and top cover-plates for cement ties.


CLS 238/100
TXT Side casings for cement ties.


CLS 238/101
TXT Top cover-plates for cement ties.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116.


CLS 238/102
TXT Top and bottom cover-plates for cement ties.


CLS 238/103
TXT Bottom cover-plates for cement ties.


CLS 238/104
TXT End covers and caps for tubular ties and tie-casings.


CLS 238/105
TXT Rods, bars and blocks for keeping the ties properly spaced apart.  These
    spacers are not designed as rail or load carrying members.


CLS 238/106
TXT Anchor lugs, ribs and flanges on ties for preventing their shifting
    longitudinally in their beds.


CLS 238/107
TXT Railway-tie, tie-plate and rail insulation.

    (1)     Note.  This does not include rail-joint insulation which may be
    found in this class, subclasses 152 to 161, inclusive.


CLS 238/108
TXT Insulation for divided metal tie-sections at their joints between the rails.


CLS 238/109
TXT Individual supporting-blocks or pot-sleepers adapted to be embedded in the
    road-bed or ballast and support the rails. Two of these blocks or
    pot-sleepers act as a substitute for a tie; but they are not designed to
    have a cross-beam action, like a tie.


CLS 238/110
TXT The rail-supports are inverted pots or basins.


CLS 238/111
TXT The same as subclass 110, but limited to pots or basins of cast metal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 544+ for
    nominally claimed metallic track, that is, having some structural
    description, but insufficient to limit its use to that of a railway track,
    element, adjunct or material.


CLS 238/112
TXT Each rail is supported on a piece of sheet metal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material, or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 544+ for
    nominally claimed metallic track, that is, having some structural
    description, but insufficient to limit its use to that of a railway track,
    element, adjunct or material.


CLS 238/113
TXT The sheet-metal rail-support is of inverted-U-shaped form.


CLS 238/114
TXT The rail-support is in the form of tubular section or box-shaped.


CLS 238/115
TXT Each rail is supported on a concrete block.


CLS 238/116
TXT The concrete blocks are connected transversely of the rails by bars, upon
    which the rails are seated.


CLS 238/117
TXT The concrete blocks are connected transversely of the rails by bars, which
    latter pass centrally through the concrete blocks.


CLS 238/118
TXT Each rail is supported on a wooden block.


CLS 238/119
TXT Each rail is supported on a pedestal of pier-like form.


CLS 238/120
TXT Each rail-pedestal has a helical or screw base for engagement with the
    road-bed.


CLS 238/121
TXT Relative arrangement of the rails in a two-rail track.


CLS 238/122
TXT Railway-rails not otherwise classified below.


CLS 238/123
TXT Rails having toothed or rack tread-surfaces, usually for use on steep
    grades with a locomotive having a cog drive-wheel.


CLS 238/124
TXT Street-railway rails provided with notches or lugs to facilitate the
    turning out of a wagon from the street-railway track.


CLS 238/125
TXT This type of rail is the standard rail of the railway in the United States.
     The rail cross-section shows a bulb-shaped head, a vertical web and an
    extended flat base.


CLS 238/126
TXT Similar to subclass 125 except that the rail-base has a base-bar insert of
    inverted-T form.


CLS 238/127
TXT Rails which in cross-section are of inverted U, V, or arc shaped sections.


CLS 238/128
TXT The same as subclass 127 except that the rail is integrally formed.


CLS 238/129
TXT Rails formed of trough-shaped members or channel-irons adapted to receive
    tread-surface fillers of wood or metal, so as to substantially fill the
    troughs or channels.


CLS 238/130
TXT Rails having expanded flat or bulb heads with single depending vertical
    webs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 598 for metallic
    stock of "T" or "I" cross-section.


CLS 238/131
TXT Flat rails without any vertical supporting-webs.


CLS 238/132
TXT The rail heads and bases are identical, so that the rail-treads are
    reversible.


CLS 238/133
TXT The rail-heads are carried by three webs radiating from a central axis and
    spaced one hundred and twenty degrees apart.  Any one of these heads may be
    placed upward for traction purposes.


CLS 238/134
TXT Rails tubular in form.


CLS 238/135
TXT The tubular rails are integral in construction.


CLS 238/136
TXT Rails having heads of step-tread form for street-railway use, so that the
    wheels of street-vehicles may run upon the depressed tread-surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130.


CLS 238/137
TXT The rail-heads have single vertical webs bifurcated at the lower portions,
    forming pairs of diverging webs or feet.


CLS 238/138
TXT The under side of the rail-base is reinforced by bars or plates, which,
    with the rail, make together a compound rail.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
    26.


CLS 238/139
TXT The vertical webs of the rails are reinforced by the attachment of side
    bars thereto.


CLS 238/140
TXT Street-railway rails of the grooved type, with the flanged-guard
    detachable, and step-tread rails having detachable steps.


CLS 238/141
TXT Rails having their bases and webs split vertically.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
    142.


CLS 238/142
TXT Rail-head treads split vertically through the tread-surface.


CLS 238/143
TXT Rails in which the head is detachable from lower portion of the rail.


CLS 238/144
TXT Compound rails in which the heads and bases each have projecting webs,
    which are lap-connected.


CLS 238/145
TXT The rail-heads have pairs of projecting webs or single-grooved webs for
    connection to the rail-bases.


CLS 238/146
TXT Compound rails, the base portions being grooved for the reception of the
    upper portions of the rails.


CLS 238/147
TXT Compound rails having twin-angle base-sections, between which the rail-head
    web is clamped.


CLS 238/148
TXT Special formation of rail tread-surfaces for effective engagement with
    wheel tread-surfaces.

    (1)     Note.  For rail tread-surfaces with rollers see this class,
    subclass 16.


CLS 238/149
TXT Variations in the web form of rails.


CLS 238/150
TXT Materials, substances, compositions, or alloys for rails.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, etc., appropriate subclasses for
    rails claimed broadly by name only and defined solely by their metal or
    alloy composition even though there is no claim to the metal or alloy, per
    se. Metal or alloy compositions used in rails are also found in Class 75.

    148,    Metal Treatment, appropriate subclasses for rails claimed broadly
    by name only and defined significantly or broadly solely by their metal or
    alloy composition and including a specific Class 148 treatment of the metal
    or alloy, or for products distinguished only by the internal structure or
    characteristics of the metals, metallic compositions or alloys comprising
    such structures.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 544+ for
    nominally claimed metallic track, that is, having some structural
    description, but insufficient to limit its use to that of a railway track,
    element, adjunct or material.


CLS 238/151
TXT Means for joining two railway-rails together in aligning relation for
    maintenance of the continuity of the track.

    (1)     Note.  For rail-joints combined with means for electrically joining
    the rails, see this class, subclass 14.4 and indented subclasses.


CLS 238/152
TXT Insulating means for rail-joints to prevent electric current from passing
    through the joint from one to the other of the joined rails.


CLS 238/153
TXT The rail-joint members of the transverse-abutting type, with insulation
    between the abutting faces.


CLS 238/154
TXT Insulated rail-joints of the chair type include base-seats for the abutting
    rail ends and a flange on one or both sides of the rail ends made integral
    with a base seat portion.These flanges project upwardly and are higher than
    the highest portion of the rail-base section.


CLS 238/155
TXT Insulated rail-joints of the twin-chair type, the two parts of which are in
    underlapping engagement with the rail-base.


CLS 238/156
TXT Similar to subclass 155, but using a separate base-plate upheld by the
    twin-chair sections or in which the twin-chair sections are base bolted
    together.


CLS 238/157
TXT Insulated joints of the angle-chair type in which the rail ends are seated
    on one of the angle-flanges and the other angle-flange projects upwardly
    along the side of the rail ends.


CLS 238/158
TXT Insulated joints of the Weber type in which a yieldable joint of splice-bar
    type is supported upon an angle-chair.


CLS 238/159
TXT Insulation-joints of the splice-bar type. These bars are either plates
    bolted to the rail-webs or these plates may have angular extensions resting
    upon the tops of the rail-base sections.


CLS 238/160
TXT The same as subclass 159 with the additions of a base-plate underlying the
    rail-bases.


CLS 238/161
TXT Insulated rail-joints of the general type of subclass 159 are seated in
    channel-iron sections which may be integral or made up of two angles
    underlying the joint.


CLS 238/161.5
TXT Rail joints under subclass 151 which include means associated therewith for
    confining or receiving a liquid, a liquid bearing substance, or any film
    forming material which serves as a lubricant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163,    for rail joints that contain solid material which was positioned
    within the joint while in a molten or plastic state.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    184,    Lubrication, subclasses 3.1+ for apparatus for applying lubricant
    to a rail, subclass 5, for slide bearings having lubricating means
    incorporated therein, and subclass 100 for slide bearing lubricators.

    384,    Bearings, subclass 13 for a linear bearing having lubricating means
    incorporated therein.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 41+ for an electrical connector
    with vacuum applying means; subclasses 190+ for an electrical connector
    having a retainer or passageway for fluent material; and subclasses 519+
    for an electrical connector with provision to restrict environmental
    effects thereon.


CLS 238/162
TXT The joint is formed by casting molten metal around the abutting rail ends.


CLS 238/163
TXT After the rail-joint is in place a molten filler, usually zinc or lead is
    poured in between the joint members and the rail ends.


CLS 238/164
TXT The rail ends may be welded together or the joint members may be welded to
    one or both of the rail ends.


CLS 238/165
TXT Rail-joints for swinging switch-rails constructed to allow a slight
    pivoting or yielding action.


CLS 238/166
TXT Hinged or pivoted joints permitting vertical or lateral angular movement
    between connected rail ends.

    (1)     Note.  For articulated rail-joints permitting parallel movement of
    rail ends see this class, subclass 174.


CLS 238/167
TXT Rail-joints for connecting abutting rail ends which differ in
    cross-sectional contour or size.


CLS 238/168
TXT Rail-joints in which a longitudinal tension-rod appears as a truss element.


CLS 238/169
TXT Rail-joints having auxiliary beam members parallel to the rails for
    stiffening the joint.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include any beam or stiffening
    members upon which the rail-joint rests.


CLS 238/170
TXT The weight of the rail ends and load thereon tends to clamp the joint
    members more tightly to the rail.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194     and 279


CLS 238/171
TXT Expansion-joints in which one rail end is deflected laterally by the other
    rail end to permit unavoidable rail-creeping.


CLS 238/172
TXT Devices for vertical adjustment of the rail-joint or one of the rail ends.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168     and 215.


CLS 238/173
TXT Rail-joints in which provision is made to permit one rail end to yield
    vertically independently of the other abutting rail end.


CLS 238/174
TXT Vertically-shifting rail-joints for use with turn-bridges, turn-tables,
    track-scales, etc., where the level of the abutting rail ends is variable.


CLS 238/175
TXT Rail-joints for rails of unusual cross-sectional shape.


CLS 238/176
TXT Rail-joints for rails channel-shaped in cross-section.


CLS 238/177
TXT Vignoles rails with the base-sections cut off adjacent the rail ends, thus
    leaving a T-section, and T-section rails engaging a base-joint member with
    upwardly-projecting U-flanges.


CLS 238/178
TXT Rail-joints for flat or webless rails.


CLS 238/179
TXT The key joining the rail ends is entirely inclosed in the interiors of the
    abutting rail ends.


CLS 238/180
TXT The key is located in the webs of the abutting rail ends and is flush with
    the sides of the webs over which splice-bars may be placed, or the keys
    alone may constitute the joint members.


CLS 238/181
TXT The web-key passes transversely through and bridges both recessed rail-webs
    and passes at least partially through the rail splice-bars.


CLS 238/182
TXT The lug-key bridges recessed abutting rail-webs and is integral with one
    splice-bar.


CLS 238/183
TXT The lug-key bridges recessed abutting rail-webs and is integral with both
    splice-bars.


CLS 238/184
TXT Lugs integral with the joint members and passing through or partially
    through the rail-webs, but not so that a single lug bridges the abutting
    rail ends.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182.


CLS 238/185
TXT Rail-joint plates fitting the rail-web, over-lapping the top of the
    rail-base, and having a downwardly-extending stiffening-flange which in no
    way furnishes a support for the under side of the rail-bases.


CLS 238/186
TXT The same as subclass 185 with the exception that the downwardly-extending
    stiffening- flanges are connected together, but without effecting
    engagement with the underside of the rail-base.


CLS 238/187
TXT Rail-joints having base-sections upon which the rails are adapted to seat
    and further provided with one or more upwardly-extending flange-like
    members adjacent one or both sides of the rails.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154.


CLS 238/188
TXT The same as subclass 187 except the joint members are in two similar
    sections with their base-sections each extending underneath the rail-bases.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155.


CLS 238/189
TXT The same as subclass 188 except that the sections under the rail-base
    having depending stiffening members.


CLS 238/190
TXT The twin-joint members underlap and uphold a single base-plate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156.


CLS 238/191
TXT The chair parts are secured together by bolts or other fastenings under the
    rail-base and also girder-type twin chairs which engage the bottom of the
    rail and have the girder-flanges connected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156.


CLS 238/192
TXT The twin-joint members overlap either laterally or vertically beneath the
    rail-bases.


CLS 238/193
TXT The twin-joint members interlock beneath the rail-bases.The interlocking
    may be flanged, lugged, or hooked.


CLS 238/194
TXT The same as subclass 193 with the addition of longitudinal keys for locking
    the members together.


CLS 238/195
TXT An angle-chair has a horizontal flange under the rail-bases and an upright
    flange parallel to and adjacent the rail-webs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157.


CLS 238/196
TXT The upright flange of the angle or splice bar is pivoted to the base-plate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209     and 210.


CLS 238/197
TXT The upright flange of the angle or the splice-bar is connected to the
    base-plate by lugs or fingers interlocking therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASSES:

    209     and 210.


CLS 238/198
TXT The upright flange or the splice-bar has a longitudinal or dovetailed
    sliding locking engagement with the base-plate.


CLS 238/199
TXT The rigid angle-chair cooperates with a splice bar which underlaps the free
    edge of the angle base-plate.


CLS 238/200
TXT A complete splice-bar joint carried on an angle-chair with a lateral
    cushion between the parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158.


CLS 238/201
TXT The angle-chair cooperates with a splice-bar which is guided by and is
    slidable toward the rails.


CLS 238/202
TXT The same as subclass 201 with the addition of screw-operated means for
    sliding the splice-bar.


CLS 238/203
TXT The same as subclass 201 with the addition of horizontal wedge means for
    sliding the splice-bar.


CLS 238/204
TXT The same as subclass 201 with the addition of vertical wedge means for
    sliding the splice-bar.


CLS 238/205
TXT The rail-joint is formed of a base-plate with upright side flanges forming
    a channel- shaped member fitting and carrying the rail ends.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154.


CLS 238/206
TXT The same as subclass 205 with the addition of a base-plate filler inserted
    between the rail bottom and the joint-base.


CLS 238/207
TXT The same as subclass 205 with the addition of a filler member or wedge
    inserted between the side of the rail and one of the upstanding
    joint-flanges.


CLS 238/208
TXT The same as subclass 207 except that filler inserts or wedges are used on
    both sides of the rail and inside the channel-shaped joint member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161     and 170.


CLS 238/209
TXT Flat plates or blocks for supporting abutting rail ends.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160.


CLS 238/210
TXT The same as subclass 209 with the addition of longitudinal ribs or flanges
    on the top of the plates adjacent the rail ends.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass excludes such flanges as overlap a splice-bar,
    which are in subclass 212.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160,    212 and 257.


CLS 238/211
TXT The angle splice-bars have depending flanges which underflap the sides of
    the base-plate.


CLS 238/212
TXT The upwardly-projecting flanges on the base-plate overlap the angle
    splice-bars.


CLS 238/213
TXT Base-plates with girder-flanges or stiffening means.


CLS 238/214
TXT Base-plates of distorted sheet metal for stiffening purposes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189.


CLS 238/215
TXT The base-plate is usually depressed at the center and carries a support
    directly under the abutting rail ends.


CLS 238/216
TXT The base-plate and abutting rail ends have interlocking lug engagement to
    prevent rail creepage.


CLS 238/217
TXT The rails are secured to the base-plate by side clips.


CLS 238/218
TXT A joint member which takes the load of the traction-wheels off the
    tread-surfaces of the abutting rail ends.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes most of this type in which the
    rail-sections are not changed.


CLS 238/219
TXT The abutting rail-heads are grooved or recessed to receive a bridging
    insert.


CLS 238/220
TXT A thin sheet-metal tread covering is placed over the abutting rail ends.


CLS 238/221
TXT The abutting rail-heads are mortised on one side to receive the
    bridge-piece.


CLS 238/222
TXT The abutting rail-heads are mortised on both sides to receive a pair of
    bridge-pieces.


CLS 238/223
TXT A tread member including a rail-head with a central or a single side shank
    is inserted between the abutting rail ends.


CLS 238/224
TXT An inserted rail-head section provided with a pair of legs which straddles
    the rail-webs.


CLS 238/225
TXT The tread-block inserted between the rail ends takes up the space of the
    full rail-section.


CLS 238/226
TXT The same as subclass 225 except that the tread-block is locked in place by
    a splice-bar resting against the rail-webs.


CLS 238/227
TXT Filling-in pieces between separated standard-section rail ends.


CLS 238/228
TXT Elastic or expanding fillers between standard-section rail ends.


CLS 238/229
TXT The rail ends are centrally slotted from top to bottom to receive vertical
    tread-plates.


CLS 238/230
TXT The rail ends overlap each other and are beveled, notched, or mortised to
    form the joints.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 339+ for scarf joints in general.


CLS 238/231
TXT The specially-shaped rail ends are assembled in joint form by longitudinal
    movement only.


CLS 238/232
TXT The same as subclass 231 except that joined rail ends are exact duplicates.


CLS 238/233
TXT The specially-formed rail ends are assembled by longitudinal movement
    supplemented with a vertical drop by one of the rail ends.


CLS 238/234
TXT The specially-formed rail ends may be assembled by either a longitudinal or
    vertical movement of the rail ends.


CLS 238/235
TXT The specially-formed rail ends are assembled by vertical movement only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177     and 216.


CLS 238/236
TXT The specially-formed rail ends may be assembled laterally to form the joint.


CLS 238/237
TXT The same as subclass 236 except that the specially-formed rail ends are
    duplicates.


CLS 238/238
TXT The same as subclass 236, except that the integral engaging parts prevent
    the longitudinal separation of the rails.


CLS 238/239
TXT The same as subclass 238 except that the specially-formed rail ends are
    duplicates.


CLS 238/240
TXT The specially-formed rail ends can only be assembled by angular positioning
    of the rails relatively to each other.


CLS 238/241
TXT The same as subclass 240 except that the specially-formed rail ends must be
    arranged in longitudinal angular relation to assemble the joint.


CLS 238/242
TXT The same as subclass 240 except that the specially-formed rail ends must be
    arranged in lateral angular relation to assemble the joint. This relative
    angular movement means on axial adjustment of one rail about its
    longitudinal axis.


CLS 238/243
TXT Splice or angle bars for rail connections which fit the rail-webs and may
    cover the rail-base tops.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159,    160, 212, and 263.


CLS 238/244
TXT The splice-bar element filling the rail fishing-space or abutting the
    rail-web is composed of several parts.


CLS 238/245
TXT The splice-bar is made up of two parts forced into the rail fishing-space
    by movement like straightening a toggle-joint.


CLS 238/246
TXT The splice-bars are slid into position longitudinally and are held in place
    by guides integral with the rail.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226.


CLS 238/247
TXT The same as subclass 246 except that the splice-bar guides are detachable
    from the rail ends.


CLS 238/248
TXT The splice-bars slide in sleeves attached to the rail ends.


CLS 238/249
TXT The splice-bars are bolts or rods which pass through sleeves formed on or
    secured to the rail ends.


CLS 238/250
TXT One splice-bar carries looped lugs which pass through the rail-web, and the
    other splice-bar passes through the looped lugs.


CLS 238/251
TXT One splice-bar has bayonet-slots for slidable locking engagement with a
    bolt or a lug on the other splice-bar.


CLS 238/252
TXT Two splice-bars with an auxiliary slotted locking-plate which engages the
    bolt-heads. These plates may slide vertically or horizontally.


CLS 238/253
TXT Splice-bar joints with transverse keys engaging apertures or notches in the
    bolts.


CLS 238/254
TXT One edge of the splice-bar engages in a groove or recess in a rail and
    pivots in this recess to seating position.


CLS 238/255
TXT The splice-bars are seated and held by a cam fastening.


CLS 238/256
TXT The U-bars span the joint, and the legs pass through the rail-webs.  The
    loops span the joint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    378.


CLS 238/257
TXT The angle-bars have their outer lower edges beveled upwardly and outwardly.


CLS 238/258
TXT The splice-bars are thickened at the middle and taper toward the ends.


CLS 238/259
TXT The splice-bars are spring members or spring-supported.  This does not
    include mere spring-washers.


CLS 238/260
TXT Fastening devices for splice-bars and rail-joints not otherwise classified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181.


CLS 238/261
TXT Special fastening for splice-bar bolts. The double keys are usually
    duplicates reversely arranged.


CLS 238/262
TXT Nut and bolt locks for rail-joints not otherwise classified in which a
    substantial modification of a rail-joint member forms a part of the nut or
    bolt lock.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, subclasses 81+ for a threaded fastener (i.e., a
    bolt or nut) and means for restricting the rotation thereof relative to a
    coacting substructure (e.g., the substructure may be the splice bar of a
    rail joint).


CLS 238/263
TXT The clamp member passes underneath the rail-base and engages the
    splice-bars or joint members to bind them against the rail.


CLS 238/264
TXT Rail seats or supports other than tie-plates adapted to support a rail on a
    tie, pot-sleeper, or stringer.


CLS 238/265
TXT Rail-seats with base-anchors adapted to be embedded in concrete.


CLS 238/266
TXT Rail-chairs for holding reversible rails. The heads and bases of the rail
    are alike.


CLS 238/267
TXT Rail-seats for T-rails having no base-flanges.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177.


CLS 238/268
TXT Rail-seats for T-rails.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176.


CLS 238/269
TXT Rail-seats of cast metal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 544+ for
    nominally claimed metallic track, that is, having some structural
    description, but insufficient to limit its use to that of a railway track,
    element, adjunct or material.


CLS 238/270
TXT Rail-seats cast integrally with a tie.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30.


CLS 238/271
TXT Cast-rail-seats with flat or plane tops.


CLS 238/272
TXT Rail seats of wrought or sheet metal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 544+ for
    nominally claimed metallic track, that is, having some structural
    description, but insufficient to limit its use to that of a railway track,
    element, adjunct or material.


CLS 238/273
TXT Wrought or sheet metal rail-seats made integrally with a tie.


CLS 238/274
TXT Wrought or sheet metal rail-seats having flat or plane tops.


CLS 238/275
TXT Twin-section rail-seats divided under the rail base and usually having
    flanges extending over the rail base-flanges.


CLS 238/276
TXT The same as subclass 275 except that the jaws are made of wrought or sheet
    metal.


CLS 238/277
TXT Pivoted rail-supporting seats.


CLS 238/278
TXT Half or the rail-seat is formed on the tie or stringer, and the other half
    of the rail-seat is laterally applied and has a flange to engage the top of
    the rail-base.


CLS 238/279
TXT The weight of the rails acts upon the seat members through levers, wedges,
    or rocking elements to hold the rail to its seat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170.


CLS 238/280
TXT The saddle is a rectangular frame two sides of which pass under the
    rail-base and the other two sides of which pass over the tie tops and
    engage the edges of the rail-base. The saddle does not uphold the rail.


CLS 238/281
TXT Rail-seats which may be vertically adjusted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172.


CLS 238/282
TXT Rail-seats which may be laterally adjusted

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281.


CLS 238/283
TXT Cushions and yeilding supports for rails or rail-seats.


CLS 238/284
TXT Metallic springs for supporting rails, either directly or through
    interposed seats.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302.


CLS 238/285
TXT The same as subclass 283 except that wood blocks are used.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118.


CLS 238/286
TXT Wooden blocks upon which rails are seated and into which the rail-holding
    spikes or fastening penetrate.


CLS 238/287
TXT Tie-plates for use on ties and stringers.


CLS 238/288
TXT Tie-plates cross-connected under both track-rails on top of a tie or a
    single tie-plate extending under both rails.


CLS 238/289
TXT A tie-plate extending longitudinally under a rail and over a plurality of
    ties.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209     through 217, inclusive.


CLS 238/290
TXT Tie-plates each composed of a plurality of sections overlapping each other
    or having laterally-lapping parts in a horizontal plane.


CLS 238/291
TXT The same as subclass 290 except that the lapping sections interlock with
    each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193.


CLS 238/292
TXT Tie-plates each carrying a rail-brace engaging the rail-head.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281.


CLS 238/293
TXT Tie plates each having integrally formed therewith a rail-head-engaging
    brace.


CLS 238/294
TXT A tie-plate with a spike-locking member, usually engaging the top of the
    spike-head.


CLS 238/295
TXT A tie-plate engaging a locking lug or recess on a spike.


CLS 238/296
TXT Tie-plates with pawl-locks for the spikes.


CLS 238/297
TXT Bolts, lugs and prongs for fastening tie-plates to the ties.


CLS 238/298
TXT The same as subclass 297 except that tie-plate-anchoring members are
    integrally formed with the tie-plate.


CLS 238/299
TXT Tie-plates having depending flanges engaging the outer sides or end of a
    tie.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305.


CLS 238/300
TXT Tie-plates have depending parts surrounding the under side of the tie.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    314.


CLS 238/301
TXT Tie-plates adapted to be used either side up.


CLS 238/302
TXT Tie-plates adapted to act as springs or cushions.


CLS 238/303
TXT Tie-plates for use with screw-spikes.


CLS 238/304
TXT Top-surface form and attachments for tie-plates.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    292,    293, 299, 301, and 303.


CLS 238/305
TXT Tie-plates adapted for slight rotation when placed in final seated
    position. The rotation locks the rail in place.


CLS 238/306
TXT Form variation for rail-seating surfaces on tie-plates.


CLS 238/307
TXT Special contours or outline-forms for tie-plates.


CLS 238/308
TXT Relative arrangement of spike-holes in tie plates.


CLS 238/309
TXT Tie-plates with means for bracing the spike-shanks.


CLS 238/310
TXT Fastenings not otherwise classified for railway-track structure.

    (1)     Note.  For fastenings designed to secure a rail-bond or other
    electric connector to a rail, see this class, subclass 14.05 and indented
    subclasses, particularly subclasses 14.13, 14.14 and 14.15.


CLS 238/311
TXT Fastening by welding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16.


CLS 238/312
TXT Boxes and closures for protection of rail-joints and other track elements.

    (1)     Note.  For protective devices limited to the protection of
    rail-bonds, see this class, subclass 14.9.


CLS 238/313
TXT Rail-fastenings with a continual series of fastening elements on a tie, so
    that a rail may be detachably secured at any desired point on a tie.


CLS 238/314
TXT Fastening devices have yoke-anchoring devices each surrounding a tie.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300.


CLS 238/315
TXT Anchoring devices to prevent creepage of rails or to prevent the track
    structure from displacement.


CLS 238/316
TXT Pawls engaging the rails to prevent creepage.


CLS 238/317
TXT Cams engaging the rails to prevent creepage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    341.


CLS 238/318
TXT Lug or bolt devices entering rail-recesses to prevent rail-creepage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216.


CLS 238/319
TXT Lugged rails to prevent rail-creepage.


CLS 238/320
TXT Distorted rail-base flanges to prevent creepage.


CLS 238/321
TXT Devices for prevention of creepage of rails which abut against the tie
    sides and which do not support any vertical load.


CLS 238/322
TXT Tie-abutting anticreepers cam-actuated.


CLS 238/323
TXT Tie-abutting anticreepers with transverse rail-base-engaging clips.


CLS 238/324
TXT Tie-abutting anticreepers wedge-actuated.


CLS 238/325
TXT Tie-abutting anticreepers with bevel sliding sections.


CLS 238/326
TXT The same as subclass 325 except that each section overlaps the other at one
    of its ends.


CLS 238/327
TXT Tie abutting anticreepers with twin jaws base-connected.


CLS 238/328
TXT The same as subclass 327 with tightening- wedge.


CLS 238/329
TXT Tie-abutting anticreepers with side abutment giving a diagonal or inclined
    position to the connecting member under the rail-base.


CLS 238/330
TXT The same as subclass 329 except that the anticreeper is an integral
    structure.


CLS 238/331
TXT Rail-fastenings adapted to have transverse sliding movements relatively to
    the rails.


CLS 238/332
TXT The same as subclass 331 except that the slide is operated by a screw.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202.


CLS 238/333
TXT The same as subclass 331 except that the slide is actuated by a horizontal
    wedge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203.


CLS 238/334
TXT The same as subclass 331 except that the slide is actuated by a vertical
    wedge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204.


CLS 238/335
TXT Abutting screw points or ends against rails.


CLS 238/336
TXT Braces abutting rail-heads to hold them in place.

    (1)     Note.  For rail-braces mounted on tie-plates see this class,
    subclasses 292 and 293.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281.


CLS 238/337
TXT Rail-braces having varying points of engagement with the rail as the rail
    is shimmed up more or less.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281.


CLS 238/338
TXT Clamps for holding railbases to their seats or supports.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    187,    Elevators, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclass 408 for means for attaching elevator guide rails to the elevator
    shaft.


CLS 238/339
TXT Rail-clamping devices interconnected between the two rails.


CLS 238/340
TXT Rail-clamps having a plurality of rail-flange engaging faces for
    interchangeable or selective use, as in case of rail adjustment.


CLS 238/341
TXT Rail-clamps of cam bolt head or cam type for rail adjustment.


CLS 238/342
TXT Rail-clamps of nut type.


CLS 238/343
TXT Rail-clamps having anchoring-lugs on their bases or rear abutments to hold
    them in place.


CLS 238/344
TXT Rail-clamps having depending platelike faces to be fastened to tie sides or
    other vertical faces.


CLS 238/345
TXT Rail-clamps having vertical bolt-like shanks.


CLS 238/346
TXT Rail-clamps having ratchet or step-by-step engagement with their supports
    for adjustment purposes.


CLS 238/347
TXT Rail-clamps having inclined or beveled guides for longitudinal movement of
    the clamp to effect lateral adjustment of the rail.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    362     and 363.


CLS 238/348
TXT Rail-clamps the rearwardly-extending arms of which enter and pass
    rearwardly beneath the tie interior and may pass out through the tie at the
    extreme rear end.


CLS 238/349
TXT Rail-clamps of spring metal or spring metal or spring-pressed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    187,    Elevators, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclass 408 for means for attaching elevator guide rails to the elevator
    shaft.


CLS 238/350
TXT Rail-engaging lugs made integrally with the tie.


CLS 238/351
TXT Rail-fastenings of the clip type usually sprung or driven into position
    transversely.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217.


CLS 238/352
TXT Rail and tie clips having a jaw engaging over the rail-base flange and a
    depending jaw at right angles to the first jaw for engagement with a
    transverse tie.


CLS 238/353
TXT A rail-clip forced to engaging position by a vertical wedge.


CLS 238/354
TXT The same as subclass 353 except that the clip is actuated by a horizontal
    wedge.


CLS 238/355
TXT Hooks for holding a rail to its seat.


CLS 238/356
TXT Pivoted hooks swingable into engagement with a rail-base flange.


CLS 238/357
TXT Vertical hooks in engagement with both sides of a rail-base.


CLS 238/358
TXT The same as subclass 357 except that both hooks are held to place by a
    single through-bolt.


CLS 238/359
TXT The same as subclass 357 except that both hooks are pivotally mounted on a
    single pivot.


CLS 238/360
TXT Rail-clamps of a lever type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    279.


CLS 238/361
TXT Wedges for fastening rails.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206,    207, 208, 253, 266, 267, and 324.


CLS 238/362
TXT Parallel wedges usually engaging the opposite sides of a rail for
    adjustment purposes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208.


CLS 238/363
TXT Pairs of aligned wedges for rail fastenings and joints.


CLS 238/364
TXT Wedges for engagement of the edge of the base-flanges of railway-rails.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21.


CLS 238/365
TXT Locks for wedges involving modification of track elements.


CLS 238/366
TXT Spikes and bolts of such forms as to be capable of use only with track
    elements substantially modified to cooperate with such spikes or bolts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    295.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, subclasses 439+ for spikes of general application.


CLS 238/367
TXT Spikes adapted to have interlocking engagement with each other in the
    interior of a tie.


CLS 238/368
TXT Spikes bent in driving for locking purposes.


CLS 238/369
TXT Split-ended spikes for cooperation with special track-fastenings.


CLS 238/370
TXT Plugs into which spikes are adapted to be driven.


CLS 238/371
TXT Sockets for the reception of spikes. These sockets form a portion of the
    tie structure.


CLS 238/372
TXT Screw-spikes not adapted for general use, but only as track-fastening
    devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    303.


CLS 238/373
TXT Sockets for screw-spikes.  These sockets form either a portion of the tie
    structure or a portion of the rail-seat.


CLS 238/374
TXT Sockets for the reception of a spike or bolt together with a wedge placed
    in the socket with the spike or bolt.


CLS 238/375
TXT Locking devices for spikes and bolts not adapted for general use, but only
    for track-fastening devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    294     and 295.


CLS 238/376
TXT Ratcheted spikes or bolts adapted for use only with track-fastenings.


CLS 238/377
TXT Bolt-anchors in ties and concrete and bolt-sleeves adapted for use only
    with track-fastenings.


CLS 238/378
TXT U-bolts and clips adapted for use only with track-fastenings.

    (1)     Note.  These clips differ from those of subclass 351 in that they
    require bending of ends or additional fastening means to hold them in place.


CLS 238/379
TXT Devices for preventing a person's foot from being caught in frogs,
    switches, or guard-rails.


CLS 238/380
TXT Devices for preventing a person's foot from being caught by a movable
    switch-point.


CLS 238/381
TXT Foot-guards which yield and are depressed by the passage of a wheel-flange
    thereover, but which will not be depressed when stepped upon.


CLS 238/382
TXT Devices for deadening noise in railway-track other than cushion elements
    for the rails.  The latter devices are found in subclasses 283, 284 and 285.


CLS 239/
TTL FLUID SPRINKLING, SPRAYING, AND DIFFUSING

CLS 239/
TXT OUTLINE OR NOTES

    I.      GENERAL STATEMENTS OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    II.     DEFINITIONS OF TERMS

    III.    MISCELLANEOUS CLASS NOTES AND LINES

    IV.     INDEX TO CLASSES NOTED IN THE CLASS DEFINITION AND THE SUBCLASSES
    OF THIS CLASS

    I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    (1)     SPRAYING AND SPRINKLING

    This is the general class for claims pertaining to the spraying,
    sprinkling, or scattering of fluids or fluent solids either in the form of
    slurries or as dry material, over an extended area on a surface.  The class
    includes processes and apparatus, not provided for in some more specialized
    class, for ejecting fluents and slurries by slinging, sloshing,
    centrifugally throwing, overflowing, and projecting such materials in the
    form of fog, mist, droplets, spray, sprinkle or a modified stream in a
    general haphazard or broadcasting manner upon the immediate vicinity of
    operation or environment, upon a surface to be treated.  The surface may be
    of any shape or form and the sprinkling, spraying, or scattering may be for
    any purpose, for example, a street to be flushed or oiled, a field or lawn
    to be irrigated by a lawn sprinkler, hose, nozzle, or overhead irrigating
    system or to be fertilized or to be seeded, a tree or other plant to be
    sprayed or dusted for some plant husbandry reason or for destroying
    insects, etc.; however, any claim reciting a specialized relation between
    the sprinkling, spraying, or scattering means and the surface, work or
    environment being treated is excluded from this class.  Some form of
    modified flow, either by way of discharge characteristic, (e.g., droplet
    size, or degree of atomization, etc.) is required.

    (2)     WEATHER CONTROL OR MODIFICATION

    This class also takes methods for causing or inhibiting changes in
    atmospheric moisture conditions not elsewhere classified as by
    precipitating, dissipating, or inhibiting atmospheric moisture (rain, fog,
    frost, or snow) or inducing fog or like, and apparatus for precipitating
    atmospheric moisture if not classifiable in some other class on the basis
    of the claimed proximate functions.

    (3)     DIFFUSERS

    This class also takes methods and apparatus for disposing or disseminating
    a liquid or solid into the ambient air by unhurried evaporation or
    sublimation, the material being supplied to or supported by a holder, with
    or without controlled dripping of the substance through the ambient air or
    being fed usually to an absorbent material from whose surface evaporation
    takes place.

    (4)     FOUNTAINS

    This class also provides the locus for patents including steps or means for
    ejecting liquids into the air as a stream or spray to serve an ornamental
    or decorative function or for directing a bubble or stream generally
    upwardly for drinking purposes especially where the fluid conducting or
    ejecting member is associated with a stand, pedestal, or catch basin for
    overflow or waste.

    (5)     DRINKING TUBES AND STRAWS

    This class also provides the generic repository for portable drinking tubes
    and straws, per se, including those which are sipped through by placing one
    end of the tube in the mouth while the other end thereof is in the fluid
    within a holder, and also for those which are held in a flowing stream,
    e.g., juxtaposed a faucet, and redirect the fluid to the mouth.

    (6)     DRY PULVERULENT MATERIAL

    This class provides for the combination of a container or similar
    receptacle for holding a supply of dry material and a means to strew or
    scatter such material in the dry form over an extended area on a surface; a
    nozzle, per se, disclosed for scattering or strewing a dry powder is
    properly classified in this class only if the claimed structure is capable
    of use with a fluid.

    Except as provided in the above paragraph, this is also the class for
    discharging or scattering a fluent material only if there is fluid
    sprinkling, spraying, or diffusing of the type specified in (1) above, no
    matter in which order the fluent is discharged in relation to the fluid and
    with no regard as to whether or not one material reaches the surface to be
    contacted after the other has already been deposited thereon.

    (7)     TERMINAL FLUID HANDLING ELEMENTS AND ORIFICE SHAPES

    This class also provides the residual home for fluid discharging or
    ejecting members, per se, claimed as terminal members, i.e., members which
    render the final influence or point of control upon a fluid during its
    projection from the fluid system to discharge into the atmosphere, or
    through the air to the environment and not having such additional features
    which restrict the use thereof to some special art or other classification.
     Such nozzle, distributor, apertured pipe, orifice shape, rose, etc., must
    serve to modify flow of the fluid as it leaves the element.  Terminal fluid
    handling elements, orifice shapes, ejecting or egress means for this class
    include:

    (1)     Outlet means which effect modification of the emitted stream to
    cause lateral compression or expansion thereof, such as would not occur in
    a mere abruptly terminated flow means (e.g., a pipe cut off at its end);

    (2)     means within, proximate to, or at the end of the flow line to cause
    the emitted stream to become more turbulent, or to be reduced in turbulence
    tending to assume a smooth or laminar flow, or to be redirected and
    dispersed;

    (3)     means to control droplet size, to restrict flow to increase
    pressure, or to alter discharge coverage, of the emitted stream.

    Examples of means to accomplish the above are orifice shapes, spray heads,
    and the like; weir or drip type discharge, and other outlet means with such
    added features as whirlers, deflectors, rotation controllers, interiorly
    placed guides and distributors and systems including aspirating nozzles.

    In order to be properly classified in this class, a claim must include a
    distributor or nozzle means more specifically than by name only (except as
    hereinafter provided with respect to Class 137).  A claim which recites an
    ejecting, egress, or distributor means by name only is properly classified
    in this class only if the claim also  includes:

    (a)     a coupling means for adjustably securing such terminal means to a
    support, or an articulated coupling means mounted on a support, if the
    disclosed purpose of the coupling is to reorient the terminal means
    relative to the support;

    (b)     special mounting or support means for purposes of continuous motion
    during discharge or emission of the stream, or means for directing such
    terminal means along a path of traverse, where the means for moving and the
    means for directing are disclosed for sprinkling or spraying;

    (c)     two or more such nominally recited terminal means and some
    suggestion of arrangement relative to each other or to a support, e.g.,
    along a pipe, at the ends of a support, etc.

    (d)     a fluid handling system disclosed for sprinkling or spraying, if no
    better basis exists for classification in either Class 137 or Class 222.
    See reference to these classes under Search Class, section III;

    (e)     a fluid handling system disclosed for spraying and including an
    aspirating nozzle where discharge is by aspiration, or feedback control,
    e.g., flow regulation as a result of discharge or for control of discharge,
    or some other provision as otherwise defined hereinabove; or

    (f)     a container for nonfluid material and it is clear that the broadly
    recited ejecting, egress or distributor means is an element which moves
    relatively to a fixed support, such as a rotating scatterer.  See (3) Note
    in subclass 650.

    Certain structures, for example, unitary plural outlet means, are
    considered to be terminal members, per se; therefore the following or the
    like are considered to involve more than mere named or nominal terminal
    means, and if such or similar language is recited in a claim, affords basis
    for classification in this class, unless reason exists for exclusion in
    view of the class lines set out below:

    A pipe with a restricted outlet; a flexible, rigid or elongated nozzle; a
    spray gun; a rose; a shower head.

    Similarly, a cutting or welding torch, a burner, a fuel injector recited as
    such is classified in this class if it is clear that the terminal member or
    tip is included in such recitation, and not just the support for such
    terminal member or tip.

    II.     DEFINITIONS OF TERMS

    DEFLECTOR
    A solid means arranged exteriorly of the egress port or last point of
    confinement for dispersing or redirecting the effluent.  Some deflectors
    may be abrupt continuations of the terminal flow conducting means unitarily
    formed therewith.

    DISCHARGE MODIFIER
    Any means which changes the characteristic of the fluid leaving the
    terminus as by whirling, deflecting, removing, or quieting turbulence, etc.

    DISTRIBUTOR
    A generic term to cover all means for effecting flow modification (e.g.,
    dispersion, broadcast, projection, or scattering, etc.) of fluid, slurries
    or fluent material, coming within the class definition.

    FLOW MODIFIER
    Means altering or adjusting the quantity of fluid being delivered through
    the discharge port or the character of the flow as, for example, the
    dispersion pattern, the droplet size, the amount of turbulence or any other
    control for smoothing out or disturbing the discharge.  This term is used
    as being generic to discharge modification and to flow regulation.

    FLOW REGULATOR
    Means for altering or adjusting the quantity of effluent.

    FLUID
    Includes any material which is handled like a fluid (i.e., may be caused to
    flow) and meets the definition of those materials accepted by this class in
    Section I.

    INJECTION NOZZLE
    A terminal outlet member disclosed as connected to and as discharging into
    a relatively large pressure chamber (e.g., an internal combustion engine or
    combustion turbine combustion space).

    SUPPLY  HOLDER
    A receptacle, container, or the like for retaining material to be sprayed
    with or without additional mixing with or entrainment in a fluid; a vessel
    or retainer other than a flowing stream or flow line.

    THROUGH-FLOW OR SERIES CONNECTED TYPE
    A species of terminal member but of special merit and therefore placed
    above in the order of superiority comprising a plurality of terminal outlet
     members connected end-to-end so that fluid may flow through them
    successively or a coupling member having a side outlet means supporting and
    communicating with an adjacent terminal outlet means in addition to a
    downstream fluid connection.  At this level the terminal member itself will
    comprise lesser fluid elements.  The series connected is regarded at a
    level above mere individual outlets, nozzles, or unitary plural outlet
    means.

    WHIRLER
    A means upstream of the egress means for inducing or causing turbulent flow
    of a swirling or turning nature.

    III.    MISCELLANEOUS CLASS NOTES AND LINES

    (a)     ART DEVICE COMBINATIONS AND SUPPORT

    This class takes (1) means not provided for in any other class to support a
    distributor, terminal outlet member or a portion of the fluid supply system
    leading to the distributor or terminal outlet member on, in relation to, or
    from, a device which ordinarily performs a function other than that of mere
    support, provided the claimed relationship is no more than that required
    for support or normal operation of the fluid system or its terminal outlet
    member, (2) the subject matter of this class combined with an art device in
    which there in no special relationship claimed between the spray device and
    the art device.

    Thus, a treating chamber nominally set forth as supporting a distributor or
    terminal outlet members therein is subject matter for this class as long as
    no special relationship to the walls thereof, for example, is required.

    Accordingly, this Class 239 will take patents directed to the combination
    of a tank or treating chamber by name only and a distributor.

    (b)     FLEXIBLE FLOW LINE STORAGE OR RETRIEVAL

    This class provides for flexible flow line storage for nonuse housing or
    support including retrieval means except as provided hereinbelow:

    Class 251, Valves and Valve Actuation, takes only the valve plus the
    actuator and support for the valve in a system disclosed for this purpose.

    Class 285, Pipe Joints or Couplings, takes combinations of a pipe joint or
    coupling and a support therefor which support may be a reel or rack by
    name. Only so much flow line necessary for the coupling or joining
    modification may be included.

    Class 242, Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, takes only combinations of reel
    means or the like (storage on sheaves) and supporting means or reels, per
    se, with or without the flexible conduit or with or without retrieval
    means.  Inclusion of a fluid handling element not necessary to the reeling,
    unreeling or reel support, is sufficient to exclude such patent from the
    class.

    Class 248, Supports, is in the same relative position in this regard with
    the fluid handling classes as is Class 242 explained above, taking only
    support or storage means for the flexible conduit or named nozzle.  If a
    fluid handling element is included, such element must be necessary for the
    support function.

    Class 137, Fluid Handling, takes combinations involving fluid handling
    means too much for the above named classes and wherein nozzles or outlet
    means for spraying are not included and not otherwise including features of
    dispensing recognized by Class 222.

    Class 92, Expansible Chamber Devices, takes combinations involving an
    expansible chamber device and storage or retrieval means for a conduit
    supply working fluid to or from the expansible chamber and wherein nozzle
    or outlet means for spraying are not included and not otherwise including
    features of dispensing recognized by Class 222.

    Class 222, Dispensing, takes the combination with storage or nonuse support
    means for the function of this section of a dispensing outlet or nozzle,
    the supply tank and a control means for the flow or delivery of fluid; or a
    tank, discharge assistant and dispensing outlet.  Systems including broadly
    recited nozzles for spraying having dispensing features recognized by Class
    222 will not mitigate against classification in this class.

    Class 239, Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, takes combinations of
    the above named elements if there is included some detail of a spraying or
    sprinkling nozzle or outlet element.  A nozzle in name only except as
    otherwise indicated (section II) is classified as set forth above.

    As a general rule, Class 239 provides a place for the entire combination of
    hose, hose storage and a specific spraying nozzle.  For the subcombination
    of the hose, storage means and fluid handling, see Class 137; for the
    subcombination of a valve and support therefor, see Class 251; for the
    subcombination of a pipe joint or coupling and a support therefor, see
    Class 285; for a reel only and the hose (no additional flow conducting
    elements) see Class 242; for a hose support (no additional flow handling
    elements) see Class 248; for a tank, pump and broad outlet or nozzle, or
    for a supply tank, flow control and a broad outlet or nozzle, see Class 222.

    (c)     FOG OR SMOKE, COLLOIDS, GENERATORS, AEROSOLS

    Class 252, Compositions, subclasses 359+ is residual for apparatus for
    generation of colloids as fog or smoke wherein such colloid is formed by a
    compounding step, i.e., a change of state of one or more of the
    constituents occurs, as for example vaporization by the heat of chemical
    reaction, as distinguished from mere mechanical atomization which is
    provided for in this (239) class. Where the sole disclosed use for the
    resulting fog or smoke is as an insecticide (except where a liquid is
    mechanically atomized) the smoke or fog making apparatus is classified in
    Class 43, Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, including such where
    vaporization of a liquid insecticide is involved.

    Class 424, Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, takes
    aerosol compositions there specifically provided whereas Class 252,
    Compositions, is generic to such compositions.  Classification is with such
    appropriate class should a container or supply holding means be broadly
    included to define a package. Classification is with Classes 222,
    Dispensing, and 239, Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, depending
    upon nozzle detail, when a specific container or supply holding means is
    claimed to define a package.

    (d)     LATHER MAKERS

    This subject matter involves the addition of air or gas to solution to
    produce lather.

    Class 422, Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, provides for holders for dissolving of solids
    (wherein the holder as disclosed is incapable of retaining a liquid) where
    the dissolving takes place in the holder and may thereafter be added to a
    stream, the handling of liquids being restricted to the purpose of
    dissolving.

    Class 137, Fluid Handling, includes apparatus under the class definition
    for fluid handling plus means for holding a solid, flaky, or pulverized
    material to be dissolved or entrained and also provides means for adding a
    liquid to a liquid and with respect to each such handling relationship is
    entirely residual.

    Class 222, Dispensing, provides for a holder or supply means for material
    to be dissolved, mixed, or entrained, in a liquid, or alreadly in solution
    with additional means to mix ambient air with the solution including a
    spray, nozzle or outlet by name only, a dispensing outlet, and Class 222
    type discharge means (and not the mere production of lather and the
    swelling or overflowing discharge resulting therefrom for which see Class
    252 or Class 261), or trap chamber or metering chamber type control, outlet
    guide or movable material outlet guide, but not including a clear
    disclosure relating to the projection or forcibly expelling the lather or
    foam for distribution.

    Class 252, Compositions, subclass 359 for foam makers combining the
    subjects matter of the dissolving apparatus of Classes 23 or 137 with means
    affording the addition of air to the solution to create a foam or lather
    but not including particular outlet means and dispensing or distributing
    detail.

    Class 261, Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, provides for specific gas and
    liquid contact apparatus, (and in this connection (dissolvers) makes no
    provision for contacting a liquid and solid means for purposes of obtaining
    a solution) to make lather with means to deliver the lather to a mere
    outlet pipe or line unmodified as to valving or other flow line
    characteristic recognized by Class 222 except to further effect the
    exchange of properties of the materials being contacted prior to discharge.

    Class 239, Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, provides for
    combinations of the above considered subject matter having a modified
    discharging nozzle or otherwise limited projecting means coming within the
    class definition of spraying.

    (e)     MORTAR MIXING AND PROJECTING - PARGETING

    SEARCH CLASS:

    Class 366, Agitating, subclasses 1+ for processes and apparatus for batch
    mixing of mortar, asphaltic and hydraulic cement, concrete and the like,
    including projection thereof by spattering or pargeting devices or
    projection nozzles, with or without specific nozzle structure or mixing by
    or with fluids of the ingredients downstream of the hopper or vessel, if
    the disclosure is specific to or includes mixing mortar, plaster, or
    concrete ingredients (which as a general rule comprise sand, gravel, lime,
    plaster or the like lapideous material, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Processes and apparatus for projection or spraying of resin
    type cements which require mixing just prior to or at discharge, usually
    with a catalyst to cause solidification or setting up, (e.g., epoxy
    resins), or comprising particular nozzle structure of the type defined in
    Class 239, combined with agitation or mixing of ingredients in the supply
    means, provided the ingredients are not those which make up plaster or
    concrete mixtures (as defined in the preceding paragraph), are classified
    in Class 239.


    Class 52, Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 749 for
    miscellaneous machines and implements used in the construction of
    buildings, and see the search notes for other classes and subclasses having
    related apparatus.

    (f)     PIPE COUPLINGS AND COUPLING TO SUPPORT

    Class 285, Pipe Joints or Couplings, provides for couplings adapted to be
    connected to a nozzle or in combination with a nominal nozzle having no
    recited nozzle features on the theory that a broadly recited nozzle
    constitutes no more than a conduit.  However, the patents have been placed
    in this (239) class where the coupling is adjustably secured to a support
    or where an articulated coupling is mounted on a support and in each case,
    a nominal or specific nozzle is claimed if the disclosed purpose of the
    coupling adjustment is to re-orient the nozzle relative to the support.
    The patents have also been placed in this (239) class where the coupling,
    as claimed, is disposed between two serially arranged portions of a single
    nozzle, each positively recited as a nozzle portion, to form in effect an
    articulated nozzle.  Coupling parts formed integrally with a nominally
    recited nozzle have been considered subject matter for Class 285 where the
    nozzle as claimed could be considered a mere pipe, flow line or coupling
    section.

    (g)     SLOW DIFFUSERS

    Except as othewise provided, this class (239) takes apparatus for such
    purpose if more than a composition, poison, disinfectant or the like is
    claimed, see, for example, Classes 96, Gas Separation:  Apparatus; 424,
    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions; 422,  Chemical
    Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing, Preserving, or
    Sterilizing.  Class 422, Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting,
    Deodorizing, Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 305 illustrates how that
    class is related to this class (239) as combination to subcombination,
    respectively, e.g., vapor or fume generation including mere heating of a
    compound to drive off a fume to change a slow diffuser into one which is
    forced.

    With a disclosure of gas separation or humidity control (air conditioning)
    Class 239 will take, as a slow diffuser, a pad, filter or fibrous mass
    which is saturated or maintained saturated with a diffusible liquid (water
    or volative solvents) unless any of the following is included:

    (1)     claimed gas contacting means within the meaning of Class 261 (e.g.,
    special flow arrangements through conduits or the like), or

    (2)     claimed gas movement effecting means (e.g., pump or fan).

    Class 261 will take patents having the (1) or (2) qualifications set out
    above if the filter, pad or mass is:

    (a)     continuously supplied with liquid, or

    (b)     cyclically or periodically moved through a liquid reservoir, or

    (c)     maintained wet by liquid applying means, or

    (d)     moistened by maintaining some part of a continuous wick type member
    immersed in liquid.

    Class 96 will take patents having the (1) or (2) qualifications as set out
    above if the liquid supply means described in the immediately preceding
    paragraph is not included.  An absorbent mass with oil or viscous fluid
    therein or supplied thereto disclosed for gas separation, or a solid or
    nonabsorbent sheet disclosed in a gas separating environment is not
    classified in Class 239 under any circumstances but is classifiable in
    either Class 96 or Class 261 depending on the nature of the liquid source.
    See also Class 96, section III of the class definition under Search Class
    261.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 300.1+ for
    cleaners involving air blast or suction and see the line there stated with
    this (239) class and other appropriate subclasses for general cleaning
    instrumentalities not involving liquids, per se.

    30,     Cutlery, appropriate subclasses for cutting tools and for
    combination of a cutting tool and a ledger plate embedded in the ground and
    see this class (239) subclass 201 for the line among Classes 30, 47, 172,
    and 239 relative to grass or sod cutting around embedded sprinkler heads.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 129+ for
    insecticidal vaporization to diffuse a substance into the air by heat.  See
    section III, (c), above.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 1.01 for ground installed irrigation
    systems having ditches or subterranean irrigating conduits with means to
    supply fertilizer or the like to the irrigating water for discharge into
    the soil; subclass 1.7 for means to scatter fluent material on growing
    plants when combined with a means to manipulate the plants, cultivate the
    earth around the plants, or sense some characteristic of the plant in order
    to control some aspect of the spraying means; subclass 2 for methods of
    frost control and structure for preventing damage to plants, trees and the
    like; and subclass 48.5 for individual water or fertilizer supply means
    buried in the earth near a plant.

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 200.1+ for methods of generating
    propulsive thrust by use of a jet nozzle, and subclasses 204+ for the
    combination of a jet nozzle and a pump, heating chamber, or other means
    recited more specifically than by name only, for imparting energy to the
    fluid stream to be discharged from the nozzle, where the sole, specific,
    disclosure is to obtain thrust as a result of the fluid discharge; however,
    the combination of a nozzle and a means for imparting energy to the fluid
    prior to discharge therefrom is not excluded from Class 239, if the
    disclosure relates to sprinkling, spraying, or diffusing the discharged
    fluid, even though propulsive thrust is obtained therefrom.  See also the
    Notes in Class 239, subclass 265.11.

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses for apparatus comprising a cutting
    means as defined therein, a container for nonfluid material and discharging
    to the cutting means, and a means discharging the product of the cutting
    means where the claim is silent as to structure for strewing or scattering
    the product.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 108+ for solid sorbent
    apparatus for gas separation.  Class 239, subclass 34 is the generic
    subclass for slow diffusers and for desorption by mere ambient air of a
    liquid saturated sorbent.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 312, 314, and 315, for
    beverage infusers in which liquid is sprayed or distributed over infusible
    material, and subclasses 345+ for cooking apparatus combined with means for
    basting food with a liquid, or in general Class 99 has spray arrangements
    for contacting or treating food; however, Class 239 will take claims to
    spray apparatus where no special coaction or cooperation is set forth as
    for example no work support or work handling is claimed.  Class 239 would
    not take for example a tentacled tedder for distribution of fluids through
    a harvested crop.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 73+ for presses having means to add liquid
    and/or steam to the material pressed.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclasses 29+,
    particularly subclasses 31 and 32 for fluent material releasing, generating
    and/or distributing means related to structures to be protected, i.e.,
    entry to which is to be prevented or discouraged wherein spray nozzles or
    discharge means are related to the paths of entry, e.g., platform, cab,
    steps, etc.  Spray apparatus coming within the definition of Class 239 and
    merely vehicle attached or carried will be found in subclasses 172+ and
    other appropriate subclasses of this (239) class.

    111,    Planting, subclasses 118+ for means to spray liquid or gas onto or
    into the soil combined with a means to disturb the soil to facilitate
    absorption of the liquid or gas by the soil.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclasses for a fluid
    distributor under the definition of Class 239 which produces a wave (sonic
    or supersonic) and which includes structure (e.g., horn, resonance chamber)
    to amplify or direct the wave.  A claimed element which has dual disclosed
    functions, one of which is to affect the inherently produced sound wave,
    indicates classification in Class 116.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 300+ for coating apparatus for
    coating by spraying, and see section IX of the class definition of Class
    118 for the line between Class 118 and this (239) class; and see also
    further explanations and conditions of the line in subclasses 307 and 600
    of Class 118 and subclass 15 of this (239) class.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 72+ for watering devices and
    fountains, and subclass 156 for antivermin treatment for animals having
    some stock, restraining device or other specialized cooperating means and
    not capable of general use.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, appropriate subclasses, for the
    combination of a burner or flame nozzle specifically related to a closed
    liquid container.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclasses 495 and 590+ for charge forming, atomizing and mixing devices
    for combustibles claimed in combination with significant internal
    combustion engine structure.  See this (239) class particularly subclasses
    87 through 96 and 278 for appropriate combinations there classified and see
    section III, (a) above.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 271.1+ for weed destroyers and snow
    and ice melters involving surface heaters and the blowing of steam upon
    tracks for clearing tracks of snow.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses for
    spray arrangements having means to manipulate or support the work during
    spraying, or special relation to the work being treated, e.g., hollow work
    cleaning, inverted U-shaped spray frames for vehicle washing, special tank
    relationships, etc.  This (239) class takes spray means subcombinations and
    combinations with tank by name only and combinations wherein the tank as
    claimed is no more than a mere support for the spray means and see section
    III, (a), above.

    137,    Fluid Handling, appropriate subclasses.  This class is residual
    with respect to the fluid handling classes and does not take the
    combination of a fluid handling apparatus and a nozzle no matter how
    broadly such nozzle is defined in the claim, nor by what name it is
    identified, if such nozzle is disclosed as an ejecting, egress or terminal
    means, which, if claimed, per se, would be classified in Class 239.  With
    respect to the other fluid handling classes, reference should be made to
    the other miscellaneous notes in section III, notably subsections (b) and
    (c) for hose storage and lather makers (dissolvers), respectively.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 37+ for flow regulators or
    baffles for pipes and conduits and not disclosed for fluid sprinkling and
    spraying, and subclass 46.5 for deflectors attached to pipes particularly
    to exhaust pipes to spread out the flow of gas.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 2+ and 18+ for spray apparatus as provided for in this (239)
    class claimed in combination with a source of supply and filling means for
    such (239) apparatus.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, appropriate subclasses for apparatus
    specialized for extinguishing fires, as, for example, diffusers and heat
    exchange means associated with discharge means for handling liquefied CO2,
    (snow nozzles) necessitated by the result to be obtained, or means
    responsive to fire or heat conditions, e.g., thermal or fusible links.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 424, and the search there
    noted for a nozzle adapted for boring or forming a hole in the earth by
    fluid flow or jetting.  Classification is in Class 175 if the sole specific
    disclosure or a claim is directed to a nozzle for boring into the earth.

    222,    Dispensing, for dispensers, even though disclosed for fluid
    sprinkling, spraying, or diffusing where means for such purposes are not
    claimed, or are claimed by name only even though positively included if
    means affirmatively moving fluid to discharge is included.  Thus a mere
    named outlet claimed with a gravity discharge hand carried supply container
    or the like will be found in Class 239, subclasses 375+ whereas the same
    outlet claimed with a supply and discharge assistant will be found in Class
    222 on the basis of the relationship in the subcombination.  Further, a
    dispenser for particulate material having a specifically recited nozzle
    which is of the nonscattering type is classified in Class 222.  Also fluent
    material shakers of the salt and pepper type or sifter or pattern opening
    type are in Class 222, whereas hand manipulated fluid sprinklers are in
    this (239) class.  As hereinbefore referred to, (II, Egress Means) systems
    otherwise here classified having as aspirating nozzle, though nominally
    included are in this (239) class.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses, for processes and apparatus for comminution, per se, or in
    which comminution is combined with nonspecialized types of material
    handling subsequent to the comminuting operation.  Class 239, Fluid
    Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing is considered superior to Class 241,
    and a member which receives and scatters the comminuted particles (e.g.,
    baffle, deflector, rotary strewer, nozzle, etc.) as provided for therein is
    classified in Class 239. Comminuting devices, per se, are classified in
    Class 241, even though part of the comminuting structure is disclosed to
    also discharge the treated particles.  A container for nonfluid material
    and scattering means (i.e., subject matter for Class 239, subclasses 650+)
    where the scattering means is only broadly recited as comprising hammers,
    flails, pins, teeth or spikes, even though disclosed for comminuting, is
    classified in Class 239 specific comminuting, cutting or crushing structure
    (e.g., knife surfaces, fixed surfaces cooperating with the cutter edges,
    etc.) must be claimed to indicate classification in Class 241. For further
    examples of classes considered superior, and for examples of classes
    considered inferior thereto, see Class 241, class definition, section 9.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclass 905 for a dispenser with
    deodorant-containing mandrel, and subclasses 370+ for a reeling device for
    elongated material which may include a hose without claiming elements of
    the fluid supply means or characteristics of the hose attached nozzle.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 114 for methods of dissipating fog and the
    like adjacent an airport claiming a significant relation to the airport or
    aircraft, and subclass 136 for arrangements of aircraft structure to
    provide for the discharging or diffusing of material in the air.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 75+ for hose or nozzle type supports either
    for use or nonuse not including elements of the fluid supply, control
    thereof, nor nozzle detail means and see section III, (b) above.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, appropriate subclasses for flow line
    carried valves and their actuators. Class 251, provides for valves adapted
    for use with a nozzle or in combination with a nominal nozzle having no
    recited nozzle features on the theory that a broadly recited nozzle
    constitutes no more than a fluid conductor.  A terminal spray element which
    houses or includes a valving means is construed as subject matter for Class
    239.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 305 for colloid systems or processes of
    generating fogs or fine mist and not disclosed as adapted to (1) wet a
    surface or (2) to precipitate atmospheric moisture, and subclasses 359+ for
    fog or smoke generating apparatus there classified.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    effecting intimate contact of a gas and liquid. The relationship of Class
    239 to Class 261 generally is combination to subcombination.  Where an
    otherwise appropriate discharging means for Class 239 is claimed, such
    means claimed in combination with an upstream gas and liquid contacting
    means does not change the classification thereof to Class 261.  Where,
    however, the gas and liquid contacting means is downstream of a discharging
    means, e.g., submerged nozzle, in the absence of an additionally claimed
    discharging means there beyond, classification is with Class 261.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, appropriate subclasses for electric
    signaling, per se, or with only so much of the art device as is essential
    to the operation or support of the signal means.

    362,    Illumination.  See subclass 96.

    366,    Agitating. See section III (e) and subclasses 102, 142, 143, 144,
    336, 654, and 683.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 239+ for applying liquid developer
    material to a latent image, particularly subclasses 246+ for spraying
    liquid developer material.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 36+ for installed
    irrigation devices or systems functioning to conduct the flow of water in
    channels.  Class 405 takes installed irrigation devices and systems having
    below-ground terminal outlets, as well as above-ground flumes having
    discharge openings for irrigation purposes.

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, appropriate subclasses for a
    fluid distributor combined with fluid motor or pump structure of the type
    there classifiable and see the Search Note to Class 239 under section IV of
    the Class Definition for a detailed statement of the line.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 151+ for jet pumps whereby the motive fluid acts
    by its energy of motion and by friction to entrain and carry with it a
    gaseous fluid to effect the pumping action. Jet nozzles, per se, is subject
    matter for Class 239; also Class 239 provides for aspirating nozzles and
    other mixing arrangements similar in structure to jet pumps.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 255+ for dissolving apparatus, and
    see section III (d) above for statement of the line.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 421+ for processes of coating by
    spraying.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 2+ for a method of combustion; subclasses
    298+ for a wick burner and appropriate subclasses for a fuel discharge
    device combined with a feature which (1) specializes the device for use in
    or with a furnace or combustion zone, e.g., a pilot burner, an
    incandescent, or an arrangement which uses a portion of the furnace or
    combustion chamber as a passage to provide combustion fluid, or (2) depends
    on the heat generated by the flame from the  system fluid to perform its
    function, see (1) Note under subclass 128.

    454,    Ventilation, appropriate subclasses for air inlets, outlets,
    registers, louvers, and the like for ventilation.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 23+ for application of gases to the human body
    for therapeutic purposes and subclasses 39+ for spraying devices for
    treating some part of the human body having means for contact with the body
    or having nozzles for entering a body cavity or orifice.

    901,    Robots, subcollection 43 for a collection of spray painting or
    coating robots.



    IV.     INDEX TO CLASSES NOTED IN THE CLASS DEFINITION AND THE SUBCLASSES
    OF THIS CLASS.

    After   each  class  listed  below,  the   notation    "See- - - -" refers
    to the section of the class definition and the subclasses of Class 239 in
    which there are references to the class involved.

    2,      Apparel.  See subclass 36.

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing and General Cleaning.  See section III and
    subclasses 114, 123, 145, 173, 278, 284, 309, 310, and 436.

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware.  See subclasses 375 and 525.

    30,     Cutlery.  See section III and subclasses 33 and 201.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying.  See section III and
    subclasses 34, 77 and 135.

    47,     Plant Husbandry.  See section III and subclasses 2, 14, 145, 201,
    208, 278, and 310.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings). See III(e) and subclass 284.

    55,     Gas Separation.  See subclasses 145 and 590.3.

    60,     Power Plants.  See section III and subclasses 251 and 265.11.

    62,     Refrigeration.  See subclass 24.

    63,     Jewelry.  See subclass 36.

    68,     Textiles:   Fluid Treating Apparatus. See subclass 278.

    83,     Cutting.  See section III.

    84,     Music.  See subclass 18.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type. See subclasses 191, 204 and 237.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus.  See section III and subclass 34.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, see section III and subclass 34.

    100,    Presses.  See section III.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock.  See subclasses 173 and 174.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device.  See section III and
    subclasses 172 and 173.

    111,    Planting.  See section III and subclass 147.

    116,    Signals and Indicators.  See section III and subclasses 35, 73 and
    102.

    118,    Coating Apparatus.  See section III and subclasses 15, 34, 133,
    150, 173, and 181.

    119,    Animal Husbandry.  See section III and subclass 302+.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers. See section III and subclass 136.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines.  See section III and subclasses 88, 95
    and 584.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces.  See section III and subclass 173.

    128,    Surgery.  See subclass 270.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids.  See section III and
    subclasses 173 and 278.

    137,    Fluid Handling.  See section III and subclasses 39, 63, 66, 67, 69,
    70, 72, 73, 120, 128, 129, 195, 196, 202, 208, 209, 212, 271, 286, 288,
    310, 313, 317, and 601.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits.  See section III and subclasses 33, 145
    and 331.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means.
    See section III and subclasses 120, 128, 195, 271, and 303.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators.  See subclass 214.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers.  See section III and subclasses 128 and 461.

    172,    Earth Working.  See subclasses 147, 201 and 658.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth.  See section III and subclass 591.

    180,    Motor Vehicles.  See subclasses 130 and 172.

    184,    Lubrication.  See subclasses 173 and 338.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven.  See subclasses 214, 218 and 650.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package.  See subclasses 34 and 58.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation. See subclasses 86, 145 and 590.3.

    211,    Supports:  Racks.  See subclass 278.

    215,    Bottles and Jars.  See subclass 33.

    219,    Electric Heating.  See subclass 79.

    221,    Article Dispensing.  See subclass 211.

    222,    Dispensing.  See sections II and III and subclasses 39, 67, 68, 72,
    73, 74, 77, 120, 124, 128, 135, 143, 145, 152, 195, 196, 211, 271, 309,
    310, 320, 322-324, 327, 328, 331-334, 342, 343, 350, 355, 356, 359, 363,
    374, 375, 376, 435, 436, 570, 582, 601, 650, 654, and 657.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus.  See subclass 34.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length.  See subclass 84.

    237,    Heating Systems.  See subclass 34.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration.  See section III and
    subclass 650.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding.  See section III and subclasses
    34, 52, 189, and 195.

    244,    Aeronautics.  See section III and subclasses 2, 14, 171, and 265.11.

    248,    Supports.  See section III and subclasses 195, 280 and 525.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation.  See section III and subclasses 67,
    195, 537, 569, 578, 579, 581, 582, and 583.

    252,    Compositions.  See section III and subclasses 2, 14, 34, 77, and
    343.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus.  See section III and subclasses
    34, 44, 143, 214, 343, and 432.

    280,    Land Vehicles.  See subclasses 130 and 172.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings.  See section III and subclasses 195, 209
    and 587.

    291,    Track Sanders.  See subclass 650.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure.  See subclass 102.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure.  See subclasses 34 and 278.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical.  See section III and subclasses 72 and
    102. 362, Illumination.  See subclass 96. 366, Agitating, see section III
    (e), and subclasses 102, 142, 143, 144, 366, 654, and 683.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices.  See subclasses 35-39.

    362,    Illumination. See subclass 96.

    366,    Agitating. See section III (e) and subclasses 102, 142, 143, 144,
    336, 654, and 683.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus. See subclasses 146, 147,
    202, and 650.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering. See section III and subclass 145.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current.  See subclasses 77 and 654.

    414,    Material or Article Handling.  See subclasses 650, 654, 657, and
    663.

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps. See section III and
    subclasses 191, 251 and 265.11.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers).  See subclasses 223, 251
    and 265.11.

    417,    Pumps, see section III.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, see subclass 331.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, sections III(d) and III(g), and subclasses 34
    and 310.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, see section III
    and subclass 53.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus.
    See subclass 79.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products.
    See subclass 33 and 34.

    427,    Coating Processes, see section III and subclasses 3, 79 and 690.

    431,    Combustion, see section III and subclasses 1, 8, 34, 70, 99, 128,
    145, 211, 214, 265.11, 288, 398, 402.5, and 446.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, see subclasses 33 and 265.11.

    454,    Ventilation.  See section III and subclasses 2, 14, 34, and 284.

    604,    Surgery.  See section III.


CLS 239/1
TXT Processes under the class definition concerned with steps or ways of
    distributing fluid material on or over an area or into the air.

    (1)     Note.  All methods involving burning or propagating or forming a
    flame are excluded from Class 239; accordingly any patent claiming a method
    of combustion is classified in Class 431, Combustion, subclasses 2+ and
    cross-referenced in Class 239 if it has significant distribution features
    for this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 132.1 for
    specific processes of destroying insects with liquid insectible sprayers.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclass for an insecticidal composition to be sprayed upon a field or
    plant and for a method involving the mere application or spraying of a
    biocidal, e.g., insecticidal, fungicidal, etc., composition.


CLS 239/2.1
TXT Of weather control or modification:

    Methods under subclass 1 for causing or inhibiting changes in atmospheric
    moisture conditions not elsewhere classified and including methods of
    precipitating atmospheric moisture and/or inducing clouds, fog or the like
    to release or disperse their moisture either with or without precipitation
    of rain.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of method steps for rain production or fog
    dissipation which have been classified are (1) vibrating or precussing the
    air, (2) disturbing of the electric charges of particles of the atmosphere,
    (3) locally reducing atmospheric temperatures, or (4) contacting the
    moisture laden atmosphere with solid particles or liquid globules small
    enough to form nuclei about which droplets of moisture may form.  Methods
    of dissipating fog involving no more than merely blowing heated or unheated
    air or gaseous products of combustion into the atmosphere have been
    excluded.

    (2)     Note.  For spraying or dispersion of particulate material into the
    air for purposes other than control of weather, see section (1) of the
    class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14.1,   for apparatus dealing particularly with control of the weather.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 2 for methods of controlling frost to
    provide an atmosphere favorable to the growth of plant life.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, subclass 117 for
    smoke generating or weather modifying compositions containing a resin.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 114 for methods of dissipating fog and the
    like adjacent an airport or aircraft and which claim a significant relation
    to the airport or aircraft.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 305 for methods of generating fogs or fine
    mist, not disclosed as adapted to (1) wet any surface or (2) to precipitate
    atmospheric moisture.


CLS 239/2.2
TXT Snowmaking:

    Methods under subclass 2.1 for causing a particulate type of solidification
    of a liquid or gaseous material by spraying that material into an
    atmosphere in which the ambient temperature is below the materials freezing
    point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14.2,   for snowmaking apparatus.


CLS 239/3
TXT Methods under subclass 1 to project, sprinkle or scatter material from a
    supply system into the ambient air or atmosphere which include a step of
    electrostatically charging the material in order to obtain a desired spray
    characteristic, e.g., dispersion, drop size, velocity or direction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 458 for coating processes in general
    wherein an electrostatic charge is used to perfect the coating operation.


CLS 239/4
TXT Processes under subclass 1 in which the material is forcibly scattered by
    an element which is caused to continuously vibrate with motion of small
    amplitude and relatively high frequency or to continuously expand and
    contract by electrical or electro-mechanical means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102.1+, for means which vibrates or jiggles the fluid in addition to the
    apparatus necessary for supplying and handling fluid for spraying.

    659,    for a container for nonfluid material and a means for scattering
    the material, comprising an oscillating, reciprocating or shaking element.


CLS 239/5
TXT Processes under subclass 1 including steps of delivering fuel to the
    combustion chamber of an engine by injection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86      through 96, and other appropriate subclasses for corresponding
    apparatus depending upon claimed features or mode of operation.


CLS 239/6
TXT Processes under subclass 1 involving the step or steps of slowly
    disseminating a substance into the atmosphere, usually from a porous or
    absorbent mass by volatilization influenced only by the ambient air.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34+,    for slow diffusers.


CLS 239/7
TXT Processes under subclass 1 which include the use of rotating or spinning
    members to either (1) distribute the material into the atmosphere or (2)
    modify the flow of the already discharged material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    214+,   for apparatus in which the spray is effected by means of a rotating
    member.

    380+,   for apparatus in which the fluid discharged from a nozzle is
    modified by a rotating means.


CLS 239/8
TXT Processes under subclass 1 which include the step or steps of mixing a gas
    with the material to be distributed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302+    and 398+, appropriate subclasses for apparatus adding air to a
    material to be sprayed.

    311,    for means adding gas upstream of a nozzle outlet involving a
    flowing liquid stream and see the search class notes there referred to for
    other lather makers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 8+ for a process of combustion involving
    flame shaping and subclass 12 for a process involving controlling or
    proportioning burner feed.


CLS 239/9
TXT Processes under subclass 8 including the additional step of mixing,
    dissolving or entraining the material in a liquid, before, during or after
    combination with the gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    311,    for gas addition upstream of nozzle outlet in apparatus including a
    supply holder for material to be mixed, dissolved or entrained.


CLS 239/10
TXT Processes under subclass 1 involving the step or steps of dissolving or
    mixing a material in a flowing liquid stream.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310+,   for apparatus including a supply holder for material to be mixed,
    dissolved or entrained in a flowing liquid stream.


CLS 239/11
TXT Processes under subclass 1 involving the steps of changing the character of
    the flowing or discharged material or of regulating the flow.

    (1)     Note.  The mere shifting of the distributor to change the flow from
    one area physically to another or the mere turning on or off are not
    considered modification or varying for purposes of this subclass and such
    patents will be found in subclass 1.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290,    and all appropriate subclasses thereafter for discharge
    modification and flow varying.


CLS 239/12
TXT Processes under subclass 11 in which the material is discharged from a
    fountain of the drinking or ornamental type.

    (1)     Note.  Altering the color of the distributed material in ornamental
    fountains by lighting or chemical changes, but in which the discharge
    characteristic of the material is not otherwise changed is not considered
    discharge modification of flow varying for purposes of this subclass.  Such
    patents will be found in subclass 1.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16+,    for corresponding apparatus.


CLS 239/13
TXT Processes under subclass 1 which include a step of exchanging heat between
    the material to be sprayed and heating or cooling means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128+,   for corresponding apparatus.


CLS 239/14.1
TXT WEATHER CONTROL:

    Apparatus under the class definition claimed as particularly adapted for
    precipitating atmospheric moisture from clouds or fog. This is the generic
    locus for atmospheric moisture precipitating apparatus but patents claiming
    this subject matter are generally classified in some other class on the
    basis of their claimed proximate functions.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus classifiable in some other class on a more
    proximate basis does not become subject matter for this subclass merely
    because it is stated that weather control is involved, e.g., a fan or fire
    pot to disperse fog or prevent frost, but only if there is no other basis
    for classification or if some detail is included and accordingly
    recognizable only for weather control.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.1+,   for processes of weather control or modification.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 2 for structures for controlling frost
    for preventing damage to plants, trees, and the like.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 114 for fog control structures claimed
    relation thereto, and subclass 136 for weather-control material discharging
    means particularly related to an aeroplane structure.


CLS 239/14.2
TXT Snowmaking:

    Apparatus under subclass 14.1 which sprays a liquid or gaseous material
    into an atmosphere in which the ambient temperature is below the materials'
    freezing point thereby precipitating the material as a particulate solid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.2,    for methods of snowmaking.


CLS 239/16
TXT Apparatus under the class definition for delivering a bubble, stream, or
    spray of liquid for drinking or ornamental purposes and usually comprising
    a stand or pedestal, a nozzle or other discharging member, and a
    catch-basin, or a fluid conducting means, per se, of a portable nature one
    end of the conductor being placed in or near the mouth and the other end
    thereof being placed in the liquid for drinking.


CLS 239/17
TXT Apparatus under subclass 16 having an external embellishment or decorative
    appearance designed as household or lawn ornaments or to impart a pleasing
    or esthetic effect to a structure or grounds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211,    for simulations.


CLS 239/18
TXT Apparatus under subclass 17 having means to light or illuminate the
    fountain.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, subclass 464 for devices for producing color effects
    combined with an instrument for producing music.

    362,    Illumination, appropriate subclasses for devices combining features
    of illumination and other structure.


CLS 239/19
TXT Apparatus under subclass 18 having additional means or support structure to
    spray the discharging water over the area proximate the device as, for
    example, over the ground.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225.1+  for lawn sprinklers in general.


CLS 239/20
TXT Apparatus under subclass 18 provided with means returning the fluid to the
    supply source or supply flow line for discharge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229+,   for sprayers having system fluid relief or return to supply.


CLS 239/21
TXT Apparatus under subclass 17 having a liquid supply chamber and a catch
    basin which are shiftable such that the chamber which receives the waste
    from the fountain in one period of its operation becomes the supply chamber
    for the succeeding period.


CLS 239/22
TXT Apparatus under subclass 17 having a nongravity means to establish a
    pressure differential relative the discharge outlet and supply to cause the
    discharge or delivery of liquid.


CLS 239/23
TXT Apparatus under subclass 22 in which the discharge is effected by a liquid
    pump, a pulsator or follower.


CLS 239/24
TXT Apparatus under subclass 16 which by function and design relates to
    drinking fountains most generally having the terminal element upwardly or
    at least sidewardly disposed as contrasted with the usual faucet
    arrangement) and disclosing features relating to guards and
    anti-contaminating devices for the discharge means, catch basins, means
    converting from ordinary faucets to drinking arrangements, high volume-low
    velocity flow and anti-squirting devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclasses, for drinking fountains
    having significant refrigeration means, and subclasses 391+ for
    significantly included ice compartments.


CLS 239/25
TXT Apparatus under subclass 24 comprising a fluid diverter or conduit having
    means securing or connecting such device to faucet to convert said faucet
    to use as a drinking nozzle or fountain and where in the connection or
    joining means is such as to support some part of the weight of the device
    during use.

    (1)     Note.  Manually operated well pumps having a drinking nozzle
    attachment have been considered as faucets for purposes of classification
    herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for diverters held against or beneath a faucet and entirely hand
    supported during use.

    33,     for portable tubes placed in the mouth for sipping or drinking.


CLS 239/26
TXT Apparatus under subclass 25 in which the diverter means has a single outlet
    and is so secured to the flow line as to be movable upwardly or downwardly
    about an axis which extends in the general direction of flow up-stream of
    the diverter.


CLS 239/27
TXT Apparatus under subclass 25 in which the diverter means is mounted for
    swinging or pivotal movement into or out of deflecting position with
    respect to the faucet outlet means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    505+,   for deflectors movably or removably mounted relative an outlet
    means particularly subclass 511 for deflectors rotated into position for
    spraying.


CLS 239/28
TXT Apparatus under subclass 24 in which the drinking fountain includes a waste
    water catcher or some means which provides run-off to waste for the
    discharge.


CLS 239/29
TXT Apparatus under subclass 28 wherein the flow line supply means includes a
    valving means to control or regulate the discharge of fluid to be delivered
    for drinking.


CLS 239/29.3
TXT Apparatus under subclass 29 comprising a drinking fountain which is movable
    from one location to another, or which has as part thereof a receptacle to
    be filled with liquid, as the source for the fountain.


CLS 239/29.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 29 in which the valve operating mechanism has a
    portion thereof positioned or shaped to be moved by a drinker's lower
    extremity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 76 for a fountain combined with a
    trough, flow to the fountain being controlled by a platform on which an
    animal stands.


CLS 239/30
TXT Apparatus under subclass 28 wherein the bubbler or nozzle is capable of
    being lifted or raised relative to its support or supply line or wherein
    the said bubbler is flexibly supported or joined to the supply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    587+,   for nozzle members adjustably or shiftably connected to a flow
    conduit.


CLS 239/31
TXT Apparatus under subclass 24 having (1) plural outlet means so arranged that
    the effluent from the several outlet means intersect each other and form a
    single stream for drinking or (2) means to form a standing stream of large
    volume and low velocity flow and of substantial width across the flow axis.

    (1)     Note.  Converging or overlapping streams which are arranged as a
    fence or barrier to act as an anti-contamination device are not included,
    per se, but are classified with the type of drinking arrangement as
    characterized by the titles of subclasses 24+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    543+,   for devices having two or more outlet means arranged so that fluid
    streams impinge upon each other.


CLS 239/32
TXT Apparatus under subclass 31 provided with flow regulator means in the
    supply line and which is biased to closing position to cease discharge.


CLS 239/33
TXT Apparatus under subclass 24 comprising tubular devices having openings at
    each end and being adapted for conducting fluids for drinking, one end
    being placed in the mouth and the other end being placed in the liquid
    during use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for drinking tubes of the portable type not disclosed as placed in
    the mouth during drinking.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 141 for spoons having a fluid conducting means
    therewith, usually arranged through the handle.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 109, 111-174, 177, and 178
    for tubular pipe wall structures of general utility.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclass 229 for closure means and straws
    combined, and subclass 388+ for combinations of tumblers and other drinking
    vessels with drinking tubes.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclass 85, for "flavor straws" and the like and for straws including a
    confection of food flavoring.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 71+ for a straw or portable
    drinking tube combined with a fanciful figure or toy for amusement of the
    use while sipping.


CLS 239/34
TXT Apparatus under class definition having means to disperse or spread
    material out into the ambient air by vaporization from an open container or
    holder, capillary porous or wick type feed means, by mere drip through the
    air or by sublimation, all such media being merely exposed to the ambient
    air and without the use of draft producing means.

    (1)     Note.  This is the generic subclass for holders for slow diffusers
    and for volatilization of liquid saturated sorbents by mere ambient air
    desorption.  See section III(g) Slow Diffusers, for lines between Classes
    96, 239 and 261 in regard to this type of subject matter.  For solid
    sorbent apparatus for gas separation, see Class 96, Gas Separation:
    Apparatus, subclasses 108+.

    (2)     Note.  In general, the combination of a slow diffuser and an art
    device is classified with the art device.  See the example Class 312,
    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 31+ for containers combined with
    slow diffusers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 226.1 and
    228.1-231.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 129+ for
    vaporizing fumigators for insecticides.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, for apparatus for gas separation and
    see (1) Note above.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 323 for infusion
    receptacles.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 264+ for absorbent or porous
    applicators.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 157 for animal daubers which may diffuse
    after application.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 0.5 for infusers.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 86 for hangers having means to retain
    perfumery or insect repelling material.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclass 78 for diffusers designed for use with a
    radiator.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclass 905 for a dispenser of
    coiled material with a deodorant containing mandrel.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 194, 259.5 and 410 and indented subclasses.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 31+ for containers
    combined with slow diffusers, wherein the container is designed to hold
    material to be treated by the diffused substance.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 1+ for processes disinfecting,
    deodorizing preserving or sterilizing and subclasses 120+ for treating air
    with a deodorizing, disinfecting, or sterilizing agent.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 77+ an infusion receptacle.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 905 (a
    cross-reference art collection) for a product which releases an odor into
    the environment.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 298+ for a wick type burner.

    454,    Ventilation, for diffusers designed for use with a hot-air
    register, especially subclasses 110, 157, 223, 291, 328, and 337.


CLS 239/35
TXT Apparatus under subclass 34 having a device to make known by visual,
    audible or other means that the material holder is empty or needs
    replenishing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71+,    for other signals, indicators, and changeable exhibitors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 109+ and 227+ for the signal or
    indicator, per se.


CLS 239/36
TXT Apparatus under subclass 34 in which the fluid dispersing or disseminating
    device is part of or is fastened to the person's clothing or is connected
    to, or worn on the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, appropriate subclasses for specific garment features
    combined with diffusers.

    63,     Jewelry, appropriate subclasses for jewelry combined with diffusers.


CLS 239/37
TXT Apparatus under subclass 34 in which the material is liquid and the flow
    from its receptacle is not assisted by added fluid or other pressure, but
    is caused solely by the forces of gravity.


CLS 239/38
TXT Apparatus under subclass 37 in which the liquid flows drop-by-drop through
    the atmosphere to a receptacle which is exposed to the atmosphere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193,    for weir type discharge means.


CLS 239/39
TXT Apparatus under subclass 37 in which the liquid flows from its supply
    receptacle to an auxiliary reservoir and the flow is controlled by
    balancing flow (e.g., establishing equilibrium) with atmospheric pressure.

    (1)     Note.  This type of flow is usually the inverted bottle type where
    the bottle is inverted into an open container and discharges therein until
    the level in the bottle drops and causes a vacuum to be formed therein,
    thus preventing any more discharge until the level in the container drops
    below the bottle neck to permit air to enter the bottle and displace
    additional liquid therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 453+ for barometric means for
    maintaining a level of liquid in a fluid handling system.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 457 for angle of repose trap chambers.


CLS 239/40
TXT Apparatus under subclass 39 in which the liquid discharges from the
    auxiliary reservoir in drop-by-drop manner.


CLS 239/41
TXT Apparatus under subclass 40 provided with a foraminous or liquid permeable
    element exposed to the ambient atmosphere and in the path of the
    drop-by-drop discharge from the auxiliary reservoir.


CLS 239/42
TXT Apparatus under subclass 39 having a foraminous or liquid permeable element
    exposed to the ambient atmosphere and in the auxiliary reservoir.


CLS 239/43
TXT Apparatus under subclass 37 in which the liquid is discharged from the
    liquid receptacle to a foraminous or liquid permeable element exposed to
    the ambient atmosphere.


CLS 239/44
TXT Apparatus under subclass 34 where the material is a liquid confined in a
    receptacle and is provided with a porous, foraminous or absorbent element
    which is in contact with and discharges the liquid from the receptacle by
    means of capillary action in the pores or foraminae of the element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145,    for porous or wick type discharge means to the atmosphere in the
    form of a liquid rather than a vapor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 99, 104, and 107 for
    similar capillary feed porous mass elements combined with a means for
    positively forcing a gas stream across or through the moistened element.


CLS 239/45
TXT Apparatus under subclass 44 provided with a plurality of separate and
    distinct porous members arranged downstream to each other, the liquid flow
    taking place in series through all of the members.

    (1)     Note.  The individual porous members may be in contact with one
    another in which case it must be clearly disclosed that the members are
    separate and distinct or each porous member may be in a vessel or container
    to which liquid is discharged by a porous means and from which liquid is
    removed by an additional porous or absorbent pad.


CLS 239/46
TXT Apparatus under subclass 45 provided with a means at the final porous
    member or vessel for permitting excess liquid to be removed therefrom in a
    drop-by-drop fashion.


CLS 239/47
TXT Apparatus under subclass 44 provided with a means to retain the porous or
    absorbent member in a position other than that in which it is normally used.

    (1)     Note.  The usual arrangement is of the "Air Wick" type where the
    porous member is moved to a position within the liquid receptacle (i.e.,
    stored in the supply).


CLS 239/48
TXT Apparatus under subclass 47 in which there is provided a spool on which is
    rolled a continuous spiral of the porous or foraminous material in contact
    with the liquid, and which may be unwound to extend material to expose more
    of its surface to the ambient atmosphere and which may again be wound to
    provide for nonuse storage of the absorbent or porous material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195+,   for hose storage or retrieval means including reels and supports
    therefore.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 370+ for a reeling
    device for unwinding and rewinding an elongated material of general use.


CLS 239/49
TXT Apparatus under subclass 44 provided with means to control or adjust the
    liquid flow to or through the porous or absorbent means.


CLS 239/50
TXT Apparatus under subclass 49 in which the means for adjusting or controlling
    the liquid flow comprises means for varying the distance between the face
    level of the liquid supply and the end of the porous member (1) exposed to
    the ambient atmosphere or (2) discharging to an auxiliary reservoir.


CLS 239/51
TXT Apparatus under subclass 44 in which the liquid which has been removed from
    the holder by the porous or absorbent element is discharged in a
    drop-by-drop manner from the porous element or from a conduit into which
    the porous element has discharged.


CLS 239/51.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 44 comprising an encasing means for the porous or
    aborbent element including a wall spaced from said element, the wall having
    a plurality of apertures or perforations.

    (1)     Note.  The wall or encasing means can be merely a screen; however,
    a screen wire support is not included under this definition if it is
    contiguous with the porous or absorbent element.  It is necessary for
    diffusion to occur into the space between the porous element and the
    apertured wall for a device to qualify under this definition.


CLS 239/52
TXT Apparatus under subclass 34 having a spool type member for supporting a
    diffusible substance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195+,   for flexible flow line storage or retrieval means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclass 905 for a dispenser of
    coiled material with a deodorant containing mandrel and subclasses 590+ for
    a detail of a mounted coil holder of general use.


CLS 239/53
TXT Apparatus under subclass 34 in which the material to be dispersed is a
    liquid and is contained or retained only in an element which comprises
    pores or foraminae throughout so as to be absorbent and permeable to hold
    the liquid therein.

    (1)     Note.  In this group of subclasses, the liquid retaining means is
    reusable and may be saturated with liquid a plurality of times.  This is
    contrasted with those self-sustaining materials which are themselves
    volatile and are expended.  The latter type will be found in subclass 60.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, especially
    subclasses 1.25 and 422+ for an impregnated base from which a material,
    with a Class 424 utility, may slowly diffuse.


CLS 239/54
TXT Apparatus under subclass 53 in which the liquid material retaining element
    is of the nonfluid, dense, self-supporting type, (e.g., wood, plaster of
    Paris, etc.).


CLS 239/55
TXT Apparatus under subclass 53 in which the liquid material retaining element
    is surrounded or substantially surrounded by a housing, there being spaces
    permitting the vaporized liquid to be disseminated into the ambient
    atmosphere.


CLS 239/56
TXT Apparatus under subclass 55 in which the element is in the form of a
    relatively thin, flat blanket or mat.


CLS 239/57
TXT Apparatus under subclass 34 in which an apertured or foraminous housing
    surrounding the material is provided with an added element or additional
    feature by which the housing is maintained in place while in normal use to
    disperse the material.


CLS 239/58
TXT Apparatus under subclass 34 in which the member surrounding the material
    retaining element is foraminous or apertured and there is provided
    additional means whereby the apertures or foraminae are varied in size
    and/or number.

    (1)     Note.  So-called packages of vaporizable substances provided with
    means to cover and uncover the openings of the package to commence
    diffusion are placed here and in the indented subclass as originals or
    cross references.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, appropriate subclasses for special
    packages and receptacles for other than diffusible substances.


CLS 239/59
TXT Apparatus under subclass 58 in which varying of openings is accomplished by
    bringing a plurality of perforations into and out of registry with one
    another to open and close communication between the material space and the
    ambient atmosphere.


CLS 239/60
TXT Apparatus under subclass 34 in which the material to be disseminated is in
    the form of a nonfluid, rigid mass, which sublimes into the ambient
    atmosphere and is consumed.


CLS 239/61
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having a movable means responsive to
    some variable condition in a first fluid (in addition to mere commencement
    or stoppage of flow) which causes a change in a second fluid flow or in a
    control means to maintain the relative amounts thereof according to a
    selectable ratio.


CLS 239/62
TXT Apparatus under subclass 61 having additional control means responsive to
    movement, e.g., rate of motion, across the area being treated and
    interposed in the proportioning or correlating mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64      and 69, for programming or overriding control means which may be
    related to traverse across an area being treated.

    100,    for ground wheel controlled intermitter.


CLS 239/63
TXT Apparatus under the class definition for commencing, terminating or
    changing the flow therefrom by means responsive, sensitive, or reactive to
    fluid which has left the system (or lack thereof) either in or on the
    surface of the ground or in the area being treated.

    (1)     Note.  The responsive means react to the fluid leaving the system
    through the normal distributor openings.  If part of the fluid is bled off
    from the normal path to the openings and is permitted to discharge into a
    pan or receptacle or against moisture sensitive means such patents will not
    be found in subclasses 63+ but will be found in subclasses 67 and 68.

    (2)     Note.  For this and the indented subclasses, a system must at least
    be disclosed as a sprinkler apparatus with control means being responsive
    to a condition brought about by use of the said sprinkler.  If there is no
    clear  disclosure that the moisture sensing means is positioned within and
    senses the moisture in the area served by the sprinkler system, it is
    assumed that the means senses and responds only to atmospheric rainfall.
    An apparatus with a means sensing atmospheric rainfall for control of a
    sprinkler or a spray outlet is classifiable in other appropriate subclasses
    in Class 239 if the sprinkler or spray outlet is positively claimed and in
    Class 137 if a mere fluid system is claimed.

    (3)     Note.  Included are devices which respond to ground content
    moisture conditions to commence spraying because of lack of water in the
    ground or which terminate spraying because of a rain supplemented ground
    moisture condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     for a spray system having a control means (e.g., volume, rate of
    flow or atmospheric rainfall responsive) for causing intermittent
    interruption of the supply.

    238,    for spray fluid motor drive means for moving distributors
    responding to weight of accumulated fluid for motion either of sprayed or
    diverted fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 78.2+ for systems in which the control
    means responds to atmospheric conditions to control fluid flow and
    subclasses 403+ for liquid level responsive systems involving the weight of
    accumulated fluid.


CLS 239/64
TXT Apparatus under subclass 63 in which there is provided an additional means
    which controls the flow regulating means regardless of the demand of the
    mechanism responding to the discharged fluid, or lack thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The additional control means may be either manually or
    automatically operated.  In those systems including a timer or clock
    mechanism, such mechanism is the overriding second control means since it
    will not permit the flow of fluid to the sprayers until the selected time
    is reached, or regardless of the demand placed upon the system, or it will
    positively shut off the fluid when the set time period has elapsed, also
    regardless of the fact that additional demand is required externally of the
    system.


CLS 239/65
TXT Apparatus under subclass 63 in which the flow controlling means is actuated
    by the weight or level of fluid caught or trapped in a test receptacle
    positioned so as to intercept a portion of that which has left the spray
    openings.


CLS 239/66
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having plural distributing means made
    up of single or multiple terminal elements which distributors (as
    distinguished from single outlet means of multiple outlet terminal members)
    are controlled to discharge at different times or at intervals either
    singly or in multiples with not all distributors being put into operation
    at once.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97,     for pattern control by synchronizing flow regulating means with a
    cyclically moving distributor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 624.11+ for a fluid distribution system
    including a programmer or a timer.


CLS 239/67
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having control means to start or to
    terminate discharge of material from such apparatus or part thereof with
    which such apparatus or part is interconnected and which is responsive to
    volume, rate of flow, time or other condition which may be selectively
    preset or determined prior to the initiation of the flow or at some time
    during the flow.

    (1)     Note.  For classification herein there must be claimed as control
    means something more than the mere limits defined by traversing guide,
    track or tethering means or the paying out or ultimate drag of a hose
    connected to supply means, i.e., there must be something in addition to the
    necessary spraying organization which is selectively-variably imposed on
    the system to control the flow.

    (2)     Note.  The apparatus must go through a complete cycle of operation
    (i.e., start, stop, start) in accordance with the setting of the control
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     for a spray or sprinkler system having a control means responsive
    to discharged fluid and see (2) Note therein.

    722+,   for translating distributors which are caused to cut off flow at
    the end of the traversing motion due to some impact or drag means included
    in the means defining the mere limits of traverse by the guideway, track,
    or tethering means, and see (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 67 for flow control means operative to
    halt flow of fluid when a solid additive has been dissolved or destroyed.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 54 for automatic control of dispensers by
    fusible or soluble means.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 48+ for a valve combined
    with a dashpot or fluid controlled retarder or timer.


CLS 239/68
TXT Apparatus under subclass 67 having a meter or other flow measuring
    mechanism in the flow path and which can be preset to control the flow in
    the system with which it is interconnected when either (1) the rate of flow
    reaches the preset point (minimum or maximum) or (2) a preset volume of
    fluid has been reached.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 14+ for cut- offs for dispensers selectively
    preset and responsive to volume or rate of flow mechanism.


CLS 239/69
TXT Apparatus under subclass 67 in which the control means is actuated by
    nonfluid operative or responsive mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 624.11+ for a valve controlled by a
    programmer.

    901,    Robots, subcollection 43 for a collection of spray painting or
    coating robots.


CLS 239/70
TXT Apparatus under subclass 67 in which the control means is actuated by a
    clock mechanism or the like, operated independently of all other parts of
    the system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 624.11+ for a valve controlled by a
    clock mechanism.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 86 for a device specialized to combustion,
    controlled by a manually started timer or retarder or by a time of day
    device.


CLS 239/71
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising information yielding or
    relatively movable or changeable parts which give information, measure or
    totalize quantity, permit inspection to determine a condition in the system
    or indicate a condition or the extent of motion or position of the system
    in a system part.

    (1)     Note.  A system part may cooperate with some graduated part to form
    the indicator or may be a flow indicating means or fluid quantity
    inspection device as a flow sight.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67+,    for the subject matter of this subclass combined with selectively
    preset flow cut-off means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 603+ for electrical
    automatic fluent material responsive indicating systems.


CLS 239/72
TXT Apparatus under subclass 71 giving audible information.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 67+ for alarms, per se.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 558 for liquid level responsive alarms.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 39 for audible signals for dispensers.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 384.1+ for electrical
    communications audible signal giving means, per se.


CLS 239/73
TXT Apparatus under subclass 71 having means giving information as to the
    position or range of motion of a discharge effecting part or parts
    necessary to the control of discharge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, particularly subclasses 200+ for scale and
    pointer subcombinations.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 553+ for fluid handling systems having
    position or extent of motion indicators.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 41+ for dispensers having position or extent
    of motion indicators.


CLS 239/74
TXT Apparatus under subclass 71 having means giving information as to amount or
    quantity or showing by inspection that material is flowing in the system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 154+ for dispensers having inspection
    devices and subclasses 71+ for volume or rate of flow metering means.


CLS 239/75
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means which senses
    viscosity or temperature and in response thereto, causes actuation of a
    control or regulatory member.

    (1)     Note.  The viscosity or temperature need not be that of the system
    material or a system part; thus, included under this definition would be a
    device in which a thermostat responds to temperature of the ambient
    atmosphere to impose or remove a control.


CLS 239/76
TXT Apparatus under class definition having plural discharge means and
    including some sensing arrangement along one or more discharge routes
    together with appropriate flow controlling means effective to bring about a
    regulatory function in response to a change of pressure or volume along one
    or more such routes and tending thereby to distribute the flow equally
    among the said discharge means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for flow equalization to plural outlet means by regulation through
    metering means.

    124+,   for system relief or by-pass means (e.g., pump or nozzle unloading)
    which operate to keep pressures or flows at some desired level or equal
    among plural nozzles which means may be interconnected as by a common drive
    or shaft but which are not responsive to differences in individual flow
    lines and effective to balance out or overcome the flow condition.

    533+,   for regulator means comprising multiple fluid pressure responsive
    flow regulators associated with plural nozzles which may be selectively set
    so as to maintain uniform flow at some desired level.

    553+,   for unitary plural outlet means having an interior guide or flow
    divider whose function is generally to equalize the flow to the plural
    outlet openings.


CLS 239/77
TXT Apparatus under class definition comprising either a nozzle or a strewing
    means to project or scatter a fluent material, and means to create an air
    stream related in a manner such that the fluent is discharged into the said
    air stream and further characterized by a disclosure that:  (1) the air
    stream has a cross sectional area and a volumetric flow which are very
    large as compared with the outlet area and volumetric flow capacity of the
    nozzle or strewing means,

    (2)     the apparatus is provided with means rendering it mobile (e.g.,
    wheels) and

    (3)     the fluent is conveyed by the air stream onto a tree or trees.

    (1)     Note.  Liquid and air pumps unitarily constructed are included if
    discrete air and liquid impelling means are included, as for example, a
    centrifugal slinger with air vanes thereon.

    (2)     Note.  If vaporization takes place by heat and the result is a
    smoke which is discharged and the sole disclosed or claimed use for the
    smoke is for insecticidal purposes, classification is in Class 43.  If
    there is no purpose disclosed for the smoke, classification is in Class
    252.  If there is no vaporization, but liquid is discharged classification
    is in Class 239.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290+,   for apparatus including a supplemental gas shaping or shielding jet.

    340+,   for supply holders for material with a gas space above the material
    and a pressure reducer at the holder outlet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 617 for ambulant fluid flow dispensers wherein
    no significant nozzle structure is claimed; and subclasses 630+ for other
    fluid flow discharge devices, particularly for pulverent materials which
    are not scattered or strewn (as claimed).

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, appropriate subclasses for fluid current
    conveying means and their necessary material intake, regulating and blower
    relationships.


CLS 239/78
TXT Apparatus under subclass 77 in which the air directing conduit or conveying
    means includes an arrangement of slats distributing vanes or the like to
    form an open work panel-like structure suitable for adjusting or directing
    the said flowing air.


CLS 239/79
TXT Apparatus under class definition which includes a means to melt particles
    or bodies of a normally solid substance and contiguous means to distribute
    the melted substance into the ambient air, usually for the purpose of
    coating a base surface upon which the distributed material solidifies.

    (1)     Note.  Systems in which a solid or granular material is fused at a
    point remote from the distributor are not included in this group of
    subclasses, but are classified in other appropriate subclasses of this
    class according to the nature of the distributor or system involved.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein are melting distributors which do not
    disclose any material feeding means or which disclose only material supply
    pipe or conduit means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 421 for similar devices having specific
    electric heating means.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 251 for molecular or atomic beam devices
    for producing and propagating a stream of neutral particles or atoms
    through a vacuum, usually at thermal velocity.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 5+ for processes of forming particulate material directly from a
    molten or liquid mass, e.g., liquid comminuting.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 6+ for apparatus for forming particulate material from melts by
    utilizing a liquid comminutor (e.g., air blast, slinger, etc.) and means
    for congealing particles so formed.

    427,    Coating Processes, for processes of coating, and note especially
    subclasses 421+ for coating by spraying.


CLS 239/80
TXT Apparatus under subclass 79 which includes more than one means for
    conducting a solid substance to the means for melting and projecting it.

    (1)     Note.  The plural means may consist of separate sources, or a
    single branched flow line with separate nozzle means.


CLS 239/81
TXT Apparatus under subclass 79 having means to melt or heat a normally solid
    substance which means includes either (1) a means to create an electric
    spark across spaced electrodes or (2) a heating medium disposed in a
    fluctuating electromagnetic field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3       and 690+, for electrostatic charging of sprayed or projected fluids.

    80,     for electrically heated nozzles (e.g., by electric arc means)
    having plural means to supply normally solid material.

    82      and 83, for nozzle heaters, many of which are of the electrical
    resistance type.


CLS 239/82
TXT Apparatus under subclass 79 which includes a terminal outlet member having
    a reservoir or other means to retain a quantity of a molten, normally solid
    substance for use as required.

    (1)     Note.  A disclosure that the heating means is adapted to melt a
    solid material faster than it can escape through an outlet means is
    sufficient to warrant classification in this subclass.


CLS 239/83
TXT Apparatus under subclass 79 in which at least part of the supply of fusible
    solid consists of an elongated mass which is fed longitudinally to the
    discharge means.


CLS 239/84
TXT Apparatus under subclass 83 including a member contacting the elongated
    supply of fusible material and adapted to urge it towards the melting and
    distributor means.

    (1)     Note.  The member is usually, but not necessarily motor driven and
    may be one of a pair of cooperating rollers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses,
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.


CLS 239/85
TXT Apparatus under subclass 79 which includes a storage receptacle or
    dispenser for a normally solid material and means to carry or conduct said
    material to the portion of the apparatus where it is melted and distributed.

    (1)     Note.  The material may be positively carried by a feeder conveyor,
    impeller and/or a fluid stream or may merely flow or fall by gravity.


CLS 239/86
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having an injection nozzle and a means
    for filtering fluid supplied thereto which includes very closely spaced or
    fitted, pre-shaped members between which said fluid flows to remove
    impurities.

    (1)     Note.  Filters made of strands, etc., of filtering material
    assembled in random fashion have been excluded and will be found in the
    appropriate subclass herebelow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for a method of injecting fuel into a combustion chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses
    containing "filter" in title for the filtering element, per se.


CLS 239/87
TXT Apparatus under the class definition which includes an injection nozzle
    discharging into a combustion chamber and means responsive to pressure in
    said chamber to control the flow of fluid through the nozzle.

    (1)     Note.  The pressure may actuate a valve or a fluid pump means
    associated with the nozzle but only nominal relations of the nozzle and
    combustion chamber are classified herein.  Specific relations between the
    nozzle and combustion chamber are classified on the basis of the particular
    combustion chamber involved.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for a method of injecting fuel into a combustion chamber.


CLS 239/88
TXT Apparatus under class definition which includes an injection nozzle having
    an expansible and contractible chamber intimately and contiguously
    associated therewith and adapted to deliver fluid intermittently through
    the nozzle in response to contraction of the chamber.

    (1)     Note.  The chamber collapsing means may be a resilient biasing
    member or a motor driven means provided that there is no more than a
    nominal recitation of a motor of which the nozzle forms a part.

    (2)     Note.  Expansible chambers formed by pressure responsive surfaces
    formed on, or connected to a valve or valve stem have been excluded from
    this and the indented subclasses even though these chambers may deliver a
    small amount of fluid to the nozzle during closing movement of the valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for a method of injecting fuel into a combustion chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, appropriate subclasses for internal
    combustion engines which inject fuel (or fuel plus another fluid) into the
    combustion space.


CLS 239/89
TXT Apparatus under subclass 88 in which the expansible chamber is normally
    urged towards collapsed position to force fluid through the nozzle.

    (1)     Note.  The chamber is usually charged with a supply of fluid during
    a period when the injection valve is closed.


CLS 239/90
TXT Apparatus under subclass 88 in which a means communicates with the passage
    between the nozzle inlet and the outlet of the collapsible chamber and is
    actuated by or concurrently with the collapse of the chamber to relieve the
    pressure at the nozzle inlet and thus terminate delivery of fluid thereto
    after a predetermined volume.


CLS 239/91
TXT Apparatus under subclass 88 which includes a means controlling flow of
    fluid to or through the nozzle which means is either (1) actuated by or
    concurrently with the collapse of the chamber, or (2) mounted in or on a
    plunger or other part of the collapsible chamber.

    (1)     Note.  This flow control means is normally, but not necessarily,
    that part of the injection nozzle which determines the flow of fluid
    therethrough, e.g., the injector valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90,     for pump plunger operated by-pass valves.


CLS 239/92
TXT Apparatus under subclass 88 in which the expansible chamber for delivering
    pressurized fluid to the nozzle is collapsed by means of a motor means
    energized by the movement of a volume of fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87,     for fluid actuated fuel pump plunger motors which are responsive to
    combustion chamber pressure.


CLS 239/93
TXT Apparatus under class definition which include a means to control flow of
    fluid interposed between a distributor and a pump which delivers the fluid
    to the distributor in distinct, separated pulses or cycles, and means to
    actuate the flow control means in timed relation to the pump.

    (1)     Note.  Flapper valves other than parts of a distributor and valves
    located upstream of the pump are excluded since they are considered part of
    the pump means rather than part of the supply system (which includes the
    pump).

    (2)     Note.  The fluid control means (e.g., injection valve) may be
    opened in response to pressure of fluid supplied by the pump.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for a method of injecting fuel into a combustion chamber.


CLS 239/94
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93 which includes a first area or surface of the
    distributor flow control means subjected to fluid pressure from the pump
    and an additional surface on said flow control means subjected to a
    separately controlled fluid to oppose or assist the force exerted on the
    first surface (e.g., to delay or assist valve opening or to close the valve
    at a desired time).

    (1)     Note.  The additional motor surface on the valve may be actuated by
    fluid from the pump, controlled by a separate valving means or by any other
    pressurized fluid desired.


CLS 239/95
TXT Apparatus under the class definition which includes an injection nozzle
    having a flow control means and means disclosed as continuously moving and
    adapted to cyclically operate the flow control means.

    (1)     Note.  Internal-combustion engine valve operating linkages or
    portions thereof such as cams, levers, links, hydraulic and the like valve
    lifters, and fluid motors have been included in this subclass where no
    specific relation to the rest of the engine is recited, on the theory that
    they could be operated by a separate motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for a method of injecting fuel into a combustion chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 27+ for fuel valves for
    internal-combustion engines which are operated by a member which, as
    claimed, is synchronized with the same engine which employs the valve as
    opposed to a cam or linkage means or the like which, as claimed, could be
    driven by an external engine or by hand.


CLS 239/96
TXT Apparatus under the class definition which includes an injection nozzle and
    a valve therefor, an inlet supply passage for spray fluid, a means to store
    this fluid under pressure for injection after the valve is opened and means
    responsive to the presence of inlet fluid pressure to bias the valve closed.

    (1)     Note.  Fluid is usually supplied to a storage reservoir from the
    supply through a restriction or check valve and discharge occurs when the
    inlet line is vented to remove its biasing effect.

    (2)     Note.  Other means, e.g., springs or pressure operated means, are
    normally provided to open the valve when the inlet fluid conduit is vented.
     During the time that the nozzle inlet is under pressure, fluid is usually
    bled to an accumulator and this stored fluid is available for discharge
    when the valve opens.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for a method of injecting fuel into a combustion chamber.

    94,     for valves having plural motor surfaces, one of which may bias the
    valve towards closed position.


CLS 239/97
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a distributor member
    continuously and recurrently traveling in a cycle along a path or orbit
    which is fixed in relation to an area on which material is to be
    discharged; and means to establish an instantaneous rate of flow through
    said outlet member which varies in accordance with some predetermined
    function of the position of the member in said cycle in order that the flow
    may always be the same at any given position of said member in the cycle.

    (1)     Note.  The flow establishing means may be either a valve or a pump
    means and the flow may be either fluctuating or intermittent.


CLS 239/98
TXT Apparatus under subclass 97 which include a plurality of distributor
    members and valve means actuated by engagement of said valve means with a
    member which is fixed relative to a support for said member in order to
    transfer the flow of fluid from one member to another.

    (1)     Note.  The plural outlet members usually constitute oppositely
    directed reaction nozzles which discharge alternately in order to impart
    oscillation to said apparatus.


CLS 239/99
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having, in addition to the necessary
    fluid supply and/or handling elements providing a normal flow for spraying
    and the like, means to stop periodically and cyclically the total flow of
    fluid to the entire terminal outlet means and then restore the normal flow
    therethrough.

    (1)     Note.  The cycle or period may be of any duration but there must be
    a clear disclosure of a complete stoppage of supply of discharge fluid to
    the terminal outlet means for a distinct interval.

    (2)     Note.  The means for interrupting the supply must be in addition to
    all the various confining surfaces which collectively bound and define an
    essential flow path, but said means may include (1) fluid passage or
    chamber means which, if closed off from the flow path, would not affect
    normal discharge flow, and/or (2) motor surfaces disposed out of the normal
    and direct path of fluid to the terminal outlet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66,     for successively operated multiple distributors.

    70,     for a single timed cycle.

    93+     and 95+, for apparatus of the internal combustion engine type
    having some character of intermittent discharge control.

    97,     for spray pattern control by flow regulation synchronized with the
    movement of the distributor.

    380+,   for motor or spray operated continuously moving discharge modifier
    and not having the additional means required by (2) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    431,    Combustion, subclass 279 for process or apparatus providing for
    combustion bursts or flareups in pulses or serial pattern.


CLS 239/100
TXT Apparatus under subclass 99 in which the means to periodically and
    cyclically stop the total flow to the entire terminal outlet means is
    actuated by a rolling member in response to traversing motion of the device
    upon which the terminal outlet member is supported.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156+,   for a mobile tank type supply means with a ground wheel operated
    discharge controller which does not intermittently terminate flow.


CLS 239/101
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having in addition to the necessary
    fluid supply and/or handling elements for spraying and the like, means to
    vary continuously and cyclically the total rate of flow of fluid to the
    entire terminal outlet means and/or to change cyclically the pressure of
    the fluid supplied to said entire terminal outlet means.

    (1)     Note.  The cycle may be of any desired duration but must repeat
    itself.

    (2)     Note.  The means for varying the rate of fluid must be in addition
    to all the various confining surfaces which collectively bound and define
    an essential flow path but said means may include (1) fluid passage or
    chamber means which, if closed off from the flow path, would not affect
    normal discharge flow, and/or (2) motor surfaces disposed out of the normal
    and direct path of fluid to the terminal outlet means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17+,    for an ornamental fountain in which the fluid flow or pressure may
    be cyclically varied.

    97,     rotary distributors in which the fluid supply to successive spray
    arms and the like may vary.

    99,     for intermittent interruption of fluid supplied to the distributing
    means.

    380,    for motor or spray operated continuously moving discharge modifier
    and not having the additional means required by (2) Note above.


CLS 239/102.1
TXT WITH MEANS TO VIBRATE OR JIGGLE DISCHARGE:

    Apparatus under the class definition having means in addition to the
    necessary fluid supply and/or handling elements for spraying and the like,
    said means being driven by a motor means in order to change rapidly and
    periodically or cyclically the normal character of discharge from a
    terminal outlet or to change the normal character of the flow pattern,
    spray or trajectory downstream of said outlet.

    (1)     Note.  The means to change the flow characteristics of the
    discharged fluid may include means to superimpose a rapid wave motion on
    the normal fluid stream by (1) continuously moving the discharge outlet
    member, or (2) continuously moving a member in contact with the fluid,
    before, after or during discharge.

    (2)     Note.  The vibrating flow means must vary some instantaneous flow
    characteristic of the sprayed fluid, and means to move a nozzle or deflect
    a discharged fluid for the mere purpose of distribution over a desired area
    are excluded and will be found in pertinent subclasses herebelow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for a method of distributing fluid by contacting the fluid with an
    element which is continuously vibrated or caused to expand or contract.

    99      and 101, for cyclic variation of the quantity of fluid sprayed.

    140+,   for means movably mounting a supply container for discharging
    contents.

    144,    for agitation of supply means by vibrating the container or
    container part.

    225+,   especially subclasses 229, 242 and 255 for a distributor
    continuously moving relative to its support during spraying.

    380+,   for motor or spray operated continuously moving discharge modifier.

    589.1,  for a jiggled discharge caused by the geometry of the flow path of
    the distributor.

    659,    for a container for nonfluid material and scattering means which
    has an oscillating, reciprocating, shaking or other back and forth motion
    to strew the material over an extended area.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 137 for a compressional wave
    generator which may comprise a magnetostrictive or vibratory device.


CLS 239/102.2
TXT By electric transducer (e.g., piezoelectric crystal):

    Apparatus under subclass 102.1 wherein the motor means is a device which
    converts electrical energy into mechanical oscillations or vibrations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263.1,  for a distributor driven by an electric motor which continuously
    moves relative to its support during spraying.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 26 for a means
    producing motion by a magnetostrictive element.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 10 and 11 for an underwater
    compressional wave caused by a vibration transducer of the piezoelectric or
    magnetostrictive type, respectively.


CLS 239/103
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having a surface or area defined by a
    solid member spaced from the nozzle outlet and further provided with an
    aperture(s) and collecting means all carried by the nozzle so that the
    spray material which is projected from the outlet passes through the
    aperture(s) in the said member, the portion of the fluid not finding escape
    being collected or returned to the supply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104+,   for sprayers having drip collecting, waste disposal or soil
    preventing guards and shields.

    288,    for solid means as guards or protectors.


CLS 239/104
TXT Apparatus under class definition having means (1) to apply a cleaning agent
    (fluid or solid) to the parts of the apparatus, (2) to catch system fluid
    which is escaping as drip or leakage from the fluid handling system, (3) to
    make away with trapped or retained fluid to prevent drip or leakage or
    other soil possibilities, or (4) externally applied or directed to the
    system parts to prevent soil thereof or to the environment.

    (1)     Note.  Soil is considered to be that part of the spray fluid not
    desired to be discharged, or when discharged, is prevented from settling on
    areas not desired to be contacted by the fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for waste water catch basins associated with drinking fountains.

    288,    for arrangements provided with means to prevent soil from affecting
    the operator where there is some relationship between the apparatus and the
    operator or the operator's normal position.


CLS 239/105
TXT Apparatus under subclass 104 having means in the form of a protecting
    envelope of nonliquid fluid for preventing soil by precluding the formation
    of drops or drip accumulation, i.e., by constantly wiping a discharge
    aperture edge with a gas, to return excess fluid delivered to a point of
    egress by an air stream or by merely enshrouding the discharging liquid
    with an envelope of gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290+,   for apparatus having supplemental gas shaping or shielding jets
    applied or directed against the sprayed fluid to confine or shape the fluid
    beyond the egress means to a particular outline.


CLS 239/106
TXT Apparatus under subclass 104 having means to remove foreign particles
    lodged in or on surfaces near the egress port, washing out unwanted
    material or permitting the escape thereof from the terminal member.


CLS 239/107
TXT Apparatus under subclass 106 having means for flushing out or draining the
    nozzle comprising an arrangement for increasing the egress opening to a
    size beyond the normal operating spraying limits.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    452+    and 533+, for mere fluid pressure responsive discharge modifier or
    regulator and not having means operating to permit egress openings beyond a
    normal spraying range.


CLS 239/108
TXT Apparatus under subclass 107 having a motor surface in addition to or as a
    separate part of outlet forming surfaces or valving means for assisting in
    the flushing or draining operation by enlarging the escape ports.


CLS 239/109
TXT Apparatus under subclass 108 in which the absence of or the dropping of
    pressure below an established minimum causes opening of the spray openings
    beyond normal use position.


CLS 239/110
TXT Apparatus under subclass 106 provided with a drainage or access opening
    which is apart or discrete from the egress ports for spraying.


CLS 239/111
TXT Apparatus under subclass 110 having means which responds to the absence of
    fluid pressure to cause the additional opening to be made available.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109,    for similar control means affecting the spray openings.


CLS 239/112
TXT Apparatus under subclass 106 having means to redirect or reroute system
    fluid or having means to cause a nonsystem fluid used for spraying to
    clean, flush or drain the nozzle.

    (1)     Note.  There must be claimed some means whereby one of the system
    fluids (air or solvent generally) is made to flow through the other (paint
    or solute) line to flush out the nozzle.


CLS 239/113
TXT Apparatus under subclass 112 in which a fluid of the system used for
    spraying is redirected.


CLS 239/114
TXT Apparatus under subclass 106 having a nonfluid agent associated therewith.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, appropriate subclasses
    for scrapers, wipers, brushes, and the like, for cleaning.


CLS 239/115
TXT Apparatus under subclass 114 in which the cleaning agent is supported for
    movement with respect to the nozzle which it is to clear.


CLS 239/116
TXT Apparatus under subclass 115 having the cleaning agent supported within the
    flow confining member.


CLS 239/117
TXT Apparatus under subclass 116 having the member movably mounted to project
    through the egress opening of the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    319,    for moving solid surfaces supplying material through an opening to
    a carrier fluid outlet.


CLS 239/118
TXT Apparatus under subclass 117 having the cleaning member moved by fluid
    pressure.


CLS 239/119
TXT Apparatus under subclass 106 in which the nozzle member is cleaned or
    drained by means causing flow away from the nozzle in a direction opposite
    to the normal spraying direction.

    (1)     Note.  Air from without the nozzle rushing through the egress port
    to replace the liquid in the system returned to supply is included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    for nonspraying fluid applied exteriorly or interiorly to the
    nozzle for cleaning.


CLS 239/120
TXT Apparatus under subclass 104 in which means are provided to catch or
    otherwise dispose of material escaping or leaking from the system through
    uncontrolled paths or beyond the last point of control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 312+ for fluid handling systems with
    leakage or drip prevention features.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 86+ for filling means having waste catchers, and subclasses 115+
    for drip prevention.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 108+ for dispensers having drip collectors,
    and see the search notes to that subclass for additional fields of search.


CLS 239/121
TXT Apparatus under subclass 120 having a drip collecting means in the form of
    a cup or trough.


CLS 239/122
TXT Apparatus under subclass 121 having the drip collecting means intimately
    associated with a means which disperses and redirects spray fluid.

    (1)     Note.  The usual arrangement comprises projection devices spraying
    against a deflector in a fog or mist generator and having means to collect
    the liquid not finely enough divided to make mist. Here are collected
    various vegetable fresheners using mist.


CLS 239/123
TXT Apparatus under subclass 104 having a nonliquid member or agent operative
    to clean or clear the system of soil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114+,   for similar arrangements for nozzles or terminal members.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, appropriate subclasses,
    for solid agent cleaning means, per se.


CLS 239/124
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means (1) to discharge or
    permit escape of system fluid through other than the spray egress ports,
    including relief to atmosphere without provision for return to supply, (2)
    to by-pass or redirect system fluid away from the out flow direction, and
    (3) to direct system fluid flowing toward the outlet means back to the
    source.

    (1)     Note.  Relief of system fluid particularly in the intermittent pump
    type by providing a deformable or expansible chamber or flow line to
    temporarily accept and store fluid without actual loss to atmosphere or
    return to supply is not included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88+,    99 and 331, for example and see (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 318+ and 424 for by-pass or liquid return to
    supply in that class.


CLS 239/125
TXT Apparatus under subclass 124 wherein provision is made to divert spray
    fluid back through additional passages in the outlet member and away from
    the egress port to the supply for recirculation.

    (1)     Note.  This arrangement is generally regarded as a "spill nozzle"
    in the internal combustion engine type and may provide such arrangement for
    nozzle cooling, also for burner nozzle cooling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132.3+, for nozzles provided with heat exchange means.


CLS 239/126
TXT Apparatus under subclass 124 in which relief or return to supply of spray
    fluid is under the control of a means sensitive to the pressure of fluid in
    the system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    452+,   464 and 533+, for fluid pressure responsive discharge modifiers or
    flow regulators.


CLS 239/127
TXT Apparatus under subclass 124 in which return of spray fluid to the supply
    means is made from the outlet side of the pump to relieve the discharge
    pressure, to act as a pumping means either for the addition of other fluids
    for mixing purposes or for tank filling (e.g., venturi arrangements) for
    pump unloading or the like purposes.


CLS 239/127.1
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising the distributor for the
    fluid ejected from a reaction motor to produce a thrust, said distributor,
    or a portion thereof, being provided with a spaced wall or internal cavity,
    the cavity or the space defined by the wall being connected to a source of
    fluid, heat from the distributor being transferred to the fluid to prevent
    inordinate temperature rise of the distributor.

    (1)     Note.  See the definition and notes of subclass 265.11 for the
    meaning of "reaction motor" distributor.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass will only accept devices in which the
    distributor is cooled; for devices in which heat is transferred to the
    distributor, see subclasses 128+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132.3+, for cooling means in a terminal element in which the element is not
    disclosed as a reaction motor discharge.


CLS 239/127.3
TXT Apparatus under subclass 127.1 in which the cooling fluid is introduced
    into the main discharge stream at a location in the distributor or
    downstream of the distributor, after said cooling fluid has passed through
    the space or cavity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    265.17, for a reaction motor nozzle having means for adding a secondary
    fluid upstream of the outlet, with however, no jacket or hollow portion for
    passage of such secondary fluid for cooling purposes.

    265.23, for a reaction motor nozzle in which a secondary fluid is added to
    the main fluid subsequent to its discharge through the nozzle for
    deflecting the main fluid jet for steering purposes, with however, no
    jacket or hollow portion for passage of such secondary fluid for cooling
    purposes.


CLS 239/128
TXT Apparatus under class definition in which either the material to be sprayed
    or the apparatus parts are subjected to a treatment which either raises or
    lowers the temperature thereof.

    (1)     Note.  A device in which an incandescent or radiant member or a
    system part as claimed, is positioned in the path of the fluid discharged
    or distributed from the system, which fluid is disclosed as ignitible to
    produce a flame, thus heating the member, the system part or the system
    fluid, whether or not the flame is actually claimed, is excluded from Class
    239 and will be found in Class 431, Combustion.

    (2)     Note.  Mere heat insulating means is excluded under this definition
    and will be found in subclass 397.5.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for corresponding processes.

    79+,    for apparatus involving the fusion of solid or granular material in
    the nozzle prior to or during spraying.

    125,    for burner nozzle cooling by recirculation of spray fluid within
    the nozzle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 6.5 and 6.6+ for a
    furnace having a feed port or tuyere with passages in which liquid is
    heated in cooling the port or tuyere structure.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 334+ fluid handling means with heating
    or cooling of the system.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 82 for filling arrangements including heating or cooling means.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, appropriate subclasses, for CO2 snow nozzles
    having diffusing therefor.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 146+ for dispensers having heating or
    cooling means and see the accumulated search notes there included to other
    classes on heating and cooling subject matter.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 207+ for a fuel emitter in which the fuel
    supplied to the emitter is heated by the burning of the emitted fuel, and
    subclasses 347+ for an incandescing or radiating component heated by the
    discharge from a burner nozzle.  See (1) Note above.


CLS 239/129
TXT Apparatus under subclass 128 in which the temperature is raised by the use
    of fluids or heat retaining media which would ordinarily be disposed of in
    nonheat exchange relationship.

    (1)     Note.  This type of heat exchange usually involves the use of a
    heat producing apparatus, such as an internal combustion engine, or steam
    driven prime mover, which apparatus is present for a purpose other than for
    heat exchange and the exhaust gases from the engine or the exhaust steam
    from the prime mover are used to then heat the spray material or the spray
    apparatus, instead of being disposed of in the usual manner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 336 for a burner having a flue extending
    through the fluid.


CLS 239/130
TXT Apparatus under subclass 128 provided with a conveyance on which the
    spraying apparatus and the temperature modifying elements are mounted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146+,   for mobile type tank supply means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, appropriate subclasses for a motor vehicle, per se.

    280,    Land Vehicles, appropriate subclasses for a land vehicle, per se.


CLS 239/131
TXT Apparatus under subclass 130 in which more than a single fluid discharges
    through the egress opening.


CLS 239/132
TXT Apparatus under subclass 128 having means positioned in the end element for
    varying the temperature of such element.


CLS 239/132.1
TXT Apparatus under subclass 132 in which there is a passage in the means and a
    fluid is passed through said passage to perform a heat exchange function.


CLS 239/132.3
TXT Apparatus under subclass 132.1 in which the fluid lowers the temperature of
    the element.

    (1)     Note.  Except for the broad subclass 128, this and the indented
    subclass are the only subclasses in this group which take cooling, which
    must at least affect the temperature of the terminal spray element, if not
    that of the fluid passing therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127.1+, for cooling a reaction motor discharge nozzle by passing a cooling
    fluid into a jacketed or hollow portion of the nozzle.


CLS 239/132.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 132.3 in which, after the cooling fluid has passed
    through the passage, it is combined with the spray fluid either before or
    after passing through the terminal outlet, or is itself the spray fluid and
    is discharged through the terminal outlet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127.3,  for cooling a reaction motor discharge nozzle by passing a cooling
    fluid into a jacket or hollow portion of the nozzle and then passing the
    cooling fluid into admixture with the main discharge stream either at or
    downstream of the nozzle.


CLS 239/133
TXT Apparatus under subclass 128 including a heating device which is
    operatively fixed to and mounted on the portion of the apparatus which also
    supports the terminal element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses, for specific spray
    projection or coating apparatus having radiant energy heating means or
    separate work heating or treating gas or vapor nozzles, e.g., flame
    heaters, carried by such projection apparatus and whose disclosed primary
    function is to heat or treat the work before or after coating thereof.


CLS 239/134
TXT Apparatus under subclass 133 in which there is an additional heating device
    intermediate the supply source and the heating means carried by the
    terminal member.


CLS 239/135
TXT Apparatus under subclass 128 including a means to raise the temperature of
    the apparatus parts or spray material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 129+ for
    vaporizing fumigators for insecticides.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 146 for heating means for dispensers and see
    the collected search class notes thereto for the locus of heating apparatus.


CLS 239/136
TXT Apparatus under subclass 135 including a device which heats a liquid to
    produce its vapor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, appropriate subclasses for heaters
    and vaporizers, per se, or including a nominal spraying member, or for the
    combination of a burner or flame nozzle specifically related to a closed
    liquid receptacle.


CLS 239/137
TXT Apparatus under subclass 136 in which more than one fluid is discharged
    through the terminal outlet means.

    (1)     Note.  There must be some characteristic differing between the
    fluids in order to qualify for the subclass, e.g., pressure, temperature,
    state, etc.


CLS 239/138
TXT Apparatus under subclass 137 provided with means whereby one of the fluids
    draws, sucks, pumps or siphons at least one other fluid for passage through
    the end terminal element to atmosphere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    340+    and 398+, appropriate subclasses for aspirating spray arrangements.


CLS 239/139
TXT Apparatus under subclass 135 including a wall separated from and forming
    with the apparatus or a part thereof, an enclosed chamber or space through
    which the heat exchange medium passes or whereby it is contained.


CLS 239/140
TXT Apparatus under the class definition (1) in which the supply container is
    supported for relative motion with respect to means which sustains it
    against the forces of gravity or (2) wherein there is some means
    constraining the supply to have motion relative to the ground, e.g.,
    (rolling contact) in addition to translating motion, to cause discharging
    of the contents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146+,   where the supply tank is mounted on a vehicle but has no motion
    relative to the vehicle chassis for discharging of contents.


CLS 239/141
TXT Apparatus under subclass 140 in which the supply means has rolling contact
    with the area it is spraying, or rotates around its support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    722+,   for mobile distributors having a fixed supply.


CLS 239/142
TXT Apparatus under class definition having means in addition to the discharge
    effecting means or other unmodified discharge controller for commingling,
    mixing or keeping in motion the material to be sprayed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    366,    Agitating, for agitating process and apparatus, per se.


CLS 239/143
TXT Apparatus under subclass 142 having means to agitate the supply by applying
    gas to the contents of the supply holder including for example gas pressure
    force feed arrangements peculiarly arranged to discharge below the surface
    of the supply level, or gas pump discharge means disconnected from its
    discharge function and operated to agitate the supply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85,     for supply holders for fusible, powdered or pulverulent spray
    material which holders frequently employ gas jets to agitate the material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 195 for dispensers having gas agitation.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 121+ for submerged
    blast type gas and liquid contact apparatus.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 3+ and 10+ for mortar mixing effected by gas
    agitation, and subclasses 101+ for gas effected agitation of general
    utility.


CLS 239/144
TXT Apparatus under subclass 142 having means to movably mount a tank or tank
    part with respect to its support to cause agitation of the contents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140+,   for means movably mounting a supply means for discharging the
    contents thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 108+ for agitation by vibration.


CLS 239/145
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the egress means comprises a
    member of permeable material or a permeable strand extending outwardly from
    the terminal of a conduit.

    (1)     Note.  This class does not include the application of a liquid to
    an area or surface by a wiping action.

    (2)     Note.  "Soaker hoses" are included under this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34+,    for slow diffusers.

    266+,   for distributors comprising longitudinally spaced outlets in a flow
    line conduit.

    326,    for temporary storage in wick or pad of liquid to be picked up by
    an air stream.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclasses 104.93+ and 209.1+ for wipers.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclasses 1.01 and 48.5 for plant husbandry
    involving the application of fertilizers, etc., to plants, and subclass 1.5
    for wick-like, porous discharge means having a liquid supply and adapted to
    wipe the liquid onto a growing plant.

    55,     Gas Separation, appropriate subclasses, for porous or permeable
    members useful for separating gas, vapors, liquids or solid particles from
    a gas streams.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, especially subclasses 123+ for conduits
    of general utility which may be porous.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses, for
    porous or permeable members for separating constituents from a liquid.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 187 for dispensers having wick or absorbent
    material feed.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 198+ for a
    hand-manipulable implement including a wick feed from within a reservoir.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 36+ for installed
    irrigation devices or those with below-ground terminal outlets.  See
    especially subclass 45 for a pipe or flume having a porous side wall or
    opening.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 304.4+ for a
    composite stock material product embodying a component which is porous.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 326+ for a burner in which fuel is fed to a
    flame area through a capillary, permeable or sieve like structure in or on
    which combustion takes place.


CLS 239/146
TXT Apparatus under class definition having a tank, container or receptacle
    constituting the supply means, mounted on a vehicular support to thereby
    affect or permit transposition thereof during the spraying operation.

    (1)     Note.  Mere wheel, skid or the like support means (1) directly
    secured to, or (2) secured to axle means, and carried by the supply means
    is not sufficient to qualify the support as a vehicle.  The support means
    must be sustainable as such without the presence of the tank-type supply.

    (2)     Note.  Many of the patents in this group are placed here on the
    basis that a mobile tank supply is disclosed even though only a supply
    means is claimed. The mobility of the supply means whether claimed or not
    where combined with the distributor so that there is a self-contained
    operative unit  capable of performing its function detached from a "pipe
    line" or "mains" supply and therefore during motion is deemed sufficient to
    warrant the disclosure as basis for the placement of the patents in this
    group.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225.1+, for a distributor continuously moving relative to its support
    during spraying.

    273+,   for support means or connections to art devices especially
    subclasses 286+ for means facilitating transportation of parts of system.

    650+,   for a container for nonfluid material, which may be mounted on a
    vehicular support and means to strew or scatter the material.

    722+,   for mobile distributors having a fixed supply.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 101+ for an
    apparatus to distribute material on a road or roadway.


CLS 239/147
TXT Apparatus under subclass 146 in which the container or receptacle is
    rotatably mounted and has a circular circumference supported by and adapted
    to roll over the ground.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141,    for other circular supply tanks supported by and adapted to roll
    over the ground for discharging the contents thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    111,    Planting, subclasses 118+ for means to spray liquid or gas onto or
    into the soil combined with means to disturb the soil to facilitate
    absorption.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 170+ for land rollers combined with some
    other earth-working tool, and subclasses 518+ for tools of the rolling
    implement type.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 122+ for a
    compacting roller device.


CLS 239/148
TXT Apparatus under subclass 146 including a means carried thereby that is
    particularly adapted to facilitate the filling or replenishing of the fluid
    supply in the receptacle.


CLS 239/149
TXT Apparatus under subclass 146 having a means to adjust the height and/or
    angle between the fluid receptacle and its mounting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140+,   for movably mounting supply means for effecting discharge of the
    contents.

    142+,   for agitation of supply means including a movably mounted tank or
    tank part.


CLS 239/150
TXT Apparatus under subclass 146 provided with means to redirect or disperse
    the spray or to prevent the spray from spreading beyond a predesired size
    or shape.

    (1)     Note.  The type of device herein classified is usually identified
    as a roadway or lane marker.

    (2)     Note.  For this subclass, the means to redirect or disperse the
    spray is usually in the form of a solid shield or guard and is positioned
    directly in the path of the fluid leaving the terminal element and before
    the fluid contacts the surface being coated. Those devices in which the
    shield redirects or disperses the fluid after it has contacted and
    rebounded from the surface are for soil prevention and are found in
    subclass 104.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for shields or templates which permit only the desired shape of
    spray to pass therethrough and which deflect and collect the remainder.

    104,    if the function of the shield is to prevent spray from reaching
    areas not desired to be so contacted and the shield is in the path of the
    spray rebounding from the surface (see (2) Note, above).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 504+ for work surface shields, masks,
    or protectors, and subclass 301 for masks or stencils for projection
    apparatus.


CLS 239/151
TXT Apparatus under subclass 150 in which the means to disperse, redistribute
    or prevent the spray from spreading is a jet blast of air or other gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290+,   for gas shaping or shielding jets in other combinations.


CLS 239/152
TXT Apparatus under class definition comprising a supply receptacle constructed
    and arranged so as to facilitate its transportation on some part of a
    person or animal (e.g., harness, body straps, contour, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    653,    for apparatus comprising a container and scattering means for
    nonfluid material and means for supporting the apparatus on the body of a
    user.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 175 for body carried or operated dispensers.


CLS 239/153
TXT Apparatus under subclass 152 in which the supply receptacle is shaped to
    complement and fit upon the surface form of a human or animal.


CLS 239/154
TXT Apparatus under subclass 152 in which the position of the distributor or
    end spray element is shifted manually.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    652,    for a container for nonfluid material and a strewing means
    comprising a manually moved tube.


CLS 239/155
TXT Apparatus under subclass 146 in which there is an element moving in contact
    with the ground and operatively united with any one or more of the other
    operating or controlling mechanisms of the fluid handling system so as to
    be controlled thereby.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for selective proportioning or correlated flow means having
    traverse motion response means.

    100,    for ground wheel controlled intermitter.

    160,    for motor means disassociated from ground traverse for imparting
    movement to boom or bar type distributors.


CLS 239/156
TXT Apparatus under subclass 155 in which the ground contacting movable element
    is rotatably mounted and actuates a mechanism to cause the fluid to be
    ejected through the terminal element or to move some part of the terminal
    element to control the amount or characteristic of the flow therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    for ground wheel operated control means to intermittently terminate
    and restore the fluid flow to a terminal outlet means.


CLS 239/157
TXT Apparatus under subclass 156 in which the mechanism actuated by the ground
    contacting means is a device which moves to change the pressure acting with
    respect to the material in the tank to be sprayed.


CLS 239/158
TXT Apparatus under subclass 157 in which the moving means acts upon gas in
    contradistinction to liquids.

    (1)     Note.  The usual type of gas pump in this group is that in which
    air is compressed and transferred to the top of a liquid which is then
    ejected by the gas pressure.


CLS 239/159
TXT Apparatus under subclass 146 characterized by an arrangement of individual
    egress openings or plural groups of such openings along an elongated fluid
    conductor, bar, or bean-like member to define a spray pipe, terminal outlet
    members connected in series for through flow or a manifolding arrangement
    for individual heads.


CLS 239/160
TXT Apparatus under subclass 159 further including motion effecting means
    transmitted to the distributors during the spraying operation.


CLS 239/161
TXT Apparatus under subclass 160 having more than one bar or boom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163,    for plural diverse bars or booms.


CLS 239/162
TXT Apparatus under subclass 160 having a plurality of separate terminal heads
    or members and each so supported to have its own cycle of motion relative
    to its support.


CLS 239/163
TXT Apparatus under subclass 159 including at least two distributing bars or
    booms which are different as to kind or type of arrangement of egress
    means, the difference involving more than mere details of support or
    placement upon the carrier.


CLS 239/164
TXT Apparatus under subclass 159 having means effective to variously shiftably
    or angularly position the fluid distributor relative to its support.


CLS 239/165
TXT Apparatus under subclass 164 having a distributor comprised of sections
    such that the member can be elongated or projected and retracted relative
    to the fixed sections thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281     and 753, for extensible distributing means in other combinations
    there classified.


CLS 239/166
TXT Apparatus under subclass 164 having a number of bar or boom type sprayers
    either (1) hingedly or otherwise nonslidably joined together or (2) each of
    a number hingedly secured to the supporting means.


CLS 239/167
TXT Apparatus under subclass 166 having distributors equally and similarly
    disposed to either side of a central axis or plane extending longitudinally
    through the unit.


CLS 239/168
TXT Apparatus under subclass 167 having a section which is uniformly positioned
    relative the longitudinal axis ahead of, above, below or to the rear of the
    carrier unit and having some relation to the outboard ones included.


CLS 239/169
TXT Apparatus under subclass 164 including a nonrigid connecting flow line
    section joining the distributor to the supply means for purposes of
    adjustment or rearrangement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175+    and 587+, for other adjustable and shiftable arrangements.


CLS 239/170
TXT Apparatus under subclass 159 including flow control means so that selected
    ones or sections of egress means may discharge or not.


CLS 239/171
TXT Apparatus under subclass 146 wherein the vehicular support is an aircraft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 136 for material discharging or diffusing
    devices and arrangements of aircraft structure, e.g., including significant
    aircraft structure, structure modified to accommodate the material
    discharging means, or mode of operation requiring flight.


CLS 239/172
TXT Apparatus under subclass 146 including some vehicular feature for draft
    purpose or mobile support purpose.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 146 (1) Note for the minimum requirements to
    qualify as a vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129     and 130, for vehicle mounted spray devices having in combination a
    heating device for the spray fluid or the spray apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclasses 29+,
    particularly subclasses 31 and 32 for fluent material releasing, generating
    and/or distributing means associated with structures, entry to which is to
    be prevented or discouraged by associating steam or hot water discharge
    means proximate entrance-ways, platforms, cab structure or the like
    (anti-intrusion).

    180,    Motor Vehicles, appropriate subclasses for a motor vehicle, per se.

    280,    Land Vehicles, appropriate subclasses for a land vehicle, per se.


CLS 239/173
TXT Apparatus under subclass 172 in which the vehicular member is constrained
    to move along a predetermined fixed path or trail by some additional
    cooperating member which it follows as for example a rail.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are ambulant devices adapted to spray
    surface areas provided with superimposed or contiguous vehicle supporting
    rails as, e.g., car tracks forming part of a street or guide rails disposed
    across an agricultural field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    739+,   743+ and 750+, for translating distributing means not having mobile
    type tank supply means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, appropriate subclasses
    for track clearers and cleaners not involving liquids, per se.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, appropriate subclasses for railway rolling
    stock which can be used to carry or draw the tank or contrainer.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclass 32 for
    anti-intrusion type sprayers arranged on trains and the like to prevent
    unlawful entrance thereto.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 307 for vehicles or carriages (e.g.,
    railway cars) which travel along a guiding and supporting means which
    includes a rail, said vehicle or carriage having means to spray a liquid
    coating material onto the rail.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 271.1+ for weed-destroyers and snow
    and ice melters involving surface heaters.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 172+ for rail
    or guide supported vehicles or carriages adapted to travel along the rail
    or guide and spray a noncoating liquid on the rail or guide.

    184,    Lubrication, subclasses 3.1+ for rail lubricators peculiarly
    related to cooperate with the rail as one that is actuated by rounding a
    curve.


CLS 239/174
TXT Apparatus under subclass 173 having spray means attached to or adapted for
    connection to a locomotive, cab or the like usually involving a flexible
    flow line or aspiration device and fluid diverter.

    (1)     Note.  There is usually some reference in these patents to boiler
    water, steam, or discharge pressure to effect aspiration afforded by the
    locomotive although the claims only nominally include the source if at all.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 26.1+ for a locomotive, per se.


CLS 239/175
TXT Apparatus under subclass 172 including a nonrigid flow line section joining
    the supply means to the distributor for adjustability or shiftability.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    587.1+, for a distributor adjustably or shiftably connected to a flow
    conduit.


CLS 239/176
TXT Apparatus under subclass 146 having terminal flow means so supported by or
    coupled to the system to readily permit change in direction of discharge or
    disposition of discharging parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159+,   particularly subclasses 164+ for adjustably mounted spray boom or
    bar type distributor.

    172+,   for vehicle drawn or carried tanks having some vehicle feature
    claimed.


CLS 239/193
TXT Apparatus under class definition having a trough, open tank or holder type
    fluid handling means which depends for its distributing function upon the
    fact that accumulated fluid runs over the top or edge of the retaining wall
    or over or through a depression or notch in a wall much as in the case of a
    weir to the surrounding area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17+,    for ornamental fountains which may involve overflow discharge.

    542,    for decelerator devices which are conduit or nozzle attached and
    which depend upon an over-all increase in the volume of at least a portion
    of the flow conduit or a discharge area greater than the inlet area to
    decrease the velocity of the supplied fluid.


CLS 239/194
TXT Apparatus under subclass 193 including means whereby the fluid which has
    overflowed or escaped the retaining wall is conveyed to the point of use by
    a second fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77+,    for apparatus having a fluid sprayed into a gaseous conveying
    current.

    314,    for apparatus for mixing, dissolving or entraining material in a
    flowing liquid stream by mixing exteriorly of the liquid flow paths by
    dribble or drip.

    379,    for gravity flow from a supply holder of material to be conveyed by
    a second fluid.


CLS 239/195
TXT Apparatus under the class definition provided with a flexible conduit and
    terminal member and means to return the conduit or terminal member to a
    nonuse or stored position, or retain the conduit or terminal member in such
    position.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are hose brackets and holders adapted to be
    released by distension or inflation of the hose under pressure of the fluid
    in the hose.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 58.1, for means for returning
    or storing a conduit which is claimed as conducting motive fluid to or from
    an expansible chamber device.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 355.16+ for subject matter similar to
    this and the indented subclasses without reference in the claims to a spray
    nozzle and see the class definition, section III of Class 239 for a
    statement of the line relating to hose storage or retrieval means and
    subclass 223 for inflatable article filling chuck or stem.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    appropriate subclasses for filling apparatus for filling tires with gas and
    liquid, for charging tires with gas having in addition to a chuck or stem a
    significantly claimed source of supply or means for holding or supporting
    the tire.

    222,    Dispensing, and see section III of Class 239.

    248,    Supports, and see section III of Class 239.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, and see section III of Class 239.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, and see section III of Class 239.


CLS 239/196
TXT Apparatus under subclass 195 having a fluid supply regulating means and a
    connection between such means and the conduit, terminal member or the
    storing means whereby movement of the conduit, terminal member or the
    storing means actuates the regulating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 355.18+ for flow regulation control by
    hose movement from a stored to a use position.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 74+ for hose or other movable discharge
    guide interlocks or interconnections.


CLS 239/197
TXT Apparatus under subclass 195 provided with means in addition to the mere
    support or storage apparatus for facilitating movement or to supply motive
    force to move the conduit to a nonuse or stored position.

    (1)     Note.  Modified reel structure to serve as a handle or gripping
    portion or the addition of a handle to facilitate turning of the reel for
    example is construed as sufficient for retrieval means.


CLS 239/198
TXT Apparatus under subclass 195 provided with means for contact with the
    ground or floor to sustain the storage spool or drum in stable position for
    operation or for nonuse.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   for fixed supports or ground installed supply means.

    273+,   for support means for parts of systems.


CLS 239/200
TXT Apparatus under class definition provided with means for sustaining the
    fluid supply means, all or part of such means being a structural member
    immovably joined to the ground or wherein a casing protector or the like
    for a flow line is immovably joined to and partially or wholly embedded in
    the ground.

    (1)     Note.  Size alone is not controlling of static construction or
    fixed support, nor is the fact that the device to which the supply is
    connected or by which it is supported is large; the controlling factor is
    whether or not such structural supporting member is fixed or joined to the
    ground.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273+,   for spray apparatus with ground or vertical surface sustained
    support means.

    274,    for spray apparatus combined with means operated by an art device.

    525+,   for flow line or nozzle attached carriers or holders.


CLS 239/201
TXT Apparatus under subclass 200 having the supply lines and/or the spray
    distributor below the surface of the area containing same or within which
    they are supported.

    (1)     Note.  Some feature relating the organization or arrangement to the
    ground or which has utility only as claimed for a ground installation, such
    as an enclosing or protective casing, dirt guard and the like, must be
    included in the claims in the absence of claimed buried supply means or
    flow line means to a sprinkler for classification herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, appropriate subclasses for the combination of a cutting
    tool for trimming grass and a ledger plate embedded in the ground.  The
    nominal recitation of a sprinkler head even though positively included in
    the claim will not militate against classification in Class 30.  Class 30
    also takes a tool, per se, which cuts a slit in the ground, or is an
    annular cutter or sweep cutter engaging a sprinkler head or other object
    such as a curb to guide or center such cutter.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 33 for ornamental beds including ground
    inserted metal edging means which may serve as a ledger plate to cooperate
    with a grass cutting blade.

    172,    Earth Working, appropriate subclasses for sod-cutting implements
    which may cut a "V" shaped furrow.


CLS 239/202
TXT Apparatus under subclass 201 having spraying means combined with street or
    road curb structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 247.11+ for street curb drainage inlet
    devices including a liquid seal.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 2+ and 7+ for
    curb structure, per se, combined with drainage or run-off means or wherein
    other fluid handling is nominal or conventional.


CLS 239/203
TXT Apparatus under subclass 201 having some means which is effective to cause
    the distributor to rise above its nonuse housing level or position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225.1+, for distributors continuously moving relative to the support during
    spraying.


CLS 239/204
TXT Apparatus under subclass 203 in which the motion for raising the sprinkler
    results from means responsive to the flow of spray fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclasses for a
    fluid operated expansible chamber motor, per se, which may be used to
    elevate the sprinkler, and for the combination of such a motor with a
    nominally recited distributor means in the absence of claimed structure to
    discharge the motor exhaust fluid through the distributor.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclasses for a
    rotary expansible chamber motor, per se, which may be used to elevate the
    sprinkler, and for the combination of such a motor with a nominally recited
    distributor means in the absence of claimed structure to discharge the
    motor exhaust fluid through the distributor.


CLS 239/205
TXT Apparatus under subclass 204 having a resilient means which assists the
    return of the sprinkler to nonuse housing or embedded position.


CLS 239/206
TXT Apparatus under subclass 204 having a nozzle or sprinkler head which
    continuously moves about a support during the flow or discharge to the
    surrounding area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225.1+, for distributors continuously moving relative a support means
    during spraying.


CLS 239/207
TXT Apparatus under subclass 200 in which the fluid conductor from the source
    has (1) a plurality of terminal outlet members arranged along its length so
    that fluid may flow through them successively and in which there is at
    least a disclosure of connectable conductor sections so that each section
    serves to hold and supply the terminal openings to supply the fluid for the
    next section of conductor, or (2) a coupling member having a side outlet
    means supporting and communicating with an adjacent terminal outlet means
    in addition to a downstream fluid connection to a flow line or spray pipe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266,    and see the accumulated notes in that subclass.


CLS 239/208
TXT Apparatus under subclass 200 in which the means for immovably substaining
    the fluid supply is an essential part of a building structure.

    (1)     Note.  The relation between Classes 239 and 47, subclasses 17+
    (greenhouse) and subclass 19 (hotbeds) is as follows: if any specific
    detail of the greenhouse or hotbed is claimed, such as for example, the
    benches for the plants, or a particular pattern or curvature of the soil,
    together with the nozzle or supply line to spray in a particular manner
    between or on or in other specific relations to the benches or the soil,
    the patent is classified in Class 47.  If the greenhouse or hotbed is
    claimed by name only, then the patent is classified in Class 239.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 357+ for static constructional
    installation having to do with buildings and fluid handling.


CLS 239/209
TXT Apparatus under subclass 208 in which the supply flow line is fixed to the
    upper part or to the overhead cover portion of the room.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 357 for building supported conduit lines
    not including the nozzle or terminal element and subclass 580 for rotatable
    joints in pipe conduits where the nozzle or terminal elements are not
    claimed.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclass 64 for building supported pipe
    joints where such joints may be part of a spraying system, and subclasses
    272+ for swivel joints as part of a fluid spraying system.


CLS 239/210
TXT Apparatus under subclass 200 provided with distributing means which is
    continuously moving while the spray fluid is discharging.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206,    for embedded sprinklers having moving distributor means during
    spraying.

    225.1+, for distributors continuously moving relative to a support during
    spraying.

    237+    and 251+, for spray fluid motor drives and reaction type nozzle
    motive means, respectively, for moving distributors.

    722+,   for distributing means mounted on a mobile support base which may
    move during spraying.


CLS 239/211
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having claimed features of external
    configuration which are designed to imitate or assume the appearance of
    some animate or inanimate object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302,    for supply containers or retainers in general without particular
    regard to external configuration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 24 for container structure for article
    dispensers of simulated form.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 78+ for dispensers having containers or
    casings of simulated form.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 125 for a fuel burner imitating the appearance
    of some animate or inanimate object.


CLS 239/214
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising (1) a moving means for
    distributing fluid, said means contacting a supply of the liquid, or (2) a
    continuously rotating means to distribute fluid delivered thereto from a
    modified or unmodified outlet, said means rotating relative to said outlet.

    (1)     Note.  Included under this definition are slingers, splashers or
    deflectors which are rotated by the fluid impinging thereon, as well as by
    independent driving means.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this group are evaporator-dehydrator
    subcombinations, e.g., centrifugal slingers which are disclosed in an
    evaporative drying apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for a method of distributing fluid by centrifugal force or
    spattering.

    225.1+, for a deflector which moves with a modified or unmodified outlet
    relative to a support to distribute fluid.

    380+,   for a motor or spray fluid actuated moving discharge modifier,
    other than a rotating deflector, which has motion relative to a modified or
    an unmodified fluid outlet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclass 6, for a concentrating
    evaporator in which a liquid film is maintained on a surface by centrifugal
    force.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 638+ for a thrower type
    conveyor.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 91+, for gas-liquid
    contact apparatus comprising scattering or distributing the liquid by a
    rotating impeller dipping into a body of liquid.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 168+ for a rotary fuel dispenser installed
    in an industrial or domestic furnace.


CLS 239/214.11
TXT Apparatus under subclass 214 comprising means to conduct a second fluid
    (e.g., air) into contact with the distributed fluid stream downstream of
    the distributor.

    (1)     Note.  The "other" or second fluid must be discharged by some means
    other than by the distributor for the primary fluid, even though it may
    originate from the same source.

    (2)     Note.  Subject matter under this definition typically includes
    means to bring a gas (e.g., air) into contact with a combustible fluid
    issuing from a rotating distributor.


CLS 239/214.13
TXT Apparatus under subclass 214.11 in which the motion of the distributor is
    caused by impingement of any of the fluids on said distributor directly or
    on an element connected to said distributor.


CLS 239/214.15
TXT Apparatus under subclass 214.11 having a distributor comprised of a
    multiplicity of apertures or conduits for discharging the distributed fluid
    in two or more separate and distinct streams.


CLS 239/214.17
TXT Apparatus under subclass 214.11 including means to separately conduct each
    of a plurality of fluids into the distributor, or to cause a plurality of
    separate fluids to intermingle with each other before contact with the
    distributor.

    (1)     Note.  At least one of the fluids may comprise a portion of the
    second fluid, branched off from the second fluid stream before it contacts
    the distributed fluid stream downstream of the distributor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    214.25, for means for combining diverse fluids at or upstream of a
    distributor but in which no means is claimed for contacting the distributed
    fluid with a second fluid stream downstream of the distributor.


CLS 239/214.19
TXT Apparatus under subclass 214.11 comprising coaxially arranged flow line
    means for conducting the fluids, at least one of which lines continuously
    revolves around the flow axis, one flow line surrounding the other, axial
    movement of the flow line means, one with respect to the other, controlling
    the flow of one or more of said fluids for commingling thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    416     and 417, for relatively movable concentric flow paths, for
    controlling the flow of one or more of a plurality of separate fluid
    streams for commingling thereof in a stationary distributing means.


CLS 239/214.21
TXT Apparatus under subclass 214.11 having means (e.g., jet pump, rotary pump)
    to impel any of the fluids, or fluid flow directing blades located in the
    path of flow of any of the fluids, at or upstream of the last point of
    confinement for that fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    399+,   for a stationary distributor and means (e.g., guide vanes) for
    imparting a spin or whirling motion to one or more of a plurality of fluid
    streams which are conducted through separate fluid flow conduits and
    subsequently commingled.

    463+,   for a stationary distributor and a means for imparting a spin or
    whirling motion to the fluid in the flow path upstream of the egress
    opening.

    553+,   for a guide or other directing surface located within a stationary
    distributor having plural outlets and see the search notes therein.

    590+,   for a guide or other directing surface located within a fixed
    terminal member and see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 239/214.23
TXT Apparatus under subclass 214.21 in which the fluid impelling or directing
    means may be selectively positioned relative to the flow path of the fluid
    on which it acts, or in which the shape or position of said impelling or
    directing means is changed or distorted by the force of the fluid in the
    flow path.


CLS 239/214.25
TXT Apparatus under subclass 214 comprising means to conduct each of a
    plurality of separate and distinct fluids into the distributor, or to cause
    each of said fluids to intermingle with each other before contacting the
    distributor.

    (1)     Note.  To be diverse, the fluids must vary from each other in some
    essential characteristic, e.g., temperature, pressure, state of matter, or
    state of distribution.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    214.17, for means for combining a plurality of fluids at or upstream of a
    distributor combined with means to conduct a second fluid into contact with
    the distributed fluid down-stream of the distributor.


CLS 239/215
TXT Apparatus under subclass 214 having a separate element or device which
    moves relative to the source of spray material for, or which results in
    supplying the distributor with fluid for spraying.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes devices of flared tubular form which
    rotate about their longitudinal axes and cause material to travel upwardly
    to some other member or part for distribution.


CLS 239/216
TXT Apparatus under subclass 215 in which the moving member has a bowl-like
    configuration of open ended form within which material is raised as it
    rotates to deliver material to the distributor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222,    for stationary apertured casings spaced about a distributor to
    permit spray to be discharged therethrough and having a bowl-like
    configuration.


CLS 239/217
TXT Apparatus under subclass 216 including an additional member which dips or
    picks up material from the rotating sleeve and delivers the material to the
    distributor.


CLS 239/218
TXT Apparatus under subclass 215 in which the movable means delivering to the
    distributor is a continuous member of band-like form

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    214,    for endless conveyor means running in a supply from which material
    is distributed by abrupt motions of or by flicking the conveyor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses for conveyor
    belts, per se.


CLS 239/218.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 215 in which the movable means delivering to the
    distributor is of helical configuration.


CLS 239/219
TXT Apparatus under subclass 214 in which the distributing member is at least
    partially submerged in the supply either before or during spraying and
    which picks up material and then throws it off by high speed movement, or
    directly causes violent agitation of the material to cause it to form a
    spray.


CLS 239/220
TXT Apparatus under subclass 219 in which the member has rotary motion about an
    axis horizontally disposed.


CLS 239/221
TXT Apparatus under subclass 219 in which the member runs beneath the normal
    liquid level in the supply container to cause violent agitation or movement
    of the liquid to form spray.


CLS 239/222
TXT Apparatus under subclass 214 in which the distributing means is encased or
    shielded by a spaced exteriorly arranged member provided with apertures
    through which material is discharged, the casing usually admitting of
    adjustment either for purposes of spray quantity control or to change the
    the direction of discharge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for nozzle carried apertured shield and collector.

    288+,   for solid member guards or protectors.


CLS 239/222.11
TXT Apparatus under subclass 214 having a continuously rotating means to
    distribute fluid delivered thereto from a modified outlet, said means
    rotating relative to said outlet.

    (1)     Note.  The means continuously rotates about an axis which passes
    through said means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223+,   for a fluid conduit having an unmodified terminal outlet combined
    with a continuously rotating disc, impeller-type or bowl-like slinger
    located proximate thereto for distributing or dispersing fluid discharge
    from said terminal.

    380+,   for motor or spray fluid actuated continuously rotating fluid flow
    modifying means located in or upstream of a terminal outlet member.


CLS 239/222.13
TXT Apparatus under subclass 222.11 in which said outlet is caused to move
    continuously during spraying with respect to the base or support provided
    therefor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231+,   for a continuously moving nozzle and a fixed or movable nonrotating
    deflector (e.g., baffle) disposed in the path of fluid emerging from said
    nozzle.


CLS 239/222.15
TXT Apparatus under subclass 222.13 in which there is a motive means connected
    to said continuously moving outlet and actuation of said motive means is
    caused by motion of the rotating means to which the fluid is delivered.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233,    for a nonrotatively, continuously moving deflector causing
    continuous movement of a nozzle delivering fluid to said deflector.


CLS 239/222.17
TXT Apparatus under subclass 222.11 in which said continuously rotating means
    is driven by the fluid delivered thereto from said outlet.


CLS 239/222.19
TXT Apparatus under subclass 222.17 in which said outlet delivers a plurality
    of distinct fluid streams to the continuously rotating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    408,    for unitary deflectors having multiple fingers or serrated edges.

    504,    for deflectors apertured for flow.

    520,    for plural outlets delivering to a stationary deflector.


CLS 239/222.21
TXT Apparatus under subclass 222.19 in which the axis of rotation of said
    continuously rotating means is not coextensive with the longitudinal axis
    of said outlet.


CLS 239/223
TXT Apparatus under subclass 214 in which the distributor takes the form of a
    flat plate-like member, is a member of impeller or wheel form or is of a
    centrifugal bow-like configuration, to which fluid is supplied and from
    which the fluid is thrown to produce a spray.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), appropriate subclasses
    for an impeller, per se.


CLS 239/224
TXT Apparatus under subclass 223 in which the distributor is plate or impeller
    like.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), appropriate subclasses
    for an impeller means, per se, disclosed for scattering a fluid.


CLS 239/225.1
TXT DISTRIBUTOR CONTINUOUSLY MOVES RELATIVE TO SUPPORT DURING SPRAYING:

    Apparatus under class definition including a distributor which moves
    continuously and also relatively to a base or support provided therefor,
    said distributor including a modified or an unmodified outlet.

    (1)     Note.  The continuous motion may be intermittent in nature provided
    that there is no appreciable delay between the successive increments of
    movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97+,    for cyclically moving distributors with synchronized flow
    regulators.

    104+,   for means movably mounting supply means for discharging contents.

    146,    for apparatus having a mobile tank-type supply means.

    206     and 210+, for the subject matter of this subclass for sprinklers
    which are buried, embedded or otherwise fixedly installed.

    214+,   for fluid spraying apparatus comprising a moving slinger or
    splasher, or a rotating deflector which rotates relative to an effluent
    stream, the motion being caused by a motor or by impingement of the fluid.

    380+,   for a motor or spray fluid actuated moving discharge modifier,
    other than a rotating deflector, which has motion relative to a modified or
    an unmodified fluid outlet.

    722+,   for a distributor having a mobile support base.


CLS 239/226
TXT Apparatus under subclass 225.1 which is provided with either (1) a
    receptacle to retain a quantity of a substance to be mixed with a fluid to
    be sprayed, or (2) a means to supply different substances to a point where
    they mix or mingle together to form a distributed fluid.


CLS 239/227
TXT Apparatus under subclass 225.1 in which the distributor moves continuously
    relative to an axis or carrier which axis or carrier is moving with respect
    to a fixed support.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of such a motion are (1) planetal motion of the
    outlet member, and (2) an outlet member movably mounted on a reciprocating
    support.


CLS 239/228
TXT Apparatus under subclass 225.1 provided with (1) a screen or means to
    settle out or retain foreign solid matter from the fluid, and/or (2) a
    vane-like means within the confined fluid flow path to change the nature or
    direction of the flow through said path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    if a separate outlet or drain for the collected material is claimed.


CLS 239/229
TXT Apparatus under subclass 225.1 in which the distributor comprises a
    contortive flow conduit which is adapted to undergo a gyratory motion,
    usually due to reaction of the discharged fluid.


CLS 239/230
TXT Apparatus under subclass 225.1 in which the distributor is intermittently
    moved relative to its mounting by a means which imparts a series of
    successive blows thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    260,    for impact means which jars the distributor or terminal outlet
    means to minimize frictional binding to facilitate its movement by some
    other agency.


CLS 239/231
TXT Apparatus under subclass 225.1 having a dispersing or redirecting vane or
    baffle disposed in the path of fluid emerging from the outlet.

    (1)     Note.  The vane or baffle may be fixed or movably mounted on either
    the fixed support for the outlet or on means rigidly secured to said
    outlet.  It may either constitute part of a means to move the outlet or may
    merely redirect or change the character of the efflux from the outlet.


CLS 239/232
TXT Apparatus under subclass 231 in which the dispersing vane disposed in the
    path of fluid emerging from the outlet cooperates with a means to
    continuously vary the position or attitude of the vane for the disclosed
    purpose of varying the shape of the area sprayed in the various sectors
    through which said outlet moves.


CLS 239/233
TXT Apparatus under subclass 231 in which motion of the distributor is caused
    by motion of the dispersing vane acting directly on the distributor or
    through a motion transmitting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222.15, for a continuously rotating means distributing fluid delivered
    thereto from a modified outlet, the outlet being caused to continuously
    move relative to a base or support by motion of the said rotating means.


CLS 239/236
TXT Apparatus under subclass 255.1 which includes a means engaging a portion of
    the distributor member or an element operatively connected thereto, said
    means being adapted, during use, to change the direction or attitude of
    said member in order to change the shape of the area sprayed in the various
    sectors through which said member moves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232,    for deflectors which are similarly moved for the same purpose.


CLS 239/237
TXT Apparatus under subclass 225.1 provided with a motor means to move the
    distributor, said means including a surface which is moved by the weight,
    pressure or impact of at least a portion of the stream of fluid in a flow
    conduit which, as disclosed, communicates with the outlet.

    (1)     Note.  Motor means which operate solely in response to the reaction
    of a stream of fluid leaving a nozzle are excluded and will be found in the
    pertinent subclass herebelow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    214.13, for a moving distributor caused to move by impingement of fluid
    directly on the distributor or on an element connected thereto.

    222.15, for a distributor nozzle which is caused to continuously move by
    action of a rotating deflector to which the nozzle delivers fluid.

    233,    for moving deflectors having a non- rotary motion and which form a
    motor means to move a distributor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclasses for an
    expansible chamber fluid motor, per se, and for the combination of such a
    motor with a nominally recited distributor means in the absence of
    disclosed structure to discharge the motor exhaust fluid through the
    distributor.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclasses for
    rotary expansible chamber motor, per se, and for the combination of such a
    motor with a nominally recited distributor means in the absence of
    disclosed structure to discharge the motor exhaust fluid through the
    distributor.


CLS 239/238
TXT Apparatus under subclass 237 in which the motor means for moving the
    distributor includes a receptacle adapted to receive a flow of fluid and
    move under the influence of gravity due to the mass of this fluid.


CLS 239/239
TXT Apparatus under subclass 237 in which the fluid engaging motor surface is
    moved back and forth in a substantially straight line.


CLS 239/240
TXT Apparatus under subclass 237 in which the fluid engaging motor surface is
    mounted to rotate about an axis.

    (1)     Note.  The motor may be of the turbine type or may be of the rotary
    expansible chamber type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    214.13, for a moving distributor caused to move by impingement of fluid
    directly on the distributor or on an element connected thereto.

    222.15, for a distributor nozzle which is caused to continuously move by
    action of a rotating deflector to which the nozzle delivers fluid.


CLS 239/241
TXT Apparatus under subclass 240 which includes a means driven by a rotary
    fluid motor to intermittently advance the distributor in a series of
    separate and successive moves.


CLS 239/242
TXT Apparatus under subclass 240 which includes a means driven by a rotary
    fluid motor to move the distributor back and forth along a path and/or
    about an axis.


CLS 239/243
TXT Apparatus under subclass 225.1 which includes a plurality of distributors
    which are (1) supported for movement about separate axes, or (2) provided
    with means to individually support them so that they are capable of motion
    in different directions and/or at different speeds, or (3) relatively
    movable due to the fact that only one of them is stationary.


CLS 239/244
TXT Apparatus under subclass 243 in which a drive means interposed between the
    separate distributors so that one moves when the other does.


CLS 239/245
TXT Apparatus under subclass 243 in which plural distributors are mounted for
    rotation on the same axis.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are (1) coaxial distributors with means to
    drive them at different speeds and/or in opposite directions, and (2)
    coaxial distributors, one of which is rotary and the other of which is
    stationary.


CLS 239/246
TXT Apparatus under subclass 225.1 which includes a distributor member with at
    least two outlets apertures or groups of outlet apertures each of which has
    a different arrangement, shape or attitude than the other or others.


CLS 239/247
TXT Apparatus under subclass 246 including a member which defines an outlet
    aperture and is variable in  position relative to the distributor member
    which carries it, for the purpose of changing the shape or attitude of the
    outlet aperture.


CLS 239/248
TXT Apparatus under subclass 246 which includes at least two outlet apertures
    or groups of outlet apertures which are spaced from each other in a
    direction parallel to the axis of rotation of a rotary distributor in which
    the outlet apertures are disposed.


CLS 239/249
TXT Apparatus under subclass 246 which includes at least two different outlet
    apertures or groups of outlet apertures which are spaced from each other
    peripherally of a rotary distributor in which the outlet apertures are
    disposed in such fashion that different apertures or groups of apertures
    pass by a fixed point in succession as the member rotates.


CLS 239/251
TXT Apparatus under subclass 225.1 including an aperture through which the
    fluid discharges, the reaction to the force of the discharging fluid
    driving the distributor which carries the aperture in a direction opposite
    to that of such fluid discharge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229,    for flexible distributors which may move due to reaction of the
    discharged fluid.

    738     and 746, for reaction type distributors forming part of a land
    traversing spraying organization.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, subclasses 80+ for a fluid
    motor runner motivated by a fluid reaction jet discharge.  See the
    reference to Class 239 in the definition of Class 415, section III.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclasses 20+ for an
    impeller driven by a fluid reaction jet discharge.


CLS 239/252
TXT Apparatus under subclass 251 which includes a means to stop motion of, or
    to decrease the velocity of the reaction driven distributor.


CLS 239/253
TXT Apparatus under subclass 251 provided with (1) a plurality of members, each
    carrying an outlet aperture, which are interconnected to a single control
    device adapted to adjust the position of said members simultaneously, or
    (2) at least one member carrying an outlet aperture and pivoted to a
    rotating support to swing in a plane containing the axis of rotation of
    said support.


CLS 239/254
TXT Apparatus under subclass 251 which includes (1) a reaction driven
    distributor disclosed as cooperating with a sludge settling area or large
    filtering plant, or (2) a means to seal the apparatus against the loss or
    leakage of fluid, said means consisting of a receptacle to hold a heavy
    liquid in a location where it will block the path of egress of said fluid.

    (1)     Note.  The filter bed type distributors are usually large and heavy
    and may involve problems of structural bracing.


CLS 239/255
TXT Apparatus under subclass 251 which includes a means actuated by a reaction
    type nozzle to move the distributor back and forth along a path or about an
    axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98,     for oscillating or reciprocating distributors which employ
    alternately spraying, oppositely directed reactions nozzles.


CLS 239/256
TXT Apparatus under subclass 251 which includes (1) means to vary some portion
    of a distributor member to change its velocity, or (2) means to move a
    distributor to a new position in which it moves about a different axis.

    (1)     Note.  Mere valves in the flow line have been excluded even where
    they are located in the terminal outlet member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262,    for control of speed of a reaction nozzle type organization by
    controlling the flow of fluid therethrough by valves and the like.


CLS 239/257
TXT Apparatus under subclass 256 including a member carrying an outlet
    aperture, and means to adjust the area of the aperture to change the
    velocity of the distributor or the shape of the area sprayed.


CLS 239/258
TXT Apparatus under subclass 256 in which a member which carries the outlet
    aperture is adjusted to vary the angularity of fluid discharge through the
    aperture to change the effective reaction to the force of the discharging
    fluid.


CLS 239/259
TXT Apparatus under subclass 251 which includes (1) means other than or in
    addition to a mere bushing to support a distributor for unrestrained
    motion, or (2) means to prevent fluids from leaking at joints between
    relatively moving portions of the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  Ball and roller type bearings have been considered to be
    proper subject matter for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254,    for sealing members in which a body of liquid forms a barrier
    against leakage.


CLS 239/260
TXT Apparatus under subclass 259 which include impact or shaking means to cause
    a movably mounted distributor to shudder and thus minimize any binding or
    frictional resistance to motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230,    for impact devices which intermittently move a distributor or
    terminal element.


CLS 239/261
TXT Apparatus under subclass 251 which includes claimed details of a base,
    stand, carrier or other device to sustain the weight of a moving
    distributor and not provided for above.


CLS 239/262
TXT Apparatus under subclass 251 which includes means to vary the amount or
    rate of flow of fluid passing through the flow line leading to the
    distributor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97+,    for cyclically moving distributors with synchronized flow
    regulators.

    257,    for flow varying means for a moving terminal outlet which means may
    change the size or shape of the terminal outlet.


CLS 239/263
TXT Apparatus under subclass 225.1 which includes a motor to move the
    distributor, said motor being provided with a separate source of fluid from
    that discharged through the terminal outlet.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein, for example, are air motor drives, wind
    driven motors, wind vane type motors which position the distributor
    relative to the wind direction, and fluid motors driven by recirculating
    fluid which is not in communication with the sprayed fluid.


CLS 239/263.1
TXT Electric motive means:

    Apparatus under subclass 225.1 which includes a motor to move the
    distributor, said motor being driven by electrical energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102.2,  for an electric motor which causes vibration or jiggling of the
    discharged fluid.


CLS 239/263.2
TXT Power takeoff from another device:

    Apparatus under subclass 225.1 which derives its continuous motion through
    transmission means driven by a motor, which motor is primarily used to
    drive a device other than the fluid distributor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 53.1+ for motor vehicle engines used as
    the source of power for another machine.


CLS 239/263.3
TXT Transmission details:

    Apparatus under subclass 225.1 which includes claimed details of the
    mechanism which connects a motor used to drive the distributor with the
    distributor itself.


CLS 239/264
TXT Apparatus under subclass 225.1 which includes claimed details of a base,
    stand carrier or other devices to sustain the weight of a moving
    distributor and not provided for above.


CLS 239/265
TXT Apparatus under subclass 264 in which the supporting means for the moving
    distributor may be secured in any of a plurality of positions in order to
    move the distributor to a different location or attitude.


CLS 239/265.11
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising the distributor for the
    fluid ejected from a reaction motor to produce a thrust.

    (1)     Note.  The "reaction motor" of this definition is the motor forming
    the subject matter of Class 60, Power Plants, subclasses 35.5+, the subject
    matter falling under this definition being the nozzle or distributor
    subcombination of such motor coming within the class definition of Class
    239.

    (2)     Note.  A claim reciting a combustion chamber or other means
    imparting energy to the fluid is not excluded from this and the indented
    subclasses in the absence of specific details of the energy imparting means
    or a specific relationship between the means and the terminal member.

    (3)     Note.  See Class 60, Power Plants, subclasses 200.1+ (5) Note for
    examples of vehicle structure considered to be significantly claimed, which
    note must be considered in relation to the vehicle classes indicated under
    Search Class (below).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127.1+, for a reaction motor distributor a portion of which has a spaced
    wall or internal cavity, and a source of cooling fluid connected to the
    cavity or space, to cool the distributor by transfer of heat to the fluid.

    251+,   for a reaction type nozzle forming the terminal member of a fluid
    conduit which is connected for continuous motion relative to a fixed
    support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 35.5+ for reaction motors.  Typically,
    such motors comprise the combination of a reaction type nozzle with means
    feeding fuel thereto (e.g., after-burner), or combustion chamber details
    (e.g., materials), or a claimed relationship between a combustion chamber
    or a turbine or compressor upstream of the nozzle (e.g., pressure or
    temperature difference across the combustion chamber, turbine or compressor
    for affecting flow through the fluid system or for controlling a system or
    nozzle part).

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 347+ for pyrotechnic rockets,
    subclass 359 for pin wheels, and subclasses 374+ for rocket propulsion of
    projectiles.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 26.1+ for a jet propelled rail
    locomotive.

    114,    Ships, subclass 151 for reaction motors arranged to steer a ship.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 7 for a motor vehicle having means for
    driving it in some other manner than by drivingly rotating a
    surface-engaging wheel, which means may be in the nature of jet propulsion.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 12, 15, 23, 29, 52, and 73+ for aircraft
    sustained by the thrust of a reaction motor or propelled or steered by a
    reaction motor.

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, subclasses 80+ for a reaction
    type nozzle on a fluid jet motivated turbine runner.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclasses 20+ for a
    reaction type nozzle on a fluid jet driven impeller.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 158 for a chamber specialized to combustion
    feeding a jet nozzle of general utility.

    440,    Marine Propulsion, subclasses 38+ for reaction motors which propel
    or propel and steer a ship.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclass 163 for jet propelled boats and
    subclasses 211+ for other jet propelled toys.


CLS 239/265.13
TXT Apparatus under subclass 265.11 including a member movable into and out of
    the fluid stream being discharged and effective to separate the stream into
    a plurality or smaller, parallel streams for the purpose of attenuating the
    sound of the stream discharge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 213+ for mufflers and sound filters, per se.


CLS 239/265.15
TXT Apparatus under subclass 265.11 in which at least part of the distributor
    is made of material which during use is to be broken, melted or worn away.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    591,    for a distributor having a liner member therein usually of wear
    resistant properties.


CLS 239/265.17
TXT Apparatus under subclass 265.11 comprising a means for delivering an
    auxiliary or secondary fluid into the main fluid stream at a point in the
    system prior to discharge through the distributor outlet.

    (1)     Note.  Included under this definition are devices in which the
    auxiliary fluid serves as means to deflect the main stream for steering
    purposes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127.3,  for terminal outlet members having jacket or cavity means through
    which a cooling fluid passes and is then mixed with the main fluid.

    265.13, for reaction motor nozzles having a device movable into the fluid
    stream for dividing the stream into a plurality of separate streams for
    attenuating noise, combined with means aspirating air to mix with the
    streams and aiding the suppression of sound.

    265.23, for a reaction motor nozzle having means for adding an auxiliary
    fluid to the main fluid stream subsequent to discharge through the outlet
    for deflecting of the main jet for steering purposes.

    398+,   for other terminal members having means to supply and mix a
    secondary or auxiliary fluid with the main fluid stream either upstream or
    downstream of the outlet therefrom.


CLS 239/265.19
TXT Apparatus under subclass 265.11 having means associated with the
    distributor to regulate or change quantity, configuration, or line or
    course of movement of the discharge fluid stream.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    407+,   for a distributor to which separate fluid streams are supplied for
    mixing, and in which a valve means controls the flow of at least one stream.

    476+,   for a distributor having means to control rotation of the
    discharged fluid and which includes an operating member therefor mounted
    outside of and on the distributor.

    537+,   for a distributor in which a movable discharge portion is connected
    with and moves with a member controlling fluid flow.

    569+,   for a distributor and valve means controlling fluid flow.


CLS 239/265.23
TXT Apparatus under subclass 265.19 comprising an auxiliary, supplementary or
    secondary fluid to cause deviation of the discharging fluid stream from its
    previous line or course of motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127.3,  for a reaction motor nozzle in which there may be a secondary fluid
    added downstream of the outlet and deflecting the main stream, the
    secondary fluid passing through a jacket or hollow portion associated with
    and cooling the nozzle.

    265.17, for a reaction motor nozzle and the addition of an auxiliary fluid
    jet upstream of the outlet, which jet may cause deflection or deviation of
    the main fluid stream.

    290+,   for a distributor in which a supplemental gas jet is discharged
    upon or associated with the main fluid jet for shaping or shielding the
    main jet.

    398+,   for a distributor having means to mix an auxiliary fluid with the
    main stream.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 803+ for fluid systems having means to
    divert or vary the flow of one stream relative to a stream receiver by
    direct contact with at least one other stream, such devices being commonly
    known as "fluid amplifiers" acting to control or vary high energy flows by
    relatively low energy flow.


CLS 239/265.25
TXT Apparatus under subclass 265.19 in which the distributor comprises at least
    two distinct outlets, and the means regulates flow quantity, configuration
    or line of motion through each outlet individually or simultaneously.

    (1)     Note.  A device having a single outlet and a plurality of thrust
    spoiling or reversing flaps or other deflectors movable from outside the
    fluid stream into the fluid stream discharged from this outlet so as to
    redirect the fluid into a plurality of streams is not considered to come
    within this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170,    for a spray boom or bar-type distributor on a mobile, tank type
    supply means, with means to selectively control the discharge paths in the
    distributor.

    562+,   for a distributor having plural outlets and means for controlling
    either the flow to the outlets or closures for the outlets.


CLS 239/265.27
TXT Apparatus under subclass 265.25 in which there are at least two differently
    shaped or aimed outlets, the means permitting choice of outlet through
    which substantially all of the fluid stream discharges.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    265.13, for a reaction motor nozzle having a retractable stream dividing
    noise attenuator, combined with means for directing the fluid stream to a
    diversely shaped or oriented outlet when in use.

    436+,   for a distributor with selectively usable diverse outlets.


CLS 239/265.29
TXT Apparatus under subclass 265.27 comprising a member which is movable from a
    first position which closes an outlet to a second position within the fluid
    stream to redirect and cause the fluid stream to flow towards said outlet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    507+,   for a distributor having a deflector movable from a nonuse position
    to one which provides some degree of redirection or dispersion of the fluid
    stream.


CLS 239/265.31
TXT Apparatus under subclass 265.27 comprising an outlet on the periphery for
    the discharge of fluid laterally of the distributor and controlled by a
    portion of the distributor moving substantially parallel to its
    longitudinal axis, which portion carries another outlet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    438,    for other terminal members having two or more selectively usable
    diverse outlets, one of which is formed between members arranged for
    relative axial motion.

    451+,   for other terminal members formed by parts mounted for relative
    movement.


CLS 239/265.33
TXT Apparatus under subclass 265.19 comprising a solid member which confines
    and defines the layer of a flowing fluid stream which is furthest away from
    the axis of flow, the member being selectively movable to different
    positions or shapes.

    (1)     Note.  The "solid member" in this definition may comprise all or a
    portion of the distributor.


CLS 239/265.35
TXT Apparatus under subclass 265.33 in which the line or course of aiming of
    the distributor is selectively varied with respect to a fixed axis by the
    movement of the solid member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    587.1+, for other nozzle members adjustably connected to the flow conduit.


CLS 239/265.37
TXT Apparatus under subclass 265.33 in which the solid member is movable
    towards the axis of fluid flow to decrease the diameter of the stream.


CLS 239/265.39
TXT Apparatus under subclass 265.37 comprising more than two elements each
    hinged at one end, and spaced around the axis to form an outlet, this
    arrangement being the final point of control on the fluid.


CLS 239/265.41
TXT Apparatus under subclass 265.39 including additional means to regulate
    quantity or configuration of the fluid stream, said additional means
    comprising a selectively movable member defining and confining the flowing
    fluid stream and located in the flow path prior to the hinged elements.


CLS 239/265.43
TXT Apparatus under subclass 265.37 in which the solid member is formed of a
    material which may be selectively bent, compressed or stretched to various
    shapes to vary the discharge area or configuration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    546,    for a distributor formed of resilient material and means associated
    therewith for deforming the material.

    602,    for a distributor made of resilient material.


CLS 239/266
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a plurality of separate
    members, each having an outlet aperture and, in addition, connected end to
    end so that fluid may flow through them successively while a portion
    discharges through each of the outlet apertures.

    (1)     Note.  Included in these subclasses are terminal outlet means
    carried by collar-like coupling means having the necessary securing means
    whereby adjoining sections of conduit can be attached.

    (2)     Note.  Readily manipulable terminal members particularly those with
    a branched and/or closed flow line circuit with spaced outlet means have
    been excluded from this group where the concept of through-flow and
    joinable sections is absent.

    (3)     Note.  If the section of conduit has no other outlet than the
    spraying apertures particularly if the discharge member be of such size and
    shape as necessitates its manipulation as a mere hand held distributor it
    is classified in the appropriate subclasses in the lower levels of the
    class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207,    for similar types of longitudinally spaced outlets with a fixed or
    ground installed supply means.

    536     and 548+, for unitary outlet means having plural outlets and see
    the notes above.

    726+,   for distributors mounted on translatable supply pipe apparatus
    having vehicular support means.


CLS 239/267
TXT Apparatus under subclass 266 which includes a fitting having upstream and
    downstream passages separably connected to, or adapted to be connected to
    adjacent flow line sections and having either (1) a distributor or terminal
    outlet member adjacent to and supported by the fitting, or (2) a terminal
    outlet passage formed in the fitting.


CLS 239/268
TXT Apparatus under subclass 266 which includes (1) a means to hold a terminal
    outlet member or distributor in a desired position relative to the ground
    or a supporting object, or (2) an enclosing and/or protecting member
    disposed about the terminal outlet member or distributor, said terminal
    outlet member or distributor having a coupling means at the downstream side
    or end thereof for connecting an additional spray means or flow conduit
    thereto.


CLS 239/269
TXT Apparatus under subclass 266 in which a supply conduit having spaced outlet
    means is provided with longitudinally spaced portions which are either
    pivotally or hingedly connected or joined by a bendable or distortable
    interposed portion or section.

    (1)     Note. Included herein are flexible, apertured spray hoses having
    claimed downstream couplings for connection to a downstream flow line.


CLS 239/270
TXT Apparatus under the class definition which includes a terminal outlet
    member and a means associated with said member or with a fluid supply for
    said member, to deliver air to a person manipulating or controlling the
    member.

    (1)     Note.  The air delivering means usually includes a device for (1)
    separating air from the spray fluid, (2) separating smoke from ambient air,
    or (3) conducting fresh air from a remote point to the operator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 200.24+ for respiratory type masks.


CLS 239/271
TXT Apparatus under the class definition which includes a sharpened or tapered
    element supported on or connected to either a (1) terminal outlet member,
    or (2) a supply conduit means in order to adapt the apparatus to be forced
    through a wall, object or mass to make the latter more accessible for
    spraying or for connecting to a supply.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 318 for aperture forming means for tapping
    a pipe, keg, or tank under pressure.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 329+ for filling apparatus having puncturing connecting means.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 5 for dispensers of gas or vapor having a
    cutter or punch, and subclasses 80+ for dispensers in general having a
    cutter or punch combined therewith.


CLS 239/272
TXT Apparatus under subclass 271 which includes a sharpened or tapered element
    supported on a terminal outlet member or supply conduit member said
    element, in either case, being provided with a flow passage means for the
    disclosed purpose of rupturing a supply container to establish a flow path
    and connect the said member thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    309,    for means to penetrate a supply container where said means is (1)
    not sharpened, or (2) not provided with a supply passage, or (3) not
    supported by the terminal outlet member or supply line.


CLS 239/273
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a support means for the
    distributor or the fluid handling system therefor adapted to rest upon or
    be connected to a floor or ground surface or to a vertical surface, (e.g.,
    building or chamber wall).

    (1)     Note.  Under this definition no more of the vertical wall surface
    than that necessary to sustain the support means can be recited.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140+,   for apparatus having means movably mounting supply means for
    discharging contents.

    146+,   for mobile type tank supply means.

    200+,   for spray means having fixed support  means for or ground installed
    supply means.

    225.1+, for distributors having continuous motion relative a support during
    spraying.

    289,    for the combination of a distributor and a device which has a
    configuration to perform a function other than that of a support or a
    portion of a fluid handling system.

    525+,   for hand held or supported flow line attached handgrips and holders.

    531,    for hook-like members to support a nozzle on a ladder or window
    ledge but which could be hooked over a handle means equally well.

    722+,   for a translatable distributor having a fixed supply source.


CLS 239/274
TXT Apparatus under the class definition, not provided for in any other class,
    comprising means operated in response to relative motion between parts of a
    device while in use, to (1) cause discharge from, (2) control flow, to, or
    (3) change the character or direction of effluent from the distributor,
    said device being of special configuration to perform a particular function
    other than merely that of a support or of portion of the fluid handling
    system.

    (1)     Note.  Most of the patents in this subclass are operated by
    relatively movable parts secured respectively to a door and a door frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88      through 96, for injection nozzles adapted to operate in timed
    relation with moving parts of an internal combustion engine.


CLS 239/275
TXT Apparatus under subclass 273 which include integral or contiguous,
    interconnected (1) supporting means, and (2) flow redirecting means for a
    terminal outlet member, distributor or fluid supply system part.

    (1)     Note.  Means are usually provided to detachably secure a hose or
    nozzle to the combined support and deflector.


CLS 239/276
TXT Apparatus under subclass 273 which includes a member or portion adapted to
    be forced through the surface of the earth or of a yielding object in order
    to support the apparatus relative to said surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    271+,   for nozzles or flow line carried penetrating means.


CLS 239/279
TXT Apparatus under subclass 273 in which a terminal outlet member or
    distributor is supported by a supply passage means having a plurality of
    spaced points disposed in a horizontal plane and adapted to rest on the
    earth or other horizontal supporting surface to form the sole supporting
    means for the outlet member or distributor.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are supply tubes or hoses with ground
    engaging supporting fins, ribs or feet formed thereon.


CLS 239/280
TXT Apparatus under subclass 273 which includes a means to support a
    distributor, terminal outlet member or fluid supply system part, said
    support means being provided with a portion engaging or adapted to engage
    and rest on the ground or other horizontal supporting surface in such
    fashion that the support means is retained in a desired operative position
    by said engagement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    275,    for stands having a spray deflector combined therewith.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 75+ for supports, per se, disclosed for use
    with nozzles in operative or stored position.


CLS 239/280.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 280 in which one portion of the support means is
    selectively movable to different positions with respect to another portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    547,    for spray apparatus comprising a flexible fluid conductor
    permitting relative motion between portions of the fluid system.

    587.1+, for spray apparatus comprising a terminal outlet member connected
    to the flow line by a means permitting relative motion between the portion
    of the fluid system in the flow line and that in the outlet member, which
    means may be a flexible coupling.


CLS 239/281
TXT Apparatus under subclass 280.5 in which the movable portion of the support
    means is formed of telescopic or sectional members or is otherwise
    elongatable.

    (1)     Note.  The elongation may be caused by motor operated means.


CLS 239/282
TXT Apparatus under subclass 273 which includes a supporting means for a
    terminal outlet means, distributor or fluid supply system part in the form
    of either (1) a member adapted to be connected to a vertical surface, or
    (2) a horizontally projecting member adapted to be secured to a supporting
    object or structure.

    (1)     Note.  The wall may be part of a chamber or receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    531,    for bracket-like members having hooks to support a supply conduit
    or nozzle on a ladder or window ledge but which could be hooked over a
    handle means equally well.


CLS 239/283
TXT Apparatus under subclass 282 which include a supporting member having a
    horizontally projecting shelf-like portion to support a terminal outlet
    member, distributor or fluid supply system part, said supporting member
    being adapted to be secured to an object or structure.


CLS 239/284.1
TXT LIQUID SPRAYER FOR TRANSPARENT PANEL (E.G., WINDSHIELD):

    Apparatus under class definition comprising a distributor or terminal
    outlet member specially adapted to spray a liquid onto the interior or
    exterior of a transparent panel.

    (1)     Note.  Relative to the special subject matter under this definition
    the line set forth under (1) and (2) of Class Definition III (a) has been
    construed as follows in the example of a device for spraying a liquid onto
    the transparent panel of a vehicle:

            Under (1), Class 239 will take a claim which includes the
    distributor or terminal outlet member, the transparent panel and (A) the
    coolant liquid supply of the vehicle as a source of the liquid to be
    discharged, or (B) the engine or a part thereof used as heating means for
    the liquid or as the source of pressure or vacuum fluid to assist in
    discharging the liquid, or (C) the vehicle body or a part thereof serving
    as the liquid receptacle or support thereof.  Under (2), Class 239 will
    take a claim including the spray device or terminal outlet member and the
    transparent panel where the claimed relationship is merely the positioning
    of the parts for the spray to be directed towards or onto the panel (e.g.,
    adjacent to "in front of", "at the rear of", "directed towards", "along an
    upper edge").

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 250.01+ for
    windshield cleaners combined with fluid applying means.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses
    for windshield driers and particularly subclass 191 for a pulsating gas
    flow.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 171.1+ for a window
    and spray means combined with an additional feature of a static structure.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 85, 93, 121+, and 198 for directing an air
    current to either side of a transparent panel to remove condensation.


CLS 239/284.2
TXT Headlamp:

    Apparatus under subclass 284.1 wherein the transparent panel is a cover for
    an illuminating or signaling device on a vehicle.


CLS 239/285
TXT Apparatus under subclass 273 which includes means to support a spray
    distributing means, a flow control means therefor and means actuated by
    motion of the support relative to the rest of the apparatus to change or
    interrupt the flow of fluid to the distributor.


CLS 239/288
TXT Apparatus under class definition having a nonfluid means to shield or
    protect (1) the operator from spray injury, e.g., drift, or contact with
    the operating parts of the organization, (2) either the operator or parts
    of the apparatus from environmental causes, e.g., heat, or accidental
    knocks or bumps, or (3) to protect adjacent objects from contact with said
    parts of the apparatus, e.g., bumpers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24+,    for drinking faucets combined with "anti-contamination" means
    designed to prevent the user from placing his mouth on the discharge
    element or to otherwise protect the nozzle from injury or abusive use
    thereof.

    79+,    especially subclasses 82 and 83 for guards or protectors to protect
    or isolate parts of the device or the hand of an operator from the means
    for melting the spray material.

    104+,   for apparatus having drip collecting, waste disposal or soil
    preventing guards or shields, whose guards and shields protect the
    apparatus parts and environment from the soil which would be caused by the
    system fluid.

    128,    for cooling means to protect the system.

    150+,   for spray confining or compressing means for mobile tank type
    supply means.

    290+,   for apparatus having a supplemental gas shaping or shielding jet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 377+ for guards and shields particularly
    subclass 379 for nozzle abutment for scratch or damage prevention.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 350+ for a fuel discharge device having a
    protective, flame enclosing or flame stabilizing structure specializing it
    to combustion.


CLS 239/288.3
TXT Apparatus under subclass 288 in which the means is associated with and
    shields or protects the fluid dispersing or disseminating member.


CLS 239/288.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 288.3 in which the means is curved or bent along a
    radius.


CLS 239/289
TXT Apparatus under subclass definition (1) in combination with features
    functioning other than as a support or as a portion of the fluid handling
    elements and not elsewhere provided for, or (2) comprising means or parts
    capable of rearrangement or modification to selectively provide either a
    distributing system having some other mode of operation or a device of some
    other function.

    (1)     Note.  Supply structure includes handles, or handgrips and flow
    controllers or attached flow guides or regulators.

    (2)     Note.  Discharge effecting means includes all means for causing the
    material to be moved from the supply means to and beyond the egress port.

    (3)     Note.  Terminal member includes all discharge modifiers and flow
    regulators.

    (4)     Note.  In this subclass, for example, are combinations with (a)
    bouquet holders, (b) means for destroying an empty material cartridge to
    prevent reuse, (c) alarm box means not classifiable as a signal or
    indicator and (d) sound attenuators.

    (5)     Note.  All preceding subclasses must be investigated for particular
    combinations within this definition as shown by the preceding subclass
    titles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    390+,   for plural interchangeable discharge modifiers, outlet arrangements
    or coupling means wherein selectivity for adjustability or variability for
    flow characteristic is the essence wherein the mode of operation however,
    is unchanged.


CLS 239/290
TXT Apparatus under class definition having in addition to the spray material
    outlet, outlet means for enshrouding or causing the spray to be confined
    beyond the egress means to or within a particular configuration or outline
    by a nonliquid fluid medium.

    (1)     Note.  The gas for atomization if any must be provided by means
    other than the shaping or shielding streams although it may be that further
    atomization results from the impingement of the auxiliary stream upon the
    main stream.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77+,    for fluid sprayed into a gaseous conveying current.

    105,    for gas shielding means to prevent soil of apparatus parts.

    151,    for air stream confining or compressing means in a mobile tank-type
    supply spraying means.

    265.23.         for a reaction motor discharge nozzle with means for adding
    a gas jet to the outlet thereof to deflect or shift the course of the main
    discharge stream.

    270,    for apparatus with air supply means to operator.

    418+,   for apparatus combining separately supplied fluid streams at or
    beyond the terminal element.


CLS 239/291
TXT Apparatus under subclass 290 in which the shielding jet provides a curtain
    about an air jet discharge means.

    (1)     Note.  These patents relate to air guns for blowing away chips and
    the like by a main stream and which have an additional usually conical air
    stream surrounding the main stream to confine the moving material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    288,    for solid shields or protectors for the operator.


CLS 239/292
TXT Apparatus under subclass 290 in which the discharge direction of the
    auxiliary jet is adjustable so as to move the point of convergence with the
    main stream more or less from the terminal port.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    420,    for sprayers having movable means for varying the point of
    convergence beyond the terminal element.


CLS 239/293
TXT Apparatus under subclass 290 having a jet orifice carrier which is mounted
    to rotate and is driven by a nonliquid fluid material, usually the gas to
    the auxiliary jet means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225.1+, for appropriate subclasses for continuously moving distributor
    means with or without an auxiliary jet.


CLS 239/294
TXT Apparatus under subclass 290 in which an additional liquid projecting
    nozzle is provided for mixing or commingling with the projected materials,
    the latter egress means being upstream of the added liquid stream
    projecting means.

    (1)     Note.  The added liquid stream may be a catalyst.


CLS 239/295
TXT Apparatus under subclass 290 having the supplemental shaping or shielding
    jet projected from only one side of the main discharge stream.


CLS 239/296
TXT Apparatus under subclass 290 having plural groups of shaping or shielding
    jets which are arranged at least in pairs to mutually effect a change in
    the spray configuration.

    (1)     Note.  A set comprises at least two apertures which may either be
    (1) grouped together so that each group affects one side of the stream or
    else (2) paired about a center.


CLS 239/297
TXT Apparatus under subclass 296 in which the groups include flow control means
    such that at least one such group may be used or not as desired.


CLS 239/298
TXT Apparatus under subclass 296 having the shaping jets arranged so that the
    discharging liquid stream is swirled or turned about an axis extending in
    the general direction of discharge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    463+,   for fluid rotation inducing means upstream of the outlet.


CLS 239/299
TXT Apparatus under subclass 290 having the egress port in other than a round
    or circular configuration as, for example, in the form of an annulus.

    (1)     Note.  The shape to be here considered is that transverse to the
    direction of flow rather than in the direction of flow, e.g., elliptical as
    opposed to conical.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    601,    for orifice shapes.


CLS 239/300
TXT Apparatus under subclass 290 in which there is provided means (1) to
    variously direct or position the jet orifice carrying member, or (2) to
    variably restrict flow of gas through the port as by valving means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    292,    for means adjusting the point of convergence of two streams along
    the axis of discharge.


CLS 239/301
TXT Apparatus under subclass 300 in which gas regulation is effected by the
    movement of the jet port carrier mounted for rotary motion.


CLS 239/302
TXT Apparatus under class definition having a container, tank or other
    substance retainer other than a mere flow line or conduit from which the
    substance or carrier fluid is supplied to or beyond the terminal member.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this and the indented subclasses, one of the
    materials must be a liquid; see (6) Note in subclass 650.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16+,    for fountains.

    34+,    for holders for materials slowly diffused into the ambient air.

    140+,   for means movably mounting a supply means for discharging its
    contents.

    146+,   for mobile tank-type supply means.

    193+,   for weir-type overflow discharge means.

    200+,   for fixed support for or ground installed supply means.

    214+,   for slinger, splasher or rotary-centrifugal distributors associated
    with supply holders.

    273+,   appropriate subclasses for support means or art device connected
    supply means.

    650+,   for a container for nonfluid material and means to scatter or strew
    the material.


CLS 239/303
TXT Apparatus under subclass 302 having plural means, compartments, separate
    containers, or the like for retaining different substances to be sprayed or
    for retaining spray material and a conveying fluid.

    (1)     Note.  Separate or different holders of the same kind for plural
    supplies or quantities of the same spray material are here included.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 17 and 19 for plural holders, one a pressure fluid which
    discharges to fill the dispenser with discharge assisting fluid.


CLS 239/304
TXT Apparatus under subclass 303 having plural holders for the material to be
    sprayed.


CLS 239/305
TXT Apparatus under subclass 304 arranged so that only one holder supplies the
    discharging means with material to be sprayed at a time.


CLS 239/306
TXT Apparatus under subclass 304 including means to cause the commingling of
    two or more spray materials beyond the terminal means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290+,   for sprayers having supplemental gas shaping or shielding jets.

    418+,   for sprayers having fluid flow relationship for mixing beyond the
    terminal element.


CLS 239/307
TXT Apparatus under subclass 304 having in addition to plural holders for
    spraying materials a holder for or a supply means for the carrier fluid.


CLS 239/308
TXT Apparatus under subclass 303 having a second holder serving as a means for
    supplying the conveying fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    303,    for plural holders, one for the spray material and one for a fluid
    pressure discharge medium acting upon the spray material.


CLS 239/309
TXT Apparatus under subclass 302 having a closure which is intended to be
    broken, torn or cut, and which is thereby destroyed as a closure thereafter
    and having means to break or destroy such closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272,    for nozzle or flow line attached penetrating means for making a
    connection to a supply container, and subclass 354 for closure means for
    the eduction tube in an aspirating device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 541.1+ for frangible outlet elements and
    subclasses 544+ for closure means for dispensers.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 133+, wherein
    the implement includes a rupturable container for the material and means,
    actuatable upon assembly of the container with the implement, to rupture or
    break the container in order that the material may be released to the
    applying tool.


CLS 239/310
TXT Apparatus under subclass 302 in which the holder contains material to be
    picked up in, to be commingled with, or to pass into solution with, a
    flowing nongaseous fluid stream.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides the locus for patents claiming
    dissolving or mixing apparatus with a flow conductor attached spraying or
    sprinkling means (nozzle) disclosed for this class however claimed (by name
    only or specifically) and not provided for in the indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    319     through 379, appropriate subclasses for holders and fluid pressure
    discharge means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 1.01 for apparatus adding fertilizer and
    the like to an irrigation stream.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 88+ for fluid handling involving mixture
    condition sensing and maintaining, subclass 268 for holders for solid,
    flaky or pulverized material to be dissolved or entrained, and subclasses
    888+ and 896+ for multiple inlet and single outlet means for mixing,
    diffusing or injecting arrangements.

    220,    Receptacles, appropriate subclasses for shaving cups.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 630+ for fluid flow discharge means
    particularly for dry powder having air current conveying means.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 40+ and 44+,
    particularly subclass 47, wherein the implement includes means whereby
    material is picked up, commingled with, or dissolved by a liquid stream
    before being fed to the tool or applied directly to a work surface for
    treatment by a spreading tool.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclasses 108+ for feeders or intakes
    to fluid current conveyors, no scattering or spraying means being claimed
    subsequent to the conveyor.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 261+ for apparatus for holding
    solids to be mixed or dissolved, which holding means as disclosed is
    incapable of retaining liquids, and claiming only so much fluid handling as
    is essential to the function of this operation.


CLS 239/311
TXT Apparatus under subclass 310 having means to add air or other gaseous
    material to the flowing stream before the said stream leaves the egress
    port.

    (1)     Note.  See section III (d) of the main class definition of this
    (239) class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    335+,   for the induction of ambient air.

    372,    for gas passage through fluid outlet means in other combinations
    there classified.


CLS 239/312
TXT Apparatus under subclass 310 having plural outlets respectively related to
    flow paths for liquid discharge with or without a second ingredient.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    390+    and 436+, for other diverse outlet arrangements for a single fluid.


CLS 239/313
TXT Apparatus under subclass 310 in which the flowing liquid stream egress
    means is situated alongside or in close proximity to the holder which
    discharges the material to be added to the said stream by a follower type
    discharge means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 564.5 for distribution systems wherein the
    main line flow serves as the motive fluid for a follower type feeder.


CLS 239/314
TXT Apparatus under subclass 310 in which the fluid and the material are
    combined beyond the fluid stream egress port.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    418+,   for combining of separately supplied fluid streams at or beyond the
    terminal element and lacking a holder for the material.


CLS 239/315
TXT Apparatus under subclass 310 having the material container or retainer
    wholly within a flow conducting member which additionally carries or
    supports the member provided with egress means, the carrying relationship
    being intimate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    316,    for holders and combined outlet means and subclass 317 for branched
    flow to holder with recombining.


CLS 239/316
TXT Apparatus under subclass 310 in which the material container is end
    connected to the flow line and receives all the flow from that line and is
    additionally provided with the egress port or ports through which the
    mixture is sprayed, e.g., the holder is the egress port carrying means.


CLS 239/317
TXT Apparatus under subclass 310 having a branch fluid line which takes off
    laterally from the main line and connects to the material container, the
    outlet of the latter having means rejoining the main line, the lateral
    branching and rejoining being provided for by means within the terminal
    member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315     and 316, for total flow to and through the holder there provided.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 205.5 for apparatus wherein the main line
    flow displaces an additive from a shunt reservoir.


CLS 239/318
TXT Apparatus under subclass 310 in which the material is caused to flow into
    the solvent or liquid discharge line by a pressure differential resulting
    from a pressure reducing means in the line of flow in the nozzle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    for a fluid aspirating discharge nozzle in which one of the fluids
    is vaporized liquid.

    340,    for fluid pressure discharge means involving a pressure reducer at
    the holder outlet.


CLS 239/319
TXT Apparatus under subclass 302 in which a nonfluid member moves to carry
    material from the material container to a point which is in front or to the
    exterior of an egress port for the carrier fluid.

    (1)     Note.  The patents in this subclass for the most part relate to one
    form of air brush in which a needle-like member reciprocates from within to
    without a holder and positions a drop of material in front of a carrier
    stream.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329+,   for apparatus having a moving solid surface engaging material to be
    sprayed.


CLS 239/320
TXT Apparatus under subclass 302 comprising a member relatively movable with
    respect to and acting as a wall in the supply container which urges all the
    material in the direction of the egress port by moving within the container
    with the material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for dispensers comprising a
    container with follower and see the search class notes in subclass 386 for
    the locus of analogous art.


CLS 239/321
TXT Apparatus under subclass 320 in which the member acting against the
    material is resiliently urged to move or comprises means free to move
    toward the egress port.


CLS 239/322
TXT Apparatus under subclass 321 in which the follower is moved by a nonsolid
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    313,    for follower type feed means in juxtaposition with the stream
    egress means.

    355,    for sprayers having a pressure reducer and a holder carried gas
    pump.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 389 for fluid pressure actuated followers.


CLS 239/323
TXT Apparatus under subclass 320 in which the follower member is of nonrigid
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327     and 328, for resilient holders or collapsible or foldable supply
    holders where such characteristic relates to the outer wall.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 386.5 for similar subject matter for
    dispensing.


CLS 239/324
TXT Apparatus under subclass 320 in which the follower is operated by a screw
    mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 390 for screw operated followers.


CLS 239/325
TXT Apparatus under subclass 302 having a means operative with respect to the
    material in the holder to carry or push and move a pulverulent solid
    therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition and (1) Note of subclass 336 for
    the conditions for handling of fluent solids by this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    336,    for the handling of three or more fluids including at least one
    holder for spraying a fluent solid.


CLS 239/326
TXT Apparatus under subclass 302 having an absorbent means which is first
    saturated usually by tipping the holder which then becomes a secondary
    holder and from which an air stream picks up liquid for spraying by blowing
    thereacross.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34+,    for slow diffusers, many of which have secondary porous holders.

    145+,   for porous or wick type discharge means to atmosphere as by
    dripping.


CLS 239/327
TXT Apparatus under subclass 302 having one or more walls or portions thereof
    which may be distorted or deflected by application of a force to expel the
    material contained therein by contact of such wall with the material
    directly and which wall returns to the original position when the force is
    removed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323,    for collapsible or flexible follower in a holder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 206+ for resilient wall dispensers.


CLS 239/328
TXT Apparatus under subclass 302 having one or more walls of the material
    container of nonresilient material which will deform when pressure is
    applied thereto and will not return to its initial position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    for portable tank type supply means body of animal carried.

    323,    for collapsible or flexible follower in a holder.

    327,    for resilient holder wall for supply.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 92+ for dispensers having collapsible wall
    containers.


CLS 239/329
TXT Apparatus under subclass 302 including a nonfluid surface acting against
    the material to affirmatively move same toward the egress port such surface
    being positioned either within the holder or between the holder and egress
    port.

    (1)     Note.  Special forms of this subject matter and in other
    combinations appear throughout the early subclasses of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    214+,   for solid projection devices of the slinger splasher or centrifugal
    type spraying out of a holder or from a supply line directly into the
    atmosphere without reliance upon other flow confining conduits or egress
    ports.


CLS 239/330
TXT Apparatus under subclass 329 in which the solid member is a resilient flap
    or hinged disc type of liquid mover which is caused to move by gas pressure
    issuing from a flexible wall pump intimately related thereto.


CLS 239/331
TXT Apparatus under subclass 329 in which the moving member is constrained to
    move within an encasing means, the holder delivering fluid to the housing
    or encasing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124+,   for system fluid relief to atmosphere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 30+ for variable capacity
    expansion chambers.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 372 for material supply containers and
    discharge assistant with casing.

    417,    Pumps, appropriate subclasses for pumps, per se.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclasses, for
    rotary expansible chamber devices, per se.


CLS 239/332
TXT Apparatus under subclass 331 having a motion imparting means or prime mover
    to operate the pump.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 333+ for motor operated discharge assistants.


CLS 239/333
TXT Apparatus under subclass 331 in which the pump or impelling means is
    removable from the material receptacle by reason of a separable means
    connecting the pump to the said receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 383.1+ and 401+ for container mounted pumps
    and pulsators.


CLS 239/334
TXT Apparatus under subclass 331 having means providing for the inlet of
    material from the container to the discharge means from at least two spaced
    points or by way of a single inlet pipe which may move within the container
    due to flexibility or joints.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    342,    for aspirating type sprayers having plural point inlet to the
    eduction tube.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 376 for dispensers having plural point inlet
    to discharge casing.


CLS 239/335
TXT Apparatus under subclass 302 having means for separately commingling three
    or more fluids one of which may be ambient air (not a mere vent to a supply
    container); however only one holder need be claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    303+,   for plural supply holders for diverse materials.


CLS 239/336
TXT Apparatus under subclass 335 in which one of the fluids is a fluent solid
    handled in a fluid-like manner before or during discharge.

    (1)     Note.  For original classification in this class, the fluent solid
    must be a slurry or at least wetted by a liquid before or during discharge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 1+ for mortar mixers, and see section III (e)
    of the class definition of this (239) class for a statement of the line
    between classes.


CLS 239/337
TXT Apparatus under subclass 302 in which discharge of the material is by (1) a
    nonsolid pressure means acting directly on the material, or (2) a pressure
    drop effected between the material in the eduction tube in the receptacle
    and the receptacle outlet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310+,   for holders for material to be mixed, dissolved or entrained in a
    flowing liquid stream.

    573,    for the valve means in a fluid to gas expansion effecting means in
    aerosol type sprayers.


CLS 239/338
TXT Apparatus under subclass 337 in which there is a pressure discharge means
    within the material receptacle and an egress opening from the receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  The majority of the patents in this subclass are commonly
    known as "nebulizers" and include a redirecting or deflecting surface
    against which the atomized fluid is discharged in order to prevent
    particles of larger than a desired size from passing out through the egress
    opening.  The redirecting or deflecting surface may be the receptacle walls.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370+,   for other nebulizers having a baffle, diffuser or separator and
    means combining flow paths upstream of the outlet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    184,    Lubrication, subclasses 55.1+ especially 55.2 for apparatus for
    adding a lubricant to fluid (usually air) comprising a receptacle to
    contain the lubricant and an aspirating or injecting nozzle to mix the
    lubricant and the fluid.


CLS 239/339
TXT Apparatus under subclass 337 in which there is a gas path which extends
    through the material in the receptacle and which has a flow opening therein
    for the material to enter from the receptacle and be mixed with the gas for
    discharge through the egress opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    372,    for sprayers having a gas passage from the receptacle space through
    the fluid outlet means.


CLS 239/340
TXT Apparatus under subclass 337 provided with means whereby a drop in pressure
    is produced at the outlet of the receptacle whereby the material is
    aspirated or sucked into the pressure fluid medium or carrier fluid.

    (1)     Note.  The holder outlet is here interpreted to be the point at
    which material enters the carrier stream, usually at the eduction tube
    terminous even though remotely positioned relative the holder proper.


CLS 239/341
TXT Apparatus under subclass 340 provided with means whereby the physical
    relationship between the gas and liquid streams may be adjusted to vary the
    point or angle of intersection or the spacing between the two streams.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    416     and 417, for relatively movable concentric flow paths which effect
    valving in a mixing arrangement of plural fluids.


CLS 239/342
TXT Apparatus under subclass 340 provided with means whereby the liquid outlet
    tube is at all times submerged within the liquid for all positions of the
    device as by (1) an auxiliary collecting chamber for the liquid, (2) a
    pivoted or swivel connection between sections of the liquid outlet tube,
    (3) by a plurality of openings into the liquid outlet tube, or (4) a
    flexible liquid outlet tube which always dips into the liquid supply.

    (1)     Note.  The difference between this subclass and subclass 350 is if
    the trap chamber is arranged to provide an all position spray device
    (nonattitude affected) by trapping a quantity of liquid around the inlet to
    the eduction tube and spraying occurs in a position which would not
    normally occur in the absence of the trap chamber, then the patent is in
    subclass 342.  If the aspiration can only occur by first filling a chamber
    with the liquid by movement of the receptacle to other than normal spray
    position and thereafter returning it to normal spray position whereby all
    of the trapped liquid is discharged, classification is in subclass 350.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 376 for supply containers with liquid pumps
    having similar inlet arrangement to the pump casing.


CLS 239/343
TXT Apparatus under subclass 340 in which the discharge line is provided with
    circuitous paths of small dimension or an obstruction to cause frothing or
    foaming of the material to thereby project suds or foam to the ambient air.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    311,    for dissolvers for sprayers having gas addition upstream of the
    nozzle outlet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 190 for dispensers having material treating
    means and subclass 195 for gas agitation which include gas and liquid
    contact.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for gas
    and liquid contact devices.


CLS 239/344
TXT Apparatus under subclass 340 in which the liquid outlet tube is constructed
    and arranged to alter the type of liquid flow between sections thereof as
    by varying the diameter, direction, quantity, velocity, etc.

    (1)     Note.  A mere valve in the eduction tube is not considered a
    modification for purposes of this subclass.


CLS 239/345
TXT Apparatus under subclass 340 in which material discharges from the
    receptacle only when tilted to thereby position the material outlet where
    it can flow to the reducer in the absence of a liquid eduction tube dipping
    into the material.


CLS 239/346
TXT Apparatus under subclass 340 in which means are provided for connecting the
    pressure gas source conduit to the holder.

    (1)     Note.  The gas supply conduit need not be claimed if the claims
    include modified holder detail to receive the conduit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    307     and 308, for carrier gas supply holders.


CLS 239/347
TXT Apparatus under subclass 340 provided with means to bypass or exhaust the
    pressure fluid to the atmosphere to prevent relative increase of discharge
    pressure on the liquid in the receptacle.


CLS 239/348
TXT Apparatus under subclass 347 in which the pressure fluid in the supply line
    is vented to stop or regulate flow of the liquid from the holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    311     and 335+, for the addition of air in a mixing arrangement.

    373,    for means pressurizing the contents of a holder for discharge.


CLS 239/349
TXT Apparatus under subclass 340 in which there is a connection between a pump
    part and a closing or regulating means for one or more of the conduits in
    the spray device such that movement of said pump part controls the passage
    or escape of liquid from the holder.

    (1)     Note.  This is the collecting place for those devices in which a
    latch or lock for the pump is combined with a valve for the eduction tube
    or a closure means.  For the valved eduction tube or closure means, per se,
    see subclass 354, and for the pump latch alone see subclass 359.

    (2)     Note.  Most of the patents herein are also of the telescoping
    holder or casing type, which, per se, are found in subclass 357.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    354,    357 and 359, and see (1) Note and (2) Note above.


CLS 239/350
TXT Apparatus under subclass 340 in which there is a supplemental chamber
    associated with the liquid receptacle, which is preliminarily filled with
    the liquid before discharge can be effected and which serves as means to
    trap a given quantity of fluid.

    (1)     Note.  For the line between this subclass and subclass 342, see (1)
    Note in subclass 342.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71+,    for sprayers having indicators, meters, gauges and the like for
    performing a measuring function.

    342,    for devices having a trap chamber which provide a continuous supply
    to the liquid outlet tube and see (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 424.5+ for a dispenser comprising a supply
    container and a trap chamber.


CLS 239/351
TXT Apparatus under subclass 340 in which there is a motion imparting means for
    operating a gas pump associated with the liquid receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  For the broad relationship between the receptacle and the
    motor operated gas pump, this subclass must be searched.  For the specific
    relationship between any gas pump (hand operated) and the various liquid,
    gas and vent conduits, subclasses 355+ must be searched.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    355+,   and see (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, appropriate subclasses for gas pumps, per se.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, for rotary expansible chamber
    pumps, per se.


CLS 239/352
TXT Apparatus under subclass 340 provided with means whereby the liquid in the
    receptacle is maintained at the proper level for discharge.


CLS 239/353
TXT Apparatus under subclass 340 including a single actuator for simultaneously
    controlling fluid flow through at least two conduits or passageways.

    (1)     Note.  The passageways or conduits simultaneously controlled must
    include two of the five usual passageways or conduits, i.e., the receptacle
    atmospheric vent, the gas conduit, the liquid eduction tube, the egress
    opening and the conduit applying pressure to the receptacle above the
    liquid level.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    414+,   for spray devices, not claiming a liquid receptacle, and including
    plural valves actuated by a common operator.

    527+,   for spray devices including a handle or handgrip for the flow line
    or nozzle and including a common operator for a plurality of valves.


CLS 239/354
TXT Apparatus under subclass 340 in which there is either (1) a flow modifying
    or regulating means associated with the liquid outlet tube, or (2) a valve
    or other closure means to prevent passage of liquid through the egress
    opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    349,    for an interconnected pump means and conduit closure or valve.


CLS 239/355
TXT Apparatus under subclass 340 in which the liquid receptacle carries or
    mounts a gas pump thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    351,    for the broad relationship between a liquid receptacle and a motor
    operated gas pump and see (1) Note in that subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 401+ for dispensers having a container
    mounted fluid pressure pump.


CLS 239/356
TXT Apparatus under subclass 355 in which the gas pump has a resilient wall and
    surrounds the receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 206+ for resilient wall dispensers.


CLS 239/357
TXT Apparatus under subclass 355 in which the liquid receptacle is arranged to
    slide into a casing (1) for storage purposes, or (2) to act as part of the
    air pump in cooperation with the casing.

    (1)     Note.  The sliding or telescoping relation may exist between parts
    of the holder, or parts of the casing or between the casing and holder.


CLS 239/358
TXT Apparatus under subclass 355 having a plurality of outlets from the the
    pressure reducer, and all capable of permitting discharge simultaneously.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    548+,   pertinent subclasses, for terminal members having a plurality or
    multiplicity of egress openings.


CLS 239/359
TXT Apparatus under subclass 355 having means for retaining or latching the
    pump or pump plunger in fixed position when desired.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 384 and 402 for pump piston or pulsator
    holding means in a similar container-pump relationship.


CLS 239/360
TXT Apparatus under subclass 355 in which the pump housing is mounted within
    the receptacle.


CLS 239/361
TXT Apparatus under subclass 355 in which the liquid eduction tube is integral
    with or operatively connected with the gas pump so that they may be
    simultaneously secured to the holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    367,    for other unitary mountings of the pressure fluid inlet tube and
    liquid outlet tube.


CLS 239/362
TXT Apparatus under subclass 361 in which the pump for the gas comprises one or
    more walls of a readily deformable material which return to their original
    position when the force to deform is removed.


CLS 239/363
TXT Apparatus under subclass 355 in which the pump for the gas comprises one or
    more walls of readily deformable material which return to their original
    position when the force to deform is removed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    356     and 362, for other flexible wall gas pumps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 206+ for resilient wall dispensers.


CLS 239/364
TXT Apparatus under subclass 340 having means for simultaneously passing a
    pressure fluid from without the receptacle to the gas space above the
    liquid in the receptacle and to the pressure reducer at the outlet of the
    receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  The pressure path to the receptacle is primarily for the
    purpose of relieving the vacuum which would occur therein if the container
    were hermetically sealed and liquid were siphoned or aspirated therefrom.
    The pressure on the liquid also inherently acts to force the liquid through
    the liquid outlet tube to the pressure reducer.


CLS 239/365
TXT Apparatus under subclass 364 in which the flow path of the pressure fluid
    to the container has a distinct connection from the flow path to the
    pressure reducer such that not all the pressure fluid passes into or
    through the container.


CLS 239/366
TXT Apparatus under subclass 365 in which the egress opening is positioned
    downstream of the point at which the gas and liquid streams meet and mix.


CLS 239/367
TXT Apparatus under subclass 365 in which the liquid eduction tube is supported
    by or unitarily held by the means which includes the pressure fluid inlet
    such that these elements are simultaneously secured to a supply container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    361+,   for other devices having the pressure fluid inlet and liquid outlet
    (eduction tube) unitarily mounted.


CLS 239/368
TXT Apparatus under subclass 364 in which the egress opening is positioned
    downstream of the point at which the liquid and gas streams meet and mix.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    369,    for similar devices not having pressure flow to the container.

    398+,   appropriate subclasses, for other devices, not including a
    receptacle for the spray material, and in which the fluids mix upstream of
    the egress opening.


CLS 239/369
TXT Apparatus under subclass 340 in which the egress opening is positioned
    downstream of the point at which the liquid and the gas streams meet and
    mix.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    366     and 368, for other devices in which the air and liquid flow paths
    combined upstream of the outlet and also have parallel gas flows to the
    holder and to the pressure reducer.

    398+,   appropriate subclasses, for other devices not including a
    receptacle for the material, and in which the fluids mix upstream of the
    spray outlet.


CLS 239/370
TXT Apparatus under subclass 369 so arranged as to direct the mixed fluids
    against a solid surface to provide for separation of the larger from the
    smaller particles and wherein the larger sized particles are kept from
    passing out of the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    338,    for devices in which the aspirator or atomizer is positioned within
    the receptacle and arranged to discharge the mixed fluids against the wall
    thereof for effecting separation of particles.


CLS 239/371
TXT Apparatus under subclass 369 in which the flow path for one of the fluids
    comprises a conduit coaxial with and surrounding the conduit for the other
    fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    398,    423+ and 434.5, for other devices in which the flow paths for the
    two fluids are concentrically arranged for mixing.


CLS 239/372
TXT Apparatus under subclass 337 in which there is provided a flow path for gas
    from the space above the fluid level in the receptacle to the egress
    opening.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is limited to those patents in which the
    liquid eduction tube has a port therein opening into the gas space within
    the receptacle.  Those patents where the gas passage enters the liquid tube
    at some place outside the receptacle will be found in the preceding
    subclasses particularly subclasses 364+.


CLS 239/373
TXT Apparatus under subclass 337 provided with means to increase the pressure
    above the fluid in the receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass requires some additional means to add pressure
    to the material in the receptacle.  The usual "aerosol" can in which the
    material is already under super atmospheric pressure will be found in
    subclasses 337 and 372 of this class and the valves therefor in subclass
    573.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158,    for devices in which there is a gas pump which discharges above the
    liquid in a container to force the liquid therefrom with, however, a
    vehicular support therefor.

    364+,   for devices having a pressure reducer in which means are provided
    for applying a pressure fluid to the top of a fluid in a receptacle.


CLS 239/374
TXT Apparatus under subclass 302 in which the receptacle is supported and moved
    by the operator's hand to cause material to be sprinkled or discharged.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102.1+, for spray means including means to vibrate or jiggle discharge.

    140+,   for means movably mounting the supply for discharging contents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for dispensers of granular
    material, and see sections 12 and 12.5 of the class definition of that
    class for the locus of analogous structures.


CLS 239/375
TXT Apparatus under subclass 302 in which the receptacle for the spray fluid is
    provided with a member forming an egress outlet and a grip for manipulating
    the receptacle and outlet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280+,   for pole type ground support means.

    347+,   for devices including a holder in which the flow controller vents
    pressure fluid to atmosphere to terminate flow of the spray fluid.

    525+,   for other devices having handles and related flow controllers.

    532,    for spray pole type hand carried or supported nozzle means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 110+ for handles for closures,
    receptacles and the like there classified.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 465+ and 470+ for container handle and
    handgrips there classified.


CLS 239/376
TXT Apparatus under subclass 375 in which the fluid is discharged by its own
    weight or tendency to leave the receptacle without affirmative displacement
    thereof.

    (1)     Note.  With respect of "gravity flow" out of a receptacle and
    beyond through a discharge guide and nozzle, the mere naming of a rose,
    shower head and the like by claim which conveys the idea of multiple
    streams or outlet pattern is sufficient for this class and is not read as a
    nozzle by name only for Class 222.


CLS 239/377
TXT Apparatus under subclass 376 in which the receptacle must be turned on its
    side or inverted to permit discharge of the fluid therefrom by overflowing
    or flowing through the receptacle wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    345,    for similar discharge arrangements combined with a pressure reducer
    at the receptacle outlet.


CLS 239/378
TXT Apparatus under subclass 376 also provided with a flow modifier or
    regulator for the spray fluid and arranged to be adjacent the handle so as
    to be manipulated by the hand holding the receptacle.


CLS 239/379
TXT Apparatus under subclass 302 in which the fluid receptacle is open to
    atmospheric pressure to enable the fluid therein to flow out under the
    influence of gravity only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77+,    for orchard type sprayers in which liquid is sprayed into a gaseous
    conveying current.

    314,    for those devices in which liquid is the conveying fluid.

    345,    for other gravity discharge arrangements combined with a pressure
    reducer at the receptacle outlet.

    377,    for similar gravity discharge arrangements combined with a handle
    for the receptacle.


CLS 239/380
TXT Apparatus under class definition having some means to change the character
    of the fluid being discharged as to direction and/or density of stream and
    which means is (1) mounted or supported for continuous movement with
    respect to the flowing stream, and (2) caused to move either by the flowing
    fluid or by some motion transmitting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    214+,   for fluid spraying apparatus comprising a moving slinger or
    splasher, or a deflector which rotates relative to an effluent stream, the
    motion being caused by a motor or by impingement of the fluid.

    225.1+, for a distributor which moves continuously and also relatively to a
    base or support therefor, said distributor including a modified or an
    unmodified outlet.


CLS 239/381
TXT Apparatus under subclass 380 in which the discharge modifier derives its
    motion from the energy in the flowing spray fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225.1+, appropriate subclasses, for distributors, e.g., nozzles, spray
    heads, and terminal member arrangements, having continuous movement
    relative a supporting base during spraying and being spray fluid operated.


CLS 239/382
TXT Apparatus under subclass 381 in which the modifier is a nonrotating member
    positioned beyond the egress port for redirecting or dispersing the
    effluent or is a member in or upstream of the egress port of imparting spin
    or rotation to the fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222.11  through 224, for a rotating member (i.e., deflector) positioned
    beyond the egress port for redirecting or dispersing the effluent.

    461+,   for flow deflecting and rotation controlling means fixed with
    respect to a flow line or discharging means.


CLS 239/383
TXT Apparatus under subclass 382 in which the modifier is a rotating means
    upstream of the egress port for imparting spin or rotation to the fluid.


CLS 239/389
TXT Apparatus under subclass 382 in which the modifier has swinging or
    oscillating motion about an axis which is positioned at right angles to the
    general direction of flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    503     and 505+, for deflectors movable into and out of deflecting
    position.


CLS 239/390
TXT Apparatus under class definition provided with two or more different parts
    admitting of substitution one for the other, such parts being effective to
    (1) change a discharge characteristic either by the rearrangement of outlet
    parts, substituting one outlet for another, or substituting one flow
    deflecting or rotation controlling means for another, or (2) permit
    multiple ways for attaching or securing the flow line.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in these subclasses, there is required a
    change, rearrangement or substitution of parts, not a mere selection by
    flow diversion or control as by valving and wherein only one of the
    possible arrangements is available at one time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    436+,   for selectively usable or variable diverse terminal outlets and not
    involving a rearrangement of parts.


CLS 239/391
TXT Apparatus under subclass 390 in which a discharge characteristic of the
    effluent is changed by the rearrangement of outlet parts or by the
    substitution of outlet means, one for another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    289,    for means effecting conversion from one type of device to one
    having a different mode of operation, e.g., aspirating to displacement.

    436+,   for selectively usable or variable diverse terminal outlets which
    are available without rearrangement of parts.

    562+,   for unitary plural outlet means with flow regulation or control of
    selective ones or all outlets, the outlets always being available without
    rearrangement of terminal parts.


CLS 239/392
TXT Apparatus under subclass 391 having means to substitute one outlet for
    another comprising a member having a plurality of egress ports mounted for
    movement to selected ones thereof with respect to the flow line, only one
    being available for use as the egress port at a time.


CLS 239/393
TXT Apparatus under subclass 392 in which the egress port carrying member is
    mounted to rotate on an axis which is at right angles to the general
    direction of flow.


CLS 239/394
TXT Apparatus under subclass 392 in which the egress port carrying member is
    mounted to rotate on an axis which is generally in line with the direction
    of flow.


CLS 239/395
TXT Apparatus under subclass 392 in which the egress port carrying member is
    mounted to move back and forth generally across or at right angles to the
    direction of flow.


CLS 239/396
TXT Apparatus under subclass 390 having selectively arrangeable or
    interchangeable means in the flow path upstream of the egress port to alter
    the characteristic of the discharged fluid.


CLS 239/397
TXT Apparatus under subclass 390 having means whereby the egress port
    containing member is capable of being connected to the source in various
    ways, only one such way being available for use at a time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    442,    for selectively usable terminal outlets involving a choice of
    available coupling means and associated outlet means combined in one
    structure.


CLS 239/397.5
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the distributor comprises (1)
    materials which have different coefficients of thermal expansion, (2) a
    connecting means between two parts which will expand and contract in such a
    manner as to prevent distortion of the distributor or part thereof on
    temperature variation, or (3) material which resists heat transfer
    therethrough.


CLS 239/398
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means for plural fluids to
    commingle upstream of, downstream of, or at the terminus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8+,     for a method of distributing fluid including mixing with air, gas
    or steam.

    77+,    for fluid sprayed into a gaseous conveying current.

    137+,   for plural fluid supply means for mixing or entraining involving a
    heating means.

    265.17, for a reaction motor discharge nozzle having means to add a
    secondary fluid to the main discharge stream upstream of the nozzle outlet.

    290+,   for apparatus involving supplemental gas shaping or shielding jets.

    302+,   appropriate subclasses for supply holding or containing means which
    additionally involve the combining of several fluids for purposes of
    blending, dissolving, or entraining one in another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 181+ for means dispersing plural fluids into
    a furnace through a single wall opening and having a specific relationship
    to the furnace; and subclasses 354+ for a combined mixer and flame holder
    providing an unmodified flow of fuel and oxidizer to the flame.


CLS 239/399
TXT Apparatus under subclass 398 having a means for imparting a spin or
    swirling motion to the fluid in the flow path prior to reaching the point
    of discharge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    214.21+, for means inducing spin or whirl of any fluid stream in a system
    in which one fluid is mixed with another fluid downstream of a continuously
    moving distributor which has discharged one of said fluids.

    380+,   for spray apparatus having a continuously moving means in the flow
    conduit for causing spin or whirl of the fluid stream.

    463+,   for fluid rotation inducing means, per se, in a flow line or at the
    point of discharge.


CLS 239/400
TXT Apparatus under subclass 399 including means for separately supplying three
    or more fluids one of which may be ambient air.


CLS 239/401
TXT Apparatus under subclass 399 having a hollow valve stem defining a flow
    path for one of the fluids and which has movement generally in the
    direction of its length to control the amount of flow through one or more
    of the paths.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    416     and 417, for valving means for mixing of plural fluids defined by
    relatively movable concentric flow paths.


CLS 239/402
TXT Apparatus under subclass 399 having two or more spin or rotation imparting
    devices arranged so that one is upstream of the other whereby one fluid is
    serially affected or else unmingled fluid and then mingled fluids are
    serially affected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404,    for discrete whirler means for each fluid.

    427,    for serially arranged mixing or expansion chambers upstream of the
    egress port.

    466,    for serially arranged whirlers for a single fluid.


CLS 239/402.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 399 comprising means to selectively move or shift
    the fluid spin or swirl imparting means to a plurality of different
    positions or attitudes relative to the fluid flow path, or to selectively
    guide the fluid through any of a plurality of distinct spin or swirl
    imparting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    431,    Combustion, subclass 184 for a means dispensing plural feeds into a
    combustion chamber through a single furnace opening that includes
    adjustable feed spiraling means.


CLS 239/403
TXT Apparatus under subclass 399 wherein the rotation is imparted to fluid
    upstream of or at the point where a second fluid is commingled therewith.


CLS 239/404
TXT Apparatus under subclass 403 wherein each fluid has a means effective only
    for imparting rotation thereto.


CLS 239/405
TXT Apparatus under subclass 403 in which the outermost fluid of the
    concentrically arranged fluid flow paths is rotated.


CLS 239/406
TXT Apparatus under subclass 405 in which commingling takes place either at or
    beyond the terminal member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    418+,   for combining of separately supplied streams at or downstream of
    the terminus.


CLS 239/407
TXT Apparatus under subclass 398 having flow controlling means effective to
    influence the fluid stream(s) for commingling thereof.


CLS 239/408
TXT Apparatus under subclass 407 in which the control means is a valve situated
    proximate the egress port of an injector type discharge nozzle.

    (1)     Note.  See the definitions of terms for the meaning of injector
    type discharge nozzle.


CLS 239/409
TXT Apparatus under subclass 408 having a means close to the egress port of the
    injector for retaining some of the liquid between periods of discharge to
    the chamber.

    (1)     Note.  The principal object here is to have a ready supply of
    liquid close to the outlet so that with the first movement of air, some
    liquid will be immediately entrained or carried to discharge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88+,    for unitary injection nozzles with pump or accumulator plunger.

    106+,   for nozzle cleaners, flushers or drainers, particularly subclass
    119 for return or reverse flow from outlet means.

    124+,   for system fluid relief or return to supply.


CLS 239/410
TXT Apparatus under subclass 408 in which the flow controlling means is
    sensitive to differences of the pressure of one or both the fluids to be
    discharged or a mixture of such fluids.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87,     for injection nozzles with plunger or valve controlled by pressure
    beyond the nozzle outlet.

    533+,   for fluid pressure responsive discharge modifier or flow regulator.


CLS 239/411
TXT Apparatus under subclass 410 in which the fluid controlling the valve is a
    nonliquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87,     for compression pressure operated plungers or valves for injection
    nozzles.

    526,    for liquid control valve means actuated by gas flow with a pistol
    type handgrip.


CLS 239/412
TXT Apparatus under subclass 407 in which the flow controlling means is
    actuated by a mechanical motion imparting means or by the force exerted by
    a fluid medium.

    (1)     Note.  This definition does not include mere check valves, i.e.,
    line flow actuated valves which become operative at the mere flow of fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    410+,   for fluid pressure operated terminal ejection valves.


CLS 239/413
TXT Apparatus under subclass 407 having plural fluids, each differing from the
    other in some essential characteristic, (e.g., composition, pressure,
    temperature), and means to control each of the fluids.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    526+,   for pistol grip type handle means having valving means for diverse
    fluids.


CLS 239/414
TXT Apparatus under subclass 413 in which the plural controlling means (1) are
    operated by a single member or (2) comprise a single member having a
    control portion for each fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    527+,   for a single trigger means in a pistol type handgrip for
    controlling plural valves.


CLS 239/415
TXT Apparatus under subclass 414 in which the flow controlling means are
    serially operative for each full movement of the member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    528,    for similar subject matter with a pistol type handgrip arrangement.


CLS 239/416
TXT Apparatus under subclass 413 having flow lines coaxially arranged, one
    surrounding the other, movement of the flow line means, one with respect to
    the other controlling each of the fluids.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    214.19, for relatively axially movable concentric flow paths for
    controlling the flow of one or more of a plurality of separate fluid
    streams for commingling thereof, at least one of said concentric flow paths
    rotating continuously around the flow axis.


CLS 239/416.1
TXT Apparatus under subclass 413 comprising means to control each of at least
    three of said different fluids.


CLS 239/416.2
TXT Apparatus under subclass 413 comprising a plurality of separate and
    distinct flow control means acting on the same fluid.


CLS 239/416.3
TXT Apparatus under subclass 416.2 in which the said same fluid flows in a
    plurality of branched flow paths joined to a single flow path and there is
    a flow control means in each said branched path.


CLS 239/416.4
TXT Apparatus under subclass 413 comprising flow lines which are coaxially
    arranged with one surrounding the other, the means controlling fluid flow
    through at least one of the lines.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    416,    for concentric flow paths, relative movement between which affects
    valving, there being a valving means for each of diverse fluids.


CLS 239/416.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 407 comprising a plurality of coaxially arranged
    flow lines with one surrounding the other and means for controlling flow
    through one of the lines.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    416.4,  for apparatus comprising a control means for each of a plurality of
    different fluids, at least one of the control means comprising flow lines
    which are coaxially arranged, one surrounding the other and the member
    controlling fluid flow being in one of the lines.


CLS 239/417
TXT Apparatus under subclass 416.5 in which relative movement between the
    coaxially arranged flow lines controls fluid flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    214.19, for relatively axially movable concentric flow paths for
    controlling the flow of one or more of a plurality of separate fluid
    streams for commingling thereof, at least one of said concentric flow paths
    rotating continuously around the flow axis.

    416,    for similarly arranged flow lines, however, where valving means are
    included for each of diverse fluids.


CLS 239/417.3
TXT Apparatus under subclass 416.5 including means to control the flow of fluid
    through the innermost fluid line.


CLS 239/417.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 407 comprising a plurality of separate and
    distinct flow lines for different fluids, one for each fluid, and means for
    controlling flow in one of the lines.


CLS 239/418
TXT Apparatus under subclass 398 in which the mixing or mingling of the fluids
    takes place either at the discharge outlet or downstream thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127.3,  for a reaction motor discharge nozzle having a cavity or jacket
    through which a cooling fluid is passed before mixing with the main fluid
    stream at or downstream of the outlet.

    265.23, for a reaction motor nozzle having means for adding an auxiliary
    fluid to the main fluid stream subsequent to discharge through the outlet
    for deflecting the main jet.


CLS 239/419
TXT Apparatus under subclass 418 in which some mingling of the separately
    supplied fluids takes place upstream of the mixing which takes place beyond
    or at the outlet means.


CLS 239/419.3
TXT Apparatus under subclass 419 comprising three dissimilar or different
    fluids, two of which are mingled upstream of the mixing with the third
    beyond or at the outlet means.

    (1)     Note.  The fluids must be substantially different in character; two
    streams of the same fluid differing from each other only in temperature or
    pressure do not qualify under this definition.


CLS 239/419.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 419 in which one of the separately supplied fluids
    is ambient air which is aspirated into the system.


CLS 239/420
TXT Apparatus under subclass 418 having means for selectively adjusting the
    point at which the fluid streams intersect beyond the terminal member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    543+,   for apparatus causing one fluid stream to impinge upon another
    branch of the same fluid.


CLS 239/421
TXT Apparatus under subclass 418 in which the separate flow paths are in end
    abutting relation to each other and have a common longitudinal axis, the
    outlets of the respective flow lines being either of ring form or arranged
    near the perimeter of the end wall or flow conductor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    545,    for directly opposed outlets effecting impingement of one fluid
    stream upon a branch of the same fluid.


CLS 239/422
TXT Apparatus under subclass 418 having means to bring three or more separately
    conducted streams together for mixing.

    (1)     Note.  Separate sources need not necessarily be disclosed if at
    least there are sufficient flow lines shown which would be capable of
    handling fluids from three sources.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    428,    for the subject matter of this subclass upstream of the outlet.


CLS 239/423
TXT Apparatus under subclass 418 in which the separately supplied streams have
    a single axis of confluence such that one flow path surrounds the other or
    in which the axes of flow are substantially parallel such that the flow
    conduits are substantially adjoined and contiguous.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    398     and 434.5, for concentric or concurrent flow to other fluid path
    upstream of the terminal element.


CLS 239/424
TXT Apparatus under subclass 423 in which the flow path of one fluid surrounds
    the other at the egress outlet means.

    (1)     Note.  A device in which one fluid is divided among a plurality of
    passages in the terminal element is included under this definition.


CLS 239/424.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 424 in which there are a plurality of passages for
    introducing one of said fluids to another of said fluids at or beyond the
    egress outlet means.


CLS 239/425
TXT Apparatus under subclass 424.5 in which the plurality of passages introduce
    the inner fluid to the outer fluid at or beyond the egress outlet means.


CLS 239/425.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 424.5 in which the outer fluid comprises the
    plurality of passages and the inner fluid is ambient air which is induced
    into the inner flow path by the outer fluid.


CLS 239/426
TXT Apparatus under subclass 418 in which the separate flow paths come together
    at approximately 90 degrees to form the terminal element arrangement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    434,    for laterally spaced fluid paths meeting at right angles upstream
    of the outlet.


CLS 239/427
TXT Apparatus under subclass 398 having two or more areas spaced along the flow
    paths where fluids are mingled such that either (1) two or more fluids are
    mixed together at different points, or (2) the previously mixed fluids are
    further mixed.


CLS 239/427.3
TXT Apparatus under subclass 427 in which the areas are spaced along a flow
    path and a fluid is added to the fluid in said flow path at each area.


CLS 239/427.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 427.3 comprising three fluids separately supplied
    to the apparatus each of which differs from the others in some essential
    characteristic such as state, pressure, temperature, composition, etc.


CLS 239/428
TXT Apparatus under subclass 398 having means to bring three or more separately
    conducted streams together for mixing.

    (1)     Note.  Separate sources need not necessarily be disclosed if at
    least there are sufficient flow lines shown which would be capable of
    handling fluids from three sources.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    422,    for combining of three or more streams at or beyond the terminal
    outlet.


CLS 239/428.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 398 comprising a fluid path connected to a source
    of liquid and an opening exposed to ambient air, the liquid, passing
    through the apparatus, causing a lowered pressure and aspirating ambient
    air through the opening into the flowing liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 76 and 78.1 for a device in which a flowing liquid
    stream aspirates ambient air, combined with a baffle, screen or other
    device to mix the gas and liquid, and see section III of the class
    definition of Class 239, Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, under
    Search Class, for the line between the two classes.


CLS 239/429
TXT Apparatus under subclass 398 having a plurality of passages from one stream
    to the other for mixing.


CLS 239/430
TXT Apparatus under subclass 429 in which there are at least three paths of
    confluence, i.e., where one passage flows into the other stream.


CLS 239/431
TXT Apparatus under subclass 430 in which each of the paths of confluence
    includes a portion in the side wall of the conduit so that one fluid enters
    the other substantially at right angles to the general direction of flow in
    the stream entered.


CLS 239/432
TXT Apparatus under subclass 398 having an area of juncture of the streams
    upstream of the outlet means which is further provided with a means in the
    form of a flat member or other type of turbulence effecting member to bring
    about more intimate mixing of the streams.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 115+ for
    subscombinations of this subject matter not including particular outlet
    means to disperse the gas and liquid mixture into the atmosphere.


CLS 239/433
TXT Apparatus under subclass 398 in which the flow paths for the plural fluids
    have an angular relationship at their point of intersection.


CLS 239/434
TXT Apparatus under subclass 433 wherein the angle at the junction is
    approximately 90 degrees.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    426,    for similar subject matter at or defining the terminal arrangement.


CLS 239/434.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 433 in which both paths have a common center, the
    outermost wall varying in diameter along its longitudinal extent, the fluid
    in the inner path discharging into the outer in the zone of varying
    diameter.


CLS 239/435
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a flow regulator and a
    chamber to trap part of the fluid, such chamber provided with an egress
    port and a moving means to decrease the volume thereof to force the trapped
    fluid through the port.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    445,    for selectively usable high or low velocity draft cocks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 251+ for a dispenser having a discharge
    assistant and see section III, of the class definition of Class 239, Search
    Class Note to Class 222 for a statement of the line.


CLS 239/436
TXT Apparatus under class definition having two or more different (difference
    of kind) egress means for a single fluid which are either (1) selective as
    to use, i.e., one discharging-one idle, or (2) in the absence of
    selectivity one at least being changeable as to discharge of flow
    regulation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    265.27, for a reaction motor discharge nozzle comprising diversely shaped
    or oriented outlets and means to select the outlet for discharge of the
    fluid stream.

    312,    for apparatus comprising diverse outlets selectively usable for
    mixed and unmixed fluids respectively.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 481+ for a dispenser having plural outlets
    with flow control means.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclass 136, wherein the
    implement includes means, under control of the user, for directing flow of
    material to the tool or, optionally, for dispensing the material directly
    to the work surface.


CLS 239/437
TXT Apparatus under subclass 436 in which an egress means is formed by at least
    two members arranged for movement, one with respect to the other, the
    separation or displacement therebetween, resulting from such movement,
    defining the configuration of the outlet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    451+,   and see (1) Note of that subclass.


CLS 239/438
TXT Apparatus under subclass 437 in which one of the relatively movable parts
    is constrained to move in the general direction of the longitudinal axis of
    the terminal member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    265.31, for a reaction motor discharge nozzle comprising means to select
    one of diversely shaped or directed outlets for discharge of the fluid
    stream, one outlet formed between members arranged for relative axial
    motion.

    456+,   for axially movable outlet components in other terminal outlet
    arrangements formed by parts having relative movement.


CLS 239/439
TXT Apparatus under subclass 438 in which the outlet forming member is also
    effective to redisperse or redirect the effluent as it passes out of the
    terminal port.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    453+,   for similar subject matter wherein the flow modifier is fluid
    pressure responsive.


CLS 239/440
TXT Apparatus under subclass 439 in which the diverse terminal outlets are
    concentrically arranged, e.g., have an axial line of centers, and are in
    the form of rings.


CLS 239/441
TXT Apparatus under subclass 439 in which the diverse terminal outlets have an
    axial line of centers and in which one outlet is of ring form.


CLS 239/442
TXT Apparatus under subclass 436 wherein each of two or more outlet paths has
    its own fluid coupling to supply associated therewith and thus the
    discharge path depends upon the selected coupling in use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    397,    for interchangeable outlet arrangements having selective coupling
    means permitting such interchangeability.


CLS 239/443
TXT Apparatus under subclass 436 provided with valving means to control flow to
    or through one of the outlet means.


CLS 239/444
TXT Apparatus under subclass 443 having a valving means effective to control
    flow to each of the several diverse terminal outlet means.


CLS 239/445
TXT Apparatus under subclass 444 including a spigot type dispensing arrangement
    (draft cock) having a high velocity and a low velocity discharge path
    selectively usable.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass comprises an art collection of beverage cocks.

    (2)     Note.  Where concentric discharge tubes exist for this subclass it
    is not necessary that the inner tube extend to be coextensive with the
    outer tube if the discharge from the inner tube avoids the outer tube.


CLS 239/446
TXT Apparatus under subclass 444 wherein the flow controlling means is of
    unitary construction or if comprised of plural valving means, constrained
    to move together.

    (1)     Note.  A lost motion connection is not considered a rigid
    connection for this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    431,    Combustion, subclass 280 for a rigidly connected valving means
    controlling flow to diverse terminal outlets one of which is a pilot.


CLS 239/447
TXT Apparatus under subclass 446 wherein the flow controlling means is
    incapable of shutting off flow through all of the flow paths, i.e., at
    least one flow path is always open.


CLS 239/448
TXT Apparatus under subclass 446 wherein the terminal outlets are arranged to
    provide a flow path which discharges centrally of another flow path or
    other flow paths.


CLS 239/449
TXT Apparatus under subclass 448 wherein the other flow path terminates in a
    plurality of egress ports which are arranged around and radially outwardly
    of the central flow path.


CLS 239/450
TXT Apparatus under class definition which includes a plurality of tubular
    members extending side-by-side and connected together along their length,
    said tubular members being provided with spray outlet means.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are plural conduits formed by a partition
    subdividing a single conduit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    536,    for plural, substantially identical discrete terminal members
    arranged with respect to a common support means, but not extending
    side-by-side and joined along their lengths.

    553+,   for baffles disposed in a single conduit having plural outlets.


CLS 239/451
TXT Apparatus under class definition in which the outlet port is formed by at
    least two members or parts arranged for movement, one with respect to the
    other, the separation or displacement therebetween, resulting from such
    movement, defining the configuration of the outlet.

    (1)     Note.  Resilient terminal outlet forms and/or variable outlet
    shapes which are of nonarticulated form, i.e., those which permit movement
    only because of the inherent ability of the members to flex or distort are
    not classified in this group but are found in appropriate subclasses below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    437+,   for selective or variable diverse outlets one of which is formed by
    parts mounted for relative movement.


CLS 239/452
TXT Apparatus under subclass 451 in which the displacement or separation
    between members to define the terminal outlet and accordingly the
    characteristic flow of the fluid being discharged is sensitive to the
    pressure of the fluid in the line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    410+,   for a terminal injection valve operated by fluid pressure and
    including means to mix a plurality of fluids.

    533,    for fluid pressure responsive discharge modifiers or flow
    regulators.

    534,    for fluid pressure responsive discharge modifiers or flow
    regulators which are of resilient or deformable terminal outlet form and
    where parts are not articulated such that the inherent resiliency or spring
    form is relied upon for modification.


CLS 239/453
TXT Apparatus under subclass 452 in which the modifier has movement back and
    forth generally along the line of discharge of the fluid and in which the
    modifier abruptly changes the direction of flow at or beyond its outlet and
    which is additionally a closure when not performing the deflecting function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    384+,   for weight or spring biased closure type deflectors which in the
    deflecting position have continuous movement, usually rotary, and which in
    deflecting position do not materially affect the egress port.


CLS 239/454
TXT Apparatus under subclass 453 in which the closure-deflector is of gradual
    diminishing configuration and is weight biased to its seat.


CLS 239/455
TXT Apparatus under subclass 451 in which the outlet parts are constrained to
    move in a direction perpendicular to the general direction of the flowing
    stream to control the flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    546,    for means modifying a deformable terminal outlet of nonarticulated
    construction.

    602,    for resilient terminal elements.


CLS 239/456
TXT Apparatus under subclass 451 in which the relative motion of an outlet part
    is in the general direction of flow of the effluent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    265.31, for a reaction motor nozzle having selectively used diversely
    shaped or directed outlets, one of which is formed between members arranged
    for relative axial motion.

    438+,   for a distributor having selective or variable diverse outlets, one
    of which is formed by parts mounted for relative axial motion.


CLS 239/457
TXT Apparatus under subclass 456 having a fluid conducting part of a nozzle,
    which part is constrained to rotate and which by such motion causes the
    relative movement of the outlet parts.

    (1)     Note.  Under this definition, the fluid conducting part of the
    nozzle and the outlet part of the nozzle may be integrally or unitarily
    formed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    538,    for rotating terminal member and valve part of unitary
    configuration where the valve part is remote (upstream) from the egress
    port.

    579,    for a movable terminal flow member which controls a separate
    valving function.


CLS 239/458
TXT Apparatus under subclass 457 in which said fluid conducting part of a
    nozzle is radially outermost of a concentric arrangement and additionally
    moves in the general direction of its longitudinal axis while it rotates.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    539,    for a rotating and axially moving terminal member and valve part
    wherein the valve part is upstream of the egress port.


CLS 239/459
TXT Apparatus under subclass 456 having an axially movable terminal forming
    member within the flow conduit which is resiliently urged in one direction
    and which is constrained to reciprocate only.


CLS 239/460
TXT Apparatus under subclass 456 comprising a terminal outlet forming means of
    solid or plug-like form constrained for movement generally from within the
    flow line and having its outer surface or the interior surface of the flow
    line provided with ridges, slots, grooves or the like to substantially
    discharge effluent in a plurality of streams.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    457+,   for rotatable terminal members which are flow conducting or
    confining in function, i.e., of tubular form.


CLS 239/461
TXT Apparatus under class definition comprising means for (1) imparting a
    swirling or spinning (rotary or spiraling) motion to a flowing fluid in a
    fluid conductor prior to egress thereof, (2) smoothing out or quieting a
    turbulent or rotating flowing stream in a fluid conductor, or (3)
    redirecting and dispersing a flowing stream by some surface means
    positioned beyond the egress port or last point of fluid confinement and in
    a direct line therewith to accomplish an abrupt change in the direction of
    flow of the fluid.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus which is disclosed as a burner and which has a
    fluid redirecting or dispersing means disclosed as made of incandescent or
    radiant material to reignite a flame is excluded from Class 239 and will be
    found in Class 431, Combustion, if such redirecting or dispersing means is
    claimed, whether or not the flame is claimed; see (1) Note under subclass
    128 and section III of the class definition in reference to Class 431,
    Combustion.

    (2)     Note.  Included under this definition is a deflector device, per
    se, which is disclosed as attachable to the outlet end of a flow pipe to
    redirect or disperse the fluid impinging thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150,    for deflecting or dispersing means combined with vehicular means
    mounting a fluid supply.

    231+,   for movable distributors with an externally applied deflector.

    290+,   for shaping a stream by a supplemental jet.

    380+,   for motor or spray fluid actuated discharge modifier movable for or
    during spraying.

    399+,   for whirler devices in combination with means combining separately
    supplied fluid streams.

    439,    for deflector and outlet forming means combined there classified.

    552,    for inserts placed at the terminus of a flow line to divide the
    effluent into a plurality of streams.

    553+    and 590+, for interior guides in terminal members which are similar
    in structure to those appearing herein but which are not disclosed as fluid
    rotation controlling or anti-turbulence devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, appropriate subclasses for CO2 snow nozzles
    appropriate subclasses wherein special heat exchange or diffusing means are
    included for the expansion of the fluid.


CLS 239/462
TXT Apparatus under subclass 461 provided with means for separating sediment or
    solid particles from the fluid to be sprayed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    553.3,  575 and 590.3, for other terminal element combinations including a
    filter or screen.


CLS 239/463
TXT Apparatus under subclass 461 in which there is provided a means for
    imparting a spin or swirling motion to the fluid in the flow path prior to
    reaching the egress opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    214.21+, for means inducing spin or whirl of any fluid stream in a system
    in which one fluid is mixed with another fluid downstream of a continuously
    moving distributor which has discharged one of said fluids.


CLS 239/464
TXT Apparatus under subclass 463 in which there is also provided a means for
    adjusting, controlling, regulating or altering the flow of fluid, which
    means is responsive to pressure of a fluid.

    (1)     Note.  The flow modifying means must control the flow to the egress
    opening in accordance with the fluid pressure. A mere check valve or other
    similar on-off valve member does not qualify for this subclass unless the
    check valve opens paths in addition to those already passing fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    452+,   for a distributor in which the outlet is formed between parts
    mounted for relative motion and having a discharge modifier or control
    actuated by a means responsive to the pressure of the fluid.

    533+,   for fluid pressure responsive discharge modifiers or flow
    regulators not associated with whirling devices.

    570+,   for check valves.


CLS 239/465
TXT Apparatus under subclass 463 in which there is provided a flow regulator or
    controller which can be adjusted only by means of a separate, detached
    member which is inserted into the flow line or casing into contact with the
    regulator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    580,    for other discharge nozzles having valves requiring separate tools
    for adjustment.


CLS 239/466
TXT Apparatus under subclass 463 in which there are provided at least two
    separate rotation producing members, one spaced downstream of the other.

    (1)     Note.  All of the fluid may be successively whirled by the members
    or the arrangement may provide for divided flow after whirling serial
    whirling for some or all of the fluid and followed by recombining of the
    fluid.


CLS 239/467
TXT Apparatus under subclass 463 in which there is also provided a surface
    associated with the nozzle for dispersing or redirecting the whirled
    effluent after discharge.


CLS 239/468
TXT Apparatus under subclass 463 having a chamber in which the fluid is rotated
    provided with a single inlet thereto the inlet being arranged so that fluid
    enters along the peripheral wall of the chamber and at right angles to a
    radius of the chamber end wall.


CLS 239/469
TXT Apparatus under subclass 468 in which the whirl chamber is provided with a
    central protuberance extending towards the egress opening and about which
    the fluid rotates.


CLS 239/470
TXT Apparatus under subclass 469 in which the central protuberance is also
    provided with a flow passage.


CLS 239/471
TXT Apparatus under subclass 468 including a valve at the flow inlet to the
    whirl chamber.


CLS 239/472
TXT Apparatus under subclass 463 in which the whirl producing member is
    upstream of a single egress opening and is provided with flow paths at or
    on its periphery as well as with one or more flow paths in the center
    portion thereof.

    (1)     Note.  At least one set of apertures must cause whirling of the
    fluid passing therethrough.

    (2)     Note.  The apertures need not all be in the same face.  In the case
    of a cylindrical member, the central aperture may be in the circular end
    face and the peripheral ports in the side walls thereof.


CLS 239/473
TXT Apparatus under subclass 472 in which there is provided a flow regulating
    means aligned with the central port in the whirler.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    482+,   for other whirler devices having a nozzle, regulator and stem all
    axially aligned.

    494+,   especially subclass 497 for other whirler discs having angular
    passages therethrough.


CLS 239/474
TXT Apparatus under subclass 463 in which the egress opening is an annulus
    formed between the whirling means and the surrounding fluid conducting
    shell or casing.


CLS 239/475
TXT Apparatus under subclass 474 in which the whirler has a central fluid
    conducting opening, thus providing a central outlet within the discharge
    annulus.


CLS 239/476
TXT Apparatus under subclass 463 in which the actuating member or handle for
    the flow modifier is outside of and is mounted on the discharge member.


CLS 239/477
TXT Apparatus under subclass 476 in which the flow modifier is provided with
    means for selecting or choosing, at will, one of a plurality of flow paths
    to or through the egress opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    473,    for whirlers having both peripheral and central ports and having
    the central port valved.


CLS 239/478
TXT Apparatus under subclass 477 in which one of the flow paths does not cause
    a whirling of the fluid.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes those devices in which only two
    positions of flow are provided, either whirling or nonwhirling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    479,    and see (1) Note thereof.

    600,    for terminal member arrangements in which assembly or disassembly
    feature is of the essence.


CLS 239/479
TXT Apparatus under subclass 478 in which the flow adjusting means can rotate
    between two operating limits.

    (1)     Note.  In this and the two succeeding subclasses, control is such
    that intermediate stages of flow modification are provided between the two
    extremes of whirling and nonwhirling.

    (2)     Note.  See subclass 478, (1) Note, for the difference between this
    and the subclass referred to.


CLS 239/480
TXT Apparatus under subclass 479 in which the flow adjusting means moves
    axially relative to the egress opening.


CLS 239/481
TXT Apparatus under subclass 480 in which the flow adjusting means has axial as
    well as rotary motion.


CLS 239/482
TXT Apparatus under subclass 476 in which the egress opening, the flow modifier
    or regulator and the stem for regulating or adjusting the modifier are all
    in axial alignment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    473,    for other devices having the nozzle, regulator and stem axially
    aligned and arranged so as to control a central orifice in the whirler
    member.


CLS 239/483
TXT Apparatus under subclass 482 in which the flow modifying passages are
    formed in, on or through the flow modifying or regulating member (e.g., by
    recesses, borings, channels, etc.).


CLS 239/484
TXT Apparatus under subclass 483 in which the flow modifier or regulator is
    mounted for rotating movement to effect the adjustment.


CLS 239/485
TXT Apparatus under subclass 484 in which the means modifying or regulating the
    flow has axial as well as rotary motion.


CLS 239/486
TXT Apparatus under subclass 463 in which the flow passages causing the fluid
    to spin or rotate are spiral in form and extend only at right angles to the
    longitudinal axis of the flow path.

    (1)     Note.  The arrangement is such that the fluid enters the spiral
    passage along its entire axial extent and is turned in a perpendicular
    direction from its original direction of flow.


CLS 239/487
TXT Apparatus under subclass 463 having flow passages of helical form which
    cause the fluid to spin or rotate and which extend a substantial length in
    the general direction of flow.

    (1)     Note.  The arrangement of the devices in this and the indented
    subclasses is such that the spiral passages also form axially extending
    channels; that is, the fluid enters at an upstream zone and is carried
    through the spiral passages to a downstream egress opening.


CLS 239/488
TXT Apparatus under subclass 487 having a member of substantially axial length
    and of central imperforate form located in the flow passage upstream of the
    egress port.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    494+,   for helical passages in disc-like or relatively thin, flat members.


CLS 239/489
TXT Apparatus under subclass 487 in which the inner surface of the flow conduit
    has integral vanes or ribs thereon thereby forming the helical flow
    passages.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    481,    for other devices in which the whirling is accomplished by spirals
    or threads on the flow passage walls, with additional means to select
    either the whirling flow path thus provided or another non-whirling path.


CLS 239/490
TXT Apparatus under subclass 463 in which the passages which cause the fluid to
    spin or rotate are formed in the terminal element itself.

    (1)     Note.  The arrangement is such that removal of the terminal element
    removes the whirl effecting structure as well.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    489,    for terminal members having ribbed, vaned or rifled passages
    therein.


CLS 239/491
TXT Apparatus under subclass 463 in which an end wall having an opening
    therethrough is provided as a terminal member downstream of the part
    causing the fluid to spin or rotate.

    (1)     Note.  The end wall may be of any configuration although it is
    usually of the threaded cap or cup type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    483+,   for apertured caps surmounting integral whirler and flow
    controlling devices.

    487+,   for apertured caps surmounting axially extending spiral type
    passages.


CLS 239/492
TXT Apparatus under subclass 491 in which a member is provided in the flow
    line, the member being thimble-like or dished in configuration with the
    closed end of the cavity facing upstream, the fluid caused to rotatively
    enter the cavity by one or more ports formed in the wall of the member at
    right angles to the axis of the cavity and nonradially therewith.


CLS 239/493
TXT Apparatus under subclass 491 in which the flow conduit has a centrally
    imperforate member arranged therein so as to provide a flow path therepast
    with the downstream end face of the member recessed or depressed in a
    manner to cause the fluid to spin or rotate as it passes through the egress
    aperture.


CLS 239/494
TXT Apparatus under subclass 491 in which the passages causing the fluid to
    spin or rotate are formed in a member which is flat and relatively thin.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    488,    for whirlers having helical passages formed in nondisc-like members
    or those having substantial axial length.

    497,    for those devices in which the whirler paths are formed by passages
    extending completely through and are entirely surrounded by some portion of
    the disc or plate member.


CLS 239/495
TXT Apparatus under subclass 494 in which the passages causing the fluid to
    spin or rotate are in the form of tongues or slits cut or struck through
    the plane surface of the disc and bent to the desired shape.


CLS 239/496
TXT Apparatus under subclass 494 in which the passages causing the fluid to
    spin or rotate extend only partly through the axial extent of the member
    and are carried in a plane substantially parallel to the face thereof.


CLS 239/497
TXT Apparatus under subclass 494 comprising a plurality of flow paths
    relatively inclined to the longitudinal axis and extending entirely through
    the flat, relatively thin member.

    (1)     Note.  The passages must pass through and be completely surrounded
    by the member material; those passages which are formed in part by slots or
    grooves cut in the edge of the member and in part by the flow conduit will
    be found in subclass 494.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    473,    for other devices having a whirler disc with angular passages
    therethrough and a centrally valved port.

    494,    in which the whirl passages are formed in the disc or plate member
    but not necessarily entirely surrounded by the material of the member.

    548+,   for plural outlets not specifically arranged to cause spinning or
    swirling of the fluid.


CLS 239/498
TXT Apparatus under subclass 461 in which the dispersing or redirecting member
    comprises (1) a multiplicity of individual tongues or strips in the flow
    path with all strips joined at their base, (2) a member the periphery of
    which is fluted, ridged, grooved, slotted, notched or toothed.


CLS 239/499
TXT Apparatus under subclass 461 in which the redirecting or dispersing surface
    is in the form of an apertured member having considerable depth and
    surrounding the egress opening.


CLS 239/500
TXT Apparatus under subclass 461 in which there is provided either (1) a
    plurality of redirecting or dispersing surfaces spaced in the direction of
    the flowing stream, or (2) a single such redirecting or dispersing means
    having a plurality of surfaces also spaced in the direction of flow so that
    in either case at least part of the fluid leaving the egress opening
    impinges on two or more of such surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    504,    for a single dispersing or redirecting surface which is apertured
    to permit flow therethrough.

    522,    for multiple redirecting or dispersing surfaces in other than
    serial arrangement combined with the terminal flow element.


CLS 239/501
TXT Apparatus under subclass 500 in which the dispersing or redirecting
    surfaces are arranged in the form of convolutions coiled or wound around an
    axis, the fluid passing between the convolutions.


CLS 239/502
TXT Apparatus under subclass 461 comprising plural dispersing means arranged so
    that the respective narrow edges thereof are positioned in the flowing
    stream so as to cut or slice the stream rather than spread it across a wide
    area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500+,   for plural deflecting surfaces serially arranged so that at least
    part of the effluent is redirected several times.


CLS 239/503
TXT Apparatus under subclass 502 in which each of the dispersing surfaces is
    mounted so as to be moved about an axis into an out of the path of the
    stream.


CLS 239/504
TXT Apparatus under subclass 461 in which the surface means for redirecting and
    dispersing the flowing stream has openings therein for permitting fluid to
    pass therethrough either before or after such redirection or dispersion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500+,   for plural dispersing surfaces, which surfaces may be apertured or
    otherwise arranged to permit fluid flow therethrough.


CLS 239/505
TXT Apparatus under subclass 461 in which the redirecting and dispersing means
    is (1) removable from the member having the egress port, or (2) mounted for
    movement of various positions of adjustment or nonuse with respect to the
    effluent.


CLS 239/506
TXT Apparatus under subclass 505 wherein the dispersing means additionally is
    positionable in contact with the egress port to serve the function of a
    flow inhibitor or shut off device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    384+,   for spray fluid operated deflectors which move during discharge and
    are biased to close the egress port during absence of fluid.

    454,    for gravity seated axially moved plug type deflectors which form
    the outlet means because of relative movement to the flow line.


CLS 239/507
TXT Apparatus under subclass 505 wherein the dispersing means is supported near
    the outlet means and has relative movement thereto from a position of
    nonuse to a position providing some degree of dispersion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    265.29, for a reaction motor discharge nozzle having selectively usable
    diversely oriented or shaped outlets and a redirecting member movable from
    a nonuse position closing one outlet to a position within the fluid stream
    to redirect the stream to an outlet.

    503,    for plural deflectors pivoted into and out of the discharge path.

    506,    for deflectors which in a position of nonuse become closure means.


CLS 239/508
TXT Apparatus under subclass 507 having a dispersing means and a securing means
    therefor provided with a plurality of spaced pivot points on opposite sides
    of the flow conductor defining an axis about which the latter means is
    hinged.


CLS 239/509
TXT Apparatus under subclass 507 wherein the flow redirecting means is arranged
    to one side of the general direction of the discharging stream and is
    flattened or presents a surface of comparatively large area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    513,    for plate-type flow deflectors on one side of the stream, slidably
    or rotatably arranged for adjustment but which cannot be positioned to be
    out of use.

    579,    for valve members which are controlled by the movement of terminal
    flow members.


CLS 239/510
TXT Apparatus under subclass 509 wherein the dispersing means is supported by
    means either (1) engaging the external surfaces of the terminal flow guide
    or path, or (2) remote from the flow line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    515,    for other deflectors supported exteriorly of the flow.


CLS 239/511
TXT Apparatus under subclass 510 wherein the plate-like dispersing means is
    contrained to move about an axis so that a turning motion is employed in
    placing the plate into operative position.


CLS 239/512
TXT Apparatus under subclass 507 having a dispersing means which is mounted for
    movement in a plane normal to the direction of discharge, adjustment being
    from a nonuse position to a position of full dispersion of the effluent.


CLS 239/513
TXT Apparatus under subclass 505 wherein the movable dispersing means has
    various positions relative to the outlet means in order to vary the amount
    of dispersion or the direction thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    507+,   for deflectors which have degrees of adjustment and additionally
    have features or positions of nonuse while mounted upon the flow conductor.


CLS 239/514
TXT Apparatus under subclass 513 wherein the means for dispersing the discharge
    is arranged for movement along an axis generally coincident with the
    direction of flow in the discharge means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    456+,   for deflector type elements axially movable relative to a flow
    conductor to form outlet means.


CLS 239/515
TXT Apparatus under subclass 514 wherein the dispersing means is supported by
    means (1) engaging the external surfaces of the flow supply means, or (2)
    remote from the flow line.


CLS 239/516
TXT Apparatus under subclass 505 wherein the dispersing means is attached to
    the nozzle by a displaceable member urged by the inherent elasticity of
    such member or by some additional member.


CLS 239/517
TXT Apparatus under subclass 505 in which the dispersing means is fashioned
    from material which is resilient.


CLS 239/518
TXT Apparatus under subclass 461 in which the flow redirecting and dispersing
    means and the member carrying the egress port are unitarily or fixedly
    fashioned.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    275,    for support means and deflector unit combined to provide a base for
    a supply conduit or terminal outlet member.

    505+,   for claimed features of deflector separability, movability for
    adjustment or for placing the deflector into flow redirecting position with
    respect to the outlet.


CLS 239/519
TXT Apparatus under subclass 518 in which the deflector means is formed of
    inherently elastic material readily capable of flexure or distortion under
    normal use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    517,    for spring form deflectors mounted for movement into or out of
    deflecting position.

    602,    for resilient or deformable terminal members, per se, and see the
    search notes there accumulated relative other resilient organizations of
    the class.


CLS 239/520
TXT Apparatus under subclass 518 having the terminal flow element provided with
    multiple outlet means which are directed to permit fluid to be discharged
    against the dispersing means.


CLS 239/521
TXT Apparatus under subclass 518 wherein the flow redirecting means is arranged
    to one side of the general direction of the discharging stream as
    contrasted with a transverse, encircling or enshrouding arrangement.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass and the indented subclasses are
    devices providing a substantial abrupt change of the direction of flow
    (usually unitary with the flow guide) without a clearly defined spacing of
    the dispersing plate from the egress port to cause the effluent to break
    into a spray.


CLS 239/522
TXT Apparatus under subclass 521 wherein the dispersing means is provided with
    two or more continuous surfaces of different disposition which act to
    distribute spray in at least two distinct directions each portion of the
    so-joined surfaces acting as a separate deflector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    498,    for unitary deflectors with multiple fingers or serrated edges.

    500+,   for serially arranged deflecting surfaces which act in turn upon
    previously redirected spray.

    502+,   for plural deflectors arranged edgewise to a flowing stream.


CLS 239/523
TXT Apparatus under subclass 521 wherein the dispersing means is provided with
    a concavity, i.e., there is a curvature about one or more axes.


CLS 239/524
TXT Apparatus under subclass 518 wherein the dispersing means is positioned
    across the general direction of flow and is either flat or provided with a
    concavity.


CLS 239/525
TXT Apparatus under class definition wherein either (1) a flow conduit, or (2)
    a terminal flow member is provided with a carrying handle, handgrip or
    other manual type handling means for the support of such part against the
    force of gravity.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in these subclasses, there must be more
    than a mere identification or naming of a flow conduit or terminus as being
    handle-like, i.e., there must be structure in addition to a mere flow line
    or terminus recognizable as having special support features.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   for ground installations or fixed support means.

    268,    for supports for longitudinally spaced outlet means in a flow line
    conduit.

    273+,   for ground support means, particularly 280+ for pole or stand type
    supports.

    280+,   for ground sustained support means of pole or stand form.

    375+,   for supply containers and attached outlet with handles or handgrips
    therefor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 110+ for handles for closures,
    receptacles and the like there classified.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 75+ for hose or nozzle type carriers claimed
    without fluid handling features or characteristics.


CLS 239/526
TXT Apparatus under subclass 525 in which the terminal flow element is carried
    by a member configurated for one handed support and manipulation in the
    manner of a pistol.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    375     and 378, for supply container and attached outlet means having
    handle grip and flow controller juxtaposed for one handed operation.

    407+,   for valving means controlling flow for combining of separately
    supplied fluid streams.

    413+,   for valving means for each of diverse fluids in apparatus for
    combining of separately supplied fluid streams.


CLS 239/527
TXT Apparatus under subclass 526 in which plural flow regulators are under the
    control of a single trigger-like actuating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    414+,   for combining of separately supplied fluids controlled by a single
    operator for plural valves.


CLS 239/528
TXT Apparatus under subclass 527 wherein the flow regulators are controlled
    seriatim.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    415,    for the subject matter of this subclass having means to combine
    separately supplied fluids.


CLS 239/529
TXT Apparatus under subclass 525 wherein the handgrip or holder takes the form
    of a glove, mitt or cot through which fluid flows or by which the flow line
    is supported against gravity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for garment or body attached or worn slow diffusers.


CLS 239/530
TXT Apparatus under subclass 525 in which the handgrip is a tubular member
    which is fitted over some other part of the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    288,    for guards or protectors for the operator of the apparatus.


CLS 239/531
TXT Apparatus under subclass 525 in which the handgrip or holder is of curved
    or bent form for sustaining the apparatus and wherein the ground contacting
    support means such as a ladder or vertically arranged sustaining means is
    not claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273+,   for ground contacting support means.


CLS 239/532
TXT Apparatus under subclass 525 in which the manual type holder is of elongate
    or rod-like form and which may either be provided with flow conducting
    means or be entirely separate therefrom.


CLS 239/533.1
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a terminal member (e.g.,
    nozzle) having a fluid outlet port, means associated with such member to
    change the character of flow or the quantity of flow passing through the
    outlet port, such flow changing means being responsive to the pressure
    condition of the fluid in the terminal member or in a fluid conducting
    member upstream thereof.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include patents concerned with
    devices which are mere line flow operated, i.e., become operative at the
    mere flow of fluid regardless of the comparative lack of head.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126,    for pressure responsive system-fluid relief or by-pass.

    452+,   for terminal outlets formed by parts mounted for relative movement
    responsive discharge modifier.

    464,    for flow deflecting or rotation controlling means including a fluid
    pressure responsive flow modifier.

    570+,   for line fluid operated valves and see (1) Note above.


CLS 239/533.11
TXT Device under subclass 533.3 having means associated with the flow regulator
    for (1) maintaining it in its proper radial position relative to the walls
    of the chamber in which it moves, (2) reducing sliding resistance between
    the regulator and the walls of the chamber in which it moves, or (3)
    preventing fuel from communicating between the interior and the exterior of
    the injector.


CLS 239/533.12
TXT Device under subclass 533.3 further including means to change the character
    of the fluid leaving the outlet port.


CLS 239/533.13
TXT Device under subclass 533.1 wherein at least the fluid outlet portion of
    the terminal member is fashioned from material readily capable of change by
    distortion of flexure, without permanent deformation, such change being
    brought about as a result of fluid pressure.

    (1)     Note.  Self-accommodating terminal outlets which do not impose any
    restricting or regulating action upon the effluent are not included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    452+,   appropriate subclasses for other fluid pressure responsive
    discharge modifiers and see (1) Note to subclass 451 for the line.

    546,    for means modifying a deformable terminal outlet.

    602,    for resilient or deformable terminal members.


CLS 239/533.14
TXT Device under subclass 533.13 wherein the fluid outlet port is formed in or
    carried by a disc shaped member.


CLS 239/533.15
TXT Device under subclass 533.1 wherein the ultimate function of the flow
    changing means is to open or close the outlet port without further changing
    the character of that port or the flow discharging therefrom, or further
    regulating the amount of fluid being discharged.


CLS 239/533.2
TXT Device under subclass 533.1 wherein the outlet port of the terminal member
    is in communication with, and conveys a fluid fuel to a combustion chamber.


CLS 239/533.3
TXT Device under subclass 533.2 wherein the flow changing means is a flow
    regulator and the combustion chamber is that of a reciprocating piston
    engine, the flow regulator functioning in timed relationship with the cycle
    of operation of the engine.


CLS 239/533.4
TXT Device under subclass 533.3 having additional means to (1) alter or vary
    the amount of discharge automatically within a single engine cycle, (2)
    provide multiple, discrete discharges within a single engine cycle, or (3)
    any combination of (1) and (2) above.


CLS 239/533.5
TXT Device under subclass 533.4 wherein the means to vary or pulse flow is
    located upstream of the flow regulator.


CLS 239/533.6
TXT Device under subclass 533.3 wherein an operating specification of the flow
    regulator can be manually set to a desired value.


CLS 239/533.7
TXT Device under subclass 533.3 wherein the flow regulator is a valve located
    upstream of the fluid outlet; and it is responsive to, and opens in the
    direction of the fluid flow.


CLS 239/533.8
TXT Device under subclass 533.3 having a secondary source or path of fluid
    pressure to which the regulator responds, such secondary pressure acting to
    urge the regulator in a direction (usually closed) opposite that of the
    primary fluid.  The secondary fluid may be the same fluid as the primary
    fluid but acting through a different path.


CLS 239/533.9
TXT Device under subclass 533.3 wherein (a) the flow regulator comprises a body
    of resilient, deformable material, or (b) the regulator is biased to a
    discharge preventing position by a resilient biasing means having a
    particularly defined structure or operating characteristic.

    (1)     Note.  Part (b) of this definition requires that the resilient
    biasing means consists of more than a simple coil spring of indeterminate
    specifications.


CLS 239/536
TXT Apparatus under class definition comprising plural, substantially
    identical, discrete terminal members arranged with respect to a common
    support means.

    (1)     Note.  Branched flow lines with integrally formed outlets or
    separably carried outlet elements wherein by the arrangement disclosed
    there is no relative movement possible between the outlets are excluded
    from this group and are found in subclasses 548+ below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266+,   for plural longitudinally spaced outlets in a flow line conduit and
    see the search notes thereto for other spaced outlet arrangements.

    390,    for plural interchangeable outlet arrangements.

    436+,   for selectively usable or variable diverse terminal outlet means.

    450,    for a plurality of tubular members extending side-by-side and
    connected together along their length and provided with outlet means.

    548+,   for unitary plural outlet means.


CLS 239/537
TXT Apparatus under class definition wherein the fluid egress carrying member
    is unitarily provided with a flow quantity regulating means and which
    partake of the same motion for reason of adjustment or control.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    579,    for valving means controlled by the relative motion of the terminal
    member and some connecting or operating linkage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, appropriate subclasses for valves and
    actuators therefor in the absence of claimed nozzle detail or relationship.


CLS 239/538
TXT Apparatus under subclass 537 in which the flow egress carrying member is
    capable of turning motion about an axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    392+,   for movably mounted multi-terminal outlet carrying members.


CLS 239/539
TXT Apparatus under subclass 538 in which the rotatable unit also has movement
    in the direction of the axis about which it turns.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    458,    for axially, rotary outer flow member in which the outlet is formed
    by parts mounted for relative movement.


CLS 239/540
TXT Apparatus under subclass 538 in which the valve part takes the form of a
    disc which rotates against a flat surface to block or permit flow.


CLS 239/541
TXT Apparatus under subclass 537 in which the terminal member is constrained to
    move in a back and forth manner in the direction of its major axis.


CLS 239/542
TXT Apparatus under class definition comprising in general a chamber which
    receives a relatively rapidly flowing fluid from a flow line and slows down
    the velocity of the fluid by providing an increased number and effective
    area of egress ports or escape routes, as compared to the area of the fluid
    inlet, or an increase in at least a portion of the flow line or chamber.

    (1)     Note.  Flow through the decelerator results in a dissipation of
    pressure; however, without having any particular effect upon the volume.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    548+,   for other unitary plural outlet means, particularly subclass 553
    for elements within a nozzle tending to decelerate flow.


CLS 239/543
TXT Apparatus under class definition having two or more outlet means so
    arranged as to cause one of the resulting fluid streams to intersect with
    the other so that combining takes place at or beyond the outlet means.

    (1)     Note.  This locus is residual for the dividing and recombining of a
    single fluid wherein the recombining takes place at or beyond the terminus.
     For upstream dividing and recombining see particularly the art concerned
    with the whirling of fluids.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for bubble cups or drinking fountains having converging jets.

    306,    for plural holders for diverse materials with mixing beyond the
    outlet.

    314+,   for mixing exteriorly of liquid flow paths of material to be mixed,
    dissolved or entrained in a flowing liquid stream.

    379,    for supply holders for material with gravity flow to a conveying
    fluid.

    418,    for combining of separately supplied fluid streams at or beyond the
    terminus.

    461+,   particularly subclasses 498, 500+ and 504, for plural streams
    caused to converge beyond the outlet means by specially arranged or shaped
    deflectors.

    536,    for plural heads unitarily arranged which may be set to cause
    convergence of the emitted fluid streams.

    548+,   for unitary plural outlet means.


CLS 239/544
TXT Apparatus under subclass 543 having the outlets positioned in a reentrant
    face of the terminal member.


CLS 239/545
TXT Apparatus under subclass 543 wherein the outlet means are in line and
    directly opposite each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    421,    for plural fluids mixed at the junction of opposed coaxial fluid
    paths.


CLS 239/546
TXT Apparatus under class definition comprising an egress means fashioned from
    resilient material readily capable of change by distortion or flexure
    without permanent deformation and having associated means for effecting
    distortion thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    265.43, for a reaction motor discharge nozzle having a resilient or
    deformable wall and means to bend the wall to various shapes.

    451+,   particularly subclass 455 for outlet means formed by parts mounted
    for relative motion including resilient type parts; however, hingedly,
    swingably, slidably or otherwise articulated to modify the outlet.

    602,    for resilient or deformable terminal members not provided with
    means for causing deformation.


CLS 239/547
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a pliable or deformable
    supply conduit having at least one distributor protruding outwardly from
    the side wall, i.e., the wall which extends parallel to the flow axis.

    (1)     Note.  Patents classified herein usually have a disclosure that the
    supply hose may be perforated at any desired point and the outlet member
    may then be installed or assembled at said point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    588,    for a distributor or terminal member connected at one end of a
    flexible conductor, the other end of which is connected to a fluid conduit.


CLS 239/548
TXT Apparatus under class definition having two or more final discharge outlets
    or egress openings leading from the terminal section of the flow path which
    are structurally related or operatively restrained for motion together and
    capable of permitting simultaneous discharge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    398+,   especially subclasses 418+ for plural outlet means related to the
    mixing of separately supplied fluid streams.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    601,    Surgery:  Kinesitherapy paricularly subclasses 160+ for a device or
    method therefor which may be structurally similar to a Class 239 type spray
    device which provides medical treatment to the body for a named ailment or
    injury thereof.  Generic terms such as "treatment'', "therapy'',
    "massage'', "hydrotherapy'', "hydromassage'', etc. are to be interpreted
    broadly for placement in Class 239 lacking a disclosed body treatment for a
    named medical condition or physical injury.  Exceptions to this rule
    comprise generically disclosed and claimed hydrotherapy of the genitalia or
    any internal body tissues, or a device for applying a force which imparts a
    specific motion to the body or portion thereof which shall be classified in
    Class 128 or one of its 600 series trailer classes as provided for therein.


CLS 239/549
TXT Apparatus under subclass 548 wherein distinct paths to discrete outlet
    means are provided whereby separate or different fluids may be discharged
    therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     290+, 302+, 418+, and 543+, for other arrangements of plural outlet
    means supplied by plural fluids.


CLS 239/550
TXT Apparatus under subclass 548 which includes a plurality of terminal outlet
    means spaced along the length of a supply pipe and disclosed as removably
    secured thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    547,    for similar nozzles spaces along a flexible supply conduit.


CLS 239/551
TXT Apparatus under subclass 550 which include individual means to vary the
    rate of efflux of fluid through each of the plural nozzles.


CLS 239/552
TXT Apparatus under subclass 548 in which plural outlets are formed by means
    placed within and extending upstream from a single outlet means to cause
    the effluent to be divided or to be led into separate streams upon
    discharge beyond said outlet means.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass is distinguished over
    that in subclass 553 below on the basis that herein the insert actually
    forms the equivalent of plural outlet means and discharge would be in
    plural streams regardless of the presence or absence of a guide means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    543+,   for means causing plural streams to impinge upon each other
    downstream of the terminus.


CLS 239/553
TXT Apparatus under subclass 548 in which a means is provided upstream of the
    discharge outlets to (1) hold back or separate material from the system
    fluid, or (2) spread out or otherwise direct the fluid prior to or during
    egress from the discharge outlets.

    (1)     Note.  The interior filter or guide must be in addition to the
    parts forming the outlets, i.e., it must be part of or in the plural outlet
    carrying member.  Ribs formed on the walls forming the outlet are
    considered to be included under this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76,     for systems in which the flow equalization means or distributor is
    remotely positioned from a plurality of separate outlet arrangements, and
    see (1) Note therein.

    214.21+, for means inducing spin or whirl of any fluid stream in a system
    in which one fluid is mixed with another fluid downstream of a continuously
    moving distributor which has discharged one of said fluids.

    450,    for plural outlets arranged in adjoined, contiguous flow line
    sections with one wall or the like common to the plural flow lines.

    461+,   for other terminal members in which the interior guide acts to
    control rotation of the fluid.

    552,    and see (1) Note therein.

    590+,   for a terminal member having a single egress outlet and an interior
    filter or guide.


CLS 239/553.3
TXT Apparatus under subclass 553 in which the means comprises a member or
    material having one or more orifices, pores, or passages extending
    therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    462,    for a distributor having fluid deflection or rotation controlling
    means and a filter or screen.

    575,    for a distributor having valve means and a filter or screen in the
    flow line.


CLS 239/553.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 553 comprising a plurality of distinct and
    separate fluid directing surfaces (e.g., guide vanes or grooves).


CLS 239/554
TXT Apparatus under subclass 548 in which  a plurality of members are axially
    arranged or superposed to result in at least two axially spaced discharge
    outlets for the fluid.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass members nested or telescoped
    in each other and so arranged that the streams are released from or between
    the members in a plurality of parallel planes are considered to qualify.


CLS 239/555
TXT Apparatus under subclass 554 in which the superposed or axially joined
    members are plates placed in face-to-face relationship with the spaces
    between the plates forming the outlets.

    (1)     Note.  Members which are planar for at least a portion of their
    surface and also have offset rims are considered to be plates for this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    595,    for flat and tapered terminal members having superposed curved
    discharge edges.


CLS 239/556
TXT Apparatus under subclass 548 in which the outlets are distributed in at
    least two sets or arrangements of at least two apertures each.

    (1)     Note.  A group of outlets is considered to consist of (1) at least
    two apertures which when viewed relative to the remaining ones reveals a
    repetitive pattern or arrangement, or (2) sets of apertures arranged about
    a center. Groups may vary from each other in some essential characteristic
    such as number, size, shape, etc., of openings or in the placement thereof
    about some axis or center.  There must be at least 4 openings (two groups)
    to qualify for this and the indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    543+,   for plural groups of outlets causing convergence of the discharged
    streams.


CLS 239/557
TXT Apparatus under subclass 556 in which each group of outlets is the same as
    all other groups.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are terminal outlet means having
    substantially identical spray pipes each having a row of outlet apertures
    extending therethrough, said pipes being connected to or integral with a
    fluid header conduit or manifold (e.g., spray pipes extending parallel to
    each other or radially of the manifold).

    (2)     Note.  Identical openings or groups refer to aperture size, shape
    and spacing about some central point.


CLS 239/558
TXT Apparatus under subclass 556 in which the groups of outlets are arranged
    around a common center or axis.

    (1)     Note.  If the groups, either by illustration or disclosure, can in
    any way be considered to form coaxial or concentric groups, classification
    as original or cross-reference in this or the indented subclass is
    indicated.


CLS 239/559
TXT Apparatus under subclass 558 in which the concentric or coaxial groups are
    formed in a concavo-convex face or wall.  (See subclass 567 for definition
    of concavo-convex face).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    567,    for other outlet arrangements in a concavo-convex face or wall.


CLS 239/560
TXT Apparatus under subclass 556 in which there are at least three groups of
    outlet openings, each group differing from the others in some essential
    characteristic relating to flow.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note to subclass 556 above.


CLS 239/561
TXT Apparatus under subclass 548 in which the terminal member is provided with
    at least 3 outlets of different size or shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    436+,   for selectively usable or variable diverse terminal outlets.


CLS 239/562
TXT Apparatus under subclass 548 in which means are provided for regulating or
    varying the amount of fluid to or issuing from the outlets either
    individually or simultaneously.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    265.25, for a reaction motor discharge nozzle with plural outlets and means
    to control the amount of fluid issuing from the outlets either individually
    or simultaneously with at least one other.

    378,    for supply holders and attached outlet having unitary plural outlet
    means.

    443+,   for valve controlled plural diverse terminal outlets.

    551,    for removable spray pipe nozzles having individual flow control
    means for each nozzle.


CLS 239/563
TXT Apparatus under subclass 562 including movable means which sequentially or
    serially open and close one or more of a plurality of outlets.

    (1)     Note. These devices include one or more rows of outlets in which
    longitudinal and/or rotary motion of the means sequentially opens or closes
    one outlet or a row of outlets at a time.


CLS 239/564
TXT Apparatus under subclass 563 provided with means to vary the total
    effective length and total effective width of all or part of the outlets.

    (1)     Note.  These devices usually include a valve device which opens or
    closes one or more of a plurality of outlets sequentially or serially in
    its movement together with means which opens or closes other outlets in a
    plane normal to the first mentioned control. These controls may comprise a
    single valve means which is mounted for longitudinal and rotary motion or
    separate means mounted for such longitudinal and rotary motion.


CLS 239/565
TXT Apparatus under subclass 548 in which the flow line divides into a
    plurality of flow paths, each said flow path having one or more outlets.

    (1)     Note.  The separated or branched flow paths may subsequently be
    recombined so as to form a circuit or loop from either of the branched
    paths back to the inlet therefor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    450,    for similar systems in which the branches are capable of being
    coupled to similar sections for lengthening thereof and in which the
    separate branches are not recombined.


CLS 239/566
TXT Apparatus under subclass 548 in which the plural openings extend along a
    straight line lying entirely within the surface of the terminal outlet
    member.

    (1)     Note. This subclass is residual with respect to subclass 266 and
    contains a collection of what has come to be known as terminal flow line
    members characterized by their being readily manipulable, or by apertures
    being unitarily arranged in a terminal flow member.  The presence of a
    handle or arrangement for manipulation is a good indication for this
    subclass.

    (2)     Note.  If the outlets are formed in a tubular conduit, they must
    lie along the longitudinal axis of the conduit. Outlets formed in a
    straight line around the curved face will be found in subclass 567.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266+,   appropriate subclasses for outlets arranged in a single straight
    line in members adapted to be longitudinally joined or coupled to each
    other.

    567,    and see (2) Note, above.


CLS 239/567
TXT Apparatus under subclass 548 in which the spray openings extend through a
    wall which is of concavo-convex form; i.e., the wall has a curvature about
    one or more axes (e.g., cylindrical or spherical).

    (1)     Note.  The perforations in the terminal members must be arranged
    around the curved wall; e.g., at least two of the said openings must be
    spaced from each other circumferentially of the member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    559,    for other outlet arrangements in a concavo-convex face or wall and
    see (1) Note in the definitions of subclass 558.

    566,    and see (1) Note, above.


CLS 239/568
TXT Apparatus under subclass 548 in which the outlets, perforations or spray
    apertures are elongate in only one dimension transverse to the direction of
    fluid discharge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    597+,   for terminal members having a single elongate or slot-like aperture.


CLS 239/569
TXT Apparatus under class definition having a flow regulating means in the
    fluid conductor which controls the quantity of fluid flowing through or out
    of the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  Arrangements which operate to vary the flow of material,
    though incapable of cutting it off entirely, are included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    265.19, for a reaction motor discharge nozzle having means to control the
    amount of fluid discharging from the outlet.

    353     and 354, for valving means in spray apparatus having a supply
    holder for the spray material.

    407+,   for valving means in a distributing apparatus in which a plurality
    of fluids are mixed.

    443+,   for valving means in a distributor having selectively usable or
    variable diverse outlets.

    527+,   for a distributing means combined with a handle or handgrip and
    plural valves having a single control means.

    551     and 562+, for a distributor comprising plural outlets and flow
    control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, appropriate subclasses for valves and
    actuators therefor without regard to nozzle relationship or detail.


CLS 239/570
TXT Apparatus under subclass 569 wherein the flow controlling means is
    responsive to the mere flow of fluid at substantially any pressure; that
    is, there is not required that a particular relatively elevated pressure be
    obtained before the controller permits flow downstream therefrom, but
    rather that mere inertia or weight of the part be overcome.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    412,    for combining of plural streams involving fluid pressure operated
    valving means.

    452+,   for fluid pressure responsive discharge modifiers associated with
    terminal outlet means formed by parts mounted for relative movement.

    464,    for whirlers combined with fluid pressure responsive modifying
    means.

    533,    for fluid pressure responsive discharge modifiers or flow
    regulators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 511+ for a fluid handling system
    including a valve of the direct response type.


CLS 239/571
TXT Apparatus under subclass 570 in which the flow controlling means acts in
    response to the direction in which material flows.


CLS 239/572
TXT Apparatus under subclass 571 in which flow of fluid toward the egress port
    causes the valve to move to closing position; e.g., upstream opening and
    downstream closing by flow of the effluent.


CLS 239/573
TXT Apparatus under subclass 569 comprising a means defining a chamber-like
    element along the egress route or a fluid conductor of increasing
    cross-section for the effluent to permit reduction of pressure and
    expansion of a liquid to a gaseous or vapor state.


CLS 239/574
TXT Apparatus under subclass 569 comprising at least two flow controlling means
    arranged in the flow line at spaced points along the direction of flow.


CLS 239/575
TXT Apparatus under subclass 569 in which there is provided a means to separate
    out or hold back the oversized particles of the effluent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86,     for injection nozzles having capillary type feed passages.

    228,    for sediment collector in a distributor continuously moving
    relative to a support during spraying.

    326,    for supply holders having a pad or wick for temporary storage of
    material.

    462,    for deflectors or whirlers combined with filtering or screening
    means.

    553.3,  for distributor having plural outlet means and an apertured member
    or screen in the fluid line.

    590+,   for terminal members combined with filters or screens.


CLS 239/576
TXT Apparatus under subclass 569 in which the movement of the flow regulator is
    controlled by bending or distorting the flow conduit or its outer encasing
    member.


CLS 239/577
TXT Apparatus under subclass 569 in which the flow regulator has a tipping or
    rocking type motion about an area of contact at its seat; however, without
    being affixed to said seat, but usually held thereto by spring pressure or
    by the pressure of the fluid.


CLS 239/578
TXT Apparatus under subclass 569 in which the movement of the flow regulator is
    controlled by the relative movement of an actuating means access to which
    may be had at a point distant from the said regulator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 294 for flexible valve
    actuators.


CLS 239/579
TXT Apparatus under subclass 569 in which the flow regulator is moved into
    different positions of adjustment by the motion of the terminal portion of
    the nozzle which latter portion has movement relative its associated parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    457+,   for rotatable terminal flow members in control of flow regulators
    and wherein the terminal outlet is formed by parts mounted for relative
    movement.

    537+,   for nozzles having a terminal member and valve part moving
    unitarily.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 349+ for valve combinations
    wherein the valve actuator is an inlet means or outlet means.


CLS 239/580
TXT Apparatus under subclass 569 wherein a member apart from and external of
    the flow confining means is required to be inserted into the apparatus to
    alter a flow regulator upstream of the egress port.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    465,    for a flow modifier requiring a separate insertable tool.


CLS 239/581.1
TXT Rotary valving:

    Apparatus under subclass 569 in which the flow regulating means is
    constrained to move in a direction about some axis of the said regulating
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 304+ for rotary valves.


CLS 239/581.2
TXT Including axial movement:

    Apparatus under subclass 581.1 in which the flow regulating means is
    additionally constrained to move in line with the rotary axis of the
    regulating means.


CLS 239/582.1
TXT Stem or operator extends through flow conduit:

    Apparatus under subclass 581.2 wherein the moving flow regulator has an
    operating handle, stem or part thereof which extends through the material
    passage or outlet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 501 for dispensers having a movable outlet
    element actuator projecting through a discharge guide.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 339 for valve actuating means
    extending through the fluid inlet or outlet.


CLS 239/583
TXT Apparatus under subclass 569 in which the flow regulating means partakes of
    a to-and-fro or back-and-forth motion (including oscillating motion) either
    in the direction of flow or transversely thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 318+ for reciprocating
    valves.


CLS 239/584
TXT Apparatus under subclass 583 in which the flow regulating means is
    associated with a nozzle of the type disclosed as spraying into a
    surrounding environment of superatmospheric pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for a method of injecting fuel into a combustion chamber.

    86      through 96, 132+ and 408+, for injection type nozzles with other
    regulatory or combined features.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclasses 495+ and 590+ for fuel automizing devices claimed in combination
    with significant internal combustion engine structure.


CLS 239/585.1
TXT Electromagnetically operated valve (e.g., ball-type ):
    Apparatus under subclass 584 in which the flow regulating means is operated
    by electromagnetic means including a coil and movable core (i.e., armature).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 129.01+ for electromagnetic
    valve structure without regard to nozzle relationship or detail.


CLS 239/585.2
TXT With separate operator therefor:
    Apparatus under subclass 585.1 in which the movable core is separate from
    (i.e., not integral or not rigidly affixed) and pushes against the flow
    regulating means.


CLS 239/585.3
TXT Plate-type armature valve (e.g., plate and integral projection or
    ball):Apparatus under subclass 585.1 in which the movable core is a planar
    surface having its longest dimension in a direction transverse to its
    direction of travel.

    (1)     Note.  The planar cores within this subclass may have distinct,
    integral, or rigidly affixed projections which act as valving.


CLS 239/585.4
TXT Elongated armature with integral projection:
    Apparatus under subclass 585.1 in which the movable core has the longest
    dimension in its direction of movement and has a protrusion rigidly affixed
    thereto or formed on the core and extending in the direction of core
    movement which acts as the  flow regulating means.


CLS 239/585.5
TXT Needle-type projection:
    Apparatus under subclass 585.4 in which the protrusion is a narrow pointed
    formation.


CLS 239/586
TXT Apparatus under subclass 583 in which the flow regulating means moves in a
    plane generally at right angles to the flow path.


CLS 239/587.1
TXT TERMINAL MEMBER ADJUSTABLY OR SHIFTABLY CONNECTED TO FLOW CONDUIT:Apparatus
    under the class definition having joint means to change the relationship of
    the terminal outlet and connected flowline to adjust the position or to
    vary the direction of the terminal outlet.

    (1)     Note.  Include herein are jointed or articulated nozzles having a
    downstream section movably connected to a serially related upstream section
    where both sections are at least nominally claimed as nozzle parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229,    for wriggler or flexible distributors having continuous movement
    relative a support during spraying.

    265.35, for a reaction motor discharge nozzle comprising a member which may
    be selectively shifted to various positions to vary the line or course of
    fluid discharge with respect to a fixed axis.

    266+,   especially subclass 269 for spray pipes which may be movably
    coupled to another spray pipe.

    279,    for support means comprising a flow conduit only arranged to form a
    ground support for the nozzle.

    525+,   for flow line or nozzle attached or carried handgrips or holders.

    537+,   for a distributor in which the terminal member and a valve part
    move unitarily.

    579,    for a distributor in which movement of the terminal flow member
    controls a flow regulator in the fluid system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, appropriate subclasses, especially
    subclasses 184+ for a nominally recited nozzle section connected by a
    coupling member to a conduit means which is not claimed as a nozzle section.


CLS 239/587.2
TXT Plural distinct articulation type flow connections:
    Apparatus under subclass 587.1 in which the terminal outlet is connected to
    the flow conduit by two spaced fluid conducting joint means each permitting
    relative rotatable or angular movement of the terminal member and supply
    conduit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    588,    for flexible fluid conducting joint means connecting the fluid
    supply means and terminal outlet.


CLS 239/587.3
TXT Includes ball and socket:
    Apparatus under subclass 587.2 in which at least one of the joint means
    includes a spherical male formation received within a spherical female
    formation.

    (1)     Note.  The spherical male and female formations may be restrained
    by a pivot pin or other means for movement in a single plane.


CLS 239/587.4
TXT Ball and socket flow connection:
    Apparatus under subclass 587.1 in which the flow conducting joint means
    includes a spherical male formation received within a spherical female
    formation.

    (1)     Note.  The spherical male and female formations may be restrained
    by a pivot pin or other means for movement in a single plane.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 261+ for ball and socket fluid
    conducting joint means without regard to nozzle relationship or detail.


CLS 239/587.5
TXT Pivot type flow connection:
    Apparatus under subclass 587.1 wherein the flow conducting joint means
    allows rotary or angular movement of the terminal member about a fixed axis.


CLS 239/587.6
TXT With pin in pivot type connection:
    Apparatus under subclass 587.5 in which the joint means includes a nonfluid
    conveying stem within the flow passage about which the fluid conducting
    members move.


CLS 239/588
TXT Apparatus under subclass 587 in which the egress port carrying member is
    joined to the flow line by way of a flexible conductor for the fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152+    and 175+, for hand supported and manipulated distributors having a
    flexible coupling section joining such distribution to a mobile tank-type
    supply means.

    229,    for wriggler or flexible distributors having continuous movement
    relative a support during spraying.

    547,    for a nozzle outlet connected in the circumferential wall of a
    flexible or pliable supply conduit.


CLS 239/589
TXT Apparatus under class definition comprising a tubular member having
    inflexible or unyielding wall or walls defining the exterior of the path of
    fluid flowing towards an egress or discharge opening at one end of the
    member, which opening imparts some character of flow to the fluid escaping
    therefrom, and adapted to be connected at the other end to a fluid system.


CLS 239/589.1
TXT Fluidic oscillator:

    Apparatus under subclass 589 wherein the geometry of the flow path causes a
    periodic or cyclic change in the character of flow impaired to the fluid
    escaping from the discharge or egress opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99+,    for means in addition to the geometry of the flow path for causing
    a cyclically intermittent discharge.

    101,    for means in addition to the geometry of the flow path for causing
    a cyclic flow rate to the distributor.

    102.1+, for motor means which vibrates or jiggles the discharge.

    308+,   for a spray fluid operated continuously moving discharge modifier.


CLS 239/590
TXT Apparatus under subclass 589 in which a means is provided upstream of the
    discharge outlet to (1) hold back or separate material from the system
    fluid, or (2) spread out or otherwise direct the fluid prior to or during
    egress from the discharge outlet.

    (1)     Note. The interior filter or guide must be in addition to the parts
    forming the outlet, i.e., it must be part of or in the outlet carrying
    member.  Ribs formed on the walls forming the outlet are considered to be
    included under this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86,     for capillary type filters installed in injection nozzles.

    214.21+, for means inducing spin or whirl of any fluid stream in a system
    in which one fluid is mixed with another fluid downstream of a continuously
    moving distributor which has discharged one of said fluids.

    228,    for sediment collectors or internal diverter baffle in a
    continuously moving distributor organization.

    461+,   for interior means tending to control rotation of fluid prior to
    discharge.

    462,    for filters combined with flow deflecting or rotating means (e.g.,
    whirlers).

    553+,   for a terminal member having plural outlet means and an interior
    filter or guide.

    575,    for a nozzle combined with a valve and a filter means.


CLS 239/590.3
TXT Apparatus under subclass 590 in which the means comprises a member or
    material having one or more orifices, pores, or passages extending
    therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    462,    for a distributor having fluid deflection or rotation controlling
    means and a filter or screen.

    553.3,  for a distributor having plural outlets and an orificed, porous or
    passaged means upstream of the outlets to filter material from the fluid or
    to spread out or direct the fluid.

    575,    for a distributor having valve means and a filter or screen in the
    flow line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, appropriate subclasses for a filter or screen, per
    se, used in apparatus to separate a gas from an initial mixture with a
    liquid or solid.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses for a
    filter or screen, per se, used to separate particles from a liquid mixture.


CLS 239/590.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 590 comprising a plurality of distinct and
    separate fluid directing or distributing surfaces (e.g., guide vanes or
    grooves).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    553.5,  for a distributor having plural outlets and a plurality of distinct
    and separate fluid directing or distributing surfaces upstream of the
    outlets.


CLS 239/591
TXT Apparatus under subclass 589 in which the flow passage at or near the
    nozzle is provided with an insertable flow conducting member usually for
    replacement or wear resistant reasons.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    265.15, for a reaction motor nozzle liner which is at least partially worn
    away by melting, breaking or corroding.

    461+,   for insertable rotation controlling means of liner form which serve
    as anti-turbulence devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 340 and 393 for a liner
    member in a conduit delivering a fluid to an earth boring or penetrating
    bit or bit element.


CLS 239/592
TXT Apparatus under subclass 589 wherein the nozzle means is characterized by
    the convergence, in the direction of flow, of at least two walls thereof
    and which said walls also give an outline of general flattened appearance.


CLS 239/593
TXT Apparatus under subclass 592 wherein only one wall is angularly related to
    the general direction of flow.


CLS 239/594
TXT Apparatus under subclass 592 having at least two other opposite end or side
    walls which converge in the direction of flow.


CLS 239/595
TXT Apparatus under subclass 592 having the egress outlet comprised of edges
    which are arcuate and in overlying arrangement.


CLS 239/596
TXT Apparatus under subclass 589 in which the orifice is carried by a member of
    disc or dished form and is removable from the remainder of the nozzle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    494+,   for whirlers formed in slotted or apertured discs or plates.

    535,    for fluid pressure responsive flow modifiers having disc-carried
    outlets or of disc form.

    540,    for combined terminal member and valve part comprising a rotatable
    unit of disc form.


CLS 239/597
TXT Apparatus under subclass 589 in which the fluid outlet means has one
    dimension transverse to the general direction of flow which is
    substantially greater than the other dimension transverse to the direction
    of flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    568,    for a distributor having plural outlet means of slit or slot like
    (elongated) apertures.


CLS 239/598
TXT Apparatus under subclass 597 wherein the axis of the outlet in the
    direction of efflux is not in the same general direction as the supply flow
    line axis.


CLS 239/599
TXT Apparatus under subclass 597 wherein the the projection of the fluid outlet
    means in a plane normal to the general direction of flow has an oval or
    elliptical shape.


CLS 239/600
TXT Apparatus under subclass 589 wherein the terminal member is characterized
    by an association of elements making assembly or diassembly thereof an
    optimum operation so as to facilitate cleaning, the replacement of parts
    and the like.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    587.1+, for terminal members adjustably or shiftably connected to a flow
    conduit.


CLS 239/601
TXT Apparatus under subclass 589 in which the configuration of the terminal
    outlet is of the essence.

    (1)     Note.  The shape herein classified pertains to that of the outlet,
    e.g., extremity of the conductor, rather than throat configuration or
    approach channel which is classified in subclass 589 above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    265.11+,for reaction motor discharge nozzle outlets of various shapes or
    configurations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 802 for miscellaneous flow devices,
    especially outlet shapes.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 575 for dispensers having particular outlet
    shapes and see the search notes there included and to Section 14 of that
    class.


CLS 239/602
TXT Apparatus under class definition not hereinbefore provided for.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass are accumulated as cross-references, spray
    elements of terminal members, or end elements not provided for in preceding
    subclasses in which the material from which they are made is of the essence.

    (2)     Note.  Nozzle means of inherent elasticity as of resilient form or
    of material readily capable of flexure or distortion under normal manual
    use are herein included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    451+,   for terminal outlets formed by parts mounted (articulated) for
    relative movement.

    519,    for resilient or deformable deflectors and unitary terminal means.

    534,    for fluid pressure responsive resilient or deformable terminal
    outlets.

    546,    for the subject matter of this subclass; however, including means
    to deform such terminal outlet means.


CLS 239/650
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means for holding a supply
    of material, other than a fluid or a slurry, and means for strewing such
    material in the form of relatively small solid pieces over an extended area
    on a surface.

    (1)     Note.  The phrase "extended area" means an area larger than that
    which would be covered if the material were merely dropped from the supply
    holder.  An area caused by the motion of a supply holder traveling over the
    surface to be strewed and merely dropping material from the supply holder
    is not considered an extended area for purposes of this classification.
    See Class 414, Material or Article Handling, subclasses 467+ or Class 222,
    Dispensing, subclasses 608+ for such devices.  This distinction becomes
    very tenuous in some cases since, for example, a conveyor operating at high
    speed and unloading a wagon will cause a strewing action over an extended
    area.  The line between the definition of this subclass and the art in
    Classes 414 and 222 as to containers with unloading means is that where a
    discharge assistant or unloading device of a type found in such classes is
    claimed and the disclosure is not limited to, or a claim not directed to a
    strewing action, such as may be brought about by conveyor high speed
    operation, classification is in Class 414 or Class 222, but where the
    disclosure is clearly limited or a claim is directed to a substantial
    strewing action in such device additional to that caused merely by motion
    of the supply holder over the surface to be strewed classification under
    the definition of this subclass results from the claiming of some means for
    strewing comprising a moving device which is recognizable as additional to
    a dispenser with a discharge assistant or a vehicle with an unloading
    means.  In some instances the strewing over an extended area is caused by a
    deflecting means or diverging nozzle arrangement or the like which causes
    material issuing from an opening in the supply holder to spread out over an
    area wiser than that of the opening.  The extended area in some cases may
    be little more than a line in the absence of motion of the supply holder
    over the surface to be strewed.

    (2)     Note.  In accordance with the line between the subject matter of
    subclass 650 and Class 222, as indicated in (1) Note, subclass 650 takes
    apparatus in which the particulate material is strewn in the ambient so
    that it falls in an area which is substantially more extensive than that
    covered by merely dropping the material from an opening of a stationary or
    ambulant dispenser. Where, however an opening is, or openings are, formed
    in a wall of the supply holder and strewing is effected by movement of the
    supply holder classification is in Class 222.  See Class 222, subclasses
    160+ and 565, for examples of such strewing.  Further, for classification
    under the definition of subclass 650 rather than in Class 222 the means for
    strewing must be positively claimed.  When such means comprises a
    relatively moving element, such as a rotating distributor the reference to
    it in a claim may be in the broadest terms.  When, however, the strewing
    means comprises a terminal outlet, such as a nozzle, a mere broad
    description of such nozzle will not serve to cause classification under the
    definition of subclass 650; the recitation of the nozzle in a claim must be
    specific and its strewing function must be clearly indicated by the
    disclosure as being due to the specifically recited structure of the
    nozzle, rather than due to ambient wind conditions or the nature of the
    material dispensed, such as fine powder.  The subject matter of subclass
    652 forms an exception to this line, however; that subclass constitutes an
    art collection of devices for strewing by direct hand manipulation.  In
    close cases it is very difficult to determine just what constitutes the
    opening of the dispenser and also what constitutes an added feature of the
    dispenser for spreading material, so that placement of a patent as an
    original will depend on the judgement of the classifier and the placement
    of like art.  Usually a discharge assistant which is in a container or
    extends from the container partially thru an opening is not considered to
    cause classification under the definition of subclass 650 unless the
    special circumstances mentioned in (1) Note are present.

    (3)     Note.  Included in this definition of "strewing means" is a pipe
    having longitudinally spaced apertures or perforations.

    (4)     Note.  Excluded under this definition is a flowable slurry of
    solids in liquid; this is considered a fluid and is classified in another
    section of the class.  Included under this definition is material
    comprising solids with a small amount of liquid mixed therewith, but not
    sufficient to permit flow.

    (5)     Note.  A disclosure of a device for strewing or scattering or
    particulate matter should not be found as an original in any subclass
    following this group unless combined with means for sprinkling, spraying or
    diffusing a fluid (e.g., subclass 336) or as a nozzle, per se, disclosed
    for discharging fluent solid, but also capable of use with a fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146+,   for apparatus comprising mobile tank-type supply means for a fluid
    and means to distribute the fluid.

    214+,   for a fluid distributor comprising a slinger, splasher or a
    deflector rotated relative to an effluent fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses for a cutting means of the type
    therein defined, or the combination comprising such cutting means
    specifically recited, and a nominally recited strewing or scattering means.
     A combination which comprises a comminuting means and a scattering means,
    but in which the cutting means is so broadly recited as to preclude
    classification in Class 83, is classified in this or an indented subclass,
    regardless or how broadly recited is the scattering means.  Also see the
    class definition of Class 239, Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing,
    section III, Search Class, reference to Class 83, for a statement of the
    line.

    111,    Planting, subclasses 130+ for apparatus adapted to strew or scatter
    nonfluid material on the ground combined with a device which mixes or
    covers the strewn material with the soil.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses, especially
    subclasses 638+, for a power driven conveyor which trajects material, which
    may be a fluent, a distance, there being no container for nonfluid material
    claimed.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for a container for nonfluid
    material, and a means for merely dispensing the material, especially
    subclasses 160+ and 608+ for a movably mounted or an ambulant supply
    holder, respectively, having dispensing features for merely discharging
    fluent material.  See also (1) Note above.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses for a comminuting means, per se, or the combination comprising a
    comminuting means specifically recited and a nominally included strewing or
    scattering means.  A combination which comprises a comminuting means and a
    scattering means, but in which the comminuting means is so broadly recited
    as to preclude classification in Class 241, is classified in this or an
    indented subclass, regardless of how broadly recited is the scattering
    means.  Also see the class definition of Class 239, Fluid Sprinkling,
    Spraying, and Diffusing, section III, Search Class, reference to Class 241,
    for a statement of the line.

    291,    Track Sanders, appropriate subclasses for apparatus disclosed as on
    a vehicle for distributing sand or like material to the vehicle wheel tread
    or to a surface on which the vehicle rides such as a road or rail, for the
    purpose of increasing the tractive effect between such wheel and road or
    rail.  An apparatus on a vehicle, the sole purpose of which is the sanding
    of a surface for the use of other vehicles, is found in Class 239, Fluid
    Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 650+.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 101+ for an
    apparatus to distribute material on a road or roadway.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, appropriate subclasses for static
    structures, vehicles, etc., of a kind proper for the class, provided with
    means for discharging them.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), appropriate subclasses
    for an impeller means, per se, disclosed for scattering a fluid.


CLS 239/651
TXT Apparatus under subclass 650 comprising a means disclosed as used for or
    aiding in the operation of, placing the material into the supply holder.

    (1)     Note.  Merely positioning the supply holder for receiving the
    material from a source by gravity does not qualify as loading or loading
    facilitating means under this definition.


CLS 239/652
TXT Apparatus under subclass 650 in which the strewing means comprises a member
    from the end of which the material is strewn, the member being disclosed as
    intended to strew material by being manually moved relative to the body of
    a person manipulating the member, movement being caused without the use of
    a mechanism comprising relatively moving parts.

    (1)     Note.  The member, of and by itself, is not necessarily a strewing
    means under the definition of subclass 650.  The manually caused motion to
    cause strewing is sufficient to qualify under the definition.  The manual
    motion must be intended to be of considerable extent to effect a
    substantial strewing.  See Search Class below for devices which dispense by
    manual jiggling or the like.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    374,    for a hand manipulable shaker or jiggler for sprinkling or spraying
    fluids.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 565 and the subclasses there listed (also see
    section 12 and 12.5 of the main class definition) for hand manipulable
    shakers (e.g., salt shakers, etc.).


CLS 239/653
TXT Apparatus under subclass 650 comprising a means, other than a handle, for
    supporting the apparatus on the body of a person or animal, or a means,
    such as a special contour for the supply holder, related to the function of
    supporting the apparatus on the body of a person or animal.


CLS 239/654
TXT Apparatus under subclass 650 comprising a device which develops a gas flow
    or acts as a source of supply of gas, to mix with the material.

    (1)     Note.  The current of gas may be applied to the material after it
    has been introduced into the ambient, may mingle with the material in the
    strewing means before it reaches the ambient, or may act as a fluid to
    entrain and transport the material to the ambient.

    (2)     Note.  If the current of gas is applied to the material in the
    ambient, this is considered to be the strewing means required for this
    definition (see subclass 650); otherwise the strewing means must meet the
    requirement set out in (2) Note of subclass 650 in regard to either the
    rotary or nozzle type scatterer.

    (3)     Note.  Included under this definition is a device comprising a
    single gas stream developing or source means discharging to a plurality of
    strewing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77+,    for an orchard type mobile duster comprising means to discharge a
    material into a stream of generated gaseous conveying current which carried
    the material onto a tree or trees.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 617 and 630+ for a dispenser with fluid flow
    discharge and subclass 394 for a dispenser in which a fluid (i.e.,
    discharge assistant) contacts the material to be dispensed and moves it
    toward the outlet.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 101+ for gas effected mixing, per se.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, appropriate subclasses for fluid current
    conveyors, particularly subclasses 154+ for fluid current conveyor outlets.
     Generally, any structure recited in a claim that accomplishes scattering
    or spraying (e.g., specific nozzle structure or relative orientation of
    spaced outlets) should be considered for Class 239 rather than Class 406.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 524 for a self-loading or
    unloading vehicle having a load handling means of the fluid current
    conveyor type.


CLS 239/655
TXT Apparatus under subclass 654 comprising an elongated strewing means
    extending in the direction of its length outwardly from the supply holder
    when looked at in plain view the longitudinal axis of the elongated
    strewing means being substantially transverse to the direction of any
    intended movement of the supply holder.

    (1)     Note.  For meaning of "elongated strewing means" under this
    definition see (1) Note in subclass 664.


CLS 239/656
TXT Apparatus under subclass 650 in which a single strewing means is supplied
    with material from a plurality of supply holders.

    (1)     Note.  The supply holders must be primary containers of the
    material such that different materials may be supplied.  A mere dividing
    wall in the lower portion of a container is not included, such apparatus
    being classified on other features.

    (2)     Note.  Included under this definition is any arrangement of two
    primary holders, connected in such manner that a mixture of the two
    materials can be supplied to the single strewing means.


CLS 239/657
TXT Apparatus under subclass 650 in which the supply holder is mounted on a
    support means so as to be movable from a first position in which the
    material in the holder is not readily movable out of the holder by gravity
    to a second position in which gravity causes or greatly assists in the
    movement of the material out of the holder.

    (1)     Note.  The support means must comprise more than a wheel axle about
    which the supply holder may be tilted by the user of the device.  Such
    devices are classified on other features.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is the locus for patents comprising tilting
    containers of the dump truck type, even if details of the dump mechanism
    are not recited.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 166 for a dispensing device comprising a
    container for material to be dispensed, the container mounted for tilting
    motion to discharge by gravity, e.g., mounted about a wheel axle so as to
    be tilted by the user of the device.  The line between the two Classes, 222
    and 239, Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing is as follows: a
    dispensing hopper, per se, but not of the tilting type goes into Class 222,
    into a subclass other than 166; a dumping vehicle combined with a hopper
    attachment which acts as a spreader but not to spread a swath wider than
    the vehicle goes into Class 222, subclass 166 if claimed as a dumping
    vehicle and to another subclass as an original if not so claimed; a dumping
    vehicle disclosure and a claim to the combination of the vehicle and a
    hopper or spreader attachment which covers a swath wider than the vehicle
    will be classified in this subclass (Class 239, subclass 657).

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 469+ for a self-loading or
    unloading vehicle having a load receiving (i.e., supporting) portion which
    is pivotable relative to the horizontal.


CLS 239/658
TXT Apparatus under subclass 650 in which the means for strewing comprises a
    flexible element which is rotable about an axis and is so constructed or
    arranged that it assumes a substantially vertical or drooping position when
    at rest and a position substantially at right angles to the axis when
    rotated to strew the material.

    (1)     Note.  For the means of "rotates about an axis" see (1) Note in
    subclass 681.

    (2)     Note.  Included as a flexible element under this definition is an
    element pivotally connected to a rotary carrier.

    (3)     Note.  The means may be positioned within the container to scatter
    the material therein, or may be without the the container, the material
    being supplied thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 45 for an implement of the flail type for
    working or disturbing the earth.


CLS 239/659
TXT Apparatus under subclass 650 in which the strewing means has an
    oscillating, reciprocating, shaking or other back and forth movement while
    in operation in order to effect or assist the strewing function.

    (1)     Note.  The movement of the strewing means may be caused either by a
    positive drive or by the impingement of the material onto such means so as
    to cause the back and forth movement due to the construction or arrangement
    of the means, e.g., the means is of springy material which vibrates when
    hit by the material.

    (2)     Note.  The main structural difference between this subclass (659)
    and the vibratory subclasses of Class 222, Dispensing, subclasses 161,
    196-203 is that in subclass 659 the vibrating member is sufficiently near
    the terminal material contact point that the vibratory movement causes the
    discharging material to scatter, while in Class 222 the vibration merely
    causes the material to move toward or out of the discharge outlet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for a process of scattering or spraying a fluent material by an
    element which is caused to continuously vibrate.

    102.1+, for a device which sprays a fluid by means of a motor driven
    element which cyclically and rapidly changes the  normal character of
    discharge of fluid from an outlet (e.g., by continuously moving the
    discharge member, or continuously moving a member in contact with the
    fluid).

    225.1+, for a fluid spraying or sprinkling device comprising a distributor
    which is continuously moving (e.g., oscillating) relative to a support
    during discharge.

    652,    for a device in which a nonfluid material is caused to be scattered
    or strewn by reciprocation of a tube manually by a person.


CLS 239/660
TXT Apparatus under subclass 650 in which a part of the apparatus shifts its
    position relative to an adjacent part without the intervention of a human
    operator, and in response to a transient condition in which a part of the
    apparatus would be subjected to undesirable stress (e.g., when a lump, clod
    or rock is encountered in otherwise easily disintegratable material) if
    shifting did not occur.

    (1)     Note.  Shifting of position which occurs in order to take up the
    shock of starting is not included under this definition.  Such devices are
    classified on other features.


CLS 239/661
TXT Apparatus under subclass 650 comprising a means disclosed for attaching the
    apparatus to a motor vehicle of the type which does not have any
    substantial provision for supporting material for transportation but is
    especially intended to pull a trailing vehicle or to pull or support an
    implement, such as a plow, which operates to perform its intended function
    while being so pulled or supported.

    (1)     Note.  The motor vehicle of this definition is usually called a
    tractor.

    (2)     Note.  Apparatus under the definition is typically constructed to
    be used as a detachable unitary attachment for a tractor.


CLS 239/662
TXT Apparatus under subclass 650 in which there is a means (e.g., a leak proof
    supply holder) which is especially provided because the material contains
    liquid which tends to or does separate from the solid portions of the
    material.

    (1)     Note.  The material as a whole under this definition is not a
    slurry, i.e., a mixture of solid particles and a liquid which is handled as
    a viscous liquid.  Apparatus for handling a slurry is classifiable as if
    the slurry were a liquid.

    Typically, the material being handled by the apparatus of this subclass is
    manure, some portion of which is liquid.


CLS 239/663
TXT Apparatus under subclass 650 not provided for in preceding subclasses and
    which (1) is in combination with features other than for material handling
    or treating or (2) by relative rearrangement of its parts or by the
    addition or omission of a part is so changed as to become (A) basic subject
    matter of the same class of a different character or having a different
    mode of operation or (B) basic subject matter of another class.

    (1)     Note.  A mere preamble in a claim to the effect that a device is
    convertible or is a conversion attachment is generally not sufficient for
    classification under this definition. The conversion feature should be
    spelled out as by (a) specifically claiming one embodiment of an apparatus
    having a first function and claiming with that embodiment a feature useable
    only for a different function, or (b) repeated functional statements in the
    claim, or (c) a preamble which is so long and detailed that it may be
    considered part of the body of the claim.  Where no other suitable
    classification exists a broad mention of conversion may be enough for
    classification under this definition.

    (2)     Note.  The change in the apparatus must be more than merely placing
    a part in one of a series of adjacent holes, or making a change which
    amounts to only an adjustment, changing between operative and inoperative
    positions or other minor alteration in the overall functioning of the
    device.

    (3)     Note.  Examples of devices included under this definition of
    "combined" are combinations with (1) a separator to classify or assort
    different portions of the material, (2) a plurality of different types of
    discharge members (e.g., a material discharge guide for Class 222,
    Dispensing and a strewing means for this class, etc.) with means, as a
    valve to selectively and alternatively choose the type of discharge
    depending on the material handled, (3) brake means acting on vehicle
    wheels, (4) vehicle features in addition to those required for the handling
    of the material, etc.

    Included under this definition of convertible is an unloading or dispensing
    vehicle of the type classified in Class 414, Material or Article Handling,
    Class 298, Land Vehicles:  Dumping, or Class 222, Dispensing and a strewing
    or scattering means of the type classified in this group of subclasses and
    attachable or removable at will.

    Excluded from "combined" under this definition is the combination with any
    type of physical treatment of the material (e.g., comminuting, heating,
    agitating, etc.) or handling, (e.g., loading, conveying, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    676,    for an end gate or barrier for a supply holder having a means
    feeding material horizontally, the end gate or barrier being upstream of
    the strewing means and adjustable to act as a regulating, lump breaking,
    disintegrating means or the like.


CLS 239/664
TXT Apparatus under subclass 650 which is intended to be used by traversing a
    surface, comprising an elongated strewing means extending in the direction
    of its length outwardly from the supply holder when looked at in plain
    view, the longitudinal axis of the elongated strewing means being
    substantially transverse to the direction of intended movement of the
    supply holder.

    (1)     Note.  The "elongated strewing means" under this definition
    comprises any arrangement of strewing means which (1) results in a pattern
    of strewn material which is generally elongated when the whole apparatus is
    not traversing the surface, the pattern extending in the direction of its
    length outwardly from the supply container and laterally of the direction
    of traverse of the apparatus over the surface and (2) is physically located
    outwardly from the container in a direction laterally of the direction of
    traverse of the apparatus over the surface.

    (2)     Note.  Excluded under this definition of "elongated strewing means"
    is a single rotating scatter located outwardly of one side of the
    container, or two rotating scatterers, one on each side of the container
    and extending outwardly therefrom in a direction laterally to the direction
    of traverse; such devices will be found in 681+. However, a plurality of
    rotating scattering units arranged side by side transverse to the direction
    of movement of the container and located outwardly of the container is
    included under this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    655,    for apparatus comprising a similar elongated, outwardly extending
    strewing unit and a means which develops a gas flow or acts as a source of
    gas, the gas mixing with the material and discharging through the strewing
    unit.


CLS 239/665
TXT Apparatus under subclass 650 comprising a strewing means rotating about an
    axis and means for changing some characteristic of the pattern of the
    material being strewed, such as its direction or width.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "rotating about an axis" see (1) Note in
    the definitions of subclass 681.

    (2)     Note.  A means for changing a characteristic comprising no more
    than a means for changing the speed of the strewing means, a means for
    changing the amount of material fed to the strewing means or a means for
    changing the speed or direction of a vehicle on which the strewing means is
    mounted is not included.  Such devices are classified on other features.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97+,    for apparatus in which pattern control comprises means for
    synchronizing a flow regulator with a cyclically moving distributor.


CLS 239/666
TXT Apparatus under subclass 665 comprising a selectively adjustable member
    which intercepts the path of at least some of the material after it leaves
    the strewing means, the adjustment of the member effecting some change in
    the pattern of the material being strewed.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass definition, a rotating
    "feeder" which inherently acts as a scatterer, but which, as disclosed,
    delivers material to an adjustable deflecting or strewing element, is
    considered to be the "strewing means".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    650,    for an adjustable deflecting or strewing element which acts on
    material supplied thereto by a nonrotating feeder means.


CLS 239/667
TXT Apparatus under subclass 650 comprising at least two strewing means
    rotating (1) about an axis which is common to both, each strewing means
    rotating in a direction opposite to that of the other, or (2) about
    separate, angularly related axes.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "rotating about an axis" see (1) Note in
    subclass 681.


CLS 239/668
TXT Apparatus under subclass 650 in which the supply holder has an opening in a
    lower portion thereof and is so constructed, with at least one sloping wall
    leading to the opening, that the material is discharged by the action of
    gravity, and in which the strewing means rotates about an axis and receives
    the material in a direction substantially transverse to the axis.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "rotates about an axis" see (1) Note in
    subclass 681.

    (2)     Note.  An agitating or disintegrating means may be used to assist
    the flow of material by breaking up lumps, but the supply holder must be so
    constructed that the use of a conveyor or ejector to move material
    horizontally is not necessary.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    679+,   for an apparatus comprising a conveyor or other follower mechanism
    feeding material substantially horizontally towards a rotary scatterer
    which receives the material peripherally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 311, 359+ and 523+ for a
    hopper  which feeds or discharges material to a conveyor where no
    scattering or strewing of the material is intended.


CLS 239/669
TXT Apparatus under subclass 668 in which the strewing means or a portion
    thereof is located in the confines of the supply holder.


CLS 239/670
TXT Apparatus under subclass 650 comprising a driven strewing means, the power
    for driving the strewing means being furnished by a motor which is used to
    propel a vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  The drive train from the motor to the strewing means may
    include a ground wheel driven by the motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    661,    for similar apparatus in which the power take off means is from a
    tractor type vehicle to which the apparatus is attached.


CLS 239/671
TXT Apparatus under 650 comprising a means acting in substantially a linear
    direction on the top portion of the material in the supply holder to force
    or deliver the material towards the strewing means, in the manner of a rake.

    (1)     Note.  A rotating means, e.g., a "beater", acting on the top of the
    material is not included in this definition.  See subclass 680 for a beater
    acting on the top portion of the material.


CLS 239/672
TXT Apparatus under subclass 650 comprising means acting on the material in the
    supply holder for delivering it in a horizontal direction toward the
    strew-means, said delivering means comprising (1) a driven conveyor or (2)
    a means acting as an end of the material in the supply holder.

    (1)     Note.  If a series of strewing means is claimed, (e.g., a rotating
    "beater" throwing material to a rotating "widespread") a strewing means
    upstream of the final means is considered to be a kind of conveyor.  If,
    however, such a series of strewing means is shown, but the final one is not
    claimed then an upstream strewing means, e.g., a beater, which, as claimed,
    functions like a final strewing means, is considered to be a final strewing
    means for purposes of placement under the definition of subclass 650.

    (2)     Note.  In order to qualify under this definition, there must be a
    substantial horizontal component of motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    671,    for a supply holder and a means which acts substantially in a
    linear direction on the top portion of the material to move the material,
    in the manner of a rake, towards the strewing means.


CLS 239/673
TXT Apparatus under subclass 672 comprising at least two strewing means, each
    of which rotates about an axis to perform its strewing function and each of
    which is disclosed as strewing material into final position in the ambient,
    rather than to another downstream strewing means, the material being
    presented to each of the strewing means in a direction which is
    substantially parallel to the axis of rotation and being scattered in
    substantially a radial direction.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "rotates about an axis" see (1) Note in
    subclass 681.

    (2)     Note.  Just what constitutes a plurality of strewing units rather
    than a single unit with a plurality of parts is sometimes difficult to
    decide.  If one unit rotates on a different axis than another, or in a
    direction opposite to that of another, a plurality of units is considered
    to exist.  However, sometimes where there are distinct sub-assemblies, each
    comprising a complete unit, a plurality of units are considered to exist
    even if they rotate about the same axis.


CLS 239/674
TXT Apparatus under subclass 672 in which the means for delivering material
    toward the strewing means is located outside of the confines of the
    principal supply holder for the material.

    (1)     Note.  In addition to the delivering means outside of the supply
    holder, there may be means within the holder also delivering material
    toward the strewing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    655     and 664, for a device comprising a container and laterally
    extending scatterer in which the means feeding to the scatterer may be
    outside of the container.


CLS 239/675
TXT Apparatus under subclass 672 in which the means for delivering material
    toward the strewing means comprises a conveyor having a generally screwlike
    configuration so that it turns on its axis material is forced along the
    direction of its axis.


CLS 239/676
TXT Apparatus under subclass 672 comprising a movable means acting on the
    material before reaching the strewing means, which functions as a valve to
    regulate flow of material to the strewing means or in one position prevents
    the material from pressing against the strewing means and in another
    position permits the material to reach the strewing means.


CLS 239/677
TXT Apparatus under subclass 672 comprising a driven strewing means and means
    for varying the rate of movement of the strewing means, or of the means
    delivering material towards the strewing means, independently of the speed
    of the primary driving means for the strewing or delivering means.

    (1)     Note.  The speed varying means must be capable of changing speed at
    the will of the operator while the apparatus is in motion; merely replacing
    one gear with another while the apparatus is at rest is not included.  A
    means which stops the motion of the conveyor or other feeding means at a
    predetermined position is excluded and will be found in subclass 678, even
    if the conveyor or other feeding means is reversed in direction and its
    speed in this reverse direction increased.


CLS 239/678
TXT Apparatus under subclass 672 comprising means which causes the motion of
    the material delivering means to be interrupted when the delivering means
    arrives at a pre-selected position, without the intervention of a human
    operator.


CLS 239/679
TXT Apparatus under subclass 672 comprising a strewing means which rotates
    about an axis and which receives the material in a direction generally
    transverse to the axis of rotation.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "rotates about an axis" see (1) Note in
    subclass 681.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    668,    for a strewing means which receives the material in a direction
    generally transverse to the axis of rotation, and in which the supply
    holder is constructed with an opening in the lower wall and a sloping wall
    leading to the opening, the material being discharged to the strewing means
    by the action of gravity.


CLS 239/680
TXT Apparatus under subclass 679 comprising a means rotating about an axis and
    acting on the material before it reaches the final rotating strewing means
    to deliver the material towards the strewing means or to strew the material
    over an extended area.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "rotating about an axis" see (1) Note in
    subclass 681.


CLS 239/681
TXT Apparatus under subclass 650 comprising a means which rotates about an axis
    in order to strew material.

    (1)     Note.  Rotation about an axis is a movement of more than 360
    degrees about the axis.  The axis may be fixed or moving but the rotating
    means must be essentially wheellike in nature or moving in a substantially
    circular orbit about the axis.  An endless conveyor type device which moves
    in an elongated orbit is not included.  Such strewing means is classified
    on other features.

    (2)     Note.  An apparatus including a rotating means which acts to strew
    material but which is disclosed as feeding the material to a downstream
    distributing means is classifiable under this definition if the downstream
    means is not claimed.  If the downstream means is claimed then the upstream
    rotating means is considered a kind of conveyor and the apparatus is
    classifiable in subclasses 672+ or in other places depending on the nature
    of the downstream distributor or other features.


CLS 239/682
TXT Apparatus under subclass 681 comprising at least two scattering or strewing
    means.

    (1)     Note.  For comments relative to determination of "plural" strewing
    units, see (2) Note in subclass 673.


CLS 239/683
TXT Apparatus under subclass 681 in which there is a means to agitate or break
    up lumps in the material before it reaches the strewing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    366,    Agitating, for agitating devices, per se.


CLS 239/684
TXT Apparatus under subclass 681 in which a claim includes some specific
    recitation of the means which functions to impart motion to the strewing
    means.

    (1)     Note.  In order to qualify under this definition of "specific
    driving means", the claim must include at the minimum a power means (e.g.,
    prime mover, ground wheel, hand crank, etc.) and one portion of a gear
    train or linkage system (e.g., pulley, belt, bell crank, etc.) between the
    power means and the strewing means, claimed in such a manner as to clearly
    establish the presence of both means.  Merely reciting a broad "means"
    which, as disclosed, includes the entire driving means is not included
    under this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    670,    for a drive means for the strewing means comprising a power take
    off arrangement from a vehicle.


CLS 239/685
TXT Apparatus under subclass 684 in which the means which imparts motion
    comprises a wheel freely rolling over the ground.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    654+,   for a device in which a ground wheel imparts motion to a gaseous
    current generating means.


CLS 239/686
TXT Apparatus under subclass 684 in which a means operated by the hand or foot
    of a person or animal supplies power for the drive.


CLS 239/687
TXT Apparatus under subclass 681 in which the rotary strewing means acts on
    material which is presented to it in a substantially axial direction to
    throw it out in a substantially radial direction by centrifugal force.


CLS 239/688
TXT Apparatus under subclass 687 in which the strewing means comprises at least
    one radially extending tube which receives material at an end near the axis
    of rotation and throws it out at the other end.


CLS 239/689
TXT Apparatus under subclass 650 in which the means for strewing is of tubular
    form, e.g., a nozzle, or is enclosed in a housing which surrounds it.

    (1)     Note.  The housing completely extends around the strewing means in
    cross-section but a portion of the strewing means may protrude beyond the
    end of the housing.

    (2)     Note.  The strewing means may comprise a plurality of tubular
    members which individually are not strewing means but collectively are a
    strewing means (e.g., a plurality of tubes branching out and diverging from
    a single source).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    652,    for a manually moved tube to strew material.


CLS 239/690
TXT ELECTROSTATIC TYPE:

    Apparatus under the class definition to project, scatter, sprinkle, or drip
    material from a supply system into the ambient air or atmosphere combined
    with a means to electrostatically charge the resulting distributed material
    in order to obtain a desired characteristic, e.g., dispersion, drop size,
    velocity, or direction.

    (1)     Note.  Some characteristic structure of an electrostatic
    distribution must be claimed to warrant classification herein, for example,
    insulated electric conductors, electric connecting means, and nominal
    electric power supply means have been considered significant electrostatic
    distributor features for classification herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for methods of electrostatically distributing material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, pertinent subclasses, especially subclasses
    620+, and see the Notes thereto for patents claiming an electrostatic
    spraying device and (a) a work conveyor or other specific or nominal work
    supporting device, (b) some relation of the spraying device to the
    positively recited work, e.g., the relative spacing or attitude between the
    work and the spraying device, or (c) a particular motion of the sprayer
    relative to the work determined exclusively by characteristics of the work
    or by the law of the machine of which the sprayer forms a part.  A nominal
    claiming of the work itself and/or electrostatic, spray charging electrode
    in space has been included in this class (239) provided there is no claimed
    relation between the work and either the electrode or the fluid spraying or
    projecting means.


            The following examples are considered work relations and indicate
    classification in Class 118 when the claim also includes positive
    recitation of the work (even though broadly or by name only):  (a)
    electrical connections between the work and either the fluid sprayer or an
    electrostatic charge generator, or (b) a statement that the sprayer is
    spaced close to the work.

            See Class 118, Coating Apparatus, section IX of the class
    definition for additional explanation of the line.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, appropriate
    subclasses, especially subclasses 226+, and see the Notes thereto for
    particle charging methods and apparatus involving:  (a) electrostatic
    spraying with significant supply means limited to use only with powder or
    pulverulent material, (b) residual electrostatic dispersing of liquid into
    spray or fog (e.g., liquid removed from the supply system solely by
    electrostatic force).  A claimed combination of a distributor means under
    the definition of Class 239 and means to electrostatically charge the fluid
    upstream, at, or downstream of the distributor is proper subject matter for
    Class 239.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 458+ for coating processes in general
    wherein an electrostatic charge is utilized to perfect the coating
    operation.


CLS 239/690.1
TXT Induction charging:

    Apparatus under subclass 690 wherein the distributed material is in the
    form of charged particles which respond to an influence or variation in an
    electric force field created by the charging means at the time the
    particles are formed, thereby obtaining a charge of opposite polarity to
    that of the charging means.

    (1)     Note.  Induction charging is a different type of particle charging
    means than a "corona discharge" charging means in which particles, after
    they are formed, are charged with the same polarity as the corona discharge
    electrode by direct transfer of that charge through contact with either the
    electrode itself or with atmospheric ions generated by the electrode.


CLS 239/691
TXT With automatic safety feature:

    Apparatus under subclass 690 in which a spray device is provided with means
    for sensing an abnormal hazardous condition of operation which may or may
    not occur and is provided with a further means for interrupting the
    electrical power supply to the spray device when the hazardous condition is
    sensed.


CLS 239/692
TXT With electrogasdynamic generator in spray device:

    Apparatus under subclass 690 whereby a spray device is provided with means
    whereby gaseous fluid is utilized in the production of an electric charge,
    the electric charge being transmitted to the spray material passing through
    the spray device.


CLS 239/693
TXT Spray device recovers unused particles:

    Apparatus under subclass 690 wherein a spray device is provided with means
    for collecting particles not consumed during a work operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 326 for projected or spray type coating
    apparatus including a hood or offtake for waste material, and see the
    search notes thereunder.


CLS 239/694
TXT With cyclical movable support:

    Apparatus under subclass 690 wherein a spray device is fixedly mounted on
    structure having recurring to-and-fro movement along a dimension of an
    article to be sprayed.


CLS 239/695
TXT Plural spray devices:

    Apparatus under subclass 690 in which there is provided at least two
    separate units each comprising a spray means for performing work.


CLS 239/696
TXT Having plural exit openings:

    Apparatus under subclass 690 wherein a spray device comprises at least two
    exiting ports through which fluent spray material is emitted.


CLS 239/697
TXT Fixed member deflects exiting material:

    Apparatus under subclass 690 wherein there is provided a member in the path
    of travel of spray material at or forward of a spray device exit for
    spreading or otherwise shunting exiting material in a desired manner.

    (1)     Note.  A valve member at the exit opening of the spray device which
    when opened deflects exiting material from a normal path of travel is
    deemed proper for classification here.


CLS 239/698
TXT Forward of nozzle:

    Apparatus under subclass 697 wherein the member in the path of travel of
    the material is positioned forward of the spray material exit.


CLS 239/699
TXT With impeller (e.g., vibrator):

    Apparatus under subclass 690 wherein a spray device comprises a positively
    moved member for imparting a desired motion to the spray material.


CLS 239/700
TXT Rotary:

    Apparatus under subclass 699 wherein the positively moved member turns or
    revolves about an axis.


CLS 239/701
TXT With spray portion intercept member:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 provided with shield means positioned to allow
    a portion of the spray material to be directed toward the object being
    sprayed.


CLS 239/702
TXT With axially spaced impeller surfaces:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 wherein the positively moved member comprises
    at least two impeller portions or members spaced along the revolving axis.


CLS 239/703
TXT Dish- or cone-shaped impeller:

    Apparatus under subclass 700 comprises a revolving member having a
    peripheral material emitting edge in a plane other than the plane
    containing a central portion thereof.


CLS 239/704
TXT With fluid entrainment:

    Apparatus under subclass 690 wherein the spray device comprises means for
    combining the spray material with a fluid.

    (1)     Note.  The fluid may be used to convey, impel, mix, atomize, etc.,
    the spray material.


CLS 239/705
TXT With air outlet forward of material outlet:

    Apparatus under subclass 704 wherein the spray device is provided with
    structure extending forward of the spray material outlet, the structure
    having at least one fluid orifice forward of the spray material outlet.


CLS 239/706
TXT With charging electrode mounted on spray device:

    Apparatus under subclass 704 wherein the spray device comprises spray
    material ionizing means.


CLS 239/707
TXT Extending forward of material outlet:

    Apparatus under subclass 706 wherein the ionizing means is either forward
    of or has a portion extending forward of the spray material exit.


CLS 239/708
TXT Pressurized spray material:

    Apparatus under subclass 690 wherein spray material is positively moved for
    passage through the spray device.


CLS 239/722
TXT MOBILE DISTRIBUTOR:

    Apparatus under the class definition including distribution means which
    sprinkles, sprays or throws fluid over an area or areas to be treated, the
    distribution means being supplies with fluid from a source or sources which
    are fixed in position and being mounted on a carrier means whereby the
    device may be readily moved from one place to another.

    (1)     Note.  Movement of the carrier may take place (1) during the
    spraying operation usually for the purpose of increasing the size of the
    treatment area or (2) between spraying operations so that the device may be
    moved from one location to another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146+,   for mobile distributors whose source of supply is carried by the
    distributor.

    225+,   for a distributor which continuously moves relative to a fixed
    support during spraying.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 355.12 for apparatus designed to store or
    retrieve a hose conduit or nozzle and mounted on a vehicle which supports
    the apparatus on the ground and moves it from one place to another and
    subclasses 899+ for fluid handling apparatus arranged on vehicular means to
    move the apparatus to a place of use; note the line between Class 137 and
    Class 239 as specified in the class definition of Class 239, section III,
    subsection G, under the Search Class note and also note the exception to
    that line in subclasses 726+ below.


CLS 239/723
TXT Irrigation device:

    Apparatus under subclass 722 wherein the treating fluid includes water and
    the area or areas to be treated is the ground.


CLS 239/724
TXT Open pond or ditch type supply:

    Apparatus under subclass 723 wherein the source of fluid supplied to the
    distributor is (1) a body of water exposed at ground level and confined by
    features of terrain, or (2) comprises coverless tanks, through, flumes, or
    the like, along which, or over which the apparatus is propelled or guided.


CLS 239/725
TXT Floating distribution means:

    Apparatus under subclass 724 in which the distributor is buoyantly
    supported by the supply fluid.


CLS 239/726
TXT Nozzles spaced along mobile pipeline:

    Apparatus under subclass 723 comprising an elongated, generally
    horizontally disposed, fluid conducting conduit supported by vehicular
    means above the ground, the conduit being disclosed as either having or
    being intended to have fluid distribution means at spaced intervals there
    along.

    (1)     Note.  In regard to the line between Class 137 and Class 239 (as
    specified in the class definition of Class 239, section III, subsection G,
    under the Search Class note), the placement of documents within Class 239,
    these subclasses (726+), and Class 137, subclasses 899+, represents an
    exception to the specified class line.  This exception to the line between
    Classes 137 and 239 relates only to the placement of documents between
    subclasses 726+ of Class 239.  Specifically, any document which disclosed a
    portable, over-head type of irrigating or other sprinkling apparatus, which
    is supported on vehicular means, which has some form of sprinkler or other
    spray outlet means secured thereto for sprinkling or spraying fluid onto
    the ground, and which claims subject matter encompassed by the definition
    of Class 239, subclasses 726+ regardless of whether or not a sprinkler or
    other spray outlet means was specified in the claims.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266+,   for plural longitudinally spaced outlet means in a flow line.


CLS 239/727
TXT Including additive supply means:

    Apparatus under subclass 726, additionally including means to distribute a
    material such as a fertilizer, pesticide, or the like along with, or in
    addition to, the irrigating fluid.


CLS 239/728
TXT Center pivot:

    Apparatus under subclass 726 wherein the conduit has one end thereof
    secured to a pivot point fixed with respect to the ground; and wherein the
    vehicular support means is radially outwardly spaced from the pivot towards
    the other end of the conduit which is translatable so that the conduit is
    constrained to move in an arcuate path about the pivot point.


CLS 239/729
TXT With noncircular coverage:

    Apparatus under subclass 728 including means to vary the radial extent of
    the treated area from the pivot point at certain distinct intervals along
    the arcuate path of the apparatus so that a noncircular area is irrigated.

    (1)     Note.  Movement of the center pivot irrigator may be temporarily
    stopped at specific points along its arcuate path to affect the noncircular
    pattern of coverage.


CLS 239/730
TXT Including means allowing articulation of adjacent pipe sections:

    Apparatus under subclass 728 wherein the conduit is comprised of a
    plurality of elongated conduited sections which are coaxially connected
    together in end-to-end fluid-conducting relationship so as to form the
    elongated supply conduit or fluid distributing line, the connection between
    any two adjacent conduit sections being such that one conduit section is
    permitted to flex or pivot relative to an adjacent conduit section about an
    axis of the adjacent conduit section so that deviations from a straight
    line alignment between adjacent conduit sections are permitted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    732,    for means allowing articulation of adjacent pipe sections on a
    translating distributor.


CLS 239/731
TXT With means to detect misalignment:

    Apparatus under subclass 730 including sensing means, operatively
    associated with the conduit, to detect when the longitudinal axis of any
    one conduit section deviates from a straight line relationship with the
    longitudinal axis of an adjacent conduit section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    733,    for means to detect mis-alignment of pipe sections on a translating
    distributor.


CLS 239/732
TXT Including means allowing articulation of adjacent pipe sections:

    Apparatus under subclass 726 wherein the conduit is comprised of a
    plurality of elongated conduit sections which are coaxially connected
    together in end-to-end fluid-conducting, relationship so as to form the
    elongated supply conduit or fluid distributing line, the connection between
    any two adjacent conduit sections being such that one conduit section is
    permitted to flex or pivot relative to an adjacent conduit section about an
    axis generally perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the adjacent
    conduit section so that deviations from a straight-line alignment between
    adjacent conduit sections are permitted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    730,    for center pivot irrigators including means allowing articulation
    of adjacent pipe sections.


CLS 239/733
TXT With means to detect misalignment:

    Apparatus under subclass 732 including sensing means, operatively
    associated with the conduit, to detect when the longitudinal axis of any
    one conduit section deviates from a straight line relationship with the
    longitudinal axis of an adjacent conduit section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    703,    for center pivot irrigators with means to detect misalignment of
    adjacent pipe sections.


CLS 239/734
TXT Trail tube:

    Apparatus under subclass 726 including an elongated fluid conductor,
    secured in fluid conducting relationship, to the conduit in such a manner
    that the longitudinal axis of the fluid conductor is generally
    perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the conduit, and wherein the
    fluid conductor is disclosed as either having or being intended to have
    sprinkler or other spray outlet means formed therein or secured thereto for
    sprinkling or spraying fluid onto the ground.


CLS 239/735
TXT Propelling means:

    Apparatus under subclass 726 provided with a means for moving the
    distributor bodily across an areas to be irrigated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    744+,   for propelling means for mobile distributors of the nonpipeline
    type.


CLS 239/736
TXT Reel take-up:

    Apparatus under subclass 735 wherein the means for moving the distributor
    comprises an elongated flexible member and a rotary means which takes in or
    winds up the elongated flexible member to cause motion of the distributor.

    (1)     Note. The flexible member may be either a cable, wire or the like
    tether, or the supply line itself.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195+,   for flexible flow line or outlet storage and retrieval means.

    745,    for a reel take-up drive on a nonpipeline type distributor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 370+ for a reeling
    device for elongated material which may include a hose.


CLS 239/737
TXT Prime mover:

    Apparatus under subclass 735 having a self-contained power source mounted
    thereon which causes movement of the distributor.


CLS 239/738
TXT Fluid motor or spray fluid operated:

    Apparatus under subclass 735 having means responsive to the flow of fluid
    in the supply line or from its discharge from the egress ports to cause
    movement of the distributor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237+,   for spray fluid motor drive means and 263 for fluid motive means
    for nontranslating distributors moving relative a base during spraying.

    747,    for a fluid motor or spray fluid operated propelling means on a
    nonpipeline type of mobile distributor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclasses for a
    fluid operated expansible chamber motor, per se, which may be used to
    propel the distributor in the absence of claimed structure to discharge the
    motor exhaust fluid through the distributor.

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, appropriate subclasses for a
    fluid operated motor, per se, which may be used to propel the distributor
    and for the combination of such a motor with a nominally recited
    distributor in the absence of claimed structure to discharge the motor
    exhaust fluid through the distributor.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, for a rotary expansible chamber
    motor, per se, which may be used to propel the distributor and for the
    combination of such a motor with a nominally recited distributor  in the
    absence of claimed structure to discharge the motor exhaust fluid through
    the distributor.


CLS 239/739
TXT Guided translating distributor:

    Apparatus under subclass 726 including means constraining the distributor
    to bodily move along a predetermined path or course.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    743+,   for a guided translating distributor of the nonpipeline type.


CLS 239/740
TXT Supply line traversing means:

    Apparatus under subclass 739 wherein the distributor is guided along a path
    established by the relative disposition of a fluid conducting conduit which
    furnishes fluid to the distributor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    736,    for supply traversing pipeline distributors which are propelled by
    reeling in the supply line.

    745+,   for supply line traversing distributors of the nonpipeline type
    which are propelled by reeling in the supply line.

    748,    for supply line traversing guided distributors of the nonpipeline
    type.


CLS 239/741
TXT Wheel mounted for rotation about longitudinal axis of pipeline:

    Apparatus under subclass 726 wherein the vehicular support means comprises
    wheel means secured to the pipeline in such a manner that the pheripheral
    portion of the wheel means rotates or circumferentially moves about the
    longitudinal axis of the pipeline during movement of the pipeline over the
    ground.


CLS 239/742
TXT Longitudinal movement of pipeline:

    Apparatus under subclass 726 in which the structure and arrangement of the
    vehicular means permit the pipeline to be moved in the direction of its
    length.


CLS 239/743
TXT Propelled or guided translating distributor:

    Apparatus under subclass 723 provided with either (1) a means constraining
    the distributor to move along a predetermined path or (2) means moving said
    distributor bodily.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    735+,   for a propelling means for a mobile pipeline.

    739,    for a guided translating pipeline.


CLS 239/744
TXT Propelling means:

    Apparatus under subclass 743 provided with means for bodily moving the
    distributor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    735+,   for propelling means for mobile pipeline distributors.


CLS 239/745
TXT Reel take-up:

    Apparatus under subclass 744 wherein the means for moving the distributor
    comprises an elongated flexible member to cause motion of the distributor.

    (1)     Note.  The flexible member may be a cable, wire or the like tether;
    or the supply line itself.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195+,   for flexible flow line or outlet storage or retrieval means.

    736,    for a reel take-up drive on a pipeline type distributor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 370+ for a reeling
    device for elongated material which may include a hose.


CLS 239/746
TXT Intermittent grip or inching type:

    Apparatus under subclass 744 in which the motive means for the mobile
    distributor is such that it causes a step-by-step or go-stop-go type of
    advance usually by employing a reciprocating or oscillating pushing or
    pulling means along a flexible member.

    (1)     Note.  The flexible member may be a cable wire, or the like element
    which acts as either (1) a rail by having both ends fixed in position to
    thereby establish a predetermined pathway constraining the distributor as
    to the route it will travel or (2) a tether by having one end attached to
    the distributor and the other end fixed in position thereby constraining
    freedom of movement of the distributors about that fixed position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    740,    for a supply line traversing means on a guided translating pipeline
    type of distributor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 126+ oscillating or
    reciprocating to intermittent unidirectional motion.


CLS 239/747
TXT Fluid motor or spray fluid operated:

    Apparatus under subclass 744 having means responsive to the flow of fluid
    in the supply line or from its discharge from the egress line ports to
    cause movement of the distributor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237,    for spray fluid motor drive means.

    263,    for fluid motive means for nontranslating distributors moving
    relative a base during spraying.

    738,    for a fluid motor or spray fluid operated propelled means on a
    pipeline type of mobile distributor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclasses for a
    fluid operated expansible chamber motor, per se, which may be used to
    propel the distributor and for the combination of such a motor with a
    nominally recited distributor in the absence of claimed structure to
    discharge the motor exhaust fluid through the distributor.

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, appropriate subclasses for a
    fluid operated motor, per se, which may be used to propel the distributor
    and for the combination of such a motor with a nominally recited
    distributor in the absence of claimed structure to discharge the motor
    exhaust fluid through the distributor.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclasses for a
    rotary expansible chamber motor, per se, which may be used to propel the
    distributor and for the combination of such a motor with a nominally
    recited distributor in the absence of claimed structure to discharge the
    motor exhaust fluid through the distributor.


CLS 239/748
TXT Supply line traversing means:

    Apparatus under subclass 743 wherein the distributor is guided along a path
    established by the relative disposition of a fluid conducting conduit which
    furnishes fluid to the distributor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    740,    for supply line traversing means on pipeline distributors.


CLS 239/749
TXT Hydrant coupling:

    Apparatus under subclass 748 wherein the supply line is provided with
    valved outlets spaced there along and the distributor has means to connect,
    in fluid conducting relationship with the outlets as it traverses along the
    supply line thereby providing fluid to the distributor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    740,    for pipeline distributors which may include hydrant coupling
    structure.


CLS 239/750
TXT Track or guideway:

    Apparatus under subclass 722 having rail means or some predetermined and
    established pathway which constrains carrier as to the route it will travel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173+,   for track guided mobile tank type sprayers.

    724+,   for mobile irrigators with track means associated with open type
    supply confirming means.

    739+,   for mobile pipeline irrigators which are track guided.

    743+,   for mobile irrigators in general which are track guided.


CLS 239/751
TXT Overhead type:

    Apparatus under subclass 750 in which the track or guideway is for
    suspended distributing means supported therefrom and  constrained to move
    therealong.


CLS 239/752
TXT Reciprocating:

    Apparatus under subclass 750 in which the means mounting the distributing
    means travels back and forth along the rail or pathway means such that the
    limits of translation of the device are thereby defined.


CLS 239/753
TXT With extensible support:

    Apparatus under subclass 752 in which the fluid spraying means is formed of
    sections such that the member can be elongated or projected and retracted
    relative the supporting carriage.


CLS 239/754
TXT Jet directed toward or along supporting surface (e.g., lawn rake):

    Apparatus under subclass 722 wherein the vehicular means supports the
    distributor above a surface and a spray means is disclosed as adapted to
    direct a fluid jet across or against said supporting surface during
    translation of the support.

    (1)     Note.  The supporting surface may be a lawn, floor, carpet, road,
    or the like.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTION


CLS 239/900
TXT ELECTROMAGNETICALLY ACTUATED FUEL INJECTOR HAVING BALL AND SEAT TYPE
    VALVE:A collection of art disclosing useful details of electromagnetically
    actuated fuel injector valves having a spherical or part spherical surface
    cooperating with a valve seat.


CLS 241/
TTL SOLID MATERIAL COMMINUTION  OR DISINTEGRATION

CLS 241/
TXT The main class definition and notes are divided into the following sections:

    1.      General statement of class subject matter.

    2.      Chemical compounds, compositions, foods and beverages.

    3.      Suspensions and colloids.

    4.      Coating or shaping of material.

    5.      Fibrous and laminated material.

    6.      Heating, cooling, or drying material.

    7.      Operators for comminutors.

    8.      Separation of material.

    9.      Material handling, excavating, distributing, harvesting.

    10.     Grain, flour and starch.

    11.     Comminutor, or comminutor element, supports and mounting means.

    12.     Index to all classes appearing in Sections 1 through 11, above.

    13.     Miscellaneous notes to classes not appearing in sections 1 through
    12, above.



    1.      General statement of class subject matter.

    A.      This is the generic class for (1) the comminution and
    disintegration of solid material, and (2) the comminution and
    disintegration of solids combined with other treatment of the material
    where such combinations are not provided for in other classes and are not
    specifically excluded by the following notes and definitions.

    B.      As used in this classification, the terms "comminution" or
    "disintegration" necessarily include the following elements:

    I.      There must be a division of a solid mass into a number of smaller
    solid masses.

    II.     The treatment must include no operation which is directed toward
    imparting a desired shape to the initial solid mass or the resulting
    smaller solid masses.

    The term "comminution" has been considered to be generic to all the terms
    ordinarily applied to the subject matter of this class (e.g., grinding,
    milling, disintegration, trituration, pulverization, etc.).  Therefore, for
    the sake of brevity, the term "comminution" alone has been used in the
    notes and definitions below to denote the treatment which forms the basis
    of this class.

    C.      This class is limited to the treatment of solid material i.e.,
    material in a self-sustaining, more or less rigid state, capable of
    resisting deformation to a certain extent.  However, materials which
    normally may be considered "plastic", but which, in the course of the
    comminution, perform substantially as do normal solids, in that smaller
    nonshaped particles are formed from a larger mass, have been looked upon as
    being solids for purposes of this classification.  (See section 4 below).
    Treatment of solids in fluid suspension is included.  (See section 3 below).

    D.      This class provides for both processes and apparatus for carrying
    out the comminuting treatment but not products thereof.  Since product
    claims were considered controlling, patents having such claims were
    classified in classes appropriate thereto, whether or not a claim to a
    comminuting process or apparatus was included.

    E.      Where a patent includes claims to a comminutor or a comminutor part
    and a method of making the comminutor or part, the claim to the article is
    deemed to be controlling and classification of the patent in Class 241 is
    proper, unless the article is provided for elsewhere.

    2.      Chemical compounds, compositions, foods and beverages.

    In general, the compound, compositions, and food classes are superior to
    this class as to the production, reclamation or recovery of the materials
    provided for in those classes, and see section 10, for a special statement
    on grain, flour and starch.

    A.      The compound, composition, food and beverages classes will take:

    I.      All patents, any claim of which is directed to a product provided
    for in those classes.

    II.     Processes in which any step effects a chemical change in,
    dissolves, or forms a stable colloidal dispersion of all, or part, of the
    material (except where an added comminuting aid is removed from the
    material by chemical reaction or dissolution).

    III.    Processes involving the formation of a composition by combining
    distinct ingredients which are sufficiently identified as to form a basis
    of classification, whether the process involves a chemical reaction or is
    merely physical (as by compounding by comminution, per se).  However, where
    the larger mass, before comminution, is made up of a plurality of
    dissimilar materials, and following comminution and separation, the
    constituent parts of the same mass are recombined, or partly so, such
    processes were not considered to involve the formation of a composition and
    have been classified in class 241.

    B.      This class (241) will take:

    I.      Processes and apparatus having the sole function of comminuting
    solid material.

    II.     Processes and apparatus in which a comminuting step or means is
    combined with a physical step or means which has the sole function of
    facilitating the comminution.

    III.    Processes and apparatus in which a comminuting step or means is
    combined with such additional steps or means as have been provided for in
    this class, such as:

    (a)     separation or classification of the material into grades or sizes,
    including the recombination of separated ingredients of a single starting
    material.

    (b)     separation of fluids from the material involving no chemical change
    in the material, as by filtering or drying operations.

    (c)     heating the material.

    (d)     cooling the material.

    (e)     separation of comminuting aids from the material, which operation
    may include dissolution or a chemical reaction.

    (f)     apparatus combinations of a comminutor with means for applying a
    fluid to the material for any disclosed purpose, including performing or
    initiating a chemical reaction.  See subclass 38.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry: Physical Processes, subclasses 293+ for physical
    processes for producing, reclaiming, or recovering inorganic compounds and
    elements.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, appropriate subclasses and the
    notes thereto for the preservation and production of foods and beverages.
    Cooking, adding ingredients, and bleaching are examples of steps which so
    change the nature of the final food product as to cause classification in
    Class 99.  Search subclasses 510+ for comminution in combination with
    liquid recovery and 537+ for apparatus separating one portion of food from
    another, similar to the apparatus of Class 241.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, and the notes thereto.  See
    particularly Note (2) in the main class definition for a list of classes
    and subclasses providing for coating and plastic compositions containing
    solid material.

    252,    Compositions, appropriate subclasses. This is the generic class for
    compositions and see the notes thereto for other composition art.
    Colloidal dispersions are treated in a later section (3).

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, appropriate subclasses.  See the
    notes to this class for processes relating to the production, reclamation
    or recovery of carbon compounds, including rubber, synthetic resins and
    compositions containing the same.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for
    producing, reclaiming, or recovering inorganic compounds or elements.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses, for
    recovery of inorganic compounds and nonmetallic elements by chemical
    reaction.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclass for a method of making such a composition and see particularly
    subclasses 1.29+, 417, 458+, 469+, and 489+ for a composition including
    comminuted or particulate material.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    appropriate subclasses, for comminution or disintegration processes
    combined with some other food working operation.



    3.      Suspension and colloids.

    This class (241) provides for the generic subject matter of comminuting
    solid material in a fluid to form or improve a suspension.  See subclasses
    21 and 38+. For exceptions to this and for related subject matter, see the
    following classes:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 40+, and the notes thereto
    for flow restrictors which form emulsions of a plurality of fluids.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, appropriate subclasses, for
    processes and apparatus for the chemical liberation, recovery or
    purification of natural cellulose or fibrous material in combination with a
    comminuting step. For the purpose of determining a line between this class
    (241) and Class 162, hot water shall be considered to be a chemical agent
    classifiable in Class 162.  The comminution of fibrous material in
    suspension, even when disclosed for the purpose of making a paper pulp is
    provided for in Class 241 where no chemical treatment is claimed.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 302+, and the notes thereto.  Class 252 is
    the generic class for processes for forming stable colloidal systems and
    the resultant product, as such systems and products are defined in the
    definition of subclass 302 in Class 252.  Class 252, therefore, takes (1)
    all patents, any controlling claim of which is directed to a stable
    colloidal system product, not provided for elsewhere, and (2) processes
    which, by their terms, form a stable colloidal system, or in which the
    steps recited must necessarily result in such a system (as by adding
    colloidizing agents, etc.). Processes of forming dispersions of solids in
    fluids, not so limited to the production of stable colloidal systems, and
    in which the ingredients of the suspensions are not claimed with such
    particularity as to form a basis for classification in Class 252 or some
    other appropriate composition class, are classified in Class 241.  (See
    subclasses 15+).  In general, Class 241 provides for all apparatus for
    forming suspensions of solids in fluids by comminution, whether such
    suspensions be disclosed as colloidal or not.  (See subclasses 38+).

    366,    Agitating, particularly subclasses 176.1+ for process and apparatus
    for forming suspensions and emulsions by agitation. See the general line
    with Class 366, set forth in the main class definition of Class 252.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    appropriate subclasses, for the process of forming colloidal suspensions or
    emulsions of food materials.




    4.      Coating or shaping of material.

    A.      This class (241) does not include the shaping or coating of
    material, per se, (see the general statement fo class subject matter in
    section 1), but does provide for coating or shaping steps or means in
    combination with comminuting processes or apparatus in the following
    instances:

    I.      Where the shaping is followed by a comminution which destroys the
    shape, as distinguished from causing a large shaped mass to be made into a
    plurality of smaller masses which retain one of the original dimensions of
    the large mass (e.g., flaking, where a formed sheet is broken up into
    flakes which retain the original sheet thickness dimension).

    II.     Where a comminuting operation on a heterogeneous mass or mixture of
    material results in the simultaneous formation of shaped masses of a
    portion only of the material and the comminution of the remainder (e.g.,
    the metallic constituents of an ore are formed into balls simultaneously
    with the comminution of gangue).

    III.    Where the shaping is for the sole purpose of facilitating the
    subsequent separation of the material into grades.  See Class 209,
    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 7, for this type of
    treatment, per se.

    IV.     Where the coating treatment is for the sole purpose of facilitating
    the comminution.

    B.      The material shaping classes provide for shaping or forming, per
    se, and shaping processes and apparatus combined with preliminary
    comminuting steps or means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, is the generic class for working and shaping of
    metal and see the notes thereto for related art.  See particularly
    subclasses 4.51+, for processes and apparatus for forming metal into shreds.

    72,     Metal Deforming, and see the notes thereto, for a process or
    apparatus for shaping metal by plastically working it.

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses, for process and apparatus for
    cutting of the type there provided for, which are disclosed for the purpose
    fo severing solid material into products of desired length or shape while
    (usually) retaining an original dimension.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, appropriate subclasses, for
    apparatus for imparting a shape to food material.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses.

    125,    Stone Working, and the notes thereto for processes and apparatus
    for shaping stone-like substances.

    144,    Woodworking, and the notes thereto. Class 144 is the generic class
    for shaping wood and similar materials. For example, Class 144, includes
    wood excelsior making, log slicers, etc.  A machine for wood chipping or
    shaving will be considered as imparting a desired shape only if there
    exists some means for so shaping as, e.g., the operation of the machine
    moves the wood holder with respect to the cutter, or the cross section of
    the cutter or chipper is so designed as to produce the desired contour.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for processes and apparatus for shaping combined
    with a laminating step and see also subclasses 339+.

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, appropriate subclasses, for
    severing by tearing or breaking.  See particularly subclasses 1+ for
    processes, and subclasses 93+ for apparatus for severing a piece of work
    into smaller pieces where there is either (1) a claimed provision for
    maintaining or determining the product shape or size, (e.g., the tool has a
    shaped edge), or (2), where the material being worked upon is disclosed as
    modified (e.g., by score lines) so as to determine a specific size or shape.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses for processes of molding or shaping plastic
    materials within the class definition, which may include a particle forming
    or material cutting or comminution step, e.g., subclasses 5+, 115+, 118,
    138, and 603.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 202 for a molding machine for shaping nonmetals  combined both
    with a separate and distinct agitating or kneading means upstream of the
    shaping area and a comminuting means; and subclass 223 for the combustion
    of means providing an endless casting surface and harvesting means
    cooperating thereunder.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    appropriate subclasses, for shaping and subclasses 289+ and 302+, for
    coating edible material.

    427,    Coating Processes, for coating processes in general.

    451,    Abrading, and the notes thereto.  Class 451, takes (1) processes
    and apparatus in which the function of the claimed steps or means is
    disclosed as that of imparting a shape to or removing unwanted surface
    portions from an article by abrasion, and (2) processes and apparatus in
    which such an abrading step or means is combined with a prior comminution.
    Class 241, takes (1) abrading processes and apparatus, the disclosed
    purpose of which is to effect a comminution of the material (as defined in
    section 1 of this class definition), and (2) processes and apparatus in
    which the comminution is combined with steps or means which act to impart a
    shape to or remove unwanted surface portions from the article or material
    prior to the comminution operation.



    5.      Fibrous and laminated material.

    Class 241 provides for processes and apparatus for comminuting fibrous and
    laminated material, and other treatments combined with comminution when
    such combinations are not of the type specifically provided for in other
    classes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, and the notes thereto.  Class 19 is
    the generic class for the liberation of fibers from natural and prior use
    sources by physical operations and also provides for miscellaneous working
    operations on fibrous material.  Class 19 takes processes and apparatus
    which include fiber liberation steps or means (e.g., delinting, picking,
    carding, etc.) in combination with comminution of the material.

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclass 633 for devices for
    disintegrating and plasticizing peat.

    125,    Stone Working, subclasses 23+, for processes and apparatus for
    splitting laminated material (e.g., mica) along its planes of cleavage.
    Class 241 takes the comminution of such material, see particularly subclass
    4.

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 145+ for tobacco leaf disintegration.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, appropriate subclass, for the
    combination of a chemical digestion and comminution.  Class 241 provides
    for the comminution of fibrous materials even when in liquid suspension for
    the preparation of a paper pulp.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 378 for processes of exfoliating micaceous
    material.



    6.      Heating, cooling, or drying material.

    Class 241 provides for process and apparatus combinations in which
    comminution is combined with heating and/or cooling steps or means.  See
    subclasses 8, 15+, 23, 38+, 65+.  It does not include such combinations
    when the temperature modification of the material effects a change in the
    chemical nature of the material (e.g., removing water of hydration, etc),
    except those apparatus combinations in which the temperature change is
    effected by means which applies a fluid to the material, which may have the
    disclosed function of carrying out a chemical reaction.  See the pertinent
    chemical classes for such combinations as are excluded above.

    In general, Class 241 is superior to the following classes, or such parts,
    thereof that relate to the heating, cooling, or drying of solid material
    and takes combinations of the subject matter there provided for with
    comminution, unless a specific exception is noted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, and the notes thereto,
    particularly (3) Note in the class definition.

    62,     Refrigeration, and the notes thereto. Class 62 takes (1) processes
    in which comminution of a solid refrigerant medium (e.g., ice), is combined
    with a step of utilizing the medium in cooling a material or article, (2)
    apparatus in which means for comminuting a solid refrigerant is combined
    with means to utilize the refrigerant (e.g., ice car, ice cream freezer or
    other refrigerating receptacle), and (3) processes and apparatus in which
    steps or means for manufacturing a solid refrigerant are combined with
    steps or means for comminuting the material.  Class 241 takes processes and
    apparatus for cooling the material undergoing treatment combined with
    comminution thereof.

    110,    Furnaces, and the Notes thereto. Class 110 takes (1) processes and
    apparatus in which a solid fuel burning step or means is combined with a
    step or means for comminuting the fuel before burning, or the residue after
    burning, (2) processes and apparatus in which comminuting of a fuel is
    combined with a step or means for adding air or other gas subsequent to the
    comminuting zone for the disclosed purpose of supporting combustion of fuel
    in a burner (see particularly subclass 106), and (3) fuel burning apparatus
    or parts thereof which may act to comminute material as a secondary or
    incidental function thereof (e.g., grates).  Class 241 takes comminution
    combined with steps or means for applying heat to the material from a
    significantly claimed burner.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 152+, for grates.  The line between
    classes 126 and 241 is the same as the line set forth between classes 110
    and 241, above.

    148,    Metal Treatment, appropriate subclasses for processes of heat
    treating metal to modify or maintain the internal physical structure (i.e.,
    microstructure) or chemical property of the metal.

    219,    Electric Heating, for processes and apparatus relating to the
    electric heating of material.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, for apparatus for heat treating metal.
    Note in the general statement above that heat treatment to effect a
    chemical reaction is excluded from Class 241 and such combinations are
    classified in appropriate classes taking such subject matter, as Class 266.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, and the notes thereto, for
    electric furnaces and processes relating thereto.

    432,    Heating, subclass 61 for a residual material heating device
    including structure breaking up lumps formed by the heating or otherwise
    serving merely to perfect the heating of the material.

    7.      Operators for comminutors.

    Class 241 provides for the combination of a comminutor with means to move
    the comminuting members thereof. Organizations, per se, for effecting the
    movement of comminuting members are classified in the pertinent machine
    element, motor, or power plant class if no significant combination with the
    comminutor or comminutor element is claimed.  Claims which include in
    addition to the specific operator (1) the manner of supporting the
    comminuting element relative to other parts of the comminutor, (2) mention
    of a plurality of cooperating elements, or (3) structural characteristics
    of the element itself, are considered to be claims to a significant
    comminutor combination for classification in Class 241.  Mere naming of the
    comminuting element or its type is not deemed as significant inclusion
    thereof in the combination.  Operators, per se, for comminuting elements
    are found in the classes listed below unless specifically excluded and the
    line stated above applies to each.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 325+ for fluid transmission and fluid link
    actuating devices.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, for mechanical movement actuating
    means.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, for expansible chamber motor
    actuators.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, for operators of the type there
    provided for.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, appropriate subclass for subject matter
    directed to driving or impacting a tool, when such subject matter includes
    combined features peculiar to tool driving, but which does not include
    features limiting the subject matter to a specific tool art, such as
    specific shape of the work contacting portion of a tool, related tools, or
    an opposed work support.  Class 241 has not been cleared as to subject
    matter in conflict with this line.

    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, and Animal Powered, for miscellaneous
    motor operators.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, appropriate subclasses for
    electric motor structure.

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, appropriate subclasses for
    rotary fluid motor operators and controls.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), appropriate subclasses
    for operators and controls for impellers.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, for rotary expansible chamber
    motor actuators.



    8.      Separation of material.

    Class 241 is superior to the material separation classes and, therefore,
    provides for a process or apparatus in which comminution is combined with a
    step or means to separate the material into classes according to the
    physical characteristics of its components, before, during, or after the
    comminuting operation.  See subclasses 9+, 24.1+ and 68+, or if the
    separation involves applying a fluid to the material, subclasses 19, 20 and
    38+.  As noted in section 2 of this class definition, comminuting processes
    which include the separation of a comminuting aid from the material by
    dissolution or a chemical reaction are included in Class 241.  A list of
    separating classes to which the above stated general line applies follows.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, for a process of separating solids from
    gases, per se.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, for apparatus for separating solids
    from gases, per se.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, for a process and
    apparatus relating to the separation of solids into grades or classes.  A
    screen or the like, which could operate as a mere separator, but is
    disclosed as being adapted to function as a  comminuting element, is
    classified in Class 241. See particularly subclass 83. An agitator for
    facilitating the flow of material through a screen may incidentally effect
    the comminution or a portion of the material.  Such a device is classified
    on the basis of its essential function and is found in Class 209 unless the
    agitator is modified to further the comminuting effect.  The classification
    of a patent relating to the presentation of a mass of plastic material to a
    series of openings will depend upon the disclosed purpose of the process or
    apparatus: if the purpose is to remove foreign particles from the material,
    classification is in Class 209; if to comminute into discrete particles, it
    is found in Class 241; if to form into a desired shape or shapes, it is in
    the proper shaping class (see section 4).

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, for a process or apparatus
    relating to the separation of a solid from a liquid as by gravitational
    separation or filtering.  As an exception to the general line, Class 210,
    in subclasses 173+, provides for apparatus including a filtering screen or
    the like arranged to remove material from a moving stream and to comminute
    the removed material. In addition Class 210, includes vegetable or animal
    matter comminution incidental to liquid purification, see particularly
    subclasses 173 and 174, or destruction of a filter cake or comminution
    incidental to agitation or feeding of the material to, during and after
    separation, see particularly subclasses 106+, 178, 179, 219, 298, 319,
    332+, 353, 354+, 383, 391+, 407+, 738, 748, 769, 785, and 796.

    494,    Imperforate Bowl:  Centrifugal Separators, for apparatus or and
    process for breaking up a mixture of fluids or fluent substances into two
    or more components by centrifuging within a generally solid-walled,
    receptacle-like member.





    9.      Material handling, excavating,  distributing, harvesting.

    In general, Class 241 provides for processes and apparatus in which
    comminution is combined with steps and means to move and handle the
    material prior to or subsequent to the comminuting operation.  Means to
    feed material to the comminuting zone for treatment and to discharge it
    therefrom are classified in the various feeding and discharging subclasses
    in the class.  Material handling combinations other than those limited to
    mere feeding to and discharging from the comminutor are classified in the
    subclasses 25 and 101.01+, unless more specifically provided for.

    Certain types of material handling have, on the other hand, been considered
    so specialized that classes including such subject matter have been
    considered superior to Class 241.  For a list of such classes and a
    statement of the line with each, see "B" below.

    A.      The following classes are examples of those which deal with types
    of material handling to which Class 241 has been considered superior in
    accordance with the above stated general line and any patent having claims
    to a significant combination of the type of material handling treated in
    these classes with a comminutor is properly classifiable in class 241.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    appropriate subclasses for processes and apparatus for filling receivers
    including, in subclasses 11+ and 69+, treatment of the material other than
    by comminution.  In this class (241), see particularly subclass 100, for
    comminutors combined with means to fill a separable receiver.

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, for conveyors of the
    type there provided for.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, for processes and apparatus relating to
    power-driven conveyors.

    212,    Traversing Hoists, for material handling of the type there provided
    for.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for processes and
    apparatus for dispensing articles not otherwise provided for.

    222,    Dispensing, for processes and apparatus for dispensing material.
    Mere agitators for loosening lumps within a holder are not considered
    comminutors for Class 241.  Most of the patents classified in the feeding
    subclasses of Class 241 show dispensers as subcombinations of the
    comminutor-feeder combination and a number of patents which disclose such
    combinations but in which the claims are limited to the dispenser, per se,
    have been classified in the appropriate subclasses of Class 222.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 35+ for magazine type
    article containing cabinets having means facilitating article removal.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, for fluid current conveying
    organizations. Corresponding processes and apparatus in combination with
    comminution are found in subclasses 5, 15+ and 38+, of Class 241.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, which is the generic class for
    processes and apparatus dealing with material and article handling.

    B.      The following classes deal with special types of material handling
    or moving which are considered superior to Class 241 and patents claiming
    significant combinations of such handling with comminuting steps or means
    are classified with the particular type of handling involved.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, for apparatus and corresponding processes including
    excavation of material.

    56,     Harvesters, appropriate subclasses, for processes and apparatus
    including the severing of crops.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, appropriate subclasses, and
    particularly subclasses 24, 26+, 114+, and 122 for devices for recovering
    from the soil plants or objects buried or embedded therein, combined with
    means to comminute such plants or objects or the mass of earth containing
    the same.

    172,    Earth Working, appropriate subclasses for comminuting earth in situ.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, appropriate subclass for a process
    or means for comminuting the substances of the earth in situ to bore or
    penetrate the earth.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 650+ for a
    container for nonfluid material and means for strewing or scattering the
    material over an extended area, and in which combination a comminuter may
    be present to disintegrate or break up lumps in the material.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, for a process or
    apparatus for recovering valuable material from the earth or breaking up
    hard material in situ.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 90+ for in situ
    comminution of earth or road surfaces in combination with other road
    building means. Comminution, per se, of road or earth surface is
    classifiable in Class 241.

    10.     Grain, flour and starch.

    The comminution of cereal or other seeds or seed parts and combinations of
    other treatments of the type provided for in the class, to form flour or
    other grain products, are provided for in Class 241, and see section 2 for
    a statement on compositions, compounds, foods and beverages in general.
    For related subject matter, see the following classes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 3.1+, for
    apparatus for cleaning grain, employing means of the type there provided
    for.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 58, for processes of treating seed in
    preparation for planting.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 518+ and 600+, for
    apparatus for husking or peeling grain and treating cereals, not elsewhere
    provided for.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses, for coating particulate
    material and see especially subclasses 19 and 417 for tumbling particulate
    work.  For merely mixing fluent materials with grain by agitation, see the
    Note to Class 259 below.

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, appropriate subclasses, for
    processes and apparatus for producing a purified starch product, which may
    include comminuting steps or means as part of the combination.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses,
    for apparatus for cleaning and/or applying liquid to grain not provided for
    elsewhere.

    366,    Agitating, appropriate subclasses, for apparatus for merely mixing
    liquids or solids with grain by agitation.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    appropriate subclasses, for treating grain to be made into a food.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 326+ for apparatus for removing husks from
    grain by tumbling.

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, for processes and apparatus for
    separating grain from the plant.

    504,    Plant Protecting and Regulating Compositions, subclasses 116+ for
    processes of treating seed by the mere application of a chemical for the
    purpose of affecting the growth of the plant.


    11.     Comminutor or comminutor element supports and mounting means.

    Combinations of a comminutor and a support or mounting therefor are
    provided for in Class 241.  Combinations including means to stationarily
    support the comminutor are in subclasses 46.014+ and 285.1.  Other mounting
    means (e.g., vehicular) are treated as combinations for subclasses 101.01+.
     For comminutor mounting means, per se, see the following classes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, and the notes thereto for marine vehicle mounting means.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 2+, for machinery supports.  For proper
    classification in Class 248, the claims should include, in the combination,
    only so much of the comminutor as is necessary to support it.

    280,    Land Vehicles, and the notes thereto for land vehicle mounting
    means.

    384,    Bearings, which class takes bearings and guides for comminuting
    elements or element support members and such bearings or guides combined
    with supports for the bearings or guides.  The member supported by the
    bearing or guide may be included by name as a type of comminuting element
    where no significant structure of the element is included.

    403,    Joints and Connections, for rigid shaft to comminutor element
    connections where no significant structure of the comminuting element other
    than that necessary to effect the connection is included.  See this class
    (241), subclasses 291+, for comminutor element- shaft combinations, per se.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, appropriate subclasses for flexible shaft to comminuting
    elements connections where no significant structure of the comminuting
    elements, other than that necessary to effect the connection, is included.
    See particularly Class 464, subclasses 107+.  See this class (241),
    subclasses 291+ for comminutor element-shaft combinations.


    12.     Index to all classes appearing in Sections 1 through 11, above.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, section 10.  For the
    cleaning, per se, of comminuting members, see the appropriate subclasses of
    Class 15, particularly subclass 256.5.  Class 15 provides for processes and
    apparatus for cleaning comminuting members by the operations there provided
    for.  Class 241 takes the combination of a significantly claimed
    comminuting member with a cleaning means therefore but mere identification
    of the member cleaned as a type of comminuting member was not deemed
    significant and such patents were assigned on the basis of the cleaner. In
    this class (241), see subclasses 166+.  For processes and apparatus for
    removing accretions from containers which may result in the comminution of
    a portion of the material, see subclasses 104.05+, in Class 15 and (2) Note
    to the definition of subclass 105.05.

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, section 5.

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Process, section 2.

    29,     Metal Working, section 4B.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, section 6.

    37,     Excavating, section 9B.

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclass 31, section 5.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, section 10.

    56,     Harvesters, section 9B.

    60,     Power Plants, section 7.

    62,     Refrigeration, section 6.

    72,     Metal Deforming, section 4B.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, section 7.

    83,     Cutting, See section III-C of the class definition of Class 83 for
    a statement of the line with this class (241). Section 4B.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, section 7.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, section 8.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, section 8.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, sections 2, 3, 4B and 10.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, section 2.

    110,    Furnaces, section 6.

    114,    Ships, section 11.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, section 4B and 10.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, section 7.

    125,    Stone Working, sections 4B and 5.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 152+, for grates, section 6.

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, section 10.

    131,    Tobacco, section 5.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, section 10.  Class 134 is
    the generic class for cleaning and/or applying liquids to solids.
    Processes including such steps in combination with comminuting steps are
    classified in Class 241, see particularly subclass 15.  Mere agitation of
    particulate material in the presence of liquid to separate dirt or other
    impurities therefrom is not considered to be comminution.  Such processes
    are classified in Class 134 or other appropriate class, depending on the
    line between those classes.  Class 241 provides for the separation of
    adhering impurities from solids by comminution, as distinguished from mere
    agitation or tumbling, either with or without the application of a liquid
    to the material.  See the definitions and Notes to the definitions of
    subclasses 16+ in Class 134.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, section 3.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    section 9A.

    144,    Woodworking, section 4B.

    148,    Metal Treatment, section 6.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, sections 3 and 5.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, section 9B.

    172,    Earth Working, section 9B.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, section 7.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, sections 7 and 9B.

    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, and Animal Powered, section 7.

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, section 9A.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, section 9A.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, section 4A,
    paragraph 111, and section 8.  See particularly subclass 7, in Class 209,
    for devices which apply pressure to material to effect a change in its
    shape, in contradistinction to comminution, to facilitate separation.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, section 8.

    212,    Traversing Hoists, section 9A.

    219,    Electric Heating, section 6.

    221,    Article Dispensing, section 9A.

    222,    Dispensing, section 9A.

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, section 4F.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing.  section 9B.

    248,    Supports, section 11.

    252,    Compositions, sections 2, 3 and 5.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, section 2.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    section 4B.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, section 6.

    280,    Land Vehicles, section 11.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, section 9B.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, section 7.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, section 9A.

    366,    Agitating, sections 3 and 10.  Class 366 takes (1) processes which,
    by disclosure, are limited to mixing or agitating the material, and (2)
    apparatus which, by disclosure, functions solely to mix or agitate the
    material.  Class 241 takes processes and apparatus in which agitating steps
    or means are combined with comminuting steps or means, and apparatus which,
    by disclosure, will function to comminute the material even though a mixing
    function is also disclosed.  As to apparatus, the following exception is
    made to the foregoing line:  Where the apparatus is disclosed as treating
    particulate material even though in admixture with liquids (e.g., wet or
    dry clay, sand, etc.); and the apparatus is of the type in which a
    plurality of surfaces cooperate with each other to apply pressure to a
    layer of material there-between, it is properly classifiable in Class 241
    whether or not the disclosure is limited to mere agitation and
    subcombinations of such apparatus are also included in Class 241.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, section 6.

    384,    Bearings, section 11.

    403,    Joints and Connections, section 11.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, section 9A.

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, section 7.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), section 7.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, section 7.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, section 2.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    section 4B.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    sections 2B III, 3, 4B, and 10.

    427,    Coating Processes, section 4B.

    451,    Abrading, sections 4 and 10.

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, section 10.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, section 11.

    494,    Imperforate Bowl:  Centrifugal Separators, section 8.

    504,    Plant Protecting and Regulating Compositions, section 10.


    13.     Miscellaneous notes to classes not  appearing in sections 1 through
    12, above.

    The following quotation is given to illustrate the meaning of the
    parenthetical expressions which appear adjacent many of the classes listed
    in this section:  "Class 165, Heat Exchange.  (See subclasses 65, 66 and
    67)".  Such a notation means that in each of the subclasses numbered 65, 66
    and 67, in Class 241, there is a reference to all or a portion of Class 165.

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, which class takes sinks and
    similar apparatus there provided for, combined with means to comminute the
    material discharged from the sink or the like. (See subclasses 629 and
    650+).

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 136+ for hand manipulated scrapers which may
    act to retain the material for use and subclasses 164.5+ for hand
    manipulated ice picks and chippers.  Ice crushers and shavers which are not
    hand manipulated relative to the material are provided for in Class 241.
    (See subclasses 169 and 283).

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings). (See subclass 285.1).

    53,     Package Making, subclass 121 for packaging apparatus including
    means to crush the contents.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus. (See subclasses 107, 111, 117,
    123, 198.1, 205, 207, 227, and 237).

    69,     Leather Manufactures, for processes and apparatus for treating
    leather not elsewhere provided for.  Class 241 includes leather comminution
    but excludes organizations in which only a portion of the hide is removed,
    such combinations being classified in Class 69.

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses, for a metal-working roll
    organization similar to those used in comminuting apparatus.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, provides for testing processes and apparatus
    including comminuting steps or means for operating on material to determine
    certain of its characteristics (e.g., subclasses 7+).  Class 241 takes
    material treatment processes and apparatus which includes steps or means to
    test the material in combination with comminution.  (See subclass 292).

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal
    Particulate Mixtures, for miscellaneous metallurgical processes including
    comminution only in combination with treatment of a type not provided for
    in Class 241.  Class 75 includes alloys disclosed for use in forming
    comminutor parts when claims to the alloy, per se, are included.  Claims to
    a comminutor element formed of a specific alloy are not controlling over
    claims to the alloy, per se, and classification of patents having both
    types of claims in Class 75 is proper.  See (2) Note to the definition of
    subclass 213 of Class 75. (See subclasses 198.1 and 270).

    81,     Tools.  (See subclasses 198.1+ and 270+).

    100,    Presses.  Class 100 takes (1) processes and apparatus for
    expressing which apply comminuting pressure to the material where there is
    provided means for separating the expressed liquid from the solid.  The
    paths of flow of the expressed material may be provided by the pressure
    elements themselves, (2) processes and apparatus for expressing combined
    with steps or means for comminuting the material prior to the expressing
    operation, and (3) convertible apparatus adapted to function either as an
    expresser or a comminutor.  Class 241 takes processes and apparatus for
    comminuting material combined with steps or means to apply an expressing
    operation on the material prior to the comminuting operation, see
    subclasses 2, 25 and 101.01+.  (See subclasses 2, 3, 32, 33, 34, 36, 38,
    65, 67, 83, 97, 111, 169, 198.1, 200, 221, 227, 237, 244, 252, 270, 284,
    293, and 296).

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 71 and see the line stated in the
    note to the definition of that subclass.

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors.  (See subclass 275).

    137,    Fluid Handling.  (See subclasses 31, 39 and 59).

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 344+ and 401+ for apparatus to remove a
    molding surface from a product which may include a disintegration of a sand
    surface, and subclasses 131+ for corresponding methods.

    165,    Heat Exchange.  (See subclass 65, 66 and 67).

    169,    Fire Extinguishers.  (See subclass 99).

    184,    Lubrication, for lubricators and lubrication systems, per se; this
    class (241) includes combinations of significant comminutor structure with
    means to lubricate.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control. (See subclasses 32, 33 and 36).

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers.  (See subclass 32.5).

    220,    Receptacles.  (See subclass 182).

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing.  (See subclass 39).

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation.  (See subclass 59).

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, appropriate subclasses for electric
    signals, per se, for indicating a condition in a comminutor. Note
    particularly subclasses 500+ and 870.01+.  See this class (241) subclasses
    101.01+ for the combination of a comminutor, significantly recited, and an
    electric signal therefor.

    417,    Pumps, takes pumps including structural features which both
    facilitate the impelling of the fluid and produce incidental concurrent
    comminution of solids suspended in the fluid.  Class 241 provides for (1)
    comminutors with means for pumping primary disclosed purpose of comminuting
    the material, but which may have the additional incidental function of
    impelling the fluid.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, for expansible chamber devices
    having structural features which both facilitate the impelling of the fluid
    and produce incidental concurrent comminution of solids suspend in the
    fluid.  Class 241 provides for (1) comminutors provided with means for
    pumping suspending fluid to or from a comminuting zone, and (2) devices
    having the primary disclosed purpose of comminuting the material, but which
    may have the additional incidental function of impelling the fluid.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, for disclosures
    pertinent to fermentation.

    452,    Butchering, subclasses 141+, for meat tenderizers having structure
    similar to comminutors.  (See subclasses 198.1, 221 and 227).


CLS 241/1
TXT Processes under the class definition in which the comminution or
    disintegration is effected by an operation of the material other than the
    application of force to the material by contacting it with a solid surface.

    (1)     Note.  Contained in this subclass, for example, are those processes
    in which the mere application of heat results in comminution and those
    where the material is disintegrated by the generation and sudden release of
    internal pressure.  The term "solid surface" has been considered to include
    particles of the material undergoing treatment, so that processes in which
    the material is disintegrated by contacting it with other portions of the
    same material will be found classified in other appropriate subclasses in
    this class.

    (2)     Note.  Operations on material which result in a chemical change are
    not included.  See section 2 of the class definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 323.4+, for apparatus
    for puffing cereal wherein the seed is not comminuted.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 11+ for a process or
    means for boring a hole in the earth by directly applying heat to fluidize
    or comminute the material forming the earth.

    606,    Surgery, subclass 2.5 for subject matter relating to removal of a
    calculus (e.g., stone) from the body wherein the calculus is fractured or
    disintegrated by use of light energy.


CLS 241/2
TXT Processes under the class definition in which the comminution or
    disintegration results in the rupturing of cells in the material or the
    liberation of liquids in the material or some operation in addition to the
    comminution or disintegration, to rupture the cells or liberate contained
    liquids.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, appropriate subclasses.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 104+ for presses not elsewhere classified,
    having drain means for expressed liquid.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, appropriate subclasses.

    435,    Chemistry: Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 259 for
    processes wherein a microorganism is ruptured by added material or
    mechanical means and subclass 306.1 for apparatus with means to lyse or
    rupture microorganisms by addition of material or by mechanical means other
    than comminution.


CLS 241/3
TXT Processes under the class definition in which the material (1) is
    solidified, consolidated, or shaped into a desired form prior to
    comminution, or (2) a portion only of the material is formed into a desired
    shape, simultaneously with the comminution of that portion of the material
    which is not shaped.

    (1)     Note.  See section 4 of the class definition for notes to related
    art and a statement of the line followed in relation to other classes as to
    processes including shaping operations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 94+, for processes and apparatus for
    consolidating material and such steps or means in combination with a
    precedent comminuting step or means.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 7, for
    processes and apparatus for selectively changing the shape (without
    comminution) of certain ingredients in a mixture to enable better
    separation of the material into grades.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses for processes for shaping or molding plastic
    material within the class definition, which may include a comminution or
    disintegration step, see particularly subclasses 5+, 115+, 118, 138+, and
    603+.


CLS 241/4
TXT Processes under the class definition in which fibrous or laminated mineral
    material (e.g., mica, asbestos, etc.) is the material being comminuted or
    disintegrated.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes physical steps of separation of the
    laminations of material when combined with the comminuting or
    disintegrating step.

    (2)     Note.  See section 5 of the class definition of this class for
    notes to related art and a statement of the lines followed with other
    classes relative to fibrous or laminated mineral material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclass .56 for methods of and means
    for opening bundles of substantially parallel stapled fibers in combination
    with a stapilizing step or device, and subclasses 66 and 80+ for fiber mass
    opening processes and apparatus of general application.

    125,    Stone Working, subclasses 23.01+, for processes and apparatus for
    splitting mineral laminated material without comminution.

    252,    Composition, subclass 378, for processes of exfoliating or
    expanding mineral laminated material where no comminution or disintegration
    is involved or processes in which comminution or disintegration is a step,
    but including operations not provided for in this class (241).

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses, see reference in the class definitions of this
    class (241), section 4, B.

    432,    Heating, subclass 13 for a heating process including a melting,
    expanding or comminution step.


CLS 241/5
TXT Processes under the class definition which include the step of suspending
    particles of the material in a moving fluid or otherwise projecting them
    through space and utilizing the developed kinetic energy of the particles
    to effect the comminution or disintegration thereof (as by impinging them
    against an impact surface or against other particles).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for processes of comminuting material by contacting it with other
    portions of the material but without the use of kinetic energy.

    27      and 185.5-197, for processes and apparatus for comminuting by
    subjecting the material to a blow by a moving surface, but which do not
    utilize the kinetic energy of the material to aid in the comminution.

    39+,    for related apparatus including means to suspend particles in a
    moving fluid and then utilizing the kinetic energy to effect the
    comminution.

    91      and 274, for related apparatus including means to gravity project
    material against a surface or other material to effect the comminution.

    275,    for related apparatus for centrifugally projecting material against
    surfaces or other material to effect the comminution.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 519 and 571 for
    apparatus employing kinetic energy for separation of food portion.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, appropriate subclasses for processes and
    apparatus for conveying solids by a fluid current.  See particularly
    subclasses 157+ for a deflecting surface at the conveyor outlet.


CLS 241/6
TXT Processes under the class definition in which the material being comminuted
    or disintegrated is cereal seed (wheat, corn, etc.) or other seed (coffee,
    cottonseed, etc.) or parts of such seed.

    (1)     Note.  See section 10 of the class definition of this class for
    notes to related art and the lines followed with other classes, as to
    grain, flour, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, appropriate subclasses, for
    apparatus relating to the treatment of cereal and other seeds.

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, for processes and apparatus for
    producing and recovering purified starch from cereal starch-bearing
    materials.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    appropriate subclasses for processes involving the treatment of cereal and
    other seeds.


CLS 241/7
TXT Processes under subclass 6 in which the comminution or disintegration is
    combined with an operation on the seed or seed part which functions to
    loosen or remove the outer coating or husk portion from the seed or seed
    part.

    (1)     Note.  The operation to remove or loosen the husk portion must be
    of a character other than comminution of the inner body of the gain.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    especially subclasses 287+ and 482+, for processes of removing food grain
    husks, per se, or combined with chemical or other food working operations.


CLS 241/8
TXT Processes and apparatus in which the comminution or disintegration is
    combined with the step of operating on the whole seed prior to comminution
    by the application of a fluid thereto or the heating or cooling thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See section 6 of the class definition of this class for
    notes to related art on heating, cooling, or drying, and a discussion of
    the lines followed with other classes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for processes involving the application of a fluid to, or the
    heating or cooling of, whole seeds in order to detach or loosen the husk
    portions.

    12,     for processes in which fluid is applied to comminuted seed parts
    rather than whole seed.

    15,     for processes in which fluid is applied to material other than
    cereal or other seeds.

    62      and 65, for apparatus in which the comminutor or disintegrator is
    combined with means to apply a fluid to or heat or cool the material prior
    to being treated in the comminutor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, appropriate subclasses, for
    apparatus including the application of a fluid to or heating or cooling of
    cereal or other seeds to carry out operations not provided for as
    combinations in this class.


CLS 241/9
TXT Processes under subclass 6 in which the comminution or disintegration is
    combined with an operation on the material to separate or classify it into
    classes or grades according to their physical characteristics.

    (1)     Note.  See section 8 of the class definition of this class for
    notes to related separating classes and a statement of the lines followed
    relative to those classes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19      and 20, for related processes applied to material other than cereal
    or other seeds and involving the use of a fluid.

    24.1+,  for a process related to that of this subclass, applied to material
    other than cereal or other seed.

    68+,    for comminuting or disintegrating apparatus combined with means to
    separate or classify the material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, for processes and
    apparatus for separating or classifying material.


CLS 241/10
TXT Processes under subclass 9 in which one or more of the grades or classes of
    separated material is recombined with another separated part or is
    recirculated to combine with material not yet operated on by the separator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52+,    61 and 80, for apparatus in which material is recirculated between
    the comminutor and separator.


CLS 241/11
TXT Processes under subclass 9 in which the material is subjected to successive
    alternate comminuting and separating operations, each operation occurring
    two or more times.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19      and 20, for processes including alternate successive comminuting
    and separating steps in which the latter includes the use of a fluid.

    24.1+, for a process having the above defined characteristic applied to
    material other than cereal or  other seed.

    76,     and the notes thereto, for corresponding apparatus.


CLS 241/12
TXT Processes under subclass 6 in which the comminution or disintegration is
    combined with the step of applying a fluid to the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for processes involving the application of a fluid to whole seeds.

    15+,    for processes directed to the comminution or disintegration of
    materials other than cereals or other seeds and including the step of
    applying fluid to the material.

    38+,    for comminuting or disintegrating apparatus combined with means to
    apply a fluid to the material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate
    subclasses, for processes and apparatus of drying and/or gas or vapor
    contact with material.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 288, 482+ and 507+, for
    processes involving the application of a fluid to cereal and other seeds.


CLS 241/13
TXT Processes under subclass 6 in which the seed or seed part is subjected to a
    plurality of comminuting or disintegrating operations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     for plural successive comminuting or disintegrating steps applied
    to material other than seeds or seed parts.

    152.1+, for apparatus including a plurality of comminuting zones arranged
    for serial flow of material therethrough.


CLS 241/14
TXT Processes under the class definition in which solids comprising mixed or
    bonded materials of diverse character are subjected to such a step of
    comminution or disintegration that one of the mixed or bonded materials is
    reduced in size to a greater extent than another of the materials.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for processes in which, during the comminution of the material, a
    shape is imparted to certain ingredients.

    6+,     for differential comminution or disintegration of cereal or other
    seeds.

    102,    for comminuting apparatus in which the surface of the elements are
    deformable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 4+, for
    treatment other than comminution for selectively changing the
    characteristics of ingredients of a mixture to enable better separation of
    the material into grades.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclass 483, for the process including abrading to remove outer covering
    of food plant material.


CLS 241/15
TXT Processes under the class definition in which operation of comminuting or
    disintegrating is (1) combined with one or more steps of applying a fluid
    or lubricant to the material or (2) is carried out in the presence of a
    previously applied fluid.

    (1)     Note.  The fluid may be applied before, during, and/or after the
    comminuting operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for processes in which material which is movably suspended in or
    projected through, a fluid is comminuted or disintegrated by utilizing its
    kinetic energy.

    8,      9+ and 12, for processes of comminuting cereals or other seeds or
    seed parts combined with steps of applying a fluid to the material.

    38+,    for apparatus in which the comminutor or disintegrator is combined
    with, or embodies, means to apply a fluid to the material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, for processes and
    apparatus for contacting solids with gas or vapor.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, for processes and apparatus for
    conveying material by a fluid current.


CLS 241/16
TXT Processes under subclass 15 in which a fluid is applied (1) to aid
    dispersion of the comminuted particles in a fluid, or (2) to prevent
    chemical reaction in the material (including oxidation or ignition),
    deliquescence, agglomeration of the comminuted particles or frothing of the
    fluid suspending medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for comminuting processes involving the addition of solids to the
    material which may have one of the above stated functions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 302+, for processes of forming colloidal
    suspensions or emulsions by comminution in which material is added which
    has the function of producing a stable colloidal suspension.


CLS 241/17
TXT Processes under subclass 15 in which the steps of comminuting or
    disintegrating and applying a fluid to the material are combined with an
    additional heating or cooling step.

    (1)     Note.  The added step of heating or cooling may be effected by a
    further application of a heated or cooled fluid.

    (2)     Note.  See section 6 of the class definition of this class for a
    statement of the line followed between this class and those dealing with
    the heating, cooling, or drying of material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for processes in which the comminuting or disintegrating is
    combined with a single application of a gas or vapor to effect a heating or
    cooling of the material.

    41+,    for apparatus including means for applying fluid at a plurality of
    points.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate
    subclasses, for processes and apparatus involving plural steps of applying
    gas or vapor to solid material.


CLS 241/18
TXT Processes under subclass 15 in which the fluid applied to the material
    comprises a gas or vapor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38+,    for apparatus including means for applying gas or vapor to the
    material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, and the notes thereto,
    for processes and apparatus for applying gas or vapor to solid material.


CLS 241/19
TXT Processes under subclass 18 in which the gas or vapor is applied to effect
    a separation or classification of the material.

    (1)     Note.  See section 8 of the class definition of this class for a
    statement relative to related art and the lines followed with other classes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9+,     for similar processes applied to cereals or other seeds.

    38+,    for apparatus including means to apply a gas or vapor to effect a
    separation of the material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses, especially subclasses 133+, and the notes thereto, for
    processes and apparatus for separating or classifying material through the
    use of a gas or vapor.


CLS 241/20
TXT Processes under subclass 15 in which there is applied to the material a
    liquid which functions to effect a separation or classification of the
    material according to its physical characteristics.

    (1)     Note.  See section 8 of the class definition for a statement
    relative to related art and the lines followed with other classes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9+,     for processes involving the use of a liquid separating or
    classifying agent as applied to cereal or other seeds.

    38+,    for comminuting or disintegrating apparatus combined with means to
    apply a liquid to the material either to effect a separation or
    classification or for some other purpose.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses, for processes and apparatus for separating and classifying
    material including steps of or means for applying liquid to the material.


CLS 241/21
TXT Processes under subclass 15 in which the liquid is applied to the material
    or the material is treated in a liquid, for the purpose of forming a pulp
    or suspension of the material particles therein.

    (1)     Note.  See section 3 of the class definition of this class for a
    statement relative to related art and the lines followed with other classes
    as to the formation of suspension or colloids.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38+,    especially 46.01+, for apparatus in which the comminution or
    disintegration is effected in a body of liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, appropriate subclasses for
    processes and apparatus for paper making, and see section 3 of the class
    definition of this class for the stated line between Class 162 and Class
    241.

    366,    Agitating, for processes and apparatus for mixing solids and
    liquids to form a pulp or suspension but including no comminution.


CLS 241/22
TXT Processes under the class definition in which the comminution or
    disintegration is combined with the step of adding a solid to the material.

    (1)     Note.  See section 2 of the class definition of this class for a
    statement of the line followed with the composition classes as to processes
    including the addition of solids to the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    for processes including the application of a fluid to the material.
    Where the added material is solid when applied, but changes its form to a
    fluid while applied to the material, this has been considered to be fluid
    application for subclasses 15+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, for processes for forming
    coating or plastic compositions by the comminution or disintegration of a
    plurality of ingredients.

    252,    Compositions, for processes of forming compositions by comminution
    of a plurality of solids.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 32+ for an abrading process involving the
    addition of a loose abrasive to the material.


CLS 241/23
TXT Processes under the class definition in which the step of comminution or
    disintegration is combined with the step of modifying or maintaining the
    temperature of the material by the application of heat to, or the
    extraction of heat from, the material, other than by the application of a
    fluid directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  See section 6 of the class definition of this class for
    notes to related arts and a statement of the lines followed with related
    classes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for processes involving heating or cooling of whole seeds.

    15+,    for processes in which a fluid is applied to the material to modify
    the temperature thereof or for other purposes, including, in subclass 18,
    the combination with an additional heating or cooling step.

    18,     see note to subclass 15 above.

    65+,    and the notes thereto, for comminuting or disintegrating apparatus
    combined with means to modify the temperature of the material.


CLS 241/24.1
TXT With classifying or separating of material:

    Process under the class definition in which the material, in addition to
    undergoing the comminuting or disintegrating operation, is subjected to
    sorting, (i.e., a classification or separation) according to the physical
    characteristics of the component separated from other components of the
    material.

    (1)     Note.  See section 8 of the class definition of this class for
    notes to related art and for a statement of the lines followed with related
    classes.


    (2)     Note.  Included herein is sorting a single-type material according
    to size, color, or quality.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9+,     for a process including the combined steps of comminuting and
    separating or classifying as applied to cereal and other seed or seeds
    parts.

    19,     for a process of comminuting combined with sorting by  use of a gas
    or vapor.

    20,     for a process directed to the combination of  comminuting with
    separating or classifying by use of a liquid.

    68+,    for comminuting apparatus combined with means to classify or
    separate the material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, for a process for
    subjecting the material to a classification or separation when not combined
    with significant comminuting.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, and see the reference to Class
    210 in section 8 of the class definition of this class.


CLS 241/24.11
TXT Including separating liquid from solid:

    Process of comminuting and separating under subclass 24.1 including sorting
    a component in the flowable state from a component in the nonflowable state.

    (1)     Note.  Pelletized solid material is not a liquid since it is not
    "in the flowable state" even though it may flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for comminuting combined with sorting by use of  material in the
    gaseous state wherein the gaseous material is utilized to enhance the
    sorting  operation.

    20,     for comminuting combined with sorting by use of   material in the
    liquid state wherein the liquid material is utilized to enhance the sorting
    operation.


CLS 241/24.12
TXT Of plural, diverse materials:

    Process of comminuting and separating under subclass 24.1 including sorting
    out a first component of a first material from a second component that is
    of a distinct material.

    (1)     Note.  Sorting of material according to size, quality, or color is
    not included herein.


CLS 241/24.13
TXT Including metal:

    Process of comminuting and separating under subclass 24.12 including
    sorting out a component that is of any category of electropositive elements
    that are usually whitish, lustrous, and in the transition metals, typically
    ductile and malleable with high tensile strength.


CLS 241/24.14
TXT Magnetically, electrostatically, or by use of eddy currents:

    Process of comminuting and separating under subclass 24.13 (a) utilizing
    magnetic attraction to draw out a ferrous, or ferrouslike component, (b)
    utilizing an electrostatic charge on the particles of a certain component
    of the material and sorting accordingly, or (c) utilizing the waves
    generated by moving electrical current to effect the sorting.


CLS 241/24.15
TXT Sorting by use of sieve:

    Process of comminuting and separating under subclass 24.13 including
    utilizing a member having a mass of restrictive openings to pass through
    the small particles of a first component of material and prevent passage of
    the large particles of the second component.

    (1)     Note.  The first and second components of this subclass are of
    different material, not simply large and small particles of the same
    material.


CLS 241/24.16
TXT Including food:

    Process of comminuting and separating under subclass 24.12 including
    sorting out a component to be used for edible consumption by an animal or
    fish.

    (1)     Note.  Sorting of waste food product to be used as plant fertilizer
    is not included herein.


CLS 241/24.17
TXT Including rubber:

    Process of comminuting and separating under subclass 24.12 including
    sorting out vulcanized sap of the rubber tree, or sorting out manufactured
    material that is similar thereto.


CLS 241/24.18
TXT Including plastic:

    Process of comminuting and separating under subclass 24.12 including
    sorting out a petroleum based solid component, or a component that is
    similar thereto.


CLS 241/24.19
TXT Including fibrous material, e.g., paper:

    Process of comminuting and separating under subclass 24.12 including
    sorting out a component consisting of masses of strands which may be
    aligned to enhance their strength.


CLS 241/24.2
TXT Wood or bark:

    Process of comminuting and separating under subclass 24.19 including
    sorting the fibrous component of material in the state produced by a
    growing plant.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is comminuting and separating of bagasse,
    material made from the sugar cane plant.


CLS 241/24.21
TXT Sorting by use of sieve:

    Process of comminuting and separating under subclass 24.19 including
    utilizing a member having a mass of restrictive openings to pass through
    the small particles of a first component of material and prevent passage of
    the large particles of the second component.

    (1)     Note.  The first and second components of this subclass are of
    different material, not simply large and small particles of the same
    material.


CLS 241/24.22
TXT Including glass:

    Process of comminuting and separating under subclass 24.12 including
    sorting a component comprised of brittle, siliceous material that has
    previously been melted, or material that is similar thereto.


CLS 241/24.23
TXT Including clay:

    Process of comminuting and separating under subclass 24.12 including
    sorting out a component comprised of very fine earthen particles.


CLS 241/24.24
TXT Including coal:

    Process of comminuting and separating under subclass 24.12 including
    sorting out a component comprised of hard, carbonaceous earthen material.

    (1)     Note.  "Soft" coal is considered to be hard under this definition;
    peat is not.


CLS 241/24.25
TXT Of metal:

    Process of comminuting and separating under subclass 24.1 including sorting
    of material that is of any category of electropositive elements that are
    usually whitish, lustrous, and in the transition metals, typically ductile
    and malleable with high tensile strength.


CLS 241/24.26
TXT Of food:

    Process of comminuting and separating under subclass 24.1 including sorting
    material to be used for edible consumption by an animal or fish.

    (1)     Note.  Sorting of waste food product to be used as plant fertilizer
    is not included herein.


CLS 241/24.27
TXT Of rubber:

    Process of comminuting and separating under subclass 24.1 including sorting
    vulcanized sap of the rubber tree, or sorting manufactured material that is
    similar thereto.


CLS 241/24.28
TXT Of plastic:

    Process of comminuting and separating under subclass 24.1 including sorting
    petroleum based solid material, or sorting material that is similar thereto.


CLS 241/24.29
TXT Of fibrous material:

    Process of comminuting and separating under subclass 24.1 particularly
    adapted to sort material consisting of masses of strands which may be
    aligned to enhance their strength.


CLS 241/24.3
TXT Of glass:

    Process of comminuting and separating under subclass 24.1 including sorting
    brittle, siliceous material that has previously been melted, or material
    that is similar thereto.


CLS 241/24.31
TXT Of coal:

    Process of comminuting and separating under subclass 24.1 including sorting
    hard, carbonaceous earthen material.


CLS 241/25
TXT Processes under the class definition in which the step of comminuting the
    material is combined with process steps for other purposes and not provided
    for above.

    (1)     Note.  The combined steps are in addition to the steps of feeding
    and/or discharging the material from the comminuting zone, controlling the
    flow to, through or from the comminuting zone, additional comminuting or
    disintegrating steps, and altering the atmospheric pressure within the
    comminuting zone.

    (2)     Note.  In this subclass, for example, will be found comminuting
    steps combined with steps of adding material to the feed to clean the
    comminuting surfaces, or steps of polishing the comminuted particles.

    (3)     Note.  All preceding subclasses must be investigated for particular
    combinations within this definition but which are specifically provided for
    above.

    (4)     Note.  See the notes to the class definition for combinations of
    comminuting steps with steps of other types that are provided for in other
    classes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101.01+, for corresponding combined appara-
       tus.


CLS 241/26
TXT Processes under the class definition in which the comminution is effected
    by causing one portion of the material to move relatively to another
    portion and in contact therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5+      and 39+, for processes and apparatus in which fluid suspended
    material is comminuted by mutual attrition.

    30      and 170+, for processes and apparatus in which the comminution or
    disintegration is effected by loose comminuting bodies which move relative
    to the material.

    274+    and 284, in order to complete the search.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 32+ and 326+ for a process or apparatus for
    abrading by tumbling.


CLS 241/27
TXT Processes under the class definition in which the comminution or
    disintegration of the material is effected by subjecting the particles
    thereof to a blow by a moving surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5       and 39, for processes and apparatus in which material in a fluid
    stream is subjected to a blow by a moving surface.

    86+,    185.5-197, for apparatus for comminuting material by subjecting it
    to the action of rotary striking members.


CLS 241/28
TXT Processes under the class definition in which the material which is
    comminuted is wood or other fibrous plant material.

    (1)     Note.  See section 5 of the class definition of this class for
    notes to related art and a general statement of the lines followed relative
    to classes dealing with fibrous material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for processes of comminuting or disintegrating wood or similar
    material to release liquids contained therein.

    6+,     for processes of treating cereal or other seeds.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, for cutting methods and apparatus.

    144,    Woodworking, for a miscellaneous process or machine for wood
    working to form a shape.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, appropriate subclasses, for
    processes and apparatus for comminuting fibrous material combined with a
    chemical treatment.


CLS 241/29
TXT Processes under the class definition in which all, or a portion of, the
    material is subjected to a plurality of comminuting or disintegrating
    operations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for processes of subjecting seeds to a plurality of successive
    comminuting steps.

    152.1+, and the notes thereto, for apparatus for subjecting material to a
    plurality of successive comminuting operations.


CLS 241/30
TXT Miscellaneous processes under the class definition not provided for above.


CLS 241/31
TXT Apparatus under the class definition provided with means to prevent the
    occurrence of explosions, to relieve the effects thereof, or to shield
    certain parts of the apparatus therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 455+ for relief valves of general
    application.


CLS 241/32
TXT Apparatus under the class definition provided with a means which rigidly
    connects two comminutor parts under normal working conditions but which, on
    the imposition of an overload, will disconnect the parts to prevent damage
    to the comminutor.

    (1)     Note.  Included are devices having parts connected by shear pins,
    resettable latches and the like.  Mere relief means such as biasing means
    for comminutor members are not included but are classified on some other
    basis below.  For example, see subclasses 121+, 127+, 211, 230+, and 286.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 169 for roll type presses having yieldable
    mountings for the roll.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 56.1+ and 150 for stop
    mechanisms including overload releases.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, subclasses 30+ for shaft couplings including overload
    release.


CLS 241/32.5
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having motor circuit control means,
    the control movement of which is governed by the particular orientation or
    position of a sink outlet stopper.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 650+ for sink
    details not restricted in utility to "garbage disposers".

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 61.86 for fluid
    controlling valve actuators whose operation concurrently makes or breaks a
    circuit, and subclass 81.9 for flow responsive switches.


CLS 241/33
TXT Apparatus under the class definition provided with means to sense a
    condition which means causes the operation of a control device.

    (1)     Note.  Comminuting members, valve bodies, and like members, which
    are contacted and moved or operated by the material were considered to be
    excluded by the above definition and will be found classified below.  See
    the appended notes.

    (2)     Note.  References under "Search Class" below and similar notes to
    the definitions of the indented subclasses will be found to include only
    those classes having automatic control features most nearly analogous to
    the subject matter of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59,     for nonautomatic gas flow control means.

    82,     for trap chambers having projected material operated closures.

    121+,   127+, 211, 230+, and 286+, for yieldingly mounted comminutor
    elements adapted to move under abnormal pressure of the material
    thereagainst.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 524+ and
    the notes thereto, for automatic control for apparatus for applying gas or
    vapor to solids.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 486+ for automatic
    controls in food treating apparatus.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 43+ for presses not elsewhere provided for and
    having automatic or material triggered control.

    192,    Clutches and Power Stop Control, subclasses 116.5+, for
    automatically controlled stop mechanisms of general application.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 52+, and the notes thereto for dispensers,
    per se, having automatic controls.


CLS 241/34
TXT Apparatus under subclass 33 in which the means automatically controlled is
    either the mechanism which feeds material to the comminuting zone or the
    feed control means.

    (1)     Note.  The various feeding subclasses of this class and the notes
    thereto should be searched for non-automatic feed controlling means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for automatic feed controls for comminutors which comprise overload
    release means.

    63+,    for nonautomatic feed control means which simultaneously controls
    the drive and/or surface positioning means of the comminutor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 45, for presses not elsewhere provided for and
    having automatic or triggered control of material addition, depositing or
    discharging.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power Driven, appropriate subclasses, for conveyors,
    per se, having automatic controls.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 52+, for automatically controlled feeders,
    per se.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, appropriate subclasses, for material
    handling devices, per se, having automatic controls.


CLS 241/35
TXT Apparatus under subclass 34 in which the condition to which the feed
    control is responsive is the speed of, or the effort exerted by, the
    comminutor drive means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for devices including means to automatically control the comminutor
    drive means.


CLS 241/36
TXT Apparatus under subclass 33 in which the automatic control effects a change
    in the operation of the drive means for the comminutor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for automatic control devices for comminutor drive mechanisms which
    comprise overload release means.

    63,     for nonautomatic drive control means which simultaneously controls
    the feed and/or surface positioning means of the comminutor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 48 for presses not elsewhere provided for, and
    having automatic or material triggered control of the press actuating means.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 116.5+, for stop
    mechanisms, per se.


CLS 241/37
TXT Apparatus under subclass 33 in which the automatic control means effects a
    change in the spacing of cooperating comminuting surfaces from each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for automatic control devices for comminuting surface positioning
    means comprising overload release means.

    63+,    for nonautomatic surface positioning means which simultaneously
    controls the feed and/or drive means of the comminutor.


CLS 241/37.5
TXT Apparatus under the class definition provided with a safety feature to
    guard the user from physical harm.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 478 for tool-guard means, and subclasses 544+ for
    guard means, any of which means protects the user as it protects the tool.


CLS 241/38
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including, or combined with, means for
    applying a fluid to the material.

    (1)     Note.  The application of the fluid may occur before, during, or
    after, the comminution.

    (2)     Note.  The term "means" as used above has been interpreted for the
    purpose of this classification to include any apparatus including the mill
    elements themselves, for inducing the flow of a fluid current or any
    instrumentalities controlling or directing the passage of fluid to or from
    the material.  Devices disclosed for treating solids in fluid suspension,
    but claiming no "means for applying a fluid" as defined and interpreted
    above were not classified in this group but will be found in other
    subclasses on the basis of the claimed combination.

    (3)     Note.  In general this class provides (in this group) the generic
    place for the combination of a comminutor with means to apply a gas, vapor,
    or liquid to the solid material being treated, without regard to the nature
    of the fluid applied or the purpose of the application. Accordingly, the
    devices found here include comminutors combined with means employing a
    fluid to heat or cool the material, separate it into grades, convey it,
    subject it to a chemical reaction, cook the material, etc.  Class 34,
    Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, provides the generic place for
    apparatus, per se, for applying gases or vapors to solids (see note 3 of
    the class definition of Class 34 for the line with this class) and Class
    134, Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, provides for the generic
    subject matter, per se, of applying liquids to solid material.  For the
    various special fluid application classes, a study of the notes to the
    aforementioned two classes should be made.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      5, 8, 9+, 12, and 15+, for corresponding processes.

    68+,    for apparatus including means for contacting the material with
    mercury coated plated or other coated objects. These devices were not
    interpreted to be fluid treatment combinations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, see (3) Note. above.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 516+ for apparatus that
    applies a fluid to food.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 73+ for presses not elsewhere classified,
    having additionally, means to apply fluid to the material.

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 106, for furnaces provided with means to apply a
    conveying fluid to the material as well as means to comminute it.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, see (3) Note above.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, appropriate subclasses, for
    paper making and fiber liberation apparatus combined with comminuting
    devices, and especially subclasses 234+ and 261.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 449+ and 456 for an abrading device having
    structure similar to comminutors provided with fluid supply means.


CLS 241/39
TXT Apparatus under subclass 38 in which the movement of a fluid by which the
    material is suspended is employed to effect the comminution of the material.

    (1)     Note.  The distinction between the patents included in this
    subclass and those in the other fluid application subclasses, is that the
    devices herein employ the movement of the fluid, viz., its kinetic energy,
    to effect the comminution of the material to which it has been applied.

    (2)     Note.  Comminuting devices which project the material against a
    surface without supporting it on a moving fluid current are not included
    herein. Numerous devices of this type will be found elsewhere in this
    class, see particularly subclasses 91 and 274+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for corresponding processes.

    91,     see (2) Note above.

    185.5   through 197, and the notes thereto, for apparatus in which material
    is subjected to impact by rotary members but in which there is no
    substantial suspension of the material in a moving fluid current.

    274,    see (2) Note. above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 519 for corresponding
    grain hullers.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 268 for fluid handling systems having
    holder means for solid, flaky or pulverized material to be dissolved or
    entrained.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 310+ and 336
    for spraying devices provided with means to entrain a solid in a flowing
    fluid stream.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 336+ for agitation effected by fluid kinetic
    energy by means of a stationary deflector in a flow-through mixing chamber.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, appropriate subclasses, for fluid
    current conveyors, per se.


CLS 241/40
TXT Apparatus under subclass 39 in which the fluid type comminution is due
    solely to the impact of fluid suspended material carried at a right angle
    against a stationary abutment surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 300+, for apparatus for projecting
    material against a stationary surface to be coated.


CLS 241/41
TXT Apparatus under subclass 38 provided with means for applying fluid to the
    same material or a portion thereof at a plurality of spaced points in the
    apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for processes in which fluid is applied to the material a plurality
    of times at least one such application being for the purpose of heating or
    cooling the material.

    39+,    for fluid comminutors having plural fluid applying means.

    43+,    for plural comminutors each of which may be provided with a single
    means for applying fluid to the material.

    52+     and 61, for apparatus in which material is recirculated to the
    fluid applying zone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclasses 93+ for fluid current
    conveyors, per se, provided with plural, spaced fluid applying means, and
    see the notes thereto.


CLS 241/42
TXT Apparatus under subclass 41 in which the material is treated in a plurality
    of comminuting zones which may be arranged so that the material passes
    serially or in parallel therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43+,    for devices having a plurality of comminuting zones in which fluid
    is applied to the material in some manner other than that defined as
    characteristic of this group.

    52+     and 61, for apparatus in which the material is recirculated between
    a single fluid applying zone and a single comminuting zone.

    134+    and 152.1+, and the notes thereto for apparatus embodying plural
    comminuting zones without the fluid applying feature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 520+ for similar plural
    grain hulling zones.


CLS 241/43
TXT Apparatus under subclass 38 provided with a plurality of distinct
    comminuting zones.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39+,    for plural fluid comminutors.

    42,     for apparatus provided with a plurality of distinct comminuting
    zones and in which fluid is applied to the same material at a plurality of
    spaced points.

    52+     and 61, for apparatus provided with fluid applying means in which
    the material is recirculated to the same comminuting zone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 520+ for similar plural
    grain hulling zones.


CLS 241/44
TXT Apparatus under subclass 43 in which the material flows in parallel paths
    through the plural comminuting zones.

    (1)     Note.  The fluid may be applied to the material before it has
    separated into parallel flow paths, while it is flowing in separate paths,
    or after the paths have been joined.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134+,   for parallel flow plural comminutors.


CLS 241/45
TXT Apparatus under subclass 43 in which the fluid is applied in the form of a
    generally horizontal current which flows successively past the plural
    comminuting zones.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for devices employing a horizontal gas current through a rotary
    comminuting drum, which provides only a single comminuting zone.


CLS 241/46.01
TXT Liquid submerged comminuting zone:
    Apparatus under subclass 38 provided with means for maintaining the
    comminuting zone wholly or partially submerged in a liquid.

    (1)     Note.  The comminuting zone of this subclass may contain standing
    liquid or may direct passage of liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39+,    for apparatus intended to comminute material supported in moving
    fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 516+ for means to apply
    fluid to treat food.


CLS 241/46.012
TXT Combined with dishwasher:
    Apparatus under subclass 46.01 in combination with means to remove foreign
    material from a vessel intended to contain food.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101.2+, for a comminutor combined with a noncomminuting material treating
    means, generally.

    185.6,  for the combination of a comminuting device with a pump, generally.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, especially subclass 121.1 for
    a device of that class including an impeller which may comminute material
    passing therethrough.


CLS 241/46.013
TXT Under-sink garbage disposal:
    Apparatus under subclass 46.01 for means to comminute kitchen food waste,
    which means is in series with the drain line of a sink.

    (1)     Note.  "Means for applying fluid to material" may comprise a sink
    faucet to which the disposal is attached, and need not be positively
    recited for classification herein.


CLS 241/46.014
TXT Having particular housing structure:
    Apparatus under subclass 46.013 wherein significance is attributed to a
    particular housing construction, material, or feature (e.g., mounting
    means, journal bearing, sound insulation, or of particular housing
    material).

    (1)     Note.  A housing structure is considered "particular", only if the
    particular feature is recited in a claim.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    285+,   for comminutor housing structure not otherwise provided for.


CLS 241/46.015
TXT Provision to mount to sink:
    Apparatus under subclass 46.014 wherein significance is attributed to the
    structure utilized in securing the apparatus to be supported, in use, by a
    kitchen countertop basin.


CLS 241/46.016
TXT Inlet provision:
    Apparatus under subclass 46.014 including a positively recited passageway
    through which material to be comminuted enters the device from the sink,
    e.g., a strainer, splash guard, or cap.

    (1)     Note.  The "inlet provision" of this subclass may comprise means to
    (a) limit the maximum size of material entering the comminuting zone or (b)
    prevent material from coming out of the comminuting zone via the entrance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32.5,   for a sink drain stopper having an interlock to prevent operation
    of a garbage disposal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 286+ for a sink
    stopper, strainer, etc., per se.


CLS 241/46.017
TXT Striker having vertical axis:
    Apparatus under subclass 46.01 including comminuting means comprising a
    striker having a vertical axis of rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257,    for a comminutor of the cooperating rotary type having a vertical
    axis wherein there is axial or radial flow of material.


CLS 241/46.02
TXT Apparatus under subclass 46.01 including means to effect a translatory
    movement of material.


CLS 241/46.04
TXT Apparatus under subclass 46.01 wherein the position of related components
    of the apparatus may be varied prior to or during a comminuting operation
    to accomplish a desired result.


CLS 241/46.06
TXT Apparatus under subclass 46.01 provided with a plurality of elements which
    elements are so related in position and relative motion that coaction
    therebetween effect a material comminution operation.


CLS 241/46.08
TXT Apparatus under subclass 46.06 wherein a striking element is movably
    secured to a rotary member which member generates an external force upon
    the element in such a manner that the element is urged against a
    cooperating surface with a blow-like effect which comminutes material
    caught therebetween.


CLS 241/46.11
TXT Apparatus under a subclass 46.06 wherein a stirring means turns upon an
    axis to create a turbulent motion of the liquid which motion generates a
    comminuting agitating force upon submerged material for its disintegration.


CLS 241/46.13
TXT Apparatus under subclass 46.06 wherein a first member, moves with a
    to-and-fro motion relative to a second associated member which first and
    second members effect a comminuting action during such first member
    movement.


CLS 241/46.15
TXT Apparatus under subclass 46.06 provided with a rolling member having a
    fixed or changeable axis which member engages a supporting surface or
    contacts like members for comminuting material collected therebetween.


CLS 241/46.17
TXT Apparatus under subclass 46.01 wherein the cause of liquid excitement is a
    stirring means which turns upon an axis to create a turbulent motion of the
    liquid which motion generates a comminuting agitating force upon submerged
    material for its disintegration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses for
    similar type fluid agitating means in     combination with a separate
    holding or handling device for solid materials or objects which are to be
    cleaned or contacted by fluid.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, appropriate subclasses for the
    agitation of a liquid containing fibrous material wherein some chemical or
    solvent action upon the fibrous material takes place.

    366,    Agitating, appropriate subclasses for the mixing and agitation of
    liquids or liquids combined with solids.


CLS 241/47
TXT Apparatus under subclass 38 in which the applied fluid is a gaseous current
    which flows through the comminuting zone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39+,    for fluid comminutors in which gas passes through the comminuting
    zone.

    60+,    for apparatus in which fluid is applied to the material after it
    has been discharged from the comminuting zone.

    62,     for apparatus in which fluid is applied to the material before it
    enters the comminuting zone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, appropriate subclasses, for fluid
    current conveyors, per se.


CLS 241/48
TXT Apparatus under subclass 47 in which gas that has left the comminuting zone
    is recirculated thereto..

    (1)     Note.  The gas may undergo treatment of some form, i.e., heating,
    cooling, cleaning, etc., before being reapplied to the material or may be
    used to recirculate insufficiently comminuted material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52+,    for apparatus in which the oversize material, but not the gas
    current, is recirculated to the comminuting zone.


CLS 241/49
TXT Apparatus under subclass 47 in which material suspended in a gaseous
    current is conveyed to a separating screen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 490+ and the subclasses which follow for
    separators of the screen type for separating solids from a gas current.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 528 for grain hulling
    apparatus having a screen and gas moving means.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting, Solids, subclasses 21+, 250
    and 318, for separators, per se, in which the material is conveyed by a gas
    current to a separating screen for separation into grades.


CLS 241/50
TXT Apparatus under subclass 49 in which the material is elevated to a screen
    by a fan member or members mounted on the comminutor drive shaft or on the
    shaft of a rotary comminuting element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for apparatus in which the fan is mounted on the comminuting
    element shaft but the material is not applied to a screen.


CLS 241/51
TXT Apparatus under subclass 49 in which the screen to which the material is
    applied forms a part of the surface against which the comminution takes
    place.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83+,    for apparatus including screen type comminuting members but which
    involve no fluid current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 518+ for grain hullers
    in combination with fluid application which may have a perforated member
    therewith.


CLS 241/52
TXT Apparatus under subclass 47 in which means is provided to return to the
    comminuting zone oversize material which has been removed by the gas
    current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for such apparatus involving the return of the gas current to the
    comminuting zone.

    80,     for devices having means to return oversize to a comminutor from a
    nonfluid type separator.


CLS 241/53
TXT Apparatus under subclass 52 in which the gas is moved through the
    comminuting zone by suction applied above and coaxially of a comminuting
    member or members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for similar combinations in which no return flow means for the
    oversize is claimed.


CLS 241/54
TXT Apparatus under subclass 47 in which a rotary drum forms the comminuting
    zone through a substantial part of which passes a gas current which
    progresses in a generally horizontal direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for apparatus in which a horizontal gas current passes through a
    succession of rotary drums or compartments of a single drum.


CLS 241/55
TXT Apparatus under subclass 47 in which the gas moving means is attached to a
    comminuting element or comprises the comminuting element itself.

    (1)     Note.  Comminuting elements provided with gas moving means are
    included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109,    185.5, 222, and 245, for discharge members attached to rotary
    comminuting elements which do not move at such a speed as to create an air
    current but merely move the material to a discharge opening.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 530  for a grain huller
    having a gas-moving means integral therewith.


CLS 241/56
TXT Apparatus under subclass 47 in which the gas moving means is mounted on the
    same shaft with a rotary comminuting element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     for such devices in which the gas moving means applies the material
    to a screen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 531 for a grain huller
    and gas mover coaxially separated.


CLS 241/57
TXT Apparatus under subclass 47 in which the gas is applied in a relatively
    localized area within the comminuting zone.


CLS 241/58
TXT Apparatus under subclass 47 in which the gaseous current through the
    comminuting zone is caused by the application of suction above and
    coaxially of at least one of the comminuting members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for apparatus as defined but in which provision is made for the
    return of oversize material to the comminuting zone.

    56,     for apparatus in which the suction is applied above and coaxially
    of the comminuting member by a gas moving means mounted on the same shaft.


CLS 241/59
TXT Apparatus under subclass 47 provided with means to control the flow of gas
    and/or through the comminuting zone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for automatic means to control the flow of gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses
    594+ to 637+ for multiple valves.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 154 and
    502, for gas flow control means in separators.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, for valves, per se, for controlling gas
    flow.


CLS 241/60
TXT Apparatus under subclass 38 in which the fluid is applied subsequently to
    the comminuting operation.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the so-called amalgamating mills in which material
    leaving the comminuting zone is treated by a mercurial bath to separate the
    values are included in this subclass. Where the material is subjected to
    the separating action of a plate which has been coated with an amalgamating
    material, it was not considered, for purposes of this classification, to
    have been treated by a fluid, and these combinations have been classified
    with the other separator combinations in subclass 68.

    (2)     Note.  See the reference to Class 110, Furnaces, under section 6 of
    the class definition.  Where the disclosed purpose of applying fluid
    subsequent to comminuting is for supporting combustion the combination is
    classifiable in Class 110.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47+,    for devices in which the fluid is applied both during the
    comminuting operation and subsequent thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 518+ for a grain huller
    wherein fluid application may be subsequent to hulling.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solid, subclasses 174+, for
    amalgamator separators, per se.


CLS 241/61
TXT Apparatus under subclass 60 in which at least a portion of the material is
    returned to the comminuting zone from the fluid application zone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for corresponding processes applied to cereal grains and the like.

    52+,    for apparatus in which material is removed from the comminuting
    zone by a gas current and is then recirculated to the comminuting zone.

    80,     for apparatus in which the oversize material from a nonfluid
    applying separator is recirculated to the comminuting zone.


CLS 241/62
TXT Apparatus under subclass 38 in which the fluid is applied prior to the
    comminuting operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for corresponding processes applied to cereal seeds and the like.

    47+,    for devices in which the fluid is applied both before and during
    the comminuting operation.

    61,     for devices in which the fluid is applied both subsequent to and
    prior to the comminuting operation.


CLS 241/63
TXT Apparatus under the class definition provided with feed means, drive means
    and/or surface positioning means so inter-related that two or more of them
    may be controlled simultaneously by a single operating member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33+,    for such devices embodying an automatic control.

    100,    for comminutors in which the drive therefor is controlled by the
    positioning of a receiving receptacle at the comminutor outlet.

    135+,   for inter-related feed devices for comminutors arranged for
    parallel flow of material.

    145,    for parallel roll mills having means to simultaneously position
    separate rolls by a single operator.


CLS 241/64
TXT Apparatus under subclass 63 limited to the simultaneous control of
    inter-related feed means and surface positioning means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34+,    for such devices embodying an automatic control means.


CLS 241/65
TXT Apparatus under the class definition provided with means to modify the
    temperature of the material being treated.

    (1)     Note.  The temperature modifying treatment may take place before,
    during, or after the comminution.

    (2)     Note.  See section 6 of the class definition of this class for
    notes to related art and for a statement of the lines followed with the
    various heating, cooling and drying classes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      17 and 23, for processes involving comminution combined with steps
    of heating or cooling.

    38+,    for comminuting devices in which the temperature modification is
    effected by the application of a fluid to the material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids.

    62,     Refrigeration, particularly subclasses 320+.

    100,    Presses, subclass 92 for presses not elsewhere provided for, with
    means for heating, cooling or drying the material.

    110,    Furnaces.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for temperature modifying
    structure, per se.

    219,    Electric Heating.

    432,    Heating.


CLS 241/66
TXT Apparatus under subclass 65 in which the heating or cooling of the material
    is accomplished by means which modifies the temperature of a comminuting
    member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 47 for a structurally installed heat
    exchange arrangement.


CLS 241/67
TXT Apparatus under subclass 66 in which the temperature of a moving
    comminuting element is modified by fluid within or carried by the element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 200+ for roll coolers and heaters in
    metal rolling mills.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 300+ for presses not elsewhere classified
    having heating or cooling means.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 87 for a screw type impeller, and
    subclasses 92+ for a stirrer or scraper, with passages for heat exchange
    fluid.


CLS 241/68
TXT Apparatus under the class definition provided with means to separate or
    classify the material undergoing treatment according to the physical
    characteristics of the parts separated.

    (1)     Note.  See section 8 of the class definition of this class for
    notes to related art and for a statement of the lines followed with the
    separating classes.

    (2)     Note.  Classification in this group is proper only if the separator
    consists of means other than the elements which effect the comminution.
    Where the separation is effected by the comminuting elements or a portion
    thereof, the patents have been classified elsewhere in the class. See, for
    example, subclasses 82, 83+ and 96.

    (3)     Note.  For purposes of this classification, where material is
    subjected to a plurality of successive separating operations, without an
    intermediate comminution, (e.g., where the material flows over and through
    a plurality of superposed screens) the operation is considered in its
    entirety as a single separation (i.e., separating zone) to obtain a
    plurality of grades.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24.1+,  for the corresponding process.

    38+,    for comminutors combined with separators which involve the
    application of a fluid to the material.

    82,     83+ and 96 (see (1) Note above).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, for apparatus for separating solids
    from gases, per se.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 601+ for a grain huller
    that segregates diverse materials.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses, and the notes thereto, for apparatus for separating solids into
    grades.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses, and see
    the reference to Class 210 in Section 8 of the class definition of this
    class.


CLS 241/69
TXT Apparatus under subclass 68 in which the separating means comprises a
    screen or grating so arranged relative to the comminuting mechanism as to
    allow the discharge of sufficiently comminuted material during the
    comminuting operation, while the oversize material is retained within the
    comminuting zone for further treatment.

    (1)     Note.  The line maintained between this group and subclasses 79+ is
    that where the material has been fed to a screen from the comminuting zone
    in such a way that a conveyor (other than the comminuting elements) would
    be necessary to return it to the zone, then the material has not been
    merely retained within the zone, as is necessary for this group, and the
    device is properly classifiable in subclasses 79+.  However, where the
    arrangement is such that following treatment by the comminuting elements
    the material is so fed to the screen that the oversize is presented again
    to the comminuting elements by mere gravity flow or by action of the
    comminuting elements, then it is considered that the oversize has been
    merely "retained" as defined above, and such devices are classified here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49+,    for discharge permitting screens associated with means to apply a
    fluid to the material to convey it to the screen.

    83+,    for comminutors provided with discharge permitting screens but in
    which the screen elements acts to accomplish at least a portion of the
    comminuting operation (see (1) Note under subclass 68).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 233+ and
    the notes thereto for sifters, per se.


CLS 241/70
TXT Apparatus under subclass 69 in which the discharge permitting screen forms
    a partition or end wall in a rotary comminuting drum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     105, 115, 137, and 153, for rotary comminuting drums provided with
    partitions which do not have a separating function.


CLS 241/71
TXT Apparatus under subclass 70 provided with a plurality of screening
    partitions or end walls.


CLS 241/72
TXT Apparatus under subclass 71 in which the material is presented to and flows
    past the plural partitions in succession.


CLS 241/73
TXT Apparatus under subclass 69 in which the screen is in the form of an arc
    which is concentric with the axis of rotation of a separate rotary
    comminuting member which cooperates with a member on which the arcuate
    screen is mounted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86+     and 90, for arcuate screens which cooperate with rotary comminuting
    members to assist in the comminuting operation.


CLS 241/74
TXT Apparatus under subclass 69 in which the discharge permitting screen takes
    the form of an annular screen which surrounds the comminuting zone or is
    mounted thereabove.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     for devices having such screens combined with elevating fan means
    to apply material thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 605+ for a grain huller
    having a cylindrical or conical perforated enclosure.


CLS 241/75
TXT Apparatus under subclass 68 in which the material flows (1) from a single
    comminuting zone in separate paths to a plurality of separators, (2) from a
    single separator in separate paths to a plurality of comminuting zones, or
    (3) in separate paths through a plurality of separating and comminuting
    zones, or any combination of features (1), (2) and (3).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41+     and 44, for such combinations involving the application of a fluid
    to the material.

    74,     for similar structures but in which screen partitions retain the
    material within the comminuting zone until sufficiently reduced.


CLS 241/76
TXT Devices under subclass 68 in which the material flows alternately in
    succession through a plurality of distinct comminuting zones and distinct
    separating zones.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for corresponding processes applied to cereal grains.

    42,     for such devices in which the separation involves the application
    of a fluid to the material.

    72,     for similar structures but in which the material is retained within
    the comminuting zones until sufficiently reduced.


CLS 241/77
TXT Apparatus under subclass 68 in which the material flows from one separator
    through a comminuting zone to another separator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for such devices in which the separation involves the application
    of a fluid to the material.

    76,     for the above defined combination provided with an additional
    comminutor or comminutor-separator combinations through which the material
    flows in series.


CLS 241/78
TXT Apparatus under subclass 68 in which the material flows from one
    comminuting zone through a separator to another comminuting zone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42      and 43+, for such combinations in which the separation involves the
    application of a fluid to the material.

    76,     for the above combination provided with additional separators or
    separator-comminutor combinations through which the material flows in
    series.


CLS 241/79
TXT Apparatus under subclass 68 in which the material flows from a comminuting
    zone to a separator.

    (1)     Note.  Classification in this subclass is proper only if the
    separation takes place in a zone that is so spaced from the comminuting
    zone that a conveying means would be necessary to return the material to
    the comminuting zone.  For screen type separators wherein oversize material
    is retained in the comminuting zone, see subclasses 69+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49+     and 60, for such combinations in which the separation involves the
    application of a fluid to the material.

    76,     77 and 78, for the above combination provided with additional
    separators and/or comminutors through which the material flows in series.


CLS 241/79.1
TXT Device under subclass 79 provided with means to separate materials by
    electrostatic or magnetic attraction, differences in material densities,
    adherence to a surface, or by combination of material at the molecular
    level.


CLS 241/79.2
TXT Device under subclass 79 having a disintegrating member which revolves in
    an arc of at least 369o about a fixed axis, the device being provided with
    a perforated separating surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185.5   through 197, 220+ and 277+, for rotary comminuting members not
    provided with material classifiers.


CLS 241/79.3
TXT Device under subclass 79.2 provided with a perforated separating surface
    which revolves about a fixed axis in an arc of at least 360o.


CLS 241/80
TXT Apparatus under subclass 79 in which material classified as oversize in the
    separator is conveyed back to the comminuting zone for retreatment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for corresponding methods applied to cereal grains.

    52+     and 61+, for comminutor-separator combinations in which the
    oversize is returned to the comminuting zone but which involve the
    application of a fluid to the material.

    69+,    for devices where the material is retained within the comminuting
    zone until sufficiently reduced in size.

    97,     for comminutors combined with recirculation means.


CLS 241/81
TXT Apparatus under subclass 68 in which the material flows from a separator to
    a comminuting zone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for such combinations in which the separation involves the
    application of a fluid to the material.

    76,     77 and 78, for the above combination provided with additional
    separators and/or comminutors through which the material flows in series.

    96,     for devices in which the comminuting surface or surfaces reject
    oversize material before passing to the comminuting zone.


CLS 241/82
TXT Apparatus under the class definition provided with a chamber into which the
    material of certain characteristics is projected by the movement of the
    comminuting members and is thus prevented from passing to the comminuting
    zone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     and the notes thereto for comminutors provided with means to
    separate material of certain characteristics from the feed to the
    comminutor, but in which the separator is distinct from the comminuting
    elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 642, for
    article assorters, per se, which involve the use of a thrower.


CLS 241/82.1
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a part having a shape that
    is generally cylindroidal, on the periphery of which is a ridge that
    circumscribes the cylindroid for a plurality of convolutions that are
    spaced from each other parallel to the centerline of the cylindroid, which
    part rotates within the confines of a casing and an element having a
    plurality of apertures that serve as passageways for the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246+,   for a rotary propeller or screw feeding or discharge means.


CLS 241/82.2
TXT Apparatus under subclass 82.1 provided with means to change the size of the
    pieces of product that emerge from the passageways.


CLS 241/82.3
TXT Apparatus under subclass 82.1 wherein the surface provided with passageways
    is a curved surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89.3,   for a perforated concave surface without a claimed helical pusher.


CLS 241/82.4
TXT Apparatus under subclass 82.1 provided with a plurality of comminuters
    (e.g., knives) that turn about a common axis, and that act on the material
    in succession.

    (1)     Note.  The turning comminuters are in addition to the helical
    pusher.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52+,    for series material flow through plural comminuting zones.


CLS 241/82.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 82.1 provided with a revolving comminutor (e.g.,
    knife) which acts on the work before the work goes through the openings in
    the perforated member.


CLS 241/82.6
TXT Apparatus under subclass 82.5 wherein the casing which surrounds the
    cylindroidal part has an irregular interior surface (e.g., ribs)
    cooperating with such part.


CLS 241/82.7
TXT Apparatus under subclass 82.1 provided with a revolving comminuter (e.g.,
    knife) which acts on the work after it has passed through the passageways
    in the apertured element.


CLS 241/83
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which at least a portion of the
    comminuting surface which is presented to the material to effect the
    comminution is provided with openings through the surface to permit the
    passage of sufficiently comminuted material therethrough to discharge it
    from the comminuting zone.

    (1)     Note.  This group is meant to include only the surfaces which
    present completely bounded openings for the passage of material.  Mere
    intermeshing comminuting surface characteristics are not included and are
    classified with the various types of comminutors below.

    (2)     Note.  Patents directed to the subcombination of the apertured
    surface, per se, have been classified in this group on the basis of the
    disclosed combination.

    (3)     Note.  See (2) Note to the definition of subclass 68.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for comminutors provided with comminuting surfaces having openings
    to which material is borne by a gas current.

    69+,    for devices which permit the discharge of comminuted material
    during the comminuting operation, but in which the screen has no
    comminuting function.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 104+, for presses not elsewhere classified
    having drain means for expressed liquid.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 233+,
    674, 675+, and 680+, for screens, sifters, and apertured members designed
    for the separation of solids into grades, but having no disclosed
    comminuting function.

    210,    Liquid Purification of Separation, subclasses 483+, particularly
    subclasses 498 and 499, for filter plates or screens.


CLS 241/84
TXT Apparatus under subclass 83 in which the comminuting surface which is
    provided with the material passages cooperates with a comminuting surface
    or member which moves relative to it to effect comminution.

    (1)     Note.  Loose grinding body comminutors (e.g., ball or rod mills)
    provided with perforated receptacles are included in this subclass since
    the grinding body was considered to present a moving comminuting surface
    which cooperates with the perforated receptacle.  See this class,
    subclasses 170+, for loose grinding body comminutors with imperforate
    receptacles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91+,    94 and 95, for comminutors having perforated comminuting surfaces
    which cooperate with a stationary imperforate surface or directly with the
    material (single surface type).

    198.1,  for other comminutors having cooperating comminuting surfaces.


CLS 241/84.1
TXT Apparatus under subclass 84 provided with members, (including shapes such
    as cylinders, spheres, parallelepipeds, tetrahedrons and/or mixed shaped),
    having free movement in the comminuting zone, and not having any fixed
    connection with other parts of the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137,    for loose grinding bodies in plural comminuting zones with parallel
    material flow.

    153,    for loose grinding bodies in plural comminuting zones with series
    material flow.

    170+,   for a loose grinding body comminutor.


CLS 241/84.2
TXT Apparatus under subclass 84 wherein the perforated surface cooperates with
    a tool which has compound movement in the form of rotation about an axis
    passing through the tool and concurrent lateral movement relative to the
    perforated surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201+,   for compound movement comminutor not provided with a perforated
    surface.


CLS 241/84.3
TXT Apparatus under subclass 84 provided with a cooperating member which swings
    back and forth in an arc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94,     for an oscillating perforated surface.

    264+,   for an oscillating comminutor not cooperating with a perforated
    surface.


CLS 241/84.4
TXT Apparatus under subclass 84 wherein the cooperating surface or member moves
    back and forth in a straight line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262+,   for reciprocating cooperating comminuting surfaces not cooperating
    with a perforated surface.

    283+,   for a reciprocating comminuting surface.


CLS 241/85
TXT Apparatus under subclass 84 in which the screen comminuting surface has a
    rotary motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 284 to
    299, 301, and 304+, for rotating screens.


CLS 241/86
TXT Apparatus under subclass 84 in which the surface having openings cooperates
    with a rotary surface or member to effect the comminution.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185.5   through 197, for similar devices which do not include a claimed
    surface having passages for the material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 600+, for a grain
    hulling means that may leave cooperating rotating surfaces.


CLS 241/86.1
TXT Apparatus under subclass 86 wherein the rotary member hurls the work
    through space so that the work impacts the foraminous surface with
    sufficient force to comminute the work, or to contribute to the overall
    comminuting effect of the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47+,    for devices having means to cause a gas flow in the comminuting
    zone.


CLS 241/86.2
TXT Apparatus under subclass 86 wherein the work contacting member is loosely
    joined to a revolving carrier (e.g., hub) so that the work contacting
    member is free to swing about a pivot as it is moved in a circular path by
    the carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193,    for a striking member loosely mounted on a rotor.

    194,    for a striking member pivoted to a rotor.

    201+,   for compound movement comminutors not provided with a surface
    having discharge openings.


CLS 241/87
TXT Apparatus under subclass 86 in which the screen or elements thereof have
    some movement other than rotation during comminution.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85,     for devices in which the rotary striking member cooperates with a
    rotary surface having openings.

    187,    for such devices in which the rotary striking member cooperates
    with a movable member which is not a screen.


CLS 241/87.1
TXT Apparatus under subclass 86 wherein the rotor has projections which move
    past projections on the stator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191,    for similar devices not provided with a comminuting screen.


CLS 241/88
TXT Apparatus under subclass 86 in which the screen surface is provided with
    projections or other characteristics which assist in effecting the
    comminution.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235+,   242+, 260+, and 291+, for other comminuting elements provided with
    nonsmooth surface characteristics.


CLS 241/88.1
TXT Apparatus under subclass 88 wherein the openings in the foraminous surface
    are defined, at least in part, by an acute margin of the surrounding
    surface portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82.1+,  for similar surfaces in devices provided with a helical pusher
    inside a tube.

    273.1+, for comminuting surfaces having sharp edges, but not provided with
    discharge openings.


CLS 241/88.2
TXT Apparatus under subclass 88 provided with a nonporous comminuting surface
    in addition to the foramionous comminuting surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 605+ for a grain
    hulling device provided with both perforated and nonperforated surfaces.


CLS 241/88.3
TXT Apparatus under subclass 88.2 in which the material is subjected to a
    succession of at least three comminuting faces which are porous and
    nonporous by turns.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152+,   for devices in which the material is subjected to a series of
    comminuting operations.


CLS 241/88.4
TXT Apparatus under subclass 88 wherein the apertured surface includes a
    plurality of separated parallel elongated members.


CLS 241/89
TXT Apparatus under subclass 86 wherein the perforated surface is pivotally
    mounted or readily moveable to a dumping position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286+,   for means to adjustably or yieldably mount normally stationary
    comminuting elements.


CLS 241/89.1
TXT Apparatus under subclass 86 in which the surface having openings, or
    portions thereof, is movable to change the size of the openings or its
    position relative to the comminuting member.


CLS 241/89.2
TXT Apparatus under subclass 86 wherein the perforated surface or parts thereof
    can be completely separated from the apparatus or the perforated surface is
    moved so a different part of said surface is in the comminuting zone.


CLS 241/89.3
TXT Apparatus under subclass 86 wherein the stationary comminuting surface is
    an interior curved surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273.1,  for a stationary curved surface provided with a plurality of points
    or punched out barbs, but not discharge openings.


CLS 241/89.4
TXT Apparatus under subclass 86 wherein the discharge openings pass through a
    level, radially extending element that has a large surface area as compared
    with its thickness, and which surface remains immobile during comminution.


CLS 241/91
TXT Apparatus under subclass 83 in which the material is presented to rotary
    comminuting surface provided with passages for the material.

    (1)     Note.  Most of the devices in this subclass comprise perforated
    rotating screen drums in which the material is tumbled or devices in which
    the material is presented to a nonradial, nonperipheral face.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70+,    for such devices in which there is provided a screen in addition to
    the comminuting surface which prevents the discharge of oversize material.

    85,     for devices in which rotary surfaces having openings cooperate with
    a moving surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses relating to rotary cutters.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 522, 603+ and 605+, for
    grain hullers having perforated surfaces.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 162.1+ for a wood slicer having similar
    structure.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 284 to
    299, and 303+, for rotating drum sifters.


CLS 241/92
TXT Apparatus under subclass 91 in which the face of the comminuting member,
    which is presented to the material, is generally in a radial plane relative
    to the axis of rotation of the member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85,     for perforated radial comminuting surfaces which cooperate with a
    moving comminuting surface.

    244+    and 278.1, for devices having imperforate radial comminuting faces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 622 for a radial face
    grain hulling surface.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 118 and 176, for a similar device which
    functions to impart a shape to wood or like material.


CLS 241/93
TXT Apparatus under subclass 91 in which the perforated rotating comminuting
    surface has the general shape of a cylinder and the material is presented
    to the outer periphery thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85,     for perforated peripheral comminuting surfaces which cooperate with
    a moving comminuting surface.

    221+,   277, 279, and 280+, for such devices having imperforate peripheral
    comminuting surfaces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 331+ for a
    rotary flying cutter, and subclasses 355+ and 607+ for a cutter with simple
    revolving motion.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 605+ and 639 for a
    perforated cylinder type grain huller and stemmer, respectively.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 117.1+, 172+ and 188, for a similar device
    which functions to impart a shape to wood and like material.


CLS 241/94
TXT Apparatus under subclass 83 in which a comminuting surface which is
    provided with openings for the passage of material has reciprocating
    motion, i.e., traverses the same path and reverses its motion at the end of
    this path.

    (1)     Note.  The path may be rectilinear or curvilinear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95      and 274, for devices in which the material is given a reciprocating
    motion relative to a stationary comminuting surface.

    262+,   for relatively reciprocating surfaces which cooperate to comminute
    the material.

    283,    for reciprocating single surface comminutors having an imperforate
    comminuting surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 121+ and 182+, for a similar device for
    operating on wood and like material to impart a shape thereto.


CLS 241/95
TXT Apparatus under subclass 83 in which a stationary comminuting surface is
    provided with openings for the passage of material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145,    for pencil-sharpening implements discharging debris through
    comminuting openings into a catch receptacle.

    274+,   for stationary single surface comminutors in which the stationary
    member is imperforate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 453+, for pencil-sharpening implements
    discharging debris through comminuting openings into a catch receptacle.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 518+ and 600+ for grain
    hullers that may have a perforated stationary hulling surface.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 120+, 175, and 190, for a similar device
    operating on wood or like material for imparting a shape thereto.


CLS 241/96
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the comminuting surface or
    surfaces are so arranged or have such characteristics that material of more
    than a given size is rejected by the surfaces before comminution.

    (1)     Note.  In the devices classified herein, the material which is
    rejected never reaches the comminuting zone as distinguished from the
    devices found in this class, subclasses 69+, in which the oversize material
    is prevented from leaving the comminuting zone after having been treated
    therein.

    (2)     Note.  Most of the devices classified here are clay grinders which
    reject the stones mixed in the clay.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83+,    for apertured comminuting elements which reject oversize material.


CLS 241/97
TXT Apparatus under the class definition provided with means to carry
    discharged material back to the comminuting zone to be retreated therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     13 and 29, for processes involving subjecting the material to a
    plurality of comminuting operations.

    48,     for apparatus in which gas is recirculated to the comminuting zone.

    52+     and 61, for apparatus involving the application of a gas to the
    material in which the material is recirculated to the comminuting zone.

    69+,    for apparatus in which the material is prevented from leaving the
    discharge zone until sufficiently comminuted.

    80,     for apparatus in which material is recirculated between a separator
    and a comminuting zone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 72 for presses not elsewhere provided for with
    means for recycling the compacted material.


CLS 241/98
TXT Apparatus under the class definition combined with means to cause parts of
    the material undergoing treatment to move irregularly with respect to each
    other so as to cause them to commingle.

    (1)     Note.  Agitators which merely assist in the feed or discharge and
    do not act to commingle the materials are excluded and will be found in the
    various feeding and discharging subclasses. Likewise, plows and the like
    for moving the material to and from the comminuting zone are excluded and
    will be found in the various comminutor groups.  Agitation by the
    comminutor elements themselves is excluded, i.e., while the agitation and
    comminution may be coincident, the agitator elements must be distinct from
    the instrumentalities which effect the comminution.  The material
    undergoing treatment by the agitator must be that which has been, will be,
    or is being treated in the comminutor.  Comminutors combined with agitators
    which mix material other than that being comminuted are classified in
    subclasses 101.01+ of this class (241).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38+,    for comminutors combined with means to apply a fluid to the
    material for agitation or other purposes.

    97,     for agitators which act to recirculate material to the comminuting
    zone.


CLS 241/99
TXT Apparatus under the class definition peculiarly adapted for breaking
    friable containers or a portion thereof to render them unfit for reuse or
    to recover the material from which they are made.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     94, 262+, and 283, for comminuting devices having reciprocating
    comminuting members.

    185.5   through 197, for comminutors in which material is subjected to
    blows by rotary striking members.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses, for patents to a device for
    crushing hollow metal bodies (containers, car bodies, etc.) and disclosed
    as also capable of breaking bottles.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, subclass 58 for automatic system of that class
    comprising a frangible container, and subclasses 80 and 83 for portable
    vessels provided with means therein to break a chemical containing bottle.


CLS 241/100
TXT Apparatus under the class definition provided with (1) a detachable
    receiver for the material discharged from the comminutor, or (2) means on
    the comminutor adapted to engage a removable receiver for the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     for detachable receivers for material separated by projection from
    the remainder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 320+ for the combination of a comminutor
    with a receiver where the latter is claimed as means for utilizing a
    refrigerant.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 11+ and 69+ for devices for filling separable receivers,
    combined with means to subject the material to some treatment other than
    comminution.


CLS 241/101.01
TXT Combined or convertible:
    Apparatus under the class definition in which the means for comminuting the
    material is (a) combined with apparatus for another purpose not provided
    for above, or (b) in which a part is relatively movable or interchangeable
    in order to convert the apparatus to another apparatus either within or
    outside the class definition.

    (1)     Note.  The combined feature of clause (a) is in addition to:

    (1.)    the necessary drive or static mounting means for the comminutor
    (e.g., subclasses 285.1+);

    (2.)    means for controlling the flow of material to, through, or from the
    comminuting zone (e.g., subclasses 109, 135+, 171, 185.5+, 202, 222+, 245,
    265, or 271);

    (3.)    an additional comminuting device within the comminuting zone,
    (e.g., subclasses 104, 105, 108, 115, 134, and 152.1+);

    (4.)    means for retaining material within the comminuting zone or for
    returning escaped material thereto (e.g., subclasses 46.016, 119, 124, and
    226);

    (5.)    means for cleaning a comminuting surface (e.g., subclass 112 or
    166+);

    (6.)    means to balance a comminuting element (e.g., subclass 292); or

    (7.)    means to lubricate the comminutor.

    (2)     Note.  In this subclass, for example, is a comminuting device
    combined with signaling or indicating means; inspection means; ambulant
    supporting means; material handling means other than necessary to feed
    material to or remove material from the comminuting zone; means to
    compress, cut, mold, or otherwise shape the material prior to comminution;
    sampling means; vacuumizing means; huller or sheller for seeds; container
    opener; blade sharpener; or agitating means for material other than that
    being comminuted.

    (3)     Note.  All preceding subclasses must be investigated for particular
    combinations within this definition but which are specifically provided for
    above.

    (4)     Note.  See the notes to the class definition for the combination of
    a comminutor with other apparatus provided for in other classes.


CLS 241/101.1
TXT Apparatus under subclasses 101.01+ which parts are relatively movable or
    interchangeable in order to convert the apparatus for some other purpose.


CLS 241/101.2
TXT Apparatus under subclasses 101.01+ including comminutors with features
    other than the comminuting structure.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note of subclass 101.01 for noncomminuting means
    provided for in this class (241).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46.012, for a comminutor combined with a dishwasher.


CLS 241/101.3
TXT Apparatus under subclass 101.2 having means to provide information relating
    to the operation of the machine, or relating to a characteristic (e.g.,
    size or weight) of the material either before or after comminution.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses, for measuring and
    testing devices not combined with a comminutor.


CLS 241/101.4
TXT Apparatus under subclass 101.2 having means (other than of the class type)
    to change the physical form of the material before comminution (e.g.,
    cutting).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152.1+, for a series of comminuting zones of the class type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses, for cutting devices not combined
    with comminutors.


CLS 241/101.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 101.2 having means to move the work or the product
    except directly to or from the comminuting zone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    111,    Planting, subclasses 8+, 34+, and 130+, for mechanisms for planting
    seeds, etc., at intervals.


CLS 241/101.6
TXT Apparatus under subclass 101.5 provided with means to blend two or more
    substances, one comminuted and one not comminuted by the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98,     for devices having means other than the comminutor to agitate the
    comminuted material.

    101.8,  for a mill combined with a mixer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    366,    Agitating, particularly subclasses 152.1+, 160.1+, 162.1+, and
    177.1+ for mixing of plural substances, per se.


CLS 241/101.71
TXT With support vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 101.2 wherein the comminuting apparatus is mounted
    on a movable carrier (e.g., a vehicle with wheels).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, for ambulant supporting apparatus not combined with
    a comminutor.


CLS 241/101.72
TXT Having extendable, comminutor-supporting arm:

    Apparatus under subclass 101.71 including a comminutor mounted on the
    support vehicle for manipulation by a support member that is mounted for
    movement outwardly from the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  The arm of this subclass may be comprised of multiple links
    pivotally connected to each other or comprised of aligned segments mounted
    to slide past each other.


CLS 241/101.73
TXT Reciprocating surface-type comminutor:

    Apparatus under subclass 101.72 wherein the comminutor is of the type that
    functions by the action of a work engaging member that moves from a
    starting point to traverse a path and reverses motion at the end of the
    path to move therealong in the opposite direction to the starting point.


CLS 241/101.74
TXT Self-propelled vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 101.71 wherein the vehicle includes means that
    cause the vehicle to move over the earth.


CLS 241/101.741
TXT Refuse support vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 101.74 wherein the vehicle is particularly adapted
    to haul domestic waste from a pickup point to a disposal center.


CLS 241/101.742
TXT Self-loading from ground:

    Apparatus under subclass 101.74 including a provision to receive the
    material being comminuted or disintegrated directly from the earth over
    which the vehicle is propelled.


CLS 241/101.75
TXT Detachable from propelling vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 101.71 intended to be removably secured to another
    vehicle, which other vehicle includes means to apply thrust to the earth to
    cause the comminutor-supporting vehicle to move thereover.


CLS 241/101.76
TXT From rear:

    Apparatus under subclass 101.75 wherein the comminutor-supporting vehicle
    is intended to be pulled behind the propelling vehicle.


CLS 241/101.761
TXT Tub grinder:

    Apparatus under subclass 101.76 including a hopper structure, for
    containing material to be comminuted, comprised of a bottom portion having
    an opening allowing passage of the material to the comminuting means and a
    cylindrical wall portion extending upwardly from the bottom that turns
    about its axis causing the material to move to the opening in the bottom
    portion.


CLS 241/101.762
TXT Operated while propelled:

    Apparatus under subclass 101.76 intended to comminute or disintegrate
    material while being transported.


CLS 241/101.763
TXT Self-loading from ground:

    Apparatus under subclass 101.762 including a provision to receive the
    material being comminuted or disintegrated directly from the earth over
    which the vehicle is propelled.


CLS 241/101.77
TXT From front:

    Apparatus under subclass 101.75 wherein the comminutor-supporting vehicle
    is intended to be pushed ahead of the propelling vehicle.


CLS 241/101.78
TXT Manually propelled:

    Apparatus under subclass 101.71 intended to receive thrust from a human to
    cause the comminutor-supporting vehicle to move over the earth.


CLS 241/101.8
TXT With mixer:
    Apparatus under subclass 101.2 combined with apparatus for intermixing one
    material to another in a zone separate from the comminution zone.

    (1)     Note.  The materials can be mixed together either before or after
    comminuting.  Further, the apparatus for comminuting and that for mixing
    can be structurally integral or separate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101.1,  for apparatus that is convertible between a mill and a mixer.

    101.6,  for a comminutor provided with apparatus to blend two or more
    substances, one of which is comminuted and one of which is not comminuted.

    152.1+, for apparatus having plural serially connected zones for performing
    the same type function.

    604,    for an art collection including a comminutor having plural inlets
    for diverse solid materials.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    366,    Agitating, for mixing apparatus, per se.


CLS 241/102
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the comminuting surface is
    resilient or is constructed in sections so that parts thereof are
    deformable relative to other parts of the surface by contact with the
    material in the normal operation of the device.

    (1)     Note.  These devices normally operate to comminute one ingredient
    of a mixture of materials more extensively than one or more other
    ingredients of the mixture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for processes involving the use of devices of this type for the
    selective comminution of mixed materials.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 600+ for grain hullers
    having similar characteristics.


CLS 241/103
TXT Apparatus within the class definition in which rolling members which effect
    the comminution are mounted in contact with a plurality of relatively
    moving surfaces so as to be frictionally driven thereby and at least one of
    the surfaces forms the support for the roller members.

    (1)     Note.  These devices are commonly referred to as "ball chasers".

    (2)     Note.  For the most part, the devices herein are provided with a
    plurality of roller members, but those including only a single roller are
    found in this group.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107+,   for similar devices in which a plurality of rollers are supported
    by means other than one of the frictional drive surfaces.

    173+,   for similar devices in which rolling comminuting bodies are moved
    relatively to a receptacle by pusher members rather than being frictionally
    driven between relatively movable surfaces.


CLS 241/104
TXT Apparatus under subclass 103 in which the devices provided for in this
    group is combined with another diverse type of comminutor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    for devices which include a plurality of comminuting zones, each
    being of the type provided for in this group.

    108,    115+, 134+, and 152.1+, and the notes thereto for other plural
    comminutor combinations.


CLS 241/105
TXT Apparatus under subclass 103 embodying a plurality of comminuting zones of
    the type provided for in this group.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    115+, 134+, and 152.1+, and the notes thereto for other plural
    comminutor combinations.


CLS 241/106
TXT Apparatus under subclass 103 in which one of the frictional drive surfaces
    rotates about a horizontal axis.


CLS 241/107
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which a plurality of rotary or
    oscillatory surfaces cooperate with the same portion of another surface so
    as to comminute material.

    (1)     Note.  In the titles and definitions below, the term "plural
    surfaces" has been used to denote the plural rotary or oscillatory
    surfaces, and the term "common surface" to denote the single surface, or
    portion of a surface with which the plural surfaces cooperate.

    (2)     Note.  In general, those devices in which a plurality of surfaces
    are mounted rigidly (sectional surfaces) to rotate about a single axis have
    not been considered to present plural surfaces to the common surface and
    have been classified as if a single surface were so presented.  If the
    plural surfaces are adapted to move relative to the axis during comminution
    they have been included in this group.  An exception to this rule was made
    in the case of devices in which a unitary member carries a plurality of
    striking members which cooperate with another surface.  These have been
    considered to present a single surface and have been classified as impact
    mills for which see this class, subclasses 185.5-197.

    (3)     Note.  The plurality of rotary or oscillatory surfaces in the
    devices of this group must be mounted so as to be restricted in their
    movement.  See this class, subclass 170, for devices in which a plurality
    of loose comminuting bodies cooperate with a common surface to effect the
    comminution.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for chasers provided with an annular screen surrounding the
    comminuting zone to prevent the discharge of uncomminuted material.

    79+,    for chasers in which the common surface is provided with an annular
    perforated extension thereof to separate the material.

    83+,    for chasers in which one or more of the comminuting elements are
    perforated.

    103+,   for ball chasers in which rolling members are supported and driven
    by surfaces common to all of the rolling members.

    198.1,  for cooperating surface comminutors in which a single surface which
    cooperates with another surface may have a movement corresponding to some
    of the motions of the plural surfaces provided for in this group.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 108+, for chasers
    applied to textile treatment.


CLS 241/108
TXT Apparatus under subclass 107 provided with an additional comminutor not of
    the type included within this group.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    134+ and 152.1+, for other plural diverse type comminutors.

    115+,   for plural comminutors of the type provided for in this group.


CLS 241/109
TXT Apparatus under subclass 107 provided with mechanism for primarily
    presenting material to the comminuting zone or for controlling the flow of
    material thereto.

    (1)     Note.  The term "mechanism" is intended to denote means in addition
    to gravity for positively effecting the feed.  The feeding must be an
    operation other than the mere comminuting movement of the comminuting
    surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    The various feeding and/or discharging subclasses of this class for feeders
    and/or dischargers in combination with other types of comminutors.  Where
    no feeding and/or discharging group was provided, the patents were
    classified with the particular comminutor combination claimed.

    301,    for feeders and/or dischargers combined with comminutors where the
    latter was claimed so broadly as to fail to present a basis for
    classification in a specific comminutor group.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, for feeders and dischargers involving the
    use of conveyors, per se.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for articles dispensers
    not otherwise classified, per se.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for fluent material dispensers,
    per se.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, for the generic subject matter of
    material handling, per se.


CLS 241/110
TXT Apparatus under subclass 107 in which the plural surfaces have movement
    across the common surface in addition to their rotary motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203,    for arrangements in which a single surface has planetary motion
    relative to another surface and also moves across it.


CLS 241/111
TXT Apparatus under subclass 107 in which the outer peripheral surface of the
    moving common surface cooperates with the plural surfaces to effect the
    comminution.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143+,   159 and 227+, for other devices in which the peripheral portions of
    rotary surfaces cooperate to effect the comminution.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 100, for similar
    devices used in treating textiles.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 104+ for presses not elsewhere classified
    having drain means for expressed liquid.


CLS 241/112
TXT Apparatus under subclass 111 in which at least one of the cooperating
    surfaces is provided with a scraper or other cleaner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    for cleaners or scrapers for roll members in other comminutors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 256.5 and the
    notes thereto for cleaners and scrapers for moving comminuting elements in
    which no claim is made to significant comminuting features.


CLS 241/113
TXT Apparatus under subclass 107 in which the plural surfaces cooperate with
    each other as well as the common surface to perform the comminuting
    function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111+,   for devices in which the plural surfaces cooperate with the outer
    periphery of the common surface and in addition cooperate with each other.

    143+,   158+ and 227+, for other devices embodying plural roll members
    which cooperate to comminute.

    170+,   for devices in which a plurality of loose comminuting bodies
    cooperate with each other and a common surface to effect the comminution.


CLS 241/114
TXT Apparatus under subclass 107 in which the plural surfaces rotate about
    their own axes and present radial faces to the common surface.

    (1)     Note.  The term "radial face" is meant to denote that plane
    perpendicular to the axis of rotation of the member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244+,   for devices in which a single rotary member presents a radial face
    to another surface, particularly subclasses 252 and 254, for those in which
    the cooperating members are not coaxial.


CLS 241/115
TXT Apparatus under subclass 107 in which there is provided a plurality of sets
    of plural surfaces, each of which sets cooperates with a different common
    surface or with a different portion of the same surface.

    (1)     Note.  The material may flow in series from one comminuting zone to
    the next or in series-parallel or through parallel paths through
    independent zones.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104     and 108, for devices in which a comminutor, providing plural
    surfaces cooperating with a common surface, is combined with another type
    of comminutor.

    105,    for similar devices providing for a plurality of comminuting zones
    of the type in which plural rolls are frictionally driven and supported by
    relatively moving surfaces.

    118     and 125, for devices providing a plurality of sets of plural
    surfaces but in which the sets cooperate with the same common surface or
    the same portion thereof.

    134+    and 152.1+, for devices having plural comminuting zones of the
    other types.


CLS 241/116
TXT Apparatus under subclass 115 in which at least two of the plural surfaces
    of different sets are coaxial, are spaced radially of the common surface
    axis, and are arranged on the same side thereof.


CLS 241/117
TXT Apparatus under subclass 107 in which the common surface has movement
    during the comminuting operation.

    (1)     Note.  The common surface movement is simple rotation about a
    single axis in most cases.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172+,   for comminutors in which a loosely supported roller is guided for
    movement relative to a moving surface.

    228,    for devices in which a single rotary comminuting surface cooperates
    with an internal rotary comminuting surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 108, for chasers
    having movable beds utilized in the treatment of textiles.


CLS 241/118
TXT Apparatus under subclass 117 in which the plural surfaces have rotary
    motion about a plurality of axes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123+,   for planetary movement plural surfaces cooperating with a
    stationary surface.

    206,    for devices embodying a single compound movement surface
    cooperating with a moving surface.


CLS 241/119
TXT Apparatus under subclass 117 provided with means to move the material
    within the comminuting zone or to discharge it therefrom.  The means
    usually takes the form of a movable or stationary plow member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112     and 166+, for rotating member scrapers in other types of
    comminutors.

    124,    for similar devices in which the plural surfaces have planetary
    movement and the common surface is stationary.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 256.5+, for
    moving surface scrapers of general application.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses, for subcombinations comprising
    means to discharge material from rotating members.


CLS 241/120
TXT Apparatus under subclass 117 in which at least one of the plural surfaces
    has a drive means which imparts to it a positive rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126,    for positively driven plural surfaces which have planetary motion
    and cooperate with a stationary common surface.


CLS 241/121
TXT Apparatus under subclass 117 in which the plural surfaces are so mounted as
    to be forcible away from the common surface by the material under abnormal
    conditions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127+,   for devices embodying plural surfaces having planetary motion which
    are forcible away from the common surface.

    230+    and 238, for yieldably mounted single rotary surfaces.


CLS 241/122
TXT Apparatus under subclass 121 in which the common surface rotates on a
    substantially horizontal axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228,    for similar devices having a single rotary surface cooperating with
    an outer surface rotating on a horizontal axis.


CLS 241/123
TXT Apparatus under subclass 107 in which the plural surfaces have rotary
    motion about a plurality of axes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118,    for devices having these characteristic but in which the common
    surface has movement during comminution.

    207+,   for devices provided with single surfaces which have planetary
    movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 98, for planetary
    movement rolls for treating textiles.


CLS 241/124
TXT Apparatus under subclass 123 provided with means for moving material within
    the comminuting zone or discharging it therefrom.  The means usually takes
    the form of a plow member moving with the plural surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119+,   for devices having these characteristics but in which the common
    surface has movement during comminution.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses, for subcombinations comprising
    means to unload receptacles.


CLS 241/125
TXT Apparatus under subclass 123 in which the plural surfaces have movement
    about more than two axes.


CLS 241/126
TXT Apparatus under subclass 123 in which at least one of the plural surfaces
    is provided with a drive means to impart to it a positive rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for devices having these characteristics, but in which the common
    surface moves during comminution.


CLS 241/127
TXT Apparatus under subclass 123 in which the plural surfaces are mounted so as
    to be forcible away from the common surface by the material under abnormal
    conditions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121+,   for devices in which a moving common surface cooperates with plural
    surfaces mounted for forced movement.


CLS 241/128
TXT Apparatus under subclass 127 in which the plural surfaces are pivotally
    mounted for movement toward and away from the common surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232+,   for devices having pivotally mounted rotary surfaces which
    cooperate with another rotary surface.


CLS 241/129
TXT Apparatus under subclass 128 in which the rotary motion of the plural
    surfaces centrifugally urges them toward contact with the common surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    for devices having these characteristics in which the common
    surface rotates about a horizontal axis.

    131,    for such devices in which the plural surfaces are not pivotally
    mounted.


CLS 241/130
TXT Apparatus under subclass 129 in which the centrifugally urged plural
    surfaces are provided with means to modify the centrifugal force.  The
    means usually takes the form of a spring mounted to augment or lessen the
    centrifugal force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    for devices having these characteristics in which the common
    surface rotates about a horizontal axis.

    132,    for nonpivotally mounted surfaces provided with means to urge them
    into contact with the common surface.


CLS 241/131
TXT Apparatus under subclass 127 in which the rotary motion of the plural
    surfaces centrifugally urges them toward contact with the common surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129+,   for such devices in which the plural surfaces are pivotally mounted.


CLS 241/132
TXT Apparatus under subclass 127 having any means (such as pressure applying
    mechanism, springs, added dead weights, weight receiving receptacles, etc.)
    in addition to the weight of the plural surfaces for urging the surfaces
    toward contact with the common surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    for plural surfaces spring urged against a common surface which
    rotates on a horizontal axis.

    130,    for pivotally mounted plural surfaces having spring or the like
    means for modifying the centrifugal force which urges the surfaces toward
    contact with the common surface.


CLS 241/133
TXT Apparatus under subclass 127 in which the plural surfaces are so mounted as
    to be forcible away from the common surface independently of each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    for devices in which the plural surfaces are independently forcible
    away from a common surface which rotates on a horizontal axis.

    128+,   for devices in which the plural surfaces are pivotally mounted to
    be independently forcible away from the common surface.


CLS 241/134
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which there is provided a plurality
    of comminuting zones through which the material flows in parallel paths.

    (1)     Note.  Devices in which the material flows serially and also in
    parallel paths through plural comminuting zones are to be found in this
    group.  Where the flow is solely from one comminuting zone to another in
    succession, the patents have been placed in subclasses 152.1+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42      and 44, for devices including fluid applying means in connection
    with means for causing parallel material flow through plural comminuting
    zones.

    75,     for devices in which the material passes through plural comminuting
    and separating zones in parallel.

    104,    105, 108, and 115+, for comminutors of the type there provided for
    arranged for parallel material flow.


CLS 241/135
TXT Apparatus under subclass 134 provided with (1) a single or unitary
    mechanism to feed the material to the plural zones or a unitary control for
    the flow of material to the zones, or (2) plural mechanisms or controls
    which are interconnected to feed material to the plural zones or control
    the feed thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34+,    for automatically controlled feed means and the various feeding
    subclasses in this class and the notes thereto for nonautomatic feeders
    combined with comminutors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses for conveyors, per
    se.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 92+ for devices which feed articles
    from plural sources and particularly subclass 133 where such devices feed
    to common discharge outlet.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 129,
    265 and 478.


CLS 241/136
TXT Apparatus under subclass 135 in which the feed mechanism comprises plural
    interconnected means for forcing material against a moving comminuting
    surface or surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34+,    for interconnected feed devices of this type combined with
    automatic control features for the feed.

    151,    for single surface comminutors with plural comminuting zones
    provided with feed devices which are not interconnected.

    274+,   277+ and 283, for single surface comminutors, per se.


CLS 241/137
TXT Apparatus under subclass 134 in which all of the comminuting zones are of
    the type in which the comminution is effected by a loose grinding body or
    bodies.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes partitioned receptacles provided with
    loose comminuting bodies wherein the material passes in parallel through
    separate portions of the receptacle, and in which the partition is
    sufficiently extensive to create distinct comminuting zones.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153,    for such devices where the material flows from one comminuting zone
    to the other in series.

    170+,   for single comminutors of this type.


CLS 241/138
TXT Apparatus under subclass 134 in which all of the comminuting zones are of
    the rotary striking member type, i.e., a rotary member strikes the material
    a sudden blow.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass may include devices in which a plurality of
    striking members carrying rotors cooperate with each other, if each rotor
    acts to comminute material independently of the other.  If there is no such
    independent function and the comminution is due solely to the cooperation
    of the rotors, proper classification is in subclass 187.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154,    for rotary striking member comminutors arranged for serial flow of
    material.

    185.5   through 197, and the notes thereto, for single rotary striking
    member comminutors.


CLS 241/139
TXT Apparatus under subclass 134 in which all of the comminuting zones are the
    type in which the comminution is effected between cooperating surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155+,   for such plural comminutors arranged for series flow of material.

    198.1,  for single comminutors of this type.


CLS 241/140
TXT Apparatus under subclass 139 in which all of the comminuting zones employ
    cooperating surfaces at least one of which has compound movement, i.e., a
    movement which is the sum of several simpler motions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156,    for compound movement type comminutors arranged for serial flow of
    material.

    201+,   for single compound movement type comminutors.


CLS 241/141
TXT Apparatus under subclass 139 in which all of the comminuting zones involve
    the use of cooperating surfaces at least one of which rotates.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157+,   for such comminutors arranged for series flow of material.

    220+,   for single comminutors of this type.


CLS 241/142
TXT Apparatus under subclass 141 in which all of the comminuting zones are of
    the type in which the material flows circumferentially or tangentially of
    the rotary surface during comminution.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158+,   for such devices arranged in series.

    221+,   for single comminutors of this type.


CLS 241/143
TXT Apparatus under subclass 142 in which all of the cooperating surfaces of
    each comminuting zone rotate relative to each other to comminute the
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159,    for such devices arranged for series flow of material.

    227+,   for single comminutors in which both cooperating surfaces rotate.


CLS 241/144
TXT Apparatus under subclass 143 in which a rotary surface of one of the
    comminuting zones is coaxial with a rotary surface of another comminuting
    zone.


CLS 241/145
TXT Apparatus under subclass 143 in which a single operator member adjusts or
    positions simultaneously surfaces of separate comminuting zones.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63+,    for devices having inter-related, feed, drive and surface
    positioning means.

    230,    for devices including means to adjust the rotary surfaces of a
    single comminuting zone.


CLS 241/146
TXT Apparatus under subclass 141 in which the material flows axially and/or
    radially of a rotary comminuting surface during the comminuting operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161+,   for such devices arranged for series flow of material.

    244+,   for single comminutors of this type.


CLS 241/147
TXT Apparatus under subclass 139 in which all of the comminuting zones employ
    cooperating surfaces which have relative reciprocation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164,    for reciprocating surface comminutors arranged for serial flow of
    material.

    262+,   for single reciprocating surface type comminutors.


CLS 241/148
TXT Apparatus under subclass 147 in which the reciprocating surface has an
    oscillating movement.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of oscillating type comminutors, see the
    definition of subclass 264, of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164,    for oscillating type comminutors arranged for serial flow of
    material.

    264+,   for single oscillating type comminutors see note (1) above.


CLS 241/149
TXT Devices under subclass 147 in which the reciprocation of the moving
    surfaces is in a vertical straight-line path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165,    for plural devices of this type arranged for series flow of
    material.

    270+,   for single devices of this type.

    291,    for plural mortar arrangements, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 7+, for linear bearings for plurality of
    reciprocating stamp stems and no significant comminutor structure claimed.


CLS 241/150
TXT Apparatus under subclass 149 in which there is provided three or more
    vertically reciprocating surfaces arranged in an annulus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 56+, for axial cam devices
    for actuating vertically reciprocating members.


CLS 241/151
TXT Apparatus under subclass 134 in which all of the comminuting zones are of
    the type in which material is presented to a single comminuting surface.

    (1)     Note.  A comminutor in which a plurality of distinct columns of
    material are fed against a common surface for comminution thereby was
    considered to present a plurality of comminuting zones in parallel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136,    for plural comminutors of this type provided with interconnected
    feed devices.

    152.1+, for devices of this type arranged for series flow of material.

    274+,   277+ and 283, for single comminutors of the defined type.


CLS 241/152.1
TXT Series material flow only through plural comminuting zones:
    Apparatus under the class definition in which the material is fed in
    succession to a plurality of comminuting zones to be treated in series by
    the comminutors.

    (1)     Note.  Where the comminuting zones were so closely related that
    there was difficulty in determining whether a plurality of zones or a
    single zone was involved, the line followed was that if there was a
    substantial cessation of the comminuting operation between separate zones,
    the patent was classified as a plural device and will be found herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     for the process of subjecting material to a plurality of successive
    comminuting operations.

    42,     for means applying fluid to same material at a plurality of spaced
    points within plural comminuting zones.

    43+,    for means applying fluid to material within plural distinct
    comminuting zones.

    76,     for means for comminuting with means for separating or classifying
    material with series material flow through plural alternate comminuting
    zones.

    78,     for means for comminuting with means for separating or classifying
    with a separator interposed between plural comminuting zones.

    80,     for means for comminuting with means for separating or classifying
    having a separator in the discharge from the comminuting zone and having an
    oversize return to the comminuting zone.

    82.4,   for a comminuting means including a helical pusher inside a tube
    which moves material toward a perforated member, with a series of axially
    aligned rotary knife blades.

    104,    for rolls frictionally driven and supported by relatively moving
    surfaces and additional diverse type comminutor.

    105,    for rolls frictionally driven and supported by relatively moving
    surfaces with plural comminuting zones.

    108,    for plural rotary or oscillatory surfaces cooperating with a common
    surface and a diverse type comminutor.

    115+,   for plural sets of rotary or oscillatory surfaces cooperating with
    plural common surfaces.


CLS 241/152.2
TXT Diverse type comminuting zones:
    Apparatus under subclass 152.1 in which the plural zones are adapted to
    comminute in diverse manners.


CLS 241/153
TXT Apparatus under subclass 152.1 in which all of the comminuting zones are of
    the type in which the comminution is effected by a loose grinding body or
    bodies.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes partitioned receptacles provided with
    loose grinding bodies in which the material passes from one portion of the
    receptacle to another in series and in which the partition is sufficiently
    extensive to create distinct comminuting zones.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70+,    for partitioned rotary ball or rod mills in which the partition is
    provided with apertures for the passage of material.

    137,    for such devices where the flow of material is parallel or
    series-parallel.

    170+,   for single comminutors of this type.


CLS 241/154
TXT Apparatus under subclass 152.1 in which all of the comminuting zones are of
    the rotary striking member type.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of rotary striking member comminutors,
    see the definition of subclasses 185.5-197 of this class (241).

    (2)     Note.  This subclass may include devices in which a plurality of
    striking member carrying rotors cooperate with each other, if each rotor
    acts to comminute material independently of the other.  If there is no such
    independent function and the comminution is due solely to the cooperation
    of the rotors, proper classification is in subclass 187.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    for rotary striking member comminutors arranged for parallel or
    series-parallel flow of material.

    185.5   through 197, for single rotary striking member comminutors.


CLS 241/155
TXT Apparatus under subclass 152.1 in which all of the comminuting zones are
    the type in which the comminution is effected between cooperating surfaces.

    (1)     Note.  In general, where a plurality of relatively movable surfaces
    cooperate with a single surface so as to treat the material serially, the
    device was considered to present plural comminuting zones and has been
    classified in this group.  See the note to subclass 160 for an exception to
    this rule.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139+,   for such devices arranged in parallel or series-parallel.

    198.1,  for single comminutors of this type.


CLS 241/156
TXT Apparatus under subclass 155 in which all of the comminuting zones employ
    at least one surface which has compound movement.

    (1)     Note.  See the definition of subclass 201 of this class, for a
    definition of compound movement type comminutors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140,    for compound movement type comminutors arranged for parallel or
    series-parallel flow of material.

    201+,   for single compound movement type comminutors.


CLS 241/157
TXT Apparatus under subclass 155 in which all of the comminuting zones involve
    the use of cooperating surfaces at least one of which rotates.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141+,   for such comminutors arranged parallel or series-parallel.

    220+,   for single comminutors of this type.


CLS 241/158
TXT Apparatus under subclass 157 in which all of the comminuting zones are the
    type in which the material flows circumferentially or tangentially of the
    rotary surfaces during comminution.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142+,   for such devices arranged parallel or series-parallel.

    221+,   for single comminutors of this type.


CLS 241/159
TXT Apparatus under subclass 158 in which all of the cooperating surfaces have
    rotary motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143+,   for such devices arranged parallel or series-parallel.

    227+,   for single comminutors of this type.


CLS 241/160
TXT Apparatus under subclass 158 provided with a plurality of rotary surfaces
    each of which cooperates with a nonrotary surface.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 240, for devices in which a
    plurality of independently adjustable nonrotary surfaces cooperate with a
    single rotary surface.  For purposes of this classification, material which
    is subjected to the action of a single rotary surface cooperating with a
    plurality of nonrotary surfaces is considered to be treated in a single
    comminuting zone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142,    for such devices arranged parallel or series-parallel.

    221+,   237 to 243, for single comminutors of this type.


CLS 241/161
TXT Apparatus under subclass 157 in which the material flows axially and/or
    radially of a rotary comminuting surface during the comminuting operation
    in each of the comminuting zones.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146,    for such devices arranged in parallel or series-parallel.

    244+,   for single comminutors of this type.


CLS 241/162
TXT Apparatus under subclass 161 in which the rotating surfaces of the
    respective comminuting zones have a common axis of simple rotation.


CLS 241/163
TXT Apparatus under subclass 162 in which the common axis of rotation is
    horizontal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255+,   for single comminutors of the type having horizontal axes.


CLS 241/164
TXT Apparatus under subclass 155 in which all of the comminuting zones employ
    cooperating surfaces which reciprocate relative to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147+,   for reciprocating comminutors arranged for parallel or
    series-parallel flow of material.

    262+,   for single reciprocating type comminutors.


CLS 241/165
TXT Apparatus under subclass 164 in which the reciprocation of the moving
    surfaces is in a vertical straight line path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149,    for plural devices of this type arranged for parallel or
    series-parallel flow of material.

    270+,   for single devices of this type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 7+, for linear bearings for plurality of
    reciprocating stamp stems and no significant comminutor structure.


CLS 241/165.5
TXT All comminuting zones of rotating noncooperating  type:
    Apparatus under subclass 152.1 in which all of the comminuting zones are of
    the type in which the comminution is effected by a single comminuting
    surface which has a simple rotary motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277,    for a comminuting device, per se, which has a single comminuting
    surface with a simple rotary motion.


CLS 241/166
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which there is provided means to
    scrape or otherwise clean a comminuting member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38+,    for fluid applying combinations in which the fluid may have a
    cleaning function.

    119     and 124, for cleaning and discharge devices combined with
    comminutors of the type there classified.

    172,    for material moving members in loose grinding body comminutors
    which do not have a cleaning function.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 256.5, and the
    notes thereto, for cleaners and scrapers for moving comminuting elements in
    which no claim is made to significant comminuting features.


CLS 241/167
TXT Apparatus under subclass 166 in which the cleaning or scraping member acts
    upon the material contacting surface of a rotary comminuting member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    for other comminutors provided with scrapers for roll members.


CLS 241/168
TXT Apparatus under the class definition adapted to be hand supported during
    the operation of the comminutor.  Most of the devices found herein are
    table or kitchen devices used to comminute condiments and the like.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 196.1+, for dispensers of the hand
    manipulable shaker type which have a jarring or vibrating element to aid in
    the dispensing.


CLS 241/169
TXT Apparatus under subclass 168 in which the comminution is effected by
    cooperating surfaces which reciprocate relative to each other.

    (1)     Note.  Most of the devices in this subclass are ice crushers having
    means to handle only a single ice cube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84      and 262+, for comminuting devices having relatively reciprocating
    comminuting surfaces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 164.5+, for ice picks and chippers.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 234 and 243 for presses not elsewhere
    classified of the plier type.


CLS 241/169.1
TXT Apparatus under subclass 168 including a comminutor which moves in an
    arcuate path during comminution.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    452,    Butchering, subclass 105 for a rotary hand-held fish scalers.


CLS 241/169.2
TXT Apparatus under subclass 168 comprising a manually manipulated pressure or
    striking tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199+,   for devices of this type combined with a cooperating surface of a
    batch container.

    274+,   for a stationary comminuting surface or material bed.


CLS 241/170
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the comminution is effected
    by a loose comminuting body or bodies.  These devices are mostly of the
    type commonly called ball or rod mills in which loose balls or rods are
    tumbled with the material within a moving receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  By the term "loose" as used above is meant the body or
    bodies are not restricted in their movement to any particular direction.
    Devices in which the body or bodies are mounted so as to be free to
    reciprocate, rotate or oscillate in restricted paths will be found in other
    appropriate subclasses of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for the defined devices provided with gas supply means.

    70+,    for the defined devices provided with discharge permitting screens.

    83+,    for such comminutors provided with perforated receptacle.

    103+,   for comminutors employing balls or rolls supported on frictional
    drive surfaces (ball chasers), also see subclasses 173+, below.

    137     and 153, for plural loose grinding body comminutors.  Partitioned
    receptacles were considered to be plural devices where the partition was
    sufficiently extensive to create distinct comminuting zones.

    284,    for comminutors in which material (without the use of loose bodies)
    is tumbled within a moving receptacle to effect the comminution.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 600, for grain hullers
    employing loose abrading material.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 326+ for a device adapted to tumble objects or
    articles in order to remove unwanted coatings, etc. Such a device often
    includes loose bodies to assist in the abrading operation.


CLS 241/171
TXT Apparatus under subclass 170 provided with mechanism for primarily
    presenting material to the comminuting zone and/or removing it therefrom or
    for controlling the flow of material to and/or from the comminuting zone.

    (1)     Note.  The term "mechanism" is intended to denote means in addition
    to gravity for positively effecting the feed and/or discharge but may
    include merely means attached to the moving receptacle of the comminutor.

    (2)     Note.  The feeding and/or discharging must be an operation other
    than the mere comminuting movement of the comminuting surfaces. However,
    means for moving the comminuting receptacle out of comminuting position for
    the specific purpose of discharging material was considered a discharging
    organization for this group.

    (3)     Note.  Material handling features in addition to those necessary to
    effect the mere presentation of the material to the comminuting zone or to
    remove the material from the comminutor were considered to be combined
    features which were more than mere feeding or discharging combinations and
    were classified in subclasses 101.01+ unless provided for elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    The various feeding and/or discharging subclasses of this class for feeders
    and/or dischargers in combination with other types of comminutors.  Where
    no feeding and/or discharging group was provided, the patents were
    classified with the particular comminutor combination claimed.

    153,    for partitioned loose body grinders provided with means to transfer
    material from one section of the comminutor to the next.

    301,    for feeders and/or dischargers combined with comminutors where the
    latter was claimed so broadly as to fail to present a basis for
    classification in a specific comminutor group.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, for feeders and dischargers involving the
    use of conveyors, per se, particularly subclass 658 for drum feeders
    comprising an internal screw conveyor within the trunnion of the drum.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for article dispensers,
    not otherwise classified, per se.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for fluent material dispensers,
    per se.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, for the generic subject matter of
    material handling, per se.


CLS 241/172
TXT Apparatus under subclass 170 provided with means mounted independently of
    the receptacle for the loose grinding bodies which moves or guides the
    material and/or the grinding bodies during the comminuting operation to aid
    in the comminution.


CLS 241/173
TXT Apparatus under subclass 172 in which the means for moving the grinding
    bodies comprises a rotary member which pushes the bodies about the
    receptacle in contact therewith to cause them to roll thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103+,   for devices in which the comminuting bodies are mounted between
    relatively moving frictional drive supporting surfaces which are not mere
    pushers.


CLS 241/174
TXT Apparatus under subclass 173 in which the pusher member rotates about a
    horizontal axis.


CLS 241/175
TXT Apparatus under subclass 170 in which the receptacle for the loose grinding
    bodies has movement which is the combined result of several simple
    movements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201+,   for other comminutors provided with members having compound
    movement.


CLS 241/176
TXT Apparatus under subclass 170 in which the loose grinding body or bodies are
    mounted in a receptacle which has a rotary motion.

    (1)     Note.  Search for mounting and drive means or other characteristics
    applicable to rotary receptacles in general should be continued in the many
    classes containing patents utilizing rotary receptacles.  See the notes
    appended to the definition of subclass 108 in Class 34, Drying and Gas or
    Vapor Contact With Solids, for references to many of these classes.
    Particular attention is directed to Class 259, Agitating, subclasses 3,
    14+, 50+, 57+, 81+, and 175+, for rotary receptacles which function as
    agitators.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for such devices in which a gas current passes through the
    receptacle.

    70+,    for such devices provided with oversize discharge preventing
    screens.

    91,     for such apparatus in which the receptacle walls are provided with
    passages for the material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 130 and 131, for supports for rotary
    receptacles.


CLS 241/177
TXT Devices under subclass 176 in which the receptacle is so mounted that the
    axis may be tilted for adjustment of the inclination of the axis about
    which the receptacle rotates during comminution.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171,    for receptacles tiltably mounted for discharge of the contents.


CLS 241/178
TXT Apparatus under subclass 176 in which the rotary receptacle is supported
    for rotation upon roller members.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, subclass 549 for a roller supports for rotating
    receptacle.


CLS 241/179
TXT Apparatus under subclass 170 in which the claims are directed to the
    structure of the receptacles for the grinding body or bodies.

     (1)    Note.  Patents claiming the combination of the receptacle with the
    grinding bodies, but in which no significant characteristics of the
    grinding bodies or of their relationship with the receptacle are claimed,
    will be found herein.

    (2)     Note.  Many classes include the treatment of material in moving
    receptacles.  A partial list of such classes will be found in the notes to
    subclass 108 in Class 34, Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids.
    Metallic receptacles of general application will be found in Class 220,
    Receptacles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     for receptacle structures in which the receptacle wall is
    perforated to allow discharge of comminuted material.


CLS 241/180
TXT Apparatus under subclass 179 in which the receptacle is provided with an
    opening at some point other than at the axis thereof. Usually the opening
    is provided with some form of removable cover.


CLS 241/181
TXT Apparatus under subclass 179 in which the receptacle is provided with means
    at the end or ends thereof to lift and/or distribute the material and
    grinding bodies.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171,    for devices in which the lifting or distributing means is for the
    purpose of feeding or discharging the material to or from the receptacle.

    183,    for lined receptacles provided with lifting or distributing
    characteristics.


CLS 241/182
TXT Apparatus under subclass 179 provided with means lining the interior of the
    receptacle.  Such means usually has wear resistant properties.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    285.1   and 291+, for frames and comminuting elements provided with
    wear-resistant linings or coverings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 400+ and 415+, lined receptacles in general.


CLS 241/183
TXT Apparatus under subclass 182 in which the lining means is provided with
    means for lifting or distributing the contained material.

    (1)     Note.  See the notes to subclass 179 for a list of classes
    providing for receptacles having lining means with lifting or distributing
    characteristics.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181,    for such devices in which the end structure of the receptacle is
    provided with lifting or distributing characteristics.


CLS 241/184
TXT Apparatus under subclass 170 in which the claims are directed to the
    structure of the grinding body or bodies.  Patents claiming the receptacle
    in combination with the grinding bodies, but no significant structure of
    the receptacle, will be found herein.

    (1)     Note.  Where the grinding element is claimed with no significant
    structure, but merely in terms of the composition of which it is composed,
    it will be classified in the appropriate composition class, even though
    there is no claim to the composition, per se.

    In this connection the following classes should be considered:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, for articles defined solely by their metal or alloy composition.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, Note particularly the main class
    definitions of Class 106 for the classification of other compositions.

    148,    Metal Treatment, especially subclasses 400+ for materials which are
    products of processes of treating metals classifiable in Class 148 or for
    products distinguished only by the internal  structure or characteristics
    of the metals, metallic compositions or alloys comprising such structures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291+,   for other types of comminuting elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, subclass 330 for loose bodies to be used in an abrading
    tumbling device.


CLS 241/185.5
TXT Rotary striking member with feed or discharge conveyor or
    regulator:Apparatus under the class definition in which the material is
    subjected to the action of a rotary member which strikes the material a
    sudden blow to effect comminution; combined with means to supply material
    to or remove material from the vicinity of the rotary comminuting member;
    or combined with means to control the flow of supply or removal of material
    from the comminuting zone.

    (1)     Note.  The term "mechanism" is intended to denote means in addition
    to gravity for positively effecting the feed or discharge.

    (2)     Note.  The feeding or discharging must be an operation other than
    the mere comminuting movement of the comminuting surfaces.  However, means
    for moving a comminuting member out of comminuting position for the
    specific purpose of discharging material was considered a discharging
    organization for this group.

    (3)     Note.  Material handling features in addition to those necessary to
    effect the mere presentation of the material to the comminuting zone or to
    remove the material from the comminutors were considered to be combined
    features which were more than mere feeding or discharging combinations and
    were classified in subclass 101 unless provided for elsewhere.

    (4)     Note.  A feeder or discharger in combination with a particular
    comminuting device is to be found with the comminuting device in this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for the process of comminuting by use of a rotary striking member.

    39,     for apparatus in which fluid suspended material is projected
    against a rotary member which strikes it a blow or in which a rotary member
    has the additional function of projecting material in a fluid current to
    effect further comminution against a surface or other portions of the
    material.

    55,     for a comminuting device having a rotary striking member combined
    with gas moving means.

    86+,    for a comminuting device in which the rotary striking member
    cooperates with a surface having openings.

    138     and 154, for the combination of a plurality of rotary striking
    member comminutors.

    275,    for a device in which a rotary member merely acts as a projector
    for material to centrifugally force it against another surface.  A device
    having a rotary  member which projects material centrifugally as described
    and in addition strikes the material a blow to effect a partial comminution
    before being projected is classified in subclasses 185.5-197.

    301,    for a feeder or discharger combined with a comminutor where the
    latter was claimed so broadly as to fail to present a basis for
    classification in subclass directed to the specific comminutor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses 30, 33, 35+, and 85+ for a
    textile preparation machine having similar operation.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, for a feeder or discharger involving the
    use of a conveyor, per se.

    221,    Article Dispensing, for an article dispenser, not otherwise
    classified, per se.

    222,    Dispensing, for a fluent material dispenser, per se.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 279+ for agitation only effected by rotatable
    member.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, for the generic subject matter of
    material handling, per se.

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, subclasses 59+ for a threshing
    machine using a rotary striking member.


CLS 241/185.6
TXT Rotary striking member combined with pump:
    Apparatus under subclass 185.5 in which the material is subjected to the
    action of a rotary member which strikes the material a sudden blow to
    effect comminution; wherein the means to feed or discharge material is
    particularly adapted to transfer flowable material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46.012, for a dishwasher combined with a comminutor which may be associated
    with a drain pump.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, especially subclass 121.1 for
    a device of that class including an impeller which comminutes material
    passing through the device.


CLS 241/186.1
TXT Apparatus under subclass 185.5 provided with channels which guide the
    material as it flows toward the zone where it is engaged by the comminuting
    member.

    (1)     Note.  The channels may be grooves or apertures that are not
    necessarily parallel.

    (2)     Note.  Although some of these devices have openings which permit
    discharge of material, as in subclasses 83+, they are not true comminuting
    surfaces, being offset from the knife.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134+,   for a device provided with plural parallel material paths through
    plural parallel comminuting zones.


CLS 241/186.2
TXT Apparatus under subclass 185.5 provided with means to effect a change in
    the flow of material to or from the comminutor.


CLS 241/186.3
TXT Apparatus under subclass 186.2 provided with means to change the course of
    the material as it flows to or from the comminuting zone.


CLS 241/186.35
TXT Endless loop feed or discharge conveyor:
    Apparatus under subclass 185.5 wherein the means to supply material to or
    remove material comprises a flaccid belt supported at spaced areas such
    that portions of the belt travel in an orbit, one portion thereof following
    the other.


CLS 241/186.4
TXT Apparatus under subclass 185.5 wherein the material mover revolves, or
    swings back and forth about an axis that passes through the mover.


CLS 241/186.5
TXT Screw feed or discharge conveyor:
    Apparatus under subclass 186.4 wherein the material mover revolves about an
    axis passing through its center and is helically ribbed so that the rib
    functions to engage the material and transport that material along its axis.


CLS 241/187
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the material is subjected to
    the action of a rotary  member which strikes the material a sudden blow to
    effect the comminution in which the surface or member which cooperates with
    the rotary striking member has movement during the comminuting operation.
    The cooperating member may be another rotary striking member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for the process of comminuting by use of a rotary striking member.

    39,     for apparatus in which fluid suspended material is projected
    against a rotary member which strikes it a blow or in which a rotary member
    has the additional function of projecting material in a fluid current to
    effect further comminution against a surface or other portions of the
    material.

    55,     for a comminuting device having a rotary striking member combined
    with gas moving means.

    86+,    for a comminuting device in which the rotary striking member
    cooperates with a surface having openings.

    138     and 154, for comminutors having plural cooperating striking members
    but in which each rotor, without the other, functions as an independent
    comminutor.

    200,    227+ and 237, for similar comminutors in which a rotor cooperates
    with a moving surface.

    275,    for a device in which a rotary member merely acts as a projector
    for material to centrifugally force it against another surface.  A device
    having a rotary member which projects material centrifugally as described
    and in addition strikes the material a blow to effect a partial comminution
    before being projected is classified in subclasses 185.5-197.

    301,    for a feeder or discharger combined with a comminutor where the
    latter was claimed so broadly as to fail to present a basis for
    classification in subclass directed to the specific comminutor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses 30, 33, 35+, and 85+ for a
    textile preparation machine having similar operation.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, for a feeder or discharger involving the
    use of a conveyor, per se.

    221,    Article Dispensing, for an article dispenser, not otherwise
    classified, per se.

    222,    Dispensing, for a fluent material dispenser, per se.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 279+ for agitation only effected by rotatable
    member.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, for the generic subject matter of
    material handling, per se.

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, subclasses 59+ for a threshing
    machine using a rotary striking member.


CLS 241/188.1
TXT Rotary striking member with axial or radial flow of material:Apparatus
    under the class definition in which the material is subjected to the action
    of a rotary member which strikes the material a sudden blow to effect
    comminution in which the material flows radially or axially of the rotary
    striking member during comminution.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for the process of comminuting by use of a rotary striking member.

    39,     for apparatus in which fluid suspended material is projected
    against a rotary member which strikes it a blow or in which a rotary member
    has the additional function of projecting material in a fluid current to
    effect further comminution against a surface or other portions of the
    material.

    55,     for a comminuting device having a rotary striking member combined
    with gas moving means.

    86+,    for a comminuting device in which the rotary striking member
    cooperates with a surface having openings.

    138     and 154, for the combination of a plurality of rotary striking
    member comminutors.

    244,    for other comminutors in which the material has a radial or axial
    flow.

    275,    for a device in which a rotary member merely acts as a projector
    for material to centrifugally force it against another surface.  A device
    having rotary a member which projects material centrifugally as described
    and in addition strikes the material a blow to effect a partial comminution
    before being projected is classified in subclasses 185.5-197.

    301,    for a feeder or discharger combined with a comminutor where the
    latter was claimed so broadly as to fail to present a basis for
    classification in subclass directed to the specific comminutor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses 30, 33, 35+, and 85+, for
    a textile preparation machine having similar operation.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, for a feeder or discharger involving the
    use of a conveyor, per se.

    221,    Article Dispensing, for an article dispenser, not otherwise
    classified, per se.

    222,    Dispensing, for a fluent material dispenser, per se.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 279+ for agitation only effected by rotatable
    member.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, for the generic subject matter of
    material handling, per se.

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, subclasses 59+ for a threshing
    machine using a rotary striking member.


CLS 241/188.2
TXT Radial flow, pin-disc comminutor, overlapping pins on cooperating
    members:Apparatus under subclass 188.1 including a rotor having a planar
    surface, which rotor is adapted to turn about an axis normal to and passing
    through the center of that planar surface, having a circular row of
    elongated striking members extending axially from that planar surface; the
    apparatus including fixed structure having a circular row of elongated
    members concentric to the row on the rotor; and either the rotor or the
    fixed member having an additional concentric, circular row of elongated
    members the concentric rows arranged to interfit with each other.

    (1)     Note.  Each pin (elongated member) is finger-like, but may be
    bridged to an adjacent pin.  A flow directing member, e.g., a vane, is not
    considered to be a "pin" for this subclass.  Also, a perforated cylinder is
    not considered to be a series of bridged pins.


CLS 241/189.1
TXT Rotary striking member with circumferential or tangential flow:Apparatus
    under the class definition in which the material is subjected to the action
    of a rotary member which strikes the material a sudden blow to effect
    comminution including provision to guide the material being comminuted (a)
    to move generally along the perimeter of the rotary striking member during
    comminution or (b) to move along a line intersecting the perimeter of the
    rotary striking member during comminution.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for the process of comminuting by use of a rotary striking member.

    39,     for apparatus in which fluid suspended material is projected
    against a rotary member which strikes it a blow or in which a rotary member
    has the additional function of projecting material in a fluid current to
    effect further comminution against a surface or other portions of the
    material.

    55,     for a comminuting device having a rotary striking member combined
    with gas moving means.

    86+,    for a comminutor having a rotary moving comminuting surface and a
    cooperating comminuting surface provided with openings to permit discharge
    of material.

    138     and 154, for the combination of a plurality of rotary striking
    member comminutors.

    221+,   and the notes thereto for other rotary comminutors in which the
    material has similar flow but having no striking member.

    275,    for a device in which a rotary member merely acts as a projector
    for material to centrifugally force it against another surface.  A device
    having a rotary  member which projects material centrifugally as described
    and in addition strikes the material a blow to effect a partial comminution
    before being projected is classified in subclasses 185.5-197.

    301,    for a feeder or discharger combined with a comminutor where the
    latter was claimed so broadly as to fail to present a basis for
    classification in subclass directed to the specific comminutor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses 30, 33, 35+, and 85+ for a
    textile preparation machine having similar operation.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, for a feeder or discharger involving the
    use of a conveyor, per se.

    221,    Article Dispensing, for an article dispenser, not otherwise
    classified, per se.

    222,    Dispensing, for a fluent material dispenser, per se.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 279+ for agitation only effected by rotatable
    member.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, for the generic subject matter of
    material handling, per se.

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, subclasses 59+ for a threshing
    machine using a rotary striking member.


CLS 241/189.2
TXT Reversible rotary mill:
    Apparatus under subclass 189.1 wherein the rotary striking member is
    adapted to comminute in either direction of rotation.


CLS 241/190
TXT Apparatus under subclass 189.1 in which the members which cooperate to
    subject the material to a blow intermesh or overlap each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243,    for similar devices having intermeshing comminuting members, but in
    which the rotary member has no striking function.


CLS 241/191
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the material is subjected to
    the action of a rotary  member which strikes the material a sudden blow to
    effect the comminution in which the claims are directed to the rotary
    support for the striking members or the striking members in combination
    with such support.

    (1)     Note.  Patents claiming the combination of parts of the machine and
    the rotary structure have been included only where there is no mention of
    significant characteristics of such other parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for the process of comminuting by use of a rotary striking member.

    39,     for apparatus in which fluid suspended material is projected
    against a rotary member which strikes it a blow or in which a rotary member
    has the additional function of projecting material in a fluid current to
    effect further comminution against a surface or other portions of the
    material.

    55,     for a comminuting device having a rotary striking member combined
    with gas moving means.

    86+,    for a comminuting device in which the rotary striking member
    cooperates with a surface having openings.

    138     and 154, for the combination of a plurality of rotary striking
    member comminutors.

    195+,   for hammer or striking members, per se.

    275,    for a device in which a rotary member merely acts as a projector
    for material to centrifugally force it against another surface.  A device
    having rotary a member which projects material centrifugally as described
    and in addition strikes the material a blow to effect a partial comminution
    before being projected is classified in subclasses 185.5-197.

    291+,   for other comminuting elements, per se.

    301,    for a feeder or discharger combined with a comminutor where the
    latter was claimed so broadly as to fail to present a basis for
    classification in subclass directed to the specific comminutor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses 30, 33, 35+, and 85+, for
    a textile preparation machine having similar operation.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, for a feeder or discharger involving the
    use of a conveyor, per se.

    221,    Article Dispensing, for an article dispenser, not otherwise
    classified, per se.

    222,    Dispensing, for a fluent material dispenser, per se.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 279+ for agitation only effected by rotatable
    member.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, for the generic subject matter of
    material handling, per se.

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, subclasses 59+ for a threshing
    machine using a rotary striking member.


CLS 241/192
TXT Apparatus under subclass 191 in which the striking members are so mounted
    relative to the rotary support that their radial projection may be adjusted.

    (1)     Note.  Alternatively usable means to support the striking members
    in various positions on the rotor was considered adjusting means for this
    subclass.


CLS 241/193
TXT Apparatus under subclass 191 in which the striking member or members have a
    loose connection with the rotary support for free movement in at least one
    direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196,    for ring type striking members which are adapted to be loosely
    mounted on a rotor support member.


CLS 241/194
TXT Apparatus under subclass 191 in which the rotor is provided with material
    striking members which are pivotally connected thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195+,   for striking members, per se, which are adapted to be pivotally
    connected to a rotor.


CLS 241/195
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the material is subjected to
    the action of a rotary  member which strikes the material a sudden blow to
    effect the comminution in which the claims are directed to the striking
    members, per se, which deliver the blow to the material being comminuted.

    (1)     Note.  Patents claiming the combination of other parts of the
    machine with the striking members have been included only where there is no
    significant characteristics of such other parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for the process of comminuting by use of a rotary striking member.

    39,     for apparatus in which fluid suspended material is projected
    against a rotary member which strikes it a blow or in which a rotary member
    has the additional function of projecting material in a fluid current to
    effect further comminution against a surface or other portions of the
    material.

    55,     for a comminuting device having a rotary striking member combined
    with gas moving means.

    86+,    for a comminuting device in which the rotary striking member
    cooperates with a surface having openings.

    138     and 154, for the combination of a plurality of rotary striking
    member comminutors.

    191+,   for such striking members in combination with the rotary support
    therefor.

    275,    for a device in which a rotary member merely acts as a projector
    for material to centrifugally force it against another surface.  A device
    having rotary a member which projects material centrifugally as described
    and in addition strikes the material a blow to effect a partial comminution
    before being projected is classified in subclasses 185.5-197.

    301,    for a feeder or discharger combined with a comminutor where the
    latter was claimed so broadly as to fail to present a basis for
    classification in subclass directed to the specific comminutor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses 30, 33, 35+, and 85+, for
    a textile preparation machine having similar operation.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, for a feeder or discharger involving the
    use of a conveyor, per se.

    221,    Article Dispensing, for an article dispenser, not otherwise
    classified, per se.

    222,    Dispensing, for a fluent material dispenser, per se.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 279+ for agitation only effected by rotatable
    member.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, for the generic subject matter of
    material handling, per se.

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, subclasses 59+ for a threshing
    machine using a rotary striking member.


CLS 241/196
TXT Apparatus under subclass 195 in which the striking member is in the form of
    an annulus adapted to be loosely mounted on its support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193,    for this type of striking member combination with the rotary
    support therefor.


CLS 241/197
TXT Apparatus under subclass 195 in which the striking member is provided with
    a rigidly attached wear member at the striking surface thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    294+,   298 and 300, for other types of comminuting elements provided with
    means to attach a wear face thereto.


CLS 241/198.1
TXT Cooperating comminuting surfaces (e.g., jaw crusher):
    Apparatus under the class definition in which the comminution of the
    material takes place between two relatively moving surfaces which cooperate
    to effect the comminuting operation.

    (1)     Note.  A number of classes provide for the treatment of material
    between relatively moving cooperating surfaces to change the dimensions,
    particle size, or other properties of the material.  A partial list of such
    classes as were considered to present analogous subject matter will be
    found below under "Search Class".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    274+,   277+ and 283, and the notes thereto, for a device in which the
    comminution is effected by the cooperation of the material directly with a
    single surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    17,     Butchering, subclasses 25+.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 4.51+.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 97 and 244+.

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses.

    81,     Tools, subclasses 9.4+.

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, for food separating means that has
    relative movement.

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 152+.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    subclass 363 for a press couple including an endless surface and subclasses
    406+ for other press couples.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 110, 112, 132+, 194+, 262, and 302 for an
    abrading machine using opposed abrading tools.

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, appropriate subclasses.


CLS 241/199
TXT Apparatus under subclass 198.1 in which the material is treated in batches
    rather than as a stream passing through the comminuting zone.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass will be found a number of patents
    directed to devices for forming dental amalgam. In some of these devices
    the function appears to be purely one of mixing, but in view of their
    similarity to mortars and pestles used for comminution these patents have
    been classified here even though there is no mention of a comminuting
    function.


CLS 241/199.1
TXT Apparatus under subclass 199 wherein the batch of material is retained in a
    zone of comminution by a material holder, and means to move the holder or
    structure supporting the holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270+,   for a similar device in which there is a flow of material through
    the comminuting zone.


CLS 241/199.11
TXT Apparatus under subclass 199.9 including means to move a tool or tool
    holder in a straight line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199.8,  for reciprocating tools with a moving support.

    262,    for reciprocating surface or surfaces.


CLS 241/199.12
TXT Apparatus under subclass 199.9 including a tool or tool holder mounted for
    movement about a fixed axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199.7,  for rotary tools with a moving support.

    220+,   for rotary surface or surfaces.


CLS 241/199.2
TXT Apparatus under subclass 199.1 wherein a comminuting tool moves relative to
    the material holder and the material holder moves in a stop-and-go fashion;
    and wherein the means to cause tool motion and the holder motion are
    connected together or synchronized with each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272,    for a similar device in which there is a flow of material through
    the comminuting zone.


CLS 241/199.3
TXT Apparatus under subclass 199.2 wherein the comminuting tool moves
    to-and-fro in a straight line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84.4,   for a reciprocating comminuting tool urging a mass of material
    toward a comminuting surface having material discharge passageways.

    270+,   for a vertically reciprocating comminuting tool in a device having
    a flow of material through the comminuting zone.


CLS 241/199.4
TXT Apparatus under subclass 199.2 wherein the work-contacting edge of the
    comminuting tool has an oscillating motion about an axis perpendicular to
    the length of the said tool edge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264+,   for an oscillating tool in a device in which there is a flow of
    material through the comminuting zone.


CLS 241/199.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 199.1 wherein the change of position of the
    material holder is one-way only.

    (1)     Note.  The motion may be intermittent, as in a rotatable support.


CLS 241/199.6
TXT Apparatus under subclass 199.5 including means to introduce a batch of
    material to, and/or to deliver it from, the material holder or means to
    facilitate removal of material.

    (1)     Note.  The material holder may be removed by hand for dumping the
    material from it.


CLS 241/199.7
TXT Apparatus under subclass 199.5 wherein a tool is mounted for movement in
    one direction only about a fixed axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199.12, for rotary tools where the container is stationary during
    comminuting.

    220+,   for rotary surface or surfaces.


CLS 241/199.8
TXT Apparatus under subclass 199.5 wherein a tool or tool holder is moved in
    alternate directions in a straight line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199.11 ,        for reciprocating tools where the container is stationary
    during comminuting.

    262,    for reciprocating surface or surfaces.


CLS 241/199.9
TXT Apparatus under subclass 199 wherein a material holder is immobile.


CLS 241/200
TXT Devices under subclass 198.1 in which one or both of the comminuting
    surfaces is in the form of an endless member.

    (1)     Note.  The motion of the belt may be intermittent or continuous.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83+,    for such devices in which the endless comminuting surface is
    provided with openings for the passage of material.

    187,    for devices in which the endless member cooperates with a rotary
    striking member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 151+ and see the Notes thereto for presses not
    elsewhere classified, having a pressing member in the form of an endless
    belt.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 804+, and the notes thereto
    for endless belt conveyors.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 371 and 415 for endless type dispensers.

    451,    Abrading, subclass 302 for an abrader comprising opposed endless
    bands.


CLS 241/201
TXT Apparatus under subclass 198.1 in which the moving comminuting surface or
    surfaces has a motion which is the combined result of a plurality of a
    simple motions.

    (1)     Note.  It is to be noted that the defined compound movement relates
    to the surface of the comminuting member, not the member as a whole.  See
    the note to subclass 203.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103+    and 107+, for plural surfaces having compound movement relative to
    a common surface.

    140     and 156, for plural comminutors of this type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses, for operating
    mechanisms, per se, for compound movement comminuting elements.


CLS 241/202
TXT Apparatus under subclass 201 provided with mechanism for primarily
    presenting material to the comminuting zone and/or removing it therefrom or
    for controlling the flow of material to and/or from the comminuting zone.

    (1)     Note.  The term "mechanism" is intended to denote means in addition
    to gravity for positively effecting the feed and/or discharge.

    (2)     Note.  The feeding and/or discharging must be and operation other
    than the mere comminuting movement of the comminuting surfaces. However,
    means for moving a comminuting member out of comminuting position for the
    specific purpose of discharging material was considered a discharging
    organization for this group.

    (3)     Note.  Material handling features in addition to those necessary to
    effect the mere presentation of the material to the comminuting zone or to
    remove the material from the comminutor were considered to be combined
    features which were more than mere feeding or discharging combinations and
    were classified in subclasses 101.01+ unless provided for elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    The various feeding and/or discharging subclasses of this class for feeders
    and/or dischargers in combination with other types of comminutors.  Where
    no feeding and/or discharging group was provided, the patents were
    classified with the particular comminutor combination claimed.

    301,    for feeders and/or dischargers combined with comminutors where the
    latter was claimed so broadly as to fail to present a basis for
    classification in a specific comminutor group.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, for feeders and dischargers involving the
    use of conveyors, per se.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for fluent material dispensers,
    per se.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, for the generic subject matter of
    material handling, per se.


CLS 241/203
TXT Apparatus under subclass 201 in which the moving comminuting surface or
    surfaces has a motion which is the combined result of a plurality of
    simpler motions one of which is rotation.

    (1)     Note.  Mere nonsymmetrical arrangement of the rotary surface about
    a shaft (e.g., eccentrically mounted) was considered to give the surface
    compound movement.  Accordingly, all devices having such eccentrically
    mounted surfaces were classified in this group.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103+    and 107+, for plural surfaces having compound movement relative to
    a common surface.

    220+,   and the notes thereto for devices in which the comminuting surface
    has a simple rotary motion with no additional movement during comminution.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 20 to 24, for machine
    elements, per se, involving the defined type of motion.


CLS 241/204
TXT Apparatus under subclass 203 in which the material flows circumferentially
    and/or tangentially of the moving surface during comminution.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221+,   and the notes thereto for devices having these characteristics in
    which the motion of the moving surface or surfaces is simple rotation.


CLS 241/205
TXT Apparatus under subclass 203 in which the compound movement surface has a
    reciprocatory motion as well as a simple rotary motion relative to a
    cooperating surface to comminute material therebetween.

    (1)     Note.  The described motion of the surface must occur on the
    working or material comminuting stroke of the surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204,    for circumferential or tangential flow devices in which rotary
    surfaces also reciprocate.

    272,    for devices in which a reciprocating comminuting surface is given a
    rotary motion on the noncomminuting stroke.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 102+, for devices
    having similar roll movements applied to textile treatment.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 22, for operating mechanisms
    for imparting the above movement to comminuting elements.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 119+ for an abrading device in which an
    abrading tool has the defined motion.


CLS 241/206
TXT Apparatus under subclass 203 in which the surface which cooperates with the
    compound movement surface has movement during the comminuting operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117+,   for comminutors in which a plurality of surfaces having compound
    movement cooperate with a common surface which has movement.

    204,    for devices in which both surfaces move and the material flows
    circumferentially or tangentially of a rotary surface.

    205,    for devices in which the compound movement surface rotates and
    reciprocates and cooperates with a moving surface.


CLS 241/207
TXT Apparatus under subclass 203 in which the single compound movement surface
    has a simple gyratory or planetary motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123+,   for comminutors in which a plurality of surfaces having planetary
    movement cooperate with a common surface.

    203,    for devices in which the comminuting element has a movement in
    addition to a simple gyratory or planetary motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 98 and 108+, for
    planetary and gyratory rolls for treating textiles.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 86+, for mechanical
    movements for transforming rotary motion into gyratory motion.


CLS 241/208
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 in which the gyratory movement is effected by
    an eccentric drive sleeve which is surrounded by the comminuting surface of
    the gyratory comminuting member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212,    for devices provided with an eccentric drive sleeve above the
    gyratory member.

    215,    for devices in which the eccentric sleeve is below the gyratory
    member.


CLS 241/209
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 in which the gyratory member is provided with
    a support or guide means above the comminuting zone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258,    for rotary members suspended from a support above the comminuting
    zone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 428+ for bearing for gyrating shafts.


CLS 241/210
TXT Apparatus under subclass 209 in which the gyratory movement of the moving
    member is effected by means of an unbalanced weight.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 87, for unbalanced weight
    means for transforming rotary motion into gyratory motion.


CLS 241/211
TXT Apparatus under subclass 209 in which the gyratory member is yieldingly
    mounted so as to be forcible away from the cooperating surface under
    abnormal conditions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121+,   127+, 230+, 239, and 286+, for other comminuting devices embodying
    a yielding mounting for the comminuting member.

    210,    for unbalanced weight driven gyratory comminuting members which are
    yieldably mounted.


CLS 241/212
TXT Apparatus under subclass 209 in which the upper guide or support for the
    gyratory shaft embodies means to effect the gyration of the comminuting
    member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208,    for devices in which the gyratory drive is within the comminuting
    member.

    215,    for devices in which the gyratory drive member is below the
    comminuting zone.


CLS 241/213
TXT Apparatus under subclass 209 in which the shaft for the gyratory member is
    provided at its lower end with adjusting means to vary the gap between the
    cooperating surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256,    258, and 259, for rotary members provided with adjusting means
    therefor.


CLS 241/214
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 in which the comminuting member is mounted
    upon an eccentric shaft to effect the gyratory movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208     and 215, for devices in which the gyratory movement is effected by
    an eccentric sleeve surrounding the shaft of the gyratory member.

    212,    for gyratory comminuting members actuated by an eccentric shaft
    above the comminuting zone.


CLS 241/215
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 in which the gyratory movement of the
    comminuting member is effected by a driven eccentric sleeve on the
    comminuting member shaft below the comminuting zone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208,    for such gyratory drive sleeves mounted within the gyratory member.

    212,    for eccentric sleeve drives for gyratory comminuting members
    mounted above the comminuting zone.


CLS 241/216
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 provided with means to seal the comminuting
    zone from the drive means or other moving parts of the device.


CLS 241/217
TXT Devices under subclass 201 in which the compound movement of the
    comminuting member is derived from an eccentric strap which is unitary with
    the comminuting member.


CLS 241/218
TXT Devices under subclass 217 in which the compound movement surface
    cooperates with a surface which moves during the comminuting operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237,    and the notes thereto for other devices having plural moving
    cooperating surfaces.


CLS 241/219
TXT Devices under subclass 201 in which the compound movement surface is
    supported from a stationary part of the device by a link which is pivotally
    connected both to the comminuting member and to the stationary part.


CLS 241/220
TXT Apparatus under subclass 198 in which at least one of the cooperating
    surfaces rotates about an axis which is contained within the confines of
    the surface.

    (1)     Note.  For the purpose of classification in this group, the
    rotation must be continuous.  Devices in which the rotation was
    intermittent were classified in subclass 198.1 or other appropriate
    subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The notes to subclasses 198.1, 221 and 244, should be
    referred to for notes to other classes having similar organizations
    involving rotary surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86,     138+, 154, and 185.5-197, for devices in which the comminution is
    effected by rotary striking members.

    103+,   123+ and 203, for compound movement comminuting surfaces having
    rotary motion as a component thereof.

    107+,   for plural rotary surfaces which cooperate with a common surface.

    141     and 157+, for plural comminutors having rotary cooperating
    comminuting surfaces.

    277+,   for comminutors having rotary surfaces which do not cooperate with
    a cooperating surface.


CLS 241/221
TXT Apparatus under subclass 220 in which the material flows circumferentially
    or tangentially of the rotary surface during the comminuting operation.

    (1)     Note.  Many patents were found in which the flow of the material
    through the comminuting zone was both that as defined above and also that
    of subclasses 244+.  The factor which was considered to determine the
    proper classification of these patents was the general path of the material
    through the machine as defined by the relative position of the inlet and
    outlet for the material, i.e., even though there was incidental movement of
    the material in a circumferential direction during comminution, the patent
    was classified under subclasses 244+, if the inlet and outlet of the
    devices were axially spaced.

    (2)     Note.  A number of classes (see "Search Class" below) provide for
    the treatment of material between cooperating members in which the material
    has the defined movement.  See the notes to subclass 227 for references to
    such classes which provide for plural rotating surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142+    and 158+, for plural devices of the defined type.

    189.1+, for devices providing for similar flow of material relative to
    rotary striking members.

    204,    for devices providing for similar flow of material relative to
    compound movement surfaces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 155+, and see the Notes thereto for roll type
    presses, not elsewhere classified.

    452,    Butchering, subclasses 143 and 145.

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, subclasses 46 and 59+.


CLS 241/222
TXT Apparatus under subclass 221 provided with mechanism for primarily
    presenting material to the comminuting zone and/or removing it therefrom or
    for controlling the flow of material to and/or from the comminuting zone.

    (1)     Note.  The term "mechanism" is intended to denote means in addition
    to gravity for positively effecting the feed and/or discharge.

    (2)     Note.  The feeding and/or discharging must be an operation other
    than the mere comminuting movement of the comminuting surfaces.  However,
    means for moving a comminuting member out of comminuting position for the
    specific purpose of discharging material was considered a discharging
    organization for this group.

    (3)     Note.  Material handling features in addition to those necessary to
    effect the mere presentation of the material to the comminuting zone or to
    remove the material from the comminutors were considered to be combined
    features which were more than mere feeding or discharging combinations and
    were classified in subclasses 101.01+ unless provided for elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    The various feeding and/or discharging subclasses of this class for feeders
    and/or dischargers in combination with other types of comminutors.  Where
    no feeding and/or discharging group was provided the patents were
    classified with particular comminutor combination claimed.

    301,    for feeders and/or dischargers combined with comminutors where the
    latter was claimed so broadly as to fail to present a basis for
    classification in a specific comminutor group.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, for feeders and dischargers involving the
    use of conveyors, per se.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for fluent material dispensers,
    per se.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, for the generic subject matter of
    material handling, per se.


CLS 241/223
TXT Apparatus under subclass 222 in which the mechanism for feeding and/or
    discharging comprises an endless belt conveyor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 804+, for endless belt
    conveyors, per se.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 371 and 415, for endless belt type
    dispensers.


CLS 241/224
TXT Apparatus under subclass 222 in which the feed mechanism operates in
    conjunction with a hopper to feed the material to the comminuting zone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248+,   for hopper feeders operating in conjunction with other types of
    comminutors.


CLS 241/225
TXT Apparatus under subclass 224 in which the feed mechanism comprises a roll
    or some form of rotary material agitator which operates in connection with
    a hopper to effect the feeding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 410+, and the notes thereto for dispensers,
    per se, having rotary nongravity discharge assistants.


CLS 241/226
TXT Apparatus under subclass 221 provided with means mounted at the axial end
    or ends of the rotary surface or surfaces which functions to prevent
    material from escaping at said ends.


CLS 241/227
TXT Apparatus under subclass 221 in which both of the cooperating surfaces
    rotate.

    (1)     Note.  The devices classified in this group are those generally
    termed "roll mills".  Devices in a number of classes treat material between
    rotating roll members for various purposes.  A partial list of analogous
    devices will be found under "Search Class" below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for devices in which plural rotary surfaces cooperate with each
    other as well as a common surface.

    143+    and 159, for plural devices of this type.

    187,    for such devices in which the cooperating surfaces are rotary
    striking members.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 99 and 244+.

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus,  subclasses 520, 574, 584, 620,
    624, and 627 for cooperating, rotating or moving surfaces used to separate
    a food item.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 155+ and see the notes thereto for roll type
    presses not elsewhere classified.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 281.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthernware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 363+.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 194+ for a machine using opposed rotary
    cylinder abrading tools.

    452,    Butchering, subclass 142.

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, appropriate subclasses.


CLS 241/228
TXT Apparatus under subclass 227 in which one of the cooperating rotary members
    presents an internal annular comminuting surface to the other rotary
    surface for cooperation therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117+,   for similar devices in which a plurality of rotary members
    cooperates with an internal comminuting surface especially subclass 122 for
    devices having an internal rotary comminuting surface.

    170+,   for rotary members cooperating with internal comminuting surfaces
    in which the rotary member is loosely mounted.

    252,    for devices of similar structure, but in which the flow of material
    is in a generally axial direction, rather than circumferential.


CLS 241/229
TXT Apparatus under subclass 227 in which (1) the cooperating surfaces rotate
    in the same direction and/or (2) the one or both of the surfaces rotate on
    vertical or inclined axes and/or (3) one or both of the surfaces is
    eccentrically mounted on its axis.


CLS 241/230
TXT Apparatus under subclass 227 provided with means for adjustably or
    yieldably mounting one or both of the rotary surfaces.

    (1)     Note.  See the reference to "Search Class" under subclasses 221 and
    227, for other classes providing for adjustably or yieldably mounted roll
    members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for overload release devices as applied to rotary surface mounting
    means.

    37,     for devices providing for automatic control of comminuting surface
    contiguity.

    63+,    for means to control the surface positioning means simultaneously
    with other functions of the device.

    122,    for devices in which plural rotary surfaces are tensioned against a
    rotary internal surface.


CLS 241/231
TXT Apparatus under subclass 230 in which (1) the adjusting or yielding means
    comprises hydraulic or pneumatic pressure devices and/or (2) one or both of
    the rotary surfaces is adjustable or yieldable in the direction of its axis
    of rotation.

    (1)     Note.  Most of the devices under (2) above have surfaces which are
    of other than cylindrical shape. When the surface so departs from a
    cylinder that the material cannot be said to pass circumferentially or
    tangentially thereof, the device is properly classified in subclass 220.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 202+ for flexible, or pneumatic bearing
    supports.


CLS 241/232
TXT Apparatus under subclass 230 in which at least one of the rotary surfaces
    is provided with a pivotally mounted support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121+    and 128+, for pivotally supporting a plurality of rolls relative to
    a common surface.


CLS 241/233
TXT Apparatus under subclass 232 in which the pivoted roll support is provided
    with an adjustable pivot point.


CLS 241/234
TXT Apparatus under subclass 230 in which means is provided for adjustably
    and/or yieldably mounting both rotating surfaces.


CLS 241/235
TXT Apparatus under subclass 227 in which one or both of the cooperating
    surfaces are not smooth but are provided with cooperating grooves,
    channels, protuberances or the like.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     for rolls provided with cooperating surface characteristics which
    reject certain types of material to prevent it from passing to the grinding
    nip.

    242+    and 260+, for surfaces provided with cooperating nonsmooth
    characteristics in other types of comminutors.

    293+,   for single cylindrical comminuting elements provided with nonsmooth
    surfaces.


CLS 241/236
TXT Apparatus under subclass 235 in which the nonsmooth surface characteristics
    of the respective surfaces cooperate by intermeshing with or overlapping
    each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    190,    243 and 261, for intermeshing comminuting surface characteristics
    in other types of comminutors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 341 for a roller cutter
    type earth boring bit provided with plural rolling cutters having
    intermeshing teeth.


CLS 241/237
TXT Apparatus under subclass 221 in which the nonrotary surface which
    cooperates with the rotary surface is provided with means to move it during
    comminution.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    187,    for such devices in which the rotary member is a rotary striking
    member.

    200,    for such devices in which the nonrotary surface is a moving endless
    belt.

    201+,   for such devices in which the nonrotary surface has a compound
    motion.

    206,    for such devices in which the rotary surface has a compound motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 105, for devices
    having similarly moving parts applied to textile treatment.

    100,    Presses, subclass 47 for presses not elsewhere provided for, having
    automatic or triggered control of roll separation or speed.


CLS 241/238
TXT Apparatus under subclass 221 in which (1) there is provided a plurality of
    nonrotary surface parts so arranged as to cooperate with the rotary surface
    alternatively, or (2) the rotary member is provided with parts or
    projections adapted to be moved relatively to other parts of the rotor or
    (3) the rotary member is adjustably or yieldably mounted in the frame of
    the apparatus or in which the apparatus is provided with a combination of
    all or any two of features (1), (2), or (3).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for deformable comminuting surfaces, parts of which move relatively
    to other parts due to contact with the material.

    230+,   and the notes thereto for devices in which a rotary surface is
    adjustably or yieldably mounted relative to another rotary surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 291 and 343, for feed rotors having
    retractable projections.


CLS 241/239
TXT Apparatus under subclass 221 in which a nonrotary surface which cooperates
    with the rotary surface is mounted so as to be adjustable or yieldable
    relative to the rotary surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for means mounting a nonrotary surface for release upon overload.

    37,     for devices providing for automatic control of comminuting surface
    contiguity.

    89      and 189, for similar arrangements wherein the rotary surface is a
    rotary striking member.

    286+,   for such devices in which the claimed invention is limited to the
    mounting of the nonrotary surface relative to the frame of the machine
    (i.e., the rotary member is not included significantly in combination).


CLS 241/240
TXT Apparatus under subclass 239 in which the nonrotary surface which
    cooperates with the rotary surface is made up of a plurality of
    independently adjustable sections.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this classification, circumferential or
    tangential flow devices in which material is subjected to the action of a
    single rotary surface cooperating with a plurality of nonrotary surfaces
    are considered to present a single comminuting zone.  Such devices are
    therefore classified in this or other appropriate subclasses in this group
    rather than as a plural comminutor combination.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160,    for the combination of a plurality of rotary surfaces each
    cooperating with a nonrotary surface.


CLS 241/241
TXT Apparatus under subclass 239 in which the nonrotary surface is so mounted
    as to be adjustable or yieldable radially of the rotary surface.


CLS 241/241.5
TXT Single roll jaw crusher:
    Apparatus under subclass 241 in which the rotary surface is comprised of
    rotary member having a radially outwardly facing cylindrical working
    surface.


CLS 241/242
TXT Apparatus under subclass 221 in which one or both of the cooperating
    surfaces are not smooth but are provided with cooperating grooves,
    channels, protuberances or the like.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235+    and 260+, for surfaces provided with cooperating nonsmooth
    characteristics in other types of comminutors.

    291+,   for single comminuting elements provided with nonsmooth surfaces.


CLS 241/243
TXT Apparatus under subclass 242 in which the nonsmooth surface characteristics
    of the respective surfaces cooperate by intermeshing with or overlapping
    each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    190,    for rotary impact comminuting devices having intermeshing
    characteristics.

    236     and 261, for intermeshing comminuting surface characteristics in
    other types of comminutors.


CLS 241/244
TXT Apparatus under subclass 220 in which the material flows in a generally
    axial and/or radial direction relative to a rotary surface during the
    comminuting operation.

    (1)     Note.  See the note to subclass 221 for the line between this group
    and that providing for devices in which the material flows
    circumferentially or tangentially of the rotary surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91+,    114, 188.1, 206, and 207+, for other comminutors in which the
    material flows axially and/or radially of a rotary member.

    146+    and 161+, for plural devices of this type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 155+ and see the Notes thereto for roll type
    presses, not elsewhere classified.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 112 and 262+ for cooperating disk abraders.


CLS 241/245
TXT Apparatus under subclass 244 provided with mechanism for primarily
    presenting material to the comminuting zone and/or removing it therefrom or
    for controlling the flow of material to and/or from the comminuting zone.

    (1)     Note.  The term "mechanism" is intended to denote means in addition
    to gravity for positively effecting the feed and/or discharge.

    (2)     Note.  The feeding and/or discharging must be an operation other
    than the mere comminuting movement of the comminuting surfaces. However,
    means for moving a comminuting member out of comminuting position for the
    specific purpose of discharging material was considered a discharging
    organization for this group.

    (3)     Note.  Material handling features in addition to those necessary to
    effect the mere presentation of the material to the comminuting zone or to
    remove the material from the comminutor were considered to be combined
    features which were more than mere feeding or discharging combinations and
    were classified in subclasses 101.01+ unless provided for elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    The various feeding and/or discharging subclasses of this class for feeders
    and/or dischargers in combination with other types of comminutors.  Where
    no feeding and/or discharging group was provided, the patents were
    classified with the particular comminutor combination claimed.

    301,    for feeders and/or dischargers combined with comminutors where the
    latter was claimed so broadly as to fail to present a basis for
    classification in a specific comminutor group.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, for feeders and dischargers involving the
    use of conveyors, per se.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for fluent material dispensers,
    per se.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, for the generic subject matter of
    material handling, per se.


CLS 241/246
TXT Devices under subclass 245 in which the feeding mechanism comprises a
    rotary propeller or screw conveyor mounted axially of the rotary
    comminuting member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82.1+,  for a rotary propeller, comminuting member and a perforated plate
    for passage of material feed by the propeller.

    162+,   for comminutors in which the axially mounted rotary screw feeder is
    provided with means to subject the material to a preliminary comminution.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power Driven, subclasses 425, 550.6, 550.10, 550.01,
    513, 545, 548, 582, 608, 611+, 625, and 657+ for a screw conveyor.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 412+, for dispensers, per se, having screw
    propeller feeders.


CLS 241/247
TXT Devices under subclass 246 in which the axis of rotation of the propeller
    or screw is horizontal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251     and 255+, for horizontal axis comminutors of the type here provided
    for in which no feed propeller or screw is claimed.


CLS 241/248
TXT Devices under subclass 245 in which the control or feed mechanism operates
    in conjunction with a hopper.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power Driven, subclasses 311, 359+ and 523+ for a
    conveyor feeding a load to, or receiving a load from, a hopper, and
    subclasses 550.01 and 582 for a bin having a conveyor for discharging a
    material therefrom.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses, for hopper dischargers, per se.


CLS 241/249
TXT Devices under subclass 248 in which the feed mechanism comprises a
    receptacle beneath the hopper outlet which has a shaking movement to effect
    the feeding operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 199 and the notes thereto for similar feeders,
    per se.


CLS 241/250
TXT Devices under subclass 244 in which the rotary surface cooperates with a
    comminuting surface which moves during the comminuting operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206,    for compound movement elements which cooperate with a moving
    surface.

    237,    for circumferential or tangential comminutors, having means to move
    the nonrotary surface.


CLS 241/251
TXT Devices under subclass 250 in which both cooperating surfaces have a rotary
    motion.

    (1)     Note.  The rotary motion of one of the surfaces may be due solely
    to frictional contact with the material or cooperating surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117+,   for devices in which a plurality of rotary surfaces cooperate with
    a common rotary surface.

    227,    for comminutors in which the material flows circumferentially or
    tangentially between a plurality of rotary surfaces.


CLS 241/252
TXT Apparatus under subclass 251 in which the surfaces rotate about axes which
    are respectively noncoaxial or eccentric relative to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206,    for devices in which a surface having compound movement cooperates
    with a moving surface.

    220,    for devices in which the off-center or eccentric mounting is such
    that the path of the material is not in a generally radial and/or
    tangential direction.

    254,    for devices in which a single moving surface is mounted
    noncoaxially or eccentrically relative to a stationary surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 155+ and see the Notes thereto for roll type
    presses, not elsewhere classified.


CLS 241/253
TXT Devices under subclass 251 in which the rotary motion of both surfaces is
    about a vertical axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257.1,  for devices in which a single surface rotates relative to another
    about a vertical axis.


CLS 241/254
TXT Apparatus under subclass 244 in which one comminuting surface rotates about
    an axis which is noncoaxial or eccentric to the axis or center line of the
    cooperating nonrotary surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203+,   for devices where the rotating surface has a compound movement
    relative to the axis of the stationary member.

    220,    for devices in which the off-center or eccentric mounting is such
    that the path of the material is not in a generally axial and/or radial
    direction.

    252,    for devices in which both cooperating surfaces rotate about
    noncoaxial axes.


CLS 241/257.1
TXT Vertical axis:
    Apparatus under subclass 244 in which the moving surface rotates about a
    vertical axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46.017, for a garbage disposal having a liquid submerged comminutor having
    a vertical axis of rotation.

    253,    for a comminutor having two moving surfaces which both rotate about
    a vertical axis.


CLS 241/258
TXT Devices under subclass 257.1 in which the rotary shaft which drives the
    rotary comminuting member is supported on the frame at a point above the
    comminuting zone.


CLS 241/259
TXT Devices under subclass 257.1 in which the rotary comminuting member is
    adjustable to vary the contiguity of the relatively moving surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256,    for adjustable comminuting members mounted for rotation on a
    horizontal axis.


CLS 241/259.1
TXT Apparatus under subclass 244 provided with means to change the distance
    between the comminuting faces.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the purpose of this means is to vary the particle
    size of the product, or to compensate for wear of the surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82.2,   for means to vary particle coarseness in a helical pusher type
    comminutor.

    230+,   for an adjustable or yieldable mounting and a rotary cooperating
    surface.

    259,    for an adjustable rotary member.


CLS 241/259.2
TXT Apparatus under 259.1 wherein the means to vary the distance between the
    surfaces includes hydraulic or pneumatic pressure.


CLS 241/259.3
TXT Apparatus under subclass 259.1 wherein the means to vary distance between
    the surfaces includes means to urge one surface toward or away from the
    other surface.


CLS 241/260
TXT Devices under subclass 244 in which one or both of the cooperating surfaces
    are not smooth but are provided with cooperating grooves, channels,
    protuberances or the like.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235+    and 242, for surfaces provided with cooperating nonsmooth
    characteristics in other types of comminutors.

    291+,   for single comminuting elements provided with nonsmooth surfaces.


CLS 241/260.1
TXT Apparatus under subclass 260 provided with a rotary helical comminuting
    member.

    (1)     Note.  The device herein is distinguished from those of subclass
    247 in that the worm is the only comminutor (other than the cooperating
    surface) in this subclass (260.1) whereas the device of subclass 247 is
    provided with an additional comminuting member, the worm or screw
    functioning as a feeder which may also comminute as it feeds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82.1+,  for a helical pusher device provided with a comminuting surface
    having material discharge openings.

    243+,   for an intermeshing cooperating nonsmooth surface.


CLS 241/261
TXT Devices under subclass 260 in which the nonsmooth surface characteristics
    of the respective surfaces cooperate by intermeshing with or overlapping
    each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188.1,  for comminuting devices of a similar type provided with disk-like
    members having intermeshing impact pins.

    236     and 243, for intermeshing comminuting surface characteristics in
    other types of comminutors.


CLS 241/261.1
TXT Apparatus under subclass 260 wherein one surface member is circular in a
    cross section taken perpendicular to the longitudinal axis and convergent
    in a cross section taken parallel to such axis.


CLS 241/261.2
TXT Apparatus under subclass 260 provided with circular plates facing each
    other with their centers in alignment.


CLS 241/261.3
TXT Apparatus under subclass 261.2 provided with ribs or channels which
    intersect each other, or which would intersect within the confines of the
    surface if extended.


CLS 241/262
TXT Apparatus under subclass 198.1 in which at least one of the cooperating
    comminuting surfaces has a reciprocating motion, i.e., traverses the same
    path and reverses its motion at the ends of such path.

    (1)     Note.  The path may be rectilinear or curvilinear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94,     for reciprocating surfaces having openings.

    147+    and 164, for plural reciprocating type comminutors.

    169,    for hand support type comminutors having this character of motion.

    201+,   for compound movement comminutors in which the motion may have a
    reciprocating component.

    237     and 250, for devices in which a reciprocating surface cooperates
    with a rotary surface.

    283,    for single surface type reciprocating comminutors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, appropriate subclasses, for fluid motor actuating
    means for reciprocating comminuting surfaces.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclasses 25+, for machine elements for actuating reciprocating
    comminuting surfaces.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, appropriate subclasses, for internal
    combustion motors for actuating reciprocating comminuting surfaces.

    452,    Butchering, subclass 144, for meat tenderizers of similar
    construction.


CLS 241/263
TXT Apparatus under subclass 262 in which the surfaces have reciprocating
    movement parallel to each other.

    (1)     Note.  The surfaces may be held in sliding contact and may
    oscillate relative to a substantially concentric curved surface or have
    rectilinear motion relative to a flat surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134     and 152.1+, for the combination of a plurality of such devices.


CLS 241/264
TXT Apparatus under subclass 262 in which the comminuting surface or surfaces
    have oscillating motion, i.e., the path of reciprocation through which the
    surface moves is a portion of a circle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94,     for oscillating comminuting surfaces provided with openings.

    148     and 164, for plural comminutors of this type.

    263,    for oscillating surfaces moving parallel to a cooperating surface.

    283,    for single surface type oscillating comminutors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclasses 25+, for oscillating surface actuating mechanisms, per se.


CLS 241/265
TXT Apparatus under subclass 264 provided with mechanism for primarily
    presenting material to the comminuting zone and/or removing it therefrom or
    for controlling the flow of material to and/or from the comminuting zone.

    (1)     Note.  The term "mechanism" is intended to denote means in addition
    to gravity for positively effecting the feed and/or discharge.

    (2)     Note.  The feeding and/or discharging must be an operation other
    than the mere comminuting movement of the comminuting surfaces. However,
    means for moving a comminuting member out of comminuting position for the
    specific purpose of discharging material was considered a discharging
    organization for this group.

    (3)     Note.  Material handling features in addition to those necessary to
    effect the mere presentation of the material to the comminuting zone or to
    remove the material from the comminutor were considered to be combined
    features which were more than mere feeding or discharging combinations and
    were classified in subclasses 101.01+ unless provided for elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    The various feeding and/or discharging subclasses of this class for feeders
    and/or dischargers in combination with other types of comminutors.  Where
    no feeding and/or discharging group was provided, the patents were
    classified with the particular comminutor combination claimed.

    301,    for feeders and/or dischargers combined with comminutors where the
    latter was claimed so broadly as to fail to present a basis for
    classification in a specific comminutor group.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, for feeders and dischargers involving the
    use of conveyors, per se.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for fluent material dispensers,
    per se.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, for the generic subject matter of
    material handling, per se.


CLS 241/266
TXT Devices under subclass 264 in which the oscillating surface cooperates with
    a surface which has movement during the comminuting operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237,    for related devices in which the surface which cooperates with the
    oscillating surface has a rotary motion.  Since subclasses 220+, provide
    for surfaces having continuous rotary motion only, those devices providing
    an intermittently rotated surface cooperating with an oscillating surface
    have been classified in this subclass (266).


CLS 241/267
TXT Devices under subclass 264 in which the oscillating comminuting element is
    actuated about its pivot by an eccentric which imparts movement to a single
    link which has pivotal connection with the comminuting element.


CLS 241/268
TXT Devices under subclass 264 in which the oscillating comminuting element is
    actuated about its pivot (1) by a plurality of serially arranged links
    which are pivoted together or are each pivoted to a common member or (2) by
    a single link which has movement imparted to it by a driven lever member.

    (1)     Note.  These types of actuators are those ordinarily known as
    "toggles".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 106 and 520, for actuating
    means of the specified type, per se.


CLS 241/269
TXT Apparatus under subclass 268 in which there is provided means acting upon
    the pivotal connection between the plural serial links to impart movement
    to it and thus change the inclination of the links to oscillate the
    comminuting surface.

    (1)     Note.  In most of the patents included here, the pivot actuating
    means is an eccentric which drives a pitman member that is interposed
    between the adjacent ends of the links and forms the pivotal connection
    thereof.


CLS 241/270
TXT Apparatus under subclass 262 in which the reciprocation of the comminuting
    surface is in a vertical straight-line path.

    (1)     Note.  Most of the devices classified in this group are those
    ordinarily known as "stamp mills".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149+    and 165, for plural devices of this type.

    205,    for devices having the characteristics of this group in which the
    reciprocating surface is given a rotary motion on the comminuting stroke.

    263,    for vertically reciprocating surfaces moving parallel to a
    cooperating surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses, for actuating
    devices of the type there provided for in which no claim is made to a
    significant comminutor combination.  See the notes in the class definition.

    81,     Tools, subclasses 463+, and see the notes thereto for other impact
    tools.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclasses, for
    actuating devices of the type there provided for in which no claim is made
    to a significant comminutor combination.  See the notes in the class
    definition.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 214+ for reciprocating presses not elsewhere
    provided for.

    384,    Bearings, for vertically reciprocating stems of stamp mills where
    no significant structure of the comminutor is included.  See the line with
    Class 384 in the notes to the class definition.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclasses, for
    rotary expansible chamber motors, per se, or in which no claim is made to a
    significant comminuter combination. See section 7 of the main class
    definition to this class (241).


CLS 241/271
TXT Apparatus under subclass 270 provided with mechanism for primarily
    presenting material to the comminuting zone and/or removing it therefrom or
    for controlling the flow of material to and/or from the comminuting zone.

    (1)     Note.  The term "mechanism" is intended to denote means in addition
    to gravity for positively effecting the feed and/or discharge.

    (2)     Note.  The feeding and/or discharging must be an operation other
    than the mere comminuting movement of the comminuting surfaces.  However,
    means for moving a comminuting member out of comminuting position for the
    specific purpose of discharging material was considered a discharging
    organization for this group.

    (3)     Note.  Material handling features in addition to those necessary to
    effect the mere presentation of the material to the comminuting zone or to
    remove the material from the comminutor were considered to be combined
    features which were more than mere feeding or discharging combinations and
    were classified in subclasses 101.01+ unless provided for elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    The various feeding and/or discharging subclasses of this class for feeders
    and/or dischargers in combination with other types of comminutors.  Where
    no feeding and/or discharging group was provided, the patents were
    classified with the particular comminutor combination claimed.

    301,    for feeders and/or dischargers combined with comminutors where the
    latter was claimed so broadly as to fail to present a basis for
    classification in a specific comminutor group.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, for feeders and dischargers involving the
    use of conveyors, per se.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for fluent material dispensers,
    per se.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, for the generic subject matter of
    material handling, per se.


CLS 241/272
TXT Devices under subclass 270 provided with means to rotate the reciprocating
    surface only upon its movement away from the cooperating surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205,    for comminutors in which the comminuting surface is both
    reciprocated and rotated during the comminuting operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses, especially
    subclass 24, for actuators for imparting the above motion to a comminutor
    element.


CLS 241/273
TXT Devices under subclass 270 in which the vertically reciprocating surface is
    projected toward the cooperating surface solely by the force of gravity on
    the comminuting stroke.


CLS 241/273.1
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having a surface provided with many
    closely spaced raised portions of a cutting tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83+,    for a comminuting surface with openings to permit discharge of
    material.

    274+,   for a stationary comminuting surface or material bed having points
    or a sharp edged tool.

    277+,   for a rotating comminuting surface having points or a sharp edged
    tool.

    283,    for a reciprocating comminuting surface having points or a sharp
    edged tool.


CLS 241/273.2
TXT Apparatus under subclass 273.1 in which the comminuting surface is
    substantially planar and has a circular periphery.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278.1,  for a rotary radial surface not cooperating with another surface
    and not provided with barbs.


CLS 241/273.3
TXT Apparatus under subclass 273.1 wherein the work-engaging part of the tool
    is the surface traced by one side of a rectangle rotated around the
    parallel side as an axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84.2,   for a travelling roller-like surface cooperating with a surface
    having discharge passageways.

    280+,   for a rotating cylindrical surface in an apparatus provided with
    means to force material toward such surface.


CLS 241/273.4
TXT Apparatus under subclass 273.1 wherein the closely-spaced raised portions
    are arranged on a nonplanar configuration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89.3,   for a stationary concave surface provided with discharge openings.


CLS 241/274
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which a single comminuting surface
    is stationary relative to the material presented to it for comminution and
    may comprise a bed of the material being comminuted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for corresponding processes involving the movement of material
    relative to a stationary material bed.

    40,     for devices in which fluid conveyed material is impacted upon a
    stationary abutment to effect comminution.

    95,     for identical devices in which the comminuting surface is provided
    with passages for the material.

    136,    for a plurality of such devices arranged for parallel or series
    parallel flow of material.  Apparatus in which a plurality of distinct
    columns of material are fed against a common surface was considered to
    present a plurality of comminuting zones in parallel.

    152.1+, for a plurality of such devices arranged for series flow of
    material therethrough.

    198+,   for devices in which material is presented to a stationary surface
    for comminution by a cooperating comminuting surface.

    284,    for mutual attrition and compression devices in which there is no
    disclosure of the moving material being presented to a stationary material
    bed for comminution.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses, for a cutting device having a
    stationary anvil, bed, or ledger blade.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 506+ and 589 for static
    means separating a food item.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 312+ for a sandblast device in which the sand
    is projected by centrifugal force.


CLS 241/275
TXT Apparatus under subclass 274 in which the centrifugal force generated by a
    material engaging rotating member projects or urges the material against
    the stationary surface or material bed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for corresponding processes.

    39+,    for comminutors of this type utilizing a centrifugally generated
    stream of fluid to support and project the material against a surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 519 and 571 for
    apparatus wherein separation of a food item is caused by impact which may
    be as a result of centrifugal force means.

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, subclasses 4+, for centrifugal
    object projectors of the type there provided for.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 410+, for rotary material dispensers.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 7, 650+,
    appropriate subclasses, 214+ and 380+, for methods and apparatus for
    scattering fluent material by centrifugal force.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 94+ for a sandblast device in which the sand
    is projected by centrifugal force.


CLS 241/276
TXT Devices under subclass 274 in which a conveyor engages the material to
    force it into comminuting contact with the stationary surface or bed of
    material.

    (1)     Note.  The locomotive stoker type and the scroll type of crushers
    are included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284,    for devices in which the comminution is effected by the mutual
    attrition or compression between particles of the material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 48.1 and 232+ for locomotive type
    stokers with comminuting means and significant railway vehicle structure.

    110,    Furnaces, particularly subclasses where means for distributing the
    fuel fed is claimed or where the relationship to or structure of a firebox
    is claimed.  The mere reference to the firebox as the point of delivery (no
    structure thereof and no relationship thereto) will not cause
    classification in Class 110.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses, especially
    subclasses 657+, for conveying structures of general utility or for stokers
    combined with nominal railway vehicle structure.


CLS 241/277
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which material is presented for
    comminution to a single comminuting surface which has a simple rotary
    motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91+,    for identical devices in which the comminuting surface is provided
    with passages for the material.

    136     and 151, for plural devices of this type arranged for parallel or
    series-parallel flow of material. Apparatus in which a plurality of
    distinct columns of material are fed against a common surface was
    considered to present a plurality of comminuting zones in parallel.

    152.1+, for plural devices of this type arranged for series flow of
    material.

    185.5   through 197, for rotary comminuting devices provided with members
    which strike the material.

    220+,   for rotary surfaces which cooperate with other surfaces to effect
    comminution.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    144,    Woodworking, the various rotating tool subclasses, for similar
    devices for shaping wood.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 177+ for an abrading device employing a
    rotating tool.


CLS 241/278.1
TXT Radial comminuting surface:
    Apparatus under subclass 277 in which the rotary surface is generally
    normal to the axis of rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92,     for comminuting apparatus in which the comminuting surface is
    provided with a radial comminuting face having openings to permit discharge
    of material.

    244+,   for a comminuting device in which comminution is effected between
    the cooperating radial surfaces of rotary comminuting members

    SEARCH CLASS

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 622 and 631+ for a
    rotating radial face food separating machine.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 259+ for an abrading machine in which a rotary
    tool presents a radial face to the material.


CLS 241/278.2
TXT Internal comminuting surface:
    Apparatus under subclass 277 in which the material is presented to a rotary
    comminuting surface that is generally curved about and faces the axis
    thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The comminuting surface may comprise the inside of a rotary
    drum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     for comminuting apparatus provided with a rotary comminuting
    surface having openings to permit discharge of material.

    228,    for comminuting apparatus in which material is comminuted between
    an internal comminuting surface and a cooperating rotary surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 259+ for an abrading machine in which a rotary
    tool presents an internal face to the material.


CLS 241/279
TXT Apparatus under subclass 277 in which the material is supported for
    presentation to the rotating comminuting surface by means which permits the
    rotation of the material about an axis within itself or which imparts a
    rotary motion to it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95,     for means for supporting material for rotation relative to a
    stationary comminuting surface having passages for the material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    144,    Woodworking, appropriate lathe subclasses, for a similar device
    which provides for rotation of the work for shaping wood as opposed to
    comminution.

    451,    Abrading, the various "work rotating" subclasses, for similar
    relationships in abrading machines.


CLS 241/280
TXT Apparatus under subclass 277 provided with mechanism to carry the material
    up to and against the periphery of the comminuting surface.

    (1)     Note.  Most of the devices classified here are the abrading wood
    pulp type grinders.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136,    151 and 152.1+, for plural devices provided with feed means of this
    type.

    278.1,  and the notes thereto for means for forcing material against a
    radial or internal surface.

    279,    for such devices having means to rotate material.


CLS 241/281
TXT Apparatus under subclass 280 in which the material forcing mechanism
    comprises means to engage a side or sides of the column of material being
    carried toward the comminuting surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 181.2 for a roller feed for a wood slicer.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses, for conveyors,
    per se, which engage the side or sides of a column of material.


CLS 241/282
TXT Devices under subclass 280 in which the material forcing mechanism
    comprises a reciprocating follower which is generally radially arranged
    relative to the rotating surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136,    for interconnected means for operating a plurality of reciprocating
    followers as defined above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 386+, for containers provided with followers
    to dispense material therefrom.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 212+ for a reciprocating work feeder for a
    rotary abrading tool.


CLS 241/282.1
TXT Apparatus under subclass 277 provided with a knife or blade-like
    comminuting element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    292.1,  for similar devices not involving rotation.


CLS 241/282.2
TXT Apparatus under subclass 282.1 wherein the member is removably fastened to
    a revolving support.


CLS 241/283
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which material is presented to a
    single comminuting surface which has a reciprocating motion relative to the
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94,     for identical devices in which the comminuting surfaces are
    provided with passages for the material.

    136     and 151, for a plurality of such devices arranged for parallel or
    series parallel material flow therethrough. Apparatus in which a plurality
    of distinct columns of material are fed against a common surface was
    considered to present a plurality of comminuting zones in parallel.

    152.1+, for a plurality of such devices in series.

    205,    237, 250, and 262+, for devices having surfaces which reciprocate
    relative to a cooperating surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 136+, for hand manipulated scrapers adapted to
    be reciprocated over the surface of material.

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses, for a cutting device provided with
    a reciprocating tool.

    144,    Woodworking, appropriate reciprocating cutter subclasses for a
    device for cutting wood or a similar material.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 162+ for an abrading machine having
    reciprocating tools.


CLS 241/284
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which (1) portions of the material
    are caused to move relatively with respect to other portions to effect
    comminution by attrition, or (2) portions of the material are subjected to
    pressure against other portions thereof, or (3) the material is subjected
    to the combined action of both attrition and compression.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for corresponding processes.

    39,     for attrition devices in which the material is suspended in a fluid.

    91,     for rotary screen receptacles for tumbling material to comminute it
    by attrition.

    170+,   for attrition devices employing loose grinding bodies.

    276,    for devices in which a conveyor forces material against a
    stationary surface or material bed to effect the comminution.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses for presses not elsewhere provided
    for, and see especially subclasses 104+ for presses having drain means for
    expressed liquids.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 32+ and 326+ for a process or apparatus for
    abrading articles by mutual attrition.


CLS 241/285.1
TXT Comminutor mounting means, frame or other normally stationary
    structure:Apparatus under the class definition in which the claims are
    limited to the means for supporting the comminutor, the stationary frame
    parts of the comminutor, and other parts combined therewith which are
    adapted to remain stationary during the normal operation of the device and
    are not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  See section 11 of the class definition of this class for
    notes to related art and for a statement of the lines followed with other
    classes as to supports, frames, etc.

    (2)     Note.  The combination of a frame with a normally stationary
    comminuting element is included here unless the particular combination is
    provided for above. Where a moving comminuting element is significantly
    included, classification is proper in a subclass above which provides for
    the moving comminuting element.  Combinations limited to a comminuting
    element and its immediate supporting structure, where no reference to
    significant frame structure is included, are classified below as elements
    in subclasses 291+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46.014+,        for a garbage disposal housing.

    65+,    for a frame or other stationary comminutor part provided with means
    (e.g., a heating jacket) to change the temperature of the material.

    83+,    for a frame for mounting a comminuting element having openings.

    226,    for a frame having attached means for retaining material on a
    rotary surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 27+ for a residual
    building structure combined with an article or article support and
    subclasses 648.1+ for a three-dimensional openwork frame, tower, etc.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 637+ for a machinery support of general
    application.

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 428+ for a support for a bearing.


CLS 241/285.2
TXT Removable or displaceable housing section:
    Apparatus under subclass 285.1 including a portion for encasing the
    comminuting structure which is intended to (a) be readily detached from the
    remainder thereof or (b) be repositioned relative to the remainder thereof.


CLS 241/285.3
TXT Pivoted housing section:
    Apparatus under subclass 285.2 including a portion for encasing the
    comminuting structure which is intended to be repositioned relative to the
    remainder thereof by movement about an axis.


CLS 241/286
TXT Apparatus under subclass 285.1 in which the frame members are provided with
    means to adjustably or yieldably mount the normally stationary comminuting
    element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for means mounting comminuting elements for release upon overload.

    37,     for automatically controlled means for adjusting the distance
    between cooperating comminuting surfaces.

    46.014+,for the housing of a sink mounted garbage disposal.

    239+,   for comminutors in which a nonrotary surface is mounted so as to be
    adjustable or yieldable relative to a significantly claimed cooperating
    rotary surface.


CLS 241/287
TXT Apparatus under subclass 286 in which the stationary comminuting element is
    pivotally connected to the frame structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89,     for pivotally mounted perforated comminuting elements which
    cooperate with a rotary striking member.

    239,    for pivotally mounted comminuting elements in combination with a
    cooperating rotary surface.


CLS 241/288
TXT Apparatus under subclass 287 in which the comminuting element is so pivoted
    to the frame, usually by a universal mounting or its equivalent, as to be
    capable of assuming and maintaining a number of different positions, i.e.,
    by self- adjusting relative to the moving surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 107+ for a
    coupling which accommodates relative displacements between a millstone and
    a vertically oriented shaft.


CLS 241/289
TXT Apparatus under subclass 287 in which the normally stationary member is
    mounted to yield about the pivotal connection as an axis upon the
    application of an abnormal force.

    (1)     Note.  The mounting must be such as will return the comminuting
    element to its original position upon cessation of the abnormal force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for overload release devices for supporting comminuting elements
    for yielding movement but which are not adapted to return the element to
    its original position upon cessation of the force.

    290,    for yieldingly mounted comminuting elements mounted otherwise than
    upon a pivot.


CLS 241/290
TXT Apparatus under subclass 286 in which the normally stationary comminuting
    element is so connected to the frame as to be capable of yielding movement
    upon the application of abnormal force.

    (1)     Note.  The mounting must be such as will return the comminuting
    element to its original position upon the cessation of the abnormal force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for overload release devices for supporting comminuting elements
    for yielding movement but which are not adapted to return the element to
    its original position upon cessation of the force.

    289,    for pivotally mounted yielding comminuting elements.


CLS 241/291
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising single comminuting elements
    not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  Supporting means for the element in combination therewith
    has been included in this group except where such means locates the element
    relative to the frame of the machine or the other comminuting elements.

    (2)     Note.  In all cases where a plurality of cooperating comminuting
    elements are claimed significantly or the driving means of a moving element
    was included, the device was considered to be a comminuting organization
    and was classified as such and excluded from this group.

    (3)     Note.  See section 11 of the class definition of this class for
    notes to art in other classes relating to supports or shaft couplings for
    comminutor elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66+,    for comminuting elements provided with means to modify the
    temperature thereof.

    83+,    for comminuting elements having openings therein to permit the
    discharge of material.

    102,    for comminuting elements deformable by contact with the material.

    179+,   184, 191+, and 195+, for comminuting elements which are considered
    restricted in use to particular organizations and classified therewith.

    235+,   242+ and 260+, for comminuting elements having nonsmooth surface
    characteristics where such elements are claimed significantly in
    combination with cooperating elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, Note particularly the class
    definitions for the classification of other compositions.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 327+ for an earth
    boring bit or bit element.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 79.1+
    for a cutter head or tooth for recovering valuable material or breaking up
    hard material in situ.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, for patents having claims to
    comminuting elements claimed solely in terms of their metal or alloy
    composition, whether or not the alloy is claimed, per se.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 540+ for similar elements which abrade the
    material.


CLS 241/292
TXT Comminuting elements under subclass 291 provided with means attached
    thereto to adjust or alter the distribution of weight about the axis of the
    elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 66+, for machines for testing
    rotor unbalance.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 573, for rotors and
    fly-wheels provided with balancing means.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 107+ for
    coupling which accommodates displacement between a millstone and a
    vertically oriented shaft.


CLS 241/292.1
TXT Apparatus under subclass 291 wherein the comminutor is a knife-like element
    which is perpendicular to an axis of rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282.1+, for similar devices in a rotary comminutor.


CLS 241/293
TXT Comminuting elements under subclass 291 having a generally cylindrical or
    frusto-conical shape and which present a peripheral comminuting surface.

    (1)     Note.  See the notes to subclass 291, for such elements classified
    elsewhere in this class on the basis of special or combined
    characteristics, and see the notes to the definition of subclass 221, for
    references to other classes employing rolls in organizations which change
    the dimensions of the material or its particle size.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235+,   242+ and 260+, for such elements having nonsmooth surface
    characteristics in cooperation with other comminuting elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclass 54, for textile gin rollers.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 155+ for roll type conveying presses not
    elsewhere classified, and see especially subclass 176 for roll pairs.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 541+ for cylindrical abrading elements.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the notes thereunder.


CLS 241/294
TXT Comminuting elements under subclass 293 provided with comminuting surfaces
    formed in a plurality of sections or embodying separable surface elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93,     for cylindrical comminuting elements having apertures with means
    for securing cutting blades thereto.

    191,    for rotors having striking members having the defined
    characteristics.

    298,    for sectional disk-like comminuting elements.


CLS 241/295
TXT Comminuting elements under subclass 294 in which the sections are generally
    annular.

    (1)     Note.  The cleavage planes between the sections are usually normal
    to the axis but may be in the form of a helix or set at an angle to the
    normal plane so long as the sections are generally annular.


CLS 241/296
TXT Comminuting elements under subclass 291 which have comminuting surfaces in
    the general shape of a disk on a radial face.

    (1)     Note.  Most of the patents classified in this subclass are
    concerned with the surface characteristics of the disk, i.e., the millstone
    "dress".

    (2)     Note.  See the notes to subclass 291 for such elements classified
    elsewhere in the class on the basis of special or combined characteristics.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    260+,   for such elements having nonsmooth surface characteristics arranged
    in cooperative relationship with another element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 622 and 631+ for
    rotating radial face food separating means particularly subclass 633 for an
    irregularly shaped radial face.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 155+ for roll type conveying presses not
    elsewhere classified, and see especially subclass 176 for roll pairs.

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 176, for a wood slicing disk.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 230+ for a joint between a hub
    or plate-like member and shaft.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 508 through 520, and 548+, for an abrading
    tool in the form of a disk.

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, subclass 47, for disks used in corn
    shellers.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 107+ for a
    coupling which accommodates displacement between a millstone and a
    vertically oriented shaft.


CLS 241/297
TXT Comminuting elements under subclass 296 provided with comminuting faces on
    both sides.

    (1)     Note.  The plural faces of the elements may either be adapted for
    alternative use (reversible) or for simultaneous use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146,    for organizations embodying such elements in which the plural faces
    are adapted for simultaneous use.


CLS 241/298
TXT Comminuting elements under subclass 296 in which the comminuting face is
    made up of sections or parts, at least one of which is prefabricated, which
    are subsequently assembled to form the comminuting surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92,     for disk-like comminuting elements having apertures therein
    provided with prefabricated assembled sections of parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for joints and
    connections of general utility.


CLS 241/299
TXT Comminuting elements under subclass 291 comprising annular structures which
    present an internal comminuting surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66+,    for such elements provided with temperature modifying means.

    83+,    for such elements provided with openings for the passage of
    comminuted material.

    102,    for such elements provided with a surface deformable by contact
    with the material.

    179+,   for receptacle structure including internal comminuting surface
    features.

    228,    for such elements combined with a cooperating rotary member.

    260+,   for such elements having nonsmooth surface characteristics arranged
    in cooperative relationship with another element.

    278.1,  for such elements combined with means to present to the internal
    face the material to be comminuted.


CLS 241/300
TXT Comminuting elements under subclass 291 in which the wear face or a section
    thereof is provided with means to attach it to a backing member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    197,    for rotary striking members having attached wear members.

    294+,   for sectional or separable surface elements adapted to form a wear
    face for, and be attached to, cylindrical or frusto-conical elements.

    298,    for wear face sections to be applied to disk-like comminuting
    elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for joints and
    connections of general utility.


CLS 241/300.1
TXT Apparatus under subclass 291 wherein the comminuting elements are thin,
    knife-like members; some lie evenly in a plane and others lie unevenly in
    such plane.


CLS 241/301
TXT Apparatus under the class definition not hereinbefore provided for.

    (1)     Note.  For example, in this subclass will be found miscellaneous
    types of comminutors not hereinbefore provided for and combinations of
    feeders with comminutors in which the latter is not claimed with such
    particularity as to form a basis of classification in a preceding subclass.

               CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


    The following subclasses are collections of disclosures pertaining to
    various aspects of the comminuting art which aspects do not form
    appropriate bases for subclasses in the foregoing classification (i.e.,
    subclasses superior hereto in the schedule), wherein original copies of
    patents are placed on basis of proximate function of the apparatus.  These
    subclasses assist a search based on remote function of the apparatus and
    may be of further assistance to the searcher, either as a starting point in
    searching this class or as an indication of further related fields of
    search inside or outside the class.  Thus, there is here provided a second
    access for retrieval of a limited number of types of disclosures.

    (1)     Note.  Disclosures are placed in these subclasses for their value
    as references and as leads to appropriate main or secondary fields of
    search, without regard to their original classification or their claimed
    subject matter.

    (2)     Note.  The disclosure found in the following subclasses are
    examples only of the indicated subject matter, and in no instance do they
    represent the entire extent of the prior art.


CLS 241/600
TXT Apparatus which comminutes fuel and is provided with means to deliver the
    product to a combustion chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101.5,  and other appropriate subclasses involving material handling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 232 for a refuse incinerator or solid fuel
    furnace provided with comminuting means.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, for the combination of a fuel comminutor and a
    furnace or stove.


CLS 241/601
TXT Apparatus which are used to disintegrate lumpy sand or other hard material,
    usually as a reconditioning treatment of previously used material.


CLS 241/602
TXT Apparatus which comminutes and dispenses soap.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing and 222, Dispensing, appropriate subclasses, for
    soap dispensers not provided with a comminutor.


CLS 241/603
TXT Animal powered mill:
    Apparatus in which power is derived from an animal to drive a comminutor.


CLS 241/604
TXT Plural inlets for diverse materials:
    Apparatus in which plural inputs are adapted to feed material of diverse
    characteristics to a comminutor.


CLS 241/605
TXT Hay unbaler:
    Apparatus specifically designed to break apart tightly bundled hay.


CLS 241/606
TXT Medical/surgical waste comminution:
    Apparatus designed to comminute material or a device used in a medical or
    surgical procedure, generally intended for further disposal.


CLS 242/
TTL WINDING, TENSIONING, OR  GUIDING

CLS 242/
TXT

    I       CLASS DEFINITION

    II      NOTES TO CLASS 242 DEFINITION

    III     RELATIONSHIP WITH OTHER CLASSES

    IV      STRUCTURE OF CLASS 242

    I.      CLASS DEFINITION

    Class 242 includes and is limited to:

    A.      A process or apparatus for progressively winding elongated flexible
    material more than 3600 about an axis of a take-up of restricted length, as
    in:

    l.      Unwinding and rewinding an information-bearing carrier associated
    with a nominal work station such as that found in a magnetic
    recorder/player, film projector, or camera;

    2.      Forming an indefinite length of running material in loops to form a
    bundle of coils solely by wrapping or winding the material about a form
    (i.e., exclusive of the use of a die or other shaping device);

    3.      Unidirectional winding and unwinding (i.e., simultaneously winding
    and unwinding material while turning in a single direction);

    4.      Reeling (i.e., repetitively winding and unwinding the same
    material);

    5.      Winding by use of machine or implement for:

    (a)     permanently winding material directly onto a core having distinct
    ends to create a composite article exclusively by winding;

    (b)     winding material, usually strand, in a helical or random manner to
    form a storage coil for subsequent unwinding; or

    (c)     winding material, usually web, in a convolute manner to form a
    storage coil for subsequent unwinding;

    B.      A storage coil formed exclusively by such a winding process or
    apparatus;

    C.      A process or apparatus limited to unwinding material from a storage
    coil;

    D.      A process or apparatus for tensioning (i.e., applying or regulating
    longitudinal stress in a running material of indeterminate or indefinite
    length);

    E.      A process or apparatus for guiding (i.e., establishing or confining
    the path of movement of a running material of indeterminate or indefinite
    length); or

    F.      A subcombination peculiar to winding, unwinding, tensioning, or
    guiding, such as a spool, spindle, mandrel, or dispenser.

    II.     NOTES TO CLASS 242 DEFINITION

    (1)     Note.  A process is placed with the apparatus for its practice.

    (2)     Note.  Subclasses 16 through 43, 46 through 53, 118 through 159,
    163 through 178, and 222 have not been screened for hierarchical priority
    within Class 242, and should be carefully reviewed to assure a complete
    search of the prior art particularly with a search relating to: (a)
    unidirectional winding and unwinding, (b) tension control or brake, (c)
    unwinding machine, (d) coil holder, or (e) guide.

    (3)     Note.  Class 242 provides for a ``coil holder" whose structural
    significance is generally concentric to a coil axis to support wound
    material and includes a spool, spindle, mandrel, dispenser, or container
    with a specific coil support. There is a natural similarity between a coil
    holder, reeling device, winding machine, and unwinding machine.

            For example, a support rack from which a stock material coil is
    unwound, even with a rewinding handle to rewind surplus material, should be
    placed with coil holder because of primary, overall similarity of structure
    and function.

            Similarly, a coil support for dispensing material by simply pulling
    on a free material end is placed with coil holder unless the coil support
    includes additional significant unwinding structure expressly provided for
    as an unwinding machine. Examples of such additional structure provided for
    as an unwinding machine are means for attachment of a material to a
    preceding material, a mobile unwinding station, supply replenishment
    structure, reserve coil storage, a material end separator, a detector,
    indicator, or control, a drive, an unwinding limit, or a specific unwinding
    guide/guard.

    (4)     Note.  Class 242 does not provide for a process or apparatus for:

    (a)     Winding onto articles of indefinite length, such as a hose
    conductor or other elongated member without distinct ends.

    (b)     Winding of a line having a detachable load except when placement or
    storage of the line in a coiled state clearly establishes a precedent to
    Class 242 as in the case of: (1) a fishing reel, seatbelt reel, or similar
    reeling device, and (2) a component of a reeling device such as a drum,
    material distributing guide, etc.

    (c)     Unwinding combined with cutting, tearing, perforating, etc.

    (5)     Note.  A tensioner or guide claimed in terms of a composition of
    material or treatment with no significant tensioner or guide structure will
    be classified with the appropriate material or material treatment class.

    III.    RELATIONSHIP WITH OTHER CLASSES

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, for a specified plumbing
    fixture that may be combined with winding or reeling structure, for
    example, in subclasses:

    (a)     243.1 for a rolled package of toilet seat covers;

    (b)     300.1 and 244.1+ for a dispenser of toilet tissue or seat covers
    combined with a flush closet; and

    (c)     502 for a pool accessory having a specific rolled pool cover.

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 151+ for a winding, unwinding, or reeling
    device for positioning running material with respect to a specified fluid
    treatment process or apparatus.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, for a winding,
    unwinding, or reeling device combined with a specified brush or other
    cleaning device designed to clean material as it is  wound or unwound
    (e.g., subclasses 256.5+ and digest 13).

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, coreless winding of a group of
    textile fibers prior to the formation of the fibers into a twisted strand,
    in contrast with Class 242, which provides for winding such a fiber around
    a spindle or spool. Particularly note subclasses:

    (a)     149 for depositing a specific sliver (strand of loose, untwisted
    fibers) onto an article or facsimile article, and

    (b)     159 for depositing a specified sliver into an open can.

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., for a specified clasp combined with
    a coiled tethering line in subclasses 3+ (e.g., a tethered pen), and
    subclasses 115+ for a fixture for holding cord or rope.

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclasses 71+ for cloth finishing that
    may include a guide structure.

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, for textile operations that may include
    or be analogous to winding, tensioning, or guiding, particularly subclasses:

    (a)     141 for a specific textile fabric splicer;

    (b)     176 for winding or unwinding a warp thread sheet (group of parallel
    threads);

    (c)     194 for tensioning combined with warp preparation or handling; and

    (d)     195 for traversing (distributing) combined with warp preparation.

    29,     Metal Working, which may combine winding, tensioning, or guiding of
    elongated flexible material with additional manufacturing such as shaping
    or assembly, particularly subclasses:

    (a)     25.41+ for making a condenser that may include winding or unwinding;

    (b)     452 for prestressing or tensioning a static or running filament or
    strand in a manufacturing operation;

    (c)     596, 598, 605, and 618 for making an electrical device that
    includes a manufacturing operation in addition to winding;

    (d)     732+ for motor/generator winding apparatus combined with additional
    manufacturing apparatus;

    (e)     780 for assembly of parts to running length of a workpiece by
    orbital member, which may include wrapping;

    (f)     806 for assembly apparatus for a film or tape cartridge; and

    (g)     894 for a process for making a wheellike element, which may be
    analogous to formation of a spool or winding drum.

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 127 for a twine guide combined with a specified
    cutter.

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, for instruments that may include reeling
    apparatus as a component of a specifically claimed geometrical instrument
    such as a measuring tape. Class 242 provides for a nominal recitation of
    elongated geometrical instruments such as a tape, line, or typical display.
    Note particularly subclasses 393, 413+, 713+, 754, and 761+ for a reeling
    device combined with a specific straight edge cord (chalk line) or flexible
    distance measuring element (e.g., measuring tape).

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 117, 118,
    and 153, which may include a reeling device or guide for handling strand or
    web subjected to a specified Class 34 art process or apparatus.

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, particularly subclass 102.21 for a
    winding device using supply and take-up spools between which cloth is
    stretched (e.g., to smooth fabric quilting).

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, particularly subclasses 116,
    117, 347, 348, 385+, 470+, 483, 514+, 518+, and 529 for an
    unwinding/rewinding or reeling device combined with a specific register,
    file, or changing exhibitor. Specifying either a detail of the exhibited
    medium, or a structure to display or project the medium (e.g., light
    source, mirror, etc.), justifies placement in Class 40; however, a
    specified intended use will not bar placement in Class 242.  Subclasses
    341+ for a copyholder where the copy is advanced relative to a static guide
    by manual force applied directly to the copy, or to guide or advance
    material relative to a viewing locus; or  an indicator (e.g., line guide or
    pointer) relative to the copy and a support therefor.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, for a process and
    apparatus particularly designed for capturing fish that may involve a
    winding or guiding device as a component, particularly subclasses:

    (a)     8, for net handling apparatus;

    (b)     20, 21, 25, 26.1, 42.28+, and 57.3, for a reeling device combined
    with specified apparatus useful in capturing fish (e.g., an angling rod,
    ``downrigger", or ``trotline" hook holder); and

    (c)     24, for a line guide mounted on a specified angling rod.

            Placement in Class 43 generally requires that the winding,
    tensioning, or guiding device be specifically limited to fishing, trapping,
    etc. For example, a ``downrigger" (trolling depth device) can be properly
    considered a reeling apparatus with a guide boom to position the line until
    line-carried equipment, a boat mounting, bait positioning, measuring, or
    sampling equipment is specified in a claim.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), particularly subclass 108 for
    a device for unwinding strand, web, or connected sections specified as a
    building component material. However, Class 242 can accept either: (a)
    winding or unwinding material used in preliminary fabrication of a building
    component where the material is defined as a typical elongated material, or
    (b) prestressing a pipe or vessel by simply wrapping a tensioned cable
    around a body to reinforce same.

    53,     Package Making, particularly subclasses 430 and 118+ for winding
    package contents, and subclasses 409, 587, 588, and 203+ for forming or
    covering a package that may include winding.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, particularly subclasses:

    (a)     58.67+, 71, 78, 92, 98, 99, 303, 305, and 313 for a helical
    winding/unwinding device that additionally provides a twisting or related
    function, and

    (b)     3 through 18 for wrapping elongated material onto an
    indefinite-length core by equipment and/or a process similar to lathe-type
    winding of a short article found in Class 242.

            The fundamental distinction between Class 57 and Class 242 in
    covering or winding articles is that Class 57 provides for winding an
    article (core) of indefinite length or any length with twisting, whereas
    Class 242 winding is limited to an article or core of definite (relatively
    short) length (i.e., with distinct, spaced ends).

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 10.1 for winding combined with a
    specified glass-making operation or subclasses 182.1+ for a fluid support
    means for an article or preform.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, particularly subclasses 126, 130, 146, 151,
    and 158 for a strand control device (e.g., a guide or tensioner), in a
    specified knitting process or apparatus.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 198 for a hollow coil
    holder associated with fluid treatment means.

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses, particularly 135+, 146+,
    183, 288, and 289 for coiling elongated metallic material that additionally
    bends the metal beyond its elastic limit. With respect to winding, Class
    242 and Class 72 contain patents where a material being worked is disclosed
    as being held to a mandrel or core and wound thereon due to the interaction
    of (a) a force rotating the core and (b) a force restraining the material
    to movement along a course substantially tangential to the surface of the
    core or the wound product. A patent disclosing such a force applied to
    metal and claiming use of a deflector closely adjacent to the core will be
    placed originally in Class 72 unless the specification clearly teaches that
    the metal is not deformed beyond its elastic limit. Patents disclosing such
    forces applied to metal, wherein the restraining force is claimed as means,
    remote from the core for retarding movement of the work (tensioning) will
    be placed originally in Class 242 unless the disclosure positively stresses
    deformation of the metal. With respect to unwinding, a patent wherein metal
    is unwound from a coil will be placed originally in Class 72 only if a
    claimed disclosure positively teaches deformation or stress beyond the
    elastic limit, as by the use of a deflector or tensioning means.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, particularly subclasses:

    (a)     22+ for mechanical movements of general application that may be
    appropriate to or a subcombination of a winding/unwinding machine or
    reeling device (e.g., for distributing material being wound);

    (b)     543+ for a general purpose handle;

    (c)     575+ for a pawl and ratchet device of general use.

            Generally, Class 74 provides for a generic gearing arrangement or
    mechanical movement subcombination that can include a component of a
    winding or reeling device, such as a means to index a core or guide of a
    winding or reeling device so long as the actual winding output is not
    specifically required. However, an exception exists for handles and one-way
    devices expressly provided for in Class 242.

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclass 81.4 for a
    spring-biased strop retractor in a specified tool/implement making machine
    or process.

    82,     Turning, particularly subclass 169 for an expandable mandrel for a
    turning lathe that may grip a workpiece in a manner similar to a winding
    machine supporting a take-up mandrel.

    83,     Cutting, particularly subclasses 78+, 102+, 302, 426+, 909, 920+,
    937, 949, and 950 for cutting material unwound from a coiled supply as well
    as cutting in general. Class 83 and related Class 225 take unwinding and
    cutting, severing or breaking, whereas Class 242 takes a similar operation
    accompanied by winding.

    84,     Music, particularly subclasses 122+, 132, 133, and 150 for a
    winding/unwinding device combined with specific music technology (e.g.,
    particular sheet structure or tracking board).

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, subclasses 31 and 59
    for a winding device or tensioning means combined with specific Class 87
    technology.

    100,    Presses, particularly subclasses 12, 13+, 76, and 79 for a
    specified press that may include either: (a) applying a binder or covering
    subject to be wrapped, tensioned, or guided, or (b) utilizing a binder or
    cover from a supply that can be coiled.

    101,    Printing, for convolute winding or unwinding combined with
    structure peculiar to printing (e.g., a printer head or antismut device).

    111,    Planting, subclasses 44 and 45 for a reeling device used with a
    special line adapted to actuate a planting drill seeder at selected
    intervals.

    112,    Sewing, for winding, tensioning, or guiding combined with a
    specified sewing process or apparatus; particularly subclasses 136+ for a
    work manipulating guide, subclasses 254+ for thread tensioning, subclasses
    261 for a guard, subclasses 279 for bobbin winding, or subclasses 302 for a
    thread guiding or handling means.

    114,    Ships, subclass 254 for a line storage reel for a towing cable in
    ship structure.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, particularly subclass 305 for a specific
    alarm or indicator without specified detail of a winding, unwinding,
    tensioning, or guiding structure.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 33 for tensioning, and subclasses 229
    and 235 for winding/unwinding combined with a specified coating means.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 794 and 796 for a reeling device for a
    specific animal tethering line, collar, harness, or the like.

    137,    Fluid Handling, particularly subclasses 355.16+ for a hose reel
    combined with a specified connection between a fluid supply and a hose.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, appropriate subclasses for details of
    pipe structure that may bear upon a winding method or apparatus by which
    the pipe was made.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, for a cloth-weaving process or apparatus,
    particularly subclasses:

    (a)     200, 201, and 212+ for a tension-regulating means to control the
    weft (filling or transverse yarn of a woven fabric;

    (b)     304+ for a fabric take-up that may include winding.

    140,    Wireworking, for a process or apparatus for operating on wire
    usually involving by disclosure bending the wire beyond its elastic limit,
    particularly subclasses 71.5, 92.1, 92.2, and 124 for winding material,
    usually wire, disclosed as being wound on an intermediate form for
    subsequent removal as a convolution or bundle of convolutions to form an
    article (e.g., stator, armature, or light filament). However, when winding
    into a storage coil from which the wire is to be subsequently unwound it is
    necessary that a claim specify that the wire is bent beyond its elastic
    limit or subject to some other wireworking action.

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 14 for apparatus for making a spool from wood
    or similar material, and subclass 268 for a coiling former for wood bending.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, for: (a)
    winding an article such as a ball or pipe claimed in combination with the
    use of a bonding agent, and (b) bonding the ends of material together to
    provide a continuous material that may be used in a winding or unwinding
    process in general. However, Class 242 provides for: (a) winding similar
    articles even those disclosed with bonding so long as the bonding is
    unclaimed, and (b) joining ends of unwinding material together including
    joining by bonding when such joining is claimed in combination with
    manipulation of an expiring or fresh supply coil. Note particularly,
    subclasses:

    (a)     51+ for a process of covering an electrical conductor;

    (b)     143+ for a process of helically winding and bonding a wire to
    reinforce a flexible tube;

    (c)     169+ for a process of winding and bonding a stressed web into a
    laminae;

    (d)     180+ for a process of winding and bonding a filamentary material to
    form an article;

    (e)     184+ for a process of winding and bonding a web or sheet;

    (f)     405.1+ for apparatus for bonding combined with feeding;

    (g)     422 for apparatus for winding tire bead;

    (h)     425+ for apparatus for progressive helical winding material
    combined with bonding;

    (i)     443+ for winding or wrapping apparatus used to wind and bond
    material to articles (e.g., balls);

    (j)     504+ for apparatus for end-to-end splicing of web materials.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, particularly
    subclasses 55, 120+, 170+, and 238+, especially subclasses 252, 263, 266,
    307, 309, 313+, 319+, and 383+ for winding and unwinding to position
    specified retractable closure structure or related panels.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 118+ and 283+ for a
    process using interfelted fibers in a liquid suspension to form a web wound
    or wrapped upon itself.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 42 for guide or feeding structure combined
    with a specified recorder or printer of a telegraph system.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 7.5 for a vehicle-mounted towing winch,
    and subclasses 268+ for a reeling device for a seatbelt or harness combined
    with a controller that is a component of a motor vehicle (e.g., an ignition
    switch).

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, particularly subclasses 73+,
    231+, and 237 for a reeling device for positioning a specified body harness
    or supple escape device (e.g., a rope ladder), for use as a fire escape
    frequently combined with an unwinding control or brake. However, the
    reeling devices found here are generally of the type provided for in a
    Class 254 hoist because they accept a load.

    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, and Animal Powered, subclasses 27+ for a
    weight motor and subclasses 37+ for a spring motor as a subcombination or
    of general use.

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclasses 254+ for a winding or traction drum in combination with elevator
    structure.

    188,    Brakes, for details of a brake, per se, or in generalized
    combinations, particularly subclasses 65.1+ for a brake specifically
    adapted to completely halt the movement of a strand, and 82.1+ for a
    one-way brake.

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, subclasses 12+ and 91 for a
    reeling device combined with a windable conductor and means providing
    electrical connection through the conductor to a vehicle.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, for a detail of a power-stop,
    clutch-brake combination, or clutch, per se, or in general use.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 813+ for an endless belt
    conveyor tensioner.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, particularly subclasses:

    (a)     61.13+ for a specific switch designed for operation in response to
    a condition in either a running length of material or a spool or guide
    associated with the material;

    (b)     61.58 for a switch designed to be associated with a seatbelt.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, particularly subclasses 387.1+ and
    389+ for a packaged coil of wound material in which the disclosure
    indicates that winding, or more frequently unwinding, occurs with either:
    (a) the coil disassociated from a particular receptacle or package (e.g.,
    box, storage tube, bag, or binder), or (b) a cover, wrapper, band, or other
    packaging material where a pay-out aperture seal is destroyed (irreversibly
    modified) as a prerequisite to winding or unwinding. A coiled material
    enclosed in a box or covering sheath can be provided for in Class 206
    (e.g., subclasses 389+), if the disclosure indicates that either: (a) the
    coil is separated from the receptacle or package for winding or unwinding,
    or (b) the sheath about the coil is punctured to permit unwinding. However,
    Class 242, subclasses 588+ would be more appropriate if either: (a) the
    material is unwound from the coil while in the receptacle, or (b) if a
    formed unwinding aperture indicates a capacity for use of the package
    contents without destroying the package. Note particularly Class 206,
    subclasses 53 through 55, 225 through 227, 389+, and 574.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, particularly subclasses:

    (a)     1.52+ for a power-operated article support adapted to be
    repositioned relative to a loading station, which article support may be
    analogous to a coil or core so positioned in Class 242, subclasses 533+ and
    558+;

    (b)     44 for a rack for a bolt or card of wound material that may be
    removed for unwinding;

    (c)     119.15 for a line tightener that may be analogous to Class 242,
    subclasses 388.2+ for a similarly functioning structure.

    220,    Receptacles, for a receptacle detail that may be analogous to a
    tape or film cartridge provided for in Class 242.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 106+ for a stand, rack, or other
    holder particularly designed to hold a sewing accessory that may include a
    thread spool.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclass 162 for a support
    constructed to be borne by a living being particularly analogous to Class
    242, subclass 404.1.

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, for unwinding with subsequent
    severing, Class 225 severing being limited to tearing or breaking. Class
    242 provides the reverse, namely, severing with subsequent winding. Note
    particularly subclasses 10, 23+, 34+, 51, 53, 56+, 63+, 76, 88, and 106 of
    Class 225.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, may include a nominal
    recitation of a supply or take-up coil (e.g., less than a support for such
    a coil or a cooperative relationship between a tension or exhaust detector
    and reel driving or reel stopping means, etc.), subclasses 168+ for
    orbitally traveling material-engaging surface(s), subclass 195 for means to
    retard material movement or subclass 196.1 for a passive guide combined
    with a material feeder. (Class 242 currently provides for a "strand
    tensioning device" in subclasses 147+, a "strand guide" in subclasses 157+,
    a "tension control or brake" in subclasses 410+, and a "material guide or
    guard" in subclasses 615+ which conflict with Class 226 subclasses 168+ and
    195. Plans are underway to resolve this conflict by making Class 242
    subclasses 157+, 410+, and 615+ the residual location for their respective
    features, with Class 226 subclasses 168+ and 195+ being limited to their
    respective features combined with a material feeder. This has already been
    resolved for Class 226 subclass 196.1.).

    235,    Registers, particularly subclasses 5 and 475+ for an unwinding coil
    (e.g., tape), combined with register structure.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, particularly subclasses
    34, 52, 195+, 736, and 745 for a reeling device combined with a specified
    fluid coupling to a fluid distribution system.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 122 for a reeling device for a seatbelt
    combined with specified aeronautic construction, and subclass 155 for a
    kite with a tether line reel.

    248,    Supports, particularly subclasses 75, 266, 329, 330.1, and 492 for
    a reeling device combined with certain specified supports (e.g., a support
    for a hose, shade rod, cord spool, or picture or mirror).

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 178+ and 184+ for expandable cores in a
    molding process or apparatus.

    250,    Radiant Energy, for details of items and components used in radiant
    energy apparatus such as a photocell or photocell circuit that may be
    useful in winding, unwinding, or tension controls.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    particularly subclasses 264+ for a hoist or winch provided with a control,
    motor, transmission, brake, clutch, or the like to haul or elevate a
    disconnectable load, and subclasses 389+ for a guide for a load bearing
    cable.

    267,    Spring Devices, for details of a spring, per se, and of general use.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, for details of feeding or aligning
    material that may be appropriate to winding, unwinding or guiding.

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, Dig. 21 for a reeling device used, for
    example, in combination with a tethered ball.

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, particularly subclasses 2.01+ for an expandable
    work grasping device that may be rotatable for purposes other than winding
    material for storage.

    280,    Land Vehicles, particularly subclasses 47.131+ for details of
    wheelbarrow or hand truck structure of general use that may be appropriate
    to supporting reeling structure or servicing winding or unwinding
    equipment, subclass 480.1 for a reeling device to retract a tow line into a
    specified vehicle structure, and subclasses 290 and 807 for a reeling
    device to retract seatbelt or harness combined with specified land vehicle
    structure.

    289,    Knots and Knot Tying, particularly subclasses 13 through 15 for a
    cord holder or guide combined with knot tying apparatus.

    294,    Handling: Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, particularly subclasses
    137+ for details of an article carrier of general use adapted to be gripped
    and carried by hand.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, particularly subclasses 221+ for a cover
    dispenser peculiar to a chair, and 475+ for a reeling device for a seatbelt
    or other restraint incorporated with specified seat structure.

    303,    Fluid-Pressure and Analogous  Brake Systems, for details of brakes
    and speed regulating means of general use.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, for details of
    electrical control systems.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, particularly subclasses
    179+, 254+, and 261+ for details of a wound motor or generator component.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, particularly subclasses 34.6 and
    34.8+ for particular cabinet structure designed for rolled material. A
    cabinet which includes specific housing construction details and is
    adaptable to general use support or containment as well as winding can be
    classified as an original in Class 312.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, particularly subclasses 6 and 7
    for a tension-maintaining system in general use, and subclasses 362+ for an
    electrically controlled brake of general use.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, for details of a measuring
    system using an electrical property that impacts a detector, stop control
    of a winding, unwinding, or tensioning process or apparatus, particularly
    subclasses:

    (a)     207.11+ for length of material measurement;

    (b)     209 for stress in material measurement;

    (c)     546 through 549 for a certain electrical article fault detector;

    (d)     600+ for impedance and related measurement.

    334,    Tuners, particularly subclass 38 for a tuner that includes
    winding/unwinding means, and subclasses 71 and 75 for a tuner detail that
    may impact the process or apparatus used to originally make the tuner by
    winding.

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, particularly subclasses 209+ for details of a magnetic
    article frequently made by winding that may impact the process or apparatus
    by which the article was wound.

    336,    Inductor Devices, for details of an inductive article frequently
    made by winding that may impact the process or apparatus by which the
    article is made, particularly subclasses:

    (a)     15, which may include winding or unwinding;

    (b)     192, 199+, 213, 225+, and 234 for coil structure.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, for details of an electrical article
    frequently made by winding that may impact the process or apparatus by
    which the article is made, particularly subclasses:

    (a)     79 for a mechanically variable resistor that includes winding or
    unwinding;

    (b)     296+ for a helical or wound resistor element.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, for details of a signal, alarm, or
    other indicator that may be responsive to a condition significant to
    winding/unwinding or tension, particularly subclasses:

    (a)     665+ for a stress or force actuated indicator;

    (b)     675 and 677 for an indicator actuated in response to web or strand
    movement.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, especially subclasses 877 and
    903 for a particularly specified antenna wound onto a reeling device.

    346,    Recorders, particularly subclasses 24 and 136 for a winding or
    reeling device in combination with a particularly specified

            recorder (e.g., a wound scale moved past a recorder inking pen).

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, for winding and unwinding in combination
    with particularly specified optical or motion picture structure. Class 242
    is established to collect technology centered on refinements of winding,
    unwinding, tensioning, and guiding to discourage parallel development of
    winding/unwinding technology in each of several special technologies based
    on a nominal work station. Accordingly, Class 242 provides for inventions
    in winding and unwinding for motion picture apparatus where an element such
    as a lens, gate, shutter or equivalent motion picture structure is named as
    a part of the winding or reeling path. However, a recitation in a claim of
    either: (a) details of a single motion picture element (e.g., a multilens
    focus station), or (b) a plurality of motion picture elements recited that
    would establish an optical or mechanical cooperation between the plurality
    of elements (e.g., a feed claw fore and aft of a lens) or structure
    completely remote from the film winding path (e.g., a humidifier) will bar
    original placement in Class 242. Search this class, particularly subclasses:

    (a)     72 through 78 for a film cartridge with specified projector related
    construction;

    (b)     124, 128, and 156 for winding/unwinding structure with particular
    projector structure;

    (c)     173 through 175 for film feed structure in a projector;

    (d)     224 for a film guide of a projector;

    (e)     243 for a film support in a projector.

    355,    Photocopying, for material unwinding, feeding or guiding in
    combination with specified photocopy apparatus.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, particularly subclass 238 for a
    detector or stop combined with optical measuring or inspection.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, for winding or
    guiding of a magnetic medium in combination with claimed magnetic recording
    or reproducing apparatus (i.e., transducing head details or closely related
    structure that impact the transducing function unique to this art).  Class
    360 provides for claimed information erasure prevention means (other than a
    nominally recited pin or filler), details of a single recording element
    (e.g., a multitrack transducing head), means to extract a loop of tape from
    the cartridge and transfer the loop about a named transducer head, a
    plurality of elements peculiar to a recorder (e.g., alternately engageable
    record and erase heads), or structure peculiar to a recorder completely
    remote from winding, tensioning, or guiding (e.g., signal volume control).
    Search Class 242 for unwinding/rewinding drives, and subcombinations such
    as cartridge/cassette structure and related perfecting feature; e.g.,
    position retainers, brakes, brake release devices, door structures, pinch
    rollers, guide components, cartridge/cassette housing construction and
    material having a specific composition, hardness, thermal property,
    electrical property, anitstatic property, etc., particularly subclasses:

    324+ for unwinding and rewinding an information convertible carrier;

    335+ for guiding, unwinding, or rewinding a carrier stored in a
    cartridge/cassette.

    362,    Illumination, particularly subclasses 258, 387, and 407 for a
    reeling device for an electrical conductor combined with a light source.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, particularly
    subclasses 469.05, 478.01+, and 479.01 for article handling and
    distribution that may include winding.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 182+ for a sheet
    film cassette combined with a specified X-ray or gamma ray device.

    384,    Bearings, various subclasses for a specified bearing for structure
    that may include a positively claimed winding, unwinding, tensioning, or
    guiding element up to a detail where the element is positively,
    structurally limited to a winding device distinct from a generalized
    spindle, roller or the like.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, subclasses 100+ for a particular filament
    construction of an optical waveguide cable.

    396,    Photography, for particular camera structure and film treating
    apparatus that may include a film support, guide, feed, or wind/unwind
    device. Class 242 provides for such structure in which a camera structure
    or fluid treatment component is nominally recited (e.g., any one of a film
    winding/rewinding means, feeder, guide rails, supply/take-up stations, or
    container), but does not provide for multiple, dissimilar camera structures
    or components or a single, specific component. Search this class,
    subclasses:

    (a)     284+ and 387+ for film winding or feeding in specified camera
    structure;

    (b)     511+ for a detachable or removable filmholder for particular camera
    structure;

    (c)     585, 599+, 612+, 642+, 645, and 649 for winding related structure
    combined with film treating apparatus.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclass 165 for alignment or tensioning a
    photoconductive belt and subclasses 361+  for document handling (e.g.,
    feeding, delivering, or guiding originals or copies within an
    electrophotographic device), particularly subclasses 375 and 384 for
    continuous roll or fanfold.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, for the combination of a typewriter and
    winding/unwinding, tensioning, or guiding component, particularly
    subclasses:

    (a)     242, 512, 609+, and 613+ for mounting means for a spool or roll;

    (b)     248, for a ribbon guide combined with specified typewriter
    structure;

    (c)     578+ for a web feeding mechanism combined with specified typewriter
    structure.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, for winding, tensioning,
    or guiding combined with specified coating means (e.g., subclass 13 for a
    paper dispenser combined with a specific writing implement).

    402,    Binder Device Releasably Engaging Aperture or Notch of Sheet,
    subclass 10 for a reeling device for applying tension to a pliant sheet
    retainer (e.g., a strap).

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 24.6 for a hay bale
    unrolling device, and subclasses 910 through 912 for details of material
    handling apparatus that may be appropriate to core and coil loading.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus, for
    forming an article by molding, particularly subclass 802 for cable or tube
    splicing and Dig. 7 for coil forming.

    427,    Coating Processes, particularly subclass 116 for a process for
    coating a coil or winding and subclasses 171+ for coating combined with
    stretching or tensioning.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, for materials suitable
    for numerous winding, tensioning, and guiding applications. In a situation
    where a guide structure is defined basically in terms of the material from
    which it is composed, the guide should be originally classified in the
    appropriate material class. Note subclasses 694 and 695 for specific
    recording media and Cross-Reference Art Collection 906 relating to a roll
    or coil.

    433,    Dentistry, subclass 78 for a retractable hose in a specified dental
    storage cabinet.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclass 412 for a reel-mounted sheet
    having an erasable surface.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclasses 23+ for a reeling
    device used to tether a specified buoy.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, particularly subclasses 30+ for a
    tethered aircraft that may include a reeling device.

    451,    Abrading, subclass 183 for a reeling apparatus used to draw a
    workpiece to a specified associated abrading station.

    462,    Books, Strip, and Leaves for Manifolding, for strip material
    joining or separating that may be combined with winding, unwinding,
    tensioning, or guiding.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, subclasses 160+ for a slip coupling in general use, and
    numerous subclasses directed to a rotary shaft, support, and connection of
    general use that may be analogous to a winding spindle.

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, subclasses 139+ for a reeling
    device used in combination with a tethered golf ball, subclasses 423+ for a
    practice or training device involving a tethered projectile which may
    include a reeling device, and subclasses 575+ for a tethered projectile
    which may include a reeling device.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses
    47+ for a pulley having expansible rim means or pulleys having alternately
    useable, nestable rims; subclasses 101+ for means for adjusting belt
    tension or for shifting belt, pulley, or guide roll; subclass 140 for a
    belt guide having a surface in sliding contact with belt; or subclasses
    166+ for a friction drive pulley or guide roll.

    492,    Roll or Roller, particularly subclasses 4, 5, 21, and 22+ for a
    roll or roller guide of general use.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, particularly subclasses 297+, 299+, and 303+ for
    winding or wrapping of a specified sheet or web to manufacture a container
    or tube.



    IV.     STRUCTURE OF CLASS 242

            This section lists related subclass groups of Class 242. An
    asterisk denotes a position variation from the actual position in the
    present, interim schedule.

    Subclasses                      Subject

    159 through 178         WOUND STORAGE
                    PACKAGES

    324 through 358.1               UNWINDING AND
                    REWINDING A MA-
                    CHINE CONVERT-
                    IBLE INFORMATION
                    BEARING CARRIER
                    (E.G., MAGNETIC
                    TAPE OR PHOTO-
                    GRAPHIC FILM)

    360 through 363         LOOP FORMING

    364 through 364.3               UNIDIRECTIONAL
                    WINDING AND
                    UNWINDING

    *47.01 through 47.13    Unidirectionally
    mov-                           ing             (cordage) coils

    370                     REELING DEVICE

    223 through 323         Fishing rod reel

    371 through 385.4               Spring-powered reel

    386 through 407.1               General use reel

    410 through 423.2               TENSION CONTROL
                    OR BRAKE

    *147 through 156.2              Strand tension device

    430 through 448.1               COMPOSITE

    470 and 471                     HELICAL OR RAN-
                    DOM WINDING
                    MACHINE

    *16 through 46.8                Spoolers, bobbin or cop
                    winding

    *47, 48 through 53              Cordage winding

    520 through 548.4               CONVOLUTE WIND-
                    ING MACHINE (E.G.,                              FABRIC)

    550 through 566         UNWINDING
                    MACHINE

    570  through  614.1             COIL HOLDER OR
                    SUPPORT

    *118  through  146              Strand spools and
                    holders

    *222                    Card, board, or form

    615  through  615.4             GUIDE OR GUARD

    *157  through  158.5    Strand guide or
                    distributor

    899                     MISCELLANEOUS


CLS 242/16
TXT Machines for winding cordage material, as thread, upon spools or holders
    having flaring heads, the thread traverse varying in the different layers.
    This subclass is limited to winding a single spool.


CLS 242/17
TXT Spoolers for winding a plurality of spools.


CLS 242/18
TXT Inventions not otherwise classifiable for winding cordage material--such as
    thread, twine, cord, rope, etc.--upon a suitable core or holder of the
    bobbin type--that is, holders of circular cross-section, cylindrical or
    cone-shaped and with or without flanges or disk-shaped heads, including
    therefore, bobbins, cop tubes, pins, jack-spools, quills, or like
    structures.  The traverse of the thread is substantially of the same length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    430+,   for winding strand or other material onto a core to form a
    composite article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclasses 190+ for winding material or
    warping beams or rolls, where a sheet of or a plurality of strands, yarn,
    etc., are simultaneously wound side by side on the same beam.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, appropriate subclasses.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, for fluid treatment combined
    with winding operations, and Class 8, Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment
    and Chemical Modification of Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 151+ for
    corresponding manipulative methods.


CLS 242/18.1
TXT Devices under subclass 18 including means for controlling the disposition
    of turns or coils of thread during winding to prevent the piling of
    successive turns upon one another, thus preventing the formation of bands
    or "ribbons" of wound thread in the yarn-package.


CLS 242/19
TXT Cutting devices adapted to or in combination with bobbin and cop winding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     48, 135, and 142, for cutting features or details.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, for thread-cutters of general application.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 86 and 87.

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses for strand cutting devices.


CLS 242/20
TXT Devices not otherwise classifiable adapted for winding the type of bobbins
    employed in sewing-machine shuttles and designed for use upon or in
    connection with sewing-machines.


CLS 242/21
TXT Sewing machine shuttle winders provided with thread-cutters.


CLS 242/22
TXT Sewing machine shuttle winders provided with stop-motion devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28+,    36+ and 49.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclass 186 for means for stopping a
    warp preparing apparatus.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 78+.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclass 157.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 349+.


CLS 242/23
TXT Sewing machine shuttle winders for winding very short or disk-shaped
    bobbins.


CLS 242/24
TXT Sewing machine shuttle thread-winding devices having means in the form of a
    pad, roll, plate, or other presser for compacting or shaping the thread
    upon the bobbin.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34.


CLS 242/25
TXT Winding wire on a bobbin type of holder for storage purposes or for a
    commercial article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for machines or devices for winding magnets, magnet spools, or
    coils.


CLS 242/26
TXT Winding bobbins of the universal or Fiji type--all machines, therefore,
    having means for imparting an incremental or rotary movement to the cop or
    ball at the end of each thread traverse movement or sufficient delay in the
    traverse movement of the thread guide so that the coils of one layer shall
    be laid just outside and parallel with the corresponding coils of the layer
    last wound, crossing the same and binding the coils and the loop at the
    ends firmly down, thus preventing the cop from breaking down and making it
    self-supporting.  In the product the layers are symmetrical, each having
    the same number of coils and each coil being outside of rather than on top
    of the corresponding coil below it or in the last layer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31      and 43, for crisscross winding features.


CLS 242/26.1
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 18 including a rotating cop-tube upon which
    strand material is wound, and a thread-laying guide, which guide and tube
    are reciprocated relatively to each other along the axis of the tube and
    parallel to said axis, whereby the thread is wound on the cop-tube in
    successive layers into a definite form or cop, in which the thread guide is
    associated with a ring-rail.

    (1)     Note.  A ring-rail is a circular trackway on a thread winding
    machine, which rail supports a strand guide or ring for rotation of said
    ring about the axis of the cop-tube.

    (2)     Note.  The relative reciprocation of cop-tube and thread laying
    guide is termed "traverse" in the art.  Usually the thread laying guide is
    the reciprocating element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26.5    and 27+, for other building mechanisms.

    158+,   for traverse mechanism, per se.


CLS 242/26.2
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 26.1 in which the  traverse of the thread laying
    guide is substantially the length of the cop-tube, whereby a cop having
    longitudinal layers is produced.

    (1)     Note.  See (2) Note under subclass 26.1 for the definition of
    "traverse".

    (2)     Note.  The art term known as "warp-wind" is applied to particular
    kind of yarn-package built up by winding successive cylindrical layers of
    strand material on a cop-tube, each layer being parallel to the cop-tube,
    so formed by being wound by a full traverse of a thread guide along the
    length of the cop-tube.  The traverse may be a full traverse for all the
    layers of winding, thus producing a yarn-package of cylindrical shape, or
    the traverse may be reduced in amplitude during a portion of the winding
    operation, thus producing a yarn-package having one or both ends tapered.
    The term is derived from the usage of the yarn-package; that is, the
    threads are laid in the longitudinal direction of the fabric to be woven, a
    plurality of side-by-side longitudinally extending threads forming the
    warp.  Usually, the thread from any one yarn-package, is unwound from the
    periphery of the yarn-package, the thread extending tangentially of the
    package and perpendicular to the axis of the cop-tube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26.5,   for other full-traverse building mechanisms.


CLS 242/26.3
TXT Devices under subclass 26.2 including means for modifying the amplitude or
    placement of the traverse of the thread laying guide as successive layers
    are wound to produce a yarn-package tapered at one or both ends.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26.45,  for means to vary service traverse.

    43.1,   for other means to vary traverse mechanism.


CLS 242/26.4
TXT Mechanisms under subclass 26.1 in which the traverse of the thread laying
    guide is short relative to the length of the cop-tube, and the extent of
    reciprocation of the guide relative to the tube shifts progressively along
    the axis of the cop-tube, whereby a cop is produced having layers of thread
    which are conical with respect to the axis of the tube.

    (1)     Note.  See (2) Note under subclass 26.1 for definition of
    "traverse".

    (2)     Note.  The progressive shift of the extent of traverse is termed
    "gain" in the art.

    (3)     Note.  The art term known as "weft wind" or "filler wind" is
    applied to a particular kind of yarn package, built up by winding
    successive conical layers of strand material on a cop-tube, each layer
    lying at an acute angle relative to the surface of the cop-tube, so formed
    by being wound by a relatively short traverse of a thread guide along part
    of the length of the cop-tube, the traverse progressively moving along the
    full length of the cop-tube as successive conical layers are wound. The
    term is derived from the usage of the yarn-package; that is, the package is
    laced in a shuttle which is reciprocated transversely of the direction of
    fabric to be woven, and in that usage the thread is unwound so as to extend
    from the end of the yarn package longitudinally of the axis of the cop-tube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for other cone wind or weft wind building mechanisms.


CLS 242/26.41
TXT Devices under subclass 26.4 including means for winding a reverse of thread
    on a cop-tube by an initial short traverse of the thread laying guide prior
    to winding the service thread of the yarn-package.

    (1)     Note.  The initial winding formed is termed "bunch" or "reserve
    thread" in the art, and serves 1) as a reserve of thread with which to
    complete the weaving of a weft strand into the fabric after a feeler
    associated with the cooperating loom has detected that the cop-tube is
    nearly empty, and 2) as the mass of thread which cooperates with the feeler
    to determine the nearly-empty condition of the cop-tube.

    (2)     Note.  The full winding of thread built on a cop-tube after the
    bunch has been formed, which full winding comprises the main body of thread
    on the cop-tube, is termed "service wind" or "service thread" in the art.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27.1,   for other bunch building mechanisms.


CLS 242/26.42
TXT Devices under subclass 26.41 in which the initial traverse mechanism is
    operated by cam means supplementary to the mechanism for winding the
    service thread.

    (1)     Note.  See (2) Note under subclass 26.41 for the definition of
    "service thread".


CLS 242/26.43
TXT Devices under subclass 26.41 in which the initial traverse is produced by
    varying the traverse mechanism of the mechanism for winding the service
    thread.

    (1)     Note.  See (2) Note under subclass 26.41 for the definition of
    "service thread".


CLS 242/26.44
TXT Devices under subclass 26.43 including additional means to vary the
    mechanism which effects shifting of the traverse along the axis of the
    cop-tube.

    (1)     Note.  See (2) Note under subclass 26.4 for the definition of
    "gain".


CLS 242/26.45
TXT Devices under subclass 26.4 in which either or both of the traverse and
    gain for the service wind may be modified.

    (1)     Note.  See (2) Note under subclass 26.1 for the definition of
    "traverse".

    (2)     Note.  See (2) Note under subclass 26.4 for the definition of
    "gain".

    (3)     Note.  See (2) Note under subclass 26.41 for the definition of
    "service thread".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26.3,   for other means to vary traverse mechanism.


CLS 242/26.5
TXT Devices under subclass 18 including a rotating cop-tube upon which tube
    strand material is wound, and a strand laying guide reciprocable relatively
    to the tube along the axis of said tube, the tube being formed of a
    substantially cylindrical portion and a frusto-conical portion in which one
    diameter of the frusto-conical portion is equal to the cylinder diameter
    and is joined to the cylinder, the extent of reciprocation of said guide
    being equal to the cylindrical length of said tube, in which the extent of
    reciprocation moves along the axis of the tube in only one direction,
    whereby a yarn-package having one frusto-conical end is formed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26.2+,  for other traverse mechanism and means to vary said mechanism.


CLS 242/27
TXT Winding thread, yarn, etc., in conical layers, and thereby gradually
    building up a cop, ball, or mass of thread or yarn upon a suitable cop
    tube, shell, or spindle or other core or holder; also devices which wind
    both cylindrical and conical layers. Winding devices to be classifiable
    under "cone wind" must have mechanism for producing a relative longitudinal
    progressive movement between the cop or thread mass and the thread traverse
    guide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26.1+,  for cop building features.


CLS 242/27.1
TXT Devices under subclass 27 including means for winding a reserve of thread
    on a cop-tube by an initial short traverse of the thread laying guide prior
    to winding the service thread of the yarn-package.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note under subclass 26.41 for the definition of
    "bunch".

    (2)     Note.  See (2) Note under subclass 26.41 for the definition of
    "service thread".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26.41,  for other bunch winders in ring-rail type of building mechanisms.


CLS 242/28
TXT Detectors and stops for cone-winding devices comprise (1) mechanism for
    detecting imperfections in the thread or undue tension thereof in winding;
    (2) mechanism for stopping the machine upon such detection or tension; (3)
    stop mechanism operating upon stoppage, breakage, exhaustion, etc., of the
    thread or for indicating such failure in the thread supply; and (4) stop
    mechanism operating when the winding is completed. This subclass contains
    only detectors or stop motions of the first two groups, not otherwise
    classifiable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36+     and 49, for similar devices in bobbin or cordage winding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclass 186, for means for stopping a
    warp preparing apparatus.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 78+.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclass 157.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 349+.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclass 10 for devices
    which sense the condition of material of indeterminate length being
    advanced, and make appropriate adjustment, where winding structure is not
    claimed.


CLS 242/29
TXT Devices for stopping the cone-winding of the thread governed by and
    operating upon breakage, undue tension, stoppage or exhaustion of the
    thread supply.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclass 11 for similar
    devices, where winding is not claimed.


CLS 242/30
TXT Devices for automatically stopping the winding of the cop or cone mass when
    fully wound or when a predetermined amount has been wound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclass 26 for
    detectors that sense accumulation of material of indeterminate length,
    where winding is not claimed.


CLS 242/31
TXT Devices for winding crossed spiral coils by a quick traverse movement of
    the thread guide or of the core upon which the cop is wound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for bobbin winders producing a fixed number of coils per layer.

    43+,    for traversing mechanism.

    158+,   for traversing mechanism, per se.


CLS 242/32
TXT Devices for cone-winding a plurality of cops or bobbins.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35.5,   for multiple winding features.


CLS 242/34
TXT Devices usually provided with cones or rollers for pressing and shaping the
    thread on or about the cone as it is wound.


CLS 242/35
TXT Spindles, mounting thereof, driving, and other features pertaining thereto,
    adapted for use in cone-winding machines and not classifiable in spinning.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 130+.

    82,     Turning, subclass 147.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 206+.

    384,    Bearings, appropriate subclasses for spindle radial and/or thrust
    bearing.


CLS 242/35.5
TXT Machines adapted to wind a plurality of bobbins simultaneously and not
    provided for in the preceding subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for winding devices capable of producing simultaneously a plurality
    of cone wound packages.


CLS 242/35.6
TXT Means operable in connection with winding machines, brought into operation
    by failure of the running thread, to unite a reserve thread to the last end
    of the thread on the winding bobbin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles: Manufacturing, subclass 193, for warp beaming apparatus
    having means to supply new cops for those which are exhausted and to tie
    the thread ends together.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclass 34, for
    reserve thread uniting means combined with twisting or twining
    instrumentalities.

    289,    Knots and Knot Tying.


CLS 242/36
TXT This subclass is miscellaneous and includes only those bobbin-winding
    devices not otherwise classifiable which detect the presence of knots,
    slubs, splits, accumulations of gum, lint, waste, or other imperfections or
    inequalities in the thread being wound or undue tension thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, the definition and search-card data under
    subclass 28.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses .25+ for stop motions
    adapted to sever coilers.

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclass 225 for slub or knot detectors
    that halt the operation of the clearing apparatus, and subclasses 227 and
    228 for clearing apparatus employing sensing means to actuate the same.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 80+.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclass 10 for devices
    which sense the condition of material of indeterminate length being
    advanced, and make appropriate adjustment where winding structure is not
    claimed.


CLS 242/37
TXT Devices for stopping the winding upon the breakage or exhaustion of thread
    or for indicating such failure in the thread supply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     for similar devices for cone winders.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclass 11 for similar
    devices, where winding is not claimed.


CLS 242/38
TXT Detectors and stops controlled by the breaking or exhaustion of the thread
    for machines operating to wind a plurality of threads upon a single bobbin
    by ordinary winding methods, there being no twisting of the threads
    together, as in spinning machines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 80+ for stop
    motions of spinning doublers.


CLS 242/39
TXT Stop devices for arresting the winding when the bobbin is fully wound or
    loaded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for similar devices employed in cone-winding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclass 26 for
    detectors that sense accumulation of material of indeterminate length,
    where winding structure is not claimed.


CLS 242/40
TXT Load-stop devices adapted to machines for winding a plurality of threads
    upon a single bobbin, but without twisting them.


CLS 242/41
TXT Bobbin-winding machines having automatic devices for ejecting the bobbin
    when wound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclass 158.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 52+ for
    twisting machines provided with package doffing means and/or empty package
    support supplying means.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 224+ and 336+.


CLS 242/42
TXT Devices for winding a plurality of threads upon a single bobbin without the
    twisting characteristic of spinning machines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclass 172 for the method of and
    apparatus for winding a sheet of warp threads on a reel or beam.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, appropriate subclasses.


CLS 242/43
TXT Bobbin-winding machines in which the thread layer or guide has a quick
    traverse movement relative and longitudinal to the bobbin or in which the
    bobbin is reciprocated relatively to the thread guide, so as to lay the
    thread on the bobbin in crossing spirals, producing a cross or crisscross
    wind.  In this subclass the number of convolutions, coils, or spirals
    varies somewhat in the different layers, usually decreasing in number
    toward the periphery.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for bobbin winders producing a fixed number of coils per layer, and
    31.


CLS 242/43.1
TXT Devices under subclass 43 including means for modifying the amplitude or
    placement of the thread laying guide as successive layers are wound to
    produce a yarn-package tapered at one or both ends.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26.3,   for other means to vary traverse mechanism.

    26.45,  for means to vary service traverse mechanism.

    31,     for other quick-traverse varying means.


CLS 242/43.2
TXT Devices under subclass 43 wherein the strand is guided by engaging a cam
    groove in a drum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for other drum guide means.


CLS 242/46
TXT Devices, usually hand or foot operated, for lifting the spool or bobbin
    from winding relation with the operating mechanism, usually comprising a
    rotating drum, spindle or seat, which drives the spool by frictional
    contact.


CLS 242/46.2
TXT Thread receivers and driving means therefor, the connection between the
    same being separable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130+.


CLS 242/46.21
TXT Devices under subclass 46.2 wherein the bobbin or cop is altered so as to
    be engaged by the driving means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118.3+  and 130+, for cop-tubes, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclass 92 for other
    driving connections.


CLS 242/46.3
TXT Driving connections specially adapted for use with cop tubes of paper or
    similar material.


CLS 242/46.4
TXT Driving connections including separate means to connect and disconnect the
    same.


CLS 242/46.5
TXT Clutch operator centrifugally controlled by the speed of the driving means.


CLS 242/46.6
TXT Connection of the head and socket type in which the head is resilient.

    (1)     Note.  Compare Class 24, Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses
    614+.


CLS 242/46.7
TXT Connection of the head and socket type in which the socket is resilient.

    (1)     Note.  Compare Class 24, Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses
    662+.


CLS 242/46.8
TXT Resiliency of the socket produced by an annular coil spring.

    (1)     Note.  Compare Class 24, Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass
    678.


CLS 242/47
TXT Devices for winding rope, cord, thread, yarn, or other strand material not
    otherwise classifiable and excluding wire-winding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for wire-winding.

    430+,   for winding of material including wire onto a core to form an
    article.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, appropriate subclasses
    for rope or cable making machines or devices operating to twist or lay up
    the strands into a rope or cord and wind it.


CLS 242/47.01
TXT Device under subclass 47 including a support for a rotatable coil of wound
    strand material, in which the direction of rotation of the coil during
    unwinding is the same as the direction during winding.

    (1)     Note.  The material may be wound onto the reel at the time it is
    being removed or at different times.

    (2)     Note.  The coils of material usually travel axially along a
    material-contacting surface from a point at which the coils are formed to
    another point at which they are unwound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    appropriate subclasses for a device in which material is wrapped about a
    pulling surface to increase friction between the material and the surface.


CLS 242/47.02
TXT Device under subclass 47.01 having means to prevent liquids or gases
    entrained in or applied to the material from entering the support-mounting
    and/or actuating mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles: Manufacturing, subclasses 59+ for thread finishing
    including fluid treatment.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    fluid treating apparatus for textiles.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus for cleaning and contacting solid materials with liquids.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 345+ for a seal between relatively movable parts (i.e.,
    a dynamic seal) or subclass 906 for a seal for a part having indefinite
    length (e.g., strip, sheet, etc.).


CLS 242/47.03
TXT Device under subclass 47.01 combined with means to convey a new portion of
    material through or into the device.

    (1)     Note.  These devices may cooperate with the lead portion of the
    material, or they may cut a waste portion of the material to form a lead
    portion so that the material may be rethreaded through or into the device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclass 306 for
    combined twisting and waste or loose end collecting means and subclass 353
    for strand catching means.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclass 89, for a
    device having means movable to permit manual loading.


CLS 242/47.04
TXT Device under subclass 47.01 including a first rotatable set of
    substantially rigid elongated elements wherein each element has a material
    contacting face; said first set cooperating with a second rotatable set of
    substantially rigid elongated elements, also having material contacting
    faces and being substantially coaxial with the first set in such a way that
    the elongated elements of the first set pass between the elongated elements
    of the second set as each set rotates about its own axis, in which device
    the relative movement of the material contacting faces of the first set
    with respect to the material contacting faces of the second set serves to
    advance material axially therealong.

    (1)     Note.  A set, as used herein, is a plurality of substantially rigid
    bars, rods, or other elongated elements operating together in a single path
    of movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles: Manufacturing, subclasses 71.3+ for feeding combined with
    stretching.


CLS 242/47.05
TXT Device under subclass 47.04 wherein all of the elongated elements of each
    of the respective sets is maintained in the same special relationship to
    each of the other elements in the same set.


CLS 242/47.06
TXT Device under subclass 47.04 wherein the elements of one of the sets have
    angular movement about a line parallel to the axis about which the set
    rotates.


CLS 242/47.07
TXT Device under subclass 47.04 wherein the elements of at least one of the
    sets moves toward and away from the axis of rotation autonomously of the
    other elements of the same set.


CLS 242/47.08
TXT Device under subclass 47.01 wherein the strand material is wound around at
    least two coil supporting means which rotate about individual, spaced-apart
    axes.


CLS 242/47.09
TXT Device under subclass 47.08 wherein a single coil of the material lies
    along the faces of at least two of the drums.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 64+ for structure wherein plural turns of a single transmission
    belt extend about a common axis.


CLS 242/47.1
TXT Device under subclass 47.09 wherein all of the individual axes of the drums
    also revolve simultaneously about an axis common to all of the axes.


CLS 242/47.11
TXT Device under subclass 47.1 wherein the face of at least one of the drums is
    modified to comprise a screw-thread like configuration, whereby the
    configuration, due to the rotation of the drum about its axis, acts to
    progress the coils axially of the drum.


CLS 242/47.12
TXT Device under subclass 47.01 having material engaging means to move the
    coils along the support in a path parallel to the axis of rotation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclasses   71.3+  for feeding combined
    with stretching which feeding may include lateral traversing of material to
    effect stretching.


CLS 242/47.13
TXT Device under subclass 47.12 wherein the material traverser is a part which
    moves parallel to the axis of rotation of the material contacting surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47.04,  for similar apparatus where parts of the material contacting
    surface interdigitate.


CLS 242/47.5
TXT Devices for storing rope, cord, thread, yarn or other strand material on
    sheaves, the sheaves being shiftable toward each other but normally urged
    apart and the strand material being wound around the several sheaves.


CLS 242/48
TXT Cordage-winding apparatus provided with cutting devices and all cutters
    therefor, except those adapted for sheet or strip winding devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for cutters associated with bobbin or cone winders.

    135     and 142, for cutters associated with spool or twine holders.


CLS 242/49
TXT Detector and stop devices not otherwise classifiable for cordage-winding
    machines.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     28  and 36.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 125 for stops, per se.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material, especially
    subclass 10 for automatically controlled feeders.


CLS 242/50
TXT Winding cordage upon cards, boards, or other forms or cores, except those
    of the bobbin, spool, or reel type or forms and frames for winding armature
    coils or wire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222,    for a card, board or form upon which material is wound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    140,    Wireworking, subclasses 92.1+.


CLS 242/51
TXT Winding heddle or seine needles.


CLS 242/52
TXT Tatting-shuttle winders or winding.


CLS 242/53
TXT Winding thread or yarn into hanks or skeins, but excluding devices that
    wrap or interlace the strands of the wound hank or skein to form a special
    package.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for devices for merely holding hanks and skeins and involving other
    than reel structures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclass 289 for the packaging of
    threads, strands and the like in a manner not provided for elsewhere.

    53,     Package Making, appropriate subclasses for methods of and apparatus
    for encompassing or encasing goods or materials with a separate cover or
    band which serves as means for identifying, protecting or unit handling the
    goods or materials, particularly subclasses 582+ for banding, and see (40)
    Note and (41) Note to the class definition of that class (53) for other
    banding and binding.


CLS 242/118
TXT Miscellaneous bobbins, cop tubes, or other cores upon which silk, thread,
    cord, twine, wire, or other cordage may be wound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159+,   for a wound strand package including a core.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, particularly subclasses 189
    and 198 for wound package holders permitting axial fluid access.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 389+.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 220+, appropriate subclasses, among these
    include spools usually of magnetic material to support coils for
    electromagnets of the lifting, traction and related types.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 185 and 208 for coil supports for
    plural coil and single coil windings respectively, for inductive devices.
    In addition, appropriate subclasses of Class 336 include supports of
    magnetic material for inductive devices.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 321 for resistance element cores and
    frames.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclass 583.4 for typewriter ribbon spools.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the notes thereunder.


CLS 242/118.1
TXT Cop-tubes under subclass 118 in which the periphery of the tube is
    perforated or is otherwise provided with substantial open areas in the tube
    circumference along its length.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing:  Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclass 117 for other perforated tubes.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 198 for other
    perforated tubes.


CLS 242/118.11
TXT Devices under subclass 118.1 in which the periphery is also yieldable
    whereby the tube may be circumferentially compressed.


CLS 242/118.2
TXT Cop-tubes under subclass 118 in which the periphery of the tube is
    yieldable whereby the tube may be circumferentially compressed.


CLS 242/118.3
TXT Winding cores under subclass 118 including a tubular stem, shell or the
    like, adapted to be supported on a spindle or other holder and on which
    cops or masses of thread are wound.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this and indented subclasses are stems having no
    flanges and stems having one flange.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46.21,  for bobbins or cops modified for driving thereof.

    118.4+, for tubes having two flanges.


CLS 242/118.31
TXT Winding cores under subclass 118.3 including means to strengthen the tube
    structurally.


CLS 242/118.32
TXT Winding cores under subclass 118.3 including claimed recitation of the
    material or substance of which the core or head is manufactured.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118.7,  for material of which two-headed spools are made.


CLS 242/118.4
TXT Winding cores under subclass 118 including two flanges or rims, one such
    flange at each end of the tube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118.3+, for single-headed tubes.


CLS 242/118.41
TXT Winding cores under subclass 118.4 including at least two flanged spools
    secured together flange-to-flange or end-to-end for common rotation about
    the axis of the joined spool.


CLS 242/118.5
TXT Devices under subclass 118.4 which are in the form of warp beams having
    heads or flanges, one at each end of said beam, and including means to
    adjustably position at least one of said flanges longitudinally along the
    beam.


CLS 242/118.6
TXT Devices under subclass 118.4 in which the heads or flanges are secured to
    the tube.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are devices in which the securing means
    include threaded bolts.


CLS 242/118.61
TXT Devices under subclass 118.6 in which each flange includes at least one
    axial projection having a diameter equal to or less than the internal
    diameter of the tube, wherein the flange projection is thrust into the end
    of the tube.

    (1)     Note.  The axial projection may be integral with or secured to the
    flange.


CLS 242/118.62
TXT Devices under subclass 118.61 in which the flange projection and the end of
    the cop-tube are provided with complementary screw threads.


CLS 242/118.7
TXT Devices under subclass 118.4 including claimed recitation of the material
    or substance of which the core or heads is manufactured.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118.32, for material of which cop-tubes are made.


CLS 242/118.8
TXT Devices under 118.7 in which the core and/or heads are manufactured using
    thin or sheet-like material.


CLS 242/125
TXT Bobbins or spools provided with devices for holding or securing the end of
    the thread or for guiding it during unwinding and not otherwise
    classifiable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS,  SUBCLASS:

    579+,   for devices adapted to hold the inner ends of webs to winding
    cores, drums, or reels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 389+.

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, subclasses 63+ for spools having a
    thread cutter attachment which also acts to clamp the thread.


CLS 242/125.1
TXT Devices under subclass 125 including means to fasten the end of a strand to
    the spool.


CLS 242/125.2
TXT Devices under subclass 125.1 in which the end fastened is the outer end of
    the wound strand.


CLS 242/125.3
TXT Devices under subclass 125.2 which are attached to a spool and include a
    guide to permit unwinding of the strand.


CLS 242/127
TXT Devices for holding skeins.  Usually a plurality of rolls or bobbins or
    equivalent devices that hold the skein in longitudinally extended or skein
    form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 388 for a nonspooled
    filamentary package.


CLS 242/128
TXT Devices having revoluble guides or fliers rotated by pulling on the thread,
    cord, rope, etc., thereby unwinding it from the spool, bobbin, or reel,
    which is usually stationary or non-revoluble.


CLS 242/129
TXT Devices or forms other than reels, bobbins, spool structures, or
    twine-holders for holding a coil upon which the material may be wound or
    from which it may be unwound.


CLS 242/129.1
TXT Devices under the class definition which retract a free end of a strand or
    web, so as to present the free end in position for use.


CLS 242/129.2
TXT Devices under subclass 129.1 in which the strand or web is guided for
    retraction of its free end by an element, which element is connected to a
    swingable arm.


CLS 242/129.3
TXT Devices under subclass 129.1 in which the strand or web is unwound from a
    spool or reel rotating in an unwinding direction, and including means to
    reverse the direction of rotation of the spool or reel.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are devices in which the strand or web
    material is wound around a roller auxiliary to the supply spool, which
    roller is located intermediate the supply spool and the free end of said
    material and rotates in one direction as said material is taken from the
    supply spool, and including means for reversing the direction of said
    roller.


CLS 242/129.4
TXT Devices under subclass 129.1 in which the strand or web is threaded through
    a guide means, and including a weight connected to move said guide.


CLS 242/129.5
TXT Devices under the class definition for supporting or holding a strand
    package of any type.


CLS 242/129.51
TXT Devices under subclass 129.5 in which a spool is supported at its ends by
    axially aligned, opposite stub shafts separated from each other and
    connected to arms secured to a base.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are devices in which the stub shafts are
    connected to a rod which rod extends through the spool.


CLS 242/129.53
TXT Devices under subclass 129.51 which include a guide means for the strand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    129.62 and 129.72, for other strand guides.


CLS 242/129.6
TXT Devices under subclass 129.5 in which a spool is rotatable on or with a
    shaft, which shaft is secured or journaled at both ends in a base.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129.7,  for other spindles with flanges thereon.


CLS 242/129.62
TXT Devices under subclass 129.6 which include a guide means for the strand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    129.53 and 129.72, for other strand guides.


CLS 242/129.7
TXT Devices under subclass 129.5 in which a bobbin is supported on a
    spindle-shaft, and including means connected to the shaft for holding the
    bobbin against shifting axially of the shaft.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are devices which are mounted on a shaft but
    are movable relatively to said shaft.


CLS 242/129.71
TXT Devices under subclass 129.7 in which a spool is supported on a spindle
    shaft, which shaft is deformed or otherwise inherently capable of
    inhibiting axial shift of said spool along said shaft.


CLS 242/129.72
TXT Devices under subclass 129.7 which include strand guiding means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    129.53 and 129.62, for other strand guides.


CLS 242/129.8
TXT Devices under subclass 129.5 including means for retarding rotation of a
    spool or means acting on a strand retarding lengthwise movement of a strand.


CLS 242/130
TXT Miscellaneous devices for holding bobbins and spools, usually elements of
    or attachments for machines, but excluding those particularly adapted to
    sewing-machines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 231 and 232 for shuttle-bobbin holders.


CLS 242/130.1
TXT Devices under subclass 130 in which a bobbin is formed as the frustum of a
    cone and said bobbin is connected to a shaft by connecting means carried by
    said shaft complementary to the conical shape of said bobbin.


CLS 242/130.2
TXT Devices under subclass 130 in which a bobbin is supported by means located
    above the bobbin, and including a vertical axle fixed to a portion of a
    machine in which the bobbin is used, a bobbin holder depending from,
    concentric with and rotatable on said axle, and means on said bobbin holder
    securing said bobbin to said holder.


CLS 242/130.3
TXT Devices under subclass 130 including a support with a plurality of spaced,
    parallel projections affixed to said support, said projections serving as
    stationary storage spindles for a plurality of bobbins.


CLS 242/130.4
TXT Devices under subclass 130 including a bobbin spindle which is long axially
    and thin radially.


CLS 242/131
TXT Devices for holding a plurality of bobbin structures in suitable
    arrangement or position to enable the threads to be drawn off without
    interference.


CLS 242/131.1
TXT Devices under subclass 131 for holding a plurality of bobbins in a manner
    particularly adapted for unwinding strand material from a bobbin to a warp
    beam.


CLS 242/132
TXT Holders for bobbins forming troughs, cradles, or similar receptacles
    affording a protection to the bobbin and thread.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 231 and 232 for spool and bobbin holders
    specific to sewing-machines.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclass 198.


CLS 242/134
TXT Devices not otherwise classifiable for holding bobbins or spools and
    adapted for general use, particularly domestic, or in connection with
    apparel apparatus and excluding such as are more particularly adapted for
    use with machines for making textiles or for spinning.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130,    for bobbin-holders specially adapted for use in textile machines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 106-109 for spool-holders combined
    with other sewing-implement holders.


CLS 242/136
TXT Spool-holders provided with clamps, hooks, pins, or other devices by which
    they may be attached to the person or other support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 106- 109 for holders for a plurality
    of sewing implements provided with carrier attachments.


CLS 242/137
TXT Spool-holders comprising a box or other form of receptacle specially
    adapted to receive spools to permit unwinding the thread.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 106-109.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 45+ and 72+.


CLS 242/137.1
TXT Devices under subclass 137 in which a spool of strand material is enclosed
    in a case, including a perforation in said case through which the strand
    material is led for unwinding of the strand.


CLS 242/138
TXT Receptacles for holding a single spool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 231 and 232.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 63.3 for antiseptic
    ligatures and subclasses 389+ for a receptacle for wound material or a
    package of wound material.


CLS 242/139
TXT Spool-holders comprising a base, pedestal, or equivalent provided with
    pins, spindles, or other devices for supporting spools.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 106- 109 for spool and implement
    stands.


CLS 242/140
TXT Devices with or without thread guides, such as caps or disks, for
    preventing the thread from running above or below the heads or ends of the
    spool, thereby avoiding the winding of the thread around the spool spindle
    or its entanglement therewith. Includes guides particularly adapted to
    spool or twine holders.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157,    for guides, per se.


CLS 242/141
TXT Miscellaneous devices not otherwise classifiable for holding a ball or mass
    of twine or cordage material to facilitate unwinding, prevent snarling, and
    present the twine end in position for handling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 50+ and 59.1.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 50+.


CLS 242/146
TXT Twine-holders comprising a casing, box, cage, or other type of receptacle
    to confine the twine ball or within which the ball is rotatably or loosely
    mounted or held.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137+,   for receptacle-mounted spool holders.


CLS 242/147
TXT Miscellaneous tension devices for winding apparatus not otherwise
    classifiable and miscellaneous tension devices of general application to
    cordage material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 450.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 106+.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclass 146.

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, subclasses 56+ and
    61.

    111,    Planting, subclass 49.

    112,    Sewing, subclass 254.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 212+.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclass 195 for
    devices for placing tension on material of indeterminate length.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 6+ for electrical
    motive power systems which are effective to control the tension on running
    material solely by appropriate control of an electric motor.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 101+ for a tension adjuster used in an endless belt power
    transmission.


CLS 242/148
TXT Alarm or indicator mechanism combined with or specially adapted for use
    with tension devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 668 for electrical automatic
    tension responsive indicating systems.


CLS 242/149
TXT Tension devices in which a member thereof is held in frictional engagement
    with the cordage material employed, as thread, to regulate the tension of
    the same. Generally two cooperating members are provided, between which the
    material to be tensioned is passed.


CLS 242/150
TXT Tension clamps comprising a pair of rotary disks between which the material
    passes.


CLS 242/151
TXT Includes friction-clamps in which one or both clamp members are provided
    with a rotary roller to engage and tension the material.


CLS 242/152
TXT Roller clamps having a roller provided with surface corrugations or flutes
    parallel with the axis of the roller.  These flutes may form teeth to
    cooperate with those of a similarly formed roller, thus providing a
    tortuous course for the material.


CLS 242/152.1
TXT Devices under subclass 149 in which a ball clamps the strand against a
    socket.


CLS 242/153
TXT Tension devices in which the material is forced to move over a deflected
    path, the extent of which produces the tension.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    for fluted roller tension clamps producing a tortuous course.

    155,    for wheel tensions producing a tortuous course.


CLS 242/154
TXT Tortuous-course tension devices in which the path of the material may be
    varied to change or adjust the tension.


CLS 242/155
TXT Tension devices in which a rotary pulley, wheel, or disk is employed and
    around which the cordage or other material is passed. The contact face or
    groove of the wheel may be provided with means for producing a sinuous or
    deflected path for the material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 101+ for tension adjusters for an endless power transmission
    belt wherein the tension adjusters may comprise an idler pulley or guide
    roll.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the notes thereunder.


CLS 242/156
TXT Tension devices comprising friction brakes, shoes, springs, or adjustable
    bearing devices for regulating the rotation of the reel or bobbin, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132,    for tension-brake devices in combination with bobbin supporters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 450.

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, subclass 61.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 291+
    for brakes and stops applied to rollers for flexible and portable panels,
    particularly subclasses 298+ for friction type.

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 68 to 85.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 15+.


CLS 242/156.1
TXT Devices under subclass 156 in which the brake is applied to the periphery
    of the material.


CLS 242/156.2
TXT Devices under subclass 156 which include braking means responsive to speed,
    tension, package size, etc., and applied to a disc other than the spool.


CLS 242/157
TXT Devices not otherwise classifiable for directing the material to be wound
    to the reel drum or bobbin or miscellaneous guides for winding machines,
    excepting guides and guards for fabrics or webs and spool-holders.

    (.5)    Note.  Where the device or guide is claimed with no significant
    guide structure but merely in terms of the composition or material of which
    it is composed, it will be classified in the appropriate composition or
    material class even though there is no claim to the composition, per se.

    In this connection the following classes should be considered:

            75, Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for use
    Therein, Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal
    Particulate Mixtures, for articles defined solely by their metal or alloy
    composition.

            106, Compositions:  Coating or Plastic. Note particularly the class
    definition for the type of composition within the scope of Class 106 and
    for compositions elsewhere classified.

    428, Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 544+ for stock
    materials, e.g., of indefinite length, which are all metal or have adjacent
    metal components.

            520, Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses
    for synthetic resins or natural rubber and compositions thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140,    for guides employed with spool-holders.

    615+,   for material guards and guides.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 2.1+ for fixed guides in the
    nature of a bell mouth opening.

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclasses 232+ for stripping guides used
    to clear running lengths of thread.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 106+ for
    yarn and thread guides, protectors, or separators.

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 136+ for a work manipulating guide combined with
    a specified sewing process or apparatus, or subclass 302 for a thread
    guiding or handling means combined with a specified sewing process or
    apparatus.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, may include a nominal
    recitation of a supply or take-up coil (e.g., less than a support for such
    a coil or a cooperative relationship between a tension or exhaust detector
    and reel driving or reel stopping means, etc.), subclass 196.1 for a
    passive guide combined with a material feeder.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses for
    synthetic resins and compositions thereof.


CLS 242/157.1
TXT Devices under subclass 157 in which the directing means is movable along
    the axis of a rotatable reel drum, and said directing means is free from
    connection to or responsiveness to drum rotating means.


CLS 242/158
TXT Devices under the class definition for effecting relative traverse of a
    guide and a core upon which material, passing from the guide, is wound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26.1+,  26.5, 27+, and 43+, for appropriate traverse means in thread
    winding machines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclasses 126+ for traversing yarn guides for
    straight knitting machines.

    451,    Abrading, for a reciprocating abrading tool and work holder.


CLS 242/158.1
TXT Devices under subclass 158 in which the traverse guide is moved by an
    eccentric or crank.


CLS 242/158.2
TXT Devices under subclass 158 in which the traverse guide is moved by a screw
    threaded shaft.


CLS 242/158.3
TXT Devices under subclass 158.2 in which the shaft is doubly, oppositely screw
    threaded.


CLS 242/158.4
TXT Devices under subclass 158 which include means for reversing the direction
    of travel of the traverse guide.


CLS 242/158.5
TXT Devices under subclass 158 in which cam means effects the movement of the
    traverse guide.


CLS 242/159
TXT WOUND STORAGE PACKAGE:
    Product under the class definition comprising a length of elongated
    material (e.g., strand, twine, web, tape, or wire) arranged in convolutions
    around a common center or axis for subsequent unwinding.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses provide for a storage coil
    made by winding with nominal cutting or application of a wetting agent or
    similar material to hold the material in place on the package to facilitate
    orderly unwinding; however, a wound article or article component such as a
    filter, sport ball, ball core, or electrical device is found in a class
    specifically provided for such articles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 389+ for a package for a
    roll or reel.


CLS 242/160.1
TXT Convolute coil (e.g., wound web):

    Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein elongated material is wound one
    convolution substantially radially upon the next preceding convolution.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclass 244.2 for coiled
    rolled toilet seat covers.


CLS 242/160.2
TXT Plural coils:

    Subject matter under subclass 160.1 wherein the elongated material is wound
    to form multiple distinct convolution groups.


CLS 242/160.3
TXT Axial retainer (e.g., flange):

    Subject matter under subclass 160.1 wherein the elongated material is wound
    onto a spool having a winding surface and a material containment formation
    radially projecting beyond the winding surface.


CLS 242/160.4
TXT For particular coiled material:

    Subject matter under subclass 160.1 wherein special significance is
    attributed to a physical or chemical characteristic of the elongated
    material in determining the construction of the package (e.g., protection
    or arrangement of sensitive, irregular, or difficult-to-coil material).


CLS 242/163
TXT Interconvolutionary strand delivery:

    Package under subclass 159 in which the inner end portion of the strand
    extends between convolutions of the winding to the outside of the winding,
    or which includes an opening between convolutions for passage of the strand
    inner end portion.


CLS 242/164
TXT Strand end feature:

    Package under subclass 159 in which a terminal portion of the strand
    comprises a separate and distinct minor winding; or has an additional
    element applied to it; or is so disposed in other than its normal adjacency
    to other convolutions in the main winding as to make it readily available
    and/or usable for a specified purpose.


CLS 242/165
TXT Strand end forms winding:

    Package under subclass 164 wherein the terminal portion comprises a minor
    group of convolutions distinguishable, as a body, from the main winding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26.41+, for a device which places a reserve bunch on a core prior to a weft
    (cone) service wind.

    167,    for windings connected in tandem, but none of which is a mere
    terminal portion of any other.


CLS 242/166
TXT Plural windings:

    Package under subclass 159 comprising (a) at least two distinct strands, or
    (b) a single strand formed into a plurality of separate bulk windings
    connected by an intermediate portion of the strand.


CLS 242/167
TXT Serially connected:

    Package under subclass 166 which includes the construction described in (b)
    in the definition of subclass 166 above, and the tail end of one winding is
    connected to the lead end of another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165,    for plural windings one of which comprises a mere terminal portion
    of the strand of another and is of minor nature.


CLS 242/168
TXT Distorted winding:

    Product under subclass 159 having a wound strand arrangement deformed as a
    mass, as by compacting or stretching, after its convolutions have been laid
    to form the initial package.


CLS 242/169
TXT Spooled:

    Product under subclass 168 in which the original package comprises a strand
    arrangement laid on an axial core, and having an applied pair of heads
    abutted and pressed axially against its ends.


CLS 242/170
TXT Housing or outer peripheral support:

    Package under subclass 159 enclosed within a receptacle, or having its
    winding engaged at its outside edge portion by holding means.

    (1)     Note.  Where the receptacle or holding means comprises a container,
    wrapper or cover which must be destroyed or mutilated to use the package,
    see the Search Class note above under subclass 159.


CLS 242/171
TXT With strand guide:

    Product under subclass 170 including structure (other than the wound
    material itself) for keeping the strand in a desired path during unwinding
    thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    for a bobbin or spool having a strand guide.

    128,    for apparatus with a wound strand package support and revoluble
    strand guide.

    163,    for a housed strand package with strand guide by means of which the
    strand is delivered through the mass.


CLS 242/172
TXT Strand restraining or snarl preventing means:

    Package under subclass 159 provided with an element or portion (as
    distinguished from the mere disposition of the filamentary material) for
    preventing or controlling slipping, dropping or loosening of convolutions
    during operational unwinding.


CLS 242/173
TXT Adhesive:

    Package under subclass 172 in which the said element or portion is an
    agglutinant.

    (1)     Note.  Autogenous adhesion is included.


CLS 242/174
TXT Particular winding:

    Package under subclass 159 in which the wound strand mass has its
    convolutions laid in a particularly specified arrangement as claimed.

    (1)     Note.  Patents directed to specifically designated known windings,
    such as "helical-cross-, universal-wound", etc., are found in this subclass
    if no feature peculiar to one of the superior subclasses in this schedule
    is claimed.


CLS 242/175
TXT Cone wind:

    Package under subclass 174 in which the strand is laid in conical layers
    progressing from one end of the wound mass to its other end.


CLS 242/176
TXT On core:

    Package under subclass 174 which includes an axial support upon which the
    winding is laid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26.1+,  for bunching yarn on a cop.

    175,    for a cone wound package including a core.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 206+ for an axially supported wound
    thread carried in a loom shuttle.


CLS 242/177
TXT Plain cone core:

    Package under subclass 176 wherein the support is unheaded and the winding
    carrying portion of its surface is a uniformly tapered cone or frustum
    thereof.


CLS 242/178
TXT Plain cylinder:

    Package under subclass 176 wherein the support is unheaded and the winding
    carrying portion of its surface is a circular cylinder.


CLS 242/222
TXT CARD, BOARD, OR FORM:

    A generally flat panel or framelike member, per se, upon which web, bank or
    strand material may be wound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 389+ for a roll or reel
    package and see notes thereunder.


CLS 242/223
TXT Fishing rod reel:

    Subject matter under subclass 370 comprising a portable reel adapted for
    use with a fishing rod and generally including a frame and drive device for
    causing a line to be wound by a line take-up member in the form of (a) a
    rotated spool, or (b) a line guide rotated about a normally nonrotated
    spool; fishing reel components not provided for elsewhere, or attachments
    designed for direct association with a fishing reel.

    (1)     Note.  The frame may include a mounting bracket releasably
    connectable to a fishing rod, or it may be an integral part of a nominally
    recited fishing rod.

    (2)     Note.  To avoid diffusion of the art, a reel used on a fishing rod,
    but whose drive mechanism is replaced by hand wrapping are also classified
    in this and the indented subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass is the locus for a specific fishing reel in
    combination with a measuring and calculating or indicating device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 720 and 734+ for specific
    measuring device in a reel.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 561+
    for a distance measuring device utilizing a computer.


CLS 242/224
TXT Axial unwinding (i.e., spinning reel):

    Subject matter under subclass 223 in which the line unwinds by spinning
    over a discharge end of a stationary spool.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this and the indented subclasses are line
    winding and distributing mechanisms and brakes specifically designed for
    spinning reels.  However, drive mechanisms including clutches, yieldable
    couplings and handles; frames, frame components and, unwinding limiters,
    etc., which are recited as subcombinations of nominally recited spinning
    reels are classified as subcombinations, per se, in subclasses 249+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249,    for a drive mechanism, per se

    305,    for an unwinding indicator

    309,    for an unwinding limiter

    311,    for a frame or frame component

    322,    for a spool or spool shaft feature, per se.


CLS 242/225
TXT Motor driven:

    Subject matter under subclass 224 in which the drive device of the reel
    includes a device for converting potential energy into kinetic energy,
    i.e., a motor, to cause the line to be wound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250,    for a motor driven, tangentially unwinding fishing reel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 21 for a motor
    driven fishing reel incorporated in a specified fishing rod.


CLS 242/226
TXT Spring motor:

    Subject matter under subclass 225 wherein the motor is powered by energy
    stored in a resilient member, i.e., a spring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251,    for a spring motor driven, tangentially unwinding fishing reel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, or Animal Powered, subclasses 37+ for a
    spring motor.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 166+ for details of a spring device, per
    se.


CLS 242/227
TXT Spool rotatable to wind:

    Subject matter under subclass 224 in which the spool is rotated to take up
    the line.


CLS 242/228
TXT With guide shiftable between wind and unwind positions:

    Subject matter under subclass 227 including a line guide mounted for
    movement between (a) a winding position where the line is disposed in a
    path for tangential winding, and (b) an unwinding position where the line
    is disposed in a path for discharge over an end of the spool.


CLS 242/229
TXT Spool pivotal between wind and unwind positions:

    Subject matter under subclass 227 having a support mounting the spool for
    arcuate movement of substantially 900 between (a) a tangential winding
    position, and (b) an axially unwinding position in which the line is
    discharged over an end the spool.


CLS 242/230
TXT With winding guide on rotor rearward of spool:

    Subject matter under subclass 224 including a rotatably driven winding
    member, i.e., rotor, located at the end of the spool opposite the line
    discharge end and having a guide engageable with the line to wrap the line
    onto the spool.


CLS 242/231
TXT Guide shiftable on rotor:

    Subject matter under subclass 230 including a guide mounted on the rotor
    for movement between a position in engagement with the line for wrapping it
    onto the spool and a position free of the line to permit the line to spin
    over the end of the spool.


CLS 242/232
TXT Guide shifted to wind position by rotor drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 231 including an actuator for causing the
    guide to move from an unwinding position to a winding position in response
    to rotation of the rotor by the drive device.


CLS 242/233
TXT Guide shifted to unwind position by discrete manual operator:

    Subject matter under subclass 232 having hand manipulated means connected
    to the guide for swinging the guide from winding to unwinding position.

    (1)     Note.  The manual operator may be a separate mechanism connected by
    linkage to the guide or a distinct appendage connected directly to the
    guide for finger manipulation.


CLS 242/234
TXT With winding guide on rotor forward of spool:

    Subject matter under subclass 224 having a rotatably driven winding member,
    i.e., rotor, located at the line discharge end of the spool and carrying a
    guide engageable with the line to wrap the line onto the spool.


CLS 242/235
TXT Rotor drive shifts guide to unwind and wind positions:

    Subject matter under subclass 234 in which the drive device includes
    linkage for shifting the guide or a part thereof between a line engaged
    position for winding the line and a disengaged position freeing the line
    for unwinding.


CLS 242/236
TXT With manual actuator to shift guide to unwind position:

    Subject matter under subclass 234 having a manually actuated button or
    lever, i.e., actuator, for moving the line guide to a position freeing the
    line for unwinding.


CLS 242/237
TXT Actuator forward of rotor:

    Subject matter under subclass 236 wherein the actuated means or a
    significant portion thereof is located at the line discharge end of both
    the spool and rotor and is manipulated from the line discharge end of the
    reel.


CLS 242/238
TXT With line snubber shifted by remote actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 236 wherein the manual actuator, in addition
    to shifting the guide, also moves a line engaging brake i.e., snubber, to
    force the line toward a frame component to control unwinding of the line.


CLS 242/239
TXT Rotor and snubber shiftable axially:

    Subject matter under subclass 238 wherein the manual actuator shifts both
    the rotor and line snubber axially along the axis of winding.


CLS 242/240
TXT Guide shifted radially:

    Subject matter under subclass 239 wherein axial movement of the rotor and
    line snubber occurs simultaneously with movement of the line guide radially
    inward to the unwinding position.


CLS 242/241
TXT With level-winding mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 224 having structure for systematically
    distributing the line along the length of the spool.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass receives patents which distributing the line
    by shifting the guide or rotor, or by shifting the spool by means other
    than by an eccentric cam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158     through 158.5, for a line traversing mechanism in generalized
    winding devices.

    273,    for a level winding device in other fishing reels.


CLS 242/242
TXT Eccentric cam reciprocates spool:

    Subject matter under subclass 241 wherein the line distributing mechanism
    includes a rotatable member with a surface eccentric to the axis of
    rotation for imparting reversible, substantially linear motion to the spool
    for evenly distributing line being wound.


CLS 242/243
TXT With brake:

    Subject matter under subclass 224 having a device for retarding or
    selectively preventing rotation of a reel part, e.g., the spool.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this and the indented subclasses are devices
    that serve as torque transmitting couplings (clutches) when power flows in
    one direction and as brakes when the power is reversed, even though such
    devices may be called a brake.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156,    for a brake in other winding devices.

    285,    for brakes in other fishing reels.

    396+,   for brakes in a general purpose reel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, particularly subclasses 71.1+, 74+, and 83 for a brake in
    general use.


CLS 242/244
TXT Continuously applied:

    Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein the brake is continuously applied
    to prevent spool rotation below a predetermined torque on the spool.

    (1)     Note.  This is the locus for friction brakes applied directly
    between the spool and frame.


CLS 242/245
TXT Between spool shaft and frame:

    Subject matter under subclass 244 in which the brake is continuously
    applied between a rotatable spindle supporting the spool and the frame.


CLS 242/246
TXT Between spool and spool shaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 244 wherein the brake is applied between the
    spool and a nonrotatable spindle on which the spool is carried.


CLS 242/247
TXT Positive:

    Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein the brake prevents rotation of
    the reel part in at least one direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    297,    for positive brakes in other types of fishing reels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 575 through 578 for a
    ratchet device.

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 82.1 through 82.9 for a general purpose,
    positive brake.


CLS 242/248
TXT Defines home position of reel part:

    Subject matter under subclass 247 wherein a one-way brake device stops the
    winding mechanism at a predetermined rotary position.


CLS 242/249
TXT With drive mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 223 wherein the drive device includes a force
    input means, e.g., crank, motor, or externally driven shaft, and connecting
    means to apply or regulate the transfer of force, i.e., torque, to the
    take-up member.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is the locus for drive mechanisms employing
    shock absorbers, and spool drive mechanism providing irregular line take-up
    rates.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    317,    for a reel whose drive device is an element, e.g., a knob, fixed
    directly to the spool or a sleeve of the spool.


CLS 242/250
TXT Motor driven:

    Subject matter under subclass 249 wherein at least one input of the drive
    mechanism includes a device for converting potential energy into kinetic
    energy, i.e., a motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225,    for a motor driven spinning reel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 21 for a motor
    driven fishing reel incorporated in a specified fishing rod.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 360-362 for a haulage device employing a particular motor.


CLS 242/251
TXT Spring motor:

    Subject matter under subclass 250 wherein the motor is powered by energy
    stored in a resilient element.

    (1)     Note.  Springs used in fishing reels for purposes other than
    winding, e.g., as shock absorbers, are classified in subclasses 223, 249 or
    elsewhere depending on other specific subcombinations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226     and 371+, for a spring motor used in a spinning reel and a
    nonfishing reel, respectively.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, or Animal Powered, subclasses 37+ for a
    spring motor.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 166+ for details of a spring device, per
    se.


CLS 242/252
TXT Motor actuated in response to pull on line:

    Subject matter under subclass 251 having a latch that releases the energy
    stored in the spring in response to a tension on the fishing line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    385.1+, for a releasable lock acting against the bias of a spring motor in
    a nonfishing reel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 15 and 16 for
    an automatic hooking device.


CLS 242/253
TXT With independent manual drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 251 having selectively useable spring motor
    and manually operated crank to drive the same take-up member.


CLS 242/254
TXT With spring charger:

    Subject matter under subclass 251 having a selectively operable device to
    store energy in the spring motor independent of spool rotation.


CLS 242/255
TXT Multiple drive ratio:

    Subject matter under subclass 249 wherein the drive mechanism includes
    structure for selectively varying the speed ratio between the force input
    means and the take-up member.

    (1)     Note.  Reels having different speed ratios resulting from diverse
    drive sources, e.g., a hand crank and electric motor, are classified on the
    basis of the drive sources.


CLS 242/256
TXT Ratchet-type drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 249 wherein the drive mechanism includes an
    oscillated or reciprocated mechanical input, e.g., a lever, pull cord, etc,
    acting through a unidirectional device, e.g., a pawl and ratchet, to cause
    winding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 25+ and 812 for details of
    a related mechanical movement.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 217+ and 352+ for a haulage drum driven by a ratchet wheel and
    driving pawl.


CLS 242/257
TXT With disengageable positive drive components (e.g., a clutch):

    Subject matter under subclass 249 wherein the drive mechanism includes a
    drive element shiftable from a position for positively transferring torque
    between the force input and the line take-up member, to a second position
    completely interrupting the positive torque transfer.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is the locus for reels having nongear,
    positive drive couplings shiftable relative to an axis of rotation in a
    radial or oblique direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250,    253 and 255, for a fishing reel having shiftable, positive drive
    components for altering the power path or drive ratio.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, for a shiftable clutch and
    operator in diverse technologies.


CLS 242/258
TXT With alternative yieldable mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 257 having a friction device, e.g., coupling
    or brake, associated with the shiftable drive element to provide a
    selectively either (a) positive driving rotation, or (b) frictional driving
    or braking.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 12+ for a clutch and
    brake combination in various devices.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 347 and 366 for a haulage reel employed in a clutch linked to a
    friction brake.


CLS 242/259
TXT Axially engaged:

    Subject matter under subclass 257 wherein the shiftable drive element moves
    in a direction along or parallel to an axis of rotation of the drive
    element.


CLS 242/260
TXT Coaxial of spool:

    Subject matter under subclass 259 wherein the drive element and line
    take-up member are disposed on the same axis of rotation.


CLS 242/261
TXT Reengageable responsive to drive rotation:

    Subject matter under subclass 260 wherein the drive element is shifted from
    the torque interrupting position to positive torque transfer position in
    response to operation of the force input means.


CLS 242/262
TXT Reengageable responsive to drive rotation:

    Subject matter under subclass 257 wherein the drive element is radially
    shifted from the torque interrupting position to the torque transfer
    position in response to movement of the force input means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259     and 261, for an axially applied drive component shifted in response
    to drive rotation.


CLS 242/263
TXT Gear pair:

    Subject matter under subclass 257 wherein the drive mechanism includes a
    pair of engageable torque transmitting element, at least one of which is
    the drive element shiftable in a radial direction to interrupt the positive
    torque transfer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 298 and 345 for a haulage reel having gears shiftable into and
    out of intermeshing engagement.


CLS 242/264
TXT With yieldable drive coupling (e.g., friction or fluid clutch):

     Subject matter under subclass 249 wherein the drive mechanism includes a
    drive element adjustable to provide slippage for limiting the torque which
    can be transmitted between the power input and line take-up member.

    (1)     Note.  The drive input of a fishing reel normally rotates a line
    take-up as an output for winding.  Thus, a yieldable coupling serves a
    clutching function between driving and driven parts.  Frequently the flow
    of power is reversed, resulting in a braking action between the driven
    element and the now stationary or overpowered input.  To avoid diffusion of
    the art, any fishing reel with a significant yieldable coupling that can
    transmit power is placed here despite the use of terms such as brake, drag,
    etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 12+ for a combined
    clutch and brake.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, subclasses 40+ for an overload release drive coupling.


CLS 242/265
TXT Variable by crank manipulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 264 wherein at least one form of the torque
    limit adjustment is achieved by selectively shifting a crank acting as the
    force input, e.g., shifting the crank in opposite directions to alternately
    increase or decrease the adjustment.


CLS 242/266
TXT Variable within distinct range(s):

    Subject matter under subclass 265 wherein the drive element adjustment
    includes means to limit the adjustment to one or more ranges of torque
    transfer having predetermined minimum and maximum values.


CLS 242/267
TXT Between drive shaft and crank:

    Subject matter under subclass 264 wherein the adjustable drive element of
    the drive mechanism acts directly between a crank-type power input element
    and a drive spindle supporting the input element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    269,    for a fishing reel whose adjustable coupling acts directly between
    a crank shaft and line take-up.


CLS 242/268
TXT Between drive shaft and gear:

    Subject matter under subclass 264 wherein the adjustable drive element of
    the drive mechanism acts directly between a shaft of the drive mechanism
    and a gear on the shaft at a point spaced from the take-up member.

    (1)     Note.  A reel with an adjustable drive element directly between a
    shaft and gear that is additionally coaxial of the spool is included here.


CLS 242/269
TXT Coaxial with line take-up:

    Subject matter under subclass 264 wherein the adjustable drive element
    rotates coaxial of the line take-up member, usually a spool.


CLS 242/270
TXT Axially applied:

    Subject matter under subclass 269 having an actuator for shifting the
    adjustable drive element axially along the axis of rotation of the line
    take-up member.


CLS 242/271
TXT By center pin:

    Subject matter under subclass 270 wherein the actuator includes a shaft or
    pin-like element coaxial with the line take-up and operates to draw the
    take-up toward the force input to increase the torque transmittable between
    the input and line take-up.


CLS 242/272
TXT With feed roller:

    Subject matter under subclass 249 wherein the drive mechanism includes at
    least one roller driven by the force input and cooperating with a pressure
    element to engage and feed the line to a separate take-up member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 168 and 181+
    for details of a feeding element.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 264+ for a haulage device that may include a line feeder.


CLS 242/273
TXT With level winding:

    Subject matter under subclass 249 having structure for systematically
    distributing a line along the length of a take-up spool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158     through 158.5, for a line traversing mechanism in a winding machine.

    241     and 242, for a spinning-type fishing reel with a level winding
    mechanism.


CLS 242/274
TXT Line shifts along rotatable cam bar:

    Subject matter under subclass 273 wherein the line distributing device
    includes a rotatable bar substantially parallel to the axis of the spool
    and wherein the bar has an undulatory, generally spiral surface that
    engages the line being wound to distribute the line evenly onto the spool.


CLS 242/275
TXT Line traction guide wheel:

    Subject matter under subclass 273 wherein a line distributing device
    includes a wheel mounted on a shaft and engaged by the line being wound to
    cause the wheel to rotate and including structure on the wheel and shaft to
    convert rotation of the wheel to a back and forth movement substantially
    parallel to the spool.


CLS 242/276
TXT Manually shifted guide:

    Subject matter under subclass 273 wherein the line distributing device
    includes a portion specifically contoured for direct engagement by the user
    for shifting a line guide or shifting a line along the length of the spool
    to evenly distribute the line.


CLS 242/277
TXT Drive mechanism oscillates guide:

    Subject matter under subclass 273 wherein the line distributing device
    includes a pivotally mounted line guide and linkage connected to the drive
    mechanism to shift the guide in opposite directions along a curved path.


CLS 242/278
TXT Drive mechanism reciprocates guide:

    Subject matter under subclass 273 wherein the line distributing device
    includes a line guide and linkage connected to the drive mechanism to shift
    the guide in opposite directions along a substantially linear path parallel
    to the spool.

    (1)     Note.  The linear path may include proportionately small curves,
    e.g., an elliptical path with an extremely long major axis and a short
    minor axis as would the locus of a point traveling with an elongated chain
    trained over a pair of small sprockets.


CLS 242/279
TXT Reversely threaded screw:

    Subject matter under subclass 278 wherein the drive mechanism linkage
    includes at least one shaft and right and left hand helical grooves merged
    together at each end to receive a follower connected to the guide so that
    rotation of the shaft by the drive mechanism imparts reciprocating motion
    to the guide.


CLS 242/280
TXT Guide shiftable between wind and unwind positions:

    Subject matter under subclass 279 having means to shift the line guide with
    respect to the linear path of reciprocation, to reduce or eliminate contact
    between the guide and line during unwinding.


CLS 242/281
TXT Guide has line removal opening:

    Subject matter under subclass 279 wherein the reciprocated line guide has a
    passage through which the line is laterally removable.


CLS 242/282
TXT Alternative right or left side drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 249 wherein the drive mechanism includes a
    mounting device for selectively relocating the force input on the frame.


CLS 242/283
TXT Hand crank feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 249 wherein particular significance is
    attributed to a drive handle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 545 for a general purpose
    handle.


CLS 242/284
TXT Collapsible or extensible:

    Subject matter under subclass 283 wherein the hand crank has means to (a)
    vary its effective length, or (b) reposition the hand crank between
    operating and storage positions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 546 and 547 for an
    extensible or collapsible hand crank in general use.


CLS 242/285
TXT With brake:

    Subject matter under subclass 223 having means to retard or selectively
    prevent line-unwinding rotation of the spool.

    (1)     Note.  If an element serves a coupling function in at least one
    mode of use, even though it may serve as a connection between dynamic and
    static elements in another mode of use, it should normally be placed with
    yieldable drive couplings in subclass 264.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156,    for a brake used in a winding machine.

    243,    for a brake in a spinning-type fishing reel.

    410+,   for a brake in a general use reel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, for general purpose brake.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 375+ for a brake in a haulage device, e.g., winch.


CLS 242/286
TXT Unwinding speed regulator (e.g., anti-backlash brake):

    Subject matter under subclass 285 wherein the brake acts to variably
    regulate unwinding of line in response to conditions in the line or reel
    during the casting of a weighted line.

    (1)     Note.  Due to factors such as spool inertia, an unwinding spool may
    accelerate too rapidly or continue to rotate in the unwinding direction
    after the line ceases to be pulled from the spool resulting in loosened
    turns of line "backlash".  Brakes provided for in this and the indented
    subclasses coordinate spool rotation with the acceleration, deceleration
    and termination phases of line demand during casting without requiring
    concurrent user adjustment.


CLS 242/287
TXT Line tension responsive actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 286 wherein the brake is associated with a
    line engaging member shiftable in response to changes in the tension of the
    unwinding line to regulate braking.


CLS 242/288
TXT Magnetic:

    Subject matter under subclass 286 wherein the brake includes (a) a device
    for producing lines of magnetic flux, and (b) an electrically conductive
    device disposed to cut the flux lines, one of the devices being stationary
    and the other rotatable with the spool to establish a braking force
    opposing rotation of the spool in the unwinding direction.

    (1)     Note.  The use of a magnetic device solely to regulate the position
    of a friction brake would be classified elsewhere, e.g., subclasses 301 and
    302.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155,    for a magnetic line tensioning device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclass 267 for a similar brake in general use.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 93 and 105+ for
    a hysteresis or eddy current device.


CLS 242/289
TXT Centrifugal:

    Subject matter under subclass 286 wherein the brake includes at least one
    element having mass rotatable with, but shiftable relative to, the spool
    when subjected to the centrifugal force of rapid rotation to shift the mass
    element(s) into a position to retard rotation of the spool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 191+, 234 and 239 for
    a centrifugal brake retarding unwinding in a fire escape reel.

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 184-186 for a speed regulating brake used in
    various fields.


CLS 242/290
TXT Spool bearing brake:

    Subject matter under subclass 285 wherein the brake applies a relatively
    light retarding force to a bearing that supports the spool or to the end of
    a spool shaft to dampen free rotation of the spool.

    (1)     Note.  For placement in this subclass, the bearing should be
    disclosed as having a special retarding element or surface distinct from a
    typical thrust bearing that might be found in subclass 321.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, for a general purpose brake adjustment device.

    384,    Bearings, for a bearing used in various fields.


CLS 242/291
TXT Manual pressure control:

    Subject matter under subclass 285 wherein either (a) the brake includes an
    actuator disposed for facilitating manual engagement to selectively apply a
    spool retarding force in direct proportion to the manual force
    instantaneously exerted, or (b) special access is provided for the user's
    thumb or finger to directly apply a retarding force to the spool.


CLS 242/292
TXT Radially applied:

    Subject matter under subclass 291 wherein the brake is applied to a
    rotatable element in a direction substantially perpendicular to the axis of
    rotation of the rotatable element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301,    for a fishing reel with a radially engaged brake set by a position
    sustaining adjustment.


CLS 242/293
TXT Rolling contact:

    Subject matter under subclass 292 wherein the retarding force is applied to
    the spool by a brake having a rotatable shoe engageable with the spool or
    element rotatable with the spool.


CLS 242/294
TXT Separable attachment:

    Subject matter under subclass 292 wherein the brake is readily attachable
    and removable without substantial structural modification of a conventional
    fishing reel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323,    for a nonbraking, fishing reel attachment.


CLS 242/295
TXT Connected to spool by one-way clutch:

    Subject matter under subclass 285 wherein the brake is connected to the
    spool through an overrunning clutch that acts to drivingly connect the
    spool to the brake only in the unwinding direction of the spool.


CLS 242/296
TXT Adjustable pressure pawl (e.g., braking clicker):

    Subject matter under subclass 285 wherein the brake is an elongated,
    pawl-like member, commonly termed a clicker, and a device to adjust the
    pressure with which the pawl-like member bears against a toothed sprocket
    or gear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306,    for a clicker that produces braking incidental to providing an
    audible signal.


CLS 242/297
TXT Positive:

    Subject matter under subclass 285 wherein the brake device is intended, in
    at least one position, to prevent rotation of the spool or drive mechanism
    in both the winding and unwinding direction.

    (1)     Note.  In addition to usual locking bars, friction brakes designed
    for application of retarding force to a degree to preclude rotation of the
    spool at any anticipated force are placed here.


CLS 242/298
TXT One-way:

    Subject matter under subclass 297 wherein the brake device, in one
    position, prevents rotation in only one direction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 575-578 for a ratchet
    device.

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 82.1-82.9 for a general purpose one-way brake.


CLS 242/299
TXT With disabler:

    Subject matter under subclass 298 having an actuator to shift the one-way
    brake device to a nonoperating position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 82.3-82.34 for a general purpose one-way brake
    with a disabler.


CLS 242/300
TXT Rotation responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 299 wherein the actuator shifts the one-way
    brake device to nonoperating position in response to rotation of the drive
    mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 576 for a noiseless pawl and
    ratchet.

    188,    Brakes, subclass 82.4 for a one-way positive brake with a hold out
    device.


CLS 242/301
TXT Radially engaged:

    Subject matter under subclass 285 wherein the brake is in a direction
    radial of the axis of the spool.


CLS 242/302
TXT Axially engaged:

    Subject matter under subclass 285 wherein the brake is applied in a
    direction parallel to the axis of the spool.


CLS 242/303
TXT Coaxial with spool:

    Subject matter under subclass 302 wherein the brake is applied along an
    axis of application which is also the axis of rotation of the spool.


CLS 242/304
TXT On adjustable lever:

    Subject matter under subclass 302 wherein the brake is mounted on a lever
    movable in a direction parallel to the spool axis.


CLS 242/305
TXT With unwinding indicator (e.g., bell or flashing light):

    Subject matter under subclass 223 having means to signal spool rotation or
    resistance to rotation.

    (1)     Note.  Devices appropriate for original placement in this and the
    indented subclasses should themselves produce no more than nominal coupling
    or braking effect.  A patent for a face clutch whose teeth emit a
    chattering sound upon relative slippage, or an adjustable force pawl
    providing significant retarding effect would be classified in subclasses
    264 and 296, respectively.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclasses for details of an
    indicator or alarm, per se.


CLS 242/306
TXT Clicking indicator (e.g., flexible pawl and toothed member):

    Subject matter under subclass 305 wherein the signal means includes a
    flexible spring-like member engageable with a serrated member, the members
    being relatively rotatable with respect to each other to provide an audible
    signal.


CLS 242/307
TXT Spring biased pawl:

    Subject matter under subclass 305 wherein the signal device includes a
    toothed member urged by a separate resilient means into engagement with a
    serrated member, the members being relatively rotatable with respect to
    each other to provide the audible signal.


CLS 242/308
TXT Plural spring sections:

    Subject matter under subclass 307 wherein the resilient means comprise
    either separate elements or a single element with distinct sections urging
    the toothed member into engagement with the serrated member.


CLS 242/309
TXT With line unwinding limiter:

    Subject matter under subclass 223 having means to selectively limit the
    length of line that can be unwound from the spool.


CLS 242/310
TXT Frame or static component:

    Subject matter under subclass 223 wherein particular significance is
    attributed to the frame or a frame component.

    (1)     Note.  The nominal appearance of spool or drive mechanism does not
    bar placement here if the frame or frame component is significant.


CLS 242/311
TXT Spinning reel frame:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein the frame supports the spool for
    axial unwinding.


CLS 242/312
TXT Frame disassembly feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein the reel frame is provided with
    at least one of:  (a) quick release fastening means, (b) special
    disassembly access to parts, and (c) special support of parts during
    disassembly that facilitate reassembly.

    (1)     Note.  While a frame connected by a series of usual threaded
    fasteners fails to fit the above "quick release" criteria, frame components
    retained by a single threaded end cap would fit this and the indented
    subclasses.


CLS 242/313
TXT Hinged frame section:

    Subject matter under subclass 312 wherein the reel frame includes major
    frame components connected together by a pivotal connection.


CLS 242/314
TXT Rotated joint:

    Subject matter under subclass 312 wherein the reel frame supports a spool
    between a pair of end plates, at least one of which is connected to the
    frame by a joint (e.g., bayonet or keyhole), releasable upon rotation of
    the end plate about its axis.


CLS 242/315
TXT Threaded:

    Subject matter under subclass 314 wherein the joint is a spiral thread-like
    coupling.


CLS 242/316
TXT Reel support (e.g., reel foot):

    Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein the reel frame has a specific
    bracket for mounting the reel on a fishing rod.


CLS 242/317
TXT Stub shaft support:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein the reel frame includes a shaft
    supported at only one end and on which the spool is freely rotatable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251,    for a spring motor driven spool which is supported on a stub shaft.


CLS 242/318
TXT With spool retainer feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 317 wherein significance is attributed to a
    latch which releasably retains the spool on its shaft.


CLS 242/319
TXT With line or water shield:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein the frame or other reel component
    includes a gasket-like obstruction, seal or structure providing a tortuose
    course to block the intrusion of foreign matter, e.g., water, line, grit,
    etc., into the interior of the reel.


CLS 242/320
TXT With lubrication feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 including a device for facilitating the
    application of lubricant to a movable part of the reel.


CLS 242/321
TXT With bearing feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein particular significance is
    attribute to a specified bearing structure which is interposed between the
    frame and the drive mechanism or line take-up.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, appropriate subclasses for a bearing, per se.


CLS 242/322
TXT Spool or spool shaft feature:

    Subject matter under subclasses 223 wherein particular significance is
    attributed to a specific spool feature or material in combination with
    additional fishing reel structure (e.g., a support, adaptor, gear, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118.4+, for a spool, per se.


CLS 242/323
TXT Reel attachment:

    Subject matter under subclass 223 including a device ancillary to winding
    which is releasably connected to a conventional fishing reel or rod.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    294,    for a manual brake attachment for a fishing reel which is removable.


CLS 242/324
TXT UNWINDING AND REWINDING A MACHINE CONVERTIBLE INFORMATION CARRIER (E.G.,
    MAGNETIC TAPE OR PHOTOGRAPHIC FILM):

    Apparatus or corresponding method under the class definition for handling
    elongated material,  specifically, information-bearing carrier having a
    signal or coating thereon which is transformable into a useful form, which
    apparatus or method involves the following cycle: (a) uncoiling the
    elongated material from a supply coil, (b) directing the material along a
    path past a work station (e.g., a transducer head, lens, or shutter), of a
    utilization device, and (c) recoiling the material on a take-up coil.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses provide for a winding
    system of a magnetic tape or wire player/recorder, photographic projector,
    camera, or similar special machine. These subclasses take an original
    patent claiming a winding apparatus or method that may include a nominally
    recited work station or component of such a machine (e.g., a transducer
    head, lens, film gate, shutter, etc). However, the recitation of either:
    (a) multiple work station components (e.g., a transducer plus an erase head
    or a lens plus a film feed claw), or (b) a specific work station (e.g., a
    transducer with spaced tracking areas or a lens with adjustable focusing
    means) that establish a particular cooperative relationship between the
    winding means and special machine bars classification in this class.

    (2)     Note.  In these subclasses, the term coil is used to include
    either: (a) a wound coil of material, per se, or (b) a rotatable coil
    support that includes a hub with or without flanges, which coil may
    simultaneously or sequentially perform both supply and take-up functions.

    (3)     Note.  The term information-bearing carrier denotes elongated
    material for transporting data or images converted by the utilization
    device distinct from control data that may be on the elongated material to
    be used as signals, etc., such as machine control indicia.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, for details relating to a radiant energy device or
    component (e.g., a photocell control circuit) usable in a slack loop
    control, stop or reverse control, coil diameter sensor, etc., and
    particularly subclasses 200+ and 559.01.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclasses 72+, 173+, 224+, 243, and 244+ for a projector or a projector
    component adapted to wind, tension, or guide film.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 69
    through 74.7, 83 through 96.6, 132, and 134 for winding control and carrier
    support structure combined with structure peculiar to the transducing of a
    magnetic information signal.

    396,    Photography, appropriate subclasses and particularly subclasses
    387+ for a camera structure with winding, feeding, or tensioning film and
    subclasses 612+ for photographic medium feed in a fluid treating apparatus.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclasses 242, 248, 512, 578+, 609+, and 613+ for unwinding and rewinding
    a typewriter tape past a keystrike work station, and a guide or tensioner
    component of such a machine.


CLS 242/324.1
TXT Carrier helically or randomly wound (e.g., magnetic wire, edge wound film,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 324 in which the information-bearing carrier
    is wound into a coil having convolutions either:  (a) displaced in a
    direction parallel to the axis of the coil, or (b) allowed to meander
    without regard for direction.


CLS 242/324.2
TXT Cartridge storage:

    Subject matter under subclass 324.1 comprising structure mounting the
    supply and take-up coils as a single unit to be readily combined with or
    removed from the utilization device, which structure typically encloses the
    coils and associated carrier guide means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    326+    and 335+, for cartridge structure mounting a convolutely wound coil.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 72 through 78 for a magazine
    in a motion picture projector.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 92
    through 96.6 and 132 for a magnetic tape cassette.


CLS 242/324.3
TXT Carrier distributor:

    Subject matter under subclass 324.1 comprising a traversing mechanism
    (e.g., shiftable guide or spool) to evenly place consecutive convolutions
    of the information-bearing carrier during winding.


CLS 242/325
TXT Endless coiled carrier (i.e., closed loop):

    Subject matter under subclass 324 wherein the information-bearing carrier
    has ends connected together to form a closed band wound into a plurality of
    convolutely arranged layers.

    (1)     Note.  The carrier is usually unwound from the center of a coil
    while it winds the outer convolution.  Thus, the coil serves as a supply
    coil portion and a take-up coil portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    364.1+, for the winding and unwinding in the same direction of a more
    generalized elongated material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, particularly subclasses 347,
    385+, 470+, 514, and 529 for a winding device combined with a specific
    register, file, or changing exhibitor.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 124 and 128 for endless film
    winding in a projector.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, appropriate
    subclasses for winding an endless magnetic tape in a tape recorder/player
    or similar device.


CLS 242/325.1
TXT Wound into superposed coil pair:

    Subject matter under subclass 325 wherein the endless information carrier
    is alternately wound in opposite directions between two spools provided
    with means to grip a middle portion of the carrier and simultaneously wind
    and unwind outward portions to form (or deplete) a double spiral winding.

    (1)     Note.  Initially a first spool normally supports the carrier wound
    into a double spiral winding with an exterior work loop having, (a) a
    functioning leg extending past a work station, and (b) an idling leg
    passing directly to a second spool, so that both legs are simultaneously
    unwound from the first spool and wound onto the second spool. The first leg
    is moved past the work station and is thus utilized while the second leg is
    idly wound directly onto the second spool. Next, the drive direction is
    reversed to feed the second (previously idle) leg past the work station to
    utilize the remainder of the carrier, while the first (previously utilized)
    leg now directly winds back to the first spool. The whole coil has passed
    through the work station and is ready for replay without rewinding.


CLS 242/325.2
TXT Having carrier responsive control:

    Subject matter under subclass 325 wherein the winding apparatus includes a
    mechanism (e.g., a speed controller) influenced by a detector sensitive to
    a change in a condition in the information-bearing carrier (e.g.,
    slackness) to regulate or interrupt winding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333+    and 334+, for a control of an information bearing carrier having
    ends.


CLS 242/325.3
TXT Reversible:

    Subject matter under subclass 325 comprising a drive mechanism for moving
    the information-bearing carrier in one direction for winding and unwinding,
    which mechanism is operable to move the carrier in an opposite direction.


CLS 242/326
TXT Cartridge storage:

    Subject matter under subclass 325 comprising structure mounting the coiled
    carrier as a single unit to be readily united with or removed from the
    utilization device, and frequently enclosing the carrier.

    (1)     Note.  Typically, the cartridge encloses the coil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324.2   and 335+, for cartridges for helically wound and convolutely wound
    coils, respectively.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, for receptacle construction that may be appropriate
    for a tape or film cartridge.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 72 through 78 for a magazine
    in a motion picture projector.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 92
    through 96.6 and 132 for a magnetic tape cassette.


CLS 242/326.1
TXT Insertion responsive component:

    Subject matter under subclass 326 comprising means actuated by the
    cartridge or the utilization device for movement between operating and
    nonoperating positions by operative association of the cartridge with the
    utilization device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.58+ for a
    switch specially designed to be responsive to article insertion in an
    environment that may be analogous to a tape cartridge.


CLS 242/326.2
TXT Particular cartridge structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 326 wherein special significance is
    attributed to the formation or layout of the mounting structure.


CLS 242/326.3
TXT Coil support:

    Subject matter under subclass 326.2 wherein particular significance is
    attributed to structure for rotatably supporting a coil of
    information-bearing carrier within the cartridge (e.g., a spool or hub
    bearing).


CLS 242/326.4
TXT Carrier guide:

    Subject matter under subclass 326.2 wherein particular significance is
    attributed to structure spaced from the coil to define a path of movement
    for the carrier.


CLS 242/327
TXT Particular coil support:

    Subject matter under subclass 325 wherein special significance is
    attributed to structure mounting a carrier coil for rotation (e.g., a spool
    or hub bearing).


CLS 242/327.1
TXT To accommodate convolution speed variations:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein the structure for mounting
    includes components (e.g., concentric rings or radiating tapered rollers)
    that collectively support edges of coil convolutions in a manner to reduce
    abrasion between convolutions of the coil resulting from variations in the
    angular velocities that develop between convolutions of a coil of material
    when the material is fed longitudinally while being coiled.

    (1)     Note.  An endless convolutely wound coil whose material is fed
    axially subjects each of the convolutions to move longitudinally requiring
    each convolution to move at a greater angular velocity than the adjacent
    outer convolution. Patents provided for here reduce the friction caused by
    the convolutions rubbing against each other by a tendency to drive each
    convolution or groups of convolutions at appropriately different speeds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327.4,  for spaced coil supporting pulleys that may reduce the adverse
    effect of convolution speed variation.


CLS 242/327.2
TXT Radial roller:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein the coil mounting structure
    includes a rotary member radiating from an axis for receiving an end of the
    coil.


CLS 242/327.3
TXT Multiple pulleys or hub rollers:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein the mounting means is formed as
    rotatable wheels collectively supporting an inner peripheral portion of the
    coil.


CLS 242/327.4
TXT Cooperating pulley pair:

    Subject matter under subclass 327.3 wherein two rotatable wheels or pulleys
    form a coil support.


CLS 242/328
TXT Unwinding from coil center:

    Subject matter under subclass 324 wherein the information-bearing carrier
    is formed into a supply coil with inner and outer convolutions, and means
    is provided for directing the information-bearing carrier from the inner
    convolution.


CLS 242/328.1
TXT Radially shiftable hub component:

    Subject matter under subclass 328 wherein either the supply or a take-up
    coil is provided with structure engaging the inner or outer coil periphery,
    which structure is either; (a) readily removable from the spool, or (b)
    movable transversely of the coil, to accommodate conditions prevalent in a
    coil during center withdrawal of material (e.g., a removable spacing
    element or yieldable peripheral retainer).


CLS 242/328.2
TXT Driven supply coil:

    Subject matter under subclass 328 wherein the means for directing the
    carrier includes a mechanism separate from the carrier for rotating the
    supply coil.


CLS 242/329
TXT Winding into coil center:

    Subject matter under subclass 324 wherein the information-bearing carrier
    is progressively wound into the inner convolution of the take-up coil to
    provide a leading end of the carrier on the outer convolution available for
    subsequent use.


CLS 242/329.1
TXT Having coil hub expander:

    Subject matter under subclass 329 wherein the take-up coil is mounted on a
    support having a radially adjustable coil supporting component means to
    accommodate a build up of convolutions as they are wound.


CLS 242/330
TXT Simultaneously driven carriers (e.g., separate optic and sound webs):

    Subject matter under subclass 324 comprising separate information-bearing
    carriers and a drive mechanism for unwinding, directing, and rewinding at
    least two carriers at the same time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    530,    for simultaneous, convolute winding of elongated material.


CLS 242/331
TXT Intermediate storage (e.g., low inertia bin):

    Subject matter under subclass 324 comprising a buffer zone specifically
    provided for temporarily storing a length of information-bearing carrier
    between the supply coil and take-up coil, which length is significantly
    greater than the distance taken along a normal carrier path.

    (1)     Note.  A buffer zone accommodates a low inertia reserve length of a
    carrier  during periods of rapid carrier acceleration to avoid excessive
    carrier stress, or at times when driven components may not be in precise
    harmony.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    417+,   for a reserve loop former used to control tension in a more
    generalized elongated material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 125 for a general use
    control stop responsive to length of material.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, may include a nominal
    recitation of a supply or take-up coil (e.g., less than a support for such
    a coil or a cooperative relationship between a tension or exhaust detector
    and reel driving or reel stopping means, etc.); subclass 97.2 for fluid
    current material moving means and means to store a web or subclasses 118.1+
    for intermediate storage means between plural material-moving means.


CLS 242/331.1
TXT Vacuum column:

    Subject matter under subclass 331 comprising means to create a negative
    pressure in a portion of the buffer zone to draw a length of material
    toward the zone.


CLS 242/331.2
TXT Carrier responsive control:

    Subject matter under subclass 331.1 comprising a regulator sensitive to a
    condition of the carrier for determining the amount of the carrier in the
    buffer zone.


CLS 242/331.3
TXT Pneumatic pressure controller:

    Subject matter under subclass 331.2 wherein the regulator comprises a
    device sensitive to the air pressure or its flow to regulate the amount of
    carrier in the buffer zone.


CLS 242/331.4
TXT Photoelectric controller:

    Subject matter under subclass 331.2 wherein the regulator comprises a
    radiation source (e.g., a light beam) and an electron emission receiving
    device for generating a signal proportionate to the length of carrier in
    the buffer zone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, for a detail of a photoelectric device, per se, or
    in combination with generalized structure, particularly subclasses 200+ and
    559.01.


CLS 242/331.5
TXT Having spool or carrier brake control:

    Subject matter under subclass 331 comprising a retarding device acting on
    either a running length of coiled carrier to create or regulate the length
    of carrier in the buffer zone.


CLS 242/332
TXT Including threading:

    Subject matter under subclass 324 comprising a system to facilitate
    advancement of a leading end of the information-bearing carrier from the
    supply coil, along an entrance path of the work station to the take-up coil.

    (1)     Note.  The entrance path indicates a predetermined course that the
    carrier should take as it is operated by the utilization device, typically
    along a guide system to properly relate the carrier to a transducer or
    optic device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    396,    Photography, appropriate subclasses and particularly subclasses
    387+ for a camera structure with winding, feeding, or tensioning film and
    subclasses 612+ for photographic medium feed in a fluid treating apparatus.


CLS 242/332.1
TXT Having particular automated control:

    Subject matter under subclass 332 wherein special significance is
    attributed to a regulating means of the threading device operable in
    response to associating the supply coil with the utilization device or a
    similar operation, which means is designed to function without further user
    intervention.


CLS 242/332.2
TXT Actuated by lead end sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 332.1 wherein operation of the regulating
    means is initiated by detection of a forward portion of the carrier.


CLS 242/332.3
TXT Having pneumatic assist:

    Subject matter under subclass 332 wherein the threading system includes a
    mechanism for directing positively or negatively pressurized air in
    proximity to the carrier to influence progression of the carrier along the
    path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, may include a nominal
    recitation of a supply or take-up coil (e.g., less than a support for such
    a coil or a cooperative relationship between a tension or exhaust detector
    and reel driving or reel stopping means, etc.), subclasses 97.1+ for fluid
    current means to advance the material.


CLS 242/332.4
TXT Having leader gripper or coupling:

    Subject matter under subclass 332 comprising a length of special material
    connected to the leading end of the carrier that is adapted to be grasped
    or joined to a carrier advancing means.

    (1)     Note.  The leader is typically a strip somewhat stiffer than the
    carrier and it may have special configuration or width to aid in
    progression along the threaded path.


CLS 242/332.5
TXT Having rotary extractor (e.g., stripper):

    Subject matter under subclass 332 wherein the threading system includes an
    orbited device adapted to engage and withdraw the outermost convolution of
    carrier from the supply coil.


CLS 242/332.6
TXT Endless belt:

    Subject matter under subclass 332.5 wherein the orbited device is in the
    form of a closed, flexible loop driver to impart movement to the carrier.


CLS 242/332.7
TXT Having carrier to spool attachment means:

    Subject matter under subclass 332 wherein the threading system includes a
    gripper for connecting the leading end of the carrier to a take-up station,
    usually a spool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    532+,   for a winding machine with particular means for retaining an end of
    material to be wound.

    579+,   for a coil holder with particular means for retaining an end of
    material to be wound.


CLS 242/332.8
TXT Slotted spool:

    Subject matter under subclass 332.7 wherein the take-up coil is wound on a
    coil support, typically a spool or similar device, having an elongated slit
    into which the carrier is received and held.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    532.6   and 587+, for an apertured take-up to facilitate a connection
    between the take-up and a material to be wound thereon.


CLS 242/333
TXT Automated stop or reverse:

    Subject matter under subclass 324 comprising a drive mechanism operative to
    advance the information-bearing carrier in one direction during winding and
    a controller to either:  (a) halt operation of the drive mechanism, or (b)
    cause the carrier to move in a second, opposite direction, without user
    intervention.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    410+,   for a sensor adapted to respond to various conditions for
    regulating tension in a running length of material.

    534+    and 563+, for a detector or stop in a winding or unwinding machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 125 for a material
    control stop, per se, of general use.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.13+ for a
    circuit maker/breaker specially designed for operation by a running web or
    strand, spool, or guide.

    250,    Radiant Energy, for a detail of a photoelectric device, per se, or
    in combination with generalized structure, particularly subclasses 200+ and
    559.01.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 69
    through 74.7, and 83 through 96.6 for winding control and carrier support
    structure combined with structure peculiar to the transducing of a magnetic
    information signal.


CLS 242/333.1
TXT Diverse control signal inputs:

    Subject matter under subclass 333 wherein the controller is responsive to
    information generated from dissimilar sources.

    (1)     Note.  One of the information sources may include a preprogrammed
    reference signal used for comparison to a second signal generated as a
    consequence of winding.


CLS 242/333.2
TXT Carrier supported signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 333 wherein the carrier bears an indicant
    used to generate a signal to the controller.


CLS 242/333.3
TXT Carrier engaging tension sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 333 wherein the controller includes a carrier
    guide shiftable in response to stress variation in the carrier.


CLS 242/333.4
TXT Electrical control:

    Subject matter under subclass 333.3 wherein particular significance is
    attributed to a portion of the controller that converts a shift of the
    guide into an electronic signal.


CLS 242/333.5
TXT Coil diameter sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 333 wherein the controller includes an
    operator actuated by the changing radial dimension of carrier wound on
    either the supply or take-up coil.


CLS 242/333.6
TXT Coil rotation sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 333 wherein the controller includes an input
    device actuated in response to rotation of either:  (a) the supply or
    take-up coil, or (b) structure (e.g., a drive element) rotatable with one
    of the coils.


CLS 242/333.7
TXT Electrical control:

    Subject matter under subclass 333.6 wherein particular significance is
    attributed to a portion of the controller that converts a signal from the
    input device into an electronic signal.


CLS 242/334
TXT Carrier speed or tension control:

    Subject matter under subclass 324 wherein a drive mechanism for winding the
    information-bearing carrier includes regulating means for insuring either,
    (a) carrier movement at a desired rate, or (b) a desired level of
    longitudinal stress in the carrier.

    (1)     Note.  Movement of the carrier past a utilization station normally
    is kept at a constant predetermined speed often maintained by regulating
    tension in the carrier as conditions vary.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.13+ for a
    circuit maker/breaker specially designed for operation by a running web or
    strand, spool, or guide.

    250,    Radiant Energy, for a detail of a photoelectric device, per se, or
    in combination with generalized structure, particularly subclasses 200+ and
    559.01.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, particularly
    subclasses 69 through 74.7 for winding control and carrier support
    structure combined with structure peculiar to the transducing of a magnetic
    information signal.


CLS 242/334.1
TXT Plural speeds:

    Subject matter under subclass 334 wherein the regulating means comprises a
    selector for establishing alternative carrier movement rates.


CLS 242/334.2
TXT Diverse signal inputs:

    Subject matter under subclass 334 wherein the regulating means includes a
    mechanism responsive to multiple control inputs from dissimilar sources for
    regulating the rate of movement of the carrier.


CLS 242/334.3
TXT Tachometer-type signal device:

    Subject matter under subclass 334.2 wherein one of the control input
    sources counts turns of a rotatable element adapted to turn in proportion
    to a rate of movement of the carrier.


CLS 242/334.4
TXT Tachometer-type signal device:

    Subject matter under subclass 334 wherein the regulating means includes a
    mechanism responsive to an input signal that counts turns of a rotatable
    element whose speed is proportional to the rate of movement of the carrier.


CLS 242/334.5
TXT Coil diameter or weight responsive sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 334 wherein the regulating means includes a
    mechanism responsive to an input signal representative of either the
    diametrical extent or gravitational force acting on a wound portion of the
    carrier.


CLS 242/334.6
TXT Carrier tension responsive signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 334 wherein the regulating means includes an
    input device sensitive to longitudinal stress in the carrier.


CLS 242/335
TXT Cartridge system (i.e., cartridge work station or cartridge):

    Subject matter under subclass 324 comprising (a) a coil of
    information-bearing carrier mounted on or within a housing, tray, or
    similar support to form a unit removable and repositionable with respect to
    the work station, (b) a work station structure particularly designed to
    receive and relate such unit to the work station, or (c) a combination of
    such a unit and a utilization structure.

    (1)     Note.  Cartridge system is used to denote either a coil support
    unit (cassette or magazine), a cartridge utilization device (e.g., a
    player, projector, or camera), or the combination of the two.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324.2+  and 326+, for cartridge structure for helically or randomly wound
    carrier and endless carrier, respectively.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 385+ and 486+ for
    wound material that may include cartridge storage used in an exhibit or
    sign.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 72 through 78 for a magazine
    in a motion picture projector.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, particularly
    subclasses 83 through 85, 89 through 96.6, 132, and 134 for carrier support
    structure combined with structure peculiar to the transducing of a magnetic
    information signal.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 182+ for a sheet
    film cassette combined with a specified X-ray or gamma ray device.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 511+ for a detachable or removable film
    holder in a camera.


CLS 242/336
TXT Adaptive or convertible:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein the work station or cartridge is
    designed for convenient modification to operate more than one style of
    cartridge (e.g., a work station with an adjustable drive spindle or a
    cartridge carrier adapted to receive a second cartridge to enable the
    second cartridge to conform with a particular work station).


CLS 242/337
TXT Plural (i.e., multiple cartridges per work station):

    Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein multiple units or cartridges are
    arranged for selective movement into an operative association with a work
    station (e.g., a magnetic transducer or film projector lens).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324.2   and 326+, for cassette structure for magnetic wire and endless
    tape, respectively.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 72 through 78 for a magazine
    in a motion picture projector.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 92
    through 96.6 for a magnetic tape cassette.


CLS 242/337.1
TXT Coil to coil:

    Subject matter under subclass 337 wherein each unit or cartridge encloses a
    carrier wound into a supply coil and a separate take-up coil.


CLS 242/338
TXT With insertion responsive component:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein the utilization device or
    cartridge includes control structure actuated in response to shifting of
    the cartridge into an operative relationship with the utilization device to
    influence winding or unwinding.

    (1)     Note.  Insertion of the cartridge is used here to denote
    juxtaposing the cartridge in a working relationship to the utilization
    device (i.e., on or within the utilization device).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    326.1,  for insertion responsive cartridge with an endless tape or film.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.58+ for a
    switch specially designed to be responsive to article insertion in an
    environment that may be analogous to a tape cartridge.


CLS 242/338.1
TXT Releasable brake:

    Subject matter under subclass 338 wherein the control structure comprises
    means engageable with the carrier, coil, or a spool supporting the carrier
    to retard or prevent carrier movement until the means is shifted to a
    disengaged position upon insertion of the cartridge into the utilization
    device.


CLS 242/338.2
TXT With shiftable cover actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 338.1 wherein the cartridge includes a lid
    shifted in response to insertion of the cartridge into a utilization device
    to reposition the engageable means for free movement of the carrier.


CLS 242/338.3
TXT Acting on plural coils:

    Subject matter under subclass 338.1 wherein the retarding member is adapted
    to operate within a cartridge containing separate supply and take-up coils.


CLS 242/338.4
TXT Cartridge positioner:

    Subject matter under subclass 338 wherein the control structure precisely
    locates the cartridge with respect to components of the utilization device
    for proper interaction of the carrier and work station.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 92
    and 93+ for a cartridge device claimed with a particular transducing
    structure.


CLS 242/339
TXT Cartridge ejector:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein the utilization device and/or
    cartridge include a mechanism for disassociating the carrier from the work
    station, typically ejecting the cartridge away from the work station.


CLS 242/340
TXT With particular drive mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein special significance is
    attributed to a coil or capstan power transmission means specifically to
    receive a removable cartridge.


CLS 242/341
TXT Coil-to-coil cartridge:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein the housed coil unit (cartridge)
    has separate supply and take-up coils.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 806 for assembly apparatus for film or tape
    cartridge components.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 385+ and 518+ for
    wound material that may include cartridge storage used in an exhibit or
    sign.

    220,    Receptacles, for receptacle construction that may be appropriate
    for a tape or film cartridge.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 72 through 78 for a magazine
    in a motion picture projector.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, particularly
    subclasses 83 through 85, 89 through 96.6, 132, and 134 for carrier support
    structure combined with structure peculiar to the transducing of a magnetic
    information signal.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 511+ for a detachable or removable film
    holder in a camera.


CLS 242/342
TXT With particular drive coupling:

    Subject matter under subclass 341 wherein special significance is
    attributed to a mechanism associated with a coil or a drive capstan within
    the cartridge to apply force to the elongated material to cause winding or
    unwinding.


CLS 242/343
TXT With brake or lock:

    Subject matter under subclass 341 wherein the cartridge includes means to
    retard or prevent unwanted rotation of the carrier or carrier coil in at
    least one direction.


CLS 242/343.1
TXT Yieldable brake:

    Subject matter under subclass 343 wherein the cartridge is provided with
    means for retarding:  (a) rotation of a spool, or (b) longitudinal movement
    of the carrier.

    (1)     Note.  The means for retarding must allow slippage between itself
    and the spool or carrier on which it acts as contrasted with a positive
    brake.


CLS 242/343.2
TXT Spool or coil engaging:

    Subject matter under subclass 343.1 wherein the means for retarding is
    adapted to engage the coil support or material wound on the support.


CLS 242/344
TXT With indicator or detector:

    Subject matter under subclass 341 wherein the cartridge includes a device
    for either:  (a) measuring the length or other physical condition of the
    carrier, or (b) sensing a physical condition (e.g., completion of a winding
    or unwinding cycle or a particular type of cartridge).

    (1)     Note.  The measuring is not limited to a specific linear indicia,
    but may indicate a portion of material to be wound/unwound or time required
    to wind/unwind.


CLS 242/345
TXT With particular coil support:

    Subject matter under subclass 341 wherein special significance is
    attributed to structure mounting the carrier coil for rotation.

    (1)     Note.  It is common to mount the carrier coil on a rotatable hub
    having one or two coil supporting flanges, or no flange at all with the
    coil resting on static surface or liner of the cartridge.


CLS 242/345.1
TXT Coaxial coils:

    Subject matter under subclass 345 wherein the mounting structure relates
    two or more coils on the same axis of rotation.


CLS 242/345.2
TXT Spring pressed coil or spool:

    Subject matter under subclass 345 wherein the mounting structure includes
    resilient means active in at least one mode to restrain free movement of a
    coil or convolution of a coil, typically to reduce or distribute drag in a
    rotating coil or prevent unwanted upward convolution migration.


CLS 242/345.3
TXT Coil on liner:

    Subject matter under subclass 345 wherein the mounting structure includes
    means to cover or coat at least a portion of an area of contact between the
    mounting structure and coil, typically to regulate frictional drag or
    static electrical charges.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 400+ and 470 for a receptacle lining that
    may be appropriate for a cartridge.


CLS 242/346
TXT With particular guide or guard:

    Subject matter under subclass 341 wherein special significance is
    attributed to either (a) guide means for engaging and directing movement of
    the carrier, or (b) guard means to confine the carrier to a desired path,
    during winding or unwinding.


CLS 242/346.1
TXT Shiftably mounted:

    Subject matter under subclass 346 comprising structure supporting the guide
    or guard means for movement between distinct positions (e.g., operating and
    storage positions) or positions varied with changes in the diameter of a
    carrier coil.


CLS 242/346.2
TXT Rotatable:

    Subject matter under subclass 346 comprising structure supporting the guide
    or guard means for unlimited arcuate movement about an axis.


CLS 242/347
TXT With particular housing construction:

    Subject matter under subclass 341 wherein special significance is
    attributed to a housing configuration or material from which the housing is
    constructed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, particularly subclasses 600+, 639+, and 660+ for
    receptacle construction that may be appropriate to a cartridge.


CLS 242/347.1
TXT Shiftable closure (e.g., door):

    Subject matter under subclass 347 wherein the housing structure forms an
    enclosure provided with an opening selectively closed by a movable panel or
    door.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    338     and 338.2, for a latch for a closure that is released due to
    interaction between the cartridge and the utilization device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 200+ for receptacle closure construction
    that may be appropriate for a cartridge.


CLS 242/347.2
TXT Separable or hinged sections:

    Subject matter under subclass 347 wherein the enclosure structure of the
    cartridge includes two major enclosure portions (e.g., a receptacle with a
    removable cover, detachable end halves, etc.) capable of relative movement
    between open and closed or assembled positions.

    (1)     Note.  For placement here, the major enclosure portions must be
    separable or shiftable to open enough to permit transfer of a normal
    carrier coil in contrast to opening a carrier guide aperture, window, or
    door.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 334+ for hinged receptacle structure that
    may be appropriate for a cartridge.


CLS 242/348
TXT Single coil cartridge (e.g., film magazine):

    Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein the cartridge is adapted to
    retain but a single coil, typically a coil of film adapted to be fed to a
    lens or controlled aperture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 806 for assembly apparatus for film or tape
    cartridge components.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 385+ and 514+ for
    wound material that may include cartridge storage used in an exhibit or
    sign.

    220,    Receptacles, for receptacle construction that may be appropriate
    for a tape or film cartridge.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 511+ for a detachable or removable film
    holder in a camera.


CLS 242/348.1
TXT With carrier inner end collector:

    Subject matter under subclass 348 wherein the cartridge includes structure
    particularly adapted to capture a leading portion of the carrier being
    introduced into the cartridge and direct this portion in a manner to
    enhance orderly winding.


CLS 242/348.2
TXT With carrier outer end retainer:

    Subject matter under subclass 348 wherein the cartridge includes means for
    releasably grasping a radially accessible end portion of the carrier or a
    carrier borne fitting (block) to provide convenient access to the carrier
    end.


CLS 242/348.3
TXT With means to facilitate unwinding:

    Subject matter under subclass 348 wherein the cartridge includes structure
    to promote movement of the elongated material, particularly its leading
    end, from the cartridge.


CLS 242/348.4
TXT Light occludent:

    Subject matter under subclass 348 wherein the cartridge is constructed in a
    particular manner to exclude unwanted light into the cartridge interior,
    typically to avoid light exposure on photosensitive film.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    588.5,  for light occludent structure in a coil holder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    396,    Photography, particularly subclasses 511+ and 589+ for light
    occludent structure in a camera or fluid treatment environment.


CLS 242/349
TXT With particular drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 324 wherein special significance is
    attributed to a mechanism for causing the information-bearing carrier to be
    unwound or rewound, which mechanism may include one or more specific (a)
    energy source, (b) energy converter, (c) transmission, (d) coupling, (e)
    brake or stop, or (f) controller.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    540+    and 564+, for a particular drive in a winding or unwinding machine
    of elongated material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, for a transmission, mechanical
    movement, or component of general use.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, for a drive mechanism controller.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, for a detail of a drive means peculiar to
    a motion picture projector.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, particularly
    subclasses 83 through 85, 89 through 96.6, 132, and 134 for carrier support
    structure combined with structure peculiar to the transducing of a magnetic
    information signal.

    396,    Photography, appropriate subclasses and particularly subclasses
    387+ for a camera structure with winding, feeding, or tensioning film and
    subclasses 612+ for photographic medium feed in a fluid treating apparatus.


CLS 242/350
TXT Manual:

    Subject matter under subclass 349 wherein the drive mechanism includes a
    torque input element adapted to be powered by the user.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282     through 284, for a particular crank in a fishing reel.

    395+,   for a particular manual drive in a reeling device.

    546.1,  for a manual drive in a winding machine.

    564.2,  for a manual drive in an unwinding machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 594.1+ for a detail of a
    crank of general use.


CLS 242/351
TXT Nonelectrical motor:

    Subject matter under subclass 349 wherein the drive mechanism includes an
    energy converter (motor) deriving force from an expanding spring, falling
    weight, dynamic fluid, or other nonelectrical source to cause winding or
    unwinding, which converter may be charged by an electric motor.


CLS 242/352
TXT Simultaneous drive to supply and take-up coils:

    Subject matter under subclass 349 wherein the drive mechanism includes a
    drive input acting on both the supply and take-up spools at the same time
    (e.g., a single motor acting through a divergent transmission to each
    spool).

    (1)     Note.  The drive input may tend to rotate the coils in the same or
    opposite directions.


CLS 242/352.1
TXT Each drive a motor:

    Subject matter under subclass 352 wherein the input includes a separate
    energy converter (motor) for each of the supply and take-up coils.


CLS 242/352.2
TXT With additional linear feed drive motor:

    Subject matter under subclass 352.1 wherein an additional motor powers a
    carrier advancing means (e.g., a capstan, sprocket, or feed claw) adapted
    to engage and move the carrier at a point spaced from the supply and
    take-up coils.


CLS 242/352.3
TXT Coil engaging drive:

    Subject matter under 352 wherein the drive mechanism includes a carrier
    advancing means (e.g., a drive roller or belt) adapted to contact a surface
    of the wound carrier to impart winding or unwinding rotation to the coil.


CLS 242/352.4
TXT Endless belt:

    Subject matter under subclass 352.3 wherein the carrier advancing means
    includes a flexible, closed loop member adapted to engage the supply or the
    take-up coil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    541.3,  for an endless belt drive in a convolute winding device.


CLS 242/352.5
TXT Multiple carrier speeds:

    Subject matter under subclass 352 wherein the drive mechanism includes
    means providing a plurality of selectable carrier drive rates, which rates
    may occur in the same or opposite directions of carrier movement.


CLS 242/353
TXT With yieldable loop former:

    Subject matter under subclass 349 wherein the drive mechanism is associated
    with means (e.g., a biased guide) adapted to contact the carrier to create
    or maintain a desired level of longitudinal stress in the carrier during
    unwinding or rewinding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass excludes brakes or speed control mechanism
    acting on the carrier provided for elsewhere in this schedule.


CLS 242/354
TXT Particular linear feeder (e.g., capstan or sprocket):

    Subject matter under subclass 349 wherein the drive mechanism includes
    advancing means engageable with the carrier at a point spaced from the
    supply or take-up coil for moving the carrier at a uniform rate, and
    special significance is attributed to this feeder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, may include a nominal
    recitation of a supply or take-up coil (e.g., less than a support for such
    a coil or a cooperative relationship between a tension or exhaust detector
    and reel driving or reel stopping means, etc.); subclasses 52+ having means
    to engage longitudinally spaced modifications in material; subclasses 120+
    for an intermittent (interrupted) material-mover; or subclasses 168+ having
    orbitally traveling material-engaging surface(s).

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 578+ and 902 for a feeding device
    in a typewriter.


CLS 242/354.1
TXT Plural:

    Subject matter under subclass 354 wherein the drive mechanism includes
    multiple carrier advancing means.


CLS 242/354.2
TXT With particular manual controller:

    Subject matter under subclass 354 wherein special significance is
    attributed to an actuator under the control of a user for regulating the
    linear feeder (e.g., to engage or disengage the feeder with the carrier).


CLS 242/355
TXT With brake or stop:

    Subject matter under subclass 349 wherein the drive mechanism is associated
    with a device for (a) retarding or (b) terminating winding or unwinding of
    the carrier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, appropriate subclasses for brakes, their operators, and
    similar components as subcombinations and in generalized use.


CLS 242/355.1
TXT Radially applied:

    Subject matter under subclass 355 wherein the means for retarding or
    terminating winding or unwinding is applied to a spool or an element
    rotated with spool in a direction substantially transverse to the axis of
    coil rotation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 74+ for radially applied brakes, per se, and in
    general use.


CLS 242/355.2
TXT By manual operator:

    Subject matter under subclass 355.1 wherein the device for retarding or
    terminating winding or unwinding is shifted in response to user pressure
    applied directly through associated linkage.


CLS 242/356
TXT Alternately or differently driven coils:

    Subject matter under subclass 349 wherein the drive mechanism acts on the
    supply and take-up coils at different times or in a different manner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 385+ and 446+ for a
    spool drive in a winding device for a sign or similar exhibit.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, appropriate subclasses for
    clutches, clutch-brakes, and power-stop controls as a subcombination or in
    general use.

    396,    Photography, appropriate subclasses and particularly subclasses
    387+ for a camera structure with winding, feeding, or tensioning film and
    subclasses 612+ for photographic medium feed in a fluid treating apparatus.


CLS 242/356.1
TXT Coaxial coils:

    Subject matter under subclass 356 wherein the supply and take-up coils are
    supported for rotation about a common axis.


CLS 242/356.2
TXT Step-driven coil:

    Subject matter under subclass 356 wherein the drive mechanism includes
    means for rotating the coils in predetermined increments, usually by an
    oscillated or reciprocated pawl or rack.


CLS 242/356.3
TXT Multiple carrier speeds:

    Subject matter under subclass 356 wherein the drive mechanism includes
    transmission means providing plural winding or unwinding rates.


CLS 242/356.4
TXT With particular manual controller:

    Subject matter under subclass 356.3 wherein the transmission means includes
    a significant manual operator for selecting a desired rate or direction of
    winding or unwinding.


CLS 242/356.5
TXT By friction drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 356 wherein the drive mechanism includes a
    driving element relying on cohesive force for rotating a driven element
    connected to rotate the take-up spool.


CLS 242/356.6
TXT With one-way clutch:

    Subject matter under subclass 356.5 wherein the drive mechanism
    additionally includes a device for transmitting rotation in one direction
    and allowing slippage in the opposite direction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 41+ for a one-way
    clutch, per se, or in general use.


CLS 242/356.7
TXT Radially acting wheel, disk, or belt:

    Subject matter under 356.5 wherein the frictional driving element transfers
    torque to the driven element by pressure applied in a plane transverse to
    an axis of rotation of the driving element.


CLS 242/357
TXT With detector or indicator (e.g., length scale):

    Subject matter under subclass 324 comprising a device to apprise the user
    of a value representing a status of the information-bearing carrier or
    physical condition of the apparatus for handling the carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    410+,   for a sensor adapted to respond to various conditions for
    regulating tension in a running length of material.

    534+    and 563+, for a detector or stop in a winding or unwinding machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.13+ for a
    circuit maker/breaker specially designed for operation by a running web or
    strand, spool, or guide.

    250,    Radiant Energy, for a detail of a photoelectric device, per se, or
    in combination with generalized structure, particularly subclasses 200+ and
    559.01.


CLS 242/358
TXT Particular frame or frame attachment:

    Subject matter under subclass 324 wherein particular significance is
    attributed to structure establishing a fundamental arrangement between the
    take-up coil, supply coil, work station, or a carrier guide path or a
    component of such support structure (e.g., an extensible frame arm, cabinet
    structure, static coil storage magazine, or arrangement of guides).


CLS 242/358.1
TXT Including spool support:

    Subject matter under subclass 358 wherein specific means is provided to
    directly bear either the take-up or supply coil.


CLS 242/360
TXT LOOP FORMING (E.G., WINDING A BUNDLE OF WIRE COILS):

    Apparatus or method under the class definition for either, (a)
    progressively winding an elongated material into convolutions (loops) to
    provide a coreless storage package tending to maintain its shape as a
    consequence of winding, or (b) ancillary means intimately associated with
    such winding apparatus for transferring successive convolutions (loops) or
    convolution groups (bundles) from the winding apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus or method for specifically bending material beyond
    its elastic limit is excluded from this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for winding wire onto a spool to form a package for subsequent
    unwinding.

    47+,    for winding cordage.

    364+,   for a capstan-type device for winding and unwinding material in a
    single direction.

    430+,   for permanently winding material including wire onto a core to make
    a composite article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclass 159 as appropriate for
    coiling a sliver into a can and can replacement.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 66+ and 135+ for the coiling of metal
    purposely bent beyond its elastic limit.

    140,    Wireworking, subclasses 71, 92.1, 92.2, and 124 for the coiling of
    wire beyond its elastic limit.


CLS 242/361
TXT By orbital guide:

    Subject matter under subclass 360 wherein the winding apparatus includes a
    driven material dispenser (flyer or coiling head) movable about a path to
    establish a loop about a winding axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclass 159 for orbital guide used
    to coil a sliver (strand of loose, untwisted fibers) into a can.


CLS 242/361.1
TXT Simultaneous or successive winding:

    Subject matter under subclass 361 wherein the winding apparatus comprises
    either, (a) multiple orbital material guides for concurrently winding
    loops, or (b) discrete loop receiving forms sequentially introduced to an
    orbital dispenser.


CLS 242/361.2
TXT About internal loop form:

    Subject matter under subclass 361 comprising a body, typically a
    cylindrical stationary block, around which the elongated material is placed
    by the orbital guide.


CLS 242/361.3
TXT With loop discharge device:

    Subject matter under subclass 361.2 comprising specific means for expelling
    or directing one loop from the form as a new loop is dispensed.


CLS 242/361.4
TXT With loop collector:

    Subject matter under subclass 361 comprising a specific receptacle,
    spindle, or other support for gathering loops into a group (bundle).


CLS 242/361.5
TXT With loop bundle unloader:

    Subject matter under subclass 361.4 comprising a device for collectively
    removing or releasing a group of loops (bundle) from the loop collector.


CLS 242/362
TXT By rotatably driven loop collector:

    Subject matter under subclass 360 wherein the winding apparatus includes a
    power input means for rotating a take-up member (e.g., spindle, mandrel,
    capstan, or receptacle) to cause the elongated material to be temporarily
    coiled on or in the take-up.


CLS 242/362.1
TXT Simultaneous or successive winding:

    Subject matter under subclass 362 wherein the winding apparatus comprises
    either, (a) multiple rotatably driven take-ups for concurrently winding
    loops, or (b) discrete take-ups sequentially rotated to form loops.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for alternate or successive winding of thread onto a spool.

    25,     for simultaneously winding wires onto storage spools.

    439.4+  and 443.1+, for simultaneously winding material from plural sources
    onto a core to form an article.

    440+    and 445+, for sequentially winding material onto one or more cores
    to form one or more articles.

    530+,   for simultaneously winding convolute coils.

    531+,   for sequential convolute coil winding stations.


CLS 242/362.2
TXT With loop bundle unloader:

    Subject matter under subclass 362 comprising a device for removing or
    releasing a collection of loops (bundle) from the rotatably driven take-up.


CLS 242/362.3
TXT Stripper plate or arm:

    Subject matter under subclass 362.2 wherein the device for removing the
    loop bundle includes an ejecting member adapted to either, (a) push the
    loop bundle from the take-up, or (b) withdraw the collector axially from
    the bundle.


CLS 242/363
TXT With particular loop or coil transfer mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 360 wherein special significance is
    attributed to structure for causing or facilitating either, (a) the
    displacement of successive loops of material to or from a form or
    collector, or (b) a conveyance for a bundle of loops from a form or
    collector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, particularly subclasses
    104+ for a device to advance loops of elongated material.


CLS 242/364
TXT UNIDIRECTIONAL WINDING AND UNWINDING:

    Apparatus or method under the class definition for winding an indefinite
    length material onto a support in one rotary direction and simultaneously
    permitting the material to unwind in the same rotary direction.

    (1)     Note.  The coil may have a single actual axis or a theoretical
    composite axis formed by a series of pulleys, rollers, or spools.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47.01+, for winding and unwinding cordage in the same direction.

    325+,   for unidirectional winding of information-bearing carrier.

    602.1+, for a spool with convolution separator that may facilitate
    unidirectional winding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, may include a nominal
    recitation of a supply or take-up coil (e.g., less than a support for such
    a coil or a cooperative relationship between a tension or exhaust detector
    and reel driving or reel stopping means, etc.); subclass 97.2 for fluid
    current material moving means and means to store a web; subclasses 118.1+
    for intermediate storage means between plural material moving means; or
    subclasses 168+ having orbitally traveling material-engaging surface(s).

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    particularly subclass 373 for a cable-winding capstan of a winch.


CLS 242/364.1
TXT Convolute coil:

    Subject matter under subclass 364 wherein each convolution is placed upon a
    previous convolution.


CLS 242/364.2
TXT Coil formed on a plurality of rotatable members:

    Subject matter under subclass 364 wherein the support includes at least two
    separately rotatable supporting elements about which the coil is formed
    (e.g., a group of sheaves).

    (1)     Note.  The coil may be created as a single run of elongated
    material being sequentially trained as a single pass over a substantial
    number of spaced apart guide elements.


CLS 242/364.3
TXT With radial spacing regulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 364.2 wherein at least one of the supporting
    elements is mounted for movement with respect to another element (e.g., to
    regulate the tension in a length of the elongated material).


CLS 242/370
TXT REELING DEVICE:

    Apparatus or method under the class definition capable of repeatedly
    winding and unwinding an elongated material on a spool or similar support
    mounted on a frame, usually by power applied by a drive mechanism, to
    either rotate a spool or orbit a guide about a stationary spool.

    (1)     Note.  The terms reeling device or reel are used here to denote a
    device typically including a frame, a spool, and a drive mechanism to cause
    elongated material to be alternately wound and unwound, not to be confused
    with reel commonly used to denote the material holder or spool, per se.

    (2)     Note.  An inclusive exception is made for a disclosure of:

    (a)     a particular spool provided with a distinct hand grip that replaces
    a distinct frame;

    (b)     a frame-supported, stationary spool on which the same material is
    to be hand wrapped replacing the typical drive mechanism, or

    (c)     a drive mechanism mounted on a frame for winding and unwinding a
    material in which the inner convolution (e.g., a metal tape) serves in lieu
    of a distinct spool.

    (3)     Note.  Excluded from this section is a coil holder to which a
    previously wound coil is introduced for dispensing even though a manual
    drive may be provided with a drive mechanism such as a crank to rewind a
    temporary excess of dispensed material.

    (4)     Note.  Reeling apparatus normally provide convenient storage for
    material in contrast to a winch or hoist that moves or lifts a load
    attached to the material. However, practical similarities justify an
    exception wherein convenient storage of material is dominant over
    accommodation of a possible load as in fishing and seatbelt reels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclass 502 for a reeling
    device for positioning a specified pool cover.

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 151+ for a reeling device for positioning
    material with respect to a specified treatment apparatus.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 256.5+ for a
    reeling device combined with a brush or similar structure for cleaning
    running material as it is wound or unwound.

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 3+ for an article holder
    that may include a reeling component (e.g., to wind and unwind an article
    tether).

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 117, 118,
    and 153 for a reeling device for handling strand or web subjected to a
    Class 34 art process or apparatus.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, particularly subclasses 347,
    348, 385+, 470+, 483, 514, 518, and 529 for a reeling device combined with
    a specific register, file, or changing exhibitor.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 8, 20, 21, 25,
    26.1, 42.28+, and 57.3 for a reeling device combined with apparatus
    particularly useful in the capture of fish.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 120+,
    170+, and 238+ for a reeling device for positioning a specified closure
    member or similar panel.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, particularly subclasses
    34, 52, 195+, 736, and 745 for a reeling device combined with a specified
    fluid coupling to a hose or other conduit.

    248,    Supports, particularly subclasses 75, 266, 329, 330.1, and 492 for
    a reeling device with a particular supporting structure.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    particularly subclasses 264+ for reeling structure specially constructed or
    used to haul or hoist a disconnectable load.

    362,    Illumination, particularly subclasses 258, 388, and 407 for a
    reeling device for an electrical conductor combined with an electrical
    connector.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclasses 23+ for a reeling
    device used to tether a specified buoy.

    451,    Abrading, subclass 176 for a reeling device used to position a work
    piece relative to an abrading station.


CLS 242/371
TXT With spring motor:

    Subject matter under subclass 370 wherein the drive mechanism includes a
    resilient member (spring) adapted to store energy that is selectively
    released to cause winding or unwinding of the elongated material to or from
    a coil.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses provide for a reeling
    device having a spring motor (e.g., a coiled spring or twisted rubber band)
    serving as the source of power, but not a spring device exclusively used to
    absorb movement or couple elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226,    and 251 through 254, for a spring-powered drive in a fishing reel.

    351,    for a nonelectrical motor drive for rewinding and unwinding a
    machine convertible carrier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 3+ for an article holder
    that may include a spring-retracted tether.

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, particularly subclasses 413, 414, 754, and
    761+ for a reeling device combined with a specific straight edge cord
    (chalk line) or flexible distance measuring element (e.g., measuring tape).

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclass 81.4 for a
    spring-biased strop retractor in a tool or implement making apparatus or
    process.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 794 and 796 for a reeling device for a
    specific animal tethering structure (e.g., a dog leash).

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 245
    and 301 through 308 for a spring-powered roller associated with a shiftable
    closure.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 268 and 271+ for a spring reeling device
    with a safety belt or harness associated with vehicle structure.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 232 and 237 for a
    reeling device having a spring motor to rewind a specified body harness
    cable or rope ladder of a fire escape.

    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, or Animal Powered, subclasses 37, 40, and
    43 through 45 for a spring motor of general utility.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 122+ for a spring-powered reeling device
    combined with a safety belt or harness in aircraft structure.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 364 for a spring motor combined with a winch or hoist drum.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 166+ for spring structure detail.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 290 and 801.1+ for a safety belt or
    harness reeling device combined with vehicle structure.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 475 through 486 for a restraint belt
    or harness reeling device combined with seat structure.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 402 for a lamp support that may be coiled on
    a spring powered spool.

    433,    Dentistry, subclass 78 for a retractable hose in a specified dental
    storage cabinet.


CLS 242/372
TXT Plural springs:

    Subject matter under subclass 371 wherein the spring motor includes two or
    more resilient members.


CLS 242/373
TXT Spring exhibits special torque characteristic:

    Subject matter under subclass 371 in which particular significance is
    attributed to the nature of the spring providing the spring motor with
    either, (a) a predetermined variable torque, or (b) constant torque over a
    selected operating range.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, particularly subclasses 151 through 181 for a
    detail of a spring, per se, or of general use.


CLS 242/374
TXT With auxiliary force rewinding:

    Subject matter under subclass 371 including an alternative or supplemental
    power source (e.g., an explosive charge) to cause forced winding of the
    material.


CLS 242/375
TXT Spring attachment:

    Subject matter under subclass 371 wherein particular significance is
    attributed to either (a) a support for the spring, or (b) a connection of
    the spring to the spool, elongated material, or frame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, or Animal Powered, subclass 45 for a
    mounting feature of a spring motor of general use.


CLS 242/375.1
TXT Spring force adjustment:

    Subject matter under subclass 375 including particular means for presetting
    the amount of torque exerted by the spring motor prior to winding or
    unwinding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, particularly subclass 89 for a detail of a spring
    adjustment of a spring, per se, or in general use.


CLS 242/375.2
TXT Pretensioned spring attachment:

    Subject matter under subclass 375 in which stress is applied to the spring
    prior to connecting the spring to the elongated material or the spool for
    the material.


CLS 242/375.3
TXT With transmission:

    Subject matter under subclass 375 wherein the spring is connected to the
    spool, elongated material, or frame through rotary force converting means
    (e.g., gears, belts, chains).


CLS 242/376
TXT Particular spool structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 371 wherein special significance is
    attributed to the spool that stores the coiled material.


CLS 242/376.1
TXT Particular bearing:

    Subject matter under subclass 376 wherein the spool includes an especially
    significant element mounting the spool for rotation.


CLS 242/377
TXT Particular guide structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 371 wherein special significance is
    attributed to structure for directing the elongated material along a
    selected path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157     through 157.1, for a guide for longitudinally moving strand.

    397     through 397.5, for a guide associated with a reeling device of
    general utility.

    615     through 615.4, for a longitudinally moving material guide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, may include a nominal
    recitation of a supply or take-up coil (e.g., less than a support for such
    a coil or a cooperative relationship between a tension or exhaust detector
    and reel driving or reel stopping means, etc.), subclass 196.1 for a
    passive guide combined with a material feeder.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 389+ for a cable guide.


CLS 242/378
TXT Multiple windings:

    Subject matter under subclass 371 wherein distinct coils of elongated
    material are wound or unwound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    388     and 388.6 through 388.8, for multiple windings on a reeling device
    of general use.

    530+    and 531+, for a winding machine accommodating multiple windings.

    603,    for a spool with multiple winding surfaces.


CLS 242/378.1
TXT Of centrally gripped material:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 wherein the elongated material is grasped
    near its longitudinal midpoint by the spool to form plural sections of
    material that are simultaneously wound or unwound.

    (1)     Note.  A reel found in this and the indented subclasses winds or
    unwinds two convolutions of material per spool revolution.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    388.1   through 388.4, for centrally gripped material in a general purpose
    reel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, particularly subclasses 258 and 407 for a reeling
    device for an electrical conductor combined with an electrical connector.


CLS 242/378.2
TXT End segment anchored:

    Subject matter under subclass 378.1 wherein an end of one of the sections
    of material remote from the spool is fixed.

    (1)     Note.  A reel found in this subclass typically moves toward an
    anchored end of the material during winding and has utility as a yieldable
    slack take-up device (e.g., for an electrical cord or leash).


CLS 242/378.3
TXT Material supported spool:

    Subject matter under subclass 378.2 wherein the spool is borne by the
    anchored material.


CLS 242/378.4
TXT On independent spools:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 wherein separately rotatable drums are
    provided for supporting the plurality of distinct coils.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    388.6   through 388.8, for plural spools in a general use reel.


CLS 242/379
TXT Particular frame or frame carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 371 wherein special significance is
    attributed to either (a) a housing for the spool, or (b) a structure for
    supporting a spool housing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310     through 321, for a frame for a fishing reel.

    398+,   for a frame or frame-mounting feature of a general use reel.


CLS 242/379.1
TXT Energy or stress absorption structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 379 wherein the frame or carrier is
    specifically constructed to transfer force in the elongated material to the
    frame with minimized distortion of associated components.


CLS 242/379.2
TXT Frame carrier feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 379 wherein special significance is
    attributed to support structure for carrying the frame.


CLS 242/380
TXT Material irregularity (e.g., knot) engageable with stop:

    Subject matter under subclass 371 wherein the elongated material is
    provided with an enlargement, knot, or other modification that is adapted
    to engage a stationary portion of the frame (e.g., a guide) to limit
    winding or unwinding.


CLS 242/381
TXT Yieldable brake (e.g., friction or fluid):

    Subject matter under subclass 371 including a device to significantly
    retard rotation of the spool or material during winding or unwinding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    285+,   for a fishing reel brake.

    396,    396.5, and 396.9, for a brake of a general purpose reel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, particularly subclasses 413, 414, 754, and
    761+ for a reeling device combined with a specific straight edge cord
    (chalk line) or flexible distance measuring element (e.g., measuring tape).

    188,    Brakes, appropriate subclasses for brakes, their operators, and
    similar component in general use.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 375, 377, and 378 for a brake for a winch drum.


CLS 242/381.1
TXT Material engaging:

    Subject matter under subclass 381 wherein the brake includes a portion
    engageable with the elongated material (e.g., along an uncoiled length of
    the material) for retarding winding or unwinding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    396.5,  for a material engaging brake in a general purpose reel.


CLS 242/381.2
TXT Engages wound material:

    Subject matter under subclass 381.1 wherein the material engaging brake
    portion is engageable with the coiled material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    292     through 294, for a fishing reel brake.

    396.6+, for a spool or coil engaging brake in a general purpose reeling
    device.

    422.5+, for a coil engaging brake in general winding or unwinding use.


CLS 242/381.3
TXT Manually operated:

    Subject matter under subclass 381.1 wherein the brake includes an actuator
    portion actuated by pressure exerted by a user for applying a retarding
    force on the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291     through 294, for a manually applied fishing reel brake.

    396.5+, for a manually applied brake in a general utility reel.


CLS 242/381.4
TXT Tension responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 381.1 comprising a device for sensing a
    degree of slackness in the elongated material, which device actuates the
    brake.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    287,    for a tension responsive, fishing reel brake.

    419.1,  421.8, and 421.9, for a material tension sensitive brake of general
    utility.


CLS 242/381.5
TXT Centrifugal:

    Subject matter under subclass 381 wherein the brake is responsive to a
    radial force generated as the result of rotation of the spool about an axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    289,    for a centrifugal fishing reel brake.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    particularly subclass 267 for a speed control for a hoist drum.


CLS 242/381.6
TXT Manually operated:

    Subject matter under subclass 381 in which the brake includes an actuator
    adapted to be directly engaged by a user.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291     through 294, for a manually applied fishing reel brake.

    396.5,  396.7+, and 396.9, for a user-applied brake in a general purpose
    reel.


CLS 242/382
TXT Lock against spool unwinding:

    Subject matter under subclass 371 including a positive brake (lock) adapted
    to prevent rotation of the spool in at least an unwinding direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    297     through 300, for a positive brake in a fishing reel.

    396.1   through 396.4, for a positive brake in a general purpose reel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 575+ for pawl and ratchet
    structure in general use.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 268+ for a reeling device for a seatbelt
    or occupant harness under the control of a motor vehicle part (e.g., an
    ignition switch).

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 82.1+ for a one-way brake of general use.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.45+ and
    61.58 for a seatbelt responsive maker/breaker.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 122 for a reeling device for a seatbelt of a
    specified aeronautic device.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying a Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 310, 357, and 376 for a positive one-way brake for a winch or
    hoist drum.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 290 and 801.1+ for a reeling device to
    store a seat well or body harness in combination with specified land
    vehicle structure.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, particularly subclasses 475+ for a reeling device
    for a seatbelt or other restraint incorporated with specified seat
    structure.


CLS 242/382.1
TXT Material responsive (e.g., automatic lock):

    Subject matter under subclass 382 in which the unwinding lock includes an
    actuator operated in response to the completion of a predetermined cycle of
    material unwinding, which cycle may be a set time period, a length of
    unwound material, change in direction of spool movement, termination of
    unwinding, or similar condition, but excludes actuation responsive to
    unwinding speed or acceleration, per se.

    (1)     Note.  Typically these devices permit initial unwinding (e.g., for
    seatbelt placement) that completes the unwinding cycle and actuates the
    unwinding lock.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286     through 289, for a fishing reel brake responsive to unwinding line,
    and 413+,418.1+, 419+, and 421.1+, for a material-responsive tension
    control in a winding or unwinding apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    particularly subclasses 270 through 276 for a hoist drum control actuated
    in response to a cable or cable associated structure.


CLS 242/382.2
TXT Convertible to emergency locking:

    Subject matter under subclass 382.1 wherein the unwinding lock further
    includes an alternate actuator operable in response to an extreme, usually
    hazardous condition.


CLS 242/382.3
TXT Time delay:

    Subject matter under subclass 382.1 wherein the predetermined cycle is
    established by means providing a set interval of disablement of the
    unwinding lock, which means may be a conventional elapsed timer, counter,
    or other device that repetitively operates over a short, constant time span.


CLS 242/382.4
TXT Predetermined length of material unwound:

    Subject matter under subclass 382.1 in which the predetermined cycle is
    established by means disabling the unwinding lock until a set length of
    material is unwound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    particularly subclass 276 for a hoist drum having a control actuated in
    response to a number of drum rotations.


CLS 242/382.5
TXT Alternately engaged locking pawls:

    Subject matter under subclass 382 in which the positive brake includes
    plural blocking lugs (pawls), one or the other of which can be actuated to
    prevent unwinding.


CLS 242/382.6
TXT Shiftable spool body:

    Subject matter under 382 comprising structure mounting the spool for
    displacement to effect locking.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    particularly subclass 268 for a hoist control responsive to shifting of the
    cable drum.


CLS 242/383
TXT Material speed responsive (e.g., belt sensitive):

    Subject matter under subclass 382 in which the unwinding lock is associated
    with an actuator responsive to an undesired change in velocity of the
    material (e.g., seatbelt) being unwound from the spool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.45+ for a
    circuit maker/breaker specially designed to be responsive to acceleration,
    inertia, tilting, or the like.


CLS 242/383.1
TXT With lock prevention or sensitivity reduction:

    Subject matter under subclass 383 including means for either (a)
    temporarily disabling, or (b) reducing the responsiveness of the unwinding
    lock.


CLS 242/383.2
TXT Inertia operator:

    Subject matter under subclass 383 wherein the actuator for the unwinding
    lock includes a mass adapted to provide particular sensitivity to
    acceleration, which mass actuates the unwinding lock in response to
    undesired changes in the unwinding velocity of the material.


CLS 242/383.3
TXT Axially movable lock:

    Subject matter under subclass 383.2 in which the unwinding lock includes a
    braking member (e.g., a slidable pawl) shiftable in a direction
    substantially parallel to the axis of the spool to prevent unwinding.


CLS 242/383.4
TXT Frame mounted locking pawl:

    Subject matter subclass 383.2 wherein the unwinding lock includes a
    blocking lug or dog adapted to cooperate with structure movable with the
    spool to prevent or limit unwinding.


CLS 242/383.5
TXT Opposed pawls on spool:

    Subject matter under subclass 383.2 wherein the unwinding lock includes
    lugs (pawls) supported at arcuately spaced points on the spool.


CLS 242/384
TXT Frame movement responsive (e.g., vehicle sensitive):

    Subject matter under subclass 382 wherein the unwinding lock includes an
    actuator that senses a condition of the frame (e.g., orientation or
    movement) for applying the unwinding lock.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.45+ for a
    circuit maker/breaker specially designed to be responsive to acceleration,
    inertia, tilting, or the like.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    particularly subclass 286 for a hoist drum having a control actuated in
    response to relative movement between hoist components.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 290 and 801.1+ for a safety belt or
    harness reeling device associated with particular vehicle structure.


CLS 242/384.1
TXT With lock prevention or sensitivity reduction:

    Subject matter under subclass 384 including means for either (a)
    temporarily disabling, or (b) reducing the responsiveness of the unwinding
    lock.


CLS 242/384.2
TXT With pilot pawl:

    Subject matter under subclass 384 wherein the unwinding lock includes a
    shiftable positioning link (pawl) for guiding the unwinding lock into a
    locking position.


CLS 242/384.3
TXT Axially movable lock member:

    Subject matter under subclass 384 wherein a portion of the unwinding lock
    is mounted for movement in a direction parallel to the axis of the spool
    during movement of the unwinding lock from an unlocked position to the
    spool locking position.


CLS 242/384.4
TXT Multiply positionable operator:

    Subject matter under subclass 384 including means for selectively varying
    the orientation of the unwinding lock actuator.


CLS 242/384.5
TXT Pendulum operator:

    Subject matter under subclass 384 wherein the actuator of the unwinding
    lock is a mass eccentrically mounted with respect to its center of gravity
    to be extremely sensitive to the orientation or acceleration of the frame
    for applying the unwinding lock.


CLS 242/384.6
TXT Ball operator:

    Subject matter under subclass 384 wherein the actuator includes a spherical
    member adapted to roll in response to a change in orientation or speed of
    the frame to apply the unwinding lock.


CLS 242/384.7
TXT Manually operated:

    Subject matter under subclass 382 wherein the unwinding lock includes an
    actuator adapted to be directly engaged by a user.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291     through 294, for a manually applied fishing reel brake.

    396.5   and 396.7 through 396.8, for a user-applied brake in a general
    purpose reel.


CLS 242/385
TXT Lock against spool winding:

    Subject matter under subclass 371 including a positive brake (lock) adapted
    to selectively prevent rotation of the spool in the winding direction.

    (1)     Note.  A winding lock is usually applied after a desired length of
    the elongated material is unwound to prevent premature rewinding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 82.1+, for one-way brakes of general use.


CLS 242/385.1
TXT Material movement responsive (e.g., window shade type):

    Subject matter under subclass 385 wherein the winding lock includes an
    actuator operated in response to either (a) movement of the material, or
    (b) rotation of the spool, to shift the winding lock between active and
    inactive positions.


CLS 242/385.2
TXT With additional lock release:

    Subject matter under subclass 385.1 comprising a supplemental actuator for
    shifting the winding lock to an inactive position.


CLS 242/385.3
TXT Movable locking pawl on frame:

    Subject matter under subclass 385.1 wherein the winding lock includes a
    blocking lug or dog mounted on the frame and releasably engageable with
    structure movable with the spool to prevent or limit winding.


CLS 242/385.4
TXT Manually operated:

    Subject matter under subclass 385 in which the winding lock includes an
    actuator adapted to be directly engaged by a user.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, particularly subclasses 413, 414, 754, and
    761+ for a reeling device combined with a specific straight edge cord
    (chalk line) or flexible distance measuring element (e.g., measuring tape).


CLS 242/386
TXT With orbital wrapping guide:

    Subject matter under subclass 370 wherein the drive mechanism rotates a
    material directing member about the spool to coil the elongated material
    onto or into a normally stationary spool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224+,   for a fishing reel that frequently employs an orbital wrapping
    guide.

    405.1   and 405.2, for a hand-held, hand-wrapped reel.


CLS 242/387
TXT Axial unwinding:

    Subject matter under subclass 370 wherein the elongated material is
    uncoiled over an end of the spool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128,    for axial unwinding from a spool.

    224     through 248, for axial unwinding in a fishing reel.

    593,    for axial unwinding from a spool holder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, for axial unwinding for
    applying a twist to strand.


CLS 242/388
TXT Multiple windings:

    Subject matter under subclass 370 wherein discrete elongated materials or
    distinct segments of a single elongated material are wound onto one or more
    spools commonly supported on the frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    378+,   for a spring reel for multiple windings.


CLS 242/388.1
TXT Of centrally gripped material:

    Subject matter under subclass 388 wherein the elongated material is grasped
    near its longitudinal midpoint by the spool to form plural segments of
    material that are simultaneously wound or unwound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    378+,   for multiple winding segments wound onto a spool powered by a
    spring motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 355.16 for a reeling device for a hose
    combined with a specified connection between a fluid supply and a hose.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 258 and 407 for a reeling device for an
    electrical conductor combined with means providing an electrical connection.


CLS 242/388.2
TXT With material snagging lock (e.g., midline tightener):

    Subject matter under subclass 388.1 wherein the reeling device includes a
    stationary catch to grasp the elongated material to prevent uncoiling.

    (1)     Note.  A midline tightener typically uses a spool positioned over a
    center portion on wire whose ends are fixed so that rotation of the spool
    winds from the center toward fixed ends to tension the wire for removing
    sag, which tightener requires means (e.g., a wire engaging hook or bridge)
    to prevent backward rotation of the entire device and thereby loss of
    tension.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 119.15 for a clothesline tightener
    associated with a clothesline pole.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 213+ for a rotated drum used in a stretching tool disengageable
    from the material being stretched.


CLS 242/388.3
TXT With unidirectional brake:

    Subject matter under subclass 388.2 wherein the reeling device includes a
    one-way mechanism (e.g., a pawl and ratchet) permitting winding rotation of
    the spool while preventing reverse rotation of the spool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 575+ for a pawl and
    ratchet of general use.

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 82.1+ for a one-way brake of general use.


CLS 242/388.4
TXT With integrated crank:

    Subject matter under subclass 388.2 wherein the reeling device includes an
    elongated handle member permanently joined to the spool for rotating the
    spool.


CLS 242/388.5
TXT With mounting frame:

    Subject matter under subclass 388.1 wherein the spool is carried by a
    stationary fundamental support toward which ends of the elongated material
    are drawn during winding.


CLS 242/388.6
TXT Plural spools or spool portions:

    Subject matter under subclass 388 wherein the reeling device includes
    multiple spools or distinct spool sections, each for receiving a separate
    elongated material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    378.4,  for multiple take-ups in a spring-powered reeling device.

    530+,   for multiple take-ups on a convolute winding machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    particularly subclasses 278+ for a hoist with multiple winding drums or
    drum sections.


CLS 242/388.7
TXT Alternatively driven:

    Subject matter under subclass 388.6 wherein the drive mechanism is capable
    of rotating a single one of the plurality of spools or spool sections at a
    time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    531+,   for alternately driven take-ups in a convolute winding machine.


CLS 242/388.8
TXT Single power source (e.g., clutched spools):

    Subject matter under subclass 388.7 wherein the drive mechanism includes a
    single power source selectively connectable to an individual spool or spool
    section by a torque transmitting coupling.


CLS 242/389
TXT With particular drive (e.g., ratchet drive, motor driven):

    Subject matter under subclass 370 wherein special significance is
    attributed to the drive mechanism for causing the elongated material to be
    wound or unwound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249+,   for a drive mechanism in a fishing reel.

    349+,   540, and 564, for a particular drive in other winding or unwinding
    devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 386 and 518+ for a
    particular drive for a reeling device combined with a specific register or
    changing exhibitor.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, for a transmission detail of general
    use.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, for a detail of a clutch or stop
    control in a transmission of general use.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force, for
    a particular drive in a winch or hoist.


CLS 242/390
TXT Motor powered:

    Subject matter under subclass 389 wherein the drive mechanism includes
    means to convert potential energy into kinetic energy (motor).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225     and 250, for a motor-powered fishing reel.

    540+,   for a winding machine with a particular drive that may include a
    motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 470+ for a
    motor-operated reeling device combined with a specific register or changing
    exhibitor.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 266+, particularly subclasses 339 through 373 for a motor-driven
    drum of a winch or hoist.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 877 and 903 for a
    particular antenna adapted to be wound.


CLS 242/390.1
TXT With material length stop:

    Subject matter under subclass 390 comprising motor control means sensitive
    to the amount of material wound on or unwound from the spool to interrupt
    winding or unwinding.

    (1)     Note.  The control means may include either a direct length
    measuring device or an indirect measuring device such as a turn counter or
    object carried by the elongated material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    534.2,  for a length-responsive stop in a winding machine.

    563.2,  for an unwinding machine with a length-responsive detector or stop.

    564.1+, for an unwinding machine with a limited interval drive.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 713+, 734, 754, and 761+, for a
    sounding device or a flexible measuring tape reel.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 125 for a material
    control stop, per se, or in general use.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.13+ for a
    circuit maker/breaker specially designed for operation by a running web or
    strand, spool, or guide.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 269 and 276 for a brake or drive control device responsive to
    the length of wound or unwound line of a winch.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 207.11+ for length
    of material measurement, per se, or in other combinations.


CLS 242/390.2
TXT For unwinding:

    Subject matter under subclass 390 wherein the motor can be actuated to
    cause uncoiling of the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    564+,   for an unwinding machine with a drive means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 877 and 903 for a
    particular wound antenna.


CLS 242/390.3
TXT With coil constrainer:

    Subject matter under subclass 390.2 wherein the spool includes or is
    associated with means to restrain wound convolutions of the elongated
    material from shifting away from the spool.

    (1)     Note.  A coil constrainer typically retains convolutions of
    material tightly against a spool that might otherwise spring away from the
    spool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    547,    for a pressure element engaged with a coil of convolute material
    during winding.

    580     and 580.1, for a coil holder with means to retain the outer end of
    wound, elongated material.


CLS 242/390.4
TXT Weight:

    Subject matter under subclass 390 wherein the drive mechanism includes
    significant mass associated with or made a part of the spool to assist in
    winding the elongated material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, or Animal Powered, subclasses 27+ for a
    detail of a weight motor, per se, or in general use.


CLS 242/390.5
TXT Fluid:

    Subject matter under subclass 390 wherein the motor uses either hydraulic
    or pneumatic pressure to rotate the spool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    351,    for a nonelectric drive for winding or unwinding a
    machine-convertible car-rier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 291 and 361 for a fluid motor drive for the drum of a winch.


CLS 242/390.6
TXT With speed or torque control:

    Subject matter under subclass 390.5 wherein particular significance is
    attributed to a means for regulating the rate of winding or unwinding or
    power produced by the fluid motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    particularly subclasses 267, 274, and 275 for a speed or torque regulator
    in a winch of hoist drive.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, for a motor control of general
    use.


CLS 242/390.7
TXT Vehicle motor (e.g., power take-off):

    Subject matter under subclass 390 wherein a land, air, or water conveyance
    derives its locomotive power from a motor that also rotates the spool or
    orbits a wrapping guide either directly or via a power take-off
    transmission.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass excludes vehicle supported reeling devices in
    which either:  (a) the spool is driven by traction (e.g., ground-driven or
    a ground-driven wheel), or (b) the spool is related to the vehicle solely
    by being fixed to a vehicle supporting wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, particularly subclasses 13 through 15
    for a wheel-powered take-off device of general use.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 7.5 for a vehicle-mounted winch on a tow
    truck.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    particularly subclasses 282 and 328 for a hoist drum mounted on a vehicle
    and rotated by the motor of the vehicle.


CLS 242/390.8
TXT Electric:

    Subject matter under subclass 390 wherein the motor is powered by
    electrodynamic force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250,    for an electric motor used to drive a fishing reel spool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 292 and 362 for an electric motor used to drive the drum of a
    winch.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, for electrical motor
    structure of general use.


CLS 242/390.9
TXT With speed or torque control:

    Subject matter under subclass 390.8 wherein particular significance is
    attributed to a means for (a) regulating the rate of winding or unwinding
    or (b) power produced by the electric motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, for an electric motor control
    of general use.


CLS 242/391
TXT Traction driven spool (e.g., ground engaging):

    Subject matter under subclass 389 wherein the drive mechanism includes
    force transmitting structure (e.g., a flange connected to the spool)
    engageable with a generally planar surface, including a floor, ground,
    wall, rail, or water, for inducing rotation of the spool as a result of
    locomotion of the reeling device along the surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    111,    Planting, subclasses 44 and 45 for a reeling device used to actuate
    a planting drill seeder at selected intervals.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    particularly subclasses 279+ and 323+ for a drum drive in a hoist or winch.


CLS 242/391.1
TXT Spool shiftable clear of traction surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 391 wherein the spool is movable from a
    position of driving engagement with the surface to a position disengaged
    from the surface (e.g., to permit unwinding).


CLS 242/391.2
TXT With spool drive transmission:

    Subject matter under subclass 391 wherein the force transmitting structure
    includes a mechanism for converting rotation of a traction input into
    rotation of the spool that is modified as to speed, direction, or axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    349,    for a particular drive in a winding machine.

    564,    for a particular drive in an unwinding machine.


CLS 242/391.3
TXT Belt or chain:

    Subject matter under subclass 391.2 wherein the mechanism converting
    rotation includes an flexible, endless force transferring element to rotate
    the spool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    352.4+  and 356.7, for a belt drive in a machine-convertible system.

    541.3,  for a belt drive in a winding machine.


CLS 242/392
TXT Spool on vehicle wheel or axle:

    Subject matter under subclass 389 wherein the drive mechanism includes
    means for attaching the spool for rotation with an axle, hub, tire, or tire
    support of a conveyance typically to aid in extracting the conveyance from
    an undesired location.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, particularly subclasses 13 through 15
    for a wheel power take-off device of general use.


CLS 242/393
TXT Peripherally driven spool:

    Subject matter under subclass 389 wherein the spool or material wound onto
    the spool provides an outer circumferential surface to which torque is
    applied by the force transmitting structure to rotate the spool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    541+,   for a surface-driven coil in a winding machine.

    564.5,  for a coil-engaging drive in an unwinding machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    111,    Planting, subclasses 44 and 45 for a peripherally driven reeling
    device adapted to actuate a seeder (i.e., a check row planter).


CLS 242/394
TXT Releasable spool drive (e.g., clutched spool):

    Subject matter under subclass 389 wherein the drive mechanism includes an
    input means selectively connectable to the spool by a torque transmitting
    coupling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257+,   for a clutched fishing reel drive.

    545,    for a clutched winding machine drive.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 519, 521, and 523 for
    a clutched drive in a reeling device for a particular changing exhibitor.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, appropriate subclasses for
    clutches, clutch-brakes, and power-stop controls as a subcombination or in
    general use.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    particularly subclasses 345, 346+, 355+, and 365+ for a clutched drive for
    the drum of a winch or hoist.


CLS 242/394.1
TXT Limited torque (e.g., slip coupling):

    Subject matter under subclass 394 wherein the torque transmitting coupling
    transfers rotation to the spool by a friction connection that can yield
    when encountering resistance to rotation beyond a predetermined amount.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264,    for a slip drive in a fishing reel.

    356.5,  for a friction drive in a machine-convertible information system.

    545.1,  for a slip drive in a winding machine drive.


CLS 242/395
TXT Manually rotatable crank or wheel:

    Subject matter under subclass 389 wherein the force transmitting structure
    includes an input element adapted to be engaged and rotated by a user's
    hand or finger.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282     through 284, for a particular crank in a fishing reel.

    350,    for a manual drive in an machine convertible information system.

    546.1,  for a manual drive in a winding machine.

    564.2,  for a manual drive in an unwinding machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 543+ for a handle in a
    generalized combination and subcombination.


CLS 242/395.1
TXT Foldable spool drive crank:

    Subject matter under subclass 395 wherein the input element includes an
    elongated member with an offset manual grip, which member includes a hinged
    or similarly formed portion pivotally mounting the input element for
    movement from a operating position to a retracted, storage position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284,    for a collapsible handle in a fishing reel.


CLS 242/396
TXT With brake:

    Subject matter under subclass 370 comprising a retarding device for
    arresting or preventing rotation of the spool or winding member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156+,   for a brake associated with a strand winding device.

    422.1+, for a brake for a winding or unwinding device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 73+ and 231+ for a
    reeling device with a brake designed to retard unwinding of a specified
    body harness or rope ladder.

    188,    Brakes, appropriate subclasses for a brake, brake operator, or
    similar component as a subcombination and of generalized use.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    particularly subclasses 375+ for a brake in a load hoist or winch device.


CLS 242/396.1
TXT Positive:

    Subject matter under subclass 396 wherein the retarding device prevents
    rotation of the spool or winding member in at least one direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    297+,   for a positive brake in a fishing reel.

    382+    and 385+, for a positive brake in a spring powered reel.

    395.1,  for a spool lock in the form of a handle rotatable with the spool
    and foldable to intersect a stationary frame part.

    410,    for a positive brake for a winding or unwinding machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 575+ for pawl and ratchet
    structure as a subcombination and in combination with generalized structure.

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 82.1+ for a one-way brake of general use.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    particularly subclasses 356 and 376 for a brake for a hoist or winch drum.


CLS 242/396.2
TXT One-way:

    Subject matter under subclass 396.1 wherein the retarding device prevents
    rotation of the spool or winding member in one direction while permitting
    rotation thereof in the opposite direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    298+,   for a one-way brake in a fishing reel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    402,    Binder Device Releasably Engaging Aperture or Notch of Sheet,
    subclass 10 for a reeling device for applying tension to a pliant sheet
    retainer (e.g., a strap).


CLS 242/396.3
TXT Reversible:

    Subject matter under subclass 396.2 wherein the retarding device is
    shiftable to an alternate position to permit rotation in the first named
    direction and prevent rotation in the second direction.


CLS 242/396.4
TXT Ratchet and radial pawl:

    Subject matter under subclass 396.2 wherein the retarding device comprises
    a blocking element and a toothed element, one fixed to the frame and the
    other being rotatable with the drive mechanism, which elements are of a
    dimension and shape to permit the elements to pass each other when the
    drive is rotated in one direction but which abut in a manner to prevent
    rotation in the opposite direction.


CLS 242/396.5
TXT Friction:

    Subject matter under subclass 396 wherein the retarding device is adapted
    to contact and rub against an element induced to move as a consequence of
    unwinding of the elongated material, which element may be the spool,
    winding member, the elongated material, or structure movable with these
    elements.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass serves to collect friction brakes applied to a
    running material, rotatable wrapping guide, or transmission structure
    remote from a spool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243+    and 285+, for a brake in a fishing reel.

    381+,   for a yieldable brake in a spring-powered reeling device.

    421+,   for a brake used in a winding or unwinding machine or to tension
    running material.


CLS 242/396.6
TXT Applied to coil or spool (e.g., radial):

    Subject matter under subclass 396.5 wherein the retarding device includes a
    retarding member adapted to be applied to:  (a) wound material, (b)
    structure directly supporting the wound material, or (c) structure closely
    associated with and directly rotating coaxially with the wound material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, particularly subclasses 413, 414, 754, and
    761+ for a reeling device combined with a specific straight edge cord
    (chalk line) or flexible distance measuring element (e.g., measuring tape).


CLS 242/396.7
TXT User pressure application:

    Subject matter under subclass 396.6 wherein the retarding device includes
    an actuator shifted by force applied by an operator of the reeling device
    at any given instant to increase the resistance to unwinding rotation as
    long as the force is applied.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291     through 294, for a manually applied brake in a fishing reel.

    381.6,  for a manually applied brake in a spring-powered reel.


CLS 242/396.8
TXT Radially applied:

    Subject matter under subclass 396.7 wherein the retarding device is applied
    in a direction at a substantial angle (e.g., 450 to 1350) from the axis
    about which the material is wound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301,    for a radially applied brake in a fishing reel.

    422.4+, for a radially applied, yieldable brake in a winding or unwinding
    machine.


CLS 242/396.9
TXT Axially applied:

    Subject matter under subclass 396.6 wherein the retarding device is applied
    in a direction substantially parallel (i.e., from 00 to 440) to the axis
    about which the material is wound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302+,   for an axially applied brake in a fishing reel.

    423+,   for an axially applied brake in a winding or unwinding machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 71.1+ for an axially applied brake, per se, or
    in general use.


CLS 242/397
TXT With particular guide or guard:

    Subject matter under subclass 370 wherein the reeling device includes a
    means for directing, confining, or moving the elongated material along a
    desired path to or from the spool.

    (1)     Note.  A guide directs the elongated material by normally
    maintaining continued contact or influence (e.g., magnetic or fluid
    reaction) on the elongated material while a guard may limit movement of
    errant material without normally contacting the material.

    (2)     Note.  A guide designed to provide significant resistance to
    material movement is treated as a tensioner or brake.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157+,   for a guide for strand material.

    548+,   for a guide or guard combined with a winding machine.

    566,    for a guide or guard combined with an unwinding machine.

    615+,   for a guide or guard for running material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    particularly subclasses 389+ for a guide adapted to direct a line of a load
    hoist or winch.

    492,    Roll or Rollers, for a guide of general use.


CLS 242/397.1
TXT Guide boom or tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 397 wherein the means for directing the
    material includes an elongated unit to direct the material for a
    substantial length.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for an elongated guide commonly in
    the form of a tube or a plurality of guides commonly mounted and jointly
    defining an elongated path, but excludes a collection of plural,
    independent guides.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 26.1 for a
    reeling device with a tubular guide combined with apparatus for directing a
    separate fishing line (e.g., a downrigger).


CLS 242/397.2
TXT Shiftably mounted guide (e.g., material distributor):

    Subject matter under subclass 397 wherein the means for directing material
    includes a guide movable on the frame between discrete positions.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass collects guides for either evenly distributing
    material or simply shiftable between two discrete positions (e.g.,
    operative and storage modes).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26.2+,  26.4+, 26.45, 26.5, and particularly subclasses 158+ for a device
    for distributing material during winding.


CLS 242/397.3
TXT Driven shifting device (e.g., cam, crank, or screw):

    Subject matter under subclass 397.2 wherein the drive mechanism is
    connected with means for moving the guide to distribute the elongated
    material as the drive mechanism causes the material to be wound onto the
    spool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158.1   through 158.5, for a mechanically traversed guide.

    241+,   for a spinning-type fishing reel with a line distributing device.

    273     and 277 through 281, for a fishing reel with a mechanically
    operated guide to distribute material onto a rotating spool.


CLS 242/397.4
TXT Manually operated:

    Subject matter under subclass 397.2 wherein the means for directing the
    material includes a portion providing direct engagement by a hand or finger
    of the user for shifting of the guide during winding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241+    and 276, for a manually shifted line guide for a fishing reel.


CLS 242/397.5
TXT Rotary guide:

    Subject matter under subclass 397 wherein the means for directing the
    material is mounted to revolve about an axis.


CLS 242/398
TXT With particular frame or frame carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 370 wherein special significance is
    attributed to either:  (a) the frame of the reeling device or, (b) a
    structure (carrier) for mounting the reeling device on a support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, for a reeling device for
    positioning a pool cover.

    114,    Ships, subclass 254 for a line storage reel for a towing cable in
    ship structure.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 794 and 796 for a reel device combined
    with a specific animal tethering structure (e.g., dog leash).

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 355.16 for a hose reel combined with a
    specified connection between a fluid supply and a hose.


CLS 242/399
TXT Plural spool positions:

    Subject matter under subclass 398 wherein the frame includes structure for
    either:  (a) supporting the spool in alternative positions within the
    frame, or (b) for supporting the frame for movement from one to another
    position on the carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    391.1,  for a spool shiftable between traction drive and nondrive positions
    (e.g., between ground-engaging and elevated positions).

    591+,   for a coil holder adapted for use in plural positions.


CLS 242/399.1
TXT With discrete actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 399 comprising a distinct operating device
    for shifting the spool relative to the spool frame or carrier (e.g., to
    regulate distribution of the material being wound, or to align the spool
    with a desired winding path, etc.).


CLS 242/399.2
TXT Arcuately displaced positions:

    Subject matter under subclass 399 wherein the structure supporting the
    frame accommodates the frame or spool in any of a plurality of positions
    displaced from each other substantially along a curve (e.g., to permit the
    spool to align itself in different planes of winding or unwinding).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    591     and 592, for a repositionable coil holder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 794 and 796 for a reeling device for
    positioning a specified animal tether.


CLS 242/400
TXT Combined with nonreel device:

    Subject matter under subclass 398 wherein the reeling device is either:
    (a) an ancillary component supported on an article of manufacture to store
    an elongated wound member associated with the article of manufacture (e.g.,
    an electric or fluid conductor of a portable appliance or tool), or (b)
    consolidated with an ancillary article of manufacture (e.g., a storage
    facility incorporated in the frame).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    905,    for a storage chamber with a winding, unwinding, or reeling device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclass 502 for a reeling
    device for a pool cover.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 8, 20, 21, 25,
    26.1, 42.28+, and 57.3 for a reeling device possibly combined with various
    fishing implements.

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 905 for a power plant with an ancillary
    winding or reeling device.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 355.16 for a hose spool with a fluid
    coupling for the hose.

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, subclass 12.2  for a spool
    having an electrically conductive connection with a wound conductor.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 195 for a fluid
    coupling between a reeling device and fluid conductor.

    362,    Illumination, particularly subclasses 258, 387, and 407 for a
    reeling device for an electrical conductor combined with a light source.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, particularly subclass 13
    for a specific writing implement combined with a paper dispenser.

    433,    Dentistry, subclass 78 for a retractable hose in a specified dental
    storage cabinet.


CLS 242/400.1
TXT Hand wrapped:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein the elongated material is adapted
    to be grasped by the user to be wound or unwound by orbiting the user's
    hand about a stationary spool.


CLS 242/401
TXT Collapsible or knockdown:

    Subject matter under subclass 398 wherein components of the frame or
    carrier are connected together by means for either:  (a) shiftably
    mounting, or (b) separably connecting the components with respect to each
    other for readily reducing at least one spatial dimension of the reeling
    device.


CLS 242/402
TXT With material segment retainer:

    Subject matter under subclass 398 wherein the frame includes significant
    structure to grip or otherwise retain:  (a) a portion of the elongated
    material, or (b) an object carried by the elongated material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 57.3 for a reel
    combined with a trotline (long line carrying depending drop lines, each
    with a fish hook at its free end).


CLS 242/403
TXT Mobile carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 398 wherein the carrier includes means (e.g.,
    wheels or skids) for facilitating arbitrary movement of the reeling device
    from one location to another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    390.7,  and 391 through 391.3, for a vehicle-mounted reel with either motor
    or traction drive for the spool or winder.

    557,    for a mobile unwinding station.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, particularly subclasses 47.131+ for details of a
    hand truck or wheelbarrow of general use.


CLS 242/403.1
TXT Single primary axle (e.g., hand cart):

    Subject matter under subclass 403 wherein the carrier has one or more
    wheels or runners offset toward one end of the frame so that the frame may
    be tilted upward to otherwise clear the frame from static surface contact
    for locomotion by a human or draft animal (e.g., a wheelbarrow, hand truck,
    or pony cart).


CLS 242/404
TXT Releasable mounting (e.g., separable fastener):

    Subject matter under subclass 398 wherein the frame is readily removable
    from the carrier by the provision of retainer means formed as either, (a) a
    special coupling formation (e.g., a bayonet, keyhole, or threaded joint),
    or (b) a special connector (e.g., a threaded fastener or band).


CLS 242/404.1
TXT Flexible strap or harness:

    Subject matter under subclass 404 wherein the retaining means is either (a)
    a flaccid band, cord, or similar element, or (b) an assembly of these
    elements for releasably retaining the frame on its carrier, which carrier
    may be the user.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclass 162 for a carrier of an
    article that may be a spool.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 137+ for a
    hand carrier of general use.


CLS 242/404.2
TXT Clamp (e.g., C-clamp):

    Subject matter under subclass 404 wherein the retaining means includes
    shiftably related parts forming a disengageable pressure fit between the
    frame and its carrier.


CLS 242/404.3
TXT Hook, ring, or hanger:

    Subject matter under subclass 404 wherein the retaining means includes a
    connector (e.g., a crook, clasp, safety pin, hasp, or grommet) formed with
    a curvilinear or offset portion by which the frame is releasably suspended
    from the carrier.


CLS 242/405
TXT Hand carried:

    Subject matter under subclass 398 wherein the reeling device is portable,
    and either:  (a) sized to fit in the user's hand, or (b) provided with a
    special manual grip or handle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    588.1+, for a hand- or body-carried coil holder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, particularly subclasses 413, 414, 754, and
    761+ for a reeling device used in combination with a specific straight line
    or distance determination (e.g., a reel for a chalk line or measuring tape).

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, particularly subclasses 543+ for a
    handle of general use.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 794 and 796 for a reeling device for a
    specified animal tether.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclass 162 for an article carrier
    of general use adapted to be manually supported.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, particularly subclasses
    137+ for a hand-held article carrier.


CLS 242/405.1
TXT Hand wrapped:

    Subject matter under subclass 405 wherein the elongated material is wound
    about the spool by the user grasping the material and orbiting the material
    and spool relative to each other.


CLS 242/405.2
TXT With distinct handle:

    Subject matter under subclass 405.1 wherein the frame is provided with a
    portion particularly configured to provide a convenient point for the user
    to grasp and support the reeling device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 543+ for a handle in
    generalized combination or subcombination.


CLS 242/405.3
TXT With distinct handle:

    Subject matter under subclass 405 wherein the frame is provided with a
    portion particularly configured to provide a convenient point for the user
    to grasp and support the reeling device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    588.2,  for a coil holder with a hand grip.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 543+ for a handle in
    generalized combination or subcombination.


CLS 242/406
TXT With special base or mounting member (e.g., attachment socket or stake):

    Subject matter under subclass 398 wherein the frame includes a special
    supporting foundation, bracing, or staking for at least semi-permanently
    positioning the reeling device on a carrier surface (e.g., a floor, ground,
    wall, rail).

    (1)     Note.  Typically found here are bases that rely on gravity or a
    mounting fastener such a nailed bracket or a ground stake.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, particularly subclasses 34.6 and 34.8
    for a cabinet adapted for use with rolled material.


CLS 242/407
TXT With particular spool:

    Subject matter under subclass 370 wherein special significance is
    attributed to the line holder (spool) of the reeling device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118+,   for a strand spool.

    322,    for a particular spool in a fishing reel.

    600+,   for a spool, per se, or in general use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, subclasses 122+, 133, and 150 for a music roll spool
    combined with a drive or tracking board peculiar to a musical instrument or
    subcombination.

    114,    Ships, subclass 254 for a line storage reeling device of a
    specified ship.

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclasses 254+ for a winding or traction drum in combination with elevator
    structure.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    particularly subclass 374 for an irregularly shaped drum for a hoist or
    winch.


CLS 242/407.1
TXT Collapsible or knockdown:

    Subject matter under subclass 407 wherein components of the spool are
    connected together by means for either:  (a) shiftably mounting, or (b)
    separably connecting the components with respect to each other, for readily
    reducing at least one spatial dimension of the spool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for a skein holder that may be collapsible.

    529,    for a winding device having means to contract or expand a spool or
    other coil holder during winding.

    571+,   for a device adapting a coil holder including a spool to be
    collapsed or expanded.

    607+,   for a spool with a releasible joint that may permit convenient
    disassembly.


CLS 242/410
TXT TENSION CONTROL OR BRAKE:

    Apparatus or corresponding method under the class definition for either:
    (a) regulating the longitudinal stress (tension) in an indefinite length of
    running material, or (b) retarding or selectively stopping rotation of a
    coiled material.

    (1)     Note.  Stress regulation includes longitudinal tension added or
    subtracted by:  (a) retardation or drag added to a supply, (b) adjusting
    supply and take-up rates to maintain tension within desired limits, or (c)
    temporarily storing material in a reserve formation during an abundance of
    supply or shortage of demand.

    (2)     Note.  Stress regulation as used here excludes:  (a) incidental
    tensioning created by contact of moving material with a static element such
    as a guide unless the element is explicitly provided to create tension
    (e.g., by special surface, tortuous course, etc.), (b) braking incidental
    to a specified manufacturing or materials handling operation such as
    splicing, cutting, stamping, reciprocal feeding, etc., (c) a brake applied
    to the material for the purpose of completely halting movement, or (d) a
    device to create appreciable lasting tension in an article (e.g.,
    prestressed concrete, pressure vessel, etc.).

    (3)     Note.  This subclass is the locus for a positive brake applied to a
    spool or other coil holder of a winding or unwinding device not
    specifically provided for earlier in this schedule.

    (4)     Note.  Where a tensioner is claimed with no significant structure
    but merely in terms of the composition of material of which it is composed,
    the tensioner will be classified as a brake subcombination or in the
    appropriate composition or material class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclass 194 for tensioning threads being
    wound onto a warp beam (elongated take-up).

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 452 for tensioning material in a
    manufacturing operation.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, particularly subclasses 126, 130, 146, 151,
    and 158 for a strand tensioner in a specified knitting process or apparatus.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 575+ for pawl and ratchet
    structure as a subcombination or in combination with generalized structure.

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, subclass 61 for a
    tension device combined with a braiding or related machine.

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 254 and 255 for a tensioner combined with a
    specific sewing process or apparatus.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 33 for a tensioner combined with
    material coating means.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 200, 201, and 212+ for a tensioning
    means associated with a weft supply apparatus.

    188,    Brakes, appropriate subclasses for general purpose braking,
    particularly subclasses 64 through 65.1 for strand brakes capable of
    halting strand movement.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, for devices regulating the
    transfer of drive power in various applications.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.13+ for a
    circuit maker/breaker specially designed for operation by a running web or
    strand, spool, or guide.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, particularly subclasses
    37+ and 195 for a tensioner combined with a feeder that may include a
    nominal material coil.

    250,    Radiant Energy, for a detail of a photoelectric device, per se, or
    in combination with generalized structure, particularly subclasses 200+ and
    559.01.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    particularly subclasses 267 through 277 for a tension control in a winch or
    hoist.

    303,    Fluid-Pressure and Analogous  Brake Systems, for general purpose
    retarding devices associated with a fluid pressure regulator.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 6, 7, and 362+ for tensioning and brakes of various
    uses.


CLS 242/411
TXT Cyclic material reserve (e.g., irregularly shaped take-up):

    Subject matter under subclass 410 comprising a mechanism to create and
    release a reserve length of the elongated material during each: (a)
    rotation of a winding member or take-up, or (b) material demand stroke of
    an ancillary machine.


CLS 242/412
TXT Take-up coil drive control:

    Subject matter under subclass 410 comprising a tension regulating system
    acting on a winding coil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331+,   333+, and 334+, for a drive control for an information-bearing
    carrier.


CLS 242/412.1
TXT With supply control:

    Subject matter under subclass 412 wherein the tension regulating system
    acts on both the winding coil and a delivery device (e.g., a supply coil).


CLS 242/412.2
TXT Plural condition sensors (e.g., slack loop sensors):

    Subject matter under subclass 412.1 wherein the tension regulating system
    includes multiple detecting elements.


CLS 242/412.3
TXT Diverse (e.g., slack loop and diameter sensors):

    Subject matter under subclass 412.2 wherein the tension regulating system
    includes dissimilar detecting elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333.1   and 334.2, for diverse sensors for controlling an
    information-bearing carrier.


CLS 242/413
TXT With material condition sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 412 wherein the tension regulating system
    includes a detector actuated in response to a physical state of the
    elongated material.


CLS 242/413.1
TXT Plural sensors:

    Subject matter under subclass 413 wherein the tension regulating system
    includes multiple detectors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333.1   and 334.2+, for plural sensors that control an information-bearing
    carrier.


CLS 242/413.2
TXT Coil diameter responsive sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 413 wherein the detector acts in response to
    a change in the radial dimension of wound material as measured from an axis
    of rotation of the winding coil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333.5   and 334.5, for a coil diameter sensor for a machine convertible
    information carrier.

    421.2,  for a coil diameter sensor used in a supply coil brake control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 61.15 for a
    switch designed to be actuated in response to a quantity of wound material.


CLS 242/413.3
TXT Slackness sensor (e.g., photocell or load cell):

    Subject matter under subclass 413 wherein the elongated material is wound
    onto the roll and is adapted to move along a desired path, and the detector
    responds to undesired deviation of the material from that path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331.2+, 333.3+, and 334.6, for a material engaging sensor used to control
    an information-bearing carrier.

    418.1,  419.1, 420.6, and 421.5+, for a slackness sensor in various
    material supply devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    particularly subclasses 272+ for a cable-deflected control for regulating
    winding in a winch or hoist.


CLS 242/413.4
TXT With power control circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 413.3 wherein the winding coil is driven by a
    prime mover at a rate proportional to the energy supplied through a
    metering network included in the stress regulating device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    390.6,  for a power controller of a fluid motor in a reeling device.


CLS 242/413.5
TXT Electrical:

    Subject matter under subclass 413.4 wherein the metering network regulates
    electrodynamic energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    390.9,  for a power controller of an electric motor in a reeling device.


CLS 242/413.6
TXT Switch actuated:

    Subject matter under subclass 413.5 wherein the energy metering network
    includes current contacts made conductive or nonconductive in response to
    the detector.


CLS 242/413.7
TXT Transmission control:

    Subject matter under subclass 413.3 wherein the winding coil is driven by a
    prime mover acting through a mechanical motion transfer mechanism (e.g.,
    drive chain or gearing), which mechanism is under the control of the
    tension regulating system.


CLS 242/413.8
TXT Yieldable drive (e.g., clutch or slip coupling):

    Subject matter under subclass 413.7 wherein the mechanical motion transfer
    mechanism includes means to either (a) effectively separate (clutch), or
    (b) alter torque transfer ability (coupling), of elements of the motion
    transfer mechanism, which means is under the control of the tension
    regulating system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264+,   for a yieldable drive for a fishing reel.

    356.5+, for a friction drive for winding a machine convertible carrier.

    394+,   for a clutch or coupling in the drive of a reeling device.


CLS 242/413.9
TXT Speed of running material sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 413 wherein the detector measures the rate of
    movement of the elongated material to be wound for regulating the winding
    rate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334.4,  for a tachometer-type sensor for control of the speed or torque in
    a winding device for an information-convertible carrier.


CLS 242/414
TXT Power control circuit (e.g., fluid regulating network):

    Subject matter under subclass 412 wherein the winding coil includes a prime
    mover operated at a rate determined by the amount of energy supplied, and
    the tension regulating system includes means to adjust the supplied energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334+,   for a speed or torque control in a winder of an information-bearing
    carrier.

    390.6,  for a speed or torque control in a reeling device.


CLS 242/414.1
TXT Electrical circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 414 wherein the adjusting means includes a
    system of electron conductors to adjust the energy supplied to the prime
    mover.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    390.9,  for a control for regulating electrical power to a motor in a
    reeling device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 6, 7, and 362+ for tensioning means or brake of
    general use.


CLS 242/415
TXT Transmission control:

    Subject matter under subclass 412 wherein the winding roll includes a prime
    mover connected to the winding coil by a mechanical motion transfer
    mechanism (e.g., drive chain or gearing), which mechanism is under the
    control of the tension regulating system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334+,   for a speed or torque control for winding an information-bearing
    car-rier.


CLS 242/415.1
TXT Yieldable drive (e.g., clutch or slip coupling):

    Subject matter under subclass 415 wherein the mechanical motion transfer
    mechanism includes a means to either:  (a) effectively separate, or (b)
    alter torque transfer ability of elements of the motion transfer mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257+    and 264+, for a releasable drive in a fishing reel.

    356.5+, for a friction drive in a drive for an information-bearing carrier.

    394+,   for a releasable spool drive in a reeling device.


CLS 242/416
TXT Supply controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 410 wherein the apparatus for regulating
    tension includes either a tension control system or retarding device acting
    on an elongated material source in the form of:  (a) a delivery coil, (b) a
    feeder associated with a coil, (c) fabricating equipment, or (d) other
    generalized delivery means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334+,   for a speed or tension control for winding an information-bearing
    car-rier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 125 for a material
    control stop, per se, or of general use.


CLS 242/417
TXT Reserve loop former:

    Subject matter under subclass 416 wherein the apparatus includes a
    mechanism to create a low inertia surplus of material available during
    short intervals of above normal demand to avoid excessive stress in the
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331+,   for an intermediate storage device for an information-bearing
    carrier.

    552     and 554+, for an intermediate storage device that may be created as
    a temporary material source to compensate for irregular supply rates
    accompanying a change of supply.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, may include a nominal
    recitation of a supply or take-up coil (e.g., less than a support for such
    a coil or a cooperative relationship between a tension or exhaust detector
    and reel-driving or reel-stopping means, etc.); subclass 97.2 for fluid
    current material moving means and means to store a web; subclasses 104+ for
    festooning apparatus; or subclasses 118.1+ for intermediate storage means
    between plural material moving means.


CLS 242/417.1
TXT Pneumatic:

    Subject matter under subclass 417 wherein the mechanism for creating a low
    inertia supply utilizes positive or negative air pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331.3,  for a pneumatic control of a low inertia loop supply of
    information-bearing carrier.


CLS 242/417.2
TXT Plural loops:

    Subject matter under subclass 417 wherein the mechanism for creating a low
    inertia supply includes means for forming multiple reserve formations of
    material.


CLS 242/417.3
TXT Yieldable loop former:

    Subject matter under subclass 417 wherein the mechanism for creating a low
    inertia supply includes structure lightly biased in one direction against
    the material to form a material surplus formation (loop), but shiftable in
    an opposite direction to relinquish the surplus as tension in the material
    increases.


CLS 242/418
TXT Feeder associated with coil:

    Subject matter under subclass 416 wherein the elongated material source
    includes a powered material advancing means (feeder) associated with a
    coil, which means is under control of the tension control system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for a tensioner or brake associated with a particular material feeding
    device.


CLS 242/418.1
TXT Slackness sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 418 wherein the material is adapted to be
    advanced along a path by the feeder at a rate to establish a desired level
    of material tension that is reflected by a degree of gravitational or
    similar sag of an unsupported portion of the material, and the tension
    control system includes a detector actuated in response to deviation of the
    material from an acceptable degree of sag to adjust the rate of advancement
    by the feeder to thereby reestablish the desired tension.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    413.3+, for a slack sensor used in regulating a take-up coil drive.

    419.1,  for a slack sensor used in regulating the drag developed by a guide.

    420.3,  for a slack sensor used in regulating a peripheral drive for a
    supply roll.

    420.6,  for a slack sensor used in regulating an electrical control circuit
    of a supply coil drive.

    421.5+, for a slack sensor used in regulating a supply coil brake.


CLS 242/419
TXT Drag on running material:

    Subject matter under subclass 416 wherein the apparatus for regulating
    tension in the elongated material includes mean to apply a retarding force
    against linearly advancing material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147+,   for a strand engaging tensioner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 65.1 for a strand engaging brake adapted to
    completely halt strand movement.


CLS 242/419.1
TXT Slackness sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 419 wherein the elongated material moves
    along a desired path subject to a degree of gravitational or similar sag
    proportional to the stress in the material, and the tension control system
    includes means to apply a retarding force against the running material in
    response to a detector actuated in response to deviation of the material
    from the desired path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    413.3+, for a slack sensor used in regulating a take-up coil drive.

    418.1,  for a slack sensor used in regulating the drag developed by a
    feeder.

    420.3,  for a slack sensor used in regulating a peripheral drive for a
    supply roll.

    420.6,  for a slack sensor used in regulating an electrical control circuit
    of a supply coil drive.

    421.5,  for a slack sensor used in regulating a supply coil brake.


CLS 242/419.2
TXT Coil diameter sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 419 wherein the means to apply a retarding
    force against the running material is regulated in response to a detector
    actuated by a change in the radial dimension of a roll of material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334.5,  for a coil diameter sensor for regulating the speed or tension in
    an information-bearing carrier.

    413.2,  for a take-up coil diameter sensor for regulating the tension being
    wound onto the coil.

    421.2,  for a supply coil diameter sensor for regulating a supply coil
    brake.


CLS 242/419.3
TXT Pneumatic or magnetic:

    Subject matter under subclass 419 wherein the apparatus for regulating
    tension in the elongated material utilizes either:  (a) positive or
    negative air pressure, or (b) magnetic flux.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147,    for an air pressure tensioning means for a strand.

    150,    for a magnetic operator for a disk brake acting against a strand.


CLS 242/419.4
TXT Clamping:

    Subject matter under subclass 419 wherein the apparatus for regulating
    tension in the elongated material includes shiftably related parts between
    which the running material is adapted to be squeezed to apply a retarding
    force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149,    for a clamp to apply tension to a strand.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 216 and 217 for a spring clamp brake
    element engaging weft material moving to a specified weaving station.


CLS 242/419.5
TXT Rotary (e.g., pinch pair rollers):

    Subject matter under subclass 419.4 wherein at least one guide is a roller
    or ball.


CLS 242/419.6
TXT Successive:

    Subject matter under subclass 419 wherein the apparatus for regulating
    tension in the elongated material includes multiple directing elements or
    guides acting on the running material at distinct points spaced along the
    path of the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153+,   for tortuous course tensioning means for strand.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 214 and 215 for successive brake
    elements engaging weft material on its way to a weaving apparatus.


CLS 242/419.7
TXT Shiftable (e.g., variable tortuous course):

    Subject matter under subclass 419.6 wherein one of the successive guides is
    shiftable to vary the extent of contact between the running material and
    guide to vary the retarding force against the running material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154,    for an adjustable tortuous course tensioning means for strand.


CLS 242/419.8
TXT Rotary:

    Subject matter under subclass 419 wherein the apparatus for regulating
    tension in the elongated material includes a material directing element or
    guide capable of turning about its axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155+,   for a rotary wheel or pulley for tensioning strand.


CLS 242/419.9
TXT With brake or clutch:

    Subject matter under subclass 419.8 wherein the material directing element
    or guide is associated with a retarding device (brake) or releasable
    coupling (clutch) by which an overall retarding force applied to the
    running material can be controlled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156+,   for a brake for retarding strand.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, appropriate subclasses for a brake, per se, or of general
    use.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, appropriate subclasses for a
    clutch, clutch-brake, or power-stop control as a subcombination or of
    general use.


CLS 242/420
TXT Supply coil drive control:

    Subject matter under subclass 416 wherein the elongated material source is
    a delivery coil adapted to be rotated by a mechanism at an adjustable rate
    determined by the tension regulating system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331     and 334, for a tension or speed control for an information carrier.

    538.1,  for a coordinated drive for a supply and take-up of a convolute
    winding machine.

    564,    for a drive for unwinding from a supply coil.


CLS 242/420.1
TXT Peripheral drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 wherein the delivery coil rotating
    mechanism includes means engaging and rotating an outer perimeter of the
    delivery coil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    541+,   for a peripheral drive of a convolute winding machine.


CLS 242/420.2
TXT Belt:

    Subject matter under subclass 420.1 wherein the delivery coil rotating
    mechanism includes a flexible, closed loop drive member engageable with the
    outer circumference of the delivery coil for rotating the coil in an
    unwinding direction.


CLS 242/420.3
TXT Slackness sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 420.2 wherein the drive member is associated
    with a detector responsive to the degree of gravitational or similar sag in
    the material being unwound from the delivery coil, which detector is a
    material stress information input component of the tension regulating
    system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    413.3+, for a slack sensor used in regulating a take-up coil drive.

    418.1,  for a slack sensor used in regulating the drag developed by a
    feeder.

    419.1,  for a slack sensor used in regulating a drag on a running length of
    material.

    420.6,  for a slack sensor used in regulating an electrical control circuit
    of a supply coil drive.

    421.5,  for a slack sensor used in regulating a supply coil brake.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    particularly subclasses 272+ for a cable-deflected control for regulating
    winding in a winch or hoist.


CLS 242/420.4
TXT Clutch:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 wherein the mechanism for rotating the
    supply coil includes a coupling disposed between a prime mover and the
    supply coil, which coupling can interrupt or transfer rotation between the
    prime mover and supply coil under control of the tension regulating system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    413.7+, for a transmission control that may include a clutch or coupling
    for controlling tension in a material being wound onto a coil take-up.


CLS 242/420.5
TXT Electrical control circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 wherein the supply coil is rotated by a
    prime mover at a rate proportional to the amount of electrodynamic energy
    supplied to the prime mover as determined by an energy regulating network.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    414.1,  for an electrical control circuit for regulating a material take-up.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 6, 7, and 362+ for tensioning and brakes of various
    uses.


CLS 242/420.6
TXT Slackness sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 420.5 wherein the energy regulating network
    is adjusted by a detector responsive to the degree of sag or stress in the
    elongated material being unwound from the supply coil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    413.3+, for a slack sensor used in regulating a take-up coil drive.

    418.1,  for a slack sensor used in regulating the drag created by a
    material feeder.

    419.1,  for a slack sensor used in regulating the drag developed by a guide.

    420.3,  for a slack sensor used in regulating a peripheral drive for a
    supply roll.

    421.5,  for a slack sensor used in regulating a supply coil brake.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    particularly subclasses 272+ for a cable-deflected control for regulating
    winding in a winch or hoist.


CLS 242/421
TXT Supply coil brake control:

    Subject matter under subclass 416 wherein particular significance is
    attributed to a tension regulating system for adjusting a retarding device
    applied to a delivery coil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    285,    for a brake in a fishing reel.

    331.5,  for a brake for an information-bearing carrier.

    396,    for a brake in a reeling device.

    419.9,  for a brake acting on a rotary material guide for regulating
    tension in the material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 218+ for friction means to retard
    weft material moving toward a specified weaving station.

    188,    Brakes, appropriate subclasses for a brake, brake operator, or
    similar component as a subcombination and of generalized use.


CLS 242/421.1
TXT Plural sensors:

    Subject matter under subclass 421 comprising multiple detectors serving as
    information input components of the tension regulating system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333.1   and 334.2+, for plural sensors for controlling an
    information-bearing carrier.

    413.1,  for plural sensors acting for controlling a material take-up.


CLS 242/421.2
TXT Coil diameter sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 421 comprising a detector responsive to
    changes in the radial dimension of a coil, which detector serves as a
    material condition information input component of the tension regulating
    system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333.5   and 334.5, for a coil diameter sensor for regulating an
    information-bearing carrier.

    413.2,  for a coil diameter sensor for regulating tension in a take-up coil
    drive

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 61.15 for a
    switch designed to be actuated in response to a quantity of wound material.


CLS 242/421.3
TXT Coil weight sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 421 comprising a detector responsive to
    changes in the mass of a coil, which detector serves as a material
    condition information input component of the tension regulating system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334.5,  for a coil weight sensor for regulating an information-bearing
    carrier.


CLS 242/421.4
TXT Speed, torque, or revolutions sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 421 comprising a detector responsive to one
    of:  (a) the rate of movement of the material or coil, (b) the force
    exerted to wind or unwind material, or (c) the number of turns of a roll of
    material or rotatable indicator associated with the material or roll, which
    detector serves as a material condition input component of the tension
    regulating system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334+,   for means to control the speed or tension of an information-bearing
    carrier.

    413.9,  for a material speed detector in a tension regulating system for a
    take-up coil.


CLS 242/421.5
TXT Slackness sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 421 wherein the tension regulating system
    includes a detector responsive to changes in gravitational sag or similar
    deviation of material from a desired path as the material unwinds from the
    delivery coil, which detector serves as a material stress information input
    component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    413.3+, for a slack sensor used in regulating a take-up coil drive.

    417.3,  for a slack sensor used in regulating a drag on a running length of
    material.

    418.1,  for a slack sensor used in regulating the drag developed by a
    feeder.

    420.3,  for a slack sensor used in regulating tension in a belt drive for a
    supply coil.

    420.6,  for a slack sensor used in regulating an electrical control circuit
    of a supply coil drive.


CLS 242/421.6
TXT With power control circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 421.5 wherein the retarding device is
    adjusted at a rate proportional to energy supplied through a regulating
    network under the influence of the slackness sensor.


CLS 242/421.7
TXT Electrical:

    Subject matter under subclass 421.6 wherein the energy regulating network
    controls electrodynamic energy supplied to the retarding device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, for a control device for an
    electrical device including a motor or brake of general use, particularly
    subclasses 6, 7, and 362+.


CLS 242/421.8
TXT Mechanically applied brake:

    Subject matter under subclass 421.5 wherein the tension regulating system
    includes machine linkage to transfer motion from an input to the supply
    coil retarding device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    particularly subclasses 272+ for a cable-deflected control for regulating
    winding in a winch or hoist.


CLS 242/421.9
TXT Compound leverage mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 421.8 wherein the machine linkage includes
    successive pivoted linking elements providing mechanical or distance
    advantage between the input and retarding device.


CLS 242/422
TXT Yieldable coil brake:

    Subject matter under subclass 416 wherein the retarding device includes a
    particular braking member shiftable into engagement with the delivery coil
    or reactive structure rotatable with the coil for establishing a desired
    resistance value to unwinding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    particularly subclasses 375+ for a brake for the drum of winch or hoist.


CLS 242/422.1
TXT Plural:

    Subject matter under subclass 422 wherein multiple brake members are
    provided.


CLS 242/422.2
TXT Fluid or magnetic brake or operator:

    Subject matter under subclass 422 wherein the brake member or an associated
    actuator relies on either:  (a) liquid or gaseous pressure, or (b) a
    metallic component subject to a magnetic flux, to retard rotation of the
    delivery coil.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    particularly subclass 377 for a fluid resistance brake associated with the
    drum of a hoist or winch.


CLS 242/422.3
TXT Electrical operator:

    Subject matter under subclass 422 wherein the brake member is shifted by an
    actuator under the influence of electrodynamic energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 161+ for an electrical brake operator of general
    use.


CLS 242/422.4
TXT Radially applied:

    Subject matter under subclass 422 wherein the brake member is adapted to be
    shifted in a direction substantially perpendicular to a center axis of the
    delivery coil.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 74+ for a radially applied brake, per se, or of
    general use.


CLS 242/422.5
TXT Wound material engaging:

    Subject matter under subclass 422.4 wherein the brake member is adapted to
    contact the elongated material wound on the supply coil.


CLS 242/422.6
TXT Strap:

    Subject matter under subclass 422.5 wherein the brake member is an
    elongated member exhibiting enough flexibility when applied to conform in
    part to the outline of the material wound on the supply coil.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 77+ for a radially acting strap-type brake, per
    se, or of general use.


CLS 242/422.7
TXT Accommodates roll transfer:

    Subject matter under subclass 422.6 wherein the brake member is
    specifically designed to accommodate relocation of the supply coil (e.g.,
    during replacement as a supply coil is transported to a position against
    the brake strap).


CLS 242/422.8
TXT Strap:

    Subject matter under subclass 422.4 wherein the brake member is an
    elongated member exhibiting enough flexibility when applied to conform in
    part to the outline of the reactive structure rotatable with the coiled
    material (e.g. a spool flange or drum).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 77+ for a radially acting strap-type brake, per
    se, or of general use.


CLS 242/422.9
TXT Opposed:

    Subject matter under subclass 422.4 wherein the brake member includes
    retarding elements adapted to engage oppositely facing sections of the
    reactive structure (e.g., opposite ends of a spool, spool flange, brake
    disc, or drum).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 75 and 76 for opposed brakes, per se, or of
    general use.


CLS 242/423
TXT Axially applied:

    Subject matter under subclass 422 wherein the brake member is adapted to be
    applied along a path substantially parallel to a center axis of the
    delivery coil.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 71.1+ for an axially applied brake, per se, or
    of general use.


CLS 242/423.1
TXT Coaxial with coil:

    Subject matter under subclass 423 wherein the brake member is adapted to be
    applied along a path coincident with a center axis of the delivery coil.


CLS 242/423.2
TXT Opposed:

    Subject matter under subclass 423.1 comprising a pair of brake members
    disposed at opposite ends of the spool or a spool connected component, one
    of the members being shiftable toward and away from the other to establish
    a desired resistance value.


CLS 242/430
TXT COMPOSITE ARTICLE WINDING:

    Apparatus or method under the class definition for either (a) winding an
    elongated material directly onto a core to form a permanent product of
    manufacture comprising a core and one or more permanently retained coils or
    (b) one of a group of selected components of such a winding apparatus or
    method not provided for elsewhere and whose utility is peculiar to use in a
    winder as defined in item (a), which component is limited to a work holder,
    a material tensioner, guide or guard, a shuttle, or a machine frame.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder provide
    for winding a product of manufacture in which the elongated material is
    wound on and, by disclosure, remains as a distinct coil in intimate contact
    with a core so long as the core remains with the winding apparatus.
    Article winding provided for here is distinct from

    (a)     a storage package winding whose material is to be subsequently
    unwound or otherwise removed from the core, provided for elsewhere in this
    class,

    (b)     winding with additional component or product modification (e.g.,
    shaping, twisting, bonding, coating or nonwinding assembly) provided for in
    other manufacturing classes, or

    (c)     wrapping components together or on an indefinite length core to
    form a textile strand, wire rope, or similar product provided in a textile
    class.

    (2)     Note.  Guidelines for placement of an original patent directed to a
    winder or winding method with features appropriate to production of either
    an article or storage package and certain subcombinations within Class 242:


    (a)     A winder or subcombination appropriate to winding a storage package
    as well as an article can be properly placed as a storage package winder,
    which generally provides a more comprehensive breakdown, if the specific
    article is unclaimed and winding a storage package is considered to be a
    clear alternative (e.g., a winder distributing wire in layers on a core
    useful as a storage coil as well as an inductance coil).

    (b)     A claimed work holder, materialtensioner, guide or guard, or a
    frame subcombination, is properly placed with the appropriate article
    winder if the subcombination is peculiar to a provided article winder
    (i.e., not readily used for a package winder and not having general
    utility).  Some examples proper for article winders are: (i) a tensioner
    for stressing a pipe, vessel, or other core rather than stressing the
    material for proper winding; and (ii) a holder, guide, or guard
    asymmetrically related to the coil to be wound in a manner invariably
    related to winding a slotted article, such as a ring or spheroid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 33, 596+, 605, 618, 732+, and 779+ for
    winding an article that includes an additional nonwinding operation (e.g.,
    shaping, assembly, or disassembly).

    57,     Textiles: Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 3+ for
    winding to form a strand or wire rope, or winding with twisting or
    untwisting.

    72,     Metal Deforming, particularly subclasses 49+, 67+, and 127+ for
    winding or forming an elongated material into a coil by use of a bending
    device to stress the material beyond its elastic limit.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 20 through 109 for a
    mechanical movement of general application.

    140,    Wireworking, particularly subclasses 34, 47, 71.5, 92.1, 92.2, and
    124 for producing an article that includes winding wire disclosed as being
    bent beyond its elastic limit, most frequently evidenced by transfer of
    coiled wire relative to a mandrel on which it is wound.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    particularly subclasses 51+, 143+, 160+, 169+, 184+, 422, 425+, 443+, and
    460 for winding combined with an adhesive bonding operation.


CLS 242/431
TXT Controlled by an electrical property of article:

    Subject matter under subclass 430 comprising a winding mechanism having
    comparing means (e.g., a Wheatstone bridge) which compares an electrical
    value of an article being wound to a reference value for the purpose of
    issuing an alarm or terminating or otherwise regulating winding when the
    article being wound exhibits either (a) a desired electrical value or (b) a
    value out of acceptable tolerance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, particularly subclasses 76.11+,
    546 through 549, and 600+ for comparative test circuitry.

    336,    Inductor Devices, particularly subclass 15 for an inductor
    adjustable by the winding or unwinding of the inductor coil.


CLS 242/432
TXT On internally toothed core (e.g., motor stator):

    Subject matter under subclass 430 wherein the core on which material is
    wound is provided with a central opening into which at least one projection
    extends to define a tooth or pole piece and comprising a winding mechanism
    by which the elongated material is wound about the projection for more than
    360 degrees.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, particularly subclasses 596 and 732+ for motor
    stator winding combined with a nonwinding manufacturing step or apparatus.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses for particular
    details of a mechanical movement used to control the placement of a winding.

    140,    Wireworking, subclasses 92.1 and 92.2 for winding a stator coil on
    a form for subsequent transfer of either a coil convolution or the entire
    coil to a core.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 254+ for a
    particular detail of a stator core, end turn support, or particular
    inductance pattern expressed as steps of a method appropriate to the act of
    winding by hand as well as machine winding.


CLS 242/432.1
TXT By endless, flexible shuttle:

    Subject matter under subclass 432 wherein the winding mechanism includes a
    loop-shaped, pliant, winding member (e.g., a belt, wire, garter, or chain)
    supported in the central opening of the core for rotation in an orbital
    path about the projection so that elongated material attached to the
    winding member is wrapped onto the projection.

    (1)     Note. The flexible shuttle may be formed by simply bonding a
    section of the elongated material upon itself to form a closed loop which
    is driven to pull a further length of the material about the projection.


CLS 242/432.2
TXT By compound movement mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 432 wherein the winding mechanism includes a
    material dispenser (e.g., a nozzle) and a motion transmission means for
    causing relative oscillation and reciprocation between the material
    dispenser and the core for wrapping the elongated material about the
    projection.

    (1)     Note.  Typically the compound movement involves the following four
    sequential motions to form a convolution:

    (a)     an axial movement of the dispenser through the core to deposit
    material along a first side of the projection,

    (b)     an arcuate movement about an end face of the core to align the
    elongated material with the second side of the projection,

    (c)     a reverse axial movement of the material to deposit the material
    along the second side of the projection, and

    (d)     a final reverse arcuate movement about the opposite end face of the
    core to position the elongated material at the initial point ready to form
    a second convolution.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 20 through 109,
    particularly subclasses 25+ for a subcombination or a mechanism of general
    utility for producing a compound movement.


CLS 242/432.3
TXT Shuttle reciprocated:

    Subject matter under subclass 432.2 wherein the motion transmission means
    moves the material dispenser (shuttle) through the core in first and second
    oppositely directed, substantially linear motions to deposit material on
    opposite sides of the core projection.


CLS 242/432.4
TXT And oscillated:

    Subject matter under subclass 432.3 wherein the motion transmission means
    additionally moves the material dispenser in first and second oppositely
    directed arcuate motions between the first and second oppositely directed
    linear motions.


CLS 242/432.5
TXT With radially shifted guide component:

    Subject matter under subclass 432.4 wherein the motion transmission means
    additionally moves a material engaging portion of the winding mechanism
    (e.g., a guide) radially with respect to the core to enhance the placement
    of the convolution of material about the projection.

    (1)     Note.  Typically, the transmission means shifts a material guide
    radially outward after it clears an end of the core to force the material
    deeper toward the root of the projection, thus permitting a more orderly
    placement of material.

    (2)     Note.  The material engaging portion subjected to radial movement
    may be the material dispenser or an element discrete from the dispenser.


CLS 242/432.6
TXT Having particular core holder or material guide:

    Subject matter under subclass 432 wherein special significance is
    attributed to either (a) a structure for supporting the core during winding
    or (b) a device to direct the elongated material to a desired winding point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    433.4,  for a workholder for an armature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, for a core holder of general use.

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, for a core mounted in a general purpose chuck or
    socket.


CLS 242/433
TXT On externally toothed core (e.g., motor armature):

    Subject matter under subclass 430 wherein the core on which material is
    wound includes an outer surface provided with at least one pair of
    elongated slots which define between them a projection (tooth or pole
    piece) and comprising a winding mechanism for winding material about the
    projection for more than 360 degrees.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, particularly subclasses 33, 598, and 732+ for motor
    armature winding combined with an additional manufacturing step or
    apparatus.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses for particular
    detail of a mechanical movement as a subcombination or of general use.

    140,    Wireworking, subclasses 92.1 and 92.2 for winding an armature coil
    on a form for subsequent transfer of either a convolution or entire coil
    from the form.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 194+ and 261+
    for a detail of a rotor core, end turn support structure, or a particular
    winding pattern expressed as steps of a method for hand winding.


CLS 242/433.1
TXT By compound movement mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 433 wherein the winding mechanism comprises a
    material dispenser (e.g., a nozzle) and a motion transmission means to
    cause relative oscillation and reciprocation between the material dispenser
    and the core for winding the elongated material about the projection.

    (1)     Note.  Typically the compound movement involves the following four
    sequential motions to form a convolution:

    (a)     an axial movement of the material dispenser through one of the
    slots to deposit material along one of the slots,

    (b)     an arcuate movement about an end face of the core to align the
    material dispenser with a second slot,

    (c)     a reverse axial movement of the material dispenser through the
    second slot to deposit the material along the second slot, and

    (d)     a final reverse arcuate movement about the opposite end face of the
    core end to position the material dispenser at the initial point ready to
    form a second convolution.

    (2)     Note.  The arcuate movements referred to in this subclass are for
    creating windings and should not be confused with an indexing motion that
    may be used to determine a particular placement of the windings.


CLS 242/433.2
TXT By rotating core:

    Subject matter under subclass 433 wherein the winding mechanism includes a
    mechanism for rotating the core about a winding axis to cause the elongated
    material to be wound around the projection.

    (1)     Note.  The rotating movement referred to in this subclass is for
    creating windings and should not be confused with an indexing motion that
    may be used to determine a particular placement of the windings.


CLS 242/433.3
TXT By orbiting guide:

    Subject matter under subclass 433 wherein the winding mechanism includes a
    material supply in the form of a spool or guide mounted to rotate about the
    projection to cause the elongated material to be wound on the projection.

    (1)     Note.  The orbiting movement referred to in this subclass is for
    creating windings and should not be confused with an indexing motion that
    may be used to determine a particular placement of the windings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224+,   for an orbital guide for wrapping strand onto the spool of a
    fishing reel.

    361+,   for an orbital guide for wrapping material (e.g., wire) on a body
    to form loops.

    386,    for a reeling device with an orbital winding guide.

    435,    for an orbital guide for wrapping material on a spherical core.

    439,    for an orbital guide for wrapping material on an article.


CLS 242/433.4
TXT Having particular core holder or material guide:

    Subject matter under subclass 433 wherein special significance is
    attributed to either (a) structure for supporting the core during winding
    or (b) a device to direct the elongated material to a desired winding point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    432.6,  for a workholder for supporting a stator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, for a core holder of general use.

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, for a core mounted in a general purpose chuck or
    socket.


CLS 242/434
TXT Through opening in ring-shaped core:

    Subject matter under subclass 430 wherein the core is formed as a closed or
    substantially closed annulus defining a central aperture, and comprising a
    winding mechanism adapted to repetitively direct the material through the
    central aperture and radially around the core.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, particularly subclasses 605, 618, and 729+ for
    similar winding combined with an additional manufacturing operation such as
    assembling.

    53,     Package Making, subclass 204 for winding a covering material for
    the purpose of providing an annular package.

    100,    Presses, subclass 12 for apparatus to apply a binder through an
    annular arrangement of material.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    particularly subclasses 172, 180, and 189 for a method of winding combined
    with claimed adhesive bonding, and subclass 443 for a similar apparatus.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 303+ for an annular
    package.

    336,    Inductor Devices, particularly subclasses 15, 213, and 229 for a
    detail of a wound electrical inductor.


CLS 242/434.1
TXT By supply coil linked with core:

    Subject matter under subclass 434 wherein the winding mechanism comprises
    an annular shuttle or spool having a circumference on which loops of
    elongated material are wound in a manner to interconnect the loops of
    elongated material with the core in the manner of two links of a chain so
    that anchoring one end of the material relative to the core followed by
    rotation of the shuttle or spool withdraws material from the loops onto the
    core.

    (1)     Note.  The shuttle or spool of this subclass may be flexible and
    formed as an endless chain, belt, hoop, or the like including a length of
    the material to be wound formed into a loop.


CLS 242/434.2
TXT Supply coil on rigid spool:

    Subject matter under subclass 434.1 wherein the shuttle or spool is
    normally inflexible.


CLS 242/434.3
TXT Having material guide slidable on spool:

    Subject matter under subclass 434.2 wherein the spool includes a mounting
    surface movably supporting a guide for directing the elongated material
    from the loops to the core as the spool is rotated though the central
    aperture in the ring-shaped core.

    (1)     Note.  Typically, material is wound on the core by rotating the
    spool in one direction while the guide acts as a shuttle mounted on a rim
    of the spool to direct the elongated material over the spool rim to the
    core. The guide normally slides on the spool so that egress of material
    from the spool is dependent on the rate of winding on the core rather than
    the rotation of the supply spool.


CLS 242/434.4
TXT Having guide ring coaxial with spool:

    Subject matter under subclass 434.2 wherein the shuttle or spool comprises
    a supply spool and a distinct annular guide ring driven for rotation about
    an axis collinear with the axis of the supply spool for directing material
    from the spool to the core for winding.


CLS 242/434.5
TXT By supply coil cycling through opening:

    Subject matter under subclass 434 wherein the winding mechanism includes a
    wrapping member carrying a length of elongated material formed into
    convolutions defining a supply coil, with or without a spool, which
    wrapping member with its supply coil are orbited through the central
    aperture in the ring-shaped core to unwind the material from the supply
    coil onto the core.


CLS 242/434.6
TXT Supply coil tangentially positioned on a winding shuttle:

    Subject matter under subclass 434.5 wherein the wrapping member is formed
    as a ring-shaped shuttle having a circumference, and the supply coil is
    formed with its axis substantially aligned with or parallel to that
    circumference.


CLS 242/434.7
TXT By material end cycling through opening:

    Subject matter under subclass 434 wherein a selected length of the
    elongated material provides a terminus, and the winding mechanism includes
    means (e.g., a feeder) for repeatedly propelling the terminus through the
    central opening in the ring-shaped core and drawing the material tightly
    about the core.


CLS 242/434.8
TXT Multistep cycle:

    Subject matter under subclass 434.7 wherein the means for repeatedly
    propelling the material end through the core aperture to cause winding
    includes structure to sequentially draw a length of material through the
    core aperture, stop, reorient either or both the material end and core, and
    return the material end to the core aperture.


CLS 242/434.9
TXT Having particular core holder or indexing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 434 wherein special significance is
    attributed to either (a) a specific support for the ring-shaped core or (b)
    means to relatively shift the core and winding mechanism to cause a desired
    distribution of material as it is wound on the core.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, particularly subclasses 20 through
    109 for a detail of a mechanical movement to achieve a specific motion.

    269,    Work Holders, particularly subclasses 55+ for details of a general
    purpose work support mounted for movement.

    279,    Chucks and Sockets, for a detail of a chuck or receptacle-type work
    holder for various uses.


CLS 242/435
TXT On spherical core:

    Subject matter under subclass 430 including a winding mechanism
    particularly adapted to wind elongated material onto a ball-shaped core.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass, winding is typically caused by driving an
    orbital guide, core support axle, or opposed core grippers while indexing
    either the guide or core to distribute the windings, which indexing may
    involve the use of a separate peripheral core-engaging driver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    particularly subclasses 146, 170, and 186 for a method of winding on a
    spherical mass or core claimed with bonding of the elongated material to
    the article, and subclass 445 for the corresponding apparatus.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 414 and 588+ for receptacles having a wall
    that includes a layer of wound elongate material.

    273,    Amusement Devices: Games, various subclasses for a ball article
    used in a sport or game.


CLS 242/435.1
TXT Core peripherally driven to wind:

    Subject matter under subclass 435 wherein the winding mechanism includes
    core-rotating means (e.g., a powered belt) adapted to bear against an outer
    surface of the core.


CLS 242/435.2
TXT By roller:

    Subject matter under subclass 435.1 wherein the core-rotating means
    includes a driven cylindrical, conical, or similarly shaped member engaging
    the core to transmit rotation to the core.


CLS 242/436
TXT Modified spherical core or article:

    Subject matter under subclass 430 including a winding mechanism
    particularly adapted to wind the elongated material either (a) on a core
    having an elliptical or partially spherical shape (e.g., a cylinder with a
    dome-shaped end) or (b) in a particular pattern on a core to create an
    elliptical or partially spherical shape.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    particularly subclasses 172 and 189 for winding irregularly shaped members
    claimed with adhesive bonding, and subclasses 425 and 446 for similar
    apparatus.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 414 and 588+ for receptacles having a wall
    that includes a layer of wound elongate material.


CLS 242/437
TXT On irregularly shaped core:

    Subject matter under subclass 430 comprising a winding mechanism that is
    driven in a manner particularly adapted to accommodate a core having a
    complex winding surface, particularly an adaptation to variable winding
    rates due to (a) a noncircular winding surface cross-sectional or
    lengthwise of a core or (b) special distribution patterns appropriate for a
    core having longitudinally curved, offset, or separated winding surfaces.

    (1)     Note.  These subclasses provide for winding onto an irregularly
    shaped core significantly deviating from a right circular cylinder due to
    an overall formation or accommodation of a special projection or aperture
    other than a common helical groove.  However, creation of an irregular
    winding having an atypical distribution pattern is provided for elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    particularly subclasses 166+, 189, 425+, and 443+ for winding combined with
    adhesive bonding.


CLS 242/437.1
TXT Having curvilinear or offset core portions:

    Subject matter under subclass 437 wherein the complex winding surface of a
    single core either (a) is disposed about an elongated arcuate line, or (b)
    includes two winding surface portions disposed about angularly related or
    parallel axes.

    (1)     Note.  Winding a "single article" is intended to include L-shaped,
    C-shaped, U-shaped, and similarly shaped articles that may include spaced
    winding surfaces with offset or parallel axes of a unified article, but
    exclude pin boards and similar devices where identical parallel pins, rows,
    or columns are simply repetitively wound even though the pins may be on a
    common support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    434+,   for winding on a ring-shaped article.


CLS 242/437.2
TXT Diverse coils:

    Subject matter under subclass 437.1 wherein the winding mechanism forms
    plural distinct bundles or coils differing from each other in size, shape,
    winding pitch, or other physical characteristic.


CLS 242/437.3
TXT Noncircular core:

    Subject matter under subclass 437 wherein the complex winding surface has a
    cross-section perpendicular to the axis of winding that deviates
    significantly from a circle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    537,    for a machine for convolutely winding on an irregularly shaped
    core, and

    613.2,  for an irregularly shaped winding core, per se.


CLS 242/437.4
TXT Flattened core:

    Subject matter under subclass 437.3 wherein the core has one dimension
    (width) materially greater than a perpendicular dimension (thickness) to
    define a card or planar winding surface (e.g. a width ten times greater
    than a thickness).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    537,    for a machine for convolutely winding on an irregularly shaped
    core, and

    613.3,  for a flattened winding core.


CLS 242/438
TXT For prestressing core:

    Subject matter under subclass 430 comprising a winding mechanism having
    means to develop longitudinal tension in a portion of the elongated
    material prior to winding, which tension is of such a magnitude as to exert
    an appreciable compression force on the core after winding.

    (1)     Note.  Typically, the material is a relatively strong metallic or
    plastic cable applied to a core (e.g., a rotatable pipe or vessel or a
    stationary fluid reservoir) to strengthen the resulting article against
    internal pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    410+,   for a tensioner in a winding device or of general use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles: Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 3+ for
    winding an indefinite length strandlike structure.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, for a particular pipe structure.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    particularly subclasses 166+, 184+, 425+, and 443+ for winding material
    claimed with bonding.


    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 414 and 588+ for receptacles having a wall
    that includes a layer of wound elongate material.


CLS 242/438.1
TXT By orbiting material supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 438 wherein the winding mechanism includes a
    source of elongated material rotated about the core to cause winding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles: Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 10 and 13+
    for winding on a rotatable, indefinite length strandlike article.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 565+ for a particular tank structure.


CLS 242/439
TXT By orbiting material supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 430 comprising a winding mechanism having a
    source of material (e.g., a supply coil or material directing guide)
    adapted to rotate about the article to cause material to be wrapped on the
    article core.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18+,    for various strand winding machines which may rely on a rotatable
    guide for winding.

    128,    for a strand unwinding device which may include an orbital guide.

    224+,   for an orbital guide for wrapping strand onto the spool of a
    fishing reel.

    361+,   for an orbital guide for wrapping material (e.g., wire) on a body
    to form loops.

    386,    for a reeling device with an orbital winding guide.

    433.3,  for an orbital guide for wrapping wire or the like onto an
    externally slotted core.

    435,    for an orbital guide for wrapping material on a ball.

    438.1,  for an orbital guide for wrapping prestressing material onto a
    vessel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, particularly subclasses 33 and 605 for wire winding
    combined with an additional manufacturing function.

    57,     Textiles: Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 10 and 13+
    for a rotatable guide for wrapping an indefinite length, strandlike
    structure.

    140,    Wireworking, subclasses 92.1 and 124 for a device for wrapping wire
    into a coil.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    166+, 184+, 425+, and 443+ for winding which may include the use of a
    rotatable guide combined with bonding wound material to a core or the like.


CLS 242/439.1
TXT Material guide disposed about core tip (e.g., terminal winder):

    Subject matter under subclass 439  wherein the core is in the form of a
    stub, and the orbital material supply is in the form of a guide rotatable
    about a free end of the stub in a plane that intersects the stub.


CLS 242/439.2
TXT Motor powered:

    Subject matter under subclass 439.1 comprising means for converting
    potential energy to kinetic energy, which means is connected to the guide
    for rotating the guide about the stub.


CLS 242/439.3
TXT Handheld:

    Subject matter under subclass 439.2 wherein the winding mechanism includes
    a portion specifically adapting the winding mechanism to be carried by a
    human operator.


CLS 242/439.4
TXT Simultaneous winding:

    Subject matter under subclass 439 wherein the winding mechanism includes
    plural sources of elongated material adapted to concurrently wrap a
    plurality of materials about one or more article cores.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18      and 25, for winding of strand material including multiple or
    alternate helical winding of a storage package.

    388.6+, for multiple spools in a reeling device.

    443.1+, for simultaneous winding onto a rotating core to form an article.

    530+,   for simultaneously convolutely winding  storage packages.


CLS 242/439.5
TXT On single core:

    Subject matter under subclass 439.4 wherein a plurality of materials are
    collectively wound onto an individual article core.


CLS 242/439.6
TXT Supply coil coaxial with core:

    Subject matter under subclass 439.5 wherein the elongated materials are
    unwound from supply coils disposed on a common axis with the core.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles: Spinning, Twisting, And Twining, subclasses 10 and 16
    though 18 for wrapping material onto a coaxial  strandlike structure of
    indefinite length.


CLS 242/440
TXT Sequential winding:

    Subject matter under subclass 439 wherein the source of material orbits the
    core to wind a length of the elongated material into successive and
    distinct convolution bundles (coils).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass typically provides for winding a coil bundle,
    not merely spaced convolutions, on each of a succession of articles.


CLS 242/440.1
TXT On single core:

    Subject matter under subclass 440 wherein the winding mechanism winds
    plural, distinct bundles (coils) onto an individual core.


CLS 242/441
TXT Having mechanism to distribute convolutions:

    Subject matter under subclass 439 wherein the winding mechanism includes
    means for positioning individual turns of the elongated material in a
    predetermined order or pattern as the material is wound on the article core.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26.1+,  for a strand distributor in a textile machine using an orbital
    guide.

    158+,   for a strand distributor in a winding device.

    241+,   for a strand distributor associated with an orbital guide in a
    fishing reel.

    397.2+, for a material distributor in a reeling device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, particularly subclasses 20 through
    109 for a detail of a mechanical movement to achieve a specific motion
    which may be appropriate for winding material distribution.


CLS 242/441.1
TXT Reciprocating:

    Subject matter under subclass 441 wherein the means for positioning the
    elongated material shifts the material in opposite directions substantially
    parallel to the axis of winding.


CLS 242/441.2
TXT Single winding pass:

    Subject matter under subclass 441 wherein the means for positioning the
    elongated material shifts the material in only one direction substantially
    parallel to the axis of winding.


CLS 242/441.3
TXT Core supports winder:

    Subject matter under subclass 441.2 wherein the winding mechanism includes
    a shuttle with a supply of elongated material and means mounting the
    shuttle for engagement with the core so that the shuttle can both rotate on
    the core for winding and move longitudinally along the core for
    distributing material.


CLS 242/441.4
TXT Material supply coaxial with core:

    Subject matter under subclass 441.2 comprising means to support the winding
    mechanism and core about a common axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    439.6+, for an orbital winder for simultaneously winding coils on cores
    coaxial with the winder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles: Spinning, Twisting, And Twining, subclasses 10 and 16
    through 18 for wrapping material onto a coaxial  strandlike structure of
    indefinite length.


CLS 242/442
TXT Handheld wrapping tool:

    Subject matter under subclass 439 wherein the winding mechanism is
    constructed in manner particularly adapting it to be supported by a human
    operator during winding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS

    439.3,  for a handheld, orbital terminal winder.

    916,    for a hand tool useful in winding, tensioning, or guiding.


CLS 242/443
TXT By rotating core:

    Subject matter under subclass 430 including a winding mechanism having
    means mounting the core for rotation to cause the elongated material to be
    wound on the core.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, particularly subclasses 33 and 605 for wire winding
    combined with an additional manufacturing operation.

    57,     Textiles: Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 11 and 13+
    for a rotatable guide for winding an indefinite length strandlike structure.

    140,    Wireworking, subclasses 92.2 and 124 for a device for winding wire
    into a coil.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    166+, 184+, 425+, and 443+ for winding which may include the use of a
    rotatable guide combined with bonding wound material to a core or the like.


CLS 242/443.1
TXT Simultaneous winding:

    Subject matter under subclass 443 wherein the winding mechanism includes
    plural winding supplies (supply spools or guides) adapted to concurrently
    wind a plurality of materials about one or more cores.


CLS 242/444
TXT On single core:

    Subject matter under subclass 443.1 wherein the plural winding supplies
    deliver separate materials for winding on an individual core.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    439.5+, for winding separate materials on a single article core by use of
    orbital material supplies.


CLS 242/444.1
TXT Dielectric and conductive  layers (e.g., capacitor):

    Subject matter under subclass 444 wherein the winding materials include
    alternate electrically conductive and dielectric strips wound on the core
    in superposed convolutions usually to form an electrical capacitor
    (condenser).

    (1)     Note.  Patents disclosing a capacitor winding machine or method
    without details specific to conductor or dielectric winding are classified
    as generic winding machines provided for later in this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    522+,   for a cutting device in a convolute winding machine.

    530.2,  for generalized simultaneous winding of superposed layers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 25.42 for winding a capacitor and
    assembling leads or other manufacturing operation.


CLS 242/444.2
TXT Special web layering (e.g., offset edges):

    Subject matter under subclass 444.1 comprising means for disposing margins
    of respective strips in a predetermined manner, typically with a dielectric
    strip even with or overlapping a conductive strip.


CLS 242/444.3
TXT Continuous or semicontinuous winding:

    Subject matter under subclass 444.1 comprising a mechanism for connecting
    strips to a core for winding either:  (a) without interruption, or (b) with
    interruption materially reduced from that which would normally occur in
    manually replacing a wound core with a blank core.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    532+,   for a convolute winding machine with a lead end attachment feature.

    533,    for a convolute winding machine with a coil removal feature.


CLS 242/444.4
TXT Adjacent helical layers (e.g., strand on strand):

    Subject matter under subclass 444.1 wherein the plural winding supplies
    deliver (a) electrically conductive wire wound in convolutions to provide a
    layer and (b) dielectric cord jointly wound in convolutions to form an
    insulating layer over the conductive layer.


CLS 242/444.5
TXT Web layer wound between helical layers:

    Subject matter under subclass 444.1 wherein the plural winding supplies
    deliver (a) an electrically conductive wire wound in convolutions to
    provide a layer and (b) a dielectric web to be wound upon the conductive
    layer.


CLS 242/445
TXT Sequential winding:

    Subject matter under subclass 443 wherein the winding mechanism is adapted
    to wind material to create distinct coil groups by either (a) progressively
    introducing the material to each of a succession of cores or (b)
    successively winding distinct coils on different areas of a single core.

    (1)     Note.  The succession of cores denotes the provision of a
    particular method of juxtaposing the material and respective cores without
    interrupting the overall operation of the winding mechanism (e.g., by
    indexing a turret carrying respective cores to a winding station or
    relocating a material supply to be captured and wound on a subsequent core).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18      and 25, for winding helically winding storage coils.

    440+,   for sequentially winding articles by orbiting a material supply
    about an article core.

    531+,   for sequentially winding convolute coils to form storage coils.


CLS 242/445.1
TXT On single core:

    Subject matter under subclass 445 wherein the winding mechanism is adapted
    to successively winding distinct coils on a single core.

    (1)     Note.  The distinct coils can be successively wound from (a)
    separate materials or (b) a continuous length of a single material creating
    plural coils recognizably distinct by a clear change in winding placement,
    orientation, shape, or dimension.  Merely  reversing the direction of
    distributing material is a typical method of winding a single coil,
    however, winding a layer at a right angle to a previous layer would be
    sequential winding due to the atypical  manipulation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    439.5+, for sequentially winding articles by orbiting a material supply
    about an article core.


CLS 242/446
TXT Having manual drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 443 wherein the winding mechanism is powered
    by a human operator, typically through means of a crank or foot treadle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249+,   for a fishing reel drive mechanism, particularly subclasses 283+
    for a particular handcrank.

    350,    for a manually operated drive for winding a machine convertible
    information carrier.

    395+,   for a manual drive in a reeling device.

    546.1,  for a manual drive in a convolute package winder.


CLS 242/447
TXT Having mechanism for distributing convolutions:

    Subject matter under subclass 443 wherein the winding mechanism includes
    means to direct the material being wound in a predetermined pattern of
    placement on the article core (e.g., by relatively shifting the supply and
    core during winding).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158+,   for a specific distributing mechanism used in winding.

    241+,   for a material distributing means in a fishing reel.

    397.2+, for a material distributing means in a reeling device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, particularly subclasses 20 through
    109 for a detail of a mechanical movement to achieve a specific motion
    which may be appropriate for winding material distribution.


CLS 242/447.1
TXT By reciprocating guide or supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 447 wherein the means to direct the material
    includes a mechanical movement for distributing the elongated material in
    opposite directions substantially parallel to the axis of winding.


CLS 242/447.2
TXT Threaded operator:

    Subject matter under subclass 447.1 wherein the means for directing the
    material includes a helically grooved shaft engaged by a follower in a
    manner that rotation of the shaft causes linear movement of the follower
    connected to either a material supply or core to effect the distribution of
    the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158.2+, for a specific traversing device for winding.

    278+,   for a fishing reel with a reciprocated level winding guide.

    397.3,  for a reeling device with a reciprocated level winding guide.


CLS 242/447.3
TXT Single winding pass:

    Subject matter under subclass 447 wherein the means to direct the material
    distributes the elongated material in only one direction substantially
    parallel to the axis of winding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    441.2+, for unidirectional material distribution in an article winder using
    an orbital material supply.


CLS 242/448
TXT Having particular workpiece holder:

    Subject matter under subclass 430 wherein special significance is
    attributed to structure for supporting the core during winding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    570+,   for a holder of a supply or takeup coil.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, particularly subclasses 55+ for details of a general
    purpose work holder that is shiftable relative to a supporting base or is
    moveable between different work stations.

    279,    Chucks and Sockets, for a detail of a chuck or receptacle-type work
    holder for various uses.


CLS 242/448.1
TXT Core flexure inhibiter (e.g., for winding onto hose):

    Subject matter under subclass 448 wherein the structure for supporting
    includes means to prevent or limit longitudinal bending of the article core
    during winding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for a winder with a workpiece support
    particularly designed to limit deflection of the workpiece encountered when
    winding articles such as long pipe, hose, musical and archery strings, or
    fishing rods, typically by use of an intermediate core support or biased
    core end holder.


CLS 242/470
TXT HELICAL OR RANDOM WINDING OF MATERIAL:

    A machine or corresponding method under the class definition for directing
    an elongated material to a point of intersection on a take-up and coiling
    the material about an axis of the take-up while either (a) advancing the
    point of intersection parallel to the axis, or (b) permitting the point of
    intersection to meander in a direction parallel to the take-up axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, particularly subclasses 149 and 159
    for coiling a sliver (an untwisted strand group) on a form or in an open
    can.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, particularly subclasses
    58.67+, 71, 78, 92, 98, 99, 303, 305, and 313 for a helical
    winding/unwinding device that additionally provides a twisting or related
    function.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 10.1 for winding combined with glass
    making.

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, subclasses 31 and 59
    for a winding device combined with a Class 87 art device.

    112,    Sewing, subclass 279 for bobbin winding combined with a specific
    sewing process or apparatus.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 235 for winding apparatus combined with
    coating means.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From Sheet or Web, subclasses 299 through 302 for winding or wrapping of a
    specified sheet or web to manufacture a container or tube.


CLS 242/471
TXT For web material:

    Subject matter under subclass 470 wherein the machine or process is
    particularly constructed to wind and helically distribute a material having
    a width appreciably greater than its thickness (e.g., a strip, fabric,
    film, or tape).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158+,   for means to distribute a strand during winding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 20+, particularly subclass
    22 for a mechanical movement of general use that may appropriate for
    material distribution.


CLS 242/520
TXT CONVOLUTE WINDING OF MATERIAL:

    Apparatus or method under the class definition for receiving elongated
    material from a supply and progressively coiling the material about an axis
    of a take-up to create successive convolutions so that at least the
    majority of convolutions lie upon their preceding convolution.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 151+ for a winding device for moving
    running material with respect to a chemical treatment apparatus.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, for a winding device
    combined with a brush or similar device for cleaning material as it is
    wound.

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclass 176 for warp thread sheet
    winding that may be analogous to convolute winding.

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 204, 409, 587, and 588 for forming or
    covering a package that may include winding.

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses, particularly 135+, 146+,
    and 183 for coiling elongated metallic material that additionally bends the
    metal beyond its elastic limit.

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, subclasses 31 and 59
    for a winding device combined with specific Class 87 technology.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 76 and 79 for a process or apparatus for
    winding combined with pressure application.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 229 and 235 for winding or unwinding
    combined with a specified coating device

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    51+, 162, 169+, 180+, and 184+ for a process and 405.1+ and 443+ for
    apparatus that wind with surface bonding to form laminae.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 118+ for a process of
    winding or wrapping a web formed of interfelted fibers in liquid suspension
    (e.g., to make a paperboard core).

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, particularly subclasses 303 through 307 for winding or
    wrapping of a specified sheet or web to manufacture a container or tube.


CLS 242/521
TXT With tearing or breaking:

    Subject matter under subclass 520 comprising means adapted to cause
    sufficient stress in the elongated material to separate the material into
    plural parts at a predetermined point, after which at least one part is
    wound onto the take-up.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, for tearing or breaking unwound or
    nonwound material.


CLS 242/522
TXT With cutting, perforating, or notching:

    Subject matter under subclass 520 comprising an instrument (cutting device)
    to penetrate the elongated material to divide, score, or provide a
    permanent puncture in the material, after which at least part of the
    original material is wound onto the take-up.

    (1)     Note.  Patents proper for this and the indented subclasses should
    claim a significant cutter and structure for subsequently winding the cut
    material; however, nominal cutting followed by significant winding is
    provided for later in this class, whereas unwinding to cutting structure is
    provided for in other classes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    528+,   for details of a convolute winding machine with a only a named
    cutter or no cutter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, particularly subclasses 78+, 302, 909, 924, 937, 949, and
    950 for details of a cutter for unwound or nonwound material.


CLS 242/523
TXT Automated control:

    Subject matter under subclass 522 comprising a mechanism to apply or
    regulate the cutting device or elongated material at a selected point
    without either:  (a) user intervention, or (b) operation of a device
    operating in a fixed cycle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, particularly subclasses 72+, 76.1+, and 360+ for a control
    for a cutter, per se, or a cutter in a combination provided for in Class 83.


CLS 242/523.1
TXT For transverse cutting:

    Subject matter under subclass 523 wherein the cutting device operates
    across or oblique to the direction of elongation of the material.


CLS 242/524
TXT Sequential cutting stations:

    Subject matter under subclass 522 wherein a single section of elongated
    material is subjected to the action of either:  (a) a plurality of cutting
    devices spaced at longitudinally discrete locations along the path of
    movement of the elongated material, or (b) a single cutting device moved
    along the length of the material and applied in succession at discrete
    locations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, particularly subclasses 255+ and 301 for sequential
    cutters, per se, or combined as provided for in Class 83.


CLS 242/524.1
TXT Longitudinal and transverse severing:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 wherein the cutting device(s) divides the
    elongated material along the material length and severs the material in a
    direction substantially across its length.

    (1)     Note.  The material length is taken in the direction of movement as
    the material progresses toward and around a winding axis, whereas
    transverse is substantially across or oblique to the material length.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclass 302 for
    transverse and slitter cutters, per se, or in combination with certain
    other devices.


CLS 242/525
TXT Longitudinal cutting:

    Subject matter under subclass 522 wherein the cutting device acts on the
    elongated material in a direction substantially parallel to the material
    length.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, particularly subclasses 425+, 469+, and 651+ for a
    longitudinal cutter of general use.


CLS 242/525.1
TXT Positionally related slitter and winding surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 525 wherein the cutting device divides the
    elongated material into plural strips and includes structure to maintain a
    predetermined spaced relationship between the cutting device and a take-up
    coil as the outer diameter of the coil increases during winding successive
    convolutions.


CLS 242/525.2
TXT Slitter engages winding surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 525.1 wherein the cutting device acts against
    the material as the material winds onto the take-up.


CLS 242/525.3
TXT Includes nonwound strip (e.g., trimming):

    Subject matter under subclass 525 wherein the cutting device divides the
    elongated material into plural strips, one of which is separated from a
    coiled part and remains uncoiled (e.g., as a trimmed scrap portion).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, particularly subclasses 102+ for a cutter with means to
    divert one product portion from another.


CLS 242/525.4
TXT Perforating:

    Subject matter under subclass 525 wherein the cutting device is designed to
    puncture a thickness of the elongated material to create discrete
    apertures, typically to establish a predetermined tear line.


CLS 242/525.5
TXT With particular slitter adjustment:

    Subject matter under subclass 525 wherein the cutting device includes a
    knife and specially significant structure for regulating either (a) spacing
    between the knife and elongated material, or (b) spacing of the knife with
    respect to another knife.


CLS 242/525.6
TXT By rotary slitter disk:

    Subject matter under subclass 525 wherein the cutting device is formed as a
    substantially round, planar knife mounted for rotation and engagable with
    the elongated material for dividing the material into plural strips.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, particularly subclasses 469+ for a rotary cutter or
    carrier of general use.


CLS 242/525.7
TXT With reactive material support surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 525.6 comprising particular structure to
    engage and brace the elongated material against detrimental deflection in
    an area where the knife engages the material.


CLS 242/526
TXT Transverse cutting:

    Subject matter under subclass 522 wherein the cutting device penetrates the
    elongated material in a path substantially across the material length.

    (1)     Note.  The term transverse cutting includes making an oblique or
    tapered cut as well as a cut made at a right angle to the material length.


CLS 242/526.1
TXT Perforating or notching:

    Subject matter under subclass 526 wherein the cutting device is designed to
    cut an aperture through a thickness of the elongated material, which
    aperture is either:  (a) surrounded by material (perforated), or (b)
    disposed at an edge of the material leaving portions of the original edge
    intact (notched).


CLS 242/526.2
TXT With winding of flexible cutter:

    Subject matter under subclass 526 wherein the cutting device includes an
    elongated flexible cutter adapted to be drawn into a taut condition to
    sever the elongated material, and then either:  (a) be wound with the
    elongated material on the take-up or (b) be collected on a separate holder.

    (1)     Note.  The flexible cutter is frequently a renewable length of wire
    or similar material laid across the winding path to be drawn taut (a) to
    sever the elongated material when a first take-up is fully wound, and (b)
    to assist in continuing the winding by binding the new web end to a second,
    adjacent take-up by spirally winding over the new web end as the web is
    convolutely wound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 56, 542,
    553, and 636.


CLS 242/526.3
TXT Special end forming (e.g., tapering):

    Subject matter under subclass 526 wherein the cutting device transversely
    severs the elongated material, and either itself or in combination with a
    noncutting device creates a fresh material end formed to facilitate a
    subsequent operation (e.g., a tapering or crimped end cut for attachment to
    a take-up device).


CLS 242/527
TXT Knife shiftable to sever material:

    Subject matter under subclass 526 wherein the cutting device includes a
    knife to laterally sever the elongated material.


CLS 242/527.1
TXT Within roller:

    Subject matter under subclass 527 wherein the knife is disposed within a
    rotatable, generally cylindrical or disklike member for periodic exposure
    for severing the elongated material.


CLS 242/527.2
TXT Cut adjacent to new core:

    Subject matter under subclass 527 comprising means to support an unwound
    core adjacent to the cutting device so that cutting device can be actuated
    in a manner to facilitate a connection of a freshly cut material end to the
    unwound core.


CLS 242/527.3
TXT Arcuately shiftable cutter:

    Subject matter under subclass 527.2 comprising means mounting the cutting
    device for movement in a curved path.


CLS 242/527.4
TXT With anvil or cooperating cutter:

    Subject matter under subclass 527.3 wherein the cutting device includes
    either:  (a) a backing structure adapted to support the material in an area
    where the knife severs the material, or (b) a second knife adapted to
    cooperate with the first-named knife to grip the material for severing.


CLS 242/527.5
TXT Edge-to-edge (e.g., scissor type):

    Subject matter under subclass 527 wherein the cutting knife engages one
    side of the elongated material and progressively severs the material to the
    opposite side.


CLS 242/527.6
TXT Rotary disk:

    Subject matter under subclass 527.5 wherein the knife is formed as a
    rotatable, substantially circular, planar member for severing the elongated
    material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 469+ for a disk cutter, per se, or in certain
    combinations.


CLS 242/527.7
TXT With reactive surface (e.g., anvil):

    Subject matter under subclass 527.5 wherein the cutting device includes
    material support structure adapted to support the material in an area where
    the knife severs the material.


CLS 242/528
TXT Of discrete sheets or articles:

    Subject matter under subclass 520 wherein winding is accompanied by
    disposing plural, distinct elements (e.g., cut lengths of material,
    newspapers, packets, etc.) about the winding axis, usually trapped by a
    succeeding wound layer.

    (1)     Note.  The distinct elements may be discrete nominally claimed
    articles carried by a length of the elongated material only to the extent
    that the articles jointly conform to a wound convolution and the length of
    material serves only as a temporary conveyance or retainer, or elongated
    material severed into individual lengths prior to winding, but not a
    homogenous length of material divided in part only (e.g., perforated).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, particularly subclasses 430 and 118 for winding
    package contents, and subclasses   409, 204, 587, and 588 for forming or
    covering a package that may include winding.


CLS 242/529
TXT Contracting or expanding spool during winding:

    Subject matter under subclass 520 wherein the convolutions are coiled upon
    a circumferential surface of the take-up, which surface is associated with
    structure for causing the circumference of the surface to increase or
    decrease during coiling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    571+,   for a radial expansible or contractile mandrel for receiving or
    dispensing elongated material.


CLS 242/530
TXT Simultaneous winding:

    Subject matter under subclass 520 wherein plural, distinct elongated
    materials are coiled at the same time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35.5+,  for winding strands on multiple bobbins or cops.

    330,    for simultaneously wound information-bearing carriers.

    378+,   for multiple windings on a spring-powered reeling device.

    388+,   for multiple windings on a reeling device of general use.

    439.4+  and 443.1+, for simultaneously wound articles.

    594+,   for simultaneously available supplies of elongated material.


CLS 242/530.1
TXT Coaxial coils:

    Subject matter under subclass 530 wherein the elongated materials are
    simultaneously coiled about a common center line.


CLS 242/530.2
TXT Superposed coils:

    Subject matter under subclass 530.1 wherein the elongated materials are
    simultaneously coiled one upon the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    444.1+, for superposed windings on an article (e.g., a capacitor).


CLS 242/530.3
TXT Relatively rotatable coils:

    Subject matter under subclass 530.1 comprising means (e.g., a slip coupling
    or differential gearing) to particularly facilitate rotation of one take-up
    with respect to another take-up, typically for accommodating material,
    spool, or drive rate variations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    544+,   for a variable or clutched transmission in a winding machine.


CLS 242/530.4
TXT Multiple coil groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 530.1 wherein plural distinct sets of coaxial
    take-ups are provided for simultaneous winding.


CLS 242/531
TXT Sequential winding stations:

    Subject matter under subclass 520 wherein the coiling apparatus includes
    discrete take-up sites at which substantially complete coils are
    successively wound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for sequentially winding strand on bobbins or cops.

    25,     for sequentially winding wire on bobbins or cops.

    388.6,  for a multiple spool or spool portion reeling device.

    440     and 445+, for sequentially winding articles.

    533+,   for shifting a take-up from a winding position to or toward an
    unloading position where subsequent winding of a short trailing end section
    may occur.

    542+    and 542.3+, for a particular drum drive where a driven take-up coil
    may continuously shift during winding, at times to a discrete ending
    position where the take-up can complete winding of a short trailing end
    section.


CLS 242/531.1
TXT With transitional guide:

    Subject matter under subclass 531 comprising a material-contacting element
    shiftable between plural locations to direct the material to the respective
    take-up sites.


CLS 242/532
TXT With particular material connection to take-up:

    Subject matter under subclass 520 wherein the apparatus for coiling
    includes start-up means for introducing or connecting a forward end of the
    elongated material to a take-up member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125+    and 579+, for particular structure adapted to make the connection
    of elongated material to a spool.

    332+,   for a threading device for introducing an information-bearing tape
    or film to a take-up.

    562.1,  for a threading means for an unwinding device.


CLS 242/532.1
TXT To take-up leader:

    Subject matter under subclass 532 wherein the start-up means includes
    structure adapted to introduce the forward end of the elongated material to
    a flexible element connected to the take-up member, which element draws the
    elongated material to the take-up member as winding begins.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332.4,  for a take-up leader connection means used for an
    information-bearing tape or film.

    582,    for a take-up with a material attachment leader.


CLS 242/532.2
TXT Pneumatic assist:

    Subject matter under subclass 532 wherein the start-up means includes a
    device for creating a positive or negative air pressure to facilitate the
    introduction or connection of the material to the take-up member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332.3,  for a pneumatically assisted threading arrangement for
    information-bearing tape or film.


CLS 242/532.3
TXT Bonded (e.g., adhesive or water):

    Subject matter under subclass 532 wherein the forward end of the elongated
    material or take-up member relies on a substance adapted to cause the
    forward end of the elongated material to adhere to the take-up member,
    which substance may include water, glue, or binding tape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173,    for adhesive adapted to retain the positions of strand convolutions
    in a package.

    583,    for adhesive or hook pile fabric used to facilitate the connection
    between an elongated material and take-up.


CLS 242/532.4
TXT Material pierced by take-up component:

    Subject matter under subclass 532 wherein the take-up member includes a
    projection adapted to penetrate the elongated material either through an
    existing aperture or by puncturing the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332.7,  for means on a take-up to facilitate a connection between the
    take-up and a material to be wound thereon.

    584+,   for means on take-up to penetrate a material to be wound.


CLS 242/532.5
TXT Clamp on take-up:

    Subject matter under subclass 532 comprising a clip on the take-up member
    arranged to grip and hold the forward end of the elongated material to the
    take-up member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125.1+, for means to attach an end of a strand to a spool.

    332.7,  for means to facilitate the attachment between the forward end of
    an information carrier and take-up.

    586+,   for a clamp on a take-up to grip the forward end of an elongated
    material to be wound.


CLS 242/532.6
TXT Slotted take-up:

    Subject matter under subclass 532 wherein the take-up member includes
    structure defining a slit adapted to receive and retain the forward end of
    the elongated material during winding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332.8,  for a slotted take-up member for receiving the forward end of an
    information-bearing carrier.

    587,    for an apertured take-up to facilitate a connection between the
    take-up member and a material to be wound thereon.


CLS 242/532.7
TXT With particular threading facility:

    Subject matter under subclass 532 wherein the start-up means is constructed
    to expedite passage of the forward end of the elongated material to the
    take-up member (e.g., providing a distinctively efficient introductory
    path, access, or advancement mode).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332+,   for means to facilitate threading of an information-bearing carrier
    to a take-up member.

    562.1,  for means to facilitate threading of an unwinding material.


CLS 242/533
TXT With spool loading or coil removal:

    Subject matter under subclass 520 wherein the coiling apparatus includes a
    take-up station and tending mechanism particularly designed to either:  (a)
    furnish an empty spool to the take-up station, or (b) remove a filled spool
    from the take-up station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35.5,   for removing full and supplying empty bobbins to a strand winding
    station.

    558+,   for supply coil replenishment at an unwinding station.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclass 159 for apparatus for
    repositioning take-up cans relative to a sliver coiling station.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 266+ for
    loading (donning) or unloading (doffing) an empty core or wound package in
    a spinning machine.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 229 for stripping a yarn spool for a
    spindle of a coating apparatus.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 1.52+ for article transfer means
    associated with a generalized support or rack.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 911 for details of material
    handling apparatus that may be appropriate to a core and coil loading.


CLS 242/533.1
TXT With particular spool supply hopper:

    Subject matter under subclass 533 wherein the tending mechanism includes
    structure for temporarily storing empty spools and sequentially releasing a
    spool to the take-up station.


CLS 242/533.2
TXT Pivotal transfer device:

    Subject matter under subclass 533 wherein the tending mechanism includes a
    transport member arcuately movable about an axis to convey a spool between
    the take-up station and either:  (a) an empty spool supply station, or (b)
    a coil deposit station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    542.3,  for means to steer a coil during winding.

    559.1+, for means to arcuately transfer a supply coil relative to an
    unwinding station.


CLS 242/533.3
TXT Peripheral coil support:

    Subject matter under subclass 533.2 wherein the arcuately movable transport
    member of the tending mechanism is designed to bear the outer circumference
    of the coil.


CLS 242/533.4
TXT Turret:

    Subject matter under subclass 533.2 wherein the arcuately movable transport
    member comprises a rotary carrier having multiple spool support portions
    incrementally shiftable between the take-up station and either the supply
    or deposit station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35.5,   for a turret in a strand-winding machine.

    559.2,  for an indexed turret for conveying a supply coil relative to an
    unwinding station.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    82,     Turning, subclass 159 for a rotatable turret for selectively moving
    lathe tools to an operating position.


CLS 242/533.5
TXT With particular turret indexer:

    Subject matter under subclass 533.4 wherein special significance is
    attributed to means for causing or controlling the incremental shifting of
    the rotary carrier.


CLS 242/533.6
TXT With particular winding drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 533.4 wherein special significance is
    attributed to apparatus for causing or controlling coiling of material on a
    spool at the take-up station.


CLS 242/533.7
TXT Axially shifted transfer device:

    Subject matter under subclass 533 wherein the tending mechanism includes a
    transport member linearly movable in a direction parallel to or coaxial
    with the coiling axis to convey a spool between the take-up station and
    either:  (a) an empty spool supply station, or (b) a coil deposit station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    559,    559.3, and 559.4, for means to shift a supply with respect to an
    unwinding station.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 244 for a general apparatus employing
    force-applying means to assemble or disassemble elements in a telescoping
    relationship in a manner that may be analogous to loading or unloading
    spools from a mandrel.


CLS 242/533.8
TXT Mobile carrier (e.g., wheeled vehicle):

    Subject matter under subclass 533 wherein the tending mechanism includes a
    spool conveyance adapted to transport a spool or wound coil along a random
    path between the take-up station and a location remote from the take-up
    station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403+,   for a mobile carrier for a reeling device.

    557,    for a mobile carrier adapted to convey a coil with respect to an
    unwinding station.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 106+ for a rack, stand, or similar
    carrier adapted to hold sewing articles that may include a spool.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 911 for details of material
    handling apparatus that may be appropriate to core and coil loading.


CLS 242/534
TXT Detector, control, or material responsive stop:

    Subject matter under subclass 520 wherein the apparatus includes a device
    to monitor a condition of the coiling operation for issuing a regulating,
    alarm, indication, or halt signal.

    (1)     Note.  A quantitative control as well as an alarm or stop is found
    here unless provided for earlier (e.g., as a tensioning or cutting
    control); however, a tension-triggered mechanism to simply halt winding
    (e.g., during a material jam or supply exhaust) is placed here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333+,   for a device for detecting a need and causing a halt of winding or
    a reversal of the winding direction of a magnetic tape or photographic film
    winding or unwinding device.

    334+,   for a device for detecting and controlling the speed of a magnetic
    tape or photographic film.

    410+,   for a detector combined with a control for tensioning.

    523+,   for a detector in a control for a cutter in a convolute winding
    machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, for a detail of a photoelectric device, per se, or
    in combination with generalized structure, particularly subclasses 200+ and
    559.01+.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclasses 226+ and 256+ for alignment
    and stopping sheet feeding that may be analogous to a corresponding
    operation in winding.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, for a control device for an
    electrical device including a motor or brake of general use, particularly
    subclasses 6, 7, and 362+.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, particularly subclass 238 for a
    detector or stop combined with optical measuring or inspection.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, particularly
    subclasses 469.05, 478.01+, and 479.01 for article handling and
    distribution control that may include winding.


CLS 242/534.1
TXT Responsive to material path:

    Subject matter under subclass 534 wherein the monitoring device is actuated
    in response to deviation of the material from a desired course.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    563.1,  for a detector responsive to the unwinding path of a material.


CLS 242/534.2
TXT Responsive to material length:

    Subject matter under subclass 534 wherein the monitoring device senses the
    amount of material either:  (a) retained by the supply, or (b) wound on the
    take-up.

    (1)     Note.  The length determination may be determined as a factor of
    other physical characteristics (e.g., weight or diameter).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    390.1,  for a material length stop in a motor-driven reeling device.

    564.1,  for a detector responsive to length in an unwinding machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 125 for a material
    control stop, per se, or general use.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 276 for a drive mechanism under the control of a turn counter of a
    hoist or winch drum.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, especially subclasses 34.13 through
    34.21 for a particular cabinet structure designed to support a rolled
    material under the control of means to limit or stop winding or unwinding.


CLS 242/535
TXT With feeder:

    Subject matter under subclass 520 wherein the coiling apparatus includes a
    mechanism to react against and longitudinally advance successive segments
    of the elongated material along a path toward a winding station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272,    for a feeder in a fishing reel.

    352.2   and 354+, for a feeder for winding an information-bearing carrier.

    418+,   for a feeder used to control tension in an elongated material.

    564.3+, for a feeder in an unwinding device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, particularly subclasses 385+ and
    446+ for advancing means of exhibit medium.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    422+ for feeding apparatus combined with surface bonding.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 42 for a feeder combined with a specified
    recorder or printer of a telegraph system.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, for a feeder
    subcombination or in general combinations.

    235,    Registers, subclasses 475+ for a feed mechanism combined with
    register construction.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclasses 8.1+ for details of feeding
    sheets.

    396,    Photography,  particularly subclasses 387+ for film-feeding with
    winding in camera.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, particularly subclasses 578+ for a
    web-feeding mechanism combined with specified typewriter structure.

    462,    Books, Strips, and Leaves for Manifolding, for advancing a strip
    combined with joining or separating strips.


CLS 242/535.1
TXT Deflecting material into coil (e.g., coreless coiling):

    Subject matter under subclass 535 wherein the material advancing mechanism
    acts further to either:  (a) simultaneously bend the material about a
    coiling axis as the material is being advanced, or (b) advance the
    elongated material toward an associated device that so bends the material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass collects documents that curl the elongated
    material into a coil rather than draw the material tightly about a spindle
    by turning the spindle or orbital wrapping guide.


CLS 242/535.2
TXT Variable or intermittent:

    Subject matter under subclass 535 wherein the material advancing mechanism
    includes a regulator for either:  (a)  providing different rates of
    material advancement, or (b) controlling an operating cycle that includes
    periods of advancement with a selected dwell period.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331+,   for an intermediate storage arrangement for an information-bearing
    carrier that may include an intermittent feeder to regulate storage.

    417,    for a reserve loop former that may include an intermittent feeder
    to regulate the loop.


CLS 242/535.3
TXT Driven with take-up or supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 535 wherein the material advancing mechanism
    includes means coupled to a take-up or supply coil driver.


CLS 242/535.4
TXT Endless belt or chain:

    Subject matter under subclass 535 wherein the material advancing mechanism
    includes an elongated, closed loop element for engaging and advancing the
    elongated material.


CLS 242/535.5
TXT Special surface (e.g., toothed):

    Subject matter under subclass 535 wherein the material advancing mechanism
    includes a material engaging component to which particular significance is
    attributed.


CLS 242/536
TXT Winding spaced-apart convolutions:

    Subject matter under subclass 520 wherein the coiling apparatus winds the
    elongated material in such a way as to maintain clearance between
    successive turns (e.g., by inserting spacers between turns during winding,
    or by winding on a take-up with radial steps or other similar spacer
    structure).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    602+,   for a spool with a convolution separator.


CLS 242/537
TXT Irregularly shaped take-up:

    Subject matter under subclass 520 wherein the coiling apparatus is
    particularly adapted for winding onto a body having a shape materially
    varying from either:  (a) a right cylindrical, longitudinal form, and (b) a
    circular or squared lateral form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     for strand winding on a card, board, or form that is frequently
    flattened.

    53,     for strand winding a hank or skein, typically on an elongated or
    squared form.

    437+,   for apparatus for forming an article by winding material on an
    irregularly-shaped      core.


CLS 242/538
TXT With coiled supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 520 wherein the supply is an unwinding coil
    adapted to furnish material to a winding take-up coil.

    (1)     Note.  While significant spacing between distinct supply and
    take-up coils is typical, the coils may be closely concentric, as in a coil
    tightener where relatively loose convolutions of a supply coil are
    constricted to an inner take-up coil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324+,   for information convertible carrier winding and unwinding that
    typically include both supply and take-up coils.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclass 102.21 for winding and
    unwinding spools with an intermediate stretching station.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 385+ and 446+ for
    unwinding from a coiled supply.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, especially subclasses 34.6 and 34.11+
    for particular cabinet structure designed to support a supply and a take-up
    roll for toweling and the like.

    396,    Photography, appropriate subclasses and particularly subclasses
    387+ for a camera structure with winding, feeding, or tensioning film from
    a coiled supply in a camera.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, particularly subclasses 242, 512, 609+, and
    613+ for mounting means for a spool or roll, and subclasses 578+ for a
    web-feeding mechanism combined with specified typewriter structure.


CLS 242/538.1
TXT Coordinated drive of supply and take-up coils:

    Subject matter under subclass 538 comprising a mechanism to correlate
    rotation of the supply and take-up coils.


CLS 242/538.2
TXT With intermediate access station:

    Subject matter under subclass 538 comprising means to support the supply
    and take-up coils in a spaced relation with a portion of the elongated
    material extending between the coils.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclass provide for winding plus
    unwinding in combination with a general utility guide path where the
    material may be exposed with or without contact to a utilization area.
    However, extreme care should be used to avoid reliance on this area to
    provide for original placement of any of the following:  (a) claimed
    modification of the elongated material (e.g., dyeing, sewing, deforming,
    laminating, etc.), (b) acting on the material (e.g., cleaning, stretching,
    marking, printing, etc.), or (c) combining the guide path with apparatus or
    a method step provided for elsewhere (e.g., light control, photographic
    reproduction, display optics, measuring, or testing).


CLS 242/538.3
TXT Enclosed housing for coils:

    Subject matter under subclass 538.2 comprising an enclosure or coupled
    enclosure sections for covering both the supply and take-up coils.


CLS 242/538.4
TXT Light occludent construction (e.g., light sensitive film holder):

    Subject matter under subclass 538 comprising an enclosure for each or both
    of the supply and take-up coils specifically fabricated to block out
    detrimental light rays.


CLS 242/539
TXT With particular frame:

    Subject matter under subclass 520 wherein special significance is
    attributed to means for supporting, enclosing, or shielding the take-up or
    elongated material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310,    for a particular frame for a fishing reel.

    358+,   for a particular frame for an information convertible
    winding/unwinding device (e.g., tape player/recorder or film projector).

    379+,   for a particular frame in a spring reel.

    398+,   for a particular frame for a reeling device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, especially subclasses 34.6 and 34.8+
    for a particular cabinet structure designed to support rolled toweling and
    the like.


CLS 242/540
TXT With particular drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 520 wherein special significance is
    attributed to a mechanism for transmitting torque from a power input to the
    take-up to cause winding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249+,   for a particular drive in a fishing reel.

    349+,   for a particular drive in a winding/unwinding machine for a
    machine-convertible information carrier.

    389+,   for a particular drive in a reeling device.

    564+,   for a particular drive in an unwinding device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, for details of a transmission of
    general use.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, for details of a clutch
    arrangement or control stop of general use.


CLS 242/541
TXT Driver engages coil periphery:

    Subject matter under subclass 540 wherein the mechanism for transmitting
    torque has as its output a member to engage and rotate the outer perimeter
    of the take-up to cause winding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    352.3+, for a peripheral drive for a machine convertible information
    carrier winding device.

    393,    for a peripheral drive for a reeling device.

    420.1+, for a peripheral drive in a tension control device.

    564.5,  for a peripheral drive in an unwinding machine.


CLS 242/541.1
TXT With spindle driver:

    Subject matter under subclass 541 wherein the mechanism for transmitting
    torque also includes a center shaft for imparting a rotary motion to the
    take-up.


CLS 242/541.2
TXT Coreless:

    Subject matter under subclass 541 wherein the mechanism for transmitting
    torque, in addition to rotating the take-up, supports the material being
    wound free of center supporting or retaining structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    535.1,  for feeding means for pushing material into a coreless coil.


CLS 242/541.3
TXT Endless belt driver:

    Subject matter under subclass 541 wherein the output member includes a
    closed loop belt adapted to engage and rotate the take-up.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    352.4,  for an endless belt, peripheral drive used in a tape recorder or
    similar winding/unwinding system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, for details
    of a belt drive of general use.


CLS 242/541.4
TXT With drive pressure regulator (e.g., nip pressure control):

    Subject matter under subclass 541 wherein the mechanism for transmitting
    torque includes means to adjust the force with which the take-up and output
    member engage each other.


CLS 242/541.5
TXT Coil engaging pressure element:

    Subject matter under subclass 541.4 wherein the means to adjust the force
    of engagement between the take-up and output member is adapted to shift the
    output member with respect to the take-up.


CLS 242/541.6
TXT Fluid actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 541.5 wherein the means for shifting the
    output member is actuated by a hydraulic or pneumatic pressure operator.


CLS 242/541.7
TXT Fluid actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 541.4 wherein the means to adjust the force
    of engagement between the take-up and output member is actuated by a
    hydraulic or pneumatic actuator.


CLS 242/542
TXT Plural drums:

    Subject matter under subclass 541 wherein the motion transmitting mechanism
    includes multiple take-up rotating members formed as rollers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, for details of a roller of general use.


CLS 242/542.1
TXT Driven at different speeds:

    Subject matter under subclass 542 wherein the motion-transmitting mechanism
    is adapted to establish a drive rate differential between the take-up
    members.


CLS 242/542.2
TXT Shiftable drum:

    Subject matter under subclass 542 wherein one of the rotating take-up
    members is movable from one position to a spaced position (e.g., to
    accommodate buildup of the take-up during winding or facilitate removal of
    a completed take-up coil).


CLS 242/542.3
TXT With core steering means (e.g., pivotal mounting or guide rail):

    Subject matter under subclass 541 comprising a structure for directing
    movement of a take-up spool with respect to the transmission mechanism,
    typically for one of the following reasons:  (a) to accommodate an
    increasing take-up diameter as layers of material are wound, (b) to shift
    the take-up to a spaced winding position permitting a second take-up to be
    engaged with the transmission mechanism while the preceding take-up is
    being completed, or (c) to shift the take-up toward a spaced winding
    position for convenient unloading when the winding is completed.

    (1)     Note.  The steering means may actively move or passively direct
    movement of the take-up from one position to another.


CLS 242/542.4
TXT Particular drum:

    Subject matter under subclass 541 wherein the mechanism for transmitting
    torque includes a drive roller and special significance is attributed to
    the construction or mounting of the roller.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, for details of a roller of general use.


CLS 242/543
TXT Intermittent:

    Subject matter under subclass 540 wherein the mechanism for transmitting
    torque is adapted to perform a cycle of operation that includes:  (a)
    rotating the take-up to wind a length of material, (b) coming to a stop or
    dwell period during which no winding takes place, and (c) restarting to
    wind an additional length of material.


CLS 242/544
TXT Variable speed:

    Subject matter under subclass 540 wherein the mechanism for transmitting
    torque is adapted to rotate the take-up at different angular velocities
    (e.g., by altering a drive input rate or drive transmission ratio) either
    before or during winding.


CLS 242/545
TXT With clutch or releasable coupling:

    Subject matter under subclass 540 wherein the mechanism for transmitting
    torque includes a distinctive component that provides either an
    interruption or a limitation of torque supplied to the take-up.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257+,   for a disengagable clutch in a fishing reel.

    394,    for a releasable drive in a general utility reel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, appropriate subclasses for a
    clutch, clutch-brake, or power-stop control as a subcombination or of
    general use.


CLS 242/545.1
TXT Limited torque:

    Subject matter under subclass 545 wherein the mechanism for transmitting
    torque includes a distinct component (e.g., a slip coupling) for limiting
    transfer of torque to the take-up.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262+,   for a yieldable drive coupling in a fishing reel.

    356.5,  for a friction coupling in a tape or film drive.

    394.1,  for a slip drive in a general utility reeling device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, particularly subclasses 30+ for an overload release coupling
    in rotary shafting.


CLS 242/546
TXT With particular drive input:

    Subject matter under subclass 540 wherein special significance is
    attributed to the power input of the mechanism for transmitting torque
    (e.g., a motor with a distinctive structure or torque characteristic).


CLS 242/546.1
TXT Manual:

    Subject matter under subclass 546 wherein the power input of the mechanism
    for transmitting torque includes an initial element (e.g., a hand crank,
    lever, or wheel) particularly fashioned to be operated by a user.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 543+ for a handle in a
    generalized combination or subcombination.


CLS 242/547
TXT Pressure element against coil (e.g., nip pressure member):

    Subject matter under subclass 520 comprising means bearing against the
    material wound on the take-up for exerting a radial force against the wound
    material toward the coiling axis (e.g., to provide a compactly wound coil).


CLS 242/548
TXT With particular material guide or guard:

    Subject matter under subclass 520 wherein particular significance is
    attributed to means for either:  (a) directing the elongated material to
    the take-up along a desired path, or (b) confining the elongated material
    within limited variations of such a path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    326.4   and 346+, for a guide in a cartridge carrying a machine convertible
    information carrier.

    377,    for a particular guide in a spring reel.

    397,    for a particular guide or guard in a reeling device.

    566,    for a particular guide or guard in an unwinding device.

    615+,   for a particular guide or guard for running material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 42 for a guide combined with the recorder or
    printer of a telegraph system.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, may include a nominal
    recitation of a supply or take-up coil (e.g., less than a support for such
    a coil or a cooperative relationship between a tension or exhaust detector
    and reel-driving or reel-stopping means, etc.); subclasses 168+ for
    orbitally traveling material engaging surface(s) or subclass 196.1 for a
    passive guide combined with a material feeder.


CLS 242/548.1
TXT Distributing:

    Subject matter under subclass 548 wherein the guide acts to vary placement
    of the elongated material in a direction substantially parallel to the
    coiling axis as the material is coiled.

    (1)     Note.  Variation of material placement proper for this subclass
    occurs continuously or at predetermined intervals during the winding of a
    single coil, and not solely for realignment, accommodation for various
    width materials, or stepping a guide between multiple winding stations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27+,    43+, 157.1, 158+, and 261+, for a strand-distributing guide

    241     and 273, for strand distribution in a fishing reel by shifting
    either a guide or the take-up.

    397.2+, for a shiftable guide in a reel of general use.

    441+    and 447+, for article winding apparatus having means to distribute
    the material onto a receiving core..

    542.4,  for drive roller structure that may affect the material placement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 22+ for motion transfer
    structure in generalized combinations and as a subcombination.


CLS 242/548.2
TXT Edge of running web:

    Subject matter under subclass 548 wherein the guide or guard directs a
    strip material having a significant width and negligible side surface
    (edge), which side surface is contacted or confined by the guide or guard.


CLS 242/548.3
TXT Proximate coil end:

    Subject matter under subclass 548 wherein the guide or guard is positioned
    to act on the elongated material adjacent to the take-up and near one edge
    of the material to typically establish a desired alignment of convolutions
    of material.


CLS 242/548.4
TXT Noncontacting (e.g., magnetic or air):

    Subject matter under subclass 548.3 wherein the guide or guard exerts force
    or influence on the elongated material while remaining substantially free
    of contact with the material, typically by positive or negative air
    pressure or magnetomotive force against the material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass accepts a guide using a noncontacting force to
    cause alignment of material against a solid element (e.g., a spool flange).


CLS 242/550
TXT UNWINDING:

    Apparatus or method under the class definition comprising an uncoiling
    mechanism having a support station for a supply coil of elongated material
    combined with one of the following:  (a) attachment means to join materials
    from successive supply coils (e.g., to provide a continuous, uninterrupted
    supply of elongated material), (b) supply coil replenishing device for
    shifting a full supply coil or used spool relative to an unwinding station,
    (c) support structure for an associated backup supply coil, or (d)
    apparatus to separate, detect, or regulate material unwound from the supply
    coil.

    (1)     Note.  A patent directed to an unwinding support station, per se,
    or such a support combined with a simple guide are combined with similar
    winding supports, spindles and spools under the heading of coil holder
    provided lower in this schedule.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    410+,   for an unwinding device combined with a specified brake or other
    device to create or regulate tension.

    531+,   for reserve winding spool supports.

    532.3,  532.4, and 532.7, for lead end attachment in a winding machine.

    533+,   for coil handling in a winding machine.

    534+,   for a material detector and stop in a winding machine.

    570+,   for a simple unwinding device such as a dispenser, spindle, or
    spool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), particularly subclass 108 for
    a device for unwinding strand, web, or connected sections of a building
    component material.

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 78+, 302,
    909, and 924 for details of a cutter for unwound or nonwound material.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 229 and 235 for winding or unwinding
    combined with a specified coating device.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, especially subclasses 34.8+ for a
    particular cabinet structure designed to support rolled toweling and the
    like.


CLS 242/551
TXT With attachment to preceding material:

    Subject matter under subclass 550 comprising a mechanism for splicing an
    expiring portion of the elongated material unwinding from the supply coil
    to the elongated material of a replacement coil.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclasses 71+ for a cloth finishing
    disclosure combined with a material splicer.

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclass 141 for a textile fabric splicer
    for warp yarns.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    504+ for a significant collection of apparatus for splicing web ends
    together to form a continuous web.


CLS 242/552
TXT With accumulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 551 wherein the splicing mechanism includes a
    storage device for receiving a reserve length of the elongated material to
    later serve as a temporary supply while normal unwinding is halted or
    slowed for splicing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331+,   for intermediate storage between a supply and take-up coil of a
    machine convertible information carrier.

    364+,   for a unidirectional wind/rewind arrangement which may serve as an
    accumulator.

    417+,   for a reserve loop former for accumulating slack material.


CLS 242/553
TXT With lead end modification (e.g., trimming):

    Subject matter under subclass 551 wherein the splicing mechanism includes
    structure for forming, shaping, or cutting a forward end of the elongated
    material unwound from the replacement coil.


CLS 242/554
TXT With automated control:

    Subject matter under subclass 551 wherein the splicing mechanism includes
    means for completing a major portion of the splicing operation in response
    to instantaneous conditions and without intervention of a human operator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.13+ for a
    circuit maker/breaker specially designed for operation by a running web or
    strand, spool or guide.


CLS 242/554.1
TXT Material registration:

    Subject matter under subclass 554 wherein the automated control juxtaposes
    the respective elongated materials in a predetermined relationship in
    preparation for the splicing operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    534.1,  for material alignment in a winding machine.


CLS 242/554.2
TXT Cutting:

    Subject matter under subclass 554 wherein the automated control severs one
    of the elongated materials.


CLS 242/554.3
TXT Turret indexing control:

    Subject matter under subclass 554 comprising a rotatable coil carrier for
    successively moving each supply coil to a position for unwinding, and
    wherein the automated control actuates the coil carrier in a predetermined
    relationship to expiration of the unwinding material from a preceding
    supply coil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35.5,   for a turret associated with a strand winding machine.

    533.4+, for a turret associated with a convolute winding machine.

    555.5,  for a turret for spliced materials being unwound.


CLS 242/554.4
TXT Differentiated material portion (e.g., material end, tear, or signal):

    Subject matter under subclass 554 wherein the automated control is adapted
    to detect a particular characteristic or condition in the elongated
    material and initiate the splicing operation in response to the
    characteristic or condition.

    (1)     Note.  The characteristic can be a control signal, a tear or other
    intentional or accidental imperfection in the material, while the condition
    can be a highly tensioned segment of material, a break, expiration of the
    material, or other prevailing condition, any of which initiate the start of
    the splice including simply stopping the unwinding so that the splice can
    be performed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    534+,   for a detector or stop in a winding machine.


CLS 242/554.5
TXT Drive or brake control:

    Subject matter under subclass 554 wherein the support station for the
    supply coil includes motion transmission apparatus or retarding means, and
    the automated control regulates the transmission apparatus or retarding
    means as a part of the splicing operation (e.g., temporarily increasing,
    decreasing, or interrupting unwinding).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, appropriate subclasses for a
    clutch, clutch-brake, or power-stop control as a subcombination or of
    general use.


CLS 242/554.6
TXT Speed matching (e.g., new roll to running material):

    Subject matter under subclass 554.5 wherein the automated control induces
    unwinding of a replacement coil or material at a rate compatible with the
    unwinding rate of an expiring coil or material.


CLS 242/555
TXT Splicing running material (i.e., flying splice):

    Subject matter under subclass 551 wherein the splicing mechanism joins the
    elongated materials as the expiring material continues to move.


CLS 242/555.1
TXT Shift new material:

    Subject matter under subclass 555 wherein the elongated material unwound
    from the replacement coil is moved to a location proximate to the expiring
    material for joining of the materials.


CLS 242/555.2
TXT Longitudinal shift:

    Subject matter under subclass 555.1 wherein the elongated material unwound
    from the replacement coil is moved in a direction generally parallel to the
    path of movement of the expiring material.


CLS 242/555.3
TXT Between new roll and expiring material:

    Subject matter under subclass 555 wherein the expiring material and
    material of the replacement coil are juxtaposed for splicing by relative
    movement between the expiring material and the replacement coil.


CLS 242/555.4
TXT Stationary roll positions:

    Subject matter under subclass 555.3 comprising distinct, spaced apart coil
    supporting devices disposed in a constant relationship with respect to each
    other.


CLS 242/555.5
TXT Turret support for new roll:

    Subject matter under subclass 555.3 comprising a rotary indexing coil
    carrier for supporting plural coils sequentially made available for
    splicing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35.5,   for a turret associated with a strand winding machine.

    533.4+, for a turret associated with a convolute winding machine.

    554.3,  for an automatic control for indexing a turret during a splicing
    operation.


CLS 242/555.6
TXT With particular splicer:

    Subject matter under subclass 555.5 wherein special significance is
    attributed to the splicing mechanism.


CLS 242/555.7
TXT With peripheral drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 555.5 comprising powered means acting on the
    outer circumference of a coil to rotate the coil in an unwinding direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    352.3+, for a peripheral drive for a machine convertible information
    carrier winding device.

    393,    for a peripheral drive for a reeling device.

    420.1+, for a peripheral drive in a tension control device.

    564.5,  for a peripheral drive in an unwinding machine.


CLS 242/556
TXT With particular splice means (e.g., glue or pressure):

    Subject matter under subclass 551 wherein special significance is
    attributed to structure of the mechanism for splicing the elongated
    materials.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    555.6,  for details of a splicing mechanism combined with a turret support
    for new coils.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    504+ for apparatus for end-to-end splicing of web material.


CLS 242/556.1
TXT Adhesive tape:

    Subject matter under subclass 556 wherein the splicing mechanism includes a
    means to apply a separate tacky strip to join the elongated materials
    together.


CLS 242/557
TXT Mobile unwinding station (e.g., wheeled conveyance):

    Subject matter under subclass 550 wherein the support station includes
    means facilitating arbitrary movement of the support station from one
    location to another location (e.g., skids or a conveyance hook-up assembly).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is limited to a supply coil support that is
    either itself independently mobile or particularly adapted for attachment
    to a conveyance, in contrast to, (a) a movable supply coil loading
    structure such as a turret for repetitively acting as a component of an
    unwinding device, or (b) a randomly oriented coil holder, both of which are
    separately provided for hereafter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403+,   for a mobile carrier for a reeling device.

    533.8,  for a mobile carrier for wound coils.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 106+ for a rack, stand, or similar
    carrier adapted to hold sewing articles that may include a spool.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 911 for details of material
    handling apparatus that may be appropriate to a core and coil loading.


CLS 242/558
TXT With supply coil replenishment:

    Subject matter under subclass 550 wherein the uncoiling mechanism includes
    as a component, a replenishing device facilitating continued uncoiling by
    either, (a) withdrawing a used supply spool from the support station, or
    (b) providing a replacement coil to the support station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35.5,   for replenishing a core in a strand winding machine.

    596+,   597+, and 598+, for details of the various classes of coil holders
    that may include structure for simply releasing or dropping a used spool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 1.52+ for means to transfer articles
    from a generalized support or rack.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 911 for details of material
    handling apparatus that may be appropriate to a core and coil loading.


CLS 242/559
TXT Supply coil transfer apparatus:

    Subject matter under subclass 558 wherein the replenishing device includes
    a transfer mechanism for shifting a replacement coil to the support station.


CLS 242/559.1
TXT Arcuate transfer path:

    Subject matter under subclass 559 wherein the transfer mechanism includes
    structure radiating from a center and movable along an arcuate path about
    the center to shift the replacement coil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    533.4+, for a similar transfer device used in a winding machine.


CLS 242/559.2
TXT By indexed turret:

    Subject matter under subclass 559.1 wherein the radiating structure is
    adapted to carry multiple supply coils for stepwise movement about the
    center to successively introduce replacement coils to the support station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35.5,   for a turret associated with a strand winding machine.

    533.4+, for a turret associated with a convolute winding machine.

    555.5,  for a turret for spliced materials being unwound.


CLS 242/559.3
TXT Sequential coil shifting:

    Subject matter under subclass 559 wherein the transfer mechanism includes
    means for moving the replacement coil between distinct loading,
    transitional, and uncoiling positions (e.g., a plunger to thrust a first
    coil against an intermediate coil to move a separate coil to the support
    station).


CLS 242/559.4
TXT Coil vertically positioned:

    Subject matter under subclass 559 wherein the transfer mechanism is adapted
    to raise or lower the replacement coil to the support station.


CLS 242/560
TXT Reserve coil storage:

    Subject matter under subclass 558 wherein the support station includes
    means for supporting a back-up coil made available for unwinding upon
    depletion of a previous supply coil (e.g., by exposing the back-up coil at
    a new unwinding station).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 106+ for a rack, stand, or similar
    carrier adapted to hold sewing articles that may include a spool.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, especially subclass 34.22 for a
    particular cabinet structure designed to support a reserve roll of
    elongated material.


CLS 242/560.1
TXT With feeder from subsequent supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 560 wherein the means for supporting the
    back-up coil is associated with a material advancing device to present
    material for convenient use upon depletion of the preceding coil.


CLS 242/560.2
TXT Manually shifted reserve coil:

    Subject matter under subclass 560 comprising coil directing structure
    (e.g., a guide, chute, or channel) to provide the user with means to shift
    the replacement coil from a reserve position to the support station.


CLS 242/560.3
TXT Radially shifted:

    Subject matter under subclass 560.2 wherein the coil directing structure is
    arranged to direct movement of the replacement coil in a direction
    generally perpendicular to the axis about which unwinding takes place.


CLS 242/561
TXT Static ramp or track:

    Subject matter under subclass 558 wherein the uncoiling mechanism is
    associated with a guide way to facilitate movement of a used spool or
    replacement coil relative to the support station.


CLS 242/562
TXT With material end separator (e.g., doctor blade or jet):

    Subject matter under subclass 550 wherein the support station for a supply
    coil is combined with means positioned adjacent to the outer periphery of
    the supply coil, usually at the point where the unwinding material diverges
    from the coil, to expressly part unwinding material from the coil.


CLS 242/562.1
TXT With threading along unwinding path:

    Subject matter under 562 comprising guide means to facilitate advancement
    of a leading end of the elongated material from the supply coil along a
    desired course.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332+,   for threading means to direct the movement of an
    information-bearing carrier from a supply coil.

    532.7,  for threading means to direct an elongated material along a winding
    path.


CLS 242/563
TXT With detector, indicator, or control:

    Subject matter under subclass 550 wherein the unwinding mechanism includes
    means for monitoring an unwinding condition and issuing an alarm, stop, or
    corrective signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    410+,   for control of tension in an unwinding or winding device.

    534,    for a detector or stop combined with a winding device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.13+ for a
    circuit maker/breaker specially designed for operation by a running web or
    strand, spool or guide.

    250,    Radiant Energy, for a detail of a photoelectric device, per se, or
    in combination with generalized structure, particularly subclasses 200+ and
    559.01+.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclasses 226+ and 256+ for alignment
    and stopping sheet feeding that may be analogous to a corresponding
    operation in unwinding.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, especially subclass 34.13 through
    34.21 for a particular cabinet structure designed to support a rolled
    material under the control of means to limit or stop winding or unwinding.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, for a control device for an
    electrical device including a motor or brake of general use, particularly
    subclasses 6, 7, and 362+.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, particularly subclass 238 for a
    detector or stop combined with optical measuring or inspection.

    462,    Books, Strips, and Leaves for Manifolding, for controlling strips
    being joined or separated in a manifolding operation.


CLS 242/563.1
TXT Unwinding path (e.g., material alignment):

    Subject matter under subclass 563 wherein the monitoring means is
    responsive to deviation of the unwinding material from a desired course.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    399.2,  for an arcuately adjustable mounting for a reeling device.

    534.1,  for a detector responsive to an unwinding path of a winding machine.

    592,    for a coil holder capable of selfalignment.


CLS 242/563.2
TXT Material length:

    Subject matter under subclass 563 wherein the monitoring means is
    responsive to the extent of unwinding.

    (1)     Note.  Measuring here need not be continuous, nor indicative of a
    precise length, but can be simply a determination of a physical
    characteristic (e.g., weight, diameter, etc.) from which length could be
    derived.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    309,    for means to limit unwinding of a fishing reel.

    333+,   for means to stop or reverse unwinding or an information-bearing
    carrier (e.g., a tape player).

    534.2,  for a detector responsive to material length in a winding machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 125 for a material
    control stop, per se, or general use.


CLS 242/564
TXT With drive mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 550 wherein the support station for a supply
    coil includes with a mechanism to drive either:  (a) the supply coil, or
    (b) material advancing means associated with the coil, to cause material to
    be unwound.

    (1)     Note.  The drive mechanism may include either a motor or manually
    actuated device that is a part of the unwinding machine and that acts
    directly on the coil or feeds the material extending from the coil,
    however, the drive mechanism does not include unwinding due solely to a
    pulling action on the web by (a) hand, (b) a separate, ancillary machine,
    or (c) random movement of the supply with a free end of the material
    anchored.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249+,   for a particular drive for a fishing reel.

    349+,   for a particular drive for winding and unwinding an
    information-bearing carrier.

    390.2+, for a particular motor drive for rotating a reeling device in the
    unwinding direction.

    420+,   for a supply coil drive control for regulating tension.

    540+,   for a particular drive in a winding machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, for a transmission detail of general
    use.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 34.11 through 34.17 for a
    special cabinet particularly designed for rolled material adapted to be
    unwound in a controlled manner.


CLS 242/564.1
TXT Limited interval:

    Subject matter under subclass 564 wherein the drive mechanism includes
    means for terminating uncoiling after either:  (a) a predetermined
    increment of time, or (b) a period sufficient to unwind a predetermined
    length of material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333+,   for an automated control for the drive for an information-bearing
    carrier.

    390.1,  for a length responsive stop in a motor driven reeling device.

    534.2,  for a length responsive detector or stop in a convolute winding
    machine.

    563.2,  for a length responsive detector or stop in an unwinding machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 125 for a general use
    power stop responsive to length of material.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.13+ for a
    switch responsive to a condition in running material, spool, or guide.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 276 for a drive mechanism under the control of a turn counter of a
    hoist or winch drum.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, especially subclasses 34.13 through
    34.21 for a particular cabinet structure designed to support a rolled
    material under the control of means to limit or stop winding or unwinding.


CLS 242/564.2
TXT Manual crank or lever:

    Subject matter under subclass 564.1 wherein the drive mechanism includes a
    user powered, rotatable or pivotable mechanical input element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282     through 284, for a particular crank in a fishing reel.

    350,    for a manual drive in a machine convertible information system.

    395+,   for a particular manual drive in a reeling device.

    546.1,  for a manual drive in a winding machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 594.1+ for a crank in
    general use.

    235,    Registers, subclass 5 for a manual unwinding device for tape or the
    like combined with register structure.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclasses 8.1+ for sheet feeding that
    may be analogous to a corresponding operation in unwinding.


CLS 242/564.3
TXT Feeder spaced from coil:

    Subject matter under subclass 564 wherein the drive mechanism includes an
    output element engaging a portion of the elongated material extending from
    the supply coil to induce movement of the material in an unwinding
    direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272,    for a feeder in a fishing reel.

    352.2   and 354+, for a feeder for winding an information-bearing carrier.

    418+,   for a feeder used to control tension in an elongated material.

    535+,   for a feeder in a winding machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, particularly subclasses 385+ and
    446+ for advancing means of exhibit medium.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    422+ for feeding apparatus combined with surface bonding.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 42 for a feeder combined with a specified
    recorder or printer of a telegraph system.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, for a feeder
    subcombination or in general combinations.

    235,    Registers, subclasses 475+ for a feed mechanism combined with
    register construction.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclasses 8.1+ for details of feeding
    sheets.

    396,    Photography, particularly subclasses 387+ for film-feeding with
    winding in camera.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, particularly subclasses 578+ for a
    web-feeding mechanism combined with specified typewriter structure.

    462,    Books, Strips, and Leaves for Manifolding, for advancing a strip
    combined with joining or separating strips.


CLS 242/564.4
TXT Roller or sprocket:

    Subject matter under subclass 564.3 wherein the output element is formed as
    a wheellike element (e.g., a friction or toothed drum or disk).


CLS 242/564.5
TXT Coil-engaging driver:

    Subject matter under subclass 564 wherein the drive mechanism includes
    means contacting an outer surface of the supply coil to rotate the coil in
    the unwinding direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    352.3+, for a peripheral drive for a machine convertible information
    carrier winding device.

    393,    for a peripheral drive for a reeling device.

    420.1+, for a peripheral drive in a tension control device.

    541+,   for a peripheral drive in an winding machine.


CLS 242/565
TXT With unwinding limit:

    Subject matter under subclass 550 wherein the supply station includes means
    to halt uncoiling of the material after a predetermined length of material
    has been dispensed, typically by creating significant resistance to cause
    the material to separate along its length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    390.1,  for a material length stop in a reeling device.

    534.2,  for a length responsive stop in a winding machine.

    564.1,  for an unwinding machine with a limited interval drive.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 713+, 734, 754, and 761+, for a
    sounding device or a flexible measuring tape reel.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 125 for a material
    control stop, per se, or in general use.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.13+ for a
    circuit maker/breaker specially designed for operation by a running web or
    strand, spool, or guide.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 269 and 276 for a brake or drive control device responsive to
    the length of wound or unwound line of a winch.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 207.11+ for length
    of material measurement, per se, or in other combinations.


CLS 242/566
TXT With particular guide or guard:

    Subject matter under subclass 550 wherein the uncoiling mechanism is
    associated with apparatus to either:  (a) direct the elongated material
    from the supply coil along a desired path, or (b) confine the material to
    such a path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157+,   for a strand guide.

    326.4   and 346+, for a guide in a cartridge carrying a machine convertible
    information carrier.

    377,    for a guide in a spring reel.

    397,    for a guide or guard in a reeling device.

    548+,   for a guide or guard in a convolute winding device.

    615+,   for a guide or guard for running material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 136+ for a work manipulating guide combined with
    a specified sewing process or apparatus, or subclass 302 for a thread
    guiding or handling means combined with a specified sewing process or
    apparatus.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 42 for a guide combined with the recorder or
    printer of a telegraph system.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, may include a nominal
    recitation of a supply or take-up coil (e.g., less than a support for such
    a coil or a cooperative relationship between a tension or exhaust detector
    and reel driving or reel stopping means, etc.); subclasses 168+ for
    orbitally traveling material engaging surface(s) or subclass 196.1 for a
    passive guide combined with a material feeder.

    289,    Knots and Knot Tying, subclass 15 for a cord guide in a knot tying
    apparatus.


CLS 242/570
TXT COIL HOLDER OR SUPPORT (E.G., SPINDLE, DISPENSER, OR SPOOL):

    Apparatus or method under the class definition wherein particular
    significance is attributed to structure for supporting a coil of elongated
    material, which structure may include:  (a) a permanent component of a
    winding, unwinding or reeling device about which running material is
    adapted to be wound or unwound, (b) an article of manufacture for
    temporarily carrying a coil of elongated material, or (c) a mounting
    structure carrying a spindle, spool, or coil.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter proper for this subclass includes a coil
    holder:  (a) usable as a permanent or semipermanent component of a winding
    or unwinding machine (e.g., an expansible mandrel, spindle, or arbor), (b)
    usable as a permanent part of a reeling device (e.g., tape recorder, reel,
    winch, etc.), (c) combined with a mounting structure (e.g., dispenser,
    winding machine subcombination) or (d) an article of manufacture (e.g.,
    spool, bobbin, core, card, etc.) on which an elongated material is directly
    wound.

    (2)     Note.  Subject matter proper for original placement in this
    subclass must be at least disclosed as:  (a) being progressively wound
    rather than repetitively fed as in the case of a drive belt pulley,
    capstan, or other motion transmission or conversion mechanism, (b) having
    utility for storing coiled material on its structure for more than 3600
    distinct from a banded member (e.g., a labeled can), (c) storing the
    elongated material, albeit shortly, distinct from being permanently coiled
    as a permanent part of a wound article, such as a ball, inductance device,
    etc., and (d) having the capability of being removed in the same general
    physical form as prior to coiling, which precludes bending a material
    beyond its elastic limit to form shaped coils.

    (3)     Note.  The claiming of structure either as a component or whole
    electrical article (e.g., a terminal pin, pole piece, inductance,
    resistance, etc.) is provided for in the appropriate electrical article
    class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322,    for a spool or spool shaft feature in a fishing reel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, particularly subclasses 483,
    514+, and 518+ for a coil holder with exhibiting apparatus.

    82,     Turning, subclasses 158+ for a work holder in a lathe-type
    environment.

    396,    Photography, particularly subclasses 511+, 597, 601, or 623 for a
    coil support in a camera or fluid treating apparatus.


CLS 242/571
TXT Radially expansible or contractile:

    Subject matter under subclass 570 wherein the coil supporting structure
    includes a spindle or spool having shiftable means to vary an effective
    circumferential dimension of the supporting structure in a radial direction
    with respect to the coil axis, for selectively gripping or releasing an
    internal surface of the coiled material or spool on which the coiled
    material is wound while the structure remains assembled.

    (1)     Note.  The shiftable means may be a part of a spindle, spool, or
    mounted spindle that alternately expands and contracts radially to retain
    and release a coil or spool, and generally provides an appreciable internal
    grip, although some may be no more than a shiftable retainer forcefully
    depressed radially upon insertion of the spool or relatively movable
    spindle cones shifted to grip the interior of a spool or coil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    407.1,  for an expansible or contractile spool in a reeling device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 478 for an adjustable or collapsible core
    in coiling apparatus for deforming metal.

    82,     Turning, subclass 169 for an expandable mandrel for a turning lathe.

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 268 for a coiling device in which wood or a
    wood product is bent.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclass 263 for
    a flexible or portable panel having an adjustable dimension roll.

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 178+ for an expansible or contractile core
    acting as an internal mold component.

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 48.1+ for an expandable holder insertable
    into a work piece aperture.

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, particularly subclasses 2.01+ for an expandable
    chuck appropriate for general use.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, subclasses 15+ for an expanding anchor or holding
    device.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 47+ for a pulley with expansible rim means.


CLS 242/571.1
TXT Inflatable bladder:

    Subject matter under subclass 571 wherein the shiftable means includes a
    flexible wall compartment for receiving pressurized fluid to vary a
    circumferential dimension of the spindle.

    (1)     Note.  Although the shiftable means of this and the indented
    subclass may be partially confined or act through an intermediate structure
    to grip a core of wound material, it should be capable of substantial
    expansion (e.g., a tube, ring, or sack) as opposed to a flexible gasket
    disposed around a piston movable in a rigid cylinder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, subclasses 4 and 5 for a roll or roller with an
    expandable chamber.


CLS 242/571.2
TXT Plural:

    Subject matter under subclass 571.1 wherein multiple flexible wall
    compartments are provided, which compartments may be independently or
    commonly pressured.


CLS 242/571.3
TXT Spool loading responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 571 wherein the shiftable means includes a
    portion directly operated as a result of insertion of a spool or coil onto
    the spindle to vary a circumferential dimension of the spindle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    597.1+, for a free end spindle with a releasable coil retainer.


CLS 242/571.4
TXT Compressible or deflectable:

    Subject matter under subclass 571.3 wherein the shiftable means includes a
    spindle surface formation adapted to yield in response to insertion of a
    spool or coil and thereby provide a contracted surface adapted to radially
    contact a spool or coil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    597.1+, for a free end spindle with a shiftable coil retainer.


CLS 242/571.5
TXT Longitudinal rib:

    Subject matter under subclass 571.4 wherein the surface formation includes
    an elongated member projecting from the spindle, which member is yieldably
    depressed by engagement with a spool or core inserted on the spindle.


CLS 242/571.6
TXT Rotation responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 571 wherein the shiftable means is actuated
    in response to turning of the coil support structure about a center axis of
    the coil.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 74+ for an interior
    expanding clutch of general use.


CLS 242/571.7
TXT Wedging roller or ball:

    Subject matter under subclass 571.6 wherein the shiftable means includes a
    member pivotally or rotatably shiftable in response to rotation of the
    spindle to create a binding action between the outer periphery of the
    spindle and the inner periphery of a spool or coil carried by the support
    structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, subclass 21 for a wedge-type roll expander.


CLS 242/571.8
TXT Axially compressed elastic mass:

    Subject matter under subclass 571 wherein the shiftable means includes a
    plug or ring of elastomeric material expanded in a radial direction with
    respect to a center axis of the coil when squeezed by an actuator acting
    parallel to the coil axis.


CLS 242/572
TXT Longitudinally shiftable operator:

    Subject matter under subclass 571 wherein the coil supporting structure
    includes a spindle and the shiftable means includes an actuator movable in
    an axial direction (i.e., on or substantially parallel to a center axis of
    the coil) to vary a circumferential dimension of the spindle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, subclass 21 for a wedge-type roll expander.


CLS 242/573
TXT Cam and follower:

    Subject matter under subclass 572 wherein the axially movable actuator
    includes either a wedgelike or lobed member or an element coactive with the
    member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, particularly subclasses 567+ for a
    detail of a cam in general use.


CLS 242/573.1
TXT Surface wedge:

    Subject matter under subclass 573 wherein the wedgelike or lobed member
    includes a longitudinally movable cam located on or very near the outer
    periphery of the spindle adapted to spread adjacent portions of the spindle
    surface and thereby vary a circumferential dimension of the spindle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, subclass 21 for a wedge-type roll expander.


CLS 242/573.2
TXT Longitudinally spaced cams:

    Subject matter under subclass 573 wherein the axially movable actuator
    includes plural wedgelike or lobed members or coactive elements disposed at
    axially separated points on the movable actuator so that the member or
    element is shiftable in an axial direction.


CLS 242/573.3
TXT Opposed:

    Subject matter under subclass 573.2 wherein adjacent faces of a cooperating
    pair of wedgelike or lobed members are inclined in opposite directions to
    urge an intermediate coactive element radially when one of the members is
    shifted toward the other.


CLS 242/573.4
TXT Separable (i.e., opposed stubs):

    Subject matter under subclass 573.3 wherein the cooperating pair of
    wedgelike or lobed members are each mounted on a support, at least one of
    the supports being capable of movement in opposite axial directions a
    distance sufficient to permit the coiled material to be loaded or removed
    in a radial direction from between the wedgelike or lobed members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    533.7,  for an axially shifted spindle in a convolute winding machine.

    596.1+  and 596.4+, for a retractable, opposed stub shaft for supporting a
    coil.


CLS 242/573.5
TXT Threaded operator:

    Subject matter under subclass 573.3 wherein the cooperating pair of
    wedgelike or lobed members are drawn toward each other by relative rotation
    between female and male operating elements connected by a spiral land
    (e.g., a nut and bolt).


CLS 242/573.6
TXT Reverse thread helices:

    Subject matter under subclass 573.5 wherein the spiral land includes
    segments of reverse pitch (i.e., right and left hand threads).


CLS 242/573.7
TXT Free end spindle:

    Subject matter under subclass 573.2 wherein the spindle is supported at one
    end with an opposite end clear to facilitate insertion or removal of a
    spool or coil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    597+,   for a free spindle coil support (e.g., a dispenser).


CLS 242/573.8
TXT Radial wedge separates mandrel segments:

    Subject matter under subclass 573.2 wherein the axially movable actuator
    shifts a follower moved radially to spread apart associated portions of the
    spindle to increase its circumferential dimension.


CLS 242/573.9
TXT Free end spindle:

    Subject matter under subclass 573 wherein the spindle is supported at one
    end with an opposite end clear to facilitate insertion or removal of a
    spool or coil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    597+,   for a free spindle coil support (e.g., a dispenser).


CLS 242/574
TXT Shiftable linkage:

    Subject matter under subclass 572 wherein the shiftable means includes an
    axially movable input member and elongated coupling means adapted to
    transfer the axial movement of the input member to radial movement of a
    spindle surface element by which a circumferential dimension of the spindle
    is varied.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 469+ for a control lever
    or linkage system of general use.


CLS 242/574.1
TXT Parallelogram:

    Subject matter under subclass 574 wherein the elongated coupling means
    comprises a pair of links, both of which have opposite ends pivotally
    connected between parallel base and output elements to establish a
    quadrilateral so that axial movement of the input element shifts one of the
    links, base or output elements causing the links to pivot in a radial plane
    thereby shifting the output element radially while maintaining parallelism
    between the base and output elements.


CLS 242/574.2
TXT Mutually pivoted (e.g., lazy tong type):

    Subject matter under subclass 574 wherein the elongated coupling means
    includes a pair of levers mutually, rotatably joined together near their
    midportions and separately joined near their ends to either; (a) the
    movable input member, or (b) another lever so that axial movement of the
    input member causes arcuate shifting of the levers in a radial direction to
    vary a circumferential dimension of the spindle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 521 for a lazy tong lever or
    linkage element in general use.


CLS 242/574.3
TXT Trapezoidal:

    Subject matter under subclass 574 wherein the elongated coupling means
    includes a pair of links inclined toward each other, each of which is
    pivotally connected at one end to an intermediate link and at an opposite
    end to a spindle component to form a quadrilateral so that movement of the
    input element causes the intermediate link to move radially.


CLS 242/574.4
TXT Center actuated, pivoted linkage (e.g., umbrella type):

    Subject matter under subclass 574 wherein the elongated coupling means
    includes plural output levers pivoted at one end to a spindle component and
    having a free end shifted radially upon axial movement of the input member
    acting on a midportion of the output levers.


CLS 242/575
TXT Transversely shiftable operator:

    Subject matter under subclass 571 wherein the shiftable means comprises an
    input member movable in a direction either:  (a) perpendicular to or (b)
    about the coil axis, to vary a circumferential dimension of the spindle.


CLS 242/575.1
TXT Split band spreader:

    Subject matter under subclass 575 wherein the spindle comprises a
    circumferentially extending, resilient surface member disposed
    substantially around the coil axis except for a narrow slit formed with
    facing edges adapted to be shifted apart by the input member.


CLS 242/575.2
TXT Geared segment:

    Subject matter under subclass 575 wherein the movable input member includes
    a toothed portion operatively connected to a cooperating toothed element
    for varying a circumferential dimension of the spindle.


CLS 242/575.3
TXT Rotatable cam or cam follower:

    Subject matter under subclass 575 wherein the movable input member includes
    either:  (a) a lobed or spiral element (i.e., a cam) arcuately movable to
    react against a follower, or (b) a follower shiftable along a lobed or
    spiral element to vary a circumferential dimension of the spindle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, particularly subclasses 567+ for a
    detail of a cam in general use.


CLS 242/575.4
TXT Hinged mandrel segment:

    Subject matter under subclass 575.3 wherein the follower is movable (e.g.,
    radially) to shift a portion of the spindle about a pivotal axis,
    substantially parallel to the coil axis.


CLS 242/575.5
TXT Shiftable linkage:

    Subject matter under subclass 575 wherein the shiftable means includes an
    arcuately movable input member adapted to act through an elongated element
    to vary the circumferential dimension of the spindle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 469+ for a control lever
    or linkage system of general use.


CLS 242/576
TXT With particular actuator or contractor:

    Subject matter under subclass 571 wherein special significance is
    attributed to either:  (a) an operating mechanism for motivating the
    shiftable means that varies the circumferential dimension of the spindle,
    or (b) means to normalize the circumferential dimension of the spindle
    after the shiftable means has been retracted.


CLS 242/576.1
TXT Fluid:

    Subject matter under subclass 576 wherein the operating mechanism utilizes
    a pressurized, flowable medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, subclasses 2.06+ for fluid actuated, expandable
    chuck appropriate for general use.


CLS 242/577
TXT Individually adjustable segment or spoke:

    Subject matter under subclass 571 wherein the coil supporting structure
    includes plural coil bearing portions that collectively define a coil
    support structure of a given circumference, at least one of which portions
    is shiftable to vary a circumferential dimension of the support structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for an adjustable strand holder for winding a hank or skein.


CLS 242/577.1
TXT Yieldable:

    Subject matter under subclass 577 wherein at least one coil supporting
    portion is resilient for selective, direct manual deflection or
    compressible to vary a circumferential dimension of the support to thereby
    permit insertion or removal of a coil or spool.


CLS 242/577.2
TXT Variable spoke alignments:

    Subject matter under subclass 577 wherein the plural coil bearing portions
    are spaced apart and formed as elongated outwardly projecting elements for
    collectively supporting coiled material at an appreciable distance from the
    winding axis, at least one of the portions being circumferentially
    shiftable about the coil axis toward another of the portions to decrease a
    circumferential dimension of the support structure.


CLS 242/577.3
TXT Bodily retractable spoke:

    Subject matter under subclass 577 wherein the plural portions are spaced
    apart and formed as elongated outwardly projecting elements for
    collectively supporting coiled material an appreciable distance from the
    winding axis, at least one of the portions being inwardly movable in its
    entirety to decrease a circumferential dimension of the support structure.


CLS 242/577.4
TXT Linearly shiftable winding surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 577 wherein the plural portions are spaced
    apart and formed as elongated outwardly projecting devices for collectively
    supporting coiled material an appreciable distance from the winding axis,
    at least one of the portions having a coil bearing section shiftably
    mounted along a substantially straight path to vary a circumferential
    dimension of the support structure.


CLS 242/578
TXT Axially adjustable:

    Subject matter under subclass 570 wherein the coil supporting structure
    includes means readily shiftable to accommodate a coil or spool of varying
    axial length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118.5,  for a spool with a head adjustable along a spool axis.


CLS 242/578.1
TXT Threaded operator:

    Subject matter under subclass 578 wherein the shiftable means includes a
    helical land (screw thread or cam) to either directly act on the shiftable
    means or serve as a variable stop toward which the shiftable means is urged.


CLS 242/578.2
TXT Discrete adjustment positions:

    Subject matter under subclass 578 wherein the shiftable means is associated
    with stops defining distinct locations for the shiftable means.


CLS 242/578.3
TXT Yieldable coil support:

    Subject matter under subclass 578 wherein the shiftable means is mounted
    for movement in response to coil variations (e.g., to accommodate expansion
    due to moisture absorption or thermal variation).


CLS 242/579
TXT With material end retainer:

    Subject matter under subclass 570 wherein the coil holder includes means to
    grip the elongated material at either:  (a) the outer material end to
    temporarily prevent unwinding of the wound material, or (b) the inner
    material end to insure winding when the coil holder is rotated.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses provide for a spindle or
    spool having a significant material end retainer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332.7+, for an end retainer combined with winding and unwinding machine for
    a convertible information carrier (e.g., tape recorder or film projector).

    532.4   and 532.6, for an end retainer combined with convolute winding
    machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, subclasses 22+ for a roll or roller with a sheet
    edge holder.


CLS 242/580
TXT Outer end:

    Subject matter under subclass 579 wherein the means to grip includes
    structure to hold a portion of the elongated material significantly
    trailing the leading end, typically the outer convolution of a coil.


CLS 242/580.1
TXT Edge grip or barrier pair for strip material:

    Subject matter under subclass 580 wherein the coil holder is adapted to
    support web material having a width greater than its thickness, and the
    means to grip acts on the web material to either:  (a) engage and apply a
    pinching force to the width of the elongated material, or (b) overlie an
    edge of the material to block free unwinding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    602.3,  for a spool with spiral grooves to separate coil convolutions,
    which grooves have walls that incidentally retain the outer coil
    convolution.


CLS 242/581
TXT With attractor (e.g., magnet or vacuum):

    Subject matter under subclass 579 wherein the means to grip includes
    structure to draw the elongated material toward the coil holder, which
    structure typically relies on magnetic, molecular, pneumatic, or hydraulic
    force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332.3,  for an end retainer combined with a pneumatically assisted material
    threading device.

    532.2,  for an end retainer combined with a winding machine.


CLS 242/582
TXT Preattached flexible leader:

    Subject matter under subclass 579 wherein the means to grip includes an
    elongated flaccid link having a first end anchored to the coil holder and a
    second end adapted to receive the elongated material so that the link and
    elongated material can be wound onto the coil holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332.4,  332.7, and 332.8, for an end retainer combined with winding and
    unwinding machine for machine convertible information-bearing material.

    532.1,  532.4, and 532.6, for an end retainer combined with a winding
    machine.


CLS 242/583
TXT Adhesive or hook-and-pile fabric:

    Subject matter under subclass 579 wherein the means to grip includes
    material adapted to enhance temporary bonding or cohesive connection
    between the coil holder and elongated material, which material includes
    fabrics and substances exhibiting great friction or pile adapted to
    interlock and grip other such material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 306 and 31  for
    hook-and-barb fabric used in a fastener of general use.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 100 for a
    hook-and-barb fastener material of general use.


CLS 242/584
TXT Material penetrating (e.g., piercing):

    Subject matter under subclass 579 wherein the means to grip includes a male
    member adapted to transversely project through the thickness of the
    elongated material or a fitting (e.g., a ring) carried by the material.


CLS 242/584.1
TXT Projection for preformed material opening:

    Subject matter under subclass 584 wherein the male member is formed to pass
    through an existing opening in the elongated material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, subclasses 122+, 133, and 150 for spools peculiar to music
    or in combination with specific musical structure.


CLS 242/585
TXT Edge grip pair for strip material:

    Subject matter under subclass 579 wherein the means to grip includes
    structure adapted to grasp the opposite width sides of an elongated
    material having a considerably greater width from side-to-side than
    thickness from face-to-face.


CLS 242/586
TXT Clamp:

    Subject matter under subclass 579 wherein the means to grip includes a
    shiftable grasping member adapted to releasable apply a squeezing force
    against the elongated material.


CLS 242/586.1
TXT Threaded or cam operator:

    Subject matter under subclass 586 wherein the grasping member is shiftable
    by a spirally grooved or lobed operator.


CLS 242/586.2
TXT Separable from coil holder:

    Subject matter under subclass 586 wherein the means to grip includes
    structure removable from the coil support to grasp or release the elongated
    member.


CLS 242/586.3
TXT Bodily displaced:

    Subject matter under subclass 586 wherein the means to grip is bodily
    shiftable from one location on the spool to a second location.


CLS 242/586.4
TXT Pivoted:

    Subject matter under subclass 586 wherein the means to grip is a component
    arcuately shiftable between material gripping and releasing positions.


CLS 242/586.5
TXT About winding or parallel axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 586.4 wherein the means to grip is arcuately
    shiftable about an axis extending in the same direction as the axis of the
    coil holder.


CLS 242/586.6
TXT Resilient:

    Subject matter under subclass 586.5 wherein the means to grip is flexible
    or shifted by flexible structure (e.g., a spring).


CLS 242/587
TXT Apertured:

    Subject matter under subclass 579 wherein the means to grip includes a coil
    holder surface defining an opening (e.g., a groove, cutout, hole, etc.),
    which surface retains the elongated material.


CLS 242/587.1
TXT Coacting with material fitting or modification:

    Subject matter under subclass 587 wherein the surface defining the aperture
    is particularly constructed to grip a distinct element carried by the
    elongated material.


CLS 242/587.2
TXT Slot:

    ubject matter under subclass 587 wherein the opening is formed as a narrow,
    elongated slit, typically parallel to the coil axis.


CLS 242/587.3
TXT With special access:

    Subject matter under subclass 587.2 wherein the coil holder is designed to
    expose the material retention slot for gripping for convenient use (e.g., a
    finger opening in a spool flange adjacent to the slot).


CLS 242/588
TXT Randomly oriented coil holder (e.g., portable):

    Subject matter under subclass 570 wherein the coil supporting structure is
    constructed to be:  (a) conveniently transported from one location to
    another, and (b) free of means orienting or mounting the supporting
    structure as a fixture other than a handle, carrying strap, harness, or
    similar means by which the structure may be specially adapted to be carried
    by a human or animal.

    (1)     Note.  The disclosure of a specific, substantial base, wheels,
    skids, etc., or mounting structure that connects the coil support to an
    associated carrier, stationary or portable, is provided for as a mounted
    coil support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, particularly subclasses 389+ for a
    container adapted to either:  (a) hold a coil removed from the container
    for unwinding, or (b) have a portion of the container destroyed to provide
    for unwinding egress of the material.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 106+ for a rack, stand, or similar
    carrier adapted to hold sewing articles that may include a spool.


CLS 242/588.1
TXT With hand or body attachment:

    Subject matter under subclass 588 wherein the supporting structure includes
    means (e.g., a belt or pocket clip), adapting the coil to be carried by a
    human or animal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404+,   for a hand or body reel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclass 162 for a support
    constructed to be borne by a living being.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 137+ for a
    hand-held article carrier.


CLS 242/588.2
TXT With distinct hand grip:

    Subject matter under subclass 588 wherein the supporting structure includes
    a portion specifically designed to provide a convenient handle by which the
    coil holder is borne.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    405.2   and 405.3, for a hand or body reel.


CLS 242/588.3
TXT Dispensing container:

    Subject matter under subclass 588 wherein the supporting structure includes
    a portion substantially enclosing the coil while permitting unwinding of
    elongated material.


CLS 242/588.4
TXT Unitary folded blank:

    Subject matter under subclass 588.3 wherein the supporting structure is a
    substantially planar form designed to be bent along predetermined lines to
    provide a completed enclosure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, particularly subclasses 395 and 396
    for a folded blank forming a container for a roll or spool.


CLS 242/588.5
TXT Light occludent construction:

    Subject matter under subclass 588.3 wherein the coil supporting structure
    is enclosed forming an interior coil supporting space specially designed to
    exclude unwanted light into the interior.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    348.4,  for a light occludent, single coil cartridge adapted to bear
    machine convertible information (e.g., image film).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    396,    Photography, particularly subclasses 511+, 597, 601, or 623 for a
    coil support in a camera or fluid treating apparatus.


CLS 242/588.6
TXT With coil-supporting hub:

    Subject matter under subclass 588.3 wherein the supporting structure
    includes means disposed near the center of the coil to limit radial
    displacement of the coil.


CLS 242/590
TXT Mounted coil holder or spindle (e.g., dispenser or mandrel):

    Subject matter under subclass 570 wherein the structure for supporting
    elongated material includes either:  (a) apparatus for carrying or mounting
    a support for coiled material in a particular manner, or (b) a particular
    coil supporting mandrel, per se.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses provide for apparatus that,
    (a) supports a coil for unwinding, (b) supports a rotatable spindle adapted
    to receive material by winding, or (c) a spindle, arbor, mandrel, and the
    like for either a winding or unwinding device, which apparatus relates to
    how elongated material is borne or directed as opposed to a support
    ancillary to a paramount drive, control, detector, stop, or manipulating
    apparatus provided for earlier as reeling devices, winding and unwinding
    machines.

    (2)     Note.  Coil-holding spools, having no continuing relationship with
    a particular winding, unwinding, or reeling device, and serving as a
    storage member for wound material until the material is utilized are
    subsequently provided.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclass 300.1 for a
    dispenser of toilet tissue combined with a specified flush closet.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, particularly subclasses 483,
    514+, and 518+ for a coil holder with exhibiting apparatus.

    84,     Music, particularly subclasses 122+, 133, and 150 for a coil holder
    with specific musical apparatus.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 106+ for a rack, stand, or similar
    carrier adapted to hold sewing articles that may include a spool.

    289,    Knots and Knot Tying, subclasses 13 and 14 for a cord holder of a
    knot-tying apparatus.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, particularly subclasses 221+ for a cover
    dispenser peculiar to a chair.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, especially subclasses 34.6 and 34.8+
    for a cabinet particularly adapted to support rolled toweling and the like.

    396,    Photography, particularly subclasses 511+, 597, 601, or 623 for a
    coil support in a camera or fluid treating apparatus.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 512, 609, and 613+ for a spool or
    roll mounting device in combination with typewriter structure.


CLS 242/591
TXT Discrete coil positions:

    Subject matter under subclass 590 wherein the coil supporting structure
    includes a specific formation providing either, (a) alternative, distinct
    coil locations within a frame, or (b) alternative frame mountings
    presenting the coil at different attitudes, each location or mounting being
    operative for winding or unwinding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229,    for a fishing reel having a spool repositionable between winding
    and unwinding positions.

    399+,   for a reeling device providing for plural spool positions.


CLS 242/592
TXT Infinitely variable coil positions:

    Subject matter under subclass 590 wherein the coil supporting structure is
    adapted to mount the coil in displaced winding or unwinding positions,
    which positions may occur at any location between extreme limits.


CLS 242/593
TXT Axial material delivery:

    Subject matter under subclass 590 wherein either the supporting structure
    or a guide associated with the supporting structure provides for unwinding
    of the elongated material in a direction parallel to the coil axis.


CLS 242/594
TXT Simultaneously available supplies:

    Subject matter under subclass 590 wherein coil supporting apparatus is
    adapted to carry plural supply coils of elongated material, at least two of
    which are available for winding or unwinding at a given time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    330,    for simultaneously wound and unwound machine convertible
    information carriers.

    388+,   for simultaneous winding/unwinding in a reeling device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 44 for a rack adapted to support a bolt
    or card.


CLS 242/594.1
TXT Peripherally supported coil:

    Subject matter under subclass 594 wherein the coil supporting apparatus
    includes a bearing portion for supporting an outer circumferential surface
    of at least one supply coil or spool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    352.3+, for a peripheral drive for a machine convertible information
    carrier winding device.

    393,    for a peripheral drive for a reeling device.

    420.1+, for a peripheral drive in a tension control device.

    541+,   for a peripheral drive in an winding machine.

    595+,   for a peripheral coil support.


CLS 242/594.2
TXT Coaxial:

    Subject matter under subclass 594.1 wherein the bearing portion mounts
    plural supply coils along a substantially common center line.


CLS 242/594.3
TXT Coaxial coils:

    Subject matter under subclass 594 wherein the supporting apparatus mounts
    coils along a substantially common center line.


CLS 242/594.4
TXT Plural rows or array:

    Subject matter under subclass 594.3 wherein the supporting apparatus
    carries substantially axially aligned coils on multiple axes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    594.6,  for a support for individual coils in plural rows.


CLS 242/594.5
TXT Row:

    Subject matter under subclass 594 wherein the supporting apparatus carries
    plural coils on substantially side-by-side parallel axes.


CLS 242/594.6
TXT Plural rows or array:

    Subject matter under subclass 594.5 wherein the supporting apparatus
    carries plural coils on substantially side-by-side parallel axes arranged
    in either (a) columns, or (b) a grouping of at least three axes disposed
    about a center line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    594.4,  for a support for plural rows of coaxial coils.


CLS 242/595
TXT Peripheral coil support:

    Subject matter under subclass 590 wherein the mounting apparatus supports
    the outer circumferential surface of either a spool flange or material
    wound on the spool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    352.3+, for a peripheral drive for a machine convertible information
    carrier winding device.

    393,    for a peripheral drive for a reeling device.

    420.1+, for a peripheral drive in a tension control device.

    541+,   for a peripheral drive in a winding machine.

    594.1+, for a peripheral support for plural supply coils.


CLS 242/595.1
TXT Roller or endless belt:

    Subject matter under subclass 595 wherein the mounting apparatus supports
    the spool on a rotatable wheel, cylinder, disk, or closed loop band,
    usually to reduce resistance to spool rotation.


CLS 242/596
TXT Opposed stub spindles:

    Subject matter under subclass 590 wherein the apparatus for mounting
    includes a pair of cooperating truncated journals (spindles) and frame
    means disposing the journals in spaced, facing relation for reception of
    the ends of a coil, spindle, or spool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    573.3+, for opposed spindles that are expansible or contractile.


CLS 242/596.1
TXT Spindle on retractable frame arm:

    Subject matter under subclass 596 wherein frame means includes a member for
    supporting a journal for movement with respect to the remainder of the
    frame means to increase the spacing between the journals sufficiently to
    permit coil or spool replacement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    598.1,  for a shiftable frame arm in a holder supporting opposite ends of a
    spindle.


CLS 242/596.2
TXT With latch connecting spindles:

    Subject matter under subclass 596.1 comprising coupling means forming a
    releasable joint between the journals for maintaining journal spacing but
    permitting joint separation for replacement of the coil, spindle, or spool.


CLS 242/596.3
TXT Pivoted or deflected frame arm:

    Subject matter under subclass 596.1 wherein one of the support portions is
    either, (a) connected to the remainder of the frame means by a hinge, or
    (b) constructed of readily bendable material, to permit journal spacing to
    be varied.


CLS 242/596.4
TXT Retractable spindle:

    Subject matter under subclass 596 wherein either the mounting apparatus or
    journal itself is constructed in a manner permitting one journal to be
    readily shifted with respect to a cooperating journal (e.g., by being
    yieldably biased or inherently flexible) to permit coil or spool
    replacement.


CLS 242/596.5
TXT With actuator to retract spindle:

    Subject matter under subclass 596.4 wherein the mounting apparatus includes
    an distinct operator through which force is applied for shifting a journal
    relative to its cooperating journal.


CLS 242/596.6
TXT Helical cam or threaded actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 596.5 wherein the operator includes
    cooperating male and female elements connected by a land (bolt and screw)
    that converts rotary movement of the operator into longitudinal movement of
    the member or journal.


CLS 242/596.7
TXT Particular spindle formation:

    Subject matter under subclass 596 wherein special significance is
    attributed to the configuration, material, or mounting of a journal.


CLS 242/596.8
TXT Particular frame formation:

    Subject matter under subclass 596 wherein special significance is
    attributed to the configuration, material or mounting of a housing or
    housing component that supports a journal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    597.8,  for a particular frame formation for a free end spindle.

    598.5+, for a particular frame formation for a spindle supported at each
    end.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, especially subclasses 34.6 and 34.8+
    for a cabinet particularly adapted to support rolled toweling and the like.


CLS 242/597
TXT Free end spindle support (e.g., cantilever):

    Subject matter under subclass 590 wherein the structure for supporting the
    elongated material includes, (a) a mandrel having a supported end, (b) an
    end clear of support, and (c) an intermediate coil supporting section.


CLS 242/597.1
TXT With releasable coil retainer:

    Subject matter under subclass 597 comprising a latch detachably maintaining
    a coil or spool on the mandrel, usually to provide for convenient
    replacement of the coil or spool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    571.3+, a contractile or expansible mandrel actuated in response to
    insertion of an article to retain the article.


CLS 242/597.2
TXT Spool forms retainer part:

    Subject matter under subclass 597.1 wherein the supporting section of the
    mandrel mounts a spool provided with a specific formation (exclusive of a
    usual center bore, single key way, or end face) adapted to cooperate with
    the latch for removably mounting the spool on the mandrel.


CLS 242/597.3
TXT Radially deflectable retainer:

    Subject matter under subclass 597.1 wherein the latch includes a coil
    retainer portion longitudinally extending in a direction parallel to the
    axis of the coil, which portion is adapted to be inwardly bent or pivoted
    between retain and release positions.


CLS 242/597.4
TXT Removable retainer:

    Subject matter under subclass 597.1 wherein the latch or a significant
    portion thereof the latch is separable from the mandrel to permit coil or
    spool replacement.


CLS 242/597.5
TXT Particular spindle formation:

    Subject matter under subclass 597 wherein special significance is
    attributed to a characteristic of the mandrel.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclass are the locus for a winding
    or unwinding shaft (spindle, mandrel, arbor, etc.) having a supported end
    and an opposite free end and adapted to support a coil of elongated
    material either directly or through an intermediate carrier (spool, core,
    drum, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    596.7,  for a spindle arrangement employing a pair of facing supports
    collectively supporting a coil.

    599+,   for a spindle adapted to carry a coil or spool between supported
    spindle end portions.


CLS 242/597.6
TXT Spindle-to-spool bearing or coupling:

    Subject matter under subclass 597.5 wherein the mandrel includes a
    particular formation by which the mandrel supports or is drivingly
    connected to a coil or intermediate member adapted to carry a coil.


CLS 242/597.7
TXT Vertical:

    Subject matter under subclass 597 wherein the structure for supporting the
    mandrel mounts the mandrel substantially perpendicular to the horizon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 242, 512, 609+, and 613 for a
    vertical stub shaft for supporting a spool in a typewriter.


CLS 242/597.8
TXT Particular frame formation:

    Subject matter under subclass 597 wherein the structure for supporting the
    mandrel includes means to enclose, position, or direct the elongated
    material and special significance is attributed to this means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    596.8,  for a particular frame formation for opposed stub spindles.

    598.5+, for a particular frame formation for a spindle supported at each
    end.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, especially subclasses 34.6 and 34.8+
    for a cabinet particularly adapted to support rolled toweling and the like.


CLS 242/598
TXT Spindle disposed between supports:

    Subject matter under subclass 590 wherein the structure for supporting
    elongated material includes either, (a) mounting apparatus for supporting
    opposite end portions of an elongated mandrel, or (b) an elongated mandrel
    having opposite end portions by which the mandrel is adapted to be
    supported.


CLS 242/598.1
TXT Frame with shiftable arm:

    Subject matter under subclass 598 wherein the mounting apparatus includes a
    base having a pair of cooperating arm portions for supporting opposite ends
    of the mandrel, at least one of the arm portions being movable away from
    the other arm portion to provide for removal or replacement of a coil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    596.1+, for a retractable arm to permit coil removal or replacement between
    opposed journals.


CLS 242/598.2
TXT Frame with pivoted spindle:

    Subject matter under subclass 598 wherein the mounting apparatus includes a
    base having means for articulating the mandrel for movement from a coil
    supporting position to a coil loading or unloading position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229,    for a spool shaft pivoted between wind and unwind positions in a
    fishing reel.

    596.3,  for a pivoted spindle of an opposed spindle pair.


CLS 242/598.3
TXT Frame with removable spindle:

    Subject matter under subclass 598 wherein the mounting apparatus includes a
    base having means mounting the mandrel for convenient separation from the
    base for coil loading or unloading.


CLS 242/598.4
TXT Shiftable spindle retainer:

    Subject matter under subclass 598.3 wherein the means for removably
    mounting the mandrel includes a keeper movable from a latching position to
    a second position permitting the mandrel to be removed for coil loading or
    unloading.


CLS 242/598.5
TXT Particular frame formation:

    Subject matter under subclass 598 wherein particular significance is
    attributed to the configuration of the mounting apparatus or a component
    thereof spaced from the journal (e.g., a cover, guide or frame mounting
    structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    596.8,  for a particular frame formation for opposed stub spindles.

    597.8,  for a particular frame formation for a spindle supported at only
    one end.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, especially subclasses 34.6 and 34.8+
    for a cabinet particularly adapted to support rolled toweling and the like.


CLS 242/598.6
TXT Coil enclosure:

    Subject matter under subclass 598.5 wherein the mounting apparatus
    substantially surrounds a material portion of a coil mounting in the
    supports.


CLS 242/599
TXT Spindle feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 598 wherein particular significance is
    attributed to a characteristic of a mandrel (spindle) having a coil
    supporting surface intermediate opposite ends portions adapted to be
    supported by a base structure.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses serve as the location for a
    winding or unwinding mandrel (spindle, shaft, arbor, etc.) having opposite
    end support portions and an intermediate portion adapted to receive wound
    material directly or through a supporting spool or core, which mandrel can
    bear a close similarity to a spool but usually is detectable as a permanent
    or reusable component of a winding or unwinding device bearing a distinct
    relationship to that device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    596.7,  for a spindle arrangement employing a pair of facing supports
    collectively supporting a coil.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, for details of a roll or roller that may be
    analogous to a coil spindle.


CLS 242/599.1
TXT Telescoping or meshing surfaces:

    Subject matter under subclass 599 wherein the mandrel includes plural,
    distinct portions, one of which is partially positionable within or
    intermeshed with another, usually to permit variation of the length of the
    mandrel parallel to the winding axis (e.g., for removal or accommodation of
    differently proportioned frames).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    578+,   for a mandrel with an axially adjustable winding surface.


CLS 242/599.2
TXT Spaced coil retaining or supporting portions:

    Subject matter under subclass 599 wherein the mandrel includes portions
    separated along a length of the mandrel, which portions either axially
    retain or radially support the coil at axially spaced locations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    578+,   for an axially adjustable coil support.


CLS 242/599.3
TXT Spindle-to-frame bearing or coupling:

    Subject matter under subclass 599 wherein particular significance is
    attributed to the mandrel distinguished by either:  (a) the manner in which
    the spindle is borne by a supporting structure, or (b) means by which the
    spindle is connected to a drive or retarding member.


CLS 242/599.4
TXT Spindle-to-spool bearing or coupling:

    Subject matter under subclass 599 wherein the mandrel includes a particular
    formation by which the mandrel supports or is drivingly connected to a coil
    or intermediate member adapted to carry a coil.


CLS 242/600
TXT Spool or core:

    Subject matter under subclass 570 wherein the structure for supporting
    wound material is a portable article of manufacture or component thereof
    for directly bearing coiled material, usually by winding, and for
    temporarily storing the material until it is removed, usually by unwinding.

    (1)     Note.  Here the term spool is used in a generic sense to include a
    holder for temporarily storing a coil including a bobbin, card, cop, core
    (flangeless spool), drum, skein holder, etc., but excludes wound
    inductances, resistors, filters, etc. where the spool becomes a permanent
    component of a composite article, or where the spool acts as a form for
    deforming an elongated material removed from the spool as a completed coil.

    (2)     Note.  Some difficulty may arise in distinguishing a spool from a
    reeling device or spindle. The reeling device usually has both a supporting
    structure and drive, although in its simplest form, a nonrotatable hand
    reeling device may be distinguished only by having an additional support
    such as a hand grip. The spindle usually has more elaborate bearing or
    drive coupling than a spool, and frequently has a spool supporting surface,
    but generally lacks fixed axial material containment structure such as an
    end flange.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118+,   for a strand spool, per se.

    322,    for a particular spool in a fishing reel.

    326.3,  for a particular spool in endless tape or film cartridge;

    328.1   and 329.1, for a spool with removable or expandable hub;

    345+,   for a particular spool in tape and film cartridges;

    376,    for a particular spool of a spring powered reeling device;

    393,    for a peripherally driven spool of a reeling device;

    407+,   for a a particular spool in a reeling device of general use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, subclasses 122+, 133, and 150 for a music roll spool
    combined with a drive or tracking board peculiar to a musical instrument or
    subcombination.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll detail that may be analogous to a spool.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclass 954 for manufacturing a spool from paperlike
    material.


CLS 242/601
TXT With cover:

    Subject matter under subclass 600 comprising structure for enclosing a
    significant portion of the spool (e.g., a protective band along the
    periphery of the spool or wound material).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, particularly subclasses 389+ that
    are adapted to enclose a roll or reel.

    220,    Receptacles, for receptacle construction that may be appropriate to
    a spool covering.


CLS 242/602
TXT With convolution or layer separator:

    Subject matter under subclass 600 wherein the spool is formed with means to
    maintain spacing between either:  (a) adjacent convolutions, or (b)
    successive layers, of wound material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    536,    for a convolute winding machine for winding spaced apart
    convolutions.


CLS 242/602.1
TXT Helical pattern:

    Subject matter under subclass 602 wherein the means to maintain spacing
    includes a generally continuous ridge disposed about a winding axis of the
    spool with an axial offset or pitch for axially separating adjacent,
    congruent convolutions (e.g., by defining a helical groove for
    progressively storing elongated strand).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclasses 254+ for a winding or traction drum in combination with elevator
    structure.


CLS 242/602.2
TXT With particular lead-in or crossover structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 602.1 wherein the means to maintain spacing
    includes a special portion to facilitate disposition of the elongated
    material into the helical groove formed by the ridge, usually at the
    beginning of winding a layer of material.


CLS 242/602.3
TXT Spiral groove (e.g., convolute divider):

    Subject matter under subclass 602 wherein the spacing means defines a
    groove whose locus increases radially from a central winding axis, usually
    for maintaining radial spacing between convolutions of a web material wound
    on a spool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327+,   for a convolution separator that may at times be used to maintain
    spacing between convolutions of an endless web.


CLS 242/603
TXT With multiple coiling areas:

    Subject matter under subclass 600 comprising a barrier dividing a unitary
    spool into separate areas, each area being adapted to store plural material
    convolutions or layers.


CLS 242/604
TXT Openwork:

    Subject matter under subclass 600 wherein the spool is provided with
    significant surface voids between structural portions.

    (1)     Note.  The voids may be created in the surface of a spool hub or
    flange by skeletal or grid construction of rods, wire, dowels, slats, lath,
    netting, or perforated material provided with significant openings or
    spacing frequently used to facilitate fluid flow about wound material for
    washing, drying, dyeing, etc., or to create a large, lightweight spool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118.1   and 118.11, for an openwork strand spool.

    407.1+, for a spool used with a drive to form a reel.

    577+,   for a spoke-type skein holder.

    602+,   for a spool with convolution separators or a spoke-type spool.


CLS 242/604.1
TXT Wire hub and flange:

    Subject matter under subclass 604 wherein the spool is formed with a hub
    and radial rim formed of wire for retaining wound material.


CLS 242/605
TXT Stackable:

    Subject matter under subclass 600 wherein a spool or spool component is
    particularly constructed to accommodate joining or juxtaposing with a
    similar spool or component (e.g., coupled spools or nested flanges).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118.41, for axially connected strand spools.


CLS 242/606
TXT With single or dominant flange:

    Subject matter under subclass 600 wherein the spool includes a core having
    either:  (a) only one radial material confining rim, or (b) an end rim of
    significantly greater radial extent than any other radial rim.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118.3,  for a flangeless or single flanged strand spool.


CLS 242/607
TXT Particular component connection:

    Subject matter under subclass 600 wherein special significance is
    attributed to means for joining components of the spool either permanently
    or releasably.


CLS 242/607.1
TXT Hinged or slidable for collapsing:

    Subject matter under subclass 607 wherein components of the spool are
    coupled by a pivotal joint or shiftably linked elements providing for
    dimensional contraction of the spool from an operative to a storage
    position while the spool remains assembled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    574,    for a linkage system in a contractile coil holder.

    577,    for individual adjustable segments of a contractile coil holder.


CLS 242/607.2
TXT Convertible assembly:

    Subject matter under subclass 607 wherein components of the spool are
    constructed to readily permit the spool to be reassembled from one
    configuration to a materially different configuration.

    (1)     Note.  A spool must designed to undergo more than a quantitative
    reduction in hub dimension for loading and unloading coils or knockdown
    disassembly for placement in this subclass, but may include a flange
    arrangeable for accommodating different windings or providing a cover.


CLS 242/608
TXT Flange to hub or another flange:

    Subject matter under subclass 607 wherein the joining means connects a
    spool rim to either:  (a) a separate coil storage drum (hub), or (b)
    another rim.

    (1)     Note.  Flange or rim is used here to denote any significant
    protective or confining barrier protruding radially from the winding
    surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118.6,  for a flange connection in a strand spool.


CLS 242/608.1
TXT Flange rotatable on hub:

    Subject matter under subclass 608 wherein the joining means connects the
    rim to the coil storage drum (hub) in a manner to permit arcuate movement
    between the rim and drum.


CLS 242/608.2
TXT Mechanical joint or fastener:

    Subject matter under subclass 608 wherein the joining means connecting the
    rim to winding drum (hub) or other rim includes compound interlocking
    surfaces formed on at least one of the components.

    (1)     Note.  For placement in this and the indented subclasses, the joint
    should include a retaining surface transverse or oblique to the direction
    in which the components are introduced for assembly. Thus, a simple tapered
    or resilient joint relying solely on friction or compression would be
    classified above.


CLS 242/608.3
TXT Discrete fastener (e.g., rivet or staple):

    Subject matter under subclass 608.2 wherein the joining means between the
    flange and winding surface or other flange is maintained in assembled
    relation by a separate, independent anchoring element (e.g. a clamp, cotter
    pin, dowel, nail, rivet, or staple).


CLS 242/608.4
TXT Threaded (e.g., bolt or screw):

    Subject matter under subclass 608.3 wherein the anchoring element is formed
    with spiral grooves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118.62, for a screw connection between components of a strand spool.

    609.2,  for threaded spool components.


CLS 242/608.5
TXT Rotatable joint (e.g., threaded or bayonet fit):

    Subject matter under subclass 608.2 wherein the joining means connecting
    the flange and winding surface or other flange includes a portion formed on
    the flange or spool adapted to be releasably connected to another component
    of the spool by relative arcuate movement between the portion and component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118.61+, for an inserted flange joint in a strand spool.


CLS 242/608.6
TXT Snap fit:

    Subject matter under subclass 608.2 wherein the joining means connecting
    the rim to a winding surface or another rim includes an element on one of
    the spool components adapted to be compressed during an initial stage of
    assembly until the joint is nearly completed whereupon the compression is
    released, often with an audible sound.

    (1)     Note.  This type of joint may be temporary or permanent and is
    usually formed as a deflected tongue or biased ball detent having a surface
    transverse to the direction of assembly of the components, which surface
    induces stress until the transverse surface is accommodated.


CLS 242/608.7
TXT Bendable tab or crimp:

    Subject matter under subclass 608.2 wherein the joining means connecting
    the rim to a separate winding surface or another rim includes a deflectable
    appendage or rim on one spool component deformable over a cooperating
    surface of another spool component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    610.3,  for crimping technique applied to a spool for purposes other than
    connecting the components (e.g., strengthening).


CLS 242/608.8
TXT Bonded (e.g., welded or cemented):

    Subject matter under subclass 608 wherein the joining means between the rim
    and winding surface or another rim includes fusible, adhesive, or similar
    constituents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    609.4,  for bonding components of a spool hub.


CLS 242/609
TXT Hub components:

    Subject matter under subclass 607 wherein the particular joining means
    connects elements of a winding or bearing surface of the spool, for
    example, (a) a complementary winding surface section with or without a
    flange, (b) a winding surface portion and an inner portion such as a spool
    bearing, or (c) multiple interior portions such as bearings.


CLS 242/609.1
TXT Mechanical joint or fastener:

    Subject matter under subclass 609 wherein the joining means connecting the
    hub components includes compound interlocking surfaces formed on at least
    one of the components.

    (1)     Note.  For placement in this and the indented subclasses, the joint
    should include a retaining surface transverse or oblique to the direction
    in which the components are introduced for assembly.


CLS 242/609.2
TXT Threaded fastener (e.g., bolt or screw):

    Subject matter under subclass 609.1 wherein the joining means between the
    hub components is releasably maintained by a removable helically grooved
    fastener.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118.62, for a similar fastener for components of a strand spool.

    608.4,  for a similar fastener for flange portions of a spool.


CLS 242/609.3
TXT Rotatable joint (e.g., threaded or bayonet fit):

    Subject matter under subclass 609.1 wherein the joining means between
    components of the hub includes a coupling portion formed on a hub component
    that is releasably connected to a separate hub component by relative
    arcuate movement between the components.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118.61, for a similar joint for components of a strand spool.

    609.3,  for a similar joint for flange-to-hub spool components.


CLS 242/609.4
TXT Bonded (e.g., welded or cemented):

    Subject matter under subclass 609 wherein the joining means between the hub
    components includes fusible, adhesive, or similar constituents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    608.8,  for bonding a spool flange to a hub or another flange.


CLS 242/610
TXT Particular material or material treatment:

    Subject matter under subclass 600 wherein special significance is
    attributed to either:  (a) the process by which a spool is made, or (b) the
    construction of the spool as exhibited by the manner or material from which
    the spool is formed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118.7+, for a featured spool material in a strand spool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, for material in general
    use.


CLS 242/610.1
TXT Sheet stock:

    Subject matter under subclass 610 wherein the spool is constructed of an
    original, substantially planar material adapted to be folded, crimped,
    stamped, or forged into a desired shape for a spool or spool component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118.8,  for a strand spool constructed of sheet stock.


CLS 242/610.2
TXT Foldable unitary blank:

    Subject matter under subclass 610.1 wherein a single piece of planar stock
    is bent to constitute the spool.

    (1)     Note.  The addition of a nominal element such as a label, binder,
    material end fastener or the like does not bar placement in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    588.4,  for a unitary blank used to form a coil-dispensing container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, particularly subclasses 395+ for a
    foldable blank for an enclosure for a removable coil.


CLS 242/610.3
TXT Crimped or hemmed:

    Subject matter under subclass 610.1 wherein the sheet stock is strengthened
    by a reverse fold, bend, or corrugation.


CLS 242/610.4
TXT Diverse materials:

    Subject matter under subclass 610 wherein the spool includes a component
    made of a material significantly different from that of another component,
    that is, either (a) different material categories (e.g., metal, wood,
    glass, plastic, paper, textile, etc.), or (b) materials within the same
    category but with significantly different chemical composition or physical
    property (e.g., steel and copper metals or cast and fibrous glass).


CLS 242/610.5
TXT Metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 610 wherein the spool is constructed of a
    material generally exhibiting the properties of being ductile, malleable,
    fusible, opaque, and a good conductor of heat and electricity, known as a
    metal (e.g., ferrite, aluminum, copper, zinc, etc.).


CLS 242/610.6
TXT Plastic, rubber, or ceramic:

    Subject matter under subclass 610 wherein the spool is constructed of a
    material from a natural or synthetic, nonmetallic, organic material capable
    of being readily moldable.


CLS 242/611
TXT With brake or drive formation:

    Subject matter under subclass 600 wherein particular significance is
    attributed to a structure on the spool provided for transmitting torque
    from a drive source (clutch or coupling) or to a stationary structure
    (brake).


CLS 242/611.1
TXT Circular rim (e.g., drum, sprocket, or ratchet):

    Subject matter under subclass 611 wherein the brake or drive formation
    includes a toroidal projection on an end face of the spool.


CLS 242/611.2
TXT Noncircular bore (e.g., spline):

    Subject matter under subclass 611 wherein the particular spool formation
    includes an irregularly shaped aperture or notch for receiving a drive key,
    dog, or other projection to cause the spool to rotate with another member
    usually a rotatably powered spindle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, for a  particular drive connection of general use.


CLS 242/612
TXT With particular bearing formation:

    Subject matter under subclass 600 wherein particular significance is
    attributed to structure by which the spool is supported.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    321,    for a particular bearing in a fishing reel.

    599.3,  for a spindle bearing in a coil holder adapted to support opposite
    ends of the spindle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, for a bearing of general use.


CLS 242/613
TXT Particular hub or core formation:

    Subject matter under subclass 600 wherein particular significance is
    attributed to the winding surface of the spool.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses serve as the locus for
    developments of specific winding surfaces without regard to the presence or
    absence of a flange.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    602+,   for a hub with convolution separating structure.


CLS 242/613.1
TXT Irregularly shaped (e.g., tapered):

    Subject matter under subclass 613 wherein the hub includes a winding
    surface with significant variation from the surface of a right cylinder,
    which variation may occur in a direction parallel or transverse to the
    winding axis.

    (1)     Note.  Irregularities to space convolutions of material or provide
    multiple winding surfaces are collected earlier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    particularly subclass 374 for an irregularly shaped cable drum of a hoist
    or winch.


CLS 242/613.2
TXT Cross sectionally:

    Subject matter under subclass 613.1 wherein the hub defines a winding
    surface with significant variation transverse to the winding axis.


CLS 242/613.3
TXT Flattened (e.g., card):

    Subject matter under subclass 613.2 wherein the hub is substantially planar
    (i.e., extremely thin with respect to width and length dimensions).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     for a card or other flattened form for strand winding.


CLS 242/613.4
TXT Reinforcement feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 613 wherein particular significance is
    attributed to a structural or material component added to strengthen the
    hub.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118.31, for a reinforcement feature in a cop-type spool.

    610.3,  for spool fabrication details involving crimping or folding matter
    that usually strengthens a spool.


CLS 242/613.5
TXT Flangeless core:

    Subject matter under subclass 613.4 wherein the reinforcement is applied to
    a hub free of a radially projecting rim.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118.32, for tube material feature in a cop-type spool.


CLS 242/614
TXT Flange feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 600 wherein particular significance is
    attributed to a rim projecting radially from a central material bearing
    portion of the spool to restrain or protect the wound material.

    (1)     Note.  Flange features designed for axial adjustment of the winding
    surface, to receive and retain an end of the wound material, or to separate
    individual coil layers or winding surfaces are provided for earlier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    578+,   for an adjustable spool that may involve a significant flange.

    602.3,  for a grooved spool flange for receiving web material.

    608+,   for a flange connection feature in a spool.


CLS 242/614.1
TXT Reinforcement:

    Subject matter under subclass 614 wherein particular significance is
    attributed to a structural or material component added to strengthen the
    rim.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118.31, for a reinforcement feature in a cop-type spool.

    610.3,  for spool fabrication details involving crimping or folding matter
    that usually strengthens a spool.


CLS 242/615
TXT MATERIAL GUIDE OR GUARD:

    Apparatus or corresponding method under the class definition for directing
    longitudinal movement of a flexible material of indeterminate length by
    either:  (a) engaging the material to change the direction of movement of
    the material, or (b) confining movement of the material within limited
    variation with respect to a desired path.

    (1)     Note.  Where a guide or guard is claimed with no significant guide
    structure but merely in terms of the composition of material or treatment,
    the guide or guard will be will be classified in the appropriate
    composition or treatment class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157+,   for a strand guide.

    326.4,  for a particular guide in an endless tape cartridge.

    346+,   for a particular guide in a coil-to-coil cartridge.

    377,    for a particular guide in a spring wound reeling device.

    397+,   for a particular guide or guard in a general use reeling device.

    548+,   for a particular guide or guard in a convolute winding machine.

    566,    for a particular guide or guard in an unwinding machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 2+ for a brushing or lining
    thimble for an opening or socket; or subclasses 108+ for a ferrule, ring,
    or thimble applied to the exterior opening of a rod, pipe, conduit, strand,
    or other device.

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclasses 71+ for cloth finishing that
    may involve specific guide structure as a component.

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclasses 232+ for a stripping guide
    used to clear running lengths of thread.

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 127 for a twine guide combined with cutlery.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 117, 118,
    and 153 for a guide for directing strand or web subjected to a Class 34 art
    process or apparatus.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 341+ for a copyholder
    where the copy is advanced relative to a static guide by manual force
    applied directly to the copy, or to guide or advance material relative to a
    viewing locus; or  an indicator (e.g., line guide or pointer) relative to
    the copy and a support therefor.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 24 for a line
    guide or tip for a fishing rod.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 115+ for a
    strand guiding device used in the twisting of strands.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, particularly subclasses 126, 130, 146, 151,
    and 158 for a strand guide in a specified knitting process or apparatus.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 438+ for passive guide means in a cutting
    device.

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 136+ for a work manipulating guide combined with
    a specified sewing process or apparatus, or subclass 302 for a thread
    guiding or handling means combined with a specified sewing process or
    apparatus.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 22l+ for apparatus to facilitate
    threading of a specified weaving apparatus.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 42 for a guide combined with the recorder or
    printer of a telegraph system.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, may include a nominal
    recitation of a supply or take-up coil (e.g., less than a support for such
    a coil or a cooperative relationship between a tension or exhaust detector
    and reel driving or reel stopping means, etc.), subclass 196.1 for a
    passive guide combined with a material feeder.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclass 150 for a guide to
    move a workpiece relative to the elongated-member-driving apparatus.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 389+ for a guide used for a load bearing line of a winch or
    hoist.

    289,    Knots and Knot Tying, subclass 15 for a cord guide in a knot-tying
    apparatus.

    396,    Photography, subclass 646 for a film guide for a fluid treating
    apparatus.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclass 248 for a guide combined with
    typewriter structure.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclass 140
    for a belt guide having a surface in sliding contact with belt.

    492,    Metal Working, particularly subclasses 4, 5, 21, and 22+ for roller
    structure of general application.


CLS 242/615.1
TXT Variable guide path:

    Subject matter under subclass 615 wherein the guide device is mounted to
    accommodate changing conditions of the material to either:  (a) direct the
    material along different paths, or (b) reorient itself to maintain
    substantially the same guide path.

    (1)     Note.  The reorient limitation is not intended to include a guide
    combined with means to shift the guide for a particular material
    distribution.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157.1,  for an oscillatable or reciprocable guide for a strand.


CLS 242/615.11
TXT Fluid suspension:

    Subject matter under subclass 615 wherein the guide uses liquid or gas to
    float the material above the guide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 640+ for a
    fluid support or guide for a running length of a flexible sheet, web or
    strand of treated material contacted by gas or vapor circulation apparatus.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 182.1+ for a fluid support means
    for an article or preform.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, may include a nominal
    recitation of a supply or take-up coil (e.g., less than a support for such
    a coil or a cooperative relationship between a tension or exhaust detector
    and reel driving or reel stopping means, etc.), subclasses 97.1+ for fluid
    current means to advance the material.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclass 80 for a contact device
    for a traveling strip.

    406,    Conveyors: Fluid Current, for apparatus and methods conveying solid
    material or articles which are guided or supported to travel along a path
    by means of or with assistance of a fluid current.


CLS 242/615.12
TXT Turning guide:

    Subject matter under subclass 615.11 wherein the guide changes the
    direction of the movement of the material.


CLS 242/615.2
TXT Rotatable:

    Subject matter under subclass 615 wherein the guide device is mounted for
    rolling contact with the elongated material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, may include a nominal
    recitation of a supply or take-up coil (e.g., less than a support for such
    a coil or a cooperative relationship between a tension or exhaust detector
    and reel driving or reel stopping means, etc.), subclasses 168+ for
    orbitally traveling material engaging surface(s).


CLS 242/615.21
TXT Angled turning guide for a web:

    Subject matter under subclass 615 wherein the guide has a change of
    direction axis inclined to a fabric, screening, or strip material's lateral
    width.


CLS 242/615.3
TXT With material confining portion:

    Subject matter under subclass 615 wherein the guide device includes
    structure to retain guide path control of the material in plural directions
    (e.g., a guide engaging a flat side and edge of a strip or surrounding a
    moving cord).


CLS 242/615.4
TXT With particular guide surface formation or treatment:

    Subject matter under subclass 615 wherein special significance is
    attributed to the shape or finish of the material contacting surface of the
    guide device.


CLS 242/899
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Apparatus or method under the class definition not provided for in any of
    the preceding subclasses.

      CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 242/900
TXT PARTICULAR APPARATUS MATERIAL:

    Apparatus and method for winding or unwinding, and including components or
    a wound workpiece wherein significance is attributed to a particular
    material, e.g., composition, physical property, manner of incorporation,
    etc.


CLS 242/901
TXT FIGURE EIGHT WINDING:

    Apparatus or corresponding method for winding an elongated member along a
    path traced in one direction (e.g., clockwise) about a first axis and about
    a second axis in the opposite direction (e.g., counterclockwise) to produce
    each convolution.


CLS 242/902
TXT LINE LOADER FOR FISHING REEL:

    Apparatus or corresponding method specifically adapted to transfer a length
    of fishing line from a supply coil to a fishing reel or similar take-up.


CLS 242/903
TXT DRUM FOR A WINCH OR HOIST:

    A spoollike member for storing convolutions of a wound line (cable, chain,
    etc.), which member is adapted to serve as a component of a mechanism for
    moving a disconnectable load.

    (1)     Note.  The spoollike member may either accumulate or feed material
    and is known in various environments by numerous names such as cathead,
    hawser, windlass, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force, for
    the combination of a drum or capstan adapted to wind or unwind a
    disconnectable load.


CLS 242/904
TXT WATER SKI REEL:

    Apparatus or corresponding method particularly adapted to store a elongated
    material used to pull a water skier or similar load behind a boat.


CLS 242/905
TXT WINDER WITH STORAGE CHAMBER (E.G., FOR DEODORANT, PAPER, ETC.):

    Apparatus or method in which:  (a) a winding or unwinding device is
    provided with a space particularly designed to store an ancillary, nonwound
    article (e.g., a deodorant container in a paper dispenser, clothespin
    receptacle in a clothesline reel, etc.), or (b) a nonwound device provided
    with a space to store a coiled article (e.g., a pencil with a compartment
    for coiled writing paper).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, particularly subclass 13
    for a specific writing implement combined with a paper dispenser.


CLS 242/906
TXT STATIC CHARGER OR DISCHARGER:

    Method or apparatus for adding or removing static electrons from a device
    or indefinite length material being subjected to winding, unwinding,
    tensioning, or guiding.


CLS 242/907
TXT VIBRATION CREATION OR DAMPENING:

    Method or apparatus for generating or reducing motion reverberation
    accompanying winding, unwinding, tensioning, or guiding.


CLS 242/908
TXT FLUID TREATMENT OR HANDLING:

    Method or apparatus for the application or control of liquid or gaseous
    material directly associated with winding, unwinding, tensioning, or
    guiding a running indefinite-length material.


CLS 242/909
TXT HEATING OR COOLING:

    Method or apparatus for regulating the temperature of a device for or a
    material being subjected to winding, unwinding, tensioning, or guiding.


CLS 242/910
TXT CONVOLUTION TIGHTENER OR LOOSENER:

    Apparatus or corresponding method acting on an existing coiled length
    material to increase (tighten) or decrease (loosen) the number of
    convolutions in the coil.


CLS 242/911
TXT CUTTER:

    A component of a reeling apparatus or winding machine adapted to sever,
    score, perforate, or slit the elongated material.

    (1)     Note.  This cross-reference collection should not collect patent
    copies properly placed in regular cutter subclasses of this class.


CLS 242/912
TXT INDICATOR OR ALARM:

    Apparatus or corresponding method for denoting a physical characteristic or
    issuing a signal related to winding, unwinding, tensioning, or guiding
    (e.g., a scale, dial, counter, or similar device conveying the length,
    tension, capacity or other condition of an elongated material or an element
    of a winding or unwinding device) or an instrument to give visual or
    audible notice of the occurrence of a selected winding, unwinding,
    tensioning, or guiding condition.


CLS 242/913
TXT SAFETY DEVICE:

    Method and apparatus particularly designed to reduce or eliminate a
    specific personnel or material hazard associated with the winding,
    unwinding, tensioning, or guiding of elongated material.

    (1)     Note.  This collection provides for a shield, guard, acoustical
    containment or the like, but not intended to include machine components
    designed solely to protect apparatus (e.g., a slip coupling, pressure
    relief valve or motor thermostat or typically occurring housings,
    coverings, flanges, light occludent construction, etc. commonly provided to
    prevent usual damage).


CLS 242/914
TXT SPECIAL BEARING OR LUBRICATION:

    Apparatus or corresponding method for winding, unwinding, guiding, or
    tensioning elongated material in which particular significance is
    attributed to structure or treatment of a surface to enhance support of an
    element or reduce friction normally inherent to movement of such an element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    184,    Lubrication, appropriate subclasses for lubrication of general and
    numerous special uses.

    384,    Bearings, appropriate subclasses for bearings of general and
    numerous special uses.


CLS 242/915
TXT COIL GRIPPER:

    A reusable implement or machine component adapted to releasably grasp a
    wound length of material.


CLS 242/916
TXT HAND TOOL:

    A manually supported and operated implement adapted to wind, unwind,
    tension, or guide an elongated material or to facilitate such an operation.


CLS 242/917
TXT ACCOMMODATING SPECIAL MATERIAL OR ARTICLE (E.G., ANTENNA):

    Apparatus or corresponding method to which particular significance is
    attributed to a construction or step of a process distinctive because of a
    certain elongated material or group of such materials to be wound, unwound,
    tensioned, or guided.


CLS 242/918
TXT Web material (e.g., thermal insulation):

    Subject matter under subclass 917 in which the certain elongated material
    has a width appreciably greater than thickness.


CLS 242/919
TXT Ground cover (e.g., tarp):

    Subject matter under 918 in which the material to be wound or unwound is
    particularly extremely wide and is adapted to cover a large horizontal area
    (e.g., a sports field, garden, or swimming spool).


CLS 244/
TTL AERONAUTICS

CLS 244/
TXT This class contains and is limited to:

    1.      Machines or structures adapted to be completely or partially
    sustained by the air (e.g., winged aircraft, helicopters, parachutes,
    kites, balloons, etc.),

    2.      Machines or structures adapted to be propelled and guided or
    stabilized through the air (e.g., projectiles with fins, guided missiles,
    etc.),

    3.      Machines or structures adapted to be placed in an orbit or which
    substantially operate outside the earth's atmosphere (e.g., satellites,
    space vehicles, etc.),

    4.      Subcombinations of the machines or structures of 1-3, above, not
    classified elsewhere (guidance and control, aircraft structures, etc.),

    5.      Devices ancillary to the use of the machines or structures of 1-3
    above, not classified elsewhere (e.g., mooring devices, etc.), and

    6.      Processes or methods peculiarly related to 1-5 above and not
    provided for elsewhere.

    (0.1)   Note.  This class excludes toy or model aeronautical devices unless
    the invention is such that it also applies logically to full sized devices
    for actual use in carrying persons or cargo.  For toy or model airplanes,
    etc., see Class 446, Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclass 56.

    (0.2)   Note.  This class excludes motor vehicles for travel on land or
    water, and which vehicles are supported above said land or water by a
    relatively thin cushion of air between the vehicle and the land or water,
    such cushion of air being generated by the motor vehicle (e.g., ground
    effect machines).  For a motor vehicle of the surface effect type, see
    Class 180, Motor Vehicles, subclasses 116+.

    (0.5)   Note.  This class provides, in subclasses 76+, the generic subclass
    for the automatic steering of mobile craft in two or three dimensions. See
    subclasses 175+ where the control apparatus includes electrical devices or
    apparatus.  See the search notes to these subclasses for the other
    subclasses which provide for motion and/or steering control and a statement
    as to the line between the classes.

    (1)     Note.  Arrangements of aircraft to permit their handling by hoists
    are found in this class, subclass 1.  For similar arrangements on other
    articles, see Class 220, Receptacles, subclass 1.5 and Class 294, Handling:
     Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 74, and indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  Gas cells or balloon envelope distinguished only by the
    coating on, or by the structure of the fabric or textile are placed in
    Class 428, Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate
    subclasses; see especially subclasses 175+, 190, 193, and 196+ for a single
    or plural layer sheet or web embodying mechanically interengaged strands
    (e.g., weave or knit), and subclasses 411.1+ for a composite, web or sheet
    characterized only by the composition of the layers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 181+ and 304+ for a woven or knit fabric.

    (3)     Note.  For devices for training in the use of navigational
    instruments or for such devices when combined with training devices for
    aircraft operation, see Class 434, Education and Demonstration,  subclasses
    111, 186, and 239+, for such aircraft training devices, per se.

    (4)     Note.  For bomb flare and signal dropping, see Class 89, Ordnance,
    subclasses 1.51+.

    (5)     Note.  For gun mounts on aircraft, see Class 89, Ordnance, subclass
    37.16.

    (6)     Note.  See Class 102, Ammunition and Explosives, subclass 387, for
    parachute-carried drop bombs; subclass 405 for aerial mines; subclasses
    337+, for parachute flares; and subclasses 504+, for parachute-containing
    projectiles.

    (7)     Note.  For airplanes attached to or running on tracks, see Class
    104, Railways, subclass 23.1.

    (8)     Note.  For impellers such as traction propellers, pusher
    propellers, helicopter and "Autogiro" rotors as well as these impellers
    combined with their driving means, whether recited, per se, or in
    combination with such aircraft structure as is necessary to mount the
    impellers, see Class 416, Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers),
    appropriate subclasses.

    (9)     Note.  For storage and handling means for vehicles, see Class 414,
    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 227+.

    (10)    Note.  Devices for cooling internal combustion engines by means of
    air are classified in Class 123, Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses
    41.56+. This includes cowling devices for the engines to provide for
    directing the cooling air against the engine parts to be cooled.
    Combinations of impellers with driving means are ordinarily classified in
    Class 415, Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, subclasses 8+, Class 123,
    subclasses 41.63+.


CLS 244/1
TXT Aeronautical machines and devices within the class definition not otherwise
    classifiable.

    (1)     Note.  Instruments and indicators incorporated with aircraft
    structure are found here.

    (2)     Note.  For instruments and indicators, per se, see appropriate
    subclasses in Classes 33, Geometrical Instruments, 73, Measuring and
    Testing, and 116, Signals and Indicators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 707 for
    trailing-type antennas with aircraft.


CLS 244/2
TXT Compound aeronautical machines under the class definition consisting of two
    or more complete machines of the same or different types acting together to
    provide a single result or to be mutually interdependent. This subclass
    also includes aeronautical machines combined with complete land or water
    vehicles, which may be separable from the aeronautical machine for
    independent operation during its use as a land or water vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes complete aeronautical machines
    cooperating with other complete aeronautical machines to provide landing or
    launching facilities on one machine for the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     for aircraft operable as land or water craft.

    63,     for launching of aircraft not claiming the combination of a lifting
    or propulsive aircraft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    258,    Railway Mail Delivery, subclass 1.2 for load pick-up or release by
    an aircraft in flight and see the reference to this class (244) for the
    line.


CLS 244/3
TXT Compound aeronautical machines under subclass 2 comprising two or more
    complete machines of the same or different types, arranged in tandem, and
    attached together so that one may tow or propel the others, or arranged to
    cooperate to provide sustentation and propulsion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 215 for devices for
    attaching signs to aircraft so that they may be towed thereby.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 1.4+ for railway trains.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 14.1+ for motor vehicle trains.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 400+ for miscellaneous vehicle trains,
    these subclasses having draft devices, per se, even though disclosed solely
    for towing one aircraft from another.


CLS 244/3.1
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including means which operates
    inherently to compensate for undesired changes in attitude or which
    operates to affect the trajectory or course of an unmanned aerial missile.

    (1)     Note.  The term "missile" in the above definition includes:

    (a)1.   A device explosively propelled through and from the barrel of a
    gun, or

       2.   A device carrying an explosive which explosive when actuated either
    a,
    detonates to destroy or damage the carrying device, or b, burns or combusts
    within the carrying device to (1) release the products of combustion to the
    atmosphere, or (2) generate a gas to eject an object or substance from the
    carrying device, or (3) generate heat within the carrying device which
    damage or partly damages the carrying device.

    (b)     A device having a payload and an attached reaction motor for
    propelling payload through the earth's atmosphere.  The reaction motor
    comprises a means for producing a motive fluid and a means for ejecting
    said fluid (see 1-8 Notes Class 60, Power Plants, subclasses 200.1+).

    (2)     Note.  This definition excludes aircraft which are sustained by
    air. For such subject matter see this class, subclasses 4+.

    (3)     Note.  Where the "missile" is disclosed as having utility for
    manned flight the patent is excluded under this definition and is
    classified in this class, subclasses 75+.

    (4)     Note.  Where the "missile" (manned or unmanned) is (1) disclosed as
    a body which is to be placed in orbit around the earth (i.e., satellite) or
    (2) solely disclosed as a vehicle for use in outer space interplanetary
    travel, it is classified in this class, subclass 1.

    (5)     Note.  This definition excludes explosive devices designed to be
    dropped from the air or watercraft on an objective below, known as "drop
    bombs".  Such subject matter is classified in Class 102, Ammunition and
    Explosives, subclasses 382+.

    (6)     Note.  This definition excludes a missile having a payload for
    display or amusement (e.g., fireworks or toy novelties) with a reaction
    motor driven by the products of combustion. Pyrotechnic rockets are
    classified in Class 102, Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 347+.

    (7)     Note.  This definition further excludes a pyrotechnic (firework
    creating flash, noise or smoke) device of general utility having a vane, a
    wing, parachute, balloon or propeller.  Such subject matter is classified
    in Class 102, Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 335+ and 367+.

    (8)     Note.  This definition further excludes a rocket having a toy,
    amusement or display (nonpyrotechnic) payload with a reaction motor driven
    by other than products of combustion.  Such a rocket is classified in Class
    446, Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclass 56.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 130+
    for generic data processing control systems and subclass 805 for the
    mathematical simulation of a vehicle. Note, where significant vehicle
    structure is recited, classification is in the appropriate vehicle class.

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclasses 3+ for computer systems for vehicle control or vehicle condition
    indication and subclasses 200+ for computations in the application of
    navigation.


CLS 244/3.11
TXT Subject matter under subclass 3.1 comprising means whereby the attitude or
    the trajectory of the missile is controlled from a command source
    originating at a point remote from the missile.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclass 384 for remote control of drop
    bombs.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    remotely controlled electric motors, particularly subclass 16 for motors
    controlled by space transmitted electromagnetic or electrostatic energy,
    subclass 128 for reciprocating motor and subclass 460 for motors in general
    controlled by sound, supersonic waves or vibration, subclass 471 for motors
    controlled by infra red or heat waves and subclass 480, for motors
    controlled by radiant energy (light waves).

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    109+ for communication systems utilizing light waves.


CLS 244/3.12
TXT Subject matter under subclass 3.11 comprising a wire connected between a
    moving missile and the command source and used to convey a signal to
    control the attitude or the flight path of the missile.


CLS 244/3.13
TXT Subject matter under subclass 3.11 in which the missile is directed to a
    target by a beam of electromagnetic wave energy which is transmitted from
    the command source to the target.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.14,   for remote control systems wherein the command source transmits a
    radio frequency control signal to the missile.

    3.19,   for automatic guidance systems for missiles with means for
    detecting radio waves and having a communication link to the command source
    in the missile.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation) subclasses 385+ for directive beacons.


CLS 244/3.14
TXT Subject matter under subclass 3.11 in which the command source transmits a
    radio frequency control signal to the missile.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.13,   for systems wherein the missile is directed to a target by a beam
    of electromagnetic wave energy from the command source.

    3.19,   for missiles provided with means for detecting radio waves and
    having a communication link to the command source in the missile.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 16 for electric motors
    supplied or controlled by space transmitted electromagnetic or
    electrostatic energy (e.g., radio waves).

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825+ for selective and
    remote electrical control systems, subclasses 870.01+ for telemetering
    systems and subclass 539 for alarm systems including a radio link; and
    subclass 825.72 for remote control utilizing radio waves.


CLS 244/3.15
TXT Subject matter under subclass 3.1 wherein the trajectory or stability of
    the missile is controlled by a command signal originating inside the
    missile.

    (1)     Note.  The command signal inside the missile may depend upon some
    source outside the missile which is radiating energy but which is not
    varied for the purpose of influencing the missile. For example, the source
    may be wave energy from the sun, the stars, the earth's magnetic field, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76+,    for automatic guidance systems for fluid sustained or manned
    aircraft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 130+
    for generic data processing control systems and subclass 805 for the
    mathematical simulation of a vehicle. Note, where significant vehicle
    structure is recited, classification is in the appropriate vehicle class.

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclasses 3+ for computing systems for vehicle control or vehicle
    condition indication and subclasses 200+ for computations in the
    application of navigation.


CLS 244/3.16
TXT Subject matter under subclass 3.15 in which means are provided for
    detecting light waves (includes visible and infrared rays) and a
    communication link is provided between the detecting means and the command
    source in the missile.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclass 384 for drop bombs having
    direction controlling means which may include a detector sensitive to
    infrared or visible rays.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 203.1+ for tracking objects by means of
    visible or infrared light rays.


CLS 244/3.17
TXT Subject matter under subclass 3.16 in which the light rays are compared
    with a record located inside the missile (e.g., a film strip or photograph).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 548 and 559.01+ for optical or
    prephotocell systems having a web, or a web strand in the optical path, and
    subclasses 555+ for a record in the optical path.

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclass 5 for such systems where the record is a
    radar map.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 429+ for the monitoring
    of webs for variations in the response of the webs to visible light.


CLS 244/3.18
TXT Subject matter under subclass 3.16 in which the light rays emanate from a
    celestial body (e.g., star, sun).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 178+ for navigation systems in
    general.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 203.1+ for optical systems for following
    a point (e.g., a star).


CLS 244/3.19
TXT Subject matter under subclass 3.15 in which means are provided for
    detecting radio waves and a communication link is provided between the
    detecting means and the command source in the missile.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.13,   for missiles that are directed to a target by a beam of
    electromagnetic energy from a command source.

    3.14,   for remote control systems wherein a command transmits a radio
    frequency control signal to the missile.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), appropriate subclasses for radio wave
    communication systems, especially subclass 417 for direction finding
    receivers.  See Class 343, Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses
    700+ for radio wave antennas.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 130+ for radio receivers.


CLS 244/3.2
TXT Subject matter under subclass 3.15 in which automatic guidance is achieved
    by means of self-contained automatic controlling devices that respond to
    acceleration producing forces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     for automatic aircraft control by gyroscopic means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 316+ and 318+ for direction
    sensing and indicating devices utilizing a gyroscope.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 178+ for navigation systems which
    may use inertial guidance systems.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 5+ for gyroscopes.

    114,    Ships, for underwater torpedoes with a gyroscopic controlled
    steering mechanisms.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 457 for electric motor
    control systems utilizing inertia-type detectors.

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclass 220 for navigational applications which include an inertial sensor.


CLS 244/3.21
TXT Subject matter under subclass 3.15 wherein a mechanism for controlling
    missile attitude is actuated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for such mechanisms used with space vehicles.

    76+,    for such mechanisms used with fluid sustained or manned aerial
    vehicles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclass 384 for such mechanisms used
    with drop bombs.

    114,    Ships, subclass 23 for such mechanisms used with underwater
    torpedoes.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 580+ for position
    servomechanisms for single axis vehicular guidance systems, and subclasses
    648+ for position servomechanisms responsive to inertial, direction or
    inclination measuring instruments.


CLS 244/3.22
TXT Subject matter under subclass 3.21 in which the mechanism for controlling
    attitude comprises a fluid reaction jet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 228+ for reaction motors with a thrust
    direction modifier.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 347+ for pyrotechnic
    skyrockets and subclasses 374+ for missile with propelling charge.

    114,    Ships, subclass 151 for ships with fluid jet-type steering means.

    440,    Marine Propulsion, subclasses 44+ for marine propulsion means of
    the explosive jet type.


CLS 244/3.23
TXT Apparatus under subclass 3.1 wherein the missile is rotated about its
    longitudinal axis during the flight of said missile for maintaining
    stability by means on the missile which reacts with the atmosphere (e.g.,
    fin, etc.) or a fluid reaction jet issuing from said missile.

    (1)     Note.  This definition excludes a "missile" where the sole means to
    rotate it is the coaction between pregrooved rifling band and a rifled
    barrel and the engraved grooves on the band are disclosed for the purpose
    of reacting with the atmosphere to aid in the rotation of the missile, such
    a missile is classified in Class 102, Ammunition and Explosive Devices,
    along with conventional rifling bands which may inherently perform the same
    function.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 228+ for a reaction motor having thrust
    direction modifying means.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclass 348 for pyrotechnic rockets
    having vane of fin structure and subclass 339 for pyrotechnic rockets with
    means to cause rotation of the rocket by gas discharge.


CLS 244/3.24
TXT Subject matter under subclass 3.1 where the stabilizing means is an
    external aerodynamic surface mounted on the missile.

    (1)     Note.  Nominally recited fin structure on a missile is excluded
    from this subclass, and is classified in the appropriate missile subclass
    in Class 102, Ammunition and Explosives.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34+,    for such surfaces on a fluid sustained or manned aerial vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclasses 23+ for underwater torpedoes with steering
    mechanism and subclasses 144+ for ship steering mechanisms in general.


CLS 244/3.25
TXT Subject matter under subclass 3.24 wherein the stabilizing surface is
    removed during the flight of the missile.


CLS 244/3.26
TXT Subject matter under subclass 3.24 wherein the stabilizing means as a unit
    is movable along the longitudinal axis of the missile from a first position
    to a second position.


CLS 244/3.27
TXT Subject matter under subclass 3.24 wherein the stabilizing surface moves
    from a collapsed position to an open position.


CLS 244/3.28
TXT Subject matter under subclass 3.27 wherein the stabilizing surface rotates
    about an axis perpendicular to an axis parallel to the longitudinal axis of
    the missile.


CLS 244/3.29
TXT Subject matter under subclass 3.27 wherein the stabilizing surface rotates
    about an axis parallel to the missile axis.


CLS 244/3.3
TXT Subject matter under subclass 3.24 wherein the stabilizing surface is
    mounted to extend beyond the rear of the missile.


CLS 244/4
TXT Miscellaneous aeronautical machines under the class definition which
    ordinarily weigh more than the air which they displace, and depend
    therefore on some aerodynamic action for their sustentation.  This includes
    combination types not provided for below.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also includes machines strapped directly to
    the body of a person, but propelled by mechanical means.


CLS 244/5
TXT Aeronautical machines under subclass 4 sustained by aerodynamic action on
    airfoils, having also provision for continuous or temporary additional
    sustentation by buoyant gas.

    (1)     Note.  For airships partially sustained by airplane wings, see this
    class, subclass 25.


CLS 244/6
TXT Aeronautical machines under subclass 4 having provision for sustentation in
    part or entirely by aerodynamic action on airfoils in fixed relation to the
    machines, having also provision for sustentation or vertical lift by means
    of screw propellers arranged to develop a substantial component of thrust
    in a vertical direction.

    (1)     Note.  For helicopters without airplane wings, see this class,
    subclasses 17.11+.

    (2)     Note.  For lighter-than-air craft partially sustained by helicopter
    propellers, see this class, subclass 26.


CLS 244/7
TXT Aeronautical machines as defined in subclass 6, which may be altered so
    that the major sustaining agency is either the aerodynamic action upon
    airfoils in fixed relation to the machine or the vertical component of
    thrust developed by screw propellers.  This includes machines which are
    designed to be operated without change, either as airplanes or as
    helicopters, and also machines in which some parts of their arrangement are
    altered for this purpose.

    (1)     Note.  Aeronautical machines sustained at all times by both
    airplane and helicopter action, but providing for slight variations in the
    effect of one or the other sustaining agency, are classified in this class,
    subclass 6.


CLS 244/8
TXT Aeronautical machines under subclass 4 having provision for sustentation in
    part or entirely by aerodynamic action on airfoils in fixed relation to the
    machines, and having also sustaining elements having radially extending
    airfoil blades, the sustaining elements being rotatable about substantially
    vertical axes by the reaction of the relative wind on the airfoil blades.

    (1)     Note.  For machines having only auto-rotating wings for
    sustentation, see this class, subclasses 17.11+.

    (2)     Note.  For the rotating sustaining wings, per se, see this class,
    subclass 39.


CLS 244/9
TXT Aeronautical machines under subclass 4 having provision for sustentation in
    part or entirely by aerodynamic action on airfoils in fixed relation to the
    machines, having also provision for sustentation or vertical lift by the
    downward thrust developed by rotating paddle wheels.  These paddle wheels
    may also provide a part or all of the forward propulsion.

    (1)     Note.  For machines sustained by paddle wheels alone, see this
    class, subclasses 19 and 20.

    (2)     Note.  For airships partially sustained by paddle wheels, see this
    class, subclass 27.


CLS 244/10
TXT Aeronautical machines under subclass 4 having provision for sustentation in
    part or entirely by aerodynamic action on airfoils in fixed relation to the
    machines, having also provision for sustentation or vertical lift by
    substantially cylindrical members rotating about substantially horizontal
    axes and reacting with the relative wind to produce a downward component of
    thrust.

    (1)     Note.  For machines sustained by cylindrical rotors alone, see this
    class, subclass 21.


CLS 244/11
TXT Aeronautical machines under subclass 4 having provision for sustentation in
    part or entirely by aerodynamic action on airfoils in fixed relation to the
    machines, having also provision for sustentation or vertical lift by the
    downward thrust developed by flapping or reciprocating blades attached to
    the machines.  These blades may also be the propelling agents.

    (1)     Note.  For machines sustained by beating wings alone, see this
    class, subclass 22.

    (2)     Note.  For lighter-than-air craft partially sustained by beating
    wings, see this class, subclass 28.

    (3)     Note.  For beating wing construction, per se, see this class,
    subclass 72.


CLS 244/12.1
TXT Airplane and fluid sustained:

    Aeronautical machines under subclass 4 having provision for sustentation in
    part or entirely by aerodynamic action on airfoils in fixed relation to the
    machines, having also provision for the sustention by the reaction to the
    downward movement of restricted masses or jets by air or other fluid, the
    forward propulsion of the machines may also be derived from movement of the
    same or similar masses or jets of air or other fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for fluid propelled aircraft.

    23,     for aeronautical machines sustained solely by fluid reaction.

    29,     for lighter-than-air craft partially sustained by fluid reaction.

    73+,    for fluid propulsion and sustention devices, per se.


CLS 244/12.2
TXT Circular:

    Apparatus under subclass 12.1 wherein the peripheral surface of either the
    aeronautical machine or the airfoil therefor is substantially in the form
    of a circle.


CLS 244/12.3
TXT Dual propulsion:

    Apparatus under subclass 12.1 wherein the aeronautical machine comprises
    separate and distinct power plants or motive means, at least one of the
    motive means being used solely for forward or horizontal propulsion and at
    least one other motive means solely for lift or vertical propulsion.


CLS 244/12.4
TXT Thrust tilting:

    Apparatus under subclass 12.1 comprising an airfoil structure having an
    adjustable power plant or motive means thereon to provide a variable
    directional thrust to the machine, at least one component or direction of
    thrust being capable of providing lift to the machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for a tiltable power plant mounted to the fuselage of an
    aeronautical machine.


CLS 244/12.5
TXT With thrust diverting:

    Apparatus under subclass 12.1 wherein there is provided means on the
    aeronautical machine adjustable to a position for deflecting the direction
    of travel of exhaust fluid produced by the motive means, the deflector
    means when positioned to deflect the exhaust fluid providing a vertical or
    lifting force to the aeronautical machine for vertical or short take-offs
    and landings (V/STOL).


CLS 244/12.6
TXT Channel wing:

    Apparatus under subclass 12.1 wherein the airfoil fixed to the aeronautical
    machine is provided with an arched or other undulating configuration for
    confining, channeling or otherwise affecting, at least in part, the flow of
    sustention fluid therepast.


CLS 244/13
TXT Aeronautical machines under subclass 4 sustained by aerodynamic action on
    airfoils in fixed relation to the machines.

    (1)     Note.  For the shape and arrangement of sustaining airfoils with
    relation to the machine, see this class, subclass 35, and indented
    subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  For the construction of aircraft of all types, see this
    class, subclass 117, and indented subclasses.


CLS 244/14
TXT Aeronautical machines under subclass 13 of the self-propelled airplane type
    which carry an explosive or other destructive charge to be set off or
    liberated by contact with a distant target or by the meeting of other
    desired conditions.  These machines are ordinarily unmanned and are
    therefore controlled either automatically or by such means as radiant
    energy from a remote point.  This subclass also includes devices of this
    same type performing useful rather than destructive work at a distance.


CLS 244/15
TXT Aeronautical machines under subclass 13 of the airplane type propelled by
    the reaction to the movement of restricted masses or jets of air or other
    fluids.

    (1)     Note.  For the automatic control of aircraft and other mobile
    devices, see this class, subclasses 76+ and note especially the classes
    referred to in the Notes to subclasses 76 and 175+.

    (2)     Note.  For aerial mines see Class 102, Ammunition and Explosives,
    subclass 405.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73+,    for other fluid propulsion devices on aircraft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 200.1+ for reaction motors.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 127.1+ and
    265.11+ for the discharge nozzle subcombination of a reaction motor.


CLS 244/16
TXT Aeronautical machines under subclass 13 of the airplane type, having no
    mechanical propulsion and deriving their forward motion entirely from a
    component of the force of gravity along the line of flight.

    (1)     Note.  For disclosure of similar machines, propelled by manual
    operated means, see this class, subclass 64.


CLS 244/17.11
TXT Aircraft under subclass 4 which are sustained in the air by a thrust
    produced by one or more wings or blades rotating about a substantially
    vertical axis.

    (1)     Note.  This type of aircraft is technically called a gyroplane and
    includes (1) helicopters, wherein the wings or blades are normally
    mechanically driven, and (2) the autorotating wing type, e.g., "Autogiro",
    wherein the wings or blades rotate because of the aerodynamic forces acting
    on them due to the forward speed of the aircraft, the forward motion being
    caused by a tractor impeller, jet or other propulsion means.

    (2)     Note.  The rotary wing may be provided with modifying means whereby
    the thrust is varied in intensity or direction.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass and indented subclasses provide for a rotary
    wing which is significantly combined with the aircraft, i.e., when more
    structure of the aircraft is recited than is necessary to mount the
    propulsion or steering means.  In the following instances, the aircraft is
    considered to be significantly recited:

    a.      Mounting or attachment of a motor or power plant to the frame or
    body in a particular relation or location with respect to the body.

    b.      The impeller drive gearing or shaft is located in a specific
    relation to the aircraft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      7 and 8, for aircraft having a fixed wing in addition to the
    rotating wing for sustentation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclasses such as 20+, 87+ and 98+ for the rotor, per se.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 36+, for toy "Autogiros" or
    helicopters.


CLS 244/17.13
TXT Gyroplanes under subclass 17.11 in which means responsive to a condition of
    the aircraft controls the rotary wing system.

    (1)     Note.  The condition responsive means of this subclass comprises
    separate and distinct controlling means and does not include those rotary
    wings which are automatically controlled by a condition of the rotary wing
    itself, e.g., free blade type.

    (2)     Note.  The mere forward motion of the aircraft is not significant
    aircraft structure as set forth in (3) Note, subclass 17.11, this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76+,    for automatic control of aircraft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclasses 27+ and 31+
    for automatic controls for impellers where no aircraft combination is
    claimed, especially subclass 40 for impeller control responsive to relative
    medium flow velocity (e.g., vehicle speed, etc.) and subclasses 103+ and
    131+ for free blade-type impellers.  See (2) Note above.


CLS 244/17.15
TXT Gyroplanes under subclass 17.11 having means other than the rotor to allow
    lowering of the aircraft or in which the rotor is adjustable to allow the
    aircraft to be safely lowered.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17.13,  for safety lowering devices in which the rotor is automatically
    adjusted by condition responsive means.

    138+,   for safety lowering devices for airplanes.


CLS 244/17.17
TXT Gyroplanes under subclass 17.11 combined with (1) landing gear, (2)
    aircraft mooring devices, (3) nonaerial propelling devices, and (4)
    nonaerial steering means.

    (1)     Note.  The nonaerial propelling and/or steering means of this
    subclass is directed to devices auxiliary to or other than the aircraft
    rotor to effect propulsion and/or steering while on land or water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for vehicles convertible from an aircraft to a land or water
    vehicle in which the flight mechanism is disabled during travel on land or
    water.

    50,     for propulsion and steering of aircraft other than gyroplanes on
    land or water.

    100,    for aircraft landing gear.


CLS 244/17.19
TXT Gyroplanes under subclass 17.11 combined with means in addition to the
    rotating wing and operating during flight to (1) propel the craft, (2)
    counteract the torque of the rotating wing, or (3) steer the aircraft.

    (1)     Note.  The steering means of this subclass, i.e., so-called aerial
    steering, is directed to devices auxiliary to the rotating wing of the
    aircraft to effect steering in flight. Such auxiliary devices may include
    shiftable weights to change the center of gravity of the craft or a rudder
    on the craft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17.15,  for auxiliary propulsion, counter-torque or steering devices
    combined with a safety lowering device, and 17.17, for similar subject
    matter combined with a landing, mooring or nonaerial propelling or steering
    device.

    17.21,  for devices having a rotary as well as a nonrotary means for
    auxiliary propulsion countertorque or steering.

    235,    for rudders for aircraft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclasses 48+ and
    subclasses 147+ for steering by means of a variation in the thrust forces
    produced by the rotor itself, e.g., tiltable axis or collective pitch
    changes.


CLS 244/17.21
TXT Gyroplanes under subclass 17.19 in which the additional means is rotatable.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes those devices which include a rotary
    as well as a nonrotary means for auxiliary propulsion, countertorque or
    steering.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclasses 120+, for
    plural impellers which are relatively movable and/or have different axes in
    which no more aircraft structure is included than is necessary to mount the
    impellers.  See (3) Note, subclass 17.11, this Class 244, for the line.


CLS 244/17.23
TXT Gyroplanes under subclass 17.11 which are provided with a plurality of
    rotating wings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclasses 120+, for
    plural impellers which are relatively movable and/or have different axes
    and in which only as much aircraft structure is claimed as is necessary to
    mount the impelling and/or steering means.


CLS 244/17.25
TXT Gyroplanes under subclass 17.11 in which the direction of lift of the
    impeller is variable, either by a cyclic pitch control of the impeller
    thereby tilting the virtual axis of the impeller or by tilting the real
    axis of the impeller.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclasses 98+ and 148
    for impellers, per se, having a tiltable axis or cyclic pitch control.


CLS 244/17.27
TXT Gyroplanes under subclass 17.11 including means to position or support the
    rotating wing on the aircraft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclasses 121, 149+ and
    246 for a shiftable or adjustable impeller support.


CLS 244/19
TXT Aeronautical machines sustained by the downward thrust developed by
    rotating paddle wheels.  These paddle wheels may also be the propelling
    agents.

    (1)     Note.  For paddle wheels on machines having also sustaining wings,
    see this class, subclass 9.

    (2)     Note.  For machines having feathering paddle wheels, see this
    class, subclass 20.

    (3)     Note.  For lighter-than-air craft sustained also by paddle wheels,
    see this class, subclass 27.


CLS 244/20
TXT Aeronautical machines as defined in subclass 19, in which the arrangement
    of the blades of the paddle wheels is varied during the rotation of the
    paddle wheel.


CLS 244/21
TXT Aeronautical machines under subclass 4 sustained by elements having
    cylindrical members rotating about substantially horizontal axes and
    reacting with the relative wind to produce a downward component of thrust.

    (1)     Note.  For machines having sustaining airfoils as wells as
    sustaining cylindrical rotors, see this class, subclass 10.


CLS 244/22
TXT Aeronautical machines under subclass 4 sustained by the downward thrust
    developed by flapping or reciprocating blades attached to the machines.
    These blades may also be the propelling agents.

    (1)     Note.  For machines having fixed sustaining airfoils as well as
    beating wings, see this class, subclass 11.

    (2)     Note.  For lighter-than-air craft sustained also by beating wings,
    see this class, subclass 28.

    (3)     Note.  For beating wings, per se, see this class, subclass 72.


CLS 244/23
TXT Aeronautical machines under subclass 4 sustained by the reaction to the
    downward movement of restricted masses or jets of air or other fluid.  The
    forward propulsion of the machines may also be derived from the movement of
    the same or similar masses or jets of air or other fluid.

    (1)     Note.  For machines having fixed sustaining airfoils as well as
    means for fluid sustentation, see this class, subclasses 12.1+.

    (2)     Note.  For airplanes, fluid propelled, see this class, subclass 15.

    (3)     Note.  For lighter-than-air craft partially sustained by fluid
    reaction, see this class, subclass 29.

    (4)     Note.  For fluid propulsion and sustentation devices, per se, see
    this class, subclasses 73 and 74.


CLS 244/24
TXT Miscellaneous aircraft under the class definition which ordinarily have a
    total weight less than or equal to that of the volume of air which they
    displace and are therefore sustained by their buoyancy with respect to the
    air.


CLS 244/25
TXT Propelled aeronautical machines under subclass 24 sustained by their
    buoyancy relative to the air, having also provision for sustentation by
    aerodynamic action on airfoils in fixed relation to the machines.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the machines are primarily lighter-than-air
    craft with the fixed sustaining airfoils providing additional sustentation.

    (2)     Note.  Machines which are primarily airplanes but have provision
    for carrying some lighter-than-air gas to diminish their weight are found
    in this class, subclass 5.


CLS 244/26
TXT Propelled aeronautical machines under subclass 24 sustained by their
    buoyancy relative to the air, having also provision for sustentation or
    vertical lift by means of screw propellers arranged to develop a
    substantial component of thrust in a vertical direction.

    (1)     Note.  For helicopters having also sustaining wings, see this
    class, subclass 6.

    (2)     Note.  For helicopters without airplane wings, see this class,
    subclasses 17.11+.


CLS 244/27
TXT Propelled aeronautical machines under subclass 24 sustained by their
    buoyancy relative to the air, having also provision for sustentation or
    vertical lift by the downward thrust developed by rotating paddle wheels.
    These paddle wheels may also provide a part or all of the forward
    propulsion.

    (1)     Note.  For paddle wheels on machines having also sustaining wings,
    see this class, subclass 9.

    (2)     Note.  For machines sustained by paddle wheels alone, see this
    class, subclasses 19 and 20.


CLS 244/28
TXT Propelled aeronautical machines under subclass 24 sustained by their
    buoyancy relative to the air, having also provision for sustentation or
    vertical lift by the downward thrust developed by flapping or reciprocating
    blades attached to the machines.  These blades may also provide a part or
    all of the forward propulsion.

    (1)     Note.  For machines having fixed sustaining air foils as well as
    beating wings, see this class, subclass 11.

    (2)     Note.  For machines sustained by beating wings alone, see this
    class, subclass 22.

    (3)     Note.  For beating wing construction, per se, see this class,
    subclass 72.


CLS 244/29
TXT Propelled aeronautical machines under subclass 24 sustained by their
    buoyancy relative to the air, having also provision for sustentation by the
    reaction to downward movement of restricted masses or jets of air or other
    fluid.  The forward propulsion of the machine may also be derived from
    movement of the same or similar masses or jets of air or other fluid.

    (1)     Note.  For machines having fixed sustaining airfoils as well as
    means for fluid sustentation, see this class, subclasses 12.1+.

    (2)     Note.  For airplanes, fluid propelled, see this class, subclass 15.

    (3)     Note.  For machines sustained solely by fluid reaction, see this
    class, subclass 23.

    (4)     Note.  For fluid propulsion and sustentation devices, per se, see
    this class, subclasses 73 and 74.


CLS 244/30
TXT Propelled aeronautical machines under subclass 24 sustained by their
    buoyancy relative to the air.

    (1)     Note.  For power plants for airships using some gas, used in the
    sustentation or operation of the craft, also as fuel, see this class,
    subclass 61.

    (2)     Note.  For ballast storage and release, see this class, subclass 94.

    (3)     Note.  For ballast making, see this class, subclass 95.

    (4)     Note.  For control devices and their arrangement, particularly
    adapted for use on airships, see this class, subclass 96, and indented
    subclasses.

    (5)     Note.  For the construction of airships, see this class, subclasses
    125, 126, 127, and 128.


CLS 244/31
TXT Aircraft under subclass 24 sustained by their buoyancy relative to the air,
    having no provision for propulsion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 59+ for a coated or impregnated fabric.


CLS 244/32
TXT Aircraft under subclass 31 normally sustained by their buoyancy relative to
    the air, having also provision for retarding their fall upon failure of
    their buoyancy, by means of parachutes attached to or formed from some part
    of their structure.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes those aircraft having propulsion
    means disclosed, but in which the invention is the combination between the
    gas bag and the parachute, or the conversion from one to the other.

    (2)     Note.  For the combination of balloon, parachute and
    heavier-than-air craft for lowering the latter in an emergency, see this
    class, subclass 139.


CLS 244/33
TXT Aircraft under subclass 31 sustained by their buoyancy relative to the air,
    restrained from free flight by ropes or cables connecting them to some
    fixed or movable anchoring means on the ground or water.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 214 for similar
    aircraft provided with signs or other advertising indicia.


CLS 244/34
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising means to provide
    support, relative to the air, for an aircraft to which it is attached.

    (1)     Note.  For paddle wheels which may sustain as well as propel, see
    this class, subclasses 9, 19, 22, 27, and 70.

    (2)     Note.  For beating wings which may sustain as well as propel, see
    this class, subclasses 11, 22, 28, and 72.


CLS 244/35
TXT Support providing means under subclass 34 comprising an element, of the
    type commonly called a wing, plane, or blade, having a surface designed to
    be acted upon by a relatively moving stream of air to support the aircraft,
    a leading edge upstream and a trailing edge downstream, a theoretical chord
    line connecting the two edges, an upper surface when viewed planwise from
    above the chord line, and a lower surface when viewed planwise from below
    the chord line.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains airfoils in which the novelty is in
    the shape of the individual airfoil, either in cross-section or in plan
    view.

    (2)     Note.  The search should be continued in this class, subclass 45,
    which is devoted to the arrangement of airfoils, with respect to each other
    or to the body upon which they are mounted, but which contains many
    incidental disclosures of airfoils of unusual shape.

    (3)     Note.  For the construction of airfoils such as internal bracing,
    etc., see this class, subclasses 123 and 124.


CLS 244/36
TXT Airplane fuselages under subclass 35 having a shape which permits them to
    act as sustaining airfoils.


CLS 244/37
TXT Bracing struts under subclass 35 on aircraft constructed and arranged to
    act as sustaining airfoils.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 84 for a streamlined
    building component of more general application.


CLS 244/38
TXT Sustaining airfoils under subclass 35 attached to aircraft by such devices
    as springs, elastic cables, etc.


CLS 244/39
TXT Sustaining airfoils under subclass 35 rotatable or capable of being moved
    in a rotary path with respect to the aircraft.

    (1)     Note.  For arrangements of autorotating airfoils on aircraft,
    including hub structure for permitting autorotation, see this class,
    subclasses 17.11+.


CLS 244/45
TXT Subject matter under subclass 35 having the relative arrangements between a
    plurality of sustaining airfoils or between one or more airfoils and the
    body or fuselage.

    (1)     Note.  The particular shape of individual airfoils is found in this
    class, subclass 35.


CLS 244/46
TXT Arrangements of sustaining airfoils as defined in subclass 45 having
    provision for altering the arrangement at will or in response to changing
    conditions.

    (1)     Note.  Combinations of specific types of variable arrangement
    individually classified below, are found in this subclass.


CLS 244/47
TXT Sustaining airfoils under subclass 46 so arranged that the dihedral angle
    of the wing surfaces on opposite sides of the aircraft may be altered at
    will or in response to changing conditions.

    (1)     Note.  Continue the search in this class, subclass 38.


CLS 244/48
TXT Sustaining airfoils under subclass 46 so arranged that the angle between
    their chord line and the line of thrust of the aircraft may be altered at
    will, or in response to changing conditions.

    (1)     Note.  Sustaining airfoils tilting from a horizontal to a vertical
    plane together with similarly tilting propellers to change from an airplane
    to helicopter operation are found in this class, subclass 7.


CLS 244/49
TXT Sustaining airfoils under subclass 46 arranged so that they may be folded
    to require less space in storage of the aircraft, or for similar purposes.

    (1)     Note.  Airfoils which are folded or otherwise reduced in area
    during flight to vary their sustaining effect, are found in this class,
    subclass 218.

    (2)     Note.  Airfoil construction to provide for the detaching of a
    portion of the airfoil is found in this class, subclass 124.


CLS 244/50
TXT Special devices under the class definition not ordinarily used in steering
    or propelling in flight, incorporated with aircraft structure and
    particularly adapted to provide for steering and/or propelling the aircraft
    on land or water or both.

    (1)     Note.  For ordinary propulsion devices, see this class, subclass
    62, and indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  For steering by means of brakes either on land or water, see
    this class, subclasses 111 and 112.

    (3)     Note.  For ordinary control devices, see this class, subclass 75,
    and indented subclasses.

    (4)     Note.  For rudder bars used to control ordinary steering apparatus
    and also to control brakes for steering, see this class, subclass 235.

    (5)     Note.  For composite air and land or water craft, having the air
    sustaining means removable for conversion into operable land or water
    craft, see this class, subclass 2.


CLS 244/51
TXT Devices and arrangements under the class definition for steering aircraft
    in flight by means of the propelling agency.

    (1)     Note.  For propellers used only in steering or stabilizing, see
    this class, subclass 92.

    (2)     Note.  For similar devices and arrangements used on ships, see
    Class 440, Marine Propulsion, appropriate subclasses.


CLS 244/52
TXT Devices and arrangements under subclass 51 in which the propelling agency
    is the movement of restricted masses or jets or air or other fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 228+ for reaction motors having means to
    modify the thrust direction.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 127.1+,
    265.23 and 265.33+ for discharge nozzles of reaction motors, disclosed on
    aircraft, and having means to vary the direction of fluid stream discharge
    for steering the craft.

    440,    Marine Propulsion, subclasses 38+, for reaction motors arranged to
    both propel and steer ships.


CLS 244/53
TXT Power plants or accessories under the class definition thereto peculiar to
    aircraft and incorporated with aircraft structure.

    (1)     Note.  Power plants, per se, are found in Class 60, Power Plants.

    (2)     Note.  Starters for power plants of aircraft type are found in
    Class 123, Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 179.

    (3)     Note.  Devices for cooling internal combustion engines by means of
    air are classified in Class 123, Internal-Combustion Engines, mainly in
    subclasses 41.56+, particularly subclass 41.7.  This includes aircraft
    engine cowling or enclosure devices to provide for directing a flow of air
    against the engine or accessory parts to be cooled, and include so much of
    the aircraft structure as necessary to support the engine, cowling, or
    enclosure, or to complete the control of the flow of air through the
    cowling or enclosure.  Broad recitation in the claims of the relation of
    the profile or outline of the cowling or enclosure to that of the adjacent
    aircraft structure is not sufficient to exclude the patent from Class 123,
    nor will the patent be excluded by specific recitation of airfoil or
    airflow characteristics of the cowling or enclosure.

    (4)     Note.  Impellers combined with a motor are found in Class 416,
    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers).


CLS 244/54
TXT Arrangements under subclass 53 for mounting power plants on aircraft.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes mounting arrangements which permit
    release and dropping of the motor.

    (2)     Note.  See also Class 248, Supports, subclasses 554+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 291+ for a motor vehicle wherein the
    motor and the body frame are particularly related to one another.


CLS 244/55
TXT The relative arrangement under subclass 53 between power plants on aircraft
    or between one or more power plants and the aircraft.


CLS 244/56
TXT Aircraft power plants under subclass 55 so arranged that the vertical angle
    between the line of thrust developed by the power plant and the horizontal
    axis of the aircraft may be varied at will or in response to changing
    conditions.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes tilting power plants which carry
    screw propellers.  For tilting propellers alone, see this class, subclass
    66.


CLS 244/57
TXT Subject matter under subclass 53 providing the relative arrangement or
    mounting of radiators and analogous devices on aircraft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 41.43 for an internal
    combustion engine with a movably mounted tank or radiator.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 41+ for a heat exchanger installed on a
    vehicle, and subclass 149 for a radiator with edge cover or frame means.


CLS 244/58
TXT Devices under subclass 53 for developing power either for the purpose of
    emergency aircraft propulsion or for assisting in the propulsion or
    operation of aircraft.


CLS 244/59
TXT Devices and arrangements under subclass 53 for propelling aircraft at high
    altitudes, and devices peculiar to aircraft for permitting aircraft to be
    propelled to high altitudes.

    (1)     Note.  For super-chargers in general, see Class 123,
    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 434+.

    (2)     Note.  For garments for aviators providing an oxygen supply, see
    Class 128, Surgery, subclass 202.11.

    (3)     Note.  For arrangements providing breathable air and all sorts of
    applications, see Class 128, Surgery, subclasses 200.24+.

    (4)     Note.  Search Class 454, Ventilation, subclasses 71+ for means to
    automatically maintain the air in aircraft cabins under pressure and
    subclasses 76+ for means to circulate air through aircraft cabins, where
    characteristics of aircraft propulsion, sustenation, or details of
    structure are not claimed.


CLS 244/60
TXT Gearing and other means under subclass 53 peculiar to aircraft for
    transmitting power from a power plant to a driven element.

    (1)     Note.  For foot pedals, including double pedals, and their
    associated mechanism for operating controls and brakes, see this class,
    subclass 235.

    (2)     Note.  For gearing in general and other machine elements and
    mechanisms, see appropriate subclasses in Class 74, Machine Element or
    Mechanism.


CLS 244/61
TXT Aircraft power plants under subclass 53 adapted to use some part of the
    sustaining gas or some other gas peculiarly adapted for airship use as fuel.


CLS 244/62
TXT Devices and arrangements under the class definition for propelling aircraft
    in flight.

    (1)     Note.  For propellers used only to steer or stabilize aircraft, see
    this class, subclass 92.

    (2)     Note.  For reaction motors, per se, capable of propelling any type
    of vehicle, see Class 60, Power Plants.

    (3)     Note.  For the combination of a motor driven propeller, per se, see
    Class 416, Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), appropriate
    subclasses.

    (4)     Note.  Devices for cooling internal combustion engines by means of
    air are classified in Class 123, Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses
    41.56+, particularly subclass 41.7.  This includes cowling devices for the
    engines to provide for directing the cooling air against the engine parts
    to provide for directing the cooling air against the engine parts to be
    cooled. Combinations of impellers with driving means are ordinarily
    classified in Class 416, Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), various
    subclasses but such combinations with modifications to assist in cooling
    the engine are classified in Class 123, subclasses 41.63+.


CLS 244/63
TXT Devices and arrangements under subclass 62 particularly adapted to assist
    in the take-off of aircraft from land or water.

    (1)     Note.  For mechanical projecting devices, per se, analogous to
    those found in this subclass, see Class 124, Mechanical Guns and
    Projectors, appropriate subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  For toy gliders combined with means for projecting them into
    the air, see Class 446, Amusement Devices: Toys, subclasses 63+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for launching of aircraft claiming the combination of a propulsive
    and/or lifting aircraft even though the combination may exist for only a
    brief period of time such as may be required to condition the launched
    aircraft to be self-sustaining.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 632+, for one shot explosion-actuated
    expansible chamber-type motors.


CLS 244/64
TXT Devices and arrangements under subclass 62 for propelling aircraft,
    operated entirely by human agency without the assistance of any power plant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 200, and indented subclasses, for occupant
    propelled land vehicles.


CLS 244/65
TXT The arrangement under subclass 62 relative to aircraft and the combination
    with aircraft of devices using the effect of helical screws rotating in air
    for propelling aircraft.


CLS 244/66
TXT Aircraft screw propellers under subclass 65 so arranged that the vertical
    angle between their line of thrust and the horizontal axis of the aircraft
    may be varied at will or in response to changing conditions.

    (1)     Note.  Propellers tilting from horizontal to vertical thrust axes
    are also found in this class, subclass 7.

    (2)     Note.  For propellers which are adjustable in inclination in both
    horizontal and vertical planes for steering, see this class, subclass 51.

    (3)     Note.  For propellers which are adjusted in inclination in a
    vertical plane as a result of the tilting of power plants on which they are
    mounted, see this class, subclass 56.


CLS 244/67
TXT Aircraft screw propellers under subclass 65 arranged to rotate about the
    external periphery of aircraft bodies.


CLS 244/68
TXT Arrangement of aircraft screw propellers under subclass 65 of the long
    helix type, in which the blades extend for substantially a full pitch
    length or more along the hub members.

    (1)     Note.  For propellers of this type arranged to rotate about the
    external periphery of some aircraft body, see this class, subclass 67.

    (2)     Note.  For propellers of this type arranged in tubes for fluid
    propulsion, see this class, subclass 73.


CLS 244/69
TXT Fixed or static aircraft structure under subclass 65 arranged to reduce the
    rotary motion of the slip-stream of screw propellers on aircraft.

    (1)     Note.  Similar arrangements of marine propellers are found in Class
    440, Marine Propulsion, subclasses 66+.


CLS 244/70
TXT The arrangement under subclass 62 relative to aircraft and the use on
    aircraft of devices using the thrust developed by rotating paddle wheels
    for propelling aircraft.

    (1)     Note.  Continue the search in this class, subclasses 9, 19, 20, and
    27.


CLS 244/71
TXT The arrangement under subclass 62 relative to aircraft and the combination
    with aircraft of devices using the thrust developed by elements moving back
    and forth over substantially the same path for propelling aircraft.  These
    elements usually have provision for reducing their resistance to motion in
    one direction.


CLS 244/72
TXT Devices and their arrangement under subclass 62 relative to aircraft for
    using the thrust produced by flapping wings for propelling aircraft.

    (1)     Note.  Continue the search in this class, subclasses 11, 22 and 28.


CLS 244/73
TXT The arrangement under subclass 62 relative to aircraft and the combination
    with aircraft of devices using the reaction to the movement of restricted
    masses or jets of air or other fluid for propelling aircraft.

    (1)     Note.  Continue the search in this class, subclasses 12.1+, 15, 23,
    and 29.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 200.1+ for reaction motors, per se.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 127.1+ and
    265.11+ for the discharge nozzle subcombination of a reaction motor.


CLS 244/74
TXT The arrangements and use of devices as defined in subclass 73 in which the
    jet of air or other fluid is produced by an explosion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 200.1+ for reaction motors, per se.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 127.1+ and
    265.11+ for the discharge nozzle subcombination of a reaction motor.


CLS 244/75
TXT Devices and arrangements under the class definition directed to and limited
    to the controlling of aircraft in flight.

    (1)     Note.  For general arrangement of control systems on aeronautical
    machines of a particular type, search must be made in this class, in the
    subclass or subclasses between 2 and 33, devoted to that type of machine.

    (2)     Note.  For aircraft steering on land or water, see this class,
    subclasses 50 and 110, and indented subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  For aircraft steering by adjustment of propelling devices,
    see this class, subclass 51.

    (4)     Note.  For steering of fluid propelled aircraft by some
    modification of the fluid propelling devices, see this class, subclass 52.

    (5)     Note.  For control systems and devices peculiar to lighter-than-air
    craft, search must be made in this class, subclass 96, and indented
    subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 501.5, for constant tension
    sustaining devices for flexible cable operators.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclasses for fluid
    servo-motors and controls therefor.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclass 384 for drop bombs with means
    for controlling the course of their flight.

    114,    Ships, subclasses 21.1 and 23+ for torpedoes with means to control
    the steering and/or motion of the torpedo, and subclass 25 for torpedoes
    with automatic means to keep the torpedo at a predetermined depth below the
    surface, and subclasses 144+ for miscellaneous devices for controlling the
    direction and/or speed of a ship.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 167+ for a motor vehicle provided with
    means for controlling its operation which is responsive to electromagnetic
    radiation, magnetic force, or sound waves received from a source, or
    reflected from an object or surface, which is located apart from the
    vehicle; and subclasses 170+ for a motor vehicle provided with means which
    is responsive to the speed of the vehicle for maintaining its speed at, or
    preventing it from exceeding, a particular value.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 263+ and 771+ for miscellaneous steering
    mechanism for land vehicles.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    electric motor systems.  See the Notes to subclasses 175+ of Class 244 for
    the line between this class and Class 318.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 130+
    for generic data processing control systems and subclass 805 for the
    mathematical simulation of a vehicle. Note, where significant vehicle
    structure is recited, classification is in the appropriate vehicle class.

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclasses 3+ for computing systems for vehicle control or vehicle
    condition indication and subclasses 200+ for computations in the
    application of navigation.


CLS 244/76
TXT Devices and systems under subclass 75 for automatically controlling
    aircraft along a predetermined course or in response to changing
    conditions.  This includes aircraft arranged to automatically maintain
    stable equilibrium.

    (1)     Note.  For similar subject matter for controlling missiles continue
    the search in this class, subclasses 3.1+.

    (2)     Note.  These are the generic subclasses for the steering of
    dirigible craft automatically in two or three dimensions.  See subclass 175
    for a statement as to the line between the various vehicle and motor
    classes and for the classes which provide for electrically controlled or
    actuated steering for mobile craft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 178+ for navigating instruments
    in general where no control of the craft is involved.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclasses for fluid
    servo-motors and controls therefor.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclass 384 for drop bombs having
    automatic means for controlling the course of their flight.

    114,    Ships, subclasses 21.1 and 23+ for torpedoes with automatically
    actuated steering mechanism; see subclass 24 where the control mechanism
    includes a gyroscope, and subclasses 144+ for miscellaneous devices,
    including the automatically actuated devices for changing the direction or
    speed of a ship.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 167+ and 170+ as explained in the
    reference to that class (180) appearing in subclass 75 above.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 130+
    for generic data processing control systems and subclass 805 for the
    mathematical simulation of a vehicle. Note, where significant vehicle
    structure is recited, classification is in the appropriate vehicle class.

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclasses 3+ for computing systems for vehicle control or vehicle
    condition indication and subclasses 200+ for computations in the
    application of navigation.


CLS 244/78
TXT Systems under subclass 76 for automatically controlling aircraft by means
    of hydraulic or pneumatic apparatus.


CLS 244/79
TXT Systems under subclass 76 for automatically controlling aircraft, operated
    in response to the action of a gyroscope.

    (1)     Note.  For similar systems on torpedoes, see Class 114, Ships,
    subclass 24.


CLS 244/80
TXT Systems under subclass 76 for automatically controlling aircraft, operated
    in response to the action of a pendulous weight or analogous device.


CLS 244/81
TXT Devices and arrangements under subclass 76 for operating aircraft control
    systems in response to conditions peculiar to the landing of aircraft, as,
    for example, the contact of some member with the ground or water.


CLS 244/82
TXT Devices and arrangements under subclass 76 for operating aircraft control
    systems automatically in response to variations in air forces on vane
    members.


CLS 244/87
TXT Auxiliary airfoils and their arrangements under subclass 75 with respect to
    each other or to fixed portions of aircraft, for steering and stabilizing.

    (1)     Note.  For fixed stabilizing fins, see this class, subclass 91.


CLS 244/88
TXT Rudders under subclass 87 mounted for movement about a plurality of axes.


CLS 244/89
TXT Horizontal rudders under subclass 87 arranged at both the front and the
    rear of aircraft.


CLS 244/90
TXT Devices under subclass 89 for controlling aircraft about their horizontal
    fore-and-aft axes.

    (1)     Note.  For variable lift devices arranged to act also as roll
    control devices, see this class, subclasses 201+.


CLS 244/91
TXT The arrangement under subclass 75 of vertical surfaces with respect to
    aircraft, for stabilizing purposes.  These surfaces are usually fixed.


CLS 244/92
TXT Auxiliary propellers under subclass 75 on aircraft for steering or
    stabilizing.

    (1)     Note.  For main thrust propellers used also to steer, see this
    class, subclass 51.


CLS 244/93
TXT Movable or variable weights under subclass 75 on aircraft for steering or
    stabilizing.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the weights themselves are the controlling
    agencies.  For pendulous weights connected to operate control members, see
    this class, subclass 80.

    (2)     Note.  For shifting weights on ships, see Class 114, Ships,
    subclass 124.


CLS 244/94
TXT Arrangements under subclass 93 for the storage and release of heavy
    material on aircraft for controlling relative buoyancy or stability.


CLS 244/95
TXT Devices under subclass 93 on aircraft for producing heavy material for
    ballast purposes.  An example is the production of water-ballast from
    exhaust gases to replace the weight of fuel used.


CLS 244/96
TXT Control devices and arrangements under subclass 75 particularly adapted to
    use on lighter-than-air craft.

    (1)     Note.  For control systems and devices applicable to aircraft
    generally, search must be made in this class, subclass 75, and indented
    subclasses.


CLS 244/97
TXT Devices and arrangements under subclass 96 for controlling lighter-than-air
    craft by changing the buoyancy of all or part of the craft with respect to
    the surrounding air.

    (1)     Note.  Devices for compressing or expanding one or more gas cells
    to alter their buoyancy, are found in this subclass.


CLS 244/98
TXT Devices and arrangements under subclass 96 for inflating the buoyant gas
    containers of lighter-than-air craft.


CLS 244/99
TXT Devices and arrangements under subclass 96 for releasing the buoyant gas
    from lighter-than-air craft.


CLS 244/100
TXT Devices and structural arrangements under the class definition attached to
    aircraft for supporting the aircraft on the surface of the land or water
    and for taking the shock of landing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    305,    Wheel Substitutes for Land Vehicles, for wheel substitutes.  Class
    305 takes wheel substitute landing gear where no aircraft structure is
    claimed, or where only a nominal relationship between the aircraft and
    landing gear is claimed.


CLS 244/101
TXT Landing gear under subclass 100 designed to permit aircraft to land on
    either land or water at will.  This includes landing gear having one type
    retractible to permit use of the other type.


CLS 244/102
TXT Landing gear under subclass 100 movable from an operative position to one
    in which it offers less resistance to flight.

    (1)     Note.  For landing gear retractible to permit use of another type
    of landing gear, the search must be continued in this class, subclass 101.


CLS 244/103
TXT Landing gear under subclass 100 using wheels to support aircraft on the
    surface of the ground.  This subclass also includes mountings for wheels
    and accessory devices, such as protecting fairings and arrangements to
    cause the wheels to be rotating when they strike the ground.

    (1)     Note.  Continue the search in this class, subclasses 101 and 102.


CLS 244/104
TXT Devices under subclass 103 mounted on such devices as springs or other
    shock absorbing members which reduce the shock of landing.


CLS 244/105
TXT Landing gear under subclass 100 for use on water.

    (1)     Note.  For float and pontoon construction, per se, see Class 114,
    Ships, subclass 292.


CLS 244/106
TXT Water landing gear, under subclass 105 part of which serves also as the
    passenger carrying body.


CLS 244/107
TXT Devices under subclass 105 for aircraft not ordinarily capable of landing
    on water to permit safe landing on water in emergency.

    (1)     Note.  Detachable lifeboats attached to aircraft for emergency use
    after landing on water are found in this class, subclass 1.


CLS 244/108
TXT Landing gear under subclass 100 using sliding surfaces for the
    ground-contacting members.

    (1)     Note.  For skids used only to support the tail of aircraft, see
    this class, subclass 109.


CLS 244/109
TXT Devices and structural arrangements under subclass 100 for supporting the
    tail of aircraft in landing and on the surface of the land or water.


CLS 244/110
TXT Devices under the class definition for slowing the progress of aircraft or
    for holding or restraining them from movement.

    (1)     Note.  this subclass includes also devices separate from the
    aircraft for retarding or restraining the aircraft. The search for external
    retarding or arresting mechanism should be continued in this class,
    subclass 63, for devices intended primarily to launch but usable also to
    retard.

    (2)     Note.  For devices retarding the progress of water supporting
    member through the water, see Class 114, Ships, subclass 145.


CLS 244/111
TXT Arrangement of devices under subclass 110 for retarding the rotation of the
    landing wheels.

    (1)     Note.  For operating mechanism for wheel brakes, operated from the
    rudder pedals or from pedals attached to or adjacent the rudder pedals, see
    this class, subclass 235.


CLS 244/112
TXT Arrangement of devices under subclass 110 for retarding the progress of
    aircraft on water during landing.

    (1)     Note.  For similar devices on ships, see Class 114, Ships, subclass
    145.


CLS 244/113
TXT Devices under subclass 110 for retarding the progress of aircraft through
    the air.


CLS 244/114
TXT Arrangements under the class definition of fields, runways or platforms to
    receive aircraft in landing and to provide handling accommodations for
    aircraft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 217 for ground indicia
    for aeroplanes.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclasses 64+ and 86+ for a building which may house aircraft.

    114,    Ships, subclass 261 for ships and other floating structures
    particularly arranged to receive aircraft in landing or to transport or
    harbor them, as well as appliances and accessories peculiar to such ships
    and structures.

    181,    Acoustics, subclass 210 for sound absorbing fences or screens used
    in deflecting, absorbing, or directing sound waves.

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 33+ and 350+ for systems of directive
    beams of radio energy for guiding aircraft to their landing fields.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 227+ for means for
    charging or discharging a parking facility for a wheeled vehicle.


CLS 244/115
TXT Devices under subclass 114 for securing aircraft to some structure or
    station on land or water.


CLS 244/116
TXT Devices under subclass 115 for securing aircraft to some movable structure
    or station on the land or water.

    (1)     Note.  Arrangements for securing one aircraft to another during
    flight are found in this class, subclass 2.


CLS 244/117
TXT Miscellaneous aircraft construction under the class definition not provided
    for in subclasses indented hereunder.  This subclass includes the
    combination construction of body and wings on aircraft and the connection
    between body and wings. Loud speakers forming a part of the aircraft
    structure are classified here.

    (1)     Note.  Hub construction for autorotating wings is found in this
    class, subclasses 17.11+.

    (2)     Note.  For float and pontoon construction, per se, see Class 114,
    Ships, subclass 292.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet, and especially subclasses 116+ for such a product embodying a
    honeycomb-like component.


CLS 244/118.1
TXT Load accommodation:

    Structure under subclass 117 particularly designed to improve the
    efficiency with which cargo, or a like load, is carried.

    (1)     Note.  A load which is like cargo includes a projectile on military
    aircraft, another aircraft, equipment such as a camera, or the like; the
    invention being limited to carrying efficiency.

    (2)     Note.  The original of the document to an invention to aircraft
    provided with, or convertible to accommodation of both cargo and personnel
    (passengers or crew) will be placed in this locus (subclasses 118.1+) and
    should be cross-referenced in subclasses 118.5+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137.1+, for cargo loading and unloading means exclusively for aircraft,
    regardless of the features also, and frequently necessarily involved in the
    subject matter of the instant and superior subclasses (118.1+)

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 61 for a refrigeration system in a vehicle,
    such as aircraft, effective by utilizing the motion of the vehicle; see,
    too, subclasses 239+ for other refrigeration systems with a vehicle feature.

    410,    Freight Accommodation on Freight Carrier, appropriate subclass for
    freight load accommodation of such general utility as to be not necessarily
    restricted to such a single type of freight carrier as an aircraft, even
    though the disclosure is limited to such single use; e.g., retainer
    structure for such a load bearer as a container is provided for under
    subclasses 77+.  See, too, the class definition and notes therein for more
    precise and more detailed definition of freight accommodation that is
    required and detailed in the instant class (244) subclass 118.1 which is
    broad enough to include mere cargo plane construction.


CLS 244/118.2
TXT Removable load bearing, airframe section:

    Structure under subclass 118.1 which, in flight, is an integral part of the
    aircraft body and is further useful as a load container; i.e., which is of
    a cubic capacity to define an entity comprising (a) wall structure which
    complements or adds to the aircraft exterior configuration, and (b)
    includes a volumetric capacity inward thereof to contain a load; the entity
    being attachable to and separable from the remainder of the aircraft body
    together with the load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for an aircraft having body section which is releasable for
    operation as a land vehicle.

    135,    for an aircraft with externally mounted (e.g., wing-tip mounted)
    fuel tanks.


CLS 244/118.3
TXT Airframe wall displaceable to function as ramp:

    Structure under subclass 129.5 comprising panel means attached to the
    aircraft body to complement the in-flight external contour thereof and
    movable, on ground, relative to the remainder of the body, to a position
    whereat the distal edge of the panel means extends outwardly of said
    remainder and contacts the ground for introduction and removal of persons
    or a load into or out of the aircraft interior.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    410,    Freight Accommodation on Freight Carrier, subclass 6 for a freight
    carrier (usually a rail car), a side of which swings down to convert to a
    ramp onto which a vehicle, as an article of freight, is rolled or placed
    and to which the vehicle is secured so that when re-erected, the wall
    retains the vehicle within the freight carrier for haulage; and subclass 93
    for a dropside (usually rail) car, a side section of which is tilted so as
    to convert to a ramp for freight loading.


CLS 244/118.5
TXT Passenger or crew accommodation:

    Structure under subclass 117 particularly designed to improve the
    convenience or efficiency with which passengers or flight personnel are
    carried.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137.2,  for a device or arrangement designed to permit aircraft passengers
    to be taken on board or discharged, that subclass (137.2) being the
    applicable locus regardless of the presence of the passenger-carrying
    features also, and frequently necessarily likewise involved, which latter
    feature is subject matter for the instant and superior subclasses (118.5+).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 239+ for a refrigeration system with such
    a vehicle feature as the cooling of the occupant space.


CLS 244/118.6
TXT Seating arrangement berth or berthage:

    Structure under subclass 118.5 in which the convenience or efficiency in
    carrying persons is enhanced (a) by the structure or arrangement of
    interior furnishing by which a person may be seated or may recline, or (b)
    by interior aids or amenities attached to or directed toward such
    furnishing or arrangement; e.g., attached or attachable dining service
    structure, particularly focused lighting or ventilation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118.5,  principal subclass, for interior aids or amenities directed toward
    cabin space rather than focused on the individual seat or berth or
    arrangement thereof.

    122,    for details of the structure of an aircraft seat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 9+ for berth or bunk structure.


CLS 244/119
TXT Construction under subclass 117 of aircraft bodies or fuselages.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses for a
    static structure of general application even though the claims recite "In
    an airplane" or the like.


CLS 244/120
TXT Construction under subclass 119 of aircraft bodies or fuselages which are
    made up in a plurality of separate sections and attached together.


CLS 244/121
TXT Devices under subclass 119 for protecting persons in or near aircraft from
    danger or inconvenience.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes propeller guards, windshields, crash
    pads, armor, etc., where they are essential parts of aircraft structure.

    (2)     Note.  For armor attached to an otherwise complete aircraft, the
    search should be continued in Class 89, Ordnance, subclass 36, and see the
    notes to the definition of such subclasses.


CLS 244/122
TXT Seats under subclass 119 peculiar to aircraft and devices for holding the
    occupant to their seats.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118.6,  for an arrangement or layout of seating on an aircraft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 632+, for one shot explosion-actuated
    expansible chamber-type motors.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 770 for tethering a human being and
    subclass 771 for a tether attached to a vehicle; see search notes of these
    subclasses for further field of search.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, appropriate subclasses, for seats of general
    utility, particularly subclasses 464+, and especially subclasses 468+, for
    a seat combined with a restraining harness and not involving significant
    aircraft structure nor parachute arrangement.


CLS 244/123
TXT Construction under subclass 117 of airfoil elements.

    (1)     Note.  For the shape and arrangement of sustaining airfoils with
    relation to the machine, see this class, subclass 35, and indented
    subclasses.


CLS 244/124
TXT Construction under subclass 123 of airfoil elements which are made up in a
    plurality of separate sections and attached together.


CLS 244/125
TXT Construction under subclass 117 of hull and internal structure of
    lighter-than-air craft.


CLS 244/126
TXT Construction under subclass 117 of the outer surface or skin of
    lighter-than-air craft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet, and especially subclasses 175+, 190, 193, and 196+ for such a
    product embodying mechanically interengaged strands or strand-portions.

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 59+ for a coated or impregnated fabric.


CLS 244/127
TXT Devices and structural arrangements under subclass 117 for attaching
    gondolas and other loads to lighter-than-air craft.


CLS 244/128
TXT Construction and arrangements under subclass 117 of gas-containing units in
    lighter-than-air craft.

    (1)     Note.  Devices for compressing or expanding one or more gas cells
    to alter their buoyancy are found in this class, subclass 97.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet, and especially subclasses 175+, 190, 193, and 196+ for such a
    product embodying mechanically interengaged strands or strand-portions.

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 59+ for a coated or impregnated fabric.


CLS 244/129.1
TXT Details:

    Apparatus under subclass 117 comprising miscellaneous structural parts or
    members peculiar to aircraft and forming part of an airplane construction
    not otherwise classified.


CLS 244/129.2
TXT Fire prevention devices:

    Apparatus under subclass 129.1 wherein the aircraft comprises incendiary
    deterrent means for at least minimizing the probability of an incendiary
    action occurring either I, in the normal use of the aircraft, or II, at the
    time of a crash or other sensed condition whereby to inhibit an incendiary
    action on or about the aircraft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, subclass 62 for fire extinguishing systems on
    vehicles which may also include fire-preventative means.


CLS 244/129.3
TXT Windows:

    Apparatus under subclass 129.1 wherein the miscellaneous aircraft part
    comprises a transparent panel or closure for covering or otherwise closing
    an opening in a body surface of the aircraft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121,    for aircraft canopies.


CLS 244/129.4
TXT Closures:

    Apparatus under subclass 129.1 wherein the miscellaneous aircraft part
    comprises either a removable or movable partition or panel member for
    opening and closing an entranceway or other opening on the aircraft.


CLS 244/129.5
TXT Door:

    Apparatus under subclass 129.4 wherein the part comprises a partition or
    panel forming a significant external surface portion of the aircraft and
    movable to allow movement of cargo, passengers, etc., therepast.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118.1+  and 119, for a doorway interconnecting plural compartments in an
    aircraft.


CLS 244/129.6
TXT Steps:

    Apparatus under subclass 129.1 wherein the aircraft part comprises stair or
    other foothold means for ascent or descent from one level to another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129.5,  for stair means combined with door structure.


CLS 244/130
TXT Devices and structural arrangements under subclass 129.1 for reducing the
    resistance of aircraft or aircraft elements to motion through the air.


CLS 244/131
TXT Joints and connections under subclass 129.1 peculiar to aircraft or
    incorporated with aircraft structure.

    (1)     Note.  For joints and connections in general, see Class 403, Joints
    and Connections.


CLS 244/132
TXT Devices and arrangements under subclass 129.1 for fastening the skin or
    covering of aircraft elements to the framework or internal structure.


CLS 244/133
TXT Miscellaneous materials under subclass 129.1 peculiarly adapted to aircraft
    construction or incorporated with other aircraft structure.


CLS 244/134
TXT Devices and arrangements under subclass 117 for preventing the formation of
    ice on the exposed surfaces of aircraft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 704 for antennas
    with an ice clearer or preventer.


CLS 244/135
TXT Arrangements under subclass 117 for storing and feeding fuel on aircraft,
    or for supplying fuel to or removing fuel from aircraft.


CLS 244/136
TXT Arrangements under subclass 117 of aircraft structure to provide for the
    discharging or diffusing of material in the air.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 213 for skywriting
    devices, and subclass 216 for pamphlet distributing devices from aircraft.

    89,     Ordnance, subclasses 1.51+, for bomb dropping devices.


CLS 244/137.1
TXT Passenger or cargo loading or discharging:

    Device or arrangement under subclass 117 for permitting a living being or
    goods to be taken aboard or removed from aircraft.

    (1)     Note.  This is the generic subclass for patents, not otherwise
    classifiable, relating to the loading or unloading of aircraft, including
    the mere dumping of a load from the aircraft, whether in flight or not in
    flight.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for means whereby an aircraft in flight may pick up or release
    another aircraft, including gliders, singly or in trains.

    115+,   for loading or unloading means associated with mooring devices.

    118.1+  and 118.5+, for aircraft structure designed to improve the
    efficiency for transporting cargo or people, respectively, absent detail or
    arrangement for loading or unloading or discharge thereof.

    135,    for supplying fuel to or discharging fuel from an aircraft in
    flight.

    136,    for discharging and diffusing material in air from aircraft in
    flight.

    138+,   for parachutes or other devices, either, per se, or in combination
    with aircraft structure, for safely lowering persons, cargo, or aircraft
    structure to the ground.

    905,    for an inflatable evacuation slide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    89,     Ordnance, subclass 1.5 for bomb, flare, and signal dropping.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 137+ for a body
    catcher.

    258,    Railway Mail Delivery, subclasses 1.2+  for means, other than mere
    dumping, for transferring a load to or from an aircraft in flight, and
    other subclasses for transferring objects to and from moving vehicles in
    general.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, various subclasses for the loading or
    unloading, in general, of vehicles, and particularly subclasses 373+ for
    the combination of a load-transporting type vehicle and an external means
    cooperating in the loading or unloading of the vehicle (except that this
    subclass (137.1) is proper if the claims make it clear that the vehicle
    structure with which the means cooperates is structure which is peculiar to
    a vehicle of the aircraft type) and see also subclasses 467+ for a
    self-loading or unloading vehicle (except that this subclass (137.1) is
    proper if the disclosure relates solely to a vehicle of the aircraft type).


CLS 244/137.2
TXT Passenger:

    Device or arrangement under subclass 137.1 wherein a living being may be
    taken aboard or removed from the aircraft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118.5+, for aircraft structure designed to improve the efficiency of
    transporting passengers, absent detail or arrangement for loading, or
    unloading or discharge thereof.

    905,    for an inflatable evacuation slide.


CLS 244/137.3
TXT Aerial cargo unloading by parachute extraction:

    Device or arrangement under subclass 137.1 whereby goods are withdrawn in
    flight by an umbrella-like canopy, i.e., parachute-type device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138+,   for parachutes or other devices, either, per se, or in combination
    with aircraft structure wherein features for safely lowering persons,
    cargo, or aircraft structure to the ground are claimed.


CLS 244/137.4
TXT Releasable, external mounted cargo:

    Device or arrangement under subclass 137.1 whereby cargo is attached to the
    ecternal surface of the aircraft, e.g., the fuselage or wings, for
    transportion thereby until set free, i.e., released.

    (1)     Note.  The aircraft may or may not be in flight when the cargo is
    released.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    89,     Ordnance, particularly subclass 1.5 for bomb, flare, or signal
    dropping.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, particularly subclasses
    83+ for a hoist-line or grab hook adapted for releasing a load.


CLS 244/138
TXT Devices under the class definition for safely lowering persons, cargo or
    aircraft structure to the ground.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137.1+,and see the notes thereto for loading and unloading of aircraft in
    general when no safety lowering features are claimed.


CLS 244/139
TXT Devices under subclass 138 for safely lowering entire aircraft to the
    ground.

    (1)     Note.  For lowering a plurality of aircraft parts separately, see
    this class, subclass 138.


CLS 244/140
TXT Devices under subclass 138 for safely lowering the passenger compartments
    of aircraft to the ground.


CLS 244/141
TXT Devices under subclass 140 attached to aircraft seats for safely lowering
    the occupants thereof to the ground.


CLS 244/142
TXT Devices under subclass 138 having umbrella-like canopies of such area that
    their resistance to motion through the air will cause persons or objects
    attached to them to be lowered slowly to the ground.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for ballons with parachutes.

    113,    for parachutes to retard an aircraft during flight.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 386+ for drop bombs with
    parachute retarding means, and subclasses 337+, for parachute flares.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 49+, for toy parachutes.


CLS 244/143
TXT Parachutes under subclass 142 attached to garments to be worn by occupants
    of aircraft.


CLS 244/144
TXT Conventional aircraft elements under subclass 142 convertible in emergency
    to structure acting as parachutes.

    (1)     Note.  For ballons acting as parachutes when deflated, search this
    class, subclass 32.


CLS 244/145
TXT Details under subclass 142 of construction of parachute canopies.

    (1)     Note.  Means for attaching shroud lines to canopies are found in
    this subclass.


CLS 244/146
TXT Parachutes under subclass 142 having hollow bracing members which are
    inflated to cause the parachutes to open or to hold them open.


CLS 244/147
TXT Devices and arrangements under subclass 142 for storing parachutes in
    containers or compartments on aircraft and for releasing or expelling them
    therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  This search may be continued in this class, subclass 139,
    where storage and release of parachutes designed to lower the entire
    aircraft to the ground will be found.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 632+, for one shot explosion-actuated
    expansible chamber-type motors.


CLS 244/148
TXT Devices and arrangements under subclass 147 for storing parachutes in
    containers designed to be carried entirely on the person of the user, and
    for releasing or expelling parachutes from such containers.


CLS 244/149
TXT Devices under subclass 147 for opening or assisting in the opening of
    parachutes.

    (1)     Note.  For bracing members inflated to open parachutes, see this
    class, subclass 146.


CLS 244/150
TXT Devices under subclass 147 for causing parachutes to open at the expiration
    of some predetermined time.


CLS 244/151
TXT Devices under subclass 142 for attaching parachutes to the person or
    objects to be lowered.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 770 for tethering a human being; see
    search notes for further field of search.


CLS 244/152
TXT Devices under subclass 142 for controlling the speed or direction of
    descent of parachutes.


CLS 244/153
TXT Devices under the class definition connected by a string or cord to a
    remote point and sustained by relative movement of air past surfaces.

    (1)     Note.  Kites containing buoyant gas to provide additional
    sustentation are found in this class, subclass 33.


CLS 244/154
TXT Kites under subclass 153 having the appearance of airplanes.


CLS 244/155
TXT Devices under subclass 153 not a part of the kite structure to be operated
    in connection with kites.


CLS 244/158
TXT Subject matter under the class definitions comprising a machine or
    structure especially designed for travel in the upper reaches of and/or
    beyond the atmosphere of a celestial body, (e.g., earth).

    (1)     Note.  By upper reaches of earth's atmosphere is meant the height
    at or beyond which the atmosphere is incapable of providing (1) lift or
    sustention to a winged or other aircraft or (2) sufficient oxygen for
    operating the propulsion system of an aircraft.

    (2)     Note.  A machine or structure (manned or unmanned) which is (1)
    disclosed as a body which is to be placed in orbit (i.e., satellite) about
    a celestial body (e.g., earth) or (2) solely disclosed as a vehicle for use
    in outer space travel is considered proper for classification here.

    (3)     Note.  Here are structures to control the heat on all or part of a
    vehicle caused by the resistance to a vehicle moving through the earth's
    atmosphere. A structure in the form of a coating or layer on the whole or a
    part of the surface of a vehicle in itself is not proper for this subclass.
     A heat control device claimed merely in terms of the composition or
    material of which it is composed is classified in an appropriate
    composition or material class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.1     and the subclasses indented thereunder for missiles that may travel
    in the upper reaches of and/or beyond the earth's atmosphere and see the
    search notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, especially subclass 315 for a porous wall connected
    to a fluid coolant supply.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 374+ for a missile or payload
    and an attached reaction motor; and subclasses 501+ for a projectile.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 45 for ablating compositions
    in a tube or nozzle portion.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for particular method or apparatus for making a
    laminated ablating surface.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 1+ for heat exchange processes; subclass
    41 for heat exchange with a vehicle feature; and subclass 61 for heating
    and cooling the same material.

    220,    Receptacles, especially subclasses 2.1+ for containers enclosing an
    electrical device; and subclasses 581+ for high pressure containers.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, especially subclass
    265.15 for a nozzle with ablating surface.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 238 for a heat shield covering a
    heat-seeking detector.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 62 for heat-insulating compositions; and
    subclasses 67+ for compositions involving refrigeration, heat, or energy
    exchange including vaporization or expansion of material.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 872 for missile nose
    cones used as a housing or covering for a radar antenna.

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclasses.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 116+ for
    honeycomb-like structure.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, appropriate subclasses for ceramic
    compositions.

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclass 226 for mathematical computations of space craft orbits or paths.
    Note, where significant vehicle structure is recited, classification is in
    the appropriate vehicle class.


CLS 244/159
TXT Apparatus under subclass 158 wherein the machine or structure is orbitally
    maintained in the upper reaches of or beyond the earth's atmosphere to
    which other machine or structures may rendezvous and lock and subsequently
    be launched therefrom.


CLS 244/160
TXT Apparatus under subclass 158 wherein the machine or structure is provided
    with control means enabling return of the machine or structure to the
    surface of the earth.


CLS 244/161
TXT Apparatus under subclass 160 wherein the machine or structure includes
    means whereby it may be brought either into proximity to or fixed
    engagement with complimentary means on another machine or structure
    traveling in upper reaches or and/or beyond the atmosphere of a celestial
    body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for a train comprising tandemly attached composite aircraft having
    means for retracting and docking.

    135,    for aircraft refueling mechanism having a probe and drogue assembly.


CLS 244/162
TXT Apparatus under subclass 160 wherein the machine or structure includes a
    life support system for a person or other living sentient being.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 2.11+ for an astronaut's body covering.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 244 and 259.+ for refrigeration of either
    an occupant type vehicle or a space suit respectively.

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 201.22+ or diving suits or helmets equipped
    with means to supply air or oxygen.

    137,    Fluid Handling, appropriate subclasses for fluid handling systems.

    165,    Heat Exchange, especially subclasses 41+ wherein a vehicle feature
    is included.

    237,    Heating Systems, appropriate subclasses.

    454,    Ventilation, subclass 71 for pressure maintainance of an aircraft.


CLS 244/163
TXT Apparatus under subclass 162 wherein the life support system for the
    machine or structure comprises means for sustaining, preserving, protecting
    or otherwise enhancing the life or the living conditions respectively of
    the person or living sentient being.

    (1)     Note.  The means may include temperature control devices, oxygen
    systems, waste management, shields for radiation or heat, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117+,   for heat shields for aircraft.


CLS 244/164
TXT Apparatus under subclass 158 wherein the machine or structure includes
    regulatory means for either maintaining or correcting its position or
    attitude either at or to a desired setting respectively as it moves in the
    upper reaches of and/or beyond the atmosphere of a celestial body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.15+,  for automatic guidance for missile stabilization and guidance
    control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 178 for navigation and see the
    search notes in the definition thereto.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 580+ for servo
    systems for vehicular guidance with single axis control.

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclasses 3+ for computing systems in the application of vehicle control.


CLS 244/165
TXT Apparatus under subclass 164 wherein the regulatory means comprises a
    rotating body of stabilizing or fixedly maintaining an attitude of the
    machine or structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.2,    for inertial missile stabilization or trajectory control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 5+ for gyroscopes, per se.


CLS 244/166
TXT Apparatus under subclass 164 wherein the reglatory means comprises a
    magnetic device for generating a controlling or damping magnetic force to
    interact with either the magnetic field of a celestial body, e.g., earth,
    or a structure of or a structure mounted on the machine for stabilizing or
    fixedly maintaining an attitude of the machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 93, for rotary
    torque transmitting magnetic clutches or brakes.


CLS 244/167
TXT Apparatus under subclass 164 provided with means utilizing gravitational
    force to dampen spin or other undesired movement for stabilizing and/or
    maintaining the machine or structure either in a desired attitude, per se,
    or with respect to a celestial body.

    (1)     Note.  Despin weights for space craft are considered proper subject
    matter for classification here.


CLS 244/168
TXT Apparatus under subclass 164 provided with means utilizing incident radiant
    energy from the sun or other similar celestial body for maintaining the
    machine or structure in a desired attitude.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclasses 243+ for
    solar panels or photoelectric panels, per se.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 203.1+, for circuits and apparatus
    including photo cells for following a point, e.g., star.


CLS 244/169
TXT Apparatus under subclass 164 provided with propelling nozzle or like means
    exhausting a pressurized medium, e.g., fluids, ions, etc., for imparting a
    controlled force to the machine or structure for adjusting either the
    flight attitude or the flight path thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     for aircraft steered by fluid jet propulsion.


CLS 244/170
TXT Apparatus under subclass 164 provided with means for diminishing the effect
    of gyratory, unbalancing forces about the spin axis of the machine or
    structure to eliminate wobbling or nodding thereof whereby to stabilize
    and/or maintain the spin axis of the machine or structure in a desired
    attitude.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 5.5 for damping means for
    gyroscope control.


CLS 244/171
TXT Apparatus under subclass 164 provided with means for sensing the in-flight
    position of the machine or structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.16+,  for automatic guidance for missile stabilization and guidance
    control using optical means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 178+ for navigation and see the
    search notes in the definition thereto.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 203.1+ for circuits and apparatus for
    following a point, e.g., star.


CLS 244/172
TXT Apparatus under subclass 158 wherein there is provided means to cause
    motion of the machine or structure to which it is attached.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53      and 62, for engine structure which may have utility in a spacecraft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, appropriate subclasses for the combination of a
    propulsion device of that class and a vehicular device wherein no
    significant structure of the vehicle is claimed and see the notes and
    search notes 200.1+ in subclass for further clarification of the line
    between these classes.


CLS 244/173
TXT Apparatus under subclass 158 provided with a member having a surface
    portion for receiving incident light, the energy of which being converted
    to another energy form, e.g., electrical.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclasses 243+ for
    solar panels or photoelectric batteries, per se.


CLS 244/175
TXT System under subclass 76 for automatically controlling aircraft by means of
    electrical apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  This is the generic subclass for the steering of dirigible
    craft automatically in two or three dimensions by means of electrical
    apparatus.  Where significant structure of the ship, aircraft, or other
    vehicle is claimed, the patent is classified in the class providing for the
    particular craft.  See the classes referred to under "SEARCH CLASS" below.

    Where no significant structure of the craft is claimed, and the rudder,
    ailerons, or other steering means is recited in the claims by name only,
    the patents which claim or disclose a motor for actuating the steering
    means are classified in accordance with the principles set forth in the
    following sections.  It should be noted that where a motor control system
    and the device controlled by the motor is claimed, but the motor is not
    specifically recited in the claims or is recited only as a motor, the
    patent is classified in the motor class which provides for the type of
    motor disclosed.  That is, if the system discloses that an electric motor
    is used to actuate the steering control device, the patent will be
    classified in Class 318, Electricity:  Motive Power Systems.  Where the
    patent discloses that either a nonelectric motor or an electric motor may
    be used to actuate the steering device, and the claims are not limited in
    any way to any particular type of motor, the patent is classified in the
    electric motor class.

    (a)     If the claims specify that two different craft control devices are
    controlled, even though the control devices are recited by name only (e.g.,
    as rudder and elevator), the patent is excluded from the motor class and
    will be classified in this or the other appropriate craft class.

    (b)     The nonelectric motor classes will provide for the combination of a
    motor controlling a single steering means recited by name only where no
    significant structure of the craft is recited and where no subject matter
    is claimed which limits the invention to use with a moving craft.  Examples
    of subject matter considered to limit the invention to use with a moving
    craft are movable sensing means to be directed upon a target or in a
    reference direction, as a scanning antenna or photocell for determining the
    proper direction of steering with respect to the target or reference
    direction, or means responsive to a condition to maintain the craft upon a
    course, as a gyroscopic device.  Mere remote control of the craft by
    transmitted energy (e.g., radio) where the control function is manually
    selected at the control station is not in itself considered to limit the
    invention to use with a moving craft.

    (c)     Class 318, Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, provides for
    electric motor systems where one or more electric motors are controlled.
    Class 318, provides for electric motor controlled steering within the
    limitations of the paragraphs above even though subject matter is claimed
    which limits the invention to use with a moving device. For example, the
    mere inclusion of a movable antenna which is to be directed in a reference
    direction for determining the proper heading of the craft with respect to a
    fixed point will not exclude the patent from Class 318.

    (d)     The above lines apply to systems using radiant energy (e.g., radio)
    to control the motor.  Class 340, Communications: Electrical, subclasses
    825.69 and 825.72 provide only for radiant energy systems for controlling
    devices other than radiant energy signaling devices where the device is so
    broadly recited as to form no basis of classification in any other class.
    An apparent exception should be noted with respect to Class 343,
    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, in the systems which include a
    vehicle having a directional antenna fixed with respect to the vehicle so
    that as the vehicle is turned the directional antenna is also turned. These
    systems will be classified in Class 343, (see subclasses 711+ especially)
    irrespective of whether or not significant motor system, motor steering
    means or craft structure is claimed if the ultimate function of the
    apparatus can be construed as merely orienting a directional antenna by
    automatic means.  If the directional antenna is movably mounted on the
    craft, and the craft also has gyroscopic means to maintain the craft upon a
    course, the system will not be classified in Class 343, but will be
    classified according to sections (b) and (c) above, as the craft is not
    controlled solely by radiant energy, but is controlled by two different
    sensing means, (i.e., the gyroscope and the radiant energy control means).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.1+    for trajectory control or stabilizing means for missiles

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 328+ for an altitude indicator
    usable in an aircraft.

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 698+ for work producing systems having
    plural motors or having diverse types of energy input.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 178+ for a navigation instrument.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclasses for
    expansible chamber motors and controls therefor, and see particularly
    subclasses 361+ and 459 for those involving electrical control, and
    subclasses 165+ and 508+ for plural expansible chamber motors.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclass 384 for drop bombs having
    control means, including electrical controls for controlling the source of
    flight.

    114,    Ships, subclass 21.1, for torpedoes controlled from a remote
    station means involving electrical circuits, and subclasses 23+ for
    torpedoes with automatic control of the steering which include electrical
    circuits, and subclasses 144+ for the miscellaneous automatically
    controlled steering or speed control of ships.  See (2) Note, above.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 167+ as explained in the reference to
    that class (180) appearing in subclass 75 above.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclasses 4, 7, 29+, and 189 for
    railway train control and signaling systems utilizing radiant energy.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ and the classes and subclasses
    specified in the notes thereto for photosensitive electrical circuits.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 263+ and 771+ for miscellaneous steering
    mechanism for land vehicles.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses, for
    electric motor systems.  See (2) Note, above. See subclass 16 where the
    motor is supplied or controlled by space transmitted electrical energy
    (e.g., radio).  See subclasses 34+ for the plural motor systems (see (2)
    Note, above).  See subclass 445 and the subclasses specified in the notes
    thereto for the automatically controlled motor systems, note subclass 460
    where the automatic means responds to sound or mechanical vibrations,
    subclass 480 where the automatic means responds to light or radiant energy
    other than electrical waves, subclass 481 where the automatic means
    responds to fluid pressure, subclasses 648+ where the automatic means
    responds to direction, inclination angular position or to a change thereof,
    subclasses 561+ for adaptive or optimizing systems, subclasses 563+ for
    protective or reliability increasing features including fail-safe systems,
    redundant systems, monitoring systems and maneuver or force limiting
    systems, subclasses 580+ for all types of single axis vehicular guidance,
    subclass 591 for multiple mode systems, e.g., manual to automatic, subclass
    624 for dead band compensation, and subclasses 638+ for serve-mechanisms
    with particular error detectors responsive to a wide variety of conditions
    pertinent of this search.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 945+, for communication
    involving aircraft condition, and subclasses 825.69 and 825.72 for the use
    of radio to control a device other than a communication device.

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclasses 3+ for  a calculator for vehicle control or condition indication.


CLS 244/176
TXT System under subclass 175 wherein the aircraft is capable of movement
    outside of earth's atmosphere as well as flight there within, and wherein
    such movement or flight is regulated by governing the direction or action
    of propulsive units on the aircraft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.1+,   for control of a missile.


CLS 244/177
TXT System under subclass 175 wherein the aircraft is governed in a condition
    of preset and uniform flight relative to its course, its altitude and its
    disposition with respect to the horizon, in order to maintain uniform
    flight.

    (1)     Note.  The flight of the aircraft can be uniform with respect to
    its pitch, or its roll or yaw, or its level light.


CLS 244/178
TXT System under subclass 177 wherein the path of uniform flight is maintained
    by governing the position, or directing the movement, of auxiliary surfaces
    on airfoils, which auxiliary surfaces modify the sustaining or controlling
    characteristics of the airfoil.


CLS 244/179
TXT System under subclass 177 wherein the path of uniform flight is governed by
    altering the angular orientation of the aircraft about an axis extending
    along the direction of movement thereof when such alteration is needed to
    maintain the altered course.


CLS 244/180
TXT System under subclass 175 wherein the path of flight of the aircraft is
    altered from a first height to a second height above ground level.


CLS 244/181
TXT System under subclass 180 wherein the height is governed by altering the
    inclination of the aircraft relative to ground level.


CLS 244/182
TXT System under subclass 180 wherein the height is governed by altering the
    forward rate of movement of the aircraft.


CLS 244/183
TXT System under subclass 175 wherein the path of flight is that which leads
    the aircraft in a direction towards its intended destination on the ground
    along a desired glide path line which is a line inclined to the horizontal
    and intersecting the destination.

    (1)     Note.  Control of aircraft take off involves functions different
    from those for landing.  For a system including the measuring of conditions
    required for take off, see Class 73, Measuring and Testing, subclass 178,
    and for a system including the calculation of a signal for take off, see
    Class 701, Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclass 15.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems.


CLS 244/184
TXT System under subclass 183 wherein the direction of the aircraft, or its
    orientation relative to its glide path, is changed from right to left or
    vice versa, the change occurring in an inclined plane; the inclined plane
    being one wherein two lines intersect, one of the lines being a horizontal
    line and the other line being said inclined glide path line of subclass 183.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a system wherein the deviation of an
    aircraft relative to its landing path is detected by a remote radio signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189,    for a system wherein the deviation of an aircraft relative to its
    flight path is detected by a remote radio signal and see (1) Note above.


CLS 244/185
TXT System under subclass 184 wherein the direction of the aircraft, or its
    orientation relative to its glide path, is changed from right to left as
    defined in subclass 184 and is also changed in a vertical plane as defined
    in subclass 186.


CLS 244/186
TXT System under subclass 183 wherein the direction of the aircraft, or its
    orientation relative to its glide path, is changed from an actual glide
    path line to a desired glide path line to obtain the desired glide path,
    the change occurring in a vertical plane; the vertical plane being one that
    is perpendicular to the ground, extending in the direction of landing and
    coextensive with both said lines.


CLS 244/187
TXT System under subclass 186 wherein the direction of the aircraft during
    landing is changed from a first path to a second path, the first path being
    inclined to the ground and the second path being parallel to and close to
    the ground, the change being responsive to a sensing of the altitude of the
    aircraft to cause a change of inclination of the aircraft.


CLS 244/188
TXT System under subclass 186 wherein the direction of the aircraft is changed
    from a first inclination to a second inclination relative to ground level,
    such change being accomplished by varying the speed of the aircraft in
    response to a throttle adjustment.


CLS 244/189
TXT System under subclass 175 wherein the path of flight is governed by means
    in the aircraft responsive to electromagnetic waves transmitted from a
    distant generator of such waves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189,    for a system controlled by a remote radio signal to control
    steering or yaw.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 167+ as explained in the reference to
    that class (180) appearing in subclass 75 above.


CLS 244/190
TXT System under subclass 189 wherein the path of flight of an aircraft having
    no pilot therein is governed.

    (1)     Note.  The usual aircraft system of this subclass controls an
    airplane that is capable of carrying cargo but is not manned by a pilot, or
    an airplane that is configured similarly to such an aircraft but sized to a
    smaller scale, e.g., a "model" airplane.


CLS 244/191
TXT System under subclass 175 which governs the aircraft in response to a rate
    of change in speed thereof.


CLS 244/192
TXT System under subclass 175 wherein the aircraft is governed by a command or
    control signal, and the aircraft temporarily flies in a condition in which
    it receives a null or minimal signal, and wherein the aircraft has no
    finite control signal applied thereto during the temporary period or
    minimal signal, in spite of which the aircraft continues to fly by its own
    mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are systems wherein the signal is
    generated by, for example, a remote radio, a gyroscope or an accelerometer.


CLS 244/193
TXT System under subclass 175 wherein an auto pilot of an aircraft includes a
    circuit that reduces coarse or harsh or excessive control signals to smooth
    response of the aircraft to such signals.


CLS 244/194
TXT System under subclass 175 which includes means for sensing whether the
    control system of an aircraft is operating as intended and for correcting
    or modifying the system if is should operate in a manner other than as
    intended.

    (1)     Note.  Some systems in this subclass provide for redundant (i.e.,
    duplicate operative or inoperative) circuits which are activated by the
    monitor if the main or primary circuit fails or operates not as intended.


CLS 244/195
TXT System under subclass 194 wherein a model of desired performance
    characteristics of the control system is programmed into the system and the
    system detects whether the program is being followed by the aircraft.


CLS 244/196
TXT System under subclass 175 which has means permitting the human pilot to
    inactivate or overcome the auto pilot circuitry.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the system circuit is overpowered in
    response to manual operation of the aircraft's control system.  The auto
    pilot regains control of the aircraft upon discontinuance of manual effort
    exerted by the human pilot.


CLS 244/197
TXT System under subclass 196 which has means permitting a human pilot to
    disengage the auto pilot and put into operation a system controlled by the
    human pilot for an indeterminate time period.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the human pilot selects a mode of operation
    wherein either manual control or auto pilot control is connected and used,
    and the unused control is disconnected


CLS 244/198
TXT An airfoil under subclass 35 having means associated therewith for
    modifying a characteristic of the support created thereby.


CLS 244/199
TXT Lift modification devices under subclass 198 designed to create or disperse
    a swirling air flow, this flow either circulating about the surface of the
    airfoil or flowing radially therefrom.


CLS 244/200
TXT Lift modification devices under subclass 198 wherein the modification
    consists of a design feature of all or part of the surface or skin of the
    airfoil.


CLS 244/201
TXT Lift modification devices under subclass 198 including means to vary or
    adjust the modification.

    (1)     Note.  The adjusting means may be actuated differently on opposite
    sides of the aircraft to provided roll control.


CLS 244/202
TXT Variable lift modifier under subclass 201 which operates in response to a
    change in condition of the aircraft landing gear or control therefor.


CLS 244/203
TXT Variable lift modifier under subclass 201 which operates in response to a
    change in condition of the aircraft.


CLS 244/204
TXT Variable lift modifier under subclass 201 comprising means within the
    airfoil, or externally adjacent the surface and upstream of the trailing
    edge, intended to affect a flow characteristic of that portion of the
    stream of air which is immediately adjacent the surface of the airfoil.


CLS 244/205
TXT Boundary layer control means under subclass 204 comprising means to create
    and/or vary an electric field about the airfoil.


CLS 244/206
TXT Boundary layer control means under subclass 204 comprising a member
    attached to the airfoil with its axis substantially perpendicular to the
    direction of motion of the air stream, and mounted for spinning about that
    axis.


CLS 244/207
TXT Boundary layer control means under subclass 204 comprising means within the
    aircraft to supply high energy air to the air stream.


CLS 244/208
TXT Blowing means under subclass 207 combined with means to remove air from the
    air stream and draw it into the interior of the airfoil.


CLS 244/209
TXT Boundary layer control means under subclass 204 comprising means within the
    aircraft to remove air from the air stream and draw it into the interior of
    the aircraft.


CLS 244/210
TXT Boundary layer control means under subclass 204 comprising either an
    opening through the airfoil adjacent its leading edge, or an auxiliary
    element adjacent the leading edge for forming a slot therebetween, thus
    providing for deflection of the flow of the air at the leading edge.


CLS 244/211
TXT Nose slot control means under subclass 210 in combination with a flap, the
    flap being (1) a section of the airfoil pivoted to the remainder of the
    airfoil at the trailing edge thereof or (2) an auxiliary element pivotally
    attached to the airfoil at the trailing edge thereof.


CLS 244/212
TXT Boundary layer control means under subclass 204 in combination with a flap,
    the flap being (1) a section of the airfoil pivoted to the remainder of the
    airfoil at the trailing edge thereof, or (2) an auxiliary element pivotally
    attached to the airfoil at the trailing edge thereof.


CLS 244/213
TXT Variable lift modifier under subclass 201 comprising (1) a section of the
    airfoil pivotable relative to a stationary portion thereof, or (2) an
    auxiliary element pivotally attached thereto, pivoting of the section or
    auxiliary element effecting a change in contour of the airfoil in sectional
    view.


CLS 244/214
TXT A flap under subclass 213 located at the leading edge of the airfoil.


CLS 244/215
TXT A flap under subclass 213 located at the trailing edge of the airfoil.


CLS 244/216
TXT A flap under subclass 215 which moves relative to the airfoil in such a
    manner as to create a slot with a changeable dimension between itself and
    the airfoil.


CLS 244/217
TXT A flap under subclass 215 and at least one other flap also at the trailing
    edge, each adapted to swing about an axis substantially perpendicular to
    the direction of the aircraft's motion, wherein one flap overlies the other
    and the flaps are rotatable relative one to the other.


CLS 244/218
TXT Variable lift modifier under subclass 201 including means to change the
    surface area of the airfoil to be acted upon by the relatively moving
    stream of air.


CLS 244/219
TXT Variable lift modifier under subclass 201 including means to change the
    contour of the airfoil in sectional view.


CLS 244/220
TXT Pilot operated:

    Devices and arrangements under subclass 75 comprising an aircraft control
    system having at least one manually movable part moved by a human pilot for
    operating or controlling an aircraft.


CLS 244/221
TXT Control System:

    Apparatus under subclass 220 comprising an aeronautical machine having an
    arrangement of structural and other movable parts, at least one movable
    part being movably engaged by a human operator for moving a structural part
    for guiding the aeronautical machine or structure thereby.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 491+ for hand operated
    control lever and linkage systems.


CLS 244/222
TXT Other than hand or foot actuated:

    Apparatus under subclass 221 wherein the movable part is engaged by an
    operator's body portion not normally used for controlling an aircraft
    (i.e., hands or feet).

    (1)     Note.  The movable part may be a seat, a part thereof, or any other
    appurtenance engageable by the torso or limbs of an operator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 515 for knee and elbow
    operated control lever and linkage systems respectively.


CLS 244/223
TXT With feel:

    Apparatus under subclass 221 wherein the part engaged by the human operator
    is provided with means for providing a physical sensation to the operator
    as it is being moved, the sensation generally being proportional to the
    force acting on the controlled structure (e.g., flaps, elevators, etc.).


CLS 244/224
TXT With locking means:

    Apparatus under subclass 221 comprising a fastening or other holding means
    for fixedly maintaining a movable aircraft control or other structure at a
    desired attitude or position.


CLS 244/225
TXT With dual purpose surface structure (e.g., elevons):

    Apparatus under subclass 221 comprising a structural control part movable
    to perform plural aircraft control modes each of which being normally
    controlled by a separate structural control part.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are control structures which may have an added
    or alternative movement to perform the function of another control
    structure (e.g., an aileron being made to act as a flap).


CLS 244/226
TXT Fluid:

    Apparatus under subclass 221 comprising a fluid pressure device for
    transmitting movement of the manually movable part of the movable
    structural part.


CLS 244/227
TXT With electric control:

    Apparatus under subclass 226 wherein electric control circuitry is utilized
    for the regulation of the fluid power device.


CLS 244/228
TXT Electric:

    Apparatus under subclass 221 comprising electric motive means for
    transmitting movement of the manually movable part to the movable
    structural part.


CLS 244/229
TXT Dual:

    Apparatus under subclass 221 comprising means permitting full or partial
    operation of aircraft control systems from two or more stations in the
    aircraft.


CLS 244/230
TXT With variable output:

    Apparatus under subclass 221 wherein movable parts have relative movement
    which varies with respect to an operational parameter to alter the extent
    of movement of the structural part for a given movement of an operator
    controlled movable part.


CLS 244/231
TXT With interengaging gearing:

    Apparatus under subclass 221 wherein at least one of the movable parts
    comprises toothlike or other projections about its periphery for
    cooperation with complementary surface configurations of another movable
    part, movement of one of the parts causing movement of the other.


CLS 244/232
TXT With cable and linkage:

    Apparatus under subclass 221 wherein the movable parts comprise at least
    one elongate flexible member and at least one rodlike member connected
    thereto movable generally lengthwise for actuating a structural part or
    parts to guide the aeronautical machine.

    (1)     Note.  A bellcrank or other lever movable about a pivot is not
    considered to be linkage for classification here. See subclasses 221 and
    231 for such pivoted structure combined with linkage or a cable,
    respectively, for moving aircraft control structure.


CLS 244/233
TXT Cable:

    Apparatus under subclass 221 wherein the movable parts comprise an elongate
    flexible member interconnecting a manually movable part and a structural
    part or a member integral with the structural part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 500.5+ for flexible cable
    transmitters, per se.


CLS 244/234
TXT Controller:

    Apparatus under subclass 220 comprising at least one movable part
    engageable by a human operator for operating the aeronautical machine or
    structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 491+ for hand operated
    control lever and linkage systems.


CLS 244/235
TXT Rudder bar and pedal:

    Apparatus under subclass 234 comprising foot operated devices for
    controlling aircraft on land, sea, or in the air.


CLS 244/236
TXT Electrical pickup:

    Apparatus under subclass 234 comprising means whereby movement of the
    manually engaged part is converted to an electric signal (e.g., strain
    gauge, inductance coil, switch, etc.).


CLS 244/237
TXT Three-way steering, single control:

    Apparatus under subclass 234 comprises a single movable manually engageable
    part for controlling the movement of each movable structural part to
    control yaw, pitch, and roll of the aircraft.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 244/900
TXT LIGHTWEIGHT, WINGED, AIR VEHICLE (E.G., ULTRALIGHT OR HANG GLIDER):Air
    vehicle (a) built to be very low in weight and (b) supported in flight by
    an air foil.

    (1)     Note.  The weight of an ultralight air vehicle is usually less than
    the 254 pound maximum defined by the Federal Aviation Administration.  This
    art collection may, however, include air vehicles which vary from the
    standard.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for glider-type airplanes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 61+ for glider-type toy
    airplanes.


CLS 244/901
TXT Having delta shaped wing:
    Subject matter under subclass 900 wherein the air foil is a generally
    triangular-shaped wing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for glider-type airplanes.


CLS 244/902
TXT Having parachute type wing:
    Subject matter under subclass 900 wherein the air foil is a flexible
    canopy, without any rigid supporting framework.

    SEARCH THIS, CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142+,   for a safety lowering device in the form of a parachute.


CLS 244/903
TXT Powered:
    Subject matter under subclass 900 wherein the very low weight air vehicle
    includes its own propulsion means.


CLS 244/904
TXT Miscellaneous hardware or control:
    Subject matter under subclass 900 including (a) a structural element of the
    very low weight air vehicle, or (b) a device for regulating the movement or
    direction of the very low weight air vehicle.


CLS 244/905
TXT INFLATABLE  EVACUATION  SLIDE:
    Hollow structure which, when filled with pressurized gas, forms a guideway
    on which passengers may slip down to rapidly leave an aircraft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137.2   for structure on an aircraft which permits passenger or cargo
    loading or discharging.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, particularly subclasses 48+ for a
    chute or escape tower for personnel, not related to aircraft.

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, particularly subclass
    25 for flexible wall chutes, per se.


CLS 245/
TTL WIRE FABRICS AND STRUCTURE

CLS 245/
TXT This class includes flexible all-wire or slat-and-wire fabric, wire blanks,
    panels and fabric structures not otherwise classifiable, and miscellaneous
    wire fabric joints in which at least one of the intersecting or connected
    elements is bent, looped, twisted, or coiled about the other or is
    subjected to an analogous wire-working operation to form or make the fabric
    or wherein wire is made an essential element of the invention.  Fabrics,
    joints, or other structures wherein the elements are joined or secured
    together, for example, by tie-wires or ties, without bending or twisting
    the elements, or by weaving, welding, casting, nailing, and stapling and
    wherein wire is not made an essential element of the invention are excluded.

    (1)     Note.  Wire fabrics to which features or elements have been added
    which particularly adapt such fabrics for conveyor use, and which may be
    considered as more than an improved fabric structure, are classifiable with
    conveyors (Class 198).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 186-199 for structures specific thereto, as
    combinations with the frame, end springs, bottom springs, etc.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 238, and
    indented subclasses for combinations of wire fabrics with frames, borders,
    or end strips, scrapers, etc.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses for
    residual structural metal work and units, particularly subclasses 343 and
    660+ for a surface forming fabric or lattice openwork, e.g., a grating or
    grille.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 50+ for a process of making sheet
    glass and bonding the formed   sheet   to    glass,   subclasses   147+
    for  glassworking apparatus including means to feed and laminate wire
    fabric thereto, and subclass 154 for glass to metal bonding by glassworking
    apparatus.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclass 169 for methods of forming meshes and
    ties.

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclass 847 for an endless belt conveyor
    reinforced by wires and subclasses 848+ for an endless belt conveyor formed
    of wire fabric.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 528+.

    256,    Fences, subclasses 32+ for structures specific to fences, as the
    combination with posts, stretchers, joints, or for ornamental fence fabrics.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 348+ for electrodes
    and shields for electric lamps and electric space discharge devices which
    are formed of wire fabrics.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 384+ for rod-like members joined
    side-to-side.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 134+ for
    reinforcement structure, per se.

    (2)     Note.  For composite fabrics comprising fabric or web structures in
    which a wire fabric is used for reinforcement or protection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclass 113.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 123+, 131, 133, 134+, 138
    and 139 for flexible pipes having wire fabric in the wall make-up thereof.

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclass 202.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet including a wire fabric as a component, see especially subclass 38
    for a light transmissive mass which has an opaque frame or border
    therearound, which may be a wire fabric, (e.g., stained glass or wire
    reinforced glass), and subclass 608 for metallic stock which includes a
    layer or component comprising interengaged fibers.

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 1+ for an open mesh material.

    450,    Foundation Garments, subclasses 43 and 44 for brassiere cups
    incorporating wire fabric.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 237+ for a friction drive belt which may be formed from a wire
    fabric or have a wire fabric as a component thereof.

    (3)     Note.  Class 428, Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles,
    subclasses 544+ is the residual locus for patents drawn to stock materials
    which are all metal or have adjacent metal components.  As such, it
    provides for many rod structures analogous to wire structures and should be
    considered proper as a supplementary search field.


CLS 245/1
TXT Miscellaneous wire articles not otherwise classifiable, fabric blanks,
    panels, or other structural fabric forms adapted to be used in the
    manufacture of chairs, lounges, carriages, go-carts, napkin rings, or other
    articles, or to be united to similar blanks for any purpose.


CLS 245/1.5
TXT Ring-shaped articles formed for the most part of wire adapted for
    renforcing the beads of pneumatic tires and processes of making the same.

    (1)     Note.  For endless bands made by a twisting or twining operation
    and of general application, see Class 57, Textiles: Spinning, Twisting, and
    Twining, subclass 201.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 890.15 for a process of making a plumbing
    ferrule or reshaping same.

    140,    WireWorking, subclass 88.

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclasses 450+ for tires embodying
    these elements.


CLS 245/2
TXT Miscellaneous wire fabrics not otherwise classifiable.

    (1)     Note.  Patches are in this subclass (2).

    (2)     Note.  For processes of electroforming foraminous articles and
    products resulting from such processes, see Class 205, Electrolysis:
    Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of Preparing the
    Compositions, subclass 75.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 549 for
    composite stock having a component which contains metal particles and
    fiber, cellulose or asbestos, and subclass 596 for metallic stock which is
    apertured.


CLS 245/3
TXT Wire fabrics having the elements secured together by bending, coiling, or
    twisting and in which the tie-wires or clips are used for strengthening the
    joints of the intersecting wires.


CLS 245/4
TXT Chain-type fabrics having elements or links substantially alike and
    interlinked with those adjacent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclasses 80 and 83.

    63,     Jewelry, subclass 4.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 237+ for a friction drive belt which may be formed from wire
    fabric or have a wire fabric as a component thereof.


CLS 245/5
TXT Fabrics in which the longitudinal or cross wires are bent to form a series
    of loop elements, generally arranged in rows, which hook into, pass
    through, interlock, or otherwise engage and hold loops formed in an
    adjacent row or section.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclass 169 and indented subclasses for tying
    methods.


CLS 245/6
TXT Fabrics comprising a plurality of connected helical coils, usually
    intercoiled together.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclass 189 for coil fabrics specific to bed-bottoms.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 241 for coil
    fabrics specific to mats.

    140,    Wireworking, subclasses 92.3+ for processes and apparatus including
    intercoiling of helices with each other or with successive loops or
    apertures.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 592 for metallic
    stock which is helical or has a helical component.


CLS 245/7
TXT Wire fabrics having substantially six-sided meshes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, subclass 3 and
    indented subclass and subclasses 8 to 12 for similar textile net fabrics.


CLS 245/8
TXT Wire fabrics having four-sided meshes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for link fabrics of quadrangular mesh.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclass 188.

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, subclass 3 and
    indented subclass and subclasses 8 to 12, for similar textile net fabrics.

     256,   Fences, subclass 45 for structures, specific to fences.


CLS 245/9
TXT Wire fabrics in which a plurality of similar elements are united by
    dissimilar elements or links or in which the cross wires are composed of
    sections suitably connected together or to the longitudinal wires or
    strands.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    256,    Fences, subclass 45.


CLS 245/10
TXT Edge, selvage, or seam structures of wire fabrics.


CLS 245/11
TXT Miscellaneous fabrics not otherwise classifiable, comprising slats and
    wires secured together by the mere bending, coiling or twisting of the
    wires about the slats.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 343 and 660+ for a
    residual surface forming fabric or lattice openwork, e.g., a grating or
    grille.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclass 44.

    256,    Fences, subclass 34.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 350 for electrodes
    and shields for electric lamps and electric space discharge devices which
    are formed slat and wire fabrics.


CLS 246/
TTL RAILWAY SWITCHES AND SIGNALS

CLS 246/
TXT
    I.      This class includes patents relating to the following means for the
    safeguard and control of traffic upon or across railways (that is, fixed
    tracks for occupant- controlled vehicles) or which by structure are
    especially adapted for such use, viz:

    a.      Signals, including those used for communication between occupants
    of a car or train.

    b.      Indicators, recorders, telegraphic, telephonic, or other similar
    apparatus when especially designed for use in connection with car or train
    movements, except manually-set devices, such as train and engine signs and
    markers capable of general use.

    c.      Devices on the roadway, such as signals, switches, circuit
    closures, gates, etc., actuated or controlled from or by the moving
    vehicles, except circuit-controllers actuated by the vehicle for the
    purpose of energizing sectionalized conductors used for supplying
    propulsion-current thereto.

    d.      Automatic train stop and speed control means, the actuation of
    which is initiated by agencies not on the train or by wheel derailment or
    defects in train structure and mechanism, the automatic stop, for
    classification purposes, being considered an equivalent of and substitute
    for a railway signal; but train stopping and control mechanism cooperating
    with obstacles fixed in position upon the track which have no moving parts
    are excluded from this class except when they cooperate with
    speed-responsive devices on the train.

    e.      Safety devices, including derailing switches and blocks, used for
    preventing accidents caused by the misplacement of switches, disregard of
    signals etc.

    f.      The structure of signals, switches, frogs, and crossings and their
    appurtenances.

    g.      Mechanism for the manual or other actuation of any of the devices
    of the class.

    II.     MEANS PECULIAR TO SPECIAL TYPES OF RAILWAYS

    a.      For means peculiar to special types of railway, such as mono-rail,
    rack-rail, electric, pneumatic, logging, cash-carrier, elevated, cable,
    suspended, etc.,--and not of general utility or if claimed in connection
    with structure of such special types of railway will be found in the
    appropriate subclasses of Classes 104, Railways; 186, Merchandising; and
    414, Material or Article Handling; but when such means are directed to the
    structure or operating mechanism of the switches of subclass 415 they will
    be found in subclass 419, indented thereunder.

    III.    SIGNALS AND INDICATORS IN OTHER CLASSES

    a.      For signals used for communication between occupants of a car or
    train see Classes 116, Signals and Indicators; 178, Telegraphy, for
    telegraph systems, note especially subclass 43 for space induction systems
    which are oftentimes used in train communication; 379, Telephonic
    Communications, for telephone systems, note subclass 55 for space induction
    systems; and Class 375, Pulse or Digital Communications, for pulse
    communication systems; 381, Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and
    Devices, especially subclasses 77+ and 86 for one-way electrical audio
    signal transmission systems for trains and Class 455, Telecommunications,
    for modulated carrier wave and light wave communications.

    b.      For manually-set devices, such as train and engine signs, and
    markers capable of general use see Class 40, Card, Picture, or Sign
    Exhibiting and Class 116, Signals and Indicators.

    c.      For hand actuated train-indicators or signals and indicators placed
    on moving trains or cars to indicate their motion or the speed or direction
    of their motion or which perform merely an identifying function, such as
    train or engine markers see Class 116, Signals and Indicators, subclasses
    28+ and 200+.

    d.      Station, street and similar annunciators and card, picture and sign
    exhibitors not especially adapted for use as cab-signals, when placed in
    vehicles and actuated or controlled by obstacles or electrical contacts
    upon the track, will be found in the obstacle-operated,
    obstacle-controlled, and electrically-controlled subclasses of the
    changeable exhibitors of Class 40, Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting,
    except when there are claims upon the structure of the track-obstacle or
    intermittent electrical contact and no claims upon the structure of the
    annunciator or exhibitor in which case they are placed in this class.

    e.      Where a semaphore is of the well known conventional railway type,
    (which is more fully described in the definition of subclass 479 of this
    class), the patent is here classified, but otherwise is some subclass of
    Class 116, Signals and Indicators, or Class 340, Communications:
    Electrical, unless claimed for railway use, in which case it is here
    classified.

    IV.     SPEED CONTROL IN OTHER CLASSES

    a.      For speed control vehicles, when all of the mechanism is upon the
    vehicle and there is no cooperation with devices on the track or roadway,
    see Class 91, Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclasses;
    Class 123, Internal-Combustion Engines; Class 180, Motor Vehicles,
    subclasses 170+, Class 388, Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, subclasses
    800+ and 825+ and Class 418, Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices.

    V.      TRAIN STOPPING IN OTHER CLASSES

    a.      For train stopping and control mechanism cooperating with obstacles
    fixed in position upon the track which have no moving parts see Class 104,
    Railways; Class 186, Merchandising and Class 414, Material or Article
    Handling.

    Closures (gates) when performing a stopping rather than a signalling
    function will be found in Class 49, Movable or Removable Closures, except
    that railway-gates and mine-doors actuated by the energy of a moving
    vehicle or electrically controlled therefrom will be found in subclasses
    125 and 292 of this class and in the various subclasses indented thereunder.

    VI.     TRACK STRUCTURE

    a.      For track structure other than as above indicated see Class 14,
    Bridges, appropriate subclasses; Class 104, Railways and Class 238,
    Railways:  Surface Track.

    VII.    INDEX TO TECHNICAL LITERATURE

    In many of the subclasses there have been placed upon the official
    search-cards references to such literature as appears to relate to the
    subject-matter of such subclass; but no attempt has been made to make these
    references complete.  It has not been deemed advisable to print these
    references in connection with the respective subclass definitions; but they
    can be inspected in the Public Search-Room in connection with the Chief
    Draftsman's classified copies of patents.  The list of works indexed is
    given below.

    Literature in Scientific and Technical Information
    Center

    Alternating Current Signaling, 1915, The Union Switch and Signal Co.,
    Swissvale, Pa. Automatic Block Signal and Signal Circuits, Scott, New York,
    1908. Block and Interlocking Signals, Elliott, New York,1896. Block System
    of Signaling on American Railroads, The, Adams, New York, 1901.  First to
    Fifth Annual Reports Block Signal and Train Control Board, Interstate
    Commerce Commission,1909 to 1913. Locking, Laverack, New York, 1907.
    Mechanical Railway Signaling, second edition, Wilson, London, about 1909.
    Notes on Track Construction and Maintenance, Camp, Chicago, 1903. Perfect
    Railway Signaling, Spang, 1902. Power Railway Signaling, Wilson, 1908.
    Railroad Signal Dictionary, The, Adams & Hitt, New York, 1908. Railroad
    Signal Dictionary, The revised edition, New York, 1911. Railway Appliances,
    Barry, New York, 1896. Railway Block Signaling, Pigg, London. Railway
    Engineer, The, (about 1909). Railway Signal Association, Digest of
    Proceedings, Vol.1, 1895-1905; Vol.2, 1905; Vol.3, 1906; Vol.4, 1907;
    Vol.5, 1908; Vol.6, 1909. Railway Signal Association, Journal, 1910,
    Vol.XIII; 1911, Vol.XIV; 1912, Vol.XV; 1913, Vol.XVI; 1914, Vol.XVII; 1915,
    Vol.XVIII; 1916, Vol.XIX;1917, Vol.XX. Railway Signal Engineering, L. P.
    Lewis, London,1912. Railway Signaling, Pittsburgh, 1908. Railway Signaling
    in Theory and Practice, Latimer, Chicago, 1909. Railway Track and Track
    Work, Tratman, New York, 1908. Safe Railway Working, Stretton, 1886. Signal
    Engineer, The, 1908, Vol.1; 1909, Vol.2; 1910, Vol.3; 1911, Vol.4; 1912,
    Vol.5, 1913, Vol.6; 1914, Vol.7; 1915, Vol.8; 1916, Vol.9. Street Railway
    Road Bed, Pratt and Alden, New York, 1898.

    VIII.   SEARCH CLASS:

    14,     Bridges.  (See section VIa above).

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting. (See sections IIIb, IIId above).

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures. (See section Va, above).

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type. (See section IVa above).

    104,    Railways.  (See sections IIa, Va, VIa above).

    116,    Signals and Indicators.  (See sections IIIa, IIIb, IIIc, IIIe
    above).

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines.  (See section IVa above).

    178,    Telegraphy.  (See section IIIa above).

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 167+ for a motor vehicle provided with
    means for controlling its operation which is responsive to electromagnetic
    radiation, magnetic force, or sound waves received from a source, or
    reflected from an object or surface, which is located apart from the
    vehicle; and subclasses 170+, for a motor vehicle provided with means which
    is responsive to the speed of the vehicle for maintaining its speed at, or
    preventing it from exceeding, a particular value.

    186,    Merchandising.  (See sections II a, Va above).

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, for the tranmission of
    electricity to a moving vehicle, where no claims are made upon the
    apparatus actuated by the current or covering the uses to which the current
    is applied; subclasses 16 to 21 for circuit controllers actuated by the
    vehicle for the purpose of energizing sectionalized conductors used for
    supplying propulsion current thereto.

    238,    Railways:  Surface Track.  (See section VIa above).

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems. (See section IVa above).

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, note particularly subclasses
    24+ for coupling networks which may be used in railway-signaling systems,
    and subclasses 1+ for plural-channel systems including such coupling
    networks.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical.  (See sections III, a, and III, e,
    above).

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications.  (See section III a above).

    379,    Telephonic Communications.  (See section IIIa above).

    414,    Material or Article Handling, (see sections IIa, Va above).

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices. (See section IV a, above).

    455,    Telecommunications (See section III a above).

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclasses 1+ for vehicle indication, operation, or guidance which requires
    a mathematical calculation.  Note, where significant vehicle structure is
    recited, classification is in the appropriate vehicle class.


CLS 246/1
TXT Systems and devices under the class definition not otherwise classifiable.


CLS 246/2
TXT Systems and devices under the class definition specially adapted for the
    control of train movements by train-orders or by their equivalents
    transmitted from a central or directing station.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 541+ for
    number-display devices and similar markers displayed on trains to indicate
    car or train numbers or give other information useful to the
    train-dispatcher or other officials.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 30 for train-markers referred to
    above, and subclass 173 for flags used as train-markers and for supports
    for such flags.

    178,    Telegraphy, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous electric
    telegraph systems.

    258,    Railway Mail Delivery, appropriate subclasses indented thereunder,
    for devices for delivering train-orders to moving trains.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 825.72 for radio remote
    control.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 61+ and 253 for signal and indicating
    lights carried by engines and cars, and 61, 253, for illuminated train and
    engine markers.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous
    electric telephone systems.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 500+ for miscellaneous radio systems
    comprising a plurality of transmitter and/or receiver means with a central
    control station.


CLS 246/3
TXT Systems and devices under subclass 2 in which the train-dispatcher can set
    or control the operation of railway-traffic-controlling devices from a
    distance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135,    137, 141, 142, and 162, for indication that the signals, switches,
    etc., are properly actuated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 298 for signal box systems
    having answer back or return call provision, and subclasses 313+ for
    miscellaneous signaling systems having answer back provision.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclass 418 for telephone-call systems
    having a return call indicator or answer back.


CLS 246/4
TXT Systems under subclass 3 having the signals given upon the engine cab or
    car or having mechanism which is actuated to stop the train or to control
    its motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for other
    systems within the class definition for a cab signal or train-control means.


CLS 246/5
TXT Systems under subclass 3 having means so that any one of a plurality of
    signals may be independently set or controlled from a distance, the number
    of line-wires used being less than the number of signals controlled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156,    157, 164, 165, 424, 425, and 426, for selective mechanism and
    devices and all subclasses in the titles of which the words "Cab and
    control" appear, for means for actuating signals on trains.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 23+ for printing telegraph systems.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ and the classes specified in the
    Notes thereto for photo-sensitive electric systems for controlling a device.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 112+
    for switching arrangements for distribution systems, particularly subclass
    140 in which a remote switch is controlled by the exercise of control over
    the power current supplied to the switch.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 108+ for selective telephone-type switches of
    general utility.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825+ for selective
    signaling systems in which signals may be selectively controlled; and
    subclass 825.72 for radio-wave systems for controlling a device.

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 73+ for miscellaneous systems for
    controlling a device by means of reflected or otherwise returned radio
    waves (radar).

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for multiplexing
    systems.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 242+ for automatic telephone
    systems which usually involve selecting means; and subclasses 350+ for call
    transmitters for telephone systems.


CLS 246/6
TXT Systems under subclass 2 having devices placed upon the train to insure the
    observance of train orders.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167+,   and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for details of
    cab signal or train-control mechanism.


CLS 246/7
TXT Telegraphic or telephonic systems under subclass 2 specially adapted for
    communication between trains and the dispatcher or other stations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167+,   and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for cab- signal systems giving only one or a limited number of indications.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, for miscellaneous pulse
    communications.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 500+ for miscellaneous analog
    modulated carrier wave communications.


CLS 246/8
TXT Systems under subclass 7 in which an inductive relation is established
    between the train and line, no physical connection being established.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63      and 194, for inductive transmission of signals to moving trains.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 43 for inductive- telegraph systems.

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, subclass 10 for induction
    systems for transmitting electric power to a vehicle.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses, for the structure of
    transformers and inductive reactors.

     379,   Telephonic Communications, subclass 55 for inductive telephone
    systems.


CLS 246/9
TXT Systems under subclass 7 in which a current is transmitted to or from the
    train by one or more continuous contacts with line conductors other than
    the traction rails, which may or may not be sectionalized.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65      through 68, 73 and 86, all disclosing means for the transmission of
    signals to moving trains through electrical contacts continuously
    maintained.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclasses 279+ for removing ice, snow and dirt from
    continuous and intermittent electric contacts.

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, for structure of the
    conductor and collector.


CLS 246/10
TXT Systems under subclass 9 in which a single continuous contact is used,
    current being returned by the traction rails.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     68, 71, 73, and 86, for system using the traction-rails or the
    return of the signal-current to the car, also the foregoing subclasses and
    in addition subclasses 65 and 66 for continuous- contact systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, for structure of the
    conductor and the collector.


CLS 246/11
TXT Systems under subclass 10 in which two or more continuous contacts are used.

    (1)     Note.  See the search note to subclass 10 for continuous-contact
    systems and also for systems disclosing the return of the current through
    the traction-rail.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, for structure of the
    conductor and the collector.


CLS 246/12
TXT Systems under subclass 9 in which each train has its instruments cut
    constantly into the line in series with those of other trains or stations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, subclass 11 for structure
    of the conductor and the collector.


CLS 246/13
TXT Emergency stations without operators under subclass 7, located along the
    permanent way between regular stations, at which trains may stop or be
    stopped for communication by telegraph or telephone with the dispatcher or
    other trains or stations or from which in an emergency signals may be
    controlled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 287+ for signal-box
    signaling systems.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 56+ for portable telephone
    systems.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, for an electrical connector, per se, see
    especially subclasses 477+ for an electrical connector of the overhead line
    type having a handle, tool or manipulating means.


CLS 246/14
TXT Day or night signals or combinations of same under subclass 2 used for the
    purpose mentioned and usually adapted to be supported by or attached to the
    roof or outer wall of a station or signal cabin and provided with means for
    operating them from within the same.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also includes devices used at stations for
    holding train orders.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    473+,   for signal structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 462 for frames and
    clips for the holding and display of the train order.


CLS 246/15
TXT Systems under subclass 14 for insuring the proper display of the signal or
    the due delivery of the train order.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for devices placed upon the train to insure the observance of train
    orders.


CLS 246/16
TXT Devices under subclass 15 for holding the train order, or train order
    blank, form part of the safety system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    473+,   for the signal structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., appropriate subclasses, for the
    structure of clips for holding orders.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 462 for frames and
    clips for the holding and display of the train orders.


CLS 246/17
TXT Signals under subclass 14 which rotate upon a vertical axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    473+,   for signal structure.


CLS 246/18
TXT Signals under subclass 14 having two semaphore-arms which extend on
    opposite sides from a common support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    479+,   for semaphore structure.


CLS 246/19
TXT Systems under the class definition in which the physical possession by an
    officer of the train of a train staff, ticket, tablet, or other token is a
    prerequisite to entrance upon the section or block.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77      through 80 and 247, for train-counting mechanism.

    133,    134, 135, 141, 146, and 159, for details of electric locking and
    return-release indication.


CLS 246/20
TXT Systems under the class definition in which a space interval is maintained
    between trains on the same track, usually by the subdivision of the way
    into definite sections termed "blocks", the movement of traffic being
    governed by cab or wayside signals or devices which control the brakes or
    motive power, or both.

    (1)     Note.  Home signals indicate the presence or absence of trains
    within the block about to be entered.  Distant signals (usually semaphores
    having notched blades) indicate the condition of adjacent or distant blocks
    other than the block about to be entered. The combined functions of the
    home and distant signals are sometimes performed by a three-position
    signal, indicating by its three positions, respectively, the presence of a
    train in the block ahead, the second block ahead, or that both blocks are
    clear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for systems closely related in function where the physical
    possession by an officer of the train of a staff ticket or other token is a
    prerequisite to entrance upon the block.


CLS 246/21
TXT Systems under subclass 20 in which the train automatically cooperates with
    human agency in the actuation or control of the elements of the system.

    (1)     Note.  These systems are sometimes called "controlled Manual".  The
    electric control by trains of manually- actuated signals or vice versa is
    an example of such cooperation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    106, 112, 160, 164, 165, and 183, for manual-control features.


CLS 246/22
TXT Systems under subclass 21 in which the train uses electrical means in
    performing its automatic function.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes the so-called
    "controlled-manual-block" systems.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    106, 112, 160, 164, 165, and 183, for manual-control features.


CLS 246/23
TXT Systems under subclass 22 in which means are provided for actuating audible
    or visual signals upon the cab or train or for stopping it or controlling
    its speed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167+,   and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for cab and control features.


CLS 246/24
TXT Systems under subclass 22 in which use is made of train-actuated circuit
    controllers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72      through 80, 82-84, 88, 90, 91, 126, 127, 246-252 and 259, for
    train-actuated circuit-closers.  See also search mote to subclass 246.


CLS 246/25
TXT Systems under subclass 22 in which the signal clearing operations require
    the cooperation of the operators at each end of the block and also the
    absence of trains from the block, which when present, by electrical means,
    render it impossible to clear the signals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26      and 106, for manually-controlled block signaling systems of the
    lock and block type.

    131+,   and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for details of
    locking and interlocking, and switching, signaling, and similar systems.


CLS 246/26
TXT Systems under subclass 25 in which track circuits are used for controlling
    the devices of the system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     41, 58, 95, and 98, for block-signaling systems having specific
    track circuits.

    128+    and 130, for automatic-highway signal systems, mine door and/or
    gate systems having specific track circuits.


CLS 246/27
TXT Systems under subclass 20 having train-control devices which operate
    automatically without direct human intervention.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     and appropriate indented subclasses for automatic systems in
    combination with manually-actuated signals.


CLS 246/28
TXT Systems under subclass 27 in which the traffic- controlling devices are
    actuated and controlled only by electrical means.

    (1)     Note.  The means employed upon the train for operating cab signal
    and train-control mechanism may by of any type--e.g., electrical,
    fluid-pressure, mechanical, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for semi-automatic block signaling systems in which electrical
    means are used for performing the automatic function.

    114+,   for automatic grade-crossing protection systems having electrical
    means for operating the protecting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 238 for vehicle propulsion control by block
    system wherein a peculiar type of guideway is claimed (e.g., cable, model,
    overhead, etc.).


CLS 246/29
TXT Systems under subclass 28 in which the traffic- control devices are
    actuated and controlled by waves of radiant energy as heat, light, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    109+ for signalling systems in which intelligence is transmitted over a
    light or analogous beam.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 200.1+ and the classes and
    subclasses specified in the Notes thereto for photocell-controlled electric
    circuits and photocell apparatus.


CLS 246/30
TXT Systems under subclass 29 in which the signals or automatic-stop devices
    are actuated or controlled by the methods of so-called "wireless
    telegraphy", making use of Hertzian waves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.69 and 825.72 for
    radio-wave systems for controlling a device.

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous
    radio-signaling and teledynamic systems, particularly subclasses 61+ for
    the miscellaneous systems for controlling a device by means of reflected or
    otherwise returned radio wave energy; See the classes under "SEARCH CLASS"
    in the class definitions of Class 343 for the other classes which provide
    for radiant-energy systems for controlling a device.


CLS 246/31
TXT Systems under subclass 28 in which means not on the car or train are
    provided whereby under conditions of danger the supply of propulsion
    current is cut off or is so reduced that the car is stopped or its speed
    controlled. (1) Note.  The control of the supply of propulsion current is
    most cases will be by other cars or trains which constitute a hazard to the
    controlled car or train.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    187,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for
    train-control devices located on the train whereby the motor of an electric
    car is deprived of propulsion current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 238 for vehicle propulsion control by block
    system wherein a peculiar type of guideway is claimed (e.g., cable, model,
    overhead, etc.).

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, subclasses 16-21 for
    conductor-supply systems for railways wherein the conductor is provided
    with a plurality of sections, one or more of the sections being manually
    de-energized and the system having means for connecting the de-energized
    section to the supply feeder.


CLS 246/32
TXT Systems under subclass 31 in which the flow of propulsion current to one
    car or train under conditions of danger controls the flow to other cars or
    trains.


CLS 246/33
TXT Systems under subclass 28 in which signals are so arranged as to give
    danger or caution indications to trains running in both directions on the
    same track.

    (1)     Note.  The so-called "A. P. B." or absolute-permissive block
    systems are here included.

    (2)     Note.  Only systems controlled by track-circuits are here included.


CLS 246/34
TXT Systems under subclass 28 in which an alternating or pulsating current used
    for actuating or controlling the traffic controlling devices and derived
    from a source not on the train uses both traction rails as conductors in
    series for the major portion of the block.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     41+, 58+, 95, 98, 128+, and 130, for track-circuit systems.

    176     and 253, for switch or signal actuated circuit-breakers in
    track-circuits.

    449,    450 and 451, for tie-bars with insulated joints.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    238,    Railways:  Surface Track, subclass 164 for the structure of rail
    bonds and subclass 152 for insulated rail joints.


CLS 246/35
TXT Systems under subclass 34 in which super-imposed propulsion current, either
    direct or alternating, is returned through one of the traction rails which
    is not sectionalized.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     34+, 41+, 58+, 95, 98, 128+, and 130, for track-circuit systems.

    34,     38, 39, and 40, for alternating track-circuits showing one unbroken
    traction-rail, its use for return of propulsion-current not being specified.

    42,     43 and 61, for the use of propulsion-current in other systems.


CLS 246/36
TXT Systems under subclass 35 in which both traction rails are used for the
    return of the super-imposed propulsion current, neither rail being
    sectionalized.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     34+, 41+, 58+, 95, 98, 128+, and 130, for track-circuit systems.

    35      and 37, for superposition of propulsion-current on an alternating
    or varying track-circuit current.

    42,     43 and 61, for the superposition of porpulsion-current on a direct
    track-circuit current.


CLS 246/37
TXT Systems under subclass 36 in which one or both of the traction-rails are
    divided into sections by insulated joints, the rails being made continuous
    for the return of the super-imposed direct propulsion-current by
    inductance-bonds or similar devices, which by impedance prevent the passage
    of the alternating signal-circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     34+, 41+, 58+, 95, 98, 128+, and 130, for track-circuit systems.

    35      and 36, for the superposition of propulsion-current upon
    alternating track-circuit currents.

    42,     43 and 61, for the superposition of propulsion-current upon direct
    track-circuit currents.


CLS 246/38
TXT Systems under subclass 34 in which the home indication is actuated or
    controlled by the presence or absence of current and the distant indication
    by the change of some characteristic of the track-circuit current.

    (1)     Note.  As line-wire distant control is dispensed with, the system
    is sometimes referred to in the art as "wireless", but should not be
    confused with the true or Hertzian-wave "wireless" of subclass 30.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     34+, 41+, 58+, 95, 98, 128+, and 130, for track-circuit systems.

    35,     44, 45, and 60, for means for the actuation of the signals.

    52,     224 and 481, for home and distant type.

    53      and 223, for three-position type of semaphore.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 230+ for polarized electromagnets and subclasses
    266+ for differential electromagents.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825+ for selective
    signaling systems of general application.


CLS 246/39
TXT Systems under subclass 34 in which one or more line-wires extending back
    for at least the entire length of the block are used for controlling or
    actuating the distant signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     34+, 41+, 58+, 95, 98, 128+, and 130, for track-circuit systems.

    46+     and 60, for line-wire control systems.

    52      and 224, for the structure of or means for the actuation of the
    signals.

    53      and 223, for three-position type of semaphore.

    52,     224 and 481, for home and distant type.


CLS 246/40
TXT Systems under subclass 34 in which the blocks are independent, trains only
    controlling the devices at the entrace of the blocks in which they are
    running.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     34+, 41+, 58+, 95, 98, 128, and 130, for track-circuit systems.

    54,     and the appropriate indented subclasses for single-block systems.


CLS 246/41
TXT Systems under subclass 28 in which a direct, normally closed, continuous
    current, either actuating or controlling traffic-controlling devices and
    derived from a source not on the train, uses both traction-rails in series
    as conductors for the major portion of the block.

    (1)     Note.  This type is known to the Railway Signal Association by the
    title "D.C. automatic block".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     34+, 58+, 95, 98, 128+, and 130, for track-circuit systems.

    70,     for cab signal or train-control systems similar to that in this
    subclass.

    130,    for highway signals, gates, and doors actuated or controlled
    through closed track-circuits.

    160,    for switch-locks controlled by electric track-circuits.

    253,    for devices for breaking the continuity of the circuit when a
    switch is misplaced or a signal goes to danger.

    449,    450 and 451, for tie-bars with insulated joints.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    238,    Railways:  Surface Track, subclass 164 for the structure of
    rail-bonds and subclass 152 for insulated rail-joints.


CLS 246/42
TXT Systems under subclass 41 in which a direct propulsion-current is returned
    by and super-imposed upon one or both of the track-rails in which the
    signal controlling current flows.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     34+, 41+, 58+, 95, 98, 128+, and 130, for track-circuit systems.

    35+,    43 and 61, for superimposed propulsion-current.


CLS 246/43
TXT Systems under subclass 42 in which the super-imposed propulsion-current is
    either alternating or pulsating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     34+, 41+, 58+, 95, 98, 128+, and 130, for track-circuit systems.

    35+     and 61, for superimposed propulsion-current.


CLS 246/44
TXT Systems under subclass 41 in which the distant signal is controlled by the
    change of some characteristic of the track-circuit current.

    (1)     Note.  As the use of external line-wires is dispensed with, the
    system has long been known in the art as "wireless", although not wireless
    in the sense of the telegraphic art or of subclass 30 of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     34+, 41+, 58+ 95, 98, 128+, and 130, for track-circuit systems.

    38,     50 and 60, for wireless systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825+ for
    selective-signaling systems of general application.


CLS 246/45
TXT Systems under subclass 44 in which a reversal of the direction of current
    flow is used for controlling the distant signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     34+, 41+, 58+, 95, 98, 128+, and 130, for track-circuit systems.

    38,     50 and 60, for wireless systems.


CLS 246/46
TXT Systems under subclass 41 in which one or more line wires extending back
    the entire length of the block are used for controlling or actuating the
    distant signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     34+, 41+, 58+, 95, 98, 128+, and 130, for track-circuit systems.

    39,     47 to 53 and 60, for line-wire systems of control.


CLS 246/47
TXT Systems under subclass 46 in which means are provided for actuating
    traffic-controlling devices placed upon the train or car.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     34+, 41+, 58+, 95, 98, 128+, and 130, for track-circuit systems.

    39,     46, 48 to 53 and 60, for line-wire systems of control.

    167+,   and all subclasses noted in the search notes appended thereto, for
    details relating to the control of signals placed upon a moving car or
    train or to the control of its motion.


CLS 246/48
TXT Systems under subclass 47 in which an electric circuit on the train,
    normally closed through the track-rails, is broken by the passage of the
    train over one or more insulated rail-joints when a condition of danger
    exists, the break in the rails being electrically bridged under conditions
    of safety.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     34+, 41+, 58+, 95, 98, 128+, and 130, for track-circuit systems.

    39,     46, 49 to 53 and 60, for line-wire systems of control.

    57,     75 and 179, for bridged-insulated-rail-joint systems.

    167+    and all subclasses noted in the search Notes appended thereto, for
    cab and control features.


CLS 246/49
TXT Systems under subclass 47 in which an electric current is transmitted from
    the track into the cab or a local cab-circuit is closed by means of
    so-called "ramp rails" or intermittent contact plates or rails.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     34+, 41+, 58+, 95, 98, 128+, and 130, for track-circuit systems.

    39,     46, 48 to 53, and 60, for line-wire systems of control.

    56,     69+, 74, 85, 92, 195, 229, and 233+, for other systems
    characterized by an intermittent contact similar to that in this subclass.

    167+,   and all subclasses noted in the search notes appended thereto, for
    cab and control features.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclasses 279+ for devices for cleaning ice, snow, and
    dirt from continuous and intermittent electrical contacts.


CLS 246/50
TXT Systems under subclass 46 in which the distant signal is actuated or
    controlled by changes in the direction of current-flow or in some other
    characteristic or the current in a circuit other than the track-circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     34+, 41+, 58+, 95, 98, 128+, and 130, for track-circuit systems.

    38,     44, 45 and 60, for current characteristic control.

    39,     46 and 60+, for line-wire systems of control.


CLS 246/51
TXT Systems under subclass 46 in which the signal at the entrance to any block
    is retained in its danger position until after a train has entered the next
    block ahead and has proceeded therein a certain predetermined distance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     34+, 41+, 58+, 95, 98, 128+, and 130, for track-circuit systems.

    39,     46 to 50, 52, 53, and 60, for line-wire systems of control.


CLS 246/52
TXT Systems under subclass 46 in which two signals, "home" and "distant" so
    called, usually having a common support, are placed at the entrance to each
    block and respectively indicate the condition of the block about to be
    entered and or the next block ahead.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     34+, 41+, 58+, 95, 128+, and 130, for track-circuit systems.

    33,     38, 39, 44+, 51, 224, and 481, for motors for actuating home and
    distant signals.

    39,     46+, 53 and 60, for line-wire systems of control.


CLS 246/53
TXT Systems under subclass 46 in which a so-called "three-position signal" is
    placed at the entrance to each block and indicates by its three different
    aspects the occupancy of the first or second blocks ahead or that both
    blocks are clear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     34+, 41+, 58+, 95, 98, 128+, and 130, for track-circuit systems.

    33,     38, 39, 44, 45, 51, 223, and 479, for detail of three-position
    signal mechanism.

    39,     46 to 52, and 60, for other methods of line-wire distant control.


CLS 246/54
TXT Systems under subclass 41 in which the blocks are independent, trains only
    controlling the devices of the blocks in which they are running.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     34+, 41+, 58+, 95, 98, 128+, and 130, for track-circuit systems.

    40,     for single-block systems.


CLS 246/55
TXT Systems under subclass 54 in which the traffic-controlling devices are
    placed upon the car or train.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     34+, 41+, 58+, 95, 98, 128+, and 130, for track-circuit systems.

    40,     for single-block systems.

    167+,   and all subclasses referred to in the search notes appended
    thereto, for details of the cab and control mechanism.


CLS 246/56
TXT Systems under subclass 55 in which intermittent contacts or so-called
    "ramp-rails" are used for establishing electrical connection with the
    moving train.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     34+, 41+, 58+ 95, 98, 128+, and 130, for track-circuit systems.

    40,     for single-block systems.

    49,     69, 70, 71, 74, and 195, for intermittent contacts controlling
    cab-signals and train movements.

    85      and 92, for such contacts used with other types of block systems.

    167+,   and all subclasses given in the search notes appended thereto, for
    cab and control features.

    229,    233, 234, and 235, for intermittent contacts in motor systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclasses 279+ for devices for cleaning ice, snow, and
    dirt from continuous and intermittent electrical contacts.


CLS 246/57
TXT Systems under subclass 55 in which an electric circuit upon the train,
    normally closed through the track rail or rails, is broken by the passage
    of the car over one or move insulated rail-joints, the break in the rails
    being electrically closed under conditions of safety.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     34+, 41+, 58+, 95, 98, 128+, and 130, for track-circuit systems.

    40,     for single-block systems.

    48,     75 and 179, for bridged-insulated-rail-joint systems.

    167+,   and all subclasses given in the search notes appended thereto, for
    cab and control features.


CLS 246/58
TXT Systems under subclass 28 in which a direct continuous current used for
    actuating and controlling traffic-controlling devices, normally open and
    derived from a source not on the train, uses both traction-rails in series
    as conductors in opposite directions for the major portion of the block.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     34+, 41+, 95, 98, 128+, and 130, for track-circuit systems.

    449,    450 and 451, for tie-bars with insulated joints.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    238,    Railways:  Surface Track, subclasses 14.1+, for the structure of
    rail-bonds and subclass 152, for insulated rail-joints.


CLS 246/59
TXT Means under subclass 58 are provided for actuating audible or visual
    signals upon the cab or train or for stopping it or controlling its speed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7+,     for the transmission of telegraphic and telephonic communications
    to and from moving cars.

    26,     34+, 41+, 58+, 95, 98, 128+, and 130, for track-circuit systems.

    167+,   and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for cab and control features.


CLS 246/60
TXT Means under subclass 58 are provided for the control of distant or
    three-position signals or for the control of a single signal from a
    plurality of blocks.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     34+, 41+, 58+, 95, 98, 128+, and 130, for track-circuit systems.

    35+,    38, 39, 44+, and 46+, for systems of distant-signal control.


CLS 246/61
TXT Propulsion-current under subclass 28 is superimposed upon the current
    controlling the signals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     34+, 41+, 58+ 95, 98, 128+, and 130, for track-circuit systems.

    35,     36, 37, 42, and 43, for propulsion-current superimposed upon
    track-circuits.


CLS 246/62
TXT Systems under subclass 28 in which means are provided for actuating
    traffic-control devices upon the cab or train.

    (1)     Note.  The use of fluid-pressure means upon the cab or train for
    operating or controlling brake and throttle valves or electrical
    controllers or for operating brakes and audible or visual signals is not
    considered as combined fluid-pressure and electric in the sense of subclass
    93, and therefore systems using such means have been herein included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7+,     for systems which disclose or claim means for the telegraphic or
    telephonic transmission of written matter or speech.

    31,     for automatic-stop systems in which electrical propulsion-current
    is cut out from trolly-wire or third-rail sections.

    167+,   and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for cab and control features.


CLS 246/63
TXT Systems under subclass 62 in which an inductive relation is established
    between the train and the line, no physical connection being maintained
    between them.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8       and 194, for inductive systems.

    167+,   and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for cab and control features.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for the structure of
    transformers and inductive reactors.


CLS 246/64
TXT Systems under subclass 62 in which the source of current is a battery or
    dynamo placed upon the train.

    (1)     Note.  Systems in which train-batteries actuate local
    train-circuits or supply current used for purposes other than signal
    actuation or control are not here included, but will be found in the
    appropriate line-battery classes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86,     for train-battery systems from which the cab and control feature is
    absent.

    167+,   and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for cab and control features.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclasses 279+, for devices for cleaning ice, snow and
    dirt from continuous and intermittent electrical contacts.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 9.1+
    for electrical systems mounted on a vehicle.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, appropriate subclasses, for
    miscellaneous single-generator systems. See subclass 1 for portably mounted
    single-generator systems.


CLS 246/65
TXT Systems under subclass 64 in which continuous contacts are maintained by
    shoes, brushes, and their equivalents between two or more metallic
    conductors extending parallel to the track.  The traction-rails may or may
    not form part of the circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9+,     66-68, 73, and 86, for continuous- contact systems.

    167+,   and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for cab control and features.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, appropriate subclasses, for
    details of the electric conductors and collectors.


CLS 246/66
TXT Systems under subclass 65 in which the continuous-contact rails, the
    traction-rails, or both, are divided into sections or blocks insulated from
    each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9+,     65, 67, 68, 73, and 86, for continuous- contact systems.

    167+,   and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for cab and control features.


CLS 246/67
TXT Systems under subclass 64 in which a single continuous contact is
    maintained by shoes, brushes, or other equivalents between the moving
    vehicle and a metallic conductor extending parallel with the track.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9+,     65, 66, 68, 73, and 86, for continuous- contact systems.

    167+,   and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for cab and control features.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, appropriate subclasses, for
    details of the electric conductors and collectors.


CLS 246/68
TXT Systems under subclass 67 in which the conductor, the traction-rails, or
    both, are divided into sections or blocks insulated from each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10      and 71, for traction-rail return.

    66,     for two or more independent single-continuous-contact-sectional
    systems upon the same train, the same being, in effect, mere duplications
    of systems otherwise properly classifiable in this subclass.

    167+,   and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for cab and control features.


CLS 246/69
TXT Systems under subclass 64 in which the train-current passes out by or
    returns through the medium of one or more intermittent contacts or
    "ramp-rails", so-called.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     56, 70, 71, 74, 85, 92, 122, 195, 229, 233, 234, and 235, for
    intermittent- contact systems from which cab and control features are
    absent.

    167+,   and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for cab and control features.


CLS 246/70
TXT Systems under subclass 69 in which the traction-rails form part of the
    circuit, the current passing through them in both directions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     56, 69, 74, 85, 92, 122, 195, 229, 233, 234, and 235, for
    intermittent-contact systems from which cab and control features are absent.


CLS 246/71
TXT Systems under subclass 69 in which the traction-rails form part of the
    circuit, the current passing through them in one direction only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     56, 69, 70, 85, 92, 122, 195, 229, 233, 234, and 235, for
    intermittent-contact systems from which cab and control features are absent.


CLS 246/72
TXT Systems under subclass 62 in which the electrical energy is derived from
    the propulsion-current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81+,    for propulsion-current signaling.

    167+,   and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for cab and control features.


CLS 246/73
TXT Systems under subclass 62 in which the current is conducted from the track
    through the cab or car by means of a continuous contact maintained with one
    or more line conductors, not traction-rails, for the major portion of the
    block.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9+,     65+, 67+, and 87, for continuous-contact systems.

    167+,   and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for cab and control features.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclasses 279+, for devices for cleaning ice, snow, and
    dirt from continuous and intermittent electrical contacts.

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, appropriate subclasses, for
    details of the electric conductors and collectors.


CLS 246/74
TXT Systems under subclass 62 in which the current is conducted from the track
    through the cab or car by means of intermittent contacts, periodically
    established, with contact-plates, ramp-rails, or similar devices other than
    traction-rails.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     69, 70, 71, 85, 92, 195, 229, 233, 234, and 235, for systems with
    intermittent contacts from which cab signal and train-control features are
    absent.

    167+,   and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for cab and control features.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclasses 279+ for devices for cleaning ice, snow and
    dirt from continuous and intermittent electrical contacts.


CLS 246/75
TXT Systems under subclass 62 in which an electrical circuit upon the train,
    normally closed through the track rail or rails, is broken by the passage
    of the car over one or more insulated rail-joints, the break in the rails
    being electrically closed under conditions of safety.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     57 and 179, for systems disclosing bridged-insulated rail-joints or
    analogous features.


CLS 246/76
TXT Systems under subclass 62 includes electrically-actuated track-detents or
    obstacles mechanically actuate mechanism on moving trains, such as
    brake-valves, levers, circuit-closers, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167+,   and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for track-detents used in various systems of block, frequently for
    actuating the cab and control mechanism.

    201+,   for the structure of the track-detent.


CLS 246/77
TXT Counting and cancelling mechanism under subclass 28, usually of the
    step-by-step variety, is provided, whereby as many trains or car-wheels as
    enter must leave the block before the signal can be restored to safety.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     72, 81, and 247, for systems using propulsion-current, but lacking
    counting and canceling devices.

    19,     78+ and 247, for counting mechanism.

    246+,   and subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto, for
    various types of circuit-controllers.


CLS 246/78
TXT Subject matter under subclass 77 having ratchet-wheels which are actuated
    and controlled by pawls or escapements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     72, 77+, and 247, for details of the counting and canceling devices.


CLS 246/79
TXT Subject matter under subclass 78 having a single ratchet-wheel which is
    actuated by two opposed pawls moving in the same plane and tending to turn
    it in opposite directions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     72, 77+, and 247, for details of the counting and canceling devices.


CLS 246/80
TXT Subject matter under subclass 79 having two ratchet-wheels which are placed
    in parallel on the same arbor or a single wheel having two sets of teeth in
    parallel is actuated by opposed pawls to produce rotation in opposite
    directions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     72, 77+, and 247, for details of the counting and canceling devices.


CLS 246/81
TXT Subject matter under subclass 28 having the propulsion-current used to
    actuate or control the signals of the block.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for propulsion-current signaling.


CLS 246/82
TXT Subject matter under subclass 81 having one or more circuit-controllers
    continuously rotated in one direction, which are actuated either
    electrically or mechanically, but which do not perform a counting and
    canceling function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246+,   and the subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto
    for various types of circuit-controllers.


CLS 246/83
TXT Subject matter under subclass 81 in which circuit-controllers are provided
    which are mechanically actuated by the moving car.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     77, and appropriate indented subclasses, and 81, for systems making
    use of propulsion-current.

    246+,   and the subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for the structure of the controller.


CLS 246/84
TXT Subject matter under subclass 83 having circuit-controllers actuated by the
    trolley-arm plow or other current-collector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     77, and appropriate indented subclasses, and 81, for systems making
    use of propulsion-current.


CLS 246/85
TXT Subject matter under subclass 81 having traffic-controlling devices
    actuated or controlled by circuits closed through intermittent contacts
    established between the moving vehicle and stationary conductors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     69, 74, 92, and 195, for systems using intermittent contacts.

    77+,    for systems making use of the propulsion-current.

    229,    233, 234+, 254, and 255, for structure of such contacts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclasses 279+, for devices for cleaning ice, snow, and
    dirt from continuous and intermittent electrical contacts.


CLS 246/86
TXT Systems under subclass 28 in which the source of the current is carried
    upon the train.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9+,     65, 68, and 73, for continuous-contact systems.

    64+,    for train-current-supply systems.


CLS 246/87
TXT Systems under subclass 28 in which the source of the current is not carried
    on the train.


CLS 246/88
TXT Systems under subclass 87 in which a plurality of signals, usually electric
    lamps, are displayed within the block.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246+,   and the subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for various types of circuit-controllers.


CLS 246/89
TXT Systems under subclass 87 in which the circuit for actuating or controlling
    the signals is opened of closed by car-wheels bridging two short parallel
    insulated track-sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129,    for short-sectional-rail-closure systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclasses 279+, for devices for cleaning ice, snow and
    dirt from continuous and intermittent electrical contacts.


CLS 246/90
TXT Systems under subclass 87 in which the circuit for actuating or controlling
    the signals is opened or closed by controllers actuated by the energy of
    the moving train.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246+,   and the subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for various types of circuit-controllers.


CLS 246/91
TXT Systems under subclass 90 in which the car-actuated controllers governs the
    action of one or more controllers of other circuits, which perform the
    function of a relay.


CLS 246/92
TXT Systems under subclass 87 in which the circuit is closed by devices carried
    by the train, which make electrical connection with short rails,
    contact-plates, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     56, 69, 70, 71, 74, 85, 195, 229, 233, 234, 235, and 254, for
    intermittent- contact systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclasses 279+, for devices for cleaning ice, snow and
    dirt from continuous and intermittent electrical contacts.


CLS 246/93
TXT Subject matter under subclass 27 having electrical and fluid-pressure means
    used in combination for the actuation and control of roadway-signals,
    track-detents, contacts, and similar devices, irrespective of the means
    employed upon the train for actuating the cab and control mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140+,   for interlocking mechanism actuated by electric fluid-pressure
    means.

    257+,   and the subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for fluid-pressure-motor structure.

    258     and 259, for electric fluid-pressure motors for actuating switches
    and signals generally.


CLS 246/94
TXT Subject matter under subclass 93 in which means are provided for actuating
    signals upon the train or for stopping it or controlling its speed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140     and 141, for interlocking mechanism actuated by electric
    fluid-pressure means.

    167+,   and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for cab and control features.

    257+,   and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for fluid-pressure-motor structure.

    258     and 259, for electric fluid-pressure motors for actuating switches
    and signals generally.


CLS 246/95
TXT Systems under subclass 93 which are controlled through track-circuits.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     34+, 41+, 58+, 70, 94, 98, 128, 129, and 130, for track-circuit
    control.

    257+,   and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for fluid-pressure-motor structure.


CLS 246/96
TXT Subject matter under subclass 27 having electrical and mechanical means
    used in combination for the actuation and control of roadway-signals,
    detents, and other track devices, irrespective of any means employed upon
    the train for actuating cab and control mechanism.  The mechanical means
    may or may not utilize the energy of the moving vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97      through 99 and 263, for electromechanical systems.

    102,    103 and 262, for mechanical-motor systems.


CLS 246/97
TXT Subject matter under subclass 96 having means provided for actuating
    audible or visible signals upon the car or train or for stopping it or
    controlling its speed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     98, 99, and 263, for electromechanical systems.

    102,    103 and 262, for mechanical-motor systems.

    167+,   and subclasses specified in the notes thereto for cab and control
    features.


CLS 246/98
TXT Subject matter under subclass 96 having track circuits to control the
    traffic-controlling devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     34+, 41+, 58+, 70, 95, 128, 129, 130, and 160, for the control of
    signals through track-circuits.

    96+     and 263, for the electromechanical actuation of signals.

    102,    103 and 262, for mechanical-motor systems.


CLS 246/99
TXT Subject matter under subclass 96 having clockwork or similar trains of
    gearing which are made use of and are provided with electrically-actuated
    escapement or latch-release devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     97, 98, and 263, for mechanical switch and signal motors
    electrically controlled.

    102,    103 and 262, for mechanical-motor systems.

    110     and 262+, for signals actuated by clockwork.


CLS 246/100
TXT Subject matter under subclass 27 having fluid-pressure means used for
    actuating and controlling roadway-signals, detents, and other track
    devices, irrespective of the means employed upon the train for actuating
    the cab and control mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93+,    116, 139, 142, 257+, and 361, for fluid-pressure actuation of
    signals.

    140,    141, 258, and 259, for electrically-controlled, for fluid pressure
    actuation of signals.

    257,    see search notes appended thereto, for fluid-pressure structure.


CLS 246/101
TXT Subject matter under subclass 100 having means provided for actuating
    audible or visible signals upon the cab or train or for stopping it or
    controlling its speed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167+,   and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for cab and control features.

    257+,   and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for fluid-pressure-motor structure.


CLS 246/102
TXT Subject matter under subclass 27 having roadway-signals, detents, and other
    track devices actuated and controlled solely by mechanical means, usually
    involving direct contact with the moving train or some device attached
    thereto, and irrespective of the means employed upon the train, if any, for
    actuating the cab and control mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    113 and 262, for mechanical systems.

    201+,   for the track-detent.


CLS 246/103
TXT Subject matter under subclass 102 having means provided for actuating
    audible or visible signals upon the cab or train or for stopping it or
    controlling its speed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102+,   and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for mechanical-motor systems.

    167+,   and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for cab and control features.


CLS 246/104
TXT Subject matter under subclass 20 having traffic-controlling devices
    actuated either by manual power or by manually-controlled power mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  So-called "manual-block systems" are here included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     and appropriate indented subclasses, for systems of manual
    actuation in combination with automatic signals.

    112     and 117, for manual systems at grade-crossing.

    118     and 119, for manual systems at draw-bridges.

    143     through 158, for manual systems of interlocking.


CLS 246/105
TXT Subject matter under subclass 104 having signals either actuated or
    controlled by electric means or having electricity used for performing some
    function other than transmitting telephonic or code messages to the
    signalmen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22+,    for electromanual systems automatically controled by the trains or
    cars.

    104,    for systems which are otherwise manual and which use electrical
    means for the purposes of communication between signalmen in cabins.  Also
    see search notes appended thereto.


CLS 246/106
TXT Subject matter under subclass 105 having a signal which cannot be cleared
    at one end of the block until it has been electrically unlocked by the
    operator at the other end.

    (1)     Note.  The so-called "manual lock and block systems" are here
    included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     26 and 131+, for locking features.


CLS 246/107
TXT Subject matter under subclasss 20 having devices which are used for
    permanently recording the movements of trains, signals, or other movable
    units or indicating the disregard of signals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123     and 185, for recording systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, appropriate subclasses for recorder structure.


CLS 246/108
TXT Systems and devices under the class definition which include means for
    giving a time indication concerning trains which have previously passed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109,    110 and 123, for time-indication systems.


CLS 246/109
TXT Systems and devices under subclass 108 in which the retarded flow of gases,
    liquids, or finely-divided particles of solids is utilized for giving the
    time indication.


CLS 246/110
TXT Systems and devices under subclass 108 in which a visual indicator set by
    the last train which passed is suddenly obscured or reset at the expiration
    of a predetermined time-limit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     98, 102, 108, 109, 248, and 262, for systems and devices more or
    less analogous.


CLS 246/111
TXT Systems and devices under the class definition which include any
    arrangement of train-controlling means--such as signals, derails,
    interlocking, automatic stops, etc., --designed to prevent collisions where
    two or more lines of railway cross at grade.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118,    for similar systems used at drawbridges.

    125,    260, 293, and 473, and appropriate indented subclasses for signal
    structure.

    465,    and the subclasses indicated in the search notes appended thereto,
    for the structure of the crossing.


CLS 246/112
TXT Subject matter under subclass 111 in which the train automatically
    cooperates with human agency in the actuation or control of the traffic
    devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21+,    for semi-automatic block-signaling systems.

    111,    125, 260, 293, and 473, and appropriate indented subclasses for
    signal structure.


CLS 246/113
TXT Subject matter under subclass 111 having means actuated or controlled
    automatically by the approaching train and without the intervention of
    human agency.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     27 and 125+, which have automatic actuation or control of the type
    required, for systems of automatic actuation and control.

    111,    125, 260, 293, and 473, and appropriate indented subclasses for
    signal structure.

    118,    for drawbridge protection is general.


CLS 246/114
TXT Subject matter under subclass 113 having electric means for the actuation
    or control of the traffic-controlling devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111,    125, 260, 293, and 473, and appropriate indented subclasses, for
    signal structure.


CLS 246/115
TXT Subject matter under subclass 114 having means provided for giving
    indications upon the train or for stopping it or controlling its speed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167+,   and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for cab and control features.


CLS 246/116
TXT Subject matter under subclass 113 having fluid-pressure means for the
    actuation or control of the signals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93,     100, 101, 139, 142, 257, 271, 272, and 361, for systems using
    fluid-pressure means.

    111,    125, 260, 293, and 473, and appropriate indented subclasses, for
    signal structure.


CLS 246/117
TXT Subject matter under subclass 111 having means provided for actuating
    audible or visual signals upon the cab or train or for stopping it or
    controlling its speed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167+    and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for cab and control features.


CLS 246/118
TXT System of train-controlling means under the class definition designed to
    prevent trains and cars from running into an open drawbridge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111+,   for analogous systems of grade crossing protection.

    125,    260, 293, and 473, and appropriate indented subclasses for signal
    structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    14,     Bridges, subclasses 30, 41, 46, 55, 57, 59, 61, 63, 65, 67, and 69,
    for bridges having movable parts such as drawbridges and having locking
    devices and 49 and 50+ for gates and signals operated or controlled by the
    opening of the bridge.


CLS 246/119
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 having means provided for actuating
    signals on approaching trains or for stopping them or controlling their
    motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167+    and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for cab and control features.


CLS 246/120
TXT Subject matter under the class definition having signals, indicators, and
    train-controlling devices which are automatically set at "danger" by the
    occurrence of any defect in the permanent way, including bridges.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111+,   118 and 220, for analogous systems.


CLS 246/121
TXT Subject matter under subclass 120 having roadway-defect signals which are
    actuated or controlled by electrical means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246+,   and appropriate subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended
    thereto, for structure of the circuit-controllers.

    473+,   and appropriate subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended
    thereto, for signal structure.


CLS 246/122
TXT Systems and devices under the class definition in which the train
    automatically indicates its position upon the line as by lights,
    indicators, moving diagrams, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous
    nonelectrical signals.

    235,    Registers, appropriate subclasses for registering apparatus and
    systems.


CLS 246/123
TXT Systems under subclass 122 in which a permanent record is automatically
    made at a distant station of the time at which a train passes a given point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      5 and 108+, for automatic-signal or time indication.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, appropriate subclass.


CLS 246/124
TXT Systems under subclass 122 in which an audible or visual indication is
    given, usually in a tower or station, of the approach of a train, and in
    some cases also of its number, its intended route, or other necessary
    information.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    162 and 220, for switch and block-system signal indicators or
    recorders.


CLS 246/125
TXT Systems under the class definition in which highway-crossing signals,
    gates, and mine-doors are actuated or controlled from the moving train or
    vehicle by electrical means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111,    260, 293, and 473, and appropriate indented subclasses for signal
    structure.

    221,    and the appropriate indented subclasses, for the electric actuation
    of switches and signals other than those used at highway-crossing.

    246+,   and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for various types of circuit-controllers.

    261     and 272, for gate structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, appropriate subclasses, for closures
    (gates) and closure-actuating mechanism.


CLS 246/126
TXT Subject matter under subclass 125 having car-actuated circuit-controllers
    located on the right of way.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto for various types
    of circuit-controllers.

    246+,   253 and 255, for systems using circuit-controllers.


CLS 246/127
TXT Subject matter under subclass 126 where the actuated devices are either
    crossing-gates, mine-doors, or curtains.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111,    125, 260, 293, and 473, and appropriate indented subclasses for
    signal structure.


CLS 246/128
TXT Subject matter under subclass 125 where the primary or controlling
    track-circuit is normally open.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58+,    for systems of open-track-circuit control.

    111,    125, 260, 293, and 473, and appropriate indented subclasses, for
    signal structure.


CLS 246/129
TXT Subject matter under subclass 128 where an open circuit is closed by the
    car-wheels bridging two short parallel insulated sections of the
    traction-rails.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89,     for systems using short sectional rail-closures.

    111,    125, 260, 293, and 473, and appropriate indented subclasses, for
    signal structure.


CLS 246/130
TXT Subject matter under subclass 125 where the controlling track-circuit is
    normally closed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     41, and appropriate indented subclasses, and 98, for normally
    closed track-circuits.

    111,    125, 260, 293, and 473, and appropriate indented subclasses, for
    signal structure.


CLS 246/131
TXT Subject matter under class definition having means for actuating switches,
    signals, locks, derails, and similar independently-movable units of this
    class in such manner as to insure predetermined sequences of operation so
    far as they may be needed to restrain the movement of all other devices
    which, if actuated, would give rise to a condition of danger.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     26 and 106, for locking in connection with block systems.

    253,    for switch or signal actuated controllers in which a plurality of
    circuits are closed or broken by the movement of the switch or signal and
    in which a predetermined sequence of operations is sometimes provided for.

    401,    for switch stands having rail lock and position indicating means.


CLS 246/132
TXT Subject matter under subclass 131 where electrical means are provided for
    actuating the movable units.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     28, 93, 96, 105, 114, 121, 125, 193, 202, 220, and 221, and
    appropriate indented subclasses, for the electric actuation of signals.


CLS 246/133
TXT Subject matter under subclass 132 having electrical means provided for
    actuating the locks.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     19, 25, 26, 106, 130, and 146, and appropriate indented subclasses
    under subclass 131, for various types of interlocking.


CLS 246/134
TXT Subject matter under subclass 133 in which a definite route or itinerary is
    set up through a system of tracks by a smaller number of actuating levers
    or devices than would usually be required.

    (1)     Note.  The term "program-locking" is sometimes applied to this
    system in foreign practice.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155,    156 and 157, for rod-saving devices.


CLS 246/135
TXT Subject matter under subclass 133 in which the actuating lever or device is
    prevented by electric locks from completing its movement, and from thereby
    releasing the other devices which it controls, until the actuated unit is
    in full normal or reversed position, whereupon a return-release-indication
    current is sent back, unlocking the actuating-lever and either effecting or
    permitting the completion of its movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137,    138, 141, and 142, for return-release-indication.

    222,    for return-indication-current generation.


CLS 246/136
TXT Subject matter under subclass 132 in which the locking is effected by
    mechanical connections between the actuating levers or devices.

    (1)     Note.  This type of interlocking is known to the Railway Signal
    Association by the title "electromechanical interlocking".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147,    and appropriate indented subclasses for mechanical locking.


CLS 246/137
TXT Subject matter under subclass 136 in which the actuating lever or device is
    prevented by electric locks from completing its movement, and from thereby
    unlocking the other devices which it controls, until the actuated unit is
    in full normal or reverse position, whereupon a return-release-indication
    current is sent back, unlocking the actuating-lever and permitting or
    effecting the completion of its movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135,    138, 141, and 142, for return-release-indication.

    222,    for return-indication-current generation.


CLS 246/138
TXT Subject matter under subclass 137 in which the release-locking is applied
    to sliding members which actuate the circuit-closers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135,    137, 141, and 142, for return-release indication.

    222,    for return-indication-current generation.


CLS 246/139
TXT Subject matter under subclass 131 in which fluid-pressure means are used
    for actuating the movable units.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93,     100, 101, 116, 257, 271, 272, and 361+, for systems using
    fluid-pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 399 for a fluid- pressure actuator of
    general utility in which unsafeness, unreadiness or disarray prevents a
    manual change in the operative state of the system.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclasses, for the
    structure of the motor.

    188,    Brakes, subclass 153, for fluid-pressure-operated brakes applied to
    rail vehicles.

    303,    Fluid-Pressure and Analogous  Brake System, appropriate subclasses,
    for systems for distributing fluid to brake motors.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclasses, for
    rotary expansible-chamber devices, per se.


CLS 246/140
TXT Subject matter under subclass 139 in which the units are actuated by
    electrically-controlled fluid-pressure means.

    (1)     Note.  This type is known to the Railway Signal Association as
    "electro pneumatic interlocking".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93,     94, 95, 258, and 259, for electro-fluid-pressure systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    303,    Fluid-Pressure and Analogous  Brake System, subclasses 15+, and 20
    for railway-brakes actuated by electrically-controlled fluid-pressure means.


CLS 246/141
TXT Subject matter under subclass 140 in which the actuating lever or device is
    prevented by electric locks from completing its movement and thereby
    unlocking the other device which it controls, until the actuated unit is in
    full normal or reverse position, whereupon a return-release-indication
    current is sent back, unlocking the actuating-lever and permitting or
    effecting the completion of its movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135,    137, 138, and 142, for return-release indication.

    222,    for return-indication-current generation.

    257,    see search notes appended thereto, for fluid-pressure-motor
    structure.


CLS 246/142
TXT Subject matter under subclass 139 in which the actuating lever or device is
    prevented by electric locks from completing its movement, and from thereby
    unlocking the other devices which it controls, until the actuated unit is
    in full normal or reversed position, whereupon a return-release indication
    current is sent back, unlocking the actuating-lever and permitting or
    effecting the completion of its movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135,    137, 138, and 141, for return-release indication.

    222,    for return-indication-current generation.

    257,    see the search notes appended thereto, for fluid-pressure-motor
    structure.


CLS 246/143
TXT Subject matter under subclass 131 in which units are actuated by manual
    power transmitted from the signal-cabin by rods or cables.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111     through 119, for manual interlocking at grade-crossings, and
    drawbridges.

    144     and 145, for interlocked switchstands.

    393+,   for devices located at switches for their manual actuation.

    489,    for miscellaneous mechanism for manually operating switches or
    signals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 469+ for miscellaneous
    control lever and linkage systems.


CLS 246/144
TXT Subject matter under subclass 131 having switch-stands where the signal and
    switch do not move simultaneously, but independently, in a prearranged
    sequence of operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111     through 119, for manual interlocking at grade-crossings and
    drawbridges.

    278,    284, 290, and 393, and the appropriate indented subclasses, for
    switch-stand structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 483 for mechanism for the
    interlocking of two or more levers or cranks.


CLS 246/145
TXT Subject matter under subclass 144 in which the switch stands are provided
    with separate levers for the switch and the target or signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278,    284, 290, and 393+, for switch-stand structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 483 for mechanism for the
    interlocking of two or more levers or cranks.


CLS 246/146
TXT Subject matter under subclass 143 in which the locking mechanism is
    effected by electrical means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     19, 25+, 106, 133+, 139, 159, and 165, for details of electric
    locking.


CLS 246/147
TXT Subject matter under subclass 143 in which the locking mechanism is
    effected by mechanical connections between the operating levers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    112, 113, 116, 117, 118+, 131, 132, 136+, 139, 142, 144+, 156, 160,
    and 164, for details of mechanical locking.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 519+, and 543+, for
    details of hand-levers secured to quandrants by hand-actuated latches.


CLS 246/148
TXT Subject matter under subclass 147 in which the actuation of the
    quandrant-latch or its equivalent completely actuates the locking mechanism
    before the lever can begin its movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136,    139 and 140, for various types of interlocking.


CLS 246/149
TXT Subject matter under subclass 148 in which a parallel system of
    tappet-rods, each directly connected to an operating-lever, cooperates with
    tappets in actuating a parallel system of locking-rods moving at right
    angles thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150,    for tappet-interlocking.


CLS 246/150
TXT Subject matter under subclass 147 having locking and unlocking mechanism in
    which the locking and unlocking is performed by the motion of the lever
    itself instead of by the motion of its latch, a system of parallel
    tappet-rods cooperating, through tappets, with a system of parallel
    locking-rods moving at right angles thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149,    for tappet-interlocking.


CLS 246/151
TXT Subject matter under subclass 147 having devices by which any attempt to
    unlock and shift a switch, signal, or other movable unit of an interlocking
    plant is restrained by the contact, with one or more wheels of a passing
    car, of a movable bar longer than the greatest distance between such wheels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     102, 112, 113, 158, 203, 304+, 310, 311, 313, and 358, for devices
    of similar structure.


CLS 246/152
TXT Subject matter under subclass 147 having devices for compensating for the
    expansion and contraction of wires, rods and similar connections used
    between signals, switches, etc., and their operating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 111+ for details of
    intermittent-grip devices, and subclass 501.5 for
    constant-tension-sustaining devices for flexible cable operators.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclass 182 for
    compensation devices used with pendulums.


CLS 246/153
TXT Subject matter under subclass 152 having compensators in which the slack is
    taken up by means of one or more counterweights.


CLS 246/154
TXT Subject matter under subclass 153 having counterweight-compensators in
    which the actuating-lever is normally detached from the connecting cable or
    rod and connected therewith by grip devices only during the period of
    actuation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 111+, for details of
    intermittent-grip devices.


CLS 246/155
TXT Subject matter under subclass 147 having devices used in the mechanical
    actuation of switches and signals, whereby the functions of several
    connecting-rods are performed by a smaller number of rods.


CLS 246/156
TXT Subject matter under subclass 155 having devices for connecting single
    operating-levers, wheels, etc., with any one of two or more rods, cables,
    or operating devices used for actuating swtiches, signals,
    derailing-blocks, and other movable units of the class.

    (1)     Note.  Selectors are often used in connection with so-called
    "route-indicators."

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      157, 164, and 165, for selective mechanism.


CLS 246/157
TXT Subject matter under subclass 156 actuated or controlled by electrical
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      156, 164, and 165, for selective mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825+ for electric
    selective-signaling systems of general application.


CLS 246/158
TXT Subject matter under subclass 155 having rod-saving devices whereby the
    movement of one lever both actuates the switch and also either locks it,
    indicates or detects its motion, shifts a detector or locking bar, or
    performs both of these additional functions.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes most of the so-called "detectors" and
    "point-locks" of English inter locking practice.


CLS 246/159
TXT Subject matter under subclass 131 having mechanism spatially separated from
    but interlocked with the mechanism of the central tower and usually located
    near switches and signals, whereby they can be shifted by others than the
    tower operator, provided the conditions are safe for such movement, in
    which case the full protection of the entire interlocking system is
    afforded until the switches and signals are properly replaced.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes the so-called "Annette's key" and
    similar movable devices and also what is known as "check-locking", whereby
    the levers in two adjacent interlocking plants are so interlocked
    temporarily as to permit train movements between them to be made safely
    against the current of traffic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for staff and tablet block systems.

    131,    and appropriate indented subclasses.

    160,    for systems having means to lock the switch or signal in position
    upon the approach of a train.


CLS 246/160
TXT Systems, mostly electric, under subclass 131, wherein upon the approach of
    a train to the switch or signal the switches, signals, or other movable
    elements are automatically locked in position.

    (1)     Note.  The systems in this subclass are sometimes referred to in
    the art under the term "electric detectors".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25+,    for semi-automatic electro manual lock-and-block signal systems.

    106,    for manually controlled electrically actuated lock-and-block
    signaling systems.


CLS 246/161
TXT Subject matter under subclass 131 having mechanism for preventing the
    reversal of a switch or signal movement until after the lapse of a definite
    interval of time.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclasses 267-274, for mechanically or
    electrically-operated time-interval controlled locks.


CLS 246/162
TXT Subject matter under subclass 131 having devices for indicating the
    position or motion of a distant switch, signal, or similar movable element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    124, 135, 137, 141, 142, 162, 176, 217, 220, 253, and 476, for
    other switches and signals provided with indicating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825+ for electric
    selective-signaling systems of general application, subclass 298 for signal
    box type signaling systems having answer back provision, and subclasses
    313+ for answer-back-electric signaling systems.

    346,    Recorders, appropriate subclasses for recorder systems and
    recorders.


CLS 246/163
TXT Blocks or similar movable devices under subclass 131 which can be placed
    upon or near the track for derailing such trains as disregard a signal.

    (1)     Note.  Switches used as details in place of derailing-blocks are
    classified under the specific type of switch unless accompanied by
    operating mechanism especially adapted for actuating them as derails, in
    which case they are classified here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclasses 262+, for devices for replacing car wheels on
    the rails when they have been derailed.


CLS 246/164
TXT Subject matter under class definition including devices which require the
    cooperation of two or more operators or moving elements for effecting a
    movement, as in clearing a signal, while any one of them can independently
    effect the reverse movement, as setting it to "danger". Includes
    "replacers" and "reversers", so-called, and coupling devices for
    disconnecting signals, switches, etc., from their operating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      156, 157, 165, for selective mechanisms.


CLS 246/165
TXT Subject matter under subclass 164 which is electrically controlled in whole
    or in part.


CLS 246/166
TXT Subject matter under the class definition having pilot-cars and compression
    buffers in front of a train or car or designed to run ahead or behind the
    train and provided with means for operating signals upon the train,
    stopping it, controlling its motion, or signaling danger to other
    approaching cars or trains.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    213,    Railway Draft Appliances, subclasses 220+ for buffer structure for
    railway trains.


CLS 246/166.1
TXT SIGNALLING BETWEEN OCCUPANTS OF A TRAIN:

    Subject matter under the class definition including systems which permit a
    conductor, or other occupant, of a car or train to signal or communicate
    with the engineer, or another occupant, along the car or train.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7+,     for railroad-telephony systems utilized for dispatching.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communications, appropriate subclasses for telephonic
    communication systems which may be used for communication along a train.


CLS 246/167
TXT Subject matter under the class definition for the automatic actuation of
    signals and changeable exhibitors upon the cab or train or for stopping it
    or controlling its speed, usually by cooperation with means not on the
    train, but not disclosing a complete block system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes cooperating devices on both roadway
    and train, (the former including the traction-rail itself, when so used);
    but where all devices are located on the train this subclass and the
    indented subclasses are limited to means for preventing railway accidents
    by automatic signals or train control in cases of derailment, broken parts,
    improperly-adjusted parts, etc; ordinary signaling between train occupants
    or train control exercised by train occupants being excluded.  Such
    signaling will be found in the appropriate subclasses of Class 116, Signals
    and Indicators, and in this class (246), subclass 166.1.

    (2)     Note.  For similar train control or cab- signaling devices in
    combination with block-signal systems see "Cab and control" subclasses
    under the preceding types of block-signal systems.

    (3)     Note.  For motor control automatically exercised by the speed of
    the vehicle and without cooperating with track devices or axle-driven
    mechanism search the specific motor classes--e.g., 91, Motors:  Expansible
    Chamber Type, 318, Electricity:  Motive Power Systems.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      6, 23, 47 to 49, 55 to 57, 59, 62 to 76, 94  to 97, 101, 103, 115,
    117, 119, and 394, for cab signal or train control.

    7,      and appropriate indented subclasses, for telegraphic or telephonic
    communication between the train and a roadway-office or other point not on
    the train.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 370 and 463+ for
    changeable exhibitors on the train electrically actuated or controlled by
    obstacles upon the track.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type.  (See (3) Note).

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 28 for nonelectric means of
    communication between occupants of the train or vehicle. (Also see (1)
    Note).

    178,    Telegraphy, and 379, Telephonic Communications, appropriate
    subclasses for electrical means of communication between occupants of the
    train or vehicle.

    293,    Vehicle Fenders, subclasses 5, 6 and 7.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems (see (3) Note).

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, appropriate subclasses.

    379,    Telephonic Communications.  (See Class 178 above).

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    82+ for a public-address system for a train, and subclass 86 for other
    electrical one-way audio signal transmission in a train.


CLS 246/168
TXT Subject matter under subclass 167 designed for avoiding accidents by the
    use of automatic train-signals or train control when trains part through
    the breaking or uncoupling of the couplers.

    (1)     Note.  Most of the train-signal systems of Class 116, Signals and
    Indicators and Class 340, Communications:  Electrical, will incidentally
    give a signal upon the parting of a train, but even when a different kind
    of audible signal is given upon such parting from the signal given in the
    ordinary use of Class 116 or Class 340 devices, the systems are placed in
    those signaling classes and not here included unless there is some special
    modification of the mechanism for actuating this different kind of signal.
    Also when a train parts, brakes are usually automatically applied by the
    discharge of train-pipe pressure; but unless some special modification of
    the system is made, i.e., as when the brakes are applied on the rear and
    not on the front portion of the train, the devices are classified in the
    appropriate subclasses of Class 188, Brakes, and Class 303, Fluid-Pressure
    and Analogous  Brake System, and not here included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto, for
    other systems having cab and control features.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators.  (See Note 1).

    188,    Brakes.  (See Note 1).

    303,    Fluid-Pressure and Analogous  Brake System.  (See Note 1).

    340,    Communications:  Electrical.  (See (1)  Note).


CLS 246/168.1
TXT Wheel slip:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 including means for generating a cab.


CLS 246/169
TXT Subject matter under subclass 167 having means automatically actuated by
    defects in or breakage of parts of the rolling-stock or by improper
    adjustment of appliances, which are liable to cause disaster, such as
    broken wheel-flanges, fallen brake-beams, defects in running-gear and brake
    systems, improper coupling of air-brake pipes, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for other systems having cab and control features.


CLS 246/170
TXT Subject matter under subclass 167 having means actuated by the derailment
    of one or more wheels of the train.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for other systems having cab and control features.


CLS 246/171
TXT Subject matter under subclass 170 having a trip which on derailment comes
    into contact with the road-bed or traction-rail.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for cab and control features.


CLS 246/172
TXT Subject matter under subclass 171 having a frangible closure for the
    train-pipe of an airbrake system, broken upon derailment or other condition
    of danger, usually by contact with the roadway, whereby the brakes are
    automatically applied.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for cab and control features.

    199,    for other subject matter under subclass 167 having a frangible
    closure for the train-pipe.


CLS 246/173
TXT Subject matter under subclass 170 where the control is effected by the
    inertia of the trip, as when the vehicle is severely jolted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for cab and control features.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 52 for inertia
    operated switches.


CLS 246/174
TXT Subject matter under subclass 167 having a signal, bell or whistle, which
    is automatically sounded upon the train as it approaches the
    high-way-crossing, station, tunnel, curve, or other place for which a
    signal should be given.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for cab and control features.


CLS 246/175
TXT Subject matter under subclass 174, the signal consists of a succession of
    long and short whistle-blasts or their equivalent, resembling a letter of
    the Morse telegraphic code.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for cab and control features.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 79+ for telegraph-code transmitters.


CLS 246/176
TXT Subject matter under subclass 167 having switches provided with means
    whereby signals are given upon the approaching train or the train is
    stopped or its speed controlled when the switch is in a dangerous position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for cab and control features.


CLS 246/177
TXT Subject matter under subclass 167 where the actuation of the cab signal or
    train-control devices is automatically prevented under prearranged
    conditions, for the most part those of safety, having been previously
    initiated by automatic means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for cab and control features.


CLS 246/178
TXT Subject matter under subclass 177 where the control devices are of an
    electric or magnetic nature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for cab and control features.


CLS 246/179
TXT Subject matter under subclass 178 having control devices whose actuation is
    initiated by an electric circuit on the train normally closed through the
    track-rails and which is broken by the passage of the train over one or
    more insulated rail-joints placed at the point of initiation and which are
    electrically bridged or connected when the cab signal or train-control
    mechanism is not to be actuated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     57 and 75, for the insulated-rail-joint feature.

    167,    and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes thereto appended,
    for cab and control features.


CLS 246/180
TXT Subject matter under subclass 178 having control devices whose actuation is
    initiated by breaking a normally closed circuit placed on the train, which
    contains a circuit-controller actuated by contact with track-trips at the
    point of initiation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for cab and control features.

    246,    and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for various types of circuit-controllers.


CLS 246/181
TXT Subject matter under subclass 178 having control devices whose actuation is
    initiated by mechanical means, such as track-trips directly or indirectly
    acting upon the cab-signals and train-control devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    and subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto, for
    cab and control features.


CLS 246/182
TXT Subject matter under subclass 167 having speed-control means which is
    inoperative below but operative above predetermined speeds when
    predetermined points are reached.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for cab and control features.

    206,    for structure of fixed track-trips.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 488+ for a speed-responsive
    device, per se.


CLS 246/183
TXT Systems under subclass 167 in which the engineer or motorman can pass the
    track device without receiving the signal or having his train stopped or
    its speed reduced, by manually preventing the train mechanism from
    cooperating with the track device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for recording devices in block-signaling systems.

    167,    and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for cab and control features.


CLS 246/184
TXT Subject matter under subclass 167 in which a "service-stop" so called, is
    made, as distinguished from an emergency-stop, the brakes being applied
    gradually and not suddenly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for cab and control features.


CLS 246/185
TXT Subject matter under subclass 167 having recording devices to be used in
    connection with cab signal and train-control mechanism for making a record
    in case an employee disregards the signals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for recording devices in block-signaling systems.

    167,    and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for cab and control features.

    199,    for frangible pipe-closures, the breaking of which indicates a
    disregard of the signals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, appropriate subclasses for recording devices and systems
    for recording motion and position of signals.


CLS 246/186
TXT Subject matter under subclass 167 having means placed upon the train for
    controlling the motive power used for propelling the train or vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     182, 184, and 185, for devices not on the train whereby an electric
    car is deprived of propulsion-current under conditions of danger.

    167,    and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for cab and control features.


CLS 246/187
TXT Subject matter under subclass 186 having electric means for controlling the
    motive power.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for cab and control features.

    218,    and appropriate indented subclasses for electric-motor means for
    actuating switches or signals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclasses 295+ for external control of vehicle-carried
    propulsion means wherein a peculiar type of guideway is claimed (e.g.,
    cable, model, overhead, etc.).


CLS 246/188
TXT Subject matter under subclass 186 having the throttle-valve of a
    steam-locomotive directly actuated by fluid-pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for cab and control features.

    257,    and appropriate indented subclasses for fluid-motor means for
    actuating switches or signals.


CLS 246/189
TXT Subject matter under subclass 167 having means provided for actuating the
    engineer's brake-valve instead of a train-pipe valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for cab and control features.

    184,    185, 186, and 190, for other engineer's-brake-valve actuation
    within the class definition.


CLS 246/190
TXT Subject matter under subclass 167 relating to the structure of the
    vent-valve of the air-brake train-pipe when especially adapted to be
    operated or controlled by track devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for cab and control features.

    182     and 184, for other train-pipe-valve structure under subclass 167.


CLS 246/191
TXT Subject matter under subclass 167 having visual signals provided which are
    especially adapted for use in the engine-cab or on the train.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for cab and control features.

    182     through 190, for other systems under subclass 167 having visual cab
    signals.


CLS 246/192
TXT Subject matter under subclass 167 having devices placed on the train which
    cooperate with track devices in actuating cab signal and train-control
    mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for cab and control features.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 482+, for obstacle
    operated station and route indicators placed on moving vehicles.


CLS 246/193
TXT Subject matter under subclass 192 having train mechanism actuated or
    controlled by electrical means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for cab and control features.

    202,    for track trips actuated or controlled by magnetic means.

    249,    for electric or magnetic car actuated circuit controllers.

    360,    for electric or magnetic train trips.


CLS 246/194
TXT Subject matter under subclass 193 where the track device acts upon the
    train mechanism by electric induction and without physical contact between
    them.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8       and 63, for inductive block-signaling systems.

    167,    and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for cab and control features.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for the structure of
    transformers and inductive reactors.


CLS 246/195
TXT Subject matter under subclass 193 having intermittent contacts or so-called
    "ramp-rails" used for conducting electric current from the roadway to the
    vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     56, 69+, 74, 85, 92, 122, 229+, and 233+, for other systems and
    devices within the class definition having intermittent-contact systems.

    167,    and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for cab and control features.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 463+, for circuits on
    trains completed through intermittent-contact devices on the track.

    104,    Railways, subclasses 279+, for devices for cleaning ice, snow and
    dirt from continuous and intermittent electrical contacts.


CLS 246/196
TXT Subject matter under subclass 193 having circuit-controlling devices upon
    the train for opening or closing train-circuits are actuated by track
    devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    and all subclasses referred to in the search notes appended
    thereto, for cab and control features.

    246,    and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for various types of circuit closers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 463+, for
    circuit-controllers on cars actuated by track devices.

    104,    Railways, subclasses 117.1, and 295+, for circuit controllers on
    trains actuated by trips or other devices on or adjacent the track or
    guideway when claimed in combination with a peculiar type of track or
    guideway (e.g., cable, model, overhead, etc.).


CLS 246/197
TXT Subject matter under subclass 196 having the train mechanism actuated from
    the roadway by magnetic means and without physical contact between the
    train-trip and track-detent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      63, 194, 202, 249, and 265, for other inductive systems within the
    class definition.

    167,    and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for cab and control features.

    246+,   and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for various types of circuit-controllers.


CLS 246/198
TXT Subject matter under subclass 192 having the train mechanism actuated only
    when the car or train is moving forward and not when moving backward.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167+,   and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for cab and control features.

    250     and 298, for single-direction actuation.


CLS 246/199
TXT Subject matter under subclass 192 having frangible devices, usually
    closures, for train-pipes which are broken by contact with track-detents
    and so either vent the train-pipe of the air-brake system or actuate stop
    or signal mechanism, their fracture indicating that a signal has been
    disregarded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    123 and 185, for recording devices indicating the disregard of
    signals.

    167,    and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for cab and control features.

    172,    for frangible pipe-closures which are broken by the derailment of
    one or more wheels.


CLS 246/200
TXT Subject matter under subclass 192 having a lever carried by the train moved
    by contact with a track-trip.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for cab and control features.

    308,    339, 341, 352, 353, 354, 355, and 365, for other lever actuation
    within the class definition.


CLS 246/201
TXT Devices under subclass 167 placed upon the track and which cooperate with
    mechanism upon the train in actuating signals thereupon or stopping it or
    controlling its speed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76,     297 and 322, and appropriate indented subclasses, for other track
    devices within the class definition.

    167,    and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for cab and control features.


CLS 246/202
TXT Track-trips under subclass 201 actuated or controlled by electrical or
    magnetic means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300,    for automatic electric actuation by track mechanism of signals and
    gates.


CLS 246/203
TXT Track-trips under subclass 201 composed of a single pivoted member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    339,    341+, 344+, and 351+, for automatic switch actuation by means of
    pivoted members.


CLS 246/204
TXT Track-trips under subclass 201 moving vertically into operative position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167+,   for lower number than 201, and all subclasses mentioned in the
    search notes appended thereto, for cab and control features.

    307,    310 and 313, for automatic signal or gate actuation controlled by
    means of similar mechanism.

    351+,   for automatic switch actuation controlled by means of similar
    mechanism.


CLS 246/205
TXT Track-trips under subclass 201 moving laterally into operative position.


CLS 246/206
TXT Track-trips under subclass 201 having no moving parts and permanently fixed
    in operative position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182,    for fixed track-trips in speed-control systems.


CLS 246/207
TXT Portable track-trips under subclass 201 without moving parts for use in
    emergencies by trainmen and others and which can be temporarily secured in
    operative position at any point required.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    477,    for means of attachment of visual signals to the track.


CLS 246/208
TXT Signals, usually visual, under the class definition displayed upon or given
    from a standing or moving car or train to warn those attempting to cross
    the track behind it that a car is approching from the opposite direction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 30 for car and train markers.


CLS 246/209
TXT Station-signals under the class definition for the use of passengers in
    signaling for stopping trains, usually provided with means by which they
    are automatically reset when the train departs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14+,    for station, block or train-order signals.

    473+,   for miscellaneous signal structure within the class definition.


CLS 246/210
TXT Subject matter under the class definition having means actuated by the
    movement of a switch, signal, drawbridge, etc., for placing detonating
    signals where a train can explode them.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    487,    for the structure of the detonating signal (e.g., torpedo).


CLS 246/211
TXT Subject matter under subclass 210 where the means is electrically-actuated.


CLS 246/212
TXT Subject matter under subclass 210 having a plurality of torpedoes stored in
    a magazine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for article dispensers
    not otherwise provided for, including many in which the source of supply is
    a magazine for the articles.


CLS 246/213
TXT Subject matter under subclass 212 having the torpedoes fed by gravity from
    a vertical magazine.


CLS 246/214
TXT Subject matter under subclass 212 having a rotary magazine for the storage
    of the torpedoes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 113 and 119+ for rotatably mounted
    article dispensing structures not otherwise provided for, and see the
    search notes thereto.


CLS 246/215
TXT Subject matter under subclass 210 having car-attached mechanism for placing
    the torpedo upon the rail while the car is in motion.


CLS 246/216
TXT Hand-held mechanism under subclass 210 for placing torpedoes upon the track
    from the rear platform of a moving car.


CLS 246/217
TXT Audible indicators under class definition, such as bells and torpedoes,
    indicating that visual signals or switches are at the danger position or
    that dangerous conditions exist ahead.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167+,   for cab signals placed upon the train.

    210+,   for mechanism for placing torpedoes upon the tracks in response to
    the movement of a switch signal or drawbridge.


CLS 246/218
TXT Systems and mechanism under class definition for the electrical actuation
    of switches, signals and other elements of the class.


CLS 246/219
TXT Circuits and systems of circuits under subclass 218 especially adapted for
    controlling the operation of switch and signal motors, but not equivalent
    to a complete block, crossing, or other system.


CLS 246/220
TXT Subject matter under subclass 218, having signals which are electrically
    controlled or actuated for indicating the position of track-switches.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    122+, 162, 176, 217, and 476, for signals and indicators.

    111+,   118+, 120+, and 476, for related systems and devices.


CLS 246/221
TXT Subject matter under subclass 218 having electric-motor means placed upon
    the roadway and especially adapted for actuating switches, signals, and
    other similar movable elements of this class.


CLS 246/222
TXT Subject matter under subclass 221 whereby when the switch or signal
    movement has been accomplished a return-indication current is generated and
    sent back to the actuating devices to operate indicators, release
    operating-levers, locks, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135,    137+, 141, and 142, for other devices and systems having means for
    indicating the operation of a switch or signal.


CLS 246/223
TXT Subject matter under subclass 221 especially adapted for actuating
    three-position signals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     44 and 45, for so-called "wireless" controls" in block-signaling
    systems.

    39      and 46+, for line-wire control in block signaling systems.

    53,     for details of three-position-signal actuation in block signaling
    systems.

    60,     for general schemes of three-position-signal control.

    224,    for motor means for actuating home and distant signals upon the
    same mast.

    479+,   for the structure of semaphores.


CLS 246/224
TXT Subject matter under subclass 221 especially adapted for the operation of
    two signals- a home and a distant-placed upon the same mast.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     38, 39, 44, and 46+, for block-signaling systems having means for
    controlling home and distant signals.

    481,    for the home and distant semaphore, per se.


CLS 246/225
TXT Subject matter under subclass 221 in which the motor armature reciprocates
    or oscillates in a substantially straight line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 15+ for
    reciprocating electrical motors or generators.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 119+ for systems for
    controlling reciprocating or oscillating electric motors.


CLS 246/226
TXT Subject matter under subclass 225 having means for actuating track-switches
    by manipulation of the controller of an electrically-propelled car, current
    being either used or cut out, while passing an insulated section of third
    rail or trolley-wire connected to the switch-motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    415+,   and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for switch structure.


CLS 246/227
TXT Subject matter under subclass 226 in which an armature or double core of
    the motor reciprocates between two opposed magnets or solenoids.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231+,   for similar motor actuation of switches where the motor is not
    controller actuated.


CLS 246/228
TXT Subject matter under subclasss 227 having a circuit-changer which is moved
    electrically or mechanically.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232     and 242, for similar motor actuation of switches where the motor is
    not controller-actuated.

    246+,   and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for various types of circuit-controllers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 245+ for
    polarity reversing.


CLS 246/229
TXT Subject matter under subclass 227 in which two successive or tandem
    contacts or insulated sections of track or trolley-wire are connected to
    the two magnets or solenoids.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233,    for similar subject matter where tandem-contact switches are used.


CLS 246/230
TXT Subject matter under subclass 226 in which each motion of a reciprocating
    member alternately throws the track-switch first in one direction and then
    in the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236,    327, 328, 342, 347, 348, 350, and 354, for other alternate-throw
    switch or signal actuation and for similar devices in this class.


CLS 246/231
TXT Subject matter under subclass 225 in which an armature or double core moves
    between two opposed electromagnets or solenoids.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227+,   for similar subject matter having controller-actuated switches.


CLS 246/232
TXT Subject matter under subclass 231 having devices by which the circuit
    connections are changed during or at the completion of the given movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228     and 242, for other circuit-changer systems in this class.

    246+,   and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for various types of circuit-controllers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 245+ for
    polarity reversing.


CLS 246/233
TXT Subject matter under subclass 231 for switches provided with and which have
    a separate contact device for each magnet, the same being arranged in
    tandem or succession, usually in front of the switch to be actuated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229,    for similar tandem-contact systems which have controller-actuated
    switches in this class.


CLS 246/234
TXT Subject matter under subclass 231 for switches and which have a pair of
    contact plates, conductors, or ramp-rails (one for each magnet) placed
    together in parallel in front of the switch, and provided with means on the
    car for making electrical connection with either one of same, as desired.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     56, 69 to 71, 74, 85, 92, 195, 229, 233, and 235, for other systems
    using intermittent contacts in this class.

    246+,   and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for various types of circuit-controllers.


CLS 246/235
TXT Subject matter under subclass 234 for switches and having an electric
    switch or shunt circuit controller mechanism on the car, whereby the proper
    solenoid or magnet may be energized.


CLS 246/236
TXT Subject matter under subclass 225 having mechanical means arranged so that
    each motion of a reciprocating member alternately throws the track-switch
    first in one direction and then in the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230,    327, 328, 342, 347, 348, 350, and 354, for other alternate-throw
    mechanism and similar devices in this class.


CLS 246/237
TXT Subject matter under subclass 225 in which the elements actuated are set
    and held against gravity or a spring, which restores them to their original
    position upon the cessation of current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238,    239, 243, 244, 290, 291, and 310 to 321, for other fly-back systems
    in this class.


CLS 246/238
TXT Subject matter under subclass 237 in which the elements actuated are set
    and held in position against gravity or a spring by latches, clutches, or
    brakes, or their equivalents, which are released by electrical means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237,    239, 243, 244, 290, 291, 319, 320, and 321, for other fly-back
    mechanism in this class.

    244,    258+, 263, 300, and 325, for electric latch-release in this class.

    299+,   (except 300), 324 and 396, for mechanical latch-release in this
    class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, appropriate subclasses, for clutch
    structure.


CLS 246/239
TXT Switch-actuating mechanism under subclass 237 of the type stated.


CLS 246/240
TXT Subject matter under subclass 221 in which the armature rotates or
    oscillates in a curvilinear path.


CLS 246/241
TXT Subject matter under subclass 240 in which the action of one
    rotary-armature motor opposes that of another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227     and 231, and appropriate indented subclasses for opposed
    reciprocating-armature motors.


CLS 246/242
TXT Subject matter under subclass 240 in which automatic means are provided for
    changing or modifying the circuits.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228     and 232, for reciprocating-armature circuit-changer systems.

    246+,   and all subclasses mentioned in the search Notes appended thereto,
    for various types of circuit-controllers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 245+ for
    polarity reversing.


CLS 246/243
TXT Subject matter under subclass 240 in which a rotary armature is set and
    held against gravity or a spring, which restores it to its original
    position upon the cessation of current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237,    for similar subject matter used with a reciprociating armature.


CLS 246/244
TXT Subject matter under subclass 243 in which a rotary armature is set and
    held in position against gravity or a spring by latches, clutches, or
    brakes, or their equivalents, which are released by electrical means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238,    258, 259, 263, 300, and 325, for electric latch and clutch release.

    299,    301, 302, 324+, and 396, for mechanical latch and clutch release.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, appropriate subclasses for, clutch
    structure.


CLS 246/245
TXT Subject matter under subclass 218 by which the energy of the moving vehicle
    is converted, by mechanism on the track, into electrical energy, which is
    used for actuating switches and signals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 75+ for drive
    mechanism for electrical generators or motors.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, appropriate subclasses, for
    electric- generator systems.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 229+, for pumps operated by a passing vehicle.


CLS 246/246
TXT Subject matter under subclass 218 in which circuit closing or breaking
    devices are actuated by the wheels or tappets of moving cars, including the
    so-called "track instruments" and "treadles" of railway signaling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     24 and 77 to 80, for manually actuated circuit controllers.

    72      thru 80, 82 to 84, 88, 90, 91, 126, 127, 247 to 252, for
    circuit-controllers.

    180,    196 and 197, for circuit controllers located on the moving vehicle.

    228,    232, 235, 242, and 253, for circuit controllers actuated by the
    movement of switches or signals.

    259,    for circuit controllers actuated by the moving vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses,
    for the structure of the circuit closer or breaker.


CLS 246/247
TXT Subject matter under subclass 246 provided with mechanism, usually of the
    step-by-step variety, by means of which as many trains or car-wheels as
    enter must leave the block before the signal is restored to safety.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19      and 77+, for counting mechanism.


CLS 246/248
TXT Subject matter under subclass 246 in which the return of the
    circuit-controller to normal condition is retarded after the passage of the
    train, usually for a predetermined interval of time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108+,   for time-control mechanism.

    161,    for time-control mechanism used in interlocking.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 33+ for
    retarded-action circuit closers and breakers.


CLS 246/249
TXT Subject matter under subclass 246 in which circuit controllers are actuated
    in whole or in part by electric or magnetic means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     194, 197, 202, and 211, for devices actuated by electric or
    magnetic means.


CLS 246/250
TXT Subject matter under subclass 246 in which a circuit controller is actuated
    by trains moving in one direction only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198     and 298, for devices actuated by cars moving in one direction only.


CLS 246/251
TXT Subject matter under subclass 246 in which a circuit controller is actuated
    by the vertical yielding of the rail under the weight of the passing train.


CLS 246/252
TXT Subject matter under subclass 246 in which a circuit controller is
    supported by the trolley-wire or third rail and actuated mechanically by
    the current-collector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     72, 81, 84, 90, 91, 126, and 246+, for circuit-controllers actuated
    by the wheels or other devices, not trolleys, carried by the car.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses
    for the structure of switches, and particularly subclasses 52+ for circuit
    makers and breakers of special application.


CLS 246/253
TXT Subject matter under subclass 218 in which a circuit controller is actuated
    by the motion of signals, switches, and other movable elements, sometimes
    known in the art as "switch-boxes".

    (1)     Note.  In some of the multiple-circuit switch-boxes contained in
    this subclass a predetermined sequence of operation of the switches,
    signals, and other movable elements thereby controlled is provided for.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    124, 131+, 176, and 220, for predetermined sequences of actuation.

    246+,   and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for various types of circuit-controllers.


CLS 246/254
TXT Subject matter under subclass 218 in which a trolley or plow, its wheel, or
    some member attached to the trolley makes a temporary electrical contact
    with one or more contact-surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     72, 77+, 81, 85, 92, 229, 233, and 234, for
    trolley-completed-circuit systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 463+ for incidental
    disclosure of trolley-contacts.


CLS 246/255
TXT Subject matter under subclass 218 in which a car-wheel or a special wheel
    carried by a car makes a temporary electrical contact between two or more
    contact-surfaces.


CLS 246/256
TXT Subject matter under subclass 218 having electrically-actuated circuit
    closing and breaking devices especially adapted for use in controlling
    circuits actuating railway switches and signals and not of general
    application.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, appropriate subclasses, for relay structure; subclasses
    160+ for interlocked electromagnetic relays; and subclasses 5 and 50 for
    other types of interlocked electric circuit makers and breakers.  See also,
    appropriate subclasses for electromagnetically operated switches of general
    application.


CLS 246/257
TXT Actuating mechanism under class definition operated by fluid-pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93+,    100+, 116, 139+, 258 to 261, 271+ and 361, for fluid-pressure-motor
    structure.


CLS 246/258
TXT Subject matter under subclass 257 having valves which are electrically
    controlled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238,    244, 259, 263, 300, and 325, for electric latch and clutch release.


CLS 246/259
TXT Subject matter under subclass 258 having valves electrically controlled by
    a moving car or train.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238,    244, 258, 263, and 325, for details of electric latch and clutch
    release.

    246,    and the subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for various types of circuit-controllers.

    415+,   and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for switch structure.


CLS 246/260
TXT Subject matter under subclass 257 which actuates a signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111,    125, 293, and 473, and appropriate indented subclasses, for signal
    structure.


CLS 246/261
TXT Subject matter under subclass 257 which actuates a gate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125+    and 272, for gate structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclass 334 for a fluid-motor
    actuated closure (gate) and see the search notes thereto for the loci of
    other motor operated closures.


CLS 246/262
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which a spring or weight motor
    is used for actuating switches, signals, or analogous devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102     and 108+, for systems using mechanical motors.


CLS 246/263
TXT Subject matter under subclass 262, the operation of which is controlled by
    electrical means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96+     and 262, for the mechanical motors.

    108,    238, 244, 258+, 300, and 325, for electric latch and clutch release
    mechanism.


CLS 246/264
TXT Devices under class definition attached to and operated from the car, and
    sometimes utilizing its energy of motion, for throwing the unmodified or
    but slightly-modified points of ordinary tongue or point switches by direct
    contact therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359+,   for devices which actuate track mechanism by utilizing the energy
    of the moving vehicle.


CLS 246/265
TXT Subject matter under subclass 264 having a permanent or an electromagnet,
    which moves the point by magnetic attraction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249,    for magnetic point movers controlled from a car.

    325,    for electrically-controlled track mechanism.


CLS 246/266
TXT Subject matter under subclass 264 adapted for throwing the points of
    switches of special construction, in which the point is only slightly
    modified, if at all, on the special switch construction used in cooperation
    with the particular point-thrower.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359+,   for train-trips of similar structure actuating track mechanism.

    415+,   and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for switch structure.


CLS 246/267
TXT Subject matter under subclass 266 in which the point throwers are directed
    into contact with the switch-point by fixed grooves in the switch.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also includes the special switch structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359+,   for analogous devices.

    415+,   and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for switch structure.


CLS 246/268
TXT Subject matter under subclass 264 having a wheel with sharp edges, designed
    for operating on and wedging over the points of point and tongue switches
    of ordinary construction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    366,    369 and 372, for analogous devices.


CLS 246/269
TXT Subject matter under subclass 264 having a wedge-shaped shoe sliding
    longitudinally in the flangeways and designed to wedge over the points of
    unmodified point and tongue switches.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    365,    368 and 371, for analogous devices.


CLS 246/270
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in this subclass by which
    signals, switches, gates, and other movable elements of this class are
    actuated by the energy of the moving vehicle; either by direct mechanical
    connection with the train- actuated track-trip or indirectly by means of
    power stored up in springs, counterweights, and trains of clockwork by the
    moving vehicle through the medium of track-trips.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    245,    for car-actuated generators of electricity.

    246,    for car-actuated circuit-closers.

    252,    for trolley or plow actuated circuit-closers, these devices not
    being included in this subclass.


CLS 246/271
TXT Subject matter under subclass 270 in which power is transmitted from a
    track-trip to the device actuated by means of a column of fluid.


CLS 246/272
TXT Subject matter under subclass 271 which actuates a railway gate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125+,   261 and 292+, for gate structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclass 334 for actuating means,
    employing a fluid transmission, for operating a closure and see the search
    notes thereto for the loci of other such operated closures.


CLS 246/273
TXT Subject matter under subclass 270 having a grade-crossing of two lines of
    railway provided with means, actuated automatically by an approaching
    train, so as to secure for the train an unbroken line of rails.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    465,    and appropriate indented subclasses and the subclasses mentioned in
    the search notes appended thereto, for the structure of the crossing.


CLS 246/274
TXT Subject matter under subclass 270 having a switch actuated by a track-trip
    and mechanically connected with one or more movable-rail frogs, so as to
    secure for the train an unbroken line of rails.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    275,    382+ and 468+, for frog structures.

    382,    and apparatus indented subclasses, for movable-rail frogs.


CLS 246/275
TXT Subject matter under subclass 270 having movable-rail frogs which are set
    automatically by an approaching train, so as to secure unbroken line of
    rails.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    274,    382+ and 468+, for frog structure.

    375     and 382, and appropriate indented subclasses for movable-rail frogs.


CLS 246/276
TXT Subject matter under subclass 275 having continuous-rail frogs which yield
    against the action of springs or the resilience of the moving rails, to the
    lateral pressure of trailing wheels.


CLS 246/277
TXT Subject matter under subclass 270 having turnouts or passing-sidings
    provided with vehicle-energy-actuated switches placed at the ends of same
    for automatically switching two approaching trains upon the proper tracks
    for passing.

    (1)     Note.  The stationary turnouts of subclass 427 perform the same
    function, although those switches have no movable parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    319+,   for analogous switch structure.


CLS 246/278
TXT Subject matter under subclass 270 having means for manually actuating
    switches combined with means for automatically actuating the same by the
    energy of a vehicle approaching the same, facing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144,    284, 290, and 393+, for switch-stand structure.

    317,    for facing-setting mechanism.

    393,    and appropriate indented subclasses, for special types of
    mechanisms for manual actuation of switches.


CLS 246/279
TXT Subject matter under subclass 278 having switch-actuating mechanism by
    which a train can enter a siding only when the automatic setting mechanism
    is held by the switchman in an inoperative position against gravity or
    springs, which return the switch to its original position when the
    switchman releases it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    397,    for hand-restrained resetting-switch-stands.


CLS 246/280
TXT Subject matter under subclass 278 having switch-actuating mechanism by
    means of which the switch, having been set for the siding by the
    approaching train, is automatically reset for main line after the train has
    entered the siding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281,    315, 316, and 395+, for resetting devices.


CLS 246/281
TXT Subject matter under subclass 280 having switch-actuating mechanism in
    which the vehicle upon entering the switch maintains contact with a
    yielding member until clear of the main track, whereupon the switch is
    automatically reset, by spring or counterweight, to "mainline clear".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304,    for vehicle-restrained doors or gates.

    315,    for vehicle-restrained switch-resetting devices.


CLS 246/282
TXT Subject matter under subclass 278 having switch-actuating mechanism in
    which a switch wrongly set is automatically reset by trains running in
    either direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284,    and appropriate indented subclasses, and 318, for related structure.


CLS 246/283
TXT Subject matter under subclass 282 including switch-actuating mechanism
    enabling a switch to be set from a train approaching it facing, and also
    when approaching it trailing, by the lateral pressure, in the latter case,
    of the wheel-flanges of the train against a yielding switch-rail.


CLS 246/284
TXT Subject matter under subclass 270 including mechanism for the manual
    actuation of switches combined with mechanism for the actuation of same by
    the energy of a moving vehicle approaching the same trailing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144,    278, 290, and 393+, for switch-stand structure.

    282+,   284 and 318, for trailing-setting mechanism.


CLS 246/285
TXT Subject matter under subclass 284 including a yielding section of the
    traction-rail which is sprung or actuated by a wheel of the moving train.


CLS 246/286
TXT Subject matter under subclass 285 in whcih a resisting force is furnished
    by the compression of a spring, caused by the slipping of a clutch or cam
    actuated by the pressure, upon the switch rail, of a car-wheel trailing
    through the switch.


CLS 246/287
TXT Subject matter under subclass 286 including a compressed spiral spring,
    concentric with the revolving spindle of the stand, the so-called "Ramapo"
    type of stand being here included.


CLS 246/288
TXT Subject matter under subclass 285 including mechanism whereby a
    switch-stand is held closed against ordinary manual force, but is capable
    of being automatically thrown and secured, against the action of a
    counter-weight, by the passage of the first wheel trailing through the
    switch.


CLS 246/289
TXT Subject matter under subclass 285 including mechanism whereby a switch
    stand is normally locked against ordinary manual force, but is capable, by
    the breaking of some frangible part or the yielding of the lock, of being
    automatically thrown, and sometimes locked, by the passage of the first
    wheel trailing through the switch.


CLS 246/290
TXT Subject matter under subclass 270 including a switch stand provided with
    means for allowing the switch-rails to move apart and fly back against the
    resistance of the mechanism of the stand upon the passage of each trailing
    wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144,    278, 284, and 393+, for switch-stand structure.

    237+    and 243+, for fly-back mechanism.

    319+,   for trailing-fly-back mechanism.


CLS 246/291
TXT Subject matter under subclass 290 provided with means for allowing the
    switch-rails to spring apart and fly back against the compression or
    distention of a spring located in the stand upon the passage of each
    trailing wheel through the switch.


CLS 246/292
TXT Subject matter under subclass 270 including signals or gates which are
    automatically actuated by the energy of a moving vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144,    278, 284, 290, and 393+, for switch-stand structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, appropriate subclasses, for
    closure-actuating means.


CLS 246/293
TXT Subject matter under subclass 292 including signals specially adapted and
    intended for use at highway-crossings of railways.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111,    125+, 260, and 473, and appropriate indented subclasses, and also
    under this subclass, for signal structure.


CLS 246/294
TXT Subject matter under subclass 293 including combined visual and audible
    signals.

    (1)     Note.  In some cases the audible signals of this subclass are
    electrically-actuated bells controlled by the movement of the visual signal.


CLS 246/295
TXT Subject matter under subclass 293 including audible highway-crossing
    signals.


CLS 246/296
TXT Subject matter under subclass 295 including a bell, in which a single
    stroke of the bell is given by the action of each wheel of the train.


CLS 246/297
TXT Subject matter under subclass 292 including signals and gates which are
    automatically actuated by the energy of the moving vehicle, the devices of
    this subclass and of the subclasses indented thereunder being classified
    upon either the mechanism connecting the gate or signal with the track
    mechanism or upon the function or structure of such mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111,    125, 260, 293, and 473, and appropriate indented subclasses, for
    signal structure.

    273,    274, 275, 314, and 322+, for various types of track-trips used for
    actuating movable devices of various kinds.


CLS 246/298
TXT Subject matter under subclass 297 including track devices for actuating
    signals and gates, operated by vehicles moving in one direction only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198     and 250, for single-direction actuation devices.


CLS 246/299
TXT Subject matter under subclass 297 including signals or gates which are set
    and latched in position by moving trains against the force of a spring or
    gravity, the latch or clutch being released by an approaching or departing
    train.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238,    244, 258+, 263, 300, and 325, for electric latch and clutch-release
    mechanism.

    301,    302, 324, and 396, for mechanical-latch and clutch-release
    mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, appropriate subclasses, for
    clutch-release mechanism.


CLS 246/300
TXT Subject matter under subclass 299 having a latch or clutch which is
    released by electrical means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202,    for electrically-controlled track trips.


CLS 246/301
TXT Subject matter under subclass 299 having a track device which actuates the
    latch or clutch and which moves in the direction of the traffic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306,    311+ and 336+, for longitudinally- moving track devices.


CLS 246/302
TXT Subject matter under subclass 299 having a track device which moves the
    latch or clutch and which moves vertically.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200,    204, 307, 313, and 351+, for vertically-moving track devices.


CLS 246/303
TXT Subject matter under subclass 297 including a track device which is
    revolved on an axis parallel to the rails by the action of a car-tappet
    upon a screw, helix, cam or spiral groove.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333     and 405, for similar switch-actuating mechanism.


CLS 246/304
TXT Subject matter under subclass 297 including a gate or door which is held
    against gravity or a spring by contact with the moving vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281,    315 and 398, for vehicle-restrained mechanism.

    397,    for hand-restrained mechanism.


CLS 246/305
TXT Subject matter under subclass 304 including track devices in the form of
    bars, which always remain parallel to the traction-rails, while swinging
    vertically or horizontally about axes or pivot-points.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151,    203, 246, 281, 304+, 310, 344, and 358+, for the structure of the
    track mechanism.


CLS 246/306
TXT Subject matter under subclass 304 including a restraining device which
    moves longitudinally in the direction of the traffic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301,    311+, and 336+, for longitudinally-moving track trips.


CLS 246/307
TXT Subject matter under subclass 304 including a restraining device which
    moves vertically.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302,    313, 351+, and 368+, for vertically-moving track-trips.


CLS 246/308
TXT Subject matter under subclass 307 including a restraining device which
    swings vertically.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    352     and 353+, for vertically-moving longitudinal levers.


CLS 246/309
TXT Subject matter under subclass 308 including a track-rail which yields
    vertically under the weight of the train, thereby actuating the gate or
    door.


CLS 246/310
TXT Subject matter under subclass 297 including track devices which move with a
    vertical or horizontal swinging motion parallel to and in the direction of
    the rails, similar to that of a parallel-ruler.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151,    160, 201+, 246+, 305, 308+, 314+, and 358, for similar track
    mechanism.


CLS 246/311
TXT Subject matter under subclass 297 having track devices which move
    longitudinally in the direction of the traffic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301,    306, 312, and 336+, for similar track mechanism.


CLS 246/312
TXT Subject matter under subclass 311 having track devices which move in right
    lines parallel to the traction-rails.


CLS 246/313
TXT Subject matter under subclass 297 having track devices which move
    vertically.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204,    246+, 307+, and 351+, for similar track mechanism.


CLS 246/314
TXT Subject matter under subclass 270 having track switches which are
    automatically set or reset by the energy of the moving vehicle, acting
    directly on the switch through the vehicle-wheels or some fixed member in
    advance of the wheels or through a separate track instrument connected to
    the switch by motion-transmitting mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264     and 359+, for means under the control of an occupant of the
    vehicle, adapted to be placed in position to act directly on the switch, so
    as to move it either by manual power or by the energy of the moving vehicle.

    278,    284 and 290, and various indented subclasses, for mechanism of the
    type stated used in connection with means for manual actuation.

    415+,   and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for switch structure.


CLS 246/315
TXT Subject matter under subclass 314 having switches usually actuated by the
    approaching vehicle which during its passage maintains contact with a
    yielding member until clear of the main track, whereupon the switch is
    automatically reset by spring or counterweight to "main-line clear".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280,    281, 316, and 395+, for resetting mechanism.

    281     and 398, for vehicle-restrained mechanism.


CLS 246/316
TXT Subject matter under subclass 314 including a switch which is usually
    actuated by the approaching vehicle, which after its passage onto the side
    track automatically closes the switch resetting it for the main line by the
    action of the car-wheels upon trips or rails other than the laterally-
    moving switch-rails forward of their pivot.


CLS 246/317
TXT Subject matter under subclass 314 including a switch which, if set for
    siding, is automatically reset for main line by a train approaching it
    facing, provided the resetting mechanism is not intentionally temporarily
    withdrawn from actuating position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278,    and appropriate indented subclasses for facing-setting mechanism.

    304     and 398, for vehicle-restrained mechanism.

    397,    for hand-restrained mechanism.


CLS 246/318
TXT Subject matter under subclass 314 including a switch locked against
    ordinary force, but capable of being automatically thrown and locked by the
    pressure, upon the moving rail or point, of the first wheel trailing
    through the switch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282     and 284, and appropriate indented subclasses, for switches of the
    type stated connected with switch-stands.


CLS 246/319
TXT Subject matter under subclass 314 including a switch, usually point or
    tongue, which is forced open, generally against springs or counterweights,
    by direct contact of each wheel of a train trailing through the switch and
    which flies back or is automatically moved back after the passage of same.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282+,   284, and appropriate indented subclasses, for switches of the
    trailing- setting type connected with switch- stands.

    290+,   for trailing-fly-back type connected with switch-stands.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, appropriate subclasses, for details of compression
    and tension devices.


CLS 246/320
TXT Subject matter under subclass 319 in which the switch is returned
    automatically to its original position by the power on one or more spiral
    springs.


CLS 246/321
TXT Subject matter under subclass 320 having a single spiral spring located
    upon either the tie-rod or the connecting-rod.


CLS 246/322
TXT Subject matter under subclass 314 not above classified whereby
    track-switches are actuated by the energy of an approaching vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273,    274, 275, 278+, and 297+, for various types of track-trips used for
    actuating movable devices of various kinds.


CLS 246/323
TXT Subject matter under subclass 322 including car-actuated switch-shifting
    mechanism for automatically directing a plurality of cars to various tracks
    in predetermined order or for automaticaly actuating the necessary switches
    along the route of a car.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156,    157 and 162, for selective mechanism.


CLS 246/324
TXT Subject matter under subclass 322 including car-actuated switches which are
    reset for main line automatically by latch or clutch release devices
    cooperating with springs or counterweights.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238,    244, 258+, 263, 300, and 325, for electrical latch and clutch
    release.

    299+,   for mechanical latch and clutch release.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, appropriate subclasses, for clutch
    mechanism.


CLS 246/325
TXT Subject matter under subclass 324 in which the latch or clutch is operated
    by electrical means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202     and 415+, and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended
    thereto, for switch structure.

    238,    244, 258+, 263, and 300, for electric latch and clutch release.

    299,    301, 302, 324, and 396, for mechanical latch and clutch release.


CLS 246/326
TXT Subject matter under subclass 322 including switch-operating track
    mechanism controlled by electrical means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300,    for electric control.


CLS 246/327
TXT Subject matter under subclass 322 including a switch actuated by a
    single-track device, the successive operation of which in the same manner
    alternately sets the switch for siding or main line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230,    236, 328, 342, 347, 350, and 354, for alternate-throw mechanism and
    similar devices.


CLS 246/328
TXT Subject matter under subclass 327 in which a tappet-wheel is used as the
    track device.


CLS 246/329
TXT Subject matter under subclass 322 including an automatic switch for three
    or more tracks diverging from the same point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403,    for three or multiple throw switch stands.

    440,    for three throw switches.


CLS 246/330
TXT Subject matter under subclass 322 including track mechanism normally
    withdrawn from actuating position, so that ordinary street traffic has no
    power to either throw the switch or damage the mechanism, the track device
    being automatically placed in actuating position by the approaching car, so
    that it can be actuated by the switch-throwing means.


CLS 246/331
TXT Subject matter under subclass 322 including a track device and a switch
    which are connected by a longitudinal rotary connecting-shaft.


CLS 246/332
TXT Subject matter under subclass 322 including a track device and a switch
    which are connected by a system of cables and pulleys.


CLS 246/333
TXT Subject matter under subclass 322 including switches which are actuated by
    devices which are revolved on an axis parallel to the rails by the action
    of a car device upon a screw, helix, cam, or spiral groove.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    303     and 405, for similar mechanism actuating signals and gates.


CLS 246/334
TXT Subject matter under subclass 322 including switches which are actuated by
    star and pinion wheels or their equivalents, the train-trip being either a
    toothed rack, a brush, a friction-bar, or some equivalent device.


CLS 246/335
TXT Subject matter under subclass 322 including devices of the bow-spring type
    used for actuating switches.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    313,    for bow-spring type of track-trip.


CLS 246/336
TXT Subject matter under subclass 322 including switches actuated by track
    devices which move longitudinally in the direction of the traffic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301,    306, 311+, and 336+, for longitudinally-moving track mechanism.


CLS 246/337
TXT Subject matter under subclass 336 in which the track device releases the
    train-trip by causing its elevation.


CLS 246/338
TXT Subject matter under subclass 336 in which the track device is released
    from the train-trips by being depressed.


CLS 246/339
TXT Subject matter under subclass 336 in which the track device swings in a
    perpendicular plane parallel to the direction of the traffic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    346     and 353, and appropriate subclasses indented thereunder, for
    swinging track mechanism.


CLS 246/340
TXT Subject matter under subclass 339 in which pairs of connected track devices
    are used, each moving the switch in a direction opposite from the other.

    (1)     Note.  Both devices of the pair must be located either in front of
    or behind the switch, for when placed in tandem, with the switch between
    them, they are not double, but become independent means for switch setting
    and resetting, respectively.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    339,    346 and 353, and appropriate indented subclasses for swinging track
    mechanism.

    343,    349, 355, and 356+, for double trips.


CLS 246/341
TXT Subject matter under subclass 336 including switches actuated by track
    devices which swing in a horizontal plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    339,    346, and 353, and appropriate indented subclasses, for swinging
    track mechanism.


CLS 246/342
TXT Subject matter under subclass 341 including track devices which can be
    acted upon at two different contact-points, whereby the switch can be
    thrown in either direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230,    236, 297, 327, 347, 350, and 354, for double-acting track devices.


CLS 246/343
TXT Subject matter under subclass 341 in which pairs of track devices are used,
    each moving the switch in a direction opposite from the other.

    (1)     Note.  Both devices of the pair must be located either in front of
    or behind the switch, for when placed in tandem, with the switch between
    them, they are not double, but become independent means for switch setting
    and resetting, respectively.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    340,    349, 355, 356, and 357, for double-track devices.


CLS 246/344
TXT Subject matter under subclass 322 having track devices which move at right
    angles to the direction of traffic.


CLS 246/345
TXT Subject matter under subclass 344 having a switch which is actuated by a
    plurality of levers moving transversely and which coact at the ends
    opposite their fulcrums.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    352,    for levers moving vertically.


CLS 246/346
TXT Subject matter under subclass 344 having track mechanism which swings
    transversely to the direction of the traffic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    339     and 353, and appropriate indented subclasses, for swinging track
    mechanism.

    353+,   for levers moving vertically.


CLS 246/347
TXT Subject matter under subclass 346 having track devices which can be acted
    upon at two different contact-points, whereby the switch can be thrown in
    either direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230,    236, 297, 327, 342, 348, 350, and 354, for double-acting track
    devices.


CLS 246/348
TXT Subject matter under subclass 347 having a track device which is provided
    with a tail or extension behind the pivot, the function of which is to
    guide the train-trip into proper contact with the track device.


CLS 246/349
TXT Subject matter under subclass 346 having pairs of track devices, each
    moving the switch in a direction opposite from the other.

    (1)     Note.  Both devices of the pair must be located either in front of
    or behind the switch, for when placed in tandem, with the switch between
    them, they are not double, but become independent means for switch setting
    and resetting, respectively.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    339,    346 and 353, and appropriate indented subclasses, for swinging
    track mechanism.

    340,    343, 355, and 356+, for double trips.

    355,    for levers stated moving vertically.


CLS 246/350
TXT Subject matter under subclass 344 having track devices which can be acted
    upon at two different contact-points, whereby the switch can be thrown in
    either direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230,    236, 297, 327, 342, 347+, and 354, for double-acting track-trips.


CLS 246/351
TXT Subject matter under subclass 344 having switches which are actuated by
    vertically-moving track devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302,    307+, 313, 351+, for vertically-moving track devices.


CLS 246/352
TXT Subject matter under subclass 351 having switches which are actuated by one
    or more sets of end-pivoted double levers, which coact at their ends
    opposite their fulcrums.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    345,    for duplex longitudinal levers, with end fulcrum moving
    transversely.


CLS 246/353
TXT Subject matter under subclass 351 having switches which are actuated by
    track mechanism swinging vertically.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    339     and 346, and appropriate indented subclasses, for swinging track
    mechanism.


CLS 246/354
TXT Subject matter under subclass 353 having trail devices which can be acted
    upon at two different contact-points, whereby the switch can be thrown in
    either direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230,    236, 297, 327, 342, 347+, and 350, for double-acting.


CLS 246/355
TXT Subject matter under subclass 353 having pairs of track devices each moving
    the switch in a direction opposite from the other.

    (1)     Note.  Both devices of the pair must be located either in front of
    or behind the switch, for when placed in tandem, with the switch between
    them, they are not double, but become independent means for switch setting
    and resetting, respectively.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    340,    343, 349, and 356+, for double trips.


CLS 246/356
TXT Subject matter under subclass 351 having pairs of connected track-trips,
    each moving the switch in a direction opposite from the other.

    (1)     Note.  Both devices of the pair must be located either in front of
    or behind the switch, for when placed in tandem, with the switch between
    them, they are not double, but become independent means for switch setting
    and resetting, respectively.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    313     and 350, for track-trips moving transversely.

    340,    343, 349, and 355, for double trips.


CLS 246/357
TXT Subject matter under subclass 356 having track devices which are
    transversely connected by a horizontal lever.


CLS 246/358
TXT Subject matter under subclass 270 having train-actuated devices, sometimes
    called "lock-bars", by which a moving train can lock or secure in place a
    switch over which it is passing or is a about to pass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322+,   appropriate subclasses for track mechanism.


CLS 246/359
TXT Subject matter under subclass 270 having devices upon cars by which track
    mechanism is actuated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264+,   for point throwers mounted on cars.


CLS 246/360
TXT Subject matter under subclass 359 having train-trips which are moved into
    operative position by electric or magnetic means or moving track devices by
    magnets attaction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121,    193, 202, 249, 265, and 326, for electrically or magnetically
    actuated devices.


CLS 246/361
TXT Subject matter under subclass 359 having train-trips which are moved into
    operative position by fluid-pressure means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257+,   and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto,
    for a fluid-motor structure.


CLS 246/362
TXT Subject matter under subclass 359 having train-trips which yield after the
    switch or signal has been actuated, thus allowing the car to pass on
    without injury to the mechanism.


CLS 246/363
TXT Subject matter under subclass 359 having means whereby a car-carried hook
    engages with and actuates a ring, loop, or similar device upon the track.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclasses 279+, for details of mechanism for bringing
    track- cleaners into operative position and more or less adapted for
    bringing car-tappets also into operative position.


CLS 246/364
TXT Subject matter under subclass 359 having train trips whose contacting
    members are either toothed racks, brushes, friction-bars, or their
    equivalents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclasses 279+, for details of mechanism for bringing
    track- cleaners into operative position and more or less adapted for
    bringing car-tappets also into operative position.


CLS 246/365
TXT Subject matter under subclass 359 having train trips wheel swing upon
    pivots into operative position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclasses 279+, for details of mechanism for bringing
    track- cleaners into operative position and more or less adapted for
    bringing car-tappets also into operative position.


CLS 246/366
TXT Subject matter under subclass 365 having a wheel which is used as the
    contacting element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264,    369 and 372, for wheels used as car-tappets.


CLS 246/367
TXT Subject matter under subclass 365 having a rod which is used as the
    contacting element.


CLS 246/368
TXT Subject matter under subclass 359 having a trip which is moved vertically
    into operative position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclasses 279+, for details of mechanism for bringing
    track-cleaners into operative position and more or less adapted for
    bringing car-tappets also into operative position.


CLS 246/369
TXT Subject matter under subclass 368 having vertically-moving trips which use
    a wheel as the contacting element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    268,    366 and 372, for wheels used as car-tappets, moving, respectively,
    radially and laterally into operative position.


CLS 246/370
TXT Subject matter under subclass 368 having vertically-moving trips which use
    a rod as the contacting element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264+,   367 and 373, for rods used as car-tappets, moving respectively,
    radially and laterally into operative position.


CLS 246/371
TXT Subject matter under subclass 359 having a train trip which moves laterally
    into operative position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclasses 279+, for details of mechanism for bringing
    track-cleaners into operative position and more or less adapted for
    bringing car-tappets also into operative position.


CLS 246/372
TXT Subject matter under subclass 371 having a wheel which is used as the
    contacting element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264,    366 and 369, for wheels used as car-tappets, moving, respectively,
    radially and vertically into operative position.


CLS 246/373
TXT Subject matter under subclass 371 having a rod which is used as the
    connecting element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264,    367 and 370, for rods used as car-tappets, moving, respectively,
    radially and vertically into operative position.


CLS 246/374
TXT Subject matter under the class definition having a siding in which the
    main-track switch is mechanically connected to a derailing-block or
    safety-switch in the siding, the derailing-block or safety-switch being
    opened when the main-track switch is closed, so that cars on the siding are
    prevented from fouling the main line.

    (1)     Note.  For structure of the derailing block, a search should be
    made in subclass 163 of this class, and Class 104, Railways, subclasses
    262+.


CLS 246/375
TXT Subject matter under class definition having a crossing of two or more
    lines of railway-track in which there is always preserved an unbroken rail
    for each line of road when a train is passing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    465+,   and the subclasses referred to in the search notes appended
    thereto, for the structure of the crossing.


CLS 246/376
TXT Subject matter under subclass 375 having single rails or sections of track
    which swing or fold over upon and overlap other lines of rail.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273     and 383+, for overlapped-main-line crossings.


CLS 246/377
TXT Subject matter under subclass 375 having pivoted rails which are placed at
    the points of intersection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273,    387, 388, and 418, for pivoted-rail structure.


CLS 246/378
TXT Subject matter under subclass 375 having rotary blocks which carry
    rail-sections at the crossing-points.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273     and 388, for similar devices.


CLS 246/379
TXT Subject matter under subclass 375 having crossings in which two adjacent
    point-switches facing each other are mechanically connected, so as to move
    in unison, but in opposite directions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273     and 416, for similar devices.


CLS 246/380
TXT Subject matter under subclass 375 having blocks, rails, or track-sections
    which slide into place.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273,    392 and 430, for similar devices.


CLS 246/381
TXT Subject matter under subclass 380 in which the rails slide in a direction
    longitudinal with reference to the traffic.


CLS 246/382
TXT Subject matter under class definition having a switch which is combined
    with various types of movable-rail substitutes for rigid frogs, insuring an
    unbroken rail at the frog-point, and which is provided with mechanism for
    the simultaneous actuation of the switch and the frog substitute.

    (1)     Note.  The subclass also includes movable-rail frogs intended to be
    used as an element in a frogless switch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    274     and 275+, for similar frog structure.


CLS 246/383
TXT Subject matter under subclass 382, having switch-connected frogs in which
    sections of the siding rail slide, swing, or fold into position,
    overlapping the main-line rail.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    274,    376 and 429, for similar frog structure.


CLS 246/384
TXT Subject matter under subclass 383 having switch-connected frogs in which
    two sections of the siding-rail meet over the main-line rail.


CLS 246/385
TXT Subject matter under subclass 382 having a pivoted tongue or pointed double
    rail which swings between two fixed wing-rails.


CLS 246/386
TXT Subject matter under subclass 385 in which the tongue or double rail is not
    pointed, but has one or more stub or beveled ends.


CLS 246/387
TXT Subject matter under subclass 382 in which an end-pivoted rail is placed at
    the frog-point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    377,    for pivoted rail continuous rail crossings.


CLS 246/388
TXT Subject matter under subclass 382 in which a center-pivoted rail under
    subclass 382 is placed at the frog-point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    377,    for pivoted rail continuous rail crossings.


CLS 246/389
TXT Subject matter under subclass 382 in which two or more rails are
    simultaneously swung into position.


CLS 246/390
TXT Subject matter under subclass 389 in which two or more moving stub-rails
    swing, with reverse motion, into connection with each other.


CLS 246/391
TXT Subject matter under subclass 389 in which switch-connected frogs are
    provided with a fixed frog-point and swinging wing-rails.


CLS 246/392
TXT Subject matter under subclass 382 having moving rails which slide laterally
    into position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    380+    and 430, for sliding rail crossings or switches.


CLS 246/393
TXT Subject matter under class definition having means located at switches for
    their manual actuation, usually provided with a target or other visual
    signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21+,    104+, 111+, 118+, and 143+, for manual actuation in connection with
    block and other systems.

    144,    278, 284, and 290+, for switch-stand structure.

    489,    for manual-actuation devices.


CLS 246/394
TXT Subject matter under subclass 393 having switch stands equipped with
    mechanism for actuating cab signal or train-control mechanism on
    approaching train when the switch is open.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    117, 119, 120, and 167, and appropriate indented subclasses, and
    all subclasses referred to in the search notes appended thereto.


CLS 246/395
TXT Subject matter under subclass 393 having stands which insure the resetting
    of the switch to "unbroken main" after the passage of the train, either
    automatically by energy other than that of the moving vehicle or by alarms
    or other devices insuring manual actuation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280+,   315, 316, and 317, for resetting mechanism and devices.


CLS 246/396
TXT Subject matter under subclass 395 having switch-actuating mechanism
    provided with train-actuated latch-release mechanism, permitting the switch
    to be thrown to "main-line clear" by the force of springs or counterweights
    as the train approaches.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238,    244, 258+, 263, 300, and 325, for electric latch and clutch release.

    299,    301, 302, and 324, for mechanical latch and clutch release.


CLS 246/397
TXT Subject matter under subclass 395 having a switch stand in which the switch
    is held open by the switchman against the action of springs,
    counterweights, etc., the switch automatically closing when released.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    279,    281, 304+, and 315, for vehicle or hand restrained devices.


CLS 246/398
TXT Subject matter under subclass 395 having a switch stand in which the
    switch, after being opened manually, is held open, by the action of the
    car-wheels upon treadles and other devices, against springs or
    counterweights or their equivalents, the switch automatically closing after
    the passage of the train.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281,    304+ and 315, for vehicle-restrained devices.


CLS 246/399
TXT Subject matter under subclass 395 having means for detaining the switchman
    at the switch until it is properly closed and locked, either by confinement
    in cages or by means of handcuffs, shakles or other body-locks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 304 for electric signal box
    systems having detention devices at the signal boxes.


CLS 246/400
TXT Subject matter under subclass 395 having switch keys which cannot be
    removed from the switch-lock until the switch has been properly reset and
    locked.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    414,    for locks built into the structure of the switch-stand.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclasses 389 and 441 for lock and latch structure.


CLS 246/401
TXT Subject matter under subclass 393 having switch stands with special locks
    acting directly on the switch-rails or on moving parts other than the
    operating-rod and connected to the switch-stand proper through the
    switch-rails.

    (1)     Note.  In many cases the lock does not operate and permit the
    actuating-lever to complete its throw until the switch comes home into
    position, thereby indicating when, because of an obstruction or from any
    other cause, the switch is not fully thrown.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15      and 131+, appropriate subclasses for interlocking devices.


CLS 246/402
TXT Subject matter under subclass 401 having a switch stand in which the lock
    is actuated by the rotation of a shaft placed transversely to the
    switch-rails.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    448,    for locking switches.


CLS 246/403
TXT Subject matter under subclass 393 having a switch stand specially adapted
    for the actuation of three and multiple throw switches.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329     and 440, for three throw switches and track mechanism.


CLS 246/404
TXT Subject matter under subclass 393 having a switch stand provided with means
    for adjusting the throw of the switch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    450+,   for adjustable tie bars.


CLS 246/405
TXT Subject matter under subclass 393 having a spiral cam for transmitting
    motion to the switch-rails.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    303     and 333, for similar switch-actuating mechanism.


CLS 246/406
TXT Subject matter under subclass 393 having gearing for transmitting motion to
    the switch-rails.


CLS 246/407
TXT Subject matter under subclass 393 having stands not hereinbefore classified
    as to function, and defined by structural characteristics.


CLS 246/408
TXT Subject matter under subclass 407 having stands without projections above
    the pavement liable to be damaged by street traffic, and so especially
    adapted for use by street-railways in cities and towns.


CLS 246/409
TXT Subject matter under subclass 407 having switch stands provided with an
    elevated semaphore-signal usually used at the entrance to main-line sidings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    479+,   for semaphores.


CLS 246/410
TXT Subject matter under subclass 407 having switch stands which are actuated
    by a vertical lever.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278+,   284+ and 290+, for automatic switch stands.


CLS 246/411
TXT Subject matter under subclass 410 having switch stands of low construction
    specially adapted for use in yards.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 193-197 for
    lever guide locks.


CLS 246/412
TXT Subject matter under subclass 407 having a switch stand actuated by a
    horizontal lever and usually also having a horizontal locking-segment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278+,   284+ and 290+, for automatic switch stands.


CLS 246/413
TXT Subject matter under subclass 412 having a switch stand which has a pivoted
    arm, which drops into a notch in the locking-segment, forming an automatic
    lock.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144+,   for signal-actuating interlocking switch stand.

    314,    for vehicle-actuated switches.


CLS 246/414
TXT Subject matter under subclass 413 having an automatic spring key-lock built
    into the body of the stand or lever.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400,    for key-retaining switch stands.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, appropriate subclasses, particularly 193-197 for locks and
    lever guide locks.


CLS 246/415
TXT Subject matter under class definition having means for enabling a
    succession of cars to pass to a selected one of several diverging lines of
    track.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144+,   158, 162, 176, 217, 220, 226+, 233, 234, 239, 253, 259, 266+, 277,
    and 314+, for the structure of switches generally.

    319+,   for spring switches which yield to the car-wheels while passing
    through them trailing, and are hence actuated by the energy of the vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 195 for slot-switch structure approximating to
    railway-switch structure.

    186,    Merchandising, subclasses 19+, disclosing switches for cash-carrier
    and store-service railways.


CLS 246/416
TXT Subject matter under subclass 415 having switches and connecting-tracks
    placed at diagonal crossings and permitting a change of direction from one
    line to another, as well as a continuance upon the same line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273     and 379, for continuous rail crossings.


CLS 246/417
TXT Subject matter under subclass 415 having a switch so constructed as to
    obviate the use of rigid or spring rail frogs or movable-rail substitutes
    for frogs, one or more movable devices performing the double function of a
    frog and a switch.


CLS 246/418
TXT Subject matter under subclass 417 having a single movable switch-rail
    extending from the switch-point to the point where the frog would normally
    be placed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    274,    for switch-connected frogs operated by vehicle energy.


CLS 246/419
TXT Subject matter under subclass 415 having a switch which is more or less
    modified in construction by the presence of conduits, third rails, and
    cables and conducting-wires of cable and electric railways.

    (1)     Note.  Includes some devices which operate automatically.


CLS 246/420
TXT Subject matter under subclass 415 having a switch through which, however
    set, an ordinary train can be run trailing without derailment and without
    moving any parts of the switch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290+    and 319+, for spring-switches which also accomplish this function
    by springing the switch aside.


CLS 246/421
TXT Subject matter under subclass 420 having a switch provided with one or more
    devices, called "risers", upon which the wheels are carried over the top of
    the stock-rail and are guided into position by the action of the guard rail
    or grooves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    432,    455 and 469, for switch and crossing risers.


CLS 246/422
TXT Subject matter under subclass 420 having a switch provided with fixed
    points and moving guard-rails, the function of the latter being to direct
    the wheels to the proper track.


CLS 246/423
TXT Subject matter under subclass 415 having point switches provided with
    devices for rerailing cars running facing when derailed or split by the
    failure of the points to come fully home.


CLS 246/424
TXT Subject matter under subclass 415 having switches without movable parts,
    the direction taken by the car being determined in various ways, some of
    which are specified in the following subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    186,    Merchandising, subclasses 20+, for selective switches.


CLS 246/425
TXT Subject matter under subclass 424 having a switch of such construction that
    the car can be drawn over and directed to the main or branch track by the
    side draft or internal traction of a team of draft-animals.


CLS 246/426
TXT Subject matter under subclass 424 having a switch in which wheels of
    special construction (as, for example, when provided with extra flanges)
    determine the direction which the car is to take.


CLS 246/427
TXT Subject matter under subclass 415 having switches without moving parts
    which divert trains running facing onto the siding and allow trains running
    trailing to continue, underailed, upon the main line, or vice versa.

    (1)     Note.  The vehicle-energy-actuated switches of subclasses 319+ all
    perform an identical function, but are provided with moving parts actuated
    by the passing wheels when trailing.


CLS 246/428
TXT Subject matter under subclass 415 having switches so constructed as not to
    be readily clogged by snow and ice, which is usually either melted or
    automatically removed by the movement of the switch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    444,    for self-cleaning switches.


CLS 246/429
TXT Subject matter under subclass 415 having continuous main-line rails and
    switch-points which overlap same when set for siding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    445+,   for stub switches.


CLS 246/430
TXT Subject matter under subclass 415 having a switch in which a plate carrying
    a section of track-rail slides laterally.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    380     and 392, for sliding rail structure.


CLS 246/431
TXT Subject matter under subclass 415 having switches in which the moving rails
    revolve or oscillate about an axis parallel to the rails.


CLS 246/432
TXT Subject matter under subclass 415 having a switch in which the wheel rides
    upon a riser block or rail, and is thereby lifted and drawn over the top of
    a gauge-rail by the action of guard rails or grooves.

    (1)     Note.  Includes switches of the so-called "Wharton" type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    421,    455 and 469, for switch and crossing risers.


CLS 246/433
TXT Subject matter under subclass 415 having a switch which moves vertically
    instead of horizontally and with points usually rising and falling
    alternately.


CLS 246/434
TXT Subject matter under subclass 415 having a switch in which one or both of
    the main-line rails are sprung laterally, often against a fixed point-rail.


CLS 246/435
TXT Subject matter under subclass 415 having a switch in which the ends of one
    or both of the movable switch-rails terminate in points, as opposed to stub
    ends, the stationary rail being unbroken.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 195, for slot-switch structure which
    approximates to railway-switch structure.

    186,    Merchandising, subclass 19, for switch structure.


CLS 246/436
TXT Subject matter under subclass 435 having point switches in which the
    stock-rail is recessed to receive the point-rail.


CLS 246/437
TXT Subject matter under subclass 435 having a point switch which has renewable
    or reinforced points.


CLS 246/438
TXT Subject matter under subclass 435 having a switch with a fixed frog or
    switch mate in one rail and a moving point in the other.


CLS 246/439
TXT Subject matter under subclass 435 having point switches in which one point
    is placed in advance of the other.

    (1)     Note.  These switches are known in the art as the "Vaughn" type,
    from the name of the inventor.


CLS 246/440
TXT Subject matter under subclass 435 having a point switch for passing to one
    of three different tracks.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329     and 403, for three throw switches.


CLS 246/441
TXT Subject matter under subclass 435 having a point switch provided with a
    guard-rail, which by contact with the rim of the tread of the wheel forces
    the flange of the wheel away from the switch-points.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    456,    for similar structure in crossings.


CLS 246/442
TXT Subject matter under subclass 435 having triangular-shaped and
    comparatively short pivoted single points extensively used on the sharp
    turnouts of street-railways and placed in one of the gauge-rails, a fixed
    point or switch mate being placed in the other rail.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 195, for slot-switch structure which
    approximates to railway-switch structure.


CLS 246/443
TXT Subject matter under subclass 442 having locking devices of various kinds
    placed in the beds of tongue-switches for holding the point in position.


CLS 246/444
TXT Subject matter under subclass 442 having point switches usually of the
    tongue type, so designed as to automatically remove the accumulated dirt,
    which tends to obstruct their motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    428,    for snow-protecting point switches.


CLS 246/445
TXT Subject matter under subclass 415 having switches in which the ends of the
    moving rails are squarely truncated.


CLS 246/446
TXT Subject matter under subclass 445 having stub switches composed of pairs of
    parallel instead of single moving rails.


CLS 246/447
TXT Subject matter under subclass 445 having stub switches provided with
    devices for preventing the creeping of the switch or the jar of wheels
    passing over gaps at the stub ends of the switch-rails.


CLS 246/448
TXT Subject matter under subclass 415 having means other than portable padlocks
    or tower-operated bolts which lock the switch-rails, switch-rods, or
    connecting-bars in place, but do not lock parts of the switch-stand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401+,   for rail lock and position indication.


CLS 246/449
TXT Subject matter under subclass 415 having rods connecting the two moving
    rails of a switch and determining their spacing.


CLS 246/450
TXT Subject matter under subclass 449 in which the tie rods are provided with
    means for adjusting the position of the switch-rails with reference to the
    stock-rails.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403,    for three or multiple throw switch stands.

    404,    for adjustable throw switch stands.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 586, for longitudinally
    adjustable rods or pitmans.


CLS 246/451
TXT Subject matter under subclass 450 having tie-bars in which the adjustment
    is made by means of eccentrics.


CLS 246/452
TXT Subject matter under subclass 415 having a rod connecting the switch or
    signal to the actuating stand or rod and by means of which the switch is
    thrown.


CLS 246/453
TXT Subject matter under subclass 415 having means designed for supporting the
    moving rails of switches.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    467,    for crossing chairs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 16, for incidental disclosure of railway
    chair and plate structure.

    238,    Railways:  Surface Track, subclass 187, for rail joint chairs.


CLS 246/454
TXT Subject matter under class definition having means placed at the common
    point of two or more traction-rails or opposite a tongue-switch and
    arranged to permit the passage of the wheel-flanges.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    238,    Railways:  Surface Track, subclass 151, for filler-blocks and other
    devices used as foot-guards in crossings, frogs, and mates.


CLS 246/455
TXT Subject matter under subclass 454 having crossings, frogs and mates in
    which an outer rail member with riser ends is employed, upon which the
    unguttered or rim portion of the wheel-tread runs, thereby obviating the
    jolting due to guttered wheels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    421,    432 and 469, for switch and crossing risers.


CLS 246/456
TXT Subject matter under subclass 454 having crossings, frogs, and mates
    provided with a guard-rail acting on the rim of the wheel-tread, and
    thereby guiding the wheel-flanges past the frog and crossing points.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    441,    for switch-tread guard rails.


CLS 246/457
TXT Subject matter under subclass 454 having crossings which have a hard
    filler, with end risers, placed at the crossing-point between the gauge and
    guard rails, affording a bearing-surface upon which the flange of the wheel
    runs, carrying the wheel-tread clear of the gap in the gauge-rail.

    (1)     Note.  The subclass contains a few patents in which a
    flange-bearing is obtained without the use of a riser by lowering the tread
    of the rail until the flange of the wheel strikes the bottom of the frog.


CLS 246/458
TXT Subject matter under subclass 457 having frogs provided with flange-bearing
    risers.


CLS 246/459
TXT Subject matter under subclass 454 having crossings, frogs, and mates whose
    components, often pieces of rail, are joined by hot metal, usually iron or
    steel, cast around them, which usually enters cavities therein, binding the
    entire structure, partly by bonding and partly by a welding action.


CLS 246/460
TXT Subject matter under subclass 454 having crossings, frogs, and mates
    provided with centrally-inserted pieces of manganese or other hard steel
    adapted especially for resisting wear and for being replaced when worn down
    or destroyed.


CLS 246/461
TXT Subject matter under subclass 460 in which the inserts are secured in
    position, in whole or in part, by casting hot and comparatively soft metal
    (as spelter) or cement, which enters sundry cavities and on cooling secures
    the block in position or prevents the bolts, wedges, or other fastenings
    used from working loose under stress.


CLS 246/462
TXT Subject matter under subclass 454 having crossings, frogs, and mates in
    which the rail-pieces are riveted or bolted through their flanges to a
    foundation-plate, usually of wrought-iron.  There may or may not in
    addition be filler-blocks and bolts through the web of the rails.


CLS 246/463
TXT Subject matter under subclass 454 having crossings, frogs, and mates built
    up from rail-pieces spaced by filler-blocks and secured by bolts passing
    through the fillers and through the webs of the rails.


CLS 246/464
TXT Subject matter under subclass 454 having crossings, frogs, and mates of
    solid cast or wrought construction or those whose component parts are
    joined by welding, (other than cast-welding).


CLS 246/465
TXT Subject matter under subclass 454 having means placed at the crossings of
    the rails of two intersecting tracks and consisting, in their simplest
    form, of four solid frogs joined together with rails to form a connected
    system.

    (1)     Note.  Only structure peculiar to crossings will be found in this
    subclass and its minor subdivisions. Structures common to frogs and
    crossings alike will be found in the preceding subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111+,   273 and 375+, for the structure of the crossing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    238,    Railways:  Surface Track, subclass 151 for filler-blocks and other
    devices used as foot-guards in crossings, frogs and mates.


CLS 246/466
TXT Subject matter under subclass 465 having crossings placed at the
    intersection of steam with street railway tracks and in which the former
    have unbroken lines of rail.


CLS 246/467
TXT Subject matter under subclass 465 having means in the nature of
    rail-supports for holding and supporting the ends of rail-pieces in
    building up a crossing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    453,    and also see the search notes appended thereto, for chairs and
    plates.


CLS 246/468
TXT Subject matter under subclass 454 having means placed at the intersection
    of two gauge-rails of railway-track in order to afford flangeways for the
    wheels.

    (1)     Note.  Only structure peculiar to frogs will be found in this
    subclass and its minor subdivisions.  Structure common to frogs and
    crossings alike will be found in the subclasses preceding subclass 465.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    274,    275+ and 382+, for frog structure.


CLS 246/469
TXT Subject matter under subclass 468 having a frog in which the wheels are
    raised and carried over the unbroken main track by means of fixed elevated
    side rails or risers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    421,    432 and 455, for risers.


CLS 246/470
TXT Subject matter under subclass 468 having rail frogs which have
    spacing-fillers whose parts are secured in position by clamps or clamps and
    wedges.


CLS 246/471
TXT Subject matter under subclass 468 having frogs of composite (mostly
    horizontal) structure built up in various ways from pieces of wrought or
    cast metal other than pieces of rail.


CLS 246/472
TXT Subject matter undr subclass 454 having details relating to the
    construction of various types of crossings, frogs and mates.


CLS 246/473
TXT Subject matter under the class definition having audible or visual means of
    communication especially adapted and intended for directing and controlling
    the traffic over and upon railways.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     111, 125, 209, 260, and 292+, for signal structure.


CLS 246/473.1
TXT Highway crossing:

    Subject matter under subclass 473 including devices which indicate to
    pedestrians or highway vehicle operators that a train is approaching a
    highway crossing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125+,   for systems which control highway crossing indicators by automatic
    train actuation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 928 for traffic control
    systems or devices of a similar nature used in other than a railroad
    crossing context.


CLS 246/473.2
TXT Wigwag type:

    Subject matter under subclass 473.1 in which the device includes an
    oscillating member (e.g., swinging arm, scanning light beam).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 481 and 932.1 for devices
    of a similar nature used in a road vehicle or traffic context other than
    railroad type.


CLS 246/473.3
TXT Light beam projecting:

    Subject matter under subclass 473 including devices which give an
    indication by means of a projected beam of light.


CLS 246/474
TXT Subject matter under subclass 473 having signals on the track or roadway
    provided with reflectors, which reflect light from the headlight either
    back to the engineer or forward, as around curves, etc., to notify an
    approaching train.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for track-reflectors used in block-signal systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    515+ for signal reflectors, per se, and subclasses 838+ for mirrors, per se.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 296 for reflectors in combination with
    illuminating means.


CLS 246/475
TXT Subject matter under subclass 473 having "drawf" or "pot" signals, so
    called which are low compact signals placed at switches and used mostly in
    yards where switches are operated from towers.


CLS 246/476
TXT Subject matter under subclass 473 having switch-position indicators such as
    signals, lamps, and targets actuated by the movement of a switch or
    switch-stand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212+,   for detonating signals placed in position by the motion of a switch
    or switch-stand.

    220,    for electrically-actuated switch signals.

    393+,   for switch signals, targets, etc., actuated by the switch-stand.


CLS 246/477
TXT Subject matter under subclass 473 having visual signals adapted to be
    temporarily placed upon or secured to the permanent way to advise
    approaching trains of danger ahead.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207,    for portable track trips.


CLS 246/478
TXT Subject matter under subclass 473 having signals whose moving parts are for
    the most part enclosed or boxed in for protection from the weather-as, for
    example, the disk and circular-box or banjo type of signal.


CLS 246/479
TXT Subject matter under subclass 473 having visual signals of the well-known
    railway- semaphore type--viz., a blade with parallel or but
    slightly-diverging edges, pivoted upon one side of a post or mast and
    capable of being rotated to a vertical, inclined, or horizontal position.
    They are usually provided with signal-lamps and spectacles set with colored
    glasses, corresponding to the various aspects which they can present.

    (1)     Note.  Signals of this well-known type are here included even when
    the claims do not specifically involve other elements of railway signaling.
     "Sema- phores", so called, of special or un- usual shape, if claimed in
    connection with railway apparatus and appliances, will be found in subclass
    473 of this class; if not so claimed, in Class 116, Signals and Indicators,
    subclasses 200+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    473,    (see Note 1).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, (see Note 1).


CLS 246/480
TXT Subject matter under subclass 479 having semaphores which are operated in
    the upper quadrant and moved upward instead of downward when passing from
    horizontal to vertical position, so that deposits of ice on the arm will
    increase rather than decrease the tendency to assume the stop or danger
    position.  They are not usually provided with couterweights.

    (1)     Note.  Pivoted-arm signals, not strictly semaphores within the
    definition of subclass 479, are here included, provided they work in the
    upper quadrant.


CLS 246/481
TXT Double semaphores under subclass 479 on the same mast, usually operated by
    one lever in succession.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     38, 39, 44+, 51, and  52, for semaphores in block-signal stems.

    224,    for home and distant signal semaphores.


CLS 246/482
TXT Subject matter under subclass 479 having semaphores in which the novelty
    resides in the arm or blade or in its mode of mounting.


CLS 246/483
TXT Subject matter under subclass 482 having semaphores in which the novelty
    resides in means for illuminating the arm or blade by either natural or
    artificial light not emanating from the train.

    (1)     Note.  Pivoted-arm signals, not strictly semaphores within the
    definition of subclass 479, are here included, provided they disclose means
    for illuminating the arm-or blade. Signal-arms or targets illuminated by
    light from the train will be found in subclass 474.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    474     and 479, (see Note 1).


CLS 246/484
TXT Subject matter under subclass 479 having semaphores with lamps or
    spectacles of special structure or provided with means for holding or
    moving the lamp or its parts.

    (1)     Note.  For means for mounting the lenses see Class 362
    Illumination, subclasses 455+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 257+ for lamps which may be used for
    signalling (see Note 1).


CLS 246/485
TXT Subject matter under subclass 479 having means located at or upon the post
    for actuating, locking, or controlling the movements of the semaphore.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      14, 20, 111, 118, 120, 125, 209, 220, 221, and various indented
    subclasses (except the "switch" subclasses thereunder) for various means
    for controlling semaphores.

    257,    262 and 292, for various means for actuating semaphores.


CLS 246/486
TXT Subject matter under subclass 473 having means placed at the approach to
    overhead or highway bridges as a warning to brakemen on the roofs of cars
    that there is not sufficient clearance for safety.  They are usually
    yielding obstructions, such as hanging cords, rods resiliently mounted, etc.


CLS 246/487
TXT Subject matter under subclass 473 having means adapted to be placed on or
    near the track-rails, so as to be exploded by a passing train as a warning
    of danger ahead.

    (1)     Note.  Only the structure of the container which holds the
    explosive substance is here classified.  The explosive itself will be found
    in Class 149, Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210+,   for detonating signals placed in position by the movement of a
    switch, switch-stand, or visual signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, appropriate subclasses for containers
    not specially designed for railway use and subclass 336 for red fire fuses
    used by brakeman and others in railway signaling.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, appropriate
    subclasses for explosive or ignitable compositions which may be useful for
    signal purposes.


CLS 246/488
TXT Subject matter under subclass 473 having collections of signal devices for
    the use of brakemen in protecting their trains--such as flags, lanterns,
    torpedoes etc.,--fastened or otherwise kept together until needed for use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 223+ for a container for
    a railway signal kit.  Where the container forms part of the signal device
    or is particularly configured to such railway signals, classification is in
    this (246) class.


CLS 246/489
TXT Subject matter under class definition having means for manually or pedally
    actuating signals, switches and other movable elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    393+,   and all subclasses mentioned in the search notes appended thereto
    for manually actuated switch stands.


CLS 248/
TTL SUPPORTS

CLS 248/
TXT This class provides for devices which carry the weight of an article or
    articles or otherwise hold or steady it or them against the pull of
    gravity, and devices for holding an article to its support, which are not
    otherwise provided for.

    (1)     Note.  Devices having structural features limiting them to use in a
    particular art remain with the art.

    (2)     Note.  The line between this class and Classes 362, Illumination,
    313, Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 39, and 431, Combustion
    is as follows:

    Class 223, Apparel Apparatus, subclass 120 for supports, bases and stands
    claimed in connection with means for making, repairing or maintaining in
    condition articles of apparel.

    Class 362 takes any combination of a support with significant structure of
    the light distributing means or the combination of the light distributing
    and generating means.

    Class 313, subclasses 49+ is the generic class for the combination of a
    support with significant structure of an electric space discharge device.
    See section VII of the class definition for the other classes which provide
    for the combination of a support and a discharge device.

    The mere supporting structure goes to Class 248 and such supporting
    structure may include conduits for fuel or energy and mere cut-offs
    therefor. Supporting structures limited to use with lighting devices are in
    Class 362.  Supports for a light generating device are in Class 248 unless
    a significant structure of the light generator is claimed, in which case it
    goes to Class 431 or 362.

    The mere naming of a light or discharge device as the thing supported will
    not operate to take the case out of class 248.  If the support is in itself
    an essential part of the lamp or discharge device such as are many lamp
    bases, it remains in the art clas  See sections XI, 3 and XII, 1 of the
    class definition of Class 313 for the classification of an envelope with a
    base attached thereto.

    (3)     Note.  For supports for shocks of grain or hay in the field, see
    Class 56, Harvesters, subclass 431 and Class 211, Supports:  Racks,
    subclass 29.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 571.1+, 589+,
    592+, 621+, and 643+ for supports limited by structure to use with basins
    or with bath tubs.

    5,      Beds, appropriate subclasses for beds and subclasses 127+ for
    supports limited by structure to use for supporting a hammock.

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., appropriate subclasses for
    fasteners. Fasteners such as pins, clasps, buckles, etc., are provided for
    in Class 24, whether simple or combined, as clasp-pin, clasp-clasp, etc.
    Combinations of a fastener, simple or combined with a bracket or stand, are
    in Class 248, and cross-referenced to Class 24 when desirable.  A mere
    fastening means as a plate, integral with or attached to the base of a
    clamp, is not considered as a bracket and such combination goes to Class
    24.  Bracket hooks wherein the article carrying portion thereof is in the
    form of a hook are in Class 248.

    27,     Undertaking, subclass 25.1 for corpse chin supports.

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 231 for shears combined with a support therefor.

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 299 for supports for sight line
    instruments.

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, appropriate subclasses for ironing
    devices combined with supports.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclasses 39+, 41.01, 42+, and 44+ for plant and
    tree supports and flower holders.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 27+ for a specific
    building structure in combination with a disparate article or article
    support.

    54,     Harness, subclass 84 for fire harness supports.

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 431, see (3) Note above.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 361 for glassworking molds combined
    with supporting or carrying means; see the "Search Notes" thereunder.

    84,     Music, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 280 and 421
    for supports claimed in combination with musical instruments or supports,
    structurally limited to use with specific musical instruments.

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, appropriate subclasses for
    a horizontally supported planar surface.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclasses 50+ and the
    notes appurtenant thereto, for supports for safes, vaults, etc.

    114,    Ships, subclass 363 for foot supports for boats.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 510 for steam boiler
    supports.

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 581+ for devices accommodating shoes to foot
    deformities and remaining in the shoe upon removal of the shoe from the
    foot.

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 329, particularly subclasses 257-260, for
    supports and stands, combined or peculiarly adapted for use with tobacco
    users' appliances.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 106 and 364 for means for supporting inverted supply receptacles
    upon receivers for draining.

    142,    Wood Turning, subclasses 48 and 49 for wood-working tool rests;
    subclass 57 for work holders for use in wood turning.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 397+ for centering or supporting means
    for a metal shaping core.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, for supports for
    electrical conduits, cables, conductors, housings and insulators limited by
    claimed structure to electrical use.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, appropriate subclasses for a motor vehicle having
    means for supporting an accessory or component of the vehicle.

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 200+ and 208+ for sound attenuating means,
    per se.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, appropriate subclasses, for a
    workman's support of ladder or scaffold type.

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 205+ for supports for vehicle brake elements.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 115 for clutch supports.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 300+ for supports limited by
    structure to use with conveyors.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 285, 286+ and
    297 for supports specialized for electrodes and work being treated in
    electrolytic devices.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 409+ and
    subclass 508 for supports for sifting elements and stratifies.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 241+ and 249+ for
    separators having supports there provided for, and see subclass 94 of this
    class.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, for supports for plural articles.  Class 211 is a
    specific class under the class definition of this class (248).  In general,
    Class 211 is the generic support class for plural articles and Class 248 is
    the generic support class for single articles.  However, in Class 248,
    subclasses 235 through 250, inclusive, 309.1 through 316.7, inclusive, 500
    through 509, inclusive, and 511 - 541 inclusive, additionally provide for
    supports of plural devices of the same (i.e., nondiverse) nature, and any
    of the subclasses in this class (248) will take plural diverse supports
    where one of the supported devices is ancillary to the main device
    supported (e.g., check, label and tag holders combined with an article
    support); while in Class 211, subclasses 14 through inclusive, additionally
    provide for supports for single articles.

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclass 189 for auxiliary supports limited by
    structure to use with traversing hoists.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 3.3+, 3.9+, 476+, and 628+ for supports
    tied up with the structure of a receptacle as such, and for lap or leg
    supported pail holders, see subclasses 17.1+.  In general, as between the
    receptacle classes and the support classes, the receptacle classes provide
    for the combination of a receptacle plus support:  except, the support
    classes will accept a claim to a support combined with a receptacle,
    wherein the claim (a) nominally recites the receptacle, or (b) recites only
    so much of the receptacle structure as is needed to cooperate with the
    support, or (c) recites only those receptacle features which have been
    modified specifically to cooperate with the support.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 186+ for article dispensers, not
    otherwise provided for, and in which the supply container is movably
    mounted for dispensing, and subclasses 282+ for article dispensers provided
    with particular casing or support features in combination.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 92+ for supports for collapsible wall type
    receptacles; 160+ for supports for movably mounted dispensing receptacles;
    173+ for supports for other dispensing receptacles; and 577 for an inkstand
    comprising a dispensing inkwell and a support therefor.

    238,    Railways:  Surface Track, subclasses 264+ for railway rail supports.

    241,    Solid Material Communication or Disintegration, subclasses 285.1+
    for supports for comminutors or comminutor parts.  See section 11 of the
    class definition of that class (241).

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 398+ for a support for
    a reeling device, and subclasses 130+ and 134+ for a spool or bobbin
    support.

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 205+ for mold adjuncts which function to
    support mold parts.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 428+ for a fluent material support for
    the purpose of irradiating the support with nuclear or invisible
    electromagnetic radiation with or without an irradiating source, subclasses
    453.11+ for an object support for the purpose of irradiating the supported
    object with nuclear or invisible electromagnetic radiation with or without
    a support for the radiation source or a support for a detector of radiation
    from the source, and subclass 522.1 for supports for nuclear or
    electromagnetic radiation.

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses for work holders as the
    generic place for work holders, per se.  Patents to a support capable of
    general utility, though disclosed as supporting a work holder but, which
    support does not include elements which contact the work, are classified in
    appropriate subclasses of Class 248 on the basis of the claimed support
    structure.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 137 for article
    supports having a portion adapted to be gripped by the hand for lifting and
    carrying the support.

    296,    Land Vehicle:  Bodies and Tops, subclass 35.1 for vehicle body
    hold-downs and supports.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, appropriate subclasses for a support device
    limited to use by a seated occupant especially subclasses 187+ for a
    kneeling stand of the prie-dieu type, subclasses 391+ for a stool with
    resilient surfaces, disclosed as used by a seated occupant, and subclass
    411.1 for armpit engaging props disclosed as used by seated persons.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, appropriate subclasses for supports,
    cabinets.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 49+ provides for
    electric space discharge devices in combination with a mere supporting
    means therefor. See subclasses 238+ (of class 313) which provide for
    electric lamp and discharge devices which have supporting or spacing
    structure for the electrodes or shielding members thereof.  Class 248,
    subclass 50, provides for supports for elongated discharge or lamp tubes
    (e.g, neon) where no electrical features are involved.  Class 174,
    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 138 provides for
    insulated supports for neon and similar elongated tubular lamps where the
    support includes no structure limiting the device to use with electric
    lamps. Also, see (2) Note above.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 869 for loop type
    antennas with a rotatable support, and subclasses 878+ for antennas with a
    support for the antenna, reflector or director.  See (1) Note under
    subclass 700 of this class (343) for the classification lines between
    antennas and supports.

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclass 38
    for adjustable stands or bases which support ophthalmic diagnostic test
    instruments or test charts.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 34+, 197 and 243 for motion
    picture apparatus with structural cooperation with supporting structure.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    409+ for binoculars with body support or handle and subclasses 811+ for
    lens supports.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 314 for lamp chimney supports, and
    subclasses 453+ for shade and bowl supports.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 20, 68+, 79+,
    177+, 195, 205, and 208+ for various means to support an object combined
    with X-ray devices.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 454+ for supports limited by
    structure to use with telephones.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    169, 188 or 205 for a microphone or speaker support or mounting.

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 428+ for bearing mounting, or supports.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 419+ for a support limited by structure to
    use with photographic cameras.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 377+ for holder of original and
    subclass 393 for copy medium input tray; all support structure is limited
    to use with an electrophotographic device.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 7 for bilge and keel
    blocks for supporting a marine vessel in dry dock.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 297 and 300+ for racks or supports
    combined with a sterilizer.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 298+ for a candle holder and subclass 343
    for a burner having a supporting bracket or leg.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for electrical
    connector; especially subclasses 527+ for an electrical connector with
    mounting or supporting means therefor.

    452,    Butchering, subclasses 185+ for supports for meat and animal
    carcasses.


CLS 248/27.1
TXT Supports under the class definition for holding an instrument in a panel
    board opening.  This subclass may include devices where the instrument
    casing is modified solely for the purpose of holding it in the panel
    opening.


CLS 248/27.3
TXT Supports under subclass 27.1 in which the means for holding an instrument
    in a panel includes a biased clip means.


CLS 248/27.5
TXT Supports under the class definition for washboards.  These supports may or
    may not be permanently attached to the washboard.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 223+ for washboard
    structure.


CLS 248/27.8
TXT Supports under the class definition, peculiarly adapted for use in
    supporting wreaths, sprays, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 41.01, for cut flower supports having
    watering means. See also the notes to that subclass for search fields for
    other types of cut flower or plant holders also search subclasses 63 and
    66.1+ for growing plant supports.


CLS 248/37.3
TXT Device under the class definition for supporting cutlery, table forks,
    spoons and similar articles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 70.6 for a device which supports single
    or plural pieces of cutlery in a stored or nonuse position.


CLS 248/37.6
TXT Device under subclass 37.3 having means for attachment to a primary support
    and an article supporting portion projecting therefrom, said article
    supporting portion carrying the entire weight of the supported article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   for brackets of general utility.


CLS 248/48.1
TXT Supports under the class definition for eaves troughs usually attached to
    the roof or wall.


CLS 248/48.2
TXT Supports under subclass 48.1 of the wall bracket type secured to the wall
    of the building or the downwardly extending portion of the roof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48.1,   for both a wall bracket and roof attaching member in a single
    device.


CLS 248/49
TXT Supports under the class definition for a pipe or cable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75+,    for hose supports.

    353,    for clothes line props.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclasses 106+ for trolley rails and their supports,
    particularly subclass 111.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 342 for fluid handling systems combined
    with support for workmen or nonsystem material, and subclasses 393+ for
    fluid handling apparatus with a support therefor.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 108 and 113 for a pipe or
    cable support correlated with the structure of the pipe.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclasses 40+ and 48+ for electric cable and conductor
    supports limited by claimed structure, such as insulation etc., to
    electrical use, and subclasses 137+, particularly subclass 158 for
    electrical insulator supports.

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, subclasses 40+ for cable
    supports limited by structure to use with trolley cables.

    256,    Fences, subclasses 47+ for connections attaching a strand of the
    fence to a post, pole, stay, or the like upright having a structural shape.


CLS 248/50
TXT Supports under subclass 49 for a vapor discharge tube.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 541+ where the
    support is combined with the structure of a sign.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 138 where the
    support includes electrical insulating structure.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 49+ where the
    discharge device supported is not a lamp and significant structure of the
    discharge device is claimed.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 217+ where the support is combined with an
    elongated (e.g., fluorescent) lamp.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 226+ for an electrical connector
    to receive a fluorescent or a neon lamp.


CLS 248/51
TXT Supports under subclass 49 which support the conductor cord or tube of an
    electrically or gas energized tool and hold it away from the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclass 142 for the cord holder
    combined with a sadiron stand.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors, and Insulators, subclass 69 for
    extensible conductor structures.

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, subclasses 12+ for
    conductor cord take-ups.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 445+ for an electrical connectors
    having a flexible or pivoted cable guard; subclasses 449+ for an electrical
    connectors having stress relieving provision.


CLS 248/52
TXT Supports under subclass 51 which are mounted on the tool.


CLS 248/53
TXT Supports under subclass 49 for the coupling head of a train pipe.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 347+ for a supported, valved, train pipe.

    213,    Railway Draft Appliances, subclass 76 for the combination of a
    railway car coupling and a train pipe coupling.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 24+ for a pipe joint or
    coupling with means to guide the parts during assembly and means to support
    the same, and subclass 63 for a pipe joint or coupling supported from a
    railway vehicle.


CLS 248/55
TXT Supports under subclass 49 which have an antifriction element, such as a
    roller, etc., to provide for movement of the pipe relative to a fixed
    support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130     and 131, for receptacles rotatable on antifriction elements.


CLS 248/56
TXT Supports under subclass 49 in which the pipe or cable extends through an
    opening in a plate and the support holds the pipe or cable in the opening.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 17+, 50+ and
    66+ for electrical boxes, housings, and face plates having conduits or
    cables secured thereto.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 3.2+ for boxes, and subclasses 241+ for
    face plates having means for connecting thereto pipes or cables where no
    electrical characteristics are claimed.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 466.1 for self-luminous fluorescent or
    phosphorescent face plates, and subclasses 483.1+ for fluorescent or
    phosphorescent devices generally.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 154.1+ for a pipe or cable and
    box coupling, subclasses 136.1+ for a pipe or rod-to-pipe-to-plate
    coupling, and subclasses 189+ for an end to plate coupling, where no
    feature of the receptacle in addition to those necessary to define the
    coupling are claimed.


CLS 248/57
TXT Supports under subclass 56 in which the pipe or cable is positioned between
    two joists of a floor or wall.


CLS 248/58
TXT Supports under subclass 49 in which the pipe or cable is hung from above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48.1,   for suspension devices for eaves troughs.

    65+,    for mere brackets attached to a ceiling or other overhead support.

    317+,   for other suspended supports.


CLS 248/59
TXT Supports under subclass 58 in which the pipe or cable may be adjusted in a
    vertical direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48.1,   for eaves trough supports.


CLS 248/60
TXT Supports under subclass 58 in which the support is flexible by reason of
    the material from which it is made or by special joints.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for a flexible element which supports a pipe or cable from an
    overhead or messenger cable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 202+ for flexible suspensions means.


CLS 248/61
TXT Supports under subclass 58 in which the pipe or cable is suspended from an
    overhead cable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 41 for messenger
    cable supports restricted to electrical use, and subclass 160 for strand
    supported insulators.

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, subclasses 40+ for trolley
    line supports.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 119.12 for supports for clothes
    suspended from a taut clothesline.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 387 for means supported by, and maintaining the relative spacing
    between, longitudinal runs or an endless cable.


CLS 248/62
TXT Supports under subclass 58 which have as a part thereof a clamp for
    gripping the pipe or a ring through which it extends.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for a ring or clamp used to suspend a pipe or cable from an
    overhead or messenger cable.

    74.1+,  229.1+, and 313, for other supports with rings or clamps.


CLS 248/63
TXT Supports under subclass 58 which have as an element thereof a clamp to grip
    the cable.


CLS 248/64
TXT Supports under subclass 63 in which the clamp automatically releases when
    the strain is greater on one side thereof than on the other.


CLS 248/65
TXT Supports under subclass 49 in the form of a bracket.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48.2    for eaves trough wall brackets.

    103+,   115, 200+, and 674, for other brackets.

    534+    for a bracket type of supporting device having means for receiving
    a staff.


CLS 248/66
TXT Supports under subclass 65 for holding a road guard cable to its post.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    256,    Fences, subclass 13.1 for the support with the structure of a fence
    as such.


CLS 248/67
TXT Supports under subclass 65 for supporting the pipe and angle cock of a
    train air-brake system.


CLS 248/67.5
TXT Supports under subclass 65 in which two or more parts are assembled so as
    to secure the pipe or cable therebetween.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 156+ for
    insulating parts with conductors received or clamped therebetween.


CLS 248/67.7
TXT Supports under subclass 65 in which the pipe or cable holding element is
    positioned between and secured to two substantially parallel arms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 162 for an
    insulator positioned between two arms.


CLS 248/68.1
TXT Plural pipe or cable:

    Support under subclass 65 in which more than one pipe or cable is supported.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    512+,   for a supporting device having means for receiving a plurality of
    staffs.


CLS 248/69
TXT Supports under subclass 68.1 in which the pipes or cables are supported by
    means of a ring ancillary to the main bracket.


CLS 248/70
TXT Supports under subclass 65 in which the support has provisions whereby the
    pipe may be moved to various positions relative to its fixed support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48.2,   for eaves trough wall brackets.


CLS 248/71
TXT Supports under subclass 65 which have means permanently secured thereto for
    piercing the fixed support or penetrating a preformed opening therein to
    secure the bracket thereto.  This subclass does not include mere nails or
    screws.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48.2,   for eaves trough brackets, with support-piercing means.

    69,     for cable clamps and bridle rings having support piercing means.

    546,    for a support piercing or cutting means comprising means to aid in
    the installation thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 164+ for
    insulator brackets having support penetrating means.


CLS 248/72
TXT Supports under subclass 65 in which the bracket is clamped to a beam.


CLS 248/73
TXT Supports under subclass 65 in which the bracket is interlocked with the
    fixed support, usually without the use of bolts, etc., but a bolt or screw
    may be used to hold the bracket in interlocked relation.


CLS 248/74.1
TXT With ring or clamp:

    Support under subclass 65 which has as an element a holding means for
    gripping the pipe or cable or an annular means through which it extends.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for a pipe clamp for holding a pipe in a plate opening.

    62,     for a suspended pipe or cable support with a ring or clamp.

    66,     for a road guard cable clamp.

    67,     for a clamp for the pipe and angle cock of a train pipe system.

    69,     for a bracket with a bridle ring for plural pipes or cables.

    71,     for a pipe or cable ring or clamp  having support piercing means.


CLS 248/74.2
TXT Resilient gripping clip or clasp:

    Support under subclass 74.1 which is formed, at least in part, of flexible
    material and wherein clamping portions are biased into engagement with the
    pipe or cable by the flexibility of said resilient material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    316.1+, for a bracket in general wherein the article engaging portion
    comprises a resilient clip or clamp.

    560+,   for resilient supports in general.


CLS 248/74.3
TXT Flexible encircling band:

    Support under 74.1 which is formed, at least in part, of a playable ring
    which entirely surrounds the pipe or cable.


CLS 248/74.4
TXT Separable:

    Support under subclass 74.1 wherein the ring or clamp comprises a plurality
    of members which are readily spaced from each other and which in the normal
    operation of the device are apart when the pipe or cable is installed in
    the support.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for a ring or clamp
    comprising a threaded element, e.g. set screw, which is capable of
    separation from the rest of the structure but is not ordinarily separated
    therefrom when the pipe or cable is installed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    316.6,  for a separable article engaging clamp of general application.


CLS 248/74.5
TXT Cleat:

    Support under subclass 74.1 which includes a resilient strip or projection
    that holds the pipe or cable in engagement with a structural member or
    panel.


CLS 248/75
TXT Supports under the class definition for a hose and/or nozzle in either
    stored or operative position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 355.18 and 355.19 for fluid handling
    systems comprising a hose support and a flow control element, with
    actuation of the flow control being responsive to hose movement.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 196 for hoses
    combined with support means therefor and flow control elements which are
    actuated in response to movement of the hose to or from its support.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 398+ for a support for
    a reeling device.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 4+ for flow regulation
    comprising tube compressors.


CLS 248/76
TXT Supports under subclass 75 which have provisions for supporting the hose
    and nozzle partly in the hands of the operator and partly on the ground or
    other fixed support and also means to support them on a ladder.


CLS 248/77
TXT Supports under subclass 75 which have means for securing the hose and
    nozzle on a ladder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210+,   for other ladder secured brackets.


CLS 248/78
TXT Supports under subclass 77 which also have means whereby the hose and
    nozzle may be carried by the operator.

    (1)     Note.  For handgrips or holders attached to spray flow lines or
    spray nozzles, see Class 239, Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing,
    subclasses 525+ for handles on a supply container and attached spray nozzle
    see Class 239, subclasses 375+; for hand carriers for hose and nozzles, see
    Class 294, Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 16.


CLS 248/79
TXT Supports under subclass 75 in which the hose and/or nozzle is supported on
    a receptacle, such as a pail, tub or analogous device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205.1+, for receptacle-supported brackets.


CLS 248/80
TXT Supports under subclass 75 in the form of a stand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127+,   for other stands.


CLS 248/81
TXT Supports under subclass 80 which have a pivoted standard.


CLS 248/82
TXT Supports under subclass 80 which have a hose or nozzle clamp swingably
    mounted thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     86 and 88, for other swinging clamp hose or nozzle supports.


CLS 248/83
TXT Supports under subclass 80 in which the stand has more than one leg.


CLS 248/84
TXT Supports under subclass 83 which have a hose or nozzle clamp swingable
    mounted thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     86 and 88, for other swinging clamp hose or nozzle supports.


CLS 248/85
TXT Supports under subclass 83 in which the legs are made to be inserted into
    the ground.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87+,    for other ground inserted hose or nozzle stand supports.

    545,    for a support comprising a ground inserted anchor and means to aid
    in the insertion thereof.


CLS 248/86
TXT Supports under subclass 85 which have a hose or nozzle clamp swingable
    mounted thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     84 and 88, for other swinging clamp hose or nozzle supports.


CLS 248/87
TXT Supports under subclass 80 in which the standard thereof is adapted to be
    inserted into the ground.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85,     for other ground inserted pipe or nozzle supports.

    547,    for a ground inserted anchor and means to aid in the insertion
    thereof.


CLS 248/88
TXT Supports under subclass 87 which have a hose or nozzle clamp swingably
    mounted thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     84 and 86, for other swinging clamps hose or nozzle supports.


CLS 248/89
TXT Supports under subclass 75 in the form of a rack for storing the hose.


CLS 248/90
TXT Supports under subclass 89 in which the hose is folded on the rack.


CLS 248/91
TXT Supports under subclass 90 in which each fold of the hose is supported by a
    link.


CLS 248/92
TXT Supports under subclass 91 in which the link swings or folds to release the
    loops of the hose in succession.


CLS 248/93
TXT Supports under subclass 92 in which all of the links move to release the
    hose at the same time.


CLS 248/94
TXT Supports under the class definition for a strainer or funnel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95+,    when the funnel forms part of bag holder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 340+ for the support in combination with the structure of the
    funnel as such, i.e., where the funnel is included by more than name only.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 409+ for
    the support tied up with the structure of a sifter.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 241+ and 249+ for
    defined separators having supports, subclass 470 for filters with handles
    and subclasses 473+ for filters resting on a supporting receiver.


CLS 248/95
TXT Supports under the class definition for bags.  These supports may have
    means for holding the mouth of the bag open.  A spout, chute, funnel,
    hopper or equivalent material directing element to which the bag is
    attached may be included as an element thereof.

    (1)     Note.  For body supported bags, see Class 224, Package and Article
    Carriers, subclass 5 and Class 383, Flexible Bags, subclasses 33+ for a bag
    having structure which maintains the mouth of the bag in an open
    configuration.

    (2)     Note.  Where the spout is modified to hold and fill the bag or
    where structural features of the spout, funnel, etc., are claimed, or where
    flow control, material delivery or packing means are included, see Classes
    141, Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    and 193, Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94,     for strainer bag supports.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 65+ for animal feed bag supports.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 9.1+ for a bag permanently united with a
    three dimensional self-sustaining framework.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 282+ for article dispensing device
    combined with casing or support structure therefor.

    258,    Railway Mail Delivery, subclasses 23+ for mail bag delivery
    supports.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 50+ for cabinet supports
    for stacked folded bags.

    482,    Exercise Devices, particularly subclasses 87+ for a support for a
    multidirectionally movable, striking bag or pad.


CLS 248/96
TXT Supports under subclass 95 which are adapted to be secured to and/or
    support a conventional golf bag.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 315.3+ for a golf bag,
    per se, or a golf bag combined with a support where the golf bag is more
    than nominally recited.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 47.131+ for wheeled carriers for golf
    bags.


CLS 248/97
TXT Supports under subclass 95 in the form of a stand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128+    and 146+, for receptacle stands.


CLS 248/98
TXT Supports under subclass 97 having wheels.


CLS 248/99
TXT Supports under subclass 95 comprising frames for holding the mouth of a bag
    open. The funnel or spout may be included as a part thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 390 and 391 for a removable filling aid which holds the mouth of
    a bag open.  This Class 248, provides for a similar device which also
    either holds the bag against the pull of gravity or holds the bag to its
    support.

    383,    Flexible Bags, for a flexible or flaccid bag, per se, and
    subclasses 33+ for a flexible bag having permanently attached means to
    maintain the bag mouth in an open configuration.


CLS 248/100
TXT Supports under subclass 99 having prongs or hooks for engaging the bag.


CLS 248/101
TXT Supports under subclass 99 having a clamp for holding the bag.


CLS 248/102
TXT Supports under the class definition for supporting a baby's nursing bottle,
    usually in a position accessible to the baby.


CLS 248/103
TXT Supports under subclass 102 in the form of a bracket.


CLS 248/104
TXT Supports under subclass 103 in which the bracket has an element which is
    flexible so that the bottle can be readily moved to the desired position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    274.1,  for other adjustable brackets.


CLS 248/105
TXT Supports under subclass 102 in the form of a stand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128     and 146+, for other receptacle stands.


CLS 248/106
TXT Supports under subclass 105 in which provision is made for the moving of
    the bottle to various positions relative to a fixed support.


CLS 248/107
TXT Supports under subclass 105 made of wire.


CLS 248/108
TXT Supports under the class definition for supporting paste tubes in a
    convenient position for use or display.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 92+ for the support with facilities for
    dispensing the paste from the tube.


CLS 248/109
TXT Supports under subclass 108 in the form of a stand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128+    and 146+, for other receptacle stands.


CLS 248/110
TXT Supports under the class definition for a brush or broom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359.1+, for a support which remains with the brush or broom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 290, 308+ and 313 for toilet kits having brush
    holders.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 361+ for a brush
    container.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 206+ for brush and broom
    cabinets.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 123+ for the
    combination of a receptacle to hold a supply of coating material and means
    to support an applicator in a nonuse position.


CLS 248/111
TXT Supports under subclass 110 which have a socket for the reception of the
    brush or broom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    314,    for other socket article holding means.


CLS 248/112
TXT Supports under subclass 111 made of wire.


CLS 248/113
TXT Supports under subclass 110 in which a clasp is provided to grasp the
    handle or support or both.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229.1+,316.1+ and 540+, for other supports with clamps.


CLS 248/114
TXT Supports under the class definition for a conventional watch or clock.
    They may include an auxiliary casing for the conventional watch or clock.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for supports for mounting a watch or clock in a panel opening.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclasses 164+, 180, for watch and clock holders for carrying a watch or
    clock on the person.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 316+ for
    the support with the structure of the casing as such or a modified casing.


CLS 248/115
TXT Supports under subclass 114 in the form of a bracket.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   for other brackets.


CLS 248/116
TXT Supports under subclass 114 in the form of a stand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127+,   for other stands.


CLS 248/117.1
TXT Supports under the class definition for a sadiron or an iron for melting
    solder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclass 142 for such supports
    combined with devices to facilitate a smoothing operation.


CLS 248/117.2
TXT Supports under subclass 117.1 in the form of a stand or base.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127+    and 346.01+, for other stands and bases.


CLS 248/117.3
TXT Supports under subclass 117.2 in which the stand or base is heat insulated.


CLS 248/117.4
TXT Supports under subclass 117.3 with hold-down means.


CLS 248/117.5
TXT Supports under subclass 117.2 which hold the iron in a position with the
    ironing face directed upward.


CLS 248/117.6
TXT Supports under subclass 117.2 with hold-down means.


CLS 248/117.7
TXT Supports under subclass 117.1 with clamp or hold-down means.


CLS 248/118
TXT Supports under the class definition for a person's arm or for a person's
    head.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 600+ for armrests used by bed occupants and for
    devices attached to or combined with tables comprising mere body supports
    for surgical or undertaking operations.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 391+ for a headrest for a seated
    person and subclasses 411.2+ for an armrest for a seated person.  The line
    between these classes (248 and 297) is one of disclosure of the position of
    the person supported.


CLS 248/118.1
TXT Device under subclass 118 to support the hand or arm of a person when
    writing.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass, and the indented subclasses, provide for
    supports used in writing in spaces in which it is difficult to write
    without special support; also, supports designed to prevent fatigue from
    writing or to keep the hand out of contact with the paper.


CLS 248/118.3
TXT Device under subclass 118.1 so constructed that its height may be adjusted
    as the writer wishes.


CLS 248/118.5
TXT Device under subclass 118.1 which is movable along a writing surface,
    during writing, by the hand or arm of the writer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 437 for a pen
    having means, attached thereto, to support or stabilize the pen and the
    hand of a writer while writing.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclass 48 for an
    implement of that class combined with work-surface-contacting means to hold
    or stabilize the implement during use thereof.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, and Cryptography, subclass 166 for a
    traveling hand or arm rest used in teaching writing.


CLS 248/121
TXT STAND AND BRACKET:

    Support under the class definition comprising a self-sustaining device
    having at least one substantially upright standard or leg upon which an
    outwardly extending article supporting portion is mounted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 522.1 for invisible radiation source
    supports generally.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 869 for loop type
    antennas with a rotatable support including stand and bracket supports;
    subclasses 890+ for antennas supported on a post, standard or tower; and
    subclass 892 for antennas with a bracket support.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 193+ for X-ray
    source supports.


CLS 248/122.1
TXT Having adjustable bracket:

    Stand and bracket under subclass 121 in which the outwardly extending
    portion may be moved relative to the substantially upright standard or leg.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80+,    especially subclasses 82, 84, 86, and 88 for adjustable brackets
    for supporting a hose on a stand.

    106,    for brackets adjustably mounted on a stand for supporting nursing
    bottles.


CLS 248/123.11
TXT Counterbalanced:

    Adjustable bracket under subclass 122.1 wherein a load on the outwardly
    extending portion is counteracted by a force or influence (e.g., spring,
    etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280.11, 292.11, and 297.11, for adjustable counterbalanced brackets.

    560+,   for a support wherein the weight of the supported article is
    sustained by a resilient means when in use.


CLS 248/123.2
TXT Via a counterweight:

    Counterbalanced adjustable bracket under subclass 123.11 wherein the load
    on the outwardly extending portion is counteracted by a mass.


CLS 248/124.1
TXT Vertically and horizontally:

    Adjustable bracket under subclass 122.1 in which the outwardly extending
    portion may be reciprocated in both an elevation plane and a level plane
    relative to the substantially upright standard or leg.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    287.1,  for brackets with horizontally and vertically sliding joints.


CLS 248/124.2
TXT Via a single device (e.g., one two-way clamp):

    Vertically and horizontally adjustable bracket under subclass 124.1 in
    which one apparatus allows the outwardly extending portion to be
    reciprocated in the respective planes.


CLS 248/125.1
TXT Vertically:

    Adjustable bracket under subclass 122.1 in which the outwardly extending
    portion may be reciprocated in an elevation plane relative to the
    substantially upright standard or leg.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    295.11+,for brackets with vertically sliding joints.


CLS 248/125.2
TXT Bracket moved by mechanical operator (e.g., spring, threaded shaft, pulley
    and rope, etc.):

    Vertically adjustable bracket under subclass 125.1 in which the outwardly
    extending portion is relocated along the stand by means of a device
    intended to move a load.


CLS 248/125.3
TXT In fixed increments:

    Vertically adjustable bracket under subclass 125.1 in which the outwardly
    extending portion is relocated along the stand at spaced stops (e.g.,
    holes, cutouts, etc.).


CLS 248/125.7
TXT Bracket specifically designed to rotate about a stand vertical axis:

    Adjustable bracket with adjustable article support under subclass 122.1 in
    which the outwardly extending portion revolves about either the upright
    centerline or a line parallel to the centerline.


CLS 248/125.8
TXT Having vertically adjustable stand (e.g., telescoping rods):

    Stand and bracket under subclass 121 in which the upright extends along its
    vertical axis.


CLS 248/125.9
TXT And bracket rotatable:

    Adjustable stand under subclass 125.8 in which the outwardly extending
    portion revolves in a vertical or horizontal plane.


CLS 248/126
TXT Supports under the class definition which may be used as a stand for
    supporting the article from a generally horizontal surface or be attached
    to a wall or other vertical member to hold the article thereto in which
    position the support is in the form of a bracket.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    518,    for a supporting device having mean for receiving a staff, which
    device includes structure whereby it can be supported by, alternatively,
    plural kinds of supporting surfaces or objects.

    558,    for a support convertible to a different type by a rearrangement,
    substitution, or removal of one or more parts.

    644+,   for a machinery support comprising means permitting the support to
    be mounted in more than one manner.

    645,    for similar supports for machinery.


CLS 248/127
TXT Supports under the class definition comprising self supporting devices
    which support an article in substantially spaced relation to a generally
    horizontal surface such as a table, floor or the ground.  They usually have
    an upright standard, pedestal or legs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80+,    97+, 105+, 109, 116, 117.2+, 469,  and  676 for other stands.

    352,    for devices in the nature of stands for holding automobiles in
    raised position.

    519+,   for a stand or base type of supporting device having means for
    receiving a staff.

    676,    for easels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, appropriate subclasses for a support designed to support a
    person in a reclined position.

    27,     Undertaking, subclass 27 for burial casket stands also having
    provisions whereby they may be carried.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, particularly
    subclasses 664 and 239 for racks and stands combined with added means for
    causing drying and/or gas or vapor contact with the solids supported.

    42,     Firearms, subclass 94 for stands limited by structure to use for
    supporting fire arms or stands forming an aiming rest for fire arms.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclasses 39+ for stands limited by structure to
    use for keeping plants alive.

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, appropriate subclass for a
    stand supporting a horizontal planar surface.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 40 for stands limited by structure to
    use with liquid or gaseous fuel burners.

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 231 for stands combined with tobacco users'
    appliances.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 179.1+ for a
    self-sustaining workman's support.

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, subclasses 66+ for street
    car trolley stands.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, appropriate subclasses, for similar devices
    limited, as by the presence of a back or armrest  or by the particular
    contouring of the surface, to supporting a seated occupant; and
    particularly subclasses 391+ for a stool with padded support surface, and
    see the search notes to the class definition of Class 297 for the line.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 890+ for antennas
    on a post, standard or tower.

    355,    Photocopying, subclasses 122+ for stands limited by structure to
    use with photographic printing frames.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 410+ where the stand is limited by
    structure to use with lights.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 436, 446, 449, 454, and 455
    for stands limited by structure to use with telephones.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 377+ for holder of original and
    subclass 393 for copy medium input tray; all support structure is limited
    to use with an electrophotographic device.

    449,    Bee Culture, appropriate subclasses for a stand peculiar to use in
    supporting a bee hive.


CLS 248/128
TXT Supports under subclass 127 specially designed for supporting a receptacle
    and in which the receptacle is movable on the stand or with the stand
    relative to a fixed primary support.  The receptacle may be movable on the
    stand or with the stand to dispense its contents.

    (1)     Note.  Where the receptacle is movable for the purpose of agitating
    its contents, see Class 366, Agitating, subclasses 53+, 92+ and 219+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97+,    for bag stands.

    105+    for nursing bottle stands.

    109,    for paste-tube stands.

    127     and 155-188.91, for stands on which a receptacle may be supported
    but not specially designed therefor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 390+ for plural supports for the
    components of a package (e.g., receptacle and contents) for access by an
    operator who manually forms a package.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclass 32 for a ladder
    convertible for a wash stand.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 133.1+ when the receptacle is a part
    of a rack.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 47.26, 47.31 and 79.2 when the receptacle
    is the body of a vehicle.


CLS 248/129
TXT Supports under subclass 128 having special provisions for supporting and
    holding a receptacle in position for use, storage, display or for
    manipulating the same, in which wheels are provided to make it more readily
    movable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98,     for wheeled bag stands.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, especially subclasses 35, 47.26, 47.31, and 79.2,
    when the receptacle constitutes the body of a vehicle, and the appropriate
    subclasses for wheeled devices used solely to transport a receptacle.


CLS 248/130
TXT Supports under subclass 128 in which the receptacle is rotatable about a
    horizontal axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 131.1 when the receptacle is part of a
    rack and subclasses 77, 78, and 164 for other rotatable racks.


CLS 248/131
TXT Supports under subclass 128 in which the receptacle is rotatable about a
    vertical axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    349.1,  for other rotatable stands and bases.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 77, 78, 131.1, and 163+ for rotatable
    racks.


CLS 248/132
TXT Supports under subclass 128 in which the receptacle may be moved vertically.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149,    for adjustable supports for stationary receptacles.

    157,    for vertically adjustable stands.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 2+ for hoisting trucks.


CLS 248/133
TXT Supports under subclass 128 in which the receptacle is tiltable on the
    stand.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 80, 81+ and 168+, for pivoted racks.


CLS 248/134
TXT Supports under subclass 133 in which the closure for the receptacle is
    operated when the receptacle is tilted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 76, 82, 83, and 84, for racks for
    receptacles with closures and closure operators.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 334+ for receptacles with pivoted closures.


CLS 248/135
TXT Supports under subclass 133 which are adapted to form a shipping crate for
    a receptacle and which may be converted into a tilting support for the
    receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143,    for rocker stands convertible to casings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses 36+ for shipping crates, per se.


CLS 248/136
TXT Supports under subclass 133 in which the stand proper may be folded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166+,   for other folding stands.


CLS 248/137
TXT Supports under subclass 133 in which the axis of tilt passes through some
    part of the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141,    for similar tilting cradle supports.


CLS 248/138
TXT Supports under subclass 133 in which the receptacle is tiltable about
    either of two horizontal axes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184.1,  for stand heads adjustable on double horizontal axis.


CLS 248/139
TXT Supports under subclass 133 in which the receptacle is mounted on a
    separate tilting frame or cradle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185.1,  for stand heads adjustable on a horizontal axis.


CLS 248/140
TXT Supports under subclass 139 which are also provided with some positive
    means for tilting the receptacle or with means to latch it in tilted and/or
    normal position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142,    for other tilting or latch means.


CLS 248/141
TXT Supports under subclass 139 in which the axis of tilt passes through some
    part of the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137,    for similar tilting supports.


CLS 248/142
TXT Supports under subclass 141 which also have some positive means for tilting
    the receptacle or some means for latching it in tilted and/or normal
    position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140,    for other tilting and latch means.


CLS 248/143
TXT Supports under subclass 133 which have a rocker so that the receptacle can
    be more easily placed on the stand and/or tipped.


CLS 248/144
TXT Supports under subclass 128 in the nature of bases which swing about a
    vertical axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131     and 145, for other similarly movable bases.


CLS 248/145
TXT Supports under subclass 128 in which the receptacle is adapted to be swung
    about a vertical standard.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131,    144 and 202.1, for other similarly movable receptacle supports.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 77 and 78 for similar structure in
    receptacle supporting racks.


CLS 248/145.3
TXT Device under subclass 128, so characterized that when inverted it engages
    and retains an inverted receptacle preparatory to the normal function of
    the stand.


CLS 248/145.6
TXT Device under subclass 128, including a handle.


CLS 248/146
TXT Stands under subclass 127 specially designed to support a receptacle and in
    which the receptacle remains stationary on the stand.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include stands on which a receptacle
    may be supported but which are not specially designed therefor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97+,    for bag stands.

    105+,   for nursing bottle stands.

    109,    for paste-tube stands.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 40.5 for related structure in the form of
    a base or stand for receiving the trunk of a cut tree, and having, in
    addition, liquid reservoir to provide moisture for the benefit of the tree;
    in some instances the reservoir is comprised of a separable receptacle.

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 390+ for plural supports for the
    components of a package (e.g., receptacle and contents) for access by an
    operator who manually forms a package.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 29+ for stands limited by structure
    to use in supporting a receptacle over an open fire.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 71.01+ for racks for plural
    receptacles.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 577 for an inkstand; i.e., a base and a
    dispensing inkwell supported thereon; subclasses 585+, for a barometric
    inkstand; and 457 for a barometric dispenser of general utility.


CLS 248/147
TXT Devices under subclass 146 in which there is provided an operator for the
    receptacle closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    for operators for closures of movable receptacles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 76, 82, 83, and 84 for receptacle
    supporting racks with closure operators.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 262+ for closure operators on the
    receptacle.


CLS 248/148
TXT Devices under subclass 146 which have special provision for supporting a
    receptacle on a sloping surface such as a roof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237,    for roof supported brackets.


CLS 248/149
TXT Devices under subclass 146 which are adjustable to take various sized
    receptacles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132     and 157, for other adjustable stand type supports.

    154,    for adjustable clamps for gripping the receptacle.


CLS 248/150
TXT Devices under subclass 146 which may be folded or readily taken apart.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    for folding receptacle stands of sheet material.

    528,    529, 136, 165, and 166+, for other knockdown or folding supports.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 85 for foldable or collapsible
    receptacle supporting racks.


CLS 248/151
TXT Devices under subclass 146 including legs adapted to be attached directly
    to a receptacle and readily removable therefrom.


CLS 248/152
TXT Devices under subclass 146 which are made up of sheet material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174,    for other sheet material stands.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 72+ for similarly constructed
    receptacle supporting racks.


CLS 248/153
TXT Devices under subclass 146 which are made of wire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107     and 175, for other wire stands.


CLS 248/154
TXT Devices under subclass 146 which are provided with a clamp or hold-down for
    holding the receptacle to the stand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    187.1,  310, 313, and 346.01, for other holding devices on supports.


CLS 248/155
TXT Device under subclass 127 comprising a stand or stool convertible into a
    walking cane.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclasses 65+ for canes.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclass 118 for a chair or seat convertible to a
    cane.


CLS 248/155.1
TXT Device under subclass 155 in which a handle may be detached from the cane
    and rearranged thereon to form a horizontal supporting surface, or in which
    said handle is hinged to said cane or stick and is movable to form a
    horizontal supporting surface.


CLS 248/155.2
TXT Device under subclass 155 provided with arms for supporting a horizontal
    supporting surface, each arm being pivotally connected at one end to and
    extending radially from a central support and connected at its other end to
    said horizontal supporting surface.


CLS 248/155.3
TXT Device under subclass 155.2 in which the supporting arms are connected to
    the central support by a member slidable relative thereto.


CLS 248/155.4
TXT Device under subclass 155 in which end- to-end sections of the cane are
    hinged together or removable one from the other and rearrangeable to form a
    stool or stand.


CLS 248/155.5
TXT Device under subclass 155 in which longitudinal sections of the cane or
    stool are pivotally connected intermediate their lengths, said sections
    being movable about said point to form a stool or stand.


CLS 248/156
TXT Stands under subclass 127 having means extending into the ground to anchor
    them thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85+     and 87+, for ground inserted hose stands.

    96,     for golf bag holders which are ground-inserted.

    530+,   for a ground inserted type of supporting device having means for
    receiving a staff.

    545,    for a support comprising a ground inserted anchor and means to aid
    in the insertion thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 153+ for a shaft
    with an embedded wing-type brace, and subclasses 155+ for piercing or
    expanding earth anchors.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 29 for ground inserted racks for shocks
    of grain.

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, subclasses 387+ for a golf tee and
    subclasses 417+ for a projectile supporting tee used for a playing field or
    court game (a baseball batting tee, a football kicking tee, etc.).


CLS 248/157
TXT Stands under subclass 127 in which the supported article may be adjusted to
    various positions vertically of a fixed support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132,    for receptacle stands in which the receptacle may be moved
    vertically.

    161+,   for adjustable vertical stands of the standard type.


CLS 248/158
TXT Stands under subclass 127 which have a vertical standard extending from a
    base.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclass 88 for coplanar
    extension surfaces in which a divided pedestal supports end sections, and
    subclass 150 for a pedestal supported horizontal planar surface.


CLS 248/159
TXT Devices under subclass 158 in which the standard is made in sections.


CLS 248/160
TXT Devices under subclass 158 in which the standard is flexible by reason of
    the material from which it is made or by reason of being jointed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     for pivoted standards for hose stands. 104 and 274.1, for bracket
    arms having a   flexible element.


CLS 248/161
TXT Devices under subclass 158 in which the standard is adjustable in a
    vertical direction usually telescopically.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157+,   for a vertically adjustable nonstandard type stool or stand.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 145.1+, for a telescopic joint
    in serial diverse relatively movable joints, and subclasses 298+ for a
    variable length coupling comprising significant internal wall structure of
    at least one of the tubular bodies being joined.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 104+ for articulated members
    lockable in a selected position.


CLS 248/162.1
TXT Counterbalanced:

    Devices under subclass 161 in which the adjustable standard is
    counterbalanced by a spring or weight.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    560+,   for a support wherein the weight of the supported article is
    sustained by a resilient means when in use.


CLS 248/163.1
TXT Plural leg:

    Stands under subclass 127 which have more than one leg.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83+,    for a plural leg hose stand.

    155,    for plural leg stands convertible to cane.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 47.3 for a plural legged bench having a
    wheel selectively engageable with the ground for moving the bench about.


CLS 248/163.2
TXT Including suspended support:

    Support under subclass 163.1 wherein an article supporting portion is
    projected from an overhead portion of the stand.

    (1)     Note.  The supported article is generally suspended within a space
    defined by the legs of the stand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121+,   for a stand and bracket.

    317+,   for a suspended support in general.


CLS 248/164
TXT Devices under subclass 163.1 wherein two or more legs are crossed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155.5,  for convertible cane having intermediately pivoted crossed leg
    section.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclass 112 for a camp bed having folding crossed legs.

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 118+ for a
    horizontal planar surface which is supported by mutually pivoted crossed
    legs.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 16.1+ for a collapsible chair,
    particularly subclass 18 for nonpivoted crossed legs and subclasses 56+ for
    a cross-legged chair where the back and the front legs are integral.


CLS 248/165
TXT Devices under subclass 163.1 which are readily taken apart usually without
    the removal of bolts, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150,    for knock-down stationary receptacle stands having this feature.

    164,    for knock-down stands having all of the legs crossed.

    529,    for a knockdown stand or base type of supporting device having
    means for receiving a staff.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclass 114 for knock-down camp beds.

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 162+ or 180+ for
    plural related horizontal surfaces with separable or folding components.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 189+ for a knockdown rack.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 440.1+ for chair and seat components
    connected by manipulated joints (knock-down).


CLS 248/166
TXT Devices under subclass 163.1 which may be folded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150,    for folding stationary receptacle stands.

    164,    for folding crossed legged stands.

    174,    for folding stands of sheet material.

    528,    for a folding stand or base type of supporting device having means
    for receiving a staff.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces subclasses 162+ or 180+ for
    plural related surfaces having separable or folding components, and
    subclasses 115+ for a horizontal planar surface having folding legs.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 167 and 195+ for folding racks.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 16.1+ for a chair having relatively
    folding bottom, back and legs.


CLS 248/167
TXT Devices under subclass 166 which fold on a vertical pivot.


CLS 248/168
TXT Devices under subclass 166 in which the legs are pivoted to a head.


CLS 248/169
TXT Devices under subclass 168 in which means is provided to make all the legs
    move when one is moved.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 123 and 126 for
    horizontal planar surfaces supported on folding legs which are conjointly
    actuated.


CLS 248/170
TXT Devices under subclass 166 in which the legs are pivoted to a standard.


CLS 248/171
TXT Devices under subclass 170 in which means is provided to make all of the
    legs move when one is moved.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169     and its search note, for legs pivoted to a head.


CLS 248/172
TXT Devices under subclass 163.1 which are adjustable to take different sized
    articles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149,    for adjustable stationary receptacle supports.


CLS 248/173
TXT Devices under subclass 172 in which the adjustment is obtained by pivoted
    legs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    525+,   for a pivoted leg stand or base type of supporting device having
    means for receiving a staff.


CLS 248/174
TXT Stands under subclass 127 made of sheet material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    for stationary receptacle supports of sheet material.

    441.1+, for easels  of sheet material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 135 for sheet material stands with
    shelves.


CLS 248/175
TXT Stands under subclass 127 made of wire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for nursing bottle stands made of wire.

    153,    for stationary receptacle stands of wire.

    465.1,  for easels made of wire.


CLS 248/176.1
TXT To hold a particular article:

    Stand under subclass 127 for securing a specific device (e.g., camera, IV
    bag, etc.) on a substantially upright standard, leg, base, or frame type
    members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121+,   for a stand and bracket combination.

    309.1+, for article supporting brackets.

    346.01+,for supporting bases.


CLS 248/176.2
TXT Having provision for holding hot article:

    Particular article stand under subclass 176.1 in which the specific device
    is designed to secure an article that would give the sensation of burning,
    searing, or scalding (e.g., curling iron, cooking pot, boiler stand, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117.1+, for a sadiron or an iron for melting solder.


CLS 248/176.3
TXT Adjustable:

    Particular article stand under subclass 176.1 in which the substantially
    upright members are repositionable.


CLS 248/177.1
TXT Having platform for mounting article directly above stationary stand (e.g.,
    tripod head):

    Particular article stand under subclass 176.1 in which a planar structure
    is attached to the uppermost portion of the upright standard, leg, base, or
    frame members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     84, 86, and 88, for similar structure in hose supports.


CLS 248/178.1
TXT Adjustable platform:

    Platform above stand under subclass 177.1 in which the planar structure is
    movable relative to the upright standard, leg, base, or frame members.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are means for controlling the
    movement of the head from a distance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    514+,   for a supporting device having angularly adjustable means for
    receiving a staff.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 418+ for devices for controlling the
    movement of a spotlight from a distance.


CLS 248/179.1
TXT Multiplanar platform adjustment at one point:

    Adjustable platform under subclass 178.1 in which the head or an article
    securing part thereof is universally movable relative to the upright
    standard, leg, base, or frame members.


CLS 248/180.1
TXT With means on platform to level article:

    Multiplanar adjustable platform under subclass 179.1 in which a device
    (e.g., weight) makes the article substantially horizontal.


CLS 248/181.1
TXT Ball and socket type:

    Multiplanar adjustable platform under subclass 179.1 in which movement is
    facilitated by a spherical portion within a complementary cavity.


CLS 248/181.2
TXT Socket captures ball in upper hemisphere:

    Ball and socket adjustable platform under subclass 181.1 in which the
    cavity surrounds the spherical portion defined by, but not including, an
    equatorial line.


CLS 248/182.1
TXT With attached counterweight:

    Ball and socket adjustable platform under subclass 181.1 which has a
    weight, counterbalance, or other means to automatically make the article
    securing means horizontal.


CLS 248/183.1
TXT Along a vertical axis and horizontal pivot:

    Adjustable platform under subclass 178.1 in which the article securing
    means is both reciprocated in an elevation plane and revolvable about a
    level plane relative to the substantially upright standard, leg, base, or
    frame members.


CLS 248/183.2
TXT On a single horizontal pivot and rotatable about a vertical axis:

    Adjustable platform under subclass 178.1 in which the article securing
    means is movable about a fixed axis in a general level plane and revolvable
    about an axis disposed in an elevation plane.


CLS 248/183.3
TXT Pivot biased by spring (e.g., coil, Belleville, torsional, washer type,
    etc.):

    Pivotable and rotatable platform under subclass 183.2 in which platform
    movement is affected by a resilient member.


CLS 248/183.4
TXT Pivot operated by gear system:

    Pivotable and rotatable platform under subclass 183.2 in which  platform
    movement is performed via toothed wheel or rack members.


CLS 248/184.1
TXT On double horizontal pivots:

    Adjustable platform under subclass 178.1 in which the article securing
    means may be reciprocated about two level axes which are  normal to the
    upright standard, leg, base, or frame members.


CLS 248/185.1
TXT On a single horizontal pivot:

    Adjustable platform under subclass 178.1 in which the article securing
    means may be reciprocated about one level plane and is usually normal to
    the upright standard, leg, base, or frame members.


CLS 248/186.1
TXT On a vertical axis:

    Adjustable platform under subclass 178.1 in which the article securing
    means is raised and lowered about an elevation plane and is usually
    parallel to the upright standard, leg, base, or frame members.


CLS 248/186.2
TXT Rotating about a vertical pivot:

    Adjustable platform under subclass 178.1 in which the article securing
    means is revolved around a generally upright axle-type member.


CLS 248/187.1
TXT Including detailed mount for article (e.g., camera):

    Platform mount under subclass 177.1 in which the uppermost portion contains
    structure to receive and hold a usually complementary portion of the
    article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     154, 176.1+, 310, 313, 346.01, and 680, for other securing means.

    523+,   for a stand or base-type supporting device having means for
    receiving and centering or retaining in that means a staff.


CLS 248/188
TXT Devices under subclass 127 for attaching a stand leg to its head.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151     and 168, for other leg connections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 230+ for connections between a
    rod and a plate.


CLS 248/188.1
TXT Device under subclass 127 comprising supporting substructure for the stand
    (e.g., leg, foot or base)


CLS 248/188.2
TXT Device under subclass 188.1 including means for adjustment of the device up
    or down with respect to the surface upon which it rests or means to
    compensate for unevenness or irregularity in said surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    446,    for a device for supporting a book in open position including
    compensating means for maintaining the two halves of the open face of the
    book in substantially the same horizontal plane.

    649+,   for a machinery support comprising independently adjustable legs or
    feet.


CLS 248/188.3
TXT Device under subclass 188.2 in which the means for adjustment of the device
    up or down or means to compensate for surface unevenness or irregularity
    includes means acting without manual intervention to return the device to a
    desired position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182.1+, for an adjustable head for an article support wherein the
    adjustment is secured by a ball and socket joint and includes a weight,
    counterbalance or other means to automatically level the support.


CLS 248/188.4
TXT Device under subclass 188.2 in which the adjustment or compensation means
    includes interthreaded elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    650,    for a machinery support comprising independently adjustable legs or
    feet, the adjustment means being a threaded means.


CLS 248/188.5
TXT Device under subclass 188.2 in which the adjustment or compensation means
    includes elements which are slidable into or upon one another.


CLS 248/188.6
TXT Device under subclass 188.1 in which the device may be collapsed into a
    structure of reduced volume.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166+,   for a plural leg folding stand.


CLS 248/188.7
TXT Device under subclass 188.1 in which the supporting substructure comprises
    a plurality of foot or leg-like members, the proximate ends of which
    converge at and are attached to a central hub-like member and the remote
    ends of which project from said hub-like member in divergent relationship.


CLS 248/188.8
TXT Device under subclass 188.1 in which the supporting substructure is in the
    nature of an elongated, rigid member, the longitudinal axis of which
    extends at an angle to the principal face of the supported device, or the
    lower terminal structure thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    615+,   for a resilient support comprising a resilient foot.

    677,    for a machinery support comprising a leg or foot.


CLS 248/188.9
TXT Device under subclass 188.8 comprising an attachment for the lower terminal
    of the elongated, rigid member (e.g., pad, anti-tip, anti-skid device).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    346.11,         for a caster cup.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 18+ for a caster.


CLS 248/188.91
TXT Device under subclass 188.8 including means to provide rigidity and
    stability to the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    351+,   for a support in the nature of a pole or post arranged either
    vertically, horizontally or in inclined position which holds or steadies an
    article or thing from falling against the action of gravity.


CLS 248/200
TXT Supports under the class definition for an article which is attached to a
    device and has an outwardly extending article supporting portion including
    relatively compact rigid devices even when attached to a ceiling or other
    overhead support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48.2,   for eaves trough wall brackets.

    65+,    75+, 108, 110+, 115, 117.1, 534+, and 674+, for other bracket type
    supports.

    682+,   for article carried brackets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 207+, 263+, and 304 for brackets for supporting
    bed bottoms, springs, etc.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 252 for brackets specially designed
    for holding an article over a gas jet.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 124+ for brackets for
    supporting let-down tops for vehicles.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 892 for antennas
    with a bracket support.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 432 for brackets limited by structure to
    use with lights.


CLS 248/200.1
TXT On extensible column mounted between opposed surfaces:

    A support under subclass 200 wherein a bracket is mounted on a
    longitudinally extensible support column, said column having elements on
    either end thereof, said elements being adapted to engage the face of
    opposed surfaces as the column is extended therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    644,    for a machinery support on an extensible column mounted between
    opposed surfaces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g. Buildings), subclass 112 for an opposed
    barrier-engaging mechanism operated relatively movable shaft assembly, and
    subclass 632 for an axially extensible shafts.


CLS 248/201
TXT Supports under subclass 200 in which there is more than one bracket for
    supporting a single article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65+,    for plural brackets for pipes or cables.

    235+,   for plural brackets for shelves or scaffolds.

    251+,   for plural brackets for rods.

    657+,   for a machinery support comprising plural brackets for a single
    machine.


CLS 248/202.1
TXT For swinging receptacle:

    Devices under subclass 201 in which the article supported is a receptacle
    and in which the brackets have provisions whereby the receptacle can swing
    on a vertical axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145,    for similar structure in stand-type supports.


CLS 248/205.1
TXT Specially mounted or attached:

    Brackets under subclass 200 for supporting an article on particular objects
    or in a particular place or way.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 86.01+ for specially mounted racks.


CLS 248/205.2
TXT By mechanically interlocking fabric (e.g., velcro):

    Structure under subclass 205.1 comprising a pair of fabric components one
    of which is provided with hooks or hook-like members which interengage with
    loops or loop-like members on the other component or wherein the fabric
    components fasten together by the entanglement of cooperating portions
    thereon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buttons, Buckles, Clasps, etc., subclass 306 for a fastener
    comprising mechanically interlocked fabric.


CLS 248/205.3
TXT By adhesive:

    Structure under subclass 205.1 wherein the bracket is attached to the
    support by a  nonmetallic surface bonding agent such as glue or cement or
    by molecular interaction between a component attached to the support and
    another component attached to the bracket.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    467,    for a mirror or picture holder attached to a support by adhesive
    means.

    544+,   for a support comprising a compartment or container for storing
    adhesive until ready for use.


CLS 248/205.4
TXT Bridged by diverse anchoring means:

    Structure under subclass 205.3 comprising an additional attaching means for
    attaching the bracket to the support, said additional means being a
    nonadhesive means and in bridging relationship to the adhesive means.


CLS 248/205.5
TXT By vacuum:

    Structure under subclass 205.1 attached to the support by atmospheric
    pressure acting on an element of the bracket by reason of a reduced
    pressure beneath the element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    309.3,  for a bracket comprising vacuum means for holding the supported
    article thereon.

    362,    for a vacuum hold down.

    363,    for a support comprising vacuum means for holding the supported
    article thereon.

    467,    for a mirror or picture holder attached to a support by vacuum mean.

    537,    for a staff supporting bracket attached to a support by vacuum.


CLS 248/205.6
TXT Bridged by diverse anchoring means:

    Structure under subclass 205.5 comprising an additional means for attaching
    the bracket to the support, said additional means being a nonvacuum means
    which is in bridging relationship with the vacuum means.


CLS 248/205.7
TXT Including resilient means acting against atmospheric force:

    Structure under subclass 205.5 comprising a resilient means which acts on
    said bracket element in a direction opposite to that due to the atmospheric
    pressure.


CLS 248/205.8
TXT Including vacuum maker or breaker:

    Structure under subclass 205.5 comprising means (1) for creating or
    enhancing the reduced pressure under the element, or (2) for equalizing the
    pressure beneath the element with that of the ambient.


CLS 248/205.9
TXT Including valve or port:

    Structure under subclass 205.8 including an inlet or outlet which connects
    with the space beneath the element.


CLS 248/206.1
TXT Including diverse abutment; e.g., brace fulcrum:

    Structure under subclass 205.5 having a nonvacuum element which abuts
    either the support or a part of the bracket.

    (1)     Note.  The function of the nonvacuum element usually is to prevent
    disengagement or displacement of the vacuum element.


CLS 248/206.2
TXT Including annular vacuum cup:

    Structure under subclass 205.5 wherein the vacuum element is ring shaped.


CLS 248/206.3
TXT Including plural vacuum cups:

    Structure under subclass 205.5 comprising more than one negative pressure
    element.


CLS 248/206.4
TXT Vertically spaced:

    Structure under subclass 206.3 wherein the vacuum elements are spaced one
    above the other.


CLS 248/206.5
TXT By magnet:

    Structure under subclass 205.1 wherein the bracket is secured on the
    support by ferrous attraction.


CLS 248/207
TXT Devices under subclass 205.1 designed to be secured alternately to a
    horizontal or vertical support or to hold an article in a vertically or
    horizontally extending position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126,    for other alternative supports.

    645+,   for a machinery support comprising means permitting the support to
    be mounted in more than one manner.


CLS 248/208
TXT Devices under subclass 205.1 mounted on a window frame or window.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205.5,  for brackets attached by suction cups.

    251+,   for curtain pole and shade roller brackets with window mounting
    means.

    304+,   for window mounted hook type     brackets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 53+ for a window seat
    or scaffold.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 87.01+ for window mounted racks.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 242 and 245+ for cabinets
    mounted in wall or panel recesses.


CLS 248/209
TXT Devices under subclass 208 for mounting house radiators on a window frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232+,   for wall brackets for mounting radiators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 67+ for a heat exchanger with an external
    support.


CLS 248/210
TXT Devices under subclass 205.1 for supporting an article on a ladder.


CLS 248/211
TXT Devices under subclass 210 in which the bracket has a hook for supporting
    the article.


CLS 248/212
TXT Devices under subclass 205.1 specially designed for supporting an article
    from a faucet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89+,    for hose racks mounted on faucets.


CLS 248/213
TXT Devices under subclass 212 in which the article support is in the form of a
    hook.


CLS 248/213.1
TXT On closure hinge:

    Structure under subclass 205.1 for mounting on the pivoting element of a
    pivoted closure, e.g. door.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 223 for hinge attachments in
    general.


CLS 248/213.2
TXT On receptacle:

    Structure under subclass 205.1 which mounts on an enclosure or container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    214+,   for a bracket mounted on a horizontal rod or bar.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 42+ for
    horizontal planar surface combined with another structure in a particular
    way.


CLS 248/213.3
TXT On radiator:

    Structure under subclass 205.1 which mounts on a radiant heating device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220.21+ for an interlocked bracket and support in general.


CLS 248/213.4
TXT Radiator clamped:

    Structure under subclass 213.3 wherein the bracket is mounted on the
    radiator by holding means.


CLS 248/214
TXT Devices under subclass 205.1 which engage over a generally horizontal rod
    or bar and which support an article thereon.

    (1)     Note.  Where the horizontal bar is the edge of a receptacle, see
    this class, subclass 205.1, or a ladder rung, see subclass 210, or where
    the bracket is clamped to the bar or rod, see subclasses 225.31+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 87.2 and the notes appended
    thereto, for bracket devices for hanging flexible panels from a horizontal
    rod or bar.


CLS 248/215
TXT Devices under subclass 214 in which the article support is in the form of a
    hook.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    307     and 340, for other supports of this type.


CLS 248/216.1
TXT Structure under subclass 205.1 comprising (1) means for piercing or forming
    a hole or recess in a fixed support, or (2) means for enlarging or cutting
    a portion of a preformed hole therein.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include brackets which are attached
    to a support by mere nails or screws.  Such devices are classified below on
    other features.  However, it does not include brackets mounted by nails or
    screws wherein there is a particular and specified arrangement of such
    fasteners, or wherein there is some cooperation between such a fastener and
    the bracket other than the usual and necessary cooperation which is
    associated with a fastener of that type.  For example, a bracket which
    comprises a distinct means for guiding a nail or holding same while it is
    being driven and a bracket which is mounted by a plurality of such
    fasteners which extend in different directions are included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for a pipe supporting bracket having support piercing or cutting
    means.

    251+,   for a rod supporting bracket having support piercing or cutting
    means.

    546,    for a support piercing or cutting means comprising means to aid in
    the installation thereof.


CLS 248/216.4
TXT Structure under subclass 216.1 comprising, in addition to the piercing or
    cutting means, a mounting or attaching means of some other type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217.1,  for means responsive to the weight of the bracket and/or the
    supported article for causing engagement of the piercing or cutting means
    with the support.


CLS 248/217.1
TXT Structure under subclass 216.1 so constructed and arranged that the weight
    of the bracket and/or the supported article causes a force to be exerted on
    the piercing or cutting means in the direction of engagement thereof with
    the  support so as to force the means into engagement with the support or
    hinders its removal therefrom.


CLS 248/217.2
TXT Structure under subclass 216.1 comprising a plurality of piercing or
    cutting means which, when engaged, extend in different directions.


CLS 248/217.3
TXT Structure under subclass 216.1 wherein the piercing or cutting means
    comprises an integral portion of the bracket which is struck or cut out
    therefrom.


CLS 248/217.4
TXT Structure under subclass 216.1 wherein the bracket comprises a threaded
    shank which serves as the cutting or piercing means.


CLS 248/218.1
TXT Structure under subclass 216.1 wherein the bracket is made substantially
    entirely from wire.


CLS 248/218.2
TXT Structure under subclass 218.1 comprising a single piece of wire.


CLS 248/218.3
TXT Structure under subclass 218.2 wherein a piercing or cutting means is
    formed on each end of the wire.


CLS 248/218.4
TXT Structure under subclass 205.1 comprising means for attaching the bracket
    to an upright pole or post.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227.3,  for a bracket secured to a pole or post by clamping means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclass 151 for a
    horizontal planar surface which embraces its support, and subclass 152 for
    a device in which a horizontal planar surface is attached laterally of a
    support which may be a column.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 187+ for a platform
    with means for mounting same on a pole or tree.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 107 for a rack mounted on a column.


CLS 248/219.1
TXT Structure under subclass 218.4 comprising a plurality of distinct means for
    engaging the post or column.


CLS 248/219.2
TXT Structure under subclass 218.4 wherein the attaching means comprises means
    for engaging the top of the post or column.


CLS 248/219.3
TXT Structure under subclass 218.4 wherein a part of the bracket or a component
    associated therewith extends entirely through the post or column.


CLS 248/219.4
TXT Structure under subclass 218.4 wherein the bracket or a component
    associated therewith comprises a concave surface for engaging the surface
    of the post or column.


CLS 248/220.1
TXT Devices under subclass 205.1 which are secured to the corner of an object
    or room.


CLS 248/220.21
TXT Interlocked bracket and support:

    Specially mounted bracket under subclass 205.1 wherein a wall section or
    specific panel, for example, having an interengaging means which is both
    complementary to and holds the outwardly extending article support portion
    in place.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73,     for a pipe or cable bracket attached to a supporting structure by
    interlocking means.

    243,    for a shelf bracket attached to a supporting structure by
    interlocking means.


CLS 248/220.22
TXT Intermediate bracket interlocked between bracket and support:

    Interlocked bracket and support under subclass 220.21 wherein at least one
    additional interengaging means is cooperatively disposed between and
    adjoins the outwardly extending portion and the wall or panel.

    (1)     Note.  The bracket and support are separately connected to the
    intermediate bracket and not to each other.


CLS 248/220.31
TXT Apertured mount (i.e., pegboard):

    Interlocked bracket and support under subclass 220.21 comprising the panel
    having a multiplicity of holes which are selectively engageable with one or
    more outwardly extending article support portions whereby one or more
    article supports may be held at selected positions on said panel.


CLS 248/220.41
TXT Plural apertures engaged by single bracket:

    Pegboard under subclass 220.31 in which the outwardly extending article
    support portion is held simultaneously with more than one hole in the panel.


CLS 248/220.42
TXT Engaged apertures horizontally and vertically spaced:

    Pegboard under subclass 220.41 in which the outwardly extending article
    support portions are held simultaneously with at least three holes, two of
    which are at an interval along a longitudinal axis and two of which are at
    an interval along a lateral axis.


CLS 248/220.43
TXT Engaged apertures vertically spaced:

    Pegboard under subclass 220.41 wherein the outwardly extending article
    support portions are held simultaneously with at least two holes which are
    at an interval along a longitudinal axis.


CLS 248/221.11
TXT Including latch, retainer, or keeper on bracket:

    Interlocked bracket and support under subclass 220.21 comprising a
    shiftable or removable capturing and holding device.

    (1)     Note.  A mere bolt or screw, which forms one of the engaging means
    and may be tightened to prevent separation from the other part, is not
    included in this subclass but is classified on the basis of the
    interengagement.


CLS 248/221.12
TXT Keyhole aperture:

    Latch, retainer, or keeper under subclass 221.11 wherein the mount
    comprises a narrow slot communicating with an enlarged opening and the
    other interengaging part comprises (a) a headed portion, insertable through
    the opening and larger than the groove, and (b) an attached shank portion,
    smaller than the headed portion, complementary to the slot whereby the
    headed portion secures the outwardly extending portion in the slot.


CLS 248/222.11
TXT Resilient catch or latch:

    Latch, retainer, or keeper under subclass 220.21 comprising a flexible
    capturing and holding device for (a) effecting the interengagement of the
    portions or (b) securing the interengaged portions against separation.

    (1)     Note.  The means may be biased either by its own inherent
    resiliency or by a separate means.


CLS 248/222.12
TXT Having plural, oppositely acting resilient members acting as retainer or
    keeper:

    Resilient catch or latch under subclass 222.11 wherein the capturing and
    holding device comprises at least two members that move toward or away from
    each other to fasten the interengaging means of the portions together.


CLS 248/222.13
TXT Latch, retainer, or keeper is wedge or cam:

    Latch, retainer, or keeper under subclass 220.21 wherein a mechanical
    member of an inclined plane or raised lobe type secures the interengaging
    portions against disengagement.


CLS 248/222.14
TXT Latch, retainer, or keeper is threaded member (i.e., set screw or locknut):

    Latch, retainer, or keeper under subclass 220.21 wherein a rod or
    perforated block with projecting helical ribs acts to retain the
    interengaging portions of the bracket and support together.


CLS 248/222.41
TXT Keyhole aperture:

    Interlocked bracket and support under subclass 220.21 wherein one of the
    interengaging portions comprises a narrow slot communicating with an
    enlarged opening and the other interengaging part comprises (a) a headed
    portion, insertable through the opening and larger than the groove, and (b)
    an attached shank portion, smaller than the headed portion, complementary
    to the slot whereby the headed portion secures the outwardly extending
    portion in the slot.


CLS 248/222.51
TXT Bracket and mount interlocked by arc-like angular motion:

    Latch, retainer, or keeper under subclass 220.21 wherein the outwardly
    extending portion or part is interengaged to the mounting means in a
    movement along a circle segment.


CLS 248/222.52
TXT Bracket and mount interlocked by rotational motion:

    Angular motion interlock under subclass 222.51 wherein the outwardly
    extending portion is engaged to the complementary mounting means by a
    twisting or turning motion about an axis generally perpendicular to the
    direction of interlock.


CLS 248/223.21
TXT Aperture having multiple extending slots:

    Keyhole aperture under subclass 222.41 comprising (a) two narrow grooves
    extending from an opening or (b) two narrow recesses each communicating
    with a separate opening.


CLS 248/223.31
TXT Including spaced, diverse engagements between bracket and support:

    Interlocked bracket and support under subclass 220.21 comprising a
    plurality of spaced, distinct interengaging means with one such means being
    dissimilar from the other.


CLS 248/223.41
TXT One interengaging portion includes groove:

    Interlocked bracket and support under subclass 220.21 wherein one
    interengaging means comprises an elongated channel and  a transversely
    extending member having a complementary tongue received by the elongated
    channel.


CLS 248/224.51
TXT Groove longitudinally stepped or tapered:

    Grooved interengaging portion under subclass 223.41 wherein the channel or
    tongue is progressively narrow to one end and is either multiplanar or
    planar parallel to the interengaging means.


CLS 248/224.61
TXT Interior sidewalls of groove stepped or tapered (i.e., laterally):

    Grooved interengaging portion under subclass 223.41 wherein the channel or
    tongue is progressively narrow to one end and is either multiplanar or
    planar toward a backwall of the channel.


CLS 248/224.7
TXT Mount includes socket or sleeve for bracket portion:

    Interlocked bracket and support under subclass 220.21 wherein one of the
    interengaging means comprises a female portion of substantial longitudinal
    extent and a receivable male portion therein.


CLS 248/224.8
TXT One interengaging portion includes aperture:

    Interlocked bracket and support under subclass 220.21 wherein one of the
    interengaging means comprises an opening and a complementary protuberance.


CLS 248/225.11
TXT Bracket interengaging portion includes open slot:

    Interlocked bracket and support under subclass 220.21 wherein the
    interengaging means comprises a narrow recess with a continuous projection
    parallel to the recess bottom to restrain the outwardly extending portion
    attaching means.


CLS 248/225.21
TXT Bracket interengaging portion includes a hook:

    Interlocked bracket and support under subclass 220.21 wherein one of the
    interengaging parts comprises a curved or bent piece, similar to the letter
    J, for holding articles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215,    for a bracket comprising a hook engaged with a horizontal rod or
    bar.


CLS 248/226.11
TXT Bracket clamped to mount(i.e, single clamp):

    Specially mounted bracket under subclass 205.1 in which the outwardly
    extending portion is removably secured to its support by a device that
    binds, constricts, or presses two parts together so as to hold the parts
    firmly to a wall section or specific panel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     113, 117.4, 117.6, and 117.7, for other support with clamp features.

    79,     for brackets for clamping a hose to a receptacle.

    207,    for brackets having a clamp adapting same to be clamped to a
    horizontally or vertically extending support.

    210+,   for a bracket clamped to a ladder.

    212+,   for a bracket clamped to a faucet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 455+ for clamps of a
    general utility (i.e., no bracket).


CLS 248/226.12
TXT For electrical insulator:

    Specially mounted bracket under subclass 226.11 in which the outwardly
    extending portion is designed specifically for an apparatus that is a poor
    conductor of electricity.


CLS 248/227.1
TXT Including hook portion:

    Specially mounted bracket under subclass 226.11 in which the outwardly
    extending portion has a curved or bent piece, similar to the letter J, for
    holding articles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 343+ for clasp hook type
    fasteners.


CLS 248/227.2
TXT Horizontal planar surface mount:

    Specially mounted bracket under subclass 227.1  wherein the outwardly
    extending portion is secured to a level member (i.e. a board or plank).


CLS 248/227.3
TXT Post or column mount:

    Specially mounted bracket under subclass 227.1  wherein the outwardly
    extending portion is secured to a vertically disposed member.


CLS 248/227.4
TXT Horizontal rod or bar mount:

    Specially mounted bracket under subclass 227.1  wherein the outwardly
    extending portion is secured to a tubular ingot-type member disposed in an
    elevation plane.


CLS 248/228.1
TXT Designed for a structural beam:

    Bracket clamped to mount under subclass 226.11 in which the outwardly
    extending portion is firmly held to a supporting member designed to
    maintain construction stability.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for pipe brackets clamped to a beam.


CLS 248/228.2
TXT By cam or wedge:

    Bracket designed for a structural beam under subclass 228.1 in which the
    outwardly extending portion is firmly held by a mechanical member, inclined
    plane or lobe type, which (a) engages the supporting member and fixes it
    against another member or (b) actuates a fixing member and biases it into
    engagement with the mounting means.


CLS 248/228.3
TXT By sliding jaw:

    Bracket designed for a structural beam under subclass 228.1 in which the
    outwardly extending portion is firmly held by a pair of binding,
    constricting or pressing members (whereby at least one member reciprocates
    from the other member along an axis).


CLS 248/228.4
TXT By pivoted jaw:

    Bracket designed for a structural beam under subclass 228.1 in which the
    outwardly extending portion is firmly held by a pair of binding,
    constricting, or pressing members one of which is connected for arcuate
    movement toward or away from the other member.


CLS 248/228.5
TXT By separable jaw:

    Bracket designed for a structural beam under subclass 228.1 in which the
    securing device for the outwardly extending portion comprises a pair of
    binding, constricting, or pressing members which are readily removed from
    each other and which in the normal operation of the device the members are
    movable toward each other and firmly hold the supporting member
    therebetween.


CLS 248/228.6
TXT By C-clamp:

    Bracket designed for a structural beam under subclass 228.1 in which the
    outwardly extending portion is firmly held by a frame in the shape of the
    letter C having a movable member at one end wherein the supporting member
    is bound, constricted, or pressed between the movable member and the other
    end.


CLS 248/228.7
TXT By resilient clip:

    Bracket designed for a structural beam under subclass 228.1 in which the
    outwardly extending portion is firmly held by a mechanism formed, at least
    in part, of flexible material and wherein binding, constricting, or
    pressing portions are biased to firm holding engagement with the supporting
    member by the flexible material.


CLS 248/228.8
TXT By flexible clamping band:

    Bracket designed for a structural beam under subclass 228.1 in which the
    outwardly extending portion is firmly held by a pliable strap.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230,    for split resilient clamping rings combined with the bracket.


CLS 248/229.1
TXT Clamped to mounting surface with diverse article clamping means (i.e.,
    double clamp):

    Specially mounted bracket under subclass 205.1 in which the outwardly
    extending portion is removably secured to its support by a device that
    binds, constricts, or presses two parts together so as to hold the parts
    firmly to a wall section or specified panel and further including a device
    that binds, constricts, or presses two parts together to hold a particular
    item wherein the securing device for the outwardly extending portion and
    the device to hold a particular item are distinct and different.


CLS 248/229.11
TXT Clamped to mounting surface by cam or wedge:

    Diverse clamping means bracket under subclass 229.1 in which the securing
    device for the outwardly extending portion comprises a mechanical member,
    inclined plane or lobe type, which (a) engages the mounting means and fixes
    it against another member or (b) actuates a fixing member and is biased
    into engagement with the support.


CLS 248/229.12
TXT Clamped to mounting surface by sliding jaw:

    Diverse clamping means bracket under subclass 229.1 in which the securing
    device for the outwardly extending portion comprises binding, constricting,
    or pressing members one of which reciprocates with respect to the other
    member along an axis.


CLS 248/229.13
TXT Clamped to mounting surface by pivoted jaw:

    Diverse clamping means bracket under subclass 229.1 in which the securing
    device for the outwardly extending portion comprises binding, constricting,
    or pressing members one of which is connected for arcuate movement toward
    or away from the other member.


CLS 248/229.14
TXT Clamped to mounting surface by separable jaw:

    Diverse clamping means bracket under subclass 229.1 in which the securing
    device for the outwardly extending portion comprises a pair of binding,
    constricting, or pressing members which are readily removed from each other
    and which in the normal operation of the device are movable toward each
    other and firmly hold the support therebetween.


CLS 248/229.15
TXT Clamped to mounting surface by C-clamp:

    Diverse clamping means bracket under subclass 229.1 in which the securing
    device for the outwardly extending portion comprises a frame, in the shape
    of the letter C, having a movable member at one end wherein the support is
    bound, constricted, or pressed between the movable member and the other end.


CLS 248/229.16
TXT Clamped to mounting surface by resilient clip:

    Diverse clamping means bracket under subclass 229.1 in which the securing
    device for the outwardly extending portion which is formed, at least in
    part, of flexible material and wherein binding, constricting, or pressing
    portions are biased to firmly hold the support by the flexible material.


CLS 248/229.17
TXT Clamped to mounting surface by flexible clamping band:

    Diverse clamping means bracket under subclass 229.1 in which the securing
    device for the outwardly extending portion is a pliable strap.


CLS 248/229.2
TXT Clamped to mounting surface with identical article clamping means:

    Specially mounted bracket under subclass 205.1 in which the outwardly
    extending portion is removably secured to its support by a device that
    binds, constricts, or presses two parts together so as to hold the parts
    firmly to a wall section or specified panel and further includes a device
    that binds, constricts, or presses two parts together to hold a particular
    item wherein the securing device for the outwardly extending portion and
    the device to hold a particular item are of the same construction.


CLS 248/229.21
TXT Clamped to mounting surface by cam or wedge:

    Identical clamping means bracket under subclass 229.2 in which both the
    securing device for the outwardly extending portion and the device to hold
    a particular item comprise a mechanical member, inclined plane or lobe type
    which (a) engages the mounting means and fixes it against another member or
    (b) actuates a fixing member and biased it into engagement with the support.


CLS 248/229.22
TXT Clamped to mounting surface by sliding jaw:

    Identical clamping means bracket under subclass 229.2 in which both the
    securing device for the outwardly extending portion and the device to hold
    a particular item comprise a pair of binding, constricting, or pressing
    members one of which reciprocates from the other member along an axis.


CLS 248/229.23
TXT Clamped to mounting surface by pivoted jaw:

    Identical clamping means bracket under subclass 229.2 in which both the
    securing device for the outwardly extending portion and the device to hold
    a particular item comprise a pair of binding, constricting, or pressing
    members one of which is connected for arcuate movement toward or away from
    the other member.


CLS 248/229.24
TXT Clamped to mounting surface by separable jaw:

    Identical clamping means bracket under subclass 229.2 in which both the
    securing device for the outwardly extending portion and the device to hold
    a particular item comprise a pair of binding, constricting, or pressing
    members which are readily removed from each other and which, in the normal
    operation of the device, are movable toward each other and firmly hold the
    support therebetween.


CLS 248/229.25
TXT Clamped to mounting surface by C-clamp:

    Identical clamping means bracket under subclass 229.2 in which both the
    securing device for the outwardly extending portion and the device to hold
    a particular item comprises a frame, in the shape of the letter C, having a
    movable member at one end wherein the support is bound, constricted, or
    pressed between the movable member and the other end.


CLS 248/229.26
TXT Clamped to mounting surface by resilient clip:

    Identical clamping means bracket under subclass 229.2 in which both the
    securing device for the outwardly extending portion and the device to hold
    a particular item are formed, at least in part, of flexible material and
    wherein binding, constricting, or pressing portions are biased to firmly
    hold the engagement with the support by the flexible material.


CLS 248/230.1
TXT Cylindrical mount:

    Specially mounted bracket under subclass 226.11 in which the outwardly
    extending portion is removably secured to its support by a device that
    binds, constricts, or presses two or more parts together so as to hold the
    parts firmly to a member that is tubular in shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    541,    for a bracket type of supporting device having means for receiving
    a staff which can be adapted to be clamped to a cylindrical support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclass 151 for a
    horizontal planar surface which embraces its support, and subclass 152 for
    a horizontal planar surface which is attached laterally of its support.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 187+ for a platform
    with means to clamp it on a pole or tree.

    211,    Supports: Racks, subclass 107 for a rack having means for securing
    it to a post.


CLS 248/230.2
TXT By cam or wedge:

    Cylindrical mounted bracket under subclass 230.1 in which the securing
    device for the outwardly extending portion item comprises a mechanical
    member, inclined plane or lobe type, which (a) engages the support and
    fixes it against another member or (b) actuates a fixing member and is
    biased into engagement with the support.


CLS 248/230.3
TXT By sliding jaw:

    Cylindrical mounted bracket under subclass 230.1 in which the securing
    device for the outwardly extending portion comprises a pair of binding,
    constricting, or pressing members at least one of which reciprocates from
    the other member along an axis.


CLS 248/230.4
TXT By pivoted jaw:

    Cylindrical mounted bracket under subclass 230.1 in which the securing
    device for the outwardly extending portion  comprises a pair of binding,
    constricting, or pressing members one of which is connected for arcuate
    movement toward or away from the other member.


CLS 248/230.5
TXT By separable jaw:

    Cylindrical mounted bracket under subclass 230.1 in which the securing
    device for the outwardly extending portion comprises a pair of binding,
    constricting, or pressing members which are readily removed from each other
    and which in the normal operation of the device are movable toward each
    other and firmly hold the support therebetween.


CLS 248/230.6
TXT By C-clamp:

    Cylindrical mounted bracket under subclass 230.1 in which the securing
    device for the outwardly extending portion comprises a frame, in the shape
    of the letter C, having a movable member at one end wherein the support is
    bound, constricted, or pressed between the movable member and the other end.


CLS 248/230.7
TXT By resilient clip:

    Cylindrical mounted bracket under subclass 230.1 in which the securing
    device for the outwardly extending portion is formed, at least in part, of
    flexible material and wherein binding, constricting, or pressing portions
    are biased to firm holding engagement with the support by the flexible
    material.


CLS 248/230.8
TXT By flexible clamping band:

    Cylindrical mounted bracket under subclass 230.1 in which the securing
    device for the outwardly extending portion is a pliable strap.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230,    for split resilient clamping rings combined with the bracket.


CLS 248/230.9
TXT Including threaded attaching member:

    Flexible clamping band under subclass 230.8 wherein the outwardly extending
    portion has a projecting helical rib for fastening to the support.


CLS 248/231.21
TXT By expanding clamp:

    Specially mounted bracket under subclass 226.11 which pushes apart two
    parts so as to hold the parts firmly against the wall section or specific
    panel.


CLS 248/231.31
TXT By cam or wedge:

    Specially mounted bracket under subclass 226.11 comprising a mechanical
    member, inclined plane or lobe type which (1) engages the mounting means
    and fixes it against another member or (2) actuates a fixing member and is
    biased into engagement with the support.


CLS 248/231.41
TXT By sliding jaw:

    Specially mounted bracket under subclass 226.11 comprising a pair of
    binding, constricting, or pressing members one of which reciprocates from
    the other member along an axis.


CLS 248/231.51
TXT By pivoted jaw:

    Specially mounted bracket under subclass 226.11 comprising a pair of
    binding, constricting, or pressing members one of which is connected for
    arcuate movement toward or away from the other member.


CLS 248/231.61
TXT By separable jaw:

    Specially mounted bracket under subclass 226.11 comprising a pair of
    binding, constricting, or pressing members which are readily removed from
    each other and which in the normal operation of the device are movable
    toward each other and firmly hold the support therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231.51, for a pivoted jaw for a pair of clamping members which are joined
    together by a detachable hinge.


CLS 248/231.71
TXT By C-clamp:

    Specially mounted bracket under subclass 226.11 comprising a frame, in the
    shape of the letter C, having a movable member at one end wherein the
    support is bound, constricted, or pressed between the movable member and
    the other end.


CLS 248/231.81
TXT By resilient clip:

    Specially mounted bracket under subclass 226.11 which is formed, at least
    in part, of flexible material and wherein binding, constricting, or
    pressing portions are biased to firmly hold the engagement with the support
    by the flexible material.


CLS 248/231.85
TXT Distinct, separate, article clamp members:

    Specially mounted bracket under subclass 226.11 in which the device that
    binds, constricts, or presses two parts together to hold a particular
    article comprises a plurality of diverse clamping members.


CLS 248/231.9
TXT In aperture of support:

    Structure under subclass 205.1 comprising a member within an opening in a
    support which member within an opening in a support which member is adapted
    to receive or accommodate a fastener for securing a bracket.


CLS 248/231.91
TXT By wall anchor:

    Bracket under subclass 205.1 comprising a member within an aperture in a
    wall which member is adapted to receive or accommodate a fastener for
    securing a bracket.


CLS 248/232
TXT Bracket supports under subclass 200 specially designed to support a wall
    radiator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209,    for brackets for supporting a wall radiator on a window frame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 67+ for a heat exchanger with an external
    support.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 68.4+ for vehicle radiator supports.


CLS 248/233
TXT Wall radiator bracket supports under subclass 232 in which the radiator is
    hung from its top.


CLS 248/234
TXT Wall radiator bracket supports under subclass 232 in which the radiator is
    carried by a hook which in turn is supported by the lower end of a rod.


CLS 248/235
TXT Brackets under subclass 200 of the type used for supporting a shelf or
    scaffold board.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236,    for a window mounted shelf or scaffold bracket.

    237,    for a roof mounted shelf or scaffold bracket.

    238,    for a ladder mounted shelf or scaffold bracket.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclass 152 for a
    horizontal planar surface which is attached laterally of its support by
    means of a bracket.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 333 for brackets limited by structure
    for supporting stove shelves.


CLS 248/236
TXT Devices under subclass 208 wherein the bracket is of the shelf or scaffold
    type.


CLS 248/237
TXT Devices under subclass 205.1 which are mounted on a sloping roof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48.1,   for roof-supporting eaves trough brackets.

    148,    for receptacle stands for sloping roofs.

    536,    for a bracket type of supporting device having means for receiving
    a staff, which device is adapted to be mounted upon surfaces formed by
    intersecting planes (e.g., a roof ridge).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclass 45 for a workman's
    support with means to mount it on a sloping roof.


CLS 248/238
TXT Devices under subclass 210 wherein the bracket is of the shelf or scaffold
    type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 120+ for a detachable
    platform or step mounted on a ladder.


CLS 248/239
TXT Devices under subclass 235 in the form of a generally horizontally
    extending pin upon which the shelf rests.


CLS 248/240
TXT Devices under subclass 235 which are pivoted to swing against the wall in
    either a vertical or horizontal direction or to be folded when not in use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236,    237 and 238, for folding window, roof, or ladder supported brackets
    of this type.


CLS 248/240.1
TXT Device under subclass 240 wherein the wall is provided with a recess or
    receptacle and the shelf is movable into the recess to a nonuse position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 14+ for a chair bottom and back stored
    in a wall recess or receptacle.


CLS 248/240.2
TXT Device under subclass 240 provided with a supporting leg or standard which
    extends down to a supporting position on a horizontal surface such as a
    floor or the ground.


CLS 248/240.3
TXT Device under subclass 240 wherein the bracket as a whole is displaced from
    its use position and collapsed, as for storage or transport.


CLS 248/240.4
TXT Device under subclass 240 wherein the shelf-like component or that on which
    it bears pivots about a horizontal axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    371+,   for a stand with a tilting support surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 313+ for a seat with a tilting bottom.


CLS 248/241
TXT Devices under subclass 235 in which the bracket is adjustable to vary the
    position of the shelf or scaffold board or to take different sizes or
    shelves or scaffold boards.


CLS 248/242
TXT Devices under subclass 241 in which the bracket is adjustable to vary the
    angle of the shelf or scaffold board.


CLS 248/243
TXT Devices under subclass 241 in which the bracket is adjustable to vary the
    vertical position of the shelf or scaffold board.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 106+ for
    vertically adjustable plural related surfaces and subclasses 144.11+ for a
    vertically adjustable horizontal planar surface.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 351 for cabinets with
    vertically adjustable shelves.


CLS 248/244
TXT Devices under subclass 243 in which the bracket is slid along its support
    from position to position and again interlocked or clamped thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    295.11+, for similar supports of more  general utility.


CLS 248/245
TXT Devices under subclass 244 in which the bracket is clamped to its support
    in the various positions to which it is slid.


CLS 248/246
TXT Devices under subclass 245 in which the bracket is automatically clamped to
    its support in its adjusted position by the action of the weight of the
    bracket and its load.


CLS 248/247
TXT Shelf or scaffold bracket supports under subclass 235 which are made of
    sheet material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300,    for similar supports of more general utility.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 897+ for  a process for making sheet
    metal brackets.


CLS 248/248
TXT Devices under subclass 247 which are made from a single blank of sheet
    material.


CLS 248/249
TXT Shelf or scaffold bracket supports under subclass 235 which are made of
    wire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302,    for similar supports of more general utility.


CLS 248/250
TXT Devices under subclass 235 for holding the shelf or scaffold board to its
    bracket.


CLS 248/251
TXT Brackets under subclass 200 having provisions for supporting a rod usually
    in a horizontal position.The term curtain rod includes the head rod or pole
    of venetian blinds.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and the indented subclasses take bracket
    supports for poles where only such structure of the pole is claimed as
    immediately cooperates with the bracket for mounting purposes.Where, in
    addition, other features (1) of pole structure, (2) of pole or fabric
    operating means, (3) of fabric securing means and/or (4) the combination
    with a fabric (either broadly or specifically) are included, the patent is
    either in Class 160 or other appropriate class under the lines set forth in
    note (3) to the main class definition of Class 160.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65+,    for pipe or cable brackets.

    534+    for a bracket type of supporting device having means for receiving
    a staff. While the supported object of that subclass (534) closely
    resembles the supported object of this subclass (251), a supporting device
    of that subclass ordinarily supports the object in cantilever fashion,
    whereas here (251) a plurality of significantly spaced devices are provided
    for supporting the object.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 369 and 371 for
    strip-like screeds which may include a support and subclasses 677+ for
    spacer-positioner for rod-like embedded reinforcing member.

    188,    Brakes, subclass 205 for vehicle brake rod supports.


CLS 248/252
TXT Brackets of the rod type under subclass 251 which have provisions for
    supporting both a curtain rod or roller and a shade roller or a plurality
    of shade rollers. The rods and rollers may be claimed by name, and such
    structure of the rod and/or roller as is necessary to cooperate with the
    bracket may be recited.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263,    for brackets for plural curtain rods only.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 89+
    including particularly subclasses 108+, 113+ and 120+ for additional
    specific features included in combination.


CLS 248/253
TXT Devices under subclass 252 which also have provisions for supporting more
    than one curtain rod or roller.


CLS 248/254
TXT Devices under subclass 252 in which the bracket at each end of the rod and
    roller is not attached to that at the other end except by being attached to
    the window frame.


CLS 248/255
TXT Devices under subclass 254 which also have provisions for supporting more
    than one curtain rod or roller.


CLS 248/256
TXT Devices under subclass 255 in which the bracket is adjustable to change the
    position of or to take different lengths of curtain poles or shade rollers.


CLS 248/257
TXT Devices under subclass 254 in which the bracket is adjustable to change the
    position of or to take different lengths of curtain rods or shade rollers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252,    for adjustable brackets of this type which are attached to each
    other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 164+ for a table behind a seat wherein
    each is independently vertically adjustable, and subclass 168 for a table
    behind a seat wherein the seat is tiltable and vertically adjustable and
    the table is either stationary or moves vertically with the seat.


CLS 248/258
TXT Devices under subclass 257 in which the adjustment is in two different
    directions usually at right angles to each other.  The adjustment in one
    direction may be of the shade roller and in the other the curtain pole.


CLS 248/259
TXT Devices under subclass 257 in which the adjustment is in a direction
    laterally of the window.


CLS 248/260
TXT Devices under subclass 259 in which the adjustment progresses by steps.


CLS 248/261
TXT Brackets of the rod type under subclass 251 which have provisions for
    supporting a curtain pole.This subclass and indented subclasses include the
    pole where the only modification is so that it will fit the particular
    bracket.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266+,   for supports for curtain poles in the form of a roller like the
    ordinary shade roller.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 87.2+ for supports with fabric
    hanging means.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 333+
    and 340+ for an operator for the fabric.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 105.1 for operators for the pole, and
    for details of the arrangement of the structure of the pole or rod (other
    than that necessary to the cooperation of the pole and bracket).


CLS 248/262
TXT Devices under subclass 261 in which the bracket at one end of the pole is
    unattached to the bracket at the other end except by being attached to the
    window frame.


CLS 248/263
TXT Devices under subclass 262 which have provisions for supporting more than
    one curtain rod.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 113+
    and 123+ for specific details of the rods or their specific arrangement.


CLS 248/264
TXT Devices under subclass 262 which are mounted on and lie between the
    opposing walls of a window frame.


CLS 248/265
TXT Devices under subclass 262 in which the bracket is adjustable to change the
    position of the curtain pole or to take different lengths of poles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261,    for adjustable brackets of this type which are attached to each
    other.


CLS 248/266
TXT Devices under subclass 251 which have provisions for supporting a single
    roller of the shade roller type. This subclass and the indented subclasses
    include the roller when so named.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses
    323.1+ for more than the mere mounting of the roller, e.g., means for
    aiding or permitting the winding of the roller motor.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 599.3 for a particular
    spindle bearing arrangement, and subclass 919 for a ground cover reeling
    device.


CLS 248/267
TXT Devices under subclass 266 in which the bracket at each end of the roller
    is unattached to that at the other end except by being attached to the
    window frame or other support.


CLS 248/268
TXT Devices under subclass 267 in which the bracket is mounted on and lies
    between the opposing walls of the window frame.


CLS 248/269
TXT Devices under subclass 267 in which the bracket is adjustable to change the
    position of the roller or to take different lengths of rollers.


CLS 248/270
TXT Devices under subclass 269 in which the adjustment is in two different
    directions usually at right angles to each other.


CLS 248/271
TXT Devices under subclass 269 in which the adjustment is in a direction
    laterally of the window.


CLS 248/272
TXT Devices under subclass 271 in which the adjustment progresses by steps.


CLS 248/273
TXT Brackets of the rod type under subclass 251 having provisions for
    supporting an awning head rod.


CLS 248/274.1
TXT Adjustable:

    Bracket under subclass 200 in which the outwardly extending portion is
    movable to (a) change position of the supported article, (b) take different
    sized articles, or (c) be secured to different sized supports.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81+,    for adjustable brackets for supporting a hose on a stand.

    226.11+,where the bracket is secured to a mount by an adjustable clamp.

    232+,   for adjustable radiator brackets.


CLS 248/276.1
TXT Plural joints:

    Adjustable bracket under subclass 274.1 in which the movement is made
    possible by more than one connection in the outwardly extending portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    288.11+,for adjustments made in a plurality of directions, but only a
    single joint is used.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123.11, for a stand with a counterbalanced bracket.

    560+,   for a support wherein the weight of the supported article is
    sustained by a resilient means when in use.


CLS 248/277.1
TXT Lazy tong type:

    Plural joint adjustable bracket under subclass 276.1 in which the outwardly
    extending portion is in the form of a series of pivoted bars.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157,    for lazy tong stands.

    324,    for lazy tong suspension devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 521 for lazy tong levers.

    211,    Supports: Racks, subclass 105 for lazy tong racks.


CLS 248/278.1
TXT Vertical pivot at right angle to horizontal pivot:

    Plural joint adjustable bracket under subclass 276.1 in which the joints
    are in the form of a plurality of rotatable connections (at least one
    connection being on an elevation axis and orthogonal to at least one
    connection on a level axis).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports: Racks, subclass 119.06 for a clothesline pulley mounted
    on a window bracket in such a manner as to swing in two planes.


CLS 248/279.1
TXT Having sliding joints:

    Vertical and horizontal pivots under subclass 278.1 in which at least one
    rotatable connection comprises elements which reciprocate along a single
    line.


CLS 248/280.11
TXT Counterbalanced:

    Vertical and horizontal pivots under subclass 278.1 in which the force
    tending to move the outwardly extending portion about one or more of the
    horizontal axis rotatable connections is counteracted by a force (e.g.,
    spring, weight, etc.).


CLS 248/281.11
TXT Having parallel arms:

    Vertical and horizontal pivots under subclass 278.1 in which the outwardly
    extending portion has at least two spaced members, secured at the rotatable
    connection, which are side by side.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    585,    for a resilient support comprising a parallelogram linkage.


CLS 248/282.1
TXT Vertical pivots:

    Plural joint adjustable bracket under subclass 276.1 in which the rotatable
    connections are along an elevation axis.


CLS 248/283.1
TXT Having vertical adjustment:

    Plural joint adjustable bracket under subclass 282.1 in which the outwardly
    extending portion or the article held has provisions for movement along an
    elevation axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Support: Racks, subclass 98 for racks having a plurality of arms
    pivoted on a vertical axis and vertically adjustable.


CLS 248/284.1
TXT Horizontal pivots:

    Plural joint adjustable bracket under subclass 276.1 in which the rotatable
    connections are along a level axis.


CLS 248/285.1
TXT Single vertical pivot and sliding joints:

    Plural joint adjustable bracket under subclass 276.1 which has at least one
    elevation axis rotatable connection and one or more connection(s) that
    reciprocates along a single line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    283.1,  for sliding joints which allow vertical adjustment.


CLS 248/286.1
TXT Single horizontal pivot and sliding joints:

    Plural joint adjustable bracket under subclass 276.1 which have one level
    axis rotatable connection and one or more connection(s) that reciprocates
    along a single line.


CLS 248/287.1
TXT Horizontally and vertically sliding joints:

    Plural joint adjustable bracket under subclass 276.1 which the article
    reciprocates along an elevation axis and a level axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124,    for similar structure in stand and bracket supports.


CLS 248/288.11
TXT Single joint:

    Adjustable bracket under subclass 274.1 in which adjustment is made
    possible by means of one connection.


CLS 248/288.31
TXT Ball and socket type:

    Single joint adjustable bracket under subclass 288.11 in which movement is
    facilitated by a spherical portion within a complementary cavity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181.1,  for a bracket connected to a stand by a ball and socket.

    481+,   for a picture or mirror supporting bracket comprising a ball and
    socket.


CLS 248/288.51
TXT Including mechanically actuated tension or locking member:

    Ball and socket bracket under subclass 288.31 comprising manually actuated
    means for maintaining a force on one component of the joint, usually for
    either taking up wear or for regulating the friction between a plurality of
    relatively movable components.

    (1)     Note.  The force may be sufficiently great as to lock the
    components against movement or merely sufficient to cause resistance to
    motion.


CLS 248/289.11
TXT Vertical pivot:

    Single joint adjustable bracket under subclass 288.11 in which the single
    connection is rotatable about an elevation axis line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240,    for vertically pivoted shelf brackets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Support: Racks, subclass 96 for racks having a plurality of arms
    pivoted on a vertical axis pivot and subclass 119.07 for clothesline pulley
    supports which are mounted in a window bracket in such a manner as to be
    capable of swinging in a horizontal plane only.


CLS 248/289.31
TXT Self returning:

    Vertical pivot under subclass 289.11 comprising biasing means to move the
    article support back to a preselected position upon the release of a force
    which caused it to be displaced from said preselected position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    417,    for a stand having a self-returning article supporting surface.


CLS 248/290.1
TXT For hook type bracket:

    Vertical pivot under subclass 289.11 including a curved or bent piece,
    similar to the letter J, for holding articles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216.1+  and 294.1, for other hook type pivoted support.


CLS 248/291.1
TXT Horizontal pivot:

    Single joint adjustable bracket under subclass 288.11 in which the single
    connection rotates about a level axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240,    for horizontally pivoted shelf brackets.


CLS 248/292.11
TXT Counterbalanced:

    Horizontally pivoted single joint bracket under subclass 291.11 in which
    the force tending to move the outwardly extending portion about one or more
    of the horizontal axis rotatable connections is counteracted by a spring,
    weight, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    560+,   for a support wherein the weight of the supported article is
    sustained by a resilient means when in use.


CLS 248/292.12
TXT Including pawl and ratchet, mating serrations, rack and pinion, or gear:

    Horizontally pivoted single joint bracket under subclass 291.1 in which two
    interdigitate members align to position the article support means.


CLS 248/292.13
TXT Including spring or biasing means:

    Horizontally pivoted single joint bracket under subclass 291.1 in which an
    elastic means that recovers its original shape when released after being
    distorted is added to the bracket or mount.


CLS 248/292.14
TXT Pivot axis moves in slot:

    Horizontally pivoted single joint bracket under subclass 291.1 in which the
    point of rotation reciprocates in an elongated aperture in either the
    bracket or mount.


CLS 248/294.1
TXT For hook type bracket:

    Horizontally pivoted single joint bracket under subclass 291.1 including a
    curved or bent piece, similar to the letter J, for holding articles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218     and 290.1, for other hook type pivoted supports.


CLS 248/295.11
TXT Vertical sliding (e.g., shoring, formwork, or scaffold brackets):

    Adjustable bracket under subclass 274.1 in which the outwardly extending
    portion is moved along an elevation axis.

    (1)     Note.  Formwork, scaffold, and shoring brackets are found in this
    subclass.


CLS 248/296.1
TXT And rotatable at a single joint:

    Vertical sliding bracket under subclass 295.11 in which the outwardly
    extending portion is moved both along an elevation axis and revolved about
    a pivotable connection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124     and 246, for other supports of this type.


CLS 248/297.11
TXT Counterbalanced:

    Vertical sliding bracket under subclass 295.11 in which the force tending
    to move the outwardly extending portion about one or more of the horizontal
    axis rotatable connections is counteracted by a spring, weight, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123.11, for counterbalanced stand and bracket supports.


CLS 248/297.21
TXT Bracket projects from vertical slot or channel:

    Vertical sliding bracket under subclass 295.11 wherein the member on which
    the outwardly extending portion is mounted comprises a narrow groove within
    which a piece of the outwardly extending portion is received and from which
    another portion of the outwardly extending portion protrudes.


CLS 248/297.31
TXT Step-by-step adjustment:

    Vertical sliding bracket under subclass 295.11 comprising a plurality of
    retaining or securing means which permit the adjustment of the outwardly
    extending portion by a series of discreet increments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    477+,   for a mirror or picture bracket wherein the position of the mirror
    or picture is adjustable by selectively engaging projections and recessions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 107+ for a step-by-step
    adjustment between two members.


CLS 248/297.51
TXT Canted clutch collar:

    Vertical sliding bracket under subclass 295.11 comprising a loosely fitted
    ringlike sleeve slidably engaging a vertical post, the outwardly extending
    portion projecting from one side of said sleeve whereby the weight of the
    outwardly extending portion and/or the supported article will cause the
    sleeve to tilt and fictionally grip the vertical post with sufficient force
    to maintain the outwardly extending portion in a vertical position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    410,    for a pair of vertically adjustable telescoping standard sections
    comprising a canted collar for locking same in an adjusted position.


CLS 248/298.1
TXT Horizontal sliding:

    Adjustable bracket under subclass 274.1 in which the outwardly extending
    portion is moved along a level axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257+,   265, and 269, for horizontally sliding supports.


CLS 248/299.1
TXT In an arcuate path:

    Adjustable bracket under subclass 274.1 in which the outwardly extending
    portion is moved along a line that generally follows the arc of a circle.


CLS 248/300
TXT Bracket supports under subclass 200 in which the bracket is made of sheet
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for sheet metal cable brackets with bridle rings.

    247,    for sheet metal shelf brackets.

    251+,   for rod brackets of sheet material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 897+ for a process for making brackets.


CLS 248/301
TXT Device under subclass 300 in which the article support is in the form of a
    hook.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215,    for similar structure in horizontal rod or bar.


CLS 248/302
TXT Bracket supports under subclass 200 made of wire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48.1,   48.2, 112, and 249, for other wire type supports.

    69,     for cable brackets with wire bridle rings.

    311.2+, for wire receptacle holders.

    315,    for wire brackets in which the article holder is in the form of a
    ring.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 106, 112, 119, and 181.1, for racks of
    wire.


CLS 248/303
TXT Hook type, stationary mount:

    Wire bracket under subclass 302 wherein a curved or bent piece, similar to
    the letter J, is fixed to a portion that fastens to a wall section, panel,
    post, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216.1+   for support penetrating hook type   means.


CLS 248/304
TXT Hook type, stationary mount:

    Bracket under subclass 200 wherein a curved or bent piece, similar to the
    letter J, is fixed to a portion that fastens to a wall section, panel,
    post, etc..

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205.5+, for bracket hooks supported by suction cups.

    211,    211, 213, 215, 216.1+, 227.1+, 290.1, 294.1, 301, and 303, for more
    particularly classified hook type brackets.

    339+,   for suspended hook type supports.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 369+ for similar
    devices, which may be disclosed for use as brackets, per se, and the
    article supporting hook is in combination with a second fastener, which,
    per se, is classifiable in Class 24.

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclass 30 for a hook type
    bracket combined with a horizontally supported planar surface.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 100 for horizontal multiple rod type
    supports.


CLS 248/305
TXT Devices under subclass 304 which are also provided with a clasp to hold the
    article to the hook.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 343+ for clasp hook
    fasteners.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 8+ for racks with article locking
    clasps, and subclasses 89.01, 120 and 124 for racks with article clasps.


CLS 248/306
TXT Devices under subclass 304 which are pivoted or have other special
    provisions whereby the article may be readily released from the hook.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322,    for releasable, suspended supports.


CLS 248/307
TXT Devices under subclass 304 in which the hook is slidable on its supports.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215     and 340, for this feature in other supports.


CLS 248/308
TXT Devices under subclass 304 in which the bracket is foldable when not in use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290.1   and 294.1, for other foldable hook type devices.


CLS 248/309.1
TXT Article holding means:

    Structure under subclass 200 for supporting an article on the bracket.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176.1+  and 346.01+, for other article holding supports.


CLS 248/309.2
TXT Pin of spindle:

    Structure under subclass 309.1 wherein the means for holding the supported
    article comprises an elongate rod-like member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 57.1 and 125 for similar structure in
    a support for plural articles.


CLS 248/309.3
TXT Vacuum:

    Structure under subclass 309.1 comprising a component which is attached to
    the supported article by atmospheric pressure acting either on the
    component or the article by reason of a reduced pressure beneath the
    component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205.5+, for a bracket which is attached to a support by means of a vacuum
    and see the notes thereunder.


CLS 248/309.4
TXT Magnetic:

    Structure under subclass 309.1 wherein the article is secured to the
    bracket by ferrous attraction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206.5,  for a specially mounted or attached bracket secured by magnetic
    means.


CLS 248/310
TXT Devices under subclass 309.1 in which the holding device including clamps
    engages only the base of the supported article.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes devices for holding receptacles when
    the holding means engages the base of the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    309.1,  and 311.2  to 316.7, for combinations of base engaging means with
    other holding means.


CLS 248/311.2
TXT Receptacle type:

    Devices under subclass 309.1 specially designed to hold a receptacle to its
    supporting bracket.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210,    for ladder attached supports.

    315,    for holders in the form of a ring.

    318,    for suspended receptacle supports.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 3.31+ and 3.39 for fruit-jar vises.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 68.5 for vehicle battery box holding
    devices.

    232,    Deposit and Collection Receptacles, subclasses 41+ for devices for
    holding milk bottles for deposit and collection together with means for
    preventing their theft.


CLS 248/311.3
TXT Devices under subclass 311.2 specifically adapted to support a receptacle
    in its inverted position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for devices for holding paste-tube receptacles in an inverted
    position for dispensing their contents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 181.1+ for brackets to support receptacles
    in position for the bottom discharge of their contents.


CLS 248/312
TXT Devices under subclass 311.2 in which the holding device engages only the
    neck of the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for devices for grasping the neck of a paste-tube.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    232,    Deposit and Collection Receptacles, subclasses 41+ for devices for
    engaging the neck of a bottle and locking the bottle thereto.


CLS 248/312.1
TXT Upper rim or lip engaging:

    Structure under subclass 311.2 comprising means for engaging the upper rim
    or a lip formed adjacent the upper rim of a receptacle.


CLS 248/313
TXT Devices under subclass 311.2 in which the receptacle holding means is in
    the form of a clamp.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229.1+, for specially mounted article clamps.

    310,    for base engaging clamps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 455+ for clasps, per se.
     The line is set out in a note under the class definition.


CLS 248/314
TXT Devices under subclass 309.1 in which the article holder is in the form of
    a socket or pocket.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111,    for similar structure in brush and broom holders.


CLS 248/315
TXT Devices under subclass 309.1 in which the article holder is in the form of
    a ring surrounding the article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62      and 74.1+, for pipe or cable supporting rings.


CLS 248/316.1
TXT Clamps:

    Devices under subclass 309.1 in which the article holder is in the form of
    a securing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229.1   and 313, for other article clamps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Brackets, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 243+ for clasps, per
    se.  The line is set out in a note under the class definition.

    211,    Support:  Racks, subclasses 8+ for racks with article locking
    clasps, and subclasses, 89.01, 120 and 124 for racks with article clasps.


CLS 248/316.2
TXT Wedging or camming:

    Structure under subclass 316.1 comprising a lobe or inclined plane member,
    which (1) engages the supported article and clamps it against another
    member, or (2) actuates a clamping member and biases it into clamping
    engagement with the support article.


CLS 248/316.3
TXT Self-actuating:

    Structure under subclass 316.2 wherein the clamping action is effected by
    the weight of the bracket or a component thereof or the supported article.


CLS 248/316.4
TXT Sliding jaw:

    Structure under subclass 316.1 comprising a plurality of clamping members,
    at least one of which is mounted for linearly movement toward or away from
    the other.


CLS 248/316.5
TXT Pivoted jaw:

    Structure under subclass 316.1 comprising a plurality of clamping members,
    at least one of which is accurately movably mounted for motion toward or
    away from the other.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are devices having relatively
    rigid jaws connected by a flexural hinge.


CLS 248/316.6
TXT Separable jaw:

    Structure under subclass 316.1 comprising a plurality of clamping members
    which are readily detachable from each other and in the normal operation of
    the device readily movable toward or away from each other in order to clamp
    the supported article therebetween.


CLS 248/316.7
TXT Clip:

    Structure under subclass 316.1 which is formed, at least in part, of
    resilient, material and wherein clamping portions are biased into clamping
    engagement with the supported article by the resilience of said resilient
    material.


CLS 248/316.8
TXT Horizontally spaced elements:

    Structure under subclass 309.1 comprising a plurality of laterally spaced
    elements which engage the support article.

    (1)     Note.  The elements may be discrete members or may be integral
    projections of a single member.


CLS 248/317
TXT Devices under the class definition for supporting an article by hanging it
    from an overhead support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48.1,   for suspension devices for eaves troughs.

    200+,   for relatively compact devices in the nature of brackets even
    though attached to a ceiling or other overhead support.

    581,    for a resiliently suspended horizontal frame or platform.

    589,    for a support resiliently suspended by a linkage or gearing.

    614+,   for a resiliently suspended support.

    648+,   for devices for suspending machines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 67 for a support device for hanging a
    flower pot.

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclasses 78+, especially
    subclass 78.1 for supports consisting merely of a chain or sections thereof.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 142+ for a suspended
    platform with elevating or lowering means, and subclass 150 for the
    suspended platform.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 113+ for suspended racks.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 404+ for such supports limited by
    structure to use with lights.


CLS 248/318
TXT Suspending devices under subclass 317 specially designed to support a
    receptacle or bowl.  This subclass includes devices for supporting inverted
    light bowls which are not limited by structure to use for illumination.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclass 453 for similar devices limited to use with
    lights.


CLS 248/320
TXT Suspension devices under subclass 317 which are constructed to be released
    usually from the ground so that the supported article can be lowered within
    reach.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclass 403 for such for supports limited by
    structure to use with lights.


CLS 248/321
TXT Devices under subclass 320 in which the suspension element is grasped by a
    releasable clutch.


CLS 248/322
TXT Devices under subclass 320 in which the suspension element is supported by
    a hook and from with it can be readily released.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306,    for similar structure in bracket supports.


CLS 248/323
TXT Suspension devices under subclass 317 in which the supported article may be
    moved to various positions relative to the overhead support.


CLS 248/324
TXT Devices under subclass 323 in which the adjustment is secured by one or
    more parts pivoted to the support, to each other, or both.


CLS 248/325
TXT Devices under subclass 324 in which there is also provided a weight
    counterbalance for one or more of the pivoted sections.


CLS 248/326
TXT Devices under subclass 324 which are also provided with telescoping tubes
    to provide for further adjustment.


CLS 248/327
TXT Devices under subclass 323 in which the adjustment is in a vertical
    direction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclass 403 for such supports limited by structure
    to use with lights.


CLS 248/328
TXT Devices under subclass 327 in which the article is supported by a cord.


CLS 248/329
TXT Devices under subclass 328 which are also provided with a reel upon which
    the cord is wound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 370+ for a reeling
    device for elongated material.


CLS 248/330.1
TXT Spring:

    Devices under subclass 329 in which the reel is a spring reel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    579,    for a support comprising a spring reel wherein the spring sustains
    the weight of the supported article when in use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 371+ for a spring
    powered reeling device of general use.


CLS 248/331
TXT Devices under subclass 328 which are also provided with a counterweight for
    the article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclass 401 for such supports limited by structure
    to use with lights.


CLS 248/332
TXT Devices under subclass 328 including pulley brackets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 389+ for devices or members for guiding a moving cable.


CLS 248/333
TXT Devices under subclass 327 in which the adjustment is secured by means of
    telescoping tubes.


CLS 248/334.1
TXT Spring reel counterbalanced:

    Devices under subclass 333 in which the telescoping tubes are
    counterbalanced by a spring reel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    579,    for a support comprising a spring reel wherein the spring sustains
    the weight of the supported article when in use.


CLS 248/335
TXT Devices under subclass 334.1 in which the tubes are held in adjusted
    position by a releasable clutch within the tubes.


CLS 248/336
TXT Devices under subclass 333 in which a clutch is provided to hold the tubes
    in adjusted position.


CLS 248/337
TXT Devices under subclass 336 in which the clutch is a friction clutch.


CLS 248/338
TXT Devices under subclass 333 including rotary brakes for holding the
    telescoping tubes.


CLS 248/339
TXT Suspension devices under subclass 317 in which the article support is in
    the form of a hook.


CLS 248/340
TXT Devices under subclass 339 in which the suspension element is suspended
    from a generally horizontal bar.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215     and 307, for similar structure in hook type brackets.


CLS 248/341
TXT Devices under subclass 339 in which the supporting hook can swing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211,    290.1, 294.1, and 308, for similar devices in hook type brackets.

    324,    for similar article supports in the form of an eye.


CLS 248/342
TXT Devices under subclass 317 adapted for use as an element in a suspension
    support.


CLS 248/343
TXT Devices under subclass 342 forming the attachment of a suspension support
    to a ceiling or other overhead support.


CLS 248/344
TXT Devices under subclass 342 forming the attachment between a suspension
    element and the article supporting arms of a suspension support.


CLS 248/345
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising elements of a support
    used to protect or conceal the connection between a bracket or suspension
    device and the fixed support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 241+ for face plates.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 404+ for such devices limited by structure
    to use with lights.


CLS 248/345.1
TXT Device under the class definition comprising means, including buffers,
    guards, pads, wear strips or the like, attachable to an article of
    furniture to prevent marring or scarring either of said article or of
    adjacent structure by the said article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    615+,   for a foot or bumper which provides resilient support for the
    supported device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 460+ for means attached
    to a closure to prevent damage to the closure or to an adjacent object by
    the closure.

    117.2+, for sadiron support bases.


CLS 248/346.01
TXT SUPPORTING BASE:

    Supports under the class definition which provide a rest for an article and
    are generally of a flat or box-like nature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117.2+, for sadiron support bases.

    176.1+, for article supporting stands.

    309.1+, for article holding brackets.

    357,    for prop bases.

    519+,   for a stand or base type of supporting device having means for
    receiving a staff.

    678,    for machine bases.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 292+ for an in situ
    type footing for a shaft-like component.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclass 129 for a workman's
    kneeling base or bench in combination with a receptacle or other ancillary
    device and subclass 230 for a workman's kneeling base or bench, per se.

    200,    Electricity: Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 293+ for
    electrical switch bases.


CLS 248/346.02
TXT Pallet type (without structure to receive handling means):

    Support base under subclass 346.01 in which the rest is a platform
    relatively close to a floor or primary support, but unable to accept fork
    lift forks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 51.11+ for
    industrial platforms.


CLS 248/346.03
TXT Including attachment or holder for article:

    Support base under subclass 346.01 in which the rest includes a device to
    temporarily retain an item.


CLS 248/346.04
TXT Biased by spring or resilient member (e.g., snap fit):

    Support base with holder under subclass 346.03 in which the retainer is
    elastic.


CLS 248/346.05
TXT And base leveling means:

    Support base with holder under subclass 346.03 in which the rest has
    structure to maintain a horizontal position.


CLS 248/346.06
TXT Base allows attachment or holder to adjust position:

    Support base with holder under subclass 346.03 in which the retainer moves
    relative to the rest.


CLS 248/346.07
TXT Adjustable size base:

    Support base with holder under subclass 346.03 in which the rest expands or
    contracts.


CLS 248/346.11
TXT Coaster or caster cup:

    Support base under subclass 346.01 comprising a generally shallow,
    receptacle-like support for a receptacle or other article and often
    including  moisture absorbing or drip collection features, or a similar
    device for  supporting a furniture leg or caster.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 18+ for casters comprising
    wheels,  balls or sliding shoes mounted for movably supporting furniture
    and like  objects.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 393+ for condensate or drip collection
     attachments for bottles and jars.


CLS 248/346.2
TXT Filled with fluent material:

    Support base under subclass 346.01 wherein the rest has a hollow portion
    containing with a composition that flows at room temperature.


CLS 248/346.3
TXT Knockdown or collapsible (i.e., reduced in volume):

    Support base under subclass 346.01 in which the rest is designed to be
    disassembled or manipulated to a reduced volume.


CLS 248/346.4
TXT Corrugated structure:

    Support base under subclass 346.01 in which the rest is composed of at
    least one layer in an undulating configuration.


CLS 248/346.5
TXT With upturned flange, projection, lip, or wall:

    Support base under subclass 346.01 in which the rest has a portion that is
    perpendicular to the main bearing surface and extends a substantially short
    length compared to the main bearing surface.


CLS 248/349.1
TXT Rotatable:

    Supporting bases under subclass 346.01 which  have provisions whereby the
    article may be revolved relative to a fixed substructure(e.g., table top).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    521+,   for a stand or base type of supporting device having rotatable
    means for receiving a staff.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 94+ for terraced
    rotatable horizontal planar surfaces, subclasses 103+ for plural related
    horizontal surfaces which are rotatable about a vertical axis, and
    subclasses  139+ for a horizontal planar surface which rotates about a
    vertical axis.

    211,    Supports: Racks, subclass 163 for rotatable racks.


CLS 248/351
TXT Supports under the class definition in the nature of poles or posts
    arranged either vertically, horizontally, or in an inclined position which
    hold or steady an article or thing from falling against the action of
    gravity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359.1,  for props which remain with the    article.

    441.1+, for an easel prop.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, subclass 94 for firearm props and rests.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 43 for tree props.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclass for a
    rigid elongated member of more general application, particularly subclass
    112 for an opposed barrier engaging mechanism operated column, subclass 632
    for an axially extensible shaft or openwork, subclasses 690+ for a truss
    type openwork, and subclasses 720.1+ for a miscellaneous elongated rigid
    structure.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 355+ for braces for bracing loads
    in railway cars where the brace is combined with the structure of the
    bulkhead or car.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 165+ for a ladder with
    a pivoted prop.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force, for
    props having means for extending them.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 293+ for velocipede props.


CLS 248/352
TXT Props under subclass 351 for supporting an automobile after it has been
    raised from its wheels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    410,    Freight Accommodation on Freight Carrier, subclasses 3+ for
    supports designed to support a plurality of automobiles on a freight
    carrier.


CLS 248/353
TXT Props under subclass 351 designed to support a clothesline between its
    ends. This subclass includes devices for holding the line to the prop.


CLS 248/354.1
TXT Adjustable length:

    A support under subclass 351 which includes a pair of members relatively
    longitudinally movable with respect to each other to facilitate a change in
    length of the support.

    (1)     Note.  A patent directed to a removable prop of brace structure
    which, by disclosure, is hydraulically actuated or is particularly adapted
    to include or accommodate a force multiplying tool for adjusting the length
    thereof is proper for Class 254 rather than Class 248.  For example, when
    adjustment in length of the opposite ends of a prop is accomplished by
    means off a screw and nut, and the nut is hexagonally headed to readily
    accommodate a wrench, such structure is proper for Class 254; however,
    merely forming a knurled surface on the nut so as to make it easier to
    grasp and turn by hand for adjustment will not remove the patent from Class
    248.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 127.2 for a removably
    mounted prop or brace combined with a structure component, and subclass 632
    for an axially extendable shaft.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    appropriate subclasses for devices in the nature of a jack which also
    serves as a brace, and see (1) Note above.

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 55+ for a work holder mounted for movement
    and 289+ for a holder positioned beneath the work.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 52+ for a joint comprised of
    articulated members.


CLS 248/354.2
TXT Held in adjusted position by flowable granular material:

    A support under subclass 354.1 including a mass of particulate matter
    encompassed by the relatively movable members; and wherein said mass
    changes shape during length change of the support to hold the members
    against collapse at selected positions of relative adjustment.


CLS 248/354.3
TXT Threaded adjusting or locking member:

    A support under subclass 354.1 which includes first and second parts having
    mating helical threads which cooperate to move the members longitudinally
    with respect to each other or to hold the members against collapse at
    selected positions of relative movement.


CLS 248/354.4
TXT Locking member movable transversely of direction of adjusting movement
    (e.g. set screw):

    A support under subclass 354.3 wherein movement of said first part is in a
    direction of movement perpendicular to the direction of relative adjusting
    movement of said members.


CLS 248/354.5
TXT Held in adjusted position by transverse pin in registering apertures:

    A support under subclass 354.1 wherein one of said members includes
    surfaces defining a plurality of openings spaced along the length thereof,
    and wherein the other of said members includes surfaces defining at least
    one opening adapted to register with any of said plurality of openings for
    receiving an elongated rod-like device transversely into the registered
    openings to hold said members against collapse at selected positions of
    relative movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    354.4   for a threaded transverse pin positioned in registering apertures.


CLS 248/354.6
TXT Held in plural discrete positions:

    A support under subclass 354.1 wherein means is provided to lock said
    members against collapse in any of a plurality of predetermined selected
    positions of relative movement.

    (1)     Note.  For a patent to be appropriate for this subclass and the one
    indented hereunder, as well as more specific subclass 354.5 above, the
    locking structure must be such as to lock the members together in a finite
    number of adjustable positions,  subclass 354.1 is appropriate for a patent
    having an infinite number of adjustable positions, such as by use of
    friction or deformable clamp for a locking member, while 354.2, 354.3, or
    354.4 are appropriate for patents having either a finite or infinite range
    of adjustment depending on whether such specific structure is included as
    defined in such latter subclasses.


CLS 248/354.7
TXT One-way locking (e.g., ratchet):

    A support under subclass 354.6 wherein cooperating abutment faces are
    provided such as to facilitate relative movement in one direction, but
    which prevent relative movement in the opposite direction unless released
    by an auxiliary, operator-controlled device.


CLS 248/357
TXT Devices under subclass 351 forming a base or head for a prop or brace and
    forming an element thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 292+ for an in situ
    built type footing for a vertical structure and subclasses 300+ for an in
    situ built type cap for a vertical structure.


CLS 248/362
TXT Devices under the class definition in which the article is held to its
    support by atmospheric pressure acting on an element of the hold down by
    reason of a reduced pressure beneath the element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205.5+  and 363, for other vacuum supports.


CLS 248/363
TXT Supports under the class definition in which the article is attached
    thereto by atmospheric pressure acting on the article by reason of a
    reduced pressure behind the article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205.5+, for vacuum attached brackets.

    362,    for vacuum holddowns.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, subclass 3 for vacuum chucks.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 64.1+ for
    vacuum hoist implements.

    451,    Abrading, subclass 388 for a vacuum work holder for an abrading
    machine.


CLS 248/364
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising counterbalance weights
    for a counterbalanced stand, bracket or suspension device.

    (1)     Note.  For weights generally, see Classification Index under both
    Weights and Counterweights.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 216+ for window weights.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 41 for inductor devices (e.g.,
    transformers) which have a movable element and a counter-balancing weight
    for the movable element.


CLS 248/370
TXT Device under subclass 127 in which an upstanding frame is provided, and
    hangers have their upper ends carried by the frame, and wherein the lower
    ends of the hangers carry the load support surface.


CLS 248/371
TXT Device under subclass 127 wherein means are provided to move or permit
    movement of the support surface to various angles relative to a horizontal
    plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166,    for support surface which tilts during the folding operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 313+ for a seat tiltable relative to a
    horizontal plane.


CLS 248/372.1
TXT Biased:

    Devices under subclass 371 wherein means are provided to urge the surface
    in a desired direction about its tilt axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 300.1+ for a back tiltable with a
    bottom against a biasing means; and subclasses 332+ for a bottom tiltable
    against a biasing means.


CLS 248/393
TXT Device under subclass 371 provided with means to additionally move or
    permit movement of the support surface to two or more use positions in a
    direction parallel to the horizon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    419,    for a similar nontilting device which moves vertically and
    horizontally.

    424+,   for a similar nontilting device which moves horizontally.


CLS 248/394
TXT Device under subclass 393 in which the tilting means raise each of the
    opposite ends of the support surface an unequal amount to both tilt and
    vertically move the surface.


CLS 248/395
TXT Device under subclass 393 wherein the means to tilt the surface and the
    means to move the surface horizontally operate upon the surface at the same
    time.


CLS 248/396
TXT Device under subclass 371 wherein the tilting means act upon each of the
    opposite ends of the support surface to raise them an unequal amount to
    tilt the surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    394,    for a similar device provided with additional means to move the
    surface horizontally.


CLS 248/397
TXT Device under subclass 371 wherein there is a pivot axis which is immovable,
    parallel to the horizon, and about which the supporting surface swings to
    two or more article supporting positions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    371,    for a device which tilts about a fixed axis from a single use
    position to a nonuse position.

    596+,   for a device biased to tilt about a stationary horizontal pivot.


CLS 248/398
TXT Device under subclass 371 wherein the support surface and the supporting
    substructure move as a unit relative to the reference plane.


CLS 248/404
TXT Device under subclass 161 in which the standard is moved vertically by a
    means which employs a mechanical advantage, e.g., gears or hydraulic motors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    422,    for similar vertical adjustment means in a stand or stool other
    than standard type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    appropriate subclasses for lift implements, such as jacks containing force
    multiplying means.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 423.20+ for a seat including a bottom
    and back vertically movable as a unit by force multiplying means.


CLS 248/405
TXT Device under subclass 404 wherein the force multiplying means includes an
    elongated threaded member and a shorter coaxial threaded member, the
    threads of the two members being meshed and the two members being
    relatively rotatable to axially move one with respect to the other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 424.8 for screw and nut
    gearing, per se.


CLS 248/406.1
TXT With relative rotation preventer and disable:

    Structure under subclass 406.1 which is provided with means to selectively
    lock the screw and not together to prevent, or unlock them to permit,
    relative rotation.


CLS 248/406.2
TXT Weight or load responsive:

    Structure under subclass 406.1 wherein the means for locking and/or
    unlocking is responsive to a weight or load or the absence thereof on the
    article support.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes devices wherein an adjustment means
    for the locking means is actuated by the weight or load as well as those
    devices wherein the locking means is actuated directly.


CLS 248/407
TXT Device under subclass 161 in which the standard or the part which it moves
    relative to has a series of vertically spaced apertures or grooves, and the
    other part carries a detent selectively engageable with one of the
    apertures or grooves to hold the parts in adjusted position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    423,    for a vertically adjustable nonstandard type stand which is held in
    adjusted position by a notch or cavity engaging latch.


CLS 248/408
TXT Device under subclass 407 wherein a means is provided to urge the detent
    into notch or cavity engaging position.


CLS 248/409
TXT Device under subclass 408 in which the elevated article supporting part of
    the stand has mounted thereon a means to move the latch against its biasing
    means to disengage it from the notch or cavity.


CLS 248/410
TXT Device under subclass 161 wherein one of the relatively adjustable parts
    includes a vertically extending rod or tube, and the other part carries a
    surrounding annular washer which is movable from a tilted holding position
    in which top and bottom opposite sides of the washer grip opposite sides of
    the bar or tube, to a horizontal release position in which the rod is fully
    slidable within the washer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 41+ for canted clutch
    collar mechanisms, per se.


CLS 248/411
TXT Device under subclass 161 which is provided with a means to selectively
    frictionally grip the relatively adjustable parts to hold them in adjusted
    position or release the frictional grip to permit adjustment.


CLS 248/412
TXT Device under subclass 411 wherein the clamp is moved into engaged position
    by the sliding action of a member having an inclined surface.


CLS 248/413
TXT Device under subclass 411 wherein the clamping is effected by an element
    threaded in one of the vertically adjustable parts, and movable toward and
    away from the other part by means of its threaded engagement to
    frictionally clamp or release the other part.


CLS 248/414
TXT Device under subclass 161 wherein one of the vertically movable parts
    carries a member which slidably bears or rubs on the other part with a
    force sufficient to prevent accidental movement of the parts, but
    insufficient to prevent intentional movement.


CLS 248/415
TXT Device under subclass 158 including means mounting the support surface for
    movement around a vertically extending axis.


CLS 248/416
TXT Device under subclass 415 in which the support surface has an additional
    motion along a line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    426+,   for a revolvable nonstandard type support having an additional
    linear motion.


CLS 248/417
TXT Device under subclass 415 provided with a biasing means to move the support
    surface back to a preselected position upon the release of the force which
    revolves or rotates it.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 386+ for a biased or
    self- returning closure and see the search notes thereto for the loci of
    other closures with a similar feature.


CLS 248/418
TXT Device under subclass 415 provided with means to selectively prevent or
    resist the rotation of the support surface.


CLS 248/419
TXT Device under subclass 157 wherein means are provided to additionally move
    or permit movement of the support surface in a direction at right angles to
    the vertical movement, or in a direction which is a resultant of the two
    directions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    393+,   for a similar device additionally tiltable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 344.13+ for a seat comprising a bottom
    and back movable as a unit both vertically and horizontally.


CLS 248/420
TXT Device under subclass 419 wherein the means for moving the support surface
    in a vertical and horizontal direction includes relatively sliding bearings
    set at an angle with respect to the horizontal, and on which the support
    surface is mounted for movement along such bearings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    395,    for a similar device additionally tiltable.


CLS 248/421
TXT Device under subclass 157 wherein the adjusting means include a plurality
    of pivoted bars connected to the support surface and movable to raise and
    lower the surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    396,    for a device to raise the several ends of the support surface
    different amounts and thus effect a tilting of the surface together with a
    vertical displacement.


CLS 248/422
TXT Device under subclass 157 in which the adjustment is effected by two or
    more intermeshed, relatively moving members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404+,   for a standard type stool and stand vertically adjustable by
    gearing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 412+ for gearing, per se.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 344.17, 344.20 for a seating device
    comprising a bottom and back vertically movable as a unit by gear means.


CLS 248/423
TXT Device under subclass 157 in which one of two relatively vertically movable
    parts has a series of vertically spaced apertures or grooves, and the other
    part carries a detent selectively engageable with one of the apertures or
    grooves to hold the parts in adjusted position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    407+,   for a vertically adjustable standard type stand held in adjusted
    position by a notch or cavity engaging latch.


CLS 248/424
TXT Device under subclass 127 wherein means are provided to move or permit
    movement of the support surface in a horizontal direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    393+,   for a similar device which additionally tilts.

    416,    for a similar device which additionally revolves or rotates.

    419+,   for a similar device which additionally moves vertically.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 341+ for a seat bottom which moves
    horizontally responsive to the tilting of the seat back.


CLS 248/425
TXT Device under subclass 424 wherein the movement is about a vertical axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 344.21+ for a bottom and back seat
    unit movable about a vertical axis.


CLS 248/429
TXT Device under subclass 424 wherein the means for moving or permitting
    movement of the surface includes relatively sliding bearings on which the
    surface is mounted for movement along such bearings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    420,    for similar device set at an incline to the horizontal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 7+ for slides and guides, per se.  Additional
    structure, such as a latch to hold the relatively moving parts in adjusted
    position, is beyond the scope of Class 384 and warrants classification is
    this class (248).


CLS 248/430
TXT Device under subclass 429 in which antifriction elements, that is, balls or
    rollers, are interposed between the guide and slide elements.


CLS 248/431
TXT Device under subclass 164 in which all of the legs diverge from and cross
    at a central point spaced from the ends of the legs.


CLS 248/432
TXT Device under subclass 164 in which the surface is attached to the leg by
    means which permit it to be readily disconnected therefrom, or by means
    which permit relative movement of the surface and leg without disconnection.


CLS 248/434
TXT Device under subclass 166 provided with a collapsible frame member for
    mounting the support surface on the legs.


CLS 248/435
TXT Device under subclass 434 in which all the arms extend outwardly from a
    common point in different directions.


CLS 248/436
TXT Device under subclass 166 in which the folding is accomplished by moving
    one side toward another side so that corresponding parts of the vertically
    extending frame members remain in the same horizontal plane; the portion of
    the surface intermediate the side edges collapsing above or below the plane.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 42+ for a chair which collapses
    laterally by relatively folding the bottom, back and legs and subclasses
    350+ for laterally folding chair back.


CLS 248/439
TXT Device under subclass 166 wherein the legs fold to a position subjacent the
    support surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 53+ for chair legs which collapse to a
    position subjacent the seat.


CLS 248/440
TXT Device under subclass 163.1 including, in addition to the means mounting
    the legs to the support surface, a strengthening prop or brace between the
    support surface and legs for maintaining their relative position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 305+ for a braced bedstead.


CLS 248/440.1
TXT At least two legs form unitary structure:

    Support under subclass 163.1 wherein at least two of the legs are (1)
    joined together, (2) are integral with a third component of the stand which
    third component is other than a leg.


CLS 248/441.1
TXT EASEL; BOOK, COPY OR MUSIC SCORE HOLDER:

    Support matter under the class definition comprising (1) a device having an
    inclined article supporting portion or other wise adapted to support an
    article in inclined  position, (2) a support particularly adapted for
    holding a book in reading position or (3) a device for holding copy for
    transcription or sheet music in reading position.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses include props which are
    attached to the supported article and cooperate therewith to support it in
    inclined position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, 341+ for a copy holder including
    copy-advancing means (subclasses 342+) or a movable indicator (e.g., line
    guide--subclasses 352+); and principal subclass 341 for a copy holder
    wherein copy is manually adjustable.

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, appropriate subclasses for
    a rigid planar supporting surface having structure to support the surface
    in a horizontal plane, and especially subclasses 1+ for such a device
    wherein the surface may be operably retained in at least one inclined
    position.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 135+ for a chair or seat combined with
    a table, desk or easel.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 233 for a cabinet structure
    including means for supporting a book or other copy in a position in which
    it can be read.


CLS 248/442
TXT Device under subclass 441.1 particularly adapted to support a timepiece or
    like constructed device.


CLS 248/442.2
TXT Device under subclass 441.1 wherein the holding device displays charactered
    material in position to be viewed for, and during, machine-transcription of
    the material; and means for attaching the device to, or interengaging it
    with the machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 718+ for a copy holder including
    either (1) means to guide or adjust the supported copy or (2) an adjustable
    indicator (e.g., line guide); which copy holder includes means for
    attachment to a typewriter.


CLS 248/443
TXT Device under subclass 441.1 wherein a music score is attachable to an
    instrument and the music score may be positioned thereon so as to be viewed
    by the artist while performing on the instrument.


CLS 248/444
TXT Device under subclass 441.1 including means for supporting it from or upon
    some portion of a user's body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclass 43 for a
    horizontally supported surface including means for supporting it from some
    part of a person's body or for accommodating a portion of the body when so
    supported.


CLS 248/444.1
TXT Including transparent viewing portion:

    Structure under subclass 441.1 including a clear portion for covering the
    supported article through which portion the article may be observed.


CLS 248/445
TXT Device under subclass 441.1 adapted to support a book with the reading
    material facing substantially downward in a position to be read by a person
    disposed in supine position.


CLS 248/446
TXT Device under subclass 444.1 for supporting a book in open position and
    including means for maintaining the two halves of the open face of the book
    in substantially the same horizontal plane, regardless of the relative
    thickness of the two halves of the book.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188.2+, for a supporting substructure for a stand including means for
    adjustment of the device up or down with respect to the surface upon which
    it rests, or means to compensate for unevenness or irregularity in said
    surface.


CLS 248/447
TXT Device under subclass 441.1 provided with means swingably supporting the
    holder, wherein said holder is movable from a closed or storage position to
    a position in which the pages of a book mounted thereon may be consulted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS

    442.2,  for copyholder with writing machine engaging means.

    443,    for structure supported on a musical instrument.

    444,    for body supported structure.


CLS 248/447.1
TXT Mounted on wall or art device:

    Structure under subclass 441.1 wherein the device comprises means
    particularly adapting it for mounting on a wall or a particular art device,
    e.g. an article of furniture, a vehicle part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    442.2,  for copyholder with writing machine engaging means.

    443,    for structure supported on a musical instrument.

    444,    for body supported structure.


CLS 248/447.2
TXT Clamped to support:

    Structure under subclass 447.1 wherein the device is attached to a support
    by a holding means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226.11+,for a bracket of general utility which is clamped to a support.


CLS 248/448
TXT Device under subclass 441.1 wherein the effective supporting area of the
    article supporting portion of the device may be selectively increased or
    decreased.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149,    for a stand which is adjustable to take various sized receptacles.

    172,    for a plural leg stand which is adjustable to take various sized
    articles.


CLS 248/449
TXT Device under subclass 448 wherein the means for increasing or decreasing
    the effective supporting area of the article supporting portion comprises a
    shelf or bracket type rest which is selectively movable up or down relative
    to said article supporting portion.


CLS 248/450
TXT Device under subclass 441.1 wherein the article supporting portion is
    provided with an opening into which an article or portion thereof may be
    placed, the sides of the opening usually frictionally engaging the article
    to retain said article therein.


CLS 248/451
TXT Device under subclass 441.1 provided with means to frictionally retain the
    supported article in position relative to the supporting portion of the
    device.


CLS 248/452
TXT Device under subclass 451 wherein the retaining means engages the supported
    article adjacent the upper portion thereof.


CLS 248/453
TXT Device under subclass 451 wherein the retaining means engages the supported
    article adjacent the lower portion thereof.


CLS 248/454
TXT Device under subclass 441.1 provided with means permitting the article
    supporting portion to be moved to and held at various angles of inclination.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    371+,   for a stand provided with means to move or permit movement of its
    support surface to various angles relative to a horizontal plane.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 1+ for a
    horizontally supported surface wherein the surface may be operably retained
    in at least one inclined position.


CLS 248/455
TXT Device under subclass 454 wherein the means for holding the article
    supporting portion in adjusted position comprises a leg-like supporting
    member which may be disposed at various angles relative to the article
    supporting portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    351+,   for a support in the nature of a pole or post arranged either
    vertically, horizontally or in an inclined position which holds or steadies
    an article or thing from falling against the force of gravity.

    463+,   for a collapsible easel, book or music score holder provided with a
    folding prop.


CLS 248/456
TXT Device under subclass 455 wherein a portion of the leg-like supporting
    member is engageable with a rack, serration or hole.


CLS 248/457
TXT Device under subclass 454 wherein the article supporting portion is
    swingably connected at a point between the edges thereof to its supporting
    structure.


CLS 248/458
TXT Device under subclass 441.1 in which the article supporting portion is
    revolvable.


CLS 248/459
TXT Device under subclass 441.1 formed from a sheet or blank of cardboard or
    other equivalent material capable of being bent or folded, the sheet or
    blank comprising several sections which, when the device is being
    operatively assembled, may be folded or relatively engaged to maintain the
    sections in stable, predetermined, support affording relationship.


CLS 248/460
TXT Device under subclass 441.1 constructed either (1) to be readily set up
    from or disjointed into unassembled elements or (2) be foldable from or
    into a structure of reduced volume.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165+,   for a knockdown stand.

    166+,   for a plural leg folding stand.


CLS 248/461
TXT Device under subclass 460 provided with means to encase the components
    thereof when in collapsed condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 33+ for a
    horizontally supported surface including structure forming an enclosure for
    part or all of the surface or support in an inoperative or stored condition.


CLS 248/462
TXT Device under subclass 460 in which the article supporting portion comprises
    a plurality of interconnected rod or bar-like elements, which elements may
    be moved about their points of interconnection to cause said article
    supporting portion to fold.


CLS 248/463
TXT Device under subclass 460 in which the support for the device is a leg or
    prop-like member connected to the article supporting portion, which member
    is movable about its point of connection to a position adjacent said
    article supporting portion when the device is collapsed.


CLS 248/464
TXT Device under subclass 463 provided with a plurality of leg or prop-like
    members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166+,   for a folding plural leg stand.


CLS 248/465
TXT Device under subclass 463 provided with a strut or stay to maintain the
    article supporting portion and leg in stable erected position.


CLS 248/465.1
TXT Of wire:

    Structure under subclass 441.1 which is constructed of elongated rod
    material.

    (1)     Note.  Generally the wire is metallic but nonmetallic wire material
    is also included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175,    for stands made from wire.  See the notes thereunder.

    302+,   for brackets made of wire.  See the noted thereunder.


CLS 248/466
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including structure peculiarly
    adapted for maintaining a mirror, picture, license plate, or similar flat
    plate-like viewable object in the desired viewable position on a vertical
    or horizontal surface such as a wall or table; or on other supporting
    structure.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter here usually relates to mounting pictures
    or mirrors on walls or to mounting mirrors on vehicles.  For classification
    here, the mirror, picture or license plate should at most only be broadly
    claimed.  Class 359, Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and
    Elements, especially subclasses 871+ provides for mirror details as
    classified together with supporting structure, and subclasses 515+ provides
    for signal reflectors as classified with supporting structure.   This Class
    248 provides for the combination of a mirror broadly together with its
    frame and its support. However, Class 52, Static Structures (e.g.,
    Buildings), provides for a mirror frame, per se, and a mirror broadly
    claimed with its frame; see especially subclasses 474+ and 633+.  Class 40,
    Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, in subclass 700 provides for picture
    frames and in subclasses 745+ provides for such frames claimed in detail
    together with supporting structure.  Class 40 also provides for frames
    whose use is indicated as for both mirrors and picture.  Class 40 provides
    for picture and sign (including license plate) details with or without
    supporting structure.

    (2)     Note.  As between this Class 248 and Class 359 a mere claiming of a
    plurality of signal reflectors of the Class 359 subclasses 515+ type does
    not preclude classification of subject matter otherwise classifiable in
    Class 248.  However, if any physical arrangement or optical relationship
    between the signal reflectors is recited, classification is in Class 359.
    A mere plurality of image forming mirrors is classified in Class 359.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114+,   for a support for a watch or clock combined with a mirror.

    441.1+, for easel type picture or mirror supports.

    549,    for a mirror or picture support comprising a frangible or
    deformable component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 115+ for cord and rope
    holders; subclasses 572+ for separable fasteners; and subclasses 455+ for
    clasps.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 200+ for license
    plates, subclasses 584+ for signs subclasses 541+ for illuminated signs,
    and subclasses 152+ for picture frames.  See also (1) Note above.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, for remote control mechanisms.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    515+ for signal reflectors and subclasses 838+ for a mirror or reflective
    element and particularly subclasses 871+ for this subject matter combined
    with supporting structure.  See also (1) Note above.


CLS 248/467
TXT Subject matter under subclass 466 wherein the support includes an adhesive,
    a magnet or a suction cut, which secures the picture or mirror to the
    support or which secures the support to the associated mounting structure
    such as a wall or window glass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206.5,  for brackets mounted by a magnet or by vacuum means.


CLS 248/468
TXT Subject matter under subclass 466 including a clip, clasp, or other
    gripping device which is spring actuated and holds the mirror or picture by
    pressure contact at its front and back sides.

    (1)     Note.  The spring may only contact the front side, for example,
    while another element contacts the rear side holding the mirror or picture
    therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    491,    for spring actuated means which grip the periphery of a mirror or
    picture.


CLS 248/469
TXT Subject matter under subclass 466 including self supporting devices,
    usually having an upright standard, a pedestal or legs, which support the
    mirror or picture in a desired relation to a generally horizontal surface
    such as a table, floor or the ground, the device merely resting on the
    horizontal surface as opposed to being attached thereto.

    (1)     Note.  The stand generally maintains the picture in a vertical
    position as by resting on the horizontal surface as opposed to the brackets
    in subclasses 475.1+ below which are secured to the surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127+,   for stands of general utility.

    444.1+, for easels.


CLS 248/470
TXT Subject matter under subclass 469 wherein at least part of the stand
    structure also forms or constitutes a hanger, i.e., the stand and hanger
    have common structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126,    for stand or bracket alternative structure of general application.


CLS 248/471
TXT Subject matter under subclass 469 wherein at least part of the stand
    structure also forms or constitutes a handle, i.e., the stand and handle
    have common structure.


CLS 248/472
TXT Subject matter under subclass 469 wherein a portion of the stand is movable
    with respect to another portion as by pivoting to collapse the stand and
    reduce the space occupied when not in use.

    (1)     Note.  The supports in this subclass 472 may contain a plurality of
    signal reflectors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    460+,   for collapsible easels.

    471,    for foldable stands which may be used as handles. 479 for brackets
    with pivotal connections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 63 for street traffic signals and
    indicators.


CLS 248/473
TXT Subject matter under subclass 469 including an upwardly opening trough
    which may be formed in wood, for example, or a plurality of notches formed
    by bending wire or slotting cardboard, which receive the bottom edge of a
    mirror or picture and the sides of the trough or notches abut the sides of
    the mirror or picture adjacent the lower edge to hold it in a substantially
    vertical position.

    (1)     Note.  The lower edge and adjacent margin of the mirror is the only
    portion of the mirror or picture which contacts the supporting structure in
    this subclass.   Subclasses 488 and 490+ contain patents where the mirror
    or picture is gripped at more than one edge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    468,    for troughs or slots which grip a mirror or picture and hold it by
    spring action.


CLS 248/474
TXT Subject matter under subclass 469 including a pivot joint or joints between
    the mirror or picture and the stand to permit the mirror or picture to
    pivot or swing with respect to the stand.

    (1)     Note. For classification here the mirror pivots with respect to the
    entire stand.  Where one part of the stand pivots with respect to another,
    classification is not here but in generic subclass 469 above or its other
    indented subclasses, especially subclass 472.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    469+,   for stands where the picture or mirror may pivot relative to a prop
    or brace which abuts the back thereof to form a stand.

    472,    collapsible stands which have pivot joints.


CLS 248/475.1
TXT Subject matter under subclass 466 including a member extending from the
    associated supporting structure to the mirror or picture, and providing a
    support for the mirror or picture spaced from the associated supporting
    structure.

    (1)     Note. Brackets as here classified maintain the supported mirror or
    picture in a predetermined position in all directions as opposed to a
    hanger or stand which maintains the mirror or picture in position in only
    one fixed direction against the action of gravity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   for brackets of general application.

    489+,   for mirror or picture supports which prevent vertical movement of
    the supported article with only supported article with only incidental or
    no restraint of movement in other directions.


CLS 248/476
TXT Subject matter under subclass 475.1 including a flexible or sliding
    connection or joint in the member or at an end of the member to permit a
    selection of or change in the viewing position of the mirror or picture.

    (1)     Note.  Adjustability of the means which engage the mirror or
    picture periphery so that different sizes of mirrors or pictures may be
    engaged, does not place a patent in this subclass 476.  Such adjustability
    is found in subclass 488 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    490,    for adjustable plaque holders.

    495+,   for adjustable hangers.


CLS 248/477
TXT Subject matter under subclass 476 including a plurality of recessions or
    notches and a projection, at least one of which is on the bracket, the
    recesses or notches being selectively engaged by the projection to adjust
    the position of the mirror or picture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    496,    for hangers adjustable by selectively engaging projections and
    recessions.


CLS 248/478
TXT Subject matter under subclass 477 including a spring which urges the
    projection into or toward one of the recessions.

    (1)     Note.  The projection may be supported by and at one end of the
    spring.


CLS 248/479
TXT Subject matter under subclass 476 including a pivot connection at either
    end or intermediate the ends of the bracket.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    472,    for pivotal connections in collapsible stands.

    474,    for pivot joints in stands.

    477,    for brackets with pivotal connections with engaging projections and
    recessions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    607 for reversible anti-glare mirrors.


CLS 248/480
TXT Subject matter under subclass 479 including means permitting movement of
    the mirror or picture in one fixed direction (straight line) in addition to
    the pivotal movement provided for in subclass 479.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    476,    for brackets with linear adjustment without pivotal adjustment.

    477+,   for brackets with position adjustment including a projection
    selectively engaging notches.

    488+,   for brackets having adjustment of periphery gripping structure.


CLS 248/481
TXT Subject matter under subclass 479 wherein the pivotal connection includes
    interengaging sliding surfaces, one or both of the surfaces being spherical.

    (1)     Note.  The surface or surfaces may form an entire sphere or only a
    portion of a sphere such as a hemisphere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 122+ for ball and socket rod
    joint connections in general.


CLS 248/482
TXT Subject matter under subclass 481 wherein the socket is formed in two
    portions threaded together, the tightening of the threads reducing the
    socket size to increase the sliding friction between the ball and socket.


CLS 248/483
TXT Subject matter under subclass 481 including a coil spring positioned to
    either increase (usually) or lessen the friction between the ball and the
    socket.


CLS 248/484
TXT Subject matter under subclass 481 including a pivotal connection or joint
    in addition to the ball and socket joint.

    (1)     Note.  The additional joint may be another ball and socket joint.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    607 for glare reduction mirrors which are reversible by pivoting and also
    have a ball and socket joint.


CLS 248/485
TXT Subject matter under subclass 479 including two pivot axes which are
    parallel to each other and a pivot axis which is perpendicular to these
    parallel pivot axes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    484,    for brackets with parallel and perpendicular pivot axes where a
    ball and socket joint has one axis which is parallel and another which is
    perpendicular to a third axis.


CLS 248/486
TXT Subject matter under subclass 479 including two pivot connections having
    axes which are parallel to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    472,    for folding stands with pivot axes.

    484,    for brackets with parallel pivot axes where at least one of the
    pivot axes is through a ball and socket joint.

    485,    for brackets with parallel and perpendicular pivot axes.


CLS 248/487
TXT Subject matter under subclass 479 including two pivot axes which are at
    right angles to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    484,    for brackets with perpendicular pivot axes where at least one of
    the pivot axes is through a ball and socket joint.

    485,    for brackets with perpendicular and parallel pivot axes.


CLS 248/488
TXT Subject matter under subclass 475.1 including fingers, claws, hooks, or
    jaws which engage the periphery or edge of the mirror, picture or license
    plate to hold it to the bracket.

    (1)     Note.  Usually there are a plurality of fingers which are spaced
    from each other along the periphery, each one being curved to engage both
    the front and the rear of the mirror.  However, a mere groove into which
    one edge of the mirror fits is also classified here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    490,    for suspended plaques which are held similarly.


CLS 248/489
TXT Subject matter under subclass 466 wherein the supporting structure prevents
    downward movement of the mirror or picture with only incidental or no
    restraint of movement in other directions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    467,    for adhesive magnet or suction cup suspension.

    468,    for clips which grip the front and the back of the mirror or
    picture.

    475.1+, for brackets which support a mirror or picture both in a vertical
    and a horizontal direction.


CLS 248/490
TXT Subject matter under subclass 489 including a plurality of opposing hooks
    or clips which engage or grip the edges or periphery of a picture or
    mirror, the opposing hooks or clips holding the picture or mirror
    therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    468,    for brackets with plural fingers which grip the edge of a mirror or
    picture.

    494,    for an additional lower support which may engage the lower edge of
    a picture, where the upper edge is not engaged (i.e., no opposing hooks).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 700+ for picture
    frames, per se.


CLS 248/491
TXT Subject matter under subclass 490 including a spring which may be expanded
    different amounts for adjusting or which exerts a force on the opposing
    hooks or clips engaging the mirror or picture periphery, and tending to
    reduce the spacing between the opposing hooks or clips.


CLS 248/492
TXT Subject matter under subclass 489 including structure such as a reel or
    spool on which the cord may be wound as for storage or adjustment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    496,    for a pawl and ratchet type suspended support where the cord is not
    wound around a reel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 370+ for a reeling
    device of general use, and subclasses 600+ and 118+ for a spool of general
    use.


CLS 248/493
TXT Subject matter under subclass 489 including means to grip, clamp or wedge a
    cord or including means defining a tortuous path to increase the friction
    on a cord and thereby retain the cord in position.


CLS 248/494
TXT Subject matter under subclass 489 including an additional supporting means
    or abutment attached to the lower part of the picture or mirror to aid in
    maintaining the picture or mirror in the desired position.

    (1)     Note.  The additional support usually exerts primarily a horizontal
    force on the picture to keep it from swinging once it has been hung on a
    wall or to maintain the angle of the picture relative to the wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    490+,   for plaque holders which have opposed hooks at the bottom and at
    the top of the picture to hold the picture.


CLS 248/495
TXT Subject matter under subclass 489 wherein structure is included to permit
    variations in the length or other dimension of the suspending support to
    change the position of the mirror or picture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    490+,   for mirror, picture or plaque periphery engaging supports which may
    be adjustable.

    492,    for picture supports including adjustable cords wound on reels.

    493,    for picture supports including adjustable cords with retainers.


CLS 248/496
TXT Subject matter under subclass 495 including a plurality of notches or holes
    into which a projection is selectively insertable to adjust the position of
    the mirror or picture.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass 496 includes patents to devices where a hook
    may selectively be inserted into links or a chain or to a device where a
    cord (considered a projection here) is selectively placed in notches.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    477+,   for brackets which are adjusted by selectively engaging projections
    or recessions.

    492,    for suspended picture supports where a cord is wound on a reel,
    with a ratchet and pawl adjustment.


CLS 248/497
TXT Subject matter under subclass 489 including a hook or headed nail which may
    be mounted on a wall or on a picture or mirror and which is detachably
    engaged with other structure.

    (1)     Note.  For classification here, a hook must be bent or curved.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    489+,   for a hook or nail included with the subject matter of this
    subclass.


CLS 248/498
TXT Subject matter under subclass 497 including an eye or closed loop which is
    detachably engaged with a hook or nail.

    (1)     Note.  A nail through an aperture where the aperture is smaller
    than the head of the nail is not considered a detachable engagement for the
    purposes of this subclass.  The aperture would have to be large enough to
    slip over the head of the nail to be classified here.

    (2)     Note.  Eyes or closed loops disclosed as being for hanging on a
    hook or nail are classified here.


CLS 248/499
TXT Means under the class definition extending upwardly from a support surface
    or extending from a surface contiguous thereto for retaining an article on
    the support surface, which means either (a) includes a flaccid material
    member extending between the article and the surface or (b) consists of a
    member which is readily deformable either (1) axially (e.g., coil spring)
    to tensionally retain the member on the surface or (2) laterally and
    substantially uniformly throughout its length to provide a looped
    configuration when its opposite ends are secured together or to a
    supporting surface and an article is thereby embraced or straddled between
    these ends.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500+,   for a hold-down device; e.g., one which either (a) includes no
    flaccid element for retaining an article to a base; or (b) consists of
    deformable member means of variegated construction; e.g., has a developed
    reentrant or hinge portion so that only a part is deformable, as opposed to
    the structure set forth in the instant (subclass 499) definition.  See for
    example, subclass 500, the principal subclass, for a clasp-type hold-down
    significantly deformable about an intermediate reentrant or hinge portion;
    and see subclass 505, for an article straddling hold-down.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 478 for a mercantile
    package comprising a base, an article, and flaccid means to retain the
    article on the base.


CLS 248/500
TXT Device under the class definition of normally form-sustaining structure
    extending upwardly from a support surface, or from a surface contiguous
    thereto, and having an undersurface portion for engagement with an upwardly
    facing portion of an article to retain the article on the support surface.

    (1)     Note.  See the definition and (1) Note of subclass 499 for the
    distinction(s) between a hold-down of the instant locus (500+) and a
    tie-down of the superior subclass (499).

    (2)     Note.  The following superior loci in this class (248) disclose a
    hold-down of this generic locus: subclass 27.1, for a hold-down for an
    instrument to a panel; subclasses 49+, for hold-down structure for pipe or
    cable; subclasses 309.1+, for an article holding bracket; subclasses 346+,
    for a supporting base provided with a hold-down device; subclasses 680+,
    machinery supports.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclass for a device to hold an article
    down on a support for a work operation on the article.


CLS 248/501
TXT Device under subclass 500 for retention of a standard-supported
    furniture-type (e.g., chair, cart) article on the floor of a room in which
    it is used by overlying engagement with an upwardly facing surface of the
    standard; or for the reception of a retaining member (e.g., bolt) passed
    through both the retention device and the retained article.


CLS 248/502
TXT Device under subclass 501 in which the overlying portion enters a cavity of
    the standard for the engagement with an upwardly facing surface within the
    cavity.


CLS 248/503
TXT Device under subclass 500 for use on a vehicle transport for the retention
    thereon of an article of equipment thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    501+,   for a hold-down device for the leg of a chair, cart or other
    leg-supported article, which article might, possibly, be regularly carried
    on a vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    410,    Freight Accommodation on Freight Carrier, subclasses 77+ for a
    hold-down device for a shipping load carrier (e.g., pallet, container) on a
    freight carrying vehicle.


CLS 248/503.1
TXT Structure under subclass 503 comprising means for securing a seat (or
    component thereof) to a part of the vehicle.


CLS 248/504
TXT Device under subclass 500 for retaining a sheet or stack of sheets flatwise
    upon the underlying surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 89.1 for a
    blotter hold-down desk pad combined with means for some other purpose; and
    subclass 95 for the blotter hold-down desk pad, per se.


CLS 248/505
TXT Device under subclass 500, the under surface-provided portion contactingly
    encircling substantially an entire upwardly facing transverse dimension of
    the article or overlyingly extending across the entire article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49+,    for hold-down structure for straddling a pipe or cable; e.g.,
    subclass 68.1 for straddling an assembly of parallel pipes or cables.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 366+  for a hold-down device
    which straddles an electrical component (e.g., electronic tube) for keeping
    it plugged into a receptacle.


CLS 248/506
TXT Device under subclass 500 which is so positively connected to the article
    as to remain therewith when lifted from the underlying support; or to be
    dissociable therefrom only by a positive act of disconnection (e.g.,
    unthreading).


CLS 248/507
TXT Device under subclass 500 including a rigid-material rod-like portion
    attachable to and projecting upwardly from the underlying support and
    bearing the undersurface-provided portion as a lateral projection therefrom
    for facile association and dissociation with the article.

    (1)     Note.  Regardless of how described in the disclosure, the rodlike
    portion of material adequate to penetrate the underlying support, for
    indented subclass 508; or relying on the additionally provided spring for
    resilient functioning, for indented subclass 509, will each be considered
    of rigid material for this locus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500,    the principal subclass, for a hold-down post of (leaf) spring
    construction; hence not rigid material for this subclass; and see (1) Note
    herein above.

    506,    for a hold-down device which is attached to the article and can be
    dissociated therefrom only by disconnection (e.g., unthreading), rather
    than by the mere facile dissociation of the instant subclasses (507+).


CLS 248/508
TXT Device under subclass 507 in which the rodlike portion penetrates into the
    underlying support without the use of additional securement means.


CLS 248/509
TXT Device under subclass 507 including a resilient member assembled therewith
    for urging the laterally projecting portion downwardly against the upwardly
    facing surface portion of the article.


CLS 248/510
TXT Device under the class definition attached to an underlying support surface
    and including normally form-sustaining but resilient means upstanding
    therefrom shaped to either encircle an article or engage an article at a
    plurality of peripheral portions thereabout to exert inwardly directed
    retentive force against the article.


CLS 248/511
TXT Support under the class definition comprising a device which includes means
    particularly adapted to receive a staff (i.e., a pole-like or rod-like
    member) and to support it in one or more attitudes relative to either (1)
    the device, (2) the surface or object upon which the device relies for its
    support, or (3) a principal plan (e.g., horizontal, etc.).



    The device may (1) be a stand or base, (2) include structure in the form of
    a ground insertable member, or (3) be a bracket.



    The staff receiving means usually is a distinct element such as a socket,
    cradle, ring, etc.; in rare instances, however, it may be an integral
    portion of the device.


    Typical examples of a staff are a fishing rod, a flagpole, a tree trunk and
    an umbrella stick.



    Included in this subclass (511) are structures involving the rather
    peculiar arrangement wherein the device supports only part of the weight of
    the staff; i.e., the staff rests also, at some other point of its length,
    upon a surface or an object.

    Included are "stands" comprised of a plurality of individual, leg-like
    members which have no engagement with one another, and which achieve an
    operative relationship with one another only at such time as they are
    attached to an end of a staff for supporting it in an upright position.

    (1)     Note.  The staff receiving means of this and the indented
    subclasses usually is of a "universal" nature; i.e., it will accommodate
    one pole-like or rod-like element about as well as another.  Accordingly, a
    staff which includes structure peculiar to a particular art device, and
    with which structure the staff receiving must cooperate, usually presents a
    combination or sub-combination which is more properly classifiable with the
    art device.  However, that statement is not intended to proscribe staff
    modifications where the modification has utility only in its cooperation
    with the staff receiving means, such as the tapering of the lower end of a
    tree trunk to better fit the socket of a staff receiving means, or the
    boring of a hole therein to receive a spike-like member of a staff
    receiving means, for example.

    (2)     Note.  The existing cross references to other areas of this class
    of patents which appear as original documents in this and the indented
    subclasses, have not been screened to determine whether their placement is
    consistent with the concepts adopted herein of such terms as "stand" and
    "bracket".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 21.2 for a
    holder, support, etc., for a fishing rod, which holder, support, etc., is
    particularly adapted to cooperate with a nonstaff-like structural feature
    of the rod.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 173+ for the combination of a
    flag and a support particularly adapted for displaying the flag.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 60.1+ for a device which supports
    single or plural articles in a stored or nonuse position.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclasses 200+ for body attached or
    supported article carriers which may be particularly adapted for supporting
    a staff, and subclasses 400+ (especially subclasses 309+, 313+, 412+, and
    488+) for vehicle attached article carriers which may be particularly
    adapted for supporting a staff.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 170+ for vehicle attached devices in the
    form of a socket for receiving and holding a whip.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 788+ for a support
    for an antenna, which antenna may be in the form of a staff.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for a mere
    connection of a staff to another element, which other element may be in the
    form of a support for the staff.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 295 to 297 for candle holders, sockets, etc.


CLS 248/512
TXT Support under subclass 511 comprising a plurality of staff receiving means,
    each means accommodating a staff.


CLS 248/513
TXT Support under subclass 512 wherein the staffs are accommodated in a single
    plane.


CLS 248/514
TXT Support under subclass 511 wherein the staff receiving means is adjustably
    connected to the device, whereby the staff is movable in one or more planes
    with respect to the device.


    A means (friction brake, lever and detent, etc.) to secure the staff
    receiving means against movement relative to the device is required.


    Neither a movement of the staff within its receiving means, nor a
    repositioning of the device relative to its supporting surface or object,
    constitute the movement of the receiving means relative to the device that
    is fundamental to this subclass.

    (1)     Note.  Where more than one centering or retaining means is present,
    it is not necessary that each means move relative to the device; rather, it
    is sufficient if one moves, as an entity, relative to the device (and
    therefore, relative to any other means).

    (2)     Note.  Rotation of the staff receiving means about its longitudinal
    axis (i.e., the longitudinal axis of the staff) relative to the device is
    deemed to be for the sake of adjustment (and therefore proper for this
    subclass ) if a means to secure against rotation is provided.Rotation for
    its own sake (i.e., in the absence of a securing means) is specifically
    provided for -- in the instance of a stand or base type device -- in
    subclasses 521+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    523+,   (especially subclass 527) for a staff centering or retaining means
    which, by the manipulation of one or more elements of the means relative to
    other elements of the means, is capable of plumbing" a staff held therein;
    however, since the means is not moved as an entity, the structures of that
    subclasses (523+) are not angularly adjustable within the meaning of this
    subclass (514).


CLS 248/515
TXT Support under subclass 514 wherein the connection is of a nature whereby
    the staff is movable in more than one plane.


CLS 248/516
TXT Support under subclass 515 wherein the connection includes an interface in
    the form of a sphere or an element thereof.

    (1)     Note.  A staff having a spherical element formed on an end thereof,
    plus a mounting means therefor, does not, in the absence of a staff
    receiving means, constitute a support for this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 90, 114+ and 122+ for a ball and
    socket type of articulated connection between two members, one of which
    members may be a rod-like element having the ball portion of the connection
    formed on an end thereof.


CLS 248/517
TXT Support under subclass 514 wherein the connection of the staff receiving
    means to the device comprises a pivot to enable the means to be moved into
    at least one nonvertical position, and wherein the securing means is the
    force of gravity.


CLS 248/518
TXT Support under subclass 511 wherein the device includes structure whereby it
    can be supported by, alternatively, plural types of supporting surfaces or
    object; e.g., the device can be either (1) a stand or a ground inserted
    device, (2) a stand or a bracket, or (3) a ground inserted device or a
    bracket.

    (1)     Note. The claiming of means (e.g., apertures) to receive fasteners
    in the surface-contacting portions of a device in the nature of a stand,
    for the purpose of securing the device to the surface, is not an
    alternatively mountable feature for this subclass in the absence of a
    disclosure that the device may be used without the fasteners on a generally
    horizontal surface as a stand and used with the fasteners on a
    nonhorizontal surface as a bracket.


CLS 248/519
TXT Support under subclass 511 wherein the staff receiving means is a component
    of a device which is inherently stable when resting, without attachment,
    upon a generally horizontal surface.  The device is the sole support for,
    and bears the entire weight of, the staff receiving means and staff.

    (1)     Note.  A device designated as a stand or a base but having means
    for attachment to an underlying surface (e.g., screws), or to an outlying
    surface (e.g., guy wires), or which is disclosed as requiring some such
    form of attachment, does not fulfill the stability requirement of this
    subclass; rather, it is considered to comprise a bracket for subclasses
    534+ below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 40.5 for related structure in the form of
    a base or stand for receiving the trunk of a cut tree, and having, in
    addition a liquid reservoir to provide moisture for the benefit of the tree.


CLS 248/520
TXT Support under subclass 519 wherein the staff receiving means is positioned
    by the device in such a manner as to impart to the staff an attitude which
    is between the horizontal and the vertical.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    514+,   for a staff support wherein the staff receiving means is adjustable
    relative to the device for the purpose of changing the angular relationship
    of the staff to the device, the range of adjustment being disclosed as
    including, in many instances, an inclined attitude.


CLS 248/521
TXT Support under subclass 519 wherein the staff receiving means is mounted for
    rotational movement with respect to the device, whereby the staff can be
    rotated about its longitudinal axis.


CLS 248/522
TXT Support under subclass 521 wherein means is provided to move the staff
    receiving means rotatably.


CLS 248/523
TXT Support under subclass 519 wherein the staff receiving means includes means
    to grip and/or to align the staff therein.


    This and the indented subclasses involve, predominantly, structure for
    supporting a Christmas tree.

    (1)     Note.  A cylinder with a closed bottom (i.e., a socket) is not a
    means for this subclass unless the respective diameters of the cylinder and
    the staff are so related as to necessarily result in a retaining or
    centering function; in the absence of such a relationship, the structure is
    in subclass 519 above.  On the other hand, the staff receiving means  of
    this subclass may comprise only an up-standing pin which either is driven
    into the bottom of the staff or else is received in a complementarily-sized
    bore formed in the bottom of the staff.


CLS 248/524
TXT Support under subclass 523 wherein the retaining or centering means are at
    least two in number and are positioned above and below one another.


    While the means more often than not are diverse in nature, the more
    significant aspect is that their contact with the staff is at regions of
    the latter which are spaced vertically from one another.


    In some instances the plurality of means comprises only a single member, or
    set of members, which member, or members, have vertically spaced, staff
    contacting portions.


    Mere "teeth" formed on a means or element thereof at a single region of
    contact with the staff are not within the spaced-contact concept of this
    subclass, nor is continuous contact over a portion of the length of the
    staff (e.g., as in the instance of a sleeve).


CLS 248/525
TXT Support under subclass 524 wherein one of the retaining or centering means
    comprises a plurality of legs which are pivotably attached to the device
    and support it in elevated relation to the generally horizontal surface.
    Except in the rare instances where there are more than two retaining or
    centering means, the pivoted legs constitute the upper one of the means.
    Pivotable movement of a leg about its axis, which axis usually is
    horizontal, causes its upper portion to move into or out of engagement with
    the staff, and tooth-like structure frequently is provided on the
    staff-contacting area of the upper portion for the purpose of enhancing its
    grip on the staff.

    (1)     Note.  In view of the pivotable attachment of the legs, the
    supports of this subclass (525) more often than not are of a foldable
    nature within the meaning of subclass 528 below.


CLS 248/526
TXT Support under subclass 525 wherein the exertion of a downward force by the
    staff (i.e., resulting either from its weight or from an externally-applied
    force) causes the supporting legs to grip the staff more tightly.

    (1)     Note.  While the structure of this subclass usually do not appear
    to differ materially from those of the preceding subclass (525) and
    therefore might function similarly, nevertheless the patents which appear
    in this subclass (526) are those which claim or otherwise disclose the
    functional relationship described.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    524     and 532, for other staff supports in the nature of a stand or base
    wherein the staff receiving means is weighted or thrust responsive.


CLS 248/527
TXT Support under subclass 524 wherein one or more of the retaining or
    centering means comprises a plurality of generally horizontal elements
    which are in threaded engagement with the device and are axially movable
    into or out of engagement with the staff.  Where there are not more than
    two retaining or centering means, the screw usually constitutes the upper
    one of the means.

    (1)     Note.  While a support of the kind found in this subclass usually
    has the capability of changing the attitude of the staff (e.g., to "plumb"
    it), it is not an angularly adjustable support within the meaning of
    subclass 514 above; see the reference therein to this subclass for an
    explanation of the difference.


CLS 248/528
TXT Support under subclass 519 wherein the device includes pivotably
    interconnected elements, whereby at least one dimension of the support is
    decreased when the elements are moved to a nonuse position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    525+,   for a staff support in the nature of a stand or base having
    horizontally pivoted, staff-engaging, supporting legs wherein the movement
    of the legs to a nonuse position ordinarily results in a decrease in the
    speed of the device; only in the infrequent instances where the structures
    of that subclass provide for foldability of some other nature are they
    cross referenced to this subclass (528).


CLS 248/529
TXT Support under subclass 519 wherein the device includes elements which are
    joined by disengageable connections, whereby the support may be easily
    disassembled for such purposes as storage, transport, etc.

    (1)     Note.  A threaded connection is within the concept of this subclass
    only if at least one of the mating threads is formed upon a structural
    element of the device.

    (2)     Note.  If the device involves connection of more than one kind, it
    is sufficient for inclusion in this subclass if at least one of the
    connections is of the readily disengageable kind.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    511,    for a "stand" which is comprised of a plurality of individual,
    leg-like members which members are in a disassembled state until such time
    as they are attached to a staff.


CLS 248/530
TXT Support under subclass 511 wherein the staff receiving means is a component
    of a device which includes structure in the form of a ground insertable
    member (e.g., a spike, etc.) for securing the device to the ground, and
    from which securement it derives its ability to support the staff receiving
    means and staff.  Generally, the insertable members of this subclass are
    intended to be pushed into, and pulled from, ground without the assistance
    of mechanical means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    545,    for a support comprising a ground inserted portion and means to aid
    in the insertion thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 292+, especially
    subclasses 296+, for a discrete stable base for a superimposed structural
    body, which body may be in the form of a shaft (e.g., a staff).


CLS 248/532
TXT Support under subclass 530 wherein the device has space interiorly therof
    to receive and enclose, at lead of part, the ground insertable member when
    the latter is not in use.  The member is movably (e.g., telescopically) or
    removably mounted with respect to the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    533,    for a staff support which includes a pivotably mounted, insertable
    member, which member folds into a nonuse position.


CLS 248/533
TXT Support under subclass 530 wherein the device and/or one or more of its
    components (e.g., staff receiving means, ground insertable member, etc.)
    include either (1) pivotable connections for folding, or (2) readily
    disengageable connections for disassembly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    532,    for a staff support which includes a movably or removably mounted
    ground insertable member, which member is stored within the device when not
    in use.


CLS 248/534
TXT Support under subclass 511 wherein the staff receiving means is a component
    of a device which includes structure for attaching it to a surface or an
    object, and from which attachment it derives its ability to support the
    staff receiving means and staff.


CLS 248/535
TXT Support under subclass 534 having selectively usable means for (1)
    attaching the device to a surface (or object) or (2) receiving the staff.



    The purpose of the structures of this subclass is to enable the staff to be
    maintained in a particular attitude even though it becomes necessary to
    move the device from one mounting surface to another, which other surface
    is displaced angularly (e.g, at 90 degrees) from the first; accordingly,
    the selectively usable means bear a like angular relationship to each other.


CLS 248/536
TXT Support under subclass 534 wherein the device is particularly adapted to be
    attached to surfaces which intersect, or are in planes which intersect, at
    an angle of less than 180 degrees.



    Typical of the structures of this subclass are brackets for supporting the
    staff receiving means above the ridge of a roof or alongside the corner of
    a building or a chimney.


CLS 248/537
TXT Support under subclass 534 wherein the structure for attaching the device
    to its supporting surface or object comprises either a vacuum-producing
    means or a means which possesses, or is responsive to, magnetic attraction.


CLS 248/538
TXT Support under subclass 534 wherein the staff receiving means is positioned
    by the device in such a manner as to impart to the staff an attitude which
    is between the horizontal and vertical.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    514+,   for a staff support wherein the staff receiving means is adjustable
    relative to the device for the purpose of changing the angular relationship
    of the staff to the device, the range of adjustment being disclosed as
    including, in many instances, an inclined attitude.


CLS 248/539
TXT Support under subclass 534 wherein the staff receiving means is positioned
    by the device in such a manner as to impart to the staff a vertical
    attitude.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    514+,   for a staff support wherein the staff receiving means is adjustable
    relative to the device for the purpose of changing the angular relationship
    of the staff to the device, the range of adjustment being disclosed as
    including, in many instances, a vertical attitude.

    536,    for a staff support in the nature of a bracket wherein the staff
    receiving means is supported relative to the intersection of surfaces, or
    the planes thereof, which structures usually support the staff in a
    vertical attitude.


CLS 248/540
TXT Support under subclass 534 wherein (1) the staff receiving means has means
    for clamping engaging the staff and (2) the device has means for clampingly
    engaging its supporting surface or object.


CLS 248/541
TXT Support under subclass 540 wherein the supporting surface or object is
    cylindrical in nature.


CLS 248/542
TXT WITH INDICATOR OR INSPECTION MEANS:

    Structure under the class definition comprising (a) means for showing the
    condition, position, or other characteristic of the support, a component
    thereof, or the supported article, or (b) adjunctive means for facilitating
    the inspection of the article or support.


CLS 248/543
TXT Pre-set characteristic:

    Structure under subclass 542 wherein the support includes means for
    adjusting an operational characteristic of the support, and an indicator
    means for showing the operating condition of the support.


CLS 248/544
TXT WITH MEANS TO FACILITATE INSTALLATION, REPAIR, OR TRANSPORTATION, OR BROKEN
    PARTS RETAINER:

    Structure under the class definition comprising means for (a) aiding in the
    mounting or removal of the support or in the installation or removal of a
    supported article thereon; (b) aiding in the repair of a damaged support;
    (c) preventing broken parts of a damaged support from scattering; or (d)
    protecting or disabling the support or a part thereof during
    transportation, the function of said means being dormant while the support
    is in use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    561,    for means for disabling a resilient element wherein the support may
    be used with or without the resilient means being operative.


CLS 248/545
TXT For ground insertion:

    Structure under subclass 544 wherein the support comprises a ground
    inserted anchor and means to facilitate the insertion of the anchor into
    the ground.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85+,    87+ 156+, and 530+, for a support including a ground inserted
    anchor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 155+ for ground
    inserted anchors in general.


CLS 248/546
TXT For support cutting or piercing:

    Structure under subclass 544 comprising means for facilitating the
    installation of a support piercing or cutting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71      and 216.1+, for a bracket comprising or support piercing or cutting
    means.


CLS 248/547
TXT Nail guide or holder:

    Structure under subclass 546 comprising means for holding or guiding a nail
    while being driven into a support.


CLS 248/548
TXT WITH COMPONENT FRANGIBLE OR DEFORMABLE ON IMPACT OR OVERLOAD:

    Structure under the class definition including a component which has a
    characteristic by virtue of which said component will fail before any other
    part of the structure when subjected to an unusual shock or load.


CLS 248/549
TXT Support for mirror-or picture-type article:

    Structure under subclass 548 including structure peculiarly adapted for
    supporting a mirror, picture, license plate, or similar viewable object in
    the desired viewable position.


CLS 248/550
TXT WITH CONDITION RESPONSIVE CONTROL MEANS:

    Structure under the class definition comprising a first means for sensing a
    condition and a second control-type means which will act in response to the
    condition being sensed by the first means.


CLS 248/551
TXT WITH ANTITHEFT OR ANTITAMPER MEANS:

    Structure under the class definition comprising means for preventing:  1)
    unauthorized removal of the supported article therefrom or, 2) tampering
    with the support or the supported article, wherein the means requires the
    use of a lock, tool, or knowledge which is not available to the general
    public.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclass 62 for locks for supported portable articles
    wherein the support is unmodified except for the accommodation of the
    locking mechanism.  See subclasses 333+ for mechanisms to prevent tampering
    with the operating mechanism of, or means to prevent a physical attack
    upon, a lock of the combination type.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclass 26 for means
    to prevent a successful attack upon a safe by means of an explosive.  See
    subclass 50 or 51 for means for preventing unauthorized separation of a
    safe or vault from its support.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 4+ for article locking racks.

    232,    Deposit and Collection Receptacles, subclasses 41+ for devices for
    locking milk bottles for delivery.


CLS 248/552
TXT Padlock:

    Structure under subclass 551 wherein the means for preventing unauthorized
    removal comprises a padlock.


CLS 248/553
TXT Key operated:

    Structure under subclass 551 wherein the means for preventing unauthorized
    removal is operated by a key.


CLS 248/554
TXT AIRCRAFT ENGINE SUPPORT:

    Structure under the class definition for supporting the propelling engine
    of an aircraft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 54 for an aircraft engine support combined
    with aircraft structure.


CLS 248/555
TXT Three or more circumferentially spaced supports:

    Structure under subclass 554 wherein either the engine or structure
    attached thereto is encompassed by at least three mountings for securing
    same to a supporting structure said mounts being spaced about the periphery
    of a circle and spanning an arc of at least 180 degrees.


CLS 248/556
TXT Resilient:

    Structure under subclass 555 wherein at least one of the mountings is
    resilient.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    560+,   for resilient supports in general, and particularly subclasses 603+
    for three or more circumferentially spaced resilient supports.


CLS 248/557
TXT Resilient:

    Structure under subclass 554 wherein the support comprises a resilient
    component which takes at least part of the weight of the engine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    556,    for a resilient mounting in circumferentially spaced relationship
    to a plurality of other mountings.

    560+,   for resilient supports in general.


CLS 248/558
TXT SELECTIVE ASSEMBLY:

    Structure under the class definition adapted to provide (a) two or more
    different supports having different characteristics, or (b) to provide for
    the support of the supported article in different positions or
    orientations, either (a) or (b) being accomplished by the rearrangement,
    substitution, or removal of one or more parts.


CLS 248/559
TXT INCLUDING ADDITIONAL VIBRATING MASS:

    Structure under the class definition having (a) an inertial mass, other
    than that of the supported article, which cooperates with other structure
    to effect a desired vibration characteristic, (b) a particular relationship
    between the supported article and a movable part of the supporting
    structure whereby their masses combine to effect a desired vibration
    characteristic, or (c) a modified configuration of either the supported
    article or a movable part of the supporting structure, such configuration
    causing the mass thereof to cooperate with other structure to effect the
    desired vibration characteristic.


CLS 248/560
TXT RESILIENT SUPPORT:

    Structure under the class definition comprising a resilient means wherein
    said means takes at least part of the weight of the supported article and
    permits relative movement or vibration thereof with respect to a support.

    (1)     Note.  Almost every material possesses some elasticity or
    resilience. Moreover, many substances such as rubber, cork, etc., which are
    often used in certain applications because of their resilient properties,
    are also used in other applications because of other properties which they
    possess, which are unrelated to their resilient properties. Hence, a
    structure such as a mere mat, pad, sleeve, bushing, cover, etc., which is
    used primarily because of its frictional, nonmarring or protective
    properties, is not placed in this subclass, but is classified in the
    subclasses below on its physical characteristics even though it may
    incidentally function to dampen sound or to provide a slight cushioning
    effect.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not include a device wherein a resilient
    means acts in opposition to gravity but without sufficient force to
    actually support the article, for example, a counterbalanced support which
    bottoms, or in which the resilient means is ineffective in the normal
    operation of the device.  Such devices are in the subclasses below.
    However, this subclass does include a device wherein the resilient article
    is displaced from a neutral or equilibrium position if the weight of the
    supported article is taken by the resilient means during such displacement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    556     and 557, for a resilient mounting associated with an aircraft
    engine support.

    638,    for a machinery support comprising a vibration dampening or
    isolating means, which means does not take the weight of the machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 295 for a refrigerator comprising a
    resiliently supported power or heat rejecting element.

    267,    Spring Devices, particularly subclasses 136+ for a spring, per se.
    The line between Class 248 and Class 267 is as follows:  Class 267 will
    take a spring, per se, even though disclosed as having a supporting
    function, with or without means for attaching same to the structure with
    which it is used. Class 248 will take a supporting structure wherein a
    spring is included as an element of the combination and for which there is
    no provision in Class 267.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, appropriate subclasses for a load supporting
    device wherein the surface itself includes resilient means together with a
    disclosure of body supporting functions.A nonresilient support surface with
    resilient under structure is considered a stool or stand of general utility
    of this class (248).


CLS 248/561
TXT Including disabling means for resilient element:

    Structure under subclass 560 comprising means for rendering the resilient
    means ineffective.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    330.1   and 334.1, for a suspended support comprising a spring reel
    counterbalance means which is normally ineffective when the support is in
    use.


CLS 248/562
TXT Including additional energy absorbing means, e.g., fluid or friction
    damping, etc.:

    Structure under subclass 560 comprising energy absorbing means, in addition
    to the resilient means, acting between a vibrating component and a
    stationary component.

    (1)     Note.  The inherent hysteresis, which all springs possess, is not
    considered an additional means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    548,    for a support comprising an energy absorbing means wherein
    permanent deformation results from the energy absorbing action.

    636,    for a nonresilient support including energy absorbing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 514.12+ for fluid or fluent
    material dampening of an inertial member in an acceleration measuring
    apparatus and subclass 514.14 for vibration dampening in an inertial-type
    acceleration measuring apparatus.

    188,    Brakes, appropriate subclasses for energy absorbers, per se.


CLS 248/563
TXT Normally disengaged or including disabling means:

    Structure under subclass 562 (a) comprising means for locking out or
    otherwise rendering the energy absorbing means inoperative, or (b)
    comprising an energy absorbing means which is inoperative during normal
    operating conditions, but which becomes operative when at least one
    condition, e.g., amplitude, frequency, etc., attains a value outside a
    predetermined or normal range.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    550,    for a support wherein engagement or disengagement of an energy
    absorbing means is effected by a condition responsive control means.


CLS 248/564
TXT Acting through linkage:

    Structure under subclass 562 wherein the energy absorbing means is
    connected to the vibrating component or the stationary component through a
    linkage.


CLS 248/565
TXT Coaxial with spring:

    Structure under subclass 562 wherein the resilient means is a spring which
    has a common longitudinal axis with the additional energy absorbing means.


CLS 248/566
TXT Variable or adjustable energy absorbing means:

    Structure under subclass 562 comprising means for varying or adjusting at
    least one characteristic of the energy absorbing means.


CLS 248/567
TXT Including double pivot:

    Structure under subclass 562 wherein the energy absorbing means comprises a
    pair of spaced pivots which permit angular movement thereof when the
    vibrating component moves relative to the stationary component.


CLS 248/568
TXT Solid friction members:

    Structure under subclass 562 wherein the energy absorbing means comprises a
    plurality of solid, relatively movable components in frictional contact
    with each other.


CLS 248/569
TXT Linear motion:

    Structure under subclass 568 wherein the relative movement between the two
    contacting components is along a straight-line.


CLS 248/570
TXT Forming unitary structure with relative movement between parts:

    Structure under subclass 568 wherein the additional energy absorbing
    element comprises a plurality of discrete members held together in such a
    manner as to allow relative movement with frictional contact between such
    members.

    (1)     Note.  Such elements may be an assemblage of fibrous or particulate
    elements held together for relative movement therebetween or a spring
    member made up of relatively movable components in frictional contact.


CLS 248/571
TXT Constant thrust:

    Structure under subclass 560 comprising means for exerting a constant
    supporting force on the supported load regardless of a change of position
    of the load within specified limits.


CLS 248/572
TXT Variable effective diameter pulley, e.g., fusee, etc.:

    Structure under subclass 571 comprising a pulley or segment thereof which
    has a working diameter which is variable in dimension, e.g., fusee.


CLS 248/573
TXT Including limit stop or overload release:

    Structure under subclass 560 comprising (a) means for disengaging the
    resilient means upon application of a load exceeding a predetermined valve,
    or (b) means to prevent the resilient means from moving beyond a
    predetermined position.


CLS 248/574
TXT Adjustable:

    Structure under subclass 573 wherein the means is adjustable.


CLS 248/575
TXT Adjustable preloading of resilient means:

    Structure under subclass 560 comprising adjustable means for preloading the
    resilient means by distorting the resilient means independently of the
    distortion caused by the supported structure.


CLS 248/576
TXT Plural springs:

    Structure under subclass 575 comprising a plurality of adjustable springs.


CLS 248/577
TXT Adjusting rod between and parallel to coil spring axes:

    Structure under subclass 576 wherein there are a plurality of coil springs
    having their axes parallel and wherein the adjusting means comprises an
    elongated element intermediate the coils and extending in the same
    direction as the longitudinal axes of the coil.


CLS 248/578
TXT Adjusting means coaxial of coil spring:

    Structure under subclass 575 wherein the spring is a coil spring and the
    adjusting means is coaxial therewith.


CLS 248/579
TXT Including spring biased reel:

    Structure under subclass 560 comprises a spring biased reel receiving a
    flexible element to which the supported article is attached.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    330.1   and 334.1+, for a suspended support comprising a spring reel
    wherein the spring is operative during adjustment of the device but
    inoperative during normal operation thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 371+ for a spring reel,
    per se.


CLS 248/580
TXT Including load sustaining bearing or guide:

    Structure under subclass 560 comprising a bearing or guide which mounts the
    supported device for movement relative to the support, said bearing or
    guide being so constructed as to take a vertical or lateral load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 300.1+ for a back tiltable with a
    bottom against a biasing means; and subclasses 332+ for a bottom tiltable
    against a biasing means.


CLS 248/581
TXT Including suspended horizontal frame or platform:

    Structure under subclass 580 comprising a resilient suspended horizontal
    platform or frame one which the supported device rests.


CLS 248/582
TXT Pivot intermediate plural springs:

    Structure under subclass 580 wherein the load sustaining bearing or guide
    is pivoted about an axis, such axis having at least one spring member
    located on either side thereof.


CLS 248/583
TXT Plural axes, e.g., angular and linear, universal, etc.:

    Structure under subclass 580 wherein the bearing or guide provides for
    movement along and/or about more than one axis.


CLS 248/584
TXT Resilient means acts through linkage or gear:

    Structure under subclass 580 wherein the resilient means acts through a
    plurality of interconnected links or gears.


CLS 248/585
TXT Parallelogram linkage:

    Structure under subclass 584 comprising at least four pivotally connected
    links wherein the lines joining the pivot members form a parallelogram.


CLS 248/586
TXT Diagonal spring:

    Structure under subclass 585 wherein the resilient means comprises a spring
    connected to at least one of the links and extending generally diagonally
    across the parallelogram.


CLS 248/587
TXT Torsion spring:

    Structure under subclass 585 wherein the resilient means comprises a
    torsion spring.


CLS 248/588
TXT Crossing links:

    Structure under subclass 584 comprising at least two nonparallel links
    which cross each other intermediate their ends, which links may or may not
    be connected together.


CLS 248/589
TXT Suspended support:

    Structure under subclass 584 wherein the arm or link serves as a suspending
    element for supporting the load from above.

    (1)     Note.  A part of the supported article may extend above the point
    at which the link is connected to the supporting structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    581,    for a resiliently suspended frame or platform including a load
    sustaining bearing or guide.


CLS 248/590
TXT Torsion spring coaxial with pivot:

    Structure under subclass 584 comprising at least one torsion spring which
    is coaxial with a pivot.


CLS 248/591
TXT Plural links connected to support surface:

    Structure under subclass 584 comprising a plurality of links connected to a
    supporting surface.


CLS 248/592
TXT Resilient means acts through arm or lever:

    Structure under subclass 580 wherein force is transmitted to or from the
    resilient means through an arm or lever.


CLS 248/593
TXT Plural arm or lever:

    Structure under subclass 592 comprising more than one arm or lever.


CLS 248/594
TXT Compression spring:

    Structure under subclass 592 wherein the resilient means is a spring which
    is placed under compression by the weight of the supported article.


CLS 248/595
TXT Pivoted link between support surface and understructure:

    Structure under subclass 592 comprising a link pivoted at one end to a
    support surface and at the other end of an understructure.


CLS 248/596
TXT Stationary horizontal pivot:

    Structure under subclass 580 wherein the bearing comprises an immovable
    pivot in a horizontal plane.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 327+ for a seat tiltable about a
    horizontal point.


CLS 248/597
TXT Spiral spring surrounds pivot axis:

    Structure under subclass 596 comprising a spiral spring which is disposed
    about the pivot axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    590,    for a torsion spring which is coaxial with a pivot of a linkage or
    gear.


CLS 248/598
TXT Supporting surface pivoted at one end:

    Structure under subclass 596 wherein the pivot is located on one edge of a
    supporting surface.


CLS 248/599
TXT Resiliently supported leg or standard:

    Structure under subclass 580 comprising a leg or standard which is
    supported by both a bearing or guide and a resilient means.


CLS 248/600
TXT Spring coaxial with leg or standard:

    Structure under subclass 599 wherein the spring means is coaxial with the
    leg or standard.


CLS 248/601
TXT Encircles leg or standard:

    Structure under subclass 600 wherein the spring encircles the leg or
    standard.


CLS 248/602
TXT For movement along a linear axis:

    Structure under subclass 580 comprising means providing for movement along
    a distinct linear axis.


CLS 248/603
TXT Including three or more circumferentially arranged resilient elements:

    Structure under subclass 560 wherein the load is supported by at least
    three resilient elements which are disposed between the load and a
    supporting structure at circumferentially spaced points.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    556,    for three or more circumferentially spaced resilient members
    supporting an aircraft engine.


CLS 248/604
TXT Inwardly extending resilient arms:

    Structure under subclass 603 wherein the supporting structure is spaced
    outwardly from the load and the resilient elements comprise inwardly
    extending rodlike members which are either (a) resilient throughout their
    length or (b) rigid members having a resilient section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    603,    for a plurality of inwardly extending rigid arms mounted on
    flexible brushings.


CLS 248/605
TXT Plural resilient mountings for oscillation about a distinct axis:

    Structure under subclass 560 comprising plural resilient means so arranged
    with respect to the supported article as to favor oscillation of the
    supported article about one or more distinct axes and providing a torque
    opposite to that due to the oscillation of the supported article.


CLS 248/606
TXT Coaxial:

    Structure under subclass 605 comprising a plurality of resilient elements
    which are coaxial with the axis of oscillation and with each other.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass will take a single such element if the sole
    disclosure is that it is used in conjunction with a similar coaxial element
    to permit oscillation about the common axis.


CLS 248/607
TXT Including torque reaction member:

    Structure under subclass 606 comprising a resilient member lateral of said
    axis for opposing oscillation of the supported member.


CLS 248/608
TXT Torsion bar or bushing:

    Structure under subclass 560 wherein the resilient means comprises an
    axially twistable elongated element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    596,    for a support wherein a spiral spring surrounds an axis.

    605,    for a plurality of coacting resilient mountings which permit
    oscillation about a distinct axis and for a single such mounting wherein
    the sole disclosure is that it is used in conjunction with a similar such
    bushing for this purpose.

    625,    for a support mounted solely on an axially torsional spiral element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 308 for torsional spring hinges;
    and subclasses 75+ for torsional closers.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 57+ for torsion vehicle springs.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclass 333 for a tilting seat biased by a
    torsion spring to either a tilted or to a nontilted position.


CLS 248/609
TXT Elastomeric:

    Structure under subclass 608 wherein the resilient element comprises
    elastomeric material.


CLS 248/610
TXT Suspended:

    Structure under subclass 560 wherein the supported article, or a member on
    which it is mounted, is hung or suspended from above.

    (1)     Note.  A part of the supported article may extend above the
    suspension means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    581,    for a resiliently suspended frame or platform including a load
    sustaining bearing or guide.

    589,    for a resilient suspension comprising an arm or link.


CLS 248/611
TXT By member intermediate opposed resilient elements or surfaces:

    Structure under subclass 610 wherein the supported member, or an element
    attached thereto, is disposed between a plurality of oppositely acting
    resilient supporting elements, or between plural opposed surfaces of a
    single such resilient element.


CLS 248/612
TXT By lateral flange on supported device:

    Structure under subclass 610 comprising one or more supporting flanges or
    projections extending laterally from the supported device.


CLS 248/613
TXT By compression of resilient element:

    Structure under subclass 610 wherein a resilient member is maintained under
    compression as a result of the suspension of the supported article.


CLS 248/614
TXT Plural resilient members with intersecting axes:

    Structure under subclass 560 comprising at least two resilient members,
    each of which has a linear axis, the members being inclined so that the
    axes intersect.


CLS 248/615
TXT Resilient foot or bumper:

    Structure under subclass 560 comprising a resilient foot which forms a
    lower terminal of the support or a resilient bumper between the support and
    an adjacent structure.


CLS 248/616
TXT Including telescopically movable rigid elements:

    Structure under subclass 615 comprising a plurality of relatively movable
    rigid elements in telescopic engagement with each other.


CLS 248/617
TXT Spring attached hook or cleat:

    Structure under subclass 560 comprising a spring which is provided with a
    bent or crooked element for attachment to a supporting understructure.


CLS 248/618
TXT Including spring zone understructure:

    Structure under subclass 560 comprising a portion or section of supporting
    understructure which consists entirely of springs or resilient material.


CLS 248/619
TXT Diverse resilient elements:

    Structure under subclass 618 comprising a plurality of resilient elements
    at least two of which differ in size, shape, material, orientation, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    611,    for a suspended device having a lateral flange or projection
    between two oppositely acting resilient compression elements.


CLS 248/620
TXT Tension and compression:

    Structure under subclass 619 wherein at least one of the resilient elements
    operates under tension and at least one other operates under compression.


CLS 248/621
TXT Including elastomeric element:

    Structure under subclass 619 wherein at least one of the resilient elements
    comprises elastomeric material.


CLS 248/622
TXT Resilient vertical standard:

    Structure under subclass 618 wherein the supported device is mounted at the
    free end of an elongated vertical resilient member which is anchored at its
    opposite end.


CLS 248/623
TXT Helical spring:

    Structure under subclass 622 wherein the resilient member comprises an
    elongated spiral coil.


CLS 248/624
TXT Spiral spring:

    Structure under subclass 618 wherein the resilient means comprises a spiral
    coil.


CLS 248/625
TXT Axially torsioned:

    Structure under subclass 624 wherein the application of the load, due to
    the weight of the supported device, causes the spring to twist about the
    axis of the coil.


CLS 248/626
TXT Elliptic spring:

    Structure under subclass 618 wherein the spring is of oval shape and is
    continuous or comprises two arcuate sections having their adjacent ends
    connected integrally or otherwise, the intermediate concave portions of
    said sections facing each other and being free for relative approach or
    recession.


CLS 248/627
TXT Laminated:

    Structure under subclass 626 wherein the spring comprises coacting
    superposed plates, strips, or leaves.


CLS 248/628
TXT C-section:

    Structure under subclass 618 comprising a spring member having a return
    bend portion forming a generally C-shaped section in a vertical plane.


CLS 248/629
TXT Cantilever:

    Structure under subclass 618 comprising a resilient bar having a horizontal
    or oblique section, said bar being anchored at one end and having means for
    engaging the supported article at the other end.


CLS 248/630
TXT Laminated spring:

    Structure under subclass 618 wherein the spring comprises coacting
    superposed strips, plates, or leaves.


CLS 248/631
TXT Fluid spring:

    Structure under subclass 618 wherein the resilient material comprises an
    elastic fluid.


CLS 248/632
TXT Nonmetallic resilient element:

    Structure under subclass 618 comprising a resilient element of nonmetallic
    material.


CLS 248/633
TXT Mat or pad:

    Structure under subclass 632 wherein the nonmetallic resilient element
    comprises a mat or pad.


CLS 248/634
TXT Nonmetallic resilient element:

    Structure under subclass 560 comprising a resilient element of nonmetallic
    material.


CLS 248/635
TXT Including rigid coaxial pin or bushing:

    Structure under subclass 634 comprising a resilient element having an axis,
    and a rigid pin or bushing extending into said element and being coaxial
    therewith.


CLS 248/636
TXT INCLUDING ENERGY ABSORBING MEANS, E. G., FLUID OR FRICTION DAMPING:

    Structure under the class definition comprising means for absorbing
    mechanical energy from a vibratory component, converting such absorbed
    energy to another form of energy, such as heat, and thereby damping the
    absorbed mechanical energy.

    (1)     Note.  A mere spring, acting alone or in concert with others, is
    not considered an energy absorbing member for this subclass as the energy
    transferred is not changed in form or dissipated, but returned, almost in
    full, to the vibrating member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    562+,   for a support comprising an energy absorbing means combined with a
    distinct resilient means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, appropriate subclasses for an energy absorbing device, per
    se.


CLS 248/637
TXT MACHINERY SUPPORT:

    Structure under the class definition for supporting a machine comprising
    moving parts.

    (1)     Note.  So much of the machine and/or the structure on which the
    support is mounted as is necessary to accommodate same to the support may
    be included. Inventions which include structure of an art device, e.g.,
    engine, vehicle frame, etc., other than that which is necessary to
    accommodate the support are classified with the art device.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not include supports for machine
    components. Such supports are classified either with the component or with
    the machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27.1+,  for a support for an instrument in a panel.

    560+,   for a resilient support wherein the resilient means takes the
    weight of the supported article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 297 for a refrigerator housing combined
    with an external support.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 16 for power tables and
    stands comprising some mechanism in addition to a support.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 161 for an expansible chamber
    device including a support or frame therefor. For a statement of the line
    between Class 92 and Class 248 see the reference to Class 248 under Search
    Class in subclass 161 of Class 92.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 133+ for a support for a motor or
    dynamo on a railway vehicle including structure which goes beyond that
    necessary to accommodate the support.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 195 for an
    internal-combustion engine frame.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 291 for motor vehicle including a support
    for a motor including structure of the vehicle or motor which goes beyond
    that necessary to accommodate the support.  See the note to Class 248 under
    Search Class in subclass 291 of Class 180 for a more complete statement of
    the line between Class 180 and Class 248.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 243 for motion picture apparatus
    structurally combined with and cooperating with its support.

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 103+ and 107- 109 for a support limited by
    structure to use with dental engines.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 340+ for an abrading machine frame or mount.


    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, appropriate
    subclasses for belt and pulley drive systems combined with support means.


CLS 248/638
TXT Including vibration isolation means:

    Structure under subclass 637 comprising means for isolating or otherwise
    reducing vibrations from a supported member to the supporting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    560+,   for a resilient support which isolates or dampens vibration,
    wherein the support takes the weight of the supported device.

    636,    for a nonresilient support having an energy absorbing means
    included therewith, wherein the absorbing means converts the absorbed
    energy to another form, such as heat.


CLS 248/639
TXT For plural, interrelated machines:

    Structure under subclass 637 comprising means for supporting a plurality of
    machines in such a manner that said machines may operate in cooperative
    relationship.


CLS 248/640
TXT For outboard motor:

    Structure under subclass 637 for supporting an outboard motor either on a
    boat or in a stationary environment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    440,    Marine Propulsion, subclasses 53+ for an outboard motor support in
    combination with propelling means or with structure of a boat which goes
    beyond the structure necessary to associate same with the support.


CLS 248/641
TXT Including false transom:

    Structure under subclass 640 comprising a generally vertical plate on which
    the motor is mounted, said plate being horizontally spaced from the boat or
    other structure on which it is supported.


CLS 248/642
TXT Articulated:

    Structure under subclass 640 comprising means permitting the motor to be
    moved either angularly or linearly.


CLS 248/643
TXT Mounted by C-clamp:

    Structure under subclass 640 wherein the support is mounted on a boat or
    other structure by means of a C-clamp.


CLS 248/644
TXT Extensible column mounted between opposed surfaces:

    Structure under subclass 637 wherein the machine is mounted on a
    longitudinally extensible support column, said column having elements on
    either end thereof, said elements being adapted to engage the face of
    opposed surfaces as the column is extended therebetween.


CLS 248/645
TXT Alternatively mounted:

    Structure under subclass 637 comprising means for permitting the support to
    be mounted in more than one manner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126,    for a support which may be used as either a stand or bracket.

    296.1,  for a bracket mountable on either a horizontal or vertical surface.

    518,    for a staff support comprising alternative mounting means.


CLS 248/646
TXT Movable machine:

    Structure under subclass 637 comprising means permitting the machine to
    move from one position to another.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses included belt tighteners.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 101+ for structure wherein a support carrying a power
    transmission belt is movable such as for adjusting belt tension.


CLS 248/647
TXT Ambulatory, e.g., mounted on land or rail vehicle, etc.:

    Structure under subclass 646 comprising means, such as wheels or skids, for
    enabling the support to be moved as a unit, from one position to another.


CLS 248/648
TXT Weight counterbalanced:

    Structure under subclass 646 comprising a weight acting in opposition to
    the weight of the load to counterbalance the load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315     and 331, for adjustable suspended supports comprising
    counterweights.


CLS 248/649
TXT By independently adjustable legs or feet:

    Structure under subclass 646 comprising a plurality of independently
    adjustable legs or feet, the position of the machine being adjustable by
    varying the angularity or relative length of said legs or feet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188.2+, for an elevating or levelling device in general which is not
    restricted to use with a machine.


CLS 248/650
TXT Screw:

    Structure under subclass 649 wherein the adjustment of the leg is effected
    by the action of one member threadably engaged with another.

    (1)     Note.  The threaded member may be the leg itself or may be a
    separate member which causes movement of the leg.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188.4,  for a screw threaded elevating or levelling device not restricted
    to use with a machine.


CLS 248/651
TXT Including operator or actuator:

    Structure under subclass 646 comprising means for causing or initiating
    movement of the machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188.2+, for an elevating or levelling device not restricted to use with a
    machine.

    649,    for means causing movement of an independently adjustable leg or
    foot.


CLS 248/652
TXT For angular movement:

    Structure under subclass 651 wherein the effect of the means is to cause
    rotatable movement about an axis, or cause movement along a curved or
    arcuate path.


CLS 248/653
TXT Extensible leg or strut:

    Structure under subclass 652 wherein the operator comprises an elongated
    extensible member which effects angular movement of the support in response
    to variations in the length of said extensible member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    649+,   for a support wherein angular adjustment is effected by varying the
    length or angularity of a plurality of independently adjustable legs or
    feet.


CLS 248/654
TXT Hydraulic or pneumatic:

    Structure under subclass 653 wherein the length or angularity of the
    extensible member is varied by hydraulic or pneumatic means.


CLS 248/655
TXT Acting against spring bias:

    Structure under subclass 651 comprising a spring which opposes the action
    of the operator means.


CLS 248/656
TXT Screw:

    Structure under subclass 651 wherein the means comprises a screw.


CLS 248/657
TXT Horizontally slidable carriage:

    Structure under subclass 656 wherein the screw effects movement of a
    horizontally slidable carriage.


CLS 248/658
TXT Including limit stop:

    Structure under subclass 646 comprising means for limiting the movement of
    the machine in at least one direction.


CLS 248/659
TXT Trunnions or flexible supports on opposite sides of machine:

    Structure under subclass 646 wherein the machine is (a) journaled by a pair
    of projecting pivots which are disposed on opposite sides of the machine,
    or (b) supported by a pair of flexible members which are disposed on
    opposite sides of the machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201+,   for a single article supported by plural brackets.

    560+,   for a machine mounted by resilient means.

    612+,   for a resiliently supported device comprising a laterally extending
    flange or projection.


CLS 248/660
TXT About or along plural axes:

    Structure under subclass 646 wherein the machine is movable about or along
    more than one axis.

    (1)     Note.  The movement may be angular and/or linear.


CLS 248/661
TXT Intersecting axes:

    Structure under subclass 660 wherein at least two of the axes intersect
    each other.


CLS 248/662
TXT Angular and linear:

    Structure under subclass 660 comprising means providing for (a) linear
    movement along one axis and (b) rotatable movement about a second axis or
    movement along a curved or arcuate path.


CLS 248/663
TXT Including universal ball and socket:

    Structure under subclass 660 comprising a universal ball and socket
    connection.


CLS 248/664
TXT Angular movement:

    Structure under subclass 646 comprising means providing rotatable movement
    about an axis, or movement along a curved or arcuate path.


CLS 248/665
TXT Biased for movement in one direction e.g., by gravity, spring, etc.:

    Structure under subclass 664 comprising means providing a force for urging
    the machine for movement in one direction.

    (1)     Note.  Included are devices wherein the machine is mounted with its
    center of gravity eccentric to an axis whereby the weight of the machine
    provides the force, as well as devices comprising a separate means such as
    a spring or an additional eccentric weight.


CLS 248/666
TXT About axis parallel to machine shaft:

    Structure under subclass 664 wherein the movement is about an axis which is
    parallel to the axis of a shaft of the machine which is supported.


CLS 248/667
TXT About axis intersecting machine shaft:

    Structure under subclass 664 wherein the movement is about an axis which
    intersects the axis of a shaft of the machine which is supported.


CLS 248/668
TXT Along inclined plane:

    Structure under subclass 646 wherein the movement of the machine is linear
    and along an axis which is inclined with respect to the horizontal.


CLS 248/669
TXT Vertical movement:

    Structure under subclass 646 wherein the machine moves in a vertical
    direction.


CLS 248/670
TXT Adjustable size:

    Structure under subclass 637 wherein the support comprises means for
    accommodating machines of different sizes.


CLS 248/671
TXT Cradle:

    Structure under subclass 637 comprising a generally horizontal, concave
    portion which receives the machine.


CLS 248/672
TXT Modified machine housing or frame:

    Structure under subclass 637 comprising a machine housing or frame having a
    particular configuration or modification which cooperates directly with the
    support to perform the supporting function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    612,    for a machine having a lateral flange or projection which engages a
    supporting spring.


CLS 248/673
TXT Including engaging structure complementary to foot or leg of machine:

    Structure under subclass 637 comprising means having a configuration which
    is complementary to a part of a foot or leg of the machine for engagement
    therewith.


CLS 248/674
TXT Bracket:

    Structure under subclass 637 comprising means for attachment to a
    supporting structure and a portion extending laterally therefrom for
    engaging the supported device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   for a bracket not restricted to use with a machine.


CLS 248/675
TXT Plural for single article:

    Structure under subclass 674 wherein more than one bracket is used to
    support a single machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201,    for plural brackets for supporting a single article in general, and
    see the notes thereunder.

    659,    for a machinery support comprising a pair of trunnions or flexible
    supporting members.


CLS 248/676
TXT Stand:

    Structure under subclass 637 comprising a self-supporting device for
    supporting a machine in spaced relationship to a generally horizontal
    surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for a stand not limited to use with a machine, and see the notes
    thereunder.


CLS 248/677
TXT Foot or leg:

    Structure under subclass 637 comprising a member having two ends, one end
    being attached to a machine or machine frame, and the other end contacting
    a generally horizontal support surface, said member forming a part of the
    supporting structure of the machine and supporting at least part of the
    weight thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188.8,  for a foot or leg not restricted for use with a machine.

    359.1+, for an article carried support in general.

    615+,   for a resilient foot.

    676,    for a machine supporting stand.


CLS 248/678
TXT Base or platform:

    Structure under subclass 637 comprising a generally flat, box-like or
    block-like structure upon which a machine rests.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    346.01+, for a base not restricted to use with machinery.


CLS 248/679
TXT Including masonry or concrete:

    Structure under subclass 678 wherein at least a part of the structure
    comprises masonry or concrete.


CLS 248/680
TXT Holddown:

    Structure under subclass 637 which holds the machine to a support and
    carries none of the weight thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500+,   for a holddown not restricted to use with machinery.


CLS 248/681
TXT Including manipulatable latch:

    Structure under subclass 680 comprising a latch having manipulatable means
    such as a handle, tool engaging means, etc., for engaging or disengaging
    same.


CLS 248/682
TXT ARTICLE CARRIED:

    A support under the class definition attached to an article for supporting
    the article on a structure wherein the support remains with the article
    when the article is removed from the structure.

    (1)     Note.  Subclasses 682-693, of this class (248) were essentially
    derived from three subclasses (359, 359.1, 360) which were near the bottom
    of the 248 Class schedule.  The intervening subclasses (between 693 and
    357) have not been screened for originals or cross references which may
    belong in subclasses 682-693.  Those subclasses which are believed most
    likely to contain relevant art are listed under "Search This Class", below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114+,   for similar devices on watches and clocks.

    128+,   for a receptacle stand which remains with the article when moved.

    466+,   for similar devices on pictures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 3.1+ for the articles
    specified therein, which articles may have, attached thereto, a supporting
    means.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclass 206 for a ladder having
    an attached supporting means.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 69+ for a receptacle having structure on
    which it rests and which is special to the receptacle being supported.


CLS 248/683
TXT Mounted by vacuum, adhesive or magnet:

    A support under subclass 682 mounted on the structure by:

    1)      atmospheric pressure acting on an element having a region of
    reduced pressure beneath the element,

    2)      a nonmetallic surface bonding agent (e.g., glue, cement, or
    molecular interaction between a component of the support and the structure)
    or,

    3)      magnetic attraction between the support and the structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205.3+, for brackets mounted to a surface by adhesive.

    205.5+, for brackets mounted to a surface by vacuum.

    206.5+, for brackets mounted to a surface by magnetic attraction.


CLS 248/684
TXT Including cutting or piercing of the article:

     A support under subclass 682 comprising means for excising a portion of
    the article to form a recess therein or means to puncture the article to
    form an opening in the article to receive the support.


CLS 248/685
TXT Retractable within article:

    Device under subclass 682 wherein the article is provided with a recessed
    portion into which the support is intended to be stored (e.g., by being
    folded or collapsed) when not in use.


CLS 248/686
TXT Embedded within article:

    Device under subclass 682 wherein the support or a component thereof is
    enclosed within the article and secured so tightly therein that it cannot
    be removed without destroying the securement.


CLS 248/687
TXT Anti-mar or nonslip, e.g., cushioned:

    A support under subclass 682 comprising a cushioning material for
    contacting either the supported article or the supporting surface, usually
    for preventing marring and scratching or preventing slipping and skidding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    560+,   for structure particularly adapted for resiliently supporting an
    article, and see the notes thereunder.


CLS 248/688
TXT Stand, foot or prop:

    A support under subclass 682 which engages a horizontal surface for:

    1)      supporting the article in spaced relation thereto or,

    2)      holding a portion of the article spaced from the horizontal surface
    while another portion of the article is contact with the surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127+,   for a stand in general.

    351+,   for a prop in general.


CLS 248/689
TXT Mounted by clamping means:

    A support under subclass 682 which is removably secured to the article by
    an actuatable gripping means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225.11+, for a bracket, in general, which is
     clamped to a supporting structure.


CLS 248/690
TXT Mounted by hook or loop:

    A support under subclass 682 comprising a hook or loop attached to the
    article and serving to mount, secure, or attach the article on or to the
    structure.


CLS 248/691
TXT Hook pivoted to article:

    A support under subclass 690 wherein the hook or loop is attached to the
    article by a pliant connecting means or by a two-dimensional articulation
    means.


CLS 248/692
TXT Open hook:

    A support under subclass 690 comprising a mounting hook that has no closure
    means or other encumbrance which would prevent or hinder the engagement
    thereof with the structure.


CLS 248/693
TXT Including flexible suspension means:

    A support under subclass 682 comprising a flaccid or flexible member which
    permits the article to dangle from an overhead structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    317+,   for a suspended support in general.


CLS 248/694
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Support structure under the class definition which is not provided for in
    any of the above subclasses.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 248/900
TXT MOVABLE OR DISENGAGEABLE ON IMPACT OR OVERLOAD:

    Cross-reference collection directed to a support structure having a
    characteristic by virtue of which a part of the structure may be relatively
    displaced when subjected to an excessive loading or an unusual shock.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    548+,   for structure having a component which will fracture or deform
    before any other part of the structure when subjected to an overload or an
    unusual shock.


CLS 248/901
TXT SUPPORT HAVING TEMPERATURE OR PRESSURE RESPONSIVE FEATURE:

    Collection of documents disclosing support structure which includes a means
    or a characteristic that will in some way indicate a change in either
    temperature, pressure or a combination thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    550,    for a support structure which includes a first means for sensing a
    condition and a second, control-type means for responding to the condition
    sensed.


CLS 248/902
TXT EYEGLASSES HOLDER:

    Collection of documents disclosing support structure which is particularly
    adapted for supporting a person's spectacles.


CLS 248/903
TXT SUPPORT REINFORCEMENT:

    Collection of documents disclosing support structure wherein an unusual
    means or characteristic has been used for strengthening (i.e., reinforcing)
    the structure or a portion thereof.


CLS 248/904
TXT INDICATOR MOUNT:

    Collection of documents disclosing support structure which is particularly
    adapted for mounting a device that displays indicia relevant to a sensible
    condition, i.e., an indicator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27.1+,  for an instrument supported in a panel where the instrument may be
    an indicator.


CLS 248/905
TXT TISSUE DISPENSER MOUNT:

    Collection of documents disclosing support structure which is particularly
    adapted for attaching, mounting, or securing to an additional support means
    a temporary storage means for absorbent, nonwoven facial wipes which
    permits conspicuous access thereto.


CLS 248/906
TXT ELECTRICAL OUTLET BOX SUPPORT:

    Collection of documents disclosing support structure for a container which
    encloses, confines, or protects junctions between electrical conductors or
    connections between electrical conductors and outside devices such as
    receptacles, switches, and fixtures, e.g., an electrical outlet box or
    junction box.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27.1,   for an instrument supported in a panel where the instrument may be
    an electrical box.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 3.3+ for a receptacle of the outlet or
    junction box type having means specialized to mounting the receptacle on or
    in a panel, such as a wall, floor, ceiling, or door frame, etc.; see also
    the Search Notes of that subclass (3.3).


CLS 248/907
TXT TRASH CONTAINER SUPPORT:

    Collection of documents disclosing support structure which is particularly
    adapted for supporting a refuse receptacle (e.g., bag, can, etc.).


CLS 248/908
TXT SIMULATION OF DIVERSE DEVICE:

    Collection of documents disclosing support structure having one or more
    mechanical or structural features which cooperate with a supported article
    or with one another to emulate the appearance or operation of another
    structure or of a product of nature.

    (1)     Note.  The requirement of cooperation excludes a mere picture,
    shape, design, or plurality of contrasting colors.


CLS 248/909
TXT FRANGIBLE COMPONENT (E.G., HAVING A SCORE LINE OR GROOVE):

    Collection of documents disclosing support structure which includes one or
    more weakened regions that facilitate breaking-off a portion of the
    structure at that point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    548+,   for a support having a component which will intentionally fail
    first when the support is subjected to an unusual load or shock.


CLS 248/910
TXT WEIGHTED BASE:

    Collection of documents disclosing support structure which comprises a base
    having means for increasing the weight thereof, the means being either an
    additional means associated with the base or a particular material from
    which the base is made.


CLS 248/911
TXT PLURAL, SELECTIVELY USABLE, SUPPORT ENGAGING MEANS:

    Collection of documents disclosing support structure which includes at
    least two means for engaging a supporting structure; the means being so
    constructed or arranged that they cannot be used simultaneously.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126,    for a support which may be used alternately as either a stand or a
    bracket.

    207,    for a support in the nature of a bracket which may be secured to
    either a horizontal or vertical surface, member, etc., or which may hold an
    article in either a vertically or horizontally extending position.

    518,    for a support for a staff wherein the support includes structure
    whereby it can be supported by, alternately, plural types of supporting
    surfaces or objects.

    558,    for a support which is adapted to provide, by the rearrangement,
    substitution, or removal of one or more parts, (a) two or more different
    supports, or (b) for the support of an article in two or more different
    positions or orientations.


CLS 248/912
TXT PLURAL SELECTIVELY USABLE, ARTICLE ENGAGING MEANS:

    Collection of documents disclosing support structure which includes at
    least two means for engaging a supported article; the means being so
    constructed or arranged that they cannot be used simultaneously.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, appropriate subclasses, for a support comprising
    a plurality of distinct means for engaging a supported article wherein the
    means are usable simultaneously.


CLS 248/913
TXT TWO AXIS ARTICLE ENGAGING MEANS (E.G., X-Y DEVICE):

    Collection of documents disclosing support structure comprising an article
    engaging portion which is movable in a horizontal plane along two,
    distinct, ordinarily perpendicular, linear axes.


CLS 248/914
TXT HANDBAG HOLDER:

    Collection of documents disclosing support structure which is particularly
    adapted for supporting a purse, handbag or similar article.

    (1)     Note.  Structure of this nature typically comprises a generally
    C-shaped structure, a first end of which engages an upper edge of a
    horizontal member, the second end, comprising the article engaging portion
    of the structure, being disposed below the member and in general vertical
    alignment with the first end.


CLS 248/915
TXT WITH ORNAMENTATION:

    Collection of documents disclosing support structure which is provided with
    an element or a configuration which is intended to enhance the appearance
    of the structure, but has neither mechanical nor structural utility.


CLS 248/916
TXT AUXILIARY SUPPORT MEANS:

    Collection of documents disclosing various, miscellaneous mechanical means
    (devices, elements, techniques, etc.) that have been discovered in the art
    and are considered to be useful in the construction, installation or use of
    a support.


CLS 248/917
TXT VIDEO DISPLAY SCREEN SUPPORT:

    Collection of documents disclosing structure which supports a display
    screen on which the image is formed by electronic means (e.g., cathode ray,
    liquid crystal, light emitting diode, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176.1+  and 309+, for an article holding means of general application on a
    stand and bracket, respectively.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 28+ for similar
    subject matter combined with a horizontally supported planar surface.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, for similar subject matter combined
    with a cabinet.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, appropriate subclasses for similar
    subject matter combined with selective electrical control.


CLS 248/918
TXT Ancillary device support associated with a  video display screen:

    Collection subordinate to collection 917 wherein the documents disclose
    structure for supporting an additional device which is operatively or
    functionally associated with the video display screen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, appropriate subclasses, for a support for plural
    devices in general wherein there is no operative or functional relationship
    between the devices.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 208.1+ for an enclosed
    keyboard housing or support or a cabinet having a keyboard support.


CLS 248/919
TXT Adjustably orientable video screen support:

    Collection subordinate to collection 917 wherein the documents disclose
    structure which is adapted to permit movement of a video display screen to
    plural positions or plural orientations.


CLS 248/920
TXT Angular and linear video display screen support adjustment:

    Collection subordinate to collection 919 wherein the documents disclose
    structure for supporting a video display screen in such a fashion that it
    is angularly movable around at least one axis and linearly movable along at
    least one other axis.


CLS 248/921
TXT Plural angular:

    Collection subordinate to collection 919 wherein the documents disclose
    structure for supporting a video display screen in such fashion that it is
    angularly movable around more than one axis.


CLS 248/922
TXT Angular:

    Collection subordinate to collection 919 wherein the documents disclose
    structure for supporting a video display screen in such a fashion that it
    adjusts to more than one angular position.


CLS 248/923
TXT Tilting:

    Collection subordinate to collection 922 wherein the documents disclose
    structure for supporting a video display screen in such a fashion that the
    video display screen is adjustable to more than one position relative to a
    horizontal plane.


CLS 248/924
TXT Adjustable size:

    Collection subordinate to collection 917 wherein the documents disclose
    structure which is adapted for accommodating video display screen devices
    of various sizes.


CLS 248/925
TXT MOUNTAIN CLIMBING AIDS (E.G., PITONS, ETC.):

    Collection of documents disclosing support structure which is adapted to be
    engaged in, deployed within, or entrapped by a crack in a rock face being
    climbed or traversed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   for small brackets having an outwardly extending article support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 133+ for pole or
    strand grasping-type climbing device.


CLS 249/
TTL STATIC  MOLDS

CLS 249/
TXT CONTENTS


    I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    II.     GLOSSARY

    III.    GENERAL LINES WITH OTHER CLASSES

    1.      Classification lines in subclasses and class definition sections of
    this class

    2.      Other class lines

    IV.     INDEX TO CLASSES NOTED IN CLASS DEFINITION SECTIONS AND SUBCLASSES
    OF THIS CLASS

    V.      MISCELLANEOUS SEARCH NOTES

    I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER This is the residual
    class for a static implement, rather than a machine, having:

    1.      Structure intended for shaping fluent material only wherein the
    structure is so arranged as to define a space or cavity for retaining the
    fluent material and wherein the fluent material initially having no
    definite form conforms to the shape of the space or cavity solely by
    gravitational force on the fluent material and changes to a self-sustaining
    shape which shape is retained even after removal from the structure.

      (1)   Note.  The space or cavity may be formed by a mold part cooperating
    with existing structure, e.g., building structure or earth.


    2.      Implements of the type set forth in subparagraph 1 above disclosed
    for use with, but not so claimed, means for applying an external force to
    fluent material only for imparting a shape thereto; i.e., a female portion
    of a male-female couple.

    3.      Implements disclosed for use with the structures set forth in
    subparagraphs 1 and 2 above for shaping the interior of a hollow casting,
    or which make a hole in or through a casting upon separation therefrom.

    4.      Implements of the type set forth in subparagraphs 1 and 2 above
    combined with that of the type set forth in subparagraph 3 above.

    5.      Structure including molding surfaces intended for shaping and
    bonding a fluent material with a preform to form a composite product that
    is separable from at least one molding surface.

    6.      Essential subcombinations of the structures set forth in
    subparagraphs 1-4 above which are separable from the product.

    7.      Adjuncts, per se, disclosed for use with the structure of
    subparagraphs 1-6 above which perform some function other than shaping and
    are not classifiable elsewhere.

    II.     GLOSSARY

    ADJUNCT

    See section I-7, of the class definition.

    BARRIER

    A construction forming an extended indefinite surface preventing or
    inhibiting the passage of persons or things, e.g., wall, ceiling, floor,
    etc.

    CORE

    See section I-3, of the class definition and see subclass 175, Note 2, for
    the difference between a core and plunger.

    DYNAMIC SUBJECT MATTER

    Means for preforming a function in which motion of the means or a part
    thereof is essential to accomplishment of the function.

    STATIC MOLD

    See section I, subparagraphs 1-3, inclusive of the class definition.

    FLUENT MATERIAL

    Fluent material is (1) any material, which at the normal temperature range
    of an apparatus, lacks ability to retain a shape but instead readily
    conforms in shape to the configuration of a surface upon or within which it
    is placed or (2) any material which is handled as a mass of no
    predetermined shape and in the normal operation of a shaping device takes a
    form which in no way corresponds in general structure or dimensions to that
    of the original mass.

    IMPLEMENT

    A work containing agency which as disclosed, could be either (1)
    manipulated manually as a utensil, (2) a subcombination of a machine or
    press couple, or (3) held in place by support means for direct manual or
    machine application of work thereto.

    IN SITU

    The utilization of a mold at the job site wherein upon removal of mold
    parts the product remains in its permanent location.

    MACHINE

    Usually a power driven (e.g., motor) organization including a mechanism,
    which contains within itself its own guide for operation which once
    commenced the operator lacks control thereover except for starting and
    stopping the same.

    MODULE

    A component of building construction, usually designated by terms as,
    brick, block, tile, sheet, etc., which with other such preformed shapes
    assembled in repetitious juxtaposition define a surface of construction,
    e.g., of a wall, ceiling or floor.

    MOLD

    See section I-1, 2, of the class definition.

    MOLDING APPARATUS

    A generic term which denotes anyone of the structures set forth in section
    I, 1-6, of the class definition.

    MOLD ELEMENT

    See section I-6, of the class definition.

    MOLD WITH CORE

    See section I-4, of the class definition.

    PANEL

    A separate or distinct molding surface or a plurality of separate and
    distinct molding surfaces connected to form an integral molding surface.

    PARTITION

    Structure set forth under section I-6, of the class definition which
    divides a mold cavity into plural cavities.

    (1)     Note.  Structure set forth in this definition which forms a hole or
    recess in the product is considered a core.

    PREFORM

    Stock material that has been given a shape.

    SUSTAINER

    A rigid member or construction having a limited closed periphery which is
    (1) greatly elongated relative to any lateral dimension (2) resists
    transverse loading and (3) supports or retains other components of a
    building construction; e.g., joist, beam or column.



    III.    GENERAL LINES WITH OTHER CLASSES

    1.      Classification lines in subclasses and sections of Class 249.

    Class             Class 249 subclass or section

    52,     Static Structures
            (e.g., Buildings)       1, 213

    62,     Refrigeration   69

    72,     Metal Deforming III 2A (2) (3)

    106,    Compositions:
            Coating
            or Plastic      114

    164,    Metal Founding  201

    254,    Implements or
            Apparatus for
            Applying Pushing
            or Pulling Force        213

    269,    Work Holders    III 2 E (2)

    285,    Pipe Joints or
            Couplings       89

    403,    Joints and
            Connections     89

    404,    Road Structure,
            Process, or
            Apparatus       9

    405,    Hydraulic and
            Earth
            Engineering     10, 51

    425,    Plastic Article or      1, 52, 55
            Earthenware     III 2A (2) (3)
            Shaping or      63, 65, 66,
            Treating:       III B
            Apparatus       79, 83, 102,105,
                            112, 114, 142, 188

    433,    Dentistry       54

    2.      Other class lines:

            A.      Molds, Per Se

    (1)     Mold defined by material only

    a.      Compositions

    Patents wherein all the claims are limited to a mold mentioned by name only
    without any inclusion of structure and defined only in terms of composition
    are classified as originals in appropriate composition classes,
    particularly those listed below:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions: Coating or Plastic, subclasses 38.2+ for mold
    compositions; see search notes under subclass 38.2.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 400+ for metallic stock materials; see
    search notes under subclass 400 for line between Classes 75 and 148.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, for Alloys

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses for
    inorganic compounds, per se.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, particularly Class 523,
    subclass 109 for a composition containing a synthetic resin or natural
    rubber wherein said composition is useful in taking impressions of the
    mouth or other body members or to processes of preparing said composition.

    b.      Composite Layers

    Patents wherein all the claims are limited to a mold mentioned by name only
    without any inclusion of structure and defined only  in terms of the
    composition of the individual layers are classified in the appropriate
    composite layer class, particularly those listed below:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 133+ for processes of coating a mold.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 411.1 and 615+
    for nonmetallic and metallic stock material product in the form of a
    composite web or sheet characterized soley by the compositions of the
    layers, and which may be disclosed as a mold.

    (2)     Molds for reshaping preforms

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclasses 128+ for "forms" for shaping shoes
    or boots.

    53,     Package Making, subclass 122 for reshaping of the packaged material
    by molding.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 286+ for glass preform reshaping
    means; see search notes under subclass 286.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclass 8 for machines shaping leather
    articles by molding.

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses for a metal working
    apparatus for bending, forging or stamping, extruding, etc., of metal
    preforms; see especially subclasses 462+ for the tool (e.g., die, etc.),
    per se.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 24+ for hat blocks and forms and
    subclasses 66+ for apparel forms.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 383 for an apparatus for preform reshaping or resizing or for a
    vulcanizing means including a conforming preform support; see especially
    subclass 403 for a shaping surface, per se.

    (3)     Miscellaneous molds including dies and matrices of the mold type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclass 60 for horseshoe dies
    and tools.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 253.1+ for a metal deforming machine
    including means extruding through an orifice, subclasses 274+ for wire
    drawing apparatus and subclasses 462+ for a tool (e.g., a die, etc.), per
    se.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 349+ for sand molds and sand and metal
    molds for metal casting.

    199,    Type Casting, subclasses 55+ and 91+ for molds for forming integral
    line and separate type, respectively.

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy,  subclass 281 for
    electro-forming molds or strip plates.

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclass 70 for electroforming die.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 461 for means providing a shaping orifice disclosed for use in
    shaping nonmetals; see the search notes thereunder.

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 34+ for molds used by dentists, e.g.,
    impression trays and matrices for filling teeth.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, subclass 192 for bolt or rivet forming dies.

    D15,    Machines Not Elsewhere Specified, subclasses 135+ for molding or
    casting equipment.

    B.      Class 249 does not provide for dynamic molding apparatus and
    ordinarily does not include a static mold combined with a diverse art
    device.  Such combined subject matter is provided for in Class 425, Plastic
    Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus, generally, or
    elsewhere as shown by the notes below.  Certain specific subclasses in
    Class 249 do provide for a static mold combined with a perfecting device
    where the device is also static and integral with the mold or is essential
    thereto.  The following list exemplifies types of subject matter provided
    for in Class 425 and elsewhere:

    (1)     A mold combined with means for pressing molding material within the
    mold.

    (2)     A mold combined with a cover having projections penetrating into
    the fluent hardenable material upon movement of the cover to its operative
    position.

    (3)     A mold combined with means for moving the mold from one site to
    another.

    (4)     A mold formed of separable and unconnected parts combined with
    means to individually handle each part for assembly.

    (5)     A mold provided with a core or ejector combined with a machine-type
    means for actuating the core or ejector.

    (6)     A mold combined with means to position the work relative to the
    mold and which means functions to release the work to permit it to fall
    into the mold.

    (7)     A mold or core combined with means for creating differential
    pressure within the mold or core for dynamically shaping a molding material.

    (8)     A mold combined with means for feeding material thereto, except
    that a mold with an integral funnel element or a mold so modified to
    provide structure especially designed for supporting a feeding means, is
    classified in this class (249, subclasses 105+).

    (9)     A mold and means to vibrate the mold.

    (10)    A mold combined with means to rotate the mold for centrifugal
    casting.

    (11)    A segmented female mold or core, e.g., tunnel type, etc., and power
    means, i.e., motor, to move the segments to inoperative or operative
    position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 340+ for refrigerating means combined
    with means producing a shaped product.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclasses 207+ for gob charging means with mold, 302 for mold and means to
    rotate mold for centrifugal casting and 305+ for press molding machines.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 253.1+ for apparatus for die expressing
    metal in a plastic state.

    99,     Foods and Beverages: Apparatus, subclasses 426+ for molds combined
    with cooking means; subclasses 450.1+ for apparatus for making a laminated
    edible product (e.g., sandwich, etc.).

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses for pressures that mold.

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, subclasses 18+ for molding
    apparatus with means effecting draining of the sugar.

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 70+ for tobacco molding apparatus.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclass 288 for molding and
    burnishing means, and subclasses 382+ for foraminous molding apparatus for
    discrete articles, especially subclass 384 for apparatus for centrifugally
    forming pulp.

    164,    Metal Founding, appropriate subclasses for dynamic metal casting or
    mold making apparatus.

    199,    Type Casting, appropriate subclasses for type casting molding
    apparatus.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    an in situ type mold for forming a roadway or road portion combined with
    other means to work or treat the earth or roadway.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    appropriate subclasses for molding apparatus including a dynamic mold, or
    including a static mold and dynamic means, or combined with diverse working
    or treating means, or perfecting means other than static structure which,
    although performing a diverse function, utilizes a portion of the structure
    of a static mold, which last combination is in Class 249.  See the
    statement in the introductory paragraph of this section.



    C.      Mold including Nonmolding Means

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses for
    molds for erecting building structure wherein the mold structure
    constitutes a part of the ultimate building structure.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclass 48 for road joint
    means with transitory core, cap screed or installation means and subclasses
    87+ for expansion joint forming apparatus which is permanently embedded in
    the product.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, appropriate subclasses for molding
    surfaces which ultimately became a part of the finished structure.

    D.      Cores

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 2 for bushings or lining thimbles
    which become a permanent part of the product; see search notes thereunder.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclass 577 for void formers which become a part of the
    product and see search notes thereunder.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, appropriate subclasses for pipes and
    tubular conduits, per se, even though disclosed for forming openings or
    passages in a molded product.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 365+ and 369+ for sand cores.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclasses 124, 126, 150.1+ for cores which become a part of
    the final product when forming culverts and tunnels.

    E.      Mold Adjuncts

    (1)     Clamps and Fasteners

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., appropriate subclasses for
    fasteners for connecting two parts of an article to each other.

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses for "clamp" means, per se, to
    grasp or draw portions of a mold either together or unto a base or support;
    see the class definition of Class 269, I, third paragraph.

    (2)     Supports

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports: Racks, appropriate subclasses for supports designed to
    support molds.

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 351+ for
    mold supports.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    appropriate subclasses for implements for applying a push or a pull
    directly to a mold part to exert pressure thereon; see particularly
    subclasses 29+ and 104 for apparatus or implements which are adapted to be
    used with, but do not form a component or remain with the mold forms; see
    subclass 93 for pneumatic jacks for raising concrete forms.

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses for devices intended to
    support a work piece during a work treating operation, except that where
    part of the work holder also functions to confine molding material, the
    device is classified in Class 249.

    IV.     INDEX TO CLASSES NOTED IN CLASS DEFINITION SECTIONS AND SUBCLASSES
    OF THIS CLASS

    CLASS   CLASS 249 SECTION       SUBCLASS



    12,     Boot and
    Shoe Making     III 2A(2)

    16,     Miscellaneous
    Hardware        III 2D

    24,     Buckles,
    Buttons,
    Clasps,
    etc.            III 2E(1)       173

    29,     Metal
    Working III 2A(1)b,V3           57,60,116

    44,     Fuel and Related
    Compositions    V-1

    52,     Static Struc-
    tures (e.g.,
    Buildings)      III2C,III 2D    1,2,13,14,16,
                    V4      17,18,26,27,
                            28,30,33,34,
                            35,37,38,39,
                            42,48,50,51,
                            52,85,98,99,
                            101,143,144,
                            190,213,214,
                            215,216

    53,     Package
    Making  III 2A(2)

    59,     Chain, Staple,
    and Horse-
    shoe Making     III 2A(3)        57

    62,     Refrigeration   III 2B  69,79

    63,     Jewelry                 57

    65,     Glass Manu-
    facturing       III 2A(2)       66,83,115,
                    III 2B          137,175

    69,     Leather Manu-
    factures        III 2A(2)

    72,     Metal Defor-
    ming            III 2A(2) (3)
                    III B

    99,     Foods and
    Beverages:
    Apparatus,      III 2B

    100,    Presses III 2B

    101,    Printing                103

    104,    Railways                86

    106,    Compositions:
    Coating or
    Plastic III 2A(1)       114,115,134,

    116,    Signals and
    Indicators              53

    127,    Sugar, Starch,
    and Carbohy-
    drates  III 2B

    131,    Tobacco III 2B

    138,    Pipes and
    Tubular
    Conduits        III 2D  201

    141,    Fluent Material
    Handling, With
    Receiver or Re-
    ceiver Coacting
    Means   V4      105,108,197

    148,    Metal Treat-    III 2A(1)a,
    ment

    149,    Explosive and
    Thermic Com-
    positions or
    Charges VI

    152,    Resilient Tires
    and Wheels                                      56

    156,    Adhesive Bond-
    ing and Miscel-
    laneous Chemi-
    cal Manufacture V3                              414+

    162,    Paper Making
    and Fiber
    Liberation      III 2B  66,113,137

    164,    Metal Found
    ing             III 2A(3),
                    III 2B,
                    III 2D, V3       137,175,187,
                            201,205

    188,    Brakes                                          87

    199,    Type Casting    III 2A(3),              79,114,117
                    III 2B          119,136,160

    202,    Distillation:
    Apparatus                82

    204,    Chemistry:
    Electrical
    and Wave
    Energy  III 2A(3)

    206,    Special
    Receptacle
    or Package      V4

    210,    Liguid Puri-
    fication or
    Separation                      197

    211,    Supports:
    Racks   III 2E(2)

    217,    Wooden
    Receptacles     V4

    220,    Receptacles     V4                      79,121,126,
                            204

    223,    Apparel
    Apparatus       III 2A(2)

    229,    Envelopes,
    Wrappers, and
    Paperboard
    Boxes   V4

    238,    Railways: Sur-
    face Track                                      86

    248,    Supports        III 2E(2)

    254,    Implements or
    Apparatus for
    Applying Push-
    ing or Pulling
    Force   III2E(2)        213

    256,    Fences                  143

    260,    Chemistry of
    Carbon
    Compounds       III 2A(1)a

    264,    Plastic and
    Nonmetallic
    Article Shap-
    ing or Treat-
    ing:  Processes         V2      13,15,17,20,
                            23,48,51,54,
                            58,61,78,83,
                            115,119,134,
                            137

    269,    Work Holders            III 2E(1),
                    III 2E(2)

    277, Seal for a Joint or Juncture       89

    285,    Pipe Joints or
    Couplings                41,89,90,
                            100,152

    295,    Railway Wheels
    and Axles               56

    301,    Land Vehicles:
    Wheels and
    Axles            56

    403,    Joints and
    Connections                                     6,89

    404,    Road Structure,
    Process, or
    Apparatus       III 1
                    III 2 B         2,8,9,30
                    III 2 C

    405,    Hydraulic and
    Earth Engineer-
    ing             III 2C,III2D    10,11,15,51,
                            175

    411,    Expanded,
    Threaded,
    Driven,
    Headed,
    Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded
    Fastener                                        213

    420,    Alloys or
    Metallic
    Compositions

    423,    Chemistry of
    Inorganic
    Compounds,      III 2 A (1) a

    427,    Coating Proc-
    esses   III 2A (1) b                            114

    428,    Stock Mate-
    rail or Miscel-
    laneous Articles        III 2A (1) b                    114

    454,    Ventilation                     17

    470,    Threaded,
    Headed
    Fastener, or
    Washer Making:
    Process and
    Apparatus       III 2A(3)

    520,    Synthetic       III 2 (A)
    Resins or
    Natural
    Rubbers

    D15,    Machines        III 2A (3)
    Not Else-
    Where Specified



    V.      MISCELLANEOUS SEARCH NOTES

    1.      Products or compositions disclosed for use with molds to control
    heating

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclasses 250+ for a fuel
    composition intended to generate heat without light.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, subclasses 37+ for
    "Thermite-" type compositions having utility for controlling the fluidity
    of the melt.

    2.      Processes of Molding

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses for processes of molding plastic material and
    preform shaping; see section II (i) of the class definition of Class 264,
    for an extended field of search for processes of molding.

    3.      Processes and Apparatus for Making Molds

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 592+ for mechanical processes and
    subclasses 700+ for apparatus for assembling and disassembling molds or
    forms; see the "SEARCH CLASS" under subclass 400.1.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    60+ for processes and subclasses 349+ for apparatus for manufacturing molds
    including a surface bonding operation; see the definitions of Class 156,
    for the line between the class (156) and Class 29.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 6+ for processes of forming a shaping
    surface and subclasses 159+ for corresponding apparatus.

    4.      Mold Like Apparatus Classified Elsewhere

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses, for
    building structure disclosed for receiving molding material.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 333+ for funnel type filling means with a coacting receiver
    other than a mold receiver.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, appropriate subclasses, for a
    container particularly configured to hold a specific article or material
    including an article (s) or material (s) put up as a mercantile unit.  See
    subclasses 524.1+ for a chemical package.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, appropriate subclasses, for bottle, jar, or
    jug-like receptacles.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, appropriate subclasses, for wood-like
    receptacles.

    220,    Receptacles, appropriate subclasses, for rigid-like receptacles,
    e.g., metal, concrete, etc.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, appropriate subclasses,
    for paper-like receptacles.


CLS 249/1
TXT Apparatus under sections I, I-1, I-2, I-4, and I-5 of the class definition
    intended for use with either existing structure or the earth for forming an
    on the job site construction engineering type product or a building
    structure.

    (1)     Note.  The earth or existing structure may constitute a confining
    part of the mold, e.g., a form panel together with the earth or other
    structure constituting the mold.

    (2)     Note.  The molds of this and indented subclasses are also referred
    to as forms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144+,   for module forming molds.

    175+,   for core, per se.

    187.1,  for mold elements and form panels, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 169.1+ for formed
    building structures, especially building structures having terranean
    features. The line between Classes 52 and 249 is as follows:  Class 52
    takes apparatus for casting settable hydraulic or ceramic materials in
    which the apparatus becomes a permanent part of the finished product.
    Class 249 takes molding apparatus which is readily removed from the
    finished product.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 59 for a dynamic molding apparatus utilizing a subterranean
    formation (e.g., ditch, natural cavity, etc.) as a shaping surface.


CLS 249/2
TXT Apparatus under subclass 1 for forming in situ a road, sidewalk or curb.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189+,   for form panel, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 174+ for formed
    structures having traffic guiding feature.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, appropriate subclasses, for
    the formed product.


CLS 249/3
TXT Apparatus under subclass 2 including a stake, or means for mounting a
    stake, functioning to retain the mold in position.


CLS 249/4
TXT Apparatus under subclass 3 having opposed, spaced structural walls defining
    an area for receiving moldable material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for a similar type mold in which the earth functions as one wall of
    the mold.

    33+,    for similar structure for forming a planar wall.


CLS 249/5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 4 including a spacer to maintain the form walls
    spaced and which spacer has a positive interrelationship with at least one
    stake.


CLS 249/6
TXT Apparatus under subclass 3 comprising means for aligning adjacent forms
    end-to-end, the means being in addition to stake or stake mounting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    192+,   for form panels with means to connect the same.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 13+ for connections between
    members in general provided with means for aligning the members prior to
    joining.


CLS 249/7
TXT Apparatus under subclass 3 wherein the stake mounting means includes a
    removable wedge engaging the stake.


CLS 249/8
TXT Apparatus under subclass 2 comprising three spaced substantially parallel
    molding surfaces for containing the molding material for forming an
    integral roadway curb and gutter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for similar structure for making steps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 2+ and 7+ for the
    formed product.


CLS 249/9
TXT Apparatus under subclass 2 comprising joint forming means, or joint forming
    adjuncts, per se, for forming a joint in a road or sidewalk.

    (1)     Note.  The means may be a division plate, or core or an adjunct,
    per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98+,    for a mold forming a product having a joint or coupling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 87+ for apparatus
    to install or form joint in a road or pavement. The line between Classes
    404 and 249 is as follows:  Class 404 takes joint forming apparatus which
    is disclosed as (1) remaining embedded in the product (2) removed from the
    product when the product is in a fluent state and the space occupied by the
    apparatus close, up, and (3) the dual disclosure of either remaining
    embedded in, or removed from the product leaving a blank space.  Class 249
    takes a joint forming molding device or adjuncts which are disclosed as
    being removed from the product leaving a blank space in the product.


CLS 249/10
TXT Apparatus under subclass 1 for forming a structure in situ for controlling
    water in an open channel, reservoir or for controlling earth having a
    tendency to flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for molds forming cisterns, water tanks, etc., casted in situ and
    144+, wherein molds are provided for forming the structures, supra and
    similar types of a structure not disclosed as being casted in situ.

    33+,    for molds forming a wall of a building having opposed spaced panels.

    51,     for molds forming piles or post in situ.

    189,    for form panels, per se, or a form panel with a tie rod.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, appropriate subclasses for formed
    structures.  Class 405 will take molding structures for forming hardenable
    fluent material wherein the molding structure becomes a permanent part of
    the formed structure.


CLS 249/11
TXT Apparatus under subclass 10 comprising means for forming a culvert,
    waterway, pipe or tunnel at the job site.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175+,   for a core, per se, for forming the structures, supra.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 105 for a pipe or tubular
    conduit including a trench in which the pipe is received.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, appropriate subclasses for the
    formed product.


CLS 249/12
TXT Apparatus under subclass 11 for forming a culvert with angular divergent
    walls.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are molding devices for making a header
    (divergent walls) on a preformed culvert.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 125 for a culvert with
    header wall structure.


CLS 249/13
TXT Apparatus under subclass 1 for forming a building or a component part
    thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The building structure may be, but need not be, disclosed as
    being casted in situ.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85      and 144+, for molds for forming modules.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses, for
    formed building structures.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 31+ for processes of forming structural installations in situ.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 59 for means continuously casting a building wall comprising a
    rotating, boom mounted material depositing and forming means; and
    subclasses 63+ for a building form with means for repositioning it for
    progressive molding.


CLS 249/14
TXT Apparatus under subclass 13 for forming stairs.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are means to form a single step, and
    stairway sidewalls or supports.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for curb making molding apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 182+ for the formed
    structures.


CLS 249/15
TXT Apparatus under subclass 13 for forming a facing on the product by either
    (1) molding the product and the facing simultaneously, or (2) molding a
    facing on an existing structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for molds for molding a protective facing on a pile.

    16,     for molds for forming barrier with simulated plural modules.

    87,     for molds for forming a lining on a machine type-bearing or
    friction surface.

    90,     for molds for uniting and placing a coating around a pipe or rod.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 34 for process of sequentially molding in situ different portions
    or layers on a unitary structural installation.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 216 for a method or
    apparatus for coating a marine pile or other structure.


CLS 249/16
TXT Apparatus under subclass 13 for forming simulated plural modules on a
    barrier.

    (1)     Note.  An example of the above is a wall having simulated brick or
    stone, etc., on the face thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 311.1+ for a formed
    structure having an ornamental facing feature.


CLS 249/17
TXT Apparatus under subclass 13 for forming a chimney.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144+,   for container like mold for conduit-type product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 218 for formed flue
    with gaseous fluid directing feature.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 32 for process of forming a vertical cylindrical structure.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 3+ for formed chimneys of general utility.


CLS 249/18
TXT Apparatus under subclass 13 for forming either a barrier or sustainer.

    (1)     Note.  Found herein are supports in combination with an
    organization of molding parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 720.1+ for a formed
    sustainer.


CLS 249/19
TXT Apparatus under subclass 18 having means to affix said apparatus to a
    building element preform.  The affixing means need not be structure other
    than the molding apparatus itself.

    (1)     Note.  Mere reinforcement is not considered existing structure.

    (2)     Note.  The preform may remain part of the building structure, e.g.,
    glass block.

    (3)     Note.  A patent is cross-referenced here wherein the preform is a
    utility fixture, e.g., drain pipe, or some other major permanent building
    structure, etc., even though the connecting feature with the molding
    apparatus is not claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for molding apparatus having means to connect to building structure
    for veneering the same.

    34,     for molding apparatus for forming a barrier on a footing.


CLS 249/20
TXT Apparatus under subclass 19 having means cooperating with a portion of the
    product previously formed for supporting the mold for sequentially molding
    in successive courses.

    (1)     Note.  A patent to be included in this and indented subclasses must
    disclose progressive molding and claim the features of the apparatus which
    make it capable of preforming the function.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 33 for process of forming a structural installation in situ by
    sequentially molding different portions on a structure.


CLS 249/21
TXT Apparatus under subclass 20 wherein the mold has means to close at least
    one of its ends.


CLS 249/22
TXT Apparatus under subclass 20 having means progressively forming (1) a hollow
    wall having spaced vertical recesses, or (2) spaced individual parallel
    walls.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36+,    for molding apparatus to form either a hollow wall, or spaced
    parallel walls.


CLS 249/23
TXT Apparatus under subclass 19 having means for affixing the mold to a flange
    of a structural beam to support the mold.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 35 for process of forming a structural installation in situ by
    uniting preform member with molding material.


CLS 249/24
TXT Apparatus under subclass 23 wherein either the mold, or the mold support is
    adjustable.


CLS 249/25
TXT Apparatus under subclass 23 wherein a latch or clamp means is movable into
    and from engagement with the flange of a structural beam for clamping or
    releasing a mold therewith.


CLS 249/26
TXT Apparatus under subclass 18 comprising means for forming either plural
    barriers, or plural sustainers or a barrier and a sustainer.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of:  Plural barriers are plural floors or walls;
    plural sustainers - plural beams or columns; and barrier and sustainer - a
    floor and column or a wall and a beam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for molding apparatus for forming spaced parallel walls which
    function as a single wall having a hollow space.

    48,     for molding apparatus for forming a column, per se.

    50,     for molding apparatus for forming a beam, girder or joist, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 234+ for formed
    plural barriers or a barrier and a sustainer, subclasses 319+ for a formed
    barrier and sustainer and subclass 742.1+ for plural sustainers.


CLS 249/27
TXT Apparatus under subclass 26 comprising means for forming a monolithic
    building structure consisting of at least two diverse building structures.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of intersecting barriers or sustainers are wall and
    sill, wall and cornice, floor with joists, beam and column, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 261+ for plural
    intersecting barriers, and a barrier and sustainers, and subclasses 272+
    for intersecting barrier construction.


CLS 249/28
TXT Apparatus under subclass 26 comprising means for forming a horizontally
    disposed confining wall combined with horizontal perpendicular projecting
    spaced beams, girders or joists.

    (1)     Note.  Patents claiming a plurality of spaced cores are classified
    in this class, subclass 176.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 319+ for a
    cast-in-situ concrete barrier with laterally projecting rib type sustainer.


CLS 249/29
TXT Apparatus under subclass 28 comprising means for mechanically changing the
    dimensions of the joist mold to form a joist of a different size.


CLS 249/30
TXT Apparatus under subclass 28 comprising (1) a product reinforcing means, or
    (2) a reinforcing means and its support, or (3) a reinforcing support
    means, per se, combined with the mold.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 677+ for embedded
    reinforcing spacer-positioners.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclass 70 for a pavement
    combined with reinforced structure.


CLS 249/31
TXT Apparatus under subclass 28 wherein the mold is partially or totally
    composed of U-shaped or dome-shaped cores made in a single piece for
    forming a floor or ceiling and a joist.

    (1)     Note.  The cores must be a unitary structure before and after use.


CLS 249/32
TXT Apparatus under subclass 31 wherein the cores have at least two flanged
    abutting edges which form the bottom and side surfaces of the joist.


CLS 249/33
TXT Apparatus under subclass 18 comprising molding apparatus having opposed
    spaced panels defining a molding area for forming a vertical planar wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for similar molding apparatus for forming a road or sidewalk.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 295 for a wall having
    an embedded projecting tie.


CLS 249/34
TXT Apparatus under subclass 33 comprising means for forming (1) a wall on a
    foundation, or (2) a wall and a foundation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 274 for intersecting
    barriers and a foundation, subclasses 292+ for a formed foundation and
    especially subclasses 293.1+ for a formed foundation and wall.


CLS 249/35
TXT Apparatus under subclass 33 wherein the panel has means located thereon, or
    the panel is shaped in such a manner as to impart a permanent regular or
    irregular depression in either the exposed or interior major surface of the
    wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for molding apparatus for forming a wall having an opening through
    its major face.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 233 and 311.1+ for
    formed log wall type construction and a formed structure having an
    ornamental feature.


CLS 249/36
TXT Apparatus under subclass 33 for forming (1) a hollow wall, or (2) spaced
    parallel walls.

    (1)     Note.  The spaced parallel walls function as a single hollow wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for a mold for forming the same structure by a progressive molding
    operation.

    26,     for a mold for forming plural barriers.


CLS 249/37
TXT Apparatus under subclass 36 having means to form vertical shafts in a wall.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 302.1+, especially
    subclass 302.2 for formed structures having passages therein.


CLS 249/38
TXT Apparatus under subclass 36 for forming plural opposed walls having a tie
    means to support, reinforce or maintain the walls in a spaced relationship.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85,     for molding apparatus for embedding tie spacing means in a
    multipart module, e.g., building block.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 378+ and 383 for a
    formed parallel structure connected by a tie and subclasses 698+ for an
    anchor or tie, per se; see search notes.


CLS 249/39
TXT Apparatus under subclass 33 having means extending through or abutting
    against at least one panel, or the panel is so shaped to form an opening
    extending through the major face of the molded structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 204.1+ for a formed
    barrier having a portal opening.


CLS 249/40
TXT Apparatus under subclass 33 having means spacing opposed panels, said means
    extending between and through said panels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    190,    for a form panel with tie means.

    213,    for tie structure, per se.


CLS 249/41
TXT Apparatus under subclass 40 wherein the spacing means is provided with a
    fragile area to facilitate breaking to expedite disassembly of the panels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    214,    for tie rod structure, per se, having a weakened area.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 3+ for a pipe coupling
    including a frangible element, and see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 249/42
TXT Apparatus under subclass 40 wherein the spacing means comprise plural screw
    threaded fasteners, such having plural threads, with a threaded portion
    thereof located between the panels.

    (1)     Note.  An example of this structure is a "she-bolt".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for panels having plural adjoining sections and means to secure
    panels together.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 713 for an anchor or
    tie composed of separably connected sections.


CLS 249/43
TXT Apparatus under subclass 40 wherein the spacing means has a hollow part
    engaging the panels and another part passing through said hollow section.


CLS 249/44
TXT Apparatus under subclass 40 comprising plural abutting panel sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    190,    for this structure wherein only one side of the opposed spaced
    panels is claimed.

    192+,   for form panel having means to connect plural panel sections.


CLS 249/45
TXT Apparatus under subclass 44 having means cooperating with the panel spacing
    means for fastening plural adjoining panel sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191,    for this structure wherein only one side of the opposed spaced
    panels is claimed.


CLS 249/46
TXT Apparatus under subclass 40 having wedge means coacting with the spacing
    means for holding the panels in operative relation.


CLS 249/47
TXT Apparatus under subclass 33 having means for fastening abutting portions of
    panels in an edgewise relation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for panel structure having means to align panels end-to-end.

    44,     for opposed panels having adjoining sections and connected by a tie.


CLS 249/48
TXT Apparatus under subclass 18 for forming an elongated, vertical sustainer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143,    for molding apparatus for forming fence post.

    144,    for molding apparatus for forming conduit-type structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 720+ for a formed
    elongated rigid shaft.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 32 for the process of forming a vertical-cylindrical structure.


CLS 249/49
TXT Apparatus under subclass 48 comprising parallel, contiguous molding
    surfaces overlapping each other and are slidably adjustable for increasing
    or decreasing the size of the product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155,    for adjustable container type molds.

    178+,   for cores which are inherently adjustable.


CLS 249/50
TXT Apparatus under subclass 18 comprising means for forming an elongated rigid
    sustainer of great length compared to its width and depth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 720+ for a formed
    elongated rigid shaft.


CLS 249/51
TXT Apparatus under subclass 1 for forming in situ an elongated rigid
    construction having a limited closed peripheral surface and which is
    greatly elongated relative to any internal dimension.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for mold for molding a protective coating on a pile.

    143,    for molds for forming a fence post.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 155+ for a formed
    structure having a feature facilitating the insertion of said structure
    into the earth and subclasses 720.1+ for a formed elongated rigid shaft.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 32 for a process of forming vertical-cylindrical structure in situ.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 233+ for methods and
    apparatus for casting a pile in situ; and subclass 257 for the pile, per se.

    Class 405 will take a mold structure specifically designed to be driven in
    the earth even though the mold structure is removed from the finished
    product, e.g., a mold for forming a pile having a case hardened pointed
    bottom for driving the same in the ground.


CLS 249/52
TXT Molding apparatus under the class definition having a static means for
    scoring the product concurrent with the molding operation for facilitating
    the breaking or cutting the molded product.

    (1)     Note.  For a patent to be classified herein there must be a
    disclosure of the molding of a single product having score lines which are
    to be used to break or cut said product into a plurality of parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119+,   for molding apparatus for forming plural articles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 98+ for a formed
    building structure with a frangible section or means.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 289+ for a preform severing means combined with shaping or
    reshaping apparatus for nonmetals, and subclass 385 for a surface
    deformation means for a nonmetal preform.


CLS 249/53
TXT Molding apparatus under the class definition having an indicating means on
    the molding apparatus which facilitates the location of the parts of the
    molding apparatus or some condition in the molding apparatus during the
    molding operation.

    (1)     Note.  See class definition section III 2B for search notes for
    dynamic and combined features.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 451, 458, 463, 482, and 495 for
    rulers and 365+ for level or plumb.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 200+ for indicators, per se.


CLS 249/54
TXT Molding apparatus under the class definition having means for forming a
    substitute for a missing tooth or teeth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for molding apparatus having shape to simulate a product of nature.

    61,     for molding apparatus having a destructible feature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 16+ for processes of forming a dental prosthesis.

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 34+ for impressions trays and molds used by a
    dentist in a patient's mouth.  Class 249 takes static dental molding
    apparatus of the type used by the dental technician.


CLS 249/55
TXT Molding apparatus under the class definition wherein the molding apparatus
    has a shape which produces a facsimile of an article normally occurring in
    nature.

    (1)     Note.  For a patent to come here as an original, the surface which
    produces the product must be claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for molding apparatus for forming teeth and related structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 222 for process with step of making a mold or mold shaping, per
    se, wherein a body area is used as an impression pattern.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 2 for dynamic molding apparatus utilizing an an-atomical body as a
    shaping surface.


CLS 249/56
TXT Molding apparatus under the class definition for forming a wheel for a
    vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is molding apparatus for forming component
    parts of a wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclasses 1+ for spring wheels.

    295,    Railway Wheels and Axles, appropriate subclasses, for railway
    wheels.

    301,    Land Vehicles: Wheels and Axles, appropriate subclasses, for land
    vehicle wheels.


CLS 249/57
TXT Molding apparatus under the class definition for forming a ring type
    product.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of a ring type product are: a finger ring, a
    packing ring, chain links, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 8 for machines for forming rings.

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclasses 1+ for chain making
    apparatus and subclasses 78+ for chains.

    63,     Jewelry, subclasses 15+ for a formed finger ring.


CLS 249/58
TXT Molding apparatus under the class definition for forming a container type
    product having a portion performing a function other than containing
    material.


CLS 249/59
TXT Molding apparatus under the class definition for forming a spirally shaped
    product or a product with fastening threads.


CLS 249/60
TXT Molding apparatus under the class definition for forming a grid or lattice
    type product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 2 for machine and apparatus for making
    metallic grids for electric batteries.


CLS 249/61
TXT Molding apparatus under the class definition wherein either all or a
    portion of the molding apparatus is composed of material which is
    chemically or physically altered during the molding operation, or after the
    molding operation, for facilitating the separation of the product from said
    molding apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for dental type molding apparatus which is usually destructible.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 221 for process having a step of mold making or mold shaping, per
    se, wherein the pattern or mold is destroyed.


CLS 249/62
TXT Apparatus under subclass 61 wherein a portion of or all of the molding
    apparatus is destroyed by either heating or fusing.


CLS 249/63
TXT Molding apparatus under the class definition consisting of a mold and a
    core with means to remove the core from the mold to facilitate removal of
    the product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66.1,   for molding apparatus with means to apply force to the product to
    remove or release product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 577 for a press molding machine including a female mold and means
    to insert or remove a core and subclass 468 for a molding machine
    subcombination comprising a core and dynamic positioning means therefore.


CLS 249/64
TXT Apparatus under subclass 63 wherein the mold is provided with more than one
    core and with means to remove the same.


CLS 249/65
TXT Molding apparatus under the class definition wherein the molding apparatus
    is inflatable or has an inflatable element which is deflated to facilitate
    the removal of the molding apparatus or the element from the product, or
    the product from the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66.1,   for molding including means to apply force to remove or release
    product from the mold.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 389+ for a preform reshaping apparatus having a fluid pressure
    actuated flexible diaphragm and subclass 417 for an expansible shaping
    member in a press forming machine.


CLS 249/66.1
TXT INCLUDING MEANS TO APPLY FORCE TO REMOVE OR RELEASE PRODUCT FROM MOLD:

    Mold under section I-1 and I-2 of the class definition having means
    functionally integral therewith for applying force to the product to
    release or expel it from said mold.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     for mold having core and means to remove core.

    118     and 161+, for molding apparatus having means to move a mold part
    for exposing product for removal.

    127,    for flexible molding apparatus forming plural articles.

    136,    for a mold having a bottom movable through upstanding mold walls.

    137,    for a mold having means enabling rotation of said apparatus.

    183,    for a core made of resilient material capable of flexure to
    facilitate product removal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 260 for a glass working machine
    having means above the mold to take out or transfer the product.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclass 410 for pulp molding
    apparatus with article ejecting means.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 436+ for means to release or remove a product from a shaping
    surface in dynamic molding apparatus.


CLS 249/67
TXT Apparatus under subclass 66.1 wherein a pin or sleeve means contacts the
    product to remove or release said product from the mold.


CLS 249/68
TXT Apparatus under subclass 67 having means to actuate either the pin or
    sleeve means or both.


CLS 249/69
TXT Apparatus under subclass 66.1 comprising a shallow mold having grid-type
    partitions combined with mechanical means for releasing the grid or
    products.

    (1)     Note. Included herein are means adapted to receive a mechanical
    force applying means.

    (2)     Note.  If the force applying means is a machine or a part of the
    refrigeration apparatus search Class 62, Refrigeration, appropriate
    subclasses for the combination.


CLS 249/70
TXT Apparatus under subclass 69 wherein the force applying means is mounted on
    or is integral with the tray-like mold.


CLS 249/71
TXT Apparatus under subclass 69 wherein the force applying means is mounted on
    or is integral with the grid structure.


CLS 249/72
TXT Apparatus under subclass 71 having a central elongated grid member composed
    of (1) plural superimposed parts, or (2) a member coextensive with the grid
    member; the structures of (1) and (2) having a differential force applied
    thereto by the force applying means.


CLS 249/73
TXT Apparatus under subclass 71 wherein plural levers are movably mounted on
    the grid structure.


CLS 249/74
TXT Apparatus under subclass 66.1 having means to move the mold bottom through
    upstanding mold walls.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are means for moving mold while the bottom
    remains in place.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136,    for mold bottom adapted for movement through upstanding walls.


CLS 249/75
TXT Apparatus under subclass 74 wherein a bell-crank type lever arrangement
    applies force to move the mold bottom.


CLS 249/76
TXT Apparatus under subclass 74 wherein the means which moves the mold(s)
    bottom removes or releases plural products.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119+,   for container-type plural article forming mold, or molds with
    community feature.


CLS 249/77
TXT Apparatus under subclass 66.1, having (a) means passing between the product
    and the molding surface to separate the product, or (b) means facilitating
    the use of an implement for the same purpose.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a stationary scraper wherein the molding
    surface moves.


CLS 249/78
TXT Molding apparatus under class definition having an electric heating element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    subclasses 405+ for processes of article shaping by direct application of
    electrical or wave energy to work and especially subclasses 402+ for
    processes using direct application of electrical or wave energy to heat the
    mold.


CLS 249/79
TXT Molding apparatus under the class definition wherein the molding apparatus
    has a hollow portion for confining a heat exchange medium within its
    surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111,    for molding apparatus having a chill or heat conductor for
    differential heating of a portion of the product.

    133,    for molding apparatus for forming plural articles constructed to
    include an ambient air space.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 356 for mold with means to absorb heat.

    199,    Type Casting, subclass 56 for type casting mold having a cooling
    device.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 415+ for spaced wall or jacketed receptacle.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    appropriate subclasses selected in the basis of the type of molding
    apparatus for a combustion of heating or cooling means with dynamic molding
    apparatus; see subclass 384 for a preform reshaping or vulcanizing
    apparatus having both heating and cooling means and subclass 406 for a
    press shaping apparatus having both heating or cooling means.


CLS 249/80
TXT Apparatus under subclass 79 wherein the molding apparatus is (1) composed
    of a named material, or (2) defined by the characteristics of the material
    which perfects the heat exchange relation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114.1   and 134+, for molding apparatus of particular material.


CLS 249/81
TXT Apparatus under subclass 79 wherein the molding apparatus is composed of
    (1) plural cavities, or (2) plural molds with a community feature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    for plural article forming molds.


CLS 249/82
TXT Molding apparatus under the class definition wherein means is provided to
    adjust the volume of the apparatus during the molding operation to
    compensate for the expansion or contraction of either the product or the
    molding apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    for molding apparatus having a reservoir proving a compensating
    means for the contraction of the product.

    134+,   for molding apparatus wherein expansion or contraction is
    compensated for by the material from which the mold is constructed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 268 for an element having an
    expansion provision.


CLS 249/83
TXT Molding apparatus under section I-5 of the class definition for uniting a
    preform with a plastic material during the molding operation to form a
    composite product.

    (1)     Note.  To be included in this and indented subclasses the preform
    must be disclosed as a desired element of the product. Patents from
    subclasses 1+ are ordinarily not cross-referenced here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13+,    for uniting a preform with moldable material for forming a building
    structure.

    54,     for uniting of a preform of a dental product to a plastic material.

    56,     for molding apparatus for uniting a preform with a plastic material
    to form to a vehicular wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 47+ and 156 for process and
    apparatus of fusion bonding glass to a preform by a molding operation.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 229 for a process of pre-stressing a solid body and uniting it
    with a moldable material; subclasses 241+ for a process of forming a
    composite article and subclasses 259+ for process of shaping material and
    uniting it to a preform.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 110+ for composite article molding apparatus including means to
    feed or support a preform within a molding cavity.


CLS 249/84
TXT Apparatus under subclass 83 having a preform which functions as a partition
    between fluent hardenable materials.


CLS 249/85
TXT Apparatus under subclass 83 having a preform extending in plural mold
    cavities and supported by a partition.

    (1)     Note.  The article produced by this apparatus is considered a
    single block having a continuous air space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22      and 38, for structure forming spaced parallel walls.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 428 for formed
    modules connected by a separable tie.


CLS 249/86
TXT Apparatus under subclass 83 having means for uniting preformed rails (or
    parts thereof), of the railway type, to each other by use of a fluent
    hardenable material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, appropriate subclasses, for rail structure.

    238,    Railways:  Surface Track, subclass 14.15 for molded joint between
    rail-bond and the base or flange portion of a rail.


CLS 249/87
TXT Apparatus under subclass 83 having means for uniting a fluent hardenable
    material to a preformed machine wearing surface either to renew an old
    surface, or to form a new product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 255+ for a cast-metal brake matrix.


CLS 249/88
TXT Apparatus under subclass 87 having means (1) to adjust the size or
    configuration of the product of (2) to center the preform relative to the
    molding area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155+,   for container type molding device having adjustable feature.


CLS 249/89
TXT Apparatus under subclass 83 having means for joining the bell portion of a
    pipe to the spigot section of another pipe.

    (1)     Note.  Classes 285, Pipe Joints or Couplings and 403, Joints and
    Connections will take a mold or portion thereof disclosed as forming a
    joint and remaining a part of the joint.  Class 249, Static Molds, will
    take a mold or portion thereof disclosed as forming a joint but is removed
    from the joint after use.  In the case of dual disclosure, i.e., the mold
    may remain with or be removed from Class 285 is considered residual.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 602+ for a static, contact seal intended for use on a
    pipe, conduit, or cable.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 285.1+ for a formed molded
    joint.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 265+ for two members connected
    by a molded joint.


CLS 249/90
TXT Apparatus under subclass 83 wherein the molding apparatus completely
    surrounds and is supported by the outer periphery of a preform, e.g., pipe
    or rod to (1) coat the preform, or (2) unite two preforms in abutting
    relation.

    (1)     Note.  The preform must pass through the mold cavity.

    (2)     Note.  See search notes under subclass 89 for additional search.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for molding apparatus for coating piles in situ.


CLS 249/91
TXT Apparatus under subclass 83 having means other than the mold (or core)
    surface for supporting the preform during the molding operation.

    (1)     Note.  A mere clamp, i.e., a device integral with or abutting a
    molding surfacing which aids in supporting the preform, is not considered
    to be "other" support means.

    (2)     Note.  A separate and distinct means employed to support a preform
    in a particular location within the mold cavity where said means becomes a
    part of the molded product is considered to be within the scope of the
    expression "other" and is classified herein, e.g., pins for mounting
    diamonds for forming a saw having diamond teeth.


CLS 249/92
TXT Apparatus under subclass 91 wherein an edible product is produced.


CLS 249/93
TXT Apparatus under subclass 91 having preform support means located outside of
    the mold cavity.


CLS 249/94
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93 wherein the preform is supported by a hole or
    recess in the mold wall in addition to the preform support means located
    outside of the mold cavity.


CLS 249/95
TXT Apparatus under subclass 83 wherein the preform is supported in uniting
    relationship with the molding material by the clamping relation of the
    parts of split mold.

    (1)     Note.  Both clamping elements of the mold must have a molding
    surface to be classified herein.


CLS 249/96
TXT Apparatus under subclass 83 wherein the preform is held in place or
    supported in the mold cavity by a hole or recess in the mold wall.


CLS 249/97
TXT Apparatus under subclass 96 wherein the hole which supports the preform
    extends through the mold wall.


CLS 249/98
TXT Molding apparatus under the class definition having means to form a portion
    on the face of the product shaped to interconnect with a face portion of a
    conforming and mating shape in another like product to form a joint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for molding apparatus for forming an expansion joint in a road,
    pacement or curb.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 519+ for formed
    building structures having interfitted facings.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 108 for molding apparatus arranged for rod end to rod end splicing
    or joining.


CLS 249/99
TXT Apparatus under subclass 98 having means to form a product having a facing
    with (1) opposite surfaces of the edge portions adapted to contact a like
    product in overlapping relationship, (2) identical facings in an
    alternating reversing relationship, or (3) the facings having keyways.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 519+, 574, 575, and
    578+ for modules made by molding apparatus of the above type.


CLS 249/100
TXT Apparatus under subclass 99 having means for forming joint connecting
    structure on a tubular product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 328+ for pipe joints or
    couplings with particular interface.


CLS 249/101
TXT Apparatus under subclass 98 having means for forming a tongue on one edge
    of the product and a groove on the other edge of the product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 539 for a formed
    building structure having a tongue and groove.


CLS 249/102
TXT Molding apparatus under the class definition utilizing interchangeable
    parts to produce a different product or a different sized product, the
    number of parts in use being constant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155+,   (especially 156) for molds constructed to be adjusted to form
    products of varying size and shape. Note - subclass 156 differs from this
    subclass in that in subclass 156 the size of the product is adjusted by
    adding or subtracting the number of mold surfaces, whereas in subclass 102
    one part is substituted for another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 182 for a molding machine combined with apparatus assembly or
    dismantling means or with an idle part.


CLS 249/103
TXT Apparatus under subclass 102 wherein the interchangeable part includes
    means to imprint information on the product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclasses 401.1+ for formed printing blanks and
    processes for making the same.

    199,    Type Casting, appropriate subclasses, for molding apparatus of the
    machine type for forming type.


CLS 249/104
TXT Apparatus under subclass 102 wherein the interchangeable part produces a
    decorative effect on the product, the effect being either intaglio, cameo
    or a combination of both.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16      and 140, for molds for forming a barrier having simulated plural
    modules, and a module having spaced decorative intaglio or cameo areas,
    respectively.

    103,    for a molding part having intelligence.


CLS 249/105
TXT Molding apparatus under the class definition having filling means connected
    with the cavity of the molding apparatus which aids in the distribution of
    the moldable material (1) as it is fed into the mold cavity or, (2)
    provides a static head for feeding said material into the mold cavity to
    compensate for the volume change of the product upon cooling.

    (1)     Note.  A tapered flow-path member comprising a funnel or material
    guide is considered a filling means even though the taper be slight.

    (2)     Note.  The static filling means may be integral with the mold.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 311+ for filling means having a coacting receiver, other than a
    molding apparatus.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 447+ for a molding machine including a shaping surface and means
    feeding fluent stock thereto; see the collection of notes thereunder.


CLS 249/106
TXT Apparatus under subclass 105 wherein the filling means includes means
    defining a reservoir for molten material enabling the material to flow into
    the mold cavity during solidification of the material in said cavity,
    thereby compensating for the liquid-to-solid contraction of the product;
    said filling means also functioning as a gravitational separator by
    collecting the impurities in the product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79+,    for molding apparatus of this type having heating or cooling means.

    82,     for molding apparatus having means other than a fluid head to
    compensate for the change in volume of either the product or the mold
    during the molding operation.

    134,    for molding apparatus wherein expansion or contraction is
    compensated for by the material from which said apparatus is constructed.


CLS 249/107
TXT Apparatus under subclass 105 having plural material feed lines leading from
    a single inlet to a single molding cavity.


CLS 249/108
TXT Apparatus under subclass 105 having a separable fluid supporting and
    guiding, gravity discharge means, which generally speaking has an inlet of
    greater extent than its outlet, e.g., a funnel is intended to receive an
    unconfined flow, and its outlet is to be inserted into or attached to the
    mold cavity inlet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 331 for funnel type filling means coacting with a receiver other
    than a molding apparatus.


CLS 249/109
TXT Apparatus under subclass 105 wherein the filling means includes an opening
    at or near the bottom of the molding cavity for the introduction of the
    moldable material.


CLS 249/110
TXT Apparatus under subclass 105 wherein the filling means comprises a single
    inlet communicating with plural molding cavities.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119+,   for container-type molds for forming plural articles.


CLS 249/111
TXT Molding apparatus under the class definition wherein a disparate portion of
    the molding apparatus conducts heat away from, or blocks heat transfer
    from, a portion of the molten material to obtain differential cooling of
    the product.


CLS 249/112
TXT Molding apparatus under the class definition wherein a removable or movable
    means is provided to cover at least a major portion of the molding surface
    of the apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus
    subclass 89 for a molding machine having a molding cavity and web or sheet
    type parting means therein.


CLS 249/113
TXT Apparatus under subclass 112 having a liner with plural foramina.

    (1)     Note.  In most instances the molding apparatus is also foraminous.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141,    for a container type foraminous molding device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, appropriate subclasses, for
    machine type molding apparatus of this type.


CLS 249/114.1
TXT Including coating or adherent layer:

    Molding apparatus under the class definition wherein the molding apparatus
    is provided with a coating, or adherent layer on molding surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     for molding apparatus having plural layers combined with heating or
    cooling means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 38.2+ for molds and
    mold coatings defined in terms of composition only.

    199,    Type Casting, subclasses 57 and 58 for type casting mold liners and
    modified liners.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 90 for a molding apparatus combined with means to apply a coating
    (e.g., parting, etc.), material to the material being worked or to a
    shaping means or tool.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 133+ for processes of coating a mold.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 411+ for a
    stock material in the form of a composite web or sheet characterized solely
    by the compositions of the layers and which may be disclosed as a mold.


CLS 249/115
TXT Apparatus under subclass 114 provided with a layer, of or lined with, an
    anti-stick material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 26 for a process of working and
    treating glass combined with the step of applying a parting material or
    lubricant.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclass 2 for a coating or
    plastic composition specially designed for use in the prevention of the
    adherence of a coating material to a surface.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 338 for process shaping utilizing a coating or lining.


CLS 249/116
TXT Apparatus under subclass 114.1 composed of plural contiguous metal layers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201,    for a sink head or hot top, per se, having an internal diverse,
    perimetric layer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 615+ for a
    mold defined solely by plural metal layers or parts.


CLS 249/117
TXT A mold under Section I-1, I-2, and I-4 of the class definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    199,    Type Casting, subclasses 55+ and 91+ for molds for casting type.


CLS 249/118
TXT Apparatus under subclass 117 comprising plural molds with a common means to
    move a molding surface of each mold.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     for mold with means to remove core.

    161+,   for means to move a section of a container-type mold having plural
    sections.


CLS 249/119
TXT Apparatus under subclass 117 comprising (1) a single mold having plural
    product forming cavities, or (2) plural molds with a community feature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    199,    Type Casting, subclass 48 for a type casting multiple mold.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 297.1 for processes of forming plural articles.


CLS 249/120
TXT Apparatus under subclass 119 having a means that sustains the weight of the
    molding apparatus, or otherwise holds, or steadies it against the pull of
    gravity.

    (1)     Note.  A support which merely maintains mold parts, or elements, in
    operative relation is not subject matter for this subclass.  The molding
    apparatus must be capable of a molding function independent of the support
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139,    for a container type molding apparatus having a separate and
    distinct support.


CLS 249/121
TXT Apparatus under subclass 119 having means for closing a mold cavity.

    (1)     Note.  Patents are classified herein even if the disclosure states
    the cover acts as a press-member when the material rises and contacts it;
    see section III 2B(2)-  of the class definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 200+ for receptacle closures.


CLS 249/122
TXT Apparatus under subclass 119 having one or more cores.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142,    for container type molding apparatus having an inner removable core
    to form a recess or opening in the molded product.


CLS 249/123
TXT Apparatus under subclass 122 comprising plural cavities sharing a single
    core which makes openings in plural products.


CLS 249/124
TXT Apparatus under subclass 122 wherein the core is connected to a mold
    surface by a fastening means and is capable of being disconnected from the
    mold surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142,    for molds having a removable core for forming single product.


CLS 249/125
TXT Apparatus under subclass 122 wherein the core is permanently connected with
    a removal mold surface, or the core (or a major part thereof) is a
    removable partition.


CLS 249/126
TXT Apparatus under subclass 119 composed of a series of vertically stacked
    molds, or of compartments in a mold arranged one over the other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 23.6 for metallic receptacles with stacking
    feature.


CLS 249/127
TXT Apparatus under subclass 119 wherein the mold, or a mold part is made of
    flexible material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66.1,   for molding apparatus with means for removing product from mold.

    183,    for core made of resilient material capable of flexure to aid
    removal of core from product.


CLS 249/128
TXT Apparatus under subclass 127 wherein a flexible mold partition is removable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69+,    for tray-like mold including grid having removal partition and
    means to apply force to removal or release product.


CLS 249/129
TXT Apparatus under subclass 119 wherein a one-piece partition divides a
    molding cavity into plural molding cavities.


CLS 249/130
TXT Apparatus under subclass 129 wherein the partition has means allowing the
    moldable material to flow from one cavity to another.


CLS 249/131
TXT Apparatus under subclass 129 wherein a partition which forms the molding
    cavities is readily removed without taking the molding apparatus entirely
    apart.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121,    for a removable partition integral with a cover.


CLS 249/132
TXT Apparatus under subclass 129 wherein at least two partitions intersect one
    another.


CLS 249/133
TXT Apparatus under subclass 119 constructed to allow a heat exchange between
    and around molding cavities.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79+,    for molding apparatus having means to confine the heat exchange
    medium.

    111+,   for a molding apparatus having a heat conductor or insulator.


CLS 249/134
TXT Significant mold structure under subclass 117 composed of a named material.

    (1)     Note.  To be classified herein as an original the material must be
    recited in the claim.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     for molding apparatus made of particular material having heating or
    cooling means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 38.2+ for a mold
    claimed solely in terms of the composition and for mold coating
    compositions.  See section III 2A (1) under class definition of this class
    for an additional field of search.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 337 for process of shaping utilizing particular mold material.


CLS 249/135
TXT Apparatus under subclass 134 composed of a named metal.


CLS 249/136
TXT Apparatus under subclass 117 wherein the molding cavity comprises a bottom
    capable of being moved up through mold walls to the top of a mold to
    facilitate removal of the product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74+,    for molding apparatus with positive product removal means including
    means to move mold bottom through upstanding mold walls.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    199,    Type Casting, subclass 92 for mold having one side movable to eject
    product.


CLS 249/137
TXT Apparatus under subclass 117 having means permitting rotary movement of the
    molding apparatus to facilitate product removal, charging of the mold, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a mold, per se, disclosed for use in a
    centrifugal casting combination.  See "Search Class" notes listed below for
    the combination of a mold with means to rotate the mold (or other
    perfecting features) for centrifugal casting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66.1,   for mold having positive means to remove product from the mold.

    139,    for container-type mold having a separate and distinct support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 302 for a mold with means to rotate
    mold for the casting of glass centrifugally.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclass 384 for apparatus for
    forming pulp centrifugally.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 114+ for centrifugal metal casting
    processes and subclasses 286+ for corresponding apparatus.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 311 for process of centrifugal casting; see the search notes
    thereunder.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 425+ for utilization of female mold motion to distribute stock.


CLS 249/138
TXT Apparatus under subclass 137 for forming stereotype used in printing.


CLS 249/139
TXT Apparatus under subclass 117 wherein the mold is secured by gravity or a
    fastening means to a separate and distinct support means.

    (1)     Note.  A support which merely maintains the molding apparatus in
    operative relation is not subject matter for this subclass.  The mold must
    be capable of carrying out the molding operation independent of the support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for plural article forming mold having a distinct support, or
    plural molds having a common support.

    137,    for a container-type molding apparatus having support means
    enabling rotation or inversion of the mold.


CLS 249/140
TXT Apparatus under subclass 117 for forming a module having spaced intaglio or
    cameo (or both) areas for decorative or functional purposes.

    (1)     Note.  The "major face" is that portion of the module that is
    capable of being viewed when the module is placed in its operative
    position, e.g., in a wall.


CLS 249/141
TXT Apparatus under subclass 117 having an auxiliary port(s) - (vent or drain),
    in addition to the material inlet, in communication with the mold cavity to
    allow transmission of fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for molding apparatus having an auxiliary port(s) and a removably
    foraminous liner.


CLS 249/142
TXT Apparatus under subclass 117 having a core located within the confines of
    mold cavity and capable of being separated therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124,    for plural article forming molding apparatus having a core
    removably connected to a mold surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 414 for a press shaping couple in a molding machine having means
    to insert or remove a core.


CLS 249/143
TXT Apparatus under subclass 142 for forming fence posts having openings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 720.1+ for a formed
    elongated rigid shaft.

    256,    Fences, appropriate subclasses for fence posts.


CLS 249/144
TXT Apparatus under subclass 142 comprising over-lapping inner and outer
    shells, the inner shell being a removable core for forming a recess in the
    product, the recess being in the nature of a through-passage for forming
    conduits, or hollow building structures of the module type, or a material
    retaining recess for forming receptacles.

    (1)     Note.  To constitute a removable element of the mold, the element
    must be detachable from the mold and shape only an internal surface of the
    finished product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses for
    formed products of the type formed by the molds of this and indented
    subclasses.


CLS 249/145
TXT Apparatus under subclass 144 having plural removable cores which intersect
    to form intersecting passage in the product.


CLS 249/146
TXT Apparatus under subclass 144 wherein the outer shell or mold surface and
    the core are held in spaced relation by a nonmolding element which engages
    an internal portion of the core and does not come in direct contact with
    the molding material.


CLS 249/147
TXT Apparatus under subclass 146 including a fastening means (e.g., a rod or
    bayonet type projection) which, while retaining the core, is inserted
    through a hole in the surface of an outer mold wall and is interlocked to
    the outer mold wall by a rotating or reciprocating motion.


CLS 249/148
TXT Apparatus under subclass 146 wherein a fastening means extends between the
    core and the outer mold wall and is located above the moldable material.


CLS 249/149
TXT Apparatus under subclass 148 wherein the core is suspended above the bottom
    of the mold cavity by the fastening means.


CLS 249/150
TXT Apparatus under subclass 144 wherein the expansive or contractive nature of
    the core retains it frictionally in engagement with the other mold part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclass 345 for a packed pipe joint
    providing frictional retention of a male element upon coupling; see the
    search notes thereunder.


CLS 249/151
TXT Apparatus under subclass 144 wherein the core can be slidably removed
    through a hole in the outer mold wall and is retained in its molding
    position by coacting with the hole.


CLS 249/152
TXT Apparatus under subclass 144 having means to expand or contract the outer
    mold shell and/or core for purposes of producing a different sized product,
    or for separating the mold parts to facilitate product removal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclass 338 for a packed pipe joint
    including a radially expansible packing carried by a male member; see the
    search notes thereunder.


CLS 249/153
TXT Apparatus under subclass 152 having means to expand or contract the outer
    mold shell and/or core by a bending or flexing of the face of the mold area
    of the same.


CLS 249/154
TXT Apparatus under subclass 117 having opposed, parallel-spaced panels of
    arcuate shape and end walls, for producing a product of the
    semi-cylindrical type.


CLS 249/155
TXT Apparatus under subclass 117 wherein the mold is constructed in such a
    manner that it may be utilized to form products of different dimensions or
    shapes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102+,   for mold apparatus including alternatively used parts to form
    different products or products varying in size or shape.


CLS 249/156
TXT Apparatus under subclass 155 having a plurality of molding surfaces, which
    are either added to, or removed from the mold to vary the product shape or
    size.

    (1)     Note.  See note under subclass 102 for the line between subclass
    102 and this subclass.


CLS 249/157
TXT Apparatus under subclass 155 having contiguous molding surfaces overlapping
    each other by a sliding motion to increase, or decrease the total molding
    surface.


CLS 249/158
TXT Apparatus under subclass 155 having a transverse mold surface movably
    mounted between mold walls.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136,    for mold having a bottom movable through upstanding mold walls.


CLS 249/159
TXT Apparatus under subclass 155 wherein the angle between two separate but
    adjacent mold surfaces may be varied.


CLS 249/160
TXT Apparatus under subclass 117 having plural molding sections capable of
    separation or relative movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    199,    Type Casting, subclass 94 for type casting mold having two parts.


CLS 249/161
TXT Apparatus under subclass 160 having means to move mold sections to and from
    their operative relation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63+,    for a mold and core with means to remove core.

    74+,    for a mold having means to move a mold bottom through upstanding
    mold walls to facilitate product removal.

    118,    for plural molds having common means to actuate a part of each mold.

    162,    for a mold having means for moving opposed sections simultaneously
    toward and away from each other.


CLS 249/162
TXT Apparatus under subclass 161 having means to move at least two walls
    simultaneously toward and away from each other.


CLS 249/163
TXT Apparatus under subclass 160 having means for securing the mold parts in an
    assembled relationship, and being separable from the mold parts.


CLS 249/164
TXT Apparatus under subclass 163 wherein the removable assembly securing means
    consist of an encircling band or clamp means surrounding the plural mold
    sections.


CLS 249/165
TXT Apparatus under subclass 163 wherein the removable assembly securing means
    consist of a wedge, pin or bolt type means either engaging apertures in the
    mold parts, or biasing one mold surface against another to maintain their
    operative relation by friction.


CLS 249/166
TXT Apparatus under subclass 165 wherein the removable assembly securing means
    is held in position against removal by a fastening (locking) means.


CLS 249/167
TXT Apparatus under subclass 163 wherein the removable assembly securing means
    consists or two or more permanently movable elements.


CLS 249/168
TXT Apparatus under subclass 160 wherein the mold sections (1) interlock with
    one another, or (2) each section carries a permanently associated fastening
    means which coacts to maintain the sections in assembled relationship.


CLS 249/169
TXT Apparatus under subclass 168 wherein the fastening mens is movable relative
    to the mold section to which it is mounted.


CLS 249/170
TXT Apparatus under subclass 160 wherein the plural mold sections are hingedly
    connected for relative movement and permanent association.


CLS 249/171
TXT Apparatus under subclass 170 having at least two mold sections hingedly
    connected to a common section.


CLS 249/172
TXT Apparatus under subclass 171 wherein the common section constitutes the
    bottom section of the mold.


CLS 249/173
TXT Apparatus under subclass 117 comprising a longitudinally split, resilient
    cylinder having means to maintain the cylinder in a contracted molding
    position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    178+,   for core composed of resilient material having means to expand or
    contract the core by bending or flexing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 19+ for hose-clamp type
    structures; see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 249/174
TXT Apparatus under subclass 117 comprising a one-piece mold for forming stock
    material into convenient commercial shape.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 585 for a metal
    intermediate article tapered at both ends.


CLS 249/175
TXT Apparatus under paragraph I-3, of class definition.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses do not take means functioning
    to support a preform, for preform uniting even though said means inherently
    functions to obtain a shaped surface in the product, unless the patentee
    intends that the means be so used.

    (2)     Note.  A core is differentiated from a plunger in that it is
    static, whereas a plunger is dynamic during the molding operation; e.g.,
    both the core and plunger are used to make a hollow casting, but movement
    of the plunger forms the hollow portion of the product, whereas the core
    remains static to form the hollow portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     for mold with core and means to remove core.

    122+,   for plural article forming mold(s) having core(s).

    142+,   for container type mold having a removable core.

    216+,   for tie rod having shaping means and its adjuncts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 362 for a dynamic shaping plunger,
    per se.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    414+ for tire body building drums, per se, disclosed for use in assembling
    and adhesively bonding of tire lamina.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 365+ and 369+ for sand cores.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, appropriate subclasses for molding
    surfaces used as cores that become a permanent part of the product.


CLS 249/176
TXT Apparatus under subclass 175 comprising plural separate cores with some
    feature tying the cores into an operative relation.


CLS 249/177
TXT Apparatus under subclass 175 having means to attach the core to a support,
    the support may be a molding surface.


CLS 249/178
TXT Apparatus under subclass 175 having means, other than a mere clamping
    means, which is actuated to cause the molding surface of the core to expand
    or contract, to move the same to or from its operative position and
    facilitate its removal from the molded product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150,    for molding apparatus with expandable or contractable core which is
    retained in position by its expansive or contractive force.

    152+,   for molding apparatus with core having means to expand or contract
    shell and/or core.


CLS 249/179
TXT Apparatus under subclass 178 wherein the actuation of the mechanical means
    distorts the molding face of the core.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153,    for molding apparatus with a core having means to bend or flex
    molding face to core.


CLS 249/180
TXT Apparatus under subclass 178 wherein the mechanical means moves two or more
    molding faces of the core simultaneously to and from their operative
    position.


CLS 249/181
TXT Apparatus under subclass 180 wherein the mechanical actuating means is a
    rotary movement mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182,    for movement of a single core section by a rotary movement means.


CLS 249/182
TXT Apparatus under subclass 178 wherein the core molding surface is expanded
    or contracted by a rotary moving means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181,    for rotary moving means effecting simultaneous moving a plural core
    molding surfaces.


CLS 249/183
TXT Apparatus under subclass 175 wherein the core is composed in part or whole
    of elastic material whereby it may b easily removed from the product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65,     for flexible cores which are inflatable.

    127+,   for plural article forming mold, or molds with community feature
    wherein the mold or mold part is composed of flexible material.

    179+,   for core with resilient or flexible molding surface combined with
    means to expand or contract the same.


CLS 249/184
TXT Apparatus under subclass 175 wherein the core is composed of plural
    sections providing molding faces.


CLS 249/185
TXT Apparatus under subclass 184 wherein the core sections are connected by a
    hinge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170+,   for container type mold having plural mold sections connected by a
    hinge.


CLS 249/186
TXT Apparatus under subclass 184 wherein the plural core sections are held in
    their operative assembly by friction means and are collapsible upon removal
    of the friction means.


CLS 249/187.1
TXT MOLD ELEMENT:

    Apparatus under section 1 - 6, of class definition which imparts a desired
    shape to a product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 352+ for a chill in a sand mold and
    subclasses 371+ for a chill disclosed for use in a sand mold.


CLS 249/188
TXT Apparatus under subclass 187.1 used for forming an in situ construction
    engineering or building type product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 470 for a casting surface of the plastering or gunite type.


CLS 249/189
TXT Apparatus under subclass 188 comprising a form panel or aligned plural
    panels connected by a fastening means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for opposed spaced panels for forming a wall.


CLS 249/190
TXT Apparatus under subclass 189 having a tie rod, or means on, or in the panel
    for positioning the tie rod.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40+,    for opposed spaced panels and a tie rod extending between and
    through panel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 699 for anchor or tie
    means which remain embedded in product and has a feature engaging a form.


CLS 249/191
TXT Apparatus under subclass 190 having means coacting with and mounting the
    tie rod to secure panel sections together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for molding device opposed spaced panels having this same feature.


CLS 249/192
TXT Apparatus under subclass 189 having means to connect the panel section in
    abutting relation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for road or sidewalk form combined with means to fix the form to
    the ground and having means to align the forms.


CLS 249/193
TXT Apparatus under subclass 192 wherein the means connecting the panel
    sections is disposed between the panel section and functions as a support
    and a molding surface.


CLS 249/194
TXT Apparatus under subclass 192 wherein the panels are connected in a manner
    other than a straight line.


CLS 249/195
TXT Apparatus under subclass 192 wherein a pivoted member located on one panel
    section engages a projection or recess in the other panel section.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of the member are:  Latch, Clamp, etc.


CLS 249/196
TXT Apparatus under subclass 192 wherein the connecting means reciprocably
    engages apertures in each panel section.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of the connecting means are:  wedge, pin, bolt, etc.


CLS 249/197
TXT Apparatus under subclass 187.1 comprising means providing a reservoir of
    material to be fed into the mold.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    for combination of a mold and a sink head or hot top.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 38.2+ for sink head
    or hot tops defined in terms of composition only.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 392 for fluent material filling heads.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 513+ for
    gravitational separators.


CLS 249/198
TXT Apparatus under subclass 197 having means to adjust the position of the
    sink head or hot top relative to the mold.


CLS 249/199
TXT Apparatus under subclass 197 having means to reflect the heat of the melt
    back upon the surface of the melt.


CLS 249/200
TXT Apparatus under subclass 197 wherein the hot top is constructed with a
    chamber for confining a heat producing or heat insulating medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     for mold including means within mold surface to confine a heat
    exchange medium.


CLS 249/201
TXT Apparatus under subclass 197 wherein the sink head or hot top is composed
    of plural layers of different material, one of the layers providing an
    inner lining for the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61+,    for molding apparatus having a layer which is destroyed.

    112+    and 114.1, for molding apparatus having plural layers.

    134+,   for a mold composed of a named material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 140+ for pipe or tubular
    conduit composed of distinct layers.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 359+ for a sand mold having means to
    compensate for shrinkage. Class 164 provides exothermic hot tops; see also
    subclasses 53+ for in situ reactive heating processes.


CLS 249/202
TXT Apparatus under subclass 197 comprising means used with a sink heat or hot
    top performing a function other than shaping.

    (1)     Note.  See the "Search Class" notes under section V-1 of class
    definition, for heat producing products used with sink heads or hot tops.


CLS 249/203
TXT Apparatus under subclass 187.1 comprising a network of spaced intersecting
    partitions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69+,    for the combination of a grid and a tray-like mold with means for
    applying force to the grid or product.

    127+    and 129+, for plural article forming mold having grid structure.


CLS 249/204
TXT Apparatus under subclass 187.1 comprising means to close the molding cavity
    or a portion thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 200+ for closures for metallic receptacles.


CLS 249/205
TXT Adjuncts under section I-7 of class definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, appropriate subclasses for sand mold adjuncts,
    particularly subclasses 394+ for mold jackets and slip boxes, 397+ for core
    centering or supporting means, 411 for reinforcement for mold material and
    412 for miscellaneous mold adjuncts.


CLS 249/206
TXT Apparatus under subclass 205 comprising means to control the splash of the
    molding material in the mold cavity upon its being dispensed in the cavity.


CLS 249/207
TXT Apparatus under subclass 205 comprising nonmolding means for use with an in
    situ construction engineering or building type mold.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for joint forming adjuncts, per se.


CLS 249/208
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 comprising means to support a curb or step
    mold.


CLS 249/209
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 comprising molding surface supports for a
    product having an arch.


CLS 249/210
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 comprising means for use with a molding
    apparatus for forming either a barrier or sustainer, or a barrier with a
    sustainer.


CLS 249/211
TXT Apparatus under subclass 210 comprising means to attach the molding
    apparatus to the flange of a structural beam.


CLS 249/212
TXT Apparatus under subclass 210 comprising adjustable supports for dome-shaped
    cores.

    (1)     Note.  The dome-shaped cores usually form a floor or ceiling with
    joists.


CLS 249/213
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 comprising a structural element for
    temporarily holding or supporting mold elements inoperative relation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33+,    for opposed spaced panels connected by tie means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 698+ for anchors or
    ties used in building structures.

      (1)   Note. Class 52 will take ties and anchors which remain embedded in
    the product and function to hold permanent building structures.  Class 249
    will take ties which remain embedded in or are removed from the product
    which function only to hold removable mold parts.  In case of a dual
    disclosure, i.e., the tie functions to hold removable mold parts and is
    used to secure permanent building structure after the mold parts are
    removed.  Class 52 is considered residual.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 29, 104, and 199+ for
    implements or apparatus which are used to tension a tie rod or wire from
    which they are separated after the rod or wire is tensioned to the desired
    amount.  Note. Class 254 will only take implements or apparatus which are
    adapted to tension an element (e.g., wire, rod) from which they are removed
    after the desired amount of tension is achieved.  Class 249 and other
    appropriate classes (e.g., Class 24, Class 74) will take the combination of
    a rod or wire and a force multiplying component permanently attached to, or
    remaining with, the rod or wire when used.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, appropriate subclasses for general use fasteners
    which could be used as ties.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 544+ for stock
    material which is all metal or has adjacent metal components.


CLS 249/214
TXT Apparatus under subclass 213 having a weakened area to facilitate its being
    broken.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for opposed spaced panels supported by a tie having a weakened area.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 98+ for building
    structures with frangible section or means.


CLS 249/215
TXT Apparatus under subclass 213 comprising twisted or coil wire located within
    the molding material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 712+ for sheet or
    wire ties.


CLS 249/216
TXT Apparatus under subclass 213 having means to maintain mold elements in a
    spaced relation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 699+ for a tie
    having feature engaging form.


CLS 249/217
TXT Apparatus under subclass 216 wherein the spacing means which is removably
    mounted on the tie performs a molding function usually for facilitating its
    removal from the product.


CLS 249/218
TXT Apparatus under subclass 216 wherein the tie is made of sheet metal.


CLS 249/219.1
TXT Clamp or bracket, per se:

    Apparatus under subclass 207 comprising clamp or bracket means for holding
    or supporting mold parts in an operative relationship.


CLS 249/219.2
TXT Waler type:

    Clamp or bracket means under subclass 219.1 for holding or tying vales to
    concrete forms or to other wale elements.

    (1)     Note.  Wales are the horizontal or cross-beam components of the
    hardback framework that hold together panels comprising the concrete mold
    form. Often wales are depicted as 2 X 4's or wooden pieces attached to the
    panel and/or hardback framework of the concrete form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., appropriate subclass for clamps.

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclass for supports.


CLS 250/
TTL RADIANT ENERGY

CLS 250/
TXT


    I       STATEMENT OF GENERAL SUBJECT MATTER OF THE CLASS

    This is the residual class for methods and apparatus involving radiant
    energy.

    II      SCOPE OF THE CLASS

    This class provides for all methods and apparatus for using, generating,
    controlling or detecting radiant energy, combinations including such
    methods or apparatus, subcombinations of same and accessories therefore not
    classifiable elsewhere.

    III     GLOSSARY OF TERMS

    CIRCUIT
    A closed or closable conducting path through which, or along which,
    electric current can travel.

    DETECTOR
    A material or device whose response to radiant energy is used to indicate
    the presence or amount of incident radiation. Also, called "Signalling
    Means".

    FLUENT MATERIAL
    A liquid, gas or mass of granular solid material that does not of itself
    maintain its own spatial form but flows. Whether or not a granular material
    should be considered fluent or not is determined in each case by how it is
    handled. Generally if the handling means has walls to hold up the material,
    the material is fluent. Thus, for example, coal is necessarily fluent in a
    pail or bin but not necessarily fluent in a pile.

    ION
    An atom or molecule with at least one more or less electrons than protons.
    Electrons, per se, are not considered ions.

    IONIZATION
    The process of adding to or removing from an electrically neutral atom or
    molecule one or more of its electrons. Note: Ionization, as sometimes used
    to denote the process of increasing the energy level of an atom or molecule
    to some state short of the above, is not encompassed by this definition.
    Such processes in this class are considered partial or incomplete
    ionization.

    INSPECTION
    A term implying a source of radiant energy, and/or means to irradiate an
    object by said source and a detector responsive to radiation from the
    object to provide a signal representing some characteristic of the object.

    OBJECT
    A material subjected to radiation for treatment or whose response to or
    effect on the radiation is used to indicate something about the material.

    PHOTOCELL
    A detector used to sense light incident thereon and generate a signal
    representative of some aspect of the light such as intensity, phase,
    coherence, mode distribution, interference pattern characteristics, etc.

    Photodetector - See Photocell

    Photoelectric cell - See Photocell

    Photosensor - See Photocell

    RADIANT ENERGY
    Energy propagated in the form of electromagnetic waves, or traveling
    subatomic, atomic or molecular particles.

    RADIOACTIVE ACTIVE
    Exhibiting spontaneous nuclear disintegration with emission of particulate
    or electromagnetic radiations.

    SIGNALING MEANS, ELECTRIC AND NONELECTRIC
    Detectors that produce in response to incident radiant energy either an
    increase or decrease in electric potential or current flow (Electric) or
    some other perceivable change (Nonelectric). The nonelectric change may be
    immediately perceived or may require development to be perceived, e.g.,
    photographic changes.

    IV      RELATIONSHIP TO OTHER CLASSES

    Many other classes provide for methods and apparatus involving radiant
    energy, per se, or in combination when such methods or apparatus are also
    the subject matter of the class in question.

    In general, subject matter involving radiant energy is provided for in
    other classes on the basis of either a specific use of the radiant energy
    or a specific type of radiant energy. Classes explicitly providing for
    subject matter involving radiant energy are listed below and arranged
    according to the above described basis of classification followed by some
    miscellaneous classes.

    A.      CLASSES PROVIDING FOR SPECIFIC USES OF RADIANT ENERGY

    1.      For Separating and Assorting

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 27 and 28 for processes of
    gas separation using magnetism and subclasses 57+ for processes of gas
    separation using an electric or electrostatic field.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 1+ for magnetic separating
    means for gas separation and subclasses 15+ for electric or electrostatic
    field separation apparatus for gas separation.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 155+ for the
    production of a compound or element by chemical reaction brought about by
    electrical or wave energy in a magnetic field, subclasses 157.15+ for
    processes of treating materials involving a chemical reaction brought about
    by wave energy, subclasses 164+ for production of an element or compound by
    chemical reaction in an electrostatic field or involving an electrical
    discharge, subclasses 450+ for electrophoresis or electro-osmosis,
    subclasses 554+ for electrical or simultaneous electrical and magnetic
    separation or purification of a liquid or magnetic treatment of a liguid
    (other than separation), subclasses 194+ for electrolytic apparatus,
    subclasses 600+ for electrophoretic or electro-osmotic apparatus, and
    subclasses 660+ for apparatus for electrical or simultaneous electrical and
    magnetic separation or purification of a liquid or magnetic treatment of a
    liquid (other than separation).

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, for electrolysis, in general.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses, especially 212 and 213+ for magnetic types and subclasses 511,
    524, 536, and 576 for radiant energy type automatic assorting, subclasses
    127.1+ for electrostatic type.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, for methods and apparatus for
    the separation of a liquid from a liquid on a solid generally, particularly
    subclass 222 for the magnetic separation of particles from a liquid; and
    subclass 745, process control by optical sensing of condition.

    2.      For Treating

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 103 and 444 for wave energy.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing and General Cleaning, subclass 1.51 for
    electrostatic cleaning.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 245+ for
    processes and apparatus for drying or gas or vapor contact with solids in
    which the material or object treated is subjected to electromagnetic or
    electrostatic energy, including radiant electromagnetic energy; subclasses
    266+, treating feathers with radiant energy; and subclasses 524+, with
    automatic control.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 342, with signal,
    indicator or tester; subclasses 358 and 451 for apparatus for subjecting
    foods and beverages to wave, radiant and electrical energy.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 620+ for coating apparatus combined
    with means to apply radiant energy to the work.

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 294 and 299 for radiant energy; and subclass
    333 for smoke separating or treating.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclass 1 for processes
    of cleaning or contacting of solids with liquids which includes the
    application of radiant energy, including radiant electric energy, to the
    work; and subclass 113, with alarm, signal, indicating, testing,
    inspecting, illuminating or display means.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    67 for methods of surface bonding and/or assembly therefor utilizing
    phosphorescent or fluorescent materials; subclass 244.17, surface bonding
    with lamina formation or coating by electric, magnetic or wave energy;
    subclasses 350+, automatic and/or material-triggered control, especially
    subclass 378, including testing, measuring or indicating means; and
    subclass 379.6 for apparatus with means applying wave energy to work.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 49 and 192 for
    processes using radiant energy; and subclass 263, measuring, testing,
    inspecting, indicating or illumination.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 147.1+ for electromagnetic means to
    apply force to work and subclasses 250.1+ for means to apply electrical or
    wave energy to work.

    166,    Wells, subclass 336, with measuring, testing, inspection or
    condition determination; and subclass 247 for processes using nuclear
    energy or radioactivity for treating.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 155+, 157.15+
    and 164+ for processes for preparing elements or compounds through chemical
    reactions brought about by the agency of wave energy, see this class (250)
    subclasses 492.1+ for corresponding apparatus.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclass 12 for coloring
    treatments including fluorescence.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    subclass .5 for processes of shaping or treating radioactive material,
    subclasses 405+ for direct application of electrical or wave energy to
    work; and subclasses 408+, for processes of measuring, testing, or
    inspecting with sensing by utilizing light or passage of electric field
    current through material.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, for photocell methods and
    apparatus, subclass 71 for document pattern analysis or verification;
    subclasses 364+ for examination of materials using polarized light;
    subclass 371 for flatness tests; subclasses 372+ for measurement of
    material dimensions; subclasses 399+ for determining lateral alignment;
    subclasses 402+ for shade or color tests; subclasses 429+ for monitoring of
    webs or threads; and subclasses 237+ for the inspection for flaws or
    imperfections.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 225+ for
    particle charging, and subclasses 230+ for ionizing.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 64+ for X-ray or
    gamma ray irradiation devices.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 1+ for processes of disinfecting,
    deodorizing, preserving, or sterilizing nonfoods by subjecting the same to
    electric or electromagnetic energy; subclasses 50+, analyzer, indicator or
    manipulative laboratory device; subclass 162, automatic analytical monitor
    and control of industrial products; subclass 85, with color change;
    subclass 91, gas analysis with adsorption with photometric detector; and
    subclass 106, control element responsive to sensed liquid level.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses
    1.11+ for methods of using a radionuclide containing compound or
    compositions, and for compositions comprising a radionuclide; and subclass
    subclasses 9.1+, for in vivo diagnosis and testing compositions and
    subclasses 10.1+, for Class 424 compositions with an identification or
    warning feature.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Product,
    subclasses 234, 236 and 237+ for processes involving the use of electrical,
    wave or radiant energy in food treatments.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 10, optical measuring, testing and
    indicating; subclass 157, coating processes using a fluorescent or
    phosphorescent coating, and subclasses 457+ for processes of coating using
    electrical, magnetic, wave, or particulate energy.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 1+ for radioactive and substances.

    602,    Surgery:  Splint, Brace, or Bandage, subclass 2 for bandaging and
    orthopedics with light applications.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 20+, for infrared, visible, light, ultraviolet,
    X-ray or electrical energy applied to a body.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses 1+
    for light, thermal, thermal and electrical applications.

    3.      As a Medium of Control

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclass 0.21, for photoresponsive
    control of stopping.

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclass 25, for radiant energy
    control, and subclasses 197+ for photocell control of an up-and-over, e.g.,
    garage door, opener.

    89,     Ordnance, subclass 41.06, for operation of mount training mechanism
    motors by light reception.

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 80.23+ for embroidery with optical pattern
    program means.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 691, for photoelectric sensors
    responsive to condition of coating material.

    137,    Fluid Handing, subclass 78.1, for condition responsive photocells;
    and subclass 93, for maintaining or sensing mixture condition by optical or
    chemical property in self-proportioning or correlating systems.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 192+, for automatic control of flow cutoff or diversion.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclass 5, for
    weather and/or light initiated automatic control.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 250+, for means to indicate, measure, test, or
    locate wells.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 129, for an electrical
    stop mechanism with photocell control; and subclass 142, radio tuner type
    limit stops.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 121.6+, using laser with beam position
    control.

    235,    Registers, subclasses 400+, for ordnance or weapons systems
    computer, e.g., subclass 411, with target tracking means.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 324+, especially
    subclass 331.4 for a photoelectric control for regulating winding or
    unwinding of magnetic tape or photographic film; subclasses 410+ for a
    photoelectric control for regulating tension in a running length of
    material; subclasses 534+ for a photoelectric control in a winding machine,
    and subclasses 563+ for a photoelectric control in an unwinding machine.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 3.1+, for missile stabilization or
    trajectory control utilizing radiant energy, especially subclasses 3.16+.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclasses 29+ for automatic
    block-signal systems utilizing radiant energy.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 117
    for radiant energy responsive switching systems.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 509+ for miscellaneous circuits responsive to external
    effects such as radiant energy.

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, especially subclasses 210+, for electron or ion beam
    deflecting magnets, per se.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 13+ for such devices responsive to
    radiant energy.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.69 and 825.72 for radio
    control of an art device.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 140, for focus control; and
    subclass 141, automatic diaphragm control.

    355,    Photocopying, subclass 68, for illumination systems including
    photocells; subclasses 55+, for photodetector use with focus or
    magnification control; subclass 41, for identifying, composing or selecting
    using photocell; and subclass 38, for color film exposure or light
    intensity control.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    142+ for light wave remote control and subclasses 507+ for moisture or
    foreign particle control of optical elements or systems using photoelectric
    sensors.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 173+ for
    photosensitive devices included in electromagnetic or relay control
    circuit.


    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclass 11, for
    combinations with ambient condition detector.

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, subclasses 9+, for particular beam
    control devices.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 549+ for phototype composing, subclasses
    89+ for automatic camera focussing with photoelectric control; subclasses
    213+ for automatic exposure control; and subclass 570 for photocell
    controlled fluid-treating means.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 38+ for control of
    electrophotography processes (e.g., charging, exposure, developing,
    transfer, fixing, and cleaning).

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling or Planing, subclass 128, for a tracer
    adapted to trigger a photocell.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclass 175, for such devices having
    light or sound responsive switch or control.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 603 for light wave remote control.

    463,    Amusement Devices: Games, subclasses 51+ for a game in which an
    electromagnetic ray (e.g., a  light ray, etc.) is used to simulate a
    projectile fired from a gun, torpedo launcher, etc.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 3+, for condition responsive control means,
    especially, subclass  10, which uses a photocell condition sensor.

    901,    Robots, subclass 47, for optical sensing devices.

    4.      For Testing

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 227+ for light-ray type;
    subclasses 272+ for magnetic compasses; subclass 360, magnetic field
    responsive indicator of the direction of force traversing a natural media,
    using a CRT or photoelectric cell; and subclass 363, electrical
    telemetering with a photoelectric pickoff.


    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 23 for the analysis of gases;
    particularly; subclass 23.1 for the combination of a gas chromatography
    test and a radiation (invisible and visible) test, of the effluent from the
    test, subclasses 53.01+ for the examination of liquids or a liquid
    suspension of solids; particularly, subclass 61.4 for the visible light
    examination of the settling rate of a liquid suspension of solids,
    subclasses 73+ for moisture content or absorption characteristics
    generally, subclass 104 for surface or cutlery edge testing generally, and
    subclasses 151+ for bore hole and drilling study tests generally,
    subclasses 861+ for volume or rate of flow meters generally, and subclasses
    290+ for liquid level or depth gauges including those using visible light.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 41 for such subject
    matter combined with ray energy detection or measuring.

    235,    Registers, subclasses 454 through 473 for coded record sensors
    involving optical testing; and subclasses 400+, ordnance or weapons system
    computer.


    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, for measuring or testing of
    electrical properties by the use of radiant energy; for measuring or
    testing of nonelectric properties (e.g., magnetic fields, subclasses 244+)
    by electrical means; and subclass 344, measuring and testing a geophysical
    surface or subsurface in situ with a radiant energy receiver.

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclass
    210, using a photodetector to detect eye movement in an eye examining or
    test instrument.


    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 525+,
    optics or photography; subclasses 550+, measuring, testing or monitoring,
    especially subclasses 556+, for basic measurements.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 32 for measuring the total
    thermal energy or power emitted from a radiating source; subclasses 121+
    for determining temperature by measuring thermally emitted  radiation; and
    subclass 162 for measuring temperature by a color change indicator.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclass 248, testing, sensing, measuring, or detecting a fission reactor
    condition using optics.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 53, systems with photoelectric detector; and
    subclass 6, counting of inanimate entities.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, appropriate subclasses for
    testing and analyzing using X-ray or gamma rays; and subclasses 20, 68+,
    177+, 195+, and 205+ for X-ray devices with object alignment or positioning
    means.


    382,    Image Analysis, all subs.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics of
    electrophotographic device and functions.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 1+, electromagnetic energy
    sensor to detect or determine range of an object; subclasses 112+,
    communication aids for the handicapped; subclass 187, measurement of length
    or volume; subclass 240, radio navigation with light sensor in simulator;
    subclass 303, science, physics, optics; subclass 325, image projector, and
    light detector used in question or problem eliciting a response; subclass
    337, correctness of response by means including light detector; subclasses
    355 and 358, grading response involving light sensor.

    435,    Chemistry: Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 35 for test
    methods involving an enzyme (including reaction with a living cell, such as
    a bacterium) and a radioactive material; subclass 288.7, optical sensing
    apparatus.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 164+,
    for optical results of optical tests involving a reaction.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 150+ for high temperature (Tc greater than 30 K) superconducting
    devices, subclasses 300+ for processes of producing high temperature
    superconductor or superconductive devices, particularly subclasses 320,
    325, and 480+ for use of radiant energy or particle bombardment; and
    cross-reference art collections 842+ for superconductor measuring and
    testing, or 848+ for radiant energy application on superconducting material.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 300+ for diagnostic testing.

    902,    Electronic Funds Transfer, subclasses 41+, with means to read data
    stored on identifier.

    935,    Genetic Engineering: Recombinant DNA Technology, Hybrid or Fused
    Cell Technology, and Related Manipulations of Nucleic Acids, which provides
    a search collection for processes of altering the genetic structure of
    micro-organisms; genes and methods of modifying genes and their expression;
    vectors and methods of modifying vectors; methods of introducing DNA into a
    cell; micro-organisms, per se, which have had their genetic sequence
    altered by recombinant DNA techniques or by cell fusion or by uptake of
    DNA; testing; separation techniques; apparatus; and methods of use of
    vectors or of the genetically engineered micro-organisms; methods of gene
    therapy or genetic modification of living organisms.

    5.      As A Medium of Communication

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 363, electrical telemetering with
    a photoelectric pickoff.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 70, photocell repeaters.

    329,    Demodulators, subclass 144, with light or heat beam deflection or
    modulation as a significant part of the detecting operation.

    332,    Modulators, subclass 3, a modulator combined with a photoelectric
    intelligence signal source.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, especially subclass 825.97 for
    electron beam selective types, subclasses 870.01+ for telemetering,
    especially subclass 870.29, with photoelectric pickup; subclass 942,
    photoelectric vehicle detectors; subclasses 555+, specific condition
    responsive indicating systems, especially subclasses 578, detecting flame
    by radiant energy, subclass 583, detecting ice formation by radiant energy
    [and] subclass 600, [for alarms] responsive to radiant energy, subclass
    619, liquid level detection by radiant energy, and subclass 630,
    photoelectric smoke and other particle detectors.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 1+, digital pattern
    reading converter, especially subclasses 13, optical, and 14, optical
    waveguide, and subclass 31, photoelectric actuated keyboard code generator.

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 52+, combined with diverse type
    radiant energy systems, laser, TV, etc.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 180+ for light pen imput to
    selective visual display communication systems.

    348,    Television, subclasses 207+ for television camera using a
    photocell, including subclasses 294+ for solid-state image sensor and
    subclass 332 for array of photocells.

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 400+ for facsimile (phototelegraphy).

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    109+ for light wave communications.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 31,
    monitoring or testing the progress of recording, and subclass 74.6,
    photoelectric stopping or reversing control of a recorder.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 806+,
    analog computer simulation of  physical phenomena; and subclass 822,
    optical correlation or convolution.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 106+, radiant
    energy; subclasses 215+, optical read/write circuits; and subclasses 234+,
    optical address.

    367,    Communication, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave System and Devices,
    subclass 64, optical processing of land reflection type seismic
    prospecting.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 44+, for
    optical transducers used in dynamic information storage and retrieval; and
    subclasses 100+, for radiation beam modification of, or by, storage medium.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 1+, optical multiplex
    communications.


    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications.

    382,    Image Analysis.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 112+, communication aids
    for the handicapped.

    455,    Telecommunications.

    6.      Other Specific Use Classes

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 542+ for luminous
    signs; subclasses 465+, display with special effects having photoelectric
    switching control of electric circuit.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 17.1 for
    electric current type and subclass 17.5 for luminous type; subclass 59,
    condition responsive burglar traps.

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 202 for ion motors.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 3.1 for electrical or magnetic effect type;
    subclasses 139 and 140, automatic control by accumulation of ice or frost.


    84,     Music, subclasses 639 and 724 for photocell controlled tone
    generators.


    101,    Printing, subclass 470 for copying for plate making using radiant
    energy.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclass 1.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 6.5+ for induction; electrostatic or
    electromagnetic heating, subclasses 121.11 for electric arc metal heating;
    and subclasses 383+ for other electric arc type heating devices.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 301 for nuclear
    reaction types; and subclass 306 for thermal or pyromagnetic types.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 116+ for systems
    involving nonmagnetic motors.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 2 for generating
    systems of the nonmagnetic type; subclass 26, automatic control with light
    or photoresponsive control circuits.

    330,    Amplifiers, especially subclasses 4+ for maser type amplifiers;
    subclass 42 for secondary electron emissive types; subclasses 44+ for
    electron beam types; subclasses 47+ for magnetically influenced discharge
    device types; and subclass 59, having light controlled or activated device.

    331,    Oscillators, especially subclasses 94+ for molecular or particle
    resonant types; and subclass 66, light responsive ambient condition sensor.

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 131+, 153+, 165+, 169+, 179+, employing
    electron discharge tube, especially subclass 132 for magnetron types,
    subclass 133 for klystron types.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 175+ for resonant,
    discrete frequency selective type wave filters; and subclasses 219+ for
    resonators of the distributed parameter type.

    346,    Recorders, subclasses 107.1+ for light or beam recording of
    phenomenon information. See, also, subclass 33, combined with external
    optical system recorder operating means.

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, subclasses 129+ for
    electrostatic marking by photoscanning, subclasses 224+ for light or beam
    marking.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 84 for a light source and luminescent
    material; subclasses 260 and 266 for luminescent light sources with light
    modifiers; and subclass 4, light responsive photographic lighting.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, appropriate subclasses for
    arc and induction furnaces.

    396,    Photography, for apparatus for photochemically recording visible
    light.


    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, for processes of forming an image using all forms of radiation.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, particularly
    subclasses 473+ for gettering of a semiconductor substrate via irradiation,
    subclasses 514+ for ion implantation of electrically active dopants into
    semiconductive regions, and subclasses 795+ for thermal treatment of a
    semiconductor substrate via irradiation to modify some property thereof.

    B.      CLASSES PROVIDING FOR SPECIFIC TYPES OF RADIANT ENERGY

    1.      Electron Space Discharge Type

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 10, 11, 21, 53-56, 113-118, 184-189, 225-234, 257, 258, 290-294,
    and 414-466 for invisible radiation-sensitive active semiconductor devices.

            Class 257 limits itself to active solid state electronic device
    structures whereas Class 250, subclasses 370.01+ through 371 are limited to
    active semiconductor radiant energy detection systems.



            Some potential conflicts occur when an optical element is claimed.
    Where an optical element is recited as being integral with a semiconductive
    photodetector element, encapsulant housing or package, it will be
    classified in Class 257.  Separate elements not part of the radiant energy
    detecting element or package and claimed therewith will be classified in
    Class 250, subclasses 370.01+.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses, for
    electric space discharge devices, per se, including X-ray tubes,
    cathode-ray tubes, electric discharge lamps, liquid electrode discharge
    devices, gas or vapor filled discharge devices and vacuum tubes, and for
    the electrodes, filaments fluorescent targets and shields for electric
    space discharge devices; subclasses 523+, photosensitive discharge tubes;
    and subclasses 365+, image pickup cathode ray tubes.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 22 for consumable electrode discharge devices which have means to
    feed a fluent, material, (e.g., solid particles) to the discharge space.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, especially subclass
    111.01 for systems wherein a fluent material is supplied to the discharge
    area between the discharge electrodes of the discharge device; subclass
    134, readout energy responsive control of signal, indicator or alarm; and
    subclasses 149+, with radiant energy sensitive control means.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 15, light sensitive resistance.

    2.      Visible Light Type

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures.

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors.

    355,    Photocopying.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements.

    399,    Electrophotography.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof.

    3.      Other Wave Type

    219,    Electric Heating, various subclasses for infrared generators.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof.


    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Class 523, subclass 136 for a composition containing a
    synthetic resin or natural rubber which is resistant to, yet does not
    absorb, radioactive materials or cathode rays or to processes of preparing
    said composition.

    C.      MISCELLANEOUS RELATED CLASSES

    252,    Compositions, subclass 478 for   X-ray neutron shield compositions;
    subclasses 625+ for radioactive compositions; and subclasses 301.16,
    301.36, and 301.4, respectively, for luminescent compositions.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    appropriate subclasses for processes and apparatus for carrying out nuclear
    reactions particularly of the sustained or controlled type.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 457+ for utilizing electrical or
    radiant energy and subclass 157 for phosphorescent coating.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof.


CLS 250/200
TXT Subject matter under the class definition which includes a photocell.

    (1)     Note.  DEFINITION OF TERMS: A photocell is defined for the purpose
    of classification in these subclasses as an electrical device which
    responds to light by varying its electrical characteristics or by
    generating an electric current. This definition therefore includes
    resistances, electric space discharge devices, batteries, inductances,
    condensers, bolometers and other electrical devices which have their
    electrical characteristics varied by radiant energy. For the purpose of
    classification in these subclasses "light" and "radiant energy" are used
    synonymously.

    (2)     Note.  CIRCUITS AND APPARATUS INCLUDED: These are the generic
    subclasses for the following:

    a.      Electrical circuits whose operations are controlled by means of a
    photocell.


    b.      Electrical systems for supplying electric current and/or potential
    to a photocell.

    c.      Photocells in combination with the optical means for controlling
    the radiant energy which illuminates the photocell.

    d.      Photocells in combination with the source of illumination for the
    photocell.


    e.      Apparatus which is limited to use with photocells and which is not
    otherwise classified. Examples of such apparatus are the photocell
    temperature control means in subclass 238 and the housings in subclass 239.

    (3)     Note.  SIGNALING SYSTEMS:  Electrical communication systems whose
    operation is controlled by means of a photocell are excluded from these
    subclasses. For such systems search class:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 70, photocell repeaters.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclass 29 for railway traffic
    control systems which are controlled by a photocell.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 117,
    radiant energy responsive switching systems; subclass 10.8, vehicle mounted
    light system.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 509+, miscellaneous circuits responsive to radiant
    energy.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, for miscellaneous signaling systems
    controlled by a photocell. Note especially subclasses 901+ for a vehicle
    carried photocell system, subclass 870.29 for telemetering via a light
    beam, and subclass 600 for a condition sensing photocell which actuates a
    signal or alarm.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 1+, digital pattern
    reading converter, especially subclasses 13, optical, and 14, optical
    waveguide, and subclass 31, photoelectric actuated keyboard code generator.

    348,    Television, subclasses 207+ and 332 for television system which may
     include a photocell.

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 400+ for facsimile (phototelegraphy) and
    subclasses 471+ for facsimile systems which may include a photocell.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 31,
    monitoring or testing recording progress; subclass 74.6, photoelectric
    stopping or reversing control; subclass 114, magneto-optic head.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 525+,
    Optics or Photography; subclasses 550+, measuring, testing or monitoring;
    subclasses 806+, analog computer simulation of physical phenomena; subclass
    822, optical correlation or convolution.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 106+, radiant
    energy; subclasses 215+, optical read-write circuits; subclasses 234+,
    optical address.

    367,    Communications, Electrical: Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclass 64, optical processing of seismic signals; subclasses 140+, signal
    transducer.


    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 100+ for
    electrical sound recording and reproducing systems which include a
    photocell.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 1+, optical.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, appropriate subclasses, for electric
    sound recording and reproducing, using photocells.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 600+, for lightwave communication.

    (4)     Note.  PHOTOCELL CONTROLLED CATHODE-RAY TUBE CIRCUIT:Class 315,
    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclasses 10+ provides for
    miscellaneous circuits for supplying electric current and/or potential to a
    cathode-ray tube where the system includes a photocell to control the
    cathode-ray tube. The systems included in subclasses 10+ include systems
    having a photocell in the supply circuit of the cathode-ray tube and
    systems where the cathode-ray tube includes a photoelectric electrode.

            Class 358, Facsimile, subclass 161 for control of brightness or
    contrast of display on cathode-ray tube dependent on ambient light sensed
    by photocell, and subclasses 471+ for photocell control of a cathode-ray
    tube in facsimile systems.

    (5)     Note.  PHOTOCELL COMBINED WITH DIVERSE TYPE DEVICE: These
    subclasses include a photocell apparatus or photocell controlled circuit
    when combined with a diverse type apparatus only when the combination
    includes only the portion of the diverse type apparatus necessary to
    provide for the photocell apparatus or circuit. Such combinations will be
    found for the most part in subclass 215 of this class. Where structure of
    the device is claimed in addition to that necessary to provide for the
    photocell apparatus or photocell circuit, the device is excluded from these
    subclasses and will be found with the art that provides for the particular
    device with which the photocell is combined. Also, see (6) Note below with
    reference to photocell circuits which are limited to controlling specific
    devices, such as a signal, meter, etc. See (3) Note above for a reference
    to signaling systems which include a photocell. For some of the classes
    which provide for devices which include a photocell apparatus or circuit,
    see the classes listed under (9) Note below.

    (6)     Note.  PHOTOCELL CIRCUIT WITH SPECIFIC LOAD DEVICE IN THE OUTPUT
    CIRCUIT:

    a.      General Statement: These subclasses do not provide for photocell
    controlled circuits which have a particular load device, such as an
    electric motor, recited in the output circuit. Such systems are classified
    with the particular art. See the paragraphs below for some special
    exceptions to this general statement. For a partial list of the classes
    which provide for the excluded circuits, see the classes under (9) Note
    below.

    b.      Photocell controls its light source or optical system: These
    subclasses do provide in subclasses 201+ for photocell circuits where the
    output circuit controls means which control the optical system of the
    photocell, (e.g., rebalancing systems, apparatus having means for causing
    the photocell to move so as to trace the contour of a pattern, circuits
    having the illumination source for the photocell controlled by the
    photocell). Note that where the claims are limited to a photoelectric
    circuit having an electric lamp as the source of illumination for the
    photocell, the electric lamp being connected in the output circuit of the
    photocell circuit so that the lamp which illuminates the photocell is
    controlled by the photocell, no structure of the optical system between the
    lamp and photocell being claimed, the circuit is classified in Class 315,
    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclass 151.



    c.      Photocell with electronic tube or other current or potential
    modifying means in the output circuit.

            These subclasses do provide for photocell circuits having means in
    the output circuit for modifying or amplifying the photocell current or
    voltage so as to produce the type of output control current or voltage
    desired. Examples of such means are the bridge circuits and electronic tube
    devices. Where the disclosure relates to a plurality of species of relay
    systems of which one is an electronic relay (electronic tube) system and
    the claims recite the relay in generic terms, classification is in Class
    361, subclasses 173+. Where the claims are limited to an electronic relay
    or the disclosure relates only thereto even though the relay is recited
    broadly, classification is herein (Class 250).



            If such optical system is claimed, the subject matter is classified
    in Class 250, subclasses 200+.



            Where the device controlled in the output circuit is a cathode-ray
    tube, or where the photocell is a part of a cathode-ray tube and the claims
    do not include any significant output circuit for the cathode-ray tube, the
    circuit is classified in Class 315, Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:
    Systems, subclasses 10+.  See (4) Note above.



            Where the device controlled in the output circuit is an electronic
    tube of the gas or vapor type (including gas or vapor discharge lamps), and
    the claims do not include any significant output circuit for the electronic
    tube, the circuit is classified in Class 315, Electric Lamp and Discharge
    Devices:  Systems, subclasses 149+, especially in subclasses 156 and 157.
    Subclass 156 provides for the circuit where another electronic tube which
    is controlled by the photocell is interposed in the supply circuit of the
    gas or vapor type electronic tube, and subclass 157 where the electronic
    tube which is controlled is provided with a discharge control means (e.g.,
    grid).



    d.      Photoelectric visible light examination apparatus.



            The analysis of visible light by means of a photosensitive detector
    coupled to a recorder or meter is in Class 356.  The analysis of light and
    including a photosensitive detector, but not including a meter, recorder or
    other indicator is classified in Class 250.  The examination of solid,
    liquid or gaseous material or articles for an optical property, light
    scattering flaws, or size and configuration tests are in Class 356.



            A support for material or an article being examined and a
    photosensitive device to detect variation in visible light caused by the
    examined material is classified in Class 356, providing the disclosure
    involves the examination of the material or the article by visible light.



            The examination of material by visible light involving a
    photoelectric detection of the light as affected by the material and an
    electrical alarm is in Class 340, subclasses 619+.

    (7)     Note.  PHOTOCELLS, PER SE: These subclasses do not include the
    structure of the photocell, per se. The photocells, per se, are classified
    according to the type of electrical device. For the classes and subclasses
    which provide for photocells and analogous devices, search class:

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclasses 213+ for
    photocells of the radiation pyrometer type which generate electricity by
    virtue of the heating effect of radiant energy and which may contain
    optical means; subclasses 243+ for photocells of the primary battery type
    which depend upon the presence of visible radiant energy for their
    operation; and subclasses 291 for applications of these photocells.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 501.1 contains photosensitive resistance
    compositions.


    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 10, 11, 21, 53-56, 113-118, 184-189, 225-234, 257, 258, 290-294,
    and 414-466 for radiation-sensitive active semiconductors devices.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 364+ for
    photosensitive cathode-ray tubes, and subclasses 523+ for other
    photosensitive discharge devices.


    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclasses 298+ for thermally responsive switches.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 15+ for electrical resistors, per
    se, whose resistance value changes in response to a change in light
    intensity, e.g., photoconductive type electrical resistors.

    (8)     Note. TO COMPLETE THE SEARCH FOR THIS SUBJECT MATTER:

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    336.1+, where the photocell has characteristics which cause it to respond
    principally to the invisible portion of the radiation spectrum or where the
    photocell is combined with means to insure that it will respond to the
    invisible portion of the radiation spectrum. Illustrative of such
    photocells are a Geiger-Mueller counter and a conventional photocell
    provided with an ultraviolet ray filter, respectively. Where the photocell
    will respond to both visible and invisible radiant energy and is not
    provided with means for enhancing response to invisible radiant energy or
    diminishing response to visible radiant energy, classification is in
    subclasses 200+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 10+ for
    photocell controlled cathode-ray tube circuits. See (4) and (6c) Notes,
    supra. Subclass 134 provides for indicator or alarm signal in an electron
    tube circuit controlled by a photoelectric cell.  Subclasses 149+ provide
    for photocell circuits which control an electric lamp or an electronic tube
    of the gas or vapor type.  See subclass 150 where the lamp or gas or vapor
    tube is itself a photocell, subclass 151 where the lamp which illuminates
    the photocell is in the output circuit of the photocell, (see (6) Note, b,
    above and subclasses 156 and 157 where the photocell controls the operation
    of a gas or vapor type electronic tube or lamp (see (6) Note, c, above).

    (9)     Note.  FOR RELATED SUBJECT MATTER:

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    354.1,  for photocell means to control the amount of invisible radiation
    falling on the photocell.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 319, with
    automatic control.

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, photoresponsive control of stopping
    fiber preparation apparatus.

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 363, electrical telemetering with
    a photoelectric pickoff; subclass 707, distance, including optical.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 465+ for special
    effects displays with photoelectric switching.

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclass 25, radiant energy control,
    and subclasses 197+, photocell control of an up-and-over closure opener.

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 274+, with signals and indicators (e.g.,
    inspection means).

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 233+, condition responsive thrust bearing
    means for reaction motors; subclass 254, solid propellant type reaction
    motors including means to regulate or terminate motive fluid production.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 139 and 140, automatic control by
    accumulation of ice or frost.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 6+ control means stimulated by
    condition responsive, including condition responsive sensor.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 23, 23.1, 53+ including 61.4,
    73+, 104, 151+, 861+,  and 290 for measuring and testing involving, inter
    alia, radiant energy detection; subclass 705, photoelectric fluid projector
    gauge.


    84,     Music, subclasses 639 and 724 for musical instruments in which the
    sound is produced from electric currents which are generated or controlled
    by photocells or for the photocell subcombinations of such musical
    instruments, when restricted to such use.

    89,     Ordnance, subclass 41.06 for operation by photocell control of
    certain motors.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 342, with signal,
    indicator, or tester.

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 80.23+, for embroidery with optical pattern
    program means; subclasses 470.01+ for pattern control means.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 691, photoelectric sensor responsive to
    condition of coated material.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclass 56, automatic
    controls, and subclass 113, with, inter alia, testing, inspecting or
    illuminating means.


    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 78.1, ambient condition responsive;
    subclass 93, sensing condition optically.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 192+, automatic cutoff or diversion control.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclass 5 for
    closures, partitions or panels which are automatically controlled by a
    photocell.


    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclass 263, measuring, testing
    inspecting, indicating or illumination.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 4.1, with measuring, testing, inspecting
    or condition sensing.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 250+, with indicating, testing, measuring or
    locating.


    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 41, combined with ray
    energy detection or measuring.

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclass 317 for an electric control for an elevator door having a position
    detector mounted on the door and subclass 392 for an elevator with a
    position detector for monitoring passengers.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 29, photocell control of
    stop; subclass 142, radio tuner stop control.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 356+, with condition
    responsive control means, especially subclass 358, sensing condition of
    source or destination.


    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 509+,
    especially subclasses 576+, for devices containing a photocell, which will
    classify, separate or assort objects in accordance with their optical
    properties or their appearance, such as glossiness, color or size.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 745, process control by
    optical sensing of condition.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 121.6 laser beam position control.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclasses 2+, with control
    means responsive to sensed condition.

    235,    Registers, subclasses 400+, ordnance or weapons computer, including
    subclass 411, with target tracking means; subclasses 375+, systems
    controlled by data bearing members.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 33+ with
    automatic control

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 331.4, 410+, 534+, and
    563+ for a detector or stop for regulating winding, unwinding, or
    tensioning of an elongated material.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 3.1+, missile stabilization or trajectory
    control using radiant energy.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, Subs. 29+, Railway traffic control
    system using photocell.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 10, 11, 21, 53-56, 113-118, 184-189, 225-234, 257, 258, 290-294,
    and 414-466 for radiation-sensitive active semiconductors devices.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Testing:
    Processes,ssubclasses 408+, measuring, testing or inspecting by passing
    light through material.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 117,
    radiant energy responsive switching systems; subclass 10.8 vehicle mounted
    light system.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 523+,
    photosensitive.


    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 63 for arc lamps in which the feeding of the electrodes is
    controlled by a photocell.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclasses 10+, with
    radiant energy sensitive control means, subclasses 82+ for vehicle headlamp
    as by dimming when the photocell is illuminated by the headlamps of another
    vehicle, and subclass 134, with signal indicator or alarm readout energy
    responsive control.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 560+, particularly
    subclass 640 for electric motor position servo systems which may be
    responsive to a photocell; subclasses 576+, particularly subclass 577 for
    electric motor systems in which a photocell senses a pattern and controls
    the motor in accordance with the sensing; and subclass 480 for other
    photocell controlled electric motor systems.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 26 for electric
    generator systems having a generator and a photocell which controls the
    generator or the driving means for the generator.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 221 for
    voltage magnitude control systems having a photocell which automatically
    controls the system.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 344, using a radiant
    energy receiver for geological measurement or test; subclass 96, light
    detector.


    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 509+, miscellaneous circuits responsive to radiant
    energy.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 59, light controlled or activated device.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 66, light responsive ambient condition
    sensor.


    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 2+, electromagnetically actuated switches.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclasses 298+ for thermally responsive switches.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 15+ for light responsive
    electrical resistors.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 902+ for vehicle carried
    photocell system; subclasses 870.28+, for telemetering via light beam;
    subclasses 500+ for photocell controlled condition responsive devices;
    e.g., alarms; subclass 942, for photoelectric vehicle detectors.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 1+, digital pattern
    reading converter, especially subclasses 13, optical, and 14, optical
    waveguide, and subclass 31, photoelectric actuated keyboard code generator.

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 52+, with diverse type radiant energy
    system.


    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 180+ for light pen input to
    selective visual display communication systems.

    346,    Recorders, subclass 33, combined with external optical system
    recorder operating means.

    348,    Television, subclasses 207+ and 332 for television system with
    photocell and subclasses 602+ for photocell controlled cathode-ray tube.

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclass
    210, using photodetector to detect eye movement.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 140, focus control; and subclass
    141, automatic diaphragm control.

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, subclasses 25+, selective data
    retrieval.


    355,    Photocopying, subclasses 55+, photodetector used with focus or
    magnification control; subclass 41, identifying, composing or selecting
    using photocell; subclass 38, color film exposure or light intensity
    control; subclasses 203+, photocopiers with diagnostic testing; subclass
    68, illumination system including photocell.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, particularly subclasses 300+ for
    photoelectric spectroscopic apparatus, subclasses 345+ for photoelectric
    interference type test apparatus, subclasses 364+ for polarized light
    tests, subclasses 128+ for photoelectric refraction test apparatus,
    subclasses 402+ for shade or color tests, subclasses 433+ for light
    transmission tests, subclasses 445+ for light reflection tests, subclasses
    218+ for photoelectric type photometers, and subclasses 237+ for
    photoelectric flaw testing apparatus.

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 400+ and 471+ for facsimile devices with
    photocell.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    507+, moisture or foreign particle control of optical elements or systems.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 31,
    monitoring or testing recording progress; subclass 74.6 photoelectric
    stopping or reversing control; subclass 114, magneto-optic head.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 173+ for
    photocell controlled relay and electromagnet circuits. See (6) Note. c,
    above.


    362,    Illumination, subclasses 276 and 277+ for illuminating means having
    a movable screen which is automatically controlled by a photocell, and
    subclass 4, light responsive photographic lighting.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 125+ for rectifying
    systems having rectifiers of the selenium type, analogous to selenium
    photocells.


    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 525+,
    Optics or Photography; subclasses 550+, measuring, testing or monitoring,
    especially subclasses 556+, for basic measurements; subclasses 806+, analog
    computer simulation of physical phenomena; subclasses 822, optical
    correlation or convolution.


    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 106+, radiant
    energy; subclasses 215+, optical read-write circuits; subclasses 234+,
    optical address.

    367,    Communications, Electrical: Acoustic Wave Systems andDevices,
    subclass 64, optical processing of seismic signals; subclasses 140+, signal
    transducer.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclass 11, ambient
    light sensor.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 44+, optical
    transducers; subclasses 100+, radiation beam modification by storage
    medium.


    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 1+, optical.

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, subclasses 9+, particular beam control
    device.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 121+ for temperature
    measurement by an arrangement responsive to thermally emitted radiation by
    the body whose temperature it measured.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclass 248, testing reactor condition using optics.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 53, with photoelectric detector; subclass 6,
    counting inanimate entities.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 97 and 108 for
    source control in response to detecting radiation therefrom.

    382,    Image Analysis, all subclasses.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 549+ for phototype composing, subclasses
    89+ for automatic camera focussing with photoelectric control; subclasses
    213+ for automatic exposure control; and subclass 570 for photocell
    controlled fluid-treating means.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 706+, for indicating position of
    line or end of page, including detector of record medium.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclass 128, tracer adapted to
    trigger a photocell.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 50+, analyzer, indicator or
    manipulative laboratory device; subclass 162, automatic analytical monitor
    and control of industrial products; subclass 85, with color change;
    subclass 91, gas analysis with absorption and with photometric detector;
    subclass 106, control element responsive to sensed liquid level.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 9.1+
    for in vivo diagnosis and testing compositions and subclasses 10.1+ for
    Class 424 compositions with an identification or warning feature.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 10, optical measuring, testing and
    indicating.


    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 1+, electromagnetic sensor
    to detect or determine range; subclasses 112+, communication aids for
    handicapped; subclass 187, measurement of length or volume; subclass 240,
    radio navigation with light sensor in simulator; subclass 303, science,
    physics, optics; subclass 325, image projector and light detector used in
    question or problem; subclass 337, correctness of response using light
    detector; subclasses 355 and 358, grading a response using light sensor.

    435,    Chemistry: Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 288.7 for
    optical sensing apparatus; and subclasses 4+ for measuring or testing.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 164+,
    optical result; subclass 805, optical property.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacture: Process, particularly subclass 7
    for methods of making semiconductor devices having a step controlled in
    response to a sensed optical condition and subclass 16 for methods having a
    step of measuring an optical condition.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclass 175, having light or sound
    responsive switch or control.

    463,    Amusement Devices: Games, subclasses 51+ for a game in which an
    electromagnetic ray (e.g., a  light ray, etc.) is used to simulate a
    projectile fired from a gun, torpedo launcher, etc., which game may include
    a photocell (often as part of a target for the gun, torpedo launcher, etc.).

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 3+, condition responsive control means,
    especially subclass 10, using photocell.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 150+ for high temperature (Tc greater than 30 K) superconducting
    devices, subclasses 300+ for processes of producing high temperature
    superconductor or superconductive devices, particularly subclasses 320,
    325, and 480+ for use of radiant energy or particle bombardment; and
    cross-reference art collections 842+ for superconductor measuring and
    testing.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 300+ for diagnostic testing.

    901,    Robots, subclass 47, optical sensing device.

    902,    Electronic Funds Transfer, subclasses 41, with means to read data
    stored on identifier.

    (10)    Note. INDEX TO CLASSES AND SUBCLASSES REFERRED TO IN PREVIOUS
    SECTIONS:

                                    Note
                                    No.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and
    General Cleaning, subclass
    319, with automatic control     9

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation,
    photo responsive
    control of stopping fiber
    preparation apparatus.  9

    33,     Geometrical Instruments,
    subclass363, electrical
    telemetering with a
    photoelectric pickoff;
    subclass 707, distance,
    including optical       9

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign
    Exhibiting, subclasses 465+
    for special effects displays
    with photoelectric switching    9

    49,     Movable or Removable
    Closures, subclass 25,
    radiant energy control,
    and subclasses 197+,
    photocell control of an
    up-and-over closure opener      9

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses
    274+, with signals and
    indicators (e.g., inspection
    means)                  9

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 233+,
    condition responsive thrust
    bearing means for reaction
    motors; subclass 254, solid
    propellant type reaction
    motors including means to
    regulate or terminate motive
    fluid production        9

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 139
    and 140, automatic control by
    accumulation of ice or frost    9

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 6+,
    control means stimulated by
    condition responsive, including
    condition responsive sensor     9

    73,     Measuring and Testing,
    subclasses 23, 23.1, 53+
    including 61.4, 73+, 104, 151+,
    861+, and 290 for
    measuring and testing
    involving, inter alia,
    radiant energy detection;
    subclass 705, photoelectric
    fluid protector gauge   9

    84,     Music, [Subclass 1.18
    Musical tones produced
    by photocells] subclasses
    639 and 724, for
    photocell controlled tone
    generators              9

    89,     Ordnance, subclass 41.06
    for operation by photocell
    control of certain
    motors                  9

    99,     Foods and Beverages:
    Apparatus, subclass 342,
    with signal, indicator,or
    tester                  9

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 80.23+,
    for embroidery with
    optical pattern program
    means; subclasses 84, and
    121.11, for pattern control
    means                   9

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass
    691, photoelectric sensor
    responsive to condition of
    coated material 9

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid
    Contact With Solids, subclass
    56, automatic controls,
    and subclass 113, with,
    inter alia, testing, inspecting
    or illuminating means   9

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric
    and Photoelectric, subclasses
    213+ Thermal photocell
    batteries               7
    subclasses 243+
    Primary photocell
    batteries               7

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass
    78.1,ambient condition
    responsive; subclass 93,
    sensing condition
    optically               9

    141,    Fluent Material Handling
    With Receiver or Receiver
    Coacting Means, subclasses
    192+, automatic cutoff
    or diversion control    9

    160,    Flexible or Portable
    Closure, Partition,
    or Panel, subclass 5
    closure, partition or
    panel controlled by photocell   9

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber
    Liberation, subclass 263,
    measuring, testing,
    inspecting, indicating
    or illumination 9

    164,    Metal Founding,
    subclass 4.1, with
    measuring, testing,
    inspecting or condition
    sensing                 9

    166,    Wells, subclasses 250+,
    with indicating, testing
    measuring or
    locating                        9

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the
    Earth, subclass 41, combined
    with ray energy detection
    or measuring    9

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 70,
    photocell repeaters     3

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift
    Truck, or Stationary Lift
    for Vehicle, subclass 317
    for an electric control for
    an elevator door having a
    position detector mounted
    on the door and subclass
    392 for an elevator with a
    position detector for
    monitoring passengers   9

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop
    Control, subclass 29, photocell
    control  of stop; subclass
    142, radio tuner stop
    control                         9

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven,
    subclasses 356+, with
    condition responsive
    control means, especially
    subclass 358, sensing condition
    of source or destination        9

    209,    Classifying, Separating,
    and Assorting Solids, sorters
    separators, classifiers using
    photocell subclasses 511, 524,
    536, and 576 for radiant energy
    type automatic assorting        9

    210,    Liquid Purification or
    Separation, subclass 745,
    process control by optical
    sensing of condition    9

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass
    121.6 laser beam position
    control                 9

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving
    Apparatus, subclasses 2+, with
    control means responsive to
    sensed condition.       9

    235,    Registers, subclasses 400+,
    ordnance or weapons computer,
    includes subclass 411, with target
    tracking means; subclasses 375+,
    systems controlled by
    data bearing members    9

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or
    Disintegration, subclasses 33+,
    with automatic control  9

    242,    Winding, Tensioning,
    or Guiding, subclass 36,
    bobbin and cop winding
    detectors and stops.    9

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 3.1+,
    missile stabilization or trajectory
    control using radiant energy    9

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals,
    subclasses 29+, railway traffic
    control system using photocell  3

    252,    Compositions, subclass 501.1    7

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices
    (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State
    Diodes), subclasses 10, 11, 21,
    53-56, 113-118, 184-189, 225-234,
    257, 258, 290-294, and 414-466
    for radiation-sensitive active
    semiconductors devices  9

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic
    Article Shaping or Treating:
    Processes, subclass 40.2, measuring,
    testing or inspecting by passing
    light through material   2,4

     273,   Amusement Devices:  Games,
    subclass [101.1] 310, amusement
    device with light ray and
    photocell target; subclass 26,
    baseball practice device        9

    307,    Electrical Transmission or
    Interconnection Systems,
    subclass 117, radiant energy
    responsive switching systems;
    subclass 10.8 for vehicle
    mounted light system    9

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge
    Devices, subclasses 365+,
    Photosensitive cathode-ray
    devices                         7
    subclasses 523+,
    Photosensitive discharge
    devices                 7

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge
    Devices:  Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 63 arc lamp with
    radiant energy control  9

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge
    Devices:  Systems
    subclasses 10+ Cathode-ray
    tube controlled by photocell    4,6c,8
    subclasses 82+ Vehicle
    headlamp system with
    photocell control       9
    subclass 134, radiant energy
    responsive control type signal,
    indicator or alarm      9
    subclasses 149+ Lamp or gas
    tube controlled by photocell    6b,6c,8

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems,
    subclass 480 Electric motor
    controlled by photocell 9
    subclasses 560+, especially 640
    electric motor follow up
    with photoelectric control      9
    subclasses 576+, especially 577
    Electric motor controlled by
    pattern sensed by photocell     9
    subclass 640, positional servo
    with photoelectric control       9

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator
    Systems, subclass 26 Electric
    generator or its drive controlled
    by photocell            9

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply
    or Regulation Systems, subclass
    221 for voltage magnitude control
    systems having a photocell which
    automatically controls the system       9

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and
    Testing, subclass 344, using
    a radiant energy receiver for
    geological measurement or test;
    subclass 96, light detector     9

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical
    Nonlinear Devices, Circuits,
    and Systems, subclasses 509+,
    miscellaneous circuits responsive
    to radiant energy       3,9

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 59, light
    controlled or activated device  9

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 66, light
    responsive ambient condition
    sensor                  9

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically
    Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 2+,
    electromagnetically actuated
    switches                        9

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally
    or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclasses 298+ for thermally
    responsive switches     9

    338,    Electrical Resistors,
    subclasses 15+ for light
    responsive electrical resistors 7

    340,    Communications:  Electrical,
    subclasses 902+ Vehicle carried
    photocell system        3
    subclasses 870.28+,
    Telemetering via light beam     3
    subclasses 500+ Photocell
    controlled condition responsive
    devices, e.g., alarms   3
    subclass 942, photoelectric
    vehicle detectors       3
    [subclass 600 Photocell alarm]

    341,    Coded Data Generation or
    Conversion, subclasses 1+,
    digital pattern reading
    converter, especially subclasses
    13, optical, and 14, optical
    waveguide, and subclass 31,
    photoelectric actuated keyboard
    code generator  5

    342,    Communications:  Directive
    Radio Wave Systems and Devices
    (e.g., Radar, Radio Navigation),
    subclasses 52+, with diverse type
    radiant energy system   3

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing,
    Operator Interface Processing,
    and Selective Visual Display
    Systems, subclasses 180+ for light
    pen input to selective visual display
    communication systems.

    346,    Recorders, subclass 33, combined
    with external optical system
    recorder operating means        9

    348,    Television, subclasses 207+ and 332 for television system with
    photocell and subclasses 602+ for photocell controlled cathode-ray tube.

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision
    Testing and Correcting,
    subclass 210, using photodetector
    to detect eye movement  9

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures,
    subclass 140, focus control; and
    subclass 141, automatic diaphragm
    control                 9

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors,
    subclasses 25+, selective
    retrieval               9

    355,    Photocopying, subclasses 55+,
    photodetector used with focus
    or magnification control; subclass
    41, identifying, composing or
    selecting using photocell;
    subclass 38, color film exposure
    or light intensity control;
    subclasses 203+, photocopiers
    with diagnostic testing; subclass
    68, illumination system including
    photocell               9

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing,
    all subclasses  2

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 400+
    and 471+ for facsimile
    devices with   photocell        9

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    507+, moisture or       9 foreign particle control of optical elements or
    systems and subclasses 109+ for light wave communication.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information
    Storage or Retrieval, subclass
    31, monitoring or testing
    recording progress; subclass
    74.6 photoelectric stopping or
    reversing control; subclass 114,
    magneto-optic head      9

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems
    and Devices, subclasses 173+
    for electromagnetic device
    controlled by a light
    responsive element      6c,9

    362,    Illumination, subclasses
    276 and 277+ for illuminating
    means having a movable screen
    which is automatically
    controlled by a photocell; and
    subclass 4, light responsive
    photographic lighting   9

    363,    Electric Power Conversion
    Systems, subclasses 125+ for
    rectifying systems having
    rectifiers of the selenium type,
    analogous to selenium photocells        9

    364,    Electrical Computers and
    Data Processing Systems,
    subclasses 525+, Optics or
    Photography; subclasses 550+,
    measuring, testing or monitoring,
    especially subclasses 556+, for
    basic measurements; subclasses
    806+, analog computer
    simulation of physical
    phenomena; subclasses 822,
    optical correlation or convolution      9

    365,    Static Information Storage and
    Retrieval, subclasses 106+, radiant
    energy; subclasses 215+, optical
    read-write circuits; subclasses
    234+, optical address   9

    367,    Communications, Electrical:
    Acoustic Wave System and Devices,
    subclass 64, optical processing
    of seismic signals; subclasses
    140+, signal transducer 9

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring
    Systems or Devices, subclass 11,
    ambient light sensor    9

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or
    Retrieval, subclasses 44+,
    optical transducers; subclasses
    100+, radiation beam modification
    by storage medium       9

    370,    Multiplex Communications,
    subclasses 1+, optical  9

    372,    Coherent Light Generators,
    subclasses 9+, particular beam
    control device  9

    374,    Thermal Measuring and
    Testing, subclasses 121+ for
    temperature measuring arrangement;
    subclasses 159+, nonelectrical,
    nonmagnetic or nonmechanical
    temperature responsive property,
    especially, 161+, change of optical
    property                9

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:
    Processes, Systems,
    and Elements, subclass 248,
    testing reactor condition
    using optics            9

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters,
    Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 53,
    with photoelectric detector; subclass
    6, counting inanimate entities  9

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or
    Devices, subclasses 20, 68+,
    177+, 195+, and 205+ for
    X-ray devices with object
    alignment or positioning        9

    382,    Image Analysis, all
    subclasses              9

    396,    Photography,
    subclasses 549+ for
    phototype composing,
    subclasses 89+ for
    automatic camera
    focussing with
    photoelectric control;
    subclasses 213+ for
    automatic exposure control;
    and subclass 570
    for photocell controlled
    fluid-treating means.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses
    706+, for indicating position of
    line or end of page, including
    detector of record medium       9

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or
    Planing, subclass 128, tracer
    adapted to trigger a photocell  9

    422,    Chemical Apparatus
    and Process Disinfecting,
    Deodorizing, Preserving,
    or Sterilizing, subclasses 50+,
    analyzer, indicator or manipulative
    laboratory device; subclass 162,
    automatic analytical monitor and
    control of industrial products;
    subclass 85, with color change;
    subclass 91, gas analysis with
    absorption and with photometric
    detector; subclass 106, control
    element responsive to sensed
    liquid level            9

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body
    Treating Compositions,
    subclasses 9.1+ for in
    vivo diagnosis and testing
    compositions and subclasses 10.1+
    for Class 424 compositions
    with an identification or
    warning feature.        9

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 10,
    optical measuring, testing and
    indicating              9

    434,    Education and Demonstration,
    subclasses 1+, electromagnetic
    sensor to detect or determine
    range; subclasses 112+,
    communication aids for handicapped;
    subclass 187, ,measurement of length
    or volume; subclass 240, radio
    navigation with light sensor in
    simulator; subclass 303, science,
    physics, optics; subclass 325,
    image projector and light detector
    used in question or problem; subclass
    337, correctness of response using
    light detector; subclasses 355 and
    358, grading a response using
    light sensor            9

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology
    and Microbiology, subclass 808,
    optical sensing apparatus; subclasses
    4+, measuring or testing        9

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical
    and Immunological Testing,
    subclasses 164+, optical result;
    subclass 805, optical property  9

    438,    Semiconductor Device
    Manufacture: Process,
    particularly subclass 7
    for methods of making
    semiconductor devices
    having a step controlled
    in response to a sensed
    optical condition and
    subclass 16 for methods
    having a step of measuring
    an optical condition    9

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys,
    subclass 175, having light or
    sound responsive switch or control      9

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube
    From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses
    3+, condition responsive control
    means, especially subclass 10,
    using photocell 9

    505,    Superconductor Technology:
    Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 150+ for high
    temperature (Tc greater than 30 K)
    superconducting devices,
    subclasses 300+ for processes
    of producing high temperature
    superconductor or superconductive
    devices, particularly subclasses
    320, 325, and 480+ for use
    of radiant energy or particle
    bombardment; and cross-
    reference art collections
    842+ for superconductor
    measuring and testing   9

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 300+
    for diagnostic testing.

    901,    Robots, subclass 47, optical
    sensing device  9

    902,    Electronic Funds Transfer,
    subclasses 41, with means to read
    data stored on identifier       9


CLS 250/201.1
TXT Photocell controls its own optical systems:
    Subject matter under subclass 200 in which the photocell automatically
    controls the illumination which falls on the photocell by altering optical
    means located between a source of illumination and the photocell or by
    altering the illumination source.

    (1)     Note.  The control of the illumination may be achieved by altering
    the source of light (e.g., intensity or position) or by altering the
    optical path between source of light and photocell (e.g., transparency of
    light transmitting medium or position of photocell or optics).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205,    for photocell controlled circuits for controlling light source
    intensity.

    206.1+, for photocell controlled circuits or devices which do not control
    the illumination of the photocell.

    216+,   for optical systems which control the illumination of a photocell.


CLS 250/201.2
TXT Automatic focus control:
    Subject matter under subclass 201.1 in which at least one photocell is used
    to automatically adjust a lens to form a distinct image of an object on an
    imaging surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    396,    Photography, subclasses 89+ for automatic camera focussing having
    photoelectric control.


CLS 250/201.3
TXT Of a microscope:
    Subject matter under subclass 201.2 in which the focusing of the light
    image in a microscope is controlled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    368+, for optical microscopes, per se.


CLS 250/201.4
TXT Active autofocus:
    Subject matter under subclass 201.2 having means to illuminate the object
    with light other than, or supplementary to, ambient light.

    (1)     Note.  Optical elements or systems of optical elements, e.g.,
    reflectors, used to concentrate or otherwise intensify ambient illumination
    are encompassed by active autofocus illumination means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    396,    Photography, subclasses 106+ for automatic camera focussing using
    active ranging, for related subject matter when the camera structure is
    claimed as well as active focussing means.


CLS 250/201.5
TXT With optical storage medium; e.g., optical disc, etc:
    Subject matter under subclass 201.4 in which the image is formed on the
    surface of an optical information storage or retrieval medium, e.g., an
    optical disc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 45 for patents
    claiming details of the optical storage medium or writing or reading of
    information to or from the medium, and subclasses 100+ for optical details
    of the optical information storage and retrieval system.


CLS 250/201.6
TXT Based on triangulation:
    Subject matter under subclass 201.2 in which the focusing is based on
    geometric triangulation using a baseline distance between at least two
    photocells.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter differs from that in Class 356,
    subclasses 3.01+ in that subject matter in this subclass provides for
    triangulation to achieve automatic focus control of an optical
    pre-photocell system whereas subject, matter in Class 356, subclasses 3.01+
    uses  triangulation to measure the distance of an object from the photocell
    or pre-photocell system.


CLS 250/201.7
TXT Based on contrast:
    Subject matter under subclass 201.2 in which the photo-cell generates
    signals used to create an image and adjustment of the focus is based on the
    degree of contrast in all or part of the image, i.e., on the ratio of the
    darkest and lightest portions of all or part of the image.


CLS 250/201.8
TXT Based on image shift:
    Subject matter under subclass 201.2 in which the focusing is based on
    coincidence of two images of the same object moved in the same plane or of
    the displacement or distance between different images of the same object in
    the same plane, e.g., the photodetector plane.


CLS 250/201.9
TXT Light beam wavefront phase adaptation:
    Subject matter under subclass 201.1 in which the phases of light waves are
    sensed and compared, and their sum or difference is used to control the
    optical system.


CLS 250/202
TXT Subject matter under subclass 201.1 having means for illuminating the
    photocell in accordance with the relative position of the photocell and a
    pattern, and having means for causing the photocell to follow the edge of
    the pattern under control of said illumination, or for causing the optical
    path between pattern and photocell to change, under the control of said
    illumination, so that the photocell follows the edge of the pattern image.

    (1)     Note.  The edge of the pattern may be either a thick or thin line
    or the line of demarcation between two areas of different optical
    properties.  The photocell may follow the pattern either by moving
    spatially or by causing the pattern to move past the photocell while the
    photocell remains stationary.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    548,    for optical systems including a web, strand, strip, or sheet and a
    photocell controlling same.

    559.01+, for optical systems, including a web, strand, strip, or sheet and
    photocell circuit.


CLS 250/203.1
TXT Following a target (e.g., a star or instrument pointer or other object)
    other than a pattern:Subject matter under subclass 201.1 having means for
    illuminating the photocell in accordance with the relative position of the
    photoelectric cell and an object, and having means for causing the
    photoelectric cell to follow the object under the control of said
    illumination.

    (1)     Note.  The object may be a star, a search light at the end of a
    luminous glide path beam or a spot or an instrument.

    (2)     Note.  The photocell must follow the object, as seen through the
    associated optical system. However, the photocell itself, or the supporting
    structure, as a whole, need not follow the point, as in a guided missile
    which is guided towards a terrestrial target by heavenly bodies sensed by a
    self-carried photocell guiding apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 3.16, for missile stabilization or trajectory
    control using optical guidance.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 640 for electric motor
    follow-up systems wherein the motor control includes a photocell responsive
    to a moving light point.

    346,    Recorders, subclasses 31 and 32 for photocell systems which control
    a recorder in accordance with an instrument which operates, free of the
    mechanical burden, of the recorder, in which the pointer of the instrument
    is sensed and followed by the photocell, which controls the system which
    drives the recorder and following means.

    382,    Image Analysis, subclass 60, image sensing curve tracers for
    systems that follow the contour of a character as part of an optical
    character reader.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclass 4, optical radar included in
    a simulator; and subclass 240, light sensor included in simulator of radio
    navigation equipment.

    463,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 51+ for a game in which an
    electromagnetic ray (e.g., a light ray, etc.) is used to stimulate a
    projectile fired from a gun, torpedo launcher, etc., which game may include
    a photocell (often as part of a target for the gun, torpedo launcher, etc.)

    473,    Amusement Devices: Games, subclasses 140+, 151+, 176, 192, and 199
    for moving golf ball detection which may involve a photocell.


CLS 250/203.2
TXT Target illuminated by artificial light source:
    Subject matter under subclass 203.1 in which the object to be tracked is,
    as disclosed, illuminated by an artificial light source, e.g., a laser, and
    the light from that source which is reflected from the target is detected
    and used to track the object.


CLS 250/203.3
TXT Self-luminous target:
    Subject matter under subclass 203.1 in which the object to be tracked emits
    light which is detected and used to track the object.


CLS 250/203.4
TXT Sun:
    Subject matter under subclass 203.3 wherein the self-luminous target to be
    tracked is the Sun.

    (1)     Note.  Since solar radiation is so intense at or near the earth's
    surface. Many solar trackers track a shadow cast by an object in between
    the sun and the photocell.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 573+, for solar heat collectors
    with tracking means controlled by sun position tracking sensor; and
    subclasses 600+ for means to reposition solar collector for optimum
    radiation exposure.


CLS 250/203.5
TXT Cathode-ray tube scanning:
    Subject matter under 203.3 in which the self luminous target followed is a
    spot of light on the face of a cathode-ray tube (CRT).


CLS 250/203.6
TXT Airborne target, or spaceborne target other than the sun (e.g., star or
    missile):

    Subject matter under subclass 203.3 where the self-luminous target is a
    star or other spaceborne object other than the sun, e.g., a missile exhaust
    plume.

    (1)     Note.  The brightness of these objects is substantially lower than
    that of the Sun.


CLS 250/203.7
TXT With moving reticle in optical path:
    Subject matter under subclass 203.3 in which a moving, e.g., oscillating or
    rotating, apertured or patterned element is in the optical path between the
    target and photocell to modulate the light reaching the photocell from the
    target.

    (1)     Note.  A reticle is often used (a) to chop the light reaching the
    photodetector(s) to permit a-c amplification of the signal generated by the
    photodetector(s); (b) to aid in distinguishing the target from background
    illumination; and (c) to generate signals indicative of the position (e.g.,
    azimuth and elevation) of a target.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233,    rotary light chopping light valves for reticles used to control
    light reaching a photocell.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    234+ for reticles which rotate in an optical path to control light.


CLS 250/204
TXT Subject matter under subclass 201.1 having two optical paths from a source
    or two sources of illumination to one or more photocells and having means
    for controlling one or more of the optical paths so that the ratio of light
    flux which traverses the different optical paths stays constant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208.1+, for similar subject matter having plural photocells in an electric
    circuit which does not control the illumination reaching the photocells.

    578,    for photocell illuminating systems having plural light paths to one
    or more photocells.


CLS 250/205
TXT Subject matter under subclass 201.1 having means for controlling the
    intensity of the light source which illuminates the photoelectric cell in
    accordance with the illumination which falls upon the photoelectric cell.

    (1)     Note.  In addition to the means for controlling the light source,
    there may be means between the light source and the photoelectric cell to
    variably divert or absorb the light which passes from the light source to
    the photocell.  Where the sole means for controlling the light which
    reaches the photoelectric cell is means to variably divert or absorb the
    light rays, the patent is not classified in this subclass, but will be
    found in subclasses 201.1 through 204 above.

    (2)     Note.  The light source whose intensity may be controlled may be an
    electric light, a gas flame or any other source of light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201.1   through 204, see (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 151, where
    the source of illumination is an electric lamp or gas or vapor discharge
    device, the photocell controls the electrical condition or electrical
    characteristics of the source of illumination and there is no significant
    optical structure in the optical path between source of illumination and
    photocell.


CLS 250/206
TXT Subject matter under subclass 200 in which the photocell controls an
    electrical or electro-mechanical system circuit, and systems circuits under
    subclass 200 for supplying electric current and/or potential to a photocell.

    (1)     Note.  In order to be classified in this and indented subclasses,
    the electrical or electro-mechanical system circuit should be significant.
    It is significant if it is recited in the claims more specifically than by
    name only, or if it is disclosed as being nonconventional.


CLS 250/206.1
TXT Having means to generate positional information in at least one plane of a
    target moving relative to one or more photodetectors:Subject matter under
    subclass 206 in which photodetecting means generate signals proportional to
    the position in at least one plane of a target moving relative to the
    photodetecting means.

    (1)     Note.  In order to be classified in this and indented subclasses,
    the electrical or electromechanical system should be significant. It is
    significant if it is recited in the claims more specifically than by name
    only, or if it is disclosed as being nonconventional.

    (2)     Note.  Subject matter in this subclass is differentiated from that
    in subclasses 203+ because in those subclasses, photocell output signals
    are used to control the pre-photocell optical system whereas in this
    subclass, no control of the pre-photocell optical system occurs or, if it
    does, is not claimed.

    (3)     Note.  If a means for indicating the positional information is
    claimed, then classification is in Class 356, subclasses 139.04 through
    139.08, 141.1 through 141.5 and 152.1 through 152.3.

    (4)     Note.  The subject matter in this and indented subclasses is
    differentiated from that in subclasses 231.4+, in that, the latter
    subclasses deal with rotating shafts which are not considered to be moving
    targets since their location in global space is fixed even though they are
    rotating on an axis. Targets, on the other hand, are changing their global
    position regardless of whether they are spinning about an axis.


CLS 250/206.2
TXT Detection of positional information in two more planes (e.g., azimuth and
    elevation; hour angle and declination):

    Subject matter under subclass 206.1 in which the positional information of
    a target moving relative to one or more photocells relates to two or more
    planes, e.g., azimuth and elevation, or hour angle and declination, and may
    be  expressed in any coordinate system, e.g., Cartesian (X,Y,Z) or radial
    (r, theta).


CLS 250/206.3
TXT With moving reticle in optical path:

    Subject matter under subclass 206.2 in which a moving, e.g., rotating or
    oscillating, apertured or patterned element is in the optical path between
    the target and photodetector(s) to modulate the light reaching the
    photodetector(s) from the target.

    (1)     Note.  A reticle is often used (a) to chop the light reaching the
    photodetector(s) to permit amplification of the signal generated by the
    photodetector(s); (b) to aid in distinguishing the target from background
    illumination; and (c) to generate signals indicative of the position (e.g.,
    azimuth and elevation) of a target.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233,    rotary light choppers to modify light reaching a photocell.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    234+ for reticles which rotate in an optical path to control light.


CLS 250/207
TXT Subject matter under subclass 206.1 in which the photocell has plural
    electrodes, one or more of which is photoemissive, and in which secondary
    emission takes place.

    (1)     Note.  Secondary emission is the emission of electrons from a
    material when bombarded by primary electrons. The secondary emission may
    take place at       the photoelectric cathode or at one or plural other
    electrodes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 42 for amplifiers having a secondary emissive
    tube.


CLS 250/208.1
TXT Plural photosensitive image detecting element arrays:
    Subject matter under subclass 206 having plural photocells structured in
    the form of a one or two dimensional array capable of sensing an image of
    an object viewed by the array.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter in this subclass does not provide for means,
    e.g., electronic scanning means, coupled to the photosensitive image
    detecting array to generate a picture image.

    (2)     Note.  Subject matter in this subclass includes arrangements of
    semiconductive photosensitive elements within an array which control an
    optical or electrical device and, therefore, do not fall within the scope
    of certain subclasses in Class 257 which are limited to arrays, per se.

    (3)     Note.  If plural photocells are used to generate a picture image of
    an object viewed by the plural photocells, e.g., linear or area photocell
    arrays, the pictorial signal scanning and generation means will remove the
    subject matter from this class and subclass and take it to Class 348,
    subclasses 294+ and 332 and Class 358, Facsimile, subclasses 471+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204,    for photocell systems having plural optical paths which terminate
    at plural photosensitive electrodes and in which the optical paths are
    controlled by the photosensitive electrodes to balance the light flux in
    the plural paths.

    207,    for photocell systems in which the photocell has plural electrodes,
    some of which act as secondary emitters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 294+, for solid-state image sensor and
    subclass 332 for array of photocells for generating visible image of an
    object.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 222 for use of plural
    photocell photometers; subclass 343, using plural photocells to detect
    particle light scattering; subclass 411, for use of plural photocells to
    measure color of flowing liquids by light transmission; and subclass 435
    for use of plural photocells to measure light transmission or absorption.

    382,    Image Analysis, subclass 68, full retina optical image sensing, for
    arrays of photocells that scan characters for recognition purposes.


CLS 250/208.2
TXT Plural photosensitive nonimage detecting elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 having plural photocells structured or
    arranged so that they collectively do not detect or generate a picture
    image signal of an object from which light is detected by the photocells.


CLS 250/208.3
TXT With electronic scanning:

    Subject matter under subclass 208.2 with means to electronically, as
    distinct from mechanically, scanning of the photocell outputs to obtain an
    output signal or signals representative of the output signals of the plural
    photocells.


CLS 250/208.4
TXT Used to switch an electrical circuit or device on or off:

    Subject matter under subclass 208.2 in which plural photocells are, by
    disclosure, used to generate signals which are used to switch all or just
    part of an electrical circuit on or off.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    214,    for photocell controlled switching circuits, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+ for condition
    responsive devices which are responsive to radiant energy and which use
    photocell controls to turn on alarms or other indicators in response to a
    specific condition sensed by the photocells.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 174+ for
    condition responsive control systems for electromagnetic devices which use
    a light sensor for controlling its light path.


CLS 250/208.5
TXT With photodetector output ratioing other than by bridge or push-pull
    circuits:

    Subject matter under subclass 208.2 in which circuit means are provided for
    forming a ratio of the outputs of two or more photodetectors other than by
    using bridge or push-pull circuits.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for many circuits which form ratios
    digitally rather than by older bridge or push-pull circuits. The latter are
    classified in Class 250, subclass 210.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210,    for circuits which form ratios by using bridge or push-pull
    circuits.


CLS 250/208.6
TXT With specific relative positional geometry of photosensitive elements
    (e.g., an annular photosensitive element surrounding a coaxially mounted
    photosensitive element):

    Subject matter under subclass 208.2 in which the plural photosensitive
    elements are arranged in a predetermined, specific geometric orientation
    relative to each other to provide a desired result, e.g., detecting
    specularly reflected light as well as diffusely reflected light from an
    object viewed by the photosensitive elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227.28, with specific light conductor or conductor component configuration,
    for related subject matter involving specific relative positional geometry
    of light conductors or components.


CLS 250/210
TXT Subject matter under subclass 206.1 in which the photocell is in a bridge
    circuit or in a push pull circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209,    for bridge circuits having plural photocells, plural photosensitive
    electrodes or plural nonphotosensitive electrodes.


CLS 250/214
TXT Subject matter under subclass 206 including means to electrically connect a
    particular photocell or electron tube with one or more electrical or
    electronic devices in a closed or closable electrically conducting path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 10+ for
    photocell circuits in which the photocell controls a cathode-ray tube or in
    which the photocell is part of a cathode-ray tube, and subclasses 149+ for
    photocell circuits in which the photocell controls a lamp or gas or vapor
    discharge device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclass 59 for
    light controlled or light activated devices.


CLS 250/214.1
TXT Special photocell:

    Subject matter under subclass 214 in which the photocell has
    characteristics which are sufficiently unique to be stated in the claims.

    (1)     Note.  For a compilation of the classes which provide for
    photocells, per se, see (7) Note to subclass 200 of this class.


CLS 250/215
TXT Subject matter under subclass 200 in which the photocell is built into a
    device specific to an art other than the photocell art, and in which the
    utility of the art device is not destroyed by removal of the photocell.

    (1)     Note.  As an example, a refrigerator which is provided with a
    photocell controlled defrosting device, in which the photocell senses
    excessive frost, is found in this subclass, if within the definition of
    superior subclass 200, since the photocell is (1) built into the
    refrigerator which (2) is an art device and which (3) has utility if the
    photoelectric cell is removed.  Generally, the patents in this subclass are
    cross references, as there are few art devices which are not elsewhere
    provided for.


CLS 250/216
TXT Subject matter under subclass 200 having means for illuminating the
    photoelectric cell.

    (1)     Note.  The means for illuminating the photoelectric cell should be
    significant, and if conventional and claimed by name only, is not found in
    this and indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  The means for illuminating the photocell need not be a
    specific light source, but may be the ambient illumination.


CLS 250/221
TXT Subject matter under subclass 216 in which the optical path between the
    light source and the photocell is directly affected by an object which is
    movable with respect to, is not part of and is not continuously associated
    with the photocell device.

    (1)     Note.  The ultimate object being sensed must directly affect the
    light beam, and not indirectly through the medium of a linkage, shutter or
    other instrumentality.  Further, the object must be one which is
    independent of the photocell apparatus in the sense of being nonintegral
    with it and having an independent existence of its own, regardless of the
    existence of the photocell apparatus.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of such objects are animate objects such as horses
    on a race track, human beings entering doors, animals in traps or inanimate
    objects such as plants being cultivated, work pieces being gauged, paint
    samples being tested.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231,    for similar subject matter where the article indirectly affects the
    photocell.

    554,    for similar subject matter where the article is a flame and
    illuminates the photocell.


CLS 250/222.1
TXT Inanimate article:

    Subject matter under subclass 221 in which the object is an inanimate
    article.


CLS 250/222.2
TXT Particle detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 222.1 in which the article is a particle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclasses 10+ for particle counting.


CLS 250/223
TXT Subject matter under subclass 222 having means for carrying the inanimate
    article into or out of or through a location where the article will affect
    the optical path between the light source and the photocell.

    (1)     Note.  The conveyor may stop while the article is being sensed.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of conveyors are railroad cars on tracks and
    gravity operated chutes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    559.01+and 566+, for similar subject where the object is a coded record or
    a web, strand, strip or sheet which is conveyed to the sensing point.

    573,    for similar subject matter, where the object is fluent or
    pulverulent and is conveyed to the sensing point.


CLS 250/224
TXT Subject matter under subclass 222 having means for causing relative
    movement between the inanimate article and the light ray while the article
    is in the light path between light source and photocell.

    (1)     Note.  The motion referred to above is one above and beyond that
    required to bring the object into the testing or sensing station.  During
    sensing, either the object, light source, photocell or some other part of
    the optical system may move.

    (2)     Note.  As an illustrative example, this subclass includes camera
    shutter photocell sensing devices, where the camera shutter opens and
    closes while in the light beam and roller photocell sensing devices, where
    the roller is rotated while being sensed for size.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223,    for similar subject matter where the inanimate article is moved
    through the sensing station by a conveyor.

    559.01+and 566+, for similar subject where the object is a coded record or
    a web, strand, strip or sheet which is conveyed to the sensing point.


CLS 250/225
TXT Subject matter under subclass 216 having a polarizer in the optical path
    between light source and photocell.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    483+ for polarizers, per se.


CLS 250/226
TXT Subject matter under subclass 216 having optical means for acting unequally
    upon different frequencies of radiation in the optical path of light from a
    light source to the photocell.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of such optical means, found in this subclass, are
    diffraction gratings, dispersion prisms and visible light filters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211,    for similar subject matter, where the photocell has inherent
    selective color sensitivity.

    239,    for photocells which are provided with cooling means to absorb
    infrared rays.

    361+,   where the photocell is provided with means to enhance response to
    invisible radiant energy or diminish response to visible radiant energy,
    e.g., an ultraviolet filter.


CLS 250/227.11
TXT Light conductor:

    Subject matter under subclass 216 including an optical fiber or rod, made
    of a material having a high index of refraction that allows it to confine,
    guide and transmit light.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    109+ and particularly subclasses 151, 173, 179, 188, and 195 for light wave
    communications systems which employ optical waveguides optically coupled to
    photocells.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, appropriate subclasses for light conducting
    elements, per se.


CLS 250/227.12
TXT Optical delay line:

    Subject matter under subclass 227.11 where the light conductor is used to
    decrease the speed of a light pulse directed toward a photodetector.

    (1)     Note.  Typically, light pulses are directed through a light
    conductor in which the speed of light is slower than through air or vacuum.
    The arrival of a pulse going through the light conductor is delayed from
    the time it would have arrived had it travelled directly through air or
    vacuum.


CLS 250/227.13
TXT Light pen:

    Subject matter under subclass 227.11 wherein a photocell and light
    conductor are combined in a single instrument configured to be hand held.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclass 472 for hand held optical coded record sensors.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 180+ for visual displays
    employing light pens.

    382,    Image Analysis, subclass 59 for hand held image sensing means.


CLS 250/227.14
TXT Condition responsive light guide (e.g., light guide is physically affected
    by parameter sensed which results in light conveyed to the photocell):

    Subject matter under subclass 227.11 in which the light which photocell
    senses is affected by some property of the light conductor itself which is,
    in turn, acted upon by the condition or parameter being sensed and the
    photocell generates an electric signal in response thereto.

    (1)     Note.  The light conductor itself transduces a quantity or
    parameter which is sought to be measured guantitatively or gualitatively by
    the photodetector.


CLS 250/227.15
TXT With detection of macroscopic break in fiber:

    Subject matter under subclass 227.14 wherein the detector and a light
    conducting fiber are positioned, configured or arranged so that light is
    coupled to or away from a detector if there is a break in the fiber to
    sense the presence of a break.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 600+ for condition
    responsive devices which detect radiant energy.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 73 for testing of the
    optical properties of fiber optic light guides.


CLS 250/227.16
TXT With detection of fiber microbend caused by parameter affecting fiber:

    Subject matter under subclass 227.14 in which a photodetector sense a small
    scale, i.e., micro, bend in an optical fiber caused by a parameter such as
    pressure, temperature, stress or strain, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231.10+, for photocell control of light valve pre-photocell systems which
    are activated by external physical quantities.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 705, photoelectric fluid pressure
    gauges; and subclass 800 for optical testing of specimen stress or strain.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 32+ for optical
    measurement and testing of material strain.


CLS 250/227.17
TXT Causing polarization change in fiber:
    Subject matter under subclass 227.14 in which the condition sensed changes
    the polarization of the light passing through the fiber due to some
    parameter affecting the fiber so that light of a different polarization
    reaches the photodetector than was incident on the fiber.


CLS 250/227.18
TXT Causing light spectral frequency/wavelength change:
    Subject matter under subclass 227.14 in which the condition sensed causes a
    change in frequency/wavelength of the light transmitted to the
    photodetector by the light conductor.

    (1)     Note.  The photocell may, for example, detect changes in the
    frequency of the light transmitted to it by the light conductor due to
    changes in the elongation of the light conductor.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass provides for significant light conductor means
    in detecting color whereas subclass 226, is directed to color detection
    broadly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226,    color (e.g., filter or spectroscope), for related subject matter
    that may or may not include light conductors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 580+, for
    sorting articles based on their color.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 402+, measuring and
    testing color of an object; subclasses 300+ for measuring and testing by
    dispersed light spectroscopy.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 526,
    color measurement or testing.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 164+
    optical result, including subclass 171, optical spectrum, where the test
    and the result involves a chemical reaction.


CLS 250/227.19
TXT With coherent interferrometric light:
    Subject matter under subclass 227.14 wherein the light waves transmitted by
    the light conductor are coherent, i.e., the phases of the waves are
    substantially in step spatially and temporally, and the condition sensed by
    the light conductor affects the coherent light so that an interferometric
    pattern is presented to the photocell.

    (1)     Note.  This definition is inclusive and includes, for example,
    arrangements where noninterferometric light is presented to a photocell
    along with an interferometric pattern to a photocell.

    (2)     Note.  This type of device ordinarily includes fiber-optic
    equivalents of classic interferometers, e.g., Michelson interferometers,
    and ring laser gyroscopes. It also includes detection of changes in the
    state of polarization in a light conductor, e.g., induced birefringence by
    stresses or strains.

    (3)     Note.  This is a residual subclass in a residual class and other
    classes and subclasses, e.g., Class 356, subclasses 32+ or 345+, provide
    for this subject matter where optical measurement and testing are involved,
    and take precedence. Cross-references to this subclass (277.19) are
    discretionary.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    550,    interference pattern analysis for related subject matter which may
    or may not involve light conductors but which does not claim significant
    light conductor means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring, and Testing, subclasses 345+ for measuring and
    testing by light interference involving, inter alia, coherent
    interferometric light.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    1+ provide for holographic systems which employ coherent interferometric
    light.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 215+ for
    optical, including holographic, read/write circuits which may include light
    conductors handling interferometric light.


CLS 250/227.2
TXT With imaging:
    Subject matter under subclass 227.11 wherein the light conductor presents
    an image of the object viewed by it to the photocell, outputting the
    elements of the object(s) that it views in the same spatial relationship
    they have in reality.

    (1)     Note.  An imaging light conductor is defined as one which presents
    an image of the object viewed by it to the photocell(s). An imaging light
    conductor outputs the elements of the object(s) it views in the same
    spatial relationship they have in reality. An incoherent light conductor is
    one which scrambles the object it views so that what is transmitted to the
    photocell(s) is not an image of the original, but is light reflected by or
    transmitted through the object in a nonimage form. A coherent light
    conductor can present a true image of an object it views to a photocell
    with ordinary incoherent light reflected from or transmitted through the
    object.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    385,    Optical Waveguides, subclasses 116+ and 133, for imaging light
    conducting guides/fiber bundles, per se.


CLS 250/227.21
TXT With light chopping or modulation:
    Subject matter under subclass 227.11 wherein means are provided for varying
    the intensity of the light transmitted to the photocell from substantially
    zero to substantially maximum intensity as a function of time.

    (1)     Note.  The chopping or modulating means may be for example,
    electromechanical or electrooptical, an object under inspection or
    analysis, or a keyboard controlled optical shutter, for example.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements,
    appropriate subclasses for light modulators/chopping devices, per se, as
    well as for optical logic devices.


CLS 250/227.22
TXT Keyboard or other manual switch controlled:
    Subject matter under subclass 227.21 in which the means to operate the
    light gate or modulator is a manually operable switch or keyboard.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229,    for light chopping or modulation type pre-photocell optical systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclass 31 for photocell
    controlled keyboard coders which include code conversion data processing.


CLS 250/227.23
TXT With spectral frequency/wavelength discrimination:
    Subject matter under subclass 227.11 including means for selecting and
    transmitting light of one or more discrete wavelengths or wavelength bands
    by the light conductor(s) to the photocell(s).

    (1)     Note.  The intensity of the light of different wavelengths may be
    varied by using, for example, polarizers, diaphragms, etc.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass provides for significant light conductor means
    in detecting color, whereas subclass 226 is directed to color detection
    broadly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226,    color (e.g., filter or spectroscope), for related subject matter
    that may or may not include light conductors,

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 580+ for
    sorting articles based on their color.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 402+, measuring and
    testing color of an object; subclasses 300+ for measuring and testing by
    dispersed light spectroscopy; and subclass 346, measuring and testing by
    interferometric spectroscopy.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 526,
    color measurement or testing.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 164+,
    optical result, including subclass 171, optical spectrum, where the test
    and the result involves a chemical reaction.


CLS 250/227.24
TXT With coupling enhancement means:
    Subject matter under subclass 227.11 with means used to increase the
    overall coupling efficiency of the light conductor and the photocell, i.e.,
    to improve the ratio of light reaching the photocell from the light
    conductor to the light leaving the photoconductor on its way to the
    photocell.

    (1)     Note.  Coupling enhancement means may or may not include structure
    to physically or mechanically connect a photocell to a light conductor. The
    enhancement means may, for example, simply include configurations to
    improve evanescent wave coupling phenomena, or modal coupling phenomena, or
    may include optomechanical connectors.

    (2)     Note.  A light conductor coupled to a photocell may be classified
    here or in Class 356, subclasses 96+, depending on what is recited. If the
    photocell is just nominally recited, and the coupling enhancement means is
    recited nominally or in detail, then classification is proper in Class 385.
    If the photocell is recited more than nominally, i.e., including an
    electrical output which is generated for utilization, then classification
    is in this subclass regardless of the claimed detail of the coupling
    enhancement means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    385,    Optical Waveguides, subclasses 15+ for optical coupling means, per
    se. See Note (2), above.


CLS 250/227.25
TXT Fluid coupling:
    Subject matter under subclass 227.24 in which the coupling enhancement
    means is a fluid, i.e., in the gas or liquid state.


CLS 250/227.26
TXT With scanning:
    Subject matter under subclass 227.11 with means to actually or
    electronically move a light beam transmitted by a light conductor over an
    object.

    (1)     Note.  The scanning may involve a stationary light conductor and
    moving optical elements such as lenses or reflectors, or may involve moving
    the light conductor. It also may include electronic scanning of the
    photocells optically coupled to the light conductors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 197 and 359 for television scanners
    employing fiber optics.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    196+, 227+,  240+, 290+, and 298+ for various optical scanning means.


CLS 250/227.27
TXT With coherent interferrometric light:
    Subject matter under subclass 227.11 wherein the light waves transmitted by
    the light conductor are coherent, i.e., the phases of the waves are
    substantially in step spatially and temporarily, and the condition being
    sensed by the light conductor affects the coherent light to present an
    interferometric pattern to the photocell.

    (1)     Note.  This definition is inclusive and includes arrangements where
    noninterferometric light is presented to a photocell along with
    presentation of an interferometric pattern to a photocell.

    (2)     Note.  This type of device ordinarily includes use of light
    conductors which transmit light with a spatial energy distribution which is
    characterized as a single transverse electromagnetic mode (TEM)
    distribution. Included are not only single interferometric devices, but
    optically coupled (by light conductors) multiple interferometric devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    550,    interference pattern analysis for related subject matter which may
    or may not involve light conductors but which does not claim significant
    light conductor means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 345+ for measuring and
    testing by light interference involving, inter alia, coherent
    interferometric light.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 215+ for
    optical, including holographic, read\write circuits which may include light
    conductors handling interferometric light.


CLS 250/227.28
TXT With specific configuration of light conductor components with respect to
    each other:Subject matter under subclass 227.11 in which the components of
    a light conductor have a specific, predetermined configuration with respect
    to each other to achieve a desired light beam pattern to be presented to
    the photodetector means, e.g., one with suppressed higher order transverse
    electromagnetic (TEM) modes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    385,    Optical Waveguides, appropriate subclasses for optical fibers with
    specific components, per se.


CLS 250/227.29
TXT With specific illumination or viewing orientation of light conductor
    relative to viewed object (e.g., light normal to, and detector at 45 degree
    angle to, viewed object):Subject matter under subclass 227.11 in which the
    angular relationship of the light source, photodetector means and object
    being illuminated and detected have a specified geometric relationship.

    (1)     Note.  For example, the photodetector may be placed at 45 degrees
    to the normal of the illuminated surface, while the optical axis of the
    light source may be placed perpendicular to the object surface.


CLS 250/227.3
TXT With variable orientation of light conductor relative to viewed object
    (e.g., goniometer):Subject matter under subclass 227.11 in which means are
    provided to vary the angular relationship of the light source or
    photodetector with respect to the surface of the object under illumination
    and photodetection.

    (1)     Note.  Devices with means to vary the angular relationship between
    light source, object surface and photodetector are conventionally known as
    goniometers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 340, measuring particle
    light scattering with photocell detection at variable angle to the light
    beam.


CLS 250/227.31
TXT Side or edge illuminated light conductor or collector:
    Subject matter under subclass 227.11 in which the light conductor is
    configured or arranged to receive light along its side or edge in lieu of,
    or in addition to, its end face.

    (1)     Note.  Typical examples include solar collector light collecting
    guides and optical scanning light conductors.


CLS 250/227.32
TXT End illuminated light conductor with noncircular geometric cross
    section:Subject matter under subclass 227.11 wherein the light conductor
    has a noncircular end-face configuration which is end-face illuminated.

    (1)     Note.  The light conductors in this subclass are end-face
    illuminated whereas in the previous subclass they are illuminated along
    their side or edge faces. Both subclasses encompass light conductors of
    various geometries other than cylindrical or circular.


CLS 250/228
TXT Subject matter under subclass 216 having an integrating sphere in the
    optical path between light source and photocell.

    (1)     Note.  An integrating sphere is a hollow body having an interior of
    highly light reflecting but also diffusing material, and having relatively
    small openings in the shell of the hollow body to admit light.  It has the
    property of raising the interior illumination to a level which depends only
    upon the amount of light flux entering the openings and not upon the
    reflection or diffusion of that incident light flux.


CLS 250/229
TXT Subject matter under subclass 216 having means in the optical path between
    light source and photocell for varying the amount of light which reaches
    the photocell.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass, the means for varying the amount of light
    which reaches the photocell is always a part of, or is continuously
    associated with, the photocell device, and is not an object which has an
    independent existence of its own.  Devices found in this and indented
    subclass comprises, for example, keyboard operated shutters which variably
    permit a light source to illuminate a photocell, iris diaphragms and
    optical wedges.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221+,   for similar subject matter in which the light path between light
    source and photocell is directly affected by an object which is not part of
    the photocell apparatus and has an independent existence of its own.

    237,    for similar subject matter comprising relatively stationary hoods,
    gratings, baffles or diaphragms.


CLS 250/230
TXT Subject matter under subclass 229 in which the optical path between light
    source and photoelectric cell includes a reflective element, and in which
    the amount of reflection or the direction of reflection is varied so as to
    vary the intensity of the photocell illumination.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of such variable reflecting elements include
    mirrors which oscillate under the control of a physical quantity and
    compass cards which have variable reflective markings.


CLS 250/231.1
TXT Actuated by dynamic external physical quantity:
    Subject matter under subclass 229 in which the means in the optical path
    between the light source and the photocell for varying the amount of light
    which reaches the photocell is actuated by an external mechanical force.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of dynamic type physical quantities include
    pressure, weight (mg where m = mass of an object andg = gravitational
    force), force (f) where f = ma or f = 1/2 mv squared), deflection of an
    object connected to the means in the optical path for varying the amount of
    light reaching the photocell, speed of an object, velocity of an object
    (including fluid flow), position (angular or linear) of an object.

    (2)     Note.  Measurement of the position of an object properly classified
    herein is distinct from the position indication classified in this class,
    subclasses 206.1+ in that the latter concerns global position of a target
    whereas this subclass concerns local position, e.g., rotation of a shaft
    about an axis where the shaft's global position is known or not of concern.

    (3)     Note.  Excluded from the definition of dynamic type physical
    quantities are electrical quantities, e.g., current, voltage, impedance;
    chemical properties; passive physical quantities and forces, such as color,
    temperature, physical dimensions (length, width, diameter, Coriolis force);
    and quantum mechanical forces and properties.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 363, for electrical
    telemetering with a photoelectric pickoff; and subclass 707 for distance
    measuring including optical means.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 290 for measuring and testing
    involving, inter alia, radiant energy detection; and subclass 705 for
    photoelectric fluid projection gauges.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 96+ for
    measurement, testing or sensing of electricity using radiant energy; and
    subclass 344, for use of a radiant energy receiver for a geological
    measurement or test.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, for measurement of passive physical
    forces such as color (subclasses 402+); temperature (subclasses 43+), and
    physical dimensions (subclasses 2, 3+, 27+, 345+, 123, 124+, 372+, 388+,
    247+, ect.).

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 550+,
    especially subclasses 556+, for basic measurements.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 32, 121+, and 162 for
    various temperature measuring means or methods.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 106+ for automatic camera focussing using
    active ranging.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 1+ for electromagnetic
    sensors to detect or determine the range of an object; subclass 187 for
    measurement of length or volume; and subclass 303, for science, physics or
    optics.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 808 for
    optical sensing apparatus.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 164+
    for analytical chemical testing by optical means and involving a chemical
    reaction.


CLS 250/231.11
TXT Actuated by gauge element deflection:
    Subject matter under subclass 231.1 wherein displacement of a gauge
    component, e.g., needle, by a force, e.g., gravity or an electromotive
    force is the active external physical quantity sensed.


CLS 250/231.12
TXT Gyroscopes:
    Subject matter under subclass 231.1 wherein gyroscopic movements or
    conditions are the active external physical quantities sensed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 5.6, for gyroscopes with
    optical pickoffs.


CLS 250/231.13
TXT Shaft angle transducers:
    Subject matter under subclass 231.1 wherein the angular position or speed
    or a rotatable shaft is the active external physical quantity sensed by one
    or more photocells and an output is generated which is indicative of those
    parameters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 1+ for related
    subject matter further specifying the coded data generation or conversion
    circuitry, especially subclasses 13+ and 31 for optical type code
    converters, including keyboard actuation.


CLS 250/231.14
TXT Incremental shaft readers; i.e., with means to generate increments of
    angular shaft rotation:Subject matter under subclass 231.13 wherein
    photocell means is provided to incrementally sense the angular position or
    speed of a rotatable shaft as the active external physical quantity and for
    generating an output proportional to the number of increments sensed by the
    photocell(s).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclass 11 for similar
    subject matter combined with digital signal processing circuitry.


CLS 250/231.15
TXT With plural gear driven discs:
    Subject matter under subclass 231.14 in which the incremental data is
    generated using more than one circularly shaped element coupled to the
    rotating shaft by gear drive means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclass 2 for similar subject
    matter combined with digital signal processing circuitry.


CLS 250/231.16
TXT Using phase difference of output signals from plural photodetectors:Subject
    matter under subclass 231.14 in which a signal proportional to the phase
    sum of, or difference between, outputs of the photodetectors is generated
    and is representative of the angular position or speed of the rotating
    shaft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclass 6 for similar subject
    matter combined with digital data processing circuitry.


CLS 250/231.17
TXT With means to indicate a complete shaft rotation:
    Subject matter under subclass 231.14 in which means are provided to
    determine whether a complete revolution of the shaft has occurred and to
    generate a signal representative of that fact.

    (1)     Note.  The provision of means to determine the number of complete
    revolutions is also included in this subclass.


CLS 250/231.18
TXT Position indicating shaft encoders with means to generate a unique signal
    for each specific angular shaft position:Subject matter under subclass
    231.14 including means to establish a unique number of shaft angle
    positions and to generate a unique, distinct signal for each of those
    positions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclass 13 for similar
    subject matter combined with digital signal processing circuitry.


CLS 250/231.19
TXT Pressure-responsive light valves:
    Subject matter under 231.1 wherein the dynamic external mechanical force
    sensed is pressure ((P) = F/A where F = a Newtonian type force and A = Area
    over which the force is applied) applied to the means in the optical path
    for varying the amount of light to reach the photocell(s).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 705 for photoelectric fluid
    pressure gauges.


CLS 250/232
TXT Subject matter under subclass 229 having means for intermittently
    interrupting the optical path between the light source and photocell in a
    repetitious cyclic sequence.

    (1)     Note.  A camera shutter is generally not a light chopper, of the
    type found in this class, since it opens and closes in a nonrepetitious,
    noncyclic manner.


CLS 250/233
TXT Subject matter under subclass 232 in which the means for intermittently
    interrupting the optical path is a rotary element.


CLS 250/234
TXT Subject matter under subclass 216 having means for moving an element of the
    optical system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of such means are means for adjusting the photocell
    so that its axis is aligned with the optical axis, a hand crank for
    adjusting the photocell to sense in a desired direction or a vehicle upon
    which the entire photocell apparatus is mounted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218,    for photocell sensing means in which a fluent material is moved
    through the optical path between light source and photocell.

    223     and 224, for photocell sensing means in which an inanimate object
    is moved to or from or while in the optical path.

    229+,   for photocell sensing means having a light valve in the optical
    path, particularly indented subclass 231, where the light valve is adjusted
    in accordance with an external physical quantity and subclasses 232+, where
    the light valve continuously moves to chop the light.

    559.01+and 566+, for similar subject where the object is a coded record or
    a web, strand, strip or sheet which is conveyed to the sensing point.


CLS 250/235
TXT Subject matter under subclass 234 having means for cyclically moving an
    element of the optical system in a repetitious path.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes photocell devices having a vibratory
    scanner.  An adjusting means is not deemed a means for providing a
    repetitious path, since there is no means for ensuring repetition or
    cycling.  A hunting device which follows another element does not cycle,
    even though the followed element may, during its motion, fortuitously cycle.


CLS 250/236
TXT Subject matter under subclass 235 in which the element of the optical
    system, which moves in a cyclic path, rotates.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 199+, 202, and 203+ for Nipkow discs and
    rotating mirrors.


CLS 250/237
TXT Subject matter under subclass 216 having a hood, grating, baffle, diaphragm
    or mask associated with the optical path between light source and photocell.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229+,   for similar subject matter where the means associated with the
    optical path between light source and photocell are ajdustable.


CLS 250/238
TXT Subject matter under subclass 200 having means for controlling the
    temperature of the photocell apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  If the temperature of nonphotocell apparatus is controlled,
    search should not be made here, but rather in the nonphotocell art
    concerned.


CLS 250/239
TXT Subject matter under subclass 200 having a housing for the photocell
    apparatus.


CLS 250/250
TXT Subject matter under class definition which includes sensing means
    responsive to electromagnetic radiation including a variable electrical
    member or variable radiation control member having a pointer and an
    associated scale calibrated in frequency or wavelength units and indicating
    means responsive to the sensing means to note the maximum energy detected
    by the sensing means whereby the scale and pointer indicate the wavelength
    or frequency of the radiation detected.


CLS 250/251
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising means for producing or
    utilizing a unidirectional stream of molecules or atoms having no net
    electrical charge, usually through a vacuum with thermal velocity and
    methods using such means.   Such devices and methods may include magnetic
    field means to deflect, divert or select a portion of the beam of a desired
    energy level and may also provide means for subjecting the selected portion
    of the beam to a microwave electromagnetic field to excite the molecules or
    atoms of the beam at a resonant frequency, causing a transition of the
    energy state of the molecules or atoms from one energy-level to another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281,    for means for effecting the ionic separation or analysis of
    materials, (e.g., mass spectrometry).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, for metal and apparatus to heat and
    vaporize a material by nonelectric means.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 271+ for electric heating of solids
    and liquids to vaporize the material where no structure to use the vapor is
    claimed.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, particularly subclasses
    79+ for apparatus including means to melt particles or bodies of normally
    solid substance and contiquous means to project the melted substance
    through the ambient air.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 231.01+ for space
    discharge devices with fluent material supply or directing means.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 22 for consumable electrode discharge devices which have means to
    feed a fluent material, (e.g., solid particles) to the discharge space.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, especially subclass
    111.01 for systems wherein a fluent material is supplied to the discharge
    area between the discharge electrodes of the discharge device.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 332+ for measuring
    or testing devices for utilizing or determining molecular particle resonant
    properties of substances.

    330,    Amplifiers, particularly subclasses 4+ for maser type amplifying
    devices that may utilize molecular or atomic beams.

    331,    Oscillators, particularly subclass 3 for oscillators with automatic
    frequency stabilization utilizing molecular resonant means.

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, appropriate subclasses for molecular or
    particle resonant type oscillators, (e.g. masers, lasers), which
    oscillators may utilize molecular or atomic beams.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    appropriate subclasses for apparatus or process for effecting a reaction
    within the nucleus of an element utilizing, for example, subatomic
    particles, such as thermal neutrons.


CLS 250/252.1
TXT CALIBRATION OR STANDARDIZATION METHODS:

    Subject matter under the class definition which includes methods to
    establish a reference indication of invisible radiation or invisible
    radiation level, or methods of error determination or correction using a
    reference indication or radiation level.

    (1)     Note.  For calibration or standardizing apparatus, see the
    appropriate subclasses for the specific structure involved.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclass 207 for testing or
    calibration of X-ray devices.


CLS 250/253
TXT Subject matter under class definitions which includes means in combination
    with material within or on the surface of the earth to, (1) expose the
    material to radiation, (2) to detect radiation emanating naturally from the
    material or (3) to detect radiation modified or caused by the material
    interacting with radiation produced by the means to expose the material to
    radiation, and methods therefor.

    (1)     Note.  The material within or on the surface of the earth includes
    the surface of, underneath the surface of or the bottom of a naturally
    occurring body of water.

    (2)     Note.  The irradiation of material includes material within or
    about a well.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring  and Testing, subclasses 152.01+ for measuring a
    characteristic of a borehole, a borehole casing, or a drill rigging wherein
    the measuring is not purely electrical or purely magnetic.

    181,    Acoustics, subclass .5 for geophysical exploration by use of
    seismic waves.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 323+ for
    geophysical surface and subsurface examination using electrical tests and
    electromagnetic waves below the infrared frequency band in the
    electromagnetic spectrum.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 14+ for seismic prospecting using electrical acoustic wave
    systems.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 25+
    for methods of prospecting using chemical analysis.


CLS 250/254
TXT Subject matter under subclass 253 which includes apparatus to bore a well
    and includes methods corresponding to the apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclass 247 for processes of treating wells using nuclear
    energy or radioactivity; subclasses 250+ for processes including wells, in
    combination with indicating, testing or measuring and subclass 66 for
    apparatus in combination with a well for giving electrical signals
    concerning something in relation to the well.  See also section VI of the
    general notes to Class 166.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, particularly subclass 41 for the
    combination of boring or drilling with a radiant energy test.  See subclass
    40, (3) Note for the line between Class 250 and Class 175.


CLS 250/255
TXT Subject matter under subclass 253 which additionally includes means to
    remove a portion of the material from the earth whereby the portion is
    subjected to (1) the means to detect natural radiation or (2) radiation
    modified or caused by the portion when irradiated by means to expose or (3)
    some other test.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass includes sampling on the
    surface of the earth within a well or at the bottom of a naturally
    occurring body of water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304,    for methods of preparing or separating material for an invisible
    radiation test or controlling the material during the test.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 152.07 for borehole formation
    logging with analysis of density, porosity, or water saturation using core
    sample analysis, subclass 152.09 for oil, gas, or water saturation by core
    sample analysis, and subclass 152.11 for other analysis using core sampling.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 25+
    for geochemical exploration.


CLS 250/256
TXT Subject matter under subclass 253 wherein the means to detect radiation
    emanating naturally from or modified or caused by the material interacting
    with radiation senses the material in or about a well and includes means to
    support for movement the means to detect natural radiation or radiation
    modified or caused by the interaction of the material with exposing
    radiation and includes methods corresponding to the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  A well is meant to include a cased and uncased well and bore
    hole.

    (2)     Note.  Generally the claimed method and apparatus include an
    indication or a recording of the radiation detected.

    (3)     Note.  Generally the method and apparatus have claimed or disclosed
    a recording correlating the radiation sensed with the depth at which the
    radiation has been sensed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 152.01+ for physical analysis of
    wells particularly subclasses 152.02+, for the identification of strata in
    a well by physical methods or apparatus.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 250+, for well processes involving indicating,
    testing or measuring in combination with a well and subclasses 64 and 66+,
    for measuring or electrical means combined with a well.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 41 for ray energy
    detection or measuring apparatus combined with drilling apparatus and
    subclasses 57+ for processes of boring or penetrating the earth.

    181,    Acoustics, subclass .5 for well exploration by use of siesmic waves.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 323+ for well
    exploration by electrical, magnetic and radio waves.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 853.1+ for telemetering a
    well.

    346,    Recorders, subclass 33 for a recorder used in a well logging
    operation.


CLS 250/257
TXT Subject matter under subclass 256 which additionally includes apparatus
    which includes a detector to sense the location of a pipe collar in a cased
    well and methods corresponding to the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  The collar detector need not be a radiation detector but can
    be any type which senses the position of the pipe collar in a well.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 152.57 for a determination of a
    characteristic of a borehole casing wherein the determination is made by
    making a measurement which is not purely electrical or purely magnetic.


CLS 250/258
TXT Subject matter under subclass 256 which includes means to cause two fluids
    to meet in a well to force one of the fluids into the earth, said one fluid
    being material or including material which emanates radiation, modified
    radiation, or causes radiation by interacting with radiation from the means
    to expose the material to radiation, wherein the means to detect radiation
    senses the said one fluid at the meeting point of the fluids, and methods
    corresponding to the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  Generally, the depth at which the meeting point of the
    fluids occurs is recorded along with the results of the sensing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259+,   for fluids added to a well which may be or contain tracer material
    which is fluorescent or radioactive or capable of being made radioactive by
    irradiation.


CLS 250/259
TXT Subject matter under subclass 256 which includes means to add the material
    into the well or the earth about the well whereby the means to detect
    senses the radiation emitted naturally from the material, or radiation
    caused by or modified by the material interacting with the radiation
    produced by the means to expose the materials to radiation.

    (1)     Note.  The material may be solid liquid, gas, particulate or
    entrained within a fluid.

    (2)     Note.  The means to eject the tracer material into a well is
    included here as a subcombination not classified elsewhere.

    (3)     Note.  Materials which are not radioactive, but are made
    radioactive in the well are placed here along with materials which can
    control radiation in some manner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302+,   for methods detecting tracer materials which emit or modify
    radiation generally.


CLS 250/260
TXT Subject matter under subclass 259 wherein the added material is radioactive
    or contains radioactive material entrained in a substance added to the well.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259,    for tracers which must be irradiated  in the well before they
    become radioactive.

    303,    for methods detecting radioactive tracers generally.

    493.1+, for radioactive sources which are more than a composition, recited
    as a source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 301.1 for radioactive compositions.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclass 1 for
    a radioactive composition for medical use.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 1+ for radioactive substances applied to the
    body for therapeutic purposes and holders therefore.


CLS 250/261
TXT Subject matter under subclass 256 wherein the means to detect radiation
    emanating naturally or radiation modified or caused by the material
    interacting with the radiation includes a detector and may include an
    electrical circuit responsive to the detector and apparatus to control or
    compensate for some physical or electrical condition of the radiation
    detector circuit or detector and circuit and includes methods corresponding
    to the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  The conditions controlled include temperature control,
    voltage control of the detector or circuit and the speed of the detector
    while sensing in the well.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 260 for temperature control in a geographic
    location such as a well.


CLS 250/262
TXT Subject matter under subclass 256 wherein the means to detect radiation
    emitted naturally or radiation modified or caused by material interacting
    with radiation includes a radiation detector and a detailed electrical
    circuit connected between the detector and an indicator or recorder of the
    radiation sensed by the detector and includes methods corresponding to the
    apparatus.


CLS 250/263
TXT Subject matter under subclass 262 wherein the electrical circuit includes
    means to modulate an electrical wave with signals emitted by the detector
    upon detecting radiation and includes methods corresponding to the
    apparatus.


CLS 250/264
TXT Subject matter under subclass 262 wherein there are plural detectors and
    the individual detectors may be connected to the same electrical circuit or
    to separate electrical circuits and includes methods corresponding to the
    apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  Included are plural detectors connected to an
    anti-coincidence or coincident circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    265+,   for well-logging circuits having plural detectors where no novelty
    is in the electrical circuit.


CLS 250/265
TXT Subject matter under subclass 256 wherein the means to detect radiation
    emitted naturally or radiation modified or caused by material interacting
    with radiation includes plural radiation detectors and methods
    corresponding to the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  The detectors here may be electrical, nonelectrical, but a
    combination of a fluorescent screen and a responsive detector is considered
    but one detector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264,    for well testing apparatus using plural radiation detectors wherein
    the novelty resides in the electrical circuitry between the detectors and a
    recorder or indicator.


CLS 250/266
TXT Subject matter under subclass 265 which may include the means to expose the
    material to radiation which includes at least a radiation source and
    wherein there are details concerning the location or spacing of the
    detectors with respect to the source or to one another or the direction the
    radiation is permitted to be incident upon the detectors and includes
    methods corresponding to the apparatus.


CLS 250/267
TXT Subject matter under subclass 256 wherein the means to detect radiation
    emanating naturally or radiation modified or caused by the material
    interacting with the radiation includes a detector and includes radiation
    modifying means to control the radiation incident upon the detector and
    methods corresponding to the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  The control of the radiation to the detector includes type
    of radiation, the intensity of radiation, the direction of the radiation
    hitting the detector, the frequencies of the radiation, the radiation
    pattern arriving at the detector or the spacing of the detector with
    respect to source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266,    for radiation logging apparatus having plural detectors wherein the
    spacing of the detectors to each other or to a source or the direction if
    the radiation reaching the detector is claimed.

    505.1+, for radiation controlling attenuators directional elements,
    filters, shutters, cones, apertures and shields.


CLS 250/268
TXT Subject matter under subclass 256 which includes means to touch the wall of
    the well, the means to support for movement suspending the means to touch
    the well and the means to detect radiation as a common unit within the well
    and methods corresponding to the apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 783+ for opposed contact type
    measuring instruments.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 152.17 for a formation logging
    device combined with detail of a borehole wall engaging means wherein the
    logging is made by making a measurement which is not purely electrical or
    purely magnetic.


CLS 250/269.1
TXT With source and detector:

    Subject matter under subclass 256 in which means to expose the material to
    radiation in or about the well is also supported by the means to support
    for movement the means to detect radiation, and includes methods
    corresponding to the apparatus.


CLS 250/269.2
TXT With plural types of detectors:

    Subject matter under subclass 269.1 wherein the means to detect radiation
    includes more than one different type of detector (e.g., a gamma detector
    and a neutron detector).


CLS 250/269.3
TXT Having gamma source and gamma detector:

    Subject matter under subclass 269.1 wherein the means to expose the
    material to radiation includes a gamma ray source and the means to detect
    radiation modified or caused by the material includes a gamma ray detector
    and includes methods corresponding to the apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclass 157 for gamma ray activation analysis.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclass 88 for gamma ray
    composition analysis.


CLS 250/269.4
TXT Having neutron source and neutron detector:

    Subject matter under subclass 269.1 wherein the means to expose the
    material to radiation includes a neutron radiation source, and the means to
    detect radiation modified or caused by the material includes a neutron
    radiation detector, and includes methods corresponding to the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    390.04, for composition analysis with neutron responsive means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclasses 160+ for subterranean neutron activation analysis.


CLS 250/269.5
TXT Having thermal neutron detector:

    Subject matter under subclass 269.4 wherein the neutron radiation detector
    detects neutrons with thermal energy levels (in contrast to detecting
    neutrons with fast or epithermal energy levels).


CLS 250/269.6
TXT Having neutron source and gamma detector:

    Subject matter under subclass 269.1 wherein the means to expose the
    material to radiation includes a neutron radiation source, and the means to
    detect radiation modified or caused by the material includes a gamma ray
    detector, and includes methods corresponding to the apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclasses 160+ for subterranean neutron activation analysis.


CLS 250/269.7
TXT With plural gamma detectors:

    Subject matter under subclass 269.6 wherein the means to detect radiation
    includes two or more gamma ray detectors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264,    for well testing apparatus with particular detector signal circuit
    having plural detectors.

    265+,   for well testing apparatus with plural detectors in general.


CLS 250/269.8
TXT With detection in plural consecutive time intervals:

    Subject matter under subclass 269.6 wherein the detection method includes
    detecting gamma rays in two or more time intervals which occur after the
    beginning of a neutron pulse or burst from the neutron radiation source,
    but before the beginning of a subsequent neutron pulse or burst.


CLS 250/271
TXT Subject Matter under class definition comprising data bearing means
    containing information in symbolic form and detection means to sense
    invisible radiation from or modified by the form to produce an electric
    signal corresponding to the form, and methods of using such means.

    (1)     Note.  The symbolic forms of this subclass type represent
    information by convention only.  Thus, for example, a photograph of an
    object is not a symbolic form of the object because it does not represent
    the object by convention.

    (2)     Note.  Included are fluorescent, radioactive and radiation
    controlling markings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    825.30+, for intelligence comparison.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 468 for record analyzing devices which
    examine records serially by radiation and subclass 491 for coded record
    cards having fluorescent, phosphorescent or radiation emitting markings.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 483+ for
    electroluminescent devices.

    346,    Recorders, subclasses 74.1 and 107.1+ for the production of records
    utilizing electromagnetic energy to record phenomenal information.

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, subclasses 111+ for
    electric marking apparatus and processes and subclasses 224+ for radiation
    marking apparatus and processes.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 71 for document pattern
    light analyzers.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 106 and 120
    for radiant energy and information masking, respectively, for the static
    storage/retrieval of information.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 101 for dynamic
    recording or reproducing by invisible radiation.

    382,    Image Analysis, appropriate subclass for pattern or character
    recognition systems, see Class 382 II B (1) Note.


CLS 250/281
TXT Subject matter under class definition comprising (1) means to select an ion
    of one charge-to-mass ratio from one or more ions of a different
    charge-to-mass ratio and (2) means to either detect the selected ions or
    accumulate them, or methods for performing the functions of the means (1)
    and (2).

    (1)     Note.  Combination claims including a mass Spectrometer or Calutron
    recited as a part of the combination will be included here and the
    subclasses indented hereunder even if merely nominally recited on the
    assumption that the nominally recited mass Spectrometer or Calutron
    includes (1) and (2) of the subclass definition.  If the disclosure shows
    some other ionic separation or analysis means, the document is excluded.
    Claims reciting subject matter "in" or  "for use in" a mass Spectrometer or
    Calutron are excluded from this subclass and its indents and are classified
    elsewhere.  See Search Notes below.

    (2)     Note.  Where the selection is on the basis of the polarity only of
    the ionized particles, classification here is excluded  See search notes to
    Classes 95 and 96.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    396+,   for ionic lens means, per se, or in combination with an ion source
    for separating ions according to their charge-to-mass ratios but without
    the detecting or accumulating means, per se.

    423+,   for ion sources, per se, of the class type.

    489+,   for ion accumulating means, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 23.1 for the combination of a gas
    chromatograph and a nominally recited mass spectrometer.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, especially subclasses 27 and 28 for
    processes of gas separation using magnetism and subclasses 57+ for
    processes of gas separation using an electric or electrostatic field
    wherein the separation of gases and solid particles from gases is
    accomplished by methods other than the ionic separation of materials
    utilizing the charge-to-mass ratio of particles.  Such gases may include
    the polarity or the charged status of the particles.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, especially subclasses 1+ for magnetic
    separating means for gas separation and subclasses 15+ for electric or
    electrostatic field separation apparatus        for gas separation wherein
    the means to separate gases and solid particles from gases is   means other
    than that for the ionic separation of materials utilizing the
    charge-to-mass ratios of particles.  Such gases may include the polarity or
    the charged status of particles.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 459+ for electric
    measuring and testing devices including ionization, e.g., pressure gages.


CLS 250/282
TXT Subject matter under subclass 281 comprising processes including the steps
    of selecting ions of one mass-to-charge ratio from ions of different
    mass-to-charge ratios and detecting or accumulating the selected ions.


CLS 250/283
TXT Methods under subclass 282 which include the step of collecting one or more
    groups of ions having the same electrical charge-to-mass ratio.


CLS 250/284
TXT Subject matter under subclass 283 wherein the collection of ions is for the
    express purpose of recovery of the ionized material.


CLS 250/285
TXT Subject matter under subclass 281 having two or more means to produce ions
    acting at the same time to supply ions to the selecting means.


CLS 250/286
TXT Subject matter under subclass 281 having means to intermittently produce or
    interrupt a flow of ions into the selecting means and means controlling the
    detector to vary its response in some manner in timed relation to the beam
    producing or interrupting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290+,   for pulsed ion-accelerating selecting means without synchronizing
    means for the detector.


CLS 250/287
TXT Subject matter under subclass 286 having detector means or means responsive
    to the detector that exhibits a representation of the time it takes a
    selected ion to travel a given distance.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of time-of-flight indicators of this subclass type
    include cyclically swept cathode ray tubes and "event" response frequency
    counters.


CLS 250/288
TXT Subject matter under subclass 281 having handling means for the material to
    be ionized for the selecting means.


CLS 250/289
TXT Subject matter under subclass 281 having means producing a subatmospheric
    pressure environment for the selecting means or means to maintain the
    pressure of the environment of the selecting means sub atmospheric.


CLS 250/290
TXT Subject matter under subclass 281 wherein the ion selecting means comprises
    means for varying at regular intervals the direction or magnitude of an
    electric or magnetic field.

    (1)     Note.  The fields involved in the subject matter of this subclass
    are generally for intermittently accelerating ions or causing them to
    oscillate, the average velocity of the accelerated ions and the frequency
    of the oscillating ions being functions of the fields and the
    charge-to-mass ratio of the ions.  Cyclically varying field means in ionic
    separation or analysis apparatus are not necessarily classifiable here.
    See search notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286,    for cyclically varying beam pulsing means external to the selecting
    means and in combination with magnetic selecting means for varying the
    radii of the separated ion paths.

    295,    for cyclically varying ion accelerating means in combination with
    magnetic selecting means for varying the radii of the separated ion paths.


CLS 250/291
TXT Subject under subclass 290 wherein the field means produces a desired ion
    path of motion containing a unidirectional curvature of greater than 180
    degrees.

    (1)     Note.  The "Circular" path need not be uniplanar.  Thus, field
    means producing spiral paths will be found in this subclass.


CLS 250/292
TXT Subject matter under subclass 281 wherein the selecting means comprises
    field means causing alternating deflection of the ions normal to their
    general forward motion.


CLS 250/293
TXT Subject matter under subclass 290 wherein the ion selecting means includes
    a polarized field whose direction of polarization changes cyclically.

    (1)     Note.  Means producing selecting fields which vary in magnitude
    cyclically but not in direction are not classified in this subclass, but in
    290 above.  The field means classified here tend to produce oscillations of
    the ions rather than intermittant unidirectional accelerations.


CLS 250/294
TXT Subject matter under subclass 281 wherein the selecting means comprises a
    normally nonvarying electric or magnetic field.

    (1)     Note.  The field means of this subclass and the subclasses indented
    hereunder typically interact with the charges of the ions to bend the path
    of an ion an amount depending on its mass and charge.

    (2)     Note.  Although the field means of this subclass and the subclasses
    indented hereunder are normally nonvarying, those field means that have
    means to adjust their intensity or direction are not precluded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    396+,   for ion path bending field means, per se, or in combination with
    sources.  Ion path bending field means with detectors will also be found
    there if the field means does not separate ions of different charge-to-mass
    ratios.


CLS 250/295
TXT Subject matter under subclass 294 having, in addition to the ion selecting
    field means, variable field means to change the path of a stream of ions.


CLS 250/296
TXT Subject matter under subclass 294 including in addition to a first type
    static field ion selecting means, another static field of a different type
    ion path bending means which may be for the purpose of selecting ions of
    one charge-to-mass ration from ions of another charge-to-mass ratio or for
    some other purpose such as accelerating or focusing the ions.

    (1)     Note.  The plural diverse types of field means of the subject
    matter of this subclass are generally magnetic and electro static.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    396+,   for electrical beam focusing means, per se, and in combination with
    ion sources or detectors.


CLS 250/297
TXT Subject matter under subclass 296 wherein diverse field means act
    simultaneously and within a single evacuated container to deflect the ions
    more than 180 degrees or to cause paths which are not confined to one plane.

    (1)     Note.  Most of the subject matter pertains to ion separation during
    a circular, spiral or cycloidal ion-flight path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291,    for devices causing similar ion paths by means of alternating
    fields.


CLS 250/298
TXT Subject matter under subclass 294 wherein the ion selecting means is a
    magnetic field.


CLS 250/299
TXT Subject matter under subclass 298 including signalling means responsive to
    the selected ions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    336.1+, for ion responsive electric signalling means, per se.

    472.1+, for ion responsive nonelectric signalling means, per se.


CLS 250/300
TXT Subject matter under subclass 299 including means to change the response of
    the ion responsive means or to keep it constant.


CLS 250/301
TXT Subject matter under class definition which includes methods of examining
    materials for the presence or absence of oil, the amount of oil present in
    the material, the contamination of oil or the contamination of material by
    oil by subjecting the material to a radiation test.

    (1)     Note.  The material examined includes liquid and solid materials,
    petroleum and petroleum products, and products, and sample material after
    it has been removed from the earth.

    (2)     Note.  Generally the radiation used for the test is ultraviolet
    radiation but any type of radiation can be employed.

    (3)     Note.  Visual and automatic methods of testing of oil are here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    253+,   for testing methods including taking samples from the earth or
    testing on or within the earth for oil.

    302+,   for methods using fluorescent tracer material generally.

    304,    for methods involving nonradiation treatment of test materials or
    the separation of test materials or the separation of test materials before
    or after a radiation test.

    362,    for methods of testing material which luminescence in response to
    radiation and an electrical detector detects the luminescence.

    432+,   for irradiating supported transported or contained material.

    459.1,  for methods of irradiating luminescent material.


CLS 250/302
TXT Subject matter under class definition which includes methods of applying a
    material onto a surface, into a substance, into a closed or open pipe, or
    into a fluid, static or moving, and detecting the radiation emitted
    naturally or as secondary radiation as a result of irradiation of the
    material or a modification of radiation caused by the material for any
    purpose not provided for else where.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass includes flow testing
    methods using fluorescent material and a radiation source to cause the
    material to give off light.

    (2)     Note.  The combination of a tracer with a manufacturing or an art
    process will go with the manufacturing or art process; also, articles of
    manufacture with a tracer for this class will be found with the
    manufactured item.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259+,   for tracer methods used in or about a well.

    459.1,  for methods involving the irradiation of luminophors.

    483.1,  for luminescent devices generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 104+ for surface or cutting edge
    testing methods and apparatus; and subclass 861.07 for volume or rate of
    flow meters measuring tracer concentration.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 301.16 through 301.6 for luminescent
    compositions and subclass 408 for testing or indicating compositions.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 216, 451, and 452+,
    respectively, for the combination using electrostatically and magnetically
    charged particles for detecting for flaws with or without a fluorescent or
    radioactive tracer.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 237+, 426+, and 430+ for
    flaw testing by optical or visual methods or apparatus.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 9.1+
    for in vivo diagnosis and testing compositions with subclasses 9.6 and 9.61
    containing compositions producing in vivo fluorescence and subclasses 9.7,
    9.71, 9.8, and 9.81 containing compositions which produce a visible change
    in the mouth or on the skin and subclasses 10.1+ for Class 424 compositions
    with an identification or warning feature which may involve color or a
    color change.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 1+ for radioactive materials applied to the
    body for therapy, as well as devices for holding or applying radioactive
    materials, and subclasses 407+ for imaging of a part or the entire human
    body.


CLS 250/303
TXT Subject matter under subclass 302 wherein the material is or includes a
    readioactive substance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    260,    for radioactive tracer methods used in wells.

    493.1,  for radioactive tracers not found elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 625+, especially 646 for radioactive
    compositions

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses
    1.11+ for the class defined compositions and methods comprising a
    radionuclide or intended radionuclide.


CLS 250/304
TXT Subject matter under class definition which includes methods of preparing a
    material or separating one material from other materials for an invisible
    radiation test or controlling a material while being tested by invisible
    radiation and subjecting the material so prepared, separated or controlled
    to a radiation test.

    (1)     Note.  Preparation or controlling includes acting upon the test
    material so that the radiation test can be performed and includes
    temperature and pressure control of the material, mixing,   grinding,
    drying and chemical and  physical reactions as long as no details are given
    of the chemical or physical process.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, particularly subclasses 863+ for a sampler.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 36+ for the preparation
    of material and testing of the prepared material by an optical test.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 1+ for
    methods having a chemical reaction or a physical separation process
    involving a test material and the examination of the material by radiation.


CLS 250/305
TXT Subject matter under class definition having means for or method of
    separating electrons according to their respective energies (including
    velocity and momentum) and detecting the separated electrons.

    (1)     Note.  The separated electrons may include one or more energy level
    groups.

    (2)     Note.  The separation may occur in static or dynamic electric or
    magnetic deflecting, focusing or repelling fields.

    (3)     Note.  The electrons usually result from the bombardment of a
    solid, liquid or gas sample (a) with electromagnetic radiation or charged
    or neutral particles causing the emission of electrons from the sample or
    (b) with primary electrons diffracted by or transmitted through the sample.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281+,   for similar systems for separating ions according to charge-to-mass
    ratio.

    306+,   for electron inspection systems wherein the induced, diffracted or
    transmitted electrons are detected irrespective of energy level.

    396+,   for electron deflection systems for deflecting electrons
    irrespective of energy.


CLS 250/306
TXT Subject matter under class definition wherein the apparatus comprises a
    source of or means which impels charged particles toward a nongaseous
    object or material to be studied and both means to support, position or
    accommodate the object or material relative to the source or a detector,
    and means to detect such particles that pass near to or through the object
    or material, or are reflected from or diffracted by said object or
    material, or secondary radiation emitted from the object or material.

    (1)     Note.  The secondary radiation emitted by the object or material
    may be X-rays, however, placement here requires examination of the object
    or material rather than merely bombarding a target to generate X-rays.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    336.1+, for this combination with an electric detector where the object is
    not studied.

    399,    for X-ray generation with deflection, scanning, spreading or
    focusing of the beam of electrons or ions bombarding a target.

    423+,   for ion generators with focusing means not of the beam lens type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 861.05, 861.07, and 861.09 for
    the measurement of the volume or rate of flow of charged particles.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclass 138 for X-ray tube
    with focusing means not of the beam lens type.


CLS 250/307
TXT Subject matter under subclass 306 which includes processes for inspecting
    an object or material with charged particles.


CLS 250/308
TXT Subject matter under subclass 306 wherein the source of charged particles
    comprises a radioactive material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    336.1+, especially subclasses 363.01, 364, 380, 381, and 384, for
    electrical detectors combined with radioactive sources of charged particles
    where no object positioning means is included in the combination.

    SEARCH CLASS

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 450.2 for a metal casting apparatus
    including control means influenced by a radioactive sensor.


CLS 250/309
TXT Subject matter under subclass 306 wherein the charged particles are
    positively charged.


CLS 250/310
TXT Subject matter under subclass 306 having means to project a concentrated
    beam of electrons against the object or material, and means to detect
    secondary radiation emitted from the object or material, or electrons
    deflected by the object or material.


CLS 250/311
TXT Subject matter under subclass 306 wherein electrons are impelled toward the
    object or material and the particles detected are electrons which have
    passed near or through the object or material without substantial
    deflection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    440+,   for object supports with or without a source.


CLS 250/315.3
TXT SOURCE WITH CHARGED PLATE-TYPE DETECTOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition which includes a charged member
    and a source of invisible radiation to irradiate the charged member, or the
    step of irradiating the charged member, to alter the charge on the member
    in response to the radiation.

    (1)     Note.  Means for or the step of charging the detector may be
    included in this subclass in combination with the source and charged
    plate-type detector.

    (2)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass may be in combination
    with means to hold, position or accommodate an object in the path of the
    radiation from the source to the detector, generally for the purpose of
    producing on the detector an image of the object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324+,   for apparatus for or the method of corona irradiation to charge the
    detector without subsequent altering of the charge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclass 444 for dyeing processes; and subclass 103
    for bleaching processes involving the use of corona irradiation.

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, for both methods and apparatus, for
    effecting chemical reactions by means of corona irradiation.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 245+ and
    266+ for processes involving the use of corona radiation.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 358 and 451 for
    apparatus for subjecting foods and beverages to wave, radiant and
    electrical energy.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 620+ for coating apparatus combined
    with means to apply corona radiation to the work.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 156 and 164+ for
    processes for performing chemical reactions within an electric space
    discharge field, subclasses 554+ and 660+ for methods and apparatus
    specialized for electrical or simultaneous electrical and magnetic
    separation or purification of a liquid or for magnetic treatment of a
    liquid (other than separation), and subclasses 192.1+ and 298.01+ for
    methods and apparatus specialized for coating, forming, or etching objects
    by sputtering (e.g., coating within a gaseous medium by the action of an
    electrical space discharge to sputter coating material onto a substrate,
    etc.).

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, for the electric lamp or
    discharge device, per se.

    355,    Photocopying, subclasses 3+ for apparatus and method of electric
    photocopying with visible light (which includes means for charging).

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 28+ for
    xeroradiography.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, especially subclasses 22+ for processes of
    disinfecting, deodorizing, preserving or sterilizing nonfoods; and
    subclasses 129+, especially subclass 185 for apparatus using corona
    radiation for effecting chemical reactions.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 234, 236 and 237+ for processes involving the use of electrical,
    wave or radiant energy in food treatments.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 457+ for processes of coating using
    electrical or wave energy.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses
    1+, and especially indented subclasses 154+ for surgical appliances and
    devices which include means for applying an electrical space discharge to
    the human body and which are limited by claimed subject matter to
    therapeutic use.


CLS 250/316.1
TXT With infrared or thermal pattern recording:

    Subject matter under the class definition having a surface responsive to an
    infrared or heat pattern and a recording means which may be the responsive
    surface or a separate means responsive to the surface whose response
    outlasts its exposure to the pattern.

    (1)     Note.  The pattern referred to above is the thermal or radiation
    field configuration which is present at the surface of the detector.

    (2)     Note.  The response of the recording means may be visible or
    invisible (latent).  Where the response is latent, additional structure may
    be included to make it visible, (e.g., develops).

    (3)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses provide for methods
    associated with the recording apparatus as well as the apparatus itself.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    330,    for nonrecording infrared to visible imaging systems.


CLS 250/317.1
TXT Thermal copying of documents:
    Subject matter under subclass 316.1 which includes additionally a source of
    infrared radiation and a sheet type document having visual information
    thereon which information selectively absorbs the radiation from the source
    to form a thermal image of the information thereon, the responsive surface
    being responsive to the thermal image to cause the recording means, a copy
    sheet, to form a latent or visual duplicate of the information.

    (1)     Note.  A document for this subclass is a two-dimensional sheet of
    paper which has on one or both sides of the sheet visual information in the
    form of a graph, picture, writing, handwritten or printed, from which a
    duplicate is to be made.

    (2)     Note.  The copy sheet is both the detector and the recording means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclasses 765+ methods and apparatus for lithographic
    plate making and copying by means of using radiant or dual energy to make
    the copy.

    281,    Books, Strips, and Leaves, subclasses 15+ for a group of sheets,
    one being a transfer sheet and the other a copy sheet.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, for imaging process using infrared radiation with chemically
    defined material and for chemically defined products useful for detecting
    or reviewing an image by infrared radiation.


CLS 250/318
TXT Subject matter under subclass 317 having (1) a transfer member which
    receives the thermal image by heat conduction from the document and the
    member passes the said heat image on to the recording means which is a copy
    sheet or (2) a transfer member having material which is transferred to the
    copy sheet as a result of a thermal image received by the member from the
    document or (3) a transfer member which receives a thermal image from the
    copy sheet and as a result thereof transfers material from the member to
    the copy sheet to form a latent or visible image of the copy sheets.

    (1)     Note.  The transfer member may be a sheet, roll or web.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, particularly subclasses 129+ and 209 for
    endless and rotary conveyors generally.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclasses 3.01+ for feeding sheet
    material from a supply and delivering the sheet material to a compartment,
    subclasses 8.1+ for feeding sheet material from a supply and subclasses 63+
    for delivering sheet material to a compartment.


CLS 250/319
TXT Subject matter under subclass 317 which includes a conveying device to move
    the document, the copy sheet or the document and the copy sheet past the
    infrared source or the infrared source past the document and copy sheet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, for power conveyors generally.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivery, for conveyors to move sheet material one
    at a time from a sheet supply to a sensing station or from a sensing
    station to a delivery point.


CLS 250/324
TXT Subject matter under class definition wherein means are provided for
    impacting an object with gas ions resulting from an incomplete electrical
    discharge from an electrode.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass includes method of and
    apparatus for irradiating an object to alter some physical characteristic
    of the object.

    (2)     Note.  For the classes and subclasses which provide for irradiating
    to bleach, preserve, dry, treat, copy, etc.  See the classes specified in
    the notes to subclass 315.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315.3,  for exposure of charged plate type detector

    423+,   for corona source, per se.


CLS 250/325
TXT Subject matter under subclass 324 wherein electrons or ions from the corona
    are deposited on an object resulting in a residual charge on the object and
    including means for or the step of moving the object during irradiation.

    (1)     Note.  The resulting charge deposited on the object is generally
    uniform and for the purpose of producing a charged plate type detector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315.3,  for exposure of charged plate type detector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, cross-reference art collection 900 for a method or
    apparatus for assembly by electrostatic attraction, which may include a
    step or mechanism for imposing an electrostatic charge.


CLS 250/326
TXT Subject matter under subclass 324 wherein electrons or ions from the corona
    are deposited on an object resulting in a residual charge on the object.

    (1)     Note.  See Note 1 and search notes to subclass 325.


CLS 250/328
TXT Subject matter under class definition which includes plural, identical
    radioactive sources or sample holders, a detecting station, means to
    position sucessively, one at a time, one of the sources or holders at the
    detecting station and means to detect the radioactive emissions from the
    source or holder at the detecting station.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, subclasses 2+ for
    chutes, 35+ for rollerways and subclasses 38+ for skidways to transfer
    articles from one point to another.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 20+ for article transfer
    devices.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 1 for process for the separation of
    one or more articles at a time from an article source of supply.


CLS 250/329
TXT Subject matter under class definition which includes a source of radiation,
    a screen and a record having a pattern or a support for a record wherein
    the radiation forms a radiation image of the pattern and (1) a light image
    of the radiation image is formed on the screen or (2) a light reversal
    image is formed on the screen, when illuminated and methods of using such
    means.

    (1)     Note.  Included are devices which as a result of part (2) of the
    definition cause more contrast of image details on the screen when
    illuminated.

    (2)     Note.  The screen is not restricted to a luminescent type as long
    as an image can be seen as a result of a radiation image incident upon the
    screen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    271,    for coded record readers wherein the reader gives a response to
    identify a code pattern.

    316.1+, for methods and apparatus for recording infrared patterns from a
    infrared source by means of a screen and a recording member.

    327.2,  for methods and apparatus including a source with a recording
    detector which may utilize a screen in the production of a record.

    330,    for methods and apparatus for infrared pattern conversion to
    visible light images.

    458.1+, for methods and apparatus for irradiating as luminophor generally.

    483.1+, for luminescent devices, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 361+ for film viewers
    generally.

    348,    Television, subclasses 744+ for television systems wherein the
    image is projected onto a screen.

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, subclasses 1+ for image projectors
    generally.

    355,    Photocopying, subclasses 18+ and 78+ for methods and apparatus for
    photocopying by projection or contact printing.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    369 and 400 for compound lens systems with viewing screens and 466+ for
    Stereoscopic viewers.


CLS 250/330
TXT Subject matter under class definition comprising means to convert an
    infrared radiation field into a visible light display of the relative
    intensity over the field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    316.1+, for recording incident infrared radiation

    338.1+, for infrared responsive electric signalling devices and methods.

    472.1+, for infrared responsive nonelectric signalling devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 164+ for infrared to visible imaging which
    includes television scanning.


CLS 250/331
TXT Subject matter under subclass 330 wherein the infrared conversion means
    comprises a liquid crystalline material in layer form having an optical
    property that is changed in the infrared image areas.


CLS 250/332
TXT Subject matter under subclass 330 wherein the infrared conversion means
    comprises a plurality of independently responsive infrared detectors in
    mosaic form each of which detects infrared radiation in a different portion
    of the infrared image.

    (1)     Note.  The detectors may (a) change in appearance and are viewed
    directly or with the aid of an assisted optical system, (b) produce a
    corresponding image in an associated viewing means or (c) produce
    electrical signals to control a display device.


CLS 250/333
TXT Subject matter under subclass 330 wherein the infrared conversion means
    comprises an evacuated envelope having an infrared responsive input screen
    with (1) an output screen for visualizing an intensified image or (2) means
    for converting the infrared image to electrical signals to control a
    display device.

    (1)     Note.  Devices under item (1) above include image intensifier
    tubes. Devices under item (2) above include vidicon tubes and television
    cameras.


CLS 250/334
TXT Subject matter under subclass 330 wherein the infrared conversion means
    includes (1) means for moving the detector in faster fashion across the
    field of view or (2) optical means moving in faster fashion across the
    field of view for reflecting infrared radiation to a stationary detector.


CLS 250/335
TXT Subject matter under class definition including vessels transparent in
    whole or in part to permit visual observation of the interior and means
    establishing a supersaturated condition in a gas or liquid confined in the
    vessel to cause visible vapor or bubbles to form in response to an ionizing
    event or the passage of a particle therethrough.


CLS 250/336.1
TXT INVISIBLE RADIANT ENERGY RESPONSIVE ELECTRIC SIGNALLING:

    Subject matter under class definition which when subjected in whole or in
    part to invisible radiant energy produces between some two electrically
    accessible points an increase or decrease in electric potential difference
    or current flow.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass and the subclasses
    indented hereunder includes means to convert invisible radiant energy to
    some other kind of energy which is then converted to an electrical signal.
    For example, means including a phosphorescent material that produces
    visible light in response to irradiation by invisible radiant energy
    combined with means producing an electrical signal in response to
    irradiation by the visible light will be found in subclasses 361+.

    (2)     Note.  Subject matter responsive only to visible radiant energy or
    useful with both visible and invisible radiant energy is not classified
    here but in subclasses 200+ below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   for subject matter responsive to visible radiant energy or useful
    with both visible and invisible radiant energy.

    472.1+, for means which respond to invisible radiation but do not produce,
    or are not combined with means that produce, a corresponding electrical
    signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    109+ for light wave communications.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, appropriate subclasses for
    X-ray devices of this type.


CLS 250/336.2
TXT Superconducting type:

    Subject matter under subclass 336.1 including material having a substantial
    decrease in electric resistance near absolute zero.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 176 for temperature
    measurement with a superconductive sensor.


CLS 250/337
TXT Subject matter under subclass 336 having means or steps for thermally
    exciting to luminescence a material that is or has been exposed to
    invisible radiation in combination with means responsive to the
    luminescence to produce an electric signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    361+,   for luminophors in combination with luminescence responsive
    electric signalling means without heating.

    483.1+, for luminophors, per se.


CLS 250/338.1
TXT Infrared responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 336.1 wherein the signalling means is
    responsive to electromagnetic radiation having a wave-length in the range
    of 750 nanometers to 1 millimeter, i.e., infrared.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass and the subclasses
    indented hereunder does not include heat or temperature responsive means,
    per se.  But these subclasses do include means to convert infrared
    radiation to heat combined with heat or temperature responsive electric
    signalling means responsive to such converted radiations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclasses 224+ for
    thermocouples, per se.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 600 for radiant energy
    conditions indicators.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, Subclasses 100+ for temperature
    Measurement.


CLS 250/338.2
TXT Ferroelectric, ferromagnetic, photomagnetic types:

    Subject matter under subclass 338.1 including a material in which (a) the
    direction of polarization can be reversed by an electric or magnetic field
    or (b) in which the magnetic permeability can be changed by infrared
    radiation.

    (1)     Note.  Ferroelectric materials are pyroelectric as well.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    338.3,  for pyroelectric infrared detectors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 176+ for temperature
    measurement with a ferroelectric or ferromagnetic sensor.


CLS 250/338.3
TXT Pyroelectric type:

    Subject matter under subclass 338.1 including a material wherein a change
    in the intensity of absorbed incident radiation produces an electric signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332+,   for infrared-to-visible imaging with a pyroelectric target.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclass 213 for
    radiation pyrometers.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 388 for cathode ray
    tubes with a pyroelectric target.


CLS 250/338.4
TXT Semiconducting type:

    Subject matter under subclass 338.1 including material having a resistivity
    intermediate that of metals and insulators.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332,    for infrared-to-visible imaging with a semiconducting target.

    370.01+, for semiconducting detectors, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 10, 11, 21, 53-56, 113-118, 184-189, 225-234, 257, 258, 290-294,
    and 414-466 for radiation-sensitive active semiconductors devices, and
    subclasses 613+ for active semiconductor devices containing Group II-VI
    compounds.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 178 for temperature
    measurement with a semiconductor.


CLS 250/338.5
TXT With means to analyze uncontained fluent material:

    Subject matter under subclass 338.1 having means to detect infrared
    radiation emanating from the material.

    (1)     Note.  The emanation from the material may be natural emission or
    radiation modified or caused by the material as through reflection,
    resonant absorption, reradiation and the like.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    339.07  and 339.08, for infrared spectrometry.

    343     and 373, for transmission-testing of contained material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 317+ for spectroscopy
    with sample excitation using light, and subclasses 436+ for transmission or
    absorption testing of a fluent material.


CLS 250/339.01
TXT With selection of plural discrete wavelengths or bands:
    Subject matter under subclass 338.1 having means to isolate from an
    infrared beam two or more of its components having different wavelengths or
    ranges of wavelengths and to direct the components simultaneously or at
    different times to the responsive means and methods involving the use of
    such means.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass includes ``infrared
    spectrometry" which includes, in addition to the means of the subclass, a
    sample of a material to be tested positioned in the infrared beam either
    before or after the selection means.  The subject matter of this subclass
    does not include signalling means that have plural wavelengths or bands
    wherein only one wavelength or band is in the infrared region of the
    spectrum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370.06, for systems with means to differentiate between different
    wavelengths or types of invisible radiation.

    503.1,  for a radiation source for this class and a  filter for the
    radiation source, the filter being an absorption filter or a prism or
    diffraction grating type filter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 300+ for spectroscopic
    apparatus using visible light and dispersive devices; subclasses 319+ for
    spectrophotometers; and subclasses 405, 406, and 407 for spectroscopic
    apparatus using visible light and dispersive devices, subclasses 85+ for
    plural spectrophotometers, subclasses 96+ for spectrophotometers, per se,
    and subclasses 176, 177, and 178 for spectrophotometers of the plural
    filter type where only visible light tests are performed.


CLS 250/339.02
TXT Including detector array:
    Subject matter under subclass 339.01 wherein infrared detection means
    comprise a plurality of independently responsive infrared detectors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332,    for infrared-to-visible imaging detector array.

    349,    for plural infrared responsive signaling means not having plural
    discrete wavelengths or bands.


CLS 250/339.03
TXT Including temperature control means:
    Subject matter under subclass 339.01 containing means to adjust or maintain
    the temperature of a signalling means, of a component thereof, or of a
    sample under analysis.

    (1)     Note.  A sample is defined as a solid material or object or a
    fluent material (i.e., liquid or gas) that is being analyzed to determine
    particular properties or attributes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    352,    for temperature-controlled infrared detectors.

    370.15, for temperature control of semiconductor systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 514 for detector cooling in general.


CLS 250/339.04
TXT Including temperature determining means:
    Subject matter under subclass 339.01 containing means to measure the
    temperature of a sample under analysis.


CLS 250/339.05
TXT With additional noninfrared wavelengths:
    Subject matter under subclass 339.01 wherein the signalling means utilize
    or sense electromagnetic radiation having wavelengths outside the infrared
    region of the spectrum in addition to the plural wavelengths or bands
    within the infrared region.


CLS 250/339.06
TXT With radiation source:
    Subject matter under subclass 339.01 which includes irradiation of a sample
    by infrared radiation and detection of the emitted radiation from the
    sample or the radiation after transmission or reflection from the sample.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    341.8+, for methods involving irradiating samples.


CLS 250/339.07
TXT Including spectrometer or spectrophotometer:
    Subject matter under subclass 339.06 wherein a spectrometer or a
    spectrophotometer is used to detect infrared radiation that has interacted
    with a sample.

    (1)     Note.  A spectrometer is an instrument that determines the
    frequency distribution of the energy generated by a source and displays all
    components simultaneously.  A spectrophotometer is an instrument that
    detects and measures the  spectral transmittance, reflectance, or emittance
    of a sample for comparing or determining properties as a function of
    wavelength.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 319+ for
    spectrophotometers, and subclasses 326+ for spectrometers.


CLS 250/339.08
TXT Including Fourier transform infrared spectrometry:
    Subject matter under subclass 339.07 wherein the detection process includes
    performing a Fourier transform on the detected signal.

    (1)     Note.  A Fourier transform is a mathematical operation which
    decomposes a time varying signal into its complex frequency components
    (amplitude and the phase or real and imaginary components).


CLS 250/339.09
TXT With calibration steps in measurement process:
    Subject matter under subclass 339.06 wherein the process of quantifying a
    property or attribute of a sample includes establishing a reference level
    or scale.

    (1)     Note.  References are established by normalizing the measurement of
    interest with a measurement from a reference wavelength or by measuring the
     response of the system under known conditions (e.g. first measuring fixed
    samples).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252.1,  for calibration or standardization methods.


CLS 250/339.1
TXT Determining moisture content:
    Subject matter under subclass 339.06 wherein means are particularly adapted
    to determine the presence or quantity of water in a sample.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    390.05, for neutron responsive moisture determining systems.


CLS 250/339.11
TXT Measuring infrared radiation reflected from sample:
    Subject matter under subclass 339.06 wherein detection means are positioned
    to receive infrared radiation which has been reflected by a sample.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 445+ for light
    reflection systems in general.


CLS 250/339.12
TXT Using sample absorption for chemical composition analysis:
    Subject matter under subclass 339.06 wherein chemical constituents or
    properties of a sample are determined by detecting and analyzing infrared
    radiation that has interacted with the sample.


CLS 250/339.13
TXT With gaseous sample:
    Subject matter under subclass 339.12 wherein a sample is in a gaseous state.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    343,    for infrared responsive systems with fluid confining means between
    the source and detector.


CLS 250/339.14
TXT Detecting infrared emissive objects:
    Subject matter under subclass 339.01 which includes the detection of an
    infrared radiant energy emitting object and indication of the presence,
    location, or direction of the energy emitting object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    342,    for methods involving location of infrared emissive objects.


CLS 250/339.15
TXT Sensing flame or explosion:
    Subject matter under subclass 339.14 wherein the detection means sense
    infrared wavelengths emitted by the combustion of solids or gases.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communication:  Electrical, subclasses 578+ for flame responsive
    indication systems.


CLS 250/340
TXT Subject matter under subclass 338.1 which includes methods of detecting
    infrared radiation where not elsewhere provided.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    341.1+, for methods involving electric signalling where the detected
    radiation is first modified by material or an object before detection.

    342,    for methods involving the locating of objects.


CLS 250/341.1
TXT With irradiation or heating of object or material:

    Subject matter under subclass 340 comprising methods which include the
    irradiation of a material or an object by infrared radiation, or the
    heating of a material or an object to emit infrared radiation, and the
    detection of the radiation from the material or object.


CLS 250/341.2
TXT Including probe:

    Subject matter under subclass 341.1 wherein an elongated element (e.g., an
    optical fiber) is used to irradiate the material or object with infrared
    radiation or to detect infrared radiation from the material or object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227.11, for optical probes using visible radiation.


CLS 250/341.3
TXT Including polarizing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 341.1 having means to polarize infrared
    radiation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225,    for optical or pre-photocell systems with means for polarizing
    visible light.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 364+ for polarized light
    examination.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    483+ for polarizers, per se.


CLS 250/341.4
TXT With semiconductor sample:

    Subject matter under subclass 341.1 wherein the object irradiated or heated
    is a material having resistivity intermediate that of metals and insulators
    (i.e., a semiconductor).


CLS 250/341.5
TXT With calibration:

    Subject matter under subclass 341.1 wherein the process includes
    establishing a reference level or scale based on detected infrared
    radiation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252.1,  for calibration or standardization methods with sources of
    invisible radiation.

    339.09, for calibration with selection of plural discrete infrared
    wavelengths or bands.


CLS 250/341.6
TXT Heating of object or material:

    Subject matter under subclass 341.1 wherein the material or object is
    heated causing the material or object to emit infrared radiation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 5 for heating of specimen
    for detection of leak or flaw.


CLS 250/341.7
TXT With multiple sources:

    Subject matter under subclass 341.1 wherein the material or object is
    irradiated with infrared radiation from two or more distinct sources.


CLS 250/341.8
TXT Measuring infrared radiation reflected from sample:

    Subject matter under subclass 341.1 wherein detection means are positioned
    to receive infrared radiation which has been reflected by the material or
    object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    339.11, for measuring infrared radiation reflected from samples with
    selection of plural discrete wavelengths or bands.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 445+ for light
    reflection systems in general.


CLS 250/342
TXT Subject matter under 340 which includes the detection of an infrared
    radiant energy emitting object and the indication of the presence, location
    or direction of the energy emitting object.

    (1)     Note.  An object includes planets, infrared sources and man made
    objects.


CLS 250/343
TXT Subject matter under subclass 338.1 having a source of infrared radiation
    in addition to the signalling means and means to confine a gas, fluid or
    fluid-like material between the source and the signalling means so that the
    signalling means responds to radiation, from the source, that passes
    through the material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 2+ for processes using IR transmission
    tests to control the concentration of a mixture of fluent materials and
    subclass 93 for corresponding apparatus.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 40 for automatic control of
    distillation apparatus by means of infrared absorption test.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, subclass 683.4 for control of
    concentrations by IR transmission tests.


CLS 250/344
TXT Subject matter under subclass 343 having two or more signalling means
    spaced along a single path of radiation from the source.

    (1)     Note.  Expansible gas responsive means having two chambers and a
    common deformable wall which moves as a result of the difference in
    pressures between the two chambers and gives an electrical signal is
    included in this subclass if both chambers are in the path of the radiation.


CLS 250/345
TXT Subject matter under subclass 343 wherein the source of infrared radiation
    forms two or more beams with at least one beam being transmitted through
    the contained material, and two or more electric signalling means, one
    responsive to radiation transmitted through the contained material and at
    least one in the path of one of the other beams.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252.1,  for methods of standardizing the apparatus of this subclass type.

    339.01+, for means forming two or more beams of different wavelengths or
    bands which may be combined with a contained fluent and a detector in two
    or more of the radiation paths.


CLS 250/346
TXT Subject matter under subclass 345 wherein the signalling means includes a
    means that absorbs the incident infrared radiation and converts it to heat
    combined with electrical means having some electrical parameter
    (capacitance, resistance, etc.), that varies in response to the heat.


CLS 250/347
TXT Subject matter under subclass 338.1 having means to change the path of the
    infrared radiation from the source to the signalling means; or to cause the
    radiation to converge, the orientation or position of the means being
    changeable with respect to some part of the path or signalling means.


CLS 250/348
TXT Subject matter under subclass 347 having means responsive to the radiant
    energy responsive means to change or maintain constant the orientation of
    the deflector or focussing means.


CLS 250/349
TXT Subject matter under subclass 338.1 having two or more infrared responsive
    electric signalling means.


CLS 250/350
TXT Subject matter under subclass 349 having means to change at regular
    intervals some characteristic of the infrared radiation in the path of the
    radiation from the source to the signalling means.


CLS 250/351
TXT Subject matter under subclass 338.1 having means to change at regular
    intervals some characteristic of the infrared radiation in the path of the
    radiation from the source to the signalling means.


CLS 250/352
TXT Subject matter under subclass 338.1 having means to conduct heat to or from
    at least some part of the infrared responsive electric signalling means.


CLS 250/353
TXT Subject matter under subclass 338.1 having means to change the path of the
    infrared radiation from its source to the signalling means or to cause the
    radiation to converge.


CLS 250/354.1
TXT Signalling means controls incident radiation:

    Subject matter under subclass 336.1 including means responsive to the
    electric signalling means to vary or maintain constant some characteristic
    of the invisible radiation impinging upon the signalling means.

    (1)     Note.  Example of means of this subclass type include means to vary
    the intensity, angle of incidence or wavelength of the impinging radiation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 8, 97 and 108 for
    X-ray devices of this type.


CLS 250/356.1
TXT Flow metering:

    Subject matter under subclass 336.1 which includes a passageway containing
    moving material or a substance controlled by the moving material, a
    radiation source which may be the material itself, a detector responsive to
    the radiation from the source after passage of the radiation through the
    material or substance or the radiation from the material, wherein the
    detection forms the basis for a rate of flow determination and methods
    corresponding to the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258,    for testing of wells involving the testing for leakage of fluids
    into or out of a well.

    259+,   for the use of tracer material in a well to test for leakage into
    or out of a well.

    302+,   for rate of flow metering using tracer materials.

    306+,   for rate of flow testing using charge particles.

    359.1,  for fluent material level tests.

    432+,   for rate of flow testing of confined moving fluids using a
    nonelectric detector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclass 51 for X-ray
    devices which may include flow metering.


CLS 250/356.2
TXT Using radioactive tracer:

    Subject matter under subclass 356.1 wherein the material is or includes a
    radioactive substance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    303,    for radioactive tracer methods.


CLS 250/357.1
TXT Fluent material level signalling:
    Subject matter under subclass 336.1 which includes a body of fluent
    material, a radiant energy source, and a detector responsive to the source
    arranged so that the body of fluent material is located in the radiation
    path between the source and detector or the body of fluent material
    supports either the source or detector, wherein the detector produces an
    output representative of the height or depth of the body of fluent material
    and methods corresponding to the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306+,   for containing fluent material level signalling where charged
    particles are used to sense the level of the material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 290+ for liquid level or depth
    gauges not using invisible light.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 109+ and 227+ for mechanical
    liquid level indicators.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 386+ for liquid level responsive or
    maintaining system.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 612+ for fluent or
    pulverized material level not using invisible light.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclass 52 for X-ray type
    level measuring.


CLS 250/358.1
TXT With means to inspect passive solid objects:

    Subject matter under subclass 336.1 having, in addition to an electric
    signalling means, a source of invisible radiant energy and means to
    support, position, or accommodate a material in the solid state in the
    radiation path from the source to the signalling means, the signalling
    means responding to radiation from the source passing through the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306+,   for means to inspect solid objects wherein the radiation is
    comprised of charged particles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, appropriate subclasses for
    X-ray devices of this type.


CLS 250/359.1
TXT Rectilinearly moving object:

    Subject matter under subclass 358.1 wherein the object is radiated by a
    source while the object is continuously moving in a straight line.


CLS 250/360.1
TXT With relative movement means:

    Subject matter under subclass 358.1 having movement conveying means to move
    either the source, signalling means, object or object accommodating means
    with respect to the other means.


CLS 250/361
TXT Subject matter under subclass 336 in which the means that produces the
    change in electric potential difference or current flow is a photodetector
    responsive to incident visible light emitted from a means which passively
    converts the energy of incident invisible radiation into visible radiation.

    (1)     Note.  The means that produces the change in electrical potential
    difference or current flow is usually a photocell, photomutiplier or
    iconoscope.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass and the subclasses indented
    hereunder are means for producing and detecting Cerenkov radiation.

    (3)     Note.  The luminophor may be a luminescent material to be tested by
    invisible radiation or it may be a means to test incident invisible
    radiation.  In either case, the response of the luminiphor is indicated
    electrically.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   for visible light responsive electric signalling means without an
    invisible-to-visible radiation converting luminophor.

    389,    for photoemmissive detectors without a luminophor
    invisible-to-visible converter.

    458.1+, for methods and means for irradiating luminophors, per se.

    483.1+, for luminescent means for signalling by its luminescence, per se,
    the incidence of invisible radiation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for light
    responsive photocell detectors, see particularly sections VIII and IX of
    the Class definition and the notes to subclasses 199, 201 and 204.


CLS 250/362
TXT Subject matter under subclass 361 comprising processes including the
    signalling of incident invisible radiation by the electrical detection of
    light from an exposed luminophor.


CLS 250/363.01
TXT With radiant energy source:

    Subject matter under subclass 361 in combination with means which
    irradiates either the luminophor or the photodetector or both.

    (1)     Note.  The means which irradiates the photodetector may be a source
    of visible light.

    (2)     Note.  Means which generate invisible radiation as a result of
    irradiation by another source of radiation is included in this subclass,
    the first means being the source which the detector is responsive to.


CLS 250/363.02
TXT Body scanner or camera:

    Subject matter under subclass 363.01 in combination with irradiating means
    to form a visible image of the radiation within the body.

    (1)     Note.  A body includes human beings and animals.

    (2)     Note.  The photodetector may move or it may remain stationary with
    respect to the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 4+ and subclasses
    21+ for tomographic body scanners with an external X-ray or Gamma Ray
    source, subclasses 63+ for X-ray imaging combined with non-X-ray imaging
    and subclass 146 for scanners with an external X-ray or Gamma Ray source.


CLS 250/363.03
TXT With positron source:

    Subject matter under subclass 363.02 in which the means which irradiates is
    a source of particles with a mass the same as that of the electron, but
    with a positive charge.


CLS 250/363.04
TXT Emission tomography:

    Subject matter under subclass 363.02 in which the image-forming means
    produces an image of a cross-section of the body from the radiation emitted
    within the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 4+ and subclasses
    21+ for tomography with an external X-ray source.


CLS 250/363.05
TXT With detector support:

    Subject matter under subclass 363.04 including structure to support or move
    the photodetector.

    (1)     Note.  The detectors of a tomography apparatus are moved in a
    circle about an axis perpendicular to the cross-section of the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    363.08, for detector support of body scanners or cameras in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 189+ for X-ray
    nonphotographic detector supports, and subclasses 193+ for X-ray sources
    support.


CLS 250/363.06
TXT Using coded aperture:

    Subject matter under subclass 363.02 including means to spatially modulate
    radiation prior to its impinging upon the photodetector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclass 2 for special
    modulation of X-ray prior to impingement upon an object.


CLS 250/363.07
TXT With distortion correction:

    Subject matter under subclass 363.02 in combination with means to process
    the electric current produced by the photodetector to reduce distortion in
    the visible image formed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    369,    for post-detection circuitry in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 413.26,
    for life science radiation detection with significant signal processing.


CLS 250/363.08
TXT With detector support:

    Subject matter under subclass 363.02 including structure to support or move
    the photodetector irradiating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    363.05, for detector support in emission tomography.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 189+ for X-ray
    nonphotographic detector supports, and subclasses 193+ for X-ray source
    supports.


CLS 250/363.09
TXT With calibration:

    Subject matter under subclass 363.02 including means to establish a
    reference indication of the invisible radiation or its level.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252.1,  for calibrating and standardizing methods in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 571 for
    calibration operations on electrical signals.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclass 207 for calibration
    of X-ray devices.


CLS 250/363.1
TXT With a collimator:

    Subject matter under subclass 363.02 in combination with means to control
    the shape, size, axial direction or focal length of radiation reaching the
    luminophor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    505.1,  for other radiation controlling means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 147+ for
    collimators with a radiation source outside the body.


CLS 250/364
TXT Subject matter under subclasses 363.01+ in which the means that irradiates
    is either a fluid or gas or particles suspended in either a fluid or gas
    medium and means are provided to either conduct or hold the fluent source.

    (1)     Note.  The means to hold the fluid may be, for example, a
    receptacle or an absorbent.


CLS 250/365
TXT Subject matter under subclasses 363.01+ wherein there is at least one
    source of electromagnetic radiation in the ultraviolet region which
    irradiates either the luminophor or the photo detector or both.


CLS 250/366
TXT Subject matter under subclass 361 in which there are two or more means each
    of which produces an electric potential difference or a current flow in
    response to incident radiation.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass may comprise either two
    or more luminophor - photodetector pairs or two or more photodetectors
    irradiated by visible light from any number of luminophors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    367,    for two or more luminophors irradiating only one photodetector.


CLS 250/367
TXT Subject matter under subclass 361 including two or more separate passive
    means that convert incident invisible radiation into visible radiation or
    including diverse passive means that convert incident invisible radiation
    into visible radiation.

    (1)     Note.  The diverse passive means may include a crystal of
    dissimilar materials both of which luminesce but in response to different
    incident radiations.


CLS 250/368
TXT Subject matter under subclass 361 in combination with means affecting the
    transmission of visible light between the liminophor and the light detector.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass includes optical means
    between the luminophor and the light detector other than the atmosphere or
    a window (optical flat) which is not specifically included to attenuate,
    filter, focus or direct light. Included, for example, are light pipes,
    filters, shutters, lenses and reflectors.


CLS 250/369
TXT Subject matter under subclass 361 in combination with electric circuit
    means which is energized or controlled by the electric current produced by
    the photodetector.


CLS 250/370.01
TXT Semiconductor system:
    Subject matter under subclass 336.1 wherein the invisible radiant energy
    responsive electric signal generating means, i.e., detection means, is made
    of a material having a resistivity intermediate that of metals and
    insulators, and means are provides for using or controlling the electric
    signal or for modifying the invisible radiant energy input signal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and those indented thereunder do not provide
    for claims which only recite the structure of a photocell, per se.
    Photocells, per se, are classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 10, 11, 21, 53-56, 113-118, 184-189, 225-234, 257, 258, 290-294,
    and 414-466 for invisible radiation-sensitive active semiconductors devices.


CLS 250/370.02
TXT Alpha particle detection system:
    Subject matter under subclass 370.01 wherein the system contains detection
    means to generate the electric signal in response to helium nuclei
    impingent thereupon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    253,    for alpha detectors to detect radon gas.

    374+,   for alpha detection with gas discharge devices.

    472.1,  for alpha detectors to detect radon gas.


CLS 250/370.03
TXT Fission fragment/fissionable isotope detection system:
    Subject matter under subclass 370.01 wherein the system contains detection
    means to generate an electric signal in response to a fission fragment or
    fissionable isotope impingent thereupon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255,    for geological testing with sampling for the presence of
    fissionable isotopes.

    269.1+, for geological testing with a radiation source for the presence of
    fissionable isotopes.

    390.04, for composition analysis using a neutron detector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclass 253 for reactor fuel element leak detection by detection of
    fission products external to the fuel element; and subclass 257 for reactor
    fuel assay.


CLS 250/370.04
TXT Self-powered system:
    Subject matter under subclass 370.01 wherein the detection means generates
    the signal without any electrical power supply connected thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370.04, for semiconductor neutron detectors that are not self-powered.

    390.01+, for neutron detectors in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclasses 254+ for reactor flux monitors.


CLS 250/370.05
TXT Neutron detection system:
    Subject matter under subclass 370.01 wherein the system contains detection
    means to generate an electric signal in response to a neutron impingent
    thereupon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370.04, for self-powered semiconductor neutron detectors.

    390.01+, for neutron detectors with an electric output.

    472.1+, for detectors with a nonelectric output.


CLS 250/370.06
TXT Discrimination-type system:
    Subject matter under subclass 370.01 wherein the system contains means to
    differentiate between different types of invisible radiant energy impingent
    thereupon or between different output signal characteristics.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    339.07  and 339.08, for infraded spectrometers.

    390.07+, for neutron spectrum analysis.


CLS 250/370.07
TXT Dose or dose rate measurement:
    Subject matter under subclass 370.01 wherein the system includes means to
    determine the amount of radiant energy incident on the detection means,
    including with respect to time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    374+,   for gas discharge-type dosimeters and dose rate monitors.

    388,    for gas discharge-type devices with an indicator.

    390.01, for neutron dose rate monitors in general.

    390.03, for neutron dosimeters.

    392,    for neutron dose rate monitors with an indicator.

    475.2+, for photographic-type dosimeters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclasses 254+ for reactor flux monitors.


CLS 250/370.08
TXT Imaging system:
    Subject matter under subclass 370.01 wherein the system contains means to
    form an image of an object which is directly or indirectly illuminating the
    radiant energy detection means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332,    for infrared-to-visible imaging with semiconductor detectors.

    338.4,  for infrared-responsive semiconductor detectors.

    349,    for infrared-responsive detectors with plural signalling means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 10, 11, 21, 53-56, 113-118, 184-189, 225-234, 257, 258, 290-294,
    and 414-466 for invisible radiation-sensitive active semiconductors devices.

    348,    Television, subclasses 164+ for infrared responsive television
    cameras.


CLS 250/370.09
TXT X-ray or gamma-ray system:
    Subject matter under subclass 370.01 wherein the system includes an X-ray
    or gamma ray source of radiant energy to be incident on the radiant energy
    detection means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    363.2+, for gamma-ray imaging devices including a scintillator.

    367,    for gamma-ray imaging devices including plural scintillators.

    370.11, for radiation-sensitive scintillators with a semiconductor to
    detect visible light therefrom.

    385.1,  for X-ray and gamma-ray imaging with a gas-discharge detector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 10, 11, 53-56, 225+, 414, and 428-430 for active semiconductors
    devices responsive to X-rays or gamma rays.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma-Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 98.2+ for
    circuits for X-ray responsive television cameras.


CLS 250/370.1
TXT Position sensitive detection system:
    Subject matter under subclass 370.01 wherein the system contains means to
    produce an electric signal which indicates the position of the radiant
    energy on the detection means or the position of the source of the radiant
    energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    385.1+, for position-sensitive gas discharge detectors.

    390.12, for position-sensitive neutron detectors.


CLS 250/370.11
TXT Scintillation system:
    Subject matter under subclass 370.01 further including a luminophor which
    converts energy incident thereupon (e.g., electrons, X-rays, etc.) into
    radiant energy to which the detection means is responsive.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    363.2+, for gamma-ray imaging devices including a scintillator.

    367,    for gamma-ray imaging devices including plural scintillators.

    370.09, for X-ray and gamma-ray imaging with a semiconductor.


CLS 250/370.12
TXT Of material other than germanium, diamond, or silicon:
    Subject matter under subclass 370.01 wherein the detection means is an
    uncommonly used material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370.13, for semiconductor detectors including mixtures of cadmium telluride.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 19, 22, 40, 42, 43, 63, 65,
    76-78, 102, 103, 188, 189, 200, 201, 289, 295, 607-612, 613-616, 915, and
    916 for particular active region materials.


CLS 250/370.13
TXT Containing cadmium telluride:

    Subject matter under subclass 370.12 wherein the detection means includes
    Cadmium Telluride.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    338.4,  for infrared-responsive semiconducting detectors including CdTe.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclass 614 for active semiconductor devices containing group II-VI
    compounds.


CLS 250/370.14
TXT Particular detection structure (e.g., MOS, PIN):
    Subject matter under subclass 370.01 wherein the detection means has a
    specified semiconductor structural arrangement (e.g., a light responsive
    field effect transistor, or P-I-N diode, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    the entire class, for active solid-state semiconductor devices, per se,
    which have particular structure.


CLS 250/370.15
TXT Temperature control or compensation system:
    Subject matter under subclass 370.02 further including means to adjust or
    maintain the temperature of the system or of a component thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    352,    for cooled infrared detectors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 514 for detector cooling in general.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g, Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 468, 625, 675, 706, 707, and 712-722 for temperature controlled
    devices.


CLS 250/371
TXT Subject matter under subclass 370.1 including processes employing
    semiconductor detection means to produce an electrical signal.


CLS 250/372
TXT Subject matter under subclass 336.1 wherein the radiation responsive means
    responds to ultraviolet light.


CLS 250/373
TXT Subject matter under subclass 372 having a source of ultraviolet radiation
    in addition to the signalling means and means to confine a gas, fluid or
    fluid-like material between the source and the signalling means so that the
    signalling means responds to radiation from the source, that passes through
    the material.


CLS 250/374
TXT Subject matter under subclass 336.1 wherein the two electrically accessible
    points are separated by an ionizable gas, which gas when subjected to
    invisible radiation ionizes and conducts a current from one point to the
    other, the current being the signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 93 for radiant energy
    responsive gas discharge devices, per se.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 149 for
    systems for energizing discharge devices that are responsive to radiant
    energy.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 459+ for testing
    for other than radiation by ionization means.


CLS 250/375
TXT Subject matter under subclass 374 which includes methods corresponding to
    the apparatus which utilize a radiant energy responsive gas discharge
    device.


CLS 250/376
TXT Subject under subclass 374 including two electrostatically charged
    relatively movable members, at least one of which is electrically connected
    to at least one of the electrodes, the discharge of which cause one of the
    members to be deflected with respect to the other, thus producing a visible
    indication of ionizing radiant energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 109 for
    electroscopes, per se.


CLS 250/377
TXT Subject matter under subclass 376 combined with means for converting
    mechanical energy to electric energy and means electrically connecting said
    converting means to the relatively movable members to transfer electric
    charge thereto.

    (1)     Note.  The converting means of this subclass may include, for
    example, dynamo - electric generators, electrostatic generators or such
    electroscopes as the pith - ball type which are shaken to electrostatically
    charge the balls.


CLS 250/378
TXT Subject matter under subclass 376 with a capacitor or polarizable
    dielectric electrically connected to at least one of the relatively movable
    members.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass includes, for example,
    electrets in combination with electroscopic indicators.


CLS 250/379
TXT Subject matter under subclass 374 combined with means to move or permit
    movement of gas to, through, or away from the space between the electrodes.

    (1)     Note.  Vapors as well as gases are used to ionize the space between
    the electrodes of the device.


CLS 250/380
TXT Subject matter under subclass 379 wherein the gas supplied to the
    electrodes emits, spontaneously, nuclear particulate or electromagnetic
    energy or has entrained in it other gases or fluent-like materials that
    emit spontaneously nuclear particulate or electromagnetic energy.


CLS 250/381
TXT Subject matter under subclass 379 in combination with means to ionize the
    gas between the electrodes comprising a material that emits, spontaneously
    nuclear particulate or electromagnetic energy.


CLS 250/382
TXT Subject matter under subclass 374 including a radioactive material or a
    source of electromagnetic or particulate radiation which detaches electrons
    from the molecules of the gas between the electrodes.

    (1)     Note.  The means to ionize the gas may be contained within the gas
    itself, such as radioactive dust or may be external to it.

    (2)     Note.  Not considered a means to ionize the gas is a material,
    e.g., comprising the container of the gas, which when irradiated, itself
    gives off ions or some other radiation which ionizes the gas.  The means to
    ionize the gas in the example would be the means that irradiates the
    container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 459+ for electrical
    testing by ionizing, without irradiation.


CLS 250/383
TXT Subject matter under subclass 382 wherein the means to ionize the gas is
    another fluid-like material that emits invisible radiant energy, or wherein
    the means to ionize the gas comprises some other source of invisible
    radiation and there is provided some means to contain or otherwise
    accommodate between the source and the gas discharge device a gas, fluid or
    fluid-like material through which the radiation from the source passes to
    the gas discharge device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    379+,   for means to supply a radioactive gas to the space between the
    electrodes of the gas discharge device.

    384+,   for solid radioactive means to ionize the ionizable gas.


CLS 250/384
TXT Subject matter under subclass 382 wherein the means to ionize the gas is a
    material that emits spontaneously, invisible nuclear particulate or
    electromagnetic energy.


CLS 250/385.1
TXT Plural chambers or three or more electrodes:
    Subject matter under subclass 374 wherein there are more than two
    electrically independent, electrically accessible points or wherein the gas
    molecules between the electrically accessible points are prevented from
    free movement between the points by a wall or other barrier.


CLS 250/385.2
TXT Spark chambers:
    Subject matter under subclass 385.1 wherein incoming radiant energy ionizes
    the gas molecules to trigger a spark between the electrically independent,
    electrically accessible points.

    (1)     Note.  The position of the spark corresponds to the position  of
    the ionizing event.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    385.1,  for multiwire, position-sensitive detectors.

    390.12, for position-sensitive neutron detectors.


CLS 250/386
TXT Subject matter under subclass 374 combined with means to establish an
    electric potential difference between the electrically accessible points of
    the gas discharge tube, which means changes the value of the electric
    potential difference at random intervals of time.

    (1)     Note.  The means of this subclass may change the bias voltage in
    response to a discharge in the gas device due to impinging radiation for
    the purpose of quenching the discharge.  Since the time intervals between
    ionizing events is random the biasing means varying in response to such
    events is considered periodic.


CLS 250/387
TXT Subject matter under subclass 374 combined with means to establish a
    potential difference between the two electrically accessible points which
    potential difference varies at equal intervals of time.

    (1)     Note.  The periodic bias supply of this subclass functions, for
    example, to quench the discharge in the gas device.


CLS 250/388
TXT Subject matter under subclass 374 combined with perceptible means to signal
    the presence or amount of radiation impinging upon the radiant energy
    responsive gas discharge device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    376+,   for a radiant energy responsive gas discharge device combined with
    an electroscopis indicator.


CLS 250/389
TXT Subject matter under subclass 336.1 wherein the radiant energy responsive
    means is electrically charged by incident radiation either by retention if
    incident charged particles or by means of the incident radiation raising
    the energy level of molecules in the signalling device sufficiently enough
    to produce free electrons.

    (1)     Note.  This is the residual locus for all radiation responsive
    signalling means including a device which is ionized by impinging radiation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    361+,   for means which emit light upon ionizing events which light is
    photoelectrically detected.

    374+,   for gas or vapor means rendered conductive by ionizing radiation.


CLS 250/390.01
TXT Neutron responsive means:

    Subject matter under subclass 336.1 which produces a change in electric
    potential differential or current flow when subjected to particles with a
    mass approximately the same as that of a proton but with no electric charge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370.04, for self-powered semiconductor detectors which may be
    neutron-responsive.

    370.05, for semiconductor-type neutron detectors.


CLS 250/390.02
TXT Radiographic analysis:

    Subject matter under subclass 390.01 in combination with means to form a
    visible image of neutrons modified by an object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213,    for light amplifiers with vacuum tube circuits.

    363.02, for imaging with a luminophor-containing detector of a radioisotope
    source within a body.

    370.08+, for radiant energy imaging using semiconductor detectors.

    385.1+, for imaging using a gas discharge detector.

    475.2+, for photographic-type detectors.

    483.1+, for detectors with an image convertor screen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclass 57 for closed
    container inspection, subclasses 58+ for X-ray flaw analysis, subclasses
    62+ for X-ray absorption imaging, subclasses 98+ for X-ray radiography with
    electronic image display, subclasses 167+ for X-ray photographic detector
    supports and subclasses 189+ for X-ray nonphotographic detector supports
    including fluoroscopes.


CLS 250/390.03
TXT With dose measurement:

    Subject matter under subclass 390.01 including means to determine quantity
    of incident neutron energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    337,    for thermoluminescent dosimeters.

    370.07, for dose measurement with semiconductor detectors.

    374+,   for dose measurement with gas discharge devices.

    472.1,  for nonelectric, nonphotographic dosimeters.

    475.2+, for photographic-type dosimeters.

    484.1,  for dosimeters having externally-activated luminescence.


CLS 250/390.04
TXT Composition analysis:

    Subject matter under subclass 390.01 in combination with means to determine
    the constituents of an object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    269.4,  for composition analysis of a formation surrounding a bore-hole
    using a source.

    370.03, for semiconductor detectors of fission fragment or fissionable
    isotopes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclass 159 for neutron activation analysis.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 45+ for
    composition analysis using fluorescence, subclass 53 for composition
    analysis using absorption, and subclass 83 for composition analysis using
    spatial energy dispersion.


CLS 250/390.05
TXT For moisture content:

    Subject matter under subclass 390.04 wherein the means is particularly
    adapted to determine the presence or quantity of water in the object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    253,    for geological testing.

    339.1,  for moisture analysis with an infrared source.

    358.1+, for means to inspect passive solid objects.


CLS 250/390.06
TXT Density/thickness/consistency analysis:

    Subject matter under subclass 390.01 in combination with means to determine
    one or more physical quantities of an object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    308,    for beta thickness gauges.

    358.1+, for means to inspect passive solid objects.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclass 50 for thickness or
    density analysis using fluorescence, subclasses 54+ for thickness or
    density analysis using absorption, and subclass 89 for thickness or density
    analysis using scatter.


CLS 250/390.07
TXT Spectrum analysis:
    Subject matter under subclass 390.01 in combination with means to
    discriminate neutrons with respect to energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370.06, for spectrum analysis using a semiconductor detector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclass 49 for X-ray
    fluorescence spectrometers.


CLS 250/390.08
TXT Using time-of-flight spectrometers:

    Subject matter under subclass 390.07 wherein the discrimination means
    operates on the basis of the time it takes a selected neutron to travel a
    given distance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    287,    for ion mobility detectors and time-of-flight mass spectrometers.


CLS 250/390.09
TXT Using diffractometers:

    Subject matter under subclass 390.07 wherein the discrimination means
    operates on the basis of diffraction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 71+ for X-ray
    diffractometers.


CLS 250/390.1
TXT Including beam control:

    Subject matter under subclass 390.01 in combination with means to modify,
    contain or eliminate at least some of the neutrons incident upon the
    responsive means.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 505.1 of this Class 250, (3) Note, for types of
    beam control.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    505.1,  for radiation controlling means in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclass 84 for X-ray
    monochromators, subclasses 147+ for collimators, subclass 160 for X-ray
    shutters and choppers.


CLS 250/390.11
TXT Including a scintillator:

    Subject matter under subclass 390.01 in combination with a luminophor which
    converts incident neutrons to another type of energy to which the means is
    responsive.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213,    for light amplifiers with vacuum tube circuits.

    361+    for devices with a luminophor providing an electric signal.

    370.11, for semiconductor detectors with a scintillator.

    483.1,  for detectors with an image convertor screen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 185+ for
    photographic X-ray detectors with a convertor screen.


CLS 250/390.12
TXT Position-sensitive:

    Subject matter under subclass 390.01 wherein the change in electric
    potential differential or current flow indicates the location of incidence
    of incident neutrons.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    363.02, for body scanners with a luminophor.

    370.10, for semiconductor-type position-sensitive devices.

    385.1+  for position-sensitive gas discharge devices.


CLS 250/391
TXT Subject matter under subclass 390.01 which include methods of detecting or
    measuring the change in electric potential differential or current flow
    generated when the responsive means is subjected to neutron particles.


CLS 250/392
TXT Subject matter under subclass 390.01 with means for indicating or recording
    the signal generated by the neutron responsive means.


CLS 250/393
TXT Subject matter under subclass 336.1 in combination with a claimed source of
    invisible radiation to which the signalling means responds.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes those devices which are disclosed as
    being responsive to unclaimed sources as well as to the claimed source,
    (e.g., calibration "sample") as long as the means responsive to the
    unclaimed source is the same means that responds to the claimed source.


CLS 250/394
TXT Subject matter under subclass 336.1 including two or more radiant energy
    responsive electric signalling means.


CLS 250/395
TXT Subject matter under subclass 336.1 which include processes for producing
    an electrical signal between some two electrically accessible points.


CLS 250/396
TXT Subject matter under class definition having means to deflect, scan, spread
    or focus a beam of electrons or ions.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass and the subclasses
    indented hereunder is often referred to as "electro-optical means" because
    its effect on electronic or ionic beams is similar to the effects of lenses
    or prisms on light beams.

    (2)     Note.  Beam forming means, per se, or electron or ion accelerating
    means, per se, are not classified here even though they may be recited as
    focusing means since the definition of this subclass presupposes a beam
    already formed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    423+,   for ion generators with focusing means not of the beam lens type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 210, for ion or electron beam deflecting magnets,
    per se, and the Search Notes thereto for combinations including such magnet
    means.


CLS 250/397
TXT Subject matter under subclass 396 having means responsive to invisible
    radiation to signal the presence or intensity of such radiation.

    (1)     Note.  The incident radiation may be the beam itself or some other
    radiation.


CLS 250/398
TXT Subject matter under subclass 396 having means to hold, position or
    accommodate an object to be irradiated by the beam, or such an object
    itself in combination with the lens.


CLS 250/399
TXT Subject matter under subclass 398 wherein the object irradiated itself
    gives off invisible radiation as a result of its having been struck by the
    beam.


CLS 250/400
TXT Subject matter under subclass 398 combined with means to move the material
    irradiated to, through, within or from the beam path or to cause a moving
    material to move to, through, within or from the beam path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    453.1,  for means to convey an irradiated material to, through or from a
    beam path where no beam deflecting or focusing means is included in the
    combination.


CLS 250/423
TXT Subject matter under class definition comprising electrical means or
    processes to remove from or add to an electrically neutral atom or molecule
    one or more electrons to give to the atom or molecule a net electrical
    charge.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter in this subclass and the subclasses indented
    hereunder includes ion beam generators wherein the ion generator is
    combined with means to accelerate the ions in one general direction.  Such
    means to accelerate typically includes accelerating electric field means or
    means to form the material to be ionized into a vapor jet so that the vapor
    particles after ionization, will be in beam form by virtue of their
    momentum.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is the residual locus for ion generators, per
    se, not elsewhere classified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    396,    for ion generators with beam deflecting or focussing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 202 for ion motors.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 62 for ion generators
    in Cyclotrons and subclasses 359.1+ for discharge devices with means to
    generate and accelerate positive or negative ions, and subclasses 231.01+
    for means for supplying gas to the discharge space.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 111.01+
    for means for supplying fluent material to a discharge device where the
    fluent material may be ionized to produce ions.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 230+ for
    ion generators generally operated in the ambient atmosphere.


CLS 250/424
TXT Subject matter under subclass 423 comprising processes for removing from or
    adding to a neutral atom or molecule one or more electrons.


CLS 250/425
TXT Subject matter under subclass 423 having means to change the state of the
    material to be ionized from a solid to a vapor.

    (1)     Note.  The vaporizing means may be the ionizing means.


CLS 250/426
TXT Subject matter under subclass 423 wherein the means to remove or add
    electrons comprises an electrical space discharge between at least two
    electrodes caused by an electrical potential difference between the
    electrodes in excess of the breakdown voltage of the space between them.


CLS 250/427
TXT Subject matter under subclass 423 wherein the means to remove or add
    electrons comprises means to project electrons toward the materials to be
    ionized.


CLS 250/428
TXT Subject matter under class definition having or comprising means to at
    least, partially enclose or restrain a gaseous, fluid or fluid-like
    material or means to allow or cause movement to, from or through such
    means, or means to move such means and, thus, the material.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of subject matter of this subclass includes vessels
    or conduits, flat surfaces either to support the material against gravity
    or which utilize natural flow-inducing phenomena that contain radiating
    fluent material or such material that is to be irradiated.


CLS 250/429
TXT Subject matter under subclass 428 having means to vary or maintain constant
    the temperature of the fluent material.


CLS 250/430
TXT Subject matter under subclass 428 having a valve or pump to admit fluent
    material to or away from the containment, support or transfer means and
    power operated means to open or close the valve or turn off or on the pump.

    (1)     Note.  The valve actuator may be, for example, a bias spring
    responsive to fluid pressure to open or close the valve or it may be a
    manual actuator powered by hand, other than merely a handle integral with a
    valve stem.


CLS 250/431
TXT Subject matter under subclass 428 having means therewith for removing the
    fluent material or other material from the surfaces or the interior of the
    containment, support or transfer means.


CLS 250/432
TXT Subject matter under subclass 428 combined with means subjecting the fluent
    material to radiation, or with a fluent material that is, itself, an
    emitter of radiation.


CLS 250/433
TXT Subject matter under subclass 432 having a transfer means comprising a
    movable means having a surface for supporting fluent material.


CLS 250/434
TXT Subject matter under subclass 432 having a transfer means comprising means
    to permit the force of gravity to move the fluent material.

    (1)     Note.  The means of this subclass includes guides or walls down
    which the fluent material may fall.


CLS 250/435
TXT Subject matter under subclass 432 having a transfer means comprising a
    fluent material enclosing means having means to permit spatially separate
    ingress and egress of the fluent material.


CLS 250/436
TXT Subject matter under subclass 435 wherein the transfer means causes the
    fluent material to flow about the radiation source.


CLS 250/437
TXT Subject matter under subclass 435 wherein the material enclosing means
    provides a circuitous passageway for the fluent material that bends, twists
    or curves.

    (1)     Note.  The transfer means of this subclass provides a roundabout
    path for the flow of fluent material generally for the purpose of increasng
    exposure to radiation or to increase the surface area or volume of material
    irradiated.  The path may, for example, be sinuous, serpentine, spiral or
    helical.


CLS 250/438
TXT Subject matter under subclass 435 wherein the fluent material enclosing
    means has an obstructing means that changes the direction, velocity or some
    other characteristic of the flow of the fluent material.


CLS 250/440.11
TXT Analyte supports:
    Subject matter under subclass 306 comprising structure for positioning or
    holding against gravity a material to be examined by particle irradiation.


CLS 250/441.11
TXT With air lock or evacuation means:
    Subject matter under subclass 440.1 within a sellable space having an
    entrance opening with separately operable internal and external doors, or
    having emans to lower the pressure within the space.


CLS 250/442.11
TXT With object moving or positioning means:
    Subject matter under subclass 440.1 having means to change the location or
    position of material or an article to be examined or treated.


CLS 250/443.1
TXT With heat transfer or temperature-indication means:

    Subject matter under subclass 440.1 wherein means are provided for
    conducting heat to or away from the object, or means for displaying
    information about the temperature of the object.


CLS 250/453.11
TXT SUPPORTED FOR NONSIGNALLING OBJECTS OF IRRADIATION (E.G., WITH CONVEYOR
    MEANS):Subject matter under the class definition wherein means are provided
    to sustain against gravity an article animate or inanimate, to be
    irradiated by radiant energy solely for the purpose of being treated or
    inspected.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass and the subclass indented
    hereunder are those articles which are detectors by virtue of their
    indication of incident radiation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    336.1+, for electric signalling means, per se, which may be combined with
    supports for nonsignalling objects.

    458.1+, for sources and supported irradiated nonelectric signalling means.

    472.1+, for nonelectric signalling means, per se, which may have support
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 64+ for X-ray
    devices of this type.


CLS 250/454.11
TXT With source support:
    Subject matter under subclass 453.1 in combination with a means to sustain
    against gravity the radiant energy producing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 193+ for X-ray
    source supports.


CLS 250/455.11
TXT Source and object encasement (e.g., sterilizers):
    Subject matter under subclass 454.1 comprising receptacle means enclosing a
    source and an object support so that the object will be subjected to the
    radiant energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    496.1+, for receptacles, per se, containing radioactive sources.


CLS 250/458.1
TXT LUMINOPHOR IRRADIATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition which includes a source of
    radiant energy and a phosphor material which luminesces or which quenches
    luminescence as a result of excitation of the material by the radiant
    energy.

    (1)     Note.  Combinations involving luminophor irradiation and detection
    of the visible luminescence are placed here and cross-referenced to the
    appropriate, photocell subclass in Class 250, subclasses 200+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 542+ for indicia
    forming a display device including a fluorescent substance to cause
    illumination of the indicia.

    348,    Television, subclasses 805+ for cathode-ray tube plus a fluorescent
    screen.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 213+ for the examination
    of light from a luminous source.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 44+ for X-ray
    fluorescence devices.


CLS 250/459.1
TXT Methods:

    Subject matter under subclass 458.1 which includes methods which include
    the irradiation of a phosphor material by a radiant energy source where not
    elsewhere provided.


CLS 250/461.1
TXT With ultraviolet source:

    Subject matter under subclass 458.1 which include the phosphor material in
    combination with an ultraviolet radiation source.


CLS 250/461.2
TXT Biological cell identification:

    Subject matter under subclass 461.1 including irradiation of a biological
    material for the purpose of identifying its type, composition or other
    characteristic, (e.g., cancerous).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 45+ for X-ray
    fluorescence composition analysis.


CLS 250/462.1
TXT Self-luminous article:

    Subject matter under subclass 458.1 which includes self-luminous articles
    or self-luminous attachments therefor where not provided for elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  The radiant energy source may be integral with the article
    or separate from the article as long as the source and article are both
    mounted on a common support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 542+ for signs using
    luminous paint.


CLS 250/463.1
TXT Dials, pointers, gauges, and bands:

    Subject matter under subclass 462.1 wherein the article is a gauge,
    timepiece, pointer, dial, or portions thereof or attachments therefor where
    not elsewhere classified.


CLS 250/464.1
TXT Pendants:

    Subject matter under subclass 462.1 wherein the article is adapted to be
    supported from above and the luminous material is part of, supported within
    or on the article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 122 for flexible means to suspend
    knobs.

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 115+ for chord and rope
    holders.

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclasses 78+ for chains,
    chain links, swivels and attachments.


CLS 250/465.1
TXT Manual operators or luminous attachments therefor:

    Subject matter under subclass 462.1 wherein the luminous article is a
    device which is directly operated by hand or a luminous attachment for a
    manual operator not provided for elsewhere.


CLS 250/466.1
TXT Covers, keys, or luminous attachments therefor:

    Subject matter under subclass 462.1 wherein the article is a static or
    movable closure member or a luminous attachment for a closure member which
    has an opening to permit movement of the movable member therein or
    therethrough or a key or a luminous attachment for a key where not provided
    for elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclasses 343+ for keys, per se, subclass 452 for
    escutcheons; and subclass 455 for key hole covers, generally.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 66+ for
    electrical box covers.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 242+ for face plates for enclosures of
    general utility.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclass 123 for the combination of a switch
    and a supporting means with a closure member.


CLS 250/467.1
TXT Reticles, gun sights or with optical element:

    Subject matter under subclass 462.1 wherein the articles include an
    integral optical device to direct the light rays emitted by the luminous
    article, a luminous optical device with markings which fluoresce or which
    markings are illuminated by the luminous light of the article, or luminous
    visual sight devices not provided for elsewhere.


CLS 250/472.1
TXT INVISIBLE RADIATION RESPONSIVE NONELECTRIC SIGNALLING:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising means responsive to
    invisible radiation whose response is something other than an increase or
    decrease in electric potential difference or current flow between some two
    electrically accessible points and which response is used to indicate the
    presence, type or amount of incident radiation and methods utilizing such
    means.

    (1)     Note.  This is the residual locus for invisible radiant energy
    signalling (i.e., detecting) means.  For such means producing electric
    signals, see the search notes below.

    (2)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass and the subclasses
    indented hereunder, even though they produce no electric signal, may be
    electrically energized.

    (3)     Note.  The radiation incident upon the means may cause a physical,
    structural or chemical change or a change in the energy content of the
    electrons of atoms making up the means.

    (4)     Note.  The response of the means of this subclass may be inherently
    visible or it may be latent, i.e., require development to make it visible.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   for visible radiant energy responsive electric signalling devices
    (photocells) circuits and apparatus, not combined with means to convert
    invisible to visible radiant energy.

    316.1+  and 327.2, for various recording type nonelectric signalling means
    in combination with sources.

    330+,   for nonelectric signalling means used to convert infrared images
    into visible images.

    336.1+, for electric signalling invisible radiation responsive devices,
    especially subclasses 337 and 361+ for luminophors in combination with
    electric signal producing photocells.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 167+ and 189+ for
    X-ray responsive nonelectric signalling with detector support.


CLS 250/473.1
TXT Methods:

    Subject matter under subclass 472.1 which includes processes for producing
    a nonelectric signal in response to invisible radiation.


CLS 250/474.1
TXT Optical change type:

    Subject matter under subclass 472.1 which includes detectors which, upon
    receiving radiation, changes its optical properties.

    (1)     Note.  The optical properties are transmission, reflection,
    refraction, diffraction, and color.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327.2,  for methods and apparatus which includes a radiation generator and
    a detector for recording radiation incident upon the detectors.

    375,    for methods of exposing a detector of this subclass to invisible
    radiant energy where only the intensity of this incident radiation is
    desired.

    505.1+, for invisible radiation controlling means, per se, other than those
    responsive to infrared, visible light, X-ray and ultraviolet light.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 157.15+ for
    methods of irradiating materials by radiant energy to change an optical
    characteristic of the material.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 408 for radiation detectors and methods of
    making the detectors which change an optical property upon being subjected
    to radiation where the detector is no more than a composition.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    240+ for optical devices which change an optical property in response to
    radiation.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 189 for X-ray
    responsive, nonphotographic detector supports.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, particularly subclass 13 for phototropic
    glass compositions.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, in particularly Class 522, for
    methods of irradiating a synthetic resin or natural rubber material to
    change an optical characteristic of the material and to the material
    produced.


CLS 250/475.2
TXT Photographic type:

    Subject matter under subclass 472.1 wherein the detector comprises a
    photographic type material, (e.g., in a film or plate), in a light proof
    housing, (e.g., cassettes or film packs), having at least a portion
    previous to invisible radiation.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are cassettes and packs, per se,
    for invisible radiation responsive photographic type detectors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 167+ for X-ray
    responsive photographic detector supports.


CLS 250/482.1
TXT With radiation filter, modifier, or shield, (e.g., dosimeter badges):

    Subject matter under subclass 475.2 which includes radiation filter means
    cooperating with the contained film or pack to moderate, shield or filter
    some or all of the radiation before the radiation exposes the film.

    (1)     Note.  Filters can modify visible light where a luminescent screen
    is included as part of a film pack or with a cassette or holder.

    (2)     Note.  Herein are dosimeters, including the badge type, wherein the
    intensity or frequency of radiation is modified before being incident upon
    photographic material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    505.1+, for a radiation controlling means, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 70+ for X-ray
    reflection or diffraction devices which includes X-ray radiation filters or
    modifiers and a photographic detector.


CLS 250/483.1
TXT Luminescent device:

    Subject matter under subclass 472.1 which includes a significant structure
    which includes material which emits luminous energy when excited by
    particle or electromagnetic wave energy where not elsewhere classified.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 188.3 for chemical luminescence
    compositions; and subclasses 301.16+ for fluorescent and phosphorescent
    compositions.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 483+ for
    electroluminescent devices.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 84 for decorative electroluminescent panels.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 44+ for X-ray
    fluorescence analysis; and subclasses 190+ for fluoroscopes.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 157+ for coating processes in general
    wherein a flourescent or phosphorescent coating is used and where no
    radiant properties or multilayered luminescent coating are claimed.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet which may have luminescent properties, and especially subclass 917 (a
    cross-reference art collection) for products which are electroluminescent.


CLS 250/484.2
TXT Requiring an additional energy source to cause luminescence:

    Subject matter under subclass 483.1 wherein the material which emits
    luminous energy requires another energy source to raise the energy level of
    the material to luminescence.


CLS 250/484.3
TXT With thermally stimulated phosphor:

    Subject matter under subclass 484.2 wherein the additional energy source is
    a source of heat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    337,    for systems that thermally excite to luminescence a material
    wherein the luminescence detector produces an electrical signal.


CLS 250/484.4
TXT With optically stimulated phosphor:

    Subject matter under subclass 484.2 wherein the additional energy source is
    a source of light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    582,    for systems that use stimulable phosphors to record radiation,
    especially for recording the transmission of radiation through an object.

    591,    for systems that use other optically-stimulated materials to record
    radiation.


CLS 250/484.5
TXT Dosimeter:
    Subject matter under subclass 484.4 wherein the material upon stimulation
    emits luminous energy in proportion to the previous accumulation of
    particle or electromagnetic energy therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    337,    for systems that thermally excite a material to luminescence in
    proportion to the excitation by particle or electromagnetic energy and the
    luminescence detector produces an electric signal.


CLS 250/485.1
TXT With light excluding casing having an aperture:

    Subject matter under subclass 483.1 wherein the structure includes a casing
    to enclose the material or has the (luminescent) material formed as a
    portion of the casing whereby visible light is excluded within the casing
    and an opening in the casing to permit the detection of luminous energy
    emitted by the material.


CLS 250/486.1
TXT With plural luminescent material or plural luminescent containing layers or
    areas:

    Subject matter under subclass 483.1 wherein the structure includes plural
    luminescent materials, several luminescent layers or distinct areas or
    volumes of the same structure which contains the same or different
    luminescent materials.


CLS 250/487.1
TXT With optical member of material to directly modify luminous energy:

    Subject matter under subclass 483.1 wherein the structure additionally
    includes a material or a member having an optical property to control or
    modify the luminous energy emitted by the luminous material.


CLS 250/488.1
TXT Plural planar layer type:

    Subject matter under subclass 487.1 wherein the structure is an integral
    unit formed of plural, flat, sheetlike materials, one of the sheets
    containing luminescent material.

    (1)     Note.  A coating is considered a layer for this subclass.


CLS 250/489
TXT Subject matter under class definition wherein a claimed apparatus is
    disclosed as functioning primarily for accumulating ions, usually for
    obtaining isotopes of increased purity, rather than for obtaining
    information of analytical value.


CLS 250/491.1
TXT MEANS TO ALIGN OR POSITION AN OBJECT RELATIVE TO A SOURCE OR DETECTOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein means are provided to
    relatively immobilize the object in at least one direction or to provide an
    indication of the location of the object relative to the source or detector
    or their support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 20, 68+, 177+,
    195+, and 205+ for X-ray devices with object alignment or positioning means.


CLS 250/492.1
TXT IRRADIATION OF OBJECTS OR MATERIAL:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising means or methods of
    irradiation an object or material including a source and not provided for
    in any of the preceding subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, for irradiation processes wherein the intent is
    to produce thermal changes in a material.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements
    subclasses 100+ and 156+ for subject matter wherein irradiation produces,
    or is intended to produce an induced nuclear reaction.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, particularly
    subclasses 473+ for gettering of a semiconductor substrate via irradiation,
    subclasses 514+ for ion implantation of electrically active dopants into
    semiconductive regions, and subclasses 795+ for thermal treatment of a
    semiconductor substrate via irradiation to modify some property thereof.

    606,    Surgery, subclass 2.5 for subject matter relating to removal of a
    calculus (e.g., stone) from the body wherein the calculus is fractured or
    disintegrated by use of light energy.


CLS 250/492.2
TXT Irradiation of semiconductor devices:

    Subject matter under subclass 492.1 wherein the object irradiated is made
    of, at least in part, a semiconductor material.


CLS 250/492.21
TXT Ion bombardment:
    Subject matter under subclass 492.2 comprising a means for irradiating a
    semiconductive object or material with at least one ion beam.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides, for example, for ion implantation,
    etching, and scanning or deflection of ions on said object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    398,    for deflection or focussing of charged particles onto an object.

    423,    for ion sources.

    492.1,  for irradiation with ultraviolet or infrared sources.

    492.2,  for irradiation directly by electrons including photoemissive
    electrons.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclass 34 for X-ray
    lithography.


CLS 250/492.22
TXT Pattern control:
    Subject matter under subclass 492.2 having means (e.g., template, program)
    representing information necessary to variably expose the semiconductor
    object or material and means or steps responsive to the representing means
    to irradiate or re-irradiate the object or material accordingly.

    (1)     Note.  Systems or methods of this subclass type may include memory
    means, deflection coils, feedback loops, computer processing means, and
    object movement means.

    (2)     Note.  Patterns of this subclass type may, for example, reduce the
    "proximity effect" on the semiconductor object or material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    398,    for deflecting or focussing charged particles onto the object.

    491.1,  for alignment of the irradiating beam and target.


CLS 250/492.23
TXT Variable beam:
    Subject matter under subclass 492.2 including the use of a variable beam of
    charged particles which may be used to project a pattern onto an object.

    (1)     Note.  The variable beam of this subclass type may be formed, for
    example, by at least two different operative means, one being projected
    onto another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    492.22, for pattern control.


CLS 250/492.24
TXT Photocathode projection:
    Subject matter under subclass 492.2 including using electrons emitted from
    photoemissive electrode irradiated by another source of electromagnetic
    radiation such as ultraviolet light.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass may include, for example,
    mask and deflection coils between the photocathode and object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    492.1,  for irradiation of such devices with ultraviolet and infrared
    radiation.

    492.2,  for irradiation of semiconductor devices by electrons other than
    from a photocathode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclass 34 for X-ray
    lithography.


CLS 250/492.3
TXT Ion or electron beam irradiation:

    Subject matter under subclass 492.1 wherein the object or material is
    irradiated by a stream of charged particles.


CLS 250/493.1
TXT RADIANT ENERGY GENERATION AND SOURCES:

    Subject matter under the class definition which includes radiation emitters
    of this class type and not provided for elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, for infrared heaters of the resistance arc, laser
    and electron bombardment type.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 625+ radioactive; and subclasses 301.16+
    for fluorescent or phosphorescent compositions, per se.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, for generators, per se, of
    invisible radiation produced by electrical discharge devices, gas and
    vacuum tubes and incandescent lamps.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, for sources of the
    Class 313 type plus the electric circuit to energize the device.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements, for
    nuclear reactors and reactions.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 119+ for X-ray or
    gamma ray sources.


CLS 250/494.1
TXT Plural radiation sources:

    Subject matter under subclass 493.1 which includes two or more radiation
    sources.

    (1)     Note.  The plural sources may act concurrently, alternately or
    separately.

    (2)     Note.  Generally the claimed apparatus does not include a circuit
    or power supply to power the radiation sources; however, the circuit and
    power supply may be claimed where no other class will take the arrangement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 1 for electric lamps
    or discharge devices structurally combined to form a unitary device.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 35 for the
    combination of plural discharge devices loads having a circuit element; and
    subclasses 46 and 49 for a filament, electric heater or resistance in shunt
    or series with an electrical discharge load.


CLS 250/495.1
TXT Including an infrared source:

    Subject matter under subclass 494.1 wherein at least one of the radiation
    sources emits radiation in the infrared portion of the spectrum.


CLS 250/496.1
TXT With container for radioactive source and radiation directing or selectable
    shielding:

    Subject matter under subclass 493.1 comprising an enclosure including
    radioactive shielding material forming shielded positions, a passageway
    having an unshielded position formed at least in part within and extended
    from the interior to the periphery of the enclosure and a radioactive
    source within the container cooperable with the passageway so that the
    passageway directs the radiation of the source or forms a pathway for the
    radioactive source.


CLS 250/497.1
TXT With means to move source between shielded and unshielded position:

    Subject matter under subclass 496.1 which further includes means to move
    the radioactive source within the passageway between a shielded and the
    unshielded position.


CLS 250/498.1
TXT With pivoted or rotatable radiation shield:

    Subject matter under subclass 496.1 which includes a pivoted or rotatable
    radiation shield within the container or housing which cooperates with the
    passageway and the radioactive source to selectively permit in one position
    the radiation from the source to escape from the container or housing and
    in other positions to prevent the escape of radiation from the container or
    housing.


CLS 250/503.1
TXT With radiation modifying member:

    Subject matter under subclass 493.1 which includes in addition to a
    radiation source, means to alter a radiation beams as to its cross section,
    intensity, direction or spectral or energy content.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray System or Devices, subclasses 145+ for X-ray
    beam control devices.


CLS 250/504
TXT Subject matter under subclass 503 wherein the source emits radiation in the
    ultraviolet or infrared portion of the spectrum.


CLS 250/505.1
TXT RADIATION CONTROLLING MEANS:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising means to modify,
    contain or eliminate at least some of the emanations or (or caused by, in
    the case of secondary emissions) a source of invisible radiation.

    (1)     Note.  Radiation includes secondary radiation along with primary
    radiation which causes the secondary radiation.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass are reflective elements and
    systems.

    (3)     Note.  The devices in this group include apparatus (relying on
    optical principles) to (1) change or select the direction or shape of all
    or part of the radiation, (2) change or select the intensity or amount of
    the radiation, (3) to select certain of the frequencies of the radiation,
    (4) contain all of the radiation from passing beyond the devices (5)
    passing the devices in a given time, (6) change the intensity in a cyclic
    manner in a given amount of time or (7) to eliminate or reduce certain
    frequencies from the radiation on a directional basis.

    (4)     Note.  This group of subclasses include the combination of a device
    of this group and an indicator which, for example, shows the shape or size
    of an aperture, created by adjustment, the pattern cast on a plane
    transverse to radiation passing through an aperture or a collimator or the
    distance between the shutter members forming an aperture.

    (5)     Note.  The optical principles relied upon by these devices to
    control radiation include transmission, reflection, refraction, diffraction
    and absorption.

    (6)     Note.  Included in this subclass are diaphrams and cones which are
    not adjustable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 145+ for X-ray
    beam control devices.


CLS 250/506.1
TXT Shielded receptacles for radioactive sources:

    Subject matter under subclass 505.1 wherein the means comprises a container
    impervious to invisible radiation to hold or enclose a radioactive source
    of such radiation.

    (1)     Note.  The receptacles of this subclass type usually have an
    opening to permit placement therein or removal therefrom of a radioactive
    source and a removable closure to cover the opening.  They may also have
    means to cool the receptacle and means to insert the source into the
    receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    343+,   for contained static or flowing fluent material and electrical
    detectors of invisible radiation.

    428+,   for containers of fluent materials.

    453.1,  with object containers which are designed to permit the irradiation
    of the materials or objects by particle or electromagnetic wave energy
    provided for in this class.

    496.1,  for shielded vessels with radioactive sources for transporting the
    sources or permitting the use of the radioactive or nuclear source in a
    controlled manner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 1+ for ceramic or glass receptacles
    and removable closures for the receptacles where not elsewhere classified.

    220,    Receptacles, for a container; and subclasses 200+ for a removable
    closure.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 1+ for containers having
    doors and shelves generally.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclasses 409+ for layered, canned or jacketed fuel components.


CLS 250/507.1
TXT Having plural storage compartments or plural nested receptacles:

    Subject matter under subclass 506.1 wherein the container includes
    structure to form plural compartments to store plural radioactive sources
    or another container within the container to hold a radioactive or nuclear
    source.


CLS 250/515.1
TXT Shields:

    Subject matter under subclass 505.1 comprising means to absorb radiant
    energy not elsewhere provided for.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 582+ for optical filter compositions which
    include compositions for filtering ray energy.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    350+ for infrared or ultraviolet apparatus; and subclasses 885+ for optical
    filters.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    appropriate subclasses for shield structures used as components of a
    nuclear reactor.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 9.4+
    for X-ray contrast compositions used in in vivo diagnosis or testing and
    subclasses 59+ for body treating compositions for topical sun or radiation
    screening.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 160 for coating processes wherein the
    coating has shielding properties.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet which may have the property of shielding against radiant energy and
    especially subclasses 432+ and 457+ for a nonstructural composite web or
    sheet including a layer of metal.


CLS 250/516.1
TXT Garments:

    Subject matter under subclass 515.1 comprising articles of wearing apparel
    to protect the wearer against harmful electromagnetic or nuclear radiation.

    (1)     Note.  An article of clothing claimed as more than a composition of
    radiation shielding material is classified here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, especially subclass 48 for aprons, subclasses 158+ for
    mittens and gloves; and subclasses 243+ for methods of making various
    articles of clothing.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 478 for X-ray and neutron radiation
    shielding compositions.


CLS 250/517.1
TXT Construction elements or building parts:

    Subject matter under subclass 517.1 wherein the means includes components
    used in the construction of walls and buildings and portions of buildings
    or walls which include material to shield against harmful electromagnetic
    or nuclear energy.

    (1)     Note.  Included are blocks, wall panels and windows which contain
    radiation shielding materials.


CLS 250/518.1
TXT With neutron absorption material:

    Subject matter under subclass 515.1 wherein the means includes devices
    containing neutron absorption material.

    (1)     Note.  A composition of neutron absorption material made into a
    structural element shall be classified here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 478 for compositions used as neutron
    shielding material.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclasses 219+ for nuclear reactors having moderator structure including
    neutron moderators.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet which may have the function of absorbing neutrons.

    523,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, for organic compounds used as
    neutron shielding equipment, particularly subclasses 136+ for resins with
    filler, dyes or pigments.

    554,    Organic Compounds, subclass 77 for esters containing boron type
    acids.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, for certain compositions
    containing hydrocarbons, and especially subclass 944 for a collection of
    patents which disclose radiation-resistant compositions.


CLS 250/519.1
TXT Flexible:

    Subject matter under 515.1 wherein the controlling means is constructed of
    a pliable material or so constructed that it is easily deformed or bent.


CLS 250/522.1
TXT SOURCE SUPPORTS:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising structure to hold a
    radiation source not provided for elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  Housing for radiation sources of this class type not
    claiming a radiation shield or an aperture or other radiation controlling
    element are considered support structure and are included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    506.1,  for shielded radioactive source receptacles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 193+ for X-ray
    source supports.


CLS 250/526
TXT Subject matter under class definition which is not provided for in any of
    the preceding subclasses of this class.


CLS 250/548
TXT Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the photocell detects a material
    having a cross-sectional dimension which is small compared to length and
    produces an electrical output which through additional structure controls
    the position, size or speed of the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    559.01+, for a web, strand, strip or sheet in the optical path including
    circuitry for analyzing the photocell output.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 364+ for the examination
    of materials using polarized light; subclass 371 for flatness tests;
    subclasses 372+ for the measurement of dimensions; subclass 399 for
    determining lateral alignment; subclasses 402+ for shade or color tests;
    subclasses 432+ for determining light transmission or absorption of
    materials; subclasses 445+ for measuring the reflectivity of materials; and
    subclass 237 for the inspection for flaws or imperfections.


CLS 250/549
TXT Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the illumination which falls on
    the photocell comes from a light source which comprises a cathode-ray tube
    and said photocell electrically controls the cathode-ray tube.

    (1)     Note.  See (4) Note under the definition of subclass 200 for a
    general distinction between subject matter of this class (250) and Class
    315 and Class 348.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202,    for optical systems wherein the photocell follows the edge of a
    pattern under control of the illumination.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 10+ for
    photocell circuits in which the photocell controls a cathode-ray tube but
    does not include the combination of mechanical devices, optical devices or
    specific input sources of information.  Examples of cathode-ray tube
    control of this class (315) include means to control the intensity of the
    tube, means to automatically control the contrast of said tube under
    quiescent conditions or means to generate a scale or grid on the face of
    said tube.

    340,    Communication:  Electrical, including a cathode-ray tube in
    combination with an input circuit for processing a signal for the purpose
    of communication.  Note appropriate subclasses, specifically subclasses
    146.3 and 343.

    348,    Television, subclasses 602+ for control of brightness  or  contrast
    of display on a cathode-ray tube dependent on ambient light sensed by
    photocells.


CLS 250/550
TXT Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the photocell detects an
    interference pattern and produces an electrical output.

    (1)     Note.  The interference pattern may be produced as a result of
    moire interference between similar patterns, a diffraction pattern of a
    grating, wire or hole or produced by holograms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 395 for the
    superimposition of grids to measure or compare dimensions or configurations.


CLS 250/551
TXT Subject matter under subclass 200 including a light source and an optical
    link which couples the light source and photocell and wherein an electrical
    input signal applied to the light source is optically coupled to a detector
    which provides an electrical output signal having the characteristics of
    the input signal.

    (1)     Note.  In general the isolator of this subclass is intended as an
    electric circuit element to insulate the output from the input and/or
    provide common mode rejection at the input.


CLS 250/552
TXT Subject matter under subclass 200 having a photocell means which detects a
    light emitting source wherein the source is composed of a semiconductor
    material.

    (1)     Note.  In order to be classified in this subclass, the solid state
    light source must be recited other than by name only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211,    for a photocell which is composed of a semiconductor material and
    which controls an electrical or electromechanical system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g, Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 80-85 for semiconductor light emitting sources combined with
    semiconductor light responsive devices.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 514+ for nonlinear solid-state circuit or system which
    depends upon an external light source.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 43+ for oscillators of the molecular or
    particle resonant type; e.g., maser type.  The combination may include a
    photocell.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    109+ for light wave communication and subclasses 333+ for means for
    applying an electric signal to an amplifying device which is an optical
    laser and means for securing an amplified output therefrom where the
    combination may include a photocell.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 276 and 277+ for illuminating means having
    a movable screen which is automatically controlled by a photocell wherein
    said illumination means may be solid statelight emitting source.

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, appropriate subclasses for laser type
    oscillators.


CLS 250/553
TXT Subject matter under subclass 552 having a plurality of solid state light
    sources arranged in a particular group, order or formation.


CLS 250/554
TXT Subject matter under subclass 200 having a photocell means which detects a
    light source wherein the light from the source is generated by means of a
    material being consumed.

    (1)     Note.  The combination does not involve the testing of materials.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    336.1,  for devices in which a photocell means detects invisible radiant
    energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 74+ for the examination
    of or testing of a substance by means of light.  Included here are
    spectroscopes.


CLS 250/555
TXT Subject matter under subclass 206 with data bearing means containing
    information in symbolic form where the symbols are arbitrarily given
    certain meanings, and means for illuminating said data bearing means prior
    to the photoelectric cell, or methods of using such means.

    (1)     Note.  The coded record may be illuminated by a light source or it
    may be the source of illumination.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    271,    for invisible radiation responsive code readers.

    566,    for optical or pre-photocell-systems wherein the photocell does not
    control an electrical or electromechanical system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 454+ for coded record sensing devices
    utilizing light to sense the coded indicia on the record and including
    particular circuitry to process the electrical signals generated by the
    sensing process.  The term processing of signals includes:  (1) generation
    and utilization of timing signals and sync signals, (2) the storage of
    signals, and (3) the incorporation of means for counting.


CLS 250/556
TXT Subject matter under subclass 555 wherein the document, which is a
    sheet-like article, is analyzed or tested for its authenticity by means of
    a photocell system; or comprising a record reader wherein the coded
    information is represented by a graph or plot on the record.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 146.2, for devices having
    means for comparing items or intelligence with each other and for
    indicating a result in accordance with the comparison.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 71 for analysis of
    document by comparison which includes a support for the document to be
    tested.

    382,    Image Analysis, appropriate subclass for pattern or character
    recognition systems, see Class 382 II B (1) Note.


CLS 250/557
TXT Subject matter under subclass 555 having means for adjusting, centering,
    aligning, arranging or sorting the record; or means to detect the presence
    of the record, per se.


CLS 250/558
TXT Subject matter under subclass 206 including one or more photocells
    responsive to stereoscopically related images.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    550,    for photocell apparatus responsive to the interference patterns
    which ultimately may be employed to examine contours.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 2 for stereoplotters
    wherein an actual plot of contours is provided from a stereo-pair.


CLS 250/559.01
TXT With circuit for evaluating a web, strand, strip, or sheet:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein a photocell is responsive to
    light from a material having a cross-sectional dimension which is small
    compared to length, and through additional structure (i.e., a circuit)
    produces an electrical or mechanical output indicative of some
    characteristic of the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    548,    for similar subject matter wherein the output is employed to
    control the material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing,  subclasses 237+ for the inspection
    for flaws or imperfections, subclasses 364+ for the examination of
    materials using polarized light, subclasses 371+ for flatness tests,
    subclasses 372+ for measurement of dimensions, subclasses 399+ for
    determining lateral alignment, subclasses 402+ for shade or color tests,
    subclasses 429+ for monitoring of moving webs or thread, subclasses 432+
    for determining light transmission or absorption of materials, and
    subclasses 445+ for measuring the reflectivity of materials.


CLS 250/559.02
TXT Evaluation of photographic film:

    Subject matter under subclass 559.01 wherein a circuit produces an output
    indicative of some characteristic of a photographic film.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 443+ for measuring and
    testing of photographic film with an optical system.


CLS 250/559.03
TXT Sequential detector arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 559.01 wherein photocells are arranged to
    perform plural independent successive detections of the same portion of the
    material and wherein the detections are subsequently jointly evaluated to
    determine some characteristic of the material.


CLS 250/559.04
TXT Evaluation by regions, zones, or pixels:

    Subject matter under subclass 559.01 wherein discrete sections of the
    material are detected and evaluated independently.


CLS 250/559.05
TXT With imaging:

    Subject matter under subclass 559.04 wherein an optical image is formed by
    combining individual photocell detections or pixel signals into a single
    image.


CLS 250/559.06
TXT With scanning:

    Subject matter under subclass 559.04 wherein the material moves relative to
    the photocell field of view during the measurement process.


CLS 250/559.07
TXT With imaging:

    Subject matter under subclass 559.01 wherein photocells detect an optical
    image of the material and a circuit produces a resulting signal used to
    determine some characteristic of the mate-rial.


CLS 250/559.08
TXT With camera:

    Subject matter under subclass 559.07 wherein the optical image is detected
    by a photodetector array.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclass 88 for television including structure dictated
    by use.


CLS 250/559.09
TXT With polarization:

    Subject matter under subclass 559.01 having polarizing means in the optical
    path between a light source and the photocell.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225,    for polarizing means in a photocell circuit with an optical or
    pre-photocell system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 364+ for polarized light
    examination.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    483+ for polarizers, per se.


CLS 250/559.1
TXT With calibration:

    Subject matter under subclass 559.01 wherein the process of quantifying a
    property or attribute of the material includes establishing a reference
    level or scale.

    (1)     Note.  References are established by normalizing the measurement of
    interest with a reference measurement (e.g., from a reference wavelength)
    or by measuring the response of the system under known conditions (e.g.
    first measuring fixed samples).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252.1,  for calibration or standardization in general.


CLS 250/559.11
TXT Detection of both reflected and transmitted light:

    Subject matter under subclass 559.01 wherein photocells are arranged to
    receive light which has been reflected by the material and light which has
    been transmitted through the mate-rial.


CLS 250/559.12
TXT Beam interruption or shadow:

    Subject matter under subclass 559.01 wherein some characteristic of an
    opaque material is determined by measuring the proportion of the amount of
    light detected by a photocell (when the opaque material is placed in the
    light path between the photocell and a light source) to the amount of light
    detected by the photocell from the source in the complete absence of the
    opaque material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 386+ for measuring a
    moving object by light interruption.


CLS 250/559.13
TXT With laser source:

    Subject matter under subclass 559.12 wherein the photocell receives light
    from a coherent light source.


CLS 250/559.14
TXT With rotation of material:

    Subject matter under subclass 559.12 wherein a characteristic of the
    material is determined by making a series of measurements while the
    material is rotating.


CLS 250/559.15
TXT With plural detectors:

    Subject matter under subclass 559.12 having more than one independent
    photocell to detect light from the source.


CLS 250/559.16
TXT Detection of diffuse light:

    Subject matter under subclass 559.01 wherein detection means are arranged
    to receive non-specularly reflected light from the material (i.e., the
    angle of the light reflected from the material is not equal to the angle of
    the light incident to the material).

    SEARCH CLASS:

     356,   Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 446 for optical measuring
    with diffusion of reflected light.


CLS 250/559.17
TXT With diffusion optics:

    Subject matter under subclass 559.16 having light scattering optics in the
    optical path between a light source and the photocell.


CLS 250/559.18
TXT With discrimination of discrete light diffusing region:

    Subject matter under subclass 559.16 wherein photocells are arranged to
    detect light reflected from the material such that the presence of a
    discrete light diffusing region is determined by a change in the reflected
    light intensity.


CLS 250/559.19
TXT Measuring dimensions:

    Subject matter under subclass 559.01 including a circuit responsive to a
    photocell, and wherein the photocell is arranged relative to the material
    so that the circuit provides an output indicative of some dimension of the
    material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 372+ for measuring
    dimensions of a material with an optical system.


CLS 250/559.2
TXT With comparison to reference or standard:

    Subject matter under subclass 559.19 wherein evaluation of the material
    includes comparing the circuit output to a reference or stored value.


CLS 250/559.21
TXT Volume:

    Subject matter under subclass 559.19 wherein the circuit output is
    indicative of the three-dimensional displacement of the material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 379+ for measuring of
    volume of a material with an optical system.


CLS 250/559.22
TXT Profile:

    Subject matter under subclass 559.19 wherein the circuit output is
    indicative of a surface contour of the material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 376 for measuring of
    contour or profile of material with an optical system.


CLS 250/559.23
TXT With triangulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 559.22 wherein the profile is determined
    using optical triangulation.


CLS 250/559.24
TXT Transversal measurement (e.g., width, diameter, cross-sectional area):

    Subject matter under subclass 559.19 wherein the circuit output is
    indicative of some cross- sectional dimension of the material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 384+ for measuring of
    width or diameter of material with an optical system.


CLS 250/559.25
TXT Lumber:

    Subject matter under subclass 559.24 wherein the material being evaluated
    is lumber.


CLS 250/559.26
TXT Longitudinal measurement (e.g., length or spacing):

    Subject matter under subclass 559.19 wherein the circuit output is
    indicative of a linear dimension of the material or feature which lies
    parallel to the length of the material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

     356,   Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 383 for measuring of
    length of a material with an optical system.


CLS 250/559.27
TXT Thickness:

    Subject matter under subclass 559.19 wherein the circuit output is
    indicative of the distance from the upper surface of the material to the
    lower surface of the material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 381 for measuring of
    thickness of a material with an optical system.


CLS 250/559.28
TXT With translucent material:

    Subject matter under subclass 559.27 wherein photocells are arranged to
    detect light which has passed through the material from a source on the
    opposite side of the material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 382 for measuring of
    thickness of light permeable material with an optical system.


CLS 250/559.29
TXT Measuring position:

    Subject matter under subclass 559.01 including a circuit responsive to a
    photocell, and wherein the photocell is arranged relative to the material

    so that the circuit provides an output indicative of the location of the
    material relative to some reference frame.


CLS 250/559.3
TXT With alignment detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 559.29 wherein the position detected is
    indicative of the alignment of two or more objects.


CLS 250/559.31
TXT With triangulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 559.29 wherein the position is determined
    using optical triangulation.


CLS 250/559.32
TXT Measuring rate of motion or flow (change of position):

    Subject matter under subclass 559.29 wherein the time rate of change of the
    position of the material is determined by repeatedly measuring the position
    of the material at discrete time intervals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 28 and 28.5 for velocity
    determining optical systems.


CLS 250/559.33
TXT With robotics:

    Subject matter under subclass 559.29 wherein photocells are arranged on a
    mechanically movable apparatus which moves the photocells into position to
    make measurements of the material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    901,    Robots, subclass 47 for robots with optical sensing devices.


CLS 250/559.34
TXT Lead or wire bond inspection:

    Subject matter under subclass 559.19 wherein the location and integrity
    integrated circuit connections are evaluated.


CLS 250/559.35
TXT Centroid:

    Subject matter under subclass 559.19 wherein the circuit output is
    indicative of the position of the center of gravity or center of mass of
    the material.


CLS 250/559.36
TXT Edge:

    Subject matter under subclass 559.19 wherein a process of determining
    position includes an intermediate step of detecting the location of an edge
    or edges of the material.


CLS 250/559.37
TXT Angular orientation (e.g., skew):

    Subject matter under subclass 559.19 wherein the circuit output is
    indicative of an angle of the material relative to the reference frame.


CLS 250/559.38
TXT Determining range from detector:

    Subject matter under subclass 559.19 wherein the reference frame used to
    express the position of the material is centered at the photocell or
    optical system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 4 for range finding
    optical systems with a photocell.


CLS 250/559.39
TXT With comparison to reference or standard:

    Subject matter under subclass 559.01 wherein evaluation of the material
    includes comparing the circuit output to a reference or stored value.


CLS 250/559.4
TXT With indication of presence of material or feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 559.01 including a circuit responsive to a
    photocell, and wherein the photocell is arranged relative to the material
    so that the circuit provides an output indicating the presence or absence
    of the material or some indicia on the material in some predefined location.


CLS 250/559.41
TXT With foreign particle discrimination circuitry:

    Subject matter under subclass 559.4 wherein the circuit provides the
    capability to identify the presence of a foreign substance on or embedded
    in the material from variations in a detected light signal.


CLS 250/559.42
TXT Discontinuity detection (e.g., hole, crack):

    Subject matter under subclass 559.4 wherein the circuit output indicates
    the presence or absence of a discontinuity in the material.


CLS 250/559.43
TXT Break detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 559.4 wherein the circuit output indicates
    the complete separation of one portion of the material from another portion
    of the material (e.g., a strand break).


CLS 250/559.44
TXT Identifying marking, pattern, or indicia:

    Subject matter under subclass 559.4 wherein the circuit output indicates
    the presence or absence of a marking, pattern, or indicia on the surface of
    the material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include subject matter which
    identifies or decodes markings, patterns, or indicia.


CLS 250/559.45
TXT With defect discrimination circuitry:

    Subject matter under subclass 559.4 wherein the circuit provides the
    capability to identify the presence of a flaw in the material from
    variations in a detected light signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 509+ for
    sorting of items by identifying features.


CLS 250/559.46
TXT With camera or plural detectors:

    Subject matter under 559.45 wherein the detection means comprises plural
    detectors or a detection array camera.


CLS 250/559.47
TXT With counting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 559.45 having means to count the number of
    defects or numbers of types of defects which are detected over a period of
    time.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 53 for counter systems with photoelectric
    detectors.


CLS 250/559.48
TXT With transversal scan:

    Subject matter under subclass 559.45 wherein the field of view of the
    photocell is scanned transversally across sections of the material.


CLS 250/559.49
TXT With moving reflector:

    Subject matter under subclass 559.48 wherein the transversal scan is
    accomplished by a moving reflector means having one or more reflective
    surfaces.


CLS 250/564
TXT Subject matter under subclass 206 including a circuit responsive to a
    photocell having fluent material in its optical path, wherein the circuit
    provides an output indicative of the density, scattering properties, index
    of refraction or the like, of the fluent material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    573+,   for fluent material in the optical path of a prephotocell system.


CLS 250/565
TXT Subject matter under subclass 564 including a circuit or circuits for
    evaluating the relative output of two photocells, a photocell and a stored
    value or the photocell output sequentially as from a sample and standard.


CLS 250/566
TXT Subject matter under subclass 216 comprising data bearing means containing
    information in symbolic form where the symbols are arbitrarily given
    certain meanings and means for illuminating said data bearing means prior
    to the photoelectric cell; or methods of using such means.

    (1)     Note.  The coded record may be illuminated by a light source or it
    may be the source of illumination.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    271,    for invisible radiation responsive code readers.

    555,    in which the photocell controls an electrical or electromechanical
    system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 454+ for coded record sensing devices
    utilizing light to sense the coded indicia on the record and including
    particular circuitry to process the electrical signals generated by the
    sensing process.  The term processing of signals includes:  (1) generation
    and utilization of timing signals and sync signals, (2) the storage of
    signals and (3) the incorporation of means for counting.


CLS 250/568
TXT Subject matter under subclass 566 where the date consist of discrete
    identical indicia and is represented by the relative positional locations
    of the indicia on the record.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communication:  Electrical, subclass 146.2 for means for comparing
    signals or information in digital form to determine which is the greater,
    the lesser, or whether they are numerically equal.


CLS 250/569
TXT Subject matter under subclass 568 wherein the record is a flat rectangular
    sheet.


CLS 250/570
TXT Subject matter under subclass 568 wherein the record is in the shape of a
    narrow strip of flexible material a cylinder, or a flat circular form.


CLS 250/573
TXT Subject matter under subclass 216 having fluent material in the optical
    path.

    (1)     Note.  The fluent material may, e.g., be a fluid, particulate
    matter suspended in a fluid, smoke, powder or sabulous material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 53.01+ for a liquid analyzer
    having radiant energy detection means therein and especially subclass 61.69
    for a sedimentation rate measuring apparatus including radiant energy
    responsive means and subclass 61.48 for analyzing a liquid constituent of a
    liquid mixture by means of optical irradiation.


CLS 250/574
TXT Subject matter under subclass 573 including structure associated with the
    photocell or the photocell is so placed as to be responsive to light
    dispersed, scattered or reflected by the fluent material.


CLS 250/575
TXT Subject matter under subclass 573 including more than one optical path or
    separate fluent materials in one optical path.

    (1)     Note.   The subject matter of this subclass includes the provision
    of one path for the fluent material and a reference path which may include
    only the ambient atmosphere.


CLS 250/576
TXT Subject matter under subclass 573 including means to contain, constrain,
    move or guide fluent material to the optical path.


CLS 250/577
TXT Subject matter under subclass 573 including structure associated with the
    photocell or the placement of the photocell to specifically detect the
    volume or elevation of a contained fluent material.


CLS 250/578.1
TXT Plural light sources or optical paths:
    Subject matter under subclass 216 in which the optical or pre-photocell
    system includes more than one light source or more than one optical path
    from one or more light sources to the photocell(s).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204,    adjusting optical system to balance brightness in plural paths.

    208.2,  plural photosensitive nonimage detecting elements for systems which
    typically involve plural light sources or optical paths.

    553,    array or matrix solid-state light sources, for plural light sources.


CLS 250/580
TXT SOURCE WITH RECORDING DETECTOR:
    Subject matter under the class definition comprising (1) a source of
    invisible radiation of the class type and (2) a means (i.e., recording
    detector) sensitive to the radiation from the source, or secondary
    radiation generated by the source, whose response (visible or latent; i.e.,
    invisible) is effectively permanent (or "semi-permanent" in the sense that
    it can be reversed and the device re-used for subsequent recordings), and,
    where an image of an object is desired, (3) the object in the radiation
    path from the source to the detector.

    (1)     Note.  The radiation path of (3) supra will include the path of
    radiation deflected from the object if the recording detector is to respond
    to deflected radiation or the path of transmitted radiation if the
    recording detector is to respond to radiation that passes through the
    object without substantial deflection.

    (2)     Note.  Fluorescent and phosphorescent detectors whose response to
    invisible radiation of the class type may outlast their exposure to such
    radiation are excluded from this subclass and the indented subclasses as
    not being effectively permanent.  See search notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306+,   for photographically recording the bombardment of objects by
    charged particles.

    458.1+, for irradiation of fluorescent and phosphorescent detectors.

    472.1+, for recording detectors, per se.

    483.1+, for fluorescent and phosphorescent detectors, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 62, 87, 98, and
    99 for imaging systems using an X-ray source and X-ray detector wherein the
    detector is not a stimulable phosphor.


CLS 250/581
TXT Using a stimulable phosphor:
    Subject matter under subclass 580 in which the radiation sensitive means is
    a stimulable phosphor.

    (1)     Note.  The radiation sensitive means may be described as a
    stimulable phosphor sheet, a photostimulable substrate, a storage plate, or
    an imaging plate.

    (2)     Note.  A stimulable phosphor absorbs radiation wavelength, is
    stimulated by radiation of a longer wavelength, and emits radiation of an
    intermediate wavelength.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    484.4,  for stimulable phosphor sheets, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 301.16+ for organic luminescent compounds
    and subclasses 301.4+ for inorganic luminescent compounds.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 64 for production of luminescent
    screens.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclass 6 for radiation screens and subclass 139 for luminescent
    imaging.


CLS 250/582
TXT With image recording:
    Subject matter under subclass 581 including means which are directed
    particularly to recording the desired image of the object upon the
    radiation sensitive means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    583,    for image recording in specialized applications such as tomography,
    mammography, autoradiography, or electron microscopes.

    589+,   for image recording with a means for transporting the radiation
    sensitive means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclass 146 for scanning
    systems with an X-ray source and detector.


CLS 250/583
TXT For specialized application:
    Subject matter under subclass 582 including means which are directed
    particularly to recording the desired image of the object upon the
    radiation sensitive means in specialized applications such as tomography,
    mammography, autoradiography, or electron microscopes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    311     and 397, for electron microscopes, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 21+ for
    tomography and subclass 37 for mammography.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 407+ for applications where a diagnosis is made
    by analyzing the scanned images.


CLS 250/584
TXT With image read-out:
    Subject matter under subclass 581 including means which are directed
    particularly to making a latent recorded image of the object visible.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    585     and 586, for image read-out having particular form of stimulation
    or emission detection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 302 for laser scanners used in; e.g., facsimile
    machines.


CLS 250/585
TXT Including stimulation:
    Subject matter under subclass 584 including means which are directed
    particularly to the stimulation of the radiation sensitive material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 1+ for radiation applied to the living body as
    therapeutic treatment.


CLS 250/586
TXT Including emission detection:
    Subject matter under subclass 584 including means which are directed
    particularly to the detection of the stimulated emission from the radiation
    sensitive material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    587,    for stimulated emission detection where the detection is used to
    adjust the read-out conditions.


CLS 250/587
TXT With adjustment of conditions:
    Subject matter under subclass 586 including means which are directed
    particularly to the detection of the stimulated emission from the radiation
    sensitive material and the detection is used to adjust the read-out
    conditions.


CLS 250/588
TXT With erasure:
    Subject matter under subclass 581 including means which are directed
    particularly to the reversal of the response of the radiation responsive
    material to enable its re-use for subsequent image recordings.

    (1)     Note.  The reversal is usually termed "erasure" when using
    stimulable phosphor sheets.   Erasure may also be necessary to remove "fog"
    which develops in the sheets overtime; e.g., from incorporated radioactive
    isotopes.


CLS 250/589
TXT With conveyance:
    Subject matter under subclass 581 including means which are directed
    particularly to means for transporting the radiation sensitive means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclasses 18+ for sheet separators,
    and subclasses 264+ for sheet conveying means.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclass 172 for an X-ray
    serial plate or cassette changer, subclass 173 for an X-ray plural film or
    film pack changer, and subclass 181 for movable X-ray film plate supports.


CLS 250/590
TXT With a recirculation path:
    Subject matter under subclass 589 including means which are directed
    particularly to means for transporting the radiation sensitive means, and
    the path of transport recirculates the radiation sensitive means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclass 3.1 for recirculating sheet
    transport (e.g., document copiers).


CLS 250/591
TXT Including a light beam read-out:
    Subject matter under subclass 580 including means which are directed
    particularly to reading out a latent recorded desired image of the object
    using a light beam.

    (1)     Note.  Means using a stimulable phosphor as the radiation sensitive
    means is excluded from this subclass.  See search note below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    585,    for means to stimulate a stimulable phosphor sheet, which may
    include a light beam.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 250/900
TXT OPTICAL LIQUID LEVEL SENSORS:
    Art collection of liquid level sensor photocell systems which employ light
    conductors to detect the absolute or relative level of liquids.

    (1)     Note.  To be classified herein, significant light conductor means
    must be recited in the claim(s).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 188 and 218+ for refrigeration means
    having liquid level control.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 290+, especially subclass 293,
    liquid level or depth gauges combined with liquid level indicators for
    determining the level or depth of a body of liquid not otherwise
    classifiable.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 109+ for liquid level alarms for
    indicating changes in liquid level; and subclasses 227+ for liquid level
    indicators. This class is directed to nonelectrical liquid level detectors
    but includes electrical indicating means.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 386, for liquid level responsive or
    maintaining systems which sense liquid level and exercise flow control; and
    subclasses 101.25+ for self-proportioning systems with liquid level sensing.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 64+, material level control systems.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 619 for optical liquid level
    condition responsive systems responsive to liquid level and claiming a
    particular indicator means.


CLS 250/901
TXT With gap between light guide elements (includes open light path preset):Art
    collection of liquid level sensors related to those in subclass 900 in
    which a light guide which transmits light from a light source to a detector
    has a gap which light from the source traverses, or does not traverse,
    depending on the angle of the end faces of the light conductor, whether or
    not the liquid is in the gap, etc. The designation "open light circuit
    present" means that light from the light source normally is not transmitted
    from one light conductor end face across a gap to the other light conductor
    end face when the gap is not filled with liquid. The designation "closed
    light circuit preset" means that light from the light source is normally
    transmitted across the gap between the light conductor end faces when
    liquid is not filling the gap. Illustrations of open and closed light
    circuits appear below:


CLS 250/902
TXT With closed light path preset:
    Art collection of liquid level sensors related to those in subclass 901 in
    which light from the light source is normally transmitted across the gap
    formed by light conductor end faces to the photodetector in the absence of
    liquid in the gap.

    (1)     Note.  An illustration of this situation is found above, in the
    definition of subclass 901.


CLS 250/903
TXT With prism contacting liquid:
    Art collection of liquid level sensors related to those in subclass 902 in
    which a prism forms the gap between the fibers and the prism is placed in
    contact with the liquid to open the light path in the gap.

    (1)     Note.  An illustration of this situation appears below:


CLS 250/904
TXT With single light guide element to guide light in a continuous path:Art
    collection of liquid level sensors related to those in subclass 900 in
    which a single continuous light conductor guides light therein in a closed
    path preset from a light source to a photodetector and, when contacted by a
    liquid, light is coupled into the liquid and out of the conductor.


CLS 250/905
TXT With longitudinal irregularity:
    Art collection of liquid level sensors related to those in subclass 904 in
    which the light conducting guide has some nonregular aspect along its
    longitudinal axis. For example, the surface of the light conducting guide
    is not parallel to the longitudinal axis thereof, or has a variation in its
    optical parameters along its longitudinal axis, e.g., a graded refractive
    index.

    (1)     Note.  Illustration of longitudinal irregularities appear below:


CLS 250/906
TXT With large scale longitudinal bend:
    Art collection of liquid level sensors related to those in subclass 905 in
    which the light conducting guide is bent along its longitudinal axis and
    the bend is macroscopic, e.g., the entire guide is bent into a U-shape, as
    distinct from a plurality of microscale bends where the overall shape of
    the guide may still be straight.

    (1)     Note.  Typically, the light conducting guide is curved or bent
    along its longitudinal axis and the light is coupled out of the guide and
    into the liquid at a point

            along the curve or bend therein. An illustration appears below:


CLS 250/907
TXT With portions of light guide coating or cladding removed:
    Art collection of liquid level sensors relating to those found in subclass
    905 in which the longitudinal irregularity comprises an irregular
    longitudinal surface caused by removal (e.g., roughening) of portions of
    the light conductor coating or cladding.


CLS 250/908
TXT With waveguide twisted about its longitudinal axis:
    Art collection of liquid level sensors relating to those in subclass 905 in
    which a light conducting waveguide is twisted about its longitudinal axis,
    which results in a conversion of the lowest order light beam transverse
    electromagnetic (TEM) modes input into the light conducting waveguide into
    an output of higher order modes because of the continually rotating
    cross-section of the waveguide. An illustration of this type of waveguide
    appears below:


CLS 250/909
TXT METHODS AND APPARATUS ANCILLARY TO STIMULABLE PHOSPHOR SYSTEMS:Art
    collection of methods and apparatus relating to the technology of
    stimulable phosphors which include for example, signal processing methods
    after image read-out and mechanical accessories for cassette or plate
    transport.  These documents usually do not include as significant claim
    elements (or significant disclosure in the case of nonpatent literature)
    methods and apparatus relating to image recording or phosphor plate
    technology.


CLS 250/910
TXT FOOD SAMPLE ANALYSIS USING INVISIBLE RADIANT ENERGY SOURCE:
    Subject matter under class definition wherein a sample being analyzed using
    invisible radiant energy is an edible substance.


CLS 251/
TTL VALVES AND VALVE ACTUATION

CLS 251/
TXT
    This class provides for means, for regulating flow of a fluid through a
    passage, either by closing the passage or restricting it by a definite
    predetermined motion of the closing-element, that are of general
    application not otherwise provided for.

    (1)     Note.  A valve is distinguished from a closure of the cap type by
    being shiftable between open and closed position in the device rather than
    bodily removable from it, but pivoted closures and many pivoted valves have
    no definable difference.  For this reason, closures associated with valves
    have been grouped with plural valves in certain parts of Class 137, Fluid
    Handling.

    (2)     Note.  See the class definition of Class 137, Fluid Handling,
    section III, for collected search notes on automatic valves, section IV,
    for collected search notes on plural valves and their actuators and section
    V, for collected search notes on manual valve actuation, selection and/or
    adjusting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, for valves combined with
    devices of that class, and for valves specialized for use in such devices.

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 117, for insulated handles adapted
    for general use on rotary stems.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 888.4+ and 890.12+ for processes of
    making valves and valve seats.

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclass 58 for valves for
    acetylene generators.

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, appropriate subclasses for closures
    of the type provided for and see the search notes thereto in section IV for
    the loci of closures in other classes.

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclasses, for a refrigeration producer
    including an expansion valve specialized to such purpose, particularly
    subclasses 204+, 210+, 216, and 528.

    70,     Locks, subclasses 175+ and 242+, for lock mechanisms for valves
    where no particular structure of the valve beyond accommodation of the lock
    is involved.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 179, 203, 220, 221, 249, 265+,
    268+, 271, and 276 for valve organizations associated with major devices.

    84,     Music, the various "pneumatic" and wind instruments, for valves
    specialized for such devices.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclasses for valves
    combined with expansible chamber motors, the valve acting as a control for
    the motive fluid for the motor.

    110,    Furnaces, appropriate subclasses, for valve organizations
    associated with furnaces.

    114,    Ships, subclasses 197 and 198, for boat plugs and sea cocks.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 67+, for valves in combination
    with alarms, and subclass 277, for valve position indicators.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 437, 451.2 and 507 for
    valves associated with liquid heaters and vaporizers.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 90.1+ and 188.1+, for
    valves peculiar to internal-combustion engines.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 285+, for dampers.

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 207, 210 and 211, for valved inhalers.

    137,    Fluid Handling, for fluid handling apparatus and processes not
    otherwise provided for including combinations with valves, certain special
    types of valves with or without actuators, valves with complex actuators,
    subclasses:

    38+,    for valves operated by change of position or inertia of the system.

    47+,    for speed responsive valve control.

    67+,    for flow control by destructible or deformable means.

    171+,   for fluid separating valves in diverse fluid containing pressure
    systems.

    233+,   for valves for inflatable articles such as tires.

    243+,   for valve grinding motion of valves on seats.

    246+,   for lubrication or liquid supplied at the valve interface.

    247+,   for liquid valves and liquid trap seals.

    269+,   for valves convertible to change the mode of operation.

    272+,   for hydrant valves.

    309+,   for regenerative furnace type reversing valves.

    329.1+, for repair check valves.

    382+,   for valve guards.

    383+,   for valves with locks or seals.

    386+,   especially subclasses 397, 398+ and 409+ for float controlled
    valves.

    454.2+, for removable valve head and seat units, see the search notes
    thereto.

    455+,   for line condition change responsive valves, such as safety valves,
    pressure regulators and check valves.

    544+,   for valves with filters or strainers.

    551+,   for valves with indicators, registers, recorders, alarms or
    inspection means.

    560,    for valves combined with other structure.

    561+,   for fluid handling systems including valves, particularly
    subclasses 615+ for valves actuated by swinging spouts and subclasses 625+
    for multiway valve units.

    624.11+, for a distribution system including a  programmer or a timer.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 40+ for similar structure
    where the flow is not cut off entirely, subclasses 89+ for nonvalve
    closures and plugs for conduits, especially subclasses 94.3+ for line
    blinds, and see (1) Note thereunder for the line.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    appropriate subclasses for valved filling devices.

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclasses 415+ for inflating devices,
    for pneumatic tires.

    166,    Wells, subclass 97.1 for a valve on a cap or wellhead, and
    subclasses 316+ for below-ground well devices with valves.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, subclasses 19+ for valves associated with
    sprinkler systems designed to extinguish fires.

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclasses 60+ for weigher responsive flow control.

    184,    Lubrication, for lubricating devices with valves, particularly
    subclasses 33 through 35, for pump lubricators with valves, subclasses 66+,
    for gravity feed type lubricators with automatic valves and subclasses 80,
    82, 83, 86, and 87, for other gravity feed lubricators with valves.

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, subclasses 20, 21, 28,
    31+, 32, and 39, for devices controlling the flow of chutes.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 61.86 for valve
    operators, manipulation of which additionally makes or breaks a circuit,
    and subclasses 81.9+ for flow responsive devices which control elements of
    a switch.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclasses 255+ for valves specialized to
    distillation.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, for valve
    combinations, particularly subclass 246, for sifter feeding hoppers with
    cut-offs and valves, subclass 258, for discharging valves for sifters, and
    subclasses 488+, 490+ and 497+, for feeding and discharging means for
    stratifiers.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses for
    various combinations of a valve and separator, particularly subclasses 92,
    97+, 181, 245, 277+, 313, 340, 362, 392, 395+, and 418+.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 17+, for valved closures having
    features to prevent refilling of the receptacle and subclasses 311+, for
    other valved closures.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses 99+, for valved barrel bungs.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 200+, for closures adapted to remain in the
    articles with which they are associated, and see the notes thereto for
    closures, and subclass 86.1, for milking pails with a valved inlet.

    222,    Dispensing, for valves, cut-offs and discharge controllers in
    dispensing combinations, as where (a) the structural features of a supply
    container with or without material guiding means or the relation of the
    valve or its actuator thereto is claimed, (b) a dispensing type discharge
    assistant is claimed in combination with a valve, cut-off or discharge
    controller, (c) a preset or automatic cut-off is controlled by dispensed
    volume or rate of flow, (d) plural valves are so related as to have a
    measuring function, (e) or the valve, cut-off or discharge controller is
    considered to be specially adapted for dispensing purposes, as those
    operated by pressure applied to the contents of the supply container or by
    inversion of the supply container.

    235,    Registers, subclass 94, for devices for registering the number of
    times a valve is operated.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, for
    thermostatically-controlled valves.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 87, 93+, 95,
    96, 537+, and 569+ for valves in nozzles.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 229+ for prephotocell light valves.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, for valves associated with
    special contact apparatus.

    303,    Fluid-Pressure and Analogous  Brake System, subclasses 54+ for
    self-lapping valves and subclass 84.1+ for flow retarders and cut-offs.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    227+ and 238+ for light valves.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 254+ for
    gas-controlled valves operated by magnets, utilized in igniting means.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 44+ for the combination of a bag with a
    valve-type closure.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, appropriate subclasses,
    see particularly, subclasses 36, 40+, 45+, 135, 136, 204, 205+, 219+, 232+,
    258+, 263+, 270+.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclasses 124+ for valves between
    plural receptacles in series at the conveyor inlet; and subclasses 127+ for
    valves between a conveyor and a material feeding receptacle.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 265+, 322+ and 333+ for valves associated
    with ventilating means.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 32 to 34, 236 to 238, 248 to 250 and 256.

    D23,    Environmental Heating and Cooling, Fluid Handling and Sanitary
    Equipment, subclasses 200+ for fluid handling or treatment equipment and
    subclasses 233+ for valves.


CLS 251/1.1
TXT BLOW-OUT PREVENTERS (I.E., COOPERATING SEGMENTS OF ANNULUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a plurality of
    relatively movable flow obstructing members which control an annular flow
    passage about an axial rod or pipe as between a well casing and drill stem
    and have characteristics which go beyond a mere sealing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146,    for valves and/or couplings made in sections to facilitate mounting
    on continuous conduits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclasses 75.11+, especially subclasses 86.1+ and 88.1 for
    well heads comprising blow-out preventers and additional means for handling
    fluid from the well or other specific well features, and subclasses 179+
    and the subclasses there noted for packers or plugs inserted into a
    prepositioned well conduit.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 502+ for sectional valves in dispensers.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, appropriate subclasses, for a
    packing between a casing head and an inner pipe or rod particularly
    subclass 4 for a pipe end attached packing assembly, subclasses 5+ for a
    packing between a casing head and a longitudinally moving coupled rod, and
    subclass 31 for a rotatable packing for an axially moving rod.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 324+ for a seal for well apparatus having an
    overpressure control device that may include extrusion preventing (i.e.,
    anti-extrusion) structure.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclass 123.14 for joints between
    concentric stationary pipes (e.g., and packing type blow-out preventer
    between a well casing head and a tubing).


CLS 251/1.2
TXT Deformable annulus:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.1 wherein one of the flow obstructing
    members comprises an annular member capable of having its shape changed by
    application of a force to thereby control flow through the annular flow
    passage.


CLS 251/1.3
TXT Radial reciprocating ram:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.l which includes a member mounted for
    reciprocation in a radial direction to exert and relieve pressure on one of
    the flow obstructing members to open and close the annular flow passage.


CLS 251/3
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the valve is provided
    with an actuator including a tracer element which is designed to contact a
    pattern.

    (1)     Note.  This type of actuation is usually used in duplicating
    machines wherein the pattern is the shape of the article to be made and the
    valve is the control subcombination of the duplicating machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 37 for expansible
    chamber motors controlled by a pattern or template controlled valve.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 79+ for a pattern
    controlled milling machine.


CLS 251/4
TXT Devices under the class definition which control flow by compression of a
    flexible fluid conveying tube.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 129+ to 136+ for similar
    structures for clamping or holding cords or ropes, and subclasses 243+ for
    clasps of general utility.

    81,     Tools, subclasses 300+ for pliers and subclasses 53+ for wrenches.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 355.18+ for tube compressors combined
    with hose storage or retrieval means.


CLS 251/5
TXT Devices under subclass 4 which are actuated by fluid pressure.


CLS 251/6
TXT Devices under subclass 4 comprising rollers which contact and compress the
    conveyor.


CLS 251/7
TXT Devices under subclass 4 comprising a tube contacting portion which
    reciprocates perpendicularly of the axis of the flexible conveyor.


CLS 251/8
TXT Devices under subclass 7 having screw means to actuate the contacting
    portion.


CLS 251/9
TXT Devices under subclass 4 comprising a tube contacting portion which pivots,
    as a lever, to compress the conveyor.


CLS 251/10
TXT Devices under subclass 9 comprising a U-shaped resilient bar or rod which
    pivots at its base to cause the leg portions to grasp the tube.


CLS 251/11
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the valve is provided
    with a device which converts heat energy into motive power or in which
    energy from a variation in buoyancy of a body is used to actuate the valve.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a buoyancy motor is a hollow shell which when
    full of liquid sinks in the liquid but which floats when the liquid is
    pumped out of the shell.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 495+ for motors having a buoyant working
    member motivated by the vertical rise and fall of the surface of a body of
    fluid, and subclasses 508+ or 516+ for motors which transduce temperature
    variation to work through the expansion or contraction of a confined solid,
    liquid or gas.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 76 for heating means for heat destructible
    or fusible control elements, subclasses 334+ for means for supplying or
    exchanging heat in fluid handling means, especially subclass 341 for
    electric heating elements and see the search notes to subclass 334,
    subclasses 386+, and the subclasses mentioned in the notes thereto,
    especially subclass 404 for sinking or bucket type floats and subclass 409,
    for float actuated, liquid level responsive valves, and see the search
    notes to subclass 404 and subclass 468 for temperature responsive means
    controlling valves, and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 251/12
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which the opening or closing
    movement of the valve is produced or modified by the reactive force of a
    fluid acting against a portion of the actuating means.

    (1)     Note.  All fluid displacement devices inherently require a period
    of time to fill or empty the same, the period depending upon the relative
    sizes of the displacement devices and the flow passages thereto as well as
    the pressures producing the flow.  As a result, many of the disclosures of
    this and indented subclasses disclose and make use of this time delay, such
    as in the case of the "flush" valves, but other disclosures having
    equivalent constructions make no reference to such time delay.  The
    definitions of this and indented subclasses have been drawn with a view to
    bring together inherently related disclosures irrespective of the mode of
    describing the function of the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73,     for biased trip valves with fluid pressure actuation of the trip.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclasses for an
    expansible chamber device, per se.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 90.12 thru 90.14, for
    poppet valve operating mechanism which is fluid actuated.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 12 and 14 for process of this class
    involving pressure control, subclass 58 for speed responsive valve control
    with fluid servo-motor, subclass 81 for atmospheric pressure responsive
    control, subclasses 82+ for pressure modulating relays or followers,
    subclass 105 for pulsation responsive pilot valves in suction pulsators,
    subclasses 219+ for Laner-Johnson valves, especially subclasses 221+ for
    those having an internal servo-motor with internal pilot valve, subclasses
    413+ for fluid pressure type servo relay control of or response to liquid
    level and subclasses 455+ for valves responding to change in line pressure
    and/or flow conditions to control the flow, especially subclasses 488+ for
    fluid pressure type servo-motor control of the valve, subclasses 596.14+
    for pilot actuated supply and exhaust valves, subclass 596.18 for fluid
    motor actuated supply and exhaust valves, subclass 625.6 for pilot actuated
    supply and exhaust multiway valve units, and subclass 625.66 for fluid
    motor actuated supply and exhaust multiway valve units.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 59+ for dispensers having flow meter
    operated cut-offs, subclass 334 for fluid motor operated discharge
    assistants in dispensers and subclass 504 for motor operated dispenser
    outlet elements.


CLS 251/14
TXT Subject matter under subclass 12 in which both a fluid actuator and an
    actuator other than one utilizing fluid are provided for alternative use.

    (1)     Note.  Actuators which include both fluid actuation mechanism and
    non-fluid actuation mechanism but in which said mechanisms are not of
    themselves each capable of fully controlling the valve are not considered
    to be alternative within the scope of this subclass and are classified in
    an appropriate subclass for the fluid actuation mechanism and cross
    referenced for novel nonfluid actuation mechanism. Examples of such
    excluded devices are electrically controlled pilot valves in subclass 30
    and manually opened and fluid pressure closed valves in subclasses 48+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for electrically controlled fluid actuators, and see (1) Note.

    48+,    for manually opened, fluid pressure closed valves and see (1) note.

    130,    for electrical actuators combined with a nonfluid, nonelectrical
    actuator.


CLS 251/15
TXT Subject matter under subclass 12 in which the flow of fluid, when
    established by external means under the control of the operator, is stopped
    after an interval of time irrespective of the continued application by the
    operator of the original control effect that initiated the flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48+,    for fluid actuated devices which delay closing but are not
    effective until the external control is released.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 386+ for control by liquid level
    responsive means, i.e., by accumulated quantities in a container or a
    control chamber which reflects the condition in the container and
    subclasses 456+ for safety cut-offs which require manual resetting.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 14+ for dispenser cut-offs operated by
    selectively preset volume or rate of flow responsive mechanism, and
    subclasses 59+ for dispenser cut-offs operated by rate of flow responsive
    mechanism.


CLS 251/16
TXT Subject matter under subclass 15 in which a manually controlled valve and a
    fluid actuated or retarded shut-off valve are sequentially arranged in the
    flow line so that flow takes place only during the time both valves are
    open.

    (1)     Note.  The shut-off valve is usually a safety or loss preventing
    valve intended to prevent prolonged use of the fluid under external control
    or loss in case of rupture of a hydraulic line.  They are frequently called
    hydraulic fuses.

    (2)     Note.  Since these valves are reset only by operation of the manual
    valve they are included here even if claimed as a subcombination.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 102+ for devices, sometimes called
    "hydraulic fuses", in which flow between a pump and distributor valve is
    interrupted after an interval unless exhaust flow from the distributor
    valve to the reservoir occurs; subclass 467 for valves which open in
    response to a change in line condition and require resetting, and
    subclasses 613+ for distributing systems comprising a single flow path with
    plural serial valves and/or closures.


CLS 251/17
TXT Subject matter under subclass 16 in which the manual and fluid actuated or
    retarded valve are conjointly actuated at least during a portion of their
    motions.

    (1)     Note.  In some disclosures in this subclass, one valve is manual
    only and one is opened manually and closed or retarded by fluid pressure
    means, and the first valve prevents flow during the manual opening of the
    second or fluid actuated valve and opens only when the fluid actuated or
    retarded valve has started its closing motion.


CLS 251/18
TXT Subject matter under subclass 17 in which the fluid actuated or retarded
    valve is controlled by a pilot valve that is interconnected with and moved
    by the manual valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25+,    for fluid servo-motor actuated valves, and see the search notes to
    subclass 25.


CLS 251/19
TXT Subject matter under subclass 15 in which the main valve is opened by
    adjustment of a control or pilot valve in a servo actuating system for the
    main valve but is caused to start closing by a second control or pilot
    valve made effective by the opening of the main valve, irrespective of the
    adjustment of the first pilot valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     for fluid actuated pilot valves with additional pilot valve control.


CLS 251/20
TXT Subject matter under subclass 15 in which the actuator which opens the
    valve is subjected to an overriding closing force by a fluid actuated or
    retarded device only after the completion of the desired flow period.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 17+ for preset volume dispensers in which a
    moving cut-off operating element returns to its neutral setting during
    dispensing.


CLS 251/21
TXT Subject matter under subclass 15 in which coacting elements of the external
    actuating means for the valve are so related to each other that they
    transmit an opening motion to the valve, but upon the valve attaining its
    open position the co-acting elements are sufficiently disengaged as to
    permit the valve reclosing under the action of the fluid actuating or
    retarding means even if the opening force on the external means is
    maintained.


CLS 251/22
TXT Subject matter under subclass 15 in which a control pressure normally
    maintaining the valve closed is momentarily reduced, so that the valve can
    open, by discharge into an empty closed chamber, but upon the subsequent
    rise in pressure, due to filling of the chamber, the valve recloses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33+,    for choked pressure fluid type servo-motors in which the discharge
    of the fluid in the choke chamber is to waste or to the line, the flow
    being terminated by reverse movement of the pilot valve.


CLS 251/23
TXT Subject matter under subclass 15 in which a valve biased toward its closed
    position is opened by a force transmitted through a trapped body of fluid
    in a chamber having a restricted inflow or outflow opening and recloses
    under its bias when sufficient flow through the restricted opening has
    taken place.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for fluid link or column actuators for valves.


CLS 251/24
TXT Subject matter under subclass 12 in which the valve has the opening or
    closing forces acting thereon augmented or altered by a force resulting
    from a fluid pressure derived from the velocity flow of fluid in the line
    acting on a reactor surface other than the valve head or closure element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for choked fluid pressure type servo-motors having a choke or
    restriction in the main line.

    123+,   for valves located at a point of restriction in a line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 219+ for Larner-Johnson valves, in which
    the needle seats on a restricted portion of the flow line and subclasses
    497+ for valves having a separate connected fluid reactor surface and
    adjusted entirely by variations in fluid flow in the line, especially
    subclass 502 for expansible chamber reactors subject to differential
    pressures, one pressure being that at the throat of a Venturi tube.


CLS 251/25
TXT Subject matter under subclass 12 in which the valve is actuated, at least
    in part, by a fluid pressure motive means deriving its power from either
    the fluid line or a separate source of fluid pressure and controlled by an
    auxiliary or pilot valve or valves.

    (1)     Note.  Fluid pressure servo-motors having valves both for the inlet
    and the outlet or vent of the pressure chamber are in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclasses for
    expansible chamber motors, per se.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 46 for inertia responsive systems having
    servo mechanisms, subclass 58 for centrifugal governor controlled servo
    actuated valves, subclasses 82+ for pressure modulating relays or
    followers, subclass 105 for pulsators with pulsation responsive pilot
    valve, subclasses 191 and 195 for gas and liquid separating traps having
    servo-control of the valves, subclasses 219+, especially subclass 222 for
    Larner-Johnson type valves having hollow telescoping sections which
    function as servo units, subclasses 413+ for fluid pressure servo-motor
    operation of a level responsive valve, subclasses 485+ for servo-operated
    line condition responsive valves, and subclasses 596.14+ for pilot actuated
    supply and exhaust valves, and subclasses 625.6+ for pilot actuated supply
    and exhaust multiway valve units.


CLS 251/26
TXT Subject matter under subclass 25 in which the servo-motor may receive fluid
    from any one of two or more sources of fluid pressure or in which two or
    more pilot valves are employed for a single servo unit, one pilot valve
    duplicating the function of another pilot valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for servo-systems having an additional pilot valve which compels
    reclosing of the main valve irrespective of the position of the first pilot
    valve.

    25+,    for servo-systems in which there are two or more pilot valves not
    duplicative of their functions and not classifiable in subclasses 29 and
    31, such as inlet and outlet valves.

    29,     for pilot valves controlling fluid flow to a fluid actuated pilot
    valve.

    31,     for servo-systems in which a plurality of pilot valves control a
    corresponding number of servo units.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 65+ for plural servo-motor control
    valves in a speed responsive prime mover control.


CLS 251/27
TXT Subject matter under subclass 25 in which means are provided for causing
    the main valve to assume a position other than biased open or biased closed
    upon a loss of servo operating pressure, i.e., a position other than that
    which the uncontrolled valve would assume under pressure of the material
    flowing through the line.


CLS 251/28
TXT Subject matter under subclass 25 in which the auxiliary or pilot valve
    controlling the main valve is operated by a fluid responsive device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for latched pilot valves for fluid servo-motors with fluid pressure
    means to release the latch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 105 for such systems in which the pilot
    valve is itself controlled by the main valve.  These are generally suction
    operated milker pulsators and subclasses 485+ for line condition change
    responsive valves having fluid actuated pilot valve means which responds to
    changing pressures or flow conditions in the line.


CLS 251/29
TXT Subject matter under subclass 28 in which the fluid responsive device that
    operates the pilot valve is controlled by an additional pilot valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for plural alternative pilot valves, and see the search notes on
    plural pilot valves in the definition.


CLS 251/30.01
TXT Electrically actuated pilot valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 25 in which the auxiliary or pilot valve
    controlling the valve is operated by electrical energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for electrically released trip pilot valves.

    129.01+, for electrical actuators for main valves, and see the search notes
    to subclass 129.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 596.16 for an electrically actuated pilot
    valves for supply and exhaust valves, and subclass 625.64 for an
    electrically actuated pilot valve for a supply and exhaust multiway valve
    unit.


CLS 251/30.02
TXT Main valve biased closed by fluid pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 30.01 in which force per unit area exerted by
    a fluent material is used to maintain the valve in a position which closes
    a passage to fluid flow until the valve actuator moves for valve to a
    position which opens the passage.


CLS 251/30.03
TXT Venting passage within movable main valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 30.02 in which the valve is opened by
    releasing pressure through a passageway in a movable portion of the valve.


CLS 251/30.04
TXT Pilot valve movably mounted within or around main valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 30.03 in which movement of the pilot valve is
    limited by the movable portion of the main valve, the pilot valve being
    either contained or guided by the movable portion of the main valve.


CLS 251/30.05
TXT Fluid pressure sole means for biasing valve closed:

    Subject matter under subclass 30.02 in which the force per unit area
    exerted by a fluent material is the only agent used to maintain the main
    valve in the position.


CLS 251/31
TXT Subject matter under subclass 25 in which the main valve is operated in one
    direction by a servo unit and another direction by a second servo unit.

    (1)     Note.  The oppositely acting servo units of this subclass may
    constitute different sides of the same piston and further the pilot
    controls for the opposing servo units may be utilized, as in a single
    reversing or four-way valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclasses for
    servo-motors, per se.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 596.15 for supply and exhaust valves
    operated by plural servo-motors controlled by a single pilot valve, and
    subclass 625.63 for supply and exhaust multiway valve units operated by
    plural servo-motors controlled by a single pilot valve.


CLS 251/32
TXT Subject matter under subclass 25 in which the pilot valve is engaged in one
    position by a detent which retains the pilot valve in that position until
    released by the detent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66+,    for biased trip valves, especially subclass 73 for fluid pressure
    trip actuation.

    89+,    for valve actuators associated with means for blocking or disabling
    the actuator.


CLS 251/33
TXT Subject matter under subclass 25 in which the servo-motor is of the type
    having an expansible pressure chamber the pressure in which is equalized
    with either a high or a low pressure region by means of a constantly open
    but restricted passage or communication therebetween to cause the main
    valve to assume one position, but in which the pressure conditions can be
    reversed by the opening of a pilot valve in an open or less restricted
    passage between the chamber and a pressure region other than that connected
    by the restricted passage to cause the main valve to assume an opposite
    position.

    (1)     Note.  Expansible chamber devices which are constantly open to a
    single pressure region, even though the opening is restricted, are not
    servo-motors because motor action can result only by receiving fluid at a
    higher pressure and exhausting to a lower pressure.  Such devices are
    either a form of fluid bias or a dashpot or other vented chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50+,    for dashpot of fluid controlled retarders or timers receiving
    pressure from the line controlled.  See (1) Note.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 489+ for line condition responsive
    valves having servo-motors of the choked pressure type.


CLS 251/34
TXT Subject matter under subclass 33 in which means are provided to prevent
    back flow of fluid around the main valve through the constantly open choke
    or restriction under transient conditions of pressure change in the main
    flow line.

    (1)     Note.  These disclosures usually are described as "anti-siphoning"
    although there is never any siphonic flow under intended conditions of use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 215+ for back flow prevention by vacuum
    breaking in systems which are not designed to have siphon action in
    ordinary use.


CLS 251/35
TXT Subject matter under subclass 33 in which the choke or restricted
    communication between the servo-motor chamber and the region of either high
    or low pressure varies in accordance with the degree of opening or closing
    of the main valve.

    (1)     Note.  The variation may be either abrupt or progressive with the
    travel of the valve.

    (2)     Note.  The variation may result from changing the size of the pilot
    communication lines or from providing an additional or alternative path for
    fluid shunting the choke which is open at the proper time to accelerate or
    delay valve operation.


CLS 251/36
TXT Subject matter under subclass 33 in which an expansible chamber, other than
    or in addition to the servo-motor chamber, is provided with a restricted
    passage to retard the rate of travel of the main valve.

    (1)     Note.  The expansible chamber may receive fluid from the line or
    from a separate source, as in the closed fluid circuit dashpot.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for servo operated valves having separate dashpot chambers, in
    which the servo mechanism is other than of the choked pressure type.

    48+,    for nonfluid actuated valves having similar retarding means,
    especially subclasses 50+ for expansible chambers receiving fluid from the
    line and subclass 54 for closed circuit dashpots.


CLS 251/37
TXT Subject matter under subclass 33 in which a flow resistance or choke device
    is serially connected with and separate from the valve in the main flow
    line.

    (1)     Note.  This choke serves to regulate further the rate of flow in
    the main flow line over and above the regulation provided by the choked
    pressure type of servo-motor.

    (2)     Note.  Where the restrictor is attached to and moves with the
    movable element of the main valve, classification is in the appropriate one
    for either the valve or the valve actuator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for fluid actuated valves which are Venturi or line flow effect
    assisted.

    118+,   for valves having restrictors in series therewith.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 219+ for Larner-Johnson valves, which
    are associated with and have a seat formed at a restriction in the line,
    subclasses 436+ for float operated valves having a restrictor and
    subclasses 500+ for line condition change responsive valves having
    expansible chamber reactor surface subject to the differential effects
    resulting from an obstruction in the line.


CLS 251/38
TXT Subject matter under subclass 33 in which the pilot valve co-acts with a
    seating surface therefor mounted on either the servo-motor element or the
    main valve so as to partake of the motion thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Some disclosures identify the pilot valve as a mere relief
    valve and disclose that the main valve is mechanically opened by the
    overtravel of the pilot valve actuator, but these are here classified so
    long as their structure provides for alternating of the high and low
    pressure conditions in the expansible chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 221+ for Larner-Johnson type valves
    having an internal pilot valve for an internal servo-motor, subclass 490
    for line condition change responsive pilot or servo controlled valves in
    which the pilot valve is within the main valve head and subclasses 630+ for
    a main valve and concentric type balancing valve successively operated to
    open or closed position.


CLS 251/39
TXT Subject matter under subclass 38 in which the pilot valve admits the higher
    pressure to the motor chamber and the choke establishes a restricted
    communication between the motor chamber and the lower pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 490 for fluid pressure servo type
    condition responsive valve in which the pilot valve is within the main
    valve head.


CLS 251/40
TXT Subject matter under subclass 38 in which the pilot valve is opened or
    closed by a lateral canting of the pilot valve causing the same to rock
    about a point of contact between the valve and its seat to one side of
    their center.


CLS 251/41
TXT Subject matter under subclass 33 in which the pilot valve or an actuator
    therefor is located elsewhere than on or immediately adjacent the main
    valve unit, thus allowing operation of the main valve from a station more
    accessible than is available at the location of the main valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for fluid link or column actuators for valves.

    131,    for remote control of electrically actuated valves.

    293,    for valves having an extension for the actuator.

    294,    for valves having a flexible actuator.

    295,    for pedal actuated valves.


CLS 251/42
TXT Subject matter under subclass 33 in which means are provided for
    selectively setting the maximum opening of the main valve.

    (1)     Note.  The opening limit may be imposed by the mechanical blocking
    of the opening movement of the main valve or by some control exercised on
    the pilot valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for adjustable limit stops for fluid pressure operated valves not
    of the servo type.

    284+,   for limit stops for valves of general types, and see the search
    notes thereto.


CLS 251/43
TXT Subject matter under subclass 33 in which the main valve is subjected to a
    constantly acting force derived from the pressure of the flow line and
    tending to open the main valve.

    (1)     Note.  The line pressure tending to open the main valve may act
    directly on the seat closing element of the valve or may act on a separate
    pressure surface connected therewith, such as a piston or diaphragm.

    (2)     Note.  The line pressure opening force may be assisted or opposed
    by other mechanical loading, such as a spring.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 464 for safety cut-off valves line
    pressure biased to open position and subclass 467 for fluid opened valves
    which require resetting.


CLS 251/44
TXT Subject matter under subclass 43 in which the constantly applied line
    pressure tending to open the main valve is applied to the inner side of a
    separate connected fluid reaction surface, such as a piston or diaphragm,
    of larger diameter than the valve and located adjacent thereto on the inlet
    side of the valve, this being the side to which it moves in opening,
    whereby the resultant opening force due to line pressure is determined by
    the differential area between the diameter of the reaction surface and the
    diameter of the valve seat.

    (1)     Note.  The separate reaction surface may be the inner face of the
    upper end of a spool type element, the inner end surface of an inverted cup
    shaped valve element, an annular extension of the valve in the plane of its
    closing area, etc.  In any case, the motion of the part of the valve which
    is in contact with the seat is against the flow.

    (2)     Note.  This type of valve is sometimes called "inlet peripheral
    type", as distinguished from the "inlet central" type of subclasses 43 and
    46.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 494+ for line condition change
    responsive valves having separate connected fluid reactor surfaces,
    especially subclass 509 for such valves seating in the direction of flow.


CLS 251/45
TXT Subject matter under subclass 44 in which the differential line pressure
    reacting surface is a flexible wall or membrane which is deflected by the
    applied fluid pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 34+ for a bellows type
    expansible chamber device, and subclasses 90+, for a flexible wall type
    expansible chamber device.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 510 for line condition change responsive
    valves which have a diaphragm or bellows type separate connected reactor
    and seat in the direction of flow.


CLS 251/46
TXT Subject matter under subclass 43 in which the servo-motor is of the type
    using a flexible wall or membrane that is deflected by the applied servo
    pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61+,    for diaphragm or bellows type fluid pressure valve actuators not of
    the servo type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 34+ for a bellows type
    expansible chamber device, and subclasses 90+ for a flexible wall type
    expansible chamber device.


CLS 251/47
TXT Subject matter under subclass 25 in which an expansible fluid chamber other
    than the servo motor has a fluid restricting flow passage in communication
    therewith and is associated with either the main or pilot valves to resist
    or retard their motions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for servo operated valves having separable dashpot chambers, in
    which the servo mechanism is of the choked pressure type.

    48+,    for dashpot or fluid controlled retarders or timers for valves
    which do not have pilot or servo mechanisms.


CLS 251/48
TXT Subject matter under subclass 12 in which the valve is provided with a
    fluid reaction means that prescribes a rate of motion for, or an interval
    in, the operation of the valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    for such devices in which the valve operating means is disconnected
    immediately after the operating force is applied or is overridden by the
    fluid reaction means, so that a predetermined flow is obtained before a
    compulsory cut-off.

    36      and 47, for pilot or servo operated valves which have separate
    dashpots or choked fluid retarders.

    64,     for nonfluid timing or retarding means for valve actuators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 49+ for liquid checks and
    closers, subclasses 66+ for pneumatic checks and closers, and subclass 84
    for pneumatic closure checks.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 469+ for pop type safety valves, i.e.,
    those in which a separate reactor surface affected by the relieved fluid
    modifies the response of the valve to the line condition change after the
    valve opens and subclasses 514+ for dashpot controlled direct response
    valves.

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 297+, for a dashpot or shock absorber of general
    utility.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 64.11+, for fluid pressure springs.


CLS 251/49
TXT Subject matter under subclass 48 in which the fluid reaction means frees
    the valve from the restraining action of a catch or detent.

    (1)     Note.  The fluid reaction means may comprise an expansible chamber,
    a float chamber or a gravity tank which receives a diverted portion of the
    flow and actuates the latch or detent, thus relating the delay or control
    to the duration or quantity of the flow after release of the originating
    force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for latched pilot valves.

    73,     for fluid pressure released trips for valves in which the fluid
    pressure has no relation to the duration of flow in the line.  See (1) Note.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 386+ for controls which are responsive
    to the level of accumulated liquid which comprises the total flow or which
    act to maintain the level of an accumulation of liquid.  See (1) Note.


CLS 251/50
TXT Subject matter under subclass 48 in which an expansible chamber device is
    in constantly open but restricted communication with the main flow line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33+,    for choked pressure type servo-motor actuators for valves.


CLS 251/51
TXT Subject matter under subclass 50 in which means are provided to shunt fluid
    around or enlarge the restricted communication.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the shunt path is provided to permit unretarded
    motion of the valve in either its opening or closing movement while
    retarding the other movement.

    (2)     Note.  Frequently the shunt path is controlled by either a check
    valve or a cup type of packing on the piston of the expansible chamber to
    produce a one-way retarding action on the valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     for choked pressure type servo-motor actuators for valves in which
    the choke passage varies according to the valve position.

    55,     for dashpots which are not line pressure connected, but which have
    choke by-pass or relief means.


CLS 251/52
TXT Subject matter under subclass 50 in which fluid flows into the expansible
    chamber or dashpot during the closing movement of the valve.


CLS 251/53
TXT Subject matter under subclass 48 in which fluid is diverted from the main
    flow line into a tank or receiving chamber at atmospheric pressure, which
    is so related to the valve in the main flow line that the collection of a
    sufficient quantity of fluid in the tank or receiver actuates or causes the
    actuation of the valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for similar devices responsive to the accumulation of diverted
    fluid to release a latch or trip, and see the note and search notes to that
    subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 396+ for self emptying tanks in which
    the main flow is controlled through the accumulation of fluid in the tank
    rather than the use of fluid diverted from the main flow line and
    subclasses 403+ for liquid level responsive or maintaining systems in which
    the weight of the accumulated fluid controls the accumulation thereof.


CLS 251/54
TXT Subject matter under subclass 48 in which valve operation is affected by an
    isolated fluid flowing from an expansible chamber into a storage space from
    which it returns to fill the expansible chamber without co-mingling with
    other fluids.

    (1)     Note.  Frequently the isolated fluid is caused to flow from one
    side of a piston to the other.

    (2)     Note.  See the search notes to subclass 48 for related fields of
    search.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48+     and 55, for dashpot utilizing unconfined atmospheric air as the
    fluid drawn into the expansible chamber.


CLS 251/55
TXT Subject matter under subclass 48 in which a dashpot is filled with air
    drawn in from the surrounding air and either the inflow or outflow is
    restricted, means being provided to shunt fluid around the restricted
    communication on reverse flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     for choked pressure type servo-motor actuators for valves in which
    the choke passage varies according to the valve position.

    51,     for similar chambers which are line pressure connected.

    54,     for similar restricted and unrestricted flow paths for dashpots or
    choke chambers having a closed fluid circuit.


CLS 251/56
TXT Subject matter under subclass 12 wherein the fluid pressure actuator gives
    more than one character of motion or operation to the valve.

    (1)     Note.  An example of plural operations would be rotating and
    raising a rotary valve, the raising being for the purpose of reducing
    friction while the valve is rotated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157+,   for plural mechanical operations including means to increase the
    head and seat contact pressure.

    215+,   for mechanical valve actuators giving more than one character of
    motion to the valve, and see the search notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 330+ for nonvalving motion of a valve or
    valve seat, i.e., a motion performed for some purpose other than assisting
    in opening or closing the valve.


CLS 251/57
TXT Subject matter under subclass 12 wherein the fluid pressure actuator for
    the valve is connected by a closed fluid line to a control station at which
    is located a means for varying the pressure in the fluid line, which means
    takes the form of an expansible chamber device such as a pump, pulsator,
    piston and chamber or diaphragm and chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     for fluid pressure actuated valves of the servo-motor type, the
    operation of which is controlled from a distant point by means of a valve
    for the power fluid, and subclass 41 for other types of remote pilot valve
    actuation.

    131,    for remote control of electrical valve actuators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 533+ for a fluid link or column, per se,
    or actuating a nominal load other than a valve.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 82+ for pressure modulating relays or
    followers including fluid links, but not including valve or the motor means
    which is actuated by it.


CLS 251/58
TXT Subject matter under subclass 12 wherein a mechanical movement is
    interposed between the fluid pressure actuator and the valve.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of a mechanical movement as used in
    connection with valve actuation, see subclass 213.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    for electrical valve actuators with interposed mechanical movements.

    213+,   for valve actuators comprising mechanical movements and see the
    search notes for other mechanical movement devices in connection with other
    types of valve actuation or fluid handling.  See (1) Note. Search Class
    137, Subclass.

    505.46  and 505.47, for reactor surfaces operatedly connected to valves by
    mechanical movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 104 for pulsator valves operated by
    suction, as in milker pulsators, with trip linkage.


CLS 251/59
TXT Subject matter under subclass 12 wherein the fluid pressure actuator
    comprises an impeller or vane mounted to turn or swing about a pivot in
    response to fluid flow or pressure and connected to actuate the valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 332, for turbines connected to valves to
    give a non-valving motion and subclass 499 for turbine or swinging blade
    reactor surface connected to operate a line condition change responsive
    valve.


CLS 251/60
TXT Subject matter under subclass 12 wherein the actuator is provided with an
    adjustable stop to limit the actuator travel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for adjustable limit stops for valves having choked pressure type
    servo-motor actuators.

    89+,    for valve actuators having means to hold the actuator in a desired
    position or prevent its use.

    284+,   for valves with nonfluid actuators provided with limit stops, and
    see the search notes thereto.


CLS 251/61
TXT Subject matter under subclass 12 in which the valve includes a
    reciprocating fluid control member and the actuator for such member
    comprises an expansible chamber device in which a portion of the expansible
    chamber of such device includes a working member comprising a wall made of
    flexible material and the flexing of such wall in response to the
    application of fluid pressure to the chamber constitutes the movement which
    effects actuation of the control member.

    (1)     Note.  An "expansible chamber device" under this definition is a
    device in which the fluid actuating the expansible chamber device is
    disclosed as distinct from the fluid controlled by the control member of
    the valve; that is, a separate fluid or fluid valved from the controlled
    fluid is admitted to the expansible chamber to effect movement of the
    flexible wall structure.  See the Search Class note below to Class 137, for
    devices excluded under this definition

    (2)     Note.  The patents in this and the indented subclasses are
    necessarily directed to a combination - the combination of a reciprocating
    valve and a flexible wall expansible chamber device.  Because an expansible
    chamber device, per se, is classified in Class 92 where a comprehensive
    breakdown is provided, patents which disclose a specific Class 92 device in
    combination with a valve but do not claim such combination, and where the
    improvement is directed to the Class 92 device only, should not be
    cross-referenced into this and the indented subclasses. Rather, a
    cross-reference should be made to the appropriate subclass in Class 92.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45      and 46, for choked fluid pressure type servo-motor actuators for
    valves in which there is a diaphragm or bellows in the operating mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 34+ for a bellows type
    expansible chamber device and subclasses 90+ for a flexible wall type
    expansible chamber device.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 494+, particularly subclass 505.36+ for
    a valve having a diaphragm as a reactor surface, subclass 510 for a valve
    wherein a diaphragm or bellows actuator for the valve is at least partially
    deflected by fluid in response to a change in line condition of such fluid,
    and subclass 525 for valves of deformable material in which the restoring
    force of such material constitutes the biasing means for the valve.


CLS 251/61.1
TXT Subject matter under subclass 61 in which the surface of the flexible wall
    working member outside the expansible chamber constitutes the movable
    control member which member is adapted to be moved to engage a valve seat.


CLS 251/61.2
TXT Subject matter under subclass 61 in which the movable control member, the
    seat or port for such member and the flexible wall working member are
    positioned and aligned along the same axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63.5+,  for a valve having a coaxial valve actuator comprising an
    expansible chamber device having a cylinder with a relatively movable
    piston therein.


CLS 251/61.3
TXT Subject matter under subclass 61.2 in which the control member is biased by
    spring means concentric with the axis of such member and positioned on the
    side of the control member opposite that of the flexible wall, the spring
    means acting between a fixed member and the control member.


CLS 251/61.4
TXT Subject matter under subclass 61.2 in which the flexible wall or control
    member is biased by spring means concentric with the axis of the control
    member and positioned between the flexible wall and the control member, the
    spring means acting between a fixed member and the flexible wall or control
    member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63.6,   for a valve and coaxial piston and cylinder expansible chamber
    valve actuator with a coaxial spring biasing means positioned between the
    valve and actuator.


CLS 251/61.5
TXT Subject matter under subclass 61.2 in which the flexible wall member is
    biased by spring means concentric with the axis of the control member and
    in which the flexible wall member is positioned between such spring means
    and control member the spring means acting between a fixed member and the
    flexible wall.


CLS 251/62
TXT Subject matter under subclass 12 in which the valve includes a
    reciprocating fluid control member and the actuator comprises an expansible
    chamber device having as a working member either a cylinder or a piston,
    relatively movable therein, the cylinder and piston forming an expansible
    chamber, the volume of the expansible chamber changing with a corresponding
    relative movement of the piston and cylinder in response to the supply of
    control fluid to the chamber, such relative movement effecting actuation of
    the control member.

    (1)     Note.  The fluid actuating the expansible chamber device is
    distinct from the fluid controlled by the control member of the valve; that
    is a separate fluid or fluid valved from the controlled fluid is admitted
    to the expansible chamber to effect relative movement of the cylinder and
    piston. See the Search Class note below to Class 137 for devices excluded
    under this definition.

    (2)     Note.  The patents in this and the indented subclasses are
    necessarily directed to a combination  the combination of a reciprocating
    valve and an expansible chamber device, per se, is classified in Class 92
    where a comprehensive breakdown is provided, patents which disclose a
    specific Class 92 device in combination with a valve, but do not claim such
    combination and where the improvement is directed to the Class 92 device
    only, should not be cross-referenced into this and the indented subclasses.
     Rather, a cross-reference should be made to the appropriate subclass in
    Class 92.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclass for piston and
    cylinder structure.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 494+ for a valve having a separate
    connected fluid reactor surface.


CLS 251/63
TXT Subject matter under subclass 62 wherein the piston and the valve forms a
    unitary structure.


CLS 251/63.4
TXT Subject matter under subclass 62 in which working or movable member of the
    expansible chamber device is not rigidly secured to the movable control
    member but is capable of transmitting movement to such member through (1)
    direct engagement of separable engaging surfaces or (2) through a spring or
    other resilient means.

    (1)     Note.  One of the separable engaging surfaces is carried on the
    cylinder, piston or piston rod of the expansible chamber device and the
    other is on the movable control member of the valve or actuating rod of the
    valve.

    (2)     Note.  The spring or resilient means through which motion is
    transmitted is positioned between an element rigid with the movable working
    member of the expansible chamber device and an element rigid with the
    control member and is adapted to engage both.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 84 for apparatus comprising a
    resilient means interposed between the working member of an expansible
    chamber device and a relatively movable power transmission element and
    subclass 129 for apparatus comprising an abutment connection between a
    working member and a power transmitting element.


CLS 251/63.5
TXT Subject matter under subclass 62 in which the movable control member, the
    seat or port for such member, the cylinder of the expansible chamber device
    and the piston relatively movable therein are positioned and aligned along
    the same axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61.2,   for a valve having a coaxial valve actuator comprising a flexible
    wall expansible chamber device.


CLS 251/63.6
TXT Subject matter under subclass 63.5 in which the movable working member of
    the expansible chamber device or the control member is biased by spring
    means concentric with the axis of the control member and positioned between
    the movable working member and control member, the spring means acting
    between a fixed member and the working member or control member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61.4,   for a valve and coaxial flexible wall expansible chamber valve
    actuator with a coaxial spring biasing means positioned between the valve
    and actuator.


CLS 251/64
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which the actuator includes
    means, other than one utilizing a fluid, for retarding the motion of valve
    actuation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48+,    for a valve having fluid retarder, and see the Search Notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 416+ for a quick acting float controlled
    valve, a period of delay usually preceding the quick action; subclass 435
    for float arm operated means with a valve retarder; subclass 514 for a
    direct acting condition responsive valve having a retarder; subclasses
    624.11+ for a programmer or nonfluid timer type actuator controlling a
    valve.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 477 for retarded or delayed action discharge
    controller in a dispenser.


CLS 251/65
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the actuator for the
    valve includes a permanent magnet or a constantly energized electromagnet.

    (1)     Note.  The magnets to be found in this class are such that there is
    no means for varying their magnetic properties and the control is usually
    either by the movement of the magnet or by some control of the magnetic
    circuit outside of the magnet.


CLS 251/66
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the valve is provided
    with a biasing means for urging it in one direction, a latch holds the
    valve against the action of the biasing means and a trip is provided for
    releasing the latch so that the biasing means may move the valve.

    (1)     Note.  The latch may take the form of a collapsible toggle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89+,    for valves having means for blocking or disabling the actuator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 50 and 57 for trip devices which are
    actuated in response to excess speed of rotation of a shaft to permit a
    valve to open or close, subclasses 65+ for combustion failure responsive
    fuel safety cut-offs for burners, many of which involve trip type
    actuators, subclasses 67+ for destructible or deformable element control,
    many being biased trip devices subclass 104 for suction pulsator devices
    with trip linkage, subclass 417 for float controlled valves released by
    pilot floats, subclasses 420+ for trip mechanism in float controlled valves
    and subclass 456 for safety cut-offs requiring resetting, many being a trip
    type, especially subclass 463 for fluid released trip type safety cut-off
    valves requiring resetting.


CLS 251/67
TXT Subject matter under subclass 66 associated with means for normally
    actuating the port controller with trip device latched in its bias
    restraining position.


CLS 251/68
TXT Subject matter under subclass 66 wherein the means for actuating the trip
    is an electrical means.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for explosive actuated trip devices
    which employ an electrically actuated igniter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129+,   for electrically actuated valves and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 251/69
TXT Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein the trip is operated to actuate
    the valve when the electric power supply to the electrical means fails.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for servo failure responsive control of a valve operated by a
    servo-motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 66 for thermoelectric type combustion
    failure responsive fuel safety cut-offs for burners.


CLS 251/70
TXT Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein an additional electrical means is
    provided for resetting the valve and/or trip.

    (1)     Note.  A usual arrangement is one wherein the additional electrical
    means draws the valve head back against the biasing means and wherein the
    latch then engages to hold the valve in the biased position until the trip
    is actuated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 66 for thermoelectric control of resetting
    for combustion failure responsive fuel safety cut-offs for burners and
    subclasses 456+ for safety cut-offs which must be reset by external means,
    many of these devices being of the trip type.


CLS 251/71
TXT Subject matter under subclass 70 wherein the electrical valve actuating
    means includes a rotary electric motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133+,   for rotary electric motor valve actuators not of the trip type.


CLS 251/72
TXT Subject matter under subclass 66 wherein the biasing means for the trip or
    valve includes a gravity urged weight, which, when the latch is tripped,
    effects or assists the opening or closing of the valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    338,    for weight biased valves, and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 251/73
TXT Subject matter under subclass 66 wherein the means for actuating the trip
    includes fluid pressure motive means.

    (1)     Note.  The trip may be actuated either by the application of a
    predetermined fluid pressure or by the decrease or failure of a fluid
    pressure.

    (2)     Note.  The pressure fluid may be obtained from fuel oxidized in a
    chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12+,    for fluid pressure actuated valves.

    49,     for dashpot type trip release in fluid actuated or retarded valves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 386+ and 393 for liquid level responsive
    devices in which a fluid pressure differential results from a vent closed
    by accumulated material and subclass 463 for fluid released trip type
    safety cut-off valves requiring resetting.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 198+ for feed cut-off by rising liquid level in a filled
    receiver.


CLS 251/74
TXT Subject matter under subclass 66 wherein the trip actuator includes a
    mechanical movement.

    (1)     Note.  For a definition of a mechanical movement actuator, see
    subclass 213.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213+,   for mechanical movement actuated valves, and see the search notes
    thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 420+ for trip-mechanism for quick acting
    float controlled valves.


CLS 251/75
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the valve actuator is
    provided with means which will give the valve an accelerated or snap action
    during a part of its motion as compared to a relatively slow motion during
    another part of its motion.

    (1)     Note.  By snap action is usually meant an arrangement wherein the
    actuation of the valve is first delayed while energy is stored in a spring
    or equivalent device and then the stored energy is released, such release
    taking place in a short time to provide a quick response of the actuated
    element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for valves with nonfluid timer or retarder, and see the search
    notes thereto for a general list of retarded valves.

    66+,    for biased trip type valves, including toggle type latch devices.

    77+,    for lost motion devices involving mere delay without a subsequent
    acceleration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 344+ for cyclically
    operable expansible chamber motors having snap action distributing valves.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 469+ for pop type safety valves.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 498+ for snap acting outlet elements for
    dispensers.


CLS 251/76
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the valve actuator is of
    the type where a first element after a free movement strikes a second
    element and the impact thereof is the force which actuates the valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77+,    for apparatus wherein the lost motion actuation of the valve may
    result in an impact effect under some circumstances.

    129+,   for solenoid valve actuators where a gap normally occurs between
    the valve and armature in one position of the valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclass 194 and the subclass there noted for a well
    apparatus comprising a valve actuated by a dropped ball or fluid driven
    piston.


CLS 251/77
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the connection between
    the actuator and valve is such that during part of its valve- actuating
    travel the actuator or a part thereof may move without producing any
    movement of the valve.

    (1)     Note.  Certain actuators wherein interruptions in the continuity of
    transmission of movement or energy to the valve are inherent in the law of
    operation of the mechanism, as in solenoids, ratchets, etc., are classified
    in succeeding subclasses on the basis of the particular actuator involved.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for snap actuation mechanisms.

    76,     for impact actuation mechanisms.

    129+,   for solenoid valve actuators.  See (1) Note.

    157+,   for lost motion connections between the actuator and the valve but
    also including means to increase the head and seat contact pressure
    operable during the period of lost motion.

    230,    for ratchet type mechanical movement actuators.  See (1) Note.

    249,    for interrupted gearing mechanical movement actuators.  See (1)
    Note.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 243.3 for lost motion connections which
    permit the valve to be found on its seat, subclass 422 for lost motion in
    quick acting float controlled valves, subclass 474 for lost motion between
    a pop pressure reactor and a condition responsive valve, subclass 630.19+
    for lost motion between a single actuator and a plurality of sequentially
    progressively operating valves.


CLS 251/78
TXT Apparatus under subclass 77 including a lost motion connection in the lever
    system.


CLS 251/79
TXT Subject matter under subclass 77 wherein the lost motion between the
    actuator and the valve is such that when the force transmitted between the
    actuator and the valve rises above a predetermined valve (1) the connection
    between the actuator and valve is broken and no further force is
    transmitted therebetween, or (2) the force transmitted therebetween is
    greatly reduced.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, appropriate subclasses, especially
    subclasses 12+ for clutch and brake combinations and subclass 30+ for
    clutches, per se.


CLS 251/80
TXT Subject matter under subclass 79 wherein the lost motion connection between
    the actuator and the valve includes an elastic element.

    (1)     Note.  In order that the elastic element be so considered, its
    elastic properties must be used in producing the lost motion between
    actuator and valve.


CLS 251/81
TXT Subject matter under subclass 79 wherein the lost motion connection between
    the actuator and the valve includes a friction coupling or clutch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, appropriate subclasses, especially
    subclasses 12+ and 30+ for clutches combined with fluid couplings or brakes
    and clutches, per se.


CLS 251/82
TXT Devices under subclass 77 wherein the actuator is so connected to the valve
    that in its intermediate position it permits the valve to operate as a
    check valve and in its extreme positions it holds the valve open or closed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213+,   318+ and 336, for actuators which may contact a valve or part
    thereof to open or close it in opposition to its bias.


CLS 251/83
TXT Devices under subclass 82 wherein the movement of the valve is modified by
    a spring.


CLS 251/84
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the valve head is movably
    related to its stem or other immediately supporting element, there being no
    guide or link or other actuator in engagement with said stem or supporting
    element between the head and the movable connection, or with the head in
    such a way as to hold it in alignment with the seat.

    (1)     Note.  The movable connection may be of the universal, swivel or
    pivot type, the purpose being to let the valve head seat squarely even if
    the stem or other supporting element is not accurately aligned, or to allow
    the valve head to slip past projection in seating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for tilting concentric pilot valve in fluid servo-motor valve
    actuators.

    157+,   for relatively movable head and stem constructions for pressing
    heads to seats which permit alignment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 527.4 for direct-response, pivoted valves
    constructed to permit self adjustment.


CLS 251/85
TXT Devices under subclass 84 in which the connection is resiliently yieldable.


CLS 251/86
TXT Devices under subclass 84 in which the connection permits movement of the
    head in more than one direction.


CLS 251/87
TXT Devices under subclass 84 in which a pivotal connection permits the head to
    swing in one plane only.

    (1)     Note.  The axis of the pivot is usually perpendicular to the axis
    of the valve stem.


CLS 251/88
TXT Devices under subclass 84 in which the valve head rotates only, usually
    with the axis of the valve stem as the center of rotation.


CLS 251/89
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein means are provided for
    detaining, blocking or disabling a valve actuator, the actuator being
    restrained against motion away from the point at which the detent or
    holding means engages it.

    (1)     Note.  The blocking or disabling means of this subclass is not a
    part of the valve actuator and the unblocking or disabling does not actuate
    the valve.

    (2)     Note.  Valve actuating mechanisms having a separately actuated
    clutch which disables the mechanism are included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66+,    for valves provided with biased trips whose latches or detents are
    analogous to the blocking or disabling means above, and see the search
    notes to subclass 66.

    79+,    for yielding connectors, e.g., slip clutch, in a valve actuating
    mechanism. See (2) Note.

    230,    for ratchet operating mechanisms in which detents are used in
    holding valves between ratcheting.

    284+,   for limit stops for valve actuators, these preventing further
    motion in one direction but allowing retrograde movement, and see the
    search notes thereto.

    297+,   for frictional detents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 527+, and all other
    appropriate subclasses for detents for control lever and linkage systems.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 303 for means for disabling stop and waste
    valves in hydrants, as for summer conditions, subclasses 382+ for valve
    guards which prevent access to a valve or its actuator, subclasses 383+ for
    arrangements wherein the valve is locked or sealed against unauthorized use
    and subclasses 523+ for valves directly responsive to line condition change
    which are provided with means for latching them open.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 43 and 44 for dispensers having discharge
    controlling stops and/or detents combined with indicating means.


CLS 251/89.5
TXT Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein (1) the actuator which is
    detained, blocked or disabled includes a flow path section which is
    separable from the valved section or (2) the means which detains, blocks or
    disables the actuator includes a flow path section which is separable from
    the valved section or that structure which joins the separate sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149.9,  for separable flow path sections, the joining or disconnection
    thereof being blocked or disabled by a valve, or its actuator, in one
    section.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 614.06 for separable, valved, flow path
    sections with the means for coupling the sections interlocked with a valve
    or its actuator, and subclass 637.05 for separable, valved, flow path
    sections wherein the valve actuators are correlated.


CLS 251/90
TXT Devices under subclass 89 comprising a separate unit attached to a
    conventional valve structure.


CLS 251/91
TXT Attachments under subclass 90 wherein there is modification of the valve
    structure to receive the disabling unit.


CLS 251/92
TXT Attachments under subclass 90 wherein the valve has a limit stop which is
    retained in a fixed position by the direct engagement of the disabling
    means with some part of the stop.


CLS 251/93
TXT Devices under subclass 92 wherein the disabling means is fixedly attached
    to the valve stem or actuator.


CLS 251/94
TXT Devices under subclass 89 wherein the latch means is fluid pressure biased.


CLS 251/95
TXT Devices under subclass 89 wherein the means for blocking or disabling the
    handle is released by non-valving motion of the actuator.


CLS 251/96
TXT Devices under subclass 95 wherein the handle is linearly reciprocated to
    release the blocking means.


CLS 251/97
TXT Devices under subclass 96 wherein the latch connects the actuator to the
    body through the head.  The actuator may be an integral part of the head.


CLS 251/98
TXT Devices under subclass 95 wherein an integral portion of a pivotally
    mounted handle serves as a blocking or disabling means.


CLS 251/99
TXT Devices under subclass 98 wherein the pivotally mounted handle is spring
    biased in the blocking or disabling position.


CLS 251/100
TXT Devices under subclass 95 wherein the handle is rotated about the axis of
    the valve stem to actuate the blocking or disabling means.


CLS 251/101
TXT Devices under subclass 89 wherein the manipulator for the disabling means
    is mounted on the handle or stem for movement independent of the handle or
    stem.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93,     for attachments mounted on the valve handle or stem.


CLS 251/102
TXT Devices under subclass 101 wherein the manipulator has constrained linear
    motion.


CLS 251/103
TXT Devices under subclass 102 wherein the linear movement of the manipulator
    operates a pivoted latch.


CLS 251/104
TXT Devices under subclass 102 wherein the latch is rigidly associated with the
    manipulator.


CLS 251/105
TXT Devices under subclass 104 wherein a distinct latch lug extends transverse
    to the line of movement of the manipulator.


CLS 251/106
TXT Devices under subclass 102 wherein the latch has movement transverse to the
    line of movement of the manipulator.


CLS 251/107
TXT Devices under subclass 101 wherein the latch is a pivoted member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93,     for actuator latches that are mounted on the valve actuator.


CLS 251/108
TXT Devices under subclass 107 wherein the latch and manipulator are joined or
    made integral to form a single continuous member having at least one
    portion that is resilient and the pivot is a segment of the spring secured
    to the handle or stem.  The latch moves in an arcuate path.


CLS 251/109
TXT Devices under subclass 107 wherein the latch is spring biased.


CLS 251/110
TXT Devices under subclass 101 wherein the latch has constrained linear motion.


CLS 251/111
TXT Devices under subclass 89 wherein the manipulator for the disabling means
    is mounted on the valve body.


CLS 251/112
TXT Devices under subclass 111 wherein a set screw is both latch and
    manipulator.


CLS 251/113
TXT Devices under subclass 111 wherein the manipulator has constrained linear
    motion and the latch is rigidly associated with the manipulator.


CLS 251/114
TXT Devices under subclass 111 wherein the latch is a pivoted member.


CLS 251/115
TXT Devices under subclass 114 wherein the latch and manipulator are joined or
    made integral to form a single continuous member having at least one
    portion that is resilient and the pivot is a segment of the spring secured
    to the body.  The latch moves in an arcuate path.


CLS 251/116
TXT Devices under subclass 114 wherein the latch is spring biased.


CLS 251/117
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein a restricted passage is
    provided in parallel to a main valve.

    (1)     Note.  The usual purpose of such restricted passage is either to
    provide a bleed across the valve to permit a minimum flow of current when
    the valve is closed or to equalize pressure across the valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118+,   for valves having a material guide or restrictor in series flow
    relation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 513.3+ for direct response valves having
    an open bleed port, subclasses 599+ and 625.28+ for distribution systems
    comprising flow paths which divide and recombine, and see the search notes
    thereto for notes on by-passes and subclasses 629+ for sequentially
    progressive actuation of plural valves for pressure equalizing flow.


CLS 251/118
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein a restrictor or material
    flow guide other than a nozzle or outlet shape is provided in series with a
    valve.

    (1)     Note.  Since some restrictors, especially movable or adjustable
    types, differ from valves only in the intended use, the search should be
    continued in various serial valve categories.  See especially the search
    notes in section 23 of the class definitions of Class 222, Dispensing.

    (2)     Note.  Many of these restrictors have silencing as their chief
    purpose.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33+,    for valves actuated by choked pressure type servo-motors,
    especially subclass 37 for such valves having a choke or restrictor in the
    main line.

    216,    for screw threads in a flow passage which will have inherently
    restricted properties.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 171+ for fluid separating outlets in
    diverse fluid containing pressure systems especially subclasses 175+ for
    restricted gas bleed passages, subclasses 436+ for float arm operated
    valves combined with flow guides or restrictors, usually with a silencing
    function, subclasses 544+ for filters, many of which have structure similar
    or analogous to restrictors and guides. Where an element which has the
    structure of a filter is used for removing particles of solids from the
    flow stream classification is in the filtering subclasses, but a similar
    device to silence a flow stream, prevent turbulence or to modify a
    carbonated liquid is classified as a restrictor in subclasses 118.01+,
    subclasses 590+ for distribution systems comprising a tank with an
    internally extending flow guide, subclass 781 for expansible chamber
    devices with flow restrictors and subclass 802 for outlet shapes which may
    have a restricting effect, and see the search notes thereto.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 40+ for flow restrictors in
    pipes and tubular conduits and subclass 46.5 for pipes with discharge
    deflectors.

    166,    Wells, subclass 91.1 for well heads with chokes or beans.

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, subclass 32 for
    conveyor chutes with retarders.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 547 and 564 for dispensers having internal
    flow restrictors.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 380+, 399+,
    461+, 553+, 575, and 590+ for spray nozzles combined with whirlers or other
    restrictors in the flow line or with external deflectors.


CLS 251/119
TXT Devices under subclass 118 in which the flow of fluid downstream of the
    valve is guided or restricted to produce a zone of low pressure which acts
    through a passage to return to the fluid material which has found its way
    into the valve stem passage.


CLS 251/120
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein the flow material guide or
    restrictor is movable with respect to the walls of the flow passage.

    (1)     Note.  For the purposes of this and indented subclasses the
    distinction between a movable restrictor and the valve is that in any of
    the normally occurring positions of a restrictor fluid will still flow.  If
    in any normally occurring position the flow is completely arrested, the
    device is not a restrictor but a valve.  However, the distinction cannot be
    made in many instances, and movable flow restrictors are frequently
    considered valves in this class.  See the class definition.

    (2)     Note.  The movable restrictors of this subclass are either movably
    mounted or floating in the flow path or connected to a movable part of the
    valve, or made of resilient material.

    (3)     Note.  Guides which extend along a flow path from a valve head to
    keep the valve in alignment with its seat are not considered restrictors
    unless modified to control flow or turbulence, but are classified on the
    basis of the valve or its actuator or other appropriate basis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215+    and 264+, for screw actuators for valves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 497+ for reaction members operating line
    condition responsive valves, the effect of such members being generally
    flow restricting, per se, subclass 525 for resilient material valves
    responding directly to line pressure and subclasses 613+ for distribution
    systems comprising a single flow path with plural serial valves and/or
    closures.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 43, 45 and 46 for pipes with
    variable flow restrictors.


CLS 251/121
TXT Subject matter under subclass 120 wherein the movable guide or restrictor
    is adjustable, i.e., may be put into a different position or relation with
    respect to its mounting and/or actuator for the purpose of securing a
    different character or rate of flow when flow subsequently occurs.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition of Class 137, section 5, for search
    notes on manual valve actuation and adjusting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215+    and 264+, for screw actuators for valves, and see the search notes
    to subclass 264.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 43, 45 and 46 for variable
    flow restrictors not combined with valves or distribution systems.


CLS 251/122
TXT Devices under subclass 121 in which the adjustable restrictor is a tapered
    plug which extends into the flow passage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 625.3 for means to adjust flow through
    parallel passages in a movable flow-controlling element.


CLS 251/123
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein the restrictor comprises a
    contracted portion of the flow line and the valve is located at the point
    of greatest constriction of the flow line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for fluid actuated or retarded valves which are Venturi or flow
    line effect assisted.

    37,     for choked fluid pressure type servo-motor valve actuators with a
    main line having a choke or restriction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 219+ for Larner-Johnson valves, i.e.,
    expansible chamber or internal telescoping valves, which are seated at a
    point of restriction in the line, subclasses 436+ for float operated valves
    having a restrictor, subclass 487 for pilot or servo control of a condition
    change responsive valve controlled by pressure differentials across the
    flow line valve, subclasses 500+ for condition responsive devices having
    separate connected reactor surface means responsive to rate of fluid flow,
    usually measured across a restriction and subclass 515 for drill pipe check
    valves.


CLS 251/124
TXT Subject matter under subclass 123 wherein the valve is placed in the throat
    of a Venturi tube and the point of valve location coincides with the point
    of greatest restriction of the Venturi.


CLS 251/125
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein the restrictor is such that with
    a constant flow of fluid thereto the stream flowing outwardly therefrom
    takes the form of drops.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 420 for drop forming dispensers, and see the
    search notes thereto.


CLS 251/126
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein the guide or restrictor comprises
    means forming a passage which advances the material along the flow path
    while also causing it to travel around the circumference of a circular or
    conical core between guides applied to or formed by said core.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 42+ for pipes with
    restrictors in the form of a tortuous path.


CLS 251/127
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein the restricting means is of a
    form such that the fluid flow direction is changed at least twice in a
    plurality of stages.

    (1)     Note.  Typical of the restrictors to be found in this subclass are
    (1) restrictors comprising a plurality of baffle plates so arranged that
    the fluid flowing past them eddies or reverses its flow and (2) restrictors
    comprising a passage which is reversed back on itself a plurality of times
    to produce a number of reversals of flow greater than two.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 573 and 574 for plural series flow
    related tanks or compartments formed by baffles and/or providing for zigzag
    flow.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 42+ for pipes with flow
    restrictors in the form of a tortuous path.


CLS 251/128
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein means are provided in
    connection with a detachable valve actuator, whereby a sealing member is
    brought into operable position to prevent leakage when the actuator is
    detached.

    (1)     Note.  The arrangement herein usually takes the form of a valving
    means for the opening through which the actuator passes which closes the
    opening when the actuator is detached from the main valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291+,   for valves having detachable actuators.

    335.1+, for valves having a hermetic flexible wall seal for the actuator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 285 for hydrants having a check valve to
    close the flow when the main valve is removed, subclasses 312+ for leakage
    or drip collectors for fluid handling devices and subclasses 613+ for
    serial valves in distribution systems one of which may be a repair closure
    for the other.


CLS 251/129.01
TXT ELECTRICALLY ACTUATED VALVE:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising means in the form of a
    valve actuator which uses electrical energy to change the position of a
    movable element, i.e., a valve, to regulate or control the flow of a fluent
    material through a passage or opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30.01+, for electromagnetically operated pilot valves for servo-motors for
    valve actuation.

    68+,    for electric trip actuation, including resetting, of biased trip
    type valves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 90.11 for poppet valve
    operating mechanism which is electrically powered.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 65+ for solenoids controlling safety
    cut-off valves for oil burners, subclass 76 for heaters for destructible or
    fusible control elements, subclass 341 for fluid handling systems with
    electric heating elements, subclass 392 for liquid level control by
    electrical characteristic sensing, subclass 554 for electrical indicators
    for position or extent of motion or system parts, subclass 596.17 for
    electrically operated supply and exhaust valves, and subclass 625.65 for
    electrically operated supply and exhaust multiway valve units.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 333+ and 504 for motor operated discharge
    assistants and outlet elements.


CLS 251/129.02
TXT With means to bias valve open:

    Subject matter under subclass 129.01 wherein a spring, fluid pressure, or
    other agent is used to maintain the valve in a position which allows the
    fluent material to flow through the passage until the valve actuator moves
    the valve to a position which closes the passage.


CLS 251/129.03
TXT With nonelectrical actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 129.01 also including an alternative actuator
    which does not require electrical energy to move the valve.

    (1)     Note.  Where both electrical and nonelectrical mechanisms are
    present, but in which the mechanisms are not of themselves each capable of
    fully controlling the valve, the actuators are not considered to be
    alternative within the scope of this subclass and are classified in the
    appropriate subclass for the electrical actuation and cross referenced for
    novel nonelectrical actuation mechanisms.  An example of such excluded
    device would be a trip released actuator with an electrical reset in
    subclasses 70+.

    (2)     Note.  See the class definition of Class 137 section 4 for search
    notes on multiple actuators.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for fluid actuated valves having alternative nonfluid, including
    electrical, actuating means.

    68+,    for electrical trip actuation including electrical reset for
    valves, and see (1) Note above.


CLS 251/129.04
TXT Remote or follow-up control system for electrical actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 129.01 wherein an electrical control system
    is provided for controlling the valve actuator, which control system is
    either:  (a) an electrical system including means interposed between an
    operator control station which is far removed from the valve actuator or
    (b) an arrangement such that movement of a control member will result in an
    equal or proportional movement of a controlled member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for remote control of choked pressure type servo-motor valve
    actuators.

    57,     for fluid link type remote actuators for valves, and see the search
    notes to these subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 560+ for electric
    motor position servomechanism; appropriate subclasses for remotely
    controlled electric motors.


CLS 251/129.05
TXT Having means to produce digital pulses:

    Subject matter under subclass 129.01 wherein the valve actuator includes
    means for providing discrete pulses of electrical energy, i.e., "off" or
    "on", or "0" or "1" electrical signals.


CLS 251/129.06
TXT Having element dimensionally responsive to field:

    Subject matter under subclass 129.01 wherein a dimension of the valve or
    actuator changes in size when subjected to a magnetic or an electrical
    field to thereby control the flow of the fluent material.


CLS 251/129.07
TXT Balanced valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 129.01 which includes means for equalizing
    pressures acting on the valve or valve actuator whereby minimal electrical
    energy is required to move the valve to a desired position.


CLS 251/129.08
TXT Having means to produce proportional flow:

    Subject matter under subclass 129.01 which includes means for moving the
    valve a distance which is in proportion to the magnitude of the electrical
    energy supplied, or to regulate the flow in proportion to the magnitude of
    the electrical energy supplied.


CLS 251/129.09
TXT Solenoid having plural coils:

    Subject matter under subclass 129.01 wherein the valve actuator includes a
    solenoid or reciprocating type of electrical valve actuator which has at
    least two spiral electrical windings, each winding being wound about an
    imaginary center line.


CLS 251/129.10
TXT Coils have common axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 129.09 wherein at least two of the windings
    have the same imaginary center line.


CLS 251/129.11
TXT Rotary electric actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 129.01 wherein the valve actuator is of a
    type which rotates to actuate the valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for rotary electric motor means for resetting a bias trip type
    valve.


CLS 251/129.12
TXT With limit control:

    Subject matter under subclass 129.11 wherein the rotary valve actuator is
    provided with means for regulating the actuator at a predetermined point in
    the operation of the actuator to disable or otherwise control the actuator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284+,   for limit stops for valves, and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 251/129.13
TXT With speed or braking control:

    Subject matter under subclass 129.11 wherein a control means is provided
    for either regulating or slowing down the speed of the rotary valve
    actuator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 47+ for speed responsive valve control.


CLS 251/129.14
TXT Freely rotatable ball valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 129.01 wherein the valve is a spherical
    member which is mounted so that the member can turn in any direction during
    actuation.


CLS 251/129.15
TXT Including solenoid:

    Subject matter under subclass 129.01 wherein the valve actuator comprises a
    winding or coil and a metal core or armature, i.e., a solenoid, the coil
    and armature mounted for relative movement when the coil is energized.


CLS 251/129.16
TXT Having plate-shape armature:

    Subject matter under subclass 129.15 wherein the armature is circular metal
    disc or other relatively thin metal body mounted for reciprocation in the
    direction of its thinnest dimension.


CLS 251/129.17
TXT Having diaphragm between coil and opening controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 129.15 which includes a membranous member
    which separates the coil from the opening controlled by the valve.


CLS 251/129.18
TXT With means to adjust stroke of armature:

    Subject matter under subclass 129.15 which includes a membranous member
    which separates the coil from the opening controlled by the valve.


CLS 251/129.19
TXT Lost motion between valve and valve actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 129.15 which includes means which provides
    for movement of either the valve or the valve actuator while the other is
    stationary during a portion of the time of actuation.


CLS 251/129.20
TXT Mechanical movement between valve and solenoid:

    Subject matter under subclass 129.15 wherein a mechanical movement is
    provided between the valve and solenoid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for fluid actuated valves having a mechanical movement between the
    actuator and the valve.

    213+,   for mechanical movement actuators for valves in general, and see
    the search notes thereto.


CLS 251/129.21
TXT Coil surrounds valve port or flow line:

    Subject matter under subclass 129.15 wherein the coil is arranged around
    the passage so that flow is through the coil.

    (1)     Note.  The passage may be a valve port adjunct.

    (2)     Note.  The incidental heat exchange resulting from this arrangement
    is not sufficient basis for classification as a heat exchange device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 341 for electric heating elements for
    fluid handling systems, and see the search notes thereto.  See (2) Note.


CLS 251/129.22
TXT Solenoid within flow line:

    Subject matter under subclass 129.15 wherein the passage is external to and
    surrounds the solenoid.

    (1)     Note.  The passage may be a valve port adjunct.

    (2)     Note.  The incidental heat exchange resulting from this arrangement
    is not sufficient basis for classification as a heat exchange device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 341 for electric heating elements for
    fluid handling systems, and see the search notes thereto.  See (2) Note.


CLS 251/142
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in combination with a flow path
    wherein the combination relationship is specifically set forth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 561+ for distribution systems including
    details of the flow path which go beyond the cooperative relation thereof
    with a valve or its actuator, and subclasses 798+ for a flow line coupling
    forming part of a fluid handling system.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 43, 45 and 46 for a flow
    pipe with variable restrictor.


CLS 251/143
TXT Subject matter under subclass 142 wherein the combination relationship
    includes means for mounting the valve on, or supporting it from, the flow
    path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 507 for reactor surface type condition
    responsive valves with means for mounting them in the system.


CLS 251/144
TXT Subject matter under subclass 142 wherein the flow path is a tank.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 123+ for tanks combined with siphons,
    especially subclass 151 for valves or closures in the siphon flow path,
    subclasses 219+ for Larner-Johnson type valves, in which a telescoping
    valve member lies inside the flow path, subclasses 255+ for plural tanks
    with parallel flow, subclasses 317+ for means for tapping a tank or keg
    under pressure, subclasses 373 and 376 for tank supports, subclasses 386+
    for liquid level response or maintenance, subclass 548 for valved tank
    inlets or outlets provided with a strainer, subclasses 571+ for plural
    tanks connected in series, subclass 581 for movable tanks, subclasses 582
    to 616+ for tanks with movable, plural, internally extended and other
    special forms of inlet and outlet, subclasses 624.11+ for a distribution
    system including a programmer or a timer and subclasses 625+ for a multiway
    valve unit.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 420 to 574 for dispensing tanks of the
    gravity type.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 149.1+ for a pipe or cable and
    box coupling, subclasses 136.1+ for a pipe or rod-to-pipe-to-plate
    coupling, and subclasses 189+ for a pipe end-to-plate coupling, especially
    subclass 193 wherein the pipe end is a faucet part.


CLS 251/145
TXT Subject matter under subclass 142 wherein the valve controls a flow path
    which is located on the side of a pipe, the valve being secured or applied
    to the side of the pipe or comprising a unitary flow passage and controller
    applied to an outlet in the circumferential wall of the pipe.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 143 for siphon venting or breaking,
    subclasses 173+, 177+, 197+ and 203 for outlets for either gas or liquids
    in fluid separating traps, subclasses 216+ for back-flow preventing air
    vents in liquid flow lines, subclasses 272+ for hydrant valves in water
    mains, especially subclass 299 for valves for hydrant outlets, subclasses
    317+ for devices for tapping a pipe under pressure, subclass 480 for
    auxiliary inlet valves in combustion engine induction lines, subclasses
    596+ for distribution systems involving drain or stop and waste valves, and
    see the search notes thereto and subclasses 872+ for distribution systems
    having a flow control means for plural passages comprising a valve or
    deflector at the junction of such passages.


CLS 251/146
TXT Subject matter under subclass 145 wherein the valve and/or mounting is made
    in parts to clamp around the pipe.


CLS 251/147
TXT Subject matter under subclass 142 wherein the flow path is a pipe, the
    closing-element seating against the end thereof or against a seat
    surrounding or immediately within the end.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    299+,   for pivoted valves mounted externally of the valve body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 223+ for tire filling chucks and/or
    stems, subclasses 409+ for float controlled valves, especially subclasses
    442+ for terminal float arm operated valves of the reciprocating type,
    subclasses 469+ for pop type safety valves and subclass 562 and 603 for
    faucet attached flow elements.


CLS 251/148
TXT Subject matter under subclass 142 wherein the flow path includes a pipe
    coupling or union.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149+,   for a valved pipe joint wherein the valve is operated by the
    coupling act.

    149.9,  for a valve pipe joint wherein the valve, or its actuator, is
    interlocked with the coupling means.

    155+,   for valves combined with nozzles and spouts, and see the search
    notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 231 for couplings in inflatable article
    filling chucks and stems, subclasses 479+ for suction operated valves in
    governor attachments for carburetors, subclasses 515+ for direct response
    check and safety valves mounted in pipe couplings, especially drill pipe
    check valves, subclasses 614+ for separable, valved, flow path sections,
    and subclass 637.05 for separable, valved, flow path sections wherein the
    valves have separate correlated actuators.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 335, 336, 348+, and 351+ for a valved joint between a portable
    supply and a receiver, the valve being operated by the act of connecting or
    disconnecting them.


CLS 251/149
TXT Subject matter under subclass 142 wherein the closing element is carried by
    one flow path section, the joining or disconnecting of another flow path
    section with respect thereto serving to operate the closing-element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89.5,   for valve actuator blocking or disabling means including a flow
    path joint.

    339,    for valve actuating devices extending through the fluid inlet or
    outlet.

    340,    for valve actuators surrounding the flow conduit.

    341+,   for valve actuators comprising the valve casing or an extension
    thereof.

    349+,   for valve actuators comprising the inlet outlet for the valve
    casing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 223+ for valved inflation stems and/or
    filling chucks therefor, and subclass 614.05 for separable, valved, flow
    path sections wherein the joining or disconnection of the sections operates
    one of the valves.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 348+ for supply means carried receiver flow control opening
    means, and subclasses 351+ for receiver actuated supply discharge means.


CLS 251/149.1
TXT Subject matter under subclass 149 wherein the flow path sections are moved
    in such a manner as to have a linear component of motion with respect to
    each other, this motion of the sections serving to operate the
    closing-element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 614.03+ for separable valved, flow path
    sections, for valve in each section being operated by a linear component of
    coupling motion of the sections.


CLS 251/149.2
TXT Subject matter under subclass 149.1 wherein the closing-element is mounted
    for rotating or hinging motion.


CLS 251/149.3
TXT Subject matter under subclass 149.1 wherein the closing-element moves
    transversely to, or in the opposite direction of, the linear component of
    motion of the flow path sections.


CLS 251/149.4
TXT Subject matter under subclass 149.1 wherein the means for joining the flow
    path sections includes a screw thimble or equivalent structure, the act of
    turning the screw thimble in the making of the joint resulting in the
    linear component of motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 354 and 386+ for screw thimble
    type pipe joints.


CLS 251/149.5
TXT Subject matter under subclass 149.1 wherein the flow path sections are
    joined by the act of rotating one section with respect to the other, the
    rotation resulting in the linear component of motion.


CLS 251/149.6
TXT Subject matter under subclass 149.1 wherein the closing-element is spring
    biased and this spring opposes the linear component of motion.


CLS 251/149.7
TXT Subject matter under subclass 149.6 wherein no means, other than that which
    will release upon application of excessive forces, is included for holding
    the flow path sections against the spring bias.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 9 and 304 for contact only and
    for friction detent type pipe joints respectively.


CLS 251/149.8
TXT Subject matter under subclass 142 wherein the closing-element and flow path
    are relatively movable, the closing-element being operated as the result of
    imparting motion to the flow path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149+,   for a separable, valved, flow path wherein the valve is operated by
    the act of coupling the flow path sections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 355.18+ for a supported, valved hose
    wherein movement of the hose regulates the valve, subclass 515 for drill
    pipe check valves which may be rendered inoperative by manipulation of the
    conduit and subclass 616 for distribution systems comprising articulated or
    swinging flow conduits which operate a valve, and see the search notes
    thereto.

    166,    Wells, subclass 334.1 and the subclasses there noted for well
    devices with valves actuated by movement of the conduit carrying the valve,
    and see subclass 316 for the line between Classes 166 and 251.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 526+ for movable material discharge guides
    having various valve means associated therewith.


CLS 251/149.9
TXT Subject matter under subclass 142 wherein the closing-element is carried by
    one flow path section and another flow path section is detachably joined
    thereto, operation of the closing-element to a particular position being a
    prerequisite to attaching or detaching the joined sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89.5,   for a valve in one flow path section, a second flow path section
    detachably connected to the first section and means associated with the
    connecting means for blocking or disabling the valve actuator.


CLS 251/150
TXT Subject matter under subclass 148 wherein the pipe coupling allows
    adjustable positioning of the valve and coupled conduits.


CLS 251/151
TXT Subject matter under subclass 148 wherein the pipe coupling may be
    assembled with the conduits without rotation of said conduits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, appropriate subclasses, especially
    subclass 304 for a friction detent coupling, and subclasses 305+ for a
    coupling having holding means comprising an essential catch, for pipe
    joints and couplings, per se.


CLS 251/152
TXT Devices under subclass 148 in which the valve seat and a pipe coupling
    element are a unitary subassembly.


CLS 251/153
TXT Subject matter under subclass 142 wherein the outlet or inlet is extended
    away from the valve or is provided with a means for deflecting the fluid
    stream.

    (1)     Note.  In order to come within the purview of this or the indented
    subclasses the particular feature of the outlet or the inlet must be
    definitely claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118+,   for valved flow paths combined with material guides or restrictors
    other than nozzle or outlet shapes and see the search notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 299 for valved hydrant outlets and
    subclasses 590+ for distribution systems comprising a tank with internally
    extending flow guides.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 86.1+ for tank filling attachments.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 519-540 for dispenser outlet guides combined
    with valves, subclasses 547 and 564 for dispensers with interior material
    guides, and subclasses 566+ for dispenser nozzles, spouts and pouring
    devices.


CLS 251/154
TXT Subject matter under subclass 153 wherein a surface is provided at an
    angle, i.e., not parallel to the outlet stream and against which the outlet
    stream is impinged.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 431 for a float surrounding an inlet pipe
    and acting as a spreader for the flow, subclass 437 for external hood or
    deflector surrounding a float-controlled inlet and subclasses 872+ for
    deflectors at junctions in connection with flow control means for plural
    passages.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 46.5 for pipes and tubular
    conduits with discharge deflectors.

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, appropriate subclasses,
    for conveyor type chutes.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 566+ for dispensing nozzles, spouts and
    pouring devices.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 380+ and
    subclasses 498-524 for spray devices combined with solid surfaces against
    which the fluid stream is impinged.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclasses 157+ for material dischargers
    for pneumatic conveyors.


CLS 251/155
TXT Subject matter under subclass 153 wherein the outlet is a terminal element,
    i.e., a nozzle or spout, either for inlet or outlet purposes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 872+ for deflectors including spouts at
    junctions, in connection with flow control means for plural passages in
    distribution systems, subclasses 615+ for articulated and swinging
    conduits, including nozzles and spouts, comprised in distribution systems
    and subclass 801 for nozzles and spouts, per se, and see the search notes
    thereto.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 526+ for movable spouts for dispensers and
    subclasses 566+ for dispensing nozzles, spouts and pouring devices, and see
    section 19 of the class definition of Class 222.


CLS 251/156
TXT Devices under subclass 155 wherein the actuator is related to the outlet in
    such a manner that the valve may be actuated by a receiver which is
    presented to the nozzle to receive the discharge from the nozzle.


CLS 251/157
TXT Devices under the class definition which have means other than that which
    actuates or biases to valve open or closed position, to increase the
    contact pressure between valve and seat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for fluid actuated plural operations including means to increase
    the head and seat contact pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 246.2 for this means combined with means
    for liquid sealing at the valve interface.


CLS 251/158
TXT Devices under subclass 157 having means to also positively return the valve
    or seat from its extra seat or head contacting condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 246.18 and 246.19 for means for reducing
    the pressure in combination with liquid sealing at the valve interface.


CLS 251/159
TXT Devices under subclass 158 in which the seat is pressed against the valve
    head.


CLS 251/160
TXT Subject matter under subclass 158 wherein the valve member is of the rotary
    type, e.g., plug or disk.


CLS 251/161
TXT Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein the means to increase the seating
    pressure is operated by means independent of the means actuating the valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 637+ for a plurality of valves in a
    distribution system provided with individual actuator mechanisms.


CLS 251/162
TXT Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein the means to increase and/or to
    reduce the seating pressure comprises cam or wedge means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203+,   for other gate valves provided with cam or wedge means that
    increase the seating pressure only.


CLS 251/163
TXT Subject matter under subclass 162 having the cam or wedge means within the
    valve housing.


CLS 251/164
TXT Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein the means to increase and reduce
    the seating pressure comprises screw means.


CLS 251/165
TXT Subject matter under subclass 164 wherein the actuator does not reciprocate
    with actuation.


CLS 251/166
TXT Subject matter under subclass 165 wherein a clutch or slip coupling is
    provided between the actuator and the valve to permit the valve to be
    relieved of the additional seating pressure before actuation or to increase
    the seating pressure after actuation.


CLS 251/167
TXT Devices under subclass 158 the valve being bifaced with pressing means for
    both faces.


CLS 251/168
TXT Devices under subclass 167 comprising threaded means between the valve face
    elements and their carrier.


CLS 251/169
TXT Devices under subclass 167 wherein the means comprises toggle mechanism.


CLS 251/170
TXT Devices under subclass 157 having means to press or urge a seat against a
    valve head.


CLS 251/171
TXT Subject matter under subclass 170 comprising compressible packing
    constituting a valve seat which is compressed by a packing gland-like
    element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 637+ for a static contact seal for other than an
    internal combustion engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable having a
    particular associated mounting or retaining means.


CLS 251/172
TXT Devices under subclass 170 applied by fluid pressure.


CLS 251/173
TXT Devices under subclass 172 in which the valve is of the butterfly type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305+,   for other butterfly valves.


CLS 251/174
TXT Devices under subclass 170 the seat being spring pressed.


CLS 251/175
TXT Devices under subclass 157 in which the means comprises fluid pressure.


CLS 251/176
TXT Subject matter under subclass 157 including a spring to press the head to
    the seat.


CLS 251/177
TXT Devices under subclass 176 the valve being of the pivoted type.


CLS 251/178
TXT Devices under subclass 177 the valve head having two seating faces which
    seat on oppositely disposed seats in a single flow line.


CLS 251/179
TXT Devices under subclass 177 in which the valve is mounted externally of the
    valve body.


CLS 251/180
TXT Subject matter under subclass 176 wherein the valve is of the rotary type.


CLS 251/181
TXT Subject matter under subclass 180 wherein the valve is a rotary plug.


CLS 251/182
TXT Subject matter under subclass 181 wherein the spring expands separable
    sections which comprise the valve head.


CLS 251/183
TXT Subject matter under subclass 181 wherein the spring is enclosed by the
    valve housing or by an auxiliary spring housing.


CLS 251/184
TXT Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein the spring is between the plug
    and the actuating means or at that end of the plug having the actuator.


CLS 251/185
TXT Subject matter under subclass 180 wherein the pressing means comprises a
    spring exposed to the line flow.


CLS 251/186
TXT Devices under subclass 176 of the piston type.


CLS 251/187
TXT Devices under subclass 157 comprising a different actuating means for
    valving and pressing motion, or different functions of the same actuator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161,    for independent actuation of both pressure increase and pressure
    reduction.


CLS 251/188
TXT Subject matter under subclass 187 wherein the valve is of the rotary type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161,    for similar independent actuators in rotary valves but which also
    provided for positive reduction of the seating pressure, and see the search
    notes to subclass 161.


CLS 251/189
TXT Subject matter under subclass 187 comprising piston type valves provided
    with expansible packing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 637+ for a static contact seal for other than an
    internal combustion engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable having a
    particular associated mounting or retaining means.


CLS 251/190
TXT Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the valve is of the piston type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 538 for line condition change responsive
    piston valves, and subclasses 625.37+ for piston valves where the flow is
    divided and recombined.


CLS 251/191
TXT Subject matter under subclass 190 wherein the piston rings or the packing
    upon closing of the valve are expanded.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 637+ for a static contact seal for other than an
    internal combustion engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable having a
    particular associated mounting or retaining means.


CLS 251/192
TXT Subject matter under subclass 157 comprising rotary valves.


CLS 251/193
TXT Devices under subclass 157 applied to a gate valve to move its face element
    in a direction lateral to that of movement of a valve element carrier
    toward the valve seat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177+,   for pivoted gates with spring means to increase head and seat
    contact pressure.


CLS 251/194
TXT Devices under subclass 193 comprising a screw actuator so associated with
    the valve faces and the means to press them to their seats that it alone
    causes relative movement of them.


CLS 251/195
TXT Devices under subclass 193 for valve being bifaced with pressing means for
    both faces.


CLS 251/196
TXT Devices under subclass 195 the valve head having also a flow passage the
    boundary of which is expanded when the valve is in open position.


CLS 251/197
TXT Devices under subclass 195 which are carried by an expander which continues
    its movement after the face elements have been stopped by contact with the
    valve body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204,    for similar structures in single-faced gates.


CLS 251/198
TXT Devices under subclass 197 including also a second expanding surface which
    comes into play as the valve approaches or reaches the limit of its closing
    movement.

    (1)     Note.  This second expanding surface is usually either a part of a
    carried expander as in subclass 200 or is fixed to the valve casing as in
    subclass 202.


CLS 251/199
TXT Devices under subclass 197 in which the valve face movement is stopped by
    direct contact with the valve casing at a position other than the valve
    seat.


CLS 251/200
TXT Devices under subclass 195 in which an expander element is brought into
    operation by contact with the valve body before the face elements have
    reached their furthermost closing positions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198,    for carried expanders combined with expanders which move after the
    faces are stopped.


CLS 251/201
TXT Devices under subclass 200 in which the expander pivots on contacting the
    valve casing.


CLS 251/202
TXT Devices under subclass 195 in which the valve faces are moved into contact
    with an expanding surface which is relatively fixed to the valve casing.


CLS 251/203
TXT Subject matter under subclass 193 wherein the means to press the valve to
    its seat includes a wedge or cam.


CLS 251/204
TXT Subject matter under subclass 203 wherein the wedge or cam moves with
    respect to both the head and seat.

    (1)     Note.  For mere adjustment of the cam or wedge with respect to the
    seat, see subclass 203.


CLS 251/205
TXT Devices under the class definition which include flow controllers provided
    with means for micro-adjustment of the flow selectively between minimum and
    maximum extremes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    for selective controllers in series, one of which is a valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 625.3 for valves which vary the flow
    through plural paths simultaneously.


CLS 251/206
TXT Devices under subclass 205 in which the means for varying the flow includes
    a plurality of passages through the valve head each being of a different
    size from the others.


CLS 251/207
TXT Devices under subclass 206 in which the valve is of the plug type.


CLS 251/208
TXT Devices under subclass 205 in which the flow controller is a rotary valve.


CLS 251/209
TXT Devices under subclass 208 in which the valve is of the plug type.


CLS 251/210
TXT Devices under the class definition in which a single flow line has a
    plurality of serially associated flow controlling positions which are
    sequentially closed or opened by a valve unit.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein as such are anti-scoring means wherein one
    valve seat or head is protected from wire drawing by the control of the
    flow by a second valve until the first valve is fully opened or closed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118+,   for anti-scoring means where the flow is controlled by a restrictor
    until the valve is fully opened or closed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 625.39 for similar structures which also
    include dividing and recombining of the flow and subclasses 627.5 and 628+
    for sequential actuation of plural valves.


CLS 251/211
TXT Valve units under the class definition comprising a single flow path
    provided with a pair of serially arranged seat members with which plural
    seat-engaging elements of a single valve head alternately cooperate.


CLS 251/212
TXT Devices under the class definition constructed of a plurality of relatively
    movable flow obstructing elements, which collectively close a single port.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.1,    for plural annular segments con-structed to close about a rod or
    pipe.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 229+ for iris diaphragms for
    pre-photocell light control.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    227+ for light control by means of movable opaque elements.


CLS 251/213
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein a valve is actuated by
    mechanical movement means, i.e., means comprising two or more fixed and
    movable parts so combined that the motion of one compels or completely
    controls or constrains motion of the other according to a law of operation
    inherent in and depending on the nature of the combination.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for mechanical movements between a fluid pressure actuator and a
    valve.

    66+,    for biased trip valves and see the search notes thereto.

    74,     for mechanical movements to actuate a biased trip mechanism.

    75,     for snap actuated mechanisms for valve actuation.

    76,     for valve actuators comprising impact devices.

    77+,    for valve actuators in which lost motion is inherent.

    294,    for flexible actuators, as Bowden wires and chains.

    295,    for pedal actuators for valves.

    336+,   for biased valves.

    340,    341+ and 349+, for actuators which are a part of the flow line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses, for
    mechanical movements, per se.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 434+ for float arm operated valves,
    subclass 513 for plural mechanically interconnected safety or check valves
    and subclass 625+ for cyclic and sequential actuators for valves, which may
    include a mechanical movement.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 505+ for relatively movable actuators for
    dispenser valves.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclass 123, for a fluid spring device of the
    diaphragm type, useful in valve actuation.


CLS 251/214
TXT Devices under subclass 213 wherein the valve stem and/or actuator is
    particularly associated with means to pack or seal it to prevent leakage of
    fluid between the inside and outside of the valve body (e.g., as where the
    actuating screw threads are enveloped by the packing).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 500+ for a dynamic, circumferential, contact seal for
    other than a piston.


CLS 251/215
TXT Subject matter under subclass 213 wherein the mechanical movement produces
    plural motions of the valves or valve components which motions are
    concurrent or consecutive.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a mechanical movement which produces plural
    concurrent motions of a valve is one wherein the valve element is mounted
    on a screw device.  Actuation of the screw both rotates and reciprocates
    the valve element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for plural movements of a fluid pressure operated valve.

    84+,    for valve heads movably connected to the stem or support so that
    they can accommodate themselves to the seat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 90.28+, for poppet valve
    operating mechanism which provides for nonvalving movement of the valve.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 330+ for nonvalving motion of a valve or
    valve seat, subclass 873 for movable deflector-spouts, in a lateral port of
    a fluid flow line, having plural motions and subclass 616.3 for plural
    motion valves which are actuated by a swinging flow conduit.


CLS 251/216
TXT Devices under subclass 215 in which the thread element of at least one part
    of the screw is structurally a part of the valve controlled passage so that
    it is contacted by the fluid in the passage.


CLS 251/217
TXT Devices under subclass 215 wherein the valve head is mounted on the valve
    stem between the screw threads and the handle or other actuator.


CLS 251/218
TXT Devices under subclass 215 in which the coacting mechanical movement
    elements are completely enclosed within the valve body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    214,    for packed or sealed valve stems wherein some special relationship
    exists between the elements of the valve and the sealing means.

    274+,   for similar structure having valve heads which have a single motion.


CLS 251/219
TXT Devices under subclass 218 in which the actuator is connected to a screw
    element of the valve by threadless, longitudinally splined, or slip
    coupling means.


CLS 251/220
TXT Devices under subclass 219 in which the coupling socket is formed in the
    screw element.


CLS 251/221
TXT Devices under subclass 218 in which one of cooperating thread elements is
    formed within or upon a sleeve-like element which is detachable or
    removable from the valve body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 243.5 for actuators of this type having
    special provision for grinding the valve on its seat.


CLS 251/222
TXT Devices under subclass 221 in which the sleeve is removably mounted in the
    bonnet.


CLS 251/223
TXT Devices under subclass 221 in which the bonnet is threaded and thus becomes
    the sleeve.


CLS 251/224
TXT Devices under subclass 221 in which the sleeve is mounted by an integral
    flange extending between adjacent body sections, usually the bonnet and the
    body.


CLS 251/225
TXT Device under subclass 215 in which one of the cooperating thread elements
    is formed within or upon a sleeve-like element which is detachable or
    removable from the valve body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221,    for removable sleeves encased in the valve casing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 243.5 for actuators of this type having
    special provision for grinding the valve on its seat.


CLS 251/226
TXT Devices under subclass 215 in which means are provided to bias the valve to
    open or closed position.


CLS 251/227
TXT Devices under subclass 226 in which the biasing means is a spring.


CLS 251/228
TXT Devices under subclass 213 in which a reciprocating stem is connected to or
    associated with a pivoted valve whereby reciprocation of the stem operates
    the valve.


CLS 251/229
TXT Subject matter under subclass 213 wherein two or more motions involving
    different mechanical movements cause operation of the valve.

    (1)     Note.  The plural dissimilar mechanical movements may comprise a
    single actuating means, or a plurality of independent or interconnected
    actuating means.

    (2)     Note.  The use of a flexible member, such as a cable, chain or
    rope, attached to a valve operating mechanical movement is not considered
    to comprise two mechanical movements for classification herein.  Such
    mechanisms are classified in the appropriate following mechanical movement
    subclasses and cross-referenced as required in subclass 294.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    294,    for devices in which a flexible member, such as a cable, chain or
    rope is attached to an arm which is connected directly to the valve or
    valve stem.  See (2) Note.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 446 for float arm actuated valves having
    an interposed cam, gear or screw mechanical movement.


CLS 251/230
TXT Subject matter under subclass 213 wherein the valve actuation means
    includes an intermittent grip device of the pawl and ratchet type to
    convert a motion of an operating member to a one-way motion of the valve in
    the direction desired.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 111+ for mechanical
    movements of the intermittent grip type.


CLS 251/231
TXT Subject matter under subclass 213 wherein the mechanical movement actuator
    includes an elongated rigid means pivoted at one point to a support and
    having the actuating power and the valve connection at two other points.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses, for
    mechanical movement actuators including a lever.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 434+ for float arm operated valves,
    especially subclass 445 for float arm operated valves having a toggle or
    second lever connected to the valve.


CLS 251/232
TXT Apparatus under subclass 231 comprising a plurality of serially related
    levers generally with pivot pin connections to each other and to the valve.


CLS 251/233
TXT Subject matter under subclass 231 wherein the lever is so arranged that its
    effective length varies as the lever swings through its actuating range, to
    vary the relation between effective force and the resistance of the
    actuated valve at various stages of its movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237+,   for levers having sliding contact wherein there is no appreciable
    mechanical advantage obtained by the sliding contact.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 531 for valves having direct response to
    condition change in which a reciprocating valve has a variable lever arm
    biasing means.


CLS 251/234
TXT Subject matter under subclass 231 wherein means are provided for adjusting
    the fulcrum of the lever or the length of the lever with relation to the
    fulcrum and/or valve, the adjustment being made during non-operative
    periods and not being affected by the valve actuating operation.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition of Class 137, section 5, for search
    notes on manual valve actuation and adjustment of valve actuating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 426 for float operative valves with level
    adjusting or selecting means.


CLS 251/235
TXT Apparatus under subclass 231 wherein there is included a swivel connection
    in the lever mechanism.


CLS 251/236
TXT Apparatus under subclass 231 having the valve biased either to open or to
    closed position.


CLS 251/237
TXT Valves under subclass 236 wherein the three points are in a common plane
    and there is an unrestrained sliding connection between the valve and the
    elongated rigid means; the sliding contact herein affords no appreciable
    mechanical advantage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233,    for devices having leverage variable during operation.


CLS 251/238
TXT Valves under subclass 237 wherein the valve is spring biased.


CLS 251/239
TXT Valves under subclass 238 wherein the spring is co-axial with the valve
    stem.


CLS 251/240
TXT Valves under subclass 239 wherein the spring reacts with a stop (e.g., a
    collar) on the valve stem and the valve is pulled to its seat.


CLS 251/241
TXT Valves under subclass 239 wherein the spring reacts with the guide for the
    valve stem.


CLS 251/242
TXT Apparatus under subclass 236 wherein the bias is provided by spring means.


CLS 251/243
TXT Apparatus under subclass 242 wherein the spring co-acts with or through the
    lever to provide the bias to the valve.


CLS 251/244
TXT Apparatus under subclass 242 wherein the spring is co-axial with the valve
    stem.


CLS 251/245
TXT Apparatus under subclass 244 wherein the spring abuts a stop (e.g., a
    collar) on the valve stem and thereby the valve head is pulled to its seat.


CLS 251/246
TXT Apparatus under subclass 244 wherein the spring abuts the guide for the
    valve stem and thereby the valve head is pushed to its seat.


CLS 251/247
TXT Apparatus under subclass 236 wherein the bias is provided by gravity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    338,    for other weight biased valves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 519+ and 532+ for direct response valves
    which are weight biased.


CLS 251/248
TXT Subject matter under subclass 213 wherein the mechanical movement actuator
    includes (1) relatively movable toothed members, round, linear or
    irregular, which transmit motion by meshing of the teeth during travel of
    the members, and (2) friction gearing, in which the members lack teeth, and
    force is transmitted by pressing one moving surface against the other,
    including those having one endless flexible member or belt.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 640+ for gearing, per se.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 446 for float arm actuated valves having
    an interposed gear.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, for planetary
    gearing, per se.


CLS 251/249
TXT Subject matter under subclass 248 wherein the gearing provides for
    interrupted or intermittent motion, caused by gear having irregular or
    discontinuously spaced teeth or indentations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 435, 436 and 437 for
    mutilated and Geneva gearing, per se.


CLS 251/249.5
TXT Subject matter under subclass 248 wherein the gearing includes a rotary
    ember having coaxial, helical thread means on its outer surface meshing
    with gear means.


CLS 251/250
TXT Subject matter under subclass 248 wherein the gearing includes a straight
    bar with teeth on one face.


CLS 251/250.5
TXT Subject matter under subclass 248 wherein the gearing includes meshing
    segments or  sectors.


CLS 251/251
TXT Subject matter under subclass 213 wherein the mechanical movement actuator
    comprises an eccentrically mounted rotating or swinging member, the varying
    radii of which produce varying positions of the valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213+,   for movements consisting of a rotatable element provided with a
    helical rib or groove and another element co-acting therewith through a pin
    or the like, engaging said groove or rib.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses under
    mechanical movements, for cam type movements and subclasses 567+ for cams,
    per se.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 446 for float arm operated valves in which
    a cam is interposed in the connection between the float arm and the valve.


CLS 251/252
TXT Devices under subclass 251 comprising a helical rib or surface the
    longitudinal axis of which is co-axial with or parallel to the axis along
    which the valve reciprocates.


CLS 251/253
TXT Devices under subclass 252 in which the valve has one position which it
    will maintain under the influence of a spring or weight which comprises a
    biasing means.


CLS 251/254
TXT Devices under subclass 253 having plural cam surfaces arranged for
    actuation by selective rotation in opposite angular directions.


CLS 251/255
TXT Devices under subclass 254 in which the external means includes a handle
    which is rotatable but does not reciprocate.


CLS 251/256
TXT Subject matter under subclass 253 wherein the cam means is housed by the
    valve body or bonnet.


CLS 251/257
TXT Devices under subclass 251 in which the cam elements are encased within the
    valve body structure with a seal or packing externally of the elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 628+ for a static contact seal for other than an
    internal combustion engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable.


CLS 251/258
TXT Devices under subclass 257 in which the cam element has symmetrically
    arranged cam surfaces which permit actuation of the valve by rotation of an
    actuating stem in either of two directions.


CLS 251/259
TXT Devices under subclass 257 in which the cam is a finger like element which
    extends from a rotating shaft at right angles to its axis.

    (1)     Note.  The patents in this subclass differ from those in subclasses
    237+ in that in the former the operating handle and the cam element are
    longitudinally spaced on the shaft, while in the latter the operating
    handle, the cam element and the pivot all operate in the same plane.


CLS 251/260
TXT Subject matter under subclass 257 wherein the cam comprises a rock shaft
    which has an off-set rod-like portion that has an axis perpendicular to the
    axis of the valve head.


CLS 251/261
TXT Subject matter under subclass 257 wherein the cam comprises a rock shaft
    which has an off-set rod-like portion that has an axis perpendicular to the
    axis of the valve head, the off-set portion being connected to the rock
    shaft by two arms (i.e., U-shaped).


CLS 251/262
TXT Devices under subclass 251 in which the valve has one position which it
    will maintain under the influence of a spring or weight which comprises a
    biasing means.


CLS 251/263
TXT Devices under subclass 262 in which the biasing means is a spring.


CLS 251/264
TXT Subject matter under subclass 213 wherein the mechanical movement comprises
    means having a continuous helical rib which is operable to reciprocate the
    movable valve member through connecting means but which does not impart the
    rotary motion of the screw to the valve member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82+,    for screw actuated valves wherein the actuator is nonpositively
    connected to the valve head so that there is manual control in both closed
    and open position.

    84+,    for valve heads movably connected to the stem for accommodation to
    the valve seat.

    215+,   for screw type actuators in which the rotary movement of the screw
    is transmitted to the movable valve member.


CLS 251/265
TXT Devices under subclass 264 having plural sets of threads which co-act to
    accelerate the motion of the valve head.


CLS 251/266
TXT Devices under subclass 264 in which the actuation initiating portion of the
    screw has only rotary motion.


CLS 251/267
TXT Devices under subclass 266 which are internally threaded.


CLS 251/268
TXT Subject matter under subclass 267 wherein the actuator has a cup-shaped end
    with internal threads therein and the cup-shaped end encloses the end of
    the valve stem.


CLS 251/269
TXT Subject matter under subclass 268 wherein the actuator is mounted in a
    bushing which is separable from the valve bonnet and/or body.


CLS 251/270
TXT Devices under subclass 266 in which the internally threaded valve actuating
    portion is restrained against rotation by co-action with guide structure
    which is removable from the body structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221+,   for removable guides associated with plural motion valves.


CLS 251/271
TXT Subject matter under subclass 270 wherein the actuator is resiliently
    mounted.


CLS 251/272
TXT Devices under subclass 266 in which the valve is biased in one direction of
    movement.


CLS 251/273
TXT Devices under subclass 264 having its thread element mounted in a recess or
    a ring for cooperation with an external thread on the valve body.


CLS 251/274
TXT Devices under subclass 264 in which the screw elements are completely
    enclosed within the valve body.


CLS 251/275
TXT Devices under subclass 274 which are biased to open or closed position.


CLS 251/276
TXT Subject matter under subclass 275 wherein the biasing means is a spring.


CLS 251/277
TXT Devices under subclass 264 wherein the valve is biased to open or closed
    position.


CLS 251/278
TXT Devices under subclass 277 in which there is biasing means comprising a
    spring.


CLS 251/279
TXT Subject matter under subclass 213 wherein the motion between the operator
    and valve is transmitted through a system of rods or bars jointed together
    and more or less constrained to transmit motion in a particular manner by
    having a rod or rods fixed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 445 for float arm operated valves having
    toggles or plural levers included in the actuating means.


CLS 251/280
TXT Apparatus under subclass 279 including toggle mechanism.


CLS 251/281
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the valve is so related
    to the fluid controlled that the pressure bias imparted by the line
    pressure is balanced by opposing surfaces related to the valve, so that the
    effect of the line pressure tending to open or close the valve is cancelled
    out at least in part and a lesser external force is necessary to actuate
    the valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305+,   for butterfly valves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 196 for float controlled discriminating
    outlets for liquid having a pressure balanced valve, subclasses 219+ for
    Larner-Johnson type valves, which have an inherent balance in many types,
    subclass 289 for hydrants provided with balanced valves, subclass 450 for
    float arm operated balanced valves, subclasses 494+, for line condition
    responsive valves having a separate connected reactor surface, subclasses
    599+ for plural valving surfaces many of which are inherently relatively
    balanced, subclasses 625.28+ for valves balanced by dividing the flow into
    branches which co-act with opposing surfaces, subclasses 628+, especially
    subclasses 630.19+ for balanced spool type valves having heads with
    relative movement with respect to each other and subclasses 629+ for valves
    which are balanced by admitting fluid to the low pressure side before
    opening force is applied to the valve, and see the search notes to subclass
    629.


CLS 251/282
TXT Valves under subclass 281 wherein the valve has a linear motion to and from
    flow obstructing position.


CLS 251/283
TXT Valves under subclass 281 in which the valve unit rotates.


CLS 251/284
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein means is provided with
    which the valve or valve actuator comes into contact to arrest its motion,
    the means being in the nature of an abutment or stop.

    (1)     Note.  The mounting and actuation means of the valve must be such
    that the motion controlled could be continued at least to some extent in
    the absence of the stop.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for adjustable opening limit means for a valve having a choked
    pressure type servo-motor actuator.

    60,     for adjustable stops for fluid pressure actuated valves.

    89+,    for means for blocking or holding the actuator at some desired
    point or points, this means preventing motion in either direction, and see
    the search notes thereto.

    129.12  for limit control means for electrically actuated valves.


CLS 251/285
TXT Devices under subclass 284 in which the position of the stop may be varied.


CLS 251/286
TXT Devices under subclass 284 associated with a rotary valve.


CLS 251/287
TXT Devices under subclass 286 in which one of the stop elements is on the head
    or is an integral part thereof.


CLS 251/288
TXT Devices under subclass 286 in which one of the stop elements is on the
    actuator or is an integral part thereof.


CLS 251/289
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the valve is provided
    with means so that it may be actuated from any of a plurality of positions,
    the plural possibilities existing at the same time.

    (1)     Note.  An example of such an arrangement is one wherein a valve
    under the floor of a railroad car is arranged with a long actuator so that
    it may be actuated from either side of the car.

    (2)     Note.  See the class definition of Class 137, section 4, for search
    notes on plural actuators in this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66+,    for trip actuated valves.

    235,    for levers with swiveled mountings which permit actuation from
    plural positions.

    290,    for devices in which the actuator mounting may be shifted with
    reference to the valve so that it is accessible from different positions to
    perform the same operation, only one position being available at any given
    adjustment.

    293,    wherein an extension is attached to the valve handle, and wherein
    the valve may be actuated by the handle, as well as by the extension.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 65+ for biased trip controlled valves,
    in which the trip actuator and the manual or other reset means are actuated
    from different positions.


CLS 251/290
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the valve or its actuator
    is provided with means such that either may have a plurality of neutral
    positions and such plural neutral positions are subject to selection.

    (1)     Note.  The reason for such arrangements usually is so that the
    valve or its actuator may be mounted in different positions, as required by
    the location or the convenience of the operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    289,    for plural actuators or actuators accessible from plural positions,
    and see the notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 269+ for convertible devices involving
    choice between positions but requiring disassembly for making the change.


CLS 251/291
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the valve is provided
    with actuating means which is normally detachable or disengageable from the
    valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128,    for detachable valve actuating means having additional fluid
    sealing means which is brought into position to prevent leakage upon
    detachment of the actuator.

    293,    for valve actuators comprising a handle and an extension therefor,
    the valve being actable by either the handle or the extension.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 320+ for devices for opening a valve in
    a container under pressure, the device comprising a separable fluid conduit
    or tap and valve actuating means carried thereby, subclasses 365+ for valve
    wells with means to center the casing on the valve, this being done to
    facilitate connection of a removable actuator, and subclass 382.5 for
    detachable actuators having a key-like connection through a shielding
    casing with a valve or valve stem.


CLS 251/292
TXT Devices under subclass 291 wherein an actuator may be reciprocated along
    its axis to engage or disengage with a rotatable valve.  The actuator is
    normally biased out of engagement with the valve whereby rotation of the
    actuator will not rotate the valve.


CLS 251/293
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein an additional actuating
    means is attached to the usual valve operating means whereby the valve may
    be actuated from a remote point, or wherein means are provided in
    connection with the usual valve operating means to adapt it for the
    attachment of an extension.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41      and 57, for remote control of fluid pressure operated valves, and
    see the search notes to these subclasses.

    229,    for valve actuating means including two or more valve operators
    having dissimilar mechanical movements.

    291+,   for valves having detachable actuators, the part associated with
    the valve not being actuable manually when the separable part is removed,
    and see the search notes thereto.

    294,    for flexible actuators for valves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 272+ for hydrants, in which the
    below-ground valve requires an extended actuating means and subclasses 343+
    and principally subclasses 363+ for valves associated with static
    constructional installation which frequently involve extension operators.


CLS 251/294
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the valve actuator is
    made of a material or the parts thereof are connected in such a manner as
    to permit ready flexing, bending or bowing.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of flexible actuators are Bowden wires, chains,
    ropes, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    293,    for other extension means for valve actuators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 500.5+ for flexible
    control means, per se.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 45 for flexibly connected indicator and
    dispenser element.


CLS 251/295
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the actuator for the
    valve is a pedal actuator.

    (1)     Note.  In order that the actuator be considered a pedal actuator,
    some significant feature which makes the actuator peculiarly designed to be
    operated by the foot or leg should be set forth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 280 and 308 for
    pedal operated water closet and spittoon valves.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 512+ for foot operated
    control lever and linkage systems and subclasses 560+ for pedals, per se.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 354 for fluid handling devices having a
    part mounted on the floor of a motor vehicle.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 179 for dispensers with pedal control of the
    discharge means.


CLS 251/296
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the actuator has more
    than one character or direction of motion, as rotating and reciprocating,
    horizontal and vertical, which motions are performed in sequence in the
    same valve actuating operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213+,   for valves with mechanical movement actuators, especially
    subclasses 215+ for plural motions of a valve having a mechanical movement
    actuator, e.g., screw actuated valves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 636+ for plural valves actuated by
    different motions of the same actuator.


CLS 251/297
TXT Devices under the class definition with frictional means to resist movement
    of the actuator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89+,    for means for blocking or disabling an actuator.


CLS 251/298
TXT Devices under the class definition in which the valve swings around the
    means by which it is mounted on the valve seat or casing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177+,   for pivoted valves with means to increase head and seat contact
    pressure.

    228,    for pivoted valves with reciprocating actuators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 448 for float arm actuated pivoted valves,
    subclasses 520 and 521 for biased open, direct response valves, subclasses
    527+ for other direct response pivoted valves and subclasses 625.44+ for
    multiway pivoted valves.


CLS 251/299
TXT Devices under subclass 298 in which the valve is mounted externally of the
    valve body and controls flow through the inlet or outlet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 614.01 for separable, valved, flow path
    sections wherein the closing-members seat against the same faces as those
    which abut when the sections are joined, the closing-members usually being
    in the nature of pivoted, terminal valves.


CLS 251/300
TXT Devices under subclass 299 wherein the valve moves across the end of the
    inlet or outlet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    349+,   for valves in which the actuator is the inlet or outlet and the
    flow controller is a terminal gate.


CLS 251/301
TXT Devices under subclass 298 wherein the valve moves transversely of the flow
    passage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212,    for iris diaphragm type valves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 625.45 for multiway pivoted gate valves.


CLS 251/302
TXT Devices under subclass 301 wherein the valve head has two seating faces
    which seat simultaneously on oppositely disposed seats in a single flow
    line.


CLS 251/303
TXT Devices under subclass 298 in which the valve has one position which it
    will maintain under the influence of a constant force which comprises a
    biasing means, and force must be applied to the valve in order to have it
    take a different position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 520, 521 and 527.8 for direct response
    pivoted valves.


CLS 251/304
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising a valve head which
    only rotates about its axis and has a flow passage within it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149.2,  for rotary valves wherein the rotation is the result of a linear
    motion of one flow path section with respect to another in the act of
    joining the sections.

    160+,   180+, 188, and 192, for rotary valves  having means to increase the
    head and seat contact pressure.

    207     through 209, for rotary valves with graduated ports.

    283,    for balanced rotary valves.

    286+,   for rotary valves with limit stops.

    292,    for rotary valves with detachable actuators.

    345,    for rotary valves actuated by the    valve casing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 56 for rotating valves with rotating speed
    governors, subclass 250 for rotary valves with liquid seals, subclass 311
    for rotary regenerative reversing valves, subclass 447 for float arm
    actuated rotary valves, subclass 616.7 for swing spout actuated rotary
    valves, subclasses 625.15+, 625.21+, 625.34, 625.41, and 625.46+ for
    multiway rotary valve units, and subclass 630.21 for rotary, concentric,
    sequentially actuated valves.


CLS 251/305
TXT Devices under subclass 304 wherein the pivot is centrally located in the
    valve member, providing oppositely directed radial wings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173,    for valves of this type having fluid pressure means to press the
    seat to the valve.


CLS 251/306
TXT Devices under subclass 305 providing a sealing material or element carried
    by the valve head, by the valve seat or by both.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 628+ for a static contact seal for other than an
    internal combustion engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable.


CLS 251/307
TXT Devices under subclass 306 in which the packing is adjustable to facilitate
    its original installation or to provide take-up for wear.


CLS 251/308
TXT Devices under subclass 305 providing the means for attaching the valve
    stem, or pivot, to the valve head.


CLS 251/309
TXT Subject matter under subclass 304 wherein the valve rotates about its own
    axis, has a flow passage through it and at least the inlet or outlet of
    that passage is transverse to the axis of rotation and is formed in a seat
    contacting portion.


CLS 251/310
TXT Devices under subclass 309 in which there is a passage which extends both
    radially and longitudinally through the valve head.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 625.24 for stop and waste valve units
    having axially and radially extending passages in the plug.


CLS 251/311
TXT Devices under subclass 310 in which the valve head has at least two
    radially extending passages, one an inlet and one an outlet, connected by a
    longitudinally extending passage.


CLS 251/312
TXT Subject matter under subclass 309 wherein the means for holding the head in
    the body is on the same side of the head as the valve actuator.


CLS 251/313
TXT Devices under subclass 304 in which means are provided to bias the valve to
    open or closed position.


CLS 251/314
TXT Seat or interface seal:
    Subject matter under subclass 304 comprising a valving element which
    cooperates with a seat or a seal interposed between the seat and the
    valving element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 628+ for a static contact seal for other than an
    internal combustion engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable.


CLS 251/315.01
TXT Ball valve:

    Rotary valve under subclass 304 comprising a housing having a flow passage
    therethrough and a valve seat; with a spherical head that contacts the seat
    and can be rotated about an axis passing generally through its geometrical
    center by an actuating means.

    (1)     Note.  Patents to be classified in the subclasses ``Ball valve'' to
    "With removable trunnion cover'' of this Class 251 subclasses 315.01-315.09
    and ``Ball construction'' of this Class 251 subclass 315.16 are properly
    classified when placed in the appropriate subclasses ``Housing
    construction'' of this Class 251 subclasses 315.1-315.15. For example,
    claims to a ceramic housing assembled around the valve head would be
    classified in this Class 251 subclass 315.04 for the original reference and
    cross-references of this Class 251 subclass 315.13.


CLS 251/315.02
TXT Having a particular hardness (i.e., durometric property):

    Subject matter under subclass 315.01 which relates to the durability of the
    ball valve.


CLS 251/315.03
TXT Of specific material:

    Ball valve under subclass 315.01 fabricated from a particular composition.

    (1)     Note.  Mere recitation of a material without particular
    significance attributed to the valve would not be classified in this
    subclass.


CLS 251/315.04
TXT Ceramic (e.g., glass or fired clay):

    Material under subclass 315.03 which is hard, brittle, heat-and corrosion
    resistant, and shaped by firing a nonmetallic mineral at high temperatures.


CLS 251/315.05
TXT Nonmetallic:

    Material under subclass 315.03 which is not made of an element conductive
    to heat and  electricity (e.g., synthetic resin).


CLS 251/315.06
TXT Having a swinging actuator:

    Ball valve under subclass 315.01 in which the spherical head is rotated
    about the axis by an actuating means attached thereto, with the actuating
    means extending from the spherical head generally perpendicular to the axis
    of rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    298+,   for a pivoted valve that swings around the means by which it is
    mounted on the valve seat or casing.


CLS 251/315.07
TXT Eccentric seating:

    Ball valve under subclass 315.01 whose spherical head or seat is
    specifically off center from the axis about which it rotates.


CLS 251/315.08
TXT Including trunnion opposite axially extending actuating means:

    Ball valve under subclass 315.01 wherein the spherical head has a driving
    stem along the axis about which it rotates and the driving stem is
    diametrically opposed to the actuating means so as to interfit with a
    journal means in the housing.


CLS 251/315.09
TXT With removable trunnion cover:

    Device under subclass 315.08 having a detachable plate to protect the
    trunnion or to permit access (i.e., retainer plate).


CLS 251/315.1
TXT Housing construction:

    Ball valve under subclass 315.01 relating to the assembly of a body
    structure which completely surrounds the spherical head and defines the
    flow passage therethrough.


CLS 251/315.11
TXT Head removable perpendicular to flow passage:

    Housing under subclass 315.1 which has a component that can be disassembled
    to allow the withdrawal of the spherical head laterally with respect to the
    flow passage of the housing.


CLS 251/315.12
TXT At the actuator side (i.e., top entry):

    Housing under subclass 315.11 which has a side component that is removable
    adjacent the actuating means.


CLS 251/315.13
TXT Assembled around the head:

    Housing under subclass 315.1 which is assembled by engaging an inlet
    component and outlet component to create a unitary housing adjacent and
    surrounding the spherical head.


CLS 251/315.14
TXT Head removable along one side of flow passage:

    Housing under subclass 315.1 which has a component that is disassembled
    parallel to the flow passage and adjacent the spherical head to allow the
    withdrawal of the spherical head.


CLS 251/315.15
TXT Having inseparable head:

    Housing under subclass 315.1 wherein the body structure is unitary so that
    the spherical head cannot be removed without damaging the valve structure
    (i.e., housing permanently formed about the head by bending, welding,
    molding, etc.).


CLS 251/315.16
TXT Ball construction:

    Ball valve under subclass 315.01 which relates to the structural design of
    the spherical valve head.


CLS 251/316
TXT Subject matter under subclass 314 comprising seat or sealing elements so
    constructed or arranged in the casing as to be readily replaced by strictly
    manual operations.


CLS 251/317
TXT Deformable material:
    Seat or interface seal under subclass 314 made from material that is
    resilient and thus can be distorted upon sealing engagement (e.g., plastic,
    rubber, foam, etc.).


CLS 251/317.01
TXT Carried by head:

    Seat or interface seal under subclass 315.18 particularly adapted to be
    attached to the spherical head of the ball valve.


CLS 251/318
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the valve has a linear
    motion to and from flow obstructing position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62+,    for piston type fluid actuated or retarded valve.

    129.16, the armature is the valve closure.

    215+    and 264+, for screw actuated valves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 288 and 307 for piston type valves in
    hydrants, subclass 433 for a rectilinearly moving float rigid with a valve,
    subclasses 442+ for valve and float arm assembly mounted on pipe terminal,
    the valve reciprocating axially of the pipe and subclasses 528+ for
    reciprocating check and safety valves, subclasses 625.25+ for reciprocating
    supply and exhaust multiway valve units.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 559+ for reciprocating dispenser valves.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 628+ for a static contact seal for other than an
    internal combustion engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable.


CLS 251/319
TXT Valves under subclass 318 actuated by a reciprocating means (e.g., push and
    pull button or rod).


CLS 251/320
TXT Valves under subclass 319 biased or urged to one position.


CLS 251/321
TXT Valves under subclass 320 having a spring biased valve.


CLS 251/322
TXT Valves under subclass 321 wherein a stop (e.g., a collar) for the spring is
    provided on the valve stem.


CLS 251/323
TXT Valves under subclass 321 wherein the spring abuts a guide for the valve
    stem.


CLS 251/324
TXT Subject matter under subclass 318 wherein the valve head is a cylinder
    fitted for slidable reciprocation within or telescopically on a cylindrical
    seat, which seat provides a guiding and sealing surface for the head
    substantially throughout the girth thereof so that the head is guided and
    sealed in all of its positions, there being a port or ports in the
    cylindrical wall of either the head or seat which will be opened or closed
    upon reciprocation of the piston.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157+,   especially subclasses 190+ for piston valves with means to increase
    the head and seat contact pressure to reduce the wear upon operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 288 for piston type valves of the hydrant
    type, subclasses 538+ for line condition change responsive piston valves
    and subclasses 625.37+ for piston valves where the flow is divided and
    recombined.


CLS 251/325
TXT Subject matter under subclass 324 wherein the piston provides an internal
    flow passage for the line fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 625.38+ for pistons providing an
    internal flow passage and including the feature of dividing and recombining
    the flow.


CLS 251/326
TXT Devices under subclass 318 wherein the valve moves transversely of the flow
    passage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157+,   especially subclasses 167+, 175 and 193+ for gate valves having
    means to increase the contact pressure between the head and seat.

    300     and 301+, for pivoted gates.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 625.45 for multiway pivoted gate units and
    subclass 630.12 for sequentially opening gate valves.


CLS 251/327
TXT Devices under subclass 326 wherein the valve head has two seating faces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302,    for pivoted bifaced valves.


CLS 251/328
TXT Devices under subclass 326 comprising the substantially stationary valve
    element with which the head cooperates to produce the valving action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359+,   for valve seats of general utility.


CLS 251/329
TXT Devices under subclass 326 relating to the body structure.


CLS 251/330
TXT Devices under subclass 318 in which leakage about the valve operating stem
    is prevented by the engagement of a valve head-like structure carried
    either by the stem or by the valve head which engages a seat-like structure
    carried by the valve body when the main valve is opened.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    214,    for valves having mechanical movement actuators particularly packed.


CLS 251/331
TXT Devices under subclass 318 wherein the reciprocating member that opens and
    closes or controls flow of fluid through the valve consists of a flat or
    cup shaped member of relatively thin deformable material secured at its
    periphery to the valve body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61.2+,  for an expansible chamber valve actuator having a flexible wall
    working member which functions as a valve element to control the flow of
    fluid through the valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 843+ for resilient material, direct
    response valves.


CLS 251/332
TXT Devices under subclass 318 in which either the reciprocating head element
    or the cooperating seat is provided with an additional sealing gasket so
    that when the valve is closed, a nonresilient seal (generally metal to
    metal) is formed as well as a seal between the gasket and the nonresilient
    structure with which it engages.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 516.29 for this structure in direct
    response valves.


CLS 251/333
TXT Devices under subclass 318 in which both the head and seat surfaces which
    constitute the valve interface are so constructed that they mutually
    cooperate to produce the valving action.

    (1)     Note.  Patents have been placed here in which the peculiar
    construction of the head requires a particular configuration of the
    cooperating seat, and vice versa, (i.e., the head would not successfully
    operate with a conventional seat, e.g., a conical seat, a planar seat,
    etc.) or in which the mode of operation of the valve depends upon a
    specifically contoured head or seat to produce some unexpected result.


CLS 251/334
TXT Devices under subclass 333 in which one of the valve elements is metallic
    and is deformed against its cooperating element within its elastic limit to
    provide a seal.


CLS 251/335.1
TXT HERMETIC FLEXIBLE WALL SEAL FOR ACTUATOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein sealing means comprising
    a diaphragm or flexible sheet material member is interposed between the
    actuator and the valve to close the flow passage, the sealing means
    yielding with the movement of the actuator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128,    for valve devices having a detachable actuator and means for
    preventing leakage when the actuator is detached.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 18+ for flexible seals
    pierced by a rod, which seal is fixed to its support and to the rod.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 536 for line condition responsive valves
    having spring means for biasing the valve to closed position and means for
    protecting the spring from the pressure fluid.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 634+ for a static contact seal for other than an
    internal combustion engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable that is a flexible
    sleeve, boot, or diaphragm.


CLS 251/335.2
TXT Diaphragm:

    Subject matter under subclass 335.1 wherein the sealing means comprises the
    diaphragm.


CLS 251/335.3
TXT Bellows:

    Subject matter under subclass 335.1 wherein the sealing means comprises and
    annular pleated expansible and contractible member.


CLS 251/336
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the valve has one
    position which it will maintain under the influence of a spring or weight
    which comprises a biasing means, and force must be applied to the valve in
    order to have it take a different position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66+,    for biased trip valves, and see the search notes thereto.

    75,     for valves having means to produce a snap action, which usually
    include biasing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 455+ for line condition responsive
    valves, most of which involve biasing means, and see especially subclasses
    524 and 530 for adjustable biasing means and 511+ for direct response
    condition responsive valves, i.e., check and safety valves.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 511+ for resilient biasing means for
    dispenser outlet elements.


CLS 251/337
TXT Subject matter under subclass 336 including valve springs and means for
    mounting the spring on the valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 90.65+, for poppet valve
    operating mechanism which includes valve springs and the seats and
    retainers for the springs.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclass 1 for spring devices of general utility.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, subclasses 427+ for nuts; and subclasses 531+ for
    washers of general utility.


CLS 251/338
TXT Subject matter under subclass 336 wherein the biasing means is a member of
    sufficient mass to maintain the valve in the desired position by gravity
    response.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for weight biased trip actuated valve.

    76,     for impact type actuators for valves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 38+ for control of change of position or
    inertia of the system, especially subclasses 45+ for control by pendulum or
    swinging member, subclasses 403+ for liquid level responsive devices
    responding to weight of accumulated fluid, and see the search notes to
    subclasses 403 and 408, subclasses 419 and 421 for weight actuators in
    quick acting float control valves and subclasses 519+ and 532+ for weight
    biased valves directly responding to line condition change.


CLS 251/339
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the valve actuator
    extends through a fluid inlet or outlet to reach and operate the valve.

    (1)     Note.  The actuator may emerge from the outlet at the point where
    the material is freed from confinement, or it may emerge from the main
    container within the flow line and project through the wall thereof at a
    point exterior to the main container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 322 and 501 for actuators for discharge
    assistants and movable outlet elements respectively, which actuators
    project through the discharge guide.


CLS 251/340
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the valve actuator
    comprises an annular member which is mounted around and guided by a pipe
    which forms a flow passage leading to or from the valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4+,     for tube compressors which include means surrounding the pipe to
    control the flow by deformation of the pipe.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 507 for an annular, outlet surrounding
    actuator for a dispenser outlet element.


CLS 251/341
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the valve actuator
    comprises a part of the flow confining means which is exposed to the fluid
    at a region ahead of the cut-off point, or an extension of such part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149+,   for valves operated by coupling or conduit motion, and see the
    search notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclass 334.1 and the subclasses there noted, for well
    devices comprising valves operated by motion of the conduit supporting the
    valve, and see subclass 316 for the line between Classes 166 and 251.


CLS 251/342
TXT Devices under subclass 341 in which the wall of the valve casing is jointed
    or flexible to permit a bending movement which actuates the valve.


CLS 251/343
TXT Devices under subclass 341 in which a movable sleeve constitutes the valve
    head.


CLS 251/344
TXT Devices under subclass 343 in which a flow passage in the sleeve connects
    spaced ports in the valve body, and movement of the sleeve controls
    communication between the ports.


CLS 251/345
TXT Devices under subclass 343 in which the motion of the sleeve is rotary.


CLS 251/346
TXT Devices under subclass 341 in which movement of the valve casing produces
    plural motions of the valve which may be simultaneous or sequential.


CLS 251/347
TXT Devices under subclass 341 in which movement of the valve casing imparts to
    the valve a reciprocating motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    346,    for similar valves which have plural motions one of which may be
    reciprocation.


CLS 251/348
TXT Devices under subclass 341 in which the valve has one position which it
    will maintain under the influence of a spring or weight which comprises a
    biasing means, and movement of the casing causes the valve to assume a
    different position.


CLS 251/349
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the valve actuator
    comprises a flow confining member which comprises the inlet or outlet for
    material passing through the valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153+,   for valves combined with particular inlet and outlet means, and see
    the search notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 286+ for hydrants in which the outlet
    riser is the actuator for the valve, and subclass 616+ for distribution
    systems wherein the valve actuator is an articulated or swinging flow
    conduit or nozzle, and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 251/350
TXT Devices under subclass 349 in which the inlet or outlet has a removable tip.


CLS 251/351
TXT Devices under subclass 349 in which the movement of the inlet or outlet
    produces plural motions of the valve or valve components which motions may
    be concurrent or consecutive.


CLS 251/352
TXT Devices under subclass 349 in which the movement of the inlet or outlet
    imparts a rotary motion to the valve or valve components.


CLS 251/353
TXT Devices under subclass 349 in which the outlet is a nozzle or spout which
    is capable of actuating the valve by rectilinear motion only.


CLS 251/354
TXT Devices under subclass 349 in which there is an impositive connection
    between the actuator and the valve.


CLS 251/355
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein means are provided for
    lubricating the actuator or valve parts other than those exposed to the
    fluid flow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 90.33+, for poppet valve
    operating mechanism which provides for lubrication.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 237+ for systems in which the
    lubrication is put into the fluid stream, especially subclasses 246+ for
    liquid sealing and/or lubrication at the valve interface, subclass 298 for
    actuator lubricating means in hydrants and subclasses 330+ for nonvalving
    motions of valves, sometimes intended to prevent sticking, and see the
    search notes thereto.

    184,    Lubrication, appropriate subclasses, for installed lubricating
    means generally.


CLS 251/356
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising means for variably
    restricting or entirely cutting off the flow of fluid through a passage.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass relates to valves, per
    se, which were included in this class by analogy to the various special
    types specifically provided for.  See the search notes below for a listing
    of such special types.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 67+ for fusible, soluble and other
    destructible and deformable closures, subclasses 154+ especially subclasses
    173+, 177+ and 197+ for discriminating valves for gas and liquid,
    subclasses 219+ for Larner-Johnson valves, subclasses 251+ for liquid
    valves, subclasses 309+ for reversing valves for regenerative furnaces,
    subclasses 386+, especially subclasses 409+ for float operated valves,
    subclasses 455+ for line condition change responsive valves, e.g., pop and
    other safety valves, check valves and safety cut-offs.


CLS 251/357
TXT Subject matter under subclass 356 in which the valve is provided with a
    readily removable or replaceable sealing element.


CLS 251/358
TXT Subject matter under subclass 356 comprising valves made of resilient
    material which are either internally or externally stiffened or otherwise
    reinforced by a diverse material.


CLS 251/359
TXT Subject matter under subclass 356 comprising the normally stationary
    valving element with which the head or movable element cooperates.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    328,    for gate valve seats.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 513.3+ for seats of direct response
    valves with leak passages.


CLS 251/360
TXT Subject matter under subclass 359 which are structurally modified to
    provide for ready removal from the valve body or the partition therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 234.5 and 454.2+ for removable valve
    head and seats units, subclasses 329.51+ for removable seats duplicated and
    reversible and subclass 533.15 for a removable seat associated with direct
    response reciprocating ball valve.


CLS 251/361
TXT Devices under subclass 360 in which the valve seat is retained between
    separable sections of a valve body or casing.


CLS 251/362
TXT Subject matter under subclass 360 in which the retaining means comprises
    structure which biases the seat against the partition member by either
    tensional or compressional engagement with the valve body or casing at a
    point remote from the partition.


CLS 251/363
TXT Subject matter under subclass 360 in which a separate element disposed
    between the seat and the seat-supporting body structure is provided to
    prevent leakage between the seat and said supporting structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 628+ for a static contact seal for other than an
    internal combustion engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable.


CLS 251/364
TXT Subject matter under subclass 359 provided with a sealing member of
    resilient material which engages the head and constitutes the sole valving
    surface of the seat.


CLS 251/365
TXT Subject matter under subclass 359 in which the seat is retained in position
    by deformation of the seat.


CLS 251/366
TXT Devices under subclass 356 relating to the valve body or casing.


CLS 251/367
TXT Devices under subclass 366 consisting of two or more separable parts and
    the means for securing them together.


CLS 251/368
TXT Devices under subclass 356 relating to the materials of which valve parts
    are made.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 375 for coatings or linings of particular
    materials.


CLS 251/369
TXT Devices under the class definition not herein-before provided.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 206, 215.1+, 223 for valves in smoking devices
    for tobacco users.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS

    THE DOCUMENTS IN THE FOLLOWING COLLECTIONS CONTAIN ONLY CROSS-REFERENCES
    WHICH HAVE BEEN PLACED WITHOUT REGARD TO THEIR ORIGINAL CLASSIFICATION OR
    TO THEIR CLAIMED SUBJECT MATTER AND THEREFORE ARE ONLY REPRESENTATIVE OF
    THE ART OR SUBJECT MATTER.  CONSEQUENTLY, A COMPLETE SEARCH FOR ART OR
    SUBJECT MATTER PROVIDED FOR HERE WOULD REQUIRE A REVIEW OF THE HIGHER
    PORTIONS OF THE CLASSIFICATION SCHEDULE.


CLS 251/900
TXT VALVES WITH O-RINGS

    Art collection under the class definition drawn to valves provided with
    O-rings.


CLS 251/901
TXT CURTAIN TYPE VALVES

    Art collection under the class definition drawn to curtain type valves.


CLS 251/902
TXT SPRINGS EMPLOYED AS VALVES

    Art collection under the class definition drawn to springs used as valves.


CLS 251/903
TXT NEEDLE VALVES

    Art collection under the class definition drawn to needle valves.


CLS 251/904
TXT SNAP FIT PLUG VALVES

    Art collection under the class definition drawn to snap fit plug valves.


CLS 251/905
TXT MOVABLE COIL ELECTRICAL ACTUATOR (E.G., VOICE  COIL):

    Valves with electrical actuators whose coil windings move when energized.


CLS 252/
TTL COMPOSITIONS

CLS 252/
TXT (1)     Compositions of matter, having or not having structure, physical
    form or heterogeneous arrangement of components and for which there is no
    provision elsewhere.

    (2)     Packages of such compositions, or other articles which include such
    compositions for which there is no provision elsewhere.

    (3)     Processes of making, or peculiar to making, such compositions and
    for which there is no provision elsewhere.

    (4)     Apparatus for use in or peculiar to such processes and for which
    there is no provision elsewhere.

    NOTES

    (1)     Note.  In this class each composition, the processes that are
    peculiar to making the same, and apparatus that is peculiar to such
    processes, are classified on the whole composition and its complete, or
    primary, function or quality, and such processes and apparatus are
    classified on or with the corresponding composition, unless otherwise
    indicated.

    (2)     Note.  Elements other than C and H and compounds which contain such
    other elements are not considered to be significant in this class when they
    originate in and form a part of petroleum, or fractions thereof, unless
    such elements or compounds are separately recited in the claims.

    (3)     Note.  The term "metal" as used in this class includes As, Sb, Bi,
    but not B, Si, Se, or Te.  The terms "carboxyl" and "carboxylic", as used
    in this class, refer to the radical - COO-.

    (4)     Note.  Compositions and processes of making them, which in each
    case is merely a chemical compound or element with which is incorporated an
    agent for inhibiting caking of granules of, corrosion by, chemical change
    of, the compound or element, and processes of merely so preserving the
    same, are classified in the classes where the compounds or elements are
    classifiable, respectively.  (See this class (252) subclass 380, note 1).

    (5)     Note.  Compositions which are disclosed as having a plurality of
    uses, properties or functions provided for in different main classes, and
    there are claims to each of several uses, properties or functions provided
    for in different main classes, are placed with the composition class coming
    first in the following order of superiority.

    Specific lines or relationships between classes, as set out in the
    definitions and notes of the classes involved are to be followed in the
    event of conflict within this list.



    504,    Plant Protecting and Regulating Compositions.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products.

    71,     Chemistry: Fertilizers.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof.

    508,    Solid Antifriction Devices, Materials Therefor, Lubricant and
    Separant Compositions for Moving Solid Surfaces, and Miscellaneous Mineral
    Oil Compositions.

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions.

    148,    Metal Treatment.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures.

    252,    Compositions, (special uses and functions) through subclass 88.2.

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions.

    252,    Compositions, (special uses and functions) through subclass 194.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor: Product or Process of
    Making.

    252,    Compositions (special uses or functions), subclass 478 and those
    following.

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product and
    Process.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 1.05 to 38.9.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 74-316.

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, (Alloys)

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Composition.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, (rest of class)

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers,

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, subclasses 709+.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products

    252,    Compositions (nonspecial uses or functions i.e., subclasses 302+,
    363.5, 372+, and 378)

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds (mixture subclasses).

    This superiority list is not intended as a complete list and will be
    expanded or added to as the relationship between other classes containing
    compositions and the above listed classes is determined.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers.  See the main class definition for the compositions
    classified therein.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, for dust cloths, mops or
    other cleaning devices which include detergents.

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, appropriate subclasses for a solid
    or gelled composition to be used either as a fuel or as a carbonaceous
    reductant in a metallurgical process, subclass 643 for a match scratcher
    composition or structure, subclasses 640, 641 or 642 for a composition
    which, when present with a burning solid fuel retards or removes wall
    deposits, improve the combustion properties of the fuel or colors the
    flames, respectively, and subclasses 300+ for liquid fuel.

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, for gaseous compositions for
    heating or illuminating by combustion.

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, for a
    composition for grinding, polishing, or abrading.

    60,     Power Plants, see class definition, search note to Class 252,
    Compositions, for the line.

    62,     Refrigeration, see class definition, search note to Class 252,
    Compositions, for the line.

    71,     Chemistry:  Fertilizers, for a plant fertilizing composition.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, for processes of obtaining free metals from metal compounds,
    ores, or mixtures, or preparing materials for such processes, or
    compositions for use in such processes, and for alloys and other
    compositions having a continuous phase of free metal, e.g., made from metal
    powder.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, for apparatus for making food
    compositions.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, for coating or plastic
    compositions and materials or ingredients used in the making of coating or
    plastic compositions which are not elsewhere classified.  See Note (2) B
    for coating or plastic classified in classes other than those in Class 106
    and for the line between Classes 106 and 252.

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes and non-coating apparatus for
    growing therein-defined single-crystal of all types of materials, including
    inorganic or organic.

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, for processes and apparatus for
    refining and manufacturing sugar, starch and carbohydrates and for the
    products produced.

    131,    Tobacco, for tobacco compositions and tobacco substitute
    compositions.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, for washing or cleaning
    processes, which include use of detergents, or apparatus therefor or for
    contacting liquids with solids. (See this class, subclasses 89+ and the
    notes thereto).

    148,    Metal Treatment, for soldering or other fluxing compositions,
    compositions for use in tempering or otherwise modifying solid metal.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, for explosive and
    thermic compositions where the latter are used to produce usable heat or
    flame and by-products resulting from the use of such compositions.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, Class 252
    provides for etching agents, per se, and for single crystal compositions
    within the class definitions, especially subclass 62.3 for barrier layer
    compositions.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, appropriate subclasses, for
    chemical processes of liberating cellulose and other fibers from fibrous
    materials, for processes of making paper by depositing fibers from a liquid
    suspension and for compositions employed in such processes.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 244.1+ for processes of treating or operating a
    well.  See the Notes and Search Class references in Class 166, subclass
    244.1 and Class 507, subclasses 100+.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, for fire extinguishing processes.

    184,    Lubrication, for lubricating devices and processes.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, appropriate subclasses, for
    a carbonizing process and subclasses 20, 21+ and 25 for special
    carbonaceous compositions used in thermolytic distillation.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for
    making or reactivating solid carbonaceous sorbents.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, appropriate subclasses for a
    distillation process not otherwise provided for.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, for processes involving
    electrolysis, producing chemical changes by use of electrical or wave
    energy, involving electrophoresis or electro-osmosis, or electrical
    separation or purification of liquids including emulsion breaking and
    resolving other colloid systems.  Compositions which are the result of a
    wave energy process are classified with the art use of said composition.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, for processes of cracking,
    distilling, purifying or otherwise treating mineral oils or tars or the
    products of such processes including lubricants, heat-exchange hydraulic
    and dielectric or electrical resistance compositions that are purely
    mineral oil or tar products, or mixtures thereof without any added
    specifically recited chemical compound or element.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses for
    separation processes and apparatus there provided for, and see the
    references to Class 210 in subclasses 61, 175, 179, 193, 319, 410, and 427
    of this class.

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, for etching processes.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, for processes or
    apparatus for dispersing liquid gases, especially subclasses 8, 9, 337+,
    and 398+.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for compositions containing a
    natural rubber and for an organic compound, or a composition of an organic
    compound and an agent for inhibiting caking of, corrosion by chemical
    decomposition of, or other chemical changes of, the carbon compound, or
    processes of so preserving such compounds.  (See (5) Note above).

    366,    Agitating, and the notes thereto for processes and apparatus for
    mixing materials by agitation.  Manipulative mixing processes for
    compounding a composition from a plurality of ingredients are properly
    classifiable in Class 366 only if the ingredients are not sufficiently
    identified to form a basis of classification in this class (252) or other
    appropriate composition classes.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    appropriate subclasses especially subclasses 156+ for the production and/or
    utilization of radioactive substances and compositions.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclass 49 for a piece of
    self-sustaining coating material having a shaped end for rubbing contact
    with a workpiece.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, appropriate subclasses, for
    (1) highway, pathway or walkway structure, per se; and (2) process and
    apparatus for making, installing, repairing or maintaining such
    structure-where such structure, process or apparatus is not otherwise
    classifiable as either (a) specifically provided for in other loci or (b)
    of such general utility as to be provided for on that bases (See III and IV
    under Class 404 Class Definition for known collections of such nature and
    the particular lines of demarcation).

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Composition, appropriate subclasses for alloys,
    intermetallic compounds and metallic compositions. See the Class 420
    definition section IV, A, for an elaboration of the line between Class 420
    and this class (252).

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 55 for litmus and other test papers
    and analogous devices; also appropriate subclasses for apparatus employing
    catalysis.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses for
    inorganic compounds and nonmetallic elements, including processes for their
    manufacture, and note especially subclasses 265+ for inorganic compounds
    and nonmetallic elements which include an additive whose sole function is
    to preserve the compound or element.  For a further statement of the lines
    between these classes see the notes in 423.

    424     and 514, Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions,
    appropriate subclasses for:  compositions (A) for preventing, alleviating,
    treating or curing abnormal and pathological conditions of the living body,
    for maintaining, increasing, decreasing limiting or destroying a
    physiologic body function, for diagnosing a physiological condition or
    state by an in vivo test, for controlling or protecting an environment or
    living body by attracting, disabling, inhibiting, killing, modifying,
    repelling, or retarding an animal or micro-organism, (B) for deodorizing,
    protecting, adorning, or grooming a body, (C) for fermentates and extracts
    for use in A or B and not elsewhere provided for, and (D) such compositions
    defined in terms of specific structure; methods of making the above
    compositions; methods of using the class defined compositions for purposes
    in A and B; and methods of using compounds, per se, for purposes in A and B.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    for food products, compositions and processes of treating same.

    427,    Coating Processes, for coating processes in general and see the
    class definition of Class 427 for the general line between Class 427 and
    the composition classes.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, main Class Definition,
    section VI, B, for the distinction between a composition and a stock
    material, and also subclasses 544+  for a stock material which is all metal
    or has adjacent metal components, particularly subclasses 546+ for
    composite stock having a particulate metal component.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, for processes of
    making chemical compounds which include fermentation or ferments or other
    compositions for use in such processes or processes of making them.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, for chemical
    testing compositions including test standards formerly classified in Class
    252, subclass 408.  The subclasses superior to subclass 408.1, which is the
    successor to subclass 408, remain superior to Class 436.

    504,    Plant Protecting and Regulating Compositions, for a plant
    stimulating or eradicating composition and especially subclasses 150+ for
    an algicidal composition.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 100+ for high temperature (Tc  30 K) superconducting materials,
    per se, or subclasses 300+ for processes of producing same.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, for synthetic resins, per se,
    and for resin containing compositions, the use or utility of which is not
    specifically provided for elsewhere.  (See (5) Note above). Class 520 is
    the residual class for solid resin containing subject matter.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclasses 1+ for a composition
    consisting of only hydrocarbons, at least one component of which is a
    nonmineral oil hydrocarbon, or a composition of a hydrocarbon with an agent
    for improving the general properties of such hydrocarbon.  See (5) Note,
    above.

    935,    Genetic Engineering:  Recombinant DNA Technology, Hybrid or Fused
    Cell Technology, and Related Manipulations of Nucleic Acids, which provides
    a search collection for processes of altering the genetic structure of
    micro-organisms; genes and methods of modifying genes and their expression;
    vectors and methods of modifying vectors; methods of introducing DNA into a
    cell; micro-organisms, per se, which have had their genetic sequence
    altered by recombinant DNA techniques or by cell fusion or by uptake of
    DNA; testing; separation techniques; apparatus; and methods of use of
    vectors or of the genetically engineered micro-organisms; methods of gene
    therapy or genetic modification of living organisms.


CLS 252/1
TXT Compositions under the class definition for which there is no provision
    elsewhere in this class.


CLS 252/2
TXT Compositions under the class definition specialized and designed for or
    peculiar to use in extinguishing fires or processes of making them.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    381+,   for compositions for forming protective coatings, layers, or zones
    for excluding air or other substances.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclass 96 for compositions for forming protective coatings,
    layers, or zones for protecting molten metal from oxidation.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, for fire extinguishing processes or apparatus.


CLS 252/3
TXT Compositions under subclass 2 which are, or contain, foams or gas phases or
    processes of making the same.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6+      and 7, for fire extinguishive compositions containing components
    for producing foams.

    8,      for gas-charged liquids or processes of making them for
    extinguishing fires.

    61,     for compositions for producing foams for froth flotation.

    307,    for foams in general or processes of making them.

    350,    for other compositions containing components for producing foams.


CLS 252/4
TXT Compositions under subclass 2 which contain components for generating gas
    by chemical reactions, substances peculiar thereto or processes which
    include such reactions.


CLS 252/5
TXT Compositions under subclass 4 which contain components for generating gas
    by combustion of such components, substances peculiar thereto, or processes
    which include such combustion.


CLS 252/6
TXT Compositions under subclass 4 which contain components for generating gas
    by chemical interreaction of such components, substances peculiar thereto,
    or processes which include such interaction.

    (1)     Note.  Claims which are drawn to compositions which are chemically
    decomposable by heat to form a fire extinguishive gas, but do not contain
    individually components which are adapted to chemically interreact to
    produce a gas are not classified in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for fire extinguishive foams.

    61,     for compositions for making foam for froth flotation.

    307,    for foams in general or processes of making them.

    350,    for compositions in general for producing foam and containing gas
    generating components.


CLS 252/6.5
TXT Compositions under subclass 6 which contain agents for stabilizing foams or
    other colloid systems and processes of making them.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      8.05, 61, 307, 350, and 351+, for other compositions containing
    foam stabilizing agents.


CLS 252/7
TXT Compositions under subclass 4 which contain carbonates, ammonium compounds,
    or other substances which are adapted to generate gas by heat-decomposition
    thereof, substances peculiar thereto or processes which include such
    heat-decomposition.


CLS 252/8
TXT Compositions under subclass 2 which contain volatile noninflammable liquids
    (other than water) or liquids charged with gases, the gases being dissolved
    or liquefied, or processes of making the same.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for fire extinguishive compositions which contain foams or gas
    phases.


CLS 252/8.05
TXT Compositions under subclass 2 which contain agents for stabilizing foams or
    other colloid systems, and processes of making them.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      6.5, 61, 307, 350, and 351+, for other compositions containing foam
    stabilizing agents.


CLS 252/8.57
TXT Compositions under the class definition for treating leather or fur not
    more specifically provided for elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  Patents which claim a composition falling within this
    subclass and also claim (a) processes involving no more than the mere
    application of a composition to leather or fur and/or (b) a leather or fur
    product characterized essentially by the application of the composition are
    classified herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8.61    through 8.91, for textile treating compositions.

    601+,   for compositions for fireproofing leather or hide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 404+ for leather or fur dyeing
    compositions, and subclasses 94.1+ for (1) tanning compositions, (2)
    compositions which chemically react with a hide, skin, or fur, and (3)
    compositions for treating untanned hides or skins and are not more
    specifically provided for elsewhere.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, for leather coating compositions.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, for a
    composition for destroying or repelling a pest and which may be used to
    coat or saturate leather or fur.

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, particularly subclass
    275 for cleaning compositions for leather or fur.


CLS 252/8.61
TXT DURABLE FINISHES FOR TEXTILE MATERIALS, OR PROCESSES OF PREPARING (E.G.,
    CREASE RESISTANT, MOISTURE ABSORBENT, ANTISTATIC, ETC., FINISHES):

    Compositions under the class definition specialized or designed for forming
    a lasting, nonfugitive finish on a textile substrate, such as fabric, yarn,
    or fiber, or processes of preparing the compositions.

    (1)     Note.  Formation of these durable finishes (e.g., permanent-press,
    etc.) usually requires an additional step, such as application of heat, in
    order to "set" the coating after application.

    (2)     Note.  Processes involving the mere use of a claimed composition
    are included in this and indented subclasses.  If no composition is claimed
    or significant process steps are involved in addition to such mere use, the
    patent is classifiable in other appropriate classes.

    (3)     Note.  As used herein, the term "textile materials" includes
    fabrics (woven, knitted, etc.), yarn, filaments, and fibers.

    (4)     Note.  Patents including claims to both a composition and a textile
    material treated with the composition are classified in the class providing
    for the treated material and cross-referenced to this or indented
    subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclass 112 for carroting compositions and subclasses
    125+ for mercerizing baths. See the search notes to the class definition of
    this class (252) and the reference to Class 8 therein for other textile
    treating compositions found in Class 8.

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclasses for processes of
    producing durable finishes on textile materials.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclasses 224+ and 357+, for textile materials carrying
    durable finishes.

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 515+ for
    nondurable antistatic compositions used in the course of a laundering
    operation or in a finishing step, such as rinsing or drying, accompanying
    laundering.


CLS 252/8.62
TXT Oil or water repellent or soil resistant or retardant:

    Compositions under subclass 8.61 adapted to form on the substrate treated
    therewith an oleophobic or hydrophobic finish, or one which prevents the
    adherence of soil, such as spilled food, to the substrate.


CLS 252/8.63
TXT Textile softening:

    Compositions under subclass 8.61 adapted to impart a soft feel or hand to
    the substrate treated therewith, other than laundry-use products.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 276+ for
    cleaning compositions for textile materials and subclasses 515+ for
    nondurable textile softening compositions used in the course of a
    laundering operation or in a finishing step, such as rinsing or drying,
    accompanying laundering.


CLS 252/8.81
TXT TEXTILE PROCESSING AID COMPOSITIONS, OR PROCESSES OF PREPARING (E.G.,
    LUBRICANTS OR ANTISTATIC AGENTS FOR FIBER, YARN, FABRIC, ETC.):

    Compositions under the class definition specialized and designed to
    facilitate the processing of textile materials, such as the conversion of
    fibers, filaments, yarns, or fabrics into the finished product (such as
    thread or yarn; knitted, woven, or nonwoven fabric; or garment, carpet,
    blanket, etc.) whereupon the finish may be removed by such means as washing
    or scouring.

    (1)     Note.  Such finishes are applied to staple fiber or
    continuous-filament yarns in order to reduce the tendency toward breakage
    of the individual fibers or filaments making up the yarn when subjected to
    mechanical processing, such as spinning, twisting, winding, texturizing by
    crimping or false twisting, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Processes involving the mere use of a claimed  composition
    are included in this and indented subclasses.  If no composition is claimed
    or significant process steps are involved in addition to such mere use, the
    patent is classifiable in other appropriate classes.

    (3)     Note.  Patents including claims to both a composition and a textile
    material treated with the composition are classified in the class providing
    for the treated material and cross-referenced to this or indented
    subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclasses, for processes of
    applying processing aid compositions to textile materials.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclasses 224+ and 357+, for textile materials carrying
    processing aid compositions.

    508,    Solid Antifriction Devices, Materials Therefor, Lubricant or
    Separant Compositions for Moving Solid Surfaces, and Miscellaneous Mineral
    Oil Compositions, for nontextile lubricant compositions


CLS 252/8.82
TXT For tire cord yarn, elastomeric filaments, or biologically innocuous or
    absorbable fibers (e.g., spandex, textiles used in food packaging,
    absorbable surgical sutures, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 8.81 specialized for use on tire-reinforcing
    yarn or cord; elastomeric filaments, such as spandex; or fibers exhibiting
    harmlessness to, or absorbability by, the tissues of a living organism.


CLS 252/8.83
TXT Sizing agents (e.g., for weaving yarn, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 8.81 specialized for maintaining the integrity
    of fibers or filaments making up a thread or yarn while it is being
    converted into a fabric, such as by knitting or weaving, or of threads or
    yarn making up a fabric which is being converted into a finished article by
    sewing or other means.


CLS 252/8.84
TXT For textile materials consisting wholly or in part of noncellulosic
    synthetic fibers (e.g., spin finish for nylon, polyester, acrylic, etc.,
    fibers; lubricants for blends thereof with diverse fibers, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 8.81 wherein the textile material includes or
    consists of polymeric fibers which are synthesized from starting materials
    other than cellulose or its derivatives and are sometimes referred to as
    man-made fibers.

    (1)     Note.  A spin finish, which is generally applied immediately after
    extrusion of the polymeric filament and prior to drawing, comprises a
    combination of a lubricant/antistatic agent system.  The finish facilitates
    subsequent processing of the filaments into yarn at very high speeds,
    involving the generation of electrostatic charges and friction, by
    preventing breakage of or damage to the filaments.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass are blends of two or more
    synthetic fibers and blends of a synthetic fiber with animal hair, silk, or
    cellulosic fiber.


CLS 252/8.85
TXT For textile materials consisting wholly or in part of animal hair fibers
    (e.g., wool, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 8.81 wherein the textile material includes or
    consists of fibers which are the hair or fur of an animal, such as vicuna.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are blends of two or more animal
    hair fibers and blends of an animal hair fiber with silk or cellulosic
    fiber.


CLS 252/8.86
TXT For textile materials consisting wholly or in part of silk or
    cellulose-based fibers (e.g., cotton; artificial silk, such as rayon,
    cellulose acetate, etc., or blends thereof; silk soaking compositions;
    etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 8.81 wherein the textile material includes or
    consists of silk fibers or fibers of cellulose or its derivatives.

    (1)     Note.  Fibers made of regenerated cellulose (e.g., rayon) or of
    cellulose esters or ethers, such as cellulose acetate, are sometimes
    referred to as semisynthetic fibers or artificial silk.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass are blends of any one or more
    fibers with any other fiber under the subclass definition, such as linen,
    jute, hemp, etc.).

    (3)     Note.  Many compositions in this subclass facilitate processing by
    softening (making more flexible) the above fibers or materials made
    therefrom.


CLS 252/8.91
TXT COMPOSITIONS FOR ENHANCING THE APPEARANCE OF CONSUMER TEXTILE GOODS (OTHER
    THAN CLEANING COMPOSITIONS OR AUXILIARY COMPOSITIONS FOR CLEANING), OR
    PROCESSES OF PREPARING (E.G., ANTISTATIC OR WRINKLE-REMOVING SPRAY FOR
    GARMENTS, ETC.):

    Compositions under the class definition specialized or designed for
    increasing the positive visual impact of textile goods being used by a
    consumer, such as by reducing static cling or eliminating wrinkling by
    relaxing the fibers of an article of apparel, or processes of preparing the
    compositions.

    (1)     Note.  Processes involving the mere use of a claimed composition
    are included in this and indented subclasses.  If no composition is claimed
    or significant process steps are involved in addition to such mere use, the
    patent is classifiable in other appropriate classes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 276+, for
    cleaning compositions for textile materials; subclasses 515+ for textile
    softening or antistatic compositions used in the course of a laundering
    operation or in a finishing step, such as rinsing or drying, accompanying
    laundering.


CLS 252/60
TXT Compositions under the class definition specialized and designed for, or
    peculiar to, use in physically separating from each other, by
    froth-flotation or difference in specific gravity or rate of subsidence,
    two or more components of a mixture which differ from each other at least
    physically, or processes of making them.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181.1+, for getter and gas or vapor generating compositions for electric
    lamps, electric space discharge devices and other evacuated or gas or vapor
    filled containers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, for processes or
    apparatus for using such compositions.


CLS 252/61
TXT Compositions under subclass 60 for use in separating components of mixtures
    by froth-flotations or in each case by selective or differential adherence
    of the composition, or agent containing the same, with respect to two or
    more of the components of the mixture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      6.5, 7, 8.05, 307, 350, and 351, for foams, foamable liquids, and
    foam stabilizing or producing agents.

    88,     for selective or differential particle-adherent compositions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 5, 45+,
    and 163+ for processes or apparatus employing such agents.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 703+ for processes of
    precipitation involving flotation, and subclasses 198.1+ particularly
    subclasses 220+ for separators having means to add a treating material.


CLS 252/62
TXT Compositions under the class definition specialized and designed for use as
    heat or sound insulating or deadening materials, substances peculiar to
    such compositions, or processes of making the same.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclasses 122, 601+ and 672+ for porous coating or plastic
    compositions.

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 284+ for a panel, web or sheet product with
    particular internal or external structure disclosed as being provided for
    the purpose of muffling sound.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet which may inherently possess sound deadening or heat insulating
    properties; note especially subclasses 131+ for such a product including
    apertures, subclasses 297+ for such a product including a component
    containing structurally defined fibers, subclasses 304.4+ for such a
    product including a component which is porous or cellular, subclasses 323+
    for such a product having a component containing structurally defined
    particles, subclasses 357+ for a mass or layer of a structurally defined or
    coated element (e.g., flake, particle, rod, strand or fiber); and subclass
    920 (a cross-reference art collection) for a product having heat insulating
    properties.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, subclasses 39 and 80+ for pore-forming
    ceramic compositions.


CLS 252/62.2
TXT Compositions under the class definition specialized and designed for use as
    an electrolyte for an electrolytic cell of the type which is used merely as
    an electrical circuit component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, for electrolytic processes and the electrolyte
    compositions used therein.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 500+ for
    electrolytic devices, e.g., capacitors, rectifiers, not elsewhere
    classifiable, the electrolytes for which generally are found in this
    subclass (62.2).

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product and
    Process, subclasses 188+ for battery electrolytes.


CLS 252/62.3
TXT Compositions under the class definition specialized and designed for use as
    one member of two members whose interface exhibits barrier layer properties.

    (1)     Note.  A barrier layer device is defined for the purpose of
    classification as an electrical component consisting of two conductors
    placed either in contact with each other or separated by an interface
    layer, to which contacts or terminals have been secured which component has
    a nonlinear resistance characteristic. The nonlinear resistance
    characteristic may be such that the device will pass current in one
    direction when the voltage is applied in one direction but will not pass
    any appreciable current when the voltage is applied in the other direction
    (e.g., rectifiers, electrolytic condensers), or will pass a proportionately
    different amount of current at different values of applied voltage. In the
    latter case, where the device passes a disapportionate amount of current,
    to be considered a barrier layer device the nonlinearity must arise as a
    result of the electrical action of the interface between the two conductors
    rather than from the characteristics of the conductors.  For example, an
    electrical component having a resistance material which varies its
    resistance due to inherent changes in temperature with change in applied
    voltage is not a barrier layer device. Among the types of devices which may
    have a barrier layer are rectifiers, condensers, transistors and lightning
    arresters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclass .5 for single metals including those containing a
    nonmetallic constituent, subclass 236 for a composition having a continuous
    phase of free metal made by consolidating metal particles and containing
    carbide, and subclass 245 for such composition having a transition metal
    base.

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes and non-coating apparatus for
    growing therein-defined single-crystal of all types of materials, including
    those which may be suitable as or to produce a barrier layer device.  Class
    118 generally provides for coating apparatus, including single-crystal
    (e.g., epitaxy) coating means.

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclasses 236+ for
    thermoelectric batteries having a particular composition and at least two
    elements of the battery, particularly subclasses 238 and 239 for
    semiconductive type.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 33+ for layered stock material made
    from compositions of this subclass and for superlattice compositions.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    for devices which operate based on a barrier region or layer.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 212+ for
    discharging or preventing accumulation of electric charge, and subclasses
    500+ for electrolytic devices such as electrolytic condensers and
    rectifiers.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, appropriate subclasses for single
    metals and alloys or metallic compositions and subclass 903 for a cross
    reference collection of alloys which are semiconductors.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 620 for metallic
    stock material having a semiconductor component.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, for processes of
    making semiconductor devices utilizing compositions of this subclass.


CLS 252/62.51
TXT Compositions under the class definition disclosed to be useful for magnetic
    purposes as well as compositions and processes for making same.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes processes of preparing magnetic
    compositions and the compositions resulting therefrom, as well as such
    processes followed by a magnetizing and/or broad molding step. See (6) Note
    in Class 29, Metal Working, subclass 602.1.  It also takes any combination
    of these steps with a heat treating operation except where the heat
    treatment modifies a magnetic property of a metallic component which is
    intentionally present in the composition, in which case the process is
    classified in Class 148.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes magnetic articles claimed in terms of
    the composition from which it is made, when said articles do not contain
    sufficient structural limitations to classify them elsewhere.

    (3)     Note.  In some instances it is difficult to tell whether a fused
    mixture of oxides (e.g., ferrites) is a compound or a composition.  If a
    claim of this type is restricted to atoms combined in definite, whole
    number ratios, the product is considered a compound.  However, a patent not
    so limited; e.g., if the ratios of the elements are variable or
    "impurities" are intentionally present, is considered to be drawn to a
    composition classifiable in this or indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 602.1+ and the classes and subclasses
    specified in the notes to the definition of those subclasses, see
    especially Note 4 to the definition of this subclass for miscellaneous
    methods for making magnets or cores for electromagnets from comminuted
    materials, including from mixtures of nonmetallic plastic materials and
    comminuted metals or magnetic nonmetals.



            Subclasses 602.1+ takes methods of manufacturing magnets from
    nonmetallic materials which recite some step in addition to one or more of
    the following:  making the composition, molding, heat treatment,
    magnetizing. Processes restricted to any or all of the four named
    operations are classified in this subclass of Class 252, unless the molding
    is recited significantly, in which case the process is classified in Class
    264, Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses, see the search note to Class 264 below.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, appropriate subclasses for loose metal powder compositions and
    consolidated compositions having a random mixture of ingredients and a
    continuous phase of free metal, even when claimed as magnetic and/or
    nominally claimed as a rod, wire, strand, etc., especially subclasses 255+
    for a composition of loose metal particles.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, for strands, filaments and
    compositions distinguished solely by being made of plastic compositions
    (e.g., mixtures of metal powders and a plastic or coating composition).
    Such compositions are classified for the most part, in Class 106 in the
    subclasses entitled "With filler, dye or pigment".  This and indented
    subclasses in Class 252 provide for all magnetic compositions which would
    otherwise be classified in Class 106.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclass 100 through 122 for processes for
    altering the magnetic properties of materials having at least one component
    which is a free metal or alloy, except as indicated in (2) Note under
    subclass 100, and subclasses 300+ for stock resulting from such processes.



            Dust cores made from a Class 252 composition, but containing an
    intentionally included metallic component, whose magnetic properties have
    been modified by heat treatment, are classified in one of the latter stock
    subclasses.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses for processes within the class definition, for
    working, shaping or molding of plastic materials which may be disclosed to
    be a magnetic composition.  See the class definitions of Class 264 for the
    general lines between that class (264) and the composition classes.  See
    also (1) Note above and the search note to Class 29, above.  In Class 264,
    see particularly subclasses 61, 104+ and 272.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 209+ for magnets and subclasses 296+ for magnet
    structure, per se.  See subclass 284 for magnetizing and demagnetizing
    apparatus.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 131+
    for magnetic records claimed in terms of significant structure.  Note that
    merely claiming the record as a wire, filament, rod, ribbon, strand or
    record, or no more structure than one or more coatings on a base is not
    significant structure under the definition of 360-131+.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, appropriate subclasses, especially
    subclasses 61+ for processes for making articles, which may be magnetic,
    from metal containing powders using pressure but no heat; and subclasses 1+
    for similar process involving use of heat.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, appropriate subclasses for a
    single elemental metal and for an alloy or metallic composition defined
    only as "magnetic", "magnetized" or "permanent magnet" or alloys or
    metallic composition claimed, per se, which are inherently magnetic.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, for magnetic inorganic compounds,
    per se.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 127+ for coating processes, per se,
    including a magnetic base or coating.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 544+ for stock
    material which is all metal or has adjacent metal components, even though
    claimed as being formed of magnetic material, particularly subclasses 548+
    for sintered composite metal stock, subclass 611 for stock material having
    its magnetic properties coordinated with its shape, subclasses 681+ for a
    metallic composite which has an iron-base component, and subclass 928 for
    metallic stock distinguished by magnetic properties.  See the main Class
    Definition of Class 428, section VI, B, for the distinction between a
    composition and a stock material.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, for compositions containing a
    synthetic resin or natural rubbers and comminuted metal.  See in particular
    Class 523, subclass 181 for a composition devoid of a magnetic material but
    which is designed to contain same.  This and indented subclasses in Class
    252 provide for all magnetic compositions which would otherwise be
    classified in Class 520.


CLS 252/62.52
TXT Compositions under subclass 62.51 intended for use in processes of testing
    articles for flaws, e.g., "Magnaflux," or for use in magnetic clutches.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 21.5 for clutches
    employing a medium having frictional characteristics which are augmented or
    altered in response to a magnetic field.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 216 for methods and
    apparatus for magnetic flaw detection.


CLS 252/62.53
TXT Compositions under subclass 62.51 which contain a resin, wax, gum, or
    bitumenous material or modified forms thereof.  The term gum includes,
    e.g., natural rubber and balatta.  Many of the patents in this subclass are
    drawn to particles of magnetic material in a resin wax or gum binder for
    use as magnetic coatings or to be molded into magnetic articles (e.g.,
    tapes).

    (1)     Note.  See the definition of subclass 62.51 above for search for
    related coating or molding materials in Classes 106, and 520.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes, e.g., cellulose ethers and esters,
    drying oils, shellac, varnish, gum tragacanth, and modified natural resins.


CLS 252/62.54
TXT Compositions under subclass 62.53 containing a synthetic resin or materials
    disclosed to be polymerizable or resinifiable to produce a synthetic resin.

    (1)     Note.  A synthetic resin for purposes of this subclass is a solid
    film forming or moldable polymeric material having physical properties akin
    to natural resins, the polymer chains of said synthetic resins having been
    prepared by the reaction of nonresinous compounds. This subclass also
    includes compositions containing nonresinous compounds which are recited as
    resinifiable to produce a synthetic resin as defined above and composition
    containing a catalyst to effect such resinification.

    (2)     Note.  Specifically excluded from this subclass are natural drying
    oils and the dried compositions therefrom and cellulose or its derivatives.


CLS 252/62.55
TXT Compositions under subclass 62.51 containing a free metal or an alloy
    thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Arsenic is considered to be a metal for purposes of this
    subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Intermetallic compounds are considered alloys under this
    subclass definition, e.g., CoPt, GdOs2.


CLS 252/62.56
TXT Compositions under subclass 62.51 which contain compounds of iron and
    oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  Most of the patents in this and indented subclasses are
    drawn to so called "ferrites," namely complex oxides of iron and other
    elements.  The term ferrite is used in the art both to denote definite
    compounds of iron with other metals and oxygen classifiable in Class 423,
    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, and to generically cover compositions of
    fused mixed oxides of varying composition classifiable in this class.  See
    also (3) Note under subclass 62.51 of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62.55,  for compositions containing both an iron-oxygen compound and a free
    metal.


CLS 252/62.57
TXT Compositions under subclass 62.56 containing scandium, yttrium, gallium or
    an element from the rare earth or actinide series in chemically combined
    form.

    (1)     Note.  Rare earth includes an element of the Lanthanum series,
    atomic numbers 57-71 inclusive.

    (2)     Note.  Actinides includes the elements of atomic numbers 89-103.


CLS 252/62.58
TXT Compositions under subclass 62.56 containing boron in any form or aluminum,
    thallium, or indium in chemically combined form.


CLS 252/62.59
TXT Compositions under subclass 62.56 containing silicon in any form or
    titanium, zirconium, hafnium, germanium or indium in chemically combined
    form.


CLS 252/62.6
TXT Composition under subclass 62.56 containing a group I metal in chemically
    combined form.  This subclass and its indent encompasses both subgroups IA
    and IB and specifically includes lithium (see subclass 62.61), sodium,
    potassium, rubidium, cesium, francium, copper, silver and gold.


CLS 252/62.61
TXT Compositions under subclass 62.6 wherein the group I metal is lithium.


CLS 252/62.62
TXT Compositions under subclass 62.56 containing a group II metal or lead in
    combined form.  Group II metal as used in this and indented subclasses
    encompasses subgroups IIA and IIB and specifically includes beryllium,
    magnesium, calcium, strontium, barium, radium, zinc, cadmium and mercury.


CLS 252/62.63
TXT Compositions under subclass 62.62 containing calcium, barium, strontium or
    lead.


CLS 252/62.64
TXT Compositions under subclass 62.62 containing magnesium.


CLS 252/62.9
TXT Compositions under the class definition specialized and designed for use as
    piezoelectric materials and processes of making said compositions.

    (1)     Note.  A piezoelectric material, for the purpose of this
    definition, is defined as a material which exhibits an electrostatic
    polarization when subjected to mechanical stress or which exhibits a
    mechanical stress, tending to produce a deflection when subjected to
    electric stress.

    (2)     Note.  Compositions, per se, are classified in this subclass when,
    by either disclosure or claim, the composition is piezoelectric.

    (3)     Note.  It is believed that some dielectrics, such as those used in
    electrets (the electrostatic analogue of the permanent magnet), which
    exhibit permanent polarization, may inherently have piezoelectric
    properties and dielectric compositions (subclasses 567, 570+) should
    therefore be considered as a field of search.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    567     and 570+, for miscellaneous dielectric compositions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry: Physical Processes, subclasses 295+ for processes of
    crystallizing inorganic polycrystalline chemical compounds; and Class 117,
    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes; Non-Coating
    Apparatus Therefor, for processes and non-coating apparatus for growing
    therein-defined single-crystal of all types of materials, including
    inorganic or organic.  The products of these processes, and the seed
    crystals used in the processes, are classified as chemical compounds.
    Processes of detwinning crystals are classified in the crystallizing
    subclasses.  Method of preventing decomposition of crystals by enclosing
    the crystals in an environment rich in the decomposition products so that
    the equilibrium tendency is against decomposition (as when an ammonium salt
    is surrounded with ammonia gas) are classified with the crystals.
    Inorganic piezoelectric chemicals, per se, when shaped to claimed
    configuration, where the configuration is disclosed as being significant to
    the piezoelectric property of the material (e.g., plate, etc.) are
    classified in Class 310, subclasses 311+.  Inorganic chemicals are
    classified in Class 423, Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, even though
    claimed as being piezoelectric, where the chemical is not claimed as being
    shaped with respect to the piezoelectric property and where it is
    uncombined with piezoelectric structure.

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 25.35 for methods of and apparatus for
    manufacturing piezoelectric devices.

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes and non-coating apparatus for
    growing thereindefined single-crystal of all types of materials, including
    inorganic or organic.  Class 118 generally provides for coating apparatus,
    including single-crystal (e.g., epitaxy) coating means.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    17 for treating piezoelectric materials with an etching composition.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, appropriate subclasses, for
    processes of crystallizing organic compounds, the process being classified
    with its product.  Note particularly subclass 707 for processes of
    crystallizing organic compounds limited to no specific type of compound.
    The products of these processes, and also the seed crystals used in the
    process, are classified as chemical compounds. Seed crystals combined with
    supports are classified as crystallizing apparatus in Class 23, subclass
    273. Organic piezoelectric chemicals, per se, when shaped to claimed
    configurations, where the configuration is disclosed as being significant
    to the piezoelectric property of the crystal (e.g., plate AT cut) are not
    classified in Class 260 but are classified in Class 310, Electrical
    Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 9.5.  Organic chemicals are
    classified in Class 260, even though claimed as being piezoelectric, where
    the chemical is not claimed as being shaped with respect to the
    piezoelectric property and where it is uncombined with piezoelectric
    structure.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 311+ (e.g.,
    357+) for piezoelectric compositions of particular shape where there is a
    disclosure that the shape is significant to the piezoelectric property.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 129+ where a chemical reaction means
    is provided and subclasses 245.1+ where a physical reaction means is
    provided.  Class 118 generally provides for coating apparatus. The products
    of these processes, and the seed crystals used in the processes, are
    classified as chemical compounds. Seed crystals combined with supports are
    classified as apparatus where appropriate; for example, Class 117,
    subclasses 200+ for non-coating single-crystal growing apparatus, Class
    118, subclasses 715+, 400+, or 500+ for coating apparatus, and Class 422,
    subclasses 129+ or 245.1+ for crystallizing apparatus not provided for
    elsewhere.  Apparatus for detwinning crystals are classified with the
    crystallizing apparatus as appropriate; for example, Class 117, subclasses
    200+ for non-coating apparatus which forms a therein-defined
    single-crystal. Inorganic piezoelectric chemicals, per se, when shaped to
    claimed configuration, where the configuration is disclosed as being
    significant to the piezoelectric property of the material (e.g., plate,
    etc.), are classified in Class 310, subclasses 311+.  Inorganic chemicals
    are classified in Class 423, Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, even though
    claimed as being piezoelectric, where the chemical is not claimed as being
    shaped with respect to the piezoelectric property and where it is
    uncombined with the piezoelectric structure.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, appropriate subclasses for ceramic
    compositions and ceramic dielectrics, such as those containing titanate
    compounds, glass, procelain, or steatite.  A disclosure of or claim to
    piezoelectric properties results in classification in Class 252, subclass
    62.9 without a cross-reference to Class 501.

    562,    Organic Compounds, subclass 580 for processes of crystallizing
    Rochelle salt.


CLS 252/67
TXT Compositions under the class definition specialized and designed for, or
    peculiar to, use in producing refrigeration, or heat or energy exchange, by
    operations that include vaporization, or expansion or compression, of a
    substance or of materials containing the same.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 104.11+ for a heat exchange device with
    an intermediate fluent receiving and discharging heat.  See reference to
    Class 252 under "SEARCH CLASS" in the class definition of Class 165 for the
    line between this class (252) and Class 165.


CLS 252/68
TXT Compositions under subclass 67 which contain agents for lubrication,
    inhibiting corrosion or chemical decomposition, indicating or inhibiting
    leakage, or an auxiliary substance for persisting as a gas, without
    liquefaction, solution, or absorption thereof in any significant amount.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    408,    for warning agents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclass 195 for charging a
    combustible gas with warning agents.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclass 33 for leak stopping
    composition.


CLS 252/69
TXT Compositions under subclass 67 which contain substances of relatively low
    volatility as solvents or absorbents for gases or for substances of
    relatively high volatility.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    410+,   for solid absorbents, per se, or  processes of making them.


CLS 252/70
TXT Compositions under the class definition specialized and designed for, or
    peculiar to, use in preventing frost, thawing ice, maintaining temperatures
    within narrow ranges, supplying or absorbing heat, or producing low
    temperatures, by changes in phases insubstances (e.g., solidification and
    liquefaction) or other changes in substances other than mere temperature
    change, but excluding combustion and irreversible chemical reactions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67+,    for compositions for refrigeration by vaporization or expansion, or
    processes of making such compositions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, for liquid or solid compositions for
    producing heat by combustion, especially subclasses 250+ for a composition
    which produces heat by a flameless or glowless chemical reaction which is
    not readily reversible.

    48,     Gas: Heating and Illuminating, for gaseous fuels.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclass 13 for coating or
    plastic composition for preventing fog, frost or ice on a surface.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 263.01+ for chemical heaters.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 34 for pipes with means to
    introduce an antifreeze substance.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses
    particularly Class 523, subclass 169 for a composition containing a
    synthetic resin or natural rubbers having utility to preserve visibility
    through a windshield or other optical device by preventing the buildup of
    fog or rendering the surface hydrophobic thereby causing the surface to
    repel water or to processes of preparing said composition.


CLS 252/71
TXT Compositions under the class definition specialized and designed for, or
    peculiar to, use in heat exchanges or which are low-freezing or
    high-boiling, or which are adapted to form mixtures having a lower
    pour-point or freezing point when mixed with other substances.

    (1)     Note.  Elements other than C and H and compounds which contain such
    other elements are not considered to be significant in this class, when
    they originate in and form a part of petroleum or fractions thereof, unless
    such elements or compounds are recited separately in the claims.

    (2)     Note.  For processes in general of heating, cooling or heat
    exchange involving the use of compositions classified in this and indented
    subclasses see the various classes providing therefor as Classes 122,
    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, 203, Distillation:  Processes, Separatory,
    208, Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67+,    for fluids for use in expansible-fluid engines.

    70,     for low temperature eutectic compositions.

    570+,   for fluent dielectric Compositions ("insulating oils") which
    contain a hydrocarbon and a nonhydrocarbon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers.  (See (2) Note above).

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 27+ for metal treating compositions
    having a heat-transfer function.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 104.11+ for a heat exchange device with
    an intermediate fluent material receiving and discharging heat.  See
    reference to Class 252 under "SEARCH CLASS" in the class definition of
    Class 165 for the line between this class (252) and Class 165.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, (See (2) Note above).

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products. (See (2) Note, above).

    508,    Solid Antifriction Devices, Materials Therefor, Lubricant and
    Separant Compositions for Moving Solid Surfaces, and Miscellaneous Mineral
    Oil Compositions, for compositions similar to those of this subclass when
    such compositions are specialized for use as lubricants.


CLS 252/72
TXT Compositions under subclass 71 which contain agents for stopping or
    reducing leaks in containers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclass 33 for leak stopping
    compositions, per se.


CLS 252/73
TXT Compositions under subclass 71 which contain organic compounds.


CLS 252/74
TXT Compositions under subclass 73 which contain metals, compounds thereof,
    inorganic compounds, or elements, other than water.


CLS 252/75
TXT Compositions under subclass 74 which contain organic compounds which
    contain nonmetallic elements other than carbon, hydrogen and oxygen.


CLS 252/76
TXT Compositions under subclass 74 which contain organic compounds which
    contain a carboxyl radical (--COO--).


CLS 252/77
TXT Compositions under subclass 73 which contain organic compounds which
    contain nonmetallic elements other than carbon, hydrogen and oxygen.


CLS 252/78.1
TXT Compositions under subclass 77 containing organic compounds which have
    nonmetallic elements other than carbon, hydrogen, oxygen and nitrogen.


CLS 252/78.3
TXT Compositions under subclass 78.1 in which the organic compounds contain
    silicon.


CLS 252/78.5
TXT Compositions under subclass 78.1 in which the organic compounds contain
    phosphorus.


CLS 252/79
TXT Compositions under subclass 73 which contain organic compounds which
    contain a carboxyl radical (--COO--).


CLS 252/79.1
TXT Compositions specialized and designed for the treatment of mineral
    substances (including metal) by surface removal with chemical agents.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses also provide for patents which
    in addition to a composition claim also contain a claim to a nominal
    process of treating material therewith (e.g., etching, contacting, etc.)
    even though the composition of the material treated is recited.  Any detail
    in the treating step, e.g., dipping, spraying, etc., is sufficient to
    render the process more than nominal and place the patent in Class 216; see
    search class below.

    (2)     Note.  Compositions for "bright polishing" involving the production
    of a shiny, mirror-like or specular finish on metals are considered to
    involve surface removal for this and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, for compositions used in dyeing fabrics for the
    chemical modification of the fiber or fabric to produce ornamental effects.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 2, 27, 28, 41,
    and 42 for processes for cleaning or pickling metals using an acid or
    alkali.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 6+ for forming of a coating on a metal
    surface by chemical reaction.

    166,    Wells, subclass 307 and the subclasses there noted for well
    treating methods which include materials which etch the formation.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 210+, 221, and 223 for etching
    processes combined with electrolytic coating and subclasses 640+ and 687+
    for electrolytic etching processes without formation of an electrolytic
    coating.

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, for etching processes.

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, for compositions used
    to clean a solid surface by removal of foreign matter and not involving the
    removal of the surface, per se, especially subclasses 245+ for bare metal
    surface cleaning compositions.


CLS 252/79.2
TXT Compositions under subclass 79.1 containing an inorganic acid.


CLS 252/79.3
TXT Compositions under subclass 79.2 which contain a fluorine compound.

    (1)     Note.  The fluorine compound may be the acid or a different
    compound in addition to the acid.


CLS 252/79.4
TXT Compositions under subclass 79.2 which contain an organic material in
    addition to the acid.


CLS 252/79.5
TXT Compositions under subclass 79.1 which contain an alkali metal hydroxide.

    (1)     Note.  The hydroxide may be the etching or brightening compound or
    may be used in addition thereto.


CLS 252/88.1
TXT DUST SUPPRESSANTS FOR BULK MATERIALS, OR PROCESSES OF PREPARING (E.G., FOR
    CONSOLIDATING DUST IN COAL MINES, CONTROLLING SOIL EROSION, ETC.):

    Compositions under the class definition specialized or designed for
    suppressing dust (e.g., by binding, consolidating, etc.) from materials
    stored in large bulk, usually in open outdoor spaces, or processes of
    preparing the compositions.

    (1)     Note.  Processes involving the mere use of a claimed composition
    are included in this subclass.  If no composition is claimed or significant
    process steps are involved in addition to such mere use, the patent is
    classifiable in other appropriate classes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88.2,   for compositions intended to be applied to a substrate for
    collecting fine particles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclass 12 for
    processes of assuring mine safety.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclass 76 for processes of
    dust fixation or soil stabilization.


CLS 252/88.2
TXT COMPOSITIONS FOR COATING OR IMPREGNATING A SUBSTRATE USED FOR COLLECTING
    FINE PARTICLES BY ADHERENCE, OR PROCESSES OF PREPARING (E.G., FOR
    IMPREGNATING DUSTING CLOTHS, DUST FILTERS, ETC.):

    Compositions under the class definition specialized or designed for
    collection of fine particles, such as dust, by adherence to a substrate
    coated or impregnated with the composition, such as furnace filters, or
    processes of preparing the compositions.

    (1)     Note.  Processes involving the mere use of a claimed composition
    are included in this subclass.  If no composition is claimed or significant
    process steps are involved in addition to such mere use, the patent is
    classifiable in other appropriate classes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, for dust cloths.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, particularly subclasses 273+ for
    processes of separating solid particles from gas which may include use of a
    particle adherent composition.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, subclass 108.4 for
    waste containing explosives and methods of removing their residues.


CLS 252/175
TXT Compositions under the class definition specialized and designed for, or
    peculiar to, use in treating water to soften or purify it, to precipitate
    impurities in it, or to inhibit formation of scale or incrustation in steam
    boilers or other water containers, or processes of making such compositions.

    (1)     Note.  Foam-preventing agents, per se, and colloid resolving
    agents, per se, are not classified in this subclass; for these, search
    subclass 358.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    358,    see (1) Note above.

    387+,   for corrosion inhibiting agents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 660+ for processes of
    separation involving ion exchange or sorption, and subclasses 702+ for
    separating processes involving precipitation.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 324+ for inorganic
    silicates.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclass for a biocidal composition which is intended to sterilize water.

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 247+ for
    water scale removing compositions.


CLS 252/176
TXT Compositions under subclass 175 in the form of packages or which contain,
    in each case, a particular heterogeneous arrangement of two or more
    components, other than mixed granules, which differ from each other
    chemically or physically.


CLS 252/178
TXT Compositions under subclass 175 which contain deoxidants or free metals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, subclass 248 for
    descaling agents including a free element component (e.g., metal).


CLS 252/179
TXT Compositions under subclass 175 which contain substantially water-insoluble
    materials which are adapted to bind or take up bases or cations in exchange
    for other bases or cations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193,    for compositions for chemically binding ammonia, alkali or other
    bases.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 660+ for processes of
    separation involving ion exchange or sorption.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 700+ for zeolites and
    appropriate subclasses for aluminosilicate compounds having base-exchange
    capabilities.


CLS 252/180
TXT Compositions under subclass 175 which contain plants, plant parts or
    extracts, or organic compounds.


CLS 252/181
TXT Compositions under subclass 180 which contain inorganic compounds or
    elements other than alkali metal hydroxides, alkali metal carbonates and
    water.


CLS 252/181.1
TXT Compositions under the class definition which are (1) designed for use as a
    getter for an electric lamp, an electric space discharge device, or other
    container which is either evacuated or contains a confined atmosphere of
    gas or vapor, and (2) designed for use in generating a gas or vapor within
    the container of an electric lamp, and electric space discharge device or
    similar container.

    (1)     Note.  Getters are materials which, when used in closed containers,
    reduce the gas or vapor content of the  container.  A getter may react with
    the gas or vapor in the container to form a solid nonvaporizable material,
    or to adsorb or absorb the gas or vapor, or may reduce the amount of the
    gas or vapor in the container in any other way.  The material may be a
    getter for one gas or vapor and may not have any effect upon another gas or
    vapor.

    (2)     Note.  These subclasses provide for all materials which are limited
    by the claims to use as a getter.  Where the patent claims a material
    broadly as well as claiming a getter made of the material, the patent will
    be classified with the appropriate material where the material is
    classified in a class other than Class 252 and cross-referenced here.
    These subclasses provide for all materials broadly or specifically claimed
    which are not otherwise classified which are disclosed for use as getters.

    (3)     Note.  These subclasses provide for patents which claim merely a
    container or device which contains a particular getter material where no
    structure of the container or device is set forth. Where the device is
    claimed by name only, as an electric lamp, or where details of the device
    are claimed, the patent is classified with the device.

    (4)     Note.  Where the patent claims a process of gettering and also
    contains claims to the gettering material, the patent is classified with
    the art which provides for the process and is cross-referenced to these
    subclasses, see Class 445, Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or
    Device Manufacturing, and see the notes thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4+,     for compositions for use in extinguishing fires which contain
    components for generating gas by chemical reactions.

    182+,   for compositions for use as agents or materials for absorbing or
    binding extraneous compounds or elements, or for use in causing or carrying
    out other changes by chemical reactions.

    194,    for compositions for use in absorbing, binding, removing or
    retaining water.

    364,    for compositions for use as solvents, including such compositions
    as are solvents for gases.

    372+,   for compositions which are gaseous, and the processes of making
    them.

    500+,   for materials for filaments, electrodes and shields for electric
    lamps and electric space discharge devices.  Such a material when also
    adapted to act as getter or a gas or vapor generating material is
    classified in subclasses 181.1+, and cross-referenced into subclasses 500+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 228+ for a composition having a continuous phase of
    free metal made by consolidating metal particles, and subclasses 255+ for a
    loose metal particle composition.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, for processes involving steps resulting
    in separation of a gas from a fluid mixture comprising (a) a gas and solid
    or liquid particles entrained therein, (b) a liquid and gas entrained
    therein, or (c) a plurality of gases.  See particularly subclasses 90+ for
    processes of gas separation using a solid sorbent.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, for apparatus used in separation of a
    gas from a fluid mixture comprising (a) a gas and solid or liquid particles
    entrained therein, (b) a liquid and gas entrained therein, or (c) a
    plurality of gases.  See particularly subclasses 108+ for solid sorbent
    apparatus for gas separation.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 174+ for electric
    lamps and electric space discharge devices which are provided with a getter
    or gas or vapor generating material within the envelope of the device.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 48+ for electrical or getter type devices.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 210+ for purifying or
    separating gaseous components by a chemical reaction.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 546+ for
    metallic stock comprising metal particles.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, for a composition comprising a catalyst or support therefor or
    sorbent of general utility.

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, for cleaning
    compositions of general or specific utility, particularly subclasses 367+
    for those compositions which are adapted to bleach or oxidize by chemical
    reaction.


CLS 252/181.2
TXT Materials under subclass 181.1 which contain either (1) a plurality of
    getter substances, (2) a plurality of materials capable of generating two
    or more different gases or vapors, or (3) a material capable of generating
    a gas or vapor and a different material capable of acting as a getter.

    (1)     Note.  Where there is only a single gas or vapor generated and such
    gas or vapor is capable of acting as a getter as well as being capable of
    supplying a gas or vapor, the patent is not classified in this subclass,
    but is classified in subclass 181.1 or in the other subclasses indented
    thereunder.

    (2)     Note.  As many getter and gas or vapor generating materials contain
    two or more ingredients, classification in this subclass depends
    principally upon the disclosure of the patent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181.1,  see (1) Note.  above.


CLS 252/181.3
TXT Materials under subclass 181.1 which contain a plurality of substances not
    in chemical combination with each other, at least two of the substances
    being capable of chemically reacting with each other to produce the getter
    or gas or vapor generating material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182+,   for compositions for use as agents or materials in causing or
    carrying out changes by chemical reactions.


CLS 252/181.4
TXT Materials under subclass 181.3 which contain magnesium, an alkali metal or
    an alkaline earth metal, or a compound thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181.7,  for other materials under subclass 181.1 which contain magnesium,
    an alkali metal, an alkaline earth metal or a compound thereof.


CLS 252/181.5
TXT Getters under subclass 181.1 where the getter material is normally gaseous.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include materials which are rendered
    gaseous or vaporous by treating a substance which is normally nongaseous or
    vaporous.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    372+,   for gaseous compositions.


CLS 252/181.6
TXT Materials under subclass 181.1 which contain a metal or metal compound.

    (1)     Note.  Where the material is merely a metal, an alloy or metal
    compounds, see (2) Note to subclass 181.1 for the line between these
    subclasses and the classes which provide for metals, alloys, and metal
    compounds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181.1,  see (1) Note.  above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, appropriate subclasses for processes of making metals, and
    subclasses 228+ for consolidated and 255+ for loose metal particle
    compositions.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, appropriate subclasses for alloys
    or metallic compositions, per se.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses for metal
    containing inorganic compounds, per se.

    556,    Organic Compounds, appropriate subclasses for carbon compounds
    which contain a metal, see subclasses 1+ where the compound contains a
    heavy metal and subclasses 170+ where the compound contains aluminum.


CLS 252/181.7
TXT Materials under subclass 181.6 which contain magnesium, an alkali metal, in
    alkaline earth metal, or a compound thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181.4,  for this subject material where the getter or gas or vapor material
    is generated from a reactive composition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 255+ for loose mixtures of metal or alloy powder.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, appropriate subclasses for a
    single alloy or metallic composition in the form of a powder.


CLS 252/182.1
TXT Compositions under subclass 182 which are chemically reactive and have
    utility in electro-chemical cell, e.g., battery, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    425.3,  for process of making a catalytic electrode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product and
    Process, appropriate subclasses for materials of this subclass combined
    with battery structure, e.g., electrolyte, electrode, etc.


CLS 252/182.11
TXT COMPOSITIONS CONTAINING A SINGLE CHEMICAL REACTANT OR PLURAL NONINTERACTIVE
    CHEMICAL REACTANTS; I.E.,  NOT  VIS-A-VIS:

    Composition under the class definitions containing  a single reactant or
    plural reactants under the class definition specialized or designed for use
    in subsequent reactions with other materials, but not with each other.

    (1)     Note.  The addition of a stabilizer or inhibitor to a composition
    to prevent the interaction between two or more reactants such that the
    reactants can interact later upon removal of the stabilizer or inhibitor or
    otherwise render them reactive, proper classification is in subclass 183.11

    (2)     Note.  The addition of a material which serves a dual purpose,
    i.e., reactant plus diluent, solvent, plasticizer, etc., will be classified
    as a reactant; if the patent is silent as to its function than it will be
    classified as a nonreactive material.

    (3)     Note. The relationship between a subclass and subclasses indented
    thereunder is such that reference is always to the same reactant, unless
    the indented subclass begins with "With or Contains" in which case they may
    refer to any reactant.  This, for example, under subclass 182.24 there is
    found a reactant which contains plural hydroxyl groups and indented
    thereunder in subclass 182.26 the same reactant further contains nitrogen,
    e.g., triethanolamine, etc.

    (4)     Note.  A composition containing a reactant metal, element or
    compound stabilized with a specified material is nonetheless classified
    accordingly with the metal, element or compound classes.  See also this
    class, subclass 380, (2) Note for a similar discussion.

    (5)     Note.  Whenever possible, full recognition should be given to the
    term "catalyst" in describing a given substance even though from prior art
    the substance is known to behave as a reactant.  Thus, triethanolamine can
    react with polyisocyanates to form polyurethanes;  however, if it stated
    that triethanolamine functions as a catalyst in aiding the condensation of
    polyols with polyisocyanate, then it is classified as a catalyst in Class
    502 and not as a reactant.  Similarly, a composition specified to function
    as an accelerating agent will be classified in Class 502.  Vulcanizing a
    curing compositions are considered proper herein unless it is clear that
    their function is strictly catalytic.  Peroxide compositions, per se, will
    be considered as catalysts, and therefore, proper for Class 502

    (6)     Note.  The hierarchical order for compositions elsewhere classified
    containing a single reactant or plural noninteractive or interactive
    reactant see this class Main Class Definitions,  (5) Note.

    (7)     Note.  To be classified in this or the indented subclasses a patent
    must not recite a claim drawn to a composition containing a solid synthetic
    polymer.  Where a patent sets forth claims which are drawn to species that
    may or may not be synthetic polymers as per disclosure, or where a patent
    contains only generic claims and the disclosure, or where a patent contains
    only generic claims and the disclosure sets forth species which are
    appropriate as synthetic polymers and species which are appropriate as
    synthetic polymers and species which are not, the patent is placed here as
    an original with the species which are appropriate as synthetic polymers
    and species which are nonresinous and cross-referenced to the appropriate
    polymer classes.  Polymers are limited to synthetic organic polymers and
    excludes inorganic polymer, natural polymers, e.g., starch, cellulose,
    collegen, wool, etc.

    (8)     Note.  A composition containing potentially reactable ingredients
    which are to be polymerized and which contains all or the necessary
    reactants to form the desired synthetic resin or those reactants which are
    potentially reactable at room temperature or requiring merely hear and/or
    pressure or moisture when reactant contains Si-C, Si-H, -N=C=X, (X is
    chalcogen) or is a liquid polysulfide is classified in appropriate polymer
    classes.  Consider the following examples to illustrate this note.

    a.      Alpha cyanoacrylate, per se, is classified in Class 60, Power
    Plants, subclass 155.

    b.      Alpha cyanoacrylate compositions as an anaerobic sealing
    composition is classified in Class subclass 523, 176 and elsewhere in the
    polymer classes as a nonanaerobic sealing composition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for gas generating compositions for extinguishing fires.

    60+,    for gas generating compositions specialized for use in
    forthfloation separation processes.

    181.1+, for getter and gas or vapor generating compositions for electric
    lamps, electric space discharge devices and other evacuated or gas or vapor
    filled containers.

    350,    for gas generating compositions for producing foams and which do
    not contain chemical reactants designed for subsequent use other than in
    foam or gas production.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, appropriate
    subclasses for gas generating compositions which undergo a chemical change
    at a very rapid rate, or rate approaching instantaneous reaction, resulting
    in the production of usable force as in blasting, fire arms, jet
    propulsion, filling automotive passenger gas-bags, etc.

    521,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 50+ for
    compositions containing all the required reactants or polymer derived
    thereof plus a foam generating composition (blowing agent).


CLS 252/182.12
TXT Organic reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 182.11 wherein the composition contains a
    single reactant or plural noninteractive chemical reactants at least one of
    which is organic in nature.

    (1)     Note.  The term organic denotes the reactant as one which has
    carbon therein the which is further characterized by the presence of (a) a
    C-C bond, or (b) C-H bond, or (c) (C-halogen bond, or (d) C-N or C=N bond,
    with the proviso that hydrocyanic acid, cyanogen, isocyanic acid,
    cyanamide, cyanogen halide, isothiocyanic acid, and metal carbides are
    excluded as being organic in nature.


CLS 252/182.13
TXT For subsequent solid polymer treatment or preparation; e.g., crosslinking,
    grafting, curing, hardening, vulcanizing, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 182.12 designed for subsequent use in
    polymerization processes and other polymer treating processes, e.g.,
    crosslinking, grafting, blocking, curing, hardening, vulcanizing, etc.

    (1)     Note.  The term "subsequent" means that the claimed composition
    will be used in one of the above stated processes directly, immediately or
    in the very near future, and not remotely.  Thus, for example, a
    composition which contains a glycol which is to be subsequently transformed
    into a liquid polyester is not classified in subclass 182.13 but in
    subclass 182.12.  The subsequent esterification will not lead to a solid
    polymer but merely the preparation of a compound by definition.  So, too, a
    composition designed for subsequent preparation of cyclic trimmers for
    tetrameres, etc, which, by disclosure are compounds, are also excluded from
    this subclass.


CLS 252/182.14
TXT Reactant contains element other than C, H, O, or N:

    Subject matter under subclass 182.13 wherein a reactant contains an element
    other than C, H, O, or N, e.g., an isocyanate compound containing silicon,
    or a phosphorous-containing polyol both used for preparing polyurethanes,
    etc.


CLS 252/182.15
TXT Halogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 182.14 wherein the organic halogen compound
    contains bromine or iodine.


CLS 252/182.16
TXT Bromine or iodine:

    Subject matter under subclass 182.15 wherein the organic halogen compound
    contains bromine or iodine.


CLS 252/182.17
TXT Sulfur:

    Subject matter under subclass 182.14 wherein the organic compound contains
    sulfur.


CLS 252/182.18
TXT Reactant contains ethylenic group:

    Subject matter under subclass 182.13 wherein the reactant contains an
    ethylenic group, e.g., methyl methacrylate,acrylic acid, etc.


CLS 252/182.19
TXT Cyclic anhydride moiety:

    Subject matter under subclass 182.18 wherein the organic reactant
    containing an ethylenic groups also contains an anhydride moiety, e.g.,
    maleic anhydride, etc.


CLS 252/182.2
TXT Reactant contains isocyanate (-N=C=O) or blocked isocyanate group:

    Subject matter under subclass 182.13 wherein the organic reactant contains
    an isocyanate (-N=C=O) or blocked isocyanate (-NHC(=O)-OR) group.

    (1)     Note.  A blocked isocyanate is an isocyanate which has been
    rendered inert by conversion to an inactive group usually in the form of a
    urethane (-N-C(=O)-OR) group.


CLS 252/182.21
TXT Two or more reactants containing isocyanate or blocked isocyanate groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 182.2 wherein the composition contains two or
    more reactants which contain isocyanate or blocked isocyanate groups; e.g.,
    an isomeric mixture of 2, 2'-, 2, 4'- and/or 4, 4'- diisocyanate
    diphenylmethane, etc.


CLS 252/182.22
TXT Urethane (-N-C(=O)-O-C-) group:

    Subject matter under subclass 182.21 wherein the isocyanate compound in
    addition contains either a blocked isocyanate or urethane group.

    (1)     Note.  Found her typically is a polyisocyanate treated with a
    polyol yielding an isocyanate terminated polyurethane.


CLS 252/182.23
TXT Reactant contains oxygen:

    Subject matter under subclass 182.13 wherein the organic reactant contains
    oxygen.


CLS 252/182.24
TXT Reactant contains plural hydroxyl groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 182.23 wherein the organic reactant contains
    plural hydroxyl groups, e.g., ethylene glycol, glycerine, sucrose, starch,
    etc.


CLS 252/182.25
TXT Three or more reactants containing plural hydroxyl groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 182.23 where three or more organic reactants
    contain plural hydroxyl groups.


CLS 252/182.26
TXT Reactant contains nitrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 182.24 wherein the organic reactant contains
    nitrogen, e.g., triethanolamine, etc.


CLS 252/182.27
TXT Reactant contains ether linkage:

    Subject matter under subclass 182.14 wherein the organic reactant
    additionally contains an ether linkage, e.g., polyethylene glycol, etc.


CLS 252/182.28
TXT Reactant contains carboxylic acid group or derivative thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 182.23 wherein the oxygen containing organic
    reactant is a carboxylic acid or derivative thereof.

    (1)     Note.  A carboxylic acid derivative denotes: nitrile, ester,
    anhydride, salt, amide, imide, lactam, lactone, and acyl halide.  However,
    by scheduled exclusion the metal salt or acyl halide would be found in
    subclasses 182.14.


CLS 252/182.29
TXT With stabilizer or inhibitor:

    Subject matter under subclass 182.12 wherein the composition contains
    material whose sole function is to impart stability to one or more
    compounds for the purpose of delaying or retarding a chemical change in one
    or more of these compounds, until such time when one or more of these
    compounds may under so a subsequent reaction.

    (1)     Note.  This stabilization or inhibition process may occur in any
    number of ways too numerous, if not impossible to elaborate here.  However,
    some processes may be: coating, encapsulation, impregnation, complexation,
    or other altered chemicals forms, e.g., salting, hydrogen, bonding,
    tautomerizing, clathration, etc.  It is imperative to point out that the
    stabilization or inhibition is related to only a chemical change and not to
    any physical change.  Thus, a surfactant added to a composition to form a
    stable emulsion of a given reactant is not classified in this subclass,
    whereas the stabilization of a solution of a reactant wherein said reactant
    is unstable in the presence of the solvent is properly classified here, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    380+,   for stabilizing or inhibiting compositions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, main class definitions, paragraph
    four for a similar discussion as related to organic compounds.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclass 265 for a detailed
    discussion on the use of additives to an inorganic compound wherein the
    resultant composition is properly classified herein.  For example, the
    addition of a metal salt to stabilize hydrogen peroxide against
    decomposition would be classified in Class 423, subclass 273.  However, if
    a third substance, e.g., a dye were introduced to indicate possible
    peroxide decomposition by way of a color change would be proper for Class
    252, subclass 186.29


CLS 252/182.3
TXT Reactant contains phosphorous, silicon, or sulfur atom, or contains
    metal-to-carbon bond:

    Subject matter under subclass 182.11 wherein the organic reactant contains
    a phosphorous, silicon or sulfur atom or contains a metal-to carbon bond,
    e.g., mixture of phosphite compounds to scavenge aldehydes and ketones, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for gas generating compositions for extinguishing fires.

    60+,    for generating compositions specialized for use in frothfloatation
    separation processes.

    181.1,  for getter and gas or vapor generating composition for electric
    lamps, electric space discharge devices and other evacuated or gas or vapor
    filled containers.

    350,    for gas generating compositions for producing foams and which do
    not contain chemical reactant designed for subsequent use other than in
    foam or gas production.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Changes, appropriate
    subclasses for gas generating composition which under go a chemical change
    at a very rapid rate, or a rate approaching instantaneous reaction,
    resulting in the production of usable force as in blasting, fire arms, jet
    propulsion, filling automotive passenger restraining gas-bags, etc.

    521,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 50+ for
    compositions containing all the required reactant or polymer derived
    thereof plus foam generating composition (blowing agent).


CLS 252/182.31
TXT Reactant contains phenolic, phenolic ether, or inorganic phenolate group:

    Subject matter under subclass 182.12 wherein the organic reactant is a
    phenolic, phenolic ether or inorganic phenolate compound, e.g., phenol,
    bisphenol A, the diglycidyl ether or bisphenol A, sodium
    pentachlorophenolate, etc.

    (1)     Note.  The term "phenolic is generic to all aromatic carbocyclic
    compounds wherein the oxygen atom is directly attached to a carbon atom is
    directly attached to a carbon atom of the aromatic ring and, thus would
    include beta naphthol, 8-hydroxy-quinoline, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 1 glossary for a
    detailed definition of a phenol, phenol ether and inorganic phenolate.


CLS 252/182.32
TXT Inorganic reactant other than sulfur containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 182.11 wherein the composition contains an
    inorganic reactant other than sulfur, e.g., a solution of silicon
    tetrafluoride in tetrahydrofuran, liquid hydrogen fluoride dimethyl
    sulfoxide, etc.


CLS 252/182.33
TXT Reactant contains heavy metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 182.32 wherein the inorganic reactant
    contains a heavy metal, e.g., titanium, vanadium, iron, manganese, etc.


CLS 252/182.34
TXT Reactant contains nitrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 182.32 wherein the inorganic reactant
    contains nitrogen, e.g., ammonium hydroxide sodium nitrate, etc.


CLS 252/182.35
TXT Reactant contains aluminum or phosphorous:

    Subject matter under subclass 182.32 wherein the inorganic reactant
    contains aluminum or phosphorus, e.g., phosphoric acid, aluminum hydroxide,
    etc.


CLS 252/183.11
TXT CHEMICALLY INTERACTIVE REACTANTS (VIS-A-VIS):

    Compositions under the class definition which contains a mixture or
    association of two or more reactants chosen for subsequent and not
    immediate chemical interaction thereof, i.e., vis-a-vis, substances
    peculiar thereto, and processes of making the same.

    (1)     Note.  The addition of a stabilizer or inhibitor to a composition
    to prevent the interaction between two or more reactants such that the
    reactants con interact subsequently upon removal or interruption of the
    stabilizer or inhibitor or otherwise render them reactive, classification
    is proper here and not in subclass 182.11

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not take solid synthetic polymers as part
    of a composition.  There are exceptions and one has to look at the intent.
    For example, if a reactant A and a reactant B are individually solid
    synthetic polymer classification is proper for Class 523, subclasses 205+.
    Additionally, if reactants A and B are microencapsulated within a given
    microcapsule or a sphere of specified dimensions and wherein the two are
    stabilized for subsequent reaction, classification is proper in Class 428,
    subclasses 402+.

    (3)     Note.  A composition containing potentially reactable ingredients
    which are to be polymerized and which contains all of the necessary
    reactants to form the desired solid synthetic resin; or contains those
    reactants which are potentially reactable at room temperature or requiring
    merely the addition of heat, pressure, or moisture when said reactants
    contain a Si-C, Si-H bond or -N=C=X group (wherein x is a chalcogen atom);
    or contains a liquid polysulfide is classified in appropriate polymer
    classes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    525,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 7+ for a
    composition containing a solid polymer admixed with a reactant.


CLS 252/183.12
TXT With stabilizer or inhibitor:

    Subject matter under subclass 183.11 wherein the composition contains a
    material whose sole function is to impart stability or inhabitation to one
    or more components in order to delay or retard a chemical reaction from
    occurring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182.29, for a more detailed discussion or this subject matter.


CLS 252/183.13
TXT Organic reactant admixed with inorganic reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 183.11 wherein composition contains both an
    organic reactant and an inorganic reactant, e.g., tartaric acid and sodium
    bicarbonate, desiccated alkali metal formate and dehydrated aluminum
    sulphate, etc.


CLS 252/183.14
TXT Inorganic reactants only:

    Subject matter under subclass 183.11 wherein the composition contains only
    inorganic reactants, e.g., a heat producing composition containing
    magnesium sulfate and iron oxide, etc.


CLS 252/183.15
TXT Calcium carbide precursors:

    Subject matter under subclass 183.14 wherein the inorganic reactants are
    considered calcium carbide precursors, i.e., which when reacted, will
    produce calcium carbide, e.g., calcium oxide and coke, etc.


CLS 252/183.16
TXT Contains carbonate or bicarbonate:

    Subject matter under search class 183.14 wherein the composition contains
    an inorganic carbonate or bicarbonate, e.g., a buffering composition
    containing a mixture of aluminum hydroxide and ammonium bicarbonate, etc.


CLS 252/184
TXT Compositions under subclass 182 in each case specialized and designed for,
    or peculiar to, use in both absorbing or binding an extraneous, substance,
    physically or chemically, and yielding by chemical reaction a
    chemically-free third substance which does not contain the substance which
    is absorbed or bound, or in making substances for such use.


CLS 252/185
TXT Compositions under subclass 182 which contain substances which contain lead
    or a lead compound for, or peculiar to, use in treating petroleum to
    "sweeten" it, or eliminate therefrom or modify sulfur or sulfur compounds
    therein, or chemically binding extraneous sulfur or chemically modifying
    extraneous sulfur compounds, or in making substances for such use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 197+ for
    processes of sweetening mineral oils using lead compounds.


CLS 252/186.1
TXT OXIDATIVE BLEACHANT, OXIDANT CONTAINING, OR GENERATIVE:

    Compositions under subclass 182 which contain substances for, or peculiar
    to, use in bleaching by oxidation, or in other oxidation of extraneous
    substances, or in generating oxygen, or in making substances for such use,
    or processes of making such compositions or mere method of using such
    compositions.

    (1)     Note.  A material qualifies as an oxidizing agent either if it is
    so claimed, disclosed, or if it is generally art recognized as such.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184,    for such compositions which are also chemically yielding.

    372+,   for gaseous compositions containing an oxidant.

    410+,   for compositions containing an oxidant claimed or soley disclosed
    as a catalyst.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 101+ for processes of bleaching or
    decoloring textiles and which are other than the mere application of a
    novel oxidizing bleach composition.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, subclasses 1 and 119
    for a collection of organic and inorganic compounds having oxidative uses
    in compositions of that class.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 749+ for processes of
    chemically treating a liquid for the purpose of purifying the liquid using
    an oxidizing composition, e.g., a method to reduce the bacteria count in
    water using sodium hypochlorite would be classified in Classes 210,
    subclass 756.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, appropriate subclasses for organic
    compounds, per se, which may be oxidative and admixture of such compounds
    with agents designed to improve the stability of such compounds.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 265+ for an inorganic
    compound, which may be oxidative, admixed with an agent designed to improve
    the stability of such a compound.

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, especially subclasses
    302+ and 367+ for cleaning compositions including an oxidant or chemical
    bleach component.


    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses for
    treating a resin with an oxidizing agent or generative.


CLS 252/186.2
TXT Composition containing two or more solid materials with defined physical
    dimensions; e.g., surface areas, volumes, etc., or process of producing
    said composition:

    Compositions under subclass 186.1 wherein two or more solid materials
    possess defined physical dimensions or surface areas.

    (1)     Note.  The solid materials may be reactants, polymeric or
    nonpolymeric or nonreactant materials.


CLS 252/186.21
TXT Plural oxidants:

    Compositions under subclass 186.1 which contains two or more oxidizing
    agents, e.g., a liquified mixture of chlorine and chlorine dioxide, sodium
    chlorate and sodium peroxide, etc.


CLS 252/186.22
TXT Contains plural peroxides:

    Compositions under subclass 186.21 wherein at least two of the oxidants are
    peroxides, e.g., ammonium persulfate and sodium peroxide, etc.


CLS 252/186.23
TXT Organic peroxide:

    Compositions under subclass 186.22 wherein at least one of the peroxides is
    organic, e.g., peracetic acid, ditertiary butyl peroxide, etc.


CLS 252/186.24
TXT Contains elemental material devoid of water:

    Compositions under subclass 186.1 which contains an elemental material and
    which composition is further devoid of water, e.g., graphite, charcoal,
    metal alloys, oxygen, ozone, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186.33, 186.36 and 187.1+, for compositions containing elemental material
    in admixture with water.

    372+,   for gaseous compositions containing elemental gases, e.g., hydrogen
    and carbon monoxide, hydrogen and nitrogen, etc.


CLS 252/186.25
TXT Composition containing a stabilizer or a product in the form of a
    surface-modified, impregnated, encapsulated, or surface-coated article; or
    process of producing said composition:

    Compositions under subclass 186.1 containing a stabilizer wherein the
    stabilizer is accompanied by additional materials properly classifying the
    composition herein, e.g., a composition comprised of an oxidant,
    stabilizer, plasticizer and densifying agent, etc.; a composition
    containing a product therein which is a surface coated, impregnated,
    encapsulated, or surface modified material, e.g., fiber, sheet, particle,
    or web, etc.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not require that the product admixed be
    in the same physical or chemical state after achieving the final
    composition, e.g., the composition or product, per se, may be comminuted,
    chemically treated, transitory, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, subclass 3 for a
    coated component.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, for a Class 423 product admixed
    with a stabilizer and the admixture is neither disclosed nor claimed as
    having any utility.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 221+ for web
    or sheet containing structurally defined element or component; and
    subclasses 357+ for coated or structurally defined flake, particle, cell,
    strand, strand-portion, rod, filament, macroscopic fiber, or mass thereof.

    520,    Synthetic Resin or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses for a
    material impregnated, encapsulated, surface modified or surface coated in a
    solid polymer.


CLS 252/186.26
TXT Organic peroxide:

    Compositions under subclass 186.25 which contains an organic peroxide,
    e.g., a composition containing sodium peroxy carbonate coated with a
    stabilizing quantity of fatty alkanol-amides, etc.


CLS 252/186.27
TXT Inorganic peroxide:

    Compositions under subclass 186.25 which contains an inorganic peroxide,
    e.g., a stabilized composition containing sodium peroxide, magnesium
    acetate, and alkali metal silicate, etc.


CLS 252/186.28
TXT Contains hydrogen peroxide:

    Compositions under subclass 186.27 wherein the inorganic peroxide is
    hydrogen peroxide, e.g., a composition comprised of hydrogen peroxide
    stabilized with sodium stannate and aluminum acetate, etc.


CLS 252/186.29
TXT With organic material:

    Composition under subclass 186.28 which contains an organic material, e.g.,
    a composition comprised of hydrogen peroxide admixed with a stabilizing
    amount of 1-hydroxy ethylidene-1, 1-diphosphonic acid, etc.

    (1)     Note.  The presence of the organic material need not be attributed
    exclusively to either a stabilizing agent or a material used to coat,
    impregnate, encapsulate, or surface modify a particle, but may function in
    other capacities, e.g., filler, plasticizer, solvent, etc.


CLS 252/186.3
TXT Contains perborate:

    Compositions under subclass 186.27 which contains inorganic perborate
    salts, e.g., a composition comprised of sodium perborate stabilized with
    particle coating of sodium carbonate, etc.


CLS 252/186.31
TXT With organic material:

    Composition under subclass 186.3 which contains an organic material, e.g.,
    a bleaching composition comprised of sodium perborate and benzoic anhydride
    coated onto expanded perlite particles, etc.

    (1)     Note.  The presence of the organic material need not be attributed
    exclusively to either a stabilizing agent or a material used to coat,
    encapsulate, impregnate, or surface modify a particle, but may function in
    other capacities, e.g., a filler, plasticizer, solvent, etc.


CLS 252/186.32
TXT Contains Group IA metal peroxide:

    Composition under subclass 186.27 which contains a Group IA metal peroxide
    (Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs), e.g., a composition comprised of sodium percarbonate
    coated with aqueous sodium silicate solution, etc.


CLS 252/186.33
TXT Contains Group VIIB or Group VIII metal or compound thereof:

    Composition under subclass 186.25 which contains a Group VIIB metal (Mn,
    Tc, Re) or Group VIII metal (Fe, Co, Ni, Ru, Rh, Pd, Os, Ir, Pt) or
    compound thereof, e.g., a composition comprised of zinc oxide particles
    coated with silver permanganate, etc.


CLS 252/186.34
TXT Contains organohalogen compound as oxidant:

    Composition under subclass 186.25 which contains an organohalogen compound
    as the oxidizing or oxygen generating agent, e.g., N, N1 -di (2, 4, 6 -
    trichlorophenyl) -N, N1 -di - chlorourea stabilized with zinc oxide, etc.


CLS 252/186.35
TXT Chloroisocyanurate:

    Composition under subclass 186.34 which contains chloroisocyanurates as the
    organohalogen-type oxidant, e.g., a composition comprised of
    trichloroisocyanuric acid stabilized with magnesium sulfate, etc.


CLS 252/186.36
TXT Contains free halogen or oxy-halogen acid type:

    Composition under subclass 186.25 which contains an oxy-halogen acid
    compound, an anhydride thereof, free halogen, or a compound which yields
    such a halogen body when treated with water, basic material, nonhalogen
    acid, or heat, e.g., a composition comprised of aqueous sodium hypochlorite
    stabilized against trace amounts of iron impurities with calcium chloride
    and sodium carbonate, etc.


CLS 252/186.37
TXT Contains alkaline earth metal:

    Composition under subclass 186.36 which contains a Group IIA metal (Be, Mg,
    Ca, Sr, Ba), e.g., a composition comprised of calcium hypochlorite core
    coated with a mixture of calcium hypochlorite dihydrate and sodium
    chloride, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    625+,   radioactive compositions which contains radium in admixture with
    materials normally classified in this subclass.


CLS 252/186.38
TXT Contains activator admixed with inorganic peroxide:

    Composition under subclass 186.1 which contains an activator admixed with
    an inorganic peroxide, i.e., a material which enhances or assists in the
    decomposition of the peroxide, e.g., a bleaching composition comprised of
    an aqueous solution of hydrogen peroxide admixed with a carboxylic acid
    anhydride, etc.


CLS 252/186.39
TXT Contains heterocyclic compound:

    Composition under subclass 186.38 which contains a heterocylic compound,
    e.g., a composition comprised of hydrogen peroxide and 1-acetyl - 5, 6 -
    dihydrouracil, etc.


CLS 252/186.4
TXT Oxygen heterocycle:

    Composition under subclass 186.39 which contains an oxygen heterocycle,
    e.g., a composition comprised of sodium perborate and beta-propiolactone,
    etc.


CLS 252/186.41
TXT Hydrogen peroxide:

    Composition under subclass 186.38 which contains hydrogen peroxide admixed
    with an activator, e.g., a composition comprised of hydrogen peroxide and
    sodamide, etc.


CLS 252/186.42
TXT Contains organic peroxide:

    Composition under subclass 186.1 which contains an organic peroxide, e.g.,
    a composition comprised of monoperoxyphthalic acid and magnesium sulfate,
    etc.


CLS 252/186.43
TXT Contains inorganic peroxide:

    Composition under subclass 186.1 which contains an inorganic peroxide,
    e.g., a composition comprised of hydrogen peroxide and a fabric
    discoloration inhibitor, 3-Salicyloylamido benzimidazole, etc.


CLS 252/186.44
TXT Contains inorganic nitrogen containing compound:

    Composition under subclass 186.1 which contains an inorganic nitrogen
    containing compound, e.g., a composition comprised of sodium hypochlorite
    and the surface active agent, C-decyl-N-tri-methyl-alpha-betaine,etc.


CLS 252/187.1
TXT Free halogen or oxy-halogen acid type:

    Composition under subclass 186.1 which contains an oxy-halogen acid
    compound, an anhydride thereof, free halogen, or a compound which yields
    such a halogen body when treated with water, basic material, nonhologen
    acid, or heat, e.g., a bleaching composition comprised of perchloric acid
    and polyvinylpyrrolidone, etc.


CLS 252/187.2
TXT Oxidant contains halogen other than chlorine:

    Composition under subclass 187.1 which contains a halogen oxidant other
    than chlorine, e.g., a cleaning composition comprised of iodine and
    ethylene glycol, etc.


CLS 252/187.21
TXT Chlorine dioxide or monoxide:

    Composition under subclass 187.1 which contains chlorine dioxide or
    monoxide, e.g., a composition comprised of chlorine monoxide and 1, 1,
    1-trichloroethane, etc.


CLS 252/187.22
TXT With elemental chlorine:

    Composition under subclass 187.21 which contains elemental chlorine, e.g.,
    an aqueous composition comprised of chlorine dioxide and chlorine, etc.


CLS 252/187.23
TXT Chlorite:

    Composition under subclass 187.1 which contains a chlorite salt, e.g., a
    composition comprised of sodium hypochlorite admixed with sodium chloride,
    etc.


CLS 252/187.24
TXT Hypochlorite:

    Composition under subclass 187.23 which contains a hypochlorite salt, e.g.,
    a composition comprised of sodium hypochlorite admixed with magnesium
    oxide, etc.


CLS 252/187.25
TXT Alkali metal hypochlorite:

    Composition under subclass 187.24 which contains a Group IA metal
    hypochlorite salt (Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs), e.g., a dustless bleaching
    composition comprised of lithium hypochlorite, sodium chloride, and
    chlorinated biphenyl, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    625+,   radioactive compositions which contains francium in admixture with
    materials normally classified in this subclass.


CLS 252/187.26
TXT Sodium:

    Composition under subclass 187.25 which contains the hypochlorite in the
    form of its sodium salt, e.g., a composition comprised of sodium
    hypochlorite and magnesium silicate, etc.


CLS 252/187.27
TXT Alkaline earth metal hypochlorite:

    Composition under subclass 187.24 which contains a Group IIA metal
    hypochlorite (Be, Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba), e.g., a composition comprised of
    magnesium hypochlorite and citric or tartaric acid as solubilizing agent,
    etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    625+,   radioactive compositions for compositions which contain radium in
    admixture with materials normally classified in this subclass.


CLS 252/187.28
TXT Calcium:

    Composition under subclass 187.27 which contains a hypochlorite in the form
    of its calcium salt, e.g., a composition comprised of calcium hypochlorite
    and sodium chloride filler, etc.


CLS 252/187.29
TXT With alkali metal compound:

    Composition under subclass 187.28 which contains in addition to calcium
    hypochlorite a Group I A metal compound (Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs), e.g., a
    composition comprised of calcium hypochlorite, calcium oxide and sodium
    carbonate, etc.


CLS 252/187.3
TXT With alkaline earth metal compound:

    Composition under subclass 187.28 which contains in addition to the calcium
    hypochlorite a Group IIA metal compound (Be, Mg, Ca, Ba, Sr), e.g., a
    composition comprised of calcium hypochlorite and sodium stearate as
    lubricant, etc.


CLS 252/187.31
TXT Chlorate or perchlorate:

    Composition under subclass 187.1 which contains a chlorate or perchlorate
    salt as an oxidizing agent, e.g., a composition comprised of sodium
    chlorate and sodium chloride, etc.


CLS 252/187.32
TXT Hypochlorous acid:

    Composition under subclass 187.1 which contains hypochlorous acid, e.g., a
    solution of hypochlorous acid in methyl ethyl ketone, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Hypochlorous acid compositions claimed in terms of their
    precursors are classified on the latter whenever possible.


CLS 252/187.33
TXT Oxidant contains N-C1 bond:

    Composition under subclass 187.1 which contains a compound containing a
    nitrogen-to-chlorine bond, as a hypochlorite precursor, e.g., a bleaching
    composition comprised of 1, 3 - di-chloro - 5, 5 - dimethylhydantoin and
    tetrasodium pyrophosphate buffer, etc.


CLS 252/187.34
TXT Chloroisocyanurate:

    Composition under subclass 187.33 which contains chloroisocyanurates, e.g.,
    a composition comprised of dichlorisocyanurate and a carrier, sodium
    sulfate, etc.


CLS 252/188.1
TXT REDUCTIVE BLEACHANT, DEOXIDANT, REDUCTANT, OR GENERATIVE:

    Composition under the class definition which contains substances for use in
    bleaching by chemical reduction, in deoxygenation, or in other chemical
    reductions of extraneous substances or in generating hydrogen, or in making
    substances for such use, or in processes of making such compositions or
    mere method of using such compositions.

    (1)     Note.  A material qualifies as a reducing agent either if it is so
    claimed, disclosed or otherwise art-recognized as such.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for a reversible, heat generating composition containing a
    reductant or deoxygenating material.

    178,    for water softening or purifying or scale inhibiting agent
    containing a deoxidant.

    184,    for compositions which are also chemically yielding.

    188.1+, for compositions claimed as a detergent but contains only a
    reductant absent detergent-type ingredients.

    372+,   for gaseous compositions containing a reductant (e.g., H2 + CO).

    410+,   for compositions containing a reductant and claimed or solely
    disclosed as a catalyst.  Included herein are oxygen scavenging or
    deoxidant compositions which function by physical adsorption or absorption;
    where the absorptive or adsorptive process in unclear or unspecified as
    being either physical or chemical, the assumption will be made that the
    process is physical.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing:  Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 101+ for processes of bleaching or
    decolorizing textiles and which are other than the mere application of a
    novel reducing bleach composition.

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, appropriate subclasses for those
    reducing agents which can be considered fuels.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Particulate Mixtures,
    appropriate subclasses for loose mixtures of metal powders.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, appropriate
    subclasses for fuel intended for blasting, firearms, jet propulsion of
    rockets, vehicles, rapidly filling automotive passenger restraining gas
    bags, chemical lasers, etc.  Included in this class are propellants, such
    that, upon initiation, they are capable of undergoing a chemical change at
    a relatively high rate of speed.  Class 149 provides for compositions which
    utilize a reducing agent to produce usable heat in an irreversible or
    nonregenerating manner.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 749+ for processes of
    chemically treating a liquid for the purpose of purifying the liquid using
    a deoxygenating or reducing composition. A method of removing dissolved
    oxygen from water using alkylhydrazines would be classified in subclass 750.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, appropriate subclasses for organic
    compounds, per se, which may be reductive and admixtures of such compounds
    with agents designed to improve the stability of such a compound.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, appropriate subclasses for powder
    of a single metal and for powder of an alloy or metallic composition.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 265+ for an inorganic
    compound, which may be reductive, admixed with an agent designed to improve
    the stability of such a compound.

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, for cleaning
    compositions, particularly subclasses 247+ for deoxidant containing
    descaling agents and subclasses 302+ and 367+ for compositions including a
    chemical bleach component which is a reducing agent.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubber, appropriate subclasses for
    treating a resin with a reducing agent.


CLS 252/188.2
TXT Sulfur containing reductant, bleachant, deoxidant, or generative:

    Composition under subclass 188.1 which contains a sulfur containing
    reductive bleachant, deoxidant, reductant, or generative, e.g., a reductive
    bleaching composition comprised of sodium formaldehyde sulfoxylate and zinc
    sulfate, etc.


CLS 252/188.21
TXT Sulfite:

    Composition under subclass 188.2 which contains a sulfite, e.g., a
    dye-reducing aqueous composition comprised of sodium borohydride and sodium
    sulfite, etc.


CLS 252/188.22
TXT Hydrosulfite (dithionite):

    Composition under subclass 188.21 which contains the specific hydrosulfite
    (dithionite) salt, i.e., (S2 04)-2, e.g., an oxygen consuming composition
    comprised of sodium dithionite (Na2 S2 04) and sodium sulfate, etc.


CLS 252/188.23
TXT With organic additive:

    Composition under subclass 188.22 which contains an organic additive e.g.,
    a reducing composition comprised of sodium dithionite and zinc
    hydroxymethanesulfinate, etc.


CLS 252/188.24
TXT Contains nitrogen:

    Composition under subclass 188.23 which contains either an organic or
    inorganic nitrogen containing additive, e.g., a reducing composition which
    contains an aqueous dispersion of sodium dithionite (also known as
    hydrosulfites or hyposulfites) and ammonium chloride as a solubility
    suppressant, etc.


CLS 252/188.25
TXT Hydrogen generating:

    Composition under subclass 188.1 which generates hydrogen, i.e., one which
    either contains or is designed to supply through chemical action hydrogen,
    e.g., a hydrogen generating composition consisting essentially of lithium
    hydride particles suspended in a liquid mixture of pyridine and benezene,
    etc.

    (1)     Note.  For patents to be placed here there must be a positive
    recitation that the composition generates hydrogen.  Had the example shown
    above been described as a reducing composition rather than hydrogen
    generating, it would have been classified in subclass 188.26.

    (2)     Note.  The ionization of hydrogen containing materials is not
    considered as a hydrogen generating process and therefore not classified
    here.


CLS 252/188.26
TXT Hydride containing:

    Composition under subclass 188.1 which contains a hydride, i.e., a more
    positive element which contains the H - anion, e.g.,Li H, CaH2, Li AlH4,
    etc.


CLS 252/188.27
TXT Contains Al to H bond:

    Composition under subclass 188.26 which contains a compound with an
    aluminum-to-hydrogen bond, e.g., a reducing composition comprising, a
    solution of Na-Al H2 (0 CH2 CH2 - N(CH3)2)2) in tetra-hydrofuran, etc.


CLS 252/188.28
TXT Deoxidant or oxygen scavenging:

    Composition under subclass 188.1 which functions to remove oxygen by
    chemical means, e.g., an oxygen scavenger composition which consists of
    metallic iron, silicic acid, soduim bromide, and calcium sulfate filler,
    etc.


CLS 252/189
TXT Compositions under subclass 182 which contain substances for, or peculiar
    to, use in chemically absorbing or binding extraneous CO, S, negative
    elements, acids, or acid-anhydrides (includes salts of weak acids).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses, particularly 220+, 272+, 339+, 435, etc., for cleaning
    compositions containing an alkaline component.


CLS 252/190
TXT Compositions under subclass 189 which contain an adsorbent.


CLS 252/191
TXT Compositions under subclass 189 which contain elementary iron, or an oxide
    of iron, or other basic iron compound.


CLS 252/192
TXT Compositions under subclass 189 which contain significant amounts of an
    alkali-metal or a compound thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, for mercerizing compositions.


CLS 252/193
TXT Compositions under subclass 182 which contain substances for, or peculiar
    to, use in chemically absorbing or binding extraneous metals, ammonia,
    alkalis, or other extraneous bases, or in making substances for such use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179,    for base exchange compositions for  water softening or scale
    inhibiting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 696+ for liquid
    treating processes which prevent, decrease or delay precipitation.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses for setting bath compositions disclosed to be solely
    for the purpose of precipitation or formation of articles, e.g., filaments
    from a spinning or article forming composition extruded or spun thereinto,
    for example, see subclasses 183+.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 700+ for zeolites and
    appropriate subclasses for aluminosilicate compounds having base-exchange
    capabilities.

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses, particularly subclasses 253, 255, 257, 258+, 269+, etc., for
    cleaning compositions containing an acid component.

    521,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 25+ for solid
    polymeric ion-exchange materials, processes of preparing or regenerating
    them.


CLS 252/194
TXT Compositions under the class definition specialized and designed for, or
    peculiar to, use in absorbing, binding, removing, retaining, or emitting
    water, or maintaining water concentrations within certain ranges, excepting
    mere adsorbents and mere analytical, testing, or indicating compositions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181.1,  for getters for electric lamps, electric space discharge devices,
    and other evacuated or gas or vapor filled  containers which are designed
    to absorb, bind, remove, or retain water vapor from the atmosphere in the
    container.

    408,    for analytical, testing, or indicating compositions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, for a composition comprising a catalyst which may be used in or
    as an incandescent mantle composition.


CLS 252/299.01
TXT LIQUID CRYSTAL COMPOSITIONS:

    Compositions under the class definition containing a mesormorphic state of
    matter which is intermediate between a crystalline solid and a normal
    isotropic liquid; they resemble liquids mechanically (as to viscosity) but
    crystals optically (light scattering and reflection).

    (1)     Note.  The combination of a liquid crystal composition and
    structure is classified with the class providing for the structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 448 for display devices
    using liquid crystals.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 331 for nonchemical infrared imaging
    including liquid crystal detector.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 38, 50+, and 87+ for selective
    electrical control of liquid crystal display devices.

    349,    Liquid Crystal Cells, Elements and Systems, subclasses 1+ and
    182+,  respectively wherein a particular liquid crystal composition is used.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, for liquid
    crystal used to store or retrieve dynamic information stored magnetically.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 108 for liquid
    crystal used to store or retrieve static information.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 30, 84,
    and 242 for timepieces using liquid crystal compositions.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 1 for liquid
    crystal stock material, i.e., a composition having structure provided for
    by the class.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, appropriate subclasses for radiation imagery chemistry involving a
    process, product, or composition using a liquid crystal.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 1+ for
    analytical and analytical control processes employing liquid crystals.

    552,    Organic Compounds, particularly subclasses 502+ for organic
    compounds having liquid crystal properties.


CLS 252/299.1
TXT Containing pleochroic dye:

    Compositions under subclass 299.01 containing a dye capable of variable
    absorption of light, e.g., colorless to colored, colorless to fluorescent,
    etc.


CLS 252/299.2
TXT Containing dopant salt:

    Compositions under subclass 299.01 containing a minor amount of salt added
    to a liquid crystalline material.


CLS 252/299.3
TXT Containing charge-transfer agents:

    Compositions under subclass 299.01 containing charge carriers of the redox
    type, etc.


CLS 252/299.4
TXT Containing nonchiral aligning agents:

    Compositions under subclass 299.01 containing additives not optically
    active which promote the alignment of the composition relative to the cell
    walls of the device containing the same.


CLS 252/299.5
TXT Containing nonchiral additive having no specified mesophase:

    Compositions under subclass 299.01 containing additives not optically
    active which do not have liquid crystal properties, e.g., liquids which
    improve the viscosity, response time, anisotropy, etc.


CLS 252/299.6
TXT Containing nonsteryl liquid crystalline compound of specified structure:

    Compositions under subclass 299.01 containing a liquid crystal compound of
    specified chemical structure for which a definite structural formula can be
    drawn and which does not contain the cyclopentanophenanthren  neucleus,
    i.e.,

    (1)     Note.  A polymer which is not of a single molecular species and is
    identifiable as an average of various molecular species is excluded
    herefrom. A polymer which is a single molecular species, e.g., dimer, etc.,
    is included hereunder.  The recitation "polymer" will be presumed to be
    material of no single molecular species in the absence of specific contrary
    disclosure.


CLS 252/299.61
TXT Including heterocyclic ring:

    Compositions under subclass 299.6 wherein the liquid crystal compound has a
    ring of three or more members, at least one of which is carbon and one or
    more members selected from nitrogen or chalcogen.


CLS 252/299.62
TXT Including fused or bridged rings:

    Compositions under subclass 299.6 wherein the liquid crystal compound has
    at least two rings with two or more carbon atoms in common, i.e.,
    polycyclic rings.


CLS 252/299.63
TXT Including fully saturated ring:

    Compositions under subclass 299.6 wherein the liquid crystal compound has a
    carbocyclic ring which does not have any carbon to carbon unsaturation.


CLS 252/299.64
TXT Aryl ester of aryl acid having three benzene rings:

    Compositions under subclass 299.6 wherein the liquid crystal compound has
    an acid containing a benzene ring which is attached through its acid
    function to the radical derived by the removal of -OH from an alcohol
    containing a benzene ring.  The compound must also contain three or more
    benzene rings.


CLS 252/299.65
TXT Benzene rings linked by direct bond:

    Compositions under subclass 299.64 wherein the liquid crystal ester
    compound having three or more benzene rings also has at least two benzene
    rings linked together by a direct bond.


CLS 252/299.66
TXT Benzene rings linked by direct bond:

    Compositions under subclass 299.6 wherein the liquid crystal compound has
    at least two benzene rings linked together by a direct bond.


CLS 252/299.67
TXT Phenyl benzoate derivative:

    Compositions under subclass 299.6 wherein the liquid crystal compound is a
    ring substituted derivative of


CLS 252/299.68
TXT Including benzene rings bonded through azo, azoxy, or azomethine linkage:

    Compositions under subclass 299.6 wherein the liquid crystal compound is a
    ring substituted derivative of



    wherein X is -CH=N-, -N=N, or
    -NO-N-.


CLS 252/299.7
TXT Cholesteric liquid crystal composition containing a sterol derivative:

    Compositions under subclass 299.01 having a


    cholesteric containing compound which is a derivative of the structure


CLS 252/301.16
TXT Compositions under the class definition which contain an organic substance
    having the property of emitting light or analogous rays as a result of
    irradiation by wave energy radiated by some other source.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass are placed patents directed to compositions
    which contain ingredients which require excitation to become fluorescent or
    phosphorescent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62.51+, for luminescent magnetic compositions.

    188.3,  for chemiluminescent compositions.

    301.1,  for luminescent compositions containing substances which are
    spontaneously radioactive.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 302 for radiation tracer methods including
    fluorescent and phosphorescent tracer materials, subclasses 361+ for
    invisible radiant energy responsive signalling devices which include a
    fluorescent or phosphorescent detector responsive to the invisible
    radiation, subclass 458.1 for methods and apparatus to irradiate
    fluorescent and phosphorescent devices, and subclass 483.1 for fluorescent
    and phosphorescent devices.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, appropriate subclasses for
    luminescent organic compounds, per se.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 92 for cathode ray
    tubes having a fluorescent or phosphorescent screen or target, and
    subclasses 108+ for electric lamps and space discharge devices which
    include a fluorescent or phosphorescent substance as a part thereof.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 84 for illuminating devices in combination
    with fluorescent or phosphorescent material.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 157+ for processes of making a
    luminescent coating.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclass 139 for luminescent imagery.

    508,    Solid Antifriction Devices, Materials Therefor, Lubricant and
    Separant Compositions for Moving Solid Surfaces, and Miscellaneous Mineral
    Oil Compositions, particularly subclasses 110+, for lubricating oils
    containing fluorescent ingredients.


    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Class 523, subclass 161 for a composition containing a
    synthetic resin or natural rubber having utility as an invisible,
    ballpoint, or typewriter ink or to processes of preparing said composition.


CLS 252/301.17
TXT Compositions under subclass 301.16 in which the luminescent material either
    (1) can be stimulated to emit coherent light or other electromagnetic
    radiation, i.e., optical maser, or (2) luminesces under exposure to
    ionizing radiation, i.e., radio-photoluminescent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes and non-coating apparatus for
    growing therein-defined single-crystal of all types of materials, including
    those which may be suitable as or to produce a lasing or scintillating
    composition.  Class 118 generally provides for coating apparatus, including
    single-crystal (e.g., epitaxy) coating means.

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, appropriate subclasses for lasers.


CLS 252/301.18
TXT Compositions under subclass 301.17 which contain a metal having a specific
    gravity greater than four.


CLS 252/301.19
TXT Compositions under subclass 301.16 which are to be employed as flaw
    penetrants for detecting surface discontinuties in test bodies.


CLS 252/301.21
TXT Compositions under subclass 301.16 which are to be applied to or
    incorporated in materials in order to obtain a bleaching effect or a whiter
    appearance in daylight.


CLS 252/301.22
TXT Compositions under subclass 301.21 which contain a heterocyclic compound
    having two cyclic nuclei joined together through a straight chain linkage
    containing at least one methine group.


CLS 252/301.23
TXT Compositions under subclass 301.22 in which the compound contains a
    six-membered ring with at least two hetero atoms, at least one of which is
    nitrogen.


CLS 252/301.24
TXT Compositions under subclass 301.22 in which the compound contains a
    five-membered ring having at least two hetero atoms of which one is
    nitrogen and one is either oxygen or sulfur.


CLS 252/301.25
TXT Compositions under subclass 301.21 which contain a heterocyclic compound
    having a six-membered ring with at least two hetero atoms, at least one of
    which is nitrogen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, subclasses 241+ for azine compounds,
    per se.


CLS 252/301.26
TXT Compositions under subclass 301.21 which contain a heterocyclic compound
    having a hexatomic ring made up of five carbon atoms and one nitrogen atom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    546,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 1+ for compounds, per se, having a
    six-membered ring and having one hetero-N-atom.


CLS 252/301.27
TXT Compositions under subclass 301.21 which contain a heterocyclic compound
    having a five-membered ring having at least two hetero atoms, at least one
    of which is a nitrogen atom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    548,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 100+ for azole compounds, per se.


CLS 252/301.28
TXT Compositions under subclass 301.27 in which the ring also contains sulfur
    or oxygen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    548,    Organic Compounds, appropriate subclasses for thiazole and oxazole
    compounds, per se.


CLS 252/301.29
TXT Compositions under subclass 301.27 in which the ring contains three or four
    nitrogen atoms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    548,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 250 - 269.4 for tri- or tetrazole
    compounds, per se.


CLS 252/301.31
TXT Compositions under subclass 301.21 which contain a heterocyclic compound
    having a pentatomic ring made up of four carbon atoms and one nitrogen atom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    548,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 400+ for compounds, per se, having a
    five-membered ring composed of four carbon atoms and one nitrogen atom.


CLS 252/301.32
TXT Compositions under subclass 301.21 which contain a heterocyclic compound
    which contains either oxygen or sulfur as a hetero atom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    549,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 1+ for sulfur containing hetero rings
    and subclasses 200+ for hetero-O-atom compounds, per se.


CLS 252/301.33
TXT Compositions under subclass 301.16 which contain an inorganic material
    which is luminescent in addition to the organic luminescent material.


CLS 252/301.34
TXT Compositions under subclass 301.16 which includes (1) a film forming
    material which occurs in nature (2) "cellulose" which is a carbohydrate
    material derived from the structural matter of plant life including
    lignocellulose, cotton and modified forms such a cellophane and rayon or
    (3) cellulosic derivatives such as cellulose esters or ethers.


CLS 252/301.35
TXT Compositions under subclass 301.16 which include a synthetic resin.

    (1)     Note.  For the scope of the term "synthetic resin", see Class 260,
    subclass 2 definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Class 523, subclass 136 for a composition containing a
    synthetic resin or natural rubber which is resistant to, yet does not
    absorb, radioactive materials or cathode rays or to processes of preparing
    said composition.


CLS 252/301.36
TXT Compositions under the class definition which contain an inorganic material
    having the property of emitting light or analogous rays as a result of
    irradiation by wave energy radiated by some other source, and an organic
    material which does not have such a property.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301.4+ and 301.16+, for organic and other inorganic luminescent
    compositions respectively, and see the search notes therein for itemization
    of other possible pertinent fields of search.


CLS 252/301.4
TXT INORGANIC LUMINESCENT COMPOSITIONS:

    Compositions under the class definition which are constituted entirely of
    inorganic material and contain a component having the property of emitting
    light or analogous rays as a result of irradiation by wave energy radiated
    by some other source.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses also include compositions
    in the preparation of which a temporary organic vehicle, binder or adjuvant
    is employed and which is removed or destroyed in the course thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301.16  and 301.36, for luminescent compositions containing organic
    material which may include inorganic luminescent material; and see the
    search notes therein for itemization of other possibly pertinent fields of
    search.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses, for
    inorganic luminescent compounds, per se.


CLS 252/301.5
TXT Compositions under subclass 301.4 which contain tungsten in combined or
    elemental form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclass 248 for a consolidated metal powder composition having a
    noble metal or copper base.


CLS 252/301.6
TXT Compositions under subclass 301.4 which contain zinc or cadmium in combined
    or elemental form.


CLS 252/302
TXT Compositions under the class definition which are colloid systems;
    processes of making or of resolving (breaking) the same; gels, coagulates;
    potential dispersands (compositions containing in each case a material
    adapted to be colloidally dispersed and a substance for colloidally
    dispersing or stabilizing a colloidal dispersion of the same); processes of
    using colloid systems; compositions specialized and designed for use in, or
    peculiar to, such systems, gels, coagulates, dispersands, or processes,
    including wetting agents, substances for stabilizing, resolving, or
    inhibiting formation of such systems, and for dispersing materials.

    (1)     Note.  A single chemical compound or element in finely-divided
    solid state is not considered to be a colloid, a colloid system, or
    colloidal, irrespective of the degree of subdivision thereof.  Search for
    such mere finely-divided compounds or elements in the classes where such
    compounds or elements, respectively are classifiable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 40+ for flow restrictor
    apparatus for forming emulsions of a plurality of liquids.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses, particularly subclasses 15+ and 38+ for processes and apparatus
    for producing suspensions of a solid in a liquid by comminuting operations.
     See section 3 of the main class definition of Class 241 for a complete
    statement of the line.

    366,    Agitating, particularly subclasses 176.1+ for process and apparatus
    for forming suspensions or emulsions by agitation.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses
    1.11+ for the class defined compositions or methods comprising a
    radionuclide or intended radionuclide, including those which may be
    colloidal or an emulsion.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    appropriate subclasses, for processes of forming food materials in
    collodial suspensions and emulsions and the products or compositions
    produced thereby.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, particularly Classes 523 and
    524 for aqueous dispersions, latexes, or colloidal dispersions of a polymer
    including natural rubber proper for that class.


CLS 252/303
TXT Processes under subclass 302 which include (1) separating two or more
    materials, which differ from each other either chemically or merely
    physically, or (2) comminuting or preparing materials in a finely-divided
    state, as final products substantially free from colloid stabilizers
    therefor, by procedures which comprise formations of resolutions of colloid
    systems or use of such systems as agents, or (3) products under subclass
    302 when made by such processes.

    (1)     Note.  Mere processes of resolving (breaking) colloid systems and
    products each of which contains a finely-divided substance and an agent for
    stabilizing colloid dispersions thereof, and processes of making such
    products are excluded from this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    319+,   for processes of resolving colloidal systems.

    363.5,  for finely-divided solids combined with an agent to facilitate
    dispersion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclass 29 for processes of
    separating paraffin from associated mineral oil which include the formation
    of an emulsion or dispersion.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 5 for
    processes of separating solids from solids by flocculation or
    deflocculation.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses; see the reference to Class 241 under "Search Class" in subclass
    302 above.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 5+ for processes of forming solid particulate material directly
    from a molten or liquid mass, e.g., liquid comminuting.


CLS 252/304
TXT Colloid systems under subclass 302 or processes of making the same.

    (1)     Note.  Colloidal systems are compositions which include a
    discontinuous dispersion of one phase in a continuous second phase.


CLS 252/305
TXT Colloid systems under subclass 304 in which the outermost continuous phase
    (outermost dispersion medium) is a gas, or processes of making the same.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 213 for smoke producing
    apparatus and systems limited to skywriting.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, appropriate
    subclasses and particularly subclasses 29+, 37+ and 78+ for explosive or
    thermic compositions which may be intended to yield smoke as result of
    combustion.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 8 and 9 for
    processes of dispersing liquids into gases.


CLS 252/306
TXT Colloid systems under subclass 304 in which the outermost continuous phase
    (outermost dispersion medium) is a liquid, or processes of making the same.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    508,    Solid Antifriction Devices, Materials Therefor, Lubricant and
    Separant Compositions for Moving Solid Surfaces, and Miscellaneous Mineral
    Oil Compositions, particularly subclasses 110+, for lubricants containing
    colloidally dispersed solid matter.


CLS 252/307
TXT Colloid systems under subclass 306 which include a gas directly dispersed
    in the outermost (liquid) phase, or processes of making the same.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      6.5 and 8.05, for fire extinguishive foams.

    61,     for froth flotation compositions.

    350,    for compositions containing a gas generative agent and a foam
    stabilizing agent.


CLS 252/308
TXT Colloid systems under subclass 306 in which the major part of the outermost
    continuous phase consists of one or more organic compounds, or processes of
    making the same.


CLS 252/309
TXT Colloid systems under subclass 308 in which the major part of the solid or
    liquid matter, directly dispersed in the outermost phase, consists of one
    or more chemical elements or inorganic compounds.


CLS 252/310
TXT Colloid systems under subclass 308 in which the major part of the outermost
    continuous phase consists of water, or processes of making the same.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    507,    Earth Boring, Well Treating, and Oil Field Chemistry, subclasses
    100+ for earth boring and well treating colloidal dispersions.


CLS 252/311
TXT Colloid systems under subclass 310 in which the major part of the solid or
    liquid matter directly dispersed in the outermost phase consists of one or
    more organic compounds.


CLS 252/311.5
TXT Colloid systems under subclass 311 wherein the dispersands comprise a
    bituminous material which is usually a solid or semi-solid hydrocarbon such
    as, for example, asphalt, pitch, tar or paraffin wax.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 106, Compositions: Coating or Plastic, subclass
    277 for coating or plastic compositions prepared by admixing bituminous
    emulsions with other ingredients.  The line between Classes 106 and 252 in
    regard to bituminous emulsions is as follows:  Processes of preparing
    bituminous emulsions and the emulsions so produced are in Class 252 even
    though the emulsions have utility as coating or plastic compositions,
    unless the emulsions contain ingredients over and above those necessary for
    the preparation or maintenance of the colloid system, such as, for example,
    cementitious material, pigments, fillers or aggregates.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, see (1) Note above.


CLS 252/312
TXT Colloid systems under subclass 311 in which the matter directly dispersed
    in the outermost phase is an oil or is in a liquid state.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424     and 514, Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions,
    subclasses 1.11+ for class defined compositions or methods comprising a
    radionuclide or intended radionuclide and Class 514, subclasses 939+, for a
    composition which is a mineral oil-water emulsion.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 194+ for food emulsions.

    508,    Solid Antifriction Devices, Materials Therefor, Lubricant and
    Separant Compositions for Moving Solid Surfaces, and Miscellaneous Mineral
    Oil Compositions, particularly subclasses 110+, for lubricants containing
    colloidal dispersions of oil.


CLS 252/313.1
TXT Inorganic major dispersands only:

    Colloid systems under subclass 310 in which the major part of the solid or
    liquid matter directly dispersed in the outermost phase consists of one or
    more chemical elements or inorganic compounds.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    508,    Solid Antifriction Devices, Materials Therefor, Lubricant and
    Separant Compositions for Moving Solid Surfaces, and Miscellaneous Mineral
    Oil Compositions, particularly subclasses 110+, for lubricants containing
    colloidallly dispersed inorganic matter.


CLS 252/313.2
TXT Silica:

    Subject matter under subclass 313.1 wherein silica is the chemical element
    or in the inorganic compound.


CLS 252/314
TXT Processes under subclass 306 which include making colloid systems in which
    in each case the outermost continuous phase is a liquid.

    (1)     Note.  Patents which include claims for colloid system products are
    not classifiable here but in the appropriate subclass above providing for
    the product.


CLS 252/315.01
TXT Gels, coagulates, or dispersands:

    Subject matter under subclass 302 includes a gel, coagulate or a potential
    dispersand, i.e., a composition which contains a material, adapted to be
    colloidally dispersed, admixed with a substance either for colloidally
    dispersing or stabilizing a colloidal dispersion or processes of making
    thereof.

    (1)     Note.  A gel is defined as a two-component system of a semi-solid
    nature, i.e., a colloidal solution of a liquid in a solid.  The gelling
    component is usually of the lyophilic type and present in concentrations
    less than 10 percent.  As defined, this would exclude silica gels and
    aluminosilicate gels and other materials which are described as being
    particulate, microspheroidal, spheroidal, etc. or possessing descriptive
    properties, e.g., pore volume, pore diameter, surface area, etc. and any
    term or expression which will indicate destruction of the two-component
    system.

    (2)     Note.  A gelled composition which is claimed or solely as having a
    function or utility is provided for in one of the composition classes.  See
    this class, under Main Class Definitions (5) Note.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194,    for a composition which is designed to remove or bind water in the
    form of a gel.

    410+,   for materials is designed to catalyze, absorb or adsorb liquids and
    producing gels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, subclasses 112+ for gelatin or
    gel-like proteins.

    521,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 28 for the mixture of
    a synthetic ion exchange resin in gel form; subclasses 53+, for the gel of
    aporous synthetic resin.

    523,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 100-173, for
    nonporous synthetic polymeric gels with specified functions or uses.

    524,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 1+ for synthetic
    polymeric gels.


CLS 252/315.1
TXT Organic:

    Subject matter under subclass 315.01 wherein the composition contains
    organic material.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 260, main class definition for a definition to
    organic material.


CLS 252/315.2
TXT Inorganic material coated, impregnated, or surface-modified with organic
    material:

    Subject matter under subclass 315.1 wherein inorganic material has been
    rendered organophilic by coating, inpregnating or surface-modifying with
    organic material.


CLS 252/315.3
TXT Carbohydrate or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 315.1 wherein the organic material is a
    carbohydrate or derivative thereof.


CLS 252/315.4
TXT Carboxylic acid ester, acid, or salt thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 315.1 wherein the organic material is a
    carboxylic acid ester, acid or salt thereof.


CLS 252/315.5
TXT Metal silicate or clay:

    Subject matter under subclass 315.01 wherein the composition contains a
    metal silicate or clay, e.g., bentonite, kaolin, etc.


CLS 252/315.6
TXT Silica:

    Subject matter under subclass 315.01 wherein the composition contains
    silica.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 315.01 for the definition of a gel
    proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclass 338 silica by gelling,
    wherein the silica is described in particulate terms, e.g.,
    microspheroidal, spheroidal, pore volume, pore diameter, surface area,
    etc., or wherein described as an aerogel or xerogel.


CLS 252/315.7
TXT Alumina:

    Subject matter under subclass 315.01 wherein the composition contains
    alumina.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 315.01 for the definition of a gel
    proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 625+ aluminum
    compounds, for alumina gel, wherein the alumina gel is described in
    particulate terms, e.g., microspheroidal, spheroidal, pore volume, pore
    diameter, surface area, etc.


CLS 252/318
TXT Compositions under subclass 302 which include material which, per se, is
    adapted to a colloidally disperse, or be colloidally dispersed, or function
    as a colloid dispersion medium, and a substance for preventing or
    inhibiting colloidal dispersal of or in such material.


CLS 252/319
TXT Processes under subclass 302 which include breaking an emulsion; separating
    part or all of any colloidally dispersed phase or colloid dispersion medium
    from part, or all, of any other phase of a colloid system; destroying the
    colloidal dispersion state of part or all of any colloidally dispersed
    phase; inhibiting formation of an emulsion or other colloid system, or
    inhibiting colloidal dispersal of matter.

    (1)     Note.  Mere removal of a colloid-stabilizing agent from a mineral
    oil for the purpose of preventing formation of an emulsion, or colloid,
    containing the mineral oil, is classified in Class 208, Mineral Oils:
    Processes and Products, subclasses 177+ and particularly subclass 263.

    (2)     Note.  Class 210 is the locus for the separating or purification of
    a liquid, generally claimed and for the separation, purification, or
    treatment of water, specifically.  Class 252 in the locus for the
    resolution of colloids and will take the separation of liquids, generally
    claimed, by breaking an emulsion and including ancillary steps as decanting
    or passing through a separatory funnel, etc. Class 210 will take (a) a step
    of emulsion breaking of liquids generally claimed, combined with the
    separation of a diverse component (unless also by emulsion breaking), or
    (b) a step of emulsion breaking, per se, for the purpose of obtaining
    water.  The water may be intended for use of for disposal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, for processes involving steps resulting
    in separation of a gas from a fluid mixture comprising (a) a gas and solid
    or liquid particles entrained therein, (b) a liquid and gas entrained
    therein, or (c) a plurality of gases.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 244.1+ for processes of preventing
    emulsification, or breaking emulsions in a well, which include
    significantly claimed process steps of well treating or well operation.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, for electric or
    electrolytic processes of resolving colloid systems compositions which are
    the result of a wave energy process are classified with the art use of said
    composition or apparatus thereof.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, for processes of breaking
    mineral oil and water emulsions combined with some other treatment of the
    mineral oil. See (1) Note above.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, for separating solid
    from solids in general.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 600+ for a process of
    separating a liquid or solid from a liquid by a method which is more than
    mere resolution of a colloid, and see (2) Note.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 262+ for
    processes of resolving colloid systems which include fermentation.


CLS 252/320
TXT Processes under subclass 319 in which the colloid systems treated or
    formations thereof inhibited, include in each case a colloid system in
    which the outermost continuous phase (outermost dispersion medium) is a
    liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 262+ for
    processes of resolving colloid systems which include fermentation.


CLS 252/321
TXT Processes under subclass 320 in which the substance directly dispersed in
    the outermost phase of the colloid system treated, or formation thereof
    inhibited, is a gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 241+ for processes of
    degasification of a liquid.  Class 252 takes processes for breaking foam or
    inhibiting foam formation in a liquid by utilization of defoaming or foam
    inhibiting compositions alone or combined with a mechanical or manipulative
    operation to break the foam.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 170.1+ for apparatus for controlling the
    degree of frothing or foaming in the handling of gas charged liquids.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 264 for apparatus for breaking
    foam during distillation.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclass 20 for a
    distillation process including defoaming or inhibiting foam.

    435,    Chemistry: Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 301.1+
    for fermentation apparatus including means for breaking foams.


CLS 252/322
TXT Processes under subclass 320 which include bringing the materials to be
    treated into contact with solid agents which function as adsorbents, solid
    physical absorbents, differential adherence surfaces, or otherwise as loose
    particulate solid matter functioning physically only.


CLS 252/323
TXT Processes under subclass 322 in which the treating substance contains both
    an organic compound and a free chemical element or an inorganic compound,
    other than water.


CLS 252/324
TXT Processes under subclass 322 in which the treating substances contain free
    chemical elements or inorganic compounds, other than water.


CLS 252/325
TXT Processes under subclass 322 in which the treating substances contain
    organic compounds.


CLS 252/326
TXT Processes under subclass 320 which include adding solid or liquid treating
    substances other than the principal components of the material treated.


CLS 252/327
TXT Processes under subclass 326 which include adding treating substances,
    other than mere carrier-solvents for other treating agents, and other than
    the principal components of the material treated in each case, which
    physically or chemically dissolve, bind, or destroy, part or all of the
    colloidally dispersed substances or colloid dispersion media, other than
    the stabilizing agents or which are liquid baths.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    348,    for processes which include addition of one or more of the
    principal components of the material being treated.


CLS 252/328
TXT Processes under subclass 326 in which the colloid systems treated, or
    formation thereof inhibited, include colloidal dispersions of water in
    petroleum or hydrocarbons or vice versa.


CLS 252/329
TXT Processes under subclass 328 in which the added treating substance includes
    both an organic compound and a free chemical element or an inorganic
    compound other than water.


CLS 252/330
TXT Processes under subclass 328 in which the added treating substance includes
    a free chemical element or inorganic compound other than water.


CLS 252/331
TXT Processes under subclass 328 in which the added treating substance includes
    an organic compound.


CLS 252/332
TXT Processes under subclass 331 in which the added substance includes an
    organic compound which contains a sulfo or sulfate radical or sulfur joined
    directly to oxygen.


CLS 252/333
TXT Processes under subclass 332 in which the added substance includes an
    organic compound produced by treating petroleum or fraction thereof with
    sulfuric acid or other sulfonating agent.


CLS 252/334
TXT Processes under subclass 333 in which the added substance includes an
    organic amine, amide, or nitrogen-base radical.


CLS 252/335
TXT Processes under subclass 332 in which the added substance includes a
    protein or an organic compound having a carboxyl radical.


CLS 252/336
TXT Processes under subclass 335 in which the added substance includes an
    organic amine, amide, or nitrogen-base radical.


CLS 252/337
TXT Processes under subclass 335 in which an added sulfoxy or carboxylic
    compound contains a carbon ring or is not an aliphatic compound.


CLS 252/338
TXT Processes under subclass 332 in which the added substance includes an
    organic amine, amide, or nitrogen-base radical.


CLS 252/339
TXT Processes under subclass 332 in which the added substance includes an
    organic compound which does not contain a sulfo or sulfate radical, sulfur
    joined directly to oxygen, or a carboxyl, amine, amide, or nitrogen-base
    radical.


CLS 252/340
TXT Processes under subclass 331 in which the added substance includes a
    protein or an organic compound having a carboxyl radical.


CLS 252/341
TXT Processes under subclass 340 in which the added substance includes an
    organic amine, amide, or nitrogen-base radical.


CLS 252/342
TXT Processes under subclass 340 in which an added carboxylic compound contains
    a carbon ring or is not an aliphatic compound.


CLS 252/343
TXT Processes under subclass 340 in which the added treating substance includes
    an organic compound which does not contain a carboxylic, amine, amide, or
    nitrogen-base radical.


CLS 252/344
TXT Processes under subclass 331 in which the added substance includes an
    organic amine, amide, or nitrogen-base radical.


CLS 252/345
TXT Processes under subclass 331 in which the added treating substance
    comprises an organic compound which contains an element other than carbon,
    hydrogen, and oxygen.


CLS 252/346
TXT Processes under subclass 320 which include vaporizing, heating, or cooling
    part, or all, of any phase.


CLS 252/347
TXT Processes under subclass 346 which include mechanical treatment.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for instance filtering, specific
    agitation, mechanically shocking or centrifuging.


CLS 252/348
TXT Processes under subclass 346 which include addition, to the material being
    treated of one or more of the principal components thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327,    for resolving colloids which include solvents or liquid baths other
    than a component of the colloid.


CLS 252/349
TXT Processes under subclass 320 which include filtering, centrifuging,
    mechanical shock or other mechanical treatment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322+,   for use of adsorbents, or screens or filter beds in resolving
    colloids.


CLS 252/350
TXT Compositions under subclass 302 for use in producing foams which comprise
    in each case a foam-stabilizing agent and a substance for use in generating
    a gas chemically or otherwise.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      6.5 and 8.05, for fire extinguishing foams or making same or
    compositions for making same.

    61,     for compositions for froth flotation.

    307,    for foam compositions and processes for making foams.


CLS 252/351
TXT Compositions under subclass 302 which comprise wetting, emulsifying,
    foam-stabilizing or colloid dispersing or stabilizing agents, or processes
    of making such compositions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      6.5, 7, 8.05, and 350, for other compositions including colloid
    stabilizing or wetting agents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 400-696 for dyeing compositions including
    wetting agents.


CLS 252/352
TXT Compositions under subclass 351 which comprise both an organic compound and
    a free chemical element or an inorganic compound other than water, or
    processes of making such compositions.


CLS 252/353
TXT Compositions under subclass 351 which comprise organic compounds which
    contain a sulfo or sulfate radical or sulfur joined directly to oxygen, or
    processes of making such compositions.


CLS 252/354
TXT Compositions under subclass 353 which comprise proteins or organic
    compounds which contain carboxyl radicals, or processes of making such
    compositions.


CLS 252/355
TXT Compositions under subclass 353 which comprise organic compounds which
    contain amine, amide or nitrogen-base radicals, or processes of making such
    compositions.


CLS 252/356
TXT Compositions under subclass 351 which comprise proteins or organic
    compounds which contain carboxyl radicals, or processes of making such
    compositions.


CLS 252/357
TXT Compositions under subclass 351 which comprise organic compounds which
    contain amine, amide, or nitrogen-base radicals, or processes of making
    such compositions.


CLS 252/358
TXT Compositions under subclass 302 which are substances for use in breaking
    emulsions or resolving colloid systems, or inhibiting formation of
    emulsions or other colloids, in which the primary dispersants are liquids,
    or processes of making such compositions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    318,    for compositions including potential dispersands or dispersants
    with agents which will inhibit the formation of a colloid system.

    319+,   for processes of resolving colloids or inhibiting colloidization
    involving the use of colloid resolving or colloidalization inhibiting
    agents.


CLS 252/363.5
TXT Compositions under the class definition in which each contains a main
    substance present as a solid phase and a second substance incorporated or
    associated therewith for accelerating the rate of solution or dispersion of
    the main substance in a fluid, and processes of making the same.

    (1)     Note.  For compositions containing substances in a granular state
    and agents associated therewith for inhibiting caking of the granules,
    search where the substances are classifiable respectively.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315+,   for compositions each of which contains a main solid substance and
    a second substance associated therewith for stabilizing or accelerating
    colloidal dispersion of the main substance.


CLS 252/364
TXT Compositions under the class definition specialized and designed for, or
    peculiar to use as solvents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for solvents for volatile refrigerants.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclass 311 for vehicles or
    solvents for use in the production of coating or plastic compositions.

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses, particularly subclasses 118, 177+, 201+, and 405+, for cleaning
    compositions which include solvents.


CLS 252/365
TXT Compositions under the class definition which in each case contain a
    substance as a base and another substance (denaturant) for preventing or
    hindering use of the base substance as a beverage or ingestion thereof,
    materials (denaturants) for use as such other substances, or processes of
    making such compositions or materials.


CLS 252/366
TXT Compositions under subclass 365 in which in each case the base substance
    contains an alcohol.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclasses 266+ for solidified
    alkanol, and subclasses  402, 411, 438, 446, and  451+  for liquid fuels
    containing alkanol.


CLS 252/367.1
TXT SOAPS (I.E., ALKALI-METAL SALTS OF WATER-INSOLUBLE FATTY ACIDS OR OF ROSIN
    ACIDS):

    Compositions under the class definition which include an alkali-metal
    (i.e., Li, Na, K, Rb, or Cs) salt of an unsubstituted or
    hydroxy-substituted, saturated or unsaturated, higher fatty acid, or of
    rosin (abietic) acid, which are of general utility and lack any shape or
    structure to adapt them for use as cleaning agents; or processes of
    preparing such compositions.

    (1)     Note.  A higher fatty acid is a water-insoluble monocarboxylic acid
    having an acyclic chain of at least seven carbons attached directly to the
    carboxyl group by nonionic bonding.

    (2)     Note.  The compositions in this class frequently include salts of
    mixtures of fatty acids derived from different natural sources, such as two
    or more vegetable or fish oils, animal fats, etc.

    (3)     Note.  The compositions included herein are, for example, used in
    well-drilling fluids, used in lubricant compositions, combined with other
    components, or refined for use as detergents and the like.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses, particularly subclasses 152+, 447+, 481+, etc., for
    soap-containing cleaning compositions.

    554,    Organic Compounds, appropriate subclasses, for higher fatty acid
    salts, per se.


CLS 252/372
TXT Compositions under the class definition which are gaseous, or processes of
    making them.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181.5,  for gaseous getters for electric lamps, electric space discharge
    devices and other evacuted or gas or vapor filled containers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, for processes of, and apparatus
    for, making producer gas, water-gas or other fuel gases.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 300+ for gaseous compositions used in metallurgical
    processes.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 567+ for electric
    lamps and electric space discharge devices (e.g., radio tubes) which have
    an envelope containing a gas and/or vapor composition.

    424     and 514, Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions,
    appropriate subclass for a gaseous anesthetic composition and subclass 789
    for a life supporting gaseous composition, e.g., deep sea breathing gases,
    etc.


CLS 252/373
TXT Compositions under subclass 372 which contain significant amounts of both
    carbon monoxide, or carbon-dioxide, and hydrogen, or processes of making
    such compositions.

    (1)     Note.  Where there is no claim to the product, and the process
    claims derive the gaseous mixture from a hydrocarbon gas, the patent is
    classified in Class 48, Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, and is generally
    not necessarily cross-referenced here, see especially Class 48, subclass
    198.1.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    518,    Chemistry:  Fischer-Tropsch Processes; or Purification or Recovery
    of  Products Thereof, for processes of reacting carbon oxides with hydrogen
    and the products thereof.


CLS 252/374
TXT Compositions under subclass 372 which in each case contain significant
    amounts of both nitrogen and hydrogen, or processes of making such
    compositions.


CLS 252/375
TXT Compositions under subclass 374 in which the direct source of the nitrogen
    is air or elementary nitrogen only and the direct source of the hydrogen is
    wholly or partly a chemcial compound of hydrogen.


CLS 252/376
TXT Compositions under subclass 375 in which the direct source of the hydrogen
    is wholly or partly hydrocarbon matter.


CLS 252/377
TXT Compositions under subclass 374 in which the direct sources of the nitrogen
    and hydrogen are elementary nitrogen and hydrogen only, processes of making
    such compositions, or processes of purifying compositions which
    individually contain both elementary nitrogen and elementary hydrogen.


CLS 252/378
TXT Processes under the class definition of exfoliating or intumescing
    vermiculite, other micaceous substances, or other materials, or the
    products of such processes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 323.4 for apparatus for
    puffing or intumescing cereal foods.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses
    particularly subclasses 122, 601+ and 672+ for coating or plastic
    compositions containing expanded materials, and subclasses 417+ for
    micaceous pigments or fillers.

    125,    Stone Working, subclasses 23.01+ for processes of or apparatus for
    splitting mica or other materials.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 4 for
    processes of comminuting micaceous substances.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    appropriate subclasses for puffing or intumescing food grain.


CLS 252/380
TXT Compositions under the class definition specialized and designed for, or
    peculiar to, use as or in agents or materials for preventing, inhibiting or
    reducing chemical or physical changes in other substances or bodies when
    incorporated or associated therewith, and processes of making the same,
    excepting compositions and processes of making them which are primarily for
    use as analytical, testing, or indicating compositions.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and indented subclasses take old compounds
    limited to use as preserving agents and also the combination of a
    preserving agent with the substance preserved where such substance is so
    broadly claimed as not to afford a basis of classification, e.g., "an
    organic substance."  See the class definition of this class, (4) Note.

    (2)     Note.  For compositions, or processes of making them, each of which
    contains a main substance and an agent for inhibiting caking of granules
    of, chemical decomposition of, or other chemical or physical change of, the
    main substance, search where the main substance is classifiable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for compositions including agents for inhibiting crystallization.

    601+,   for fire-proofing compositions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, for protective coating or
    impregnating compositions.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, appropriate subclasses for processes for
    disinfecting, deodorizing, preserving, or sterilizing.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, for a
    composition for repelling, inhibiting or destroying a pest such as
    bacteria, fungus, etc.


CLS 252/381
TXT Compositions under subclass 380 specialized and designed for or peculiar to
    use as or in agents for preventing, inhibiting or reducing caking of
    granular material, or use in the form of distinct coating blankets, layers
    or zones with respect to the materials with which they are associated
    respectively.

    (1)     Note.  For compositions each of which contains a main substance and
    an agent for inhibiting caking of granules of the main substance, search
    where the main substance is classifiable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+      and 601+, for fire extinguishing or fire-proofing agents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 303+ for solid treating compositions for molten metal
    and subclass 709 for processes of covering the surface of molten metal with
    a material to prevent contact with the ambient atmosphere.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, for coating compositions.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 40+ for process of storage or
    protection using a protective layer over the material being stored or
    protected.


CLS 252/382
TXT Compositions under subclass 381 which are essentially foams, liquids, or
    other fluids.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for fire extinguishing foams.

    8.1,    for fire preventing foams.

    62,     for heat-insulating compositions.


CLS 252/383
TXT Compositions under subclass 381 each of which contains both an organic
    compound and an inorganic compound or element.


CLS 252/384
TXT Compositions under subclass 381 which contain organic compounds.


CLS 252/385
TXT Compositions under subclass 381 which contain inorganic compounds or
    elements.


CLS 252/387
TXT Compositions under subclass 380 specialized and designed for, or peculiar
    to, use as or in agents for preventing, inhibiting, or reducing, corrosion
    or chemical attack of solid metals, or other solid materials, of
    receptacles or apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  For coating compositions or compositions for serving as
    physical or chemical barriers, search this class, subclasses 381+ and Class
    106, Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, particularly subclass 14.05.

    (2)     Note.  For compositions each of which contains a main substance and
    an agent for inhibiting corrosion by the main substance, search where the
    main substance is classifiable.  See main class definition of this class,
    note 4.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    381+,   (see Note 1 above).

    397+,   for agents which inhibit corrosion by inhibiting formation of
    corrosive products of chemical change.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, (see Note 1 above).

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 7+ for process of maintaining an
    environment nondestructive to metal.

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 255, 258+,
    335+, 401+, etc., for cleaning compositions that include anticorrosion
    agents.


CLS 252/388
TXT Compositions under subclass 387 which contain organic compounds.


CLS 252/389.1
TXT Component inorganic or organic comprising element other than C,H,O,N,S, and
    halogen:

    Compositions under subclass 388 comprising either an inorganic compound or
    an organic compound which includes an element other than carbon, hydrogen,
    oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur or a halogen (i.e.,fluorine, chlorine, bromine,
    iodine and astatine).


CLS 252/389.2
TXT Phosphorus containing:

    Compositions under subclass 389.1 which includes a compound containing an
    atom of the element phosphorus.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is the location for phosphoric and
    polyphosphoric acids and esters and other derivatives thereof.


CLS 252/389.21
TXT Nitrogen and/or sulfur in phosphorus compound:

    Compositions under subclass 389.2 in which the compound which includes an
    atom of phosphorus also includes an atom of the element nitrogen, or the
    element sulfur, or both nitrogen and sulfur.


CLS 252/389.22
TXT Pentavalent P except Hn + 2 PnO(3)n + 1:

    Compositions under subclass 389.21 in which the phosphorus containing
    compound includes pentavalent phosphorus, such as phosphines and phosphonon
    (acids and esters), excluding phosphoric acid and poly phosphoric acid and
    polyphosphoric acids (H(n+2)P(n)O(3n+1, n 1) and their derivatives.


CLS 252/389.23
TXT Pentavalent P except Hn + 2 PnO(3)n + 1:

    Compositions under subclass 389.2 containing pentavalent phosphorus such as
    phosphines and phosphonos (acid and esters), excluding phosphoric acid
    (orthophosphoric acids) and the polyphosphoric acids (H(n+2)P(n)O(3+1;n)
    (e.g., pyrophosphoric acid, meta phosphoric acid) and their derivatives.


CLS 252/389.24
TXT Trivalent P (e.g., phosphorus acid, phosphites, etc.):

    Compositions under subclas 389.2 in which the phosphorus containing
    compound includes trivalent phosphorous such as phosphorus acid or its
    salts, the phosphites.


CLS 252/389.3
TXT Silicon containing:

    Compositions under subclass 389.1 which include a compound containing an
    atom of the element silicon.


CLS 252/389.31
TXT Organo silicon:

    Compositions under subclass 389.3 in which the silicon containing compound
    is an organic compound.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of the term Organic, see the main class
    definition of Class 260, Chemistry of Carbon Compounds.


CLS 252/389.32
TXT Nitrogen containing (e.g., amino, etc.):

    Composition under subclass 389.31 in which the organic silicon compound
    further includes an atom of nitrogen.


CLS 252/389.4
TXT Boron containing:

    Compositions under subclass 389.1 which include a compound containing an
    atom of the element boron.


CLS 252/389.41
TXT Organo boron:

    Compositions under subclass 389.4 wherein the boron containing compound is
    an organic compound.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of the term Organic, see the main class
    definitions of Class 260, Chemistry of Carbon Compounds.


CLS 252/389.5
TXT Chromium containing:

    Compositions under subclass 389.1 which include a compound containing an
    atom of the element chromium.


CLS 252/389.51
TXT Lead containing:

    Compositions under subclass 389.1 which include a compound containing an
    atom of the element lead.


CLS 252/389.52
TXT Zinc or aluminum containing:

    Compositions under subclass 389.1 which include a compound containing an
    atom of the element zinc or the element aluminum.


CLS 252/389.53
TXT Nickel, iron, cobalt, copper, maganese, mercury, or cadmium containing:

    Compositions under subclass 389.1 which include a compound containing an
    atom of any of the elements nickel, iron, cobalt, copper, manganese,
    mercury or cadmium.


CLS 252/389.54
TXT Molybdenum, arsenic, antimony, vanadium, bismuth, tungsten, selenium, or
    tellurium containing:

    Compositions under subclass 389.1 which include a compound containing an
    atom of any of the elements molybdenum, arsenic, antimony, vanadium,
    bismuth, tungsten, selenium or tellurium.


CLS 252/389.61
TXT Group IIA metal containing:

    Compositions under subclass 389.1 which include a compound containing an
    atom of a group IIA metal (i.e., beryllium, magnesium, calcium, strontium,
    barium or radium).


CLS 252/389.62
TXT Alkali metal or NH4+ containing:

    Compositions under subclass 389.1 which include a compound containing an
    atom of an alkali metal (i.e., lithium, sodium, potassium, rubidium, cesium
    or francium or NH4+).


CLS 252/390
TXT Compositions under subclass 388 which contain organic compounds which
    contain amine, amide, azo, or nitrogen-base radicals.


CLS 252/391
TXT Compositions under subclass 390 which contain organic compounds which
    contain sulfur.


CLS 252/392
TXT Compositions under subclass 390 which contain organic compounds which
    contain oxygen.


CLS 252/393
TXT Compositions under subclass 388 which contain organic compounds which
    contain a phenol or quinone radical (oxygen bonded directly to carbon of a
    benzene or naphthalene ring or other aromatic nucleus).


CLS 252/394
TXT Compositions under subclass 388 which contain organic compounds which
    contain nitrogen.


CLS 252/395
TXT Compositions under subclass 388 which contain organic compounds which
    contain sulfur.


CLS 252/396
TXT Compositions under subclass 388 which contain organic compounds which
    contain oxygen.


CLS 252/397
TXT Compositions under subclass 380 specialized and designed for, or peculiar
    to, use or in anti-oxidants or agents for preventing, inhibiting, or
    reducing oxidation, chemical decomposition, or other chemical change.

    (1)     Note.  For compositions each of which contains a main substance and
    an agent for inhibiting chemcial decomposition or other chemical change of
    the main substance, search where the main substance is classifiable.  See
    main class definition of this class, note 4.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    381+,   for protective layers.

    386,    for agents for inhibiting knock or explosions.

    387+,   for anticorrosion agents.


CLS 252/398
TXT Compositions under subclass 397 which contain plant or animal matter, or
    extracts thereof, of unknown constitutions.


CLS 252/399
TXT Compositions under subclass 397 which contain organic compounds.


CLS 252/400.1
TXT Component inorganic or organic comprising element other than C,H,O,N,S, and
    halogen:

    Compositions under subclass 399 comprising either an inorganic compound or
    an organic compound which includes an element other than carbon, hydrogen,
    oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur or a halogen (i.e., fluorine, chlorine, bromine,
    iodine and astatine).


CLS 252/400.2
TXT Phosphorus containing:

    Compositions under subclass 400.1 which includes a compound containing an
    atom of the element phosphorus.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is the location for phosphoric and
    polyphosphoric acids and ester and other derivatives thereof.


CLS 252/400.21
TXT Nitrogen or sulfur in phosphorus compound:

    Compositions under subclass 400.2 in which the compound which includes an
    atom of phosphorus also includes an atom of the element nitrogen, or the
    element sulfur.


CLS 252/400.22
TXT Pentavalent P, but not fully oxygenated:

    Compositions under subclass 400.21 containing such compounds as phosphonic
    acid, R-P(O)(OH)2 phosphinic acid, =P(O))H, or an ester thereof, wherein R=
    an organic radical.


CLS 252/400.23
TXT Pentavalent P, but not fully oxygenated:

    Compositions under subclass 400.2 containing such compounds as phosphonic
    acid, R-P(O)(OH)2 phosphinic acid, =P(O))H, or an ester thereof, wherein R=
    an organic radical.


CLS 252/400.24
TXT Trivalent P (e.g., phosphorous acid, phosphites, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 400.2 in which the phosphorus containing
    compound includes trivalent phosphorus.


CLS 252/400.3
TXT Silicon containing:

    Compositions under subclass 400.1 which include a compound containing an
    atom of the element silicon.


CLS 252/400.31
TXT Organo silicon:

    Compositions under subclass 400.3 in which the silicon containing compound
    is an organic compound.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of the term Organic, see the main class
    definition of Class 260, Chemistry of Carbon Compounds.


CLS 252/400.4
TXT Boron containing:

    Compositions under subclass 400.1 which include a compound containing an
    atom of the element boron.


CLS 252/400.41
TXT Organo boron:

    Compositions under subclass 400.4 wherein the boron containing compound is
    an organic compound.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of the term Organic, see the main class
    definitions of Class 260, Chemistry of Carbon Compounds.


CLS 252/400.5
TXT Chromium containing:

    Compositions under subclass 400.1 which include a compound containing an
    atom of the element chromium.


CLS 252/400.51
TXT Lead containing:

    Compositions under subclass 400.1 which include a compound containing an
    atom of the element lead.


CLS 252/400.52
TXT Zinc or aluminum containing:

    Compositions under subclass 400.1 which include a compound containing an
    atom of the element zinc or the element aluminum.


CLS 252/400.53
TXT Nickel, iron, cobalt, copper, maganese, mercury, or cadmium containing:

    Compositions under subclass 400.1 which include a compound containing an
    atom of any of the elements nickel, iron, cobalt, copper, manganese,
    mercury or cadmium.


CLS 252/400.54
TXT Molybdenum, arsenic, antimony, vanadium, bismuth, tungsten, selenium or
    tellurium containing:

    Compositions under subclass 400.1 which include a compound containing an
    atom of any of the elements molybdenum, arsenic, antimony, vanadium,
    bismuth, tungsten, selenium or tellurium.


CLS 252/400.61
TXT Group IIA metal containing:

    Compositions under subclass 400.1 which include a compound containing an
    atom of a group IIA metal (i.e., beryllium magnesium, calcium, strontium,
    barium or radium).


CLS 252/400.62
TXT Alkali metal or NH4+ containing:

    Compositions under subclass 400.1 which include a compound containing an
    atom of an alkali metal (i.e., lithium, sodium, potassium, rubidium, cesium
    or francium or NH4+).


CLS 252/401
TXT Compositions under subclass 399 which contain organic compounds which
    contain amine, amide, azo, or nitrogen-base radicals.


CLS 252/402
TXT Compositions under subclass 401 which contain organic compounds which
    contain sulfur.


CLS 252/403
TXT Compositions under subclass 401 which contain organic compounds which
    contain oxygen.


CLS 252/404
TXT Compositions under subclass 399 which contain organic compounds which
    contain a phenol or quinone radical (oxygen bonded directly to carbon of a
    benzene or naphthalene nucleus or other aromatic nucleus).


CLS 252/405
TXT Compositions under subclass 399 which contain organic compounds which
    contain nitrogen.


CLS 252/406
TXT Compositions under subclass 399 which contain organic compounds which
    contain sulfur.


CLS 252/407
TXT Compositions under subclass 399 which contain organic compounds which
    contain oxygen.


CLS 252/408.1
TXT NONREACTIVE ANALYTICAL, TESTING, OR INDICATING COMPOSITIONS:

    Compositions under the class definition specialized and designed for, or
    peculiar to, use in physical analysis, testing or indicating, or as warning
    agents which do not chemically react in use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for refrigerants containing warning agents.

    301.16, for compositions containing fluorescent or phosphorescent
    substances as analytical, testing, or identification agents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclass 195 for fuel gases
    containing warning agents.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, for testing processes and apparatus not
    otherwise classified.

    424,    Drug, Bio-affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 9.1+
    for a composition adapted to diagnose a body condition or for a method of
    determining the potency of a composition of that class (424) by a test in a
    living body.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, for compositions
    useful as standards or as materials used in a process of analysis involving
    a chemical reaction.


CLS 252/478
TXT Compositions specialized and designed to prevent the passage of X-radiation
    or other wave energy, outside the visible spectrum, such as is released in
    nuclear transformation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300,    for compositions specialized for use as optical filter compositions
    including those which filter ray energy outside the visible spectrum.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 515.1+ for radiation shields including
    X-ray shields.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 145+ for beam
    control devices.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, subclasses 122.1+ for alloys which
    are opaque to X-radiation or neutrons.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 4+
    for an X- ray contrast composition to be used in an animal body and
    subclasses 59+ for a sun or radiation screening composition to be applied
    to a living body, e.g., sun tanning lotion, etc.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Class 523, subclass 136 for a composition containing a
    synthetic resin or natural rubber which is resistant to, yet does not
    absorb, radioactive materials or cathode rays or to processes of preparing
    said composition.


CLS 252/492
TXT Composition under the class definition specialized for use in preparing,
    coating or regenerating incandescent mantles, and mantles defined solely in
    terms of the composition of which they are composed.

    (1)     Note.  The term "mantle" is intended to include all devices which
    are designed to give off light by being heated to incandescence by a
    combustion flame.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein are also processes of making mantles which
    involve no more than preparing or regenerating the composition of which the
    mantle is composed.  For example, this subclass includes processes wherein
    a textile base is coated or impregnated with a composition classifiable in
    this subclass and the textile base is then burned off.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    410+,   and particularly subclass 462 for similar compositions which are
    claimed as catalysts.

    479+,   for similar compositions which are claimed as electrodes, filaments
    and shields for electric lamps and electric space discharge devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 159 for coating processes wherein the
    product is an incandescent mantle.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 100+ for a burner using a mantle, or for
    mantle structure.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, for a composition comprising a catalyst which may be used in or
    as an incandescent mantle composition.


CLS 252/500
TXT Compositions under the class definition which either conduct or emit
    electrons not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  This is the residual home for all conductive and emissive
    compositions and all electrical devices defined solely in terms of their
    composition with no claimed significant device structure.  By way of
    example only, these devices are electrodes, filaments or shields for
    electric lamps and electric space discharge devices, welding electrodes,
    contacts, switches, brushes, and resistances.

    (2)     Note.  Where the device is claimed in terms of the composition of
    which it is composed and also in terms of significant device structure, it
    is classified in the appropriate class providing for such art devices.  See
    the search notes below for such art classes.

    (3)     Note.  Where a patent contains claims to the electrical device
    defined only by its composition classified in this or indented subclasses
    and also claims to a method of preparing such device provided for in
    another class, the patent is classified in this class (252) and
    cross-referenced to such other class.  See the search notes below for other
    classes which provide for methods of making electrical devices.

    (4)     Note.  This and indented subclasses are superior to other
    composition classes as to coating or plastic compositions useful in making
    or coating electrical devices.  Thus a composition which would otherwise be
    classified in Class 106, or in the Class 520 series would be classified
    herein if it is claimed as being electrically conductive or emissive or is
    so disclosed and the claims are generic as to the composition.  As to
    methods of preparing the composition or device, this and indented
    subclasses will take those methods ordinarily classified in Class 106
    within the limits set forth in section IV and (4) Note of the class
    definition of Class 106.  The same limitations apply as between these
    subclasses and Class 260.

    (5)     Note.  Where the claimed electrically conductive or emissive device
    is defined in terms of only a single material, it is classified in the
    appropriate class providing for such material.  See subclass 502,
    hereunder, in (1) Note for compositions or devices comprising elemental
    carbon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62.2,   for electrolytes for electrical devices such as rectifiers and
    condensers.

    62.3,   for barrier layer device compositions.

    62.5,   for magnetic compositions.

    62.9,   for piezoelectric compositions.

    181.1+, for compositions specialized for use as getters for electric lamps
    and electric space discharge devices and for materials and compositions
    specialized for use in generating a gas or vapor within the container of an
    electric lamp or electric space discharge device.  Where the composition
    has utility as a getter or gas or vapor generating material within the
    envelope of an electric lamp or electric space discharge device, and also
    as an electrode or filament useful for purposes other than gettering or
    generating a gas or vapor (e.g., emitting electrons), it is classified in
    subclasses 181.1+ and cross-referenced to subclasses 500+.

    301.1,  for radio-active compositions and materials.

    301.16  through 301.6, for  fluorescent and phosphorescent compositions and
    materials.

    570+,   for fluent dielectric compositions ("insulating oils") which
    contain a hydrocarbon and a nonhydrocarbon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 228+ for products with a continuous phase of metal
    made by consolidating metal particles which are electrically conductive or
    emissive.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 95 and 98 for electrode
    stock material or composite which has been specifically altered,
    configured, or constructed for use in electric or electrostatic field
    separation apparatus for gas separation.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses for
    miscellaneous coating, impregnating and plastic compositions including
    electrical insulating compositions. See (4) Note above, and (2) Note of the
    class definition of Class 106, and the reference to Class 252 therein.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 240+ for processes of treating solid
    metal with a reactive material to form a coating thereon.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 166 for
    contacts and switches wherein there is significant structure of the device
    claimed whether or not the device is also defined in terms of the
    composition of which it is composed.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 280+ for
    electrodes and electrode compositions specialized for use in electrolytic
    apparatus adapted to carry out processes within the scope of Class 204.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 50+ for arc welding and heating of
    metal.  Note particularly indented subclasses 146.1+ for welding electrodes.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses for processes within the class definition, for
    production of articles which may be disclosed to be electrodes for
    electrical devices or electrical conductors.  In particular, see subclasses
    61+ and 104+.  Subclasses 165+ pertains to forming of continuous or
    indefinite length articles, e.g., filamentary products.  See subclass 30
    for furnace lining formation or repair and see the notes thereto.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 252+ for
    electric current conducting brushes wherein there is significant brush
    structure whether or not the composition of which the brushes are composed
    is recited.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 311 and the
    subclasses specified in the Notes thereto for discharge devices which have
    an electrode defined by the composition or material of which it is
    composed, and subclasses 326+ for filaments, electrodes and shields for
    electric lamps and electric space discharge devices which are defined by
    significant structure of the device, whether or not the composition of the
    device is recited.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    appropriate subclasses for electrothermal and thermally actuated switches
    with contacts of a particular material or composition of material
    especially subclasses 270+ and 416+ for particular fusible material.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, appropriate subclasses, for electrical
    resistors wherein there is significant resistance structure of the device
    claimed, whether or not the device is also defined in terms of the
    composition of the element or terminals.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 88+ and 71+ for
    furnace electrodes and furnace linings, respectively, of specific
    composition where combined with furnace structure or when defined in terms
    of significant electrode or lining structure.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    179+ for resistance element used in the transmission of sound by means of
    electricity recited in terms of significant resistant structure.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, subclass 4 for powder metallurgical
    methods for producing filaments or fibers.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, for single metals and for alloys
    and metallic compositions.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 58+ for processes of coating, per se,
    wherein the product is an electrical article.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 375+, 408, 411+, 539.5, 545, 553+, and 615+ for a
    mere impregnated or coated base which may exhibit electrically conductive
    and emissive properties.  Such coated bases include electrodes, filaments
    and shields for electric lamps and discharge devices, welding electrodes,
    resistances, brushes, contacts, wires and electrodes in general which are
    not specifically provided for elsewhere, or do not include sufficient
    structure to indicate classification elsewhere.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product and
    Process, subclasses 209+ for battery electrodes.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    and the classes specified in the notes thereto for process and apparatus
    for the manufacture of electrical conductors or emitters such as electrodes
    or emitters such as electrodes or shields for electric space discharge
    devices.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 100+ for high temperature (Tc  30 K) superconducting materials,
    per se, or subclasses 300+ for processes of producing same.


CLS 252/501.1
TXT Light sensitive:

    Compositions under subclass 500 wherein the electrical conductivity or
    emissivity varies with the intensity of the light to which it is exposed.

    (1)     Note.  See the definitions of Class 250, Radiant Energy, subclass
    200 under (7) Note, for the various classifications of photcells, per se.
    These generally embody photosensitive compositions or layers.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 430, subclasses 32+ for compositions of this type
    limited to use in radiation imagery.


CLS 252/502
TXT Compositions under subclass 500 which contain as an ingredient elemental
    carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Where the composition or device is composed of carbon
    obtained from either plural sources or from natural fibers, the patent is
    classified in this and indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  For the line between compositions falling herein and bases
    impregnated with carbonized material, see the (1) Note under Class 117,
    subclass 226.

    (3)     Note.  Where the composition comprises a material that is to be
    subsequently carbonized, the patent is classified on the basis of the
    nature of the ingredient prior to carbonization. See, for example,
    subclasses 510+ hereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, appropriate subclasses for a
    process of carbonizing carbonaceous material.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 445+ for carbon, per
    se, including manufacturing processes involving a chemical reaction.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, subclasses 99+ for refractory composition
    containing elemental carbon.


CLS 252/503
TXT Compositions under subclass 502 which contain free metal in addition to the
    elemental carbon.


CLS 252/504
TXT Compositions under subclass 502 which contain a carbide in addition to the
    elemental carbon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    516,    for other conductive or emissive compositions which contain
    carbides.


CLS 252/505
TXT Compositions under subclass 502 which contain a radio-active material in
    addition to the elemental carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Compounds of radium, uranium and thorium, for example, are
    included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301.1,  for miscellaneous compositions containing radio-active materials.

    517,    for other conductive or emissive compositions which contain a
    radio-active material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 5 for coating processes, per se,
    wherein the base or coating is radioactive.


CLS 252/506
TXT Compositions under subclass 502 which contain a metal compound not provided
    for above in addition to the elemental carbon.


CLS 252/507
TXT Compositions under subclass 506 which contain a titanium or zirconium
    compound in addition to the elemental carbon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    519.12 and 520.2+, for other conductive or emissive compositions which
    contain titanium or zirconium compounds.


CLS 252/508
TXT Compositions under subclass 506 which contain an aluminum compound in
    addition to the elemental carbon.


CLS 252/509
TXT Compositions under subclass 506 which contain a magnesium, alkaline earth
    metal or rare earth metal compound in addition to the elemental carbon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    521.1,  for other conductive or emissive compositions which contain a rare
    earth compound.


CLS 252/510
TXT Compositions under subclass 502 which contain an organic component in
    addition to the elemental carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Even if the organic component is to be subsequently
    carbonized, wholly or in part, the composition is classified herein and not
    in subclass 502.


CLS 252/511
TXT Compositions under subclass 510 wherein the organic component is a resin
    (natural or synthetic), a natural rubber or a derivative thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclass for plastic
    or coating compositions which contain a natural resin and elemental carbon,
    particularly subclass 241.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses for
    synthetic resins or natural rubber and compositions thereof.


CLS 252/512
TXT Compositions under subclass 500 which contain free metals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    503,    for conductive or emissive compositions containing free metal and
    elemental carbon.


CLS 252/513
TXT Compositions under subclass 512 wherein the free metal is a metal from the
    iron group.

    (1)     Note.  The iron group comprises iron, nickel and cobalt.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 246+ for a consolidatd metal particle composition
    having a base of an Iron group, Copper (Cu), or Noble metal.


CLS 252/514
TXT Compositions under subclass 512 wherein the free metal is a noble metal.

    (1)     Note.  The noble metals as herein provided for are gold, silver,
    ruthenium, rhodium, palladium, osmium, iridium and platinum.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 246+ for a consolidated metal particle composition
    having a base of an Iron group, Copper (Cu), or Nobel metal.


CLS 252/515
TXT Compositions under subclass 512 wherein the free metal is tungsten.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclass 248 for a consolidated metal particle composition having
    a tungsten base.


CLS 252/516
TXT Compositions under subclass 500 which contain a carbide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    504,    for conductive or emissive compositions containing a carbide and
    elemental carbon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclass 236 for a consolidated metal particle composition
    containing carbide.


CLS 252/517
TXT Compositions under subclass 500 which contain a radio-active material.

    (1)     Note.  Compounds of radium, uranium and thorium, for example, are
    included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    505,    for conductive or emissive compositions containing elemental carbon
    and a radio-active material.


CLS 252/518.1
TXT Metal compound containing:

    Compositions under subclass 500 which contain a metal compound not provided
    for above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    506+,   for conductive or emissive compositions containing a metal compound
    and elemental carbon.


CLS 252/519.1
TXT Compound viewed as composition (i.e., wherein atoms or molecules in a
    chemical formula are not present as whole small integer values or cannot be
    multiplied by a single-digit factor to yield integer values):

    Compositions under subclass 518.1 which contain a compound wherein atoms or
    molecules in a chemical formula are not present as whole small integer
    values or cannot be multiplied by a factor in the single digit to yield
    integer values.  Such a compound is considered a composition for purposes
    of this subclass and its indents.

    (1)     Note.  The electrically conductive compounds provided for herein
    are regarded as compositions according to the Class 423 class definition
    (i.e., see Note (13) of Class 423).  A mixture of such a compound proper
    for this subclass with a separate and distinct component is also proper for
    this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Class 505 is superior to Class 423 or Class 252.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, for an inorganic compound wherein
    plural elements are present in specifically defined whole integer values.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process, for
    electrically conducting superconducting compounds or compositions operative
    above 30 K.


CLS 252/519.12
TXT Titanium containing:

    Compositions under subclass 519.1 wherein the chemical formula has titanium
    therein.


CLS 252/519.13
TXT Bismuth, ruthenium, or iridium containing:

    Compositions under subclass 519.1 wherein the chemical formula has bismuth,
    ruthenium, or iridium therein.


CLS 252/519.14
TXT Sulfur, tellurium, selenium, nitrogen, phosphorus, or boron containing:

    Compositions under subclass 519.1 wherein the chemical formula has sulfur,
    tellurium, selenium, nitrogen, phosphorus, or boron therein.


CLS 252/519.15
TXT Four diverse metals containing:

    Compositions under subclass 519.1 wherein the chemical formula has four or
    more diverse metals therein.


CLS 252/519.2
TXT Organometallic (e.g., soap, complex, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 518.1 wherein the metal compound is an organic
    compound.

    (1)     Note.  The expression "organic compound" in this and indented
    subclasses corresponds to the Class 260 class definition (i.e., compounds
    containing  carbon, which are further characterized by the presence in a
    molecule thereof  of (a) two carbon atoms bonded together, (b) one atom of
    carbon bonded to at least  one atom of hydrogen or halogen, or (c) one atom
    of carbon bonded to at least one  atom of nitrogen by a single or double
    bond, with the proviso that HCN, CN-CN, HNCO, HNCS, cyanamide, cyanogen
    halides, fulminic acid, metal carbides, and graphite are excluded from
    being organic compounds).


CLS 252/519.21
TXT With additional organic compound:

    Compositions under subclass 519.2 which contain, in addition to the
    organometallic compound, an additional organic compound which may itself be
    organometallic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    510+,   for conductive or emissive compositions containing an organic
    compound and elemental carbon.


CLS 252/519.3
TXT With organic compound:

    Compositions under subclass 518.1 which contain an organic compound in
    addition to the metal compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    510+,   for conductive or emissive compositions containing an organic
    compound and elemental carbon.


CLS 252/519.31
TXT The organic compound contains silicon:

    Compositions under subclass 519.3 wherein the organic compound has at least
    one silicon atom therein.


CLS 252/519.32
TXT The organic compound is a natural resin, protein, lignin, carbohydrate, or
    derivative thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 519.3 wherein the organic compound is a natural
    resin, protein, lignin, carbohydrate, or derivative thereof.

    (1)     Note. Natural resins include but are not limited to shellac, copals
    from various sources (e.g., congo, manila, etc.), amber, dammar, dead
    dammar, gum rosin, japan, japan varnish, rosin (colophony), tall oil
    (liquid rosin), wood rosin, burgundy pitch, gurjun balsam, canada balsam,
    sandrac, mastic, accroides, benzoin, elemi, gamboge, gum thus, venice
    turpentine, bordeaux turpentine, abietic acid, pimaric acid, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of derivatives of natural resins included herein
    are  hydrogenated, esterified, polymerized, or sulfurized natural resins,
    or salts thereof.

    (3)     Note.  Protein is a naturally occurring polypeptide (polyamide) of
    more than 100 a-amino acid residues or of molecular weight greater than
    10,000.

     (4)    Note.  Lignin is a noncarbohydrate, polymeric substance found in
    wood and woody plants which functions as a natural plastic binder for the
    cellulose fibers.  It is isolated directly from wood or wood products or
    from the treatment of wood (e.g., waste sulfite liquor or black liquor).
    The structure of the lignin monomer is not completely known.

    (5)     Note.  The term "carbohydrate or derivative" in this subclass
    corresponds to the Class 536, subclass 1.1 definition (i.e., a carbohydrate
    is a saccharide whose monomeric units are polyhydroxy monoaldehydes or
    polyhydroxy monoketones, having the formula Cn(H2O)n  (wherein n is five or
    six), or the corresponding cyclic hemiacetals thereof, or the reaction
    derivatives thereof in which the product is of indeterminate structure or
    the carbon skeleton and the carbonyl function or hemi-acetal function of
    the saccharide unit are not destroyed).


CLS 252/519.33
TXT The organic compound is a polymer:

    Compositions under subclass 519.3 wherein the organic compound is a large
    molecule of many repeating units; both liquid and solid polymers are
    encompassed herein, as are both homopolymeric and copolymeric substances.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of polymers provided for herein are polyacetylene,
    polypropylene, epoxy resin, poly(xylylidene), polyester, poly(oxyalkylene),
     and polyacrylonitrile.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    511,    for conductive or emissive compositions containing a resin, rubber,
    or derivative thereof and elemental carbon.


CLS 252/519.34
TXT The metal compound contains halogen, sulfur, selenium, phosphorus, arsenic,
    boron, or nitrogen:

    Compositions under subclass 519.33 wherein nitrogen, boron, arsenic,
    phosphorus, selenium, sulfur, or halogen is present in the metal compound.


CLS 252/519.4
TXT Sulfur, selenium, or tellurium containing:

    Compositions under subclass 518.1 wherein sulfur, selenium, or tellurium is
    present in the metal compound.


CLS 252/519.5
TXT Zinc compound:

    Compositions under subclass 518.1 wherein the metal compound is a zinc
    compound.


CLS 252/519.51
TXT Additional diverse metal containing:

    Compositions under subclass 519.5 wherein an additional diverse metal atom
    is present in the zinc compound.


CLS 252/519.52
TXT With boron compound:

    Compositions under subclass 519.5 which contain a boron compound in
    addition to the zinc compound.


CLS 252/519.53
TXT With halogen compound:

    Compositions under subclass 519.5 which contain a halogen compound in
    addition to the zinc compound.


CLS 252/519.54
TXT Silicon containing or with compound of bismuth or silicon:

    Compositions under subclass 519.5 wherein the zinc compound has at least
    one silicon atom therein or wherein a bismuth or silicon compound is
    present in addition to the zinc compound.


CLS 252/520.1
TXT Tin compound:

    Compositions under subclass 518.1 wherein the metal compound is a tin
    compound.


CLS 252/520.2
TXT Titanium or zirconium compound:

    Compositions under subclass 518.1 wherein the metal compound is a titanium
    compound or a zirconium compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    507,    for conductive or emissive compositions containing a titanium or
    zirconium compound and elemental carbon.


CLS 252/520.21
TXT Additional diverse metal containing:

    Compositions under subclass 520.2 wherein an additional diverse metal atom
    is present in the zirconium compound or in the titanium compound.


CLS 252/520.22
TXT Boron, silicon, phosphorus, nitrogen, hydrogen, carbon, or halogen
    containing:

    Compositions under subclass 520.2 wherein boron,  silicon, phosphorus,
    nitrogen, hydrogen, carbon, or halogen is present in the titanium compound
    or in the zirconium compound.


CLS 252/520.3
TXT Silver, gold, or platinum compound:

    Compositions under subclass 518.1 wherein the metal compound is a silver
    compound, a gold compound, or a platinum compound.


CLS 252/520.4
TXT Vanadium compound:

    Compositions under subclass 518.1 wherein the metal compound is a vanadium
    compound.


CLS 252/520.5
TXT Tungsten or yttrium compound:

    Compositions under subclass 518.1 wherein the metal compound is a tungsten
    compound or an yttrium compound.


CLS 252/521.1
TXT Rare earth metal compound:

    Compositions under subclass 518.1 wherein the metal compound is a rare
    earth metal compound.

    (1)     Note.  The rare earth metals are lanthanum (La), cerium (Ce),
    praseodymium (Pr), neodymium (Nd), promethium (Pm), samarium (Sm), europium
    (Eu), gadolinium (Gd), terbium (Tb), dysprosium (Dy), holmium (Ho), erbium
    (Er), thulium (Tm), ytterbium (Yb), and lutetium (Lu).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    509,    for conductive or emissive compositions containing a rare earth
    metal compound and elemental carbon.


CLS 252/521.2
TXT Iron, cobalt, or nickel compound:

    Compositions under subclass 518.1 wherein the metal compound is an iron
    compound, a cobalt compound, or a nickel compound.


CLS 252/521.3
TXT Silicon containing or with silicon compound:

    Compositions under subclass 518.1 wherein silicon is present in the metal
    compound or wherein a silicon compound is present in addition to the metal
    compound.


CLS 252/521.4
TXT Boron containing or with boron compound:

    Compositions under subclass 518.1 wherein boron is present in the metal
    compound or wherein a boron compound is present in addition to the metal
    compound.


CLS 252/521.5
TXT Halogen, carbon, phosphorus, or nitrogen containing:

    Compositions under subclass 518.1 wherein halogen, carbon, phosphorus, or
    nitrogen is present in the metal compound.


CLS 252/521.6
TXT With nonmetal compound containing halogen, nitrogen, phosphorus, or sulfur:

    Compositions under subclass 518.1 which have, in addition to the metal
    compound, a nonmetal compound containing halogen, nitrogen, phosphorus, or
    sulfur.


CLS 252/567
TXT DEFINED LIQUID DIELECTRIC DISPERSED IN DEFINED WEB OR SHEET:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a self-sustaining web or
    sheet, defined in terms of its composition, has distributed therein a
    material, liquid at ambient temperatures, which also is claimed in terms of
    its composition and which has indicated electric insulating properties.

    (1)     Note.  According to current PTO practice, a single-layer web or
    sheet uniformly impregnated or swelled with another material is considered
    to be a composition, rather than a stock material.

    (2)     Note.  The composition of the web of sheet itself must be claimed
    in terms which indicate the presence of at least one periodic-table group
    or atom other than carbon.  Such terms as "cellulosic", "silicic",
    "halogen", etc., are sufficiently definite as to composition of the web or
    sheet to be classified in this subclass (567). When the web or sheet is
    identified only in broad, functional, or property terms such as
    "substrate", "fibrous", "plastic", "porous", "organic", "metallic",
    "dielectric", etc., classification in subclasses 570+ is proper, provided
    that the liquid component is described in terms of its composition and is
    either claimed as having such property as its sole utility.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    570+,   for a fluent dielectric composition, per se, and the notes thereto,
    for the location of other electrically insulating compositions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating and Plastic, appropriate subclasses for
    nonresinous plastic web or sheet impregnated with a solid dielectric or
    liquid dielectric impregnant which is not claimed in terms of its
    composition or which is not claimed or solely disclosed as a dielectric.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 103+ and 123+ for
    multilayer materials, including a layer of paper, which may be impregnated
    with another material; subclasses 135+ for a single layer of paper which
    may contain a solid dielectric impregnant or a liquid dielectric impregnant
    which is not claimed in terms of its composition or which is not claimed or
    solely disclosed as a dielectric; and subclass 138 for a paper layer having
    an electrical characteristic.

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclasses for a method of
    impregnating.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 260+ for
    fabric impregnated with a solid dielectric or a liquid dielectric
    impregnant which is not claimed in terms of its composition or which is not
    claimed or solely disclosed as a dielectric; and subclasses 411+ for a
    multilayer material which may have electric insulating properties.

    521,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 53+ for a preformed
    porous or cellular synthetic resin impregnated with a solid dielectric or a
    liquid dielectric impregnant which is not claimed in terms of its
    composition or which is not claimed or solely disclosed as a dielectric.


CLS 252/570
TXT FLUENT DIELECTRIC:

    Nonsolid under the class definition claimed as a nonconductor of
    electricity.

    (1)     Note.  A nonsolid is a material which, at ambient temperatures,
    does not hold its shape without confinement.  Most solid nonmetal
    compositions ordinarily are electrical insulators and classification of
    such construction mateials on the basis of electrical properties has been
    found impractical; therefore, another way of defining "fluent" in this
    context is as any composition which cannot be accommodated in Class 106 or
    the Class 520 series.  A mass of particulate solids is not considered
    fluent for purposes of this subclass, but a "slumpable" nonparticulate
    material, e.g., a grease, etc., is considered fluent.

    (2)     Note.  Where a patent claims an electrical device containing a
    dielectric, the patent is classified with the device, no matter how nominal
    the recitation of the device may be.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71+,    for heat exchange, low-freezing or low-pour-point or
    hihg-boiling-point compositions, which compositions may have electrical
    insulating properties.

    500+,   for nonmetal compositions which, under some or all circumstances,
    conduct electricity, including electric "resistance" elements having a
    defined conductivity, even though the conductivity is small.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, for normally solid inorganic,
    organic nonresinous, and organic natural-resin solid materials, or
    materials which solidify upon "setting", whether described and/or claimed
    as electric insulators or not.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 8+ for such
    subject matter which includes a fluid; subclasses 110+ for an insulated
    conductor, even when the conductor is only nominally claimed; and
    subclasses 137+ for a shaped insulator.

    208,    Mineral Oils, Processes and Products, subclass 14 for electrically
    insulating compositions, made-up entirely of mineral oil components.

    218,    High-Voltage Switches With Arc Preventing and Extinguishing
    Devices, subclasses 89+ for such subject matter having an interposed
    nonconductor.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 538+ for an insulated electric heating
    element.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    especially subclasses 56+ and 109+ for methods of making articles by
    uniting randomly associated particles.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses for
    such devices containing an insulating material.

    336,    Inductor Devices, for electric voltage transformers of this type,
    especially subclass 94 for such a device having fluid insulation.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, appropriate subclasses for such subject
    matter including a dielectric material.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 301.1+ for
    a fixed capacitor (condenser) which may include a named dielectric.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, appropriate subclasses for ceramic
    compositions capable of functioning as an electrical insulator.

    508,    Solid Antifriction Devices, Materials Therefor, Lubricant and
    Separant Compositions for Moving Solid Surfaces, and Miscellaneous Mineral
    Oil Compositions, particularly subclasses 110+, for lubricants and
    miscellaneous compositions containing a mineral oil and a nonhydrocarbon
    additive, including compositions claimed as having both lubricating and
    electric insulating properties.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses for a
    nonfluent composition containing a synthetic resin or natural rubber which
    composition has the property of insulating objects electrically from each
    other.

    523,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 173 for a synthetic
    resin or natural rubber composition having utility as a filling or flooding
    composition for cables or to processes of preparation thereof.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclasses 6.3+ for an
    "insulating oil" composition consisting only of hydrocarbons where at least
    one of the components is not a mineral oil.


CLS 252/571
TXT Gaseous or gas-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 570 wherein the composition is one which has
    a volume the size of the container which holds it or is a liquid containing
    a defined gaseous component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    372,    for miscellaneous gaseous compositions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, appropriate subclasses for gaseous
    compositions set forth for such uses.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclass 6 for gaseous
    compositions comprising hydrocarbons only.


CLS 252/572
TXT Metal- or insoluble component-containing; e.g., slurry, grease, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 570 wherein the fluent material contains a
    metal, a metal compound or a component which does not dissolve in the
    fluent material.

    (1)     Note.  The composition must maintain its fluent properties that is,
    its ability to change its shape under a minimum-stress force, such as
    gravity.


CLS 252/573
TXT Si-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 570 wherein the fluent material contains
    silicon in elemental or combined form.


CLS 252/574
TXT B-, P-, S-, Se- or Te-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 570 in which a component of the component
    contains boron, phosphorus, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium.


CLS 252/575
TXT N-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 570 in which a component of the composition
    contains nitrogen.


CLS 252/576
TXT O in N compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 575 in which a single discrete compound
    contains both oxygen and nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  Where a component is described as the "reaction product" of
    an oxygen-containing material and a nitrogen-containing material it is
    assumed that the reaction product is or contains a compound having both N
    and O.


CLS 252/577
TXT Nitro or nitroso compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 576 having the =N=O moiety, characteristic of
    nitro and nitroso compounds.


CLS 252/578
TXT O-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 570 in which a component of the composition
    contains oxygen.


CLS 252/579
TXT Carboxylic acid ester:

    Subject matter under subclass 578

    having the R--O-R' group, characteristic of the reaction product of a
    carboxylic acid and an alcohol.

    (1)     Note.  The ester, e.g., a vegetable oil, may be the major component
    of the composition.


CLS 252/580
TXT Halogen-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 578 in which a component of the composition
    contains fluorine, chlorine, bromine or iodine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    570     and 581, for an electrically insulating fluid which contains
    halogen, but not oxygen.


CLS 252/581
TXT Halogenated polycyclic compound-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 570 which contains an organic material
    comprised of more than one carbocyclic ring, the organic material also
    containing fluorine, chlorine, bromine or iodine.


CLS 252/582
TXT LIGHT TRANSMISSION MODIFYING COMPOSITIONS:

    Compositions under the class definition used usually in various optical
    applications which change light and visible solar radiations (including
    infrared and ultraviolet) transmittance properties when exposed to energy,
    usually visible radiation.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes compositions specialized for use as
    optical filters or as coatings which have optical filtering or as coatings
    which have optical filtering properties, as well as optical filters defined
    solely in terms of their composition with no claimed significant filter
    structure.

    (2)     Note.  Where the filter is claimed in terms of the composition of
    which it is composed and also in terms of significant filter structure, it
    is classified in the appropriate class providing for such structure and
    cross-referenced to this subclass (in Class 252).  See the search note
    below directed to Class 359.

    (3)     Note.  Where the claimed filter is defined in terms of only a
    single material and no significant filter structure is recited, it is
    classified in the appropriate class providing for such material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 47+ for glass
    compositions which have optical filtering properties.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy,  especially subclasses
    157.15+ for processes making photochromic material (other than coating)
    involving chemical reaction brought about by wave energy.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    350+, 885+, and the classes specified in the notes thereto, for devices
    which include as part thereof an optical filter and for optical filters,
    per se, which are claimed in terms of significant filter structure.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclass 59 for
    cosmetic compositions performing a filtering function, e.g., suntan lotions.


CLS 252/583
TXT Modification caused by energy other than light:

    Composition under subclass 582 wherein the transmission property change is
    occasioned by use of energy other than light, e.g., heat, electricity, etc.


CLS 252/584
TXT Inorganic crystalline solid:

    Composition under subclass 582 in the form of an inorganic crystalline
    solid material.


CLS 252/585
TXT Producing polarized light:

    Composition under subclass 582 which polarize light passing therethrough.


CLS 252/586
TXT Displaying color change:

    Composition under subclass 582 which modify the transmission property by
    changing color.


CLS 252/587
TXT Infrared:

    Composition under subclass 582 which affect the transmission of infrared
    rays.


CLS 252/588
TXT Ultraviolet:

    Composition under subclass 582 which affect the transmission of ultraviolet
    rays.


CLS 252/589
TXT Organic material:

    Composition under subclass 588 which are organic substances.


CLS 252/600
TXT RADIATION SENSITIVE:

    Compositions under the class definition which are designed to be responsive
    to radiation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62.3+,  for barrier device compositions.

    62.5+,  for magnetic compositions.

    299,    for liquid crystal compositions.

    301.1+, for radioactive compositions.

    301.36, for inorganic luminescent compositions with organic nonluminescent
    material.

    301.4+, for inorganic luminescent compositions.

    500+,   for electrically conductive or emissive compositions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, appropriate subclasses for radiation sensitive compositions
    limited to radiation imagery.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, subclass 13 for glass compositions which
    are photochromic and for processes of making such compositions.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses for a
    composition containing a synthetic resin or natural rubber which is
    radiation sensitive and which utility is not provided for in any other
    class or in any special use or function area in Class 252.


CLS 252/601
TXT FIRE RETARDING:

    Compositions under the class definition specialized and designed for use in
    treating materials to make them less combustible or more resistant to fire.

    (1)     Note.  Compositions, e.g., paints or varnishes which, when applied
    to surfaces, set or harden to form hard tenacious adherent films, (except
    when they contain synthetic resin or rubber, in which case they are in
    Class 260, Chemistry of Carbon Compounds) are in Class 106, Compositions:
    Coating or Plastic, even though they include a fireproofing agent or are
    inherently fireproofing; see particularly subclasses 15.05+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    380+,   for preservative agents in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 115.5+ for use of a fire-retarding
    composition to chemically modify a textile or fiber.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, see (1) Note above.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclass 159 for fireproofing
    agent used in the process or product of the class.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, subclass 45 for process of preventing fire by
    use of a fire-retarding composition.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, see (1) Note above.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses for a biocidal composition which may also be fireproofing.

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclasses for coating a
    fire-retarding composition and treating the same.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet; see especially subclasses 276+ for such a product embodying
    mechanically interengaged strands or strand portions of a cellulosic
    material, impregnated with a phosphorus compound and having fire resistant
    or retardant features; and subclass 921 (a cross-reference art collection)
    for a product having fire or flame proof features.


CLS 252/602
TXT Having disparate function:

    Compositions under subclass 601 performing a function other than fire
    retardation, e.g., waterproofing, corrosion resistance, etc.


CLS 252/603
TXT For living matter:

    Compositions under subclass 601 used to retard the burning of living plant
    matter, e.g., trees, grass, etc.


CLS 252/604
TXT Material physically quantified:

    Compositions under subclass 601 having material defined by dimensions,
    crystal structure, X-ray difraction, etc.


CLS 252/605
TXT Containing a gas:

    Compositions under subclass 601 having a nonliquid fluid as a part thereof.


CLS 252/606
TXT Intumescent:

    Compositions under subclass 601 which swells under heat or direct flame to
    produce a puffed-up, nonglowing insulating cellular mass which insulates
    the substrate from the heat source and at the same time excludes oxygen.


CLS 252/607
TXT For wood or cellulosic material other than textile:

    Compositions under subclass 601 designed to be used with wood or cellulosic
    matter other than textile.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    608,    for cellulosic textiles.

    609,    for solid synthetic polymers and    reactants thereof.


CLS 252/608
TXT For textile:

    Compositions under subclass 601 for rendering woven material fire retardant.


CLS 252/609
TXT For solid synthetic polymer and reactants thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 601 designed for use with solid synthetic
    polymers and reactants of the same.


CLS 252/610
TXT For dispersion or collodial system:

    Compositions under subclass 601 comprising systems of minute particles
    distinct and separate from one another and suspended in a medium.


CLS 252/611
TXT For dispersion or collodial system:

    Compositions under subclass 610 designed to be incorporated into a
    dispersion or collodial system.


CLS 252/625
TXT RADIOACTIVE COMPOSITIONS:

    Compositions under the class definitions which contain a substance which is
    spontaneously radioactive and processes pertaining to same.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    505     and 517, for conductive or emissive compositions containing
    radioactive matter and electrical devices defined only in terms of their
    composition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 84+ for processes of preparing radioactive and
    actinide series metals; subclass 235 for a composition having a continuous
    phase of free metal made by consolidating metal particles and having an
    oxide of aluminum, a Group IIA, IIIB or Group IVB metal; and subclass 84.1
    for such composition having a base of a transition metal.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclass 560 for processes of significant heating
    of solid or semi-solid actinide or trans-actinide metal to modify or
    maintain the internal physical structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical
    property of the metal.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 450.2 for a metal casting apparatus having
    control means influenced by a radioactive sensor and which may include a
    radioactive source.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 303+ for radioactive tracer processes;
    subclass 308 for the inspection of solids or liquids by radioactive charged
    particles; subclass 379 for electric signalling devices including a
    radioactive gas or gas-borne radioactive particles or a radioactive source;
    subclass 384 for gas discharge signalling devices responsive to radiation
    from radioactive sources; subclasses 462.1+ for self-luminous articles; and
    subclasses 493.1+ for radiant energy generation and sources, including
    subclasses 496.1+ for contained radioactive sources.  The line between
    Class 250 and this and indented subclasses is that Class 250 takes
    radioactive compositions combined with apparatus (structure); whereas Class
    252, subclasses 625+ are limited to compositions, per se, or devices
    (structure) defined only in terms of their composition.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 54 for electrical
    lamps and electric space discharge devices (e.g., radio tubes) which
    include a radioactive substance as a part thereof.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    appropriate subclasses for the production of radioactive compositions by
    irradiation.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 159 for apparatus for radioactive
    reactant or product.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 2+ and 249+ for
    radioactive compounds, per se, including manufacturing processes involving
    a chemical reaction.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses
    1.11+ for class defined compositions and methods comprising a radionuclide
    or intended radionuclide (e.g., in vivo testing).

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 5 and 6 for coated articles
    containing a radioactive material.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 411+ for
    composite web or sheet characterized merely by composition, one of which
    layers may contain radioactive material.


CLS 252/634
TXT In form of sol solution or gel:

    Subject matter under subclass 625 comprising an aqueous or organic liquid
    containing dissolved or dispersed radioactive matter.

    302+,   for nonradioactive colloids.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    637+,   particularly 640, for nuclear reactor fuel material dissolved or
    dispersed in a nonaqueous, nonorganic liquid, i.e., liquid metal.


CLS 252/635
TXT Including production of solid particles by chemical reaction:

    Subject matter under subclass 634 wherein the liquid is treated by a
    process which includes a chemical reaction, other than simple
    precipitation, to produce a solid particle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 0.5 for forming radioactive materials by physical processes.  The
    forming of such materials by a process including a chemical reaction is
    classified in this class (252).


CLS 252/636
TXT Nuclear reactor fuel:

    Subject matter under subclass 625 used as a fuel for a nuclear reactor
    including thermonuclear (fusion) reactors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    634,    for aqueous or organic sols or solutions suitable for use as a
    nuclear reactor fuel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 84.1+ for pyrometallurgy of actinide and transactinide
    elements.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    for methods of shaping or nonchemical reactive treating of radioactive
    material.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements, for
    nuclear reactor fuel defined by structure.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorgainc Compounds, subclasses 249+ for actinide
    compounds useful as a nuclear reactor fuel.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 6 for coating nuclear fuel elements.


CLS 252/637
TXT Actinide having nonactinide component:

    Compositions under subclass 636 containing an actinide containing component
    and a nonactinide component.

    (1)     Note.  In this and indented subclasses, burnable poisons are
    classified by the form in which they appear in the final product.  Thus,
    metal borides are classified in subclass 640 and boron oxide in subclass
    638.


CLS 252/638
TXT Oxide component:

    Compositions under subclss 637 wherein the nonactinide containing component
    is an inorganic oxide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    639,    for nuclear reactor fuel composition containing an actinide
    component and an organic oxygen containing compound.


CLS 252/639
TXT Carbon containing component:

    Compositions under subclass 637 wherein the nonactinide element containing
    component contains carbon, including elemental carbon, inorganic carbides,
    and organic compounds.


CLS 252/640
TXT Free metal or metal compound component:

    Compositions under subclass 637 wherein the nonactinide element containing
    component is a free metal or a metal compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    638,    for nuclear reactor fuel having metallic oxide including ceramic
    material.

    639,    for nuclear reactor fuel having a metallic carbide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 201+ for cermet nuclear reactor fuels.


CLS 252/641
TXT Actinide nitrides only:

    Compositions under subclass 636 in which the nuclear fuel contains only
    nitrides of plural actinide elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    637,    for nuclear reactor fuels containing actinide oxynitrides or
    carbonitrides.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorgainc Compounds, subclasses 249+ for actinide
    nitrides, per se.


CLS 252/642
TXT Actinide carbides only:

    Compositions under subclass 636 wherein the nuclear reactor fuel contains
    only carbides of plural actinide elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    637,    for nuclear reactor fuels containing actinide oxycarbides or
    carbonitrides.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 249+ for actinide
    carbides, per se.


CLS 252/643
TXT Actinide oxides only:

    Compositions under subclass 636 wherein the nuclear fuel consists only of
    oxides of plural actinide elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    637,    for nuclear fuels containing actinides oxycarbides or oxynitrides.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 260+ for uranium
    oxides.


CLS 252/644
TXT As a source of radiation or heat:

    Compositions undre subclass 625 which are used as a source of alpha, beta,
    or gamma rays, and neutron or electron beams, all of which may be used for
    the heat generated by the same.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 492+ for radiation sources with definite
    claimed structure, and see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 252/645
TXT For tracing, tagging, or testing:

    Compositions under subclass 644 adapted to mark, label, etc., that to which
    it is added, in such a manner that the radioactive component may be (a)
    detected over a period of time or through a system, and (b) used as means
    of performing a measurement, indication, etc., and the marked or labelled
    composition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 253+ for geological testing or
    irradiation; subclasses 302+ for radiation trace methods; subclass 308 for
    inspection of solids or liquids by charged radioactive materials; and
    subclass 432 for parent daughter isotopes.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclass 230 for analytical and
    analytical control processes involving measurements of radioactivity or
    isotope distribution.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses
    1.11+ for class defined compositions and methods comprising a radionuclide
    or intended radionuclide (e.g., in vivo testing).

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 407+ for diagnostic testing involving detection
    of nuclear radiation.


CLS 252/646
TXT Luminescent:

    Subject matter under subclass 625 containing matter having the property of
    emitting light or analogous rays as a result of irradiation by wave energy
    radiated by some other source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301.16+, 301.36 and 301.4+, for fluorescent or phophorescent compositions.

    644,    for compositions which emit nonvisible or high energy rays.


CLS 252/647
TXT Laser:

    Subject matter under subclass 646 used in a laser apparatus or process.


CLS 252/700
TXT CHEMILUMINESCENT:

    Compositions which contain a mixture or association of two or more
    substances chosen for eventual chemical interaction thereof to produce
    chemiluminescence, substances peculiar thereto, and processes of making the
    same.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 252/950
TXT Cross-reference collection directed to materials which supply a foreign
    substance for incorporation, in very minor, "impurity" amounts, in an
    element, compound or composition to impart a desired property thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62.3,   for barrier layer device compositions and processes for making
    them, which processes usually include doping.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 524+ for a package
    containing a chemical.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, subclass 590 for general processes
    of preparing alloys.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process,  subclasses 542+ for
    processes of diffusing a conductivity modifying dopant into a semiconductor
    region.


CLS 252/951
TXT Materials under subclass 950 designed for conveying the foreign substance
    as a gas or vapor or entrained in a gas vapor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181.1+, for getters or gas vapor generating materials for electric lamps,
    electric space discharge devices and similar devices.


CLS 252/960
TXT SURFACE FLAW DETECTING COMPOSITIONS:

    Art collection related to compositions used for detecting surface cracks or
    roughness.


CLS 252/961
TXT STRESS OR CONTACT INDICATORS:

    Art collection relating to compositions for indicating physical stress or
    physical contact.


CLS 252/962
TXT TEMPERATURE OR THERMAL HISTORY: Art collection relating to compositions for
    indicating temperature or thermal history.


CLS 252/963
TXT HUMIDITY OR MOISTURE INDICATORS: Art collection relating to compositions
    indicating water.


CLS 252/964
TXT LEAK DETECTION:

    Art collection of material related to physical indication of leaks.


CLS 252/965
TXT RETROSPECTIVE PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION (E.G., TAGS AND TRACERS, ETC.):  Art
    collection providing information about the source or the class definition
    drawn to rheo-casting.

    FOREIGN ART COLLECTIONS

    The definitions for FOR 100-FOR 250 below correspond to the definitions for
    only the following abolished subclasses under Class 252 from which these
    collections were formed: 8.6, 8.7, 8.75, 8.8, 8.9, 80-88, 89.1, 90-174,
    174.11-174.25, 367-370, and 523-559.  See the Foreign Art Collection
    schedule for specific correspondences. [Note: The titles and definitions
    for indented art collections include all the details of the one(s) that are
    hierarchically superior.]


CLS 252/FOR100
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions for treating
    textile materials not more specifically provided for elsewhere, such as,
    for example, compositions for oiling or lubricating, rendering antistatic,
    softening, and silk-soaking, excepting detergent, bleaching and mere
    wetting compositions.


CLS 252/FOR101
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which comprise
    organic compounds containing a sulfoxy group, i.e., a radical containing
    sulfur bonded to at least one  oxygen.


CLS 252/FOR102
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which also contain
    an amine or amide group.


CLS 252/FOR103
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which comprise
    organic compounds containing an amine or amide group.


CLS 252/FOR104
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which comprise
    organic compounds containing an ether group, i.e., having the type formula
    R-O-R.


CLS 252/FOR105
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    substances which are specialized and designed for, or peculiar to, use in
    removing or loosening scale or incrustation from the inner surfaces of
    steam boilers, water heaters or other water containers, or processes of
    making such compositions.


CLS 252/FOR106
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    deoxidants or free metals.


CLS 252/FOR107
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    plants, plant parts or extracts, or organic compounds.


CLS 252/FOR108
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    tannin, bark or bark extracts.


CLS 252/FOR109
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    inorganic compounds or elements, other than water.


CLS 252/FOR110
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions contain inorganic
    compounds or elements other than alkali metal hydroxides, alkali metal
    carbonates and water.


CLS 252/FOR111
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    inorganic compounds or elements other than water.


CLS 252/FOR112
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    inorganic compounds or elements other than alkali metal hydroxides, alkali
    metal carbonates and water.


CLS 252/FOR113
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions specialized and
    designed for, or peculiar to, use in sweeping, or which are adapted to take
    up, lay or collect dust or other particulate matter by adherence.


CLS 252/FOR114
TXT DETERGENTS (FOR USE ON SOLID MATERIALS):

    Foreign Art Collections including compositions specialized and designed
    for, or peculiar to, use in cleaning or removing foreign matter from solid
    surfaces.


CLS 252/FOR115
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions in the form of
    packages or which contain, in each case, a particular heterogeneous
    arrangement of two or more components, other than mixed or coated granules,
    which differ from each other chemically or physically.


CLS 252/FOR116
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions when there are
    present sheets or other bodies of nondetergent materials impregnated or
    coated with thin layers of soaps or detergents, per se.


CLS 252/FOR117
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which in each case,
    include a zone which contains a water-soluble soap and a separate zone of
    material which does not contain a water-soluble soap.


CLS 252/FOR118
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions when the soap is
    closely surrounded by a coating, wrapper or casing.


CLS 252/FOR119
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    compounds which are adapted to bleach, oxidize, or reduce by chemical
    reactions.


CLS 252/FOR120
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    compounds which are adapted to oxidize by chemical reactions.


CLS 252/FOR121
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    water-soluble soaps of fatty acids or rosin.


CLS 252/FOR122
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    water-soluble inorganic compounds of boron, phosphorus or silicon.


CLS 252/FOR123
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    ammonia, amines or nitrogen bases, or compounds thereof, other than
    proteins.


CLS 252/FOR124
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    water-soluble inorganic compounds of boron, phosphorus or silicon.


CLS 252/FOR125
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which have acid reactions.


CLS 252/FOR126
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    nitric acid or aqua regia.


CLS 252/FOR127
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    ammonia, amines, or nitrogen bases, or compounds thereof, other than
    proteins.


CLS 252/FOR128
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which have alkaline
    reactions.


CLS 252/FOR129
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    solvents other than water.


CLS 252/FOR130
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    compounds which are adapted to reduce by chemical reactions.


CLS 252/FOR131
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    antiseptics, insecticides or other substances which are adapted to destroy
    plant or animal life, for the purpose of more than merely preserving the
    compositions.


CLS 252/FOR132
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    water-soluble soaps of fatty acids or rosin.


CLS 252/FOR133
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    water-soluble soaps of fatty acids or rosin.


CLS 252/FOR134
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    water-soluble inorganic compounds of boron, phosphorus or silicon.


CLS 252/FOR135
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    ammonia, amines or nitrogen bases, or compounds thereof, other than
    proteins.


CLS 252/FOR136
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    nonchemically-acting solvents other than water.


CLS 252/FOR137
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    water-insoluble abradents, nonsaponifiable waxes, gums, solid thickeners,
    or solid fillers.


CLS 252/FOR138
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    water-insoluble abradents, nonsaponifiable waxes, gums, solid thickeners,
    or solid fillers.


CLS 252/FOR139
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    nonchemically-acting solvents other than water.


CLS 252/FOR140
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    water-insoluble abradents, nonsaponifiable waxes, gums, solid thickeners,
    or solid fillers.


CLS 252/FOR141
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    water-insoluble abradents, nonsaponifiable waxes, gums, solid thickeners,
    or solid fillers.


CLS 252/FOR142
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    ammonia, amines or nitrogen bases, or compounds thereof, other than
    proteins.


CLS 252/FOR143
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    nonchemically-acting solvents other than water.


CLS 252/FOR144
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    water-insoluble abradents, nonsaponifiable waxes, gums, solid thickeners,
    or solid fillers.


CLS 252/FOR145
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    water-insoluble abradents, nonsaponifiable waxes, gums, solid thickeners,
    or solid fillers.


CLS 252/FOR146
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    organic compounds which contain a sulfo or sulfate radical.


CLS 252/FOR147
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    nonchemically-acting solvents other than water.


CLS 252/FOR148
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    water-insoluble abradents, nonsaponifiable waxes, gums, solid thickeners,
    or solid fillers.


CLS 252/FOR149
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain, both
    an organic and an inorganic water-insoluble abradent, nonsaponifiable wax,
    gum, solid thickener or solid filler.


CLS 252/FOR150
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    organic water-insoluble abradents, nonsaponifiable waxes, gums, solid
    thickeners, or solid fillers.


CLS 252/FOR151
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    hydrocarbons or halohydrocarbons.


CLS 252/FOR152
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    organic compounds which are not hydrocarbons or water-soluble soaps of
    fatty acids or rosin.


CLS 252/FOR153
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    water-insoluble abradents, nonsaponifiable waxes, gums, solid thickeners,
    or solid fillers.


CLS 252/FOR154
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain, both
    an organic and an inorganic water-insoluble abradent, wax, gum, solid
    thickener or solid filler.


CLS 252/FOR155
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    inorganic water-insoluble abradents, waxes, gums, solid thickeners or solid
    fillers.


CLS 252/FOR156
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    inorganic water-insoluble abradents, solid thickeners, or solid fillers.


CLS 252/FOR157
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    organic plant or animal extracts or matter or compounds other than the
    water-soluble soaps of fatty acids or rosin.


CLS 252/FOR158
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    inorganic compounds or elements other than water, alkali-metal hydroxides,
    and alkali-metal carbonates.


CLS 252/FOR159
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which possess
    particular physical shapes or structures other than granules or mere soap.


CLS 252/FOR160
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    water-soluble inorganic compounds of boron, phosphorus or silicon.


CLS 252/FOR161
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which have acid reactions.


CLS 252/FOR162
TXT Foreign Art Collections including composition containing ammonia
    or hydrazine, or a derivative of either, in which at least one hydrogen is
    replaced by a singly or doubly bonded carbon or by an acyl group or a salt
    of ammonia, hydrazine or such derivative, except protein.


CLS 252/FOR163
TXT Foreign Art Collections including composition in which the
    nitrogen of the amine is part of a heterocyclic ring, e.g., imidazoline.


CLS 252/FOR164
TXT Foreign Art Collections including composition in which the
    nitrogen is directly bonded to a carbon atom.


CLS 252/FOR165
TXT Foreign Art Collections including composition in which the amine
    compound includes a sulfur or a phosphorus atom.


CLS 252/FOR166
TXT Foreign Art Collections including composition in which the amine
    compound includes a carboxy group having a water soluble cation, e.g.,
    sodium nitrilotriacetate.


CLS 252/FOR167
TXT Foreign Art Collections including composition wherein the amine is
    penatvalent and the additional valences are satisfied by carbon or oxygen.


CLS 252/FOR168
TXT Foreign Art Collections including composition wherein the amine
    compound includes a hydroxy moiety.


CLS 252/FOR169
TXT Foreign Art Collections including composition in which an organic
    compound contains a S=O group.


CLS 252/FOR170
TXT Foreign Art Collections including composition including a compound
    having the SO4 group attached to an organic radical.


CLS 252/FOR171
TXT Foreign Art Collections including composition in which the sulfate
    compound includes an ether or hydroxy group.


CLS 252/FOR172
TXT Foreign Art Collections including composition which includes an
    additional acyclic compound which contains a SO3 radical.


CLS 252/FOR173
TXT Foreign Art Collections including composition which includes an
    additional compound containing a benzene ring and a SO3 radical.


CLS 252/FOR174
TXT Foreign Art Collections including composition which includes a
    compound containing the SO3 group free of benzene ring structure.


CLS 252/FOR175
TXT Foreign Art Collections including composition in which the
    sulfonic compound includes a double or triple bond.


CLS 252/FOR176
TXT Foreign Art Collections including composition which includes an
    additional ingredient which contains a SO3 group and a benzene ring.


CLS 252/FOR177
TXT Foreign Art Collections including composition in which the
    sulfonic compound includes the COOX group, in which X forms the acid, a
    salt or an ester.


CLS 252/FOR178
TXT Foreign Art Collections including composition which includes a
    compound which contains a benzene ring and a SO3 radical.


CLS 252/FOR179
TXT Foreign Art Collections including composition which includes an
    additional surfactant which does not ionize, e.g., ester, polyether,
    polyol, or fatty alcohol.


CLS 252/FOR180
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    nonchemically acting solvents other than water.


CLS 252/FOR181
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    water-insoluble abradents, nonsaponifiable waxes, gums, solid thickeners or
    solid fillers.


CLS 252/FOR182
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    water-soluble cyanides, cyanates or thiocyanates, other than mere double
    cyanides (e.g., potassium ferr- or ferri-cyanides).


CLS 252/FOR183
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which have acid reactions.


CLS 252/FOR184
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    nonchemically-acting solvents other than water.


CLS 252/FOR185
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    water-insoluble abradents, waxes, gums, solid thickeners or solid fillers.


CLS 252/FOR186
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    water-insoluble abradents, waxes, gums, solid thickeners or solid fillers.


CLS 252/FOR187
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which, in each
    case, contain a substance for inhibiting corrosion or attack of the solid
    surfaces to be cleaned, by any other substance in the compositions.


CLS 252/FOR188
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    elements other than C, H, O, N, S, Cl, Na and K and compounds of such
    elements.


CLS 252/FOR189
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    organic compounds which contain nitrogen.


CLS 252/FOR190
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    organic compounds which contain sulfur which is joined directly to carbon
    but not joined directly to oxygen.


CLS 252/FOR191
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    compounds which contain a thiazole nucleus.


CLS 252/FOR192
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    organic compounds which contain sulfur.


CLS 252/FOR193
TXT Foreign Art Collections including composition containing ammonia,
    or hydrazine, or a derivative thereof in which at least one hydrogen is
    replaced by a singly or doubly bonded carbon or by an acyl group or a salt
    of ammonia, hydrazine or such derivative, except protein.


CLS 252/FOR194
TXT Foreign Art Collections including composition in which the
    nitrogen of the amine is part of a heterocyclic ring, e.g., imidazoline.


CLS 252/FOR195
TXT Foreign Art Collections including composition in which the
    heterocyclic amine functions as an optical brightener or a fluorescent
    whitener.


CLS 252/FOR196
TXT Foreign Art Collections including composition in which the
    nitrogen is directly bonded to a carbon atom.


CLS 252/FOR197
TXT Foreign Art Collections including composition in which the amine
    compound includes a sulfur or a phosphorus atom.


CLS 252/FOR198
TXT Foreign Art Collections including composition in which the amine
    compound includes a carboxy group having a water soluble cation, e.g.,
    sodium nitrilotriacetate.


CLS 252/FOR199
TXT Foreign Art Collections including composition wherein the amine is
    penatvalent and the additional valences are satisfied by carbon or oxygen.



CLS 252/FOR200
TXT Foreign Art Collections including composition wherein the amine
    compound includes a hydroxy moiety.


CLS 252/FOR201
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    nonchemically-acting solvents other than water.


CLS 252/FOR202
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    water-insoluble abradents, nonsaponifiable waxes, gums, solid thickeners or
    solid fillers.


CLS 252/FOR203
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    water-insoluble abradents, nonsaponifiable waxes, gums, solid thickeners or
    solid fillers.


CLS 252/FOR204
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which have alkaline
    reactions.


CLS 252/FOR205
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which are adapted
    to generate or liberate gas when brought in contact with water.


CLS 252/FOR206
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    nonchemically-acting solvent other than water.


CLS 252/FOR207
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    water-insoluble abradents, nonsaponifiable waxes, gums, solid thickeners or
    solid fillers.


CLS 252/FOR208
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    water-insoluble abradents, nonsaponifiable waxes, gums, solid thickeners or
    solid fillers.


CLS 252/FOR209
TXT Foreign Art Collections including composition in which an organic
    compound contains a S=O group.


CLS 252/FOR210
TXT Foreign Art Collections including composition including a compound
    having the SO4 group attached to an organic radical.


CLS 252/FOR211
TXT Foreign Art Collections including composition in which the sulfate
    compound inlcudes an ether or hydroxy group.


CLS 252/FOR212
TXT Foreign Art Collections including composition which includes an
    additional acyclic compound which contains a SO3 radical.


CLS 252/FOR213
TXT Foreign Art Collections including composition which includes an
    additional compound containing a benzene ring and a SO3 radical.


CLS 252/FOR214
TXT Foreign Art Collections including composition which includes a
    compound containing the SO3 group free of benzene ring structure.


CLS 252/FOR215
TXT Foreign Art Collections including composition in which the
    sulfonic compound includes a double or triple bond.


CLS 252/FOR216
TXT Foreign Art Collections including composition which includes an
    additional ingredient which contains a SO3 group and a benzene ring.


CLS 252/FOR217
TXT Foreign Art Collections including composition in which the
    sulfonic compound includes the COOX group, in which X forms the acid, a
    salt or an ester.


CLS 252/FOR218
TXT Foreign Art Collections including composition which includes a
    compound which contains a benzene ring and SO3 radical.


CLS 252/FOR219
TXT Foreign Art Collections including composition which includes an
    additional surfactant which does not ionize, e.g., ester, polyether or
    polyol.


CLS 252/FOR220
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    solvents other than water.


CLS 252/FOR221
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    abradents, waxes, gums, cellulose esters, inorganic solids, thickeners or
    fillers.


CLS 252/FOR222
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    organic compounds which contain oxygen, other than the substances recited
    in this hierarchy.


CLS 252/FOR223
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    organic compounds which contain elements, other than carbon, hydrogen and
    oxygen, other than the substances recited in this hierarchy.


CLS 252/FOR224
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    hydrocarbon solvents.


CLS 252/FOR225
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    hydrocarbon solvents.


CLS 252/FOR226
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which, in each
    case, contain a wax or cellulose ester and also an abradent, inorganic
    solid, thickener or filler other than a wax or cellulose ester.


CLS 252/FOR227
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain waxes
    or cellulose esters.


CLS 252/FOR228
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    organic compounds which contain oxygen.


CLS 252/FOR229
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    organic compounds which contain elements other than carbon, hydrogen and
    oxygen.


CLS 252/FOR230
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    substances which are not hydrocarbons.


CLS 252/FOR231
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain a
    significant amount of water in the form of colloids or otherwise.


CLS 252/FOR232
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which possess
    particular physical shapes or structures.


CLS 252/FOR233
TXT Perfume containing:

    Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain a perfume.


CLS 252/FOR234
TXT Enzyme containing:

    Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain an enzyme.


CLS 252/FOR235
TXT Coated or encapsulated particle or liquid containing (other than
    spray dried detergents):

    Foreign Art Collections including compositions in which all or part of the
    composition consists of particles having a material coated thereon or
    impregnated therein or consists of solid or liquid material having an
    encapsulation coating, but excluding mere detergent composition powders
    formed by spray drying.


CLS 252/FOR236
TXT Alkali metal inorganic carbonate containing:

    Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain an inorganic
    alkali metal carbonate, e.g., potassium carbonate, sodium bicarbonate, etc.


CLS 252/FOR237
TXT Organo-silicon compound containing:

    Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain an organic
    silicon compound.


CLS 252/FOR238
TXT Organo-phosphorus compound containing:

    Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain an organic
    phosphorus compound.


CLS 252/FOR239
TXT Carbohydrate moiety containing:

    Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain a compound
    having a carbohydrate moiety.


CLS 252/FOR240
TXT Carboxyl group containing:

    Foreign Art Collections including compositions wherein the carbohydrate
    moiety containing compound also contains a carboxyl group, either in free
    or in salt or esterified form.


CLS 252/FOR241
TXT Nonpolymeric compound having at least two free carboxyl groups containing:

    Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain a nonpolymeric
    compound having at least two free carboxyl groups or carboxylate salts or
    is an anhydride.


CLS 252/FOR242
TXT Polyoxyalkylene compound containing:

    Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain a compound
    having polyoxyalkylene groups.


CLS 252/FOR243
TXT Two or more polyoxyalkylene compounds containing:

    Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain at least two
    polyoxyalkylene compounds.


CLS 252/FOR244
TXT Polymer containing:

    Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain a polymer.


CLS 252/FOR245
TXT Carboxylic acid anhydride, free carboxyl group, or salt thereof containing:

    Foreign Art Collections including compositions wherein the polymer contains
    a carboxylic acid anhydride or free carboxyl group or salt thereof.


CLS 252/FOR246
TXT Water-insoluble inorganic compound containing:

    Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain a
    water-insoluble inorganic compound.


CLS 252/FOR247
TXT Foreign Art Collections including compositions which contain
    alkali-metal salts of water-insoluble fatty or rosin (abietic) acids or
    processes of making such salts.


CLS 252/FOR248
TXT Foreign Art Collections including products under this hierarchy.


CLS 252/FOR249
TXT Foreign Art Collections including processes which include saponification.


CLS 252/FOR250
TXT Foreign Art Collections including processes  which include
    operations subsequent to the termination of the saponifications.

    FOREIGN ART COLLECTIONS

    The definitions for FOR 251 to FOR 254 below correspond to the definitions
    of the abolished subclasses under Class 252 from which these collections
    were formed.  See the Foreign Art Collection schedule for specific
    correspondences.  [Note:  The titles and definitions for indented art
    collections include all the details of the one(s) that are hierarchically
    superior.]


CLS 252/FOR251
TXT Foreign art collection which contains a metal compound not
    provided for above.  (252/518)


CLS 252/FOR252
TXT Foreign art collection wherein the metal compound is a compound of
    the iron group metals.  (252/519)


CLS 252/FOR253
TXT Foreign art collection which contains a titanium or zirconium
    compound.  (252/520)


CLS 252/FOR254
TXT Foreign art collection which contains a magnesium, alkaline earth
    metal, or rare earth metal compound.  (252/521)


CLS 254/
TTL IMPLEMENTS OR APPARATUS FOR  APPLYING PUSHING OR PULLING FORCE

CLS 254/
TXT This class includes implements or apparatus for applying a pushing or
    pulling force directly to either (a) an object to be moved, or (b) a
    generally stationary object upon which pressure or tension is to be
    exerted.  It comprises jacks (including lifting jacks, floor jacks, and
    analogous implements), extracting apparatus (including stump pullers and
    nail extractors), tensioning apparatus (including belt, carpet and wire
    stretchers), hoist trucks, and cable-type load hauling or hoisting
    apparatus.  Also included in this class is the subcombination of a cable
    guide which (1) is a component of, or used in combination with, an
    implement or an apparatus of this class, and (2) is intended to guide a
    cable which is directly connected to either the object or an
    object-supporting or -engaging member.

    This class does not include the power-applying elements of machines, such
    as pump or presses, nor the adjusting elements of articles such as tables
    and chairs.  It may, however, include supports of general application not
    elsewhere classifiable when they comprise means for hoisting the
    load-carrying portion of the support.

    Implements for performing compressing operations upon material, e.g.,
    clamps and bundling devices, are excluded, also devices for merely grasping
    or engaging with something to be moved.

    Pushing or pulling implements of the jack or crowbar type, including those
    having special engaging features which engage between spring elements only,
    will be classified in Class 254. Those implements which engage between a
    spring and other structure to move or guide the spring into assembled or
    disassembled position will be classified in Class 29, subclasses 700+.

    Patents that disclose a general use and state the implement can be used on
    an engine valve spring whether they coact with other structure for assembly
    or disassembly will be grouped as an art collection in Class 29, subclasses
    215+.

    Patents to an implement for spreading elements of a leaf spring are
    classified in Class 81, subclass 3.7.

    SEARCH CLASS

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 700+ for pushing and pulling implements
    specially designed for assembling and disassembling purposes.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 349+ for a copyholder
    including means to elevate a platen to move copy supported by the platen
    relative to a line guide.

    81,     Tools, appropriate subclasses for a hand manipulatable tool for
    exerting a push or pull, but having no force multiplier or energy
    transducer to develop the pushing or pulling  force.  See particularly
    subclass 9.4 for a tool having means for pulling an insulating sheath from
    a wire, subclasses 300+ for pliers, subclass 485 for spreaders, subclass
    486 for a resilient article tensioner or compressor, and subclass 487 for a
    tool having clamping jaws for gripping an article to be pulled.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 141+ and see the search notes
    therein for an advance causing or controlling means for a tool driving or
    impacting means.

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclasses 203+ for a stationary lift for a roadway vehicle which elevates
    the entire vehicle to a significantly higher level where it is inspected or
    repaired and appropriate subclasses for an elevator for lifting a load from
    a charging level to a significantly higher discharge level.

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 205+ for pushing and pulling mold adjuncts.

    252,    Compositions, appropriate subclasses for fluids for hydraulic jacks
    or for other hydraulic devices.


CLS 254/1
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Pushing and pulling implement under the class definition not provided for
    under more specific titles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools,  subclasses 3.07+ for a receptacle closure removing tool for
    tools combined with a pushing or pulling means.


CLS 254/2
TXT HOISTING TRUCK:

    Wheeled hoists under the class definition comprising a truck platform or
    equivalent load support and mechanism for raising and lowering the load
    support.  Those in which the load support is raised or lowered by mere
    adjustment of the wheels, as by the movement of legs or levers on which the
    wheels are mounted, are excluded, also those having means for elevating one
    part of the vehicle body relative to another for the purpose of dumping or
    leveling.

    (1)     Note.  Vehicles for transporting the load while it is suspended
    from a hoisting means are classified, according to the hoisting structure,
    either in appropriate structural subclasses elsewhere in this class or in
    Class 212, Traversing Hoists.

    (2)     Note.  Wheeled hoists classifiable in this class and falling in
    this group on disclosure have been placed here whether the wheels are
    claimed or not.

    (3)     Note.  See Classes 16, Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 32; 104,
    Railways, subclass 263; 105, Railway Rolling Stocks, subclass 73; and 280,
    Land Vehicles, subclasses 43+ for wheeled structures in which a raising or
    lowering is obtained by mere adjustment of the wheels relative to the
    vehicle frame or other supported structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 261.1+ for tilting body railway
    cars.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 63.1+ for a
    wheel-mounted scaffold, ladder or escape with erection means.

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclasses 222+ for a fork lift truck and subclasses 240+ for a
    transportable elevator.

    212,    Traversing Hoists, appropriate subclasses for overhead traveling
    hoists.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 43+ for wheeled vehicles in which a
    raising or lowering of the vehicle body is obtained by mere vertical
    adjustment of the wheels relative to the running gear.

    298,    Land Vehicles:  Dumping, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclasses 17+ for loading-dumping vehicles.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 540+; and 298, Land
    Vehicles, Dumping, subclass 11 for vehicles having elevators to load or
    unload them.


CLS 254/3
TXT Tilting load support:

    Hoisting truck under subclass 2 in which the raising movement varies the
    inclination of the load-supporting surface, generally bringing it toward a
    horizontal position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 469+ for a self-loading or
    unloading vehicle having a load-receiving portion which is pivotable
    relative to the horizontal.


CLS 254/4
TXT Cable hoist:

    Hoisting truck under subclass 2 in which the load support is attached to
    and hoisted by cables passing over drums or pulleys.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 89.2+ for a drum and cable
    used to reciprocate or oscillate one component of an apparatus relative to
    another component of the apparatus.

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclasses 240+ for a transportable elevator.


CLS 254/5
TXT Inclined plane or wedge:

    Hoisting truck under subclass 2 in which the load support is raised by the
    action of wedges or inclined planes.


CLS 254/6
TXT Rack and pinion or segment:

    Hoisting truck under subclass 2 in which the load support is raised by rack
    and pinion or rack and toothed segment mechanism.


CLS 254/7
TXT Screw:

    Hoisting truck under subclass 2 in which the load support is raised
    directly by one or more screws.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99,     for wheeled screw hoists in which the load is suspended from the
    screw or screws.


CLS 254/8
TXT Single throw lever:

    Hoisting truck under subclass 2 in which the load support is raised
    directly by lever mechanism, the movement of the lever or levers being
    limited to a single throw.

    (1)     Note.  Those trucks are excluded in which the truck wheels are
    mounted upon swinging legs or levers, by the mere swinging movement of
    which, relative to the vehicle frame, the frame or platform is raised.


CLS 254/9
TXT Toggle:

    Hoisting truck under subclass 8 in which the load support is raised by
    means of single throw toggle levers.


CLS 254/10
TXT Parallelogram bars:

    Hoisting truck under subclass 8 in which the load support is raised by the
    movement of links or bars arranged in the form of a parallelogram.


CLS 254/10.5
TXT METALLIC SPRING STRETCHER AND/OR COMPRESSOR, (E.G., LEAF, HELICAL OR COIL
    SPRINGS):

    Device under the class definition, the claimed structure of which functions
    as disclosed to engage an exert compressive, torsion or tensile forces on
    articles made of metal and usually known as "springs".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 213.1+ for engine valve spring
    compressors, and subclasses 225+ for spring appliers and removers; and see
    the class definition of this class (254) for a statement of the line
    between Classes 29 and 254.

    81,     Tools, subclass 3.7 for a tool for spreading portions of a leaf
    spring, subclass 485 for other hand manipulated spreading tools, and
    subclass 486 for a hand manipulative tool for placing a resilient article
    under tension or compression.


CLS 254/11
TXT FLOOR JACK TYPE:

    Implement under the class definition used in laying flooring, siding or the
    like to force the boards to proper position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses. Class 269 is the residual
    locus for patents to a device for clamping, supporting and/or holding an
    article (or articles) in position to be operated on or treated.  See notes
    thereunder for other related loci.


CLS 254/12
TXT Rack and pinion or segment:

    Implement under subclass 11 of the floor jack type in which the
    board-forcing member is provided with a rack with which an actuating pinion
    or rack segment is in constant engagement.


CLS 254/13
TXT Screw:

    Implement under subclass 11 of the floor jack type in which the
    board-forcing member is provided with a screw by means of which it is
    caused to travel.


CLS 254/14
TXT Step-by-step traveling member:

    Implement under subclass 11 of the floor jack type not classifiable in the
    preceding subclasses in which the board-forcing member is caused to travel
    in a step-by-step movement by reciprocating engaging means.


CLS 254/15
TXT Single throw lever and bar:

    Implement under subclass 11 of the floor jack type in which the
    board-forcing member is a lever-actuated bar, the entire travel of the bar
    being produced by a single throw of the lever.


CLS 254/16
TXT Sliding bar:

    Implement under subclass 15 of the floor jack type in which the
    board-forcing member is a bar actuated by a single throw lever and sliding
    on some supporting portion of the jack.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for floor jacks in which a rack bar is actuated by a single throw
    lever provided with a gear segment.


CLS 254/17
TXT Single throw lever:

    Implement under subclass 11 of the floor jack type in which the actuating
    lever or a part rigid therewith directly engages the board, the movement
    under load being limited to a single throw of the lever.


CLS 254/18
TXT NAIL EXTRACTOR TYPE:

    Implement under the class definition especially designed for pulling nails,
    spikes, tacks and the like.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclass 16 for machines for pulling out the
    lasting tacks used for temporarily securing the upper of a shoe to the sole
    or insole.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 700+ for analogous structures.

    112,    Sewing, subclass 30 for shoe sole sewing machines including
    tack-pulling devices.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclass 63 for combined
    apparatus for applying and withdrawing a member, e.g., nail.


CLS 254/19
TXT Hammer and anvil:

    Implement under subclass 18 of the nail extractor type including a hammer
    device for forcing the jaw or nipper into engagement with the nail or the
    like.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 463+; and see the notes thereto for other impact
    tools.


CLS 254/20
TXT Screw:

    Implement under subclass 18 of the nail extractor type including screw and
    nut mechanism for moving the nail-engaging member to extract the nail.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    and see the search notes thereunder.

    231+,   for implement or apparatus for extracting stumps or poles including
    a screw drive for moving the stump-engaging member.


CLS 254/21
TXT Single throw lever:

    Implement under subclass 18 of the nail extractor type including an
    operating lever, the entire pulling movement of the implement being
    produced by a single throw of the lever.


CLS 254/22
TXT Lever and pivoted jaw grip:

    Nail extractor under subclass 21 of the single throw lever type adapted to
    engage the nail between the pulling lever and a jaw pivoted thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for nail extractor having a jaw and hammer.

    131,    for pushing and pulling implements, using a single throw lever.


CLS 254/23
TXT Multiple jaw grip:

    Nail extractor under subclass 21 of the single throw lever type including a
    plurality of nail-gripping jaws movable relative to the lever.


CLS 254/24
TXT Cam and wedge actuated:

    Nail extractor under subclass 23 of the single throw lever type including a
    plurality of nail-gripping jaws movable relative to the lever and actuated
    to grip the nail by wedge or cam action.


CLS 254/25
TXT Claw bar:

    Nail extractor under subclass 21 of the single throw lever type in which
    the nail-engaging means is merely a claw fixed to or forming part of the
    lever.


CLS 254/26
TXT Hammer:

    Claw bar nail extractor under subclass 25 combined with conventional hammer
    structures.


CLS 254/27
TXT Pivoted fulcrum member:

    Claw bar nail extractor under subclass 25 provided with a fulcrum member
    pivotally connected to the lever or bar.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36+,    for pinch bar car pushers.


CLS 254/28
TXT STAPLE PULLER:

    Implement under the class definition especially designed for pulling
    staples.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclass 63 for combined
    apparatus for applying and withdrawing a member, e.g., staple.


CLS 254/28.5
TXT THILL-COUPLING JACK:

    Device under the class definition for forcing thill irons into axle clips
    against resilient antirattling devices or for forcing antirattlers into
    their positions in thill couplings.


CLS 254/29
TXT PIPE OR ROD JACK:

    Jack under the class definition especially designed for driving or pulling
    pipes, pump rods, piles, or the like, other than by impact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43      and 44, for some analogous structures for shifting rails
    longitudinally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 237 for apparatus for assembling or
    disassembling couplings and conduits.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 141+, and see the search
    notes therein for an advance causing or controlling means in combination
    with a tool-driving or-impacting device.

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 213 for tie rods or wires having a force
    multiplying component permanently attached thereto or remaining with the
    rods or wires when they are in use with a static mold.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 184 for methods and
    apparatus for advancing a length of pipe through an earth formation; and
    subclasses 232+ for impact devices and other means for forcing a pile into
    the earth when the structure of the pile is involved.


CLS 254/30
TXT Lifter:

    Jack under subclass 29 for raising pipes, rods, piles, and the like.

    (1)     Note.  Jacks of more general application but provided with grapples
    for pulling stumps or the like are classified under the structural
    subclasses elsewhere in this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18+,    for nail extractors.


CLS 254/31
TXT Reciprocating clutch:

    Pipe or rod lifters under subclass 30 comprising clutch means for engaging
    with the pipe, rod, or the like, and mechanism for reciprocating said
    clutch means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106+,   for analogous structures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 53+ for a tool drive in which
    a tool is reciprocated by tool shaft gripping means which release or yield
    to permit advance.

    188,    Brakes, particularly subclass 67 for a brake mechanically connected
    to a relatively stationary structure and which holds a pipe or rod at
    various locations along the pipe's or rod's length for short, quick linear
    assembly or disassembly during a work or manufacturing operation or
    preparatory to a working operation done by the pipe, rod or a pipe
    supported tool.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 86.4+ for
    pipe-lifting grips.


CLS 254/32
TXT AXLE LUBRICATING JACK:

    Implement under the class definition for use in raising vehicle wheels or
    axles for the purpose of lubricating the axle and including structure
    relating especially to such use, such as oiling devices, wheel rests,
    wrenches or means for removing the wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclass 2 for the combination of wrench and oiler only.


CLS 254/33
TXT CAR JOURNAL BOX LIFTING:

    Lifting implement and support under the class definition including
    structure especially designed for use in lifting journal boxes of cars.


CLS 254/34
TXT Suspended lifter:

    Car journal box lifting implement under subclass 33 including means for
    suspending the load from the wheel or axle; includes some jacks which lift
    the journal box by rotation of the car wheel.


CLS 254/35
TXT CAR PUSHER TYPE:

    Pushing implement under the class definition designed especially for moving
    vehicles and operating between the vehicle and a rail or other portion of
    the road surface.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include apparatus forming a permanent
    part of the vehicle structure, whether serving as the usual or an auxiliary
    propelling means, nor propelling devices comprising traction wheels
    engaging a road surface.


CLS 254/36
TXT Pinch bar:

    Car pusher under subclass 35 for the type commonly known as "pinch bars",
    comprising a lever operating between a wheel and the road surface.


CLS 254/37
TXT Rail clamping:

    Pinch bar type car pushers under subclass 36 including movable jaws for
    clamping the rail.


CLS 254/38
TXT Pivoted wheel engaging member:

    Pinch bar type car pushers under subclass 36 comprising a pivoted member
    mounted upon or actuated by the power lever to engage and move the vehicle
    wheel.


CLS 254/39
TXT DOOR BRACE:

    Prop or brace under the class definition for forcing a door into tightly
    closed position or holding it closed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclass 338 for braces holding closures in
    adjusted positions.


CLS 254/40
TXT PRINTER'S QUOIN:

    Device under the class definition for locking up or fastening type in
    chases or galleys.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclass 394 for quoins, combined with special chase
    structure; and subclass 368 for register hooks and similar adjustable
    clamping devices for printing surfaces.

    276,    Typesetting, subclasses 40+ for similar devices involving
    combination with galleys or of special adaptation to galleys.


CLS 254/41
TXT Screw:

    Printer's quoin under subclass 40 expanded directly by screw mechanism.


CLS 254/42
TXT Wedge:

    Printer's quoin under subclass 40 in which the forcing members are wedges.


CLS 254/43
TXT RAIL OR TIE SHIFTER:

    Implement under the class definition for moving railway ties or rails
    laterally without lifting them.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 651.1 for track gages not
    including means for forcing the rails laterally.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 212+ and 389+ for a three-point bending
    jack.

    104,    Railways, subclass 2 for track-laying machines for performing other
    operations in addition to shifting the track.


CLS 254/44
TXT Single throw lever:

    Rail or tie shifters under subclass 43 in which the shifting element
    consists of, or is actuated by, a lever having a single throw.


CLS 254/45
TXT VEHICLE BODY LIFTERS:

    Apparatus under the class definition especially designed for lifting hay
    racks, wagon boxes, car bodies, and the like, from the running gear or
    trucks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 383+ for a
    load-transporting-type vehicle and the external means which cooperates in
    the loading or unloading of the vehicle and wherein the means is one which
    cooperates with the motion of the vehicle to reorient the load body,
    relative to the wheels, into a load-releasing attitude; and subclass 386
    for another such vehicle and means, but wherein the means comprises a
    driven device for engaging and moving a portable load body relative to the
    remainder of the vehicle.


CLS 254/46
TXT Lever and drum:

    Vehicle body lifters under subclass 45 in which the body is lifted by a
    lever or levers actuated by a cable and drum.


CLS 254/47
TXT Cable hoist:

    Vehicle body lifters under subclass 45 in which the bodies are supported
    and hoisted directly by cables passing over drums or pulleys.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266+,   for apparatus for hauling or hoisting a load including a rotatably
    driven drum and cable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 89.2+ for a drum and cable
    used to reciprocate or oscillate one component of an apparatus relative to
    another component of the apparatus.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the materials.


CLS 254/48
TXT Vehicle attached drum:

    Cable hoist under subclass 47 for vehicle bodies in which the
    cable-actuating drum is attached to some part of the vehicle, generally the
    vehicle body.


CLS 254/49
TXT Swinging side bar:

    Vehicle body lifter under subclass 45 comprising pivoted side bars, between
    which the running gears move and by which the body is lifted.


CLS 254/50
TXT Single fixed pivot:

    Vehicle body lifter under subclass 49 of the swinging side bar type in
    which the side bars tilt about a single fixed pivot.


CLS 254/50.1
TXT RESILIENT TIRE-CASING SPREADERS:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising means for engaging and
    applying force either to spread apart or to press together the beads or
    side walls of resilient tire casings.

    (1)     Note.  The spreading apart of the beads is usually disclosed as
    opening the interior of the casing for inspection, while the pressing
    together of the side walls is usually disclosed as opening up surface
    defects in the tread portion of the casing.

    (2)     Note.  The "means for engaging and applying force" referred to in
    the definition is to be construed as excluding devices which merely hold
    the tire casing in deformed position.  See Class 81, Tools, subclass 15.3
    for such devices.  Tire spread holders which are provided with means
    adapting the device to use also as a spreader are provided for in this or
    the indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 15.2+ for resilient tire repair tools in general,
    particularly subclass 15.3 (see (1) Note), and subclass 485 for hand
    manipulative tools for spreading portions of an article apart.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    394.1+ for casing spreaders in combination with tire-building apparatus.

    157,    Wheelwright Machines, subclasses 1.17+ for tire spreaders used in
    applying tire casings to wheels, e.g., (a) devices which spread tire
    casings while the casing is on a wheel, (b) spreaders combined with means
    to apply a casing to, or remove it from, a wheel, or (c) spreaders
    convertible to use as tire-casing compressors used in applying the casing
    to a wheel.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 48 for apparatus for reshaping or vulcanizing a tire including a
    curing bag inserter or remover.


CLS 254/50.2
TXT Spreader and tire casing relatively movable or rotatably mounted:

    Apparatus under subclass 50.1 in which (a) the spreader is provided with
    means to move it, or adapting it for movement, relative to the casing while
    the casing is in spread condition, or (b) the spreader and casing are
    supported for rotary movement together.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    157,    Wheelwright Machines, subclasses 1.22+ for devices for assembling
    or disassembling tires and wheels embodying tire-engaging means adapted to
    move circumferentially of the tire.


CLS 254/50.3
TXT Fluid pressure operated:

    Apparatus under subclass 50.1 in which the spreader operating means is
    actuated by fluid pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93,     and the notes thereto, for pushing and pulling devices in general,
    operated by fluid pressure.


CLS 254/50.4
TXT With tire casing support:

    Apparatus under subclass 50.1 in which the spreader is provided with means
    which support the tire casing against the action of gravity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50.2    and 50.3, for devices having supports for the spread tire in
    addition to the characteristics provided for in those subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses for supports in general.


CLS 254/84
TXT TRAVERSING JACK:

    Lifting jack under the class definition which comprises, in addition to the
    lifting means, other means for moving the load or permitting it to be moved
    laterally other than by bodily movement of the jack as a whole.

    (1)     Note.  Some patents for the traversing mechanism alone are
    included, the apparatus being designed for use as a base or support for a
    lifting jack. Jacks provided merely with a rocking head or base have not
    been placed here unless they include mechanism for positively shifting the
    load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclasses 262+ for car-replacing jacks which both lift
    and traverse the vehicle by a single operation.

    212,    Traversing Hoists, appropriate subclasses for traversing hoists
    from which the load is suspended.


CLS 254/85
TXT Screw:

    Traversing jack under subclass 84 in which either the lifting or the
    traversing, or both, are performed by screw mechanism.


CLS 254/88
TXT INCLINED PLANE LIFTER:

    Lifting implement under the class definition comprising an incline up which
    the load or load-carrying member travels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      45 and 50, for hoist truck and vehicle body lifters using inclined
    planes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 262 for car-shifting inclines leading to the
    level of the rail.

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, subclass 41 for ways
    which may be placed in inclined position.


CLS 254/89
TXT MULTIPLE LIFTERS (E.G., VEHICLE LIFTS):

    Lifting implement under the class definition comprising a plurality of
    lifting members operating upon the load at different points.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      45+, 86, 88, and search particularly 264+, for apparatus for
    hauling or hoisting a load including at least one driven device for either
    pulling on a cable attached to the load or traveling along a fixed cable
    with the load; the cable or device may engage a single load at plural
    points.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 625+ for invalid beds having means to move the
    frame up and down.

    104,    Railways, subclasses 32.1+ for lifters combined with special
    arrangements of track.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 141+ for an elevating
    platform.

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift Vehicle,
    subclasses 203+ for a stationary lift for a roadway vehicle which elevates
    the entire vehicle to a significantly higher level where it is inspected or
    repaired.


CLS 254/90
TXT Track straddling platform:

    Portable platform under subclass 89 usually for supporting hoisting
    apparatus and mounted upon multiple lifting means, so as to straddle a
    track or roadway.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclass 314 for vertically adjustable
    travelling bridge cranes; and subclasses 324+ for gantry-type bridges.


CLS 254/91
TXT Swinging platform:

    Multiple lifters under subclass 89 comprising a plurality of swinging bars
    supporting a platform or skeleton frame serving as the equivalent of a
    platform.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10      and 49, for hoist trucks and vehicle body lifters using swinging
    bars.


CLS 254/92
TXT Screw:

    Multiple lifters under subclass 89 in which the load is lifted directly by
    screws.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for hoist trucks using a screw to raise the load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclasses 32.1+ for track changers employing screw
    devices.

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclass 214 for a screw driven stationary lift for a roadway vehicle which
    elevates the entire vehicle to a significantly higher level where it is
    inspected or repaired.


CLS 254/93
TXT FLUID PRESSURE:

    Pushing and pulling implements under the class definition actuated by fluid
    pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50.3,   for tire spreaders employing fluid pressure means.

    201     and 228, for implements or apparatus for tensioning flexible
    material or extracting stumps or poles having and expansible chamber fluid
    motor drive.

    385,    for apparatus for hauling or hoisting a load including rotatable,
    cable contacting, pulley wheel elements attached to and reciprocated by an
    expansible fluid motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 325+ for a motor of general utility driven
    by motive fluid from a pressure fluid source.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclasses for
    expansible chamber motors, per se.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 269.01+ for a fluid pressure actuated
    reciprocating press construction.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, for rotary expansible chamber
    devices, per se.


CLS 254/94
TXT Rocking supports:

    Lifting implements under the class definition comprising a rigid supporting
    element which lifts the load by a rocking movement about the base of the
    supporting element.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is not intended to include rocking lifting
    devices when any means is provided for producing the rocking movement other
    than by the mere lateral movement of the load itself.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for vehicle body lifters using swinging side bars.


CLS 254/95
TXT RACK AND PINION:

    Pushing and pulling implement under the class definition comprising an
    extensible rack member actuated by a pinion for operating upon the load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      12, 205, 230, and 341, for implements or apparatus including a rack
    and pinion, or pinion segment drive.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 422 for the rack and pinion
    mechanism, per se.


CLS 254/96
TXT Screw pinion:

    Rack and pinion pushing and pulling implement under subclass 95 in which
    the pinion is of a spiral or screw form.


CLS 254/97
TXT Geared:

    Rack and pinion pushing and pulling implement under subclass 95 comprising
    rotary gears for actuating the rack-engaging pinion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for hoist trucks using rack and pinion or segment lift gear.


CLS 254/98
TXT SCREW:

    Pushing and pulling implement under the class definition comprising an
    extensible screw member for operating upon the load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      85, 92, 204, and 231+, for implements or apparatus including screw
    drive.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 424.7 and 424.8 for the
    gearing, per se.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 404+ and 422 for screw members operating to
    vertically adjust a stand or stool.


CLS 254/99
TXT Derrick type:

    Screw pushing and pulling implement under subclass 98 comprising a derrick
    structure from which the load is suspended.


CLS 254/100
TXT Special engaging feature:

    Screw pushing and pulling implement under subclass 98 including some
    special structure in the means for engaging the load or the support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      13, 20, 30, 41, 54, and 67, for screw-type implements of special
    utility.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 258+ for screw-type assembly or
    disassembly means.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 390 for screw-actuated tool having
    relatively movable offset tool faces.

    81,     Tools, subclasses 3.33, 3.37, and 3.45 for closure removers for
    receptacles employing screw-actuated devices.

    157,    Wheelwright Machines, subclasses 8+ and 12 for tire tighteners and
    spoke extractors respectively employing screw-actuated devices.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 188.2+ for a leveling device combined with or
    requiring modification of a table leg or the like.

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 240+ for patents to a device with
    relatively movable jaws actuated by screw nut means.


CLS 254/101
TXT Rocking head or base:

    Screw pushing and pulling implement under subclass 100 comprising a pivoted
    or jointed head or base to permit rocking adjustment.


CLS 254/102
TXT Telescoping screws:

    Screw pushing and pulling implement under subclass 98 which comprise a
    plurality of screws arranged to telescope one within another.


CLS 254/103
TXT Geared:

    Screw pushing and pulling implement under subclass 98 comprising rotary
    gears for actuating the screw or the screw-actuating nut.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7       and 92, implements or apparatus with a screw drive.

    236,    for implements or apparatus having intermeshing gears for driving
    screw.


CLS 254/104
TXT WEDGE:

    Pushing and pulling implement under the class definition comprising a
    traveling wedge.

    (1)     Note.  Includes wedges, per se, not of a character deemed limited
    to a particular art.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11      and 42, for floor jacks and printer's quoins which employ traveling
    wedges.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclass 342 for wedge structures for securing
    closures in adjusted positions.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclass 23 for
    wedge-type means insertable in a hole in the earth to break up hard
    material in situ.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 585 for a
    metallic intermediate article having a tapered end.


CLS 254/105
TXT STEP-BY-STEP TRAVELING BAR:

    Pushing and pulling implement under the class definition not classifiable
    in the preceding subclasses comprising a bar adapted to engage a load or a
    support and means for causing it to travel in a step-by-step movement
    relative to other elements or the implement.

    (1)     Note.  The "bar" may act as a lever and may itself be the
    power-applying or increasing lever, provided it has a bodily travel
    relative to other parts of the implement.  It should be noted that the
    "travel" of the bar is relative.  Hence, if the bar acts against a fixed
    support, the actual travel relative to such support will be performed by
    the other load-engaging elements.

    (2)     Note.  For classification purposes, this subclass is considered
    superior to subclass 93 above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for a floor jack with a step-by-step traveling member.

    244,    for implements or apparatus including a bar component having plural
    holes and removable cooperating pins selectively engageable by a lever.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 349+ for a copyholder
    including a step-by-step traveling bar which engages and raises a platen to
    which copy is attached.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 111+ for the mechanical
    movement, per se.


CLS 254/106
TXT Clutch actuated:

    Pushing and pulling implement under subclass 105 of the step-by-step
    traveling bar type in which the relative travel of the bar is produced by
    one or more reciprocating clutches.

    (1)     Note.  The term "clutch" is here used to designate a bar-engaging
    device, generally annular, which engages opposite sides of a bar with a
    canting, clamping, or gripping action.  The bar may be smooth or notched.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for a pipe or rod lifter having a clutch means for engaging and
    shifting the pipe or rod.

    210     and 245, for implements or apparatus having a lever and gripping
    means attached thereto for shifting a bar component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 350 for a copyholder
    including one or more clutches to move a step-by-step traveling bar
    attached to, and in turn moving a platen to which copy is secured.


CLS 254/107
TXT Multiple driving clutches:

    Pushing and pulling implement under subclass 106 of the step-by-step
    traveling bar type comprising a plurality of alternately acting driving
    clutches.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254,    259 and 384, for a hand-held lever with plural cable-engaging means
    movably attached thereto which alternately contact and pull on the cable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclass 67 for a
    mechanical pencil, including alternately acting clutches, to move a rod of
    lead in step-by-step fashion.


CLS 254/108
TXT Pawl actuated:

    Pushing and pulling implement under subclass 105 of the step-by-step
    traveling bar type in which the relative travel of the bar is produced by
    one or more reciprocating pawls engaging with the bar.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206     and 237+, for implements or apparatus for tensioning flexible
    material or extracting stumps or poles which includes a ratchet bar and a
    driving pawl in their drives.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 575+ for the pawl and
    ratchet structure, per se.


CLS 254/109
TXT Multiple driving pawls:

    Pushing and pulling implement under subclass 108 of the pawl-actuated
    step-by- step traveling bar type comprising a plurality of alternately
    acting driving pawls.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238+,   for implements or apparatus for tensioning flexible material or
    extracting stumps or poles which includes a ratchet bar and plural,
    disparate, driving pawls in their drive.


CLS 254/110
TXT Reversing:

    Pushing and pulling implement under subclass 109 of the step-by-step
    traveling bar type comprising a plurality of alternately acting driving
    pawls and provided with means for continuously actuating the pawls in such
    sequence as to reverse the movement, as for gradually lowering a load.


CLS 254/111
TXT Reversing:

    Pushing and pulling implement under subclass 108 of the pawl-actuated
    step-by-step traveling bar type provided with means for continuously
    actuating the pawls in such sequence as to reverse the movement, as in
    lowering a load.


CLS 254/112
TXT Rack and lever:

    Pushing and pulling implement under subclass 105 of the step-by-step
    traveling bar type in which the relative travel is produced by a lever or
    part rigid therewith engaging directly with a rack member, the rack being
    on one of the two relatively traveling parts of the implements and the
    lever mounted upon the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    for two racks acted upon alternately by a single lever.


CLS 254/113
TXT SINGLE THROW LEVER AND BAR:

    Pushing and pulling implement under the class definition comprising an
    operating lever and two relatively movable forcing members pivotally or
    slidably connected, generally a standard and a lifting bar, the entire
    working movement of the forcing members being produced by a single throw of
    the lever.

    (1)     Note.  The load-engaging member or bar may also act as a lever, and
    such implements will be found here when they include a single throw hand
    lever actuating the load-engaging lever by direct contact or by rigid link
    connections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      15, 38, 212, and 246+, for implements or apparatus for tensioning
    flexible material or extracting stumps or poles including a lever and a
    linearly shifting, guided element attached thereto.


CLS 254/114
TXT Sliding bar:

    Pushing and pulling implement under subclass 113 of the single throw lever
    and bar type in which the forcing members are arranged to slide one upon
    the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8       and 16, for hoist trucks and floor jacks employing single throw
    levers.


CLS 254/115
TXT Rack bar and segment:

    Pushing and pulling implement under subclass 114 of the single throw lever
    and bar type in which one of the forcing members is a slidable rack engaged
    and actuated by a toothed segment forming a part of or rigidly connected to
    the actuating lever.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for floor jacks employing rack and pinion or segment.


CLS 254/116
TXT Adjustable:

    Pushing and pulling implement under subclass 114 of the single throw lever
    and bar type with sliding forcing members and comprising structure
    permitting a preliminary adjustment of length or height, as, for example,
    for the purpose of engaging loads at different heights from the supporting
    surface.

    (1)     Note.  In appropriate subclasses under the title "Step-by-step
    traveling bar" will be found similar structures comprising in addition
    means whereby a forcing member may be given a step-by-step movement by
    successive reciprocations of the lever.


CLS 254/117
TXT Lateral shoe:

    Pushing and pulling implement under subclass 116 of the single throw lever
    and sliding bar type comprising a laterally extending load-engaging shoe
    capable of adjustment to accommodate loads at different distances from the
    supporting surface.


CLS 254/118
TXT Rack bar:

    Pushing and pulling implement under subclass 116 of the single throw lever
    and sliding bar type in which one of the forcing members is provided with
    rack teeth, notches or the like, whereby the initial length or height of
    the implement may be adjusted.


CLS 254/119
TXT Adjustable:

    Pushing and pulling implement under subclass 113 of the single throw lever
    and bar type comprising structure permitting a preliminary adjustment of
    the length or height of the implement.


CLS 254/120
TXT SINGLE THROW LEVER:

    Pushing and pulling implement under the class definition comprising a lever
    engaging the load either directly or by means of a part supported by the
    lever only, the entire travel of the load while supported by the lever
    being produced by a single throw of the lever.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3+,     8+, 17, 32+, 36+, 44, 45+, 62+, 77+, and 105+, for implements
    comprising a lever capable of bodily travel in a step-by-step movement
    while under load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 248 and 268 for pushing and pulling
    implements of the single throw lever type in the form of pliers or tweezers.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 519+ for lever mechanism
    in general as elements.

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclass 342 for lever-type hoist.


CLS 254/121
TXT Rail and tie lifter:

    Implement under subclass 120 of the single throw lever type especially
    designed for lifting railway rails or ties.

    (1)     Note.  Other structural types of rail or tie lifters are classified
    in the various structural subclasses in this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18+,    for spike extractors adapted to rest upon a rail.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 2 for apparatus for lifting track structure
    combined with means for performing other track laying or repairing
    operations.


CLS 254/122
TXT Lazy tongs:

    Pushing and pulling implement under subclass 120 of the single throw lever
    type in which the extensible or thrust producing member comprises lazy
    tongs levers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    14,     Bridges, subclass 45 for draw bridges of the lazy tong type.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 157+ for a lazy tong
    type ladder with mechanical or power-extending means.

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift forVehicle,
    subclasses 211 and 269 for a vehicle lift and an elevator having lazy
    tong-type supporting levers in their drive-means.


CLS 254/123
TXT Lever supported thrust bar:

    Implements under subclass 120 of the single throw lever type comprising a
    thrust bar for engaging the load, such bar being pivoted to the lever and
    supported by the lever only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35      and 39, for analogous car pushers and door braces.


CLS 254/124
TXT Mechanically actuated:

    Pushing and pulling implement under subclass 120 of the single throw lever
    type comprising mechanism for actuating the lever.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113     and 119, for a single throw forcing lever directly actuated by a
    single throw hand lever.


CLS 254/126
TXT Screw:

    Pushing and pulling implement under subclass 124 of the single throw lever
    type comprising screw mechanism for actuating the lever.


CLS 254/127
TXT Cable:

    Pushing and pulling implement under subclass 124 of the single throw lever
    type comprising cable hauling mechanism for actuating the lever.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for vehicle body lifters using a lever and drum.


CLS 254/128
TXT Block and tackle:

    Pushing and pulling implement under subclass 127 of the single throw lever
    type comprising block and tackle mechanism for actuating the lever.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for block and tackle actuated by a winding drum.


CLS 254/129
TXT Adjustable:

    Pushing and pulling implement under subclass 120 of the single throw lever
    type including structure adapting the implement to preliminary adjustment,
    generally for the purpose of engaging loads at different heights.

    (1)     Note.  Mere fixed structure, such as stepped lifting shoes, is
    excluded, also those implements which include freely swinging legs capable
    of being set at different angles unless there is means for holding the legs
    at a predetermined adjustment.


CLS 254/130
TXT Multiple fulcrums:

    Pushing and pulling implement under subclass 129 of the adjustable single
    throw lever type in which the lever or its supporting structure is provided
    with a series of apertures, notches, or pins serving as alternative fulcrum
    points for the lever.


CLS 254/131
TXT Special engaging feature:

    Pushing and pulling implement under subclass 120 of the single throw lever
    type comprising special structural features for engagement with the object
    upon which the implement is to act.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     18+, 32, 35+, 39, 44, 50.2, and 121, for levers with engaging means
    especially modified for the purposes suggested by the titles.

    129+,   for engaging features relating to preliminary adjustment of the
    dimensions of the implement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 3.37, and 3.55+ for analogous receptacles closure
    removing tools.

    157,    Wheelwright Machines, subclasses 1.1+ for lever tire-removing
    or-replacing implements.

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclass 342 for lifting levers suspended from
    an overhead trolley.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 18+ for disc cutting devices with special engaging features.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 17 for cant
    hooks with special engaging features.


CLS 254/131.5
TXT Fulcrumed fork or shovel:

    Single throw lever implement under subclass 131 comprising either fork or
    shovel in combination with a fixed or movable element serving as fulcra in
    handling the load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclasses 82 and 100 for
    buried object-recovery devices rocking or fulcrumed on the ground or about
    a supporting axle in a manner to dig into and unearth plants or like
    objects embedded in the ground.


CLS 254/132
TXT Root puller type:

    Single throw lever implement under subclass 131 especially adapted for
    pulling stumps, posts, weeds or stones from the ground.

    (1)     Note.  For forks and shovels useful for pulling or lifting weeds,
    see Class 294, Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, appropriate
    subclasses, particularly subclasses 50.5 to 50.9.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclasses 73+ for devices adapted to transplant
    live trees or plants.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclasses 50+ for devices
    having a wheel-or ground-supported frame and means to grasp, hold and pull
    out of the ground plants, roots or like objects buried or partially
    embedded therein.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 47.131+ for similar devices designed for
    grasping and transporting loads.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 23 for vehicles adapted to
    pull a tree from the ground when provided with additional structure for use
    in transporting a tree.


CLS 254/133
TXT SPECIAL ENGAGING ELEMENTS:

    Implements under the class definition wherein significance is attributed to
    the means for engaging the objects between which the implement exerts a
    thrust or pull.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include grapples or similar grasping
    or suspending devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2       through 50.4 and 199+, inclusive, for engaging features appropriate
    to the uses for which the implements there classified are designed.

    86+,    for means for attachment to a vehicle.

    100,    121 and 131, for various types of pushing and pulling implements
    with special engaging features.


CLS 254/134
TXT Adjustable:

    Implements under subclass 133 including means for preliminary adjustment of
    the implement to different initial distances between the points of
    engagement before the forcing mechanism is operated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116+,   119, 121+, and 129+, also all subclasses including in the title the
    words "step-by-step."

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 274.1+ for adjustable brackets.

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 165+ for patents to a device including
    means to adjust the position of relatively movable jaws.


CLS 254/134.3
TXT METHOD OR APPARATUS FOR PLACEMENT OF CONDUCTIVE WIRE:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to process or apparatus
    for the placement of electric cables, or leaders therefore, in conduits, or
    poles, along messengers or similar relatively inaccessible supporting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 241 for apparatus for stringing parts on an
    attenuated or elongated means, or for passing such means through a part or
    parts.

    104,    Railways, subclasses 138.1+ for a tubular railway, including a
    moving car, which is disclosed as being useful for placing a wire or strand
    within the conduit.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclass 19.1 for miscellaneous cable-handling implements.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 154+ for a method or
    apparatus for laying pipe or cable into a submerged or subterranean
    location, which includes a step or means for handling the pipe or cable in
    the water, or for excavating or otherwise handling earth material.  See
    especially subclass 184 for advancing a subterranean length of cable.


CLS 254/134.4
TXT By fluid pressure differential in conduit (e.g., parachute sucked through
    conduit):

    Subject matter under subclass 134.3 wherein a vane or similar fixture is
    connected to the conductor and may be caused to move through the conduit by
    a fluid current therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 3.5+ for
    devices for cleaning the inside of a tubular conduit by introducing therein
    a solid cleaning agent and a fluid other than that normally handled in the
    conduit; subclass 104.06 for cleaning implements propelled through a
    conduit by fluid flowing therein; and subclass 104.12 for devices wherein a
    cleaning instrumentality is propelled through a conduit by mechanical
    traction developed by a motor means actuated by a fluid not confined solely
    by the conduit.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 242+ for mechanical cleaning of an
    installed fluid-handling system.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, may include a nominal
    recitation of a supply or take-up coil (e.g., less than a support for such
    a coil or a cooperative relationship between a tension or exhaust detector
    and reel-driving or reel-stopping means, etc.), subclass 97.4 for a vacuum
    jet for a strand.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, appropriate subclasses for analogous
    subject matter, viz., propelling articles through a conduit by means of a
    fluid current.


CLS 254/134.5
TXT Tractor for pulling wire (e.g., battery-powered):

    Subject matter under subclass 134.3 having means for exerting traction on
    the cable, at a point which is relatively inaccessible, by mechanical
    reaction between the cable at said point and the environment (e.g., aerial
    messenger) at said point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134.3,  where the wire-placing means is a fishing member which extends to
    an accessible location.

    134.7,  where the wire-placing means is a series of sectional members
    which, when coupled, extend to an accessible location.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 104.12 for
    devices wherein a cleaning instrumentality is propelled through a conduit
    by mechanical traction developed by a motor means actuated by a fluid not
    confined solely by the conduit.


CLS 254/134.6
TXT Step-by-step type, (e.g., by camming against messenger):

    Subject matter under subclass 134.5 in which the tractor is provided with
    intermittent grip means for causing it to move in a stepwise fashion.

    (1)     Note.  For example, by jerking on the accessible portion of the
    cable, the tractor may be caused, through the use of spring energy devices
    and suitable mechanical movements, to crawl along a messenger in steps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 84 for mechanisms for
    converting reciprocating motion into intermittent unidirectional motion.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclass 120 for means
    to advance material in a step-by-step manner.


CLS 254/134.7
TXT Sectional members for fishing:
    Subject matter under subclass 134.3 which consists of sectional rods which
    may be joined end to end.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for joints of
    general utility.


CLS 254/199
TXT PORTABLE IMPLEMENTS OR APPARATUS FOR TENSIONING FLEXIBLE MATERIAL OR FOR
    EXTRACTING STUMPS OR POLES:

    Implements or apparatus under the class definition for (a) contacting and
    applying a pulling force to at least a portion of a flexible member, (e.g.,
    cable, fabric, strand, wire, etc.), to place the member in a stressed
    (e.g., stretched, tensioned, etc.) condition or (b) dislodging an article
    in the nature of a stump or pole (including a fence post, tree, etc.), from
    its embedment in the ground, the implement or apparatus being detachable
    from the member or article and movable to a different location after use.

    (1)     Note.  The implements or apparatus of this subclass are intended to
    be separable from the article being stressed or dislodged and are not
    intended to remain with, or become a component of, the article after it has
    been stressed or dislodged.

    (2)     Note.  The dislodging implements or apparatus of this subclass are
    not intended to move the article more than an insignificant distance
    subsequent to its extraction from its original location.

    (3)     Note.  If permanent deformation of the strand, etc., occurs, it is
    incidental to, rather than the intended purpose of, the tensioning.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 211+ for a stretcher forming a part of bed frame
    or bottom structure; and subclasses 305+ for bedstead braces.

    7,      Compound Tools, subclass 117 for compound tools which are used to
    stretch fence wire.

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, appropriate subclasses for boot and shoe
    stretchers; and subclasses 109 and 110+ for leather-stretching implements
    of special application to lasting.

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 19+, 32+ or 68+ for a
    tightener which either (a) is a permanent component of, (i.e., permanently
    attached thereto or formed therewith) a belt or strap, or (b) is a
    separable component of a belt or strap which remains therewith while the
    belt or strap is in use and is ordinarily detached therefrom during periods
    of nonuse.

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclasses 51+ and 71+ for devices
    other than stationary frames for stretching or pulling cloth.

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclasses 70 and 102+ for
    stretching garments to smooth fabrics.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclass
    46 for leather-stretching machines; and subclasses 19.1+ for a skin or hide
    stretcher.

    81,     Tools, appropriate subclasses for tools used in tensioning peculiar
    types of flexible material during an assembly or disassembly operation,
    particularly subclass 15.8 for skid chain-applying tools; and subclass 9.3
    for hose clamp appliers, and subclasses 300+ and 487 for a hand held clamp
    adapted to grip a flexible article and by which a direct pull may be given
    to tension or manipulate the flexible article.

    100,    Presses, subclass 32 for binding apparatus in the nature of a
    stationary machine not otherwise provided for, including means by which a
    binder encircles material and is tensioned to increase its tightness about
    the material.

    114,    Ships, subclass 109 for permanent elements of ships' rigging; and
    subclass 223 for rigging tighteners which are not permanent elements of the
    rigging.

    140,    Wireworking, subclasses 93.2+ for binder-tensioning and end-joining
    implements; subclass 102.5 for loop-forming stretchers applicable to a wire
    strand intermediate its ends; subclasses 108+ for wire fabric stretchers;
    and subclasses 123.5+ for stretching implements including means for
    performing other wire-working operations besides stretching.

    157,    Wheelwright Machines, subclass 1.14 for apparatus for pulling or
    joining the wires of solid rubber tires.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 119.09 and 119.15 for means
    permanently attached to a clothesline to tighten the same.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclass 94 for permanent hoop tighteners.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 15 and 52, and indented subclasses,
    for implements especially designed to distend articles of apparel.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclasses 12+ for a stretching
    tool with means to fasten flaccid work to a rigid base.

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 213 for tie rods or wires having a
    force-multiplying component permanently attached thereto or remaining with
    the rods or wires when they are in use with a static mold.

    256,    Fences, subclasses 37+, and indented subclasses, for stretching
    devices forming a permanent part of fence structure.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclass 69 for elastic extension devices.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, particularly subclasses
    8.6 and 132+ for flexible material-engaging means which are used with a
    material-tensioning apparatus.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for two members
    joined by a connection comprising a tensioning means which remains with the
    members after the tensioning is effected.

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, subclass 493 for a post for
    supporting a net used for a playing field or court game such as tennis,
    volleyball, table tennis, etc., which post includes a means to tension the
    net; subclasses 494+ for such a net in which a means to tension the net may
    be included; subclass 534 for a racket (e.g., a tennis racket, etc.) with
    adjustable string-tensioning means; and subclasses 556 and 557 for an
    accessory device for applying a tension upon a string(s) of a racket.


CLS 254/200
TXT Material comprises resilient floor covering (e.g., carpet):

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 199 wherein the member being
    stressed is a broad, relatively thin, generally rectangular piece of
    resilient fabric or other resilient structure used for covering a floor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 5 for carpet fasteners provided
    with stretching means.


CLS 254/201
TXT Including fluid or spring driven cylinder:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 200 wherein the portion of the
    implement or apparatus adapted to contact the resilient fabric or structure
    is moved by driving structure including a fluid or spring powered
    telescoping device.


CLS 254/202
TXT Including force transmitting cable and driven, rotatable, cable engaging
    drum:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 200 including a driven drum which
    rotates about an axis fixed relative to another portion of the implement or
    apparatus, and which winds about its axis, or otherwise engages and pulls,
    a cable which is adapted to be connected (a) to the resilient fabric or
    structure or (b) to a portion of the implement or apparatus which is
    adapted to be connected to the fabric or structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266+,   for load hauling or hoisting apparatus including a rotatably driven
    drum and cable.


CLS 254/203
TXT Including driven, rotatable, floor covering engaging and pulling drum:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 200 including a driven drum which
    rotates about an axis fixed relative to another portion of the implement or
    apparatus, and which engages and pulls the resilient fabric or structure.


CLS 254/204
TXT Including screw drive:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 200 in which the portion of the
    implement or apparatus adapted to contact the resilient fabric or structure
    is moved by driving structure including a threaded, cylindrical rod which
    either (a) rotates to move a cooperating threaded rider (e.g., follower)
    along its longitudinal axis, or (b) is axially shifted by, and relative to,
    a cooperating, rotating, force-transmitting, threaded element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85,     92, 98+, and 231+, for implements or apparatus including a screw
    drive.


CLS 254/205
TXT Including rack and pinion, or pinion segment, drive:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 200 in which the portion of the
    implement or apparatus adapted to contact the resilient fabric or structure
    is moved by driving structure including a bar having a row of teeth or
    apertures on at least one of its sides and a rotatable circular gear, or a
    segment thereof, having teeth, or a protrusion acting in the manner of a
    tooth, which intermesh with the row to shift the bar linearly, the gear or
    gear segment being in constant engagement with the row while the fabric or
    resilient structure is being stressed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      12, 95, 230, and 341, for implements or apparatus including a rack
    and pinion, or pinion segment, drive.


CLS 254/206
TXT Including ratchet bar and driving pawl drive:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 200 in which the portion of the
    implement or apparatus adapted to contact the resilient fabric or structure
    is moved by driving structure including a bar having a row of teeth or
    apertures on at least one of its sides, and a reciprocable pawl which
    engages one or more of the teeth or apertures of the bar when reciprocating
    in one of its directions and which disengages from the teeth or apertures
    during its return movement, the pawl shifting relative to the bar along its
    length as the pawl sequentially engages the teeth or apertures of the row
    while the fabric or resilient structure is being stressed.

    (1)     Note.  A reciprocating rack which engages and pulls on either a
    fixed pin, or a pin which is shifted only linearly when pulled by the rack,
    is not considered proper for this subclass and will be found in subclasses
    209+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108+,   for a ratchet bar shifted by a driving pawl.


CLS 254/207
TXT Having plural, disparate, driving pawls:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 206 having two or more distinct and
    separate pawls which engage the teeth or apertures on the bar.


CLS 254/208
TXT Including rotatable, pulley wheel element and cable:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 200 in which the portion of the
    implement or apparatus adapted to contact the resilient fabric or structure
    is moved by force-multiplying structure which includes a traveling cable
    reeved around an element rotatable about an axis through its center and
    having a generally circular perimeter, the element rotating in response to
    the movement of the cable over its perimeter.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note and (2) Note of subclass 390.


CLS 254/209
TXT Including force transmitting, hand held and operated, lever:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 200 in which the portion of the
    implement or apparatus adapted to contact the resilient fabric or structure
    is moved by force multiplying or driving, structure including a
    hand-engaged lever which is reciprocable about a pivot point by the
    operator.


CLS 254/210
TXT With means attached thereto for sequentially gripping, shifting and
    releasing bar component:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 209 with means attached to the lever
    for transmitting force from the lever to a bar component of the implement
    or apparatus, and wherein the bar component is (a) gripped by the means,
    (b) shifted linearly relative to the pivot point of the lever, as the lever
    pivots and (c) released by the means when the lever and means are
    repositioned relative to the component for additional resilient fabric or
    structure tensioning.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106+,   for a bar shifted by one or more reciprocating clutches, (i.e.,
    gripping means).


CLS 254/211
TXT With floor covering clamping means attached to lever:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 209 in which the lever has means
    supported by and attached to it for gripping and holding a portion of the
    resilient fabric or structure during the stressing or pulling operation.


CLS 254/212
TXT Having linearly shifting, guided component attached thereto:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 209 in which the lever is attached
    to a rigid force transmitting component of the implement or apparatus which
    is moved linearly by the lever, the component being limited to linear
    movement during the stressing of the resilient fabric or structure by
    another portion of the implement or apparatus.


CLS 254/213
TXT Including rotatably driven drum for engaging either material or force
    transmitting cable:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 199 including a driven drum which
    rotates about an axis fixed relative to another portion of the implement or
    apparatus, and which winds about its axis, or otherwise engages and pulls,
    either (1) the flexible member or (2) a cable which is (a) adapted to be
    connected to, or (b) attached to a portion of the implement or apparatus
    which is adapted to be connected to, the flexible member or article.

    (1)     Note.  The term "cable" is used herein to designate a flexible
    element, such as rope, chain, wire or a flat band.

    (2)     Note.  The other portion of the implement or apparatus may be no
    more than a clamp, hook, etc.

    (3)     Note.  The term "drum" is used in this and the indented subclasses
    to designate a rotatable structure, (e.g., capstan, driven pulley, driven
    sprocket wheel, gipsy, spindle, spool, wildcat, winding drum, windlass,
    etc.), which is caused to turn about an axis of rotation by a drive source
    and which has a perimeter for contacting and pulling on the cable or
    flexible member, whereby a driving force is transmitted from the source, by
    way of either the drum and cable, or the drum, to the flexible member or
    the article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266+,   for load-hauling or-hoisting apparatus including a rotatably driven
    drum and cable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    256,    Fences, subclasses 40+ for a stretching device which includes a
    winding element and forms a permanent part of a fence structure.


CLS 254/214
TXT Plural drums or drum with plural distinct sections:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 213 including either (a) two or more
    driven drums, or (b) a driven drum with two or more distinct, structurally
    separated, flexible member or cable-contacting regions for pulling on (1)
    different members or cables, or (2) different ends of the same member or
    cable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278+,   for load-hauling or-hoisting apparatus including two or more
    rotatably driven drums for pulling on cable.


CLS 254/215
TXT Juxtaposed to material or cable at single locus:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 214 wherein the two or more driven
    drums have their flexible member or cable contacting portions closely
    clustered around a single point for simultaneously engaging the same
    segment of cable or flexible member to grip it therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    287,    for load-hauling or-hoisting apparatus including two or more
    rotatably drive drums juxtaposed to and pulling on a cable at a single
    locus.


CLS 254/216
TXT Having pressure element spaced therefrom to confine material or cable
    thereagainst:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 213 including an element spaced from
    the drum's periphery just far enough to allow the flexible member or cable
    to barely pass between the drum and element at their nearest point, the
    cable or member at this point is slightly compressed, or has a compressive
    force placed on it, by the drum and element, and consequently is caused to
    advance by the contact of the cable or member with the drum's periphery.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333,    for load-hauling or-hoisting apparatus including a rotatably driven
    drum and a pressure element spaced therefrom for confining a cable against
    its surface.


CLS 254/217
TXT Having ratchet wheel and interengaging pawl for driving drum:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 213 wherein the drum is rotated
    about its axis by a drive train which includes a rotatable wheel having
    teeth on its inner or outer perimeter and a pawl which is reciprocated
    along a linear or angular path; the pawl engages the teeth and turns the
    wheel during movement in one of its directions and disengages from the
    teeth during its return movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306+,   320, 352+, and 369, for load-hauling or-hoisting apparatus
    including a rotatably driven drum provided with a drive having a ratchet
    wheel and an interengaging driving pawl.


CLS 254/218
TXT Pawl pivots about fixed point on drive handle:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 217 in which the drive train is
    powered by a hand-operated lever and the pawl is pivotally attached to the
    lever at a fixed point.


CLS 254/219
TXT Having intermeshing gears for driving drum: Implements or apparatus under
    subclass 213 in which the drum is rotated about its axis by a drive train
    including two or more gears having teeth engaged with each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    295+    and 342+, for load-hauling or-hoisting apparatus including a
    rotatably driven drum provided with a drive having two or more intermeshing
    gears.


CLS 254/220
TXT Worm and worm wheel:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 219 wherein at least two of the
    gears comprise a worm and a worm wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    296     and 343, for load-hauling or hoisting apparatus including a
    rotatably driven drum provided with a drive having two intermeshing gears
    of the worm and worm wheel type.


CLS 254/221
TXT With projections or apertures on drum for engagement with complementary
    formations on material or cable:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 213 in which the drum has
    projections or apertures located on its perimeter for engaging
    corresponding apertures or projections formed along the length of the
    flexible member or cable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    372,    for load-hauling or hoisting apparatus including a rotatably driven
    drum provided with projections or apertures on its circumference for
    interengagement with complementary formations on the cable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 52+ for
    feeding apparatus having means to engage longitudinally spaced
    modifications in a material of indeterminate length.


CLS 254/222
TXT With means for preventing or retarding rotation in at least one direction:


    Implements or apparatus under subclass 213 including means (e.g., a
    shiftable stop or lock) for preventing or retarding movement of the drum
    about its axis in at least one of its directions of rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310,    321+, 356+, and 378+, for load-hauling or-hoisting apparatus
    including a rotatably driven drum provided with means for preventing or
    retarding rotation of the drum in at least one direction.


CLS 254/223
TXT Ratchet wheel or formation and pawl:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 222 wherein the means consists of
    either (a) a wheel having teeth located on its perimeter, the wheel being
    rotatably interconnected to the drum, and a pawl which interlocks with the
    teeth in one direction of the wheel's rotation to prevent movement of the
    drum and which disengages from the teeth in the other direction of the
    wheel's rotation to allow movement of the drum, or (b) a stationary ratchet
    formation having teeth located on its perimeter and a pawl connected to the
    drum which revolves around an axis when the drum is rotated; the pawl
    interlocks with the teeth in one direction of its travel to prevent
    movement of the drum and disengages from the teeth in the other direction
    of its travel to allow movement of the drum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217+,   for a drum having drive train which includes a ratchet wheel and a
    pawl interengaging therewith, and which may also include an additional pawl
    for preventing movement of the drum in one direction.

    357     and 376, for load-hauling or -hoisting apparatus including a
    rotatably driven drum provided with a ratchet wheel and locking pawl for
    preventing rotation of the drum in one direction.


CLS 254/224
TXT With adjustable gripping device for attaching drum to rigid, in situ
    structure:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 213 with relatively movable clamping
    members and a take-up device therefor connected to the drum for firmly
    attaching it to a rigid, fixed, structural element (e.g., a fence post).


CLS 254/225
TXT With material or cable contacting infeed guide:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 213 with at least one guide element
    spaced a distance from the drum over which the flexible member or cable
    passes as it is wound upon or pulled toward the drum.

    (1)     Note.  The distance between the element and the perimeter of the
    drum is large enough to allow the flexible member or cable to pass
    unimpeded.


CLS 254/226
TXT Rotatable pulley wheel element:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 225 wherein the guide element is in
    the nature of a wheel rotatable about an axis through its center and having
    its perimeter formed for contact with the traveling flexible member or
    cable, the element rotating in response to the movement of the member or
    cable over its perimeter.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note and (2) Note of subclass 390.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242,    for other implements or apparatus including a pulley wheel element
    and cable.

    283+    and 334+, for load-hauling or -hoisting apparatus including a
    rotatably driven drum and a pulley wheel element spaced therefrom.


CLS 254/227
TXT With ground-engaging support means:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 213 in which the drum is supported,
    at least in part, by means engageable with the ground and movable with the
    drum to a new location.


CLS 254/228
TXT Including expansible chamber fluid motor drive:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 199 wherein the portion of the
    implement or apparatus adapted to contact the flexible member or article is
    moved by driving structure including a fluid powered telescoping device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93+,    for implements actuated by fluid pressure.


CLS 254/229
TXT Including worm and worm wheel gear drive: Implements or apparatus under
    subclass 199 wherein the portion of the implement or apparatus adapted to
    contact the flexible member or article is moved by driving structure
    including an intermeshing worm and worm wheel gear.


CLS 254/230
TXT Including rack and pinion or pinion segment, drive:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 199 wherein the portion of the
    implement or apparatus adapted to contact the flexible member or article is
    moved by driving structure including a bar having a row of teeth or
    apertures on at least one of its sides and a rotatable, circular gear or a
    segment thereof, having teeth or a protrusion acting the manner of a tooth,
    which intermesh with the row to shift the bar linearly, the gear or gear
    segment being in constant engagement with the row while the member is
    stressed or the article is dislodged.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      12, 95, 205, and 341, for implements or apparatus including a rack
    and pinion, or pinion segment, drive.


CLS 254/231
TXT Including screw drive:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 199 wherein the portion of the
    implement or apparatus adapted to contact the flexible member or article is
    moved by driving structure including a threaded, cylindrical rod which
    either (a) rotates to move a cooperating threaded rider along its
    longitudinal axis or (b) is axially shifted by, and relative to, a
    cooperating, rotating, force transmitting threaded element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     85, 92, 98+, and 204, for implements or apparatus including a screw
    drive.


CLS 254/232
TXT Plural screws:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 231 including two or more distinct,
    threaded, cylindrical rods.


CLS 254/233
TXT Having plural, oppositely shifting, threaded riders:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 232 wherein at least two threaded
    riders are moved by the rods and travel in opposite directions.


CLS 254/234
TXT Having plural, oppositely shifting, threaded riders:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 231 in which at least two threaded
    riders are moved by the rod and travel in opposite directions.


CLS 254/235
TXT Having ratchet wheel and pawl for driving screw:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 231 in which either the rod, rider
    or threaded element is rotated about its axis by a drive train which
    includes a rotatable wheel having teeth on its perimeter and a pawl which
    is reciprocated along a linear or angular path; the pawl engages the teeth
    and turns the wheel during movement in one of its directions and disengages
    from the teeth during its return movement.


CLS 254/236
TXT Having intermeshing gears for driving screw:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 231 in which either the rod, rider
    or threaded element is rotated about its axis by a drive train including
    two or more gears having teeth engaged with each other.


CLS 254/237
TXT Including ratchet bar and driving pawl drive:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 199 wherein the portion of the
    implement or apparatus adapted to contact the flexible member or article is
    moved by a driving structure including a bar having a row of teeth or
    apertures on at least one of its sides and a reciprocable pawl which
    engages one or more of the teeth or apertures of the bar when reciprocating
    in one of its directions and which disengages from the teeth or apertures
    during its return movement, the pawl shifting relative to the bar along its
    length as the pawl sequentially engages the teeth or apertures of the row
    while the member is being stressed or the article is being dislodged.

    (1)     Note.  A reciprocating rack which engages and pulls on either a
    fixed pin, or a pin which is shifted only linearly when pulled by the rack,
    is not considered proper for this subclass and will be found in subclasses
    243+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108+,   for a ratchet bar shifted by a driving pawl.


CLS 254/238
TXT Having plural, disparate, driving pawls:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 237 having two or more distinct and
    separate pawls which engage the teeth or apertures on the bar.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109+,   for a ratchet bar shifted by multiple driving pawls.


CLS 254/239
TXT Plural ratchet formations:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 238 in which either (a) the bar is
    provided with at last two distinct rows or teeth or apertures engaged by
    the driving pawls, or (b) there are two or more distinct bars each having a
    row of teeth or apertures engaged by one or more of the driving pawls.


CLS 254/240
TXT Facing opposite directions:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 239 wherein two of the rows have
    their pawl receiving portions facing in opposite directions.


CLS 254/241
TXT Including intermeshing gear drive:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 199 wherein the portion of the
    implement or apparatus adapted to contact the flexible member or article is
    moved by driving structure including two or more gears which have their
    teeth engaged with each other.


CLS 254/242
TXT Including rotatable, pulley wheel element and cable:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 199 wherein the portion of the
    implement or apparatus adapted to contact the flexible member or article is
    moved by force multiplying structure which includes a traveling cable
    reeved around an element rotatable about an axis through its center and
    having a generally circular perimeter adapted for contact with the cable,
    the element rotating in response to the movement of the cable over its
    perimeter.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note and (2) Note of subclass 390.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226,    for a rotatable driven drum and a pulley wheel element spaced
    therefrom.


CLS 254/243
TXT Including either force transmitting, hand held and operated lever or animal
    powered sweep:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 199 wherein the portion of the
    implement or apparatus adapted to contact the flexible member or article is
    moved by force multiplying or driving, structure including either (a) a
    hand-engaged and-powered lever which is reciprocable about a pivot point or
    (b) a draft animal attached and powered lever which is rotated about a
    pivot point.


CLS 254/244
TXT Implement or apparatus includes bar component having plural holes and
    removable cooperating pins selectively engageable by lever:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 243 in which the force multiplying
    or driving, structure also includes a bar component having a plurality of
    holes located along its length and at least two removable pins which are
    insertable into the holes, the lever selectively engaging the pins as it
    travels along the bar.


CLS 254/245
TXT With means attached thereto for sequentially gripping, shifting, and
    releasing bar component:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 243 with means attached to the lever
    for transmitting force from the lever to a bar component of the implement
    or apparatus and wherein the bar component is (a) gripped by the means, (b)
    shifted linearly, relative to the pivot point of the lever, as the lever
    pivots and (c) released by the means when the lever and means are
    repositioned relative to the component for additional flexible member
    tensioning or article dislodging.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106+,   for a bar shifted by one or more reciprocating clutches, (i.e.,
    gripping means).


CLS 254/246
TXT Having linearly shifting, guided component attached thereto:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 243 in which the lever is attached
    to a rigid force-transmitting component of the implement or apparatus which
    is moved linearly by the lever, the component being limited to linear
    movement during the stressing of the flexible member, or the dislodging of
    the article, by another portion of the implement or apparatus.


CLS 254/247
TXT With ratchet formation and locking pawl for maintaining relative
    positioning:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 246 wherein the relative positioning
    of the lever and the shifting component is maintained by a pawl adapted to
    engage a row of teeth or apertures formed on either (a) the shifting
    component, or (b) the portion of the implement or apparatus limiting the
    shifting component to linear movement.


CLS 254/248
TXT With additional, hand held lever pivotally attached thereto for applying
    pulling force in opposite direction:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 243 in which the force multiplying
    structure include an additional hand-engaged lever connected to the first
    lever at its pivot point, the flexible member being stressed, or the
    article dislodged, when the levers are simultaneously rotated in opposite
    directions.


CLS 254/249
TXT Having position locking means between levers:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 248 having locking means provided
    between the two levers to maintain their position relative to one another.


CLS 254/250
TXT With camming means thereon, and pressure element spaced therefrom to
    confine material, or force transmitting cable, thereagainst:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 243 in which the lever is provided
    with means formed on, or attached to, it for either engaging the flexible
    member or a force-transmitting cable attached to the member or article and
    wherein the implement or apparatus is further provided with an element
    spaced from the means and having a cable contacting surface, the means
    sequentially contacting the cable, camming it against the element, and
    pushing or pulling it along the element's surface when the lever is rotated
    in one direction.


CLS 254/251
TXT With material, article or force transmitting cable clamping means attached
    to and shifting with lever:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 243 in which the portion of the
    implement or apparatus adapted to contact the flexible member, the article
    or a force-transmitting cable connected to the member or article includes
    means attached to the lever and shifting with it during pivoting for
    gripping, between relatively movable elements of the means, either the
    member, article or cable during the stressing or dislodging operation.


CLS 254/252
TXT Including cooperating, relatively stationary means for intermittently
    locking material or cable:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 251 including member or
    cable-locking means which is stationary relative to the lever's pivot point
    and which cooperates with the lever and the gripping means attached
    thereto, the locking means intermittently holding and preventing movement
    of the member or cable when the lever is being positioned to apply a
    tensioning force and then releasing and allowing movement of the member or
    cable while the lever is applying a tensioning force.


CLS 254/253
TXT Plural clamping means:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 251 wherein the lever has two or
    more gripping means attached to it and shifting with it during pivoting.


CLS 254/254
TXT Alternately clamping and pulling on material or cable:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 253 in which the member or cable is
    alternately pulled on by each of the gripping means during the stressing
    operation, each means sequentially (a) gripping the member or cable while
    the other means releases it, (b) pulling on the member or cable as it is
    shifted in one direction by the lever and (c) releasing the member or cable
    when the other means grips and begins to pull on the member or cable.

    (1)     Note.  The force needed to apply or release the gripping means
    during the stressing operation is not provided directly by the hand of the
    operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    384,    for load-hauling or-hoisting apparatus including a hand-held lever
    with plural engaging means movably attached thereto for alternately
    contacting and either (1) pulling on a cable attached to the load, or (2)
    traveling along the cable with the load.


CLS 254/255
TXT Attached by flexible connector:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 253 in which each of the gripping
    means is attached to the lever by a supple, connecting element.


CLS 254/256
TXT With material, article or force transmitting cable engaging means movably
    attached to and shifting with lever:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 243 in which the portion of the
    implement or apparatus adapted to contact the flexible member, the article,
    or a force-transmitting cable connected to the member or article includes
    means movably attached to the lever and shifting with it during pivoting
    for engaging the member, article, or cable during the stressing or
    dislodging operation.


CLS 254/257
TXT Including cooperating, relatively stationary means for intermittently
    locking material or cable:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 256 including member or
    cable-locking means which is stationary relative to the lever's pivot point
    and which cooperates with the lever and the engaging means attached
    thereto, the locking means intermittently holding and preventing movement
    of the member or cable when the lever is being positioned to apply a
    tensioning force and then releasing and allowing movement of the member or
    cable while the lever is applying a tensioning force.


CLS 254/258
TXT Plural, movably attached engaging means:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 256 wherein the lever has two or
    more engaging means movably attached to it and shifting with it during
    pivoting.


CLS 254/259
TXT Alternately engaging and pulling on material or cable:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 258 in which the member or cable is
    alternately pulled on by each of the engaging means during the stressing
    operation, each means sequentially (a) engaging the member or cable while
    the other means releases it, (b) pulling on the member or cable as it is
    shifted in one direction by the lever and (c) releasing the member or cable
    when the other mean engages and begins to pull on the member or cable.

    (1)     Note.  The engaging means is not directly placed into or removed
    from contact with the member or cable by the hand of the operator during
    the above sequence.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    384,    for load-hauling or-hoisting apparatus including a hand-held lever
    with plural engaging means movably attached thereto for alternately
    contacting and either (1) pulling on a cable attached to the load or (2)
    traveling along the cable with the load.


CLS 254/260
TXT Attached by flexible connector:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 258 in which each of the engaging
    means is attached to the lever by a supple, connecting element.


CLS 254/261
TXT With means pivotally connected to lever and adapted to engage rigid, in
    situ structure: Implements or apparatus under subclass 243 in which the
    lever is provided with means pivotally connected to it which is especially
    adapted to engage a rigid, in situ structure, (e.g., a fence post) and
    position the lever relative to it.


CLS 254/262
TXT Including adjustable gripping device for attaching implement or apparatus
    to rigid, in situ structure:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 199 including relatively movable
    clamping members and a take-up device therefore for firmly attaching the
    implement or apparatus to a rigid, fixed, structural element (e.g., a fence
    post).


CLS 254/263
TXT Including ground engaging means for supporting implement or apparatus in
    plural, vertically spaced positions:

    Implements or apparatus under subclass 199 supported, at least in part, by
    portable means engageable with the ground and either (a) having implement
    or apparatus supporting structure adjustable vertically with respect to the
    ground or (b) having plural, vertically spaced, implement or apparatus
    supporting structures located on it.


CLS 254/264
TXT APPARATUS FOR HAULING OR HOISTING LOAD, INCLUDING DRIVEN DEVICE WHICH
    CONTACTS AND PULLS ON CABLE:

    Apparatus under the class definition for transporting or shifting the
    object in its entirety from one definite position or location to another,
    including a driven device which contacts and pulls on a segment of a cable
    when the object is transported or shifted, and further wherein either (1)
    the segment of the cable is attached to (a) the object, or (b) a structure
    which supports the object, and is shifted with it from one location or
    position to another, or (2) the device pulling on the cable is attached to
    (a) the object, or (b) a structure which supports the object and travels
    along the length of the cable with the object from one position or location
    to another.

    (1)     Note.  For an object transporting or shifting apparatus to be
    proper for this and the indented subclasses, at least one segment of the
    cable should move relative to a cable-contacting component of the
    apparatus, (e.g., cable wound or unwound by a drum, cable pulled by driven
    device over a pulley spaced therefrom, etc.), when the object is shifted or
    transported from one location or position to another; classification is
    elsewhere in this class if the cable acts as a simple link between the
    driven device and the object being pulled, (e.g., subclasses 93, 95, 98,
    120, etc.).

    (2)     Note.  The driven device and cable structure classified in this and
    the indented subclasses is that which is at least disclosed as either being
    used to (1) transport a load which is removable or detachable from the
    driven device, cable, or supporting structure attached to the driven device
    or cable, or (2) bodily shift an entire article, such as an anchor, between
    two definite positions.  On the other hand, if the cable and its driven
    pulling device are disclosed as being used only to (a) apply a force
    between elements of a machine, such as a pump or a press, (b) transmit
    force to operate a mechanism from one to another of its positions, such as
    a railroad hand-brake operator, (c) apply a force to adjust a portion of an
    article or apparatus relative to another portion of the article or
    apparatus, such as an awning operator, or (d) transmit force from a force
    input point to a force output point, such as a drive pulley and belt,
    classification is elsewhere, (e.g., Classes 74, 242, or the appropriate
    structure class).  In the absence of any disclosure as to the use
    contemplated for the cable-pulling device, classification is in some other
    class based on other details of the invention or in Class 242 based on
    details of a cable winding or unwinding drum structure or the winding of
    the cable onto a drum.

    (3)     Note.  The claimed combination of the subject matter appropriate
    for this subclass (see (2) Note of this subclass) and means which is
    intended to continually contact and restrict or guide the movement of the
    object (or the structure which is connected to the driven device or cable
    for supporting the object) to a fixed path of travel, is not proper for
    this and the indented subclasses and classification is in subclass 387 of
    this class or elsewhere, (e.g., Classes 74, 104, 187, etc.).

    (4)     Note.  A wheeled roadway or railway vehicle having a cable hoist
    mounted thereon and a load supporting portion for receiving the load from
    the hoist is classifiable in Class 414, subclasses 467+.  A cable or rail
    guided wheeled carrier which travels in a small restricted area, (e.g., a
    warehouse) and has a cable hoist mounted thereon is classifiable in Class
    212.  A wheeled carrier or vehicle capable of readily traveling outside a
    small, restricted area (e.g., highway truck, railway car) and having a
    cable hoist mounted thereon, which hoist does not transfer a load to a load
    supporting portion of the carrier or vehicle and is fixedly mounted on the
    carrier or vehicle, is not considered to fall within either of the above
    categories and is classifiable in this subclass (264) and the indented
    subclasses.

    (5)     Note.  A wheeled roadway or railway vehicle having a motor powered,
    traction cable pulling device mounted on it, for propelling it from one
    point to another as the cable is pulled by the device, is found in either
    Class 180, subclass 7 or Class 104, subclasses 173+; if, however, the
    vehicle is not claimed or the device is disclosed as also being used to
    pull a load, classification is in this class (254).  A traction cable
    pulling drum which is adapted to be secured directly to one of the wheels
    of a roadway or railway vehicle, and which pulls on the cable as the wheel
    is rotated to provide additional vehicle moving force, is found in Classes
    74, 104, 180, 242 or 280.  A traction cable pulling device which is not
    supported by the vehicle, but which propels it between one location and
    another, is found in either Class 254, when the vehicle is claimed broadly
    as a load or in an appropriate class, such as Class 104 or Class 280, when
    the vehicle is claimed in detail.

    (6)     Note.  The term "cable" is used in this and the indented subclasses
    to designate a flexible, elongated, hauling element, such as a rope, chain,
    wire or a flat band.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 81.1+ for devices which lift or transfer an
    invalid from one part of a bed to another or from the bed to some other
    location.

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 115+ for cord and rope
    holders.

    27,     Undertaking, subclass 32 for coffin raising or lowering devices
    which have a special feature, (e.g., coffin engaging clamps, grave
    decorations, concealing structure) adapting them for use in the undertaking
    art.

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 394+ and 398+ for an earth excavating type
    scoop or scraper shifted by a cable from one location to another.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 8 for fish net
    handling apparatus which is adapted to engage a net in some manner as it is
    being pulled onto a support or to manipulate it during the fishing or
    loading operation.

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclasses 78+ for chain
    structure.

    104,    Railways, subclass 87 for the combination of a cable and rigid
    rail; subclasses 112+ for cable rails; subclass 165 for car-hauling
    apparatus comprising an endless cable; and subclasses 173+ for a cable
    car-hauling apparatus.

    114,    Ships, subclass 51 for raising submerged vessels by hoisting;
    subclass 230 for mooring devices for ships; and subclass 242 for towing or
    pushing structure which may include a driven cable; subclasses 365+ for
    lifeboat handling devices.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 193,
    252+, 319+, 339, and 344+ for flexible closures having strand-type
    operating means.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 23+ for earth-working means driven from
    or guided by either a stationary object, (e.g., cable drum) or an anchor;
    and subclass 490 for an earth-working apparatus comprising a rotary drum
    actuator adapted to lift an earth-working tool for transport upon a wheeled
    frame.

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    appropriate subclasses for driven devices which pull on a cable and are
    disclosed and used in connection with the operation of elevators.  For
    example, the recital of any of the following structure in the claims would
    be considered adequate to limit the driven device to use with an elevator:



    (a)     attachment of the cable to the car;

    (b)     car guiding means;

    (c)     positioning of device relative to  the car or elevator shaft; or.

    (d)     controls for device located on, or operable from, car.

    212,    Traversing Hoists, in general, for cable pulling devices for both
    lifting and traversing a load.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for method of and apparatus for feeding material of indeterminate length,
    without utilizing the leading or trailing ends of the material to effect
    its movement.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 600+ for winding drum
    structure, per se; and subclass 157.1 for traversing guides in combination
    with a load-hauling or -hoisting, cable pulling drum.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 707 for
    trailing-type antennas with aircraft and which may include reels or other
    hauling apparatus; subclass 877 for antennas with a reel for the antenna;
    and subclass 903 for telescoping rod antennas having a flexible rod
    actuating means for extending and retracting the antenna.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 142.8+, 460, 538, 540, and
    559 for a driven device mounted on a vehicle which hauls or hoists a load
    into or onto a load-supporting member of the vehicle; subclasses 389, 391,
    395, 399, and 400 for a driven device not mounted on a vehicle and which
    hauls or hoists a load into or onto a load-supporting member of the
    vehicle; subclass 423 for an elevating device having differentially
    operated cables for dumping a portable receptacle; and subclasses 564, 569,
    570, and 571 for a load-hauling or-hoisting cable-pulling device used with
    a conveyor or other type handler.

    452,    Butchering, subclasses 79 and 178+ for hoisting or hauling
    apparatus combined with structures peculiar to use in butchering.

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclass 78 for an amusement device
    for shifting a stage scenery or curtain by using hoisting apparatus.


CLS 254/265
TXT Device includes driven, flexible, cable contacting belt:

    Apparatus under subclass 264 wherein the device includes a driven flexible
    belt which is partially wrapped around one or more rotatable belt-driving
    elements, the belt both contacts and pulls a segment of the cable when the
    object is transported or shifted.


CLS 254/266
TXT Device includes rotatably driven, cable contacting drum:

    Apparatus under subclass 264 wherein the device includes a drum which is
    driven about an axis fixed relative to at least one other portion of the
    apparatus, the drum having a perimeter which contacts the cable and winds a
    segment of the cable around the drum's axis of rotation, or otherwise
    engages and pulls the segment of cable, when the object is transported or
    shifted.

    (1)     Note.  The term "drum" is used in this and the indented subclasses
    to designate a rotatable structure, (e.g., capstan, driven pulley, driven
    sprocket wheel, gipsy, spindle, spool, wildcat, winding drum, windlass,
    etc.), which is caused to turn about an axis of rotation by a drive source
    and which has a perimeter for contacting and pulling on a cable, whereby a
    driving force is transmitted from the source, by way of the drum and cable,
    to the load.

    (2)     Note.  In order to avoid the scattering of art of a related nature,
    it has not been possible to require that the drum always be claimed
    significantly for classification in this and the indented subclasses.
    Rather, the structure recited may be only minimal, (e.g., a projection on
    the drum, a bearing face at its axis) in some instances, or, in the
    extreme, the drum may appear only nominally in the claim, (e.g., the mere
    locating of it relative to another part of the haulage system, such as a
    cable guide pulley or a drive means for the drum).

    (3)     Note.  Cable reeling devices which are used to lower a gravity
    influenced load by retarding the rotation of the cable reel or the movement
    of the cable wound thereon, but which do not have reel rotating power means
    capable of shifting the load either upwardly or horizontally, are found in
    Class 242, particularly subclass 396.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for vehicle-body lifters which include a cable and drum for
    hoisting the body.

    202     and 213+, for implements or apparatus for tensioning flexible
    material or for extracting stumps or poles including a rotatably driven
    drum and cable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 715 for sounding devices having
    an automatic reel for winding or unwinding a line which supports a weight
    or bob.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 89.2+ for a drum and cable
    used to reciprocate or oscillate one component of an apparatus relative to
    another component of the apparatus.

    104,    Railways, subclass 165 for car hauling apparatus comprising an
    endless cable; subclass 183 for car-hauling apparatus comprising a
    cable-winding drum; and subclass 235 for car-hauling apparatus comprising a
    cable-contacting drum moving along a fixed cable.

    114,    Ships, subclass 254 for a towing device which includes a cable
    storage means (e.g., a reel); and subclasses 365+ for a life craft handling
    device, and see the notes under the definition thereof.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 37, 142+, 231+, and
    236+ for apparatus having a strand contacting reel which is used in a fire
    escape or scaffold and either pulls on the strand or retards the descent of
    the portion of the strand supporting an occupant.

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Station Vehicle, subclasses
    251+ for an elevator in which the car is lowered or raised by a cable
    attached to a winding drum.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 804+ for endless power-driven
    conveyors.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 370+ for a reeling
    device for unwinding, rewinding, and storing elongated material.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 329+ for vertically adjustable supports
    suspended from a cord stored on a reel.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 480 for articulated vehicles connected
    together by tow ropes; and subclasses 491.1+ for articulated vehicles
    connected by a retractable, foldable or knockdown-type draft or coupling
    member.

    440,    Marine Propulsion, subclass 34 for cable towing type propulsion
    system.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, appropriate subclasses for a flexible shaft coupling.


CLS 254/267
TXT Having rotational speed governor for generating control impulse to rotation
    retarding means or drive:

    Apparatus under subclass 266 wherein the driven device also includes a
    governor, directly responsive to the rotational speed or variations in the
    rotational speed of the drum, and which generates a force which is
    transmitted to and regulates the operation of either (a) means for
    retarding the rotation of, (e.g., frictional brake) or (b) the drive for,
    (e.g., motor, clutch) the drum.

    (1)     Note.  The speed governor of this subclass does not form an active
    portion of the drive train used to transmit power from the source to the
    drum.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 4+ for tool advancing means
    controlled by automatic control.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 7 for boring a submerged
    formation from a floating support with a submerged independent anchored
    guide base; and subclasses 24+ for automatic controls for boring apparatus.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 37, 142+, 231+, and
    236+ for apparatus having a strand contacting reel which is used in a fire
    escape or scaffold and either pulls on the strand or retards the descent of
    the portion of the strand supporting an occupant.

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclass 305 for an elevator having a control mechanism, the operation of
    which is dependent upon the speed of the car.

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 180+ for speed-responsive brakes.


CLS 254/268
TXT Having mechanism, actuated by changes in position of drum relative to
    another component of device, for generating control impulse to rotation
    retarding means or drive:

    Apparatus under subclass 266 wherein the driven device also includes a
    mechanism which is actuated by the shifting or reorientation (i.e.,
    movement other than the normal rotation) of either the circumference or
    rotational axis of the drum relative to at least one other stationary
    portion of the device, the mechanism when actuated generates a force which
    is transmitted to and regulates the operation of either (a) means for
    retarding the rotation of (e.g., frictional brake), or (b) the drive for
    (e.g., motor, clutch), the drum.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 4+ for tool-advancing means
    controlled by automatic control.


CLS 254/269
TXT Having stationary mechanism, actuated by load or other obstruction on and
    traveling with cable, for generating control impulse to rotation retarding
    means or drive:

    Apparatus under subclass 266 provided with a stationary mechanism located
    along the path of the cable and actuated by either the load or some other
    obstruction on and traveling with the cable, the mechanism when actuated
    generates a force which is transmitted to and regulates the operation of
    either (a) means for retarding the rotation of or (b) the drive for the
    drum.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclasses 282+ and 302+ for a limit control mechanism arranged to be
    actuated by an elevator car or a counterweight for the elevator car.


CLS 254/270
TXT Having cable contacted, supported, or attached mechanism for generating
    control impulse to retarding means or drive:

    Apparatus under subclass 266 provided with a mechanism either contacted by,
    supported from, or attached directly to the cable, the mechanism generates
    a force which is transmitted to and regulates the operation of either (a)
    means for retarding the rotation of, or (b) the drive for, the drum.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclass 247 for towing devices for ships having means,
    responsive to excess strain in the connecting means (e.g., cable).

    166,    Wells, subclass 355 for means mounted on a vessel and removably
    connected to a permanent submerged well structure, (e.g., wellhead, riser);
    this means is provided with means to compensate for the vessel's movement
    on the surface.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 4+ for tool-advancing means
    controlled by automatic control.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 7 for boring a submerged
    formation from a floating support with a submerged independent anchored
    guide base; and subclasses 24+ for automatic controls for boring apparatus.


CLS 254/271
TXT With cable contacting component, on or adjacent to circumference of drum,
    shifted by segment of wound cable:

    Apparatus under subclass 270 in which the mechanism has a shiftable
    component either located on or adjacent to the circumference of the drum,
    the component is shifted by a segment of the cable wound on the
    circumference of the drum and generates the regulating force to the
    rotation-retarding means or drive when shifted.


CLS 254/272
TXT With cable deflecting or path defining component shifted by cable when
    tension varies:

    Apparatus under subclass 270 wherein the mechanism has a cable-contacting
    component which either (a) slightly deflects a segment of the cable from
    the linear direction of adjacent segments or (b) defines a portion of the
    path of travel of a segment of the cable contacted by and moving relative
    to it, the component is shifted by the cable when the tension on the cable
    is varied and generates the regulating force to the rotation-retarding
    means or the drive when shifted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclass 355 for means mounted on a vessel and removably
    connected to a permanent submerged well structure, (e.g., wellhead, riser);
    this means is provided with means to compensate for the vessel's movement
    on the surface.


CLS 254/273
TXT Electricity or fluid utilized in transmittal of impulse:

    Apparatus under subclass 272 in which either an electric or a fluid medium
    is utilized when the force is transmitted from the mechanism to the
    retarding means or drive.


CLS 254/274
TXT Having mechanism, linked to drum or rotating element of drive, for
    generating control impulse to rotation retarding means or motor when torque
    on drum varies:

    Apparatus under subclass 266 wherein the driven device also includes a
    mechanism which is either linked to the drum or a rotating element of the
    drive for the drum and is responsive to variations in the amount of torque
    on the drum, the mechanism generates a force when the torque is varied,
    which is transmitted to and regulates the operation of either (a) means
    which retards the rotation of the drum or (b) a motor which is the source
    of power for the drive of the drum.

    (1)     Note.  The torque-responsive mechanism of this subclass does not
    form an active portion of a drive train used in transmitting power from the
    motor to the drum.

    (2)     Note.  The torque-responsive mechanism of this subclass is not
    located internally of the motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 6 for an electric
    motor having a tension maintaining type of motor control.


CLS 254/275
TXT Electricity utilized in transmittal of impulse:

    Apparatus under subclass 274 in which an electric medium is utilized when
    force is transmitted from the mechanism to the retarding means or motor.


CLS 254/276
TXT Having mechanism, linked to drum and actuated by number of drum rotations,
    for generating control impulse to rotation retarding means of drive:

    Apparatus under subclass 266 wherein the driven device also includes a
    mechanism which is linked to the drum and is actuated when the drum has
    completed a predetermined number of rotations; the mechanism when actuated
    generates a force which is transmitted to and regulates the operation of
    either (a) means for retarding the rotation of, or (b) the drive for, the
    drum.


CLS 254/277
TXT With fluid or resilient shock absorbing or tension maintaining means
    attached to, supported by, or supporting guiding structure for cable:

    Apparatus under subclass 266 provided with a fluid or resilient means which
    absorbs sudden changes in the amount of tension on the cable or keeps the
    amount of tension on the cable constant, and, in addition, is either
    directly attached to, supported by, or supports structure which defines the
    path of the cable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclass 215 for cable-tension relievers.

    166,    Wells, subclass 355 for means mounted on a vessel and removably
    connected to a permanent submerged well structure, (e.g., wellhead, riser);
    this means is provided with means to compensate for the vessel's movement
    on the surface.


CLS 254/278
TXT Plural drums or drum with plural distinct sections:

    Apparatus under subclass 266 including either (a) at least one other
    driven, cable-contacting drum rotatable about an axis fixed relative to
    another portion of the apparatus, or (b) a driven drum with two or more
    distinct, structurally separated, cable-contacting regions which each pull
    on either different cables or different ends of the same cable.

    (1)     Note.  At least one of the drums claimed in the patents found in
    this and its indented subclasses is of the type driven device described as
    proper for subclass 264.  The other drum may, however, be of the type
    described in part (c) of (2) Note for subclass 264.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    214+,   for implements or apparatus for tensioning flexible material or for
    extracting stumps or poles including two or more rotatably driven drums.


CLS 254/279
TXT With vehicle for supporting at least one drum:

    Apparatus under subclass 278 wherein at least one of the cable-pulling
    drums is mounted on a transporting vehicle (e.g., truck, ship, train).

    (1)     Note.  If only one drum is of the object transporting or shifting
    type (see the exception of (1) Note, subclass 278) then that is the drum
    with which this subclass is concerned.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 370+ for a reeling
    device, especially subclasses 390.7, 391+, and 403+ for a reeling device
    associated with a vehicle.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 142.8+, 460, 538, 540, and
    559 for a driven device mounted on a vehicle which hauls or hoists a load
    into or onto a load-supporting member of the vehicle.


CLS 254/280
TXT Having rotatable, cable guiding, pulley wheel element spaced from drums:

    Apparatus under subclass 279 including at least one cable-guiding element,
    (e.g., pulley, roller, sprocket) having a generally circular perimeter and
    rotating about an axis through its center in response to the movement of
    the cable over its perimeter, the element positioned along the path of
    travel of the cable and spaced a distance from both of the drums.

    (1)     Note.  The distance between the perimeters of the element and the
    drums is large enough to allow the cable to pass unimpeded.

    (2)     Note.  See (1) Note and (2) Note of subclass 390.


CLS 254/281
TXT Element repositionable relative to at least one of the drums:

    Apparatus under subclass 280 in which the element may undergo a change in
    its position or attitude in relationship to one of the drums.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclasses 255+ and 223+ for a cable-pulling
    device for both lifting and traversing a load, the device includes a
    vehicle with a cable-pulling drum and a repositionable pulley mounted on it.


CLS 254/282
TXT Drive for at least one drum includes motor of vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 279 in which at least one of the drums is
    rotatably driven about its axis by a drive which includes means for
    utilizing the power output of the vehicle's propulsion motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 11+ for power takeoffs
    from a prime mover.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 53.1+ for power takeoffs from the motor
    of a vehicle.


CLS 254/283
TXT Having rotatable, cable guiding, pulley wheel element spaced from drums:

    Apparatus under subclass 278 including at least one cable-guiding element
    (e.g., pulley, roller, sprocket) having a generally circular perimeter and
    rotating about an axis through its center in response to the movement of
    the cable over its perimeter, the element positioned along the path of
    travel of the cable and spaced a distance from both of the drums.

    (1)     Note.  The distance between the perimeters of the element and the
    drums is large enough to allow the cable to pass unimpeded.

    (2)     Note.  See (1) Note and (2) Note of subclass 390.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226,    for implements or apparatus for tensioning flexible material or for
    extracting stumps or poles including a rotatably driven drum and a pulley
    wheel element spaced therefrom.

    390,    for pulley wheel elements intended to be used with a hauling or
    hoisting drum.


CLS 254/284
TXT Element repositionable relative to at least one of the drums:

    Apparatus under subclass 283 in which the element may undergo a change in
    its position or attitude in relationship to at least one of the drums.


CLS 254/285
TXT Plural elements:

    Apparatus under subclass 284 wherein two or more rotatable, cable-guiding,
    pulley wheel elements are spaced from the drums, at least one of the
    elements changes its position or attitude in relationship to the drums.


CLS 254/286
TXT Plural elements:

    Apparatus under subclass 283 wherein two or more rotatable, cable-guiding,
    pulley wheel elements are spaced from the drums.


CLS 254/287
TXT Juxtaposed to cable at single locus:

    Apparatus under subclass 278 wherein at least two of the driven,
    cable-contacting drums have noncollinear axes of rotation and have their
    cable-contacting portions closely clustered around a single point, which
    drums either (a) simultaneously come into contact with the same segment of
    cable or (b) each one intermittently contacts a segment of the cable
    passing through the point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215,    for implements or apparatus for tensioning flexible material or for
    extracting stumps or poles including two or more rotatably driven drums
    juxtaposed to and pulling on a cable or the material at a single locus.


CLS 254/288
TXT With means affixing at least one drum to supporting base and allowing
    movement between drum and base:

    Apparatus under subclass 278 in which one or more of the drums are joined
    to a supporting base by means which allows the rotational axis or
    circumference of the drums to shift, or change their orientation, relative
    to the juncture of the base and the means.


CLS 254/289
TXT Movement engages or disengages drum from drive:

    Apparatus under subclass 288 wherein the selective shifting of the
    rotational axis or circumference of one or more of the drums either engages
    or disengages the shifting drums from their drive.


CLS 254/290
TXT Plural, distinct, drive motors:

    Apparatus under subclass 278 wherein the drive for rotating the drums
    includes at least two motors which are distinct from each other and whose
    operation does not directly depend on one another.


CLS 254/291
TXT Noncompressible fluid:

    Apparatus under subclass 290 wherein at least one of the motors is operated
    by fluid which is not appreciably reducible in volume by a change in
    pressure or temperature.


CLS 254/292
TXT Electric:

    Apparatus under subclass 290 wherein at least one of the motors is operated
    solely by electricity.


CLS 254/293
TXT Each drum having plural, distinct drive sources or discrete drive trains:

    Apparatus under subclass 278 wherein the drive for each drum includes
    either (a) two or more distinct drive sources, (e.g., a motor and a
    hand-operated crank, two spaced hand-operated cranks), or (b) two or more
    discrete drive trains, (i.e., they do not share either a common drive
    source or a common power-transmitting component) whose operations do not
    depend directly on one another.


CLS 254/294
TXT Having common drive source or mechanically interlinked drive train:

    Apparatus under subclass 278 wherein the drive for at least two drums
    includes either (a) a common drive source, or (b) a drive train for each of
    the drums mechanically interlinked with one another, (i.e., the drive
    trains share at least one common or mutual power-transmitting component).


CLS 254/295
TXT Including intermeshing gears in drive:

    Apparatus under subclass 294 in which the interlinked trains include two or
    more gears each having teeth formed on their circumference, the teeth of
    each gear engaging with those of at least one other gear and moving
    relative thereto when transmitting power from a drive source to the drums.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219,    for implements or apparatus for tensioning flexible material or for
    extracting stumps or poles including a rotatably driven drum provided with
    a drive having two or more intermeshing gears.


CLS 254/296
TXT Worm and worm wheel:

    Apparatus under subclass 295 wherein at least two of the gears comprise a
    worm gear and a worm wheel gear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220,    for implements or apparatus for tensioning flexible material or for
    extracting stumps or poles including a rotatably driven drum provided with
    intermeshing gears of the worm and worm wheel type.


CLS 254/297
TXT Epicyclic gear train having sun, intermediate, (e.g., planet) and ring
    gears:

    Apparatus under subclass 295 wherein the gears include an epicyclic gear
    arrangement in which a sun gear is engaged with an intermediate, (e.g.,
    planet) gear which is also engaged with an encircling ring gear.


CLS 254/298
TXT Shiftable into and out of intermeshing engagement:

    Apparatus under subclass 295 wherein at least one of the gears may be
    shifted into or out of engagement with another gear.


CLS 254/299
TXT Also including clutch mechanism having coaxial, rotatable, relatively
    shiftable axially, power transmitting components:

    Apparatus under subclass 295 wherein the interlinked drive trains also
    include a clutch mechanism having a rotatable component which is rotated
    about its axis by the power source, the component, in its entirety, being
    relatively shiftable along its axis of rotation either (a) into contact
    with another component of the clutch mechanism causing this component to
    rotate about the same axis and to transmit power to at least one of the
    drums or (b) out of contact with the other component, allowing that
    component to stop rotating and not transmit power.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 66.1+ for a clutch
    having movable engaging elements which shift parallel to the axis of
    rotation of the elements.


CLS 254/300
TXT With frictional brake assembly mechanically linked to, and operationally
    influenced by, clutch:

    Apparatus under subclass 299 wherein the clutch mechanism is mechanically
    connected to a frictional brake assembly which is used to stop or slow down
    the rotation of at least one of the drums, the connection between the
    clutch mechanism and the brake assembly being constructed in such a manner
    that when the rotating clutch components either engage or disengage each
    other, the brake is applied.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 12+ for a mechanism
    having a clutch and a brake applied alternately to drive or retard the
    mechanism.


CLS 254/301
TXT With additional axially shiftable clutch mechanism mechanically linked to,
    and operationally influenced by, first clutch:

    Apparatus under subclass 299 wherein the interlinked drive trains include
    an additional clutch mechanism similar to the first and mechanically
    connected thereto, this connection being constructed in such a manner that
    when the first clutch mechanism engages its rotating components, the other
    will either engage or disengage its rotating components.

    (1)     Note.  Although each clutch mechanism is by itself a distinct
    entity, they may have some parts in common, that is, a part may form one of
    the rotatable components of a first clutch mechanism at one time, and that
    part may also form one of the rotatable components of a second clutch
    mechanism at another time.


CLS 254/302
TXT Alternately transmitting power:

    Apparatus under subclass 301 in which the clutch mechanisms are applied
    alternately to transmit power.


CLS 254/303
TXT Fluid operated actuator shifts component:

    Apparatus under subclass 299 in which the rotatable components are shifted
    into and out of engagement by means operated by fluid power.


CLS 254/304
TXT Components having frictional contact surface:

    Apparatus under subclass 299 in which the surface friction created by the
    contact of the rotatable components of the clutch mechanism is solely
    relied upon for the transmitting of rotary motion from one component to the
    other.


CLS 254/305
TXT Truncated cone shaped:

    Apparatus under subclass 304 wherein the portion of the surface of each
    rotatable component coming into contact with the other has a generally
    truncated cone shape.


CLS 254/306
TXT Also including ratchet wheel and driving pawl:

    Apparatus under subclass 295 wherein the interlinked drive trains also
    include a rotatable wheel having teeth on its perimeter and a pawl which is
    reciprocated along a linear or angular path by the power source; the pawl
    alternately engages the teeth and turns the wheel at least a portion of a
    revolution around its axis during movement in one of its directions and
    disengages the teeth during its return movement in the other direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217,    for implements or apparatus for tensioning flexible material or for
    extracting stumps or poles including a rotatably driven drum provided with
    a drive having a ratchet wheel and an interengaging driving pawl.


CLS 254/307
TXT Plural driving pawls:

    Apparatus under subclass 306 having two or more distinct pawls, each of
    which engage the teeth of the wheel and rotate it.


CLS 254/308
TXT Attached to rotatable disk or shaft:

    Apparatus under subclass 307 in which the pawls are attached to a driven
    rotatable disk or shaft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 41+ for clutches which
    engage in one direction of rotation without manipulation.


CLS 254/309
TXT Also including clutch mechanism having rotatable, radially shiftable, power
    transmitting component:

    Apparatus under subclass 295 wherein the interlinked drive trains also
    include a clutch mechanism having a component which is rotated about an
    axis by the power source, the component being shiftable radially away from
    or toward the axis of rotation into driving contact with another component
    of the clutch mechanism causing this component to transmit power to at
    least one of the drums.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 71-81 for a clutch
    having movable engaging elements which shifts transversely, (i.e.,
    radially) to the axis of rotation of the elements.


CLS 254/310
TXT With means for preventing or retarding rotation of one or more drums in at
    least one direction:

    Apparatus under subclass 295 provided with means, (e.g., a shiftable lock,
    friction brake) for either preventing movement of one or more of the drums
    about their axis in at least one of their directions of rotation or for
    slowing down the rotational speed of one or more of the drums in at least
    one direction of rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222,    for implements or apparatus for tensioning flexible material or for
    extracting stumps or poles including a rotatably drive drum provided with
    means for preventing or retarding rotation of the drum in at least one
    direction.


CLS 254/311
TXT Including sprocket wheel and chain in drive:

    Apparatus under subclass 294 wherein the interlinked drive trains include
    at least one rotatable wheel having a plurality of toothlike or other
    shaped projections on its periphery and a chain or apertured belt partially
    wrapped around the wheel and adapted to cooperate with the projections on
    the wheel.

    (1)     Note.  The chain or apertured belt of this subclass is never
    attached or connected to the object being moved.


CLS 254/312
TXT Including power transmitting pulley and rope or belt either in drive or in
    cable return means:

    Apparatus under subclass 294 wherein either (a) the interlinked drive
    trains for rotating the drums when the cable is pulled to transport or
    shift the object or objects, or (b) a means for rotating the drums and
    returning the object-contacting portion of the cable to its original
    position in relationship to one of the drums after the load has been
    transported or shifted, include at least one power-transmitting, rotatable
    element having a generally circular perimeter adapted for contact with
    either a driven or a driving power-transmitting rope or endless belt which
    is partially wrapped around it.

    (1)     Note.  The driven or driving rope or belt of this subclass is never
    attached or connected to the object being moved.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclass 263 for an elevator supported by a cable which is pulled by a
    driving drum or sheave, the drum or sheave is driven by means of a hand
    rope.


CLS 254/313
TXT Including contacting friction wheels having noncollinear axes of rotation
    in drive:

    Apparatus under subclass 294 wherein the interlinked drive trains include
    two or more wheels which (a) have their axes of rotation not forming
    segments of the same line, and (b) have their circumferences in contact
    with each other when transmitting power to at least one of the drums, the
    surface friction created by the contact of the wheels is solely relied upon
    for the transmitting of rotary motion from one wheel to another wheel.


CLS 254/314
TXT Including expansible, noncombustible, fluid motor in drive, (e.g., air,
    steam):

    Apparatus under subclass 294 wherein the drive source includes a motor of
    the kind operated by a fluid which (1) is appreciably expanded in volume by
    appropriate changes in either (a) the amount of pressure on it, or (b) its
    temperature, and (2) is of a generally noncombustible nature and undergoes
    no alterations in its chemical composition while in the motor.


CLS 254/315
TXT Including noncompressible fluid motor or pump in drive:

    Apparatus under subclass 294 wherein the common drive source includes a
    motor or pump of the kind operated by a fluid which is not appreciably
    reducible in volume by a change in pressure or temperature.


CLS 254/316
TXT Including electric motor in drive:

    Apparatus under subclass 294 wherein the common drive source includes a
    motor of the kind operated solely by electricity.


CLS 254/317
TXT Including clutch mechanism in drive having coaxial, rotatable, relatively
    shiftable axially, power transmitting components:

    Apparatus under subclass 294 wherein the interlinked drive trains include a
    clutch mechanism having a rotatable component which is rotated about its
    axis by the power source, the component, in its entirety, being relatively
    shiftable along its axis of rotation either (a) into contact with another
    component of the clutch mechanism causing this component to rotate about
    the same axis and to transmit power to at least one of the drums, or (b)
    out of contact with the other component allowing that component to stop
    rotating and not transmit power.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 66.1+ for a clutch
    having movable engaging elements which shift parallel to the axis of
    rotation of the elements.


CLS 254/318
TXT With frictional brake assembly, mechanically linked to and operationally
    influenced by, clutch:

    Apparatus under subclass 317 wherein the clutch mechanism is mechanically
    connected to a frictional brake assembly which is used to stop or slow down
    the rotation of the drums, the connection between the clutch mechanism and
    the brake assembly being contsructed in such a manner that when the
    rotating clutch components either engage or disengage each other the brake
    is applied.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 12+ for a mechanism
    having a clutch and a brake applied alternately to drive or retard the
    mechanism.


CLS 254/319
TXT Components having frictional contact surface:

    Apparatus under subclass 317 in which the surface friction created by the
    contact of the rotatable components of the clutch mechanism is solely
    relied upon for the transmitting of rotary motion from the one component to
    the other.


CLS 254/320
TXT Including ratchet wheel and interengaging driving pawl in drive:

    Apparatus under subclass 294 in which the interlinked drive trains include
    a rotatable wheel having teeth on its perimeter and a pawl which is
    reciprocated along a linear or angular path by the power source, the pawl
    alternately engages the teeth and turns the wheel at least a portion of a
    revolution around its axis during movement in one of its directions and
    disengages the teeth during its return movement in the other direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217,    for implements or apparatus for tensioning flexible material or for
    extracting stumps or poles including a rotatably driven drum provided with
    a drive having a ratchet wheel and an interengaging driving pawl.


CLS 254/321
TXT Including means for preventing or retarding rotation of one or more drums
    in at least one direction:

    Apparatus under subclass 294 including means for either preventing movement
    of at least one of the drums about its axis in one or both of its
    directions of rotation or for slowing down the rotational speed of at least
    one of the drums in one or both of its directions of rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222,    for implements or apparatus for tensioning flexible material or for
    extracting stumps or poles including a rotatably driven drum provided with
    means for preventing or retarding rotation of the drum in at least one
    direction.


CLS 254/322
TXT Frictional brake assembly having rotating, wheel structure and shiftable
    shoe and band:

    Apparatus under subclass 321 wherein the means consist of a rotating, wheel
    structure which either (a) forms a portion of one of the drums, or (b) is
    mechanically connected to and has its rotation correlated with and
    dependent upon at least one of the drums, and an element shiftable into and
    out of contact with the wheel structure, the resistance caused by the
    surface friction created during the contact of the wheel structure and the
    element is relied upon to slow down or stop the rotation of at least one of
    the drums.


CLS 254/323
TXT With vehicle for supporting drum:

    Apparatus under subclass 266 in which the cable pulling drum is mounted on
    a transporting vehicle, (e.g., truck, ship, train).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 370+, for a reeling
    device, especially subclasses 390.7, 391+, and 403+ for a reeling device
    associated with a vehicle.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 142.8+, 460, 538, 540, and
    559 for a driven device mounted on a vehicle which hauls or hoists a load
    into or onto a load-supporting member of the vehicle.


CLS 254/324
TXT Having arch-shaped body for straddling load:

    Apparatus under subclass 323 wherein a portion of the vehicle's body has a
    generally inverted U-shape, this portion may be positioned over the object
    when the drum is pulling on the cable.


CLS 254/325
TXT Having rotatable, cable guiding, pulley wheel element spaced from drum:

    Apparatus under subclass 323 including at least one cable-guiding element,
    (e.g., pulley, roller, sprocket) having a generally circular perimeter and
    rotating about an axis through its center in response to the movement of
    the cable over its perimeter, the element positioned along the path of
    travel of the cable and spaced a distance from the drum.

    (1)     Note.  The distance between the perimeters of the element and the
    drum is large enough to allow the cable to pass unimpeded.

    (2)     Note.  See (1) Note and (2) Note of subclass 390.


CLS 254/326
TXT Element repositionable relative to drum:

    Apparatus under subclass 325 in which the element may undergo a change in
    its position or attitude in relationship to the drum.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclasses 255+ and 223+ for a cable pulling
    device which both lifts and traverses a load, the device includes a vehicle
    with a cable pulling drum and a repositionable pulley mounted on it.


CLS 254/327
TXT Plural elements:

    Apparatus under subclass 325 in which two or more rotatable, cable guiding,
    pulley wheel elements are spaced a distance from the drum.


CLS 254/328
TXT Drive for drum includes motor of vehicle: Apparatus under subclass 323
    wherein the drum is rotatably driven about its axis by a drive which
    includes means for utilizing the power output of the vehicle's propulsion
    motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 11+ for power takeoffs
    from a prime mover.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 53.1+ for power takeoffs from the motor
    of a vehicle.


CLS 254/329
TXT With means affixing drum to supporting base and allowing relative movement
    therebetween:

    Apparatus under subclass 266 in which the drum is joined to a supporting
    base by means which allows the rotational axis or circumference of the drum
    to shift, or change its orientation, relative to the juncture of the base
    and the means.


CLS 254/330
TXT Movement engages or disengages drum from drive:

    Apparatus under subclass 329 wherein the selective shifting of the axis or
    circumference of the drum from one position to another either engages or
    disengages the drum from its drive.


CLS 254/331
TXT Movement occurs along line collinear with rotational axis of drum during
    pulling of cable:

    Apparatus under subclass 329 wherein the circumference of the drum shifts
    along a line which is collinear with its rotational axis, the cable being
    pulled by the drum during this movement.


CLS 254/332
TXT Including pivotal, rotational or swivel connection between drum and base:

    Apparatus under subclass 329 wherein the means includes a connection which
    allows the axis or circumference of the drum to be pivoted, rotated, or
    swiveled about the juncture of the base and the means.


CLS 254/333
TXT Having pressure element spaced from drum to confine cable thereagainst:

    Apparatus under subclass 266 including an element spaced from the drum's
    periphery just far enough to allow the cable to barely pass between the
    drum and element at their nearest point; the cable at this point is
    slightly compressed, or has a compressive force placed on it, by the drum
    and element, and consequently is caused to advance by the contact of the
    cable with the driven drum's periphery.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216,    for implements or apparatus for tensioning flexible material or for
    extracting stumps or poles including a rotatably driven drum and a pressure
    element spaced therefrom for confining a cable or the material against its
    surface.


CLS 254/334
TXT Having rotatable, cable guiding, pulley wheel element spaced from drum:

    Apparatus under subclass 266 including at least one cable guiding element
    (e.g., pulley, roller, sprocket) having a generally circular perimeter and
    rotating about an axis through its center in response to the movement of
    the cable over its perimeter, the element positioned along the path of
    travel of the cable and spaced from the drum.

    (1)     Note.  The distance between the perimeters of the element and the
    drum is large enough to allow the cable to pass unimpeded.

    (2)     Note.  See (1) Note and (2) Note of subclass 390.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226,    for implements or apparatus for tensioning flexible material or for
    extracting stumps or poles including a rotatably driven drum and a pulley
    wheel element spaced therefrom.

    390,    for pulley wheel elements intended to be used with a hauling or
    hoisting drum.


CLS 254/335
TXT Element repositionable relative to drum:

    Apparatus under subclass 334 in which the element may undergo a change in
    its position or attitude in relationship to the drum.


CLS 254/336
TXT Plural elements:

    Apparatus under subclass 335 wherein two or more rotatable, cable guiding,
    pulley wheel elements are spaced from the drum, at least one of the
    elements changes its position or attitude in relationship to the drum.


CLS 254/337
TXT Cable supported:

    Apparatus under subclass 336 in which the repositionable element or
    elements is supported by the object moving cable and changes its position
    or attitude when the cable is pulled by the drum.


CLS 254/338
TXT Plural elements:

    Apparatus under subclass 334 wherein two or more rotatable, cable-guiding,
    pulley wheel elements are spaced from the drum.


CLS 254/339
TXT Having plural, distinct drive sources or discrete drive trains:

    Apparatus under subclass 266 in which the drive for the drum includes
    either (a) two or more distinct drive sources, (e.g., a motor and a
    hand-operated crank, two spaced hand-operated cranks) or (b) two or more
    discrete drive trains, (i.e., they do not share either a common drive
    source or a common power transmitting component) whose operations do not
    depend directly on one another.


CLS 254/340
TXT Including two or more motors:

    Apparatus under subclass 339 in which the drive sources for the drum
    include at least two motors.


CLS 254/341
TXT Drive includes rack and either pinion or pinion segment:

    Apparatus under subclass 266 wherein the drive for the drum includes a bar
    having a row of teeth or apertures on at least one of its sides, and a
    rotatable circular gear, or a segment thereof, having teeth or protrusions
    acting in the manner of teeth which intermesh with the row, the gear or
    gear segment being in constant engagement with the row while the drum is
    pulling the cable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      12, 95, 205, and 230, for implements or apparatus including a rack
    and pinion, or pinion segment, drive.


CLS 254/342
TXT Drive includes intermeshing gears:

    Apparatus under subclass 266 wherein the drive for the drum includes two or
    more gears each having teeth formed on their circumference, the teeth of
    each gear engaging with those of at least one other gear and moving
    relative thereto when transmitting power from a drive source to the drum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219,    for implements or apparatus for tensioning flexible material or for
    extracting stumps or poles including a rotatably driven drum provided with
    a drive having two or more intermeshing gears.


CLS 254/343
TXT Worm and worm wheel:

    Apparatus under subclass 342 wherein one of the gears is a worm gear and
    another one is a worm wheel gear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220,    for implements or apparatus for tensioning flexible material or for
    extracting stumps or poles including a rotatably driven drum provided with
    intermeshing gears of the worm and worm wheel type.


CLS 254/344
TXT Epicyclic gear arrangement including sun, intermediate, (e.g., planet), and
    ring gears:

    Apparatus under subclass 342 wherein at least some of the gears are
    arranged in an epicyclic gear configuration in which a sun gear is engaged
    with an intermediate, (e.g., planet) gear which is also engaged with an
    encircling ring gear.


CLS 254/345
TXT Shiftable into and out of intermeshing engagement:

    Apparatus under subclass 342 wherein at least one of the gears in the drive
    may be shifted into or out of engagement with another gear.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclass 263 for disengageable
    gears in a fishing reel and subclass 394 for a disengageable drive in a
    reeling device of general use.


CLS 254/346
TXT Drive also includes clutch mechanism having coaxial, rotatable, relatively
    shiftable axially, power transmitting components:

    Apparatus under subclass 342 wherein the drive also includes a clutch
    mechanism having a rotatable component which is rotated about its axis by
    the power source, the component, in its entirety, being relatively
    shiftable along its axis of rotation either (a) into contact with another
    component of the clutch mechanism causing this component to rotate about
    the same axis and to transmit power to the drum, or (b) out of contact with
    the other component allowing it to stop rotating and not transmit power to
    the drum.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 66.1+ for a clutch
    having movable engaging elements which shift parallel to the axis of
    rotation of the elements.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 257+ for a clutched
    fishing reel and subclass 394 for a clutch in a reeling device of general
    use.


CLS 254/347
TXT With frictional brake assembly, mechanically linked to and operationally
    influenced by, clutch:

    Apparatus under subclass 346 wherein the clutch mechanism is mechanically
    connected to a frictional brake assembly which is used to stop or slow down
    the rotation of the drum, the connection between the clutch mechanism and
    the brake assembly being constructed in such a manner that when the
    rotating clutch components either engage or disengage each other the brake
    is applied.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 12+ for a mechanism
    having a clutch and a brake applied alternately to drive or retard the
    mechanism.


CLS 254/348
TXT With additional axially shiftable clutch mechanism, mechanically linked to
    and operationally influenced by, first clutch:

    Apparatus under subclass 346 wherein the drive includes an additional
    clutch mechanism similar to the first and mechanically connected thereto,
    this connection being constructed in such a manner that when the first
    clutch mechanism engages its rotating components the other will either
    engage or disengage its rotating components.

    (1)     Note.  Although each clutch mechanism is by itself a distinct
    entity they may have some parts in common, that is, a part may form one of
    the rotatable components of a first clutch mechanism at one time, and that
    part may also form one of the rotatable components of a second clutch
    mechanism at another time.


CLS 254/349
TXT Fluid operated actuator shifts component:

    Apparatus under subclass 346 in which the rotatable components are shifted
    into and out of engagement by means operated by fluid power.


CLS 254/350
TXT Components having frictional contact surface:

    Apparatus under subclass 346 in which the surface friction created by the
    contact of the rotatable components of the clutch mechanism is solely
    relied upon for the transmitting or rotary motion from the one component to
    the other.


CLS 254/351
TXT Truncated cone shaped:

    Apparatus under subclass 350 wherein the portion of the surface of each of
    the rotatable components which contacts the other components has a
    generally truncated cone shaped.


CLS 254/352
TXT Drive also includes ratchet wheel and driving pawl:

    Apparatus under subclass 342 wherein the drive also includes a rotatable
    wheel having teeth on its perimeter and a pawl which is reciprocated along
    a linear or angular path by the power source, the pawl alternately engages
    the teeth and turns the wheel at least a portion of a revolution around its
    axis during movement in one of its directions and disengages the teeth
    during its return movement in the other direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217,    for implements or apparatus for tensioning flexible material or for
    extracting stumps or poles including a rotatably driven drum provided with
    a drive having a ratchet wheel and an interengaging driving pawl.


CLS 254/353
TXT Plural driving pawls:

    Apparatus under subclass 352 having two or more distinct pawls, each of
    which engages the teeth of the wheel and rotate it.


CLS 254/354
TXT Attached to rotatable disk or shaft:

    Apparatus under subclass 353 in which the pawls are attached to a driven,
    rotatable disk or shaft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 41+ for clutches which
    engage in one direction of rotation without manipulation.


CLS 254/355
TXT Drive also includes clutch mechanism having rotatable, radially shiftable,
    power transmitting component:

    Apparatus under subclass 342 wherein the drive also includes a clutch
    mechanism having a component which is rotated about an axis by the power
    source, the component being shiftable radially away from or toward the axis
    of rotation into driving contact with another component of the clutch
    mechanism causing this component to transmit power to the drum.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 71-81 for a clutch
    having movable engaging elements which shift transversely, (i.e., radially)
    to the axis of rotation of the elements.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 257 and 262 for a
    radially applied clutch in a fishing reel and subclass 257 for a clutch in
    a reeling device of general use.


CLS 254/356
TXT With means for preventing or retarding rotation of drum in at least one
    direction:

    Apparatus under subclass 342 provided with means, (e.g., a shiftable lock,
    friction brake) for either preventing movement of the drum about its axis
    in at least one of its directions of rotation or for slowing down the
    rotational speed of the drum in at least one direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222,    for implements or apparatus for tensioning flexible material or for
    extracting stumps or poles including a rotatably driven drum provided with
    means for preventing or retarding rotation of the drum in at least one
    direction.


CLS 254/357
TXT Ratchet wheel or formation and locking pawl:

    Apparatus under subclass 356 wherein the means consist of either (a) a
    wheel having teeth located on its perimeter, the wheel being rotatably
    interconnected to the drum and a pawl which interlocks with the teeth in
    one direction of the wheel's rotation to prevent movement of the drum and
    which disengages from the teeth in the other direction of the wheel's
    rotation to allow movement of the drum, or (b) a stationary ratchet
    formation having teeth located on its perimeter and a pawl connected to the
    drum which revolves around an axis when the drum is rotated; the pawl
    interlocks with the teeth in one direction of its travel to prevent
    movement of the drum and disengages from the teeth in the other direction
    of its travel to allow movement of the drum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223,    for implements or apparatus for tensioning flexible material or for
    extracting stumps or poles including a rotatably driven drum provided with
    a ratchet wheel and locking pawl for preventing rotation of the drum in one
    direction.

    306,    320, 352, and 364, for a drum having a drive train which includes a
    ratchet wheel and a pawl interengaging therewith, and which may also
    include an additional pawl for preventing movement of the drum in one
    direction.


CLS 254/358
TXT Drive includes sprocket wheel and chain:

    Apparatus under subclass 266 wherein the drive includes at least one power
    transmitting rotatable wheel having a plurality of toothlike or other
    shaped projections on its periphery and a chain or apertured belt partially
    wrapped around the wheel and adapted to cooperate with the projections on
    the wheel.

    (1)     Note.  The chain or apertured belt of this subclass is never
    attached or connected to the object being moved.


CLS 254/359
TXT Either drive or cable return means includes power transmitting pulley and
    rope or belt: Apparatus under subclass 266 wherein either (a) the drive for
    rotating the drum when the cable is pulled to transport or shift the
    object, or (b) a means for rotating the drum and returning the object
    contacting portion of the cable to its original position in relationship to
    the drum after the load has been transported or shifted, includes at least
    one power-transmitting, rotatable element having a generally circular
    perimeter adapted for contact with either a driven or a driving
    power-transmitting rope or endless belt which is partially wrapped around
    it.

    (1)     Note.  The driven or driving rope or belt of this subclass is never
    attached or connected to the object being moved.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclass 263 for an elevator supported by a cable which is pulled by a
    driving drum or sheave, the drum or sheave is driven by means of a hand
    rope.


CLS 254/360
TXT Drive includes expansible, noncombustible, fluid motor (e.g., air, steam):

    Apparatus under subclass 266 wherein the drive includes a motor of the kind
    operated by a fluid which (1) is appreciably expanded in volume by
    appropriate changes in (a) the amount of pressure on it, or (b) it
    temperature, and (2) is of a generally noncombustible nature and undergoes
    no alterations in its chemical composition while in the motor.


CLS 254/361
TXT Drive includes noncompressible fluid motor or pump:

    Apparatus under subclass 266 wherein the drive source includes a motor or
    pump of the kind operated by a fluid which is not appreciably reducible in
    volume merely by changing pressure or temperature.


CLS 254/362
TXT Drive includes electric motor:

    Apparatus under subclass 266 wherein the drive source includes a motor of
    the kind operated solely by electricity.


CLS 254/363
TXT Drive includes contacting friction wheels having noncollinear axes of
    rotation:

    Apparatus under subclass 266 wherein the drive includes two or more wheels
    which have (a) their axes of rotation not forming segments at the same
    line, and (b) their circumferences in contact with each other when
    transmitting power to the drum, the surface friction created by the contact
    of the wheels is solely relied upon for the transmitting of rotary motion
    from one wheel to another wheel.


CLS 254/364
TXT Either drive or cable return means includes spring:

    Apparatus under subclass 266 wherein either (a) the drive for rotating the
    drum when the cable is pulled to transport or shift the object, or (b) a
    means for rotating the drum and returning the object contacting portion of
    the cable to its original position in relationship to the drum after the
    load has been transported or shifted, includes an energy storing spring.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 232 and 237 for a reel
    having a strand wound on it which is used in an occupant lowering fire
    escape and includes a spring for winding the strand after it has been
    unwound from the reel.


CLS 254/365
TXT Drive includes clutch mechanism having coaxial, rotatable, relatively
    shifting axially, power transmitting components:

    Apparatus under subclass 266 wherein the drive includes a clutch mechanism
    having a rotatable component which is rotated about its axis by the power
    source, the component, in its entirety, being relatively shiftable along
    its axis or rotation either (a) into contact with another component of the
    clutch mechanism causing this component to rotate about the same axis and
    to transmit power to the drum, or (b) out of contact with the other
    component allowing it to stop rotating and not transmit power to drum.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 66.1+ for a clutch
    having movable engaging elements which shift parallel to the axis of
    rotation of the elements.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 257+ for a clutch in a
    fishing reel and subclass 257 for a clutch in a reeling device of general
    use.


CLS 254/366
TXT With frictional brake assembly mechanically linked to, and operationally
    influenced by, clutch:

    Apparatus under subclass 365 wherein the clutch mechanism is mechanically
    connected to a frictional brake assembly which is used to stop or slow down
    the rotation of the drum, the connection between the clutch mechanism and
    the brake assembly being constructed in such a manner that when the
    rotating clutch components either engage or disengage each other the brake
    is applied.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 12+ for a mechanism
    having a clutch and a brake applied alternately to drive or retard the
    mechanism


CLS 254/367
TXT Fluid operated actuator shifts component:

    Apparatus under subclass 365 in which the rotatable components are shifted
    into and out of engagement by means operated in response to the application
    of pressurized fluid.


CLS 254/368
TXT Components having frictional contact surface:

    Apparatus under subclass 365 in which the surface friction created by the
    contact of the rotatable components of the clutch mechanism is solely
    relied upon for the transmitting of rotary motion from the one component to
    the other.


CLS 254/369
TXT Drive includes ratchet wheel and interengaging driving pawl:

    Apparatus under subclass 266 in which the drive includes a rotatable wheel
    having teeth formed on its perimeter and a pawl which is reciprocated along
    a linear or angular path by the power source, the pawl alternately engages
    the teeth and turns the wheel at least a portion of a revolution around its
    axis during movement in one of its directions and disengages the teeth
    during its return movement in the other direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217,    for implements or apparatus for tensioning flexible material or for
    extracting stumps or poles including a rotatably driven drum provided with
    a drive having a ratchet wheel and an interengaging driving pawl.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 256+ for a ratchet
    drive in a fishing reel and subclass 389 for a ratchet drive in a reeling
    device of general use.


CLS 254/370
TXT Drive includes clutch mechanism having rotatable, radially shiftable, power
    transmitting component:

    Apparatus under subclass 266 in which the drive includes a clutch mechanism
    having a component which is rotated about an axis by the power source, the
    component being shiftable radially away from or toward the axis of rotation
    into driving contact with another component of the clutch mechanism causing
    this component to transmit power to the drum.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 71-81 for a clutch
    having movable engaging elements which shift transversely, (i.e., radially)
    to the axis of rotation of the elements.


CLS 254/371
TXT With means on circumference of drum, or relatively movable drum components,
    for grasping cable:

    Apparatus under subclass 266 in which the drum either (a) has means on or
    closely adjacent to and traveling with the cable contacting portion of its
    perimeter, or (b) has its cable contacting portion constructed from two or
    more components which move relative to each other, for sequentially
    grasping a segment of the cable, traveling with the segment around a
    portion of the drum's rotational path, releasing the segment, and then
    grasping another segment of cable.


CLS 254/372
TXT With projections or apertures on drum for engagement with complementary
    structural formation on cable:

    Apparatus under subclass 266 in which the drum has projections or apertures
    located on its surface for engaging corresponding apertures or projections
    formed along the length of the cable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221,    for implements or apparatus for tensioning flexible material or for
    extracting stumps or poles including a rotatably driven drum provided with
    projections or apertures on its circumference for engagement with
    complementary formations on the cable or material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 52+ for
    feeding apparatus having means to engage longitudinally spaced
    modifications in a material of indeterminate length.


CLS 254/373
TXT With pickup or pushing means on circumference of drum for cooperating with
    structure attached to, or formed on, end of cable:

    Apparatus under subclass 266 including means rotating with the drum and
    either (a) formed on, or (b) connected to or closely adjacent to the cable
    contacting portion of the drum's circumference, and structure formed on or
    attached to the end of the cable, the means contacts and carries or pushes
    the structure when the drum pulls on the cable and releases it when the
    drum stops pulling on the cable.


CLS 254/374
TXT Having noncircular or varying diameter, cable contacting perimeter:

    Apparatus under subclass 266 wherein the cable-contacting portion of the
    perimeter of the drum either has a noncircular shape (e.g., square) or has
    a varying diameter along its rotational axis, (e.g., cone shaped).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 602.1+ and 903 for a
    detail for a drum suitable for a winch or hoist, and subclass 613.2 for a
    spool drum of irregular cross section.


CLS 254/375
TXT Including means for preventing or retarding rotation of drum in at least
    one direction: Apparatus under subclass 266 including means for either
    preventing movement of the drum about its axis in at least one of its
    directions of rotation or for slowing down the rotational speed of the drum.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 68-85 for brakes for retarding or stopping the
    rotation of a wheel.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 285+ for a brake in a
    fishing reel; subclasses 380+, 382+, and 385+ for a brake in a spring
    powered reel; subclasses 396+ for a brake in a reeling device of general
    use, and subclasses 421+ and 422+ for a brake for tensioning elongated
    material.


CLS 254/376
TXT Ratchet wheel or formation and locking pawl:

    Apparatus under subclass 375 wherein the means consist of either (a) a
    wheel having teeth located on its perimeter, the wheel being rotatably
    interconnected to the drum, and a pawl which interlocks with the teeth in
    one direction of the wheel's rotation to prevent movement of the drum and
    which disengages from the teeth in the other direction of the wheel's
    rotation to allow movement of the drum, or (b) a stationary ratchet
    formation having teeth located on its perimeter and a pawl connected to the
    drum which revolves around an axis when the drum is rotated, the pawl
    interlocks with the teeth in one direction of its travel to prevent
    movement of the drum and disengages from the teeth in the other direction
    of its travel to allow movement of the drum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223,    for implements or apparatus for tensioning flexible material or for
    extracting stumps or poles including a rotatably driven drum provided with
    a ratchet wheel and locking pawl for preventing rotation of the drum in one
    direction.

    306,    320, 352, and 369, for a drum having a drive train which includes a
    ratchet wheel and a pawl interengaging therewith, and which may also
    include an additional pawl for preventing movement of the drum in one
    direction.


CLS 254/377
TXT Fluid resistance brake:

    Apparatus under subclass 375 wherein the means consist of a brake which
    utilizes the resistance force of a fluid against a portion of the brake
    structure to oppose the rotation of the drum.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 233 and 238 for a reel
    having a strand wound on it which is used in an occupant lowering fire
    escape and includes a fluid resistance brake for retarding the unwinding of
    the strand from the reel.

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 266+ for internal resistance motion retarders.


CLS 254/378
TXT Frictional brake assembly having rotating, wheel structure and shiftable
    shoe or band: Apparatus under subclass 375 wherein the means consist of a
    rotating wheel structure which either (a) forms a portion of the drum, or
    (b) is mechanically connected to and has its rotation correlated with and
    dependent upon the drum, and an element shiftable into and out of contact
    with the wheel structure, the resistance used by the surface friction
    created during the contact of the wheel structure and the element is relied
    upon to slow down or stop the rotation of the drum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222,    for implements or apparatus for tensioning flexible material or for
    extracting stumps or poles including a rotatably driven drum provided with
    means for preventing or retarding rotation of the drum in at least one
    direction.


CLS 254/379
TXT Having fluid actuator for shifting shoe or band:

    Apparatus under subclass 378 in which the element is shifted into and out
    of engagement with the wheel by a mechanism which utilizes fluid force.


CLS 254/380
TXT With portable housing for drum and hand manipulated means for removably
    fastening housing to supporting base or load:

    Apparatus under subclass 266 provided with a housing movable from one
    location to another and at least partially encasing or enclosing the drum,
    the housing having hand-manipulated means located thereon for detachably
    fastening it to a fixed supporting base or to the object.

    (1)     Note.  The fastening means of this subclass is capable of
    relatively easy and quick detachment from the object or the supporting base
    by manual force without the assistance of tools.


CLS 254/381
TXT With structure, (e.g., sweep, tree, yoke) adapting drum to be powered by
    draft animal:

    Apparatus under subclass 266 in which the drive for the drum includes
    structure its drive source.


CLS 254/382
TXT Including static receiver spaced from drum for storing pulled cable:

    Apparatus under subclass 266 including a static structure, (e.g.,
    receptacle, shelf, hook) spaced a distance from the perimeter of the drum
    for receiving or holding segments of the cable which have been contacted
    and pulled by the drum.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclass 159 for methods of and means
    for coiling or otherwise packing slivers, rovings, or the like into storage
    receptacles.


CLS 254/383
TXT With cable guard structure extending partly around and closely adjacent to
    drum:

    Apparatus under subclass 266 in which the drum is at least partially
    surrounded by structure located closely adjacent to its perimeter, the
    structure preventing the cable from moving any significant distance from
    the cable contacting portion of the drum's perimeter.


CLS 254/384
TXT Including hand held and operated lever with plural cable engaging means
    movably attached thereto for alternately contacting and pulling on cable:

    Apparatus under subclass 264 wherein the device includes a hand held and
    powered lever which is reciprocated about a pivot point and is provided
    with plural cable engaging means movably attached thereto and shifting
    therewith during pivoting, and further wherein each means alternately
    contacts the cable and sequentially (a) engages the cable while the other
    means releases it, (b) pulls on the cable as it is shifted in one direction
    by the lever, and (c) releases the cable when the other means engages and
    begins to pull on the cable.

    (1)     Note.  The engaging means is not directly placed into or removed
    from the operator during the above sequence.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254     and 259, for an implement or apparatus for tensioning flexible
    material or extracting stumps or poles which includes a hand held lever
    with plural engaging or clamping means movably attached thereto for
    alternately contacting and pulling on the flexible material or a cable
    attached to the flexible material, stump or pole.


CLS 254/385
TXT With rotatable, cable contacting, pulley wheel element attached to and
    reciprocated by driving component of device:

    Apparatus under subclass 264 wherein the portion of the device which
    contacts the cable includes at least one element having a generally
    circular perimeter and rotating about an axis through its center in
    response to the movement of the cable over its perimeter, the element is
    attached to a driving component of the device which reciprocates it from
    one position to another to apply a pulling force on the cable when the
    object is transported or shifted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclasses 252+ for an elevator car shifted between floors by a cable
    having a segment passing around a sheave which has its rotational axis
    reciprocatingly moved by drive means.


CLS 254/386
TXT Element reciprocated by expansible fluid motor:

    Apparatus under subclass 385 wherein the driving component of the device
    includes a telescopic, fluid powered mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93+,    for implements actuated by fluid pressure.


CLS 254/387
TXT LOAD ENGAGING MEMBER AND POWER TRANSMITTING CABLE FOR SHIFTING MEMBER
    RELATIVE TO STRUCTURE WHICH CONTACTS AND GUIDES MEMBER: Apparatus under the
    class definition provided with a member for engaging the object when a
    pushing or pulling force is applied through the member to the load, and a
    cable for transmitting force from a power source to the member to move the
    member from one position to another, and further wherein the apparatus is
    also provided with guiding structure which continuously contacts at least a
    portion of the member and restricts it to a fixed path of travel when the
    member is moved relative to the structure by the cable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses for
    mast or tower structures, per se, particularly subclasses 111+ for a
    mechanism extensible or movable shaft; and subclasses 651.05+ for
    three-dimensional openwork.


CLS 254/388
TXT MEANS SUPPORTED BY, AND MAINTAINING RELATIVE SPACING BETWEEN, LONGITUDINAL
    RUNS OF AN ENDLESS LOAD MOVING CABLE:

    Implements or apparatus under the class definition comprising means
    completely supported by an object moving, endless cable, the means
    contacting each of the longitudinally extending segments of the cable and
    maintaining the relative distance therebetween.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 41 for messenger
    cable supported electric conductors, cables, and conduits; and subclass 160
    for strand supported insulators.

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, subclasses 40+ for trolley
    line supports.

    248,    Supports, subclass 61 for pipe or cable supports suspended from an
    overhead or messenger cable.


CLS 254/389
TXT DEVICE OR MEMBER FOR CONTACTING AND GUIDING MOVING CABLE:

    Cable guides under the class definition including a device or member which
    contacts a cable moving relative to it, and (a) regulates the course of the
    cable as it moves along its path of travel, or (b) changes the direction of
    a force transmitted through the cable to the object.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is the collecting point for a guide for a
    cable when the guide and cable are components of a mechanism which is
    similar in nature to an implement or apparatus of this class, (i.e., one
    which applies a tension-or pressure-exerting, pushing, or pulling force to
    an object, and wherein the object is (a) transported by the cable, or (b)
    separable from, rather than continuously attached to, the mechanism),
    provided that no other locus for the mechanism exists and no other
    components of the mechanism are claimed.

    (2)     Note.  While the patents of this area frequently fail to claim the
    device or member in a manner whereby it is adapted, or otherwise
    restricted, to being used with an implement of this class or mechanism of a
    similar nature (see (1) Note of this subclass), such use is, nevertheless,
    the sole disclosed one.

    (3)     Note.  Devices for guiding or directing cable to a haulage drum are
    found in Class 242 when there are features peculiar to how the cable is
    wound on the surface of the drum, (e.g., traversing guides).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 246 for strand
    guides combined with strand cleaners.

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 210+ for sash-cord guides;
    subclasses 194 and 219 for sash-cord counterweights with cord guiding
    structure; and subclasses 404+ for counterweights intended to be used with
    doors or gates and having cord guiding structure.

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 115+ for cable gripping
    or holding structure when no specific cable guiding structure is claimed.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 24 for line
    guides for fishing rods.

    54,     Harness, subclass 73.

    104,    Railways, subclasses 165+ for cable guides limited to use in
    railway propulsion.

    114,    Ships, subclasses 179+ for hawse pipes; and subclass 101 for guides
    especially designed for use on spars and rigging.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 173+ for flagstaffs.

    211,    Supports: Racks, subclasses 119.01+ for arrangements of cable used
    as clotheslines.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, may include a nominal
    recitation of a supply or take-up coil (e.g., less than a support for such
    a coil or a cooperative relationship between a tension or exhaust detector
    and reel driving or reel stopping means, etc.), subclass 196.1 for a
    passive guide combined with a material feeder.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 273+ for a guide in a
    fishing reel, subclass 377 for a guide in a spring powered reel, subclasses
    397+ for a guide in a reeling device of general use, subclasses 548+ for a
    guide in a winding machine, subclass 566 for a guide in an unwinding
    machine, and subclasses 615+ for a guide for running material.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 707 for antennas
    with aircraft of the traveling type and which may include fair-lead
    structure.


CLS 254/390
TXT Including rotatable, cable contacting, pulley wheel element:

    Cable guides under subclass 389 wherein the portion of the device which
    contacts the cable includes an element having a generally circular,
    continuous perimeter and rotating about an axis, fixed relative to another
    portion of the device and passing through the center of the element, in
    response to the movement of the cable over its perimeter.

    (1)     Note.  The pulley wheel element is not intended to be driven around
    its rotational axis by any external drive source or drive train, (e.g.,
    motor, gear wheel, spring, etc.), nor is its rotational movement ever
    utilized to drive other elements of a drive train, (e.g., hand wheel and
    cable drives, sprocket and chain drives, etc.).  The force needed to rotate
    it about its axis being derived solely from its contact with the shifting
    cable and the purpose of the rotation being to reduce the frictional
    resistance of the guide to the cable's movement.

    (2)     Note.  The cable which contacts the pulley wheel element is not
    affixed or attached to the element in any manner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 331 for a vertically adjustable support
    suspended from a cord having a counter-weight attached thereto; and
    subclass 332 for a pulley bracket for guiding a cord from which a
    vertically adjustable support is suspended.


CLS 254/391
TXT With mechanism for retarding or preventing cable movement or element
    rotation:

    Cable guides under subclass 390 in which the device is provided with a
    mechanism for slowing or stopping the movement of the cable along its path
    of travel or the rotation of the element, in at least one direction, about
    its axis of rotation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 257+
    for a flexible panel having strand type operating means and position
    holding means.

    188,    Brakes, subclass 64 for brakes which operate on a strand and a
    wheel or pulley over which it runs; and subclasses 65.1+ for brakes which
    operate on a strand.


CLS 254/392
TXT With fluid, shock absorbing or tension restoring mechanism connected
    thereto:

    Cable guides under subclass 390 in which the device is provided with a
    fluid mechanism attached to the element for either (a) retarding changes in
    the position or attitude of the element resulting from variations in the
    amount of tension on the cable, or (b) restoring the element to a position
    or attitude in close proximity to its initial location or orientation
    subsequent to a change in its position or attitude as in (a) above.


CLS 254/393
TXT Plural elements or element with plural cable contacting regions:

    Cable guides under subclass 390 in which the device includes two or more
    rotatable, cable contacting elements, or a single element which has two or
    more distinct and defined, cable contacting regions.


CLS 254/394
TXT At least two of the elements having noncollinear axes of rotation:

    Cable guides under subclass 393 in which two or more of the elements have
    axes of rotation which do not form segments of the same straight line.


CLS 254/395
TXT Juxtaposed to cable at single locus:

    Cable guides under subclass 394 wherein at least two of the elements have
    their perimeters closely clustered around a single point and either (a)
    simultaneously come into contact with the same segment of cable, or (b)
    each one intermittently contacts a segment of the cable passing through the
    point.


CLS 254/396
TXT Having juxtaposed elements repositionable relative to one another:

    Cable guides under subclass 395 in which the position of one of the
    elements of the cluster may be altered.


CLS 254/397
TXT Including additional element spaced along cable path:

    Cable guides under subclass 395 in which there is at least one additional
    element located along the path of the cable for contacting the cable at
    another point.


CLS 254/398
TXT Having one element repositionable relative to another element:

    Cable guides under subclass 394 wherein the position of one of the elements
    is changeable in relationship to another element.

    (1)     Note.  The element which changes its position is useable in at
    least two of its attitudes or locations.


CLS 254/399
TXT Repositionable element supported by cable, (e.g., traveling block):

    Cable guides under subclass 398 wherein the element which changes its
    position is supported on and travels with the cable, the cable having its
    course partially determined by this element.


CLS 254/400
TXT Having axes perpendicular or skewed:

    Cable guides under subclass 394 wherein at least two of the elements have
    axes of rotation which are at a right angle or an oblique angle to each
    other.


CLS 254/401
TXT With portable block for elements and hand-manipulated means for removably
    fastening block to support base or load:

    Cable guides under subclass 393 provided with a movable housing for
    partially encasing or enclosing two or more of the elements and wherein the
    housing has hand-manipulated means located thereon to detachably fasten it
    to a supporting base, (e.g., static structure) or a load.

    (1)     Note.  The fastening means of this subclass is capable of
    relatively easy and quick detachment from the load or the supporting base
    by manual force without the assistance of tools.


CLS 254/402
TXT Having portion of block repositionable for insertion or removal of cable or
    for exposure of elements:

    Cable guides under subclass 401 wherein a component of the housing, or
    fastening means, is movable for either (a) facilitating the placement of
    the cable on, or its displacement from, one of the elements, or (b)
    exposing a region of the element's cable contacting perimeter, which region
    is otherwise concealed when the elements are in a particular rotational
    position.


CLS 254/403
TXT With guard or guide for maintaining cable on elements:

    Cable guides under subclass 401 in which the housing is provided with a
    member having the principal, and usually sole, function of holding the
    cable on, or conducting it toward or away from, at least one of the
    elements.


CLS 254/404
TXT Including antifriction means for elements: Cable guides under subclass 401
    in which the portion of the housing contacting the elements near their axes
    of rotation includes friction diminishing means, (e.g., bearings, provision
    for lubrication) for enhancing the capability of one or more of the
    elements to rotate by reducing the frictional resistance thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    184,    Lubrication, appropriate subclasses for devices employed to
    lubricate bearing parts in a machine.

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 445+ for antifriction bearings.


CLS 254/405
TXT With block for element and portion thereof repositionable for insertion or
    removal of cable or for exposure of element:

    Cable guides under subclass 390 provided with a housing for partially
    encasing or enclosing the element and wherein the housing has a component
    which is movable for either (a) enabling the placement of the cable on, or
    its displacement from, the element, or (b) exposing a region of the
    element's cable contacting perimeter, which region is otherwise concealed
    when the element is in a particular rotational position.


CLS 254/406
TXT Portion revolves about axis of rotation of element:

    Cable guides under subclass 405 in which the movable component turns around
    an axis collinear with the axis of rotation of the element.


CLS 254/407
TXT With means, or element structure, enabling object or obstruction on cable
    to bypass or travel over element:

    Cable guides under subclass 390 in which either (a) the device include
    means allowing objects attached to, or obstructions on, the cable to
    circumvent the element's cable contacting  perimeter, or (b) the element's
    perimeter is constructed to facilitate the travel of such objects or
    obstructions over it.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include elements which have a
    continuous, cable contacting perimeter with a constant cross section, and
    allow only objects which are specially constructed to conform to the
    element's cross-sectional shape to travel over them.


CLS 254/408
TXT With block for element having stationary portion adapted to coact with
    element to grip cable:

    Cable guides under subclass 390 provided with a housing for partially
    encasing or enclosing the element and wherein the housing has a portion
    which is fixed relative to the remainder of the housing and is specially
    adapted to cooperate with the element to wedge the cable therebetween when
    it is desired to retain the cable at a particular position.


CLS 254/409
TXT With portable block for element and hand manipulated means for removably
    fastening block to support or load:

    Cable guides under subclass 390 provided with a movable housing for
    partially encasing or enclosing the element and wherein the housing has
    hand-manipulated means located thereon for detachably fastening it to a
    supporting base or to a load when the element is in use.

    (1)     Note.  The fastening means of this subclass is capable of
    relatively easy and quick detachment from the load or the supporting base
    by manual force without the assistance of tools.


CLS 254/410
TXT Fastening means remotely operable or breakaway type:

    Cable guides under subclass 409 in which the fastening means has structure
    which particularly adapts it to be operated (1) by an attendant who is
    located at a distance from the means which is greater than his normal,
    unassisted reach, or (2) by a sudden change in (a) the forces acting on, or
    (b) the position of, the load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclasses 378+ for readily detachable connections for
    releasing lifeboats from handling structure.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 82.24+ for
    hooks having some special adaptation for detachment from the load.


CLS 254/411
TXT With guard or guide for maintaining cable on element:

    Cable guides under subclass 409 in which the housing is provided with a
    member having the principal, and usually sole, function of holding the
    cable on, or conducting it toward or away from, the element.


CLS 254/412
TXT Including antifriction means for element:

    Cable guides under subclass 409 in which the portion of the housing
    contacting the element near its axis of rotation includes friction
    diminishing means, (e.g., bearings, provision for lubrication) for
    enhancing the capability of the element to rotate by reducing the
    frictional resistance thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    184,    Lubrication, appropriate subclasses for devices employed to
    lubricate bearing parts in a machine.

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 455+ for antifriction bearings.


CLS 254/413
TXT With means for affixing element to support base and allowing relative
    movement therebetween:

    Cable guides under subclass 390 in which the element is joined to a
    supporting base by means which allows the element's axis of rotation to
    shift or change its attitude relative to the juncture of the base and the
    means.


CLS 254/414
TXT Including elastic member:

    Cable guides under subclass 413 wherein the means includes at least one
    elastic member exerting a force on the element, which force tends to
    maintain the element in its original location relative to the base.


CLS 254/415
TXT Including pivotal, rotational, or swivel connection:

    Cable guides under subclass 413 wherein the means includes a connection
    which allows the element's axis of rotation to be pivoted, rotated, or
    swiveled about the juncture of the base and the means.


CLS 254/416
TXT With antifriction means for element:

    Cable guides under subclass 390 in which friction diminishing means, (e.g.,
    bearings, provision for lubrications) is provided between the element and
    the structure which support it for enhancing the capability of the element
    to rotate about its axis by reducing the frictional resistance thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    184,    Lubrication, appropriate subclasses for devices employed to
    lubricate bearing parts in a machine.

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 455+ for antifriction bearings.


CLS 254/417
TXT Having cable contacting portion revolving around another component of
    device:

    Cable guides under subclass 389 wherein the portion of the device which
    contacts the cable (e.g., an endless belt, plural abutting balls or rollers
    in a race, plural interconnected arms) revolves around another component of
    the device in response to the movement of the cable over its surface.


CLS 254/418
TXT Vehicle attached jack:

    Device under the class definition wherein a vehicle lifting jack is secured
    to a vehicle as part thereof, for the purpose of lifting the vehicle, or a
    part thereof, off of the surface on which the vehicle is supported.

    (1)     Note.  For the purposes of this subclass, an attached vehicle jack
    is activated for purposes of repair to the vehicle or to position the
    vehicle relative to something else, e.g., positioning a semi-trailer
    relative to a tractor for coupling to or uncoupling from the tractor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 763.1+ for a vehicle attached retractable
    prop,  support or stand, where the purpose of the prop, support or stand is
    to stabilize the vehicle in a working position, even though the prop,
    support or stand may actually raise the vehicle wheels off of the surface
    on which the vehicle it is supported.

    293,    Vehicle Fenders, subclasses 111.1+ for the combination of a jack
    and a vehicle bumper.


CLS 254/419
TXT Semi-trailer landing gear:

    Device under subclass 418 wherein the jack supports the front end of a
    semi-trailer after the semi-trailer has been detached from the tractor.


CLS 254/420
TXT Attached to trailer tongue:

    Device under subclass 418 wherein the jack is attached to the tongue or
    draw-bar of a trailer for supporting the front end of the trailer after it
    has been detached from the towing vehicle.


CLS 254/421
TXT Turntable:

    Device under subclass 418 wherein the jack lifts the vehicle completely off
    of the vehicle supporting surface and allows the vehicle to be rotated
    about a vehicle axis.


CLS 254/422
TXT Rocking lever:

    Device under subclass 418 wherein a rigid vehicle supporting element pivots
    about a generally horizontal axis into engagement with the vehicle
    supporting surface, and then continues the pivotal movement due to the
    forward or rearward movement of the vehicle, thereby lifting the vehicle or
    part thereof off of the vehicle supporting surface.


CLS 254/423
TXT Hydraulic or pneumatic:

    Device under subclass 418 wherein the jack is actuated by means of fluid
    pressure.


CLS 254/424
TXT Screw actuated:

    Device under subclass 418 wherein the jack is actuated by the rotation of a
    screw threaded rod.


CLS 254/425
TXT Gear driven:

    Device under subclass 424 wherein the screw threaded rod is caused to
    rotate by means of a gear.


CLS 254/426
TXT Cable actuated:

    Device under subclass 418 wherein tension exerted on a cable activates the
    vehicle jack.


CLS 254/427
TXT Rack and pinion:

    Device under subclass 418 wherein the reaction caused by the interaction of
    a relatively small circular gear (pinion), and an elongate bar gear (rack),
    causes the jack to actuate.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 254/900
TXT CABLE PULLING DRUM HAVING WAVE MOTION RESPONSIVE ACTUATOR FOR OPERATING
    DRIVE OR ROTATION RETARDING MEANS:

    Apparatus for pulling on a load hauling cable including a drum either
    mounted on a floating structure or attached to a floating load, and an
    actuator responsive to the motion of the fluid on which the structure or
    load floats for either operating (a) a drive for the drum, or (b) means
    which retards the rotation of the drum.


CLS 254/901
TXT ANTIFRICTION MEANS FOR CABLE PULLING DRUM:

    Apparatus under pulling haulage cable in which friction diminishing means,
    (e.g., bearing, provision for lubrication) is provided between a cable
    pulling drum and the structure which supports it for enhancing the
    capability of the drum to rotate about its axis by reducing the frictional
    resistance thereto.


CLS 254/902
TXT EITHER DRUM, PULLEY WHEEL ELEMENT OR CABLE CONSTRUCTED FROM SPECIFIC
    MATERIAL:

    Apparatus for pulling haulage cable including either a drum, a pulley wheel
    element or a cable which is constructed from a specific material.


CLS 254/903
TXT YIELDABLE, CONSTANT ENGAGEMENT, FRICTION COUPLING, (E.G., SLIP CLUTCH) IN
    DRIVE FOR CABLE PULLING DRUM:

    Apparatus for pulling on a load hauling cable including a driven drum, the
    drive for the drum includes a coupling having at least two members which
    rotate around a common rotational axis and have a surface in constant
    contact with that of the other cooperating member, the members normally
    rotate together at the same rotational speed when transmitting power to the
    drum due to the friction created by the contact of their surfaces, however,
    if the torque on one of the members exceeds an acceptable amount, or the
    amount of force tending to push the contact surfaces of the members toward
    each other is reduced, the contact surfaces will slip relative to each
    other.


CLS 256/
TTL FENCES

CLS 256/
TXT This class includes that type of building structures commonly designated
    "fences" and characterized by a relatively low, generally openwork,
    structure adapted to serve the purposes of a barrier.

    Those fences in which a part breaks, gives way, or separates under abnormal
    conditions are classified herein with the type of fence to which the
    invention is applied.

    The term "wire" as used herein includes not only metallic but also any
    nonmetallic rope, cord, or strand.

    The term "structural" as used herein applies to any relatively rigid slat
    or bar member used as an element of a fence.

    Posts described for use in fences, but which are of more general
    application, are classified under the more general appropriate building
    structure classes.  Posts are included herein only when specially adapted
    for a fence and are classified with the type of fence to which they are
    adapted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 68+, especially 71.1, for
    line stretchers or tighteners of general utility.  Wire fences with
    stretching devices are in this class (256), subclasses 37+.  Connectors
    between parts of a fence are classified in this class (256) with the type
    of fence involved. Class 24, subclasses 305+ provides for combinations of
    two or more simple forms of fastenings not for connecting fence parts.

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, appropriate subclasses, for that
    movable portion of a fence commonly known as a "gate" and characterized by
    a normally open and closed position.  A panel, per se, of general
    application, although forming part of a gate, is classified in subclass 73
    of this class (256).

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses for
    barriers, poles and posts of more general application, particularly
    subclasses 40 for a shaft with an article support, 102 for an earth
    supported coping or edging, 103+ for a land marker or monument, 113 for a
    shaft with a spring actuated return, 153+ for a shaft with an embedded
    wing-type brace, 155+ and 166 for an earth anchor, 292+ for a footing for a
    vertical shaft, 300+ vertical structure with a cap, 415+ for a brick and
    mortar-type barrier, 633+ for openwork, e.g., lattice or grating, and
    720.1+ for elongated rigid members and see the reference to Class 256 in
    class definitions of Class 52.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for joints of
    general utility.  Connectors between parts of a fence are classified in
    this class (256) with the type fence involved.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 6+, for a traffic
    guide or barrier structure and subclasses 9+, for a traffic director
    structure.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, appropriate subclasses for
    earthwork barriers, especially subclasses 30+ for openwork wave or flow
    dissipating barriers.  Fence structure, per se, of earthwork is classified
    in this class (256), subclass 19.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 544+ for stock
    materials, e.g., of indefinite length, which are all metal or have adjacent
    metal components.  See the notes in sections VI, C, 2, a and VI, C, 2, b of
    the main Class Definition of Class 428.


CLS 256/1
TXT Fence constructions under the class definition and accessories peculiar
    thereto not specifically provided for elsewhere.


CLS 256/2
TXT Fences under the class definition provided with spurs, points, or barbs so
    arranged as to discourage the violent passage of animals through them.


CLS 256/3
TXT Barbed fences under subclass 2 having guards to protect animals from injury.


CLS 256/4
TXT Devices under subclass 3 comprising members serving as a warning of the
    presence of barbs.


CLS 256/5
TXT Devices under subclass 2 comprising openwork or meshed stock, whether
    formed of relatively rigid slats or bars or of wire combined with rigid
    slats or bars.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    245,    Wire Fabrics and Structure, subclasses 2+, for wire fabrics not
    provided with barbs.


CLS 256/6
TXT Devices under subclass 2 relating to the structure of the strands.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for top guard rails, although provided with barbs.


CLS 256/7
TXT Fence strands under subclass 6 in which a barb is capable of attachment to
    a single strand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for barbs specialized for attachment to strands made up of two or
    more wires.


CLS 256/8
TXT Single fence strands under subclass 7 in which the barbs are integral.


CLS 256/9
TXT Devices under subclass 6 made up of sections or links joined end-to-end.


CLS 256/10
TXT Fences under the class definition having one or more parts charged with
    electricity, whereby shock will be imparted to an animal coming into
    contact therewith.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclass 35, for
    safes, etc., with an electrically charged surface.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, particularly subclass 721 for an electromagnetic
    remote control for confining an animal to a predetermined territorial
    location.  The remote control feature may include a buried wire or above
    ground fencelike structure but does not limit the travel of the animal by
    direct electrical contact therewith.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, appropriate subclasses,
    for electric conductors and their supports of general utility.


CLS 256/11
TXT Fences under the class definition having special provision to prevent or
    hinder creatures from traveling or remaining upon the top of the fence.


CLS 256/12
TXT Fences under subclass 11 wherein the top guard has an unstable or movable
    portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for steeplechase fences provided with yielding means upon the top
    rail.

    16,     for track guards having movable means.


CLS 256/12.5
TXT Barriers under the class definition designed to regulate wind and air
    currents so that driftage of snow or sand will be controlled.

    (1)     Note.  These barriers usually act either (1) to so direct wind or
    air currents to cause the same to pick up and remove snow or sand from
    places it is desired to keep clear thereof, or (2) to cause wind or air
    currents to drop sand or snow carried thereby to avoid the same
    accumulating at places it is desired to keep clear, thereof, for example,
    railways or roadways.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclasses 279+, for miscellaneous railway track clearing
    or cleaning means.

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclasses 87+, for portable
    shelters used as a snow or wind screen.


CLS 256/13
TXT Devices under the class definition for use on shores or in stream beds
    designed to prevent animals from passing, but providing for the more or
    less free passage of the water and bodies held in suspension therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 10+ for closures which
    move under the influence of a swollen stream.


CLS 256/13.1
TXT Devices under the class definition in the nature of barriers, railings, or
    fences, both rigid and yielding, along road sides, and sufficiently strong
    to resist automobile impact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for similar barriers forming complete fences.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclass 219, for similar devices applied to sides of ships.

    238,    Railways:  Surface Track, subclass 10, for similar structure in
    nature of portable track.

    248,    Supports, subclass 66, for brackets, for securing a road guard
    cable to its post.


CLS 256/14
TXT Device under the class definition for use upon railroads designed to
    prevent animals from passing along the tracks and incapable of use as a
    gate to permit the passage of the animal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 131+ for a closure which
    moves to an inoperative position flush with the ground, such as a railroad
    track, to permit a train to ride over it.


CLS 256/15
TXT Track guards under subclass 14 that consist of a pivoted member or a series
    of them adapted to rock under pressure.


CLS 256/16
TXT Track guards under subclass 14 embodying a series of rotary members.


CLS 256/17
TXT Track guards under subclass 14 embodying a series of bars spaced apart to
    form a grating.


CLS 256/18
TXT Devices under subclass 17 comprising bars provided with a series of prongs
    more or less sharp.


CLS 256/19
TXT Fences under the class definition, made wholly or partly of such materials
    as earth, stone, plastics, or wood where the material of which they are
    made, as well as the form of the fence, is of consequence.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13.1,   for similar devices for highway guards.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses for
    masonary walls of more general application, particularly subclasses 300+
    for vertical structures with a cap or terminal bearing plate.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, appropriate subclasses for
    specialized earthwork barriers (i.e., jetty, dam, levee, etc.).


CLS 256/20
TXT Fences under the class definition formed of growing plants used alone or in
    connection with wire to form the fence.


CLS 256/21
TXT Fences under the class definition made wholly or mostly of metal other than
    wire where the material is of consequence or where the shape of parts is
    such as to preclude their being made of other material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47+     and 65+, for joints between fence members.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 660+ for fabric or
    lattice openwork, e.g., grating, of more general application.


CLS 256/22
TXT Fences under subclass 21 composed of longitudinal rails and upright members
    where the upright members serve to increase the effectiveness of the fence
    as a barrier and not merely to strengthen, brace, or space apart the rails.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for woven, strand fences.


CLS 256/23
TXT Fences under the class definition having portions hung or suspended between
    posts or from rails or strands running from post to post.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 10+ for similar devices
    used on shores or stream beds.


CLS 256/24
TXT Fences under the class definition made up of panels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for sections hung or suspended.

    73,     for fence panels, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 455+, for clasps.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses for an
    in situ erected building structure of more general application,
    particularly subclasses 474+ for a facer (panel) held by a frame or shaft.


CLS 256/25
TXT Devices under subclass 24 relating to enclosed structures, generally in the
    nature of a pen for children, adapted to be folded and stored away.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 93.1+, for crib-type beds and for play-pens having
    a bottom wall even if the bottom and side members are not connected.  The
    bottom may be a fabric and may rest directly on the floor.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 20, for animal pens.

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclasses 87+ for portable
    shelters.

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclasses 92+ for an enclosure for
    an athletic or exhibition event, e.g., for arena, track, court, playing
    field, etc.


CLS 256/26
TXT Devices under subclass 24 hingedly connected so that adjacent panel units
    are capable of lying in the same or intersecting planes.


CLS 256/27
TXT Panel fences under subclass 24 in which two adjacent panels are capable of
    attachment so as to stand in intersecting planes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for similar structure forming enclosures.


CLS 256/28
TXT Fences under subclass 27 wherein the panels are tied together by a wire
    running the length of several panels, the panel ends are bolted or wired
    together, or a separate element is used to lock or tie adjacent panels
    together.


CLS 256/29
TXT Fences under subclass 24 wherein the panels extend in the same general
    direction (right line) and are tied together by a wire running the length
    of a plurality of panels, when the panel ends are bolted or wired together,
    or where a separate element is used to lock or tie adjacent panels together.


CLS 256/30
TXT Devices under subclass 29 wherein the panels or fence as a whole are braced
    in addition or wherein the panels or fence are tied and braced by the same
    means.


CLS 256/31
TXT Devices under subclass 24 comprising combinations of panels with braced
    posts or separate brace members and braced posts or like parts particularly
    adapted to receive the support fence panels.


CLS 256/32
TXT Fences under the class definition made wholly or partially of wire and
    elements and combinations of elements used as parts of wire fences not
    otherwise provided for and characterized by the presence of strands of wire
    connected to the spanning post members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for spanning strands supporting panel members.

    24,     for panels made wholly or partially of wire.

    73,     for fence panels, and see the search note therewith.


CLS 256/33
TXT Fences under subclass 32 composed entirely of wire.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclasses 44+, for plant supports.


CLS 256/34
TXT Fences under subclass 32 composed of woven longitudinal strands and upright
    members where the upright members serve to increase the effectiveness of
    the fence as a barrier and not merely to strengthen, brace, or space apart
    the strands.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for fences composed of rails and uprights.

    35,     for braces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    245,    Wire Fabrics and Structure, subclass 11, for slat and wire fabrics.


CLS 256/35
TXT Devices under subclass 32 particularly adapted for the bracing of wire
    fences. Braced posts, and braces or stays generally to strengthen,
    reinforce, or space apart the strands of a wire fence.  Combinations of a
    plurality of fence posts with brace members connecting so as to brace each
    other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for fences composed of rails and uprights.

    34,     for fences composed of woven strands and uprights.


CLS 256/36
TXT Wire fences under subclass 35 wherein the strands are provided with a
    diagonal bracing member or some of the strands are deflected from their
    true horizontal course to brace the fence after the manner of a truss.


CLS 256/37
TXT Devices under subclass 32 with stretching devices which form permanent
    parts of the fence, and are provided with details particularly adapting
    them for use in a fence.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 71.1+, for tighteners
    intermediate the ends of a line or wire.

    84,     Music, subclasses 200, for tuning devices, and 304, for tuning pegs.

    140,    Wireworking, subclass 123.5, for wire tighteners.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 199+ for a portable implement or apparatus for tensioning
    flexible material (e.g., fence wire from which the implement or apparatus
    is detached when moved).


CLS 256/38
TXT Devices under subclass 37 including a suspended weight.


CLS 256/39
TXT Devices under subclass 37 that employ the power of a spring to accomplish
    the stretching.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    54,     Harness, subclass 48, for elastic stirrups.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 69+, for elastic extension devices.


CLS 256/40
TXT Devices under subclass 37 employing a member upon which the wire is wound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 213+ for a portable, rotatably driven drum for tensioning a
    flexible material, the drum engages and pulls on either the material or a
    cable attached to the material.


CLS 256/41
TXT Devices under subclass 40 having winding elements for a plurality of
    strands and pluralities of winding elements operating upon individual
    strands, but mounted upon a common spindle.


CLS 256/42
TXT Devices under subclass 40 carried by brackets secured to or bearing against
    the post.


CLS 256/43
TXT Devices under subclass 40 mounted within the post.


CLS 256/44
TXT Devices under subclass 40 mounted upon the post and project laterally
    therefrom.


CLS 256/45
TXT Devices under subclass 32 consisting of fabrics formed wholly or partially
    of wire wherein the stays and strands are held together by separate ties,
    such as wires, lock rods, or clips.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 848+ for an endless belt
    conveyor formed of wire fabric.

    245,    Wire Fabrics and Structure, for woven all wire or slat-and-wire
    fabric.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 384+ for connections, between
    individual rods joined side-to-side.


CLS 256/46
TXT Devices under subclass 32 including circular section and ribbon strands
    peculiar to fences.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6+,     for barbed strand structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses for a
    masonry construction of general application.

    211,    Supports: Racks, subclasses 119.01+, for clothesline supports.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 544+ for stock
    materials, e.g., of indefinite length, which are all metal or have adjacent
    metal components.  See the notes in section VI, C, 2, a and VI, C, 2, b of
    the main Class Definition of Class 428.


CLS 256/47
TXT Subject matter under subclass 32 relating to connections peculiarly adapted
    to attach a strand of the fence to a post, pole, stay, or like upright
    having a structural shape.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 335+ for combinations of
    two or more simple forms of fastenings for connecting other than fence
    parts.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 49+ is the general locus for supports for
    cables, particularly subclass 66, for brackets for securing a road guard
    cable to its post.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 384+ for rods joined
    side-to-side.


CLS 256/48
TXT Devices under subclass 47 wherein the strand crosses a structural upright.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65+,    for connections between a rail and structural upright.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclasses 44+, for plant supports.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 154+ and 168+,
    for conductor holders.

    248,    Supports, subclass 353, for clothesline props.


CLS 256/49
TXT Devices under subclass 48 wherein the strand is stapled or otherwise
    attached to a facing strip which is secured to or embedded in a structural
    upright.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65,     for a rail attached to a facing strip on the upright.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses for a
    structure of more general application, particularly subclasses 364+ for a
    ground member serving as a penetrating fastener receiver, and subclasses
    698+ for an anchor or tie.


CLS 256/50
TXT Devices under subclass 48 which require that the upright shall be made of
    some plastic material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for facing strips upon a plastic post to which the strand is
    attached.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 698+ for a building
    component anchor or tie which is generally assembled with other components
    as the structure is erected, e.g., anchors set in concrete before hardening.


CLS 256/51
TXT Subject matter under subclass 50, the plastic post having a reinforcing
    element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses for a
    structure or building component of more general classification,
    particularly subclasses 633+ for openwork and 721.1+ for elongated rigid
    members which in use may be embedded in concrete.


CLS 256/52
TXT Subject matter under subclass 48 relating to a plurality of crossing wires
    to a structural upright by a single member extending longitudinally of the
    upright.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for single members imbedded or otherwise longitudinally secured to
    a post to which a series of wires are stapled or similarly attached.


CLS 256/53
TXT Devices under subclass 48 where the wire is held in a plurality of slots,
    which slots or their mouths are out of alinement, so that it is necessary
    to bend a portion of the strand to cause it to enter the slots.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for separate members attached to uprights to receive the wire in a
    curved or obliquely formed slot therein or between oppositely directed
    hooks formed thereon.

    58,     for obliquely formed slots in the upright or oppositely directed
    hooks struck from the material of the upright in which the wire is held.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 174+, for
    analogous insulator structure.


CLS 256/54
TXT Devices under subclass 48 comprising clamps.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for rail clamps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 154+, for
    insulator and conductor holders; 169+, for terminal-type conductor-holding
    means and 172+, for insulator-holding means.


CLS 256/55
TXT Connections under subclass 54 in which a screw is an essential element of
    the clamp.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for similar structure in rail fences.


CLS 256/56
TXT Connections under subclass 54 in which a wedge is an essential element of
    the clamp.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for similar structure in rail fences.


CLS 256/57
TXT Connections under subclass 48 in which the strand is tied to the structural
    shaped upright by means of a flexible member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for similar structure in rail fences.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclasses 44+, for plant supports.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 173, for wires
    tied to an insulator.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 384+ for rods joined
    side-to-side.


CLS 256/58
TXT Connections under subclass 48 which are made without the employment of
    connecting means other than the wire and upright.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for a wire crossing an upright.

    53,     for wires bent to enter misaligned slots.


CLS 256/59
TXT Fences under the class definition composed of structural uprights and
    individual structural runner members or rails either permanently or
    removably attached to the uprights or posts in the erection of the fence.
    Posts particularly adapted for the reception of rails are classified in
    subclasses hereunder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for strictly tight board fences.


CLS 256/60
TXT Devices under subclass 59 having two adjacent sections standing in
    intersecting planes.


CLS 256/61
TXT Angle rail fences under subclass 60 supported by a wire running the length
    of several sections or where the rails are tied to the post or to each
    other by wire or other separate element.


CLS 256/62
TXT Rail fences under subclass 59 provided with a tie wire running the length
    of the fence sections or having the rails tied to the posts or to each
    other or wherein a separate member is used to lock the sections of the
    fence together.


CLS 256/63
TXT Devices under subclass 62 which are braced in addition or tied and braced
    by the same means.


CLS 256/64
TXT Rail fences under subclass 59 comprising combinations of rails or runners
    with braced posts or like parts and braced posts or like parts specially
    formed to receive and support rails or runners.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     for bracing of one line post of a fence by another.


CLS 256/65
TXT Subject matter under subclass 59 relating to the connections between the
    rail and a post, pole, stay, or like structural upright.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 336+ for combinations of
    two or more simple forms of fastenings for connecting other than fence
    parts.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for joints and
    connections in general.


CLS 256/66
TXT Devices under subclass 65 between the rail and the upright which require
    that the upright be made of some plastic material at the point of
    connection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     for similar structure in wire fence connections.


CLS 256/67
TXT Devices under subclass 65 in which the angles between the rail and the
    upright may be varied.


CLS 256/68
TXT Devices under subclass 65 wherein the rail is clamped to the upright.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for similar structure in wire fences.


CLS 256/69
TXT Devices under subclass 68 in which the clamp is characterized by a screw.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for similar structure in wire fences.


CLS 256/70
TXT Devices under subclass 68 in which the clamp is characterized by a wedge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for similar structure in wire fences.


CLS 256/71
TXT Devices under subclass 65 in which the connection is a flexible tying
    member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for similar structure in wire fences.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 384+ for rods joined
    side-to-side.


CLS 256/72
TXT Devices under subclass 65 comprising direct connections between the rail
    and upright--e.g., having  no connecting  means other than the rail and
    upright.


CLS 256/73
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising unitary fence or gate
    structures including panels, per se, of general application adapted to
    extend between two adjacent supports and comprising generally vertical and
    horizontal members.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, appropriate
    subclasses, for fence or gate panels of flexible material, and fence or
    gate panels formed of plural strips, slats or panels interconnected with
    one another for relative motion.


CLS 257/
TTL ACTIVE SOLID-STATE DEVICES (E.G.,TRANSISTORS, SOLID-STATE DIODES)

CLS 257/
TXT
    I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF THE CLASS
            SUBJECT MATTER

            This class provides for active solid-state electronic devices, that
    is, electronic devices or components that are made up primarily of solid
    materials, usually semiconductors, which operate by the movement of charge
    carriers - electrons or holes - which undergo energy level changes within
    the material and can modify an input voltage to achieve rectification,
    amplification, or switching action, and are not classified elsewhere.

    II.     SCOPE OF THE CLASS

    Active solid-state electronic devices include diodes, transistors,
    thyristors, etc., but exclude pure resistors, capacitors, inductors, or
    combinations solely thereof. The latter class of devices is characterized
    as passive.

    The subject matter to be found here includes only active solid-state
    devices, per se.  It may include one or more such devices combined with
    contacts or leads, or structures configured to be tested on a semiconductor
    chip, or merely semiconductor material without contacts or leads where the
    sole disclosed use is an active solid-state device.  This subject matter
    does not include active solid-state devices combined with significant
    circuits.

    Claims reciting an integrated circuit nominally with significant
    metallization will be classified in Class 257, whereas otherwise, nominal
    recitation of an integrated circuit (i.e., without significant active
    solid-state device recitation) will not be sufficient to permit the device
    to be classified in Class 257.

     III.   GLOSSARY

    ACCEPTOR IMPURITY

    An atom or ion different from or foreign to, but present in, a
    semiconductor material and which has insufficient valence electrons to
    complete the normal bonding arrangement in the semiconductor crystal
    structure.  An  acceptor impurity accepts an electron from an adjacent atom
    to create a hole.  Acceptor impurities are also referred to as p-type
    impurities.  Common acceptor impurities in silicon or germanium are boron,
    gallium, and indium.

    ACTINIDES
    Ac, Th, Pa, U, Np, Pu, Am, Cm, Bk, Cf, E, Fm, Mv, No, Lw.

    ALKALI METALS
    Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs, Fr.

    ALKALINE-EARTH METALS
    Ca, Sr, Ba, Ra.

    ACTIVE solid-state ELECTRONIC DEVICE
    An electronic device or  component that is made up primarily of solid
    materials, usually semiconductors, which operates by the movement of charge
    carriers -  electrons or holes - which undergo energy level changes within
    the material and can modify an input voltage to achieve rectification,
    amplification, or switching action.  Active solid-state electronic devices
    include diodes, transistors, thyristors, etc., but exclude pure resistors,
    capacitors, inductors, or combinations solely thereof.  The latter class of
    devices is characterized as passive.

    ALLOY JUNCTION
    A fused  junction produced by combining one or more elemental impurity
    metals with a semiconductor.  Typical alloyed junctions include indium-
    germanium and aluminum-silicon.

    ALLOY TRANSISTOR
    A transistor in which the emitter-base and collector-base junctions are
    alloy junctions.

    AVALANCHE  BREAKDOWN
    A sudden change from high dynamic electrical resistance to very low dynamic
    resistance in a reverse biased semiconductor device, e.g., a  reverse
    biased junction between p-type and n-type semiconductor materials, wherein
    current carriers are created by electrons or  holes which have gained
    sufficient speed to dislodge valence electrons.  Avalanche breakdown can
    cause structural damage to a semiconductor device.

    AXIAL LEAD
    A wire lead coming from the end of and along the axis of a resistor,
    capacitor, or other component.

    BACK BONDED
    The bonding of active chips to a  substrate using the back of the chip
    opposite the side containing active solid-state devices.

    BALL BOND
    A bond formed by a round, ball-shaped lead on a semiconductor device.

    BALLISTIC TRANSPORT DEVICE
    An active solid-state electronic device in which an active layer is present
    through which carriers* pass, wherein the active layer is thinner than the
    mean free path of the carriers* in the material in that layer, so that
    carriers* can pass through the layer without scattering.  Carriers* are
    typically injected into the ballistic transport layer as "hot" carriers*,
    having an energy, in the case of electrons, substantially greater than the
    minimum of the conduction band*, or in the case of holes, substantially
    lower than the maximum of the valence band.  Ballistic electron injectors
    include heterojunctions, tunnel barriers, and punchthrough (e.g., planar
    doped or camel) barriers.

    BAND GAP
    The difference between the energy levels of electrons bound to their nuclei
    (valence  electrons) and the energy levels that allow electrons to migrate
    freely (conduction electrons).  The band gap depends on the particular
    semiconductor involved.

    BARRIER REGION OR LAYER
    A region which extends on both sides of a  semiconductor junction in which
    all carriers are swept away from the  junction region.  The region is
    depleted of carriers.  This is also referred to as a depletion region.

    BARRITT DIODE
    Barrier injection transit time diode.  A bipolar or device in which a type
    of breakdown known as punchthrough occurs  and  wherein  the  punchthrough
    structure device is operable at microwave frequencies.  In bipolar
    transistors a direct current path is formed from emitter to collector due
    to the formation of a depletion region throughout the base region and
    charge carriers from the emitter punch through to the collector.  Carriers
    flowing from the emitter to the collector take a controlled time to pass
    through the depletion layer, leading to a controlled delay in current after
    a voltage is applied, and effective negative impedance.

    BASE REGION
    The region between the emitter and collector of a bipolar transistor into
    which minority carriers are injected by the emitter.

    BASE CURRENT
    The electrical current that flows in the base terminal of a bipolar
    transistor.

    BEAM LEADS
    Flat, metallic leads which extend beyond the edges of a chip component like
    wooden beams extend from a roof overhang.  Beam leads are used to
    interconnect a component to film circuitry.

    BIAS
    A direct current or voltage applied to an  active solid-state device that
    establishes certain operating characteristics of the device.

    BI-FET
    An active solid-state electronic device that contains both bipolar and
    field effect transistors.

    BILATERAL
    A characteristic of an active solid-state electronic device that permits it
    to support current flow in opposite directions.

    BINARY COMPOUND
    A substance that always contains the same two elements in a fixed atomic
    ratio.

    BIPOLAR
    An active solid-state electronic device in which both positive and negative
    current carriers are used to support current flow.

    BIPOLAR TRANSISTOR
    An active solid-state electronic device with a base electrode and two or
    more junction electrodes in which both  positive and negative current
    carriers are used to support current flow.

    BLOCH WAVELENGTH
    The effective wavelength of electrons in a semiconductor crystal, sometimes
    referred to as a wave packet or wave function.  It can be an order of
    magnitude larger than the de broglie wavelength of electrons having the
    same energy.

    BONDING AREA
    The area, defined by the extent of a metallization land or the top surface
    of a terminal, to which a  lead is or is to be bonded.

    BONDING PAD
    A metallized area to which an electrical connection is to be made.  It is
    also called a bonding island or a controlled collapse chip connection.

    BONDING WIRE
    Fine wire for making electrical connections in hybrid circuits between
    various  bonding pads on the semiconductor device substrate and device
    terminals or substrate lands.

    BREAKDOWN
    A sudden change from high dynamic electrical resistance to a very low
    dynamic resistance in a reverse biased semiconductor device, e.g., a
    reverse biased junction between p-type and n-type semiconductor materials,
    wherein reverse current increases rapidly for a small increase in reverse
    applied voltage, and the device behaves as if it had negative electrical
    resistance.

    BREAKDOWN POINT/VOLTAGE
    The voltage value at which breakdown occurs.

    BREAKOVER
    The start of current flow in a silicon controlled rectifier.

    BUCKET BRIGADE DEVICE
    A charge transfer device in which only a portion of the charge carriers
    (electrons or holes) at each storage site are  transferred to the next
    storage site.

    BUMP CONTACT
    A term used to describe, typically, solder bumps on a chip or substrate
    which are found on only one side of the chip or substrate as, for example,
    on a flip-chip.

    BULK-CHANNEL CCD
    A charge coupled device in which charge is stored and transferred below the
    surface of the device.

    BULK-EFFECT DEVICE
    An active solid-state device made up of a semiconductor material whose
    electrical characteristics and electronic properties are exhibited
    throughout the entire body of the material, rather than in just a localized
    region thereof, e.g., the surface.

    BURIED CHANNEL CCD
    See BULK-CHANNEL CCD.

    CB JUNCTION
    The collector-base junction of a  bipolar transistor.

    CAPACITOR
    A component used in electrical and electronic circuits which stores a
    charge of electricity, usually for very brief periods of time, with the
    ability to rapidly charge and discharge.  A capacitor is usually considered
    a passive component since it does not rectify, amplify, or switch and
    because charge carriers do not undergo energy level changes therein,
    although some active solid-state devices function as voltage variable
    capacitors.

    CARRIER
    A mobile free electron or hole.

    CARRIER CONCENTRATION
    The number of electrical charge carriers in a given volume, usually a cubic
    centimeter, of semiconductor material.

    CELL
    An individual integrated circuit element located on a large, or master chip
    of, semiconductor material.

    CHANNEL
    A path for conducting current between a source and drain of a field effect
    transistor.

    CHANNEL LENGTH EFFECTS
    Operating characteristics of FETs which depend on the length (distance
    between  source and drain) of the channel regions.  Such effects include
    switching speed change and threshold voltage change with channel length
    change.

    CHANNEL WIDTH EFFECTS
    Operating characteristics of FETs which depend on the width (horizontal
    distance perpendicular to channel length and parallel to upper surface of
    device) of the channel.  Such effects include conductance and threshold
    voltage change with channel width change.

    CHANNEL STOP
    Means for limiting channel formation in a semiconductor device by
    surrounding the affected area with a ring of highly doped, low resistivity
    semiconductor material.  In a field effect transistor, it is a region of
    highly doped material of the same type as the lightly doped substrate used
    to prevent leakage paths along the chip surface from developing.  Also
    referred to as  "chanstop."

    CHANNEL PINCH-OFF REGION
    The location in a current channel portion of a field effect transistor
    (FET) where the current is reduced to a minimum value due to its diameter
    being reduced to a minimum.

    CHARACTERISTIC CURVE
    A graph showing the relationship between two or more changing parameters,
    e.g., current and voltage of an electronic device.

    CHARGE CARRIER
    A mobile conduction electron or hole in a  semiconductor.

    CHARGE CONFINEMENT
    Restriction of electrical charge carriers, e.g., electrons or holes, to
    specified locations, e.g., by quantum wells, gate electrode potentials, etc.

    CHARGE-COUPLED DEVICE
    A charge transfer device in which all carriers (electrons or holes) are
    transferred from one storage site to the next upon application of a
    shifting voltage.

    CHARGE INJECTION DEVICE
    A field effect device in which storage sites for packets of electric charge
    are induced at or below the surface of an active solid-state device by an
    electric field applied to the device and wherein carrier potential energy
    per unit charge minima are established at a given storage site and such
    charge packets are injected into the device substrate or into a data bus.
    This type device differs from a charge transfer device in that, in the
    latter, charge is transferred to adjacent charge storage sites in a serial
    manner, whereas, in a charge injection device, the charge is injected in a
    non-serial manner to the device substrate or to a data bus.

    CHARGE TRANSFER DEVICE
    A semiconductor device in which discrete packets of electrical charge are
    transferred from one location to another.  Examples of charge transfer
    devices include charge-coupled devices (CCDs) and bucket-brigade devices
    (BBDs).

    CHIP
    A single crystal substrate of semiconductor material on which one or more
    active or passive solid-state electronic devices are formed.  A chip may
    contain an integrated circuit.  A chip is not normally ready for use until
    packaged and provided with external connectors.

    CHIP CARRIER
    A package with terminals, for  solid-state electronic devices, including
    chips which facilitates handling of the chip during assembly of the chip to
    other electronic elements.

    CHIP COMPONENT
    A circuit element (active or  passive) for use in microelectronics.
    Besides integrated circuits, the term includes diodes, transistors,
    resistors, and capacitors.

    CIRCUIT
    A number of devices interconnected in a one or more closed paths to perform
    a desired electrical or electronic function.

    CLADDING BARRIER
    A higher band gap material which encases a lower band gap material that
    defines the walls of a quantum well.

    CMOS
    See COMPLEMENTARY METAL OXIDE SEMICONDUCTOR.

    COHERENCE LENGTH
    The typical distance an  electron can travel before it is scattered (e.g.,
    by a phonon, a defect, or an  impurity).

    COHERER
    A term which encompasses both active and passive type devices, the passive
    type being a resistor whose resistance decreases when subjected to a high
    frequency signal, and the active type being a rectifier which is made up of
    active solid-state particles which conduct and rectify current when
    connected into a cohesive element but which loses that characteristic when
    the particles are separated (e.g., by shaking a container in which the
    particles are located).

    COLLECTOR
    That end region of a bipolar transistor which forms one of the main current
    regions and which is reverse biased in operation with respect to the base
    region.

    COLLECTOR CURRENT
    The current which flows through the terminal of the collector region of a
    bipolar transistor.

    COLLECTOR DIFFUSION ISOLATION (CDI)
    An electrical isolation technology used for bipolar  devices which employs
    an epitaxial layer, which forms transistor base regions, laid on a
    substrate of the same conductivity type (p or n) as the epitaxial layer,
    with an opposite conductivity type region, more heavily doped than the
    epitaxial base layer and located between the layer and the substrate,
    forming the collector and isolating the transistor from the substrate.

    COMMON-BASE CONFIGURATION
    A bipolar transistor in which the base region is common to both the input
    and output circuit.  This is also known as a grounded-base bipolar
    transistor circuit.

    COMMON-COLLECTOR CONFIGURATION
    A bipolar transistor in which the collector region is common to both the
    input and output circuit.  It is also known as an emitter-follower bipolar
    transistor  circuit.

    COMMON-DRAIN CONFIGURATION
    A unipolar transistor in which the drain region is common to both the input
    and output circuit.

    COMMON-EMITTER CONFIGURATION
    A bipolar transistor in which the emitter region is common to both the
    input and output circuit.  It is also known as a grounded-emitter bipolar
    transistor circuit.

    COMMON- or GATE-CONFIGURATION
    A unipolar transistor in which the gate region is common to both input and
    output circuits.

    COMPLEMENTARY METAL OXIDE SEMICONDUCTOR (CMOS)
    Both n-type and p-type  metal oxide semiconductor devices, e.g.,
    transistors, formed on the same substrate.

    COMPONENT
    An electronic device - active or  passive - which has distinct electrical
    characteristics and has terminals for connection to other components to
    form a circuit.

    COMPOUND
    A homogeneous material which has definite proportions of chemically
    combined atoms or ions.

    CONCENTRATION GRADIENT
    A difference in dopant concentration (p- or n-type) from one position to
    another in a semiconductor.

    CONDUCTION BAND
    A partially filled energy band in which electrons can move freely,
    permitting a material to carry electric current where electrons are the
    current carriers.

    CONDUCTION  ELECTRONS
    In a conductor or  n-type semiconductor, outer shell electrons that are
    bound so loosely that they can move freely in the conduction band of a
    solid material under the influence of an electric field.

    CONDUCTIVITY
    The ability of a material to conduct electric current.  Its converse is
    resistivity.

    CONDUCTOR
    A material which offers comparatively little resistance to the flow of
    current.

    CONDUCTOR SPACING
    The distance between adjacent edges (not centerline to centerline) of
    isolated conductive patterns in a conductor layer.

    CONNECTOR AREA
    That portion of metallized conductors used for providing external
    electrical connections from a component to a chip or other component.

    CONTACT
    The parts of a conductor designed to touch or be touched by other such
    parts of an electrical conductor to carry current to or from the conductor.

    CONTACT WINDOW
    An opening in an insulating layer to expose an underlying conductor to
    permit electrical contact thereto.  It is also called a  via hole.

    COVALENT BONDING
    The sharing of electrons by atoms in which each atom contributes one of a
    pair of electrons shared by another atom and forming a bond between those
    two atoms.

    CRYOSAR
    An active solid-state device which operates at cryogenic temperatures,
    i.e., at temperatures at or below 77 degrees Kelvin, by  avalanche
    breakdown caused by impact ionization of device  impurities.

    CRYSTAL
    A solid substance whose atoms are arranged with periodic geometric
    regularity, called a lattice.

    CRYSTAL DEFECT
    Any nonuniformity in a  crystal lattice.  There are four categories of
    crystal defects: (1) point defects, (2) line defects, (3) area defects, and
    (4) volume defects.  Point defects include any foreign atom at a regular
    lattice site (substitutional site) or between lattice sites (interstitial
    site), anti-site defects in compound semiconductors, e.g., Ga in As or As
    in Ga, missing lattice atoms, and host atoms located between lattice sites
    and adjacent to a vacant site (Frenkel defects).  Line defects, also called
    edge dislocations, include extra planes of atoms in a lattice.  Area
    defects include twins or twinning (a change in crystal orientation across a
    lattice) and grain boundaries (a transition between crystals having no
    particular positional orientation to one another.  Volume defects include
    precipitates of impurity or dopant atoms caused by volume mismatch between
    a host lattice and precipitates.

    CUTOFF
    A minimum value of voltage or current applied to an active device which
    stops the device from operating in a particular manner.

    DE BROGLIE WAVELENGTH
    The wavelength of a particle, based on L.V. de Broglie's theory that
    particles exhibit wavelike characteristics.

    DEEP DEPLETION
    The condition in which a  depletion layer  formed in a MOS active device
    due to voltage applied to the gate electrode of the device, is deeper than
    the maximum depth at which inversion would normally be expected to occur at
    room temperature in a semiconductor device at the surface closest to the
    gate electrode, without formation of an inversion layer.

    DEEP GROOVE ISOLATION
    Electrical isolation of adjacent devices in a single monolithic
    semiconductor chip by grooves extending deeply into and below the surface
    of the chip between the  devices.

    DEEP-LEVEL CENTERS
    Energy levels that can act as traps located in the forbidden band of a
    semiconductor material that are not near the conduction or valence band
    edges.

    DEGENERATION
    Doping of a  semiconductor  to such an extent that the Fermi level lies
    within the conduction band (N+ semiconductor) or within the valence band
    (P+ semiconductor).  Also, in circuit applications, negative feedback
    between two or more active solid-state devices.

    DEPLETION LAYER
    See DEPLETION REGION.

    DEPLETION MODE
    The operation of a field-effect transistor having appreciable channel
    conductivity for zero gate- source voltage and whose channel conductivity
    may be increased or decreased according to the polarity of the applied
    gate-source voltage, by changing the gate-to-source voltage from zero to a
    finite value, resulting in a decrease in the magnitude of the drain current.

    DEPLETION REGION
    The region extending on both sides of a reverse biased semiconductor
    junction in which free carriers are removed from the vicinity of the
    junction.  It is also called a space charge region, a barrier region, or an
    intrinsic semiconductor region.

    DEVICE (ACTIVE)
    The physical realization of an individual electrical element in a
    physically independent body which cannot be further divided without
    destroying its stated function.  Examples are transistors, pnpn structures,
    and  tunnel diodes.

    DIE
    A tiny piece of semiconductor material, separated from a semiconductor
    slice, on which one or more active electronic components are formed.
    Sometimes called a chip.

    DIE BOND
    Attachment of a semiconductor chip to a  substrate or chip carrier or
    package, usually with an epoxy, eutectic, or solder alloy.

    DIFFUSED JUNCTION
    A junction between two different conductivity regions within a
    semiconductor and which is formed by diffusion of appropriate  impurity
    atoms into the material.

    DIFFUSED TRANSISTOR
    A transistor in which the emitter and collector junctions are formed by
    diffusion of dopant atoms into the semiconductor material.

    DIFFUSION
    (1) The movement of carriers from a region of concentration to one of lower
    concentration; (2) a process of adding impurities to a semiconductor
    material to change its electrical characteristics.

    DIFFUSION BARRIER
    An obstacle to the diffusion of charge carriers in an active solid-state
    device.


    DIFFUSION CURRENT
    Current caused by  charge carriers diffusing from a volume of high carrier
    concentration to a volume of lower carrier concentration in a solid-state
    material.

    DIFFUSION LENGTH
    In a homogeneous  semiconductor material, the average distance  minority
    carriers move during their lifetime (i.e., between generation and
    recombination).

    DIODE
    An electronic device which has two terminals and an asymmetrical or
    nonlinear voltage-current characteristic.

    DIODE  ISOLATION
    A technique in which a high electrical resistance between an integrated
    circuit element and its substrate is achieved by surrounding the element
    with a reverse biased pn junction.

    DIP (DUAL-IN-LINE  PACKAGE)
    A chip carrier or package consisting of a plastic or ceramic body with two
    rows of vertical leads in which a semiconductor integrated circuit is
    assembled and sealed.  The leads are typically inserted into a circuit
    board and secured by soldering.

    DIRECT BAND GAP SEMICONDUCTOR
    A semiconductor material in which an electron transition from the
    conduction to the valence band, or vice versa, does not require a change in
    crystal momentum for the electron.  Gallium arsenide is a direct band gap
    semiconductor material.

    DISCRETE CIRCUIT
    A circuit which has an individual identity and which is fabricated prior to
    installation, or is separately packaged and is not part of an integrated
    circuit.

    DISLOCATION
    A region in a  crystal in which the atoms are not arranged in a perfect
    lattice-like structure.  See CRYSTAL DEFECT for examples of crystal
    defects/dislocations.

    DMOSFET
    Depletion type metal oxide semiconductor field effect transistor.  Such
    devices are normally in the on condition with no applied gate voltage.

    DONOR IMPURITY
    An element which when added to a semiconductor provides unbound or  free
    electrons to the semiconductor which may serve as current carriers.
    Typically, donors are atoms which have more valence electrons than the
    atoms of the  semiconductor material into which they are introduced in
    small quantities as an impurity or dopant.  Since such donor impurities
    have more valence electrons than the semiconductor, a semiconductor doped
    with donor impurities is an n-type semiconductor.

    DOPANT
    An impurity added to a semiconductor material to change its electrical
    conductivity or other characteristics.  N-type (negative) dopants, such as
    phosphorus, for a group IV semiconductor such as silicon typically come
    from group V of the periodic table.  When added to silicon n-type dopants
    create a material that contains conduction electrons.  P-type (positive)
    dopants, such as boron, for a group IV semiconductor such as silicon,
    typically come from group III and result in  holes.

    DOPING PROFILE
    The point to point concentration throughout a semiconductor of an impurity
    atom doped into the semiconductor.

    DOUBLE-DIFFUSED MOS (DMOS)
    A metal oxide semiconductor having diffused junctions in which successive
    diffusions of different impurity types are made in the same well-defined
    region of the semiconductor.

    DRAIN
    The electrode of a field effect transistor which receives charge carriers
    which pass through the transistor channel from the source electrode.

    DRAIN CURRENT
    The flow of charge carriers in the drain region of a field effect
    transistor.

    DRAIN-SOURCE  SATURATION CURRENT
    The maximum amount of current carried by the drain of a field-effect
    transistor when the gate-  source voltage equals zero volts.

    DRIFT CURRENT
    Current produced in a solid-state electronic device by charge carriers
    (e.g., holes or electrons) drifting in the direction of an applied electric
    field.


    DUAL GUARD-BAND ISOLATION
    A type of electrical isolation of functional elements of an integrated
    circuit comprised of two distinct unused areas of chip surface area
    adjacent to the elements desired to be electrically isolated.

    DUAL-IN-LINE (DIP)
    See DIP.

    DYNAMIC RANDOM ACCESS MEMORY (DRAM)
    solid-state memory in which the information decays over time and needs to
    be periodically refreshed.

    EB JUNCTION
    Emitter base junction in a bipolar transistor.

    ELECTRON
    The negatively charged particle in an atom that orbits the nucleus in
    specific energy levels.

    ELECTRON FLOW
    Movement of electrons from a source of negative potential to a positive
    potential.

    ELECTRON-HOLE PAIR
    A positive charge carrier (i.e., hole) and a negative charge carrier
    (i.e., electron) considered together as being created or destroyed as part
    of one and the same event.

    EMITTER
    The region of a bipolar junction transistor from which charge carriers flow
    through the emitter-base junction into the base region of the device.

    EMITTER CURRENT
    The amount of current flowing from the emitter across the emitter-base
    junction into the base region of the device.

    E-MOSFET
    Enhancement mode metal oxide semiconductor device.  See ENHANCEMENT MODE
    and MOSFET.

    ENERGY LEVELS
    The possible energy values that an atom or molecule or subatomic particle
    (e.g., an electron) can have.

    ENHANCEMENT MODE
    The operation of a  field effect transistor which has a channel formed
    therein between its source and drain regions and which normally does not
    conduct current through its channel with zero voltage applied to its gate
    electrode.  Voltage of the correct polarity will accumulate minority
    carriers in the channel to permit conduction of current in the channel,
    thus turning on the transistor.

    EPITAXY
    The growth of a crystal of one substance on the surface of a crystal of the
    same or another substance so that the crystal lattice of the base substance
    controls the orientation of the atoms in the grown crystal.

    EPITAXIAL LAYER
    An added layer of crystal that takes on the same crystalline orientation as
    the  substrate crystal.

    ESAKI DIODE
    A heavily doped pn junction diode where conduction occurs through the
    junction potential barrier due to a quantum mechanical effect even though
    the carriers which tunnel through the potential barrier do not have enough
    energy to overcome the potential barrier.  Esaki tunneling involves a
    tunneling barrier formed by a macroscopic depletion layer between n-type
    and p-type regions.  It does not involve a resonant  tunneling barrier
    using controlled quantum confinement, a layer located between junctions,
    nor a thin superlattice layer.

    EXCESS CARRIERS
    Charge carriers present in a semiconductor in excess of those present in
    thermal equilibrium.

    EXTRINSIC SEMICONDUCTOR
    A semiconductor whose charge carrier concentration and, therefore,
    electrical properties depend on impurity, atoms introduced therein.

    FACE BONDED
    A chip mounting technique wherein semiconductor chips are provided with
    small mounting pads, turned face down, and bonded directly to conductors on
    a substrate.

    FANNED LEADS
    Leads placed through a package wall at closer intervals than normal and
    radiated (fanned) out on the exterior of the package until a desired
    center-to-center lead spacing is achieved.

    FET
    Acronym for field effect transistor.

    FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTOR
    A unipolar  transistor in which current carriers are injected at a source
    terminal and pass to a drain terminal through a channel of semiconductor
    material whose conductivity depends largely on an electric field applied to
    the semiconductor from a control electrode.  There are two main types of
    FET, a  junction FET and an  insulated-gate FET.  In the  junction FET, the
    gate is isolated from the channel by a pn  junction.  In an  insulated-gate
    FET, the gate is isolated from the channel by an insulating layer, so that
    the gate and channel form a capacitor with the insulating layer as the
    capacitor dielectric.

    FIELD OXIDE
    A thin (on a macroscopic scale) film made up of an oxide of a material
    which overlies a device substrate to reduce parasitic capacitive coupling
    between conductors overlying the oxide and the substrate or devices below
    the oxide layer (e.g., in the substrate).

    FLAT PACK
    An integrated circuit package with  leads extending from it in the same
    plane as that of the package.  It has a low profile.

    FLIP-CHIP
    A term which describes the situation wherein a semiconductor device which
    has all terminations on one side thereof in the form of bump contacts, has
    a passivated surface and has been flipped over and attached to a matching
    substrate.

    FLOATING DIFFUSION
    A region of a semiconductor device in which impurity atoms have been doped
    and which is electrically floating, that is, has no direct electrical
    connection.

    FLOATING GATE
    A gate electrode that is electrically floating, that is, has no direct
    electrical connection.

    FOOTPRINT
    Also called a land pattern.  It is a combination of lands used to mount a
    surface mount component.  Metal pads on a substrate surface are arranged in
    the same pattern as the leads or pads on the component itself.

    FORBIDDEN ENERGY BAND/REGION/GAP
    The energy band of a material which is located between a solid material's
    conduction and valence bands.  It is defined by the amount of energy that
    is needed to release an electron from its valence band to its conduction
    band.  Electrons cannot exist in this gap.  They are either below it, and
    bound to an atom, or above it, and able to move freely.

    FORWARD BIAS
    An external voltage applied in the conducting direction of a pn junction.
    A  positive potential is connected to the p-type material and a negative
    potential to the n-type semiconductor material.

    FORWARD BREAKOVER POTENTIAL
    The value of positive terminal voltage at which a regenerative device
    (e.g., a silicon controlled rectifier), with its gate circuit open, becomes
    conductive.

    FORWARD CURRENT
    The current which flows across a semiconductor junction when a forward bias
    is applied across the junction.

    FOUR-LAYER DIODE
    A semiconductor diode with three junctions and only two terminals connected
    to the outer layers forming the junctions.  This includes two terminal pnpn
    thyristors.

    FOUR-PHASE CCD
    A charge coupled device having four electrode sets and four gate voltages.

    FOUR-SIDE LEAD LAYOUT
    The situation wherein there are leads through all four sides of an
    integrated circuit package.

    FRAME TRANSFER CCD
    A charge coupled device area imager array with a separate image area,
    storage area, and read-out register area, the storage area being located
    between the image area and the readout area.  This is distinguished from an
    interline-transfer CCD in which the sensing and storage/readout function
    areas are located next to each other.

    FREE  ELECTRON
    An  electron not bound to a particular atom, but free to circulate among
    the atoms of a solid material.

    GAIN
    The ratio of the magnitude of the electrical output of a device to the
    magnitude of its electrical input.

    GALLIUM ARSENIDE
    A semiconducting chemical compound which is often used in active
    solid-state devices.

    GATE
    The control electrode or region of a field effect transistor, located
    between the source and drain electrodes, and regions thereof.

    GATE ARRAY
    A repeating geometric arrangement of groups of active solid-state devices,
    each group being connectable into a logic circuit, in one integrated,
    monolithic semiconductor chip.

    GATE CHARGE
    The electrical charge on a gate electrode.

    GATE CONTROLLED DIODE
    A three terminal semiconductor diode with the ability to be turned on or
    off by a pulse applied to its gate electrode.

    GATE TRIGGER CURRENT:
    The amount of current needed to commence gate current flow in a four layer
    semiconductor device (e.g., a thyristor).

    GATE TRIGGER VOLTAGE
    The amount of voltage needed to begin gate current flow in a four layer
    semiconductor device (e.g., a silicon controlled rectifier).

    GERMANIUM
    A semiconductor material used in active solid-state devices.

    GULL-WING
    The name given to lead configurations of some surface mounted devices.
    Gull wings extend from the side of a component package and have an L-shaped
    bend at  component ends, which extend down to the substrate surface and
    away from the component.

    GUNN DIODE
    A diode in which electrons under the influence of sufficiently high
    electric fields are transferred between energy valleys of different
    momentum in the conduction band of the active semiconductor device material
    or holes under the influence of sufficiently high electric fields are
    transferred between energy valleys of different momentum in the valence
    band of the active semiconductor device material.  A Gunn diode does not
    normally have a  pn junction and cannot be used as a rectifier.

    GUNN EFFECT
    An inter valley transfer effect wherein electrons under the influence of
    sufficiently high electric fields are transferred between energy valleys of
    different momentum in the  conduction band of the active semiconductor
    device material, or holes under the influence of sufficiently high electric
    fields are transferred between energy valleys of different momentum in the
    valence band of the active semiconductor device material.

    HALL EFFECT DEVICE
    An active solid-state device in which a current is flowing and is in a
    magnetic field perpendicular to the current, and in which a voltage is
    produced that is perpendicular to both the current flow direction and the
    magnetic field direction.

    HALOGENS
    F, Cl, Br, I, At.

    HEADER
    A slab-like or flat plug-in base for a  package that is designed to be used
    with a cover or lid.

    HEAT SINK
    Devices used to absorb or transfer heat away from heat sensitive devices or
    device components.

    HEAVY METALS
    Metals other than light metals - see LIGHT METALS.

    HETEROJUNCTION /HETEROINTERFACE
    An interface between two dissimilar semiconductor materials.  For example,
    one material may by InAs and the other may be InAlAs, or one material may
    be GaAs and the other material may be GaAlAs.

    HETEROSTRUCTURE
    See HETEROJUNCTION.

    HIGH ELECTRON (HOLE) MOBILITY TRANSISTOR (HEMT)
    A heterojunction field effect transistor with impurity ions located on the
    side of the hetero junction with lower affinity for the charge carriers
    (holes or  electrons) injected at the source that pass to the drain via a
    channel adjacent the hetero junction.

    HOLDING CURRENT
    The minimum current needed to maintain a generative type active solid-state
    device (e.g., a thyristor) in an "on" or conducting condition.

    HOLE
    An empty energy level in the valence band of a semiconductor crystal which
    exhibits properties of a real particle and can act as a mobile positive
    charge carrier.

    HOLE FLOW
    The current in a semiconductor material due to the movement of holes
    therein.

    HOMOJUNCTION
    An interface between regions of opposite polarity in the same semiconductor
    material.

    HOT CARRIER DIODE
    A diode in which  electrons (or holes) have energies greater than those
    that are in thermal equilibrium with the material of at least one of the
    regions forming the diode.  Schottky barrier diodes typically have "hot
    carriers" (hot electrons) injected into the metal from the semiconductor.

    HOT ELECTRONS
    See HOT CARRIER DIODE.

    HYBRID CIRCUIT
    A small printed circuit having miniature components, which may include
    passive components (resistors, capacitors, and inductors, deposited on a
    printed circuit board.  A "hybrid circuit" is NOT an integrated circuit,
    and is not classifiable in this class.

    IMPURITY
    A foreign material present in a semiconductor crystal, such as boron or
    arsenic in  silicon, which is added to the semiconductor to produce either
    p-type or n-type semiconductor material, or to otherwise result in material
    whose electrical characteristics depend on the impurity dopant atoms.

    INDIRECT BAND GAP SEMICONDUCTOR
    A semiconductor material in which a change in semiconductor crystal
    momentum for an electron is required when it moves from the conduction band
    to the valence band and vice versa.  Silicon is an indirect band gap
    semiconductor.

    INSULATED-GATE FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTOR (IGFET)
    A unipolar transistor with source, gate, and drain regions and electrodes,
    in which conduction takes place in a channel controlled by action of the
    voltage applied to the gate electrode of the device, in which the gate
    electrode is separated from the channel by an insulator layer.

    INSULATOR
    A material which has a high resistance to the flow of electric current.  It
    has such low electrical conductivity that the flow of current therethrough
    can usually be neglected.

    INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
    See MONOLITHIC DEVICE (e.g., IC) as contrasted to HYBRID CIRCUIT.

    INTRINSIC CONCENTRATION
    The number of  minority carriers in a semiconductor due to thermal
    generation of electron-hole pairs.

    INTRINSIC SEMICONDUCTOR
    A pure semiconductor, i.e., one with no impurity atoms introduced therein.

    INVERSION
    A condition in a semiconductor material in which the concentration of
    minority carriers exceeds the concentration of majority carriers.

    INVERSION LAYER/CHANNEL
    A region in a semiconductor material in which the concentration of minority
    carriers exceeds the concentration of majority carriers.

    IRON GROUP METALS
    Fe, Co, Ni.

    ISOLATION
    Prevention of the flow of electric current between electronic component
    parts of a solid-state electronic device.

    ISOPLANAR CMOS
    A semiconductor device in which relatively thick regions of silicon
    dioxide, recessed into the semiconductor surface, are used to electrically
    isolate device areas and prevent  parasitic device formation.  More
    commonly called LOCOS CMOS.

    ISOPLANAR ISOLATION
    A type of electric  isolation in which relatively thick regions of silicon
    dioxide, recessed into the semiconductor surface, are used to electrically
    isolate device areas and prevent  parasitic device formation.  More
    commonly called LOCOS ISOLATION.

    J-LEAD
    A rolled-under, J-shaped configuration of some surface mounted component
    leads.

    JUNCTION
    A joining of two different semiconductors or of a semiconductor and a metal
    at an interface.  Types of junctions include HETEROJUNCTIONS, SCHOTTKY
    BARRIER JUNCTIONS, and PN JUNCTIONS.

    JUNCTION BARRIER
    The opposition to the diffusion of  majority carriers across a pn junction
    due to the charge of the fixed donor and acceptor ions.

    JUNCTION CAPACITANCE
    The capacitance across a pn junction.  It depends on the width of the
    depletion layer, which increases with increased reverse bias voltage across
    the junction.

    JUNCTION GATE FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTOR (JFET)
    See FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTOR.

    JUNCTION ISOLATION
    Electrical isolation of devices on a monolithic integrated circuit chip
    using a reverse biased junction diode to establish a  depletion layer that
    forms the electrical isolation between devices.

    JUNCTION RESISTANCE
    The electrical resistance across a semiconductor PN junction.

    LAND
    The conductive areas, normally metal patterns, on a semiconductor
    integrated circuit, which form part of the contacts and interconnections
    between components on the integrated circuit.

    LAND PATTERN
    A combination of lands on an integrated circuit.

    LANTHANIDE ELEMENTS
    La, Ce, Pr, Nd, Pm, Sm, Eu, Gd, Tb, Dy, Ho,Er, Tm, Yb, Lu.

    LATCHING/LATCHED/LATCHUP
    The state or condition of a regenerative feedback device, e.g., a
    thyristor, in which the device remains ON when the initializing signal is
    removed.

    LCCC
    An abbreviation for a leadless ceramic chip carrier which is a
    hermetically-sealable ceramic package in which an integrated chip can be
    placed to create a surface mounted  component.  It has pads around its
    perimeter for connection to a substrate.

    LEAD
    The conductor brought out from a component.

    LEAD FRAME
    A metal frame which provides support for an integrated circuit chip or die
    as well as electrical leads to interconnect the integrated circuit on the
    die or chip to other electrical components or contacts.

    LEAKAGE CURRENT
    Unwanted current flow.

    LIFETIME
    The average time interval between the introduction of and recombination of
    minority charge carriers in a semiconductor.

    LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (LED)
    Junction diodes which give off light when energized.

    LIGHT METALS
    Alkali metals, alkaline-earth metals, Be, Al, Mg.

    LINE DEFECT
    A planar crystal defect (e.g., an extra plane of atoms in a crystal).  It
    is also called an edge dislocation.

    LOCAL OXIDE CMOS (LOCMOS)
    Local oxide complementary metal oxide semiconductor structure which
    features oxide isolation which is recessed into the semiconductor surface.

    LOCOS
    (Local Oxidation of Silicon) Patterns of oxide isolation which are recessed
    into the  semiconductor surface.  Sometimes also called isoplanar, ROX
    (Recessed Oxide Isolation), or planox.

    LUMINESCENCE
    Emission of light by directly converting some other type of energy.  Types
    include thermoluminescence, photoluminescence, cathodoluminescence, and
    electroluminescence.  It includes fluorescence and phosphorescence.  Active
    solid-state luminescent devices are semiconductors which operate via
    injection luminescence.  Active devices include pn junctions (including
    heterojunctions), Schottky barrier junctions, metal-insulator-semiconductor
    (MIS) structures, and high speed traveling domains, e.g., Gunn domain and
    acoustoelectric wave generated domains; whereas passive solid-state
    electroluminescent devices (phosphors) are insulators which operate in an
    intrinsic luminescence phenomena, i.e., where an applied electric field
    generates free carriers (there being no free carriers in an insulator to be
    accelerated by an applied field unless the field also generates them) to
    initiate the light emission mechanism.

    MAJORITY CARRIER
    The predominant charge carrier in a semiconductor.  Electrons are majority
    carriers in n-type semiconductors.  Holes are majority carriers in p-type
    semiconductors.

    MAJORITY CURRENT
    Current caused by the flow of majority carriers.

    MASTERSLICE ARRAY/MASTERCHIP
    A substrate that contains active and passive electronic components in a
    predetermined pattern which may be connected into different logic or analog
    circuits.

    MBM JUNCTION
    Active solid-state devices having metal-barrier-metal layer junctions.

    METAL-OXIDE SEMICONDUCTOR FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTOR (MOSFET)
    See INSULATED GATE  FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTOR.

    METAL-GATE FET
    A field effect transistor having a gate conductor made of metal, rather
    than polycrystalline semiconductor material.

    METALLIZATION
    A single or multilayer film pattern of electrically conductive material
    deposited on a substrate to interconnect electronic components, or the
    metal film on the bonding area of a substrate which becomes part of the
    bond and performs both an electrical and a mechanical function.

    METALS
    Elements other than non-metals.  See NON-METALS.

    MIM DIODE
    A junction diode with a thin insulating layer of material sandwiched
    between two metallic surface layers which operates as a tunneling (direct
    or Fowler-Nordheim type) diode.

    MINORITY CARRIER
    The less predominant  charge carrier in a semiconductor.  In a p-type
    semiconductor, minority carriers are electrons, whereas in n-type
    semiconductor material, minority carriers are holes.

    MINORITY CURRENT
    The current caused by flowing minority carriers.

    MIS
    Acronym for metal-insulator-semiconductor.  Typically active solid-state
    devices with MIS technology have a silicon dioxide layer formed on a
    single crystal silicon substrate.  A polysilicon conductor layer is formed
    on the oxide.

    MOBILITY
    The facility with which carriers move through a semiconductor when
    subjected to an applied electric field.  Electrons and holes typically have
    different mobilities in the same semiconductor.

    MODFET
    Acronym for a modulation doped field effect transistor.  A high speed
    semiconductor FET in which dopant atom containing semiconductor layers
    alternate with non-doped semiconductor layers, so that the carriers
    (electrons or holes) resulting from the dopant atoms can travel in the
    undoped material, so that there is little scattering of carriers from
    dopant atoms.  Typically, the dopant atoms are in semiconductor material
    having a lower carrier affinity than the undoped layers, to facilitate
    carrier spill over into the undoped layers.  Such a structure may typically
    constitute a superlattice.  See also  HIGH ELECTRON MOBILITY TRANSISTOR
    (HEMT).

    MODULATION DOPING
    Spatial modulation of dopant atoms in a semiconductor crystal.

    MONOLITHIC DEVICE (e.g., IC)
    A device in which all components are fabricated on a single chip of
    silicon.  Interconnections among  components are provided by means of
    metallization patterns on the surface of the chip structure, and the
    individual parts are not separable from the complete circuit.  External
    connecting wires are taken out to terminal pins or leads.

    MSM
    Acronym for metal-semiconductor-metal semiconductors.  Active solid-state
    semiconductor devices having a semiconductor layer sandwiched between two
    layers of metal.

    MULTILAYER  METALLIZATION
    Two or more layers of interconnecting metallization patterns in a
    monolithic integrated circuit separated by insulator material except in
    interconnection areas.

    N-TYPE SEMICONDUCTOR
    An extrinsic semiconductor in which electron density exceeds hole density.

    NDM
    Negative differential mobility (e.g., Gunn effect) intervalley active
    semiconductor devices wherein an applied electric field imparts energy to
    electrons or  holes to permit them to jump to higher quantum electronic
    intervalley energy levels in which electrons have lowered electron mobility.

    NEGATIVE RESISTANCE REGION
    An operating region of an active solid-state electronic device in which an
    increase in applied voltage results in a decrease in output current.

    NEGATIVE TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT
    The amount of reduction in a device parameter, such as capacitance or
    resistance, for each degree of device operating temperature.

    NMOS
    N-channel metal oxide semiconductor devices which use electrons as majority
    carriers.

    NOBLE GASES
    He, Ne, Ar, Kr, Xe, Rn.

    NON-METALS
    H, B, C, Si, N, P, O, S, Se, Te, noble gases, halogens.

    NPN TRANSISTOR
    A transistor in which the base is made of p-type material and both source
    and drain are made of n-type semiconductor material.

    N-CHANNEL FET
    A field effect transistor that has an n-type conduction channel.

    N-TYPE SEMICONDUCTOR
    An extrinsic semiconductor having n-type dopant atoms, e.g., atoms with one
    more valence electron than the host atoms.

    ORGANIC SEMICONDUCTOR
    A semiconductor compound in which the molecule is characterized by two or
    more carbon atoms bonded together, one atom of carbon bonded to at least
    one atom of hydrogen or halogen (i.e., chlorine, fluorine, bromine, iodine)
    or one atom of carbon bonded to at least one atom of nitrogen by a single
    or double bond.

    (1)     Note.  Exceptions to this rule include HCN, CN-CN, HNCO, HNCS,
    cyanogen halides, cyanamide, fulminic acid, and metal carbides.  These are
    not regarded as organic semiconductor materials.  Also, note that graphite
    and diamond are not regarded as organic semiconductors since they are not
    compounds; silicon carbide is not regarded as organic.

    OXIDE ISOLATION
    Electrical isolation of  semiconductor electronic devices in a monolithic
    integrated circuit by an oxide (e.g., silicon oxide).

    PACKAGE
    A container, case, or enclosure for protecting a solid-state electronic
    device from the environment.

    PAD
    (1) The portion of a conductive pattern on a solid-state electronic device
    for making external connection thereto; (2) the portion of a conductive
    pattern on a chip or a printed circuit board designed for mounting or
    attaching a substrate or solid-state active electronic device.

    PARASITIC CURRENT
    Unintended current which flows between devices in an integrated circuit, or
    which flows between device regions and  isolation regions.

    PARASITIC DEVICES/CHANNELS
    Junctions forming unintended active solid-state devices which interconnect
    intended active solid-state devices, which unintended devices are not
    designed to carry current flow.

    PARASITIC THYRISTOR ACTION
    Unwanted active solid-state device formation in which four adjacent
    complementary doped regions not designed to act as an active solid-state
    device, lack sufficient isolation therebetween and act as a  thyristor.
    Parasitic thyristor action is typically a problem encountered in CMOS
    integrated circuits.

    PARASITIC TRANSISTOR ACTION
    Unwanted transistor formation in an integrated circuit structure.

    PASSIVE DEVICE
    A solid-state electronic device or component in which charge carriers do
    not change their  energy levels and that does not provide rectification,
    amplification, or switching, but which does react to voltage and current.
    Examples are pure resistors, capacitors, and inductors.

    P-CHANNEL
    A conduction path, made of  p-type semiconductor material, located between
    the source and drain of a field effect device.

    PERISTALTIC CCD
    See BULK CHANNEL CCD.

    PERMISSIBLE ENERGY LEVEL
    An energy level in a conduction or valence band which a charge carrier
    (electron or hole) may have.

    PHOTODIODE
    A diode in which charge carriers are created by light which illuminates the
    diode junction.  It is a photovoltaic as well as a photoconductive device.

    PHOTOTRANSISTOR
    A transistor having no base terminal and in which charge carriers are
    created by light which illuminates its collector-base junction.

    PHOTOVOLTAIC CELL
    An active solid-state device with a pn junction that generates a voltage in
    response to light impinging on the junction.

    PINCH-EFFECT RESISTOR
    A monolithic integrated circuit resistor having a layer of one conductivity
    type, typically a P-layer formed at the same time as integrated circuit
    bipolar transistor base regions, which is thinned by an inset region of
    opposite conductivity type, typically an N-layer formed at the same time as
    integrated circuit bipolar transistor emitter regions.

    PINCH-OFF
    The condition in a depletion mode field effect transistor wherein the
    conducting channel is depleted of majority carriers and is thereby pinched
    off, no path remaining for the source-to-drain majority carrier (e.g.,
    electron) flow.

    PIN DIODE/DEVICE
    A diode having an  intrinsic semiconductor (i.e., one with no dopants)
    sandwiched between a p-type layer and an n-type layer.  The depletion
    region (the intrinsic semiconductor layer) thickness can be tailored to
    optimize quantum efficiency for use as a photo diode or frequency response
    for use as a microwave diode.

    PIN-GRID ARRAY
    A semiconductor chip package having leads in the form of pins arranged in
    columns and rows.

    PLANAR TRANSISTOR
    A bipolar transistor in which the emitter base and collector regions
    terminate at the same plane surface without indentations in or protrusions
    from the surface.  Hence, the emitter and base regions form dish shaped
    portions extending into the semiconductor from the common surface.

    PLUG-IN PACKAGE
    An electronic package for an active solid-state device in which the lead
    pins are perpendicular to the mounting area of the substrate, as contrasted
    with a flat package in which the leads are in the same plane as the
    substrate.

    P-MOSFET
    A metal oxide semiconductor field effect transistor having p-type source
    and drain regions and a p-type conduction channel which may be formed by a
    p type doped region (depletion mode) or induced by a voltage on the gate
    (enhancement mode).

    PN-JUNCTION
    The interface and region of transition between p-type and n-type
    semiconductors.

    PN-JUNCTION DIODE
    A semiconductor device having two terminals connected to opposite type
    semiconductor materials with a junction therebetween and exhibiting a
    non-linear voltage-current characteristic, usually used for switching or
    rectification.

    PNP TRANSISTOR
    A bipolar transistor with a p type emitter, an  n-type base and a  p-type
    collector.

    POINT DEFECT
    A crystal defect occurring at a point in a crystal. Examples include, (1) a
    foreign atom incorporated into the crystal lattice at either a
    substitutional (regular lattice) site or interstitial (between regular
    lattice sites) site, (2) a missing atom in the lattice, or (3) a host atom
    located between regular lattice sites and adjacent to a vacancy (called a
    Frenkel defect).

    POLYCRYSTALLINE
    A material composed of more than one crystal.

    POLYSILICON
    A polycrystalline form of silicon.

    POSITIVE CARRIER
    A charge carrier which has a net positive charge (e.g., a hole).

    POSITIVE IONS
    Atoms which are missing a valence shell electron.

    POTENTIAL BARRIER
    The difference in electrical potential across a pn junction in a
    semiconductor.

    POTENTIAL HILL
    See POTENTIAL BARRIER.

    POTTING
    An embedding process in which an electronic component is placed in a can,
    shell, or other container and buried in a liquid dielectric polymer which
    subsequently changes to a solid material.  The container is not removed
    from the finished part, and a release agent is not used.  This process
    differs from casting - which involves a removable mold.

    PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
    A structure formed on one or more layers of electrically insulating
    material having electrical terminals and conductive material deposited
    thereon, in continuous paths, from terminal to terminal, to form circuits
    for electronic apparatus such as chips or substrates.

    P-TYPE CONDUCTIVITY
    Electrical conductivity associated with positive charge carriers (holes) in
    a semiconductor material.

    P-TYPE SEMICONDUCTOR
    An extrinsic semiconductor in which the hole density exceeds the conduction
    electron density.

    PUNCHTHROUGH
    Expansion of a depletion region* from one  junction to another junction in
    an active solid-state device.

    PURPLE PLAGUE
    A brittle, inter metallic electrically conductive compound which has a
    purplish color and is formed when aluminum and gold, used as electrical
    contact materials in semiconductor electronic devices, contact each other
    and interact.  It is usually considered undesirable because it breaks
    easily, reduces device reliability, and lowers product yield.

    QUANTIZED STATES
    Discrete energy levels due to the quantum mechanical properties of a
    material.

    ---CDEF---QUANTUM TRANSISTOR
    Transistors whose operation is based on the properties of electrons
    confined in quantum wells - semiconductor films only a hundred or so
    angstroms thick sandwiched between high confining walls made of a second
    semiconductor material.

    QUANTUM WELL
    Semiconductor films only a hundred or so angstroms thick sandwiched between
    high confining walls made of a second material.

    RARE EARTHS
    Sc, Y, Lanthanides.

    READ-OUT REGISTER
    Gated semiconductor devices which receive and accumulate charges and make
    them available to an output device.

    RECOMBINATION
    The process by which excess  holes and electrons in a semiconductor crystal
    recombine and and no longer function as charge carriers in the
    semiconductor.  Basic recombination processes are band-to-band
    recombination which occurs when an electron in the conduction band
    recombines with a  hole in the valence band, and trapping recombination
    which occurs when an electron or  hole is captured by a deep energy level,
    such as produced by a deep level dopant, before recombining with an
    opposite conductivity type carrier.

    REFRACTORY METALS
    Ti, V, Cr, Zr, Nb, Mo, Hf, Ta, W.

    RESISTIVITY
    A measure of the resistance of a material to electric current.  Resistivity
    is a bulk material property, measured in ohm-cm.

    RESONANT TUNNELLING DEVICE
    A device that works on the principle of resonant electron (or hole)
    tunneling through a pair of matched  potential barriers.  This occurs when
    the energy of the electrons (or  holes) matches that of a quantum energy
    level in the quantum well formed between the barriers.

    REVERSE BIAS
    A voltage applied across a  semiconductor junction in the reverse
    direction, i.e., wherein a positive potential is connected to the  n-type
    semiconductor and a negative potential is applied to the p-type
    semiconductor.

    REVERSE BREAKDOWN VOLTAGE
    The reverse bias voltage value at which electrical resistance drops
    appreciably and operating current sharply increases.

    REVERSE CURRENT
    The current flowing through a rectifying junction with a reverse voltage
    thereacross.

    SATURATION
    The current between the base and  collector of a bipolar transistor when an
    increase in emitter to base voltage causes no further increase in the
    collector current.

    SCATTERING CENTERS
    The impurities (dopants) in semiconductors that cause electrons or  holes
    flowing through the  semiconductor to scatter.  These reduce carrier
    mobility and represent a problem in quantum devices because they affect
    electron coherence length.

    SCHOTTKY BARRIER
    A metal to semiconductor interface in which the carrier affinity and doping
    level of the semiconductor are such that a rectifying  junction is formed.
    Usually,  minority carriers in the semiconductor do not significantly
    contribute to the current flowing in a device with such a barrier.

    SCHOTTKY DIODE
    A diode with a Schottky barrier.

    SEMICONDUCTOR
    A material whose electrical  resistivity is between that of insulators and
    conductors.  The  resistivity is commonly changed by light, heat, electric,
    or magnetic fields incident on the material.  Current flow is achieved by
    transfer of positive holes as well as by movement of electrons.

    SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICE
    A device in which current conduction takes place within a semiconductor.

    SEMICONDUCTOR LASER
    A light emitting diode that uses stimulated emission of radiation to
    produce coherent light output.

    SILICON  BILATERAL SWITCH (SBS)
    A silicon controlled switch that can conduct current in both directions.

    SILICON CONTROLLED RECTIFIER (SCR)
    A four layer pnpn device that, when in a normal state, blocks applied
    voltage in either direction.  Application of a correct voltage to a gate
    terminal permits the device to conduct in a forward direction.

    SILICON CONTROLLED SWITCH (SCS)
    A four layer pnpn semiconductor switching device that can be triggered into
    conduction by applying either positive or negative pulses.

    SILICON-GATE FET
    A field effect transistor which has a gate electrode made of silicon.

    SILICON ON INSULATOR (SOI)
    A semiconductor structure using an insulating substrate, instead of silicon
    as a substrate material, with an overlying active layer of single crystal
    silicon containing active solid-state devices.  The substrate may typically
    be of the form of an insulating layer which is itself formed on a single
    crystal substrate.

    SILICON ON SAPPHIRE (S0S) CMOS
    A complementary metal oxide semiconductor device (e.g., a transistor)
    wherein single crystal silicon is grown on a passive insulating base of
    sapphire (single crystal alpha phase aluminum oxide) with complementary MOS
    transistors formed in the  silicon in one or more island portions.

    SILICON TRANSISTOR
    A transistor which uses  silicon as the semiconductor material.

    SINGLE-IN-LINE PACKAGE
    A plug-in semiconductor device package with one row of pins with specified
    spacings therebetween.

    SINGLE CRYSTAL
    A body of material having atoms regularly located at periodic lattice sites
    throughout.

    SINKER
    A buried electrically conductive, low resistance path in an integrated
    circuit which connects an electrical contact to a conductive region buried
    in the integrated circuit.  It may be made up of a heavily doped impurity
    region.

    SIS
    An MIS structure (Metal-Insulator-Semiconductor) in which the "metal" layer
    is made of semiconductor material, typically polycrystalline silicon.

    SOLAR CELL
    A  photovoltaic cell in the form of a  semiconductor diode, usually made of
    silicon, that generates electricity directly from sunlight impingent on the
    cell.

    SOLID-STATE DEVICE
    An electronic device or component that uses current flow through solid (as
    opposed to liquid), gas, or vacuum materials.  solid-state devices may be
    active or passive.

    SOURCE
    In a field effect transistor, the electrode to which the source of charge
    carriers is connected.

    SPACE CHARGE REGION
    The region around a  pn junction in which holes and electrons recombine to
    leave no mobile charge carriers and a net charge density due to the
    residual dopant ions.

    STEP RECOVERY DIODE
    A pn junction active solid-state device in which a forward bias voltage
    injects charge carriers across the junction but prior to recombination of
    the carriers, a reverse voltage is applied to return the charge carriers to
    their source as a group.

    SUBSTRATE
    The supporting material on or in which the components of an integrated
    circuit are fabricated or attached.

    SUBSTRATE BIAS
    The electric potential applied to a substrate, which typically serves as
    the reference potential against which other voltages are measured.  Also,
    in a MISFET, a voltage applied to the substrate with respect to the source
    region.

    SUPERLATTICE
    A periodic sequence of variations in carrier potential energy in a
    semiconductor, of such magnitude and spacing that the current carrier wave
    function is spread out over many periods, so that carrier energy and other
    properties are determined in part by the periodic variations.  The
    variation may be in chemical composition of the material, as in a sequence
    of heterojunctions, or in impurity concentration, forming a doping
    superlattice, or both.

    SURFACE-CHANNEL CCD
    A charge coupled device in which charge resides at the semiconductor
    surface.

    SURFACE MOUNT DEVICES
    Active or passive solid-state devices which are structured and configured
    to be mounted directly to a printed circuit board surface.  This type of
    mounting is distinguished from "through-hole" mounting which involves the
    electrical and physical connection of devices to a printed circuit board
    using drilled and plated holes through the conductive pattern of the board.

    SURFACE RESISTIVITY
    The resistance of a material between two opposite sides of a unit square of
    its surface.  Also called Sheet Resistance.  Measured in ohms, often
    written as "ohms per square" in this case.

    TEST PROBES
    Mechanical points of contact used for electrical measurement.

    THERMISTOR
    A semiconductor device whose electrical resistance varies with temperature.
     Its temperature coefficient of resistance is high, nonlinear, and usually
    negative.

    THICK-FILM DEVICES
    Printed thin-film circuits.  Silk screen printing techniques are used to
    make the desired circuit patterns on a ceramic  substrate.  Active devices
    may be added thereto as separate devices (see  HYBRID CIRCUIT).

    THIN-FILM DEVICES
    solid-state electronic devices which are constructed by depositing films of
    conducting material on the surface of electrically insulating bases.

    THYRISTOR
    A four layer p-n-p-n bistable switching device that changes from an off or
    blocking state to an on or conducting state which uses both  electron and
    hole type carrier transport.

    THRESHOLD VOLTAGE
    The voltage at which a pn junction begins to conduct current.

    THROUGH-HOLE MOUNTING
    The electrical and physical connection of components to the surface of a
    conductive pattern using drilled and plated holes through the conductive
    and insulating layers of a printed circuit board.

    TRANSFERRED ELECTRON DEVICE
    See  GUNN EFFECT.  In such devices, advantage is taken of the negative
    differential mobility of  electrons or holes in certain semiconducting
    compounds, particularly GaAs or InP.

    TRANSISTOR
    An active solid-state semiconductor device having three or more electrodes
    in which the current flowing between two specified electrodes is modulated
    by the voltage or current applied to one or more specified electrodes, and
    is capable of performing switching or amplification.

    TRANSITION ELEMENTS
    Sc, Ti, V, Cr, Mn, Fe, Co, Ni, Cu, Zn, Y, Zr, Nb, Mo, Te, Ru, Rh, Pd, Ag,
    Cd, La, Ce, Pr, Nd, Pm, Sm, Eu, Gd, Tb, Dy, Ho, Er, Tm, Yb, Lu, Hf, Ta, W,
    Re, Os, Ir, Pt, Au, Hg, Ac, Th, Pa, U, Np, Pu, Am, Cm, Bk, Cf, E, Fm, Mv,
    No, Lw.

    TRAPATT DEVICE
    An acronym for trapped plasma avalanche triggered transit diodes, which are
    biased into avalanche condition.  As the diode breaks down, a highly
    conducting electron-hole plasma quickly fills the entire n-type region, and
    the voltage across the  diode drops to a low value.  The plasma is then
    extracted from the diode by the low residual electric field, thus causing a
    large current flow even though the voltage is low.  Once extraction of the
    plasma is completed, the current drops and the voltage rises.

    TRENCH ISOLATION
    Electrical isolation of electronic components in a monolithic integrated
    circuit by the use of  holes or other indentations in the surface of the
    device filled with dielectric material.

    TUNNEL DIODE
    A semiconductor diode in which the electrons penetrate a quantum barrier
    that is impenetrable in terms of classical physics, but which is penetrable
    in terms of quantum physics due to the quantum mechanical uncertainty in
    position of current carriers.

    TUNNEL EFFECT/TUNNELLING
    See TUNNEL DIODE and RESONANT TUNNELING DEVICE.

    TWIN-TUB STRUCTURE
    CMOS device structure in which both  p-type and  n-type deep wells are
    formed into a substrate for the n-channel and  p-channel device (e.g., a
    transistor), respectively.

    TWO-DIMENSIONAL ELECTRON GAS
    A description of the motion of electrons which are confined in only one
    direction, such as  electrons in the conducting channel of a MOSFET.  In an
     electron gas, the electrons move around without apparent restriction.  The
    behavior of electrons in conducting metals (e.g., copper) is an example of
    a three-dimensional electron gas.  In a two dimensional electron gas,
    motion is restricted to a single plane (two dimensions).

    UNIPOLAR
    An active solid-state electronic  device in which only one type of charge
    carrier, positive or negative, is used to support current flow.

    UNIPOLAR TRANSISTOR
    A transistor in which the source to drain current involves only one type of
     charge carrier.

    VARACTOR
    A semiconductor diode that changes capacitance with a change in applied
    voltage, comprising a two terminal active device using the voltage variable
    capacitance of a pn junction or a Schottky junction.

    VARISTOR
    A term applied to both passive and active solid-state devices.  A varistor
    is a two-electrode semiconductor device with a voltage dependent nonlinear
    resistance which falls significantly as the voltage is increased.  In an
    active device, the non-linear property is due to the presence of one or
    more potential barriers, whereas, in a passive type varistor, it is due to
    electrical heating of the material due to current flow therethrough.
    Varistors are to be contrasted with passive variable resistors such as
    rheostats or potentiometers.

    VERTICAL JUNCTION
    A junction of finite width which has a vertical axis.  The materials which
    form it lie on either horizontal side thereof.

    VIA
    A metallized or plated-through hole, in an insulating layer, e.g., a
    substrate, chip or a printed circuit board which forms a conduction path
    itself and is not designed to have a wire or  lead inserted therethrough.

    WAFER
    A thin slice of semiconductor material with parallel faces used as the
    substrate for active solid-state devices in discrete or monolithic
    integrated circuit form.

    WIRE BOND
    Attachment of a tiny wire, as by thermocompression bonding, to a  bonding
    pad on  a  semiconductor chip.

    WIRING CHANNEL
    An area on an  integrated circuit, such as a gate array, which is left free
    of active devices and in which interconnection  metallization patterns are
    formed.

    WORK FUNCTION
    The minimum energy required to remove an electron from the Fermi level of a
    material and liberate it to free space outside the solid.

    ZENER CURRENT
    The current generated by a  Zener diode when its reverse voltage is
    increased above the Zener breakdown value.

    ZENER  DIODE
    A single pn junction, two terminal semiconductor diode reversed biased into
     breakdown caused by the Zener effect, i.e., by field emission of charge
    carriers in the device's depletion layer.  NOTE:  True Zener breakdown
    occurs in  silicon at values below 6 volts.  It is to be distinguished from
    the avalanche breakdown mechanism that occurs in reverse biased  diodes at
    higher (about 6 volts) voltages.

    IV.     SEARCH NOTES TO RELATED CLASSES

    A.      Classes related to Class 257 subject matter in  the sense that they
    employ active solid-state devices in electronic circuits and the
    relationship of these classes to Class 257 is mainly that of a combination
    to a subcombination or of a     genus to a specie.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 31.06 for gas analysis
    semiconductor detector details; subclass 777 for semiconductor stress
    sensor structure; and subclass 754 for semiconductor type fluid pressure
    gauges.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 15.1-16.3 for
    fluid cooling of electrical conductors or insulator; subclasses 52.1+ for
    housings with electric devices or mounting means; and subclasses 250-268
    for printed circuit devices.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 400+ for active
    solid-state devices used in measuring and testing involving electrolytic
    analysis.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 338.4 for infrared responsive
    semiconductor devices, subclasses 370.01-370.15 for invisible radiant
    energy responsive semiconductor devices; subclass 371 for invisible radiant
    energy responsive methods using semiconductor devices; subclass 492.2 for
    irradiation of semiconductor devices; subclasses 552 and 553 for photocell
    circuits and apparatus involving solid-state light sources; subclasses 211
    for photocells including photosensitive junctions; and subclasses
    208.1-208.6 for plural photosensitive elements, including arrays.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 401+
    for nonlinear reactor systems which typically employ active solid-state
    devices; subclass 91 for magnetic or electrostatic field shielding; and
    subclasses 109+ for systems involving capacitors.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 498+ for electric
    lamp and        discharge devices having solid-state luminescent materials,
    including nominally recited luminescent semiconductor type materials;
    subclasses 329 and 367+ for mosaic electrodes; subclasses 366+ for
    semiconductor depletion layer type image pickup tubes; subclass 463 for
    electro luminescent cathode-ray tube screens; subclasses 346 and 346 for
    photoemissive cathodes; and subclass 504 for solid-state organic phosphor
    material luminescent devices.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 12.1 for
    secondary emissive stage in a cathode-ray tube; subclass 407 for a
    deflection coil circuit including a diode; subclass 408 for deflection coil
    circuits including a solid-state switch; and digest 7 for starting and
    control circuits using transistors.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems,  subclasses 229+
    for power supply or regulation systems using a diode in shunt with a source
    or load; subclasses 237+, 254, 257, 258, 263, 265+, and 292 for output
    level devices employing three or more terminal semiconductor devices;
    subclass 300 for input level devices or systems employing three or more
    terminal semiconductor devices; subclasses 311+ for self-regulating systems
    employing three or more terminal semiconductor devices; subclasses 325+,
    339, 343, and 349+ for external or operator controlled systems employing
    three or more terminal semiconductor devices; subclass 360 for
    superconductor type transformers or inductors; digest 902 for device with
    optical coupling to a semiconductor; and digest 907 for temperature
    compensation of a semiconductor

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 765+ for diode, SCR
    and transistor testing and subclasses 244+ for magnetometers, many of which
    employ active solid-state devices, e.g., subclasses 248 (thin film), 251
    (Hall plate) and 252 (semiconductor type solid-state or magneto resistive).

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous nonlinear circuits
    utilizing an active device.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 4.9 for semiconductor type parametric
    amplifiers; subclass 183 for DC interstage coupling with as nonlinear
    device; and subclasses 250+ for semiconductor amplifying devices.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 51 for semiconductor type cascade or tandem
    connected oscillators and subclasses 107-117 for solid-state active element
    oscillators.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and NetWorks, subclasses 103 and 104 for
    branched circuits with switching means having semiconductor operating
    means; subclass 165 for frequency or time domain filters using charge
    transfer devices; subclasses 216 and 217 for negative impedance devices;
    subclass 247 for semiconductor mounts for strip type long line elements;
    and subclass 99 for super conductive devices.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 1 for coherer type resistors,
    subclass 22 for semiconductor type thermistors, and subclass 32 for
    magnetic field responsive devices, including Hall effect types and super
    conductive types.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 598 for barrier layer thermal
    sensors in condition responsive device; subclass 815.03 for a visual
    indicator using a light emitting diode; and subclasses 825.79-825.96 for
    selective systems comprising matrix elements, e.g., light emitting diodes.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 30+ for selective visual
    display systems which may employ active solid-state device light sources,
    including subclasses 44 and 82 for visual display systems having
    solid-state light emitters.

    348,    Television, subclasses 272+ and 294+ for solid-state image sensors
    in television cameras and subclasses 800+ for electroluminescent video
    display with solid-state scanned matrix.

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 482 and 483 solid-state picture generators,
    including charge coupled devices.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    248 for semiconductor polarization type light modulators and subclasses
    321+ for modulators having significant  chemical composition or structure.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 2 for
    solid-state switch type arc suppressors; subclasses 98, 100, and 101 for
    current fault responsive sensors involving semiconductor active solid-state
    devices; subclasses 196+ for semiconductor time delay devices; subclass 205
    for threshold devices including SCR thyratrons; subclasses 275.1+ for
    electrical, e.g., fuse element for electrolytic capacitors; subclasses 277+
    for variable capacitor not involving active solid-state devices; subclasses
    525 for solid electrolytic capacitors with significant semiconductor;
    subclasses 679+ for cooling devices, housings, supports, electrical
    contacts, etc., for diverse electrical components; subclass 421 for lead
    frames; and subclasses 523+ for solid electrolytic capacitors.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 52+ for
    hardware, including shields, for storage elements; subclass 71 for negative
    resistance; and subclass 72 for transistor or diode interconnection
    arrangement; subclass 96 for fusible link storage elements; subclasses
    103-105 for semiconductive semipermanent read only systems; subclasses 106+
    for systems involving radiant energy, including subclasses 109-115 for
    photoconductive, electro luminescent, amorphous, semiconductive and diode
    devices; subclasses 129+ for systems using a particular element, including
    subclasses 154-188 for systems using particular elements including active
    solid-state devices; subclasses 185.01+ for floating gate memory storage
    (e.g., flash memory); and  subclasses 208 and 212 for semiconductive
    differential (e.g., thermal) noise suppression means in read/write circuits.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 44.12 for
    optical servo systems having solid-state optical elements; subclasses 121+
    for light sources, including solid-state light source; subclass 145 for
    semiconductive information handling transducers.

    372,    Coherent Light Generator, subclasses 43-50 for semiconductor layers
    and subclass 75 for semiconductor optical laser pump devices.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 178 for barrier layer
    (e.g., semiconductor junction)  heat sensors and subclasses 183+ for
    current modifying sensors.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclasses 57-63 for charge transfer device systems;
    subclass 74 for input circuits involving field-effect transistors; subclass
    79 and 117 for transfer means including a field effect transistor; and
    subclass 93 for superconductive elements.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for features related
    or analogous to electrical contact or housing features of active
    solid-state devices, e.g., subclasses 271+ for sealing elements, or
    subclasses 449+ for stress relief means for conductor to terminal joint.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 486+ and 505 for active solid-state devices
    inserted inside a body and used for measuring and testing.

    B.      Classes related to Class 257 subject matter in the sense that they
    employ active solid-state devices in electronic circuits and the use of
    active solid-state electronic devices primarily as a perfecting feature.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 544 for
    electroluminescent signs.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 3.2+ for thermoelectric, e.g., Peltier
    effect cooling processes and apparatus.

    84,     Music, subclasses 676 and 678 for transistorized analog oscillator
    circuits.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclass 202.4 for semiconductor fuse
    shunts and subclass 220 for silicon controlled rectifier ignition or
    detonation switch devices.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, digest 35 for electroluminescent dials.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 650+ for ignition systems
    with power supplies having diode and transistor features.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 117 for coherer type AC systems.

    194,    Check-Actuated Control Mechanisms, subclasses 216+ for value
    accumulator having solid-state circuitry.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 501 for automatic regulation or control
    means for heating devices which include semiconductor, e.g., transistor,
    means.

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, digest 24 for luminescent devices.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 303 for energy
    conversion devices employing pn semiconductor junction devices, and digest
    3 for Hall effect generators and converters.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 681 for positional
    servomechanisms using solid-state servo amplifiers.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass for an active solid-state device included in a
    charging or discharging circuit for a battery or capacitor.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, digest 5 for Hall effect
    elements.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 185+ for a stable state circuit utilizing an electron
    tube and a transistor and subclasses 568+ for a miscellaneous negative
    resistance circuit.

    329,    Demodulators, subclass 370 for diode demodulators and subclass 371
    for coherer type demodulators.

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 105, 116, 135+, 146, 152, 168, and 178 for
    modulators with discrete semiconductor devices (subclass 136 includes
    varactors).

    334,    Tuners, subclass 15 for semiconductor reactance tuning circuits.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 133+ for
    analog-to-digital conversion with particular solid-state devices; subclass
    150 for digital to analog conversion using charge coupled devices or
    switched capacitances; and subclass 172 for analog to digital conversion
    using charge transfer devices.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 84 for light source or light source support
    and luminescent material and subclass 800 (cross-reference art collection)
    for light emitting diode light sources.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 10+ for combined
    phase and frequency conversion using a semiconductor device converter, and
    subclasses 13-147 for current conversion devices many of which explicitly
    call for semiconductor active solid-state devices, and subclasses 159-163
    for frequency conversion using semiconductor type devices.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 490
    and 491 for design and analysis of integrated circuits, subclass 712 for
    integrated circuit type digital computers; and subclass 862 for charge
    transfer type analog store apparatus for analog computers.

    367,    Communications, Electrical: Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 140+ for signal transducers which may be active solid-state
    devices, and including support structures, diaphragm, and pressure
    compensation means.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclass 83 for solid
    body light emitters, e.g., diodes; subclasses 86 and 87 for transistorized
    pulse transforming means; subclasses 56+ for solid-state oscillating time
    base circuits; and subclasses 239+ for optical display devices, including
    subclass 241 for solid-state, e.g., LED light emitting displays.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclass 104 for X-ray
    source power supplies with specified rectifier.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclass 294 for semiconductor line
    finders.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclass
    100 for crossover filters with active devices and subclass 175 for
    semiconductor junction microphones.

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, subclasses 917-920 for
    thyristor or SCR devices or control circuit elements and subclass 926 for a
    specific feedback control or device which controls a solid-state device in
    a motor circuit.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 253.1 for semiconductor gain, level or
    volume control; subclass 291 for receivers having a wave collector with
    coupling to a stage of the receiver using an active device, and subclass
    333 for transistorized or integrated circuit type frequency conversion
    structure or circuitry.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 150+ for high temperature (Tc > 30 K) superconducting devices,
    and particularly subclasses 161 and 162 for bolometers or SQUIDs,
    subclasses 190+ for Josephson junctions, per se, and subclasses 191+ for
    other thin film solid-state devices; and pertinent cross-reference art
    collections, including subclasses 831+, for static information storage and
    retrieval system or device; subclasses 857+ for nonlinear solid-state
    device, system, or circuit; subclasses 873+ for active solid-state devices;
    subclass 883 for housing and mounting assemblies with plural diverse
    electrical components; subclasses 884+ for conductors; and subclasses 900+
    for heat exchangers.

    902,    Electronic Funds Transfer, subclass 26 for identification, means
    with a semiconductor chip, e.g., a smart card.

    D10,    Measuring, Testing or Signalling Instruments, subclass 77 for
    transistor testers.

    D13,    Equipment for Production, Distribution or Transformation of Energy,
    appropriate subclass for semiconductor, transistor or integrated circuit
    energy conversion or transformation.

    C.      Classes which provide for materials used in active solid-state
    electronic devices.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 62.3 for barrier layer device compositions,
    e.g., N-material, P-material and, subclasses 500+ for electrically
    conductive or emissive compositions.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 620 for
    composite metallic stock having a semiconductor component, subclasses 690
    and 691 for fluorescent, phosphorescent or luminescent inorganic layer
    composites; subclasses 917 for electroluminescent material; and subclasses
    928-931 for materials with special properties, including magnetic
    properties, electrical contact features and superconductivity.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 56-96 for radiation sensitive compositions or products;
    subclass 139 for luminescent imaging process, composition or product; and
    subclass 900 for donor-acceptor complex photoconductors.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 150+ for high temperature (Tc > 30 K) superconducting devices,
    and particularly subclasses 161 and 162 for bolometers or SQUIDs,
    subclasses 190+ for Josephson junctions, per se, and subclasses 191+ for
    other thin film solid-state devices; and pertinent cross-reference art
    collections, including subclasses 831+, for static information storage and
    retrieval system or device; subclasses 857+ for nonlinear solid-state
    device, system, or circuit; subclasses 873+ for active solid-state devices;
    subclass 883 for housing and mounting assemblies with plural diverse
    electrical components; subclasses 884+ for conductors; and subclasses 900+
    for heat exchangers.



    D.      Classes related to Class 257 because they provide for methods of
    making, cleaning, coating, etc., active solid-state devices, e.g., Class
    438, Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 25.01+ for process and apparatus for
    making barrier layer or semiconductor devices not elsewhere classified;
    subclass 25.35 for piezoelectric device making not elsewhere classified;
    subclasses 25.41+ for electric condenser making not elsewhere classified;
    subclasses 592.1+ for process of mechanical manufacture of electrical
    devices, not elsewhere classified; and subclasses 825+ for electrical
    conductor manufacturing processes, including subclass 827 regarding beam
    lead frames and beam leads.

     65,    Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 138+ for Electronic envelope
    header, terminal, or stem making means and subclass 155 for electronic
    device making involving fusion bonding.

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes and non-coating apparatus for
    growing therein-defined single-crystal of all types of materials, including
    those which may be suitable as or to produce an active solid-state device.
    Class 118 generally provides for coating apparatus, including
    single-crystal (e.g., epitaxy) coating means.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 900 for semiconductor vapor doping.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclass 1.2, 1.3, and 902
    for semiconductor wafer cleaning.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 33+ for PN type barrier layer stock
    material treatment and numerous digests concerning treatment of
    semiconductor materials, dopants, and active solid-state electronic devices.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 192.25 for
    semiconductor coating, forming, or etching by sputtering.

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, subclass 16 for active solid state
    devices involved in an etching process.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclass 123 for processes of bonding metal
    to semiconductor-type material and subclasses 179+ for processes of bonding
    electrical device (e.g., semiconductor) joints.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 492.2 for irradiation of semiconductor
    devices.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    subclasses 272.11 for electrical component encapsulating processes,
    including subclass 272.17 for encapsulating semiconductor or barrier layer
    device.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 58+, especially 62, 63, 66, 74-76,
    79-81, 96-99, 100, and 101-103 for electrical product produced by coating
    processes.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 56-96 for radiation sensitive compositions or products;
    subclass 139 for luminescent imaging process, composition or product; and
    subclass 900 for donor-acceptor complex photoconductors.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, for (a) combined
    operations (steps) for producing a semiconductor substrate having a
    junction, usually between p-type and n-type material or (b) a unit
    operation involving semiconductor material, not elsewhere provided; see the
    search notes therein.

    E.      Classes related to Class 257 because they provide for active
    solid-state electronic devices structures with a specified use, e.g., Class
    136, Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric.

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclasses 203+ for
    Peltier effect device; subclasses 200+ for batteries which generate
    electricity under the action of heat (thermoelectric); and subclasses 243+
    for batteries which generate electricity under the action of light, such as
    photovoltaic batteries, some of these batteries utilize potential barrier
    layers.

    F.      Classes that provide for subcombination subject matter that can be
    used as component part of active solid-state electronic devices (e.g., lead
    frames) or perfect the device (e.g., a heat sink).

    29,     Metal Working, appropriate subclasses for manufacturing methods of
    beam lead frame or beam lead devices.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 80.2+ and 104.33 for electrical device or
    component heat exchangers.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 421 for lead
    frames.


    G.      Classes which provide for passive solid-state electronic devices
    with names that may refer to either active or passive solid-state
    electronic devices, e.g., coherers, varistors, varactors. luminescent or
    electroluminescent devices. The devices may be part of the main subject
    matter of the class or may be used as circuit elements in circuits or
    control or measuring systems which form the main subject matter of the
    class:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 612 for making thermally variable resistors.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclass 202.4 for semiconductor voltage
    variable resistance shunts in devices used to prevent accidental fuse
    ignition.

    148,    Metal Treatment, digest 171 for metal treatment involving varistors.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 117 for coherer type AC systems.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 311 for
    variable impedance device in automatic regulator in supply circuit of an
    electric lamp or discharge device.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 662 for variable
    capacitor type positional servo systems and subclasses 788 and 792 for
    variable temperature impedance (e.g., resistor) elements in induction motor
    systems.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 298 for
    output level responsive devices including a variable resistor.

    329,    Demodulators, subclass 370 for diode demodulators and subclass 371
    for coherer type demodulators.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 145 for diode type variable impedances for
    signal channel controlled by a separate control path and subclasses 282+
    for semiconductor amplifier devices with gain control means and feedback
    means acting as a variable impedance.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 36+ for AFC devices using particular
    frequency control means, including reactance devices (e.g., variable
    capacitors) and subclass 177 for voltage sensitive capacitor type frequency
    adjusting means.

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 105, 116, 135+, 146, 152, 168, and 178 for
    modulators with discrete semiconductor devices (subclass 136 includes
    varactors).

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 263 for variable
    impedance devices connected in circuit with a long line element or
    component.

    334,    Tuners, subclasses 66 and 69 for series tuned circuits with
    variable impedance elements.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 1 for coherer type resistors;
    subclass 22 for semiconductor type thermistors; and subclass 32 for
    magnetic field responsive devices, including Hall effect types and
    superconductive types.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 745 for antennas
    with variable reactance tuning; subclass 750 for  adjustable  lumped
    reactance antenna tuning; and subclass 861 for adjustable impedance
    matching network leadins.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 188 for
    variable impedance condition responsive  devices for relay or solenoid
    safety or protection; and subclasses 277+ for variable electrostatic
    capacitors.

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, subclass 807 for variable
    impedance type field control circuits and subclasses 855+ for selectable or
    variable impedance  armature control devices.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 261 and 262 for variable reactance,
    e.g., variable capacitance type automatic local oscillator control devices.


    V.      Key Concept Index

            This index lists concepts and terms that characterize subject
    matter which is classified in Class 257.  An indication that a particular
    concept or term occurs in one or more subclasses does not mean that the
    indicated subclass or subclasses are the only places that subject matter
    may be found.  That subject matter may possibly be found elsewhere in Class
    257 listed under a related term or concept that may be broader or narrower
    or of the same scope.

            Key Concept     Subclass(es)

    3-dimensional Integrated Circuit        74, 278
    Air isolation of Integrated Circuit     522
    Air Bridge Electrical Lead      276
    Acoustic energy detector        254, 416
    Alloy
     of amorphous semiconductor materials   55, 63
     of polycrystalline semiconductor
        materials   65

     of materials forming electrical contacts       764, 765,
                    768-771

     of two different semiconductors (e.g.,
      GaxIn1-xAs)   19, 76,

            Key Concept     Subclass(es)

                    78, 103,
                    200-201,
                    613-616

    Alloyed junction        44-47
    Amorphous semiconductor material        2-5, 16,
                    52-63, 646
    Amplified Gate in Thyristor     115, 123,
                    157-161

    Antiblooming    223, 230,
                    445
    Anti-fuse component or element  50, 530
    Anti-reflection coating 437

    Anti-saturation diode   479, 570
    Anti-tamper device      922
    Array
     of bulk effect amorphous switches      5
     of diodes              910
     gate arrays    202+, 909
     as imager, or with transparent electrode,
     or as display (with plural light emitters)     59, 72, 88-
                                93 electrode field effect devices   258, 291-
                                  294, 443-
                                    448, 911 of IGFETs      390, 391 Master
    Slice (See Gate Array)Avalanche breakdown Programming of Floating Gate
    MISFET   322 Preventing 339, 409,                               483,
    484,               487-496Avalanche diode       199, 481,
                                  482, 551,
                                   603-606Backside illumination     228,
    447,               460Baker clamp       479Ball shaped leads, contacts or
    bonds 738, 780,                         781Ballasting of current (e.g., by
    resistors)   164, 580-                          582

    Ballistic transport device      26, 27, 29
    Bevel           171, 496,                               586, 618+

            Key Concept     Subclass(es)

    Bias (electrical)
     dynamic isolation pocket bias  540
     reverse biased pn junction guard region        494
     substrate bias generator       299
     MOSFET substrate bias  901

    Bipolar combined with field effect type
    device         205, 273,                                350, 361,
                          370, 378Bidirectional device (diac,
    rectifier)    110, 119-                                 131

    Bipolar transistor structure    47, 197, 205,           273, 350,
                                  361, 370,
                                    378, 423,
                                  462, 477-
                                    479,
    511,                               512, 517,
                               518, 525,                            526, 539-
                                  543, 552-                                 593
     Combined with FET      205, 273,                               350, 361,
                                  370, 378  Complementary   511, 512,
                                  525, 555,
                                    556, 569,               574-576  With
    common active region    512, 569,               574-576Bond, die or
    lead        779, 780-                           784Bond, dangling       56,
    58, 62,         65Bonding flag or pad   459,676, 786Bridge Air Bridge
    contact   276 Rectifier module  925Bucket-brigade device        251Bulk
    channel device  216+Bulk effect device  1-8Buried channel       216,
    285Calibration or test structure        48, 797

    Capacitance
     Reduction of isolation junction        545

            Key Concept     Subclass(es)

     Reduction of gate capacitance (FET)    333, 340,
                                  386-389 Electrode use for accessing, in
    DRAM      906 As passive component in non-FET I.C.      532-535 Combined
    with insulated gate device      68-71,  (e.g. DRAM)     296-313,

                    296, 298,

                    300, 906,                               908
    Voltage variable - See these terms, below
    Ceramic housing or package material     700, 701,
       703-707

    Channel - See Field effect devices
    Channel confinement     224, 243
    Channel stop    305, 354,                               376, 398-
                                  400, 519,
                                    620, 648,
                                  652Charge injection device        214Charge
    leakage or leakage current, means to prevent    297, 349,
                                  547, 620Charge transfer device    193, 215-
                                  251, 912Chemical sensor   225, 253,
                                  414CMOS         69, 195, 204,
                206, 338,           350, 351,               357-359,
                           365-377

    Coating
     Anti-reflection        437
     Insulating/passivating 374,
                    394-398,                                626,
                    631-651,
                    758-760
    Collectors- Multiple/Plural     560-564
    Composite insulator material    411, 760
    Composite electrode material    746
    Complementary bipolar transistors       511, 512,
                                  525, 555,

            Key Concept     Subclass(es)

                    556, 569,
                    574-576

    With common active region       512, 569,
                    574-576

    Complementary field effect transistors  69, 195,
                    204,206,
                    274,338,
                    350, 351,

                    357-359,                                369-377

    Conductivity modulated transistor       139-145,
                                   212Conductor aspect ratio        923

    Configuration
     Of bipolar transistor base region      592

     Of elements in gate array      206-208,
                                   210, 211

    Of FETs for Static Memory Cell (SRAM)   903, 904
     For Dynamic Memory (DRAM)      905-908
     External portion of active device      466, 496,
                                  571, 586,
                                    594,
    599,                               600,                 618-628 Of
    electrode, contact, lead or pad 4, 72,          91, 144,
                                   150, 151,                175-177,
                                   181, 182,                207-211,
                                   246-250,
                                    276, 309,               317, 401,
                                  448, 457,
                                    459, 503,
                                  508, 573,
                                    584, 587,
                                  602, 621,
                                    625,            666-676,
                                   692-697, Configuration of electrode,
    etc.        735-739,                            746,
                       758-760,
                                773-776         780-781,

            Key Concept     Subclass(es)

                    786, 920,
                    923, 926

     Of junction geometry   465, 592,                               599, 653,
                                  654Of package - See Housing or PackageContact
    or lead - See Electrical Contact or lead

    Controlled work function material       10-11, 407
    Cooling         177-181,                                467, 468,

                    573, 625,                               675, 688,
       705-707,                712-722

    Crystal axis or plane   64, 255, 521,
                    627, 628

    Crystal damage  131, 156,                               376, 424,
                                  523, 590,                                 617

    Crystal, non-single crystal, as active layer 49-75
    Crystal, polycrystalline semiconductor
      material              49-51,
                    64-75,
                    359, 377,
                    380-382,                                385, 412,
                                  505, 518,         520, 524 -
                                 527, 538,                          554,
    576,               581, 588,            754-757Depletion mode Insulated
    Gate FET        348, 391,                               392, 402-
                                  407Die bond               782, 783Die bonding
    flag        676Dielectric isolation     374-354,                395-399,
                                   501, 506-
                                   527Diffusion barrier     486, 740,
                                  751, 767Diode arrays (See, also, Fuse;
    Anti-fuse) 922Dopant/Impurity  concentration, incl., graded
    profile     101,194,

            Key Concept     Subclass(es)

    (See, also, Channel Stop; LDD)  219-221,
                                   264,            269,
    285,                335-345,                            404, 430,
                                  450, 458,         463, 492,
                          493, 497,

                    498, 543,                               545, 548,
                          558, 583,                         591, 592,
                          596, 597,                                 605,
    606,               655-657,                             927, 929

     conductivity type in electrical contact
     material               742, 743
    deep level      87, 131, 156,                   439, 523,
                    590, 608-
                    612
    plural dopants of same conductivity type        607, 917
     shaped depletion layer 927
     specified, generally (e.g., photoionizable)    102,
    227,                               439, 607-                            612
    stepped profile 657Doping for gain reduction    142, 148,
                                  376, 553,         583Double-base diode
    (Unijunction  Transistor)       212Edge, beveled - preventing breakdown
            170Electrical contact or lead   4, 32, 33, 81,                  91,
    99, 144,                                150-153,                177-179,
                                   181, 182,                203, 207-
                                  211, 276,
                                    377, 382-                       385, 459,
                                  503, 522,
                                    554, 573,
                                  576, 584,

            Key Concept     Subclass(es)

                    602, 621,
                    625, 661-                               677, 690-
                                  700, 734-
                                    786Transparent to light 59,
    72,         449-457,                749Electromigration prevention or
    reduction 767

    Electron emissive layer 10, 11
    Emitter
     Multiple/Plural        164-166,
                    560-561,
                    563, 579-                               581

    Shunt, Regenerative device      125, 137,
                                  138, 143,
                                    149,Encapsulated        100, 433,
                                  434, 667,

                    687, 767-                               796
    Enhancement mode        136, 205,                               264, 268,
                                  269, 392EPROM/EEPROM      295,
    298,               314-326Esaki diode   46, 104, 105Extended latching
    current device  139-145,                147-153Extrinsic infrared detector
    - See  PhotoionizationField effect devices      20, 24,
    27,             57-61,          66-72,          133-145,
                   192-195,                202-211,
                                    213, 252-
                                  413Field effect combined with bipolar
    type        133-145,             (including regenerative type)
    device   195, 205,                              273, 337,
                                  350, 361,         362,370,378

            Key Concept     Subclass(es)

    Field oxide     305, 333,                               374,
    389,               395-399,                             510-521,
                                   632-651

    Field relief electrode  339, 409,
                    488-490
    Field shield electrode  340, 394,
                    630
    Floating diffusion as CCD Output Tap    239

    Floating gate   239, 261,
                    315-323
    Floating pn junction guard region       339, 409,
                                  490, 495Fuse/fusible link 173, 529,
                                  665, 910

    Gate Arrays     202-211,                                909
    Gates, FET, generally - See Field
      Effect Devices
    Gold - See, also, Deep level dopant as
      contact or electrode  741-745,                                751

    Graded dopant concentration/profile -
    See Dopant, concentration, incl., graded
       profile
    Graded band gap 185, 191
    Groove, lateral transistor formed along 559
    Groove, dielectric isolation means      374, 396 -
                                 398, 510 -
                                    521, 647,
                                  648Groove - generally     95, 117, 118,
                      127, 170,                             244, 283,
                                  284, 301-
                                    305, 330-
                                  334, 418,
                                    419, 447,
                                  460, 466,
                                    496, 534,
                                  571, 586,         618-628 For alignment of
    Schottky gate to source  region in MESFET       283, 284 For resistor in
    Darlington bipolar device       571

            Key Concept     Subclass(es)

     Involving a capacitor  301-305,                                534, 599 To
    define plural devices   127, 446,               510-522,
                   571, 577,                                594 Gate electrode
    of FET formed in        283-284,
                                   330-334Guard ring or region      127, 170,
                  339, 372-                                 376, 394-
                                  400, 409,
                                    452, 484,               490, 493-
                                  495, 605Gunn effect (intervalley transfer)
       6-8

    Heat sink               81, 99,
                    177-181,                                584, 625,
                                  675, 688,
                                    689, 705                707, 712-
                                  722, 796HEMT (High electron mobility
    transistor) 20, 24, 194Heterojunction generally         76-78
    183-201

     involving quantum-mechanical tunneling 10-27,
                    104-106
     in non-single-crystal material 16, 55, 63, 65
     light emitter  13, 76,
                    78, 85,
                    90, 94-97
     in light responsive device     21, 85,
                    184-189
    High resistivity semiconductor region - See, also,
     Intrinsic material; PIN device 154, 169,
                    194, 195,                               218, 264,
                                  523, 646,
                                    656Housing or package for bipolar
    transistor devices      573, 584 for light emitter      81, 82, 99
    combined with light receiver    81, 82

            Key Concept     Subclass(es)

     for light responsive device    81, 82, 433,
                               434, 680,                            681

     for radiation shielded device  660
     for regenerative type switching device 150, 151,
                    177-181
     for voltage-variable capacitance device        602
     generally              678-733
    IMPATT          199, 482,                               604

    Impurity - see Dopant or Doping
    Indirect band gap active layer - light

     emitter                86, 87
    Inductance in integrated circuit        531
    Insulated gate device
     Capacitor or combined with capacitor   68, 71,
                    295-313
     Controlling pn junction breakdown      360, 367

     Floating gate memory device    298, 315-                               326

     IGFET in integrated circuit    291-294,
                                   326, 334,
                                   337, 338,                347-363,
                                   368-401

    In or combined with a JFET device       260, 262

     Short channel  327-346
    Insulating substrate integrated circuit 347-354,
                                   507Integrated circuit (IC) Anti-tamper or
    inspection means for IC 922 Cooling of housing or contents for IC       713
    Gate insulator breakdown protection

       in IGFET IC  355-363
     VMOS or DMOS short channel IGFET
       in           334, 337,
                    338
     Insulated gate FET in IC       57-61,
                    66-72,
                    368-401

    Intervalley transfer (e.g.,Gunn) device in      7
     JFET in                272-278
     Magnetic field sensor in IC    427
     Matrix or array of light sensor elements
      overlying active switching elements in IC      444

            Key Concept     Subclass(es)

     Matrix or array of light sensors with
      specific isolation means in IC        446
     Means to increase breakdown voltage
      in IC         491, 492
     Multiple metallization layers separated
      by insulating layer on IC     758-760
     Plural light emitters in IC    93
     PN junction isolated   509-521,
                                   544-556,                929 Structure with
    elec. isolated components       146, 476-
                                  479, 499-                         564
    Superconductive contact or lead on IC   663 Vertical current path JFET in
       265

    Integrated injection logic      474-479,
                    512, 525,                               555, 556,
                    574-576
    Intervalley transfer device - See Gunn effect
    Intrinsic material or region    458, 523,
                                  538, 656ISFET - See Chemical sensorIsolation,
    collector diffused type 549Isolation, electrical, of components in IC   93,
    374, 446,                       499-564JFET             134-136,
                                   217, 256-
                                   287, 504Josephson device 31-36LDD (lightly
    doped drain) device     336, 344,                               408,
    900Latching current - See Extended latching  current deviceLatchup - means
    to prevent      139-145,                                147-153,
       372-376

    Lateral structure in regenerative device        122, 141,
                          146, 162Lateral bipolar transistor
    structure      423, 511,                                512, 525,
                                  526, 556,

                    557-562,                                575, 576

            Key Concept     Subclass(es)

    Lattice
     Damage - See Crystal damage
     Mismatched or strained 18, 19, 190

    Lead frame      81, 99,
                    666-677
    Leakage current or charge leakage,
      means to prevent - See, also, Channel
      Stop          297, 349,                               354, 372-
                                  376, 503,
                                    547, 620Light emitting device   13, 79-
                                    103,  918Light erasure of EPROM 323, 680,
                                  681Light fiber, guide or pipe     98, 116,
    117,            294, 432Light responsive or activated device

    superlattice quantum well heterojunction        21
    amorphous semiconductor material
      device                53-56
     combined with light emitting device    80-85

     regenerative type switching device     113-118
     heterojunction 184-189
     Charge transfer device 193
     Schottky barrier       449-457
     PIN diode      458
     JFET           257, 258
     IGFET          290-294
     Generally      431-466
     Photocathode   10, 11
    Light, electrode transparent to 749
    Lightly doped drain device - See LDD
    Liquid coolant  714-716
    LOCOS - See Field Oxide
    Logic device (superintegrated)
     Current Hogging Logic (CHL)    562
     Integrated Injection Logic (I2L)       512, 555,
                                  556, 574-                                 576

    Luminescent material used with light
      emitter               98
    Magnetic field responsive       108, 252,
                    421-427
    Magnetic field shielding        422, 659
    Matrix - See, also, Array; Composite

            Key Concept     Subclass(es)

      electrode material    746
    Memory device component - See, also,
      Programmable device structure
     Floating insulated gate memory type    298, 315-
                                  323 MNOS insulated gate type      295, 298,
                                  314, 324-                                 326
    Involving a JFET (e.g., taper isolated  or floating pn junction gate
    type)      260, 261  Involving a capacitor (e.g., dynamic   memory
    cell)        68, 71,

                    296-313,                                905-908
     Non-erasable (e.g., ROM) - See, Also, Fuse,
      Anti-fuse     390, 391

     CCD with fixed pattern memory as ROM 225
     Static Ram arrangement 379-381,                                903-904

    Mesa structure  95, 170, 171,           452, 466,
                                  496, 571,

                    586, 594,                               600, 618,
                  623-626Microwave device component 199,
    259,               275-277,                             482, 523,
                                  604, 624,                         625, 659,
                                  662, 664,
                                    728Mismatch of lattice constant 18, 19,
    190MOSFET - See Insulated Gate DeviceMount for chip chip on chip        777
    flip chip               778 lead frame type     676 metal housing
    with  711Mount for housing      731 flanged type        732 stud
    type           180, 733

    Multi-level metallization       210, 758-                               760

            Key Concept     Subclass(es)

    Nitride
     Silicon Nitride        410, 411,
                    639-641,
                    649, 760

      Silicon Nitride to increase band gap of

    amorphous or polycrystalline silicon    55, 63, 65,
                                646 Of group III element (e.g., GaN) - See
    Wide band gap semiconductor Titanium Nitride    915Non-electric signal,
    responsive to -  See, also, Light responsive; Magnetic  field; Pressure
    responsive; Chemical  sensor; Temperature       53-56,
                                     108, 225,
                                 252, 414Non-single crystal semiconductor
    material - See Amorphous;  Polycrystalline; Recrystallized

    Non-uniform channel doping
     In Buried Channel CCD  219-221
     In CCD, for directionality     246-248

    In JFET         269, 285
    In IGFET - See, also, Insulated gate
      device, short channel; Channel stop;

      Depletion mode        345, 404
    Non-uniform channel thickness
     In CCD         240
     In JFET                286
     In IGFET       401
    Organic semiconductor material  40
    Organic insulating material or layer - See,
      also, Encapsulation   642, 643,                               759

    Overlap, of gate electrode with source or
      drain in IGFET        333, 346,                               387,
    388Overlap, of plural gate electrodes in  IGFET         366

    Overvoltage protection means
     In Thyristor   173

     In IGFET       328, 355-                               363
     In pn junction isolated IC     546
    Oxynitride
     As insulator in MNOS memory IGFET      325
     As gate insulator in IGFET, in general 411

            Key Concept     Subclass(es)

     As passivating insulating layer        639, 649
     Between metal levels in Integrated
      Circuit               760
    Package - See Housing or Package
    Parallel channels
     In CCD         241
     In JFET                266, 267,                               287 In
    IGFET    331, 341,                              342, 401Parallel electrical
    connections To average out manufacturing variations     919 To reduce
    resistance        920Parasitics (controlling, reducing, etc.)- See,  also,
    Channel Stop    349, 354,                               372-376
                                    503, 547Passivation Of dangling bonds in
    non-single crystal

     semiconductor  56, 58,                                         62,68,

     Of semiconductor surface       626, 629-
                    652

                    652

    Passive components - See Capacitance;
      Inductance; Resistance
    Passive components in Ics       379-381,
                                   516, 528-
                                   543, 903,
                                   904, 919,
                                   924Peltier cooling (cross-reference
    collection) 930Permeable Base Transistor - See JFETPhotocathode 10,
    11Photodetector - See light responsive devicePhotoionization    227, 439

    Photoresistor combined with accessing
      FET           59, 72, 293

    Plural emitters in bipolar transistor   560, 563,
                    579-581
    PN junction isolation in integrated circuit
     Combined with dielectric isolation     509-521
     In general     544-556

    In MOSFET integrated circuit    368-401
    PIN device
     Light responsive, combined with JFET   256, 257

            Key Concept     Subclass(es)

    Light or radiation responsive, in general       430, 458
     In general     656
    Pinch resistor  541
    Platinum (as deep level dopant) 610

    Platinum group metal

     Metal or silicide of, as Schottky barrier
      material              453-455,
                    485, 486
     Metal or silicide of, as ohmic contact 382-384,
                                   576, 757,
                                   768, 769 Metal or silicide of, as MOSFET
    gate    388, 407,                               412, 413Point contact
    device    41Polyamide     643, 759,
                                788Polyimide            643, 759,
                              792Precious metal - See Platinum group

    ---CDEF---  Metal; Gold
    Polycrystalline active junction material        49-51,

                    64-75
    Polycrystalline material (including

      polysilicon contacts) other than active
        junction material   249, 317,                               359, 363,
                                  364, 377,
                                    380-382,
                                   385, 384,
                                   387,
    407,                                412, 413,
                              489, 505,                             518, 520,
                                  524-527,                          538, 554,
                                  576, 581,
                                    588, 646,
                                  754-756,                          904, 914

    Press contact, of electrode and
      semiconductor 181, 182,                               688, 689,
                                  726, 727,
                                    785Press contact, of heat sink and
    semiconductor       719

            Key Concept     Subclass(es)

    Pressure, device responsive to  108, 225,
                                  254, 415-
                                    419Programmable device structure- See,
    also, EPROM/EEPROM Mask-programmed MOSFET ROM   390, 391 Gate Array with
    programmable signal   paths             209

    Programmable passive component in

      IC - See Fuse; Anti-Fuse
    Protection
     MOSFET gate protection 328, 355-                               363 against
    radiation (e.g., alpha particles)       297, 660,               921 against
    overcurrent or overvoltage      173, 174,
                                  328, 355-
                                    363, 487-
                                  496, 546 against edge breakdown   171, 452,


                    483, 484
    Punch through device    361, 362,

                    497-499
    Quantum well device     13-25

    Radiation protection    297, 660,
                                  921Radiation responsive   21, 53-56,
                                 59, 72, 80-
                                   85,113-         118, 184-
                                   189, 222,                223, 225-
                                  234, 257,
                                    258, 290-
                                  294, 325,                 428-466,
                                   680, 681,                749Recombination
    centers        87, 126, 131,            156, 523,
                                  590, 609-
                                    612, 617Recrystallized active semiconductor
    layer       49-51,              64-75

            Key Concept     Subclass(es)


    Refractory electrode material   377, 382 -
                                 385, 388,

                    412, 413,
                    454-458,                                486, 518,
                                  554, 576,                         588, 747,


                    748, 754-                               757, 761,
                    763-764,                                768-770

    Regenerative switching device   107-182,
                                   918Resistive electrode   245, 364,
                       489

    Resistive element (resistor) (passive

      device)               154, 350,
                    358, 359,

                    363, 379-                               381, 516,
                    533, 536-                               543, 571,
                                  572, 577,

                    580-582,                                904

    RESURF device - See, also, Avalanche
      breakdown preventing  492, 493

    Reverse

     conducting diode (tunnel diode)        106
     biased guard ring to prevent breakdown 494
     voltage polarity protection, in pn junction
      isolated integrated circuit   546
     conducting thyristor   121
     bevels         171, 496
     doping concentration gradient profile  655
    Schottky barrier        10, 54, 73,                             155, 192-
                                  195, 217,         260, 267,
                                  269, 275-
                                    277, 280-
                                  284, 449-
                                    457, 471-
                                  486, 928 SCR - silicon controlled rectifier -
    See   Regenerative deviceScribe line or region  620

            Key Concept     Subclass(es)


    Selenium (elemental)    42
    Self-aligned MOSFET gate        332, 346,
                    387, 388,                               412, 413
    Shape(d)
     contact, electrode, conductor, or
      terminal              91, 98, 151,
                    175, 176,

                    249, 250,
                    276, 282-

                    284, 309,                               317, 401,
                                  418, 435,

                    448, 457,                               459, 503,

                    508, 534,
                    573, 587,                               602, 621,
                                  662, 664,Shaped contact, electrode,
    etc., 669, 670,                                 673, 674,
                                  676, 688,
                                    689, 692-

                    697, 728,
                    735-739,

                    752, 758,
                    773-776,

                    780-786 depletion layer - See, also, Guard
      Ring or Region; RESURF        927
     external, of heterojunction light emitter      95
     housing or package     98, 181, 418,
                    688, 710,                               711, 728,
                                  730 PN junction   653, 654Shield
    electrode        294, 297,                              340, 409,
                                  435, 488-
                                    490, 503,               508,
    630,               659-660,                             662Shield,
    optical      91, 98, 294,                               323, 435,
                       659

            Key Concept     Subclass(es)

    Shield, ionizing radiation, charged
     particles, electric or magnetic fields 297, 422,
                    659-660
    Shockley diode  109
    Shorted devices, in general, e.g.,
      anti-fuse elements    50, 530, 928
    Shorted Emitter, Anode or Cathode, in
      Thyristor     125, 137,                               138, 143,
                                  149, 154 Silicide         377, 382-
                  384, 388,                         412,
    413,               454-456,                                485, 486,
                               576, 587,

                    751, 754-

                    757, 768-                               770

    Silicon Controlled Rectifier (SCR) - See
      "Regenerative type switching device",
      above
    Silicon On Sapphire - See Single crystal
      insulating substrate, below

    SIT ("Static Induction Transistor") - See

      the particular type of device, e.g., Field

      effect device;
     Bipolar transistor; Punch-through device;

     Regenerative switching deviceSingle crystal insulating
    substrate               347-354,                                507Single
    crystal semiconductor layer on  insulating substrate (SOI)      347-354,
                                   507Skin effect, microwave device,
    prevention of by low resistance ohmic  contact along mesa
    surface       624Smart card (e.g., "credit card" integrated  circuit
    package)   679, 922SOS - See Single crystal insulating  substrate,
    aboveSpiking of contact metal, prevention of    740SRAM - See Static memory
    cell using  FETStacked capacitors, in DRAM cell 68, 71, 303,
    306-309

            Key Concept     Subclass(es)

    Stacked FETs    67-70
    Stacked housings        686

    "Static Induction Transistor" (SIT) - See
      the particular type of device, e.g., Field
      effect device;

     Bipolar transistor; Punchthrough device;

     Regenerative switching device
    Static memory cell using FET    66, 67, 69,
                    379-381,                                903,
    904                Stepped dopant concentration profile 657

    Staircase (light responsive heterojunction) 185
    Strain - See, also, Stress
    Strain sensor   108, 222,                               225, 254,
       417-419

    Strained layer superlattice heterojunction      18, 19
    Stress - See, also, Strain
    Stress avoidance between electrode and

       semiconductor        178, 179,
                    746-748

    Stress relief, lead frame having        669
    Stress, device responsive to - See Strain
      sensor
    Stud mount      180, 733

    Stripline lead  275-278,                                662, 664

    Superconductive element/device  31-36,
                    661-663

    Superlattice    15-22, 28
    Suppression of blooming in light imager 223, 230,
                                  445Surface channel charge transfer
    device 215, 218,                225-251Surface effects, passivation of -
    See  PassivationSwitching speed enhancing means - See  Recombination
    centers; Schottky barrierTemperature - See, also, Heat Sink;  Thermal
    Device operated at cryogenic  temperature       31-36,
                                     468, 661-              663  High
    temperature (30 K) Josephson  device            33 Passivating glass with
    ingredient to adjust  softening or melting temperature  634

            Key Concept     Subclass(es)

     Means to reduce temperature sensitivity        426, 469
     Device responsive to temperature       108, 225,
                                  252, 467-
                                    470Test structures      48Thermal
    Conductor - See Heat Sink

    High Thermal Conductivity ceramic for
      package               705
     High Thermal Conductivity insert in heat
    sink         720 Expansion matching or compensation     178-179,

                    633, 747,                               748
     Gradient zone melting (TGZM)   45
     Responsive - See temperature responsive
    Thermoelectric/thermomagnetic cooling-
      See Peltier Effect

    Three-dimensional Integrated Circuit    74, 278
    Thyristor - See "Regenerative type
      switching device", above

    Titanium, pure or alloyed - See, also,

      Silicide; Refractory electrode material       383, 388,
                                  412, 485,
                                    486, 763,
                                  764, 770Titanium Nitride  751, 767,

                    915
    Transistor

     Bipolar transistor with Schottky barrier
      as emitter-base or base-collector
       junction     474
     Ballistic transport transistor 26, 27, 29
     Bipolar Transistor in IC with Schottky
      barrier diode 477-479
     Bipolar transistors in integrated circuit      511, 512,
                                  514, 515,         517, 518,
                                  525, 526,         539-543,
                                   552-563 Alloyed junction bipolar
    transistor      47 Bipolar transistor structure, in general     565-593
    Chemical sensor transistor - See  Chemical sensor Conductivity modulated
    transistor     139-145,                                 211

            Key Concept     Subclass(es)

     FET in or combined with Thyristor      124, 125,
                    133-145
     FET configuration for use as SRAM -
      See Static memory cell using FET
     FET in non-single crystal or recrystallized
      semiconductor material (e.g.,
      amorphous or polycrystalline

      semiconductor as channel)     57-61,

                    66-72
     FET with metal source region   902
     Heterojunction bipolar transistor      187,197, 198     Heterojunction
    FETs    20, 27, 187,            192-195

     Insulated gate transistor - See Insulated
      gate device
     JFET - See JFET
     JFET isolation in integrated circuit (i.e.,
      pinched-off region used for integrated
      circuit isolation)    504

     Lateral bipolar transistor in integrated

       circuit              350, 511,                               512,
    525,                               555-562 Light coupled transistor
    structure   83 Light responsive heterojunction  transistor      21, 187
    Magnetic field sensing bipolar transistor       423

     MOSFET substrate bias  901
     MOSFET type gate sidewall insulating

     spacer         900
     Parasitic transistor action, control of -
      See Parasitics; Channel stop
     Photosensitive bipolar transistor      21, 187, 443,           462 Bipolar
    transistors with pn junction  isolation         511, 512,
                                  514, 517,
                                    518, 552-                               556
    Punchthrough transistor 497, 498 Stacked FETs   67, 69, 70,
                                74 Static Induction Transistor (SIT) - See  the
    particular type of device, e.g., Field  effect device; Bipolar transistor;
    Punchthrough device; Regenerative  switching device

            Key Concept     Subclass(es)

     Bipolar transistor as reverse path of
      bidirectional conducting thyristor    121
     Unijunction transistor 212
    Transmission line lead  662, 664
    Transparent electrode   59, 72, 453,                            749Trench
    capacitor in    68, 301-                                305

     shared by plural DRAM cells    905

    Tunneling through insulator layer       10,
    11,                                 30-39,          314-326Tunneling, p-n
    junction type (Esaki type) 46,          104-106

    Two-dimensional electron gas - See
      HEMT (high electron mobility
      transistor), above

    Undoped semiconductor material or
      region - See Intrinsic material or region

    Unijunction transistor  212
    Unipolar transistor - See Field effect
      device

    Varactor - See Voltage variable

      capacitance device, below
    Variable threshold insulated gate device
      (e.g., EEPROM, non-volatile

      memory MOSFET)        314-326

    Vertical channel field effect device    60, 135, 136,
                    263-267,                                302, 328-
                                  334Vertical walled groove in
    semiconductor        68, 283, 284,              330-334,
                                   374, 397,
                                   513, 514,                622, 647,
                                  648Vidicon array (cross-reference collection)
    911Voltage variable capacitance device  312,
    480,               595-602Walled emitter bipolar transistor     514,
    515Wide band gap emitter heterojunction  bipolar transistor     198

            Key Concept     Subclass(es)

    Wide band gap semiconductor material
      other than GaAsP or GaAlAs    76-78

    Window (optical) for housing    98, 99, 116,
                               434, 680,            681Workfunction of
    material, controlled,  e.g., low                10, 11, 407Zener diode -
    See, also, Avalanche diode 106


CLS 257/1
TXT BULK EFFECT DEVICE:
    Subject matter under the class definition in which the active device is
    made up of a semiconductor material whose electrical characteristics are
    due to the electronic properties of the semiconductor material, which are
    exhibited throughout the entire body of material rather than in just a
    localized region thereof (e.g., the surface).

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are semiconductive devices whose
    nonlinear characteristic is due to a junction rather than to the bulk
    properties of the semiconductor, whether they are homojunctions (i.e., made
    up of the same semiconductor material with different dopant ions on
    opposite sides of a junction) or heterojunctions (i.e., made up of
    different materials on either side of a junction).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    289,    for insulated electrode devices having significant semiconductor
    compound in bulk crystal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, subclass 900 for
    methods of making a bulk effect semiconductor device.


CLS 257/2
TXT Bulk effect switching in amorphous material:
    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the bulk material is an amorphous
    material, i.e., one in which active solid material is non-crystalline in
    the sense that (1) there is either complete disorder in the arrangement of
    atoms/mole or molecules of the material or (2) there is an absence of any
    long range structural order that is detectable by electron or X-ray
    diffraction patterns of the material and the device is used as an
    electronic switch.


CLS 257/3
TXT With means to localize region of conduction (e.g., "pore" structure):

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein means (e.g., a porous structure) is
    provided to confine the operating current to a particular region of the
    bulk effect amorphous material.


CLS 257/4
TXT With specified electrode composition or configuration:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the amorphous material bulk effect
    switching device has electrodes which have a particular chemical
    constituency or shape.


CLS 257/5
TXT In array:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 in which the amorphous bulk effect switch
    has a group of individual switch elements with a predetermined (often
    regular) spacing extended in one or more directions.

    (1)     Note.  The elements often extend in two dimensions to form
    two-dimensional arrays.


CLS 257/6
TXT Intervalley transfer (e.g., Gunn effect):

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein electrons under the influence of
    sufficiently high electric fields are transferred between energy minima
    having different momentum in the conduction band of the active
    semiconductor material, or holes under the influence of sufficiently high
    electric fields are transferred between energy minima having different
    momentum in the valence band of the active semiconductor material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 107 for Gunn-type bulk effect device
    oscillators.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclass 133 for analog to or
    from digital conversion with particular solid-state devices (e.g., Gunn
    effect devices).

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 169 for systems
    using a Gunn effect device.


CLS 257/7
TXT In monolithic integrated circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the intervalley transfer devices
    are integrally combined with one or more other active (e.g., diode or
    transistor) or passive  (e.g., resistor or capacitor) devices in a single
    solid-state electronic device.


CLS 257/8
TXT Three or more terminal device:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein an intervalley transfer device
    contains three or more electrical terminals.


CLS 257/9
TXT THIN ACTIVE PHYSICAL LAYER WHICH IS (1) AN ACTIVE POTENTIAL WELL LAYER THIN
    ENOUGH TO ESTABLISH DISCRETE QUANTUM ENERGY LEVELS OR (2) AN ACTIVE BARRIER
    LAYER THIN ENOUGH TO PERMIT QUANTUM MECHANICAL TUNNELING OR (3) AN ACTIVE
    LAYER THIN ENOUGH TO PERMIT CARRIER TRANSMISSION WITH SUBSTANTIALLY NO
    SCATTERING (E.G., SUPERLATTICE QUANTUM WELL, OR BALLISTIC TRANSPORT DEVICE):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the active material is a
    thin physical layer of material located between materials which have
    different electrical properties than the thin layer and wherein the thin
    active physical layer is (1) a potential well layer thin enough to
    establish discrete quantum energy levels or (2) a potential barrier layer
    thin enough to permit quantum mechanical tunneling or (3) a layer thin
    enough to permit carrier transmission therethrough with substantially no
    scattering of the carriers.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of such devices are superlattice, quantum well, and
    ballistic transport devices.

    (2)     Note.  Esaki tunneling is not the type of tunneling which this
    subclass and those indented thereunder contemplate.  Esaki tunneling, while
    being quantum mechanical in nature, merely involves a tunneling barrier
    formed by a macroscopic depletion layer between n-type and p-type regions,
    but which neither a resonant tunneling barrier using controlled quantum
    mechanical charge confinement, a layer located between junctions, a thin
    layer as defined above.  Esaki tunneling devices are found classified
    below, in subclasses 104+.

    (3)     Note.  Active junction devices may employ a plurality of barrier
    junctions forming layers of material therebetween, but those layers are
    only classified in this subclass if they are thin enough to have the
    properties set forth in the definition. If those layers do not meet the
    definition, then the devices are classified below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, subclasses 43+ for semiconductor lasers
    which may contain thin layer devices of this type for producing coherent
    light.


CLS 257/10
TXT Low workfunction layer for electron emission (e.g., photocathode electron
    emissive layer):Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein a layer of material
    from which electrons are emitted with less input energy than that necessary
    to emit them from adjacent material is provided.

    (1)     Note.  The adjacent material and the low workfunction layer form
    either a heterojunction or a Schottky barrier, depending on whether both
    materials are semiconductors or one of the materials is a metal.

    (2)     Note.  Typical low workfunction layer devices include cold cathode
    emitters in electron tubes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 346+ and 373+ for
    photoemissive cathodes and subclasses 527, 530, 541, and 542+ for
    photocathodes in general.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, subclass 20 for
    processes of making an electron emissive device utilizing a semiconductor
    substrate.


CLS 257/11
TXT Combined with a heterojunction involving a III-V compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 in which the thin active layer and low
    workfunction layer for electron emission are combined with a
    heterojunction, i.e., a transition region between two materials with
    different energy band gaps, one material of which is a III-V compound,
    i.e., a compound wherein one material is found in group III of the periodic
    table and another material is found in group V of the periodic table.


CLS 257/12
TXT Heterojunction:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein the device includes at least two
    adjacent active layers, one of which is made of a substance that differs
    from that of the other.

    (1)     Note.  See the illustration of a heterojunction device, in subclass
    183.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194,    for heterojunction FETs having doping on the side of the
    heterojunction with lower carrier affinity.


CLS 257/13
TXT Incoherent light emitter:

    Subject matter under subclass 12 wherein the device emits incoherent light.

    (1)     Note.  Coherent light generators are explicitly excluded from this
    subclass. This means that cross-references from Class 372, Coherent Light
    Generators, are not to be placed in this subclass.  It is not desired to
    create a duplicate set of heterostructure lasers in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, subclasses 43-50 for coherent
    semiconductor light generators.


CLS 257/14
TXT Quantum well:
    Subject matter under subclass 12 wherein at least two heterojunctions are
    formed with a thin active layer of material having a relatively large
    carrier affinity between two materials with smaller carrier affinities,
    resulting in a quantum mechanical energy well located in the thin active
    layer with the relatively large carrier affinity.

    (1)     Note.  Quantum well devices appear in many forms, including (a)
    heterostructures; (b) only those high electron mobility transistors (HEMTs)
    which use a quantum well or a plurality of quantum wells; (c) superlattices
    which comprise many quantum wells so tightly coupled that the individual
    wells are not distinguishable, but rather the wells become analogous to
    atoms in a lattice and superlattice devices may behave more like new types
    of materials rather than as groups of coupled quantum wells; and (d)
    resonant tunneling devices - which exhibit quantum coupling, charge
    confinement and resonant tunneling.

    (2)     Note.  See the illustration, below, for a graphic example of a
    quantum well  device.


CLS 257/15
TXT Superlattice:
    Subject matter under subclass 14 wherein a large number of quantum wells
    are present, the quantum wells being sufficiently close to each other that
    carrier quantum wave functions are spread out over plural quantum wells and
    the intervening barriers formed by the boundaries between adjacent layers
    having different  carrier affinities.

    (1)     Note.  Thicknesses of both the quantum well layers and the barrier
    layers are typically a few angstroms to a few hundred angstroms (10-10
    meter) thick.

    (2)     Note.  See the illustration, below, for energy level diagrams
    showing band edge energy discontinuities at four types of superlattice
    heterointerfaces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, digest 160 for superlattice treatment.


CLS 257/16
TXT Of amorphous semiconductor material:
    Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein a superlattice active layer is
    made of a semiconductor crystal with no regular crystalline structure.


CLS 257/17
TXT With particular barrier dimension:
    Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein the superlattice has a specific
    quantum electronic potential barrier dimension (e.g., height or width).


CLS 257/18
TXT Strained layer superlattice:
    Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein the crystalline lattice
    characteristics of adjacent thin active superlattice layers are mismatched
    so that alternate layers are in elastic tension or compression.


CLS 257/19
TXT SixGe1-x:
    Subject matter under subclass 18 wherein at least one of the strained
    superlattice materials is a silicon-germanium alloy.


CLS 257/20
TXT Field effect device:
    Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein the superlattice active layer
    forms the conduction channel of a field effect device (i.e., one which has
    two or more terminals denoted as source and gate with a conduction channel
    therebetween, and in which the current through the conducting channel is
    controlled by an electric field coming from a voltage which is applied
    between the gate and source terminals thereof).


CLS 257/21
TXT Light responsive structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein absorption of light (ultraviolet,
    visible, or infrared) by a superlattice active layer or junction causes a
    change in the current-voltage characteristic of the device.


CLS 257/22
TXT With specified semiconductor materials:
    Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein the superlattice is formed of
    specified materials.


CLS 257/23
TXT Current flow across well:
    Subject matter under subclass 14 wherein the device operation involves flow
    of carriers (electrons or holes) across the quantum well (as contrasted
    with tunneling through the well).

    (1)     Note.  Current flow is considered to be "across" the well if the
    carriers have sufficient energy to pass over the barrier layers confining
    the quantum well, as contrasted to passing through the barriers by quantum
    mechanical tunneling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for devices which operate by resonant tunneling through the
    barriers, rather than over them.


CLS 257/24
TXT Field effect device:
    Subject matter under subclass 14 wherein the quantum well device is a field
    effect device, i.e., one which has two or more terminals denoted as source
    and gate, with a conduction channel therebetween, and in which the current
    through the conducting channel is controlled by an electric field coming
    from a voltage which is applied between the gate and source terminals
    thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See illustration under subclass 213 for various field effect
    devices.


CLS 257/25
TXT Employing resonant tunneling:
    Subject matter under subclass 14 wherein the operation of the device
    depends not only on carrier charge confinement by the quantum well, but the
    quantum well layer also acts as an intermediate layer through which
    carriers pass by resonantly tunneling through both confining barriers and
    the well.


CLS 257/26
TXT Ballistic transport device:
    Subject matter under subclass 12 in which an active layer is present
    through which carriers pass, wherein the active layer is thinner than the
    mean free path of the  carriers in the material in that layer, so that
    carriers can pass through the layer without scattering.

    (1)     Note.  Carriers are typically injected into the ballistic transport
    layer as "hot" carriers, having an energy, in the case of electrons,
    substantially greater than the minimum of the conduction band, or in the
    case of holes, substantially lower than the maximum of the valence band.


CLS 257/27
TXT Field effect transistor:
    Subject matter under subclass 26 wherein the ballistic transport device is
    a field effect  transistor, i.e., one which has two or more terminals
    denoted as source and gate with a conduction channel therebetween, and in
    which the current through the conducting channel is controlled by an
    electric field coming from a voltage which is applied between the gate and
    source terminals thereof.


    (1)     Note.  See illustration, below, of various field effect devices
    under subclass 213.


CLS 257/28
TXT Non-heterojunction superlattice (e.g., doping superlattice or alternating
    metal and insulator layers):Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein there
    are a plurality of active layers and barrier regions, the active layers
    being sufficiently close to each other that carrier quantum wave functions
    are spread out over plural active layers and the intervening barriers, and
    wherein the active layers and  barrier regions do not form heterojunctions
    between different semiconductor materials.

    (1)     Note.  Typically the active layers and barrier layers may be doped
    with opposite conductivity type dopants.  Thicknesses of both the active
    layers and the barrier layers are typically a few angstroms to a few
    hundred angstroms (10-10 meter) thick.


CLS 257/29
TXT Ballistic transport device (e.g., hot electron transistor):
    Subject matter under subclass 9 in which an active layer is present through
    which carriers pass, which active layer is thinner than the mean free path
    of the  carriers in the material in that layer, so that  carriers can pass
    through the layer without scattering.

    (1)     Note. Carriers are typically injected into the ballistic transport
    layer as "hot" carriers, having an energy, in the case of electrons,
    substantially greater than the minimum of the conduction band, or in the
    case of holes, substantially lower than the maximum of the valence band.


CLS 257/30
TXT Tunneling through region of reduced conductivity:
    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein the active layer through which
    carrier tunnelling occurs has lower electrical conductivity than the
    material adjacent thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 25.01 for methods of making barrier layer
    devices of the metal-insulator-metal type.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 107 for superconductive element and tunneling
    element oscillators.


CLS 257/31
TXT Josephson:
    Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein the device is of the form of a
    pair of superconductive electrodes separated by a thin, less conductive,
    portion, through which superconductive tunneling may occur.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 25.01 for methods of making barrier layer
    devices possessing a Josephson junction.

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, subclass 3 for Josephson Junction
    device manufacture involving etching.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process, subclass
    1 for high temperature superconductor Josephson devices with particular
    electrode materials and pertinent cross-reference art collections,
    including subclasses 857+ for nonlinear solid-state device, system, or
    circuit; and subclasses 873+ active solid-state devices.


CLS 257/32
TXT Particular electrode material:
    Subject matter under subclass 31 wherein the electrode material is
    specified.


CLS 257/33
TXT High temperature (i.e., >30# Kelvin):
    Subject matter under subclass 32 wherein the device can operate at
    temperatures above 30 degrees on the Kelvin temperature scale.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process, subclass
    1 for high temperature superconductor materials and devices.


CLS 257/34
TXT Weak link (e.g., narrowed portion of superconductive line):
    Subject matter under subclass 31 wherein the active layer is a
    superconductive material of lower current capacity than the pair of
    superconductive electrodes.


CLS 257/35
TXT Particular barrier material:
    Subject matter under subclass 31 wherein the active layer material is
    specified.


CLS 257/36
TXT With additional electrode to control conductive state of Josephson
    junction:Subject matter under subclass 31 wherein a specific electrode in
    addition to the pair of superconductive electrodes forming the Josephson
    junction is used to control the conductive state of the junction.


CLS 257/37
TXT At least one electrode layer of semiconductor material:
    Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein the tunneling device has at least
    one electrode layer comprised of a semiconductive material.


CLS 257/38
TXT Three or more electrode device:
    Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein the tunneling device has three or
    more electrodes, at least one of which is made of a semiconductive material.


CLS 257/39
TXT Three or more electrode device:
    Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein the tunneling device has three or
    more electrodes.


CLS 257/40
TXT ORGANIC SEMICONDUCTOR MATERIAL:
    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a semiconductor
    compound that includes an organic material characterized by two or more
    carbon atoms bonded together, one atom of carbon bonded to at least one
    atom of hydrogen or halogen (i.e., chlorine, fluorine, bromine, iodine), or
    one atom of carbon bonded to at least one atom of nitrogen by a single or
    double bond.

    (1)     Note.  Certain compounds are exceptions to this rule, i.e., HCN,
    CN-CN, HNCO, HNCS, cyanogen halides, cyanamide, fulminic acid, and metal
    carbides.  These are not regarded as organic materials.

    (2)     Note.  Graphite and diamond are not regarded as organic, since they
    are not compounds; silicon carbide is not regarded as organic.  Active
    solid-state devices using silicon carbide or diamond as the semiconductor
    are in subclass 77 of this class.

    (3)     Note.  Organic insulating materials, as opposed to semiconducting
    materials, do not go in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclass 263 for
    photoelectric cells containing organic active material.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, and other classes which form
    integral parts of Class 260, appropriate subclasses for organic materials

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 504 for solid-state
    organic phosphor material luminescent devices.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 527 for
    solid electrolytic capacitors containing an organic salt.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, subclass 82 for
    processes of making a light responsive device utilizing an organic
    semiconductor, and subclass 99 for methods of making an electrical device
    utilizing as a semiconductor component an organic semiconductor.


CLS 257/41
TXT POINT CONTACT DEVICE:
    Subject matter under the class definition including a junction between a
    semiconductor and a metallic element (e.g., wire) at a single point of
    contact therebetween.


CLS 257/42
TXT SEMICONDUCTOR IS SELENIUM OR TELLURIUM IN ELEMENTAL FORM:
    Subject matter under the class definition including a semiconductor
    material comprised of selenium or tellurium in elemental form (i.e., not in
    a compound).


CLS 257/43
TXT SEMICONDUCTOR IS AN OXIDE OF A METAL (E.G., CuO, ZnO) OR COPPER
    SULFIDE:Subject matter under the class definition wherein a semiconductor
    material includes a metal oxide or copper sulfide.

    (1)     Note.  Those variable resistors known as "coherers" which are
    active solid-state devices, and are made of a metal oxide, are found in
    this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    798,    for other active solid-state device type coherers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 1 and 223+ for passive solid-state
    coherers.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, subclass 85 for
    processes of making a light responsive device utilizing as the
    semiconductive component a metal oxide or copper sulfide and subclasses 104
    for methods of forming an electrical device utilizing as a semiconductive
    component a metal oxide or copper sulfide.


CLS 257/44
TXT WITH METAL CONTACT ALLOYED TO ELEMENTAL SEMICONDUCTOR TYPE PN JUNCTION IN
    NONREGENERATIVE STRUCTURE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the active solid-state
    device has a  pn junction formed by alloying one or more impurity metal
    contacts to an elemental semiconductor, and wherein the active solid-state
    device is not a regenerative device as defined in subclass 107 of this
    class.

    (1)     Note.  The impurity metal contact alloys with a semiconductor
    material to form a p-region or n-region, depending on the impurity used.


CLS 257/45
TXT Elongated alloyed region (e.g., thermal gradient zone melting,
    TGZM):Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein the alloyed region has at
    least one dimension substantially larger than another.


CLS 257/46
TXT In pn junction tunnel diode (Esaki diode):
    Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein the  alloyed  pn junction device
    is a tunnel diode, i.e., wherein the active solid-state device includes a
    heavily doped  pn junction wherein conduction occurs through the junction
    potential barrier due to a quantum mechanical effect even though the
    carriers which tunnel through the potential barrier do not have enough
    energy to overcome the barrier potential.


CLS 257/47
TXT In bipolar transistor structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein the alloyed pn junction device is
    a bipolar transistor, i.e., a transistor structure whose working current
    passes through semiconductor material of both polarities (p and n).


CLS 257/48
TXT TEST OR CALIBRATION STRUCTURE:
    Subject matter under the class definition in which structures are provided
    on active solid-state devices to permit or facilitate the measurement,
    test, or calibration of the characteristics of the devices.

    (1)     Note.  Active solid-state device standards are also included herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 158 for semiconductor
    device test apparatus and methods.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, particularly subclass
    18  for methods under the class definition having combined therewith a step
    of measuring an electrical condition utilizing a test element.


CLS 257/49
TXT NON-SINGLE CRYSTAL, OR RECRYSTALLIZED, SEMICONDUCTOR MATERIAL FORMS PART OF
    ACTIVE JUNCTION (INCLUDING FIELD-INDUCED ACTIVE JUNCTION):Subject matter
    under the class definition wherein there is an active junction (e.g., a
    junction between dissimilar materials, or a junction induced by an applied
    electric field, which exhibits non-linear current-voltage characteristics)
    and at least part of the active junction is formed by a semiconductor
    material in polycrystalline or amorphous form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclass 258 for
    photoelectric cells with polycrystalline or amorphous semiconductor
    material.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, particularly
    subclasses 96 and 482+ for methods of depositing amorphous semiconductive
    material functioning as an active region for an electrical device and
    subclasses 97 and 488+ for methods of depositing polycrystalline
    semiconductive material functioning as an active region for an electrical
    device.


CLS 257/50
TXT Non-single crystal, or recrystallized, active junction adapted to be
    electrically shorted (e.g., "anti-fuse" element):Subject matter under
    subclass 49 wherein the active junction is structured or arranged to form
    an electrical short circuit between the electrical terminals of the active
    device.


CLS 257/51
TXT Non-single crystal, or recrystallized, material forms active junction with
    single crystal material (e.g., monocrystal to polycrystal pn junction or
    heterojunction):Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein the active
    junction is formed by both non-single crystal material and single crystal
    material.


CLS 257/52
TXT Amorphous semiconductor material:
    Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein the non-single crystal
    semiconductor material is amorphous, i.e., non-crystalline in the sense
    that (1) there is either complete disorder in the arrangement of atoms or
    molecules of the material or (2) there is an absence of any long range
    structural order that is detectable by electron or X-ray diffraction
    patterns of the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2       through 5, for bulk effect switching in amorphous material.

    16,     for superlattice quantum well heterojunction devices of amorphous
    semiconductor material.

    646,    for amorphous semiconductor material coating to control surface
    effects.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclass 258 for
    photoelectric cells with polycrystalline or amorphous semiconductor
    material.

    148,    Metal Treatment, digest 1 for treatment of amorphous semiconductor
    material and subclass 152 for treatment of a single crystal on an amorphous
    substrate.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, particularly
    subclasses 482+ for methods for depositing amorphous semiconductor.


CLS 257/53
TXT Responsive to nonelectrical external signals (e.g., light):
    Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein the amorphous semiconductor active
    junction generates an electrical signal when subjected to non-electrical
    (e.g., optical, thermal, or vibratory) signals.


CLS 257/54
TXT With Schottky barrier to amorphous material:
    Subject matter under subclass 53 wherein the amorphous semiconductor active
    junction is formed with a metal, thereby forming a Schottky barrier.


CLS 257/55
TXT Amorphous semiconductor is alloy or contains material to change band gap
    (e.g., SixGe1-x, SiNy):Subject matter under subclass 53 wherein the
    amorphous semiconductor is an alloy or contains material to change the band
    gap of the amorphous semiconductor material (e.g., SixGe1-x see below,
    SiNy).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     for this subject matter except in a device which is not responsive
    to nonelectrical external signals.


CLS 257/56
TXT With impurity other than hydrogen to passivate dangling bonds (e.g.,
    halide):Subject matter under subclass 53 wherein the amorphous
    semiconductor material is doped with an impurity other than hydrogen (e.g.,
    a halide) for providing electrical stability by completing chemical bonds
    between semiconductor atoms which were not completed due to the amorphous
    nature of the semiconductor active layer material.


CLS 257/57
TXT Field effect device in amorphous semiconductor material:
    Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein the amorphous semiconductor active
    junction is a field effect device, i.e., one which has a conducting channel
    and two or more electrodes, one of which is denoted a source and the other
    a drain electrode, and in which the current through the conducting channel
    is controlled by an electric field coming from a voltage which is applied
    between the gate and source terminals thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See illustration under subclass 213 for various field effect
    devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, particularly
    subclasses 149+ for methods of forming a field effect transistor on an
    insulating substrate or layer (e.g., SOS, SOI, etc.).


CLS 257/58
TXT With impurity other than hydrogen to passivate dangling bonds (e.g.,
    halide):Subject matter under subclass 57 wherein the semiconductor active
    junction amorphous field effect device is doped with an impurity other than
    hydrogen (e.g., a halide) for providing electrical stability by completing
    chemical bonds between semiconductor atoms which were not completed due to
    the amorphous nature of the semiconductor active layer material.


CLS 257/59
TXT In array having structure for use as imager or display, or with transparent
    electrode:Subject matter under subclass 57 wherein a plurality of
    semiconductor active junction amorphous field effect devices are
    interconnected in a monolithic chip device for generating an image of an
    object, light from which is incident on the device, or for displaying
    signals applied to the device, or having an electrode that transmits
    optical radiation in the infrared, visible, or ultraviolet wavelength bands.


CLS 257/60
TXT With field electrode under or on a side edge of amorphous semiconductor
    material (e.g., vertical current path):Subject matter under subclass 57
    wherein the  semiconductor active junction amorphous field effect device
    has an electrode located under or on a side edge of the device to affect
    the current path through the device (e.g., providing a vertical current
    path).


CLS 257/61
TXT With heavily doped regions contacting amorphous semiconductor material
    (e.g., heavily doped source and drain):Subject matter under subclass 57
    wherein the  semiconductor active junction amorphous field effect device
    has regions in contact with the amorphous material which contain dopant
    ions with relatively heavy concentrations (e.g., 1018 to 1021 dopant atoms
    per cubic centimeter).


CLS 257/62
TXT With impurity other than hydrogen to passivate dangling bonds (e.g.,
    halide):Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein the semiconductor active
    junction amorphous field effect device is doped with an impurity other than
    hydrogen (e.g., a halide) for providing electrical stability by completing
    chemical bonds between semiconductor atoms which were not completed due to
    the amorphous nature of the semiconductor active layer material.


CLS 257/63
TXT Amorphous semiconductor is alloy or contains material to change band gap
    (e.g., SixGe1-x, SiNy):Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein the
    amorphous semiconductor material is an alloy or contains material to change
    the energy gap between the valence and conduction bands.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for this subject matter in a device which is responsive to
    nonelectrical external signals.


CLS 257/64
TXT Non-single crystal, or recrystallized, material with specified crystal
    structure (e.g., specified crystal size or orientation):Subject matter
    under subclass 49 wherein the non-single crystal semiconductor material has
    a specified crystal structure, such as a specified grain size, a preferred
    crystallographic axis, or orientation; polycrystalline material in the form
    of elongated crystallites; or particular configuration of grain boundaries.


CLS 257/65
TXT Non-single crystal, or recrystallized, material containing non-dopant
    additive, or alloy of semiconductor materials (e.g., GexSi1-x,
    polycrystalline silicon with dangling bond modifier):Subject matter under
    subclass 49 wherein the non-single crystal semiconductor is an alloy or
    contains an additive other than an electrically active dopant, such as a
    dangling bond passivator or an additive to change the band gap of the
    amorphous semiconductor  material  (e.g., SixGe1-x, SiNy).


CLS 257/66
TXT Field effect device in non-single crystal, or recrystallized, Semiconductor
    material:Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein the active solid-state
    device is a field effect device, i.e., one which operates with the
    application of a voltage across electrical terminals thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, particularly
    subclasses 149+ for methods of forming a field effect transistor on an
    insulating substrate or layer (e.g., SOS, SOI, etc.).


CLS 257/67
TXT In combination with device formed in single crystal semiconductor material
    (e.g., stacked FETs):Subject matter under subclass 66 wherein the field
    effect device is combined with an active or passive solid-state device
    located in a single crystal semiconductor material (i.e., one in which
    atoms are arranged in a regular three dimensional array).


CLS 257/68
TXT Capacitor element in single crystal semiconductor (e.g., DRAM):Subject
    matter under subclass 67 wherein the device is a capacitor element in
    single crystal material.


CLS 257/69
TXT Field effect transistor in single crystal material, complementary to that
    in non-single crystal, or recrystallized, material (e.g., CMOS):Subject
    matter under subclass 67 wherein there is a  field effect  transistor in
    single crystal material complementary in polarity to the  field effect
    device in the non-single crystal, or recrystallized, material (e.g., a CMOS
    device).


CLS 257/70
TXT Recrystallized semiconductor material:
    Subject matter under subclass 67 wherein the combined device contains a
    non-single semiconductor region of recrystallized material.

    (1)     Note.  Recrystallized semiconductor material has been processed,
    typically by heat or laser irradiation to cause growth of large regions of
    substantially single crystal material to obtain properties approximating
    those of completely single crystal material.


CLS 257/71
TXT In combination with capacitor element (e.g., DRAM):
    Subject matter under subclass 66 wherein the field effect device in the
    non-single crystal, or recrystallized, semiconductor material is combined
    with a capacitor element.


CLS 257/72
TXT In array having structure for use as imager or display, or with transparent
    electrode:Subject matter under subclass 66 wherein a plurality of field
    effect devices in non-single crystal, or recrystallized, semiconductor
    material are interconnected in a monolithic chip device for generating an
    image of an object, light from which is incident on the device, or for
    displaying signals applied to the device, or having an electrode that
    transmits optical radiation in the infrared, visible, or ultraviolet
    wavelength bands.


CLS 257/73
TXT Schottky barrier to polycrystalline semiconductor material:
    Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein the  device contains a non-ohmic,
    rectifying metal-to-polycrystalline bulk material electrical contact.


CLS 257/74
TXT Plural recrystallized semiconductor layers (e.g., "3-dimensional integrated
    circuit"):Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein the recrystallized
    material comprises more than one layer of recrystallized semiconductor
    material.


CLS 257/75
TXT Recrystallized semiconductor material:
    Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein the device contains a non-single
    crystal semiconductor material whose amorphous nature is due to
    recrystallization.


CLS 257/76
TXT SPECIFIED WIDE BAND GAP (1.5eV) SEMICONDUCTOR MATERIAL OTHER THAN GaAsP or
    GaAlAs:Subject matter under the class definition including a semiconductor
    material with a band gap (between its valance and conduction bands) greater
    that 1.5 electron volts which is not gallium arsenide phosphide or gallium
    aluminum arsenide.


CLS 257/77
TXT Diamond or silicon carbide:
    Subject matter under subclass 76 wherein the specified wide band gap
    material is diamond or silicon carbide.


CLS 257/78
TXT II-VI compound:
    Subject matter under subclass 76 wherein the specified wide band gap
    material is a compound, one element of which comes from group II, and the
    other element of which comes from group VI of the periodic table of
    elements.


CLS 257/79
TXT INCOHERENT LIGHT EMITTER STRUCTURE:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the active solid-state
    device generates incoherent light when subjected to an appropriate input
    signal.

    (1)     Note.  Lasers (coherent light generators) are classified in Class
    372, and patents directed to lasers are not to be cross-referenced in this
    or indented subclasses unless such patent contains disclosure of a light
    emitting semiconductor device which is NOT a laser or coherent light
    generator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for incoherent thin physical layer light emitter devices with
    operating principles as specified therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 552+ for solid-state light source
    circuits.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 498+ for electric
    lamp and discharge devices having solid-state luminescent materials,
    including nominally recited luminescent semiconductor type materials; and
    subclass 504 for solid-state organic phosphor material luminescent devices.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 760+ and 766+ for
    solid-state light emitting arrays and array elements.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 84 for light source or light source support
    and luminescent material and subclass 800 (cross-reference art collection)
    for light emitting diode light sources.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, particularly
    subclasses 22+ for methods of forming a semiconductor device which may be
    emissive of either coherent or incoherent radiation.


CLS 257/80
TXT In combination with or also constituting light responsive device:Subject
    matter under subclass 79 wherein the light emitting active semiconductor
    device is combined with a separate device which generates an electrical
    signal when light impinges upon it or the active device both emits light
    when stimulated and generates an electrical signal in response to light
    impingent thereupon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 551 for signal isolators involving a light
    source and photodetector.


CLS 257/81
TXT With specific housing or contact structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the combined light emitting and
    light responsive device is provided with a particular housing or electrical
    contact structure.


CLS 257/82
TXT Discrete light emitting and light responsive devices:
    Subject matter under subclass 81 wherein the device with a specific housing
    or contact structure contains separate light emitting and light responsive
    elements.


CLS 257/83
TXT Light coupled transistor structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the active solid-state device has
    a pair of rectifying junctions, a first of which when forward biased
    produces light which, when absorbed in the depletion region of the second
    junction when reverse biased, produces a current through the second
    junction, with the first junction functioning similarly to the emitter-base
    junction, and the second junction functioning similarly to the
    base-collector junction, of an ordinary bipolar transistor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 551 for signal isolator for optically
    coupled light emitter and light detector combinations wherein the devices
    are used to isolate electrical signals.


CLS 257/84
TXT Combined in integrated structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the light emitting and light
    responsive devices are combined in a single crystal monolithic structure.


CLS 257/85
TXT With heterojunction:
    Subject matter under subclass 84 wherein the device contains a
    heterojunction, i.e., wherein the junction separates semiconductor
    materials of different chemical composition.


CLS 257/86
TXT Active layer of indirect band gap semiconductor:
    Subject matter under subclass 79 wherein the light emitting active region
    is in or between semiconductor materials in which direct transitions of
    electrons from conduction to valance bands do not take place.

    (1)     Note.  Transitions may take place in steps due to trapping levels
    located in the forbidden band between the conduction and valance bands.


CLS 257/87
TXT With means to facilitate electron-hole recombination (e.g., isoelectronic
    traps such as nitrogen in GaP):Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein the
    light emitting active region with an indirect band gap layer has means to
    facilitate electron-hole recombination (e.g., isoelectronic traps such as
    nitrogen in gallium phosphide).


CLS 257/88
TXT Plural light emitting devices (e.g., matrix, 7-segment array):Subject
    matter under subclass 79 wherein the light emitting active semiconductor
    device contains more than one light emitting active junction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 760+ and 766+ for
    solid-state light emitting arrays and array elements.


CLS 257/89
TXT Multi-color emission:
    Subject matter under subclass 88 wherein different light emitting devices
    emit light of different hues.


CLS 257/90
TXT With heterojunction:
    Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein there is at least one
    heterojunction, i.e., wherein the junction separates semiconductor
    materials of different chemical composition.


CLS 257/91
TXT With shaped contacts or opaque masking:
    Subject matter under subclass 88 wherein the plural light emitting devices
    have electrical contacts with specific shapes or are combined with optical
    elements which are impervious to light emitted by the devices and are
    placed in the path of light emitted by the devices.


CLS 257/92
TXT Alphanumeric segmented array:
    Subject matter under subclass 88 wherein the plural light emitting devices
    are structured and arranged in segments of arabic numerals or alphabet
    letters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 760+ and 766+ for
    solid-state light emitting arrays  and array elements.


CLS 257/93
TXT With electrical isolation means in integrated circuit structure:Subject
    matter under subclass 88 wherein means to provide electrical isolation,
    i.e., to prevent electrical short circuits, with respect to each light
    emitting device, are provided in a single, monolithic chip structure.


CLS 257/94
TXT With heterojunction:
    Subject matter under subclass 79 wherein there is at least one junction
    between semiconductor materials of different chemical compositions.

    (1)     Note.  See the illustration of a heterojunction device in subclass
    183.


CLS 257/95
TXT With contoured external surface (e.g., dome shape to facilitate light
    emission):Subject matter under subclass 94 wherein the  light emitting
    device has an external surface with a particular geometric shape, for
    example, a dome shape to facilitate emission of light from the light
    emitting device, in spite of it being made of semiconductor material of
    relatively high index of refraction.


CLS 257/96
TXT Plural heterojunctions in same device:
    Subject matter under subclass 94 wherein the  heterojunction light emitting
    device has more than one heterojunction.


CLS 257/97
TXT More than two heterojunctions in same device:
    Subject matter under subclass 96 wherein the light emitting device has more
    than two heterojunctions.


CLS 257/98
TXT With reflector, opaque mask, or optical element (e.g., lens, optical fiber,
    index of refraction matching layer, luminescent material layer, filter)
    integral with device or device enclosure or package:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 wherein the light emitting active junction
    device is combined with one or more optical elements (e.g., to transmit or
    shape or otherwise affect light emitted by the device); and the optical
    element is an integral part of the device or of the housing, encapsulant,
    or other device enclosure or package.


CLS 257/99
TXT With housing or contact structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 wherein the light emitting active junction
    device is combined with a housing or electrical contact structure.


CLS 257/100
TXT Encapsulated:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 wherein the light emitting active junction
    device is embedded in a protective coating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 52.2 for potted
    or encapsulated electrical devices.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclass 936 for potting material or coating
    for electrical conductors.


CLS 257/101
TXT With particular dopant concentration or concentration profile (e.g., graded
    junction):

    Subject matter under subclass 79 wherein the light emitting active junction
    has a particular concentration of dopant ions or profile in a given
    direction or cross sectional area or volume.


CLS 257/102
TXT With particular dopant material (e.g., zinc as dopant in GaAs):

    Subject matter under subclass 79 wherein the dopant material of the active
    junction is specified.


CLS 257/103
TXT With particular semiconductor material:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 wherein the active junction is in or
    between semiconductor material whose composition is specified.


CLS 257/104
TXT TUNNELING PN JUNCTION (E.G., ESAKI DIODE) DEVICE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the active solid-state
    device includes a heavily doped pn junction where conduction occurs through
    the junction potential barrier due to a quantum mechanical effect even
    though the carriers which tunnel through the potential barrier do not have
    enough energy to overcome the barrier potential.

    (1)     Note.  PN Junction tunnel diodes operated under forward bias are
    often referred to as Esaki diodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for an Esaki diode having a metal contact alloyed to elemental
    semiconductor type pn junction in a non-regenerative structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclass 134 for a digital
    logic device which includes a tunnel diode.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 195 for stable state circuits utilizing a tunnel diode;
    subclass 326 for limiting, clipping, or clamping using a tunnel diode;
    subclass 402 for a delay controlled switch with tunnel diode; subclasses
    420 and 499 for gating circuits utilizing transistors or diodes
    respectively which use tunnel diodes; and subclass 570 for miscellaneous
    tunnel diode circuits.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 107 for tunnel diode oscillators.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 100 for
    tunnel diode current responsive fault sensors.


CLS 257/105
TXT In three or more terminal device:

    Subject matter under subclass 104 wherein the tunnel junction is part of an
    active solid-state electronic device which has three or more electrical
    terminals (e.g., transistors or thyristors).


CLS 257/106
TXT Reverse bias tunneling structure (e.g., "backward" diode, true Zener
    diode):Subject matter under subclass 104 wherein the tunnel junction is
    structured to permit quantum mechanical tunneling of carriers in a reverse
    bias mode, i.e., when the p-side of the junction is connected to a negative
    voltage source and the n-side of the junction is connected to a positive
    voltage source.

    (1)     Note.  In silicon, such conduction occurs when the junction
    breakdown voltage is less than approximately 5.6 volts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, digest 174 for treatment of Zener diodes.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 231 for
    systems using a Zener diode and being in shunt with a load.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 194 and 195 for stable state circuits with a zener or
    back diode respectively; subclass 326 for limiting, clipping, or clamping
    utilizing a zener diode; subclass 421 for gating circuits having a
    transistor which utilizes a zener effect; subclass 502 for a gating circuit
    with zener diode; and subclass 584 for a miscellaneous circuit utilizing a
    zener diode.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 197, for
    relay time delay safety or protection devices including, for example, a
    Zener diode.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 128 for pulse counting or dividing chains
    which include bi-stable semiconductor devices with only two electrodes,
    e.g., tunnel diodes.


CLS 257/107
TXT REGENERATIVE TYPE SWITCHING DEVICE (E.G., SCR, COMFET, THYRISTOR):Subject
    matter under the class definition wherein the active solid-state device
    acts as if it has two or more active emitter junctions each of which is
    associated with a separate, equivalent transistor having an individual gain
    and, when initiated by a base region current, the equivalent transistors
    mutually drive each other in a regenerative manner to lower the voltage
    drop between the emitters.

    (1)     Note.  If the current is above a level IH, called the "holding
    current", then the device will remain ON when the triggering signal is
    removed by the regenerative feedback therebetween, and is then said to be
    "latched".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 648 for circuits employing
    silicon controlled rectifiers (SCRs).

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 199+ for a bistable circuit which includes diverse
    solid-state devices such as an SCR, subclasses 392+ for a delay controlled
    switch which may include an SCR, and subclasses 438+ for gating circuits
    which may use a thyristor or SCR.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 100+ and
    205 for circuits employing thyristors (e.g., silicon controlled rectifiers
    (SCRs)).

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 27+, 54,  57+, 68,
    85+, 96+, 128+, 135+, and 160+ for circuits employing thyristors (e.g.,
    silicon controlled rectifiers (SCRs)).

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, subclasses 917+ for circuits
    employing thyristors (e.g., silicon controlled rectifiers (SCRs)).

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, particularly
    subclasses 133+ for methods of forming a regenerative type switching device.


CLS 257/108
TXT Controlled by nonelectrical, nonoptical external signal (e.g., magnetic
    field, pressure, thermal):

    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein the regenerative switching device
    is controlled by an input signal other than an optical or electrical signal
    (e.g., by a magnetic field) or by mechanical stress.


CLS 257/109
TXT Having only two terminals and no control electrode (gate), e.g., Shockley
    diode:Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein the regenerative switching
    device has only two electrical terminals, neither one of which is a control
    electrode (e.g., gate or base electrode).


CLS 257/110
TXT More than four semiconductor layers of alternating conductivity types
    (e.g., pnpnpn structure, 5 layer bidirectional diacs, etc.):Subject matter
    under subclass 109 wherein the two terminal device with no control
    electrode has more than four layers of semiconductor material, each layer
    having an electrical conductivity type (e.g., p-type or n-type) which
    differs from that of each adjacent layer.


CLS 257/111
TXT Triggered by VBO overvoltage means:
    Subject matter under subclass 109 wherein the two terminal device with no
    control electrode includes means to apply a voltage larger than the
    breakover voltage VBO to initiate operation of the device.


CLS 257/112
TXT With highly-doped breakdown diode trigger:
    Subject matter under subclass 109 wherein the two terminal device with no
    control electrode includes a diode portion which is heavily doped to
    decrease its breakdown voltage to trigger the device into operation.


CLS 257/113
TXT With light activation:
    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein the regenerative switching device
    is activated (e.g., turned on and/or off) by light impinging on a light
    sensitive portion of the device.


CLS 257/114
TXT With separate light detector integrated on chip with regenerative switching
    device:Subject matter under subclass 113 wherein the light sensitive
    portion is separate from the regenerative switching device, and is
    contained in a physically separated area of a single, monolithic chip with
    the regenerative switching device.


CLS 257/115
TXT With electrical trigger signal amplification means (e.g., amplified gate,
    "pilot thyristor", etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 113 wherein means are provided to amplify the
    electrical signal generated by the light sensitive portion, in order to
    trigger the regenerative switching device.


CLS 257/116
TXT With light conductor means (e.g., light fiber or light pipe) integral with
    device or device enclosure or package:Subject matter under subclass 113
    wherein the active semiconductor device is provided with means to conduct
    light (e.g., as light fiber or light pipe) to the light sensitive portion,
    and the light conductor means is an integral part of the device or of the
    housing, encapsulant or other device enclosure, or package.


CLS 257/117
TXT In groove or with thinned semiconductor portion:
    Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein the light sensitive portion is
    located in a groove in the device or wherein it is covered by a relatively
    thin portion of semiconductor material.


CLS 257/118
TXT With groove or thinned light sensitive portion:
    Subject matter under subclass 113 wherein the light sensitive portion is
    located in a groove in the surface of the device or is located close to the
    surface of the device in a thinned region of the device so that only a
    relatively thin portion of the device has to be traversed by light.


CLS 257/119
TXT Bidirectional rectifier with control electrode (gate) (e.g., Triac):Subject
    matter under subclass 107 wherein the regenerative switching device has a
    control electrode, can conduct in both forward and reverse directions, and
    can be triggered into conduction by a pulse applied to its control
    electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for bidirectional rectifiers with no control electrode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 240
    and 325 for circuit having unidirectional elements with bidirectional pass.


CLS 257/120
TXT Six or more semiconductor layers of alternating conductivity types (e.g.,
    npnpnpn structure):Subject matter under subclass 119 wherein the
    bidirectional rectifier with control electrode contains six or more layers
    of semiconductor material, each of which has a different conductivity type,
    (e.g., n-type or  p-type) which differs from that of each adjacent layer.


CLS 257/121
TXT With diode or transistor in reverse path:
    Subject matter under subclass 119 wherein a diode (i.e., a device which
    passes current in only one direction) is connected to conduct current in
    one direction, with a regenerative switching device with a control
    electrode connected to conduct current in the other direction to produce a
    bi-directionally conducting regenerative switching device.


CLS 257/122
TXT Lateral:
    Subject matter under subclass 119 wherein the bidirectional rectifier with
    control electrode is of the lateral type, i.e., when viewed in cross
    section, the two main electrodes (e.g., anode and cathode) are arranged
    horizontally, side-by-side in the same surface of the semiconductor body.


CLS 257/123
TXT With trigger signal amplification (e.g., amplified gate):
    Subject matter under subclass 119 wherein the bidirectional rectifier with
    control electrode is combined with means to amplify the electrical signal
    applied to the control electrode to trigger the device.


CLS 257/124
TXT Combined with field effect transistor structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 119 wherein the bidirectional rectifier with
    control electrode includes or is combined with a  field effect  transistor
    structure, i.e., a transistor in which the current through a conducting
    channel is controlled by an electric field coming from a voltage which is
    applied between the gate and source terminals thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See illustration under subclass 213 for various field effect
    devices.


CLS 257/125
TXT Controllable emitter shunting:
    Subject matter under subclass 124 wherein the  field effect  transistor
    structure is connected to shunt one of the emitter-base junctions of the
    regenerative structure under control of the voltage applied to the gate of
    the  field effect  transistor.


CLS 257/126
TXT With means to separate a device into sections having different conductive
    polarity:Subject matter under subclass 119 wherein the bidirectional
    rectifier with control electrode has means separating portions thereof
    which have different conductive polarity.


CLS 257/127
TXT Guard ring or groove:
    Subject matter under subclass 126 wherein the means to separate portions of
    the device having different conductive polarity is or includes a groove, or
    a guard ring, i.e., a  pn junction region in the body of the device located
    and/or configured to reduce electric field strength at a given applied
    voltage.


CLS 257/128
TXT Having overlapping sections of different conductive polarity:Subject matter
    under subclass 119 wherein the bidirectional rectifier with control
    electrode has outer emitter regions which overlap one another in at least
    one portion.


CLS 257/129
TXT With means to increase reverse breakdown voltage:
    Subject matter under subclass 119 wherein the bidirectional rectifier with
    control electrode has means associated therewith to increase the reverse
    voltage which may be applied without causing electrical  breakdown.


CLS 257/130
TXT Switching speed enhancement means:
    Subject matter under subclass 119 wherein the bidirectional rectifier with
    control electrode includes or is combined with means to increase the speed
    at which the device switches.


CLS 257/131
TXT Recombination centers or deep level dopants:
    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein the switching speed enhancement
    means include (1) centers wherein excess holes and electrons recombine and
    are removed as charge carriers in the device or (2) dopant ions with energy
    levels that are located in the forbidden band of the active semiconductor
    material of the device.


CLS 257/132
TXT Five or more layer unidirectional structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein the regenerative active
    solid-state device has five or more layers of semiconductor material
    producing at least four active junctions, and is operable in a single
    electrical direction.


CLS 257/133
TXT Combined with field effect transistor:
    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein the regenerative device includes
    or is combined with a  field effect  transistor, i.e., a transistor in
    which the current through a conducting channel is controlled by an electric
    field coming from a voltage which is applied between the gate and source
    terminals thereof.


CLS 257/134
TXT J-FET (junction field effect transistor):
    Subject matter under subclass 133 wherein the  field effect transistor
    combined with the regenerative action junction type switching device is  a
    junction  field effect  transistor, i.e., a  field effect  transistor
    wherein the gate region is isolated from the conducting channel by a
    rectifying pn junction or Schottky barrier junction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    287,    for power JFET devices.

    504,    for JFET type isolation.


CLS 257/135
TXT Vertical (i.e., where the source is located above the drain or vice
    versa):Subject matter under subclass 134 wherein the operating current path
    of the JFET is perpendicular to the plane of its main surface.


CLS 257/136
TXT Enhancement mode (e.g., so-called SITs):
    Subject matter under subclass 135 in which no current flows except for
    leakage current, when the gate to source voltage is zero.

    (1)     Note.  Conduction does not begin until the gate voltage reaches a
    finite threshold value.

    (2)     Note.  Compare this with depletion mode J-FETS in which maximum
    current is passed by the transistor at a zero gate potential and current
    decreases as the gate voltage increases.


CLS 257/137
TXT Having controllable emitter shunt:
    Subject matter under subclass 133 wherein the regenerative switching device
    is combined with a junction field effect transistor that is connected
    across an emitter-base junction of the regenerative device to controllably
    divert current from the emitter-base junction.


CLS 257/138
TXT Having gate turn off (GTO) feature:
    Subject matter under subclass 137 wherein the regenerative switch is
    configured to permit application of sufficient gate current to switch the
    regenerative switch to the OFF state.


CLS 257/139
TXT With extended latchup current level (e.g., COMFET device):
    Subject matter under subclass 133 wherein the regenerative active junction
    type switching device (e.g., a conductivity modulated FET) includes means
    to provide regenerative action without latchup over an extended current
    range of the device (i.e., by increasing IH).


CLS 257/140
TXT Combined with other solid-state active device in integrated
    structure:Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein the extended latchup
    current level device is combined with another solid-state active device in
    a monolithic single crystal chip structure.


CLS 257/141
TXT Lateral structure, i.e., current flow parallel to main device
    surface:Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein the extended latchup
    current level device is structured so that operating current flows parallel
    to the main device surface (i.e., horizontally or laterally).


CLS 257/142
TXT Having impurity doping for gain reduction:
    Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein the extended latchup current
    level device has impurity dopant to reduce device regenerative gain, i.e.,
    the gain or amplification of one or more of the active junction portions
    connected in regenerative fashion.


CLS 257/143
TXT Having anode shunt means:
    Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein the extended latchup current
    level device has means connected across the emitter-base junction of the
    PNP transistor portion of the regenerative device to controllably divert
    current from the emitter-base junction.


CLS 257/144
TXT Cathode emitter or cathode electrode feature:
    Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein the extended latchup current
    level device has a particular cathode emitter or cathode electrode feature.


CLS 257/145
TXT Low impedance channel contact extends below surface:
    Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein the extended latchup current
    level device has an electrical contact extending from the device surface
    into the body of the device which is connected to the channel of the field
    effect  transistor portion and wherein the contact has a relatively low
    electrical impedance.


CLS 257/146
TXT Combined with other solid-state active device in integrated
    structure:Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein the regenerative active
    junction type switching device is combined with one or more active or
    passive electronic solid-state devices in a unitary, monolithic, integrated
    structure.


CLS 257/147
TXT With extended latchup current level (e.g., gate turn off "GTO"
    device):Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein the regenerative
    switching device includes means to provide regenerative action without
    latchup over an extended current range of the device, i.e., extends IH as
    defined in subclass 107.

    (1)     Note.  Another name for this device is a gate controlled switch.


CLS 257/148
TXT Having impurity doping for gain reduction:
    Subject matter under subclass 147 wherein the regenerative switching device
    has impurity dopant to reduce device gain of one of the equivalent
    transistors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142,    for this subject matter in a COMFET device.


CLS 257/149
TXT Having anode shunt means:
    Subject matter under subclass 147 wherein the regenerative switching device
    has means connected across the emitter-base junction of the PNP transistor
    section of the regenerative device to divert current from the emitter-base
    junction.


CLS 257/150
TXT With specified housing or external terminal:
    Subject matter under subclass 147 wherein the regenerative switching device
    is provided with means to enclose it or a terminal means located external
    to an enclosure for the device.


CLS 257/151
TXT External gate terminal structure or composition:
    Subject matter under subclass 150 wherein the external electrical terminal
    structural features or material composition is specified.


CLS 257/152
TXT Cathode emitter or cathode electrode feature:
    Subject matter under subclass 147 wherein the extended latchup current
    level device has a particular cathode emitter or cathode electrode feature.


CLS 257/153
TXT Gate region or electrode feature:
    Subject matter under subclass 147 wherein the extended latchup current
    level device has a particular gate (control) electrode feature.


CLS 257/154
TXT With resistive region connecting separate sections of device:Subject matter
    under subclass 107 wherein the regenerative active junction type switching
    device has a resistive region or portion connecting discrete regions of the
    device.


CLS 257/155
TXT With switching speed enhancement means (e.g., Schottky contact):Subject
    matter under subclass 107 wherein the regenerative active junction type
    switching device is provided with means to increase its switching speed.


CLS 257/156
TXT Having deep level dopants or recombination centers:
    Subject matter under subclass 155 wherein the regenerative device has deep
    level dopants or electron-hole recombination centers with energy levels
    that are within the forbidden energy band and widely spaced from the
    conduction and valence bands of the semiconductor device.


CLS 257/157
TXT With integrated trigger signal amplification means (e.g., amplified gate,
    "pilot thyristor", etc.):Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein the
    regenerative switching device has means to amplify the control current of
    the device, which is physically integrated with the regenerative switching
    device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    for light activated regenerative devices with trigger signal
    amplification.

    123,    for bidirectional regenerative devices with trigger signal
    amplification.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 250+ for semiconductor amplifying devices
    (e.g., transistors


CLS 257/158
TXT Three or more amplification stages:
    Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the amplification means has three
    or more stages of amplification.


CLS 257/159
TXT Transistor as amplifier:
    Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the amplification means is a
    transistor (i.e., an active semiconductor device having three or more
    electrodes).


CLS 257/160
TXT With distributed amplified current:
    Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the regenerative device with
    amplification means produces amplified current which is distributed by
    electrodes to other portions of the device.


CLS 257/161
TXT With a turn-off diode:
    Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the regenerative device with
    amplification means is integrally provided with a diode, i.e., a
    solid-state active rectifying two terminal device, to bypass the amplifying
    stage(s), in order to switch OFF the regenerative device.


CLS 257/162
TXT Lateral structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein the regenerative active junction
    type switching device has a lateral structure, i.e., one in which the
    active junctions are arranged so that electric current flows from side to
    side, rather than from top to bottom of the device.


CLS 257/163
TXT Emitter region feature:
    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein the active emitter junction
    region of the regenerative device has a particular characteristic.


CLS 257/164
TXT Multi-emitter region (e.g., emitter geometry or emitter ballast
    resistor):Subject matter under subclass 163 wherein the regenerative
    switching device has more than one emitter region.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    580+,   for bipolar transistors with emitter ballast resistors.


CLS 257/165
TXT Laterally symmetric regions:
    Subject matter under subclass 164 wherein the plural emitters are located
    in regions of the device which are symmetrical in a horizontal direction.


CLS 257/166
TXT Radially symmetric regions:
    Subject matter under subclass 164 wherein the plural emitters are located
    in regions of the device which are symmetrical extending radially in a
    horizontal direction from a predetermined emitter location.


CLS 257/167
TXT Having at least four external electrodes:
    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein the regenerative active junction
    switching device has at least four electrodes connected to the outside of
    the device.


CLS 257/168
TXT With means to increase breakdown voltage:
    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein the regenerative active junction
    type switching device includes means to increase the reverse voltage which
    the device can sustain without breaking down.


CLS 257/169
TXT High resistivity base layer:
    Subject matter under subclass 168 wherein the means for increasing
    breakdown voltage includes a  base (as contrasted with emitter or
    collector) layer which has a relatively high electrical resistivity.


CLS 257/170
TXT Surface feature (e.g., guard ring, groove, mesa, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 168 wherein the means for increasing
    breakdown voltage includes a surface feature (e.g., a guard ring or groove
    or mesa).


CLS 257/171
TXT Edge feature (e.g., beveled edge):
    Subject matter under subclass 170 wherein the surface feature for
    increasing breakdown voltage is an edge feature (e.g., a beveled) as
    contrasted with a right angled edge.


CLS 257/172
TXT With means to lower "ON" voltage drop:
    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein the regenerative active junction
    type switching device comprises means to lower the voltage drop across the
    main terminals when the switch is operated in the ON mode.


CLS 257/173
TXT Device protection (e.g., from overvoltage):
    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein the regenerative active junction
    type switching device includes means for protecting the device from
    destructive overloads (e.g., from operating voltage above a particular
    threshold level).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    safety and protection of systems and devices.


CLS 257/174
TXT Rate of rise of current (e.g., dI/dt):
    Subject matter under subclass 173 wherein the parameter for which
    protection means is provided is the rate of rise of operating current in
    the device.


CLS 257/175
TXT With means to control triggering (e.g., gate electrode configuration, Zener
    diode firing, dV/Dt control, transient control by ferrite bead,
    etc.):Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein the regenerative active
    junction type switching device includes means for controlling device
    turn-on.

    (1)     Note.  Transient electrical phenomena, e.g., damped oscillations or
    surges in operation current or voltage following a sudden change in the
    applied voltage or current to the device, may be controlled, for example,
    by use of ferrite bead or capacitive input means.


CLS 257/176
TXT Located in an emitter-gate region:
    Subject matter under subclass 175 wherein the signal control mechanism is a
    transistor emitter junction with the gate region, and is used as the gate
    input.


CLS 257/177
TXT With housing or external electrode:
    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein the regenerative active junction
    type switching device includes a structure in which to place the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81      and 82, for a light emitting device in combination with or
    constituting a light responsive device, with specific housing structure.

    99,     for light emitting device with  specific housing structure.

    433     and 434, for light responsive device with housing or encapsulation
    means.

    573,    for Darlington configuration bipolar transistor structure with
    housing or contact structure.

    584,    for enlarged emitter device bipolar transistor means having housing
    or contact.

    602,    for a voltage variable capacitance device with specified housing or
    contact.

    660,    for means to shield a device contained in a housing.


CLS 257/178
TXT With means to avoid stress between electrode and active device (e.g.,
    thermal expansion matching of electrode to semiconductor):Subject matter
    under subclass 177 wherein the device has electrode means connected to its
    terminals and is further provided with means to avoid creation of stress
    between the active device and the electrode means.

    (1)     Note.  The means to avoid such stress may include means to
    thermally match the electrode to the semiconductor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 449+ for stress relief means for
    a conductor-to-terminal joint.


CLS 257/179
TXT With malleable electrode (e.g., silver electrode layer):
    Subject matter under subclass 178 wherein the electrode means is soft and
    pliable.


CLS 257/180
TXT Stud mount:
    Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein the housing is provided with a
    threaded or serrated insert or post used for connecting heat sinks or
    terminals to the device.


CLS 257/181
TXT With large area flexible electrodes in press contact with opposite sides of
    active semiconductor chip and surrounded by an insulating element, (e.g.,
    ring):Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein the housing is provided
    with large area flexible electrodes in press contact with opposite sides of
    active semiconductor chip and surrounded by an insulating element (e.g.,
    ring).


CLS 257/182
TXT With lead feedthrough means on side of housing:
    Subject matter under subclass 181 wherein means are provided on a side of
    the housing through which electrical leads extending to or from the device
    can be located.


CLS 257/183
TXT HETEROJUNCTION DEVICE:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the active solid-state
    device contains a heterojunction, i.e.,  a boundary between different
    regions, one of which is made of a material that differs from that of the
    other region.

    (1)     Note.  See illustration, below, for an example of a heterojunction
    bipolar transistor.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10      and 11, for a heterojunction involving a low workfunction layer for
    electron emission.

    12      through 27, for heterojunction devices which involve quantum well,
    superlattice or ballistic (hot carrier) transport devices.

    51,     for a non-single crystal material/monocrystal heterojunction device.

    85,     for a light emitting structure device combined with a light
    responsive device in an integrated structure wherein the light responsive
    device has a heterojunction.

    90,     for plural light emitting heterojunction devices.

    94      through 97, for heterojunction light emitter structures.

    193,    for a heterojunction charge transfer device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, subclasses 43-50 for semiconductor
    lasers which may contain heterojunctions.


CLS 257/183.1
TXT Charge transfer device:
    Subject matter under subclass 183 in which storage sites for packets of
    electric charge are induced at or below the surface of the active
    solid-state (semiconductor) device by an electric field applied to the
    device and wherein carrier potential energy per unit charge minima is
    established at a given storage site and such minima is transferred to one
    or more adjacent storage sites in a serial manner and which contains a
    junction between two semiconductor materials of different chemical
    compositions each different composition having a different carrier affinity.

    (1)     Note.  Typically, heterojunctions are between materials which
    additionally have different band gaps, but that is not true of all
    heterojunctions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215,    for charge transfer devices which do not involve heterojunctions.


CLS 257/184
TXT Light responsive structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein the heterojunction generates an
    electrical output when light impinges on it.


CLS 257/185
TXT Staircase (including graded composition) device:
    Subject matter under subclass 184 wherein the active region contains a
    number of layers forming plural heterojunctions and the carrier (i.e.,
    electron or hole) affinities of each layer incrementally increase or
    decrease progressively across the active region thickness, so that the
    energy level diagram of the active region, when under electrical bias,
    resembles a staircase.

    (1)     Note.  Staircase effect devices may also be provided with a graded
    composition, i.e., wherein the chemical composition of the semiconductor
    forming the heterojunction varies in a direction either perpendicular or
    parallel to the junction.

    (2)     Note.  See illustration, below, for an example of a staircase
    bandgap.


CLS 257/186
TXT Avalanche photodetection structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 184 wherein carriers generated in the active
    region of the device in response to light incident thereupon, achieve
    enough kinetic energy to knock further carriers from the crystalline
    lattice of the active region producing an avalanche or snowball increase in
    operating current level.

    (1)     Note.  Avalanche photodetector devices may have bipolar transistor
    structure, i.e., wherein the heterojunction device has three terminals - an
    emitter, a collector and a base, the operating current comprising both
    positive and negative electrical charges.


CLS 257/187
TXT Having transistor structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 184 wherein the light responsive
    heterojunction device has three terminals - an emitter, collector, and a
    base; a source, drain, and gate; or a hybrid combination of each, which can
    provide gain or can be used as a switch.


CLS 257/188
TXT Having narrow energy band gap (<1eV) layer (e.g., PbSnTe, HgCdTe,
    etc.):Subject matter under subclass 184 wherein the light responsive device
    contains a narrow energy band gap (<1eV) layer (e.g., PbSnTe or HgCdTe).


CLS 257/189
TXT Layer is a group III-V semiconductor compound:
    Subject matter under subclass 188 wherein the narrow energy band gap layer
    is a semiconductor compound made of one element taken from periodic table
    group III elements and another element taken from periodic table group V
    elements.


CLS 257/190
TXT With lattice constant mismatch (e.g., with buffer layer to accommodate
    mismatch):Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein at least one of the
    materials that form the heterojunction has a crystalline lattice constant
    which is made to differ from the lattice constant of the other material
    which forms the heterojunction.

    (1)     Note.  Typically, lattice mismatches are sought to be avoided.
    However, sometimes they are desired, as for example, when the resulting
    strain favorably affects the properties of the strained semiconductor.

    (2)     Note.  A buffer layer may be provided to accommodate a lattice
    mismatch, i.e., a layer of material which mechanically separates the layers
    which have different lattice constants.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for strained layer heterojunctions in a superlattice.


CLS 257/191
TXT Having graded composition:
    Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein the chemical composition of the
    semiconductor forming the heterojunction varies continuously in a direction
    either perpendicular or parallel to the junction.


CLS 257/192
TXT Field effect transistor:
    Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein the heterojunction is part of a
    field effect transistor, i.e., wherein the current through the active
    heterojunction is controlled by a voltage applied between gate and source
    terminals of the device.


CLS 257/194
TXT Doping on side of heterojunction with lower carrier affinity (e.g., high
    electron mobility transistor (HEMT)):Subject matter under subclass 192
    wherein the heterojunction field effect transistor has impurity dopant on
    the side of the heterojunction with lower affinity for the charge carriers
    (holes or electrons) supplied by the dopant, so that the charge carriers
    spill over the heterojunction into the side with higher carrier affinity.

    (1)     Note.  Typically, the spilled over charge carriers constitute the
    conductive channel connecting the source and drain electrodes.

    (2)     Note.  Such devices may be provided with a channel layer of
    semiconductor material other than group III-V compound semiconductor (e.g.,
    IV-VI compound semiconductor, germanium semiconductor, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12      through 27, for other closely related quantum well and ballistic
    transport field effect devices.


CLS 257/195
TXT Combined with diverse type device:
    Subject matter under subclass 194 wherein the heterojunction field effect
    transistor with impurity dopant on the side of the heterojunction with
    lower affinity for the charge carriers supplied by the dopant is combined
    with another electronic device.

    (1)     Note.  Typical diverse devises include complementary  field effect
    transistors, i.e., a  field effect  transistor of opposite conductivity
    type to the heterojunction field effect  transistor; and field effect
    transistors of different threshold voltages (e.g., enhancement and
    depletion HEMTs in same integrated circuit).


CLS 257/196
TXT Both semiconductors of the heterojunction are the same conductivity type
    (i.e., either n or p):Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein the
    semiconductor materials which define the heterojunction are of the same
    conductivity type (e.g., both p or both n).


CLS 257/197
TXT Bipolar transistor:
    Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein the heterojunction is part of a
    bipolar transistor, i.e., a transistor structure whose working current
    passes through semiconductor material of both polarities (p and n) which
    form a heterojunction portion of the transistor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, particularly
    subclasses 312+ for methods of forming a heterojunction bipolar transistor.


CLS 257/198
TXT Wide band gap emitter:
    Subject matter under subclass 197 wherein the bipolar transistor with an
    active heterojunction region involves a charge carrier emitter region made
    of a semiconductor material having an energy gap between its conduction and
    valence bands which is greater than the energy gap of the base region
    forming a heterojunction therewith.


CLS 257/199
TXT Avalanche diode (e.g., so-called "Zener" diode having breakdown voltage
    greater than 6 volts, including heterojunction IMPATT type microwave
    diodes):Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein the heterojunction device
    is a diode in which conduction under reverse bias conditions is caused by
    avalanche  breakdown at an applied voltage greater than 6 volts.

    (1)     Note.  One example of such a device is a microwave transit time
    device (e.g., IMPATT diode).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    481,    for a Schottky barrier avalanche diode.

    551,    for an avalanche diode used as a voltage reference element combined
    with pn junction isolation means in an integrated circuit.

    603     through 606, for avalanche diodes not classified above those
    subclasses in this schedule, i.e., not involving a heterojunction in a
    non-charge transfer device, or a Schottky barrier, or one used as a voltage
    reference element with pn junction isolation means in an integrated circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 107+ for solid-state active element
    oscillators.


CLS 257/200
TXT Heterojunction formed between semiconductor materials which differ in that
    they belong to different periodic table groups (e.g., Ge (group IV) - GaAs
    (group III-V) or InP (group III-V) - CdTe (group II-VI)):Subject matter
    under subclass 183 wherein the heterojunction is formed between
    semiconductor materials which differ in that they belong to different
    periodic table groups (e.g., Ge (group IV) - GaAs  (group III-V) or InP
    (group III-V) - CdTe (group II-VI)).


CLS 257/201
TXT Between different group IV-VI or II-VI or III-V compounds other than
    GaAs/GaAlAs:Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein the heterojunction
    forms a boundary between different group IV-VI or group II-VI or group
    III-V compounds other than GaAs/GaAlAs.


CLS 257/202
TXT GATE ARRAYS:
    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a repeating geometric
    arrangement of individual structural units of solid-state devices, the
    solid-state devices of each individual structural unit being connectable
    into various different types of logic circuits in one integrated,
    monolithic chip.

    (1)     Note.  The significant distinction between a "gate array" and other
    arrays of active  solid  state  devices,  such  as read-only memories
    (ROMs), and programmable logic arrays (PLAs), is that the solid-state
    devices of each individual structural of a "gate array" can be connected
    into various different types of logic circuits, whereas in a ROM or PLA,
    each of the individual structural units is configured so that they must be
    connected into the same type of logic circuit (e.g., wherein all individual
    structural units are connected as NOR gates).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, particularly
    subclasses 128+ for methods of forming an array of devices upon a
    semiconductor substrate and selectively interconnecting the same.


CLS 257/203
TXT With particular chip input/output means:
    Subject matter under subclass 202 wherein the gate array integrated circuit
    is provided with specific means to input and output electrical signals to
    operate the device.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of particular chip input/output means include (a)
    interface circuits, i.e., circuits that connect the chip to another device
    or to a circuit and which produces necessary current and voltage
    characteristics for the interconnected devices and circuits to function
    properly, with particular active solid-state devices used in the interface
    circuits; (b) structure permitting electrical interconnection to either
    receive an input signal or to output an output signal; or (c) specific
    bonding pad or electrode configurations (i.e., wherein the input/output
    means includes a particular electrically conductive surface to which
    electrical interconnecting element (e.g., electrical leads) can be
    connected, or has a specified electrode configuration such as a power
    supply bus for the input/output means separate from those used to power the
    gate array devices.


CLS 257/204
TXT Having specific type of active device (e.g., CMOS):
    Subject matter under subclass 202 wherein the gate array is adapted to use
    a particular type of solid-state electronic device, e.g., complementary
    metal oxide semiconductor device (CMOS).


CLS 257/205
TXT With bipolar transistors or with FETs of only one channel conductivity type
    (e.g., enhancement-depletion FETs):Subject matter under subclass 202
    wherein the specific type of active device comprises bipolar transistors or
    FETs of only one channel conductivity type (i.e,  field effect  transistors
    that can be used in the enhancement or depletion mode of operation, e.g.,
    IGFETS).


CLS 257/206
TXT Particular layout of complementary FETs with regard to each other:Subject
    matter under subclass 204 wherein the CMOS device includes a plurality of
    CMOS  field effect transistors specifically arranged with regard to each
    other.


CLS 257/207
TXT With particular power supply distribution means:
    Subject matter under subclass 202 wherein the gate array is provided with
    specific means to provide electrical power to the array.


CLS 257/208
TXT With particular signal path connections:
    Subject matter under subclass 202 wherein the gate array is provided with
    specific signal path connections.


CLS 257/209
TXT Programmable signal paths (e.g., with fuse elements, laser programmable,
    etc):Subject matter under subclass 208 wherein the gate array is provided
    with means (e.g., fuse elements or laser beam irradiation) to program the
    selection of signal paths in the array.


CLS 257/210
TXT With wiring channel area:
    Subject matter under subclass 208 wherein the  signal paths in the array
    are located in an area separate from the active devices forming the
    elements of the array.


CLS 257/211
TXT Multi-level metallization:
    Subject matter under subclass 208 wherein the particular signal path
    connections include more than one layer of conductive metal deposited on a
    substrate.

    (1)     Note.  The multilayer metallization may include a layer of material
    made up of silicon in polycrystalline form or a silicide compound.


CLS 257/212
TXT CONDUCTIVITY MODULATION DEVICE (E.G., UNIJUNCTION TRANSISTOR, DOUBLE-BASE
    DIODE, CONDUCTIVITY-MODULATED TRANSISTOR):Subject matter under the class
    definition wherein the active solid-state device has a high resistivity
    semiconductor region of one conductivity type having a region of opposite
    conductivity type forming a  pn junction with a central portion of the high
    resistivity layer, with structural means provided to forward bias the pn
    junction to inject minority carriers into the high resistivity region to
    increase its conductivity through conductivity modulation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 397 and 402 for a delay controlled switch using a
    unijunction transistor and having a variable or fixed delay respectively;
    subclasses 438+ for gating circuits utilizing a unijunction transistor, and
    subclass 569 for a miscellaneous circuit which utilizes a unijunction
    transistor.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 198 for time
    delay with unijunction devices.

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, subclass 919 for unijunction
    transistor circuit trigger control means.


CLS 257/213
TXT FIELD EFFECT DEVICE:
    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a field effect
    transistor, in which the density of electrical charge (electrons or holes)
    in a semiconductor region is controlled by a voltage applied to an adjacent
    region or electrode which in operation is prevented from conducting direct
    electrical current to or from the semiconductor region by an insulator or
    barrier region.

    (1)     Note.  The conduction of current in a field effect device is along
    a path called a channel.

    (2)     Note.  See Illustration, below, for various types of field effect
    devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 116 and 117 for field effect transistor
    oscillator active elements.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclass 136 for analog to or
    from digital conversion devices with a field effect transistor.


CLS 257/214
TXT Charge injection device:
    Subject matter under subclass 213 wherein the  field effect device is a
    device in which storage sites for packets of electric charge are induced at
    or below the surface of the active solid-state (semiconductor) device by an
    electric field applied to the device and wherein carrier potential energy
    per unit charge minima are established at a given storage site and such
    charge packets are injected into the device substrate or into a data bus.

    (1)     Note.  This type device differs from a charge transfer device in
    that, in the latter, charge is transferred to adjacent charge storage sites
    in a serial manner whereas in the former, the charge is injected in a
    non-serial manner to the device substrate or a data bus.


CLS 257/215
TXT Charge transfer device:
    Subject matter under subclass 213 in which storage sites for packets of
    electric charge are induced at or below the surface of the active
    solid-state (semiconductor) device by an electric field applied to the
    device and wherein carrier potential energy per unit charge minima are
    established at a given storage site and such minima are transferred to one
    or more adjacent storage sites in a serial manner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193,    for heterojunction type charge transfer devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, subclass 60 for
    methods of making a photo-responsive semiconductor integrated circuit
    having a charge transfer device combined with another electrical device,
    subclasses 75+ for methods of making a photoresponsive charge transfer
    device, and subclasses 144+ for methods of making a charge transfer device.


CLS 257/216
TXT Majority signal carrier (e.g., buried or bulk channel, or
    peristaltic):Subject matter under subclass 215 wherein the transfer is by
    majority carriers of the semiconductor material, i.e., by electrons in
    n-type semiconductor material, and is by holes in p-type semiconductor
    material.


CLS 257/217
TXT Having a conductive means in direct contact with channel (e.g.,
    non-insulated gate):Subject matter under subclass 216 wherein an electrical
    conductor (e.g., electrode) directly contacts the channel region of the
    charge transfer device (e.g., a non-insulated gate (control) electrode).

    (1)     Note.  The conductive means in direct contact with the channel may
    be directly connected to the substrate.

    (2)     Note.  The conductive means in direct contact with the channel may
    be made of metal, forming a Schottky contact with the semiconductor channel
    material, i.e., a metal-semiconductor junction.


CLS 257/218
TXT High resistivity channel (e.g., accumulation mode) or surface channel
    (e.g., transfer of signal charge occurs at the surface of the
    semiconductor) or minority carriers at input (i.e., surface channel
    input):Subject matter under subclass 216 wherein the majority signal
    carrier charge transfer device has a channel made of relatively high
    electrical resistivity material, or where the transfer of signal charge
    takes place at the surface of the semiconductor, or where minority charge
    carriers are input into a surface channel, but majority carriers are input
    into the bulk or buried channel portion of the device.


CLS 257/219
TXT Impurity concentration variation:
    Subject matter under subclass 216 wherein the majority signal carrier
    charge transfer device contains impurity dopant ions which vary in terms of
    concentration in all or part of the channel of the device.

    (1)     Note.  The impurity dopant ion concentration may vary across the
    channel and channel substrate interface.


CLS 257/220
TXT Vertically within channel (e.g., profiled):
    Subject matter under subclass 219 wherein the impurity dopant ion
    concentration in the channel of the device varies across the channel in a
    direction perpendicular to a main surface of the device, regardless of the
    orientation of the channel (e.g., parallel or perpendicular to a main
    surface of the device).


CLS 257/221
TXT Along the length of the channel (e.g., doping variations for transfer
    directionality):

    Subject matter under subclass 219 wherein the impurity dopant ion
    concentration in the channel of the device varies along the length of the
    channel, whether the channel is horizontally or vertically oriented.


CLS 257/222
TXT Responsive to non-electrical external signal (e.g., imager):

    Subject matter under subclass 216 wherein the majority signal carrier
    charge transfer device transfers charge from one charge storage device to
    another in response to a non-electric signal (e.g., light, pressure, etc.).


CLS 257/223
TXT Having structure to improve output signal (e.g., antiblooming drain):

    Subject matter under subclass 222 wherein the non-external signal
    responsive device includes structural means, e.g., a drain element which
    reduces or eliminates optical blooming to improve the signal generated by
    the device in response to the non-electrical input signal.


CLS 257/224
TXT Channel confinement:

    Subject matter under subclass 216 wherein the majority  carrier charge
    transfer device has means to restrict the dimensions of the thin
    semiconductor conductive path region (charge transfer channel) between the
    source and drain of the device.


CLS 257/225
TXT Non-electrical input responsive (e.g., light responsive imager, input
    programmed by size of storage sites for use as a read-only memory, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 215 wherein the means that creates charge to
    be transferred is non-electrical (e.g., light).


CLS 257/226
TXT Sensor element and charge transfer device are of different materials or on
    different substrates (e.g., "hybrid "):

    Subject matter under subclass 225 wherein charge  carriers generated in
    response to the non-electrical input are generated in material which is
    different than, or is located on a different substrate than, the
    semiconductor material that contains the charge carrier storage sites.


CLS 257/227
TXT With specified dopant (e.g., photoionizable, "extrinsic" detectors for
    infrared):Subject matter under subclass 225 wherein the non-electrical
    responsive device contains specific impurity dopants.


CLS 257/228
TXT Light responsive, back illuminated:
    Subject matter under subclass 225 wherein the non-electrical input
    responsive device has two major opposed surfaces, the channel containing
    the charge carrier storage sites being at or below one surface, and wherein
    the device is responsive to light which is incident on the other major
    surface.


CLS 257/229
TXT Having structure to improve output signal (e.g., exposure control
    structure):Subject matter under subclass 225 wherein the non-electrical
    input responsive device contains structural means to improve the electrical
    signal it generates in response to the non-electrical input signal.

    (1)     Note.  The structural means to improve the output signal may
    control the amount of charge generated by light incident on the device
    which is transferred as output signal charge.


CLS 257/230
TXT With blooming suppression structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 229 wherein the structural means to improve
    the output signal prevents spill over of a large amount of signal charge
    generated at a storage site which receives a non-electrical input signal of
    very high intensity to adjacent storage sites.

    (1)     Note.  The antiblooming suppression structure may include a drain
    structure for removing charge from storage sites.

    (2)     Note.  The antiblooming drain structure may be located in the
    device beneath storage sites rather than on its surface.


CLS 257/231
TXT 2-dimensional area architecture:
    Subject matter under subclass 225 wherein the device has a plurality of
    non-electrical input responsive means spread out over a two dimensional
    area, e.g., a matrix or array of such means.

    (1)     Note.  One 2-dimensional architecture area may be provided for
    light imaging elements and a separate 2-dimensional architecture area may
    be provided for electrical signal storage elements.

    (2)     Note.  The imaging element sites may also be charge transfer
    storage sites (e.g., frame transfer imaging device).


CLS 257/232
TXT Having alternating strips of sensor structures and register structures
    (e.g., interline imager):Subject matter under subclass 231 wherein the
    2-dimensional area architecture has alternate strips of sensor structures
    and charge transfer channels.


CLS 257/233
TXT Sensors not overlaid by electrode (e.g., photodiodes):
    Subject matter under subclass 232 wherein the light responsive sensor
    elements do not have an electrode overlying them.


CLS 257/234
TXT Single strip of sensors (e.g., linear imager):
    Subject matter under subclass 225 wherein the non-electrical input
    responsive device is in the form of a line of individual sensors.

    (1)     Note.  The single strip of sensors may be combined with a structure
    forming readout registers, i.e., short term storage devices for
    accumulating charge packets generated by the sensors and for transferring
    charge packets to an amplifier or output device, and wherein the sensors
    are placed adjacent to the readout register structure.

    (2)     Note.  The device may have plural readout register structures.


CLS 257/235
TXT Electrical input:
    Subject matter under subclass 215 wherein the input to the charge transfer
    device to create the charge to be transferred is an electrical signal.


CLS 257/236
TXT Signal applied to field effect electrode:
    Subject matter under subclass 235 wherein means is provided to apply an
    electrical signal to an electrode which has an electrical potential barrier
    between the electrode and the semiconductor material of the device (e.g., a
    MOS dielectric or Schottky contact or reverse-biased junction), as
    contrasted with an ohmic electrical contact to the semiconductor.


CLS 257/237
TXT Charge-presetting/linear input type (e.g., fill and spill):
    Subject matter under subclass 236 wherein means is provided for the input
    signal to form a potential well, overfill it, drain away the excess charge
    and input the preset charge in the potential well into the channel.


CLS 257/238
TXT Input signal responsive to signal charge in charge transfer device (e.g.,
    regeneration or feedback):Subject matter under subclass 235 wherein means
    is provided to take charge from the output of a charge transfer device and
    put it back into the input electrode thereof or into the input electrode of
    a second charge transfer device.


CLS 257/239
TXT Signal charge detection type (e.g., floating diffusion or floating gate
    non-destructive output):Subject matter under subclass 215 wherein means is
    provided to detect the amount of charge being transferred in the device.

    (1)     Note.  The charge being transferred may be measured without
    destroying the charge, i.e., the charge packet remains intact.

    (2)     Note.  The charge transfer device may have a region diffused with
    impurity ions not electrically connected to ground to detect the magnitude
    of charge being transferred in the device and to output a signal
    proportional to that sensed charge.  This is known as a floating diffusion
    output device.  One example of such a device is a floating diffusion
    amplifier (FDA).

    (3)     Note.  The charge transfer device may have a control electrode not
    electrically connected to ground to detect the magnitude of charge being
    transferred in the device and to output a signal proportional to that
    sensed charge.  This type device is known as a floating gate output device.
     One example of such a device is a floating gate amplifier (FGA).  Devices
    with plural floating gate outputs include distributed floating gate
    amplifiers (DFGA).


CLS 257/240
TXT Changing width or direction of channel (e.g., meandering channel):Subject
    matter under subclass 215 wherein the charge transfer path region changes
    its width or direction throughout all or part of the distance from source
    to drain electrode.


CLS 257/241
TXT Multiple channels (e.g., converging or diverging or parallel
    channels):Subject matter under subclass 215 wherein the charge transfer
    device contains more than one channel for charge transfer path.

    (1)     Note.  The channels may converge or diverge, i.e., they are not
    parallel to each other, but change direction either toward or away from
    each other along their length.

    (2)     Note.  In such devices, the charge transfer path may lie in two
    different (e.g., orthogonal) directions.

    (3)     Note.  The device may include two or more parallel channels (e.g.,
    serial- parallel-serial) wherein the charge transfer takes place in
    different directions, but the device includes charge transfer paths that
    are parallel to each other.


CLS 257/242
TXT Vertical charge transfer:
    Subject matter under subclass 215 wherein the charge transfer device is
    provided with structure for vertical charge transfer perpendicular to a
    main device surface.


CLS 257/243
TXT Channel confinement:
    Subject matter under subclass 215 containing means (e.g., pn junctions or
    dielectric layers) to restrict the boundaries of the charge transfer path
    through the device.

    (1)     Note.  Typical channel confinement means include use of (a) an
    electrically insulating medium; (b) a layer of silicon polymer material
    (polysilicon) used to reduce electric field interaction with charge to be
    transferred via the channel; or (c) an impurity ion located in the device
    substrate, i.e., in the material on which the device is fabricated (e.g.,
    an implanted channel stop).


CLS 257/244
TXT Comprising a groove:
    Subject matter under subclass 215 wherein a surface of the device includes
    an elongated indentation.

    (1)     Note.  The location of the groove relative to the charge storage
    sites of the device is deliberately not specified in this definition.


CLS 257/245
TXT Structure for applying electric field into device (e.g., resistive
    electrode, acoustic traveling wave in channel):Subject matter under
    subclass 215 including structure (e.g., electrodes) for applying electrical
    energy into the device.

    (1)     Note.  Structure for applying electrical energy into the device is
    typically an electrode with a relatively high electrical resistance value.


CLS 257/246
TXT Phase structure (e.g., doping variations to provide asymmetry for 2-phase
    operation; more than four phases or "electrode per bit"):Subject matter
    under subclass 245 including a plurality of gate regions or doping
    variation regions to permit unidirectional charge packet transfer by
    symmetrical or unsymmetrically phased electrical control signals applied to
    the device gate or gates.

    (1)     Note.  The phase structure may be multiphase (e.g., 3-phase or
    4-phase), i.e., with three sets or four sets of electrodes, respectively.

    (2)     Note.  Search subclass 249, below, for 2-phase structure devices.

    (3)     Note.  Means may also be provided to generate a traveling wave of
    non-electrical energy (e.g., acoustic energy) in the device.


CLS 257/247
TXT Uniphase or virtual phase structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 246 wherein the device has one set of gates
    (control electrodes) or virtual phase structure.


CLS 257/248
TXT 2-phase:
    Subject matter under subclass 246 wherein the device has two sets of gate
    electrodes.


CLS 257/249
TXT Electrode structures or materials:
    Subject matter under subclass 245 wherein the charge transfer device is
    provided with specified electrode structures or materials to apply electric
    field into the device.


CLS 257/250
TXT Plural gate levels:
    Subject matter under subclass 249 wherein the electrode structures include
    more than one level of gate electrodes relative to a main surface of the
    device.


CLS 257/251
TXT Substantially incomplete signal charge transfer (e.g., bucket
    brigade):Subject matter under subclass 215 wherein the charge transferred
    is less than the entire charge stored in the storage site from which it
    originates.


CLS 257/252
TXT Responsive to non-optical, non-electrical signal:
    Subject matter under subclass 213 which produces an electrical output in
    response to an input which is other than optical or electrical.


CLS 257/253
TXT Chemical (e.g., ISFET, CHEMFET):
    Subject matter under subclass 252 wherein the input is a chemical reaction
    or the presence of a particular chemical in close proximity to the field
    effect device.


CLS 257/254
TXT Physical deformation (e.g., strain sensor, acoustic wave detector):Subject
    matter under subclass 252 wherein the input is a physical deformation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    416,    for acoustic wave responsive devices, generally.


CLS 257/255
TXT With current flow along specified crystal axis (e.g., axis of maximum
    carrier mobility):Subject matter under subclass 213 wherein the field
    effect device employs current flow along a specified crystal axis, such as
    a (100) axis or a (311) axis.


CLS 257/256
TXT Junction field effect transistor (unipolar transistor):
    Subject matter under subclass 213 wherein the field effect device is a
    junction  field effect  transistor, i.e., in which current flow through a
    thin channel of semiconductor material is controlled by an electric field
    applied to a control region or electrode in rectifying contact (i.e., a  pn
    junction or Schottky barrier junction) with the semiconductor material of
    the channel, so that the depletion region extending into the channel from
    the rectifying contact reduces the thickness of the undepleted portion of
    the channel to reduce the current flow through the channel.


CLS 257/257
TXT Light responsive or combined with light responsive device:
    Subject matter under subclass 256 wherein the JFET generates an electrical
    signal when light energy is incident upon it or is combined with a light
    responsive device.


CLS 257/258
TXT In imaging array:
    Subject matter under subclass 257 wherein a plurality of light responsive
    JFETs or JFETs combined with a light responsive device are in the form of a
    one or two dimensional array (e.g., line or area array) for forming an
    image of an object, light from which is incident upon the array.


CLS 257/259
TXT Elongated active region acts as transmission line or distributed active
    element (e.g., "transmission line" field effect transistor):Subject matter
    under subclass 256 including at least one elongated active region (source,
    gate, or drain) which transmits or distributes charge carriers.

    (1)     Note.  When the impedance of an element at the operating frequency
    is due primarily to the parameters of the element itself, and in
    considering the inductance, capacitance, and resistance of the element they
    must be considered as mixed together and spread out along the element
    rather than being considered as separate discrete lumps or components as in
    the case of simple series and parallel circuits, the element may be said to
    have distributed parameters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, appropriate subclasses for
    transmission lines or distributed elements, per se.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, particularly
    subclasses 167+ for methods of forming a Schottky gate field effect device
    and subclasses 186+ for methods of forming a junction gate field effect
    device.


CLS 257/260
TXT Same channel controlled by both junction and insulated gate electrodes, or
    by both Schottky barrier and pn junction gates (e.g., "taper isolated"
    memory cell):Subject matter under subclass 256 including  plural gate
    electrodes or regions, at least one of which is isolated from the channel
    by a rectifying junction and at least another of which is isolated from the
    channel by an insulating layer therebetween, or wherein one rectifying
    junction may be a metal-to-semiconductor (Schottky) type and the other a pn
    junction.

    (1)     Note.  In such devices, the junction gate region may be free of
    direct electrical connection (e.g., "taper isolated" memory cell), i.e.,
    wherein the JFET has at least one gate electrode region which is isolated
    from the channel by a rectifying junction and is not directly provided with
    an electrical connection or terminal.


CLS 257/261
TXT Junction gate region free of direct electrical connection (e.g., floating
    junction gate memory cell structure):Subject matter under subclass 256
    including at least one gate electrode region which is isolated from the
    channel by a rectifying junction and is not directly provided with an
    electrical connection or terminal.

    (1)     Note.  This type of gate is a floating junction gate, as contrasted
    with a floating insulated gate.

    (2)     Note.  See this class, subclass 315, for floating insulated gate
    field effect devices.

    (3)     Note.  The floating gate region may capacitively store electrical
    charge and be used as a memory element.


CLS 257/262
TXT Combined with insulated gate field effect transistor (IGFET):Subject matter
    under subclass 256 including a  field effect transistor having a gate
    (control) electrode which is electrically insulated from the channel and
    other electrodes of the transistor.

    (1)     Note.  The combined JFET and IGFET may be electrically connected so
    that the source or drain electrode of one FET is connected to the gate
    electrode of the other FET.


CLS 257/263
TXT Vertical controlled current path:
    Subject matter under subclass 256 wherein the operating current of the JFET
    has a path perpendicular to a main surface of the JFET and is controlled by
    the gate electrode of the device.


CLS 257/264
TXT Enhancement mode or with high resistivity channel (e.g., doping of 1015cm-3
    or less):Subject matter under subclass 263 wherein an increase in the
    magnitude of the gate bias voltage increases the operating current, only
    leakage current flows when the gate voltage is zero, and conduction does
    not begin until the gate voltage reaches a threshold value; or the JFET has
    a channel made of relatively high electrical resistivity, e.g., due to
    doping with impurity ions of 1015 cm-3 or less.


CLS 257/265
TXT In integrated circuit:
    Subject matter under subclass 263 in a single monolithic semiconductor chip
    with other active and/or passive devices.


CLS 257/266
TXT With multiple parallel current paths (e.g., grid gate):
    Subject matter under subclass 263 having plural paths for operating current
    flow, each of which is parallel with the other paths (e.g., having a gate
    electrode in the form of a matrix or grid).


CLS 257/267
TXT With Schottky barrier gate:
    Subject matter under subclass 266 including a gate which is formed by a
    metal to semiconductor rectifying junction.


CLS 257/268
TXT Enhancement mode:
    Subject matter under subclass 256 wherein an increase in the magnitude of
    the gate bias voltage increases the operating current, only leakage current
    flows when the gate voltage is zero, and conduction does not begin until
    the gate voltage reaches a threshold value.


CLS 257/269
TXT With means to adjust barrier height (e.g., doping profile):
    Subject matter under subclass 268 including means to adjust the electronic
    height of the Schottky barrier gate junction, e.g., a profiled impurity
    dopant concentration.


CLS 257/270
TXT Plural, separately connected, gates control same channel region:Subject
    matter under subclass 256 including more than one gate region or portion to
    control the same channel region, the regions being provided with separate
    electrical connections.


CLS 257/271
TXT Load element or constant current source (e.g., with source to gate
    connection):Subject matter under subclass 256 structured to function as an
    electrical load element or a source of constant current, e.g., with a
    source to gate electrical connection.


CLS 257/272
TXT Junction field effect transistor in integrated circuit:
    Subject matter under subclass 256 located in a single monolithic
    semiconductor chip with other active and/or passive devices.


CLS 257/273
TXT With bipolar device:
    Subject matter under subclass 272  located in an integrated circuit with a
    device which operates using both positive and negative charge carriers.

    (1)     Note.  An active solid-state electronic device that contains both
    bipolar and field effect transistors may be referred to as a BI-FET device.


CLS 257/274
TXT Complementary junction field effect transistors:
    Subject matter under subclass 272 which is located in and integrated with
    an opposite conductivity type JFET, i.e., an N channel JFET together with a
    P channel JFET.


CLS 257/275
TXT Microwave integrated circuit (e.g., microstrip type):
    Subject matter under subclass 272 structured to operate at microwave
    frequencies in an integrated circuit containing microwave components (e.g.,
    microstrip transmission lines).


CLS 257/276
TXT With contact or heat sink extending through hole in semiconductor
    substrate, or with electrode suspended over substrate (e.g., air
    bridge):Subject matter under subclass 275 containing a hole in the
    semiconductor substrate and an electrical contact or a heat dissipation
    means extending through the hole.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    522,    for integrated circuit devices employing air isolation.


CLS 257/277
TXT With capacitive or inductive elements:
    Subject matter under subclass 275 having passive elements with electrical
    inductance or capacitance.


CLS 257/278
TXT With devices vertically spaced in different layers of semiconductor
    material (e.g., "3-dimensional" integrated circuit):Subject matter under
    272 wherein the JFET and other active and/or passive devices in that chip
    are located in mutually perpendicular planes in different layers of
    semiconductor device material.


CLS 257/279
TXT Pn junction gate in compound semiconductor material (e.g., GaAs):Subject
    matter under subclass 256 including a  pn junction gate formed in a
    semiconductor material that is a compound, e.g., GaAs, as contrasted to an
    elemental semiconductor such as silicon or germanium.


CLS 257/280
TXT With schottky gate:
    Subject matter under subclass 256 including a metal to semiconductor
    rectifying (i.e., Schottky barrier) gate electrode.

    (1)     Note.  A Schottky barrier gate JFET is referred to commonly as a
    MESFET (MEtal-Semiconductor field effect  transistor).


CLS 257/281
TXT Schottky gate to silicon semiconductor:
    Subject matter under subclass 280 wherein the semiconductor material
    contacting the gate electrode material is made of silicon.


CLS 257/282
TXT Gate closely aligned to source region:
    Subject matter under subclass 280 wherein the gate region is closely
    aligned with the source region.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332,    346, 387, and 797, for other self-aligned gate devices.


CLS 257/283
TXT With groove or overhang for alignment:
    Subject matter under subclass 282 wherein the device has a groove or
    overhang for alignment of the gate and source regions.


CLS 257/284
TXT Schottky gate in groove:
    Subject matter under subclass 280 wherein the MESFET has a groove in at
    least one of its surfaces and the Schottky gate is located therein.


CLS 257/285
TXT With profiled channel dopant concentration or profiled gate region dopant
    concentration (e.g., maximum dopant concentration below surface):Subject
    matter under subclass 256 wherein the JFET has a variable impurity atom
    dopant concentration in the channel or gate region, e.g., wherein the
    maximum dopant concentration is located below the surface of the device, in
    either the channel or gate region.


CLS 257/286
TXT With non-uniform channel thickness or width:
    Subject matter under subclass 256 wherein the channel has a non-uniform
    width or thickness (which lies in a plane perpendicular to both the channel
    length and width).

    (1)     Note.  Channel length is measured along a line connecting the
    source and drain, while channel width is measured perpendicular to the
    length.  Both length and width lie in a plane, parallel to the device
    surface.  See the illustration, below.


CLS 257/287
TXT With multiple channels or channel segments connected in parallel, or with
    channel much wider than length between source and drain (e.g., power
    JFET):Subject matter under subclass 256 including more than one channel or
    channel segments/portions which are electrically connected in parallel, or
    wherein the device has a channel whose width is much wider than the channel
    length, the channel length being the distance between the source and drain
    of the JFET.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134+,   for JFET devices, in general.

    504,    for JFET type isolation.


CLS 257/288
TXT Having insulated electrode (e.g., MOSFET, MOS diode):
    Subject matter under subclass 213 including an electrode which is
    electrically insulated from the active semiconductor region of the device
    (e.g., a metal oxide semiconductor insulated electrode).

    (1)     Note.  Typically the insulated electrode is the control or gate
    electrode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, particularly
    subclasses 197+ for methods of forming an insulated gate field effect
    device.


CLS 257/289
TXT Significant semiconductor chemical compound in bulk crystal (e.g.,
    GaAs):Subject matter under subclass 288 wherein the insulated electrode
    field effect device contains a significant semiconductor chemical compound
    in a bulk (as contrasted with thin film) crystal  (e.g., GaAs).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for bulk effect devices.


CLS 257/290
TXT Light responsive or combined with light responsive device:
    Subject matter under subclass 288 which generates an electrical signal when
    light is incident on it or is combined with a light responsive device.


CLS 257/291
TXT Imaging array:
    Subject matter under subclass 290 comprising a one or more dimensional
    array of light responsive devices which generate an electronic image of
    light from an object incident thereupon.


CLS 257/292
TXT Photodiodes accessed by FETs:
    Subject matter under subclass 291 comprising light responsive diodes
    electrically coupled to field effect transistors.


CLS 257/293
TXT Photoresistors accessed by FETs, or photodetectors separate from FET
    chip:Subject matter under subclass 291 comprising light responsive
    resistors coupled to field effect transistors.


CLS 257/294
TXT With shield, filter, or lens:
    Subject matter under subclass 291 including means to shield the array from
    unwanted light, to filter light incident on the array, or to refract light
    incident on the array (e.g., to focus an image of an object on the array).


CLS 257/295
TXT With ferroelectric material layer:
    Subject matter under subclass 288 including a layer of material which
    exhibits a spontaneous dipole moment.


CLS 257/296
TXT Insulated gate capacitor or insulated gate transistor combined with
    capacitor (e.g., dynamic memory cell):Subject matter under subclass 288
    wherein the device gate acts as a capacitor (i.e., wherein a positive
    potential placed on the gate electrode creates a negative charge on the
    other side of the insulator in the semiconductor material of the device,
    and vice versa) or the device is a transistor and it is combined with a
    capacitor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, particularly
    subclasses 239+ for methods of forming an insulated gate field effect
    transistor combined with a capacitor and subclasses 386 through 399 for
    manufacture of a capacitors, per se, utilizing a semiconductor substrate.


CLS 257/297
TXT With means for preventing charge leakage due to minority carrier generation
    (e.g., alpha generated soft error protection or "dark current" leakage
    protection):Subject matter under subclass 296 wherein the device further
    includes means (1) to prevent electrical charge in the capacitor or
    capacitive type insulated gate region of the transistor to leak therefrom,
    or (2) to prevent excess leakage currents across  pn junctions  due to
    generation of minority carriers in the device for example (a) alpha
    particles incident on the device or (b) thermal generation of electron-hole
    pairs, or (c) minority  carriers injected into the semiconductor substrate
    by other devices in the same substrate.

    (1)     Note.  Junctions across which excess leakage is sought to be
    prevented typically include (a) the source or drain junction of an
    insulated gate  field effect  transistor or (b) a connecting BIT line of a
    memory array which is isolated by a  pn junction from a semiconductor
    substrate.


CLS 257/298
TXT Capacitor for signal storage in combination with non-volatile storage
    means:Subject matter under subclass 296 including a capacitor to store an
    electrical signal in combination with charge storage means that can retain
    the charge even in the absence of operating power.


CLS 257/299
TXT Structure configured for voltage converter (e.g., charge pump, substrate
    bias generator):Subject matter under subclass 296 including structure for
    use as a voltage converter (e.g., a device for changing AC to DC or vice
    versa, or for producing a negative DC voltage relative to a reference
    potential from a positive DC voltage relative to that reference potential).


CLS 257/300
TXT Capacitor coupled to, or forms gate of, insulated gate field effect
    transistor (e.g., non-destructive readout dynamic memory cell
    structure):Subject matter under subclass 296 wherein the capacitor is
    electrically connected to or forms the gate of an insulated gate field
    effect transistor (IGFET), e.g., a non-destructive readout dynamic memory
    cell structure in which the charge state of the capacitor may be read out
    or determined by the conduction state of the  field effect  transistor,
    without discharging the capacitor in the readout process.


CLS 257/301
TXT Capacitor in trench:
    Subject matter under subclass 296 wherein the capacitor is located in a
    recess in the semiconductor substrate.


CLS 257/302
TXT Vertical transistor:
    Subject matter under subclass 301 combined with a vertical transistor
    (i.e., one in which the operating current flow is perpendicular to a main
    surface of the device).


CLS 257/303
TXT Stacked capacitor:
    Subject matter under subclass 301 wherein the trench capacitor device
    contains a number of capacitor electrode regions stacked vertically above
    each other or wherein the capacitor and the transistor are located such
    that one overlies the other.


CLS 257/304
TXT Storage node isolated by dielectric from semiconductor substrate:Subject
    matter under subclass 301 including an electrode upon which the charge
    varies as an indication of the memory state of the device (e.g., memory
    cell), and wherein the electrode is electrically isolated by a dielectric
    material from the semiconductor substrate of the device.


CLS 257/305
TXT With means to insulate adjacent storage nodes (e.g., channel stops or field
    oxide):Subject matter under subclass 301 including means for electrically
    insulating an electrode upon which the charge varies as an indication of
    the memory state of the device (e.g., a memory cell).

    (1)     Note.  The insulating means may, for example, comprise a channel
    stop or a field oxide.


CLS 257/306
TXT Stacked capacitor:
    Subject matter under subclass 296 wherein the capacitor device contains a
    number of capacitor electrode regions overlying each other or where the
    capacitor and the transistor are located such that one overlies the other.


CLS 257/307
TXT Parallel interleaved capacitor electrode pairs (e.g.,
    interdigitized):Subject matter under subclass 306 wherein the number of
    overlying capacitor electrodes is more than one and the overlapping region
    of each capacitor electrode pair is made up of electrodes from one
    capacitor interleaved with the electrodes of another capacitor.


CLS 257/308
TXT With capacitor electrodes connection portion located centrally thereof
    (e.g., fin electrodes with central post):Subject matter under subclass 307
    wherein the capacitor electrodes are connected together at a centrally
    located portion thereof, e.g., by a center post.


CLS 257/309
TXT With increased effective electrode surface area (e.g., tortuous path,
    corrugated, or textured electrodes):Subject matter under subclass 306
    wherein a capacitor electrode has an increased effective surface relative
    to a flat capacitor plate, because of twists, turns, curves, corrugations,
    windings or other surface area increasing features of a capacitor electrode.


CLS 257/310
TXT With high dielectric constant insulator (e.g., Ta2O5):
    Subject matter under subclass 296 wherein the capacitor device includes an
    insulating element which has a dielectric constant (e.g., Ta2O5) greater
    than 7.5, the dielectric constant of Si3N4.


CLS 257/311
TXT Storage Node isolated by dielectric from semiconductor substrate:Subject
    matter under subclass 296 wherein the device has an electrode upon which
    the charge varies as an indication of the memory state of the device (e.g.,
    memory cell) which electrode is electrically isolated by a dielectric
    material from the semiconductor substrate of the device.


CLS 257/312
TXT Voltage variable capacitor (i. e., capacitance varies with applied
    voltage):Subject matter under subclass 296 wherein the device changes its
    capacitance depending on the amount of voltage applied thereto.


CLS 257/313
TXT Inversion layer capacitor:
    Subject matter under subclass 296 wherein one plate of the capacitor device
    is a layer of minority carriers opposite in conductivity type to the doping
    of the semiconductor which are induced by applied voltage.


CLS 257/314
TXT Variable threshold (e.g., floating gate memory device):
    Subject matter under subclass 288 wherein the device has a threshold
    voltage for current conduction which may be varied (e.g., by storage of
    charge in an insulator layer adjacent the channel in response to an
    electrical "write" signal).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239,    for a floating gate signal charge detection type charge transfer
    device.

    261,    for a floating gate JFET.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclass for
    read/write static storage systems, and subclasses 185.01+ for predominate
    structure of floating gate memory storage (e.g., flash memory),
    particularly subclass 185.24 for threshold setting (e.g., conditioning).


CLS 257/315
TXT With floating gate electrode:
    Subject matter under subclass 314 including a gate electrode which is free
    of direct electrical connection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclass for
    read/write static storage systems, and subclasses 185.01+ for predominate
    structure of floating gate memory storage (e.g., flash memory),
    particularly subclass 185.24 for threshold setting (e.g., conditioning).


CLS 257/316
TXT With additional contacted control electrode:
    Subject matter under subclass 315 including an additional control (gate)
    electrode that has a direct electrical contact thereto.


CLS 257/317
TXT With irregularities on electrode to facilitate charging or discharging of
    floating electrode:Subject matter under subclass 316 wherein the floating
    or additional control (gate) electrode has physical surface irregularities
    to facilitate charging or discharging of the floating gate electrode.


CLS 257/318
TXT Additional control electrode is doped region in semiconductor
    substrate:Subject matter under subclass 316 wherein the additional control
    (gate) electrode is a specific region in the semiconductor substrate which
    is doped with impurity ions.


CLS 257/319
TXT Plural additional contacted control electrodes:
    Subject matter under subclass 316 including more than one additional
    control (gate) electrode.


CLS 257/320
TXT Separate control electrodes for charging and for discharging floating
    electrode:Subject matter under subclass 319 wherein the device has separate
    control (gate) electrodes for charging and discharging a floating electrode.


CLS 257/321
TXT With thin insulator region for charging or discharging floating electrode
    by quantum mechanical tunneling:Subject matter under subclass 316 including
    a thin insulator region for charging of discharging a floating electrode by
    means of quantum mechanical tunneling of charge carriers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9       through 25, 28, and 30 through 39, for active solid-state devices
    involving this discrete layer type of quantum mechanical tunneling.


CLS 257/322
TXT With charging or discharging by control voltage applied to source or drain
    region (e.g., by avalanche breakdown of drain junction):Subject matter
    under subclass 316 wherein the variable threshold device is structured to
    charge or discharge a floating gate electrode by a control voltage applied
    to source or drain region (e.g., by avalanche breakdown of drain junction).


CLS 257/323
TXT With means to facilitate light erasure:
    Subject matter under subclass 315 including means to make erasure of the
    electrical charge content of the device by light easier (e.g., by providing
    an ultraviolet light window layer over the floating gate electrode to
    reduce absorption of erasing light).


CLS 257/324
TXT Multiple insulator layers (e.g., MNOS structure):
    Subject matter under subclass 314 including more than one layer of
    electrically insulating material (e.g., metal-nitride-oxide (MNOS)
    semiconductor).


CLS 257/325
TXT Non-homogeneous composition insulator layer (e.g., graded composition layer
    or layer with inclusions):Subject matter under subclass 324 wherein at
    least one layer has a non-homogeneous composition (e.g., a layer which
    varies in composition along at least one dimension thereof, or has
    inclusions of foreign material therein).


CLS 257/326
TXT With additional, non-memory control electrode or channel portion (e.g.,
    accessing field effect transistor structure):Subject matter under subclass
    324 wherein the multiple insulator layer device has an additional,
    non-memory control electrode or channel portion, for example, for forming
    an accessing field effect  transistor structure.


CLS 257/327
TXT Short channel insulated gate field effect transistor:
    Subject matter under subclass 288 wherein the field effect device is an
    insulated gate field effect  transistor with a short channel (i.e., one
    wherein the length of the channel is sufficiently short that the threshold
    voltage of the transistor depends on the length of the channel, or where
    the channel is specified to be less than 2 micrometers in length).


CLS 257/328
TXT Vertical channel or double diffused insulated gate field effect device
    provided with means to protect against excess voltage (e.g., gate
    protection diode):Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein the short
    channel IGFET has a vertical current channel structure or the short channel
    IGFETs active channel region has a graded dopant concentration decreasing
    with distance from source region (e.g., double diffused, DMOS transistor)
    and wherein means are provided to protect the short channel against
    overvoltages (e.g., a gate insulator protection diode).

    (1)     Note.  Gate     protection      diodes      in
    IGFETs in general may be found in this class, subclass 355, and indented
    subclasses.


CLS 257/329
TXT Gate controls vertical charge flow portion of channel (e.g., VMOS
    device):Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein the short channel IGFET
    has a channel portion in which charge flows in a substantially vertical
    direction and wherein the charge flowing therein is controlled by the gate
    electrode.

    (1)     Note.  An IGFET's short channel may have horizontal as well as
    vertical charge flow portions.  This subclass provides for those devices in
    which the vertical charge flow portion, i.e., the portion of the channel in
    which charge is flowing substantially in a vertical direction, of the
    channel is controlled by the gate.


CLS 257/330
TXT Gate electrode in groove:
    Subject matter under subclass 329 wherein the gate controlled vertical
    channel device has a groove located therein and a gate electrode located in
    the groove.


CLS 257/331
TXT Plural gate electrodes or grid shaped gate electrode:
    Subject matter under subclass 330 wherein there is more than one gate
    electrode located in a groove or wherein the gate electrode has a grid  or
    mesh type shape.


CLS 257/332
TXT Gate electrode self-aligned with groove:
    Subject matter under subclass 330 wherein the gate electrode is
    self-aligned with the groove.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282,    283, 346, 387, and 797, for other self-aligned gate devices.


CLS 257/333
TXT With thick insulator to reduce gate capacitance in non-channel areas (e.g.,
    thick oxide over source or drain region):Subject matter under subclass 330
    wherein the device with a gate electrode in a groove is provided with a
    thick insulator material layer to reduce gate capacitance in non-channel
    areas, e.g., a thick layer of oxide located over the source or drain region.


CLS 257/334
TXT In integrated circuit structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 330 wherein the device is located in an
    integrated circuit structure.


CLS 257/335
TXT Active channel region has a graded dopant concentration decreasing with
    distance from source region (e.g., double diffused device, DMOS
    transistor):Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein the short channel
    IGFET's active channel region has a graded dopant concentration decreasing
    with distance from source region, e.g., double diffused device or a DMOS
    transistor.


CLS 257/336
TXT With lightly doped portion of drain region adjacent channel (e.g., LDD
    structure):Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein the graded channel
    doping short channel IGFET has a relatively light concentration of dopant
    in the portion of the drain region which lies adjacent to the current
    conducting channel.


CLS 257/337
TXT In integrated circuit structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein the graded channel doping short
    channel IGFET is contained in a single monolithic chip with other active or
    passive solid-state electronic devices.


CLS 257/338
TXT With complementary field effect transistor:
    Subject matter under subclass 337 wherein the graded channel doping short
    channel IGFET is contained in a single monolithic chip with  a  field
    effect transistor with a polarity type opposite to that of the graded
    channel doping short channel IGFET.


CLS 257/339
TXT With means to increase breakdown voltage:
    Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein the graded channel doping short
    channel IGFET includes means to increase the voltage that may be applied to
    the device without electrical breakdown of the device occurring.


CLS 257/340
TXT With means (other than self-alignment of the gate electrode) to decrease
    gate capacitance (e.g., shield electrode):Subject matter under subclass 335
    wherein the graded channel doping short channel IGFET has means (other than
    self-alignment of the gate electrode) (e.g., an shielding electrode) to
    decrease the capacitance of the gate electrode.


CLS 257/341
TXT Plural sections connected in parallel (e.g., power MOSFET):
    Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein the graded channel doping short
    channel IGFET has more than one section and a plurality of those sections
    are connected electrically in parallel (e.g., to form a power MOSFET).


CLS 257/342
TXT With means to reduce ON resistance:
    Subject matter under subclass 341 wherein the device further contains means
    to reduce the resistance of the device when it is conducting electricity,
    i.e., in the ON condition.


CLS 257/343
TXT All contacts on same surface (e.g., lateral structure):

    Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein all electrical contacts of the
    device are located on the same external surface of the device, e.g., a
    lateral structure device.


CLS 257/344
TXT With lightly doped portion of drain region adjacent channel (e.g., LDD
    structure):Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein the short channel
    IGFET has a lightly doped portion of the drain region adjacent channel
    (e.g., a lightly doped drain structure).


CLS 257/345
TXT With means to prevent sub-surface currents, or with non-uniform channel
    doping:Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein the short channel IGFET
    contains means to prevent current from flowing below the surface of the
    device.


CLS 257/346
TXT Gate electrode overlaps the source or drain by no more than depth of source
    or drain (e.g., self-aligned gate):Subject matter under subclass 327
    wherein the short channel IGFET has a gate electrode which overlaps the
    source or drain or both by no more than the thickness of the depth of the
    source or drain (e.g., a self-aligned gate).

    (1)     Note.  A self-aligned gate is one which is aligned between the
    source and drain via a masking process which uses the gate material itself
    to achieve the alignment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282,    283, 332, 387, and 797, for other self-aligned gate devices.


CLS 257/347
TXT Single crystal semiconductor layer on insulating substrate (SOI):Subject
    matter under subclass 288 wherein the field effect device has a single
    crystal semiconductor layer located on a substrate made of electrically
    insulating material.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 49, for active solid-state devices
    in non-single crystalline layers which may be on insulating substrates.
    See this class, subclass 506, for active devices in single crystal layers
    which are dielectrically isolated, but do not include  field effect devices.

    (2)     Note.  Material deposited as polycrystalline or amorphous and then
    recrystallized, as by a scanning laser beam, is considered to be non-single
    crystalline for purposes of determining classification between this
    subclass and subclass 49, since such recrystallization typically leaves
    residual grain boundaries and is thus large grained polycrystalline
    material, rather than true single crystal material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, particularly
    subclasses 149+ for methods of forming a field effect transistor on an
    insulating substrate or layer (e.g., SOS, SOI, etc.).


CLS 257/348
TXT Depletion mode field effect transistor:
    Subject matter under subclass 347 wherein the SOI device is a  field effect
     transistor which operates in the depletion mode, i.e., a FET which passes
    maximum operating current with the gate to source biased to zero volts.


CLS 257/349
TXT With means (e.g., a buried channel stop layer) to prevent leakage current
    along the interface of the semiconductor layer and the insulating
    substrate:Subject matter under subclass 347 wherein the SOI device includes
    means to prevent undesirable stray current to flow along the interface
    between the semiconductor layer and the insulating substrate.

    (1)     Note.  The means to prevent this stray current may be, for example,
    a thin layer of doped semiconductor material for trapping charge /which
    would otherwise flow through a channel in the device.


CLS 257/350
TXT Insulated electrode device is combined with diverse type device (e.g.,
    complementary MOSFETs, FET with resistor, etc.):Subject matter under
    subclass 347 wherein the SOI device is combined with a different
    solid-state active or passive device, e.g., to form complementary MOSFETs
    or a FET combined with a resistor, etc.


CLS 257/351
TXT Complementary field effect transistor structures only (i.e., not including
    bipolar transistors, resistors, or other components):Subject matter under
    subclass 350 wherein the  field effect  transistor and the diverse type
    device are  field effect  transistors which are complementary in
    conductivity type to each other (e.g., provide a CMOS structure).


CLS 257/352
TXT Substrate is single crystal insulator (e.g., sapphire or spinel):Subject
    matter under subclass 347 wherein the SOI substrate is a single crystal
    insulator (e.g., sapphire or spinel).


CLS 257/353
TXT Single crystal islands of semiconductor layer containing only one active
    device:Subject matter under subclass 352 wherein the single crystal
    insulator SOI substrate contains single crystal islands of semiconductor
    material, each island containing only one active solid-state device.


CLS 257/354
TXT Including means to eliminate island edge effects (e.g., insulating filling
    between islands, or ions in island edges):Subject matter under subclass 353
    wherein means are provided to eliminate deleterious effects caused by the
    edges of each island, such means including, for example, electrically
    insulating filling between islands, or channel stop regions located in the
    edges of islands.


CLS 257/355
TXT With overvoltage protective means:
    Subject matter under subclass 288 wherein the device has means to protect
    it against applied voltage which exceeds that which the device can tolerate
    before being damaged.


CLS 257/356
TXT For protecting against gate insulator breakdown:
    Subject matter under subclass 355 wherein the overvoltage protection means
    is structured to protect against electrical breakdown (shorting) of the
    gate insulator.


CLS 257/357
TXT In complementary field effect transistor integrated circuit:Subject matter
    under subclass 356 wherein the device includes complementary field effect
    transistors located in a single monolithic chip.


CLS 257/358
TXT Including resistor element:
    Subject matter under subclass 357 wherein the device includes an electrical
    resistor.


CLS 257/359
TXT As thin film structure (e.g., polysilicon resistor):
    Subject matter under subclass 358 wherein the resistor is in the form of a
    thin film resistor (e.g., a polysilicon resistor).


CLS 257/360
TXT Protection device includes insulated gate transistor structure (e.g.,
    combined with resistor element):Subject matter under subclass 356 wherein
    the means for protecting against insulator breakdown is an insulated gate
    transistor structure.


CLS 257/361
TXT For operation as bipolar or punchthrough element:
    Subject matter under subclass 360 wherein the insulated gate transistor
    structure protection device is configured to operate as a bipolar
    transistor or to conduct by punchthrough of a depletion region from one pn
    junction to another pn junction upon application of an overvoltage.


CLS 257/362
TXT Punchthrough or bipolar element:
    Subject matter under subclass 356 wherein the means for protecting against
    insulator breakdown is a bipolar device or is configured to conduct by
    punchthrough of a depletion region from one  pn junction to another  pn
    junction upon application of an overvoltage.


CLS 257/363
TXT Including resistor element:
    Subject matter under subclass 356 including an electrical resistive element.


CLS 257/364
TXT With resistive gate electrode:
    Subject matter under subclass 288 including a gate (control) electrode
    which has high electrical resistivity.


CLS 257/365
TXT With plural, separately connected, gate electrodes in same device:Subject
    matter under subclass 288 wherein the device has more than one gate
    (control) electrode, in the same device, with separate electrical
    connections to the plural gate (control) electrodes.


CLS 257/366
TXT Overlapping gate electrodes:
    Subject matter under subclass 365 wherein at least one of the plural gate
    electrodes overlaps another gate electrode.


CLS 257/367
TXT Insulated gate controlled breakdown of pn junction (e.g., field plate
    diode):Subject matter under 288 including an electrically insulated gate
    electrode which is used to control the voltage applied to the device to
    cause breakdown of the pn junction.


CLS 257/368
TXT Insulated gate field effect transistor in integrated circuit:Subject matter
    under subclass 288 wherein the device is an insulated gate field effect
    transistor located in a single monolithic semiconductor chip circuit.


CLS 257/369
TXT Complementary insulated gate field effect transistors:
    Subject matter under subclass 368 wherein the device is made up of IGFETs
    that have opposite conductivity channels (p-type and n-type).


CLS 257/370
TXT Combined with bipolar transistor:
    Subject matter under subclass 369 including at least one bipolar transistor.

    (1)     Note.  An active solid-state electronic device that contains both
    bipolar and field effect transistors may be referred to as a BI-FET device.


CLS 257/371
TXT Complementary transistors in wells of opposite conductivity types more
    heavily doped than the substrate region in which they are formed, e.g.,
    twin wells:Subject matter under subclass 369 wherein the complementary
    IGFETs are located in wells of semiconductor material with electrical
    conductivity opposite to that of the respective transistors and wherein the
    wells contain a higher concentration of dopant ions than the semiconductor
    substrate in which they are located (e.g., twin wells).


CLS 257/372
TXT With means to prevent latchup or parasitic conduction channels:Subject
    matter under subclass 369 including means to prevent conduction between
    regions of complementary IGFETs which form a (parasitic) regenerative
    structure  which remains ON in the absence of a triggering signal.

    (1)     Note.  For a definition of the regenerative structure of this
    subclass type, see subclass 107.


CLS 257/373
TXT With pn junction to collect injected minority carriers to prevent parasitic
    bipolar transistor action:Subject matter under subclass 372 wherein the
    means for preventing latchup includes a pn junction for collecting minority
    carriers injected into the device to prevent operation of parasitic bipolar
    transistors which are otherwise capable of forming part of a parasitic
    regenerative switching structure.


CLS 257/374
TXT Dielectric isolation means (e.g., dielectric layer in vertical
    grooves):Subject matter under subclass 372 wherein the means to prevent
    latchup includes means to dielectrically isolate the individual IGFETs from
    each other.


CLS 257/375
TXT With means to reduce substrate spreading resistance (e.g., heavily doped
    substrate):Subject matter under subclass 372 wherein the means to prevent
    latchup includes means to reduce the electrical resistance of the substrate
    to reduce voltage differences between different parts of the substrate due
    to currents flowing therethrough.


CLS 257/376
TXT With barrier region of reduced minority carrier lifetime (e.g., heavily
    doped P+ region to reduce electron minority carrier lifetime, or containing
    deep level impurity or crystal damage), or with region of high threshold
    voltage (e.g., heavily doped channel stop region):Subject matter under
    subclass 372 wherein the means to prevent latchup includes an electrical
    barrier region whose minority carrier lifetime is reduced from its normal
    value (e.g., by employing heavily doped P+ region to reduce electron
    minority carrier lifetime, or contains a deep level impurity or crystal
    damage) or has a region of high threshold voltage (e.g., a heavily doped
    channel stop region).


CLS 257/377
TXT With polysilicon interconnections to source or drain regions (e.g.,
    polysilicon laminated with silicide):Subject matter under subclass 369
    wherein the device contains electrical interconnections to the source
    and/or drain regions of the IGFETs which are made of polycrystalline
    silicon (e.g., polysilicon laminated with a silicide).


CLS 257/378
TXT Combined with bipolar transistor:
    Subject matter under subclass 368 wherein the IGFET is combined with a
    bipolar transistor in a single semiconductor chip.

    (1)     Note.  An active solid-state electronic device that contains both
    bipolar and field effect transistors may be referred to as a BI-FET device.


CLS 257/379
TXT Combined with passive components (e.g., resistors):
    Subject matter under subclass 368 wherein the IGFET is combined with
    passive electronic solid-state devices (e.g., resistors, inductors,
    transmission lines, etc.) in the integrated circuit.


CLS 257/380
TXT Polysilicon resistor:
    Subject matter under subclass 379 wherein the device is combined with a
    resistor made of a polycrystalline form of silicon.


CLS 257/381
TXT With multiple levels of polycrystalline silicon:
    Subject matter under subclass 380 wherein the integrated circuit has more
    than one layer of polycrystalline silicon.


CLS 257/382
TXT With contact to source or drain region of refractory material (e.g.,
    polysilicon, tungsten, or silicide):Subject matter under subclass 368
    wherein the device has an electrical contact to its source region or drain
    region wherein the contact is made of a refractory or platinum group metal,
    or of other material which has a melting point above that of the iron group
    of metals and which is resistant to heat (e.g., of polysilicon, tungsten or
    silicide).

    (1)     Note.  Refractory materials include refractory metals and platinum
    group metals which include metals found in groups IVA, VA, VIA, or VIIIA
    (other than iron (Fe), nickel (Ni) or cobalt (Co)) of the periodic table of
    the elements.


CLS 257/383
TXT Contact of refractory or platinum group metal (e.g., molybdenum, tungsten,
    or titanium):Subject matter under subclass 382 wherein the contact to the
    source or drain region is made of a refractory or platinum group metal
    (e.g., molybdenum, tungsten, or titanium).


CLS 257/384
TXT Including silicide:
    Subject matter under subclass 382 wherein the contacts are made of a
    silicide.


CLS 257/385
TXT Multiple polysilicon layers:
    Subject matter under subclass 382  wherein the refractory material contact
    to source or drain region includes more than one layer of polysilicon.


CLS 257/386
TXT With means to reduce parasitic capacitance:
    Subject matter under subclass 368 wherein the device contains means to
    reduce unwanted capacitance between elements of the field effect
    transistor.


CLS 257/387
TXT Gate electrode overlaps at least one of source or drain by no more than
    depth of source or drain (e.g., self-aligned gate):

    Subject matter under subclass 386 wherein the gate electrode overlaps at
    least one source or drain by no more than the depth of the source or the
    drain (e.g., self-aligned gate).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282,    283, 328, 342, and 794, for other self-aligned gate devices.


CLS 257/388
TXT Gate electrode consists of refractory or platinum group metal or silicide:

    Subject matter under subclass 387 wherein the gate electrode contains only
    refractory or platinum group metal (e.g., molybdenum, titanium or tungsten,
    or a silicide).


CLS 257/389
TXT With thick insulator over source or drain region:

    Subject matter under subclass 386 wherein the means to reduce the parasitic
    capacitance is a thick insulating material layer located over the source or
    drain region.


CLS 257/390
TXT Matrix or array of field effect transistors (e.g., array of FETs only some
    of which are completed, or structure for mask programmed read-only memory
    (ROM)):

    Subject matter under subclass 368 wherein the integrated circuit contains a
    two dimensional array of IGFETs, only some of which are completed devices,
    or the integrated circuit contains structure for a mask programmed
    read-only memory device.


CLS 257/391
TXT Selected groups of complete field effect devices having different threshold
    voltages (e.g., different channel dopant concentrations):

    Subject matter under subclass 390 wherein selected groups of complete
    IGFETs have different threshold voltages above which the IGFETs will
    operate (e.g., different IGFETs have different current carrying channel
    impurity dopant concentrations).


CLS 257/392
TXT Insulated gate field effect transistors of different threshold voltages in
    same integrated circuit (e.g., enhancement and depletion mode):

    Subject matter under subclass 368 wherein the IGFETs have different
    threshold voltages in the same integrated circuit (e.g., both enhancement
    and depletion mode IGFETs in the same integrated circuit).


CLS 257/393
TXT Insulated gate field effect transistor adapted to function as load element
    for switching insulated gate field effect transistor:Subject matter under
    subclass 368 wherein the device is configured to function as a load element
    for another IGFET which is switched OFF and ON by signals applied thereto.


CLS 257/394
TXT With means to prevent parasitic conduction channels:
    Subject matter under subclass 368 wherein the device includes means to
    prevent the formation of unwanted parasitic field effect transistor
    elements.


CLS 257/395
TXT Thick insulator portion:
    Subject matter under subclass 394 wherein the means to prevent parasitic
    conduction channels from forming includes a thick insulator portion.


CLS 257/396
TXT Recessed into semiconductor surface:
    Subject matter under subclass 395 wherein the thick insulator portion is
    recessed into the semiconductor device surface.


CLS 257/397
TXT In vertical-walled groove:
    Subject matter under subclass 396 wherein the recessed thick isolator
    portion is in a groove in the surface of the overall device which extends
    perpendicular to the surface of the overall device.


CLS 257/398
TXT Combined with heavily doped channel stop portion:
    Subject matter under subclass 396 wherein the device is combined with
    regions of heavy doping concentration.


CLS 257/399
TXT Combined with heavily doped channel stop portion:
    Subject matter under subclass 395 wherein the device is combined with
    regions of heavy doping concentration.


CLS 257/400
TXT With heavily doped channel stop portion:
    Subject matter under subclass 394 wherein the means to prevent parasitic
    conduction channels from forming comprises a region of heavy doping
    concentration.


CLS 257/401
TXT With specified physical layout (e.g., ring gate, source/drain regions
    shared between plural FETs, plural sections connected in parallel to form
    power MOSFET):Subject matter under subclass 368 wherein the device has a
    specific physical configuration or layout (e.g., ring gate).


CLS 257/402
TXT With permanent threshold adjustment (e.g., depletion mode):
    Subject matter under subclass 288 wherein the device includes means for
    permanently adjusting the threshold voltage at which the device conducts
    (e.g., depletion mode IGFETs).


CLS 257/403
TXT With channel conductivity dopant same type as that of source and
    drain:Subject matter under subclass 402 wherein the device has a channel
    which is doped with impurity dopant to be the same conductivity type (n or
    p) as the source and drain.


CLS 257/404
TXT Non-uniform channel doping:
    Subject matter under subclass 403 wherein the dopant concentration varies
    along at least one dimension of the channel.


CLS 257/405
TXT With gate insulator containing specified permanent charge:
    Subject matter under subclass 402 wherein the device has a gate insulator
    with a specified permanent electrostatic charge therein.


CLS 257/406
TXT Plural gate insulator layers:
    Subject matter under subclass 405 wherein the gate insulator is made up of
    a plurality of gate insulator layers.


CLS 257/407
TXT With gate electrode of controlled workfunction material (e.g., low
    workfunction gate material):Subject matter under subclass 402 wherein the
    device has a gate electrode selected to have a controlled amount of minimum
    energy needed to be applied thereto to liberate an electron from its
    Fermi-level and send it into free space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10      and 11, for low workfunction material layer used for electron
    emission.


CLS 257/408
TXT Including lightly doped drain portion adjacent channel (e.g., lightly doped
    drain, LDD device):Subject matter under subclass 288 wherein the device
    includes a drain portion adjacent the current channel which is lightly
    doped with impurities.


CLS 257/409
TXT With means to increase breakdown voltage (e.g., field shield electrode,
    guard ring, etc.):Subject matter under subclass 288 wherein the device has
    means to increase the voltage that can be applied to the device without
    causing electrical breakdown of the device.


CLS 257/410
TXT Gate insulator includes material (including air or vacuum) other than
    SiO2:Subject matter under subclass 288 wherein the  gate electrode
    insulator includes material other than silicon dioxide.


CLS 257/411
TXT Composite or layered gate insulator (e.g., mixture such as silicon
    oxynitride):Subject matter under subclass 410 wherein the gate insulator is
    made of a composite material or layers of different materials.


CLS 257/412
TXT Gate electrode of refractory material (e.g., polysilicon or a silicide of a
    refractory or platinum group metal):Subject matter under subclass 288
    wherein the device has a gate electrode which is made of a refractory
    material (e.g., polysilicon or a silicide of a metal found in groups IVA,
    VA, VIA, or VIIIA (other than iron (Fe), nickel (Ni) or cobalt (Co)) of the
    periodic table of the elements.


CLS 257/413
TXT Polysilicon laminated with silicide:
    Subject matter under subclass 412 wherein the refractory material is a
    laminate comprising at least one layer of polysilicon and one layer of a
    silicide.


CLS 257/414
TXT RESPONSIVE TO NON-ELECTRICAL SIGNAL (E.G., CHEMICAL, STRESS, LIGHT, OR
    MAGNETIC FIELD SENSORS):Subject matter under the class definition wherein
    the device generates an electrical signal in response to a non-electrical
    signal (e.g., light, heat, pressure) incident thereon.


CLS 257/415
TXT Physical deformation:
    Subject matter under subclass 414 wherein the non-electrical signal
    incident upon the active solid-state device is a force which physically
    deforms the device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, particularly
    subclasses 50+ for methods of forming  semiconductor devices which are
    responsive to physical deformation.


CLS 257/416
TXT Acoustic wave:
    Subject matter under subclass 415 wherein the physically deforming force is
    in the form of a traveling vibration made up of sound energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254,    for field effect acoustic wave responsive devices.


CLS 257/417
TXT Strain sensors:
    Subject matter under subclass 415 wherein the physically deforming force is
    that of an applied stress.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254,    for field effect strain sensor devices.


CLS 257/418
TXT With means to concentrate stress:
    Subject matter under subclass 417 wherein the active solid-state device has
    means to concentrate the physically deforming stress.


CLS 257/419
TXT With thinned central active portion of semiconductor surrounded by thick
    insensitive portion (e.g. diaphragm type strain gauge):Subject matter under
    subclass 418 wherein the means to concentrate the physically deforming
    stress is a thinned central active portion of semiconductor surrounded by a
    thick insensitive portion (e.g., a diaphragm type strain gauge).


CLS 257/420
TXT Means to reduce sensitivity to physical deformation:
    Subject matter under subclass 415 wherein the device contains means to
    reduce the change in electrical output signal in response to physical
    deformation of the active junction.


CLS 257/421
TXT Magnetic field:
    Subject matter under subclass 414 wherein the non-electrical signal to
    which the active solid-state device responds, is a magnetic field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for regenerative type magnetic field responsive devices


CLS 257/422
TXT With magnetic field directing means (e.g., shield, pole piece,
    etc.):Subject matter under subclass 421 wherein means is provided for
    directing a magnetic field to the active solid-state device.


CLS 257/423
TXT Bipolar transistor magnetic field sensor (e.g., lateral bipolar
    transistor):Subject matter under subclass 421 wherein the active
    solid-state device includes a bipolar transistor as the magnetic field
    sensor.


CLS 257/424
TXT Sensor with region of high carrier recombination (e.g., magnetodiode with
    carriers deflected to recombination region by magnetic field):Subject
    matter under subclass 421 wherein the device has a region of high carrier
    recombination, e.g., a magnetodiode with carriers deflected to the
    recombination region by the magnetic field.


CLS 257/425
TXT Magnetic field detector using compound semiconductor material (e.g., GaAs,
    InSb, etc.):Subject matter under subclass 421 wherein the device is made of
    a compound semiconductor material (e.g., GaAs, InSb, etc.).


CLS 257/426
TXT Differential output (e.g., with offset adjustment means or with means to
    reduce temperature sensitivity):Subject matter under subclass 421 wherein
    the device has two output terminals and the electrical signal generated by
    the active solid-state device is the electrical signal difference between
    the outputs.


CLS 257/427
TXT Magnetic field sensor in integrated circuit (e.g., in bipolar transistor
    integrated circuit):Subject matter under subclass 421 wherein the device is
    located in an integrated circuit (i.e., a solid monolithic semiconductor
    chip).


CLS 257/428
TXT Electromagnetic or particle radiation:
    Subject matter under subclass 414 wherein the electrical signal is
    generated by the device in response to radiant energy in the
    electromagnetic energy spectrum or in the form of neutral or charged
    particles (e.g., alpha or beta particles).


CLS 257/429
TXT Charged or elementary particles:
    Subject matter under subclass 428 wherein the particle energy is in the
    form of electrically charged or elementary particles (e.g., alpha or beta
    particles).


CLS 257/430
TXT With active region having effective impurity concentration less than 1012
    atoms/cm3:Subject matter under subclass 429 wherein the active region of
    the device has an effective impurity ion dopant concentration less than
    1012 atoms/cm3.


CLS 257/431
TXT Light:
    Subject matter under subclass 428 wherein the non-electrical signal to
    which the device responds is electromagnetic energy in the light
    frequency/wavelength range (i.e., from infrared (except where the response
    is mainly due to thermal heating due to the infrared radiation) to visible
    and ultraviolet).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for light responsive superlattice quantum well heterojunction
    tunneling devices.

    53      through 56, for amorphous semiconductor junction material devices
    which are responsive to non-electrical (e.g., light) signals.

    80      through 85, for light emitters combined with or also constituting
    a light responsive device.

    113     through 118, for light activated regenerative type devices.

    184     through 189, for light responsive heterojunction devices in
    non-charge transfer devices.

    225     through 234, for charge transfer devices with non-electrical (e.g.,
    light) input.

    257     through 258, for light responsive JFET devices.

    290     through 294, for light responsive insulated electrode field effect
    devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, particularly
    subclasses 54+ for methods of making a temperature responsive semiconductor
    device.


CLS 257/432
TXT With optical element:

    Subject matter under subclass 431 wherein the light incident upon the
    active region passes through an optical element (e.g., a fiber, lens,
    filter, etc.).


CLS 257/433
TXT With housing or encapsulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 431 wherein means is provided to physically
    protect the device in the form of a housing or medium which embeds the
    device.


CLS 257/434
TXT With window means:

    Subject matter under subclass 433 with means to optically couple the light
    to the device through a transparent window.


CLS 257/435
TXT With optical shield or mask means:

    Subject matter under subclass 431 with means to spatially or temporally
    block all or part of the light incident on the portions of the device
    receptor region, other than the intended region.


CLS 257/436
TXT With means for increasing light absorption (e.g., redirection of unabsorbed
    light):

    Subject matter under subclass 431 with means for increasing the amount of
    light absorbed by the device (e.g., antireflection coatings applied to the
    device, doping with energy converters, providing reflectors to redirect
    initially unabsorbed light onto the receptor, etc.).


CLS 257/437
TXT Antireflection coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 436 wherein the means for increasing light
    absorption by the junction is a coating applied to the device which reduces
    reflection of the incident light (e.g., by use of interference films).


CLS 257/438
TXT Avalanche junction:

    Subject matter under subclass 431 wherein the device has a junction which
    is operated in the avalanche portion of its operating curve to utilize the
    avalanche multiplication of photocurrent by means of hole-electron pairs
    created by absorbed photons.

    (1)     Note.  When the reverse bias voltage applied to the device
    approaches breakdown level, the holes or electrons collide with substrate
    atoms to produce an avalanche of hole-electron pairs.


CLS 257/439
TXT Containing dopant adapted for photoionization:
    Subject matter under subclass 431 wherein the junction region is provided
    with impurity dopant atoms which are only ionized to produce free carriers
    by the incident light.


CLS 257/440
TXT With different sensor portions responsive to different wavelengths (e.g.,
    color imager):Subject matter under subclass 431 wherein the device has
    different portions, some of which respond to different wavelengths of light
    than do others.


CLS 257/441
TXT Narrow band gap semiconductor (<1eV) (e.g., PbSnTe):
    Subject matter under subclass 431 wherein the device contains a
    semiconductor material which has a gap between its conduction and valence
    bands which is less than one electron volt.


CLS 257/442
TXT II-VI compound semiconductor (e.g., HgCdTe):
    Subject matter under subclass 441 wherein the narrow band gap semiconductor
    is a compound semiconductor taken from columns II and VI of the periodic
    table.


CLS 257/443
TXT Matrix or array (e.g., single line arrays):
    Subject matter under subclass 431 wherein the device is in the form of
    regularly spaced individual light responsive elements.


CLS 257/444
TXT Light sensor elements overlie active switching elements in integrated
    circuit (e.g., where the sensor elements are deposited on an integrated
    circuit):Subject matter under subclass 443 wherein the active switching
    elements are in a monolithic chip which is combined with an array of light
    responsive elements which overlie the former.


CLS 257/445
TXT With antiblooming means:
    Subject matter under subclass 443 with means to prevent more than one
    individual light responsive element from being activated by a very bright
    spot of light incident on a point of the matrix or array.

    (1)     Note.  The anti-blooming means may drain charge from adjacent
    individual array elements to some other area, e.g., the substrate.  This is
    known as an overflow drain.


CLS 257/446
TXT With specific isolation means in integrated circuit:
    Subject matter under subclass 443 wherein the matrix or array of devices is
    provided with means to electrically isolate the device from other devices
    and the overall device is contained in a monolithic semiconductor chip.


CLS 257/447
TXT With backside illumination (e.g., having a thinned central area or a
    non-absorbing substrate):Subject matter under subclass 443 wherein the
    matrix or array device is structured to permit incident light to reach the
    receptor region from the backside of the device.


CLS 257/448
TXT With particular electrode configuration:
    Subject matter under subclass 443 wherein the matrix or array device has a
    particular electrode arrangement.


CLS 257/449
TXT Schottky barrier (e.g., a transparent Schottky metallic layer or a Schottky
    barrier containing at least one of indium or tin (e.g., SnO2, indium tin
    oxide)):Subject matter under subclass 431 wherein the device has a
    rectifying junction which is formed between a metal and a semiconductor
    material (i.e., a Schottky barrier).

    (1)     Note.  The Schottky barrier may, for example, be transparent or
    contain indium or tin (e.g., SnO2, indium tin oxide).


CLS 257/450
TXT With doping profile to adjust barrier height:
    Subject matter under subclass 449 wherein the height of the Schottky
    barrier is changed by varying the concentration of the impurity dopant in
    the semiconductor portion of the active junction region of the device.


CLS 257/451
TXT Responsive to light having lower energy (i.e., longer wavelength) than
    forbidden band gap energy of semiconductor (e.g., by excitation of carriers
    from metal into semiconductor):Subject matter under subclass 449 wherein
    the device responds to light having lower energy than the energy difference
    between the bottom of the conduction band and the top of the valance band
    of the semiconductor material that forms a junction with the metal.

    (1)     Note.  One way to achieve this result is to photoelectrically
    excite electrons from the metal adjacent the semiconductor into the
    semiconductor.


CLS 257/452
TXT With edge protection, e.g., doped guard ring or mesa structure:Subject
    matter under subclass 449 wherein means is provided to reduce electric
    field concentration or  breakdown at edges of the metal and semiconductor.


CLS 257/453
TXT With specified Schottky metallic layer:
    Subject matter under subclass 449 wherein the device includes a layer of
    metal which has a specified chemical composition.


CLS 257/454
TXT Schottky metallic layer is a silicide:
    Subject matter under subclass 453 wherein the specified Schottky material
    layer is a compound of metal and silicon.


CLS 257/455
TXT Silicide of Platinum group metal:
    Subject matter under subclass 454 wherein the Schottky layer is a silicide
    of a metal found in the period table listed as a platinum group metal
    (i.e., ruthenium, rhodium, palladium, osmium, iridium, and platinum).


CLS 257/456
TXT Silicide of refractory metal:
    Subject matter under subclass 454 wherein the Schottky layer comprises a
    silicide of the refractory metals (i.e., W, Ti, Ta, Hf, Zr, V, Nb, Mo, and
    Cr).


CLS 257/457
TXT With particular contact geometry (e.g., ring or grid):
    Subject matter under subclass 449 wherein the device has a specific
    geometrical arrangement of electrical contacts.


CLS 257/458
TXT PIN detector, including combinations with non-light responsive active
    devices:Subject matter under subclass 431 wherein the device has a pn
    junction with an intrinsic semiconductor material region (i.e., one with no
    deliberate impurity dopants) portion between the p- and n-impurity doped
    regions.


CLS 257/459
TXT With particular contact geometry (e.g., ring or grid, or bonding pad
    arrangement):Subject matter under subclass 431 wherein the device has a
    specified electrical contact geometry.


CLS 257/460
TXT With backside illumination (e.g., with a thinned central area or
    non-absorbing substrate):Subject matter under subclass 431 wherein the
    device is structured to permit incident light to reach the receptor portion
    from the backside of the device.


CLS 257/461
TXT Light responsive pn junction:
    Subject matter under subclass 431 wherein the device has a junction between
    p-type and n-type material which responds to light incident upon it by
    generating a signal proportional thereto.


CLS 257/462
TXT Phototransistor:
    Subject matter under subclass 461 wherein the pn junction device is a
    transistor wherein the device generates an electrical signal in response to
    light incident on the transistor.


CLS 257/463
TXT With particular doping concentration:
    Subject matter under subclass 461 wherein the pn junction has a particular
    impurity dopant concentration or spatial distribution.


CLS 257/464
TXT With particular layer thickness (e.g., layer less than light absorption
    depth):Subject matter under subclass 461 wherein the thickness of the
    junction region is of a specified thickness (e.g., less than the thickness
    in which light is absorbed).


CLS 257/465
TXT Geometric configuration of junction (e.g., fingers):
    Subject matter under subclass 461 wherein the junction has a specified
    geometrical configuration (e. g., finger shaped).


CLS 257/466
TXT External physical configuration of semiconductor (e.g., mesas,
    grooves):Subject matter under subclass 431 wherein the device has a
    specified external configuration (e.g., with mesas).


CLS 257/467
TXT Temperature:
    Subject matter under subclass 414 wherein the non-electrical signal to
    which the device responds is thermal energy.

    (1)     Note.  Infrared energy incident on the active junction which does
    not cause significant thermal heating of the device is classified in
    subclass 431.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, particularly
    subclasses 54+ for methods of making a temperature responsive semiconductor
    device.


CLS 257/468
TXT Semiconductor device operated at cryogenic temperature:
    Subject matter under subclass 467 wherein means are provided to cool the
    device for operation at cryogenic levels (e.g., below 100 degrees Kelvin).


CLS 257/469
TXT With means to reduce temperature sensitivity (e.g., reduction of
    temperature sensitivity of junction breakdown voltage by using a
    compensating element):Subject matter under subclass 467 wherein means are
    provided to reduce the sensitivity of the electrical output of the device
    to changes in temperature of the device.


CLS 257/470
TXT Pn junction adapted as temperature sensor:
    Subject matter under subclass 467 wherein the active junction is a pn
    junction (i.e., forms a boundary between p-type and n-type carrier
    materials) and generates an electrical signal in response to thermal energy
    incident upon the active junction.


CLS 257/471
TXT SCHOTTKY BARRIER:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the device contains a
    Schottky barrier (i.e., a rectifying interface between a semiconductor
    material and a metal).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for Schottky barrier to amorphous semiconductor material device.

    73,     for Schottky barrier to polycrystalline semiconductor material
    device.

    155,    for a regenerative type switching device with switching speed
    enhancement means (e.g., a Schottky contact).

    260,    for JFET having the same channel controlled by, for example,
    Schottky barrier and PN junction gates.

    280     through 284, for JFETs with a Schottky gate electrode.

    449     through 457, for a light responsive device with a Schottky barrier.

    928,    for a shorted pn or Schottky junction device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, particularly
    subclasses 570+ for methods of forming a rectifying (Schottky) contact to a
    semiconductor.


CLS 257/472
TXT To compound semiconductor:
    Subject matter under subclass 471 wherein the Schottky metal is interfaced
    with a compound semiconductor.


CLS 257/473
TXT With specified Schottky metal:
    Subject matter under subclass 472 wherein the Schottky metal interfaced
    with the compound semiconductor is specifically claimed.


CLS 257/474
TXT As active junction in bipolar transistor (e.g., Schottky collector):Subject
    matter under subclass 471 wherein the Schottky barrier junction is used as
    an active bipolar  transistor junction (e.g., a Schottky collector).


CLS 257/475
TXT With doping profile to adjust barrier height:
    Subject matter under subclass 471 wherein the difference in electrical
    potential from one side of an active junction to the other has been
    adjusted by a distribution of impurity dopant in the semiconductor adjacent
    the Schottky junction.


CLS 257/476
TXT In integrated structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 471 wherein the Schottky barrier device is
    located in a single monolithic integrated semiconductor chip.


CLS 257/477
TXT With bipolar transistor:
    Subject matter under subclass 476 wherein the Schottky barrier device is
    located in a single integrated monolithic semiconductor chip with a bipolar
     transistor.


CLS 257/478
TXT Plural Schottky barriers with different barrier heights:
    Subject matter under subclass 477 wherein the integrated circuit containing
    a Schottky barrier device contains more than one Schottky barrier with
    different potential differences existing across the different barriers.


CLS 257/479
TXT Connected across base-collector junction of transistor (e.g., Baker
    clamp):Subject matter under subclass 477 wherein a Schottky barrier device
    is electrically connected across the base-collector junction of a bipolar
    transistor.


CLS 257/480
TXT In voltage variable capacitance diode:
    Subject matter under subclass 471 wherein the Schottky barrier is used in a
    variable capacitance diode (e.g., "varactor").


CLS 257/481
TXT Avalanche diode (e.g., so-called "Zener" diode having breakdown voltage
    greater than 6 volts):Subject matter under subclass 471 wherein the
    Schottky barrier is in a device designed to operate in avalanche  breakdown.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199,    for an avalanche diode in a non-charge transfer device having a
    heterojunction.

    551,    for an avalanche diode used as a voltage reference element combined
    with pn junction isolation means in an integrated circuit.

    603     through 606, for avalanche diodes not classified above those
    subclasses in this schedule, i.e., not involving a heterojunction in a
    non-charge transfer device, or a Schottky barrier, or one used as a voltage
    reference element with pn junction isolation means in an integrated circuit.


CLS 257/482
TXT Microwave transit time device (e.g., IMPATT diode):
    Subject matter under subclass 481 wherein the avalanche breakdown provides
    a power oscillation in the microwave region.


CLS 257/483
TXT With means to prevent edge breakdown:
    Subject matter under subclass 471 wherein the Schottky barrier device has
    means which help to reduce the electrical field around the edge of the
    device.


CLS 257/484
TXT Guard ring:
    Subject matter under subclass 483 wherein the means to prevent edge
    breakdown is a guard ring (e.g., a pn junction surrounding the periphery of
    the Schottky metal).


CLS 257/485
TXT Specified materials:
    Subject matter under subclass 471 wherein the Schottky barrier device uses
    a material of specified composition.


CLS 257/486
TXT Layered (e.g., a diffusion barrier material layer or a silicide layer or a
    precious metal layer):Subject matter under subclass 485 wherein the
    material, e.g., metal, which forms the Schottky barrier is comprised of
    layers, for example, a diffusion barrier material layer or a silicide layer
    or a precious metal layer.


CLS 257/487
TXT WITH MEANS TO INCREASE BREAKDOWN VOLTAGE THRESHOLD:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the device is provided
    with means to increase the voltage that may be applied thereto without
    causing electrical breakdown.


CLS 257/488
TXT Field relief electrode:
    Subject matter under subclass 487 wherein the means to increase breakdown
    voltage comprises an electrode insulated from the semiconductor material of
    the active solid-state device, and configured so as to reduce the electric
    field strength at a given voltage applied to the device.


CLS 257/489
TXT Resistive:
    Subject matter under subclass 488 wherein the field relief electrode is a
    high resistance layer adapted to have a current flow therethrough and a
    corresponding voltage variation therein.


CLS 257/490
TXT Combined with floating pn junction guard region:
    Subject matter under subclass 488 wherein the means for increasing
    breakdown voltage includes, in addition to a field relief electrode, a
    floating pn junction guard region, i.e., a region free of direct electrical
    connection located in the material forming one side of an active pn, or
    other rectifying semiconductor junction, which region forms a pn junction
    with the material of the one side of the active junction, the guard region
    being spaced from the active junction, but sufficiently close thereto that
    the reverse bias depletion region from the active junction can reach the
    guard junction, whereby the guard junction modifies the shape of the
    depletion region from the active junction thus lowering the electric field
    intensity at a given applied reverse voltage across the active junction.


CLS 257/491
TXT In integrated circuit:
    Subject matter under subclass 487 wherein the device with means to increase
    breakdown voltage is combined in a unitary monolithic semiconductor chip
    with other active or passive electronic devices.

    (1)     Note.  The means for increasing breakdown voltage in the integrated
    circuit active device may include a floating  pn junction guard region,
    that is, a region, free of direct electrical connection, located in the
    material forming one side of an active pn or other rectifying semiconductor
    junction, which region forms a pn junction with the material of the one
    side of the active junction, the guard region being spaced from the active
    junction but sufficiently close thereto that the reverse bias depletion
    region from the active junction can reach the guard junction, whereby the
    guard junction modifies the shape of the depletion region from the active
    junction thus lowering the electric field intensity at a given applied
    reverse voltage across the active junction.

    (2)     Note.  The means for increasing the breakdown voltage of the
    integrated circuit device may include a semiconductor surface portion
    having a physical configuration, such as a bevel or mesa, to reduce
    electric field strength at a given applied voltage.  Typically, the
    physical configuration will be such that the depletion region from a
    reverse biased junction in the active device reaches the physically
    configured surface and is forced by the shape of the surface to spread
    wider at a given applied reverse voltage than it would otherwise, thus
    reducing the electric field strength in the depletion layer.


CLS 257/492
TXT With electric field controlling semiconductor layer having a low enough
    doping level in relationship to its thickness to be fully depleted prior to
    avalanche breakdown (e.g., RESURF devices):Subject matter under subclass
    491 wherein the means to increase breakdown voltage of the device includes
    a layer of semiconductor material having a sufficiently low doping
    concentration that it may be fully depleted by the depletion region of a
    reverse biased junction of the active device prior to avalanche breakdown
    of the active device, so that upon depletion of the layer of semiconductor
    material, the effective width of the depletion layer of the reverse biased
    junction of the active device is greatly expanded, thus resulting in
    smaller increases in electric field intensity with further increases of
    reverse voltage.

    (1)     Note.  Devices provided with such a layer are sometimes called
    "RESURF" (Reduced SURFace Field) devices.

    (2)     Note.  In silicon, to be fully depleted without  avalanche
    breakdown, a layer must typically have an integrated doping density (the
    line integral of doping density along a path through the thickness of the
    layer) of less than 2x1012 dopant atoms/cm2.  The critical integrated
    doping density varies depending on the properties of the particular
    semiconductor material.


CLS 257/493
TXT With electric field controlling semiconductor layer having a low enough
    doping level in relationship to its thickness to be fully depleted prior to
    avalanche breakdown (e.g., RESURF devices):Subject matter under subclass
    487 wherein the means to increase breakdown voltage of the device includes
    a layer of semiconductor material having a sufficiently low doping
    concentration that it may be fully depleted by the depletion region of a
    reverse biased junction of the active device prior to avalanche breakdown
    of the active device, so that upon depletion of the layer of semiconductor
    material, the effective width of the depletion layer of the reverse biased
    junction of the active device is greatly expanded, thus resulting in
    smaller increases in electric field intensity with further increases of
    reverse voltage.


CLS 257/494
TXT Reverse-biased pn junction guard region:
    Subject matter under subclass 487 wherein the means for increasing
    breakdown voltage in the device includes a reverse biased pn junction guard
    region, that is, a region located in the material forming one side of an
    active pn or other rectifying semiconductor junction, which region forms a
    pn junction with the material of the one side of the active junction, the
    guard region being adapted to be reverse biased with respect to the
    material forming one side of the active junction, and being spaced from the
    active junction, but sufficiently close thereto that the reverse bias
    depletion region from the active junction can reach the depletion region
    from the reverse biased guard junction, whereby the depletion region of the
    guard junction modifies the shape of the depletion region from the active
    junction thus lowering the electric field intensity at a given applied
    reverse voltage across the active junction.


CLS 257/495
TXT Floating pn junction guard region:
    Subject matter under subclass 487 wherein the means for increasing
    breakdown voltage in the device includes a floating pn junction guard
    region, that is, a region, free of direct electrical connection, located in
    the material forming one side of an active pn or other rectifying
    semiconductor junction, which region forms a pn junction with the material
    of the one side of the active junction, the guard region being spaced from
    the active junction, but sufficiently close thereto that the reverse bias
    depletion region from the active junction can reach the guard junction,
    whereby the guard junction modifies the shape of the depletion region from
    the active junction thus lowering the electric field intensity at a given
    applied reverse voltage across the active junction.


CLS 257/496
TXT With physical configuration of semiconductor surface to reduce electric
    field (e.g., reverse bevels, double bevels, stepped mesas, etc.):Subject
    matter under subclass 487 wherein the means to increase breakdown voltage
    includes a semiconductor surface portion having a physical configuration,
    such as a bevel or mesa, to reduce electric field strength at a given
    applied voltage.  Typically, the physical configuration will be such that
    the depletion region from a reverse biased junction in the active device
    reaches the physically configured surface and is forced by the shape of the
    surface to spread wider at a given applied reverse voltage than it would
    otherwise, thus reducing the electric field strength in the depletion layer.


CLS 257/497
TXT PUNCHTHROUGH STRUCTURE DEVICE (E.G., PUNCHTHROUGH TRANSISTOR, CAMEL BARRIER
    DIODE):Subject matter under the class definition having at least one active
    pn, Schottky barrier, or other rectifying junction which can be reverse
    biased to produce a depletion layer, the active junction being spaced from
    a second junction by a layer of semiconductor material in which the
    depletion region extending from the active junction is produced, the second
    junction being one capable of supplying minority carriers to the layer of
    semiconductor material upon forward bias of the second junction, and in
    which the second junction is located sufficiently close to the active
    junction that the depletion region from the active junction can reach the
    second junction, thereby forward biasing the second junction and causing
    the injection of minority carriers therefrom which traverse the depletion
    layer and reach the active junction.

    SERARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    361+,   for punchthrough structure elements used to protect against
    overvoltage gate insulator breakdown of insulated gate devices.


CLS 257/498
TXT Punchthrough region fully depleted at zero external applied bias voltage
    (e.g., camel barrier or planar doped barrier devices, or so-called "Bipolar
    SIT" devices):Subject matter under subclass 497 wherein the active junction
    and the second junction are sufficiently closely spaced that the depletion
    region from the active junction due to the built-in potential of the active
    junction reaches the second junction even in the absence of a reverse bias
    voltage across the active junction.


CLS 257/499
TXT INTEGRATED CIRCUIT STRUCTURE WITH ELECTRICALLY ISOLATED COMPONENTS:Subject
    matter under the class definition wherein at least one active solid-state
    device is provided in a single, monolithic semiconductor chip along with
    other active or passive elements in the chip, and means are provided to
    electrically isolate different devices in the monolithic chip from each
    other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for intervalley transfer bulk effect devices (e.g., Gunn effect
    devices) in a monolithic integrated circuit.

    93,     for plural light emitting devices with electrical isolation means
    in integrated circuit structure.

    265,    for JFET devices having vertical current path in integrated circuit.

    272     through 278, for JFET devices in integrated circuits.

    334,    for short channel IGFET devices having a gate electrode controlling
    the vertical portion of the channel and being in a groove in an integrated
    circuit.

    337     and 338, for graded channel short channel IGFET devices in
    integrated circuit structure.

    357     through 359, for insulated electrode field effect devices with gate
    insulator overvoltage protection means in complementary field effect
    transistor integrated circuit devices.

    368     through 401, for IGFET devices in integrated circuit.

    427,    for a magnetic field sensor in an integrated circuit.

    446,    for matrix or array type photodetectors with specific isolation
    means in an integrated circuit.

    491     and 492, for devices with means to increase breakdown voltage in an
    integrated circuit, including, for example, RESURF devices.

    663,    for a superconductive contact or lead on an integrated circuit.

    713,    for cooling means for an integrated circuit device.

    758     through 760, for multi-level metallization in, e.g., an integrated
    circuit device.

    922,    for a device with means to prevent inspection of or tampering with
    an integrated circuit.

    929,    for pn junction isolated integrated circuits with isolation walls
    having minimum dopant concentration at intermediate depth in epitaxial
    layer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, particularly
    subclasses 294+ for methods of making laterally spaced, electrically
    isolated semiconductor regions in combination with insulated gate field
    effect transistors; subclasses 353+ for methods of making laterally spaced,
    electrically isolated semiconductor regions in combination with bipolar
    transistors; and subclasses 400+ for methods of making laterally spaced,
    electrically isolated semiconductor regions or various


CLS 257/500
TXT Including high voltage or high power devices isolated from low voltage or
    low power devices in the same integrated circuit:Subject matter under
    subclass 499 wherein the monolithic chip includes both electronic
    components specifically configured for operation at high voltages or high
    power levels, along with other electronic components which are configured
    for operation only at low voltages or power levels.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 491 for monolithic chips which
    include active components with specific means provided to increase the
    breakdown voltage of those active components.  The combination of high
    voltage and low voltage active solid-state devices on the same monolithic
    chip will only be classified in this subclass (500), if no particular
    structure is provided to increase the breakdown voltage of the high voltage
    components.


CLS 257/501
TXT Including dielectric isolation means:
    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein the means to electrically isolate
    different devices in the same monolithic chip, containing both high voltage
    or power and low voltage or power devices, from each other includes a
    region of electrical insulator material.


CLS 257/502
TXT High power or high voltage device extends completely through semiconductor
    substrate (e.g., backside collector contact):Subject matter under subclass
    500 wherein at least one high voltage or high power device extends
    completely through the monolithic chip from the top surface to the bottom
    surface of the chip.


CLS 257/503
TXT With contact or metallization configuration to reduce parasitic coupling
    (e.g., separate ground pads for different parts of integrated
    circuit):Subject matter under subclass 499 wherein the  chip includes
    contacts or electrical interconnections, such as metal strips deposited on
    the surface of the chip, which contacts or interconnections are configured
    in such a manner as to reduce or eliminate unwanted parasitic coupling of
    electrical signals from one part or component of the integrated circuit to
    another.

    (1)     Note.  Such configuration might be, for example, a shielding
    conductive layer connected to fixed potential, or large area metal pads for
    connection to external supply voltages with plural separate pads provided
    to connect different parts or components of the same integrated circuit to
    the same external voltage, to prevent voltage drops from electrical current
    flowing between a pad and one component from producing a parasitic varying
    voltage applied to another component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    659,    for electrical shielding, in general, in active solid-state devices.

    664,    for transmission line connections, in general, in active
    solid-state devices.


CLS 257/504
TXT Including means for establishing a depletion region throughout a
    semiconductor layer for isolating devices in different portions of the
    layer (e.g., "JFET" isolation):Subject matter under subclass 499 wherein
    means are provided for producing a region in a layer which is fully
    depleted of charge carriers and thereby non-conductive as part of the means
    for electrically isolating different devices in the chip from each other.


CLS 257/505
TXT With polycrystalline semiconductor isolation region in direct contact with
    single crystal active semiconductor material:Subject matter under subclass
    499 wherein the means for electrically isolating different devices in the
    chip from each other includes at least one region of polycrystalline (i.e.,
    made up of many small crystals) semiconductor material, which
    polycrystalline isolation region is in direct contact with at least one
    region of single crystal semiconductor material which forms part of an
    active solid-state device in the chip.

    (1)     Note.  The polycrystalline isolation region may be either undoped
    or doped with recombination center doping, in order to make it high
    resistivity and thus, effectively, an electrical insulator, or may be doped
    with a p or n dopant in order to form a pn junction with the single crystal
    material of the active solid-state device so that the rectifying junction
    between the doped isolation region and the single crystal active portion,
    when reverse biased, electrically isolates the devices in the chip from
    each other.


CLS 257/506
TXT Including dielectric isolation means:
    Subject matter under subclass 499 wherein the means to electrically isolate
    different devices in the same monolithic chip from each other includes a
    region of electrical insulator material.


CLS 257/507
TXT With single crystal insulating substrate (e.g., sapphire):
    Subject matter under subclass 506 wherein the means to electrically isolate
    different devices from each other includes a substrate of single crystal
    insulating material, upon which the semiconductor material of the active
    devices is grown in heteroepitaxial relationship therewith.

    (1)     Note.  The substrate may typically be the alpha crystalline phase
    of aluminum oxide, commonly called sapphire or single crystalline beryllium
    oxide or single crystal magnesium aluminate known as spinel.


CLS 257/508
TXT With metallic conductor within isolating dielectric or between
    semiconductor and isolating dielectric (e.g., metal shield layer or
    internal connection layer):Subject matter under subclass 506 wherein a
    metallic (metal or metal-like) conductor is located within the region of
    electrical insulator material which isolates the components on the chip
    from each other or is provided between the single crystal semiconductor
    material of the semiconductor components and the electrical insulator
    material forming the dielectric isolation.

    (1)     Note.  The metallic conductor may be used to provide
    interconnections between components on the chip or as an electrical
    shielding layer.


CLS 257/509
TXT Combined with pn junction isolation (e.g., isoplanar, LOCOS):Subject matter
    under subclass 506 wherein the means for electrically isolating components
    in the chip from each other includes, in addition to portions of electrical
    insulator material, pn junctions separating regions of active devices from
    each other and/or from a supporting semiconductor substrate.

    (1)     Note.  There are several names in common use for isolation of this
    type, particularly where the pn junctions provide isolation between active
    devices and the supporting semiconductor substrate with the dielectric
    material recessed into the semiconductor between active devices and
    extending down to the isolating pn junctions to separate devices laterally
    from each other.  Such common names include LOCOS (Local Oxidation of
    Silicon), ROI (Recessed Oxide Isolation), Isoplanar, and Planox.  These
    terms do not represent different isolation structures, but are merely
    alternative names for the same type of isolation.


CLS 257/510
TXT Dielectric in groove:
    Subject matter under subclass 509 wherein the electrical insulator material
    forming part of the isolation means is located in grooves in the
    semiconductor surface (e.g., LOCOS)

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    374,    for CMOS FET dielectric isolation means (e.g., dielectric layer in
    vertical groove.)


CLS 257/511
TXT With complementary (npn and pnp) bipolar transistor structures:Subject
    matter under subclass 509 wherein the device includes, on the same
    monolithic chip, both pnp bipolar transistors and npn bipolar transistor
    structures.


CLS 257/512
TXT Complementary devices share common active region (e.g., integrated
    injection logic, I2L):Subject matter under subclass 511 wherein the device
    includes structures wherein a pnp transistor shares a semiconductor region
    with an npn transistor, e.g., where the base region of the pnp transistor
    serves also as the emitter of the npn transistor and the collector of the
    pnp transistor serves as the base region of the npn transistor.

    (1)     Note.  Search this class, subclass 107 for regenerative switching
    devices, which typically are in the form of a pnp transistor and an npn
    transistor, the collector and  base of the pnp transistor forming the base
    and collector, respectively, of the npn transistor.

    (2)     Note.  A typical structure in which pnp transistors and npn
    transistors share regions in common is that called Integrated injection
    logic, I2L (formerly alternatively called merged transistor logic, MTL), in
    which a pnp transistor serves to supply base region current to a
    multicollector npn transistor, with the base region of the npn being the
    logic circuit input and the multiple collectors providing logic fan out to
    plural further logic gates.


CLS 257/513
TXT Vertical walled groove:
    Subject matter under subclass 510 wherein the dielectric isolation is
    located in grooves in the surface of the overall device which extend
    perpendicular to the surface of the overall device.


CLS 257/514
TXT With active junction abutting groove (e.g., "walled emitter"):Subject
    matter under subclass 513 wherein at least one pn junction forming a part
    of an active solid-state device terminates against the dielectric filling
    in the vertical walled isolation groove.

    (1)     Note.  If the emitter-base junction terminates against a dielectric
    isolation sidewall, this is termed a "walled emitter" transistor structure.


CLS 257/515
TXT With active junction abutting groove (e.g., "walled emitter"):Subject
    matter under subclass 510 wherein at least one pn junction forming a part
    of an active solid-state device terminates against the dielectric filling
    in the isolation groove.


CLS 257/516
TXT With passive component (e.g., resistor, capacitor, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 510 wherein the device contains, in addition
    to at least one active solid-state device, at least one passive component,
    such as a resistor or capacitor.


CLS 257/517
TXT With bipolar transistor structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 510 wherein the device contains at least one
    bipolar transistor structure.


CLS 257/518
TXT With polycrystalline connecting region (e.g., polysilicon base
    contact):Subject matter under subclass 517 wherein the  device has portions
    of polycrystalline (i.e., made up of many small crystals) semiconductor
    material serving as electrical contacts or connections.


CLS 257/519
TXT Including heavily doped channel stop region adjacent groove:Subject matter
    under subclass 510 wherein the device has at least one heavily doped
    semiconductor region adjacent a dielectric filled groove to prevent
    formation of parasitic inversion channels in the semiconductor material.


CLS 257/520
TXT Conductive filling in dielectric-lined groove (e.g., polysilicon
    backfill):Subject matter under subclass 510 wherein the device has the
    grooves filled with a lining of dielectric material together with a
    conductive filling in the groove, the conductive filling being separated
    from the semiconductor material by the dielectric lining of the groove.


CLS 257/521
TXT Sides of grooves along major crystal planes (e.g., (111), (100) planes,
    etc.):Subject matter under subclass 510 wherein the device has grooves for
    the isolation whose sides are oriented along one or more major crystal
    planes of the semiconductor material in which the grooves are formed.

    (1)     Note.  Major crystal planes are considered to be the (111), (110),
    and (100) planes in a crystal with cubic symmetry.

    (2)     Note.  See illustration, below.


CLS 257/522
TXT Air isolation (e.g., beam lead supported semiconductor islands):Subject
    matter under subclass 506 wherein the isolation means is air (e.g., islands
    of semiconductor material supported by beam leads and separated by air).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, particularly subclass
    411 for methods of forming electrically isolated semiconductor islands held
    in place by beam lead metallization; subclass 461 for methods of forming
    beam leads on a semiconductor substrate combined with dicing of the
    substrate into plural separate bodies; and subclass 611 for methods of
    forming beam lead metallization on a semiconductor substrate.


CLS 257/523
TXT Isolation by region of intrinsic (undoped) semiconductor material (e.g.,
    including region physically damaged by proton bombardment):Subject matter
    under subclass 506 wherein the electrical insulator material which provides
    the dielectric isolation includes a region of intrinsic (undoped)
    semiconductor material, with resulting high resistivity.

    (1)     Note.  The isolation region may contain a region which has been
    physically damaged by proton bombardment or by other means.


CLS 257/524
TXT Full dielectric isolation with polycrystalline semiconductor
    substrate:Subject matter under subclass 506 wherein the integrated circuit
    substrate is made of polycrystalline semiconductor material and the
    isolation means is a dielectric material which surrounds each active
    solid-state semiconductor device, resulting is those devices becoming
    islands in a sea of dielectric material.


CLS 257/525
TXT With complementary (npn and pnp) bipolar transistor structures:Subject
    matter under subclass 524 wherein the device includes complementary bipolar
    transistors (i.e., includes both pnp and npn bipolar transistors).

    (1)     Note.  The device may include complementary lateral bipolar
    transistor structures.


CLS 257/526
TXT With bipolar transistor structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 524 wherein the device includes at least one
    bipolar transistor structure.


CLS 257/527
TXT Sides of isolated semiconductor islands along major crystal planes (e.g.,
    (111), (100) planes, etc.):Subject matter under subclass 524 wherein the
    device has sides of the isolated single crystal semiconductor islands which
    are oriented along one or more major crystal planes of the semiconductor
    material of the islands.


CLS 257/528
TXT Passive components in ICs:
    Subject matter under subclass 499 wherein the device is contained in a
    single, monolithic chip with electrical components which are passive, i.e.,
    which do not have gain, for example, pure capacitors, inductors, or
    resistors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    379,    for a passive component combined with an IGFET device in an
    integrated circuit.

    516,    for passive components in an integrated circuit with dielectric in
    groove and pn junction isolation.

    904,    for a FET combined with passive components adapted for use as a
    static memory cell.


CLS 257/529
TXT Including programmable passive component (e.g.,  fuse):
    Subject matter under subclass 528 wherein a passive component is
    programmable, i.e., may be permanently altered (e.g., a fuse - a protective
    device designed to open a circuit in response to an excessive current).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, particularly
    subclasses 467, 600, and 601 for methods of forming or modifying
    electrically alterable structures for selectively interconnecting
    electrical devices on a semiconductor substrate.


CLS 257/530
TXT Anti-fuse:
    Subject matter under subclass 529 wherein an element which is normally
    non-conductive is made conductive (e.g., a capacitor) that is, that can be
    selectively electrically shorted.


CLS 257/531
TXT Including inductive element:
    Subject matter under subclass 528 wherein the device includes an electrical
    inductor, i.e., an element that tends to oppose any change of current
    applied thereto because of a magnetic field generated by the inductor
    itself.


CLS 257/532
TXT Including capacitor component:
    Subject matter under subclass 528 wherein the device includes an electrical
    capacitor, i.e., a passive element with electrical conductors separated by
    a dielectric material which stores electrical charge when potential
    differences exist between the conductive elements of the capacitor.


CLS 257/533
TXT Combined with resistor to form RC filter structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 532 wherein the capacitor element is combined
    with an electrical resistance element to form an electrical filter in the
    form of an integrated RC filter circuit.


CLS 257/534
TXT With means to increase surface area (e.g., grooves, ridges, etc.):Subject
    matter under subclass 532 wherein the device includes means to increase the
    surface area of the device by, for example, grooves or ridges in the
    surface of the device.


CLS 257/535
TXT Both terminals of capacitor isolated from substrate:
    Subject matter under subclass 532 wherein the device includes a capacitor,
    both terminals of which are electrically isolated from the integrated
    circuit chip substrate.


CLS 257/536
TXT Including resistive element:
    Subject matter under subclass 528 wherein the device includes an electrical
    resistance element.


CLS 257/537
TXT Using specific resistive material:
    Subject matter under subclass 536 wherein the passive resistive element is
    a specific chemical element, compound, or composition.


CLS 257/538
TXT Polycrystalline silicon (doped or undoped):
    Subject matter under subclass 537 wherein the specific resistive material
    is a silicon material made up of many single crystals having a random
    orientation.


CLS 257/539
TXT Combined with bipolar transistor:
    Subject matter under subclass 536 wherein the device includes at least one
    bipolar transistor structure along with the resistive element.


CLS 257/540
TXT With compensation for non-linearity (e.g., dynamic isolation pocket
    bias):Subject matter under subclass 539 wherein means are provided to
    compensate for non-linearity of the resistor, such as by provision of
    varying bias voltage to a semiconductor pocket which forms a pn junction
    with the resistive element and provides electrical isolation therefor.


CLS 257/541
TXT Pinch resistor:
    Subject matter under subclass 539 wherein the resistor element has a
    structure in the form of a layer of one conductivity type sandwiched
    between a pair of regions of opposite conductivity type, so that the upper
    region of opposite conductivity type restricts the thickness of the
    resistive layer and thus increases its resistivity.

    (1)     Note.  Typically, the resistor will have the same doping profile as
    the base region of the bipolar transistor, while the lower opposite
    conductivity type region will have the same doping profile as the  bipolar
    transistor collector, and the upper, or "pinching" region, will have the
    same doping profile as the bipolar  transistor emitter.


CLS 257/542
TXT Resistor has same doping as emitter or collector of bipolar
    transistor:Subject matter under subclass 539 wherein the resistor region
    has the same doping concentration and profile (e.g., is formed in the same
    step as) either the emitter or the collector region of the  bipolar
    transistor with which the resistor is combined in the same integrated
    circuit.

    (1)     Note.  Most resistors in  bipolar integrated circuits are formed
    with the same doping step as the bipolar transistor base regions.
    Resistors that are instead formed at the same doping step as the emitter or
    collector, rather than the base, go in this subclass.


CLS 257/543
TXT Lightly doped junction isolated resistor (e.g., ion implanted
    resistor):Subject matter under subclass 539 wherein the resistive element
    is of the form of a lightly doped layer of one conductivity type located in
    a region of opposite conductivity type, such that the pn junction between
    the resistor region and its containing opposite conductivity type region
    serves to isolate the resistor.

    (1)     Note.  A resistor region is considered to be lightly doped if it is
    substantially less heavily doped than the base region of the bipolar
    transistors in the same integrated circuit, or if it is has a doping
    density not greater than 100 times that of the opposite conductivity type
    region in which it is contained.

    (2)     Note.  Such lightly doped resistors are typically formed by the
    process of ion implantation, wherein desired dopant atoms are placed in the
    semiconductor body by ionizing the dopant material and accelerating the
    resulting ions through a carefully controlled voltage to impinge on the
    surface of the semiconductor material, so that the depth of the resulting
    dopant atoms is determined by the accelerating voltage and the doping
    density is determined by the flux of the ion beam.


CLS 257/544
TXT With pn junction isolation:
    Subject matter under subclass 499 wherein the means for electrically
    isolating different devices from each other includes a pn junction located
    between the devices to be isolated.


CLS 257/545
TXT With means to control isolation junction capacitance (e.g., lightly doped
    layer at isolation junction to increase depletion layer width):Subject
    matter under subclass 544 wherein the device is provided with means, such
    as a lightly doped semiconductor layer at the isolation junction, to
    control (e.g., increase or decrease) the capacitance of the isolation
    junction.


CLS 257/546
TXT With structural means to protect against excess or reversed polarity
    voltage:Subject matter under subclass 544 wherein means is provided to
    protect the circuit or its components from application of an excessive or
    reversed polarity voltage.


CLS 257/547
TXT With structural means to control parasitic transistor action or leakage
    current:Subject matter under subclass 544 including means to control or
    reduce parasitic bipolar transistor action, i.e., bipolar transistor action
    in which the substrate and isolation junctions of the integrated circuit
    act as active junctions of an unintended bipolar  transistor, or to control
    or reduce leakage currents associated with the pn isolation junctions.


CLS 257/548
TXT At least three regions of alternating conductivity types with dopant
    concentration gradients decreasing from surface of semiconductor (e.g.,
    "triple-diffused" integrated circuit):Subject matter under subclass 544
    including at least three regions of alternating conductivity type (p or n),
    with each successive region contained within the previous region, and each
    of the regions having a doping concentration which decreases with distance
    from the same external surface of the semiconductor body.

    (1)     Note.  Junction isolated integrated circuits of this type are
    typically manufactured by starting with an uniformly doped p-type
    semiconductor body to serve as the substrate, then diffusing spaced n-type
    regions into the P substrate to form collectors of npn transistors, and
    then successively diffusing p-type  base and n-type emitters into the
    spaced n-type regions.  Junction isolated integrated circuits of this type
    are simple to manufacture, due to the reduced number of processing steps
    involved, but suffer from non-optimum doping concentration profiles,
    particularly in the collector regions.


CLS 257/549
TXT With substrate and lightly doped surface layer of same conductivity type,
    separated by subsurface heavily doped region of opposite conductivity type
    (e.g., "collector diffused isolation" integrated circuit):Subject matter
    under subclass 544 wherein the junction isolation is formed in an
    integrated circuit with a substrate and lightly doped surface layer of the
    same conductivity type, separated by subsurface heavily doped region of
    opposite conductivity type (e.g., "collector diffused isolation" integrated
    circuit).


CLS 257/550
TXT With lightly doped surface layer of one conductivity type on substrate of
    opposite conductivity type, having plural heavily doped portions of the one
    conductivity type between the layer and substrate, different ones of the
    heavily doped portions having differing depths or physical extent:Subject
    matter under subclass 544 wherein the junction isolation is formed in an
    integrated circuit with a lightly doped surface layer of one conductivity
    type on substrate of opposite conductivity type, having plural heavily
    doped portions of the one conductivity type between the layer and
    substrate, different ones of the heavily doped portions having differing
    depths or physical extent.


    (1)     Note.  The heavily doped portions are usually "subcollector"
    contact regions, low resistance connections to the bottom of the collector
    region of a bipolar transistor.


CLS 257/551
TXT Including voltage reference element (e.g., avalanche diode, so-called
    "Zener diode" with breakdown voltage greater than 6 volts or with positive
    temperature coefficient of breakdown voltage):Subject matter under subclass
    544 including a voltage reference element, i.e., a device which limits the
    operating voltage of one or more active devices in the integrated circuit
    (e.g., an avalanche diode, so-called "Zener diode" with breakdown voltage
    greater than 6 volts, or with positive temperature coefficient of breakdown
    voltage).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199,    for an avalanche diode in a non-charge transfer device having a
    heterojunction.

    481     and 482, for Schottky barrier avalanche diodes.

    603     through 606, for avalanche diodes not classified above those
    subclasses in this schedule, i.e., not involving a heterojunction in a
    non-charge transfer device or a Schottky barrier, or one used as a voltage
    reference element with pn junction isolation means in an integrated circuit.


CLS 257/552
TXT With bipolar transistor structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 544 wherein the junction isolation is formed
    in an integrated circuit between active devices at least one of which has a
    bipolar  transistor structure.


CLS 257/553
TXT Transistors of same conductivity type (e.g., npn) having different current
    gain or different operating voltage characteristics:Subject matter under
    subclass 552 wherein plural  bipolar transistor structures are present
    which have the same electrical conductivity type (e.g., npn) but have
    different current gain or different operating voltage characteristics.


CLS 257/554
TXT With connecting region made of polycrystalline semiconductor material
    (e.g., polysilicon base contact):Subject matter under subclass 552 wherein
    a connecting region or contact made of a polycrystalline semiconductor
    material is present in the bipolar integrated circuit.


CLS 257/555
TXT Complementary bipolar transistor structures (e.g., integrated injection
    logic, I2L):Subject matter under subclass 552 wherein the device contains
    complementary bipolar transistor structures (i.e., both pnp and npn bipolar
    transistor structures).


CLS 257/556
TXT Including lateral bipolar transistor structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 555 wherein at least one of the pnp or npn
    complementary bipolar transistors is a lateral structure (i.e., has current
    flow between its emitter and collector parallel to a major surface of the
    semiconductor chip).


CLS 257/557
TXT Lateral bipolar transistor structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 499 wherein the device includes at least one
    bipolar transistor which has a lateral structure (i.e., has current flow
    between its emitter and collector parallel to a major surface of the
    semiconductor chip).


CLS 257/558
TXT With base region doping concentration step or gradient or with means to
    increase current gain:Subject matter under subclass 557 wherein the device
    has a base region with a variable impurity dopant concentration across it,
    or wherein means are provided to increase the current gain of the
    transistor.


CLS 257/559
TXT With active region formed along groove or exposed edge in
    semiconductor:Subject matter under subclass 557 wherein the device has a
    groove or exposed edge and an active region of the  bipolar transistor is
    formed along the groove or exposed edge.


CLS 257/560
TXT With multiple collectors or emitters:
    Subject matter under subclass 557 wherein the device has more than one
    collector region or more than one emitter region.


CLS 257/561
TXT With different emitter to collector spacings or facing areas:Subject matter
    under subclass 560 wherein the device has different emitter to collector
    spacings for different collectors or emitters.


CLS 257/562
TXT With auxiliary collector/re-emitter between emitter and output collector
    (e.g., "Current Hogging Logic" device):Subject matter under subclass 560
    wherein the device has a region located between its emitter and its
    collector which serves as an auxiliary collector/re-emitter, i.e., the
    auxiliary region collects carriers emitted by the emitter and re-emits them
    to the collector (e.g., a "Current Hogging Logic" device).


CLS 257/563
TXT With multiple separately connected emitter, collector, or base regions in
    same transistor structure:Subject matter under subclass 499 wherein the
    device includes two or more separately connected (i.e., not commonly
    connected) emitter, collector, or base regions.


CLS 257/564
TXT Multiple base or collector regions:
    Subject matter under subclass 563 wherein the device contains two or more
    separately connected base or collector regions, but not more than one
    separately connected emitter region.


CLS 257/565
TXT BIPOLAR TRANSISTOR STRUCTURE:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the active solid-state
    device comprises at least one bipolar transistor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for bipolar transistor structure having a metal contact alloyed to
    elemental semiconductor type pn junction in a non-regenerative structure.

    511,    for complementary bipolar transistor structure having
    dielectric-in-groove isolation and pn junction isolation in an integrated
    circuit.

    517     and 518, for bipolar transistor structure having
    dielectric-in-groove isolation and pn junction isolation in an integrated
    circuit.

    525,    for complementary bipolar structure with full dielectric isolation
    in an integrated circuit.

    526,    for bipolar structure with full dielectric isolation in an
    integrated circuit.

    552     through 556, for bipolar transistor structure combined with pn
    junction isolation in an integrated circuit.

    557     through 562, for integrated circuits with electrically isolated
    lateral bipolar transistor structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, digests 10 and 11 for bipolar transistor devices.

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, particularly subclasses 18+,
    42+, 48, 75+, 89+, 109+, and 124+ for logic circuits utilizing bipolar
    transistors.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, particularly subclasses 204, 207, 405, 411+, 417, 432+, 439, 459,
    462, 463, 474, 475, and 478+ for miscellaneous nonlinear circuits with
    explicitly recited bipolar transistors.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 250+ for amplifiers with transistors which
    may be bipolar transistors and subclass 300 which explicitly provides for
    bipolar or field effect transistors.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 127+ for bipolar
    analog to or from digital converters and subclass 133 for such device with
    a drift (graded base) transistor element.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, subclasses 309+ for
    methods of forming bipolar transistors.


CLS 257/566
TXT Plural non-isolated transistor structures in same structure:Subject matter
    under subclass 565 wherein the bipolar structure includes more than one
    bipolar transistor in a structure without electrical isolation between
    transistors.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 499, above, for integrated circuits with
    electrical isolation, including with bipolar transistors.


CLS 257/567
TXT Darlington configuration (i.e., emitter to collector current of input
    transistor supplied to base region of output transistor):Subject matter
    under subclass 566 wherein the plural non-electrically isolated transistor
    structures are arranged in a Darlington configuration (i.e., wherein the
    emitter to collector current of an input transistor is supplied to the base
    region of an output transistor).


CLS 257/568
TXT More than two Darlington-connected transistors:
    Subject matter under subclass 567 wherein the device contains more than two
    Darlington-connected bipolar  transistors.


CLS 257/569
TXT Complementary Darlington-connected transistors:
    Subject matter under subclass 567 wherein the Darlington configuration
    comprises two bipolar  transistors which have a complementary connection,
    i.e., the input transistor is of one conductivity type (e.g., npn) and the
    other is of the opposite conductivity type (e.g., pnp).


CLS 257/570
TXT With active components in addition to Darlington transistors (e.g.,
    antisaturation diode, bleeder diode connected antiparallel to input
    transistor base-emitter junction, etc.):Subject matter under subclass 567
    wherein the device contains active solid-state devices in addition to
    Darlington bipolar transistors.


CLS 257/571
TXT Non-planar structure (e.g., mesa emitter, or having a groove to define
    resistor):Subject matter under subclass 567 wherein the device is a
    non-planar structure (i.e., the upper surface is not a completely flat,
    unbroken surface).


CLS 257/572
TXT With resistance means connected between transistor base regions:Subject
    matter under subclass 567 wherein the device includes a resistor element
    structure connecting the base regions of the Darlington bipolar transistors.


CLS 257/573
TXT With housing or contact structure or configuration:
    Subject matter under subclass 567 wherein a housing or electrical contact
    structure is provided for the device.


CLS 257/574
TXT Complementary transistors share common active region (e.g., integrated
    injection logic, I2L):Subject matter under subclass 566 wherein the device
    includes complementary transistors (i.e., bipolar  transistors of different
    conductivity types) which share a common active region (e.g., integrated
    injection logic, I2L).


CLS 257/575
TXT Including lateral bipolar transistor structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 574 wherein at least one of the complementary
    bipolar transistors sharing a common region is a lateral bipolar transistor
    (i.e., has current flow between its emitter and collector parallel to a
    major surface of the semiconductor chip).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    423,    for lateral and other bipolar transistor magnetic field responsive
    structure.

    557+,   for electrically isolated lateral bipolar transistor structures in
    an integrated circuit.


CLS 257/576
TXT With contacts of refractory material (e.g., polysilicon, silicide of
    refractory or platinum group metal):Subject matter under subclass 575
    wherein the device has electrical contacts which are made of a refractory
    material (e.g., polysilicon, or a silicide of a metal found in groups IVA,
    VA, VIA or VIIIA (other than iron (Fe) nickel (Ni) or cobalt (Co)) of the
    periodic table of the elements.


CLS 257/577
TXT Including additional component in same, non-isolated structure (e.g.,
    transistor with diode, transistor with resistor, etc.):Subject matter under
    subclass 565 wherein the device includes an additional component (e.g.,  a
    diode or a resistor) in the same non-electrically isolated structure with
    the bipolar transistor structure.


CLS 257/578
TXT With enlarged emitter area (e.g., power device):
    Subject matter under subclass 565 wherein the device has relatively
    enlarged emitter cross-sectional areas (e.g., power devices).


CLS 257/579
TXT With separate emitter areas connected in parallel:
    Subject matter under subclass 578 wherein there are a plurality of separate
    emitter areas which are electrically connected in parallel.


CLS 257/580
TXT With current ballasting means (e.g., emitter ballasting resistors or base
    current ballasting means):Subject matter under subclass 579 wherein current
    ballasting means is provided to divide emitter current more evenly between
    the plurality of separate emitter areas which are electrically
    interconnected in parallel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164,    for regenerative devices having multiemitter regions which may
    include emitter ballasting resistors.


CLS 257/581
TXT Thin film ballasting means (e.g., polysilicon resistor):
    Subject matter under subclass 580 wherein the ballasting means comprises
    thin film resistor means (e.g., a thin film polysilicon resistor).


CLS 257/582
TXT With current ballasting means (e.g., emitter ballasting resistors or base
    current ballasting resistors):Subject matter under subclass 578 wherein the
    enlarged emitter area has a current ballasting means (e.g., emitter
    ballasting resistors).


CLS 257/583
TXT With means to reduce transistor action in selected portions of transistor
    (e.g., heavy base region doping under central web of emitter to prevent
    secondary breakdown):Subject matter under subclass 578 wherein there are
    means in selected portions of the transistor to reduce the transistor
    action in those portions.


CLS 257/584
TXT With housing or contact (i.e., electrode) means:
    Subject matter under subclass 578 wherein the enlarged emitter area device
    is provided with a housing (means to protect the device from the
    environment) or with electrical contact means.


CLS 257/585
TXT With means to increase inverse gain:
    Subject matter under subclass 565 wherein there are means associated with
    the transistor to increase the gain in an inverse mode of operation.


CLS 257/586
TXT With non-planar semiconductor surface (e.g., groove, mesa, bevel,
    etc.):Subject matter under subclass 565 wherein the device has a non-planar
    upper or side surface.


CLS 257/587
TXT With specified electrode means:
    Subject matter under subclass 565 wherein the device has specific electrode
    means.


CLS 257/588
TXT Including polycrystalline semiconductor as connection:
    Subject matter under subclass 587 wherein the electrode means includes
    polysilicon semiconductor material to make an electrical connection.


CLS 257/589
TXT Avalanche transistor:
    Subject matter under subclass 565 wherein the device is a bipolar
    transistor designed to be operated with its base-collector junction biased
    into avalanche breakdown.


CLS 257/590
TXT With means to reduce minority carrier lifetime (e.g., region of deep level
    dopant or region of crystal damage):Subject matter under subclass 565
    wherein the device has means to reduce the minority carrier lifetime, i.e.,
    before recombination with a majority carrier, by, for example, a region of
    deep level dopant or a region of damage to the semiconductor crystal.


CLS 257/591
TXT With emitter region having specified doping concentration profile (e.g.,
    high-low concentration step):Subject matter under subclass 565 wherein the
    device has an emitter region with a specified  impurity dopant
    concentration profile (e.g., a specified concentration gradient across the
    emitter region).


CLS 257/592
TXT With base region having specified doping concentration profile or specified
    configuration (e.g., inactive base more heavily doped than active base or
    base region has constant doping concentration portion (e.g., epitaxial
    base)):Subject matter under subclass 565 wherein the device has a base
    region with a cross section that has a specified impurity dopant
    concentration across it or has a particular geometric configuration.


CLS 257/593
TXT With means to increase current gain or operating frequency:
    Subject matter under subclass 565 wherein the device includes means to
    increase the current gain or the operating frequency of the devices.


CLS 257/594
TXT WITH GROOVE TO DEFINE PLURAL DIODES:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the active solid-state
    device has more than one diode and has a groove therein to separate the
    diodes.


CLS 257/595
TXT VOLTAGE VARIABLE CAPACITANCE DEVICE:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the active solid-state
    device has a capacitance which varies with the voltage applied thereto.

    (1)     Note.  This type of voltage variable capacitor device is to be
    distinguished from voltage variable capacitors (also referred to as
    varactors) which are passive devices only and which may be found, for
    example, in Class 361, Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices,
    subclass 277, and Class 332, Modulators, subclass 136, modulators with
    varactors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312,    for insulated gate type voltage variable capacitor devices or
    voltage variable capacitor devices combined with an insulated gate
    transistor.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, subclass 379 for
    methods of forming a voltage variable capacitance device utilizing a
    semiconductor substrate.

    480,    for a voltage variable capacitor diode with a Schottky barrier.


CLS 257/596
TXT With specified dopant profile:
    Subject matter under subclass 595 wherein the device has a cross section
    which has a specified impurity dopant concentration across it.


CLS 257/597
TXT Retrograde dopant profile (e.g., dopant concentration decreases with
    distance from rectifying junction):Subject matter under subclass 596
    wherein the device contains a rectifying junction and wherein the variable
    dopant concentration decreases with distance from the rectifying junction.


CLS 257/598
TXT With plural junctions whose depletion regions merge to vary voltage
    dependence:Subject matter under subclass 595 wherein the device has more
    than one junction with depletion regions that merge to achieve a
    capacitance that varies with applied voltage.


CLS 257/599
TXT With means to increase active junction area (e.g., grooved or convoluted
    surface):Subject matter under subclass 595 wherein the device is provided
    with an increased active junction area (e.g., grooves or a convoluted
    surface to increase the active junction area).


CLS 257/600
TXT With physical configuration to vary voltage dependence (e.g., mesa):Subject
    matter under subclass 595 wherein the device has a physical configuration
    (e.g., a mesa) to vary the voltage dependency of the capacitance.


CLS 257/601
TXT Plural diodes in same non-isolated structure, or device having three or
    more terminals:Subject matter under subclass 595 wherein the device is
    comprised of more than one diode located in the same non-isolated
    structure, or is a device which has three or more electrical terminals.


CLS 257/602
TXT With specified housing or contact:
    Subject matter under subclass 595 wherein the device is provided with a
    specific housing (structure to protect the device from the environment) or
    electrical contact structure.


CLS 257/603
TXT AVALANCHE DIODE (E.G., SO-CALLED "ZENER" DIODE HAVING BREAKDOWN VOLTAGE
    GREATER THAN 6 VOLTS):Subject matter under the class definition configured
    to operate in a manner in which an external voltage is applied in the
    reverse-conducting direction of the device junction with sufficient
    magnitude to cause the potential barrier at the junction to breakdown due
    to electrons or holes gaining sufficient speed to dislodge valence
    electrons and thus create more hole-electron current  carriers by an
    avalanche process.

    (1)     Note.  This includes the so-called "Zener" diode using silicon as a
    semiconductor which has a breakdown voltage greater than 6 volts.  True
    Zener diodes conduct by reverse tunneling, and are classified in subclass
    106.  However, many avalanche breakdown diodes which are classifiable in
    subclass 603 are called "Zener" diodes even though the breakdown mechanism
    is avalanche multiplication, rather than tunneling.  In silicon, pn
    junctions which break down at less than 5 volts, do so by reverse
    tunneling, while those that break down at above 6 volts, do so by avalanche
    multiplication.

    (2)     Note.  See the illustration, below:



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    for a reverse bias tunneling diode (Zener diode).

    199,    for an avalanche diode having a heterojunction.

    481,    for a Schottky barrier avalanche diode.

    551,    for an avalanche diode used as a voltage reference element combined
    with pn junction isolation means in an integrated circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 185+ for stable state circuits which may include an
    avalanche diode; subclass 326 for limiting, clipping, or clamping utilizing
    an avalanche diode; subclass 502 for gating circuits utilizing an avalanche
    diode; and subclass 584 for miscellaneous circuits utilizing an avalanche
    diode.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, subclass 91 for
    methods of making a light responsive avalanche diode and subclass 380 for
    making an avalanche diode utilizing a semiconductor substrate.


CLS 257/604
TXT Microwave transit time device (e.g., IMPATT diode):
    Subject matter under subclass 603 wherein the device is structured to
    operate as a transit time device at microwave frequencies, the frequency at
    which it operates being determined by the transit time of charge carriers
    through the depletion region which extends on both sides of the reverse
    biased junction (e.g., an Impact ionization  avalanche transit time
    (IMPATT) diode).


CLS 257/605
TXT With means to limit area of breakdown (e.g., guard ring having higher
    breakdown voltage):Subject matter under subclass 603 in which the
    avalanche diode device is provided with means to limit the area of the
    device in which electrical breakdown occurs (e.g., a guard ring having a
    higher breakdown voltage than the area it surrounds).


CLS 257/606
TXT Subsurface breakdown:
    Subject matter under subclass 605 wherein the voltage  breakdown occurs
    below the surface of the device.


CLS 257/607
TXT WITH SPECIFIED DOPANT (e.g., plural dopants of same conductivity in same
    region):Subject matter under the class definition wherein the active
    solid-state device contains impurity dopant atoms which are specified and
    are used to change the conductive properties of the semiconductor material.

    (1)     Note.  If the dopant is in Si or Ge, it may be a shallow level
    dopant, other than an element from group III or group V of the periodic
    table (e.g., a dopant such as Li in Ge).


CLS 257/608
TXT Switching device based on filling and emptying of deep energy
    levels:Subject matter under subclass 607 wherein the device utilizes charge
    carrier filling and emptying of deep energy levels within the forbidden gap
    of semiconductor material of the device to produce a switching or ON/OFF
    action.


CLS 257/609
TXT For compound semiconductor (e.g., deep level dopant):
    Subject matter under subclass 607 wherein the specified dopant is in a
    compound semiconductor (e.g., GaAs).


CLS 257/610
TXT Deep level dopant:
    Subject matter under subclass 607 including a specified dopant which
    establishes traps in the forbidden band of a semiconductor into which
    carriers may drop or rise.


CLS 257/611
TXT With specified distribution (e.g., laterally localized, with specified
    concentration distribution or gradient):Subject matter under subclass 610
    wherein the deep level dopant has a particular, specified distribution
    (e.g., with a specified concentration distribution or gradient).


CLS 257/612
TXT Deep level dopant other than gold or platinum:
    Subject matter under subclass 610 wherein the deep level dopant is other
    than gold or platinum.


CLS 257/613
TXT INCLUDING SEMICONDUCTOR MATERIAL OTHER THAN SILICON OR GALLIUM ARSENIDE
    (GaAs) (E.G., PbxSn1-xTe):

    Subject matter under the subclass definition which includes semiconducting
    material other than silicon or gallium arsenide (GaAs).


CLS 257/614
TXT Group   II-VI    compound    (e.g.,    CdTe,
    HgxCd1-xTe):
    Subject matter under subclass 613 wherein the semiconducting material other
    than silicon or gallium arsenide is a compound of the periodic table group
    II-VI (e.g., CdTe).


CLS 257/615
TXT Group III-V compound (e.g., InP):
    Subject matter under subclass 613 wherein the semiconducting material other
    than silicon or gallium arsenide is a compound of the periodic table group
    III-V (e.g., InP).


CLS 257/616
TXT Containing germanium, Ge:
    Subject matter under subclass 613 wherein the semiconducting material other
    than silicon or gallium arsenide contains germanium (Ge).


CLS 257/617
TXT INCLUDING REGION CONTAINING CRYSTAL DAMAGE:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the  device includes a
    region which has crystal damage.

    (1)     Note.  The crystal damage may have been caused by charged or
    elementary particles bombardment of a particular region.


CLS 257/618
TXT PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION OF SEMICONDUCTOR (E.G., MESA, BEVEL, GROOVE,
    ETC.):Subject matter under the class definition wherein the device has a
    particular physical form, such as a mesa or bevel or groove.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171,    for regenerative devices with edge features (e.g., bevels).

    496,    for devices with physical configuration (e.g., bevels) to increase
    breakdown voltage threshold.

    586,    for bipolar transistor devices with non-planar semiconductor
    surfaces (e.g., bevels).


CLS 257/619
TXT With thin active central semiconductor portion surrounded by thicker
    inactive shoulder (e.g., for mechanical support):Subject matter under
    subclass 618 wherein the device has a thin active central configuration
    which is surrounded by a thicker inactive shoulder region (e.g., for
    mechanical support).


CLS 257/620
TXT With peripheral feature due to separation of smaller semiconductor chip
    from larger wafer (e.g., scribe region, or means to prevent edge effects
    such as leakage current at peripheral chip separation area):Subject matter
    under subclass 618 wherein the physical configuration is at the periphery
    of the semiconductor chip due to the separation of the chip from a larger
    wafer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    297,    for insulated gate capacitor or insulated gate transistor combined
    with capacitor devices with charge leakage (e.g., dark current leakage)
    protection means.

    349,    for SOI devices with means to prevent leakage current.

    547,    for integrated circuit devices with pn junction isolation and
    structural means to control leakage current.


CLS 257/621
TXT With electrical contact in hole in semiconductor (e.g., lead extends
    through semiconductor body):Subject matter under subclass 618 wherein the
    physical configuration is a hole in the semiconductor through which an
    electrical contact extends.


CLS 257/622
TXT Groove:
    Subject matter under subclass 618 in which there is a physical groove in a
    surface of the semiconductor device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117     and 118, for light activated regenerative type devices having a
    groove, e.g., that contains a light conductor.

    127,    for a bidirectional rectifier with control electrode and a groove
    or guard ring to separate the device into sections having different
    conductive polarity.

    170,    for a regenerative type device  with a groove or other surface
    feature to increase breakdown voltage.

    244,    for a charge transfer device having a groove.

    283,    for a JFET with Schottky gate closely aligned with source region
    with a groove or overhang for alignment.

    284,    for a JFET with Schottky gate in a groove.

    330     through 334, for a short channel IGFET with a gate electrode in a
    groove for controlling a vertical portion of the device channel.

    397,    for an IGFET in an integrated circuit with a thick insulator
    portion recessed in a vertical walled groove in the semiconductor surface
    to prevent parasitic conduction channels.

    466,    for a light responsive device with a physical configuration feature
    (e.g., a groove).

    534,    for a passive component located in a groove in an integrated
    circuit device.

    571,    for Darlington configuration bipolar transistor structure having a
    nonplanar structure (e.g., a groove).

    586,    for a bipolar transistor structure with a nonplanar surface (e.g.,
    a groove).

    589,    for a voltage variable capacitance device with means to increase
    active junction area (e.g., a groove).


CLS 257/623
TXT Mesa structure (e.g., including undercut or stepped mesa configuration or
    having constant slope taper):Subject matter under subclass 618 wherein the
    physical configuration is that of a mesa (e.g., there is at least one flat
    topped protrusion above the rest of the surface of the semiconductor body).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS,SUBCLASS:

    170,    for regenerative devices with mesa structure.

    452     and 466, for light responsive devices with mesa structure.

    571,    for bipolar transistors with mesa structure.

    600,    for voltage variable capacitance active solid-state devices with
    mesa structure.


CLS 257/624
TXT With low resistance ohmic connection means along exposed mesa edge (e.g.,
    contact or heavily doped region along exposed mesa to reduce "skin effect"
    losses in microwave diode):Subject matter under subclass 623 wherein there
    is a low resistance ohmic connection means along the exposed edge of the
    mesa.


CLS 257/625
TXT Semiconductor body including mesa is intimately bonded to thick electrical
    and/or thermal conductor member of larger lateral extent than semiconductor
    body (e.g., "plated heat sink" microwave diode):Subject matter under
    subclass 623 wherein the mesa semiconductor body is intimately bonded
    (e.g., by electroplating the semiconductor with a thick metal layer) to a
    thick electrical and/or thermal conductor member of larger lateral extent
    than the semiconductor body.


CLS 257/626
TXT Combined with passivating coating:
    Subject matter under subclass 623 wherein there is a surface protectant or
    passivating coating on the surface of the mesa physical configuration.


CLS 257/627
TXT With specified crystal plane or axis:
    Subject matter under subclass 618 wherein the physical configuration of the
    device is along a specified crystal plane or axis.


CLS 257/628
TXT Major crystal plane or axis other than (100), (110), or (111) (e.g., (731)
    axis, crystal plane several degrees from (100) toward (011), etc.):Subject
    matter under subclass 627 wherein the major crystal plane or axis is other
    than (100), (110), or (111).


CLS 257/629
TXT WITH MEANS TO CONTROL SURFACE EFFECTS:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the active junction
    device has means to modify (e.g., reduce, or eliminate) electrical field
    effects which take place at the device surface or to modify (e.g., reduce
    or eliminate) inhomogeneities in electrical properties of a semiconductor
    crystal region due to effects caused by the discontinuity of the crystal
    lattice at the surface.

    (1)     Note.  Such effects include formation of an inversion layer of
    minority carriers at the semiconductor surface, or depletion of majority
    carriers at the semiconductor surface, due to charge in an insulating
    coating on the surface or due to dangling bonds where the crystal structure
    of the semiconductor ends at the surface, leakage current via charge flow
    over a surface rather than through it, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    487,    for a semiconductor device provided with means to increase
    breakdown voltage of the device (which may involve surface effects).


CLS 257/630
TXT With inversion-preventing shield electrode:
    Subject matter under subclass 629 wherein the means to control surface
    effects includes an electrode, insulated from the semiconductor surface,
    which electrode is configured to prevent inversion of the conductivity type
    of the surface due to surface effects.


CLS 257/631
TXT In compound semiconductor material (e.g., GaAs):
    Subject matter under subclass 629 wherein the means to control surface
    effects are provided in a compound semiconductor material (e.g., GaAs).


CLS 257/632
TXT Insulating coating:
    Subject matter under subclass 629 wherein there is a surface coating of
    electrically insulating material on the semiconductor body to control
    surface effects.


CLS 257/633
TXT With thermal expansion compensation (e.g., thermal expansion of glass
    passivant matched to that of semiconductor):

    Subject matter under subclass 632 wherein the insulating coating includes
    means to compensate for mismatches in thermal expansion coefficient between
    different portions of the device, such as forming the insulating coating of
    a material which closely matches the thermal expansion coefficient of the
    underlying semiconductor.

    (1)     Note.  Typical semiconductor materials, such as silicon, have
    extremely low thermal expansion coefficients, and thus, low thermal
    expansion materials such as Corning Code 7740 PYREX# borosilicate glass
    closely match the expansion coefficient of the semiconductor, and help to
    prevent thermal expansion induced stress or cracking.


CLS 257/634
TXT Insulating coating of glass composition containing component to adjust
    melting or softening temperature (e.g., low melting point glass):Subject
    matter under subclass 632 wherein the insulating coating comprises a glass
    composition containing a component to adjust the melting or softening
    temperature.

    (1)     Note.  A commonly used additive to lower the melting point of
    silica (silicon dioxide) is phosphorous oxide, producing phosphosilicate
    glass.

    (2)     Note.  Such layers are typically provided so that the device can be
    heated to the softening point of the glass to cause it to flow and smooth
    out sharp edges on the semiconductor surface that might adversely affect
    subsequently deposited layers.  Hence, such a layer is often called a
    reflow glass layer.


CLS 257/635
TXT Multiple layers:
    Subject matter under subclass 632 wherein the insulating coating comprises
    multiple layers on the surface of the semiconductor body.


CLS 257/636
TXT At least one layer of semi-insulating material:
    Subject matter under subclass 635 wherein at least one of the multiple
    insulating layers is made of a semi-insulating material (i.e., has a
    resistivity between that of a semiconductor and that of an insulator).


CLS 257/637
TXT Three or more insulating layers:
    Subject matter under subclass 635 wherein there are three or more
    insulating coatings on the surface of the semiconductor body.


CLS 257/638
TXT With discontinuous or varying thickness layer (e.g., layer covers only
    selected portions of semiconductor):Subject matter under subclass 635
    wherein there are discontinuous or varying thickness layers in at least one
    of the multiple insulating layers over the semiconductor body.


CLS 257/639
TXT At least one layer of silicon oxynitride:
    Subject matter under subclass 635 wherein at least one of the multiple
    insulating layers is made of a mixture of the oxides and nitrides of
    silicon.


CLS 257/640
TXT At least one layer of silicon nitride:
    Subject matter under subclass 635 wherein there is at least one layer of
    silicon nitride in the multiple insulating layers on the semiconductor body.


CLS 257/641
TXT Combined with glass layer:
    Subject matter under subclass 640 wherein in addition to the layer of
    silicon nitride, there is at least one layer of glass in the multiple
    insulating layers on the semiconductor body.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of the definitions of this class, a material is
    considered to be a glass if it is amorphous (i.e., non-crystalline, and its
    major constituents are a mixture of oxides of more than one element).  An
    oxide of a single element, such as silicon dioxide, is not regarded as a
    glass layer, while a mixture of phosphorus oxide and silicon dioxide
    (phosphosilicate glass) would be regarded as a glass.


CLS 257/642
TXT At least one layer of organic material:
    Subject matter under subclass 635 wherein at least one insulating layer
    comprises an organic compound, i.e., one which has a molecule characterized
    by two carbon atoms bonded together, one atom of carbon being bonded to at
    least one atom of hydrogen or a halogen, or one atom or carbon bonded to at
    least one atom of nitrogen by a single or double bond, certain compounds
    such as HCN, CN-CN, HNCO, HNCS, cyanogen halides, cyanamide, fulminic acid
    and metal carbides, being exceptions to this rule.

    (1)     Note.  The definition of an organic compound here is the same as in
    Class 260, Chemistry of Carbon Compounds.


CLS 257/643
TXT Polyimide or polyamide:
    Subject matter under subclass 642 wherein the at least one organic
    insulating layer comprises polyamide (i.e., a polymeric compound) resulting
    from replacement of an atom of hydrogen in an organic amine by an organic
    univalent acid radical, or polyimide, i.e., a polymeric compound resulting
    from replacement of both atoms of hydrogen in an organic amine by organic
    univalent acid radicals or by an organic divalent acid radical.

    (1)     Note.  Polyamides are copolymers (polymers formed from at least two
    different starting organic materials) which have a

            linkage between the starting materials, where R is typically
    hydrogen and Q1 and Q2 are the organic residues of the starting monomers.
    Polyimides are similarly characterized by a


            linkage between the starting materials.


CLS 257/644
TXT At least one layer of glass:
    Subject matter under subclass 635, wherein there is at least one layer of
    glass in the multiple insulating layers on the semiconductor body.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of the definitions of this class, a material is
    considered to be a glass if it is amorphous (i.e., non-crystalline) and its
    major constituents are a mixture of oxides of more than one element.  An
    oxide of a single element, such as silicon dioxide, is not regarded as a
    glass layer, while a mixture of phosphorus oxide and silicon dioxide
    (phosphosilicate glass) would be regarded as a glass.


CLS 257/645
TXT Insulating layer containing specified electrical charge (e.g., net negative
    electrical charge):Subject matter under subclass 635 wherein the multiple
    insulating layers, or at least one of the insulating layers, has a
    specified electrical charge.


CLS 257/646
TXT Coating of semi-insulating material (e.g., amorphous silicon or
    silicon-rich silicon oxide):Subject matter under subclass 632 wherein the
    insulating layer is composed of a semi-insulating material.


CLS 257/647
TXT Insulating layer recessed into semiconductor surface (e.g., LOCOS
    oxide):Subject matter under subclass 632 wherein the insulating layer is
    recessed into the semiconductor surface.

    (1)     Note.  This type of recessed insulator may typically be LOCOS
    (Local Oxidation of Silicon) oxide, which is formed by oxidizing the
    silicon surface in areas not covered by an oxidation resistant mask, so
    that oxide is formed which is recessed into the semiconductor by
    approximately 1/2 of its thickness due to consumption of silicon to form
    the silicon oxide.  LOCOS oxide may also be recessed fully to be
    substantially flush with the surface (except in areas at the edge of the
    oxide, wherein ridges known as "birdheads" (due to their shape) occur,
    which taper off to small thickness oxide portions in areas protected by the
    oxidation resistant mask (these tapering portions are called the "bird's
    beak").


CLS 257/648
TXT Combined with channel stop region in semiconductor:
    Subject matter under subclass 647 wherein the recessed insulating layer is
    combined with a channel stop region, i.e., a region of heavy doping
    concentration in the underlying semiconductor surface to prevent inversion
    of the surface by formation of a layer of induced minority  carriers.


CLS 257/649
TXT Insulating layer of silicon nitride or silicon oxynitride:
    Subject matter under subclass 632 wherein the insulating layer is composed
    of silicon nitride or of a mixture of silicon oxide and silicon nitride.


CLS 257/650
TXT Insulating layer of glass:
    Subject matter under subclass 632 wherein the insulating layer is composed
    of glass.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of the definitions of this class, a material is
    considered to be a glass if it is amorphous (i.e., non-crystalline) and its
    major constituents are a mixture of oxides of more than one element.  An
    oxide of a single element, such as silicon dioxide, is not regarded as a
    glass layer, while a mixture of phosphorus oxide and silicon dioxide
    (phosphosilicate glass) would be regarded as a glass.


CLS 257/651
TXT Details of insulating layer electrical charge (e.g., negative insulator
    layer charge):Subject matter under subclass 632 wherein the electrical
    charge characteristics of an insulating layer are specified.


CLS 257/652
TXT Channel stop layer:
    Subject matter under subclass 629 wherein the means to control surface
    effects comprises a channel stop region (i.e., a region of heavy doping
    concentration in the underlying semiconductor surface to prevent inversion
    of the surface by formation of a layer of induced minority  carriers).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305,    for insulated gate capacitor in trench or insulated gate transistor
    combined with capacitor in trench with a channel stop.

    349,    for SOI devices with buried channel stop layer.

    354,    for SOI devices with channel stop regions in single crystal island
    edges.

    376     and 398 through 400, for IGFET integrated circuit devices with
    channel stop layers used to prevent parasitic conduction channels.

    519,    for integrated circuit devices with PN junction and dielectric in
    groove isolation with heavily doped channel stop region adjacent to groove.


CLS 257/653
TXT WITH SPECIFIED SHAPE OF PN JUNCTION:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the device has at least
    one junction between semiconductor regions of opposite conductivity type (P
    and N), and wherein the interface between at least one P region and its
    adjoining N region has a specified shape or geometrical configuration.


CLS 257/654
TXT Interdigitated pn junction or more heavily doped side of junction is
    concave:Subject matter under subclass 653 wherein the device has at least
    one pn junction which is interdigitated (i.e., in which plural layers or
    fingers of n type material alternate with plural layers  or  fingers  of
    p-type  material,  with  then-type layers or fingers being parts of a
    single unitary n region and the p-type layers or fingers being parts of a
    single unitary p-region).

    (1)     Note.  Interdigitated configurations are frequently used to
    increase the amount of PN junction area in a given volume of semiconductor
    material.


CLS 257/655
TXT WITH SPECIFIED IMPURITY CONCENTRATION GRADIENT:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the active solid-state
    device includes at least one region of semiconductor material with a
    specified profile or gradient of impurity doping concentration.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of impurity concentration gradients include reverse
    gradient profiles (i.e., wherein the doping concentration is lighter toward
    the semiconductor surface or away from a pn junction) or a radial
    concentration profile).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    for light emitting devices with specified dopant concentration or
    concentration profile.

    219     through 221, for charge transfer field effect majority signal
    carrier devices with impurity concentration variations (e.g., in the device
    channel).

    335     through 343, for short channel IGFETs with graded dopant
    concentration in the active channel region that decreases with distance
    from the source region.

    548,    for integrated circuits with pn junction isolation having at least
    three regions of alternating conductivity types with dopant concentration
    gradients decreasing from the surface of the semiconductor.

    596     and 597, for a voltage variable capacitance device with specified
    dopant profile (e.g., retrograde dopant profile).

    929,    for a pn junction isolated integrated circuit with isolation walls
    having minimum dopant concentration at an intermediate depth in an
    epitaxial layer.


CLS 257/656
TXT With high resistivity (e.g., "intrinsic") layer between P and N layers
    (e.g., PIN diode):Subject matter under subclass 655 wherein the device has
    a P doped region and an N doped region, separated by a region with very low
    impurity doping, so that the region is of high resistivity or "intrinsic"
    (undoped) semiconductor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    458,    for light responsive PIN devices


CLS 257/657
TXT Stepped profile:
    Subject matter under subclass 655 wherein the device includes at least one
    region of the same conductivity type (P or N) wherein the doping
    concentration varies abruptly (e.g., a P+ to P- junction).


CLS 257/658
TXT PLATE TYPE RECTIFIER ARRAY:
    Subject matter under the class definition in which the device comprises
    plates of material each of which is coated with a layer of semiconductor
    material (e.g., copper oxide or selenium) which forms a rectifying barrier
    junction, the device being made up of several flat conductive plates and
    semiconductor material layers to form a rectifier array.

    (1)     Note.  Typical rectifiers of this type include (a) copper oxide
    rectifiers in which the rectifying barrier is a junction between metallic
    copper plate and cuprous oxide layer coated on one side of the plate and
    (b) selenium rectifier in which a thin layer of selenium is formed on one
    side of an aluminum plate with a highly conductive metal coated over the
    selenium.  If the semiconductor material is specifically recited as
    selenium or tellurium, or an oxide of a metal such as copper oxide, the
    patent will be classified in the appropriate one of subclasses 42 or 43.

    (2)     Note.  This type of device has generally been replaced with more
    modern devices, including silicon rectifiers.


CLS 257/659
TXT WITH SHIELDING (E.G., ELECTRICAL OR MAGNETIC SHIELDING, OR FROM
    ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION OR CHARGED PARTICLES):

    Subject matter under the class definition in which means is provided for
    protecting an active solid-state device by providing a barrier to prevent
    electrical or magnetic radiation or fields or charged particles from
    reaching the device, or to limit the amount of such radiation or particles
    reaching the device.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter is to be distinguished from that found
    in the cross-reference art collection entitled "radiation hardening", which
    encompasses subject matter which does not attempt to shield the device from
    electric or magnetic or electromagnetic radiation or charged particles, but
    is used to prevent or limit the damage caused to a device by such radiation
    or particles which reach the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    297,    for shielding against alpha particles in dynamic random access
    memory (DRAM) structures.

    422,    for magnetic field shielding in magnetic field sensor active
    solid-state devices.

    435,    for light shields in light responsive active solid-state devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 32+ for
    miscellaneous anti-inductive structures, particularly indented subclasses
    35+ for miscellaneous electrical shields and screen structures not
    elsewhere classifiable.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 91 for
    anti-induction or coupling to other systems with magnetic or electrostatic
    field control (e.g., shielding).

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 85 for
    gaseous tube systems with electromagnetic wave radiation prevention or
    shielding means.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 68 for amplifiers with shielding means.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 67 for oscillators combined with
    electromagnetic or electrostatic shield means.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 12 for transmission
    line inductive or radiation interference systems.

    334,    Tuners, subclass 85 for radio tuners with shielding means.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 84 for induction devices with electric
    or magnetic shield means.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 64 for electrical resistors with
    electrical shield means.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 841+ for antenna
    structure with electric shield means.

    348,    Television, subclasses 825+ a for cathode-ray tube support and 836+
    for cabinet or chasis of a television receiver in general.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 816+ for
    radio interference type shielding means.


CLS 257/660
TXT With means to shield device contained in housing or package from charged
    particles (e.g., alpha particles) or highly ionizing radiation (i.e., hard
    X-rays or shorter wavelength):

    Subject matter under subclass 659 wherein the device is provided with means
    to shield it from charged particles or highly ionizing radiation contained
    in a housing or package separate and apart from the shielding means.


CLS 257/661
TXT SUPERCONDUCTIVE CONTACT OR LEAD:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein an active solid-state
    device contains, or is connected to, an electrical contact or lead
    (pronounced "leed") which is made of a material whose electrical
    resistivity drops to zero at a particular temperature called a critical
    transition temperature (Tc).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 15.4+ and 125.1
    for superconducting conductors.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, particularly subclass
    2 for methods of forming an semiconductor device having a superconductive
    component thereon.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process, subclass
    1 for high temperature superconductor materials and subclasses 884+ for
    superconductive electrical conductors.


CLS 257/662
TXT Transmission line or shielded:
    Subject matter under 661 in which the superconductive electrical lead has
    controlled electrical characteristics designed to convey high frequency
    (e.g., greater than 3 megahertz) signals or narrow pulse signals; or is
    surrounded by a separate electrical conductor or envelope, called a shield,
    designed to minimize the effects of nearby electrical circuits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 32+ for
    miscellaneous anti-inductive structures, particularly indented subclasses
    35+ for miscellaneous electrical shields and screen structures not
    elsewhere classifiable.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 91 for
    anti-induction or coupling to other systems with magnetic or electrostatic
    field control (e.g., shielding).

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 85 for
    gaseous tube systems with electromagnetic wave radiation prevention or
    shielding means.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 68 for amplifiers with shielding means.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 67 for oscillators combined with
    electromagnetic or electrostatic shield means.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 12 for transmission
    line inductive or radiation interference systems.

    334,    Tuners, subclass 85 for radio tuners with shielding means.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 84 for induction devices with electric
    or magnetic shield means.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 64 for electrical resistors with
    electrical shield means.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 841+ for antenna
    structure with electric shield means.

    348,    Television, subclasses 820 for a cathode-ray tube video display
    with electric or magnetic shielding means.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 816+ for
    radio interference type shielding means.


CLS 257/663
TXT On integrated circuit:
    Subject matter under 661 in which the superconductive contact or lead is
    associated with an electrical network made up of more than one electronic
    device, including at least one active solid-state electronic device, in a
    unitary structure.


CLS 257/664
TXT TRANSMISSION LINE LEAD (E.G., STRIPLINE, COAX, ETC.):
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein an active solid-state
    device is provided with an electrical connection or lead with controlled
    electrical characteristics used to transmit high-frequency, e.g., greater
    than 3 megahertz, or narrow pulse signals to or from the device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, appropriate subclasses for
    transmission lines, per se.


CLS 257/665
TXT CONTACTS OR LEADS INCLUDING FUSIBLE LINK MEANS OR NOISE SUPPRESSION
    MEANS:Subject matter under the class definition wherein an active
    solid-state device is provided with electrical contacts or leads
    (pronounced "leeds") which contain portions which have a composition or are
    made so that they will melt at a relatively low temperature to form an open
    circuit and thereby protect the device in case excessive current, e.g., a
    current spike from lightning, or voltage is provided to the contact or
    lead, or contains means designed to suppress unwanted electrical
    disturbances in the electrical contacts or leads.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 96 for a fusible
    link storage member.


CLS 257/666
TXT LEAD FRAME:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the active solid-state
    device is provided with a conductive metal network which may have
    relatively large area portions, commonly called pads or flags, for direct
    contact with semiconductor chips or dice, and lead elements for
    facilitating electrical interconnection of the chips or dies via
    intermediate (e.g., jumper) connections to other electronic devices or
    components.

    (1)     Note.  Lead frames also have other portions, usually called "ties",
    which interconnect the pad or flag portions with the lead portions prior to
    assembly of the lead frame in an electronic package or housing, but which
    are removed during package assembly.

    (1)     Note.  See the illustration, below:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 739+, especially subclass 741, for means
    to fasten electrical component to wiring means, base, or substrate,
    including a multi-lead component; and subclass 834 for beam lead frames or
    beam lead devices.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators,  subclass  52.4 for flat
    pack electronic device  mounting   means.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices,  subclass  813 for
    lead frames, per se, not  associated with  a solid-state active electronic
    device of the type classified in Class 257.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 571+ for stock
    materials of metal which have marginal indexing features or weakened
    portion for severing.  Lead frames are commonly made in long strips of
    repeating patterns with such indexing and/or severing features.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, particularly
    subclasses 111+ and 123+ for methods of packaging utilizing a lead frame;
    see the search notes therein.


CLS 257/667
TXT With dam or vent for encapsulant:
    Subject matter under subclass 666 with a portion or portions to block
    encapsulant flow, typically from flowing out of a mold during an
    encapsulation process, or vent means (e.g., grooves in lead frame leads) to
    permit egress to the atmosphere for air or other gases which are inside a
    mold during encapsulation.


CLS 257/668
TXT On insulating carrier other than a printed circuit board:
    Subject matter under subclass 666 wherein the lead frame is mounted on an
    insulating carrier other than a printed circuit board.

    (1)     Note.  Printed circuit boards alone, or with one or more
    solid-state electronic devices mounted thereon are not classified herein,
    but are found in Class 174, Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, or
    Class 361, Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices.  See the class
    definitions for Classes 174 and 361 for the line of demarkation between
    these two classes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 52.1+ and 260
    for printed circuit boards in combination with one or more electronic
    solid-state devices.


CLS 257/669
TXT With stress relief:
    Subject matter under subclass 666 wherein means are provided to alleviate
    stresses and strains (e.g., mechanical or thermal stresses) to which a lead
    frame is subjected.


CLS 257/670
TXT With separate tie bar element or plural tie bars:
    Subject matter under subclass 666 in which a frame element used to tie or
    connect a semiconductor chip pad/flag and/or lead fingers frame members is
    a separate element and not part of the lead frame itself or wherein plural
    tie bar elements are provided as part of a lead frame.


CLS 257/671
TXT Of insulating material:
    Subject matter under subclass 670 wherein the  separate tie bar element or
    the plural tie bars are made of electrically insulating material.


CLS 257/672
TXT Small lead frame (e.g., "spider" frame) for connecting a large lead frame
    to a semiconductor chip:Subject matter under subclass 666 wherein the means
    used to interconnect a chip or die to a large lead frame is a small lead
    frame with contact elements radiating from a central location for
    interconnection with a chip mounted on a large lead frame chip pad at that
    location to peripheral locations for interconnection with large lead frame
    leads.


CLS 257/673
TXT With bumps on ends of lead fingers to connect to semiconductor:Subject
    matter under subclass 666 wherein bump contacts are located at or near the
    ends of lead fingers to provide contact with a semiconductor chip.


CLS 257/674
TXT With means for controlling lead tension:
    Subject matter under subclass 666 wherein means are provided for
    controlling the tension under which an electrical lead is placed including,
    for example, a bend in the lead, an area of reduced lead thickness, etc.


CLS 257/675
TXT With heat sink means:
    Subject matter under subclass 666 wherein a heat sink means is provided,
    either as part of the lead frame or in addition to the lead frame for
    cooling the active solid-state device.


CLS 257/676
TXT With structure for mounting semiconductor chip to lead frame (e.g.,
    configuration of die bonding flag, absence of a die bonding flag, recess
    for LED):Subject matter under subclass 666 wherein the lead frame is
    provided with specified structure means to mount a semiconductor chip
    thereto, or is specified to not have a pad for mounting the chip.

    (1)     Note.  This structure may, for example, have a particular
    configuration such as a flag shape.


CLS 257/677
TXT Of specified material other than copper (e.g., Kovar (T.M.)):Subject matter
    under subclass 666 wherein the electrically conductive lead frame is made
    up of a specific material other copper, which is a common material for lead
    frames.


CLS 257/678
TXT HOUSING OR PACKAGE:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein preformed physical means
    to cover or protect a solid-state electronic device is provided therefor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81      and 82, for a light emitting device in combination with or also
    constituting a light responsive device and with specific housing structure.

    99,     for light emitting device with  specific housing structure.

    177     through 182, for a regenerative type switching device with housing
    or external electrode.

    433     and 434, for light responsive device with housing or encapsulation
    means.

    573,    for Darlington configuration bipolar transistor structure with
    housing or contact structure.

    584,    for enlarged emitter device bipolar transistor means having housing
    or contact.

    602,    for a voltage variable capacitance device with specified housing or
    contact.

    660,    for means to shield a device contained in a housing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems or Devices, subclasses 679+ for
    housings and mounting assemblies for electronic devices and components.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, particularly
    subclasses 106+ for methods of packaging; see the search notes therein.


CLS 257/679
TXT Smart (e.g., credit) card package:
    Subject matter under 678 wherein the housing or package is in a form which
    permits it to be used as a credit card.

    (1)     Note.  A smart card is one which contains a microprocessor chip.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclass 487 and indented subclasses for coded records
    including electronic credit cards, per se.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 736+ and
    752+ for modules for printed circuits or housing or chassis for printed
    circuit boards.


CLS 257/680
TXT With window means:
    Subject matter under 678 wherein the housing or package has a physical
    opening or area otherwise transparent to ultraviolet, visible, or infrared
    light.


CLS 257/681
TXT For erasing EPROM:
    Subject matter under subclass 680 wherein the window means is provided for
    transmitting light to erase an electrically programmable read-only memory
    (EPROM).


CLS 257/682
TXT With desiccant, getter, or gas filling:
    Subject matter under subclass 678 including a desiccant (i.e., a material
    for absorbing moisture); a getter (i.e., a material which absorbs
    undesirable semiconductor, housing or package contaminants); or wherein a
    gaseous material fills the housing or package.


CLS 257/683
TXT With means to prevent explosion of package:
    Subject matter under subclass 678 including means to prevent explosion of a
    housing or package.


CLS 257/684
TXT With semiconductor element forming part (e.g., base, of housing):Subject
    matter under subclass 678 wherein  part of the housing is formed by a
    semiconductor element.

    (1)     Note.  The semiconductor element may have an inactive portion
    connected to the rest of the housing, and another portion forming an active
    device, for example.  Frequently the semiconductor element forms the base
    of the housing, through which leads are inserted.


CLS 257/685
TXT Multiple housings:
    Subject matter under subclass 678 wherein more than one housing is provided
    for a solid-state active electronic device, or wherein plural housings,
    each containing one or more solid-state active devices, are constructed as
    a unitary structure.

    (1)     Note.  One housing may be located within another housing.


CLS 257/686
TXT Stacked arrangement:
    Subject matter under subclass 685 wherein a plurality of housings are
    placed one upon another, vertically.


CLS 257/687
TXT Housing or package filled with solid  or liquid electrically insulating
    material:Subject matter under subclass 678 wherein the housing or package
    is filled with a solid or liquid electrically insulating material.

    (1)     Note.  Encapsulated devices are excluded from this subclass and are
    not considered to be housings or packages as defined in subclass 678 which
    requires them to be preformed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 729, 730+,
    and 744+ for various modules for printed circuit boards.


CLS 257/688
TXT With large area flexible electrodes in press contact with opposite sides of
    active semiconductor chip and surrounded by an insulating element, e.g.,
    ring:Subject matter under subclass 678 wherein the package or housing has
    two large area electrodes which are in press contact with opposite sides of
    a semiconductor chip and wherein the electrode edges are surrounded by an
    electrically insulating medium (e.g., a ring).

    (1)     Note.   Search this class, subclass 181 for such housings which
    specifically contain a regenerative active solid-state device (e.g., an SCR
    or thyristor).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181+,   for similar electrodes with regenerative type devices.

    785,    for electrodes combined with an active semiconductor electronic
    device by pressure alone.


CLS 257/689
TXT Rigid electrode portion:
    Subject matter under subclass 688 wherein the large area electrodes are
    rigid in whole or in part.

    (1)     Note.  These type devices typically employ relatively massive
    electrodes to operate at large current densities.


CLS 257/690
TXT With contact or lead:
    Subject matter under subclass 678 wherein the device is provided with a
    contact or lead, in addition to or as part of the package or housing.


CLS 257/691
TXT Having power distribution means (e.g., bus structure):
    Subject matter under subclass 690 wherein the contact or lead includes
    means for distributing electrical power to one or more active solid-state
    devices within the package or housing.


CLS 257/692
TXT With particular lead geometry:
    Subject matter under subclass 690 wherein the contact or lead provided as
    part of or in addition to the package or housing has a specified
    geometrical configuration.


CLS 257/693
TXT External connection to housing:
    Subject matter under subclass 692 wherein the contact or lead having a
    specified geometry comprises an electrical connection for connecting the
    package or housing and its contained active solid-state device to other
    electrical devices or circuits.


CLS 257/694
TXT Axial leads:
    Subject matter under subclass 693 wherein the leads or contacts which form
    an external connection to the housing or package extend out opposite ends
    along an axis of symmetry of a housing or package.


CLS 257/695
TXT Fanned/radial leads:
    Subject matter under subclass 693 wherein the leads or contacts which form
    an external connection to the housing or package extend radially outward
    from the package.

    (1)     Note.  See illustration, below.



CLS 257/696
TXT Bent (e.g., J-shaped) lead:
    Subject matter under subclass 693 wherein the leads or contacts which form
    an external connection to the housing or package include one or more leads
    which have a curved end portion (e.g., for mounting on the top surface of a
    printed circuit board).

    (1)     Note.  See illustration, below.



CLS 257/697
TXT Pin grid type:
    Subject matter under subclass 693 wherein the leads or contacts which form
    an external connection to the housing or package are in the form of a grid
    or matrix of elongated pins.

    (1)     Note.  See illustration, below.


CLS 257/698
TXT With specific electrical feedthrough structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 690 wherein a specific structure is provided
    for feeding electrical contacts or leads into or out of the housing or
    package.


CLS 257/699
TXT Housing entirely of metal except for feedthrough structure:
    Subject matter under 698 wherein the housing or package is made entirely of
    metal except for the portion wherein the electrical contacts or leads are
    fed through.

    (1)     Note.  Typically, an insulator is placed in the feedthrough portion
    of a metal housing to prevent electrical short circuiting of the leads to
    the housing.


CLS 257/700
TXT Multiple contact layers separated from each other by insulator means and
    forming part of a package or housing (e.g., plural ceramic layer
    package):Subject matter under subclass 690 wherein the housing or package
    combined with a contact or lead structure is in the form of a multiple
    layered insulating composite with plural electrical connection layers
    located between layers of insulator material.


CLS 257/701
TXT Insulating material:
    Subject matter under subclass 678 wherein the housing or package is made of
    an electrically insulating material.


CLS 257/702
TXT Of insulating material other than ceramic:
    Subject matter under 701 wherein the housing is made of electrically
    insulating material other than ceramic (e.g., the housing is made of glass
    or of a single crystal insulator material).

    (1)     Note.  A ceramic is a polycrystalline, non-metallic, non-organic
    material, such as fired polycrystalline aluminum oxide, typically made by
    firing a compressed and shaped powder at high temperatures to fuse the
    powder together.


CLS 257/703
TXT Composite ceramic, or single ceramic with metal:
    Subject matter under subclass 701 wherein the housing is a composite made
    up of at least two ceramic materials (e.g., alumina and beryllia) or of a
    single ceramic material with a metal.


CLS 257/704
TXT Cap or lid:
    Subject matter under subclass 701 wherein the housing or package is
    provided with a cap or lid.


CLS 257/705
TXT Of high thermal conductivity ceramic (e.g., BeO):
    Subject matter under subclass 701 wherein the housing is made of ceramic
    which has high thermal conductivity to promote heat dissipation from the
    housing.


CLS 257/706
TXT With heat sink:
    Subject matter under subclass 701 wherein the insulating housing has a heat
    sink to dissipate heat.

    (1)     Note.  The heat sink may be located in a cavity in a base member
    made of ceramic material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, appropriate subclasses
    directed to cooling means.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 688
    through 723 for cooling means for electronic devices or components with
    housings or mounting assemblies.


CLS 257/707
TXT Directly attached to semiconductor device:
    Subject matter under subclass 706 wherein the heat sink is attached
    directly to the semiconductor device.


CLS 257/708
TXT Entirely of metal except for feedthrough:
    Subject matter under subclass 678 wherein the housing or package is made
    entirely of metal except for the portion wherein the electrical contacts or
    leads are fed through.

    (1)     Note.  Typically, an insulator is placed in the feedthrough portion
    of a metal housing to prevent electrical short circuiting of the leads to
    the housing.


CLS 257/709
TXT With specified insulator to isolate device from housing:
    Subject matter under subclass 708 wherein a specific insulator means is
    provided to electrically isolate the active solid-state device contained in
    the metal package or housing from the metal package or housing to prevent
    electrical short circuits due to the housing or package.


CLS 257/710
TXT With specified means (e.g., lip) to seal base to cap:
    Subject matter under subclass 708 wherein specific means are provided to
    seal the cap to the base such as, for example, a bead or lip or boss around
    the periphery of the base.


CLS 257/711
TXT With raised portion of base for mounting semiconductor chip:Subject matter
    under subclass 708 wherein a portion of the base is raised above the rest
    of the base and the raised portion provides a base on which to mount a
    semiconductor chip with an active solid-state device therein or thereon.


CLS 257/712
TXT With provision for cooling the housing or its contents:
    Subject matter under subclass 678 wherein means for cooling the housing or
    its contents are provided in addition to natural cooling processes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, appropriate subclasses
    directed to cooling means.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 688
    through 723, for cooling means for electronic devices or components with
    housings or mounting assemblies.


CLS 257/713
TXT For integrated circuit:
    Subject matter under subclass 712 wherein the solid-state electronic device
    for which cooling means is provided is an integrated circuit, which is a
    semiconductor substrate which contains a plurality of active solid-state
    electronic devices.


CLS 257/714
TXT Liquid coolant:
    Subject matter under subclass 712 wherein the means provided for cooling
    the housing or its contents is a liquid.


CLS 257/715
TXT Boiling (evaporative) liquid:
    Subject matter under subclass 714 wherein the cooling means involves
    boiling a liquid to provide evaporative cooling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, appropriate subclasses
    directed to liquid cooling means.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 699+ for
    liquid cooling means for electronic devices or components with housings or
    mounting assemblies.


CLS 257/716
TXT Cryogenic liquid coolant:
    Subject matter under subclass 714 wherein the cooling means uses a liquid
    to maintain device temperatures at or below 100 degrees Kelvin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, appropriate subclasses
    directed to liquid cooling means.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 699+ for
    liquid cooling means for electronic devices or components with housings or
    mounting assemblies.


CLS 257/717
TXT Isolation of cooling means (e.g., heat sink) by an electrically insulating
    element (e.g., spacer):Subject matter under subclass 712 wherein an
    insulating element is used to physically separate a cooling means from an
    active solid-state electronic device or a housing therefor.


CLS 257/718
TXT Heat dissipating element held in place by clamping or spring means:Subject
    matter under subclass 712 wherein an element for dissipating heat is held
    in place by means to clamp it to the device or vice versa, or by a spring
    to position the device and heat dissipating element in thermal contact with
    each other.


CLS 257/719
TXT Pressed against semiconductor element:
    Subject matter under subclass 718 wherein the heat dissipating element and
    the active device are in press contact with each other.


CLS 257/720
TXT Heat dissipating element has high thermal conductivity insert (e.g., copper
    slug in aluminum heat sink):Subject matter under subclass 712 wherein the
    heat dissipating element has a relatively high thermal conductivity
    vis-a-vis a larger (main) heat sink into which it is inserted (e.g., a
    copper slug in an aluminum heat sink).


CLS 257/721
TXT With gas coolant:
    Subject matter under subclass 712 wherein the cooling means uses a gas to
    provide the cooling (e.g., by convection).


CLS 257/722
TXT With fins:
    Subject matter under subclass 721 wherein the cooling means has fins, i.e.,
    long, thin, blade like structures used to dissipate heat to the gas coolant.


CLS 257/723
TXT For plural devices:
    Subject matter under subclass 678 wherein a package or housing is provided
    for more than one electronic device, at least one of the electronic devices
    being an active solid-state device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 50+ for
    housings and printed circuits.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 729 and
    730+ for plural housing modules.


CLS 257/724
TXT With discrete components:
    Subject matter under subclass 723 wherein at least some of the electronic
    components are in the form of an individual device per semiconductor chip,
    as contrasted to a single integrated circuit containing plural
    semiconductor devices.  The discrete components may be active solid-state
    devices or passive components such as resistors, capacitors, or inductors.


CLS 257/725
TXT With electrical isolation means:
    Subject matter under subclass 723 wherein means are provided to
    electrically isolate the plural devices from each other.


CLS 257/726
TXT Devices held in place by clamping:
    Subject matter under subclass 725 wherein the plural devices which are
    electrically isolated are held in place by clamp means, i.e., by means
    which press devices into place.


CLS 257/727
TXT Device held in place by clamping:
    Subject matter under subclass 678 wherein at least one of the plural
    devices is held in place by clamp means (i.e., by means which press a
    device into place).


CLS 257/728
TXT For high frequency (e.g., microwave) device:
    Subject matter under subclass 678 wherein the active solid-state device
    provided with a housing or package is a high frequency solid-state
    electronic device operating at high frequencies, such as microwave
    frequencies or above.


CLS 257/729
TXT Portion of housing of specific materials:
    Subject matter under subclass 678 wherein at least a portion of the housing
    or package is made of specific materials.


CLS 257/730
TXT Outside periphery of package having specified shape or
    configuration:Subject matter under subclass 678 wherein the outside
    periphery of a package or housing has a particular shape or configuration.


CLS 257/731
TXT With housing mount:
    Subject matter under subclass 678 wherein the housing or package has means
    (e.g., a flange or threaded stud) for attaching the housing to a support.

    (1)     Note.  Search this class, subclass 180 for housings or packages of
    this type which specifically contain a regenerative type switching device
    such as an SCR or thyristor.


CLS 257/732
TXT Flanged mount:
    Subject matter under subclass 731 wherein the housing mount is a flange
    with openings therein (e.g., threaded holes) to permit the housing to be
    attached (e.g., by fasteners) to a support.


CLS 257/733
TXT Stud mount:
    Subject matter under subclass 731 wherein the housing mount is a threaded
    element shaped like a bolt extending from the housing for fastening into a
    threaded hole in a support.


CLS 257/734
TXT COMBINED WITH ELECTRICAL CONTACT OR LEAD:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the active solid-state
    device is provided with one or more electrical contacts or leads.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for point contact rectifiers.

    44      through 47, for devices with a metal contact alloyed to elemental
    semiconductor type PN junction in a non-regenerative structure.

    54,     for Schottky barrier to amorphous semiconductor material device.

    73,     for Schottky barrier to polycrystalline semiconductor material
    device.

    81      and 82, for light emitter combined with or also constituting a
    light responsive device and having a specific housing or contact structure.

    91,     for plural light emitting devices with shaped contacts or opaque
    masking.

    99,     for light emitting devices with specified housing or contact
    structure.

    145,    for a regenerative type device combined with a FET with extended
    latching current level and a low impedance channel contact extending below
    the device surface.

    155     and 156, for a regenerative type device with switching speed
    enhancing means (e.g., a Schottky contact).

    177     through 182, for a regenerative type device with housing or
    external electrode.

    217,    for a majority signal carrier charge transfer device with a
    conductive means in direct contact with channel (e.g., a non-insulated
    gate).

    260,    for JFET having the same channel controlled by, for example,
    Schottky barrier and pn junction gates.

    276,    for a JFET in a microwave integrated circuit with a contact or heat
    sink extending through a hole in the semiconductor.

    280     through 284, for JFETs with a Schottky gate electrode.

    316     through 322, for a variable threshold insulated electrical field
    effect device with additional contacted control electrode.

    343,    for graded channel dopant IGFET device with plural sections
    connected in parallel and having all contacts on the same surface.

    382     through 385, for an IGFET in an integrated circuit with a
    refractory material contact to source or drain region.

    449     through 457, for Schottky contacts in light responsive devices.

    471     through 486, for Schottky contact devices.

    502,    for high power integrated circuit devices with electrical isolation
    and a backside collector contact.

    503,    for an integrated circuit device with electrically isolated
    components having a contact or metallization configuration to reduce
    parasitic coupling.

    522,    for beam-lead supported semiconductor islands in integrated
    circuits.

    573,    for Darlington configuration non-isolated bipolar transistors with
    resistance means connected between transistor base regions and with housing
    or contact structure or configuration.

    576,    for complementary bipolar transistors sharing a common active
    region (e.g., IIL, I2L) including lateral bipolar transistor structure and
    having contacts of a refractory material.

    584,    for bipolar transistor device with enlarged emitter area and with
    housing or contact means.

    602,    for a voltage variable capacitance device with specified housing or
    contact.

    621,    for a semiconductor device with electrical contact in a hole in the
    semiconductor (e.g., lead extends through semiconductor body).

    624,    for mesa structure device having a low resistance ohmic connection
    along a mesa edge.

    661     through 663, for superconductive contacts or leads.

    664,    for transmission line leads.

    665,    for contacts or leads including fusible link or noise suppression
    means.

    666     through 677, for lead frames.

    688     and 689, for housings with large area flexible electrodes in press
    contact with opposite sides of active semiconductor chip and surrounded by
    an insulating element.

    690     through 700, for housings with specified contact or lead.

    905,    for plural DRAM cells sharing a common contact or common trench.

    926,    for a device with an elongated lead extending axially through
    another elongated lead.

    928,    for shorted pn or Schottky junction other than an emitter junction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 99+ for bus bar
    structure, per se.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 772
    through 776 for specific lead configurations connecting electronic systems
    and devices to printed circuit boards.


CLS 257/735
TXT Beam leads (i.e., leads that extend beyond the ends or sides of a chip
    component):Subject matter under subclass 734 wherein electrical contact
    leads extend like beams beyond the ends of a chip component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, particularly subclass
    411 for methods of forming electrically isolated semiconductor islands held
    in place by beam lead metallization; subclass 461 for methods of forming
    beam leads on a semiconductor substrate combined with dicing of the
    substrate into plural separate bodies; and subclass 611 for methods of
    forming beam lead metallization on a semiconductor substrate.


CLS 257/736
TXT Layered:
    Subject matter under subclass 735 wherein the leads are made of at least
    two separate layers of the same or different material.


CLS 257/737
TXT Bump leads:
    Subject matter under subclass 734 wherein an electrical contact is in the
    form of a relatively abrupt protuberance on the surface of a solid-state
    electronic device or chip/die containing such a device.


CLS 257/738
TXT Ball shaped:
    Subject matter under subclass 737 wherein the bump contacts have the
    spherical shape of a ball.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    780,    for ball shaped bonds, generally.


CLS 257/739
TXT With textured surface:
    Subject matter under subclass 734 wherein the surface of the contact or
    lead is rough or has a characteristic of a closely interwoven fabric,
    rather than being smooth.


CLS 257/740
TXT With means to prevent contact from penetrating shallow PN junction (e.g.,
    prevention of aluminum "spiking"):Subject matter under subclass 734 wherein
    means are provided for preventing an electrical contact from penetrating
    into the relatively thin PN junction region.

    (1)     Note.  This penetration is sometimes referred to as "spiking", and
    if the contact material is aluminum, prevention of this phenomenon is known
    as prevention of aluminum spiking.


CLS 257/741
TXT Of specified material other than unalloyed aluminum:
    Subject matter under subclass 734 wherein the contact or lead is made of a
    specified material other than an aluminum alloy.


CLS 257/742
TXT With a semiconductor conductivity substitution type dopant (e.g., germanium
    in the case of a gallium arsenide semiconductor) in a contact
    metal):Subject matter under subclass 741 wherein the contact metal is doped
    with atoms of an element, e.g., germanium in the case of a semiconductor of
    gallium arsenide, which changes the conductivity of (i.e., introduces holes
    or electrons into) the semiconductor material to which the contact is
    connected.


CLS 257/743
TXT For compound semiconductor material:
    Subject matter under subclass 742 in which the electrical contact material
    contacts and contains a dopant for a semiconductor material which is a
    chemical compound, as contrasted to an elemental semiconductor.


CLS 257/744
TXT For compound semiconductor material:
    Subject matter under subclass 741 in which the electrical contact material
    contacts a semiconductor material which is a chemical compound, as
    contrasted to an elemental semiconductor.


CLS 257/745
TXT Contact for III-V material:
    Subject matter under subclass 744 in which the compound semiconductor
    material is a group III-V compound, i.e., one component is from periodic
    table group III and the other is from periodic table group V.


CLS 257/746
TXT Composite material (e.g., fibers or strands embedded in solid
    matrix):Subject matter under subclass 741 in which the semiconductor
    contact material is formed as a composite of, for example, fibers or
    strands embedded in a solid matrix.


CLS 257/747
TXT With thermal expansion matching of contact or lead material to
    semiconductor active device:Subject matter under subclass 741 in which the
    electrical contact or lead material is chosen to have a coefficient of
    thermal expansion which closely matches that of the semiconductor active
    device material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    178,    for regenerative device with housing and means to avoid stress
    (e.g., thermal matching of electrode to semiconductor).

    633,    for thermal expansion compensation between semiconductor and
    insulating coating.


CLS 257/748
TXT Plural layers of specified contact or lead material:
    Subject matter under subclass 747 wherein the thermal expansion matching
    lead material is layered.


CLS 257/749
TXT At least portion of which is transparent to ultraviolet, visible or
    infrared light:Subject matter under subclass 741 wherein at least part of
    the contact or lead is transparent to ultraviolet, visible, or infrared
    light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59,     for FET devices in amorphous material with transparent electrode.

    72,     for FET devices in non-single crystal semiconductor material with
    transparent electrode.

    449,    for light responsive devices with transparent Schottky barrier.


CLS 257/750
TXT Layered:
    Subject matter under subclass 741 wherein the specified contact material is
    layered.


CLS 257/751
TXT At least one layer forms a diffusion barrier:
    Subject matter under subclass 750 wherein at least one layer forms a
    barrier to the diffusion of the contact material into the semiconductor or
    into another contact layer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    486,    for Schottky barrier layers including a diffusion barrier material.


CLS 257/752
TXT Planarized to top of insulating layer:
    Subject matter under subclass 750 wherein a contact or lead and an
    insulating layer to which it is connected form a single planar surface.


CLS 257/753
TXT With adhesion promoting means (e.g., layer of material) to promote adhesion
    of contact to an insulating layer:Subject matter under subclass 750 wherein
    a means, e.g., a layer of material, is provided to promote adhesion of an
    electrical contact or lead to an insulating surface.


CLS 257/754
TXT At least one layer of silicide or polycrystalline silicon:
    Subject matter under subclass 750 wherein at least one layer of material is
    made up of a silicide or polycrystalline silicon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    381     and 538, for polycrystalline silicon resistive elements connected
    to active semiconductor electronic devices.

    554     and 588, for bipolar transistor devices with a polycrystalline
    semiconductor connection electrode.


CLS 257/755
TXT Polysilicon laminated with silicide:
    Subject matter under subclass 754 wherein the layers include a polysilicon
    laminated with a silicide.

    (1)     Note.  Such laminated contacts of polysilicon and silicide are
    sometimes called "polycide" contacts.


CLS 257/756
TXT Multiple polysilicon layers:
    Subject matter under subclass 754 wherein a layered electrical contact or
    lead includes multiple polysilicon layers.


CLS 257/757
TXT Silicide of refractory or platinum group metal:
    Subject matter under subclass 754 wherein a layered electrical contact or
    lead includes a silicide of a metal found in groups IVA, VA, VIA or VIIIA
    (other than iron (Fe), nickel (Ni) or cobalt (Co)) of the periodic table of
    the elements.


CLS 257/758
TXT Multiple metal levels on semiconductor, separated by insulating layer
    (e.g., multiple level metallization for integrated circuit):Subject matter
    under subclass 750 wherein there are plural layers of metal forming
    electrical contact material, the layers being separated by intervening
    layers of insulator material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211,    for gate arrays with multi-level metallization.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    60+, for processes of uniting plural bodies via an adhesive material.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, particularly
    subclasses 118+ for methods of packaging a semiconductor device including a
    step of bonding utilizing an adhesive material; see the search notes
    therein.


CLS 257/759
TXT Including organic insulating material between metal levels:
    Subject matter under subclass 758 wherein there is at least one layer of
    organic insulating material between different layers of metal.  An organic
    compound is one which fulfills the requirements of the Class 260
    definition, i.e., has a molecule characterized by two carbon atoms bonded
    together, one atom of carbon being bonded to at least one atom of hydrogen
    or a halogen, or one atom or carbon bonded to at least one atom of nitrogen
    by a single or double bond, certain compounds such as HCN, CN-CN, HNCO,
    HNCS, cyanogen halides, cyanamide, fulminic acid and metal carbides, being
    exceptions to this rule.


CLS 257/760
TXT Separating insulating layer is laminate or composite of plural insulating
    materials (e.g., silicon oxide on silicon nitride, silicon
    oxynitride):Subject matter under subclass 758 wherein there is at least one
    separating insulator layer between different metal layers, which separating
    insulator layer is itself made up of plural sublayers, or which separating
    insulator layer is a composite such as a mixture of silicon oxide and
    silicon nitride.


CLS 257/761
TXT At least one layer containing vanadium, hafnium, niobium, zirconium, or
    tantalum:Subject matter under subclass 750 wherein a layered electrical
    contact or lead has at least one layer which contains vanadium (V), hafnium
    (Hf), niobium (Nb), zirconium (Zr), or tantalum (Ta).


CLS 257/762
TXT At least one layer containing silver or copper:
    Subject matter under subclass 750 wherein a layered electrical contact or
    lead has at least one layer which contains copper (Cu) or silver (Ag).


CLS 257/763
TXT At least one layer of molybdenum, titanium, or tungsten:
    Subject matter under subclass 750 wherein a layered electrical contact or
    lead has at least one layer of molybdenum (Mo), titanium (Ti) or tungsten
    (W).


CLS 257/764
TXT Alloy containing molybdenum, titanium, or tungsten:
    Subject matter under subclass 763 wherein at least one layer containing
    molybdenum, titanium, or tungsten contains an alloy thereof.


CLS 257/765
TXT At least one layer of an alloy containing aluminum:
    Subject matter under subclass 750 wherein a layered electrical contact or
    lead has at least one layer of an alloy containing aluminum (Al).


CLS 257/766
TXT At least one layer containing chromium or nickel:
    Subject matter under subclass 750 wherein a layered electrical contact or
    lead has at least one layer containing chromium (Cr) or nickel (Ni).


CLS 257/767
TXT Resistive to electromigration or diffusion of the contact or lead
    material:Subject matter under subclass 741 wherein an electrical contact or
    lead material is adapted to resist electromigration of the contact or lead
    material, or diffusion of the contact or lead material into the material to
    which the contact is attached.


CLS 257/768
TXT Refractory or platinum group metal or alloy or silicide thereof:Subject
    matter under subclass 741 wherein the specified contact or lead material is
    a refractory metal or a platinum group metal, i.e., a metal found in groups
    IVA, VA, VIA or VIIIA (other than iron (Fe), nickel (Ni) or cobalt (Co)) of
    the periodic table of the elements or a silicide (i.e., a binary compound
    of silicon), usually with a more electropositive element or radical,
    thereof.


CLS 257/769
TXT Platinum group metal or silicide thereof:
    Subject matter under subclass 768 wherein the specified contact or lead
    material is a platinum group metal (i.e., platinum (Pt), palladium (Pd),
    rhodium (Rh), ruthenium (Ru), osmium (Os) or iridium (Ir)) or a silicide
    i.e., a binary compound of silicon, usually with a more electropositive
    element or radical, thereof.


CLS 257/770
TXT Molybdenum, tungsten, or titanium or their silicides:
    Subject matter under subclass 768 wherein the specified contact or lead
    material is molybdenum (Mo), tungsten (W), titanium (Ti), or their
    silicides, (i.e., a binary compound of one of them with silicon).


CLS 257/771
TXT Alloy containing aluminum:
    Subject matter under subclass 741 wherein the specific contact or lead
    material is an alloy containing aluminum (Al).


CLS 257/772
TXT Solder composition:
    Subject matter under subclass 741 wherein the specific contact or lead
    material is a solder composition (i.e., a metal or metallic alloy that
    melts at relatively low temperatures).

    (1)     Note.  Solder is normally used to join metals with higher melting
    points than the solder composition.


CLS 257/773
TXT Of specified configuration:
    Subject matter under subclass 734 in which an electrical contact or lead
    has a specific configuration or shape.


CLS 257/774
TXT Via (interconnection hole) shape:
    Subject matter under subclass 773 wherein the shape or configuration of an
    electrical contact or lead is determined by the shape of a hole through an
    insulating layer through which the contact extends.


CLS 257/775
TXT Varying width or thickness of conductor:
    Subject matter under subclass 773 wherein an electrical contact or lead has
    a width or thickness which varies over the length of the contact or lead.


CLS 257/776
TXT Cross-over arrangement, component or structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 773 wherein means are provided for
    electrically insulating electrical contact elements or leads which cross
    each other to do so without a short circuit therebetween.

    (1)     Note.  Electrically insulating components or structures associated
    with electrical contact crossovers may be referred to as bridges, tunnels,
    overpasses, underpasses, etc.


CLS 257/777
TXT Chip mounted on chip:
    Subject matter under subclass 734 wherein a semiconductor substrate of an
    active solid-state device is electrically connected to, and positioned on,
    another semiconductor substrate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 760+ for
    plural  modules or means of connection of components to a printed circuit
    board.


CLS 257/778
TXT Flip chip:
    Subject matter under subclass 734 wherein a semiconductor substrate which
    contains an active solid-state electronic device has electric contacts on
    the top side thereof, the top side being that which contains an active
    solid-state electronic device, and which is flipped so that the contact
    side becomes the bottom side for connection with a substrate which has
    matching electrical contacts.


CLS 257/779
TXT Solder wettable contact, lead, or bond:
    Subject matter under subclass 734 wherein an electrical contact or lead has
    a surface to which solder will readily adhere.


CLS 257/780
TXT Ball or nail head type contact, lead, or bond:
    Subject matter under subclass 734 wherein a contact, lead, or bond is in
    the form of a wire having an end for connection to the semiconductor which
    is in the shape of a ball or nail head.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    738,    for ball shaped bump contacts.


CLS 257/781
TXT Layered contact, lead or bond:
    Subject matter under subclass 780 wherein a ball or nail head type contact
    is made up of a plurality of layers of the same or different material.


CLS 257/782
TXT Die bond:
    Subject matter under subclass 734 wherein a semiconductor chip containing
    at least one active solid-state device and provided with a contact or lead
    is provided with a means for attaching the chip to a supporting member.

    (1)     Note.  The supporting member or attachment may form part of the
    contacts or leads for the chip, or be separate therefrom.


CLS 257/783
TXT With adhesive means:
    Subject matter under subclass 782 wherein adhesive means (e.g., a layer) is
    provided to secure a die (chip) which contains an active solid-state
    electronic device to a supporting member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    60+ for processes of uniting plural bodies via an adhesive material.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, particularly
    subclasses 118+ for methods of packaging a semiconductor device including a
    step of bonding utilizing an adhesive material; see the search notes
    therein.


CLS 257/784
TXT Wire contact, lead, or bond:
    Subject matter under subclass 734 wherein the contact, lead or bond is a
    very flexible, elongated, small diameter filament made of electrically
    conductive material.


CLS 257/785
TXT By pressure alone:
    Subject matter under subclass 734 wherein the electrical contact, lead or
    bond is held in place by pressure alone (e.g., by a spring clip).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181+    and 688+, for other electrodes in press contact with an active
    semiconductor device.


CLS 257/786
TXT Configuration or pattern of bonds:
    Subject matter under subclass 734 wherein the electrical contact, lead or
    bond, has a specific configuration or pattern.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    459,    for light activated devices with particular bonding pad arrangement.

    625,    for mesa structure semiconductor device bonded to heat sink or
    thick electrical conductor.


CLS 257/787
TXT ENCAPSULATED:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein an active solid-state
    electronic device, often part of a semiconductor chip, is surrounded by an
    electrically insulating material which forms a sealed encasement therefor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    for encapsulated light emitter device.

    433+,   for light responsive devices with housing or encapsulation.

    687,    for a housing containing an encapsulant material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, particularly subclasses 841 and 855 for methods of
    assembling an electrical component to a base or lead and encapsulating the
    same.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, appropriate subclasses for the manufacturing
    of glass encsapsulated electronic devices or components thereof.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 251 for a printed
    circuit with an encaqpsulated wire.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 272.11 for encapsulation of electrical components.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 873 for embedded,
    potted, or coated radio wave antennas.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 600 and
    679 for enclosures, including encapsulated types, for electrical and
    electronic devices.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, particularly
    subclasses 112 and 127 for methods of encapsulating; see the search notes
    therein.


CLS 257/788
TXT With specified encapsulant:
    Subject matter under subclass 787 wherein the chemical composition of the
    material that encapsulates the active solid-state electronic device is
    specified.


CLS 257/789
TXT With specified filler material:
    Subject matter under subclass 788 wherein a particular material has been
    added to an encapsulant material to give it desirable mechanical, thermal,
    electrical, or other desirable characteristics, and the material is
    specified.


CLS 257/790
TXT Plural encapsulating layers:
    Subject matter under subclass 788 wherein the encapsulant is made up of
    more than one layer.


CLS 257/791
TXT Including polysiloxane (e.g., silicone resin):
    Subject matter under subclass 788 wherein the encapsulant includes
    polysiloxane (i.e., any of various polymeric compounds which contain
    alternate silicon and oxygen atoms in either a linear or cyclic
    arrangement), often with one or two organic groups attached to each silicon
    atom.


CLS 257/792
TXT Including polyimide:
    Subject matter under subclass 788 wherein the encapsulant includes
    polyimide i.e., a polymeric compound resulting from replacement of both
    atoms of hydrogen in an organic amine by organic univalent acid radicals or
    by an organic divalent acid radical.

    (1)     Note.  Polyimides are copolymers (polymers formed from at least two
    different starting organic materials) which have a


    linkage between the starting materials, wherein R is typically hydrogen and
    Q1 and Q2 are the organic residues of the starting monomers.


CLS 257/793
TXT Including epoxide:
    Subject matter under subclass 788 wherein the encapsulant includes an epoxy
    compound (i.e., a compound containing three membered ring consisting or one
    oxygen and two carbon atoms).


CLS 257/794
TXT Including glass:
    Subject matter under subclass 788 wherein the encapsulant contains glass
    (i.e., an amorphous inorganic, usually transparent or translucent substance
    consisting of a mixture of silicates or borates or phosphates formed by
    fusion of silica or of oxides of boron or phosphorous with a flux and
    stabilizer that cools to a rigid condition without crystallization).


CLS 257/795
TXT With specified filler material:
    Subject matter under subclass 787 wherein a particular material has been
    added to an encapsulant material to give it desirable mechanical, thermal,
    electrical, or other desirable characteristics, and the material is
    specified.


CLS 257/796
TXT With heat sink embedded in encapsulant:
    Subject matter under subclass 787 wherein a heat sink is embedded in the
    encapsulant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, appropriate subclasses.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 704 thru
    723 for thermal conduction means.


CLS 257/797
TXT ALIGNMENT MARKS:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the active solid-state
    device is provided with one or more indicia or marks used during
    fabrication of the device to facilitate accurate alignment of regions in
    the device.


CLS 257/798
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the subject matter is not
    otherwise provided for.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 257/900
TXT MOSFET TYPE GATE SIDEWALL INSULATING SPACER:
    Subject matter wherein a metal oxide semiconductor field effect transistor
    with a gate electrode includes a relatively thick layer of electrically
    insulating material along the side wall of the gate electrode and wherein
    the source or drain region of the transistor has a distinct portion which
    is distant from the gate electrode and is aligned with the edge of the
    insulating material, so that the source or drain region is spaced from the
    gate electrode by the thickness of the insulating material.


CLS 257/901
TXT MOSFET SUBSTRATE BIAS:
    Subject matter wherein an electrical bias is applied between the substrate
    and the source electrode of a metal oxide field effect transistor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    299,    for an insulated gate capacitor, or transistor combined with
    capacitor, with a substrate bias generator.


CLS 257/902
TXT FET WITH METAL SOURCE REGION:
    Subject matter including a field effect transistor with a source region
    that comprises a metal material (e.g., a Schottky barrier or ohmic contact
    to the channel region).


CLS 257/903
TXT FET CONFIGURATION ADAPTED FOR USE AS STATIC MEMORY CELL:
    Subject matter wherein a field effect transistor is structurally arranged
    to be used in a static memory element (i.e., one in which information need
    not be periodically refreshed).


CLS 257/904
TXT WITH PASSIVE COMPONENTS, (e.g., POLYSILICON RESISTORS):
    Subject matter under subclass 903 including a solid-state electronic
    part/component in which charge carriers do not change their  energy levels
    and that does not provide rectification, amplification, or switching, but
    which does react to voltage and current. Examples are pure resistors,
    capacitors and inductors.


CLS 257/905
TXT PLURAL DRAM CELLS SHARE COMMON CONTACT OR COMMON TRENCH:
    Subject matter comprising plural dynamic random access memory elements
    which share an electrical contact or trench.


CLS 257/906
TXT DRAM WITH CAPACITOR ELECTRODES USED FOR ACCESSING (E.G., BIT LINE IS
    CAPACITOR PLATE):Subject matter comprising a dynamic random access memory
    element having an electrode which forms one plate of a storage capacitor,
    which electrode is adapted to be supplied with varying electrical signals
    to get information into or out of the memory element.


CLS 257/907
TXT FOLDED BIT LINE DRAM CONFIGURATION:
    Subject matter comprising an array of dynamic random access memory elements
    including differential sense amplifiers each connected to two different
    rows of memory cells, wherein the two rows of memory cells connected to a
    specific sense amplifier lie adjacent and parallel to each other on the
    same side of the sense amplifier.


CLS 257/908
TXT DRAM CONFIGURATION WITH TRANSISTORS AND CAPACITORS OF PAIRS OF CELLS ALONG
    A STRAIGHT LINE BETWEEN ADJACENT BIT LINES:Subject matter comprising
    dynamic random access memory elements having transistors and capacitors,
    where memory elements connected to adjacent bit lines have transistors and
    capacitors which are not staggered but which lie along a straight line
    which is located between the adjacent bit lines of the device.


CLS 257/909
TXT MACROCELL ARRAYS (E.G., GATE ARRAYS WITH VARIABLE SIZE OR CONFIGURATION OF
    CELLS):Subject matter comprising plural geometric arrangements of groups of
    active solid-state devices, each group being connectable into a logic
    circuit, in one integrated, monolithic semiconductor  chip. in which
    different groups differ from each other in size, complexity, or number of
    components.


CLS 257/910
TXT DIODE ARRAYS (E.G., DIODE READ-ONLY MEMORY ARRAY):
    A repeating geometric arrangement of electronic devices which have two
    terminals and an asymmetrical or nonlinear voltage-current characteristic.


CLS 257/911
TXT LIGHT SENSITIVE ARRAY ADAPTED TO BE SCANNED BY ELECTRON BEAM (E.G.,VIDICON
    DEVICE):A repeating geometric arrangement of light sensitive devices
    structured to be scanned by an electron beam.


CLS 257/912
TXT CHARGE TRANSFER DEVICE USING BOTH ELECTRON AND HOLE SIGNAL CARRIERS:Subject
    matter wherein a charge transfer device* uses both electron and hole
    carriers in the same transfer or storage regions of the charge transfer
    device.


CLS 257/913
TXT WITH MEANS TO ABSORB OR LOCALIZE UNWANTED IMPURITIES OR DEFECTS FROM
    SEMICONDUCTORS (E.G., HEAVY METAL GETTERING):Subject matter including a
    semiconductor device having means to absorb or localize semiconductor
    impurities or defects which would adversely affect the performance of the
    device, e.g., phosphosilicate glass coating to absorb deep level impurities.


CLS 257/914
TXT POLYSILICON CONTAINING OXYGEN, NITROGEN, OR CARBON (E.G., SIPOS):Subject
    matter comprising polycrystalline silicon which contains oxygen, nitrogen,
    or carbon.


CLS 257/915
TXT WITH TITANIUM NITRIDE PORTION OR REGION:
    Subject matter wherein an active solid-state device includes a portion or
    region of the device which contains titanium nitride.


CLS 257/916
TXT NARROW BAND GAP SEMICONDUCTOR MATERIAL (<1eV):
    Subject matter wherein an active solid-state device material is a
    semiconductor in which the difference between the energy levels of
    electrons bound to their nuclei (valence electrons) and the energy levels
    that allow electrons to migrate freely (conduction electrons) is less than
    one electron volt.


CLS 257/917
TXT PLURAL DOPANTS OF SAME CONDUCTIVITY TYPE IN SAME REGION:
    Subject matter wherein an active solid-state device has a region or portion
    which contains at least two different impurity elements which have the same
    electrical conductivity type (i.e., both p-type or both n-type).


CLS 257/918
TXT LIGHT EMITTING REGENERATIVE SWITCHING DEVICE (E.G., LIGHT EMITTING SCR)
    ARRAYS, CIRCUITRY, ETC.:Subject matter wherein an active solid-state device
    acts as if it has two or more active emitter junctions each of which is
    associated with a separate, equivalent transistor having an individual gain
    and, when initiated by a base region* current, the equivalent transistors
    mutually drive each other in a regenerative manner to lower the voltage
    drop between the emitters, and which active solid-state device can generate
    light.

    (1)     Note.  If the current is above a level IH, called the "holding
    current*", then the device will remain ON when the triggering signal is
    removed by the regenerative feedback therebetween, and is then said to be
    "latched*".


CLS 257/919
TXT ELEMENTS OF SIMILAR CONSTRUCTION CONNECTED IN SERIES OR PARALLEL TO AVERAGE
    OUT MANUFACTURING VARIATIONS IN CHARACTERISTICS:Subject matter comprising
    devices wherein components or portions or regions of the devices having
    similar structure  are electrically connected in series or parallel to
    average out manufacturing variations in their operational characteristics.


CLS 257/920
TXT CONDUCTOR LAYERS ON DIFFERENT LEVELS CONNECTED IN PARALLEL (E.G., TO REDUCE
    RESISTANCE):Subject matter wherein a device contains layers of electrical
    conductors and different conductor layers are electrically connected in
    parallel, to improve device operation (e.g., to reduce conductor
    resistance).


CLS 257/921
TXT RADIATION HARDENED SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICE:
    Subject matter in which an active solid-state device is provided with means
    to render it relatively less susceptible to being damaged or deleteriously
    affected in any way by radiant energy (e.g., alpha particles).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    659+,   for means to shield active solid-state devices from harmful
    radiation.


CLS 257/922
TXT WITH MEANS TO PREVENT INSPECTION OF OR TAMPERING WITH AN INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
    (E.G., "SMART CARD", ANTI-TAMPER):Subject matter comprising an integrated
    circuit with means to prevent inspection of, or tampering with the
    integrated circuit (e.g., an integrated circuit used in a "smart card"
    credit or bank card).


CLS 257/923
TXT WITH MEANS TO OPTIMIZE ELECTRICAL CONDUCTOR CURRENT CARRYING CAPACITY
    (E.G., PARTICULAR CONDUCTOR ASPECT RATIO):Subject matter in which an active
    solid-state device includes means to optimize the current carrying capacity
    of an electrical conductor of the device, e.g., by using a particular
    conductor cross-sectional configuration.


CLS 257/924
TXT WITH PASSIVE DEVICE (E.G., CAPACITOR), OR BATTERY, AS INTEGRAL PART OF
    HOUSING OR HOUSING ELEMENT (E.G., CAP):Subject matter which includes a
    distinct solid-state electronic device in which charge carriers do not
    change their energy levels and that does not provide rectification,
    amplification or switching, but which does react to voltage and current
    (e.g., resistors, capacitors, and inductors), or contains a battery, as an
    integral part of a housing or housing element for an active solid-state
    device.


CLS 257/925
TXT BRIDGE RECTIFIER MODULE:
    Subject matter comprising a self-contained element which includes two or
    more junction diodes structurally interconnected as a rectifier bridge
    circuit.


CLS 257/926
TXT ELONGATED LEAD EXTENDING AXIALLY THROUGH ANOTHER ELONGATED LEAD:Subject
    matter wherein an active solid-state device includes more than one
    electrical lead wherein one relatively long lead is coaxially located
    within another relatively long lead.


CLS 257/927
TXT DIFFERENT DOPING LEVELS IN DIFFERENT PARTS OF PN JUNCTION TO PRODUCE SHAPED
    DEPLETION LAYER:Subject matter wherein a pn junction device contains
    impurity dopants with differing concentrations of dopant in different parts
    of the PN junction such that a depletion region associated with the PN
    junction has a controlled shape.


CLS 257/928
TXT WITH SHORTED PN OR SCHOTTKY JUNCTION OTHER THAN EMITTER JUNCTION:Subject
    matter wherein a device has a pn or Schottky junction electrode which is
    electrically short circuited (i.e., there is a direct connection to both
    sides of the junction).


CLS 257/929
TXT PN JUNCTION ISOLATED INTEGRATED CIRCUIT WITH ISOLATION WALLS HAVING MINIMUM
    DOPANT CONCENTRATION AT INTERMEDIATE DEPTH IN EPITAXIAL LAYER (E.G.,
    DIFFUSED FROM BOTH SURFACES OF EPITAXIAL LAYER):Subject matter comprising
    an integrated circuit with pn junction isolation and having boundary walls
    isolating the integrated circuit from its substrate, wherein the walls have
    a minimum concentration of dopant at an intermediate depth in an epitaxial
    layer substrate (e.g., diffused from both surfaces of an epitaxial layer).


CLS 257/930
TXT THERMOELECTRIC (E.G., PELTIER EFFECT) COOLING:
    Subject matter comprising means thermally connected to an active
    solid-state device which, when subjected to the application of an electric
    or magnetic field or electric current, causes heat to be absorbed and
    thereby to cool the active solid-state device.


CLS 258/
TTL RAILWAY MAIL DELIVERY

CLS 258/
TXT This class is intended to include means particularly adapted to transfer
    mail bags, train-orders, and the like to or from moving vehicles,
    especially fixed-way vehicles in rapid motion.

    The term "support" as herein used designates the device or element from
    which the load is delivered.

    The term "receiver" as herein used designates the device or element to
    which the load is delivered.

    Thus either receiver or support may be mounted on the ground or on the
    vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, particularly subclass 124, for systems of transferring
    mail between a central station and outlying rural districts.

    186,    Merchandising, for miscellaneous systems for transferring parcels,
    cash and the like within the limits of a building.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, for devices  for   transferring material
    in general, including mail and the like, to endless carriers.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, appropriate subclasses for conveying of
    solids (including article carriers) by means of a fluid current.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 265 for a guided, wheeled
    device for transporting mail and external means cooperating therewith for
    loading or unloading the device; and subclass 593 for an elevator or hoist
    and loading or unloading means therefor and wherein the elevator or hoist
    is specially adapted to the handling of mail.

    417,    Pumps, subclass 232, for devices particularly adapted to transfer
    water to a moving vehicle.


CLS 258/1
TXT Means within the class definition and parts and accessories peculiar
    thereto not classifiable elsewhere, including, for example, article or
    message carriers in the form of missiles, adapted to be thrown to or from a
    moving vehicle.


CLS 258/1.2
TXT Means under the main class definition for transferring a load to or from an
    aircraft in flight.

    (1)     Note.  Search this class, appropriate subclasses, for means under
    the main class definition for transferring a load to or from a moving
    aircraft not in flight.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 2 and indented subclasses,
    for mechanisms for releasing or tripping portions of machines to cause
    other portions to automatically operate due to the expenditure of the
    potential energy possessed by such parts.

    89,     Ordnance, subclasses 1.51+ for bomb, flare, and signal dropping.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 137+ for a net
    comprising a body catcher.

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclass 116 for trips, stops and knockers used
    in load-suspension cable hoists.

    244,    Aeronautics, particularly subclasses:

       2+,  for means whereby an aircraft in flight may pick up or release
    another    aircraft,   including gliders, singly or in trains.

       135, for supplying fuel to or discharging from an aircraft in flight.

       136, for discharging and diffusing material in air from aircraft in
    flight.

       137, for loading or unloading aircraft in general, including the mere
    dumping of a load from the aircraft whether in flight or not.

       138+,        for parachutes or other devices either, per se, or in
    combination with aircraft structure, for safely lowering persons, cargo, or
    aircraft structure to the ground.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclass 332 and indented subclasses, for
    trippers used in closure fasteners.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 86.4 and
    indented subclasses, for grapples and their operating means.


CLS 258/1.4
TXT Means under subclass 1.2 by which (a) the load transfer takes place between
    an aircraft and a second moving vehicle, including other aircraft, ships,
    railway-vehicles, etc., or (b) arrangements which require an aircraft in
    flight to maintain a substantially circular course in order to take on a
    discharge the load.

    (1)     Note.  Mere turntables for aligning a ground receiver or support
    with the direction of flight of the aircraft are not "moving vehicles"
    within the meaning of this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 137.1+, for means for
    transferring a load to a ship in the sea.


CLS 258/1.6
TXT Means under subclass 1.2 having catapult or other means for throwing or
    projecting the load from a support to a receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      and indented subclasses, for means for projecting a load to or from
    a moving vehicle other than an aircraft in flight and see the notes thereto
    for related devices.


CLS 258/1.8
TXT Means under subclass 1.2 by which one load is discharged from while another
    is picked up by the aircraft, usually either simultaneously or as a result
    of a substantially continuous operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     and indented subclasses, for other load-exchange devices for moving
    vehicles other than aircraft in flight.


CLS 258/2
TXT Apparatus of the railway-mail delivery type comprising as a part thereof
    some element designed for purposes of imparting information or signaling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclass 19.


CLS 258/3
TXT Devices particularly adapted to be held by a person for transferring mail
    bags, missives, etc., to a moving vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  Compare Class 294, Handling: Hand and Hoist-Line Implements,
    subclass 19.1, and indented subclasses, for similar     manually-held
    devices     for transferring pictures or packages to elevated supports or
    shelves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for mere missiles, i.e., article or message carriers adapted to be
    thrown to or from a moving vehicle.


CLS 258/4
TXT Devices for receiving mail bags, missives, and the like from or
    transferring them to a moving vehicle which have magnetically operated
    parts.

    (1)     Note.  Compare Class 294, Handling: Hand and Hoist-Line Implements,
    subclasses 86.4+ for electromagnetic lifting devices; Class 198, Conveyors:
     Power-Driven, subclasses 350, 381, 619, 679, 690.1 and 805; and Class 335,
    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and Electromagnets,
    subclasses 209+ for magnets and electromagnets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 12+ for linear
    electrical motors for projectiles.


CLS 258/5
TXT Means for throwing or projecting a mail bag, missive, or the like to or
    from moving vehicles.

    (1)     Note.  Chutes, hoppers, or releasing devices comprising no means
    other than the weight of the load itself for imparting to the load a
    lateral or longitudinal movement with respect to the vehicle are excluded.

    (2)     Note.  Compare Classes 124, Mechanical Guns and Projectors, for
    nonexplosive devices for projecting missiles; 198, Conveyors:  Power
    Driven, subclasses 414+, and 638+; 414 Material or Article Handling,
    appropriate subclasses, for devices of general application for throwing
    material.


CLS 258/6
TXT Projectors actuated automatically by movement of the vehicle along the
    track.


CLS 258/7
TXT Automatically actuated projectors comprising a spring for imparting
    movement to the load.


CLS 258/8
TXT Means comprising a receiver or a support adapted to be thrown into
    operative position by movement of the vehicle along the track or roadway.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for similar devices actuated by mechanism one element of which is
    an electromagnet.

    6,      and indented subclass, for receivers and supports that are thrown
    into operative position by the movement of the vehicle during the process
    of ejecting a load.


CLS 258/9
TXT Means comprising a receiver or support that is movable laterally of the
    track by a sliding motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      and indented subclasses, for devices that slide laterally to eject
    a load.

    8,      for laterally sliding receivers or supports that are thrown into
    operative position by movement of a vehicle along a track or roadway.


CLS 258/10
TXT Means comprising an auxiliary receiving or supporting track that extends in
    a general direction longitudinally of the main track.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 20, for devices designed to transfer passengers
    to moving trains.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 337 and 338 for external
    means for cooperating a wheeled vehicle for loading or unloading the same,
    and comprising static structure for supporting the load being moved to or
    from vehicle.


CLS 258/11
TXT Means comprising inventions in the combination of a receiver and a support
    or in both receiver and support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      5+, 8, 9, and 10, for other combined receivers and supports.


CLS 258/12
TXT Combined receivers and supports comprising two types of receivers one only
    of which is a bar, hook, V-shaped, or similar comparatively sharp or
    pointed instrument.

    (1)     Note.  A fork receiver combined with supplemental receiving
    elements designed to cooperate with the fork in the act of receiving or to
    constitute a depository for the load received by the fork is deemed to be a
    "fork receiver only".


CLS 258/13
TXT Devices of the type set forth by the title, comprising modifications of a
    fork receiver, specially designed to prevent the load from rebounding from
    the receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+     and 22, for retainers.


CLS 258/14
TXT Combined receivers and supports comprising a single type of receiver
    consisting of a bar, hook, V-shaped, or other comparatively sharp or
    pointed instrument.

    (1)     Note.  Skeleton scoops and the like are excluded.

    (2)     Note.  Search this class, subclasses in the title of which the word
    "fork" occurs, for fork receivers.


CLS 258/15
TXT Devices of the type indicated by the title, comprising modifications of a
    fork receiver, specially designed to prevent the load from rebounding from
    the receiver. Search this class, all subclasses in the title of which the
    words "retaining feature" occur, for retainers.


CLS 258/16
TXT Devices of the type set forth by the title, comprising modifications of a
    fork receiver, specially designed to prevent the load from rebounding from
    the receiver, and also latch or similar means operated by contact with some
    element as the vehicle moves along the track for releasing another load
    from its support.

    (1)     Note.  Similar devices wherein the bag or load is released by a
    receiver or the like that contacts directly therewith are excluded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6       and indented subclass for impact-operated load projecting devices.

    9,      12 and indented subclass, and also all subclasses in the title of
    which the words "impact operated load release" occur, for other load
    releasing features.


CLS 258/17
TXT Devices of the type indicated by the title, comprising modifications of a
    fork receiver, specially designed to prevent the load from rebounding from
    the receiver, and also some special means connected with the load for
    engaging with the receiver and sustaining the shock incident to contact
    therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      10, 12+, 18, and 26, for special devices for sustaining the shock
    incident to contact of bag or other load with receiver.


CLS 258/18
TXT Combined receivers and supports comprising a single type of receiver
    consisting of a bar, hook, V-shaped, or other comparatively sharp or
    pointed instrument, and also means to which the load is attached, for
    engaging with a receiver, usually for the purpose of receiving the shock of
    impact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      12+, 17, and 26, for special devices for sustaining the shock
    incident to contact of bag or other load with receiver.


CLS 258/19
TXT Combined receivers and supports not elsewhere classifiable, comprising a
    support in the form of a latch, or similar member, mounted either on the
    vehicle or along the track, and means, either along the track or on the
    vehicle, respectively, for contacting with and releasing the load-holding
    means.

    (1)     Note.  Similar devices wherein the bag or load is released by a
    receiver or the like that contacts directly therewith are excluded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      and indented subclass, for impact- operated load projecting devices.

    9,      12 and indented subclass, and also all subclasses in the title of
    which the words "impact operated load release" occur, for other load
    releasing features.


CLS 258/20
TXT Devices of the railway-mail delivery type not elsewhere classifiable,
    mounted either on the vehicle or along the track, for receiving the load,
    respectively, from a support along the track or on the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  Compare Class 232, Deposit and Collection Receptacles,
    appropriate subclasses, for letter boxes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      5 and indented subclasses 8, 9, 10 and 11, and indented subclasses.


CLS 258/21
TXT Receivers comprising a bar, hook, V-shaped, or similar comparatively sharp
    or pointed instrument.

    (1)     Note.  Skeleton scoops and the like are excluded. Search this
    class, all subclasses in the title of which the word "fork" occurs.


CLS 258/22
TXT Fork receivers comprising some special means for preventing the load from
    rebounding from the receiver.  Search this class, all subclasses in the
    title of which the words, "retaining feature" occurs.


CLS 258/23
TXT Devices of the railway-mail delivery type, mounted either on the vehicle or
    along the track, for supporting the load preparatory to delivering it to a
    receiver mounted, respectively, along the track or on the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  Compare Class 248, Supports, for supports of general
    application. Search this class, all subclasses except subclass 20, and
    subclasses thereunder.


CLS 258/24
TXT Supports comprising two or more arms, not integral or rigidly connected,
    the movement of one of which is dependent upon a prior or simultaneous
    movement of the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15.


CLS 258/25
TXT Supports comprising a load-holding means in the form of a latch or similar
    device, mounted either on a vehicle or along a track, and means, either
    along the track or on the vehicle, respectively, for contacting with and
    releasing the load-holding means.

    (1)     Note.  Similar devices wherein the bag or load is released by a
    receiver or the like that contacts directly therewith are excluded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      and indented subclass, for impact- operated load projecting devices.

    9,      12 and indented subclass, and also all subclasses in the title of
    which the words "impact operated load release" occur, for other releasing
    features.


CLS 258/26
TXT Supports comprising a special means to which the load is attached for
    engaging with a receiver, usually for the purpose of receiving the shock of
    impact, thus preventing injury to bags and other loads.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      10, 11 and indented subclasses, and all subclasses in the title of
    which the words "receiver engaging feature" occur.


CLS 260/
TTL CHEMISTRY OF CARBON COMPOUNDS

CLS 260/
TXT This class is the broad generic class for the chemistry of compounds
    containing carbon, which are further characterized by the presence in a
    molecule thereof of two carbon atoms bonded together; or one atom of carbon
    bonded to at least one atom of hydrogen or halogen; or one atom of carbon
    bonded to at least one atom of nitrogen by a single or double bond.  For
    the compounds included within this definition, but not classified in this
    class, see the notes below, particularly:


    (5)     Note.  Class 48, Gas:  Heating and Illuminating;

    (16)    Note.  Class 127, Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates;

    (22)    Note.  Class 435, Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology;

    (25.1)  Note.  Class 376, Induced Nuclear Reactions: Processes, Systems,
    and Elements;

    (25.5)  Note.  Class 208, Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products;

    (34)    Note.  Class 423, Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds;

    (38)    Note.  Class 585, Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds.

    The treatment and modification of carbon compounds (including mixtures of
    carbon compounds resulting from a synthesis or of natural origin), by
    chemical means, by both chemical and physical means, or by physical means,
    and the products of such treatment, are in this class unless provided for
    elsewhere, as pointed out in the notes below. Physical treatments only are
    not included in this class where they are specifically provided for
    elsewhere.  The preparation and treatment of carbon compounds involving
    fermentative or electro-chemical means are provided for in Classes 435,
    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, and 204, Chemistry:
    Electrical and Wave Energy, respectively.  By "mixtures of carbon compounds
    resulting from a synthesis", are intended mixtures of compounds resulting
    from a chemical process wherein several carbon compounds are simultaneously
    formed, as distinguished from mixtures produced by the mere physical
    admixing of several preformed compounds.  Examples of mixtures of synthetic
    origin are the coconut oil fatty acids produced by the hydrolysis of
    coconut oil, the coconut oil fatty alcohols produced by the catalytic
    hydrogenation of coconut oil, the partial oxidation products of paraffin or
    petroleum distillates, and the mixture of alcohols produced in the methanol
    synthesis.

    This class also includes compositions of matter containing a synthetic
    resin or ingredients which under the reaction conditions employed are known
    to form a synthetic resin, and also includes compositions of matter
    containing vulcanizable natural hydrocarbon gum or derivatives.

    This class also includes carbon compounds coming within the definition of
    the class when admixed with a preserving agent whose sole function is to
    prevent physical or chemical change in the carbon compound unless the
    mixture thus formed is claimed as having a function or utility provided for
    in the composition classification. "Preserving agent" is intended to
    include agents which inhibit chemical decomposition of, corrosion by, or
    caking of the carbon compounds to which they are added.  Preserved carbon
    compounds classifiable in this class (260) are classified on the basis of
    the carbon compound preserved even though the preserving agent is itself a
    carbon compound classifiable in a preceding subclass.  Cellulose ethers and
    esters admixed with a preserving agent are classified in Class 106,
    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, inasmuch as their main utility is in
    plastic and coating compositions.

    The rule followed in classifying a patent containing several species which
    fall into different subclasses is that the original patent has been placed
    in the first appearing subclass providing for the claimed subject matter
    and cross-referenced to the appropriate lower subclass, which provides for
    other claimed subject matter, except where there is a compulsory search
    note between the subclasses. Where there are one or more indents to a
    generic subclass and one of the claimed species is not provided for
    specifically by any of these indents, the patent was placed as original in
    the generic subclass, since this is the first appearing subclass providing
    for said individual claimed species.  This rule of classification also
    applies to compounds having tautomeric forms which are separately
    classified.  In classifying a patent containing Markush type claims, i.e.,
    "group consisting of A and B" and no species claims, the original patent
    has been placed in the first appearing subclass providing for the species
    in the Markush group.  If, in addition to the Markush group, there were
    species claims, the first cited rule, governing patents with separate
    species claims, was followed.  The rule of superiority was also followed
    with reference to intermediate compounds and the reaction products thereof
    when the intermediate was provided for in a superior subclass.

    A solution of a carbon compound having no art use is classified with the
    compound.

    In this class the primary line of classification is on the compound, and
    patents claiming both process and compound are placed with the compound and
    also patents claiming process only unless there has been provided a process
    subclass.  Many subclasses have been established under product subclasses
    for processes only, which are directed to the preparation, purification, or
    recovery of the products in the dominant subclass.  These process
    subclasses contain as original patents those which claim the process only.
    If a compound is claimed and also a process of making or treating the same,
    for which a process subclass is provided thereunder, it is placed in the
    compound subclass and cross-referenced to the process subclass below.
    Process subclasses have also been established for patents which do not
    claim the production, purification, or recovery of a definite compound, or
    the compound itself. In subclass 684 and indented subclasses are placed all
    processes which are applicable to several types of carbon compounds, either
    as original patents or as cross-references, depending on the nature of the
    claims.  Where the claims recite process only and no claim is directed to a
    process for the production of a definite compound or type of compounds
    provided for above, the original patent has been placed in subclass 684 or
    appropriate indented subclass, and cross-referenced as to the disclosed
    specific processes.  Where a process is claimed, the product of which is
    provided for in a product subclass above and the process is capable of more
    general application, a cross-reference has been placed in the appropriate
    process subclass in the general process group.

    The constitution of a carbon compound is "undetermined" when it is not
    sufficiently known to enable its definite allocation to any one of the
    subclasses provided in the class.  In such a case, such a compound is
    generally classified on the basis of the reactants involved and where no
    such process class is provided therefor, the compound is classified with
    the reactant first appearing in the class.  Where the compound is stated to
    be unknown but appears to have a definite structure, a cross-reference
    should be placed in the appropriate subclass taking the definite structure.

    Polymerization products unless otherwise specifically provided for are
    classified with the corresponding monomer.  In the case of
    interpolymerization products, they are classified with the monomer first
    appearing in the class.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 8, Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and
    Chemical Modification of Textiles and Fibers, for compositions of matter
    adapted and intended for use in dyeing and in the chemical treatment of
    textiles, hides, skins, feathers, animal tissues, and fibers, together with
    processes of use of such compositions and their manufacture.  It also takes
    patents containing claims to processes of use, for the purpose of that
    class, of a single definite compound.  However, patents containing claims
    to a definite carbon compound and claims to "fiber dyed therewith" or a
    claim to a broadly defined process of dyeing therewith are classified in
    this class (260).

    (2)     Note.  See Class 425, Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or
    Treating: Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for molding or
    shaping of plastic materials which consist of or contain carbon compounds.

    (3)     Note.  See Class 502, Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:
     Product or Process of Making, especially subclasses 100+ provides
    catalysts and methods of making them, but patents having claims to
    producing or treating carbon compounds involving catalysis are placed in
    this class (260), appropriate subclasses.

            Processes which are directed to the production of several chemical
    compounds, one of which is classifiable in Class 23 and one in Class 260,
    are classified in Class 23 and cross-referenced into Class 260, except
    where the compound classifiable in Class 23, is only incidentally produced
    by the reaction, such as, for example, HC1, and its production is not an
    objective of the process.

    (4)     Note.  Class 34, Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids,
    includes subject-matter wholly peculiar to the drying of solids or
    slurries, such as, for example, the drying of a definite carbon compound in
    an inert atmosphere. The removal of water of crystallization is considered
    a chemical manufacturing operation for Class 260.

    (5)     Note.  Class 48, Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, for acetylene made
    by processes wherein carbides are decomposed with water.

    (6.5)   Note.  Class 95, Gas Separation:  Processes, includes subject
    matter which is wholly peculiar to the separation by physical means, except
    by refrigeration, of a gaseous or vaporous carbon compound from a mixture
    of gases or vapors.

    (7)     Note.  Class 62, Refrigeration, includes means for separating
    liquids by selectively freezing one of them and means for separating
    gaseous mixtures in which one or more of the gases of the mixture are
    liquefied during the course of the separation.

    (8)     Note.  Class 71, Chemistry:  Fertilizers, contains fertilizer
    mixtures containing carbon compounds, but a new carbon compound is
    classified in this class (260) even though it may have utility as a
    fertilizer.

    (10)    Note.  Class 252, Compositions, includes compositions of matter
    containing carbon compounds such as, for example, detergent, and magnetic
    compositions.

    (11)    Note.  Class 162, Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 1+
    includes subject matter which is wholly peculiar to processes of treating
    cellulose containing natural products, involving chemical action, to
    separate or purify the cellulose. For processes of liberating cellulose
    fibers involving physical treatment only, search Class 19, Textiles, Fiber
    Preparation.

    (12)    Note.  Class 430, Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process,
    Composition, or Product Thereof, includes compositions containing carbon
    compounds, such as, for example, sensitizing or developing compositions but
    a new carbon compound is classified in this class (260).

    (14)    Note.  Class 100, Presses, includes subject matter wholly peculiar
    to the extraction of materials by pressing.

    (15)    Note.  Class 106, Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, contains
    coating or plastic compositions of matter not elsewhere provided for,
    containing carbon compounds, but new carbon compounds or mixtures thereof,
    as defined above, are placed in this class (260), even though they may have
    utility as coating or plastic materials.  The only exceptions to this are
    that compositions containing synthetic resins are in Class 260, subclasses
    2+ and compositions containing rubber are in Class 260, subclasses 709+,
    particularly subclasses 726+.

            Class 106 also includes materials or ingredients not in themselves
    coating or plastic compositions but which are limited to use in their
    preparation. Lakes, being for the most part adsorption products of carbon
    dyes with insoluble metal hydroxides, carbonates, or sulfates, are not
    regarded  as being carbon compounds, when a preformed substratum is
    employed, and are placed in Class 106, subclass 289; however, when the
    substratum is simultaneously synthesized with the dye compound, it is
    placed in this class (260).  For example, a lake formed by coupling a diazo
    and a coupling component in the presence of barium sulfate is classified in
    Class 106, whereas a lake formed by synthesizing the same dye in the
    presence of barium chloride and soluble sulfate would be classified in this
    class (260).  Metal salts of a definite compound are classified in this
    class (260).

    (16)    Note.  See Class 127, Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, for
    starches, sugars, and dextrin, except when made by synthesis other than the
    hydrolytic conversion of carbohydrates, in which case they are placed in
    this class (260).  Class 127 also includes subject-matter which is wholly
    peculiar to processes of extracting, or purifying, natural starch, natural
    sucrose or other natural carbohydrates, except cellulose, processes of
    hydrolizing carbohydrates or processes of separating or purifying the
    products of such hydrolysis.

    (17)    Note.  Class 156, Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical
    Manufacture, appropriate subclasses include laminating processes which use
    adhesives which may be made by a Class 260 process.  See particularly
    subclasses 327+.

    (18)    Note.  Class 149, Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges,
    contains explosive mixtures containing carbon compounds, but a new carbon
    compound is classified in this class (260) if embraced within the class
    definition, even though it may be explosive.

    (19)    Note.  Class 159, Concentrating Evaporators, includes
    subject-matter wholly peculiar to the concentration by physical means of
    solutions of carbon compounds coming within the definition of this class.

    (20)    Note.  Class 424, Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating
    Compositions, includes a composition containing a carbon compound, but a
    new carbon compound even though it may possess a utility of that class
    (424) is placed in this class (260).  A claim to the use of a carbon
    compound to treat an animal body or to kill, repel, etc., a pest is
    classified in Class 424.  An animal or plant extract of undetermined
    constitution, from a single source and with a utility provided for in Class
    424, is classified in that class, especially subclasses 520+ and 195.1+.

    (22)    Note.  Class 435, Chemistry: Molecular Biology and Microbiology,
    takes mere processes of making, separating, or purifying carbon compounds
    by operations that include fermentations and compositions and apparatus
    that are specialized for use therein, and processes of making such
    compositions for such use; also ferments that are carbon compounds
    (enzymes) respectively and processes of making.  Products resulting from
    biological processes (fermentation) are classified in the Office according
    to the products of those processes. Processes of making vinegar are placed
    in Class 99, Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, since vinegar is not pure
    acetic acid but is a dilute solution of acetic acid containing desired
    odoriferous and flavoring substances depending on its source.

    (22.1)  Note. Class 935, Genetic Engineering:  Recombinant DNA Technology,
    Hybrid or Fused Cell Technology, and Related Manipulations of Nucleic
    Acids, which provides a search collection for processes of altering the
    genetic structure of microorganisms; genes and methods of modifying genes
    and their expression; vectors and methods of modifying vectors; methods of
    introducing DNA into a cell; microorganisms, per se, which have had their
    genetic sequence altered by recombinant DNA techniques or by cell fusion or
    by uptake of DNA; testing; separation techniques; apparatus; and methods of
    use of vectors or of the genetically engineered microorganisms; methods of
    gene therapy or genetic modification of living organisms.

    (23)    Note.  Class 504, Plant Protecting and Regulating Compositions,
    contains plant growth regulating compositions containing carbon compounds,
    but a new carbon compound is classified in this class (260) even though it
    may have utility as a plant growth regulator.

    (25)    Note.  For electrical or wave energy chemical methods for the
    production of organic compounds other than Synthetic Resins or Natural
    Rubbers those involving chemical reactions which result merely from the
    thermal effects of the electrical or wave energy, see Class 204, Chemistry:
     Electrical and Wave Energy, particularly subclasses 158 and 165 and
    indented subclasses.  Combinations of chemical processes falling within the
    definition of Class 260, and electrical or wave energy methods falling
    under the definition of Class 204, are classified in Class 204, when the
    chemical process steps are preparatory to the electrical or wave energy
    methods, and are classified in Class 260 when the electrical or wave energy
    methods are preparatory to such chemical process steps.  The foregoing
    applies even though such preparatory methods result in a desired
    by-product.  Branching processes wherein one branch comprises a process
    falling within the definition of Class 204 and another branch is provided
    for in Class 260, will be classified in Class 260.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 355+ for electrolytic synthesis of
    organic compounds from a fused bath and subclasses 413+ for electrolytic
    synthesis of organic compounds from an aqueous bath or a bath other than a
    fused bath.

    (25.1)  Note.  For the production of organic compounds and compositions,
    see Class 376, Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and
    Elements, subclasses 319+ when the chemical reaction takes place within a
    nuclear reactor and some nuclear reactor structure or step is claimed.  The
    broad recitation of using a nuclear reactor in such process is not
    sufficient to place patent in Class 376.

    (25.5)  Note.  Class 208, Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, includes
    cracking methods of treating mineral oils; methods of purifying mineral
    oils or fractions thereof, except where the objective of the purification
    process is to recover or prepare a compound coming within the definitions
    of this class (260).

    (26)    Note.  Class 209, Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids,
    subclass 166 includes subject-matter peculiar to the separating and
    assorting of solids; also flotation processes involving the use of carbon
    compounds as flotation agents, even though a definite carbon compound is
    also claimed.

    (27)    Note.  See Class 210, Liquid Purification or Separation, for
    subject matter peculiar to the separation or purification of liquids.

    (27.5)  Note.  See Class 241, Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration,
    for processes and apparatus for comminuting solid material.  See section 2
    of the class definition of that class for the line.

    (28)    Note.  Class 252, Compositions, includes wetting agents,
    refrigerating agents, and flotation agents but new carbon compounds as
    defined above are classified in Class 260, even though they possess any of
    these properties. For agents for inhibiting caking of granules, corrosion
    or chemical change, search Class 252, subclasses 380+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, for colloid systems, colloidally dispersed
    substances, dry compositions containing one substance and an agent for
    stabilizing colloidal dispersion thereof in any other substance, processes
    of making the same and mere processes of separating substances from other
    materials, or producing substances in a finely-divided state, which include
    formations of colloid systems, but for mere organic compounds,
    respectively, in a finely-divided or so-called colloidally-divided state,
    search where the particular compound is classifiable.

    (29)    Note.  For chemical apparatus, see Class 422, Chemical Apparatus
    and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing, Preserving, or Sterilizing,
    appropriate subclasses and the search notes thereunder.

    (31)    Note.  See Class 264, Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or
    Treating:  Processes, for processes for molding or shaping of plastic
    materials which consists of or contain carbon compounds, referring
    particularly to the Main section of Class 264 for the line between Class
    264 and Class 260 and other composition classes.  In general, patents which
    include both the preparation and a significant molding or working treatment
    of a compound or composition classifiable in Class 260, are placed in Class
    264 and cross-referenced to this class (260) when desirable.  Where the
    molding is only nominally recited or is merely incidental to the
    preparation, of the compound or composition, the patent is placed in this
    class (260).

    (32)    Note.  Class 201, Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, includes
    subject matter peculiar to thermolytic distillation not otherwise provided
    for.

    (33)    Note.  Class 203, Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, includes
    matter peculiar to distilling a mixture to separate as a product a desired
    component present as such in the original mixture.  For a process including
    an extraction step followed by a distillation step see this class (260)
    subclass 236.5 and the notes thereunder.

    (34)    Note.  See Class 423, Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, for certain
    compounds falling under the class definition of Class 260, to-wit:
    hydrocyanic acid, cyanogen, isocyanic acid, cyanamide, cyanogen halides,
    isothiocyanic acid, fulminic acid and metal carbides.  For dicyanamide,
    dicyandiamide and salts thereof, see Class 260, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 551+.

            Processes directed to the production of both Class 260 and Class
    423 compounds are classified in Class 423 and cross-referenced to Class 260
    unless the Class 423 compound is only incidentally produced and is not an
    objective of the process.

    (35)    Note.  Class 426, Food or Edible Material:  Processes,
    Compositions, and Products, includes compositions or products containing
    carbon compounds, but a new carbon compound is classified in this class
    (260), even though it may be a food or edible material.  Proteins, oils and
    fats from a single source are regarded as being definite carbon compounds.
    For process of removing caffeine and tannin from coffee and tea, see Class
    426, subclasses 427+.

    (36)    Note.  Class 428, Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles,
    appropriate subclasses for a stock material product in the form of a web or
    sheet which may include structurally defined organic compounds, and
    especially the appropriate subclasses under subclasses 411+ for a
    nonstructural composite web or sheet which includes a layer including a
    carbon compound.

    (37)    Note.  See Class 427, Coating Processes, the class definition for a
    detailed statement of the line between Class 427 and certain compound and
    composition classes, including Class 260.

    (38)    Note.  See Class 585, Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, for
    carbon compounds containing only carbon and hydrogen, processes for their
    synthesis and purification and for certain compositions containing
    hydrocarbons. Where a patent has a claim suitable for classification in
    Class 260 as well as a claim suitable for classification in Class 585, it
    is classified as an original in Class 260 and cross-referenced to Class
    585. This rule holds even where the Class 260 claim is to a process for the
    production of an intermediate and the Class 585 claim is a "more
    comprehensive" claim to the production of the intermediate and subsequent
    conversion of the intermediate to a hydrocarbon compound.

    (39)    Note.  See Class 588, Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or
    Containment, appropriate subclasses for the destruction or containment of
    hazardous or toxic waste that contains a Class 260 carbon compound.

    (40)    Note.  See Class 117, Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy
    Growth Processes; Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes and
    non-coating apparatus for growing therein-defined single-crystal of all
    types of materials, including inorganic or organic, and by all techniques,
    including chemical reactions (e.g., synthesis, modifying).  See Class 117
    definitions for guidance in placement of single-crystal art.



    DEFINITIONS OF TERMS EMPLOYED IN THIS CLASS:

    The term unsaturated denotes the presence of a double or triple bond
    linking two adjacent carbon atoms, thus:

    The term condensation denotes combination between at least two or more
    molecules of the same or different carbon compounds between carbons thereof.

    The term heterocyclic denotes the presence of a ring whose members are
    composed of at least one carbon and one or more atoms of the elements taken
    from the group consisting of nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, selenium, and
    tellurium.

    The term nitrocyclic denotes the presence of a ring, all of whose ring
    atoms are nitrogens, e.g., azides.

    The term carbocyclic denotes the presence of one or more rings, none of
    which is a heterocyclic or a nitrocyclic ring, of which the ring members of
    at least one ring are all carbons.

    The term acyclic denotes the absence of a heterocyclic, nitrocyclic, or
    carbocyclic nucleus.

    The expression benzene nucleus denotes the presence of a six-membered ring
    all of whose members are carbons and containing three conjugated double
    bonds, thus:

    The term aromatic denotes a compound which contains a benzene nucleus
    whether or not it is condensed with other rings.

    The term alicyclic denotes a carbocyclic compound not containing a benzene
    nucleus. Thus decahydronaphthalene is alicyclic, but 1, 2, 3,
    4-tetrahydronaphthalene is aromatic.

    The term oxo denotes the presence of a carbonyl (C=O) bonded to hydrogen
    and/or carbon and is a term generic to ketones and aldehydes.

    The term carbonylic denotes the presence of the carbonyl group, C=O.

    The expression nonoxo-carbonylic denotes the presence of C=O in combination
    other than as found in ketone and aldehydes and is generic, for example, to
    carbonyl

    The term oxy denotes the presence of oxygen singly bonded to a carbon,
    which is not the carbon of a carbonyl group, and is further bonded to
    hydrogen, metal or an organic radical.  The term is generic to alcohols,
    phenols, alcoholates, phenolates, and ethers and esters thereof, but in
    view of the fact that, in this classification, esters take precedence over
    hydroxy, the term oxy, as herein, employed, is chiefly generic to C- OH, C-
    O Metal and C-OR (ether type).

    The expression phenolic-oxy denotes the presence of an oxygen single bonded
    to a ring carbon of a benzene nucleus.

    The expression heavy metal denotes any metal having a specific gravity
    greater than 4 and as employed herein includes arsenic and antimony.

    The expression nuclear carbon denotes a carbon which is a ring carbon of a
    closed chain.

    The expression C-substituent indicates that the substituent is bonded to a
    carbon.

    The term sulfoxy denotes the presence of a radical containing sulfur bonded
    to oxygen and includes the sulfoxide, sulfone, sulfonyl, sulfo, and sulfate
    groups.


CLS 260/1
TXT Carbon compounds under the class definition and not provided for in a lower
    subclass.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass should be placed all carbon compounds
    comprehended by the class definition and not specifically embraced by the
    subclasses provided herein. Where a doubt exists as to whether a compound
    properly belongs in a name subclass, the original patent should be placed
    in this subclass and cross-referenced to the most pertinent subclass below.
     This subclass should be the gathering place for all carbon compounds not
    provided for, from which they can from time to time be grouped into
    official subclasses.


CLS 260/350
TXT Compounds which contain (1) open carbon chains; (2) closed carbon chains
    wherein the ring members are all carbons, (3) closed chains containing a
    metal as a ring member.


CLS 260/665
TXT Compounds under subclass 350 containing a metal other than a heavy metal or
    aluminum bonded to carbon, e.g.; 1, 4-disodium naphthalene and phenyl
    magnesium chloride.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS BASED ON INDUSTRY OR ART USE


CLS 260/998.11
TXT Product classifiable under subclass 2 useful in the filling of teeth or the
    manufacture of artificial teeth.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass was established in 1973 by examination of
    patents in subclasses 42+ only and by incorporation of these patents with
    an existing examiners unofficial digest.  Therefore completeness of search
    cannot be guaranteed as to patents issued before 1973 and not classified in
    subclasses 42+ as an original or cross reference.


CLS 260/998.12
TXT Product under subclass 2 intended to be used in heat shields of the type
    which function by a controlled decomposition of the front surface to keep
    heat from the back surface.  Some patents in this subclass are related to
    compositions useful in re-entry heat shields for space vehicles.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass was established in 1973 by examination of
    patents in subclasses 42+ only. Therefore, completeness of search cannot be
    guaranteed as to patents issued before 1973 and not classified in
    subclasses 42+ as original or cross-reference.


CLS 260/998.13
TXT Product under subclasses 2+ intended to operate by friction or rubbing as
    in a brake or clutch or which is intended to have a high coefficient of
    friction as in the prevention of skidding or slipping.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass was established in 1973 by examination of
    patents in subclasses 42+ only and by incorporation of these patents with
    an existing examiners unofficial digest. Therefore, completeness of search
    cannot be guaranteed as to patents issued before 1973 and not classified as
    original or cross reference in subclasses 42+.


CLS 260/998.14
TXT Product under subclasses 2+ intended for use as a ball, bat, pin or billy
    or as any part thereof.  This subclass included compositions used as e.g.,
    solid golf balls, golf ball covers, bowling pin coating, etc.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass was established in 1973 by examination of
    patents in subclasses 42+ only.  Therefore completeness of search cannot be
    guaranteed as to patents issued before 1973 and not classified as original
    or cross reference in subclasses 42+.


CLS 260/998.15
TXT Product under subclasses 2+ intended to be used in preformed sheet form to
    cover floors or like areas exposed to pedestrian or vehicular traffic and
    compositions used in making the external traffic bearing surfaces of same
    (e.g., roll flooring, plastic tile etc).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass was established in 1973 by examination of
    patents in subclasses 42+ only. Therefore, completeness of search cannot be
    guaranteed as to patents issued before 1973 and not classified as original
    or cross reference in subclasses 42+.


CLS 260/998.16
TXT Products under subclasses 2+ which are intended for use in making records
    of sound or which are used to reproduce sound (e.g., phonograph records,
    etc.) by other than magnetic means.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass was established in 1973 by examination of
    patents in subclasses 42+ only. Therefore, completeness of search cannot be
    guaranteed as to patents issued before 1973 and not classified as original
    or cross reference in subclasses 432+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 62.51+ for compositions which record or
    reproduce sound by magnetic means.


CLS 260/998.17
TXT Product under subclasses 2+ which has a pearlescent or opalescent
    appearance.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass was established in 1973 by examination of
    patents in subclasses 42+ only therefore, completeness of search cannot be
    guaranteed as to patents issued before 1973 and not classified as original
    or cross reference in subclasses 42+.


CLS 260/998.18
TXT Product under subclasses 2+ useful as a mold or in coating a mold.  Many
    patents in this subclass are drawn to sand molds bonded with synthetic
    resin useful in the metal casting art.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass was established in 1973 by examinations of
    patents in subclasses 42+ only and by incorporation of these patents with
    an existing examiners unofficial Sand Mold digest. Therefore, completeness
    of search cannot be guaranteed as to patents issued before 1973 and not
    classified as original or cross reference in subclasses 42+.


CLS 260/998.19
TXT Product under subclasses 2+ which are either used as the surface exposed to
    vehicular traffic and applied to the surface as fluent material or are used
    to mark a surface used for vehicular traffic. The marking materials may be
    either fluent or preformed (e.g., strips, etc).

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass is materials containing
    hydraulic cement or a bituminous substance.  For compositions containing
    these ingredients, see appropriate subclasses in Class 106 or 260.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass was established in 1973 by examination of
    patents in subclasses 42+ only. Therefore completeness of search cannot be
    guaranteed as to patents issued before 1973 and not classified as original
    or cross reference in subclasses 42+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28+,    for synthetic resin containing coating or plastic compositions
    which also contain bitumenous material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 638+ for coating or
    plastic compositions containing hydraulic cement and subclasses 273+ for
    coating or plastic compositions containing bitumen or asphalt.


CLS 260/998.2
TXT Dipeptides, e.g., aspartame, anserine, carnosine, etc.:
    Compounds which are compound formed by the formation of a peptide bond
    between 2 amino acids.

    (1)     Note.  The presence of the term dipeptide is not dispositive
    although it should alert the user to the possibility of classification in
    this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Caution should be observed in search for compounds
    denominated as dipeptides or containing a single peptide bond between an
    amino acid and another moiety or a peptide bond connecting complex
    heterocyclic compounds.  Such compounds should be searched as if this
    subclass did not exist.

    (3)     Note.  Dipeptide.  Compounds denominated dipeptides have been
    placed in Class 260, subclasses 998.2, 998.21 and 998.22 as a search aid.
    The patents in these subclasses have been cross-referenced as if these
    subclasses did not exist.  The majority of the patents are now in Classes
    548, 560, 562, and 564.


CLS 260/998.21
TXT Aspartylphenylalanine esters and cyclohexylalanine esters:
    Subject matter under subclasss 998.2 in which the dipeptide is either a
    aspartylphenylaline ester or a cyclohexylalanine ester.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is intended to collect dipeptide sweetners.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    801,    for peptide or proteins disclosed as providing a sweet taste.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives; Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclass 801 for peptide or proteins
    disclosed as providing a sweet taste.


CLS 260/998.22
TXT Arginine containing:
    Subject matter under subclass 998.2 in which one of the amino acids of the
    dipeptide is arginine.


CLS 261/
TTL GAS AND LIQUID CONTACT  APPARATUS

CLS 261/
TXT Apparatus specially adapted to produce an intimate contact between gases
    and liquids to exchange properties or mutually modify conditions.

    (1)     Note.  This class includes devices generally known as air and gas
    washers, air-moisteners, carbonators, carbureters, jet-condensers, coolers,
    heaters, and the like, operating by direct contact of the two fluids.

    (2)     Note.  Processes for gas separation by contacting a gaseous fluid
    mixture with a liquid and processes of degasifying a liquid by stripping
    with a gas are classified in Class 95, Gas Separation: Processes,
    subclasses 149+ and 241+, respectively, even though gas and liquid contact
    apparatus is also claimed, which apparatus, if claimed alone, would be
    classifiable in Class 261.

    (3)     SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, for aerators permanently
    associated with minnow buckets or in combination with significant minnow
    bucket structure.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 121 for processes specialized to cooling a
    material involving gas-liquid contact, and subclasses 304+ for apparatus
    specialized to cooling a material out of contact with the fluids undergoing
    gas and liquid contact.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes.  See (2) Note above.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, for apparatus used in separation of a
    gas from a fluid mixture comprising (i) a gas and solid or liquid particles
    entrained therein, (ii) a liquid and gas entrained therein, or (iii) a
    plurality of gases.  Class 261 will take apparatus for degasifying liquid
    (e.g., deaerating feed water heater, etc.) wherein the liquid is merely
    contacted with a gas in a chamber or space for deaeration thereof; for
    apparatus wherein a gaseous fluid mixture is contacted with a liquid spray,
    sheet, stream, or bath to precipitate dust or to sorb a constituent from
    the gaseous fluid mixture; for apparatus comprising a nonabsorbent element
    on which a gaseous fluid mixture is contacted with a liquid if the element
    is continuously supplied with a liquid or is continuously moved into and
    out of a liquid bath or supply; and for apparatus comprising an absorbent
    porous sheet or mass on which a gaseous fluid mixture is contacted with a
    liquid if the sheet or mass is:

            (a)     continuously supplied with
       liquid,

            (b)     cyclically or periodically
                                         moved through a liquid
                       reservoir,

            (c)     maintained wet by liquid
                                   applying means, or

            (d)     moistened by maintaining
                                   some part of a continuous
                                   wick type member immersed
                           in liquid, by following the law                  of
    the machine,or during                           normal operation of a
                              gascontacting function.


            Note that under the provisions of (a) and (b) there must be no
    affirmative means to dry the sheet or mass, nor means to assure a dry
    condition of the sheet or mass before gas flow is resumed or the sheet or
    mass is returned to the gas contacting position.


            If apparatus for degasifying liquid by contact with a gas has other
    means to cause gas separation of the liquid with gas entrained therein, of
    the separated gas, or of the separated liquid, then the apparatus is
    classified in Class 96.  If apparatus in which a gaseous fluid mixture is
    contacted with a liquid to precipitate dust or to sorb a constituent from
    the gaseous fluid mixture has other means to cause gas separation or has
    means to treat the contact liquid, then the apparatus is classified in
    Class 96.

    (1)     Note. Apparatus for separating ammonia (NH3) or acid anhydrides
    (CO2, SO2, etc.) from a gas by mere contact with a liquid is classified in
    Class 261.


    110,    Furnaces, for gas and liquid contact apparatus in combination with
    significant furnace structure; particularly subclasses 124, 127 and 128.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclasses 182+ for distilling apparatus
    combined with apparatus for absorbing a gas in a liquid.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 34+ for
    liquid saturated absorbent masses for slowly diffusing the liquid into a
    gas atmosphere, and see the class definition of Class 239, section III (g)
    Slow Diffusers, for a statement of the lines between Classes 55, 239 and
    261.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclass 250 for liquid carrier condensation of
    liquid developer material within an electrophotographic device.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, appropriate
    subclasses for processes of contacting gases with liquids in operations
    that include fermentations or for apparatus for use in such processes.

    (4)     Note.  Processes of desuperheating steam by gas and liquid contact
    are in Class 122, Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 459, 479.1 and
    487 with or without claimed contact apparatus which, per se, is
    classifiable in Class 261.

    (5)     Note.  See Class 222, Dispensing, particularly subclasses 394+, for
    apparatus which, in some cases, is disclosed as gas and liquid contact
    apparatus but claims dispensing structure to the exclusion of any
    arrangement to assist a contact operation.  For a statement of the line,
    see Section 4 of the class definition of Class 222.

    (6)     Note.  See Class 252, (5) Note, under class definitions, for
    superiority list on gas liquid contact processes.


CLS 261/1
TXT Contact apparatus not specifically provided for below.


CLS 261/2
TXT Including means for separating liquids or solids from the contact liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses, for
    means of general utility for separating liquids from solids, particularly
    subclasses 198.1+, for means to add treating material.


CLS 261/3
TXT The liquid-separating means interposed in a circuit between the
    liquid-outlet and the liquid-inlet.


CLS 261/4
TXT The liquid-separating means operating on incoming liquids.


CLS 261/5
TXT The separator on the outlet including a filter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 348+ for filters of
    general utility.


CLS 261/6
TXT The filter having structural relations with the contact apparatus other
    than pipe connections.


CLS 261/7
TXT The separator on the outlet comprising a decanter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 513+ for
    gravitational separators of general utility.


CLS 261/8
TXT The decanter having structural relations with the contact apparatus other
    than pipe connections.


CLS 261/16
TXT Two or more gases utilized differing from each other in some essential
    quality.


CLS 261/17
TXT At least one of the gases comprising products of combustion.


CLS 261/18.1
TXT MULTIPLE DIVERSE LIQUIDS:

    Apparatus under the class definition providing means for handling plural
    different liquids.


CLS 261/18.2
TXT Water added to charge:

    Apparatus under subclass 18.1 having means to add water to a charge.


CLS 261/18.3
TXT Multiple fuels:

    Apparatus under subclass 18.1 providing means for handling plural liquid
    fuels.


CLS 261/18.4
TXT Antidetonant:

    Apparatus under subclass 18.1 having means to add an antidetonant fluid.


CLS 261/19
TXT Gas and liquid contact apparatus comprising special fluid-distributing
    means, such as pumps, valves, pipes and receptacles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, for fluid distribution and handling in general.


CLS 261/20
TXT A plurality of gas and liquid contact apparatuses connected for conjoint
    operation.


CLS 261/21
TXT With connections permitting gases and liquids to pass successively from one
    contact apparatus to another.


CLS 261/22
TXT With connections permitting gases only to pass successively from one
    contact apparatus to another.


CLS 261/23.1
TXT Parallel:

    Apparatus under subclass 22 with connections permitting the fluids to pass
    through contact apparatuses in parallel.


CLS 261/23.2
TXT Carburetors:

    Apparatus under subclass 23.1 adapted to mix fuel and air.


CLS 261/23.3
TXT Stratified charge:

    Apparatus under subclass 23.2 adapted to form both a rich mixture and a
    lean mixture to be supplied to different portions of an engine cylinder.


CLS 261/23.4
TXT Rotary engine:

    Apparatus under subclass 23.2 adapted to supply fuel to different portions
    of a rotary engine cylinder.


CLS 261/24
TXT Including use of pumps.


CLS 261/25
TXT With gas-pumps operated by energy derived from the contact liquids.


CLS 261/26
TXT Operation of pumps automatically controlled.


CLS 261/27
TXT Pump on the liquid-inlet.


CLS 261/28
TXT Including pumps for both liquids and gases.


CLS 261/29
TXT Including a circuit between the liquid outlet and inlet.


CLS 261/30
TXT Utilizing a pump on the gas-inlet only.


CLS 261/31
TXT Specially adapted for churning.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 164.1+ for an agitator in which air may be
    drawn in by a suction produced by a stirrer.


CLS 261/32
TXT Including a rotary dasher.


CLS 261/33
TXT Including a reciprocating dasher.


CLS 261/34.1
TXT LIQUID:

    Apparatus under subclass 24 comprising a liquid pump.


CLS 261/34.2
TXT Accelerator pump:

    Apparatus under subclass 34.1 adapted to pump fuel in response to operation
    of accelerator linkage.


CLS 261/34.3
TXT With thermostatic control:

    Apparatus under subclass 34.2 having means to control the quantity of
    liquid pumped dependent on temperature.


CLS 261/35
TXT Pump operated by energy derived from contact-gases.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25.


CLS 261/36.1
TXT In circuit:

    Apparatus under subclasses 34.1+ having a pathway (circuit) between the
    liquid outlet and inlet.


CLS 261/36.2
TXT Carburetor:

    Apparatus under subclass 36.1 wherein a carburetor is provided in the
    circuit.


CLS 261/37
TXT Including a pump on liquid-inlet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27.


CLS 261/38
TXT Including use of valves.


CLS 261/39.1
TXT Thermostatic:

    Apparatus under subclass 19 including thermostatic control of valves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, appropriate
    subclasses, for valve elements.


CLS 261/39.2
TXT With carburetor expansible fluid actuating means:

    Apparatus under subclass 39.1 wherein the thermostatic actuating means
    comprises means (e.g., chamber) filled with an expansible fluid in a
    carburetor.


CLS 261/39.3
TXT With carburetor bimetallic actuating means:

    Apparatus under subclass 39.1 wherein a carburetor thermostatic actuating
    means is bimetallic.


CLS 261/39.4
TXT Carburetor spring linkage with temperature element:

    Apparatus under subclass 39.1 having spring means linkage between the
    thermostatic actuating means and a carburetor valve.


CLS 261/39.5
TXT Without carburetor choke means:

    Apparatus under subclass 39.1 wherein the thermostatic actuating means
    controls a carburetor valve other than, or in addition to, a choke valve on
    the inlet.


CLS 261/39.6
TXT With carburetor electrical heater:

    Apparatus under subclass 39.1 involving a carburetor including electrical
    heating means for supplying heat to the thermostatic actuating means.


CLS 261/40
TXT Adapted for controlling contact apparatus including a plurality of
    liquid-jets.


CLS 261/41.1
TXT Progressive:

    Apparatus under subclass 40 wherein the jets are operated successively.


CLS 261/41.2
TXT With parallel carbureting passages:

    Apparatus under subclass 41.1 with connectors permitting fluids to pass
    through contact apparatuses in parallel passages.


CLS 261/41.3
TXT With control of plural passages:

    Apparatus under subclass 41.2 with control of gas or mixture flow through
    at least two of the carbureting passages (e.g., includes carburetors with
    linkage connecting throttle valves in two or more barrels for progressive
    operation.


CLS 261/41.4
TXT Multiple jet manual control:

    Apparatus under subclass 41.1 with manual control of liquid flow through at
    least one of the jets.


CLS 261/41.5
TXT By pass opening beyond throttle:

    Apparatus under subclass 41.1 wherein flow from at least one liquid jet
    discharges into gas or mixture flow downstream of a gas or mixture throttle
    valve (e.g., includes carburetor idle systems).


CLS 261/42
TXT Comprising a plurality of valves controlling the fluids at different
    points, such as the gas inlet and outlet, the liquid inlet and outlet, gas
    and liquid by-pass, and at the place of contact.

    (1)     Note.  Gas and liquid contact apparatus having a plurality of
    valves at one point are not included.


CLS 261/43
TXT The two or more valves connected for simultaneous operation.


CLS 261/44.1
TXT Contact space:

    Apparatus under subclass 43 including a valve at the place of connected
    with gas by-pass, gas-inlet, gas-outlet, or liquid-inlet valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44.2    through 44.8, for carburetor gas-liquid contact apparatus.


CLS 261/44.2
TXT Contact valve with hollow shaft supplying liquid:

    Apparatus under subclass 44.1 which includes a valve at the place of
    gas-liquid contact having a hollow shaft through which the liquid is
    supplied.


CLS 261/44.3
TXT Transversely reciprocating air or mixture valve:

    Apparatus under subclass 44.1 which includes an air or mixture valve that
    reciprocates transversely to the direction of the air or mixture flow.


CLS 261/44.4
TXT Suction operated:

    Apparatus under subclass 44.3 wherein the air or mixture valve is moved by
    suction usually engine, e.g., variable venturi type carburetor.


CLS 261/44.5
TXT Longitudinally movable air or mixture valve:

    Apparatus under subclass 44.1 having an air or mixture valve that moves in
    a direction substantially parallel to the direction of mixture or air flow.


CLS 261/44.6
TXT Rotating air or mixture valve:

    Apparatus under subclass 44.1 having air or mixture valve movable in a
    rotatable motion.


CLS 261/44.7
TXT Apparatus under subclass 44.6 wherein the air or mixture valve is pivoted
    off-center.


CLS 261/44.8
TXT Cylinder or plug-valve type:

    Apparatus under subclass 44.6 wherein the air or mixture valve is either of
    the plug valve type or forms part of a cylinder.


CLS 261/44.9
TXT Variable-shape passage:

    Apparatus under subclass 44.1 having means capable of changing the shape of
    the air intake conduit.


CLS 261/45
TXT Including a gas by-pass valve connected with gas-inlet, gas-outlet, or
    liquid-inlet valve.


CLS 261/46
TXT Including a gas by-pass connected with gas-inlet valve.


CLS 261/47
TXT Including a gas by-pass connected with gas-outlet valve.


CLS 261/48
TXT Including a gas by-pass connected with liquid-inlet valve.


CLS 261/49
TXT Including a liquid-inlet valve connected with gas-inlet or gas-outlet valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48.


CLS 261/50.1
TXT With gas inlet:
    Apparatus under subclass 49 with gas inlet valve means connected with the
    liquid inlet valve.


CLS 261/50.2
TXT Suction operated gas inlet valve:
    Apparatus under subclass 50.1 wherein the gas inlet valve is suction
    operated.


CLS 261/50.3
TXT Noncarburetor:
    Apparatus under subclass 50.1 not disclosed for mixing fuel and air.


CLS 261/51
TXT Including a liquid-inlet connected with gas-outlet valve.


CLS 261/52
TXT Including gas inlet and outlet valves.


CLS 261/53
TXT Including a valve at the place of contact with gas by-pass, gas-inlet,
    gas-outlet, or liquid-inlet valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44.1.


CLS 261/54
TXT Including a gas by-pass valve with gas-inlet, gas-outlet, or liquid-inlet
    valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45.


CLS 261/55
TXT Including a gas by-pass and gas-inlet valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46.


CLS 261/56
TXT Including a gas by-pass and gas-outlet valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47.


CLS 261/57
TXT Including a gas by-pass and liquid-inlet valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48.


CLS 261/58
TXT Including a liquid-inlet valve and gas inlet or outlet valves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49      and 57.


CLS 261/59
TXT Including a liquid-inlet and gas-inlet valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50.


CLS 261/60
TXT Including a liquid-inlet and gas-outlet valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51.


CLS 261/61
TXT Including gas inlet and outlet valves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52.


CLS 261/62
TXT Including a valve at the place of contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44.1    and 53.


CLS 261/63
TXT Including a gas by-pass valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     46, 47,48, 54, 55, 56, and 57.


CLS 261/64.1
TXT Gas inlet:
    Apparatus under subclass 38 including an inlet valve for gas.


CLS 261/64.2
TXT Anterior throttle:
    Apparatus under subclass 64.1 wherein the gas inlet valve is an anterior
    throttle.


CLS 261/64.3
TXT Pressure control:
    Apparatus under subclass 64.1 wherein the gas inlet valve is controlled by
    pressure responsive means.


CLS 261/64.4
TXT Suction operated:
    Apparatus under subclass 64.1 wherein the inlet valve is operated by
    suction means.


CLS 261/64.5
TXT Float control:
    Apparatus under subclass 64.1 wherein the gas inlet valve is controlled by
    float means.


CLS 261/64.6
TXT Starting choke:
    Apparatus under subclass 64.1 wherein the gas inlet valve comprised choke
    means for starting.


CLS 261/65
TXT Including a gas-outlet valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     51, 52, 56, 60, and 61.


CLS 261/66
TXT Including a liquid-inlet valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     49, 50,51, 53, 57, 58, 59, and 60.


CLS 261/67
TXT Including a plurality of valves on the liquid-inlet.


CLS 261/68
TXT Including both float and manually controlled valves.


CLS 261/69.1
TXT Gas pressure controlled:
    Apparatus under subclass 66 which is regulated by pressure of the contact
    gas.


CLS 261/69.2
TXT Wet diaphragm:
    Apparatus under subclass 69.1 wherein a diaphragm motor is utilized having
    liquid contacting one side of the diaphragm.


CLS 261/70
TXT Valve controlled by variations in liquid-level by means of a float.


CLS 261/71
TXT Valve manually operated.


CLS 261/72.1
TXT Liquid supply tank:

    Device under subclass 19 having a tank for holding a supply of liquid.


CLS 261/72.2
TXT Aviation carburetor:

    Device under subclass 72.1 wherein the tank comprises a fuel bowl of a
    carburetor supply fuel to an airplane engine.


CLS 261/73
TXT Liquid-flow controlled by gas pressures.


CLS 261/74
TXT Receptacles specially adapted for gas and liquid contact apparatus.


CLS 261/75
TXT Devices specially adapted to produce an intimate contact between gases and
    liquids.


CLS 261/76
TXT Including an injector or two fluid concentric jet nozzle for the contact
    fluids, with baffles, screens, or other mingling or agitating devices.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition of Class 239, Fluid Sprinkling,
    Spraying, and Diffusing, sections III (d), (h), for the line between the
    two classes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 338, 340+ and
    398+ for similar concentric jet nozzles for mixing a plurality of fluids
    (one of which may be a gas, the other a liquid) combined with a terminal
    element to spray the mixture.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 151+, for jet pumps.


CLS 261/77
TXT The injector located in a tank through which the contact liquid is
    circulated by the injector.


CLS 261/78.1
TXT Atomizer type:

    Devices under subclass 75 including an atomizer or two-fluid intersecting
    jet nozzle with baffles, screens, or other mingling or agitating devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 338, 340+ and
    398+ for similar intersecting jet nozzles combined with a means to project
    the mixture.  See Class 239 definition, sections III (d), (h) for line
    between the subject matter of the subclasses.


CLS 261/78.2
TXT Noncarburetor:

    Devices under subclass 78.1 which are not carburetors for mixing fuel and
    air.


CLS 261/79.1
TXT Rotating gases:

    Apparatus under subclass 75 wherein gases are rotated or deflected into a
    vortex during contact.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses
    following subclass 461 for whirler structures applicable in gas conduits.


CLS 261/79.2
TXT Noncarburetor:

    Apparatus under subclass 79.1 other than a carburetor for mixing fuel and
    air.


CLS 261/80
TXT Strips of flexible material or endless webs movable in contact with gases
    and liquids.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 97.1+ for
    fluid means to advance material of indeterminate length.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, for more than a nominal supply or
    take-up coil structure (e.g., a support for such a coil, a cooperative
    relationship between a tension or exhaust detector, and reel driving or
    reel stopping means, etc.), subclasses 615.11+ a residual locus for a
    material fluid suspension guide or guard.


CLS 261/81
TXT Contact devices having a to-and-fro movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33.


CLS 261/82
TXT Including a reciprocating piston impelling the gases and liquids into
    contact with baffles, screens or other mingling or agitating devices.


CLS 261/83
TXT Contact devices having a rotary movement. Including rotatable contact
    receptacles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 219+ for movable mixing chambers.


CLS 261/84
TXT Contact devices comprising rotary impellers in a fixed receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32.


CLS 261/85
TXT The impeller-shaft adapted to conduct fluids.


CLS 261/86
TXT The hollow shaft discharging gases from the receptacle, the gases being
    trapped by the impellers.


CLS 261/87
TXT The hollow shaft delivering gases to the receptacle.


CLS 261/88
TXT The hollow shaft delivering liquid to the impellers.


CLS 261/89
TXT Liquid delivered in the form of spray upon the impellers.


CLS 261/90
TXT The impellers rotating on a horizontal axis.


CLS 261/91
TXT The impellers arranged to dip in a body of liquid in the receptacle.


CLS 261/92
TXT The impellers rotating on a horizontal axis.


CLS 261/93
TXT The impellers arranged to agitate a body of liquid into which gases are
    discharged below the surface.


CLS 261/94
TXT Including a stationary porous mass of material (not a sheet) in contact
    with liquids and gases.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 34+ for slow
    diffusers, per se.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 31+, particularly subclass
    31.04.


CLS 261/95
TXT The gases flowing only in contact with the surface of the mass.


CLS 261/96
TXT Including auxiliary devices for directing the flow of gases.


CLS 261/97
TXT Including auxiliary devices for directing the flow of liquids.


CLS 261/98
TXT The liquids sprayed on the porous mass.


CLS 261/99
TXT Liquids fed to porous mass by capillary attraction.


CLS 261/100
TXT Including a stationary sheet of porous material moistened with liquids in
    contact with gases.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 34+ for slow
    diffusers, per se.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 31+, particularly
    subclasses 31.05+.


CLS 261/101
TXT The gas coming only in contact with the sheet surface--i.e., does not
    necessarily pass through the same.


CLS 261/102
TXT Including auxiliary devices for directing the flow of gases.


CLS 261/103
TXT Including auxiliary devices for directing liquids downward to the porous
    sheet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 31.05 and indented subclass
    for liquid downflow porous sheet devices which form a material holding
    chamber and which are associated with significant chamber structure, such
    as shelves, racks, or doors.


CLS 261/104
TXT Liquids fed upward to porous sheets by capillary attraction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 31.05 for capillary upfeed
    porous sheet devices which form a material holding chamber and which are
    associated with significant chamber structure, such as shelves, racks, or
    doors.


CLS 261/105
TXT Including auxiliary devices for directing the flow of gases.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102.


CLS 261/106
TXT Including auxiliary devices for directing liquids downward to the porous
    sheet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    and seethe note thereunder.


CLS 261/107
TXT Liquids fed upward to porous sheets by capillary attraction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104     and see the note thereunder.


CLS 261/108
TXT Including stationary baffles over which the liquids flow in contact with
    gases.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95,     101, 102,103, and 104.


CLS 261/109
TXT Including auxiliary devices for directing the flow of gases.


CLS 261/110
TXT Including auxiliary devices for directing the flow of liquids.


CLS 261/111
TXT Liquids sprayed upon the baffles.


CLS 261/112.1
TXT Film:

    Apparatus under subclass 110 wherein liquids are directed over baffles in a
    thin layer or film.


CLS 261/112.2
TXT Corrugated plates:

    Apparatus under subclass 112.1 having corrugated plates.


CLS 261/113
TXT The baffles perforated to permit flow of liquids from one to another.


CLS 261/114.1
TXT Overflow baffles:
    Apparatus under subclass 108 wherein the baffles allow the liquid to
    overflow from one baffle to another.


CLS 261/114.2
TXT Bubble caps:
    Apparatus under subclass 114.1 utilizing bubble caps.


CLS 261/114.3
TXT Jet plates:
    Apparatus under subclass 114.1 utilizing jet plates (e.g., having inclined
    gas flow passage through through the plates).


CLS 261/114.4
TXT Valve tray:
    Apparatus under subclass 114.1 utilizing trays having gas flow control
    valves.


CLS 261/114.5
TXT Tray construction:
    Apparatus under subclass 114.1 having special tray construction or mounting
    features.


CLS 261/115
TXT Liquids sprayed in a conduit or casing in contact with gases.


CLS 261/116
TXT The spray directed in the same direction as the flow of gases.


CLS 261/117
TXT The spray directed against the flow of gases.


CLS 261/118
TXT The spray directed across the flow of gases.


CLS 261/119.1
TXT Liquid tank:
    Apparatus under subclass 75 having liquid contained in a receptacle.


CLS 261/119.2
TXT Carburetor:
    Apparatus under subclass 119.1 adapted to mix fuel and air.


CLS 261/120
TXT Gases distributed in contact with liquids through a floating distributer.


CLS 261/121.1
TXT Submerged blast:

    Apparatus under subclass 119 having means to discharge gas beneath the
    surface of the liquid.


CLS 261/121.2
TXT Minnow bucket:

    Apparatus under subclass 121.1 adapted to aerate minnows in holding
    container.


CLS 261/121.3
TXT Carburetor vented nozzle:

    Apparatus under subclass 121.1 adapted to supply mixing air to fuel in
    carburetor nozzle, wells, or fuel passages.


CLS 261/121.4
TXT Air inlet valve:

    Apparatus under subclass 121.3 including valve means controlling flow of
    the mixing air.


CLS 261/122.1
TXT Submerged screen:
    Apparatus under subclass 121.1 including a screen through which gases pass
    and wherein the screen is positioned such that all of or a portion of the
    screen is below the surface of the liquid.


CLS 261/122.2
TXT With closable apertures:
    Apparatus under subclass 121.1 wherein the screen has an aperture which
    closes when gas flow stops, so that liquid flow through the aperture is
    prevented or retarded.


CLS 261/123
TXT Including submerged baffles which deflect the liquids.


CLS 261/124
TXT The submerged gas-delivery pipe provided with a plurality of openings.


CLS 261/125
TXT Including a tank containing a plurality of liquid receptacles and means to
    direct gases over the liquid surface.


CLS 261/126
TXT The gases adapted to flow in and out in an upward direction.


CLS 261/127
TXT Subject matter under the definition wherein the contact fluids have heat
    supplied to or removed from them before, after or during contact by a fluid
    or means other than the unreacted contact fluids themselves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclass 107 for apparatus
    preparing heating or illuminating gas from fuel oil involving a chemical
    reaction or for apparatus in which oil is completely vaporized and
    subsequently mixed with air.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 304+ for apparatus specialized to cooling
    a material out of contact with the fluids undergoing gas and liquid contact
    and for gas and liquid contact devices specialized by structure to
    refrigeration.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 60 for a combined heating and cooling
    arrangement having a gas-liquid contact device as an element; and subclass
    110 for heat exchange structure in which gas and liquid are in contact
    having heat  exchange elements additional to those perfecting the gas
    liquid contact operation.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclass 78 for a radiator of a heating system
    with a humidifying means.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, appropriate subclasses for means for generating
    fumes.


CLS 261/128
TXT Processes under subclass 127.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclasses 211+ for processes of
    preparing heating or illuminating gas including heating and mixing oil and
    air.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 91+ for processes in which moisture is
    added to air coiled by a refrigeration producer, and subclass 121 for
    processes of cooling by gas and liquid contact.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, for processes of gas separation
    involving gas and liquid contact.  See (2) Note in the Class 261 class
    definition for an amplification of the line.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 222+ for a heating and cooling process
    with humidity control.


CLS 261/129
TXT Apparatus under subclass 127 including a temperature or humidity sensing
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 226 for an automatically controlled heating
    and cooling device with a gas liquid contractor.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, appropriate
    subclasses, for automatically operating temperature or humidity controlling
    mechanisms of more general utility.


CLS 261/130
TXT Apparatus under subclass 129 wherein the sensor exerts a control on a heat
    supply or removal means.


CLS 261/131
TXT Apparatus under subclass 127 wherein a control is exerted or a heat supply
    or removal means or on a condition directly resulting from the operation of
    such means in response to a means sensing an operating condition or a
    change of operating condition.


CLS 261/133
TXT Apparatus under subclass 127 including structure downstream of a contactor
    by which additional gas is mingled with gaseous material from the contactor.


CLS 261/134
TXT Apparatus under subclass 133 in which the admittance of the additional gas
    is controlled by pressure.


CLS 261/135
TXT Apparatus under subclass 127 provided with an indicating or testing means.


CLS 261/136
TXT Apparatus under subclass 127 comprising a device in addition to a
    gas-liquid contactor and its heating or cooling means having a function
    other than heat exchanging or contacting, or serving to perfect such
    apparatus for its intended primary purpose.


CLS 261/137
TXT Apparatus under subclass 127 wherein there is a means by which a movement
    of a fluid flow controller actuates a heat supply or removal controller or
    vice versa.


CLS 261/138
TXT Apparatus under subclass 127 wherein provision is made for at least two
    different kinds of heat transferences.


CLS 261/139
TXT Apparatus under subclass 138 including an electric heating means.


CLS 261/140.1
TXT Refrigeration producer:
    Apparatus under subclass 127 wherein the heat removal means includes
    apparatus to cause a cooling effect by producing a change in condition of a
    material, e.g., change of phase.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 304+ for a conventional gas-liquid
    contactor combined with specific refrigerant handling means or having
    features peculiar to the manufacture of a congealed product.


CLS 261/140.2
TXT Absorption means:
    Apparatus under subclass 140.1 having structure for providing refrigeration
    utilizing the principle of absorption.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 271 for dehumidification of a gas with
    refrigeration.


CLS 261/141
TXT Apparatus under subclass 127 including a device by which the external heat
    is produced by transformation of energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclass 107 for a heated oil
    retort into which air is injected.


CLS 261/142
TXT Apparatus under subclass 141 wherein the device is an electric heater.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 280+ for electric heaters for fluids.


CLS 261/143
TXT Apparatus under subclass 141 wherein the heat supply device is a combustion
    means connected to receive its fuel from the contactor.


CLS 261/144
TXT Apparatus under subclass 143 wherein the combustion device is an internal
    combustion engine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 434+ for charge forming
    devices designed and adapted only for use in connection with an internal
    combustion engine.


CLS 261/145
TXT Apparatus under subclass 144 wherein the means preparing a gas-liquid
    mixture for burning in the engine is in heat exchanging relationship with
    the manifold that collects the products of combustion from the engine
    cylinders.


CLS 261/146
TXT Apparatus under subclass 127 including two or more spaced interconnected
    zones where gas and liquid are brought into contact.


CLS 261/147
TXT Apparatus under subclass 146 in which one of the distinct contact zones is
    downstream of another.


CLS 261/148
TXT Apparatus under subclass 147 wherein spaced serially connected contact
    zones are arranged so that gas flows through them successively in one
    direction and liquid successively in the other direction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 638 and 641 for a gas separation
    rectification process in which heat is supplied to or removed from the
    intermediate sections of the column.


CLS 261/149
TXT Apparatus under subclass 147 wherein there is a heat exchanger in the flow
    path spaced from the contact devices.


CLS 261/150
TXT Apparatus under subclass 127 wherein liquid is fed into gas through
    converging paths one of which includes a heat exchanger.


CLS 261/151
TXT Apparatus under subclass 127 wherein a heat exchanger is located within a
    recirculatory circuit of one of the contact fluids.


CLS 261/152
TXT Apparatus under subclass 127 including a heat exchanger means by which the
    contact fluids are heated or cooled during or after contact.


CLS 261/153
TXT Apparatus under subclass 152 including means exposing a mass or sheet of
    liquid to gas and to a heat exchanger.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    237,    Heating Systems, subclass 78 for radiators combined with means for
    moistening the air.


CLS 261/154
TXT Apparatus under subclass 152 including a porous body holding liquid by
    capillary action exposed to gas and to heat exchange.


CLS 261/155
TXT Apparatus under subclass 152 wherein a passage of the heat exchanger
    forming a flow path for external fluid is within a chamber forming a part
    of the contact fluid flow path.


CLS 261/156
TXT Apparatus under subclass 152 wherein the contact fluid passage of the heat
    exchanger has flow directing structure such as fins or deflectors.


CLS 261/157
TXT Apparatus under subclass 152 combined with a heat exchanger upstream of the
    contactor.


CLS 261/158
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein heat is interchanged
    between contact fluids out of contact before, after or during contact.


CLS 261/159
TXT Subject matter under subclass 158 in which one of the contact fluids
    exchanges heat prior to contact.


CLS 261/160
TXT Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein the exchange is between a contact
    zone feed fluid and a fluid in or flowing from such zone.


CLS 261/161
TXT Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein the feed fluid is a gas.


CLS 264/
TTL PLASTIC AND NONMETALLIC  ARTICLE  SHAPING OR  TREATING:  PROCESSES

CLS 264/
TXT INDEX



    I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    A.      This is the generic class for:

    1)      Processes for molding, casting or shaping of nonmetallic materials
    to produce articles.

    2)      Liquid or melt comminuting of materials other than glass or metal.

    3)      Uniting or compacting of bulk or randomly assembled particles.

    4)      Furnace lining or repair.

    5)      Melt shaping in the absence of a mold or shaping surface, e.g.,
    spheroidizing of particles.

    6)      Working or treatment of nonmetallic materials not otherwise
    provided for.


    II.     GENERAL LINES WITH OTHER CLASSES

    A.      Chemical composition classes

    B.      Mold charging or filling

    C.      Glass Manufacturing

    D.      Adhesive bonding

    E.      Metal working or shaping

    F.      Coating

    G.      Articles

    H.      Treatment of shaped articles

    I.      List of classes providing for molding of specific articles or
    materials, miscellaneous Search Notes and Index to classes referred to above

    J.      Hazardous or Toxic Waste Containment.

    III.    GLOSSARY

    BATT

    A term of art for a web or sheet of material generally formed by random
    interfelting of mass deposited discrete fibers or from tangled or matted
    filaments, e.g., cotton batting.

    BENDING

    Distorting or deforming of a workpiece or self sustaining body by curving
    or moving a portion thereof through its entire thickness relative to
    another portion during which the thickness thereof remains substantially
    the same and no significant plastic flow occurs.

    CASTING

    A process of molding or forming wherein impressions are made with fluent or
    molten materials as by pouring into a mold with hardening or setting of
    said material in said mold.

    EXTRUDANT

    A shaped body of material formed by forcing a supply of said material
    through a confining orifice whereby the cross-sectional area of the
    extruded portion corresponds to the dimensions of the orifice.

    FIBER

    A discrete particle, generally bulk or mass handled because of its small
    size, wherein the particle has a length considerably greater than its
    breadth or cross-sectional diameter.

    INDEFINITE LENGTH WORK

    A self sustaining body, which because of its relatively large length is
    handled at a point intermediate of its ends, and includes single or one
    piece bodies formed in a continuous manner.

    PREFORM

    An article or stock material or bland which is self sustaining and which
    may be subjected to a shaping or reshaping operation.

    RESHAPING

    A process in which a self sustaining body or a preform is subjected to a
    deforming, e.g., by plastic flow, bending, stretching, twisting,
    corrugating, so as to alter its overall shape.

    SPINNING

    A molding operation for forming of continuous or indefinite length
    articles, generally filaments, by extrusion through an appropriately sized
    orifice.  Some types of spinning are spinning into a reactive bath, melt
    spinning, evaporative spinning or solvent-extractive spinning.

    TREATMENT

    A physical, chemical or mechanical step applied to molding material or an
    article or preform, (see conditioning).

    I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    A.      This is a generic class for:



    1)      Processes for molding, casting or the plastic shaping, not provided
    for in any other class, of miscellaneous nonmetallic materials to make or
    reproduce articles of a definite shape, or the shaping and embossing of
    sheets of miscellaneous nonmetallic materials, not otherwise provided for.


    The common property of plasticity renders molding operations of chief
    importance in this class.

    Where there exists an art class that can properly include all operations
    preliminary to a broad molding step, such operations, unless otherwise
    specified will be classified in such class.  Where significant molding
    steps are combined with any other operations, the patents claiming such
    combinations, unless otherwise provided for will be included in this class
    and cross-referenced into the other class or classes involved.  Note the
    lines between this class and other classes as set out below.

    Where there is no class which could include such operations, the entire
    preparation of the material is included in this class, but only those are
    included in which the preliminary operations are performed for the purpose
    of preparing the material for molding.  See the search notes below and the
    references to other classes for the shaping of specific materials, e.g.,
    paper, sugar, tobacco, etc.

    This class will take processes under the class definition, and where not
    otherwise specifically provided for, in which normally liquid materials are
    encapsulated.  In general, this class will provide for processes in which
    the covering, encompassing or encasing material is formed or shaped from
    material in a fluent state.

    2)      This is the generic class for processes, not elsewhere provided
    for, for shaping of material by a comminution or distintegration thereof
    from a molten or liquid state, wherein the cohesive nature of the material,
    per se, especially in the comminuted state during solidification thereof
    influences the shape or configuration of the discrete particles or elements
    formed.  See subclass 5 and the notes thereto for the lines with other
    classes.  For liquid comminution of glass or other vitreous materials, see
    Class 65, Glass Manufacturing, appropriate subclasses.  For Comminution of
    liquid metal see Class 75, Specialized Metallurgical Processes,
    Compositions for Use Therein, Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and
    Loose Metal Particulate Mixtures, subclasses 331+.

    3)      The uniting of bulk assembled particulate material either
    autogenously (see specific references to glass particles and metal
    particles below) or with added binder or adhesive in a mold or on a shaping
    surface are included herein, except those processes in which the mold
    constitutes nothing more than a depository and the particulate material
    charge is not disclosed to be shaped by said mold or depository prior to
    heating but changes its bulk shape only on fusion or melting to assume the
    configuration of said depository.  See the lines with Classes 141 and 222
    as set out in II B, with regard to mold filling or charging.

    This class has been made the generic home for methods of compacting and
    briquetting bulk deposited or handled powdered or particulate matter
    usually predicated on the production of an interfacial bond between the
    individual particles.  However, Class 23, Chemistry: Analytical and
    Physical Processes, subclasses 313+ takes agglomerating from finely divided
    solid nonmetallic, inorganic elements, e.g., carbon, wherein no binder, per
    se, is employed and Class 100, Presses, subclasses 35+ takes compacting by
    mechanical interlock such as results from a baling operation.  Class 201,
    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclasses 5+ take mechanical
    forming of a distilland combined with a thermolytic distilling operation.

    This class will accommodate such subject matter only where the resulting
    compact tends to hold its shape as the result of an interfacial bond
    between adjacent particles of the mass.  Since powder, granules and dust
    are not characterized by projecting portions which could facilitate a
    bonding by mechanical interlock, a disclosure or claim restricted to such
    types of particulate material is regarded as evidence that the product is
    rendered self-sustaining by interfacial bonding.

    With regard to metallic particles, see the notes to subclass 111 of this
    class for the line with Classes 29, 148, 266, and 419.

    With regard to glass particle uniting, in particular, a patent reciting
    placing of glass particles other than glass fibers or mineral wool in their
    final position in a mold, followed by autogenous uniting or sintering or
    fusion in the configuration or shape imparted by said mold, will be
    classified in this class (264) whether or not said particles are disclosed
    to maintain their individual identities to any degree.  See Class 65, Glass
    Manufacturing, for processes including a glass working step as therein
    defined, and class definitions III B of Class 65 for the line where glass
    fibers or mineral wool are placed onto a mold surface which fibers or
    mineral wool particles are heated on or subsequent to contact with the
    surface to fuse the particles with each other.

    4)      This class will be considered generic to processes for furnace
    lining formation or repair.  For the specific lines between classes, see
    the notes and search notes to this class (264), subclass 30.

    5)      This class will take shaping of molten materials  where no mold or
    molding surface, per se, is employed, e. g., spheroidizing or rounding of
    particles, see this class, subclass 15 and the notes thereto.

    6)      This class will take treatment of nonmetallic materials not
    otherwise provided for, see the notes to II H, below, and the notes to
    subclasses 232+, 340+ and 349 of this class (264).  Patents disclosing
    working, mulling or kneading, per se, of plastic materials will go to this
    class except where specific materials are recited, see particularly the
    notes to subclass 349 of this class.

    II.     GENERAL LINES WITH OTHER CLASSES

    Unless otherwise provided for, the recitation in a claim of a significant
    molding step will bring a patent to this class.  Significant molding
    operations include named injection molding, centrifugal casting, slush
    casting, casting of fluids on a forming surface to form a sheet or web,
    "spinning" into a specifically named bath as set out below, evaporative or
    solvent extractive "spinning" and combinations of two or more broad molding
    or shaping steps and other combinations as set out herein.

    Such terms as "molding", "casting" (used generically) "extruding",
    "sheeting" and "forming" are considered to be merely broad or nominal
    operations for purposes of this class.

    The intent must also be considered.  If, for example, "extruding" is for
    discharging material from a chamber in chunks or gobs rather than for
    shaping, this is not enough for this class.

    The production of "shapes" merely suitable for handling or bulk shipping,
    e.g., "sheets" or "sheeting" of no particular structure will not be
    considered significant molding in a, per se, operation. Also, where
    articles identified by name only are produced, a process will not be
    considered significant for this class unless there are included limitations
    and/or modifications unique to molding or shaping said named article.

    This class will take combinations of broad molding plus preliminary
    physical or mechanical treatment wherein said treatment is disclosed to
    perfect the molding.

    Patents reciting physical or mechanical treatment subsequent to a broad
    molding step, e.g., extruding or "spinning" plus stretching, casting with
    removal of solvent from the cast liquid and heating subsequent to removal
    of a molded article from the mold to complete cure or to vulcanize, will be
    placed in this class. Nominal return to ambient temperature is not
    considered to be an after treatment or a subsequent treatment within the
    scope outlined here.

    A process including a Class 264 molding step, combined with a separate
    assembly step, which assembly, if claimed, per se, would be proper for
    Class 29, is classified in Class 29.

    Processes of forming single-crystals combined with simultaneous shaping are
    provided for in Class 117, except for the molding of non-semiconductor
    metal materials which are found in Class 164, subclasses 122.1+, also see
    Class 117 definitions.

    A.      LINES WITH THE CHEMICAL COMPOSITION CLASSES



    (As employed in this section, the term "composition" is intended to include
    both mixtures of ingredients and compounds, per se, e.g., Classes 106, 208,
    252, 423, 424, 520, 585, etc.)

    1)      Patents limited to process claims reciting a broad or nominal
    molding step only.



    a)      Where a composition, per se, is molded and there is no disclosure
    as to a chemical reaction being present, the patent will go to this class
    (264).

    b)      Where a chemical reaction, mixing or blending of ingredients to
    form a composition of matter is recited to take place in a mold or during
    the molding or shaping step, the patent will go to the composition class,
    even if temperature and pressure conditions are set out.

    c)      Similarly, where a chemical reaction, mixing or blending of
    ingredients to form a composition is recited to take place prior to the
    nominal shaping or molding step, the patent will go to the composition
    class.

    2)      Patents containing both composition claims and process claims
    reciting nominal molding only.

    a)      Patents containing both claims to a composition and also claims
    reciting broad or nominal molding of said composition will go with the
    composition class.

    b)      Patents containing both claims to a composition and claims reciting
    broad or nominal molding of said composition wherein there is a chemical
    reaction, blending or mixing of ingredients of said composition during or
    prior to the molding step, will go to the composition class, even if
    temperature or pressure conditions are set out.

    c)      Where patents contain both claims to a composition and claims
    reciting a nominal or broad molding of said composition, per se, and there
    is no disclosure of any chemical reaction taking place, and specific
    temperature and/or pressure conditions are set out, the patent will go to
    this class (264).

    3)      When there is doubt that a chemical reaction, mixing or blending of
    ingredients takes place, the burden of proof shall rest with this class.

    4)      When there is a significant molding step in a claim reciting a
    process for preparation of a composition even where a chemical reaction is
    set out, the patent will go to this class (264).

    5)      This class will take patents reciting the "spinning", e.g., the
    extruding of a settable material through a shaping orifice into a
    coagulating bath provided said bath is named or described or at least one
    ingredient of said bath is set out. Patents claiming only a specific
    setting bath composition will be classified herein in an appropriate
    subclass according to the disclosed utility thereof, provided the only
    disclosed utility for said setting bath composition is for such a purpose.
    See the notes and search notes to this class (264), subclass 78 with regard
    to incorporation of a dyeing agent or color producing reactant in the
    setting bath.

    The recitation of "acidic" bath, per se, will not be considered sufficient
    but setting out of a particular pH or pH range of said "acidic" bath will
    be deemed significant for this purpose.

    6)      Where a claim recites treatment, per se, of articles which involves
    a chemical reaction, e.g., vulcanization or polymerization to final cure,
    and also includes a particular manipulative or handling step or specific
    shape retaining or supporting step, the patent will be placed in this
    class; see subclasses 236 and 347 of this class (264) in particular.

    7)      Where the treatment, per se, of compositions is a working, kneading
    or mulling, see the line set out in this class (264) subclass 349.

    8)      The process of preparing a ceramic or concrete block which includes
    mixing ingredients, shaping broadly and removal from molds of the shaped
    bodies followed by firing to fuse or sinter the composition or treatment
    with steam will go with the appropriate composition, e.g., Class 106, even
    though a particular temperature or pressure nominally applied is recited.
    However, the recitation of particular molding conditions or conditions of
    firing other than temperature or pressure such as, for example, use of an
    inert atmosphere, would place such process in this class (264).  Firing a
    preform in a controlled atmosphere is appropriate subject matter for this
    class (264).

    Class 106, Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 39+ takes ceramic
    compositions, per se, and processes for preparation thereof including
    firing at specific termperatures for specific time periods.  However, this
    class (264) takes processes of firing a preform under certain conditions,
    see the line as set out in the notes and search notes to subclasses 603+ of
    this class (264).

    9)      See Class 252, Compositions, subclasses 62.51+ and notes thereto
    for magnetic compositions and methods for preparation thereof which do not
    include a significant molding step.

    10)     The line between Class 423, Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds,
    subclasses 445+ and this class for processes including both molding and
    carbonizing is as follows: (a) where significant molding occurs prior to a
    step or steps of carbonizing which make carbon as provided for in Class
    423, the process is placed in Class 423, subclasses 445+ unless the process
    is recited to produce an article of sufficient structure to be classified
    in a class providing for the structurally defined article (e.g., 428, etc.)
    in which latter case the process is placed in this class (e.g., molding a
    fiber with enlarged portions on the ends); and (b) where the molding takes
    place after carbonizing the line as set forth above in (1) to (6) will
    apply.


    B.      MOLD CHARGING OR FILLING



    In general, the combination of a mold filling step plus a significant
    molding step will bring a patent to this class.  However, the mere
    recitation of filling, per se, of a container or a mold with an
    incidentally hardenable or settable fluent material will not be sufficient
    to bring a patent into this class, unless the container or mold is set out
    to have a particular shape or configuration so as to impart said shape or
    configuration to the enclosed material, particularly when said container or
    mold is subsequently removed or stripped from the enclosed material.  See
    the definitions and search notes of Class 141, Fluent Material Handling,
    With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means, particularly in the Class
    Definition, section III, (3) and Class 222, Dispensing, sections 8 and 14.

    C.      GLASS MANUFACTURING



    Other than bonding of glass particulate material under conditions as set
    out above in the definitions on particle uniting, any working of glass type
    materials in the plastic state including liquid comminuting thereof, pore
    forming, reshaping, autogenous bonding of glass particles, etc., will be
    classifiable in Class 65, Glass Manufacturing, and reference is made to the
    definitions of Class 65 for the line between this class and Class 65.

    In general, the following will apply:

    A patent disclosing working or treating of named materials for both this
    class and Class 65 will be classified in this class unless the only claimed
    species is glass or the only specific example relates to glass in which
    case the patent will go to Class 65.  A patent claiming a combined process
    for this class and Class 65 will be classified in Class 65.

    Class 65 will take formation of filaments and fibers from molten vitreous
    materials, e.g., glass. However, this class (264) will take processes
    directed to formation of filaments from siliceous materials in solution,
    e.g., silicates by precipitation from said solution or evaporation of
    solvent therefrom.

    D.      ADHESIVE BONDING



    Class 156, Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, is the
    residual home for uniting preforms. This class (264) provides for uniting
    plural preforms under at least one of the following circumstances:

    1)      At least one of the preforms is reduced to a fluent state in a mold
    or confined molding space.

    2)      Joining preforms and simultaneously reshaping the joint by plastic
    flow.

    3)      Preforms are united by bonding material in which:

    a)      the preforms are spaced apart and fluent bonding material is
    thereafter introduced between them, or

    b)      fluent bonding material is shaped or retained between spaced
    preforms by a mold element, or

    c)      fluent bonding material is shaped and retained between preforms by
    a preform and has means to maintain a predetermined space between the
    preforms or

    d)      the preforms are of porous material, e.g., batts, mats or woven
    fabric united in a mold and fluent bonding material is used in quantity
    sufficient to fill the mold cavity and interstices of the porous material.

    4)      This class (264) provides for uniting running length preforms
    united in a die under the limitations of A, B, and C above except that if
    running length strands or webs are bonded and sheathed in a die by a
    coating operation, i.e., the bonding material is applied at hydrostatic
    pressure, the method is provided for in Class 156, Adhesive Bonding and
    Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture.

    5)      Class 156, Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    provides for:

    a)      uniting preforms where one preforms is forced into another preform,
    as long as both preforms are unaltered in shape other than that which
    results from displacement of material due to the insertion of the preform.

    b)      stretching or drawing a self sustaining sheet into contact with a
    preform body and uniting the contacting surfaces.

    c)      all tire building processes which include a step of "building" or
    bringing preformed tire components into assembled relationship.



    E.      METAL WORKING OR SHAPING



    The general line between this class and the metal working or shaping
    classes will be as follows;

    1)      Where the claims recite deformation of materials broadly, the
    disclosure setting out both metals and nonmetals, the patent will go to the
    appropriate metal working class.

    2)      Where the claims are limited to deformation of metals only, the
    patent will go to the appropriate metal working class.

    3)      Where the claims are limited to deformation or shaping of nonmetals
    only within the class definition, the patent will go to this class (264).

    4)      Where there is a claim drawn to a metal and an equally
    comprehensive and mutually exclusive claim drawn to a nonmetal only, the
    patent will go to the appropriate metal working class.

    5)      Where deformation of both a metal and a nonmetal are included in
    the same claim, the patent will go to the appropriate metal working class,
    e.g., Class 29, Metal Working, depending on the claim as set out, with
    plural diverse operations generally going to Class 29.

    6)      Where the claim is broad or nondefinitive as to material, the
    patent will go to the appropriate metal working class, as stated above, and
    this will include disclosures of deforming:

    (A)     A laminate of a metal with a nonmetal

    (B)     A "composite material" such as a metal - nonmetal article or
    workpiece except where by disclosure only the nonmetal component is
    deformed or shaped.

    7)      Where a process as set out above and not otherwise coming to this
    class is concerned and which involves plural diverse operations, the patent
    will go to Class 29 or a successor class except where subordinate classes
    could provide for certain diverse operations.

    8)      Where a patent recites casting or shaping of metal mold together
    with the use of said mold in shaping materials, e.g., synthetic resins, the
    combination will be considered classifiable in this class (264).


    F.      COATING




    1)      Coating, per se,  Processes of coating, per se, are classified in
    Class 427, Coating Processes, if not more specifically provided for
    elsewhere.  Two species of coating, per se, are provided for in this class
    (264).  (1) Furnace lining formation or repair by a coating process is
    provided for in Class 264, subclass 30.  (2) The formation of pipe coating
    by troweling is provided for in Class 264, appropriate subclasses.

    2)      Coating and Shaping Distinguished  Processes of coating, per se,
    may be distinguished from processes of shaping, per se, by application of
    the following guides:

    a)      The claimed process of applying a fluent material to a
    self-sustaining body supported by a disclosure that upon setting of the
    fluent material the self-sustaining body is to be separated (e.g.,
    stripped) therefrom to form from said fluent material an article intended
    for subsequent use, is considered shaping and not coating. In the absence
    of any clear disclosure of separating the process constitutes coating, per
    se.  A claimed process directed to contacting a base with a fluent material
    but supported by a disclosure of both stripping and nonstripping is
    originally classified as directed to a process of coating, per se, and is
    cross-referenced to this class (264).  Contacting a base with a fluent
    material combined with the claimed step of stripping is a shaping process.

    b)      The process of applying a fluent material to a self-sustaining base
    in which the extent of lateral displacement of the fluent material is
    determined by a dam or retaining wall is considered shaping and not
    coating.  The retaining wall may either unite with the fluent material to
    form acomposite article or may be independent of the article formed.  The
    application of fluent material to a base uniting therewith to form a
    layered article which base is of such configuration that it could serve as
    a retaining wall but does not actually so function, is considered a process
    of coating and not shaping.

    c)      The line with regard to shaping a layer of material about an
    indefinite length preform as it advances through a shaping orifice is as
    follows:  Class 264 provides for advancing a preform through an orifice and
    simultaneously and positively forcing shaping material through said orifice
    so as to shape the material around the preform as it issues from the
    orifice.  Class 427 provides for drawing a preform through a coating
    material and then through a shaping orifice to shape the coating material
    adhering to the preform.

    d)      Where a patent contains a claim for a process, of Class 264 and an
    equally comprehensive claim of Class 427 the patent shall be assigned to
    Class 427 and cross referenced to Class 264.

    3)      Coating and Shaping Combined.

    a)      Processes including shaping or molding followed by a significant
    coating procedure where the mere fact of molding or shaping a body is
    claimed are construed as processes of coating previously shaped bodies and
    are classified as processes of coating, per se.

    b)      Processes of forming pipe coatings combined with troweling are
    included in this class (264).

    c)      See this class (264), subclass 129, Note (1), for a discussion of
    shaping and coating combinations not included in a) or b).

    4)      Coating and Firing Combined  Processes including the combination of
    firing and coating, regardless of the sequence of the respective steps, are
    classified in Class 427.




    G.      ARTICLES



    This class does not take patents having article claims.  Specific articles
    are classified with the respective arts to which they apply.  Articles of
    specific configuration or structure produced by methods of this class, of
    plastic materials within the class definition, and of no particular art
    used or form which would be otherwise classified, e.g., stock materials,
    are provided for in Class 428 Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles.
    Articles of no significant structure, identifiable otherwise by the
    chemical structure, identifiable otherwise by the chemical structure or
    composition thereof, per se, are classifiable with the compound or
    composition.  Composite articles produced by the methods of this class may
    be analogous in structure to those produced by coating or laminating
    procedures and Class 428, Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, is
    pertinent thereto.

    H.      TREATMENT OF SHAPED ARTICLES



    This class will take miscellaneous treatments, per se, of shaped
    nonmetallic articles unless said treatment is otherwise provided for in a
    proper functional art class.  See this class subclass 340 and the notes and
    search notes thereto and to the indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, note II, General Lines With Other
    Classes, Area B. Chemical Manufactures, Part A, paragraph 2 for detailed
    line between this Class 264 and Class 216, Etching a Substrate:  Processes.




    I.      FOR PROCESSES OF MOLDING OR SHAPING OTHER SPECIFIC ARTICLES OR
    MATERIALS IN CLASSES NOT SET OUT ABOVE, MISCELLANEOUS SEARCH NOTES, AND
    INDEX TO CLASSES REFERRED TO ABOVE:




    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, for the making of shoes from preformed sheets
    or blanks and processes of making shoes involving one or more of the
    following operations recited broadly; molding, casting, vulcanizing.

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses 144+ as the generic home
    for bringing fibers together either with relation to each other or with
    some other material.

    23,     Chemistry:  Analytical and Physical Processes, IA3

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclasses 71+ for apparatus for
    stretching a running web of natural or synthetic cloth.

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclasses 118+ and 121 for making
    tampons or wads of compacted material.

    29,     Metal Working, 1A3, IIE5.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, for processes of
    drying of organic and inorganic plastic materials, per se.  Generally the
    combination of forming by a Class 264 operation and drying is classified in
    Class 264 except where a filament is formed by a spinning operation which
    is not significantly claimed and the product dried in a significantly
    claimed manner, which operation is provided for in Class 34.

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclasses 550+ for a solid fuel
    consolidation or shaping process which goes beyond mere molding of a
    starting composition, especially subclasses 596+ for a process which
    includes pressing using a specified condition or technique.

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, for a
    process of forming an abrasive tool.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), for various molding processes
    there provided for and see the notes to subclass 31 of Class 264 for the
    line between these classes.

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 452+ for processes of shaping preformed
    material to form a receptacle and subsequently filling.  This class (264)
    provides for processes wherein a cover material, i.e., primary encompassing
    or encasing material, is shaped from a material in a fluent or nonpreformed
    plastic state preliminarily to or simultaneously with a packaging
    operation; where a laminating step, e.g., cut seaming, is included in any
    stage of this indicated procedure, the process is provided for in Class
    156, Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture.  The
    formation of cover adjuncts, as defined in that class (53), by a molding
    operation is provided for Class 53, subclasses 410+ (in particular, see
    subclass 423).

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclass 362 for
    twining and twisting of filaments and fibers, per se.  See this class
    (264), subclass 103.

    62,     Refrigeration, for processes involving solidifying a fluid by
    cooling and molding which are peculiar to forming an ice (H2O or CO2)
    product and utilizing a liquid as the raw material. See this class,
    subclass 604 for other molding processes including a step of cooling the
    molded material to below 0oC.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, IA2, 2, IIC.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, for processes of embossing and shaping
    leather.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, IA2.

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclasses 101.1+ for processes
    which may include a plastic working step.

    79,     Button Making, for processes there provided for which may include a
    plastic molding step.

    83,     Cutting, for processes of, per se, cutting, severing, or incising.
    Cutting of a material with reshaping flow of the material is provided for
    in this class (264); although a disclosure of an inherent flow of material
    in the act of cutting, is not considered sufficient shaping for inclusion
    in this class. See the notes to Class 83, I(B), 1 and 2.

            Cutting of green ceramic, earthenware, or cemetitious preformed
    material, with or without reshaping the material, is provided for in this
    class (264).

    100,    Presses, subclasses 35+ for processes for compressing various
    materials there provided for to form compacts of smaller volume.  The
    shaping of materials to produce articles by molecular flow is generically
    in this class (264) where the materials are nonmetallic.  Class 100 takes
    compacting by mechanical interlock. Also see IA3.

    101,    Printing, subclasses 17 and 32 for processes for producing
    characters or designs by means of printing dies adapted to deform the
    material.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, IIA, IIA8.

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, subclass 59 for processes
    directed to be crystallization of sugar in molds.

    131,    Tobacco, appropriate subclasses, for shaping tobacco products and
    see especially subclasses 77+ for processes for molding or otherwise
    forming tobacco in the manufacture of cigarettes and cigars.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    IIB.

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 358 for processes for impressing, indenting
    or raising-in-relief for ornamentation of wood materials, and subclasses
    349 and 381 for processes for bending wood.

    148,    Metal Treatment, IA3.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, IID.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, for processes of forming an
    interfelted fibrous product by deposition from a liquid suspension and also
    processes of fiber liberation.  Shaping or reshaping of a fibrous water
    laid product which is still wet from the forming operation is provided for
    in Class 162, while rewetting a dried product before reshaping or shaping
    dry to form a noncommercial product is in Class 264. Processes wherein
    destruction of the product of a Class 162 forming operations are found in
    Class 264.

            Chemically liberating, purifying or recovering fibers followed by a
    Class 264 shaping operation is found in Class 264.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 6 for processes of making mold, generally
    of sand, to be used in a metal casting operation and subclasses 47+ for
    metal casting operation.  Class 164, subclasses 91+ provide for processes
    of casting metal around a nonmetallic body.  That class (164) also provides
    fo a Class 264 operation followed by a Class 164 step.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 285+ for processes of cementing a well.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, I A 3.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave processes involving an application
    of electrical or wave energy to effect a chemical reaction, per se, and
    also processes involving electrophoresis.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, II A.

    222,    Dispensing, IIB.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, for coiling or uncoiling an
    elongated material to or from storage, or for making a definite length
    article.

    249,    Static Molds, appropriate subclasses, for static molding apparatus.

    252,    Compositions, IIA, IIA9.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, IIA.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, IA3.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 69+ for the method of working and kneading of
    rubber or heavy plastic.  Such working or kneading combined with shaping or
    treating steps is provided for in Class 264.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 72+ for a road
    making process which may include a molding step.  See Class 264, subclass
    31 for the line between Classes 264 and 404.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, II A.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses
    1.11+, 2+, 40+, and 400+ for class defined compositions and methods
    comprising shaped or special form structures.  Also note discussion in the
    class definition for Class 264 in section II, A.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 276+, 279+, 297, 337, 414,
    and 512+ for processes involving the molding or shaping edible material.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, II G.

    432,    Heating, subclass 13 for a residual process for the melting, per
    se, of solid material.

    433,    Dentistry, subclass 214 for processes for taking impressions in the
    mouth which may include a molding step.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 81+ for processes for
    teaching sculpturing there provided for which may include a molding step.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, for combined operations in the manufacture of an
    article of commerce from paper or other sheet or web material and
    particularly subclasses 395+ for bending of a sheet or web without thinning
    or thickening flow of the material.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 300+ for processes of producing high temperature (Tc > 30 K)
    superconductors; particularly subclass 401 for shock processing, subclass
    412 for laser ablative removal, subclass 425 for shaping particulate by
    spraying, dropping, or slinging of solution, suspension, or melt; or
    subclasses 490+ for shaping, consolidating, or sintering processes.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural, Rubbers, A.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, II A.


    J.      HAZARDOUS OR TOXIC WASTE CONTAINMENT



    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    249+ for the containment of hazardous or toxic waste by molding or shaping.


CLS 264/0.5
TXT Processes under the class definition directed to molding or treating
    articles having a composition including a radioactive ingredient.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein for example are fissionable and fertile
    ingredients, inclusive of nuclear reactor fuel, breeder or blanket
    materials.  See the glossary in the definitions of Class 376, Induced
    Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements, for definitions of
    these terms.

    (2)     Note.  See the definitions of this class for the line between this
    class and such composition Classes as 106, Compositions:  Coating or
    Plastic and 252, Compositions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal   Particulate
    Mixtures, subclass 235 for a consolidated metal particle composition
    containing oxide of an Activide.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 625+ for radioactive compositions and
    miscellaneous methods of treating same.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclasses 409+ for nuclear fuel component structures including radioactive
    materials; and subclasses 900+ for cross-reference art collections of
    particular materials or material shapes for fission reactors.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, appropriate subclasses for powder
    metallurgy methods of making nuclear fuel elements or charges.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 5 for coating processes wherein the
    base or coating is radioactive.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 411+ for a composite web or sheet characterized
    merely by the composition of the layers, in which one of the layers may be
    a radioactive material.


CLS 264/1.1
TXT OPTICAL ARTICLE SHAPING OR TREATING:

    Processes under the class definition directed to forming articles capable
    of producing an optical effect other than mere transparency or planar
    reflection.

    (1)     Note.  The effect may be of (a) substantially total divergence,
    convergence or internal reflection of light rays passing through or
    directed at said articles, or (b) transmitting or reflecting light rays
    vibrating in one plane only, e.g., polarized light, said articles having a
    desired contour, shape, internal molecular arrangement, or of a specific
    composition necessary to bring about said optical effects.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass provides for a process in which a nonoptical
    article is molded against an optical article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73+     and 108+, for producing articles having nacreous or pearlescent
    surface effects.

    322,    for a process of preliminary softening of a workpiece and then
    applying heat and/or pressure to the workpiece to form a curvilinear
    article which has the shape of a lens.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 37+ for processes within the class
    definition for lens making.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements,
    appropriate subclasses for optical elements, per se.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product or article having light-transmitting
    properties; especially subclass 34 for a product having spaced,
    gas-enclosing, light-transmissive sheets sealed at their edges; subclass 38
    for an article having a light-transmissive or translucent mass with an
    opaque border or frame; and subclasses 426+ for a nonstructural composite
    web or sheet including a layer comprising glass.


CLS 264/1.21
TXT Nonresinous material only (e.g., ceramic, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 1.1 directed to shaping or treating an optical
    article which is composed solely of nonresinous material.

    (1)     Note.  The application of a nonresinous coating to an optical
    article is not provided for here. Such subject matter is provided for in
    subclasses below.

    (2)     Note.  Attention is directed to the definition of Class 520,
    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, for the distinction between the terms
    ``resinous" and ``nonresinous."

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.7,    for processes which include the application of a nonresinous
    coating to an optical article.


CLS 264/1.22
TXT Scandium (Sc), yttrium (Y), or rare earth containing (i.e., atomic numbers
    21, 39, or 57-72):

    Processes under subclass 1.21 wherein the nonresinous material contains
    scandium, yttrium, or a rare earth.

    (1)     Note.  The rare earths are:

    Lanthanum (La)

    Cerium (Ce)

    Praseodymium (Pr)

    Neodymium (Nd)

    Promethium (Pm)

    Samarium (Sm)

    Europium (Eu)

    Gadolinium (Gd)

    Terbium (Tb)

    Dysprosium (Dy)

    Holmium (Ho)

    Erbium (Er)

    Thulium (Tm)

    Ytterbium (Yb)

    Lutetium (Lu)


CLS 264/1.23
TXT Halogen containing:

    Processes under subclass 1.21 wherein the nonresinous material contains a
    halogen, atomic numbers 9, 17, 35, 53, and 85 listed on the periodic table.

    (1)     Note.  The halogens are:

    Fluorine (F)

    Chlorine (Cl)

    Bromine (Br)

    Iodine (I)

    Astatine (At)


CLS 264/1.24
TXT Optical fiber, waveguide, or preform:

    Processes under subclass 1.1 directed to shaping or treating an optical
    fiber, waveguide, or preform.

    (1)     Note.  Optical fibers are considered light guidance systems that
    are generally cylindrical in shape. The fibers rely upon modal transmission
    to transmit light along their axial length.

    (2)     Note.  A waveguide is considered a thin dielectric guide film of
    high refractive index formed adjacent to a substrate or support region of
    lower refractive index. The thin-film relies upon modal transmission to
    transmit light along its length.


CLS 264/1.25
TXT Forming connector or coupler (e.g., fiber link, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 1.24 including joining at least two optical
    fibers, waveguides, or preforms by producing, shaping, or treating an
    interface element or producing, shaping, or treating coverings or clads
    surrounding the optical fiber, waveguide, or preform joining site.

    (1)     Note.  The interchange of light radiation between optical fibers or
    waveguide structures having a mechanical interconnection (coupler or
    connector) at the end of or between structures by a process of this class
    is properly classified in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Shaping and treating processes including joining or
    connecting optical fibers, waveguides, or preforms by fusion (e.g., forming
    optical fiber bundle) are proper for this subclass. Processes of forming a
    cable or fiber bundle without fiber or waveguide joining, connecting,
    coupling, or fusing are found below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.28,   for processes of forming cables or fiber bundles.


CLS 264/1.26
TXT Having lens integral with fiber:

    Processes under subclass 1.25 wherein the optical product formed has an
    optical component which focuses transmitting light waves, joined directly
    to at least one light transmitting fiber.


CLS 264/1.27
TXT Utilizing plasma, electric, electromagnetic, particle, or wave energy:

    Processes under subclass 1.24 wherein plasma, electric, electromagnetic,
    particulate, or wave energy is used to treat or shape the optical fiber,
    waveguide, or preform.

    (1)     Note.  The wave energy used may be light, sonic, supersonic,
    ultrasonic, gamma rays, infrared rays, X-rays, etc. Particulate energy
    includes charged particles and atomic emissions, such as alpha rays, beta
    rays, and neutrons.

    (2)     Note.  The energy must be applied as such directly to the work.
    Conversion or electrical energy to heat and the application of the heat to
    the work is excluded from this subclass and is provided for in appropriate
    subclasses below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for processes of comminuting a liquid by electrical energy.

    275+,   for a process of molding wherein magnetic or electrostatic field or
    force is utilized to maintain a preform in a selected position during
    molding, and see (1) Note above.

    405+,   for process including the application of electrical or wave energy
    to work in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    272.2+ for a laminating process including direct application of electrical
    or radiant energy to the work, and see the SEARCH CLASS notes thereunder.

    201     Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclasses 5+ for a
    thermolytic distillation process combined with a shaping operation in which
    electrical energy is applied to the work; and subclass 19 for a thermolytic
    distillation process in which electrical energy is applied to the work.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 155+, 157.15+,
    and 164 for processes of effecting a chemical reaction by using electrical
    or wave energy. The line stated in the class definition of Class 204, above
    the definition ``Notes" therein, for claims defining a Class 204 operation
    combined with an operation for another class is to be followed for
    classification of claims defining both Class 204 and Class 264 operations.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, particularly Class 522 for a
    process of preparing or treating a synthetic resin or natural rubber
    involving a chemical reaction brought about by application of wave energy.


CLS 264/1.28
TXT Forming fiber bundle or cable (e.g., covering, sheath, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 1.24 wherein at least two optical fibers or
    waveguides are incorporated into an assembly (a) that provides tensile
    strength and external protection or (b) are adjacent one another to guide
    light collectively.

    (1)     Note.  Extrusion processes involving forming a cable or fiber
    bundle are properly classified here. Extrusion processes involving a single
    (individual) optical fiber or waveguide are classified below.

    (2)     Note.  Processes of forming or treating cables or fiber bundles
    wherein optical fibers or waveguides are (a) embedded in a matrix, (b)
    placed in separate preformed grooves or cavities, (c) sheathed, or (d)
    fastened adjacent one to another are proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.29,   for extrusion processes involving forming coating, core, or clad
    for individual (single) optical fibers or waveguides.


CLS 264/1.29
TXT Extruding (i.e., die):

    Processes under subclass 1.24 wherein the optical fiber, waveguide, or
    preform is formed or treated by causing a positive force or pressure to
    push glass through a die (e.g., core, clad, or sheath, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Coextrusion processes involving treating or forming optical
    fibers, waveguides, or fiber preforms are properly classified here.


CLS 264/1.31
TXT Light polarizing article or holographic article:

    Processes under subclass 1.1 directed to (a) aligning or orienting the
    molecular or structural composition of a plastic material to produce an
    article or coated article that allows light to pass therethrough in a
    single plane or (b) a holographic article, or otherwise testing said
    article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for a process of orienting particles in a fluent matrix material.

    288.4+  and 291+, for processes of stretching to impart bifringence
    properties to articles.

    437+,   for a process of orienting particles by directly applying
    electrical energy to the particles

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 347+ for holographic
    interferometry in general.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    1+ for holographic systems or elements, per se, subclasses 3+ for
    particular recording medium, and subclasses 383+ for polarizers, per se, or
    use of polarized light.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclass 1 for a process of making a hologram or the composition
    therefor.


CLS 264/1.32
TXT Lens:

    Processes under subclass 1.31 wherein the polarizing article is a lens or a
    lens coated with polarizing material.

    (1)     Note.  Treatment by encapsulation of polarizing material is
    included in this subclass.

    (2)     Note. The coating material may be responsible for the polarization.


CLS 264/1.33
TXT Optical recording medium:

    Processes under subclass 1.31 wherein the light polarizing article or
    holographic article is used as a medium to record data or information.

    (1)     Note.  An optical recording medium in the form of tape, card, or
    disc is included in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  An optical recording medium combined with the capability of
    reproducing recorded information or optical memory medium, per se, is
    properly classified in this subclass.


CLS 264/1.34
TXT Film or sheet:

    Processes under subclass 1.31 wherein the light polarizing article or
    holographic article is (a) in the form of a film or sheet or (b) a layered
    product having said film or sheet as one of the layers.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this subclass a sheet or film will be
    considered a portion of material of finite length, whose width is greater
    than its thickness and which may be of any geometric shape (e.g., triangle,
    circle, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.33,   for processes wherein the light polarizing or holographic article
    in the form of a sheet or film is used as an optical recording or
    reproducing medium.


CLS 264/1.35
TXT Halogen containing:

    Processes under subclass 1.34 wherein a composition of the film or sheet
    contains halogen or is coated or treated with a halogen containing material.


CLS 264/1.36
TXT Utilizing plasma, electric, electromagnetic, particulate, or wave energy:

    Processes under subclass 1.1 wherein plasma, electric, electromagnetic,
    particulate, or wave energy is used to treat or shape the optical article.

    (1)     Note.  The energy used may be light, sonic, supersonic, ultrasonic,
    gamma rays, infrared rays, X-rays, etc.  Particulate energy includes
    charged particles and atomic emissions, such as alpha rays, beta rays, and
    neutrons.  The mere use of magnetic force employed to maintain a preform in
    a selected position is not provided for here, for  which see subclasses
    275+ below.

    (2)     Note.  The energy must be applied as such directly to the work.
    Conversion of electrical energy to heat and the application of the heat to
    the work is excluded from this subclass and is provided for in appropriate
    subclasses below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for processes of comminuting a liquid by electrical energy.

    275+,   for a process of molding wherein magnetic or electrostatic field or
    force is utilized to maintain a preform in a selected position during
    molding, and see (1) Note above.

    405+,   for process including the application of electrical or wave energy
    to work in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    272.2+ for a laminating process including direct application of electrical
    or radiant energy to the work, and see the SEARCH CLASS notes thereunder.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclasses 5+ for a
    thermolytic distillation process combined with a shaping operation in which
    electrical energy is applied to the work; and subclass 19 for a thermolytic
    distillation process in which electrical energy is applied to the work.

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclasses for
    processes effecting a chemical reaction by utilizing electrical or wave
    energy.  The line stated in the Class 204 definition for claims defining a
    Class 204 operation combined with an operation for another class is to be
    followed for classification of claims defining both Class 204 and Class 264
    operations.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, particularly Class 522 for a
    process of preparing or treating a synthetic resin or natural rubber
    involving a chemical reaction brought about by application of wave energy.


CLS 264/1.37
TXT Laser utilized:

    Processes under subclass 1.36 wherein the electromagnetic energy used is
    laser.

    (1)     Note.  Lasers are considered to be a narrow beam of light (light
    amplified by stimulated emissions of radiation).

    (2)     Note.  Processes wherein a laser measured in the ultraviolet range
    are properly classified in this subclass.


CLS 264/1.38
TXT Ultraviolet light utilized:

    Processes under subclass 1.36 wherein the electromagnetic energy used is
    ultraviolet light.


CLS 264/1.6
TXT Continuous or indefinite length:

    Processes under subclass 1.1 directed to the shaping or treating of an
    optical article which is continuous or of indefinite length.


CLS 264/1.7
TXT Composite or multiple layer:

    Processes under subclass 1.1 directed to shaping or treating an optical
    article including incorporation of an optical preform into the final
    optical article.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses provide for molding a lens
    in two different sections where the first section has the second molded
    against it as well as processes in which the second section completely
    covers the first.

    (2)     Note.  Chemical treatment of an optical preform to alter optical
    properties of part of the preform are not provided for herein, and are
    found in subclass 2.6.


CLS 264/1.8
TXT Including bifocal:

    Process under subclass 1.7 directed to forming an optical article having
    multiple nonrandom areas of uniform refractive properties which differ from
    each other.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for the forming of bifocals in
    particular and multifocal lenses in general.


CLS 264/1.9
TXT Reflective:

    Processes under subclass 1.7 directed to producing a reflective article.


CLS 264/2.1
TXT Rotational molding:

    Processes under subclass 1.1 in which rotating motion is imparted to the
    material being shaped or to the mold or mold-shaping surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for formation of particulate material from a liquid or molten mass
    by means of centrifugal force.

    68,     for rotation to produce frictional heat.

    69+,    for processes which pertain to agitating by plural squential
    rotations in reverse directions; however, such patents should be crossed
    herein where applicable, depending on the time of duration of said rotation
    periods in one direction.

    114,    for use of centrifugal force in formation of articles by uniting of
    bulk assembled particles.

    175,    for processes of forming indefinite length articles by a
    calendering operation between endless shaping surfaces, e.g., belts or
    wheels.

    176,    for centrifugal spinning of filament or fibers.

    270,    for processes of lining a mold cavity employing centrifugal force.

    310,    for processes of rotational molding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 114+ for processes of centrifugally
    casting metals.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses  425+ for a molding machine utilizing mold motion to distribute
    or compact a fluent material in a mold.


CLS 264/2.2
TXT Changing mold size or shape during molding or with shrinkage compensation:

    Processes under subclass 1.1 in which the volume or morphology of the mold
    cavity is altered during the molding process or in which some expedient is
    utilized which is claimed or disclosed as compensating for the shrinkage of
    the material to be shaped.


CLS 264/2.3
TXT With mold adherence or release:

    Processes under subclass 2.2 in which materials or conditions are chosen
    such that the adherence of the molding material to the mold is facilitated
    or a specific method of release of the optical article or the use of a
    named release agent is claimed.


CLS 264/2.4
TXT Preform:

    Processes under subclass 2.2 directed to the reshaping of a preform into an
    optical article or the treatment of such preform.


CLS 264/2.5
TXT Including step of mold making:

    Processes under subclass 1.1 which include the step of producing (a) a
    shaping or molding device either as a, per se, operation by a method within
    the definitions of this class, or (b) in combination with a step of
    employing said shaping or molding device in the production of a molded
    product by a process classifiable in this class, in which latter instance
    the molding or shaping device may be formed by methods provided for
    elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  Patents reciting merely the application or formation of mold
    linings on molding surfaces are not within the scope of this subclass and
    are classified on some other bases.

    (2)     Note.  Patents reciting processes for manufacturing or assembling
    molds not specifically provided for herein are classified in various other
    classes depending on the specific manufacturing step employed, e.g., Class
    29, Metal Working; Class 156, Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical
    Manufacture, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31+,    for processes of erecting molds and casting structural
    installations in situ.

    219+,   for processes not forming an optical article which involve the step
    of making the mold used.

    337+,   for processes which employ specific mold materials or specific mold
    coatings or linings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 6+ for processes of making molds under
    the class definition.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 69 and 70 for processes of
    electroforming printing plates, molds and the like.


CLS 264/2.6
TXT Nonmechanical aftertreatment (e.g., hydration of contact lens, extraction,
    heat treatment, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 1.1 directed to the treatment of an optical
    article by means other than mechanical shaping.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes most hydrophilic contact lenses.


CLS 264/2.7
TXT Reshaping or treatment of an optical preform:

    Processes under subclass 1.1 directed to the mechanical shaping or
    treatment of an optical preform.


CLS 264/3.1
TXT EXPLOSIVE OR PROPELLANT ARTICLE SHAPING OR TREATING:

    Processes under the class definition in which the material which is shaped
    or molded is disclosed to have utility as an explosive or a propellant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    86,     Ammunition and Explosive-Charge Making, subclasses 20+ for the
    loading of fireworks or bursting charges with explosive or propellant
    material.

    149,    Eplosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, subclasses 2+ for
    explosive compositions shapes, nominal container shapes therefore etc.
    Also see "SEARCH CLASS", under subclass 2 of that class for related fields
    of search for shaped inflammable compositions.  For explosive compositions,
    per se, search appropriate subclasses of that class.


CLS 264/3.2
TXT Rolling to form sheet or rod:

    Subject matter under subclass 3.1 wherein the material is rolled into the
    form of sheet or rod.


CLS 264/3.3
TXT Extrusion to form sheet or rod:

    Subject matter under sublcass 3.1 the material is extruded to form sheet or
    rod like shapes.


CLS 264/3.4
TXT Forming or treating particulate material:

    Subject matter under subclass 3.1 wherein the material is shaped in form of
    particulate matter, e.g., pellets, flakes, etc.


CLS 264/3.5
TXT By liquid comminuting:

    Subject matter under subclass 3.4 wherein the particulate material if
    formed directly from a liquid state commonly referred to as liquid
    comminution and solidification.


CLS 264/3.6
TXT Immersed in liquid:

    Subject matter under subclass 3.4 wherein the comminution is carried out
    beneath the surface of liquid.


CLS 264/4
TXT Processes under class definition wherein a material which is normally
    liquid at ambient temperature and pressure is encapsulated, i.e., packaged
    or contained, in shaped discrete receptacles e.g., microspheres.

    (1)     Note.  The classification of a patent reciting the encapsulation of
    a core material with no reference to the core being a solid or liquid, the
    assumption is made that the core is solid and therefore classified in Class
    427, subclasses 213.3+ as an original with a suggested cross to this class,
    subclass.

    (2)     Note.  This class, subclass 4.1 provides for processes of producing
    a composition by way of encapsulating (shaping operation) a liquid core
    where elsewhere not provided for.  The liquid core may be homogeneous or
    heterogeneous.

    (3)     Note.  A patent reciting a coated or encapsulated material with
    claimed utility(ies) is classified with the composition classes.  A similar
    patent with (a) multiply disclosed utilities or (b) undisclosed utility is
    classified in Class 428, subclasses 402+.  However, in the latter two cases
    (a) and (b) above, when the coating or encapsulating material stabilizes a
    compound against physical or chemical degradation, then classification is
    appropriate for and subject to the limitations set forth in one of the
    compound (element) classes.  The order of superiority of the composition
    classes are listed below under "SEARCH CLASS".  Those classes with an
    asterisk are not composition classes but deemed appropriate for further
    search.

    (4)     Note.  Clathrates and intercalates (inclusion compound), per se,
    are classified as pure compounds and classified hierarchically with respect
    to both the encapsulant and encapsulate.  Where a patent does not state
    that a material is either a clathrate or intercalate, the assumption is
    made that the material is merely encapsulated and therefore properly
    classified in Class 428, subclasses 402.2+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclass 526 for a dye in specified form other than
    mere powder.

    29*,    Metal Working, subclass 422 for processes of shaping a container
    end to encapsulate material.

    53*,    Package Making, appropriate subclasses for encapsulating processes
    employing a preformed planar sheet or a tube in package making.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures.

    106,    Compostions:  Coating or Plastic for a filler or pigment for a
    coating composition which may include size or structure of the constituent
    particles or fibers which recitation does not serve to exclude from Class
    106.  See especially subclasses 21 (invisible inks), 36, 235, 241, 251,
    253+, 266, 272, 275, 276, 280, 281+, 400+, 400+, 636, 734, and 816  (coated
    material) in Class 106.  See also V, above in definition.

    118*,   Coating Apparatus, subclass 303 for apparatus for spray coating
    particulate material.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 22+ for composition and 31.5 for a
    coated stock material.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, subclasses 3+ for a
    coated component.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miacellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    81 for melting of a solid material in an airtight cavity and subclasses
    145+ for encapsulating, when combined with a laminating step.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products.

    252,    Compositions, for miscellaneous compositions having special uses or
    functions.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, subclasses 709+.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Composition, subclasses 16+
    for coated, impregnated or layered feature.

    425*,   Plastic Article or Earthware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 5 for apparatus encapsulating normally liquid material in
    descrete, simultaneously formed containers.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Composition, and Products,
    subclasses 89+.

    427*,   Coating Processes, subclasses 213.3+ for processes of encapsulating
    solid core materials.

    428*,   Stock Materials or Miscllaneous Articles, subclasses 320.6 and
    321.5 for composite (e.g., layered, etc.) stock material involving a
    microencapsulated liquid and subclasses 402.2+ for coated particles or
    microscopic size. *Not a composition class.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product and
    Process.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclass 138 for a microcapsule.

    451,    Abrading, especially subclass 295 for impregnating or coating an
    abrasive tool.

    501,    Compositions, Ceramic.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, subclasses 60+ and 527.

    504,    Plant Protecting and Regulating Compositions.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Resins, see, for example, Class 523,
    subclasses 161 invisible ink composition and subclasses 200+ for a
    composition containing product in the form of surface-coating, impregnated,
    encapsulated, or surface-modified material.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds (mixture subclasses).

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    249+ for containment broadly of hazardous or toxic waste.


CLS 264/4.1
TXT Liquid encapsulation utilizing an emulsion or dispersion to form a
    solid-walled microcapsule (includes liposome):

    Subject matter under subclass 4 wherein a medium in the form of an emulsion
    or dispersion is used to affect encapsulation of the liquid.  The medium
    may contain one or more polymers, polymer precursors, monomers or other
    encapsulating materials, e.g., gelatin, wax, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Liposomes are formed of mesomorphic walls (i.e., a state of
    matter intermediate between crystalline solid and normal isotropic liquid)
    and are classified here based on their solid characteristics.


CLS 264/4.3
TXT With treatment subsequent to solid-wall formation (e.g., coating,
    hardening, etc.): Subject matter under subclass 4 wherein solid-walled
    microparticles are subjected to a significant chemical or physical
    after-treatment, e.g., heating, formaldenhyde crosslinking, etc., the
    recitation of "hardening the formed microcapsule" is sufficient for
    placement here.

    (1)     Note.  Techniques utilized for merely recovering the
    microencapsulated product are not the type of after-treatment considered,
    e.g., filtering, precipitating, centrifuging, evaporating, distilling,
    sieving, etc. Drying techniques also not considered as after-treatment are
    spray drying, freeze drying (lyophilization), drum drying, etc.


CLS 264/4.32
TXT Microcapsule wall containing two or more layers:

    Subject matter under subclass 4.3 wherein the microencapsulation process
    produces a multilayered shell completely surrounding the liquid core.


CLS 264/4.33
TXT Microcapsule wall derived from synthetic polymer:

    Subject matter under subclass 4.3 wherein the microencapsulation process
    produces a wall derived from a synthetic polymer which was prepared either
    prior to or during the process.


CLS 264/4.4
TXT Solid-walled microcapsule formed by cooling molten materials:

    Subject matter under subclass 4.1 wherein solid wall formation is obtained
    by solidifying molten material by cooling below the melting point or range
    of the material.


CLS 264/4.6
TXT Solid-walled microcapsule formed by physically removing a constituent
    (e.g., evaporation, extraction, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 4.1 wherein solid-walled material is obtained
    by physically removing a constituent of the colloidal emulsion or
    dispersion, e.g., evaporation, distillation, extraction, precipitation, etc.


CLS 264/4.7
TXT Solid-walled microcapsule formed by in situ  polymerization:

    Subject matter under subclass 4.1 wherein the solid-walled microcapsule is
    obtained by the polymerization of one or more reactants contained in the
    colloidal emulsion or dispersion system.

    (1)     Note.  A patent which claims an in situ-generated polymer which
    subsequently reacts with a material, e.g., a crosslinking agent contained
    in the liquid core, is not classified here but in subclass 4.3.


CLS 264/5
TXT Processes under class definition wherein a material in the liquid state is
    comminuted to form discrete particles and solidified in its comminuted form.

    (1)     Note.  Where the purpose of the comminution is to effect a material
    separation rather than to produce a desired size product, the patent is not
    included herein, but will be found in the appropriate separation class,
    e.g., Class 159, Concentrating Evaporators, and Class 201, Distillation:
    Processes, Thermolytic, subclasses 7+.

    (2)     Note.  To be classified in this subclass the material must be
    subdivided from an original liquid mass and then the subdivided particles
    solidified with no substantial change in shape or size.  Thus,
    precipitation of a powder, etc., from a solution is not provided for in
    this class in that an original liquid mass is not comminuted.  Coagulation
    of droplets formed by comminution can be found in this or an indented
    subclass.

    (3)     Note.  The compound and composition classes are superior to Class
    264 in regard to liquid comminution and solidification unless otherwise
    noted where:

    A.      The product is formed and comminution is recited only broadly, as
    by name only,

    B.      The reactants are comminuted merely to enchance a chemical reaction,

    C.      The final product size and shape is not controlled or limited by
    the size and shape of the comminuted liquid particles (see (2) Note above)
    or,

    D.      The product is a stable colloid or catalyst composition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 1.22 for apparatus and methods for making
    bullets and shot usually involving a plurality of metal working operations
    and subclasses 4.51+ for the production of metal shreds by a cutting
    operation.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 74 for processes there provided for of
    congealing (freezing) material involving spraying or dripping.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 376+ for processes of glass fiber
    or filament making; subclasses 21.1+ for self-supporting particle making
    from glass or glasslike materials.

    71,     Chemistry:  Fertilizers, subclasses 64.01+ for other processes of
    preparing fertilizer commercial forms and also fertilizer forms as articles
    of manufacture.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 253.1+ for metal extruding.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 331+ for production of free metal in particulate form
    or production of alloy or metallic composition in particulate form by
    comminuting directly from liquid metal. Patents which claim only a process
    of comminuting and solidifying a liquid metal to form discrete particles
    are classified as originals in Class 75.  Patents in which the claims are
    broad or nondefinitive as to material and the disclosure states that
    materials other than metal are processed by the invention will go as
    originals to Class 264.  Patents having claims to forming solid particulate
    metal and claims to forming solid particulate nonmetal or patents having
    generic claims with a disclosure to forming solid particulate metal and to
    forming solid particulate nonmetal will go as orignals to Class 264 and a
    cross-reference will be placed in Class 75.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclasses 48.1+ for processes of
    concentrating by spraying.

    164,    Metal Founding, appropriate subclasses for processes of forming
    particulate metallic particles by means of a shaping surface and subclass
    272 for metal revolving or tumbling type shaping apparatus.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 192.1 for
    processes of coating or forming by cathode sputtering.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 1 to 30
    for processes of comminuting and disintegrating solid materials.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 302+ for colloid forming.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 6+ for corresponding apparatus.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 87 for a product
    with a pile or nap type surface and including particles, subclasses 143+
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet which has a textured surface comprising particulate matter,
    subclasses 323+ for a composite web or sheet including a component having
    structurally defined particles, subclasses 402+ and 570 for structurally
    defined or coated particles and subclasses 546+ for metallic stock
    comprising metal particles.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    252+ for solidification of hazardous or toxic waste.


CLS 264/6
TXT Processes under subclass 5 wherein the formed discrete particles are mass
    or bulk assembled and bonded to each other to form a unitary article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115+,   for formation or liberation of fibers or particles from solid
    materials and uniting thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 228+ for a consolidated metal powder composition.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, appropriate subclasses for producing
    metals or alloys or metallic compositions in a solid or compact state from
    powdered or particulate material with or without heating.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 546+ for
    metallic stock comprising metal particles.


CLS 264/7
TXT Processes under subclass 5 wherein the comminuted material is coated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for methods of forming filled capsules.

    129+,   for subsequent coating of articles, which have been formed by a
    process within the class definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 212+ for processes of coating
    particles, flakes, or granules.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 570 for metal
    particles coated with another metal.


CLS 264/8
TXT Processes under subclass 5 wherein the liquid or molten material is
    comminuted by means of centrifugal force or a revolving or rotating forming
    surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    309,    for processes wherein material is flung or sprayed against a mold
    surface.


CLS 264/9
TXT Processes under subclass 5 wherein the particles are formed by agitation or
    vibration of the liquid or molten mass to fling or shake off said particles.


CLS 264/10
TXT Processes under subclass 5 wherein some form of direct electrical energy is
    employed to comminute the liquid or molten mass into particles.


CLS 264/11
TXT Processes under subclass 5 wherein the particles are formed by causing
    plural liquid streams to impinge forcibly.

    (1)     Note.  The liquid streams may be of the particle forming material
    only or of both particle forming and nonparticle forming materials.

    (2)     Note.  Turbulent fluid flow type comminuting is considered
    agitating for subclass 9 above.


CLS 264/12
TXT Processes under subclass 5 in which the particles are formed by impinging
    with or directing a jet or blast of a gas into contact with the liquid or
    molten material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for processes of liquid comminuting in which the material is
    sprayed, per se, through particle forming orifices by employing a
    relatively large pressure head of liquid.


CLS 264/13
TXT Processes under subclass 5 wherein the particles are formed by flowing or
    allowing the liquid material to fall through a forming orifice.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for spraying by impinging a liquid body or stream with a gas jet.

    15,     for processes in which preformed solid particles are rounded or
    spheroidized as by passing said particles through a heated fluid.


CLS 264/14
TXT Processes under subclass 13 in which the formed particles pass into or
    through a moving fluid medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180,    for processes of forming continuous or indefinite length work in
    which the product is extruded into a liquid bath in motion.


CLS 264/15
TXT Processes under the class definition directed to the reshaping of solid,
    irregular or nonspherical particulate matter wherein said irregularities
    are diminished or the particles are caused to become more spherical or
    rounded in shape without loss of material therefrom and by means other than
    use of a mold or shaping surface therefor and in which the individual and
    separate identities of the particles is maintained.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass are generally directed to those
    processes in which heat is employed to soften the particles so as to permit
    the internal cohesive forces of the particles to effect said reshaping as
    defined.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5+,     particularly subclasses 13+ for processes forming particulate
    material directly from a molten or liquid mass.

    109+,   for processes of forming articles by uniting of nonmetal particles
    in which the overall configuration of the particles may be altered in the
    process.

    162,    for surface finishing by abrading.

    320+,   for processes of reshaping an article in which a mold or solid
    shaping surface is employed.

    341,    for processes of treating a solid article in which the surface is
    smoothed by solvent polishing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclass 342, for spheroidizing or rounding of existing solid
    metal particles.  Patents having claims to spheroidizing or rounding of
    solid metal particles and claims to spheroidizing or rounding of solid,
    nonmetal particles or patents having generic claims with a disclosure to
    spheroidizing or rounding of solid, metal particles and to spheroidizing or
    rounding of solid, nonmetallic particles will go as originals to Class 264
    and a cross-reference will be placed in Class 75.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclasses 5+ for a
    thermolytic distillation process including the step of shaping solid
    carbonaceous material without using a mold.


CLS 264/16
TXT Processes under the class definition wherein articles are formed which
    conform to the contour of the human mouth or which simulate a tooth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, appropriate subclasses for dental casting processes
    under the class definition.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclass 67 for electroforming methods of
    producing dentures.

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 54 for dental type molds.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 2 for shaping apparatus utilizing an anatomical body or portion
    thereof as a shaping surface.

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 167+ for prosthodontic methods directed to or
    including specific dental steps.


CLS 264/17
TXT Processes under subclass 16 wherein the article formed includes at least
    one tooth and a support conjoint therewith.


CLS 264/18
TXT Processes under subclass 17 wherein the support is formed by casting or
    molding against preformed teeth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259+,   appropriate subclasses indented thereunder for processes of forming
    composite articles, per se, in which material is shaped and united to a
    preformed self-sustaining body.


CLS 264/19
TXT Processes under subclass 16 wherein the article formed by molding or
    casting simulates a tooth or portion thereof.


CLS 264/20
TXT Processes under subclass 19 wherein the tooth or portion thereof is formed
    so as to provide a color or tone differential across the member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73+     and 78, for molding processes of general utility which include a
    coloring or dyeing step.

    245+,   for processes of general utility forming a multi-colored composite
    body.


CLS 264/21
TXT Processes under the class definition directed to molding or treating
    articles having a composition including a luminescent, phosphorescent, or
    fluorescent ingredient.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 301.16 - 310.6 for fluorescent or
    phosphorescent compositions.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 157+ for processes of coating
    utilizing flourescent or phosphorescent coating.

    (2)     Note.  The energy must be applied as such to the work.  Conversion
    of electrical energy to heat and the application of the heat to the work is
    excluded from this subclass and is provided for in appropriate subclasses
    below.

    (3)     Note.  The laser ablation of a Class 264 material in the absence of
    an added reactive chemical is proper for Class 264.  When a reactive
    chemical is used in the laser ablation the subject matter is proper for
    etching Class 216.


CLS 264/28
TXT Processes under the class definition which include subjecting the molding
    material or product to a cooling, freezing or refrigeration step which
    lowers the temperature of the material or product to at least OoC or 32oF.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237     and 348, for processes which include a cooling step which does not
    cool to product or shaping material to at least 0oC.


CLS 264/29.1
TXT Processes under the class definition wherein a carbonaceous material is
    subjected to a heat treatment in a substantially nonoxidizing atmosphere to
    produce a product containing elemental carbon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    for processes of molding or shaping electroconductive material,
    which material contains elemental carbon, at least in part.

    603+,   for firing, sintering or vitrifying operations on inorganic shaped
    materials which are not directed to carbonizing the material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclass 599 for a process of making
    a consolidated fuel solids composition which includes a step of carbonizing
    using a specified condition or technique.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, appropriate subclass, for a
    process of thermolytic distillation of carbonaceous material, e.g., coking,
    etc.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 445+ for elemental
    carbon, per se, and its manufacturing processes involving a chemical
    reaction.  For the line between 423 subclasses 445+ and this class
    concerning combined processes of molding and carbonizing, see the class
    definitions of this class, section II. A. 10).

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 307+ for coating processes including
    flame contact.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, for a composition comprising a catalyst or sorbent, per se,
    which may be activated carbon.  Activated carbon is proper for Class 502,
    rather than Class 423.


CLS 264/29.2
TXT Processes under subclass 29.1 directed to making articles in which the
    length is relatively much greater than the width and thickness.


CLS 264/29.3
TXT Processes under subclass 29.1 including the step of tumbling or otherwise
    agitating a mass of fine discrete particles to cause adherence of the
    particles to one another thereby producing larger sized particles prior to
    carbonizing.


CLS 264/29.4
TXT Processes under subclass 29.1 wherein the article carbonized includes
    cellulosic material or its derivatives.


CLS 264/29.5
TXT Processes under subclass 29.1 which prepare an article by carbonizing and
    then subsequently add a carbonizable material (e.g., by impregnating) and
    recarbonize.


CLS 264/29.6
TXT Processes under subclass 29.1 wherein one step of carbonization takes place
    in a specifically recited atmosphere other than vacuum or air.

    (1)     Note.  The recitations inert, nonoxidizing, or the like shall be
    considered sufficient to place the patent in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  One step of carbonizing may occur in an oxidizing atmosphere
    as long as the process also includes a step of carbonizing under
    nonoxidizing conditions.


CLS 264/29.7
TXT Processes under subclass 29.1 wherein the carbonizing step is carried out
    by (1) varying the temperature over a given time span or by (2) heating the
    article to two or more distinct temperatures.

    (1)     Note.  Heating the article to cure binder or dry is not considered
    carbonizing unless positively disclosed that such occurs under those
    conditions.

    (2)     Note.  Heating to a temperature to cause a change in crystalline
    form of the carbon (e.g., graphitizing) is considered a step of carbonizing
    for this subclass.


CLS 264/30
TXT Processes under the class definition which are directed to (1) maintaining,
    restoring, or rebuilding a damaged, defective, or worn furnace lining or
    (2) forming an original interior layer on the furnace wall which remains in
    place during furnace use.

    (1)     Note.  This is the residual home for furnace lining formation or
    repair not elsewhere provided for.  In general, however, the combination of
    building a furnace and applying a lining to the interior thereof is
    classified in the class providing for the particular method of building the
    furnace.  For classes which provide for furnaces and furnace lining, see
    the notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for processes under the class definitions for repairing or
    restoring articles, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 402.01+, especially 402.18 for repairing
    processes which include only mechanical assembly and joining operations.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 741.1+ and 745.01+
    for processes of assembling or in situ erection of a building involving
    more than repair by a process for Class 264.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 27 for processes of repairing
    apparatus for that class.

    75,     Specialized  Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclass 301 for reactive furnace linings.

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 343 for a process of treating solid fuel furnace
    constituents to prevent corrosion of the furnace.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, appropriate subclass for furnace
    structures provided therein under the class definition.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, particularly subclasses 144+ for linings.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    94+ for processes of repairing articles by a laminating process.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 500+ for furnace lining composition or
    linings defined only in terms of their composition when the composition is
    electrically conductive.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, appropriate subclass for metallurgical
    furnaces, particularly subclasses 280+ for linings.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 137, 155 and 164.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, appropriate subclasses for furnaces for
    carrying out chemical reactions.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 140+ for restoring or repairing by a
    coating process.

    432,    Heating, subclass 3 for a residual process of heater operation
    including a step of repairing, converting or assembling the heater.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, appropriate subclasses for ceramic
    compositions, per se.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Class 523, subclass 141 for a composition containing a
    synthetic resin or natural rubber having utility for a metallurgical
    furnace or oven apparatus or to processes of preparing said composition.


CLS 264/31
TXT Processes under the class definition directed to the formation in situ of
    an erected structure or a part thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are only processes for forming those
    structures which are not intended to be moved or transported after the
    final molding step.  For example, forming a prefabricated wall is not
    included here but placed in appropriate subclasses below, while forming a
    wall or portion thereof in its final intended position is included here.
    Forming parts by a molding operation and uniting in situ by a second
    molding operation is also included here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for processes of forming furnace linings in situ.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 745.01+ for
    particular processes of forming or assembling an in situ structure.  The
    line between Class 264 and Class 52 is: Class 52 takes (1) forming in situ
    erected building structures by uniting preformed modules, e.g., bricks,
    cinder blocks, etc., and (2) other processes involving molding when
    combined with a building formation step which is more than a mere
    perfecting step for the molding such as (a) forming elements by molding,
    and joining the molded elements together, or to another element, by
    nonmolding means and (b) uniting a mold form with the surface of the molded
    body and permitting the form to remain as a portion of the building
    construction. Class 264 takes process of molding, per se, including forming
    building structures in situ when such processes include only molding steps.
     For example, processes for embedding elements such as reinforcements in
    the molded product or molding structural elements and then uniting the
    elements by a molding operation are within the scope of this class.

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 1+ for in situ construction engineering
    type molds.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 72+ for processes
    of building roads.  The line between Classes 264 and 404, is as follows:
    Class 404, provides for processes of forming roads except that Class 264
    provides for such road making processes which include only the steps of
    molding monolithic uniform composition structure and/or compacting,
    treating, stressing or surface working the material to perfect the molding
    or curing of the molded body.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, appropriate subclasses for
    processes of earthworking, e.g., digging, filling, etc., combined with
    molding, especially subclass 222 for a method of casting a structure in a
    marine environment; and subclasses 233+ for a method of casting a pile or
    pier in situ.


CLS 264/32
TXT Processes under subclass 31 in which the structure formed includes either
    an arched or domed portion or a portion which is vertically cylindrical.


CLS 264/33
TXT Processes under subclass 31 in which at least a portion of the mold is
    removed from the structure and repositioned and used to form a second
    portion of the structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for processes of sequentially molding different portions of a
    structure by using different molds.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 20+ for molds for forming a wall
    progressively.


CLS 264/34
TXT Processes under subclass 31 in which portions of the in situ structure are
    formed in sequentially distinct steps.

    (1)     Note.  Incremental as well as diverse molding steps are included
    herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for processes in which the sequential formation steps are
    accomplished by repositioning mold parts

    250     and 308, for incremental molding of structures other than in situ.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 15 for mold for forming a facing on product
    or existing structure.


CLS 264/35
TXT Processes under subclass 31 in which a preform member or a portion thereof
    becomes embedded in or united to the molded material and remains to form a
    structural part of the product.

    (1)     Note.  Embedded elements which serve solely as reinforcement and
    have no other structural purpose are not considered proper for this
    subclass but are placed according to the molding operations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    271,    for processes of shaping material around a preform to surround or
    embed said preform.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), for processes in which
    structural elements which make up an exterior portion of the final
    construction are used to retain the molding material and remain in place
    after the molding operation.  Pipes or tubes embedded in the molding
    material are considered proper for Class 264.

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 83+ for molding apparatus for uniting a
    preform with fluent material.


CLS 264/36
TXT Processes under the class definition in which a worn, damaged, or used
    article is restored or repaired for reuse in a similar capacity without
    altering or destroying the over-all configuration of said article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for processes for repairing furnace linings.

    37+,    for processes involving reuse of articles or article forming
    material in which flash, trim or product rejects are recycled and put
    through an overall mixing and/or reshaping, and see the notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    94+ for repairing by a laminating operation.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 153+ for
    similar subject matter combined with recording on a restored storage medium
    element.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclass 50 for a
    lipstick, crayon, or the like combined with means to reshape the working
    end.

    427,    Coating Processes, for restoring or repairing by a coating
    operation.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 63 for a product
    in which a hole or depression has been patched and subclass 912 (a
    cross-reference art collection) for a product having a puncture healing
    layer.


CLS 264/37
TXT Processes under the class definition in which excess, flash, trim, rejected
    products or used molding materials resulting from an intermittent or
    continuous process or treating materials therefor, are recycled or reused
    in the molding operation with or without purification, reclamation or
    separation of the desired constitutents from contaminants.

    (1)     Note.  To be placed herein, a patent must recite a recycling of
    material employed previously in the molding process.  Purification, per se,
    of a material is not within the scope of this subclass.  See the search
    notes below.

    (2)     Note.  The use of scrap or worn materials, per se, e.g., used
    tires, are not considered to involve a recycling step.  Such patents will
    be classified on the basis of the process and/or the nature of the
    material.  See the search notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169+,   for processes of forming continuous or indefinite length articles
    including the step of preventing equipment fouling accumulations or
    deposits.

    179,    for processes of purifying or replenishing a liquid bath for
    receiving extruded material.

    195,    for processes of chemically treating viscose articles which may
    include removal of contaminants therefrom.

    349,    for processes within the class definition which relate to mixing,
    kneading or mulling of materials.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclass 25 for conversion
    of waste by heat to products which include a solid carbon char.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, particularly Class 521,
    subclasses 40+ for processes of reclaiming a synthetic resin.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclasses 240+ for a process
    wherein refuse is converted to a mixture of hydrocarbons, usually for use
    as a fuel.


CLS 264/38
TXT Processes under subclass 37 in which the bath contents or ingredient
    thereof into which article forming material is extruded directly is reused
    by recycling thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179,    for processes including purifying or replenishing of liquid baths,
    per se.


CLS 264/39
TXT Processes under the class definition which include a step of cleaning or
    polishing or otherwise mechanically or physically treating the apparatus or
    a working surface thereof in order to restore, maintain or bring said
    apparatus to a desired or necessary operating condition.

    (1)     Note.  Preheating a mold or maintaining a mold at a temperature
    sufficiently high to shape thermoplastic material is deemed to be a common
    expedient in the art and patents reciting these steps will be classified on
    other steps.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein are patents reciting a step of precooling a
    mold to return it to operating temperature and the use of intermittently
    applied purging compositions as well as physical and solvent removal of
    contaminants, incrustations and/or surfaces of molds, per se.

    (3)     Note.  The use of mold lubricants applied, per se, or incorporated
    in the molding composition is provided for elsewhere, see the search notes
    below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for processes including the step of cooling to 32oF or OoC.

    85,     for processes which include the step of flushing of a mold with an
    inert (nonsolvent) liquid.

    169+,   for processes which include the step of preventing equipment
    fouling accumulations and deposits in formation of continuous or indefinite
    length articles, which may include e.g., addition of an ingredient to
    spinning composition or bath or spinnerette of a particular structure or
    composition.

    300,    for casting, molding or die shaping, per se, in which a lubricant
    or release agent is incorporated directly into the molding composition.

    327,    for processes including the step of differential heating or cooling
    in the mold.

    338,    for processes which recite employment of specific mold coatings or
    linings which may be disclosed to be lubricants or antistick agents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 27 for processes including cleaning
    of apparatus employed in glass working.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses for
    cleaning of a mold, per se.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 199+ for processes in
    papermakng which include an apparatus conditioning or preparing step.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 121 for preconditioning processes for
    metal casting apparatus and subclass 158 for apparatus of that class with
    cleaning means.


CLS 264/40.1
TXT Processes under the class definition include the step of sampling, audibly
    or chemically testing or inspecting, or otherwise physically or
    mechanically determining some variable condition in a shaped article,
    molding material, the mold or shaping surface.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are processes for determining imperfections
    or for determining completeness of a reaction or manipulation as well as
    determinations of undesired variations which activate correction
    mechanisms. Recitations of optimum or desired temperatures of pressures or
    proportions of ingredients are considered nominal only and are classified
    with the disclosed process on some other basis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 407 for processes including a step of
    testing or indicating combined with mechanical manufacture.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for testing, per se.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 49 and 198 for
    processes of testing or inspecting combined wtih a paper making operation.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 79 for metal casting operations employing
    a pore producing agent.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 1+ for
    processes of chemical testing.


CLS 264/40.3
TXT Processes under subclass 40.1 wherein the movement or shape of a molding
    material is controlled by direct contact of a fluid.


CLS 264/40.4
TXT Processes under subclass 40.1 wherein the weight or volume of the molding
    material is measured.

    (1)     Note.  Operations of a container to a desired capacity or
    maintaining the molding material at a desired capacity is considered to be
    proper for this subclass.


CLS 264/40.5
TXT Processes under subclass 40.1 wherein either the position of a mold part to
    form a shaping cavity or pressure of a mold part on the molding material is
    controlled.

    (1)     Note.  Controlling the relative position of a doctor blade with
    respect to the molding material is included in this subclass.


CLS 264/40.6
TXT Processes under subclass 40.1 wherein the introduction or removal of heat
    from the molding material is controlled.


CLS 264/40.7
TXT Processes under subclass 40.1 wherein the movement of the molding material
    or a substrate supporting the molding material in a continuous process is
    controlled.

    (1)     Note.  A continuous process for this subclass is either (1) set up
    for repetitive operations or (2) wherein an endless flow of molding
    material leaves the molding cavity.


CLS 264/41
TXT Processes under the class definition including the step of forming pores or
    voids in an article or material, said pore forming being effected
    internally by occluding or incorporating void forming or void producing
    elements or ingredients randomly throughout the plastic article forming
    material.

    (1)     Note.  Where particulate material is united leaving spaces between
    the individual particles, the patent does not go here, but to subclass 109.

    (2)     Note.  Processes wherein an article or material is mechanically
    performed to form voids are provided for in subclass 138.

    (3)     Note.  Pore forming when not combined with significant molding is
    provided for in various classes and the general lines between those classes
    and Class 264 is followed even though the step of forming pores is recited.

    (4)     Note.  Included within the scope of this and indented subclasses is
    enlarging voids already present in a material by expanding gases contained
    therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    317,    for processes generally which involves the destruction of material
    which may leave a space or void.

    321,    for processes of reshaping previously foamed material.

    610,    for burning, vaporatizasin, or melting of embedded element or core
    to form a nonrandom void during firing of an inorganic shaped article or
    preform.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, subclass
    296 for pore forming in abrasive materials.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 122, 601+ and 672+
    for pore forming, per se, in compositions within the definitions of the
    class.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    77+ for a pore forming step in combination with a laminating operation.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclass 101 for a pore forming
    step within the class definition.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 3+ for a step of gas incorporation in mixing
    mortar.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, subclasses 39 and 80+ for pore-forming
    ceramic compositions.

    521,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 50+ for pore
    forming, per se, in a synthetic resin or natural resin composition.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclass 255
    for the forming of pores or voids in the production of a material
    containing hazardous  or toxic waste for purposes of  containment.


CLS 264/42
TXT Processes under subclass 41 wherein the material that is foamed is
    inorganic in nature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332     and 333, for general processes for molding inorganic materials
    employing heat or pressure.


CLS 264/43
TXT Processes under subclass 42 wherein the inorganic material is heated to a
    sintering or fusion temperature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    603+,   for vitrifying or sintering processes of shaped bodies.


CLS 264/44
TXT Processes under subclass 43 wherein the pores are formed by burning out an
    entrained combustible material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    610,    for processes directed to firing, sintering or vitrifying in which
    an embedded part is burned out to leave a void.

    656+,   wherein a binder is used to hold together particulate material
    prior to firing and which is removed during firing.


CLS 264/45.1
TXT Processes under subclass 41 directed to the production of a plural layered
    or multipart article.


CLS 264/45.2
TXT Processes under subclass 45.1 wherein a mold part is inflatable or
    expandable, or an inflatable form is used as a base on which foaming
    material solidifies.

    (1)     Note.  Generally the inflatable or expandable feature is to
    facilitate insertion or removal of a plural layered of multipart article
    which is formed in a mold.


CLS 264/45.3
TXT Processes under subclass 45.1 wherein particles, fibers, or batts are
    incorporated within the foamed mass in a random distribution.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46.4+,  for a process of forming fibers into a rigid layer and coating the
    rigid layer with foam in a separate step.


CLS 264/45.4
TXT Processes under subclass 45.1 wherein the material to be foamed is in the
    form of beads or particles which unite when expanded.


CLS 264/45.5
TXT Processes under subclass 45.1 wherein:

    (1)     The surface of a preformed material is treated so as to form a foam
    or,

    (2)     Wherein a foam from a single foamable material is formed and the
    density of the foam at its exterior surface is different from the density
    of the foam in the interior thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Processes involving the preparation of different density
    foams found herein generally involve the collapsing or prevention of the
    expansion of foaming material in a closed mold.


CLS 264/45.6
TXT Processes under subclass 45.5 wherein the surface foam layer is produced by
    exposing the preformed base material to a treating agent.


CLS 264/45.7
TXT Processes under subclass 45.1 wherein foaming is caused in a rotational
    mold or in which the feedstock is forced into the mold by centrifugal force.


CLS 264/45.8
TXT Processes under subclass 45.1 wherein a continuous, running or indefinite
    length body is formed by an uninterrupted molding step or a sequential
    series of steps is preformed in a continuous manner.

    (1)     Note.  The final article produced need not be of indefinite length,
    as for example, wherein the continuous, running or indefinite length body
    is cut into predetermined length pieces.

    (2)     Note.  Extrusion is generally assumed to produce an indefinite
    length product.


CLS 264/45.9
TXT Processes under subclass 45.8 wherein material is shaped by forcing a
    supply of said material through an orifice.


CLS 264/46.1
TXT Processes under subclass 45.9 wherein following extrusion the extrudate is
    further shaped by the application of force.


CLS 264/46.2
TXT Processes under subclass 45.8 wherein a foam is shaped by two moving
    surfaces.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are, for example, belts, rolls, or between a
    calender and a roll or a roll and a flat moving surface, etc.


CLS 264/46.3
TXT Processes under subclass 46.2 wherein shaping takes place between a pair of
    coating continuously moving surfaces and at least one of the surfaces is
    generally cylindrical and revolves about the longitudinal axis of the
    cylinder with rolling motion relative to the material shaped.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein, for example, is shaping between a pair of
    rolls, a roll and an endless belt or by a calender.


CLS 264/46.4
TXT Processes under subclass 45.1 in which a molding material remains united
    with a preform or solidified layer to constitute a composite article, one
    of whose layers is porous.

    (1)     Note.  Solidified layer includes any collection of material given
    form by a shape defining means and possessing at least a minimal degree of
    cohesiveness, for example, layers formed by slush molding, spraying or
    layup on a mold or more generally any material that would be a preform, but
    for the fact that it remains in the mold in which it is formed.


CLS 264/46.5
TXT Processes under subclass 46.1 wherein two distinct preformed bodies or
    solidified layers with opposing surfaces are positioned in a spaced
    relationship with each other and a porous material at least partially fills
    the space between them, said porous material acting to unite the preforms
    or solidfied layers and being contained at least in part by said preforms
    or solidified layers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45.8+,  for uniting spaced preforms where the preforms are of indefinite
    length.


CLS 264/46.6
TXT Processes under subclass 46.4 wherein foam material is deposited in a
    recess or cavity in a preform or solidified layers such that the preform or
    solidified layer forms the surface of a fully or partially foam filled
    article.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes filling hollow articles with foam and
    making foam filled or plugged articles.


CLS 264/46.7
TXT Processes under subclass 46.4 wherein a metal part or a material which
    lends strength or rigidity to the final article is covered with foam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46.5,   for panels with reinforcement provided by the surface layer.


CLS 264/46.8
TXT Processes under subclass 46.5 wherein the surface to be coated or filled is
    subjected to deformation caused by heat and a pressure differential.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is vacuum forming, etc.


CLS 264/46.9
TXT Processes under subclass 46.4 wherein the preform or solidified layer is
    curvelinear.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are preforms or solidied layers which are
    circular, toroidal, annular, etc.


CLS 264/48
TXT Processes under subclass 41 wherein the exterior or outside surface of a
    porous body is subjected to a chemical or physical treatment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232+    and 340+, for processes of treating nonporous bodies.


CLS 264/49
TXT Processes under subclass 41 in which the voids are formed by subjecting
    embedded solids to a treatment which changes the physical dimension or
    state of the solids and causes the space the solids previously occupied to
    be left as voids.

    (1)     Note.  If the occluded solid is removed by changing it to a gas the
    process is here if the void is produced by the solid, rather than by the
    expansion of the gas.  See subclass 51 for processes in which a generated
    gas forms the voids.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51+,    for processes in which embedded solids are changed to a gas and the
    expanding gas creates voids and see (1) Note above.


CLS 264/50
TXT Processes under subclass 41 in which a pore forming gas is introduced or
    forced by mechanical means into a plastic material before the molding and
    solidification operation.

    (1)     Note.  Operations including shaping and solidification of a froth,
    per se, with no pore forming steps are classified below on manipulative
    molding steps and cross-referenced here when pertinent.


CLS 264/51
TXT Processes under subclass 41 wherein the voids are formed or enlarged by
    occluded gas which may be generated or expanded.


CLS 264/52
TXT Processes under subclass 51 wherein the expansion of the porous material is
    inhibited by the presence of a chemical or mechanical means other than mere
    confines of the mold, per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for controlling expansion by volumetric mold capacity changes.


CLS 264/53
TXT Processes under subclass 51 in which the voids are formed by a liquid to
    gas change of state, i.e., vaporization of a liquid incorporated into the
    molding material.


CLS 264/54
TXT Processes under subclass 51 in which the voids are formed by the generation
    of gas by a chemical reaction of gas producing reactants or agents
    incorporated in the molding material.


CLS 264/55
TXT Processes under subclass 54 in which the chemical blowing to produce the
    pores is effected in two or more stages or in which the expansion takes
    place by means of varying expansion space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     for incremental expansion by means of an expansion retarder.


CLS 264/68
TXT Processes under the class definition where heat is produced by moving
    contact between surfaces of plural bodies.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    73 for processes of friction welding to unite or laminate plural bodies.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 112+ for a process of welding
    metals by friction.


CLS 264/69
TXT Processes under the class definition which include the step of applying or
    effecting an oscillation or to and fro movement to the article forming
    material in a mold, or to the molding surface, or applying a sudden impact
    to the mold.

    (1)     Note.  For agglomerating of particles by agitating or tumbling, see
    this class, subclass 117 and the notes thereto.

    (2)     Note.  Tamping, per se, is considered a form of pressure
    application only and is excluded from this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  Processes including a sliding movement between a
    reciprocating mold and a concrete surface to give a trowelling effect are
    included herein.

    (4)     Note.  Patents claiming  "rapid" or "high frequency" vibration, per
    se, with no disclosure as to the particular frequencies employed will be
    placed herein.  To complete a search, however, see this class subclasses
    442+  and the definition and notes thereto, and see (3) Note above with
    reference to the use of sonic or supersonic wave energy in the process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for formation of particulate material from a molten or liquid mass
    by vibration or agitation.

    117,    and see (1) Note above.

    442+,   and see (4) Note, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 71.1 and 477 of vibratorially treating
    metal casting material.


CLS 264/70
TXT Processes under subclass 69 wherein the treated article is one formed in a
    continuous manner or is of a running or indefinite length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165+,   for processes, per se, of forming continuous or indefinite length
    articles.


CLS 264/71
TXT Processes under subclass 69 in which the mold and its contents are vibrated
    or in which there is a reciprocal motion between a moving mold surface and
    the material therein.


CLS 264/72
TXT Processes under subclass 71 wherein said mold vibration or reciprocation is
    discontinuous; of varying intensity or the vibrations are of different
    character, one from the other.


CLS 264/73
TXT Processes under the class definition wherein a random, haphazard coloring
    effect is obtained as a result of and during a shaping operation.

    (1)     Note.  The color pattern of the product produced by this subclass
    is random usually because at least one of the components is rendered fluent
    by the shaping operation and there is random or uncontrolled flow of the
    coloring agent.  Processes in which controlled pattern multicolored
    articles are made by compositing or molding plural materials may be found
    in subclasses 245+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     for processes including a dyeing step or the incorporation of dye
    susceptable material.

    245+,   and see (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, for compositions resembling
    marble by reason of the mere mixing of named ingredients.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 402+ for apparatus for applying a
    marbled coating by means of a floating film of coating material.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    63 for processes of manually arranging differently colored or shaped
    discrete elements to form a design.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 256+ for processes of forming
    nonuniform coatings.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet which may have a random variegated color, especially subclasses 141+
    for a textured or rough surface of variegated color.


CLS 264/74
TXT Processes under subclass 73 wherein the variegated coloring occurs only in
    the surface portion of the article; i.e., does not extend entirely through
    the article.


CLS 264/75
TXT Processes under subclass 73 wherein the variegated coloring is produced by
    forcing differently colored materials through a shaping orifice.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176+,   for processes of forming continuous or indefinite length articles,
    per se, by extrusion through a shaping orifice.

    323,    for processes of extruding finite articles, per se.


CLS 264/76
TXT Processes under subclass 73 wherein the variegated coloring is produced by
    sheeting differently colored materials between coacting rollers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175,    for processes of forming a continuous or running length article,
    per se, by a calendering operation.


CLS 264/77
TXT Processes under subclass 73 wherein the molding operation which produces
    the random variegated coloring effect involves the application of pressure
    to the differently colored materials in a confined space.


CLS 264/78
TXT Processes under class definition which include the step of (1) dyeing an
    article or workpiece or (2) incorporating a dye susceptible ingredient in
    the molding material.

    (1)     Note.  The dye susceptible ingredient incorporated into the molding
    material is not in itself a colored ingredient or a dye, per se, but is
    capable of subsequent treatment or reaction to form a colored body, (e.g.,
    vat or leuco dyes, mordants, etc.).

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes processes in which a dye susceptable
    material is incorporated into a spinning solution which is then spun or
    extruded into a coagulating bath which contains a reactant for the dye
    susceptable material to produce the color, even if the reactant is the only
    specific ingredient of the bath which is named.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73+,    for processes in which a random variegated effect is achieved
    during the molding or shaping operation.

    132,    for processes including the step of applying an indicia or design
    to the shaped article.

    245+,   for producing composite structure with multicolored surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, particularly subclasses 154, 489 and 497 and see the
    notes and search notes thereto.  See also the main definitions to this
    Class 264, section II, A 2. For weighting or mordanting of materials
    classified therein, see Class 8, subclass 443.  Processes which include a
    nominal or broadly recited molding step combined with the step of dyeing
    the formed or coagulated filament are provided for in Class 8.


CLS 264/79
TXT Processes under class definition wherein the escape of a volatile component
    of a molded article composition through the surface of the article is
    prevented, minimized or slowed by the application of a relatively
    impermeable layer to said surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129+,   for processes including the step of coating the formed article
    which coating may act inherently to perform various functions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    90 for use of a barrier layer to prevent migration or bleeding between
    laminae.


CLS 264/80
TXT Processes under the class definition wherein at least a portion of a
    preform is (1) subjected to direct contact by an open flame or (2)
    contacted by a heat which chemically decomposes a surface portion to shape
    the preform.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     for processes including a carbonizing step.

    234+,   for processes including subsequent temperature changes.

    345+,   for processes directed to treating shaped or solid articles by a
    temperature change.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclass 140 for processes of singeing or carbonizing
    of textiles.

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 423 for processes including discarding or
    destroying of material.

    125,    Stone Working, subclass 1 for flame cutting of stone-like materials.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 329+ for flame treatment of wood.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    82 for flame treatment combined with a laminating step.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 223+ for coating processes including
    flame contact.


CLS 264/81
TXT Processes under the class definition wherein material employed in forming
    an article is applied to a shaping surface in a gaseous or vapor state.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129+,   for vapor depositing a coating on a surface of an article out of a
    mold.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 46 for metal deposition processes
    projecting vapor onto a shaping surface.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 248.1+ for processes of coating with
    vapor, gas or smoke.


CLS 264/82
TXT Processes under the class definition in which a workpiece or molding
    material is subjected to treatment with an applied gas or vapor, which gas
    or vapor reacts chemically with at least the surface of the workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  Processes in which steam generated by heating wet concrete
    would not bring a patent here.  To be placed in this subclass steam or
    vapor must be added from an external source or be created from water other
    than that in the concrete.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85,     for processes utilizing an inert gaseous atmosphere.

    232,    for processes including subsequent disparate treatment of article
    after working, shaping or molding.

    333,    for mere heating of hydraulic inorganic settable materials.

    340+,   for treatment, per se, of shaped or solid articles.

    643,    for processes  directed to firing, sintering or vitrifying  of
    shaped articles or preforms with coating by vapor contacting said body
    after firing.

    646+,   for processes of utlizing a chemically reative atmosphere other
    than air, per se, during sintering to convert precursor to ceramic material.

    674+,   for processes involving specified composition of heating
    atmosphere, other than air.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses for
    reactive steam treatment of inorganic materials when combined with a
    broadly recited molding step.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 248.1+ for processes of coating with
    a vapor, gas, or smoke.


CLS 264/83
TXT Processes under subclass 82 wherein the work or material being reacted with
    a gas or vapor is an organic material.


CLS 264/84
TXT Processes under the class definition wherein material is consolidated by an
    explosive force or detonation which produces a large sudden compacting
    pressure on said material.


CLS 264/85
TXT Processes under the class definition wherein (1) a named nonreactive gas is
    used as the environment for the shaping, working, or treating operation on
    a material or (2) the ambient atmosphere of a mold is replaced by a
    nonreactive liquid.

    (1)     Note.  To be placed in this subclass as an original patent the
    invention claimed must specify a particular inert atmosphere such as, for
    example, nitrogen or carbon dioxide.  The term "inert" alone in a claim is
    not sufficient to place the patent in this subclass.  Also air and steam
    have been excluded from this subclass even though they may be claimed as
    inert materials.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for solvent flushing a mold to dissolve contaminants from its
    surface.

    65,     for processes for firing or vitrifying wherein the composition of
    the atmosphere is controlled.


CLS 264/86
TXT Processes under the class definition wherein a liquid component or liquid
    vehicle for a moldable material is removed or separated from the material
    through a foraminous shaping surface.

    (1)     Note.  The shaping surface for this subclass may have holes
    extending there-through as in the case of a perforated sheet, or the body
    of the mold may be absorbent as in the case of a porous plaster mold which
    will absorb water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91+,    for processes for forming articles by uniting particles carried in
    a gas stream.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, appropriate subclasses, for
    forming fibrous felted products from slurries by draining the liquid
    carrier through a foraminous mold surface.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses for
    processes for dewatering slurries to produce a formless mass of material.


CLS 264/87
TXT Processes under subclass 86 which include the use of pneumatic pressure or
    that created by a vacuum effect directly applied to the liquid to aid in
    removal of the liquid through the mold surface.


CLS 264/101
TXT Processes under the class definition including the application of a reduced
    pressure, below atmospheric, to a workpiece or molding material to effect
    the chemical and/or physical properties or the condition thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87,     88+ and 335, for other art relating to the application of fluid
    pressure differential to the work.


CLS 264/102
TXT Processes under subclass 101 in which the vacuum is directly applied to a
    element or material to remove trapped gases or prevent gases from being
    entrained or trapped in a workpiece or material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    286 for utilizing a vacuum to remove trapped gases from between laminae.


CLS 264/103
TXT Processes under the class definition which include a step of twining,
    braiding, plying or twisting multiple elements about each other or the step
    of textile fabric formation.

    (1)     Note.  The fabric formation may be by weaving, knitting, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    295,    for molding followed by a bending or twisting step and 339 for
    bending or twisting processes, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, and the various species classes related
    thereto, for textile operations, per se, not combined with a significant
    step for this class.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 175+, 190,
    193, and 196+ for a stock material product in the form of a single or
    plural layer web or sheet embodying mechanically interengaged strands or
    strand-portions (e.g., weave, or knit).

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 181+ for a woven fabric and subclasses 304+ for a knit fabric.


CLS 264/104
TXT Processes under the class definition wherein a material which is capable of
    carrying an electric current is plastically shaped to form an article in
    which such electric current carrying function is utilized.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171.1+, for processes of forming continuous or indefinite length
    straitified or layered articles around a strand-like or filament like
    preform.

    272,    for processes of encapsulating an electrical component in shaped
    material.

    614+,   for processes of forming electrical articles including the step of
    vitrification, sintering or firing of shaped inorganic preforms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 253.1+ for making a metal wire or
    filament by die-extruding it.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    47+ for processes of making electrical conductors of indefinite length not
    otherwise provided for, see (2) Note therein.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 291+ for
    electrodes for electrolytic apparatus made of plastic compositions.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 500+ for compositions specialized for use
    as electrical conductors or emitters or electrical devices for such use
    defined solely in terms of the compositions of which they are composed.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 88+ for electrodes
    for arc furnaces which are formed from plastic materials.  Subclasses
    592.1+ of Class 29 constitute the generic place for making electrical
    devices, including electrodes, from metal and include processes which
    include a metal working operation.

    419,    Power Metallurgy Processes, subclass 4 for processes of making
    filaments or fibers from metal containing powers by pressure and heat.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 58+ for processes of forming
    electrical products by a coating operation.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    subclasses 35+, 46+ and 60+ and the classes referred to in the notes
    thereto for other classes which provide for method an apparatus for making
    electrodes for electric lamp and electric space discharge devices.


CLS 264/105
TXT Processes under subclass 104 wherein at least a part of the
    electroconductive material is conductive carbon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     for processes under the class definition which include a
    carbonizing step.


CLS 264/106
TXT Processes under the class definition wherein an article has sound
    reproducing grooves formed on its surface by a molding operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for processes of repairing or restoring articles for use which
    involve removal of the sound grooves in a record and appropriate subclasses
    under 239+ for molding operations which produce articles, per se, which may
    be disclosed to have utility in making sound producing records.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, sublass 37 for sound recording
    compositions, per se.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclass 68 for electroforming methods of
    producing sound records.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 84+ for
    dynamic recording.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 64.1+ for a
    disc which does not have the sound track.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Class 523, subclass 174 for a composition containing a
    synthetic resin or natural rubber having utility as a phonograph record
    molding composition or to processes of preparing said composition.


CLS 264/107
TXT Processes under subclass 106 wherein the molding operation is performed on
    a solid preform to produce a disk-shaped record.


CLS 264/108
TXT Processes under the class definition in which particulate material or
    filler in a flowable plastic mass is aligned, arranged or oriented while in
    said mass to give a desired physical effect.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for processes in which electrical or wave energy is applied
    directly to fibers or other particulate material to move, align or effect
    deposition of said fibers or particles.

    109+,   for processes of randomly associating particles.


CLS 264/109
TXT Processes under the class definition directed to bonding to each other
    individually distinct particles which are associated randomly by bulk
    handling or deposition to form a layer containing a major amount of the
    particulate material.

    (1)     Note.  The relative sizes of the particles are immaterial, however
    the particles must retain their discrete nature during the associating and
    bonding operation.  Further, the mere presence of particles in a liquid
    carrier is not sufficent for this subclass (e.g., fillers or slurries),
    this being considered to be the molding of a fluent or liquid mass rather
    than the association of particles and is provided for in appropriate
    subclasses below.

    (2)     Note.  The material is usually but not necessarily in the form of
    fibers or granules and bonding of the particulate material may be effected
    by applying an adhesive or by the latent adhesive charateristics of the
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for processes of forming solid particulate material by liquid or
    melt comminuting combined with uniting of said bulk assembled or deposited
    particles.

    91,     for processes of applying vacuum or suction to bulk assembled
    particles.

    131,    for a molding process combined with a step of coating with
    particulate material.

    239+,   for processes of molding (1) plastic compositions containing
    particulate material as a filler; (2) colloidal or nonsettling dispersions,
    e.g., rubber latex or clay; and (3) plastic particulate material which lose
    their identity during molding to form a homogeneous product and see (1)
    Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses 144+ for a process of
    bringing particles together, for example by air laying, and see the notes
    in subclasses 144+ for the line between this class (264) and Class 19.

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, subclasses 313+ for agglomerating
    processes provided for in that class.

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclasses 550+ for a solid fuel
    consolidation or shaping process which goes beyond mere molding of a
    starting composition, especially subclasses 596+ for a process which
    includes pressing using a specified condition or technique.

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, for a
    process of making an abrasive tool, material, or composition for abrading
    purposes.  Also see ``Search Class'' under the definition of Class 51 for
    related fields of search for preparing abrasive material stock.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 443+ for processes of forming glass
    fibers or filaments from a glass melt combined with coating, which may
    include adhesively bonding the fibers using any bonding medium or
    autogenously to form a glass fiber felt or mat; subclasses 36+ for
    processes of fusing glass fiber or particles to each other to form a felt.
    See also the main definition to this class (264) for further delineation of
    the line with Class 65.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, see especially the notes thereto for the locus of other art
    relating to particle uniting and subclasses 228+ for a consolidated metal
    particle composition.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 35+ for a method of intermingling and/or
    deforming particulate material to mechanically unite the particles together
    at their respective interfaces without use of a binder.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    62.2 for a process of forming a felted article by simultaneously uniting of
    particles combined with the step of adhesively bonding the felted article
    to another part.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 100+ for a process of
    forming an interfelted fibrous product, e.g., paper interfelted fibrous
    product, e.g., paper from a liquid fibrous suspension.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclasses 5+ for a process
    for a mechanical pressing or briquetting of solid carbonaceous material
    combined with a thermolytic distillation operation.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, subclasses 61+ processes for making
    articles from metal particles by pressure without heat and subclass 1 for
    similar processes which use heat.

    425,    Plastic Articles or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 80.1+ for corresponding apparatus.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 180 for processes of coating utilizing
    solid particles or fibers.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 87 for a product
    with a pile or nap type surface and including particulate matter,
    subclasses 143+ for a stock material in the form of a single or plural
    layer web or sheet which has a textured or rough surface comprising
    particulate matter, subclasses 323+ for a composite web or sheet including
    a component having structurally defined particles, and subclasses 402+ for
    structurally defined or coated particles.


CLS 264/110
TXT Processes under subclass 109 wherein the particulate material is mica.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    125,    Stone Working, subclass 24, for a process of separating mica or
    mica-like materials along its line of cleavage.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 4 for a
    process of comminuting or disintegrating micaceous material.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 378, for a process of exfoliating micaceous
    material.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 324, for a stock
    material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or sheet
    including a component comprising structurally defined mica, subclass 363
    for a structurally defined mica flake or mass or layer thereof, and
    subclasses 454+ for a nonstructural composite sheet or web including a
    layer comprising mica.


CLS 264/112
TXT Processes under subclass 109 directed to forming an article having plural
    layers by molding; at least one layer being formed by bonding of randomly
    associated particles to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for processes of uniting particles including the step of formation
    of said particles from a molten or liquid mass, or other glass.

    35,     for forming composite structural installations in situ from
    inorganic hydraulic settable materials.

    60,     for forming a composite structure from particles combined with a
    firing step.

    241,    for processes of forming composite structures generally.


CLS 264/113
TXT Processes under subclass 112 which includes forming at least two distinct
    layers or strata of the formed article by a particle uniting operation.

    (1)     Note.  A process of simultaneously forming two layers of
    particulate material and uniting them at their source of formation is
    within the scope of this subclass.


CLS 264/114
TXT Processes under subclass 109 which include the use of centrifugal force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    311,    for a process of reshaping or molding other materials utilizing
    centrifugal force.


CLS 264/115
TXT Processes under subclass 109 including a step of initially forming the
    particles from nonparticulate material or liberating them from a fiber or
    particle containing material.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this and indented subclasses are, for example,
    carding, grinding, cutting, etc., as well as forming particles by a molding
    operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for processes including a step of forming particles from a molten
    or liquid mass other than glass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses .3+ for a process of
    severing filaments of indefinite length to produce discrete fibers.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 376+ for processes of forming glass
    fibers or filaments, particularly subclasses 443+ and 454+ for processes of
    forming glass fiber felt or mat by bulk assembly. For further delineation
    of the line between Class 65 and Class 264 see the class definition for
    Class 65, section III B.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 1+ for processes of
    chemical liberation, recovery or purification of natural cellulose or
    fibrous material.


CLS 264/116
TXT Processes under subclass 115 in which the particles are liberated from a
    previously manufactured article of associated interfelted fibers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140+,   for processes including a cutting step to form a flaked, shredded
    or pelleted product.


CLS 264/117
TXT Processes under subclass 109 directed to tumbling or otherwise agitating a
    mass of fine discrete particle to cause adherence of the particles to one
    another thereby producing larger size on particles.

    (1)     Note.  The above process is usually referred to in the art as
    agglomeration or accretion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, subclasses 313+ for a process of
    agglomerating finely divided solid nonmetallic elements or inorganic
    compounds to coalesce the elements or compounds not involving use of a
    binder which remains as part of the final product.  The use of a fugitive
    binder, e.g., water would not exclude the process from Class 23.

    71,     Chemistry:  Fertilizers, appropriate subclasses for processes of
    agglomerating fertilizer particles.


CLS 264/118
TXT Processes under subclass 109 which include the step of cutting, grooving,
    breaking or comminuting the article formed from the united particles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115     and 116, for processes pertaining to formation of particles which
    are subsequently united to form a final product.

    138+,   for a molding process combined with the step of mechanically
    removing material from a preform or forming a comminuted product.

    140+,   for processes including a cutting step to form a flaked, shredded
    or pelleted product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses, e.g., subclass 4 for comminuting of laminated or fibrous
    material and see sections 4 and 5 of the definitions of Class 241.


CLS 264/119
TXT Processes under subclass 109 which include the step of reshaping or surface
    embossing the formed product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239+,   for a process of mechanically shaping workpiece, particularly
    subclasses 284 and 293 for embossing and 320+ for reshaping solid work.


CLS 264/120
TXT Processes under subclass 109 which include applying pressure (1) which
    varies stepwise in intensity or (2) intermittently or sequentially.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    312 for a laminating process including sequential different pressure
    applying steps.


CLS 264/121
TXT Processes under subclass 109 using a moving gas stream or current to convey
    particulate material onto a collecting surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses 144+ and see the search
    note to Class 19 in subclass 109 of this class (264).

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclass 197 miscellaneous processes
    involving conveying solid material with the assistance of a forced
    propelling fluid current.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 80.1+ for a molding apparatus comprising means utilizing an air
    current for randomly associating particulate material on a shaping surface.


CLS 264/122
TXT Processes under subclass 109 involving the use of (1) two or more kinds of
    particles differing in composition or (2) particles of the same composition
    but disclosed to be of different particle sizes.

    (1)     Note.  Where particles of different composition are employed, these
    may bond autogenously at their surfaces, a liquid binder or adhesive may be
    used or one of the kinds of particles may act as a binder by, for example,
    losing its identity as a particle by melting and flowing about or between
    the remaining solid particles.

    (2)     Note.  Where different sizes of particles of similar composition
    are employed, said difference in size of the particles must be set out,
    since it is understood that normally in particles handled in mass or bulk,
    there will be minute differences in particle size although the overall
    appearance thereof would indicate homogeneity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 141+ for processes of
    uniting plural different fibers in a paper making operation.


CLS 264/123
TXT Processes under subclass 109 which include the step of treating the surface
    of particulate material and/or a dry adhesive coating previously applied to
    the particulate material, to render the surface of the material tacky
    thereby causing bonding of the individual particles to each other.

    (1)     Note.  The particulate material, usually thermo-plastic, is treated
    with a fluid material which is not an adhesive, per se, and usually is a
    solvent for the material, or by the application of heat to render tacky the
    solid particulate material or dry coating thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    for processes in which plural different solid particles are united,
    one of which may act as an adhesive and which may or may not retain its
    particle identity on, for example, application of heat to activate it as an
    adhesive.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    308.2+ for an adhesive bonding process which includes tackifying the
    substance of a self-sustaining laminar to be bonded.


CLS 264/124
TXT Processes under subclass 123 which involves uniting particles containing a
    natural binder which under uniting conditions functions to bond the
    particles to each other.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found, for example, patents relating
    to bonding cork particles.


CLS 264/125
TXT Processes under subclass 123 in which the autogenous bonding of the
    particles is effected by the application of heat with or without pressure.

    (1)     Note.  Heat resulting from the application of pressure alone is not
    considered to be a positive application of heat.  Also, some but not all of
    the particles may be melted; essentially the formed body must be of joined
    particles, not particles liquified by heat.  Patents in which powdered or
    particulate material is completely melted are provided for in subclasses
    239+ based on various manipulative molding steps.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239+,   and see (1) Note above.

    603+,   for a process of sintering a shaped inorganic preform external of a
    mold.


CLS 264/126
TXT Processes under subclass 125 in which the particles or the dry coating
    thereof comprise organic material.


CLS 264/127
TXT Processes under subclass 126 in which the organic material is a fluorinated
    hydrocarbon resin.


CLS 264/128
TXT Processes under subclass 109 wherein a liquid adhesive is applied to the
    particulate material subsequent to the assembly, association or deposition
    thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See the search notes in subclass 109 above pertaining to
    processes in which particulate material, e.g., fillers and binder material
    are mixed in a slurry prior to deposition thereof in a mold.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123,    for autogenous bonding of particles in which a liquid or solvent
    which is not, per se, an adhesive is employed to render the particles or
    surfaces thereof tacky or capable of adhesion.

    122,    for processes employing plural different solid particles one of
    which may act as an adhesive and which may or may not retain its identity
    as particle subsequent to uniting.

    129,    for molding combined with a coating step performed outside of the
    mold.


CLS 264/129
TXT Processes under the class definition including the step of applying a layer
    of fluent material to the workpiece, which material is not restrained or
    confined by a mold or shaping surface.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass, application of a coating to a
    shaped article is generally outside of a mold. Where an added layer of
    material is applied to a previous layer while in the mold it is assumed
    that the layer is subjected to mold shaping and thus excluded, regardless
    of the thickness of said surface layer, unless there is a specific
    disclosure that the coating is unrestrained.

    (2)     Note.  Treatment material, e.g., catalysts, solvents, softening
    materials such as water, etc., are not considered coatings or impregnants
    for this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  The general line between this class (264) and Class 427,
    Coating Processes, with regard to processes of reshaping or deforming plus
    coating will be as follows:

    a)      Where a base is coated and the coating only is reshaped or
    deformed, the patent will go in Class 427.

    b)      Where a base is coated and the subsequent reshaping or deforming is
    applied to the coating and the contiguous surface to which the coating is
    applied, without an overall reshaping of the base and without altering the
    shape of any noncoated surface, the patent will go to Class 427.

    c)      Where a base is surface deformed only on one side or area so that
    there is no overall reshaping of the entire base, and the deformed surface
    is subsequently coated, the patent will go to Class 427.

    d)      Where a base is coated and there is subsequent overall reshaping of
    the resulting coated article or, when the base is in the form of a planar
    sheet or web, there is subsequent reshaping of both surfaces, e.g.,
    corrugating, the patent will go to Class 264.

    e)      Where there is surface defomation of only one surface of a base,
    the opposed surface remaining unaltered, and the unaltered surface is
    coated, the patent will go to Class 264.

    f)      Where a base is reshaped overall or where opposing surfaces are
    reshaped, deformed, e.g., embossed, and then coated either on one or both
    deformed surfaces, the patent will go to Class 264.

    g)      Where a base is coated and subsequently said coated article is
    surface deformed, e.g., embossed through the coating and a portion of the
    base on opposed sides or surfaces, the patent will go to Class 264.

    (4)     Note.  For nominal molding followed by a significant coating step
    see Class 427, Coating Processes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for processes of forming solid particles liquids or melts combined
    with a coating step of said particles.

    79,     for processes including the step of applying a barrier layer to the
    surface of an article to prevent escape of volatiles.

    128,    for processes of assembling random, bulk deposited particles with
    subsequent application of liquid binder thereto.

    232,    for subsequent disparate treatment of formed articles.

    255,    for processes of forming plural layers in a mold, the surface layer
    being similar to a coating in the final product.

    304     and 308, for processes in which plural layers of the same material
    are built up in the mold.

    343,    for swelling or plasticizing, per se.

    603,    for processes of firing, sintering or vitrifying of shaped articles
    or preforms having combined steps of shaping and coating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for a stock material product in the form of a composite web or sheet,
    especially subclasses 411+ for plural layer products not elsewhere provided
    for.

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 59+ for a coated or impregnated fabric.


CLS 264/130
TXT Processes under subclass 129 wherein the coating has the function of
    preventing adhesion or sticking between the formed articles and/or adjacent
    material, surfaces or objects.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264,    for the use of an antiadhesion layer between layers in a
    compositing operation.

    300,    for processes in which a release agent is added to the molding
    material.

    338,    for processes in which a release agent is coated on a mold.


CLS 264/131
TXT Processes under subclass 129 in which the coating or printing material is
    applied as and remains in the form of particles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    for processes of forming layered articles by molding randomly
    assembled particles.

    130,    for particulate coating of an antistick nature.


CLS 264/132
TXT Processes under subclass 129 wherein the printing or coating is applied to
    the workpiece to provide planned ornamentation or intelligence at the
    surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73+,    for processes for forming random variegated colors during the
    molding operation.

    245+,   for processes of forming multi-colored surfaces by a compositing
    operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, appropriate subclasses for printing, per se.


CLS 264/133
TXT Processes under subclass 129 wherein the base that is coated embodies a
    material containing clay, concrete, sand or other earthy material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     for coating siliceous or calcareous bases with a barrier layer to
    prevent or retard evaporation of a volatile component.

    136,    for coating processes in which base is glass fibers.

    256,    for processes of forming a layer in a mold on a body containing
    clay, sand or calcareous material which was formed in the same mold.

    603+,   for processes of firing, sintering or vitrifying of shaped articles
    or preforms having combined steps of shaping and coating outside of the
    mold prior to or subsequent to  the firing steps.


CLS 264/134
TXT Processes under subclass 129 in which the workpiece has either a fluent
    layer applied to its surface by a coating operation or the interstices of a
    porous body are at least partially filled by said fluent material prior to
    a shaping operation.


CLS 264/135
TXT Processes under subclass 134 including the step of molding or shaping
    plastic material against the coated or impregnated preform and uniting said
    plastic material to said preform.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171.1+  for processes in which plastic material is shaped against a preform
    to produce continuous or indefinite length articles.

    241+,   for processes for molding a plural part or composite article.


CLS 264/136
TXT Processes under subclass 134 which includes the step of applying fluent
    material to a fibrous, interfelted or porous preform so that at least a
    portion of the fluent material enters the interstices of the preform.


CLS 264/137
TXT Processes under subclass 136 in which the fluent impregant is solidified by
    an increase in tempeature.


CLS 264/138
TXT Processes under the class definition which include a step of 1) penetrating
    a shaped product from one face to another to cause at least a partial
    separation of the product, 2) tearing an article, 3) removing material from
    an article by means of a solid tool or implement, or 4) forming a
    comminuted product.

    (1)     Note.  The formation of grooves and ridges in the surface of a
    workpiece resulting from a cutting separation of only the surface material
    does not come here but is placed in the appropriate subclasses below, e.g.,
    subclasses 284 and 293.

    (2)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass, the penetration need not
    necessarily be by a sharp tool but may be made by locally applied heat, for
    example.

    (3)     Note.  Severing a mold charge from a fluent plastic bulk source is
    not considered cutting for this and indented subclasses.

    (4)     Note.  To be placed herein, the operation must be performed on a
    shaped article or preform.  Mixing, mulling, kneading of plastic materials
    are excluded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5+,     for comminuting of liquids to form solid, particulate material.

    118,    for processes of uniting discrete bulk assembled particles
    including a subsequent cutting, grooving or comminuting step.

    166,    for processes of forming indefinite length articles including the
    step of comminuting or separating of a core only within an article.

    284     and 293, for processes including a surface deformation, e.g.,
    embossing and see the note in subclass 284.

    678,    for processes of firing, sintering, or vitrifying of shaped
    articles or preforms including a step of cutting, punching, or grinding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses for processes of cutting, severing,
    perforating, etc., where not claimed in combination.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses for processes for solid material comminuting and see
    particularly note 4 of the definitions to Class 241 for the line as to the
    combination of shaping plus comminuting.


CLS 264/139
TXT Processes under subclass 138 wherein a facing layer portion of a
    multilayered body is removed to expose an area of an underlying layer.

    (1)     Note.  The facing layer may be removed to produce a decorative
    effect, by way of example.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    250+, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclass 270 for laminating
    combined with the step of cutting one lamina only.


CLS 264/140
TXT Processes under subclass 138 combined with the step of cutting or
    comminuting the formed product to produce flakes, shreds or pellets
    therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5+,     for processes of forming particulate material directly from a
    molten or liquid mass.

    116,    for processes in which particulate material may be united to form a
    web or sheet followed by comminuting and reuniting of said comminuted
    particles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses and see section 4 of the definitions thereof as to the line
    between this class and Class 241 for the combination of shaping plus
    subsequent comminuting.


CLS 264/141
TXT Processes under subclass 140 where the flaked, shredded or pelleted product
    is formed from a material continuously extruded from a shaping orifice.

    (1)     Note.  Where the cut-off product is of such size, length or
    character as to be handled as individual units, the process will be
    classified in subclasses 148+ below.


CLS 264/142
TXT Processes under subclass 141 where a knife engaging the extrusion die face
    is moved across the extrusion orifice to cut the extruded material into the
    desired flakes, pellets or shreds.


CLS 264/143
TXT Processes under subclass 141 where a continuously extruded filament is cut
    to short length fibers or "staples".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165+,   for processes of forming indefinite length or continuous length
    articles, e.g., filaments, when not combined with a cutting step.


CLS 264/144
TXT Processes under subclass 140 including the step of initially forming a
    continuous product by casting on a moving drum or belt.

    (1)     Note.  As an example of the subject matter of this subclass is a
    process in which a plastic material is calendered, formed as a sheet on one
    of the calender rolls, then removed in the form of flakes.


CLS 264/145
TXT Processes under subclass 138 which include the prior step of forming a
    continuous or indefinite length article.


CLS 264/146
TXT Processes under subclass 145 wherein the continuously formed work is slit
    parallel to the direction of movement.


CLS 264/147
TXT Processes under subclass 146 where a continuously formed web is slit
    longitudinally into two or more filamentary or thread-like strips.


CLS 264/148
TXT Processes under subclass 145 wherein an extruded material is cut in a
    direction transverse to the direction of movement away from the extrusion
    die to produce discrete portions of a desired length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140+,   for processes wherein the pieces of cutoff extruded material are of
    such small size as to be considered particulate, e.g., pellets fibers or
    staple fibers.


CLS 264/149
TXT Processes under subclass 148 wherein plastic material is extruded around a
    core which moves with the shaped material thereon to the cutting station.


CLS 264/150
TXT Processes under subclass 148 wherein the product is elongated and hollow.


CLS 264/151
TXT Processes under subclass 148 wherein the extruded preform is reshaped
    before cutting to length.

    (1)     Note.  Reshaping for the purpose of this subclass excludes
    stretching, since stretching conventionally accompanies extrusion.


CLS 264/152
TXT Processes under subclass 138 which includes a step of joining the severed
    portions or parts.

    (1)     Note.  The joinder of the severed portions or parts may or may not
    be at the cut edges.  As, for example, the slitting of the edges of a web
    or sheet and overlapping and securing the cut edges, or the splitting of a
    workpiece with subsequent reuniting with the cut faces exposed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    250+ for cutting and laminating of plastic or the like cut parts or
    materials, e.g., subclass 251 pertaining to cut- seaming.


CLS 264/153
TXT Processes under subclass 138 in which articles are severed from sheet
    material by a cutting action simultaneously on all areas being cut.

    (1)     Note.  The article is usually severed by means of a configured
    cutting die.


CLS 264/154
TXT Processes under subclass 138 in which the operation involves either forming
    an aperture or opening (1) which does not completely penetrate the article
    and material is removed or (2) which completely penetrates the article with
    or without material removal therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  Search subclasses 284 and 293 for embossing operations in
    which surface deformations are made in a preform which do not extend
    through the preform and no material is removed.


CLS 264/155
TXT Processes under subclass 154 in which the opening or aperture is formed by
    a punching or drilling operation.


CLS 264/156
TXT Processes under subclass 155 where two or more holes are formed in each
    article.


CLS 264/157
TXT Processes under subclass 138 in which a workpiece is divided into two or
    more sections to form a plurality of articles.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are processes punching plural
    articles from a sheet or web in which the sheet left after punching out the
    desired articles may be considered to be waste, or wherein the dividing is
    for the purpose of removing attached waste material, e.g., flash or sprue.
    The entire work blank must be utilized.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153,    for punching of plural articles from a sheet and subclass 161 for
    removal of flash or sprue.


CLS 264/158
TXT Processes under subclass 157 where the dividing consists of the cutting of
    relatively thin sheets from a work piece generally along a plane parallel
    to the major face of the produced sheet.


CLS 264/159
TXT Processes under subclass 157 where the work piece is an elongated hollow
    article.


CLS 264/160
TXT Processes under subclass 157 where the workpiece to be divided is in the
    form of a sheet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153,    for processes wherein plural articles are punched out from a sheet.


CLS 264/161
TXT Processes under subclass 138 where material removed from an article
    consists of (1) excess material forced out between meeting faces of a
    multipart closed mold and/or (2) excess material shaped by molding material
    admitting or injecting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for processes in which flash or trim is recycled or combined with
    additional molding material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, for flash trimming processes when not combined with a
    molding step.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, for
    removal of flash, trim or excess material when combined with a laminating
    operation.


CLS 264/162
TXT Processes under subclass 138 wherein an integral portion of the surface of
    a shaped preform is removed by a grinding, scraping, or abrasive action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284     and 293, for processes involving a surface deformation, e.g.,
    embossing and see the note in subclass 284.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    153+ for a laminating process combined with an abrading step.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 28+ for a process of abrading, and see the
    notes thereto for related fields of search.


CLS 264/163
TXT Processes under subclass 138 in which the material separating operation is
    performed (1) while the same area is being plastically reshaped or (2)
    while the plastically formed material is still in contact with the forming
    mold, die or surface.


CLS 264/164
TXT Processes under class definition wherein the article is formed by the free
    and unconfined pulling out of a plastic mass.

    (1)     Note.  The surface configuration of the article formed is imparted
    solely by the extension and not by coaction of the plastic mass with a
    shape imparting mold surface.

    (2)     Note.  Kneading or mulling operations, per se, e.g., taffy pulling
    type are not included herein in that a shaped article is not produced.  See
    subclass 349 and the notes thereto for such subject matter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165+,   for process of forming indefinite length work by other than
    unconfined extension of a plastic mass.

    288+    and 291+, for processes relating to stretching, per se, of a
    previously shaped article.

    349,    for kneading or mulling operations and see (2) Note above.


CLS 264/165
TXT Processes under the class definition which are directed to the molding of a
    continuous, running or indefinite length body of which at least one molded
    element or component thereof is unitary in nature as is formed by an
    uninterrupted molding step.

    (1)     Note.  Processes relating to forming of plural finite elements and
    combining these elements mechanically to each other to form a running
    length article, e.g., a chain or other mechanically interlocked article
    consisting of plural parts are classified elsewhere, see the note to
    subclass 242 below.

    (2)     Note.  Processes wherein a continuous article of varying
    composition is produced by intermittent charges of molding material of
    varying composition in the forming device are included herein.

    (3)     Note. Where layered, stratified or plural element containining
    indefinite or continuous articles are produced, at least one element, layer
    or stratum must be unitary in structure as set out in the definition or (2)
    Note above.

    (4)     Note.  The final article produced need not be of indefinite length,
    for example, forming a thread and winding the thread into a finite article
    is included here.

    (5)     Note.  The line between this class (264) and Classes 8, Bleaching
    and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of Textiles and
    Fibers, and 427 Coating Processes, in regard to the fluid treatment of
    coagulated, extruded or otherwise shaped plastic materials is that fluid
    treatments of the formed structures, whether previously dried or not, as
    well as processes which recite broadly the mere fact of forming (without
    stating any significant forming step as would be included in this class
    under the definitions) combined with a significant subsequent fluid
    treatment are placed in either of Classes 8 or 427, in accordance with the
    line existing therebetween and set forth in the reference to Class 8 in the
    class definition of Class 427.  See also the definitions to this class
    (264), and see the notes and search notes to subclasses 129, 188, 195, 196,
    232, and 340 of this class (264).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for continuous article formation combined with pore forming.

    70,     for processes of forming indefinite length article including a
    vibratory step.

    73,     for producing indefinite length article of a random or variegated
    color.

    99,     for processes wherein pneumatic pressure is applied to the inside
    of a continously extruded hollow article.

    145,    for continuous formation combined with cutting.

    242,    for processes of forming composite plural part or multilayered
    articles wherein said parts are joined for relative movement, e.g., chain
    or interlock effect.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    particularly subclasses 167 and 243 for forming of continuous laminae
    combined with a laminating step.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or treating:  Apparatus,
    appropriate subclasses for corresponding apparatus, especially subclasses
    67+, for filament or film forming apparatus, subclass 224 for fluent stock
    casting apparatus for forming continuous lengths and subclasses 376.1+ for
    an extrusion shaping machine.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 364+ for a
    filament of a particular size or shape, or coated.


CLS 264/166
TXT Processes under subclass 165 including (1) a step of forming a mold or
    shaping element for the work or (2) a step of destroying a mold or shaping
    element subsequent to the molding step.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41+,    for processes of pore forming in situ, e.g., 44, by burning out of
    a component.

    171.1+, for forming a continuous length article by molding on or around
    discrete axially aligned preforms, which preform may be destroyed in part,
    or comminuted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    155 for laminating processes including the step of destroying a transitory
    material or element.


CLS 264/167
TXT Processes under subclass 165 wherein the formed article is nonuniform
    cross-sectionally throughout its length which may result from a gradual
    change in transverse dimensions or through intermittent or repeated
    irregularities therein, said article being of monolithic construction.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found, for example, processes for
    producing filaments of irregular denier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171.1+, for framing continuous length articles which are stratified or
    layered even though cross-sectional area irregularities may exist through
    spaced elements thereon.


CLS 264/168
TXT Processes under subclass 165 wherein a crimped, creped or crinkled effect
    is imparted to the formed articles which may be from a physical treatment
    or inherently resulting from the ingredients and/or chemical processes
    employed in the article formation or subsequent thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclass 117 for processes involving a chemical
    modification of textile materials to produce a wool like or crinkle effect.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    183 for laminating processes which include a creping, wrinkling or
    crinkling step, and subclasses 196+ for laminating processes including a
    permanent bending or reshaping of a self sustaining lamina.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 111+ and 280+ for
    processes and apparatus for creping or crinkling paper-like webs or sheets
    while still wet from the forming operation.


CLS 264/169
TXT Processes under subclass 165 which include steps for prevention or removal
    of incrustations and other equipment fouling accumulations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for processes involving treating or conditioning apparatus for use.

    85,     for processes including the step of flushing a mold with an inert
    fluid.

    195,    for subsequent chemical treatment of viscose articles which may be
    directed to a process for removal of contaminants therefrom.


CLS 264/170
TXT Processes under subclass 169 wherein said fouling accumulations are
    prevented by means of an additive chemical agent or ingredient in the
    article forming material or in the forming or treating bath therefor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses for
    employing a specific additive to a spinning solution to prevent clogging of
    spinnerettes.  Where claims are drawn in such a manner that the
    anticlogging agent may be either the bath or spinning solution then the
    patent will be placed as an original in this class (264), and
    cross-reference to Class 106.


CLS 264/171.1
TXT Layered, stratified transversely of length, or multiphase macrostructure
    containing material (e.g., conjugate, composite, islands-in-sea,
    sheath-core, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 165 directed to methods of forming indefinite or
    running length articles comprising plural diverse elements or components in
    a contiguous relationship in a cross-section taken through said article,
    said contiguity extending for at least a portion of the length of the
    article.

    (1)     Note. This subclass does not include the simultaneous extrusion of
    a plurality of filaments which are then merely gathered into a yarn or
    thread in a parallel or contiguous relationship.

    (2)     Note. Where discrete elements are axially aligned on a continuous
    base, said elements being either spaced or in butt relationship, the patent
    is properly classified in this subclass.

    (3)     Note. In the formation of indefinite length filaments, particularly
    viscose, filaments with differentiated ``skin" and ``core" which may be
    produced from a homogeneous material and such processes will be classified
    below in appropriate subclasses according to method or material employed.

    (4)     Note. Processes of forming ``sheath-core" or ``islands in the sea"
    composites, strands, or filaments are properly classified below in
    appropriate subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73+,    for forming a color variegated running or indefinite length
    article.


    103,    for gathering of extruded filaments into a yarn or thread.

    135,    for processes including coating or impregnating a preform combined
    with shaping against and uniting of plastic material to said preform.

    167,    for formation of continuous length articles of irregular
    cross-sectional area which are nonlayered or nonstratified, i.e., of
    monolithic construction.


    252,    for molding plural parts to an edge of a preform, e.g., slide
    fastener elements.

    172.13, for composite, strand, or filament having island in the sea.

    172.15, for sheath-core composites strands or filaments

     SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    167+ and 244.11+ for formation of a lamina or laminae by extrusion followed
    by adhesive bonding to form a laminate.


CLS 264/171.11
TXT Including extrusion on or about plural discrete end-to-end or discrete
    side-by-side preforms (e.g., definite length preform, etc.)

    Processes under subclass 171.1 wherein a plurality of discrete preforms or
    bases of finite length are aligned in abutment or end-to-end relationship,
    not necessarily in physical contact, with formation of an indefinite or
    continuous layer of plastic material on or about said preforms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149,    for processes of extruding a continuous length article around a
    moving preform with cutting thereof to length.

    166,    for processes of forming an indefinite length body in which a core
    mold or shaping surface may be formed or the core mold or shaping surface
    employed in the process is removed or destroyed, wherein at least for an
    interval of time, the mold and the molding material may be in a composite
    relationship.

    323,    for processes in which reshaping of a solid noncontinuous preform
    is effected by establishing a rubbing, wiping or sliding action between the
    preform and a shaping surface.


CLS 264/171.12
TXT Hollow preform:

    Processes under subclass 171.1 wherein a hollow article or hollow stock
    material which is self sustaining is subjected to a shaping or reshaping
    operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166,    for processes in which a core mold may be formed or the core mold
    employed in the process is removed or destroyed, wherein at least for an
    interval of time, the mold and the molding material may be in a composite
    relationship.

    171.26, for indefinite length hollow composites formed from nonhollow stock
    material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 230+ for processes of coating the
    interior of hollow articles.


CLS 264/171.13
TXT Utilizing indefinite length preform:

    Processes under subclass 171.1 wherein a continuous, running, or
    indeterminate length preform is used.


CLS 264/171.14
TXT Of metal:

    Processes under subclass 171.13 wherein the preform is pure metal or metal
    alloy or contains pure metal or metal alloy.


CLS 264/171.15
TXT Natural rubber or thermosetting resin containing layer:

    Processes under subclass 171.14 wherein a layer contains material which is
    natural rubber or thermosetting resin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, particularly Classes 523 and
    524 for a synthetic resin or natural rubber composition which may be
    disclosed or claimed to possess utility as molding materials.


CLS 264/171.16
TXT Utilizing plural metal preforms (e.g., twisted, spiral, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 171.14 wherein two or more metal containing
    preforms are used.


CLS 264/171.17
TXT Shaping of plural layers on preform:

    Processes under subclass 171.14 wherein at least two layers are shaped or
    molded on the preform.


CLS 264/171.18
TXT Sequential shaping of layers:

    Processes under subclass 171.17 wherein a second layer is formed subsequent
    to the previous layer.


CLS 264/171.19
TXT Including upstream mixing:

    Processes under subclass 171.14 wherein mixing of components used to form a
    layer is conducted prior to shaping.


CLS 264/171.2
TXT Producing coiled or helical containing structure or layer:

    Processes under subclass 171.14 wherein (a) the metal preform is either
    helical or coiled or (b) a helical or coiled layer is shaped to the metal
    preform.


CLS 264/171.21
TXT Producing ribbon, tape, or sheet (e.g., extrusion, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 171.14 wherein the layered metal preform is a
    ribbon, tape, or sheet or is shaped to form a ribbon, tape, or sheet.


CLS 264/171.22
TXT Including preheating of metal preform:

    Processes under subclass 171.14 wherein the metal preform is heated prior
    to having any layer shaped thereto.


CLS 264/171.23
TXT Shaping of polyamide (e.g., nylon, etc.) or addition polymer of at least
    one monoethylenically unsaturated monomer (e.g., polyethylene,
    polypropylene, polystyrene, etc.) containing layer on preform:

    Processes under subclass 171.13 wherein a layer formed on the preform
    contains (a) polyamide or (b) addition polymer of at least one
    monoethylenically unsaturated monomer.

    (1)     Note. See the definitions of this Class 264 for the line between
    this class and the composition classes, especially Class 520.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, particularly Class 523 and
    Class 524 for a synthetic resin or natural rubber composition which may be
    disclosed or claimed to possess utility as molding materials.


CLS 264/171.24
TXT Shaping of natural rubber or thermosetting resin containing layer on
    preform (e.g., elastomers, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 171.13 wherein a layer formed on the preform
    contains material which is either natural rubber or thermosetting resin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, particularly Class 523 and
    Class 524 for a synthetic resin or natural rubber composition which may be
    disclosed or claimed to possess utility as molding materials.


CLS 264/171.25
TXT Shaping of a natural resinous layer on preform (e.g., cellulosic, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 171.13 wherein a layer formed on the preform
    contains natural resinous material.


CLS 264/171.26
TXT Producing hollow composite:

    Processes under subclass 171.1 wherein the composite formed is hollow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166     for processes in which a core mold may be formed or the core mold
    employed in the process is removed or destroyed, wherein at least for an
    interval of time, the mold and the molding material may be in a composite
    relationship.

    172.11, for processes of producing nonhollow composite stands, filaments or
    threads.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 230+ for processes of coating the
    interior of hollow articles.


CLS 264/171.27
TXT Having three or more layers of at least two different materials:

    Processes under subclass 171.26 directed to a hollow composite which has
    more than two layers wherein the material comprising at least one of the
    layers is dissimilar.


CLS 264/171.28
TXT Polyamide (e.g., nylon, etc.) or addition polymer of at least one
    monoethylenically unsaturated monomer (e.g., polyethylene, polypropylene,
    polystyrene, etc.) containing layer:

    Processes under subclass 171.26 wherein the hollow composite has a layer
    which contains (a) polyamide or (b) addition polymer of at least one
    monoethylenically unsaturated monomer.

    (1)     Note. See the definitions of this Class 264 for the line between
    this class and the composition classes, especially Class 520.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, particularly Class 523 and
    Class 524 for a synthetic resin or natural rubber composition which may be
    disclosed or claimed to possess utility as molding materials.


CLS 264/171.29
TXT Including rotation of shaping surface or material being shaped:

    Processes under subclass 171.26 which comprise turning or revolving (a) a
    surface used to form or shape or (b) material being formed or shaped.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209.2,  for processes utilizing rotational or translational movement of a
    material shaping member on indefinite lengths excluding composites.

    310,    for processes excluding indefinite length composites in which
    rotating motion is imparted to the mold shaping surface or to the material
    being shaped.


CLS 264/172.1
TXT Having particular noncircular cross-section (e.g., T-configured, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 171.26 wherein the hollow composite is
    cross-sectionally uniform and not circular (e.g., elliptical, star,
    hexagonal, dog-bone, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172.12, for processes of producing composite strand, filament, or thread
    with noncircular cross-section.


CLS 264/172.11
TXT Producing composite strand, filament, or thread:

    Processes under subclass 171.1 directed to forming  composites consisting
    of solid, singular, or plural, or twisted groups of slender, flexible,
    rodlike materials.


CLS 264/172.12
TXT Having particular noncircular cross-section (e.g., T-configured, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 172.11 wherein the composite strand, filament or
    thread is cross-sectionally uniform and not circular (e.g., elliptical,
    star, hexagonal, dog-bone, etc.).


CLS 264/172.13
TXT Islands-in-sea (i.e., discontinuous phase in continuous phase):

    Processes under subclass 172.11 directed to shaping a composite strand,
    filament or thread having a discontinuous phase material (island) and a
    continuous phase material (sea), usually of different composition.

    (1)     Note. The island phase material usually has a different melt index
    than the sea phase material. Extrusion or melt spinning are common shaping
    methods utilized in this subclass.


CLS 264/172.14
TXT Side-by-side:

    Processes under subclass 172.11 wherein the composite strand, filament or
    thread is produced by forcing different materials through separate openings
    in a die or spinneret in which individual strands, filaments, or threads
    are formed adjacent one another.


CLS 264/172.15
TXT Sheath-core:

    Processes under subclass 172.11 wherein the composite strand, filament or
    thread is produced by forcing different materials through separate openings
    in a die or spinneret in which one fiber or filament is substantially
    enclosed in the other (sheath-core type).


CLS 264/172.16
TXT Into liquid bath (e.g., wet-spinning, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 172.11 wherein the composite strand, filament, or
    thread forming material is forced through a shaping device or orifice into
    a liquid bath.


CLS 264/172.17
TXT Melt-spinning:

    Processes under subclass 172.11 wherein the composite strand, filament, or
    thread is shaped by forcing a melt through an appropriately sized orifice.


CLS 264/172.18
TXT Polyamide (e.g., nylon, etc.) or addition polymer of at least one
    monoethylenically unsaturated monomer (e.g., polyethylene, polypropylene,
    polystyrene, etc.) containing layer:

    Processes under subclass 172.17 wherein the composite strand, filament, or
    thread has a layer which contains (a) polyamide or (b) addition polymer of
    at least one monoethylenically unsaturated monomer.

    (1)     Note. See the definitions of this Class 264 for the line between
    this class and the composition classes, especially Class 520.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, particularly Classes 523 and
    524 for a synthetic resin or natural rubber composition which may be
    disclosed or claimed to possess utility as molding materials.


CLS 264/172.19
TXT Producing indefinite length article by depositing material on endless
    forming surface (e.g., endless belts, rollers, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 171.1 wherein an endless forming surface is used
    to shape an indefinite length article.


CLS 264/173.1
TXT Including roller-type shaping surface (e.g., calendering, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 172.19 wherein the shaping surface is generally
    circular in cross-section and designed to rotate about an internal axis.


CLS 264/173.11
TXT Having three or more layers of at least two different compositions:

    Processes under subclass 171.1 directed to forming a composite which has
    more than two layers wherein the material comprising at least one of the
    layers is dissimilar.


CLS 264/173.12
TXT Melt extrusion (e.g., co-extrusion, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 173.11 wherein the multi-layered, indefinite
    length body is formed by forcing a melt through a confining orifice whereby
    the cross-sectional area of the extruded portion corresponds to the
    dimensions of the orifice.


CLS 264/173.13
TXT Vinylidene chloride or fluoride containing layer:

    Processes under subclass 173.12 wherein at least one of the layers contains
    vinylidene chloride or vinylidene fluoride.


CLS 264/173.14
TXT Polyamide (e.g., nylon, etc.) or addition polymer of at least one
    monoethylenically unsaturated monomer (e.g., polyethylene, polypropylene,
    polystyrene, etc.) containing layer:

    Processes under subclass 173.12 wherein at least one layer contains (a)
    polyamide or (b) addition polymer of at least one monoethylenically
    unsaturated monomer.

    (1)     Note. See the definitions of this Class 264 for the line between
    this class and the composition classes, especially Class 520.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, particularly Class 523 and
    Class 524 for a synthetic resin or natural rubber composition which may be
    disclosed or claimed to possess utility as molding materials.


CLS 264/173.15
TXT Including subsequent reshaping (e.g., stretching, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 173.12 wherein the formed article is subjected to
    a deforming,( e.g., by plastic flow, bending, stretching, twisting,
    corrugating, etc.) so as to alter its overall shape.


CLS 264/173.16
TXT Melt co-extrusion (e.g., two layers, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 171.1 wherein a layered indefinite length body is
    formed by forcing a melt through a dual confining orifice whereby the
    cross-sectional area of the two extruded portions corresponds to the
    dimensions of the orifice.


CLS 264/173.17
TXT Having particular noncircular cross-section (e.g., T-configured, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 173.16 wherein the co-extruded material is
    cross-sectionally uniform and not circular (e.g., elliptical, star,
    hexagonal, dog-bone, etc.).


CLS 264/173.18
TXT HAVING COLORANT ADDED TO MATERIAL TO BE SHAPED OR PRODUCING TWO DIVERSELY
    COLORED LAYERS:

    Process under subclass 173.16 which includes (a) a step of incorporating a
    colorant (e.g., dye, pigment, etc.) directly in the shaping material such
    that an article is formed having at least one layer of nonrandom color, or
    (b) producing a layered article wherein each layer is of different color.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73+,    for processes in which a random variegated effect is achieved
    during the molding or shaping operation.

    78,     for processes including dyeing of a shaped article or preform, or
    including a step of incorporating a dye susceptable material (i.e.,
    precursor) in the shaping material and followed by subsequent exposure to a
    reactant for the dye susceptable material to produce the color (e.g., such
    as found in a coagulant bath, etc.).

    132,    for processes including the step of applying an indicia or design
    to the shaped article.

    245+,   for reshaping processes for producing composite structure with
    multicolored surface.


CLS 264/173.19
TXT Polyamide (e.g., nylon, etc.) or addition polymer of at least one
    monoethylenically unsaturated monomer (e.g., polyethylene, polypropylene,
    polystyrene, etc.) containing layer:

    Processes under subclass 173.16 wherein at least one  layer contains (a)
    polyamide or (b) addition polymer of at least one monoethylenically
    unsaturated monomer.

    (1)     Note. See the definitions of this Class 264 for the line between
    this class and the composition classes, especially Class 520.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, particularly Class 523 and
    Class 524 for a synthetic resin or natural rubber composition which may be
    disclosed or claimed to possess utility as molding materials.


CLS 264/174.1
TXT Styrene polymer containing:

    Processes under subclass 173.19 wherein the addition polymer is styrene
    containing.


CLS 264/174.11
TXT Natural rubber or elastomer containing layer:

    Processes under subclass 173.16 wherein at least one of the co-extruded
    layers contains an elastomer or a natural rubber.


CLS 264/175
TXT Processes under subclass 165 in which the continuous product is produced
    from an unformed mass which is forced between a pair of coacting,
    continuously moving surfaces.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein, for example, is shaping a mass by passing
    it between a pair of rolls, a roll and an endless belt or a pair of endless
    belts.

    (2)     Note.  Where the patent discloses calendering of a previously
    formed indefinite length article, e.g., altering the thickness thereof by
    passing through pressure rolls, the patent will not be placed herein, since
    such an operation is considered to be a reshaping rather than an actual
    forming of a continuous or indefinite length article, see the search notes
    below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for calendering which produces a random variegated coloring effect.

    212+,   for casting of materials on a solid shaping surface in which a
    doctor knife may be employed for smoothing the upper surface of or
    regulating the thickness of the cast article.

    280+,   for mechanical shaping or molding of running or indefinite length
    work, per se.


CLS 264/176.1
TXT Shaping by extrusion:

    Processes under subclass 165 wherein an article is shaped or formed by
    extruding or forcing a supply of the article forming material through a
    confining and shaping orifice

    SEARCH CLASS:

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 376.1+ for an extrusion shaping machine or nonmetals; see the
    search notes thereunder.


CLS 264/177.1
TXT To produce particular cross-section (e.g., noncircular, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 176 wherein formation is by extrusion through an
    orifice so shaped as to produce solid, cross-sectionally uniform articles
    which are other than circular or linear in cross-section.

    (1)     Note.  Extrusion through circular orifices or elongated linear slit
    orifices to produce conventional filaments, rods, films, sheet, etc., are
    classified on some other basis. To be placed herein, a patent must disclose
    the use of an extruding orifice of a particular cross-sectional shape to
    produce a shaped article other than those set out above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    for methods of producing articles of varying cross-sectional area
    or intermittent cross-sectional irregularity.

    171.1+  for methods of producing transversely layered or stratified
    articles.


CLS 264/177.11
TXT Nonresinous material only (e.g., ceramic, soap cellulose, glue, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 177.1 wherein the material being processed is
    other than a natural or a synthetic resin, e.g., ceramic material soap,
    cellulose, glue, etc.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is not intended to include synthetic resins
    which meet the definition of Class 520.

    (2)     Note.  A process for extruding a nonresionus material wherein a
    resin binder iis empoloyed conventionally as an auxiliary agent is
    considered proper for this subclass.


CLS 264/177.12
TXT Honeycomb:

    Processes under subclass 177.1 which produce a product with a honeycomb
    structure.


CLS 264/177.13
TXT Filament (e.g., T-configured, dog-bone, trilobal, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 177.1 wherein the product produced is a filament
    or fiber having a particlular cross-section, e.g., T-configured, dog-bone,
    trilobal, etc.


CLS 264/177.14
TXT Hollow or tubular work produced:

    Processes under subclass 177.13 wherein a filament of hollow or tubular
    cross-section is produced.


CLS 264/177.15
TXT Capillary passages (e.g., pen nibs, writing tip, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 177.14 wherein the product contains capillary
    passages, e.g., pen nibs, writing tips, etc.


CLS 264/177.16
TXT Die configuration (other than fixed orifice shape):

    Processes under subclass 177.1 wherein the configuration of the extruder
    die is specified, other than merely the shape of a fixed die orifice, e.g.,
    long land die, tapered die, plural distinct zones, etc.


CLS 264/177.17
TXT Processing or treatment after extrusion (e.g., support, guide, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 177.1 wherein the the extrudate is further
    processed or treated in some manner, e.g., suported manipulated by means of
    a guide, reshaped, coagulated, etc.


CLS 264/177.18
TXT Chemical:

    Processes under 177.17 wherein the extrudate undergoes chemical treatment,
    e.g., curing, polymerization, etc.


CLS 264/177.19
TXT Temperature specified (other than ambient):

    Processes under subclass 177.17 wherein temperature is employed to treat
    the extrudate, e.g., quenching, heat softening for reshaping, etc.


CLS 264/177.2
TXT With reinforcement, filler, or additive:

    Processes under subclass 177.1 wherein the material extruded includes
    reinformecent, filler or another addtive for a special use.


CLS 264/178
TXT Proceses under subclass 176 wherein formation takes place by extrusion of
    the article forming material through a shaping device or orifice into a
    liquid bath.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses include, for example, extruding
    into a cooling, heating or reactive bath.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232+    and 244+, for subsequent treatment of formed articles.

    298,    for processes which include the step of casting finite articles on
    a liquid surface forming medium.


CLS 264/179
TXT Processes under subclass 178 wherein ingredients are added to or removed
    from the bath, or the bath is treated, so as to maintain the desired
    composition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for processes reciting reclaiming or purifying and recycling of
    extrudant receiving bath material.


CLS 264/180
TXT Processes under subclass 178 in which the liquid of said forming or
    receiving bath is in motion.

    (1)     Note.  Incidental disturbance or movement of the liquid which may
    occur by the unconfined passage of a formed article therethrough is not
    sufficient to place a patent in this subclass. However, disclosure that the
    formed article in passing through a restricted tube placed in the bath
    whereby a current of liquid is created and carried therethrough by
    frictional contact with the formed article, is within the scope of this
    subclass.


CLS 264/181
TXT Processes under subclass 180 wherein the motion of the liquid induces or is
    concomitant with stretching therein of the formed article.


CLS 264/182
TXT Processes under subclass 178 wherein the material being shaped is
    polyacrylonitrile containing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206,    for processes of forming indefinite length articles by an
    evaporative or drying step employing polyacrylonitrile in solution or
    dispersion.


CLS 264/183
TXT Processes under subclass 178 wherein the bath contains ingredients which
    react chemically with ingredients in the extruded forming material to
    coagulate, set or form the element or component.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition for the general line between this
    class and composition classes, per se.  Where a patent claims only the
    precipitating or coagulating bath for use solely in formation of indefinite
    length articles by extrusion of article forming material therein, the
    patent will go to this class as an original in the appropriate subclass
    based on the disclosure.

            Mere recitation of spinning a composition into a reactive bath
    broadly recited or an "acidic" reactive bath is not considered significant
    molding but recitation of the pH or pH range of the bath is considered
    significant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     for processes in which a spinning solution containing a dye
    susceptible material or a material capable of forming a dye is extruded
    into a setting bath disclosed to contain a reactant capable of converting
    said material into a colored element.

    203,    for processes employing a solvent extractive bath.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 162.1+, particularly
    subclasses 166.01+ for carbohydrate or derivative containing compositions
    which may be disclosed to have utility as spinning solutions and see the
    main line between this class (264) and the composition classes as set out
    in the class definitions of this class (264) which is relative to patents
    claiming a process of spinning a specific composition into a reactive bath,
    per se, or an "acidic" bath wherein none of the ingredients of said bath is
    named, or where no specific pH is recited.


CLS 264/184
TXT Processes under subclass 183 in which the material being extruded contains
    a synthetic resin.

    (1)     Note. For the definition of "synthetic resin, per se", see Class
    520, Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 1.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182,    for processes employing polyacrylonitrile containing forming
    materials.

    191+,   for processes employing viscose spinning solutions which contain an
    added organic ingredient which ingredient may be resinifiable or
    polymerizable at a subsequent stage.

    201,    for processes employing natural rubber containing forming materials.

    206,    for evaporative formation of articles employing polyacrylonitrile
    containing materials.


CLS 264/185
TXT Processes under subclass 184 in which the synthetic resin is polyvinyl
    alcohol.


CLS 264/186
TXT Processes under subclass 183 in which the article forming solution contains
    a carbohydrate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 162.1+ for
    carbohydrate or derivative containing plastic compositions.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, particularly Class 523,
    subclasses 447+ and 509, and Class 524, subclasses 9+, 27+, 716, and 732+
    for a nonreactant carbohydrate or derivative admixed with a polymer proper
    for Class 520.

    536,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 1.1+ for carbohydrate compounds and
    derivatives thereof.


CLS 264/187
TXT Processes under subclass 186 in which the carbohydrate is a cellulose
    derivative.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 163.01+ for cellulose
    derivative plastic compositions, per se, which are disclosed to have
    utility as a spinning composition.

    536,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 30+ and 56+ for cellulose compounds
    and derivatives thereof.


CLS 264/188
TXT Processes under subclass 187 wherein the carbohydrate is viscose.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 166.01+ for viscose
    containing compositions.

    536,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 60+ for production and treatment of
    viscose, per se.


CLS 264/189
TXT Processes under subclass 188 in which the reactive or coagulating bath
    contains an organic compound.

    (1)     Note.  Where the patent claims only the reactive or coagulating
    bath or composition thereof and the disclosure indicates the sole use of
    said bath is for the formation of viscose articles, the patent will be
    placed in this and/or the indented subclasses as an original.


CLS 264/190
TXT Processes under subclass 189 wherein the organic compound is a carbohydrate
    or protein.


CLS 264/191
TXT Processes under subclass 188 wherein the viscose solution contains an
    additional organic compound other than viscose.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184,    for processes employing spinning solutions which contain a
    synthetic resin composition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 166.1-166.7 for
    viscose compositions containing additional organic compounds.


CLS 264/192
TXT Processes under subclass 191 wherein the added compound contains sulfur.


CLS 264/193
TXT Processes under subclass 191 wherein the added organic compound is a
    polyether.


CLS 264/194
TXT Processes under subclass 191 wherein the added organic compound contains
    nitrogen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193,    for additives which are polyethers of nitrogen containing
    compounds, e.g., oxyalkylated amines.


CLS 264/195
TXT Processes under subclass 188 wherein the formed article is further treated
    with a chemically reactive agent.

    (1)     Note.  The step of washing or dehydrating, with water or other
    nonchemically reactive liquid, is not included within the scope of this
    subclass but are classified on some other basis.

    (2)     Note.  See the notes and search notes in subclass 165 which refer
    to fluid or coating treatments provided for in Classes 8, Bleaching and
    Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of Textiles and Fibers,
    and Class 427, Coating Processes, respectively.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129,    for processes including a coating step outside of the mold.

    196,    for processes wherein the article is formed in two or more stages
    as by coagulating or regenerating in plural baths.


CLS 264/196
TXT Processes under subclass 188 wherein the formation of the article takes
    place in two or more stages, employing either the same or different
    coagulating or generating baths, said plural baths containing either
    similar or dissimilar coagulating or regenerating reagents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195,    for subsequent chemical treatment of a formed article.


CLS 264/197
TXT Processes under subclass 196 wherein the formed article is stretched either
    between treatments in coagulating or regenerating baths or subsequent
    thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for twisting.

    168,    for crimping or crinkling.

    198,    for stretching of viscose articles and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 264/198
TXT Processes under subclass 188 wherein the formed viscose article is
    subjected to a subsequent mechanical working or shaping step.

    (1)     Note.  Since stretching is a conventional operation in the
    formation of indefinite length articles, a search in appropriate subclasses
    above will be necessary where an article forming operation combined with a
    nominally recited stretching step is set out in a viscose process.
    However, a patent classified above disclosing or claiming a significant
    stretching step in a viscose process will be crossed here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    197,    for stretching of indefinite length viscose articles following a
    plural step coagulation or regeneration.

    208,    for stretching of cellulose articles formed by an evaporative
    method.

    210,    for stretching of articles formed by melt spinning.

    288,    for stretching of preformed running length work.


CLS 264/199
TXT Processes under subclass 188 wherein the cellulose derivative is
    cupro-ammonium cellulose.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclass 167.01 for cuprammonium
    cellulose compositions.


CLS 264/200
TXT Processes under subclass 187 wherein the cellulose derivative is an acetic
    acid ester of cellulose.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 163.01+, appropriate
    subclasses for cellulose or cellulose derivative compositions, per se,
    within the class definitions, which may be disclosed to be suitable as
    spinning compositions or solutions.


CLS 264/201
TXT Processes under subclass 183 in which article forming material contains
    natural rubber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184,    for production of indefinite length articles by extrusion of
    synthetic resinous containing material into a reactive bath wherein said
    material may be disclosed to be rubbery in nature.


CLS 264/202
TXT Processes under subclass 183 wherein the article forming contains protein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    340,    for treatment of solid or shaped articles, per se, which may
    involve subsequent chemical treatment of a protein containing article.


CLS 264/203
TXT Processes under subclass 178 wherein the article is formed by extraction of
    the solvent from an article forming solution by the bath liquid on
    extrusion of said solution therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204+,   for article formation by evaporation of a solvent subsequent to
    extrusion of a solution of article forming material.

    298,    for casting on a liquid shaping surface in production of finite
    articles.


CLS 264/204
TXT Processes under subclass 176 in which the article is formed by extrusion
    into an evaporative atmosphere of a solution of article forming material
    with subsequent solidification thereof, by removal of the solvent of said
    solution through evaporation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5+,     for processes of forming particles or fibers which may include
    evaporation of a carrier.

    82+,    for reactive gas or vapor treatment of work.

    203,    for processes wherein the solvent of the article forming material
    solution is removed by an extractive liquid in which said material is
    relatively insoluble.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclasses 47.1+ for processes which may
    involve spray or film formation by a concentrating step.


CLS 264/205
TXT Processes under subclass 204 wherein the article forming material in
    solution is a synthetic resin.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of "synthetic resin, per se," see Class
    520, Synthetic Resin or Natural Rubbers, subclass 1.


CLS 264/206
TXT Processes under subclass 205 wherein the synthetic resin is
    polyacrylonitrile.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182,    for spinning of polyacrylonitrile solutions into a bath.


CLS 264/207
TXT Processes under subclass 204 wherein the article forming material in
    solution is cellulose or derivatives thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    187+,   for processes of spinning cellulose derivatives into a reactive
    liquid bath.


CLS 264/208
TXT Processes under subclass 207 wherein the formed articles are stretched or
    elongated.

    (1)     Note.  See the search notes to subclass 210 herein for the complete
    field of search involving stretching or reshaping.


CLS 264/209.1
TXT Hollow article:

    Processes under subclass 176 wherein the article produced is hollow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150,    for forming continuous hollow work by extruding, followed by
    cutting to length.

    166,    for forming continuous or indefinite length articles combined with
    mold or core formation or distruction, removal, comminution, or separation
    of mold core or preform.

    173,    for forming indefinite length composite or stratified hollow
    articles.

    177,    for forming indefinite length articles of particular noncircular
    cross section.

    514,    515 and 563, for direct application of fluid pressure or vacuum to
    hollow work to permanently shape, distort, or sustain work.


CLS 264/209.2
TXT Including rotational or translational movement of a material shaping member:

    Processs under subclass 209.1 including rotational or translational
    movement of a material shaping member in the extruding step.


CLS 264/209.3
TXT Reshaping product (extrudate) subsequent to extrusion:

    Processes under subclass 209.1 wherein the extruded material is reshaped in
    some manner subsequent to extrusion.


CLS 264/209.4
TXT Sizing to desired dimension:

    Processes under subclass 209.3 wherein extruded product is reshaped to
    achieve specific dimensions.

    (1)     Note.  For example, an extruded tube may be reshaped to a specific
    diameter or wall thickness.

    (2)     Note.  To reshape to different configuration is not considered to
    be sizing, e.g., changing from a tubular shape to a rectangular shape is
    not sizing.


CLS 264/209.5
TXT Stretching extruded material:
    Processes under subclass 209.4 wherein the extruded material is reshaped by
    stretching to desired dimensions.


CLS 264/209.6
TXT Curing or polymerizing operation during extrusion (e.g., cross-linking,
    vulcanizing, etc.): Processes under subclass 209.1 wherein at least some of
    the material being shaped is polymerized or cured, e.g., cross-linked,
    vulcanized, etc., during the extrusion.

    (1)     Note.  Cross-linking herein includes cross-linking of thermoplastic
    as well as thermosetting materials.


CLS 264/209.7
TXT At least two distinct operational temperatures employed during the
    extrusion operation:

    Processes under subclass 209.1 wherein at least two different temperatures
    are used at some point or time during the extrusion of the material.

    (1)     Note.  A different temperature applied to the material subsequent
    to extrusion from the die is not sufficient to place in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  A different temperature at the outer wall of the extruder
    from the temperature of the inner (mandrel) wall is sufficient for this
    subclass.


CLS 264/209.8
TXT Providing special flow channel feature (e.g., varying dimension of flow
    channel or varying direction of flow of material in the extruder, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 209.1 wherein special features of the flow channel
    in the extruder are included, e.g., varying dimensions of the flow channel
    or varying the direction of flow of material in the extruder, etc.


CLS 264/210.1
TXT And reshaping:

    Process under subclass 176 which includes the additional step of stretching
    or permanently reshaping the formed article.

    (1)     Note.  Classification of patents in this and indented subclasses.
    Patents should not be cross-referenced to this or its indented subclasses
    on the basis of disclosure, unless an unusual feature of the extrusion step
    or an unusual interrelationship between the extrusion and reforming steps
    is disclosed.  Subclasses 239+ provide more specifically for molding and
    reshaping operations and are the preferred loci for such disclosures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for twining or plying.

    119,    for cutting combined with extruding and reshaping.

    138+,   for a process wherein stretching causes a tearing of the workpiece.

    154,    for pore formation due to stretching.

    168,    for crimping or crinkling  of indefinite length articles.

    181,    for stretching of indefinite length articles in liquid in motion.

    197     and 198, for stretching or deforming of indefinite length viscose
    articles.

    208,    for stretching of cellulose derivative articles formed by extrusion
    and solvent evaporation.

    239+,   for reforming of shaped articles, per se.

    500+,   for reshaping or distortion of work employing vacuum or fluid
    pressure.


CLS 264/210.2
TXT Including a step other than application or removal of tension:

    Process under subclass 210.1 in which some or all of the reshaping is due
    to a force other than tension, e.g., pressure, etc.

    (1)     Note.  The pressure must do more than merely hold the workpiece,
    establish a neck-down point, etc.

    (2)     Note.  The process may also include a sequential operation wherein
    tension is applied or removed, or a simultaneous application or removal of
    tension, when it is clear that the reshaping is partly due to each
    mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for a process which includes textile formation.

    280+,   for reshaping in general of running or indefinite length plastic
    materials.

    500+,   for a process where reshaping uses fluid pressure, e.g., blowing,
    etc.

    555+,   for reshaping running length work by such a procedure.


CLS 264/210.3
TXT With application of agent other than water or air to workpiece:

    Process under subclass 210.1 wherein the workpiece, after extrusion, and
    before, during, or after reshaping, in contacted with a material other than
    air or water (including steam, water vapor, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  The agent may remain with the workpiece or may be used
    merely for heating, cooling, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     for dyeing of a workpiece.

    82+,    for reactive gas or vapor treatment of a workpiece.

    129+,   for printing or coating a workpiece outside the mold.

    178+,   for extrusion into a liquid bath.

    289.3,  for processes similar to those contained in this subclass but
    without an extrusion step.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 375+ and 411+
    for coated, e.g., lubricated, etc., fibers and sheets, respectively, per se.


CLS 264/210.4
TXT During or after final shape change:
    Process under subclass 210.3 wherein the application takes place during the
    final shape change, e.g., by spraying with inert liquid while shrinking,
    etc., or after the final shape change.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232+,   for a process of shaping and after-treatment of an article outside
    the shaping device without an extrusion step.

    289.6,  for processes similar to those contained in this subclass but
    without an extrusion step.

    340+,   for nonshaping treatments, per se.


CLS 264/210.5
TXT With temperature gradient across cross-section of workpiece or heat
    treatment after all shaping:

    Process under subclass 210.1 wherein a workpiece having its final shape is
    heated or held at an elevated temperature, whether in or out of the mold;
    or wherein the heating or cooling of a workpiece is nonuniform across the
    cross- section of the workpiece, e.g., the edges of a moving web are held
    at a temperature lower than the central portion, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25+,    for a shaping or molding process wherein the workpiece is heated by
    direct application of electrical or wave energy (e.g., infrared heat, etc.)
    to the work.

    234+    and 235+, for other processes concerned with after-heating.


CLS 264/210.6
TXT With processing before extrusion or inclusion of additive:

    Process under subclass 210.1 wherein the workpiece is stated to contain a
    --material not in itself plastic, e.g., a plasticizer, solvent, etc., or
    wherein a step is performed upon the material which is to become the
    workpiece before it is extruded, e.g., comminuting, adjusting viscosity,
    etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     for a process wherein a dye or dye former is included in the
    extrudant.


CLS 264/210.7
TXT Plural stretching steps or stages:
    Process under subclass 210.1 wherein an extruded workpiece is subjected to
    stretching by tension in more than one stage.

    (1)     Note.  Some criteria for determining when stretching occurs in more
    than one stage are the following:

    (a)     The interposition of a nonstretching step, such as heating or
    shrinking between stretching steps, during which step no stretching occurs.

    (b)     An abrupt change of stretching conditions, such as the tension
    force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138+,   for a process wherein the stretching is followed by removal of part
    of the workpiece.


CLS 264/210.8
TXT Of filament:

    Process under subclass 210.1 wherein the material extruded and reshaped is
    elongate material having a width about equal to its thickness.

    (1)     Note.  The fibers may be individual monofilaments or may be bundled
    together as a yarn or tow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210.7,  for filament extrusion plus stretching in a plurality of stages.

    290.5+, for filament stretching where no extrusion is claimed.


CLS 264/211
TXT Processes under subclass 176 wherein the article forming material contains
    and added (1) nonarticle forming agent or (2) agent chemically modifying
    the article forming material.

    (1)     Note.  The added agent may be, for example, flux lubricant,
    plasticizer, or a dispersing agent such as a small amount of solvent
    insufficient to form a liquid solution thereof.


CLS 264/211.1
TXT Centripetal extrusion:

    Processe under subclass 176.1 wherein centripetal force is employed to
    convey the artical forming material.

    (1)     Note.  A method utilizing the normal force developed when a
    visco-elastic material is sheared between a rotating plate and a stationary
    plate, having a central orifice, to cause centripetal flow of the material
    between the disc and orifice and issuance in plasticized condition from the
    orifice is proper subject matter for this subclass.


CLS 264/211.11
TXT Nonresinous material only (e.g., ceramic soap, cellulose, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 176.1 wherein the material being processed is
    other than a natural or a synthetic resin, e.g., ceramic material, soap,
    cellulose material, etc.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is not intended to incluced synthetic resins
    which meet the definition of Class 520.


CLS 264/211.12
TXT Processing or treatment after extrusion:

    Processes under subclass 176.1 wherein the extruded mmaterial is
    subequently manipulated, reacted or otherwise processed after extrusion.

    (1)     Note.  Contain of the extend material with guides or windup devices
    render a method proper for this subclass.


CLS 264/211.13
TXT Contact of extrudate with fluid other than ambient air:

    Process under subclass 211.12 wherein the extrudate is contacted with a
    fluid, other than ambuent air, in order to manipulate, influence the
    temperature of, or otherwise affect the product.


CLS 264/211.14
TXT Filament (e.g., fiber, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 211.13 wherein the product is a filament or fiber
    type of artical.


CLS 264/211.15
TXT Plural treatment stages or zones:

    Processes under subclass 211.14 wherein the extrudate is treated in at
    least two different zone or stages, at least one of the treatments being
    with a fluid.


CLS 264/211.16
TXT Extractive fluid or effects reaction:

    Processes under subclass 211.14 wherein the fluid extracts a component of
    the extrudate or effects a reaction in the extrudate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82+,    for a process wherein a gas or vapor reacts chemically with at
    least a portion of the extrudate.


CLS 264/211.17
TXT Heating:

    Processes under subclass 211.14 wherein the fluid treatment acts to heat
    the extrudate.


CLS 264/211.18
TXT Plural treatment stages or zones:

    Processes under subclass 211.13 wherein the extrdate is treated in at least
    two different zones or stages, at least one of the treatments being with a
    fluid.


CLS 264/211.19
TXT Extactive fluid or effects reaction:

    Processes under subclass 211.13 wherein the fluid extracts a component of
    the extrudate or effects a reaction in the extrudate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82+,    for a process wherein a gas or vapor reacts chemically with at
    least a portion of the extrudate.


CLS 264/211.20
TXT Heating:

    Processes under subclass 211.13 wherein the fluid treatment acts to heat
    the extrudate.


CLS 264/211.21
TXT Screw extruder or screw feeder device:

    Processes under subclass 176.1 wherein a screw device is employed in the
    extruder or as a feeder or material worker for the extruder.


CLS 264/211.22
TXT Filament (e.g., fiber, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 211.21 wherein the product is a filament or fiber.


CLS 264/211.23
TXT Plural screws, plural screw extruders, or plural stage extruder:

    Processes under subclass 211.21 wherein the extruder employs more than one
    screw; more than one screw extruder; or plural different stages.

    (1)     Note.  Extruders using different temperatures in different zones,
    or having threads of different pitch in different zones are proper for this
    subclass.


CLS 264/211.24
TXT Curing or polymerization in the extruder (includes incomplete
    polymerization or curing or coagulating rubber):

    Processes under subclass 176.1 wherein some curing or polymerization
    reation, or coagulation of rubber, is indicated to take place in the
    extruder.


CLS 264/212
TXT Processes under subclass 165 wherein the indefinite length article is
    formed by depositing forming material in liquid form on a solid forming
    surface and solidifying the liquid to form the article.

    (1)     Note.  The use of a doctor knife to smooth the upper surface of the
    cast liquid layer or to adjust the thickness thereof is considered to be
    within the scope of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175,    for processes wherein the article is formed between a pair of
    pressure rolls or moving pressure surfaces.

    298,    for casting finite articles on a liquid forming surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 224 for corresponding apparatus.


CLS 264/213
TXT Processes under subclass 212 in which removal of the formed article from
    the forming surface is facilitated by the use of anti-stick or adhesion
    preventing materials.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130,    for application of an anti-stick or adhesion preventing coating to
    a workpiece out of the mold.

    338,    for adhesion preventing coating of a mold is finite length article
    production.


CLS 264/214
TXT Processes under subclass 212 wherein the article formed is nonplanar.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are, for example, filaments and tubes or
    films, webs and sheets which have at least one surface which is nonplanar.


CLS 264/215
TXT Processes under subclass 212 wherein the forming surface is dipped or
    immersed in a supply of liquid forming material to acquire the deposit of
    the necessary layer of said material thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301+,   for casting by accretion from bulk, e.g., subclass 305, for
    successive dipping steps into same material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 269+ for corresponding apparatus.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 430.1+ for processes of coating by
    immersion.


CLS 264/216
TXT Processes under subclass 212 wherein the article forming material is rubber
    or synthetic resin containing.

    (1)     Note.  For a definition of "rubber or synthetic resin", see Class
    520, Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 1.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205+,   for extruding synthetic resin containing spinning solutions with
    solidifying by evaporation of liquid solvent.


CLS 264/217
TXT Processes under subclass 212 wherein the cast liquid contains a
    carbohydrate as the article forming ingredient.


CLS 264/218
TXT Processes under subclass 217 in which the cast article is precipitated,
    coagulated or made self sustaining by a subsequent treatment while on the
    casting surface either by an added reactant applied thereto or in a liquid
    precipitating or coagulating body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183+,   for article formation by extruding through a shaping orifice into a
    reactive bath.

    307,    for processes including the treatment of accreted material on a
    shaping surface with added agent or reactant.


CLS 264/219
TXT Processes under the class definition which include the step of producing
    (1) a shaping or molding device either as a, per se, operation by a method
    within the definitions of this class or (2) in combination with a step of
    employing said shaping or molding device in the production of a molded
    product by a process classifiable in this class in which latter instance
    the molding or shaping device may be formed by methods provided for
    elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  Patents reciting merely the application or formation of mold
    linings on molding surfaces are not within the scope of this subclass and
    are classified on some other bases.

    (2)     Note.  Patents reciting processes for manufacturing or assembling
    molds not specifically provided for herein are classified in various other
    classes depending on the specific manufacturing step employed, e.g., Class
    29, Metal Working, Class 156, Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical
    Manufacture, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31+,    for processes of erecting molds and casting structural
    installations in situ.

    337+,   for processes which employ specific mold materials or specific mold
    coatings or linings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 6+ for processes of making molds under
    the class definition.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 69 and 70 for processes of
    electroforming printing plates, molds and the like.


CLS 264/220
TXT Processes under subclass 219 in which an area or shape to be duplicated is
    employed to form or produce a duplicating pattern or mold surface.


CLS 264/221
TXT Processes under subclass 220 in which the mold or a portion thereof is
    destroyed, dissolved, or broken, so as to dissociate or release the formed
    article therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    313,    for processes utilizing a flexible, deformable or destructible
    molding surface or material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 423+ for processes employing transitory
    or temporary material or parts.


CLS 264/222
TXT Processes under subclass 220 wherein some portion of the body surface of an
    animal is employed as a molding surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16+,    for dental casting and molding.

    313+,   for processes employing a flexible deformable or destructible
    molding surface or material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 2 for shaping apparatus utilizing an anatomical body or portion
    thereof as a shaping surface.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 1 for processes of body member
    printing, e.g., fingerprinting.


CLS 264/223
TXT Processes under subclass 222 wherein the body surface is that of a foot or
    leg.


CLS 264/224
TXT Processes under subclass 220 in which a surface which is to be reproduced
    either in making a molding form or a final article is inverted inside out
    by resilient flexing or deforming.


CLS 264/225
TXT Processes under subclass 220 in which the mold forming material employed in
    reproducing a surface is in a fluent state.


CLS 264/226
TXT Processes under subclass 225 in which the forming area to be reproduced is
    formed by a molding operation or is treated or conditioned to facilitate
    such reproduction.


CLS 264/227
TXT Processes under subclass 226 which includes a formation of a negative of
    the surface to be reproduced followed by a formation of a positive surface
    which is to be used itself as a pattern or mold.


CLS 264/228
TXT Processes under class definition wherein a composite concrete article is
    formed in which the concrete component is under compressive stress.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for processes of forming stressed concrete during in situ formation
    of a structural installation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 446+ and especially subclass 452 for
    forming stressed concrete when the stressing element is applied to a self
    sustaining concrete body.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclass 257
    for the use of concrete in the containment of hazardous or toxic waste.


CLS 264/229
TXT Processes under the class definition wherein a solid body is placed under
    stress and united to another body or mass of molded material while
    maintaining said stressed condition.


CLS 264/230
TXT Processes under the class definition wherein a solid body is under stress
    and has such stress removed by heat application with simultaneous reduction
    of at least one dimension to return or attempt to return the body to its
    original shape.


CLS 264/231
TXT Processes under the class definition wherein a molded or shaped article is
    held under tensile stress during heat curing.


CLS 264/232
TXT Processes under the class definition in which the formed article is
    subjected to a treatment after working, molding or shaping thereof, said
    treatment being other than or different from that required to work, mold or
    alter the shape of said article and performed after removal from the mold.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for the cleaning or polishing of apparatus.

    82,     for processes including treatment with reactive gas or vapor.

    129+,   for printing or coating of the workpiece out of the mold.

    195,    for subsequent chemical treatment of indefinite length viscose
    articles and subclass 198 for mechanical treatment thereof.

    238,    for processes including a combined operation.

    307,    for processes of accretion from bulk including treatment of the
    accreted material while on the form with an added agent or reactant.

    344,    for processes of treating an article, per se, wherein entrained,
    occluded or adsorbed material, e.g., liquids are removed by application of
    heat or by solvent extraction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses
    for drying, per se, and see the line set out in the definitions of this
    class.


CLS 264/233
TXT Processes under subclass 232 wherein said treatment is a liquid cleansing
    step which removes impurities by a physical or solvent action of said
    liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for the dissolving out of solids to form a porous product.

    344,    for, per se, removal of material which is occluded, adsorbed on or
    dissolved in an article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 147+ for fluid treatment of artificial
    fibers, e.g., working, per se.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses as
    the generic home for cleaning processes.


CLS 264/234
TXT Processes under subclass 232 wherein the worked, shaped or molded material
    is subjected to a positively applied heating or cooling step after removal
    from the mold.

    (1)     Note.  Normal return of material to ambient temperature is not
    sufficient to place a patent in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Utilizing a support to maintain the shape of the molded body
    after removal from the mold is within the scope of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     for processes including a flame treatment.

    344,    for removal, per se, of entrained material from an article by the
    application of heat.

    345,    for temperature changes applied to a shaped or solid article, per
    se.


CLS 264/235
TXT Processes under subclass 234 wherein said temperature variation is a
    heating step for the purpose of annealing the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    346,    for processes of annealing a shaped or solid article.


CLS 264/235.6
TXT After stretching running or indefinite length work:

    Process under subclass 235 wherein the annealing is performed upon
    stretched work of indefinite length or work which moves through the
    treatment zone as it is being treated.

    (1)     Note.  The purpose of the treatment usually is to "heat set" the
    crystalline orientation produced by the stretching operation.

    (2)     Note.  The treatment is carried out at a tension (or lack of
    tension) different from the tension which causes the stretching; when
    performed at the same tension, the treatment is considered to be treatment
    "within the mold" and is classified with the stretching treatment.

    (3)     Note.  Shrinking is considered a shape change; heat treatment to
    shrink is not classified here; see subclass 289.6.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181,    198 and 210.1+, for extrusion and stretching whether or not
    followed by heat treatment.

    288.4+  and 291+, for stretching processes, per se.


CLS 264/235.8
TXT Biaxial stretching of film:

    Process under subclass 235.6 in which the stretching which precedes the
    annealing is performed in two perpendicular directions on planar material.

    (1)     Note.  Where all claims of a patent, classified herein, require a
    post-stretching heat treatment, the patent is preferably not
    cross-referenced to subclass 290.2.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290.2,  for biaxial stretching of film, per se.


CLS 264/236
TXT Processes under subclass 234 wherein the applied temperature variation is
    for the purpose of effecting a completion of vulcanization or
    polymerization of the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    347,    for processes of completing cure in a partially cure shaped or
    solid article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, particularly Class 525,
    subclasses 55+ for vulcanization of natural rubber.


CLS 264/237
TXT Processes under subclass 234 wherein a positive cooling or refrigerating
    step is applied to the material.

    (1)     Note.  Normal cooling of a heated material to ambient temperature
    is not sufficient to place a patent in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for processes including a cooling or freezing step of 0oC or below.

    348,    for cooling, per se, of a shaped or solid article.


CLS 264/238
TXT Processes under the class definition combined with a step which is, per se,
    (1) not provided for in this class and which (2) performs a function other
    than that utilized to perfect the plastic molding, shaping or working
    operations.

    (1)     Note.  "Perfecting" the operations of this class include operations
    performed on the material or work piece in the shaping means, handling of
    the material to present it to the shaping means, compounding the material,
    and heating or cooling the material or workpiece in or out of the mold.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232+,   for processes including a subsequent disparate treatment after
    working, molding or shaping.

    307,    for processes of accretion from bulk including treatment of the
    accreted material with an added agent or reactant.

    319+,   for processes of applying heat combined with a shaping step and see
    especially subclass 329 for processes of heating and working prior to
    injection molding.

    345+,   for heating or cooling, per se.


CLS 264/239
TXT Processes under the class definition for (1) making a self-sustaining solid
    article or shape from a formless or flowable mass of material, or (2)
    altering the configuration or at least one dimension of a solid
    self-sustaining workpiece by the application of a distorting mechanical
    force thereto.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are patents to confining shaped preforms
    between pressure surfaces and subjecting them to heat and pressure even
    though no apparent shaping is involved, e.g., vulcanizing rubber articles
    in a confining mold.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    340+,   for treating preforms without pressure means.


CLS 264/240
TXT Processes under subclass 239 in which at least two independent components
    of a reactive system are combined at the shaping surface.

    (1)     Note.  For processes wherein a chemical reaction, blending or
    mixing takes place in a mold in the absence of significant molding
    operations, see the definitions of this class (264) which sets out the line
    with the chemical composition classes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82+,    for processes which include utilizinga reactive gas or vapor.

    183,    for processes of extruding into a reactive bath.

    301+,   accretion from bulk, for initially coating a form with a
    coagulating material then a material to be coagulated or vice versa.

    646,    for processes which include utilizing a reactive atmosphere other
    than air, per se, during sintering to convert precusor to ceramic materials.


CLS 264/241
TXT Processes under subclass 239 in which different materials, portions or
    parts are brought into association and united by a mechanical shaping or
    molding operation.

    (1)     Note.  For location in this subclass the product of such process
    must be:

    (a)     the result of joining preformed parts with reshaping at the joining
    areas without destroying the identities of the preformed parts,

    (b)     the result of placing one preform in a mold and adding fluent
    material, of different character or,

    (c)     composed of clearly defined layers or parts.  Resin impregnated
    felted batts assembled and pressed together to form a homogeneous article,
    for example, would not be placed in this or indented subclasses unless the
    patent clearly set forth that the product includes a line of demarcation
    between the layers.  Woven layers, however, by their very nature, maintain
    their identity as layers when pressed together and would be included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31+,    for processes of forming composite in situ installations.

    45+,    for composite article making including a pore-forming step.

    112+,   for processes of forming stratified or layered articles by uniting
    of discrete, bulk assembled particles.

    171.1+, for processes of forming continuous or indefinite length articles
    which are transversely stratified or plural element containing.

    305,    for processes in which a shaping surface is successively dipped
    into the same material.

    642+,   for processes of forming a multilayered, impregnated, or composite
    structured product by firing, sintering, or vitrifying of a shaped
    inorganic preform outside of a mold.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 610.1+ for methods of making electrical
    resistors including both molding and metal working.  For the combination of
    molding a preform plastic part followed by a mechanical assembly of the
    part to another part see Class 29, subclasses 428+.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 36+ for fusion bonding of glass to
    a formed part.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for processes and apparatus of forming composite
    structures by laminating.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 91+ for processes of forming composite
    articles by metal casting.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 110 for composite article making apparatus comprising a molding
    cavity and means to feed or support a preform.

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclasses for processes of forming
    a composite article by a coating operation.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for layered or composite articles not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 264/242
TXT Processes under subclass 241 in which the product formed is composed for
    parts united or joined by a shaping operation whereby said parts remain
    mechanically movable relative to each other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, for processes of forming a product having
    interconnected movable parts by metal casting.


CLS 264/243
TXT Processes under subclass 241 directed to the production of bristle or
    tufted articles wherein substantially parallel fibers or filaments are
    fixed or positioned by a molding operation which causes a portion of said
    fibers or filaments to be embedded in a plastic material base.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    72 for processes wherein tufts or piles are set or embedded adhesively in
    or to a preformed backing.

    300,    Brush, Broom, and Mop Making, for brush or similar article forming
    procedures which may include a molding step.


CLS 264/244
TXT Processes under subclass 241 in which material is molded or reshaped and
    united simultaneously with a preformed upper portion of a shoe or boot.


CLS 264/245
TXT Processes under subclass 241 in which the surface of the composite articles
    has portions which are different in color than other surface portions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     for dyeing or incorporating dye susceptable material.

    139,    for mechanical removal of surface portions of a composite to expose
    a substrate which can be of contrasting color to the surface.


CLS 264/246
TXT Processes under subclass 245 which include forming a composite by utilizing
    as one component in the forming operation a self-sustaining preform which
    forms a surface area that differs in color from at least one other surface
    area.


CLS 264/247
TXT Processes under subclass 246 in which the self-sustaining preform is placed
    in, or relocated to, a particular position within a mold prior to the
    compositing operation.

    (1)     Note.  A component, which at the time of compositing thereof, lies
    undistributed adjacent a portion of the mold against which it was formed,
    is not considered to be positioned in the mold for purpose of this
    subclass, merely because other portions of the forming mold have been
    altered to form the composite mold configuration.


CLS 264/248
TXT Processes under subclass 241 wherein two plastically deformable
    self-sustaining bodies are assembled and autogenously united at a joint
    area by a shaping operation with plastic flow to reshape said bodies at
    said joint area.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    308.2+ and 324.4 for autogenous bonding of preforms, per se, in which any
    plastic flow at the joining area is incidental only to the joining
    operation and is not a shaping operation, per se, see subclass 69 for
    application of and closures to containers wherein there may be autogenous
    bonding at the joining area, and subclass 292 for joining preforms at edges
    with opposed surfaces out of contact.


CLS 264/249
TXT Processes under subclass 241 in which two self-sustaining preforms are
    locked or mechanically united together by a local reshaping of at least one
    of the preforms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273,    for processes of embedding a porous preform in a molding material
    with the molding material extending through the holes in the preform.

    274,    embedding a preform in a molding material wherein said preform is
    provided with means to form a mechanical interlock with the shaped material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, appropriate subclasses for mechanical joining, per
    se, or obtaining a mechanical interlock by metal reshaping.


CLS 264/250
TXT Processes under subclass 241 in which at least two different materials,
    portions or parts making up the composite article are separately molded or
    shaped.

    (1)     Note.  Sequential pouring of plastic material layers of differing
    compositions or physical properties so as to form a composite article in
    the same mold is considered separate molding for purposes of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31+,    for processes of sequentially molding different portions of an in
    situ structure.

    308,    for sequential pouring of the same material or incremental molding
    of the same material to form a homogeneous body.


CLS 264/251
TXT Processes under subclass 250 which include molding portions which are
    spaced from each other on, and separately united to, a preform or base by
    said molding operation.


CLS 264/252
TXT Processes under subclass 251 in which the base is a sheet, film, web or
    batt and the molded portions are confined to and extend along an edge of
    such base.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171.1+  for forming continuous or indefinite length composite or layered
    articles.


CLS 264/253
TXT Processes under subclass 251 in which the product is a building element or
    module of the type having two spaced walls interconnected by a preform
    element.


CLS 264/254
TXT Processes under subclass 250 in which a body has different surface areas
    covered with material in separate shaping operations.


CLS 264/255
TXT Processes under subclass 250 in which the same mold or confining means is
    used to retain the molding material during the formation of the different
    article portions.

    (1)     Note.  Incremental molding or dip casting of different materials in
    or on the same mold is within the scope of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129+,   for molding processes including a coating step preformed prior or
    subsequent to the molding and outside of the mold.

    301+,   for sequential formation of layers of the same material on a mold
    by a accretion from bulk.

    308,    for sequential layer formations of the same material.


CLS 264/256
TXT Processes under subclass 255 wherein a layer is comprised of a material
    which is in whole or part siliceous, argillaceous, arenaceous, calcarious
    or is formed substantially of a similar, common soil forming substituent.


CLS 264/257
TXT Processes under subclass 241 wherein one component of said composite
    article is a fibrous or textile sheet, web or batt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136,    for similar operations which include coating or impregnating of a
    self-sustaining batt sheet or filament.

    244,    for processes of uniting shoe parts to upper in which one part is a
    textile sheet or batt.

    252,    for the molding of a material against a textile base in the forming
    of separable fasteners.


CLS 264/258
TXT Processes under subclass 257 in which a plurality of superposed or
    contacting fibrous or textile sheets, webs or batts are united at least in
    some areas of said contact.


CLS 264/259
TXT Processes under subclass 241 in which a molding material is shaped or
    formed against a preform and said shaped material remains united with the
    preform to constitute a composite article.

    (1)     Note.  Where the preform and the shaping material are the same
    composition so that the product is homogeneous and cannot be called
    composite, the patent will not be placed herein but will be classified in
    the appropriate subclass based on the manipulative steps involved.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for processes of forming a denture base against preformed teeth.

    30,     for processes of uniting a furnace lining material to a furnace
    wall.

    228,    for shaping concrete and uniting to a preform self-sustaining body,
    (stressed concrete type).

    308,    for incremental layer molding of the same material.


CLS 264/260
TXT Processes under subclass 259 wherein at least two different fluent
    materials are simultaneously molded and united to a preform to form a
    composite article.


CLS 264/261
TXT Processes under subclass 259 in which two distinct preformed bodies with
    opposing surfaces are positioned in a spaced relationship with each other
    and a fluent molding material at least partially fills the space between
    the preforms said molding material acting to unite the preforms and being
    contained at least in part by said preform surfaces.

    (1)     Note.  The fluent material here is introduced primarily for the
    purpose of filling or partially filling the space between the preforms,
    with any material which extends beyond the space between the preforms being
    of insufficient quantity to cover or embed the preforms except, at most, in
    the areas immediately adjacent the space between the preforms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277,    for processes wherein plural spaced bodies are embedded in or
    surrounded by shaping material in which the shaping material, while it may
    function to unite the plural shaped bodies, does more than merely fill the
    spaces therebetween, but also gives the final article its outer shape or
    structure, at least in part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for processes laminating by placing adhesive between
    preforms and then uniting.


CLS 264/262
TXT Processes under subclass 261 in which the bodies have a common center.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    294 for uniting a core within a tube where the elements are not maintained
    in a spaced relationship.


CLS 264/263
TXT Processes under subclass 259 in which the shaping of material is on or
    about at least two contacting preforms, said shaped material functioning
    also to unite said preforms.

    (1)     Note.  Patents will be placed herein even though a) a temporary
    uniting means for the preforms is disclosed to be present during the
    shaping or molding of the material or b) a permanent mechanical joining of
    the preforms is disclosed to be present.


CLS 264/264
TXT Processes under subclass 259 in which at least part of the surface of the
    body is treated or covered to prevent the adherence of the subsequently
    applied material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    290+ for bonding of facing continuously contacting laminae at spaced points
    only.


CLS 264/265
TXT Processes under subclass 259 in which the preformed body is acted upon in a
    step separate and distinct from the shaping or forming step to (1) perfect
    the shaping operation or (2) assist in the uniting of the body and the
    shaping material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134+,   for coating or impregnating a preformed body before a composite
    molding operation.

    228     and 229, for applying a stress to a body before compositing.


CLS 264/266
TXT Processes under subclass 259 in which a preformed self-sustaining body
    undergoes a reshaping simultaneously with the shaping of a material and the
    uniting thereof to the reshaped preform.

    (1)     Note.  To be included herein the self-sustaining body must remain
    substantially self-sustaining during the reshaping operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, appropriate subclasses for processes in which the
    preform is a metal.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 106 for metal compositing operation
    wherein the cast metal reshapes a preform.


CLS 264/267
TXT Processes under subclass 259 in which shaping material is molded against
    and united to at least a portion of the inner surface of an aperture,
    cavity or hollow contained in a preform.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    293 for inserting of a lamina in a recess and adhesion to side walls
    thereof.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 230+ for processes of coating the
    interior of a hollow article.


CLS 264/268
TXT Processes under subclass 267 in which the hollow body is relatively thin
    walled, the end and side walls of said body form a cap or cup-like shape.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    69 for the application of end closures to containers, and subclass 62 for
    closure cap lining by cutting and laminating.


CLS 264/269
TXT Processes under subclass 267 in which the molding material is shaped and
    applied so as to constitute a lining or covering layer for substantially
    the entire inner surface of the cavity or aperture of said hollow body.


CLS 264/270
TXT Processes under subclass 269 which includes the use of centrifugal force to
    aid in the application of the lining.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the patents classified herein pertain to pipe lining.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    for the use of centrifugal force in the formation of particulate
    material.

    114,    for the use of centrifugal force in the uniting of bulk assembled
    particles.

    311,    for the use of centrifugal force in the mold shaping of plastic
    material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 114+ for processes of centrifugal metal
    casting and subclasses 286+ for corresponding apparatus particularly
    subclass 288 for means to hold or position preformed product.


CLS 264/271.1
TXT Preform embedded in or surrounded by shaped material:

    Processes under subclass 259 in which the preformed self-sustaining body
    has molding material shaped about it so that said body is surrounded by or
    embedded in said molding material.

    (1)     Note.  Shaping of a molding material to a planar surface only if a
    preform is not within the scope of this subclass. To be placed herein, the
    patent must include confining the preform in two dimensions thereof with
    the shaping material so as to embed or surround the preform.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     for processes of forming structural installations in situ in which
    molding material is shaped around and united to a core or preform.


CLS 264/272.11
TXT Electrical component encapsulating:
    Processes under subclass 271.1 in which the surrounded or embedded body, or
    at least a part thereof, is intended for use as component of an electrical
    circuit.

    (1)     Note.  To be included here the component must be one which controls
    the electricity, for example, a coil, condenser, or rectifier, and not
    merely a conductor insulator or outlet, etc. Processing of covering
    conductors, etc, are classified according to the manipulative step employed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for processes of producing electrical article by shaping conductive
    materials.

    171.1+, for extrusion of plastic material around strandlike or filamentlike
    preforms which may be electrical conductors.

    614+,   for other processes of producing electrical articles which include
    a step of firing shaped articles or preforms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, particularly subclass 841 for encapsulation
    following the assembly of an electrical device to an insulative base and
    subclasses 855+ for encapsulation combined with assembly of a terminal or
    elongated conductor directly to an electrical component.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    51 for covering of indefinite-length conductors with nonpreformed material.
    See the search notes to subclass 47 under (12) Note, Coating, Covering and
    Sheathing.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 52.2 for embedded
    electrical components.

    252,    Compositions, (special uses or functions) to subclass 194.

    252,    Compositions, (special uses of functions), subclass 478 and those
    following, except subclasses 302+, 363.5, 372+, and 378.

    252,    Composition, (nonspecial uses or functions i.e., subclasses 302+,
    363.5, 372+, and 378).

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 100, 433, 434, and 787-796 for encapsulated active solid-state
    electronic devices.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 43 for embedded
    electrical generator or motor structure.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 96 and 205 for embedded inductor
    devices.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 226+ for embedded electrical
    resistors.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 600+ for
    encapsulated plural electrical components.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, particularly
    subclasses 112, 124, and 127 for methods of encapsulating semiconductor
    devices; see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 264/272.12
TXT Nonresinous encapsulant:

    Processes under subclass 272.11 in which the material surrounding or
    embedding the electrical component is not a synthetic resin.


CLS 264/272.13
TXT With curing procedure, or procedure or treatment to compensate for
    differential expansion:

    Processes under subclass 272.11 in which there is claimed a step of curing
    the encapsulating material or some expedient is employed to compensate for
    the differing coefficients of expansion of an electrical component or part
    thereof and the encapsulant.


CLS 264/272.14
TXT Plural electrical components:
    Processes under subclass 272.11 in which two or more electrical components
    are encapsulated.


CLS 264/272.15
TXT With component positioning procedure or incorporation of article
    positioning means:

    Processes under subclass 272.11 in which the electrical component is
    claimed as positioned in a specified relation to the encapsulant or in
    which a positioning means is incorporated in the encapsulant.


CLS 264/272.16
TXT Transducer, or electric lamp or space discharge device:

    Processes under subclass 272.11 in which the component encapsulated is
    adapted to convert mechanical to electrical energy by electromagnetism or
    the component is an elecric lamp or electric space discharge device.

    (1)     Note.  Electric space discharge devices are defined for the purpose
    of classification as including any device which is intended to have an
    electric current flow between two spaced electrodes, at least part of the
    path followed by the discharge being constituted by a gas, vapor, or
    vacuum. Electric space discharge devices, therefore, include spark gaps,
    spark plugs, radio tubes, X-ray tubes, cathode-ray tubes, gas or vapor
    discharge lamps and lighting arresters of the electric space discharge type.


CLS 264/272.17
TXT Semiconductor or barrier layer device (e.g., integrater circuit,
    transistor, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 272.11 in which the component exhibits
    asymmetrical voltage current conduction characteristics.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, particularly
    subclasses 112, 124, and 127 for methods of encapsulating semiconductor
    devices; see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 264/272.18
TXT Condenser or resistor:

    Processes under subclass 272.11 in which the component encapsulated is a
    condenser or resistor.


CLS 264/272.19
TXT Dynamoelectric machine, electromagnet, transformer, inductors, or coils:

    Processes under subclass 272.11 in which the encapsulated component is
    designed to produce an electromagnetic field or is a coil.


CLS 264/272.2
TXT Motor or part encapsulated:

    Processes under subclass 272.19 in which the component is an electric motor
    or an electrical component thereof.


CLS 264/272.21
TXT Battery or part encapsulated:
    Processes under subclass 272.11 in which the electrical component
    encapsulated is a source of electrical current or part of such device.


CLS 264/273
TXT Processes under subclass 271 in which a material is shaped against a body
    having holes or apertures extending therethrough said material being forced
    into said holes or apertures during the shaping operation.


CLS 264/274
TXT Processes under subclass 271 in which the body is provided with an undercut
    or other indentations to produce at least mechanical interference or keyed
    fit with the subsequently applied material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249,    for processes of mechanically securing preforms together by
    reshaping at joint portion.


CLS 264/275
TXT Processes under subclass 271 which include a provision for locating a
    preformed body in a specific position in a mold or maintaining such a
    position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247,    for processes of positioning a preform in a mold and molding a
    different color material against the preform.

    254,    for positioning by holding the body against a shaping surface while
    molding, then molding against the body while positioning by holding the
    previously shaped materials.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 112 for processes of positioning a preform
    in metal compositing processes.


CLS 264/276
TXT Processes under subclass 275 in which a parting line fin or flash excess
    plastic material is prevented from forming or reduced by the particular
    positioning of the body in the mold.


CLS 264/277
TXT Processes under subclass 275 in which a plurality of bodies spaced from
    each other during a molding operation are embedded in or surrounded by said
    shaping material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261,    for processes in which molding material is introduced only in the
    space between plural preform surfaces with no more than a slight excess or
    overflow, said molding material being contained at least in part by the
    preform surfaces and serving to unite said preforms.


CLS 264/278
TXT Processes under subclass 275 which include the utilization of positioning
    means which may be withdrawn from the mold before separation of the
    composite article from the mold or removed from the composite body
    subsequent to separation thereof from the mold.


CLS 264/279
TXT Processes under subclass 271 wherein the material which is to be shaped so
    as to embed or surround a preformed body is in a flowable state when
    applied to said preform body.


CLS 264/279.1
TXT Preform is completely surrounded by shaped material:

    Processes under subclass 271.1 in which the preform is completely covered
    by the shaping material on all sides.


CLS 264/280
TXT Processes under subclass 239 in which the work that is mechanically shaped
    or molded by a physically applied force to deform, is a preform and of
    running or indefinite length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165+,   for formation of indefinite length articles combined with
    subsequent treatments especially subclass 210 with stretching or deforming.

    347,    for curing of indefinite length materials out of a mold.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclass 117 for die reshaping
    of a waterlaid web or sheet.


CLS 264/281
TXT Processes under subclass 280 directed to production of helically coiled
    articles wherein each convolution of said coil is axially displaced from
    adjoining convolutions.

    (1)     Note.  Patents reciting winding in place with no axial displacement
    or wherein each convolution is entirely superimposed over the preceding one
    are excluded from this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    169+ and 184+ particularly subclass 195, for winding combined with
    laminating or uniting.


CLS 264/282
TXT Processes under subclass 280 wherein the reshaping takes the form of
    creping or crinkling.

    (1)     Note.  Including in this subclass are, for example, crowding the
    work back on itself to induce it to wrinkle, and crushing the work to
    produce random permanent distortions.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not include corrugating, per se, within
    its scope. See search notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168,    for indefinite length forming and crimping.

    284,    for corrugating, per se, of an indefinite or running length web.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclass 18.6 for compressive shrinking.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    183 for creping, wrinkling or crinkling combined with a laminating step.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 111+ for processes of
    creping or crinkling a waterlaid web or sheet.


CLS 264/283
TXT Processes under subclass 282 wherein the creping, crinkling or wrinkling is
    effected by means of a doctoring implement applied to a drum carrying the
    web wherein said web is reshaped accordingly and removed from the drum.


CLS 264/284
TXT Processes under subclass 280 which the surface configuration only of the
    workpiece is altered by raising bosses or protuberances thereon or causing
    surface portions to be depressed below the plane of the workpiece surface.

    (1)     Note.  Where a surface only is altered by a cutting, scribing or
    plowing only, and no material is removed or separated therefrom through
    these operations, the patent will be placed herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138+,   for processes involving a severing or material removal operation.

    293,    for processes including an embossing step on nonrunning length
    material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclass 32 for embossing processes there provided for.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    209 and 219+ for embossing combined with a laminating step.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 319+ for shaping apparatus comprising the combination of means
    to form a preform and means to convolute or twist the preform, subclasses
    323+ for pretzel bending apparatus and subclass 383 for a molding apparatus
    including means to reshape a preform.


CLS 264/285
TXT Processes under subclass 280 in which a portion of a workpiece is moved and
    permanently distorted throughout its entire thickness relative to a second
    portion during which the thickness of the workpiece remains substantially
    the same and no significant plastic flow occurs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    339,    for bending or twisting articles or workpieces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    196+ for bending when combined with a laminating step.


CLS 264/286
TXT Processes under subclass 285 in which the bending involves forming a web
    with a cross-section having alternate ridges and grooves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    339,    for bending or twisting of definite length articles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    202+ and 205+ for corrugating of indefinite length work combined with a
    laminating operation and 210 for corrugating and laminating to a
    noncorrugated lamina.


CLS 264/287
TXT Processes under subclass 286, wherein a reshaping step is performed on
    sheet material which has been corrugated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    294+,   for plural sequential shaping or molding steps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    207 for deformation of corrugated laminae and or laminates.


CLS 264/288.4
TXT Stretching by applying tension:
    Process under subclass 280 in which the reshaping is performed by pulling
    an end or edge of the workpiece and the workpiece is elongated in the
    direction of the tension application.

    (1)     Note.  Tension applied merely to hold the work extended or taut is
    not considered to be within the scope of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210.1+, for stretching combined with extrusion.

    291+,   for stretching or stretch forming, per se, applied to other than
    running or indefinite-length work.

    500+,   for processs where reshaping uses fluid pressure, e.g., blowing,
    etc.

    555+,   for reshaping running length work by such a procedure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    229 for stretching combined with a laminating step.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 172+ for a process of coating running
    or indefinite-length work combined with stretching or tensioning.


CLS 264/288.8
TXT Nonuniform product (e.g., porous, etc., or with tensioning before
    application of heat):

    Process under subclass 288.4 including a step of applying tension to a
    workpiece before the workpiece is heated, e.g., "prestretching", etc., or
    wherein the process results in an article or running length differing from
    a uniform and uniform-appearing fiber, tow, or film in a specified way,
    whether the variation be desired or undesired, e.g., knots, color
    variations, etc.

    (1)     Note.  The process may produce the variations or may tend to
    minimize variations in the original workpiece.

    (2)     Note.  The tensioning may or may not result in a change of shape
    (cold-stretching).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41+,    for a process which includes pore-forming in situ.

    103,    for a process which includes formation of a textile fabric.

    154,    for a process where stretching itself causes pores to be formed.

    287,    for a process in which a film is corrugated and the corrugations
    are minimized or eliminated by later stretching.


CLS 264/289.3
TXT With treatment other than heating before stretching:

    Process under subclass 288.4 wherein the workpiece is treated by other than
    heat before tension for stretching is applied, e.g., pressure treatment,
    fluid treatment, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     for a process which includes dyeing of the workpiece.

    82+,    for a process which includes reactive gas or vapor treatment of the
    workpiece.

    103,    for a process which includes textile fabric formation.

    138+,   for a process in which a portion of the workpiece is modified to
    aid the stretching procedure and the modified portion is later removed from
    the stretched workpiece.


CLS 264/289.6
TXT With shrinking or with liquid contact during or after stretching:

    Process under subclass 288.4 wherein a liquid material, e.g., a sizing or
    heat exchange material, etc., makes direct contact with the workpiece
    during the stretching operation or after the stretching operation, or
    wherein the process includes a step in which stretching tension is reduced,
    allowing a dimension of the workpiece to decrease.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     for a process wherein a workpiece is dyed.

    129+,   for a process wherein the workpiece is coated, outside the mold,
    that is, when not under stretching conditions.

    289.3,  for a process in which liquid contact or shrinking takes place
    before any stretching.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 375+ and 411+
    for coated, e.g., lubricated, etc., fibers and sheets, respectively, per se.


CLS 264/290.2
TXT Biaxial or transverse to travel direction:

    Process under subclass 288.4 wherein a moving workpiece is stretched in a
    direction at right angles to its direction of movement or in which a
    stationary, indefinite-length work-piece is stretched in two perpendicular
    directions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138+,   for a process wherein stretching is followed by removal of part of
    the workpiece.

    235.8,  for a process wherein biaxial stretching of a film is followed by
    heat-setting.  When all of the claims of a patent include the heat setting
    step, the patent is preferably not  cross-referenced to this subclass.


CLS 264/290.5
TXT Of filament:

    Process under subclass 288.4 wherein the workpiece is one having a width
    and thickness of small and about equal dimensions.

    (1)     Note.  The filament may be a monofilament or a tow or yarn, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    289.6,  for filament stretching where a shrinking is included in the
    process.


CLS 264/290.7
TXT Including contact with mechanism in stretch path (e.g., snubbing, etc.):

    Process under subclass 290.5 wherein the fiber, besides contact with the
    two essential mechanisms which cause the tension application and define the
    stretch path, contacts also a third solid object arranged between the two
    essential mechanisms.

    (1)     Note.  The third object often, but not always, serves the purpose
    of defining the necking point of the fiber during stretching.


CLS 264/291
TXT Processes under subclass 239 wherein external tension is applied to a
    self-sustaining body so as to effectively increase at least one surface
    dimension thereof or otherwise reshape the body by extending it beyond the
    elastic limit.

    (1)     Note.  Incidental stretching which occurs in the normal reshaping
    of a workpiece between dies is not considered sufficient to place a patent
    in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for processes of forming polarizing sheets by a stretching step.

    88+,    for tensional deformation of self-sustaining bodies generated by
    direct application of fluid pressure or vacuum to work or molding material.

    288,    for stretching of running length work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 171+ for processes of coating
    combined with stretching or tensioning.


CLS 264/292
TXT Processes under subclass 291 wherein the workpiece is forced to assume the
    shape of a form by said stretching of the workpiece over the form and into
    contact therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90+,    for stretch forming with vacuum.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    212 for bending, drawing or stretching forming of a sheet to assume shape
    of a configured lamina while in contact therewith.


CLS 264/293
TXT Processes under subclass 239 in which the surface configuration only of the
    workpiece is altered by raising bosses or protuberances thereon or causing
    surface portions to be depressed below the plane of the workpiece surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106+,   for embossing a preform to provide surface sound grooves.

    138+,   for processes including a cutting operation.

    284,    for embossing of a running or indefinite length work and see the
    notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclasses 3.1+ for embossing processes there provided
    for.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    209 and 219+ for surface deformation or embossing combined with a
    laminating operation.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 385 for a preform reshaping means comprising a surface deformation
    means only.


CLS 264/294
TXT Processes under subclass 239 which include plural molding or shaping steps
    said steps being distinct, separate and sequential.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are processes in which a similar type of
    molding, which may differ in magnitude or direction is applied in plural
    steps to the same portion of the article.

    (2)     Note.  See appropriate subclasses in this class and the search
    notes below in particular for processes which involve incremental molding
    or accretion from bulk, e.g., successive dip casting, and those operations
    which involve repetition to give an overall unitary effect, e.g.,
    sequential corrugation, stepwise elongation of successive portions of an
    article or bending a sheet in steps to form a U-shape.

    (3)     Note.  Where a patent may recite a preliminary "extrusion" prior to
    a molding operation where said "extrusion" is disclosed to be for the
    purpose of mixing, agitating or controlling or directing a stream of liquid
    or plastic material enroute to the molding means, rather than for shaping
    by extrusion, said "extrusion" will not be considered a diverse molding
    step for purpose of this subclass but will be classified on some other
    basis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88+,    for plural forming steps wherein one Is by a fluid pressure
    differential.

    285+,   for processes of bending or corrugating indefinite length work.

    301+,   particularly subclass 305 for processes involving accretion from
    bulk.

    308,    for processes which include incremental molding.

    339,    for bending or twisting of work.


CLS 264/295
TXT Processes under subclass 294 wherein the plural steps comprise at least one
    molding step followed by at least one bending or twisting operation in
    which (a) a portion of a workpiece is moved throughout its entire thickness
    relative to a second portion during which the thickness of the workpiece
    remains substantially the same and no significant plastic flow occurs or
    (b) there is distortion of a single solid body by relative movement of its
    parts about a common axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98+,    for a pneumatic shaping pressure applied to the inside of a hollow
    work following preliminary extrusion of a blank or blank portion.

    103,    for twisting of plural elements about each other.

    339,    for distortion by twisting, per se.


CLS 264/296
TXT Processes under subclass 294 in which at least one of the shaping or
    molding steps alters the existing configuration of a limited portion of the
    article.


CLS 264/297.1
TXT Forming plural articles:

    Processes under subclass 239 which include forming a plurality of separate
    and distinct articles either simultaneously or sequentially.

    (1)     Note.  To be placed in this subclass, the articles formed must not
    be particulate in nature, that is, of such a size that the formed particles
    can be handled in bulk only.  For formation of particulate material from a
    liquid or molten mass, see the search note below.

    (2)     Note.  The fact that the apparatus used in the process may be
    capable of continuous operation thus forming plural articles, for example,
    injection molding devices, is not sufficient to place a patent in this and
    the indented subclasses.  To be placed in this array the patent must claim
    the process of forming plural articles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5+,     for formation of particulate material directly from a molten or
    liquid mass.

    157+,   where plural articles are produced by cutting operations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 119+ for molds for forming plural products.


CLS 264/297.2
TXT Including introducing material under pressure into a closed mold cavity
    (e.g., injection molding, etc.): Processes under subclass 297.1 which
    include a step of forcing material from a source removed from a closed mold
    cavity into the cavity wherein said material assumes the shape of the
    closed mold cavity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    328.1+, for processes of injection molding of single articles or multiple
    attached articles.


CLS 264/297.3
TXT With plural molds on belt or turntable:

    Processes under subclass 297.2 in which the molds into which material is
    forced under pressure are mounted on a continuous surface or are mounted to
    provide for rotary motion of the molds about a central axis.


CLS 264/297.4
TXT Forming multiple stacked or nested articles or including multilayer
    pressing:

    Processes under subclass 297.1 in which a plurality of articles are shaped
    by performing a forming operation on a stack or nest of preforms or in
    which a single press couple acts on a stack of shaping members.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes a process of forming a chain or
    article articulated in a chainlike manner as a nested article.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass also includes the use of parting material in a
    stack of preforms to be shaped.


CLS 264/297.5
TXT Reshaping or treatment of a preform (e.g., vulcanizing, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 297.1 in which a preform is reshaped or subjected
    to chemical or physical treatment after shaping.

    (1)     Note.  The reshaping processes provided for herein typically
    reshape part of a preform such as belling the end of a length of pipe or
    vulcanize a group of preforms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    294+,   for plural sequential shaping steps preformed on a workpiece.


CLS 264/297.6
TXT With plural molds on a moving surface:

    Processes under subclass 297.1 which include the use of a series of molds
    mounted on a moving surface providing linear or rotary motion to the molds.


CLS 264/297.7
TXT With linear movement of the molds:
    Processes under subclass 297.6 in which the moving surface carries the
    molds in a straight line.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for molds mounted on belts.  Subclass
    297.6 will provide for molds carried by a turntable.


CLS 264/297.8
TXT Simultaneous formation of plural articles:

    Processes under subclass 297.1 in which a plurality of separate and
    distinct articles are formed at the same time.


CLS 264/297.9
TXT Of primarily inorganic material (e.g., concrete or ceramic, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 297.8 in which the articles are composed of
    inorganic material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for processes of making dishes and
    concrete panels.


CLS 264/298
TXT Processes under subclass 239 in which the article forming material is
    shaped by casting or depositing the material on a liquid body the surface
    of which acts as the shaping means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for direct application of fluid pressure to a workpiece or molding
    material.

    165+,   for formation of continuous or indefinite length articles by
    casting on a liquid surface.

    212+,   for formation of continuous or indefinite length articles by
    casting on a solid supporting or shaping surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 81 for processes of metal casting on a
    liquid shaping surface.


CLS 264/299
TXT Processes under subclass 239 in which (1) fluent or plastic material is
    caused to flow to assume the configuration of a solid shaping surface in
    contact therewith, or (2) solid material is forced against a shaping
    surface by pressure means opposed thereto.

    (1)     Note.  Vulcanizing between pressure surfaces or in a shape
    retaining cavity is considered to involved "mold shaping" for the purpose
    of this subclass and those indented hereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, appropriate subclasses for processes and
    apparatus for shaping glass.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    appropriate subclasses for corresponding apparatus, see especially
    subclasses 376.1+ for an extrusion shaping apparatus, subclasses 383+ for
    molding apparatus for reshaping a preform, subclasses 406+ for a press
    molding machine, and subclasses 425+ for a molding machine utilizing mold
    motion to shape or to compact.


CLS 264/300
TXT Processes under subclass 299 in which parting or release material is
    incorporated in the molding composition to facilitate subsequent removal of
    the formed article from the mold or shaping surface.


CLS 264/301
TXT Processes under subclass 299 in which the molding material is applied in
    bulk to the molding surface causing a relatively small proportion to be
    deposited or adhered to the molding surface followed by relatively
    separating the mold form with the adhering material from the remaining bulk.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, pouring molding
    material into a mold and pouring out the excess which does not cling to the
    mold walls or dipping a mold form into the molding material and removal of
    said form therefrom with a coating of said material adhered to the molding
    surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215,    for processes of forming indefinite length or continuous articles
    wherein the molding surface, e.g., belt or wheel, dips into the molding
    material.

    308,    for incremental molding processes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 228+ for processes of
    accreting from a bulk supply of pulp suspension.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 430.1+ for processes of coating by
    immersion and see the class definition of Class 264 at section II F for the
    line between Classes 264 and 427.


CLS 264/302
TXT Processes under subclass 301 wherein the molding material is poured or
    placed in the mold and the excess material not deposited, gelled or
    coagulated on the mold surface is removed to leave a relatively thin
    deposit or layer on the inner walls of the mold.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310,    for processes wherein a material is rotationally cast without
    excess material removal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 77 for processes of slush casting of
    metals.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 433 for slush molding in molds peripherally supported on an
    endless belt and subclass 435 for other slush molding apparatus.


CLS 264/303
TXT Processes under subclass 301 in which the deposition or accretion on the
    mold surface is of a nonuniform or varying thickness to produce articles
    which have an irregular or nonuniform cross-sectional wall thickness, or in
    which the accretion rate or overall thickness of the accretion is
    controlled or regulated by a compound or nonlinear movement of the molding
    form or surface.


CLS 264/304
TXT Processes under subclass 301 which include a step which facilitates removal
    of the formed article from the mold or forming surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334+,   for casting ejecting, core or mold stripping or separating.


CLS 264/305
TXT Processes under subclass 301 wherein the accretion of the material is in
    plural separate stages by separate dippings into a source or supply of the
    same molding material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215,    for processes of forming indefinite length or continuous articles
    wherein the shaping surface, e.g., endless belt or wheel is dipped into the
    molding material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 269+ for corresponding apparatus.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 430.1+ for processes of coating by
    immersion, and see Class 264 class definition at section II F.


CLS 264/306
TXT Processes under subclass 301 in which the deposition or accretion of the
    molding material on the mold is facilitated or effected by a separate
    treatment or conditioning of the material or the mold surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 471+ for
    electrophoretic or electro-osmotic coating or forming of an object.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 133+ for processes of coating a mold.


CLS 264/307
TXT Processes under subclass 301 wherein the accreted or deposited material is
    subsequently treated while still on the form with an added agent or
    reactant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195,    for subsequent chemical treatment of indefinite length viscose
    articles.

    218,    for processes including a subsequent treatment of a cast
    carbohydrate containing layer with a reactant or coagulating agent.

    232,    for processes which include a subsequent disparate treatment of an
    article out of the mold.

    340+,   for treatment, per se, of shaped articles.


CLS 264/308
TXT Processes under subclass 299 in which the same material is applied in
    multiple, sequential charges in or on the same mold or molding surface, or
    on the surface of a previously deposited or formed layer of the same
    material, the formed article resulting therefrom being homogeneous and
    unitary in structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171.1+, for stratified or layered indefinite length article forming.

    241+,   for forming composite, plural part or multilayered articles.


CLS 264/309
TXT Processes under subclass 299 in which the molding material is propelled
    forcibly through space in either compacted bulk form, or discrete form, to
    thereby impinge against and collect in or on a molding or shaping surface
    or means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for processes of lining a furnace by spraying or flinging material
    against a surface.

    91,     for vacuum depositing bulk particles.

    98+,    for formation of solid particulate material directly from a molten
    or liquid mass which may involve forcible impingement of a liquid on a
    surface.

    109+,   for formation of articles by adhesive uniting of particulate
    nonmetallic material.


CLS 264/310
TXT Processes under subclass 299 in which rotating motion is imparted to the
    material being shaped or to the mold or mold shaping surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for rotation to produce frictional heat.

    69+,    for processes which pertain to agitating by plural seqential
    rotations in reverse directions. However, such patents should be crosses
    herein where applicable depending on the time of duration of said rotation
    periods in one direction.

    175,    for processes of forming indefinite length articles by a
    calendering operation between endless shaping surfaces, e.g., belts or
    wheels.


CLS 264/311
TXT Processes under subclass 310 which include the generation of a centrifugal
    force which is applied to the molding material, the effect of said
    centrifugal force being manifested in the shaping, distribution or
    maintenance of said molding material in the mold.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for formation of particulate material from a liquid or molten mass
    by means of centrifugal force.

    114,    for use of centrifugal force in formation of articles by uniting of
    bulk assembled particles.

    176,    for centrifugal spinning of filaments or fibers.

    270,    for processes of lining a mold cavity employing centrifugal force.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 114+ for processes of centrifugally
    casting metals.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 425 for a molding machine utilizing mold motion to distribute or
    compact a fluent material in a mold.


CLS 264/312
TXT Processes under subclass 310 in which a recess is formed, enlarged or
    maintained by a correspondingly shaped means for such recess which means
    performs such function by a rotation relative to the body containing such
    recess.


CLS 264/313
TXT Processes under subclass 299 in which the mold or mold surface is flexible,
    resilient, deformable or may be collapsed or destroyed to facilitate
    removal or separation of the molded article from the mold.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219+,   where the flexible or deformable mold surface is anatomical.

    318,    for processes for making undercut articles in rigid molds.

    334+,   for processes directed to casting, ejecting, core or mold
    stripping, or separating of articles from molds or shaping devices and see
    the search notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 423+ for processes employing transitory
    or temporary material or parts.


CLS 264/314
TXT Processes under subclass 313 in which the mold pressure is applied through
    fluid inflatable or expansible means.


CLS 264/315
TXT Processes under subclass 314 in which said inflatable element is toroidal
    in shape.

    (1)     Note.  A toroidal shape is that generated by a closed planar figure
    when rotated about an axis lying in the same plane therewith and outside
    the figure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    326,    for reshaping toroidal shaped work in a closed mold cavity.


CLS 264/316
TXT Processes under subclass 313 wherein a flexible or resilient sheet or web
    is employed as a mold or mold surface or as a separate mold liner.

    (1)     Note.  Tubes or casings or other hollow articles regardless of
    length are not considered to be sheets or webs for purposes of this
    subclass and are excluded herefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    338,    for mold coatings or linings, per se, or specific materials.


CLS 264/317
TXT Processes under subclass 313 in which the mold or mold surface is destroyed
    to facilitate removal thereof from the molded material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41+,    particularly subclasses 44 and 49 for destruction of entrained
    bodies to form a porous body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    155 for destruction of transitory material when combined with a laminating
    operation.


CLS 264/318
TXT Processes under subclass 299 directed to the molding of articles of such
    irregular shape in rigid molds that portions of said articles and
    corresponding portions of the mold are in the relationship of an
    interference fit in that removal of said article from the mold cannot be
    accomplished be a straight line or unidirectional motion, except where the
    trapped portions of the article are at least temporarily flexible, elastic
    or resilient so as not to be broken or deformed from the desired shape by
    the confining portions of the mold if a straight line removal from the mold
    is employed.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass will not take patents reciting the molding of
    articles which may have trapped undercut surfaces in the mold but which by
    specific mold structure may be removed therefrom in a straightline or
    unidirectional motion.  However, this subclass will take processes of
    forming articles of curved shapes in a rigid mold from which the shaped
    articles may be withdrawn without interference from the mold by a nonlinear
    motion corresponding to the curvature of said article such as the formation
    of threaded articles removed by an "unscrewing" operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    313+,   for processes employing a flexible, deformable or destructible
    molding surface or material.

    336,    for processes of ejecting, stripping or separating formed articles
    from the mold before a full set or cure has taken place.


CLS 264/319
TXT Processes under subclass 299 in which the material, while being shaped (1)
    is raised in temperature or (2) is subjected to an increase in pressure.


CLS 264/320
TXT Processes under subclass 319 in which the material shaped is (1) a
    self-sustaining preform throughout the reshaping operation or (2) is a
    self-sustaining preform when placed into a mold.

    (1)     Note.  Solid particulate molding material which is handled or
    charged to the mold as a fluent mass is not included within the scope of
    this and indented subclasses, however, solid particles or pieces which are
    placed, handled, or charged individually are considered self-sustaining
    preforms or bodies for purposes of this and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for reshaping a solid preform to form sound grooves on its surface.

    112,    for spheroidizing or rounding of particles in absence of a mold or
    shaping surface.

    230,    for reshaping of a solid preform by heating to release stress,
    e.g., elastic memory.


CLS 264/321
TXT Processes under subclass 320 wherein said work is of a sponge-like or
    foamed structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41+,    for molding or shaping combined with the step of pore forming in
    situ.

    324,    for processes for shaping a woven or felted sheet.


CLS 264/322
TXT Processes under subclass 320 in which the solid workpiece is subjected to a
    treatment prior to reshaping for the purpose of decreasing its rigidity or
    hardness.

    (1)     Note.  The treatment may be, for example, heating, moistening, or
    solvent application.

    (2)     Note.  Preliminary softening of the workpiece by liquid
    impregnation within the scope of this subclass differs from coating or
    impregnating the workpiece before molding or shaping as provided for by
    subclasses 134+ in that the impregnation in the present subclass is
    transitory and that of subclasses 134+ in a permanent component of the
    article formed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    340,    for treatments, per se, of preformed articles which are directed to
    or included softening operations.


CLS 264/323
TXT Processes under subclass 320 in which the reshaping of a solid preform is
    effected by establishing a rubbing, wiping or sliding action between the
    preform and a shaping surface.

    (1)     Note.  Included within the scope of the subclass is pressing a
    preform between mold surfaces and causing the preformed material to be
    reshaped and spread along the mold surfaces into an unconfined area.  When
    such an operation is caused by striking the preform with a shaping element
    causing the material to be extruded out between the shaping surfaces the
    process is usually referred to as impact extrusion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165+,   for formation of continuous or indefinite length articles by
    extrusion methods.

    325,    for processes of reshaping a preform in a closed mold cavity.


CLS 264/324
TXT Processes under subclass 320 in which the work being shaped is a felted
    fibrous sheet or a woven textile sheet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136+,   for coating or impregnating a self sustaining batt, sheet of
    filament and then reshaping.

    257+,   for producing a composite, plural part or multilayered article in
    which one component is a fibrous or textile sheet, web or batt.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    62.2+ for forming and laminating one or more webs or batts by adhesive
    bonding and subclasses 196+ for reshaping followed by laminating.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclass 223 for processes of
    reshaping a felted waterlaid product.


CLS 264/325
TXT Processes under subclass 320 in which the solid work or molding material,
    within the confines of a closed mold cavity, is caused to take the shape of
    the interior of said mold cavity by a plastic flow of said work or molding
    material.

    (1)     Note.  A mold cavity is considered closed for purposes of this
    subclass if it engages all of the exterior product surfaces being formed or
    reshaped. Spaces between mold parts or small openings in said parts will
    not exclude a mold cavity from this subclass even though some molding
    material is forced from the mold cavity through such spaces and openings.


CLS 264/326
TXT Processes under subclass 325 wherein the article produced has a toroidal
    shape.

    (1)     Note.  For a definition of "toroidal" see this class, subclass 315
    and note thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315,    where the pressure or heat is applied by means of a toroidal
    inflated bag.


CLS 264/327
TXT Processes under subclass 319 wherein different degrees of heating or
    cooling are positively applied simultaneously to the article or molding
    material, or different portions thereof, while said article is still in the
    mold.

    (1)     Note.  To be placed herein a patent should recite a positively
    applied temperature differential.  Normal heating or cooling to ambient
    temperatures, for example, wherein an article may be cooler at the surface
    temporarily than at the core, is not sufficient to place a patent herein.

    (2)     Note.  Maintaining a uniform temperature of the product by the
    nonuniform application or removal of product heat is classified herein.


CLS 264/328.1
TXT Introducing material under pressure into a closed mold cavity (e.g.,
    injection molding, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 319 in which said pressure is applied to the
    molding material so as to force the material from a source removed from a
    closed mold cavity into the cavity wherein said material assumes the shape
    of the interior of said closed cavity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    537,    for injection molding of a hollow blank portion prior to pneumatic
    pressure application to the inside.


CLS 264/328.11
TXT Including movement of mold relative to injector:

    Processes under subclass 328.1 in which relative movement of the mold and
    injector head is accomplished by displacement of either or both.


CLS 264/328.12
TXT Including specified direction or condition of flow in mold:

    Processes under subclass 328.1 in which the injection mold is designed to
    produce a specified direction of flow or a specified type of flow of
    material during injection.


CLS 264/328.13
TXT Including injection of two or more pressures:

    Processes under subclass 328.1 in which injection takes place at two
    distinct pressure levels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40.5,   for processes of pressure control during molding.


CLS 264/328.14
TXT With heating or cooling:

    Processes under subclass 328.1 in which a positive step of increasing or
    decreasing the temperature is carried out.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include merely cooling by exposure to
    ambient conditions but does include frictional heating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for processes including step of generating heat by friction.

    232+,   for processes of heating or cooling after molding.

    345+,   for article treatment by effecting a temperature change.


CLS 264/328.15
TXT Of injection nozzle:

    Processes under subclass 328.14 in which the nozzle of the injection is
    heated or cooled.


CLS 264/328.16
TXT Of mold:

    Processes under subclass 328.14 in which the mold is heated or cooled.


CLS 264/328.17
TXT Pretreatment or preparation of charge material:

    Processes under subclass 328.1 in which the material to be molded is
    treated to facilitate the subsequent molding process.


CLS 264/328.18
TXT Mixing of filler, dye, or pigment:
    Processes under subclass 328.17 in which a filler, dye, or pigment is mixed
    with the injector charge prior to molding.


CLS 264/328.19
TXT Including feeding to accumulator:
    Processes under subclass 328.17 in which the fluent material to be molded
    is stored in a zone prior to being fed to the injector head.


CLS 264/328.2
TXT Material is nonthermoplastic:
    Processes under subclass 328.1 in which cureable, vulcanized, ceramic or
    hydrolitically settable or is otherwise identified as not softening upon
    reheating after molding.

    (1)     Note.  In the absence of a clear showing to the contrary a material
    is presumed to be a thermoplastic.


CLS 264/328.3
TXT Toroidal work (e.g., tire, etc.):
    Processes under subclass 328.2 wherein the article produced is a torus.

    (1)     Note.  For a definition of "toroidal", see this class (264),
    subclass 315, and the notes thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315,    where pressure is applied by means of a toroidal inflated bag.

    501,    where direct fluid pressure is used to form a toroidal article.


CLS 264/328.4
TXT Utilizing a transfer chamber:
    Processes under subclass 328.2 in which molding material is accumulated in
    a pressurized zone upstream of the injector head.


CLS 264/328.5
TXT With preformed charge:

    Processes under subclass 328.4 in which the material to be molded is a
    preform.


CLS 264/328.6
TXT Including mixing of reactants:
    Processes under subclass 328.2 in which chemical reactants are mixed prior
    to injection or in the mold cavity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240,    for combining reactable materials during shaping.

    349,    for mixing of materials in general.


CLS 264/328.7
TXT Including changing mold size or shape during injection or between multiple
    stages of injection:

    Processes under subclass 328.1 in which the physical conformation of the
    mold cavity is altered while injecting material or between stages of
    injecting material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45.2,   for processes of forming a multipart or composite article using an
    expandable mold.


CLS 264/328.8
TXT With multiple injectors, mold cavities, or multiple steps of injection of
    material:

    Processes under subclass 328.1 in which multiple injectors feed a single
    mold cavity, or a single injector feeds a series of connected mold cavities
    or a single mold cavity in a series of distinct steps.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250+,   for processes of separately molding different portions of a single
    article.

    328.13, for processes involving injection of a single charge of material at
    varying pressure.


CLS 264/328.9
TXT Including operation or design to minimize formation of gate, sprue, or
    flash:

    Processes under subclass 328.1 in which the process is carried out so as to
    minimize or eliminate the formation of undesired waste material.


CLS 264/330
TXT Processes under subclass 319 in which the material being molded is organic
    compound containing.

    (1)     Note.  Attention is directed to the definitions of Class 260,
    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for the scope the term "organic compound" as
    employed herein.

    (2)     Note.  See the main definitions to this class (264) for the line
    between this class and the composition classes.

    (3)     Note.  Included in this and indented subclasses are generally
    patents which include a unique combination of a specifically recited
    organic material and a particular molding temperature or pressure.
    Numerous patents which include a specific manipulation or step provided for
    above will also disclose a particular composition and temperature or
    pressure.  Such patents are cross-referenced here only when they include
    some evidence that the temperature or pressure are not conventionally used
    in molding the particular material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses for
    organic compositions.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, subclasses 97+ for natural resins
    and reaction products thereof.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Classes 523 and 524 for molding compositions.


CLS 264/331.11
TXT Synthetic resin containing:

    Processes under subclass 330 in which the organic material employed
    comprises a synthetic resin.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of "synthetic resin", see Class 520,
    Synthetic Resin or Natural Rubbers, subclass 1.

    (2)     Note.  See the definitions of this class (264) for the line between
    this class and the composition classes.

    (3)     Note.  Classification herein is based on the first appearing
    polymer or monomer including a monomer used to aftertreat a solid polymer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, subclasses 2.01+ for synthetic
    resinous compositions which may be disclosed to possess utility as molding
    materials, and see (1) Note and (2) Note above.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, particulary Classes 523 and
    524 for a synthetic resin or natural rubbers composition which may be
    disclosed or claimed to posses utility as molding materials, and see (1)
    Note and (2) Note above


CLS 264/331.12
TXT Polymer having heterocyclic group or polymer derived from monomer having
    heteocyclic group except heterocyclic derived solely from carboxylic acid
    (i.e., cyclic imide, lactam, lactone, or anhydride):

    Processes under subclass 331.11 in which the synthetic resin is a polymer
    having or polymer derived from a monomer having a heterocyclic group, i.e.,
    an organic compound wherein one or more carbon atoms are covalently bonded
    in a ring system with at least one hetero atom of oxygen, sulfur, nitrogen,
    selenium, or tellurium and there are no other different atoms in the ring,
    except heterocyclic derived solely from carboxylic acid, i.e., cyclic
    imide, lactam, lactone, or anhydride.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 331.13 for the definition of ethylenic group.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331.15+, for ethylenically unsaturated carboxylic acid derivatives, i.e.,
    lactams, cyclic imides, lactones, or anhydrides.

    331.19, for lactams or cyclic imides not containing an ethylenic group.

    331.21, for lactones or anhydrides not containing an ethylenic group.


CLS 264/331.13
TXT Polymer derived from monomer having at least two ethylenic groups (e.g.,
    ABS rubber, chloroprene, etc.) or with natural rubber:

    Processes under subclass 331.11 wherein the synthetic resin is a polymer
    derived from a monomer having at least two ethylenic groups, e.g., ABS
    rubber, chloroprene, etc., or wherein the organic material comprises a
    synthetic resin with a natural rubber.

    (1)     Note.  An ethylenic group is defined as two carbon atoms bonded
    together by a double or triple bond, with the proviso that the double bond
    is not part of an aromatic ring, or of a ring which shares a double bond
    with an aromatic ring.


CLS 264/331.14
TXT Fluorine:

    Processes under subclass 331.11 in which the synthetic resin contains a
    fluorine atom.


CLS 264/331.15
TXT Ethylenically unsaturated polymer or polymer derived from ethylenically
    unsaturated monomer:

    Processes under subclass 331.11 in which the synthetic resin is an
    ethylenically unsaturated polymer or a polymer derived from an
    ethylenically unsaturated monomer.

    (1)     Note.  Ethylenically unsaturated requires the presence of two
    carbon atoms bonded together by a double or triple bond, with the proviso
    that the double bond is not part of an aromatic ring, or of a ring which
    shares of a double bond with an aromatic ring.


CLS 264/331.16
TXT Nitrogen containing polymer:

    Processes under subclass 331.15 in which the polymer contains nitrogen.


CLS 264/331.17
TXT Hydrocarbon polymer:

    Processes under subclass 331.15 in which the polymer is a polymer
    containing only carbon and hydrogen atoms.


CLS 264/331.18
TXT Carboxylic acid or derivative (e.g., acrylic, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 331.15 in which the polymer contains a carboxylic
    acid or derivative group, e.g., acrylic, etc.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of a carboxylic acid or derivative, see
    Class 528, subclass 271.


CLS 264/331.19
TXT Nitrogen containing (e.g., polyamide, polyurethane, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 331.11 in which the synthetic resin contains a
    nitrogen atom, e.g., polyamide, polyurethane, etc.


CLS 264/331.21
TXT Carboxylic acid or derivative:
    Processes under subclass 331.11 in which the synthetic resin contains a
    carboxylic acid or derivative group.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of a carboxylic acid or derivative, see
    Class 528, subclass 271.


CLS 264/331.22
TXT Polymer derived from aldehyde:
    Processes under subclass 331.11 in which the synthetic resin is a polymer
    derived from an aldehyde.


CLS 264/332
TXT Processes under subclass 319 in which inorganic materials are reshaped or
    molded by a fusing or melting operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for processes of lining furnaces which may include a step of
    melting inorganic materials.

    603+,   for vitrification, sintering, or firing of a shaped inorganic
    preform external of a mold.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, appropriate subclasses for molding molten
    glass.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses for
    processes of forming a composition which may include a firing step.


CLS 264/333
TXT Processes under 319 directed to the molding and shaping of inorganic
    materials which are capable of being hydrolyzed by water to a solid state.

    (1)     Note.  In cross-referencing to this subclass the same general rule
    should be followed as set out in the definition of subclass 330.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses for
    hydraulic settable materials and the method of producing the same.


CLS 264/334
TXT Processes under subclass 299 which include the step of removing or
    displacing molding material or the formed article from or relative to the
    shaping surface.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes processes of removing articles from
    molds, per se, when claimed in such a manner as to have utility only in a
    molding operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304,    for an ejecting operation in an accretion from bulk forming process.

    317,    where a core or mold is destroyed for removal of the article.

    318,    for the molding of trapped or undercut articles wherein the
    articles are removed from the mold by a nonlinear motion.


CLS 264/335
TXT Processes under subclass 334 wherein the removal is effected or facilitated
    by a direct application of a fluid pressure or vacuum including a fluid
    blast or stream.


CLS 264/336
TXT Processes under subclass 334 in which the article or molded material is
    ejected or stripped from the mold or molding surface when a desired shape
    is obtained but before the article is completely set or cured.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     for curing products with a reactive gas or vapor.

    318,    for methods of forming undercut articles in which the article is
    removed from the mold while the undercut portions are still flexible to
    permit removal without breaking.


CLS 264/337
TXT Processes under subclass 299 in which the shaping or forming mold or
    surface is composed of special or specific materials.

    (1)     Note.  Many patents which include a manipulation or step provided
    for above will also include a disclosure of using a particular mold
    composition coating or lining.  Such patents should not be cross-referenced
    to this and indented subclass unless there is some indication the materials
    recited are not those conventionally used in such processes.


CLS 264/338
TXT Processes under subclass 337 in which the special or specific materials are
    in the form of a coating or lining on the mold surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213,    where a casting surface for casting indefinite length articles is
    treated with a surface parting, antistick or release agent.

    255+,   in which a layer of material deposited on a mold surface becomes
    part of a composite formed article.

    306,    for processes which include the step of conditioning, e.g.,
    coating, the form employed in a dip casting operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 133+ for processes of coating a mold.


CLS 264/339
TXT Processes under subclass 239 in which a portion of a single body is
    permanently distorted throughout its entire thickness relative to a second
    portion during which the thickness of the workpiece remains substantially
    the same and no significant plastic flow occurs or in which said body is
    permanently distorted by relative movement of its parts about a common axis.

    (1)     Note.  Plural similar, bending operations are included herein.  For
    plural diverse types of bending or shaping operations, see the search notes
    below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for "twisting" of plural materials about each other and subclass
    295 for a molding step combined with the step of bending or twisting.

    285+,   for bending of running or indefinite length work.

    294+,   where bending or twisting of the work is one of a plurality of
    molding or shaping steps.


CLS 264/340
TXT Processes under the class definition in which preformed, shaped, or solid
    articles are subjected to a treatment.

    (1)     Note.  Treatment, for the purpose of this and indented subclasses,
    included all procedures in which the chemical or physical properties or
    characteristics of a work piece are modified or controlled by other than
    mechanically shaping by contacting the work with a solid shaping member.

    (2)     Note.  Subsequent treatment, per se, of an article, which involves
    a chemical reaction with said article, in the absence of a particular
    manipulative or handling step, or specific shape retaining or supporting
    step not otherwise classifiable above, is not sufficient to bring a patent
    herein. See the line between the composition classes and this class as set
    out in the definitions above.

    (3)     Note.  To complete the search for processes of treating the
    appropriate subclasses set out above which include combinations of shaping
    and treating shoudl be searched.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232+,   for processes including a subsequent disparate treatment.

    349,    for treatment of a mass by kneading, mulling, etc.


CLS 264/341
TXT Processes under subclass 340 wherein the article has its surface smoothed
    or leveled by application of a material having a dissolving or softening
    action on said article.

    (1)     Note.  Polishing of materials by chemical action wherrein
    contaminants or surface reaction products, e.g., rust, oxides, etc., are
    removed is not included in the scope of this subclass. See the definitions
    to Class 216, Etching a Substrate:  Processes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for processes which include polishing of an apparatus surface as by
    mechanical action or removal of surface accretions, e.g., cleaning.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, for removal of surface material by
    etching with solvent or chemical reagents to polish or form a design.


CLS 264/342
TXT Processes under subclass 340 in which a treatment serves to decrease the
    surface area of said material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 116+ for processes including a shrinking
    operation.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    76 for shrinking of a lamina in which parchmentizing or transparentizing
    also occurs and subclasses 84+ for shrinking combined with a laminating
    step.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclass 128 for bonding of metal parts by
    thermally shrinking one of the parts.


CLS 264/343
TXT Processes under subclass 340 in which a solid workpiece is treated in such
    a manner as to cause it to increase in size or become softer or more
    pliable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    341,    wherein solvents are employed to effect a superficial surface
    softening as in solvent polishing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclass 130.1 for swelling or plasticization of
    artificial fibers.


CLS 264/344
TXT Processes under subclass 340 in which the treatment results in the removal
    of a material which is held or retained in or on the solid workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for removing solid bodies from a shaped body to form pores.

    233,    for washing of a product in combination as a subsequent disparate
    treatment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, particularly subclasses 137+ for cleaning or
    laundering, per se, of textiles and fibers.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses
    for separation of liquids from solids by drying.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses for
    cleaning or separation of impurities from solid bodies.


CLS 264/345
TXT Processes under subclass 340 wherein the treatment involves a positive
    temperature change, other than a normal return to ambient temperatures from
    a heated or cooled condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     for processes involving a flame treatment.

    234+,   for a temperature change in combination as a subsequent disparate
    treatment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, particularly
    subclasses 471+ for gettering of a semiconductor substrate, subclasses 514+
    for ion implantation of electrically active dopants into a semiconductive,
    and subclasses 795+ for thermal treatment of a semiconductor substrate to
    modify some property thereof.


CLS 264/346
TXT Processes under subclass 345 in which one or more temperature changes, are
    employed to relieve or remove stresses or strains which may exist in a
    preform or self-sustaining body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235,    for annealing in combination as a subsequent disparate treatment.


CLS 264/347
TXT Processes under subclass 345 in which the temperature change, is employed
    to effect the complete vulcanization or polymerization of a partially cured
    self-sustaining body or preform.

    (1)     Note.  Vulcanization, per se, or polymerization, per se, of an
    article is not considered to be within the scope of this subclass unless
    there is also included a particular manipulative or handling step or
    specific shape retaining or supporting step not otherwise classifiable
    above.  See the definitions to this class, pertaining to the line between
    this class and the composition classes, and see also the search notes to
    subclass 236 of this class (264).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83,     for curing in a reactive atmosphere.

    236,    for completion of cure of an article by a subsequent disparate
    treatment.

    280,    for curing of running or indefinite length articles between
    pressure surfaces.

    325,    for curing in a closed mold.


CLS 264/348
TXT Processes under subclass 345 directed to the cooling, per se, of a preform
    or self-sustaining body by a positive application of a heat extracting
    temperature differential.

    (1)     Note.  Mere cooling to ambient temperature in normal surroundings
    of a heated article is not included within the scope of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for processes including the step of cooling or freezing at 0oC or
    below.

    237,    for a positive cooling step combined as a subsequent disparate
    treatment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclasses for specific processes of
    refrigerating.


CLS 264/349
TXT Miscellaneous processes under the class definition not provided for
    specifically above.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are patents disclosing working, kneading or
    mulling, per se, of unspecified plastic materials in general, to affect the
    plasticity thereof.  Working, kneading or mulling, per se, of specific
    compounds or compositions will be classified in the appropriate compound or
    composition class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329,    for heating or working material while moving to mold cavity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 69+ for process limited to mixing or kneading
    rubber or heavy plastics.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 1+ for processes
    which may involve the working, kneading or mulling of plastic materials
    classified therein.  In particular, see Class 523, subclasses 100+ and
    Class 528, subclasses 480+.


CLS 264/400
TXT LASER ABLATIVE SHAPING OR PIERCING (I.E., NONETCHING, DEVOID OF CHEMICAL
    AGENT OTHER THAN AIR):

    Processes under the class definition directed to producing a configured or
    perforated article, wherein material is removed from a preform by
    vaporization or decomposition, caused solely by laser (i.e., light
    amplification by stimulated emission of radiation) generated heat and
    without the use of an external chemical agent, other than air.

    (1)     Note.  Claimed recitation of laser ablative shaping, per se,
    without the use of an external chemical agent will be considered proper for
    this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138+,   for processes which include a step of (a)  penetrating a shaped
    product from one face to another to cause at least a partial separation of
    the product, (b) tearing an article, (c) removing material from an article
    by means of a solid tool or implement, or (d) forming a comminuted product,
    without the use of a laser.

    482,    for processes wherein the direct energy utilized before, during, or
    after shaping or molding is laser.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses for processes of cutting, severing,
    incising, etc., where not claimed in combination.

    216,    Etching a Subtrate: Processes, subclasses 2+ for processes wherein
    a substrate is subjected to bombardment by high energy radiation above that
    of the so-called ultraviolet range.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 121.6+ for electrical heating of metal
    utilizing laser.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses for processes for solid material comminuting.


CLS 264/401
TXT STEREOLITHOGRAPHIC SHAPING FROM LIQUID PRECURSOR:

    Processes under the class definition directed to the application of
    electromagnetic wave energy on a confined solidifiable liquid or semi-solid
    material which results in formation of a solid three-dimensional product.

    (1)     Note.  In most cases the subject matter found in this subclass
    includes processes of producing solid three dimensional articles by
    application of computer directed electromagnetic wave energy in combination
    with polymerization and surface tension phenomena at a selected area of a
    confined polymerizable liquid or semi-solid material, causing a shaped
    integrated three-dimensional layered buildup (solidified article) to form.

    (2)     Note.  The technology of this subclass generally includes a
    scanner, laser, photopolymer vat, and a controlling computer.

    (3)     Note. Synergistic stimulation by impinging radiation or particle
    bombardment, which alters the physical state of a confined fluid medium and
    forms a three-dimensional article (part), is considered appropriate for
    this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, for
    processes of uniting preforms, especially subclass 58 contour or profile
    photography to reproduce three-dimensional objects.

     430,   Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof,for processes of using radiation to reproduce a likeness or image
    of an object and see especially subclass 269, imaging affecting physical
    property of radiation sensitive material, or producing nonplanar or
    printing surface-process, composition or product.


CLS 264/402
TXT DIRECT APPLICATION OF ELECTRICAL OR WAVE ENERGY TO HEAT THE MOLD (E.G.,
    ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVE, PARTICULATE, MAGNETIC, SONIC, ELECTROSTATIC ENERGY,
    ETC.):

    Processes under the class definition wherein electrical, electromagnetic,
    particulate, magnetic, sonic, induction heat, or electrostatic energy is
    directly applied to a mold or molding apparatus to cause said mold to be
    heated.

    (1)     Note.  Some examples of wave energy found in this subclass are
    electromagnetic, particulate, light, sonic, supersonic, ultrasonic, gamma
    rays, X-rays, and magnetic energy. Particulate energy includes charged
    particles and atomic emissions, such as alpha rays, beta rays, and neutrons.

    (2)     Note.  Terms listed in the glossary are denoted by an asterisk.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    405,    for processes of molding or treating articles or processes of
    molding or treating precursors by direct application of electrical or wave
    energy.


CLS 264/403
TXT Induction heating:

    Processes under subclass 402 wherein the mold is subjected to induction
    heat.

    (1)     Note. Induction heat is considered to be heating of a nominally
    electrical conducting material by eddy currents induced by a varying
    electromagnetic field. When an alternating current flows through a coil
    which surrounds or is adjacent to a nominally conducting material, eddy
    currents will be induced therein and cause said material to be heated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    431,    for processes of producing or treating inorganic material utilizing
    induction heating.

    457,    for blow molding processes utilizing induction heating.

    472,    for extrusion molding processes utilizing induction heating.

    486,    for processes wherein the directly applied energy is induction heat.


CLS 264/404
TXT Electrical heating (e.g., Resistance heat, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 402 wherein the mold is heated by passage of
    electrical current through the mold which impedes current flow and results
    in the dissipation of power in the form of heat.


CLS 264/405
TXT DIRECT APPLICATION OF ELECTRICAL OR WAVE ENERGY TO WORK (E.G.,
    ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVE, PARTICULATE, MAGNETIC, INDUCTION HEAT, SONIC,
    ELECTROSTATIC ENERGY, ETC.):

    Processes under the class definition directed to applying  electrical,
    electromagnetic, magnetic, wave, or particulate energy directly to the work.

    (1)     Note. Some examples of wave energy found in this subclass are
    electromagnetic, particulate, light, sonic, supersonic, ultrasonic, gamma
    rays, X-rays, and magnetic energy. Particulate energy includes charged
    particles and atomic emissions, such as alpha rays, beta rays, and
    neutrons. Mere use of magnetic force employed to maintain a preform in a
    selected position is not provided for here, rather see subclasses 275+.

    (2)     Note. The energy must be applied as such to the work, the work
    precursor or the coating material used in a combined coating and shaping
    operation. Processes utilizing wave energy (e.g., plasma, etc.) to apply a
    coating combined with a shaping operation are properly classified in this
    subclass and indented subclasses. Conversion of electrical energy to heat
    and the application of the heat to the work is excluded from this subclass
    and is provided for in appropriate subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    275+,   for processes of molding wherein magnetic or electrostatic force is
    utilized to maintain a preform in a selected position during molding and
    see (1) Note, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclasses for
    a process of effecting a chemical reaction by utilizing electrical or wave
    energy, especially subclasses 157.15+ for a process of preparing a specific
    compound utilizing electrical or eave energy. The line stated in the Class
    204 definition for claims defining a Class 204 operation combined with an
    operation for another class is to be followed for classification of claims
    defining both Class 204 and Class 264 operations.

    522,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 1+ for processes of
    preparing or treating a synthetic resin or natural rubber involving a
    chemical reaction brought about by the application of wave energy.


CLS 264/406
TXT Measuring, testing, or inspecting:

    Processes under subclass 405 which includes a step of utilizing electrical,
    electromatic, magnetic, wave or particulate energy to audibly, chemically,
    mechanically, or physically determine some variable condition in a shaped
    article, molding material, mold or shaping surface.

    (1)     Note. Included herein are processes for determining imperfections
    or for determining completeness of a reaction or manipulation as well as
    determinations of undesired variations which activate correction
    mechanisms. Recitations of optimum or desired temperatures or pressures or
    proportions of ingredients are considered nominal only and are classified
    with the disclosed process on some other basis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40.1,   for measuring, testing, or inspecting without utilizing direct
    application of electrical or wave energy to work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 407 for processes including a step of
    testing or indicating combined with mechanical manufacture.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for testing, per se.


    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 49 and 198 for
    processes of testing or inspecting combined with a paper making operation.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 79 for metal casting operations employing
    a pore producing agent.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for
    electrical testing  or the measuring, testing, or sensing of nonelectric
    properties by electric means.

    436,    Chemistry: Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 1+ for
    processes of chemical testing.


CLS 264/407
TXT Using sonic, supersonic, or ultrasonic energy:

    Processes under subclass 406 directed to utilizing wave vibrations which
    can be heard by the human ear.

    (1)     Note. Patents claiming the use of ultrasonic or supersonic
    frequencies (energy) are properly classified in this subclass. The term
    supersonic covers frequencies above the range of normal human hearing.
    Ultrasonic waves vibrate at frequencies beyond the hearing power of human
    beings (above 20,000 hertz). Sonic frequencies are vibrations which can be
    heard by the human ear (from about 15 hertz to approximately 20,000 hertz).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for processes involving treatment of material by vibrating,
    jarring, or agitating during shaping.

    442,    for processes utilizing sonic energy other than measuring or
    testing.


CLS 264/408
TXT Sensing by utilizing light or passage of electric-field current through
    molding material:

    Processes under subclass 406 wherein the variable condition is determined
    by using light or the passing of electrical current through a molding
    material.


CLS 264/409
TXT Laser:

    Processes under subclass 408 wherein the light used is laser (i.e., light
    amplification by stimulated emissions of radiation).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    482,    for processes wherein the directly applied energy is laser.


CLS 264/410
TXT Infrared radiation:

    Processes under subclass 408 wherein the light used is infrared.

    (1)     Note. Infrared radiation, measured using the electromagnetic wave
    spectrum, is that portion  which is visible to the eye, lying between
    wavelengths of 750 nm (0.75 micrometers) and about 1 mm (1000 micrometers).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    458,    for blow molding processes utilizing infrared radiation.

    462,    for processes of uniting particles utilizing infrared radiation.

    476,    for extrusion molding processes utilizing infrared radiation.

    481,    for processes of reshaping, drawing or stretching utilizing
    infrared radiation.

    492,    for processes wherein the applied energy is infrared radiation.


CLS 264/411
TXT Measuring weight or volume (e.g., level-responsive, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 408 wherein the weight or volume of the molding
    material is measured.

    (1)     Note.  Operations including maintaining a container at a desired
    capacity are proper for this subclass.


CLS 264/412
TXT Controlling rate of movement of molding material or its support in a
    continuous process:

    Processes under subclass 408 wherein the movement of the molding material
    or a substrate supporting the molding material in a continuous process is
    controlled.

    (1)     Note.  Controlled continuous processes found in this subclass
    include (a) a set up for repetitive operations or (b) endless flow
    operations, wherein molding material leaves the molding cavity.


CLS 264/413
TXT Producing or treating porous product:

    Processes under subclass 405 wherein the directly applied energy is used
    (a) to form pores or voids in an article or (b) for the treatment* of a
    porous article.

    (1)     Note.  Pore forming when not combined with significant molding is
    provided for in various classes and the general lines between those classes
    and Class 264 is followed even though the step of forming pores is recited.

    (2)     Note.   Included within the scope of this subclass and indented
    subclasses are enlarging voids already present in a material by expanding
    gases contained therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     For processes of forming pores or voids without using the direct
    application of electrical or wave energy.

    317,    for processes, generally, which involve the destruction of material
    which may leave a space or void.

    321,    for processes of reshaping previously foamed material.

    610,    for processes of burning, vaporizing, or melting of embedded
    element or core to form a nonrandom void

    628,    for processes of producing microporous articles without
    intentionally occluding or incorporating void forming elements randomly
    throughout the forming material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, subclass
    296 for pore forming in abrasive materials.

    106,    Compositions: Coating or Plastic, subclasses 122, 601+, and 672+
    for pore forming, per se, in compositions within the definitions of the
    class.


    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    77+ for a pore forming step in combination with a laminating operation.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclass 101 for a pore forming
    step within the class definition.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 3+ for a step of utilizing gas in mixing
    mortar.


    501,    Compositions: Ceramic, subclasses 39 and 80+ for pore-forming
    ceramic compositions.

    521,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 50+ for pore
    forming, per se, in a synthetic resin or natural resin composition.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclass 255
    for the forming of pores or voids in the production of a material
    containing hazardous or toxic waste for purposes of containment.


CLS 264/414
TXT Inorganic material containing:

    Processes under subclass 413 wherein the pore forming material or porous
    article contains inorganic material.

    (1)     Note.  Inorganic porous material having minimal or  trace amounts
    of organic material (e.g., resinous binders, etc.) are properly classified
    here.

    (2)     Note.  Attention is directed to the definition of Class 260 for the
    distinction between the term "organic" and "inorganic."


CLS 264/415
TXT Including in situ (e.g., foaming):

    Processes under subclass 413 wherein the pore containing article or
    material is produced by on site foaming.


CLS 264/416
TXT Using liquid to gas blowing agent:

    Processes under subclass 415 in which the pores or voids are formed by
    using a liquid blowing agent whose state changes from liquid to gas (i.e.,
    vaporization of a liquid incorporated into the molding material).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for processes in which voids are formed by a liquid to gas change
    of state without using directly applied electrical or wave energy.


CLS 264/417
TXT Microwave (e.g., 2.45 gigahertz, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 416 in which the directly applied energy is
    identified on the electromagnetic wave spectrum as existing between far
    infrared and conventional radio-frequency.

    (1)     Note.  A microwave is generally considered to be an electromagnetic
    wave which has a wavelength measured in the centimeter range. Microwaves
    occupy a region in the electromagnetic wave spectrum between infrared and
    radio-frequency. There are no distinct boundaries between these regions
    except by arbitrary definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    420,    for processes of using blowing agents to form porous products
    utilizing microwave energy.

    432,    for processes of treating inorganic material utilizing microwave
    energy.

    474,    for extrusion molding processes utilizing microwave energy.

    489,    for processes wherein the energy directly applied is microwave.


CLS 264/418
TXT Radio frequency (e.g., 13.56 megahertz, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 416 wherein the directly applied energy is
    identified on the electromagnetic wave spectrum as existing between 150 KHz
    and extending up to the infrared region.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    421,    for processes of using blowing agents to form porous products
    utilizing radio frequency wave energy.

    422,    for processes of utilizing radio frequency wave energy to form
    porous products.

    475,    for extrusion molding processes utilizing radio frequency wave
    energy.

    491,    for processes wherein the energy directly applied is radio
    frequency wave.


CLS 264/419
TXT Using chemical blowing agent:

    Processes under subclass 415 in which pores or voids are formed by the
    generation of a gas, by a chemical reaction of gas producing reactants, or
    by agents incorporated in the molding material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for processes of forming voids or pores utilizing gas producing
    reactants without using directly applied electrical or wave energy.


CLS 264/420
TXT Microwave (e.g., 2.45 gigahertz, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 419 in which the directly applied energy is
    identified on the electromagnetic wave spectrum as existing between far
    infrared and conventional radio frequency.

    (1)     Note.  A microwave is generally considered to be an electromagnetic
    wave which has a wavelength measured in the centimeter range. Microwaves
    occupy a region in the electromagnetic wave spectrum between infrared and
    radio-frequency. There are no distinct boundaries between these regions
    except by arbitrary definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    432,    for processes of treating inorganic material utilizing microwave
    energy.

    474,    for extrusion molding processes utilizing microwave energy.

    489,    for processes wherein the energy directly applied is microwave.


CLS 264/421
TXT Radio frequency (e.g., 13.56 megahertz, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 419 wherein the directly applied energy is
    identified on the electromagnetic wave spectrum as existing between 150 KHz
    and extending up to the infrared region.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    422,    for processes of utilizing radio frequency wave energy to form
    porous products.

    475,    for extrusion molding processes utilizing radio frequency wave
    energy.

    491,    for processes wherein the energy directly applied is radio
    frequency wave.


CLS 264/422
TXT Radio frequency (e.g., 13.56 megahertz, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 415 wherein the directly applied energy is
    identified on the electromagnetic wave spectrum as existing between 150 KHz
    and extending up to the infrared region.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    475,    for extrusion molding processes utilizing radio frequency wave
    energy.

    491,    for processes wherein the energy directly applied is radio
    frequency wave.


CLS 264/423
TXT Plasma (e.g., corona, glow discharge, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 413 wherein the energy directly applied consists
    of a gaseous vapor of ions in equilibrium or a vapor of ions in vacuum in a
    nonequilibrium state referred to as a "cold plasma."

    (1)     Note.  Generally a plasma consists of a wholly or partially ionized
    gas composed of ions, electrons, and neutral particles. The concentration
    of negatively and positively charged carriers are approximately equal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    455,    for blow molding processes utilizing plasma.

    469,    for extrusion molding processes utilizing plasma.

    483,    for processes wherein the directly applied energy is plasma.


CLS 264/424
TXT Utilizing electron arc or electron beam:

    Processes under subclass 413 wherein the energy applied consists of (a) a
    prolonged electrical discharge or series of prolonged electrical discharges
    between two electrodes or (b) a narrow stream of electrons moving in the
    same direction, and at the same speed, under the influence of an electric
    or magnetic field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    456,    for blow molding processes utilizing electron arc or beam.

    470,    for extrusion molding processes utilizing electron arc or beam.

    485,    for processes wherein an electron arc or beam is the energy
    directly applied.


CLS 264/425
TXT Polymerizing, cross-linking, or curing:

    Processes under subclass 413 wherein the material used to produce or treat
    the porous product is caused to polymerize, cross-link, or cure.

    (1)     Note. Properly classified herein are documents claiming the
    following terms.

            a.      cross-linking
    b.      curing
    c.      addition polymerization
    d.      condensation polymerization
    e.      block or graft polymerization

            This list is not intended to be exhaustive and is not limited to
    the above examples.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    459,    for blow molding processes wherein polymerization occurs.

    463,    for uniting particles to form articles wherein polymerization
    occurs.

    477,    for extrusion molding processes wherein polymerization occurs.

    494,    for processes wherein polymerization occurs utilizing directly
    applied electrical or wave energy.


CLS 264/426
TXT Producing or treating inorganic hydro-
    settable material (e.g., cement, plaster, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 405 wherein the energy directly applied is
    utilized for the treatment* of or formation of inorganic materials which
    are capable of being hydrolyzed by water to a solid state.

    (1)     Note.  Inorganic hydro-settable material having minimal or trace
    amounts of organic material are properly classified here.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes compositions made without any melting
    or fusion of particles, as well as those made by sintering, that is, a
    process in which a portion of a nonmetallic particle is bonded, coalesced,
    or partly fused to a portion of an adjacent particle due to the application
    of heat or heat and pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 638+ for coating
    compositions containing an inorganic settable material.


CLS 264/427
TXT Producing or treating magnetic product or precursor thereof:

    Processes under subclass 405 wherein the energy directly applied is
    utilized for the (a) treatment* or formation of a magnetic article or (b)
    treatment* or production of material to be used to make said article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 62.51+ for processes of preparing magnetic
    compositions and the compositions resulting therefrom, as well as such
    processes followed by a magnetizing and/or a nominal or broad molding step.


CLS 264/428
TXT Including  vitrifying or sintering (e.g., fusing, firing, burning, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 427 wherein the magnetic product is subjected to
    temperatures sufficiently high (with or without pressure) which causes said
    article to, at least partially, coalesce or fuse.

    (1)     Note. The term firing recited in a patent is considered to read on
    either sintering or vitrifying and is included herein, unless the firing is
    disclosed as being for some other purpose or at a clearly too low or
    inadequate temperature to accomplish sintering or vitrifying. Firing to
    render a mass friable (calcining) or firing at a temperature only
    sufficient to drive out the moisture content would, for example, be
    excluded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125+    for processes of sintering or heat fusion of particles to
    autogenously bond, without the use of electrical, particulate or wave
    energy.

    239+    for processes of sintering or heat fusion of particles wherein the
    particulate material is completely melted, without the use of electrical,
    particulate, or wave energy.

    434,    for processes of sintering or vitrifying inorganic material.

    603+,   for processes of sintering or vitrifying a shaped inorganic preform
    external of a mold, without the use of electrical, particulate, or wave
    energy.


CLS 264/429
TXT Uniting magnetic particles utilizing organic binder (e.g., resinous
    binders, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 427 wherein magnetic small grains, pellets or
    beads, are adhesively joined using an organic material.

    (1)     Note.  Attention is directed to the definition of Class 260 for the
    distinction between the term "organic" and "inorganic."


CLS 264/430
TXT Producing or treating inorganic material, not as pigments, conductive
    enhancers, or fillers (e.g., ceramic, refractory material, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 405 wherein the energy directly applied is used in
    the treatment* of or formation of inorganic material other than as
    pigments, conductive enhancers or fillers.

    (1)     Note. Inorganic material containing minimal or trace amounts of
    organic material (e.g.,resinous binders, etc.) are properly classified here.

    (2)     Note. Attention is directed to the definition of Class 260 for the
    distinction between the term "organic" and "inorganic."

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    450,    for processes utilizing organic material which contains small
    amounts of inorganic material as pigments, conductive enhancers, or fillers.


CLS 264/431
TXT Induction heating:

    Processes under subclass 430 wherein the inorganic material is subjected to
    induction heat.

    (1)     Note.  Induction heat is considered to be heating of a nominally
    electrical conducting material by eddy currents induced by a varying
    electromagnetic field. When an alternating current flows through a coil
    surrounding or adjacent a nominally conducting material, eddy currents will
    be induced therein, causing said material to be heated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    457,    for blow molding processes utilizing induction heating.

    472,    for extrusion molding processes utilizing induction heating.

    486,    for processes wherein the directly applied energy is induction heat.


CLS 264/432
TXT Microwave (e.g., 2.45 gigahertz, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 416 in which the directly applied energy, is
    identified on the electromagnetic wave spectrum, as existing between far
    infrared and conventional radio-frequency.

    (1)     Note.  A microwave is generally considered to be an electromagnetic
    wave which has a wavelength measured in the centimeter range. Microwaves
    occupy a region in the electromagnetic wave spectrum between infrared and
    radio-frequency. There are no distinct boundaries between these regions
    except by arbitrary definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    474,    for extrusion molding processes utilizing microwave energy.

    489,    for processes wherein the energy directly applied is microwave.


CLS 264/433
TXT Including extruding (e.g., spinning, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 430 wherein the inorganic material is shaped by
    forcing it through a confining orifice.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176.1+, for processes of forming continuous or indefinite length articles,
    per se, by extrusion through a shaping orifice.

    323,    for processes of extruding finite articles, per se.

    452,    for processes of extruding material wherein an electrode is part of
    the extruding shaping surface.


CLS 264/434
TXT Including vitrifying or sintering (e.g., fusing, firing, burning, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 430 wherein  the inorganic material thereof is
    subjected to temperatures sufficiently high (with or without pressure)
    which causes said material to, at least partially, coalesce or fuse.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125+,   for processes of sintering or heat fusion of particles to
    autogenously bond, without the use  of electrical, particulate or wave
    energy.

    239+,   especially subclass 332, for processes of sintering or heat fusion
    of particles wherein the particulate material is completely melted, without
    the use of electrical, particulate or wave energy.

    603+,   for processes of sintering a shaped inorganic preform external of a
    mold and without the use of electrical, particulate or wave energy.


CLS 264/435
TXT Molecular aligning or molecular orientating (e.g., poling, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 405 wherein the energy directly applied is used to
    direct, shift, or arrange molecules, of the molding material, in a
    particular order.


CLS 264/436
TXT Producing permanently polarized dielectric (e.g., electret, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 435 wherein the arranged molecular alignment
    results in a fixed polarized dielectric product.


CLS 264/437
TXT Conveying or aligning particulate material:

    Processes under subclass 405 wherein the directly applied energy is used to
    transport, arrange, or order small discrete pieces, grains, pellets, or
    beads.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 450+ for
    processes employing electrophoresis or electro-osmosis.


CLS 264/438
TXT Utilizing electrostatic charge:

    Processes under subclass 437 directed to using electrical energy having a
    constant-intensity electric charge which results in the capability of
    attracting and holding small particles having an opposite electrical charge.

    (1)     Note.  Electrostatic charge is generally considered to be an
    electric charge that is in a state of equilibrium.


CLS 264/439
TXT Simultaneously with molding:

    Processes under subclass 438 wherein the particles are aligned or conveyed
    concurrently with the molding operation.


CLS 264/440
TXT Forming composite structure:

    Processes under subclass 439 wherein the particulate material is arranged
    to form at least two different, contiguous layers or portions, each having
    a continuous phase (e.g., plural, adjacent, spacial distinct layers, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    480,    for reshaping, drawing, or stretching a composite work-piece.

    487,    for treating or heating a composite work-piece utilizing induction
    heat.

    490,    for treating a composite work-piece utilizing microwave energy.

    493,    for treating a composite work-piece utilizing infrared radiation.


CLS 264/441
TXT Producing filament:

    Processes under subclass 439 wherein a fine threadlike body or structure
    whose width and thickness are of the same order of magnitude is formed.


CLS 264/442
TXT Using sonic, supersonic, or ultrasonic energy:

    Processes under subclass 405 directed to utilizing wave vibrations which
    can be heard by the human ear.

    (1)     Note. Patents claiming the use of ultrasonic or supersonic
    frequencies (energy) are properly classified in this subclass. Supersonic
    is a general term covering the use of frequencies above the range of normal
    human hearing. Ultrasonic waves vibrate at frequencies beyond the hearing
    power of human beings (above 20,000 hertz). Sonic frequencies are
    vibrations which can be heard by the human ear (from about 15 hertz to
    approximately 20,000 hertz).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for processes involving treatment of material by vibrating,
    jarring, or agitating during shaping.


CLS 264/443
TXT Simultaneously with molding:

    Processes under subclass 442 wherein the sonic energy is employed
    concurrently with the molding operation.


CLS 264/444
TXT Producing articles of indefinite length:

    Processes under subclass 443 wherein self-sustaining continuous articles or
    running length bodies are formed.


CLS 264/445
TXT Fusion bonding of preformed bodies and shaping at the joint:

    Processes under subclass 443 wherein at least two plastically deformable
    self-sustaining bodies are assembled and autogenously united at a joint
    area by a shaping operation with plastic flow to reshape said bodies at
    said joint area.


CLS 264/446
TXT Limited to treatment* of surface or coated surface:

    Processes under subclass 405 wherein at least one treatment step is applied
    to a surface or coated surface only.


CLS 264/447
TXT Treatment* of coated surface:

    Processes under subclass 446 wherein only the coated surface is treated.


CLS 264/448
TXT Of indefinite length article:

    Processes under subclass 446 wherein the treated surface is that of a
    self-sustaining continuous article or running length body.


CLS 264/449
TXT Using direct contact of electrode or electrical wire with precursor or
    workpiece:

    Processes under subclass 405, wherein electrical current is caused to flow
    through a precursor or a workpiece by directly contacting said precursor or
    workpiece with an electrode or wire.

    (1)     Note. The electrode or wire may either remain as a part of the
    workpiece or be detached therefrom.


CLS 264/450
TXT Organic material contains specified conductive enhancing component (e.g.,
    filler, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 449 wherein the precursor or workpiece contains an
    identified electroconductive material which aids the current flow.

    (1)     Note.  Organic material which contains small amounts of inorganic
    material as conductive enhancers are properly classified here.


CLS 264/451
TXT Shaping surface constitutes electrode:

    Processes under subclass 449 wherein one of the  electrodes provides the
    shaping function.

    (1)     Note.  Processes wherein at least one electrode comprises the
    shaping surface are found herein.


CLS 264/452
TXT Including extrusion molding:

    Processes under subclass 451 wherein a material is shaped or molded by
    forcing it through a confining orifice.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176.1+, for processes of forming continuous or indefinite length articles,
    per se, by extrusion through a shaping orifice.

    323,    for processes of extruding finite articles, per se.

    464,    for extruding processes, per se, utilizing direct application of
    electrical or wave energy.


CLS 264/453
TXT Including injection molding:

    Processes under subclass 451 wherein pressure is applied to a molding
    material so as to force said material from a source removed from a closed
    mold cavity into said cavity wherein the material assumes the shape of the
    interior of the closed cavity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    478,    for injection molding, per se, utilizing direct application of
    electrical or wave energy.

    537,    for injection molding of a hollow blank portion prior to pneumatic
    pressure application to the inside.


CLS 264/454
TXT Direct application of fluid pressure (e.g., blow molding, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 405 wherein a positive or negative pressure is
    applied through the medium of a liquid or gas, in direct contact with a
    workpiece.


CLS 264/455
TXT Plasma (e.g., corona, glow discharge, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 454 wherein the energy applied consists of a
    gaseous vapor of ions in equilibrium or a vapor of ions in vacuum in a
    nonequilibrium state referred to as a "cold plasma."

    (1)     Note.  A plasma generally consists of a wholly or partially ionized
    gas composed of ions, electrons, and neutral particles. The concentration
    of negatively and positively charged carriers are approximately equal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    469,    for extrusion molding processes utilizing plasma.

    483,    for processes wherein the directly applied energy is plasma.


CLS 264/456
TXT Utilizing electron arc or electron beam:

    Processes under subclass 454 wherein the energy applied consists of (a) a
    prolonged electrical discharge or series of prolonged electrical discharges
    between two electrodes or (b) a narrow stream of electrons, moving in the
    same direction and at the same speed under the influence of an electric or
    magnetic field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    470,    for extrusion molding processes utilizing electron arc or beam.

    485,    for processes wherein an electron arc or beam is the energy
    directly applied.


CLS 264/457
TXT Induction heating:

    Processes under subclass 454 wherein the material to be molded is subjected
    to induction heat.

    (1)     Note.  Induction heat is considered to be heating of a nominally
    electrical conducting material by eddy currents induced by a varying
    electromagnetic field. When an alternating current flows through a coil
    surrounding or adjacent a nominally conducting material, eddy currents will
    be induced therein, causing said material to be heated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    472,    for extrusion molding processes utilizing induction heating.

    486,    for processes wherein the directly applied energy is induction heat.


CLS 264/458
TXT Infrared radiation:

    Processes under subclass 454 wherein the energy applied is considered to
    have a frequency range with wavelengths longer than those of visible light
    and shorter than those of radio waves.

    (1)     Note. Infrared radiation, measured using the electromagnetic wave
    spectrum, is that portion  which is visible to the eye, lying between
    wavelengths of 750 nm (0.75 micrometers) and about 1 mm (1000 micrometers).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    462,    for processes of uniting particles utilizing infrared radiation.

    476,    for extrusion molding processes utilizing infrared radiation.

    481,    for processes of reshaping, drawing or stretching utilizing
    infrared radiation.

    492,    for processes wherein the applied energy is infrared radiation.


CLS 264/459
TXT Polymerizing, cross-linking, or curing:

    Processes under subclass 454 wherein the molding material is caused to
    polymerize, cross-link, or cure.

    (1)     Note. Properly classified herein are documents claiming the
    following terms.

            a.      cross-linking
    b.      curing
    c.      addition polymerization
    d.      condensation polymerization
    e.      block or graft polymerization

            This list is not intended to be exhaustive and is not limited to
    the above examples.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    463,    for uniting particles to form articles wherein polymerization
    occurs.

    477,    for extrusion molding processes wherein polymerization occurs.

    494,    for processes wherein polymerization occurs utilizing directly
    applied electrical or wave energy.


CLS 264/460
TXT Forming articles by uniting randomly associated particles:

    Processes under subclass 405 wherein the energy applied is used to bond
    individually distinct particles to each other or through a binder.

    (1)     Note.  The relative sizes of the particles are immaterial; however,
    the particles must retain their discrete nature during the associating and
    bonding operation. Further, the mere presence of particles in a liquid
    carrier is not sufficient for this subclass (e.g., fillers or slurries),
    this being considered to be the molding of a fluent or liquid mass rather
    than the association of particles and is provided for in appropriate
    subclasses below.

    (2)     Note.  The material is usually, but not necessarily, in the form of
    fibers or granules and bonding of the particulate material may be effected
    by applying an adhesive or by the latent adhesive characteristics of the
    material.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131,    for a molding process combined with a step of coating with
    particulate material.

    239+,   for processes of molding (a) plastic compositions containing
    particulate material as a filler or (b) colloidal or nonsettling
    dispersions (e.g., rubber latex or clay) or (c) plastic particulate
    material which lose their identity during molding to form a homogeneous
    product and see (1) Note, above.

    517,    for processes of applying vacuum or suction to bulk assembled
    particles.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles: Fiber Preparation, subclasses 144+ for a process of
    bringing particles together, for example by air laying, and see the notes
    in subclasses 144+ for the line between Class 264 and Class 19.

    23,     Chemistry: Physical Processes, subclasses 313+ for agglomerating
    processes provided for in that class.

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclasses 550+ for a solid fuel
    consolidation or shaping process which goes beyond mere molding of a
    starting composition, especially subclasses 596+ for a process which
    includes pressing using a specified condition or technique.

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, subclasses
    293+ for processes of making abrading tools, the materials, or compositions
    used therein.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 3.1+ and 4.1+ for a process of
    forming glass fibers from a glass melt and adhesively bonding the fibers by
    any bonding medium or autogenously to form a glass fiber felt and
    subclasses 36+ for a process of fusing glass fibers or particles to each
    other to form a felt. See also the main definition of Class 264 for a
    further statement of the line with Class 65.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions,Etc., see especially the notes
    thereto for the locus of other art relating to particle uniting and
    subclasses 228+ for a consolidated metal particle composition.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 35+ for a method of intermingling and/or
    deforming particulate material to mechanically unite the particles together
    at their respective interfaces without use of a binder.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    62.2 for a process of forming a felted article by simultaneously uniting of
    particles combined with the step of adhesively bonding the felted article
    to another part.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 100+ for a process of
    forming an interfelted fibrous product (e.g., paper interfelted fibrous
    product, paper from a liquid fibrous suspension, etc.).

    201,    Distillation: Processes, Thermolytic, subclasses 5+ for a process
    for a mechanical pressing or briquetting of solid carbonaceous material
    combined with a thermolytic distillation operation.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, subclasses 61+ processes for making
    articles from metal particles by pressure without heat and subclass 1 for
    similar processes which use heat.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    subclasses 80.1+ for corresponding apparatus.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 180 for processes of coating utilizing
    solid particles or fibers.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 87 for a product
    with a pile or nap type surface and including particulate matter,
    subclasses 143+ for a stock material in the form of a single or plural
    layer web or sheet which has a textured or rough surface comprising
    particulate matter, subclasses 323+ for a composite web or sheet including
    a component having structurally defined particles, and subclasses 402+ for
    structurally defined or coated particles.


CLS 264/461
TXT Utilizing electron arc or electron beam:

    Processes under subclass 460 wherein the energy applied consists of a (a)
    prolonged electrical discharge or series of prolonged electrical discharges
    between two electrodes or (b) narrow stream of electrons moving in the same
    direction, and at the same speed, under the influence of an electric or
    magnetic field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    470,    for extrusion molding processes utilizing electron beam.

    485,    for processes wherein an electron arc or beam is the directly
    applied energy.


CLS 264/462
TXT Infrared radiation:

    Processes under subclass 460 wherein the energy applied is considered to
    have a frequency range with wavelengths longer than those of visible light
    and shorter than those of radio waves.

    (1)     Note.  Wave energy measured using the electromagnetic spectrum,
    having a portion which is visible to the eye, lying between wavelengths of
    750 nm (0.75 micrometers)and about 1 mm (1000 micrometers) are properly
    classified here as infrared.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    476,    for extrusion molding processes utilizing infrared radiation.

    481,    for processes of reshaping, drawing, or stretching utilizing
    infrared radiation.

    492,    for processes wherein the applied energy is infrared radiation.


CLS 264/463
TXT Polymerizing, cross-linking, or curing:

    Processes under subclass 460, wherein the molding material is caused to
    polymerize, cross-link, or cure.

    (1)     Note. Properly classified herein are documents claiming the
    following terms.

            a.      cross-linking
    b.      curing
    c.      addition polymerization
    d.      condensation polymerization
    e.      block or graft polymerization

            This list is not intended to be exhaustive and is not limited to
    the above examples.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    477,    for extrusion molding processes wherein polymerization,
    cross-linking, or curing occurs.

    494,    for processes wherein polymerization, cross-linking, or curing
    occurs utilizing directly applied electrical or wave energy.


CLS 264/464
TXT Extrusion molding:

    Processes under subclass 405 wherein an article is shaped or formed by
    extruding or forcing a supply of the article forming material through a
    confining and shaping orifice.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    subclasses 376.1+ for an extrusion shaping machine for nonmetals and see
    the search notes thereunder.


CLS 264/465
TXT Utilizing electrostatic charge, field, or force (e.g., pinning, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 464 wherein the energy used is static electrical
    or a force or field created thereby.

    (1)     Note.  Electrostatic energy is considered to be a form of
    electrical energy which has the capability of attracting and holding small
    particles having an opposite electrical charge.

    (2)     Note.  An electrostatic charge is an electric charge stored in a
    capacitor or on the surface of an insulated object.

    (3)     Note.  An electrostatic field is considered to be the vector force
    field set up in the vicinity of nonmoving electrical charges.


CLS 264/466
TXT On film, sheet or web:

    Processes under subclass 465 wherein the extruded material forms on a
    portion of material of finite length, whose width is greater than its
    thickness and which may be of any geometric shape (e.g., triangle, circle,
    etc.).


CLS 264/467
TXT Plural electrodes spaced between the extruding means and the shaping
    surface:

    Processes under subclass 466 wherein more than one electrode is located
    between an extruding orifice and a shaping surface.


CLS 264/468
TXT Including differential fluid pressure application (e.g., vacuum etc.):

    Processes under subclass 466 wherein a change in fluid pressure is applied.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500+ and 335, for other art relating to the application of fluid pressure
    differential to the work.


CLS 264/469
TXT Plasma (e.g., corona, glow discharge, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 464 wherein the energy applied consists of a
    gaseous vapor of ions in equilibrium or a vapor of ions in vacuum in a
    nonequilibrium state referred to as a "cold plasma."

    (1)     Note. A plasma, generally consists of a wholly or partially ionized
    gas composed of ions, electrons, and neutral particles. The concentration
    of negatively and positively charged carriers are approximately equal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    483,    for processes wherein the directly applied energy is plasma.


CLS 264/470
TXT Utilizing electron arc or electron beam:

    Processes under subclass 464 wherein the energy applied consists of (a) a
    prolonged electrical discharge or series of prolonged electrical discharges
    between two electrodes or (b) a narrow stream of electrons moving in the
    same direction, and at the same speed, under the influence of an electric
    or magnetic field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    485,    for processes wherein an electron arc or beam is the energy
    directly applied.


CLS 264/471
TXT Layered or structurally layered composite:

    Processes under subclass 470 wherein the treated composite has more than
    one layer each of which may be structured.


CLS 264/472
TXT Induction heating:

    Processes under subclass 464 wherein the extrusion material is subjected to
    induction heat.

    (1)     Note.  Induction heat is considered to be heating of a nominally
    electrical conducting material by eddy currents induced by a varying
    electromagnetic field. When an alternating current flows through a coil
    surrounding or adjacent a nominally conducting material, eddy currents will
    be induced therein, causing said material to be heated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    486,    for processes wherein the directly applied energy is induction heat.


CLS 264/473
TXT High energy or particulate radiation (e.g., X-ray, gamma ray, neutron,
    etc.):

    Processes under subclass 464 wherein the directly applied energy is
    irradiation with high energy electromagnetic radiation or high energy
    particles.

    (1)     Note. The term high energy electromagnetic radiation or high energy
    particles, as employed here,  includes X-rays, gamma rays, and particulate
    energy (i.e., charged particles and atomic emissions such as alpha rays,
    beta rays, and neutrons).  Electromagnetic wave energy measured below
    wavelengths of 100 Angstroms (10 to the minus 8 meters) will be considered
    high energy electromagnetic radiation or high energy particle radiation.
    This subject matter is often referred to as high energy ionizing radiation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    488,    for processes wherein high energy electromagnetic or particulate
    radiation is the energy directly applied.


CLS 264/474
TXT Microwave (e.g., 2.45 gigahertz, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 464 wherein the directly applied energy is
    identified on the electromagnetic wave spectrum as existing between far
    infrared and conventional radio-frequency.

    (1)     Note.  A microwave is generally considered to be an electromagnetic
    wave which has a wavelength measured in the centimeter range. Microwaves
    occupy a region in the electromagnetic wave spectrum between infrared and
    radio-frequency. There are no distinct boundaries between these regions
    except by arbitrary definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    489,    for processes wherein the energy directly applied is microwave.


CLS 264/475
TXT Radio frequency (e.g., 13.56 megahertz, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 464 wherein the directly  applied energy is
    identified on the electromagnetic wave spectrum as existing between 150 KHz
    and extending up to the infrared region.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    491,    for processes wherein the energy directly applied is radio
    frequency wave.


CLS 264/476
TXT Infrared radiation:

    Processes under subclass 464 wherein the energy applied is considered to
    have a frequency range with wavelengths longer than those of visible light
    and shorter than those of radio waves.

    (1)     Note.  Wave energy measured using the electromagnetic spectrum,
    having a portion which is visible to the eye, lying between wavelengths of
    750 nm (0.75 micrometers)and about 1 mm (1000 micrometers) are properly
    classified here as infrared.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    481,    for processes of reshaping, drawing, or stretching utilizing
    infrared radiation.

    492,    for processes wherein the applied energy is infrared radiation.


CLS 264/477
TXT Polymerizing, cross-linking, or curing:

    Processes under subclass 464 wherein the molding material is caused to
    polymerize, cross-link, or cure.

    (1)     Note. Properly classified herein are documents claiming the
    following terms.

            a.      cross-linking
    b.      curing
    c.      addition polymerization
    d.      condensation polymerization
    e.      block or graft polymerization

            This list is not intended to be exhaustive and is not limited to
    the above examples.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    494,    for processes wherein polymerization occurs utilizing directly
    applied electrical or wave energy.


CLS 264/478
TXT Injection molding:

    Processes under subclass 405 wherein pressure is applied to a molding
    material so as to force said material from a source removed from a closed
    mold cavity into said cavity wherein the material assumes the shape of the
    interior of the closed cavity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    328.1+, for injection molding without electrical or wave energy.

    537,    for injection molding of a hollow blank portion prior to pneumatic
    pressure application to the inside.


CLS 264/479
TXT Reshaping, drawing or stretching:

    Processes under subclass 405 wherein the energy is applied during any stage
    of an operation to reconfigure, lengthen, or elongate a moldable material.


CLS 264/480
TXT Composite work-piece:

    Processes under subclass 479 wherein the reconfigured, lengthened or
    elongated material comprises at least two different, contiguous layers or
    portions, each having a continuous phase (e.g., plural, adjacent, spacial
    distinct layers, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    487,    for treating or heating a composite work-piece utilizing induction
    heat.

    490,    for treating a composite work-piece utilizing microwave energy.

    493,    for treating a composite work-piece utilizing infrared radiation.


CLS 264/481
TXT Infrared radiation:

    Processes under subclass 479 wherein the energy applied is considered to
    have a frequency range with wavelengths longer than those of visible light
    and shorter than those of radio waves.

    (1)     Note.  Wave energy measured using the electromagnetic spectrum,
    having a portion which is visible to the eye, lying between wavelengths of
    750 nm (0.75 micrometers) and about 1 mm (1000 micrometers) are properly
    classified here as infrared.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    492,    for processes wherein the directly applied energy is infrared
    radiation.


CLS 264/482
TXT Laser:

    Processes under subclass 405 wherein the energy directly applied is a
    narrow beam of coherent light (light amplification by stimulated emissions
    of radiation).


    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 121.11+ for processes utilizing
    electric heat energy, per se, wherein the heat source is an electron beam,
    plasma, arc, laser, etc.


CLS 264/483
TXT Plasma (e.g., corona, glow discharge, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 405 wherein the energy directly applied consists
    of a gaseous vapor of ions in equilibrium or a vapor of ions in vacuum in a
    nonequilibrium state referred to as a "cold plasma."

    (1)     Note.   A plasma, generally consists of a wholly or partially
    ionized gas composed of ions, electrons, and neutral particles. The
    concentration of negatively and positively charged carriers are
    approximately equal.


CLS 264/484
TXT Utilizing electrostatic charge, field, or force (e.g., pinning, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 405 wherein the energy used is static electrical
    or the force or field created thereby.

    (1)     Note. Electrostatic energy is considered to be a form of electrical
    energy which has the capability of attracting and holding small particles
    having an opposite electrical charge.

    (2)     Note.  An electrostatic charge is considered to be electric energy
    stored in a capacitor or on the surface of an insulated object.

    (3)     Note. An electrostatic field is considered to be the vector force
    field set up in the vicinity of non-moving electrical charges.


CLS 264/485
TXT Utilizing electron arc or electron beam:

    Processes under subclass 405 wherein the energy applied consists of (a) a
    prolonged electrical discharge or series of prolonged electrical discharges
    between two electrodes or (b) a narrow stream of electrons moving in the
    same direction, and at the same speed, under the influence of an electric
    or magnetic field.


CLS 264/486
TXT Induction heating:

    Processes under subclass 405 wherein the material is subjected to induction
    heat.

    (1)     Note.  Induction heat is considered to be heating of a nominally
    electrical conducting material by eddy currents induced by a varying
    electromagnetic field. When an alternating current flows through a coil
    surrounding or adjacent a nominally conducting material, eddy currents will
    be induced therein, causing said material to be heated.


CLS 264/487
TXT Composite work-piece:

    Processes under subclass 486 wherein the induction heat is directly applied
    to a work-piece comprising at least two different, contiguous layers or
    portions, each having a continuous phase (e.g., plural, adjacent, spacial
    distinct layers, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    490,    for treating a composite work-piece utilizing microwave energy.

    493,    for treating a composite work-piece utilizing infrared radiation.


CLS 264/488
TXT High energy or particulate radiation (e.g., X-ray, gamma ray, neutron,
    etc.):

    Processes under subclass 405 wherein the directly applied energy is
    irradiation with high energy electromagnetic radiation or high energy
    particles.

    (1)     Note. The term high energy electromagnetic radiation or "high
    energy particles," as employed here, includes X-rays, gamma rays, and
    particulate energy (i.e., charged particles and atomic emissions such as
    alpha rays, beta rays, and neutrons).  Electromagnetic wave energy measured
    below wavelengths of 100 Angstroms (10 to the minus 8 meters) will be
    considered "high energy electromagnetic radiation" or "high energy particle
    radiation." This subject matter is often referred to as "high energy
    ionizing radiation."


CLS 264/489
TXT Microwave (e.g., 2.45 gigahertz, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 405 wherein the directly applied energy is
    identified on the electromagnetic wave spectrum as existing between far
    infrared and conventional radio-frequency.

    (1)     Note. A microwave is generally considered to be an electromagnetic
    wave which has a wavelength measured in the centimeter range. Microwaves
    occupy a region in the electromagnetic wave spectrum between infrared and
    radio-frequency. There are no distinct boundaries between these regions
    except by arbitrary definition.


CLS 264/490
TXT Composite work-piece:

    Processes under subclass 489 wherein the microwave energy is directly
    applied to a workpiece comprising at least two different, contiguous layers
    or portions, each having a continuous phase (e.g., plural, adjacent,
    spacial distinct layers, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    493,    for treating a composite work-piece utilizing infrared radiation.


CLS 264/491
TXT Radio frequency (e.g., 13.56 megahertz, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 405 wherein the directly applied energy is
    identified on the electromagnetic wave spectrum as existing between 150 KHz
    and extending up to the infrared region.


CLS 264/492
TXT Infrared radiation:

    Processes under subclass 405 wherein the energy applied is considered to
    have a frequency range with wavelengths longer than those of visible light
    and shorter than those of radio waves.

    (1)     Note.  Wave energy measured using the electromagnetic spectrum,
    having a portion which is visible to the eye, lying between wavelengths of
    750 nm (0.75 micrometers) and about 1 mm (1000 micrometers) are properly
    classified here as infrared.


CLS 264/493
TXT Composite work-piece:

    Processes under subclass 492 wherein the infrared radiation is directly
    applied to a work-piece comprising at least two different, contiguous
    layers or portions, each having a continuous phase (e.g., plural, adjacent,
    spacial distinct layers, etc.).


CLS 264/494
TXT Polymerizing, cross-linking, or curing (e.g., utilizing ultraviolet
    radiation, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 405 wherein the molding material is caused to
    polymerize, cross-link, or cure.

    (1)     Note. Properly classified herein are documents claiming the
    following terms.

            a.      cross-linking
    b.      curing
    c.      addition polymerization
    d.      condensation polymerization
    e.      block or graft polymerization

            This list is not intended to be exhaustive and is not limited to
    the above examples.


CLS 264/495
TXT Indefinite length* articles:

    Processes under subclass 494 wherein the polymerized articles formed are
    self-sustaining continuous or running length.


CLS 264/496
TXT While contacting a shaping surface (e.g., in mold curing, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 494 wherein the polymerizing, cross-linking, or
    curing takes place while in a mold or in contact with a molding surface.


CLS 264/497
TXT Using laser sintering of particulate material to build three-dimensional
    product (e.g., SLS, selective laser sintering, etc.)

    Processes under subclass 405 directed to selective laser induced heat
    sintering to bond individually randomly associated distinct and deposited
    particles to form a complete three-dimensional article by building up
    layers containing a major amount of the particulate material.

    (1)     Note.  The relative sizes of the particles are immaterial, however
    the particles must retain their discrete nature during the associating and
    bonding operation. Further, the mere presence of particles in a liquid
    carrier is not sufficient for this subclass (e.g., fillers or slurries,
    etc.,) since this is considered to be molding of a fluent or liquid mass
    rather than the association of particles and is provided for in appropriate
    subclasses below.


    (2)     Note.  The material is usually, but not necessarily, in the form of
    fibers or granules and bonding of the particulate material may be effected
    by applying an adhesive or by the latent adhesive characteristics of the
    material.

    (3)     Note. Generally, the subject matter found in this subclass includes
    dispensing a layer which comprises a plurality of blended or coated
    powdered materials having different dissociation or bonding temperatures
    and applying a binder to selected portions of the powdered material, for
    example by way of an ink-jet print head. The locations that receive the
    binder are defined according to a cross-section of the part to be produced,
    communicated to the apparatus by a CAD, computer assisted design, data
    base. A roller is often used to assist in the proper delivery and alignment
    of the powdered material. Each powdered layer is selectively sintered by a
    CAD laser causing layer buildup thereby forming a complete
    three-dimensional product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for processes of forming solid particulate material by liquid or
    melt comminuting combined with uniting of said bulk assembled or deposited
    particles.


    109+,   for forming articles by uniting randomly associated particles.

    131,    for a molding process combined with a step of coating with
    particulate material.

    239+,   for processes of molding (a) plastic compositions containing
    particulate material as a filler, (b) colloidal or non-settling dispersions
    (e.g., rubber latex, clay, etc.), and (c) plastic particulate material
    which lose their identity during molding to form a homogeneous product (see
    (1) Note, above).

    517,    for processes of applying vacuum or suction to bulk assembled
    particles.


CLS 264/500
TXT DIRECT APPLICATION OF FLUID PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL TO PERMANENTLY SHAPE,
    DISTORT, OR SUSTAIN WORK:

    Processes under the class definition wherein a positive or negative
    pressure is appliedthrough the medium of a liquid or gas in direct contact
    with a workpiece to form or maintain a desired configuration.

    (1)     Note.  The utilization of steam pressure as a source of heat is not
    included here unless the steam serves to shape, support, or sustain the
    work. Steam to heat is classified below based on the specific molding or
    treatment step.

    (2)     Note.  Introduction of fluent material into a mold under pressure
    is not here unless a gas pressure medium acts directly on the material in
    the mold cavity.  Thus, injection molding utilizing pneumatic pressure to
    inject the molding material is not here if the pneumatic pressure acts
    through a column of molding material such as a gate portion of the article.
     Injection of the molding material rather than directly on the body molding
    is provided for in subclasses 328+ below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 261+ for glass shaping apparatus
    comprising inflating a parison in a mold; see the search notes thereunder.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 387+ for preform reshaping by direct application of gas pressure
    (e.g., inflating, etc.); see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 264/501
TXT Producing, toroidal work (e.g., tire, etc.):
    Processes under subclass 500 in which the

    article produced has a toroidal shape.

    (1)     Note.  For a definition of "toroidal" see this class, subclass 315
    and accompanying notes.

    (2)     Note.  Toroidal as used in this subclass includes tires, inner
    tubes, and the like.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315,    where the pressure or heat is applied by means of a toroidal
    inflated bag.

    326,    for reshaping toroidal shaped work in a closed mold cavity.


CLS 264/502
TXT At least a portion of the external surface being unconfined during
    application of fluid pressure:

    Processes under subclass 501 in which an exterior portion of the toroidal
    surface is unconfined during the application of differential fluid pressure.

    (1)     Note.  The processes included herein result in a toroid with an
    outward projection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    572,    for similar processes of shaping partially confined surfaces which
    are not toroidal.


CLS 264/503
TXT Shaping against interior of a forming surface by rotation of material
    shaping member:

    Processes under subclass 500 in which rotating motion is imparted to the
    material being shaped or to the mold or shaping surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for formation of particulate material from a liquid or molten mass
    by means of centrifugal force.

    68,     for rotation to produce frictional heat.

    69+,    for processes which pertain to agitating by plural sequential
    rotations in reverse directions.

    114+,   for use of centrifugal force in formation of an article by uniting
    of bulk assembled particles.

    175,    for processes of forming indefinite length articles by a
    calendering operation between endless shaping surface, e.g., belts or
    wheels.

    176,    for centrifugal spinning of filaments or fibers.

    270,    for processes of lining a mold cavity employing centrifugal force.

    310+,   for processes in which rotating motion is imparted to the material
    shaped or to the mold without the direct application of differential fluid
    pressure.

    556,    for a process of casting fluent material onto the exterior of a
    cooled roll.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 114+ for processes of centrifugally
    casting metals.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 425+ for a molding machine utilizing mold motion to distribute
    or compact a fluent material in a mold.


CLS 264/504
TXT Perforation by differential fluid pressure; or smoothing, scoring, or
    cutting of green concrete with fluid pressure:

    Processes under subclass 500 in which application of fluid pressure results
    in the formation of a hole or aperture in a workpiece or in which direct
    application of fluid pressure smoothes or cuts a green concrete article.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded herefrom are flash and sprue trimmings by fluid
    pressure differential and such is provided for in subclass 536.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154,    155 and 156, for hole formation by means other than differential
    fluid pressure.


CLS 264/505
TXT Corrugating:

    Processes under subclass 500 in which a portion of the workpiece is formed
    so as to have a cross section having a ternate ridges and grooves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282,    for a process of creping or crinkling without the direct
    application of differential fluid pressure.

    286+,   for corrugation of a web without the direct application of
    differential fluid pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    202+ and subclasses 205+ for corrugating of indefinite length work combined
    with a laminating operation; and 210 for corrugating and laminating to a
    noncorrugated lamina.


CLS 264/506
TXT Of a tubular preform:

    Processes under subclass 505 in which the workpiece is hollow, open ended,
    and of greater axial dimension than diameter.


CLS 264/507
TXT With axial compression:

    Precesses under subclas 506 in which tubular article or preform is
    corrugated by reduction in its length.


CLS 264/508
TXT Continuous or indefinite length:

    Processes under subclass 506 in which continuous or indefinite length work
    is corrugated.


CLS 264/509
TXT Labeling or embossing indicia:

    Processes under subclass 500 in which an article or preform (a) is
    subjected to differential fluid pressure which results in the production of
    a raised or depressed area in the form of a word or trademark or symobol:
    or (b) has a label (i.e., preform which is intended to carry printed
    information which is thin relative to its other dimensions) attached to its
    surface.


CLS 264/510
TXT Producing multilayer work or article:

    Processes under subclass 500 in which two or more united preforms and/or
    layers are reshaped or in which a layer is formed on a preform to produce a
    product with two or more generally contiguous layers or two or more layers
    are coextruded.

    (1)     Note.  The layers may be of the same or different material so long
    as there is a difference in some property of the layers.

    (2)     Note.  Uniting shaped sheets to form a hollow article is not
    considered to make a multilayered product and is provided for in subclass
    545.


CLS 264/511
TXT Including application of vacuum to hold, support, or sustain a preform
    against which material is molded:

    Processes under subclass 510 in which a negative pressure differential is
    used to hold, support, or sustain a preform to which material is molded or
    cast.


CLS 264/512
TXT Producing hollow work or a tubular article:

    Processes under subclass 510 in which the article formed is tubular or
    hollow.

    (1)     Note.  Hollow is intended to comprise cuplike shapes that are
    relatively deep with respect to diameter.


CLS 264/513
TXT Including injection:

    Processes under subclass 512 in which pressure is applied to the molding
    material so as to force the material from a source removed from a closed
    mold cavity into the cavity wherein said material assumes the shape of the
    interior of said cavity.


CLS 264/514
TXT Including extrusion:

    Processes under subclass 512 in which a supply of material is forced
    through a confining and shaping orifice.


CLS 264/515
TXT Including forming a hollow article:

    Processes under subclass 514 in which a finite length hollow parison is
    forced into conformity with a female mold by the application of
    differential fluid pressure.


CLS 264/516
TXT By insertion or application of a preform:

    Processes under subclass 512 in which a preform is introduced into or
    applied to the surface of an article or introduced into a fluent material
    which is formed into an article or preform.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include forming one tubular object
    from fluent material and then forming another layer thereon.


CLS 264/517
TXT Bulk deposition of particles by differential fluid pressure:

    Processes under subclass 500 directed to bonding to each other individually
    distinct particles which are associated randomly by bulk handling or
    deposition to form a layer containing a major amount of the particulate
    material.

    (1)     Note.  The relative sizes of the particles are immaterial; however,
    the particles must retain their discrete nature during the associating and
    bonding operation.  Further, the mere presence of particles in a liquid
    carrier is not sufficient for this subclass (e.g., fillers or slurries),
    this being considered to be the molding or a fluent or liquid mass rather
    than the association of particles and is provided for in appropriate
    subclasses below.

    (2)     Note.  The material is usually but not necessarily in the form of
    fibers or granules and bonding of the particluate material may be effected
    by applying an adhesive or by the latent adhesive characteristics of the
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109,    and the notes thereunder for bulk deposition of particulate
    nonmetallic material without the application of direct fluid pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, subclasses 39+ for processes for
    making articles from metal-containing particulate material using pressure
    and heat wherein the particulate material is formed into a shaped body
    prior to sintering or heating and a specific pressure or the lack of
    pressure is recited for the forming step.


CLS 264/518
TXT Continuous or indefinite length:

    Processes under subclass 517 in which a continuous or indefinite length
    work or product is produced.


CLS 264/519
TXT Differential temperature conditioning:

    Processs under subclass 500 in which different degrees of heating or
    cooling are positively applied to the workpiece to cause one part to be a
    higher temperature than another.

    (1)     Note.  To be placed herein, a patent should recite a positively
    applied temperature differential.  Normal heating or cooling to ambient
    temperatures, for example, wherein an article may be cooled at the surface
    temporarily more than at the core, is not sufficient to place a patent
    herein.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not include heating for stress relief
    after forming, such processes will be found with the molding process.


CLS 264/520
TXT Including application of internal fluid pressure to hollow finite length
    preform to force same into conformity with female mold part:

    Processes under subclass 519 in which a finite length preform is forced
    into conformity with a female mold.

    (1)     Note.  Finite length parison includes a hollow cylindrical body of
    plastic which is usually sealed at one end either in its preformed state or
    as part of the ongoing process.  The finite length parison may be a preform
    or the process herein may include the molding of the parison.


CLS 264/521
TXT Heating:

    Processes under subclass 520 in which the temperature differential is
    created by at least heating the workpiece.


CLS 264/522
TXT Starting material is nonhollow planar finite length preform or product is
    planar and of finite length:

    Processes under subclass 519 in which the starting material is a generally
    planar nonhollow preform or the product is of finite length.

    (1)     Note.  The starting material may be cut off a continuous or running
    length feed roll.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass provides for processes generally referred to
    as sheet shaping or thermoforming including a step of differential
    temperature conditioning.


CLS 264/523
TXT Including application of internal fluid pressure to hollow finite length
    parison to expand same into conformity with female mold part:

    Processes under subclass 500 in which a finite length hollow parison is
    expanded into conformity with a female mold by the application of a
    differential fluid pressure.

    (1)     Note.  A parison in general is a hollow cylindrical preform of
    relatively smaller diameter than length which may be sealed or open and of
    an overall size suitable for blow molding.

    (2)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are processes which deform a
    flat sheet by forcing it into a female mold, such is provided for in
    subclasses 544+.


CLS 264/524
TXT Production of a sealed product or a filled mercantile container:

    Processes under subclass 523 in which the product of the process is a
    completely sealed article or in which the article is filled with a fluid
    and sealed.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are balls, incomplete containers, i.e.,
    without filling openings and filled containers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    426,    Food or Edible Material Processes Compositions, and Products, for
    forming a container by differential fluid pressure wherein the fluid is
    claimed as an edible within that class definition.


CLS 264/525
TXT Including maintenance or production of internal sterility:

    Processes under subclass 524 in which molding is carried out in such a
    manner as to produce an internally sterile article or to maintain a sterile
    condition in a preform being treated.


CLS 264/526
TXT Including use of vacuum or internal venting of parison to remove fluid
    after application of differential fluid pressure:

    Processes under subclass 523 in which the parison is vented internally to
    remove a blowing fluid or a vacuum applied to created differential fluid
    pressure.


CLS 264/527
TXT Forming multiple containers in a single mold block from a single length of
    parison:

    Processes under subclass 523 in which two or more containers are formed
    from a single finite length parison in a single or sequential operation in
    a single mold block.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include continuous clamshell molds
    that act on an indefinite length hollow tube.

    (2)     Note.  Mold block, as used herein, includes a single shape defining
    means which defines one or more hollow articles.


CLS 264/528
TXT Including internal cooling of the article after fluid pressure shaping:

    Processes under subclass 523 in which a fluid cooling medium is introduced
    into the molded work or article.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include the use of an internal mold
    part or accessory, for example, a cooled mandrel to effect internal cooling.


CLS 264/529
TXT Including plural distinct steps of differential fluid pressure induced
    expansion:

    Processes under subclass 523 in which expansion by differential fluid
    pressure of the parison takes place in two or more sequential steps each of
    which causes deformation.

    (1)     Note.  One of the steps of expansion may be prepuffing or free
    expanding of the workpiece.

    (2)     Note.  The two or more expansion steps may take place in the same
    or different molds, or one expansion step may be carried outside the mold,
    i.e., free blowing followed by blow molding, etc.


CLS 264/530
TXT In diverse female mold cavities:

    Processes under subclass 529 in which the sequential expansion steps take
    place in each of two or more molds.


CLS 264/531
TXT Including shaping by mechanical means other than fluid pressure during or
    subsequent to fluid pressure differential shaping:

    Processes under subclass 523 in which sequential reshaping is carried out
    by physical contact with relatively moving forming means.

    (1)     Note.  Severing, bottom pinching and neck molding wherein the neck
    is molded as an inherent step in the closing of the mold about the parison
    or workpiece are not considered reshaping within the meaning of this
    subclass; however, if a separate neck mold is closed about the neck portion
    or a mandrel is inserted forcing material into a neck mold portion of a
    closed mold this would be sufficient to be considered reshaping for
    purposes of this subclass.


CLS 264/532
TXT Shaping is longitudinal or axial stretching prior to or during differential
    fluid pressure deformation:

    Processes under subclass 531 in which, by application of physical force by
    a machine part, the greatest dimension of a parison or workpiece is
    increased.

    (1)     Note.  The mechanical stretching may be accompanied by increased
    fluid pressure differential.

    (2)     Note.  The mechanical stretching may be accomplished by internal or
    external contact.

    (3)     Note.  Punching of holes in a container absent other significant
    deformation is not included herein.  Hole formation by differential fluid
    pressure is provided for in subclass 504.


CLS 264/533
TXT Shaping is neck formation other than by closure of mold for body of article:

    Processes under subclass 531 in which the neck of a container is reshaped
    by application of mechanical force other than the closing of the mold for
    the body of the container.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes neck calibration when it takes place
    as a step separate from the closing of the mold.


CLS 264/534
TXT Shaping is subsequent to expansion:

    Processes under subclass 531 in which the mechanical reshaping takes place
    after an explansion by differential fluid pressure.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are, for example, processes for giving a
    container a concave bottom by deformation of a flat or convex bottom.


CLS 264/535
TXT Including heating of previously formed parison to blow molding temperature:

    Processes under subclass 523 in which the cool preformed parison is
    reheated to a temperature where it may be shaped by differential fluid
    pressure.


CLS 264/536
TXT Including removal of flash or sprue:

    Processes under subclass 523 in which subsequent to deformation caused by
    differential fluid pressure flash or sprue is removed or part of the molded
    article is cutaway to form an aperture or two articles are separated by
    severing.

    (1)     Note.  The severing or removal of flash or sprue may be by the
    application of differential fluid pressure.


CLS 264/537
TXT Including injection forming of parison or portion thereof:

    Processes under subclass 523 in which the parison has at least a portion
    thereof formed by application of pressure which forces material into a
    closed mold cavity under pressure.


CLS 264/538
TXT Arcuate or rotary movement of parison or workpiece from one work station to
    another:

    Processes under subclass 537 in which the parison or workpiece is caused to
    move in a manner so as to describe or approximate the arc of a circle from
    one work station to another.

    (1)     Note.  A workpiece is parison which has been worked on in some
    manner, e.g., blown, sealed, etc.


CLS 264/539
TXT Including extrusion:

    Processes under subclass 537 in which material is shaped to the cross
    section of an orifice by forcing it through the confining orifice.


CLS 264/540
TXT Including extrusion:

    Processes under subclass 523 in which material is shaped to the cross
    section of an orifice by forcing it through the confining orifice.


CLS 264/541
TXT Of irregular or varying cross section:

    Processes under subclass 540 in which the formed article is of nonuniform
    cross section throughout its length, or a portion thereof, which may result
    from a gradual change in transverse dimension or through intermittent or
    repeated separated irregularities therein.


CLS 264/542
TXT With movement of parison or workpiece from one work station to another:

    Processes under subclass 540 in which the parisoner workpiece is moved from
    one work station to another.

    (1)     Note.  This includes moving the mold containing the parison from
    one place to another, e.g., chain mold, etc.


CLS 264/543
TXT Movement is arcuate or rotary:

    Processes under subclass 542 in which the workpiece is caused to move in a
    manner so as to describe or apporximate the arc of a circle from one work
    station to another.


CLS 264/544
TXT Starting material is nonhollow planar finite length preform or product is
    finite length:

    Processes under subclass 500 in which the starting material is a generally
    planar nonhollow preform or the product of the process is a finite length
    sheet.

    (1)     Note.  The starting material may be cut off a continuous or running
    length feed roll.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass provides for what is generally termed sheet
    shaping.


CLS 264/545
TXT Including uniting plural shaped sheets to form hollow work:

    Processes under subclass 544 in which two or more sheets are combined and
    shaped to form a hollow article.


CLS 264/546
TXT Material shaped is a fabric, per se:

    Processes under subclass 544 in which the material shaped is solely a woven
    or nonwoven fabric.

    (1)     Note.  This does not include shaping of fabrics which are a
    reinforcing layer in a laminate but will include the temporary uniting of a
    fabric with a fluid impervious layer for purposes of shaping.


CLS 264/547
TXT With distinct staged deformation by differential fluid pressure:

    Processes under subclass 544 in which the differential fluid pressure is
    applied in sequential noncontinuous increments.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes processes in which a sheet is forced
    in one direction and then the opposite direction by application of
    differential fluid pressure.

    (2)     Note.  A step of curing or vulcanization is not for purposes of
    this subclass a shaping step.


CLS 264/548
TXT Including heating after forcing into contact with a solid heating means by
    differential fluid pressure:

    Processes under subclass 547 in which the workpiece is by application of
    differential fluid pressure, forced into contact with a heated surface
    before furthur shaping.


CLS 264/549
TXT Including use of male part to stretch heated preform which is formed by a
    female mold which determines shape of work:

    Processes under subclass 547 in which a member contacts and deforms or
    stretches a sheet of material in an axial direction before the application
    of differential fluid pressure to force it into conformity with a female
    mold which determines the shape of the workpiece.


CLS 264/550
TXT Including use of male part to stretch heated preform which is formed by a
    female mold which determines shape of work:

    Processes under subclass 544 in which a member contacts and deforms or
    stretches a sheet of material in an axial direction before the application
    of differential fluid pressure to force it into conformity with a female
    mold which determines the shape of the workpiece.


CLS 264/551
TXT Simultaneous formation of plural articles:

    Processes under subclass 550 in which a plurality of deforming members act
    to deform or stretch a plurality of sheets or a number of locations on a
    single sheet.


CLS 264/552
TXT Including curing or vulcanization:

    Processes under subclass 544 in which a thermosetting plastic is cured or
    rubber is vulcanized.


CLS 264/553
TXT Including use of vacuum:

    Processes under subclass 544 in which the work is subjected to a pressure
    less than atmospheric.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87,     for proceses of removing a liquid through a mold surface by vacuum.

    101+,   for processes of treating work by use of a vacuum which treatment
    does not support, shape, or sustain the work.


CLS 264/554
TXT Including use of male mold part which determines the final shape of at
    least a portion of the work:

    Processes under subclass 553 in which the work is shaped about a mold part,
    i.e., male mold member.


CLS 264/555
TXT Production of continuous or running length:

    Processes under subclass 500 in which a continuous or running length
    product is produced.

    (1)     Note.  In this and the indented subclass mechanical treatment of a
    continuous or running length tube as by cutting off or slitting will not
    defeat placement herein.


CLS 264/556
TXT By casting on to a cooled roll:

    Processes under subclass 555 in which the indefinite length article is
    formed by depositing fluent material on a cylindrical rotating surface and
    solidifying the fluent material.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 212 and the notes thereunder for related fields
    of search.


CLS 264/557
TXT Including liquid contact:

    Processes under subclass 555 in which the work is contacted with liquid.


CLS 264/558
TXT Including internal liquid contact:

    Processes under subclass 557 which include contacting the internal surface
    of the continuous or running length with liquid.


CLS 264/559
TXT With downward movement of workpiece:

    Processes under subclass 558 in which the workpiece is caused to travel in
    a downward direction in or into a liquid bath after an initial forming step
    or the workpiece is caused to travel in a downward direction into annular
    liquid contact after an initial forming step.

    (1)     Note.  The initial forming step is typically the extrusion of the
    tubular workpiece.


CLS 264/560
TXT With calibration, mandrel forming or with internal guide:

    Processes under subclass 557 in which a sizing operation follows the
    initial forming operation or forming takes place with the use of an
    internal forming or supporting member.


CLS 264/561
TXT Contact with liquid coagulant or reactive liquid:

    Processes under subclass 557 in which a fluent or solid material is
    contacted with a liquid which causes a chemical reaction to take place.

    (1)     Note.  A plasticizer in the absence of a clear showing to the
    contrary is presumed to be nonreactive.


CLS 264/562
TXT With immersion in liquid bath:

    Processes under subclass 557 in which the continuous or running length is
    submerged in a pool of liquid.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are annular baths.


CLS 264/563
TXT Producing a tubular product:

    Processes under subclass 555 in which the continuous or running length
    product formed is hollow.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for supporting or sustaining a
    tubular article.


CLS 264/564
TXT Including deformation by application of fluid pressure:

    Processes under subclass 563 in which the tubular product is shaped or
    deformed by the application of differential fluid pressure.


CLS 264/565
TXT With internal gas bearing or mandrel:

    Processes under subclass 564 in which the tubular product is internally
    shaped or supported by an internal solid member or by gas issuing from a
    solid internal member.


CLS 264/566
TXT With application of external pressure or vacuum:

    Processes under subclass 564 in which the tubular product is shaped by the
    application of a positive or negative differential pressure to its exterior
    surface.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes application of positive physical
    pressure by means of a mechanical device in contact with the work.


CLS 264/567
TXT With reheating of work (e.g., tempering, annealing, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 566 in which a hollow article is reheated before
    the application of differential fluid pressure.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes tempering or annealing of a hollow
    continuous or running length article before blowing.


CLS 264/568
TXT Including use of vacuum:

    Processes under subclass 566 in which the work is subjected to a pressure
    less than atmospheric.

    (1)     Note.  Vacuum as used in this subclass does not include blowing air
    across the surface of a tubular product and thus producing a negative
    pressure by a venturi effect.


CLS 264/569
TXT Including annular fluid contact:

    Processes under subclass 566 in which fluid is applied externally in a band
    around the circumference of a tubular product which band is of much shorter
    length than the tubular article.


CLS 264/570
TXT Including hydrostatic or liquid pressure:

    Processes under subclass 500 in which differential fluid pressure is
    applied to work by a liquid.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes hydrostatic extrusion.


CLS 264/571
TXT Including use of vacuum:

    Processes under subclass 500 in which the work is subjected to a pressure
    less than atmospheric.


CLS 264/572
TXT With internal application of fluid pressure:

    Processes under subclass 500 in which fluid pressure is applied to the
    interior of hollow work or a hollow article.


CLS 264/573
TXT To finite length tubular product:

    Processes under subclass 572 in which the hollow work or article is
    cylindrical and of finite length.


CLS 264/574
TXT To form generally spherical product:

    Processes under subclass 572 in which the hollow work or article is
    generally spherical.


CLS 264/600
TXT HEAT POLISHING (E.G., GLAZING, ETC.) OF INORGANIC ARTICLE SURFACE OUTSIDE
    OF MOLD:

    Processes under the class definition for producing inorganic article by
    firing outside of the mold at temperatures sufficiently high to cause only
    a surface of the article to become melt smoothed or melt rounded without
    substantial loss of original self-sustaining shape of the overall article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for processes of spheroidizing or rounding solid particle.

    129,    Note (1), for a discussion of shaping and coating combinations.

    332,    for fusing or melting inorganic materials, per se, in a mold or
    employing a mold.

    609,    for particular or specific manner of positioning, arranging, or
    conveying of plural blocks, tiles, or bricks (e.g., stacking, utilizing
    spacer, etc.) during sintering, vitrifying, or drying.

    680,    for process of otherwise shaping or treating block, tile, or brick
    combined with sintering, vitrifying, or firing outside the mold.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, appropriate subclasses for processes under the
    class definition which include glass fusing or vitrifying.

    427,    Coating Processes, for processes including the combination of (a)
    firing and coating, or (b) nominal molding, significant coating, and
    firing; regardless of the sequence of the respective steps.  However,
    combinations of (a) significant molding, firing, and coating, or (b)
    nominal molding and nominal coating are classified in Class 264; regardless
    of the sequence of the respective steps.


CLS 264/601
TXT Of clay containing block, tile, or brick:

    Process under subclass 600 wherein articles or preforms undergoing
    treatment are, often hand-sized, usually rectangular or square, building
    blocks of material containing clay (i.e., an earthy material that is
    composed of hydrous aluminum silicates and other materials that are plastic
    when moist and hard when fired) identified as a block, tile, or brick.

    (1)     Note. Lacking an indication to the contrary, the mere use of block,
    tile, or brick without indicated composition will be considered proper for
    this subclass, even if not disclosed to contain clay.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    609,    for particular or specific manner of positioning, arranging, or
    conveying of plural blocks, tiles, or bricks (e.g., stacking, utilizing
    spacer, etc.) during sintering, vitrifying, or drying.

    644,    for process of shaping or treating multilayered or composite block,
    tile, or brick combined with sintering, vitrifying, or firing outside the
    mold.


CLS 264/602
TXT With coating outside of mold:

    Process under subclass 600 wherein there is a combination of significant
    shaping and coating of the shaped preform outside of the mold.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, for processes including the combination of (a)
    firing and coating, or (b) nominal molding, significant coating, and
    firing; regardless of the sequence of the respective steps.  However,
    combinations of (a) significant molding, firing, and coating, or (b)
    nominal molding and nominal coating are classified in Class 264; regardless
    of the sequence of the respective steps.

    (1)     Note.  When sintering or firing of a coated or impregnated fibrous
    shaped material results in decomposition of the fibrous material and
    production of a noncoated or nonimpregnated shaped product, the process
    will be considered proper for Class 264.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129,    Note (1), for a discussion of shaping and coating combinations.


CLS 264/603
TXT OUTSIDE OF MOLD SINTERING OR VITRIFYING OF SHAPED INORGANIC ARTICLE OR
    PREFORM:

    Processes under the class definition for producing or treating inorganic
    shaped articles in which a self-sustaining shaped article or preform
    comprising inorganic materials or precursors thereof are fired outside of
    the mold at temperatures sufficiently high to cause said article or preform
    to become sintered or vitrified without substantial loss of original
    self-sustaining shape due to sagging or gravity.

    (1)     Note.  Vitrification is a densification of inorganic ceramic
    material that results from firing at sufficient temperature to produce a
    progressive fusion of particles through the assistance of a viscous liquid
    silaceous-like bonding phase into a body having dense glass-like
    characteristics (e.g., hardness, brittleness, smoothness, etc.). As
    vitrification progresses, the proportion of glassy-like bond formed
    increases and apparent porosity of the substance decreases without
    appreciable slumping or sagging. Sintering is the coalescence of parts
    through solid state diffusion into a densified solid mass through heating,
    generally with fusion limited to only surface layer of each particle, such
    that some particulate identity remains.  The partial melting or
    vitrification of inorganic materials in the mold is provided for in various
    subclasses below, such  as subclasses 109+ or 332+.

    (2)     Note.  The terms baking, burning, calcining, or firing recited in a
    patent is considered to read on either sintering or vitrifying and is
    included herein, unless disclosed as being for some other purpose or at a
    clearly too low or inadequate temperature to accomplish sintering or
    vitrifying.  Baking, burning, calcining, or firing outside the mold of
    shaped articles to decompose binder or organometallic precursors is
    included hereinunder if other criteria of this subclass definition are met.
    However, baking, burning, calcining, or firing, (a) to render a mass
    friable, (b) at a temperature only sufficient to drive out the moisture
    content, or (c) to volatilize organic material without decomposition would
    be excluded from subclasses 603+.

    (3)     Note.  Articles formed by accretion from bulk having embedded
    therein a form to be removed during or after firing are considered to be
    self-sustaining bodies for the purpose of this subclass.

    (4)     Note.  Hot isostatic pressing (i.e., HIP) relates to application of
    an equalized fluid pressure to all external sides or surfaces of an
    article. This is usually performed outside of a mold in a gaseous
    atmosphere at substantially elevated temperatures and pressures.  Lacking
    an indication to the contrary, hot isostatic pressing per se of an article
    or preform will therefore be assumed to occur outside of a mold at a
    temperature sufficiently high to be proper for this subclass. Shaping by
    applying hot isostatic fluid pressure to a preform using surrounding liquid
    (e.g., molten glass coating, melted tin, etc.) or fluid
    pressure-transmitting deformable sheath (e.g., metal foil, etc.) will be
    considered to be outside a mold for purposes of this subclass.  However,
    so-called "pseudoisostatic pressing" with loose particulate between solid
    pressing surfaces and preform will not be considered proper for this
    subclass.

    (5)     Note.  See section II, A, (8) of the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    0.5+,   for shaping or treating of radioactive materials (e.g., sintering
    uranium oxide rods, etc.).

    15,     for processes of spheroidizing or rounding of solid particles.

    16+,    for shaping ceramic dental type articles.

    29.1+,  for processes which include a step of carbonizing by a firing
    operation which produces a product containing elemental carbon therein.

    30,     for processes of furnace lining or repair which may include a
    firing operation.

    43+,    for processes of forming pores in inorganic materials during
    vitrification or firing.

    125+,   for sintering or heat fusion of particles to autogenously bond
    while in a mold (e.g., hipping, etc.)

    234+,   for applied temperature change out of mold.

    332,    for fusing or melting inorganic materials, per se, in a mold or
    employing a mold and see (5) Note above.

    333+,   for shaping inorganic settable hydraulic compositions under heat or
    pressure and see (5) Note above.

    345+,   for treating shaped or solid articles by a temperature change.

    405+,   for processes of firing, sintering, or vitrifying wherein wave
    energy or electric current is involved.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, appropriate subclasses for processes under the
    class definition which include glass fusing or vitrifying. A process
    directed to (a) heating a material within the scope of Class 65 to the
    molten state and forming a shaped preform therefrom, or (b) bulk depositing
    glass fibers into a mold surface and thereafter fusing the fibers to each
    other is classified in Class 65.  See the definitions of Class 65, section
    III B, with particular reference to the line with this class 264 for
    processes.  See also the search notes to Class 65, subclasses 17.3, 376,
    and 454; and see the class definitions in this class 264 for further
    delineation of the line with Class 65.

    (1)     Note. With regard to glass particle uniting, a recitation of
    placing of glass particles (i.e., other than glass fibers or mineral wool)
    in their final position in a mold, followed by autogenous uniting or
    sintering outside the mold in the configuration or shape imparted by said
    mold, will be classified in this Class 264; whether or not said particles
    are disclosed to maintain their individual identities to any degree. Class
    264 takes processes directed to (a) shaping a mass of green siliceous
    material and subsequently firing or curing the material to set the material
    or (b) placing discrete siliceous particles (i.e., other than glass fibers
    or mineral wool) onto a mold surface which particles are heated on or
    subsequent to contact with the surface to fuse the particles to each other.

    (2)     Note. Using a glass in a molten state as a fluid pressure
    transmitting media in hot isostatic pressing of shaped articles is
    acceptable in Class 264, if the glass is subsequently removed and is not
    part of the final pressed product.


    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    89 for vitrification or firing of a ceramic material when combined with a
    laminating step joining preforms.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions For Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions etc.,  particularly subclasses 751+
    for processes of  heat treating (e.g., calcinating, fusing, indurating,
    roasting, sintering, vaporizing, etc.) to preparing consolidated shaped
    metalliferous charges (e.g., ore, tailings, flue dust, fluxes, etc.) or
    metalliferous treating agents amenable to Class 75 or Class 420 refining or
    alloying operation.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, subclasses 10+ for processes of making
    articles from particulate material containing a metal and nonmetal
    involving pressure and heat (e.g., sintering, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Combined operations involving sintering particulate metal
    and particulate ceramic is proper for Class 419.

    (2)     Note.  If, after Class 419 consolidation of metal particles,
    subsequent processing eliminates completely all free metal from the
    consolidated shaped particulate free metal by total conversion thereof to a
    metal compound or composition (e.g., metal oxide, metal nitride, etc.) as a
    result of firing or sintering outside of the mold under reactive
    conditions, placement is to be considered proper in this section of Class
    264.

    427,    Coating Processes, for processes including the combination of (a)
    firing and coating, or (b) nominal molding, significant coating, and
    firing; regardless of the sequence of the respective steps.  However,
    combinations of (a) significant molding, firing, and coating, or (b)
    nominal shaping and nominal coating are classified in Class 264;regardless
    of the sequence of the respective steps. See this class subclass 129, Note
    (1), for a discussion of shaping and coating combinations.

    (1)     Note.  When sintering or firing of a coated or impregnated fibrous
    material results in decomposition of the fibrous material which acts as a
    shaping surface and production of a noncoated or nonimpregnated shaped
    product, the process will be considered proper for Class 264.

    432,    Heating, subclass 6 for a residual heating process including a step
    of stacking or aligning the objects to be heated and subclasses 258+ for
    means for supporting ceramic work during heating; (i.e., kiln furniture).



    501,    Compositions: Ceramic, appropriate subclass for ceramic
    compositions, per se, and processes of preparing such compositions.

    (1)     Note.  When nominal molding of a Class 501 composition is involved,
    placement in Class 501 is proper if limited to the conditions set forth in
    any one of the following situations:

    (a)     No conditions are specified.

    (b)     Firing for a specified time at a specified temperature (e.g.,
    firing for 10 minutes at 10000F, etc.).

    (c)     Blending or mixing of ingredients of said composition during or
    prior to the molding step and a chemical reaction present.

    (2)     Note.  When molding of a Class 501 composition is involved, Class
    264 is proper if any one of the following situations are present:

    (a)     Significant molding.

    (b)     Nominal molding and specifying firing or sintering temperature
    without specifying time of heating.

    (c)     Nominal molding and raising to specified temperature in a specified
    time (e.g., raising to 10000 F in 10 minutes, etc.).

    (d)     Nominal molding and plural heating steps during or after molding
    (e.g., ramping in stages, etc.).

    (e)     Nominal molding, firing and controlled cooling.

    (f)     Nominal molding and specifying pressure.

    (g)     Nominal molding and blending or mixing ceramic with a temporary
    binder and firing which decomposes the binder.

    (3)     Note.  When there is any doubt concerning placement between Class
    501 and Class 264 concerning nominal molding, resulting from variations not
    addressed by the above notes (1) or (2), original placement will go to
    Class 264 with a mandatory cross-reference to Class 501.

    (4)     Note.  When there is (a) a process claim present that is proper for
    Class 264 and (b) a product claim classifiable as  Class 501 composition
    expressed in terms of starting material, placement of original goes to
    Class 264.  However, when there is (a) a process claim present that is
    proper for Class 264 and (b) a product claim classifiable as a Class 501
    composition expressed in terms of a final processed state (e.g., "sintered"
    composition, etc.), placement of original goes to Class 501.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    252+ for the use of vitrification in the treatment of hazardous or toxic
    waste for purposes of containment.


CLS 264/604
TXT Applying hot isostatic fluid pressure to preform using surrounding liquid
    (e.g., molten glass, melted tin, etc.) or fluid pressure-transmitting
    deformable sheath (e.g., metal foil, etc.):

    Process under subclass 603 wherein the shaped article or preform is
    subjected to (a) hot isostatic pressing by uniformly applying fluid
    pressure thereto through a encompassing liquid (e.g., molten glass, melted
    tin, etc.), or (b) hot isostatic fluid pressing through an encompassing
    transitory plastic or deformable sheath which transmits the compressing
    force isostatically to consolidate the preform without the direct contact
    of the fluid.

    (1)     Note. Since particulate material is not an article or preform,
    consolidating of loose particulate by fluid pressure while encased in a
    transitory plastic or deformable sheath will be considered a molding step
    classifiable elsewhere in this class, such as in subclasses 500+.


CLS 264/605
TXT Particular or specific manner of positioning, arranging, or conveying of
    plural articles or plural preforms (e.g., stacking, utilizing spacer, etc.)
    during sintering, vitrifying, or drying:

    Processes under subclass 603 wherein multiple articles or preforms are
    placed or aligned in a particular manner or are in a particular motion
    other than mere conveying during sintering, vitrifying, or drying.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    671,    for particular or specific manner of positioning, arranging or
    conveying of single article or single preform during firing (e.g.,
    utilizing spacer, etc.)

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 789 for processes of
    arranging articles, per se, for sintering.


CLS 264/606
TXT In a tunnel or channel kiln:

    Processes under subclass 605 wherein an elongated essentially horizonal
    furnace is utilized.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    652,  for sintering or vitrifying of a single article or preform in tunnel
    or channel kiln.


CLS 264/607
TXT Utilizing removable setter or spacing means:

    Process under subclass 605 wherein a temporary support is utilized for
    holding plural articles or plural preforms within a furnace or heating
    means during heat treatment.


CLS 264/608
TXT Utilizing spacing means between stacked articles while heating outside of
    mold:

    Process under subclass 607 wherein, during a heating step outside a mold,
    two or more articles are arranged one above the other with an intervening
    separating means therebetween.


CLS 264/609
TXT Of clay containing block, tile, or brick:

    Process under subclass 605 wherein articles or preforms undergoing
    treatment are hand-sized, usually rectangular, or square building block of
    material containing clay (i.e., an earthy material that is composed of
    hydrous aluminum silicates and other materials that are plastic when moist
    and hard when fired) identified as a block, tile, or brick.

    (1)     Note. Lacking an indication to the contrary, the mere use of block,
    tile, or brick will be considered proper for this subclass, whether or not
    disclosed to contain clay.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    601,    for heat polishing or glazing of clay containing block, tile, or
    brick.

    644,    for process of shaping or treating multilayered or composite block,
    tile, or brick combined with sintering, vitrifying, or firing outside the
    mold.


    680,    for process of otherwise shaping or treating block, tile, or brick
    combined with sintering, vitrifying, or firing outside the mold.


CLS 264/610
TXT Simultaneously burning, vaporizing, or melting of embedded element or core
    to form nonrandom void:

    Process under subclass 603 wherein a specifically located  embedded shaping
    element or core is concurrently decomposed or liquified to provide a
    nonrandom empty region or hole in an article or preform during sintering or
    vitrifying of an article or preform.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

     41+,   for in situ processes of internally forming pores or voids in an
    article or material by occluding or incorporating void forming or void
    producing elements or ingredients randomly throughout the plastic forming
    material.

    (1)     Note.  A binder will not be considered a void forming or void
    producing element or ingredient.


CLS 264/611
TXT Of magnetic (e.g., ferrite, etc.) article or component:

    Process under subclass 603 wherein the article or preform undergoing
    shaping or treatment contains a magnetic material.


CLS 264/612
TXT Using organic binder or organometallic:

    Process under subclass 611 wherein the magnetic article or preform
    undergoing shaping or treatment includes either (a) an organic material
    that serves to hold material together in a temporary or green shape, or (b)
    a compound of metal and an organic material as a transitional precursor to
    the final product.

    (1)     Note. Normally, organic or organometallic compounds will decompose
    before fusing or sintering occurs.  Thus, the mere indication of
    decomposition thereof will not make placement proper under 603, unless the
    other criteria for Class 264 sintering, vitrifying, or partial fusion is
    present.


CLS 264/613
TXT Specifying atmosphere other than air (e.g., oxidizing, inert, 10% Oxygen,
    etc.):

    Process under subclass 611 wherein the composition or chemical
    characteristic of the gaseous environment is identified and is not air.


CLS 264/614
TXT Of electrical article or electrical component (i.e., not insulator, per
    se):

    Process under subclass 603 wherein the article or preform undergoing
    shaping or treatment is an electrical device or an electrical component
    utilized for conducting or controlling electrical current as part of an
    electrical device.

    (1)     Note. An electrical insulator,  per se, will not be considered
    proper for this subclass.


CLS 264/615
TXT Capacitor (e.g., condenser, etc.):

    Process under subclass 614 wherein the electrical article or component
    produced is a device consisting of two conducting surfaces separated by an
    insulating material (e.g., air, glass, etc.) and which device is used to
    store electrical energy or to release stored electrical energy dependent
    upon the potential difference between the separated conducting surfaces,
    thus producing a discharge therebetween to temporarily complete a circuit.


CLS 264/616
TXT Resistor:

    Process under subclass 614 wherein the electrical article or component
    produced is made of a material that has a specified opposition to the flow
    of electrical current and is intended to be used to control the amount of
    electrical current in a circuit.


CLS 264/617
TXT Varistor:

    Process under subclass 616 wherein the resistor varies in resistance
    depending on the amount of electrical current flowing through a circuit.


CLS 264/618
TXT Ceramic containing electrode, or coil; electrode, or coil having ceramic
    portion; or shaped electrolyte body:

    Process under subclass 614 wherein the electrical article or component
    produced is an electrode or coil having at least part of the electrode
    structure adjacent to or composed of ceramic material or shaped solid
    electrolyte.


CLS 264/619
TXT Having patterned metal electrical conductor other than electrode (e.g.,
    printed circuit,  etc.):

    Process under subclass 614 wherein the electrical article or component
    produced includes a configured electrically conductive metal element or
    connection, other than an electrode, that is embedded within or applied
    thereon.


CLS 264/620
TXT Having plural heating steps:

    Process under subclass 614 wherein the process of producing the electrical
    article or component has multiple heating steps.


CLS 264/621
TXT Utilizing sol or gel:

    Process under subclass 603 wherein either (a) a liquid colloidal
    suspension, or (b) a colloid in which the disperse phase has combined with
    the continuous phase to produce a viscous, jelly-like material, is utilized
    at any stage.


CLS 264/622
TXT Unconfined drawing or extending of plastic mass to form article:

    Process under subclass 621 wherein the article is formed by the free and
    unconfined pulling out of a plastic mass.

    (1)     Note. The surface configuration of the article formed is imparted
    solely by the extension and not by coaction of the plastic mass with a
    shape imparting mold surface.

    (2)     Note. Kneading or mulling operations, per se, (e.g., taffy pulling
    type, etc.) are not included herein since a shaped article is not produced.
    See subclass 349 and the notes thereto for such subject matter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164+,   for nonsintering process of unconfined drawing or extending of a
    plastic mass to make an article.

    165+,   for process of forming indefinite length work by other than
    unconfined extension of a plastic mass.

    288.4   and 291+, for processes relating to stretching, per se, of a
    previously shaped article.

    349,    for kneading or mulling operations and see (2) Note above.


CLS 264/623
TXT Shaping by extrusion (e.g., spinning, etc.):

    Process under subclass 621 wherein an article is formed by forcing a supply
    of article forming material through a confining and shaping orifice.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176.1+, for processes of shaping by extrusion that do not involve sintering
    of the formed article outside of a mold.

    634,    for shaping by extrusion of nonsol or nongel materials followed by
    sintering outside the mold.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    subclasses 376.1+ for an extrusion shaping machine for nonmetals; see the
    search notes thereunder.


CLS 264/624
TXT Using organometallic or organosilicon intermediate:

    Process under subclass 603 in which a compound of metal and an organic
    material, or silicon and an organic material is the transitional precursor
    to the final shaped product.

    (1)     Note. Normally, organometallic or organosilicon compounds will
    decompose before fusing or sintering occurs.  Thus, the mere indication of
    decomposition thereof will not make placement proper under 603, unless the
    other criteria of Class 264 sintering, vitrifying, or partial fusion is
    present.


CLS 264/625
TXT Forming carbide or carbonitride containing product:

    Process under subclass 624 wherein a product containing  a binary compound
    of carbon and metal or silicon (e.g., metal carbide, silicon carbide, etc.)
    or tertiary compound of carbon, nitrogen, and metal or silicon (e.g., metal
    carbonitride, silicon carbonitride, iron nitrocarbide, etc.) is produced.


CLS 264/626
TXT Forming nitride or oxynitride containing product:

    Process under subclass 624 wherein a product containing a binary compound
    of nitrogen and metal or silicon (e.g., metal nitride, silicon nitride,
    etc.) or tertiary compound of nitrogen, oxygen, and metal or silicon (e.g.,
    metal oxynitride, silicon oxynitride, etc.) is produced.


CLS 264/627
TXT Forming fiber:

    Process under subclass 624 wherein a relatively small, slender discrete
    mass having length considerably greater than its breadth (i.e.,
    cross-sectional diameter) is produced.


CLS 264/628
TXT Producing microporous article (e.g., filter, etc.):

    Process under subclass 603 for treating an article expressed or claimed as
    having small open or interconnected randomly distributed microvoids or
    producing an article expressed or claimed as having small open or
    interconnected randomly distributed microvoids by uniting particulate
    material.

    (1)     Note.  Impregnating a porous preform (e.g., sponge, etc.) with
    inorganic material followed by sintering outside of the mold to cause
    formation of a porous inorganic body while decomposing the preform which
    acts as a shaping surface is proper under this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41+,    for in situ processes of internally forming pores or voids in an
    article or material by intentionally occluding or incorporating void
    forming or void producing elements or ingredients randomly throughout the
    plastic forming material.

    (1)     Note. Thus, incorporating particulate organic material in an
    inorganic forming material with subsequent burning decomposition of the
    particulate organic material to form random pores in an inorganic product
    would be proper under subclass 44, hereinabove.

    317,    for processes generally which involves the destruction of material
    which may leave a space or void.

    321,    for processes of reshaping previously foamed material.


CLS 264/629
TXT Producing article having plural hollow channels:

    Process under subclass 603 wherein the article produced has plural hollow
    macrostructural channels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    610,    for simultaneously burning, vaporizing, or melting of embedded
    element or core to form nonrandom void.


CLS 264/630
TXT Producing honeycomb shape:

    Process under subclass 629 wherein the article produced has a continuous
    parallel orderly series of open or empty, usually hexagonal, interconnected
    macrostructural cells which resemble a natural honeycomb.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for in situ processes of internally forming pores or voids in an
    article or material by occluding or incorporating void forming or void
    producing elements or ingredients randomly throughout the plastic forming
    material.


CLS 264/631
TXT From cordierite (i.e., 2MgO.2Al2O3.5SiO2, iolite):

    Process under subclass 630 wherein the honeycomb structure is produced from
    cordierite (i.e., 2MgO.2Al2O3.5SiO2, iolite).


CLS 264/632
TXT Producing hollow article (e.g., tube, etc.):

    Process under subclass 603 wherein the article produced has an empty
    indention or inward curve (e.g., tube, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    610,    for simultaneously burning, vaporizing, or melting of embedded
    element or core to form nonrandom void.


CLS 264/633
TXT Producing bowl-like article:

    Process under subclass 632 wherein a hollow concave nontubular, bowl-like
    article (e.g., hemispherical, etc.) is produced.


CLS 264/634
TXT Shaping by Extrusion (e.g., spinning, etc.):

    Process under subclass 632 wherein an article is formed by forcing a supply
    of article forming material through a confining and shaping orifice.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    638,    for shaping nonhollow bodies by extrusion (e.g., spinning, etc.).


CLS 264/635
TXT Utilizing core mandrel:

    Process under subclass 632 wherein a shaping means serves as a center
    around which material is formed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    610,    for processes of simultaneously burning, vaporizing, or melting of
    embedded core to form a nonrandom void.


CLS 264/636
TXT Casting suspension of particles against forming surface:

    Process under subclass 632 wherein a dispersion of particles in a liquid
    vehicle are placed in or on a shaping surface and the liquid vehicle
    removed to produce a shaped article or preform.


CLS 264/637
TXT Removal of liquid component or carrier through porous or absorbent mold
    surface:

    Process under subclass 636 wherein a liquid component or liquid vehicle for
    a moldable material is removed or separated from the material through a
    foamlike or absorbent shaping surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    651,    for removal of liquid component or carrier through porous or
    absorbent mold surface (e.g., slip casting, etc.) to form nonhollow
    articles.


CLS 264/638
TXT Shaping by extrusion (e.g., spinning, etc.):

    Process under subclass 603 wherein an article is formed by forcing a supply
    of article forming material through a confining and shaping orifice.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176.1+, for processes of shaping by extrusion that do not involve sintering
    of the formed article outside of a mold.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    subclasses 376.1+ for an extrusion shaping machine for nonmetals; see the
    search notes thereunder.


CLS 264/639
TXT Of indefinite length product (e.g., sheet, tape, rod, fiber, etc.):

    Process under subclass 638 wherein a continuous, running or indefinite
    length body is formed by an uninterrupted molding step.

    (1)     Note. The final article produced need not be of indefinite length,
    as for example, wherein the continuous, running or indefinite length body
    is cut into predetermined length pieces.

    (2)     Note. Extrusion is generally assumed to produce an indefinite
    length product unless otherwise indicated.


CLS 264/640
TXT Producing fiber containing article or fiber:

    Process under subclass 603 wherein (a) an article is formed which contains
    a relatively small slender discrete mass having length considerably greater
    than its breadth (i.e., cross-sectional diameter), or (b) producing a
    relatively small slender discrete mass having length considerably greater
    than breadth or cross-sectional diameter are produced.


CLS 264/641
TXT Producing uniformly dispersed particulate fiber containing article:

    Process under subclass 640 wherein the article formed contains uniformly
    distributed relatively small, slender discrete particles having length
    considerably greater than its breadth or cross-sectional diameter.


CLS 264/642
TXT Shaping or treating of multilayered, impregnated, or composite-structured
    article:

    Process under subclass 603 which includes forming or treating of an article
    or preform having plural layers, forming an infused or permeated article,
    or having mechanically engaged macrostructural portions.


CLS 264/643
TXT Shaping followed by article coating or impregnating:

    Process under subclass 642 wherein, subsequent to a shaping operation, the
    shaped article is coated or impregnated by applying material thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129+,   for nonsintering or vitrifying processes that combine shaping with
    printing or coating of a workpiece outside the mold.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, for processes including the combination of (a)
    firing and coating, or (b) nominal molding, significant coating, and
    firing; regardless of the sequence of the respective steps.  However,
    combinations of (a) significant molding, firing, and coating, or (b)
    nominal shaping and nominal coating are classified in Class 264; regardless
    of the sequence of the respective steps.


CLS 264/644
TXT Clay containing block, tile, or brick:

    Process under subclass 642 wherein articles or preforms undergoing
    treatment are, often hand-sized, usually rectangular or square, building
    blocks of material containing clay (i.e., an earthy material that is
    composed of hydrous aluminum silicates and other materials that are plastic
    when moist and hard when fired) identified as a block, tile, or brick.

    (1)     Note. Lacking an indication to the contrary, the mere use of block,
    tile, or brick will be considered proper for this subclass, whether or not
    disclosed to contain clay.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    601,    for heat polishing or glazing Of clay containing block, tile, or
    brick.

    609,    for a particular or specific manner of positioning, arranging, or
    conveying of polural clay containing blocks, tiles, or bricks.

    680,    for process of otherwise shaping or treating block, tile, or brick
    combined with sintering, vitrifying, or firing outside the mold.


CLS 264/645
TXT Introducing material under pressure into mold (e.g., injection molding,
    etc.):

    Process under subclass 603 wherein material under pressure from a source
    removed from a closed mold cavity is forced into a closed mold cavity and
    assumes the shape of the interior of the closed cavity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS :

    321.1,  for injection molding without sintering or vitrifying.

    537+,   for injection molding of a hollow blank portion prior to pneumatic
    pressure application to the inside.


CLS 264/646
TXT Utilizing chemically reactive atmosphere other than air, per se, during
    sintering to convert precursor to ceramic material:

    Process under subclass 603 wherein a solid precursor material chemically
    reacts with a gaseous agent, other than air, surrounding the precursor to
    form a new ceramic composition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

     81,    for reactive gas or vapor treatment of work.

     85,    for utilizing special inert gaseous atmosphere.

    664,    for specifying nonreactive heating atmosphere.

    674,    for utilizing specified composition of heating nonreactive
    atmosphere other than air.


CLS 264/647
TXT Nitrogen:

    Process under subclass 646 wherein the reactive gaseous agent is nitrogen.


CLS 264/648
TXT Using oxygen enriched gas or oxidizing atmosphere (i.e., other than air,
    per se):

    Process under subclass 646 wherein the reactive agent is identified as an
    oxygen enriched gas or an oxidizing gas (i.e., other than air, per se.).


CLS 264/649
TXT Utilizing exothermic reaction:

    Process under subclass 603 wherein, during any stage in the process,
    materials are brought into contact with each other or with a suitable
    outside agent, to produce a chemical reaction that generates more heat than
    is required to initiate reaction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, for exothermic compositions.


CLS 264/650
TXT Casting of film (e.g., sheet, tape, etc.):

    Process under subclass 603 wherein a coating of material is applied to a
    flat or nearly flat shaping surface and subsequently removed therefrom.


CLS 264/651
TXT Removal of liquid component or carrier through porous or absorbent mold
    surface (e.g., slip casting, etc.):

    Process under subclass 603 wherein a liquid component or liquid vehicle for
    a moldable material is removed or separated from the material through a
    foamlike or absorbent shaping surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    637,    forforming hollow article by removal of liquid component or carrier
    through porous or absorbent mold surface.


CLS 264/652
TXT Sintering or vitrifying in a tunnel or channel kiln:

    Process under subclass 603 wherein an elongated, essentially horizonal,
    furnace heating means is used to sinter, or vitrify the article or preform.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    606,    for a particular or specific manner of positioning, arranging, or
    conveying of plural articles or plural preforms in a tunnel or channel kiln.


CLS 264/653
TXT Including plural heating steps:

    Process under subclass 603 wherein there are multiple steps or stages of
    heating.


    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are processes in which (a) the
    temperature is varied over a given time span, (b) the preform is subjected
    to two or more distinct heating steps, (c) the product is cooled under
    controlled conditions, or (d) a portion of the product is heated or cooled
    at a different rate than other portions.


CLS 264/654
TXT Including diverse heating of article prior to outside-mold sintering or
    vitrifying:

    Process under subclass 653 which includes at least one  nonsintering or
    nonvitrifying heating step that precedes sintering or vitrifying of the
    article outside of a mold.


CLS 264/655
TXT With article cutting, punching, or grinding:

    Process under subclass 654 which includes a step of cutting, punching, or
    grinding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    678,    for article cutting, punching, or grinding that does not involve
    diverse heating of material or article


CLS 264/656
TXT Including nonsintering burn-off, volatilization, or melting of binder:

    Process under subclass 654 wherein a binder is removed during a
    nonsintering application of heat and wherein the binder is removed by
    burn-off, volatilization, or melting.


CLS 264/657
TXT Of synthetic resin binder:

    Process under subclass 656 wherein the binder is identified as a synthetic
    organic polymer.


CLS 264/658
TXT Including reaction of precursor to form new inorganic compound or
    composition:

    Process under subclass 654 wherein decomposition or combination of original
    material to form a new compound or composition occurs.


CLS 264/659
TXT Forming nitride or oxynitride containing product:

    Process under subclass 658 wherein a product containing a binary compound
    of nitrogen and metal or silicon (e.g., metal nitride, silicon nitride,
    etc.) or tertiary compound of nitrogen, oxygen, and metal or silicon (e.g.,
    metal oxynitride, silicon oxynitride, etc.) is produced.


CLS 264/660
TXT With drying of shaped article or preform using nonsintering heat:

    Process under subclass 654 wherein a liquid solvent or carrier is removed
    from the article or preform by heating in a step distinct from sintering,
    fusing, or vitrifying.


CLS 264/661
TXT With drying, calcining, or sintering of non-shaped particulate:

    Process under subclass 654 which includes heating of nonshaped loose
    particular material outside of a mold for purpose of drying, calcining, or
    sintering.


CLS 264/662
TXT Including diverse heating of article subsequent to sintering:

    Process under subclass 653 which includes at least one  nonsintering
    heating step that follows a sintering or firing step.


CLS 264/663
TXT Subsequent hot pressing (i.e., press molding or by gas pressure):


    Process under subclass 662 wherein the subsequent heating is a step of hot
    mechanical pressing or application of a hot gas pressure greater than
    ambient pressure and temperature.


CLS 264/664
TXT Specified temperature or pressure for hot pressin:

    Process under subclass 663 wherein a numeric value of either (a)
    temperature for pressing, or (b) mold surface pressing pressure or  applied
    gas pressure greater than atmospheric pressure are stated in the claim.


CLS 264/665
TXT Silicon nitride containing product:

    Process under subclass 662 wherein a silicon nitride compound containing
    material is produced or treated.


CLS 264/666
TXT Plural sintering steps having specified temperature (e.g., presintering,
    etc.):

    Process under subclass 653 which has plural sintering steps at least one of
    which occurs at a specified temperature.


CLS 264/667
TXT Including specified molding pressure or controlling of molding pressure
    (e.g., cold isostatic pressing, hydrostatic pressure, etc.):

    Process under subclass 603 wherein a numeric pressure for molding is
    claimed or wherein there is a step of controlling molding pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40.3,   for processes of controlling fluid pressure in direct contact with
    molding material which include a step of sampling, audibly or chemically
    testing or inspecting, or otherwise physically or mechanically determining
    some variable condition in a shaped article, molding material, the mold or
    shaping surface.


CLS 264/668
TXT Producing metal nitride or silicon nitride containing product:

    Process under subclass 667 wherein a binary compound of nitrogen and metal
    or silicon (i.e., metal nitride, or silicon nitride) is produced.


CLS 264/669
TXT Utilizing binder to add green strength to preform:

    Process under subclass 603 wherein a, usually organic, material is utilized
    to join  particulate into a cohering self-sustaining preform capable of
    maintaining shape without disintegration.

    (1)     Note.  During sintering, the shape of this temporary preform (i.e.,
    green body) is retained due to particle-to- particle surface bonding, while
    organic binder is simultaneously removed by volatilization or decomposition.


CLS 264/670
TXT Of synthetic resin binder:

    Process under subclass 669 wherein the binder is a synthetic organic
    polymer.


CLS 264/671
TXT Particular or specific manner of positioning, arranging or conveying of
    single article or preform (e.g.,  utilizing spacer, etc.) during sintering,
    vitrifying, or drying:

    Process under subclass 603 wherein an article or preform is placed or
    aligned in a particular manner or is in a particular motion other than mere
    conveying during sintering,  vitrifying, or drying.

    (1)     Note.  To be placed herein a patent must disclose a particular or
    specific manner of positioning, arranging or conveying. Nominal recitation
    of these steps is not considered to be significant for purposes of this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    605,    Particular or specific manner of positioning, arranging, or
    conveying of plural articles or plural preforms (e.g., stacking, utilizing
    spacer, etc.) during sintering,

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 789 for processes of
    arranging articles, per se, for sintering.


CLS 264/672
TXT To control or compensate shrinkage:

    Process under subclass 671 wherein an expressed purpose for positioning,
    arranging or conveying includes regulating contraction or uneven
    contraction of the article or preform during a heating or cooling operation.


CLS 264/673
TXT Utilizing particulate or sintered particulate packing, or support:

    Process under subclass 671 wherein a particulate material  is utilized to
    support, or partially or fully surround a  shaped article or preform during
    sintering, vitrifying, or drying.


CLS 264/674
TXT Involving specified composition of heating atmosphere other than air:

    Process under subclass 603 wherein the constitution of gaseous environment
    utilized during a heating step is specified, excluding the inherent
    composition of natural air.

    (1)     Note.  Merely, specifying that the heating step takes place in air
    or under atmospheric conditions will not be sufficient for placement under
    this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    646,    Utilizing chemically reactive atmosphere other than air during
    sintering to convert precursor to ceramic material.


CLS 264/675
TXT Containing water vapor:

    Process under subclass 674 wherein the gaseous composition contains water
    vapor, excluding that water vapor which would be naturally present in air.


CLS 264/676
TXT Containing nitrogen gas, noble gas, or inert gas per se:

    Process under subclass 674 wherein a gaseous composition contains either
    nitrogen, a noble gas, or a gaseous environment identified solely as being
    inert; excluding nitrogen gas, noble gas, or inert gas which would
    naturally be present in air.


CLS 264/677
TXT Controlling or directing flow of heated gas or exhaust within heating
    chamber (e.g., sintering furnace, drying chamber, etc.) or against article:

    Process under subclass 603 wherein the circulation of heated gas, or
    expelled gas from a heating chamber (e.g., sintering furnace, drying
    chamber, etc.) or against an article is regulated.


CLS 264/678
TXT With article cutting, punching, or grinding:

    Process under subclass 603 wherein a step of severing, puncturing, or
    abrading of an article or preform occurs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    for nonsintering or vitrifying processes of this class with
    severing, removing material from preform mechanically, or mechanically
    subdividing of workpiece.


CLS 264/679
TXT Of clay containing material:

    Process under subclass 603 wherein an article or preform undergoing shaping
    or treatment is a material containing clay (i.e., an earthy material that
    is composed of hydrous aluminum silicates and other materials that are
    plastic when moist and hard when fired).


CLS 264/680
TXT Clay containing block, tile, or brick:

    Process under subclass 679 wherein articles or preforms undergoing
    treatment are, often hand-sized, usually rectangular or square, building
    blocks of material containing clay (i.e., an earthy material that is
    composed of hydrous aluminum silicates and other materials that are plastic
    when moist and hard when fired) identified as a block, tile, or brick.

    (1)     Note. Lacking an indication to the contrary, the mere use of block,
    tile, or brick will be considered proper for this subclass, whether or not
    disclosed to contain clay.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    601,    for heat polishing or glazing of clay containing block, tile, or
    brick.

    609,    for a particular or specific manner of positioning, arranging, or
    conveying of polural clay containing blocks, tiles, or bricks.

    644,    for process of shaping or treating multi-layered or composite
    block, tile, or brick combined with sintering, vitrifying, or firing
    outside the mold.


CLS 264/681
TXT Producing metal oxide containing product:

    Process under subclass 603 wherein an article or preform undergoing shaping
    or treatment is a material containing a metal oxide.


CLS 264/682
TXT Producing silicon carbide containing product:

    Process under subclass 603 wherein a product containing  a binary compound
    of carbon and silicon is produced.


CLS 264/683
TXT Producing silicon nitride containing product:

    Process under subclass 603 wherein a product containing a binary compound
    of nitrogen and silicon is produced.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS
    RELATED TO SUBJECT MATTER PROVIDED IN CLASS 264, SUBCLASSES 519 THROUGH 574


CLS 264/900
TXT DIRECT APPLICATION OF FLUID PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL TO SHAPE, RESHAPE (I.E.,
    DISTORT), OR SUSTAIN AN ARTICLE OR PREFORM AND HEAT-SETTING (I.E.,
    CRYSTALLIZING OF STRETCHED OR MOLECULARLY ORIENTED PORTION) THEREOF:

    Cross-reference art collection directed to a process under the class
    definition wherein (a) elongation or molecular alignment of at least a
    portion of a workpiece occurs when positive or negative fluid pressure
    differential is applied through a medium of liquid or gas in direct contact
    with the workpiece, and the elongated or aligned portion of the workpiece
    is heated to stabilize the shape thereof by crystallizing; or (b) the shape
    of a  previously elongated or molecularly oriented workpiece is maintained
    by application of a positive or negative fluid pressure differential while
    the workpiece is heated to stabilize the shape thereof by crystallizing.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass, crystallizing refers to the establishment
    of a long range order within the polymeric mass wherein intermolecular
    attractions (e.g., hydrogen bonding, Van der Vaal forces, etc.) stabilize
    the polymeric chains into a regular lattice often typified by a
    characteristic X-ray diffraction pattern.

    (2)     Note.  Heat-setting improves stabilization of blow-molded or
    vacuum-formed articles against shrinkage or deformation when in use in an
    elevated temperature environment.


CLS 264/901
TXT Heat-setting of stretched or molecularly oriented article formed from
    planar preform (e.g., sheet, film, etc.):

    Process under cross-reference art collection 900 wherein (a) differential
    fluid pressure is used to cause stretching or molecular orientation of at
    least a portion of a planar preform, and (b) at least part of the stretched
    or oriented portion is subjected to heat-setting.


CLS 264/902
TXT Production of continuous length:

    Processes under cross-reference art collection 900 in which a product of
    indefinite length is produced.


CLS 264/903
TXT Heat-setting and simultaneous differential heating of stretched or
    molecularly oriented section of article or preform:

    Process under cross-reference art collection 900 wherein subsequent to
    elongating or molecularly orienting using differential fluid pressure, the
    stretched or molecularly oriented workpiece is simultaneously heat-set and
    subjected to differential heat treatment such that one section of the
    stretched or oriented portion of the workpiece is subjected to a higher
    temperature than another section of the stretched or oriented portion of
    the workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  If there is a heat differential between an unoriented neck
    portion of an article and an oriented portion of the same article,
    placement under this subclass is improper unless there is also a heat
    differential within the oriented (i.e., non-neck) portion of the article.


CLS 264/904
TXT Maintaining article in fixed shape during heat-setting:

    Process under cross-reference art collection 900 wherein the shape of a
    previously stretched or molecularly oriented workpiece is sustained by
    application of a positive or negative fluid pressure differential while the
    workpiece undergoes heat-setting.


CLS 264/905
TXT Having plural, distinct differential fluid pressure shaping steps:

    Process under cross-reference art collection 900 in which there are at
    least two separate shaping or reshaping steps caused by application of
    differential fluid pressure.


CLS 264/906
TXT And heat-shrinking outside of mold including subsequent re-expanding of
    shrunken article using differential fluid pressure:

    Process under cross-reference art collection 904 wherein a stretched or
    molecularly oriented workpiece is heated, outside of a mold, to contract at
    least one dimension thereof, thus forming a shrunken article; and
    thereafter applying a differential fluid pressure to enlarge the shrunken
    article.


CLS 264/907
TXT DIRECT APPLICATION OF FLUID PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL TO SHAPE, RESHAPE (I.E.,
    DISTORT), OR SUSTAIN AN ARTICLE OR PREFORM AND CRYSTALLIZING OF
    NONSTRETCHED OR MOLECULARLY UNORIENTED PORTION THEREOF:

    Cross-reference art collection directed to a process under the class
    definition wherein (a) a positive or negative fluid pressure differential
    is applied through a medium of liquid or gas in direct contact with a
    workpiece to form, reform, or sustain the workpiece, and (b) the workpiece
    is treated to crystallize only a nonelongated or molecularly unoriented
    portion thereof.

    (1)     Note. In this subclass, crystallizing refers to the establishment
    of a long range order within the polymeric mass wherein intermolecular
    attractions (e.g., hydrogen bonding, Van der Vaal forces, etc.) stabilize
    the polymeric chains into a regular lattice often typified by a
    characteristic X-ray diffraction pattern.

    (2)     Note.  In this subclass, crystallizing is not limited to use of
    heating or cooling.  Thus, utilization of only pressure to crystallize
    would be proper hereunder.


CLS 264/908
TXT Crystallizing of neck portion of hollow article or hollow preform:

    Process under cross-reference art collection 907 wherein crystallizing
    occurs at least in a hollow neck region of a hollow workpiece.


CLS 264/909
TXT DIRECT APPLICATION OF FLUID PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL TO STRETCH AN ARTICLE OR
    PREFORM AND HEAT SHRINKING OF STRETCHED ARTICLE OR PREFORM:

    Cross-reference art collection directed to a process under the class
    definition wherein (a) elongation of a workpiece occurs when a positive or
    negative fluid pressure differential is applied through a medium of a
    liquid or gas in direct contact with the workpiece, and (b) the resulting
    elongated workpiece is heated to contract at least one dimension thereof,
    thus forming a shrunken article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    900+,   for heat-setting of stretched or molecularly oriented articles.

    906+,   for crystallizing of a nonstretched or molecularly unoriented
    portion of a workpiece.


CLS 264/910
TXT SINTERING TO PRODUCE TRANSLUCENT INORGANIC ARTICLE:

    Cross-reference art collection under the class definition for process of
    producing an inorganic article which permits passage of diffused light such
    that objects are not clearly seen therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.1+,   for optical article shaping or treating processes directed to
    forming articles capable of producing an optical effect.


CLS 266/
TTL METALLURGICAL APPARATUS

CLS 266/
TXT This class provides for apparatus for: a) enriching metal bearing ores, b)
    extracting metals from their source materials, c) refining, purifying or
    otherwise treating molten or liquefied metals where such treatment is not
    elsewhere provided for, d) melting metals and e) establishing desired
    physical or chemical properties in solid metal objects, and for
    subcombinations peculiar to such apparatus.  This class also provides for
    methods of operating such apparatus where not elsewhere provided for.

    (1)     Note.  Patents issued prior to 1945 have not in all instances been
    classified by their claimed disclosure so the placement of these older
    patents does not necessarily indicate lines of classification.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 33+, for article assembly means combined
    with means to metallurgically treat the assembled article.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclass,
    for apparatus for contacting a solid with a gas not elsewhere provided for:
     See especially subclasses 576+, for fluidized beds of granular material
    where the fluidizing agent is a treating gas.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, appropriate subclass, for processes of or
    apparatus for glass working or treating.

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclass, for a method or an apparatus
    including a step of or a means for maintaining or modifying the temperature
    of the work subjected to the metal shaping operation where:

    a)      nominally recited means are provided to alter the temperature of
    the work in some unspecified manner.

    b)      specific heating means are provided which merely condition the work
    to perfect the shaping, or

    c)      nominal annealing means are provided where the annealing is for the
    purpose of relieving work stresses or to facilitate working.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, appropriate subclasses for consolidating metalliferous material,
    or extracting, refining or melting metals. While Class 266 provides for
    certain methods of operating metallurgical apparatus, those patents which
    recite a step of treating an ore or molten metal or of altering the
    parameters effecting such a treatment, e.g., temperature, oxygen content,
    will not be found in Class 266, unless such a method is less comprehensive
    than the apparatus.  The methods provided for in Class 266 are merely of an
    operational nature and contain no treatment steps. The order of superiority
    among various metal, alloy, and metal stock areas and methods of
    manufacture involving them is as follows:

    1.      Class 419, Powder Metallurgy Processes.

    2.      Class 148, Metal Treatment, subclasses 22+, compositions for
    treatment of solid metal.

    3.      Class 75, Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use
    Therein, Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal
    Particulate Mixtures, subclasses 300, 301, and 303+, gaseous, liquid or
    solid treating compositions for liquid metal or charges, and subclass 302,
    welding rod defined by composition.

    4.      Class 75, Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use
    Therein, Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal
    Particulate Mixtures, subclasses 228+, consolidated metal powder
    compositions and subclasses 255+, loose metal particulate mixtures.

    5.      Class 420, Alloys or Metallic Compositions, claimed as products.

    6.      Class 148, Metal Treatment, subclasses 95-122, 194-287, and
    500-714, in class schedule order, providing for certain processes of
    treating solid or semi-solid metal by modifying or maintaining the internal
    physical structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical properties of metal,
    processes of reactive coating of metal or processes of chemical-heat
    removing (e.g., flame-cutting etc.) or burning of metal.  However, if metal
    casting, fusion bonding, machining, or working is involved, there is a
    requirement of significant heat treatment as described in section III, A,
    of the Class 148 definition.

    7.      Class 148, Metal Treatment, subclasses 33+, barrier layer stock
    material and subclasses 400+, stock.

    8.      Class 75, Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use
    Therein, Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal
    Particulate Mixtures, subclasses 331+, processes of making solid
    particulate alloys directly from liquid metal and subclasses 343+,
    processes of producing or purifying alloys in powder form.

    9.      Class 75, Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use
    Therein, Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal
    Particulate Mixtures, subclasses 10.1+ and 10.67, processes of making
    alloys by electrothermic, electromagnetic, or electrostatic processes.

    10.     Class 420, Alloys or Metallic Compositions, processes of
    manufacture.

    11.     Class 75, Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use
    Therein, Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal
    Particulate Mixtures, subclasses 330+, processes of making metal and
    processes of treating liquid metals and liquid alloys and consolidating
    metalliferous material.

    12.     Class 204, Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, processes.

    13.     Class 164, Metal Founding, subclasses 1+, processes.

    14.     Class 266, Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 44+, processes of
    operating metallurgical apparatus.

    This list is not complete and may be added to as the proper relationship of
    other areas as determined.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, for apparatus for gas separation, per
    se (e.g., electrostatic precipitators, etc.).  Because Class 96 is
    subcombinational in character, the combination of a metallurgical treating
    apparatus with a gas separation means will be found in Class 266.

    110,    Furnaces, appropriate subclass, for furnaces of general utility,
    especially subclasses 235+, for incinerators for the disposal of waste
    material, which incinerators may have structure to render a molten
    material, including metals, disposable.  Class 266 provides for furnaces
    specialized for extracting a desired metallic constituent from a source of
    such metal, which source could be waste material.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 58+, for coating apparatus combined
    with heating means for drying the coating or for effecting a metallurgical
    treatment, e.g., annealing, of a coated article or of an article which is
    about to be coated.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 6.6, for tuyeres cooled by
    a liquid circulating in a closed path, see subclass 270 of this class (266)
    for a further statement of the line, and subclass 7, for waste heat
    boilers, per se, or combined with a nominally recited converter and for
    hoods which are cooled by a liquid circulating in a closed path.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclass, for
    metal quenching apparatus, per se.  See the search note to 134 in subclass
    114 of this class (266) for a more complete statement of the line between
    the classes.

    148,    Metal Treatment, appropriate subclasses for processes of treating
    solid or semi-solid metal to modify or maintain the internal physical
    structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical property of metal and
    appropriate subclasses for processes of chemical-heat removing (e.g., flame
    cutting, etc.) or burning (i.e., oxidizing) of a metal workpiece.  While
    Class 266 provides for certain methods of operating a metallurgical
    apparatus, it does not provide for a combined operation that includes
    subject matter proper for Class 148.

    164,    Metal Founding, appropriate subclass, for metallurgical apparatus
    combined with metal casting means.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses, especially 9.1+, for air
    heaters and other heat exchange devices which transfer heat in an indirect
    manner, that is through a body or wall that physically separates the
    fluids, or which employs a heat storing mass.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclass, for conveyors or
    for conveyors combined with nominal treating apparatus, Class 198 provides
    for cooling beds for metal bars, including those beds which have means to
    turn the bars while they are being conveyed to keep the bars straight,
    provided no additional treating structure is claimed in more than a nominal
    fashion.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, appropriate subclass, for distilling
    apparatus not elsewhere provided for.  See Note III B7 in the class
    definitions of Class 202 for a statement of the line between Class 202 and
    Class 266.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclass, for nonchemical types of separation employing the use of amalgams
    or magnet lines of force, and subclasses 11 and 182, for separating
    apparatus combined with heating means.

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclass, especially subclasses 50+,
    for electric heaters specialized to heat metal objects.  Patents which
    claim an electric heater combined with a quenching device are placed as an
    original in Class 266 and are cross-referenced into the appropriate heater
    subclass in Class 219.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 591+, especially subclasses 592+ for ladles
    or tundishes used to dispense molten metals.  Such dispensing vessels may
    include means to treat the molten metal where such a treatment is solely
    ancillary to and supportive of the dispensing operation, e.g., spout
    heaters to prevent clogging of the vessel outlet.  If other treating
    structure is provided, e.g., additional heater remote from the outlet, or
    if the vessel is a metallurgical furnace, the patent should be placed in
    this class (266).

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclass,
    specially subclasses 132+, for lances, per se, and for nozzles of general
    utility.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate subclass,
    especially subclasses 65+, for comminuting or disintegrating means, per se,
    or combined with heating means which do not effect a change in the chemical
    nature of the material being treated.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 30, for methods of forming or repairing furnace linings by
    shaping, e.g., molding, fluent refractory material.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, for furnaces having specific
    electric heating means, except as noted below, or for such furnaces
    combined with such additional treating structure, e.g., condensers, as is
    provided for in Class 373.  Class 266 takes patents having claims to
    electric furnaces where no electric heating structure is recited and where
    that structure would be useful in other types of metallurgical furnaces.
    Class 266 also provides for metallurgical furnaces having specific electric
    heating means where additional means are recited for introducing reactant
    materials, e.g., tuyeres.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 147+ for the combination
    of a chamber of a type utilized for a heating function and material
    charging or discharging means therefor. Specific furnace structure is
    included there (147+) only when its sole purpose is to facilitate the
    movement of material to or from the furnace.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 255+ for apparatus not elsewhere
    provided for, for extracting inorganic chemical elements or compounds from
    their source material.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    appropriate subclass, especially subclass 222, for means to shape or
    agglomerate particles of ore into pellets or balls which may be combined
    with additional treating means to improve or complete the shaping, e.g.,
    heaters, other than sintering or indurating means, which merely dry or
    harden the shaped article, and subclass 78, for means to form and sinter a
    mass of powdered metal.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 544+ for stock
    material which is all metal or has adjacent metal components, especially
    subclasses 546+ for such material containing metal particles.

    432,    Heating, appropriate subclass, for heating apparatus of general
    utility. Class 432 also takes reheat furnaces which elevate the temperature
    of a metal object to facilitate some subsequent treatment of the object,
    e.g., bending, provided that no means for providing or circulating a
    treating or protecting gas is claimed.  See the search note to Class 266 in
    the class definitions for Class 432 for a further statement of the line
    between the two classes.


CLS 266/44
TXT Methods of operating metallurgical apparatus under the class definition
    which are solely directed to those steps of operating such an apparatus
    which do not effect a chemical or physical change in the work being treated.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of the types of methods to be found herein are
    methods of cooling a furnace or some part thereof, a method of operating
    tuyeres in a certain sequence where no metallurgical action is attributable
    to such an operation, methods of plugging furnaces and like treating
    vessels not elsewhere provided for, methods of tapping a vessel, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Only those patents which contain claims to methods not
    elsewhere provided for should be placed in this or the indented subclasses
    as either an original or a cross-reference.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, appropriate subclasses for methods of treating ores extracting,
    refining or melting metals.

    148,    Metal Treatment, appropriate subclasses for processes of treating
    solid or semi-solid metal to modify or maintain the internal physical
    structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical property of metal.


CLS 266/45
TXT Method under subclass 44 for closing or opening apertures in the walls of
    metallurgical apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  An example of the type of process to be found herein is a
    method of operating a mud gun to seal or plug a blast furnace tap hole.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    271+,   for apparatus for plugging or tapping apertures in metallurgical
    furnaces.


CLS 266/46
TXT Method under subclass 44 for maintaining the temperature of a metallurgical
    apparatus or some portion thereof within a desired range.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    190+    and 241, for metallurgical furnaces and other treating apparatus
    having means to cool such furnaces or apparatus.

    270,    for water cooled tuyeres, see search note to Class 122 contained
    therein.


CLS 266/47
TXT Method under subclass 44 for operating short tubular means adapted to be
    mounted in wall of a metallurgical apparatus for injecting fluents therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186+    and 218+, for tuyeres combined with treating vessel structure.

    265+,   for tuyere structure, per se.


CLS 266/48
TXT Device under the class definition including means for severing a metal or
    removing a portion thereof with a flame by supplying an excess of oxygen to
    the heated metal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, for solid fuel burners, per se, and particularly
    subclasses 260+ for torches which burn both solid and liquid fuels.

    148,    Metal Treatment, appropriate subclasses for processes of
    chemical-heat removing (e.g., flame cutting, etc.) or burning (i.e.,
    oxidizing) of a metal workpiece.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 11+ for a process or
    means for forming a hole in the earth by directly applying heat to fluidize
    or comminute the material forming the earth, and particularly subclass 14
    for such process or apparatus in which the heat is produced by combustion
    in a confined chamber having a restricted orifice.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, appropriate subclass, for welding apparatus
    which apply heat to the members to be bonded together.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclass,
    for tips or nozzles which dispense combustibles where no feature or
    structure is recited which specializes the tip for cutting or burning.

    431,    Combustion, appropriate subclass, for a residual fuel burner, per
    se.


CLS 266/49
TXT Device under subclass 48 including gas or liquid means for collecting or
    ensnaring refuse material generated by the flame cutting of the workpiece.


CLS 266/50
TXT Device under subclass 48 including means for severing or removing a portion
    of a workpiece as it emerges from a continuous casting facility.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 263, for a continuous casting apparatus
    combined with means to sever the cast workpiece.


CLS 266/51
TXT Device under subclass 48 wherein means are provided to cut defects from the
    face of a workpiece.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 194+ for processes of chemical-heat
    removing (e.g., flame cutting, etc.) or burning (i.e., oxidizing) which
    includes desurfacing or gouging operations utilizing said chemical-heat
    removing.


CLS 266/52
TXT Device under subclass 51 including a multiplicity of cutting torches
    arranged such that their flames concurrently impinge against plural faces
    of an article to remove surface defects therefrom.


CLS 266/53
TXT Device under subclass 51 including a means adapted to engage the face of
    the workpiece to position the torch means a predetermined distance
    therefrom.


CLS 266/54
TXT Device under subclass 48 including a means adapted to sever a pipelike
    article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 194+ for processes of chemical-heat
    removing (e.g., flame cutting, etc.) or burning (i.e., oxidizing) which
    includes traversely cutting metal tubes utilizing said chemical-heat
    removing.


CLS 266/55
TXT Device under subclass 54 wherein the torch supporting means is attached to
    the interior of the tubular article.


CLS 266/56
TXT Device under subclass 54 including means to propel the severing means over
    and around the peripheral surface of the tubular article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    82,     Turning, subclasses 59+, for cutting implements which are
    circumrotated about a workpiece.


CLS 266/57
TXT Device under subclass 54 including means to revolve the tubular article
    about its longitudinal axis.


CLS 266/58
TXT Device under subclass 48 having means for storing operating instructions
    which means cause the cutting means to move in a predetermined path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 18.1+, for pattern-tracing
    devices.

    82,     Turning, subclasses 11+ and 55, for cutting implements of the type
    provided for in that class combined with pattern-control means.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 79+ for a
    pattern-controlled milling machine, see the notes thereunder for additional
    searches.


CLS 266/59
TXT Device under subclass 58 wherein the stored operating instructions are
    contained on a ribbon-like memory.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 79+ for a
    pattern-controlled milling machine, see the notes thereunder for additional
    searches.


CLS 266/60
TXT Device under subclass 58 wherein the information storing means includes a
    planer surface having a control pattern inscribed thereon and means are
    provided to scan said surface to sense and follow the outline of the
    pattern.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of devices to be found herein are devices having
    photoelectric or magnetic reading heads which scan mechanical drawings to
    follow lines drawn thereon.


CLS 266/61
TXT Device under subclass 58 including means revolving the workpiece about an
    axis.


CLS 266/62
TXT Device under subclass 58 including a means for holding the cutting means
    having a plurality of segments pivotally joined to one another.


CLS 266/63
TXT Device under subclass 62 having plural arms pivotally interconnected for
    parallel movement.


CLS 266/64
TXT Device under subclass 58 wherein the information storing means includes a
    patterning cam which is located above and out of contact with the piece to
    be cut.


CLS 266/65
TXT Device under subclass 48 wherein a lattice-type surface is provided which
    holds the article to be cut against the effects of gravity.


CLS 266/66
TXT Device under subclass 48 wherein the torch includes means by which an
    operator can engage the torch to manipulate and partially support the same
    and wherein the supporting structure is adapted to travel upon the surface
    of the work being cut.


CLS 266/67
TXT Device under subclass 48 wherein the cutting means is carried by a
    supporting means which is provided with wheels.


CLS 266/68
TXT Device under subclass 67 including a means adapted to engage the face of
    the workpiece to position the blow pipe a predetermined distance therefrom.


CLS 266/69
TXT Device under subclass 67 wherein the wheeled supporting means is adapted to
    extend across the workpiece, having the supporting wheels engaging surfaces
    adjacent to opposite sides of the workpiece.


CLS 266/70
TXT Device under subclass 48 provided with means constraining the cutting means
    to follow an accurate path.


CLS 266/71
TXT Device under subclass 48 wherein the cutting means is provided with
    supporting structure which is adapted to entirely rest upon and be
    exclusively sustained by a surface of the work.


CLS 266/72
TXT Device under subclass 48 wherein the cutting means is supported on a
    projecting structure which is supported at only one end.


CLS 266/73
TXT Device under subclass 72 wherein the projecting structure is in turn
    carried by a mobile mount.


CLS 266/74
TXT Device under subclass 48 wherein means are provided to supply material
    which will enhance the cutting operation.


CLS 266/75
TXT Device under subclass 74 wherein the material supplied is in the form of
    discrete units of hard matter.

    (1)     Note.  Rod and bar feeders will be found herein, likewise, means
    feeding a pulverulent or granular material will also be found herein.


CLS 266/76
TXT Device under subclass 48 including means for controlling the position of
    the cutting means with respect to the workpiece surface in response to
    variations in the distance between the cutting means and said surface.


CLS 266/77
TXT Device under subclass 48 including means adapted to affix the cutting means
    to its supporting means.


CLS 266/78
TXT Device under class definition wherein the treating apparatus is provided
    with means to regulate the operation of the apparatus which means react to
    means which perceive a characteristic or a change in a characteristic of
    either the treated material or the treating apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    432,    Heating, subclasses 36+, for heating devices of general utility
    having condition-responsive control structure associated therewith.


CLS 266/79
TXT Device under subclass 78 wherein the control means reacts to means
    measuring a characteristic of a specimen taken from the work.


CLS 266/80
TXT Device under subclass 78 wherein a) the control means is responsive to
    means which determine the chemical composition of the treated material or a
    by-product of the treatment or b) information from the sensors is fed to an
    information storage device wherein additional information is determined
    which additional information is then utilized to control the treatment.

    (1)     Note.  Servomechanisms, i.e., automatic control devices in which
    the output is constantly or intermittently compared with the input through
    feedback so that the error or difference between the two quantities can be
    used to bring about the desired control, are classified with their
    appropriate sensing devices.


CLS 266/81
TXT Device under subclass 78 wherein means are provided for the controlled
    addition of a solid, liquid or gaseous substance to the treating apparatus,
    which substance then reacts with the material contained therein.


CLS 266/82
TXT Device under subclass 81 wherein means are provided for proportioning the
    supply of a multiplicity of streams based upon a condition sensed in any of
    the streams or in the treating apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 87.01+, for self-proportioning or
    correlating fluid-handling systems.


CLS 266/83
TXT Device under subclass 82 wherein the control means is responsive to means
    which perceive the amount or volume of the fluent flowing through the
    apparatus in a given time.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 100+, for fluid-handling systems having
    means to sense differences between the rates of flow in a plurality of
    correlated flow lines.


CLS 266/84
TXT Device under subclass 82 wherein means are provided which are responsive to
    the perceived humidity of one of the streams.


CLS 266/85
TXT Device under subclass 81 wherein means are provided for the control of a
    plurality of fluent- supply means, each of which has a condition-
    responsive flow regulating means therein, whereby the volume or flow rate
    of each stream can be independently regulated in response to a sensed
    condition.


CLS 266/86
TXT Device under subclass 81 wherein means are provided to control the attitude
    or displacement of the means supplying the treating agent to the treating
    apparatus, e.g., a lance height control apparatus.


CLS 266/87
TXT Device under subclass 78 wherein the control means is responsive to a
    variation in sensible heat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, appropriate
    subclass, for control systems employing thermostats and other
    heat-responsive switches.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    appropriate subclass, for temperature-responsive switches.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 125 for a radiation
    thermometer with fluid flow purging, and subclasses 139+ for a molten metal
    thermometer.


CLS 266/88
TXT Device under subclass 87 wherein the control means is responsive to the
    sensed temperature of a fluid, e.g., gas, liquid, bath of molten metal.


CLS 266/89
TXT Device under subclass 78 wherein the control means is responsive to a
    variation in the force per unit area existing within the treating apparatus
    or in lines connected thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 700+, for pressure-indicating
    devices.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 81+, for
    switches that are responsive to fluid pressure.


CLS 266/90
TXT Device under subclass 78 wherein the control means reacts to means sensing
    a physical, chemical, or mechanical characteristic of the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    432,    Heating, subclass 45, for heating devices of general utility having
    means to sense work movement, quality or position.


CLS 266/91
TXT Device under subclass 90 wherein the control means is responsive to a) the
    mass of treated material at a specified location on the treating apparatus
    or b) the mass per unit volume of treated material at a specified position
    in the treating apparatus.


CLS 266/92
TXT Device under subclass 90 wherein the control means is responsive to the
    attitude of the treated material.

    (1)     Note.  Devices wherein a sensor is used to sense the height of
    material in a furnace are classified herein.


CLS 266/93
TXT Device under subclass 92 wherein the control means is responsive to the
    entrance or exit of the treated material from a particular position in the
    apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  Devices which have means which sense the presence of a
    workpiece which has been conveyed to the device and which means actuate the
    device are classified herein.


CLS 266/94
TXT Device under subclass 93 wherein the control means is responsive to means
    perceiving the surface of a molten material in a container.


CLS 266/95
TXT Device under subclass 94 wherein the surface- sensing means incorporates a
    buoyant-sensing means.


CLS 266/96
TXT Device under class definition wherein the control means is provided with a)
    means for storing coded instructions or other data necessary to regulate
    the operation of the treating apparatus, b) means repetitively regulating
    the sequence of operational steps performed in or by the treating apparatus
    or, c) means for determining the time at which an operation occurs or
    length of time taken to perform such an operation.

    (1)     Note.  The type of cyclic control to be found herein includes limit
    switch arrangements of the interlock type which control the sequence of
    operation based on the movement of apparatus elements to specific
    locations, e.g., the closing or opening of a door, the movement of a mud
    gun to an advanced position, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    432,    Heating, subclass 51, for heating devices of general utility having
    timing, programming or cyclic control means; further see the search notes
    attached to subclass 51 for additional search areas.


CLS 266/97
TXT Device under subclass 96 wherein the control means is provided with means
    for controlling the time at which an operation occurs or the length of time
    in which said operation is performed.


CLS 266/98
TXT Device under subclass 97 wherein the timer includes a rotatable,
    cyclindrical or circular member and an associated information pick-up
    means, which member is provided with means storing the information
    necessary to control the operation of the apparatus such that control
    signals are generated through the interaction of the rotated member and the
    associated pick-up means.


CLS 266/99
TXT Device under class definition wherein means are provided which a)
    automatically make a permanent record of selected events occurring during
    the operation of said device, b) display information concerning the
    condition of the device or a material therein, c) provide for the
    examination of selected portions of the device or material therein, or d)
    gauge or otherwise determine a physical, chemical, or electrical
    characteristic or property of the device or material therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    432,    Heating, subclass 32, for heating devices of general utility having
    indicating, illuminating or inspection means; for additional search areas,
    see the search notes attached to the subclass definition of subclass 32.


CLS 266/100
TXT Device under subclass 99 wherein means are provided for the visual
    examination of a portion of the device.


CLS 266/101
TXT Device under the class definition wherein a means for extracting a metal
    from an ore or concentrate is provided having first means for contacting
    the ore or concentrate with a suitable solvent, and second means for
    rendering the dissolved metal insoluble in its carrier solvent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 711+ for producing metal using nonmetallic material
    which is liquid under standard conditions

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 177+, for
    purification or separation of general utility with the addition of heat and
    additional fluid for treatment and subclasses 198.1+, for liquid
    purification or separation with means to add an additional treating
    material.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 255+ for leaching apparatus.


CLS 266/102
TXT Device under the class definition wherein either a) a plurality of discrete
    articles are joined together so as to form an uninterrupted supply or b) an
    object of indeterminate length is fed into a zone wherein the articles or
    object is operated on to enhance the physical, metallurgical or chemical
    properties thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Devices which are solely disclosured for annealing or
    patenting of a continuous strip, rod, sheet or web of metal are classified
    in Class 266.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 65, 67 and 68 for means to anneal or
    temper a running length of metal combined with means to apply a metallic
    coating to the running length, e.g., galvanizing.

    148,    Metal Treatment, appropriate subclasses for processes of treating a
    running length os solid or semi-solid metal to modify or maintain the
    internal physical structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical property of
    metal.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses,
    for method of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.

    432,    Heating, subclass 8, for a process including passing a continuous
    strip longitudinally through a heating zone and subclass 59, for heating
    apparatus having advancing structure flexing, looping or coiling a sheet,
    web or strand.  See the search notes to the class definition of Class 432
    for a more complete statement of the line between these classes.


CLS 266/103
TXT Device under subclass 102 wherein means are provided to elevate the
    temperature of the object being treated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 155, for electric-heating means
    specialized to treat material of indeterminate length.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 59+, for heating means of general utility
    specialized to treat a running length of material.


CLS 266/104
TXT Device under subclass 103 wherein a plurality of electrical contacts
    physically bear against the object to be treated and the object is heated
    by passing an electric current through that portion of the object located
    between the contacts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 50+, especially subclass 71, for
    electric-heating means which heat bypasses current directly through the
    body to be heated.


CLS 266/105
TXT Device under subclass 103 wherein the object being treated consists of a
    multiplicity of individual units or blanks which are fastened together by
    removable clips, or the like, to form a continuous composite article for
    treatment.


CLS 266/106
TXT Device under subclass 103 wherein the object being treated is formed into
    looped coils which lie in a substantially horizontal plane.


CLS 266/107
TXT Device under subclass 103 wherein the heating means comprises a body of
    molten material, e.g., lead bath or salt bath.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for apparatus which contacts discrete solid metal objects with a
    molten material.


CLS 266/108
TXT Device under subclass 103 wherein the object is heated by passing it
    through a heated receptacle having means therein to maintain the object out
    of direct contact with any source of heat or gases evolved thereby.


CLS 266/109
TXT Device under subclass 103 wherein the heated object is further treated by
    physically contacting it with a solid object which is at a lower
    temperature than the heated object.


CLS 266/110
TXT Device under subclass 103 wherein means are provided to introduce,
    maintain, or generate a particular gaseous atmosphere within a chamber
    wherein an object is treated.


CLS 266/111
TXT Device under subclass 103 wherein the heated object is further treated by
    the application of a liquid or gaseous medium to the object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121+,   for means to heat a metal object and contact the object with a
    liquid.

    251+,   for means to heat a metal object and contact the object with a gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclass 122, for
    apparatus for contacting a running length of work with a liquid.


CLS 266/112
TXT Device under subclass 111 wherein the fluid medium is a body of liquid,
    e.g., water or oil.


CLS 266/113
TXT Device under subclass 111 wherein the fluid medium is a projected liquid.


CLS 266/114
TXT Device under the class definition wherein an apparatus is provided for
    treating either a metallic article or a metal bearing ore which is in a
    hardened form by applying a liquid thereto.

    (1)     Note.  The term "solid" as used herein includes within its purview
    granular or pulverulent material which is composed of discrete solid
    particles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, for cleaning and liquid
    contact apparatus of the type stated below as going to Class 134, where a
    brush, wiper, scraper, suction, or gas blast cleaning means or a squeegee
    is part of the combination.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses, for apparatus for
    coating metal work including apparatus for performing a coating process in
    which a chemical reaction occurs.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, for solid metal cleaning
    and pickling processes, per se, i.e., not combined with any other
    solid-metal treating operations.  This class also has apparatus for
    cleaning and pickling solid metal combined with such means for handling or
    operating upon the solid metal as are necessary for the cleaning or
    pickling operations.  Class 266 has apparatus for heating solid metal by
    contact with molten solids for heat treating the solid metal, Class 134
    having no apparatus disclosed for this purpose.  Class 134 also has
    apparatus for contacting solid metals with liquid for other purposes (as
    quenching) where the means claimed pertain to the applying of the liquids
    and only such means for manipulating or handling of the solid metal as are
    required to present the metal to, move or support it during, and/or remove
    it from the means that applies the liquids.  Apparatus involving, in
    addition to the cleaning or liquid-contact means, means for the purpose of
    preventing warping, straightening, forming by any manufacturing means (note
    stretching below) or separate heating, is considered to be beyond the scope
    of Class 134 and is in Class 266. Separating material from solid metal by
    heating only (as distinguished from the application of liquids which
    liquids may be heated) has not been placed in Class 134, but remains in
    Class 266 or other appropriate heating class.  In the case of strip or
    strand material, Class 134 has apparatus which involve means for uncoiling,
    coiling, or temporarily distorting the material to feed and/or discharge
    such material during the cleaning or liquid contact operation, and also has
    means to stitch (as by welding, for example) or otherwise fasten one piece
    to another to make the operation continuous with or without means to
    subsequently cut the material into sections.  Further, apparatus for
    contacting only certain areas of a metal body with a liquid to selectively
    harden the body will be found in this class (266).

    148,    Metal Treatment, appropriate subclasses for processes of quenching
    or utilizing liquid contact with metal to modify or maintain the internal
    physical structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical property of metal.


CLS 266/115
TXT Device under subclass 114 including means to alter the configuration of the
    object to be treated prior to or during the liquid contact.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 38, 39 and 46, for gas or liquid
    contact with a metal prior to plastically shaping it, for the purpose of
    protecting, cleaning or coating the metal and subclass 201, for deforming
    rollers with cooling means.


CLS 266/116
TXT Device under subclass 115 wherein the object having its configuration
    altered is an elastic body.


CLS 266/117
TXT Device under subclass 114 including means for constraining the object being
    treated to prevent any unwanted deformation thereof which might result from
    the liquid contact.


CLS 266/118
TXT Device under subclass 117 wherein the constraining means is configured to
    retain castellated cylindrical bodies.


CLS 266/119
TXT Device under subclass 117 wherein means are provided to increase the
    temperature of the treated article thereby enhancing the grain structure
    and reducing stress within the treated article, (e.g., tempering).


CLS 266/120
TXT Device under subclass 114 wherein the contacting apparatus includes a tank
    containing a liquid made from melted normally solid matter, e.g., salts.

    (1)     Note.  Molten material, as used herein, is limited to a material
    which is in the solid state under standard atmospheric condition of
    pressure and temperature, which material is liquefied by an altering of one
    or both of these conditions, e.g., heating a mass of salt to fuse the same.
     Thus a bath composed of a material which is normally a liquid under
    standard atmospheric conditions, e.g., mercury, oil, water, is not found
    herein unless combined with a molten material bath.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, appropriate subclasses for treatment of solid or
    semi-solid metal to modify or maintain the internal physical structure
    (i.e., microstructure) or chemical property of metal or for processes of
    reactive coating of metal.  Particularly, see subclasses 631+ or 711 of
    Class 148 for use of a fused molten material to treat the metal.


CLS 266/121
TXT Device under subclass 114 further including means to raise the temperature
    of the work prior to, during or after the work has been contacted with the
    liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261,    for heating a solid metal object by flame contact heating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, appropriate subclasses for processes of heating or
    cooling of metal to modify or maintain the internal physical structure
    (i.e., microstructure) or chemical property of the metal.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 50+, for electric heaters specialized
    to heat metals.


CLS 266/122
TXT Device under subclass 121 wherein the heating means and the liquid-contact
    means are particularized to operate on metal bearing matter to remove
    unwanted constitutents from said matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, appropriate subclasses for methods of heating an ore and
    subsequently contacting said ore with a liquid.


CLS 266/123
TXT Device under subclass 121 wherein the heating means is configured to pass
    into or through a cavity or passage formed in the article to be treated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 166+, for
    liquid contact of a solid workpiece having hollows or passages.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 59.1+, for electric-heating means
    specialized to heat metallic workpieces of cylindrical configuration.


CLS 266/124
TXT Device under subclass 121 wherein the heating means is specialized to
    effect heating of only certain zones on the surface of the article to be
    treated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, particularly subclasses 210+, 627 and 639+ for
    processes of localized or zone heating of solid or semi-solid metal to
    modify or maintain the internal physical structure (i.e., microstructure)
    or chemical property of metal.

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclass, for electric-heating means
    specialized to heat metal in selected areas.


CLS 266/125
TXT Device under subclass 124 wherein the heating means is particularized to
    effect heating selected areas on the surface of objects having a nonuniform
    or a discontinuous surface or profile.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of objects having nonuniform or discontinuous
    surfaces are valve cams, spur or helical gears, racks, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, particularly subclasses 559+ for treatment of
    solid or semi-solid metal to modify or maintain the internal physical
    structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical property of metal.


CLS 266/126
TXT Device under subclass 125 wherein the heating means is specialized for
    heating power transmission elements which have castellated power
    transmitting surfaces, and wherein the heating means has a profile allowing
    it to be inserted between adjoining castellations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, particularly subclasses 573 and 586 for processes
    of treating solid or semi-solid metal gears to modify or maintain the
    internal physical structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical property of
    metal.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 640, for induction-heating means
    specialized to heat gears.


CLS 266/127
TXT Device under subclass 121 wherein the heating and the fluid-contact means
    either are formed as a single treating member or are so closely juxtaposed
    that they constitute a unitary treating member.

    (1)     Note.  An example of unitized structures to be found herein is
    heating torch having a supply outlet for a quenching fluid formed therein.


CLS 266/128
TXT Device under subclass 121 wherein the heat to treat the material is
    produced by a current passing through a conductive medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclass, especially subclasses 50+,
    for electric- heating means specialized to heat metal.


CLS 266/129
TXT Device under subclass 128 wherein the heating means include means to
    impress a fluctuating magnetic field across the workpiece to be treated
    which field causes current to pass through and heat said workpiece.


CLS 266/130
TXT Device under subclass 121 wherein the means for contacting the work with a
    liquid includes a receptacle which confines a body of liquid into which the
    work is dipped or immersed.


CLS 266/131
TXT Device under subclass 130 wherein means are provided for 1) generating a
    current within the liquid body or 2) adding, removing or otherwise changing
    the heat content of the liquid body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 105+, for a
    means of general utility for contacting a solid with a liquid including
    heating, cooling, or heat-exchange means.


CLS 266/132
TXT Device under subclass 130 wherein a vertically moving support is provided,
    which support partakes of a generally straight up and down motion to lower
    the work into and subsequently raise it out of the bath.


CLS 266/133
TXT Device under subclass 130 wherein means are provided for conveying the work
    through the body of liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclass, for conveyors of
    general utility.


CLS 266/134
TXT Device under subclass 114 wherein the apparatus is so arranged or
    additional means are provided to insure that the liquid contact with the
    object to be treated will be restricted to only a certain pre-established
    section of said object.

    (1)     Note.  Means to mask the surface of the object to be contacted so
    that only certain areas will have liquid applied thereto are found herein.


CLS 266/135
TXT Device under class definition wherein means are provided for a) removing
    accumulations of unwanted material which are deposited on or in the device
    during the operation of same or b) the introduction of an anti-friction
    agent, e.g., oil, into or on the device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    432,    Heating, subclass 75, for a heating means of general utility having
    a means for cleaning the heating means.


CLS 266/136
TXT Device under subclass 135 wherein means are provided for removing unwanted
    accumulations from a fluid nozzle, e.g., tuyere punches.


CLS 266/137
TXT Device under the class definition having means to break up or reduce the
    size of an individual unit of hard matter.

    (1)     Note.  Included within the definition of an individual unit are a
    solid metal object, a sintered mass and the individual particle of a
    granular mass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate subclass,
    for comminuting or disintegrating apparatus, per se, and for comminuting
    combined with heating where no chemical change to the material heated
    occurs.


CLS 266/138
TXT Device under the class definition having means to elevate the temperature
    of a gas or vapor supplied to a treating vessel prior to the entry of the
    gas into the treating zone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclass, for a heat exchange, per se,
    particularly subclasses 4+, for a regeneration-type heat exchanger.

    432,    Heating, subclass 40, for the automatic control of a hot blast
    stove; subclasses 78+, wherein combustion feed air cools existing work by
    contact; subclass 84, wherein combustion feed air cools the furnace wall;
    subclasses 179+, wherein the furnace exhaust heats the furnace feed air;
    subclasses 214+, for a hot blast stove, per se, and subclasses 219+ , for a
    residual gas heater, per se.


CLS 266/139
TXT Device under subclass 138 including means adapted to receive and retain
    heat energy and thereafter give up said energy to a gas flowing therepast
    to raise the temperature of the gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 4+, for  heat-storage devices, such as
    checker bricks, per se.

    432,    Heating, appropriate subclass, for general utility furnaces
    combined with heat-storage means, especially subclasses 214+, for heat
    storage means combined with a heat generator.


CLS 266/140
TXT Device under subclass 138 wherein the means to elevate the temperature of
    the gas includes means in addition to the heating means for the treating
    vessel for producing heat energy by a chemical reaction, e.g., combustion,
    or by the transformation of some other form of energy into heat energy,
    e.g., electric resistance-type heaters.


CLS 266/141
TXT Device under subclass 138 wherein the means to elevate the temperatures of
    the incoming gas includes means physically separated from the treating
    vessel which means effects a transfer of heat from a material at a
    relatively high temperature to the relatively cool incoming gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclass, for indirect heat-exchange
    structure.


CLS 266/142
TXT Device under the class definition wherein a) a work-processing device is
    related either to some feature of the earth or to a definable building
    feature, e.g., a hall, or b) a plurality of such devices are arranged so as
    to form a specific machinery layout.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of limitations that are indicative of geographic
    features or structural installations are:  pits, bays, corridors, plural
    working levels, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Merely positioning one device above another so that gravity
    flow between the devices is effected is not considered to constitute a
    specific machinery layout.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161+,   for apparatus performing diverse metallurgical operations, e.g.,
    metal extracting and refining.


CLS 266/143
TXT Device under subclass 142 wherein the structural or geographic installation
    is provided with a means for treating a molten metal having a support means
    which mounts the treating means for movement from one location to another
    within the installation.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of a traveling support are cranes, wheel vehicles,
    etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165,    for a metallurgical apparatus which includes a vehicle-mounted
    receptacle.


CLS 266/144
TXT Device under the class definition wherein the metallurgical apparatus is
    provided with means for a) removing fumes and the like from the apparatus
    b) conditioning such fumes to either remove valuable components, e.g.,
    gaseous mercury or render the fumes less objectionable to the environment,
    e.g., pollution abatement devices, or c) to extract heat energy from the
    fumes.

    (1)     Note.  While apparatus to condense metallic vapors within a vacuum
    will be found herein, apparatus to remove entrained gases from a mass of
    molten metal by subjecting at least a portion of the mass to a vacuum is
    not considered to be a fume handling or treating means since such gases do
    not normally "evolve" by themselves from the molten mass.  Such apparatus
    thus will not be found in this or the indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  A nominally recited flue or a nominal flue and damper
    combination is not considered to be a fume-handling means and thus will not
    be found herein.  Further, a mere windbox or a nominal windbox and blower
    combination used in conjunction with an ore- sintering apparatus is not
    considered to be a fume-handling means for this subclass.  Such patents
    have been placed on the features of the particular treating apparatus with
    which they are associated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207+,   for vacuum-degassing apparatus for molten metals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    432,    Heating, subclasses 66, 67+ and 72, for a heating means of general
    utility having means for treating or handling the exhaust gas.


CLS 266/145
TXT Device under subclass 144 wherein the gas handling or treating means are
    specialized to receive fumes from a furnace adapted to rotate through more
    than 360 degrees.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173,    for a rotary drum ore treating or metal extracting furnace.

    213,    for a revolving-drum type furnace for melting metal or treating a
    molten metal.

    244,    for a Bessemer-type treating vessel mounted to revolve about its
    longitudinal axis.

    248,    for a horizontal, rotatable, cylindrical metal melting or molten
    metal treating means which oscillates about its longitudinal axis.


CLS 266/146
TXT Device under subclass 144 including means specialized to commingle or
    otherwise encounter the fumes with a nonmetallic liquid medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclass, for
    apparatus of general utility for contacting a gas with a liquid.


CLS 266/147
TXT Device under subclass 146 wherein the commingling means is a shower of
    liquid through which the fumes flow.


CLS 266/148
TXT Device under subclass 144 including means specialized to receive vaporized
    material and cause said vaporized material to undergo a phase change to the
    solid or liquid state.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, appropriate subclass, for distilling
    apparatus other than that used to condense metal.

    432,    Heating, subclass 66, for a heating means of general utility with a
    condenser for work chamber vapor.


CLS 266/149
TXT Device under subclass 148 wherein said phase change is effected within a
    vacuum environment.


CLS 266/150
TXT Device under subclass 148 wherein means are provided to hurl molten metal
    into the path of the evolved gas to condense metallic vapors contained
    therein.


CLS 266/151
TXT Device under subclass 148 wherein the material from which the vapor is
    generated is caused to flow in a descending stepped path.


CLS 266/152
TXT Device under subclass 148 wherein the vaporized material gives up its heat
    of vaporization to a body of liquid which is physically separated therefrom
    by a structural member, e.g., a wall, a tube, etc.


CLS 266/153
TXT Device under subclass 148 wherein a heating means is provided which is
    adapted to contain and externally heat a vessel which holds a discrete
    charge of material to be treated and wherein means are mounted on and
    carried by the vessel to liquefy or solidify vapors evolved in the vessel.


CLS 266/154
TXT Device under subclass 148 wherein the vapors are evolved from an elongated
    chamber the major axis of which is substantially perpendicular to the
    horizon and through which the vapor generating material is moved by the
    effects of gravity.


CLS 266/155
TXT Device under subclass 144 including means specialized to remove heat from
    the evolved gas by means of an indirect heat exchanger.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 7, for apparatus for
    capturing the waste heat of industrial devices.


CLS 266/156
TXT Device under subclass 144 wherein a portion of the evolved gas is returned
    to the metallurgical apparatus.


CLS 266/157
TXT Device under subclass 144 wherein the fume treating or handling means
    includes means to remove particulate matter suspended in the exhausting
    fumes from the fumes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, for apparatus for gas separation, per
    se.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 67+, for means separating solid particle or
    slag from work chamber gas.


CLS 266/158
TXT Device under subclass 144 wherein the gas- handling means includes an
    inverted, generally funnel-shaped fume collecting member which is disposed
    above and in unattached, juxtaposed relation with the metallurgical
    apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 7, for apparatus for
    capturing the waste heat of industrial devices.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 49+, for hood and off-take structure.


CLS 266/159
TXT Device under subclass 144 wherein the gas handling means includes fume
    conducting means connected to the fume outlet of a metallurgical apparatus
    which conducting means conveys the fumes away from said apparatus.


CLS 266/160
TXT Device under the class definition a) including means in addition to the
    basic metallurgical apparatus for performing some additional
    nonmetallurgical operation or for perfecting the operation of the basic
    metallurgical apparatus or b) which can by an addition, removal or
    rearrangement of one or more of its parts be caused to have a different
    mode or condition of operation.


CLS 266/161
TXT Device under the class definition comprising a means to treat an ore or
    other metal bearing material to remove a metal therefrom combined with
    additional means to purify or otherwise treat the removed metal.


CLS 266/162
TXT Device under subclass 161 wherein a distinct region or chamber is provided
    within which the metal purification or treatment occurs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212,    for refining means having a separate metal melting zone.


CLS 266/163
TXT Device under subclass 162 including an extracting or refining means adapted
    to revolve about it longitudinal axis.


CLS 266/164
TXT Device under subclass 162 wherein the means to extract the metal comprises
    a treating chamber within which the temperature of the material to be
    treated is elevated and the longitudinal axis of which is generally normal
    to the horizon.


CLS 266/165
TXT Device under the class definition wherein the metallurgical apparatus
    includes a vehicle mounted receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142+,   for geographic or structural installations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 238.1+, for special car bodies
    for carrying molten metal or slag.

    432,    Heating, subclass 88, for a heater assembly having a wheel-,
    handle- or skid-type support.


CLS 266/166
TXT Device under the class definition wherein a means to treat a metalliferous
    or a metallic material is provided with a separate additional substantially
    nonambulant storage receptacle or a separate additional ambulant storage
    receptacle adapted to be attached to the treating means, which receptacles
    receive molten material from the treating means and store said molten
    material prior to its delivery to a point of use.


CLS 266/167
TXT Device under the class definition including a receptacle specialized to
    contain a thermit mixture while the mixture reacts to form a molten mass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclass 959, for a process of thermit type reduction and
    treatment.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 53+, for a process of molding a metal
    object with in situ reactive heating.


CLS 266/168
TXT Device under the class definition having means to a) concentrate and enrich
    the metalliferous material or b) liberate metal from the metalliferous
    material.

    (1)     Note.  The term "ore" as used herein may include other than
    naturally occurring sources, e.g., waste photographic solutions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, appropriate subclasses, for processes of treating ore or
    extracting a metal.


CLS 266/169
TXT Device under subclass 168 wherein means are provided for contacting a metal
    bearing material with mercury such that the metal is drawn from said
    material by the mercury.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 12.1+ and
    174+, for processes and apparatus for separating by nonchemical means or
    procedure, e.g., magnet, amalgamating from liquid suspensions.


CLS 266/170
TXT Device under subclass 168 including means for rendering a metallic element
    insoluble in its liquid environment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    for an apparatus for leaching and subsequently precipitating a
    metal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, appropriate subclasses, for a process of precipitating a metal
    from a solution.

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 194+ for
    electrolytic apparatus (e.g., specialized for electrolytic precipitation of
    metal, etc.).

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, appropriate subclasses for electrolytic
    precipitation of metal.


CLS 266/171
TXT Device under subclass 168 having means to raise the temperature of
    metalliferous material.

    (1)     Note.  Those furnaces which are alternately usable to melt metal or
    to treat ore will be found herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, appropriate subclass, for processes of treating ore or extracting
    metal.

    432,    Heating, appropriate subclass, for treating furnaces of general
    utility.


CLS 266/172
TXT Device under subclass 171 wherein means are provided for introducing a gas
    into the heating chamber so that the solid material within said chamber is
    maintained in a fluent condition while it undergoes treatment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 576+, for
    an apparatus for conveying treated material by means of a fluid current.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositons for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, appropriate subclasses for treating ores in gaseous suspension.

    432,    Heating, subclass 58, for a fluidized bed in a furnace of general
    utility.


CLS 266/173
TXT Device under subclass 171 wherein the heating means includes a barrel-like
    receptacle within which the work is placed, which receptacle is mounted to
    continuously revolve about its longitudinal axis while the work is being
    heated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145,    for fume-handling means combined with rotary drum-type furnaces.

    163,    for rotary furnaces adapted to extract and refine a metal.

    178+,   for revolving annular-load-supporting grates.

    213,    for rotary melting or refining vessels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    432,    Heating, subclasses 103+ for rotary drum furnaces of general
    utility.  For further searches, see the search notes for subclass 103.


CLS 266/174
TXT Device under subclass 171 having means a) to prevent a dangerous or
    potentially dangerous operating condition from occurring within the
    treating means or b) to protect operating personnel from injury.


CLS 266/175
TXT Device under subclass 171 wherein a distinct compartment or receptacle is
    provided within which the temperature of the material to be treated by the
    heating means is elevated prior to its entry into the heating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    432,    Heating, subclasses 163+, for furnaces of general utility having
    plural structurally-related work chambers.


CLS 266/176
TXT Device under subclass 171 wherein the heating means is provided with means
    to supply a charge of fuel, flux or ore thereto, which supplied material is
    in a solid form, or means to convey or propel the charge within the heating
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclass, for conveyors of
    general utility.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 150+ for the combination
    of a chamber of a type utilized for a heating function and a driven device,
    and/or an inclined flow path to carry or convey material into, within, and
    out of the chamber, and subclasses 160+ for such a chamber and the
    charging, in general, thereof.


CLS 266/177
TXT Device under subclass 176 wherein means are provided within the heating
    means for propelling or conveying the work undergoing treatment through
    said heating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclass, for conveyors of
    general utility.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 159+ and 160+ as discussed
    in the reference to that class in subclass 176 above, and see particularly
    subclases 153 and 166 of the respective areas.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 121+, for an apparatus having means by which
    work is mechanically moved through a heating device of general utility.


CLS 266/178
TXT Device under subclass 177 wherein the means for moving the charge through
    the treating zone comprises a mobile charge supporting surface which
    surface is perforated to allow air or combustion gases to pass therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159,    for a traveling-grate means combined with gas offtake structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    432,    Heating, subclasses 136+, for apparatus having means by which work
    is mechanically moved through a heating device of general utility.


CLS 266/179
TXT Device under subclass 178 wherein means are provided at the junction
    between said mobile charge supporting surface and the heating means to
    prevent the ingress of atmospheric air into the heating zone or the escape
    of gas from the heating zone.


CLS 266/180
TXT Device under subclass 178 wherein the mobile supporting surface is composed
    of plural unconnected moving cars which follow closely adjacent each other
    to form a moving support for the charge material.


CLS 266/181
TXT Device under subclass 177 wherein the heating means has a plurality of
    shelves disposed one above the other and the moving means conveys the
    charge from one shelf to the next adjacent lower shelf in a zigzig fashion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    432,    Heating, subclasses 129+, for a means for cascading work through a
    furnace of general utility.


CLS 266/182
TXT Device under subclass 176 wherein the propelling means comprises means for
    entraining the charge material in a moving stream of fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221,    for a tuyere means for introducing diverse material into a molten
    metal treating means.

    267,    for a tuyere specialized for simultaneously feeding diverse
    material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, appropriate subclasses, for a process of treating molten metal
    with combined solid and gaseous treating agents.

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 261+ and 263+, for an apparatus for burning
    fine fuel in suspension in a furnace of general utility.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, appropriate subclass, for an apparatus
    for conveying solids in fluid suspension.


CLS 266/183
TXT Device under subclass 176 wherein means are provided for propelling the
    charge material to be treated into the heating zone.


CLS 266/184
TXT Device under subclass 176 wherein the charge- feed means includes a storage
    chamber having a discharge port in the bottom thereof which port is closed
    by a valve member which is movable axially of said passage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 170, 201+, and 204+ for
    the combination of a chamber of a type utilized for a heating function and
    a material charging means therefor, and wherein the means includes a device
    of the bell and hopper type.


CLS 266/185
TXT Device under subclass 171 wherein the heating means includes a
    work-supporting surface which surface is perforated to allow air or
    combustion gas to pass therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159,    for grate structure combined with gas offtake means.

    279,    for apparatus which supports the work material on a grate member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 267+ for a progressive feed-grate means in a
    furnace of general utility.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 371+ for a water-cooled
    grate means.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 152+ for grates for use in stoves
    and furnaces.


CLS 266/186
TXT Devices under subclass 171 including a means for introducing a gas, liquid,
    or combination thereof to the interior of the heating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218+,   for a tuyere means for feeding fluid into a molten metal treating
    means.

    265+,   for tuyere structure, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 182.5, for a tuyere means for a furnace of
    general utility.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 6.6 for a tuyere having a
    closed water-cooling system.


CLS 266/187
TXT Device under subclass 186 including means to control the volume of flow of
    the fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82+,    for a control means responsive to a sensed condition which
    correlates a flow of diverse fluents.

    223,    for a control means for a tuyere combined with a molten-metal
    treating means.

    266,    for a tuyere means combined with a flow-control means.


CLS 266/188
TXT Device under subclass 186 including means to comingle two or more fluids
    for injection into the heating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221+,   for a tuyere for feeding diverse material into a molten-metal
    treating means.

    267,    for a tuyere for simultaneously feeding diverse material.


CLS 266/189
TXT Device under subclass 186 including means for supplying a cooling medium to
    the fluid-feeding means to maintain the temperature of said feeding means
    within acceptable limits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 182.5, for a cooled tuyere means for a furnace
    of general utility.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 6.6 for a tuyere having a
    closed water cooling system.


CLS 266/190
TXT Device under subclass 171 including means for maintaining the temperature
    of the heating means structure at a safe operating level.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241,    for a means to cool a metal melting or molten-metal treating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 355 for means-cooling glass
    manufacturing apparatus.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 47+ for a heat exchanger installed in a
    disparate device; subclasses 58+ for heating and cooling of the same
    device; and subclass 134.1 for a heat exchanger with protective means.

    432,    Heating, appropriate subclass for means cooling a furnace of
    general utility.


CLS 266/191
TXT Device under subclass 190 for maintaining the temperature of a delivery
    opening or structure associated therewith within acceptable limits.


CLS 266/192
TXT Device under subclass 190 wherein the temperature of a specific portion of
    the heating means is maintained within acceptable limits by applying a
    cooling medium thereagainst, as for example, by flowing the medium over or
    impinging the medium against said portion.


CLS 266/193
TXT Device under subclass 190 wherein the temperature is maintained within
    acceptable limits by a cooling medium flowing through a heat-exchange
    member contained within the wall or base structure of the heating means.


CLS 266/194
TXT Device under subclass 193 including means enabling easy insertion or
    extraction of the heat-exchange member.


CLS 266/195
TXT Device under subclass 171 wherein the heating means is provided with
    delivery means for drawing off the material treated within the heating
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191,    for means for cooling a material- discharge means.

    236,    for converters and other molten metal treating or holding vessels
    with specific discharge structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 209+ and 216 for the
    combination of a chamber of a type utilized for a heating function and
    either a driven device, or a gravity arrangement, respectively, for the
    discharge of material from the chamber.

    432,    Heating, appropriate subclass, especially subclasses 157, 160 and
    161, for furnaces of general utility having discharge structure.


CLS 266/196
TXT Device under subclass 195 wherein the delivery means is further provided
    with a channel shaped means through which the material passes after it has
    been discharged from the heating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231,    for a discharge runner combined with a molten-metal treating means.


CLS 266/197
TXT Device under subclass 171 comprising a chamber having a substantially
    vertical axis to which material is fed at an elevated level for gravitation
    downwardly across a heating surface or through a heating medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    432,    Heating, subclasses 95+ for shaft-type furnaces of general utility.


CLS 266/198
TXT Device under subclass 197 having means external of the furnace for
    sustaining the furnace against the effects of gravity.


CLS 266/199
TXT Device under subclass 197 wherein the upper region of the furnace has a
    particular configuration or includes additional structural members which
    facilitate the operation of the furnace.


CLS 266/200
TXT Device under the class definition for (a) refining or otherwise purifying
    metal while in the liquid state, (b) removing or separating constituents
    from a molten bath, (c) mixing or stirring a molten bath, (d) applying heat
    to a molten bath to maintain the molten condition, or (e) liquefy or
    volatilize a metal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, appropriate subclass, for a means to melt
    glass.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, appropriate subclass, for a process of refining a metal.

    164,    Metal Founding, appropriate subclass, for an apparatus for treating
    metal in a mold.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, appropriate subclass, for a
    metal melting or refining means having specific electrical heating
    structure.

    432,    Heating, appropriate subclass, for melting furnaces of general
    utility.


CLS 266/201
TXT Device under subclass 200 wherein means are provided to effect slag contact
    with a molten metal thus promoting thorough intermingling and interaction
    of the slag with the metal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, appropriate subclasses, for a process of treating slags and
    oxidized drosses.


CLS 266/202
TXT Device under subclass 200 wherein means are provided to enhance treating
    gas contact with a molten metal which means causes the metal to fall
    through a treating gas in either a finely divided stream or as a plurality
    of narrow streams and thus promotes the thorough intermingling and
    interaction of the gas with the metal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 331+ for producing solid particulate free metal
    directly from liquid metal and subclass 525 for impinging free-falling
    molten metal stream or spray with a gas or solid agent or spraying (i.e.,
    atomizing) of molten metal.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 7, for a means for atomizing a molten metal by a blast of fluid in
    a powder-making apparatus.


CLS 266/203
TXT Device under subclass 200 wherein means are provided to mechanically work
    and to contact molten metal with an additive, such as mill scale or ore,
    while in the presence of an oxidizing atmosphere, whereby a semi-solid
    product is produced.


CLS 266/204
TXT Device under subclass 200 including means to rotate the vessel to effect
    outward radial movement of a bath of molten material contained therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    494,    Imperforate Bowl:  Centrifugal Separators, appropriate subclasses,
    for apparatus for breaking up a mixture of fluids or fluent substances into
    two or more components by centrifuging within a generally solid-walled,
    receptacle-like member.


CLS 266/205
TXT Device under subclass 200 which is particularized to heat a body which
    consists of a plurality of different materials one of which is a metal, to
    liquefy and liberate said metal from said body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclass 401 for processes of treating multi-component
    metal-containing scrap having an integral substrate to separate metal
    therefrom by temperature modification wherein at least one metal remains
    solid during separation.


CLS 266/206
TXT Device under subclass 200 particularized to liquefy metals used in the
    manufacture of printing characters.


CLS 266/207
TXT Device under subclass 200 wherein means are provided either for subjecting
    molten metal to a specific atmosphere or atmospheric condition to bring
    about a desired physical or chemical change in the metal or for surrounding
    or blanketing the metal in an inert fluid to prevent contamination of the
    metal being operated upon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of structure to be found in this and the indented
    subclasses is vacuum degassing apparatus.


CLS 266/208
TXT Device under subclass 207 wherein the treating atmosphere is at a pressure
    less than standard atmospheric.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, for a process of treating a molten metal within a vacuum
    environment.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 54, 63, 110+, and
    140+, for electric furnaces combined with means to lower the pressure
    therein to subatmospheric levels.


CLS 266/209
TXT Device under subclass 208 wherein an evacuated receptacle is provided with
    a downwardly extending supply passage within which the molten material is
    raised to a level higher than the level of the source.


CLS 266/210
TXT Device under subclass 209 wherein the metal is returned from the reduced
    pressure zone to its point of origin.


CLS 266/211
TXT Device under subclass 208 wherein a molten- metal containing or receiving
    vessel is contained within and surrounded by a housing which housing is
    communicable with a source of vacuum.


CLS 266/212
TXT Device under subclass 200 wherein the means to treat the molten metal is
    provided with a distinct metal liquefying region or chamber from which the
    molten metal to be treated is drawn.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162+,   for means specialized to extract and refine a metal within separate
    treating zones.


CLS 266/213
TXT Device under subclass 200 wherein the vessel is mounted to be turned about
    its longitudinal axis through more than 360 degrees.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248,    for a drum-type melting or refining vessel adapted to revolve or
    oscillate about its longitudinal axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    432,    Heating, subclasses 103+, for a tumbler-type rotary drum furnace of
    general utility.


CLS 266/214
TXT Device under subclass 200 wherein the means to melt metals or to treat a
    molten metal comprises a treating receptacle within which hot gas sweeps
    over the surface of material contained within the receptacle to elevate the
    temperature of the material.


CLS 266/215
TXT Device under subclass 200 wherein the treating means includes a treating
    vessel which is provided with means for supplying an unrefined molten metal
    mass thereto and for drawing refined molten metal therefrom in a
    substantially uninterrupted fashion.


CLS 266/216
TXT Device under subclass 200 including means for adding a solid, liquid, or
    gaseous substance to the molten metal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, appropriate subclasses for a process of introducing a treating
    material into molten metal.


CLS 266/217
TXT Device under subclass 216 wherein the added substance is in gaseous form.

    (1)     Note.  Means introducing a gas stirring agent will be found in this
    and the indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses, for
    devices of general utility for contacting a gas with a liquid.


CLS 266/218
TXT Device under subclass 217 wherein the means is a short tubular member
    forming an aperture in the vessel wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    265+,   for tuyere structure, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 182.5, for a tuyere in a furnace of general
    utility.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 6.6, for a tuyere having a
    closed water-circulation.


CLS 266/219
TXT Device under subclass 218 wherein a plurality of tuyeres are arranged in
    the wall of a vertical furnace such that the streams issuing therefrom will
    meet or cross in one area substantially in the center of said furnace.

    (1)     Note.  Cupola furnaces are found herein where the sole disclosure
    is for melting metal.


CLS 266/220
TXT Device under subclass 218 wherein the means discharges through a foraminous
    member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 94+ and 100+, for
    gas-liquid con-sheet.


CLS 266/221
TXT Device under subclass 218 wherein said adding means is adapted to
    concurrently supply plural materials.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182,    for a means to introduce a solid entrained in a fluid into an ore
    treating or metal-extracting device.

    188,    for a means to introduce diverse fluids via a common outlet into an
    ore treating or metal-extracting device.

    267,    for a means specialized for simultaneously feeding diverse
    materials into a vessel.


CLS 266/222
TXT Device under subclass 221 wherein the adding means has a plurality of
    coaxial flow paths.


CLS 266/223
TXT Device under subclass 218 wherein a regulating means is provided in the
    flow path to control fluid flow into the treating vessel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82+,    for means correlating the flow of diverse fluents responsive to a
    sensed condition.

    187,    for regulating the flow of a fluid into an ore treating or metal
    extracting means.

    266,    for a tuyere means combined with a flow-control means.


CLS 266/224
TXT Device under subclass 218 wherein the treating vessel is provided with a
    separate, distinct bottom closure which has an integrally formed tuyere
    therein.

    (1)     Note.  The plug bottoms are usually removable or replaceable to
    facilitate changing of worn or damaged tuyeres.


CLS 266/225
TXT Device under subclass 217 wherein the introducing means is a long, narrow
    tube extending into the interior of the treating vessel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses,
    for lances, per se, and for nozzles of general utility.


CLS 266/226
TXT Device under subclass 225 including means to adjust the position of the
    lance.


CLS 266/227
TXT Device under subclass 200 including means to segregate a metal from other
    constitutents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 767+, for processes
    of separating solids and liquids, and 513+ for gravitational separators.


CLS 266/228
TXT Device under subclass 227 having means for drawing off a material floating
    on the surface of a molten mass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 242.1+, for movable
    means floating on the surface of a liquid.


CLS 266/229
TXT Device under subclass 227 including a separating arrangement having a
    barrier member associated therewith which effects the separation of a
    desired constituent from the molten mass by blocking the flow of one of the
    constituents.


CLS 266/230
TXT Device under subclass 229 wherein the separating arrangement comprises a
    receptacle having a baffle associated with the receptacle outlet to block
    the flow of undesired constituents.


CLS 266/231
TXT Device under subclass 229 wherein the barrier member is associated with a
    channel shaped means through which the molten mass flows.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196,    for a runner system combined with a metal-extracting furnace.


CLS 266/232
TXT Device under subclass 227 wherein the separating means comprises a vessel
    within which the molten mass is allowed to stand and separate by the
    effects of gravity.


CLS 266/233
TXT Device under subclass 200 including means to agitate a molten metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217+,   for means which agitates a body of molten metal by introducing a
    gas into said body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    366,    Agitating, appropriate subclass, for stirring or mixing apparatus
    of general utility.


CLS 266/234
TXT Device under subclass 233 wherein the agitating means includes an
    electromagnetic means which creates flux lines passing through the metal to
    cause movement of the metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237,    for electromagnetic molten-metal dispensing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 85, 116 and 146,
    for induction stirrers combined with an electric furnace.


CLS 266/235
TXT Device under subclass 233 wherein the agitating means includes a blade-like
    member having a fluid reactant surface which engages and moves the molten
    mass.


CLS 266/236
TXT Device under subclass 200 wherein the vessel containing the molten mass
    undergoing treatment is provided with specific terminal outlet structure
    for removing the mass from the vessel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 324+, for molten-glass dispensing
    means.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 590 and 591+, for receptacles having means
    to effect discharge of molten metal therefrom.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, appropriate subclass, for valves
    specialized to control flow of molten material.


CLS 266/237
TXT Device under subclass 236 including means which create flux lines to cause
    the material to flow in a desired direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    234,    for a molten-metal treating means or melting means having an
    induction stirring means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclass 50, for electromagnetic pumps.


CLS 266/238
TXT Device under subclass 236 including a means effecting withdrawal of molten
    matter remaining in the vessel after normal emptying of the vessel.


CLS 266/239
TXT Device under subclass 236 wherein the means for discharging material from
    the treating vessel includes means for varying gas pressure at a selected
    location on the exterior of the molten mass to create a gas pressure
    gradient across the exterior which is effective to deliver material from
    the vessel.

    (1)     Note.  The means to vary the gas pressure on a portion of a liquid
    surface includes both devices that raise the gas pressure, e.g.,
    pressurized gas cylinders, and that lower the gas pressure, e.g., vacuum
    pumps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclass, for miscellaneous receptacles
    having means to effect discharge of fluent material therefrom.  Note
    especially subclasses 394+ for fluid pressure means and subclass 416 for
    siphon means.


CLS 266/240
TXT Device under subclass 236 including means to cant the vessel to effect
    discharging.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    432,    Heating, subclass 157, for crucible or pot-heating furnace of
    general utility having a tilting arrangement.


CLS 266/241
TXT Device under subclass 200 wherein means are provided to remove excess heat
    energy the means treating the material thus maintaining the temperature of
    said means within a safe operating range.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for a process of cooling a metallurgical apparatus.

    138,    for a means within a heating or treating vessel for preheating a
    gas, which heating inherently cools the heating or treating vessel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    432,    Heating, appropriate subclasses, for cooling furnaces of general
    utility.


CLS 266/242
TXT Device under subclass 200 including a kettle-like receptacle having a means
    for raising the temperature of the metal therein to liquefy the same.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 420+, for crucible or furnace-type
    electric heating devices adapted to hold meltable material.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 156+ for a crucible or pot-type heating furnace
    of general utility.


CLS 266/243
TXT Device under subclass 200 wherein the means to treat the molten mass
    comprises an open topped, flask-like receptacle within which a molten mass
    is adapted to be subjected to a self-sustaining refining action by the
    introduction of a treating gas.


CLS 266/244
TXT Device under subclass 243 wherein means are provided for supporting the
    receptacle such that it may be rotated through more than 360 degrees about
    its lengthwise center line.


CLS 266/245
TXT Device under subclass 243 wherein means are provided for supporting the
    treating vessel such that the vessel may be swung about an axis generally
    normal to its longitudinal axis so that the mouth of the vessel can be
    moved to a selected one of a plurality of positions.


CLS 266/246
TXT Device under subclass 245 wherein the means pivotally mounting the vessel
    includes a generally annular member which girdles the receptacle and means
    interposed between the receptacle and the girdling member to secure the
    receptacle to the girdling member.


CLS 266/247
TXT Device under subclass 245 wherein the means pivotally mounting the vessel
    includes a member having two arms between which the receptacle is supported.


CLS 266/248
TXT Device under subclass 200 including a generally drum-like vessel having its
    longitudinal axis generally parallel to the horizon and adapted to revolve
    or oscillate about its longitudinal axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213,    for a drum-type molten metal treating means which rotates about its
    longitudinal axis through more than 360 degrees.

    244,    for a Bessemer-type treating vessel which rotates about its
    longitudinal axis through more than 360 degrees.


CLS 266/249
TXT Device under the class definition wherein means are provided which operate
    upon a metallic object or mass to discrete metal granules to enhance their
    physical, chemical or mechanical properties.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114+,   for apparatus which both heats and contacts a metallic object with
    a liquid or which includes means to control the shape of an object
    undergoing a liquid contact operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, particularly subclasses 559+ for processes of
    treating solid or semi-solid metal to modify or maintain the internal
    physical structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical property of metal.

    432,    Heating, appropriate subclasses, for furnaces which merely elevate
    the temperature of a metal object to facilitate some further treatment,
    e.g., rolling, and where no specific gaseous environment, treating or
    protective, is supplied to, circulated in or generated within the furnace.


CLS 266/250
TXT Device under subclass 249 wherein the work is placed in a receptacle having
    means to change the temperature thereof said receptacle further having
    means to create a treating environment by lowering the gas pressure therein.


CLS 266/251
TXT Device under subclass 249 wherein the treating operation involves a)
    surrounding the metallic article with a specific gaseous atmosphere or b)
    applying or directing a specific treating gas against the metallic article.


CLS 266/252
TXT Device under subclass 251 wherein means are provided to elevate the
    temperature of the article being treated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 349+, for glass annealing or
    tempering apparatus including heating and cooling means.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 600+, for inductive heating and
    subclasses 50+, for other electric heating of metal. Note subclasses 74+,
    where a gas is supplied to the heated area.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 198, 199 and 200+, for furnaces of general
    utility having gas-introducing means.


CLS 266/253
TXT Device under subclass 252 wherein the article is loaded into a treating
    chamber from underneath said chamber by means moving said article in a
    substantially vertical direction, e.g., an elevator.


CLS 266/254
TXT Device under subclass 252 wherein a separate means is provided for altering
    the temperature of the specific atmosphere which means is separate from the
    means heating the metallic articles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138+,   for devices having means to elevate the temperature of the gas
    prior to the entry of the gas into the treating zone.


CLS 266/255
TXT Device under subclass 252 wherein the article to be heated is disposed
    within a receptacle and is maintained out of direct contact with the source
    of heat or gases evolved thereby.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262,    for a means for treating a solid metal within a fluid tight heat
    transferring box shield, e.g., annealing box.


CLS 266/256
TXT Device under subclass 255 wherein the receptacle containing or protecting
    the article during treatment is open-bottomed and is lowered over
    stationary article prior to said treatment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263,    for a means for treating a solid metal within a bell-type hood.


CLS 266/257
TXT Device under subclass 252 wherein means are provided within the work
    confining chamber for evolving a gaseous treating agent.


CLS 266/258
TXT Device under subclass 251 wherein the apparatus is so arranged or
    additional means are provided to insure that the gas contact with the
    object to be treated will be restricted to only a certain pre-established
    section of said object.


CLS 266/259
TXT Device under subclass 249 wherein means are provided to lower the
    temperature of the article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, particularly subclasses 559+ for processes of
    heating or cooling of solid or semi-solid metal to modify or maintain the
    internal physical structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical property of
    metal.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclass, for heat exchanger of general
    utility.


CLS 266/260
TXT Device under subclass 259 which includes means for conduction cooling of
    the articles by physical contact with a solid object which is at a lower
    temperature.


CLS 266/261
TXT Device under subclass 249 wherein the workpiece is juxtaposed with a burner
    element whereby the burning fuel of said burner is allowed to impinge
    against and heat said workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121,    for apparatus for contacting a solid with a flame and with a liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, particularly subclass 642 for processes of heat
    treatment of an iron or iron based alloy with a flame to modify or maintain
    the internal physical structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical property
    of metal.


CLS 266/262
TXT Device under subclass 249 including a removable enclosing receptacle or
    hood specially adapted for holding metal articles being heated, shielding
    them from the atmosphere, and equalizing the application of heat to the
    metal articles, e.g., annealing or carbonizing boxes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255,    for fluid-tight chamber having means for contacting the workpiece
    within the chamber with a gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    432,    Heating, subclasses 254.1+, for fluid- tight heat transferring
    boxes of general utility.


CLS 266/263
TXT Device under subclass 262 including structure adapted to be lowered about
    the work comprising a hood closed on its top and sides and open at its
    bottom, or the support upon which such hood is lowered.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256,    for bell-type furnace having means for contacting the workpiece
    within the hood with a gas.


CLS 266/264
TXT Device under subclass 263 including distinct structure for sealing the
    joint between the hood and its support.


CLS 266/265
TXT Device under the class definition comprising short tubular means adapted to
    be mounted in a vessel wall for permitting fluents to flow therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for a method of injecting fluents through a tuyere.

    186,    for a tuyere means combined with an ore treating or metal
    extracting means.

    218,    for a tuyere means combined with a metal melting or molten metal
    treating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 182.5, for a tuyere in a furnace of general
    utility.


CLS 266/266
TXT Device under subclass 265 including means to alter either the quantity of
    material moving through the introducing means or the direction in which
    said material is delivered.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     for a control means responsive to a sensed condition for
    correlating the flow of diverse fluents.

    187,    for a means for feeding a fluid having flow-regulating means
    combined with an ore treating or metal extracting means.

    223,    for a means for feeding a gas having flow-regulating means combined
    with a metal melting or molten metal treating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 590+, for
    nozzles of general utility having internal flow guides.


CLS 266/267
TXT Device under subclas 265 including means to concurrently deliver two
    different materials.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182,    for a device for feeding a gas entrained solid into an ore-treating
    means.

    188,    for a tuyere for feeding diverse fluids into an ore-treating means.

    221,    for a tuyere for feeding diverse material into a means for treating
    molten metal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 398+, for a
    nozzle of general utility having means for combining separately supplied
    fluids.


CLS 266/268
TXT Device under subclass 267 including two separate flow paths each of which
    terminate at the outlet of the tuyere and each of which discharges a
    different material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 549, for a
    nozzle of general utility having multiple outlet openings, each of which is
    supplied with a different fluid.


CLS 266/269
TXT Device under subclass 265 wherein means are provided which will either
    allow a blockage removing cleaning implement to be inserted into the
    introducing means or allows undersired material contained within the
    introducing means to run off.


CLS 266/270
TXT Device under subclass 265 including means to protect the tubular means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189,    for means cooling a tuyere in a metallurgical apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 6.6, for liquid-cooled
    tuyere elements, per se, where a coolant flows through the tuyere element
    in a closed path.  Those patents which disclose a diversity of water cooled
    blast furnace accessories, (e.g., monkeys, cooling boxes), in addition to
    tuyeres and which either specifically claim one of these diverse
    accessories or includes a claim generic to all such accessories will be
    placed as an original in Class 266 and will be cross referenced to Class
    122.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 591, for
    nozzles of general utility having wear linings.


CLS 266/271
TXT Device under the class definition a) for plugging openings in the walls of
    treating or holding receptacles or b) for tapping such openings or
    otherwise removing plugs or other blockages therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of apertures plugged by the sealing means are
    tuyere openings, cinder or slag notches, tap holes, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for process of opening or closing an aperture in the wall of a
    metallurgical vessel.

    136,    for tuyere punches combined with the tuyere.


CLS 266/272
TXT Device under subclass 271 wherein the means is specialized to seal or stop
    the opening in the vessel wall.


CLS 266/273
TXT Device under the Class 272 wherein the means to seal the aperture includes
    means for extruding a hardenable fluent substance into the aperture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclass, for dispensers of general utility
    and especially 390, for dispensers having a supply container with a
    follower, e.g., a piston, therein and having a screw to advance the
    follower.


CLS 266/274
TXT Device under the class definition which comprises means specialized to
    contain or retain either metalliferous material or a solid  metal member
    while such material or member undergoes a metallurgical treatment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclass for work holders of general
    utility.


CLS 266/275
TXT Device under subclass 274 wherein the containing or retaining  means is a
    container which volumetrically confines the work undergoing treatment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 335+, for metal-casting apparatus
    including a ladle or crucible-type metal receptacle.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 262+, for a refractory vessel for holding
    metals or ores while being melted or calcined.


CLS 266/276
TXT Device under subclass 275 wherein means are provided for mounting the
    container such that its attitude may be changed, e.g., by moving it from
    place to place, by tilting, or the like.


CLS 266/277
TXT Device under subclass 276 wherein the container is mounted on a plurality
    of cylindrical members each of which is adapted to revolve about its
    longitudinal axis.


CLS 266/278
TXT Device under subclass 275 wherein a wall of the container is formed with a
    plurality of alternating ribs and grooves which give an undulating
    appearance to the wall.


CLS 266/279
TXT Device under subclass 274 wherein the means for supporting the work is a
    member having a generally planar suarface which surface sustains the work
    against the effect of gravity and which surface has openings therethrough
    for the passage of combusiton gases, air or the like.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159,    for grate-support means combined with gas offtake means.

    178+,   for a traveling grate means combined with heating structure.

    185,    for grate-support means combined with heating structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 267+, for progressive-feed grates.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 371+ for water-cooled
    grates.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 152+ for general structure of
    grates.


CLS 266/280
TXT Device under the class definition which comprises the specific construction
    or composition of the metal or ore contacting inner covering of a treating
    vessel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclass 301 for reactive furnace linings.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 248 and 264 for linings of furnaces of general
    utility.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, appropriate subclasses for ceramic
    compositions useful as linings.


CLS 266/281
TXT Device under subclass 280 including means facilitating the forming,
    building, replacing or restoring of such lining.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are forms, means to remove old linings and
    means to handle the linings to be or being constructed or replaced.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 30, for processes of furnace lining formation and repair.


CLS 266/282
TXT Device under subclass 280 including metallic elements fastened to,
    supported by or otherwise contained within the lining for the purpose of
    warding off wear of the lining surface.

    (1)     Note.  The metal elements included herein are adjuncts to the
    lining, a complete metal lining even though made in parts is not included
    herein.


CLS 266/283
TXT Device under subclass 280 including the particular configuration of at
    least one of the elements which, together with others of like or unlike
    configuration, make up the lining.


CLS 266/284
TXT Device under subclass 280 including the particular size or range of sizes
    of the particles forming the raw material of the lining.


CLS 266/285
TXT Device under subclass 280 including means to allow for the swelling of the
    lining or lining elements due to temperature change.


CLS 266/286
TXT Device under subclass 280 including the particular shape, composition,
    structure or characteristic of the vessel wall or walls adjacent the lining.

    (1)     Note.  The coating of a vessel wall is not sufficient for this
    subclass unless some cooperating characteristic of the wall is claimed.
    The characteristic of the wall may be relative denseness or relative
    heat-absorbing capacity, with respect to the lining, or any other specific
    cooperating feature as between the wall or walls and the lining.

    (2)     Note.  Specific structural supports between the lining and adjacent
    wall or walls is included under this subclass.


CLS 266/287
TXT Apparatus under the class definition not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of the devices to be found herein are ladle repair
    cages and hand held skimming tools.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 266/900
TXT Furnaces, especially shaft type, adapted to liquefy metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213,    for revolving-drum type melting furnaces.

    242,    for heated melting pots.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, appropriate subclass, for
    metal melting furnaces of the electric type.

    432,    Heating, appropriate subclass, for heating furnaces of general
    utility.


CLS 266/901
TXT Device wherein (a) a means is provided for the reclamation of scrap metal
    by liquefying it by the application of heat; or (b) a means is provided for
    raising the temperature of scrap metal prior to its introduction of the
    treating vessel.


CLS 266/902
TXT Torches adapted to notch or sever a bloom, billet, or bar in a plane normal
    to the longitudinal axis of the workpiece.


CLS 266/903
TXT Apparatus including plate-like means to protect a vessel or operating
    personnel from the effects of heat and molten material.


CLS 266/904
TXT Tips used in conjunction with cutting torches.


CLS 266/905
TXT Apparatus adapted to liberate a refractory metal from a source of such
    metal.


CLS 267/
TTL SPRING DEVICES

CLS 267/
TXT This class includes vehicle-springs, elastic extension devices,
    reciprocating-bed-cushioning devices, and miscellaneous spring structures
    which are not peculiar to any particular art.



    Glossary

    The following terms are referenced by some of the definitions of subclasses
    2+.

    Coil Spring - an element in the form of a spiral and which exhibits
    resilient characteristic when distorted from its original shape.  May be in
    the form of a helix, a volute spiral or flat spiral.

    Helical Coil Spring - an element in the form of a serial lying on the
    surface of a cylinder and which exhibits resilient characteristics when
    distorted from its original shape.

    Leaf Spring - an element comprising a plate or bar or a plurality of
    superposed plates or bars and which exhibits resilient characteristics when
    a portion is deflected transversely of length of the element

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 246+ for a spring device disclosed as for a bed,
    subclasses 655.7+ for a spring containing support for a user's body or part
    thereof, and subclasses 716+ for a mattress comprising an innerspring core.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 896.9+ for a miscellaneous or combined
    process of manufacturing a spring element made of metal.

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses for a process or apparatus
    for forming a metal spring wherein the metal is deformed during the process.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 501.5 for constant tension
    sustaining devices for flexible cable operators.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclasses.  See section
    III, under "SEARCH CLASS 267", of the class definition of Class 92, for the
    line between an expansible chamber device for Class 92, and a fluid spring
    device for Class 267.

    100,    Presses, subclass 265 for reciprocating platen presses having a
    spring actuator, and not elsewhere provided for.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Misellaneous Chemical Maufacture, appropriate
    sublasses for a method of making a leaf spring involving the chemical
    bonding of plural leaves.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses for a process of making a nonmetallic spring by
    shaping.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 544+ for stock
    materials, e.g., of indefinite length, which are all metal or have adjacent
    metal components, especially subclass 591 for such stock material having a
    feature for affording relative movement between components thereof.


CLS 267/1.5
TXT Structure under the class definition adapted to bias a packing element in a
    radial direction.


CLS 267/2
TXT Spring devices under the class definition under the class definition which
    includes a spring element to cushion relative movement between parts of a
    vehicle and which do not involve in their application to such use any
    substantial modification of the vehicle structure.

    (1)     Note.  Generally, those patents which have no disclosure for
    vehicular use have not been cross-referenced to this and indented
    subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113     through 182, appropriate subclass for a spring device of the
    nonsupport type useful in vehicles, or for supporting supplementary vehicle
    equipment (e.g., seat, motor, transmission).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, appropriate subclasses for motor vehicles in which
    there is a special relationship between a spring element and parts peculiar
    to motor-vehicle construction.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 104 for spring devices disclosed and claimed
    in combination with parts peculiar to airplane construction.

    280,    Land Vehicles, appropriate subclasses 80.1+ for vehicle running
    gear which includes a suspension spring element.  Patents classified in
    Class 267 as originals may include vehicle parts directly related to
    vehicle suspension (e.g., fluid damper, upper or lower control arm, etc.)
    and vehicle parts which are nominally recited as either a reference or
    mounting structure for the  spring.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 195.1+ for springs used in saddle seat
    construction; subclasses 285+ for springs used in chairs and seats so that
    a back is resiliently supported; subclass 312 for springs resiliently
    supporting independently movable sections of a seat bottom.


CLS 267/3
TXT Spring devices under subclass 2 especially adapted for railway
    rolling-stock and not classified in other subclasses of this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    213,    Railway Draft Appliances, for spring devices in which the sole
    specific use is disclosed as a railway draft appliance (e.g., a draft or
    buffing means) or in which the claim is limited to a railway draft
    appliance.


CLS 267/4
TXT Device under subclass 3 wherein the spring element is a coil-spring.


CLS 267/5
TXT Spring devices under subclass 2 especially adapted for children's carriages.


CLS 267/6
TXT Spring devices under subclass 2 especially adapted for vehicle-bolsters.


CLS 267/7
TXT Device under subclass 6 wherein the spring element is a leaf-spring.


CLS 267/23
TXT Device under subclass 259 comprising a leaf- spring, a coil-spring, and a
    fluid-pressure spring are combined in the same structure.


CLS 267/24
TXT Device under subclass 259 comprising a leaf- spring and a fluid-pressure
    and liquid spring combined in the same structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64.25,  for plural compressible fluid springs combined with a fluid
    retarder and adapted for use in a vehicle.


CLS 267/25
TXT Device under a subclass 259 comprising a leaf-spring and a torsion-spring
    combined in the same structure.


CLS 267/26
TXT Device under subclass 25 wherein the torsion-spring element is of the coil
    type.


CLS 267/27
TXT Device under subclass 26 wherein the torsion-coil-spring element forms an
    end connection for the leaf-spring.


CLS 267/28
TXT Device under subclass 259 wherein a leaf-spring and a coil-spring are
    combined in the same structure.


CLS 267/29
TXT Device under subclass 28 wherein the coil- spring element forms an end
    connection for the leaf-spring.


CLS 267/30
TXT Device under subclass 259 wherein a leaf-spring and a rubber type spring
    are combined in the same structure.


CLS 267/31
TXT Device under subclass 259 wherein a leaf-spring and a fluid-pressure spring
    are combined in the same structure.


CLS 267/32
TXT Device under subclass 31 wherein the fluid- pressure-spring element is
    interposed between the end of the leaf-spring and a supporting or supported
    member.


CLS 267/33
TXT Device under subclass 259 wherein a coil-spring and a rubber type spring
    are combined in the same structure.


CLS 267/34
TXT Device under subclass 259 wherein a coil-spring and a fluid-pressure spring
    are combined in the same structure.


CLS 267/35
TXT Device under subclass 259 wherein a rubber type spring and a fluid-pressure
    spring are combined in the same structure.


CLS 267/36.1
TXT Leaf:

    Spring device under subclass 2 wherein the spring element comprises a
    leaf-spring*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158+,   for a leaf spring of nonvehicular or generic application.

    192+,   for a leaf spring stabilizer.

    195+,   for a leaf spring and retarder (shock absorber).

    229+,   for a leaf-spring and torque-applying lever.

    283,    for a multilayer leaf-torsion spring.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 718+ for vehicle suspension systems which
    employ a leaf-spring.


CLS 267/37.1
TXT And covering:

    Spring device under subclass 36.1 including a casing enclosing the spring
    element.


CLS 267/37.2
TXT Spiral or elastic covering:

    Spring device under subclass 37.1 including a casing which encloses the
    spring element and which is formed either from a strip of material coiled
    about and along the spring element, or from rubber or a material which
    exhibits similar characteristics.


CLS 267/37.3
TXT Three serially arranged metallic segments:

    Spring device under subclass 37.1 wherein the casing comprises three
    distinct sections oriented in an end-to-end fashion along the longitudinal
    axis or the leaf spring.

    (1)     Note.  Typically, the individual sections are relatively moveable
    to permit flexure of the casing with the spring.


CLS 267/37.4
TXT Having lubricant reservoir or pad:

    Spring device under subclass 37.1 including a compartment or material
    adapted to contain a fluid to be applied to relatively moving portions of
    the device to reduce friction therebetween.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    184,    Lubrication, appropriate subclasses for devices of general utility
    applied externally to leaf-springs for the purpose of supplying them with
    lubrication and involving no cooperating modification of the spring.


CLS 267/38
TXT Device under subclass 36.1 wherein the axle is disposed between a pair of
    substantially parallel and opposite leaf-springs.


CLS 267/39
TXT Device under subclass 36.1 wherein the leaf- spring which support the
    vehicle-body are secured to side-bars, which extend longitudinally of the
    body from axle to axle.


CLS 267/40
TXT Device under subclass 36.1 wherein the vehicle-body is supported on
    leaf-springs which extend longitudinally thereof from axle to axle.


CLS 267/41
TXT Device under subclass 36.1 wherein the spring element is connected at one
    end to the axle and at its other end, and sometimes at an intermediate
    point also, to the vehicle-body or to a body-supporting spring.


CLS 267/42
TXT Device under subclass 36.1 wherein endless or continuous leaf-springs
    consisting of members having their adjacent ends only connected, integrally
    or otherwise, and having their intermediate portions free for relative
    approach or recession, except where the novelty resides in structure. (See
    definition of subclass 47).

    (1)     Note.  Those patents which claim only end connecting structure for
    an elliptic spring have been classified in subclass 261 below.


CLS 267/43
TXT Device under subclass 36.1 wherein leaf-springs comprising two leaf-spring
    elements secured together and bending in the same or substantially the same
    plane, one of said elements being of elliptic type.


CLS 267/44
TXT Device under subclass 36.1 comprising leaf- springs of generally straight
    or semi-elliptic type, except where the novelty resides in structure.  (See
    definition of subclass 47).


CLS 267/45
TXT Device under subclass 26 in which leaf-springs comprising two leaf-spring
    elements secured together and bending in substantially the same plane, one
    of said elements being of semi-elliptic type.


CLS 267/46
TXT Device under subclass 45 wherein the semi- elliptic and leaf-spring
    elements are connected end to end.


CLS 267/47
TXT Device under subclass 36.1 limited to the structure of the leaf-spring
    element, either of the individual leaf or the cooperating structure of the
    several leaves and parts without relation to their configuration in the
    bending-plane.


CLS 267/48
TXT Device under subclass 47 wherein the leaf- spring element comprises one or
    more main leaves and one or more auxiliary leaves having a normal curvature
    different from that of the main leaves, so that when all of the leaves are
    secured together to form the spring element the auxiliary leaves in tending
    to assume their normal curvature exert tension on the main leaves.


CLS 267/49
TXT Device under subclass 47 wherein the spring element comprises means for
    reducing friction between the leaves.


CLS 267/50
TXT Device under subclass 47 wherein the spring element is structurally
    modified to provide for lubrication.  Includes lubricant--carriers in the
    form of strips adapted to be interposed between the leaves of the spring
    element.


CLS 267/51
TXT Device under subclass 36.1 which includes emergency devices adapted to be
    applied to broken leaf-springs to effect a temporary repair, devices
    permanently associated with leaf-springs and normally idle, but adapted to
    support the load in case of breakage of the spring, and devices normally
    performing the function of auxiliary springs, but which may be employed to
    repair the main spring in case of breakage.


CLS 267/52
TXT Device under subclass 36.1 having means for connecting leaf-springs other
    than cantalever-springs intermediate their ends to parts of the vehicle,
    together with cooperating leaf modifications.

    (1)     Note.  Pivotal intermediate connections for leaf-springs which
    permit the axle to rock in its vertical axial plane are found in Class 280,
    Land Vehicles, subclasses 112.1+.


CLS 267/53
TXT Devices under subclass 36.1 for tying or clamping the individual leaves of
    leaf-spring elements together, with cooperating leaf modifications.

    (1)     Note.  Devices of this character which are modified for cooperation
    with means for connecting the spring intermediate its ends to a part of the
    vehicle are found in this class, subclass 52.


CLS 267/64.11
TXT Comprising compressible fluid:

    A spring device under subclass 2 including a receptacle having a
    compartment whose volume can be changed, the compartment including a
    flowable material which can be compressed as the volume is decreased by the
    application of an external force and which will expand when the force is
    removed.

    (1)     Note.  In a fluid-spring device when the compressible fluid is
    subjected to compressive force, none of the fluid escapes from the
    compartment (e.g., to without the device, or from one side to the other of
    a piston head), so that when the force is removed the compartment returns
    to its normal volume, due entirely to the expansion of the compressed
    fluid; whereas in a fluid dashpot the fluid does escape, and hence another
    force must be applied to the device in order to restore the compartment to
    its normal volume.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass and its indents include the combination of a
    fluid spring and a retarder device (e.g., fluid dashpot).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113+,   for the structure of a fluid spring, per se.

    217+,   for the combination of a mechanical spring device and a retarder
    device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 297+ for a fluid dashpot, per se.


CLS 267/64.12
TXT Having lockable strut:

    A device under subclass 64.11 wherein a rodlike member is attached to a
    movable part of the fluid spring and extends to the exterior of the device
    so that the rodlike member is itself longitudinally movable and including
    means for fixedly securing the rodlike member in a desired position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclass 300 for a fluid retarder having a lockable strut.


CLS 267/64.13
TXT Including compressible liquid:

    A device under subclass 64.11 wherein the compressible material remains in
    a liquid state under normal operating conditions.

    (1)     Note.  Normally, liquids are not compressible; however, this
    subclass contains liquids possessing specific chemical natures which render
    them compressible.


CLS 267/64.14
TXT Including chamber at sub-atmospheric pressure:

    A device under subclass 64.11 also including a second compartment,
    operatively associated with the first compartment, which is partially or
    completely evacuated.

    (1)     Note.  The evacuation may take place either prior to, or during,
    operation of the device.


CLS 267/64.15
TXT With retarder:

    A device under subclass 64.11 combined with a device which will not
    independently return to its original condition after application of an
    external force (e.g., a fluid dashpot), thus retarding the spring's
    distortion or recovery.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 266+ for a retarder, per se.


CLS 267/64.16
TXT Leveling device:

    A device under subclass 64.15 including means operable to maintain the
    spring's effective "working range" constant regardless of various loading
    conditions, so the "mean riding height" of the vehicle can be maintained
    substantially constant.

    (1)     Note.  "Mean riding height" refers to the distance between sprung
    and unsprung parts of the vehicle when it is at rest, i.e., at the midpoint
    of the spring's oscillation, or "working range".


CLS 267/64.17
TXT Self-pumping:

    A device under subclass 64.16 wherein the means to maintain the spring's
    working range includes a mechanism to generate increased fluid pressure
    within the device, the mechanism operating in response to oscillation of
    the device.


CLS 267/64.18
TXT Having metering pin for varying spring rate:

    A device under subclass 64.16 including an orifice through which fluid
    flows, and a rodlike element projecting into the orifice to define a flow
    passage therebetween, wherein the rodlike element is adapted to reciprocate
    relative to the orifice, thus varying the size of the passage and variably
    regulating the flow therethrough to change either the rate of deflection or
    the rate of return of the device.

    (1)     Note.  Devices in this subclass require that either the
    reciprocating rodlike element or the orifice be of varying diameter to
    regulate the flow.


CLS 267/64.19
TXT Having flexible wall:

    A device under subclass 64.16 wherein the compartment is bounded by an
    enclosure comprising a pliantly deformable material.


CLS 267/64.21
TXT Including rolling lobe between telescoping members:

    A device under subclass 64.19 including a pair of elements, one sliding
    into an open end of the other, the elements adapted to reciprocate with
    respect to one another, wherein the pliant material is fixedly attached at
    its opposite ends to each of the two elements, and excess material is
    provided which folds upon itself to form an overlapping, saclike portion
    intermediate the ends.


CLS 267/64.22
TXT Having metering pin for varying spring rate:

    A device under subclass 64.15 including an orifice through which fluid
    flows, and a rodlike element which projects into the orifice to define a
    flow passage therebetween, wherein the rodlike element is adapted to
    reciprocate relative to the orifice, thus varying the size of the passage
    and variably regulating the flow therethrough to change either the rate of
    reflection or the rate of return of the device.

    (1)     Note.  Devices in this subclass require that either the
    reciprocating rodlike element or the orifice be of varying diameter to
    regulate the flow.


CLS 267/64.23
TXT Having flexible wall:

    A device under subclass 64.15 wherein the compartment is bounded by an
    enclosure comprising a pliantly deformable material.


CLS 267/64.24
TXT Including rolling lobe between telescoping members:

    A device under subclass 64.23 including a pair of elements, one sliding
    into an open end of the other, the elements adapted to reciprocate with
    respect to one another, wherein the pliant material is fixedly attached at
    its opposite ends to each of the two elements, and excess material is
    provided which folds upon itself to form an overlapping, saclike portion
    intermediate the ends.


CLS 267/64.25
TXT Having plural compressible fluid springs:

    A device under subclass 64.15 including two or more compartments of
    variable volume, each including a flowable material which can be compressed.


CLS 267/64.26
TXT Having telescoping cylinders:

    A device under subclass 64.15 includng two hollow cylinders, each having a
    closed end; the external diameter of one cylinder being smaller than the
    internal diameter of the other so that the smaller cylinder can slide into
    the larger cylinder, wherein the cylinders are adapted to reciprocate
    relative to each other against the opposition of fluid pressure.


CLS 267/64.27
TXT Having flexible wall:

    A device under subclass 64.11 wherein the compartment is bounded by an
    enclosure comprising a pliantly deformable material.


CLS 267/64.28
TXT Including means for charging or discharging spring:

    A device under subclass 64.11 wherein means is provided permitting access
    to its interior by which fluid may be either introduced into, or removed
    from, the device.


CLS 267/66
TXT Devices under subclass 2 for positively limiting the recovery of the
    load-springs, whether applied directly to the spring or to the
    relatively-movable parts of the vehicle, devices for preventing the
    vehicle-body from swaying backward and forward or from side to side or for
    yieldingly resisting such swaying action, and devices for guiding the
    relatively-moving parts of the spring element.


CLS 267/67
TXT Devices under subclass 66 wherein the brace is either of resilient material
    or has a spring associated with it for rendering its action yielding.


CLS 267/68
TXT Devices under subclass 66 in which there is a sliding connection between
    the brace and some part of the vehicle.


CLS 267/69
TXT Miscellaneous devices under the class definition of more or less general
    application which contain one or more elastic elements, so that when said
    devices are subjected to tension they will be extended and when the tension
    is removed they will resume their normal length.

    (1)     Note.  Devices whose construction especially adapts them to
    withstand both extension and contraction are not included here, but elastic
    draft-links are included and devices including a novel combination of
    fastening element and elastic element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 324 and 339, for garment supporters including
    spring devices.

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclasses 79.1+ for elastic
    links intended to be connected end-to-end to like elements to form an
    elastic chain.

    114,    Ships, subclass 205 for tension relievers combined with a traveler
    for sail, and subclasses 213+ for tension relievers specific to use on
    ships.

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, subclasses 7+ for spring devices
    actuating projectile throwing arms, and subclasses 16+ for spring devices
    actuating a pluner or similar device to impel a projectile.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 226 and 251+ for a
    spring powered fishing reel, and 371+ for a spring powered reel of general
    use.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 895 for spiral or
    helical type antennas.


CLS 267/70
TXT Structure under subclass 69 wherein when the device is extended, the
    elastic medium is compressed in a line at right angles to its
    cross-section.  If the elastic medium contains coils or bends, the
    compression is substantially at right angles to the plane of any of the
    coils or bends.


CLS 267/71
TXT Structure under subclass 70 wherein the extension device comprises one
    spring element only.


CLS 267/72
TXT Structure under subclass 71 wherein the single spring element incloses a
    plurality of draw-bars.


CLS 267/73
TXT Structure under subclass 69 wherein when the device is extended, the
    elastic medium is put under tension in the same direction, as explained in
    the definition of subclass 70 above.


CLS 267/74
TXT Structure under subclass 73 wherein the extension device comprises one
    spring element only.


CLS 267/75
TXT Cushioning devices under the class definition arranged to check the
    momentum of the reciprocating bed of a machine, such as a printing-press,
    lathe, planing-machine, etc., near the end of its stroke. In some cases the
    energy stored up in overcoming the momentum of the bed is utilized for
    starting it in the opposite direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119     and 130, for a press cushion fluid spring device and solid material
    spring device, respectively.


CLS 267/80
TXT Device under the class definition which includes an outline of rigid
    elongated mounting elements spaced from each other, and either (1) a
    resilient load supporting surface located on or between and connected to
    said elements, or (2) a rigid load supporting surface located on or between
    and connected to said elements by resilient means.

    (1)     Note.  Although the load supporting surface may be capable of
    receiving the ultimate load directly, a more common arrangement would
    include padding and a covering material between the load and the supporting
    surface.

    (2)     Note.  The devices classified in this and the indented subclasses
    are mainly the spring subcombinations of chair and seat cushions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 246+ for a bed bottom of springs and subclasses
    716+ for a mattress comprising an innerspring core.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, appropriate
    subclasses, for flexible or portable panels in general.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 452.16+ for a chair or seat having a
    cushioned bottom or back.


CLS 267/81
TXT Device under subclass 80 which includes two or more springs differing in
    the kind of substance which they utilize to effect a spring action (as
    metal, rubber, air) and acting in concert to support the load.


CLS 267/82
TXT Device under subclass 81 in which one of the diverse springs is a metallic
    member and another of the springs comprises a fluid containing compartment
    having a restricted or valved orifice to regulate the flow of fluid into or
    out of the compartment, and the flow of fluid through the orifice dampens
    the movement of the metallic spring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217+,   for a vehicular-type combined spring and dashpot device in which
    the dashpot modifies the movement of the spring.


CLS 267/83
TXT Device under subclass 81 wherein two or more laminae are disposed one above
    the other, and adjacent laminae are metallic and nonmetallic, respectively.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 416, 418,
    432+, 444, 450, and 457+ for a nonstructural stock material product in the
    form of a composite web or sheet embodying a layer of metal next to a layer
    of nonmetal.


CLS 267/84
TXT Device under subclass 83 wherein the metal layer comprises spiral springs
    which receive the load axially of the spiral.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91+,    for spring panels comprising compressible coil springs.


CLS 267/85
TXT Device under subclass 80 in which either (1) a plurality of springs are
    provided, which springs are superposed upon each other so as to be serially
    effective, or (2) an additional spring contacting support is provided
    inwardly of the spring's connection to the frame, which support is
    engageable by the spring during its movement to vary the effective length
    of the spring.


CLS 267/86
TXT Device under subclass 80 in which two or more different types of metal
    springs (as leaf, coil, zigzag, elliptical, etc.) cooperate to support the
    load, and the different types are disposed one above the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151+,   for compound springs, in general.

    259+,   for a compound spring especially adapted for vehicle use.


CLS 267/87
TXT Device under subclass 86 wherein the uppermost layer, composed of a series
    of zigzag springs, is mounted on a layer composed of a different kind of
    spring.


CLS 267/88
TXT Device under subclass 86 wherein the uppermost layer, composed of a series
    of axially loaded compressible spiral springs, is mounted on a layer
    composed of a different kind of spring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     for spring panels made of diverse materials in which one layer is
    composed of coil-springs.

    91+,    for spring panels composed of coil- springs.


CLS 267/89
TXT Device under subclass 80 in which a means is provided to impose an initial
    stress upon the spring prior to the reception thereon of the ultimate load,
    so as to vary the effective resilience.


CLS 267/90
TXT Device under subclass 80 which includes a means to absorb or brake the
    oscillating movements of a spring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     for spring panels in which the spring action is dampened by a
    dashpot.

    91+,    for coil-springs enclosed in nonmetallic covers.


CLS 267/91
TXT Device under subclass 80 wherein the panel is composed of a series of
    spiral springs, arranged with the axes of the spirals parallel to each
    other and aligned in the direction the load is received, and in which the
    spiral springs are of the type which receive the load in compression.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166+,   for helical coil-spring element, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclass 248 and 256 for a bedstead having only coil-springs.

    140,    Wireworking, subclass 3 for a method of making a coil-spring
    mattress.


CLS 267/92
TXT Device under subclass 91 which includes two or more coil-springs or spring
    panels, one above the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86+,    for superposed springs of different types.


CLS 267/93
TXT Device under subclass 91 in which the various springs have different
    coefficients of resilience (because of differences in size, temper or
    material).


CLS 267/94
TXT Device under subclass 91 in which the upper extremities of the springs
    carry or horizontally disposed, overlying sheet, plate or web to increase
    the load bearing and contacting area of the springs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86+,    for horizontally disposed spring surfaces, overlying vertically
    oriented coil-springs, which surfaces incidentally increase the load
    bearing and contacting area of the underlying coil springs to thereby
    protect padding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 401+ for pad protectors, per se.


CLS 267/95
TXT Device under subclass 91 in which the surface which supports the load
    includes both a coil- spring and a portion which is not a coil-spring and
    is not directly supported by a coil spring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94,     for guards which are interposed between a coil-spring and the
    padding.


CLS 267/96
TXT Device under subclass 91 wherein an end of the panel is provided with a
    spring surface or extension, generally normal to the plane of the loading
    surface.


CLS 267/97
TXT Device under subclass 91 in which the periphery of the loading surface of
    the panel is encompassed by a border wire, and in which an additional wire
    member is provided parallel to the border wire and attached thereto to
    strengthen it or enlarge its dimension.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclass 250 for a margin rim having connections for border
    wires.


CLS 267/98
TXT Device under subclass 91 in which a stay is connected to and extends
    between the load receiving surface and an underlying support on which the
    springs are mounted.


CLS 267/99
TXT Device under subclass 91 in which the coil springs are elastically
    supported on an underlying support by springs which yield in tension.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    for panels resiliently supported from a frame by springs which
    yield in tension.


CLS 267/100
TXT Device under subclass 91 in which elongated substantially rigid bars extend
    from one side of the frame to the other and are supported by the frame
    sides, and wherein the springs are connected and supported by these bars.

    (1)     Note.  These elongated bars are known in the art as "furniture
    strips".


CLS 267/101
TXT Device under subclass 91 in which the coil springs are arranged in rows and
    mounted on rods or bars which extend between the rows.


CLS 267/102
TXT Device under subclass 80 wherein a portion of the load supporting surface
    extends outwardly beyond the means which connect the load supporting
    surface to the underlying frame or mounting elements, which portion is not
    supported outwardly of its juncture with the said means.

    (1)     Note.  These devices, when connected to a common border wire, are
    known in the art as "soft edges", because they yield under load more
    readily than the main surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85,     for superposed springs, serially effective.


CLS 267/103
TXT Device under subclass 80 in which the load receiving surface extends
    generally parallel to the frame and is connected thereto and maintained in
    a plane separate from the frame by springs.

    (1)     Note.  The spacing spring means may be integral with and form an
    extension from the load receiving surface; however, to fall within the
    confines of this and the indented subclasses, there must be an identifiable
    portion which yieldingly supports the load receiving surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111+,   for load receiving panels secured to supporting frames directly.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 246+ for a bed bottom of springs and subclasses
    716+ for a mattress comprising an innerspring core.


CLS 267/104
TXT Device under subclass 103 wherein additional spacing means are provided,
    which additional means are connected at one of its ends to the loading
    surface between its edges, and connected at its other end to the spacing
    means or to a subjacent support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for spacing means connected intermediate the edges of a loading
    surface where the extending edge is not supported.


CLS 267/105
TXT Device under subclass 103 wherein a device is connected to spaced portions
    of the loading surface, so that the resiliency of one of the spaced
    portions is modified by the transmission and distribution of part of the
    load to another spaced portion.


CLS 267/106
TXT Device under subclass 103 wherein the elements which constitute the load
    surface extend less than the full width between the outermost frame
    elements, and a composite load surface is effected by utilizing two or more
    elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for supplementary spacing means intermediate the ends of a one
    piece, frame spanning load receiving element.


CLS 267/107
TXT Device under subclass 103 in which the spring spacing means of at least one
    side of the panel includes a generally U-shaped portion, connected at the
    ends thereof to the panel and the load supporting surface, respectively,
    and in which the apex of the U extends inwardly of the panel elements.


CLS 267/108
TXT Device under subclass 107 in which the apex of the V-shaped portion
    includes a coil spring.


CLS 267/109
TXT Device under subclass 103 wherein the spring spacing means of at least one
    side of the panel includes a generally U-shaped portion, connected at the
    ends thereof to the panel and the load supporting surface, respectively,
    and in which the apex of the U extends outwardly of the panel elements.


CLS 267/110
TXT Device under subclass 80 wherein the load receiving surface extends
    generally parallel to the frame and is connected at its outer edges to the
    frame.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass (110) are devices wherein the
    loading surface is bowed upwardly from the frame and wherein a load applied
    to the loading surface tends to urge the frame members away from each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103+,   for devices wherein the loading surface is connected to the frame
    by spring spacing means and see (1) Note to that subclass for the line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclass 259.1 for connecting clips (plate and wire) for
    bedsteads, which hold the end of the spring panel in place against the
    frame; and subclass 260 for a margin rim having connections for border
    wires.


CLS 267/111
TXT Device under subclass 110 wherein the load receiving surface is so mounted
    on or below the level of the frame that a load applied to the surface tends
    to urge the frame members inwardly toward each other.


CLS 267/112
TXT Device under subclass 111 wherein the surface is attached to the frame by
    elastic devices.


CLS 267/113
TXT Spring device under the class definition in which the spring element is a
    gas or a liquid within an enclosure.

    (1)     Note.  A spring device enclosure substantially filled with solid
    material is excluded from this subclass, even though the material be
    fluent, or liquid-saturated or air-saturated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64.11+, for a fluid spring device in a vehicle.


CLS 267/114
TXT Spring device under subclass 113 in which the enclosure is subject to
    decompression or fluid loss; and means for effecting said decompression or
    fluid loss to a predetermined extent over a predetermined interval.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195+,   for a vehicle spring combined with means for retarding its
    distortion or recovery; e.g., fluid dash pot.


CLS 267/115
TXT Spring device under subclass 113 for interpositioning between bodies in tow
    relation with one another to minimize the transfer of forces therebetween
    resulting from changes in velocity.


CLS 267/116
TXT Spring device under subclass 113 attachable either to a fixed, or to an
    approaching body at a location where it would be positioned between the
    bodies to minimize collisive impact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139+,   for a bumper using a solid-material spring device.


CLS 267/117
TXT Spring device under subclass 113 for positioning immediately contiguous to
    a human body part; e.g., to a chair seat, back rest, mat.

    (1)     Note.  The spring device of this subclass may be separated from
    direct contact with the human by nothing more than a flexible covering.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142+,   for a spring device for human comfort (e.g., seat cushion), in
    which a solid- material spring element is used for the cushioning effect.


CLS 267/118
TXT Spring device under subclass 113 in which the enclosure is bounded by
    structure defining top, bottom and side walls, one of which walls is
    substantially rigid and another is displaceable, throughout a broad area
    thereof, to recoverably vary the cubic capacity of the enclosure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for a fluid spring device enclosure entirely of flexible wall
    structure; or a fluid spring device flexible wall which is deflected at
    only a localized point thereof since it has no means for distributing a
    localized force throughout the wall.


CLS 267/119
TXT Spring device under subclass 118 for minimizing the force of impact in the
    shaping operation apparatus utilizing a high degree of impactive force
    (e.g., sheet metal drawing apparatus).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for a reciprocating-bed-cushioning device.

    130,    for a solid-material (e.g., coil spring) press cushion.


CLS 267/120
TXT Spring device under subclass 118 for use for cushioning either (a) parts of
    a vehicle supported by means other than said spring device or (b) structure
    for only auxiliary or temporarily association with a vehicle (e.g., seat or
    lading, respectively).


CLS 267/121
TXT Spring device under subclass 118 comprising (a) separate
    contractible-expansible chambers of which one is piston-modified and the
    other bellows or diaphragm modified, or (b) one such chamber and
    solid-material-spring means, other than for a mere piston-impetus purpose.


CLS 267/122
TXT Spring device under subclass 118 in which the displaceable wall comprises
    either (a) a separate, bidirectionally flexible wall member connected
    throughout its periphery to the side walls, or (b) accordion-pleated side
    wall structure.

    (1)     Note.  The bi-directionally flexible member may be a septum
    between, common to, and flexible simultaneously and inversely vary the
    capacity of, contiguous enclosures.


CLS 267/123
TXT Spring device under subclass 122 useful for affecting the operation of
    either a liquid-flow regulator or means for controlling the air-fuel
    mixture of an internal combustion engine.


CLS 267/124
TXT Spring device under subclass 118 in which the side wall structure defines a
    cylinder and the displaceable wall is a rigid member movable along and in
    substantially sealing proximity to said wall structure interior.


CLS 267/125
TXT Spring device under subclass 124 useful in an environment including
    apparatus for either (a) erecting access means to a subterranean supply of
    liquid or (b) extracting liquid from a subterranean supply.


CLS 267/126
TXT Spring device under subclass 124 including (a) passage means communicating
    between opposite sides of the piston for movements of the liquid or gas
    therebetween or (b) an accumulator or reservoir for the fluid communicating
    with the piston-provided enclosure.

    (1)     Note.  Unless separated from the piston chamber by a passage of
    significant length or substantial construction, a cubic capacity will be
    recognized only as an extension of a piston chamber and not a separate
    reservoir or accumulator for this subclass; and see (1) Note in subclass
    127.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124,    for a piston-operated fluid spring device provided with vent means
    to the ambient environment, or with access means for ambient air.


CLS 267/127
TXT Spring device under subclass 126 including means through the piston member
    for movement of liquid or gas to either side of said piston.

    (1)     Note.  Mere clearance between the piston and the cylinder interior
    wall structure is not considered passage means for this subclass, even
    though particularly dimensioned for this purpose.


CLS 267/128
TXT Spring device under subclass 124 in which an impetus for movement of the
    piston is provided by a separate, solid, resilient member.


CLS 267/129
TXT Spring device under subclass 124 including significant means for
    eliminating the passage of fluid between the periphery of the piston and
    the interior cylinder wall structure.


CLS 267/130
TXT Spring device under the class definition for minimizing the force of impact
    in the shaping operation of apparatus using a high degree of impactive
    force (e.g., sheet metal drawing apparatus).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    for a fluid-spring press cushion.


CLS 267/131
TXT Spring device under the class definition having one end attachable to a
    base portion of a seat for a human and another end extending therefrom for
    attachment to the seat portion over said base portion.


CLS 267/132
TXT Spring device under subclass 131 in which the seat is part of a
    human-propelled vehicle or of a motorcycle.


CLS 267/133
TXT Spring device under subclass 131 which is the sole means for retention of
    the seat portion above the base portion; and for arcuate, to-and-fro
    movement of the seat portion about a horizontal axis.


CLS 267/134
TXT Spring device under the class definition in which a portion of a spring
    element is movable in rubbing contact with a surface of a solid body or
    through a viscous body; said movement being responsive to the application
    of a force and impeded by said rubbing contact.

    (1)     Note.  Movement, for this subclass, may be (and usually is) that of
    a portion of a spring body as a consequence of the deformation of the body
    as a whole. The surface for rubbing contact may be that of another,
    concentric spring body.


CLS 267/135
TXT Spring device under subclass 134 in which said portion is the surface
    portion of a spirally wound body or one of the annuli of a set of plural,
    concentric (usually longitudinally spaced) annuli.


CLS 267/136
TXT Spring devices under the class definition for inhibiting or minimizing the
    undesirable effect of the force of an unintended blow or undesirable
    oscillation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113+,   for a fluid-spring shock absorber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 300 for a motor vehicle having a specific
    motor-to-body-frame relationship and wherein is provided yieldable means
    for minimizing the rocking of the motor about principal supports.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 560+ for a resilient means which forms part of
    a support structure.  See the note to this class (267) under the definition
    of subclass 560 for the line between Class 248 and Class 267.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 214 for shock-absorbing
    fenders for marine structures which employ a coil spring.


CLS 267/137
TXT Spring device under subclass 136 in which the body constitutes means in
    moving contact with work to modify the work and in which the spring device
    minimizes undesirable oscillation incident to said movable contact and work
    modification.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    for a piston-type fluid spring device for dampening the operation
    of a well drill.


CLS 267/138
TXT Spring device under subclass 136 in which the body is one of a pair of
    vehicle bodies in tow relation with one another and the spring device is
    interposable between the vehicle bodies to minimize the transfer of forces
    therebetween resulting from changes in velocity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    for fluid-spring device-type draft gear.


CLS 267/139
TXT Spring device under subclass 136 in which the body is one of a pair of
    bodies (e.g., vehicle and dock bodies) likely to undergo collisive impact
    and the spring device is positionable to minimize the effect of said impact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    for a bumper using a fluid spring device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    293,    Vehicle Fenders, subclasses 135+ for the combination of a bumper
    and a spring support therefor.


CLS 267/140
TXT Spring device under subclass 139 in which the spring element comprises a
    body of elastometic material; i.e., a product of latex or a synthetic
    substitute or equivalent of latex.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153,    for a spring device of general utility, including a spring element
    of rubber; and see the search notes thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    293,    Vehicle Fenders, subclass 136 for the combination of a bumper and
    an elastomeric support therefor.


CLS 267/140.11
TXT Including energy absorbing means or feature (e.g., supplemental vehicle
    equipment, such as motor mount, seat, etc., including additional fluid or
    friction energy absorber):Structure under subclass 136 wherein a means or
    feature, distinct from a resilient means, absorbs mechanical energy from a
    vibrating component, converts such absorbed energy to another form of
    energy, such as heat and thereby damps the absorbed energy.

    (1)     Note.  A mere spring, acting alone or in concert with others, is
    not considered an energy absorbing member for this subclass as the energy
    transferred is not changed in form or dissipated but returned almost in
    full to the vibrating member.

    (2)     Note.  Spring devices of the supporting type useful to cushion
    relative movement between vehicle parts and which do not involve
    substantial modification of the vehicle structure are not found herein and
    in the indented subclasses, but are found in other subclasses within this
    class.

    (3)     Note.  Devices in this and the indented subclasses include vehicle
    engine mounts many of which include hydraulic damping.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for individual vehicle suspension components.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 300+ for motor mounts having a specific
    motor to body frame relationship.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 562+ for a support including a spring and
    energy absorbing means.  (See line note under Search Class in Class 248,
    subclass 560).


CLS 267/140.12
TXT Having concentric coaxial spring between plural confining means for radial
    force:Structure under subclass 140.11 wherein the resilient means is an
    elastomeric or like spring radially disposed between two approximately
    concentric rigid tubular members with the energy from the vibrating
    component being applied not parallel to the central axis of the tubular
    members and the resilient means.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the devices included herein and the indented
    subclass have an inner tube which extends approximately all the way through
    the outer tube.


CLS 267/140.13
TXT Axial:
    Subject matter under subclass 140.11 wherein the resilient means is an
    elastomeric or like spring disposed between the vibrating component and a
    supporting component with the energy from the vibrating component being
    applied approximately parallel to the central axis of the resilient means.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the devices found herein and in the indented
    subclass have the spring located between two members spaced along the
    central axis of the spring either located as two end members or as an end
    member and an intermediate member.

    (2)     Note.  Many of the devices found herein and in the indented
    subclass have a conically shaped or tapered spring and have one of the end
    or intermediate members of cup-shape receiving the spring (e.g., cup/bush
    type).


CLS 267/140.14
TXT With electronic or magnetic control:
    Structure under subclass 140.13 wherein the means or feature for absorbing
    mechanical energy has its damping effect varied (increased or decreased) by
    application of electrical energy.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are devices which increase or decrease the
    vibration damping effect by using fluids which undergo a change in
    viscosity upon application of electrical energy (i.e., electroviscous
    fluids) and devices wherein a flow passage between fluid containing
    chambers is varied in effective cross-section by means responsive to
    application of electrical or magnetic energy.


CLS 267/140.15
TXT With electronic or magnetic control:
    Structure under subclass 140.11 wherein the means or feature for absorbing
    mechanical energy has its damping effect (increased or decreased) by
    application of electrical energy.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are devices which increase or decrease the
    vibration damping effect by using fluids which undergo a change in
    viscosity upon application of electrical energy (i.e., electroviscous
    fluids) and devices wherein a flow passage between fluid containing
    chambers is varied in effective cross-section by means responsive to
    application of electrical or magnetic energy.


CLS 267/140.2
TXT Variably preloaded:

    Structure under subclass 136 comprising means for varying the loading,
    e.g., tension, compression, shear, etc., of the resilient element so as to
    vary its characteristics.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 575 for a resilient support comprising variably
    preloaded resilent means.


CLS 267/140.3
TXT Having diverse resilient element:
    Structure under subclass 136 wherein a single spring comprises a plurality
    of resilient elements, at least one of which is different from another.


CLS 267/140.4
TXT Metallic and nonmetallic:

    Structure under subclass 140.3 comprising metallic and nonmetallic element.


CLS 267/140.5
TXT Diverse resistance to vibration along different axes:

    Structure under subclass 136 wherein the resilient means provides for
    vibration along at least two distinct translational and/or rotational axes
    and wherein the resistance of said resilient means to such vibration along
    one axis is different from that along at least one other axis.


CLS 267/141
TXT Structure under subclass 136 comprising a nonmetallic, resilient element.


CLS 267/141.1
TXT Plural resilient elements with rigid spacer:

    Structure under subclass 141 comprising a plurality of resilient elements
    which elements are separated by at least one nonresilient spacer element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, appropriate subclasses for a laminated bearing of
    nonmetallic resilient material separated by a nonresilient spacer.


CLS 267/141.2
TXT Confined between coaxial, vibrating annular members:

    Structure under subclass 141 wherein the resilient element is disposed
    between two coaxial rigid annular members and at least a part of the
    resilient element is restrained from radial movement by said members.


CLS 267/141.3
TXT Including radial contact surface, e.g., tapered or shouldered member:

    Structure under subclass 141.2 comprising a radial surface, such as a taper
    or shoulder, on one of the members which contacts the resilient element.


CLS 267/141.4
TXT Annular flange or collar embedded in resilient element:

    Structure under subclass 141.3 wherein one of the members comprises an
    annular flange or collar at least one edge of which is surrounded by the
    resilient element.


CLS 267/141.5
TXT Flanged or collared innermost member:

    Structure under subclass 141.4 wherein the flange or collar is on the
    member which most closely surrounds the common axis.


CLS 267/141.6
TXT Collapsible wall:

    Structure under subclass 141.3 comprising a three-dimensional free space
    bounded on at least one side by a resilient element whereby vibration of
    the members will cause the resilient element to distort and vary the shape
    and/or volume of the free space.


CLS 267/141.7
TXT Arcuate or tapered contact surface:

    Structure under subclass 141.3 wherein the surface which contacts the
    resilient element is (a) of arcuate configuration, or (b) inclined with
    respect to the axis of the annular members.


CLS 267/142
TXT Spring device under the class definition for positioning to bear the weight
    of a person, in a position directly to receive the force of said weight;
    i.e., separated therefrom by no more than a flexible covering.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes spring devices for seat cushions,
    back rests, resting mats, bed springs, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for an air spring cushion for human comfort.

    182,    for a seat cushion spring support (e.g., bracket).


CLS 267/143
TXT Spring device under subclass 142 comprising a plurality of spring elements
    of construction diverse from one another.

    (1)     Note.  Diversity of construction is recognizable by separate,
    coordinate classification concerning the element; e.g., coil, torsion,
    rubber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151+,   for compound coil springs of general utility; e.g., subclass 152,
    in which one of the diverse elements is an elastomeric body.


CLS 267/144
TXT Spring device under subclass 142 in which the spring element is unitary and
    undulating in shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165,    for a zigzag spring device of general utility.


CLS 267/145
TXT Spring device under subclass 142 in which the spring element is an
    elastomeric body; i.e., of latex or a synthetic substitute or equivalent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153,    for a rubber spring device of general utility; and see the subclass
    search notes.


CLS 267/146
TXT Spring device under subclass 142 comprising a cushion body made of
    nonmetallic filamentary material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148+,   for a fibrous-body spring device of general utility.


CLS 267/147
TXT Spring device under the class definition in which the spring element
    comprises an open work fabric of interwoven and densitized, and thereby
    crinkled, wire.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 605 for a
    fibrous metal mass.


CLS 267/148
TXT Spring device under the class definition in which the spring element is a
    filamentary, nonmetallic element; or a body made of such elements (e.g.,
    rope, mat).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 605 for a
    fibrous metal mass.


CLS 267/149
TXT Spring device under subclass 148 in which the filamentary element is a
    vitreous silicaceous product.


CLS 267/150
TXT Spring device under the class definition connectible to a pivotable body
    (e.g., aircraft caster wheel) so as to be unstressed when said body is in a
    normal position and to be put under stress by pivotal movement of said body
    from said position, whereby said spring device tends to return said body to
    said normal position.


CLS 267/151
TXT Spring device under the class definition comprising a plurality of spring
    elements of construction diverse from one another.

    (1)     Note.  Diversity of construction is recognized by separate,
    coordinate classification in this class; e.g., coil, torsion, rubber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121,    for a compound spring one of the elements of which is a piston-type
    fluid spring.

    143,    for a compound sping device in a cushion for human comfort (e.g.,
    seat cushion, rest pad or mat).

    259+,   for compound vehicle spring construction.


CLS 267/152
TXT Spring device under subclass 151 in which one of the spring elements is an
    elastomeric body of latex, or a synthetic substitute or equivalent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for a leaf-and-rubber type compound vehicle spring.

    33,     for a coil-and-rubber type compound vehicle spring.


CLS 267/153
TXT Spring device under the class definition comprising an elastomeric body;
    i.e., a latex product of a synthetic substitute or equivalent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140,    for a rubber spring device in shock- absorbing bumper construction.

    141,    for a rubber spring device in a shock absorber of the nonsupport
    type.

    145,    for a rubber spring device in a cushion for human comfort.

    292+,   for a rubber-type vehicle spring device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 220+ and 297 for a nonmetallic mounting means,
    or a sleeve or liner for a plain rotary bearing appropriate subclasses for
    flexible laminated bearings.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclass 228 for a composite bushing having
    an elastomeric component.


CLS 267/154
TXT Spring device under the class definition in which the spring element is a
    unitary member having a portion subject to a deforming force while another
    portion is retained against movement or is subject to a force which is
    substantially lesser than or opposite in direction to the first force;
    which element either (a) includes an unconvoluted portion to which the
    force is applied as an axial twist, or (b) constitutes a spirally wound
    body the number of turns of which tend to be changed by the application of
    the first-mentioned force.


CLS 267/155
TXT Spring device under subclass 154 in which the spring element is in the form
    of a spirally wound body.


CLS 267/156
TXT Spring device under subclass 155 in which the winding of the body is in the
    form of a substantially flat spiral.


CLS 267/157
TXT Spring device under subclass 155 which is subject to a compressive or
    expansive force; as well as said first-mentioned force.


CLS 267/158
TXT Spring device under the class definition in which the spring element is
    substantially planar through a cross-section thereof whereat bending occurs
    under a load.


CLS 267/159
TXT Spring device under subclass 158 in which the spring element is a unitary
    member, including a portion under stress resisting movement toward one side
    of a plane passing through the bending axis, which stress is reversible
    when said element or portion crosses said plane whereby to continue urging
    said element or portion away

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171,    for an over-center spring device energized by a coil-spring.


CLS 267/160
TXT Spring device under subclass 158 in which the spring element, or a group
    thereof, constitutes the sole support for a movable load member and the
    sole connection between said load member and another member fixed to its
    environment; whereby the direction of (generally, arcuate) movement of said
    load member is determined by the bending of said element, or group.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162,    for (1) a spring device including a resilient ring pack and spaced
    members connected to each of the ends thereof; which members are merely end
    connection elements of the spring device, rather than load members and (2)
    the combination of load means, a spring ring pack and rigid rod means
    extending through the common central aperture of the pack, whereby the
    control of movement of the load by the flexure of the spring device ring
    elements is negated or, at least, significantly inhibited or modified.

    178,    for a flexural support including a series of coil-springs between a
    fixed member and a relatively movable support which is the load member.


CLS 267/161
TXT Spring device under subclass 158 in which the spring element is annular in
    general configuration; or is generally circular and includes within the
    confines of its circle an annularly arranged group of separate, spaced,
    finger-like formations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163,    for a spring device element comprising a circular body and a
    plurality of extensions extending irregularly outwardly (rather than
    generally annularly and within the confines) thereof, so that neither the
    device nor the spider-like formation is generally annular.


CLS 267/162
TXT Spring device under subclass 161 in which there are a plurality of
    superposed and adjacent, annular spring elements or element portions for
    bending about a common flexural arc.


CLS 267/163
TXT Spring device under subclass 158 in which the spring element is provided
    with an elongated separation (e.g., slot) to define either spaced portions
    extending from an end thereof or finger-like formation within the confines
    of said element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161+,   for a bendable spring device element including an annularly
    arranged spider formation.


CLS 267/164
TXT Spring device under subclass 158 in which either (a) the spring element is
    a unitary member bent back upon itself intermediate the ends thereof to
    present superposed or confronting portions or (b) a group (e.g., pair) of
    separate, overlapping spring elements is provided; whereby said confronting
    portions or overlapping elements present a common bending plane or flexural
    arc.


CLS 267/165
TXT Spring device under subclass 164 comprising either (a) the structure of
    part (b) of the definition of subclass 164 or (b) the unitary spring
    element bent back upon itself at least twice to provide at least three
    portions sharing the common bending plane or flexural arc.


CLS 267/166
TXT Spring device under the class definition in which the spring element is in
    the form of a helix and is adapted to be extended or compressed in the
    direction of the helix axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 592 for metallic
    stock of helical configuration or having a helical component.


CLS 267/166.1
TXT Conical:

    Spring device under subclass 166 wherein the turns of the helix lie upon
    the surface of a cone.


CLS 267/167
TXT Spring device under subclass 166 maintained in the form of an endless loop.


CLS 267/168
TXT Spring device under subclass 166 including a pair of said elements, one of
    which surrounds the other directly (i.e., with no structural element
    intervening therebetween).


CLS 267/169
TXT Spring device under subclass 166 provided with means extending a
    substantial distance within the confines of the coils for limiting
    transaxial flexure.


CLS 267/170
TXT Spring device under subclass 166 including, in the use condition thereof, a
    member which is (a) separate from the spring element, (b) positioned at one
    end thereof, and (c) movable therewith during said extension or compression.


CLS 267/171
TXT Spring device under subclass 170, further including a second end thrust
    member at the other end of the spring element; and in which the spring
    element is adapted either (a) to maintain said end thrust members a
    predetermined distance apart or (b) selectively to maintain one of the
    members, or the contact point between said one member and the end of the
    element, at each of a pair or predetermined positions on opposite sides of
    the helix axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159,    for an over-center snap spring of leaf or disc construction.


CLS 267/172
TXT Spring device under subclass 170 and means having a surface movable along a
    path intersecting a position of the end thrust member for thrust reaction
    momentary engagement therewith.


CLS 267/173
TXT Spring device under subclass 170 in which the end thrust member
    constitutes, or is associated with, means movable about a fulcrum for a
    thrust reaction with said spring element.


CLS 267/174
TXT Spring device under subclass 170 wherein said end thrust member, has a
    movement intended to effect a condition change (e.g., actuate a valve, make
    or break a circuit), work stroke (e.g., piston movement), or work
    modification (i.e., tool function).


CLS 267/175
TXT Spring device under subclass 174, including means for selectively varying
    the spring force of the spring element whereby the character of movement of
    the member may correspondingly be selectively varied.


CLS 267/176
TXT Spring device under subclass 174 in which the spring element is adapted to
    resist said movement and to return said member to a starting position.


CLS 267/177
TXT Spring device under subclass 170 including means for selectively varying
    the spring force of the spring element whereby the character of the thrust
    reaction may be correspondingly varied.


CLS 267/178
TXT Spring device under subclass 170 either (a) for retaining an object against
    the forces of gravity, or (b) for supplementing the retention against
    gravity of a cantilever-supported object.


CLS 267/179
TXT Spring device under subclass 170 in which both the spring element and the
    end thrust member are particularly preshaped for the purpose of attachment
    with one another.


CLS 267/180
TXT Spring device under subclass 166 in which the spring element is of
    one-piece construction and (a) includes plural, intervoluted coils; or (b)
    is out-of-round in cross-section; or (c) in the unstressed condition
    thereof, includes portions which vary, one from another in (1) helix angle,
    or (2) distance from a common, central, longitudinal axis, or (3)
    cross-section.


CLS 267/181
TXT Spring device under the class definition in which the spring element is a
    multiperforate body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147,    for a compressed wire mesh spring element.

    161+    or 163, for a spring device flat-surfaced element which is slotted
    to provide bending planes.


CLS 267/182
TXT Subject matter under the class definition not classifiable elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes supports, per se, (e.g., frame,
    bracket) for a seat cushion spring device.


CLS 267/183
TXT Parallel depression (e.g., having stabilizer bar):

    Spring device under subclass 2 combined with equalizing means which tends
    to cause uniform displacement of all points along a substantially
    horizontal line contained in the vehicle chassis or body.

    (1)     Note.  The equalizing means typically factions to cause uniform
    displacement along a lateral axis, or along a longitudinal axis of the
    vehicle body antiroll.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, appropriate subclass for means for transmitting
    weight from the running gear to wheels on different axis in substantially
    equal proportion.


CLS 267/184
TXT Duplex:

    Spring device under subclass 183 wherein the equalizing means acts in two
    planes, thereby tending to cause uniform displacement of the chassis along
    both the lateral and longitudinal axis of the vehicle.


CLS 267/185
TXT Single pivot:

    Spring device under subclass 184 wherein all forces applied to the chassis
    by the equalizing means cause uniform displacement about a single point.


CLS 267/186
TXT Fluid stabilizer:

    Spring device under subclass 183 wherein the equalizing means employs a
    pressure fluid to case uniform displacement of the chassis of body.


CLS 267/187
TXT Including torque bar or pump:

    Spring device under subclass 186 wherein the equalizing means further
    comprises either (a) an elongated member which exhibits resilient
    characteristics when subjected to axial twist while transmitting equalizing
    stresses from one point to another on the vehicle, or (b) a discrete
    apparatus for dynamically increasing the pressure or velocity of the
    pressure fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188,    for a torsion stabilizer, per se.

    273,    for a vehicle torsion spring or torque bar, per se.


CLS 267/188
TXT Torque bar or tube stabilizer:

    Spring device under subclass 183 wherein the equalizing means includes an
    elongated member formed of metal or a similar material, and which exhibits
    resilient characteristics when subject to an axial twist while transmitting
    equalizing stress for  one point to another on the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS.

    187,    for a torsion bar equalizer combined with a fluid-operated
    equalizer.


CLS 267/189
TXT And elastomeric member:

    Spring device under subclass 188 wherein the equalizing means further
    comprises a member formed for rubber or a material which exhibits similar
    characteristics.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259,    for torque bar or tube combined with a rubber spring for use on a
    vehicle other than as an equalizer.

    276,    for a torque bar or tube-vehicle suspension spring combined with an
    elastomeric bushing.


CLS 267/190
TXT And coil spring:

    Spring device under subclass 188 including a coil-spring* which is employed
    either to cushion relative movement between parts of the vehicle, or to
    supplement the elongated resilient member in transmitting equalizing
    stresses from one point to another on the vehicle.


CLS 267/191
TXT And retarder:

    Spring device under subclass 188 including nonreacting means (e.g., a
    dashpot) for opposing and slowing distortion or recovery or a spring
    element.

    (1)     Note.  The spring element may serve to cushion relative movement of
    vehicle parts, or it may serve as an equalizer to ensure parallel
    depression of the parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195+,   for a mechanical spring and retarder (e.g., shock absorber), per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclass 129 for a frictional shock absorber with no
    restoring means (spring), and subclasses 266+ for a fluid resistance
    dashpot or shock absorber, per se.


CLS 267/192
TXT Leaf spring stabilizer:

    Spring device under subclass 183 wherein the equalizing means comprises a
    leaf-spring*.


CLS 267/193
TXT Leaf spring acting between pivoted links:

    Spring device under subclass 192 wherein portions of the leaf-spring* which
    are deflected relatively to each other are each connected to the vehicle by
    an intermediate element which turns about an attached pin or equivalent
    structure.


CLS 267/194
TXT Plural nontorsion coil springs:

    Spring device under subclass 183 wherein the equalizing means includes two
    discrete coil- springs* adapted to be extended and compressed in the
    direction of their central axes.


CLS 267/195
TXT Mechanical spring and nonresilient retarder (e.g., shock absorber):

    Spring device under subclass 2 including a nonfluid (mechanical) spring
    element for cushioning relative movement between the vehicle parts combined
    with nonreacting means for opposing and slowing the distortion or recovery
    of the spring element.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and its indents include shock absorber which
    are combined with a nonfluid spring element for returning the vehicle parts
    connected by the shock absorbers to a neutral position after they have been
    displaced therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64.15+, for a fluid spring combined with a motion retarder (shock absorber).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 197.05+ for a snubber combined
    with railway truck structure.

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 266+ for an internal resistance motion retarder,
    wherein energy absorbed during displacement of the parts out of normal
    position is not returned to restore the parts to normal position.


CLS 267/196
TXT Friction (e.g., "snubber"):

    Spring device under subclass 195 wherein the retarder comprises two
    friction surfaces which are caused to rub against each other to slow the
    distortion or recovery of the spring element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134+,   for a friction snubber which is not peculiarly adapted for use on a
    vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 129+ for a vehicle friction shock absorber, per
    se, having a spring biased friction surface, but in which there is no
    distortion of the spring as the parts move relative to each other.

    213,    Railway Draft Appliances, subclasses 22+ for a cushioned railway
    draft appliance employing a spring and friction surfaces, and subclasses
    220+ for a car end bumper or buffer, per se.


CLS 267/197
TXT Including flexible strap connector:

    Spring device under subclass 196 including an elongated flaccid element
    connected to or forming part of the retarder, and having one end connected
    to one of the sprung vehicle parts, whereby relative motion of the vehicle
    parts away from each other is accommodated through the flaccid element, and
    the spring element subsequently draws the vehicle parts toward one another
    through the flaccid element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 65.1 for a brake which operates on a strand such
    as a rope, band, etc.


CLS 267/198
TXT Strap forms friction element:

    Spring device under subclass 197 wherein one of the two surfaces which are
    caused to rub against each other is on the elongated flaccid element.

    (1)     Note.  The surfaces must be that of a flaccid element and not of a
    separate brake shoe attached to the flaccid element.


CLS 267/199
TXT Flat spiral spring:

    Spring device under subclass 197 wherein the spring element comprises a
    coil of at least one complete turn about an axis and wherein all turns lie
    in a single plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198,    for a device in which the friction occurs between the spiral spring
    element and the flaccid element.


CLS 267/200
TXT Having lubricating feature:

    Spring device under subclass 196 including a friction reducing fluid, or
    means to store or facilitate the application of the friction reducing fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37.4,   for leaf-spring covering provided with a lubricant reservoir or pad.

    268,    for end connection for a vehicle leaf- spring provided with means
    to apply or pass a lubricant.


CLS 267/201
TXT Elastomeric spring or friction element:

    Spring device under subclass 196 an element formed of rubber or a material
    exhibiting similar characteristics and which serves either (a) as the
    spring element, (b) a friction surface, or (c) as a means for biasing the
    friction surfaces against each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    292,    for a rubber spring element, per se, which is peculiarly adapted
    for use on a vehicle.


CLS 267/202
TXT And helical coil spring:

    Spring device under subclass 201 including a helical coil-spring element
    which acts between the parts of the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  Those devices having coil- springs which bias friction
    elements only are excluded.


CLS 267/203
TXT Plural coil springs:

    Spring device under subclass 202 including a second discrete helical
    coil-spring* element which acts between the parts of the vehicle.


CLS 267/204
TXT Friction surface on helical spring:

    Spring device under subclass 196 wherein one of the surfaces ehich rub
    against each other is located on a helical coil-spring*.


CLS 267/205
TXT Including cam or wedge friction element or actuator therefor:

    Spring device under subclass 196 including two members or portions having
    contacting relatively moving surfaces, wherein at least one of the surfaces
    is sloped or curved to force the friction surfaces against each other.

    (1)     Note.  The cam or wedge surface may also serve as the "friction
    surfaces".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201+,   for a retarder which employs a cam or wedge for compressing an
    elastomeric friction element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    213,    Railway Draft Appliances, subclasses 32+ for similar devices which
    are peculiar to railway use.


CLS 267/206
TXT Helical cam surface:

    Spring device under subclass 205 wherein the sloped or curved surface
    defines or is formed upon a helix.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204,    for retarding devices where a helical spring serves as one of the
    friction surfaces.


CLS 267/207
TXT Plural axially spaced expandable friction rings:

    Spring device under subclass 205 having a central axis along which parts or
    the device connected to the sprung vehicle portions are caused to move,
    wherein a plurality or discrete expandable annular members, each carrying a
    friction surface on its peripheral face, are located at different points
    along the axis.


CLS 267/208
TXT Including relatively rotating friction surfaces (e.g., drum type):

    Spring device under subclass 205 wherein one of the rubbing surfaces is
    caused to revolve or swing in contact with the other surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    213,    Railway Draft Appliances, subclass 28 for similar devices peculiar
    to railway use.


CLS 267/209
TXT Including helical coil spring:

    Spring device under subclass 205 including a helical coil-spring* which
    serves either as the spring element for cushioning the relatively moving
    parts of the vehicle or for biasing the friction, wedge or cam surfaces
    toward or away from one another.


CLS 267/210
TXT Transversely oriented coil for biasing friction surfaces:

    Spring device under subclass 209 wherein the helical coil-spring* serves to
    resiliently urge the friction surfaces toward or away from one another, and
    the central axis of the spring is oriented at an angle to the vertical when
    the device is mounted on the vehicle.


CLS 267/211
TXT Plural laterally spaced coils (e.g., spring group):

    Spring device under subclass 209 including a second helical coil-spring*,
    wherein a substantial part of one of the helical coil-spring*, wherein the
    axes of the two springs are spaced from each other.


CLS 267/212
TXT Nested coil springs:

    Spring device under subclass 209 including a second helical coil-spring*,
    wherein a substantial part of one of the helical springs occuples the area
    within the other helical spring.


CLS 267/213
TXT Inside friction shell:

    Spring device under subclass 212 wherein a substantial portion of each
    helical spring lies within a hollow member on which is located one of the
    frictions surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204,    for similar devices in which the spring rubs against the surface of
    the shell to provide the snubbing action.


CLS 267/214
TXT Friction surface formed on or biased by additional spring:

    Spring device under subclass 196 including a second element which exhibits
    resilient characteristics and which tends to force the friction surface
    into or out of contact with each other.

    (1)     Note.  Devices having a spring which serves to bias the vehicle
    parts and the friction elements are not classified here on that basis.

    (2)     Note.  The friction surface may be on the spring itself, but see
    this class, subclass 204 for those devices which employ a friction surface
    formed on a helical spring.


CLS 267/215
TXT Relatively rotating friction surfaces (e.g., drum type):

    Spring device under subclass 214 wherein one of the rubbing surfaces is
    caused to revolve or swing while in contact with the other surface.


CLS 267/216
TXT Coil spring for biasing vehicle parts and friction surfaces:

    Spring device under subclass 196 wherein the spring element which serves to
    cushion relative movement between the parts of the vehicle comprises a
    coil-spring* which also tend to force the rubbing surfaces toward or away
    from each other.


CLS 267/217
TXT Fluid retarder:

    Spring device under subclass 195 wherein the viscosity of a liquid or gas
    is employed for opposing and slowing the distortion or recovery of the
    spring element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 51+ and 66+ for a fluid check
    and spring system for use with a closure (e.g., door).

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 197.05 for a hydraulically-dampened
    spring bolster for a railway truck.

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 266+ for a fluid retarder with no claimed spring
    element.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 668 for vehicle front-ends which include
    "MacPhersonTM type" struts.


CLS 267/218
TXT With separate pump or adjustment for spring loading:

    Spring device under subclass 217 including either (a) Discrete means in
    addition to the fluid retarder for raising, transferring or compressing the
    liquid or gas, or (b) means by which the spring force exerted on the
    vehicle parts at a particular relative position of the parts may be varied.


CLS 267/219
TXT Elastomeric spring:

    Spring device under subclass 217 wherein the spring element is formed of
    rubber or a material which exhibits similar characteristics.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     for a fluid spring combined with an elastomeric spring.


CLS 267/220
TXT Mounted at end of retarder:

    Spring device under subclass 219 wherein the rubber or rubber-like spring
    element is attached at or immediately adjacent to a terminal portion of the
    retarder.

    (1)     Note.  The rubber or rubber-like bushing is normally located at the
    point or attachment to the vehicle.


CLS 267/221
TXT Helical coil spring:

    Spring device under subclass 217 wherein the spring element is a helical
    coil-spring*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for a fluid spring combined with a helical coil-spring.


CLS 267/222
TXT Quadrilateral suspension:

    Spring device under subclass 221 including four links pivoted together to
    form a four-sided polygon, wherein the relatively moving parts of the
    vehicle are connected to or serve as separate links, whereby relative
    movement between the vehicle parts cause the shape of the polygon to change.

    (1)     Note.  Typically, the links comprise the upper and lower control
    arms, the wheel axle support, and the vehicle chassis, and the arrangement
    is applied to separate wheels as an "independent suspension" system.


CLS 267/223
TXT And rocking actuator arm or rotary fluid displacement member:

    Spring device under subclass 221 wherein the retarder includes either (a) a
    pivoted lever which is caused to pivot upon relative motion between the
    vehicle parts to effect operation of the retarder, or (b) a rotatably
    mounted member having a surface thereon which displaces or moves through
    the retarding fluid to effect the opposing and retarding action.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 266+ for a fluid dashpot, per se, particularly
    subclasses 306+ for those having an arcuately oscillating thrust member.


CLS 267/224
TXT Plural mechanical spring for biasing vehicle parts:

    Spring device under subclass 223 including a second discrete nonfluid
    spring element which cushions relative movement between the vehicle parts.


CLS 267/225
TXT Plural mechanical springs for biasing vehicle parts:

    Spring device under subclass 221 including a second discrete nonfluid
    spring element which cushions relative movement between the vehicle parts.


CLS 267/226
TXT Spring within coaxial fluid chamber:

    Spring device under subclass 221 including an enclosure for containing the
    liquid or gas, wherein a substantial portion of the helical coil-spring*
    element is located within the enclosure, and the central longitudinal axis
    of the enclosure coincides with the central axis of the spring helix.


CLS 267/227
TXT Leaf spring:

    Spring device under subclass 217 wherein the spring element is a
    leaf-spring*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31+,    for a fluid spring combined with a leaf- spring.


CLS 267/228
TXT Lever and nontorsion spring:

    Spring device under subclass 2 including a discrete swingably mounted,
    force multiplying link through which stress is applied to a spring element
    to compress, expand or laterally deflect a portion of the spring element.

    (1)     Note.   Devices in which the link forms an essential part of the
    spring element are excluded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195+,   for a spring connected through a lever to a shock absorber,
    especially subclasses 201+, 219, and 221+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 688+ for vehicle suspension means which
    include any claimed vehicle structure in addition to the spring device and
    suspension links.  Class 267 devices may include vehicle parts directly
    related to the vehicle suspension, or vehicle parts (e.g., "vehicle
    chassis") which are nominally recited as either a reference or mounting
    structure or the spring device.


CLS 267/229
TXT Leaf spring:

    Spring device under subclass 228 including a spring element in the form of
    a leaf-spring* for cushioning relative movement of the vehicle parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    271,    for an end connection in the form of a shackle for a vehicle
    leaf-spring.

    283,    for a multilayer leaf torsion spring.


CLS 267/230
TXT Quadrilateral suspension:

    Spring device under subclass 229 including four rigid links pivoted
    together to form a four-sided polygon, wherein the relatively moving parts
    of the vehicle are connected to different links, and one link servers as
    the "lever" connected to the spring element, whereby relative movement
    between the vehicle parts causes the shape of the polygon to change.

    (1)     Note.  Typically, the links comprise the upper and lower control
    arms, the wheel axil support, and the vehicle chassis, and the arrangement
    is applied to separate wheels as an "independent suspension".


CLS 267/231
TXT And coil spring:

    Spring device under subclass 229 further including a second spring element
    in the form of a coil-spring* for cushioning relative movement of the
    vehicle parts.

    (1)     Note.  The lever may act upon either the leaf-spring or the
    coil-spring, or both.


CLS 267/232
TXT And roller:

    Spring device under subclass 231 including a generally round rotatable
    element which is caused to roll along the surface of the leaf spring or an
    adjacent member as the vehicle parts move relatively and the leaf spring is
    deflected.


CLS 267/233
TXT And "overload" bumper:

    Spring device under subclass 231 including a member or portion which limits
    relative movement of the vehicle parts by striking another member or
    portion.


CLS 267/234
TXT Including adjustment for spring loading:

    Spring device under subclass 231 including means by which the force exerted
    by an spring element on the vehicle parts at a particular relative position
    of the parts may be selectively varied.


CLS 267/235
TXT Adjusting screw coaxial with coil spring:

    Spring device under subclass 234 wherein the means to selectively vary the
    spring force includes and elongated helically ribbed element rotatable
    about its longitudinal axis, which coincides with the central axis of the
    coil- spring* element.


CLS 267/236
TXT Plural coils between vertically spaced leaf springs:

    Spring device under subclass 231 including a second leaf-spring* located
    above the first leaf-spring* with respect to the vehicle, wherein two
    discrete coil-springs* are located between the two leaf-springs.

    (1)     Note. Elliptical and semielliptical leaf-spring* arrangements are
    considered to be "vertically spaced".


CLS 267/237
TXT Plural coaxial coils:

    Spring device under subclass 231 including a second coil-spring* for
    cushioning relative movement of the vehicle parts, wherein the central axes
    of the two coils coincide.


CLS 267/238
TXT Nested coils:

    Spring device under subclass 237 wherein the coil-springs* are coaxial and
    a substantial portion of one spring is located within the other spring.


CLS 267/239
TXT Having leaf-end-connecting lever:

    Spring device under subclass 321 wherein the discrete link connects the end
    of the leaf- spring* to the vehicle, or to another spring element which is
    in turn connected to the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  A mere shackle connecting a leaf-spring* with the vehicle or
    another leaf-spring is not considered to be a "lever" for purposes of
    classification in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    271,    for a leaf-spring combined with shackle for connecting it to the
    vehicle.


CLS 267/240
TXT Coil spring between lever and vehicle part:

    Spring device under subclass 239 wherein one end of the coil-spring*
    engages the discrete link or structure rigidly connected thereto, and the
    other end engages one of the sprung vehicle parts or structure rigidly
    connected thereto.

    (1)     Note.  A coil-spring* which is connected to the leaf-spring* at or
    immediately adjacent to the leaf spring's point of attachment to a vehicle
    part is considered to "engage one of the sprung vehicle parts".


CLS 267/241
TXT And fluid pressure spring:

    Spring device under subclass 229 including, in addition to the
    leaf-spring*, and apparatus which utilizes a fluid medium to provide a
    resilient cushion between the relatively moveable vehicle parts.


CLS 267/242
TXT Including adjustment for spring loading:

    Spring device under subclass 229 including means by which the spring force
    exerted ton the vehicle parts at a particular relative position of the
    parts may be selectively varied.


CLS 267/243
TXT And roller or bearing to accommodate deflection of spring:

    Spring device under subclass 229 including structure which permits rolling
    or sliding contact between the leaf-spring* element, or adjacent vehicle
    structure.


CLS 267/244
TXT Vertically spaced leaf springs (e.g., elliptic):

    Spring device under subclass 229 including a second discrete leaf-spring*
    spaced above the first leaf-spring* with respect to the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  One spring must be located above or below the other spring
    when the device is unstressed or in equilibrium.


CLS 267/245
TXT Having serially pivoted levers at end of spring:

    Spring device under subclass 229 wherein the discrete link is pivotally
    connected to the spring element, and a second discrete link is pivotally
    connected to the first link and additionally to one of the sprung vehicle
    parts.


CLS 267/246
TXT Transverse leaf spring:

    Spring device under subclass 229 wherein the longitudinal axis of the
    leaf-spring* is oriented laterally with respect to the vehicle chassis.


CLS 267/247
TXT Center acting or resiliently biased lever:

    Spring device under subclass 229 wherein either (a) the discrete link acts
    through a point along the length of the leaf-spring which is closer to its
    longitudinal center that an end thereof, or (b) the discrete link or a
    separate element is formed of an elastically deformable material to bias
    the link against the leaf-spring*


CLS 267/248
TXT Coil spring:

    Spring Device under subclass 228 wherein the spring element comprises a
    coil-spring*.


CLS 267/249
TXT Enclosed spring:

    Device under subclass 248 including a housing which surrounds the spring
    element.

    (1)     Note.  The "housing" may comprise one or more members which
    collectively enclose the spring, and may serve some additional purpose in
    addition to merely enclosing the spring.


CLS 267/250
TXT Plural coaxial coils in enclosure:

    Spring device under subclass 249 wherein a second coil-spring* is located
    within the housing, and the longitudinal axes of the coils coincide.


CLS 267/251
TXT Plural nontorsion coil springs:

    Spring device under subclass 248 including a second coil-spring* element
    for cushioning relative movement of the vehicle parts, wherein each of the
    coil-spring elements is deflected axially upon relative movement of the
    vehicle parts.


CLS 267/252
TXT Coaxial:

    Spring device under subclass 251 wherein the two coil-spring* elements have
    the some longitudinal axis.


CLS 267/253
TXT Differentially deflected by lever:

    Spring device under sublass 251 wherein the discrete link causes
    simultaneous deflection of both coil-spring* elements in unequal amounts
    for a giver displacement of said link.


CLS 267/254
TXT Quadrilateral suspension:

    Spring device under subclass 248 including four rigid links pivoted
    together to form a four-sided polygon, wherein the relatively moving parts
    of the vehicle are connected to different links and one link serves as the
    "lever" connected to the spring element, whereby relative movement between
    the vehicle parts causes the shape of the polygon to change.

    (1)     Note.  Typically, the links comprise the upper and lower control
    arms, the wheel axle support, and the vehicle chassis, and the arrangement
    is applied between a vehicle wheel and chassis as an "independent
    suspension".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222,    for a quadrilateral vehicle suspension which includes a shock
    absorber and coil-springs.


CLS 267/255
TXT Including adjustment for spring loading:

    Spring device under subclass 248 including means by which the spring force
    exerted on the vehicle parts at a particular relative position of the parts
    may be varied.


CLS 267/256
TXT Fluid spring:

    Spring device under subclass 228 which utilizes a compressible fluid to
    resiliently cushion the vehicle parts, wherein the discrete link is
    employed to transmit relative motion of the vehicle parts to a surface
    bearing against the fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64.11+, for other fluid springs adapted for use in vehicles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 702+ for a vehicle suspension system
    which employs a fluid spring, and see the search note to Class 280 in the
    subclass 228 definition (this class) for the line.


CLS 267/257
TXT Elastomeric spring:

    Spring device under subclass 228 wherein the spring element is formed of
    rubber or a material which exhibits similar characteristics.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 560+ for a resilient support, and see the
    subclass 560 definition or a statement of the line.


CLS 267/258
TXT Annular or spherical:

    Spring device under subclass 257 wherein the spring element is either in
    the form of a cylindrical ring or a sphere.


CLS 267/259
TXT Compound:

    Spring device under subclass 2 having individual diverse spring elements
    each of which serves to cushion relative movement between parts of the
    vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  The original basis of classification in this and indented
    subclasses was by total disclosure rather than by claimed disclosure; i.e.,
    if a claimed spring element was specifically intended to be used in
    combination with a leaf-spring, the leaf-spring is considered to be part of
    the device for classification purposes, even though not actually claimed.

    (2)     Note.  A rubber bushing employed to mount a spring element in most
    cases is not considered to be an "individual" spring element itself,
    particularly where its cushioning effect is negligible when compared with
    the spring element itself, particularly where its cushioning effect is
    negligible when compared with the spring element.  However, where the
    disclosure clearly indicates or implies a cushioning effect upon the
    vehicle parts, and elastomeric element has been considered to be a separate
    spring element. Likewise, a torsion tube assembly comprising a steel
    torsion rod with a surrounding elastomeric sleeve to cushion the vehicle
    parts is not considered to be diverse spring elements, but rather an
    individual torsion spring for subclasses 273+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121,    for a compound spring, one element of which is a piston-type fluid
    spring.

    143,    for a compound spring employed in a cushion for human comfort
    (e.g., seat cushion).

    151+,   for a compound spring of general utility.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 662, 697 and 715 for vehicle suspensions
    employing plural diverse springs.


CLS 267/260
TXT Having specific end connection:

    Spring device under subclass 36.1 wherein significance is attributed to the
    particular structure used to attach and end of the leaf spring to part of
    the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  Cantilever springs are excluded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for a leaf-spring combined with an elastomeric spring which is
    disclosed as having a cushioning effect upon the vehicle parts.

    229+,   for a leaf-spring having and end connection in the form of a lever
    for applying stress to the spring.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joint and Connections, appropriate subclasses for a connection
    between the end of a spring and another member and including only as much
    of the spring as is necessary to effect the connection.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 582 for a
    metallic intermediate article or blank which is provided with an outward
    flange.


CLS 267/261
TXT For elliptic spring:

    Spring device under subclass 260 wherein the spring element comprises two
    distinct bowed leaf-springs* joined together at each end to form an ellipse.


CLS 267/262
TXT Sliding:

    Spring device under subclass 260 wherein the connecting structure
    constrains the end of the spring element to relative transnational motion
    with respect to the connecting structure or the vehicle part to which it is
    connected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243,    for a lever-actuated leaf-spring and a bearing or roller to
    accommodate deflection of the spring element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 362+ for a hinge which allows
    relative translation of the hinged member.


CLS 267/263
TXT Including spring for biasing pivotal connection:

    Spring device under subclass 260 wherein the connection structure swingably
    connects the leaf-spring to the vehicle, and a resilient element in
    addition to the connecting structures is provided and acts between the end
    of the leaf-spring and the connecting structure of vehicle part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259+,   for an end connection in the form of a diverse-type spring.


CLS 267/264
TXT Including threaded or grooved bearing surface:

    Spring device under subclass 260 wherein the connecting structure includes
    a first apertured element in which pivots a second element, wherein the
    apertured element and the exterior of the second element are provided with
    cooperating threads or otherwise grooved or rigided surfaces to restrict
    relative sliding movement between the two elements.


CLS 267/265
TXT Including spring position adjustment or geared connection:

    Spring device under subclass 260 where in the connecting structure includes
    either (a) means to selectively fix the leaf-spring* in any one of a
    plurality of relative position with respect to the part of the vehicle to
    which it is connected, or (b) a first rotary member having teeth which mesh
    with teeth formed on a second relatively movable member, whereby relative
    motion between the leaf-spring* and vehicle part causes relative movement
    between the toothed members.


CLS 267/266
TXT Universal joint:

    Spring device under subclass wherein the connecting structure permits
    relative pivotal movement between the leaf-spring* and the vehicle part to
    which it is connected, wherein the pivotal movement occurs about two
    orthogonal axes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 366+ for a hinge which permits
    movement of hinged members about plural axes.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 52+ for articulation axes.


CLS 267/267
TXT Having rolling antifriction elements (e.g., ball bearing):

    Spring device under subclass 260 wherein the connecting structure includes
    a plurality of discrete elements having a circular cross section and
    located between relatively moving surfaces to eliminate friction between
    the surfaces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, appropriate subclasses for an antifriction bearing (e.g.,
    ball or roller bearing) and nominally claimed spring and vehicle structure.


CLS 267/268
TXT Having lubrication feature:

    Spring device under subclass 260 including means at the end connection to
    store or facilitate the application of a friction reducing fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37.4,   for a vehicle leaf-spring covering having a lubricant reservoir or
    pad.


CLS 267/269
TXT Including elastomeric material:

    Spring device under subclass 260 including a portion formed of rubber or a
    material which exhibits similar characteristics.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for a leaf-spring combined with a rubber spring which is employed
    to cushion the parts of the vehicle. The patents classified in this
    subclass generally disclose a bushing whose cushioning effect on the
    vehicle parts is negligible compared with that of the leaf-spring (i.e.,
    the bushing is intended to impart "give" to leaf spring end about an axis).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 220+ and 297 for nonmetallic sleeves on liners
    for supporting the ends of an oscillating rotary shaft.


CLS 267/270
TXT Including tapered bushing or inner and outer sleeve for cylindrical bushing:

    Spring device under subclass 269 wherein the connecting structure allows
    pivotal movement and includes either a hollow conical or tubular
    elastomeric element, the latter having contiguous relatively rigid tubular
    elements along its inside and outside surfaces.


CLS 267/271
TXT Including shackle pivoted to spring and to vehicle:

    Spring device under subclass 260 wherein the connecting structure includes
    a rigid link having one end swingably connected to the end of the
    leaf-spring, and the other end swingably connected to the part of vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229+,   for a leaf-spring which is deflected by a lever.


CLS 267/272
TXT Flat spiral:

    Spring device under subclass 2 whichincludes a coil-spring* element, all
    turns of which lie in the same plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199,    for a vehicle suspension employing a flat spiral spring to both
    resiliently cushion and dampen motion between the vehicle parts.


CLS 267/273
TXT Torsion:

    Spring device under subclass 2 wherein the spring element is subjected to a
    twisting force about its central axis when the vehicle parts are relatively
    displaced, and undergoing a resultant elastic deformation about said axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154+,   for a torsion spring or general utility.

    188+,   for a vehicle torque bar or tube-type stabilizer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 700 and 721 for a torsion spring vehicle
    suspension.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, subclass 97 for a coaxial torsion bar coupling for a rotary
    shaft.


CLS 267/274
TXT Quadrilateral suspension:

    Spring device under subclass 273 including four rigid links pivoted
    together to form a four-sided polygon, wherein the relatively moving parts
    of the vehicle are connected to or serve as separate links, whereby
    relative movement between the vehicle parts causes the shape of the polygon
    to change.

    (1)     Note.  Typically, the links comprise the upper and lower control
    arms, the wheel axle support, and the vehicle chassis, and the arrangement
    is applied to separate wheels as an "independent suspension" system.


CLS 267/275
TXT Helical torsion coil:

    Spring device under subclass  273 wherein the spring element is in the form
    of a spiral lying in the surface of a cylinder, and is subjected to a
    twisting force about the axis of the cylinder to cushion the relatively
    moving vehicle parts.


CLS 267/276
TXT And separate elastomeric member (e.g., bushing):

    Spring device under subclass 273 including a member formed of rubber or a
    device which exhibits similar characteristics, and which contributes at
    most an insignificant cushioning effect upon the vehicle parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259+,   for a torsion spring combined with an elastomeric spring, each of
    which has a significant cushioning effect upon the vehicle parts.


CLS 267/277
TXT And adjustment for varying spring loading: Spring device under subclass 273
    including means by which the spring force exerted on the vehicle parts at a
    particular relative position of the parts may be varied.


CLS 267/278
TXT Screw threaded adjustment:

    Spring device under subclass 277 wherein the means for varying the spring
    loading comprises two contacting elements, one having a helically ribbed
    surface which engages cooperating structure on the other element, whereby
    relative rotation between the two elements causes a corresponding change in
    spring loading.


CLS 267/279
TXT Elastomeric torsion spring:

    Spring device under subclass 273 wherein the spring element is formed of
    rubber or a material which exhibits similar characteristics.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 220+ and 297 for a nonmetallic sleeve or liner
    for a rotary plain bearing.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, appropriate subclasses for a nonmetallic torsion spring
    coupling or housing for a rotary shaft.


CLS 267/280
TXT Plural axially spaced elastomeric elements:

    Spring device under subclass 279 including  a second discrete torsion
    spring element formed of rubber or a material which exhibits similar
    characteristics and which also serves to cushion relative movement between
    the vehicle parts, wherein the two spring elements are spaced apart along
    the torsion axis.


CLS 267/281
TXT And attached inner and outer metallic sleeves:

    Spring device under subclass 279 including an inner and an outer ring, each
    formed of metal and fastened to the spring element in such a manner that
    the spring element occupies an annular space defined between the two rings.


CLS 267/282
TXT Plural concentric elastomeric rings:

    Spring device under subclass 281 including a second discrete annular
    torsion spring element which is formed of rubber or a material which
    exhibits similar characteristics, wherein the central axes of the two
    spring elements coincide, and one spring element is located within the
    other.


CLS 267/283
TXT Multilayer leaf:

    Spring device under subclass 273 wherein the spring element comprises a
    plurality of contiguous, superposed plates or bars which are subjected to a
    twisting force about their length.


CLS 267/284
TXT And housing enclosing spring:

    Spring device under subclass 273 including a casing which substantially
    surrounds the spring element.


CLS 267/285
TXT Plural torsion spring:

    Spring device under subclass 273 including a second spring element which is
    subjected to a twisting force about its central axis when the vehicle parts
    are relatively displaced, and undergoes a resultant elastic deformation
    about that axis.

    (1)     Note. Patents claiming only one torsion spring and showing an
    identical spring arrangement on another axle or vehicle portion have not
    been included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259+,   for a torsion spring used in combination with a different-type
    spring.


CLS 267/286
TXT Coil:

    Spring device under subclass 2 wherein the spring element comprises a
    *coil-spring.

    (1)     Note.  Patents having claims to the spring element structure, per
    se, (e.g., cross section, composition) have been classified in subclasses
    166+ even if a generic disclosure includes vehicle use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166+,   for coil-spring element structure, per se.


CLS 267/287
TXT Having stiffener:

    Spring device under subclass 286 including a device attached between the
    coils of the spring element to increase the spring constant of the spring
    element.

    (1)     Note.  An additional coil-spring is not considered to be a
    "stiffener" as defined above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290,    for a first coil-spring element having a second nested coil spring
    element which serves to increase the spring constant of the overall device.


CLS 267/288
TXT Conical:

    Spring device under subclass 286 wherein the turns of the coil-spring* lie
    on the surface of a cone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166.1,  for a conical coil-spring which is not specifically adapted for
    vehicle use.

    231+,   for a vehicle spring device comprising a conical coil-spring, a
    leaf-spring, and a lever through which stress is applied to the leaf spring.


CLS 267/289
TXT Plural coils:

    Spring device under subclass 286 including a second coil-spring* element
    for cushioning movement between the vehicle parts.


CLS 267/290
TXT Nested:

    Spring device under subclass 289 wherein a substantial part of one of the
    spring element lies within the other spring element.


CLS 267/291
TXT Having guide rods extending through coils:

    Spring device under subclass 289 wherein each of two coil-spring elements
    have a rigid bar or tube located inside and oriented along or parallel to
    the central axis of the coil, and which slidingly engages cooperating
    structure attached to the other end of the coil as the spring elements are
    compressed.


CLS 267/292
TXT Elastomeric:

    Spring device under subclass 2 wherein the spring element which cushions
    relative movement between the vehicle parts is formed or rubber or a
    material which exhibits similar characteristics.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153,    for an elastomeric spring of general utility.

    183,    for an elastomeric stabilizer.

    259+,   for a compound spring including an elastomeric spring.

    275+,   for an elastomeric spring and lever actuator.

    279+,   for an elastomeric torsion spring.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 220+ for an nonmetallic resilient mounting for
    a plain rotary bearing, and subclass 297 for a nonmetallic sleeve or liner
    for a plain rotary bearing.


CLS 267/293
TXT Including central guide rod or tube through spring:

    Spring device under subclass 292 wherein the elastomeric spring element is
    provided with a central opening through which an elongated bar or cylinder
    extends, wherein the bar or cylinder is caused to slide along cooperating
    structure during relative displacement of the vehicle parts, thereby
    restricting movement of portions of the spring device to the along the
    longitudinal axis of the bar or cylinder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201+,   for a similar device which includes a friction retarder.

    219+,   for a similar device which includes a fluid retarder.


CLS 267/294
TXT Having rigid spacer plate between plural elastomeric segments:

    Spring device under subclass 292 wherein the spring element includes a
    relatively thin planar member formed of a substantially nonresilient
    material and attached between two adjacent elastomeric portions.


CLS 269/
TTL WORK HOLDERS

CLS 269/
TXT INDEX TO CLASS DEFINITION AND NOTES

    I       CLASS DEFINITION

    II      EXPLANATORY NOTE ON SCOPE OF CLASS

    III     DEFINITION OF TERMS

    IV      HOLDER, PER SE, ELSEWHERE CLASSIFIED

    V       WORKHOLDER IN COMBINATION WITH TREATING MEANS

    VI      RELATIONSHIP TO MATERIAL HANDLING CLASSES

    VII     RELATIONSHIP TO ASSEMBLY MEANS (Class 29, subclasses 200+)

    VIII    RELATIONSHIP TO PRESS MEANS (Class 100)

    IX      MISCELLANEOUS NOTES, AND INDEX TO CLASSES REFERRED TO HEREIN

    X       PLACEMENT OF PATENTS

    I       CLASS DEFINITION

    Class 269 is the residual locus for patents to a device which, during a
    work treating operation, contacts a workpiece for the purpose of (A)
    supporting the work against the force of gravity; or (B) preventing
    movement of the work in a particular direction or in all directions while,
    as disclosed, such work is supported against the force of gravity; or (C)
    providing a surface juxtaposed to the work for constraining the motion of a
    tool during its performance of such work treating operation.

    Holding articles together so that (by disclosure) a glue, cement or
    adhesive may set and secure said articles together is considered to be a
    work holding operation for this class.  Thus a clamp or vise, disclosed for
    use by cabinet makers, carpenters, woodworkers, etc., to hold plural pieces
    together while an adhesive (previously applied) sets, is properly
    classifiable in this class.

    A "clamp" means, per se, to grasp or draw portions of a mold or flask
    either together or onto a base or support is structurally so similar to the
    work holders of this class that patents to such clamp are classified in
    this class.  This is a specific exception to the functional workholding
    concept otherwise maintained for this class.

    II      SCOPE OF CLASS

    (A)     This class is intended to be, ultimately, the general locus for all
    work holders regardless of the treatment that is disclosed as being
    performed on the so held work.  At present, however, most work treating
    classes include patents directed to work holders effective during the
    treatment which characterizes such class.  With the exceptions enumerated
    below, no attempt has been made to incorporate such work holders into this
    class.  For a partial list of work treating classes that provide for their
    own work holders, see "Holders, Work" in the "Index To Classification".

    (B)     At present, patents to be found in this class have been screened
    from Class 29, Metal Working, subclasses 2.1+ and 700+; Class 30, Cutlery;
    Class 73, Measuring and Testing; Class 82, Turning, subclasses 46+; Class
    83, Cutting; Class 223, Apparel Apparatus; Class 225, Severing by Tearing
    or Breaking; Class 156, Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical
    Manufacture.

    (C)     In addition to the above listed loci for work holders that have
    been screened and the appropriate patents placed in this class, the
    following loci have been abolished and substantially all the patents
    reassigned to this class:  Class 29, Metal Working, subclasses 284+; Class
    65, Glass Manufacturing; Class 81, Tools, subclasses 17+; Class 409, Gear
    Cutting, Milling, or Planing; Class 144, Woodworking, subclasses 288, 289+.

    (D)     As other loci are screened, or reclassified, and patents for work
    holders moved to this class, appropriate notation will be added to B and C
    above.

    III     DEFINITION OF TERMS

    Terms or phrases used in titles and definitions either repeatedly or in a
    special and limited sense are set forth below with the meaning each is to
    have in this class.  For economy of space, an asterisk (*) following a word
    indicates that reference should be had to this glossary for the specific
    meaning thereof, while an asterisk following an underlined phrase (e.g.,
    holder mounted for  movement*) indicates that the entire underlined term as
    such, has been defined in this glossary.

    ACTUATION   (actuate, actuating, etc.)



    The application of (A) a bias (resilient or gravity) or (B) a mechanical
    advantage, or (C) the use of a lost motion mechanism to effect the relative
    movement of jaws.  The use of levers, inclined planes, pulleys, gears,
    cams, fluid systems, etc., even where such means fail to produce force
    multiplication, or actually provide a force reduction, is considered enough
    to constitute actuation means rather than adjustment* means.

    ADJUSTMENT  (adjust, adjusting, etc.)



    The shift of a jaw or jaws into juxtaposition with work without the
    application of (A) a bias (resilient or gravity) or (B) mechanical
    advantage effective to press or grip work or (C) utilizing a "lost motion
    mechanism".  This shift may be (D) no more than a "quick setting" of a jaw
    of a particular device (e.g., the use of a split nut to initially position
    a jaw for gripping movement along a lead screw) or (E) a change of the
    range* limits (e.g., the use of a pawl and rack lock to initially position
    a jaw for gripping movement by a cam or eccentric). While the shift of (D)
    and (E) are both considered to be jaw adjustment only (E) represents a true
    variation of range limits; i.e., the full cam throw will move the jaw one
    inch (the range whether the pawl and rack setting provides a work
    accommodating span of three, or ten inches).

    ADJUSTMENT-LOCK



    The immobilization, or securing against movement, of structural elements
    constituting the means for jaw adjustment*.  An adjustment-lock may be
    effected (A) by a shift in relative position of the structural elements
    being immobilized (as, for example, in subclasses 166+) or (B) by
    positioning an additional element to effect the desired binding or securing.

    The immobilization, securing, or binding referred to may be only relative
    rather than absolute, in the sense that further movement or positioning of
    the structural elements requires the utilization of actuating* means.

    The adjustment-lock effected may in fact be limited to a one way latch or
    binding.  For example, in some of the pawl and rack locks of subclasses
    212+ the structural elements, when said pawl and rack are engaged, cannot
    be further adjusted except in a direction favored by the inclination of
    both rack teeth and pawl; and similarly, in the simple cant type lock of
    subclass 166 the structural elements, when relatively askew, resist
    adjustment in a direction tending to further accentuate the degree of cant
    but are freely adjustable in the direction tending to reduce the degree of
    cant.

    CAM, ECCENTRIC



    A rotatable, pivotal or rockable member having a contour, which contour is
    not uniformly concentric with the pivotal or rotational axis of the member,
    and which contour, as it moves with respect to said axis, imparts a
    to-and-fro movement to a follower element bearing against said contour.
    The movement of said follower element, as the point of mutual contact
    between the member and the element shifts along the contour, is thus
    prescribed by the configuration of said contour with respect to the axis of
    rotation.  The contour may be a modification of a peripheral or radial
    surface with respect to the pivotal or rotational axis or a configured
    groove, ridge or slot lying in the general plane of either surface.  Thus
    the effective movement of a follower element caused by pivoting or rocking
    the cam member, is measurable along lines normal to the member axis or
    parallel to the member axis.  The follower element is usually mounted for
    sliding or pivoting movement with respect to the cam member. In some
    instances the contour, referred to above, is part of the follower element.

    In this class the terms "cam" and "eccentric" are used interchangeably.

    See (3) Note under subclass 165 and (1) Note under subclass 229 for wedge
    adjustment and wedge actuating means.

    CLAMP COUPLE ELEMENT



    Structure limited to one jaw* plus the means to adjust* and/or actuate*
    said jaw relative to a disclosed, but not claimed, coacting jaw.

    HAND (MANIPULATE)



    The term "hand" (or "manipulate") is used in the sense of "by contact with
    a living being" and includes hand, foot, head, etc.  Specific recital of
    foot, pedal, etc., is limited to such recital.

    HOLDER MOUNTED FOR MOVEMENT



    A device in which a work holder is structurally related with respect to a
    member on which it is supported so that the work holder may be moved to a
    limited extent or in a definite path(s) with respect to its supporting
    member.  The entire holder, i.e., the structure which contacts and thus
    actually supports the work, must be capable of movement while work is held.
     In the case of a work underlying support (as in subclasses 289+) such
    underlying support is considered mounted for movement even though the
    clamps or fastening means needed to keep work from sliding off are not
    claimed.

    HOLDER SUPPORT, MOUNT, OR BASE



    A work holder support is the structure for positioning work contacting
    elements, including the associated adjusting and/or operating means for
    said work contacting elements, with respect to a reference member (table,
    floor, wall, rack, bench, etc.).  Such support structure may be integral or
    articulated with a work contacting assembly and is provided with means for
    maintaining position of said assembly with respect to the reference member.
     The position maintained may be adjustable with respect to a particular
    reference member by (A) relative shifting of parts or links constituting
    the work holder support or by (B) relative shifting of the articulated
    joint structure between the work contacting assembly and the work holder
    support.  The position may also be varied by (C) temporary fastening means
    selectively securing the work holder support to different reference members
    or different portions of the same reference member.

    A work holder support means such as (A) or (B) above is generally disclosed
    as positionable either (1) preparatory to engaging work or (2) while the
    work is being held.  Since in many instances the structure for (1) will
    serve for (2) and vise versa, no attempt has been made to distinguish
    classificationwise on this basis.  Both (1) and (2) are treated, unless
    specifically noted otherwise, as (2) and provided for under Holder Mounted
    For  Movement*.

    A work holder support means such as (C) above is not considered as a Holder
     Mounted For Movement* and if claimed, per se, will be found in Class 248,
    Supports.

    JAW

    (A)     One of the plural portions of a work holder couple which engages or
    grips a workpiece.  Generally, the jaw is taken to include the work
    contacting surface and that part of the holder which (1) is contiguous to
    said surface as well as that portion which (2) if moveable, moves bodily in
    congruent fashion with said surface.  (See subclass 271 for the definition
    of a jaw attachment or insert).

    (B)     A work holder portion with an underlying work contacting surface,
    for which see subclass 289, especially (2) Note, is not considered to be a
    jaw, unless claimed in combination as one of plural coacting work gripping
    elements. However, a work holder portion with an overlying work contacting
    surface, which portion ordinarily is incapable of functioning as a work
    holder in the absence of a coacting underlying support means, will be
    considered as a jaw even if there is no claimed reference to said coacting
    underlying portion.  (See subclasses 37+ for plural holders which
    separately hold at least two workpieces relative to each other; each such
    holder is considered to be more than a jaw).

    (C)     As an exception to (A) which states that a "jaw" must be one of a
    couple; a work engaging member, which as claimed (1) includes plural,
    abutting, nonparallel, flat work engaging surfaces; (2) each such flat
    surface, coacting with a different one of plural work engaging elements as
    one of a plurality of work engaging elements as one of a plurality of work
    holding couples, is considered to be a common jaw member cooperating with a
    plurality of jaws.  (See subclass 104 for patents to a holder with plural
    jaws coacting with a common angle-corner jaw to hold the same workpiece).
    (See subclass 154 for patents to a holder with plural jaws coacting with a
    common flat jaw surface to hold work or workpieces).

    (D)     Unlike (C) above a work engaging member, which as claimed incudes
    either (1) plural, nonabutting, work engaging surfaces or (2) plural,
    abutting, curved, work engaging surfaces, and which surfaces (1) or (2)
    each coact with a different one of plural work engaging elements, is not
    considered to be a "common" jaw member.  Hence such a configured work
    engaging member in combination with coacting plural elements does not
    constitute plural jaw pairs either for subclass 104 or subclass 152.  (See
    subclasses 257+ for specific jaw features, per se).

    The following figure is illustrative of plural, nonabutting,work engaging
    surfaces B1 and B2 referred to in (D) (1) above.

    The following figure is illustrative of plural abutting, curved, work
    engaging surfaces E1, E2 and E3 referred to in (D) (2)    above.

    (E)     Each of three mutually adjustable* and/or actuable* work contacting
    elements effective to hold work (as in subclass 156) is also considered to
    be a jaw.

    MANIPULATE

    see "HAND"

    PRODUCT

    The material that is placed in, or on, or in juxtaposition to, the work
    holder in the condition in which such material exists after it has been
    treated.

    RANGE

    The extent or span of relative jaw movement, without reference to the work
    to be engaged, as predetermined by the structural relationship between
    elements of the means to actuate* said jaws.  For example:  shifting a
    split nut on a screw to initially position a jaw carried by said nut does
    not involve a range change since the nut can still travel the full extent
    of the screw; however, changing the degree of eccentricity of a jaw
    actuating element does involve a range change since the operation of said
    actuating element will now result in a variation of the effective throw of
    said element and its associated jaw.

    SIMPLE MOVEMENT

    The following, only, are considered to be simple movements of a work holder:

    (A)     A movement in which all of the work holder swings about a fixed
    axis except for the part lying on the axis, i.e., rotational movement.

    (B)     A movement in which each point on the work holder moves in a single
    rectilinear path; i.e., rectilinear movement.

    In both rotational and rectilinear movement, the movement may be in steps,
    backwards, or forwards.

    TOGGLE

    A linkage including at least two links, pitmans, bars or struts, and at
    least three pivots, the end of one link being connected to the end of the
    other link by a pivot common to both links, each of said links also having
    a pivot at the end remote from the common pivot, which common or
    intermediate pivot is movable from a position not in a straight line with
    the other two pivots, to a position substantially in line by a force
    applied to the intermediate pivot in a direction substantially normal to
    one of the links thereby moving at least one of the two pivots away from
    the other.  At least one of said links is articulated at both ends and is
    not integral with either a jaw or handle.

    TOOL

    An instrumentality for effecting treatment of the work.

    TOOL COUPLE ELEMENT

    The portion of a work holder whose disclosed function is to (A) coact with
    a relatively movable work treating tool to treat the work, or (B) act as a
    guide for a relatively movable work treating tool to directly or indirectly
    constrain the tool for movement in a particular path, or (C) limit the
    movement of a work treating tool relative to the work so that it may
    contact only a portion of the work and is prevented from contacting another
    portion of the work.

    To be recognized as such, the tool couple element, if it is part of the
    work contacting portion of the work holder, must be of different structure
    than the rest of the work contacting surface, or must be a particular,
    definable, portion of the work contacting surface such as an edge thereof.

    TREATMENT OR TREATING

    An operation which modifies the shape or changes a characteristic of
    material, assembles pieces of material together, disassembles pieces of
    material, or applies fluid (nonpropellant) to material.  See sections V and
    VIII (A) of this class definition.

    WORK

    The material that is placed in, or on, or in juxtaposition to, the work
    holder for treatment in the condition in which such material exists prior
    to its being treated or during treatment.

    WORK-STOP ABUTMENT

    (A)     An element positioned adjacent a surface which supports the work
    against the force of gravity, and which element presents an obstacle that
    restrains the movement of the work across the surface in a particular
    direction, including the necessary suppporting frame work for such element.

    (B)     The inclusion of an opposing or coacting element engaging the work,
    so as to grip said work between the "abutment" and said element, is
    considered to be characteristic of a jaw* relationship and such
    combination, claimed or disclosed, is not a work-stop abutment.

    IV      HOLDER, PER SE, ELSEWHERE CLASSIFIED

    (A)     The following classes have provision for specific types of article
    holding devices; and patents claiming such holding devices as the sole
    claimed means for supporting the work against gravity and falling within
    the definitions of such classes are to be found in such classes rather than
    in this class (269) even though work is disclosed as being treated while so
    supported:

    Class 24, Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc.

    Class 81, Tools

    Class 108, Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces

    Class 187, Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclasses 203+ for a stationary lift for a roadway vehicle which is to be
    repaired or inspected.

    Class 211, Supports:  Racks

    Class 242, Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding

    Class 248, Supports, subclasses 26.1+

    Class 249, Static Molds, subclasses 205+ for mold adjuncts that hold mold
    parts in operative relation

    Class 254, Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,

    Class 279, Chucks or Sockets

    Class 285, Pipe Joints or Couplings

    Class 384, Bearings

    Class 312, Supports:  Cabinet Structure

    Class 335, Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 285+

    Class 403, Joints and Connections.

    Class 433, Dentistry, subclasses 49+ for work holder specific to use in
    dentistry, especially subclasses 54+ for articulators.

    If, however, additional means not provided for in any of these classes are
    claimed as supporting the work against gravity, the patent will be found in
    this class.  Also, if a tool  couple element* is claimed in addition to the
    holding means the patent will be found in this class.

    (B)     Holding material for a nontreating purpose:  A device for holding
    material solely for a nontreating purpose will not be found in this class
    but will be found in the class providing for such holding means.  See Class
    248, Supports, which is the locus of art for supports of general utility.
    If a patent claims a holder which is disclosed as being usable either to
    support work while it is treated or to support material for a nontreating
    purpose, the patent will be found in this class with a cross-reference in
    the appropriate material supporting or holding class based on the
    nontreating disclosure.

    (C)     Relationship to work treating classes whose work holding
    subcombinations are placed in this class.

    1.      Exemplary types of treating and nontreating operations.

    (a)     The following operations are deemed to come within the definition
    of treating as set forth under the definitions of this class:  Stretching
    material, Testing material, Winding material about a core, Assembly as by
    moving (i.e., with means for moving) an article from one position to a
    second position where it will be secured to a second article. (Putting a
    cap on a receptacle is considered to be an assembling operation and
    therefore a treating operation).

    (b)     Exemplary operations considered to be of nontreating type:
    Inspecting, measuring and gauging, filling a receptacle. Merely holding an
    article or articles in place so that the article can be secured to another
    article while so held is considered to be a work holding operation of this
    class.  See section VII of this class definition.

    V       WORK HOLDER IN COMBINATION WITH TREATING MEANS

    (A)     A patent claiming a work holder which has a claimed work treating
    instrumentality as a part thereof, which is disclosed as treating the work
    without cooperating with a coacting tool will be found in the class
    providing for such treatment, and not in this class.

    Example:

    1.      A patent claiming a fixed blade for severing work by manually
    drawing the work thereagainst with a transverse tearing action is found in
    Class 225, Severing by Tearing or Breaking.

    2.      A patent claiming a work holder having a brush mounted therein, for
    coating work moved against it, goes beyond this class.

    (B)     Work holder having as a part thereof, specific means which takes
    part in the treating function:

    1.      A patent claiming a work holder including a tool couple element*,
    and claiming in combination therewith the cooperating element of the tool
    couple or the support for the cooperating element, will be placed in the
    appropriate treating class no matter how broadly the cooperating element or
    its support is claimed.  For example, a work holder having a claimed edge
    or inserted cutting stick that is disclosed as coacting with a movable
    cutter to cut the work will be found in this class only if the movable
    cutter or its support is not claimed.

    2.      Distinction between a treating tool, per se, and a work holder
    having a tool couple element*.

    (a)     A patent claiming a work treating tool, per se, will not be found
    in this class even though the tool is disclosed as supporting the work
    against gravity, if the portion of the work contacted by the tool is only
    that portion of the work which is to be treated and portions of the work
    immediately adjacent thereto.

    (b)     A patent claiming a work holder having a treating tool, per se, as
    a part only thereof will be found in this class.

    (c)     The following exceptions to this rule of distinction are noted:

    i.      Excluded from this class is a patent claiming a roller having a
    tool couple  element* thereon and rotating about its axis for the purpose
    of having work moved about the  periphery of the roller and partially
    envelop the periphery, so that a portion of the work in contact with the
    periphery can be treated while the roller is rotating and while the work is
    moving about the periphery and another portion of the work has relative
    movement with respect to the roller. Such a patent is considered to be
    drawn to a tool and its support and will be found in the class of the tool
    couple element. Compare this subsection with subsection VI (A) 2.

    ii.     Also excluded from this class is a patent claiming a work holder
    carrying a tool couple  element* which holder and element are disclosed as
    being relatively movable during the treatment of the work.  Such a patent
    will be found in the class of the tool couple element.

    (C)     Claimed combination of a work holder and a nominally recited
    treating means:

    The claiming of a work holder and the recitation of a work treating means
    or its support (not part of or carried by the work holder) is considered to
    go beyond the scope of this class unless the tool or tool support is
    nominally claimed.  If the tool or tool support is nominally claimed, the
    patent does not exceed the boundaries of this class unless there is claimed
    a tool couple  element* as described in subsection V. (B) 1., of this note.
     The following, for example, are considered not to be nominal recitations
    of the work treating means or its support:

    1.      A limitation to a treating means structure or characteristic as,
    for example, the claiming of a tool as being "sharp" or the claiming of a
    tool or its support as being "movable".

    2.      A limitation to the relative positions of the treating means or its
    support and the work holder as, for example, the claiming of a tool or its
    support as being "above" the work holder.

    VI.     RELATIONSHIP TO MATERIAL HANDLING CLASS

    (A) Movable work holder:

    1.      The subject matter of this class includes a work holder having
    means for moving the work holder while it is holding the work, either
    before, during or after treatment.  Where, however, such apparatus has been
    recognized as a material transporter in an existing body of art, a patent
    thereto will be found in such body of art.  See the list of classes under
    section III in the class definition of Class 414, Material or Article
    Handling. Where the claimed apparatus includes in addition to the details
    of the recognized material transporter a tool or tool couple  element* the
    patent will not be found in a material transporting class but in either
    this class or in the appropriate work treating class depending on the
    criteria set forth above in subparagraph V.  of this class definition.  For
    example, a patent claiming an endless belt conveyor whose upper run is
    disclosed as holding work while it is treated will be found in either Class
    271, Sheet Feeding or Delivering, Class 226, Advancing Material of
    Indeterminate Length or Class 198, Conveyors:  Power-Driven; such work
    holding means being a recognized material transporter. If the patent also
    claims a guide overlying the upper run and having the disclosed function of
    guiding a work cutting tool, the patent will be found in this class.  If
    the tool on the guide is claimed, the patent will be found in the class of
    such tool.

    2.      The following exemplifies the rule set forth in the preceding
    subsection.  Excluded from this class is a patent claiming a roller and not
    claiming a tool couple  element* on the roller, said roller rotating about
    its axis for the purpose of having work moved about the periphery of the
    roller, and partially enveloping the periphery, so that a portion of the
    work in contact with the periphery can be treated while the roller is
    rotating and the work is moving about the periphery and while another
    portion of the work has relative movement with respect to the roller.  Such
    a patent will be found in the appropriate material transporting class.
    Compare this paragraph with section V. (B) 2c of this class definition.

    3.      A material transporter having the disclosed function of (a) taking
    work to, or away from, an article to which said work is secured as well as
    (b) holding said work in position while it is being secured to, or
    unsecured from, said article is considered to be beyond the scope of this
    class.  See Class 414, subclasses 10+, Class 29, subclasses 700+ and Class
    254 for such a device.

    (B)     Product removal means:

    The subject matter of this class includes a work holder having means for
    moving a product relative to the work holder.  Where however, such
    combination has been recognized as a material transporter in a recognized
    body of art, the patent will be found in such body of art.  Where the
    claimed apparatus includes, in addition to the details of such recognized
    material transporter, a tool or tool couple  element* the patent will not
    be found in such recognized material transporting class, but either in this
    class or in the appropriate work treating class depending on the criteria
    set forth in section V. of this class definition.  For example; a patent
    claiming delivery rollers for removing sheets from a table, which table is
    disclosed as holding work during treatment will be found in Class 271,
    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, even though the table is claimed.  If the
    patent also claims a slot in the table having the disclosed function of
    guiding a work cutting tool, the patent will be found in this class.  If
    the tool moving in the slot also is claimed, the patent will be found in
    the class of such tool.

    (C)     Means to feed work to a work holder:

    1.      The basic subject matter of this class does not include the claimed
    combination of a work holder and a means for moving the work relative to a
    work holder portion, or for enabling such movement to take place.  Nor does
    the basic subject matter of this class include a device for moving work
    with respect to a work holder portion regardless of whether the device
    supports or holds the work during treatment of the work.  For example, a
    gripper which holds and moves work with respect to another work holder
    portion (claimed or disclosed) is excluded from this class.  Such a
    combination or device will be found in the class appropriate for the work
    moving means.  If the referred to combination also includes a significantly
    claimed tool or tool  couple element*, the patent will be found in the
    class of the tool.  See Class 399, Electrophotography, subclasses 377+ for
    holder of original and subclass 393 for copy medium input tray; all support
    structure is limited to use with an electrophotographic device.

    2.      If it is not clear from a patent specification whether a claimed
    element of the patent is intended to move the work relative to the holder
    or act as a part of a work holder, the element will be construed as being a
    part of a work holder and the patent will be found in this class.  If such
    element is disclosed as being capable of either moving the work with
    respect to the work holder or acting as part of the work holder, the patent
    will be found in the appropriate material transporting class and may be
    cross-referenced in this class.

    For example:

    Where the claimed subject matter of a patent includes an abutment which
    moves across a work supporting surface that underlies the work and a drive
    means for producing undirectional intermittent movement of the abutment
    across the supporting surface, the abutment will be construed as pushing
    the work across the supporting surface and the patent will be found in the
    appropriate material transporting class.

    (D)     Means to guide moving work or product with respect to the work
    holder:

    The subject matter of this class includes a work holder and passive means
    constraining movement of the work towards or over the work holder, or of
    the product away from the work holder, to a desired path.  Where, however,
    such apparatus has been recognized as a material handler in a recognized
    body of art, the patent will be found in such body of art.  Where the
    apparatus includes, in addition to the details of such recognized material
    handler, a tool or tool couple element*,  the patent will not be found in
    such recognized material handling art, but either in this class or in the
    appropriate work treating class depending on the criteria set forth in
    section V. of this class definition. For example, a patent claiming only a
    trough which, by disclosure, serves to support a pipe for a cutting
    operation while the pipe is moving along the trough will be found in Class
    193, Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways.  As a second example, an
    invention relating to a power-driven conveyor having means to facilitate
    working on the conveyed load at a work station is included in Class 198,
    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 339+, or, in the case of a
    power-driven conveyor having means to change the attitude of the conveyed
    load relative to the conveying direction, in subclasses 373+ of the same
    class.  As a third example, a patent claiming a flat work supporting table
    having air jets mounted therein which blow against the bottom of the work
    so as to permit the work to be moved more easily over the table will be
    found in Class 414, Material or Article Handling, subclass 676. If either
    patent claims, in addition, a slot in the trough or table which is
    disclosed as coacting with a movable cutter to cut the work, the patent
    will be found in this class.  If, in addition, the cutting tool is claimed,
    the patent will be found in the class of such tool.

    VII.    RELATIONSHIP TO ASSEMBLY MEANS (Class 29, subclasses 200+)

    The claimed recital of means to hold a piece of work relative to another
    piece of work for purposes of juxtapositioning and/or securing has been
    considered to be a work holding operation for this class. (See section IV.
    (C) 1. (b)).  However, the inclusion of (A) means to move the individual
    pieces to effect such juxtapositioning or (B) means to guide the pieces
    during movement is considered to be an assembling operation for Class 29,
    subclasses 700+.  For example, with respect to (B), a patent with
    limitations to a work holder including a tapered pin (said taper being
    claimed) so as to align the holder with another holder during relative
    movement of said holders, no means for such movement being claimed, is
    considered to go beyond a work holding function for this class, and would
    be placed in the assembling art of Class 29.

    VIII. RELATIONSHIP TO PRESS MEANS (Class
     100)

    (A)     Structural differences between devices labeled vise, clamp, work
    holder, or press are often lacking. The differences, if any, lie in the use
    to which these devices are applied. Where material is engaged and compacted
    by the engaging means the term "press" (Class 100) is considered
    appropriate. Where material is engaged to support and/or immobilize said
    material during treatment the term "work holder" (Class 269) is considered
    appropriate.  It should be noted that Class 100 is only the residual press
    class, other classes (such as 65, 72, etc.) providing for presses relating
    to specific material and modifications.  Similarly, Class 269 is only the
    residual work holder class, other classes (65, 118, 408, 451, etc.)
    including work holders effective during the specific treatment
    characterizing such classes.

    (B)     The work holders of Class 269 (with one exception - tool couple
    element*) do not include means to modify or treat the material engaged. For
    the purpose of keeping similar structure together it is deemed best that,
    as between Class 100 and Class 269, the setting of an adhesive, previously
    applied, to material is considered to be a treatment of said material,
    which material is therefore considered to be "work".  Thus a device to hold
    plural pieces while an adhesive (previously applied) sets, is considered
    appropriate for this class (269).  However, a work holder for holding
    plural pieces while an adhesive sets, proper for Class 269, combined with
    means for heating, cooling or fluid contact, is considered a combination
    classifiable in Class 100.

    (C)     A device for continuously processing material, involving means for
    a shifting area of contact between the device and the material, while a
    bonding agent between component parts of the material sets, is considered
    to be a form of treating device in itself and as such is excluded from
    Class 269.

    (D)     Class 100 is considered to be superior to Class 269 and as such the
    appropriate locus for patents relating to work gripping devices not clearly
    provided for in Class 269 or by the notes thereto.

    IX.     MISCELLANEOUS NOTES AND INDEX TO CLASSES REFERRED TO HEREIN

    (A)     Convertible devices:

    1.      A patent claiming a device with means which by adjustment,
    addition, removal or reassembly of one or more of its parts may, at the
    discretion of an operative, be capable of performing a function as a work
    holder for this class or a function falling within the scope of another
    class will be placed in said other class.  For example, a patent for a
    device which, as claimed, is adjustable for use as a vise or readjustable
    for use as a wrench will be placed in Class 81, subclasses 53+, a with the
    wrench art.

    2.      A patent claiming a work holder having relatively movable jaws
    convertible to a work shaping means, said conversion providing means to
    hold and shape work is placed in Class 29, Metal Working, subclass 560.1
    with appropriate cross-reference in this class and/or the proper shaping
    class for specific individual features.

    (B)     Relationship to classes of composition of matter:

    A work holder defined in terms of its composition, without any significant
    structure claimed, will be found in the class providing for the composition
    and not in this class.

    (C)     Relationship to classes of power transmitting means:

    A patent limited in its claims to a means for driving or moving a work
    holder element, with the element defined merely as the named load of the
    driving or moving means, will be found in the class providing for such
    driving or moving means and not in this class. If any significant structure
    of the holder element is claimed, the patent will be found in this class.

    (D)     Combination with work supply holder:

    This class includes the combination of a work holder and a holder for the
    supply of work which is to be placed in the work holder.  An example of
    such a work supply holder is a reel from which a web of the work may be
    unwound to be placed on the work holder.  The work supply holder is not
    considered to be a work holder unless that portion of the work which is on
    the work supply holder is disclosed as being treated.

    (E)     Combination with geometrical instrument or geometrical indicia:

    This class includes the combination of a work holder and a geometrical
    instrument or geometrical indicia, as for indicating desired distances
    along or positions in the basic device of this class.

    (F)     Processes of work holding:

    Class 29, Metal Working, subclass 559, is the residual locus of patents
    directed to methods of holding work.  A patent including a claim to a work
    holding method would be placed in subclass 559 and cross-referenced back to
    Class 269, if necessary, for disclosed or claimed work holding structure.

    (G)     Processes of making a work holder:

    Class 76, Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclasses 101.1+, is the
    residual locus for patents to a blank for, or a process of, making a work
    holder.

    (H)     The class of adhesive bonding:

    Class 156, Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    subclasses 502 and 503 include work-holder with treatment means, e.g.,
    heating, cutting, etc.

    INDEX TO CLASSES REFERRED TO HEREIN

    CLASS   SECTION OF CLASS DEFINITION

    24      IV(A)

    29      II(B) and (C), VI(A)3, VII, IX(A)2, (F)

    30      II(B)

    65      II (C), VIII(A)

    72      VIII(A)

    73      II(B)

    76      IX(G)

    77      VIII(A)

    81      II (C), IV (A), IX (A) 1

    82      II (B)

    83      II (B)

    88      II (B)

    90      II(C)

    100     VIII (A), (B), (D)

    118     VIII (A)

    144     II (C)

    156     II (B)

    187     IV (A)

    193     VI (D)

    198     VI (A) 1

    211     IV (A)

    214     VI (A) 1, 3

    223     II (B)

    225     II (B), V (A) 1

    226     VI (A) 1

    242     IV (A)

    248     III, IV (A), (B)

    254     IV (A), VI (A) 3

    271     VI (A) 1, VI (B)

    279     IV (A)

    285     IV (A)

    287     IV (A)

    302     VI (D)

    308     IV (A)

    311     IV (A)

    312     IV (A)

    335     IV (A)

    451     VIII(A)



    X.      PLACEMENT OF PATENTS

    The following statement is supplemental to the explanation set forth on
    pages I and II of the Manual of Classification.

    As among coordinate subclasses, the rule of superiority followed in this
    class requires placement of the "original" patent copy in the first or
    highest subclass providing for claimed subject matter.  As between a
    subclass, providing for such claimed subject matter, and subclasses
    indented thereunder, patent placement is in the first of such indented
    subclasses providing for disclosed subject matter.  Thus, depending upon
    the "superiority" of a particular subclass, an original copy of a specific
    patent may be placed therein on the basis of either claim or disclosure.

    For example:  A patent discloses a holder with a pair of relatively movable
    jaws and an aligned hole in each of the jaws so that a punch can move
    through the holes and perforate the paper while the paper is held by the
    jaws.  Only relatively movable jaw means are broadly claimed.  On the basis
    of claimed subject matter the patent falls into subclass 86, but then on
    the basis of the disclosed subject matter the patent would be placed in the
    indented subclass 87.


CLS 269/1
TXT Device under the class definition which, when used during the work treating
    operation, (A) derives substantially all of its support from the work to be
    treated or any position thereof or (B) is held solely by the operator
    either directly or through an operator either directly or through an
    operator-manipulated grappling device, and which has a portion thereon
    serving as a tool couple element*.

    (1)     Note.  If it is not clear from a patent disclosure whether the
    claimed device falls within the definition of this  subclass or of one of
    the coordinate subclasses following in this schedule, the patent will be
    found as an original in this subclass or a subclass indented thereunder.

    (2)     Note.  See HAND*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for patents to an operator supported holder that does not include a
    tool guide.


CLS 269/2
TXT Device under subclass 1 wherein the work is maintained in the tool guide by
    being gripped between two surfaces, at least one of which is movable with
    respect to the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86+,    for patents to a holder with relatively movable jaws.


CLS 269/3
TXT Device under the class definition including a portion whereby the entire
    device is held against the force of gravity by a living being during work
    treatment.

    (1)     Note.  The portion disclosed as held by an operator must be clearly
    claimed as a handle or in structural terms peculiar to such handle
    function.  A "handle" for "adjustment"* or for "actuation"* only is not
    considered an operator supported feature for this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  See HAND*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for patents to an operator supported holder and tool guide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 300+, for patents to pliers and see search notes
    thereunder and subclass 487 for a hand held holder or clamp for
    manipulation of an article rather than work treatment.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, appropriate subclasses
    for hand-held grapples, manipulators, and carriers for articles.


CLS 269/4
TXT Device under subclass 3 having means which, by a rearrangement, addition,
    removal or reassembly of one or more of its parts, permits the device to
    serve as either an operator supported holder or a base supported holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     for patents to a holder, per se, either a wrench or plier, with
    means to fasten said holder to a support.


CLS 269/5
TXT Device under subclass 3 wherein the portion supported by an operator
    includes an aperture through which work may extend into a supporting or
    gripping zone.

    (1)     Note.  Usually, the opening permits a fresh portion of work to be
    extended into a gripping zone after operation on a previously gripped
    portion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 124+, for patents to cutlery implements
    combined with means to hold material to be cut.


CLS 269/6
TXT Device under subclass 3 wherein the portion supported by an operator is
    moved relative to another portion of the holder, or relative to itself, to
    actuate a jaw or jaws.


CLS 269/7
TXT Device under the class definition for holding work by means of a work
    engaging material, changeable from liquid or fluent state (which liquid
    state permits movement of the work) to a solid or rigid state (which solid
    state immobilizes the work).

    (1)     Note.  Included here are patents which hold work by means of
    freezing a portion in ice.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclasses, for patents to a
    refrigeration process and/or apparatus, per se.


CLS 269/8
TXT Device under the class definition for holding work by subjecting said work,
    or a work contacting element, to the forces exerted by a magnetic field.

    (1)     Note.  The magnetic field may be that of a "permanent" magnet or
    that induced by an electric current.

    (2)     Note.  Included here are patents to a holder for nonmagnet material
    wherein the magnetic forces act on a work gripping element, which element
    holds the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216,    for patents to a holder with other than magnetic actuating* means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 289+ for electromagnetic type work holding
    means, per se.


CLS 269/9
TXT Device under the class definition including at least two separate holding
    means, at least one of which is disclosed as being utilized for work
    holding purposes at a different time than another work holding means, at
    the will or option of an operator, rather than by machine sequence.

    (1)     Note.  The holding means are separate to the extent that each work
    holding means can maintain or position a workpiece (a) without requiring
    the presence of other workpieces or other holding means, or (b) each
    holding means has its own actuating* and/or adjusting* means.

    (2)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are patents to a device having a
    first work holder mounted on a second work holder so that the first work
    holder must be completely taken off the second work holder before the
    second work holder can be utilized.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37+,    for patents to a plural holder to hold workpieces relative to each
    other, and see notes thereunder.

    152+,   for patents to holder with plural jaw pairs and see notes
    thereunder.

    315+,   for patents to a work-stop abutment mounted on another work-stop
    abutment so that the former must be completely taken off the latter
    abutment before the latter may be used to engage the work.


CLS 269/10
TXT Device under subclass 9 wherein at least two of the selectively used work
    holders are work-stop abutments*, and the work is disclosed as being
    supported against the force of gravity on the same support surface while in
    contact with either of the work-stop abutments.

    (1)     Note.  Since the work-stop abutment is considered to be a work
    holder for this class, two or more such abutments constitute plural
    holders.  The selective use of said plural abutments thus effecting
    placement in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315+,   for other patents having a work-stop abutment.


CLS 269/11
TXT Device under the class definition wherein means are provided to cast or
    direct light on the work holder.

    (1)     Note.  A patent claiming the illuminating means without claiming
    the work holder will be found in the class providing for the illuminating
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, appropriate subclasses, for illuminating means, per
    se, and subclasses 109+ for illuminating means combined with the structure
    being illuminated.


CLS 269/12
TXT Device under the class definition wherein means are provided to cause
    interrelated movement of the parts of a work assembly, while said assembly
    is mounted in the holder, to simulate operating conditions of the work.


CLS 269/13
TXT Device under the class definition wherein means are provided which enable
    at least a portion of the product, to be removed from the work holder, or
    which implement or accomplish such removal.

    (1)     Note.  See section VI, B under the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for patents for a device having a catch pan to collect material
    falling from the work.


CLS 269/14
TXT Device under subclass 13 wherein the product discharge facilitator includes
    a means for applying a force to the product so as to impart movement
    thereto.


CLS 269/15
TXT Device under the class definition wherein a receptacle is provided to
    collect material which leaves or falls from the work or product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13+,    for patents for a work holder having a product discharge
    facilitator which includes a receptacle for receiving the product.


CLS 269/16
TXT Device under the class definition wherein the work holder includes a place
    or space disclosed as being provided to store a workpiece element or a work
    treating instrumentality to be used in treating the work.

    (1)     Note.  The workpiece element when so stored is not in the position
    it assumes in the work holder while being treated; and the work treating
    instrumentality is not in the position it assumes when it is treating the
    work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for patents for a catch pan that intercepts a workpiece element
    falling from the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclass 111 for ironing tables
    combined with a work catcher.

    112,    Sewing, subclass 217.1 for a sewing machine table combined with a
    work catcher.


CLS 269/17
TXT Device under the class definition wherein the work holder has a means (such
    as a wheel) thereon for contacting a fixed surface beneath the work holder
    (such as a floor or the ground) and whose disclosed purpose is to enable
    the work holder to be moved on the surface, in any desired direction, from
    one place to another.

    (1)     Note.  A patent claiming a vehicle and not claiming a work holder
    will be found in the class of the vehicle regardless of whether a work
    holder is disclosed.  See Class 180, Motor Vehicles, and Class 280, Land
    Vehicles.


CLS 269/19
TXT Device under the class definition including a visual gage means for
    determination of the vertical and/or horizontal position of the workpiece
    and/or holder being held.

    (1)     Note.  The gage is usually a spirit level.

    (2)     Note.  Included here is a group of patents claiming means disclosed
    for use as a plasterer's corner bead setter which include visual gage
    means.  To facilitate an art search, known patents disclosed for the same
    art purpose, though not showing a plumb indicator, are also placed here as
    cross-references.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    365+,   for levels or plumbs, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass.


CLS 269/20
TXT Device under the class definition including pneumatic or hydraulic means,
    or both, for holding, releasing, and/or force-applying purposes.

    (1)     Note.  The fluid means may also be utilized to (a) "float" a
    portion of the work or work holder, (b) eject a workpiece, (c) remove
    unwanted particles falling on or adjacent the work holder during treatment,
    or, (d) any combination of (a), (b), and/or (c).

    (2)     Note.  If a patent is silent as to how a cylinder or piston is
    returned to its normal or starting position, or if a patent discloses
    nonfluid means for returning a cylinder or piston, and there is no
    disclosure pertinent to any one of the indented subclasses, such patents
    will remain in this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  If a patent discloses that a vacuum means is used only to
    remove a weighted element from the work (e.g., if suction is used to lift a
    cylinder above a workpiece, and allowing atmospheric air to re-enter the
    cylinder lets the cylinder descend onto the work by its own weight) such
    patent will remain in this subclass.

    (4)     Note.  A fluid "cushion" chamber that is passive, rather than
    active, and is controlled only by (a) a valve means exhausting to
    atmosphere, or (b) a valve means exhausting into an unconfined liquid
    receptacle, or (c) a conduit which connects said chamber with a confined
    (second) chamber having a fixed pressure, or (d) any combination of (a),
    (b), and/or (c) is not deemed to be a device for moving a jaw or holder for
    any one of the indented subclasses, and, if only such a means is claimed as
    part of a work holder, then the patent will remain in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for patents including the use of a "freezing" means to hold work.

    13+,    for patents for a product discharge facilitator which may include
    fluid means to perform this function, and, see the notes thereunder.

    55+,    for patents including a similar means to a complete holder.

    157+,   for patents for a holder including means to bias a jaw(s) toward a
    nonholding position.

    216+,   for patents for a similar means to move a jaw(s).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 3.12+ and
    300+ for patents for a device in which a fluid contacts the work, and see
    the notes under subclasses 3.12, 300 and 301.

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 49+ and 82+ for patents for a
    fluid check and closer.

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 325+, for a force applying motor of
    general utility supplied with motive fluid from a pressure fluid source.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, for patents for structure of a
    fluid motor, per se, and see the notes under the class definition.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 269.01+, for patents for a press including
    fluid means to move one or more pressure surfaces, and see the notes
    thereunder.

    137,    Fluid Handling, for patents for a fluid handling means, and see the
    notes under the class definition.

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 266+, for a fluid-resistance brake or shock
    absorber.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, for patents to a clutch,
    especially subclasses which include "fluid" in the title.

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, subclasses 3 and 4.01+, for patents including a
    vacuum and a fluid operated chuck, respectively, and see the notes
    thereunder.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, for rotary expansible chamber
    devices, per se.


CLS 269/21
TXT Device under subclass 20 wherein the fluid pressure means operates to
    produce a difference in the pressures upon at least two sides of a
    workpiece, or a portion of a complete holder, which difference is effective
    to hold the work or the holder.


CLS 269/22
TXT Device under subclass 20 including a flexible wall element, one side of
    said element being forced into contact with a workpiece by fluid pressure
    applied to the other side of said element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    275,    for patents including a yieldable jaw element that may be placed
    either on the diaphragm, or between the diaphragm and the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 211+, for patents to a press with a deformable
    pressure surface.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 777+, for patents for a fluid handling
    device having one or more flexible wall elements, and see the notes under
    subclasses 784 and 793.


CLS 269/23
TXT Device under subclass 20 including means operable to (A) cease the
    continued application of fluid pressure, (B) cease jaw* movement, (C)
    insert blocking means between opposed jaws, or (D) any combination of (A),
    (B), and/or (C); such means may be dormant, movable or activated by a
    condition (such as the absence of a workpiece in the work holder) to
    prevent injury to a worker, and/or to avoid damage to the material being
    treated or the work holder itself.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257+,   for patents to holder jaw features which may prevent the work from
    being damaged by the jaw.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 53, for patents to a press including safety means.


CLS 269/24
TXT Device under subclass 20 wherein (A) one holder, or holder portion, is
    moved in response to, and after, the movement of a second holder, or holder
    portion, or (B) a main drive unit activates a first holder prior to
    activating a second holder, or (C) any combination of (A) and (B).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107+,   for patents including an interrelated actuating means for angularly
    related jaw couples.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 53, for patents for a press including
    interrelated actuators.


CLS 269/25
TXT Device under subclass 20 wherein (A) a fluid means is used to relatively
    move a solid (or hollow) member that has a generally circular periphery
    having a close fit within a surrounding hollow member that is similarly
    configured, and (B) one of these two members moves an immediately adjacent
    jaw*(s).

    (1)     Note.  Patents will be placed in this subclass where (a) the
    movable piston or cylinder serves as a jaw itself, (b) the piston or
    cylinder is rigid with a jaw, or (c) a jaw is connected to the piston or
    cylinder by a pivot means or by a single universal-type joint.

    (2)     Note.  There may be an additional jaw(s) that is independently
    adjusted* or actuated* by nonfluid means, provided such jaw(s) is not
    inter-related with the fluid operated jaw(s).

    (3)     Note.  There may be a mechanical and/or electrical means, operated
    by a human operator, that starts or continues the operation of the fluid
    means; but, if there is a mechanical means between the fluid means and the
    jaw(s), see subclass 27 and the notes thereunder.

    (4)     Note.  Compare the sketches under this subclass 25 and subclass 32
    for illustrative examples of the structural variations that distinguish the
    subject matter placed in these groups of subclasses.

    (5)     Note.  In the figure below, the jaw 1 is pivoted (at 2) to the
    piston rod 3 which is moved by the piston 4 operating within the  cylinder
      5.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27+,    especially subclasses 32+, for patents to a fluid operated holder
    including additional positioning means, and see the notes thereunder.

    257+,   for patents to a jaw (face) feature, per se.


CLS 269/26
TXT Device under subclass 25 including means for interconnecting a supply of
    fluid under pressure to two or more fluid actuated* cylinder-piston means,
    so that the pressure exerted from said (usually common or single) source
    will be applied to the same extent on each of two or more jaws while they
    are contacting work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for patents including an opposed cylinder-piston means having
    additional positioning means, and see the notes thereunder.

    107+,   for patents for a holder with angularly related jaw couples having
    interrelated actuating means.

    152+,   for patents to a holder including plural jaw pairs.


CLS 269/27
TXT Device under subclass 20 including a cylinder-piston unit as set forth in
    (A) of the definition of subclass 25; and further means, either directly
    connected to or interrelated with said unit, to add to the efficacy of the
    unit, or to perform some function that said unit standing alone could not
    perform.

    (1)     Note.  Patents including a fluid unit (usually the cylinder) that
    is moved as an entirety, by either fluid or nonfluid means, prior to
    operating said unit (cylinder) to actuate its associated jaw will be placed
    in this and indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  See (2) Note under subclass 20.

    (3)     Note.  Valving means, whether singular or plural, in parallel or in
    series, manual or nonmanual, are not deemed to be "additional positioning
    means" in series with fluid means unless the valve(s) is so connected or
    related that a portion of the valve structure itself moves a jaw or holder
    in addition to performing its function of directing the fluid and/or
    modifying the fluid pressure; such patents will be placed in subclasses
    25+, if otherwise appropriate.

    (4)     Note.  See the sketches accompanying the definitions of subclasses
    25 and 32.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25+,    for patents including a cylinder-piston unit(s) that directly moves
    an associated jaw(s) without additional positioning means.


CLS 269/28
TXT Device under subclass 27 including (A) a pneumatically operated pressure
    means that moves one or more elements of a hydraulically operated pressure
    means, or (B) a compressible fluid chamber within an incompressible fluid
    chamber including means to increase or decrease the pressure exerted by
    said compressible fluid, or (C) the air and liquid means may be reversed in
    either (A) or (B); or (D) any combination of (A), (B), and/or (C).

    (1)     Note.  See (4) Note and the search notes under subclass 20.


CLS 269/29
TXT Device under subclass 27 including a fluid reservoir and means by which a
    human operator can, by the manipulation of parts, increase and/or decrease
    the pressure within said reservoir.


CLS 269/30
TXT Device under subclass 27 wherein a single pneumatic or hydraulic source is
    used (usually through valve means) to hold and release a jaw* carrier; or
    such means is used to move (A) a jaw, (B) a jaw carrier, (C) mechanical
    means associated with a jaw or carrier, or (D) any combination of (A), (B),
    and/or (C), both toward and away from a workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass requires the single fluid unit to move at
    least one element in each of two opposite (180_) directions.  If a spring
    (or similar means) is used to move the element in one of the two
    directions, see (2) Note under subclass 20 and see subclasses 32+.

    (2)     Note.  See (4) Note and the search notes under subclass 20.


CLS 269/31
TXT Device under subclass 30 including (A) at least one fluid means that is
    movable, as a unit, at a fixed distance about a point on a work holder; or
    (B) at least one fluid means that is swivelly connected, at some point on
    the unit, to a fixed point on a portion (stationary or movable) of the work
    holder; or (C) a combination of (A) and (B).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55+,    for patents including a complete holder mounted for movement, and
    see the notes thereunder.

    216+,   for patents including nonfluid actuating* means which may be
    pivoted to a work holder.


CLS 269/32
TXT Device under subclass 27 including adjusting* and/or actuating* means
    positioned between (A) a jaw* and (B) the cylinder or piston of the jaw's
    pneumatic or hydraulic actuating means.

    (1)     Note.  See (3) Note under subclass 27.

    (2)     Note.  In the figure below, the link 6 is pivoted to a jaw 5, and
    the pivot for the link 3 is fixed at 4. Reciprocation of the

            piston rod 1 moves the movable pivot 2 and the jaw 5 to and from
    the work  W.


CLS 269/33
TXT Device under subclass 32 wherein at least one cylinder-piston unit moves
    its jaw*, in a straight line, toward a cylinder-piston unit similarly
    moving a second coacting jaw at a 180o angle with respect to said first
    mentioned jaw.

    (1)     Note.  One or more of the cylinder-piston means may be movable out
    of the opposed relationship.

    (2)     Note.  The plural cylinder-piston means may operate from a common
    source of fluid supply, or from independent sources.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25+,    for patents to a holder including a jaw(s) moved directly by a
    cylinder or piston without additional positioning means.

    140+,   for patents to a holder with separate positioning means for each of
    a jaw pair.

    218+,   for patents to a holder with common actuating means for each of a
    jaw pair.


CLS 269/34
TXT Device under subclass 32 including at least one fluid means which, when
    operated, forces physically separated plural jaw* elements into contact
    with the work at spaced points.

    (1)     Note.  Patents including an insert between the plural jaw elements
    defined above and the work are included in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The jaws may be parallel, angularly related, or a
    combination of both; or a single fluid unit may operate through linkages to
    move each of at least two jaws into contact with (a) adjacent points on one
    side of the work, or (b) points on opposite sides of the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218+,   for patents for a holder including a common means to actuate plural
    jaws, and see notes thereunder.


CLS 269/35
TXT Device under subclass 20 including means preventing rotation of either the
    piston or the cylinder, or both, of a pneumatic or hydraulic pressure
    means; or a means restricting, to a desired path, the movement of one or
    more parts of a fluid-operated holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256,    for patents to a holder including structure for maintaining opposed
    jaws in parallel planes.


CLS 269/36
TXT Device under the class definition for supporting one or more rails of a
    fence relative to another rail on which said device is supported.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are patents to a device for holding and
    gauging wire fence strands or metal slats.

    (2)     Note.  Most patents found in this subclass are classified here as
    originals on a disclosure basis and cross-reference below on a structural
    basis.

    (3)     Note.  Patents to a device for holding plural elements, disclosed
    as fence components, in desired relative position are not proper for this
    subclass unless such device is supported by a fence rail.  See subclasses
    37+ for plural holders to hold workpieces relative to each other.


CLS 269/37
TXT Device under the class definition including at least two separate holding
    means each of which separately immobilizes at least one workpiece with
    respect to another workpiece separately held by another such holding means.

    (1)     Note.  The holding elements are separate to the extent that at
    least two workpieces can be maintained in position without requiring either
    the presence of other workpieces or the presence of the other of said two
    workpieces.

    (2)     Note.  A patent claiming the use of a single pair of jaws, the work
    engaging faces of which are configured to enable the simultaneous grasping
    of separate workpieces, to hold plural workpieces relative to each other
    will not be placed in this subclasses (37+).  Such jaws do not constitute
    "separate holding means" as defined above and placement will be in the
    appropriate subclass lower in the class schedule.

    (3)     Note.  A patent claiming the use of plural work contacting elements
    to hold workpieces relative to each other but which elements are actuated*
    in gangs so as to constitute a single work holding couple or pair (at least
    one jaw of such couple thus including several spaced and relative
    positionable portions as in subclasses 164, 265+ and 266) will not be
    placed in this subclass (37).  Such jaws do not constitute "separate
    holding means" as defined above and placement will be in the appropriate
    subclass lower in the schedule.

    (4)     Note.  A patent claiming the use of plural clamping means
    structurally capable of meeting the above criteria but disclosed as holding
    work with respect to a reference table, wall or floor, rather than with
    respect to another workpiece, is not placed here and will be found in
    subclasses 95+ below.

    (5)     Note.  A device with two or more separate work holders which device
    includes mechanism for moving one holder, and the work held, relative to
    another holder, and the work held thereby, is not considered to be a work
    holder for this class (269); such device is an assembly mechanism for Class
    29, Metal Working subclasses 700+. Articulation between holders and/or
    means whereby an operator may shift said holders, without mechanical
    advantage or lost motion, does not constitute "mechanism" for assembly.
    However, the provision of a work contacting guide to align or orient two or
    more workpieces, while an operator shifts the holders of said pieces, is
    considered to be sufficient "mechanism" for assembly.

    (6)     Note.  Included, in this and indented subclasses, are patents to a
    device wherein the individual or separate holders consist of static
    structure insofar as the work contacting portion of the holder is
    concerned, e.g., a socket or groove into which a workpiece is inserted.
    However, plural grooves or sockets in a single bar or plate do not
    constitute "plural holders".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95+,    for patents to a holder with means to fasten to support and see (4)
    Note above.

    104+,   for patents to a holder with plural jaw pairs, angularly oriented,
    engaging common work, which common work may be of composite or plural
    element composition.

    152+,   for patents to a holder with plural spaced jaw pairs.

    156+,   for patents to a holder with three mutually coacting jaws.

    164,    for patents to a holder with relatively movable jaws including
    means to position portions of a jaw lateral to the general direction of
    work gripping jaw movement.

    257+,   for patents to details of work engaging surface and element
    characteristics.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 700+ for patents to plural holders to
    hold and move workpieces relative to each other; see (5) Note above.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 152 for glassworking apparatus
    including fusion bonding means having plural work holders.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 87.1+ and 159
    for a grapple or article carrier having plural holders for carrying plural
    articles.


CLS 269/38
TXT Device under subclass 37 wherein the separate holders maintain one or more
    of the feathers of an arrow in desired orientation with respect to the
    shaft of said arrow while said feathers and said shaft are being joined.

    (1)     Note.  Patent placement in this art grouping requires claimed
    identity of the holders as being for arrow and feathers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 2.1, for patents to the process of
    fletching an arrow.

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, subclasses 569+ for an arrow
    having a special feature such as being material dispensing or of
    scattershot type, etc., particularly subclasses 578+ for an arrow.


CLS 269/40
TXT Device under subclass 37 limited to plural holders which all support and
    hold work by means of static work contacting portions.

    (1)     Note.  See (6) Note under subclass 37.

    (2)     Note.  See (2) Note under subclass 37 with respect to jaws* which
    individually have plural static work contacting portions.


CLS 269/41
TXT Device under subclass 37 including two clamp couples with the jaw(s) of one
    couple oriented for movement, during actuation*, along a path at right
    angles to the jaw(s) of the other couple so as to hold workpieces
    perpendicular to each other.


CLS 269/42
TXT Device under subclass 41 including means to actuate* the jaws of said
    couples in unison.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218+,   for patents for a holder including a common means to actuate plural
    jaws, and see notes thereunder.


CLS 269/43
TXT Device under subclass 37 including at least two clamp couples with the
    jaw(s) of one couple oriented for movement, during actuation*, along a path
    parallel to the jaw(s) of other couples so as to hold workpieces parallel
    to each other.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are patents to a device for holding the two
    end shooks of a box while a top, bottom and/or side is fastened thereto.


CLS 269/44
TXT Device under subclass 43 including three clamp couples.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are patents to a device for holding three
    shooks, such as in an orange or egg crate, while top, bottom and/or sides
    are fastened thereto.


CLS 269/45
TXT Device under subclass 37 including means whereby an operator may, without
    mechanical advantage or lost motion means, change the spatial relationship
    of one holder with respect to another.

    (1)     Note.  See (5) Note under subclass 37.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 53+ for work holders for similar structure
    used in dentistry.


CLS 269/46
TXT Device under the class definition wherein a work holder is supported by
    being hung from a member overlying the work holder in at least one position
    of adjustment of the holder.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass include those in which work holder
    supporting means is provided in addition to the supporting means which
    suspends the holder.

    (2)     Note.  The hanging support is nonrigid, of a hook, strand or
    chain-like nature; not a bolt, screw or clamp-like element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95+,    for patents to a holder with means to fasten said holder to a
    support.


CLS 269/47
TXT Device under the class definition wherein the work holder has a portion
    which is adapted to be positioned within a preformed opening in the work
    and, when so positioned, is peripherally encompassed by the work.

    (1)     Note.  The opening need not extend completely through the work.

    (2)     Note.  A holder for a wound up roll of material is not considered
    to meet the definition of this subclass unless the teaching of the patent
    is that the work is treated in wound up roll form; see (1) Note.  section
    II, of the class definition.

    (3)     Note.  For a patent to be placed as an original in this subclass,
    the holder portion insertable within the work aperture, or a holder part
    receiving such portion, must be claimed.  For example, a patent to a work
    holder disclosed as having work bolted thereto by a bolt extending through
    an opening in the work and extending through an opening in the holder will
    be placed as an original in this subclass only if the bolt or the bolt
    receiving opening in the holder is claimed.

    (4)     Note.  Included in this an indented subclasses are devices to which
    a workpiece is secured by embracing a part of the holder, e.g., using the
    clamp of an outboard motor to mount said motor on a holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for patents for a pin which penetrates work to hold it, making an
    aperture as it enters the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 158 for an
    article carrier having a component adapted to be positioned in a aperture
    in the article.


CLS 269/48
TXT Device under subclass 47 wherein the work holder includes a tool couple
    element*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87,     288 and 290, for patents for other work holders having tool couple
    elements.


CLS 269/48.1
TXT Device under subclass 47 whose holder portion includes means to allow its
    size to be increased by an amount sufficient to permit engagement between
    the holder and the work at such opening.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, subclasses 2.01+, for an expanding chuck or
    socket.


CLS 269/48.2
TXT Plural pin mandrel:
    Device under subclass 48.1 wherein the portion comprises a plurality of
    elongated elements capable of radially expanding from each other.

    (1)     Note.  The portion comprises plural pins which however could be
    composed of a folder single piece of wire or rod structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 208+ for mating head and
    socket fasteners.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 271+ for hand manipulable tools used to
    align or center pipes or similar structures.


CLS 269/48.3
TXT Having intermediate expanding means:
    Device under subclass 48.2 provided with a separate structure lying between
    and physically contacting the elements such that axial movement of the
    structure causes radial movement of the elements.


CLS 269/48.4
TXT And coil spring:
    Device under subclass 48.3 further provided with a helical body tending to
    return to its original shape after being distorted.

    (1)     Note.  The coil spring usually acts to axially move and bias the
    intermediate expanding means.


CLS 269/49
TXT Device under subclass 47 wherein there is provided a work holder portion
    engaging one surface of the work, and the work holder portion which is
    insertable within the work aperture is so mounted that it may move toward
    and away from both the first mentioned work holder portion and the work,
    entering the aperture through a work surface opposite such first named
    surface.


CLS 269/50
TXT Device under subclass 47 wherein the work holder is mounted for movement*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55+,    for patents for other work holders mounted for movement.


CLS 269/51
TXT Device under subclass 50 wherein (A) the movement of the work holder has as
    components thereof simple movements*  as, for example, a combined
    rectilinear and rotational movement, or (B) the work holder sequentially
    partakes of a plurality of simple movements, as, for example, two
    rectilinear movements in two different paths.


CLS 269/52
TXT Device under subclass 47 wherein the outer periphery of the portion of the
    work which engages the holder is substantially circular in cross-section
    and the center of the aperture in which the holder is inserted is disclosed
    as coinciding with the center of mass of such circular work portion.


CLS 269/53
TXT Device under the class definition wherein the work holder comprises an
    elongated pointed element that penetrates the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47+,    for patents for a work holder having a portion entering a preformed
    opening in the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 419+ for a cooking spit
    or impaling means and subclasses 557+, 559+, and 594+ for a device that
    impales a food item to remove a pit or to hold it while the skin is removed.

    452,    Butchering, subclass 196 for patents to a fish clamp including
    impaling means.


CLS 269/54
TXT Device under subclass 53 wherein there is provided, additionally, an
    element other than a pin which is positioned above and in contact with at
    least part of the upper surface of the work when the work is being treated.


CLS 269/54.1
TXT Device under subclass 53 provided with means for moving the pin, causing
    the pin to penetrate the work.

    (1)     Note.  The mere extension of a pivoted-pin supporting member,
    forming a simple lever, is not considered to result in a drive means for
    purposes of placement in this subclass.  Likewise, means for merely holding
    a pin in a raised position and subsequently allowing it to drop under the
    influence of gravity does not constitute drive means for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20+,    for pin-type holders including fluid moving means.


CLS 269/54.2
TXT Device under subclass 54.1 including a pair of pins mounted for relative
    movement toward one another for penetrating the work at spaced points.

    (1)     Note.  The pins need not be physically diametrically opposed, but
    must have components of force, respectively, which are so opposed.

    (2)     Note.  Only one pin need be movable to satisfy the requirement for
    relative movement.


CLS 269/54.3
TXT Device under subclass 54.2 provided with one or more pins in addition to
    the coacting pair.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for holders including plural, selectively usable pins.


CLS 269/54.4
TXT Device under subclass 53 including a surface which is positioned beneath at
    least a part of the work and is situated so as to contact said part to
    support the work against gravity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    289,    for work underlying supports, per se.


CLS 269/54.5
TXT Device under subclass 54.4 provided with at least one elongated, pointed
    element situated normally to the work underlying surface.

    (1)     Note.  The pointed element may be part of the surface of may move
    relative to said surface.

    (2)     Note.  Any relative movement of the pointed element is for the
    purpose of removing the element from the work only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54.1,   for similar devices having means to move the pointed elements into
    the work.


CLS 269/55
TXT Device under the class definition including holder supporting structure
    modified to allow shifting of the holder from one position to another with
    respect to its base or support or from one station to another.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are patents to a holder with means providing
    for adjustment about a a horizontal and/or vertical axis, as well as about
    a universal joint.

    (2)     Note.  A patent for a holder movable with respect to a reference
    member (table, bench) is in this subclass but if the holder(s) is movable
    with respect to a station(s) the device is considered to be a conveyor type
    holder and the patent is in subclass 56.

    (3)     Note.  See Holder Mounter For  Movement*

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17+,    for patents to a holder with means for moving said holder freely
    along the ground or floor.

    95+,    for patents to a holder that can be selectively secured to a
    support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 349.1, and appropriate subclasses for patents to
    a work holder mount structure, per se, which support structure is of
    general utility.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 222+ for apparatus for
    charging a load holding or supporting element from a source, and means for
    transporting the element to a working, treating, or inspecting station.


CLS 269/56
TXT Device under subclass 55 wherein the work holder is combined with a
    conveyor means to move said holder.

    (1)     Note.  A patent disclosing a work holder in combination with a
    conveyor but claiming the conveyor, per se, will be found in the
    appropriate conveyor class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for patents to a holder with means for moving said holder freely
    along the ground or floor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 144+, for patents to a holder for concurrent
    pressing and conveying.


CLS 269/57
TXT Device under subclass 56 wherein the conveyor moves the work holder in a
    circular path.


CLS 269/58
TXT Device under subclass 55 including mechanism for moving the holder.

    (1)     Note.  The mechanism is any means providing for mechanical
    advantage e.g., screw, gear, cam or fluid means.


CLS 269/59
TXT Device under subclass 58 including means to latch and immobilize the
    mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74+,    for patents to a holder with means to immobilize the holder with
    respect to its support.


CLS 269/60
TXT Device under subclass 58 in which the mechanism for moving the holder
    includes mating concentrically threaded elements which elements are
    relatively rotatable to cause relative axial movement of said elements
    which movement is imparted to said holder.


CLS 269/61
TXT Device under subclass 58 in which the mechanism for moving the holder
    includes relatively rotatable bodies provided with teeth or frictional
    interengaging elements whereby one rotatable body will impact motion to, or
    receive motion from, some other body by rolling contact, which motion
    directly, or as part of a mechanism train, effects movement of said holder.


CLS 269/62
TXT Device under subclass 58 in which the mechanism for moving the holder
    includes structure which turns freely on a fixed pivot to impact pressure
    or motion to mechanism to effect movement of said holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37+,    for patents to plural means for holding workpieces relative to each
    other.


CLS 269/63
TXT Device under subclass 55 in which the supporting structure, which allows
    shifting of the holder, includes mechanism for securing the holder against
    both forward and rearward shifting while locating the holder in a
    structurally predetermined position with respect to support structure.

    (1)     Note.  A patent to a holder with indicia so an operator can
    visually determine where to place the work holder with respect to the base
    is not considered to include indexing means for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74+,    for patents to a holder with means to lock the work holder with
    respect to its base or support.

    307,    for patents to a work-underlying support with a sight gage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 813+, for tool or work
    turret indexing means, per se.


CLS 269/64
TXT Device under subclass 63 wherein the mechanism for securing the holder
    against shifting includes plural elements (each element has at least two
    teeth or a wrinkled surface) so configured that the interengagement of a
    portion of one with a portion of another causes immobilization of the work
    holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207+,   for patents to a holder with a detent type lock for adjustment.


CLS 269/65
TXT Device under subclass 63 wherein the mechanism for securing the holder
    against shifting includes a screw or bolt means.


CLS 269/66
TXT Device under subclass 63 wherein the mechanism for securing the holder
    against shifting includes a cam* means.


CLS 269/67
TXT Device under subclass 63 wherein the mechanism for securing the holder
    against shifting includes an element that is moved laterally of its general
    extent to engage a selected notch in another toothed element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211,    for patents to a holder with pin-rack adjustment means for a jaw.


CLS 269/68
TXT Device under subclass 63 wherein the mechanism for securing the holder
    against shifting includes a pivotable element to be engaged with a selected
    notch in another toothed element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212,    for patents to a holder with pawl-rack adjustment means for a jaw.


CLS 269/69
TXT Device under subclass 63 wherein the mechanism for securing the holder
    against shifting includes a bar, pin or rod which is insertable axially or
    longitudinally within a selected aperture or mating opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208,    for patents to a holder with peg-hole adjustment means for a jaw.


CLS 269/70
TXT Device under subclass 69 including means to urge the bar, pin or rod into
    the aperture or mating opening.


CLS 269/71
TXT Device under subclass 55 including at least two supporting structures
    modified to permit at least two degrees, or types, of shift either (A)
    about and along a single axis or (B) about spaced axes.


CLS 269/72
TXT Device under subclass 71 including a common means to immobilize shifting in
    at least two degrees of shift.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are patents to a holder that also has separate
    means to lock shift means other than those locked by the common means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59,     for patents to a holder with means to immobilize a mechanism for
    moving the holder.


CLS 269/73
TXT Device under subclass 71 in which there are but two degrees or types of
    shift.


CLS 269/74
TXT Device under subclass 55 including structure to immobilize the holder with
    respect to its support structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59,     for patents to a holder with means to immobilize a mechanism for
    moving the holder.

    63,     for patents to a holder with means to secure the holder against
    both forward and rearward shifting (e.g., indexing).


CLS 269/75
TXT Device under subclass 74 wherein the immobilizing means is for members
    which can relatively swivel or turn in plural planes, within defined
    limits, about a point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71+,    for patents to a work holder which permits at least two degrees or
    types of shift.


CLS 269/76
TXT Device under subclass 74 wherein the immobilizing structure comprises a
    threaded element(s) adjustably mounted on the holder (or the holder
    support) so that an end of said element can frictionably engage the holder
    support (or the holder).

    (1)     Note.  While the reaction to the force applied by the set screw may
    involve considerable surface area contact of a binding nature between the
    holder and holder support, the application of binding force is by means of
    the set screw.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for patents to a holder with position lock means utilizing a detent
    or interlocking elements.


CLS 269/77
TXT Device under subclass 74 wherein the structure applies an immobilizing
    force about the surface of the structure linking the holder and the holder
    support.

    (1)     Note.  The clamp means must be such so as to embrace and contact
    more than a 180_ section of the structure being immobilized.


CLS 269/78
TXT Device under subclass 77 including a curved or angular band-like element
    with spaced ends and with means to increase or decrease said space so as to
    apply internal or external clamping force with said band.


CLS 269/79
TXT Device under subclass 74 including a clamp on a link (or links) connecting
    the holder with the holder support, said link(s) being articulated to the
    holder and/or support so as to limit relative movement.


CLS 269/80
TXT Device under subclass 74 wherein the holder and holder support are jointed
    by a clevis type joint which joint includes means to compress or force the
    U-shaped legs or ears together adjacent a tongue-like element between said
    legs.


CLS 269/81
TXT Device under subclass 74 wherein the support structure is set forth as a
    bench, floor, bracket or frame clearly part of the environment rather than
    a mount* or subholder for the work holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95,     for patents to fasten a holder to a support where the holder is not
    mounted for movement.


CLS 269/82
TXT Device under subclass 74 wherein the immobilization structure includes a
    means for drawing flat abutting surfaces of the holder and holder support
    into binding frictional engagement.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses are limited to patents for a
    holder wherein the bearing surfaces, providing for movement of the holder
    relative to the holder support, are both (a) flat and (b) pressable
    together for relative immobilization of said surfaces.  Any claimed (c)
    variation from the flat or (d) immobilization other than by drawing flat
    surfaces together is excluded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76,     for patents to a holder mounted for movement with set screw type
    position lock.

    77,     for patents to a holder mounted for movement with periphery clamp
    type position lock.


CLS 269/83
TXT Device under subclass 82 including an axis normal to the abutting surfaces,
    around which axis the holder and holder support can be relatively
    positioned.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are patents to a holder mounted for movement
    with a single clamp means for immobilizing radial bearing surfaces, said
    clamp means acting parallel to and spaced from the axis.


CLS 269/84
TXT Device under subclass 83 wherein the means for drawing the radial surfaces
    together is part of or concentric with the axis structure.


CLS 269/85
TXT Device under subclass 83 including two or more spaced means for drawing the
    bearing surfaces together.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are patents for holders with a single
    operative element for applying plural clamps.


CLS 269/86
TXT Device under the class definition including two or more jaws* movable with
    respect to each other to engage and hold work.

    (1)     Note.  A patent for a holding device claiming only one jaw and the
    means to position (adjust* and/or actuate*) said jaw relative to a
    disclosed, but not claimed, coacting jaw (i.e., a clamp couple element *)
    will be placed in this and indented subclasses as though said coacting jaw
    were claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for patents to a hand maneuvered or work supported tool guide with
    relatively movable jaws.

    257+,   for patents to a holding device with relatively movable jaws,
    claiming only jaw features without either means to adjust* or actuate* said
    jaws.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclasses 243+, for patents to similar devices disclosed as
    holding material for other than treatment of said material.

    81,     Tools, subclasses 300+, for patents to tool jaws positioned by
    relatively movable plural handles (e.g., pliers) and see search notes
    thereunder and subclass 487 for other hand held tools having article
    gripping jaws.

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 214+, for
    patents to relatively movable platens which engage and treat the material
    engaged, and see search notes thereunder.  Also see section VIII in the
    class definition of this class.

    164,    Metal Founding, appropriate subclasses for patents to a combination
    of a mold or flask with means to grasp or draw portions of the mold or
    flask either together or onto a base or support. The clamp means, per se,
    even if the mold or flask is named as the article held is classified here
    (Class 269) as a workholder.


CLS 269/87
TXT Device under subclass 86 including a  tool couple element *.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for patents to a holder inserted within work aperture including a
    tool couple element.

    288,    for patents to a holder enclosing work and including a tool couple
    element.

    290+,   for patents to a work underlying support with a tool couple element.


CLS 269/87.1
TXT Device under subclass 87 including means to limit or restrict the movement
    or course of a tool to a particular path(s).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 501+, for patents to a gauge.


CLS 269/87.2
TXT Device under subclass 87.1 including spaced wall portions defining the tool
    path.


CLS 269/87.3
TXT Device under subclass 87.1 including an opening or aperture through which a
    tool is applied to the work.


CLS 269/88
TXT Device under subclass 86 including means, which by arrangement, addition,
    removal or reassembly of one or more of its elements, causes or permits the
    device to serve or function, alternately, as one or the other of at least
    two of the different types of holding devices separately provided for under
    subclass 86.

    (1)     Note.  The fact that a device may be used in several varying ways
    to hold work will not effect classification in this subclass unless such
    variation in mode of operation requires a rearrangement, addition, removal
    or reassembly of component elements.

    (2)     Note.  The use of selective jaw attachments or inserts is not
    considered to constitute a variation as to type of holding device as
    required by the above definition.

    (3)     Note.  A holder is considered to be a particular "type" when the
    claimed means provide for (a) distinctive adjustment* or actuating*
    mechanism as indicated by the subclasses 165+ and 216+ (b) specific number,
    relative coaction and/or alignment of jaws as indicated by subclasses 104
    through 156.

    (4)     Note.  Devices convertible from a work holder to a treating or
    force applying mechanism are excluded from this class (269) and are
    classified on the basis of the appropriate treating or force applying
    mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for patents to a holding device convertible from operative to bench
    supported.

    271,    for patents to a holder with jaw attachments and/or inserts.


CLS 269/89
TXT Device under subclass 86 including means responsive to jaw actuation* for
    immobilizing the jaw couple relative to the  holder support *.

    (1)     Note.  The structure is incapable of grasping work prior to
    immobilization and thus is not considered to be a holder mounted for
    movement *.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55+,    for patents to a holder mounted for movement.

    216+,   for patents to a holder actuating means.


CLS 269/90
TXT Device under subclass 86 including structure other than, and in addition
    to, the actuating mechanism for maintaining the work gripping position of
    the jaw(s)* subsequent to application of said actuating mechanism.


CLS 269/91
TXT Device under subclass 86 including means to removably secure a  clamp
    couple element * to a supporting structure which structure serves as a
    coacting jaw.

    (1)     Note.  The clamp couple element itself, not in secured position, is
    incapable of holding work.

    (2)     Note.  Included here are patents to a "hold down" used on a machine
    tool work table as well as a "planking clamp" used for applying a
    sheathing, floor or wall board.

    (3)     Note.  In the figure below shank 4 of a clamp couple element is
    maintained in position with respect to support 5 by being canted in opening
    3.  Actuation of cam 2 then serves to grip work between jaw 1 and support 5.


CLS 269/92
TXT Device under subclass 91 including two or more actuating* means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221,    for patents to a holder with plural means to actuate one jaw.


CLS 269/93
TXT Device under subclass 91 including means wherein jaw actuating mechanism
    serves to immobilize the element with respect to a coacting jaw.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89,     for patents to a holder with immobilizing means responsive to jaw
    actuating means.


CLS 269/94
TXT Device under subclass 91 wherein the clamp couple element is moved
    arcuately by actuating means to grip work.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are patents to a device with very slight
    rocking motion where such rocking is in fact effected by operation of the
    actuating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237+,   for patents to a holder with relatively pivoted jaws.


CLS 269/95
TXT Device under subclass 86 including structure for fixing or making fast the
    position of an entire holder with respect to a disclosed reference table,
    stand, bracket, wall or floor.

    (1)     Note.  The holder structure must be capable of holding work in the
    absence of the reference table or stand to which said device is fastened.

    (2)     Note.  See HOLDER SUPPORT *, especially form (c).

    (3)     Note.  Included here are patents to a holder claiming features for
    a temporary or removable mounting which facilitate the use of the device as
    a portable instrumentality.

    (4)     Note.  While a patent may claim structure capable of meeting the
    criteria of subclass 37, i.e., plural clamping means to hold workpieces
    relative to each other, such patent will be placed here (subclasses 95+) if
    the disclosure is for holding work with respect to a reference table, wall
    or floor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for patents to an operator supported holder convertible to bench
    supported type.

    37,     for patents to plural holders to hold work-pieces relative to each
    other and see (4) Note above.

    81,     for patents to a holder mounted for movement * with means to lock
    movement with respect to a reference base.

    91,     for patents to a jaw* with means to fasten said jaw, and its
    adjusting* and/or actuating* means, to a coacting jaw or jaw-like member.

    309+,   for patents to a holder with working-underlying support mounting
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses, for patents to a work holder
    supporting structure, per se.


CLS 269/96
TXT Device under subclass 95 wherein the work holder structure, per se, is
    disclosed and claimed as either (A) torque means separately classifiable in
    Class 81, subclasses 54+ or (B) hand pliers separately classifiable in
    Class 81, subclasses 300+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for patents to a holder convertible to either operative or bench
    support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 54+ and 300+, for wrenches and pliers, per se,
    respectively.


CLS 269/97
TXT Device under subclass 95 wherein the fastening structure includes
    relatively movable jaws for gripping the support.

    (1)     Note.  In the figure below jaws 4 and 5 are disclosed as intended
    to be secured to the apron of a table or work bench while jaws 2 and 3 hold
    material to be worked on.  Notice the detent 1 for quick adjustment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclass 487 for a hand tool having clamping jaws (other
    than pliers or wrenches).


CLS 269/98
TXT Device under subclass 97 wherein a work contacting jaw is integral with a
    jaw of the support clamp.


CLS 269/99
TXT Device under subclass 95 wherein fastening structure includes an element
    mounted on the support (or forming part of the support) in mating
    interengagement with a generally complementary element forming part of the
    work holder.


CLS 269/100
TXT Device under subclass 99 wherein the support includes an opening into which
    a mating portion of work holder is inserted for mounting.

    (1)     Note.  A groove, notch or T-slot into which a work holder portion
    of a fastener is inserted is not considered to be an aperture for purposes
    of this subclass.  Such feature, if claimed, is provided for in subclass 99.


CLS 269/101
TXT Device under subclass 95 wherein the work holder is fastened by screw or
    bolt means.

    (1)     Note.  For inclusion here, a patent must claim either threaded
    fastening means or a structural feature with cooperates with, or enables
    the use of, such threaded fastener.


CLS 269/102
TXT Device under subclass 95 wherein the work-holder is fastened by a driven
    support-penetrating element.

    (1)     Note.  For inclusion here, a patent must claim either a nail or
    spur fastener or a structural feature which cooperates with, or enables the
    use of, such nail or spur.


CLS 269/103
TXT Device under subclass 86 for holding a bight or loop of strand-like
    material around a generally U-shaped wear and/or reenforcement member so
    that the ends of the bight may be secured together to maintain said member
    in said bight.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass represents an art collection of patents to a
    cable-splicing device (which patents vary as to structural details though
    all meet the criteria set forth in class and subclass definition above)
    limited by claim to the means for holding cable around a thimble.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 22+, for
    patents for splicing devices and see search notes thereunder.


CLS 269/104
TXT Device under subclass 86 including:  (A) two or more jaw* couples spatially
    related so that a line between, and generally normal to, coacting gripping
    surfaces of one jaw couple is not parallel to a corresponding line of
    another jaw couple; and (B) each of the couples contacts either portions of
    the same workpiece or plural abutting workpieces.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include patents for holders with
    plural coacting jaws unless said jaws are adjusted* or actuated* in groups
    of two (i.e., in couples).

    (2)     Note.  In regard to this and indented subclasses from subclass 105
    through subclass 117, no effort has been made to cross-reference down from
    these subclasses to the indented subclasses running from subclass 118
    through subclass 125, as the vast majority of the patents, in the higher
    group of subclasses, have at least one or more claims drawn to the subject
    matter of one or more of the subclasses positioned in the lower placed
    group of subclasses.  Therefore, to be complete, any search involving one
    or more of subclasses from 118 through 125 should include a search of
    appropriate subclasses in the group running from subclass 104 through
    subclass 117 inclusive.

    (3)     Note.  A patent claiming subject matter included within the above
    definition, and including a disclosure that provides for only two jaw
    couples with a single adjustment means (subclasses 165+) for positioning
    one couple and a single actuating* means (subclasses 216+) for positioning
    the other couple, will remain in this subclass.  If either of the above jaw
    couples is disclosed as having plural positioning means, see the subclasses
    indented under subclass 109.

    (4)     Note.  See (1) Note under subclass 111.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37+,    for patents to a holder with plural means to hold workpieces
    relative to each other, each of which means can hold work independently of
    other means and in the absence of other workpieces, and see search notes
    thereunder.

    287+,   for patents to a holder which encloses work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclass 311, for patents to pliers with separate jaw pairs.

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, appropriate subclasses, for patents to plural
    coacting jaws, and see search notes under the class definition.


CLS 269/105
TXT Device under subclass 104 including at least three jaw* couples, each one
    of the three couples being angularly related to each of the other two
    couples; and, no more than two of the three couples acting in a common
    plane.

    (1)     Note.  One jaw couple may grip and fix the work to oppose an
    angularly related jaw that would move the work, rather than grip the work,
    in the absence of the first mentioned couple.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37+     and 152+, where three couples do not  engage the same work, and see
    notes thereunder.


CLS 269/106
TXT Device under subclass 105 including at least one actuating* means for each
    of the three couples.


CLS 269/107
TXT Device under subclass 104 wherein the mechanism for relatively moving the
    jaws of any one set is operatively linked to the moving mechanism of at
    least one other angularly oriented set.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218+,   for patents to a holder with common means to actuate opposed  jaws;
    and, see notes thereunder.


CLS 269/108
TXT Device under subclass 107 utilizing a cable, strand, strap, or articulated
    link member encircling all the jaws so as to move said jaws relative to
    each other as the effective length of the encircling member is shortened.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130,    for patents to a holder wherein a cable, strand or articulated link
    member is adjusted to engage work by shortening the effective length of
    said member.


CLS 269/109
TXT Device under subclass 107 including at least four jaws, each jaw including
    work-contacting portions that are angularly related; and, when actuated*,
    the four jaws move in unison, or substantially so, toward or away from the
    work.

    (1)     Note.  See "JAW"* (B).

    (2)     Note.  See the sketch accompanying the definition of subclass 112
    for an illustration of possible lines of movement for one  of said jaws.


CLS 269/110
TXT Device under subclass 104 wherein at least one actuated* jaw* includes
    structure which supports and allows relative movement of a second actuated
    jaw.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95,     and notes thereunder.

    134+,   for patents to a holder including a "hold down" component of force
    on a jaw.

    152+,   for patents to a holder with plural jaw pairs.


CLS 269/111
TXT Device under subclass 104 including four side portions arranged to enclose
    an area, said side portions may or may not be interconnected, the opposed
    pairs of side portions including the jaw couples.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass requires: (a) that the positioning means for
    at least one of the jaw couples includes either: (i) two or more disclosed
    adjustment* means (e.g., subclasses 141 and 165+), or (ii) two or more
    disclosed actuating* means (e.g., subclasses 142+ and 216+), or (iii) a
    combination of at least one adjusting means and at least one actuating
    means (e.g., subclasses 146 and 188+); and, (b) that the positioning means
    for the other jaw couple includes: (i) adjustment means, or (ii) actuating
    means.

            Therefore, this subclass does not include a device wherein a single
    adjusting means or a single actuating means is used to position one jaw of
    one couple, plus a single adjusting means or a single actuating means used
    to position one jaw of the other couple ("single", as here used, excludes
    one jaw couple positioned by a combination of adjustment and actuation
    means, as in subclasses 146 and 188+, as well as excluding plural adjustors
    or plural actuators, for one jaw couple, as in subclasses 141 and 221+);
    and, patents disclosing only such "single" means, for each of the two jaw
    couples, will remain in subclass 104.  See (4) Note under subclass 104.

    (2)     Note.  The four sides of the frame may be in the same plane or they
    may be in closely adjacent parallel planes.

    (3)     Note.  Each one of the four sides may (a) constitute a jaw, (b)
    support a movable jaw, (c) support jaw moving means, or (d) comprise any
    combination of (a), (b) and/or (c).

    (4)     Note.  A "corner", as used in the definitions of the indented
    subclasses, may be formed by two abutting, articulated, intersecting, or
    overlapping lateral parts, or it may be merely the point where imaginary
    extension of two lateral parts would intersect.

    (5)     Note.  The force applied to portions of the frame may be exerted
    from a point on or outside the periphery of the frame toward an inner
    portion of the frame, or from some point within the frame toward the
    periphery of the frame.

    (6)     Note.  See "JAW"*.  If one corner-angled jaw having nonparallel
    faces has such faces articulated, or otherwise movable inter se, and each
    such face has an opposed coacting jaw that is movable relative thereto,
    then such jaw couples are appropriate for this and indented subclasses such
    as subclasses 112+ and 124+.  However, if there are two generally opposed,
    corner-angled jaws and each one has a respective pair of nonparallel faces
    that are fixed inter se, then such an opposed pair of fixed-angle
    corner-angled jaws are considered to be a single opposed pair of configured
    jaws, and such structures should be searched elsewhere, e.g., subclasses
    126+, 140+, 218+, 265+, etc.

    (7)     Note.  See the accompanying sketches which show that the lateral
    parts of the frame may vary from (a) merely the pointed ends of screw means
    to (b) overlapping sides.

    (8)     Note.  In addition to variations noted in the Notes numbered (3),
    (4) and (7), immediately above, the individual sides, jaws, or screws, may
    be pivotally mounted, slidable, or otherwise movable with respect to each
    other or an underlying supporting structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37+,    for patents to plural holders, and see the notes thereunder.

    47+,    for patents to a holder insertable within a work aperture.

    55+,    for patents to a movable holder which may include a quadrilateral
    frame type holder to grip the work while the holder is moved.

    311+,   for patents to a work underlying support including means to hold
    plural supporting blocks.


CLS 269/112
TXT Device under subclass 111 including at least one actuating* means that is
    positioned adjacent one corner; and, (1) said means is not perpendicularly
    related to either of the two sides that meet at said corner, and (2) a
    line, formed by tracing a point on the actuated jaw as it moves toward the
    work, falls within the angle formed either (a) by the corner or (b) by
    imaginary lines forming extensions of the two sides intersecting at said
    corner.

    (1)     Note.  Most of the patents placed in this subclass disclose
    actuating means that move the jaw on a path that is generally aligned with
    or closely parallel to either (a) a diagonal of the frame or (b) the
    bisector of a corner.

    (2)     Note.  Patents placed in this subclass include frames wherein the
    frame, at one corner, is positioned to be coincident with one quadrant, and
    adjacent said corner, the actuated jaw(s) moves either; (a) within the
    confines of the frame quadrant, (b) within the confines of the opposed
    quadrant, or (c) both (a) and (b) type movement.

    (3)     Note.  See (6) Note under subclass 111.

    (4)     Note.  In the figure below, the portion shown in section represents
    the work,

            and the lines J1 through J6 represent the movement of a point on an
    actuated jaw(s) toward a gripping position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115+,   for patents to a holder including an actuating means located
    adjacent at least one frame corner, and see the notes thereunder.


CLS 269/113
TXT Device under subclass 111 including at least two actuating means operating
    at spaced points located intermediately of the ends of one lateral part of
    the frame.

    (1)     Note.  The plural actuators may be interrelated to operate
    simultaneously, or they may be advanced and/or retracted individually.

    (2)     Note.  At least one of the actuators is positioned at, or near, the
    center of the side.

    (3)     Note.  See (3) Note under subclass 111.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112     and 115+, for actuators located at the corners of the frame, and
    see the notes thereunder.

    139,    for means to align coacting jaw faces, and see the notes thereunder.


CLS 269/114
TXT Device under subclass 113 wherein at least two sets of actuating means are
    operating at spaced points upon each of at least two sides.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118+,   for patents including at least two single actuators that are
    perpendicularly related.


CLS 269/115
TXT Device under subclass 111 wherein an actuating means is located near, or
    at, the juncture of two lateral frame parts and said means is so oriented
    that a line, formed by tracting a point on the actuated jaw as it moves
    toward the work, is (A) perpendicular to one of the two parts forming a
    corner, or (B) the line falls outside the frame and outside the angle,
    opposite said corner, formed by imaginary extensions of said two sides.

    (1)     Note.  Patents placed in this subclass include a frame wherein the
    frame, at one corner, is positioned to be coincident with one quadrant,
    and, at said corner, the relatively movable jaws* are positioned within the
    confines of the two adjacent quadrants.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note under subclass 111.

    (3)     Note.  In the figure below, the portion in section represents the
    work, and the lines J1 through J6 represent the movement of a point on an
    actuated jaw(s) toward a gripping position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    for relatively movable jaws positioned in quadrant opposed to the
    frame quadrant, and see the notes thereunder.


CLS 269/116
TXT Device under subclass 115 including actuating means positioned at, or near,
    at least two opposite, remotely positioned, corners.


CLS 269/117
TXT Device under subclass 116 including at least one actuating means for each
    of the four corners.


CLS 269/118
TXT Device under subclass 111 wherein each couple of at least two jaw couples
    has actuating means operating adjacent side, and lines normal to the
    gripping surfaces of each of said two couples are at right angles to each
    other.

    (1)     Note.  See (4) Note under the definition of subclass 104.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107+,   for patents to a holder where such actuating means are interrelated.


CLS 269/119
TXT Device under subclass 118 including at least one actuating means operating
    upon each of the four sides of the frame.

    (1)     Note.  See (4) Note under subclass 104.

    (2)     Note.  See illustration under (7) Note of subclass 111.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142+,   for patents to a holder with separate means to actuate each of a
    jaw pair.

    218+,   for patents to a holder with common actuating means for each of
    coacting jaws.


CLS 269/120
TXT Device under subclass 111 wherein (A) at least one of the angularly related
    jaw couples is operated to grip the work solely by adjustment* means, and
    (B) a second jaw couple is operated by means including actuating means.

    (1)     Note.  See (3) Note under subclass 104.

    (2)     Note.  See (1) Note under subclass 111.


CLS 269/121
TXT Device under subclass 111 including plural adjustment means that operate
    either (A) at plural spaced points intermediate the ends of one lateral
    frame part, or (B) at a point remotely positioned with respect to the ends
    of each of at least two lateral frame parts.

    (1)     Note.  See (3) Note under subclass 104.

    (2)     Note.  See (1) Note under subclass 111.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124+,   for patents to a holder including adjustment means at plural
    corners, and see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 269/122
TXT Device under subclass 111 provided with adjusting means and including
    sloped or inclined block means which are secured to the frame, or portions
    thereof, by some means to prevent (except by destruction) the complete
    separation, or loss, of said block means.

    (1)     Note.  See (4) Note under subclass 104.

    (2)     Note.  See "CAM"* for concept of wedge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124,    for patents to a holder with wedge adjustment means.


CLS 269/123
TXT Device under subclass 122 including chains, or similarly linked elements,
    for attaching the sloped or inclined block means to a portion of the frame.

    (1)     Note.  See (4) Note under subclass 104.


CLS 269/124
TXT Device under subclass 111 including adjustment means located at each of the
    two junctures formed by (a) one pair of lateral frame parts, and (b) the
    opposite pair of lateral frame parts that are remote with respect to the
    first mentioned juncture.

    (1)     Note.  See (4) Note under subclass 104.

    (2)     Note.  See (4) Note under subclass 111.

    (3)     Note.  See the sketches accompanying the definitions of subclasses
    112 and 115 for illustrations of the manner in which the jaws may move
    toward the corner of either the workpiece or the frame sides.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    for patents to a holder with attached wedge adjustment means.


CLS 269/125
TXT Device under subclass 124 including adjustment means at each of the four
    corners.

    (1)     Note.  See (4) Note under subclass 104.


CLS 269/126
TXT Device under subclass 86 wherein at least one jaw is supported by a
    generally U-shaped member one leg of which member is hinged at its
    extremity to another jaw supporting structure which second structure
    bridges the ends of the U-shaped member and is latched to the extremity of
    the other leg so as to substantially embrace work between the legs of said
    member and said second structure.

    (1)     Note.  Either, or both, generally U-shaped member and the other jaw
    supporting structure may carry jaw actuating or jaw adjusting means.

    (2)     Note.  The other jaw may, for example, be no more than a hinged
    cross-head extending from one leg end to the other.

    (3)     Note.  In the illustration below yoke 4, pivoted at 3 and latched
    at 1, carries an actuating screw 2 to grip work between jaws 5 and 6.



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130,    for patents for holders wherein a yoke-like member, one portion of
    which comprises a jaw, is constricted to move said jaw relative to another
    jaw.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 98+, for patents for pivoted outer jaw wrenches.


CLS 269/127
TXT Device under subclass 126 including structural details of the securing
    means utilized to fasten the other leg of the U-shaped member to the
    bridging structure.

    (1)     Note.  Patent placement in this and indented subclasses requires
    claimed recitation of the latch structure. Mere nominal recital (e.g.,
    "latch" or "fastener) requires original placement of the patent on the
    basis of other claimed characteristics.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    292,    Closure Fasteners, appropriate subclasses (and see the notes
    thereunder), for patents to specific details of latch means, per se.


CLS 269/128
TXT Device under subclass 127 wherein the securing means is combined with jaw
    actuating* means.

    (1)     Note.  In the illustration below the actuating screw 2 is combined
    with the latch means 1 to effect gripping of work by jaws 5 and 6.



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188+,   for patents to a holder with actuating means which means also
    effect an adjustment lock*.


CLS 269/129
TXT Device under subclass 126 wherein the one jaw* supported by the U-shaped
    member is moved relative to another jaw by means carried on the midportion
    or bight of said member.

    (1)     Note.  See Figure under subclass 126.


CLS 269/130
TXT Device under subclass 86 wherein (A) one jaw* consists of a portion(s) of a
    supple length of elongated or attenuated material the effective length
    being varied to move said length relative to another jaw or (B) a supple
    length of elongated or attenuated material embracing work is effectively
    shortened in length to grip and immobilize said work.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of elongated materials are:  rope, cable, chain,
    articulated links, straps, webs and belts.

    (2)     Note.  Specific configuration, or modification of surface
    characteristics, of the attenuated material for the purpose of improved
    work contact is considered to be a jaw feature and is provided for, per se,
    in subclasses 257+.

    (3)     Note.  The recital of a plurality of work-engaging articulated
    links, meeting the above definition, will not constitute the constrictable
    loop as other than a single jaw for this subclass, even though they are
    disclosed as engaging the work simultaneously.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126+,   for patents to a holder including a pivoted yoke frame carrying a
    supple or flexible jaw supporting member, which member is of fixed length
    during relative jaw movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 64+, for patents for a flexible jaw wrench.


CLS 269/131
TXT Device under subclass 130 wherein the constrictable loop is of limber and
    flexible material.

    (1)     Note.  Included here, for example, are patents to a holder wherein
    the loop is of wire, rope, metal band, cable, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 149 for a
    hand-held article carrier which employs a flaccid loop to retain the
    article.


CLS 269/132
TXT Device under subclass 130 including mechanism to move a jaw other than the
    constrictable loop.

    (1)     Note.  Generally, the loop is adjusted*, by constriction, to
    desired proximate size and the coacting jaw is then actuated* to grip work
    between the loop bight and said jaw.


CLS 269/133
TXT Device under subclass 86 including at least two coacting jaws* and their
    supports with a work underlying portion(s) that (A) is attached to or
    integral with either a jaw(s) or a jaw supporting structure(s), and (B) is
    so interconnected with one or more jaws that the force of gravity on the
    workpiece, upon contact with the underlying portion(s), actuates* the
    coacting jaws.

    (1)     Note.  The most common panel or workpiece present, in the patent
    disclosures placed in this subclass, is a door or window supported during
    planing, weatherstripping, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13+,    for patents to a holder including a separate means (i.e., other
    than merely manually lifting the panel against the force or gravity) to
    facilitate the removal of work.

    157+,   for patents to a holder including claimed means to urge jaws away
    from the work.

    217,    for patents to a holder including means to resist further movement
    of the work once it is gripped.

    218+,   for patents to a holder including a single means to actuate
    coacting jaws.

    237+,   for patents to a holder with pivoted jaws.

    310,    for patents to a holder including supporting structure that is
    resiliently urged upwardly.


CLS 269/134
TXT Device under subclass 86 including means to effect an additional clamping
    or holding action on work with respect to an underlying work supporting
    member(s) which additional clamping action is derived from jaw actuating*
    means or jaw movement, generally parallel to the supporting surface of said
    member.

    (1)     Note.  Inherent in all rockable or pivotal jaw holding devices,
    depending on the relative angular position of the parts, is a similar
    force-component urging work transversely of the pivot or axis.  However,
    unless the device includes (a) specific work underlying support means and
    (b) the jaw actuating means (or jaw movement) is generally parallel to said
    surface, patents to such device will not be placed here (subclass 134) but
    elsewhere in the schedule on the basis of other appropriate features.


CLS 269/135
TXT Device under subclass 134 including a pivotal or arcuately movable body
    engaging the material to be held.

    (1)     Note.  Generally, the line of force applied to the element is such
    as to cause the body to shift both toward the work and toward a work
    underlying support surface.


CLS 269/136
TXT Device under subclass 134 wherein the work contacting body is in the nature
    of an insert or attachment to a jaw* which jaw itself is constrained to
    movement generally parallel to the supporting surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    271+,   for patents to a holder attachment and/or insert.


CLS 269/137
TXT Device under subclass 134 wherein the jaw and/or actuating means are
    specifically set forth as moving in a path slightly sloped with respect to
    the plane of the work underlying support surface.

    (1)     Note.  The phrase "slightly sloped" is intended to cover included
    angles up to, but not exceeding 45o.


CLS 269/138
TXT Device under subclass 134 including an inclined or sloped element, or cam*
    means, to effect the additional clamping or holding action.


CLS 269/139
TXT Device under subclass 86 including additional means for moving a jaw* so as
    to vary the disposition (i.e., orientation) of the work engaging surface of
    said jaw with respect to the work engaging surface of an opposed jaw.

    (1)     Note.  The movement effected by the additional means is other than
    such movement as will engage and grip work. A patent to a holder with
    additional means to pivot one jaw with respect to another, which pivotal
    movement is effective to engage and grip work, is therefore not to be
    placed in this subclass even though the relative orientation of coacting
    jaw faces is changed.  Generally, the pivot of the jaw is external of the
    jaw body when the pivotal movement is part of the jaw actuation, and the
    pivot is internal of the jaw body when the pivotal movement is merely for
    jaw alignment.

    (2)     Note.  Patent placement here requires that the holder include
    positive means to change the jaw orientation.  Mere pivot, swivel, slide or
    articulation means for a jaw or jaw portions is not considered such a
    positive means.  See illustration under subclass 258.

    (3)     Note.  Generally, the change in orientation involves either (a)
    variation in angularity of the work engaging surface with respect to line
    of relative gripping movement or (b) shift of the work engaging surface
    normal or lateral to the line of relative gripping movement or (c) both
    variation in angularity and lateral shift.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164,    for patents to a holder with means to adjust portions of the same
    jaw with respect to each other laterally of the line of relative gripping
    movement.

    237+,   for patents to a holder with relatively pivoted jaws.

    258+,   for patents to a holder characterized by adjustable jaw features.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclass 421, for patents to pliers with articulated jaws.


CLS 269/140
TXT Device under subclass 86 including a means for adjusting* and/or actuating*
    one jaw* plus a different means for adjusting and/or actuating a coacting
    jaw.

    (1)     Note.  A device which includes a common driving element, anywhere
    in a train of mechanisms used to position both jaws, is not considered to
    have separate means in the sense of the above definition.  Such a means is
    considered to constitute a single positioning means.

    (2)     Note.  The adjustment and/or actuation of the coacting jaws must be
    with respect to some common supporting structure, as well as with respect
    to each other, for inclusion in this and indented subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass does not include devices having three work
    gripping elements mutually movable to hold work, for which see subclass 156.

    (4)     Note.  In the figure below the pins on bar 3 provide for adjustment
    of one jaw and the screw 2 provides for actuation of the other jaw.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165+,   for patents to a holder with the specific adjustment means.

    216+,   for patents to a holder with specific actuating means.

    218,    for patents to a holder with common means to simultaneously actuate
    plural jaws.


CLS 269/141
TXT Device under subclass 140 wherein the different means for positioning are
    adjustment means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165+,   for patents to a holder including adjustment means.


CLS 269/142
TXT Device under subclass 140 including a different actuating means for each
    jaw of a coacting jaw couple.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    for patents to a quadrilateral frame type holder with at least one
    actuating means upon each of the four sides of the frame.


CLS 269/143
TXT Device under subclass 142 wherein the coacting jaws are mounted on, or
    adjacent to, the ends of an arched, curved or channel shaped member, which
    member constitutes the common supporting structure relative to which both
    coacting jaws are actuated and which member is not secured to a base or
    mount.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are patents to a portable C-clamp type holder
    with diverse actuator means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147+,   for patents to straight beam type holder including separate
    positioning means for each of coacting jaws.

    249,    for patents to a C-clamp type holder including a screw-nut type
    actuator.


CLS 269/145
TXT Device under subclass 142 wherein the different actuating means are of the
    same type.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note under subclass 143. Actuating means provided
    for in the same subclass (on the basis of said actuating means) will be
    considered as being of the same type e.g., all forms of toggle actuators
    are the "same" type.


CLS 269/146
TXT Device under subclass 140 wherein one of a pair of coacting jaws is
    provided with means to adjust and actuate said jaw.

    (1)     Note.  Such means may be a single unitary mechanism or two separate
    structural entities.

    (2)     Note.  In the figure below screw 3 provides for actuation of a jaw
    with respect to element 4, while the element and the jaw can both be
    adjusted (by cant means) with respect to jaw 1 along ba  r   2.


CLS 269/147
TXT Device under subclass 140 wherein the coacting jaws are mounted on a
    rectilinear shank (rod, rail or bar) which shank constitutes the common
    supporting structure relative to which coating jaws are positioned and
    which shank is not secured to a base or mount.

    (1)     Note.  Patents to a holder including a beam with a lateral
    projection fixed thereto, through which projection an actuating means moves
    a jaw parallel to the extent of the beam, are considered akin to a straight
    beam type for this and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143+,   for patents to a C-clamp type holder including separate means to
    actuate each of a jaw pair.


CLS 269/148
TXT Device under subclass 147 including at least two shank members in spaced,
    nonconverging, relationship.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270,    for patents to a holder with paralleling structure for jaws.


CLS 269/149
TXT Device under subclass 147 including shank structure whereby said shank may
    be varied in length.

    (1)     Note.  The variation in length may, for example, be accomplished by
    telescoping of shank portions, insertion or substitution of shank portions,
    etc.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass are patents for a holder with the
    variant referred to in (1) Note of subclass 147.


CLS 269/150
TXT Device under subclass 140 including an arcuately movable jaw and means to
    rock said jaw about a fulcrum to grip work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237+,   for patents to a holder including a pivoted jaw.


CLS 269/151
TXT Device under subclass 86 including means to selectively vary, or determine,
    the area of application of actuating* effort to one or both of relatively
    movable jaws.


CLS 269/152
TXT Device under subclass 86 including two or more jaw* couples.

    (1)     Note.  Patent placement here requires that the claimed holder jaws
    coact in pairs, that is, each jaw is movable relative to another particular
    jaw, whether or not each pair engages the same workpiece.

    (2)     Note.  Two or more work contacting elements, each of which is
    separately movable, (i.e., adjusted* and/or actuated*), which coact with a
    single member to grip a workpiece(s), are considered to be plural jaws and
    are specifically set out in subclass 154 below.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass is residual, in the workholder art, for
    patents claiming plural jaw pairs, which jaw pairs are not encompassed by
    the definitions of superior subclasses in the class schedule.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37+,    for patents to plural means for holding workpieces relative to each
    other, and search notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 300+, for patents to tool jaws positioned by
    relatively movable plural handles, e.g., pliers.


CLS 269/153
TXT Device under subclass 152 including a single mechanism for the jaw
    actuation* of two or more of the jaw couples.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218,    for patents to a holder including a common means to actuate plural
    jaws, and, see notes thereunder.


CLS 269/154
TXT Device under subclass 152 including two or more separately movable jaws
    coacting with a single common, flat, member to hold work.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are patents to a holder for single or plural
    workpieces.

    (2)     Note.  See JAW*, paragraphs (C) and (D).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37+,    for patents to a holder with plural jaws which hold plural
    workpieces relative to each other and see search notes thereunder for loci
    of patents to devices with plural jaws.


CLS 269/155
TXT Device under subclass 152 wherein the jaws of one couple move relatively in
    a plane spaced from and nonparallel to the relatively movable jaws of
    another couple.


CLS 269/156
TXT Device under subclass 86 including three work gripping elements, each
    movable in substantially the same plane and mutually adjustable* and/or
    actuable*, to hold the same workpiece or workpieces.

    (1)     Note.  While the elements do not move in couples they do coact and
    are therefore considered jaws*.

    (2)     Note.  See subclass 289 (2) Note and JAW* (B) with reference to a
    disclosed, but unclaimed, work-underlying-support element constituting one
    of the three work gripping elements.  A patent to a holder with a jaw
    couple which can hold work without a disclosed, but not claimed,
    work-underlying-support is therefore not placed in this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  See JAW* (C) and (D) for the locus of patents with respect
    to plural jaw elements all coacting with a multi-configured work engaging
    member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37+,    for patents to plural holders for holding workpieces relative to
    each other, and see search notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 303+, for patents to pliers with three or more
    jaws.


CLS 269/157
TXT Device under subclass 86 including resilient or weight means urging one or
    more jaws* into nongripping relationship with the work.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are means which rely upon springs, gravity or
    resiliency of structural elements. These means must be claimed for
    placement of a patent in this subclass, rather than in other coordinate
    subclasses below on the basis of other jaw positioning features.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254,    for patents for a holder with bias means to urge jaws toward work
    gripping position.


CLS 269/158
TXT Device under subclass 157 wherein the means to effect relative jaw movement
    includes a member to be moved by the foot of an operative.

    (1)     Note.  A foot switch to initiate motor means for a holding device
    is not considered to be a pedal mechanism for this subclass and a patent to
    such means will be placed elsewhere on the basis of other features in the
    work holding combination.

    (2)     Note.  See HAND*.


CLS 269/159
TXT Device under subclass 158 including means other than and in addition to the
    means to actuate* the jaw(s) for maintaining said jaw(s) in a desired
    spaced relationship.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165+,   for patents for a holding device with means to latch or lock the
    jaws in desired initial adjusted* position.


CLS 269/160
TXT Device under subclass 157 wherein the resilient means consists of an
    elastic helical element embracing a threaded cylindrical member forming
    part of a screw-nut actuating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240+,   for patents to a holder using a screw-nut actuating means.


CLS 269/161
TXT Device under subclass 157 wherein the resilient means consists of an
    elastic strip or sheet positioned intermediate coacting rockable jaws.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237+,   for patents to a holder including pivoted jaws.


CLS 269/162
TXT Device under subclass 157 wherein the resilient means consists of an
    elastic helical element embracing or bearing against a cam* or cam follower
    forming part of a cam actuating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229,    for patents to a holder using a cam actuating means.


CLS 269/163
TXT Device under subclass 157 including at least two coacting work grippers
    secured to each other independently of any actuating* means.

    (1)     Note.  The work grippers are placed between coacting jaws* so that
    the actuation of said jaws will cause said work grippers to grip work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277+,   for patents to holder attachments or inserts which are joined
    without bias means.


CLS 269/164
TXT Device under subclass 86 wherein a work gripping element includes two or
    more sections with means to shift said sections, individually or jointly,
    normal to the general line of relative gripping action.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are devices which adjust jaw portions to
    better grip different work shapes or sizes and also devices which adjust
    jaw portions to enable ready access for working on different parts of the
    work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139,    for patents to a holder with lateral jaw adjustment of coacting
    unitary jaws.


CLS 269/165
TXT Device under subclass 86 including adjustment* means to initially position
    a jaw or jaws.

    (1)     Note.  The adjustment means is often referred to as a "quick
    adjust", "quick acting means" or "rapid set means" for the purpose of
    fixing an approximate jaw position with respect to the work to be held,
    after which a gripping force is applied to further move the jaw against the
    work.  Such further movement, where the gripping force is applied by means
    not encompassed by the definition of adjustments, need by merely
    infinitesimal to be considered actuating* movement.

    (2)     Note.  The adjustment positioning of (1) Note, above, is generally
    a simple sliding, pivoting or changing of a jaw(s) effected by an operative
    grasping said jaw, or a portion thereof or a member attached thereto, and
    imparting all spacial repositioning to said jaw by congruent movements of
    his hand.

    (3)     Note.  Included in this subclass are patents to a holder with an
    insert adjustment-lock* means which means comprises one or more blocks
    positionable between structural elements constituting the means for jaw
    adjustment so as to relatively immobilize said elements.  A wedge or
    cam-like insert, without means to apply force or bias to further seat the
    wedge (or rock the cam-like element), used to effect adjustment-lock is one
    form of such block.

    (4)     Note.  A patent claiming means which provides for both adjustment
    and actuation, and not encompassed by the definitions of subclasses higher
    in the class schedule, will be placed here (subclasses 165+) on the basis
    of the adjustment feature and cross-referenced to the appropriate actuation
    subclasses (216+).

    (5)     Note.  See HAND*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 385+, for patents to a plier adjustment means.


CLS 269/166
TXT Device under subclass 165 including means to effect an adjustment-lock*
    which means comprises at least two relatively movable elements with
    antipodal pairs of mutually abutting surfaces, said surfaces being caused
    to bind or frictionally engage by relative tilting or skewing of either (1)
    one of said elements with respect to the other or (2) a third element with
    respect to both of said relatively movable elements.

    (1)     Note.  Generally, members having a restricted path of movement with
    respect to each other because of the mating configuration of their
    inter-engaged parts are cant locked in relative position by moving one
    member askew to said path of movement.

    (2)     Note.  The use of one or more pivoted elements to effect an
    adjustment-lock by frictionally engaging a member is not considered to be a
    "cant lock" mechanism.  Such mechanism is a clamp means for subclass 203.
    The "cant" means of this and indented subclasses do not have pivots or axes
    and are free for relative tilting or skewing.

    (3)     Note.  In illustration below the opening 3 in jaw member 1 permits
    free movement along bar 2 when the jaw member is positioned as shown at B.
    When canted as shown at A, the jaw member is immobilized.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203+,   for patents to a holder including jaw adjustment mechanism with
    frictional immobilization means applied by other than a relative tilting or
    skewing of elements.


CLS 269/167
TXT Device under subclass 166 wherein two relatively adjustable subassemblies
    or elements are locked together by skewing a third discrete binding element.

    (1)     Note.  This third binding element is either (a) fastened to one of
    the subassemblies and thus immobilizes said subassembly as the element
    binds on the other or (b) interposed between portions of said subassemblies
    to act as an abutment stop when the binding element is manipulated to
    friction engage.

    (2)     Note.  The discrete binding element may comprise a plurality of
    separate cant members.

    (3)     Note.  In the illustration shown below elements 2 are canted with
    respect to bar 1 to lock the position of jaw 3.

            (This illustration is from patent No. 2, 815, 778 dated December
    10, 1957).


CLS 269/168
TXT Device under subclass 167 including means to tilt two or more such binding
    elements which elements also function as part of the jaw actuating* means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188+,   for patents to a holder with common means to both lock and actuate
    a jaw(s).


CLS 269/169
TXT Device under subclass 167 including mechanism, other than bias means or the
    means utilized to apply the cant lock, to move the separate binding element
    out of askew position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205,    for patents to a holder with additional means to release a clamp
    type adjustment-lock.


CLS 269/170
TXT Device under subclass 169 wherein the separate cant member is resiliently
    or gravitationally urged into askew position.


CLS 269/171
TXT Device under subclass 166 wherein at least one such pair of binding
    surfaces is configured to provide positive interengagement.

    (1)     Note.  Patent placement here requires both surface modification and
    canting to maintain said surfaces together.

    (2)     Note.  The term "configured" includes: "teeth", "roughened",
    "racks", "serrations", etc., as integral surface characteristics, thus
    "positive interengagement" also includes any surface modification which
    enhances frictional binding.

    (3)     Note.  In the illustration shown below A indicates the adjustable
    position of the jaw member 2 while B indicates the lock position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203+,   for patents for a holder with noncanting friction lock means using
    serrated surfaces.

    212,    for patents for a holder with noncanting lock means using a pivoted
    or sliding pawl element which element is not integral or fixedly secured to
    one of the surfaces.


CLS 269/171.5
TXT Device under subclass 166 including a roughened, serrated, knurled, or
    similarly configured portion on at least one portion of one of a pair of
    the antipodal abutting surfaces.

    (1)     Note.  In regard to the required tilting or skewing of the two
    relatively movable elements of subclass 166, a patent disclosing the
    interengagement of a single sharply defined edge or point on one element
    with the plane surface of the second element will remain in subclass 166;
    thus, for original placement in this subclass, in regard to any single pair
    of relatively canted elements;

    (a)     there must be an additional configuration (other than an edge or
    point) on at least one element; or,

    (b)     there must be either:

    (i)     at least one inserted element that has a roughened surface, or

    (ii)    two or more inserted elements that may have either single edges or
    roughened surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171,    for patents including plural abutting surfaces that interlock.


CLS 269/172
TXT Device under subclass 165 having screw-nut type actuating* means one of
    whose mating threaded components is movable, parallel to the thread helix
    axis, with respect to the other (without recourse to) and without
    effecting, the translation and rotation required by interengagement of said
    mating.

    (1)     Note.  This, and indented subclasses, are characterized by the
    inclusion of patents to a holder with a common type of actuating means,
    screw-nut type set forth and defined in subclasses 240+, which provide a
    fertile field for modifications relative to "quick adjust" or "rapid set"
    jaw positioning. This subclass and subclasses hereunder are differentiated
    on the basis of such modifications pertinent to adjustment features.

    (2)     Note.  Subsequent to the relative disengaged shift of the mating
    components the further movement of said components in mating position
    causes the jaws to grippingly hold work.

    (3)     Note.  In the illustration shown below B indicates the adjustable
    position of the screw-nut actuating means wherein the screw element 9 has
    been turned to permit the insert element 4 to be disengaged from the nut
    element 1, thus permitting relative axial movement without rotation.  A
    indicates the actuation position of the parts, as the intermeshing of
    elements causes relative axial movement when screw 9 is rotate.  (The
    illustration is from patent No. 2,620,695 dated December 9, 1952).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189+,   for patents to a holder with screw-nut type actuating means which
    also locks the jaw adjustment.

    240+,   for patents to a holder with screw-nut type actuating means, per se.


CLS 269/173
TXT Device under subclass 172 wherein the screw-nut type actuating means
    includes a threaded cylindrical member (solid or hollow) engaging with two
    or more annular segments, bearing mating thread portions, with means to
    move a segment(s) into and out of thread interengagement with the
    cylindrical member.

    (1)     Note.  The segments are generally moved radially away from the
    threaded cylinder to permit relative axial shift of segments and cylinder.

    (2)     Note.  While the segments may not encompass more than 180_ of the
    threaded cylindrical member, at least two of the segments are so arranged
    as to lie in antipodal hemispheres.

    (3)     Note.  In the illustration shown below jaw 3 is tilted so as to
    separate the nut-like thread 1 from the screw 2.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181+,   for patents to a holder utilizing only one segment, or plural
    segments all lying in a common hemisphere.


CLS 269/174
TXT Device under subclass 173 including operative manipulated mechanism, other
    than the relatively rotatable segments and cylindrical member themselves,
    for effecting relative radial movement of plural segments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173,    for patents to holders with separate means to move only one of the
    split segments.


CLS 269/175
TXT Device under subclass 174 including a gravity urged member other than the
    jaw itself to maintain the segments in a desired position.


CLS 269/176
TXT Device under subclass 174 wherein the operative manipulated mechanism
    effects relative radial movement of segments coacting with both of a pair
    of threaded cylindrical actuating members, said members lie in the plane of
    relative jaw movement generally normal to and at different distances from
    the work engaging surfaces of the jaws.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219,    for patents to a holder with spaced parallel screw means, either of
    which means serves as a common actuator for each of the coacting jaws.


CLS 269/177
TXT Device under subclass 174 wherein the operative manipulated mechanism is
    mounted on the threaded cylindrical member support means and moves with
    said member.


CLS 269/178
TXT Device under subclass 173 including means carried by, and responsive to
    relative rotational movement of, the threaded cylindrical member for
    effecting relative radial movement of the segments.


CLS 269/179
TXT Device under subclass 172 wherein the screwnut type actuating means
    includes a threaded cylindrical member (hollow or solid) which member is
    tiltable about an axis transverse to the extent of said member to engage or
    disengage a mating threaded member.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are patents for a device wherein the tilting
    is effected by cam* means carried by the tiltable member.

    (2)     Note.  In the illustration shown below initial rotation of screw 2
    turns cam 3 so as to tilt the screw and free said screw thread from the
    nut-like element 1.


CLS 269/180
TXT Device under subclass 179 wherein the tiltable cylinder is moved by
    manipulation of an operative without intervention of mechanical advantage,
    lost motion, or biasing means.

    (1)     Note.  See HAND*.


CLS 269/181
TXT Device under subclass 172 wherein the screw-nut type actuating means
    includes a threaded cylindrical member (hollow or solid) engaging a segment
    bearing a mating thread portion, with means to move the segment into and
    out of thread interengagement with the cylindrical member.

    (1)     Note.  The segment is generally moved radially away from the
    threaded cylinder to permit relative axial shift of segment and cylinder.

    (2)     Note.  An annular member bearing a segment (less than 180o) of
    thread, relatively rotated to align nonthreaded portions, is not considered
    as an interrupted thread for subclasses 184+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173,    for patents to a holder utilizing plural annular segments.


CLS 269/182
TXT Device under subclass 181 including operative manipulated mechanism, for
    effecting relative radial movement of the segment, which mechanism does not
    require the relative rotation between segment and threaded cylindrical
    member.


CLS 269/183
TXT Device under subclass 182 including a foot operated lever for effecting
    relative radial movement of the segment.


CLS 269/184
TXT Device under subclass 172 including mutilated portions of one or both of
    the mating components, which portions, where properly aligned, permit
    relative axial motion without interengagement of the thread (or helix-like)
    elements of said mating components.

    (1)     Note.  Generally, a partial rotation of a mating component serves
    to align mutilated portion, permitting an axial shift of said component
    (and associated jaw); and a further rotation serves to apply the actuating
    work gripping force.

    (2)     Note.  See subclass 181 (2) Note for relationship to "haft-nut".


CLS 269/185
TXT Device under subclass 184 including two separate thread portions facing
    away, oppositely, from each other on a cylindrical element.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the mating nut member is under-cut in two similar
    portions to permit relative axial motion without thread interengagement.


CLS 269/186
TXT Device under subclass 184 including a single narrow thread portion coacting
    with a mutilated screw element which portion is greater in axial extent
    than the screw element.


CLS 269/187
TXT Device under subclass 184 including an unmutilated externally threaded
    element.


CLS 269/188
TXT Device under subclass 165 including actuating* means, which means, itself
    or through its drive train, operating in a manner necessary to effect
    actuation also effects an adjustment-lock* of relatively movable jaws.

    (1)     Note.  Usually, initial operation of the actuating means locks the
    adjustment and further operation moves the jaws relative to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128,    for patents to a holder including a pivoted yoke frame jaw carrier
    with specific latch means combined with jaw actuating means.

    166+,   for patents to a holder with a cant type adjustment-lock which lock
    is accentuated by further operation of actuating means.


CLS 269/189
TXT Device under subclass 188 wherein the actuating means includes mating
    concentric threaded elements, which elements are relatively rotatable to
    cause relative axial movement of said elements which movement is imparted
    to associated jaws.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172+,   for patents to a holder adjustable by relative axial shift of
    threaded actuating elements and which actuating means may also effect an
    adjustment-lock.

    240+,   for patents to a holder with screw-nut type actuating means, per se.


CLS 269/190
TXT Device under subclass 189 including a tapered or sloped block in the train
    of adjustment-lock mechanism which block is shiftable to effect binding of
    relatively movable jaws.

    (1)     Note.  In the illustration shown below the initial rotation of the
    screw element shifts wedge block 4 causing wedge block 2 to bind against
    the frame 1 thus immobilizing member 5 (and part integral therewith) with
    respect to 1 and 6.  Continued rotation of the screw effects said movement
    thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229,    for patents to a holder with wedge type actuating means.


CLS 269/191
TXT Device under subclass 190 wherein the block moves cylindrical or spherical
    means to effect frictional engagement for locking the adjustment.

    (1)     Note.  In the illustration below (as in the illustration above)
    screw rotation moves block 4, here block 4 moves a roller or ball 2 to
    immobilize member 5.


CLS 269/192
TXT Device under subclass 190 including an element having one or more toothed
    portions movable into engagement with selected notches in another toothed
    element to maintain desired jaw adjustment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212+,   for patents to a holder with pawl-rack detent adjustment-lock means.


CLS 269/193
TXT Device under subclass 192 wherein the movable element is constrained to
    limited movement in an arcuate path for the purpose of engaging the
    coacting toothed element.


CLS 269/194
TXT Device under subclass 189 wherein the means to maintain an adjustment
    position includes the interengagement of a toothed bar with a pivoted or
    sliding element which element has one or more teeth mating with those of
    the bar.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212,    for patents to a holder with adjustment means utilizing a pawl-rack
    lock, which lock means is not applied by means common to it and to the jaw
    actuating means.


CLS 269/195
TXT Device under subclass 194 wherein an internally threaded element of the
    actuating means is fixed or secured to, then serves as the reaction element
    for transmitting work gripping force when a mating externally threaded
    element is rotated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246+,   for patents to a holder with screw-nut type actuating means
    utilizing a relative fixed nut element.


CLS 269/196
TXT Device under subclass 188 wherein the actuating means includes cam* or
    eccentric* means.

    (1)     Note.  See (3) Note under subclass 229.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204,    for patents to a holder with cam or eccentric means which only
    effect adjustment-lock.

    229,    for patents to a holder with cam or eccentric actuating means.


CLS 269/197
TXT Device under subclass 196 wherein the cam means coacts in succession with
    another cam, eccentric, or wedge means to effect both actuation and
    adjustment-lock.


CLS 269/198
TXT Device under subclass 196 wherein the cam means coacts in succession with
    some actuating mechanism other than a cam, eccentric, or wedge means.

    (1)     Note.  For example, the diverse means may be a toggle mechanism.


CLS 269/199
TXT Device under subclass 196 wherein the cam means included at least two
    separate spaced contours which act to transmit motion as the cam is moved.

    (1)     Note.  Generally, one contour effects adjustment-lock and another
    contour effects actuation as the cam is moved.


CLS 269/200
TXT Device under subclass 196 wherein a surface of the cam normal to the
    pivotal or rotational axis is modified to impart to-and-fro movement,
    parallel to said axis, to a follower element as the cam is pivoted, either
    the structure of (a) an axial follower or (b) a normal cam surface being
    specifically claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232,    for patents to a cam actuator with radial face and/or axial
    follower features.


CLS 269/201
TXT Device under subclass 188 wherein the actuating means is a toggle* means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228,    for patents to a holder with toggle actuating means.


CLS 269/202
TXT Device under subclass 188 wherein the actuating means includes a pivotal or
    rotatable gear-like portion rocked into engagement with a toothed bar to
    lock the jaw adjustment and further pivoted or rotated to effect relative
    jaw motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227,    for patents to a holder with rack and pinion actuating means.


CLS 269/203
TXT Device under subclass 165 wherein a mutually immobilizing engagement
    between adjustable elements of the holder is effected or maintained by
    mechanism which increases pressure of one element (or part of one) against
    the other (or part of the other) to cause binding.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this and indented subclasses are lock means with
    roughened or serrated surfaces to enhance the frictional characteristics of
    abutting parts.  However, the claimed modification, in structural terms, of
    one surface to coact with an element of another surface is considered to
    constitute a detent type lock.  For example:  the recital of
    "interengageable teeth", "cogs", "racks", "pawls", "dogs", "pins", "ratchet
    grooves", "lugs", "keys", "studs", "notches", or "fingers" is considered
    descriptive of detent means; while "roughened" or "serrated"  surfaces are
    deemed frictional surface characteristics for this and indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  If the only disclosed means for increasing the pressure to
    cause binding is a spring means, and/or a simple lever, and/or gravity
    acting on a "detent" means, then such means is not considered to be a clamp
    or friction type means, and original placement will be made in subclasses
    207+.

    (3)     Note.  If a patent claims both a "detent" type and a clamp or
    friction type adjustment (e.g., a set screw is used to force a toothed
    element into engagement with a mating toothed element), original placement
    will be in this subclass.  Thus, if a set screw (or similar) means plus a
    surface configuration is claimed, whether the surface is considered to be
    "roughened" or "detent" type is immaterial. However, if no set screw (or
    similar) means is used to apply or force one configured surface into
    interengagement with a coacting configured surface, then (1) Note applies.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166+,   for patents to a holder with frictional locking means effected by
    relative tilting or skewing of elements.

    207+,   especially the indented subclasses 210 and 215.


CLS 269/204
TXT Device under subclass 203 including a cam* to effect interengagement of
    such locking elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229,    for patents to a holder with cam actuating means and see search
    notes thereunder.


CLS 269/205
TXT Device under subclass 203 including mechanism to remove or reduce an
    immobilizing pressure between such elements to permit relative adjustment.

    (1)     Note.  The mechanism is a means other than a bias or the means used
    to apply the lock.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169+,   for patents to a holder with jaw adjustment means including
    cant-lock release means.


CLS 269/206
TXT Device under subclass 203 wherein such mechanism comprises a confined,
    resilient, and generally noncompressible member with means to distort said
    member to cause binding of the adjustable holder elements.


CLS 269/207
TXT Device under subclass 165 including adjustment-lock* means which means
    comprise plural elements (each element carried by, integral with or part of
    a coacting jaw* member) said elements so configured that the
    interengagement of a portion of one with a portion of another causes
    immobilization of the means for relative jaw adjustment.

    (1)     Note.  The detent may only limit relative adjustment in a
    particular direction(s) rather than completely fix one member with respect
    to another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63+,    for patents to a holder mounted for movement with indexing stops.

    203+,   for frictional engagement to effect adjustment-lock and see (1)
    Note thereunder for the distinction between "roughened" surfaces and
    "detents".

    284,    for patents to a holder detent fastener means for a jaw insert.


CLS 269/208
TXT Device under subclass 207 wherein the detent is a bar, pin or rod which is
    insertable axially (i.e., longitudinally) within a selected aperture or
    mating opening to maintain a desired adjustment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69+,    for patents to a pawl-rack adjustment of a holder.


CLS 269/209
TXT Device under subclass 208 wherein the immobilized member is one of a pair
    of relatively movable fulcrumed jaws.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237+,   for patents to a holder with pivoted jaw actuating means.


CLS 269/210
TXT Device under subclass 207 including a notched or toothed bar that is
    disclosed as being adjusted* by manually pivoting, sliding or rocking of
    said bar into and out of interengagement with a coacting element (pin, pawl
    or second rack-type element).

    (1)     Note.  See HAND*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203+,   for patents to a holder including clamp or friction type adjusting
    means, and see search notes thereunder.


CLS 269/211
TXT Device under subclass 207 wherein one element is moved laterally of its
    general extent to engage a selected notch in another toothed element to
    maintain a desired adjustment of jaws.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     for patents to a pin-rack adjustment of a holder.


CLS 269/212
TXT Device under subclass 207 wherein one element having one or more toothed
    portions is pivotable or slidable into engagement with the selected notches
    in another toothed element to maintain a desired jaw adjustment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for patents to a pawl-rack adjustment of a holder.

    171,    for patents to a holder with adjustment-lock means including both
    interengagement of configured surfaces and canting to maintain desired jaw
    adjustment, the configured surfaces portions being integral or fixedly
    secured to said surfaces.

    194+,   for patents to a holder with a pawl-rack adjustment-lock which lock
    is applied by the means for relative jaw actuation.


CLS 269/213
TXT Device under subclass 212 wherein a toothed element is movable into and out
    of engagement with a coacting element by a pivotal shift of the externally
    threaded cylinder forming part of the actuating* mechanism.


CLS 269/214
TXT Device under subclass 212 including a lever (1st, 2nd or 3rd class) or
    lever linkage actuating* means which means transmits relative motion to the
    jaws via the pivoted or slidable toothed element.


CLS 269/215
TXT Device under subclass 212 including a resilient means to bias the pivotal
    or slidable toothed element into engagement with the coacting toothed
    element.


CLS 269/216
TXT Device under subclass 86 including an actuating* means to move at least one
    jaw with respect to another.

    (1)     Note.  Generally, a patent providing for relative movement of jaws
    not clearly encompassed by the concept of adjustment* is considered to set
    forth the use of actuating means and such patent will be placed here
    (subclasses 216+).

    (2)     Note.  A patent claiming an actuating train, which train includes,
    in series, two or more of the specific actuating means set forth below,
    will be placed as an original in the first or superior subclass providing
    for any of said claimed actuating means and a cross reference copy placed
    in subclasses providing for other claimed actuating means; e.g., a patent
    claiming the use of a toggle mechanism to drive a cam actuating means will
    be placed, as an original, in subclass 228 with a cross reference in
    subclasses 229+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for patents to a holder with magnetic means to exert force and work
    gripping.

    165+,   for patents to a holder which includes means for adjustment
    combined with actuating means as well as adjustment means, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 342+, for patents to plier actuating means.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 280+, for patents for a reciprocating press
    with mechanical force multiplier means.


CLS 269/217
TXT Device under subclass 216 including jaws and jaw supporting structure so
    configured and linked that, one the jaws are in firm contact with the work,
    said jaws will react to movement of the work by tending to tighten
    engagement with said work, without the application of other forces on said
    jaws or jaw supporting structures.

    (1)     Note.  Generally, the movement of the work is rotary and the jaws
    tend to hold the work against further rotation but the patents placed
    herein are not limited to such rotational action.

    (2)     Note.  The work need not be claimed for patent placement here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166+,   for patents to holder with similar self-camming action used to lock
    parts of a jaw mechanism in desired adjustment relationship.


CLS 269/218
TXT Device under subclass 216 including a single means effective to move each
    of two or more coacting jaws which jaws engage the same work, with respect
    to a common member as well as with respect to each other.

    (1)     Note.  The common member may be a base or a support for an
    actuating means or a linkage between jaws.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this and indented subclasses are patents to a
    holder supported only by the contact of the coacting jaws with the work
    itself.

    (3)     Note.  In the illustration below jaws 1 and 2 are each moved by
    screw 3 with respect to each other and screw 3.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for patents to a single fluid unit to move plural jaws.

    42,     for patents to plural holders with means for simultaneous actuation
    of the holders.

    107+,   for patents to plural jaw pairs with inter-related actuating means.

    119,    for patents to a quadrilateral frame type holder with at least one
    actuating means upon each side of the frame.

    142,    for patents to a holder with separate actuating means for each of a
    jaw pair.

    153,    for patents to plural jaw pairs with common actuating means.

    242,    for patents for a screw means with right and left thread to move a
    jaw pair.


CLS 269/219
TXT Device under subclass 218 wherein the single means is either of two
    threaded cylindrical members which members lie in the plane of relative jaw
    movement, generally normal to and at different distances from the work
    engaging surfaces of the jaws.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237,    for patents to a holder with pivoted jaws.

    240+,   for patents to a holder with screw-nut type actuating means.


CLS 269/220
TXT Device under subclass 219 including structural details for the joint or
    connection between the screw means and the jaws.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139,    for patents to a holder with similar joint structure so that
    coacting jaw faces may be aligned.


CLS 269/221
TXT Device under subclass 216 including two or more mechanisms to move the same
    jaw.

    (1)     Note.  Patents placed in this subclass require that the claimed
    holder include at least two force multiplying or bias inducing means acting
    on the same jaw. The inclusion of means to vary effective speed of jaw
    movement or jaw force is not such a mechanism.  For example, a holder
    utilizing a differential screw actuator is not considered to have plural
    means for this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  In the illustration shown below jaw 3 can be moved by the
    force of both spring 2 and screw 1.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92,     for patents to a clamp couple element with plural actuating means.

    241,    for patents to a holder with a differential screw actuating means.


CLS 269/222
TXT Device under subclass 221 including two or more screw nut actuating means
    operatively coupled by means of relatively rotatable bodies provided with
    teeth or frictional interengaging elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225+,   for patents to a holder with gear type (other than screw-nut)
    actuating means.

    240+,   for patents to a holder with screw-nut actuating means.


CLS 269/223
TXT Device under subclass 221 including a screw-nut type actuating means and
    additional actuating mechanism, which mechanism effects a shift of the
    internally threaded member of said screw-nut means.

    (1)     Note.  The nut usually carries the screw along with it as said nut
    is shifted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240+,   for patents for a holder with screw-nut type actuating means and
    see notes thereunder for related subclasses and definition of screw-nut
    type mechanism.


CLS 269/224
TXT Device under subclass 216 including means which resile upon the jaw's first
    gripping the work.

    (1)     Note. The extent to which the device yields or resiles upon
    gripping contact with work is usually limited to, and a function of, the
    nature of the particular work disclosed.

    (2)     Note.  Included here are patents to a holder with a jaw, said jaw
    specifically claimed as resilient or yielding.

    (3)     Note.  In the illustration below spring 1 serves as a yielding
    element upon initial contact of jaws 2 and 3 with work.  As shown the
    spring is relatively unstressed, the screw 4 moves to the left against said
    spring a short distance with respect to jaw 2.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157,    for patents for a holder with a movable jaw biased to nonholding
    position.

    254,    for patents for a holder with a movable jaw with bias means to
    actuate the jaw.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 417 and 427, for patents to a resiliently urged
    plier.


CLS 269/225
TXT Device under subclass 216 including relatively rotatable bodies (other than
    screw-nut members) provided with teeth or frictional interengaging elements
    whereby one rotatable body will impart motion to, or receive motion from,
    some other body by rolling contact, which motion directly, or as part of a
    mechanism train, effect relative jaw motion.

    (1)     Note.  Screw-nut gearing is characterized by the fact that the
    relative rotation and relative axial movement, between screw and nut, is
    about and along, a common axis.  While screw-nut means are a species of
    gearing, patents for a holder including a screw-nut means in the jaw
    actuating train are placed in subclasses 240+ below, e.g., a patent for a
    holder including the combination of a gear driven screw-nut actuating means
    is placed in subclasses 240+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222,    for patents to a holder with plural intergeared screw-nut type
    actuating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 640+, for patents for
    gearing means, per se, and see search notes thereunder.


CLS 269/226
TXT Device under subclass 225 wherein the relatively rotatable bodies are (A) a
    toothed wheel engaged by the mating spiral or helix on (B) a cylinder
    tangent to a said wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 425+, for patents for worm
    gearing means, per se.


CLS 269/227
TXT Device under subclass 225 wherein the relatively rotatable bodies are (A) a
    toothed bar engaged by mating teeth on the outer periphery of (B) a
    wheel-like member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202,    for patents for a holder with a rack-pinion sector means used to
    both lock adjustment and actuate jaw movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 420, for patents to rack and
    pinion gear means, per se.


CLS 269/228
TXT Device under subclass 216 wherein a toggle* linkage is utilized to effect
    the relative movement of jaws*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201,    for patents to a holder with toggle means to both lock the
    adjustment and actuate jaw movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 363 and 367+, for patents to toggle actuated
    pliers.


CLS 269/229
TXT Device under subclass 216 wherein the actuating means includes (A) cam*
    means or (B) a tampered or sloped block (acting as an inclined plane) for
    effecting relative jaw movement.

    (1)     Note.  The wedge means must include mechanism to seat or shift said
    means, to be considered as an actuating means.

    (2)     Note.  See subclass 165, (3) Note for line with respect to insert
    block adjustment.

    (3)     Note.  A helical element coacting with a mating threaded element or
    threaded segment, so that the only relative movement between said elements
    is about and/or along a common axis, is considered to be a screw-nut type
    of mechanism rather than a cam or gear means.  In the case of a threaded
    segment the relative axial movement of the segment with respect to the
    helical element is along a line parallel to the helical axis.  The
    provision of means for relative radial movement between the elements is
    considered to characterize the mechanism as a cam type means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165,    for patents to a holder with a wedge insert for jaw adjustment.

    196+,   for patents to a holder with cam means to both lock the adjustment
    of and actuate jaw movement.

    204,    for patents to a holder with cam means to lock adjustment.


CLS 269/230
TXT Device under subclass 229 including means to retain the cam or wedge in a
    selected one of several spatial relationship so as to maintain or fix
    holding relationship of jaws.


CLS 269/231
TXT Device under subclass 229 wherein the contoured motion effecting portion of
    the cam bears directly on the work being held.


CLS 269/232
TXT Device under subclass 229 wherein a surface of the cam normal to the
    pivotal or rotational axis is modified to impart to-and-fro movement,
    parallel to said axis, to a follower element as the cam is pivoted, either
    the structure of (A) an axial follower or (B) a normal cam surface being
    specifically claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200,    for patents to a holder with radial face cam means to both lock the
    adjustment of, and actuate, jaws.


CLS 269/233
TXT Device under subclass 229 wherein the contoured motion effecting portion of
    the cam is a configured elongated aperture or channel.


CLS 269/234
TXT Device under subclass 229 wherein a tapered or sloped block is translated
    for jaw actuation.


CLS 269/235
TXT Device under subclass 229 wherein the cam consists of a specifically
    recited circular element mounted for pivotal or rotary movement about an
    axis spaced from the circle center.


CLS 269/236
TXT Device under subclass 229 wherein the cam is integral with a bar mounted
    for arcuate movement about the axis of said cam by manual positioning of
    said bar.


CLS 269/237
TXT Device under subclass 216 wherein the jaw(s) is moved arcuately by
    actuating means which rocks the jaw or jaw support about a fulcrum member
    to grip work.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are patents to a holder with arcuate jaw
    movement effected by actuating means applied as in a second class lever
    system i.e., the work engaging surface is intermediate the fulcrum point
    and the point of force application.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91+,    for patents to a clamp couple element with fastening means which
    element may rock to hold work.

    150,    for patents to a holder including separate positioning means for
    each of a jaw pair, at least one of which jaws is pivotally mounted and
    actuated.

    157,    for pivoted jaws with means to bias jaw(s) toward nonholding
    position.


CLS 269/238
TXT Device under subclass 237 wherein the fulcrum is intermediate the work
    engaging surface and the point or area of force application.


CLS 269/239
TXT Device under subclass 237 wherein the point or area of force application is
    intermediate the fulcrum and the work engaging surface.


CLS 269/240
TXT Device under subclass 216 wherein the actuating* means includes mating
    concentrically threaded elements which elements are relatively rotatable
    about a common axis to cause relative axial movement of said elements,
    which relative movement is imparted to associated jaws*.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are patents for a holder with elements of less
    than 360_ mating concentric extent.  For example, the nut portion may only
    be a thread segment or the screw may be interrupted.

    (2)     Note.  A worm-gear, though similar to screw-nut, does not provide
    for relative rotation of mating elements about a common axis.  A patent to
    a holder with a worm-gear actuator is therefor excluded from this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  See (3) Note under subclass 229.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172+,   for patents for a holder with screw-nut actuating means including
    means to adjust jaws by relative axial shift of the threaded elements.

    189,    for patents for a holder with screw-nut actuating means which also
    lock the jaw adjustment.

    223,    for patents for a holder with plural actuating means for one jaw,
    one of which is of the screw-nut type.

    225+,   for patents for a holder with gear type (other than screw-nut)
    actuating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 424.8, for patents for
    screw-nut type gearing, per se.


CLS 269/241
TXT Device under subclass 240 wherein at least one portion of a threaded
    actuating means is provided with a lead or a pitch smaller or greater than
    another portion.

    (1)     Note.  Rotation of such actuation means thus imparts axial movement
    of varying degrees to coacting mating elements.


CLS 269/242
TXT Device under subclass 240 wherein threaded portions of one of said elements
    form two opposed helices so that rotation of said element causes relative
    movement in opposite directions between coacting threaded elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218+,   for patents for a holder including a common means to actuate plural
    jaws, and see the notes thereunder.


CLS 269/243
TXT Device under subclass 240 wherein the internally threaded element is
    rotated.


CLS 269/244
TXT Device under subclass 240 including means to support a threaded cylindrical
    element at both ends so that said element can be rotated without axial
    movement.

    (1)     Note.  The rotation of the threaded cylindrical element causes a
    mating nut and its associated jaw to move axially of said element.


CLS 269/245
TXT Device under subclass 240 including means to turn one element, with respect
    to its mating element, about the threaded axis.


CLS 269/246
TXT Device under subclass 240 wherein an externally threaded element is rotated
    for axial movement along with a jaw* carried or associated with said
    element.

    (1)     Note.  Generally, the screw end has a jaw mounted thereon or
    engages a jaw supporting carriage.


CLS 269/247
TXT Device under subclass 246 including a shell or channel member, generally
    coextensive with and surrounding the screw, which member moving with the
    screw serves as a slide or rail to determine the path of relative jaw
    movement.

    (1)     Note.  In most instances the member is so configured as to limit
    jaw movement to translation.

    (2)     Note.  In the illustration below slide 1 moving with the screw 4
    serves as a guide for movement of the jaw coacting with   jaw 2.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250+,   for patents to screw actuated holders with means for jaw
    translation.


CLS 269/248
TXT Device under subclass 246 including an internally threaded element,
    coacting with the rotated element and serving as a reaction member to
    effect axial movement of the rotated element, which internally threaded
    element is not integral with the holding device frame and thus capable of
    being interchanged with other elements if necessary or desired.

    (1)     Note.  This substitution feature is usually for the purpose of wear
    correction or to facilitate assembly.

    (2)     Note.  See the illustration is subclass 247 above wherein the
    nut-like element 3 is dovetailed in the vise frame so as to be replaceable
    if necessary.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247,    for patents to a holder with traveling screw actuator within a
    box-beam guide which type of holder usually has a replaceable nut.
    Generally, no cross-references of this feature have been made to this (248)
    subclass.


CLS 269/249
TXT Device under subclass 246 wherein the screw coacts with a nut, or nut-like
    portion, on one leg of an arched, curved or channel shaped member so that
    the jaw associated with said screw is movable relative to a second jaw
    constituting, or attached to the other leg of said member, and which member
    is not secured to a base or mount.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143+,   for patents to a C-clamp type holder including separate actuating
    means for each of coacting jaws.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 231, for patents to a C-frame type reciprocating
    press construction.


CLS 269/250
TXT Device under subclass 246 including means associated and movable with the
    jaw to (A) keep the work engaging surface(s) of said jaw from shifting or
    varying angularly with respect to a coacting work engaging surface and/or
    (B) prevent rotation of said jaw as the screw rotates.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139,    for patents to a holder with means to change the relative angular
    position of coacting jaw faces.


CLS 269/251
TXT Device under subclass 250 wherein the means for preventing jaw rotation is
    a configured frame guide coacting with a mating configuration carried by
    the jaw.


CLS 269/252
TXT Device under subclass 250 wherein the movable means, to keep coacting work
    engaging surfaces from shifting angularly, moves in the same direction as
    the screw element along a separate but congruent path.


CLS 269/253
TXT Device under subclass 252 including two or more traveling elements parallel
    to the screw and also lying in a common straight plane.

    (1)     Note.  In the illustration below bars 2 and 3 are the traveling
    elements used to maintain parallelism.


CLS 269/254
TXT Device under subclass 216 including means tending to urge the jaws* into
    gripping relationship with the work.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are patents to a holder with means which rely
    upon springs, gravity or resiliency of structural elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157+,   for patents to a holder with bias means to urge jaws away from work
    holding position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 148 and 166
    for a hand-held article carrier which employs a spring to retain the
    article on the carrier.


CLS 269/256
TXT Device under subclass 86 including means to limit the movement of one jaw
    with respect to an opposed jaw so that work-engaging or work-gripping faces
    of the respective jaws are maintained continuously normal to the line of
    relative jaw movement.

    (1)     Note.  While most of these devices are for flat faced jaws, the
    subclass is not so limited.  Configured jaws with means to maintain the
    relative spatial orientation, as set forth above, are classified here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212,    for patents to screw means to actuate jaws with parallel mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 352+, for patents to means for parallel movement
    of plier jaw faces.


CLS 269/257
TXT Device under subclass 86 including a specifically claimed work engaging
    gripper (A) structure, (B) composition, and/or (C) conformation.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses are rather parallel to
    subclasses 418+ of Class 81, Tools, thus a full search must encompass both
    bodies of art.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 418+, for patents to plier jaw structure, and
    subclass 186 for wrench jaw structure, and see (1) Note above.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 295+, for patents to platens or pressure
    surface structure.

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, subclass 123, for patents to radially
    reciprocating jaw structure, per se.


CLS 269/258
TXT Device under subclass 257 including means to permit movement of a jaw* or
    portion thereof to orientate a contacting surface with respect to the work.

    (1)     Note.  The means to permit movement of a jaw is other than one
    including a mechanical advantage.  Thus, "means to permit movement"
    includes a pivot, swivel or slide.

    (2)     Note.  In the illustration below the jaw element 1 is freely
    pivoted so as to be "self-aligning" with the work contacted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139,    for patents to a holder wherein the means for aligning a jaw (with
    respect to another jaw or work) includes a mechanical advantage, e.g.,
    screw, cam, lever, etc.


CLS 269/259
TXT Device under subclass 258 including (A) a separate work-engaging element
    fastened or secured to at least one jaw or (B) a separate work-engaging
    element positioned between opposed jaws so as to be actuated to grip work
    by the movement of said jaws.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    271+,   for patents to an attachment and/or insert which is not alignable.


CLS 269/260
TXT Device under subclass 259 wherein the fastening means includes a crook or
    crook-like element engaging an eye or aperture.

    (1)     Note.  The curved or nib element can be part of either the jaw or
    attachment.


CLS 269/261
TXT Device under subclass 259 wherein the fastening means includes an element
    forming part of the jaw (or mounted on the jaw) in mating interengagement
    with a generally complementary element forming part of the attachment or
    insert.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    283,    for patents to a socket fastener means for a jaw attachment and/or
    insert that is not angularly alignable.


CLS 269/262
TXT Device under subclass 259 wherein the fastening means includes a screw or
    bolt means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282,    for patents to a threaded fastener means for a jaw attachment or
    insert that is not angularly alignable.


CLS 269/263
TXT Device under subclass 259 wherein the attachment is secured to a jaw by a
    spring or elastic means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281,    for patents to other yieldable fastener means.


CLS 269/264
TXT Device under subclass 259 wherein the attachment or insert is placed
    intermediate opposed jaws so that jaw actuation* causes said attachment or
    insert to grip work.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are patents for an insert which insert
    includes structure for the insert to rest on the jaws.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277,    for patents to an insert (not angularly alignable) loosely
    positioned between jaws.


CLS 269/265
TXT Device under subclass 257 wherein a work-engaging member includes at least
    two work-engaging portions, and said engaging portions do not form a
    continuous surface.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are patents which merely call for
    "roughened" or "knurled" or "anti-friction" gripping surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    268+,   for patents to a holder with specific nonplanar work contacting
    surface configuration.


CLS 269/266
TXT Device under subclass 265 wherein the work-engaging portions are movable to
    match the general shape of the work.

    (1)     Note.  The work-engaging portions approximately mate with the
    surface of the workpiece.


CLS 269/267
TXT Device under subclass 265 including means for uniformly distributing the
    actuating force so that the individual work-engaging portions each exert
    the same gripping action.


CLS 269/268
TXT Device under subclass 265 in which the surface of at least one
    work-engaging portion is nonplanar, i.e., a stepped and/or arcuately formed
    surface.

    (1)     Note.  A "roughened" or "nonfriction" surface is not considered to
    define an angular or curved face for this subclass.


CLS 269/269
TXT Device under subclass 268 in which the surface of one work-engaging portion
    is different from that of a coacting work-engaging portion.


CLS 269/270
TXT Device under subclass 268 in which the surface of one work-engaging portion
    substantially mates with the surface of a workpiece.


CLS 269/271
TXT Device under subclass 257 including (A) a separate work-engaging element
    fastened or secured to at least one jaw or (B) a separate work-engaging
    element positioned between opposed jaws so as to be actuated to grip work
    by the movement of said jaws.

    (1)     Note.  The removal of the separate work-engaging element will leave
    a jaw* for engaging a workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136,    for patents to a holder insert for applying a "hold-down" component.

    259+,   for patents to a holder attachment and/or insert that is angularly
    alignable.


CLS 269/272
TXT Device under subclass 271 wherein the work-engaging elements include
    opposed finger or fork elements which are offset from each other so as to
    interlace as the opposed elements approach each other.


CLS 269/273
TXT Device under subclass 271 including a specified composition for the
    separate work-engaging element or the work-engaging surface of such element.

    (1)     Note.  The recital of "yielding" material is not a naming for this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    275,    for patents to a holder with yieldable attachments and/or inserts.


CLS 269/274
TXT Device under subclass 273 wherein the named work-engaging surface consists
    of other than a metal or metal alloy.


CLS 269/275
TXT Device under subclass 271 wherein the work-engaging element is resilient or
    includes a resilient work-contacting surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for patents to a flexible wall element where fluid pressure is used
    to force said element into contact with a work-piece.


CLS 269/276
TXT Device under subclass 271 including means for setting up a magnetomotive
    force to hold the attachment in place.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for patents to a magnetic holder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 285+ for patents to a magnetic holder, per se.


CLS 269/277
TXT Device under subclass 271 wherein at least two coacting work-contacting
    elements are secured to each other independently of the structure of
    related supporting jaws.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are patents for inserts which include
    structure so that the inserts rest on the jaw.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163,    for patents to articulated jaw attachments or inserts with means to
    bias jaws toward nonholding position.

    264,    for patents to an angularly alignable insert loosely positioned
    between jaws.


CLS 269/278
TXT Device under subclass 277 wherein the coacting elements are pivoted to each
    other or to a common lever.


CLS 269/279
TXT Device under subclass 271 including attachment or insert fastening means
    (or mounting means) providing for the choice of one of plural available
    work-contacting portions.

    (1)     Note.  Included here, for example, are patents to a device with a
    swivel mounted attachment so that as desired one of several faces may be
    presented to engage work.


CLS 269/280
TXT Device under subclass 279 including means for interchange of
    work-contacting portions by removal and replacement of the attachment
    and/or insert bearing said portion.


CLS 269/281
TXT Device under subclass 280 wherein the attachment is secured to a jaw by a
    spring or elastic means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263,    for patents to a holder with jaws having yieldable fastener means.


CLS 269/282
TXT Device under subclass 280 wherein the attachment is secured to a jaw by a
    screw or bolt means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262,    for patents to a holder with jaws having threaded fastener means.


CLS 269/283
TXT Device under subclass 280 wherein the insert fastening means includes an
    element forming part of the jaw (or mounted on the jaw) in mating
    interengagement with a generally complementary element forming part of the
    insert.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261,    for patents to a holder with jaws having socket fastener means.


CLS 269/284
TXT Device under subclass 280 wherein the attachment or insert fastening means
    includes an element forming part of the jaw* in mating interengagement with
    an element forming part of said attachment or insert to secure the elements
    together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207+,   for patents to a holder with detent type lock for adjustment.


CLS 269/285
TXT Device under subclass 86 including structural details relative to (A)
    shielding of parts against dirt or corrosion; (B) improving the bearing
    characteristics of rubbing parts; (C) providing modifications to facilitate
    juxtapositioning of parts in operative position and (D) re-enforcement of
    parts subject to failure under operative conditions.


CLS 269/286
TXT Device under subclass 86 characterized by the specific composition of parts
    and/or of the whole holder.


CLS 269/287
TXT Device under the class definition wherein at least a portion of the work
    holder substantially surrounds at least a portion of the work so that a
    section exists whereat the inner periphery of the work holder surrounds, is
    substantially contiguous with, and substantially conforms to, the outer
    periphery of the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152+,   for patents to a holder with plural jaws, and see notes thereunder.


CLS 269/288
TXT Device under subclass 287 wherein the work holder includes a tool couple
    element*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     87, 157, and 290, for patents for other holders having tool couple
    elements.


CLS 269/289
TXT Device under the class definition wherein the work holder comprises a
    surface which, when the work is being treated, is positioned beneath at
    least a part of the work and is in contact with said part of the work to
    support the work against the force of gravity, in at least one position of
    adjustment of the work holder.

    (1)     Note.  A mere pin is not considered to be a work underlying
    support.  A pin-type holder is found in subclasses 53+ of this class.

    (2)     Note.  The mere disclosure of an underlying and work supporting
    surface, without terminology in the claim clearly defining said surface as
    either positioned or modified so as to hold work against the force of
    gravity, will not effect patent placement (as an original) into this and
    indented subclasses.  Thus recital in a claim of a term such as "base",
    "support", "surface", "plane", "frame", "stand", "block", "cradle",  "arm",
    "spider", "bar", etc., and which term encompasses a disclosed work
    underlying support, will not of itself form the basis of original patent
    placement.

    The "hairline" distinction above is of particular importance with respect
    to work clamping or gripping devices which disclose a work underlying
    surface support or a surface obviously capable of such support or even a
    surface peculiarly limited to such support.  Such disclosure is true of
    substantially all vises, clamps, chucks, and gripping devices including a
    plethora of claimed references thereto.  The purposes of a restrictive
    search field are believed best served by not classifying primarily on this
    feature (work underlying support) unless specifically so limited in the
    claim.

    Judicious cross-referencing of disclosed work underlying support features
    into this, and indented subclasses should assure a reasonably complete
    field of search for said features at this locus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257+,   for patents to work holder characterized by the details of jaw
    and/or attachments.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses, for patents including
    article-underlying features, which article is not disclosed as being worked
    on while so supported.  See search notes thereunder.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 7 for a marine vessel
    support for a dry dock.


CLS 269/290
TXT Device under subclass 289 wherein the work holder includes, in association
    with the work-underlying support, a tool couple element*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     87, and 288, for patents for other work holders having a tool
    couple element.


CLS 269/291
TXT Device under subclass 290 wherein the work holder includes a work-stop
    abutment*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     297, 303, and 315, for patents for other work holders leaving a
    work-stop abutment.


CLS 269/292
TXT Device under subclass 290 wherein the tool couple element is mounted so
    that it may be moved from a position beneath the work bearing surface of
    the support, where it is ineffective to take part in treatment of the work,
    to a position coextensive with or above and surface where it is effective
    to participate in said treatment.

    (1)     Note.  Where the relative movement of the support and element is
    disclosed as taking place during the treatment of the work, the patent will
    be found in the class of the treating device, and in this class.


CLS 269/293
TXT Device under subclass 290 wherein the tool couple element is mounted
    rigidly in, or on, or is part of, that portion of the support that
    underlies and bears against the work.


CLS 269/294
TXT Device under subclass 293 wherein the element has a longitudinal axis and a
    generally uniform circular cross-section transverse to this axis, a portion
    of the outer periphery of the element serving as part of the work bearing
    surface of the support.


CLS 269/295
TXT Device under subclass 293 wherein the work bearing surface of the support
    has an opening therein having spaced wall portions disclosed as being of
    the order of magnitude of the thickness of a tool or tool support, said
    wall portions serving to guide the tool in a substantially horizontal path
    across the support during treatment of the work by the tool.


CLS 269/296
TXT Device under subclass 289 wherein the work bearing surface of the support
    has an interruption or a reentrant portion and the structure of the work
    bearing surface of the support is so constructed and disposed that, when
    the work is held during treatment, spaced portions of the work undersurface
    are in contact with the support, said spaced portions having between them a
    portion of the work under-surface that is not in contact with the support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304,    for a work-stop abutment having connected thereto a work support
    portion closing a gap in the support.


CLS 269/297
TXT Device under subclass 296 wherein a work-stop abutment* is provided and is
    mounted so that it may be moved in a direction generally parallel to at
    least a portion of the work-underlying support surface, to thereby enable
    the abutment to be selectively positioned with respect to the support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     291, 303, and 315+, for patents for other work holders having a
    work-stop abutment.

    304,    for a work-stop abutment having connected thereto a work support
    portion closing a gap in the support.


CLS 269/298
TXT Device under subclass 297 wherein at least a portion of the work-stop
    abutment, or its mounting means which moves with it, extends into or lies
    within a gap in the support.


CLS 269/299
TXT Device under subclass 298 including at least two such abutments, not
    rigidly connected to each other, each abutment being mounted to move in and
    along a guideway formed by or in a gap in the support.


CLS 269/300
TXT Device under subclass 298 wherein the abutment has a distance indicating
    member associated therewith which enables the operator to determine the
    distance of the abutment from a datum position in any position of
    adjustment of the abutment.


CLS 269/301
TXT Device under subclass 298 wherein holding means are provided for the
    purpose of preventing movement of the abutment in the gap after the
    abutment has been moved to the desired position in the gap, said holding
    means being additional to the means provided for moving the abutment in the
    gap.


CLS 269/302
TXT Device under subclass 296 wherein a portion of the work undersurface not in
    contact with the support is completely surrounded by portions of the work
    undersurface that are in contact with the support.


CLS 269/302.1
TXT Apparatus under subclass 289 including means providing an underlying
    support upon which a plastic or particulate material is mixed or kneaded by
    hand (e.g., pastry board, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 295+, for a platen or pressure surface of a
    press.

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, appropriate subclasses for
    means providing a table surface with spacing support means.

    433,    Dentistry, subclass 49 for mixing slabs disclosed for use in the
    dental art.


CLS 269/303
TXT Device under subclass 289 wherein the work holder includes a work-stop
    abutment*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     291, 297, and 315+, for patents for other work holders having a
    work-stop abutment.


CLS 269/304
TXT Device under subclass 303 wherein a movable abutment is connected to an
    element that serves as a portion of the work underlying support, said
    element being connected to the abutment in such a manner that at least a
    portion of the element moves with respect to the rest of the support when
    the position of the abutment, with respect to the rest of the support, is
    varied.


CLS 269/305
TXT Device under subclass 303 wherein the abutment has the function of
    restraining the movement of the work across the support surface in at least
    two directions.

    (1)     Note.  The abutment may comprise a plurality of discrete
    unconnected elements.


CLS 269/306
TXT Device under subclass 303 wherein the abutment is mounted so as to hang
    down from a member positioned above the work-underlying support surface.


CLS 269/307
TXT Device under subclass 289 wherein a member is provided which enables the
    operator to determine when the work is placed in a desired position on the
    support, by visually aligning the member and a particular portion of the
    work.


CLS 269/308
TXT Device under subclass 289 wherein means are provided to hold a relatively
    large mass of the work, from which mass a relatively small portion of the
    work is brought to the support.

    (1)     Note.  The mass, for instance, may be a coil of work material.


CLS 269/309
TXT Device under subclass 289 wherein means are provided for (A) holding the
    support in a desired position against the force of gravity, or (B) holding
    a support made of a plurality of parts, each of which underlies and
    contacts the work, in a desired assembled relation.

    (1)     Note.  The support holding means may be a part of the support
    specially provided to enable the support to be connected to the member on
    which it is mounted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses, for patents to a work holder
    supporting structure, per se.


CLS 269/310
TXT Device under subclass 309 wherein the support is connected to its mount by
    yieldable means which normally apply an upward force to the support, which
    force may be overcome by a downward force.


CLS 269/311
TXT Device under subclass 309 wherein the support comprises a plurality of
    discrete members, each of which has an upper surface upon which the work
    lies, and the support mounting means includes means to hold the members in
    a desired assembled relationship.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    296+,   for a support comprising a plurality of blocks with a gap in the
    work-underlying surface between one or more pairs of the blocks.


CLS 269/312
TXT Device under subclass 311 wherein the holding means comprises a member
    extending from one side of the assembled blocks to the opposite side of the
    assembled blocks through openings in the blocks.


CLS 269/313
TXT Device under subclass 312 wherein the holding means comprises, in addition
    to the through rod, a member or members which completely surrounds the
    blocks.


CLS 269/314
TXT Device under subclass 311 wherein the holding means comprises a member or
    members which completely surrounds the blocks.


CLS 269/315
TXT Device under the class definition where there is provided a work-stop
    abutment*.

    (1)     Note.  A patent will not be placed as an original in this subclass
    if the combination of a work-underlying support and work-stop abutment is
    claimed.  See the note under "SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS" below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     291, 297, and 303, for other work holder patents having a claimed
    work-stop abutment.


CLS 269/316
TXT Device under subclass 315 wherein the top of the abutment is resiliently
    urged upwardly away from the bottom of the abutment and may be moved toward
    the bottom upon the application of a force directed against the top.


CLS 269/317
TXT Device under subclass 315 wherein spring means are provided in the abutment
    mounting which urge the work contacting surface of the abutment in a
    particular direction, said spring means permitting the surface to move
    against the spring force when a force is applied against the surface.


CLS 269/318
TXT Device under subclass 315 wherein the abutment includes a pair of members
    which are parallel to each other and not in contact with each other, said
    pair of members serving to support the work abutting surface at spaced
    points.


CLS 269/319
TXT Device under subclass 315 wherein the work is contacted by at least two
    surfaces serving as abutments, and the work contacting surfaces of the
    abutments do not form one substantially continuous surface.


CLS 269/320
TXT Device under subclass 315 wherein motive power means are provided to cause
    movement of the abutment relative to its mounting.


CLS 269/329
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Device under the class definition not provided for in the subclasses above.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 269/900
TXT SUPPORTING STRUCTURE HAVING WORK HOLDER RECEIVING APERTURES OR PROJECTIONS:

    Work holder supporting structure having apertures or projections located on
    one or more of its surfaces for receiving complementary formations on
    members of the work holder, to enable one or more of the members to be
    shifted to a different set of apertures or projections when a new
    orientation or configuration of the member is desired.


CLS 269/901
TXT COLLAPSIBLE OR FOLDABLE WORK HOLDER SUPPORTING STRUCTURE:

    Work holder supporting structure which is designed to collapse or fold from
    its normal use configuration to a smaller, more compact, storage
    configuration when the supporting structure is not intended to be used
    (e.g., portable workbenches).


CLS 269/902
TXT WORK HOLDER MEMBER WITH V-SHAPED NOTCH OR GROOVE:

    Work holder provided with at least one member which has a work-contacting
    and -supporting surface having a V-shaped notch or groove for at least
    partially encircling the work and confining it to a particular portion of
    the surface.


CLS 269/903
TXT WORK HOLDER FOR ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT ASSEMBLAGES OR WIRING SYSTEMS:

    Work holder for positioning electrical elements relative to each other in a
    particular arrangement during the assembling or repair of an electrical
    circuit or wiring system.


CLS 269/904
TXT WORK HOLDER FOR POSITIONING ELEMENTS OF BUILDING IN INSTALLED LOCATION:

    Work holder intended to position one element of a building relative to
    another element of the building for their attachment to each other in their
    final assembled location and orientation in the building.


CLS 269/905
TXT WORK HOLDER FOR DOORS AND DOOR FRAMES:

    Work holder intended to hold a door or a door frame prior to its
    installation in a doorway during various work treatment operations on the
    frame or the door.


CLS 269/906
TXT WORK HOLDER FOR SKIS:

    Work holder intended to hold a ski in a particular position or orientation
    during a waxing, repair, or maintenance operation thereon.


CLS 269/907
TXT WORK HOLDER FOR FISHING FLIES:

    Work holder intended to hold a fishing hook while it is dressed with hair,
    feathers, silk, tensel, or other material into a finished product which
    vaguely resembles an insect.


CLS 269/908
TXT WORK HOLDER FOR CATHODE-RAY TUBES:

    Work holder intended to hold a cathode-ray display tube during an
    assembling or repair operation.


CLS 269/909
TXT WORK HOLDER FOR SPECIFIC WORK:

    Work holder constructed with features (e.g., contour of work-contacting
    surface) peculiar to the holding of a specific type work.


CLS 269/910
TXT WORK HOLDER FOR PREFABRICATED ROOF TRUSS OR WALL FRAME:

    Work holder for positioning elements of a roof truss or a wall frame in
    juxtaposed relationship to each other during their assembly into a unit
    which is intended for later use in a building.


CLS 270/
TTL SHEET-MATERIAL ASSOCIATING

CLS 270/
TXT Method or apparatus for bringing in a logical array, a plurality of sheets,
    or webs of a flexible material in accordance with recognizable indicia
    thereon or other characteristics distinguishing one sheet or web from
    another.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a sheet or web material associating
    combined with printing, cutting, securing, wrapping, or merely opening
    folded sheets.

    (2)     Note.  For purpose of facilitating the definition of the
    subclasses, the following discussion and definition of terms used is
    presented. A "sheet" is a thin, usually flexible object having length and
    width dimensions. The boundary of these dimensions are the "edge" of the
    sheet. The sheet is moving along a direction of travel, and the term
    "side-edge" is applied to those edges which are generally parallel to the
    direction of travel. A "web" is a sheet having indefinite length and a
    definite width. The term "positioning" may include the act of partially
    turning the sheet about an axis that passes through the surface of the
    sheet so that an edge thereof is accurately aligned if that edge was
    previously misaligned.

    (3)     Note.  The following line was established after a discussion with
    the examiners representing Classes 270 and 271:

            In Class 270, the apparatus for the sheet-material associating
    includes a mechanism to place the sheets from plural sources into an
    operational specified association onto or against a surface which then
    groups the sheets in said specified association or to place the sheets in
    specified association. The delivery of the sheets to a stack from the
    plural sources requires a specific order of associating the sheets other
    than mere random stacking. Class 270 accepts putting the sheets in a
    logical array or placing the sheets in the associated stack in order to
    perform the operation on the sheets.

            In Class 271, a separation of an individual sheet from a stack of
    sheets considered proper even if no specific feeding of the sheets for an
    operation is disclosed.  In Class 271, a sheet feeding or delivering means
    combines or places the sheets (a) adjacent to or on top of each other in a
    random order, or (b) to perform the operation on individually fed sheets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    399,    Electrophotography,  subclasses 16+ and 361+  for document handling
    (e.g., feeding or delivering sheet medium (i.e., originals or copies)
    within an electrophotographic device).

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 405+ for folding a sheet or web.


CLS 270/1.01
TXT With printing:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising an apparatus for
    impressing or stenciling or imaging a design or character upon a plurality
    of sheets or webs of a flexible material which sheets or webs are brought
    together in a logical array in accordance with (a) recognizable indicia on
    the material, or (b) the characteristics distinguishing one sheet or web
    material from another.

    (1)     Note.  Inkjet or laser printing is included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for printing on a longitudinally folded web including associating
    extra sheets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    355,    Photocopy, subclass 311 for an electrophotographic document
    counting of a feed stock having different sizes, colors or shapes and
    subclass 325 for delivering or collecting the electrophotographic document
    including inserting a sheet between the two sheets.

    399,    Electrophotography,  subclass 79+ for an electrophotographic
    document counting of a feed stock having different sizes, colors, or shapes
    and subclass 361+ for delivering or collecting the electrophotographic
    document including inserting a sheet between the two sheets.


CLS 270/1.02
TXT Personalized printing (e.g., name or address):

    Subject matter under subclass 1.01 including printing the design or
    character made-to-order, such as printing individual names or addresses or
    other customized printing on selected sheets or webs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    283,    Printed Matter, subclasses 63.1+ for a personalized book printing.


    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 324+ for  printing on a container or tube
    made from a paper  material.


CLS 270/1.03
TXT Responsive to information on sheets or webs:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.02 including means for detecting
    instruction indicia placed on the sheets or webs and in response, thereto,
    interpreting and printing a design or character on the selected sheets or
    webs.


CLS 270/4
TXT Means for both associating and folding, together with a pair of rotatable
    members, between the peripheries of which the work is printed by rolling
    contact.

    (1)     Note.  Compare Class 101, Printing, subclass 216, and indented
    subclasses.


CLS 270/5.01
TXT Longitudinal web folding:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 wherein a flexible material in a strip form
    of indefinite length is being continuously bent over or doubled up upon
    itself along its length by passing the material over a former or the like.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 24+ for
    regulating a longitudinal movement of the web material.


CLS 270/5.02
TXT Cutting:

    Subject matter under subclass 5.01 including a sharp-edged device or
    similar means for severing or penetrating the web.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21.1,   for cutting the folded sheets or webs which are printed  with a
    rotary printer.

    52.17,  for a signature cutting device.


CLS 270/5.03
TXT Slitting or perforating:

    Subject matter under subclass 5.02 wherein the cutting device is  (a)
    making a long narrow cut or incision in the web, or (b) piercing or
    punching a hole in the web.


CLS 270/6
TXT Having a cylinder for carrying a sheet around and associating it with a
    succeeding sheet from the same source, and also means for folding sheets.


CLS 270/7
TXT With means for associating extra sheets with the main product.


CLS 270/8
TXT Also having means for folding sheets.


CLS 270/9
TXT With means for associating extra sheets with the main product.


CLS 270/10
TXT The material being first associated in continuous strip form, then cut into
    sheets, there being a cylinder for carrying a sheet around and associating
    it with succeeding sheets from the same source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.


CLS 270/11
TXT With means for associating extra sheets with the main product.


CLS 270/12
TXT The material at the time of association being in the form of short sections
    as distinguished from webs.


CLS 270/13
TXT There being a cylinder for carrying a sheet around and associating it with
    a succeeding sheet from the same source.


CLS 270/14
TXT With means for associating extra sheets with the main product.


CLS 270/15
TXT With means for associating extra sheets with the main product.


CLS 270/16
TXT Having means for folding sheets on a line parallel to their direction of
    travel through the printing mechansim.


CLS 270/17
TXT With means for associating extra sheets with the main product.


CLS 270/18
TXT Means for assembling a plurality of sheets or webs otherwise then by merely
    stacking, without folding, there being a pair of rotatable members, between
    the peripheries of which the work is printed by rolling contact.


CLS 270/19
TXT There being a cylinder for carrying a sheet around and associating it with
    a succeeding sheet from the same source.


CLS 270/20.1
TXT Folding, with rotary printer:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 1.01 including use of means for
    superimposing portions of the same piece of material without severing along
    the fold line, together with a pair of rotatable members, between the
    peripheries of which the work is printed by rolling contact.


CLS 270/21.1
TXT Cutting:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 20.1 combined with means for severing
    the material transversely of its movement through the machine.


CLS 270/22.1
TXT Bed and travelling cylinder, web, perfecting:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 1.01 wherein printed matter is impressed
    on both sides of a web by passing it through machines having a flat
    printing member in rolling action with a cylinder.

    (1)     Note.  Compare Class 101, Printing, subclass 256, and indented
    subclasses.


CLS 270/30.01
TXT RECIPROCATING-CARRIAGE PILER:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means arranged to
    travel to and fro in a straight path over a support or platform and to
    deposit layers of sheets or webs on the support or platform.

    (1)     Note. The layers may or may not be severed from each other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclass 152 for piling  chemically modified textiles
    and fibres.

    68,     Textiles: Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 177+ for piling the
    fabrics in a web or rope form into a treating receptacle.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 80+ for presses not classified elsewhere,
    having in addition a means to fold a sheet, web, or strand in a zigzag
    fashion.


CLS 270/30.02
TXT With flaw detection in material or pattern marking:

    Subject matter under subclass 30.01 including means for detecting a defect
    in (a) a pre-determined characteristic of the sheets or webs, or (b) a
    design or character printed on the sheets or webs.


CLS 270/30.03
TXT With tension indicator or control:

    Subject matter under subclass 30.01 including means for (a) measuring a
    tautness or slackness in the sheets or webs and  actuating an alarm or
    signal when the tautness or slackness in the sheets or webs is in excess of
    or below a pre-established limit, or (b) actuating a device to regulate the
    tautness or slackness in the sheets or webs for preventing wrinkles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclass Dig. 42 for a web tensioning device.


CLS 270/30.04
TXT With synchronized feeding:

    Subject matter under subclass 30.01 wherein the traveling speed of the
    reciprocating carriage piler is coincided with the speed at which the
    sheets or webs are deposited on the support or platform.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.01+  for a zigzag packaging of the sheets or webs.


CLS 270/30.05
TXT With clamp:

    Subject matter under subclass 30.01 including means for gripping the sheets
    or webs, thereby, restricting the movement of the sheets or webs with
    respect to the carriage or support or platform.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 254+ for a spring or similar resilient
    means for gripping the material or work.


CLS 270/30.06
TXT Traveling supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 30.05 wherein the carriage includes a device
    for carrying a bolt or package from which bolt or package the sheets or
    webs are supplied to the support or platform.


CLS 270/30.07
TXT With edge aligner:

    Subject matter under subclass 30.01 including means for positioning or
    locating lateral edges of the sheets or webs with respect to the edges of
    the previously positioned sheets or webs or with respect to the support or
    platform.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52.08,  for a web edge aligning and registering.

    58.12,  for a sheet edge aligner associated with a binding operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclasses 226+ for a sheet aligning
    means associated with a sheet feeder.


CLS 270/30.08
TXT Cutting:

    Subject matter under subclass 30.01 including a sharp-edged device or
    similar means for severing the sheets or webs and depositing in layers on
    the support or platform.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.02+,  for cutting a longitudinally folded printed webs.

    52.09,  for cutting webs and assembling into individual stacks of  sheets.


CLS 270/30.09
TXT Traveling supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 30.08 wherein the sheets or webs are supplied
    from a bolt or package carried in a continuously moving device to the
    cutting device and deposited in layers on the support or platform.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30.06,  for a traveling supply of the sheets or webs carried on the
    carriage having a clamp.


CLS 270/30.1
TXT With height adjustment of support or carriage:

    Subject matter under subclass 30.01 including means for permitting or
    causing a change in the vertical position of the support or platform or
    carriage.


CLS 270/30.11
TXT Traveling supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 30.01 wherein the carriage includes a device
    for carrying a bolt or package from which bolt or package the sheets or
    webs are supplied to the support or platform.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30.06,  for a traveling supply of sheets or webs carried on the carriage
    having a clamp.

    30.09,  for the traveling supply of the sheets or webs carried on the
    carriage having a cutting means.


CLS 270/30.12
TXT With speed control:

    Subject matter under subclass 30.01 including means for regulating the
    reciprocating travel of the carriage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30.13,  for a carriage driving control.


CLS 270/30.13
TXT With driving control:

    Subject matter under subclass 30.01 including means for changing the
    direction of travel of the carriage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30.12,  for a carriage speed control.


CLS 270/32
TXT Means for both associating and folding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

     4+,    for associating and folding with rotary printer.


CLS 270/37
TXT With means for securing the parts of the product together by means of
    staples, thread, or the like.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 53.

    (2)     Note.  Compare Class 112, Sewing, subclass 136, and indented
    subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 432+ for a residual method of securing a
    nail or staple to work by driving, and see the note to Class 227, below for
    related means for so doing.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclasses 19+ and subclasses
    99+ for combined apparatus for feeding work and applying a member, e.g.,
    staple, to the work.


CLS 270/38
TXT There being a cylinder for carrying a sheet around and associating it with
    a succeeding sheet from the same source.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 47.


CLS 270/39.01
TXT Zigzag package:

    Subject matter under subclass 32 wherein the sheets or webs are folded in
    alternate opposite directions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 613.2+ for feeding a web
    record-medium with a web supply with fan-folded or creased  web.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 410+ for  folding and refolding of a web.


CLS 270/39.02
TXT Including stack separating:

    Subject matter under subclass 39.01 wherein the zigzag package is cut or
    isolated into more than one independent pack of sheets or webs at a
    selected location.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclass 362 for advancing work from first to second
    operation station.


CLS 270/39.03
TXT Web feed from below:

    Subject matter under subclass 39.01 wherein the webs in the zigzag package
    are supplied from the bottom of the zigzag package for further operation.


CLS 270/39.04
TXT With sheet insertion:

    Subject matter under subclass 39.01 including means for introducing a sheet
    between the zigzag folds of the sheets or webs.


CLS 270/39.05
TXT Zigzag web:

    Subject matter under subclass 39.01 wherein the webs are folded in
    alternate opposite directions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 413+ for a web folding by swinging a work
    guiding member.


CLS 270/39.06
TXT Interfolding multiple sheets:

    Subject matter under subclass 39.01 including means for inserting one
    folded sheet into another folded sheet so as to lock both folded sheets
    with one another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 409+ for repeatedly folding and unfolding
    and subclass 450 for folding by a direct application of vacuum or fluid.


CLS 270/39.07
TXT Associating before folding:

    Subject matter under subclass 39.06 wherein the sheets are brought together
    in a logical array in accordance with (a) recognizable indicia on the
    sheets, or (b) the characteristics distinguishing one sheet from another
    sheet; before the sheets are interfolded.


CLS 270/39.08
TXT By blade:

    Subject matter under subclass 39.06 wherein the sheet inserting means
    includes a flat thin member made of metal or non-metal material.


CLS 270/39.09
TXT By rotating drum with pocket member:

    Subject matter under subclass 39.06 wherein the sheets inserting means
    includes a member having a circumferential surface which turns about its
    axis in an arc of a circle; the said surface having a receptacle lying in
    or adjacent to the surface for temporarily holding successive sheets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclass 315 for a rotary sheet
    conveyor having pocket members located on its
    circumferential surface.


CLS 270/40
TXT The material in strip form of indefinite length continuously folded by
    passage through a former.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41+,    for longitudinal folding of web material.


CLS 270/41
TXT The material in strip form of indefinite length continuously folded by
    passage through a former.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 405+ for folding, per se, of sheet material
    generally.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.01+   and 40, for longitudinal folding of web material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.


CLS 270/42
TXT There being a cylinder for carrying a sheet around and associating it with
    a succeeding sheet from the same source, also additional means for sheet
    folding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

     6+,    for longitudinal web folding including cylinder collecting with
    sheet folding.


CLS 270/43
TXT The material first associated in continuous strip form, then cut into
    sheets, there being a cylinder to carry the sheets around and associate
    them with succeeding sheets from the same source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10+,    for associating and folding with a rotary printer including web
    association with cylinder collecting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.


CLS 270/44
TXT With means for associating extra sheets with the main product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for web association with cylinder collecting including
    additional-sheet associating having a rotary printer.


CLS 270/45
TXT The material at the time of association being in the form of short sections
    as distinguished from webs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12+,    for sheet associating and folding with a  rotary printer.


CLS 270/46
TXT With means for causing one sheet to pause until the arrival of another
    sheet, with which it is associated.


CLS 270/47
TXT Having a cylinder for carrying a sheet around and associating it with
    succeeding sheet from the same source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13+,    for sheet associating including cylinder collecting having a rotary
    printer.


CLS 270/48
TXT With means for associating extra sheets with the main product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for sheet associating including cylinder collecting having a rotary
    printer.


CLS 270/49
TXT The folding-blade pivotally mounted on a revolving carrier.


CLS 270/50
TXT The folding-blade pivotally mounted on a revolving carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for sheet associating and folding including revolving pivotal blade
    for cylinder collecting.


CLS 270/51
TXT With means for associating extra sheets with the main product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for sheet associating and folding with a rotary printer.


CLS 270/52.01
TXT ASSOCIATING OR DISASSOCIATING:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a plurality of sheets or
    webs are brought together or assembled into a pack in a logical array other
    than by merely stacking the sheets or webs or separated or disassembled the
    plurality of sheets or webs into separate packs other than merely
    unstacking the sheets or webs in accordance with (a) recognizable indicia
    on the sheets or webs, or (b) the characteristics distinguishing one sheet
    or web from another sheet or web in the pack.

    (1)     Note.  Folding of the sheets or webs is not included in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for a laminating means in combination with a means
    for assembling a plurality of sheets.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and an apparatus for, feeding a material without utilizing
    the leading or trailing ends to effect a movement of the material.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, appropriate subclasses for a
    similar device wherein at least one of the disassembled web is wound into a
    coil.


CLS 270/52.02
TXT With control indicia (e.g., barcode):

    Subject matter under subclass 52.01 wherein the associating or
    disassociating is regulated by a sensor in response to detecting a
    systematic arrangement of recognizable or identifying marks such as lines,
    numbers, or letters, or the like that are printed or placed on the sheets
    or webs.


CLS 270/52.03
TXT Personalized stacks:

    Subject matter under subclass 52.01 wherein the sheets or webs in the packs
    are so arranged that at least one sheet or web in a pack is having a size
    or color or shape or characteristic or indicia different than other sheets
    or webs in the pack.

    (1)     Note.  All packs in the arrangement are identical in this subclass.


CLS 270/52.04
TXT With rejection control:

    Subject matter under subclass 52.01 including means for detecting a damaged
    or missing or repetitive or unintended arrangement of packs and in response
    thereto (a) actuating a warning signal, or (b) activating a member for
    removing such packs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52.06,  for a sensor detecting a stack which does not include all intended
    number of sheets or webs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other  Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclass 16 for a sensor       which detects and in
    response automatically actuates a  member to remove such defective sheet or
    web.


CLS 270/52.05
TXT Reorder control:

    Subject matter under subclass 52.04 including means for regulating a supply
    of new pack of sheets or webs to replace the rejected packs.


CLS 270/52.06
TXT With incomplete stack sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 52.01 including means for detecting more or
    less than a predetermined number of sheets or webs in the pack and in
    response thereto actuating a signal or warning device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclasses 256+ for a means to
    interrupt a sheet feeding.


CLS 270/52.07
TXT Web associating:

    Subject matter under subclass 52.01 wherein a plurality of materials in
    strip form having indefinite lengths are brought together or assembled into
    packs in a logical array other than by merely stacking the strip material,
    in accordance with (a) the recognizable indicia on the materials, or (b)
    the characteristics distinguishing one strip material in the pack from
    another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52.01+, for sheets or webs associating or disassociating.

    58.01+, for sheet associating.

    58.33+, for sheet disassociating.


CLS 270/52.08
TXT Aligning or registering:

    Subject matter under subclass 52.07 including a web associating mechanism
    and means for locating or positioning side edges of successively stacked
    webs or locating or positioning the associated webs with respect to a part
    of the web associating mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30.07,  for an edge aligner with reciprocating piler.

    58.12,  for a sheet edge aligner in a sheet binding operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclasses 226+ for a sheet alignment.


CLS 270/52.09
TXT Cutting web into stacked sheets:

    Subject matter under subclass 52.07 wherein (a) the web is severed into
    individual sheets and assembled into orderly piles, or (b) the web is
    severed under individual sheets and assembled into the orderly piles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30.08+, for cutting webs or sheets material associated with a carriage
    piler.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclass 444 for a sensing means to
    control an arrangement of a stream of items on a      conveyor.


CLS 270/52.1
TXT Webs of different material (e.g., paper and carbon):

    Subject matter under subclass 52.07 including at least two webs each having
    a distinct characteristic (e.g., one web is a plain paper and the other web
    is treated with a carbon compound).


CLS 270/52.11
TXT Web decollating:

    Subject matter under subclass 52.01 including means for separating webs
    into individual webs or a group of webs without cutting.


CLS 270/52.12
TXT Web bursting:

    Subject matter under subclass 52.01 including means such as a gripping
    roller or the like for holding or pulling the webs for breaking along
    perforations or weak planes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52.09,  for cutting a web into sheets and assembling into a stack.


CLS 270/52.13
TXT Securing sheet onto web:

    Subject matter under subclass 52.01 including means for placing and
    attaching the sheet onto the web.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52.18,  for a signature binding operation.


CLS 270/52.14
TXT Signature associating:

    Subject matter under subclass 52.01 wherein a plurality of previously
    folded sheets or webs are brought together or assembled into the packs in a
    logical array other than by merely stacking the previously folded sheets or
    webs in accordance with (a) the recognizable indicia on the sheets or webs,
    or (b) the characteristics distinguishing one sheet or web from another in
    the pack.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52.01+, for sheets or webs associating or disassociating.

    52.07+, for web associating.

    58.01+, for sheet associating.


CLS 270/52.15
TXT Mis-feed signature sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 52.14 including means for detecting (a) the
    absence of the signature, or (b) more than one signature occupying a space
    at the same time, or (c) a mis-alignment of the signature or such
    improperly supplied signature; and in response thereto actuating a signal
    or warning device.

    (1)     Note. The sensor is located between the supply source and the
    support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58.03,  for a mis-feed sheet sensor.


CLS 270/52.16
TXT Gathering line:

    Subject matter under subclass 52.14 wherein the signatures are carried in a
    continuously advancing straight line path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52.29,  for a saddle gathering line.

    58.29,  for a sheet gathering line.


CLS 270/52.17
TXT Cutting:

    Subject matter under subclass 52.14 including a sharp-edged device or
    similar means for severing the signatures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.02+,  for cutting individually folded printed webs.

    21.1,   for cutting folded sheets or webs which are printed with a rotary
    printer.


CLS 270/52.18
TXT Binding:

    Subject matter under subclass 52.14 including means for securing in
    position two or more individual signatures together.

    (1)     Note. The securing means for this subclass includes metallic rings
    or wire bands such as staples or threads.


CLS 270/52.19
TXT Insetting:

    Subject matter under subclass 52.14 including means for inserting an
    additional sheet between the folded sides of the signatures.

    (1)     Note.  Folded edges of the signatures are placed downward for this
    subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The insetting means may include a roller or pusher or such
    device which drops the additional sheet between  the open folded sides of
    the signature.


CLS 270/52.2
TXT Signature carrying hopper:

    Subject matter under subclass 52.19 wherein the signatures, before or after
    insetting, are transported in a pocket-like container which is
    substantially shaped like a funnel.


CLS 270/52.21
TXT Roller signature feeder:

    Subject matter under subclass 52.19 wherein the signatures are supplied
    from a source by a device having a rotating drum or such similar member
    turning on its axis in an arc of a circle.


CLS 270/52.22
TXT With signature in-feed conveyor:

    Subject matter under subclass 52.21 wherein the signatures are transported
    to the feeder on a carrier having a continuously moving surface such as an
    endless belt made of a flexible material.


CLS 270/52.23
TXT Signature opener:

    Subject matter under subclass 52.19 including means for engaging or pulling
    apart the folded sides of the signature.


CLS 270/52.24
TXT By suction:

    Subject matter under subclass 52.23 wherein the signature opener includes
    an element having a surface through which surface a vacuum or
    subatmospheric pressure is applied to facilitate engaging and pulling one
    side of the signature toward the surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52.28,  for opening saddled signatures by suction means.


CLS 270/52.25
TXT By gripping:

    Subject matter under subclass 52.23 wherein the signature opener includes
    at least two elements having opposed surfaces between which surfaces one
    side of the signature is placed and the elements are urged toward one
    another and one side of the signature is firmly grasped by the surfaces and
    pulled away with respect to the other side of the signature.


CLS 270/52.26
TXT Saddle associating:

    Subject matter under subclass 52.14 wherein the signatures are so
    associated that edges formed by the folded sides of the signatures are
    directed upward and perpendicular to the direction of travel of the
    signatures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52.01+, for sheets or webs associating or disassociating.

    52.07+, for web associating.

    58.01+, for sheet associating.


CLS 270/52.27
TXT Saddle opener:

    Subject matter under subclass 52.26 including means for engaging and
    pulling apart the folded sides of the signatures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52.23+, for a signature opener.


CLS 270/52.28
TXT By suction:

    Subject matter under subclass 52.27 wherein the signature opener includes
    an element having a surface, through which surface a vacuum or
    subatmospheric pressure is applied to facilitate engaging and pulling one
    side of the signature toward the surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52.24,  for opening the signatures by suction means.


CLS 270/52.29
TXT Gathering line:

    Subject matter under subclass 52.26 wherein the signatures are carried in a
    continuously advancing straight line path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52.16,  for a signature gathering line.

    58.29,  for a sheet gathering line.


CLS 270/52.3
TXT Rotating saddle:

    Subject matter under subclass 52.26 wherein the signatures are transported
    on a surface that turns about an axis in an arc of a circle.


CLS 270/56
TXT With means for preventing the operation of the machine.


CLS 270/58.01
TXT Sheet associating:

    Subject matter under subclass 52.01 wherein a plurality of materials in
    strip form having definite lengths and widths are brought together or
    assembled into a pack in a logical array other than by merely stacking the
    strip materials, in accordance with (a) the recognizable indicia on the
    materials, or (b) the characteristics distinguishing one strip material
    from another in the pack.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12+,    for sheet associating with printing

    45+,    for sheet associating and folding

    52.01+, for sheets or webs associating or disassociating.

    52.07+, for web associating.


CLS 270/58.02
TXT Sheet arrival sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 58.01 including means for (a) detecting the
    presence or absence of the sheets, or (b) detecting an orientation of the
    individual sheet, or (c) recognizing and interpreting the distinguishing
    markings or specific codes or such visible or invisible markings on the
    sheet; and in response thereto actuating a signal or warning device.


CLS 270/58.03
TXT Mis-feed sheet sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 58.02 wherein the sensor is  detecting (a)
    the absence of the sheet, or (b) more than one sheet occupying a space at
    the same time, or (c) a mis-alignment of the sheet, or (d) such improperly
    supplied sheet; and in response thereto actuating a signal or warning
    device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52.15,  for a mis-feed signature sensor.


CLS 270/58.04
TXT With dissimilar-sheets sensor (e.g., different sizes or weights):

    Subject matter under subclass 58.01 including means for detecting different
    sizes or colors or thicknesses or weights or the like  characteristics of
    the sheets in the pack.


CLS 270/58.05
TXT Cover sheet:

    Subject matter under subclass 58.04 including a special outermost sheet in
    the pack having a characteristic different from all other sheets in the
    pack.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 505+ for a detecting means responsive to
    presence or absence of a cover material.


CLS 270/58.06
TXT Envelope stuffing:

    Subject matter under subclass 58.01 wherein the sheets are inserted into a
    container made of a thin prefolded flat sheet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclass 381.7 for a means to open a flap of an
    envelope.


CLS 270/58.07
TXT Performing operation on stacks (e.g., binding, cutting):

    Subject matter under subclass 58.01 wherein the pack is  undergoing a work
    (e.g., binding or cutting or aligning or such similar work).


CLS 270/58.08
TXT Binding:

    Subject matter under subclass 58.07 wherein two or more sheets in the pack
    are secured together by a securing means.

    (1)     Note. The securing means for this subclass includes metallic  rings
    or wire bands such as staples or threads.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37+,    for stapling and stitching for an assembled and folded sheet
    material.

    52.18,  for signature binding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 432+ for a residual method of securing a
    nail or staple to work by driving.

    53,     Package Making, subclass 157 for machines to form group contents
    and to subsequently package the group, at least one article of the group
    being an insert or separating sheet.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclasses 19+ and subclasses
    99+ for combined apparatus for feeding work and applying a member, e.g.,
    staple to the work.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclass 410 for stapling the sheets supplied
    from a copying machine.


CLS 270/58.09
TXT Including condition responsive control (e.g., stack thickness):

    Subject matter under subclass 58.08 including a sensor for detecting an
    occurrence of a predetermined event related to the binding operation such
    as detecting a specific thickness of a pile of sheets or such similar event
    and initiating a signal or alarm or actuating a device to regulate or
    modify the binding operation.

    (1)     Note.  The size of the staple or the force applied to the staple
    for binding is directly related to the thickness of the pile.


CLS 270/58.1
TXT Lapstream:

    Subject matter under subclass 58.08 comprising a plurality of packs and
    wherein the packs are carried in a steady flow or succession in an
    overlapped or shingled arrangement for binding operation.


CLS 270/58.11
TXT Including stack presentation:

    Subject matter under subclass 58.08 comprising a receiver and wherein the
    pack is formed by (a) the sheets being collected in a stack in the receiver
    and (b) the receiver carrying the stack to a position for binding.

    (1)     Note.  The binding means in this subclass may or may not be rigidly
    fixed at one location.

    (2)     Note.  The stack of sheets in this subclass may be prepared at a
    location different from the binding operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 408+ for delivering photocopying
    documents for binding.


CLS 270/58.12
TXT With edge aligner:

    Subject matter under subclass 58.11 including means for positioning or
    locating lateral edges of the sheets (a) with respect to the edges of the
    previously positioned sheets, or (b) with respect to a part of the
    transporting mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  The edge alignment caused by dropping or sliding the sheets
    by a gravity, such as falling of sheets from a  sloped surface, is not
    included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30.07,  for an edge aligner in reciprocating-carriage pilers.

    52.08,  for an aligning or registering of web.

     SEARCH CLASS:

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclasses 226+ for a sheet aligning
    means.


CLS 270/58.13
TXT With vertically movable stacker:

    Subject matter under subclass 58.11 wherein the receiver carrying the pack
    is adjustable in an upward or downward direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58.28,  for a vertically movable stacker for a sheet associating.


CLS 270/58.14
TXT Plural stackers:

    Subject matter under subclass 58.07 comprising at least two additional
    receivers (i.e., stackers) and wherein the sheets are bound in packs and
    the packs are delivered to the additional receivers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclasses 287+ for delivering
    successive sheets at plural receivers in succession.


CLS 270/58.15
TXT Means to spread apart stackers:

    Subject matter under subclass 58.14 including a device for  increasing a
    spacing between the individual stackers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclass 293 for a means to increase
    the spacing between the sheet receivers.


CLS 270/58.16
TXT With edge aligner:

    Subject matter under subclass 58.14 including means for positioning or
    locating lateral edges of the sheets (a) with respect to the edges of the
    previously positioned sheets, or (b) with respect to a part of one of the
    stackers.

    (1)     Note.  The edge alignment caused by dropping or sliding the sheets
    by gravity, such as falling of the sheets from a sloped surface, is not
    included in this subclass.


CLS 270/58.17
TXT With edge aligner:

    Subject matter under subclass 58.07 including an operation mechanism and
    means for positioning or locating lateral edges of the sheets (a) with
    respect to the edges of the previously positioned sheets, or (b) with
    respect to a part of the operation mechanism.

    (1)     Note. The edge alignment caused by dropping or sliding the sheet by
    a gravity such as falling of the sheet from a  sloped surface is not
    included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58.14+  and 58.17, for aligning the stacked sheets.


CLS 270/58.18
TXT Plural stackers:

    Subject matter under subclass 58.01 comprising at least two receivers
    wherein each receiver receives a pack of sheets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclasses 287+ for delivering
    successive sheets from plural receivers in succession.


CLS 270/58.19
TXT Movable stackers:

    Subject matter under subclass 58.18 including means for adjusting the
    positions of the stackers individually or simultaneously as a unit for
    collecting the packs of sheets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclasses 292+ for delivering sheets
    from multiple discharge to movable plural receivers.


CLS 270/58.2
TXT With hopper:

    Subject matter under subclass 58.18 wherein the receivers are transported
    in a carrier which is substantially shaped like a funnel.


CLS 270/58.21
TXT Radially arranged:

    Subject matter under subclass 58.2 wherein the hopper is assembled to
    rotate about a horizontal axis.


CLS 270/58.22
TXT Annularly arranged:

    Subject matter under subclass 58.2 wherein the hopper is  assembled to
    rotate about a vertical axis.


CLS 270/58.23
TXT Sheets received from plural supplies:

    Subject matter under subclass 58.01 comprising two or more sources of
    sheets wherein the sources supply the sheets for assembling into the pack.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclasses 9.01+ for feeding the
    sheets from the plural sources.


CLS 270/58.24
TXT By suction:

    Subject matter under subclass 58.23 wherein at least one of the supply
    sources includes an element having a surface, through the surface of which
    element a vacuum or subatmospheric pressure is applied to facilitate in
    engaging and pulling the sheets to the surface of the element to remove the
    sheets from the supply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52.24   and 52.28, for opening the signature by suction.


CLS 270/58.25
TXT By simultaneous feeding:

    Subject matter under subclass 58.23 wherein the sheets from the plural
    sources are supplied at the same time.


CLS 270/58.26
TXT Pusher for sequentially piling sheets:

    Subject matter under subclass 58.23 including means for contacting each
    sheet and introducing a force or pressure for collecting the sheets
    together in a specific order.


CLS 270/58.27
TXT With edge aligner:

    Subject matter under subclass 58.01 including means for positioning or
    locating lateral edges of the sheets (a) with respect to the edges of the
    previously positioned sheets, or (b) with respect to a part of the sheet
    associating mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  The edge alignment caused by dropping or sliding the sheet
    by gravity such as falling of the sheet from a  sloped surface is not
    included in this subclass.



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58.12,  for an edge aligner associated with a stack-binding  operation.

    58.16,  for the edge aligner associated with plural stackers of the sheets
    being operated on.

    58.17,  for the edge aligner associated with performing the operation on
    the stack of sheets.


CLS 270/58.28
TXT Vertically movable stacker:

    Subject matter under subclass 58.01 including a receiver for the pack of
    sheets and wherein the receiver is adjustable in an upward or downward
    direction.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58.13,  for a vertically movable stacker for a stack binding operation.


CLS 270/58.29
TXT Gathering line:

    Subject matter under subclass 58.01 including means for continuously
    advancing the sheets in a straight line path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52.16,  for a signature gathering line.

    52.29,  for a saddle gathering line.


CLS 270/58.3
TXT With lapstream:

    Subject matter under subclass 58.01 wherein the associated sheets are
    transported in a steady flow or succession in an overlapped or shingled
    arrangement.


CLS 270/58.31
TXT Inserting marker sheet:

    Subject matter under subclass 58.01 including placing a sheet  having a
    distinct characteristic at a predetermined location into a group of sheets,
    for designating an end of one group of sheets and a beginning of another
    group of sheets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclass for means for placing a
    number of sheets into a columnar grouping with means for coating the edge,
    of a sheet to designate the end of one and the beginning of another
    grouping.

    198,    Conveyors, Power-Driven, appropriate subclass for placing a number
    of sheets into a continuously conveyed grouping of sheets on edge, without
    insertion of a marker sheet.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 788.1+ for placing a
    number of sheets into a stacked grouping, without insertion of a marker
    sheet; and subclasses 798.2+ for placing a number of sheets into the
    grouping of sheets on edge, at a fixed location, without insertion of the
    marker sheet.

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclass for a method of placing a
    number of sheets into a columnar grouping with coating the edge of a sheet
    to designate the end of one and the beginning of another grouping.


CLS 270/58.32
TXT Tab or strip:

    Subject matter under subclass 58.31 wherein the marker sheet includes a
    short flap or a narrow piece of a sheet material having a reasonably
    constant width or such similar short piece of the sheet material.


CLS 270/58.33
TXT Sheet disassociating:

    Subject matter under subclass 52.01 wherein (a) a sheet is cut or separated
    along previously determined locations or weak planes or perforations, into
    smaller individual sheets to form a stack of individual sheets, or (b) a
    stack of sheets is cut or separated along the previously determined
    locations or weak planes or perforations to form a plurality of smaller
    individual stacks.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52.01+, for sheets or webs associating or disassociating.

    58.01+, for sheet associating


CLS 270/58.34
TXT Separate stackers:

    Subject matter under subclass 58.33 comprising at least two receivers and
    wherein each receiver collects a stack of sheets.


CLS 270/59
TXT Having means to cause one sheet to pause until the arrival of another
    sheet, with which it is associated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for a means causing a sheet to pause during associating and folding.


CLS 270/60
TXT There being a cylinder for carrying a sheet around and associating it with
    a succeeding sheet from the same source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

     6+,    10+, 13+, 19, 38, 42, 43+, and subclasses 47+ for a cylinder
    carrying a sheet around and associating the sheet with a succeeding sheet
    from the same source.


CLS 271/
TTL SHEET FEEDING OR DELIVERING

CLS 271/
TXT
    Means for moving an individual sheet from a stack of sheets or positioning
    the individual sheet with respect to a location where the sheet is operated
    upon or moving or positioning the individual sheet after  having been
    operated upon.

    (1)     Note.  Where the mechanism for operating on the sheet is
    particularly set forth and the function is not, therefore, merely that of
    positioning the sheet, it will be classified in the class provided for the
    particular operating mechanism.

    (2)     Note. In Class 271, a  separation of an individual sheet from a
    stack of sheets  is considered proper even if no specific feeding of the
    sheet toward an operation is disclosed.  In Class 271, a sheet feeding or
    delivering means combines or places the sheets (1) adjacent to or on top of
    each other in a random order or (2) to perform  the operation on
    individually fed sheets.

            In Class 270, a sheet material associating apparatus  has a
    mechanism to place the sheets from plural  sources into an operational
    specified association onto or against a surface which then groups the
    sheets in said specified association or places the sheets in said specified
    association. The delivery of the sheet to a stack from plural sources
    requires a specific order of associating the sheets other than mere random
    stacking. Class 270 accepts putting the sheets in a logical array or
    placing the sheets in an associated stack in order to perform the operation
    on the sheets in the stack.

    (3)     Note.  An explanatory note on the scope and limitations of this
    class is justified by the development of the art.

    (4)     Note.  The line between the art for stacking or unstacking sheets
    found in this and the indented subclasses of Class 271 and that found in
    Class 414, Material or Article Handling, was at best nebulous prior to the
    reclassification of subclasses 788+ in Class 414.  During that project the
    classifier discussed establishing a line with three examiners expert in the
    material handling arts (i.e., Mr. Valenza representing Class 198, Mr.
    Stoner representing Class 271, and Mr. Paperner representing Class 414) and
    the following line was established:

    (a)     Class 271 provides for the stacking or unstacking of either (a)
    individual sheets of unfolded paper, (b) packets of similar sheets of paper
    attached together or individual folded sheets of paper (e.g., signatures)
    when the thickness of each packet or folded sheet of paper is substantially
    uniform and any variation thereof is not utilized during the stacking or
    unstacking operation and (c) thin, substantially flat, nonfood articles
    when at least one of the articles to be stacked or unstacked is temporarily
    bent or flexed during the handling thereof;

    (b)     Class 414 provides for the stacking or unstacking of either (a)
    sheet-like food articles (b) nonpaper, sheet-like articles (e.g., glass
    sheets) which are not temporarily bent or flexed during their handling, and
    (c) packets of similar sheets of paper when thickness of the packet or
    folded sheet varies (e.g., wedge shaped) and this variation is utilized
    during the stacking or unstacking operation; and

    (c)     Class 414 also provides for the stacking of paper sheets or
    sheet-like articles otherwise proper for Class 271 (i.e., la, lb, lc of
    this note) when the stack formed is subsequently handled as a unit and
    moved away from the location where it was formed by handling means other
    than an endless conveyor surface on which the stack was formed.  All
    original patents within Class 414, subclasses 788+ have been placed in
    compliance with this line.

    "FEEDING"

    Refers to the "means for moving individual sheet from a stack" and involves
    use of a "separator or a conveyor."



    "DELIVERING"

    Refers to the "means for removing the individual sheet from the operation
    after having been operated on or placing the individual sheet on a receiver
    after having been operated on."



    "SEPARATOR"

    Refers to "means for setting apart or individualizing a sheet relative to a
    stack of sheets, and moving the individual sheet from the stack,
    particularly for the purpose of presenting toward a position at which  the
    sheet will be operated on."



    "CONVEYOR"

    Refers to "means for moving and placing the individual sheet with respect
    to a device for operation on the sheet." Thus, in the subclasses indented
    under "Feeding", the "Conveyor" may be modified by means for orienting,
    retarding or interrupting the feed relative to the operation; and in the
    subclasses indented under "Delivering", the "Conveyor" should be limited to
    a  means for transporting the individual sheet from the operation or
    placing the individual sheet in a  receiver for a stack of such sheets.
    In either case the conveyor of Class 271 is distinct from a conveyor of
    other classes, wherein material or articles are transported from an input
    location to an output location.  Class 271 has also for many years included
    a device wherein a stack of sheets is moved as an article to a position at
    which sheets are removed from the stack by a separator, but has not
    included a device wherein a stack of sheets is formed by a delivery means,
    and subsequently the stack of sheets is moved as an article away from the
    formation position.  See the search notes below for the location of patents
    not proper for Class 271.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation.

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, particularly
    subclasses 110+, 143+, 306, 443+,  444, 466, 556, and 611+.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting.

    53,     Package Making, especially subclasses 389.1+ for a package making
    apparatus with means to convey cover material.

    72,     Metal Deforming.

    84,     Music.

    101,    Printing.

    112,    Sewing.

    140,    Wireworking, subclasses 92.3+, web for fabric feeding combined with
    the intercoiling of helices with each other or with successive loops or
    apertures.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, for sheet
    or web feeding combined with laminating.

    194,    Check-Actuated Control Mechanisms.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, for a conveyor of general utility, and
    subclasses 418.3 and 418.4 for a conveyor on which articles are piled for
    further conveyance.

    221,    Article Dispensing, for an article dispenser not otherwise provided
    for, and see especially subclasses 33+ for a means for dispensing a
    flexible sheet,  which sheet is distorted as it is separated from the
    source of supply.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length,  for a method of or
    apparatus for feeding material without utilizing both the leading and
    trailing ends thereof.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, for subject matter falling within
    the scope of this class (271) in combination with other apparatus, usually
    winding or unwinding.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 559+ for   photocell with circuit for
    evaluating web, strand, strip, or sheet.

    270,    Sheet-Material Associating, subclasses 52+,  especially subclasses
    58+ for mechanism wherein individual sheets are removed from plural source
    stacks and the sheets are assembled into plural finished stacks, each
    finished stack comprising at least one sheet from each of the source stacks.

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, subclass 3 for  a vacuum operated chuck
    mechanisms, and see the notes therein for other, similar subject matter.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, for electrical condition responsive
    indicating system, subclass  674 for transporting a discrete article and
    subclass 675+ for web, film or strip.

    346,    Recorders, subclasses 134+ for sheet  feeding and delivering in
    combination with a record receiver or driving means.

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 400+ for a facsimile apparatus including
    document handling.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing  Systems, subclasses
    478.01+ for an article  handling or distributing sensor.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices,  subclasses 167+ for the
    devices or                                 systems using X-ray or Gamma ray
    in  combination with a sheet feeding or
    delivering.

    396,    Photography, appropriate subclasses for combinations with a sheet
    feeding or delivering.

    399,    Electrophotography,  subclasses 16+ and 361+  for document handling
    (e.g., feeding or delivering sheet medium (i.e., originals or copies)
    within an electrophotographic device).

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 624+, for a machine of that class
    having a sheet or web feeding means for feeding sheet from a stack or pack
    holder.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 788+ for apparatus which
    places or removes articles from an intersupporting group, (e.g., from a
    stack).

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, for a combination of that class with sheet feeding
    means.


CLS 271/1
TXT Means under the class definition adapted for feeding or delivering
    sheet-like bodies or sheets of other than rectangular outline.


CLS 271/2
TXT Means under subclass 1 adapted to handle unsealed envelopes and the like.


CLS 271/3.01
TXT DELIVERING TO STACK AND FEEDING THEREFROM:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means for moving an
    individual sheet from a pack of sheets and placing the individual sheet
    toward an operation and  means for removing the individual sheet from the
    operation and placing the individual sheet in the same pack of sheets.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.14+,  for feeding and delivering the individual sheet to and from
    separate locations.


CLS 271/3.02
TXT Aligning at stack:

    Subject matter under subclass 3.01 including means for positioning the pack
    of sheets with respect to a part of a support for the pack or with respect
    to a part of the sheet moving means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     15 and 17, for a side-edge aligner combined with a conveyor.

    226+,   for aligning a sheet being fed along a conveyor  path.


CLS 271/3.03
TXT Intermediate tray:

    Subject matter under subclass 3.01 comprising a receiver and wherein the
    individual sheet is moved from the pack of sheets and collected temporarily
    in the receiver before placing the individual sheet toward the operation.


CLS 271/3.04
TXT With job divider (e.g., resettable bail bar or double bar separator):


    Subject matter under subclass 3.01 comprising a means for  separating apart
    a set of sheets from the sheets being delivered to the pack.

    (1)     Note.  A resettable bail bar or double bar separator or similar
    means are included as job divider for the subclass.

    (2)     Note.   "Job" is an initial number of sheets forming the pack.


CLS 271/3.05
TXT Feeding from bottom of stack:

    Subject matter under subclass 3.01 wherein the individual sheet is moved
    from the lowermost part of the pack of sheets and placed toward the
    operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.12,   for sheets in a pack deriving substantial support from their edges.

    23,     35 and 131+, for other types of separators feeding  from the bottom
    of the stack.


CLS 271/3.06
TXT Control for feeding responsive to delivering:

    Subject matter under subclass 3.05 including means for sensing an
    occurrence of a condition or a change in condition of the device which
    removes the individual sheet from the operation and in response thereto
    acts to start, stop or change the mode of moving the individual sheet from
    the pack of sheets and placing toward the operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.09,   for a control for feeding the individual sheet from the top of the
    stack.


CLS 271/3.07
TXT Pneumatic separating:

    Subject matter under subclass 3.05 wherein the sheet is individualized and
    moved from the pack of sheets by  suction or air blast.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.11,   for a pneumatic separator feeding the individual  sheet from the
    top of the stack.

    90+,    for a sheet removing means engaging the individual sheet by a
    pneumatic medium.


CLS 271/3.08
TXT Feeding from top of stack:

    Subject matter under subclass 3.01 wherein the individual sheet is moved
    from the uppermost part of the pack of sheets and placed toward the
    operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.12,   for sheets in a pack deriving substantial  support from their edges.


CLS 271/3.09
TXT Control for feeding responsive to delivering:

    Subject matter under subclass 3.08 including means for detecting an
    occurrence of a condition or a change in  condition of the device which
    removes the individual sheet from the operation and in response acts to
    start, stop or change the mode of moving the individual sheet from the pack
    of sheets and placing it toward the operation.


CLS 271/3.11
TXT Pneumatic separating:

    Subject matter under subclass 3.08 wherein the sheet is individualized and
    moved from the pack of sheets by  suction or air blast.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.07,   for a pneumatic separator feeding the individual  sheet from the
    bottom of the stack.

    90+,    for a sheet removing means engaging the individual sheet by a
    pneumatic means.


CLS 271/3.12
TXT Sheets on edges:

    Subject matter under subclass 3.01 wherein the pack of sheets is held so
    that the sheets derive a substantial amount of support from their outer
    borders.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149+,   for a pack advancer holding sheets on edge.


CLS 271/3.13
TXT With sheet sensor for selective location:

    Subject matter under subclass 3.01 including means for detecting the
    presence or absence of the sheet at a designated position along a path of
    sheet movement.

    (1)     Note. "Path" includes the pack.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9.06,   111, 227+, and 258.01+, for other sheet detecting means.


CLS 271/3.14
TXT FEEDING AND DELIVERING:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means for moving an
    individual sheet from a position or from a pack of sheets and placing it
    toward an operation; and including means for removing the individual sheet
    from the operation after having been operated on or placing the individual
    sheet on a receiver after having been operated  on.

    (1)     Note. This subclass may include in the combination a  mere means
    for operating upon the sheet, provided the invention is limited to the
    handling of the sheet and is not a specific system special to the
    operations performed on the sheet.

    (2)     Note. The term  "placing " may include the act of  partially
    turning the sheet about an axis that  passes through the surface of the
    sheet so that  an edge thereof is accurately aligned if that edge was
    previously misaligned. Such turning is sometimes termed  "orienting " in
    other classes if applied to articles conveyed in the device of  that other
    class. In Class 271 it is clear from the total disclosure that the
    alignment is applied to the sheet and that the sheet will be operated upon
    by some further mechanism (which  mechanism, if claimed, is recited only by
    its name ). If partial turning occurs, it is  incidental to alignment, but
    the purpose is to synchronize the feeding of the sheet to the operation to
    be performed on that sheet by  locating the sheet precisely prior to
    feeding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.01+,  for delivering the sheet to the same stack from where the sheet is
    moved toward the operation.

    145+,   for supporting or holding a stack of sheets in a  position for
    removal of the individual sheets.

    207+,   for means to hold the delivered sheets in a  stacked array.


CLS 271/3.15
TXT Sensor located at the feeder and controls the delivering:

    Subject matter under subclass 3.14 wherein a detecting means is positioned
    at the sheet moving and placing means for regulating the means for removing
    the sheet from the operation after having been operated on or placing the
    sheet on a receiver after having been operated on.

    (1)     Note. For this subclass the feeding element and the delivering
    element are placed on separate paths.


CLS 271/3.16
TXT Having timer:

    Subject matter under subclass 3.15 comprising a time recording device
    wherein the time recording device is responsive to the sensor for
    controlling the delivering of the sheets.


CLS 271/3.17
TXT Sensor located at the delivering and controls the feeding:

    Subject matter under subclass 3.14 wherein a detecting means is positioned
    at the sheet removing and placing means for regulating the means for moving
    the individual sheet from the pack of sheets or placing the sheet toward
    the operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.06    and 3.09, for a sheet feeding control responsive to a sheet
    delivering.


CLS 271/3.18
TXT Conveyor releases to subsequent conveyor:

    Subject matter under subclass 3.14 wherein the individual sheet is removed
    by a sheet carrying means which discharges the individual sheet to another
    sheet carrying means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264+,   for a means to convey the sheet from the pack to the operation.


CLS 271/3.19
TXT With alternate conveying path:

    Subject matter under subclass 3.18 wherein the subsequent conveyor carries
    the individual sheet at least to two distinct routes.


CLS 271/3.2
TXT Including conveyor couple:

    Subject matter under subclass 3.18 wherein one of the sheet carrying means
    consisting of two elements each of which elements has an endless
    orbitally-moving surface rotating in opposite directions, the surface of
    one element being opposite to and spaced from the surface of the other
    element during at least a portion of their movement and the surfaces moving
    in the same direction and engaging opposite surfaces of the sheet lying
    therebetween during the portion of their movement.

    (1)     Note. The element may be an endless belt cooperating  with another
    endless belt, a rotating roller cooperating with another rotating roller or
    the endless belt cooperating with one or more                  rotating
    rollers; the criterion for placement  herein being only that the conveyed
    sheet lies between the elements which thereby cooperates to move the sheet.


CLS 271/3.21
TXT On peripheral face of drum or belt:

    Subject matter under subclass 3.18 wherein one of the sheet conveyors
    includes a circumferential surface of a rotating or endlessly orbiting
    member.

    (1)     Note. The conveyed sheet being entirely in contact  with the
    circumferential surface of the member.


CLS 271/3.22
TXT Pneumatic:

    Subject matter under subclass 3.21 wherein the circumferential surface of
    the sheet conveyor engages the sheet by suction or air blast.

    (1)     Note. Although in most devices the gaseous fluid is air, either
    under suction or under pressure, or both, the use of a special fluid other
    than air (e.g., steam) is not barred.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      11+ and 20, for a device using a pneumatic feeding  means.

    94+,    for a separator having a unidirectionally-moving  suction member or
    surface.

    112     and 132, for a device wherein a suction  assists a feeding means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 211 for an article dispenser using a
    suction  separator.


CLS 271/3.23
TXT Including pneumatic conveyor:

    Subject matter under subclass 3.18 comprising at least one sheet carrying
    means for engaging the individual sheet by suction or air blast.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    406,    Conveyors: Fluid Current, appropriate subclasses for conveying a
    solid material or an article by means of a fluid current.  See the search
    notes under the class  definition for other classes having  specialized
    fluid current conveying.


CLS 271/3.24
TXT Including gripper couple:

    Subject matter under subclass 3.18 including at least two elements having
    surfaces located adjacent to and opposite  to one another, the element
    surfaces engaging opposed surfaces of the sheet located between the element
    surfaces with sufficient frictional force to move the sheet.


CLS 271/4.01
TXT Separator and conveyor:

    Subject matter under subclass 3.14 including means for individualizing a
    sheet relative to a pack of sheets and moving the individual sheet from its
    position in the pack, and a means for carrying the individual sheet away
    from the pack toward the operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10.01+, for a separator and a conveyor in which the  feeding of the sheet
    being claimed.


CLS 271/4.02
TXT Sensor located at the separator and controls the conveyor:

    Subject matter under subclass 4.01 comprising a detecting  means positioned
    at the sheet individualizing and moving means for regulating the sheet
    carrying means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10.02,  for a sensor at a separator controlling a conveyor  having only the
    feeding of the sheet being claimed.


CLS 271/4.03
TXT Sensor located at the conveyor and controls the separator:

    Subject matter under subclass 4.01 comprising a detecting  means at the
    sheet carrying means for regulating the sheet individualizing and moving
    means.

    (1)     Note. The sheets must be disengaged from the  pack to be considered
    for sensing at a conveyor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10.03,  for a sensor at a separator controls a  conveyor having only the
    feeding of the sheet  being claimed.


CLS 271/4.04
TXT Mechanically linked for simultaneous operation:

    Subject matter under subclass 4.01 wherein (1) a gear and clutch, or (2) a
    shaft, roller and cam mechanism or the equivalent; drives the separator and
    conveyor at the same time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10.04,  for a mechanical sensor at a separator controls a conveyor having
    the feeding of the sheet being claimed.


CLS 271/4.05
TXT Endless belt separator:

    Subject matter under subclass 4.01 wherein the separator is a continuous
    band of flexible material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10.06+, for a sensor at a separator controls a conveyor in which only the
    sheet feeding being claimed.


CLS 271/4.06
TXT To endless belt conveyor:

    Subject matter under subclass 4.05 wherein the conveyor is a continuous
    band of flexible material and the sheet is moved by the separator to the
    conveyor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10.07,  for a sensor at a separator controlling a  conveyor in which only
    the feeding of the sheet being claimed.


CLS 271/4.07
TXT To rotary conveyor:

    Subject matter under subclass 4.05 wherein a conveyor  turns about an axis
    in an arc of a circle and the individualized sheet from the endless
    separator is carried to the conveyor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10.08,  for a sensor at a separator controls a conveyor having only the
    feeding of the sheet being claimed.

    21+,    for a sheet-buckling rotary separator.

    94+,    for a suction separator having a rotational movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 42+, for a  rotary ejecting means
    for the concurrent separation and distortion of flexible  articles,
    subclass 259 for a surface  contact type discharge assistant to  remove
    articles from a source of supply,  and subclass 277 for an article
    dispenser  having rotary discharge assistants.


CLS 271/4.08
TXT Rotary separator:

    Subject matter under subclass 4.01 wherein the separator turns about an
    axis in an arc of a circle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.07,   for a rotary conveyor.

    10.09+, for a sensor at a separator controls a  conveyor wherein only the
    feeding being claimed.


CLS 271/4.09
TXT To endless belt conveyor:

    Subject matter under subclass 4.08 wherein the conveyor is a continuous
    band of flexible material and the sheet is moved by the separator to the
    conveyor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10.1,   for a rotary separator with endless belt  conveyor.


CLS 271/4.1
TXT To rotary conveyor:

    Subject matter under subclass 4.08 wherein the conveyor  turns about an
    axis in an arc of a circle and the individualized sheet from the rotary
    separator is carried to the conveyor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.07,   for moving the sheet by an endless separator  and carrying it by a
    rotary conveyor.

    10.11+, for a sensor at a separator controlling a  conveyor wherein only
    the feeding being claimed.


CLS 271/4.11
TXT Reciprocating separator:

    Subject matter under subclass 4.01 wherein the separator undergoes a to and
    fro movement during its operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10.14+, for a reciprocating separator where feeding being  claimed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 36+ for a  dispenser for a flexible
    article including  ejecting means which concurrently separates and
    distorts the article, many of such ejecting means  having a reciprocating
    motion, and see also  subclasses 232 and 268+ for an article dispenser   of
    general type including a reciprocating discharge assistant means.


CLS 271/4.12
TXT To rotary conveyor:

    Subject matter under subclass 4.11 wherein the conveyor turns about an axis
    in an arc of a circle and the individualized sheet from the endless
    separator is carried to the conveyor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10.16,  for a reciprocating separator having a rotary  conveyor.


CLS 271/5
TXT The separator under subclasses 4.01+ having means for engaging the sheet by
    suction or air blast.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 90, and indented subclasses.


CLS 271/6
TXT The same endless band or bands under subclasses 4.01+ carrying the sheet to
    and taking it from operative position.


CLS 271/7
TXT The same endless band or bands under subclass 3.14 carrying the sheet to
    and carrying it from operative position.


CLS 271/8.1
TXT FEEDING:

    Subject matter under the class definition for moving an individual sheet
    from a pack of sheets, or moving the individual sheet toward an operation,
    or positioning the individual sheet with respect to a location where the
    individual sheet is operated upon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for article dispensers
    not otherwise provided for, and see especially subclasses 33+ for
    dispensers for flexible sheets in which the sheets are distorted as they
    are separated from the source of supply.


CLS 271/9.01
TXT Multiple supplies:

    Subject matter under subclass 8.1 including two or more feeding sources.


CLS 271/9.02
TXT Sheet feeding from one supply controls feeding  from another supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.01 wherein a means for (a) moving an
    individual sheet from a position or from a pack of sheets and (b) placing
    the individual sheet toward an operation from one source regulates the
    moving and placing of the individual sheets of the other source.


CLS 271/9.03
TXT Responsive to empty supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.02 wherein the feeding means includes a
    device for sensing depletion or near depletion of one feeding source and in
    response thereto controls the feeding from the other source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 6 for an article dispenser using an
    empty source indicating means,  and subclasses 103+ for an article
    dispenser in  which each of the supply source is depleted in  turn.


CLS 271/9.04
TXT Alternate feeding:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.02 wherein at least two distinct means are
    operating one after the other each on its own source of supply for moving
    the individual sheet from the position or from the pack of sheets and
    placing it toward the operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensers, subclasses 112+ for an article dispenser having
    an arrangement which assures that the articles are dispensed from several
    sources in  a mixed order.


CLS 271/9.05
TXT Supply selection (e.g., sheet color):

    Subject matter under subclass 9.01 wherein the supply includes sheets
    having a plurality of unique characteristics and at least one of the
    feeding means  controls the feeding of the sheet having one specific
    characteristic such as a particular color.


CLS 271/9.06
TXT Size selection:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.05 wherein one of the characteristics is a
    particular dimension of the sheet.


CLS 271/9.07
TXT Single separator acts on multiple supplies:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.01 wherein only one device is provided for
    individualizing and moving sheets from the multiple supplies.


CLS 271/9.08
TXT Movably mounted supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.07 wherein a support for at least one of
    the sources moves relative to the separator.


CLS 271/9.09
TXT Including manual supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.01 wherein at least one of the feeding
    sources comprises a human operated sheet feeding mechanism.


CLS 271/9.1
TXT Including continuous web supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.01 wherein at least one of the feeding
    sources provides a sheet having an indefinable length.


CLS 271/9.11
TXT Superposed supplies:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.01 wherein the two or more sources, each
    complete with its own feeding means, are placed one above the other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 130 for a superposed  article
    dispenser.


CLS 271/9.12
TXT Juxtaposed supplies:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.01 wherein the two or more sources each
    complete with its own feeding means are arranged side by side in linear
    relationship.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 131 for an article dispenser in a
    juxtaposed alignment.


CLS 271/9.13
TXT With convergence to single path:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.01 wherein an individual flow of sheets
    from the two or more feeding sources merge together into a common flow
    route.


CLS 271/10.01
TXT Separator and conveyor:

    Subject matter under subclass 8.1 including means for  individualizing a
    sheet relative to a pack of sheets and moving the individual sheet from its
    position in the pack and a means for carrying the individual sheet away
    from the pack toward the operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.01+,  for a separator and a conveyor in combination  with sheet
    delivering.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 224+ for an article dispenser not
    otherwise provided for, having means to segregate article from the stack or
    other source of supply combined with means to subsequently manipulate such
    separated article.


CLS 271/10.02
TXT Sensor located at the separator and controls the conveyor:

    Subject matter under subclass 10.01 comprising a detecting means at the
    sheet individualizing and moving means for regulating the sheet carrying
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.02,   for a sensor at a separator controlling a conveyor having the
    delivery of the sheet being claimed.


CLS 271/10.03
TXT Sensor located at the conveyor and controls the separator:

    Subject matter under subclass 10.01 comprising a detecting means at the
    sheet carrying means for regulating the sheet individualizing and moving
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.03,   for a sensor at a separator controlling a conveyor having the
    delivery of the sheets being claimed.


CLS 271/10.04
TXT Mechanically linked for simultaneous operation:

    Subject matter under subclass 10.01 wherein (1) a gear and clutch, or (2) a
    shaft, roller and cam mechanism or the equivalent; drives the separator and
    conveyor at the same time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.04,   for a mechanical sensor at a separator controlling a conveyor
    having the delivery of the sheet being claimed.


CLS 271/10.05
TXT Selective drive (e.g., number of degree of rotation):

    Subject matter under subclass 10.01 includes a device for  permitting a
    certain amount of movement of the separator or the conveyor such as a
    number of degree of rotation of the separator.


CLS 271/10.06
TXT Endless belt separator:

    Subject matter under subclass 10.01 wherein the separator is a continuous
    band of flexible material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.05+,  for a sensor at a separator controlling a   conveyor having the
    delivery of the sheet being claimed.


CLS 271/10.07
TXT To endless belt conveyor:

    Subject matter under subclass 10.06 wherein the conveyor is a continuous
    band of flexible material and the individualized sheet is moved by the
    separator to the conveyor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.06,   for a sensor at a separator controlling a   conveyor in which the
    delivery of the sheet being claimed.


CLS 271/10.08
TXT To rotary conveyor:

    Subject matter under subclass 10.06 wherein the conveyor turns about an
    axis in an arc of a circle and the individualized sheet from the endless
    separator is carried to the conveyor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.07,   for a sensor at a separator controlling a conveyor in which the
    delivery of the sheet being claimed.


CLS 271/10.09
TXT Rotary separator:

    Subject matter under subclass 10.01 wherein the sheet individualizing and
    moving means includes a surface or an element that turns about an axis in
    an arc of a circle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.08+,  for a sensor at a separator controlling a conveyor having the
    delivery of the sheet being claimed and subclasses 109+, for a rotary
    separator not claimed in combination with the conveyor.


CLS 271/10.1
TXT To endless belt conveyor:

    Subject matter under subclass 10.09 wherein the individualized sheet is
    carried from the rotary separator by a continuous band of flexible material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.09,   for a sensor at a separator controls a  conveyor in which the
    delivery of the sheet  being claimed.


CLS 271/10.11
TXT To rotary conveyor:

    Subject matter under subclass 10.09 wherein the conveyor turns about an
    axis in an arc of a circle and the individualized sheet from the endless
    separator is carried to the conveyor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.1,    for a sensor at a separator controls a  conveyor in which the
    delivery of the sheet  being claimed.


CLS 271/10.12
TXT With aligning:

    Subject matter under subclass 10.11 including means for   positioning or
    locating the sheet with respect to the location of the rotary conveyor.


CLS 271/10.13
TXT With clutch:

    Subject matter under subclass 10.11 wherein the rotary separator and
    conveyor arrangement combined with a mechanism which selectively engages
    and disengages an arrangement of the driving parts of the separator and the
    conveyor.


CLS 271/10.14
TXT Reciprocating separator:

    Subject matter under subclass 10.01 wherein the separator undergoes a to
    and fro movement during its operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.11+,  for a sensor at separator controls a conveyor in which the delivery
    of the sheet being claimed.


CLS 271/10.15
TXT To endless belt conveyor:

    Subject matter under subclass 10.14 wherein the individualized sheet is
    carried from the reciprocating separator by a continuous band of flexible
    material.


CLS 271/10.16
TXT To rotary conveyor:

    Subject matter under subclass 10.14 wherein the conveyor   turns about an
    axis in an arc of a circle and the individualized sheet from the
    reciprocating separator is carried to the conveyor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.12,   for a sensor at a separator controls a conveyor in which the
    delivery of the sheet being claimed.


CLS 271/11
TXT The separator having means for engaging the sheet by suction or air-blast.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 90, and indented subclasses.


CLS 271/12
TXT The sheet being carried from the separator by one or more endless bands.


CLS 271/13
TXT With means for positioning the lateral edge of the sheet parallel to the
    line of travel.


CLS 271/14
TXT The sheet being carried away from the separator by a member moving
    to-and-fro in a straight path.


CLS 271/15
TXT With means for positioning the lateral edge of the sheet parallel to the
    line of travel.


CLS 271/16
TXT With means for forcing an intermediate portion of the sheet away from the
    pack, while the ends remain in contact therewith, and one or more endless
    bands for then carrying the sheet therefrom.


CLS 271/17
TXT With means for positioning the lateral edge of the sheet parallel to the
    line of travel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclass 143 for spreading out and
    piling on one another laundry sheets preparatory to ironing the same or to
    smooth the same.


CLS 271/18
TXT Means for removing an individual sheet from its position in a pack.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 208+ for article dispensers not
    otherwise provided for having means to assist the discharge of articles
    from a source of supply which may be a stack or pack of aligned articles.


CLS 271/18.1
TXT Device under subclass 18 wherein the removal of the sheet is effected or
    facilitated by an element or mechanism that generates lines of magnetic
    flux or static electricity.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is for a device wherein a stack of ferrous
    sheets moves through a magnetic field, which causes partial separation of
    the sheets to facilitate individual feeding of the sheets from the stack.
    Movement of the magnet is for adjustment purposes only. An electrostatic
    zone can act in a similar way to cause partial separation of paper sheets.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193,    for a magnetic or electrostatic sheet delivery conveyor.


CLS 271/18.2
TXT Device under subclass 18.1 wherein the element or mechanism is periodically
    moved relative to the pack to effect the removal of individual sheets from
    the pack.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is for a device wherein one magnet causes
    removal of the sheet from the pack and another magnet causes partial
    separation of the sheets while still in the pack.


CLS 271/18.3
TXT Device under subclass 18 wherein the sheet-removal means includes one or
    more sharp pointed members, the point of which penetrates the face of the
    sheet that is to be removed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141,    for a reciprocating separator using pin means.


CLS 271/19
TXT Adapted to force an intermediate portion of the sheet away from the pack
    while the ends remain in contact therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16      and indented subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 33+ for article dispensers not
    otherwise provided for in which flexible articles are distorted as they are
    separated from the source of supply.


CLS 271/20
TXT Wherein the sheet is engaged by suction or air-blast.


CLS 271/21
TXT Wherein the sheet is engaged by a member moving in the arc of a circle.


CLS 271/22
TXT Having means for keeping top or side feed packs forced into position for
    separating.


CLS 271/23
TXT The pack being so held as to permit it to fall into position for separating
    a sheet.


CLS 271/24
TXT Having means for keeping top or side feed packs forced into position for
    separating.


CLS 271/25
TXT Having means contacting with a portion of the pack to control the action of
    the advancer.


CLS 271/30.1
TXT Pack advancer:

    Device under subclass 90 provided with means to urge a stack of sheets in a
    direction such that the foremost sheet of the stack is in a position
    appropriate for removel of a single sheet.

    (1)     Note.  The device of this and indented subclasses is usually for
    feed from the top of a stack, or for feed from a stack of on edge or
    imbricated sheets.  A device of this and indented subclasses is usually for
    feed from the bottom of the stack and would not be found herein (since a
    bottom-feet mechanism does not have a stack urging means) unless the patent
    thereto also claimed a weight for urging the stack toward the bottom of the
    hopper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     24+, 37+, 126+, and 128+, for a device including a pack advancer in
    combination with a separator of a type appropriate to the subclass under
    which the pack advancer is indented.

    147+,   for a pack advancer of general utility.


CLS 271/31
TXT Having means contacting with a portion of the pack to control the action of
    the advancer.


CLS 271/31.1
TXT Stack on Edge:

    Devices under subclass 30.1 wherein a stack holder is provided and arranged
    to support the stack so that the individual sheets derive a substantial
    amount of their support from their edges.

    (1)     Note. Many of the devices herein includes a spring or weight to
    move a backstop that advances the stack.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129,    for a pack advancer which supports sheets on edge in combination
    with a reciprocating feeder.

    149+,   for a pack advancer of general utility which supports sheets on
    edge.


CLS 271/33
TXT The sheet-engaging means supplied with a substance to which the sheet will
    adhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 210+ for article dispensers not
    otherwise provided for including article adhering discharge assistant means.


CLS 271/34
TXT The sheet engaged by one or more endless bands.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 42+ for rotary ejectors including
    friction roller means for the concurrent separation and distortion of
    flexible articles, subclass 253 for endless belt carried discharge
    assistants for general utility article dispensers, and particularly
    subclass 259 for article dispensers in which the article is engaged by
    discharge assistant means which contacts the surface of the article only,
    many of these devices being an endless belt type of friction device.


CLS 271/35
TXT The pack being so held as to permit it to fall into position for separating.


CLS 271/37
TXT Each sheet being slightly projected from the pack prior to its engagement
    by the rotary separator.


CLS 271/38
TXT Having means contacting with a portion of the pack to control the operation.


CLS 271/42
TXT The sheet being engaged by a member moving to and fro in a straight path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 36+ for dispensers for flexible
    articles including ejecting means which concurrently separate and distort
    the articles, many of such ejecting means having a reciprocating motion,
    and see also subclasses 232 and 268+ for article dispensers of general
    types including reciprocating discharge assistant means.


CLS 271/65
TXT Apparatus under subclass 278 wherein means are adapted to deliver the sheet
    either side up.


CLS 271/66
TXT Apparatus under subclass 65 wherein the sheet is carried by endless bands
    to fingers which bear against one side of the sheet and rotate to turn it
    over.


CLS 271/67
TXT Apparatus under subclass 278 wherein the sheet is carried by endless bands
    and deposited on bands adapted to be rolled up and permit the sheet to fall.


CLS 271/69
TXT Apparatus under subclass 278 wherein the sheet is carried by endless bands
    to another type of carried which continues the delivery.


CLS 271/70
TXT Apparatus under subclass 69 wherein the final conveyor is composed of
    fingers which bear against one side of the sheet and rotate to turn it over.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65.


CLS 271/72
TXT Apparatus under subclass 278 wherein means are provided which move in the
    arc of a circle to deliver the sheets to fingers which bear against one
    side of the sheet and rotate to turn it over.


CLS 271/73
TXT Apparatus under subclass 278 wherein bands are provided which receive the
    sheet and are adapted to be rolled up and permit the sheet to fall.

    (1)     Note.  The bands may or may not serve as conveyors.


CLS 271/81
TXT Apparatus under subclass 314 wherein the conveyor has a bodily movement in
    addition to the rotary movement.


CLS 271/82
TXT Apparatus under subclass 314 wherein the rotary conveyor has means for
    carrying the sheet suspended from the edge.


CLS 271/83
TXT Apparatus under subclass 314 wherein means are adapted to bear against one
    side of the sheet and rotate to turn it over.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66,     70 and 72.


CLS 271/84
TXT Apparatus under subclass 278 wherein the delivering means moves to and fro
    in a rectilinear path.


CLS 271/85
TXT Apparatus under subclass 84 wherein the conveyors are provided with means
    for carrying the sheet suspended from one edge.


CLS 271/90
TXT Device under subclass 8.1 wherein the sheet-removing means engages an
    individual sheet by a gaseous fluid medium under subatmospheric or
    above-atmospheric pressure.

    (1)     Note.  Although in most devices the gaseous fluid is air, either
    under suction or under pressure, or both, the use of a special fluid other
    than air (e.g., steam) is not barred, if the fluid is for the purpose of
    preconditioning a stack of sheets (e.g., fluffing the sheets of the stack
    with the hot, moist steam) to facilitate subsequent separation of the
    sheets from the stack.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      11+ and 20, for a device using pneumatic feed means;

    112     and 132, for a device wherein suction assists a feed means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 211 for article dispensers not
    otherwise provided for in which suction carrier means is effective to
    engage and remove articles from a source of supply, and subclass 278 for
    fluid pressure discharge assistants for articles.


CLS 271/91
TXT Device under subclass 90 wherein the sheet-removing means comprises at
    least two vacuum elements, each of which is movable relative to the stack,
    and each of which is also movable relative to the other.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is for a device wherein plural cups bend the
    margins of corners of a sheet toward each other to facilitate separation of
    that sheet from the stack.


CLS 271/92
TXT Device under subclass 91 wherein at least two of the elements that are in
    engagement with a sheet move away from each other in a direction that is
    transverse to the direction of feeding of the sheet so engaged, thereby
    tending to tension an area of the sheet that is between the elements.


CLS 271/93
TXT Device under subclass 91 wherein at least one of the elements moves to and
    from the stack of sheets in a direction generally perpendicular to the
    plane of the foremost sheet to engage and move the foremost sheet away from
    the stack, and wherein another of the elements moves in a direction
    generally parallel to said plane, whereby said one element initiates the
    movement of a foremost sheet and transfers said foremost sheet to the other
    of the elements to continue the movement of the foremost sheet away from
    the stack.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11+,    for a device using a pneumatic separator and a conveyor forwarding
    the foremost sheet.


CLS 271/94
TXT Device under subclass 90 wherein the sheet-removing means comprises an
    element that turns continually in the same direction, through the surface
    of which element vacuum is applied to engage and remove a sheet from a
    stack.

    (1)     Note.  The shape of the suction member of this subclass may vary.
    Included herein is a drum or a belt having apertures therein or a wheel or
    chain having orbiting cups mounted thereon. What is common to all the
    devices is the presence of suction through the suction member and the
    movement in one direction of the suction member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196,    for a delivery conveyor having similar structure.


CLS 271/95
TXT Device under subclass 94 wherein motion is imparted to said element, which
    motion is supplemental to the turning of the element.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is a device wherein a continuously
    turning suction member has additional movement to and from the stack, and a
    device wherein a one or more suction cups rotate or oscillate on their own
    axis and simultaneously revolve within a carrier about a second axis.  The
    latter arrangement permits the suction cup to be retarded in its motion so
    that it is momentarily stationary with respect to the sheet which it will
    engage, even though the carrier in which it is mounted continues to rotate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for a friction separator having similar compound rotary movement.


CLS 271/96
TXT Device under subclass 94 provided with means to vary the zone or area on
    the foremost sheet where vacuum is applied, or to vary the degree of vacuum
    applied, or vary the effect of the vacuum applied.

    (1)     Note.  The adjustments noted in the definition above may be
    performed, for example, by adjusting the position of a nozzle that applies
    suction through the periphery of an apertured drum or belt, or by use of a
    valve that regulates the amount of suction applied, or by adjusting the
    speed of rotation of the drum or belt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for a pneumatic separator including a valve means.


CLS 271/97
TXT Device under subclass 90 wherein the sheet-removing means includes a source
    of air or other gaseous medium subjected to above-atmospheric pressure.

    (1)     Note.  A distinction should be made between a device using
    pressurized gas for the purpose of causing or aiding removal of a sheet
    from a stack (found in this and indented subclasses), a device using
    pressurized gas for the purpose of restraining feeding of sheets other than
    the foremost sheet (found in subclass 104), and a device using pressurized
    gas for the purpose of fluffing or riffling the sheets of a stack while the
    sheets remain in the stack (found in subclass 105).

    (2)     Note.  Some patents in this subclass disclose the use of
    Bernoulli's Principle for the movement of sheets. That principle includes
    the use of air under relatively high pressure and velocity to generate an
    area of low pressure adjacent a surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104     and 105, and see (1) note above.

    195,    for a sheet conveyor using pressurized gas.


CLS 271/98
TXT Device under subclass 97 wherein the sheet-removing means also includes a
    vacuum element operating in conjunction with the pressurized air.


CLS 271/99
TXT Device under subclass 90 wherein a stack of sheets is held so as to permit
    the sheets thereof to fall into position at which the sheet-removing means
    engages the lowermost sheet of the stack, and wherein the sheet-removing
    means comprises a vacuum element.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this and indented subclasses is a device wherein
    the stack of sheets is supported partly on the edges of the sheets and
    partly by means extending in the plane of the lowermost sheet and below
    said lowermost sheet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165+,   for a pack holder for use with a bottom-feed device, and see the
    search notes of subclass 165 for reference to other subclasses involving
    bottom-feed.


CLS 271/100
TXT Device under subclass 99 wherein the vacuum element moves to and from the
    stack, and during its movement away from the stack engages a portion of the
    lowermost sheet adjacent one of the edges or corners thereof to move that
    portion away from the undisturbed residue of the stack.

    (1)     Note.  Although most devices of this and the indented subclasses
    include a suction member that oscillates by pivoting in the arc of a
    circle, a few such devices include a suction member that oscillates by
    reciprocating in a straight line to perform the same type of bending of the
    sheet margin.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    for a device wherein a suction member bends a portion of the
    foremost (usually the topmost) sheet of a stack prior to removal.


CLS 271/101
TXT Device under subclass 100 provided with at least one component that is
    moved from a position outside the stack to a position between the bent
    portion of the lowermost sheet of the stack and the undisturbed portion of
    the next-to-lowermost sheet of the stack, thereby to hold the undisturbed
    residue of the stack against feeding movement during separation of the
    lowermost sheet from the stack.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are some devices wherein the stack
    is moved in a direction parallel to the plane of the sheets thereof as the
    lowermost sheet is separated therefrom.  The relative movement between
    support segment and remainder of stack has been considered sufficient  for
    placement herein.


CLS 271/102
TXT Device under subclass 99 wherein the vacuum element moves to and from the
    stack in a direction generally normal to the plane of the lowermost sheet
    of the stack.

    (1)     Note.  Although in most devices of this subclass the motion is
    straight line reciprocation, and in a few such devices the motion is a
    pivotal oscillation, with either motion, the suction member pulls the
    foremost sheet away from the stack in a direction perpendicular to the
    plane of the sheet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132,    for a device wherein a member reciprocating in a direction
    generally parallel to the plane of the sheet, and a suction means that does
    not move but is located adjacent the lowermost sheet is activated to ensure
    that the reciprocating member will engage the lowermost sheet.


CLS 271/103
TXT Device under subclass 90 wherein the sheet-removing means includes a vacuum
    cup mounted on an array of telescopically projectable and retractible
    elements, through which array a source of vacuum is applied, and wherein
    the projection of the vacuum cup toward the foremost sheet of a stack
    causes a sheet-engaging orifice of the vacuum cup to be sealed by the
    foremost sheet, whereupon the increase in vacuum (i.e., decrease in
    pressure) within the array following the sealing causes the array and the
    cup mounted thereon to be retracted from the stack with the foremost sheet
    attracted to the cup.


CLS 271/104
TXT Device under subclass 90 provided with means to retard the removal of the
    sheet adjacent to and succeeding the foremost sheet of the stack.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121,    137 and 167, for a similar sheet-retarding device associated with a
    different sheet-separating means or a pack holder.


CLS 271/105
TXT Device under subclass 90 including a means using a gaseous fluid medium
    under subatmospheric or above-atmospheric pressure, which means acts on any
    of the sheets of a stack to separate at least a portion of a sheet from a
    corresponding portion of an adjacent sheet, but without removing any of the
    sheets from the stack.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for a device which is a
    subcombination of a sheet-feeding machine, the device performing an
    operation that prepares the stack for feeding or removal of sheets
    therefrom.  Examples of such device include, a nozzle issuing a blast of
    steam or heated air or ionized air, a suction device for removing dust from
    the sheets of a stack, and means to bend, flex or riffle the margins of the
    sheets prior to removal.


CLS 271/106
TXT Device under subclass 105 wherein the means is a vacuum element that bends
    all or a part of the foremost sheet prior to removal of said sheet from a
    stack.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    for a device wherein an oscillating suction member operates on the
    bottom of a stack to flex the lowermost sheet prior to removal.


CLS 271/107
TXT Device under subclass 90 wherein the sheet-removing means is a vacuum
    element that moves to and from the stack in the arc of a circle.


CLS 271/108
TXT Device under subclass 90 wherein the flow of gaseous medium to or from the
    sheet-removal means is regulated by mechanism to vary or stop such flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     for a device wherein a rotating suction element includes means for
    varying the suction therein.


CLS 271/109
TXT Device under subclass 8.1 wherein the sheet-removing means engages an
    individual sheet by a surface or element that turns about an axis in an arc
    of a circle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21+,    for a sheet-buckling rotary separator 94+, for a suction separator
    having rotational movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 42+ for rotary ejecting means for
    the concurrent separation and distortion of flexible articles, subclass 259
    for surface contact type discharge assistants to remove articles from a
    source of supply, and subclass 277 for article dispensers having rotary
    discharge assistants.


CLS 271/110
TXT Device under subclass 109 provided with means to detect the absence or
    presence of a sheet from the pack or stack of sheets, and further provided
    with means to activate or deactivate the sheet-removing means as a result
    of such detection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     31, 38, and 152+, for a device wherein a feeler or senser is
    associated with a pack advancer, and 258+ for a device wherein a feeler or
    senser is associated with a feed interrupter.


CLS 271/111
TXT Device under subclass 110 provided with two or more sheet-removing means or
    provided with two or more detectors.


CLS 271/112
TXT Device under subclass 109 provided with means in addition to the turning
    surface or element, which means includes a source of vacuum or
    subatmospheric pressure that facilitates the operation of the
    sheet-removing means.

    (1)     Note.  The suction means must be a stationary suction member that
    does not by itself remove a sheet from the stack.  Rather, it is separate
    from the rotating separator and pulls the sheet into a position that will
    ensure the engagement of the sheet by the separator.  For a suction member
    that reciprocates to separate a sheet from a pack, see subclass 102, and
    for a suction member that assists a reciprocating bottom-feed member, see
    subclass 132.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102     and 132, and see (1) Note, above.


CLS 271/113
TXT Device under subclass 109 wherein the axis of turning is perpendicular to
    the surface of the sheet that is nearest the sheet-removing means, whereby
    the means turns in a zone that is parallel to said surface.

    (1)     Note.  In exemplary operation, the separator "peels" the foremost
    sheet from the stack by interposing a rotating finger between the surfaces
    of the foremost sheet and the next sheet.


CLS 271/114
TXT Device under subclass 109 wherein the sheet-removing means is impelled to
    be turned by mechanism that imparts changeable turning speeds to the means,
    or imparts different turning speeds to different sheet-engaging portions of
    the means, or imparts a discontinuous turning motion to the means.


CLS 271/115
TXT Device under subclass 114 wherein the sheet-removing means turns partially
    to-and-fro about an axis, whereby the means feeds a sheet during one
    direction of its turning and retracts to its initial position during its
    reverse direction of turning.


CLS 271/116
TXT Device under subclass 114 provided with a clutch mechanism that imparts a
    turning motion to the sheet-removing means during only a portion of the
    time required for removal of a sheet, and thereafter permits the
    sheet-removing means to be turned by continued movement of the sheet past
    said means until the sheet is fully removed.


CLS 271/117
TXT Device under subclass 109 wherein the sheet-removing means is mounted on
    structure that permits the position of said means to be varied with respect
    to the stack of sheets or permits said means to be moved away from the
    stack, or wherein the stack of sheets is mounted on structure that permits
    the stack to be moved away from the sheet-removing means.

    (1)     Note.  Subclasses 126+ provide for a device wherein the stack of
    sheets is urged toward the separator. This subclass (117) provides for a
    device wherein the stack of sheets may be moved away from the separator,
    usually for the purpose of replenishing the stack.  In this subclass will
    also be found a device wherein the separation of sheets from a stack is
    stopped at will by retracting the stack from the separator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126,    and see (1) Note above.

    136,    for a reciprocating feeder wherein operation may be stopped at will
    by moving the feeder and the stack apart.


CLS 271/118
TXT Device under subclass 117 wherein the sheets are sequentially removed from
    the stack by alternately bringing together and moving apart the
    sheet-removing means and the stack in continuous sequence of operations.

    (1)     Note. Either the sheet-removing means may be moved to and from the
    stack, or the stack may be moved to and from the sheet-removing means.


CLS 271/119
TXT Device under subclass 109 wherein the surface or element that turns about
    an axis is not circular or is not regular in its circumference.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a device wherein the rotating separator
    includes one or more pins or lugs projecting radially from the axis of
    rotation, or a device wherein the separator comprises a roughened surface
    or a helicoidal projection.


CLS 271/120
TXT Device under subclass 119 wherein the surface or element that turns about
    an axis is mounted so as to have an additional motion with respect to the
    axis of turning.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a device wherein a roller is mounted so
    as to rotate about its own axis as well as revolve about the axis of
    rotation of the separator, or a device wherein a separator has a surface
    portion that is adjustable radially or circumferentially relative to the
    axis of rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95,     for a suction separator wherein a suction element revolves about an
    external axis and has additional movement (e.g., rotation or oscillation)
    about its own axis.


CLS 271/121
TXT Device under subclass 109 provided with means to retard the removal of the
    sheet adjacent to and succeeding the foremost sheet of the stack.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    137 and 167, for a similar sheet-retarding device associated with a
    different sheet-separating means or a pack holder.


CLS 271/122
TXT Device under subclass 121 wherein a face of said retarding means adjacent
    to the foremost sheet has motion imparted thereto, which motion is in a
    direction opposite to the direction of movement of the foremost sheet
    during separation thereof.


CLS 271/123
TXT Device under subclass 121 wherein said sheet-retarding means engages a
    margin or edge of the foremost sheet or the sheets adjacent to the foremost
    sheet, which margin or edge is that which is opposite to the direction of
    movement of the foremost sheet during separation thereof.


CLS 271/124
TXT Device under subclass 121 wherein the sheet-retarding means is located
    adjacent the sheet-removing means to form an opening that permits the
    foremost sheet to be moved out of a stack holder, and the extent of the
    opening is variable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    for a device having a reciprocating bottom-feed separator and an
    adjustable sheet-restraining throat.


CLS 271/125
TXT Device under subclass 124 wherein one of the elements comprising the
    sheet-retarding means is a cylindrical member which may rotate.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the restraining roller is located adjacent to the
    feeding roller and diametrically opposite thereto so that the sheet being
    fed passes between the rollers.  The rotation of the restraining roller is
    regulated, or the gap between the rollers is adjusted, thus the movement of
    the next-to-foremost sheet is restrained.


CLS 271/126
TXT Device under subclass 109 provided with means to force a stack of sheets in
    a direction such that the foremost sheet of the stack is in a position
    appropriate for removal of single sheets.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147+,   for a pack advancer of general utility, and see the search notes of
    subclass 147 for reference to other pack advancer subclasses.


CLS 271/127
TXT Device under subclass 126 provided with a structure to hold a stack of
    sheets, which structure is permitted to turn toward the sheet-removing
    means to a limited extent about an axis.


CLS 271/128
TXT Device under subclass 42 having means for urging top and side feed packs
    into position appropriate for removal of single sheets.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147+,   for a pack advancer and see the search notes of subclass 147 for
    reference to other pack advancer subclasses.


CLS 271/129
TXT Device under subclass 128 wherein the pack is held so that the sheets
    thereof derive a substantial amount of their support from their edges.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149,    for a pack advancer holding sheets on edge.


CLS 271/130
TXT Device under subclass 128 provided with means to detect the absence or
    presence of a sheet adjacent a sheet-removal zone, and further provided
    with means to activate or deactivate the stack-urging means as a result of
    such detection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152+,   for a pack advancer controlled by a feeler, and see the search
    notes of subclass 152, for reference to other such subclasses.


CLS 271/131
TXT Device under subclass 42 wherein the stack of sheets is held so as to
    permit the sheets thereof to fall into position at which the reciprocating
    member engages the lowermost sheet for separation of the lowermost sheet
    from the stack.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165+,   for a pack holder for use with a bottom-feed device, and see the
    search notes of subclass 165 for reference to other subclasses involving
    bottom feed.


CLS 271/132
TXT Device under subclass 131 provided with means in addition to the
    reciprocating member, which means include a source of vacuum or
    subatmospheric pressure that facilitates the operation of the reciprocating
    member.

    (1)     Note.  The suction means must be a stationary suction member that
    does not by itself remove a sheet from the stack.  Rather it is separate
    from the reciprocation separator and pulls the sheet into a position that
    will ensure the engagement of the sheet by the separator.  For a suction
    member that reciprocates to separate a sheet from a pack, see subclass 102,
    and for a suction member that assists a rotating feed means, see subclass
    112.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102     and 112, and see (1) Note, above.


CLS 271/133
TXT Device under subclass 131 provided with means that acts on a stack of
    sheets or on the lowermost sheet of the stack while the stack is in its
    holder, which means makes the stack or the lowermost sheet ready for
    feeding of an individual sheet therefrom.

    (1)     Note. Included herein are such exemplary devices as one wherein the
    pack is vibrated to loosen the sheets, or one wherein the edges of the
    sheets are riffled, or one wherein the sheets pass a diverter which shifts
    the sheets parallel to their surfaces to break the surface adhesion of one
    sheet against another.


CLS 271/134
TXT Device under subclass 133 wherein the means acts to support a portion of
    the stack above the lowermost sheet, thereby to facilitate feeding of the
    lowermost sheet unburdened by the downward force of sheets thereabove.

    (1)     Note.  In most devices of this subclass it is not the entire weight
    of the sheets above the lowermost that is supported.  Rather, the hopper
    containing the stack is provided with fixed or moveable projections into
    the downward travel of the stack such that at least one edge of a sheet
    (and the stack above the sheet) is partially and temporarily supported.


CLS 271/135
TXT Device under subclass 133 wherein the means acts on the lowermost sheet and
    moves that lowermost sheet in its own plane to pre-feed or to individualize
    that lowermost sheet prior to the action of the reciprocating feed member
    in fully separating the sheet from the stack.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein a device wherein a pusher having steps
    simultaneously engages a plurality of sheets to push those sheets in
    repeated increments along the feed direction until the lowermost sheet is
    fully ejected, as well as a device in which the lowermost sheet is
    partially moved in a direction other than the feed direction so that it
    will be subsequently engaged by the reciprocating feed member.


CLS 271/136
TXT Device under subclass 131 provided with means to prevent the feeding of a
    lowermost sheet temporarily or under control of a user of the device.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a device wherein the feed of sheets will
    be skipped at regular intervals, for example a sheet will be fed on a
    regular feed stroke, but on the next regular feed stroke a sheet will not
    be fed, and also included is a device wherein the operator of the device,
    or a signal from another part of the device, will effect nonfeed of the
    reciprocating member until feed is again desired.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for a rotating feeder wherein operation may be stopped at will.


CLS 271/137
TXT Device under subclass 131 provided with means to retard the removal of the
    sheet adjacent to and succeeding the foremost sheet of the stack.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    121 and 167, for a similar sheet-retarding device associated with a
    different sheet separating-means or a pack holder.


CLS 271/138
TXT Device under subclass 137 wherein the sheet-retarding means is located at
    an opening of a stack holder that permits the foremost sheet to be moved
    out of the holder, and the extent of the opening is variable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124+,   for a device having a rotary separator and an adjustable
    sheet-restraining member.


CLS 271/139
TXT Device under subclass 131 provided with means to effect to-and-fro movement
    of the sheet-engaging member, wherein the member may be adjusted relative
    to the means, or the means may be adjusted relative to the stack, or
    wherein the means or the member may be moved to-and-fro in other than a
    straight line.


CLS 271/140
TXT Device under subclass 139 wherein the means or the member may be moved in
    other than a straight line.

    (1)     Note.  In a device of this subclass the pusher movement is usually
    as follows: an initial movement toward the bottom surface of the bottom
    sheet, a feeding movement in engagement with the sheet and in the direction
    of feed parallel to the plane of the sheet, a withdrawal movement away from
    the surface of the sheet, and a retraction movement parallel to the plane
    of the sheet and opposite to the feed direction, thus ending in a position
    ready for the initial movement.


CLS 271/141
TXT Device under subclass 131 wherein the sheet-engaging member includes an
    element having a pointed end that partially pierces the sheet to be fed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18.3,   for a separator having surface-piercing elements.


CLS 271/142
TXT Device under subclass 131 wherein the sheet-engaging member includes an
    element projecting toward the stack, and is provided with means to permit
    or cause change in the extent of projection of the element.


CLS 271/143
TXT Device under subclass 131 provided with a plurality of sheet-engaging
    members, each of which members is mounted for movement toward the stack to
    the extent necessary to properly engage the bottom sheet of the pack for
    feeding thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are devices wherein sheets that may be
    warped are to be fed.  The pusher members are mounted to partake of the
    same reciprocator movement, but are spaced laterally of the direction of
    feed and are independently urged toward the plane of the sheet so that they
    accommodate themselves to the warpage to engage the sheet for proper feed.


CLS 271/144
TXT Device under subclass 131 wherein the stack is held in a hopper which can
    be varied in dimension to accommodate the length and width dimensions of
    the sheets of the stack.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171     and 223, for a sheet holder that is adjustable to the size of
    sheets therein.


CLS 271/145
TXT Device under subclass 8.1 for supporting or holding a stack (i.e., a
    regularly-arranged collection) of sheets in position for removal of
    individual sheets therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are feed tables that are capable
    of holding a stack of sheets, but which (as disclosed) hold a single sheet
    for feeding from the table.


CLS 271/146
TXT Device under subclass 145 provided with mechanism for moving the holder
    to-and-fro with a low amplitude of movement but a high frequency of
    movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 521, 594+, 609, and 752+ for a
    vibratory conveyor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210,    for a vibrating sheet delivery receiver.


CLS 271/147
TXT Device under subclass 145 provided with means to urge a stack of sheets in
    a direction such that the foremost sheet of the stack is in a position
    appropriate for removal of single sheets.

    (1)     Note.  The device of this and indented subclasses is usually for
    feed from the top of a stack, or for feed from a stack of on-edge or
    imbricated sheets. A device for feed from the bottom of the stack would not
    be found herein (since a bottom-feed mechanism does not have a stack-urging
    means) unless the patent thereto also claimed a weight for urging the stack
    toward the bottom of the hopper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     24+, 30.1+, 37+, 126+, and 128+, for a device including a pack
    advancer in combination with a separator of a type appropriate to the
    subclass under which the pack advancer is indented.

    217,    for a pile-lowering means for received sheets.


CLS 271/148
TXT Device under subclass 147 wherein the urging means is provided with areas
    thereon capable of moving at a rate of speed greater than or lesser than
    other areas on the urging means, or said means can be adjusted to lie at
    different levels, thus permitting the foremost sheet to be equally
    presented to the sheet-removal means even though the individual sheets are
    thinner at one portion thereof than at another.


CLS 271/149
TXT Device under subclass 147 wherein the stack holder is arranged to support
    the sheets of the stack so that the individual sheets derive a substantial
    amount of their support from their edges, or wherein the sheets are
    arranged in overlapped array, the margin of one sheet lying beyond the edge
    of an adjacent sheet relative to the direction in which the stack is urged.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the devices herein include a spring or weight to
    move a backstop that advances the stack.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216,    for a receiver on which sheets are deposited in imbricated array.


CLS 271/150
TXT Device under subclass 149 wherein the stack rests on a surface that moves
    toward the sheet-removing means.

    (1)     Note.  Some devices herein include a plurality of plates or
    backstops arranged to support the sheets in their on-edge condition and
    urge the stack to sheet-removal position.


CLS 271/151
TXT Device under subclass 150 wherein the sheets are arranged in overlapped
    condition.

    (1)     Note.  Although it is not quickly evident from the title thereof,
    most of the devices found in subclasses 37 and 38 feed sheets from an
    imbricated array of sheets.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37      and 38, and see (1) Note above.


CLS 271/152
TXT Device under subclass 147 provided with means to detect the absence or
    presence of a sheet adjacent a sheet-removal zone, and further provided
    with means to activate or de-activate the stack-urging means as a result of
    such detection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     31, 38, and 130, for a device wherein a feeler or senser is
    associated with a pack advancer.

    176,    199 and 215, for sheet delivery means including sheet sensing means.

    258+    and 110+, for a device wherein a feeler or senser is associated
    with a feed interrupter.


CLS 271/153
TXT Device under subclass 152 which is provided with a means to remove the
    foremost sheet of a stack, and wherein the detecting means is a part of
    said removing means.

    (1)     Note.  In patents of this subclass, the sheet separator is claimed
    in general terms not justifying placement in one of the specific separator
    subclasses higher in the class schedule.  The emphasis in the claimed
    invention is in the senser, which is either (a) integral with the
    separator, or (b) mounted on the same subassemblage that supports the
    separator so that the senser partakes of separator movement at least in
    part, or (c) activated by a moving element that partakes of movement of the
    separator.


CLS 271/154
TXT Device under subclass 152 wherein the detecting means is included in a
    system of wiring or tubing that carries a flow of electricity or fluid
    respectively, and wherein said detecting means regulates said flow to
    activate or deactivate the urging means.

    (1)     Note.  Among the sensers found in devices of this subclass are:
    magnets, photo-electric cells (found, per se, in Class 250, subclasses
    216+), fluidic devices (found, per se, in Class 137, subclasses 803+), and
    valve operators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, and 250, Radiant Energy, and see (1) Note above.


CLS 271/155
TXT Device under subclass 154 wherein the flow is applied directly to motive
    means that energizes the urging means.

    (1)     Note.  In devices of this subclass the motor, whether electric or
    hydraulic, is connected directly to the advancer rather than through an
    intermediate clutch or transmission, and the stopping or starting of the
    motor is directly responsive to the senser.


CLS 271/156
TXT Device under subclass 152 wherein the stack-urging means that is activated
    and deactivated by the detecting means comprises a mechanical movement that
    is known in the art as "pawl and ratchet" and is further explained in (1)
    Note below.

    (1)     Note.  A pawl is a pivoted element having a free end that
    interengages with teeth on a mating wheel or bar known as a ratchet.  As
    the pivot of the pawl oscillates arcuately or reciprocates rectilinearly
    its movement in one direction will cause the free end to engage a ratchet
    tooth to move the ratchet an increment in said direction, but the movement
    of the pawl in the reverse direction will permit the pawl to slide over the
    adjacent tooth (or teeth) of the ratchet, since reverse movement of the
    ratchet is prevented.  Thus oscillatory or reciprocatory movement of the
    pawl is converted into intermittent one-way movement of the ratchet wheel
    or ratchet bar.


CLS 271/157
TXT Device under subclass 147 provided with means to cause or to permit a stack
    of sheets to be placed or replaced in position for feeding, or provided
    with a support for a stack of sheets, which support normally urges the
    stack toward a sheet-removal position but is provided with means to
    withdraw said support away from the sheet-removal position.

    (1)     Note.  The title and definition of this subclass have been written
    to accommodate the various ways in which the patents of this and indented
    subclasses have been disclosed and claimed.  The intent of these subclasses
    is to provide a locus for patents disclosing "continuous" feeders, that is,
    devices wherein sheets may be individually separated from the top of a
    stack while a new stack of sheets is added to the bottom of the stack.  The
    claims of some of the patents sometimes recite the replenishment in terms
    of function and sometimes recite the structure inherently capable of
    performing the function, but the intent is the same.

    (2)     Note.  Due to the nature of the arrangement of sheets on edge, a
    device feeding sheets from an on-edge advancer is inherently capable of
    having the stack of sheets replenished.  Search in subclass 149 for
    structure similar to that of this subclass is sometimes advisable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149,    and see (2) Note above.


CLS 271/158
TXT Device under subclass 157 provided with at least two supports alternately
    or alternatively usable for urging a stack toward the sheet-removal
    position whereby the sheet removing means may function without stopping for
    replenishment of the stack.

    (1)     Note.  In some devices plural platforms are mounted on
    continuously-moving chains so that sheets are fed from the topmost stack
    while a new stack is loaded on the bottom most platform.  In other devices,
    one platform is held temporarily at the sheet-removal zone while another
    platform is retracted for reloading of a new stack.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149+,   for a device wherein a stack of sheets on-edge is advanced by
    plural plates mounted on continuously-moving chains.


CLS 271/159
TXT Device under subclass 158 wherein a mechanism is provided for each of said
    supports, each said mechanism being capable of moving its support
    independently of the other(s).

    (1)     Note.  In some devices a single power source is split into two
    power drive trains, and in some devices two separate power drive trains are
    provided.  In either case, one platform is retracted for reloading of a
    stack thereon, while another platform continues to advance the old stack to
    the feed means.


CLS 271/160
TXT Device under subclass 147 wherein the stack-urging means includes a
    yieldable resilient member, or includes a mass moved under the influence of
    gravity.


CLS 271/161
TXT Device under subclass 145 provided with means to hold the stack such that
    the sheets therein are in a non-planar condition.

    (1)     Note.  In some devices the sheets are bowed to stiffen them for
    easier feeding.  In others the sheets are bowed to break the adhesion
    between the adjacent surfaces of adjacent sheets.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209,    for receiver having means to bow the delivered sheets.


CLS 271/162
TXT Device under subclass 145 provided with means permitting the stack-holding
    or stack-supporting means to be moved with respect to the sheet-removing
    position.

    (1)     Note.  Although the definition above is sufficiently comprehensive
    to include the movement of a pack advancer, it is obvious from the position
    of this subclass in the schedule that the movement referred to in the
    definition of this subclass is other than in the pack advancing direction.
    A device of this subclass will, for example, permit movement of a feed
    table away from the feeder in order to permit access of an operator to the
    feeder.


CLS 271/163
TXT Device under subclass 162 wherein the stack-holding means can be moved from
    a location at which it permits sheets to be removed from the stack to a
    location at which it permits sheets to be added to the stack.


CLS 271/164
TXT Device under subclass 162 wherein the movement is along a direction
    coincident with a lengthwise or widthwise dimension of a sheet of the stack.

    (1)     Note.  The movement referred to permits a platform that is
    advancing a stack along a direction to be adjusted perpendicularly to that
    direction, or permits movement of a stack-holding tray that slides out of
    the machine for replenishment of the stack therein.


CLS 271/165
TXT Device under subclass 145 wherein the holder supports the stack so as to
    permit the sheets thereof to fall into position at which a sheet-removing
    means engages the lowermost sheet for separation of the lowermost sheet
    from the stack.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     35, 99+, and 131+, for a device feeding from the bottom of a pack
    holder, the feeder being of the type appropriate to the subclass under
    which the bottom-feed subclass is indented.


CLS 271/166
TXT Device under subclass 165 provided with means to support at least a portion
    of the stack above the lowermost sheet thereof, thereby to facilitate
    removal of the lowermost sheet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    for a bottom-feed separator and means to relieve the weight of the
    pack.


CLS 271/167
TXT Device under subclass 145 provided with means to retard movement of the
    sheet adjacent to and succeeding the foremost sheet of the stack.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    121+ and 137+, for a sheet-retarding device associated with a
    sheet-separating means.


CLS 271/168
TXT Device under subclass 167 wherein the retarding means comprises an element
    that penetrates the surface of at least the foremost sheet.

    (1)     Note.  The sheet-impaler is usually a pointed pin, but can also
    comprise a rod that passes through aligned holes that are present in all
    the sheets of the stack.


CLS 271/169
TXT Device under subclass 167 wherein the means comprises elements that contact
    those edges or margins of the foremost sheet that are parallel to the
    direction in which the sheet is to be removed, and wherein the elements are
    spaced apart from each other a distance equal to or slightly less than the
    width dimension of said sheet.


CLS 271/170
TXT Device under subclass 169 wherein the elements are located at the junctions
    of the front edges and side edges of the foremost sheet.


CLS 271/171
TXT Device under subclass 145 wherein the stack-holding means can be varied in
    its dimensions to accommodate the length and width dimensions of the sheets
    comprising the stack.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144     and 223, for a sheet holder that is adjustable to the size of
    sheets therein.


CLS 271/175
TXT Device under subclass 306 provided with a sheet receiver that comprises a
    narrow support having one dimension that is coextensive with the width
    dimension of the individual received sheets and another dimension that is
    very short compared to the length dimension of said sheets whereby one
    portion of each received sheet will hang generally vertically on one side
    of the support and another portion of each received sheet will hang
    generally vertically on the other side of the support, in which device the
    transfer mechanism comprises means to cause each sheet to be deposited on
    said support with the sheet portions hanging as described.


CLS 271/176
TXT Device under subclass 306 provided with means to detect the presence of a
    sheet moving toward the receiving means, and further provided with means to
    activate the transfer means as a result of such detection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    199 and 215, for a device wherein a feeler or senser is associated
    with a feeding or a delivering means indicated by the title of the
    subclass, and see the Search Notes to subclass 152 for feeding subclasses
    including feeler means.


CLS 271/177
TXT Device under subclass 306 wherein the removing means conveys a succession
    of individual sheets along a direction parallel to their surfaces, and
    wherein said transfer mechanism urges each of said sheets in succession to
    be moved in a direction perpendicular to its surface.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the packer usually is an air blast directed
    toward the surface of the sheet being conveyed, thus the air blast changes
    the direction of movement from edgewise to broadside.  For a device using
    an air blast to help convey the sheet edgewise, see subclass 195, and for
    an air blast that helps cushion the dropping of the sheet into a receiver,
    see subclass 211.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195     and 211, for other air-blast means and see (1) Note above.


CLS 271/178
TXT Device under subclass 177 wherein the transfer mechanism includes a member
    turning about an axis, at least a portion of the turning member contacting
    at least a portion of the surface of each sheet.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the axis of the packer is usually parallel
    to the surface of the sheet and the packer pushes each sheet away from the
    packer axis.


CLS 271/179
TXT Device under subclass 178 wherein the member includes a surface that
    simultaneously winds around said axis and progresses axially along said
    axis.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the axis of the packer is usually
    perpendicular to the surface of the sheet and the packer pushes each sheet
    along the packer axis.


CLS 271/180
TXT Device under subclass 177 wherein the transfer mechanism includes a member
    moving to-and-fro in a direction perpendicular to the surface of a sheet
    that is contacted by the member.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the to-and-fro motion of the packer can be
    rectilinearly reciprocating or arcuately oscillating.


CLS 271/181
TXT Device under subclass 180 wherein the member pushes the individual sheets
    into a stackholder that is arranged to support the sheets thereof so that
    said sheets derive a substantial amount of their support from their edges.


CLS 271/182
TXT Device under subclass 306 wherein the transfer mechanism acts to restrain
    or hold back the forward movement of each of the succession of sheets that
    are being conveyed, the action of the transfer mechanism being timed to
    occur on each successive sheet just as that sheet is at the receiver.

    (1)     Note.  The words "restrain" and "hold back" require (but do not
    limit the concept to) structure for positively gripping a sheet or for
    enhancing the frictional hold back characteristics of a retarding surface
    contacting a sheet. Thus a device having a conveyor belt moving at a
    relatively reversed or reduced surface speed would not be in this subclass.
     See subclass 191 or 202 for such a device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191     and 202, and see (1) Note above.


CLS 271/183
TXT Device under subclass 182 wherein the restraint or hold back is effected by
    a surface or member moving at a speed slower than that of each of the
    sheets and contacting the sheet surface frictionally, the frictional
    contact being enhanced by subatmospheric pressure urging the sheet toward
    the surface or member.


CLS 271/184
TXT Device under subclass 306 wherein the transfer mechanism acts to alter
    either the direction in which the surface of each successive sheet faces or
    the direction in which each successive sheet moves, the alteration
    occurring just before or while the sheet is moved into the receiver.


CLS 271/185
TXT Device under subclass 184 wherein the transfer mechanism acts to alter the
    direction in which the surface of each successive sheet faces.


CLS 271/186
TXT Device under subclass 185 wherein the transfer means alters the orientation
    of each successive sheet from an orientation in which a particular surface
    is facing in a particular direction to an orientation in which said surface
    is facing in a direction opposite to said direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65+,    for a device wherein successive sheets are deposited face up or
    face down optionally.


CLS 271/187
TXT Device under subclass 185 wherein the transfer mechanism includes a turning
    means provided with one or more receptacles for the temporary holding of
    successive sheets, each receptacle lying in or adjacent a peripheral
    portion of the turning means.

    (1)     Note.  In use, successive sheets are inserted tangentially into
    successive pockets of the turning means while the pocket is aligned with
    the direction of movement of the successive sheets.  As the turning means
    rotates, the pockets hold and carry the sheets circumferentially, and the
    sheets are released to the receiver at a location different from the
    insertion location, thereby changing the orientation of the sheets.


CLS 271/188
TXT Device under subclass 306 wherein the transfer mechanism causes the
    successive sheets to be curved or corrugated temporarily, thereby imparting
    a temporary stiffness to the sheets that facilitates forward propulsion of
    the sheets into the receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209,    for a device wherein sheets within the receiver are bowed or curved.


CLS 271/189
TXT Device under subclass 306 wherein the transfer mechanism includes means
    that may be placed in the path of movement of the successive sheets for a
    short time, or may be removed from such path, said means being located at
    the discharge end of the conveying means and just before the receiving
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218,    for a temporary sheet support associated with lowering sheet
    receiver, which support is used to accumulate sheets thereon while a
    previously-formed stack is removed from the receiver.


CLS 271/190
TXT Device under subclass 189 wherein the transfer mechanism includes one or
    more platforms extending across and moving along with the direction of
    movement of the succession ofsheets, while supporting said sheets the
    plat-form(s) being mounted for such movement in a closed-loop orbit and
    being spaced one trailing end from a succeeding leading end to permit
    successive sheets to pass through the space between said ends.

    (1)     Note.  In using this device, each successive sheet is placed by its
    conveyor on one of successively-appearing platforms, each platform carrying
    its sheet to a position over the receiver.  The sheet is then stopped by
    means auxiliary to or integral with the platform while the platform
    continues to move from under the sheet, thus permitting the sheet to pass
    into the gap between platforms and be deposited onto the receiver.


CLS 271/191
TXT Device under subclass 189 wherein the transfer mechanism includes a
    closed-loop band encircling two or more pulleys mounted on a support that
    moves to-and-fro between a first position where the bend extends under the
    discharge end of the conveyor of successive sheets and a second position
    where the band extends over the receiver.

    (1)     Note.  In using this device, each successive sheet is placed by its
    conveyor onto the endless belt, the top run of which moves toward the
    receiver. The movement of the belt carrier toward the receiver thus moves
    the sheet at a speed equivalent to belt speed plus carrier speed.  When the
    sheet is entirely over the receiver the carrier retracts at a rearward
    speed effectively equal to the forward speed of the belt, thus the net
    speed of the sheet is zero, and the sheet falls into the receiver as its
    belt support retracts.


CLS 271/192
TXT Device under subclass 189 wherein the transfer mechanism includes two means
    disposed to receive one or more successive sheets and temporarily hold such
    sheet (s) by contacting the two side borders of the sheet (s) that extend
    in a direction parallel to the direction of travel thereof, which means
    releases the sheet (s) so held by turning one of the means in one
    rotational direction and simultaneously turning the other of the means in
    the opposite rotational direction.

    (1)     Note.  For the purposes of this subclass oscillation (i.e.,
    to-and-fro partial rotation) of two opposite members is equivalent to
    unidirectional rotation, provided that the members oscillate in opposite
    directions simultaneously.


CLS 271/193
TXT Device under subclass 278 wherein the removing means includes mechanism to
    generate static electricity or lines of magnetic flux, which mechanism
    cooperates with the removing means to facilitate delivery of a succession
    of individual sheets to a receiver.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is for a device wherein an endlessly orbiting
    belt conveys a succession of individual sheets by frictional contact of the
    surface of the belt with the surface of the sheets and magnetic or
    electrostatic forces attract the sheets to the belt to increase the
    frictional contact.


CLS 271/194
TXT Device under subclass 278 wherein the removing means includes a gaseous
    fluid medium under subatmospheric or above-atmospheric pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, appropriate subclasses for conveying
    solid material or articles by means of a fluid current.  See the search
    notes under the class definition for other classes having specialized fluid
    current conveying.


CLS 271/195
TXT Device under subclass 194 wherein the removing means includes a gaseous
    fluid medium under above-atmospheric pressure.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is for a device wherein pressurized gas urges
    the sheet into close frictional contact with an endlessly orbiting belt, or
    for a device wherein pressurized gas strips the sheet from a suction-belt
    conveyor, or for a device wherein pressurized gas is blown in a direction
    having a component in the direction of movement of the sheet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97,     for a sheet-feeding means using pressurized gas.

    177,    for a sheet-delivery means using an air blast to push sheets
    broadside into a receiver.

    211,    for a sheet-delivery means wherein an air blast cushions the
    dropping of a sheet into a receiver.


CLS 271/196
TXT Device under subclass 194 wherein the removing means includes an element
    that turns continually in the same direction, through the surface of which
    element vacuum is applied to engage and deliver a sheet to a receiver.

    (1)     Note.  The shape of the suction member of this subclass may vary.
    Included herein is a drum having apertures therein or a wheel or chain
    having orbiting cups mounted thereon.  Common to all the devices is the
    presence of suction and the movement in one direction of the suction
    member.  See subclass 197 below for a device having an apertured surface
    comprising an endless belt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94+,    for similar structure used for feeding individual sheets from a
    stack.


CLS 271/197
TXT Device under subclass 196 wherein the surface is that of a closed-loop band
    which encircles two or more pulleys and moves adjacent a vacuum box that
    connects with a source of the vacuum that is applied to the surface of the
    band.


CLS 271/198
TXT Device under subclass 278 wherein the removing means includes a closed-loop
    belt or chain unidirectionally orbiting about two or more pulleys or
    sprockets.


CLS 271/199
TXT Device under subclass 198 provided with means to detect the presence of a
    sheet moving toward the receiving means, and further provided with means to
    activate or deactivate the oribting closed-loop belt or chain.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    176 and 215, for a device wherein a feeler or senser is associated
    with a feeding or delivering means indicated by the title of the subclass,
    and see the Search Notes to subclass 152 for feeding subclasses including
    feeler means.


CLS 271/200
TXT Device under subclass 198 wherein that portion of the endless conveyor
    closest to the receiving means may be displaced with relation to the
    receiving means.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is for a machine wherein the operator thereof
    wishes to move a portion of the conveyor aside for inspection or repair of
    the machine, or for removal of the stack of delivered sheets.  For a
    machine wherein the delivery end of a conveyor moves, thus serving as a
    mechanism to transfer the successive sheets to a receiver as well as means
    to convey the sheets, see subclasses 175, 190 and 191.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175,    190 and 191, and see (1) Note above.


CLS 271/201
TXT Device under subclass 200 wherein the endless conveyor delivers successive
    sheets into a stack of sheets that grows in size of stack as a result of
    such delivery, and provided with means to move the delivery end of said
    conveyor in a direction that will permit and not interfere with such growth.


CLS 271/202
TXT Device under subclass 198 provided with one conveyor or a succession of
    conveyors for removing a succession of sheets to a receiver, and further
    provided with means to change the rate of movement of the succession of
    sheets moving thereon.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is for a device wherein a succession of
    conveyors is provided, a downstream conveyor moving sheets at a speed
    different (usually slower) than an upstream conveyor.


CLS 271/203
TXT Device under subclass 202 provided with means whereby said conveyor or at
    least one of the conveyors is caused to increase its speed and decrease its
    speed in regular sequence.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is for a machine wherein the cyclically
    vary-speed conveyor takes each of the succession of sheets at a high speed
    corresponding to its speed through the machine and slows each sheet as that
    sheet is adjacent the receiver therefor.


CLS 271/204
TXT Device under subclass 198 provided with means for frictionally engaging
    opposite surfaces of each successive sheet adjacent at least one of the
    margins thereof, said means being mounted on a closed-loop belt or chain.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     for a similar suspension gripper mounted on a rotating drum.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:   Power-Driven, subclass 803.3 for a sheet gripper, per
    se, or a sheet gripper mounted on a conveyor, per se.


CLS 271/205
TXT Device under subclass 204 wherein said means engage two of said margins of
    each successive sheet, the engaged margins being those which extend in the
    direction of movement of the sheets.


CLS 271/206
TXT Device under subclass 204 wherein said means may be varied in operation,
    position or condition.


CLS 271/207
TXT Device under subclass 278 provided with means to hold the delivered sheets
    in a stacked, (that is, regularly aligned) array.


CLS 271/208
TXT Device under subclass 207 provided with means to remove, or permit the
    removal of, any electrical charge that may have accumulated on the
    delivered sheets prior to the stacking thereof.


CLS 271/209
TXT Device under subclass 207 provided with means to cause the sheets to be
    curved into a nonplanar condition.

    (1)     Note.  The nonplanar condition may be imparted to the entire pack
    within the receiver for the purpose of facilitating alignment of the sheets
    or handling of the pack.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161,    for a feeding pack holder provided with bowing means.

    188,    for means to bow sheets during delivery.


CLS 271/210
TXT Device under subclass 207 provided with means to move the holder to-and-fro
    with a low amplitude of movement but a high frequency of movement.

    (1)     Note.  The vibrating receiver is used to jog or align the sheets
    stacked in the receiver.  For other means to jog sheets within a receiver,
    see subclasses 221+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146,    for means to vibrate a holder from which sheets will be fed.

    221+,   and see (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 521, 594+, 609, and 752 for a
    vibratory conveyor.


CLS 271/211
TXT Device under subclass 207 wherein sheets are successively delivered onto
    the top of a stack of delivered sheets, and wherein a layer of ambient
    atmosphere is caused to form below the sheet last delivered and above the
    top of the stack, which layer of air permits the last delivered sheet to
    float down onto the top of the stack.

    (1)     Note.  Exemplary of the manner in which the layer of air is formed
    are:  (1) air blast nozzles located above the stack and directed upwardly,
    and (2) a wall confining the edges of sheets at the top of the stack and
    extending to also confine the edges of the sheet last delivered and the
    wall having perforations that permit the controlled escape of air trapped
    between the sheet last delivered and the top of the stack.


CLS 271/212
TXT Device under subclass 207 wherein the sheets are delivered to the holder
    from a location underneath the holder and the stack is formed by moving the
    sheets upwardly into the holder.

    (1)     Note.  The use of a packer to push the delivered sheet up into the
    receiver is common.  A patent that claims a conveyor for moving successive
    sheets edgewise as well as a packer to push the sheets broadside is
    properly placed in subclasses 177+ as an original and properly
    cross-referenced into this subclass.  This subclass is for a patent wherein
    the claim is directed to the means (whether by a packer or otherwise) for
    stacking from below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177+,   and see (1) Note above.


CLS 271/213
TXT Device under subclass 207 provided with a platform or backing for holding a
    stack of sheets, which backing extends in the length and width dimension of
    a sheet and is contiguous with the sheet adjacent thereto, and which
    backing is capable of being moved, thereby moving or permitting movement
    of, the stack held thereby.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for a movable support including, for
    example, an endless conveyor, on which conveyor a plurality of sheets is
    delivered to form a stack, which conveyor is subsequently actuated to move
    the formed stack.  Temporary removal of one or more walls that serve to
    confine the sheets during formation of the stack will not bar a patent from
    original placement in this subclass.  However, further provision of
    structure other than the above-mentioned conveyor, which other structure
    moves, or helps to move, the stack as a stack will justify placement of a
    patent reciting such other structure in class (198).


CLS 271/214
TXT Device under subclass 213 wherein the movement of the backing is in a
    direction away from the source of the delivered sheets.


CLS 271/215
TXT Device under subclass 214 provided with means to detect growth in the
    accumulation of the stack of sheets on or held by the platform or backing,
    and further provided with means for causing movement of the platform or
    backing away from the source of delivered sheets as a result of such
    detection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    176 and 199, for a device wherein a feeler or senser is associated
    with a feeding or delivering device indicated by the title of the subclass,
    and see the Search Notes to subclass 152 for feeding subclasses including
    feeler means.


CLS 271/216
TXT Device under subclass 214 wherein the direction of movement of the backing
    is simultaneously parallel to the surface of the sheet adjacent thereto and
    away from the delivered sheets, whereby the sheets are arranged in
    overlapped array, the edge of a previously delivered sheet lying beyond the
    edge of a next delivered sheet.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is a device wherein a circular
    table rotates circumferentially as sheets are deposited thereon as well as
    a device wherein an endless belt conveyor moves about its carrying pulleys
    as sheets are deposited thereon.  In both instances the sheets are
    imbricated on the conveyor, their margins exposed by an amount equivalent
    to the amount of movement of the conveyor surface during successive
    depositings of successive sheets.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149,    for a stack holder wherein sheets are arranged in imbricated array
    for feeding therefrom.


CLS 271/217
TXT Device under subclass 213 wherein the direction of movement of the backing
    or platform is vertical and downward and such movement occurs in
    synchronism with the delivery of sheets thereto, whereby the platform
    recedes in relation to the growth of the stack of sheets accumulating
    thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147+,   for a device having similar structure used for advancing a pile to
    a sheet feeder, and see the Search Notes therein for other pile advancer
    subclasses.


CLS 271/218
TXT Device under subclass 217 further provided with at least one additional
    platform that is usable for temporary accumulation of delivered sheets
    thereto.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the stack lowering device includes a
    temporary support to which the sheets are delivered during the time
    necessary to remove a stack from the main lowering platform and to replace
    the main lowering platform into sheet receiving position.  See subclasses
    189+ for a temporary support not related to a stack lowering means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189+,   and see (1) Note above.


CLS 271/219
TXT Device under subclass 217 wherein the platform is urged upwardly under the
    influence of a yieldable member, whereby the weight of the growing stack of
    sheets is resisted by the yieldable member.


CLS 271/220
TXT Device under subclass 207 provided with means that confine the individual
    sheets to cause them to be formed into a stack, or align the sheets within
    a stack receiver, or direct the sheets into the receiver, or ensure that
    the sheets will remain within the receiver after being directed thereto,
    said means being capable of movement.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the device includes a movable guide means
    or a movable sheet hold-down means.


CLS 271/221
TXT Device under subclass 220 further provided with linkage powered from a
    source other than the kinetic energy of the moving sheet itself, which
    linkage effects periodic movement of the confining or aligning means
    against peripheral portions of the delivered sheets.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224,    for a device wherein the kinetic energy of a moving sheet displaces
    a movable energy-absorber, and the replacement of the energy-absorber into
    its original position tends to jog or align the sheet.


CLS 271/222
TXT Device under subclass 221 wherein the linkage includes a resilient element,
    whereby one portion of the linkage may move whereas another portion of the
    linkage does not move.


CLS 271/223
TXT Device under subclass 220 wherein the confining means may be moved to vary
    the dimensions thereof to accommodate the length and width dimensions of
    the sheets comprising the stack.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144     and 171, for a sheet-feeding holder that is adjustable to the size
    of the sheets therein.


CLS 271/224
TXT Device under subclass 223 wherein the confining means is further movable
    under the influence of the kinetic energy of the moving sheet delivered
    thereto, thereby to absorb the energy of the sheet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221+,   for a sheet jogger powered from a source other than the kinetic
    energy of the sheet itself.


CLS 271/225
TXT Device under subclass 8.1 wherein the individual sheets move along a
    particular path or line of movement and provided with means to cause the
    individual sheets to move along a different path or line of movement.


CLS 271/226
TXT Device under subclass 8.1 provided with means for positioning or locating a
    sheet with respect to some part of the device or with respect to some part
    of a mechanism that will operate on the sheet.

    (1)     Note.  The term "positioning" may include the act of partially
    turning the sheet about an axis that passes through the surface of the
    sheet so that an edge thereof is accurately aligned if that edge was
    previously misaligned.  Such turning is sometimes termed "orienting" in
    other classes if applied to articles conveyed in the device of that other
    class.  In class (271) it is clear from the total disclosure that the
    alignment is applied to a sheet and that the sheet will be operated upon by
    some further mechanism (which mechanism, if claimed, is recited only by its
    name).  If partial turning occurs, it is incidental to alignment, but the
    purpose is to synchronize the feeding of the sheet to the operation to be
    performed on that sheet by locating the sheet precisely prior to feeding.

    (2)     Note.  Implicit in a device for the subclasses indented herebelow
    is the concept of sheet movement along a direction of sheet travel.  The
    movement is caused by one or more conveyors which move the successive
    sheets to an aligner and move the sheets away from an aligner.  The
    conveyor structure is different from the aligner structure, except in the
    following subclasses:  233, where a rear-edge aligner may also serve to
    push a sheet by its rear-edge; and 242, where a conveyor includes an
    aligner (usually for the front edge) therewith.

    (3)     Note.  For purpose of facilitating the definition of the subclasses
    indented herebelow, the following discussion and definition of terms used
    is herein presented.  A "sheet" is a thin, usually flexible object having
    length and width dimensions.  The boundary of these dimensions is the
    "edge" of the sheet.  The sheet is moved along a direction of travel, and
    the term "side-edge" is applied to that edge which is generally parallel to
    the direction of travel, while the terms "front edge" and "rear edge" are
    applied to those edges which are generally perpendicular to the direction
    of travel, at the leading and trailing ends respectively. The term
    "gripper-couple" is applied to a mechanism comprising two elements having
    opposed surfaces, between which surfaces a sheet is placed; whereby as the
    elements are urged toward one another the sheet is firmly contacted by the
    surfaces so that as the surfaces move together in any direction the sheet
    will be moved correspondingly, until the elements are urged apart to
    release sheet.  The surface may be on the peripheries of roller which
    rotate in opposite directions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     15, and 17, for a side-edge aligner combined with a conveyor as
    indicated in the title.


CLS 271/227
TXT Device under subclass 226 provided with means to detect the presence of a
    sheet, or of an index mark on said sheet, at a particular location of the
    device, and further provided with means to activate the sheet-positioning
    means as a result of such detection.

    (1)     Note.  Included within the meaning of the term "sheet-positioning
    means" is (a) an abutment against which a sheet edge is stopped to align
    that edge, and (b) a conveyor for moving the sheet so that its edge is
    aligned against the abutment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258.01+ and 265.01+, for a device responsive to a sheet senser to perform
    its function.


CLS 271/228
TXT Device under subclass 227 wherein the sheet-detecting means regulates the
    operation of a gripper-couple to move the sheet into aligned position.

    (1)     Note.  The term "gripper-couple" has been defined in (3) Note of
    subclass 226.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    268     and 277, for a device wherein a gripper-couple causes sheet
    movement.


CLS 271/229
TXT Device under subclass 226 provided with first means for slowing the speed
    of movement of each sheet, which first means is in addition to a second
    means for positioning or locating each sheet, the first means acting before
    the second means.


CLS 271/230
TXT Device under subclass 229 wherein the first means is an element that moves
    in the same direction as that of the sheet to be retarded, but at a slower
    speed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243,    for a front-edge aligner that moves with the sheet and may also
    serve to retard its movement.


CLS 271/231
TXT Device under subclass 230 wherein the slowing is effected by a surface that
    contacts the sheet surface frictionally, the frictionally contact being
    enhanced by subatmospheric pressure urging the sheet toward the surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183,    for a suction retarder in a sheet delivery device.


CLS 271/232
TXT Device under subclass 226 wherein each sheet to be positioned includes a
    slit or opening in the surface thereof, and the positioner includes an
    element that penetrates the slit or opening.


CLS 271/233
TXT Device under subclass 226 wherein the means for positioning sheets contacts
    the trailing end of a travelling sheet.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is for a device having a member that contacts
    the rear-edge of a sheet for the specifically disclosed purpose of aligning
    that rear-edge.  The structure of the rear-edge contacting means may be
    similar to the structure of the rear-edge pusher found in subclass 269 or
    271 below, but the difference in placement of a patent to the device is in
    the intent and function of the device.  In this subclass (233) the function
    is to align the sheet in accord with its rear-edge; in the other subclasses
    (269 and 271) the function is to transport the sheet by pushing its
    rear-edge.


CLS 271/234
TXT Device under subclass 226 provided with more than one sheet-positioning
    means.

    (1)     Note.  For the purposes of this and indented subclasses, a
    plurality of elements is considered to be one means if all the elements
    function in the same way at the same time.  Thus, two elements that contact
    the "front-edge" simultaneously comprise one assemblage, but another two
    elements that either contact the "side-edge" or contact the "front-edge" at
    a different time comprise another assemblage.


CLS 271/235
TXT Device under subclass 234 wherein the sheet moves in a particular path or
    line of movement, the movement being effected step-by-step due to the
    action of the plural positioners which act one after another on the sheet.


CLS 271/236
TXT Device under subclass 234 wherein at least one of the positioners contacts
    the "front-edge" of the sheet and at least another of the positioners
    contacts a "side-edge" of the sheet.

    (1)     Note.  See (3) Note of subclass 226 for a definition of
    "front-edge" and "side-edge".


CLS 271/237
TXT Device under subclass 236 wherein the sheets to be positioned are arranged
    in overlaped condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151,    for a device for advancing a pile of imbricated sheets.


CLS 271/238
TXT Device under subclass 236 wherein one of the "side-edge" positioners is
    adjacent one "side-edge" of the sheet and another of the "side-edge"
    positioners is adjacent an edge on the other side of the sheet, whereby the
    sheet is caused to travel between the two "side-edge" positioners.

    (1)     Note.  See (3) Note of subclass 226 for a definition of "side-edge".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240,    for a device comprising opposite side-edge aligners.


CLS 271/239
TXT Device under subclass 234 wherein the operator of the device may use any of
    the plural positioners at will.


CLS 271/240
TXT Device subclass 234 wherein one of the positioners is adjacent one
    "side-edge" of the sheet and another of the positioners is adjacent and
    edge on the other side of the sheet, whereby the sheet is caused to travel
    between the two positioners.

    (1)     Note.  See (3) Note of subclass 226, for a definition of
    "side-edge".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238,    for device comprising a "front-edge" aligner and opposite
    "side-edge" aligners.


CLS 271/241
TXT Device under subclass 226 provided with first means to which the sheet is
    firmly secured and by which the sheet is carried; and further provided with
    means for positioning said first means, whereby the sheet carried thereby
    will also be positioned.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the sheet-holder usually comprises a
    gripper-couple assemblage (for the definition of which, see (3) Note of
    subclass 226), but the sheet-holder of this subclass may also include a
    suction plate to which the sheet may be held by vacuum.

    (2)     Note.  See (1) Note of subclass 242 for the difference between the
    subject matter of this subclass (241) and subclass 242.


CLS 271/242
TXT Device under subclass 226 wherein the means for positioning sheets is
    integral with a means for moving individual sheets, and wherein the
    sheet-moving means is halted during the time the sheet is positioned
    relative thereto.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the sheet conveyor usually comprises a
    gripper-couple assemblage (for the definition of which see (3) Note of
    subclass 226), which is similar to the device of subclass 241.  The
    difference between the two subclasses is that in this subclass the sheet is
    aligned against a temporarily-stopped conveyor which may comprise a
    gripper, whereas in subclass 241 the sheet is gripped by a conveyor member,
    which conveyor member may be stopped so that the member, and the sheet
    carried thereby, will be aligned.


CLS 271/243
TXT Device under subclass 226 wherein the individual sheets are transported
    along a particular path, and provided with a sheet positioner for the
    "front-edge" of a sheet, which positioner is shifted along the same path as
    the sheet.

    (1)     Note.  See (3) Note of subclass 226 for a definition of
    "front-edge".

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is for a device wherein the same
    instrumentality performs two functions, that is, the "front-edge" aligner
    travels with the sheet but at a speed slower than that of the conveyor for
    the sheet; thus the aligner both retards the sheet speed and aligns the
    "front-edge" of the sheet. For a device wherein one device is used to
    retard sheet speed and another device is used to align the "front-edge"
    thereof, see subclass 230.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230,    and see (2) Note above.


CLS 271/244
TXT Device under subclass 243 wherein at least part of the shifting movement of
    the positioner is along the same path of movement as the sheet movement but
    in a direction opposite to the direction of movement of the sheet.


CLS 271/245
TXT Device under subclass 226 wherein the individual sheets are transported
    along a particular direction of travel, and provided with a sheet
    positioner for the "front-edge" of a sheet, which positioner is moved so as
    to intersect the direction of sheet travel and intercept the travel of the
    sheet momentarily.


CLS 271/246
TXT Device under subclass 245 wherein the sheet-transporting means includes a
    gripper-couple that operates at recurrent intervals and in timed relation
    to the operation of the "front-edge" positioner.

    (1)     Note.  See (3) Note of subclass 226 for the definition of
    "gripper-couple".


CLS 271/247
TXT Device under subclass 246 wherein the gripper-couple contacts an area of
    the sheet adjacent an edge thereof.


CLS 271/248
TXT Device under subclass 226 wherein the positioning means includes a guide
    surface that is intended to contact one of the "side-edges" of a traveling
    sheet, which guide surface is generally parallel to the direction of
    movement of the sheet.

    (1)     Note.  For a definition of "side edge" see (3) Note of subclass 226.


CLS 271/249
TXT Device under subclass 248 provided with both a positioning means and a
    gripper-couple mechanism that move together with a relatively small degree
    of movement, the direction of movement being transverse to the direction of
    sheet movement.

    (1)     Note.  For a definition of "gripper-couple" see (3) Note of
    subclass 226.

    (2)     Note.  In the device of this subclass, an open sheet-gripper,
    together with the aligner, move toward a sheet, the side edge of which is
    contacted by the aligner, after which action the sheet- gripper closes and
    the mechanism returns to a position at which the sheet is aligned, at which
    point the sheet- gripper is opened to release the aligned sheet and the
    sequence is repeated on a next sheet.  Compare this with the device of
    subclass 252.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252,    and see (1) Note above.


CLS 271/250
TXT Device under subclass 248 provided with means for imparting to the sheets
    an additional movement (i.e., additional to the direction of sheet travel),
    which additional movement is in a direction transverse to the direction of
    sheet travel and toward the positioning means and is a relatively small
    degree of sheet movement.


CLS 271/251
TXT Device under subclass 250 provided with a sheet moving means that moves
    successive sheets along a resultant direction that is composed of a large
    vector direction along the direction of sheet travel and a small vector
    direction transverse to said direction of sheet travel toward the side-edge
    positioner.

    (1)     Note.  It is clear that the sheet will at first move in a direction
    at an acute angle to the side aligner, and after contact of the side edge
    with the aligner, the sheet will then move parallel to the side aligner.


CLS 271/252
TXT Device under subclass 250 wherein the means to impart additional movement
    to the sheets comprises a gripper-couple mechanism that moves transverse to
    the direction of sheet travel.

    (1)     Note.  The term "gripper-couple" has been defined in (3) Note of
    subclass 226.


CLS 271/253
TXT Device under subclass 226 provided with means to vary the placement of the
    positioning means with respect to the device.


CLS 271/254
TXT Device under subclass 253 wherein the placement of the positioning means
    may be varied while the sheet feeder continues to operate.

    (1)     Note.  For proper original placement of a patent into this
    subclass, the specification of the patent should clearly disclose continued
    operation of the sheet feeder or the sheet operating device during the act
    of adjusting the aligning means.


CLS 271/255
TXT Device under subclass 253 further provided with means to show, by visible
    index markings, the relationship between the positioning means and the
    structure of the sheet feeder.


CLS 271/256
TXT Device under subclass 8.1 provided with means to discontinue, suspend or
    alter the normal flow or travel of sheets from a stack to an operation
    station.

    (1)     Note.  A distinction should be made between the temporary stopping
    of a sheet during the period of time necessary to align that sheet, (which
    temporary stopping is found in the patents of subclasses 226+, as
    appropriate) and the stopping of the normal travel of a succession of
    sheets (which latter stopping is found in the patents of this and indented
    subclasses).

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is for a device wherein a condition of the
    device itself, or a machine associated with the device is sensed, and feed
    is interrupted in response thereto.


CLS 271/257
TXT Device under subclass 256 wherein the interruption of feeding is the direct
    result of a willful act of an operative.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is for a device wherein it is desired to
    change from a condition during which sheet feed occurs during every cycle
    of operation of the feeder, to a condition during which sheet feed occurs
    only during every second (or every third or fourth) cycle of operation of
    the feeder.  The feed is interrupted during the "non-feed" cycles at the
    will of an operative.  This subclass is also for a device wherein it is
    desired to manually override the interrupted feed so as to operate the
    feeder for the purpose of clearing any jammed or excess sheets.


CLS 271/258.01
TXT Responsive to sheet sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 256 wherein the feeding interrupting means
    includes a device for detecting the absence of the sheets or presence of a
    particular condition of the sheets adjacent to the feeding interrupting
    means and in response thereto discontinue, suspend or alter the normal flow
    or travel of the sheet from the stack to the operation station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.13,   for a sheet feeding and delivering having a sheet sensor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 126+  for a clutch
    controlled by a sheet detector.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 13+ for an automaticcontrol of a
    discharge assistant operation  in response to the depletion of supply.

    235,    Registers, subclasses 375+ for various systems  controlled by the
    data bearing records.

    902,    Electronic Funds Transfer, subclass 16 for a cash dispenser
    sensitive to an erroneous passage of  plural bills.


CLS 271/258.02
TXT Interrupts feeding upstream only:

    Subject matter under subclass 258.01 wherein the detecting device in
    response to a particular condition detected discontinue, suspend, or alter
    the normal flow or travel of the sheet from the stack to the operation
    station only at a location ahead of the location of the detecting device.


CLS 271/258.03
TXT Single sensor with timer:

    Subject matter under subclass 258.01 in combination with a timer wherein
    the timer is actuated by the detecting device.


CLS 271/258.04
TXT Sensor operates warning indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 258.01 comprising a means for producing a
    humanly perceptible signal in response to the sensing of malfunction by the
    detecting means.


CLS 271/258.05
TXT Mechanical linkage:

    Subject matter under subclass 258.01 wherein the sheet sensor is a
    mechanically driven device and comprising a means for driving the sheet
    sensor and the feeding means in a timed relationship with each other.

    (1)     Note.  An electrically powered sensor is excluded from this
    subclass.


CLS 271/259
TXT Device under subclass 258 provided with two or more of said detecting means.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is for a device wherein a plurality of sensers
    are located longitudinally along the direction of travel of successive
    sheets and detect a condition of jamming or a condition of rate of travel
    of the successive sheets as the successive sensers are activated.


CLS 271/260
TXT Device under subclass 259 wherein the detecting means utilize air pressure
    or suction in their activating circuitry.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is for a device wherein two sensers are
    opposed to each other, and are located so that a succession of sheets pass
    between the sensers with the surfaces of the sheets adjacent to the
    sensers.  Air, usually suction, applied to the sensers will detect the
    presence of a single passing sheet by activating one senser, but will
    detect the presence of superposed (i.e., doubled) sheets by activating both
    sensers.


CLS 271/261
TXT Device under subclass 259 wherein the detecting means are located across
    the direction of travel of the sheets.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is for a device wherein a succession of
    rectangular sheets are travelling along a direction perpendicular to their
    front or leading edges.  If the front edge is inclined to that direction
    rather than perpendicular thereto, one corner of the front edge will pass
    one of the detectors before the other corner passes a respectively located
    detector, and this will activate the feed-interrupter so that misalignment
    can be corrected.  This operation is distinguishable from front alignment
    provided for in an appropriate subclass under subclasses 226+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226+,   and see (1) Note above.


CLS 271/262
TXT Device under subclass 258 wherein the detecting means detects the presence
    of two or more sheets, or detects a sheet that is thicker than that for
    which the detector is adjusted.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is for a device wherein the flow of unwanted
    (due to double thickness) sheets is diverted to another path, as well as a
    device wherein the flow is stopped.


CLS 271/263
TXT Device under subclass 262 wherein the detecting means is included in a
    system of wiring that carries a flow of electricity, and wherein said
    detecting means regulates said flow to activate the sheet-interrupter.


CLS 271/264
TXT Device under subclass 8.1 provided with means for moving individual sheets
    to a particular position.

    (1)     Note.  Reference is made to (3) Note of the Class Definition
    wherein the difference between a "conveyor" of this class (271) and a
    conveyor of other classes was discussed.  It should be emphasized that in a
    typical patent for this class (271) and this group of subclasses (264+) the
    total disclosure of the patent and the environment in which the device is
    to be used is of importance in proper placement of the patent.  Thus,
    although a typical claim of a patent in this and indented subclasses may
    recite only a conveyor structure, it is clear from the patent that the
    conveyor is feeding a sheet to an operation that will change the
    characteristics of the sheet, or is feeding a sheet that originated from a
    stack of sheets, or both.  In other words, the device does more than move
    an article from one location to another.


CLS 271/265.01
TXT Responsive to sheet sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 264 comprising a device which detects the
    presence or absence of the sheet at a designated location or a sheet
    thickness and in response thereto continue moving the individual sheet
    toward a desired location.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.13,   110+, 227+, and 258.01+, for other detector means.


CLS 271/265.02
TXT Plural sensors:

    Subject matter under subclass 265.01 including two or more detecting
    devices.


CLS 271/265.03
TXT Laterally spaced sensors:

    Subject matter under subclass 265.02 wherein the detecting devices are
    located at different locations at a distance from each other and along the
    direction of travel of the sheet.

    (1)     Note. This subclass is for a device wherein a succession of sheets
    are travelling along a direction perpendicular to their front or    leading
    edges and the detecting means are located across from the line of travel of
    the              sheets.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226+,   for a feeding with means to align a sheet.


CLS 271/265.04
TXT Thickness sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 265.01 wherein the detecting device detects
    combined thickness of two or more sheet layers or detects depth of the
    individual sheet.


CLS 271/266
TXT Device under subclass 264 wherein the conveyor causes the sheet to move
    intermittently or step-by-step.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is for a feeder wherein a particular sheet is
    to be moved through an operating station whereat a plurality of operations
    is to be performed on the same sheet, but each operation will be performed
    at a different location on that sheet.  The feeder moves the sheet through
    the machine in successive steps.


CLS 271/267
TXT Device under subclass 264 wherein the sheet-moving means comprises
    mechanism that itself moves to and fro but imparts movement to the sheet in
    only one direction.

    (1)     Note.  The to-and-fro movement can be arcuate oscillation or
    rectilinear reciprocation.


CLS 271/268
TXT Device under subclass 267 wherein the sheet-moving means comprises a
    gripper-couple that contacts an area of the sheet adjacent an edge thereof.

    (1)     Note.  For a definition of "gripper-couple", see (3) Note of
    subclass 226.


CLS 271/269
TXT Device under subclass 267 wherein the sheet-moving means comprises a member
    that contacts the trailing end of the travelling sheet.

    (1)     Note.  For the difference between this subclass (269) and subclass
    233, see (1) Note of subclass 233.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233     and 271, for a device including a rear-edge pusher, and see (1)
    Note above.


CLS 271/270
TXT Device under subclass 264 provided with means to adjust parts of the
    sheet-moving means relative to each other or their supporting mechanism, or
    provided with means to change the speed of movement of the sheet moved
    thereby, or provided with means to cyclicly change the speed of movement of
    the sheet-moving means (i.e., change from fast to slow repetitively).


CLS 271/271
TXT Device under subclass 264 wherein the sheet-moving means comprises a member
    that contacts the trailing end of the travelling sheet.

    (1)     Note.  For the difference between this subclass (271) and subclass
    233, see (1) Note of subclass 233.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233     and 269, for a device including a rear-edge pusher, and see (1)
    Note above.


CLS 271/272
TXT Device under subclass 264 wherein the sheet-moving means comprises two
    elements, each of which elements has an endless, orbitally-moving surface,
    the surface of one element being opposite to and spaced from the surface of
    the other element during at least a portion of their movement and the
    surfaces moving in the same direction and engaging opposite surfaces of a
    sheet lying therebetween during said portion of movement.

    (1)     Note.  The element may be an endless belt cooperating with another
    endless belt, a rotating roller cooperating with another rotating roller or
    an endless belt cooperating with one or more rotating rollers; the
    criterion for placement herein being only that the conveyed sheet lies
    between the elements which thereby cooperate to move the sheet.


CLS 271/273
TXT Device under subclass 272 provided with structure whereby the two elements
    may be moved away from one another.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for a feeder wherein one part of the
    conveyor couple may be separated from the other part to remove sheets that
    may have become jammed between the parts.


CLS 271/274
TXT Device under subclass 273 wherein the two elements are normally biased
    toward one another by yieldable means and the movement away from one
    another is resisted by the yieldable means.


CLS 271/275
TXT Device under subclass 264 wherein the sheet-moving means comprises a
    circumferential surface of a rotating or endlessly-orbiting member, the
    conveyed sheet being entirely in contact with said surface.


CLS 271/276
TXT Device under subclass 275 wherein the contact between the sheet and the
    conveyor surface is caused by vacuum means or air pressure means.


CLS 271/277
TXT Device under subclass 275 provided with at least two elements having
    surfaces located adjacent to and opposite to one another, the element
    surfaces engaging opposed surfaces of the sheet located between the element
    surfaces with sufficient frictional force to move the sheet as the elements
    are moved by the drum or endless belt or chain on which the elements are
    mounted.


CLS 271/278
TXT DELIVERING:

    Apparatus under the class definition wherein means are provided limited to
    removing or conveying individual sheets from a work station to a receiver,
    stack, or some determined position.


CLS 271/279
TXT Multiple discharge:

    Apparatus under subclass 278 having means to deliver the sheets to a
    plurality of receivers.


CLS 271/280
TXT For separating sheet from moving assemblage of sheets:

    Apparatus under subclass 279 wherein the sheets to be delivered comprise a
    set of two or more sheets that are being conveyed toward two or more
    receivers, the apparatus being provided with means for disassociating one
    of said sheets from one or more other sheets and for concurrently
    delivering said one sheet to one receiver and the one or more other sheets
    to one or more other receivers.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and the indented subclasses are for a device
    wherein a "master" or "original" sheet has been superimposed onto a "copy"
    sheet and the so-formed set passed through a photocopying machine.  After
    processing, the moving assemblage or set of superimposed sheets is
    separated, the "master" being delivered to one location and the "copy"
    being delivered to another location.  The characteristics of this operation
    that distinguish it from feeding separators of this class, subclass 8 are
    that in this and the indented subclasses (a) the set is moving in a
    direction parallel to the surfaces of the sheets and (b) two receivers are
    provided for the two parts of the set.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8.1+,   for a device for feeding sheets from a stack of sheets.


CLS 271/281
TXT By separating member moving in direction opposite of assemblage:

    Apparatus under subclass 280 wherein the means for disassociating includes
    a member which moves in a direction counter to the direction in which the
    assemblage is being conveyed to effect relative movement between the sheet
    and the remainder of the assemblage.


CLS 271/282
TXT By sheet attracting means:

    Apparatus under subclass 280 wherein the means for disassociating includes
    means capable of drawing toward itself one or more of the sheets, e.g., by
    magnetism, suction, etc.


CLS 271/283
TXT Pneumatic attracting means:

    Apparatus under subclass 282 wherein the attracting means includes
    pneumatic means for causing the attraction.


CLS 271/284
TXT Opposed pneumatic attracting means:

    Apparatus under subclass 283 wherein oppositely located pneumatic
    attracting means are provided to act on opposite sides of the assemblage.


CLS 271/285
TXT With leading edges of sheets offset:

    Apparatus under subclass 280 in which the assemblage is conveyed to
    disassociating means with the leading edge of one sheet in advance of the
    leading edge of another sheet.


CLS 271/286
TXT With means to cause offset:

    Apparatus under subclass 285 in which means are provided to create the
    offset relation of the leading edges.


CLS 271/287
TXT Of successive sheets to plural receivers in succession:

    Apparatus under subclass 279 wherein the sheets to be delivered comprise a
    sequence of two or more sheets that are being conveyed one after the other
    toward two or more receivers, the apparatus being provided with means for
    diverting a first of said sheets into a first receiver, a second of said
    sheets into a second receiver, the sequence continuing until a sheet is
    diverted into the last receiver whereupon the next sheet is diverted into
    the first receiver and the operation is repeated.

    (1)     Note.  A machine for this subclass and the indented subclasses
    differs from a machine for Class 270, subclasses 58.01+ in that this and
    the indented subclasses provide for the stacking into plural receivers of
    sheets from a single or an undetermined source, whereas Class 270,
    subclasses 58.01+ provides for the stacking into plural receivers of sheets
    from a plurality of source stacks, the sheets of which are to be collated
    into a plurality of finished stacks.  See the search class notes in the
    class definition of Class 271 for further discussion.  In this and the
    indented subclasses will also be found a machine which is programmed so
    that one or more of the receivers is "skipped" to form special stacks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, the appropriate
    subclasses for a machine wherein sheets are assorted into plural receivers
    in accordance with characteristics of the respective sheets.

    270,    Sheet-Material Associating, subclasses 58.01+, and see (1) Note
    above.


CLS 271/288
TXT With control means to vary mode of operation:

    Apparatus under subclass 287 having means to alter the normal sequence of
    delivery.

    (1)     Note.  Programming means to skip one or more receivers or means to
    deliver all sheets to a single receiver until the receiver is filled, or to
    deliver all sheets or sheets in excess of capacity of the receivers to an
    additional receiver are included here.


CLS 271/289
TXT To bypass array of receivers:

    Apparatus under subclass 288 wherein the control means causes the sheets to
    be delivered to a location other than the receivers involved in the normal
    sequence of delivery.


CLS 271/290
TXT To route sheets to subsequent array of receivers:

    Apparatus under subclass 289 wherein the other location is an additional
    group of receivers into which these sheets are successively delivered.


CLS 271/291
TXT With selective actuation of means for inverting duplex sheets:

    Apparatus under subclass 287 including means to selectively deliver sheets
    having copy on both sides thereof in oppositely faced relation to that of
    sheets having copy on single sides thereof.


CLS 271/292
TXT With movable receivers or receiver portions:

    Apparatus under subclass 287 in which at least a part of each receiver is
    movable, e.g., relative to another receiver part, the delivery location,
    etc.


CLS 271/293
TXT With means to increase spacing between receiver defining portions:

    Apparatus under subclass 292 in which the means defining the boundaries of
    each receiver are relatively movable to increase the dimension of the
    entrance thereto.


CLS 271/294
TXT Receivers moving into registry with delivery zone:

    Apparatus under subclass 292 in which the entrance of each receiver is
    successively moved into alignment with a stationary exit of the means
    delivering the sheets.


CLS 271/295
TXT Receivers arranged in rotary array:

    Apparatus under subclass 294 in which the receivers are arranged in an
    array rotatable about an axis to align each receiver entrance with the
    delivering means exit.


CLS 271/296
TXT By diverter or conveyor moving past receivers:

    Apparatus under subclass 287 in which the means delivering the sheets or a
    means for deflecting the sheets from the conveyor is successively moved
    into alignment with the entrance to each receiver.


CLS 271/297
TXT By individual diverter for each receiver:

    Apparatus under subclass 287 in which an individual deflector is located
    adjacent the entrance to each receiver to direct conveyed sheets into that
    receiver.


CLS 271/298
TXT With means to program discharge destination:

    Apparatus under subclass 279 wherein a means is provided by which an
    operator can feed precoded instructions into the machine to select the
    delivery sequence or discharge destination.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, the appropriate
    subclasses for a machine wherein sheets are assorted into plural receivers
    in accordance with characteristics of the respective sheets.


CLS 271/299
TXT To laterally spaced receivers:

    Apparatus under subclass 279 in which sheets are delivered to side-by-side
    receivers.


CLS 271/300
TXT By release from conveyor at plural locations:

    Apparatus under subclass 279 in which a means to convey the sheets has a
    means to temporarily hold the sheets and then selectively discharges the
    sheets at one of the plurality of receivers.


CLS 271/301
TXT Selectively to recirculating path or exit:

    Apparatus under subclass 279 in which an endless loop conveying path is
    provided and in which a selectively operable means is provided which in one
    condition maintains the sheet in the endless loop and in another condition
    causes the sheets to exit the loop.


CLS 271/302
TXT By conveyor section movable to direct sheets along alternate paths:

    Apparatus under subclass 279 wherein the sheet delivering means is a
    conveyor that can be shifted or has a portion that can be shifted to divert
    the sheet into the receiver.


CLS 271/303
TXT With movable diverter:

    Apparatus under subclass 279 having movable means to deflect a sheet from a
    conveying path to a receiver or receivers.


CLS 271/304
TXT Bidirectionally rotating diverter roller:

    Apparatus under subclass 303 in which the diverter is a revolving wheellike
    member which can selectively revolve in opposing directions depending upon
    the desired destination of the sheet.


CLS 271/305
TXT Individual diverter for each receiver:

    Apparatus under subclass 303 wherein a separate diverter is located
    adjacent the entrance to each receiver to direct conveyed sheets into that
    receiver.


CLS 271/306
TXT With transfer means between conveyor and receiver:

    Apparatus under subclass 278 provided with means additional to the removing
    means and a receiving means, which additional means (i.e., transfer
    mechanism) is located adjacent a receiving means and which additional means
    facilitates or effects the passage of individual sheets from said removing
    means to said receiving means.

    (1)     Note.  In this and the indented subclasses the delivery means
    includes a conveyor for merely moving a succession of individual sheets
    (usually in a direction parallel to their surfaces) from an operating
    station, and a receiver wherein the individual sheets are stacked (usually
    in surface-to-surface contact).  The additional transfer mechanisms of
    these subclasses do more than merely convey the sheets in one direction.
    It is a positively acting mechanism that effects a change in position,
    orientation, speed, or other condition of the sheets just prior to the
    receipt of such sheets by the receiver.


CLS 271/307
TXT Means to strip sheets from engagement with moving conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 306 in which the removing means comprises a moving
    conveyor and in which the transfer means includes means to separate sheets
    from engagement with the conveyor.

    (1)     Note.  The strippers herein are to be distinguished from mere
    release means provided as an adjunct to the conveyor to terminate the
    conveying effect, e.g., cams for opening grippers of a gripper conveyor,
    means for terminating operation of a suction box for a suction conveyor,
    etc., and from the guide means commonly provided to guide an already
    released sheet from the conveyor to the receiving means.


CLS 271/308
TXT Stripper cyclically movable between stripping and nonstripping position:

    Apparatus under subclass 307 in which the stripping means is cyclically
    movable, either in response to the need for removing a sheet or as a result
    of the stripping operation, between a position in which it is operative to
    separate a sheet from the conveyor and a position at which it would be
    incapable of initiating separation of a sheet.


CLS 271/309
TXT By air blast:

    Apparatus under subclass 307 in which the means for stripping the sheet
    from the conveyor includes means for applying a pneumatic discharge to the
    sheet.


CLS 271/310
TXT By means to attract sheet from conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 307 wherein the means for separating the sheet
    from the conveyor includes means capable of drawing the sheet toward
    itself, e.g., by suction, electrical attraction, etc.


CLS 271/311
TXT Stripper normally in contact with conveyor surface:

    Apparatus under subclass 307 wherein the means for separating is retained
    in touching relation with the surface of the conveyor.


CLS 271/312
TXT Stripper normally in spaced relation to conveyor surface:

    Apparatus under subclass 307 wherein the means for separating is normally
    retained in a position away from the conveyor surface even during the
    separating operation.

    (1)     Note.  The spacing can be provided at the side of the conveyor or
    even below the conveyor surface as long as there is no contact between the
    stripper and the conveyor surface.


CLS 271/313
TXT With means to maintain constant spacing of movable stripper:

    Apparatus under subclass 312 in which the stripper is mounted for movement
    toward and away from the conveyor surface during normal operation of the
    conveyor and in which means are provided to maintain a predetermined
    spacing between the stripper and the conveyor.

    (1)     Note.  This device is to be distinguished from an adjustable
    separator which is locked in a predetermined position at a nominal spacing
    from the conveyor.


CLS 271/314
TXT Rotary conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 278 in which the removing means includes means
    traveling in the arc of a circle for delivering the sheets.


CLS 271/315
TXT With circumferential pocket members:

    Apparatus under subclass 314 in which the means moving in the arc of a
    circle includes one or more receptacles for the temporary holding of
    successive sheets, each receptacle lying in or adjacent to a peripheral
    portion of the means moving in the arc of a circle.

    CROSS-REFERENCES ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 271/900
TXT STRIPPER:

    Device which separate a sheet from a moving conveyor.


CLS 271/901
TXT MAGNETIC OPERATION:

    Device which handle sheet material and which use a magnetic force in their
    operation.


CLS 271/902
TXT REVERSE DIRECTION OF SHEET MOVEMENT:

    Device which change the direction of sheet movement so that the leading
    edge of the sheet becomes the trailing edge of the sheet.


CLS 271/903
TXT TRAVELING WICKET (FOR STACK ON EDGE):

    Device which convey sheets by means of rotating or orbiting racks that
    support the stack on edge.



CLS 273/
TTL AMUSEMENT DEVICES:  GAMES

CLS 273/
TXT (1)     Note:  Classes 463 and 473 are intended to eventually replace Class
    273 through a series of stages.  When all of the subject matter of Class
    273 has been reclassified and incorporated within these classes (463 and
    473), Class 273 will be abolished.  Until Class 273 is abolished, it is to
    be considered subordinate to Classes 463 and 473.  Stated otherwise: the
    subclasses of Class 273, along with their hierarchical arrangement, are to
    be considered as following after the subclasses of, appropriately, Class
    463 or 473 (i.e., the first occurring subclass of Class 273 follows the
    last occurring subclass of appropriate Class 463 or 473).

    CLASS DEFINITION

    This class, which is subordinate to both Class 473, Games Using Tangible
    Projectile, and Class 463:  Amusement Devices:  Games-- wherein Class 473
    is specific under Class 463,  and wherein Classes 273, 463, and 473 are
    further specific under Class 472, Amusement Devices-- includes:

    Apparatus or means, such as games and sports, by which contests of skill or
    chance may be engaged in among two or more participants, where the result
    of such contests can be indicated according to definite rules;

    Apparatus or means, such as puzzles and fortune telling devices, by which a
    test of the skill or fortune of one or more persons, in accomplishing some
    sought result, may be obtained, chance devices being included, even if not
    of themselves games or elements of games, by reason of their similarity to
    other chance devices herein;

    Targets combined with devices for projecting aerial or surface projectiles
    or missiles against or through the targets, per se, and projectors, per se,
    only if the projectile passes at all times over a surface;

    Devices ancillary and appurtenant to games for which there is no provision
    in other classes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 455+ for protective clothing to be worn by
    athletes such as football helmets, baseball and boxing gloves, etc.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 222-225 for mechanical signals
    and indicators, per se, which form a part of a game device.

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, appropriate subclass for mechanical
    aerial projectors, per se. Projectors, per se, are included in this class
    (273) only when the projectile, at all times, travels on a surface.
    Combinations of targets and aerial projectors are included in this class
    (273).

    194,    Check-Actuated Control Mechanisms, appropriate subclasses 30, 41,
    and 55 for games and chance devices involving particular coin control
    mechanism.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.1+ for
    electrical switches responsive to the action of a game or amusement piece.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for article dispensers
    not otherwise provided for.  Such article dispensers, as subcombinations of
    chance devices such as are provided for in subclasses 138.1+ of this class
    (273) are classified in appropriate subclasses of Class 221.

    235,    Registers, for score totalizing apparatus for use in games,
    particularly subclass 90 for cribbage boards.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 323 for game reporting
    electric signaling systems and appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclasses 286.01+ for electric signaling systems, per se which may form
    part of a game.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 1+ for visual display systems
    with selective electrical control.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 410 for
    game and amusement devices which include computations or significant data
    processing techniques.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 17+ and 71 for
    pavement and road structure.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for stock material in the form of a single or plural layer web or sheet
    which may be used in the fabrication of products provided for in this class.

    463,    Amusement Devices:  Games, appropriate subclasses, for a
    nonprojectile game, a simulated-projectile game, a propelled racing game, a
    fencing game, or an implement or device used by a person (often one
    involved in law enforcement) to strike or electrically shock a human being
    so as to control the being.  Classes 463 and 473 are intended to eventually
    replace Class 273 through a series of stages.  When all of the subject
    matter of Class 273 has been reclassified and incorporated within these
    classes (463 and 473), Class 273 will be abolished.  Until Class 273 is
    abolished, it is to be considered subordinate to Classes 463 and 473.
    Stated otherwise: the subclasses of Class 273, along with their
    hierarchical arrangement, are to be considered as following after the
    subclasses of, appropriately, Class 463 or 473 (i.e., the first occurring
    subclass of Class 273 follows the last occurring subclass of appropriate
    Class 463 or 473).

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, for a game that uses a tangible
    projectile.  See Class 463 search note, above.

    602,    Surgery:  Splint, Brace, or Bandage, subclasses 41+ for bandaging
    devices, even though  specially adapted for use in supporting the body or
    body member to function in a proper  manner in playing a game.


CLS 273/108
TXT SURFACE PROJECTILE GAME; GAME ELEMENT (E.G., TARGET, ETC.) OR ACCESSORY
    THEREFOR OTHER THAN PROJECTILE, PER SE:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to a game in which a
    projectile passes over a surface at all times in its course, which game
    comprises (a) a game component (other than a projectile, per se) which may
    be used to play the type of game included herein, or (b) an ancillary
    device or means which is adapted and intended to be used with or for a game
    component included herein unless it is provided for elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138.1+, for an object (e.g., a die, a top, or a marble used with a roulette
    wheel, etc.) acting either per se as, or as part of, a chance device in
    which the element of chance is alone the function of the device or which
    might be of itself a game or a component of a game.

    317+,   for game apparatus for an aerial projectile game (including a
    target or other game component other than a projector, per se, or a
    projectile, per se) in which a projectile or missile is intended to be
    projected into or through the air during play of a game, and note
    especially subclasses 362+ thereunder for a target which also acts as a
    projectile by virtue of its being projected into the air during use thereof
    (e.g., a clay pigeon, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, for a centrifugally or mechanically
    operated projector, per se, which projects projectiles into the air.

    200,    Electricity: Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.1+ for an
    electrical switch responsive to the action of a game or amusement piece.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, for a toy device which may move over a
    surface.

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, subclasses 52+ for a ball
    projectile used in a billiard or pool game, subclasses 125+ for a ball
    projectile used in a bowling game, subclasses 351+ for a ball projectile
    used in the game of golf, subclass 413 for a ball projectile used in the
    game of croquet, subclasses 516+ for a player-held implement, in general
    (e.g., a tennis racket, baseball bat, polo mallet, etc.) which is used to
    project a game projectile into the air by striking the same, and subclasses
    569+ for a game projectile, in general, used in numerous other games such
    as baseball, tennis, basketball, football, hockey, lacrosse, pinball games,
    etc.


CLS 273/108.1
TXT Simulated game (e.g., hockey, soccer, etc.):

    A surface projectile game under subclass 108 wherein any combination of the
    projector, projectile, game surface, or other game element is adapted or
    intended to mimic some or all of the features, action, rules, environment,
    or scoring of a game of physical sport or other athletic event.

    (1)     Note.  Although the sport or athletic event mimicked might normally
    include an aerial projectile, the projectile in this and indented
    subclasses is intended to remain in contact with the playing surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    317+,   for an aerial projectile game that simulates a physical sport or
    athletic event.


CLS 273/108.2
TXT Golf:

    A surface projectile game under subclass 108.1 wherein the game mimicked is
    a game commonly known as golf, wherein a participant attempts to project a
    projectile into an open hole in a surface or otherwise project the
    projectile toward a specified location on a generally horizontal surface in
    an attempt to have it stop at said specified location.

    (1)     Note.  Although representative of a sport that utilizes an aerial
    projectile, the projectile in this and indented subclasses is intended to
    remain in contact with the playing surface.


CLS 273/108.21
TXT Projector solely supported and controlled by participant:

    A simulated golf game under subclass 108.2 wherein the projectile is struck
    or pushed by an implement intended to be carried and manipulated only by a
    participant in the surface projectile game.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108.5,  for another simulated projectile game having a projector solely
    supported by a participant.


CLS 273/108.22
TXT Manikin-type:

    A simulated golf game under subclass 108.2 wherein the projectile is struck
    or pushed by a movable figurine that resembles a person with a golf club.


CLS 273/108.3
TXT Baseball:

    A surface projectile game under subclass 108.1 wherein the game mimicked is
    a game commonly referred to as baseball, wherein a participant, i.e., a
    batter, swings an elongated, generally cylindrical striking implement,
    i.e., a bat, in an attempt to strike an aerial projectile, i.e., baseball,
    thrown into a defined area above a playing surface by a participant, i.e.,
    pitcher, on an opposing team.

    (1)     Note.  Although representative of a sport that utilizes an aerial
    projectile, the projectile in this and indented subclasses is intended to
    remain in contact with the playing surface.


CLS 273/108.31
TXT Mechanically pitched ball or projectile:

    A simulated baseball game under subclass 108.3 including a device intended
    to simulate a pitcher which is constructed and arranged to actively force
    the projectile over and in contact with the surface toward a defined area
    of the surface representing a batter's box, which may further include a
    device intended to simulate a batter constructed and arranged near the
    defined area to actively strike the projectile as it travels over the
    defined area of the surface.


CLS 273/108.32
TXT Mechanically batted ball or projectile:

    A simulated baseball game under subclass 108.3 including a device intended
    to simulate a batter which is constructed and arranged to actively strike a
    projectile to cause it to travel over and in contact with the surface.


CLS 273/108.33
TXT Movable surface:

    A simulated baseball game under subclass 108.3 wherein the projectile is
    advanced across the surface by vibrating, tilting, or otherwise translating
    the orientation of the surface.


CLS 273/108.4
TXT Football:

    A surface projectile game under subclass 108.1 wherein the game mimicked is
    a game commonly known as football, where opposing teams of participants
    alternately have a given number of chances to carry a projectile across a
    line at an end of a defined play surface, to catch a thrown projectile in
    the air in a defined area past the end of the elongated play surface, i.e.,
    end zone, or kick the projectile over a horizontal bar and between a pair
    of vertically extending bars located in the end zone, while the opposing
    team attempts to take the projectile away or physically stop the team
    having the number of chances from reaching the end line or end zone before
    the given number of chances have been used.

    (1)     Note.  Although representative of a sport that utilizes an aerial
    projectile, the projectile in this and indented subclasses is intended to
    remain in contact with the playing surface.


CLS 273/108.41
TXT Movable surface:

    A simulated football game under subclass 108.4 wherein the projectile is
    advanced across the surface by vibrating, tilting, or otherwise translating
    the orientation of the surface.


CLS 273/108.5
TXT Projector solely supported by participant (e.g., hockey stick, finger, cue
    stick, etc.):

    A simulated game under subclass 108.1 wherein a device for forcing the
    projectile over and in contact with the surface includes an implement
    arranged and intended to be carried and manipulated only by a participant
    in the surface projectile game.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108.21, for a simulated golf game having a projector solely supported by a
    participant.


CLS 273/108.51
TXT Projector translatable and rotatable about vertical axis:

    A simulated game under subclass 108.1 wherein a device for forcing the
    projectile over and in contact with the surface includes a member
    constructed and arranged to be continuously repositioned over the game
    surface, wherein said member is further arranged to be pivoted about an
    axis perpendicular to the surface.


CLS 273/108.52
TXT Projector translatable and rotatable about horizontal axis:

    A simulated game under subclass 108.1 wherein a device for forcing the
    projectile over and in contact with the surface includes a member
    constructed and arranged to be continuously repositioned over the game
    surface, wherein said member is further arranged to be pivoted about an
    axis parallel to the surface.


CLS 273/108.53
TXT Projector rotatable about vertical axis only:

    A simulated game under subclass 108.1 wherein a device for forcing the
    projectile over and in contact with the surface includes a member
    constructed and arranged to be solely pivoted about an axis perpendicular
    to the surface.


CLS 273/108.54
TXT Projector rotatable about horizontal axis only:

    A simulated game under subclass 108.1 wherein a device for forcing the
    projectile over and in contact with the surface includes a member
    constructed and arranged to be solely pivoted about an axis parallel to the
    surface.


CLS 273/108.55
TXT Projector having movable element and fixed with respect to game surface:

    A simulated game under subclass 108.1 wherein a device for forcing the
    projectile over and in contact with the surface includes a member
    restricted from movement across the surface, wherein said member includes
    an element constructed and arranged to be repositionable with respect to
    the remainder of the member.


CLS 273/108.56
TXT Projector translatable only or translatable with movable element:

    A simulated game under subclass 108.1 wherein a device for forcing the
    projectile over and in contact with the surface includes a member that is
    constructed and arranged to be continuously repositioned over the game
    surface, wherein said member may further include an element constructed and
    arranged to be repositionable with respect to the remainder of the member.


CLS 273/108.57
TXT Fluid-pressure projector:

    A simulated game under subclass 108.1 wherein a device for forcing the
    projectile over and in contact with the surface includes apparatus having
    means for ejecting a blast of air or water at the projectile.


CLS 273/109
TXT Games under subclass 108 in which the surface is moving or adapted to be
    moved.


CLS 273/110
TXT Games under subclass 109 in which the movement is about a pivot.


CLS 273/111
TXT Games under subclass 109 in which, on the surface, usually as hazards,
    there are pivoted gatelike members to deflect the movement of the
    projectile from the desired course.


CLS 273/112
TXT Games under subclass 109 in which the surface is arranged in the form of a
    spiral path.


CLS 273/113
TXT Games under subclass 109 in which pockets are provided into which the
    projectile passes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    398+,   for similar pocketed targets for aerial projectiles.


CLS 273/114
TXT Games under subclass 113 in which the projectile is a globule of mercury.


CLS 273/115
TXT Games under subclass 113 in which the pocket is formed in the surface,
    usually merely a depression therein.


CLS 273/116
TXT Games under subclass 115 in which some or all of the pockets are hazards
    which are to be avoided.


CLS 273/117
TXT Games under subclass 113 in which the pocket is also capable of movement
    over the surface.


CLS 273/118
TXT Games under subclass 108 in which the projectile is in the form of a ball,
    usually a marble.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 61.11 for
    electrical switches responsive to the action of a ball of a game or
    amusement device.


CLS 273/119
TXT Games under subclass 118 in which there is combined and attached to the
    surface a mechanical means for projecting the ball.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, appropriate subclass for mechanical
    aerial projectors, per se.

    473,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclass 5 for a billiard or pool table
    or gameboard with a mechanical means for projecting a billiard or pool
    ball; subclass 45 for a mechanically operated means, per se, for projecting
    a billiard or pool ball; and subclass 107 for a mechanical means for
    projecting a bowling ball.


CLS 273/120
TXT Games under subclass 119 in which the projection of the ball is
    accomplished by gravity.


CLS 273/121
TXT Games under subclass 119 in which the ball is projected in one direction
    and means is provided for changing its course to return it in a direction
    substantially parallel to its first projected course.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124,    for pocketed surface projectile ball games with a return course.

    138.3,  for gravity-propelled chance element with a nearly vertical playing
    surface.

    SEARCH CLASS

    473,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclass 106 for a bowling game in which
    the path of movement of the ball is curved or changed by a ball handling or
    diverting means.


CLS 273/122
TXT Games under subclass 119 in which the ball after perfecting a count or
    score is returned to a point easily accessible to the player.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    394+,   for similar ball return devices used with targets for aerial
    projectiles.


CLS 273/123
TXT Games under subclass 118 in which the playing surface is provided with
    pockets.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    398+,   for similar pocketed targets for aerial projectiles.


CLS 273/124
TXT Games under subclass 123 in which the ball is projected in one direction
    and means is provided for changing its course to return it in a direction
    substantially parallel to its first projected course.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121,    for pocketed surface projectile ball games with a return course,
    that are combined with projectors.

    SEARCH CLASS

    473,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclass 106 for a bowling game in which
    the path of movement of the ball is curved or changed by a ball handling or
    diverting means.


CLS 273/125
TXT Games under subclass 123 in which the ball after perfecting a count or
    score is returned to a point easily accesssible to the player.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    394+,   for similar ball return devices used with targets for aerial
    projectiles.


CLS 273/126
TXT Games under subclass 108 in which the projectile has the form of a disk or
    ring which rolls on its edge or slides over the surface.

    (1)     Note.  The projectile need not be circular but must be of flattened
    form.


CLS 273/127
TXT Devices under subclass 108 comprising targets for use in surface projectile
    games.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 4+ for a toy having portions
    which are knocked apart or awry by impact.

    473,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 118+ for a bowling pin, per
    se, which constitutes the target for a bowling game.


CLS 273/129
TXT Devices under subclass 108 comprising projectors for use in surface
    projectile games.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, appropriate subclass for mechanical
    aerial projectors.


CLS 273/138.1
TXT Chance Devices:

    Devices under the class definition which might be of themselves games or
    elements of games in which the element of luck or random happening (i.e.,
    chance) is alone the function of the device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    463,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 1+ for a chance device
    including electronic data processing, especially 10+ for a game requiring
    strategy or problem solving ability; and 16+ for a chance application,
    especially 22+ for a random number generator or equivalent.


CLS 273/138.2
TXT Electric or magnetic:

    A chance device under subclass 138.1 in which the property of magnetism or
    electricity is utilized to effect an element of chance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    463,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 1+ for a chance device
    including electronic data processing, especially subclasses 10+ for a game
    requiring strategy or problem solving ability; and subclasses 16+ for a
    chance application, especially subclasses 22+ for a random number generator
    or equivalent.


CLS 273/138.3
TXT Gravity-propelled chance element randomly traverses or enters alternative
    paths:

    A chance device under subclass 138.1 including structure defining a
    plurality of channels, tunnels, or other possible courses for a chance
    element to pass through or fall into; and a chance element, which when
    allowed to drop from an upper end of the chance device, will haphazardly
    negotiate its way through one of various possible courses toward a lower
    end of the chance device, or drop randomly into and come to rest in one of
    the plurality of channels, tunnels, etc.

    (1)     Note.  A common structure found in this subclass for defining a
    plurality of alternative paths is a vertical surface having a plurality of
    pegs projecting therefrom, which pegs are randomly hit by a chance device
    as it falls through the pegs, the chance element then bouncing randomly
    into or through a path defined by an area between pegs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118+,   for a surface-projectile ball game, especially subclass 121 for one
    with a nearly vertical playing surface for a gravity return course (e.g.,
    Pachinko, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices, Toys, subclasses 168+, for a toy including an
    unattached gravity-propelled element (e.g., marble runway, etc.).


CLS 273/138.4
TXT Plural external receivers (e.g., plural dispensers, etc.):

    A chance device including a gravity-propelled chance element under subclass
    138.3 wherein the chance device structure includes more than one container
    to randomly receive and halt the motion of a falling chance element, and
    further wherein each container is open, or arranged to be opened by a
    participant via a door or other removable closure means, for removable
    access of a chance element resting therein.

    (1)     Note.  The containers of this subclass and the plurality of
    channels, tunnels, etc. of the previous subclass (into which the chance
    element may randomly drop into and come to rest) may be one and the same
    structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, for an article dispenser not otherwise provided
    for.  An article dispenser, per se, of the type often included as a
    subcombination of a chance device is classified in Class 221.


CLS 273/138.5
TXT Liquid-filled path:

    A chance device including a gravity-propelled chance element under subclass
    138.3 further including a nongaseous fluid contained within at least one of
    the possible courses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138.1,  for a liquid-filled path for a chance device that will rise through
    the liquid via its buoyancy; and

    457+,   for apparatus under the class definition including structure for
    surrounding a quantity of liquid or gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices: Toys, subclass 166, for a toy operated by
    gravity-fed fluent material, and subclass 267 for a toy that includes an
    enclosed liquid.


CLS 273/139
TXT Chance devices under subclass 138.1 having separately hidden or concealed
    data of various count value and means whereby a chance selection can be
    made.


CLS 273/140
TXT Chance devices under subclass 139 in which the chance selection is made by
    hooking a member from among others each of which has a different value.


CLS 273/141
TXT Chance devices under subclass 138.1 in which a rotated pointer can upon
    coming to a still position indicate counts of varying values upon a member
    supporting the pointer.


CLS 273/142
TXT Chance devices under subclass 138.1 in which a rotated disk or disks can
    upon coming to a still position indicate counts of varying values by means
    of the position of a part of the disk or disks relative to a definite point.


CLS 273/143
TXT Chance devices under subclass 142 in which the counts are placed on the
    edge of the disk or disks.


CLS 273/144
TXT Devices under subclass 138.1 for mixing and dispensing lots.


CLS 273/145
TXT Devices under subclass 144 for mixing and dispensing dice.


CLS 273/146
TXT Devices under subclass 138.1 comprising dice, per se.


CLS 273/147
TXT Devices under subclass 138.1 comprising tops, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, appropriate subclasses for toy devices
    which move through the air.


CLS 273/148
TXT Devices under the class definition used as accessory means for playing
    games.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 27.5 for poker chips
    and the like.

    463,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclass 47 for an accessory for a game,
    etc., under the class definition that includes electronic data processing,
    and subclass 49 for an accessory for a simulated-projectile game.


CLS 273/149
TXT Devices under subclass 148 for shuffling and dealing cards.


CLS 273/150
TXT Devices under subclass 148 for holding hands of cards or similar game
    playing elements.


CLS 273/151
TXT Devices under subclass 150 in which the hands are intended for subsequent
    replaying as in duplicate games.


CLS 273/153
TXT Devices under the class definition known as puzzles.


CLS 273/154
TXT Puzzles under subclass 153 in the shape of ovoids that can by manipulation
    be so balanced that they will stand on end.


CLS 273/155
TXT Puzzles under subclass 153 in which the solution is obtained by folding or
    relatively-moving strips or disks.


CLS 273/156
TXT Puzzles under subclass 153 in which the solution is obtained by taking
    apart or putting together two or more interrelated or interconnected parts.


CLS 273/157
TXT Puzzles under subclass 156 in which the parts when put together form
    geometrical figures, pictures, or maps.


CLS 273/158
TXT Puzzles under subclass 156 in which the parts are formed of bent wire.


CLS 273/159
TXT Puzzles under subclass 156 in which at least one of the parts is a flexible
    cord or strip.


CLS 273/160
TXT Puzzles under subclass 156 in which the parts of an interconnected whole
    are formed of interfitting mortised sections in the form of blocks.


CLS 273/161
TXT Devices under the class definition for telling fortunes.


CLS 273/236
TXT BOARD GAMES, PIECES, OR BOARDS THEREFOR:

    Games or game structure under the class definition wherein a competitive
    and amusing contest of skill or chance is engaged in by two or more
    participants using one or more surfaces having a pattern or confining
    region with which at least one contest element or the equivalent thereof is
    intended to cooperate, and where the results of the contest can be
    indicated according to definite rules (e.g., scoring).

    (1)     Note.  Contest elements or boards which are disclosed as being used
    in a board game, but are claimed per se are classified in this subclass and
    the indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  A game in which a participant competes against a device
    which electronically duplicates a board game, or a board game that includes
    electronic data processing, is outside of this class.  See Search Notes,
    below.

    (3)     Note.  Contest surfaces having patterns or confining regions with
    which the participants' bodies or portions thereof constitute the sole
    contest elements are not considered proper for this subclass and are found
    in subclass 444.

    (4)     Note.  Games which only measure one or more of a participant's
    senses, or the physical speed or dexterity with which a participant can
    accomplish a certain task relative to another participant or to a fixed
    standard, and do not involve any strategic or change controlled placement
    of contest elements onto a surface having a pattern or confining region are
    not considered proper for this subclass and are found in subclasses 440+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    434,    Education and Demonstration, appropriate subclasses for educational
    apparatus having a board and one or more pieces intercooperating with each
    other for an educational purpose, but not used in a board game as defined
    in this subclass (236).

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, subclass 414 for a projectile game
    commonly known as hopscotch, which game utilizes a playing area defined by
    lines forming a diagram having several compartments, and wherein a player
    first tosses a game projectile into one of the compartments and then moves
    from one compartment to another in a prescribed manner.


CLS 273/237
TXT Electrical:

    Game structure under subclass 236 in which (1) the surface having a pattern
    or confining region, (2) the contest element or the equivalent thereof, or
    (3) any structure connected to the surface or contest element is electrical
    in nature or contains an electrical component.


CLS 273/238
TXT Removable and discrete game piece changes status of circuit:

    Game structure under subclass 237 in which at least one removable and
    discrete contest element is adapted to cause an electrical change in status
    of an electrical circuit (e.g., complete or break an electrical circuit)
    upon placement onto or removal from the surface having the pattern or
    confining region.


CLS 273/239
TXT Magnetic:

    Game structure under subclass 236 in which the surface having a pattern or
    confining region, or the contest element or the equivalent thereof is
    magnetic in nature or contains a magnetic component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237+,   for electrical magnets used in a board game.


CLS 273/240
TXT Markable or erasable game board or piece (e.g., magic slate):

    Game structure under subclass 236 in which either the surface having a
    pattern or confining region, or at least one of the contest elements are
    adapted and intended to have indicia permanently or erasably marked thereon
    by the participants using such means as a pen, pencil, crayon, chalk,
    grease pencil, ink stamp, stylus, etc.


CLS 273/241
TXT Having three-dimensional pattern:

    Games under subclass 236 in which (1) the surface is formed from a
    plurality of discrete members which are located in different planes (e.g.,
    tiered, stepped), at least two of the members contain a portion of the
    entire pattern thereon and these members are divided into plural spaces;
    (2) the pattern or confining region covers a major portion of the periphery
    of a structure having three dimensions (e.g., cubes, spheres, cylinders);
    or (3) the surface has a pattern divided into plural contest element
    receiving spaces, at least some of the spaces having additional means for
    supporting or constraining distinct contest elements in perpendicular
    alignment relative to the spaces.


CLS 273/242
TXT Piece moves over board having pattern:

    Games under subclass 236 in which the surface has a pattern divided into
    plural spaces, and at least one contest element moves over the pattern in
    in accordance with rules which relate the amount of movement over the
    pattern to the spaces.


CLS 273/243
TXT Chance device controls amount or direction of movement of piece:

    Games under subclass 242 wherein either the amount or direction of the
    movement of the contest element over the pattern is controlled by a chance
    device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    430+,   for apparatus wherein a problem is presented to a participant in
    the form of a question.


CLS 273/244
TXT Sports or outdoor recreational activities:

    Games under subclass 243 in which some or all of the actions or features of
    a known sport, athletic contest, or outdoor recreational activity (e.g.,
    football, hunting, fishing, camping) are represented.


CLS 273/244.1
TXT Baseball:

    A game under subclass 244 wherein the sport represented is a game commonly
    referred to as baseball, wherein a participant swings an elongated,
    generally cylindrical striking implement (i.e., bat) in an attempt to
    strike an aerial projectile thrown into a defined area above a playing
    surface by a participant on an opposing team.


CLS 273/244.2
TXT Having cards or tiles:

    A simulated baseball game under subclass 244.1 wherein the chance device
    includes a plurality of indicia bearing elements intended and arranged for
    random selection.


CLS 273/245
TXT Golf:

    Games under subclass 244 in which the sport represented is golf.


CLS 273/246
TXT Racing:

    Games under subclass 244 in which the sport, athletic contest, or outdoor
    recreational activity represented is a race (e.g., horse, auto, boat).


CLS 273/247
TXT Football or soccer:

    Games under subclass 244 in which the sport represented is either football
    or soccer.


CLS 273/248
TXT Race to a finish (e.g., backgammon):

    Games under subclass 243 wherein each participant is provided with a set of
    one or more contest elements, at least a portion of the set is intended to
    be moved between a starting location and a finish location on the pattern,
    each set is initially equal in number to all other sets in the contest, and
    the contest ends when one of the participants moves a specified number of
    his elements to their finish location.


CLS 273/249
TXT With common finish (e.g., parchisi):

    Games under subclass 248 in which all of the sets of contest elements share
    a common finish location of the pattern.


CLS 273/250
TXT Outer space or astronomy:

    Games under subclass 249 in which the pattern or the contest elements have
    included thereon indicia representative of some or all aspects of outer
    space or astronomy.


CLS 273/251
TXT Travel or exploration:

    Games under subclass 249 wherein either (1) at least one portion of a
    journey or voyage is represented, (2) one or more steps in the
    investigation of an unknown region or culture is represented, or (3) a
    search for an object or resource is represented.


CLS 273/252
TXT Travel or exploration:

    Games under subclass 248 wherein either (1) at least one portion of a
    journey or voyage is represented, (2) one or more steps in the
    investigation of an unknown region or culture is represented, or (3) a
    search for an object or resource is represented.


CLS 273/253
TXT Outer space or astronomy:

    Games under subclass 243 in which the pattern or the contest elements have
    included thereon indicia representative of some or all aspects of outer
    space or astronomy.


CLS 273/254
TXT Travel or exploration (e.g., touring, treasure hunt, archeology):

    Games under subclass 243 wherein either (1) at least one portion of a
    journey or voyage is represented, (2) one or more steps in the
    investigation of an unknown region or culture is represented, or (3) a
    search for an object or resource is represented.


CLS 273/255
TXT Military or naval engagement:

    Games under subclass 243 in which some or all of the actions or features of
    a military or naval campaign, engagement, or battle are represented.


CLS 273/256
TXT Property or commodity transactions:

    Games under subclass 243 wherein some of the transactions which commonly
    occur in a real properties or commodities exchange are represented.


CLS 273/257
TXT Judicial, legislative, or election process:

    Games under subclass 243 wherein at least one step in a judicial,
    legislative, or election proceeding or process is represented (e.g., party
    nomination, floor vote).


CLS 273/258
TXT Strategic race to a finish (e.g., Chinese checkers):

    Games under subclass 242 wherein each participant controls the movement of
    a set of one or more contest elements, at least a portion of the set is
    intended to be moved from a starting location to a finish location on the
    pattern, each set is equal in number and equivalent in power to all other
    sets in the contest, and the contest ends when one of the participants
    moves a specified number of his elements to their finish location.


CLS 273/259
TXT Sports or outdoor recreational activities:

    Games under subclass 242 in which some or all of the actions or features of
    a known sport, athletic contest, or outdoor recreational activity (e.g.,
    football, hunting) are represented.


CLS 273/260
TXT Chess or checker type:

    Games under subclass 242 wherein each participant controls the movement of
    a group of several contest elements initially equal in number and
    equivalent in power to all other groups in the contest, the contest
    normally ends when one of the participants captures all the elements or the
    principal element of the other one or more participants without losing all
    or the principal element of his group.


CLS 273/261
TXT Nonrectangular or extended pattern:

    Games under subclass 260 in which the pattern has a nonrectangular
    peripheral configuration, or the pattern consists of a central portion
    which is at least partially surrounded by a plurality of peripherally
    extended, wing-like portions.


CLS 273/262
TXT Military or naval engagement:

    Games under subclass 242 in which some or all of the actions or features of
    a military or naval campaign, engagement, or battle are represented.


CLS 273/263
TXT Chase type (e.g., fox and geese):

    Games under subclass 242 in which each participant controls the movement of
    a set of contest elements, at least one set of which has a lesser number of
    elements than all other sets in the contest, or it has a greater power
    (i.e., the elements have a greater freedom of movement) than all other sets
    in the contest, and the participant or participants who control the set or
    sets of contest elements having the greater number or lesser power endeavor
    to capture or immobilize (i.e., trap) the elements of the set having the
    lesser number or greater power.


CLS 273/264
TXT Alignment games (e.g., morris, mill):

    Games under subclass 242 in which each participant endeavors to place a
    specified number of his contest elements into consecutively adjacent spaces
    of the pattern to thereby form a specified arrangement or arrangements.


CLS 273/265
TXT Salvo type:

    Games under subclass 236 in which the participants assume the alternate
    roles of attacker and defender or code maker and code breaker, the defender
    or code maker positions a plurality of distinguishable contest elements or
    the equivalents thereof into various selectable and defined locations on a
    portion of the pattern which is visually hidden from the view of the
    attacher or code breaker, the attacker or code breaker then attempts, by a
    series of arbitrary or calculated guesses, to determine the precise
    locations (and, often, the type) of the defender's or code maker's
    prepositioned contest elements.


CLS 273/266
TXT Nim type (i.e., game of take away):

    Game under subclass 236 in which a plurality of contest elements common to
    all participants are located on the pattern or confining region, and each
    participant alternately in turn removes or equivalently removes from the
    pattern or confining region (e.g., by shifting into out-of-play positions)
    one or more of the elements, the contest ends when one of the participants
    removes or equivalently removes the last remaining contest element from the
    pattern or confining region.


CLS 273/267
TXT Completing square type:

    Games under subclass 236 in which the pattern comprises a plurality of like
    geometrical areas and each participant alternately places in turn contest
    elements on the boundaries of the geometrical areas, the objective is for
    each participant to complete and thereby own geometrical areas by being the
    participant who places the last contest element which encloses or completes
    the outline of a geometrical area, the contest ends when all of the
    geometrical areas of the pattern have been enclosed or when specified
    geometrical area has been enclosed.


CLS 273/268
TXT Dice board and number plate type:

    Games under subclass 236 in which the pattern includes a plurality of
    distinguishable indicia which are randomly selectable by means of a chance
    device and contest elements for covering or equivalently covering the
    chance selected indicia, each participant during this turn starts with a
    totally uncovered pattern and continues to operate the chance device and to
    cover the indicia indicated thereby until he is unable to cover any of the
    still exposed indicia thereby ending his turn.


CLS 273/269
TXT Lotto or bingo type:

    Games under subclass 236 in which each participant is provided with at
    least one pattern distinct from all other patterns used in the contest,
    each pattern is formed from a plurality of distinguishable and randomly
    selectable indicia, and each participant places contest elements or their
    equivalent onto randomly selected indicia located on his patterns, the
    contest ends when the elements of one of the participants forms a specified
    arrangement on his pattern.


CLS 273/270
TXT With attached pieces:

    Games under subclass 269 wherein the contest elements are permanently
    connected to the pattern but are selectively movable relative to the
    pattern.


CLS 273/271
TXT Alignment games (e.g., tic-tac-toe, go-moko):

    Games under subclass 236 including at least one pattern formed from a
    plurality of discrete areas and each participant places contest elements or
    their equivalent into unoccupied areas, the contest ends when one of the
    participants has placed a specified number of his contest elements into
    consecutively adjacent areas of his pattern to thereby form a specified
    arrangement or arrangements.


CLS 273/272
TXT Word, sentence, or equation forming (e.g., SCRABBLE, hangman):

    Games under subclass 236 wherein the contest elements are used to form
    words, sentences, or equations.


CLS 273/273
TXT Memory or matching games (e.g., concentration):

    Games under subclass 236 in which (1) the locations of a plurality of
    contest elements randomly positioned on the pattern are concealable from
    and selectively revealable to the view of all of the participants and
    during the contest the participants endeavor to find the locations on the
    pattern of concealed contest elements, or (2) a plurality of contest
    elements or various discrete areas of the pattern have distinguishable
    configurations or indicia thereon, at least some of the configurations or
    indicia are alike or have a specified correspondence, the participants
    during the contest endeavor to match like or corresponding configurations
    or indicia between various contest elements, between discrete areas of the
    pattern, or between contest elements and discrete areas of the pattern.


CLS 273/274
TXT Betting or wagering board (e.g., casino):

    Games under subclass 236 in which the one or more surfaces having a pattern
    include thereon indicia representative of various possible chance outcomes
    or results which are randomly selectable throughout the contest by a chance
    device, each participant indicates a selected number of chance result
    indicia (i.e., his selected bets or wagers) and the number of contest
    elements he wishes to risk (i.e., the amount of his bets or wagers).


CLS 273/275
TXT Path forming:

    Games under subclass 236 in which a plurality of contest elements are
    intended to form at least some portions of a continuous uninterrupted line
    or lines when placed on the pattern or confining region, the line or lines
    are to be formed either from (1) at least one specified area of the pattern
    or confining region to another specified area, or (2) into at least one
    closed endless track or path by the sequential placement of contest
    elements on the pattern or confining region alternately by the participants.


CLS 273/276
TXT Construction or assembly games:

    Games under subclass 236 wherein the contest elements are selected randomly
    and are used either to construct a specified object on the pattern or
    confining region or to cooperate with the pattern or confining region to
    form a specified object, the contest ends when the specified object is
    completed.


CLS 273/277
TXT Sports or outdoor recreational activities:

    Games under subclass 236 in which some or all the actions or features of a
    sport, athletic contest, or outdoor recreational activity (e.g., golf,
    bowling, hunting) are represented.


CLS 273/278
TXT Property or commodity transaction (e.g., stock market):

    Games under subclass 236 wherein some of the transactions which commonly
    occur in a real properties or commodities exchange are represented.


CLS 273/279
TXT Judicial, legislative, or election process:

    Games under subclass 236 wherein at least one step in a judicial,
    legislative, or election proceeding or process is represented (e.g., party
    nomination, floor vote).


CLS 273/280
TXT Rotatably mounted board:

    Game structure under subclass 236 wherein the surface having a pattern or
    confining region is located on a supporting member, and the surface pivots
    or rotates relative to the supporting member or the supporting member
    itself contains structure so as to facilitate pivoting or rotation of the
    surface.


CLS 273/281
TXT Game board having movably attached piece:

    Game structure under subclass 236 in which the contest element is
    permanently connected to the surface having a pattern but is selectively
    movable relative to the surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270,    for lotto or bingo type games which use boards having movably
    attached game pieces.


CLS 273/282.1
TXT Removably interfitting or detachably adhesive board and piece:Game
    structure under subclass 236 in which the contest element and the pattern
    or confining region of the surface have coacting means thereon or therein
    for releasably interlocking or attaching the contest element to the pattern
    or confining region.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239,    for magnetic attachment between the contest element and the pattern.


CLS 273/282.2
TXT Detachably adhesive:
    Game structure under subclass 282.1 wherein the coacting means causes the
    contest element to releasably adhere to the pattern or confining region.

    (1)     Note.  Means to cause substantially an attachment at a surface
    interface between the contest element and pattern, such as a hook and loop
    fastener, e.g., VELCROR, sticky material, etc. are classified here.


CLS 273/282.3
TXT Board projection engagable with piece:
    Game structure under subclass 282.1 wherein the coacting means comprises an
    outwardly extending protrusion from the pattern or confining region for
    releasably interlocking with the contest element.


CLS 273/283
TXT Game board having pattern separable into sections:

    Game structure under subclass 236 in which separate, discrete pattern
    sections are intended to be releasably interconnected or fitted together to
    form the pattern or confining region of the surface.


CLS 273/284
TXT Game board having interchangeable, variable, or plural distinct playing
    patterns:

    Game structure under subclass 236 wherein one or more surfaces are provided
    with a plurality of different patterns in order to play a plurality of
    different games or a pattern which may be altered before or during the
    course of the game.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are, for example, (1) plurality of
    surfaces or surface sections, each having a different pattern thereon; (2)
    a single surface having a plurality of different patterns thereon; or (3) a
    single surface in which the pattern or the size thereof may be altered.


CLS 273/285
TXT Collapsible board (e.g., folding):

    Game structure under subclass 236 wherein the surface having a pattern
    rolls up, folds, or otherwise collapses.


CLS 273/286
TXT Flexible sheet type:

    Game structure under subclass 285 wherein the surface having a pattern is
    made from either flexible sheet material, or small, discrete, rigid
    sections permanently interconnected together by flexible material.


CLS 273/287
TXT Game board structure:

    Game structure under subclass 236 comprising the configuration or physical
    structure of (1) the surface having a pattern of confining region, or (2) a
    member on which the surface is located.

    (1)     Note.  Mere decorative or information transmitting indicia,
    including the surface's pattern or confining region, is not considered
    adequate structure for placement into this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass may include structure other than the surface
    having a pattern.


CLS 273/288
TXT Game piece:

    Game structure under subclass 236 consisting of the contest element which
    is intended to cooperate with the surface having a pattern or confining
    region.


CLS 273/289
TXT With movably attached part:

    Contest element under subclass 288 having two or more relatively movable,
    interconnected portions.


CLS 273/290
TXT Stackable or nestable feature:

    Contest element under subclass 288 having a protuberance or geometric shape
    which allows the stacking or nesting of elements during the course of the
    game or after for storing and transporting of the elements.


CLS 273/291
TXT Weighted or reversible (e.g., for different game):

    Contest element under subclass 288 wherein either (1) the lower portion of
    the element has a density different from that of the upper portion, or (2)
    the element has distinguishable characteristics on opposite sides, which
    characteristics are used to indicate a change in status of the element
    during the contest.


CLS 273/292
TXT CARD OR TILE GAMES, CARDS OR TILES THEREFOR:

    Games or game structure under the class definition in which contest
    elements having playing indicia located thereon (e.g., cards, dominoes) are
    intended to interact with each other in a competitive and amusing contest
    of skill or chance between two or more participants, and the results of the
    contest can be indicated according to definite rules.

    (1)     Note.  Contest elements which are disclosed as being used in a card
    or tile game, but are claimed, per se, are classified in this subclass and
    the indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  The contest elements are not considered to interact in a
    contest if they are intended to serve only a supplementary contest function
    (e.g., scoring, accessory means).

    (3)     Note.  Games which only measure the physical speed or dexterity
    with which a participant can accomplish a certain task relative to another
    participant or to be fixed standard, and do not involve any strategic or
    chance controlled interaction between contest elements are not considered
    proper for this subclass and are found in subclasses 440+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    288+,   for game pieces which are intended to be used in a board game.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    434,    Education and Demonstration, appropriate subclasses, e.g., subclass
    347 for cards or tiles provided with indicia used for educational purposes,
    but not used in a card or tile game as defined in this subclass (292).


CLS 273/293
TXT Card or tile structure:

    Game structure under subclass 292 wherein at least one contest element
    either (1) is constructed from a particular material, (2) has an external
    boundary other than the common retangular, (3) has indicia located thereon
    other than mere printed indicia, (4) is formed in a specified manner, (5)
    has one or more appendages thereon, or (6) has one or more apertures
    extending through the contest element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses for
    coating and plastic compositions, per se, used in making cards with or
    without some general indicia.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for single or plural layer webs or sheets suitable for playing cards, and
    which may be of some configuration other than rectangular (e.g., circular,
    subclasses 64.1+) or of some physical dimension (e.g., subclasses 220 and
    332+) with or without some general indicia.


CLS 273/294
TXT Playing surface having nonrectangular perimeter:

    Game structure under subclass 293 wherein at least part of the playing
    indicia of one of the contest elements is located on a surface which has an
    outer boundary or circumference of other than common rectangular
    configuration.


CLS 273/295
TXT Material:

    Game structure under subclass 293 in which the contest element is
    constructed from a particular material.


CLS 273/296
TXT With functional back indicia:

    Contest elements under subclass 292 in which at least one of the elements
    used in the contest has indicia, which serves a function other than mere
    ornamentation, located on a surface opposite to the one on which playing
    indicia appears.


CLS 273/297
TXT Property or commodity transaction representation:

    Games under subclass 292 in which the playing indicia on individual contest
    elements is intended to represent an object or step that is normally
    present in a real properties or commodities exchange (e.g., stock market,
    real estate).

    (1)     Note.  The elements as used must be in the same manner as in the
    form of human endeavor which is represented.


CLS 273/298
TXT Sports or outdoor recreational activities:

    Contest elements under subclass 292 in which the playing indicia on at
    least one element is intended to represent an object, contestant, or action
    that is normally present in a sport, athletic contest, or outdoor
    recreational activity (e.g., baseball, hunting, golf).


CLS 273/299
TXT Word, sentence, or equation forming:

    Games under subclass 292 wherein the playing indicia located on the contest
    elements consist of symbols, letters, portions of words, or words by means
    of which two or more of the elements are used to make equations, works, or
    sentences.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    434,    Education and Demonstration, appropriate subclasses, e.g.,
    subclasses 208, 347 and 403 for blocks and cards provided with educational
    indicia in the form of numbers, letters, and words.


CLS 273/300
TXT With quotation thereon:

    Contest elements under subclass 292 in which the playing indicia on at
    least one element includes a passage quoted or extracted from a book,
    speech, or document.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    434,    Education and Demonstration, particularly subclasses 172+ and 403
    for cards or tiles provided with indicia used for educational purposes, but
    not used in a card or tile game as defined in subclass 292.


CLS 273/301
TXT With musical indicia:

    Contest elements under subclass 292 in which the playing indicia on at
    least one element includes some of the printed or written matter commonly
    found in the printed or written score of a musical composition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, subclass 476 for blocks or cards having musical characters
    thereon, but not used in a card or tile game as defined in subclass 292.


CLS 273/302
TXT With educational data:

    Contest elements under subclass 292 in which the playing indicia on one or
    more of the elements includes educational facts (e.g., statistical,
    historical, political, geographical).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    434,    Education and Demonstration, particularly subclasses 172+ and 403
    for cards or tiles provided with indicia used for educational purposes, but
    not used in a card or tile game as defined in subclass 292.


CLS 273/303
TXT Suits:

    Contest elements under subclass 292 in which at least some of the elements
    are grouped into two or more sets by their playing indicia and have an
    equal number of elements in each set, every set having suit designation
    indicia, other than numerical, common to all the elements of that set and
    distinct value designation indicia for each element of the set, all of the
    element value designations indicia of one set being repeated in all other
    sets.


CLS 273/304
TXT With supplementary indicia:

    Contest elements under subclass 303 wherein the playing indicia on at least
    some of the elements of the sets includes indicia in addition to the suit
    or value designation indicia.

    (1)     Note.  Mere multiple equivalent suit or value designations which do
    not vary the suit arrangement or element values of the two or more sets are
    not considered to be supplementary indicia.


CLS 273/305
TXT Indexing:

    Contest elements under subclass 303 wherein the playing indicia on the
    elements of the sets includes secondary suit or value designation indicia
    by which the suit and value of an element can be readily distinguished
    without exposing all or a relatively large portion of the playing indicia,
    or by which the elements can be readily sorted.


CLS 273/306
TXT With auxiliary or accessory card or tile:

    Contest elements under subclass 303 in which an element not belonging to
    any particular set is used in the contest.


CLS 273/307
TXT Rearranged basic indicia:

    Contest elements under subclass 292 in which the elements are divided into
    one or more sets of at least three elements each, portions of the playing
    indicia on all the elements of a set being the same but having different
    areas of this indicia accentuated or rearranged on the individual elements
    of the set.


CLS 273/308
TXT With representations of persons or objects and names associated therewith:

    Contest elements under subclass 292 in which the playing indicia of at
    least some of the elements includes the representation of a person or
    object and a name normally associated therewith.


CLS 273/309
TXT Game supporting tables or surfaces:

    Devices under subclass 148 comprising a table or a supporting surface
    having structure which facilitates the playing of a game thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    287,    for game tables or boards having patterns with which game pieces
    cooperate in the playing of a game.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, especially subclass 25 for
    horizontal surfaces on which a game may be played, but not having structure
    for facilitating the playing of the game.


CLS 273/317
TXT AERIAL PROJECTILE GAME; GAME ELEMENT (E.G., TARGET, ETC.) OR ACCESSORY
    THEREFOR OTHER THAN PROJECTOR OR PROJECTILE, PER SE:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to a game in which a
    projectile or missile is thrown, projected, impelled, or otherwise launched
    into or through the air during play thereof and wherein one or more players
    attempt to achieve a defined game objective using such projectile or
    missile, the achievement of which requires some degree of skill on the part
    of the player(s), which game comprises (a) a defined structure constituting
    a point of aim for, and which is intended to indicate the correctness of
    aim of, a game projectile or missile when it is thrown, projected,
    impelled, or otherwise launched into or through the air thereat by a
    player, (b) any other game component (other than a projectile or missile,
    per se, or an implement or device, per se, for projecting such a projectile
    or missile) which may be used to play the type of game included herein, or
    (c) an ancillary device or means which is adapted and intended to be used
    with or for a game component included herein unless it is provided for
    elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass (along with its indents) follows in hierarchy
    after the last occurring subclass in the Class 473 schedule (i.e., after
    subclass 473/615).  See the Search Note to Class 273 in the Class
    Definition of Class 473 for further elaboration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108+,   for a surface projectile game (including a target or other game
    component therefor other than a projectile, per se) in which a projectile
    is intended to travel upon a surface at all times during play of the game.

    138.1+, for an object (e.g., a marble used with a roulette wheel, a die, or
    a top, etc.) acting either, per se, as, or as part of, a chance device in
    which the element of chance is alone the function of the device or which
    might be of itself a game or a component of a game.

    362+,   for a target which also acts as an aerial projectile (e.g., a clay
    pigeon which is intended to be launched from a target trap, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 501+ for projectiles
    explosively fired through a gun barrel and projectiles for cleaning gun
    barrels.

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, for a centrifugally or mechanically
    operated projector, per se, which project projectiles into the air.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, for a toy device which moves through the
    air, particularly subclasses 30+ for a toy tethered fixed-wing aircraft,
    and subclasses 34+ for a toy which is aerodynamically supported or retarded
    (e.g., a flying saucer located in subclasses 46+, etc.).

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, for a game which uses a tangible
    game projectile, in general, appropriate subclasses for such a game
    projectile, per se, subclasses 505+ for a player-held implement (e.g., a
    lacrosse stick, etc.) for both projecting a game projectile into the air
    and catching a game projectile moving through the air, subclasses 516+ for
    a player-held implement, in general (e.g., a tennis racket, baseball bat,
    etc.) which is used to project a game projectile into the air by striking
    the same.  Note especially that subclass 317 follows in hierarchy after the
    last occurring subclass in the Class 473 schedule (i.e., after subclass
    473/615).  See the Search Note to Class 273 in the Class Definition of
    Class 473 for further elaboration.

    482,    Exercise Devices, particularly subclasses 20+ for a projectile,
    e.g.,  a javelin, shot, discus, etc., which is used in a track or field
    sport.


CLS 273/317.1
TXT Simulated game:

    An aerial projectile game under subclass 317 wherein any combination of the
    projector, projectile, game surface, or other game element is adapted and
    intended to mimic some or all of the features, action, rules, environment,
    or scoring of a game of physical sport or other athletic event.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108+,   for a surface projectile game that simulates a physical sport or
    athletic event.


CLS 273/317.2
TXT Golf:

    An aerial projectile game under subclass 317.1 wherein the game mimicked is
    a game commonly known as golf, wherein a participant attempts to aerially
    project a projectile into an open hole in a surface or otherwise aerially
    project the projectile toward a specified location on a generally
    horizontal surface in an attempt to have it stop at said specified
    location.


CLS 273/317.3
TXT Basketball:

    An aerial projectile game under subclass 317.1 wherein the game mimicked is
    a game commonly known as basketball, wherein a participant attempts to
    aerially project a projectile into the top of an open container or tube
    (e.g., basket, cylindrical net, etc.) suspended above a surface (e.g.,
    court, etc.).


CLS 273/317.4
TXT Tennis:

    An aerial projectile game under subclass 317.1 wherein the game mimicked is
    a game commonly known as tennis, wherein a plurality of participants,
    arranged on both sides of a horizontally extending barrier that bisects a
    defined surface, alternately attempt to aerially project a projectile over
    the barrier and onto the defined surface.


CLS 273/317.5
TXT Football:

    An aerial projectile game under subclass 317.1 wherein the game mimicked is
    a game commonly known as football, where opposing teams of participants
    alternately have a given number of chances to carry a projectile across a
    line at an end of a defined play surface, to catch a thrown projectile in
    the air in a defined area past the end of the elongated play surface, i.e.,
    end zone, or kick the projectile over a horizontal bar and between a pair
    of vertically extending bars located in the end zone, while the opposing
    team attempts to take the projectile away or physically stop the team
    having the number of chances from reaching the end line or end zone before
    the given number of chances have been used.


CLS 273/317.6
TXT Baseball:

    An aerial projectile game under subclass 317.1 wherein the game mimicked is
    a game commonly known as baseball, wherein a participant swings an
    elongated, generally cylindrical striking implement (i.e., bat) in an
    attempt to strike an aerial projectile (i.e., baseball) thrown into a
    defined area above a playing surface by a participant on an opposing team.


CLS 273/317.7
TXT Mechanically pitched ball or projectile:

    A simulated baseball game under subclass 317.6 including a device intended
    to simulate a pitcher, which is constructed and arranged to actively force
    the projectile, representing a baseball or baseball equivalent, toward a
    defined area representative of a batter's box, which may further include a
    device intended to simulate a batter constructed and arranged near the
    defined area to actively strike the projectile as it travels into the
    defined area, wherein the projectile is caused to be airborne by one of the
    devices.


CLS 273/317.8
TXT Tethered ball or projectile:

    A simulated baseball game under subclass 317.7 wherein the aerial
    projectile is connected to a device constructed and arranged to limit
    travel of the projectile to a confined area.


CLS 273/317.9
TXT Mechanically batted ball or projectile:

    A simulated baseball game under subclass 317.6 including a device intended
    to simulate a batter which is constructed and arranged to actively strike a
    projectile to cause it to become airborne.


CLS 273/329
TXT Projectile tethered to hand-held, apertured manipulator:

    Apparatus under subclass 317 comprising a hand-held device and a projectile
    which is secured by a tether to the hand-held device and wherein the
    hand-held device includes a body member having an opening or aperture
    formed therein, and the relative dimensions of the opening or aperture and
    the projectile are such that the projectile is capable of passing entirely
    through the opening or aperture upon manipulation of the hand-held device.


CLS 273/330
TXT Projectile flexibly tethered to hand-held manipulator:

    Apparatus under subclass 317 comprising a hand-held device and a projectile
    which is secured by a flexible tether to the hand-held device and wherein
    the hand-held device includes a body member having a surface which is
    adapted to either (a) strike or bat the projectile, upon manipulation of
    the hand-held device, so as to project the projectile, or (b) be struck by
    the projectile, upon manipulation of the hand-held device, so as to project
    the projectile by rebounding it off the surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclass 30 for tethered toy aircraft,
    and subclass 247 for other tethered toys.

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, subclasses 575+ for a projectile
    having an attached tether or having means for attaching a tether thereto,
    particularly subclass 576 thereunder for a projectile having an attached
    tether which, in turn, has means adapted to be held by, carried by, or
    attached to a person, and see the Search Notes under subclass 575 for other
    locations for a tethered projectile.


CLS 273/331
TXT Target and tethered projectile:

    Apparatus under subclass 317 including a target device which is
    particularly adapted for use as a mark or point of aim for a projectile and
    wherein the projectile is secured by a tether means either (a) to the
    target device itself, or (b) to a structure which is located or locatable
    in such a manner that the target device remains within the extent of the
    tether.

    SEARCH CLASS

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, for a tethered projectile or for a
    tethered practice projectile.


CLS 273/332
TXT Tethered ring:

    Apparatus under subclass 331 wherein the projectile has the general
    configuration of an annulus.


CLS 273/333
TXT Having indicator or indication by movement of target:

    Apparatus under subclass 331 wherein either (a) the target device includes
    means, actuatable or operable by the projectile, for providing or producing
    an indication that a projectile has correctly reach the target device or
    reached the point of aim portion thereof, or (b) the target device or the
    point of aim portion thereof is moved whenever a projectile impinges or
    impacts thereupon, and wherein the movement of the target device or the
    point of aim portion thereof provides or produces a visible indication that
    the projectile has correctly reached the target device or the point of aim
    portion thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    371+,   for target devices having electrically actuated or operated
    indicators.

    378+,   for similar target devices not associated with a tethered
    projectile.


CLS 273/334
TXT Elastic tether:

    Apparatus under subclass 333 wherein the tether means is comprised of
    flexible, elastic means.


CLS 273/335
TXT Elastic tether:

    Apparatus under subclass 331 wherein the tether means is comprised of
    flexible, elastic means.


CLS 273/336
TXT Peg and ring game or pegged target therefor:

    Game or apparatus therefor under subclass 317 comprising either (a) a
    target device having the configuration of a generally postlike
    protuberance, or includes such a protuberance, and a projectile having
    means to enable it to at least partially encircle the target protuberance,
    or (b) a target device having the configuration of a generally postlike
    protuberance adapted to be used with a encircling-type projectile.

    (1)     Note.  A projectile having means to enable it to at least partially
    encircle a target protuberance includes such projectiles as quoits,
    horseshoes, rings, or other forms of ring equivalents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331+,   for target devices associated with tethered projectiles, and
    particularly subclass 332, for target devices associated with ring-type
    projectiles.

    343,    for projectiles having a configuration enabling them to encircle or
    partially encircle a portion of a target device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, subclasses 589 and 591 for a
    projectile having a configuration enabling it to encircle or partially
    encircle a portion of a target device.


CLS 273/337
TXT With mechanical projector:

    Game or apparatus therefor under subclass 336 including a mechanical means
    for throwing or impelling the projectile toward the target protuberance.


CLS 273/338
TXT Having plural pegs:

    Game or apparatus therefor under subclass 336 wherein the target device
    includes a plurality of generally postlike protuberances mounted on a
    common base structure at a common target area.

    (1)     Note.  A pair of postlike protuberances, one located at one end of
    a common base structure and the other located at the opposite end of the
    base structure (as, for example, in the game of horseshoes), are not
    considered to be plural protuberances at a common target area.  For
    placement in this and the indented subclass, each player's target device
    must comprise a plurality of postlike protuberances.


CLS 273/339
TXT Structurally different or nonparallel longitudinal axes:

    Game or apparatus therefor under subclass 338 wherein (a) at least one
    postlike protuberance at a common target area has a peripheral
    configuration or size which is different from another postlike protuberance
    at the same target area, or (b) at least one postlike protuberance at a
    common target area has an axial orientation relative to the target area
    which is different from the axial orientation of another postlike
    protuberance at the same target area.


CLS 273/340
TXT Playing surface or projectile struck from below to project projectile:

    Apparatus under subclass 317 including a surface which is supported in such
    a manner as to enable the striking manipulation thereunder of a hand-held
    striking implement or of the hand, fist, or foot of the participant in
    order to project or impel a projectile resting on the surface into the air
    by striking either the projectile directly from below or the surface on
    which the projectile rests from below, and wherein (a) the surface has at
    least one closed periphery opening below which a portion of the projectile
    projects, or (b) the surface is imperforate and sufficiently yielding or
    elastic so that an impact from below will project or launch the projectile
    into the air.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, subclass 511 for a
    projector-catcher device with which an aerial projectile is similarly
    launched and with which an aerial projectile is also caught.


CLS 273/341.1
TXT Tipcat game; accessory therefor:

    Subject matter under subclass 317 relating to a game, commonly known as
    tipcat, which uses a projectile comprising a body having a configuration
    such that, when it is lying upon a flat surface, one edge portion thereof
    is capable of being raised into the air whenever the opposite edge is
    forcibly struck or pressed upon (often the body is elongated and tapered at
    one or both ends thereof or simply tapered in configuration), the game
    being played with the projectile initially lying at rest upon a support
    surface and then forcibly struck from above on an end or edge portion
    thereof by player using a bat, club, stick, or other handheld striking
    implement so that the projectile is flipped end-over-end or edge-over-edge
    into the air and either(a) thereby projected directly toward one or more
    distantly located targets or fielders, or(b) subsequently reprojected
    toward one or more distantly located targets or fielders by being again
    batted by the player with the bat, club, stick, or other handheld striking
    implement while it is still in the air.

    (1)     Note.  A structure adapted to support a projectile in order to
    facilitate its projection into the air, which projectile support structure
    being disclosed for use in the play of the type of game included herein, is
    included in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The following game components disclosed for use in the play
    of the type of game defined herein are, per se, excluded from this
    subclass: a target device, per se, a device or implement, per se, for
    projecting a projectile, and a projectile, per se. See the search notes
    below for the location of such game components.

    (3)     Note.  An ancillary device or means, which is adapted and intended
    to be used with or for a game component included herein, is included herein
    unless it is provided for elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    348+,   for a target, per se, which may be used during the play of a
    tipcat-type game.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, for a centrifugally or mechanically
    operated projector, per se, which projects projectiles into the air.

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, subclasses 516+ for a handheld
    implement, per se, for striking and thereby projecting a game projectile
    into the air, and subclass 592 for a tipcat projectile, per se.


CLS 273/342
TXT Upwardly facing projectile-bounce surface:

    Apparatus under subclass 317 including a member having a surface facing
    vertically upward during use, which surface is intended to have a
    projectile thrown or projected thereat from above so that the projectile
    will strike or impact against the surface and be rebounded or reprojected
    therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  The projectile-bounce surface is often either (a) located
    between two opposing particpants who alternately throw or project a ball
    onto the bounce surface and who alternately endeavor to catch the bounced
    ball or reproject the bounced ball back to the bounce surface, or (b)
    located between the projecting point and a target wherein a participant
    endeavors to throw or project a ball toward the bounce surface with the
    objective of bouncing the ball off the surface into the target.


CLS 273/343
TXT Hooking or draping projectile and target therefor:

    Apparatus under subclass 317 including a projectile and a target device,
    wherein either (a) the projectile comprises two or more body members
    interconnected by an elogated flexible member, or (b) the projectile is in
    the form of or has thereon a target engagable hook or ring means for
    removable attachment to the target device; and wherein the target device
    comprises or includes a generally horizontally disposed, projectile
    supporting member, which supporting member is spaced above and from the
    surface supporting the target device, so that the projectile, when
    projected toward the target device, is intended to engage and either drape
    over or hang suspended from the supporting member due to the gravitational
    force acting thereon.

    (1)     Note.  The horizontally disposed, projectile supporting member is
    usually in the form of a protrusion, rod, bar, sheet edge, wire, cord, or
    ledge.


CLS 273/348
TXT Target:

    Target device under subclass 317 which comprises or includes a point of aim
    for an aerial projectile and which is intended to be used to indicate the
    correctness of aim for an aerial projectile thrown, projected, impelled, or
    launched thereat.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this and the indented subclasses are target
    devices which are particularly adapted for use as a point of aim for an
    aerial projectile or target devices at which an aerial projectile is
    projected or thrown.

    (2)     Note.  The point of aim may be merely an aperture formed in the
    target device and through which an aerial projectile is intended to pass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for target devices used with surface projectiles.

    331+,   for target devices having tethered projectiles associated therewith.

    336+,   for pegged target devices used in peg and ring games.

    343     and 348.2 through 348.5, for a target device having means to retain
    an aerial projectile thereon or thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 427 for devices for holding and
    releasing live objects to be used as targets.

    342,    Communications:  Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g., Radar, Radio
    Navigation), subclasses 1+ for targets with radio wave absorbing,
    reflecting or countering features.

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, subclasses 454+ for a practice or
    training device in the form of a pitcher's target intended to be used for
    improving a player's skill in throwing a baseball.

    D22,    Arms, Pyrotechnics, Hunting and Fishing Equipment, subclasses 113
    and 114 for target or target launcher.


CLS 273/348.1
TXT Including heating means (i.e., thermal target):

    Apparatus under subclass 348 wherein the target device includes means for
    increasing its temperature for the purpose of causing it to radiate thermal
    energy.

    (1)     Note.  When viewed through a thermally-sensitive aiming or sighting
    means, a heat-radiating target device can be seen under conditions (e.g.,
    darkness) when it is invisible to the naked eye.

    (2)     Note.  The means occasionally is utilized to heat only selected
    portions of the target device, whereby the device can be given a "heat
    signature" which is peculiar to a particular kind of device or structure;
    e.g., a tactical vehicle such as a tank.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 493+ for radiant energy generation and
    sources not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 273/348.2
TXT Having suction cup for adherence of projectile thereto or having surface
    adapted for adherence thereto of projectile having suction cup:

    Subject matter under subclass 348 wherein the target device either (a)
    comprises or has a resilient cup-shaped means thereon so that, when the
    open portion of the cup-shaped means thereof is struck by, or otherwise
    forcibly engaged with, a projectile having a relatively smooth surface, the
    resilience of the cup-shaped portion will cause the pressure of the fluid
    trapped between the interior surface of the cup-shaped means and the
    relatively smooth surface of the projectile to be reduced below that
    located outside of the cup-shaped means thereby causing the projectile to
    adhere to the cup-shaped means and thereby to the target device, or (b) has
    a relatively smooth surface which is adapted and intended to be struck by,
    or otherwise forcibly engaged with, a projectile having such a resilient
    cup-shaped means thereon so that, when the open portion of the cup-shaped
    means of the projectile strikes, or is forcibly engaged with, the
    relatively smooth surface of the target device, the resilience of the
    cup-shaped portion will cause the pressure of the fluid trapped between the
    interior surface of the cup-shaped means and the relatively smooth surface
    to be reduced below that located outside of the cup-shaped means thereby
    causing the projectile to adhere to the surface of the target device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, subclass 572 for a projectile, per
    se, having a suction cup for adherence to an object having a relatively
    smooth surface.


CLS 273/348.3
TXT Having magnetized material for adherence of projectile thereto or made from
    material adapted for adherence thereto of projectile having magnetized
    material:

    Subject matter under subclass 348 wherein the target device either (a) is
    made at least in part from magnetized material or has a magnet located
    thereon, which target device being intended to be used with a projectile
    made at least in part from either magnetized material or magnetically
    susceptible material, so that the projectile, or a separable portion
    thereof, will adhere to and be retained upon the target device upon contact
    therewith, or (b) is made at least in part from magnetically susceptible
    material, which target device being intended to be used with a projectile
    made at least in part from magnetized material, so that the projectile, or
    a separable portion thereof, will adhere to and be retained upon the target
    device upon contact therewith.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, subclass 570 for a projectile, per
    se, having at least a part thereof made from magnetized material (e.g., a
    dart having a magnetic head portion, etc.).


CLS 273/348.4
TXT Having bristled, hooked, or looped surface for adherence of complementarily
    surfaced projectile thereto (e.g., VelcroR material, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 348 wherein the target device has a
    projectile-engaging surface, at least a portion of which is made from, or
    has attached thereto, a material comprising a very large number of closely
    spaced projecting bristles, hooks, or loops and wherein the target device
    is intended to be used with a projectile having disposed thereon
    complementary projecting bristles, loops, or hooks whereby, whenever the
    projectile contacts the surface of the target device, the material of the
    target device is intended to interlock with the complementary projecting
    bristles, loops, or hooks disposed upon the projectile so as to cause the
    projectile or a portion thereof to adhere to and be retained upon the
    target device.

    (1)     Note.  The expression "interlock with" is intended to include (due
    to the structural similarity of closely spaced bristles and closely spaced
    hooks or loops) the adherence of a projectile having projecting bristles
    which is intended to be engaged with, and thereby adhered to, a target
    device also having projecting bristles even though the adherence of the
    projectile to the target device is primarily due to frictional forces
    between the respective sets of bristles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, subclass 573 for a projectile, per
    se, having a bristled, hooked, or looped surface for adherence to
    complementarily surfaced means.


CLS 273/348.5
TXT Having means for nonpenetrating adherence of complementarily surfaced
    projectile therein (e.g., tacky surface, etc.);

    Subject matter under subclass 348 wherein the target device has a
    projectile-engaging surface, at least a portion of which is made from, or
    has attached thereto, a means adapted and indented to enable a
    cooperatively surfaced projectile, or a portion thereof, to impact
    thereupon and to stick, or otherwise adhere, thereto without puncturing the
    projectile-engaging surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, subclass 574 for a projectile, per
    se, having a means for nonpenetrating adherence to a complementarily
    surfaced means.


CLS 273/349
TXT With liquid projector (e.g., water pistol):

    Apparatus under subclass 348 including means for projecting a stream or
    burst of liquid through the air and wherein the target device is adapted to
    be struck by a stream or blast of liquid projected thereat, which target
    device includes means to indicate that it has been struck by a stream or
    blast of liquid projected thereat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 79 for a device simulating a firearm or other
    projector which projects a stream of liquid.


CLS 273/350
TXT Liquid buoyant:

    Apparatus under subclass 348 wherein the target device includes means to
    enable it to float on or to remain suspended in a body of liquid during its
    use as a point of aim for an aerial projectile.


CLS 273/351
TXT Game simulating aerial bombing of targets:

    Apparatus under subclass 348 comprising (a) a target device which is
    intended to have an aerial projectile dropped thereupon from a location
    generally vertically above and spaced apart from the target device, (b) a
    projectile carrying and releasing means for carrying an aerial projectile
    thereon and for selectively releasing or ejecting the carried projectile
    therefrom whenover a user operates the releasing means, and (c) an aerial
    projectile which is intended to be carried by the carrying and releasing
    means and then selectively released or ejected from the carrying and
    releasing means whenever a user operates the releasing means, so that the
    aerial projectile is dropped onto the target device from a region generally
    vertically above and spaced apart from the target device:  and wherein
    either, or both, the carrying and releasing means or the target device is
    movable, so that there is relative movement between the target device and
    the carrying and releasing means whenever the aerial projectile is released
    from the carrying and releasing means.


CLS 273/352
TXT Skee-Ball# game:

    Apparatus under subclass 348 comprising a target device spaced from the
    projectile projecting point, a runway surface for a projectile extending
    from the projecting point toward the target device, and means on the runway
    surface for causing a projectile propelled along the runway surface to
    become airborne at some point in its travel from the projecting point to
    the target device.


CLS 273/353
TXT Tiddlywink game:

    Game under subclass 348 comprising a generally thin, flat projectile having
    a peripheral edge portion and wherein the projectile, while lying on a
    generally horizontally disposed surface, is intended to be projected into
    the air toward the target device by the application of downward squeezing
    pressure at or upon the edge portion of the projectile.


CLS 273/354
TXT Having means to vary size of projectile-receiving target aperture or target
    opening:

    Target device under subclass 348 comprising means or structure defining an
    aperture or an opening through which a projectile is intended to pass, and
    which aperture or opening either is intended to be used as the point of aim
    of the target device or is located immediately in front of the point of
    aim; and wherein the target device further includes means for enabling the
    size of the aperture or opening to be varied or changed, so as to vary the
    difficulty of throwing or projecting a projectile through the aperture or
    opening of the target device.


CLS 273/355
TXT With support having both target and movable mechanical projector attached
    thereto:

    Apparatus under subclass 348 including a mechanical means for launching or
    impelling a projectile toward the target device, and including a common
    support structure or housing having both the target device and the
    mechanical launching means mounted thereon and connected thereto during use
    of the apparatus, and wherein the connection between the mechanical
    launching means and the support structure or housing permits movement of
    the mechanical launching means with respect to the target device to allow
    aiming of the launching means at the target device.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus in which the launching means and the target device
    can be removed from the common support structure or housing for the purpose
    of storage is included in this and the indented subclass.  However, during
    use of the apparatus, the launching means and target device must be
    attached to the common support structure or housing.


CLS 273/356
TXT Projector universally pivots:

    Apparatus under subclass 355 wherein the connection between the launching
    means and the support structure permits pivotal movement of the launching
    means in any direction.


CLS 273/357
TXT With plural mechanical projectors:

    Apparatus under subclass 348 including a plurality of mechanically operated
    means for launching or impelling a projectile toward the target device.


CLS 273/358
TXT Projected picture:

    Target device under subclass 348 in which the point of aim is an image or
    picture projected on a screen means by a light image projecting device.

    (1)     Note.  In order to be classified in this class (273) as a target,
    there must be some feature of the image projecting device, or of the screen
    means, or of the cooperation between the two, making the projected image
    particularly adapted for use as a target.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 39, 85+, and 95 for motion
    picture apparatus which project target images or which are used with
    projected target images, and see (1) Note, above.

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, particularly subclasses 11+ for image
    projecting apparatus, per se, and see (1) Note above.


CLS 273/359
TXT Moving:

    Target device under subclass 348 which includes structure or means
    specially adapting it for traveling, swinging, or otherwise moving during
    the time a projectile projected thereat is released so as to make it more
    difficult for a participant to reach the point of aim with a projectile.


CLS 273/360
TXT Airplane towed:

    Target device under subclass 359 which includes means particularly adapting
    it to be pulled by or dragged behind an aerial vehicle while in flight.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 215 for similar
    structures used as signs.

    342,    Communications:  Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g., Radar, Radio
    Navigation), subclasses 1+ for targets with radio wave absorbing,
    reflecting, or countering features.


CLS 273/361
TXT Having target exchange, carrier, or storage means:

    Apparatus under subclass 360 either (a) wherein the pulling or dragging
    means includes means for supplying a fresh target device in the place of a
    used target device while it is being pulled or dragged, or (b) including
    means for carrying or storing a target device in a nondeployed position.


CLS 273/362
TXT Flying or moving freely through the air:

    Target device under subclass 359 which is itself a projectile adapted for
    traveling freely through the air.

    (1)     Note.  These targets are usually thrown from target traps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosive, appropriate subclasses for projectiles to
    be used as weapons.

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, particularly subclasses 4+ for
    projectors used in throwing this type of target device into the air.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 34+ for flying toys.

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, for a miscellaneous surface or
    aerial game projectile, per se, in general.

    482,    Exercise Devices, particularly subclasses 20+ for a discus, shot,
    or javelin used in a throwing type of field sport.


CLS 273/363
TXT Material dispensing or burning upon projectile impact:

    Target device under subclass 362 having means (a) for releasing a liquid,
    gaseous, or particulate material carried by the target device upon being
    struck by a projectile, or (b) for producing smoke or flame upon being
    struck by a projectile.

    (1)     Note.  The released material must be in addition to the basic
    structure of the target device itself.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, subclass 577 for a projectile
    (e.g., an arrow, etc.) which has means, actuated upon impact with a surface
    (usually a target), to produce smoke or flame or to release a liquid,
    gaseous, or particulate material carried by the projectile.


CLS 273/364
TXT Having projector-engaging protrusion, notch, or recess means for enhancing
    projection of target:

    Target device under subclass 362 including a protrusion, notch, or recess
    means for enhancing the projection of the target device into the air; which
    protrusion, notch, or recess means is adapted to be engaged by a portion of
    a projector device.

    (1)     Note.  A target device having merely thickened, strengthened, or
    properly sized peripheral wall portions which are normally engageable by a
    portion of a projector device is not included in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Usually, the target device has a tongue, projection, slot,
    or hole formed on or near the periphery thereof, which tongue, projection,
    slot, or hole is engageable by a projector device so as to produce a
    spinning or rotating motion of the target device while it is being thrown
    or propelled into the air by the projector device.


CLS 273/365
TXT Reusable in whole or part:

    Target device under subclass 362 comprising (a) separable portions which
    are separated, but not destroyed, by projectile impact and which may be
    reassembled after use, or (b) a destructible portion which is destroyed by
    projectile impact combined with a nondestructible portion which is not
    destroyed by projectile impact and which nondestructible portion may be
    reassembled with a fresh destructible portion, or (c) a nondestructible
    whole which is not destroyed by projectile impact and which may be reused.


CLS 273/366
TXT Along endless path:

    Target device under subclass 359 which moves along a continuous path
    defining a closed circuit and wherein the target device is moving along at
    least a portion of the continuous path during the time a projectile
    projected at the target device is released.

    (1)     Note.  The closed circuit may be in the form of a trackway upon
    which a carriage carrying the target device moves, or the closed circuit
    may be defined by a target device mounted off axis on a rotating turntable
    or wheel, or the closed circuit may be defined by a target device merely
    moving entirely along a defined path forming a closed loop.

    (2)     Note.  The closed circuit defined by the movement of the target
    device must be continuous with no breaks or interruptions therein, but it
    may be of any closed-loop configuration.


CLS 273/367
TXT Target has additional motion while moving along path:

    Target device under subclass 306 wherein the target device, while it is
    moving along the continuous path, simultaneously swings, pivots, moves up
    and down, moves back and forth, vibrates, or otherwise moves during the
    time a projectile projected thereat is released; so that, the target device
    has the combined simultaneous motions of (a) moving along the continuous
    path, and (b) swinging, pivoting, moving up and down, moving back and
    forth, vibrating, or otherwise moving during the time a projectile
    projected thereat is released.

    (1)     Note.  Also included in this subclass is a target device having a
    relatively moving portions which serve as points of aim and which move as a
    whole along a continuous path while moving relative to each other.


CLS 273/368
TXT Path is circular:

    Target device under subclass 366 wherein the closed circuit is circular.


CLS 273/369
TXT Oscillating (e.g., pendulum motion) or reciprocating:

    Target device under subclass 359 (a) which moves back and forth along an
    arc-shaped path of less than 360 degrees about an axis spaced from the
    path, or (b) which moves back and forth along a defined elongated path
    having two spaced-apart end points, alternately reversing its direction of
    movement whenever it reaches in the vicinity of an end point; and wherein
    the target device is moving back and forth during the time a projectile
    projected thereat is released.

    (1)     Note.  The elongated path having two spaced-apart end points may be
    linear, arc-shaped, or any other elongated configuration between the two
    spaced-apart end points.

    (2)     Note.  A target device which merely moves from one end point along
    a defined elongated path to the other end point during the time a
    projectile projected thereat is released and then is reset back to the
    initial end point before another projectile is projected thereat is not
    considered to be a reciprocating target.


CLS 273/370
TXT Target has additional motion while oscillating or reciprocating:

    Target device under subclass 369 wherein the target device, while it is
    moving back and forth along the arc-shaped or defined elongated path,
    simultaneously swings, pivots, moves up and down, moves frontward and
    rearward, vibrates, or otherwise moves during the time a projectile
    projected thereat is released; so that, the target device has the combined
    simultaneous motion of (a) moving back and forth along the arc-shaped or
    defined elongated path, and (b) swinging, pivoting, moving up and down,
    moving frontward and rearward, vibrating, or otherwise moving during the
    time a projectile projected thereat is released.

    (1)     Note.  Also included in this subclass is a target device having
    relatively moving portions which serve as points of aim and which move as a
    whole back and forth along an arc-shaped or defined elongated path while
    moving relative to each other.


CLS 273/371
TXT With electrically actuated or operated indicator:

    Target device under subclass 348 including electrically actuated or
    operated means (a) for indicating that a projectile has reached the target
    device, or (b) for indicating the location of the point on the target
    device at which a projectile has reached, or (c) for indicating the
    location of the point relative to and spaced from the target device at
    which a projectile has passed by the target device (i.e., missed the
    device).

    (1)     Note.  The electrically actuated or operated indicating means may
    include means located on or near the target device for sensing the presence
    of a projectile as it comes into proximity with or in the vicinity of the
    target device, which projectile sensing means is actuated whenever a
    projectile comes into proximity therewith to electrically actuate or
    operate the indicating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    378+,   for targets having mechanically operated indicating means and for
    targets in which the movement of the targets themselves, as a result of
    projectile impact thereon, provides the indicating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclasses for mechanical
    signalling means, per se.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 323 for game reporting
    electric signalling systems and appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclasses 286.01+ for electric signalling systems, per se, which may form
    part of a game.


CLS 273/372
TXT Indicator responsive to projectile produced sonic or shock wave:

    Target device under subclass 371 including either a sound wave sensitive
    means mounted on or near the target device or a shock wave sensitive means
    mounted on or near the target device, which sound wave sensitive means or
    shock wave sensitive means is operatively associated with the electrically
    actuated or operated indicating means; and wherein the indicating means is
    actuated either (a) by the sound waves or shock waves generated by a
    projectile whenever it approaches, passes in the vicinity of, or strikes
    the target device, or (b) by the shock waves traveling through the material
    of the target device as a result of a projectile impacting thereupon.


CLS 273/373
TXT Penetrating projectile alters circuit condition of target formed of
    stacked, penetrable sheetlike conductors:

    Target device under subclass 371 wherein the target device is formed from a
    plurality of spaced-apart electrically conductive sheet means which are
    stacked one behind the other in a row and which form part of the electrical
    circuit of the indicating means, and wherein at least the sheet means
    nearest the projecting point is adapted to be penetrated by a projectile
    projected thereat, such that the electrical circuit of the indicating means
    is actuated by the projectile either as it passes through all of the sheet
    means or as it passes through at least the said nearest sheet means to
    remain embedded in the target device.

    (1)     Note.  Usually, the electrical circuit of the indicating means is
    actuated by an electrically conductive projectile having a length
    sufficient to span the distance between at least two adjacent conductive
    sheet means such that the projectile forms part of the indicaing circuit as
    it passes through or remains embedded in the target device.


CLS 273/374
TXT Element moved by projectile impact to actuate circuitry:

    Target device under subclass 371 including an impact member which is moved
    by impact of a projectile thereon whenever a projectile initially impacts
    upon the target device, and wherein the electrically actuated or operated
    indicating means is operatively associated with the movable impact member
    so that the indicating means is actuated whenever a projectile, during its
    initial impact upon the target device, impacts upon and moves the impact
    member.

    (1)     Note.  A target device having a movable member which is moved by a
    projectile only at some point in time after the initial impact of the
    projectile upon the target device (such as target devices having gravity
    operated switch members located in chutes, troughs, or receivers) is not
    included in this and the indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  Where the point of aim of the target device is an aperture,
    the movable impact member is usually located behind the aperture and in
    axial alignment therewith.  The movable impact member located behind the
    aperture may be merely an actuating member; or, if it can be seen by a
    participant at the projecting point, it may be an additional point of aim.


CLS 273/375
TXT Element is pivoted:

    Target device under subclass 374 wherein the impact member which moves upon
    projectile impact is pivoted about a fixed axis to actuate the indicating
    means.


CLS 273/376
TXT Coplanar elements:

    Target device under subclass 374 including a plurality of individually
    movable impact members, which impact members are all disposed in a single
    plane adjacent one another so as to present a planar surface formed from a
    plurality of individually movable impact members, and wherein the
    electrically actuated or operated indicating means is operatively
    associated with each individually movable impact member so that the
    indicating means is actuated whenever a projectile impacts upon and moves
    any one impact member.


CLS 273/377
TXT Spaced conductors bridged by nonpenetrating projectile:

    Target device under subclass 371 wherein the surface portion adapted to be
    struck by a projectile includes a plurality of spaced-apart, electrically
    conductive means which form part of the electrical circuit of the indicator
    means and which are contactable by a projectile which strikes but does not
    pass through or penetrate into the surface portion of the target device,
    and wherein the electrical circuit of the indicator means is actuated by an
    electrically conductive projectile having a size and configuration
    sufficient to span the distance between at least two adjacent conductive
    means such that the projectile forms part of the indicator circuit as it
    spans the two adjacent conductive means upon striking or remaining upon the
    surface portion of the target device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    348.3,  for similar target devices in which an electrically conductive
    projectile completes an electrical indicating circuit while magnetically
    adhering to the surface of the target device.


CLS 273/378
TXT Indication by movement of target or target having indicating means:

    Target device under subclass 348 (a) including means, actuatable or
    operable by a projectile, for providing or producing an indication that a
    projectile has reached the point of aim, or (b) wherein the target device
    or the point of aim portion thereof is movable whenever a projectile
    impinges thereupon, and wherein the movement of the target device or the
    point of aim provides or produces a visual indication that a projectile has
    reached the point of aim.

    (1)     Note.  Target devices, which are adapted to have a hole formed
    therein whenever a projectile impinges thereupon, are not included in this
    and the indented subclasses unless the target device has some means to
    enhance the visible presence of the hole, as for example, the target device
    having means to make the hole larger than the size of the projectile.

    (2)     Note.  Target devices, which are merely adapted to retain a
    projectile therein or thereon after penetration (e.g., dart board target
    devices), are not included in this and the indented subclasses and are,
    accordingly, found in subclasses 403, 404 and 408.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331+,   especially 333+ for similar target devices having a tethered
    projectile associated therewith.

    359+,   especially 366+ and 369+ for target devices which provide an
    indication, by means of the movement thereof, that a projectile has reached
    the point of aim or for target devices having means to indicate that a
    projectile has reached the point of aim.

    371+,   for target devices having electrically actuated or operated
    indicating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclasses for mechanical
    signalling means, per se.


CLS 273/379
TXT Plural indicators sequentially released:

    Target device under subclass 378 including a plurality of indicating
    members which are ejected, dumped, or dispersed by the target device one at
    a time each time a projectile reaches the point of aim; and wherein the
    target device includes means, actuated by a projectile whenever it reaches
    the point of aim, to eject, dump, or disperse one indicating member at a
    time.


CLS 273/380
TXT Frangible or formed from a plurality of separable interconnected elements
    (e.g., explosion simulating):

    Target device under subclass 378 either (a) comprising a unitary mass of
    material which is intended to shatter or break into pieces whenever a
    projectile reaches the point of aim, or (b) comprising or including a
    plurality of interconnected members which are intended to fall apart,
    separate, or be propelled away from each other whenever a projectile
    reaches the point of aim.

    (1)     Note.  The interconnected members may be held together by a
    friction or an adhering means acting between the members and the separation
    of the members is effected by the energy of a projectile impacting upon the
    target device; or the interconnected members may be held together by an
    additional means releasably holding the members together against the force
    due to gravity and the separation of the members is effected by a
    projectile contacting a latch mechanism which operates the additional
    holding means to release the members so that the members may separate or
    fall apart from each other due to the earth's gravitational forces acting
    thereon; or the target device may include means, actuated by a projectile
    whenever it reaches the point of aim, to violently propel the plurality of
    interconnected members away from each other so as to simulate an explosion
    of the device.


CLS 273/381
TXT Audible indication:

    Target device under subclass 378 wherein the means providing and indication
    that a projectile has reached the point of aim is a sound producing means
    which is operated or actuated whenever a projectile reaches the point of
    aim.

    (1)     Note.  In order to be included in this and the indented subclass, a
    target device must include means, in addition to the material forming the
    target device, which is specifically designed to produce a sound; a target
    device, for example, merely formed from a metallic material which is
    capable of producing a sound when struck by a projectile would not be
    included herein.


CLS 273/382
TXT Projectile passes through aperture to operate indicator:

    Target device under subclass 381 including an opening or aperture through
    which a projectile is intended to pass to operate or actuate the sound
    producing means.


CLS 273/383
TXT Having projectile-actuated means to free indicator for movement:

    Target device under subclass 378 including an indicating member which is
    moved whenever a projectile reaches the point of aim, so that movement of
    the indicating member provides or produces a visible indication that a
    projectile has reached the point of aim, and wherein the target device
    includes means, actuated by a projectile whenever it reaches the point of
    aim, for releasing the indicating member and moving the indicating member
    by a force other than that produced by movement of the releasing means
    itself.

    (1)     Note.  The force which moves the indicating member after the member
    has been freed for movement by a projectile reaching the point of aim
    usually is provided by the bias of a spring means acting on the indicating
    member or by the earth's gravitational field acting on the indicating
    member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    387+,   for target devices having an indicating member which is moved by
    the force produced by movement of either the point of aim or other
    projectile-actuated element, which movement of the point of aim or the
    projectile-actuated element is, in turn, produced by the energy of the
    projectile impacting upon the point of aim or the projectile-actuated
    element.


CLS 273/384
TXT Indicator is dumped or  is projected into the air (e.g., return fire):

    Target device under subclass 383 either (a) including a movable support
    upon which the indicating member is adapted to rest, and wherein the
    indicating member is adapted to merely rest upon the movable support
    without being attached to any portion of the target device or the support;
    and, whenever the releasing means is actuated by a projectile, the support
    is moved from a position supporting the indicating member at rest thereon
    to a released position, in which released position the support no longer
    supports the indicating member so that the indicating member freely drops
    or falls from its position of rest, or (b) including means to project or
    launch the indicating member into the air away from the target device, and
    wherein the projecting or launching means is actuated or operated by the
    releasing means whenever a projectile reaches the point of aim and actuates
    the releasing means.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are target devices in which a
    human being or an animal is intended to be the movable indicating member
    which is dumped upon actuation of the releasing means.


CLS 273/385
TXT Gravity operated indicator:

    Target device under subclass 383 wherein the force, which moves the
    indicating member whenever the releasing means is actuated by the
    projectile, is provided by the earth's gravitational field acting upon the
    target device.


CLS 273/386
TXT Target is moved or indicator is moved:

    Target device under subclass 378 (a) wherein the target device or the point
    of aim portion thereof moves whenever a projectile impinges of impacts
    thereupon, and wherein the movement of the target device or the point of
    aim provides or produces a visible indication that a projectile has reached
    the point of aim, or (b) wherein the target device includes an indicating
    member which is moved whenever a projectile reaches the point of aim, and
    wherein the movement of the indicating member provides or produces a
    visible indication that a projectile has reached the point of aim.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    383+,   for target devices having movable indicating members which are
    released or freed for movement whenever a projectile reaches the point of
    aim, the movement of the indicating member being usually produced either by
    a spring bias means or by the earth's gravitational field acting thereupon.


CLS 273/387
TXT Indicator is moved:

    Target device under subclass 386 including an indicating member which is
    moved whenever a projectile reaches the point of aim, and wherein the
    movement of the indicating member provides or produces a visible indication
    that a projectile has reached the point of aim.

    (1)     Note.  The motive force which moves the indicating member of the
    target devices included in this and the indented subclasses is usually
    provided by the movement of the point of aim; however, also included in
    this and the indented subclasses are target devices in which the point of
    aim is an opening or aperture, in which case the motive force to move the
    indicating member is provided by the projectile-produce movement of an
    actuating element located behind the opening or aperture or located within
    a chute or tube which is accessible to the projectile after it passes
    through the aperture or opening.


CLS 273/388
TXT Indicator is alternate target:

    Target device under subclass 387 wherein the point of aim is moved from an
    aiming position to an indicating position whenever a projectile impinges or
    impacts thereupon, and wherein the indicating member constitutes a second
    point of aim which is moved into aiming position whenever a projectile
    impinges or impacts upon the first point of aim.


CLS 273/389
TXT Target is opening through which projectile passes to actuate indicator:

    Target device under subclass 387 comprising or including a opening or
    aperture means through which a projectile projected at the target device is
    intended to pass, which opening or aperture means constitutes the point of
    aim of the target device; and wherein the indicating member is caused to be
    moved by a projectile reaching the point of aim either during the passage
    of the projectile through the opening or aperture means or after the
    passage of the projectile through the opening or aperture means.


CLS 273/390
TXT Target pivots:

    Target device under subclass 386 wherein the target device or the point of
    aim portion thereof is moved about a fixed axis whenever a projectile
    impinges or impacts thereupon, and wherein the movement of the target
    device or the point of aim about the fixed axis provides or produces a
    visible indication that a projectile has reached the point of aim.


CLS 273/391
TXT Having restoring means:

    Target device under subclass 390 wherein the movement of the target device
    or the point of aim about a fixed axis is from an aiming position to an
    indicating position whenever a projectile impinges or impacts upon the
    point of aim, and wherein the target device includes means to reset or
    restore the target device or the point of aim from the moved position back
    to the aiming position.


CLS 273/392
TXT Automatic restoring:

    Target device under subclass 391 wherein the means to reset or restore the
    target device or the point of aim from the moved position back to the
    aiming position is actuated and operated without any intervention of a
    human operator.


CLS 273/393
TXT Target separates from support:

    Target device under subclass 386 wherein the point of aim portion thereof
    is moved whenever a projectile impinges or impacts thereupon, and wherein
    the target device includes means for removably holding or removably
    supporting the point of aim portion thereon; and, whenever a projectile
    impinges or impacts upon the point of aim, the point of aim portion is
    removed entirely from or knocked entirely off of the holding or supporting
    means so as to provide a visible indication that a projectile has reached
    the point of aim.


CLS 273/394
TXT Having means to deliver spent projectile to easily accessible location:

    Target device under subclass 348 including means for causing a projectile,
    after it has struck the target device or passed through the target device,
    to be moved to a point easily accessible for retrieval of the projectile.

    (1)     Note.  The easily accessible point or points may be score
    indicating compartments.

    (2)     Note.  A mere pocketed target device in which the pocket or
    receptacle is the point of aim is not sufficient for inclusion in this and
    the indented subclasses because the target device has no means to deliver
    the projectile from the point of aim pocket or receptacle to a secondary
    retrieving compartment or receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122     and 125, for similar projectile return devices used with surface
    projectiles.

    398+,   for pocketed or apertured target devices, and see (1) and (2)
    Notes, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, subclasses 110+ for a device used
    in a bowling game which is adapted to return a bowling ball to the bowler
    after the ball has either struck, missed, or otherwise passed the bowling
    pins and subclasses 431+ for a practice or training device having
    projectile return means.


CLS 273/395
TXT Movable conveyor or reprojecting target:

    Target device under subclass 394 wherein the means for moving a projectile
    to an easily accessible point for retrieval is in the form of (a) a
    movable, mechanically driven conveyor which carries the projectile thereon
    to the easily accessible point, or (b) a projecting or launching means
    connected to and located at the target device, which acts to project or
    launch the projectile through the air generally toward the point from which
    the projectile was initally projected, or (c) the target device itself is a
    surface for rebounding or deflecting point, which surface, upon being
    struck by the projectile, acts as a reaction surface to deflect or bounce
    the projectile through the air generally toward the point from which the
    projectile was initially projected.


CLS 273/396
TXT Projectile returned toward the projecting point:

    Target device under subclass 394 wherein the means for moving a projectile
    to an easily accessible point for retrieval causes the projectile to be
    moved toward the point from which the projectile was initially projected or
    launched.


CLS 273/397
TXT Runway extending between target area and projecting point:

    Target device under subclass 396 wherein the means for moving a projectile
    toward the point from which it was initially projected includes a surface
    which extends essentially the entire distance from the target device to the
    projecting point and upon which the projectile is caused to move from the
    target device to the projecting point.

    (1)     Note.  The surface is often downwardly sloped from the target
    device toward the projecting point.


CLS 273/398
TXT Pocketed or apertured:

    Target device under subclass 348 comprising or including (a) a
    closed-bottom or closed-back receptacle, at least partially within which a
    projectile is intended to come to rest after passing at least partially
    through the entrance opening thereof, or (b) a through aperture, which is
    so dimensioned that a projectile is intended to pass entirely therethrough,
    or (c) a through aperture, or an open-bottom receptacle, or an open-back
    receptacle, which aperture or receptacle is so dimensioned that a
    projectile is intended to come to rest at least partially within the
    aperture or receptacle after partially passing through the aperture or
    through the entrance opening of the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113+    and 123+, for similar target devices which are used with surface
    projectiles.


CLS 273/399
TXT With mechanical projector:

    Target device under subclass 398 including a mechanically operated means
    for throwing, projecting, impelling, or launching a projectile toward the
    target device.


CLS 273/400
TXT Closed-back or closed-bottom pocket:

    Target device under subclass 398 comprising or including a receptacle
    having an interior portion defined by a circumscribing wall means and by an
    entrance opening or aperture, so that a projectile, upon reaching the
    target device, may at least partially pass through the entrance opening or
    aperture and come to rest at least partially within the interior portion of
    the receptacle; and wherein the lateral dimension of the interior portion
    of the receptacle are essentially the same as or at least not much greater
    than the lateral dimensions of the entrance opening  or aperture.


CLS 273/401
TXT Entrance opening is formed in laterally extending surface:

    Target device under subclass 400 including a surface structure within which
    or behind which the receptacle is located and wherein the entrance opening
    or aperture of the receptacle is either formed in the surface structure or
    located within the surface structure so that the surface structure extends
    laterally about the entrance opening or aperture.


CLS 273/402
TXT Target is aperture dimensioned to allow projectile to pass entirely
    therethrough:

    Target device under subclass 398 comprising or including a through-aperture
    or opening, which through-aperture or opening is dimensioned so that a
    projectile is capable of passing entirely therethrough (i.e., a projectile
    entering the aperture or opening from one side thereof passes through the
    aperture or opening and leaves out from the opposite side thereof), and
    wherein the through-aperture or opening is intended to be the point of aim
    of the target device.

    (1)     Note.  A target device comprising a through-aperture and which is
    combined with a container or receptacle for receiving a plurality of
    projectiles is included in this subclass only if (a) the lateral dimensions
    of the container or receptacle are substantially greater than the lateral
    dimensions of the through-aperture, or (b) the front edge of the container
    or receptacle is spaced apart from and spaced rearwardly of the rear edge
    of the through-aperture.


CLS 273/403
TXT Penetrable target with replaceable element:

    Target device under subclass 348 comprising a penetrable layer having a
    structure particularly adapted to be pierced or ruptured upon impact of a
    projectile thereon so as to allow the entire projectile to pass through the
    penetrable layer or to allow at least a portion of the projectile to pass
    through the penetrable layer with another portion of the projectile
    remaining embedded within the penetrable layer; and wherein the target
    device includes means or is provided with means to enable replacement of a
    portion of the penetrable layer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404,    for penetrable target devices combined with projectile-backstop
    means for stopping or catching projectiles impacting on the target device.

    408,    for penetrable target devices, per se.


CLS 273/404
TXT Penetrable target with projectile backstop:

    Target device under subclass 348 comprising a penetrable layer having a
    structure particularly adapted to be pierced or ruptured upon impact of a
    projectile thereon so as to allow the entire projectile to pass through the
    penetrable layer or to allow at least a portion of the projectile to pass
    through the penetrable layer with another portion of the projectile
    remaining embedded within the penetrable layer; and wherein the target
    device includes means located behind the penetrable layer for stopping or
    catching a projectile after it or at least a portion thereof has passed
    entirely through the penetrable layer so that the projectile remains in the
    vicinity of the target device.

    (1)     Note.  To be included in this subclass, a projectile stopping or
    catching means (a) must be located behind the penetrable layer of the
    target device (i.e., located either spaced apart from or abutting against
    the side of the penetrable layer which is opposite to the side which
    receives the initial impact of a projectile projected thereat), and (b)
    must be comprised either of a material which will permit little or no
    penetration of a projectile therein or of a material which, if penetrable
    also, presents a resistance to the movement of a projectile therethrough
    which is greater than the resistance presented by the penetrable layer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    408,    for penetrable target devices, per se.

    410,    for projectile backstops, per se, which are intended to be used
    with aerial projectiles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclass 49.5 for
    projectile shields and protectors.

    473,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclass 114 for a backstop, division
    board, or adjunct therefor adapted for use in a bowling game.


CLS 273/405
TXT With mechanical projector:

    Target device under subclass 348 including a mechanically operated means
    for throwing, projecting, impelling, or launching an aerial projectile
    toward the target device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, appropriate subclasses for
    mechanical projectors, per se, which project projectiles into the air.


CLS 273/406
TXT Handling or manipulation (e.g., target positioning means):

    Apparatus under subclass 348 for safely or conveniently handling or
    manipulating a target device to or from position to be used.

    (1)     Note.  To be included in this subclass, a target device, per se,
    need not be recited in combination with the apparatus for handling or
    manipulating a target device; however, to be included in this subclass, the
    handling or manipulating apparatus must be disclosed as being particularly
    adapted and intended for use with a target device used with aerial
    projectiles.


CLS 273/407
TXT Target support structure:

    Apparatus under subclass 348 comprising structure or means to support a
    target device in position to be used.

    (1)     Note.  To be included in this subclass, a target device, per se,
    need not be recited in combination with the target device support
    structure; however, to be included in this subclass, the target device
    support structure must be disclosed as being particularly adapted and
    intended for use with a target device used with aerial projectiles.


CLS 273/408
TXT Target penetrated by projectile:

    Target device under subclass 348 comprising a penetrable layer having a
    structure particularly adapted to be pierced or ruptured upon projectile
    impact thereon so as to either (a) allow the entire projectile to pass
    through the penetrable layer, or (b) allow at least a portion of the
    projectile to pass through the penetrable layer with another portion of the
    projectile remaining embedded within the penetrable layer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403,    for penetrable target devices having means to replace used
    penetrable portions of the target device.

    404,    for penetrable target devices combined with projectile-backstop
    means for stopping or catching projectiles impacting upon the target device.


CLS 273/409
TXT Printed matter:

    Target device under subclass 348 including a surface having thereon indicia
    which define one or more points of aim or define the portion of the surface
    adapted to be struck by a projectile.

    (1)     Note.  The indicia on the target surface may be in the form of
    printing, etching, embossing, etc.


CLS 273/410
TXT Projectile backstop:

    Apparatus under subclass 317 comprising means for stopping, trapping, or
    catching a projectile.

    (1)     Note.  Projectile backstop apparatus are generally located behind
    target devices used with aerial projectiles or are located in such a manner
    that aerial projectiles, projected at a target device, are stopped,
    trapped, or caught by the projectile back-stop apparatus after the
    projectiles either interact with the target device or completely miss the
    target device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404,    for projectile backstops combined with target devices used with
    aerial projectiles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclass 49.5 for
    projectile shields and protectors.

    473,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclass 114 for a backstop, division
    board, or adjunct therefor adapted for use in a bowling game.


CLS 273/412
TXT User manipulated means for catching projectile moving through the air:

    Apparatus under subclass 317 comprising manipulatable means adapted to be
    moved by a participant so as to catch and retain therein or thereon a
    projectile which is moving freely through the air, and wherein the
    manipulatable means is capable of being positioned by a participant into
    the path of movement of a projectile so as to catch the projectile while it
    is moving freely through the air.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, subclass 503 for a player
    manipulated implement or device, other than an article of apparel, for
    catching a projectile moving through the air during play of a playing field
    or court game, and subclasses 505+ for a player-held implement or device
    for both projecting and catching an aerial projectile.


CLS 273/429
TXT PROBLEM ELICITING RESPONSE:

    Apparatus under the class definition including a problem presented to a
    participant in order to obtain a response which is then compared to a
    predetermined answer or otherwise evaluated.

    (1)     Note.  A problem and response game which is based on the
    participant's existing knowledge is classified in this and indented
    subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclass 322 for a problem eliciting a
    response related to academic matter intending to improve the knowledge of
    an unknowledgeable participant.


CLS 273/430
TXT Questions and answers:

    Apparatus under subclass 429 wherein the problems are presented in the form
    of questions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243+,   for board games which may include a problem presented to a
    participant in the form of a question.


CLS 273/431
TXT Categorized or grouped questions:

    Apparatus under subclass 430 wherein the questions are subdivided by
    related subject matter.


CLS 273/432
TXT Timed response:

    Apparatus under subclass 430 wherein the amount of time a participant takes
    to respond to a question is measured.


CLS 273/440
TXT PHYSICAL SKILL OR ABILITY:

    Apparatus under the class definition intended to measure one of a
    participant's senses, a bodily capacity or the physical speed, strength, or
    dexterity in which a participant can accomplish a task relative to another
    participant or relative to a fixed standard.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus related to a specific game or sport is classified
    in this class in the corresponding subclass, if provided for.


CLS 273/440.1
TXT Simulated martial-art type game (e.g., boxing or fencing robots, etc.):

    A physical skill or ability game under subclass 440 having a plurality of
    participant-manipulatable figurines having human appearance, wherein each
    figurine is intended and arranged to be skillfully manipulated in a contest
    that mimics the action of hand-to-hand combat, with or without a weapon.


CLS 273/441
TXT Participant maneuvered game element over a surface or through a course:

    Apparatus under subclass 440 intended to measure a participant's skill in
    directing the motion of a game element along a path or over a course.

    (1)     Note.  To be included in this subclass, a game element must be able
    to be guided throughout the course rather than thrown or projected over a
    course.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108+,   for apparatus in which the game element is projected over a surface.


CLS 273/442
TXT Simulated vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 441 wherein the game element being maneuvered is a
    vehicle or a simulated vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    463,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclass 6 for a race game that includes
    electronic data processing and subclasses 58+ for a propelled racing game.


CLS 273/443
TXT Magnetically guided game element:

    Apparatus under subclass 441 wherein the movement of the game element is
    directed through magnetic attraction or repulsion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239,    for a magnetic board game element (i.e., those used on a surface
    having a pattern or confining region and used in a game).


CLS 273/444
TXT Game element comprises a participant:

    Apparatus under the subclass 441 wherein the game element being maneuvered
    includes a human participant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, subclass 414 for a projectile game
    commonly known as hopscotch, which game utilizes a playing area defined by
    lines forming a diagram having several compartments, and wherein a player
    first tosses a game projectile into one of the compartments and then moves
    from one compartment to another in a prescribed manner.


CLS 273/445
TXT Timed reaction or race to a finish:

    Apparatus under subclass 440 intended to determine the length of time it
    takes a participant to complete a task relative to a fixed standard or
    another participant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    463,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclass 6 for a race game that includes
    electronic data processing and subclasses 58+ for a propelled racing game.


CLS 273/446
TXT One participant at a time competes:

    Apparatus under subclass 445 wherein each participant attempts to complete
    a task individually.

    (1)     Note.  There may be only one participant.


CLS 273/447
TXT Game element capture or pick up using manual dexterity:

    Apparatus under subclass 440 including a game element intended to be
    retrieved through skillful movement of a participant's hand.

    (1)     Note.  The game element can be retrieved directly by the hand or
    indirectly through skillful manual manipulation of another game element.


CLS 273/448
TXT Electric or magnetic capture:

    Apparatus under subclass 447 wherein the game element is intended to be
    taken using electric or magnetic means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 210 for an article dispensing device
    with grab means.


CLS 273/449
TXT Balance:

    Apparatus under subclass 440 intended to measure a participant's skill at
    maintaining the equilibrium of either himself or of some game element or
    elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    482,    Exercise Devices, subclass 34 for a bar or rope for gymnastically
    balancing upon.


CLS 273/450
TXT Game element add on:

    Apparatus under subclass 449 including game elements intended to be
    combined until balance is disturbed.


CLS 273/451
TXT Push or pull force (e.g., tug of war):

    Apparatus under the subclass 440 including structure intended to aid in
    transmitting a force either towards or away from a participant.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass may include a participant competing against
    the apparatus, or two or more participants competing against one another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    482,    Exercise Devices, appropriate subclasses for an exercise device
    involving a push or pull force.


CLS 273/452
TXT Arm or finger contacting  (e.g., arm wrestling):

    Apparatus under subclass 451 wherein the force transmitted occurs between
    contact of a participant's arm or finger with another participant's arm or
    finger or with the apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    482,    Exercise Devices, subclass 905 for an arm wrestling device
    cross-reference art collection.


CLS 273/453
TXT Apparatus connecting plural participants:

    Apparatus under subclass 440 including an element intended to be attached
    to or grasped by two or more participants simultaneously while they are
    accomplishing a task.


CLS 273/454
TXT Electric:

    Apparatus under subclass 440 including electrical means intended to assist
    a participant in accomplishing a task, or to measure his ability in
    accomplishing a task.


CLS 273/455
TXT Circuit completion:

    Apparatus under subclass 454 including an interrupted path for current flow
    whose completion is intended to measure a participant's skill in the
    completion of a task.


CLS 273/456
TXT Magnetic:

    Apparatus under subclass 440 including magnetic means intended to assist a
    participant in accomplishing a task or to measure his skill in the
    completion of a task.


CLS 273/457
TXT ENCLOSED FLUID MEDIUM:

    Apparatus under the class definition including structure for surrounding a
    quantity of liquid or gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138.5,  for a gravity-propelled chance element that traverses a
    liquid-filled path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclass 267 for a toy device having
    enclosed liquid.


CLS 273/458
TXT Inflatable:

    Apparatus under subclass 457 wherein the structure surrounding the fluid is
    formed of an elastic or pliant material and its shape is manifested by
    filling the structure with a gas or liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 220+ for toys including an
    inflatable structure.


CLS 273/459
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Apparatus under the class definition not classifiable in any of the
    subclasses listed above.


CLS 273/460
TXT Electric:

    Apparatus under subclass 459 including an electrical circuit or component.

    (1)     Note.  This is the residual locus for electric or electronic games
    not classifiable elsewhere in this class.


CLS 273/461
TXT Simulated game:

    A miscellaneous game under subclass 459 having a feature that mimics, or
    features in combination that some or all of the features, action, rules,
    environment, or scoring of a game of physical sport or other athletic event.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108.1+, for a surface projectile game that simulates a physical sport game
    or athletic event.

    244+,   259, and 277, for a board game that simulates a sport or outdoor
    recreational activity.

    298,    for a card or tile game that simulates a sport or outdoor
    recreational activity.

    317.1+, for an aerial projectile game that simulates a physical sport game
    or athletic event.

    440+,   for a game requiring physical skill or ability.


CLS 276/
TTL TYPESETTING

CLS 276/
TXT Means peculiarly adapted for assembling type or the elements of a
    printing-form, means for returning such type or elements to their
    respective storage-chambers after printing; also means, such as galleys and
    the like, not constituting a part of the printing apparatus, for holding
    assembled matter.  Also cabinets, trays, or other means for holding or
    storing type for the compositor together with means for feeding the type to
    the delivery point of the holding means or from the type cabinet.

    (1)     Note. Compare Class 199, Type Casting, containing apparatus for
    setting or distributing matrices in type-casting machines.  Compare Class
    234, Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), subclasses 4+, for a keyboard
    controlled typographical tape-punch provided with a space totalizer and
    indicator for justification purposes (some of these devices comprise
    automatic justification computer and means to punch the justification
    symbol).


CLS 276/1
TXT Means falling within the class not provided for in any specific subclass.


CLS 276/2
TXT Machines for both assembling the type and returning them to the
    storage-magazines.


CLS 276/3
TXT Wherein the line-receiving channel is adapted to be brought into
    juxtaposition with one or both ends of the magazine-channels.


CLS 276/4
TXT Wherein the types are assembled directly into the printing member.


CLS 276/5
TXT The distributer having type-holders, which carry the type in a circuit, and
    correlated feelers moving therewith, which enter special nicks in the type
    and actuate the discharge when the proper channel is reached.


CLS 276/6
TXT The magazine-entrances having projections, which permit the passage of only
    such types as are provided with proper nicks to clear the projections.


CLS 276/7
TXT The distributer having different members corresponding to different types
    and adapted to be manually operated to deliver the types to their
    respective channels.


CLS 276/8
TXT Machines for both assembling the type into line and for modifying the
    spaces between the words, so as to bring the line to standard length.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), subclasses 4+ (and see the
    reference to Class 234 in Note under the class definition, above).


CLS 276/9
TXT Line automatically justified by mechanism which is controlled by the length
    of the line and the number of words in the line.


CLS 276/10
TXT Line set up with yielding spaces between the words and then compressed to
    the proper length.


CLS 276/11
TXT Wherein the length of the line is indicated as it is being set, so that the
    operator may determine the size of spaces required.


CLS 276/12
TXT Limited to machines for assembling types into line.


CLS 276/13
TXT A previously-prepared member automatically governing the order in which
    types are selected.


CLS 276/14
TXT Type fed by hand.


CLS 276/15
TXT Line-receiving channel brought into juxtaposition with one or both ends of
    the magazine-channels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      and indented subclass.


CLS 276/16
TXT Having a moving member or members to carry the type from the
    magazine-channels to the composing member.


CLS 276/17
TXT Conveyer in the nature of an endless band.


CLS 276/18
TXT Wherein selective mechanism is supplemented by power for ejecting the type
    onto endless conveyers.


CLS 276/19
TXT Wherein selective mechanism is supplemented by power for ejecting the type
    into other than endless conveyers.


CLS 276/20
TXT Having gravity-ways for the type running from the magazine-channels and all
    terminating at the composing member.


CLS 276/21
TXT Wherein selective mechanism is supplemented by power for ejecting the type
    into the converging chutes.


CLS 276/22
TXT Limited to machines for returning the type to their respective channels.


CLS 276/23
TXT Having means positioned by the nicks in the type for actuating the
    discharge when the type is in the proper relative position.


CLS 276/24
TXT Type carried by a circulating holder until the proper storage-channel is
    reached.


CLS 276/25
TXT The feeler mechanism moving with the type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.


CLS 276/26
TXT The magazine-entrances having projections, which permit the passage of only
    such types as are provided with proper nicks to clear the projections.

    (1)     Note.  Compare class 199, Typecasting, subclass 64.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6.


CLS 276/27
TXT Having different members corresponding to different types and adapted to be
    manually operated to deliver the types to their respective channels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

     7.


CLS 276/28
TXT Machines for modifying the spaces between the words, so as to bring the
    line to standard length.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), subclasses 4+ (and see the
    reference to Class 234 in Note under the class definition, above).


CLS 276/29
TXT Automatically governed by the length of line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

     9.


CLS 276/30
TXT Manufacturing the spaces as used.


CLS 276/31
TXT Wherein the spaces are produced from material in fluid condition by pouring
    it and allowing it to harden.


CLS 276/32
TXT Adapted to have wedges forced between the words until the line is expanded
    to the proper length.


CLS 276/33
TXT Means peculiarly adapted for holding the assembled line, so that it may be
    justified by hand.


CLS 276/34
TXT Means for placing members between lines of assembled matter or removing the
    same therefrom.


CLS 276/35
TXT Means for detaching single lines of type from assembled matter for
    distribution.


CLS 276/36
TXT Means for causing type to be delivered with their sides in proper relation.


CLS 276/37
TXT Means for holding a single line of type, not designed to constitute a
    portion of a machine, but merely to be used as a free implement.


CLS 276/38
TXT Devices adapted to receive the type as it is set by hand and capable of
    holding a few lines.


CLS 276/39
TXT Having means other than friction-clamps for securing the adjustable end
    stop in positon.


CLS 276/40
TXT Trays for holding the composed type.


CLS 276/41
TXT Having means for pressing against both the sides and the end of the
    composed matter.


CLS 276/42
TXT Having means for applying pressure, so as to squeeze the type together in
    the direction-lines.


CLS 276/43
TXT Having means for applying pressure, so as to squeeze the lines together.


CLS 276/44
TXT Means for holding or storing type for the compositor.  Includes type cases
    proper and also accessories such as stands, cabinets, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    199,    Type Casting, subclass 44.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 35, and indented subclasses.


CLS 276/45
TXT Means for feeding type to the delivery point of the holding means or means
    for delivering the type to be set up or stored.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

     37.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    199,    Type Casting, subclasses 15+, 19+ and 44+.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for article dispensers
    (feeders) not otherwise provided for, and see the class definition of Class
    221 for a statement of the class lines and for the disposition of related
    disclosures or article and strip feeding processes and apparatus.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 35+.


CLS 277/
TTL SEAL FOR A JOINT OR JUNCTURE

CLS 277/
TXT I.      CLASS DEFINITION

    This is the generic class for a sealing means or a process of using a seal
    to act at a joint or juncture of adjacent parts to oppose passage of a
    fluid. The sealing means or process:  (1) closes a space formed between or
    (2) deflects the fluid away from the joint or juncture by using the fluid,
    another fluid, or an article.

    (1)     Note. For a seal that does not claim a static or dynamic use, it is
    permissible to use its disclosure for placement.

    II.     REFERENCES TO OTHER CLASSES

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, for a method of mechanical manufacture, subclass
    402.02 for a method of repairing a seal or element thereof not provided for
    elsewhere, subclasses 888.07+ for a method of piston ring or packing
    manufacture, or subclass 888.3 for a method of seal or packing manufacture;
    or for apparatus to assemble or disassemble, subclasses 700+ for general
    apparatus to assemble or disassemble, especially subclasses 222+ for an
    apparatus to insert or remove a piston ring, or subclass 236 for an
    apparatus to apply or remove a resilient well protector from a well sucker
    rod.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, for apparatus to
    separate liquids from solids (i.e., drying) or contacting solids with gases
    or vapors, subclass 242 for means to seal an opening in a treating chamber
    against gas or vapor leakage, or subclass 601 that may have a seal between
    a rotating drum or receptacle, and a housing.

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, for more than nominal movable or
    removable closure structure (e.g., door jam, etc.), subclasses 475.1+ for a
    seal acting at a juncture of the closure and an adjacent member, especially
    subclass 477.1 having an inflatable or fluid pressure responsive feature;
    subclass 478.1 having a magnetic feature, subclass 482.1 having a
    segmenting, replacing, adjusting, or severing feature; subclass 483.1
    having complementary engaging portions on closure or closure and portal
    frame; subclass 489.1 anchored in channel or slot in closure or portal
    frame; subclass 490.1 having a U-shaped member or portion to mount the
    seal, or subclass 498.1 is tubular or has a tubular portion.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), for a site erected structure
    or related components (e.g., panels, beams, columns, etc.), subclasses 140+
    for a burial vault having a separately placeable closure in abutting
    relation to wall edges and sealing material retaining construction,
    subclasses 393+ for a relatively yieldable preformed separator (i.e.,
    expansion joint), or subclasses 408+ for a disparate sheet lamina between
    exposed surfaces of wall, floor, or roof (e.g., vapor barrier,
    waterproofing membrane, etc.).

    57,     Textiles: Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, for a process or
    apparatus for spinning, twisting, and twining.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, for a detailed structure or method for
    measuring or testing, subclasses 7+ for a measurement or test made
    involving anyone or any combination of operations of abrasion, milling,
    rubbing or scuffing; subclasses 46+ for testing or determining leakage
    between parts mechanically fitted together and capable of being separated
    without destruction; subclasses 700+ for direct measurement of fluid
    pressure; subclasses 863+ for obtaining a predetermined portion of a mass
    of material to be tested, or subclass 865.8 for apparatus or process for
    sensing and signaling, or for indicating a physical condition.

    74,     Machine Element and Mechanism, subclasses 18+ for a flexible
    sealing material attached to a casing and a moving rod, and a device or
    mechanism to move the rod.

    87,     Textiles: Braiding, Netting, or Lace Making, a process or apparatus
    for forming strands or fabrics from yarns, filaments or strands, by
    braiding, knotting, or intertwisting the strands, and the corresponding
    products or fabrics.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 168 for a nonmetallic seal
    means between a piston or a part moved by the piston and a cylinder end
    portion; or subclasses 172+ for more than nominal detailed structure of a
    piston except where limited to detailed structure (e.g., seat, fluid
    passageway in seat, etc.) solely intended to cooperate with a piston ring
    or piston ring expander.

    100,    Presses, subclass 269.21 for a seal or gasket around a piston for a
    fluid activated reciprocating press.

    114,    Ships, for marine vehicles and accessories not otherwise
    classifiable, subclass 93 that may have a seal for a joint between a mast
    and a deck.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, for a specifically recited and detailed
    mechanical device for giving signals of the nature of an alarm or indicator
    that appeals to any one or more of the senses and combined with nominal
    apparatus structure from other classes, subclasses 70 for a fluid-pressure
    variation alarm giving audible indication usually operated automatically;
    subclasses 101+ for a thermal alarm giving audible indication usually
    operated automatically; subclasses 109+ for a liquid level alarm giving
    audible indication usually operated automatically; subclass 112 for a fluid
    flow alarm giving audible indication usually operated automatically;
    subclass 208 for a wear indicator for an element having means to convey
    information to one of the senses; subclasses 216+ for a temperature
    responsive or compensating means indicator having means to convey
    information to one of the senses; subclasses 227+ for a liquid level
    indicator having means to convey information to one of the senses, or
    subclasses 266+ for a pressure indicator having means to convey information
    to one of the senses.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 90.37 for a poppet valve
    mechanism's lubrication system's seal or shield that includes those mounted
    on a valve stem or subclass 188.6 for a seal in combination with a valve
    stem of an intake, exhaust or fuel valve of an internal combustion engine
    having a stationary opening (i.e., seat) and moving closure (i.e., head).

    137,    Fluid Handling, residual class for fluid material handling process
    or apparatus; subclasses 248+ for a liquid seal between relatively movable
    valving parts.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, for manufacture of fabric by weaving threads.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclass 238 for a process of nitriding using an
    externally supplied nitrogen source or subclasses 317+ for a stock product
    of the nitriding process.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    60+ for a process of manufacturing an article involving surface bonding or
    assembly therefor or subclasses 349+ for an apparatus to manufacture an
    article involving surface bonding or assembly therefor.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 47+ for a heat exchanger including
    structural installation on apparatus external to the subject matter of this
    class.

    166,    Wells, for well apparatus having a seal where the well apparatus
    has a distinct feature (e.g.; above ground apparatus preventing upward or
    downward movement of an inner pipe, rod, or cable part depending into a
    well casing or tubing; above ground apparatus sealing the annular space
    between a broadly recited casing supported enclosure and an inner member;
    lateral port or valve on the tubular member above or below the packing;
    structural detail of the tubular member not contributing to the sealing
    function; etc.) other than sealing, subclasses 82.1+ for above ground
    apparatus having a releasable sealing or cleaning means for an inner part
    extending into the well; subclasses 84.1+ for above ground apparatus with a
    seal for a reciprocating part (e.g., sucker rod, etc.); subclasses 86.1+
    for above ground apparatus having a valve combined with anchoring or
    sealing means between a casing and an inner part; subclasses 88.1+ for
    above ground apparatus having a lateral port combined with anchoring or
    sealing means between a casing and an inner part, or subclasses 179+ for a
    packer or plug insertable from the top of a well into a well conduit to
    seal between a longitudinally extending tubular part and the well conduit,
    especially subclass 87 for a seal expanded by confined fluid from central
    chamber, pump or plunger and subclass 202 for a cup type seal.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, for an insulator and
    specialized apparatus to mount, support, encase, box, or house an
    electrical component, subclass 23 for means using or adapted to use a fluid
    or vacuum including a seal, subclass 35 for an electromagnetic shield or
    anti-inductive device that may be a gasket, subclass 65 for a box or
    housing structurally limited to electrical use or including an electrical
    device, that may include a seal between a cable and the box or housing, or
    subclasses 152+ for a grommet to insulate a conductor as it extends through
    a wall or plate.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, for processes and means for
    initially forming or radially enlarging an elongated hole in the earth in
    situ, subclasses 209+ for above ground means engaging bore entrance
    directing or receiving fluid or cuttings, subclass 214, for a seal located
    in a fluid head on a tool shaft, subclass 359 for mutually contacting
    cutter supports that are circumferentially displaced axes for a rolling
    cutter bit or rolling cutter bit element with seal details, or subclasses
    371+ for a rolling cutter bit or rolling cutter bit element with seal
    details.

    184,    Lubrication, for a unitized lubrication means removable or
    installable from one machine to on another and intended to lubricate a
    bearing part in a machine, subclasses 24+ for a piston rod lubricator or
    subclasses 104.1+ for a lubricator including a heating or cooling device.

    188,    Brakes, for means of retarding motion of or stopping of machines;
    subclasses 72.4+ for a fluid pressure piston axially actuating a brake
    element or housing against a wheel that may include a seal, subclasses
    73.44+ for an axially extending pin to retain an actuator axially slidable
    in a plane parallel to an axis of a rotating wheel that usually includes a
    seal, subclass 322.17 for an internal resistance motion retarder including
    a thrust component used to vary volume in a fluid-filled chamber having a
    particular retarder component structure with a dynamic sealing ring or
    flexible boot between a piston rod and cylinder, or subclass 322.18 for an
    internal resistance motion retarder including a thrust component used to
    vary volume in a fluid filled chamber having a particular retarder
    component structure with a dynamic sealing ring between a piston and
    cylinder.

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions; for a process of making an electrolytic coating
    not provided for elsewhere, subclasses 178+ for multiple superposed
    coatings having at least one chromium-containing coating, or subclasses
    283+ for a predominately chromium coating.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 450 for a filter in a
    flow line or a flow line connected closed casing having a gasket between
    the filter and walls of the casing (e.g., oil filter gasket, etc.).

    215,    Bottles and Jars, for a cap-type bottle or jar closure, subclass 45
    for neck structure to receive a particular closure including a seal,
    subclass 233 for a hardenable liquid or plastic seal where the closure
    seats on the bottle or jar; subclass 234 for a liquid seal located where
    the closure seats on the bottle or jar; or subclasses 341+ for a cap-type
    closure having an identifiable integral or separate seal or liner.

    220,    Receptacles, for a receptacle having an access opening and a
    removable closure for the opening and means to seal the juncture
    therebetween, subclass 228 for a liquid or semi-liquid gasket or subclass
    378 for a gasket or packing.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 542 for a seal provided for a joint, closure,
    or flow controller of a dispenser.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding; in general, for apparatus or method of
    joining the meeting faces of juxtaposed or engaged metal articles, of the
    same article originally in a form sustaining state, or a metal article to a
    nonmetal article, by direct application of heat or mechanical energy to the
    articles causing a flowing or blending of the meeting faces or causing a
    filler to flow or blend where the meeting faces to form a continuous
    interconnecting zone.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 216 for
    cooperating comminuting surfaces having a gyratory member that includes
    rotary motion and means to seal the comminuting zone from a drive or other
    moving parts.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, for means to close or restrict a flow
    of fluid through a passage by a definite predetermined motion of the means
    combined with a seal, subclasses 1.1+ for a plurality of relatively movable
    sealing members that control an annular passage between a well casing and a
    drill stem, axial rod or pipe; subclasses 171 for a gland member pressing a
    seal constituting a valve seat against a valve head; subclass 189 for
    separate actuators or different functions of the same actuator to increase
    contact pressure between piston type valves provided with expansible
    sealing and a seat; subclass 191 for means to increase the contact pressure
    between a piston-type valve having a seal that expands upon closing and a
    seat; subclass 214 for a valve actuated by a mechanical movement means and
    having a particularly associated sealing means for either; subclass 257 for
    a valve actuated by a cam encased in a valve body having a seal; subclasses
    306+ for a rotary butterfly valve having a seal carried by the valve or a
    valve seat; subclasses 314+ for a rotary valve and a seat therefor or a
    seal between the rotary valve and the seat; subclass 318 for a
    reciprocating valve having a seal made of nonresilient material on a
    reciprocating head element or seat made of a resilient material; subclasses
    335.1+ for a flexible wall seal between an actuator and valve; or subclass
    363 for a removable valve seat having a seal between the valve seat and its
    supporting structure.

    252,    Compositions; subclasses 62.51+ for a composition useful for a
    magnetic purpose or a process for making the composition; subclass 72 for a
    composition that contains an agent for stopping or reducing a leak in a
    container; or subclass 378 for a process of intumescing vermiculite, other
    micaceous substances or other materials, or a product of such a process,
    not provided for elsewhere.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    subclasses 239+ for mechanical shaping or molding to form or reform a
    shaped article, especially subclasses 259+ for a composite article created
    by shaping or forming molding material against and uniting to a preform.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, for means to secure in end-to-end or
    side-to-side relationship a pipe to another pipe, a plate, a wall, a
    receptacle, or other base where the means are independent from a seal
    (i.e., more than the frictional engagement of the seal secures a pipe end
    to another part) or a sleeve securing the pipe ends or another part;
    subclasses 95+ for a seal responsive to line pressure or means to test the
    seal by using line pressure, especially subclass 97 for a seal having an
    inflatable member having an external pressure supply; subclass 187 for
    temperature responsive means to maintain a good seal for expansion or
    contraction in the pipe coupling; or subclasses 335+ for a seal combined
    with the pipe joint or coupling.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, for a body secured to the running
    gear and a top therefor, subclass 93 for weatherstripping to seal between
    panels or between a windshield and the body or top.

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, for a wheel or axle, or where
    they are a dominant feature when combined with other vehicle structure;
    subclass 123 for a seal to exclude dirt or dust from a wheel or axle
    bearing.

    305,    Wheel Substitutes for Land Vehicles, subclasses 100+ for a flexible
    track joint structure (e.g., pin, link, etc.) including a seal, deflector,
    or scraper; or subclass 118 for a passageway in a connector pin to provide
    lubrication.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets; subclasses 209+ for a magnet or an electromagnet,
    configured or arranged to perform external mechanical work but does not
    include the external mechanical work.

    366,    Agitating, subclass 183.4 for a closed connection (e.g., sealed
    joint, etc.) between  a static conveyor with gravity discharge and a
    rotating mixing chamber.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 141+ for temperature
    sensing in combination with only a nominally recited diverse art device.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclasses 203+ for a seal at a joint or juncture between and combined with
    fluid confining structures (e.g., a nozzle, a vessel cover, etc.) of a
    nuclear reactor pressure vessel.

    384,    Bearings, for more than nominal bearing structure or detail (e.g.,
    liner, bearing race, cage, etc.) combined with a specific seal, subclasses
    130+ for a  plain radial bearing having a specific seal, especially the
    following subclasses: subclass 131 where fluid moves the seal; subclasses
    132+ where the seal is a barrier of liquid or gas; subclasses 135+ where
    centrifugal force moves or holds the seal in place; subclass 137 where the
    seal has means to remove excess lubricant from the shaft and return it to a
    lubricant reservoir or for removing material from the shaft about to enter
    the bearing from the outside; subclasses 139+ where the seal consists of a
    relatively rotatable radially extending sealing face member (e.g., face,
    mechanical, etc.); subclass 144 where the seal is a labyrinth seal;
    subclasses 145+ where the seal conforms to a bearing surface that has a
    shape of sphere to permit angular or lateral movement; subclasses 147+
    where the seal is a peripheral radially sealing flexible projection
    extending axially of a center of a seal seat to contact the relatively
    moving element to be sealed; subclass 149, where the seal is radially
    contained with an axially acting follower; subclass 150 where mechanical
    means (e.g., nut, separate resilient elements, etc.) moves the seal; or
    subclasses 151+ where the seal's material is resilient and on the outer
    area of the bearing or shaft; subclass 159 for a railway car journal
    bearing having a detailed seal; subclasses 477+ for a radial antifriction
    bearing having a specific seal, especially subclass 478 where centrifugal
    force loads the seal or a liquid or gas forms a sealing barrier; subclass
    479 where the seal establishes a pressure or pressure responsive means
    loads the seal; subclass 480 where the seal is a labyrinth seal; subclasses
    481+ where the seal is a relatively rotatable radially extending sealing
    face member (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.); subclass 483 where the seal is
    a radially contained seal with an axially acting follower; subclasses 484+
    where the seal is a peripheral radially sealing flexible projection
    contacting a relatively rotating surface parallel to the axis of rotation;
    subclass 488 where the seal is a radially extending, annular flange
    approaching but not contacting a relatively rotating member to
    substantially but not completely close an annular opening; subclass 489
    where the seal is a resilient O-ring seal; or subclass 607 for a thrust
    bearing having a seal.

    403,    Joints and Connections, for a joint or connection structure that
    goes beyond providing an environment for a seal; subclasses 50+ for a
    flexible diaphragm or bellows secured to each part; subclass 134 for a ball
    and socket having an external seal (i.e., remote from the bearing surface);
    subclasses 135+ for a ball and socket that may have a seal at the bearing
    interface; or subclass 288 for a seal distinct from the joint and
    unnecessary to the connection of parts.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 152 for method or
    apparatus to form an underground passageway (e.g., tunnel, etc.) lined by
    panels having a seal between adjacent panels.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-deformed, or
    Locked-threaded Fastener, for a fastener suited for general use, subclasses
    369+ for a headed threaded fastening means and nut having a washer and
    seal, or subclass 542 for a washer configured for a fastener having a seal.

    413,    Sheet Metal Container Making, for a process or apparatus for
    performing an attendant operation before final assembly of a lid to a
    receptacle, subclass 7 for a process of applying a sealant to an end joint
    between the lid and the receptacle; subclass 9 for a process of joining a
    preformed gasket or liner to the lid; subclasses 12+ for a process of
    fabricating a frangible end closure or assembling a frangible part to an
    end closure; subclasses 19+ for a process of applying liquid to form a
    gasket or liner on the lid; subclass 34 for apparatus to seam together the
    receptacle and lid using a roller die including means to apply a gasket or
    seal therebetween; subclasses 58+ for apparatus to form lid having means to
    apply seal or liner, or subclasses 67+ for apparatus to form lid having
    means to form frangible zone in lid.

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, for a means of guiding or
    confining (e.g., casing, distributing means, etc.) a working fluid (i.e., a
    liquid or gas that contacts or supports a rotary means that drives or is
    driven by the liquid or gas), subclass 109 for a rotating shaft having an
    abutment surface imparting motion in a sealing fluid inside a chamber;
    subclasses 110+ this may include a seal to separate a fluid path to an
    interior part of an assembly between relatively movable parts and the
    working fluid path; subclasses 170.1+ this may include a seal between the
    rotary means (e.g., runner, etc.) and a static part, or subclass 230 for a
    seal between a shaft or shaft sleeve, and a static part.

    417,    Pumps, for a general means to move a fluid from one place to
    another having an inlet and an outlet, subclass 423.11 for a rotary
    electric motor and rotary non expansible chamber pump having sealing means
    therebetween.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 55.4 for a helical
    working member (e.g., scroll, etc.) having planetary or planetating
    movement including a seal or subclasses 104+ for a working member having
    relative rotation to a surface of a working chamber to expand and contract
    the volume of the working chamber with a movable, expansible, adjustable,
    or deformable seal.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, for a generic class for alloys
    containing metal or metallic compositions that contain a continuous phase
    of metal, methods of making it not provided for elsewhere or "elemental"
    metal, per se.

    425,    Plastic Article Shaping or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:
    Apparatus; a generic class for apparatus not provided for elsewhere to mold
    a plastic, shape molten materials where no molding surface is employed,
    treating a product made by the apparatus of this class, randomly deposit
    and bond particulate material, or a combination of apparatus of this class
    with any diverse working or treating apparatus, Digest 47 for a seal ring.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, a residual class for a
    structurally defined stock material, nonstructural laminate, an article of
    manufacture or intermediate article of manu- facture, not provided for
    elsewhere; subclasses 131+ for a structurally defined web or sheet (e.g.,
    an overall dimension, etc.) including  an aperture; subclasses 320.2+
    comprising a single or plural web or sheet that contains components where
    at least one contains a liquid or has a constituent trapped inside
    preformed walls;  subclasses 357+ containing or consisting of a strand,
    fiber, grain, cell, particle, or any substance in terms of a particular
    size or  shape, a plurality or such arranged relative to one another, a
    particular interengagement of a plurality of such or a coating associated
    therewith; subclasses 367+ containing carbon as an element or compound, and
    consisting of or coating a rod, strand, filament or fiber; subclass 406
    containing or consisting of particulate matter comprising glass having a
    particular size or shape and a coating; subclasses 411.1+ for a composition
    of layers adhered or cohered to each other; subclass 426 for layers adhered
    or cohered to each other where a layer contains glass that may be in fiber
    or mat form; subclasses 544+ for metallic; subclasses 615+ comprising
    different contiguous layers or portions, each having a matrix or continuous
    phase of free metal; or subclasses 616+ comprising different contiguous
    layers or portions, each having a matrix or continuous phase of free metal
    having the property of bending or lengthening in a circular fashion in
    response to an increase in temperature.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    subclass 25 for a process of display or gas panel making including a seal
    not elsewhere classified.

    432,    Heating, subclass 115 for a rotary drum mounted for rotation about
    a horizontal or slightly inclined axis, the rotation of the rotary drum
    imparting a tumbling motion to material placed therein, forming a juncture
    against a stationary part with a flexible seal, cooler seal, or an air
    curtain-type flow controller therebetween to prevent escape of the rotary
    drum's atmosphere or subclass 244 for a heating device specialized to feed
    or discharge a work chamber including a seal at the chamber's wall for
    conveyor arm or shaft.

    433,    Dentistry, subclass 115 for a seal in a motorized handheld tool or
    handpiece.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, for a generic electrical connection between
    at least two conducting elements permitting relative motion or where the
    connection is a readily made or broken type, subclass 89 for a seal to a
    connector having inductive shielding or arc suppressing means including an
    elastomeric or nonmetallic conductive portion; subclasses 271+ for a
    sealing element or material for cooperation with the coupled connector
    (e.g., gasket, etc.); subclass 559 for a seal to a coupling part that
    extends into a panel opening; or subclass 927 for a conductive gasket.

    440,    Marine Propulsion, for a vessel and a device (e.g., propeller,
    impeller, etc.) other than a sail to move the vessel through water,
    subclass 112 for means to mount an engine within the vessel's hull and
    sealing means for a propeller shaft that pierces the hull.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 28+ for a process of performing an abrading
    operation (i.e., where the sharp edges of mineral crystals form the cutting
    instrument) and a process of performing an ancillary operation not provided
    for elsewhere.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, subclass 131 for a drive coupling that accommodates
    misaligned or angularly related axes through a radially directed pin having
    a particular bearing cup surrounding the pin end and a flexible seal,
    subclass 133 for a drive coupling that accommodates misaligned or angularly
    related axes through a radially directed pin and a flexible seal or
    subclasses 173+ for a flexible boot for a joint to transmit rotary torque.

    494,    Imperforate Bowl:  Centrifugal Separators, for an apparatus or
    process that breaks down or subdivides a mixture of fluent material into
    components by using a receptaclelike part having a wall to subject the
    material to centrifugal force, subclass 38+ including a seal.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, subclasses 1+ for inorganic compositions
    other than Portland cement or cementitious material prepared from gypsum
    that are heat-treated by firing, calcining, sintering, or fusion of a part
    of the inorganic material during manufacturing or subsequent use to effect
    hardening or fusion followed by hardening when cooled and processes not
    provided for elsewhere, and especially subclasses 11+ for a glass
    composition or a composition intended to be heat-treated to form a glass.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process, subclass
    165 for a high temperature (tc greater than 30 k) system, device, or
    component utilizing suspension of superconducting particulate material in
    liquid (e.g., seal, pump, etc.).

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers,  subclasses 1+ are the generic
    subclasses for a synthetic resin or natural rubber preparation, and
    composition containing or treatment thereof is to be considered an integral
    part of Class 260 retaining all pertinent definitions and class lines, and
    having Classes 521, 522, 523, 524, 525, 526, 527, and 528 indented
    thereunder.

    523,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 179 for a process of
    preparing a desired or intentional composition of at least one solid
    polymer or specified intermediate condensation product, or product thereof
    having utility as an ablative, or an intumescent coating composition is
    claimed or solely disclosed, or to processes or preparation thereof.

    III.    GLOSSARY

    FLUID(S)

    A liquid, gas, or particulate matter (e.g., dust, etc.) suspended in a
    liquid or gas.

    MEMBER(S)

    These are component(s) that make up the seal.

    PART(S)

    These are component(s) (e.g., housing, casing, rod, shaft, etc.) of the
    joint or juncture.


CLS 277/300
TXT PROCESS OF DYNAMIC SEALING:

    Sealing means under the class definition comprising use of the sealing
    means to oppose the flow of fluid at the joint or juncture between
    relatively movable parts and having a relatively movable relationship to at
    least one of the parts.

    (1)     Note.  Relative movement between the parts need only occur at one
    time during the operation of the parts being sealed while maintaining
    sealing during movement, but such movement excludes assembly or disassembly
    such as the unscrewing of a packed, threaded pipe joint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312+,   for a process of static sealing.

    345+,   for a seal between relatively movable parts (i.e., a dynamic seal).


CLS 277/301
TXT Close proximity seal (e.g., contactless, fluent, etc.):

    Process of dynamic sealing under subclass 300 wherein the sealing means is
    free of relatively movable sealing contact against the relatively movable
    parts and capable of acting upon or causing sealed or sealing fluid to
    oppose the flow of fluid at the joint or juncture between the relatively
    movable parts.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses are for a sealing means not
    dependent upon the physical contact between a sealing member and a
    relatively movable part to affect sealing such as abrading or frictional
    contact that forms a positive seal at the point of contact.

    (2)     Note.  In a close proximity seal (e.g., contactless, fluent, etc.)
    a distance between a sealing member and a part or another sealing member is
    not dependent upon rotational speed between relatively movable parts
    whereas in a hydrodynamic relatively rotatable radially extending sealing
    face member (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.) the distance will change when
    the rotational speed from normal operation to slower or nonrotational
    speeds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    409+,   for a dynamic, close proximity seal (e.g., contactless, fluent,
    etc.).

    904,    for a seal formed by a viscous fluid usually contained by one or
    more physical, contacting-type seals.


CLS 277/302
TXT Magnetic:

    Close proximity seal under subclass 301 wherein the sealing means uses a
    polar field to control the movement of fluent material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 62.51+ for a composition useful for a
    magnetic purpose or a process for making the composition, not provided for
    elsewhere.


CLS 277/303
TXT Labyrinth:

    Close proximity seal under subclass 301 wherein the sealing means uses a
    succession of baffles that define a clearance between each other or an
    additional member to provide a series of throttling zones.


CLS 277/304
TXT Formed by pressurized sealing fluid introduced to form barrier:

    Close proximity seal under subclass 301 wherein the joint or juncture has
    sealing fluid introduced into it at a pressure equal to or greater than the
    pressure of the sealed fluid to oppose the flow of the sealed fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    926,    for a seal for other than a process of dynamic close proximity seal
    (e.g., contactless, fluent, etc.) created by pressurized sealing fluid
    introduced to form a barrier having means to create a fluid pressure
    equilibrium at a joint or juncture.

    927,    for a seal for other than a process of dynamic close proximity seal
    (e.g., contactless, fluent, etc.) created by pressurized sealing fluid
    introduced to form a barrier having means to create a fluid pressure
    different from the sealed fluid pressure.


CLS 277/305
TXT Floating ring or bushing:

    Close proximity seal under subclass 301 wherein the seal is an annular or
    tubular seal forming a gap or clearance between the relatively movable
    parts and having relative movement between the relatively movable parts to
    oppose the flow of fluid.

    (1)     Note.  A floater-type seal has relative motion between the
    relatively movable parts it seals between, whereas a seal that accommodates
    gyratory or oscillatory motion is capable of sealing relatively movable
    parts that move angularly, axially, or perpendicularly to its main axis of
    motion.


CLS 277/306
TXT Relatively rotatable radially extending sealing face member (e.g., face,
    mechanical, etc.):

    Process of dynamic sealing under subclass 300 including at least one of a
    pair of opposing surface members relatively rotating at the joint or
    juncture that defines a sealing face and wherein the joint or juncture is
    at an angle to a rotational axis formed between the relatively movable
    parts.

    (1)     Note.  In a hydrodynamic relatively rotatable radially extending
    sealing face member (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.) a distance between a
    sealing member and a part or another sealing member will change when the
    rotational speed between relatively movable parts goes from normal
    operation to slower or non-rotational speeds whereas in a close proximity
    seal (e.g., contactless, fluent, etc.) the distance is not dependent upon
    rotational speed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    358+,   for a relatively rotatable radially extending sealing face member
    (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.).


CLS 277/307
TXT Formed by flexible projection:

    Process of dynamic sealing under subclass 306 wherein the sealing member is
    a pliant or resilient extension.


CLS 277/308
TXT Contained or compressed by gland member in packing box:

    Process of dynamic sealing under subclass 300 wherein the seal is intended
    for use in a chamber having an axially opened end to receive the seal and a
    member that substantially closes the open end to retain or squeeze the seal
    within the chamber while having an opening for passage for one of the
    relatively movable parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329+,   for a seal for well apparatus where the seal is in a packing box
    contained or compressed by a gland member.

    510+,   for a dynamic, circumferential contact seal for other than a piston
    intended to be contained or compressed by a gland member in a packing box.


CLS 277/309
TXT Peripheral radially sealing flexible projection (e.g., lip, piston cup
    seal, etc.):

    Process of dynamic sealing under subclass 300 wherein the sealing means is
    a pliant or resilient extension having a tip for relatively movable contact
    to an inner or outer perimeter of one of the relatively movable parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    311,    for a process of dynamic sealing employing a flexible ring.

    436+,   for a piston ring having a peripheral radially sealing flexible
    projection (e.g., piston cup, etc.).

    549+,   for a dynamic, circumferential contact seal for other than a piston
    having a peripheral, radially sealing, flexible projection (e.g., lip seal,
    etc.).


CLS 277/310
TXT Piston ring for internal combustion engine:

    Process of dynamic sealing under subclass 300 wherein the sealing means is
    an annulus for use on a part (i.e., a piston) that reciprocates along an
    axis of an enclosing wall of an internal combustion engine and the seal is
    for engaging the wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    311,    for a process of dynamic sealing employing a flexible ring.

    434+,   for a piston ring or piston ring expander or seat therefor.


CLS 277/311
TXT Flexible ring:

    Process of dynamic sealing under subclass 300 wherein the sealing means is
    a pliant or resilient annulus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    309,    for a process of dynamic sealing employing a peripheral, radially
    sealing, flexible projection (e.g., lip seal, piston cup, etc.).

    310,    for a process of dynamic sealing employing a piston ring for an
    internal combustion engine.

    434+,   for a piston ring or piston ring expander,or seat therefor.

    500+,   for a dynamic, circumferential contact seal for other than a piston.


CLS 277/312
TXT PROCESS OF STATIC SEALING:

    Sealing means under the class definition comprising use of the sealing
    means to oppose a flow of fluid at the joint or juncture between stationary
    or relatively movable parts and having a fixed relationship to the parts.

    (1)     Note.  Some relative movement is permissible due to such examples
    as expansion, contraction, slippage, or variable pressure load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300+,   for a process of dynamic sealing.

    590+,   for a seal between fixed parts or having a fixed relationship
    against relatively movable parts.


CLS 277/313
TXT Between parts of internal combustion engine:

    Process of static sealing under subclass 312 wherein the sealing means is
    for use at the joint or juncture between static parts of an internal
    combustion engine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    591+,   for a static contact seal intended for use between parts of an
    internal combustion engine.


CLS 277/314
TXT Pipe, conduit, or cable:

    Process of static sealing under subclass 312 intended for use on an
    extended hollow or electrically insulated conductor part to seal the joint
    or juncture between concentric extended hollow or electrically insulated
    conductor parts; the extended hollow or electrically insulated part's end,
    and another extended hollow or electrically insulated conductor part's end;
    or the extended hollow part or electrically insulated conductor, and a wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    602+,   for a static contact seal intended for use on a pipe, conduit, or
    cable.


CLS 277/315
TXT Using flexible sleeve, boot, or diaphragm:

    Process of static sealing under subclass 312 wherein the sealing means has
    a flexible wall member to accommodate relatively movable parts allowing
    static contact sealing against the parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    389,    for a relatively rotatable radially extending sealing face member
    (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.) including fluid pressure acting against a
    bellows or diaphragm to create an axial bias therefor.

    391+,   for a relatively rotatable, radially extending, sealing face member
    (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.) including a flexible sleeve, boot, or
    diaphragm to provide a secondary seal or driving connection therefor.

    504,    for a dynamic, circumferential contact seal for other than a piston
    that accommodates gyratory or oscillatory motion by using a flexible
    connection having static contact between the seal and one of the relatively
    movable parts.

    634+,   for a static contact flexible sleeve, boot, or diaphragm seal for
    other than an internal combustion engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable.


CLS 277/316
TXT Forming in place (i.e., in situ):

    Process of static sealing under subclass 312 wherein the sealing means is a
    sealing material initially in a fluent or transient state introduced into
    the joint or juncture between the relatively static parts where it
    transforms into its final functional condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    subclasses 239+ for mechanical shaping or molding to form or reform a
    shaped article, especially subclasses 259+ for a composite article created
    by shaping or forming molding material against and uniting to a preform.

    413,    Sheet Metal Container Making, for a process or apparatus for
    performing an attendant operation before final assembly of a lid to a
    receptacle, subclass 7 for a process of applying a sealant to an end joint
    between the lid and the receptacle, subclass 9 for a process of joining a
    preformed gasket or liner to the lid, or subclasses 19+ for a process of
    applying liquid to form a gasket or liner on the lid,


CLS 277/317
TXT SEAL COMBINED WITH INDICATOR, SAMPLER, OR INSPECTION FEATURE:

    Sealing means under the class definition combined with other means to
    display, test, or examine a condition or function of the sealing means or a
    chamber for the sealing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, for a detailed structure or method for
    measuring or testing, subclasses 863+ for obtaining a predetermined portion
    of a mass of material to be tested or subclass 865.8 for apparatus or
    process for sensing and signaling, or for indicating a physical condition.


CLS 277/318
TXT Fluid pressure:

    Indicator, sampler, or inspection feature under subclass 317 wherein the
    condition or function is force per unit area exerted by a liquid or gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, for a detailed structure or method for
    measuring or testing, subclasses 700+ for direct measurement of fluid
    pressure.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, for a specifically recited and detailed
    mechanical device for giving signals of the nature of an alarm or indicator
    that appeals to any one or more of the senses and combined with nominal
    apparatus structure from other classes, subclass 70 for a fluid-pressure
    variation alarm giving audible indication usually operated automatically,
    or subclasses 266+ for a pressure indicator having means to convey
    information to one of the senses.


CLS 277/319
TXT Fluid temperature:

    Indicator, sampler, or inspection feature under subclass 317 wherein the
    condition or function is a measure of warmth or coldness of a liquid or gas
    using a reference to some standard value.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, for a specifically recited and detailed
    mechanical device for giving signals of the nature of an alarm or indicator
    that appeals to any one or more of the senses and combined with nominal
    apparatus structure from other classes, subclasses 101+ for a thermal alarm
    giving audible indication usually operated automatically, or subclasses
    216+ for a temperature responsive or compensating means indicator having
    means to convey information to one of the senses.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 141+ for temperature
    sensing in combination with only a nominally recited diverse art device.


CLS 277/320
TXT Fluid leakage:

    Indicator, sampler, or inspection feature under subclass 317 wherein the
    condition or function is escape or entry of fluid for the sealing means or
    chamber for the sealing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, for a detailed structure or method for
    measuring or testing, subclasses 46+ for testing or determining leakage
    between parts mechanically fitted together and capable of being separated
    without destruction.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, for a specifically recited and detailed
    mechanical device for giving signals of the nature of an alarm or indicator
    that appeals to any one or more of the senses and combined with nominal
    apparatus structure from other classes, subclasses 109+ for a liquid level
    alarm giving audible indication usually operated automatically, subclass
    112 for a fluid flow alarm giving audible indication usually operated
    automatically, or subclasses 227+ for a liquid level indicator having means
    to convey information to one of the senses.


CLS 277/321
TXT Wear, proper seating, or presence:

    Indicator, sampler, or inspection feature under subclass 317 wherein the
    means shows deterioration, proper or improper positioning, or location to
    aid in sealing to oppose the flow of fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, for a detailed structure or method for
    measuring or testing, subclasses 7+ for a measurement or test made
    involving any one or any combination of operations of abrasion, milling,
    rubbing, or scuffing.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, for a specifically recited and detailed
    mechanical device for giving signals of the nature of an alarm or indicator
    that appeals to any one or more of the senses and combined with nominal
    apparatus structure from other classes, subclass 208 for a wear indicator
    for an element having means to convey information to one of the senses.


CLS 277/322
TXT SEAL FOR WELL APPARATUS:

    Sealing means under the class definition wherein the sealing means is for
    use in a device or mechanism that extracts fluid from earth (e.g., a well,
    pump, etc.) or bores or penetrates the earth.

    (1)     Note.  Art terms such as packer, polish rod, stringer, tool, swab,
    shoe, etc., describe well or well-drilling apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, for well apparatus having a seal where the well apparatus
    has a distinct feature (e.g.; above ground apparatus preventing upward or
    downward movement of an inner pipe, rod, or cable part depending into a
    well casing or tubing; above ground apparatus sealing the annular space
    between a broadly recited casing supported enclosure and an inner member;
    lateral port or valve on the tubular member above or below the packing;
    structural detail of the tubular member not contributing to the sealing
    function; etc.) other than sealing, subclasses 82.1+ for above ground
    apparatus having a releasable sealing or cleaning means for an inner part
    extending into the well, subclasses 84.1+ for above ground apparatus with a
    seal for a reciprocating part (e.g., sucker rod, etc.), subclasses  86.1+
    for above ground apparatus having a valve combined with anchoring or
    sealing means between a casing and an inner part, subclasses 88.1+ for
    above ground apparatus having a lateral port combined with anchoring or
    sealing means between a casing and an inner part, or subclasses 179+ for a
    packer or plug insertable from the top of a well into a well conduit to
    seal between a longitudinally extending tubular part and the well conduit,
    especially subclass 87 for a seal expanded by confined fluid from central
    chamber, pump, or plunger, and subclass 202 for a cup-type seal.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, for processes and means for
    initially forming or radially enlarging an elongated hole in the earth, in
    situ, subclasses 209+ for above ground means engaging bore entrance
    directing or receiving fluid or cuttings, subclass 214 for a seal located
    in a fluid head on a tool shaft, subclass 359 for mutually contacting
    cutter supports that are circumferentially displaced axes for a rolling
    cutter bit or rolling cutter bit element with seal details, or subclasses
    371+ for a rolling cutter bit or rolling cutter bit element with seal
    details.


CLS 277/323
TXT Installation, removal, assembly, disassembly, or repair feature:

    Seal for well apparatus under subclass 322 including means to aid in
    mounting, extricating, construction, dismantling, or restoration of the
    seal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370+,   for a relatively rotatable extending sealing face member (e.g.,
    face, mechanical, etc.) having an installation, removal, assembly,
    disassembly, or repair feature.

    421,    for a close proximity labyrinth seal having an installation,
    removal, assembly, disassembly, or repair feature.

    435,    for a piston ring, piston ring expander or seat therefore having an
    installation, removal, assembly, disassembly, or repair feature.

    511,    for a dynamic, circumferential contact seal intended for
    containment or compression by a gland member in a packing box having an
    installation, removal, assembly, disassembly, or repair feature.

    551,    for a dynamic, peripheral, radially sealing, flexible projection
    (e.g., lip seal, etc.) for other than a piston having an installation,
    removal, assembly, disassembly, or repair feature.

    598,    for a static contact seal for use between parts of an internal
    combustion engine having an installation, removal, assembly, disassembly,
    or repair feature.

    609,    for a static contact seal intended for insertion between an
    end-to-end pipe, conduit, or cable joint having an installation, removal,
    assembly, disassembly, or repair feature.

    630,    for a static contact seal for other than an internal combustion
    engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable having an installation, removal,
    assembly, disassembly, or repair feature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, for a method of mechanical manufacture or apparatus
    to assemble or disassemble, subclass 402.02 for a method of repairing a
    seal or element thereof not provided for elsewhere, or subclasses 700+ for
    general apparatus to assemble or disassemble, especially subclass 236 for
    an apparatus to apply or remove a resilient well protector from a well
    sucker rod.


CLS 277/324
TXT For overpressure control device (e.g., seal for a blowout preventer, etc.):

    Seal for well apparatus under subclass 322 wherein the seal is for use in
    an annular passage formed between an inner part (e.g., cable, drill stem,
    pipe, rod, rope, string, tubing, etc.) and a surrounding part (e.g., well
    casing, tubing head, etc.) intended to regulate a higher than normal
    pressure condition or prevent upward movement of the inner part (e.g.,
    cable, drill stem, pipe, rod, rope, string, tubing, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    584,    for a dynamic, circumferential contact seal for other than a piston
    having an extrusion preventing (i.e., anti-extrusion) structure.

    611,    for a static contact seal intended for insertion between an
    end-to-end pipe, conduit, or cable joint having an extrusion preventing
    (i.e., anti-extrusion) or compression limiting feature.

    616+,   for a static contact seal intended for use on a pipe, conduit, or
    cable having an associated mounting or retaining means for the seal.

    638,    for a static contact seal for other than an internal combustion
    engine, or a pipe, conduit or cable including a particular extrusion
    preventing (i.e., anti-extrusion), mounting, or retaining means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, for means to close or restrict a flow
    of fluid through a passage by a definite predetermined motion of the means
    combined with a seal, subclasses 1.1+ for a plurality of relatively movable
    sealing members that control an annular passage between a well casing and a
    drill stem, axial rod, or pipe.


CLS 277/325
TXT Segmented radially actuated (e.g., ram type, etc.):

    Overpressure control device under subclass 324 wherein the seal is divided
    into portions and intended for movement in a plane perpendicular to an
    annular axial flow path formed by the annular passage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    344,    for a segmented and radially actuated seal (e.g., oil saver, gas
    saver, etc.) for well apparatus.

    543+,   for a dynamic segmented ring circumferentially contacting seal for
    other than a piston.

    626,    for a static contact seal having a particular seal shape intended
    for use on a pipe, conduit or cable.

    632,    for a peripherally segmented static contact seal for other than an
    internal combustion engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable.


CLS 277/326
TXT Rotatable:

    Overpressure control device under subclass 324 wherein the seal is part of
    an assembly fixed to the inner part (e.g., cable, drill stem, pipe, rod,
    rope, string, tubing, etc.) that rotates relative to the surrounding part
    (e.g., well casing, tubing head, etc.).


CLS 277/327
TXT Axially compressed ring:

    Overpressure control device under subclass 324 wherein the seal has an
    annular shape and is concentric to the annular passage including means
    acting along an annular axial flow path formed by the annular passage axis
    to squeeze the seal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    328+,   for a seal for above ground well apparatus actuated along its
    longitudinal axis.


CLS 277/328
TXT Longitudinally actuated packer for above ground apparatus:

    Seal for well apparatus under subclass 322 wherein the seal is between
    axially spaced members where one or more of the members axially bias the
    seal into sealing engagement at the joint or juncture between the part
    (e.g., axial rod, pipe, drill stem, etc.) surrounded by another part (e.g.,
    well casing) intended to function or remain at ground level.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327,    for a sealing ring for well apparatus having an overpressure
    control device that works by axially compressing the seal.


CLS 277/329
TXT Contained or compressed by gland member in packing box:

    Longitudinally actuated packer under subclass 328 wherein the seal is
    intended for use in a well apparatus having a chamber including an axially
    opened end to receive the seal and a member that substantially closes the
    open end to retain or squeeze the seal within the chamber while having an
    opening for passage for one of the parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    308,    for a process of dynamic sealing employing a seal to be contained
    or compressed by a gland member in a packing box.

    510+,   for a dynamic, circumferential contact seal for other than a piston
    intended to be contained or compressed by a gland member in a packing box.

    620+,   for a static contact seal intended for use on a pipe, conduit, or
    cable including a clamping gland.


CLS 277/330
TXT For line or cable:

    Seal for well apparatus under subclass 329 wherein the part (e.g., axial
    rod, pipe, drill stem, etc.) is a wire or cord.


CLS 277/331
TXT Inflatable packer:

    Seal for well apparatus under subclass 322 including a member having a
    cavity or chamber therein or forms a cavity or chamber that includes one of
    the parts of the joint or juncture in the well apparatus for entry of a
    pressurized fluid to expand at least a portion of the sealing means into
    position against another part of the joint or juncture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    336+,   for a seal intended for use in below ground well apparatus.

    605,    for a hollow, fluid-filled, or inflatable static contact seal or an
    associated member intended for use on a pipe, conduit, or cable.

    646,    for a static contact seal having a hollow or fluid filled
    inflatable chamber for other than an internal combustion engine, or a pipe,
    conduit, or cable.


CLS 277/332
TXT Deforms radially inward:

    Inflatable packer under subclass 331 for internal expansion against the
    part (e.g., rod, shaft, tubing, line, cable, etc.) extending through the
    inflatable packer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    583,    for a dynamic inflatable or biased by an inflatable member
    circumferential contact seal for other than a piston.


CLS 277/333
TXT And inflating medium control:

    Inflatable packer under subclass 331 and a device or mechanism to regulate
    the pressurized fluid.


CLS 277/334
TXT Particular wall structure:

    Inflatable packer under subclass 331 wherein the expanded portion of the
    sealing means or the sealing means biased by the expandable member has
    specific construction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    340+,   for a longitudinally actuated packing sleeve for below ground well
    apparatus having a particular wall structure.


CLS 277/335
TXT Axially facing packing cup:

    Seal for well apparatus under subclass 322 wherein the seal has an open
    containerlike shape or form (e.g., C, U, V, etc.) radially extending to a
    longitudinal axis of one of the parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    439,    for a piston ring including a peripheral, radially sealing,
    flexible projection having a C, U, or V cross-sectional profile forming an
    axially facing cup (e.g., piston cup, etc.).

    626,    for a static contact seal having a particular seal shape intended
    for use on a pipe, conduit, or cable.


CLS 277/336
TXT For below ground apparatus:

    Seal for well apparatus under subclass 322 wherein the seal's use is on a
    device intended to function below earth level.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331+,   for an inflatable packer-type seal for well apparatus.


CLS 277/337
TXT Longitudinally actuated packer:

    Below ground apparatus under subclass 336 wherein the seal's intended use
    is between axially spaced members and biased into sealing engagement by
    axial movement of at least one of the members.


CLS 277/338
TXT Packing sleeve:

    Longitudinally actuated packer under subclass 337 wherein the seal has an
    elongated tubular form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    585,    for a dynamic, circumferential contacting, elongated sleeve or
    bushing for other than a piston.

    607,    for a sleeve-type, static contact seal intended for a pipe,
    conduit, or cable.


CLS 277/339
TXT Expanded by wedging member:

    Packing sleeve under subclass 338 includes a member having an inclined
    surface to radially bias the packing sleeve.


CLS 277/340
TXT Particular wall structure:

    Packing sleeve under subclass 338 wherein the packing sleeve has specific
    construction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334,    for an inflatable packer for well apparatus having a particular
    wall structure.


CLS 277/341
TXT Reinforcing feature:

    Particular wall structure under subclass 340 wherein the wall structure
    includes means to strengthen the wall.


CLS 277/342
TXT Plural stacked rings:

    Longitudinally actuated packer under subclass 337 comprising annular seals
    arranged axially in series.


CLS 277/343
TXT Seal (e.g., wiper, oil saver, stripper, etc.) accommodates irregular size
    of inner part:

    Seal for well apparatus under subclass 322 wherein the seal surrounds and
    adjusts to an inside part (e.g., tubing, string, rod, etc.) having varying
    proportions and intended to clean by rubbing or pushing off adherent
    foreign matter.


CLS 277/344
TXT Segmented radially actuated packer (e.g., oil saver, gas saver, etc.) for
    above ground apparatus:

    Seal for well apparatus under subclass 322 wherein the seal is divided into
    portions intended for movement in a direction perpendicular to and seal an
    annular axial flow path formed at the joint or juncture between the part
    (e.g., axial rod, pipe, drill stem, etc.) surrounded by another part (e.g.,
    well casing) intended to function or remain at ground level.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    325,    for a segmented and radially actuated (e.g., ram-type, etc.) seal
    for a well apparatus overpressure control device (e.g., seal for a blowout
    preventer, etc.).

    543+,   for a dynamic, segmented ring circumferentially contacting seal for
    other than a piston.

    626,    for a static contact seal having a particular seal shape intended
    for use on a pipe, conduit, or cable.

    632,    for a peripherally segmented static contact seal for other than an
    internal combustion engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable.


CLS 277/345
TXT SEAL BETWEEN RELATIVELY MOVABLE PARTS (I.E., DYNAMIC SEAL):

    Sealing means under the class definition comprising sealing means to oppose
    the flow of fluid at the joint or juncture between relatively movable parts
    and having a relatively movable relationship to at least one of the parts.

    (1)     Note.  Relative movement between the parts need only occur at one
    time during the operation of the parts being sealed while maintaining
    sealing during movement, but such movement excludes assembly or disassembly
    such as the unscrewing of a packed threaded pipe joint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300+,   for a process of dynamic sealing.

    590+,   for a seal between fixed parts or having a fixed relationship
    against relatively movable parts.

    906,    for a seal for a part having indefinite length (e.g., strip, sheet,
    etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 542 for a seal provided for a joint, closure
    or flow controller of a dispenser.

    366,    Agitating, subclass 183.4 for a closed connection (e.g., sealed
    joint, etc.) between a static conveyor with gravity discharge and a
    rotating mixing chamber.

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, for a means of guiding or
    confining (e.g., casing, distributing means, etc.) a working fluid (i.e., a
    liquid or gas that contacts or supports a rotary means that drives or is
    driven by the liquid or gas), subclass 109 for a rotating shaft having an
    abutment surface imparting motion in a sealing fluid inside a chamber,
    subclasses 110+ for a seal to separate a fluid path to an interior part of
    an assembly between relatively movable parts and the working fluid path,
    subclasses 170.1+ for a seal between the rotary means (e.g., runner, etc.)
    and a static part, or subclass 230 for a seal between a shaft or shaft
    sleeve and a static part.

    494,    Imperforate Bowl: Centrifugal Separators, for an apparatus or
    process that breaks down or subdivides a mixture of fluent material into
    components by using a receptaclelike part having a wall to subject the
    material to centrifugal force, subclasses 38+ including a seal.


CLS 277/346
TXT Diverse and distinct dynamic seals:

    Dynamic seal under subclass 345 includes disparate seal types
    distinguishable from each other and are for location on associated parts of
    the joint or juncture to constitute a sealing assembly.

    (1)     Note.  The components forming the sealing assembly may  not be part
    of a single (e.g., removable, etc.) unit.

    (2)     Note.  Seals consisting exclusively of the same type (e.g., lip,
    mechanical, labyrinth, impeller, etc.) are not proper for this or indented
    subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  A translatable seal (e.g., floater, etc.) that carries
    thereon another diverse seal is not distinct.

    (4)     Note. Cross diverse and distinct dynamic seals into subclasses for
    the seal types.


CLS 277/347
TXT Close proximity seal (e.g., contactless, fluent, etc.):

    Diverse and distinct dynamic seals under subclass 346 wherein the sealing
    means is free of relatively movable sealing contact relating to the
    relatively movable parts and capable of acting upon or causing a sealed or
    sealing fluid to oppose the flow of fluid at the joint or juncture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301+,   for a process of dynamic close proximity sealing (e.g.,
    contactless, fluent, etc.).

    409+,   for a dynamic close proximity seal (e.g., contactless, fluent,
    etc.).

    904,    for a seal formed by a viscous fluid usually contained by one or
    more physical contacting type seals.


CLS 277/348
TXT And relatively rotatable radially extending contacting sealing members
    (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.):

    Close proximity seal under subclass 347 and at least one of a pair of
    opposing surface members relatively rotating at the joint or juncture that
    defines a sealing face and wherein the joint or juncture is at an angle to
    a rotational axis formed between the relatively movable parts.

    (1)     Note.  A hydrodynamic, relatively rotatable, radially extending,
    sealing face member (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.) will only have a gap
    during normal rotational operation and will close its gap under slower or
    nonrotational speeds whereas a close proximity seal (e.g., contactless, ,
    etc.) of the impeller type always has a gap between a fluent impeller and a
    part or another sealing member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306+,   for a process of using a relatively rotatable, radially extending,
    sealing face member (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.).

    352+,   for diverse and distinct dynamic seals having a relatively
    rotatable, radially extending, sealing face member (e.g., face, mechanical,
    etc.) and other than a close proximity seal (e.g., contactless, fluent,
    etc.).

    358+,   for a relatively rotatable, radially extending, sealing face member
    (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.).


CLS 277/349
TXT And circumferential peripheral radially sealing flexible projection (e.g.,
    lip seal, etc.):

    Face or mechanical seal under subclass 348 and a pliant or resilient
    extension having a tip for relatively movable contact to an inner or outer
    perimeter of one of the parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    309,    for a process of dynamic sealing employing a peripheral, radially
    sealing, flexible projection (e.g., lip seal, piston cup, etc.).

    549+,   for a dynamic, circumferential contact seal for other than a piston
    having a peripheral, radially sealing, flexible projection (e.g., lip seal,
    etc.).


CLS 277/350
TXT And circumferential contact seal:

    Close proximity seal under subclass 347 and the seal having radial,
    peripheral, surface contact against one or more of the relatively movable
    parts.


CLS 277/351
TXT Peripheral radially sealing flexible projection (e.g., lip seal, etc.):

    Circumferential contact seal under subclass 350 wherein the seal is a
    pliant or resilient extension having a tip for relatively movable contact
    to an inner or outer perimeter of one of the parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    309,    for a process of dynamic sealing employing a peripheral, radially
    sealing, flexible projection (e.g., lip seal, piston cup, etc.).

    549+,   for a dynamic, circumferential contact seal for other than a piston
    having a peripheral, radially sealing, flexible projection (e.g., lip seal,
    etc.).


CLS 277/352
TXT Relatively rotatable radially extending contacting sealing members (e.g.,
    face, mechanical, etc.):

    Diverse and distinct dynamic seals under subclass 346 including at least
    one of a pair of opposing surface members relatively rotating at the joint
    or juncture that defines a sealing face and wherein the joint or juncture
    is at an angle to a rotational axis formed between the relatively movable
    parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306+,   for a process of using a relatively rotatable, radially extending,
    sealing face member (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.).

    348+,   for diverse and distinct dynamic seals including a close proximity
    seal (e.g., contactless, fluent, etc.) and a relatively rotatable, radially
    extending, sealing face member (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.).

    358+,   for a relatively rotatable, radially extending, sealing face member
    (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.).


CLS 277/353
TXT And circumferential peripheral radially sealing flexible projection (e.g.,
    lip seal, etc.):

    Diverse and distinct dynamic seals under subclass 352 and a pliant or
    resilient extension having a tip for relatively movable contact to an inner
    or outer perimeter of one of the parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    309,    for a process of dynamic sealing employing a peripheral radially
    sealing flexible projection (e.g., lip seal, piston cup, etc.).

    549+,   for a dynamic circumferential contact seal for other than a piston
    having a peripheral radially sealing flexible projection (e.g., lip seal,
    etc.).


CLS 277/354
TXT Helically threaded part:

    Dynamic seal under subclass 345 wherein at least one of the parts has an
    indent or projection wound twistlike about its surface and has relative
    movement to the seal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    911+,   for a seal and nominal motion transmitting means.


CLS 277/355
TXT Brush seal:

    Dynamic seal under subclass 345 wherein the sealing means is a plurality of
    bristles located at the joint or juncture on one of the parts and
    projecting towards the other.


CLS 277/356
TXT For journal box (e.g., railway car journal, etc.):

    Dynamic seal under subclass 345 wherein the sealing means is for a box that
    encloses part of a machine shaft or axle supported by a bearing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    543+,   for a dynamic, segmented ring, circumferentially contacting seal
    for other than a piston.

    579+,   for a dynamic, circumferential contact, floating ring or bushing
    seal for other than a piston.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, for more than nominal bearing structure or detail (e.g.,
    liner, bearing race, cage, etc.) combined with a specific seal, subclass
    159 for a railway car journal bearing having a detailed seal.


CLS 277/357
TXT For rotary piston:

    Dynamic seal under subclass 345 wherein the sealing means is for an
    apparatus having a working chamber formed between relatively rotatable
    parts to aid in sealing to oppose the flow of fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    398,    for a relatively rotatable, radially extending, sealing face member
    (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.) that accommodates or exhibits eccentric,
    gyratory, or oscillatory motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 104+ for a working
    member having relative rotation to a surface of a working chamber to expand
    and contract the volume of the working chamber with a movable, expansible,
    adjustable, or deformable seal.


CLS 277/358
TXT Relatively rotatable radially extending sealing face member (e.g., face,
    mechanical, etc.):

    Dynamic seal under subclass 345 including at least one of a pair of
    opposing surface members relatively rotating at the joint or juncture that
    defines a sealing face and wherein the joint or juncture is at an angle to
    a rotational axis formed between the relatively movable parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306+,   for a process of using a relatively rotatable, radially extending,
    sealing face member (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.).

    348+,   for diverse and distinct dynamic seals including a close proximity
    seal (e.g., contactless, fluent, etc.) and a relatively rotatable radially
    extending sealing face member (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.).

    352+,   for diverse and distinct dynamic seals having a relatively
    rotatable, radially extending, sealing face member (e.g., face, mechanical,
    etc.) and other than a close proximity seal (e.g., contactless, fluent,
    etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating The Earth, for processes and means for
    initially forming or radially enlarging an elongated hole in the earth in
    situ, subclass 359 for mutually contacting cutter supports that are
    circumferentially displaced axes for a rolling cutter bit or rolling cutter
    bit element with seal details or subclass 371 for a rolling cutter bit or
    rolling cutter bit element with seal details.

    305,    Wheel Substitutes for Land Vehicles, subclasses 100+ for a flexible
    track joint structure (e.g., pin, link, etc.) including a seal, deflector,
    or scraper.

    384,    Bearings, for more than nominal bearing structure or detail (e.g.,
    liner, bearing race, cage, etc.) combined with a specific seal, subclasses
    139+ for a plain, radial bearing or subclasses 481+ for a radial,
    antifriction bearing where the seal is a relatively rotatable, radially
    extending, sealing face member (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.).

    417,    Pumps, for a general means to move a fluid from one place to
    another having an inlet and an outlet, subclass 423.11 for a rotary,
    electric motor and rotary, nonexpansible chamber pump having sealing means
    therebetween.


CLS 277/359
TXT Temperature responsive feature:

    Sealing face member under subclass 358 including means to react to a change
    in temperature.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses do not include a seal that
    merely accommodates thermal expansion between parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    931+,   for a seal for other than a relatively rotatable, radially
    extending, sealing face member including a temperature responsive feature
    having a temperature responsive feature.


CLS 277/360
TXT Accommodates or prevents thermal distortion:

    Temperature responsive feature under subclass 359 for adjusting to or
    deterring deformation caused by the change in temperature.


CLS 277/361
TXT Multiple sealing faces (e.g., double seals, etc.):

    Sealing face member under subclass 358 including more than one pair of
    sealing faces.

    (1)     Note.  Sealing face members having one or more points of contact
    between them form only one sealing face.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, for more than nominal bearing structure or detail (e.g.,
    liner, bearing race, cage, etc.) combined with a specific seal, subclass
    143 for a  plain, radial bearing having plural seals consisting of a
    relatively rotatable, radially extending, sealing face member (e.g., face,
    mechanical, etc.).


CLS 277/362
TXT Floating intermediate sealing face member:

    Multiple sealing faces under subclass 361 including a sealing face member
    located between and free (i.e., not fixed to one of the relatively movable
    parts) for rotating relatively to the relatively rotatable sealing face
    members fixed to their relatively movable parts.


CLS 277/363
TXT Including an outwardly axial biasing member:

    Floating intermediate sealing face member under subclass 362 including
    means to force the floating intermediate sealing face member's sealing
    faces away from each other along a rotational axis formed between the
    relatively movable parts.


CLS 277/364
TXT Concentric and radially spaced:

    Multiple sealing faces under subclass 361 including more than one pair of
    sealing face members having a common rotational axis formed between the
    relatively movable parts and having radially spaced, sealing face,
    contacting surfaces.


CLS 277/365
TXT Three or more:

    Multiple sealing faces under subclass 361 having three or more sealing face
    surfaces.


CLS 277/366
TXT Shaft mounted sealing face members biased axially away from each other:

    Multiple sealing faces under subclass 361 wherein the surface members are
    on the one relatively movable part (e.g., shaft, etc.) enclosed by the
    other relatively movable part (e.g., housing, casing, etc.) and forced
    along the rotational axis formed between the relatively movable parts in an
    outwardly direction.


CLS 277/367
TXT Shaft mounted sealing face members biased axially towards each other:

    Multiple sealing faces under subclass 361 wherein the surface members are
    on the one relatively movable part (e.g., shaft, etc.) enclosed by the
    other relatively movable part (e.g., housing, casing, etc.) and forced
    along the rotational axis formed between the relatively movable parts in an
    inwardly direction.


CLS 277/368
TXT Housing mounted sealing face members biased axially away from each other:

    Multiple sealing faces under subclass 361 wherein the surface members are
    on the one relatively movable part (e.g., housing, casing, etc.) that
    encloses the other relatively movable part (e.g., shaft, etc.) and forced
    along the rotational axis formed between the relatively movable parts in an
    outwardly direction.


CLS 277/369
TXT Housing mounted sealing face members biased axially towards each other:

    Multiple sealing faces under subclass 361 wherein the surface members are
    on the one relatively movable part (e.g., housing, casing, etc.) that
    encloses the other relatively movable part (e.g., shaft, etc.) and forced
    along the rotational axis formed between the relatively movable parts in an
    inwardly direction.


CLS 277/370
TXT Installation, removal, assembly, disassembly or repair feature:

    Sealing face member under subclass 358 including means to aid in mounting,
    extricating, construction, dismantling, or restoration of the seal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323,    for a seal for well apparatus having an installation, removal,
    assembly, disassembly, or repair feature.

    421,    for a close proximity labyrinth seal having an installation,
    removal, assembly, disassembly, or repair feature.

    435,    for a piston ring, piston ring expander, or seat therefor having an
    installation, removal, assembly, disassembly, or repair feature.

    511,    for a dynamic, circumferential contact seal intended for
    containment or compression by a gland member in a packing box having an
    installation, removal, assembly, disassembly, or repair feature.

    551,    for a dynamic, peripheral, radially sealing, flexible projection
    (e.g., lip seal, etc.) for other than a piston having an installation,
    removal, assembly, disassembly, or repair feature.

    598,    for a static contact seal for use between parts of an internal
    combustion engine having an installation, removal, assembly, disassembly,
    or repair feature.

    609,    for a static contact seal intended for insertion between an
    end-to-end pipe, conduit, or cable joint having an installation, removal,
    assembly, disassembly, or repair feature.

    630,    for a static contact seal for other than an internal combustion
    engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable having an installation, removal,
    assembly, disassembly, or repair feature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, for a method of mechanical manufacture or apparatus
    to assemble or disassemble, subclass 402.02 for a method of repairing a
    seal or element thereof not provided for elsewhere, or subclasses 700+ for
    general apparatus to assemble or disassemble.


CLS 277/371
TXT Unitized seal assembly (e.g., cartridge, etc.):

    Sealing face member under subclass 370 wherein the sealing face member and
    a biasing means therefor are in an operative assembly adapted to fit on one
    of the parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    572+,   for a dynamic, circumferential contacting, peripheral, radially
    sealing, flexible projection (e.g., lip seal, etc.) including a particular
    mounting, frame, casing, or reinforcement feature for other than a piston.


CLS 277/372
TXT Having rotation prevention (i.e.,anti-rotation) feature for the sealing
    face member:

    Unitized cartridge under subclass 371 including means to prevent relative
    rotation between the unitized cartridge and the sealing face member.


CLS 277/373
TXT Lug or rib:

    Rotation prevention under subclass 372 wherein the rotation prevention
    means is an inward or outward radially extending projection that fits into
    a corresponding slot, recess, or groove.


CLS 277/374
TXT Retains opposed sealing face members:

    Unitized cartridge under subclass 371 including a pair of sealing face
    members.


CLS 277/375
TXT Mounted in housing or casing:

    Unitized seal assembly under subclass 371 wherein the unitized seal
    assembly is for installation in the relatively movable part (e.g., housing,
    casing, etc.) that encloses the other relatively movable part (e.g., shaft,
    etc.).


CLS 277/376
TXT Snap fit into groove:

    Mounted in housing or casing under subclass 375 wherein the unitized seal
    assembly has a projecting portion to secure by a sudden sharp engagement
    into a groove in the housing or casing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    925,    for a seal for other than a unitized, relatively rotatable,
    radially extending, sealing face member that snap fits into a groove of a
    housing or casing having a snap fit feature for mounting or assembly.


CLS 277/377
TXT Particular axial biasing feature:

    Sealing face member under subclass 358 including a specific means to force
    it  (i.e., against or apart from the opposing sealing face member) along
    its rotational axis formed between the relatively movable parts.


CLS 277/378
TXT Magnetic:

    Particular axial biasing feature under subclass 377 wherein the axial bias
    is a polar field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    501,    for a dynamic circumferential contact seal for other than a piston
    and a magnetic means to bias the seal.

    629,    for a static contact seal for other than an internal combustion
    engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable that uses magnetism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets; subclasses 209+ for a magnet or an electromagnet,
    configured or arranged to perform external mechanical work but which does
    not include the external mechanical work.


CLS 277/379
TXT Particular spring feature:

    Particular axial biasing feature under subclass 377 wherein the axial bias
    is an elastic contrivance or body having a specific resilient
    characteristic.


CLS 277/380
TXT Made of elastomeric material:

    Particular spring feature under subclass 379 wherein the spring is
    manufactured of a rubberlike material.


CLS 277/381
TXT Frustoconical shape:

    Made of elastomeric material under subclass 380 wherein the spring has a
    frustrum of a cone configuration.


CLS 277/382
TXT O-ring shape:

    Made of elastomeric material under subclass 380 and is circular in both
    plain view and cross-section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    910,    for an O-ring seal.


CLS 277/383
TXT Imbedded in another material:

    Particular spring feature under subclass 379 wherein the spring is inside a
    mass of another substance.


CLS 277/384
TXT Washerlike shape:

    Particular spring feature under subclass 379 wherein the spring has a
    general disclike configuration (e.g., having a frustoconical or
    "Belleville" profile, incorporating radial or axial corrugation, or
    including one or more radially extending fingers, etc.).


CLS 277/385
TXT Arrangement or location:

    Particular spring feature under subclass 379 wherein the spring has a
    specific organization or position.


CLS 277/386
TXT Radially biasing member creates axial bias:

    Arrangement or location under subclass 385 wherein the spring exerts its
    force in a direction perpendicular to the rotational axis formed between
    the relatively movable parts and transform the force into the axial bias.


CLS 277/387
TXT Fluid pressure:

    Particular axial bias feature under subclass 377 comprising means to create
    axial bias by using hydraulics or pneumatics.


CLS 277/388
TXT Creates counter pressure:

    Fluid pressure axial bias under subclass 387 wherein the fluid pressure
    generates a force opposing the axial biasing means that forces the sealing
    face members together to reduce the axial load exerted at the sealing face.


CLS 277/389
TXT And bellows or diaphragm:

    Fluid pressure axial bias under subclass 387 wherein the fluid pressure
    pushes against a flexible wall member to create axial bias.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315,    for a process of static sealing employing a flexible sleeve, boot,
    or diaphragm.

    391+,   for a relatively rotatable, radially extending, sealing face member
    (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.) including a flexible sleeve, boot, or
    diaphragm to provide a secondary seal or driving connection therefor.

    504,    for a dynamic, circumferential contact seal for other than a piston
    that accommodates gyratory or oscillatory motion by using a flexible
    connection having static contact between the seal and one of the relatively
    movable parts.

    634+,   for a static, contact, flexible sleeve, boot, or diaphragm seal for
    other than an internal combustion engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable.


CLS 277/390
TXT Particular secondary mounting seal or driving connection:

    Sealing face member under subclass 358 including a specific seal at a joint
    or juncture between the sealing face member and the part it mounts on or a
    specific supporting means linking the sealing face member to the part
    (e.g., shaft, etc.) relatively rotating to and enclosed by the other part
    (e.g., housing, casing, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    911+,   for a seal for other than a relatively rotatable, radially
    extending, sealing face member (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.) having
    nominal motion transmitting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, for more than nominal bearing structure or detail (e.g.,
    liner, bearing race, cage, etc.) combined with a specific seal, subclass
    142 for a  plain radial bearing having a relatively rotatable radially
    extending sealing face member (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.) axially
    translatable and rotatable to a shaft.


CLS 277/391
TXT Flexible sleeve, boot, or diaphragm:

    Mounting seal or driving connection under subclass 390 including a flexible
    wall member to accommodate relative axial movement between the sealing face
    member and one of the parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    389,    for a relatively rotatable, radially extending, sealing face member
    (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.) including fluid pressure acting against a
    bellows or diaphragm to create an axial bias therefor.

    504,    for a dynamic, circumferential contact seal for other than a piston
    that accommodates gyratory or oscillatory motion by using a flexible
    connection having static contact between the seal and one of the relatively
    movable parts.

    634+,   for a static, contact flexible sleeve, boot, or diaphragm seal for
    other than an internal combustion engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, for more than nominal bearing structure or detail (e.g.,
    liner, bearing race, cage, etc.) combined with a specific seal, subclass
    141 for a  plain radial bearing having a relatively rotatable radially
    extending sealing face member (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.) including a
    diaphragm attached to it and a part axially movable therewith.


CLS 277/392
TXT Between sealing face member and shaft or part relating to shaft:

    Flexible sleeve, boot, or diaphragm under subclass 391 wherein the flexible
    sleeve, boot, or diaphragm is between the sealing face member and the part
    (e.g., shaft, etc.) relatively rotating to and enclosed by the other part
    (e.g., housing, casing, etc.).


CLS 277/393
TXT Particular connecting feature to sealing face member:

    Flexible sleeve, boot, or diaphragm under subclass 391 including a specific
    means to attach the flexible sleeve, boot, or diaphragm to the sealing face
    member.


CLS 277/394
TXT Peripheral radially sealing flexible projection (e.g., lip seal, etc.):

    Mounting seal or driving connection under subclass 390 wherein the
    secondary seal is a pliant or resilient extension having a tip for sealing
    against the sealing face member or one of the parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    549+,   for a dynamic circumferential contact seal for other than a piston
    having a peripheral radially sealing flexible projection (e.g., lip seal,
    etc.).


CLS 277/395
TXT U- or V-shaped cross-sectional profile:

    Peripheral radially sealing flexible projection under subclass 394
    including another projection forming a U or V in a view of a vertical plane
    cutting across the seal at right angles to one of its principal horizontal
    dimensions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    530,    for a dynamic, circumferential contact seal for other than a piston
    intended to be contained or compressed by a gland member in a packing box
    having a C, M, U, V, X, or Z cross-sectional seal shape.

    647,    for a static seal having a C-, U-, or V-shaped cross-sectional seal
    profile for other than an internal combustion engine, or a pipe, conduit,
    or cable.


CLS 277/396
TXT Axially compressed packing:

    Mounting seal or driving connection under subclass 390 including means to
    bias the secondary seal into contacting the sealing face member or one of
    the parts by squeezing it along the rotational axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    510+,   for a dynamic, circumferential contact seal for other than a piston
    intended to be contained or compressed by a gland member in a packing box.


CLS 277/397
TXT Frictionally engaged or interfitting projection and recess:

    Mounting seal or driving connection under subclass 390 wherein the driving
    connection is by surface adhesion or a reciprocally fitting protrusion and
    indent.


CLS 277/398
TXT Eccentric, gyratory or oscillatory motion:

    Sealing face member under subclass 358 including accommodation or
    exhibition of angular or lateral deflection, circular displacement,
    eccentric movement, or vibration.

    (1)     Note.  A seal that accommodates gyratory or oscillatory motion is
    capable of sealing relatively movable parts that move angularly or
    perpendicularly to its main axis of motion; whereas a floater-type seal has
    relative motion between the relatively movable parts it seals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    357,    for a dynamic seal for a rotary piston.

    503+,   for a dynamic, circumferential contact seal for other than a piston
    that accommodates gyrating or oscillating motion.

    916,    for a seal having vibration dampening means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 55.4 for a helical
    working member (e.g., scroll, etc.) having planetary or planetating
    movement including a seal.


CLS 277/399
TXT Particular sealing face member configuration:

    Sealing face member under subclass 358 wherein the sealing face member has
    a specific shape or formation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 55.4 for a helical
    working member (e.g., scroll, etc.) having planetary or planetating
    movement including a seal.


CLS 277/400
TXT Hydrodynamic feature:

    Particular sealing face member configuration under subclass 399 wherein the
    sealing face member has means to create turbulence against the opposing
    sealing face.

    (1)     Note.  In a hydrodynamic, relatively rotatable, radially extending,
    sealing face member (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.), a distance between a
    sealing member and a part or another sealing member will change when the
    rotational speed between relatively movable parts goes from normal
    operation to slower or nonrotational speeds whereas in a close proximity
    seal (e.g., contactless, fluent, etc.), the distance is not dependent upon
    rotational speed.


CLS 277/401
TXT Fluid passage to the sealing face:

    Particular sealing face member configuration under subclass 399 wherein the
    sealing face member has a passageway to permit flow of fluid to the sealing
    face.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    408,    for a relatively rotatable, radially extending, sealing face member
    (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.) including means to introduce, circulate, or
    remove fluid.


CLS 277/402
TXT Flexible projection (e.g., lip seal, etc.):

    Particular sealing face member configuration under subclass 399 wherein the
    surface member is a pliant or resilient extension having a tip for
    relatively movable contact against the other surface member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    549+,   for a dynamic, circumferential contact seal for other than a piston
    having a peripheral, radially sealing, flexible projection (e.g., lip seal,
    etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, for more than nominal bearing structure or detail (e.g.,
    liner, bearing race, cage, etc.) combined with a specific seal, subclass
    140 for a  plain, radial bearing having a flexible, relatively rotatable,
    radially extending, sealing face member (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.).


CLS 277/403
TXT Angled or tapered sealing face:

    Particular sealing face member configuration under subclass 399 wherein the
    sealing face is at an angle at other than ninety degrees to the axis of
    rotation at the joint or juncture.


CLS 277/404
TXT Made of particular material:

    Sealing face member under subclass 358 wherein the sealing member has a
    specific composition or substance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    935+,   for a seal for other than a relatively rotatable, radially
    extending, sealing face member (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.) made out of a
    particular material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, for more than nominal bearing structure or detail (e.g.,
    liner, bearing race, cage, etc.) combined with a specific seal, subclass
    482 for a radial antifriction bearing having a relatively rotatable,
    radially extending, sealing face member (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.) made
    of a resilient sliding surface material.


CLS 277/405
TXT Ceramic:

    Particular material under subclass 404 wherein the composition or substance
    is a fired, clay-containing composition (e.g., porcelain, earthenware,
    etc.), glass, or refractory composition (e.g., inorganic oxides, carbides,
    etc.).


CLS 277/406
TXT Metal:

    Particular material under subclass 404 wherein the composition or substance
    is metal.


CLS 277/407
TXT Elastomeric or plastic:

    Particular material under subclass 404 wherein the composition or substance
    is a polymeric material.


CLS 277/408
TXT Introduction, circulation or removal of fluid:

    Sealing face member under subclass 358 including means to convey a fluid
    into, within, or out of the seal face member or one of the relatively
    movable parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401,    for a relatively rotatable, radially extending, sealing face member
    (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.) having a means for fluid passage in its
    sealing face.

    512+,   for a dynamic, circumferential contact seal for other than a piston
    intended to be contained or compressed by a gland member in a packing box
    having means to introduce or direct a fluid.

    928,    for a seal including means to introduce, circulate, or remove fluid
    having a pressure relief or venting feature for other than a relatively
    rotatable, radially extending, sealing face member.

    930,    for a seal for other than a relatively rotatable, radially
    extending, sealing face member including means to introduce, circulate, or
    remove fluid having a heating or cooling feature.


CLS 277/409
TXT Close proximity seal (e.g., contactless, fluent, etc.):

    Dynamic seal under subclass 345 wherein the sealing means is free of
    relatively movable sealing contact against the relatively movable parts and
    capable of acting upon or causing sealed or sealing fluid to oppose the
    flow of fluid at the joint or juncture between the relatively movable parts.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses are for a sealing means not
    dependent upon the physical contact between a sealing member and a
    relatively movable part to affect sealing such as abrading or frictional
    contact that forms a positive seal at the point of contact.

    (2)     Note.  In a close proximity seal (e.g., contactless, fluent, etc.),
    a distance between a sealing member and a part or another sealing member is
    not dependent upon rotational speed between relatively movable parts;
    whereas in a hydrodynamic, relatively rotatable, radially extending sealing
    face member (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.) the distance will change when
    the rotational speed from normal operation to slower or nonrotational
    speeds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301+,   for a process of dynamic close proximity sealing (e.g.,
    contactless, fluent, etc.).

    347+,   for diverse and distinct dynamic seals including a close proximity
    seal.

    590,    for this subclass only, a close proximity seal (e.g., contactless,
    fluent, etc.) between fixed parts or having a fixed relationship against
    relatively movable parts.

    904,    for a seal formed by a viscous fluid usually contained by one or
    more physical contacting-type seals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, residual class for fluid, material handling process
    or apparatus; subclasses 248+ for a liquid seal between relatively movable,
    valving parts.

    417,    Pumps, for a general means to move a fluid from one place to
    another having an inlet and an outlet, subclass 423.11 for a rotary
    electric motor and rotary nonexpansible chamber pump having sealing means
    therebetween.


CLS 277/410
TXT Magnetic:

    Close proximity seal under subclass 409 wherein the close proximity seal
    provides a polar field to act upon or cause the sealed or sealing fluid to
    oppose the flow of fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    501,    for a dynamic, circumferential contact seal for other than a piston
    and a magnetic means to bias the seal.

    629,    for a static contact seal for other than an internal combustion
    engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable that uses magnetism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 62.51+ for a composition useful for a
    magnetic purpose or a process for making the composition, not provided for
    elsewhere.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets; subclasses 209+ for a magnet or an electromagnet,
    configured or arranged to perform external mechanical work but does not
    include the external mechanical work.

    384,    Bearings, for more than nominal bearing structure or detail (e.g.,
    liner, bearing race, cage, etc.) combined with a specific seal; subclass
    133 for a plain bearing where the seal is a magnetic fluid barrier.


CLS 277/411
TXT Gap or clearance:

    Close proximity seal under subclass 409 wherein the close proximity seal
    provides a throttling zone to oppose the flow of fluid while being free of
    relatively movable sealing contact.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, for more than nominal bearing structure or detail (e.g.,
    liner, bearing race, cage, etc.) combined with a specific seal, subclass
    488 for a radial antifriction bearing where the seal is a radially
    extending, annular flange approaching but not contacting a relatively
    rotating member to substantially but not completely close an annular
    opening.


CLS 277/412
TXT Labyrinth:

    Gap or clearance under subclass 411 wherein the gap or clearance seal has
    more than one throttling zone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    355,    for a dynamic, brush seal that may declare or reveal a
    labyrinthlike structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, for more than nominal bearing structure or detail (e.g.,
    liner, bearing race, cage, etc.) combined with a specific seal, subclass
    144 for a plain, radial bearing or subclass 480 for a radial, antifriction
    bearing where the seal is a labyrinth seal.


CLS 277/413
TXT Having adjustable member:

    Labyrinth under subclass 412 including a repositionable sealing member that
    allows alteration of the clearance.


CLS 277/414
TXT Formed by cellular pockets (e.g., honeycomb, etc.):

    Labyrinth under subclass 412 wherein the labyrinth is axially and
    circumferentially adjacent compartments having openings toward the opposing
    sealing member or one of the relatively movable parts to provide the
    throttling zones.


CLS 277/415
TXT Having wear resistant, abradable or ablative member:

    Labyrinth under subclass 412 including at least a portion of the labyrinth
    or one of the relatively movable parts made of a material to inhibit
    deterioration, to promote wear, or to promote burning away.


CLS 277/416
TXT Segmented:

    Labyrinth under subclass 412 wherein the labyrinth's perimeter is divided
    into portions.


CLS 277/417
TXT Formed by multiple washers:

    Labyrinth under subclass 412 wherein the labyrinth is a plurality of
    substantially flat rings aligned to provide the throttling zones.


CLS 277/418
TXT Formed by plural grooves or projections on opposing surfaces:

    Labyrinth under subclass 412 wherein the labyrinth is a plurality of
    projections or grooves on one sealing member oppositely facing an opposing
    plurality of projections or grooves on another sealing member to provided
    the throttling zones.


CLS 277/419
TXT Interfitting or overlapping:

    Plural grooves or projections under subclass 418 wherein the groove or
    projection extend beyond the inner or outer periphery of the other
    oppositely facing projection or groove.


CLS 277/420
TXT And axially oriented:

    Interfitting or overlapping under subclass 419 wherein the opposing
    projections or grooves extend in a direction parallel to an axis of
    rotation formed between the relatively movable parts.


CLS 277/421
TXT Having installation, removal, assembly, disassembly, or repair feature:

    Labyrinth under subclass 412 including means to aid in mounting,
    extricating, construction, dismantling or restoration of the seal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323,    for a seal for well apparatus having an installation, removal,
    assembly, disassembly, or repair feature.

    370+,   for a relatively rotatable extending sealing face member (e.g.,
    face, mechanical, etc.) having an installation, removal, assembly,
    disassembly, or repair feature.

    435,    for a piston ring, piston ring expander, or seat therefore having
    an installation, removal, assembly, disassembly or repair feature.

    511,    for a dynamic circumferential contact seal intended for containment
    or compression by a gland member in a packing box having an installation,
    removal, assembly, disassembly, or repair feature.

    551,    for a dynamic, peripheral, radially sealing, flexible projection
    (e.g., lip seal, etc.) for other than a piston having an installation,
    removal, assembly, disassembly, or repair feature.

    598,    for a static contact seal for use between parts of an internal
    combustion engine having an installation, removal, assembly, disassembly or
    repair feature.

    609,    for a static contact seal intended for insertion between an
    end-to-end pipe, conduit, or cable joint having an installation, removal,
    assembly, disassembly, or repair feature.

    630,    for a static contact seal for other than an internal combustion
    engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable having an installation, removal,
    assembly, disassembly, or repair feature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, for a method of mechanical manufacture or for
    apparatus to assemble or disassemble, subclass 402.02 for a method of
    repairing a seal or element thereof not provided for elsewhere, or
    subclasses 700+ for general apparatus to assemble or disassemble.


CLS 277/422
TXT Floating ring or bushing:

    Gap or clearance under subclass 411 wherein the gap or clearance includes
    an annulus or tubular seal having relative movement at the joint or
    juncture and having relative movement free of relatively movable, sealing
    contact against the relatively movable parts.

    (1)     Note.  A floater-type seal has relative motion between the
    relatively movable parts it seals between whereas a seal that accommodates
    gyratory or oscillatory motion is capable of sealing relatively movable
    parts that move angularly or perpendicularly to its main axis of motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305,    for a process of using a dynamic close proximity floating ring or
    bushing (i.e., contactless).

    447+,   for a floating piston ring seal.

    579+,   for a dynamic, circumferential contact floating ring or bushing
    seal for other than a piston.

    585,    for a dynamic circumferential contacting elongated sleeve or
    bushing for other than a piston.


CLS 277/423
TXT Impeller (e.g., slinger, etc.):

    Close proximity under subclass 409 wherein the close proximity seal
    provides a rotary motion transmitting means to direct, deflect, or
    distribute the sealed or sealing fluid into opposing the flow of fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400,    for a relatively rotatable, radially extending, sealing face member
    (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.) providing a hydrodynamic feature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, for more than nominal bearing structure or detail (e.g.,
    liner, bearing race, cage, etc.) combined with a specific seal, subclasses
    132+ for a plain, radial bearing where the seal is a barrier of liquid or
    gas, or subclass 478 for a radial, antifriction bearing where centrifugal
    force loads the seal or a liquid or gas forms a sealing barrier.


CLS 277/424
TXT Rib or groove on radial extending surface:

    Impeller seal under subclass 423 wherein the impeller has an axially facing
    radial surface having a projection or indentation on the surface to act
    upon the sealed or sealing fluid .


CLS 277/425
TXT And static sealing means affected by rotational movement:

    Impeller seal under subclass 423 including means for sealing between the
    relatively movable parts at rest or at a transitional speed below the
    effective operation of the impeller.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    433,    for a dynamic seal where centrifugal force affects change in
    displacement, shape, or contact.

    400,    for a relatively rotatable, radially extending sealing face member
    (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.) providing a hydrodynamic feature.

    929,    for a seal for other than a dynamic close proximity impeller seal
    including a static sealing means affected by rotational movement where a
    change in operation or condition induces additional leakage control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, for more than nominal bearing structure or detail (e.g.,
    liner, bearing race, cage, etc.) combined with a specific seal, subclasses
    135+ for a plain, radial bearing where centrifugal force moves or holds the
    seal in place, or subclass 478 for a radial antifriction bearing where
    centrifugal force loads the seal or a liquid or gas forms a sealing barrier.


CLS 277/426
TXT Actuated by counterweight:

    Static sealing means under subclass 425 wherein the static sealing means
    has a weighted means acted upon by centrifugal force to control the static
    sealing means.


CLS 277/427
TXT Forms centrifugal liquid barrier:

    Impeller seal under subclass 423 for moving or directing the sealed or
    sealing fluid outwardly from its rotational axis to create a liquid wall at
    the joint or juncture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, for a means of guiding or
    confining (e.g., casing, distributing means, etc.) a working fluid (i.e., a
    liquid or gas that contacts or supports a rotary means that drives or is
    driven by the liquid or gas), subclass 109 for a rotating shaft having an
    abutment surface imparting motion in a sealing fluid inside a chamber.


CLS 277/428
TXT Having cup or chamber inside the impeller or another rotating member:

    Centrifugal liquid barrier under subclass 427 wherein the impeller or other
    revolving component has within an  open vessel or cavity.


CLS 277/429
TXT Fluid collector or receiver:

    Impeller seal under subclass 423 including means to receive fluid from the
    impeller.


CLS 277/430
TXT Helical groove or thread on axially extending surface:

    Impeller seal under subclass 423 wherein the impeller has an indent or
    projection winding twistlike about its axially extending surface to act
    upon the sealed or sealing fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    559,    for a dynamic, circumferential contact seal for other than a piston
    having a peripheral, radially sealing, flexible projection having a
    hydrodynamic, sealing feature.


CLS 277/431
TXT Formed by pressurized sealing fluid introduced to form barrier:

    Close proximity seal under subclass 409 wherein the joint or juncture has
    sealing fluid introduced into at a pressure equal to or greater than the
    pressure of the sealed fluid to oppose the flow of the sealed fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    408,    for a relatively rotatable, radially extending, sealing face member
    (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.) including means to introduce, circulate, or
    remove fluid.

    512+,   for a dynamic circumferential contact seal for other than a piston
    intended to be contained or compressed by a gland member in a packing box
    having means to introduce or direct a fluid.

    926,    for a seal for other than a dynamic close proximity seal (e.g.,
    contactless, fluent, etc.) created by pressurized sealing fluid introduced
    to form a barrier having means to create a fluid pressure equilibrium at a
    joint or juncture.

    927,    for a seal for other than a dynamic close proximity seal (e.g.,
    contactless, fluent, etc.) created by pressurized sealing fluid introduced
    to form a barrier having means to create a fluid pressure different from
    the sealed fluid pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, for more than nominal bearing structure or detail (e.g.,
    liner, bearing race, cage, etc.) combined with a specific seal, subclasses
    132+ for a plain, radial bearing where the seal is a barrier of liquid or
    gas or subclass 478 for a radial antifriction bearing where centrifugal
    force loads the seal or a liquid or gas forms a sealing barrier.


CLS 277/432
TXT External device or system:

    Pressurized sealing fluid under subclass 431 including an enclosure for the
    joint or juncture and means outside the enclosure to introduce the
    pressurized sealing fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    513,    for a dynamic, circumferential contact seal for other than a piston
    intended to be contained or compressed by a gland member in a packing box
    having means to introduce or direct a fluid having an external device or
    system.

    930,    for a seal for other than a dynamic close proximity pressurized
    sealing fluid barrier including an external device or system having a
    heating or cooling feature.


CLS 277/433
TXT Centrifugal force affects change in displacement, shape, or contact:

    Dynamic seal under subclass 345 wherein the dynamic seal has an inertial
    force repelling the sealing means away from its axis of rotation to move,
    deform, or alter its engagement to another sealing member or relatively
    movable part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    425+,   for a dynamic, close proximity impeller (e.g., slinger, etc.) seal
    having a static sealing means affected by rotational movement.

    929,    for a seal for other than a dynamic seal where centrifugal force
    affects displacement, shape, or contact where a change in operation or
    condition induces additional leakage control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, for more than nominal bearing structure or detail (e.g.,
    liner, bearing race, cage, etc.) combined with a specific seal, subclasses
    135+ for a plain, radial bearing where centrifugal force moves or holds the
    seal in place or subclass 478 for a radial antifriction bearing where
    centrifugal force loads the seal or a liquid or gas forms a sealing barrier.


CLS 277/434
TXT Piston ring or piston ring expander or seat therefor:

    Dynamic seal under subclass 345 comprising an annular seal provided for a
    part (i.e., a piston) that reciprocates along an axis of an enclosing wall
    and the seal is for engaging the wall; means to outwardly bias the seal
    against the enclosing wall; or means (e.g., a seat, etc.) on the part
    reciprocating along the axis of the enclosing wall to locate or retain the
    seal or biasing means in an operative position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310,    for a process of dynamic sealing employing a piston ring for an
    internal combustion engine.

    311,    for a process of dynamic sealing employing a flexible ring.

    909,    for a seal having similar sealing structures for a piston and rod.

    910,    for an O-ring seal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, for a method of mechanical manufacture or apparatus
    to assemble or disassemble, subclasses 888.07+ for a method of piston ring
    or packing manufacture.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 172+ for more than nominal
    detailed structure of a piston except where limited to detailed structure
    (e.g., a seat, a fluid passageway in seat, etc.) solely intended to
    cooperate with a piston ring or piston ring expander.

    100,    Presses, subclass 269.21 for a seal or gasket around a piston for a
    fluid actuated reciprocationg press.

    188,    Brakes, for means of retarding motion of or stopping of machines;
    subclasses 72.4+ for a fluid pressure piston axially actuating a brake
    element or housing against a wheel that may include a seal, or subclass
    322.18 for an internal resistance motion retarder including a thrust
    component used to vary volume in a fluid-filled chamber having a particular
    retarder component structure with a dynamic sealing ring between a piston
    and cylinder.


CLS 277/435
TXT Having installation, removal, assembly, disassembly, or repair feature:

    Piston ring, expander, or seat under subclass 434 including means to aid in
    mounting, extricating, construction, dismantling, or restoration of the
    seal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323,    for a seal for well apparatus having an installation, removal,
    assembly, disassembly, or repair feature.

    370+,   for a relatively rotatable extending sealing face member (e.g.,
    face, mechanical, etc.) having an installation, removal, assembly,
    disassembly, or repair feature.

    421,    for a close proximity labyrinth seal having an installation,
    removal, assembly, disassembly, or repair feature.

    511,    for a dynamic, circumferential contact seal intended for
    containment or compression by a gland member in a packing box having an
    installation, removal, assembly, disassembly, or repair feature.

    551,    for a dynamic peripheral radially sealing flexible projection
    (e.g., lip seal, etc.) for other than a piston having an installation,
    removal, assembly, disassembly, or repair feature.

    598,    for a static contact seal for use between parts of an internal
    combustion engine having an installation, removal, assembly, disassembly,
    or repair feature.

    609,    for a static, contact seal intended for insertion between an
    end-to-end pipe, conduit, or cable joint having an installation, removal,
    assembly, disassembly, or repair feature.

    630,    for a static, contact seal for other than an internal combustion
    engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable having an installation, removal,
    assembly, disassembly, or repair feature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, for a method of mechanical manufacture or apparatus
    to assemble or disassemble, subclasses 222+ for an apparatus to insert or
    remove a piston ring, or subclass 402.02 for a method of repairing a seal
    or element thereof not provided for elsewhere.


CLS 277/436
TXT Piston ring having peripheral radially sealing flexible projection (e.g.,
    piston cup, etc.):

    Piston ring under subclass 434 including a pliant or resilient extension
    having a tip for relative reciprocating contact against the enclosing wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    309,    for a process of dynamic sealing employing a peripheral, radially
    sealing, flexible projection (e.g., lip seal, piston cup, etc.).

    549+,   for a dynamic circumferential contact seal for other than a piston
    having a peripheral, radially sealing, flexible projection (e.g., lip seal,
    etc.).


CLS 277/437
TXT Having particular mounting, retaining, or supporting feature:

    Peripherally, radially sealing, flexible projection under subclass 436
    including specific means to fasten, secure, or back the piston ring on the
    piston.


CLS 277/438
TXT Having C, U, or V cross-sectional profile:

    Peripherally radially sealing flexible projection under subclass 436
    wherein the piston ring has a C-, U-, or V-shape in a view of a vertical
    plane cutting across the piston ring at right angles to one of its
    principle horizontal dimensions.


CLS 277/439
TXT Axially facing cup:

    C, U, or V cross-sectional profile under subclass 438 wherein the C-, U-,
    or V-shape or form is radially extending to the reciprocating axis of the
    piston.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    335,    for a seal for well apparatus having an axially facing cup shape.


CLS 277/440
TXT Piston ring surface of dissimilar material or hardness:

    Piston ring under subclass 434 including a surface of different material,
    hardness, or density from the rest of the piston ring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    569,    for a dynamic, circumferential contact seal for other than a piston
    having a peripheral radially sealing flexible extending portion (e.g., lip
    seal, etc.) including a lining or insert.

    935+,   for a seal for other than a piston ring surface made out of a
    particular material.


CLS 277/441
TXT Insert:

    Piston ring under subclass 440 wherein the surface of the piston ring has
    the different material, hardness, or density pushed into it.


CLS 277/442
TXT Surface coating, plating, or impregnation:

    Piston ring under subclass 440 wherein the use of chemical infusion (e.g.,
    nitriding, etc.) provides a different material, hardness, or density as a
    layer on the surface or near the surface.


CLS 277/443
TXT Nitrided:

    Piston ring under subclass 442 wherein the chemical infusion of nitrogen
    increases the nitrogen content of the surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclass 238 for a process of nitriding using an
    externally supplied nitrogen source or subclasses 317+ for a stock product
    of the nitriding process.


CLS 277/444
TXT Chromium:

    Piston ring under subclass 442 wherein the surface has chrome provided as a
    layer on the surface or chemically infused near the surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions; for a process of making an electrolytic coating
    not provided for elsewhere, subclasses 178+ for multiple superposed
    coatings having at least one chromium-containing coating, or subclasses
    283+ for a predominately chromium coating.


CLS 277/445
TXT Rotation limiting feature (i.e., anti-rotation):

    Piston ring, expander, or seat under subclass 434 including means to limit
    or prevent relative rotation between any combination of the piston ring,
    piston ring expander, or seat, or pluralities of the piston ring or piston
    ring expander.


CLS 277/446
TXT Between rings:

    Piston ring or piston ring expander under subclass 445 wherein the feature
    to limit rotation (i.e., antirotation) is between any combination of the
    piston ring or piston ring expander, or between any combination of more
    than one piston ring or piston ring expander.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    490,    for a piston ring having sectional structure including a component
    ring of eccentric or variable thickness.


CLS 277/447
TXT Floating piston ring:

    Piston ring under subclass 434 including relative movement to the seat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305,    for a process of using a dynamic close proximity floating ring or
    bushing (i.e., contactless).

    422,    for a dynamic, close proximity floating ring or bushing (i.e.,
    contactless).

    579+,   for a dynamic, circumferential, contact floating ring or bushing
    seal for other than a piston.


CLS 277/448
TXT Material other than metal:

    Floating piston ring under subclass 447 consisting of a substance different
    from metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    468,    for a separate particular piston ring expander means made out of a
    material other than metal.


CLS 277/449
TXT Particular piston seat:

    Seat therefor under subclass 434 wherein the part (i.e., a piston) has more
    than a nominal groove structure on its cylindrical face to locate or retain
    the piston ring or piston ring expander.

    (1)     Note.  The declaration of a groove or opposing sidewalls connected
    by an end wall is nominal structure.


CLS 277/450
TXT Helical form:

    Particular piston seat under subclass 449 wherein the groove is a helix or
    spiral along the cylindrical face of the piston and accommodates a
    similarly shaped piston ring or piston ring expander.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    458,    for a piston ring having a single piece noncircular or multi-turn
    (e.g., helical, spiral, oblong, elliptical, polygonal, etc.) shape.


CLS 277/451
TXT Stepped walls:

    Particular piston seat under subclass 449 wherein the groove has a
    nonuniform axial width and walls that are at a right angle to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    586,    for a dynamic, circumferential contact seal for other than a piston
    seated in a groove having stepped walls.


CLS 277/452
TXT Oblique wall:

    Particular piston seat under subclass 449 wherein the groove has a
    nonuniform axial width and a tapered or inclined wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    587,    for a dynamic, circumferential contact seal for other than a piston
    seated in a groove having an oblique wall.


CLS 277/453
TXT More than one oblique wall:

    Oblique wall under subclass 452 wherein the groove has tapered or inclined
    walls.


CLS 277/454
TXT Having parallel walls:

    More than one oblique wall under subclass 453 wherein the groove has any
    tapered or inclined walls that are parallel to each other.


CLS 277/455
TXT Arcuate wall:

    Particular piston seat under subclass 449 wherein the groove has a curved
    wall.


CLS 277/456
TXT Coating, treatment, or wall insert:

    Particular piston seat under subclass 449 wherein the groove has a portion
    subject to or formed by a substance, action or material addition.


CLS 277/457
TXT Having passageway for fluid return, pressure relief, or venting:

    Particular piston seat under subclass 449 wherein the groove has an opening
    for return of fluid or for releasing or relieving fluid pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    928,    for a seal having a pressure relief or venting feature for other
    than a piston ring seat including a passageway for fluid return, pressure
    relief, or venting.


CLS 277/458
TXT Piston ring having single piece noncircular or multiturn (e.g., helical,
    spiral, oblong, elliptical, polygonal, etc.) shape:

    Piston ring under subclass 434 wherein the piston ring has a helical or
    spiral form or shape other than circular in either a relaxed or stressed
    state.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    450,    for a piston groove having a helical form intended to accommodate a
    similarly shaped piston ring or piston ring expander.


CLS 277/459
TXT Piston ring including exposed port, slot, pocket, groove, channel, recess,
    or bevel:

    Piston ring under subclass 434 including an uncovered opening, incline,
    removed, or indented portion on an outer peripheral surface of the piston
    ring.

    (1)     Note.  The enclosing wall or piston can cover the exposed or
    passageway, slot, pocket, groove, channel, recess, or bevel but not another
    ring or expander.

    (2)     Note.  An expander or spacer for spacing one or more separate
    piston rings is not a piston ring even if it directly engages the enclosing
    wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    477+,   for a particular piston ring expander having a slotted or
    undulating circular band having an inclined or axially facing seat for the
    piston ring.

    484,    for a piston ring expander having a radially extending tongue
    formed from it.


CLS 277/460
TXT Circumferential groove, channel, recess, or bevel:

    Piston ring under subclass 459 wherein the groove, channel, recess, or
    bevel extends substantially annularly about the outer peripheral surface of
    the piston ring.


CLS 277/461
TXT Axially spaced:

    Piston ring under subclass 460 wherein the annular groove, channel, recess
    or bevel  has another annular groove, channel, recess, or bevel spaced
    axially from it.


CLS 277/462
TXT Ports:

    Axially spaced under subclass 461 wherein the piston ring has through holes.

    (1)     Note.  A ``port" or "through hole" is a passageway extending
    through the ring and totally enclosed by the material of the ring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    463,    for a piston ring having an exposed circumferential groove,
    channel, recess, or bevel, and ports.

    464,    for a piston ring having an exposed port, slot, pocket, groove,
    channel, recess, or bevel and circumferentially spaced ports.


CLS 277/463
TXT Ports:

    Piston ring under subclass 460 wherein the piston ring has through holes.

    (1)     Note.  A ``port" or ``through hole" is a passageway extending
    through the ring and totally enclosed by the material of the ring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    462,    for a piston ring having exposed axially spaced circumferential
    grooves, channels, recesses or bevels, and ports.

    464,    for a piston ring having an exposed port, slot, pocket, groove,
    channel, recess, or bevel and circumferentially spaced ports.


CLS 277/464
TXT Circumferentially spaced ports:

    Piston ring under subclass 459 wherein the piston ring has annularly spaced
    through holes.

    (1)     Note.  A ``port" or "through hole" is a passageway extending
    through the ring and totally enclosed by the material of the ring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    462,    for a piston ring having exposed axially spaced circumferential
    grooves, channels, recesses or bevels and ports.

    463,    for a piston ring having an exposed circumferential groove,
    channel, recess or bevel, and ports.


CLS 277/465
TXT Circumferentially spaced slots, pockets, grooves, channels, recesses, or
    bevels:

    Piston ring under subclass 459 wherein the piston ring has annularly spaced
    pockets, grooves, channels, recesses, or bevels.


CLS 277/466
TXT Piston ring displays twisting or torsion:

    Piston ring under subclass 434 wherein the piston ring's configuration
    exhibits a rotating or cocking movement during the reciprocating operation
    of the piston.


CLS 277/467
TXT Particular piston ring expander:

    Piston ring expander under subclass 434 wherein the piston ring has
    inherent specific biasing means or a separate specific biasing means to
    outwardly bias the piston ring against the enclosing wall.

    (1)     Note.  Do speculate on the resilient nature of the ring.  There
    must be some indication of this resilient nature by a ring being defined as
    resilient or expansible, or by a structure causing expansion (e.g., wedging
    surfaces forcing a ring outwardly, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    447+,   for expansion means created by the relative movement of a floating
    piston ring in its groove.


CLS 277/468
TXT Separate and other than metal:

    Particular piston ring expander under subclass 467 wherein the biasing
    means is distinct from the piston ring and made out of a material that
    differs from metal.


CLS 277/469
TXT Bias limiting feature:

    Particular piston ring expander under subclass 467 including means to
    restrict the extent of radial expansion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    445+,   for a piston ring or piston ring expander or seat therefor having a
    feature to limit rotation between any combination of piston ring, piston
    ring expander or seat, pluralities of the piston ring, or piston ring
    expander.

    494+,   for a piston ring having a gap and a separate bridging piece for
    the gap.

    496+,   for a single piece split piston ring having opposed asymmetrical
    mirrored ends.

    498+,   for a single piece split piston ring having other than opposed
    asymmetrical mirrored ends.


CLS 277/470
TXT Adjustable loading feature:

    Particular piston ring expander under subclass 467 including means to alter
    the force exerted by the piston ring expander.


CLS 277/471
TXT Thermal expansion feature:

    Particular piston ring expander under subclass 467 wherein the piston ring
    expander is responsive to heat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    931+,   for a seal for other than a piston ring expander including a
    temperature responsive feature having a temperature responsive feature.


CLS 277/472
TXT Annular expander nested in annular groove of the piston ring:

    Particular piston ring expander under subclass 467 wherein the piston ring
    expander is annular and intended to be at least partially received by the
    piston ring having an annular recess of any cross-sectional shape (e.g.,
    tapered, etc.) that will partially receive the annular piston ring expander.


CLS 277/473
TXT Between piston rings:

    Particular annular piston ring expander under subclass 472 wherein the
    piston ring expander nests in annular grooves formed between piston rings.


CLS 277/474
TXT And contacting surfaces therebetween are complementary:

    Particular annular piston ring expander under subclass 472 wherein the
    piston ring expander provides an annular surface complementary to the
    opposing annular recess surface of the piston ring.


CLS 277/475
TXT Having more than one pair of such surfaces:

    Contacting surfaces therebetween are complementary under subclass 474
    wherein the piston ring expander provides complementary surfaces for
    opposing annular recess surfaces of the piston ring.


CLS 277/476
TXT Inclined or beveled groove contacting expander having dissimilar contour:

    Particular annular piston ring expander under subclass 472 provides an
    annular surface having a profile other than a slanting or sloping surface
    of the annular recess of the piston ring.


CLS 277/477
TXT Slotted or undulating circular band including inclined or axially facing
    seat for the piston ring:

    Particular piston ring expander under subclass 467 wherein the piston ring
    expander is a resilient annular band having openings therein or having a
    wavy or corrugated contour, and a radially extending surface intended to
    space, position, retain, or bias a separate and distinct piston ring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    459+,   for a piston ring having an exposed port, slot, pocket, groove,
    channel, recess, or bevel

    485,    for a piston ring expander having an undulating structure providing
    an axially extending face against the inner periphery of the piston ring.


CLS 277/478
TXT Axially spaced axially facing seats:

    Particular piston ring expander under subclass 477 wherein the piston ring
    expander has more than one radially extending surface intended to space,
    position, retain, or bias separate and distinct piston rings along the
    piston's reciprocating axis.


CLS 277/479
TXT Circular band having radially displaced undulations:

    Axially spaced, axially facing seats under subclass 478 wherein the annular
    band has a wavy or sinuous structure parallel to the piston's reciprocating
    axis.


CLS 277/480
TXT Circular band having axially displaced undulations:

    Axially spaced, axially facing seats under subclass 478 wherein the annular
    band has a wavy or sinuous structure radially perpendicular to the piston's
    reciprocating axis.


CLS 277/481
TXT U-shaped circular band radially directed either inwardly or outwardly
    through out its circumference:

    Axially spaced, axially facing seats under subclass 478 wherein the annular
    band has a channel-shaped cross-section oriented radially in either an
    inward or outward facing direction throughout its perimeter.

    (1)     Note.  The U- or channel-shaped structure does not have to be
    continuous or unbroken throughout its circumference.


CLS 277/482
TXT Circumferentially spaced separately seated radially acting bias feature:

    Particular piston ring expander under subclass 467 wherein the piston ring
    expander has peripherally spread apart, individually positioned, resilient
    members acting in a direction perpendicular to the piston's axis of
    reciprocation.


CLS 277/483
TXT Disposed in socket or about pin:

    Particular piston ring expander under subclass 482 wherein the radially
    acting bias members are received and held in circumferentially spaced
    hollows of or arranged about circumferentially spaced projections.


CLS 277/484
TXT Radially extending tongue formed from expander:

    Particular piston ring expander under subclass 467 wherein the piston ring
    expander has a radially inward or outward resilient biasing projection
    fabricated from the piston ring expander.


CLS 277/485
TXT Undulating periphery providing axially extending face against inner
    perimeter of the piston ring:

    Particular piston ring expander under subclass 467 wherein the piston ring
    expander provides a circumferential, radial facing, wavy, or corrugated
    structure against an opposing inside circumference of the piston ring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    477+,   for a particular piston ring expander, having a slotted or
    undulating circular band, having an inclined or axially facing seat for the
    piston ring.


CLS 277/486
TXT Bias feature adjoining opposed ends of split or segmented piston ring:

    Particular piston ring expander under subclass 467 wherein the piston ring
    expander is contacting or near a piston ring divided into portions forming
    facing ends along its perimeter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    487,    for a segmented piston ring expander.

    493,    for a segmented piston ring.


CLS 277/487
TXT Segmented:

    Particular piston ring expander under subclass 467 wherein the piston ring
    expander's perimeter is divided into portions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    486,    for a piston ring expander adjoining opposed ends of a split or
    segmented piston ring.

    493,    for a segmented piston ring.


CLS 277/488
TXT For axially adjacent piston rings:

    Particular piston ring expander under subclass 467 wherein the piston ring
    expander engages piston rings that adjoin each other along their radially
    extending circumferences.

    (1)     Note.  The ring may be separate or may be part of a unitary,
    overlapping structure forming a helix.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    489+,   for a piston ring having sectional structure.


CLS 277/489
TXT Sectional piston ring structure:

    Piston ring under subclass 434 consisting of more than one component.

    (1)     Note.  A piston ring placed as an original should have more than
    nominal structure before crossing in this and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    446,    for a piston ring or piston ring expander having means to limit
    rotation between another piston ring or piston ring expander.

    488,    for a piston ring expander engaging axially adjacent piston rings.

    548,    for a dynamic, segmented ring circumferentially contacting seal for
    other than piston having complementary interfitting adjoining rings.


CLS 277/490
TXT Eccentric or variable thickness component ring:

    Sectional piston ring under subclass 489 wherein the component has a radial
    periphery of changing radius or an axial periphery of changing thickness.

    (1)     Note.  The shape of the sectional piston ring formed by the
    component rings can be eccentric or concentric or of uniform or variable
    thickness.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    458,    for a piston ring having a single piece, noncircular, or multiturn
    (e.g., helical, spiral, oblong, elliptical, polygonal, etc.) shape.


CLS 277/491
TXT C, L, T, U, V, or Z cross-sectional profile:

    Sectional piston ring under subclass 489 wherein the component has a C-,
    L-, T-, U-, V-, or Z-shape in a view of a vertical plane cutting across the
    component ring at right angles to one of its principal horizontal
    dimensions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    530,    for a dynamic, circumferential, contact seal for other than a
    piston intended to be contained or compressed by a gland member in a
    packing box having a C, M, U, V, X, or Z cross-sectional seal shape.


CLS 277/492
TXT Three or more sections:

    Sectional piston ring under subclass 491 wherein the sectional piston ring
    has at least three component rings.


CLS 277/493
TXT Segmented piston ring:

    Piston ring under subclass 434 wherein the piston ring's perimeter is
    divided into portions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    486,    for a piston ring expander adjoining opposed ends of a split or
    segmented piston ring.

    487,    for a segmented, piston ring expander.

    543+,   for a dynamic, segmented ring circumferentially contacting seal for
    other than a piston.


CLS 277/494
TXT Separate bridging piece for gap in piston ring:

    Piston ring under subclass 434 wherein the piston ring includes a break
    providing opposed ends and a means separate from the piston ring for
    closing the gap therebetween or for connecting the ends together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    486,    for a piston ring expander adjoining opposed ends of a split or
    segmented piston ring.

    546+,   for a dynamic, segmented ring circumferentially contacting seal for
    other than a piston having a particular end structure.

    631,    for a static, contact seal for other than an internal combustion
    engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable having a split including end joining
    structure.


CLS 277/495
TXT Secured to end:

    Bridging piece under subclass 494 wherein the bridging piece fastens to one
    or both of the opposing ends.


CLS 277/496
TXT Split single piece piston ring having opposed asymmetrical mirrored ends:

    Piston ring under subclass 434 wherein the piston ring is an annulus
    including only a gap providing opposed ends that are of substantially
    identical shape having opposite orientation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    546+,   for a dynamic segmented ring circumferentially contacting seal for
    other than a piston having a particular end structure.

    631,    for a static contact seal for other than an internal combustion
    engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable having a split including end joining
    structure.


CLS 277/497
TXT Arcuate or beveled mating surfaces:

    Single piece split piston ring under subclass 496 wherein the opposed
    asymmetrical mirrored ends are complementary curved or angular engaging
    surfaces.


CLS 277/498
TXT Split single piece piston ring having other than opposed asymmetrical
    mirrored ends:

    Piston ring under subclass 434 wherein the piston ring is an annulus
    including only a gap providing opposed ends that are of substantially
    dissimilar shape even when considering opposite orientation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    546+,   for a dynamic, segmented ring circumferentially contacting seal for
    other than a piston having a particular end structure.

    631,    for a static contact seal for other than an internal combustion
    engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable having a split including end joining
    structure.


CLS 277/499
TXT Arcuate or beveled mating surfaces:

    Split single piece piston ring under subclass 498 wherein the opposed ends
    have curved or angular engaging surfaces.


CLS 277/500
TXT Circumferential contact seal for other than piston:

    Dynamic seal under subclass 345 wherein the seal has a radial peripheral
    surface contact against one or more of the relatively movable parts and for
    other than a part (i.e., a piston) that reciprocates along an axis to an
    enclosing wall and where the seal is for engaging the wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    311,    for a process of dynamic sealing employing a flexible ring.

    354,    for a dynamic seal for a helically threaded part.

    907,    for a passageway in a rod or shaft.

    908,    for a seal for use in a rotating and reciprocating arrangement.

    909,    for a seal having similar sealing structures for a piston and rod.

    910,    for an O-ring seal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 168 for a nonmetallic seal
    means between a piston or a part moved by the piston and a cylinder end
    portion.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 90.37 for a poppet valve
    mechanism's lubrication system's seal or shield that includes those mounted
    on a valve stem.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, for processes and means for
    initially forming or radially enlarging an elongated hole in the earth in
    situ, subclass 359 for mutually contacting cutter supports that are
    circumferentially displaced axes for a rolling cutter bit or rolling cutter
    bit element with seal details, or subclass 371 for a rolling cutter bit or
    rolling cutter bit element with seal details.

    188,    Brakes, for means of retarding motion of or stopping of machines;
    subclass 322.17 for an internal resistance motion retarder including a
    thrust component used to vary volume in a fluid-filled chamber having a
    particular retarder component structure with a dynamic sealing ring or
    flexible boot between a piston rod and cylinder.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 216 for
    cooperating comminuting surfaces having a gyratory member that includes
    rotary motion and means to seal the comminuting zone from a drive or other
    moving parts.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, for means to close or restrict a flow
    of fluid through a passage by a definite predetermined motion of the means
    combined with a seal, subclass 214 for a valve actuated by a mechanical
    movement means and having a particularly associated sealing means for
    either.

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, for a wheel or axle, or where
    they are a dominant feature when combined with other vehicle structure;
    subclass 123 for a seal to exclude dirt or dust from a wheel or axle
    bearing.

    305,    Wheel Substitutes for Land Vehicles, subclasses 100+ for a flexible
    track joint structure (e.g., pin, link, etc.) including a seal, deflector,
    or scraper.

    384,    Bearings, for more than nominal bearing structure or detail (e.g.,
    liner, bearing race, cage, etc.) combined with a specific seal, subclasses
    151+ for a  plain radial bearing where the seal's material is resilient and
    on the outer area of the bearing or shaft.

    417,    Pumps, for a general means to move a fluid from one place to
    another having an inlet and an outlet, subclass 423.11 for a rotary
    electric motor and rotary nonexpansible chamber pump having sealing means
    therebetween.

    440,    Marine Propulsion, for a vessel and a device (e.g., propeller,
    impeller, etc.) other than a sail to move the vessel through water,
    subclass 112 for means to mount an engine within the vessel's hull and
    sealing means for a propeller shaft that pierces the hull.


CLS 277/501
TXT And magnetic bias:

    Dynamic, circumferential contact seal under subclass 500 including a polar
    field to bias the seal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    378,    for a relatively rotatable, radially extending sealing face member
    (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.) including a magnetic axial bias therefor.

    629,    for a static contact seal for other than an internal combustion
    engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable that uses magnetism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 62.51+ for a composition useful for a
    magnetic purpose or a process for making the composition, not provided for
    elsewhere.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets; subclasses 209+ for a magnet or an electromagnet,
    configured or arranged to perform external mechanical work but does not
    include the external mechanical work.


CLS 277/502
TXT For valve stem in internal combustion engine:

    Dynamic, circumferential contact seal under subclass 500 wherein the seal
    is at the joint or juncture between a reciprocating part (i.e., stem of a
    valve controls the flow of gas in an internal combustion engine) and a
    housing part (i.e., a guide for a valve in an internal combustion engine).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 188.6 for a seal in
    combination with a valve stem of an intake, exhaust or fuel valve of an
    internal combustion engine having a stationary opening (i.e., seat) and
    moving closure (i.e., head).


CLS 277/503
TXT Accommodates gyratory or oscillatory motion:

    Dynamic, circumferential contact seal under subclass 500 wherein the seal
    permits angular or lateral deflection, circular displacement, eccentric
    movement, or vibration of one or more of the relatively movable parts.

    (1)     Note.  A seal that accommodates gyratory or oscillatory motion is
    capable of sealing relatively movable parts that move angularly or
    perpendicularly to its main axis of motion whereas a floater type seal has
    relative motion between the relatively movable parts it seals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    398,    for a relatively rotatable, radially extending, sealing face member
    (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.) that accommodates or exhibits eccentric,
    gyratory, or oscillatory motion.

    916,    for a seal having vibration dampening means.


CLS 277/504
TXT Flexible connection between seal and another part:

    Accommodates gyratory or oscillatory motion under subclass 503 wherein the
    seal for use on one of the relatively movable parts (e.g., shaft, rod,
    etc.) includes a compliant link (e.g., flexible sleeve, flexible boot,
    flexible diaphragm, etc.) that accommodates oscillatory or gyratory motion
    between and secures the seal and the other of the relatively movable parts
    (e.g., casing, housing, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  The seal may be part of and include a stuffing box.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315,    for a process of static sealing employing a flexible sleeve, boot,
    or diaphragm.

    389,    for a relatively rotatable, radially extending, sealing face member
    (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.) including fluid pressure acting against a
    bellows or diaphragm to create an axial bias therefor.

    391+,   for a relatively rotatable, radially extending, sealing face member
    (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.) including a flexible sleeve, boot, or
    diaphragm to provide a secondary seal or driving connection therefor.

    634+,   for a static contact flexible sleeve, boot, or diaphragm seal for
    other than an internal combustion engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, subclasses 173+ for a flexible boot for a joint to transmit
    rotary torque.


CLS 277/505
TXT Oscillates perpendicularly to axis of motion:

    Accommodates gyratory or oscillatory motion under subclass 503 wherein the
    seal permits side-to-side deflection  of one of the relatively movable
    parts at right angles to an axis of movement between the relatively movable
    parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    356,    for a dynamic seal for use in a journal box that may include a seal
    mounted for lateral movement to an axis of seal chamber.


CLS 277/506
TXT Arcuate bearing surface:

    Accommodates gyratory or oscillatory motion under subclass 503 wherein the
    seal or one of the relatively movable parts has a curved bearing surface.


CLS 277/507
TXT Partially spherical:

    Arcuate bearing surface under subclass 506 wherein the arcuate bearing
    surface is somewhat circular, ball-like, or round.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, for more than nominal bearing structure or detail (e.g.,
    liner, bearing race, cage, etc.) combined with a specific seal, subclasses
    145+ for a plain radial bearing where the seal conforms to a bearing
    surface that has a shape of sphere to permit angular or lateral movement.

    403,    Joints and Connections, for a joint or connection structure that
    goes beyond providing an environment for a seal; subclasses 135+ for a ball
    and socket that may have a seal at the bearing interface.


CLS 277/508
TXT Axially spring biased:

    Accommodates gyratory or oscillatory motion under subclass 503 including an
    elastic contrivance or body to force the seal in a direction along an axis
    of motion of the relatively movable parts.


CLS 277/509
TXT Coaxial spring:

    Axial spring bias under subclass 508 wherein the spring has a symmetrical
    axis substantially common to the axis of motion formed by the relatively
    movable parts.


CLS 277/510
TXT Contained or compressed by gland member in packing box:

    Dynamic, circumferential contact seal under subclass 500 wherein the seal
    is intended for use in a chamber having an axially opened end to receive
    the seal and a member that substantially closes the open end to retain or
    squeeze the seal within the chamber while having an opening for passage for
    one of the relatively movable parts.

    (1)     Note.  A biasing spring is not a gland or follower.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    308,    for a process of dynamic sealing employing a seal to be contained
    or compressed by a gland member in a packing box.

    329+,   for a seal for well apparatus where the seal is in a packing box
    contained or compressed by a gland member.

    396,    for a relatively rotatable radially extending sealing face member
    (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.) including a secondary mounting seal
    consisting of axially compressed packing.

    620+,   for a static contact seal intended for use on a pipe, conduit, or
    cable including a clamping gland.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, for more than nominal bearing structure or detail (e.g.,
    liner, bearing race, cage, etc.) combined with a specific seal, subclass
    149 for a plain radial bearing, or subclass 483 for a radial antifriction
    bearing having radially contained seal having an axially acting follower.


CLS 277/511
TXT Having installation, removal, assembly, disassembly, or repair feature:

    Seal for the gland and packing box under subclass 510 including means to
    aid in mounting, extricating, construction, dismantling or restoration of
    the seal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323,    for a seal for well apparatus having an installation, removal,
    assembly, disassembly, or repair feature.

    370+,   for a relatively rotatable extending sealing face member (e.g.,
    face, mechanical, etc.) having an installation, removal, assembly,
    disassembly, or repair feature.

    435,    for a piston ring, piston ring expander or seat therefore having an
    installation, removal, assembly, disassembly, or repair feature.

    551,    for a dynamic peripheral radially sealing flexible projection
    (e.g., lip seal, etc.) for other than a piston having an installation,
    removal, assembly, disassembly, or repair feature.

    598,    for a static contact seal for use between parts of an internal
    combustion engine having an installation, removal, assembly, disassembly,
    or repair feature.

    609,    for a static contact seal intended for insertion between an
    end-to-end pipe, conduit, or cable joint having an installation, removal,
    assembly, disassembly, or repair feature.

    630,    for a static contact seal for other than an internal combustion
    engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable having an installation, removal,
    assembly, disassembly, or repair feature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, for a method of mechanical manufacture or for
    apparatus to assemble or disassemble, subclass 402.02 for a method of
    repairing a seal or element thereof not provided for elsewhere, or
    subclasses 700+ for general apparatus to assemble or disassemble.


CLS 277/512
TXT Fluid introducer or director:

    Seal for the gland and packing box under subclass 510 wherein the seal,
    gland or packing box includes means to convey a fluid into, within or out
    of the seal, gland or packing box.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    408,    for a relatively rotatable, radially extending, sealing face member
    (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.) including means to introduce, circulate, or
    remove fluid.

    431+,   for a dynamic close proximity seal (e.g., contactless, fluent,
    etc.) created by pressurized sealing fluid introduced to form a barrier.

    918,    for a seal for other than dynamic circumferential contact seal for
    other than a piston contained or compressed by a gland member in a packing
    box having a filter or fluid separator.

    927,    for a seal for other than dynamic circumferential contact seal for
    other than a piston contained or compressed by a gland member in a packing
    box having means to create a fluid different from the sealed fluid pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    184,    Lubrication, for a unitized lubrication means removable or
    installable from one machine to on another and intended to lubricate a
    bearing part in a machine, subclasses 24+ for a piston rod lubricator.


CLS 277/513
TXT External device or system:

    Fluid introduction or director under subclass 512 wherein the means is an
    apparatus or organization of apparatuses located outside the packing box.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    930,    for a seal for other than a dynamic seal to be contained or
    compressed by a gland member in a packing box including an external device
    or system to introduce or direct a fluid having a heating or cooling
    feature.


CLS 277/514
TXT Drain, pressure relief, or vent:

    Fluid introduction or director under subclass 512 including means to direct
    fluid away from or for alleviating fluid stress or strain.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    928,    for a seal having a pressure relief or venting feature for other
    than a dynamic circumferential contact seal, for other than a piston
    intended to be in a packing box contained or compressed by a gland member
    and having a drain, pressure relief, or vent feature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, for more than nominal bearing structure or detail (e.g.,
    liner, bearing race, cage, etc.) combined with a specific seal, subclass
    479 for a radial antifriction bearing where the seal establishes a pressure
    or pressure responsive means to load the seal.


CLS 277/515
TXT Passage through axial facing surface:

    Fluid introduction or director under subclass 512 wherein the means is a
    passageway that extends from one radially extending surface to another
    radial or axial extending surface of the seal, packing box, or gland.


CLS 277/516
TXT Spacer between seals (e.g., lantern ring, etc.):

    Fluid introduction or director under subclass 512 wherein the means is a
    nonsealing member separating seals.


CLS 277/517
TXT Between packing boxes:

    Fluid introduction or director under subclass 512 wherein the means is
    between chambers.


CLS 277/518
TXT Plural distinct packing boxes:

    Seal for the gland and packing box under subclass 510 comprising
    distinguishable sealing chambers, seals, and glands.


CLS 277/519
TXT Segmented packing box:

    Seal for the gland and packing box under subclass 510 wherein the chamber
    is divided into portions.


CLS 277/520
TXT Particular gland feature:

    Seal for the gland and packing box under subclass 510 wherein the member
    that substantially closes the open end of the packing box while having an
    opening for passage for one of the relatively movable parts has a specific
    characteristic.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, for more than nominal bearing structure or detail (e.g.,
    liner, bearing race, cage, etc.) combined with a specific seal, subclass
    150 for a plain, radial bearing where mechanical means (e.g., nut, separate
    resilient elements, etc.) moves the seal.


CLS 277/521
TXT Segmented:

    Particular gland feature under subclass 520 wherein the gland is divided
    into portions.


CLS 277/522
TXT Spring bias:

    Particular gland feature under subclass 520 including an elastic
    contrivance or body to exert force on the gland.


CLS 277/523
TXT Disposed about external bolt or stud:

    Spring bias under subclass 522 wherein the spring bias surrounds a fastener
    or projecting pin located outside the packing box and used to mount the
    gland to the packing box.


CLS 277/524
TXT Eye or T-type bolt:

    Particular gland feature under subclass 520 wherein the gland uses a
    fastening means threaded at one and having a hole, loop, or crosspiece at
    the other end intended to engage corresponding structure on the gland or
    packing box.


CLS 277/525
TXT Internally threaded:

    Particular gland feature under subclass 520 wherein the gland has a
    radially inward facing projecting helical rib intended to fasten the
    component to the packing box.


CLS 277/526
TXT Externally threaded:

    Particular gland feature under subclass 520 wherein the gland has a
    radially outward facing projecting helical rib intended to fasten the
    component to the packing box.


CLS 277/527
TXT Wear sleeve:

    Seal for the gland and packing box under subclass 510 including a tubular
    member mounted on one of the relatively movable parts intended to protect
    the one relatively movable part from deterioration from the relatively
    movable surface contact of the seal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    571,    for a dynamic, circumferential contacting peripheral radially
    sealing flexible projection (e.g., lip seal, etc.) including a wear sleeve.


CLS 277/528
TXT Helically coiled packing:

    Seal for the gland and packing box under subclass 510 wherein the seal has
    a spirally wound structure between the parts along their axis of relative
    motion.


CLS 277/529
TXT Having particular cross-sectional seal profile:

    Seal for the gland and packing box under subclass 510 wherein the seal has
    a specific shape in a view of a vertical plane cutting across the seal at
    right angles to one of its principle horizontal dimensions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    490,    for a piston ring having sectional structure including a component
    ring of eccentric or variable thickness.

    548,    for a dynamic segmented ring circumferentially contacting seal for
    other than piston having complementary interfitting adjoining rings.

    626,    for a static contact seal having a particular seal shape intended
    for use on a pipe, conduit, or cable.


CLS 277/530
TXT C-, M-, U-, V-, X-, or Z-shaped:

    Particular cross-sectional seal profile under subclass 529 wherein the
    profile has a U-, V-, C-, M-, X-, or Z-configuration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    491+,   for a piston ring having a sectional structure including a
    component ring having a C, L, T, U, V, or Z cross-sectional profile.

    567,    for a dynamic circumferential contact seal for other than a piston
    having peripherally radially sealing flexible projections forming a
    radially facing U or V cross-sectional profile.

    647,    for a static seal having a C-, U-, or V-shaped cross-sectional seal
    profile for other than an internal combustion engine, or a pipe, conduit,
    or cable.


CLS 277/531
TXT Wedging surface:

    Particular cross-sectional seal profile under subclass 529 wherein the
    profile includes an inclined surface to generate a radial bias.


CLS 277/532
TXT Made of elastomer or plastic:

    Wedging surface under subclass 531 wherein the seal is a rubberlike
    material.


CLS 277/533
TXT Segmented:

    Wedging surface under subclass 531 wherein the seal's perimeter is divided
    into portions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    543+,   for a dynamic segmented ring circumferentially contacting seal for
    other than a piston.


CLS 277/534
TXT Particular seal material or construction:

    Seal for the gland and packing box under subclass 510 wherein the seal is
    of a specific material or has a specific arrangement of material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    935+,   for a seal for other than a dynamic circumferential contact seal
    for other than a piston intended to be contained or compressed by a gland
    member in a packing box made out of a particular material.


CLS 277/535
TXT Composite:

    Particular material or construction under subclass 534 wherein the material
    consists of distinct substances that retain their identities in the
    material used to form the seal.


CLS 277/536
TXT Fibrous component:

    Composite under subclass 535 wherein the composite includes a plurality of
    slender filamentlike strands.


CLS 277/537
TXT Braided, woven, or twisted:

    Fibrous component under subclass 536 wherein the fibrous component has an
    intertwined structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, for a process or
    apparatus for spinning, twisting and twining.

    87,     Textiles: Braiding, Netting or Lace Making, a process or apparatus
    for forming strands or fabrics from yarns, filaments, or strands by
    braiding, knotting, or intertwisting the strands and the corresponding
    products or fabrics.

    139,    Textiles: Weaving, for manufacture of fabric by weaving threads.


CLS 277/538
TXT Distinct sheath or covering:

    Composite under subclass 535 wherein the composite includes a distinct
    casing or layer surrounding at least a major portion of an outer periphery
    of the seal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    652+,   for a static contact seal for other than an internal combustion
    engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable having a sheath or covering.


CLS 277/539
TXT Graphite:

    Particular material or construction under subclass 534 wherein the specific
    substance forming the seal is graphite.


CLS 277/540
TXT Elastomer or plastic:

    Particular material or construction under subclass 534 wherein the specific
    substance forming the seal is rubberlike.


CLS 277/541
TXT Metal:

    Particular material or construction under subclass 534 wherein the specific
    substance forming the seal is metal.


CLS 277/542
TXT Consisting of loose-fill type packing:

    Seal for the gland and packing box under subclass 510 wherein the seal is a
    free unshaped packing material.


CLS 277/543
TXT Segmented ring:

    Dynamic, circumferential contact seal under subclass 500 wherein the seal
    is an annulus divided across its perimeter into portions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    325,    for a segmented and radially actuated (e.g., ram-type, etc.) seal
    for a well apparatus overpressure control device (e.g., seal for a blowout
    preventer, etc.).

    344,    for a segmented and radially actuated seal (e.g., oil saver, gas
    saver, etc.) for well apparatus.

    356,    for a dynamic seal for use in a journal box that may include a
    segmented seal.

    493,    for a segmented piston ring.


CLS 277/544
TXT Having pressure balancing or radial bias reduction feature:

    Segmented ring under subclass 543 including means to equalize fluid
    pressure forces acting on the segmented ring or means to generate a
    radially outwardly directed force to oppose a radially inwardly directed
    bias force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    926,    for a seal for other than a dynamic, segmented ring
    circumferentially contacting seal for other than a piston having pressure
    balancing or radial bias reducing means having means to create a fluid
    pressure equilibrium at a joint or juncture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, for more than nominal bearing structure or detail (e.g.,
    liner, bearing race, cage, etc.) combined with a specific seal, subclass
    131 for a plain radial bearing where fluid moves the seal, or subclass 479
    for a radial antifriction bearing where the seal establishes a pressure or
    pressure responsive means loads the seal.


CLS 277/545
TXT Radial biasing spring element other than nominal garter spring:

    Segmented ring under subclass 543 including means other than a nominally
    set forth coiled wire spring that encircles the seal around its
    circumference to provide a radial bias for the segmented ring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    486,    for a piston ring expander adjoining opposed ends of a split or
    segmented piston ring.

    487,    for a segmented, piston ring expander.

    533,    for a dynamic, segmented, circumferential contact seal for other
    than a piston intended to be contained or compressed by a gland member in a
    packing box having a particular cross-sectional shape to provide a wedging
    surface.

    553+,   for a dynamic, circumferential, contacting peripheral, radially
    sealing, flexible projection (e.g., a lip seal, etc.) including a bias
    means other than a nominal garter spring for other than a piston.

    589,    for a dynamic, circumferential contact seal for other than a piston
    radially backed by resilient or elastomeric member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, for more than nominal bearing structure or detail (e.g.,
    liner, bearing race, cage, etc.) combined with a specific seal, subclass
    150 for a plain radial bearing where mechanical means (e.g., nut, separate
    resilient elements, etc.) moves the seal.


CLS 277/546
TXT Particular segment end structure:

    Segmented ring under subclass 543 wherein the segmented ring portions have
    adjoining edges that have a specific configuration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    494+,   for a piston ring having a gap and a separate bridging piece for
    the gap.

    496+,   for a single piece split piston ring having opposed asymmetrical
    mirrored ends.

    498+,   for a single piece split piston ring having other than opposed
    asymmetrical mirrored ends.

    631,    for a static contact seal for other than an internal combustion
    engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable having a split including end joining
    structure.


CLS 277/547
TXT Interfitting projection and recess:

    Particular segment end structure under subclass 546 wherein the end
    structure of one of the segmented ring portions has a protrusion to fit
    within a cavity on the end structure or another adjoining segment.


CLS 277/548
TXT Plural complementary interfitting rings:

    Segmented ring under subclass 543 wherein the segmented ring has one or
    more adjacent rings where a portion of a peripheral surface of one the
    rings penetrates a corresponding recess on a peripheral surface of an
    adjoining ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include adjacent rings having
    complementary inclined or wedging surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    489+,   for a piston ring having sectional structure.

    529+,   for a dynamic, circumferential contact seal for other than a piston
    intended to be contained or compressed by a gland member in a packing box
    having a particular cross-sectional seal shape.


CLS 277/549
TXT Peripheral radially sealing flexible projection (e.g., lip seal, etc.):

    Dynamic, circumferential contact seal under subclass 500 wherein the seal
    is a pliant or resilient extension having a tip for relatively movable
    contact to an inner or outer perimeter of one of the relatively movable
    parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    309,    for a process of dynamic sealing employing a peripheral radially
    sealing flexible projection (e.g., lip seal, piston cup, etc.).

    349,    for diverse and distinct dynamic seals including a close proximity
    seal (e.g., contactless, fluent, etc.), a relatively rotatable radially
    extending sealing face member (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.) and a
    circumferential peripheral radially sealing flexible projection (e.g., lip
    seal, etc.).

    351,    for diverse and distinct dynamic seals including a close proximity
    seal (e.g., contactless, fluent, etc.) and a peripheral radially sealing
    flexible projection (e.g., lip seal, etc.).

    353,    for diverse and distinct dynamic seals including a relatively
    rotatable radially extending sealing face member (e.g., face, mechanical,
    etc.) and a circumferential peripheral radially sealing flexible projection
    (e.g., lip seal, etc.).

    394+,   for a relatively rotatable radially extending sealing face member
    (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.) including a secondary mounting seal having a
    peripherally radially sealing flexible projection (e.g., lip seal, etc.).

    402,    for a relatively rotatable radially extending sealing face member
    (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.) having a flexible projection (e.g., lip
    seal, etc.) configuration.

    436+,   for a piston ring having a peripheral radially sealing flexible
    projection (e.g., a piston cup, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, for more than nominal bearing structure or detail (e.g.,
    liner, bearing race, cage, etc.) combined with a specific seal, subclasses
    147+ for a plain radial bearing where the seal is a peripheral radially
    sealing flexible projection extending axially of a center of a seal seat to
    contact the relatively moving element to be sealed or subclasses 484+ for a
    radial antifriction bearing where the seal is a peripheral radially sealing
    flexible projection contacting a relatively rotating surface parallel to
    the axis of rotation.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings and Flexible Couplings for Rotary
    Shafts, subclass 131 for a drive coupling that accommodates misaligned or
    angularly related axes through a radially directed pin having a particular
    bearing cup surrounding the pin end and a flexible seal or subclass 133 for
    a drive coupling that accommodates misaligned or angularly related axes
    through a radially directed pin and a flexible seal.


CLS 277/550
TXT Made of metal or is a scraper:

    Peripheral radially sealing flexible projection under subclass 549 wherein
    the flexible projection is metal or, dislodges or removes unwanted foreign
    material by direct relatively movable contact against one of the parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, for more than nominal bearing structure or detail (e.g.,
    liner, bearing race, cage, etc.) combined with a specific seal, subclass
    137 for a plain radial bearing where the seal has means to remove excess
    lubricant from the shaft and return it to a lubricant reservoir or for
    removing material from the shaft about to enter the bearing from the
    outside.


CLS 277/551
TXT Having installation, removal, assembly, disassembly, or repair feature:

    Peripheral radially sealing flexible projection under subclass 549
    including means to aid in mounting, extricating, construction, dismantling
    or restoration of the seal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323,    for a seal for well apparatus having an installation, removal,
    assembly, disassembly, or repair feature.

    370+,   for a relatively rotatable extending sealing face member (e.g.,
    face, mechanical, etc.) having an installation, removal, assembly,
    disassembly, or repair feature.

    421,    for a close proximity labyrinth seal having an installation,
    removal, assembly, disassembly, or repair feature.

    435,    for a piston ring, piston ring expander, or seat therefore having
    an installation, removal, assembly, disassembly, or repair feature.

    572+,   for a dynamic circumferential contacting peripheral radially
    sealing flexible projection (e.g., lip seal, etc.) including a particular
    mounting, frame, casing, or reinforcement feature for other than a piston.

    598,    for a static contact seal for use between parts of an internal
    combustion engine having an installation, removal, assembly, disassembly,
    or repair feature.

    609,    for a static contact seal intended for insertion between an end to
    end pipe, conduit or cable joint having an installation, removal, assembly,
    disassembly, or repair feature.

    630,    for a static contact seal for other than an internal combustion
    engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable having an installation, removal,
    assembly, disassembly, or repair feature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, for a method of mechanical manufacture or for
    apparatus to assemble or disassemble, subclass 402.02 for a method of
    repairing a seal or element thereof not provided for elsewhere, or
    subclasses 700+ for general apparatus to assemble or disassemble.


CLS 277/552
TXT Having pressure relief or venting feature:

    Peripheral radially sealing flexible projection under subclass 549
    including means for releasing or relieving fluid pressure at the joint or
    juncture.

    (1)     Note.  For this subclass a valve for a passageway must claim or
    disclose a venting function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    928,    for a seal having a pressure relief or venting feature for other
    than a dynamic circumferential contact seal for other than a piston having
    a peripheral radially sealing flexible projection including a pressure
    relief or venting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, for more than nominal bearing structure or detail (e.g.,
    liner, bearing race, cage, etc.) combined with a specific seal, subclass
    479 for a radial antifriction bearing where the seal establishes a pressure
    or pressure responsive means loads the seal.


CLS 277/553
TXT Bias feature other than nominal garter spring:

    Peripheral radially sealing flexible projection under subclass 549
    including means other than a nominally set forth coil wire spring that
    encircles the seal around its circumference to provide a radial bias for
    the flexible projection.

    (1)     Note.  Dimensional aspects of a garter spring are proper for this
    and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    545,    for a dynamic, circumferentially contacting segmented ring for
    other than a piston having other than a nominal garter spring as a radial
    biasing spring element.

    589,    for a dynamic, circumferential contact seal for other than a piston
    radially backed by resilient or elastomeric member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, for more than nominal bearing structure or detail (e.g.,
    liner, bearing race, cage, etc.) combined with a specific seal, subclasses
    148 for a plain radial bearing where the seal is a peripheral radially
    sealing flexible projection including bias means extending axially of a
    center of a seal seat to contact the relatively moving element to be sealed.


CLS 277/554
TXT Embedded spring:

    Bias for the flexible projection under subclass 553 wherein the flexible
    projection encloses the bias feature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    618,    for a static, contact seal intended for use on a pipe, conduit, or
    cable including an axially related or embedded coil spring that mounts or
    retains the seal.


CLS 277/555
TXT Radially extending finger spring:

    Bias for the flexible projection under subclass 553 wherein the bias is one
    or more lengthwise projecting digits oriented along the peripheral radially
    sealing flexible projection.


CLS 277/556
TXT Material other than metal:

    Bias for the flexible projection under subclass 553 consisting of a
    substance other than metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    468,    for a particular piston ring expander separate from a piston ring
    and other than metal.


CLS 277/557
TXT Axially extending helical or spiral spring:

    Bias for the flexible projection under subclass 553 wherein the bias
    feature is a wound wire formed into a tubular or conical formation about a
    longitudinal axis of the flexible projection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    618,    for a static contact seal intended for use on a pipe, conduit, or
    cable including an axially related or embedded coil spring that mounts or
    retains the seal.


CLS 277/558
TXT Particular fluid pressure responsive bias:

    Bias for the flexible projection under subclass 553 wherein the radial bias
    includes specific means to react to a change in fluid pressure to vary the
    radial bias.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    929,    for a seal for other than a dynamic circumferential contact seal
    for other than a piston having a fluid pressure responsive radially biasing
    means where a change in operation or condition induces additional leakage
    control.


CLS 277/559
TXT Hydrodynamic sealing feature:

    Peripheral, radially sealing, flexible projection under subclass 549
    including means to create a turbulence at the point of relatively movable
    contact between the flexible projection and the relatively movable part.

    (1)     Note.  For this subclass, dust or dirt in a vacuum, liquid, or gas
    is considered a fluid.


CLS 277/560
TXT Dimensional aspect of the flexible projection (e.g., angle, length, radius,
    thickness, etc.):

    Peripheral, radially sealing, flexible projection under subclass 549
    wherein the flexible projection has at least a portion of its shape defined
    quantitatively (e.g., angle, length, radius, thickness, etc.).


CLS 277/561
TXT Intermediate flexible bending portion:

    Peripheral, radially sealing, flexible projection under subclass 549
    wherein the flexible projection has radially opposed ends and has a pliant
    and resilient wall structure therebetween intended to provide greater
    flexibility.


CLS 277/562
TXT Plural peripheral radially sealing flexible projections:

    Peripheral, radially sealing, flexible projection under subclass 549
    including more than one peripheral, radially sealing, flexible projection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    612,    for a static contact seal intended for insertion between an
    end-to-end pipe, conduit, or cable joint having plural extended projections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, for more than nominal bearing structure or detail (e.g.,
    liner, bearing race, cage, etc.) combined with a specific seal, subclasses
    486 for a radial antifriction bearing where the seal is a peripheral,
    radially sealing, flexible projection contacting a relatively rotating
    surface parallel to the axis of rotation.


CLS 277/563
TXT Having interposed fluid receiver or director:

    Plural, flexible projections under subclass 562 including means between the
    flexible projections to collect, contain, or guide the fluid.


CLS 277/564
TXT Having insert between the flexible projections:

    Plural, flexible projections under subclass 562 including a member inset
    therebetween intended to bias or reinforce.

    (1)     Note. Radially facing, U- or V-shaped, sealing rings are proper for
    this subclass.


CLS 277/565
TXT On radial facing side of single seal:

    Plural, flexible projections under subclass 562 wherein the plural,
    flexible projections are on an axially extending side of the same seal body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    615,    for a static contact seal intended for use on a pipe, conduit, or
    cable having axially spaced projections.

    648+,   for a static contact seal for other than an internal combustion
    engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable having plural projections along a
    sealing surface.


CLS 277/566
TXT Both radial sides of the single seal (e.g., X-shaped, Y-shaped, etc.):

    Radially facing under subclass 565 wherein the seal body has one or more
    flexible projections on another axially extending side.


CLS 277/567
TXT Radially facing U or V cross-sectional profile:

    Radially facing under subclass 565 wherein the flexible projections have a
    U- or V-profile in a view of a vertical plane cutting across the seal at
    right angles to one of its principle horizontal dimensions perpendicular to
    the axis of relative motion formed between the relative movable parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    491+,   for a piston ring having a sectional structure including a
    component ring having a C, L, T, U, V, or Z cross-sectional profile.

    530,    for a dynamic, circumferential contact seal for other than a piston
    intended to be contained or compressed by a gland member in a packing box
    having a C, M, U, V, X, or Z cross-sectional seal shape.

    647,    for a static seal having a C-, U-, or V-shaped cross-sectional seal
    profile for other than an internal combustion engine, or a pipe, conduit,
    or cable.


CLS 277/568
TXT Including an excluder or wiper:

    Radially facing under subclass 565 wherein the flexible projections has one
    or more projections to seal against dust or foreign matter.


CLS 277/569
TXT Lining or insert:

    Peripheral, radially sealing, flexible projection under subclass 549
    wherein the flexible projection includes a material layered on or inset
    into its surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS:

    440+,   for a piston ring having a surface of dissimilar material or
    hardness.


CLS 277/570
TXT Made entirely of fluorocarbon material:

    Peripheral, radially sealing, flexible projection under subclass 549
    wherein the flexible projection is a fluorocarbon material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    945+,   for a seal made of an elastomer or plastic containing fluorine for
    other than a dynamic, circumferential contact seal, for other than a piston
    having a peripheral, radially sealing, flexible projection made of
    fluorocarbon material.


CLS 277/571
TXT Wear sleeve:

    Peripheral, radially sealing, flexible projection under subclass 549
    including a tubular member mounted on one of the relatively movable parts
    intended to protect the one relatively movable part from deterioration
    caused by the relatively movable surface contact of the peripheral radially
    sealing flexible projection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    527,    for a dynamic, circumferential contact seal for other than a piston
    intended to be contained or compressed by a gland member in a packing box
    having a wear sleeve.


CLS 277/572
TXT Particular mounting, frame, casing, or reinforcement feature:

    Peripheral radially sealing flexible projection under subclass 549
    including a specific structure, holding, or support means to maintain the
    flexible projection in relatively movable sealing contact against one of
    the relatively movable parts.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses include a nominal recitation of
    a casing having an additional structural feature relating the flexible
    projection to the casing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    371+,   for a unitized cartridge containing a relatively rotatable,
    radially extending, sealing face member (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.).

    551,    for a dynamic, peripheral, radially sealing, flexible projection
    (e.g., lip seal, etc.) for other than a piston having an installation,
    removal, assembly, disassembly, or repair feature.


CLS 277/573
TXT Peripheral mounting static seal:

    Mounting, frame, casing, or reinforcement under subclass 572 including a
    circumferential static seal between the mounting, frame, casing, or
    reinforcement and the part.


CLS 277/574
TXT Protrusion or bead cross-sectional profile:

    Peripheral mounting static seal under subclass 573 wherein the static seal
    has a projection from its surface in a view of a vertical plane cutting
    across the static seal at right angles to one of its principle horizontal
    dimensions.


CLS 277/575
TXT Secured by molding or bonding:

    Mounting, frame, casing, or reinforcement under subclass 572 including
    shaping, forming or adhering means to affix the flexible projection to the
    mounting, frame, casing or reinforcement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    617,    for a static contact seal mounted or retained by molding or casting
    into a pipe, conduit or cable.

    922+,   for a seal manufactured by bonding or joining for other than a
    dynamic circumferential contact seal for other than a piston having a
    peripheral, radially sealing, flexible projection (e.g., lip seal, etc.)
    secured by molding or bonding.

    924,    for a seal manufactured by deformation, material removal, or
    molding for other than a dynamic circumferential contact seal, for other
    than a piston having a peripheral, radially sealing, flexible projection
    (e.g., lip seal, etc.) secured by molding or bonding.


CLS 277/576
TXT Secured by clamping:

    Mounting, frame, casing, or reinforcement under subclass 572 wherein the
    mounting, frame, casing, or reinforcement has portions of itself brought
    together to affix the flexible projection to the mounting, frame, casing,
    or reinforcement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    922+,   for a seal manufactured by bonding or joining for other than a
    dynamic circumferential contact seal for other than a piston having a
    peripheral radially sealing flexible projection (e.g., lip seal, etc.)
    secured by clamping.

    924,    for a seal manufactured by deformation, material removal, or
    molding for other than a dynamic, circumferential, contact seal for other
    than a piston having a peripheral, radially sealing, flexible projection
    (e.g., lip seal, etc.) secured by clamping.


CLS 277/577
TXT By distinct members:

    Secured by clamping under subclass 576 wherein the portions are separate
    components brought together to make the mounting, frame, casing, or
    reinforcement.


CLS 277/578
TXT Having circumferentially adjustable biasing element:

    Dynamic, circumferential contact seal under subclass 500 including a member
    extending circumferentially around the periphery of the seal and adjustable
    along its length to radially bias the sealing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    470,    for a piston ring expander having means to adjust the load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, for more than nominal bearing structure or detail (e.g.,
    liner, bearing race, cage, etc.) combined with a specific seal, subclass
    150 for a plain, radial bearing where mechanical means (e.g., nut, separate
    resilient elements, etc.) moves the seal.


CLS 277/579
TXT Having floating ring or bushing (i.e., circumferentially contacting):

    Dynamic, circumferential, contact seal under subclass 500 wherein the seal
    is an annular or tubular seal having relative movement between the
    relatively movable parts to oppose the flow of fluid.

    (1)     Note.  A floater-type seal has relative motion between the
    relatively movable parts it seals between, whereas a seal that accommodates
    gyratory or oscillatory motion is capable of sealing relatively movable
    parts that move angularly or perpendicularly to its main axis of motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305,    for a process of using a dynamic close proximity floating ring or
    bushing (i.e., contactless).

    356,    for a dynamic seal for use in a journal box that may be a floating
    ring or bushing.

    422,    for a dynamic, close proximity, floating ring or bushing (i.e.,
    contactless).

    447+,   for a floating, piston ring seal.

    585,    for a dynamic, circumferential, contacting, elongated sleeve or
    bushing for other than a piston.


CLS 277/580
TXT Radially translatable in groove:

    Floating ring or bushing under subclass 579 wherein the ring or bushing
    moves perpendicular to a rotational axis formed between the relatively
    movable parts and within a channel on one of the relatively movable parts.


CLS 277/581
TXT And biased:

    Radially translatable in a groove under subclass 580 and a resilient member
    to hold or press the ring or bushing against a surface.


CLS 277/582
TXT Made of elastomer or plastic:

    Floating ring or bushing under subclass 579 consisting of a resilient,
    rubberlike material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    944+,   for a seal made of a particular elastomeric or plastic material for
    other than a dynamic, circumferential, contact seal, for other than a
    piston having a floating ring or bushing.


CLS 277/583
TXT Inflatable seal or seal biased by inflatable member:

    Dynamic, circumferential, contact seal under subclass 500 including a
    cavity or chamber within the seal or an associated member expanded by entry
    of a pressurized fluid to bias the seal or associated member against one of
    the relatively movable parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331+,   for an inflatable packer-type seal for well apparatus.

    605,    for a hollow, fluid-filled, or inflatable static contact seal or an
    associated member intended for use on a pipe, conduit, or cable.

    646,    for a static contact seal having a hollow or fluid-filled
    inflatable chamber for other than an internal combustion engine, or a pipe,
    conduit, or cable.


CLS 277/584
TXT Extrusion preventing (i.e., anti-extrusion) structure:

    Dynamic, circumferential contact seal under subclass 500 including means
    deterring the seal from being squeezed out of its seated position or
    otherwise dislocated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324+,   for a seal for well apparatus having an overpressure control device
    that may include extrusion preventing (i.e., anti-extrusion) structure.

    611,    for a static, contact seal intended for insertion between an
    end-to-end pipe, conduit, or cable joint having an extrusion preventing
    (i.e., anti-extrusion) or compression limiting feature.

    616+,   for a static, contact seal intended for use on a pipe, conduit, or
    cable having an associated mounting or retaining means for the seal.

    638,    for a static, contact seal for other than an internal combustion
    engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable including a particular extrusion
    preventing (i.e., anti-extrusion) mounting or retaining means.


CLS 277/585
TXT Elongated sleeve or bushing:

    Dynamic circumferential contact seal under subclass 500 wherein the seal
    has a somewhat elongated, tubular shape intended to guide an inner,
    relatively movable part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    338,    for a longitudinally actuated packing sleeve for well apparatus.

    422,    for a dynamic close proximity floating ring or bushing (i.e.,
    contactless).

    579+,   for a dynamic, circumferential contact, floating ring or bushing
    seal for other than a piston.

    607,    for a sleeve-type, static, contact seal intended for a pipe,
    conduit, or cable.


CLS 277/586
TXT Seated in groove having stepped walls:

    Dynamic, circumferential, contact seal under subclass 500 wherein the seal
    is in a channel having nonuniform axial width and walls that are at a right
    angle to each other in one of the relatively movable parts .

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    451,    for a piston groove having stepped walls.


CLS 277/587
TXT Seated in groove having oblique wall:

    Dynamic, circumferential, contact seal under subclass 500 wherein the seal
    in a channel having a nonuniform axial width and a tapered or inclined wall
    in one of the relatively movable parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    452+,   for a piston groove having an oblique wall.


CLS 277/589
TXT Radially backed by resilient or elastomeric member:

    Dynamic, circumferential, contact seal under subclass 500 wherein the seal
    includes an elastic element to bias the sealing means in a direction
    perpendicular to an axis formed between the relatively movable parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    545,    for a dynamic, circumferentially contacting, segmented ring for
    other than a piston having other than a nominal garter spring as a radial,
    biasing, spring element.

    553+,   for a dynamic, circumferential contacting, peripheral, radially
    sealing, flexible projection (e.g., a lip seal, etc.) including a bias
    means other than a nominal garter spring for other than a piston.


CLS 277/590
TXT SEAL BETWEEN FIXED PARTS OR STATIC CONTACT AGAINST RELATIVELY MOVABLE PARTS:

    Sealing means under the class definition wherein the seal is at the joint
    or juncture formed between stationary parts, or having a stationary sealing
    relationship to the relatively movable parts.

    (1)     Note.  Some relative movement is permissible due to such examples
    as expansion, contraction, slippage, or variable pressure load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312+,   for a process of static sealing.

    345+,   for a seal between relatively movable parts (i.e., a dynamic seal).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, for a cap-type bottle or jar closure, subclass
    234 for a liquid seal located where the closure seats on the bottle or jar.

    220,    Receptacles, for a receptacle having an access opening and a
    removable closure for the opening and means to seal the juncture
    therebetween, subclass 228 for a liquid or semi-liquid gasket.


CLS 277/591
TXT Contact seal between parts of internal combustion engine:

    Static seal under subclass 590 wherein the seal's intended use between and
    sealingly touching against adjacent components of an internal combustion
    engine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    313,    for a process of static sealing between parts of an internal
    combustion engine.


CLS 277/592
TXT Particular coating or layer of sealing material:

    Intended for internal combustion engine under subclass 591 including a film
    or sheet of a specific composition or configuration to form a seal against
    an adjacent seal member or one of the components of the internal combustion
    engine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    654,    for a static contact seal for other than an internal combustion
    engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable having a particular sealing material
    or construction using plural layers.


CLS 277/593
TXT Having compression limiting feature:

    Intended for internal combustion engine under subclass 591 including means
    to restrict seal compaction between the parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    611,    for a static, contact seal intended for insertion between an
    end-to-end pipe, conduit, or cable joint having an extrusion preventing
    (i.e., anti-extrusion) or compression limiting feature.

    639,    for a static seal for other than an internal combustion engine, or
    a pipe, conduit, or cable having a particular mounting or retaining means
    such as a compression limiting means.


CLS 277/594
TXT Particular dimensions or configuration of sealing bead or formation:

    Intended for internal combustion engine under subclass 591 including an
    embossment or other structure having a specific size or shape for forming a
    seal between an adjacent sealing member or one of the components of the
    internal combustion engine.


CLS 277/595
TXT Metallic:

    Sealing bead or formation under subclass 594 wherein the sealing bead or
    formation is metal.


CLS 277/596
TXT Elastomeric:

    Sealing bead or formation under subclass 594 wherein the sealing bead or
    formation is a rubberlike material.


CLS 277/597
TXT Heat dissipating, cooling, or insulating feature:

    Intended for internal combustion engine under subclass 591 including means
    to conduct and dissipate thermal energy, or shield the seal or one of the
    components of the internal combustion engine from thermal energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    930,    for a seal for other than a static seal for use between parts of an
    internal combustion engine including a heat dissipation, cooling, or
    insulating feature having a heating or cooling feature.


CLS 277/598
TXT Having installation, removal, assembly, disassembly, or repair feature:

    Intended for internal combustion engine under subclass 591 including means
    to aid in mounting, extricating, construction, dismantling, or restoration
    of the seal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323,    for a seal for well apparatus having an installation, removal,
    assembly, disassembly, or repair feature.

    370+,   for a relatively rotatable, extending sealing face member (e.g.,
    face, mechanical, etc.) having an installation, removal, assembly,
    disassembly, or repair feature.

    421,    for a close proximity labyrinth seal having an installation,
    removal, assembly, disassembly, or repair feature.

    435,    for a piston ring, piston ring expander, or seat therefore having
    an installation, removal, assembly, disassembly, or repair feature.

    551,    for a dynamic, peripheral, radially sealing, flexible projection
    (e.g., lip seal, etc.) for other than a piston having an installation,
    removal, assembly, disassembly, or repair feature.

    609,    for a static, contact seal intended for insertion between an
    end-to-end pipe, conduit, or cable joint having an installation, removal,
    assembly, disassembly, or repair feature.

    630,    for a static contact seal for other than an internal combustion
    engine or a pipe, conduit, or cable having an installation, removal,
    assembly, disassembly, or repair feature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, for a method of mechanical manufacture or for
    apparatus to assemble or disassemble, subclass 402.02 for a method of
    repairing a seal or element thereof not provided for elsewhere or
    subclasses 700+ for general apparatus to assemble or disassemble.


CLS 277/599
TXT Having flow restrictor:

    Intended for internal combustion engine under subclass 591 including an
    opening for alignment to an opening for flow in the adjacent engine
    components where the seal opening has means to reduce or eliminate flow of
    fluid therethrough.


CLS 277/600
TXT Covering member or eyelet for opening:

    Intended for internal combustion engine under subclass 591 including an
    opening and means to envelop an edge of the opening.


CLS 277/601
TXT Covering fire ring or sealing formation:

    Covering member or eyelet under subclass 600 wherein the covering member or
    eyelet is for the opening provided for a combustion chamber of the internal
    combustion engine.


CLS 277/602
TXT Contact seal for a pipe, conduit, or cable:

    Static seal under subclass 590 wherein the seal sealingly touches against
    and is intended for an extended hollow or electrically insulated conductor
    part to seal the joint or juncture between concentric extended hollow or
    electrically insulated conductor parts; the extended hollow or electrically
    insulated part's end, and another extended hollow or electrically insulated
    conductor part's end; or the extended hollow part or electrically insulated
    conductor and a wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    314,    for a process of static sealing intended for use on a pipe,
    conduit, or cable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, for means to secure in end-to-end or
    side-to-side relationship a pipe to another pipe, a plate, a wall, a
    receptacle, or other base where the means are independent from a seal
    (i.e., more than the frictional engagement of the seal secures a pipe end
    to another part) or a sleeve securing the pipe ends or another part;
    subclasses 95+ for a seal responsive to line pressure or means to test the
    seal by using line pressure, especially subclass 97 for a seal having an
    inflatable member having an external pressure supply; subclass 187 for
    temperature responsive means to maintain a good seal for expansion or
    contraction in the pipe coupling; or subclasses 335+ for a seal combined
    with the pipe joint or coupling.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, for a generic electrical connection between
    at least two conducting elements permitting relative motion or where the
    connection is a readily made or broken type, subclasses 271+ for a sealing
    element or material for cooperation with the coupled connector (e.g.,
    gasket, etc.) or subclass 559 for a seal to a coupling part that extends
    into a panel opening.


CLS 277/603
TXT Plural interfitting seal members for installation on the individual joined
    pipes, conduits, or cables:

    Pipe, conduit, or cable under subclass 602 wherein the seal comprises
    cooperating sealing members and at least one member is for location on each
    pipe, conduit, or cable of the joint or juncture.


CLS 277/604
TXT Allows rolling or folding:

    Pipe, conduit, or cable under subclass 602 including means permitting at
    least a part the seal to rotate or bend completely over on itself.


CLS 277/605
TXT Hollow, fluid filled, or inflatable:

    Pipe, conduit, or cable under subclass 602 wherein the seal or an
    associated member has a cavity or chamber that is empty, contains a liquid
    or gas, or is expanded by entry of a pressurized fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331+,   for an inflatable packer-type seal for well apparatus.

    583,    for a dynamic, inflatable, or biased by an inflatable member
    circumferential contact seal for other than a piston.

    645+,   for a static, contact seal for other than an internal combustion
    engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable having a particular hollow or filled
    chamber cross-section.


CLS 277/606
TXT And wall:

    Pipe, conduit, or cable under subclass 602 wherein the seal is for use
    between the pipe, conduit, or cable and the wall.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, for an insulator and
    specialized apparatus to mount, support, encase, box, or house an
    electrical component; subclass 65 for a box or housing structurally limited
    to electrical use or including an electrical device that may include a seal
    between a cable and the box or housing, or subclasses 152+ for a grommet to
    insulate a conductor as it extends through a wall or plate.


CLS 277/607
TXT Sleeve type:

    Pipe, conduit, or cable under subclass 602 wherein the seal has a tubular
    or frustoconical shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    338,    for a longitudinally actuated packing sleeve for well apparatus.

    585,    for a dynamic, circumferential, contacting, elongated sleeve or
    bushing for other than a piston.


CLS 277/608
TXT Inserted between end-to-end pipe, conduit, or cable joint:

    Pipe, conduit, or cable under subclass 602 wherein the seal is for use in
    the joint or juncture having coaxial radially extending opposing ends.


CLS 277/609
TXT Having installation, removal, assembly, disassembly, or repair feature:

    End-to-end joint under subclass 608 including means to aid in mounting,
    extricating, construction, dismantling, or restoration of the seal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323,    for a seal for well apparatus having an installation, removal,
    assembly, disassembly, or repair feature.

    370+,   for a relatively rotatable, extending sealing face member (e.g.,
    face, mechanical, etc.) having an installation, removal, assembly,
    disassembly, or repair feature.

    421,    for a close proximity labyrinth seal having an installation,
    removal, assembly, disassembly, or repair feature.

    435,    for a piston ring, piston ring expander or seat therefor having an
    installation, removal, assembly, disassembly, or repair feature.

    551,    for a dynamic, peripheral, radially sealing, flexible projection
    (e.g., lip seal, etc.) for other than a piston having an installation,
    removal, assembly, disassembly, or repair feature.

    598,    for a static contact seal for use between parts of an internal
    combustion engine having an installation, removal, assembly, disassembly,
    or repair feature.

    630,    for a static contact seal for other than an internal combustion
    engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable having an installation, removal,
    assembly, disassembly, or repair feature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, for a method of mechanical manufacture or for
    apparatus to assemble or disassemble, subclass 402.02 for a method of
    repairing a seal or element thereof not provided for elsewhere or
    subclasses 700+ for general apparatus to assemble or disassemble.


CLS 277/610
TXT Spirally wound structure:

    End to end joint under subclass 608 wherein the seal has a concentrically
    coiled arrangement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    627,    for a static contact seal intended for use on a pipe, conduit or
    cable having a particular material or construction.

    633,    for a static contact seal for other than an internal combustion
    engine, or a pipe, conduit or cable having a spirally wound structure.


CLS 277/611
TXT Extrusion preventing (i.e., anti-extrusion) or compression limiting feature:

    End-to-end joint under subclass 608 including means deterring the seal from
    being squeezed out of its seated position or otherwise dislocated, or
    restricting seal compaction between the parts.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the extrusion preventing (i.e.,
    anti-extrusion) feature may work by limiting the compression of the seal or
    the compression limiting feature may prevent extrusion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324+,   for a seal for well apparatus having an overpressure control device
    that may include extrusion preventing (i.e., anti-extrusion) structure.

    584,    for a dynamic, circumferential contact seal for other than a piston
    having an extrusion preventing (i.e., anti-extrusion) structure.

    593,    for a static, contact seal for use between parts of an internal
    combustion engine having a compression limiting feature.

    616+,   for a static contact seal intended for use on a pipe, conduit or
    cable having an associated mounting or retaining means for the seal.

    638,    for a static, contact seal for other than an internal combustion
    engine, or a pipe, conduit or cable including a particular extrusion
    preventing (i.e., anti-extrusion) mounting or retaining means.

    639,    for a static seal for other than an internal combustion engine, or
    a pipe, conduit or cable including a compression limiting mounting or
    retaining feature.


CLS 277/612
TXT Having plural projections:

    End-to-end joint under subclass 608 wherein the seal includes more than one
    sealing extension.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    562+,   for a dynamic, circumferential contact seal for other than a piston
    having plural. peripheral, radially sealing, flexible projections (e.g.,
    lip seal, etc.).

    615,    for a static contact seal intended for use on a pipe, conduit, or
    cable having axially spaced projections.

    648+,   for a static seal for other than an internal combustion engine, or
    a pipe, conduit, or cable having a particular cross-sectional profile such
    as plural projections along a sealing surface.


CLS 277/613
TXT Hose coupling:

    End-to-end joint under subclass 608 wherein the extended hollow is flexible
    or flaccid .


CLS 277/614
TXT Each end has recess for the seal:

    End-to-end joint under subclass 608 wherein the ends of the joint include
    axially facing indentations for the seal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    625,    for a static, contact seal having a particular mounting or
    retaining feature for and intended for use on a pipe, conduit or cable.

    643,    for static, contact seal for other than an internal combustion
    engine, or a pipe, conduit or cable having plural recesses on parts or
    seals to form a mounting or retaining groove.


CLS 277/615
TXT Having axially spaced projections:

    Pipe, conduit, or cable under subclass 602 including a plurality of pliant
    or resilient radial extensions separated by distance along a longitudinal
    axis of the pipe, conduit, or cable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    565+,   for a dynamic, circumferentially contact seal for other than a
    piston having plural, peripheral, radially sealing projections on a radial
    facing side of a single seal.

    612,    for a static, contact seal intended for insertion between an
    end-to-end pipe, conduit or cable joint having plural extended projections.

    648+,   for a static seal for other than an internal combustion engine or a
    pipe, conduit, or cable having a particular cross-sectional profile such as
    plural projections along a sealing surface.


CLS 277/616
TXT Having associated mounting or retaining feature:

    Pipe, conduit, or cable under subclass 602 including related fastening or
    securing means for the seal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324+,   for a seal for well apparatus having an overpressure control device
    that may include extrusion preventing (i.e., anti-extrusion) structure.

    584,    for a dynamic, circumferential contact seal for other than a piston
    having an extrusion preventing (i.e., anti-extrusion) structure.

    611,    for a static, contact seal intended for insertion between an
    end-to-end pipe, conduit, or cable joint having an extrusion preventing
    (i.e., anti-extrusion) or compression limiting feature.

    637+,   for a static, contact seal for other than an internal combustion
    engine or a pipe, conduit, or cable having a particular associated mounting
    or retaining means.


CLS 277/617
TXT Molded or cast into the pipe, conduit, or cable:

    Mounting or retaining feature under subclass 616 wherein the pipe, conduit,
    or cable has the seal built into it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    575,    for a dynamic, circumferential, contacting, peripheral, radially
    sealing, flexible projection (e.g., lip seal, etc.) molded or bonded to a
    mounting, frame, casing, or reinforcement for other than a piston.

    924,    for a seal manufactured by deformation, material removal, or
    molding for other than a static pipe, conduit, or cable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    subclasses 259+ for a composite article created by shaping or forming
    molding material against and uniting to a preform.

    425,    Plastic Article Shaping or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:
    Apparatus, a generic class for apparatus not provided for elsewhere to mold
    a plastic, shape molten materials where no molding surface is employed,
    treating a product made by the apparatus of this class, randomly deposit
    and bond particulate material, or a combination of apparatus of this class
    with any diverse working or treating apparatus, Digest 47 for a seal ring.


CLS 277/618
TXT Axially related or embedded coil spring:

    Mounting or retaining feature under subclass 616 wherein the mounting or
    retaining feature is a helically wound annular spring coaxial to or
    encapsulated by the seal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    554,    for a dynamic, circumferential contact seal for other than a piston
    having a peripheral radially sealing projection biased by an embedded
    spring.

    557,    for a dynamic, circumferential contact seal for other than a piston
    having a peripheral radially sealing projection biased by an axially
    extending helical or spiral spring.

    627,    for a static, contact seal intended for use on a pipe, conduit, or
    cable having a particular material or construction.


CLS 277/619
TXT Axially related backing ring:

    Mounting or retaining feature under subclass 616 wherein the mounting or
    retaining feature has an annular shape coaxial to the seal providing
    support.


CLS 277/620
TXT Clamping gland:

    Axially related backing ring under subclass 619 including axially acting
    means to force the seal into a joint or juncture formed between the pipe,
    conduit, or cable.

    (1)     Note.  A biasing spring is not a gland or follower.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    329+,   for a seal for well apparatus where the seal is in a packing box
    contained or compressed by a gland member.

    510+,   for a dynamic circumferential contact seal for other than a piston
    intended to be contained or compressed by a gland member in a packing box.


CLS 277/621
TXT Particular axially acting feature:

    Clamping gland under subclass 620 wherein the gland has a specific means to
    move the gland along the axis.

    (1)     Note. In this subclass and indented subclass the particular axially
    acting feature is intended to be more than a "bolted flange or gland".


CLS 277/622
TXT Threaded gland:

    Particular, axially acting feature under subclass 621 wherein the gland has
    a helical rib to move the gland along the axis.


CLS 277/623
TXT Particular gland shape:

    Clamping gland under subclass 620 wherein the gland has a specific form.

    (1)     Note.  For this subclass a "segmented gland" must have a particular
    joining structure for the segments.


CLS 277/624
TXT And seal secure together:

    Axially related backing ring under subclass 619 and the seal fasten to each
    other.


CLS 277/625
TXT Particular and located on the pipe, conduit, or cable:

    Mounting or retaining feature under subclass 616 wherein the extended
    hollow or electrically insulated conductor part has a specific means to
    mount or retain the seal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    614,    for a static, contact seal intended for insertion between an
    end-to-end pipe, conduit, or cable joint where each end has a recess for
    the seal.


CLS 277/626
TXT Particular seal shape:

    Pipe, conduit, or cable under subclass 602 wherein the seal has a specific
    form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    325,    for a segmented and radially actuated (e.g., ram-type, etc.) seal
    for a well apparatus overpressure control device (e.g., seal for a blowout
    preventer, etc.).

    344,    for a segmented and radially actuated seal (e.g., oil saver, gas
    saver, etc.) for well apparatus.

    335,    for a seal for well apparatus having an axially facing cup shape.

    605,    for a hollow, fluid-filled,  or inflatable static contact seal or
    an associated member intended for use on a pipe, conduit, or cable.

    644+,   for a static, contact seal for other than an internal combustion
    engine, or a pipe, conduit or cable having a particular cross-sectional
    seal profile


CLS 277/627
TXT Particular seal material or construction:

    Pipe, conduit, or cable under subclass 602 wherein the seal is of a
    specific material or has a specific arrangement of material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    534+,   for a dynamic, circumferential contact seal for other than a piston
    intended to be contained or compressed by a gland member in a packing box
    having a particular material or construction.

    610,    for a static, contact seal intended for insertion between an end to
    end pipe, conduit or cable joint having a spirally wound structure.

    618,    for a static, contact seal intended for use on a pipe, conduit or
    cable including an axially related or embedded coil spring that mounts or
    retains the seal.

    611,    for a static, contact seal intended for insertion between an end to
    end pipe, conduit or cable joint having an extrusion preventing (i.e.,
    anti-extrusion) or compression limiting feature.

    650+,   for a static, contact seal for other than an internal combustion
    engine or a pipe, conduit, or cable having a particular sealing material or
    construction.

    935+,   for a seal for other than a static contact seal for a pipe,
    conduit, or cable made out of a particular material.


CLS 277/628
TXT Contact seal for other than internal combustion engine, or pipe, conduit,
    or cable:

    Static seal under subclass 590 wherein the seal's intended use is to
    sealingly touches against a part that is other than an internal combustion
    engine, extended hollow or electrically insulated conductor.

    SEARCH CLASS;

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, for more than nominal movable or
    removable closure structure (e.g., door jam, etc.); subclasses 475.1+ for a
    seal acting at a juncture of the closure and an adjacent member.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), for a site erected structure
    or related components (e.g., panels, beams, columns, etc.), subclasses 140+
    for a burial vault having a separately placeable closure in abutting
    relation to wall edges and sealing material retaining construction,
    subclasses 393+ for a relatively yieldable preformed separator (i.e.,
    expansion joint), or subclasses 408+ for a disparate sheet lamina between
    exposed surfaces of wall, floor, or roof (e.g., vapor barrier,
    waterproofing membrane, etc.).

    114,    Ships, for marine vehicles and accessories not otherwise
    classifiable, subclass 93 that may have a seal for a joint between a mast
    and a deck.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 450 for a filter in a
    flow line or a flow line connected closed casing having a gasket between
    the filter and walls of the casing (e.g., oil filter gasket, etc.).

    215,    Bottles and Jars, for a cap-type bottle or jar closure, subclass 45
    for neck structure to receive a particular closure including a seal or
    subclasses 341+ for a cap-type closure having an identifiable, integral or
    separate seal or liner.

    220,    Receptacles, for a receptacle having an access opening and a
    removable closure for the opening and means to seal the juncture
    therebetween, subclass 378 for a gasket or packing.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 542 for a seal provided for a joint, closure,
    or flow controller of a dispenser.

    251,    Valves And Valve Actuation, for means to close or restrict a flow
    of fluid through a passage by a definite predetermined motion of the means
    combined with a seal, subclass 257 for a valve actuated by a cam encased in
    a valve body having a seal, subclasses 306+ for a rotary butterfly valve
    having a seal carried by the valve or a valve seat, subclasses 314+ for a
    rotary valve and a seat therefor or a seal between the rotary valve and the
    seat, or subclass 318 for a reciprocating valve having a seal made of
    nonresilient material on a reciprocating head element or seat made of a
    resilient material.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, for a body secured to the running
    gear and a top therefor, subclass 93 for weatherstripping to seal between
    panels or between a windshield and the body or top.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclasses 203+ for a seal at a joint or juncture between and combined with
    fluid confining structures (e.g., a nozzle, a vessel cover, etc.) of a
    nuclear reactor pressure vessel.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 152 for method or
    apparatus to form an underground passageway (e.g., tunnel, etc.) lined by
    panels having a seal between adjacent panels.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    subclass 25 for a process of display or gas panel making including a seal
    not elsewhere classified.


CLS 277/629
TXT Magnetic:

    Contact seal for other than under subclass 628 wherein the seal has a polar
    field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    378,    for a relatively rotatable, radially extending, sealing face member
    (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.) including a magnetic axial bias therefor.

    410,    for a dynamic, close proximity seal that uses magnetism to affect
    fluid flow.

    501,    for a dynamic, circumferential contact seal for other than a piston
    and a magnetic means to bias the seal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, for more than nominal movable or
    removable closure structure (e.g., door jam, etc.), subclass 478.1 for a
    seal acting at a juncture of the closure and an adjacent member having a
    magnetic feature.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 62.51+ for a composition useful for a
    magnetic purpose or a process for making the composition, not provided for
    elsewhere.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets; subclasses 209+ for a magnet or an electromagnet,
    configured or arranged to perform external mechanical work but does not
    include the external mechanical work.


CLS 277/630
TXT Having installation, removal, assembly, disassembly, or repair feature:

    Contact seal for other than under subclass 628 including means to aid in
    mounting, extricating, construction, dismantling or restoration of the seal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323,    for a seal for well apparatus having an installation, removal,
    assembly, disassembly, or repair feature.

    370+,   for a relatively rotatable, extending, sealing face member (e.g.,
    face, mechanical, etc.) having an installation, removal, assembly,
    disassembly or repair feature.

    435,    for a piston ring, piston ring expander, or seat therefore having
    an installation, removal, assembly, disassembly, or repair feature.

    551,    for a dynamic, peripheral, radially sealing, flexible projection
    (e.g., lip seal, etc.) for other than a piston having an installation,
    removal, assembly, disassembly, or repair feature.

    598,    for a static, contact seal for use between parts of an internal
    combustion engine having an installation, removal, assembly, disassembly or
    repair feature.

    609,    for a static, contact seal intended for insertion between an
    end-to-end pipe, conduit, or cable joint having an installation, removal,
    assembly, disassembly, or repair feature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, for a method of mechanical manufacture or for
    apparatus to assemble or disassemble, subclass 402.02 for a method of
    repairing a seal or element thereof not provided for elsewhere or
    subclasses 700+ for general apparatus to assemble or disassemble.

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, for more than nominal movable or
    removable closure structure (e.g., door jam, etc.), subclass 482.1 for a
    seal acting at a juncture of the closure and an adjacent member having a
    segmenting, replacing, adjusting, or severing feature.

    413,    Sheet Metal Container Making, for a process or apparatus for
    performing an attendant operation before final assembly of a lid to a
    receptacle, subclass 34 for apparatus to seam together the receptacle and
    lid using a roller die including means to apply a gasket or seal
    therebetween before they are or  subclasses 58+ for apparatus to form lid
    having means to apply seal or liner.


CLS 277/631
TXT Split including end joining structure:

    Contact seal for other than under subclass 628 wherein the seal structure
    has a gap and uniting means to connect edges created by the gap.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    494+,   for a piston ring having a gap and a separate bridging piece for
    the gap.

    496+,   for a single piece split piston ring having opposed asymmetrical
    mirrored ends.

    498+,   for a piston ring where a single piece split annulus has
    substantially opposed dissimilar ends.

    546+,   for a dynamic, segmented ring circumferentially contacting seal for
    other than a piston having a particular end structure.


CLS 277/632
TXT Segmented periphery:

    Contact seal for other than under subclass 628 wherein the seal's perimeter
    is divided into portions.


CLS 277/633
TXT Spirally wound structure:

    Contact seal for other than under subclass 628 wherein the seal has a
    concentrically coiled arrangement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    610,    for a static contact seal intended for insertion between an
    end-to-end pipe, conduit, or cable joint having a spirally wound structure.


CLS 277/634
TXT Flexible sleeve, boot, or diaphragm:

    Contact seal for other than under subclass 628 wherein the seal has a
    flexible wall member to accommodate relatively movable parts allowing
    static contact sealing against the parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315,    for a process of static sealing employing a flexible sleeve, boot,
    or diaphragm.

    389,    for a relatively rotatable, radially extending, sealing face member
    (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.) including fluid pressure acting against a
    bellows or diaphragm to create an axial bias therefor.

    391+,   for a relatively rotatable, radially extending, sealing face member
    (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.) including a flexible sleeve, boot, or
    diaphragm to provide a secondary seal or driving connection therefor.

    504,    for a dynamic, circumferential contact seal for other than a piston
    that accommodates gyratory or oscillatory motion by using a flexible
    connection having static contact between the seal and one of the relatively
    movable parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Elements and Mechanisms, subclasses 18+ for a flexible
    sealing material attached to a casing and a moving rod, and a device or
    mechanism to move the rod.

    100,    Presses, subclass 269.21 for a seal or gasket around a piston for a
    fluid actuated reciprocating press.

    188,    Brakes, for means of retarding motion of or stopping of machines;
    subclasses 73.44+ or an axially extending pin to retain an actuator axially
    slidable in a plane parallel to an axis of a rotating wheel that usually
    includes a seal.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, for means to close or restrict a flow
    of fluid through a passage by a definite predetermined motion of the means
    combined with a seal, subclasses 335.1+, for a flexible wall seal between
    an actuator and valve.

    403,    Joints and Connections, for a joint or connection structure that
    goes beyond providing an environment for a seal; subclasses 50+ for a
    flexible diaphragm or bellows secured to each part.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, subclasses 173+ for a flexible boot for a joint to transmit
    rotary torque.


CLS 277/635
TXT Dome-, cup-, or bell-shaped, or for ball joint:

    Flexible sleeve, boot, or diaphragm under subclass 634 wherein the seal has
    an open containerlike shape or form (e.g., C, U, V, etc.) to enclose the
    joint or is for a spherical part of the joint.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, for a joint or connection structure that
    goes beyond providing an environment for a seal; subclass 134 for a ball
    and socket having an external seal (i.e., remote from the bearing surface).


CLS 277/636
TXT Tubular or frustoconical shape having corrugated wall portion:

    Flexible sleeve, boot, or diaphragm under subclass 634 wherein the seal is
    an elongated enclosing flexible wall having a portion including alternate
    furrows and ridges (e.g., pleated, etc.).


CLS 277/637
TXT Having particular associated mounting or retaining feature:

    Contact seal for other than under subclass 628 including a specific related
    fastening or securing means for the seal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    616+,   for a static, contact seal intended for use on a pipe, conduit, or
    cable having an associated mounting or retaining means for the seal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, for means to close or restrict a flow
    of fluid through a passage by a definite predetermined motion of the means
    combined with a seal, subclass 171 for a gland member pressing a seal
    constituting a valve seat against a valve head, subclass 189 for separate
    actuators or different functions of the same actuator to increase contact
    pressure between piston type valves provided with expansible sealing and a
    seat, subclass 191 for means to increase the contact pressure between a
    piston-type valve having a seal that expands upon closing and a seat, or
    subclass 363 for a removable valve seat having a seal between the valve
    seat and its supporting structure.


CLS 277/638
TXT Extrusion preventing (i.e., anti-extrusion) structure:

    Mounting or retaining feature under subclass 637 including means deterring
    the seal from being squeezed out of its seated position or otherwise
    dislocated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324+,   for a seal for well apparatus having an overpressure control device
    that may include extrusion preventing (i.e., anti-extrusion) structure.

    584,    for a dynamic, circumferential contact seal for other than a piston
    having an extrusion preventing (i.e., anti-extrusion) structure.

    611,    for a static contact seal intended for insertion between an
    end-to-end pipe, conduit, or cable joint having an extrusion preventing
    (i.e., anti-extrusion) or compression limiting feature.

    619+,   for a static, contact seal intended for use on a pipe, conduit or
    cable including an axially related backing ring to mount or retain the seal.


CLS 277/639
TXT Compression limiting feature:

    Mounting or retaining feature under subclass 637 including means
    restricting seal compaction between the parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    593,    for a static, contact seal for use between parts of an internal
    combustion engine having a compression limiting feature.

    611,    for a static, contact seal intended for insertion between an
    end-to-end pipe, conduit, or cable joint having an extrusion preventing
    (i.e., anti-extrusion) or compression limiting feature.


CLS 277/640
TXT Anchoring feature extending through seal:

    Mounting or retaining feature under subclass 637 including a fastening or
    securing means projecting through the seal to firmly affix the seal to one
    of the parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, for a fastener suited for general use, subclasses
    369+ for a headed, threaded, fastening means and nut having a washer and
    seal, or subclass 542 for a washer configured for a fastener having a seal.


CLS 277/641
TXT Groove structure on the seal or part:

    Mounting or retaining feature under subclass 637 wherein the mounting or
    retaining means is an indentation on the seal or part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    625,    for a static, contact seal having a particular mounting or
    retaining feature for and intended for use on a pipe, conduit, or cable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, for more than nominal movable or
    removable closure structure (e.g., door jam, etc.), subclass 483.1 for a
    seal acting at a juncture of the closure and an adjacent member having
    complementary engaging portions on closure or closure and portal frame.


CLS 277/642
TXT Channel-shaped:

    Groove structure under subclass 641 wherein the groove has a generally
    U-shaped cross-section.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, for more than nominal movable or
    removable closure structure (e.g., door jam, etc.) for a seal acting at a
    juncture of the closure and an adjacent member, subclass 489.1 anchored in
    channel or slot in closure or portal frame or subclass 490.1 having a
    U-shaped member or portion to mount the seal.


CLS 277/643
TXT Single seat formed by plural recesses:

    Groove structure under subclass 641 wherein the parts or seals have
    indentations to form the mounting or retaining groove when assembled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    614,    for a static contact seal intended for insertion between an end to
    end pipe, conduit or cable joint where each end has a recess for the seal.


CLS 277/644
TXT Particular cross-sectional seal profile:

    Contact seal for other than under subclass 628 wherein the seal has a
    specific shape in a view of a vertical plane cutting across the seal at
    right angles to one of its principal horizontal dimensions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    626,    for a static, contact seal having a particular seal shape intended
    for use on a pipe, conduit, or cable.


CLS 277/645
TXT Hollow or filled chamber:

    Particular cross-sectional seal profile under subclass 644 wherein the seal
    has a cavity empty or full of material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    605,    for a hollow, fluid-filled, or inflatable static contact seal or an
    associated member intended for use on a pipe, conduit, or cable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, for more than nominal movable or
    removable closure structure (e.g., door jam, etc.), subclass 498.1 for a
    seal acting at a juncture of the closure and an adjacent member is tubular
    or has a tubular portion.


CLS 277/646
TXT Inflatable:

    Such as a hollow or filled chamber under subclass 645 wherein the chamber
    has pressurized fluid introduced to expand the seal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331+,   for an inflatable packer-type seal for well apparatus.

    583,    for a dynamic inflatable or biased by an inflatable member
    circumferential contact seal for other than a piston.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, for more than nominal movable or
    removable closure structure (e.g., door jam, etc.), subclass 477.1 for a
    seal acting at a juncture of the closure and an adjacent member having an
    inflatable or fluid pressure responsive feature.


CLS 277/647
TXT C-, U-, or V-shaped:

    Particular cross-sectional seal profile under subclass 644 wherein the seal
    has a C-, U-, or V-form in a view of a vertical plane cutting across the
    seal at right angles to one of its principle horizontal dimensions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    395,    for a relatively rotatable radially extending sealing face member
    (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.) including a secondary mounting seal having
    U- or V-shaped, peripherally, radially sealing, flexible projections (e.g.,
    lip seal, etc.).

    530,    for a dynamic, circumferential contact seal for other than a piston
    intended to be contained or compressed by a gland member in a packing box
    having a C, M, U-, V, X, or Z cross-sectional seal shape.

    567,    for a dynamic, circumferential contact seal for other than a piston
    having peripherally, radially sealing, flexible projections forming a
    radially facing U or V cross-sectional profile.


CLS 277/648
TXT Plural projections along sealing surface:

    Particular cross-sectional seal profile under subclass 644 wherein the seal
    has more than one sealing extension along a side of the seal facing the
    part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    565+,   for a dynamic, circumferentially contact seal for other than a
    piston having plural, peripheral, radially sealing projections on a radial
    facing side of a single seal.

    612,    for a static, contact seal intended for insertion between an
    end-to-end pipe, conduit, or cable joint having plural extended projections.

    615,    for a static, contact seal intended for use on a pipe, conduit, or
    cable having axially spaced projections.


CLS 277/649
TXT Plural projections along opposite sealing surfaces:

    Plural projections along a sealing surface under subclass 648 including
    plural projections along an adverse sealing surface.


CLS 277/650
TXT Particular sealing material or construction:

    Contact seal for other than under subclass 628 wherein the seal is of a
    specific material or has a specific arrangement of material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    534+,   for a dynamic, circumferential contact seal for other than a piston
    intended to be contained or compressed by a gland member in a packing box
    having a particular material or construction.

    627,    for a static, contact seal intended for use on a pipe, conduit, or
    cable having a particular material or construction.

    935+,   for a seal for other than a static contact seal for an internal
    combustion engine, pipe, conduit or cable made out of a particular material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, for a cap type bottle or jar closure, subclass
    233 for a hardenable liquid or plastic seal where the closure seats on the
    bottle or jar.


CLS 277/651
TXT Embedded reinforcement:

    Particular sealing material or construction under subclass 650 wherein the
    seal envelops a means to strengthen the seal.


CLS 277/652
TXT Distinct sheath or covering:

    Particular sealing material or construction under subclass 650 wherein the
    seal has a distinct casing or layer surrounding at least a major portion of
    an outer periphery of the seal.


CLS 277/653
TXT Metal:

    Distinct sheath or covering under subclass 652 wherein the sheath or
    covering is metal.


CLS 277/654
TXT Plural layers:

    Particular sealing material or construction under subclass 650 wherein the
    seal has more than one ply of material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    592,    for a static, contact seal intended for use between parts of an
    internal combustion engine having a particular coating or layer of sealing
    material.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS:

    The following collections have their patents placed without regard to their
    original classification or to their claimed subject matter. These
    collections, therefore, are only examples of the art encompassed by the
    definition and a thorough search for a desired concept should include a
    search in the proceeding subclasses. Do not place originals in
    cross-reference art collections.


CLS 277/902
TXT SEAL FOR STERLING ENGINE:

    Sealing means under the class definition intended to seal a joint or
    juncture of a sterling engine.


CLS 277/903
TXT SEAL FOR ROTATING KILN OR DRUM:

    Sealing means under the class definition intended to seal a joint or
    juncture between a static part and a relatively rotating hollow cylindrical
    heated container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, for apparatus to
    separate liquids from solids (i.e., drying) or contacting solids with gases
    or vapors, subclass 601 that may have a seal between a rotating drum or
    receptacle, and a housing.

    432,    Heating, subclass 115 for a rotary drum mounted for rotation about
    a horizontal or slightly inclined axis, the rotation of the rotary drum
    imparting a tumbling motion to material placed therein, forming a juncture
    against a stationary part with a flexible seal, cooler seal, or an air
    curtain-type flow controller therebetween to prevent escape of the rotary
    drum's atmosphere.


CLS 277/904
TXT VISCOUS SEAL:

    Sealing means under the class definition wherein the sealing means is a
    material having a ropy or glutinous consistency (e.g., lacking in easy
    movement or fluidity, etc.) and having the quality of sticking or adhering
    to oppose the flow of fluid at the joint or juncture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301+,   for a process of dynamic close proximity sealing (e.g.,
    contactless, fluent, etc.).

    347+,   for diverse and distinct dynamic seals including a close proximity
    seal.

    409+,   for a dynamic, close proximity seal (e.g., contactless, fluent,
    etc.).


CLS 277/905
TXT T-SHAPED OR I-SHAPED RING MEMBER INCLUDING SEAL ON A SIDE:

    Sealing means under the class definition comprising an annular component of
    T- or I-shaped cross-section having sealing means on either or both sides
    of the annular component's central periphery.


CLS 277/906
TXT SEAL FOR ARTICLE OF INDEFINITE LENGTH (E.G., STRIP, SHEET, ETC.):

    Sealing means under the class definition comprising sealing means for use
    on an article of indeterminate extent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    432,    Heating, subclass 244 for a heating device specialized to feed or
    discharge a work chamber including a seal at the chamber's wall for
    conveyor arm or shaft.


CLS 277/907
TXT PASSAGEWAY IN ROD OR SHAFT:

    Sealing means under the class definition including a pathway for a fluid in
    a part (e.g., rod, shaft) relatively movable to and surrounded by another
    part (e.g., housing, casing, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    305,    Wheel Substitites for Land Vehicles, subclasses 100+ for a
    passageway in a connecting pin for lubrication.


CLS 277/908
TXT SEAL FOR USE IN ROTATING AND RECIPROCATING ARRANGEMENT:

    Sealing means under the class definition comprising sealing means between
    relatively movable parts that rotate and reciprocate.


CLS 277/909
TXT SIMILAR SEALING STRUCTURES FOR MOUNTING ON PISTON AND ABOUT ROD:

    Sealing means under the class definition comprising sealing means providing
    the same basic sealing structure for use in different embodiments such as
    (1) on a part (i.e., a piston) that reciprocates along an axis of an
    enclosing wall and, (2) on either the enclosing wall surrounding a
    reciprocating part (e.g., rod, etc.) or the part (i.e., a piston).


CLS 277/910
TXT O-RING SEAL:

    Sealing means under the class definition comprising a seal circular in plan
    view but may be of any geometric shape in a view of a vertical plane
    cutting across the seal at right angles to one of its principal horizontal
    dimensions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    382,    for a relatively rotatable, radially extending, sealing face member
    (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.) using an O-ring shaped axial biasing spring
    made of elastomeric material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, for more than nominal bearing structure or detail (e.g.,
    liner, bearing race, cage, etc.) combined with a specific seal, subclass
    152 for a plain radial bearing where the seal is in the shape of an O-ring
    on the outer area of the bearing or shaft and made out of a resilient
    material or subclass 489 for a radial antifriction bearing where the seal
    is a resilient O-ring seal.


CLS 277/911
TXT SEAL COMBINED WITH NOMINAL MOTION TRANSMITTING DEVICE:

    Sealing means under the class definition combined with a movement relay
    setting forth only so much structure foreign to the class to define the
    operating environment of the seal means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    390+,   for a relatively rotatable radially extending sealing face member
    (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.) including a secondary mounting seal or
    driving connection therefor.

    634+,   for a static, contact, flexible sleeve, boot, or diaphragm seal for
    other than an internal combustion engine or a pipe, conduit, or cable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, for a joint or connection structure that
    goes beyond providing an environment for a seal; subclass 288 for a seal
    distinct from the joint and unnecessary to the connection of parts.


CLS 277/912
TXT Spline connection:

    Nominal motion transmitting device under subclass 911 wherein the device is
    a series of spaced ridges parallel to a longitudinal axis of one of the
    parts (e.g., rod, shaft, etc.) that fits into a corresponding hole in the
    other part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    354,    for a dynamic seal for a helically threaded part.


CLS 277/913
TXT SEAL FOR FLUID PRESSURE BELOW ATMOSPHERIC (E.G., VACUUM, ETC.):

    Sealing means under the class definition intended to maintain a sealed
    fluid at a pressure lower than air pressure from its surrounding
    environment.


CLS 277/914
TXT BACKUP SEAL FOR FAILURE OF PRIMARY SEAL:

    Sealing means under the class definition comprising a main and secondary
    sealing means whereby the secondary sealing means acts as an auxiliary seal
    upon the breakdown of the main sealing means.

    (1)     Note.  The fluid pressure typically forces the auxiliary seal into
    operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    929,    for a seal where a change in operation or condition induces
    additional leakage control.


CLS 277/915
TXT SEAL INCLUDING COMPRESSION SET FEATURE:

    Sealing means under the class definition comprising a seal material having
    a specific property defined by the measurement of permanent deformation
    remaining after releasing the material from a compressive load as an index
    to creep or stress relaxation.


CLS 277/916
TXT SEAL INCLUDING VIBRATION DAMPENING FEATURE:

    Sealing means under the class definition including means to reduce or
    eliminate oscillatory or gyratory effects.


CLS 277/917
TXT SEAL INCLUDING FRANGIBLE FEATURE:

    Sealing means under the class definition including means allowing breaking
    or tearing of the seal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    413,    Sheet Metal Container Making, for a process or apparatus for
    performing an attendant operation before final assembly of a lid to a
    receptacle; subclasses 12+ for a process of fabricating a frangible end
    closure or assembling a frangible part to an end closure or subclasses 67+
    for apparatus to form lid having means to form frangible zone in lid.


CLS 277/918
TXT SEAL COMBINED WITH FILTER OR FLUID SEPARATOR:

    Sealing means under the class definition combined with means to remove
    foreign material from a fluid or separate distinct fluids.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 450 for a filter in a
    flow line or a flow line connected closed casing having a gasket between
    the filter and walls of the casing (e.g., oil filter gasket, etc.).


CLS 277/919
TXT SEAL INCLUDING ELECTRICAL FEATURE:

    Sealing means under the class definition including an ability to conduct or
    resist a flow of electricity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, for an insulator and
    specialized apparatus to mount, support, encase, box or house an electrical
    component; subclass 65 for a box or housing structurally limited to
    electrical use or including an electrical device, that may include a seal
    between a cable and the box or housing, or subclasses 152+ for a grommet to
    insulate a conductor as it extends through a wall or plate.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, for a generic electrical connection between
    at least two conducting elements permitting relative motion or where the
    connection is a readily made or broken type, subclass 927 for a conductive
    gasket.


CLS 277/920
TXT SEAL INCLUDING ELECTROMAGNETIC SHIELDING FEATURE:

    Sealing means under the class definition including an ability to protect
    against electrical and magnetic radiation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity: Conductors and Insulators; for an insulator and
    specialized apparatus to mount, support, encase, box, or house an
    electrical component; subclass 35 for an electromagnetic shield or
    anti-inductive device that may be a gasket.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, for a generic electrical connection between
    at least two conducting elements permitting relative motion or where the
    connection is a readily made or broken type, subclass 89 for a seal to a
    connector having inductive shielding or arc suppressing means including an
    elastomeric or nonmetallic conductive portion.


CLS 277/921
TXT CLOSURE OR WEATHER STRIP SEAL:

    Sealing means under the class definition wherein the seal is a narrow piece
    intended for use at the juncture between an obstructive structure and a
    passageway, or to close or reduce a gap formed at the juncture to prevent
    or reduce the flow of ambient air or moisture therethrough.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, for more than nominal movable or
    removable closure structure (e.g., door jam, etc.); subclasses 475.1+ for a
    seal acting at a juncture of the closure and an adjacent member.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, for a body secured to the running
    gear and a top therefor, subclass 93 for weatherstripping to seal between
    panels or between a windshield and the body or top.


CLS 277/922
TXT BONDING OR JOINING FOR MANUFACTURE OF SEAL:

    Sealing means under the class definition comprising a seal constructed by
    binding or uniting components of the seal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    575,    for a dynamic, circumferential, contacting, peripheral, radially
    sealing, flexible projection (e.g., lip seal, etc.) molded or bonded to a
    mounting, frame, casing, or reinforcement for other than a piston.

    576+,   for a dynamic circumferential contacting peripheral radially
    sealing flexible projection (e.g., lip seal, etc.) secured by clamping to a
    mounting, frame, casing or reinforcement for other than a piston.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, for a method of mechanical manufacture, subclasses
    888.07+ for a method of piston ring or packing manufacture or subclass
    888.3 for a method of seal or packing manufacture.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    60+ for a process of manufacturing an article involving surface bonding or
    assembly therefor or subclasses 349+ for an apparatus to manufacture an
    article involving surface bonding or assembly therefor.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding; in general, for apparatus or methods of
    joining the meeting faces of juxtaposed or engaged metal articles, of the
    same article originally in a form sustaining state, or a metal article to a
    nonmetal article, by direct application of heat or mechanical energy to the
    articles causing a flowing or blending of the meeting faces or causing a
    filler to flow or blend together with the meeting faces to form a
    continuous interconnecting zone.

    413,    Sheet Metal Container Making, for a process or apparatus for
    performing an attendant operation before final assembly of a lid to a
    receptacle; subclass 7 for a process of applying a sealant to an end joint
    between the lid and the receptacle, subclass 9 for a process of joining a
    preformed gasket or liner to the lid, or subclasses 58+ for apparatus to
    form lid having means to apply seal or liner.


CLS 277/923
TXT Shrink fitting for the assembly of seal:

    Bonding or joining for manufacture of seal under subclass 922 wherein the
    seal components are bonded or joined by subjecting one or more of the
    components to a temperature variation of such a magnitude as to change a
    dimension of at least one of the components allowing them to be easily put
    together, afterwards when the temperature returns to normal the components
    held together by an interference fit.


CLS 277/924
TXT DEFORMATION, MATERIAL REMOVAL, OR MOLDING FOR MANUFACTURE OF SEAL:

    Sealing means under the class definition comprising a seal made from a
    fluent or solid material formed into a particular shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    575,    for a dynamic circumferential contacting peripheral radially
    sealing flexible projection (e.g., lip seal, etc.) molded or bonded to a
    mounting, frame, casing or reinforcement for other than a piston.

    576+,   for a dynamic, circumferential contacting peripheral radially
    sealing flexible projection (e.g., lip seal, etc.) secured by clamping to a
    mounting, frame, casing or reinforcement for other than a piston.

    617,    for a static, contact seal mounted or retained by molding or
    casting into a pipe, conduit or cable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, for a method of mechanical manufacture, subclasses
    888.07+ for a method of piston ring or packing manufacture or subclass
    888.3 for a method of seal or packing manufacture.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    subclasses 239+ for mechanical shaping or molding to form or reform a
    shaped article, especially subclasses 259+ for a composite article created
    by shaping or forming molding material against and uniting to a preform.

    413,    Sheet Metal Container Making, for a process or apparatus for
    performing an attendant operation before final assembly of a lid to a
    receptacle; subclass 34 for apparatus to seam together the receptacle and
    lid using a roller die and including means to apply a gasket or seal
    therebetween before they are.

    425,    Plastic Article Shaping or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:
    Apparatus, a generic class for apparatus not provided for elsewhere to mold
    a plastic, shape molten materials where no molding surface is employed,
    treating a product made by the apparatus of this class, randomly deposit
    and bond particulate material, or a combination of apparatus of this class
    with any diverse working or treating apparatus, Digest 47 for a seal ring.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 28+ for a process of performing an abrading
    operation (i.e., where the sharp edges of mineral crystals form the cutting
    instrument) and a process of performing an ancillary operation not provided
    for elsewhere.


CLS 277/925
TXT SNAP FIT FEATURE FOR MOUNTING OR ASSEMBLY OF SEAL:

    Sealing means under the class definition comprising a seal having a
    projecting or receiving portion secured by a sudden sharp engagement means
    for installation or construction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    376,    for a unitized, relatively rotatable, radially extending, sealing
    face member mounted by snap fitting into a groove in a housing or casing.


CLS 277/926
TXT SEAL INCLUDING FLUID PRESSURE EQUALIZING OR BALANCING FEATURE:

    Sealing means under the class definition including means to create a fluid
    pressure equilibrium at the joint or juncture.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass collects patents for this concept not covered
    by a regular subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304,    for a process of dynamic, close proximity seal (e.g., contactless,
    fluent, etc.) created by pressurized sealing fluid introduced to form a
    barrier.

    431+,   for a dynamic, close proximity seal (e.g., contactless, fluent,
    etc.) created by pressurized sealing fluid introduced to form a barrier.

    544,    for a dynamic segmented ring circumferentially contacting seal for
    other than a piston having pressure balancing or radial bias reducing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, for more than nominal bearing structure or detail (e.g.,
    liner, bearing race, cage, etc.) combined with a specific seal, subclass
    479 for a radial antifriction bearing where the seal establishes a pressure
    or pressure responsive means loads the seal.


CLS 277/927
TXT SEAL INCLUDING FLUID PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL FEATURE:

    Sealing means under the class definition including means to create a fluid
    pressure greater than or less than the pressure of the sealed fluid at the
    joint or juncture to oppose the flow of fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304,    for a process of dynamic close proximity seal (e.g., contactless,
    fluent, etc.) created by pressurized sealing fluid introduced to form a
    barrier.

    431+,   for a dynamic close proximity seal (e.g., contactless, fluent,
    etc.) created by pressurized sealing fluid introduced to form a barrier.

    512+,   for a dynamic circumferential contact seal for other than a piston
    intended to be contained or compressed by a gland member in a packing box
    having means to introduce or direct a fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, for more than nominal bearing structure or detail (e.g.,
    liner, bearing race, cage, etc.) combined with a specific seal, subclass
    479 for a radial antifriction bearing where the seal establishes a pressure
    or pressure responsive means loads the seal.


CLS 277/928
TXT SEAL INCLUDING PRESSURE RELIEF OR VENT FEATURE:

    Sealing means under the class definition including means for releasing or
    relieving fluid pressure at the joint or juncture.

    (1)     Note.  For this subclass a valve for a passageway must claim or
    disclose a venting function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    408,    for a relatively rotatable, radially extending, sealing face member
    (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.) including means to introduce, circulate, or
    remove fluid.

    457,    for a piston groove having a passageway for fluid return, pressure
    relief, or venting.

    514,    for a dynamic, circumferential contact seal for other than a piston
    intended to be contained or compressed by a gland member in a packing box
    having fluid draining, venting or pressure relief means.

    552,    for a dynamic, circumferential contacting, peripheral, radially
    sealing, flexible projection (e.g., lip seal, etc.) including a pressure
    relief or venting means for other than a piston.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, for more than nominal bearing structure or detail (e.g.,
    liner, bearing race, cage, etc.) combined with a specific seal, subclass
    479 for a radial antifriction bearing where the seal establishes a pressure
    or pressure responsive means loads the seal.


CLS 277/929
TXT SEAL FEATURE WHERE CHANGE IN OPERATION OR CONDITION INDUCES ADDITIONAL
    LEAKAGE CONTROL:

    Sealing means under the class definition including means to prevent seepage
    from occurring at the joint or juncture during a change in the system or
    state of the seal (e.g., when relative movement between parts stops, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass collects patents for this concept not covered
    by a regular subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    425+,   for a dynamic, close proximity impeller (e.g., slinger, etc.) seal
    having a static sealing means affected by rotational movement.

    433,    for a dynamic contact seal where centrifugal force affects
    displacement, shape,  or contact of seal.

    558,    for a dynamic, circumferentially peripheral, radially sealing,
    flexible projection including a fluid pressure responsive biasing feature
    contact for other than a piston.

    914,    for a seal having a backup seal in case of failure of primary seal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, for more than nominal bearing structure or detail (e.g.,
    liner, bearing race, cage, etc.) combined with a specific seal, subclass
    131 for a plain radial bearing where fluid moves the seal, subclasses 135+
    for a plain radial bearing where centrifugal force moves or holds the seal
    in place, subclass 478 for a radial antifriction bearing where centrifugal
    force loads the seal or a liquid or gas forms a sealing barrier, or
    subclass 479 for a radial antifriction bearing where the seal establishes a
    pressure or pressure responsive means loads the seal,.


CLS 277/930
TXT SEAL INCLUDING HEATING OR COOLING FEATURE:

    Sealing means under the class definition including means to transfer
    thermal energy (e.g., heater, heat exchanger, or heat transmitter; hot or
    cold fluid, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    408,    for a relatively rotatable, radially extending, sealing face member
    (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.) including means to introduce, circulate, or
    remove fluid.

    432,    for a dynamic, close proximity seal created by pressurized sealing
    fluid introduced to form a barrier including an external device or system.

    513,    for a dynamic, circumferential contact seal for other than a piston
    intended to be contained or compressed by a gland member in a packing box
    having means to introduce or direct a fluid having an external device or
    system.

    597,    for a static, contact seal for use between parts of an internal
    combustion engine having a heat dissipating, cooling, or insulating feature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 47+ for a heat exchanger including
    structural installation on apparatus external to the subject matter of this
    class.

    184,    Lubrication, for a unitized lubrication means removable or
    installable from one machine to on another and intended to lubricate a
    bearing part in a machine, subclasses 104.1+ for a lubricator including a
    heating or cooling device.


CLS 277/931
TXT SEAL INCLUDING TEMPERATURE RESPONSIVE FEATURE:

    Sealing means under the class definition including means to react to a
    change in a measure of warmth or coldness.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses do not include a seal that
    merely accommodates thermal expansion between parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359+,   for a relatively rotatable, radially extending, sealing face member
    (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.) having a temperature responsive feature.

    471,    for a particular piston ring expander having thermal expansion
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, for means to secure in end-to-end or
    side-to-side relationship a pipe to another pipe, a plate, a wall, a
    receptacle, or other base where the means are independent from a seal
    (i.e., more than the frictional engagement of the seal secures a pipe end
    to another part) or a sleeve securing the pipe ends or another part;
    subclass 187 for temperature responsive means to maintain a good seal for
    expansion or contraction in the pipe coupling.


CLS 277/932
TXT Bi-metallic:

    Temperature responsive sealing means under subclass 931 consisting of two
    metals having different coefficients of thermal expansion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Materials or Miscellaneous Articles, a residual class for a
    structurally defined stock material, nonstructural laminate, article of
    manufacture, or intermediate article of manufacture not provided for
    elsewhere; subclasses 616+ comprising different contiguous layers or
    portions, each having a matrix or continuous phase of free metal having the
    property of bending or lengthening in a circular fashion in response to an
    increase in temperature.


CLS 277/933
TXT Chemical reaction or physical change of state:

    Temperature responsive sealing means under subclass 931 wherein the sealing
    means changes its molecular structure or changes its phase (e.g., by
    polymerizing, volatilizing, intumescing, fusing, melting, freezing, etc.)
    from one condition (i.e., a solid, liquid, or gas) to another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions; subclass 72 for a composition that contains an agent
    for stopping or reducing a leak in a container; or subclass 378 for a
    process of intumescing vermiculite, other micaceous substances or other
    materials, or a product of such a process not provided for elsewhere.

    523,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 179 for a process of
    preparing a desired or intentional composition of at least one solid
    polymer or specified intermediate condensation product, or product thereof
    having utility as an ablative or an intumescent coating composition is
    claimed or solely disclosed, or to processes or preparation thereof.


CLS 277/934
TXT SEAL SWELLS WHEN WET:

    Sealing means under the class definition including means to absorb liquid
    to increase the volume of the sealing means.


CLS 277/935
TXT SEAL MADE OF A PARTICULAR MATERIAL:

    Sealing means under the class definition consisting of a specific
    composition or substance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404+,   for a relatively rotatable, radially extending, sealing face member
    (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.) made of a particular material.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, a residual class for a
    structurally defined stock material, nonstrictural laminate, an article of
    manufacture, not provided for elsewhere; subclasses 131+ for a structurally
    defined web or sheet (e.g., an overall dimension, etc.) including an
    aperture.

    440+,   for a piston ring having a surface of dissimilar material or
    hardness.

    534+,   for a dynamic, circumferential, contact seal for other than a
    piston intended to be contained or compressed by a gland member in a
    packing box having a particular material or construction.

    627,    for a static, contact seal intended for use on a pipe, conduit, or
    cable having a particular material or construction.

    650+,   for a static, contact seal for other than an internal combustion
    engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable having a particular sealing material
    or construction.

    934,    for a seal that swells when wet.


CLS 277/936
TXT Composite:

    Made of a particular material under subclass 935 consisting of specific
    distinct substances that retain their identities in the material used to
    form the sealing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Materials or Miscellaneous Articles, a residual class for a
    structurally defined stock material, nonstructural laminate, article of
    manufacture or intermediate article of manufacture, not provided for
    elsewhere; subclass 320.2+ comprising a single or plural web or sheet that
    contains components where at least one contains a liquid or has a
    constituent trapped inside preformed walls; subclasses 357+ containing or
    consisting of a strand, fiber, grain, cell, particle or any substance in
    terms of a particular size or shape, a plurality or such arranged relative
    to one another, a particular interengagement of a plurality of such or a
    coating associated therewith; subclasses 411.1+ for a composition of layers
    adhered or cohered to each other; subclass 426 for layers adhered or
    cohered to each other where a layer contains glass that may be in fiber or
    mat form; or subclasses 615+ comprising different contiguous layers or
    portions, each having a matrix or continuous phase of free metal.


CLS 277/937
TXT Glass particles or filament:

    A composite under subclass 936 wherein the composite material includes
    pieces or fibers of glass to reinforce the seal structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Materials or Miscellaneous Articles, a residual class for a
    structurally defined stock material, nonstructural laminate, article of
    manufacture or intermediate article of manufacture, not provided for
    elsewhere; subclass 406 containing or consisting of particulate matter
    comprised of glass having a particular size or shape and a coating or
    subclass 426 for layers adhered or cohered to each other where a layer
    contains glass that may be in fiber or mat form.


CLS 277/938
TXT Carbon or graphite particle or filament:

    A composite under subclass 936 wherein the composite includes a piece or
    fiber of carbon to reinforce the seal structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Materials or Miscellaneous Articles, a residual class for a
    structurally defined stock material, nonstructural laminate, article of
    manufacture or intermediate article of manufacture, not provided for
    elsewhere; subclasses 367+ containing carbon as an element or compound, and
    consisting of or coating a rod, strand, filament or fiber.


CLS 277/939
TXT Containing metal:

    Made of a particular material under subclass 935 wherein the composition or
    substance contains metal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, for a generic class for alloys
    containing metal or metallic compositions that contain a continuous phase
    of metal, methods of making it not provided for elsewhere, or "elemental"
    metal, per se.

    428,    Stock Materials or Miscellaneous Articles, a residual class for a
    structurally defined stock material, nonstructural laminate, article of
    manufacture or intermediate article of manufacture, not provided for
    elsewhere; subclasses 544+ for metallic.


CLS 277/940
TXT Alloy:

    Containing metal under subclass 939 wherein the composition or substance is
    an intimate mixture of metals or of a metal and a nonmetal.


CLS 277/941
TXT Aluminum or copper:

    Containing metal under subclass 939 wherein the composition or substance
    contains copper or aluminum.


CLS 277/942
TXT Silver or gold:

    Containing metal under subclass 939 wherein the composition or substance
    contains silver or gold.


CLS 277/943
TXT Ceramic or glass:

    Made of a particular material under subclass 935 wherein the composition or
    substance is a fired clay containing composition (e.g., porcelain,
    earthenware, etc.), glass or refractory composition (e.g., inorganic
    oxides, carbides, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, subclasses 1+ for inorganic compositions
    other than Portland cement or cementitious material prepared from gypsum
    that are heat treated by firing, calcining, sintering, or fusion of a part
    of the inorganic material during manufacturing or subsequent use to effect
    hardening or fusion followed by hardening when cooled and processes not
    provided for elsewhere, and especially subclasses 11+ for a glass
    composition or a composition intended to be heat treated to form a glass.


CLS 277/944
TXT Elastomer or plastic:

    Made of a particular material under subclass 935 wherein the composition or
    substance is rubberlike.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    582,    for a dynamic, circumferential contact floating ring or bushing
    made of a particular elastomeric material for other than a piston.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 1+ is the generic
    subclass for a synthetic resin or natural rubber preparation, and
    composition containing or treatment thereof is to be considered an integral
    part of Class 260 retaining all pertinent definitions and class lines and
    having Classes 521, 522, 523, 524, 525, 526, 527, and 528 indented
    thereunder.


CLS 277/945
TXT Containing fluorine:

    Consisting of elastomer or plastic under subclass 944 wherein the elastomer
    or plastic includes fluoride.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    570,    for a dynamic circumferential contacting peripheral radially
    sealing flexible projection made of fluorocarbon for other than a piston.


CLS 277/946
TXT PTFE or Teflon:

    Containing fluorine under subclass 945 wherein the fluoride is part of a
    polytetrafluoroethylene composition.


CLS 278/
TTL LAND VEHICLES: ANIMAL  DRAFT APPLIANCES

CLS 278/
TXT This class includes that portion of land vehicles by means of which the
    pull of draft animals is utilized to move the vehicle over the ground.

    (1)     Note.  This class is subordinate to Class 280, Land Vehicles, and
    is distinguished therefrom, as indicated in the above definition.


CLS 278/1
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Devices within the class definition and not classified in any of the other
    subclasses of this class.


CLS 278/2
TXT LOAD STARTERS:

    Subject matter under the class definition including devices auxilary to the
    conventional means for drawing a vehicle which can be used to start a load
    by giving increased mechanical advantage to the draft animals.

    (1)     Note.  For load starters operated by an auxilary force, see Class
    280, Land Vehicles, subclass 151.


CLS 278/2.1
TXT STREETCAR:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means for attaching
    draft animals to streetcars.



    DRAFT EQUALIZERS:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the group of subclasses
    indented hereunder comprise means for effecting and utilizing the pull of
    two or more draft animals, so that the load will be proportioned to each
    animal in accordance with unit strength or varying conditions of pull; also
    means, where the line of draft relative to the load is offset, to overcome
    and prevent so-called "side draft".

    (1)     Note.  Conventional doubletrees involving only structural features
    and attaching means in the line of draft will be found in this class,
    subclasses 90+.


CLS 278/3
TXT Horse longitudinally aligned:

    Subject matter under "Draft Equalizers" wherein the draft animals are
    arranged in a longitudinal aligned relation, there being any number of
    animals abreast.


CLS 278/4
TXT Two abreast:

    Subject matter under subclass 3 wherein the draft animals are arranged in
    files of two abreast.


CLS 278/5
TXT Horse abreast:

    Subject matter under "Draft Equalizers" wherein all the draft animals are
    arranged in abreast relation.


CLS 278/6
TXT Five-horse type:

    Subject matter under subclass 5 wherein the number of animals is limited to
    five.


CLS 278/7
TXT With pole or poles:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein, in the type indicated, a pole or
    poles is employed.


CLS 278/8
TXT Four-horse type:

    Subject matter under subclass 5 wherein the number of animals is limited to
    four.


CLS 278/9
TXT With pole or poles:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 wherein, in the type indicated, a pole or
    poles is employed.


CLS 278/10
TXT Offset pole:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein the pole is offset relative to the
    team, i.e., three on one side and one on the other side of the pole.


CLS 278/11
TXT Three-against-one pull:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein three of the draft animals are
    arranged to pull against one.


CLS 278/12
TXT Two-against-two pull:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein the draft animals are arranged in
    pairs, each pair to pull against the other.


CLS 278/13
TXT Lateral evener connection:

    Subject matter under subclass 12 wherein the draft connection between the
    draft equalizer and load is lateral of the pole.


CLS 278/14
TXT Three-horse type:

    Subject matter under subclass 5 wherein the number of draft animals is
    limited to three.


CLS 278/15
TXT With pole or poles:

    Subject matter under subclass 14 wherein, in the type indicated, a pole or
    poles is employed.


CLS 278/16
TXT With intermediate evener:

    Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein an intermediate evener is used to
    connect at least two of the draft animals to a main evener or its
    equivalent.


CLS 278/17
TXT Offset:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 wherein the intermediate evener has an
    offset position relative to the pole.


CLS 278/18
TXT Two-horse type:

    Subject matter under "Draft Equalizers" wherein the number of draft animals
    is limited to two.


CLS 278/19
TXT Leverage adjustment:

    Subject matter under subclass 18 wherein there is a possible adjustment of
    position of the singletrees relative to the evener or of the evener
    relative to the load to proportion the load according to the strength or
    position of each of the draft animals.


CLS 278/20
TXT Automatic:

    Subject matter under subclass 19 wherein the adjustment of position is
    effected automatically.


CLS 278/21
TXT HORSE DETACHERS:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising devices involving no
    special harness modification for quickly detaching draft animals from the
    vehicle; usually the driver can operate this disconnection from a position
    on the vehicle, as in case of the animal or animals running away.

    (1)     Note.  Devices of like purpose involving harness modification or
    special arrangement of harness, with special vehicle attachments to
    cooperate therewith, will be found in Class 54, Harness, subclass 69.


CLS 278/22
TXT Automatic:

    Subject matter under subclass 21 wherein the detachment is effected
    automatically.


CLS 278/23
TXT Combined brake:

    Subject matter under subclass 21 wherein upon operation of the detaching
    device, brakes are operated to stop the movement of the vehicle.


CLS 278/24
TXT Traces from singletree:

    Subject matter under subclass 21 including means for simultaneously
    detaching the traces from the singletree.

    (1)     Note.  The singletree may be an element of a doubletree.


CLS 278/25
TXT Traces positively moved:

    Subject matter under subclass 24 wherein the trace is positively moved out
    of its engaging position with the singletree.


CLS 278/26
TXT Movable trace-eye-engaging element:

    Subject matter under subclass 24 wherein a trace-eye-engaging element is
    moved to a position to release the trace.


CLS 278/27
TXT Pivoted:

    Subject matter under subclass 26 wherein the trace-eye-engaging element is
    pivoted.


CLS 278/28
TXT Sliding pin or rod:

    Subject matter under subclass 26 wherein the trace-eye-engaging element is
    a sliding pin or rod.


CLS 278/29
TXT Thills or pole from vehicle:

    Subject matter under subclass 21 wherein the thills or pole are released
    from their attached relation to the vehicle.


CLS 278/30
TXT Retracting axle-clip bolt:

    Subject matter under subclass 29 wherein the usual axle-clip bolt is
    retracted to release the thills or pole.


CLS 278/31
TXT Doubletree from pole:

    Subject matter under subclass 21 wherein the doubletree is released from
    the pole.


CLS 278/32
TXT Singletree from thill or evener:

    Subject matter under subclass 21 wherein the singletree is released from
    the thills or evener.


CLS 278/33
TXT POLE AND THILLS:

    Subject matter under the class definition including patents for
    improvements relating to the pole or thills of a vehicle.


CLS 278/34
TXT Plural:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 wherein the poles or thills are duplicated
    in the same vehicle.


CLS 278/35
TXT Special purpose attachment:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 including devices adapted for attachment
    to poles or thills for various special purposes.


CLS 278/36
TXT Poles:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 relating to poles only.


CLS 278/37
TXT Agricultural implement type:

    Subject matter under subclass 36 including the type used with agricultural
    implements.

    (1)     Note.  Where the function of the devices is to equalize draft, they
    will be found in appropriate subclasses under "Draft Equalizers" in this
    class.


CLS 278/38
TXT The pole body:

    Subject matter under subclass 36 including patents relating to the body or
    pole proper.


CLS 278/39
TXT Selective positioned:

    Subject matter under subclass 36 wherein the pole body is capable of
    attachment to the rest of the pole in a plurality of positions.


CLS 278/40
TXT Slip tongue:

    Subject matter under subclass 36 wherein the pole is socketed to a part of
    the vehicle and can be slipped into or out of such position.


CLS 278/41
TXT Axle attached:

    Subject matter under subclass 36 wherein the pole is attached to the axle
    of the vehicle.


CLS 278/42
TXT Width adjustment:

    Subject matter under subclass 41 wherein the pole has an adjustable
    rear-end portion to vary its width to accommodate it to varyingly spaced
    axle clips or equivalent axle fastenings.


CLS 278/43
TXT Axle hounds attached:

    Subject matter under subclass 36 wherein the pole is attached to the
    vehicle through axle hounds.


CLS 278/44
TXT Thills:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 relating to thills only.


CLS 278/45
TXT Two-wheeled vehicles:

    Subject matter under subclass 44 adapted for use with two-wheeled vehicles.


CLS 278/46
TXT Offset draft:

    Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein thills are so constructed or
    positioned relative to a vehicle that the draft animal travels to one side
    of the center line of draft.


CLS 278/47
TXT Selective direct:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 wherein the thills may be selectively
    positioned to the vehicle, so that the draft animal travels either in the
    line of draft or to one side thereof.


CLS 278/48
TXT Sectional:

    Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein the thills are composed of easily
    disconnected sections.


CLS 278/49
TXT Joints and braces:

    Subject matter under subclass 44 relating to the joints or braces of thills.


CLS 278/50
TXT Tips:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 including devices for tipping the ends of
    poles or thills.


CLS 278/51
TXT Safety neck-yoke retainers:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein pole tips are provided with means
    for preventing accidental removal of conventional neck-yoke centers from
    the ends of poles.

    (1)     Note.  Devices for a similar purpose where the neck-yoke center is
    modified will be found in this class, subclasses 51 and 53.


CLS 278/52
TXT THILL COUPLINGS:

    Subject matter under the class definition including devices for attaching
    thills to a vehicle; usually such connection is made to the axle; one of
    the elements of the coupling is formed on the thills.


CLS 278/53
TXT Resilient:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein the coupling resiliently connects
    the thills to the vehicle.


CLS 278/54
TXT Safety attachment:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 including devices adapted to prevent
    separation of the thills and vehicle in case of disconnection of the
    coupling.


CLS 278/55
TXT Plural:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein the thills as a whole can be
    disconnected from the vehicle by any one of two or more couplings.


CLS 278/56
TXT Special position release:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein the coupling can be disconnected
    by movement of the thills to a special position other than the one in which
    the thills are normally placed.


CLS 278/57
TXT L-head type:

    Subject matter under subclass 56 wherein one of the elements of the
    coupling is L-shaped.


CLS 278/58
TXT T-head type:

    Subject matter under subclass 56 wherein one of the elements of the
    coupling is T-shaped.


CLS 278/59
TXT D-head type:

    Subject matter under subclass 56 wherein one of the elements of the
    coupling is D-shaped.


CLS 278/60
TXT Removable transverse pin or bolt:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein a transverse pin or bolt passes
    through eye elements on the thills and vehicle.


CLS 278/61
TXT Antirattling:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 including devices for attachment to
    conventional couplings of the type indicated to prevent rattling of the
    couplings.


CLS 278/62
TXT With special pin retainers:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein the antirattling device is formed
    as a part of means for securing the pin or bolt in place.


CLS 278/63
TXT Resilient:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein the antirattling device is
    resilient.


CLS 278/64
TXT Adjustable:

    Subject matter under subclass 63 wherein the antirattling device is
    provided with means to adjust the resilient element.


CLS 278/65
TXT Special pin retainers:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 including special means for holding the
    pin or bolt in place other than by conventional nuts, cotter pins, etc.


CLS 278/66
TXT Opposed lug engaging or carrying jaws:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein one of the elements of the
    coupling is a member having opposed lug-engaging or -carrying jaws.


CLS 278/67
TXT L-head type:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein one of the elements of the
    coupling is L-shaped.


CLS 278/68
TXT T-head type:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein one of the elements of the
    coupling is T-shaped.


CLS 278/69
TXT Cooperating hooks:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein the branches of the "T" are
    engaged by hooks.


CLS 278/70
TXT Retainers:

    Subject matter under subclass 69 wherein retaining means is provided to
    maintain the "T" element in the hooks.


CLS 278/71
TXT Spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 wherein such retaining means is in the
    form of a spring.


CLS 278/72
TXT D-head type:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein one of the elements of the
    coupling is D-shaped.


CLS 278/73
TXT Cooperating hook:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the transverse member of the "D"
    is engaged by a hook.


CLS 278/74
TXT Retainers:

    Subject matter under subclass 73 wherein retaining means is provided to
    maintain the "D" element in the hook.


CLS 278/75
TXT Pivoted:

    Subject matter under subclass 74 wherein the retaining means is a pivoted
    element.


CLS 278/76
TXT Spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 74 wherein the retaining member is a spring.


CLS 278/77
TXT Plural part eye:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein one of the elements of the
    coupling is a separable eye adapted to clamp the transverse member of the
    "D".


CLS 278/78
TXT Pivoted jaws:

    Subject matter under subclass 77 wherein the eye is formed by jaws pivoted
    together.


CLS 278/79
TXT Grapple type:

    Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein the pivoted jaws resemble a
    grapple.


CLS 278/80
TXT Ball and socket:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein one of the coupling elements is a
    ball and the other is a socket to receive the ball.


CLS 278/81
TXT THILL SUPPORTS:

    Subject matter under the class definition including devices for supporting
    the thills of the vehicle in any position so that the ends are held above
    the ground.


CLS 278/82
TXT Plural position:

    Subject matter under subclass 81 including means capable of supporting the
    thills in a plurality of positions.


CLS 278/83
TXT Spring latches:

    Subject matter under subclass 81 wherein the support is a latch moved to
    engaging position by a spring.


CLS 278/84
TXT Spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 81 wherein the support is a spring which
    resiliently supports the thills.


CLS 278/85
TXT Separate props:

    Subject matter under subclass 81 including devices separate from the
    vehicle or thills adapted to engage the thills and some other part of the
    vehicle to prop the thills in raised position.


CLS 278/86
TXT POLE SUPPORTS:

    Subject matter under the class definition including devices for supporting
    the pole of the vehicle in any position so that the end of the pole does
    not contact with the ground or the animals are relieved of its weight.


CLS 278/87
TXT Ground-engaging props:

    Subject matter under subclass 86 including means for engaging the pole and
    the ground to prop the pole.


CLS 278/88
TXT Spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein the support is a spring which
    resiliently supports the pole.


CLS 278/89
TXT Coil:

    Subject matter under subclass 88 wherein the support is a coil spring.


CLS 278/90
TXT WHIFFLETREES:

    Subject matter under the class definition including patents relating to
    whiffletrees and to their connections to the pole, thills, or forward part
    of a vehicle, unless the invention is such as falls under the definition of
    draft equalizers.


CLS 278/91
TXT Resilient:

    Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein the whiffletree is resilient.


CLS 278/92
TXT Metallic:

    Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein the whiffletree is made of metal.


CLS 278/93
TXT Trussed:

    Subject matter under subclass 92 wherein the whiffletree is of metal and is
    provided with a truss brace.


CLS 278/94
TXT Trussed:

    Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein the whiffle tree is provided with
    a truss brace.


CLS 278/95
TXT Connections:

    Subject matter under subclass 90 including the connecting means between the
    elements of a whiffletree or between the whiffletree and pole, thill, or
    forward part of a vehicle.


CLS 278/96
TXT Link or clevis:

    Subject matter under subclass 95 wherein the connecting means is in the
    form of a link or clevis.


CLS 278/96.1
TXT Resilient:

    Subject matter under subclass 96 wherein the link or clevis is supported
    resiliently or consists of resiliently connected parts.


CLS 278/96.2
TXT Adjustable draft line:

    Subject matter under subclass 96 wherein the link or clevis is so mounted
    or constructed as to permit change in the line of draft relative to the
    drawn vehicle.


CLS 278/96.3
TXT Horizontally:

    Subject matter under subclass 96.2 wherein the adjustment is permitted in a
    horizontal plane.


CLS 278/97
TXT Resilient:

    Subject matter under subclass 95 wherein the connecting means is resilient.


CLS 278/98
TXT To pole or thills:

    Subject matter under subclass 97 wherein the connection of the whiffletree
    to the pole or thills is resilient.


CLS 278/99
TXT To pole or thills:

    Subject matter under subclass 95 including connections of the whiffletree
    to the pole or thills.


CLS 278/100
TXT Pivot bolt:

    Subject matter under subclass 99 wherein the connection is a pivot bolt.


CLS 278/101
TXT Offset pivot:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the pivot-bolt is offset relative
    to an element of the whiffletree.


CLS 278/102
TXT Trace and whiffletree connections:

    Subject matter under subclass 90 including devices for connecting
    whiffletrees to harness traces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24+,    for trace detachers.


CLS 278/103
TXT Resilient:

    Subject matter under subclass 102 wherein the connection is resilient.


CLS 278/104
TXT Clamp:

    Subject matter under subclass 102 including means provided to clamp the end
    of the trace.


CLS 278/105
TXT Trace-eye-engaging head or end:

    Subject matter under subclass 102 wherein the whiffletree is provided with
    a head or end engaging in an eye formed at the end of the trace.


CLS 278/106
TXT Loop retainers:

    Subject matter under subclass 105 wherein the whiffletree is also provided
    with retaining means in the form of a loop.


CLS 278/107
TXT Hook retainers:

    Subject matter under subclass 105 wherein the whiffletree is provided with
    retaining means in the form of a hook.


CLS 278/108
TXT Spring detent retainers:

    Subject matter under subclass 105 wherein the whiffletree is provided with
    a spring-detent retaining means.


CLS 278/109
TXT Pivoted button or lug retainers:

    Subject matter under subclass 105 wherein the whiffletree is provided with
    a pivoted button or lug as retaining means.


CLS 278/110
TXT Rotatable button retainers:

    Subject matter under subclass 105 wherein the whiffle tree is provided with
    a rotatable button as retaining means.


CLS 278/111
TXT Hooks:

    Subject matter under subclass 102 wherein the connecting means is in the
    form of a hook.


CLS 278/112
TXT Trace retaining:

    Subject matter under subclass 111 wherein the hook is provided with
    trace-retaining means.


CLS 278/113
TXT Movable keeper:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein the retaining means is a movable
    keeper.


CLS 278/114
TXT Snap hook type:

    Subject matter under subclass 113 wherein the hook is of the snap hook type.


CLS 278/115
TXT Special position release:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein the hook is movable to a special
    position to permit release of the trace.


CLS 278/116
TXT Opposed lapping hooks:

    Subject matter under subclass 115 consisting of two overlapping opposed
    hooks.


CLS 278/117
TXT Whiffletree fastenings:

    Subject matter under subclass 111 means for fastening the trace-connecting
    means to the whiffletrees.


CLS 278/118
TXT TRACE AND THILL OR POLE CONNECTION:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means for connecting
    the trace directly to the pole or thills.


CLS 278/119
TXT NECK POLES:

    Subject matter under the class definition including patents relating to
    neck yokes.


CLS 278/120
TXT End construction:

    Subject matter under subclass 119 including patents relating to the end
    construction of neck yokes.


CLS 278/121
TXT Pole couplings:

    Subject matter under subclass 119 including that part of the neck yoke
    which is connected to the pole.


CLS 278/122
TXT Modified pole and yoke (center):

    Subject matter under subclass 121 including patents showing cooperative
    modification of both the pole and neck yoke.


CLS 278/123
TXT Permanently attached:

    Subject matter under subclass 122 wherein the neck yoke is permanently
    attached to the pole.


CLS 278/124
TXT With safety devices:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the neck yoke is provided with
    means to prevent accidental detachment of the neck yoke from the pole.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for patents for a similar purpose where the neck yoke is
    conventional and the structure is a part of the pole.


CLS 278/125
TXT Leather eye or ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the pole coupling is leather eye
    or ring secured to the neck yoke.


CLS 278/126
TXT HOLDBACKS:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means formed as a part
    of the thills or as an attachment to thills for harness connections to
    prevent the vehicle overrunning the draft animal.

    (1)     Note.  Neck yokes are equivalent in function where poles are used.


CLS 278/127
TXT Harness attached:

    Subject matter under subclass 126 wherein a part of the harness is secured
    to the attachment.


CLS 278/128
TXT Breech strap:

    Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein the breech strap is the part of
    the harness.


CLS 278/129
TXT Adjustable:

    Subject matter under subclass 128 wherein the position of the attachment is
    adjustable on the thills.


CLS 278/130
TXT Automatic release:

    Subject matter under subclass 128 including devices permitting, under
    proper conditions, an automatic release of the harness from the attachment.


CLS 279/
TTL CHUCKS OR SOCKETS

CLS 279/
TXT
     I.     This is the generic class for a chuck or a socket, per se, that is
    not elsewhere classified, and which includes a means for making a permanent
    or temporary and readily-releasable connection between a holder and an
    object, such as a tool, work-piece, or rod-like body, where the gripping
    means or seat is on or within the holder or base member.

    This class includes a recessed handle, a spindle, and the like, adapted to
    receive a tool, a tang, a rod or like body, whether permanently or in such
    manner as to be readily released.

    This class also includes a typical machine-chuck with jaws and a
    tool-holding socket with a detent to grip the object held against a
    torsional strain, a rock-drill chuck, a punch-holder, etc., where no
    torsional strain is applied, and in general any socketed holder and any
    symmetrical clamping device which may be deemed to be a receiver for
    positively holding an object against relative movement in at least one
    direction, generally in symmetrical relation concentric with the holding
    member, but in some instances eccentric.

    II.     SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclasses 103 and 123, for a chuck in a tool
    specialized to that art.

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 18+, and particularly subclass
    43, for a caster having socket structure.

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., appropriate subclasses, for a
    clasp, a fastener or holder not belonging to any art, but novel only to its
    structure.

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 559, for a process of work holding, per se.

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 329+, for a hand cutter having a blade holder.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclasses 19+ and 20, for a chuck in a tool
    specialized to that art.

    81,     Tools, subclasses 300+ for a pair of pliers and a plural-handle
    wrench, subclass 487, for a hand held holder or a holder having a clamp,
    and subclasses 52+, for a single-handle wrench or screwdriver.

    82,     Turning, subclasses 148 and 165-170, for a chuck in a tool
    specialized to that art.

    142,    Wood Turning, subclasses 48 and 49, for a tool rest and a work
    support, 53, for a lathe center, 54, for a hollow mandrel, 55 for a turning
    machine attachment, 56, for a tool, and 57, for a work holder, all of which
    may have a chuck or a socket.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 239 and 294, for an article
    dispenser not otherwise provided for, which delivers dispensed articles to
    a clamp or a hold down, and subclasses 201+, for a device in which a
    gripping type discharge assistant is effective to remove articles from a
    source of supply.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclass 158, for a
    reciprocating gripper which advances material longitudinally.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 637+, for a machinery support, and subclasses
    500+ for a hold down.

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses.  Class 269 is the residual
    locus for patents to a device for clamping, supporting and/or holding an
    article in position to be operated on or treated.  See notes thereunder for
    other related loci.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, for a holding device and
    a grappling element combined with a handle, a terminal element, or an
    attachment peculiarly adapted for engaging or supporting an article or a
    material for handling or manipulation purposes, especially subclass 99.2,
    for a tweezer or a pair of tongs.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 49+, for a
    mechanical pencil including a chuck, particularly subclass 53, for a
    mechanical pencil including a chuck and means to limit the projection of a
    piece of lead (graphite); subclass 54, for a chuck resiliently supported in
    a pencil to cushion the lead; subclasses 65+, for a chuck included in
    step-by-step lead feed of a mechanical pencil; and subclasses 92+, residual
    for a mechanical pencil including a chuck.

    407,    Cutters, for Shaping, subclasses 66+, for a holder having a seat
    for an inserted cutting tool.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 238+,
    for a tool-holder or a chuck particularly adapted to be utilized in the
    operation of that class.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 232+, for a milling
    cutter spindle holder, subclass 234, for a milling cutter holder, and
    subclasses 345+, for a planing machine including a chuck.

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 127+, for a dental handpiece with a tool
    holding chuck structure.

    440,    Marine Propulsion, subclasses 106+ for an oarlock.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, subclass 73+ for means for closing a threading-die analogous to
    those used in closing chuck-jaws, subclass 58, for a work-holder used in
    screw threading, except as provided for in Class 408, subclasses 123+, for
    a work-holder or a socket used for mounting die stocks, and subclasses 141+
    for a tap holder.

    483,    Tool Changing, generally for a process or apparatus including a
    tool transfer means combined with a tool support or storage means.

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, subclasses 57+, for a chuck or socket used in
    mounting an artificial hand or an article on an artificial arm.


CLS 279/2.01
TXT EXPANDING:
    A device under the class definition wherein the object being held has a
    hollow or recess into which the means for making the connection is inserted
    and enlarged so as to internally grip the object.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 393, for a wedge expanded segmental pipe
    expander, and subclasses 120+, for the same which rotates and/or travels
    circumferentially around a pipe.

    82,     Turning, subclass 169, for an expansible mandrel for a work driver.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 529 and 571+ for
    expansible means to hold a coil or core and the like.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 79+, for
    a work-engaging structure other than a tool or a tool-support that
    frictionally engages sides of an opening in the work.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 463+ for an expansible abrading tool.


CLS 279/2.02
TXT Collet type:
    A device under subclass 2.01 wherein the means for making the connection is
    a generally cylindrical sleeve which has jaws for gripping defined thereon
    by circumferentially spaced longitudinal slits.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.07+,  for a socket type collet having a fluid-pressure actuator.

    46.1+,  for a socket with spring biased jaws.


CLS 279/2.03
TXT Fixed jaws and moving cam:
    A device under subclass 2.02 wherein the jaws are expanded by forcing a
    wedge into the collect which is stationary with respect to the holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47      through 50, for a spring jaws socket with a moving cam actuator.

    56      and 57, for a loose jaws socket with a moving cam actuator.


CLS 279/2.04
TXT Fixed cam and moving jaws:
    A device under subclass 2.02 wherein the jaws are expanded by forcing the
    collet onto a wedge which is stationary with respect to the holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51+,    for a spring jaws socket having a fixed cam and moving jaws.

    58+,    for a loose jaws socket having a fixed cam and moving jaws.


CLS 279/2.05
TXT Jaws mounted on flexible member; i.e. diaphragm:
    A device under subclass 2.01 wherein the means for making the connection is
    secured to a thin, resiliently deformable member which is deformed in such
    a manner as to produce radial movement of the connection means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.05,   for a chuck or socket with fluid-pressure actuator having jaws
    mounted on a flexible member.

    139,    for a chuck having jaws mounted on a flexible member.


CLS 279/2.06
TXT Fluid-pressure actuator:
    A device under subclass 2.01 having a liquid or gas receiving expansible
    chamber for activating the means for making the connection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.01+,  for a chuck or socket with fluid-pressure actuator.


CLS 279/2.07
TXT Directly expanding jaws:
    A device under subclass 2.06 wherein the means for making the connection is
    directly acted upon by the pressure of the fluid without intervening
    connecting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.11,   for a chuck or socket having radially reciprocating jaws which are
    directly moved by a fluid pressure actuator.


CLS 279/2.08
TXT Jaw is expansible chamber; i.e., bladder type:
    A device under subclass 2.07 wherein the expansible chamber is the means
    for making the connection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.03,   for a chuck or socket with fluid-pressure actuator wherein the jaw
    is an expansible chamber.


CLS 279/2.09
TXT Expanding jaws via mechanical connection:
    A device under subclass 2.06 wherein the means for making the connection is
    coupled to the fluid pressure actuator by means of a linkage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.12,   for a chuck or socket with fluid-pressure actuator having radially
    reciprocating jaws wherein fluid pressure moves the jaws via mechanical
    connections.


CLS 279/2.1
TXT Axially moving actuator:
    A device under subclass 2.01 wherein the means for making the connection
    expand is a mechanical linkage which translates in a direction generally
    perpendicular to the direction of expansion.


CLS 279/2.11
TXT Wedge:
    A device under subclass 2.1 having an inclined surface which acts as a cam
    for converting an axial motion of the actuator into a radial expansion of
    the means for making the connection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for a socket having radially reciprocating jaws with a moving cam
    actuator including a threaded sleeve and a wedge.

    121,    for a chuck having radially reciprocating jaws which are wedge
    actuated.


CLS 279/2.12
TXT Internal cone:
    A device under subclass 2.11 wherein the wedge is a cylinder which has a
    diameter that increases along a direction defined by the axis of the
    cylinder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for a pivoted jaw chuck which is internally cone actuated.

    120,    for a chuck with radially reciprocating jaws which are lever
    actuated and include an internal cone.


CLS 279/2.13
TXT With jaw positively interlocked with wedge; e.g., dovetail or T-slot:A
    device under subclass 2.11 wherein a portion of the means for making the
    connection is engaged within a portion of the wedge so that the wedge
    positively moves said means.


CLS 279/2.14
TXT With resilient means contacting nonresilient jaw:
    A device under subclass 2.11 wherein the means for making the connection is
    engaged by a resilient means thereby tending to move the connection making
    means radially inward.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43.7,   for a resilient split socket having a nonresilient member biased by
    a resilient member.

    46.7,   for a socket having spring biased jaws including a nonresilient
    member biased by a resilient member.


CLS 279/2.15
TXT Constricting band, annulus, or clip:
    A device under subclass 2.14 wherein the resilient means surrounds and
    confines the connection making means.


CLS 279/2.16
TXT Toggle:
    A device under subclass 2.1 having an intermediate linkage pivotally
    connected at both ends between the translating linkage and the means for
    making the connection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109,    for pivoted jaws which are toggle actuated.

    118,    for radially reciprocating jaws which are toggle actuated.


CLS 279/2.17
TXT Axially compressible element expands radially:
    A device under subclass 2.1 wherein the means for making the connection is
    an elastomeric, generally cylindrical member which expands in diameter when
    shortened lengthwise.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46.1+,  for a socket with spring biased jaws.


CLS 279/2.18
TXT Lever:
    A device under subclass 2.1 having an intermediate linkage between the
    axially moving actuator and the means for making the connection which is
    pivotally mounted intermediate its ends.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119+,   for radially reciprocating jaws which are lever actuated.


CLS 279/2.19
TXT Rotary actuator:
    A device under subclass 2.01 having means adapted to expand the means for
    making the connection by rotating about the longitudinal axis of the chuck
    or socket.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71+,    for a socket with radially reciprocating jaws actuated by a moving
    cam which includes a rotary eccentric-cam sleeve.

    81,     for a socket with a side detente and a rotary cam sleeve.


CLS 279/2.2
TXT Clutch or self-actuating type:
    A device under subclass 2.19 wherein rotation of the device or tangential
    force on the object being held acts to expand the means for making the
    connection.


CLS 279/2.21
TXT Jaw structure:
    A device under subclass 2.01 wherein the means for making the connection
    has specific gripping structure for contacting the wall of the recess, or
    specific structure for attaching the means for making the connection to the
    chuck body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123+,   for radially reciprocating jaw structure, per se.

    152+,   for a jaw insert component or accessory.


CLS 279/2.22
TXT Resilient:
    A device under subclass 2.21 having an elastomeric element for the gripping
    structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22      and 23, for a self-grasping socket having yielding grasping jaws.

    151,    for a padded or cushioned jaw component or accessory.


CLS 279/2.23
TXT Ball or roller:
    A device under subclass 2.21 having a sphere or cylinder for the gripping
    structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for a self-grasping socket having yielding grasping jaws including
    ball or roller.

    152+,   for a jaw insert component or accessory.


CLS 279/2.24
TXT Pivoted:
    A device under subclass 2.21 having gripping structure that is hinged to
    the holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35+,    for a socket having pivoted jaws.

    106+,   for a chuck having pivoted jaws.


CLS 279/3
TXT Chucks under class definition adapted to hold work-pieces, etc., by
    external atmospheric pressure produced by exhausting air from the side of
    the article against the chuck body or holder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    particularly subclasses 569+ for label pickers in combinations with a
    laminating operation.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclass 95 for
    pneumatic means to cause material being advanced to be urged toward the
    advancer.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 206.1, for vacuum-type brackets; 362, for
    vacuum-type hold-downs, 363, for miscellaneous vacuum-type supports.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, appropriate "pneumatic" subclasses.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 64.1+, for
    vacuum- type devices, and subclass 88, for pneumatic grapples.

    451,    Abrading, subclass 388 for a vacuum work holder for use with an
    abrading machine.


CLS 279/4.01
TXT WITH FLUID-PRESSURE ACTUATOR:
    A device under the class definition having a chamber adapted to receive a
    gas or liquid, which device expands to force the gripping structure of a
    hollow holder to translate radially into contact with an external surface
    of the object inserted therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.06+,  for an expanding chuck or socket having a fluid pressure actuator.

    3,      for a vacuum actuated device.


CLS 279/4.02
TXT With measuring, indicating or control means:
    A device under subclass 4.01 having means to sense and/or display the
    existence or degree of a specified parameter, such as fluid pressure or
    gripping force, or means to influence a programmed sequence of events
    related to holder operation, such as fluid flow, depending whether the
    specified parameter has been detected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126,    for a chuck with measuring, indicating or control means.


CLS 279/4.03
TXT Jaw is expansible chamber; i.e., bladder type:
    A device under subclass 4.01 wherein the gripping structure is an external
    surface of the expansible chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.08,   for an expanding chuck or socket which is fluid pressure actuated
    with directly expanding jaws wherein one jaw is an expansible chamber.


CLS 279/4.04
TXT Pneumatic type:
    A device under subclass 4.01 wherein the fluid is a gas.


CLS 279/4.05
TXT Jaws mounted on flexible member; i.e., diaphragm:
    A device under subclass 4.01 having the gripping structure secured to a
    generally thin resiliently bendable member activated by the expansible
    chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.05,   for an expanding chuck or socket which has jaws mounted on a
    flexible member.

    139,    for jaws mounted on a flexible member, in general.


CLS 279/4.06
TXT Socket type:
    A device under subclass 4.01 wherein the holder has a recess or depression
    with which to receive the object, and means for gripping an exterior
    surface of the object therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9.1+,   for a socket, per se.


CLS 279/4.07
TXT Collet:
    A device under subclass 4.06 wherein the gripping means is a generally
    cylindrical sleeve having jaws thereon defined by circumferentially spaced
    lengthwise extending slits.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.02+,  for an expanding chuck or socket of the collet type.

    46.1+   for a socket with spring biased jaws.


CLS 279/4.08
TXT Fixed cam and moving jaws:
    A device under subclass 4.07 wherein the collet jaws are radially
    contracted onto the object by pushing or drawing the collet into a wedge
    that is stationary with respect to the holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51+,    for a socket with spring biased jaws having a fixed cam and moving
    jaws.

    58+,    for a socket with loose jaws having a fixed cam and moving jaws.


CLS 279/4.09
TXT Moving cam and fixed jaws:
    A device under subclass 4.07 wherein the collet jaws are radially
    contracted onto the object by pushing or drawing a wedge onto the collet
    that is stationary with respect to the holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47      through 50, for a socket having spring biased jaws which are
    actuated by a moving cam.

    56      through 57, for a loose jaws socket actuated by a moving cam.


CLS 279/4.1
TXT Radially reciprocating jaws:
    A device under subclass 4.01 wherein the gripping structure translates in a
    direction generally normal to the gripped surface of the object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110+,   for a chuck with radially reciprocating jaws.


CLS 279/4.11
TXT Fluid pressure directly moves jaws:
    A device under subclass 4.1 wherein the gripping structure is directly
    acted upon by the pressure of the fluid without intervening connection
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.07+,  for an expanding chuck or socket having fluid pressure actuation
    and directly expanding jaws.


CLS 279/4.12
TXT Fluid pressure moves jaws via mechanical connection:
    A device under subclass 4.1 wherein the means for making the connection is
    coupled to the fluid pressure actuated by means of a linkage structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.09,   for an expanding chuck or socket with fluid pressure actuation and
    expanding jaws via a mechanical connection.


CLS 279/5
TXT Chucks under class definition wherein the holding means may be rotated with
    respect to the chuck-body, angularly positioning the work and enabling a
    tool to engage different angular points on the work, as in successively
    cutting multiple threads or working otherwise on angularly-separated points.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 813+ for assemblies of
    general utility having means to index rotary members, and see the Notes
    thereto.


CLS 279/6
TXT Chucks under class definition adjustable so as to hold articles eccentric
    to the chuck-axis.


CLS 279/7
TXT Chucks under class definition adapted to hold short threaded pieces, as of
    pipes or rods, without marring the threads. Includes "nipple-chucks".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99+,    for shanks threaded into a holder or socket.


CLS 279/8
TXT Chucks under class definition to which the article is secured by
    screw-clamps whose axes are parallel to the axis of the chuck.


CLS 279/9.1
TXT SOCKET TYPE:
    A device under the class definition wherein the holder has a recess or
    depression with which to receive the object, and means for gripping the
    exterior surface of the object therein.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes machine chucks, drill or other tool
    holders, and rod-sockets, whether or not the connection formed thereby is
    permanent or temporary, provided the held member enters a socket in the
    holding member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for joints in
    general involving a socket.


CLS 279/14
TXT Devices under subclass 9 wherein a plurality of sockets are provided in one
    holder, but only one is adapted to be used at a time.


CLS 279/16
TXT Devices under subclass 9 in which the held article or socket member
    therefore is free to move in any direction or out of alignment with the
    axis of the chuck body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, appropriate subclasses for a coupling between a shaft and
    driven member having angularly related or misaligned axes.


CLS 279/17
TXT Devices under subclass 16 in which the jaws close by reciprocating radially.


CLS 279/18
TXT Devices under subclass 16 in which an article is clamped to a floating
    socket member by a transverse screw or by a clamp actuated by a screw.


CLS 279/19
TXT Devices under subclass 9 wherein the object held in the socket is permitted
    a limited free reciprocating movement.

    (1)     Note.  These devices are used mostly for impact-drills, riveters
    and punches.


CLS 279/19.1
TXT Devices under subclass 19 in which there is combined with the socket a yoke
    or detent mounted externally of the socket for swinging motion.


CLS 279/19.2
TXT Devices under subclass 19.1 in which the socket is constructed to rotate
    relative to the socket holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19.3,   for other rotary sockets.


CLS 279/19.3
TXT Devices under subclass 19 in which the socket is constructed to rotate
    relative to the socket holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19.2,   for other rotary sockets.


CLS 279/19.4
TXT Devices under subclass 19 in which two or more elements are mounted for
    motion away from each other to release a tool from the socket and for
    motion toward each other to retain a tool in the socket.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19.5,   for single elements movable relative to the socket for retaining a
    tool in the socket.


CLS 279/19.5
TXT Devices under subclass 19 in which a single element is mounted for movement
    in guideways for retaining a tool in the socket.


CLS 279/19.6
TXT Devices under subclass 19 in which a substantially annular member coacts
    with the socket to retain a tool therein.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass are placed sleeves mounted externally of
    the socket.


CLS 279/19.7
TXT Devices under subclass 19.6 in which the sleeve is mounted within the
    socket.


CLS 279/20
TXT Devices under subclass 9, having a fluid-conduit to admit oil, water, air,
    or other fluid to the drill or work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 184+ for couplings permitting
    adjusting the angle between tubular members, and subclasses 189+ for a
    joint between a pipe end and pipe side.


CLS 279/20.1
TXT Feed type:
    A device under subclass 9.1 wherein the recess has a through-hole for
    receiving an object of indeterminate length which extends therethrough and
    the device is adapted to advance the object intermittently.


CLS 279/22
TXT Devices under subclass 9 having self grasping yielding jaws in the form of
    rolling members moving on an inclined way.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for similar structure in radially reciprocating jaw sockets.


CLS 279/23.1
TXT Spring jaws:
    A device under subclass 9.1 wherein the gripping means are self-grasping
    yielding jaws of resilently deformable material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for a device with friction type jaws.


CLS 279/24
TXT Devices under subclass 9 having self- grasping means wherein an excessive
    stress will cause a detent to move and permit movement of the article in or
    from the socket.


CLS 279/28
TXT Devices under subclass 9 of the self- grasping one-way-clutch type,
    including jaws having a wedging action.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclass 206 wherein an axially curved or
    bent portion of a rod is a joint component.


CLS 279/29
TXT Devices under subclass 9, of the self- grasping one-way-clutch type wherein
    a detent permits the article to move one way in the socket, but binds when
    stress is exerted in the opposite direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87,     for wedge-detents longitudinal of the socket-axis and rigidly
    holding the tool or object against all movement in the socket.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclass 105 for similar structure in a
    joint of general utility.


CLS 279/30
TXT Devices under subclass 29, which include a binding-detent comprising a ball
    or roller adapted to move over an inclined surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for similar devices having yielding jaws.


CLS 279/32
TXT Devices under subclass 9 in which an article is held in the socket by a
    conical screw-threaded perforated binder, which is in two or more parts or
    divided part way of its axis, so as to be compressed on the article is the
    socket when screwed into the socket-walls.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 339+, for screw glands. See
    the search notes thereunder.


CLS 279/33
TXT Devices under subclass 9 in which the jaws swing in a curved path in a
    plane at right angles to the axis of the chuck.


CLS 279/34
TXT Devices under subclass 33, in which the jaws are closed by a screw.


CLS 279/35
TXT Devices under subclass 9 wherein two or more jaws swing toward each other
    in substantially radial planes on pivots or hinges.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for jaws which oscillate transversely.

    77,     for pivoted detents that oscillate or rotate into and out of
    contact with the object therein.

    106,    for pivoted jaws that oscillate in closing.


CLS 279/36
TXT Devices under subclass 35 wherein a sleeve threaded to the chuck-body
    advances and closes the jaws by inclined-surface engagement.


CLS 279/37
TXT Devices under subclass 35 wherein a reciprocating sleeve closes the jaws by
    an inclined-surface engagement.


CLS 279/38
TXT Devices under subclass 35, wherein the jaws are closed by being moved into
    contact with a part on the body, effecting an inclined-surface engagement.


CLS 279/39
TXT Devices under subclass 38 in which the jaws are pivoted to a screw-threaded
    member that is screwed into the socket.


CLS 279/40
TXT Devices under subclass 38 which include pivoted jaws connected to a
    threaded member engaging a screw-threaded sleeve.  When the sleeve is
    rotated, the pivoted jaws move axially of the socket without the sleeve
    advancing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     for similar structure in spring jaw sockets.

    59,     for similar structure in loose jaw socket.


CLS 279/42
TXT Devices under subclass 41 wherein a sleeve is threaded to the body and
    moves longitudinally thereon to clamp the parts together by an
    inclined-surface contact.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 339+ and 386+, for screw
    thimble, clamping thimble joints.  See the search notes thereunder.


CLS 279/43
TXT Devices under subclass 41, wherein the sleeve slides longitudinally on the
    split socket and cams along the walls upon the inserted article.


CLS 279/43.1
TXT Unitary:
    A device under subclass 9.1 wherein the gripping means is made of
    elastomeric or spring material and is of one piece construction, such as a
    tubular body divided or/slit lengthwise on one or more sides to permit the
    socket walls to grip the object therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46.2,   for a socket having spring biased jaws of unitary construction.


CLS 279/43.2
TXT Split at one end only:
    A device under subclass 43.1 wherein all slits in the tube extend
    lengthwise from a single terminal end.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46.3,   for a socket having spring biased jaws of unitary construction
    which are split at one end only.


CLS 279/43.3
TXT Transverse screw actuator:
    A device under subclass 43.2 having a threaded fastener which draws
    opposing lengthwise edges of the slit closer together.


CLS 279/43.4
TXT Cam actuator:
    A device under subclass 43.2 having a wedge mechanism which pushes opposing
    lengthwise edges of the slit closer together.


CLS 279/43.5
TXT Split end to end:
    A device under subclass 43.1 wherein the lengthwise slit extends over the
    entire length of the gripping means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46.5,   for a socket having spring biased jaws of unitary construction
    which are split end to end.


CLS 279/43.6
TXT With jaw pads or insert:
    A device under subclass 43.1 wherein the gripping means has removeable
    object-gripping surfaces or separate, permanently attached gripping
    surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46.6,   for a socket having spring biased jaws of unitary construction with
    jaw pads or insert.

    152+,   for a chuck or socket jaw insert component or accessory.


CLS 279/43.7
TXT Nonresilient member biased by a resilient member:
    A device under subclass 9.1 wherein the socket is itself a substantially
    rigid gripping means which is forced into contact with the object by an
    elastic means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.14+,  for an expanding chuck or socket having an axially moving wedge
    actuator including a resilient means contacting a nonresilient jaw.

    46.7,   for a socket having spring biased jaws including a nonresilient
    member biased by a resilient member.


CLS 279/43.8
TXT Resilient member reinforced by another resilient member:
    A device under subclass 9.1 wherein the socket is itself a gripping means
    divided or split lengthwise, made of elastomeric or spring material, and
    has another force applying means adding to the gripping force on the object
    therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46.8,   for a socket having spring biased jaws including a resilient member
    reinforced by another resilient member.


CLS 279/43.9
TXT With means to exclude contaminants; e.g., seal, shield:
    A device under subclass 9.1 having a gasket or other barrier means which
    prevents undesired material from entering the resilient split socket.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46.9,   for a socket having spring biased jaws and including means to
    exclude contaminents.


CLS 279/44
TXT Devices under subclass 9, wherein the socket is split in two relatively
    movable parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for detent pivoted to the socket to oscillate or rotate in or out
    of contact with the object.


CLS 279/45
TXT Devices under subclass 44 wherein a sleeve is adapted to be moved over the
    movable side member and force it to or hold it in clamping position.


CLS 279/46.1
TXT Spring biased jaws:
    A device under subclass 9.1 wherein the gripping means is separate from the
    chuck body, and is (1) made of resilient or spring material, such as a
    tubular body slit lengthwise, or (2) biased by resilient or spring material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes a socket of elastomeric material
    which expands radially when compressed axially, thus gripping an object in
    the socket aperture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.17,   for an expanding chuck or socket having an axially moving actuator
    including an axially compressible element which expands radially.

    43.1+,  for a split resilient socket of unitary construction.


CLS 279/46.2
TXT Unitary:
    A device under subclass 46.1 wherein the gripping means is of a single
    piece construction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43.1+,  for a split resilient socket of unitary construction, per se.


CLS 279/46.3
TXT Split at one end only:
    A device under subclass 46.2 wherein the lengthwise slit extends from a
    single terminal end of the gripping means, and the other terminal end is
    continuous therearound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43.2+,  for a split resilient socket of unitary construction which is split
    at one end only.


CLS 279/46.4
TXT Split at both ends:
    A device under subclass 46.2 wherein both terminal ends of the gripping
    means have a lengthwise slit extending therein.


CLS 279/46.5
TXT Split end to end:
    A device under subclass 46.2 wherein the gripping means has a single
    lengthwise slit extending from one terminal end thereof to the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43.5,   for a split resilient socket of unitary construction which is split
    end to end.


CLS 279/46.6
TXT With jaw pads or insert:
    A device under subclass 46.2 wherein the gripping means has removeable
    object-gripping surfaces, or separate, permanently attached gripping
    surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43.6,   for a split resilient socket of unitary construction having jaw
    pads or insert.

    152+,   for a jaw insert component or accessory, per se.


CLS 279/46.7
TXT Nonresilient member biased by a resilient member:
    A device under subclass 46.1 wherein the gripping means has a substantially
    rigid gripping structure that is forced into contact with the object by an
    elastomeric element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.14+,  for an expanding chuck or socket having an axially moving wedge
    actuator including a resilient means contacting a nonresilient jaw.

    43.7,   for a split resilient socket having a nonresilient member biased by
    a resilient member.


CLS 279/46.8
TXT Resilient member reinforced by another resilient member:
    A device under subclass 46.1 having an elastic gripping means and a second
    elastic means that applies force, which force adds to the gripping force on
    the object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43.8,   for a split resilient socket having a resilient member reinforced
    by another resilient member.


CLS 279/46.9
TXT With means to exclude contaminants; e.g., seal,  shield:
    A device under subclass 46.1 having a gasket or other barrier means which
    prevents undesired material from entering the chuck body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43.9,   for a split resilient socket with means to exclude contaminants.

    157,    for an accessory or component of a chuck or a socket which
    accessory or component includes protection means such as a cover or a seal.


CLS 279/47
TXT Devices under subclass 46 wherein a spring-collet or other spring-jaw
    member seated in the socket is controlled by an annular or other wedge
    pushed into wedging engagement with the jaws by a screw member threaded to
    the body or jaw member.


CLS 279/48
TXT Devices under subclass 46 wherein the jaws are moved by a rotary sleeve
    threaded to the body and moving longitudinally to engage the jaws by an
    inclined-surface contact.


CLS 279/49
TXT Devices under subclass 48 wherein the spring jaw member is loosely inserted
    in the socket.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for loose spring jaws having actuators of other types.

    56,     for jaws that are loose in the socket.


CLS 279/50
TXT Devices under subclass 46 wherein a longitudinal sliding sleeve moves the
    jaws into cam-closing engagement with the socket.


CLS 279/51
TXT Devices under subclass 46 wherein the jaws are closed by being moved
    longitudinally into camming engagement with the walls of the socket.


CLS 279/52
TXT Devices under subclass 51 in which the sleeve rotates without longitudinal
    movement and the spring-jaws have screw-threaded connection with the
    threads on the sleeve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for pivoted jaws actuated by a threaded cam sleeve.

    58,     for loose jaws actuated by their movement against a fixed cam.


CLS 279/53
TXT Devices under subclass 51, wherein the spring-jaws are screw-threaded at
    the inner end to the socket or connected to a threaded member, whereby they
    may be moved axially of the socket and closed by cam contact with the
    socket-walls.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for pivoted jaws moved against a fixed cam by an axial screw
    actuator.


CLS 279/54
TXT Devices under subclass 46, wherein the spring-jaw member is loosely
    inserted in the socket and secured by friction, by a binding-screw, or a
    screw-sleeve, and not otherwise secured.


CLS 279/55
TXT Devices under subclass 9 wherein the jaws are separate members loose in the
    socket until clamped on the inserted article. Jaws pivoted together,
    spring-united, integrally united, or guided in ways are not included.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    407,    Cutters, for Shaping, subclasses 66+ for a tool chuck or socket
    limited to use in a lathe.


CLS 279/56
TXT Devices under subclass 55, the jaws are clamped on the article by the cam
    sleeve threaded on the body and adapted to wedge the jaws to a closed
    position by its longitudinal motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for spring jaws loosely mounted.


CLS 279/57
TXT Devices under subclass 55 wherein a longitudinally-sliding sleeve wedges
    the jaws by cam action upon the inserted article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     50 and 74, for similar actuators in conjunction with other types of
    jaws.


CLS 279/58
TXT Devices under subclass 55, wherein the jaws are movable longitudinally into
    wedging contact with the socket to close the jaws.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for similar chucks having pivoted jaws.  40 and 52 for similar
    chucks having other type jaws.


CLS 279/59
TXT Devices under subclass 58 wherein a sleeve threaded to the body of the
    holder member engages the jaws and moves them.


CLS 279/60
TXT Devices under subclass 9 wherein the jaws in closing reciprocate at an
    angle to the axis of the chuck in a plane substantially radial of the
    chuck-axis.


CLS 279/61
TXT Devices under subclass 60, wherein the jaws are closed by a rotating
    screw-threaded sleeve, the threads on the sleeve engaging corresponding
    threads or equivalent on the jaws or a part connected to them, advancing
    the jaws, the sleeve not advancing.


CLS 279/62
TXT Devices under subclass 61, wherein the sleeve is internally cone shaped.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS

    114,    for radially reciprocating jaws actuated by a cam or scroll.


CLS 279/63
TXT Devices under subclass 60 wherein an internal cone is screw-threaded to the
    jaws and a relative motion of revolution between jaws and cone is effected
    by the sleeve.


CLS 279/64
TXT Devices under subclass 60 wherein a sleeve threaded to the chuck-body
    engages the jaws and moves them.


CLS 279/65
TXT Devices under subclass 60 wherein the jaws are moved by a sleeve
    reciprocating longitudinally.


CLS 279/66
TXT Devices under subclass 9 having a socket to receive an article or portion
    of an article to be held and jaws movable in a substantially radial
    direction to grasp or release the article seated in the socket.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110+,   for nonsocket type radially reciprocating jaws having various types
    of actuator.


CLS 279/67
TXT Devices under subclass 66 wherein two jaws are actuated by a single
    screw-threaded rod having right and left screw-threads.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    for nonsocket type radial reciprocating jaws having a transverse
    screw actuator.


CLS 279/68
TXT Devices under subclass 67 wherein the jaws interlace with each other when
    closed, so as to receive small tangs or shanks.


CLS 279/69
TXT Devices under subclass 66 in which a sleeve threaded to the body closes the
    jaws when it is rotated by reason of an inclined-surface engagement between
    jaws and sleeve.


CLS 279/70
TXT Devices under subclass 66 wherein a screw-threaded sleeve reciprocates
    wedges which engage the jaws to close them.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121,    for a nonsocket type jaw actuated by a wedge.


CLS 279/71
TXT Devices under subclass 66 comprising a rotary sleeve with eccentric
    cam-surfaces thereon engaging the jaws.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 147+,
    for structure for cutting in the manner of that class including means to
    adjust the tool by moving it radially.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and Apparatus
    subclasses 74+ for a screw threading, collapsing die closed by a cam or
    lever, except as provided for in Class 408.


CLS 279/72
TXT Devices under subclass 71 wherein a rocking member or ball or roller seated
    on an incline forms the biting portion of the jaws to increase the bite
    when torsion is applied to the article held.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for transversely oscillating jaws of the socket type.

    75,     for ball or roller jaws having a reciprocating cam sleeve.


CLS 279/73
TXT Devices under subclass 71, wherein the cam - sleeve is actuated by screw
    and worn gear.


CLS 279/74
TXT Devices under subclass 66 wherein the jaws are closed by a sleeve
    reciprocating longitudinally and closing the jaws by reason of an
    inclined-surface engagement between jaws and sleeve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for self grasping ball or roller jaws of the socket type.

    122,    for nonsocket type radial reciprocating jaw actuated by an external
    cone.


CLS 279/75
TXT Devices under subclass 74 wherein the jaws are balls or rollers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22      and 30, for similar jaws in different chucks.

    33,     for transversely oscillating jaws in the socket-type chuck.


CLS 279/76
TXT Devices under subclass 9 wherein the article held approximately fits in the
    socket and a locking member or detent engages the article on one side and
    holds said article against removal or rotation with respect to the socket.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97,     for chucks having a transverse pin to retain an object in said
    chuck.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    407,    Cutters, for Shaping, subclasses 66 + for a tool chuck or socket
    limited to use in a lathe.


CLS 279/77
TXT Devices under subclass 76 wherein the detent is pivoted to the socket, so
    as to oscillate or rotate into and of contact with the inserted object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for resilient socket split in two parts wherein one side is movable
    and the other stationary.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    407,    Cutters, for Shaping, subclasses 66+ for a tool chuck or socket
    limited to use in a lathe.


CLS 279/78
TXT Devices under subclass 77 wherein a reciprocating or rotary sleeve locks or
    releases the pivoted detent, according to position of the sleeve.


CLS 279/79
TXT Devices under subclass 76 wherein the side detent is a spring engaging the
    article in the socket.

    (1)     Note.  A detent adapted to be pressed to engaging position by a
    spring member forced against it, but not connected to it, is not deemed to
    be a spring-detent.


CLS 279/80
TXT Devices under subclass 79, the spring side detent is forced to or held in
    engaging position by a surrounding movable sleeve.


CLS 279/81
TXT Devices under subclass 76 wherein a rotary cam sleeve locks the detent to
    the article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     71, 75, 78, and 80, for sleeves to actuate various types of jaws.


CLS 279/82
TXT Devices under subclass 76 wherein the detent is locked in engagement by a
    reciprocating sleeve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     74, 75, and 80, for other sleeves to actuate various types of jaws.


CLS 279/83
TXT Devices under subclass 76 wherein a bolt or pin threaded in the socket
    engages the article seated therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    407,    Cutters, for Shaping, subclasses 66+ for a tool chuck or socket
    limited to use in a lathe.


CLS 279/84
TXT Devices under subclass 76 wherein a U-shaped clamp embraces a detent member
    and binds the tool or object to a rigid member of the socket.


CLS 279/85
TXT Devices under subclass 76 wherein the detent is secured in holding position
    by a plurality of bolts.


CLS 279/86
TXT Devices under subclass 76 wherein a bolt transverse to the axis of the
    socket and having a hooked or eyed head binds the detent to the article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97,     for transverse pin to retain an object in a socket-type chuck.


CLS 279/87
TXT Devices under subclass 76 having a wedge driven lengthwise of the socket to
    rigidly clamp the object against movement in any direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for a similar one way clutch-type wedge.


CLS 279/89
TXT Devices under subclass 9 wherein the article or tang has an enlargement,
    recess or integral collar utilized to secure the tang to the holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93,     for an offset tang adapted to fit in the socket of the chuck.


CLS 279/90
TXT Devices under subclass 89 provided with a cap sleeved on or connected to
    the holder and having an inward-extending flange or projection, which bears
    against the shoulder of the tang and holds it in the socket.


CLS 279/91
TXT Devices under subclass 90 wherein the cap is screw-threaded to socket.


CLS 279/93
TXT Devices under subclass 9 wherein the tang has a side projection within the
    socket.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for devices wherein the tang is provided with barbs or prongs.


CLS 279/94
TXT Devices under subclass 9 wherein the axis of the tang is not in line with
    the part secured thereto; for example, the handle of the tool is offset
    from or not in line with the tool.


CLS 279/95
TXT Devices under subclass 9 wherein a handle or other holder is perforated so
    that a passage extends longitudinally and completely through the holder or
    to another passage transverse of the axis of the holder.

    (1)     Note.  These are typical of connections between screw-driving and
    similar bits and their handles.


CLS 279/96
TXT Devices under subclass 95 wherein a tool, tang or other shank is held in
    the socket by friction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for tangs retained in a socket-type chuck by friction.


CLS 279/97
TXT Devices under subclass 9 wherein a pin or wedge transverse the axis of the
    socket engages a hole or notch in the tool-shank or other object to prevent
    removal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76,     for a tool held in a socket by a detent.

    83,     for a tool held in a socket by a set screw.

    86,     for a tool held in a socket by a single transverse bolt.


CLS 279/99
TXT Devices under subclass 9 wherein the shank is threaded and screwed into a
    socket in holder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 333+ for a coupling with a
    particular interface comprising a threaded conically tapered surface, and
    subclasses 390+ for a screw coupling of general utility.  See the search
    notes thereunder.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 343+ for screw-connected members.


CLS 279/100
TXT Devices under subclass 99 provided with locking means to prevent the
    unscrewing of the held article accidentally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 81+ for a coupling with means
    blocking release of the means holding the joint together, especially
    subclass 92 for a thread lock.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, subclasses 81+ for a threaded fastener (i.e., a
    bolt or nut) and means for restricting the rotation thereof relative to a
    coacting substructure; and subclasses 190+ for a threaded bolt and nut and
    means for coupling them against rotation relative to one another.


CLS 279/101
TXT Devices under subclass 100, the locking member comprising a screw-threaded
    sleeve or sleeve and wedge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 342+ for a screw thimble.


CLS 279/102
TXT Devices under subclass 9 wherein the tool shank, tang, or rod is held in
    the socket by friction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for yielding grasping spring jaws.

    96,     for friction gripped tools in the bottomless-type chuck.

    104,    for barbed or pronged tong.


CLS 279/103
TXT Devices under subclass 102 of the conical shank or socket type.


CLS 279/104
TXT Devices under subclass 9, the tang provided with prongs, barbs, or the
    like, that enter the walls of the socket and prevent withdrawals.


CLS 279/105
TXT Devices under subclass 9, the shank united to the socket by solder or other
    plastic molded or cast material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 265+ wherein the joint is
    secured by soldering, welding, casting, cementing, or the use of other
    adhesive, or otherwise united in a bonded joint.


CLS 279/105.1
TXT Adjustable length or size:
    A device under subclass 9.1 including means to axially vary the position of
    the gripped object with respect to the socket.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156,    for an accessory which limits the depth of insertion of the object
    within the chuck or socket.


CLS 279/106
TXT Devices under class definition, the jaws pivoted to oscillating in closing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     for socket-type pivoted jaws.


CLS 279/107
TXT Devices under subclass 106 wherein a sleeve placed externally closes the
    jaws by an inclined-surface engagement therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     37, 42, 43, 48, 49, 50, 56, 59, 69, and 81, for other cam sleeve
    actuators.


CLS 279/108
TXT Devices under subclass 106 wherein an internal cone engages the jaws to
    close them.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for radially reciprocating jaw chuck having an internal cone
    actuator.


CLS 279/109
TXT Devices under subclass 106 wherein toggle-levers connected to the jaws
    close or open them.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118,    for radially reciprocating jaw chucks having a toggle actuator.


CLS 279/110
TXT Devices under class definition comprising chucks other than those of socket
    type having jaws that reciprocate radially.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66+,    for various types of radially reciprocation jaws of the socket type.


CLS 279/111
TXT Devices under subclass 110, the chuck provided with means to indicate the
    size of the opening between the jaws.


CLS 279/112
TXT Devices under subclass 110 wherein the jaws are reciprocated in a radial
    direction by a screw.


CLS 279/113
TXT Devices under subclass 112 comprising screws actuated by an annular rack
    engaging pinions on the screws.


CLS 279/114
TXT Devices under subclass 110 wherein the jaws are reciprocated by engagement
    with a rotary plate or other body having a spiral groove or rib.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for radially reciprocating jaws of the socket type which are
    actuated by threads on thereon and in engagement with threads on a sleeve.

    63,     for radially reciprocating jaws of the socket type actuated by a
    cone threaded to the jaws.


CLS 279/115
TXT Devices under subclass 114 wherein the spiral scroll has a gear engaged by
    a worm to rotate it.


CLS 279/116
TXT Devices under subclass 114 wherein the scroll is provided with a toothed
    annular rack engaged by a bevel-pinion to actuate said scroll.


CLS 279/117
TXT Devices under subclass 110 wherein a pinion meshes with a rack on the jaw
    to actuate said rack.


CLS 279/118
TXT Devices under subclass 110 provided with a toggle-lever mechanism to
    reciprocate the jaws.


CLS 279/119
TXT Devices under subclass 110 wherein a lever other than a toggle combination
    actuates the jaws.


CLS 279/120
TXT Devices under subclass 119 wherein the levers are actuated by a cone
    located inside the chuck.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for similar actuators for pivoted jaws.


CLS 279/121
TXT Devices under subclass 110 provided with a wedge adapted to close the jaws.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for radially reciprocating jaws of the socket-ztype chuck actuated
    by a threaded sleeve and wedge.


CLS 279/122
TXT Devices under subclass 110 provided with an external cone-sleeve adapted by
    its movement to wedge the jaws closed.


CLS 279/123
TXT Structure under subclass 110 of the jaw itself.


CLS 279/124
TXT With means to facilitate jaw removal:
    A device under subclass 123 having structure especially adapted for
    permitting ready detachment of the jaws from the holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    901,    for a cross-reference art collection of chuck or chuck jaw changing
    means.


CLS 279/125
TXT WITH SAFETY FEATURE:
    A device under the class definition having means to protect the integrity
    of the chuck or socket or the operator thereof, such as an interlock.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157,    for an accessory or component of a chuck or socket which has
    protection means such as overstress prevention.


CLS 279/126
TXT WITH MEASURING, INDICATING OR CONTROL MEANS:
    A device under the class definition having means to sense and/or signal the
    existence or degree of a specific parameter, such as gripping force of the
    means for making the connection, or means for providing condition
    responsive influence over the holder operating sequence.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.02,   for a fluid-pressure actuated chuck or socket with measuring,
    indicating or control means.


CLS 279/127
TXT DOUBLE ACTING:
    A device under the class definition having a means for making the
    connection with the facility to hold an object by either expanding therein
    or contracting thereon.


CLS 279/128
TXT WITH MAGNETIC OR ELECTROSTATIC MEANS:
    A device under the class definition wherein the means for making the
    connection utilizes electromagnetic force or electric attraction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for a chuck or socket having a magnetic holder.


CLS 279/129
TXT BY CENTRIFUGAL FORCE:
    A device under the class definition having means to utilize the resultant
    force due to angular acceleration when the chuck is rotated.


CLS 279/130
TXT To counterbalance jaws:
    A device under subclass 129 wherein the resultant force is used to maintain
    a constant gripping force by the means for making the connection on the
    object.


CLS 279/131
TXT To grip tool or workpiece:
    A device under subclass 129 wherein the resultant force is used to actuate
    the means for making the connection so as to grip the object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.2,    for an expanding chuck or socket having a rotary actuator which has
    a clutch or is of the self-actuating type.


CLS 279/132
TXT COMPENSATION FOR ECCENTRICITY:
    A device under the class definition wherein the means for making the
    connection includes means for centrally aligning an off-center object
    within the chuck.


CLS 279/133
TXT WITH CENTERING MEANS:
    A device under the class definition including means for ensuring that the
    object is concentrically aligned with the chuck.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    82,     Turning, subclass 170, is the generic place for a centerer, per se,
    not elsewhere classified.


CLS 279/134
TXT SEPARATE CHUCK-ACTUATING POWER SOURCE:
    A device under the class definition having means other than the spindle,
    such as a motor, for activating the chuck.


CLS 279/135
TXT Self contained:
    A device under subclass 134 wherein the activating means is housed within
    the chuck.


CLS 279/136
TXT FOR GEAR OR SPLINE HOLDING:
    A device under the class definition especially adapted to hold a toothed
    object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    for a chuck having a torsion mandrel.


CLS 279/137
TXT MORE THAN ONE SET OF GRIPPING MEANS:
    A device under the class definition having a plurality of distinct means
    (1) for making the connection so as to redundantly grip the object or (2)
    for gripping a plurality of objects.


CLS 279/138
TXT TORSION MANDREL:
    A device under the class definition wherein the holder is inserted into an
    internally splined hole in the object and has normally misaligned sections
    which are aligned during insertion, then allowed to return to their normal
    position to clamp the internal spline.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136,    for a device especially adapted to hold a toothed object.


CLS 279/139
TXT JAWS MOUNTED ON FLEXIBLE MEMBER; I.E.,  DIAPHRAGM:
    A device under the class definition wherein the means for making the
    connection is fastened to a generally thin, resiliently bendable member
    which is deformed in such a manner as to cause a radially inward deflection
    thereof into gripping contact with the object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.05,   for an expanding chuck or socket having jaws mounted on a flexible
    member; i.e. diaphragm.

    4.05,   for a fluid-pressure actuated chuck or socket having jaws mounted
    on a flexible member; i.e., diaphragm.


CLS 279/140
TXT MEANS TO PREVENT JAW LOOSENING:
    A device under the class definition having means to lock the means for
    making the connection into gripping contact with the object.


CLS 279/141
TXT MEMBER APPLIES AXIAL FORCE COMPONENT:
    A device under the class definition having means which exerts pressure on
    the object in a direction toward or away from the holder.


CLS 279/142
TXT ACCESSORY OR COMPONENT:
    A subcombination of a device, or a perfecting or ancillary device under the
    class definition not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 279/143
TXT Adapter:
    A device under subclass 142 which attaches to a chuck or socket to extend
    or enhance the utility of the chuck or socket.


CLS 279/144
TXT Drive conversion:
    A device under subclass 143 having means for attaching to a chuck or socket
    and which is especially adapted for changing a first configuration of
    spindle attachment means to a second configuration of spindle attachment
    means.


CLS 279/145
TXT For particular tool or workpiece:
    A device under subclass 143 having means which permits the chuck or socket
    to hold a specifically shaped, or sized object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136,    for a device especially adapted to hold a toothed object.


CLS 279/146
TXT Sliding cam chuck actuator:
    A device under subclass 142 having translatable collar means with cam means
    for effecting, via a mechanical linkage, movement of a drawbar which
    actuate a chuck or socket.


CLS 279/147
TXT Chuck key:
    A device under subclass 142 for manually and mechanically actuating the
    means for making the connection of the chuck into gripping contact with the
    object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134+,   for a device having a separate chuck-actuating power source.


CLS 279/148
TXT Safety feature; e.g., ejector, interlock:
    A device under subclass 147 having means to protect the physical integrity
    of the key or the operator thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    for a chuck having a safety feature.


CLS 279/149
TXT Key holder or attaching means:
    A device under subclass 147 having means for supporting the key in a nonuse
    position.


CLS 279/150
TXT Nonseparable or built in:
    A device under subclass 147 which is permanently attached to the chuck.


CLS 279/151
TXT Padded or cushioned jaw:
    A device under subclass 142 wherein the means for making the connection has
    relatively soft object-contacting surfaces.


CLS 279/152
TXT Jaw insert:
    A device under subclass 142 which is especially adapted for attachment to
    the means for making the connection for making gripping contact with the
    object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43.6,   for a split resilient socket having jaw pads or insert.

    46.6,   for an unitary socket with spring biased jaws having jaw pads or
    insert.


CLS 279/153
TXT Machinable jaw:
    A device under subclass 152 which is specifically adapted to have material
    removed therefrom in such a manner as to be able to grip a particularly
    shaped, or sized object.


CLS 279/154
TXT Locking or positioning means:
    A device under subclass 153 including means (1) to hold the machinable jaw
    while material is removed therefrom, or (2) to position the jaw for a
    machining process.


CLS 279/155
TXT Tool or workpiece ejector:
    A device under subclass 142 having means to separate the object from the
    chuck or socket.


CLS 279/156
TXT Tool or work stop or locator:
    A device under subclass 142 having means to limit the depth of insertion of
    the object in the chuck or socket.


CLS 279/157
TXT Protection means; e.g., cover, seal, overstress prevention, air blast:A
    device under subclass 142 which includes means for preserving  the physical
    integrity, for limiting access thereto or for indicating tampering on the
    chuck or socket.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43.9,   for a feed type socket with means to exclude contaminants.

    46.9,   for a socket having spring-biased jaws and including means to
    exclude contaminants.


CLS 279/158
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:
    A device under the class definition having means to hold a tool or
    workpiece not provided for above.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 279/900
TXT ADAPTED FOR AUTOMATIC TOOL CHANGER:
    Cross-reference art collection of documents under the class definition
    especially for use with a machine that executes a programmed sequence of
    operations which include changing objects, or chucks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    483,    Tool Changing, subclasses 16+ for a machine tool combined with a
    tool transfer means.


CLS 279/901
TXT CHUCK OR CHUCK JAW CHANGING MEANS:
    Cross-reference art collection of documents under the class definition to
    an ancillary tool especially adapted for removing or installing a chuck or
    a part thereof from a support, or the means for making the connection from
    the chuck.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    483,    Tool Changing, subclasses 20 for a workpiece turning machine tool
    combined with a workpiece holder (e.g., chuck, etc.) transfer means.


CLS 279/902
TXT KEYLESS TYPE SOCKET:
    Cross-reference art collection of documents under the class definition
    which include a depression for receiving the object, and means for making
    the connection which translate into gripping contact with the object upon
    manual rotation of a sleeve actuator.


CLS 279/903
TXT NEEDLE ROLLER TYPE SOCKET:
    Cross-reference art collection of documents under the class definition
    which include a depression for receiving the object, and cylinders
    extending therein having central axes generally inclined in such a manner
    as to draw the object into the depression when rotated thereabout.


CLS 279/904
TXT QUICK CHANGE SOCKET:
    Cross-reference art collection of documents under the class definition
    which include a depression for receiving the object, and a retractable
    projection or detent which extends into the depression to lock the object
    therein.


CLS 279/905
TXT With ball detent:
    Cross-reference art collection of documents under subclass 904 wherein the
    projection is a sphere.


CLS 279/906
TXT SELF GRASPING SOCKET:
    Cross-reference art collection of documents under the class definition
    which include a depression for receiving the object, and means for making
    the connection therein which is actuated by insertion of the object.


CLS 279/907
TXT WASHER TYPE JAW OR ACTUATOR:
    Cross-reference art collection of documents under the class definition
    wherein the means for making the connection includes at least one thin,
    generally flat member having an aperture therein through which the object
    passes, the sidewalls of the aperture being laterally displaced into
    gripping contact with the object.


CLS 280/
TTL LAND VEHICLES

CLS 280/
TXT This class includes vehicles, adapted to travel on land and not elsewhere
    classified.  The term "vehicle" includes some form of running gear as an
    essential element, which running gear usually supports a load carrier, but
    may support a load directly, and adapts the vehicle to move over a surface.
     The basic purpose of those devices commonly called vehicles is the
    carrying of a load, either freight or passengers, from one place to
    another.  The idea of towing a load, as by locomotives, traction engines,
    or tractors, has also long been associated with the term "vehicle."

    (1)     Note.  The term "vehicle" also includes devices that are for
    special purposes identical with those in which a form of running gear is an
    essential element, and further includes such attachments for vehicles as
    are not limited in their position to any particular part of the vehicle.

    (2)     Note.  This class includes the combination between running gear and
    load carriers not otherwise classified.

    (3)     Note.  The running gear of various portable machines is also
    included, when the machine is not claimed or is claimed by name only, and
    the running gear is capable of general use.  See also the definition of
    subclass 400 of this class, (1) Note.  However, for the specified line
    relevant to agricultural implements and harvesters, see (5) Note below.

    (4)     Note.  The relationship of vehicles which are primarily intended
    for transportation purposes to working devices of various types, which may
    or may not travel while performing their primary function, and to various
    related arts is discussed in the following sections:

    (5)     Note.  Where the claimed running gear is disclosed solely for use
    with a portable agricultural implement or harvester, proper classification
    is in the appropriate harvester or agricultural implement class.  See
    section III and the search notes of subclass 400.

    OUTLINE OF NOTES





    I.      COMBINED WITH EXTERNAL MEANS OR DEVICES:

    (A)     Remote control (B) With external loading or unloading means (C)
    With rails or tracks

    II.     CONVERTIBLE:

    (A)     To      nonvehicular devices

    (1)     To work platforms

    (2)     Miscellaneous

    (B)     To different types of vehicle

    III.    EARTH OR TRAVELED SURFACE TRAVERSING AND WORKING OR TREATING
    DEVICES:

    IV.     SELF LOADING AND/OR UNLOADING VEHICLES AND PORTABLE MATERIAL
    HAND-LING DEVICES:

    (A)     Traversing type

    (B)     Miscellaneous

    V.      VEHICLE TYPES OTHERWISE CLASSIFIED:

    (A)     Water

    (B)     Rail

    (C)     Motor

    (D)     Receptacle and support types

    (E)     Miscellaneous

    VI.     VEHICLE PARTS, INSTALLATIONS, ATTACHMENTS AND FURNISHINGS:

    (A)     Bodies

    (B)     Wheels

    (C)     Miscellaneous

    VII.    MISCELLANEOUS NOTES AND INDEX TO ALL NOTES TO THE MAIN CLASS
    DEFINITION:

    NOTES




    I.      COMBINED WITH EXTERNAL MEANS OR DEVICES:

    (A)     Remote control.



    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclass 384 for drop bombs with
    direction controlling means.

    114,    Ships, subclasses 312 for external control of submarines; 21.1 for
    external control of torpedoes; and 144, for external control of ships.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 2.7 for a motor vehicle having its motor
    supplied from an external source; subclasses 167+ for a motor vehicle
    provided with means for controlling its operation which is responsive to
    electromagnetic radiation, magnetic force, or sound waves received from a
    source, or reflected from an object or surface, which is located apart from
    the vehicle; and subclass 401 for a motor vehicle having steering gear of
    the power assisted type and wherein the operation of the power steering is
    controlled by a terrestrial guide.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 75+ and the classes specified in the Notes
    thereto for apparatus and devices for controlling aircraft and other mobile
    craft.  See subclasses 175+ and the classes specified in the Notes thereto
    for the classes which provide for the remote control by electrical means of
    aircraft and other vehicles and for a statement as to the lines between the
    classes.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 16 for electric motors
    for steering where a rudder or steering means is claimed broadly, with or
    without radio control of said motor.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 6+ for a
    vehicle responsive parking meter and subclasses 1+ for an horological
    device acted upon by a disparate device.

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclasses 1+ for vehicle indication, operation, or guidance which includes
    a computation.  Note, where significant vehicle structure is recited,
    classification is in the appropriate vehicle class.

    (B)     With external loading or unloading means.



    SEARCH CLASS:

    258,    Railway Mail Delivery, for delivery to or from moving vehicles.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclass 20 for wheeled stretchers
    for ambulances.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 333 to 402 for the
    combination of a vehicle of the load transporting type and means external
    of the vehicle for loading or unloading the vehicle.



    (C)     With rails or tracks.



    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 97+ for wheel mounts for panel
    hangers, travellers and/or tracks; and 107, for wheels therefor.

    104,    Railways, for combined tracks and railway rolling stock.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 10+ for a fire escape
    car carrier with a stationary strand and subclasses 36+ for a track mounted
    device of that class.

    186,    Merchandising, subclasses 27+ and 45+ for wheeled carriers for
    store and dining room service, respectively.

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles.

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclass 312 for traveling bridge cranes and
    subclasses 71+ for over-head traversing hoists.

    291,    Track Sanders.

    414,    Material or Article Handling,  subclasses 595+ for an elevator or
    hoist and loading or unloading means therefor and wherein the elevator or
    hoist is on an inclined tracks.

    II.     CONVERTIBLE:

    This class provides for vehicles having both wheels and runners (subclasses
    7.12+ and 8+) for those convertible to or from plural occupant forms
    (subclass 7.16) or to or from occupant propulsion (subclass 7.17), for
    miscellaneous convertible velocipedes (subclasses 1.188 and 7.1+), for
    miscellaneous convertible to nonvehicular forms (subclasses 30+) for
    vehicles convertible to work platforms by body leveling (subclasses 840) or
    by vertical adjustment of the running gear (subclasses 43+), and for
    handle-propelled vehicles convertible to wheeled devices having no load
    transporting function (subclass 47.18) and for miscellaneous convertible
    articulated vehicles (subclasses 415.1).



    (A)     To nonvehicular devices.

    (1)     To work platforms.



    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 111+ for mechanism
    operated transportable towers.

    89,     Ordinance, subclass 40 for field ordinance mounts.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 27, 28, 161 and 455 for handling
    devices mounted on railway rolling stock.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power Driven, subclasses 300+ and 506+ for a conveyor
    mounted on a vehicle.

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclasses 301+ for auxiliary supports for
    traversing hoists.

    (2)     Miscellaneous



    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 1+ for a chair or seat convertible
    from wheel mounted to nonwheel mounted device by reorienting the chair or
    seat and subclasses 130+ for a chair or seat having alternately usable
    supporting devices, as wheels, rockers, suspending hangers and the like.



    (B)     To different types of vehicles

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 50 for aircraft propulsion and steering on
    land or water.

    III.    EARTH OR TRAVELED SURFACE, TRAVERSING AND WORKING OR TREATING
    DEVICES:

    These devices commonly perform their main function of physically treating
    or affecting the surface while traveling and are equipped with running gear
    generally equivalent to the vehicular type.  Machines which are portable
    but which have uses unrelated to the idea of transporting, supporting or
    handling material or distributing material during traverse are seldom
    included in this class, but will be found in the class appropriate to the
    type of work performed, e.g., agitating, ironing, comminuting, etc.
    However, subcombinations pertaining to the running gear of various art
    devices may be classified in Class 280 if of general utility.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 78+ for
    street sweepers; and 340, for vacuum sweepers having vehicular features.

    37,     Excavating, appropriate subclasses, especially 4+ for self-loading
    vehicles, 196+ for automobile mounted roadway snow excavators and 124+ for
    wheeled scoops.

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 10.1+ for a harvester driven by a motor or
    tractor; 253+, 258+, 269+, and 272+, for wheeled cutters; and 380+, 384+,
    and 396+, for wheeled horse rakes, subclasses 6+ for multiple trailing or
    ganged machines.

    111,    Planting, appropriate subclasses for planters.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 669+ and the subclasses there noted for
    earth working apparatus with a wheel or supported on a wheeled frame.

    291,    Track Sanders.

    IV.     SELF LOADING AND/OR UNLOADING VEHICLES AND PORTABLE MATERIAL
    HAND-LING DEVICES:

    (A)     Traversing type. The load is usually distributed over or gathered
    from the area traversed by the vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 300+ and 506+ for loading
    machine type conveyors.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 185 for ambulant article dispensing
    devices.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 608+ for ambulant dispensers.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 130+ and 146+
    for sprayers with ambulant discharge and supply; subclasses 722+ for
    sprayers with stationary supply and ambulant discharge; subclasses 650+ for
    a container for nonfluid material and means for scattering or strewing the
    material, in which the container may be ambulant.

    258,    Railway Mail Delivery, for material delivery to and from moving
    vehicles.

    291,    Track Sanders.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or  Apparatus, subclasses 101+ for road
    material distributors with treatment means.

    (B)     Miscellaneous. These devices include vehicles which are loaded or
    unloaded while stationary also handling mechanisms which are ordinarily
    used to perform their chief function while stationary, running gear being
    provided for convenience in moving the device from place to place.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 27 for self propelled power
    tools; 28, for locomotive type turntable carried power plant; 161, for
    mining machine trucks; 239+, for railway cars with dumping bodies; and 455
    for railway cars with rotary turntable.

    114,    Ships, subclasses 27+ for dumping and unloading scows.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, subclasses 24+ for fire engines.

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclasses 222+ for industrial fork lift trucks.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power Driven, subclasses 300+ and 506+ for a conveyor
    mounted on a vehicle.

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclasses 180+ for hoists removably mounted on
    a vehicle; subclass 901, a collection of cross-referenced patents, for
    portable, dolley-type hoists or cranes; subclasses 328+ for a
    self-propelled carrier for an overhead hoist; and subclasses 343+ for
    surface type an overhead traversing hoists.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 390.7, 391+, and 403+
    for a reeling device mounted on a vehicle.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 2+ for hoisting trucks; and subclasses 279+ and 323+ for
    vehicles supporting a load hauling or hoisting cable drum.

    298,    Land Vehicles:  Dumping, for dumping vehicles of the land type.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 467+ for a self-loading or
    unloading vehicle.



    V.      VEHICLE TYPES OTHERWISE CLASSIFIED:

    (A)     Water.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, for boats.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 50 for aircraft propulsion and steering on
    water; 101, for amphibious landing gear; and 105+, for water landing gear.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclasses 65+ for skimming and
    walking devices for use on water.



    (B)     Rail Vehicles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 312 for
    ambulant air draft cleaners with fixed guide.

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 97+ and 107 for wheel mounts and
    wheels for panel hangers, travelers or tracks.

    104,    Railways, for rail vehicles combined with tracks.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 205+ for a fire escape
    car carrier with a stationary strand, subclasses 36+ for a track mounted
    device of that class.

    186,    Merchandising, subclasses 27+ and 45+ for wheeled carriers for
    store and dining room service, respectively.

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclasses 316+ for traveling cranes and
    subclasses 71+ for overhead traversing hoists.

    291,    Track Sanders.



    (C)     Motor vehicles.



    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 340 for self
    propelled vacuum cleaners.

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 10.1+ for a harvester driven by a motor or
    tractor.

    60,     Power Plants, and see search notes in main class definition for
    other motors and engines.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 26.1+ for railway vehicle having
    a power plant for propulsion thereof.

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 292 and the subclasses there noted for
    earth working apparatus with some specific propulsion means.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, appropriate subclasses for a land vehicle which is
    provided with a motor for propelling it.

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles.

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclasses 180+ for a traversing hoist removably
    mounted on a vehicle; subclass 901, a collection of cross referenced
    patents, for ambulant dolley-type hoists or cranes; subclass 328 for
    self-propelled cable-trolley hoist; and subclasses 344+ for surface
    self-propelled traversing hoists.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 12.1+ for combined heat and power
    plants for fire engines, vehicles, cars, etc.

    440,    Marine Propulsion, for boats and ships combined with power plants
    for propulsion.



    (D)     Receptacle and support type. The distinction between receptacles
    and supports provided with wheels and land vehicles has not been clearly
    established, and many warehouse and factory type trucks and work supports
    will be found in class 280, Land Vehicles, and in the classes listed below
    without any stated line or perceptible distinction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 111+ for extensible
    or movable portable towers, and subclass 143 for a building with a
    transportation feature, and see the reference to Class 105 in the class
    definition of that class.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, subclass 25 for wheeled water towers.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, appropriate subclasses for
    wheeled supports of that class.

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclass 18, for articles of
    baggage provided with wheels where specific structure of the baggage item
    is claimed.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, appropriate subclasses, for wheeled racks.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 390.7, 391+, and 403+
    for a reeling device mounted on a vehicle.

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses, for wheeled supports, especially
    subclass 98, for wheeled golf bag stands; and 129 for wheeled receptacle
    stands.



    (E)     Miscellaneous.



    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 625+ for field stretchers.

    27,     Undertaking, subclass 27 for casket carriers.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, subclasses 24 for fire engines; and 25 for
    wheeled water towers.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 63+ for a wheeled
    ladder, scaffold or escape with erection means.

    244,    Aeronautics, for aircraft.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclass 20 for wheeled ambulance
    stretchers.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 5+ for occupant propelled walker or
    skater frames having a seat, usable by the occupant intermediate periods of
    walking or skating.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclass 185 for a wheeled article
    carrier adapted to be propelled through a tube by a fluid current.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, appropriate subclasses for wheeled toys.

    472,    Amusement Devices, subclasses 1+ for a skater support or walker
    vehicle restricted to a         circuitous path, i.e., a roundabout,
    particularly subclasses 14+ for an occupant propelled roundabout.

    482,    Exercise Devices, particularly subclasses 66+ for an occupant
    propelled support frame having movement facilitating feature, e.g., wheels,
    runners, etc., for foot travel.



    VI.     VEHICLE PARTS, INSTALLATIONS, ATTACHMENTS AND FURNISHINGS:

    (A)     Bodies.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 9 for berths and bunks; 94, for automobile cribs;
    and 118+, for vehicle attached beds.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 239+ for railway car dumping
    bodies; 314+, for railway sleeping cars; 327, for railway dining cars; 328,
    for merchandizing car bodies; 329.1+, for passenger car bodies; and 355+,
    for freight car bodies.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclasses 539+ for package and
    article carriers with complementary body parts.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 15+ for hand
    bars and hand barrows.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, appropriate subclasses for seat of general
    utility.  This class (280) takes the combination of one or more seats and a
    vehicle.  See the search notes in the class definition of Class 297 for the
    line.

    298,    Land Vehicles:  Dumping.



    (B)     Wheels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 18+ for casters and 107, for
    wheels for traveling panels.

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 322 for grain wheels and casters for
    harvesters.

    152,    Resilient Tires, and Wheels, especially subclasses 450+ for
    pneumatic tires.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 391+ for a trundle reel.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 103+ for aircraft landing gear.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 2+ for resilient mountings for wheels.

    295,    Railway Wheels and Axles.

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles.

    305,    Wheel Substitutes for Land  Vehicles, for wheel substitutes, per
    se.  Class 305 takes patents claiming a vehicle and wheel substitute
    combination, where the vehicle is only nominally recited in the claims.

    384,    Bearings, appropriate subclasses for wheel bearings and journal
    boxes.



    (C)     Miscellaneous.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, see main class definition for search notes on motors
    and engines.

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 44+ for a
    horizontal planar supporting surface supported on a vehicle.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, see reference to Class 60, Power
    Plants, above.

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclasses 208+ for antiskid devices;
    and 416+, for tire inflating devices with vehicle carried supply.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 44+ for a heat exchanger installed on a
    vehicle, and appropriate subclasses for a heat exchanger, per se.

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 2+ for vehicle brakes.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 30+ for clutches.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 19.5 for vehicle attached
    special receptacles and packages.

    213,    Railway Draft Appliances.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclasses 400+ for vehicle attached
    package and article carriers.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 12.3 for combined heat and power plants
    for vehicles; and 28+, for vehicle heating systems.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 560+ for resilient supports; and subclasses
    637+ for machinery supports.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 418+ for attached vehicle jacks, including retractable ground
    supports and props.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    carburetors.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 2+ for vehicle springs.

    278,    Land Vehicles:  Animal Draft Appliances.

    293,    Vehicle Fenders, subclasses 102+ for vehicle bumpers.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 61+ for vehicle lighting.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 227+ for apparatus
    particularly adapted for charging or discharging a facility comprising one
    or more sites for the parking of wheeled vehicles.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 231+ for pumps attached to vehicles and actuated
    thereby.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 69+ for vehicle ventilation.

    VII.    MISCELLANEOUS NOTES AND INDEX TO ALL NOTES TO THE MAIN CLASS
    DEFINITION:

    5,      Beds, sections V (E) and VI (A).

    14,     Bridges, subclass 72 for unattached gang-ways.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, sections III, V (B) and
    V (C).

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, sections I (C), V(B) and VI (B).

    27,     Undertaking, section V (E).

    37,     Excavating, section III.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), sections II (A) and V (D).

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 208+ for a platform adjustments, and
    sections III, V (C) and VI (B).

    60,     Power Plants, sections V (C) and VI (C).

    70,     Locks, subclasses 259+ for locks for spare wheels.

    89,     Ordnance, section II (A) (1).

    102,    Ammunition and Explosive Devices, section I (A).

    104,    Railways, subclasses 44 for automobile turntables; 45, for portable
    turntables; and sections I (C) and V (B).

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, sections II (A) (1), IV (B) V (B), V (C) and
    VI (A).

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces section VI (C).

    111,    Planting, section III.

    114,    Ships, sections I (A), IV (B) and V (A).

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, section VI (C).

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 899+ for fluid handling apparatus having
    a vehicle or part thereof as a support or casing.

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, sections VI (B) and VI (C).

    165,    Heat Exchange, section VI (C).

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, sections IV (B), V (D), and V (E).

    172,    Earth Working, sections III and V (C).

    180,    Motor Vehicles, sections I (A) and V (C).

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, sections I (C),  V (B), (D), (E).

    186,    Merchandising, sections I (C) and V (B).

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    section IV (B).

    188,    Brakes, section VI (C).

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, section V (D).

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, sections I (C) and V (C).

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, section VI (C).

    198,    Conveyors:  Power Driven, sections II (A) (1), IV (A) and IV (B).

    206,    Special Receptacles or Package, section VI (C).

    211,    Supports:  Racks, section V (D).

    212,    Traversing Hoists, sections I (C), II (A) (1), IV (B), V (B) and V
    (C).

    213,    Railway Draft Appliances, section VI (C).

    220,    Receptacles, section V (D).

    221,    Article Dispensing, section IV (A).

    222,    Dispensing, section IV (A).

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, sections VI (A) and VI (C).

    237,    Heating Systems, sections V (C) and VI (C).

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, section IV (A).

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, sections IV (B), V (D), and VI (B).

    244,    Aeronautics, sections I (A), II (B), V (A), V (E) and VI (B).

    248,    Supports, sections V (D) and VI (C).

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    sections IV (B) and VI (C).

    258,    Railway Mail Delivery, sections I (B) and IV (A).

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, section VI (C).

    267,    Spring Devices, sections VI (B) and VI (C).

    278,    Land Vehicles:  Animal Draft Appliances, section VI (C).

    291,    Track Sanders, sections I (C), III, IV (A) and V (B).

    293,    Vehicle Fenders, section VI (C).

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, section VI (A).

    295,    Railway Wheels and Axles, section VI (B).

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, sections I (B), V (E) and VI (A).

    298,    Land Vehicles:  Dumping, sections IV (B) and VI (A).

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, section VI (B).

    305,    Wheel Substitutes for Land Vehicles, section VI (B).

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, section I (A).

    384,    Bearings, section VI B.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, sections I  (B), I (C), IV (B), and
    VI (C).

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 97-99, 111-114 and 201+ for
    wheeled toys, and section V (E).

    454,    Ventilation, section VI (C).


CLS 280/1
TXT Vehicles under class definition not provided for in the subclasses
    hereunder.


CLS 280/1.12
TXT Vehicles under subclass 828 in which the object simulated is an aircraft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    827,    for aircraft simulations which are pushed by the occupant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 230+ for a toy aircraft having
    wheels.


CLS 280/1.13
TXT Vehicles under subclass 827 in which the object simulated is a living
    figure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.22,   for figure simulating velocipedes which are adapted to be pushed
    along by the occupant.

    200+,   for occupant propelled vehicles in which the simulation is not
    claimed, and see the definition of subclass 827 for the line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 61 for simulated horses which progress along a
    track.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 269+ for a wheeled figure toy.


CLS 280/1.14
TXT Vehicles under subclass 1.13 in which means is provided for making a sound,
    usually simulating the cry of the creature represented.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 270+ for a wheeled figure toy
    having sounder; subclass 297 for a figure toy having a sounder; subclasses
    188+ for air operated sounders; and subclasses 397+ for other sounding toys.

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclass 98 for a rockable,
    nonprogressing, animal simulation amusement device having rider seat means
    and including animal sound simulation.


CLS 280/1.16
TXT Vehicles under subclass 1.13 in which the simulation is that of the figure
    drawing a carriage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 275+ for a toy representing a
    vehicle and an external figure.


CLS 280/1.165
TXT Vehicles under subclass 1.16 in which the figure as a whole or parts of the
    figure are so connected with the remainder of the structure as to have
    relative movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.201+, for figures having moving parts where no carriage is provided and
    where the rider's body does not move.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclass 99 for a rockable,
    nonprogressing, animal simulation amusement device having rider seat means
    and a relatively movable animal part.


CLS 280/1.167
TXT Vehicles under subclass 1.165 in which the legs of the figure move relative
    to the trunk of the figure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.204,  for figure simulating velocipedes having moving legs but no
    carriage, the movement of the legs not being necessary to the movement of
    the vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclass 276 for a toy representing a
    vehicle and an external walking figure.


CLS 280/1.173
TXT Vehicles under subclass 1.13 having either or both (1) more than one
    simulated figure, or (2) more than one occupant support.

    (1)     Note.  A composite figure having two sides each comprising a
    separate cut-out is regarded as a single figure if the sides are rigidly
    secured to each other or the same seat or framework.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203,    for nonsimulating occupant propelled vehicles with side car.

    222,    for nonsimulating occupant propelled vehicles having plural movable
    occupant supports.

    231+,   for nonsimulating vehicles propelled by plural occupants.

    273,    for nonsimulating occupant-propelled vehicles having one-wheel
    controlled steering and providing for plural occupants.


CLS 280/1.175
TXT Vehicles under subclass 1.13 which are mounted upon rockers so as to cause
    the vehicle to travel on a supporting surface, either by reason of plural
    rockers which may be extended or retracted relative to one another or by
    reason of brakes, rollers or swing arms applied to or cooperating with the
    rockers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.193,  for platform rocker type, rider-body-actuated velocipede type
    simulations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclasses 95+ for a rockable,
    nonprogressing, animal simulation amusement device having rider seat means
    and which may travel backward and forward on a platform.


CLS 280/1.177
TXT Vehicles under subclass 1.175 having longitudinally spaced rockers
    constructed to move relative to each other so as to cause the vehicle to
    move along a supporting surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.181+, for figures which progress by transferring the weight from one
    swinging leg or support to another, the legs or supports not having rocker
    bottoms.


CLS 280/1.181
TXT Vehicles under subclass 1.13 which progress by advancing supporting means
    alternately either at opposite sides, as in walking (this subclass) or at
    opposite ends, as in galloping (indented subclasses), or which have an
    alternately advanced and retracted pusher.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for nonsimulating, nonwheeled, stepper type vehicles.

    1.177,  for similar figures which have rocker bottoms on the swinging
    supports, on which they rock forward and back as the supports swing.

    218,    for nonsimulation type wheeled vehicles having walking or galloping
    progression.

    219,    for nonsimulation type  vehicles having an alternately advanced and
    retracted pusher.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 187 for a motor vehicle which includes one
    or more ski-like or runner members and wherein the vehicle is provided with
    at least one surface-engaging propulsion element and further wherein the
    element has a shuffling movement along the surface which supports it; and
    subclasses 8.1+ for a motor vehicle having a special driving device in the
    nature of a stepper.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 316, 317, and 377 for a
    walking figure toy, and see the Search Notes under subclass 377 for other
    related loci.


CLS 280/1.182
TXT Vehicles under subclass 1.181 having supports attached to the occupant
    supporting portion at longitudinally spaced points and arranged to swing
    alternately. If the supports are provided with wheels, they have means to
    prevent retrograde movement, or they are driven positively by the relative
    movement of the supports.


CLS 280/1.183
TXT Vehicles under subclass 1.182 in which the relative spreading apart from
    and approach toward each other of the supports is brought about by the
    action of the rider's weight upon the saddle or the stirrups, the saddle or
    stirrups having relatively movable connection with the parts to be moved.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218,    for similarly driven wheeled vehicles which claim no simulation
    features.


CLS 280/1.184
TXT Vehicles under subclass 1.182 in which there is present some means, in
    addition to the two relatively approaching and separating supports to
    engage the ground or surface over which the vehicle moves, either to
    stabilize the figure, assist in propelling it, or impart a different type
    of motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.175,  for progressing rocker type simulations having a similar ground
    engaging means.

    1.188,  for other velocipede type simulations convertible to have more than
    one kind of motion.

    219,    for nonsimulation vehicles propelled by means intermittently
    engaging the ground or floor.


CLS 280/1.186
TXT Velocipede simulations under subclass 1.13 in which the occupant is not
    seated on the figure in the manner in which a horse is ordinarily ridden.

    (1)     Note.  Arrangements in which the occupant is supported within the
    figure, stands on it or is seated in a chair which does not take the place
    of the back of the figure or serve as a mere substitute for a saddle are
    included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.16+,  for velocipede simulations in which the occupant is seated in a
    vehicle purporting to be drawn by the figure.


CLS 280/1.188
TXT Vehicles under subclass 1.13 in which the vehicle may be converted to a
    vehicle of the nonsimulating type because of the removability of the
    figure, or changed to a nonprogressive type, or in which the manner for
    causing progression may be changed or the vehicle or parts thereof may be
    made larger or smaller to suit occupants of different sizes.

    (1)     Note.  Mere change in the adjustment of relatively movable linkages
    or springs to control the force necessary to be supplied is not included
    unless the point at which the rider's effort is applied is also changed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.15+,  for convertible nonsimulating velocipede type vehicles which are
    occupant propelled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclasses 95+ for a rockable,
    nonprogressing, animal simulation amusement device having rider seat means
    and which may be convertible to another type of device.


CLS 280/1.189
TXT Vehicles under subclass 1.13 claimed in combination with auxiliary features
    such as brakes, rider mounting steps, velocipede pushing handles, props,
    fixed guides, etc., not essential to the primary function of the
    velocipedes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.14,   for simulation type velocipedes combined with noise makers.

    1.16+,  for figure and carriage simulating velocipedes.

    1.181+, for brakes designed to prevent retrograde motion of velocipedes
    which advance by alternately advancing and drawing together independently
    moving ground engaging means.

    1.188,  for simulation type vehicles having means for converting them to
    other forms or modes of operation.

    264,    for nonsimulating type occupant propelled vehicles having combined
    brakes and steering means.

    288.4,  for attachments, for occupant propelled vehicles, especially
    subclass 291 for steps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclass 101 for a rockable,
    nonprogressing, animal simulation amusement device having rider seat means
    and combined with a disparate device.


CLS 280/1.191
TXT Vehicles under subclass 1.13 in which the advance of the vehicle along the
    ground is or may be accompanied by movement of the rider's body.  The
    movement usually actuates the propelling mechanism or assists in actuating
    it, but it may be merely a bouncing movement on spring mounted saddles or
    figure parts which are unrelated to the propelling means of the velocipede.

    (1)     Note.  Motion of merely the feet or arms of the rider is not
    included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.175+, for rocker type progression caused by body motion.

    1.181+, for stepping or galloping type progression caused by body movement.

    1.201+, for movable figure devices in which the occupant's body is not
    shifted.

    226.1,  for nonsimulating vehicles whose propulsion is actuated by the
    occupant's movable seat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclasses 95+ for a rockable,
    nonprogressing, animal simulation amusement device having rider seat means.


CLS 280/1.192
TXT Vehicles under subclass 1.191 in which there is also movement of simulating
    portions of the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.181+, for figure movement involving alternately advancing supports for
    causing progression.

    1.201+, for figure movement without rider body movement.


CLS 280/1.193
TXT Vehicles under subclass 1.192 in which the movement of a rocker supported
    figure relative to a supporting platform is transmitted to progressing
    means for the platform.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.175+, for progressing rocker-mounted figure-simulating vehicles in which
    the rockers engage the ground or floor directly.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclasses 95+ for a rockable,
    nonprogressing, animal simulation amusement device having rider seat means
    and which may travel on a platform.


CLS 280/1.194
TXT Vehicles under subclass 1.192 having means which produce progression of the
    figure actuated by either the feet or the hands of the rider, through parts
    relatively movably connected to the propulsion system either as the primary
    actuating means or as an aid to rider body-actuation.  In the former case,
    the figure must be interconnected to the propulsion mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221+,   for nonsimulating velocipedes having a movable occupant support and
    additional propulsion means.


CLS 280/1.195
TXT Velocipedes under subclass 1.192 in which steering means comprising a
    single rigid member or a plurality of rigid members linked together passes
    through the moving figure body in such a way as to allow vertical movement
    of the body relative to the point at which the steering impulse is
    transmitted to the running gear of the velocipede.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263+,   for steering for occupant propelled vehicles generally.

    771+,   for occupant steered vehicles generally.


CLS 280/1.196
TXT Vehicles under subclass 1.192 in which the figure pivots about a horizontal
    axis extending through the chassis and through a fixed point in the central
    portion of the trunk of the figure, the motion of the rider's body being
    transmitted to a drive for the vehicle through the figure motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.175+, for rocking velocipedes which progress with the rockers in contact
    with the supporting surface.

    1.193,  for platform rocker type velocipedes.


CLS 280/1.201
TXT Vehicles under subclass 1.13 having the entire figure or body parts
    thereof, such as ears, tails, heads, legs, mounted so as to be movable
    relative to the base, running gear or other parts, usually for simulating
    their natural movement on the living animal.  Movement to provide access
    openings is included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.165+, for carriage combined animal figures with movable body parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclass 99 for a rockable,
    nonprogressing, animal simulation amusement device having rider seat means
    and a relatively movable animal part.


CLS 280/1.202
TXT Vehicles under subclass 1.201 in which the foreparts of the figure are
    movably mounted for steering, being directly or indirectly connected to the
    turning portion of the running gear.

    (1)     Note.  Either the head or feet, or both, may turn for steering
    (this subclass) or the entire forepart of the animal may be hinged to the
    body along a vertical line (indented subclass).

    (2)     Note.  If the head is nonrigidly connected to the steering running
    gear, it must transmit the steering impulse.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.201,  for heads relatively movably connected to independent steering
    mechanism.  See (2) Note.

    1.206,  for rein steered figure velocipedes.

    263+,   for steering means for nonsimulating occupant propelled vehicles.

    771+,   for occupant steered vehicles generally.


CLS 280/1.203
TXT Vehicles under subclass 1.202 in which the steering body foreparts are
    hinged to the figure's body hindparts along a generally vertical line
    falling between the front and rear legs or supports of the figure.


CLS 280/1.204
TXT Vehicles under subclass 1.201 in which the legs move relatively to the
    trunk of the figure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for nonsimulating vehicles having walking supports without wheels.

    1.167,  for carriage-combined animal figures with relatively movable legs.

    1.181+, for figures in which the legs support the figure on the ground or
    floor and have relative movement to cause the figure to progress as by
    walking or galloping.

    1.192+, for leg movement which is part of the drive mechanism in rider body
    motion types or which serves to accommodate figure body motion to a running
    gear which has no corresponding motion.

    218,    for nonsimulating vehicles of the occupant-propelled type having
    alternately advancing wheeled supports.


CLS 280/1.206
TXT Vehicles under subclass 1.13 in which the propulsion of the vehicle or the
    turning of the wheels or supports for steering is caused by the rider's
    pulling on the reins.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass, the head does not turn relative to the
    body, but patents from subclasses 1.201+ are cross-referenced herein when
    the reins are relatively movably connected to the steering point, even
    though the head also turns.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.202+, for figures in which the head or fore-parts turn relatively to the
    body, the steered ground engaging means usually being rigid with the head
    or forefeet.  The head may be turned by pulling on the reins.  See (1) Note.


CLS 280/1.207
TXT Vehicles under subclass 1.13 which are propelled or steered by movement of
    the rider's feet in stirrups attached to the figure.

    (1)     Note.  The stirrups must be equivalent to the stirrups of a horse
    saddle to the extent of being movably suspended from the saddle or seat
    portion of the simulated figure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.183,  for foot or saddle actuated galloping type velocipedes.


CLS 280/1.208
TXT Velocipedes under subclass 1.13 in which the figure is constructed as a
    shell or in which a solid body has been provided with one or more openings
    or cavities, usually to accommodate operating parts of the progressing
    mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  Bodies having apertures to receive nonmoving parts which fit
    more or less closely therein are not considered to be hollow within the
    meaning of this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.195,  for bodies having slots to permit rocking movement of the body
    relative to rigid or rigid link steering means passing therethrough.


CLS 280/1.21
TXT Vehicles under subclass 1.1 which simulate aircraft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.12,   for aircraft simulating velocipedes having occupant operated means
    for propulsion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 230+ for a toy aircraft having
    wheels.


CLS 280/1.22
TXT Vehicles under subclass 827 in which the simulation is that of a living
    figure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.13+,  for velocipedes of this type having means operated by the occupant
    for propelling them.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 97+ and 115+ for figure toys.


CLS 280/1.23
TXT Attendant propelled:

    Vehicles under subclass 827 which additionally include devices particularly
    adapted for the pushing or pulling of the vehicle by a nonoccupant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, for hand pushed toys.


CLS 280/1.5
TXT A vehicle under the class definition having a means adapted to engage the
    body of a walking attendant other than means adapted to be engaged by the
    hands or feet, the body engaging means being for the purpose of propelling
    the vehicle or sustaining some of the load carried by the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  An agricultural implement claimed by name only is considered
    a vehicle for purposes of this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47.11,  for a vehicle wheel steered by a walking attendant.

    47.17+, for handle propelled tiltable vehicles.

    47.34+, for handle propelled stable vehicles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    54,     Harness, for animal harness, per se.

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 353 for an earth working implement having a
    draft means or ground support and guided or propelled by a walking
    attendant and also having body engaging means.


CLS 280/2
TXT Vehicles under subclass 29 having a portion of the body or load supporting
    framework depending between the axles to form a portion of the running gear
    connections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43.11,  for a vehicle having a vertically adjustable wheel the axis of
    which may be moved to a position above the load carrying surface of the
    vehicle.

    47.23,  for handle-propelled vehicles with similarly disposed body or load
    supporting framework.


CLS 280/3
TXT Vehicles under class definition provided with means for rotating a wheel or
    wheels and operable from without the vehicle for propelling it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151,    for auxiliary load starting attachments.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 96+ for railway rolling stock
    with wheel or axle drive, and especially subclass 129 for flange or axle
    grip tools.


CLS 280/4
TXT Vehicles under class definition specially adapted to carry ladders and
    fire-hose, commonly fire-fighting vehicles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 63.1+ for a vehicle
    mounted ladder with erection means and subclass 127 for a ladder with a
    land vehicle.


CLS 280/5.2
TXT Vehicles under the class definition (1) constructed to permit its parts to
    be arranged for, or (2) having means combined therewith for ascending or
    descending steps or similar obstructions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30+,    for miscellaneous convertible land vehicles.


CLS 280/5.22
TXT Vehicles under subclass 5.2 having endless traction elements (1) shiftably
    mounted from a normal tractive position to a second position angularly
    disposed on the vehicle to contact the edge portion of a step or abutment
    to propel the vehicle while in upright position at an incline to the
    horizontal, or (2) which are designed to have one portion active while
    traveling horizontally and a second portion active while ascending or
    descending a step or abutment, or (3) which are auxiliary to the normal
    running gear to provide a secondary traction means operative only when
    ascending or descending steps or the like.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    305,    Wheel Substitutes for Land Vehicles, appropriate subclasses for
    endless flexible track type wheel substitutes.


CLS 280/5.24
TXT Vehicles under subclass 5.2 having a plate-like surface or rollerway
    positioned on the vehicle and designed to engage the edge portion of the
    step or abutment to facilitate movement of the vehicle thereacross.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.32,   for roller attachments providing a fulcrum support for a vehicle.

    7.12,   for wheeled velocipedes convertible to or from runner type.

    8+,     for miscellaneous vehicles provided with wheeled and runner type
    running gear.


CLS 280/5.26
TXT Vehicles under subclass 5.2 comprising a spider-like means pivotally
    mounted on a vehicle in position to permit the legs of the spider to engage
    the tread portions of successive steps or levels of a path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    305,    Wheel Substitutes for Land Vehicles, subclasses 1+  for steppers.


CLS 280/5.28
TXT Vehicles under subclass 5.2 in which the running gear comprises spaced
    ground engaging portions, which portions are mounted for relative movement
    to permit variations in the relative vertical or horizontal distances
    between said portions to facilitate movement over a step or abutment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43+,    for vehicles having vertically adjustable running gear.


CLS 280/5.3
TXT Vehicles under subclass 5.2 having attached thereto mechanism adapted to
    react upon a tread surface to lift or lower the vehicle to or from the step
    or abutment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling force,
    subclasses 418+ for miscellaneous vehicles having jacks attached thereto.


CLS 280/5.32
TXT Vehicles under subclass 5.2 having attached thereto a fulcrum means about
    which the vehicle may be tilted.

    (1)     Note.  The fulcrum is usually provided with wheel means at its
    outer end to permit translatory movement of the vehicle on its attached
    fulcrum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47.12,  for vehicles having rocker or fulcrum supports auxiliary to the
    wheels.

    47.2,   for auxiliary wheel attachments for two wheeled hand trucks or
    barrows.


CLS 280/6.1
TXT A vehicle body-leveling device under subclass 840 comprising means for
    keeping the body portion of a vehicle level responsive to a means sensing
    an actual or incipient nonlevel condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 209 for means for transmitting a
    load from the truck frame of a rail vehicle to the axles thereof in
    substantially equal proportions, and subclass 210 for trucks for railway
    vehicles having means to maintain the vehicle body substantially parallel
    with the track.


CLS 280/6.11
TXT A vehicle body leveling device under subclass 840 comprising an actuator
    and interconnected means extending between the running gear and the body
    for moving ground engaging means vertically oppositely with respect to the
    body to level the body.

    (1)     Note.  The "interconnecting means" must be in the nature of a
    linkage extending to different points for effecting opposite movements of
    ground engaging means.  A vehicle in which the interconnecting means
    extends from the actuator to one point and the opposite movement of the
    ground engaging means is effected due to a mere rocking of the running gear
    is not included.


CLS 280/6.12
TXT Using hydraulic motor:

    Vehicles body leveling device under subclass 840 in which the ultimate
    source of power to actuate the leveling is hydraulic fluid, typically in a
    piston cylinder motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43+,    for wheel raising relative to the running gear.

    704,    for shock absorbers which also raise or lower the wheels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    appropriate subclasses for fluid jacks which are not a part of the vehicle.


CLS 280/7
TXT Vehicle under subclass 830 comprising (1) means for keeping the tank or
    boiler portion of a vehicle level responsive to a means sensing an actual
    or incipient nonlevel condition, or (2) an adjustable means extending
    between the running gear and the tank or boiler of the vehicle which is
    operative to level the tank or boiler.


CLS 280/7.1
TXT Velocipedes under class definition in which the parts may be manipulated to
    convert the vehicle into some other device or some other type of vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  Velocipedes are those vehicles including skates, adapted to
    be propelled by the occupant including those pushed by the occupant by
    contact of the hands or feet with the surface over which the vehicle moves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.188,  for convertible figure type velocipedes.

    9+,     for wheel and runner vehicles with retractible wheels or runners.

    13,     for runners applied to the wheels of wheeled vehicles.

    87.01+, for coasters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 95 for trackman's car convertible
    to bicycle.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 1+ for chair or seat convertible from
    wheel mounted to nonwheel mounted by reorienting the entire device, and
    subclasses 130+ for a chair or seat having alternately usable supporting
    devices, as wheels, rockers, suspending hangers and the like.


CLS 280/7.11
TXT Velocipedes under subclass 7.1 in which the conversion is from an ordinary
    frame to a drop frame, i.e., one which is commonly known as a ladies'
    bicycle.


CLS 280/7.12
TXT Velocipedes under subclass 7.1 in which the conversion is from a wheeled
    velocipede to a runner type or vice versa.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8+,     for wheel and runner vehicles.

    13,     for wheel runner type vehicles.


CLS 280/7.13
TXT Velocipedes under subclass 7.12 which have means adapting them to be
    attached to the feet of the occupant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    841+,   for skates not convertible.


CLS 280/7.14
TXT Vehicles under subclass 7.12 in which a wheel is substituted for a runner
    or vice versa.


CLS 280/7.15
TXT Vehicles under subclass 7.1 which have means adapting them to be propelled
    by the occupant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.12,   for vehicles convertible to the runner type and having occupant
    propelling means.

    200+,   for nonconvertible vehicles with occupant propelling means.


CLS 280/7.16
TXT Vehicles under subclass 7.15 in which the conversion is to or from a plural
    occupant propelled vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209,    222, 231+, and 273, for occupant propelled vehicles having
    provision for plural occupants.


CLS 280/7.17
TXT Vehicles under subclass 7.15 in which the conversion is from an occupant
    propelled vehicle to a nonoccupant propelled vehicle or vice versa.


CLS 280/8
TXT Vehicles under class definition provided with both supporting-wheels and
    runners.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.12+,  for convertible velocipedes of the wheel and runner type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 196 for a motor vehicle which includes one
    or more ski-like or runner members and wherein the vehicle is provided with
    at least one surface-engaging propulsion element and further wherein the
    element comprises a traction wheel.


CLS 280/9
TXT Vehicles under subclass 8 in which either the wheel or the runner gear may
    be moved to an inoperative position, leaving the other in position for use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36      and 38+, for folding vehicles.

    43+,    for vertically adjustable vehicles.


CLS 280/10
TXT Vehicles under subclass 9 in which the runner gear in its operative
    position engages the wheels of the wheeled gear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for wheel runner type sleds.


CLS 280/11
TXT Vehicles under subclass 9 in which the adjustable running-gear is pivoted
    to swing about an axis laterally of the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    641+,   for folding vehicles having pivoted wheel carriers with transverse
    axis.


CLS 280/11.115
TXT With propulsion means driven by occupant:

    Skates under subclass 841 provided with means to cause them to move
    relative to the surface on which they are supported, which means is driven
    by the manual effort of the person utilizing the skates.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   for a vehicle of the wheeled type which is provided with means
    whereby it may be propelled by the occupant thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 181 for a motor vehicle of the ski- or
    skate-type for imparting movement to a person standing thereon and wherein
    the power means or a portion thereof is affixed to or built into the ski or
    skate.


CLS 280/11.12
TXT Skates under subclass 841 which are supported by runners.


CLS 280/11.14
TXT Skates under subclass 11.12 in which the foot plates are resiliently
    supported on the runner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11.15,  for jointed runners and foot supports.


CLS 280/11.15
TXT Skates under subclass 11.12 in which the skate is made up of two or more
    runner supported sections pivotally connected, or in which the foot
    supports are movably jointed to the runners.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11.14,  for resilient connections between the foot plates and runners.


CLS 280/11.16
TXT Skates under subclass 11.12 in which the foot supports are extensible to
    fit different size shoes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11.26,  for extensible wheeled skates.


CLS 280/11.17
TXT Skates under subclass 11.12 in which a runner is secured in a frame
    including hollow foot posts.


CLS 280/11.18
TXT Devices under subclass 11.12 in which only the runner structure is claimed.


CLS 280/11.19
TXT Skates under subclass 841 which are provided with wheels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 18+ for casters generally and
    97+ for wheel mounts for panel hangers.

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclasses 5.3+ for skate wheels.


CLS 280/11.2
TXT Skates under subclass 11.19 in combination with a braking means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 2+ for vehicle brakes.


CLS 280/11.21
TXT Skates under subclass 11.19 having means to prevent motion except in a
    forward direction.


CLS 280/11.22
TXT Skates under subclass 11.19 in which the supporting wheels are aligned
    along a plane longitudinal of the skate.


CLS 280/11.23
TXT Skates under subclass 11.22 having two wheels.


CLS 280/11.24
TXT Skates under subclass 11.19 having a single supporting wheel.


CLS 280/11.25
TXT Skates under subclass 11.19 having two supporting wheels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11.23,  for skates with two wheels arranged in tandem.


CLS 280/11.26
TXT Skates under subclass 11.19 in which the foot supports are extensible to
    fit different sized shoes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11.16,  for extensible runner type skates.


CLS 280/11.27
TXT Devices under subclass 11.19 in which the wheeled trucks and/or the truck
    mounting are claimed, per se.


CLS 280/11.28
TXT Devices under subclass 11.27 in which the trucks are resiliently yieldable
    relative to their supports.


CLS 280/11.3
TXT Devices under subclass 841 in which the means to attach or secure a skate
    to a rider's shoe are claimed.  The mere inclusion of the runner or wheels
    broadly will not keep the patent out of this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclasses 62+ for detachable
    antislipping devices for shoes.


CLS 280/11.31
TXT Devices under subclass 11.3 in which the securing means comprises clamps
    engaging the toe and/or heel of the shoe.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclasses 64+, for clamping means for
    attaching antislipping devices to shoes.


CLS 280/11.32
TXT Devices under subclass 11.31 in which the clamping means is actuated by a
    screw device.


CLS 280/11.33
TXT Devices under subclass 11.31 in which the clamping means is actuated by a
    lever mechanism.


CLS 280/11.34
TXT Devices under subclass 11.33 having a screw adjustment.


CLS 280/11.36
TXT Devices under subclass 11.3 in which means is provided to support or brace
    the ankle of a skater.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    602,    Surgery:  Splint, Brace, or Bandage, subclasses 27 and 65 for ankle
    braces, per se.


CLS 280/12.1
TXT Vehicles under subclass 845 which have means adapting them to be propelled
    by the occupant, not merely pushed by the hands or feet of the occupant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14.3,   for the push type sled vehicle, which is pushed by a standing
    occupant.


CLS 280/12.11
TXT Vehicles under subclass 12.1 in which the propelling means pushes the
    vehicle by intermittent contact with the surface over which the vehicle
    travels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219,    for wheeled vehicles similarly propelled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 187 for a motor vehicle which includes one
    or more ski-like or runner members and wherein the vehicle is provided with
    at least one surface-engaging propulsion element and further wherein the
    element has a shuffling movement along the surface which supports it.


CLS 280/12.12
TXT Vehicles under subclass 12.11 in which the propelling means is specially
    designed to be operated by the feet of the occupant.


CLS 280/12.13
TXT Vehicles under subclass 12.1 in which the propelling means is a traction
    wheel contacting the surface over which the vehicle moves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 196 for a motor vehicle which includes one
    or more ski-like or runner members and wherein the vehicle is provided with
    at least one surface-engaging propulsion element and further wherein the
    element comprises a traction wheel.


CLS 280/12.14
TXT Vehicles under subclass 12.13 in which the propelling means is specially
    designed to be operated by the feet of the occupant.


CLS 280/13
TXT Vehicles under subclass 845 in which the runners are applied to the wheels
    of wheeled vehicles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for vehicles having both wheels and runners.


CLS 280/14
TXT Vehicles under subclass 845 in which the runners are constructed to replace
    the wheels of a wheeled vehicle and fit over the wheel-axles, usually on
    the axle-spindles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for rocker runner type vehicles.


CLS 280/14.1
TXT Skis converted to sled:

    Vehicles under subclass 845 using standard snow skis, normally attached to
    individual feet of a standing occupant, as the slidable surface attached to
    some occupant or load supporting structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    818,    for skis interconnected for training.


CLS 280/14.2
TXT Standing occupant:

    Vehicles under subclass 845 adapted to support an occupant or occupants in
    standing position and intended primarily to coast down a snow slope or over
    ice.

    (1)     Note.  These vehicles are analogous to skateboards or surfboards
    but may be used on snow or ice.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14.3,   for a standing occupant sled with steering handles.

    23.1,   for runner vehicles intended to be pushed using some upwardly
    extending superstructure, by an attendant who does not ride on the sled.


CLS 280/14.3
TXT With steering handle:

    Vehicles under subclass 14.2 which include an upwardly extending hand
    grasping bar which may be manipulated to effect some device for steering
    the runner.

    (1)     Note.  The device may simply be a lever for flexing the runner.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes scooter type vehicles with runners.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14.2,   for standing occupants sleds where steering is accomplished by
    weight shifts. This is also the home for sleds with handles of the type
    which provide no steering function.

    16      and 21.1, for steering controls for a nonstanding occupant.


CLS 280/15
TXT Multiple sled:

    Vehicle under subclass 845 in which the sliding surface comprises a
    plurality of longitudinally spaced sliding running gear nits.


CLS 280/16
TXT Sleds under subclass 15 arranged to be steered by the vehicle occupant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    771+,   for occupant steered wheeled vehicles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclass 8 for means for steering by altering the speed of
    one side of the vehicle as by a brake.


CLS 280/17
TXT Sleds under subclass 15 in which one sliding unit is mounted to swivel on a
    vertical axis, and may also rock about a lateral axis relative to the other
    sliding unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109+,   111+ and 126+, for wheeled vehicles having swinging and rocking
    axles.


CLS 280/18
TXT Toboggan:

    Vehicles under subclass 845 where the sliding surface is provided by a
    large flat bottom surface of the load support.

    (1)     Note. In these sleds the sliding running gear is the bottom of the
    load support.


CLS 280/18.1
TXT Bowl or saucer type:

    Vehicles under subclass 18 wherein the entire vehicle serves as the sliding
    surface and is in the shape of a saucer or bowl.


CLS 280/19
TXT Sleds under subclass 18 having contact with intended to be pulled the
    supporting surface along substantially their entire width.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for toboggans.


CLS 280/19.1
TXT Shelter sled:

    Runner vehicles under subclass 845 provided with means to convert the
    vehicle to an occupant shelter for ice fishing or the like.

    (1)     Note.  The sliding surface, in the form of runners, may remain in
    place or the entire device may be reorganized.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28.12,  for situations in which the vehicle is used to shelter ice fishing
    equipment only, in which case it is considered to be a container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g. Buildings), for portable buildings.

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, for tent shelters.


CLS 280/20
TXT Sleds under subclass 845 which are foldable from their condition of use
    into a more compact form, as for storage or shipment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9+,     for vehicles having wheels and runners, one or both being
    retractable.

    36+,    for folding wheeled vehicles.


CLS 280/21.1
TXT Occupant steered:

    Vehicles under subclass 845 having a single running gear unit arranged to
    be steered by the occupant of the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for occupant steered sleds with multiple sliding running gear units.

    771+,   for occupant steered wheeled vehicles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 8+ for means for steering by altering the speed
    of one side of the vehicle, as by a brake.


CLS 280/22
TXT Sleds under subclass 21.1 in which the runners are hinged sections or of
    flexible construction, so that they can be bent out of straight lines to
    steer the vehicle.


CLS 280/22.1
TXT Tiltable runner type:

    Vehicles under subclass 21.1 in which a steering effect results from the
    rotation of the runners about their longitudinal axes relative to the load
    or occupant support platform.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21.1,   for runners which tilt as a result of a compound rotation about an
    angular upright axis.


CLS 280/23.1
TXT Push:

    Vehicles under subclass 845 designed to be propelled by being pushed by a
    rear attendant.

    (1)     Note.  The sled may include a front load or occupant seating
    platform and the rear attendant may ride on the rear of the sled as it
    coasts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47.13+  and 47.34+, for hand propelled wheeled vehicles.

    87.021+, for wheeled push vehicles.


CLS 280/24
TXT Sleds under subclass 845 provided with means for attaching poles, shafts,
    or the like for draft purposes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116     and 132, for draft connections to wheeled vehicles having a
    swinging axle, and see the notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    278,    Land Vehicles:  Animal Draft Appliances, subclasses 52+ for thrill
    couplings for vehicles.


CLS 280/25
TXT Sleds under subclass 845 having springs supporting the load-carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     and see the search notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 2+ for vehicle springs.


CLS 280/26
TXT Sleds under subclass 845 in which the individual runners are mounted to
    rock longitudinally of the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for hub mounted runners.

    15+,    for multiple sleds.


CLS 280/27
TXT Devices under subclass 845 comprising connecting members between the
    runner-base and the load support.


CLS 280/28
TXT Devices under subclass 845 in which the sliding portion of the runner is
    claimed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 544+ for a web
    or sheet-stock material, e.g., of indefinite length, which is all metal or
    has adjacent metal components.


CLS 280/28.11
TXT With brake:

    Vehicle under subclass 845 including a device to stop or retard the motion
    of the vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, appropriate subclasses for brakes, per se, with no
    significant vehicle structure, and especially subclass 8 for ground
    engaging brakes.


CLS 280/28.12
TXT Container type:

    Vehicle under subclass 845 where the sliding surface or surfaces support a
    receptacle container for nonoccupant loads.


CLS 280/28.13
TXT Logging type sled:

    Vehicles under subclass 845 in which a sliding running gear unit is
    attached to one end only of the load to be transported.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for drags having no particular sliding running gear unit.


CLS 280/28.14
TXT Central runner:

    Vehicles under subclass 845 equipped with a central primary load carrying
    runner.


CLS 280/28.15
TXT With auxiliary outrigger runner:

    Vehicles under subclass 28.14 equipped with laterally mounted runners, in
    addition to the central runner, for limiting tilting or assisting in
    steering.

    (1)     Note.  The laterally mounted runners are normally out of engagement
    with the running surface.


CLS 280/28.16
TXT Auxiliary top, bottom or side runners:

    Vehicles under subclass 845 equipped with auxiliary runners in addition to
    the primary running surface.

    (1)     Note. The vehicle is stable on its primary sliding surface, the
    auxiliary runners being normally out of engagement with the ground.  The
    auxiliary runners may be located laterally to prevent overturn, on the
    bottom to provide additional support in loose snow or on top to enable the
    vehicle to be inverted for use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28.14+, for nonstable runner vehicles with a single central runner.


CLS 280/28.17
TXT Machinery sled:

    Vehicle under subclass 845 having particular runner structure to support a
    machine or machine parts collectively.


CLS 280/28.18
TXT Tank or vacuum cleaner:

    Vehicle under subclass 28.17 specifically for supporting vacuum cleaners or
    other cylindrical container type devices.


CLS 280/28.5
TXT Vehicles under class definition provided with supporting wheel substitutes
    to engage the surface over which the vehicle moves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.22,   for a step or abutment ascending type vehicle provided with an
    endless track.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 164 for a motor vehicle provided with
    means for creating a fluid force to attract the vehicle to the surface upon
    which it travels; subclasses 116+ for a motor vehicle of the surface effect
    type; subclasses 180+ for a ski- or skate- type vehicle for imparting
    movement to a person standing thereon; subclasses 182+ for a motor vehicle
    which includes one or more ski-like or runner members; and subclasses 7.1+
    for a motor vehicle having a special driving device.  Class 180 takes all
    wheel substitute vehicles, unless (1) a claim is drawn to a vehicle other
    than a motor vehicle, or (2) the claimed vehicle is identified as only a
    nonmotor vehicle in the specific disclosure, noting (1) and (2) do not
    apply to the special suction and surface effect vehicles.

    305,    Wheel Substitutes for Land Vehicles, for wheel substitutes, per se.
     Class 305 takes patents claiming the combination of a wheel substitute and
    a vehicle, if the vehicle is only nominally recited in the claims.
    Expressions such as a vehicle frame, an axle, a pivotal connection between
    the vehicle frame and the wheel substitute are considered mere nominal
    recitations of vehicle structure and would be classified in Class 305 if
    the claim is otherwise directed to a wheel substitute apparatus.


CLS 280/29
TXT Vehicles under class definition provided with supporting-wheels to engage
    the surface over which the vehicle moves.

    (1)     Note.  See search notes under the class definition.


CLS 280/30
TXT Vehicles under subclass 29 which are convertible from wheeled vehicles to
    nonvehicular structures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.2+,   for vehicles convertible into stair climbing devices.

    9+,     for wheeled and runner vehicles with retractible wheels or runners.

    43,     for vehicles having vertically  adjustable running gear, see (1)
    Note.

    840+,   for body leveling devices.


CLS 280/31
TXT Vehicles under subclass 30 convertible from wheeled vehicles to cradles or
    cribs where the structure accomplishing the result is a part of or attached
    to the vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclass 107 for rocking frames or rockers adapted for
    attachment to the wheels of a child's carriage for this purpose.


CLS 280/32
TXT Vehicles under subclass 30 designed to be used as vehicles or to be
    inverted and used as roller-skids.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47.131, for article supports or dollies.


CLS 280/32.5
TXT Vehicles under subclass 29 comprising (1) a support means such as a seat,
    body rest or platform, for a person engaged in manual labor on or adjacent
    the ground, or (2) a shade for such a person combined with a load carrying
    means.

    (1)     Note.  The person may drive or steer the vehicle in addition to
    laboring adjacent the ground, but merely driving, steering or riding on the
    vehicle is not within the subclass definition.

    (2)     Note.  The vehicles in the subclass are usually for supporting or
    shading persons engaged in planting, cultivating, harvesting, corn
    detasseling or the like.  If a tool is used it is one that is held in the
    hand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32.7,   for a wheeled vehicle comprising a seat for attachment to another
    vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, appropriate subclasses for harvesters combined with
    worker's supports or shades.

    111,    Planting, subclasses 100+ for plant setting machines having ground
    working, plant handling or watering means with worker supports.

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclasses 88.01+ for wheeled
    shades or canopies where neither the worker or any other load is supported
    by the vehicle, and subclass 900 for worker shelters.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 431+ for an earth working apparatus with
    a seat or attendant's station.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclass 129 for nonwheeled
    workmen's supports (e.g., kneeling base type) combined with receptacles (as
    for soap, brush, etc.), and subclass 230 for the workman's support, per se.
     See the search note in subclass 230 for the line with similar devices used
    by nonworkers.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 63+ for land vehicle
    bodies with seats where the body is modified to cooperate with the seat.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 184.1+ for a chair or seat with a
    canopy and subclasses 423.1+ for a chair or seat with a kneeling stool.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 508 for a self-loading or
    unloading vehicle having a conveyor for loading or unloading it and a
    support for carrying a person in working relation to the conveyor.


CLS 280/32.6
TXT Vehicles under subclass 32.5 comprising low bed-like trucks adapted to
    support a repairman while working under a device such as a vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36+,    for folding vehicles generally, some of which are of the platform
    type.

    62      and 79.11, for platform type vehicles generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 636+ for head rest attachments for beds and also
    for repairman's creepers when the body is claimed merely as a support for
    the rest; subclass 417 for ground mats.

    254,    Implements of Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 2+ for hoisting trucks.


CLS 280/32.7
TXT Apparatus under subclass 29 comprising a wheeled vehicle having a seat or
    station adapted to carry an operator or attendant and also adapted for
    attachment to another vehicle (e.g., an agricultural implement).

    (1)     Note.  The wheeled vehicle must not carry any load other than the
    operator and must not support any of the weight of the implement when in
    operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32.5+,  for a wheeled vehicle having a seat or station for a workman
    engaged in manual labor on or adjacent to the ground.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 433  for a significantly claimed
    agricultural implement having a riding attachment.


CLS 280/33.991
TXT Nesting vehicles:

    Vehicles under subclass 29 which are constructed so that they will interfit
    with one another to permit parts of one to be received partially within the
    boundaries of another to produce a nesting relation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    639+,   for vehicles which are adapted to be folded an stacked in abutting
    relation without nesting.


CLS 280/33.992
TXT Attachments or accessories:

    Vehicles under subclass 33.991 provided with attachments or accessories
    such as special handles, signs, load indicators, means to prevent theft,
    writing pads or calculator holders, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 308 for basket carried
    indicia.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclass 411 for an article carrier
    attached to a shopping cart, where the organization of the shopping cart is
    not changed.


CLS 280/33.993
TXT Children's seat:

    Vehicles under subclass 33.992 having attachments in the form of occupant
    supports.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47.35,  for stable vehicles with plural load supports, one of which may be
    a seat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chair and Seats, for seats, per se.


CLS 280/33.994
TXT Brake or antitheft device:

    Vehicles under subclass 33.992 having attachments which prevent theft of
    either the vehicle or its contents, or to hold the vehicle stationary.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, appropriate subclasses for caster locks.

    70,     Locks, appropriate subclasses for locks, per se.

    188,    Brakes, appropriate subclasses for brake structure, per se, and
    braked casters.


CLS 280/33.995
TXT With means facilitating unloading:

    Vehicles under subclass 33.991 providing with perfecting features to
    facilitate the unloading or removal of a basket or otherwise assist in
    transferring purchased items to a checkout counter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    186,    Merchandizing, subclasses 62+ for car accommodation or handling,
    per se.


CLS 280/33.996
TXT Pivoted load support:

    Vehicles under subclass 33.991 provided with pivotally movable baskets or
    load supporting structures useful to facilitate nesting.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is not intended to receive mere pivoted walls.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47.18   and 47.35, for other moveable load supports.


CLS 280/33.997
TXT Load supporting frame:

    Vehicles under subclass 33.991 having particular base structure between the
    running gear and the load support.

    (1)     Note. Patents contained within this subclass are restricted to
    those claiming novel base structure.


CLS 280/33.998
TXT Vertically nestable or confined:

    Vehicles under subclass 33.991 in which the nesting takes place in a
    vertical direction, or where vehicles are arranged within, and supported by
    a lower supporting vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclass 91 for vertically
    nesting horizontal supports.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 499 for nesting containers.


CLS 280/35
TXT Vehicles under subclass 636 which are adapted to support special articles
    and usually propelled by pushing on the article itself.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43.1,   for a vehicle which is unstable when in transporting position and
    has vertically adjustable ground engaging means and which is stabilized by
    an attendant or an article to which the vehicle is attached.

    47.131, for article supports and dollies which are not extensible.


CLS 280/37
TXT Vehicles under subclass 639 which are foldable into the form of a traveling
    bag or case, the wheels and other parts being inclosed therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 335 for a vehicle container.


CLS 280/38
TXT Vehicles under subclass 639 in which the wheel-carriers swing on pivots
    when folding and unfolding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9+,     for retracting wheels and runners for vehicles.


CLS 280/39
TXT Vehicles under subclass 38 in which the axis of each wheel-carrier pivot is
    arranged longitudinally of the vehicle.


CLS 280/40
TXT Vehicles under subclass 39 normally traveling on two wheels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47.24+  and 63+, for other two wheeled vehicles.


CLS 280/42
TXT Vehicles under subclass 639 which in folding decrease their width, the
    wheels remaining in vertical position.


CLS 280/43
TXT Vehicle under subclass 34 comprising a running gear and wheel means, and
    means whereby the wheel means may be selectively held in different
    positions vertically relative to the running gear.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of "running gear" see (1) Note under
    subclass 840.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.28,   for adjustable running gear adapted to render a vehicle capable of
    ascending a step or abutment.

    83,     for vertically adjustable tongue trucks.

    840+,   for vehicle body-leveling by adjustable means extending between the
    running gear and the body, or by means sensing an actual or incipient
    nonlevel condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 354+ for a
    vertically adjustable work contacting nozzle supporting carriage for vacuum
    cleaners.

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 19 for vertically adjustable
    casters used to support furniture or the like on a floor.

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 208+ for platform adjustments for harvesters
    involving vertically adjustable wheels.

    111,    Planting, subclasses 52+ for vertically adjustable ground supports
    for frames of drilling machines for planting operations.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 139 for unearthing
    apparatus having a frame and vertically adjustable wheels.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 395+ for devices comprising an earth
    working element, a mounting frame therefor, and a vertically adjustable
    ground support for said frame.  The earth working element must be
    separately mentioned in the body of the claim for classification in Class
    172.  A claim merely to a frame and relatively adjustable vertical wheels
    is classified in Class 280 even if the device is identified as an earth
    working implement in the claim preamble.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 24.02 for a motor vehicle having a wheel
    arrangement comprising five or more wheels and wherein one of the wheels is
    adjustably, or otherwise, mounted to move vertically for the purpose of
    modifying the proportion of the load imposed upon at least one other wheel
    of the vehicle; and subclass 209 for a motor vehicle having a special wheel
    base and provided with means which may comprise means for changing the
    number of wheels utilized to support the vehicle, which change may involve
    moving at least one of the wheels vertically.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 2+ for hoisting trucks.  The devices comprise wheeled hoists
    comprising a running gear and a load support and means for vertically
    adjusting said load support other than a means for vertically adjusting
    said load support by vertical adjustment of the wheels relative to the
    running gear.

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclass 15 for an occupant
    propelled roundabout used as a trainer for foot travel.

    482,    Exercise Devices, particularly subclasses 66+ for an occupant
    support frame having a movement facilitating feature for foot travel.


CLS 280/43.1
TXT Vehicle under subclass 43 which the vehicle directly or contacting (1) is
    inherently unstable when in transport position but is stabilized by an
    attendant who propels and balances the vehicle by contacting a handle or
    harness attached to the vehicle, (2) is inherently unstable when in
    transport position, is adapted to be temporarily attached to articles to
    transport them and is stabilized by some outside force (such as an
    attendant or other vehicle) contacting the article, or (3) is inherently
    unstable when in transport position but adapted to be stabilized by
    temporary attachment to articles for transporting them either because more
    than one of the unstable vehicles of this subclass are temporarily attached
    to the article or because the article has other wheels.

    (1)     Note.  An attendant is a person who is not an occupant of the
    vehicle under consideration.

    (2)     Note.  A receptacle which is intended to be loaded or to have
    portions of the load removed therefrom while associated with the wheels of
    the unstable vehicle is considered to be a part of the vehicle, i.e., a
    removable vehicle body, rather than an article.  An example, of such a
    receptacle is a golf bag.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     for extensible article supports.

    43.14+  and 43.24, for nonwheel means engageable with the ground when the
    wheels are raised vertically.

    47.131+, for tiltable vehicles not having vertically adjustable wheels.

    63+     and 78, for other vehicles normally traveling on two wheels and one
    wheel, respectively, and not stabilized by an article or attendant.

    107,    for running gear provided with means for retaining a vehicle body
    or load in position thereon.

    179,    for load binders as attachments to vehicles.

    200+,   for occupant propelled vehicles stabilized by the occupant, e.g.,
    bicycles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclass 18 for the combination of
    an article of baggage with transporting wheels where more baggage structure
    is claimed than necessary to mount or house the wheels.


CLS 280/43.11
TXT Vehicle under subclass 43 comprising a load carrying surface and in which
    the highest position of vertical adjustment of the wheel relative to the
    vehicle is such that the wheel axis is above the carrying surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for a vehicle having a portion of its body or load supporting
    framework depending between the vehicle axles to form a part of the running
    gear.

    47.23,  for a handle propelled vehicle having its load base below the wheel
    axis with no means to elevate the wheels.

    414,    for articulated vehicles constructed to accommodate a boat.


CLS 280/43.12
TXT Vehicle under subclass 43 comprising a load carrying surface and in which
    the highest position of vertical adjustment of the wheel relative to the
    vehicle is one in which the upper peripheral portion of the wheel is
    substantially tangential to and is always below the load carrying surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 51.11+ for an
    industrial platform.


CLS 280/43.13
TXT Vehicle under subclass 43 in which a plurality of wheels are independently
    mounted on different axles and there are additional means interconnecting
    the wheels whereby they may be moved simultaneously vertically with respect
    to the running gear or so that the movement of one influences movement of
    the other, and there is an actuator for moving a wheel.

    (1)     Note.  A structure comprising a single axle having a crank axle on
    each end with a wheel mounted on each crank axle is not considered to be a
    structure having wheels independently mounted on different axles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6.11,   for vehicle body leveling devices comprising an actuator and
    interconnected means extending between the running gear and the body for
    moving ground engaging means vertically oppositely with respect to the body
    to level the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 400+ for interconnected vertically
    movable ground supports for earth working element frames.


CLS 280/43.14
TXT Vehicle under subclass 43.13 wherein the vertically adjustable wheels are
    replaced as a support for the vehicle running gear by leg or skid means
    when the wheels are vertically adjusted to a given position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43.1,   for an unstable vehicle stabilized by an attendant or an article.

    43.24,  for vehicles having vertically adjustable wheels and nonwheel means
    for engaging the supporting surface when the wheels are adjusted to a given
    position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 32+ for casters for supporting
    furniture or other like objects wherein the caster is vertically adjustable
    to a position above the floor.


CLS 280/43.15
TXT Vehicle under subclass 43.14 wherein the distance between any two
    vertically adjustable wheels is varied as they are vertically adjusted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43.16,  for wheeled vehicles having means for adjusting wheels on different
    axles and having means to vary the distance between the wheels as they are
    vertically adjusted.


CLS 280/43.16
TXT Vehicle under subclass 43.13 wherein the distance between any two
    vertically adjustable wheels is varied as they are vertically adjusted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43.15,  for wheeled vehicles having means for adjusting wheels on different
    axles and having nonwheel means for engaging the vehicle supporting surface
    and means to vary the distance between the wheels as they are vertically
    adjusted.


CLS 280/43.17
TXT Vehicle under subclass 43 comprising actuating means to vertically move the
    wheel means relative to the running gear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    414.5,  for an articulated vehicle wherein the trailing vehicle has a
    ground engaging wheel which is vertically movable with respect to the
    trailing vehicle frame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 215.1+ for a railway truck having
    primary wheels and supplemental wheels to be moved to operative position at
    will.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 399, 400+, 407+, 414, 418+, and 423+ for
    an earth working element frame having a ground support which is vertically
    movable relative to the frame by an actuator.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 418+ for raising and lowering landing gears on semi-trailers and
    for lifting vehicles off the ground and/or turning the vehicle about a
    given point.


CLS 280/43.18
TXT Vehicle under subclass 43.17 comprising spring means to support a vehicle
    body on the running gear.


CLS 280/43.19
TXT Vehicle under subclass 43.17 in which the actuating means includes a
    flexible member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 414 for an earth working element frame
    connected ground support which is vertically adjustable relative to said
    frame by an actuator connected thereto which allows free movement between
    the two in at least one direction.


CLS 280/43.2
TXT Vehicle under subclass 43.17 wherein the means causing actuation comprises
    a threaded stud member whose threads engage the threads of a threaded nut
    member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 419 for an earth working implement and
    frame having a ground engaging support which may be caused to translate
    vertically relative to the frame by means of a screw jack type actuator,
    and subclass 427 for a screw jack type actuator to move the ground engaging
    support of an earth working element frame vertically relative to the frame.


CLS 280/43.21
TXT Vehicle under subclass 43.17 wherein the actuating means comprises a rack
    member meshing with a gear or engageable by a ratchet member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 420 for rack and pinion or ratchet type
    actuators for ground support members adapted to move with a translating
    motion relative to the earth working frame supported, and subclass 428 for
    rack and pinion or ratchet actuators to move a ground support for an earth
    working implement vertically relative to the implement frame.


CLS 280/43.22
TXT Vehicle under subclass 43.17 in which the motion caused by the actuator is
    such that all points of the wheel means have at any instant the same
    velocity and direction of motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 415+ for an earth working element frame
    having a ground support which has a translating motion relative to the
    frame when moving from one vertical position to another.


CLS 280/43.23
TXT Vehicle under subclass 43.17 wherein the actuating means is operated by a
    motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 407+ for an earth working element frame
    connected ground support which is vertically adjustable by power means.


CLS 280/43.24
TXT Vehicle under subclass 43 wherein the vertically adjustable wheels are
    replaced as a support for the vehicle running gear by leg or skid means
    when the wheels are vertically adjusted to a given position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43.14,  for vehicles having means interconnecting wheels on different axles
    whereby the interconnected wheels are vertically movable to a position
    where they are replaced as the vehicle supporting means by a nonwheel means.


CLS 280/46
TXT Vehicles under subclass 43 in which the elevating mechanism is operated by
    manipulation of the vehicle-tongue.


CLS 280/47
TXT Vehicles under subclass 43 in which power derived from the rolling motion
    of a ground wheel as the vehicle is propelled over the ground is used to
    vary the elevation of the wheel relative to the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth working, subclasses 402, 404 and 408+ for earth working tools
    carried by frames which have wheels which are vertically adjusted by power
    derived from the adjusted wheels.  The recitation of an earth working
    implement by name only having a wheel which is vertically adjusted by its
    own power is classifiable in Class 280, Land Vehicles.


CLS 280/47.1
TXT Vehicles under subclass 29 in which the body, generally intended for
    occupation by a child, is connected to its wheel support in such a manner
    that body rocking will occur as the wheels rotate during travel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47.38+, for other vehicles of the "Baby Carriage" type.

    827,    for simulating type velocipedes providing body rocking during
    travel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 269+ for a wheeled figure toy
    having means to move a figure portion.


CLS 280/47.11
TXT Vehicles under subclass 29 adapted to be propelled (pushed or pulled) by an
    attendant who is not an occupant of the vehicle, generally by handle means,
    provided with steerable wheel means and operating mechanism therefor under
    control of the attendant to effect positive steering movement of the wheel
    means relative to the vehicle body, the controlling action by the attendant
    to actuate said mechanism involving either (1) exertion of a lateral thrust
    on the vehicle directly or by way of the handle means when guiding the
    vehicle to make a turn, or (2) manipulation of the handle or other means
    operatively connected to said wheel operating mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  Vehicles which are propelled and steered by tongues or
    shafts connected to the running gear, not disclosed or claimed for hand
    propulsion, are placed in the subclass providing for the running gear
    structure involved.

    (2)     Note.  Vehicles which are propelled and steered by tongue or shaft
    means connected to the running gear, even if disclosed for propulsion by a
    walking attendant, are not here classified if the portion of the running
    gear to which said means is connected comprises a wheel carrying frame or
    shaft pivotally connected to the said body, so that upon lateral swinging
    of the tongue or shaft means by the attendant the wheel frame or wheel
    shaft will merely swing as a unit with the tongue or shaft means about the
    pivotal connection, and will not effect relative steering movements of any
    additional wheel frame or shaft.  In cases where the aforesaid wheel
    carrying frame or shaft is operatively coupled to any of the other wheel
    means of the running gear so as to cause the latter to have steering
    movement relative to the body as well, classification is in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79.11+, for wheeled vehicles having separate unconnected castering wheels
    to facilitate steering in response to a side thrust.

    87.01+, for coaster vehicles having steering means.

    442+,   for vehicle train draft devices adapted to effect positive wheel
    steering.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 14.7 for a motor-driven harvester steered by a
    walking attendant.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 256+ for an earth working apparatus
    comprising a propulsion unit guided by a walking attendant.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 19+ for motor vehicles steered by a
    walking attendant.


CLS 280/47.12
TXT Vehicles under subclass 29 provided with ground or ledge engaging rocker or
    fulcrum means additional to the fulcrum formed by the traction wheels on
    which the vehicle customarily travels about whose axis the load body may
    normally be tilted.

    (1)     Note.  Generally, rocking about the added fulcrum results in the
    traction wheels being lifted from the ground to place the vehicle in a load
    receiving or removing position.  Legs or other supports on which tiltable
    type vehicles are rested when not propelled are not considered fulcrums.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.32,   for vehicles having fulcrums with wheel means to facilitate
    movement on steps or similar obstructions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 129 for wheeled receptacle stands having special
    provisions for supporting and holding a receptacle in position for use,
    storage, display or for manipulating the same, in which wheels are provided
    to make it more readily movable.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 444+ for similar vehicles
    having self-loading features.


CLS 280/47.131
TXT Tiltable vehicles, stabilized by attendant or article:

    Vehicles under subclass 29 which (a) are inherently unstable when in
    transport position but are stabilized by an attendant who propels and
    balances the vehicle by contacting the vehicle directly or contacting a
    handle or harness attached to the vehicle, (b) are inherently unstable when
    in transport position, are adapted to be temporarily attached to articles
    to transport them and are stabilized by some outside force (such as an
    attendant or other vehicle) contacting the article, or (c) are inherently
    unstable when in transport position but adapted to be stabilized by
    temporary attachment to articles for transporting them either because the
    articles has other wheels or because more than one of the unstable vehicles
    of this subclass are temporarily attached to the article.

    (1)     Note.  An attendant is a person who is not an occupant of the
    vehicle under consideration.

    (2)     Note.  A receptacle which is intended to be loaded or to have
    portions of the load removed therefrom while associated with the wheels of
    the unstable vehicle is considered to be a part of the vehicle, i.e., a
    removable vehicle body, rather than an article.  An example, of such a
    receptacle is a golf bag.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     for extensible article supports.

    43.1,   for a vehicle having vertically adjustable ground engaging means
    and which is unstable when in transporting position but which is stabilized
    by an attendant or an article to which the vehicle is temporarily attached.

    63+     and 78, for other vehicles normally traveling on two wheels and one
    wheel respectively and not stabilized by an article or attendant.

    107,    for running gear provided with means for retaining a vehicle body
    or load in position thereon.

    200+,   for occupant propelled vehicles stabilized by the occupant, e.g.
    bicycles.


CLS 280/47.15
TXT Vehicles under subclass 47.131 which are constructed (1) for attachment to
    a vehicle axle and/or to the spring means suspending said axle whereby a
    damaged vehicle may be moved to a desired place, or (2) for temporary
    attachment to a machine comprising a shaft having ground working or other
    tools thereon whereby such machine may be wheeled from place to place.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 228 for transporting attachments for
    harvesters.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 2+ for hoisting trucks, and subclasses 418+ for continuously
    attached vehicle jacks.


CLS 280/47.16
TXT Vehicles under subclass 47.131 which may be tiltably balanced by an
    attendant to either side of an intermediate wheel axis, and provided with
    wheel means adjacent each end spaced from the ground while the vehicle is
    being balanced which serve as stabilizing wheel means on which the carrier
    may rest or travel when the load body is tilted sufficiently to engage the
    wheel means at the one end or the other with the ground.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47.2,   for handle propelled vehicles with auxiliary wheel means to
    selectively provide a tiltable or stable type load body.


CLS 280/47.17
TXT Vehicles under subclass 47.131 provided with handle means by which an
    attendant may apply a propelling force thereto.

    (1)     Note.  Vehicles which are propelled by tongue or shaft means
    connected to running gear or body, if not disclosed or claimed for hand
    propulsion, are placed in the subclass providing for the running gear
    structure involved.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47.34+, for handle-propelled vehicles which are stable and not ordinarily
    balanced against tilting by the attendant during propulsion.

    63+     and 78, for tiltable load carriers, some having tongues or shafts
    connected to the running gear but not stabilized by an article or attendant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 110+ and see the Notes
    thereunder for vehicle handle structures, per se.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 329+ for earth working apparatus guided
    or propelled by a walking attendant.


CLS 280/47.18
TXT Vehicles under subclass 47.17 in which parts thereof (1) are adapted to be
    manipulated to convert the same to or from a wheeled device other than one
    intended for transporting a load, e.g., the frame of a lawnmower, (2) in
    which the body comprises a plurality of different type load carrying
    portions each of which may be moved selectively to an operative
    transporting position, or (3) in which parts of the load body may be
    manipulated or detached to form load carrying bodies of different
    characters for transporting different types of loads.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.188   and 7.1+, for convertible velocipede type vehicles.

    30+,    for vehicles convertible to nonvehicular structures.

    34+,    for vehicles whose over-all dimensions may be varied substantially.

    47.28,  for vehicles with selectively usable loading toes or racks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 10+ for convertible
    load bodies, per se.


CLS 280/47.19
TXT Vehicles under subclass 47.17 provided with plural simultaneously usable
    distinct load supports which may take the form of plural platforms,
    receptacles, compartments or seats, or combinations thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47.35,  for similar plural load supports for stable handle-propelled
    vehicles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, appropriate subclasses for portable rack type
    supports for plural articles.


CLS 280/47.2
TXT Vehicles under subclass 47.17 provided with auxiliary wheel means so
    positioned or mounted as to be selectively brought into ground engagement
    to render the vehicle stable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.32,   for stair or other obstruction climbing vehicles having fulcrums
    with wheel means about which the vehicle may be tilted.

    47.16,  for vehicles tiltable to either side of an intermediate wheel axis
    to selectively bring into ground engagement auxiliary stabilizing wheel
    means at either end.

    150,    for other auxiliary wheels for vehicles.


CLS 280/47.21
TXT Vehicles under subclass 47.17 in which the axle or axles about which the
    body is tiltable are shiftable or adjustable to vary the axle and wheel
    position relative to the body or to the center of gravity of its load,
    either to facilitate loading or transporting the load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43+,    for wheels adjustable to vary the elevation of the load frame.

    47.16   and 47.2, for vehicles with auxiliary wheels shiftable to and from
    a ground engaging position to provide alternate wheel bases.


CLS 280/47.22
TXT Vehicles under subclass 47.21 in which relative shifting of the axle or
    axles occurs because of the presence of a spring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65+,    79 and 87.03, for similar springing between wheel or wheels and the
    load-support.


CLS 280/47.23
TXT Vehicles under subclass 47.17 in which a portion or all of the load
    supporting base of the frame or vehicle body is either suspended from the
    axle means or otherwise disposed below the wheel axis, as for example by
    support in the bight of a "U-shaped" or "drop" axle.  The load base or body
    portion must be positioned below a horizontal plane including the wheel
    axis at all times in normal use of the carrier, both when the carrier is at
    rest and in transporting position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for similar body and wheel axis relations in vehicles which are not
    article or attendant stabilized or handle propelled.

    43.11,  for a vehicle having a vertically adjustable wheel the axis of
    which may be moved to a position above the load carrying surface of the
    vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclass 25 for bodies with
    dropped bottoms.


CLS 280/47.24
TXT Vehicles under subclass 47.17 which have wheels spaced apart in a direction
    laterally of the direction of movement of the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63+,    for other vehicles normally traveling on two wheels and not
    stabilized by an article or attendant.


CLS 280/47.25
TXT Vehicles under subclass 47.24 with a single seat for an occupant.

    (1)     Note.  Most of the patents in this subclass comprise children's
    carts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32.5,   for vehicles supporting workers adjacent to the ground.

    47.19,  for tiltable vehicles with plural seats.

    47.35,  for stable hand propelled vehicles with plural seats.

    47.38+, for stable hand propelled vehicles with a single seat.


CLS 280/47.26
TXT Vehicles under subclass 47.24 comprising a container which acts as a body
    for the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  The container of this subclass is intended to be loaded
    while associated with the wheels to form a vehicle.

    (2)     Note.  A golf bag attached to a wheeled frame is considered to be a
    receptacle body type vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79.2+,  for platform type trucks with receptacle-type bodies.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 96 for supports adapted to be secured to and/or
    support a golf bag, and subclass 98 for bag supports having wheels.

    298,    Land Vehicles:  Dumping, subclasses 2+ and 5+ for this type vehicle
    provided with receptacle bodies movable relative to the vehicle frame to
    facilitate dumping or for vehicles provided with bodies having a gate or
    cover adapted to be actuated in connection with the dumping operation.


CLS 280/47.27
TXT Vehicles under subclass 47.24 having means usually referred to as a toe,
    extending from the lower part of the vehicle frame at an angle relative
    thereto to form a projecting load engaging or load stop part which is
    adapted, when the vehicle frame is tilted to a loading position, to engage
    or be brought closely to the surface on which the vehicle travels so as to
    enable said part to be pushed beneath a load to facilitate manual lifting
    and tilting of the load about the axis of the wheels.

    (1)     Note.  Most of the patents in this and the indented subclasses
    comprise vehicles of the well known "Warehouse Truck" type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 444+ for similar devices
    having additional load engaging means, as a clamp or tie, as distinguished
    from a mere load supporting toe in the form of a platform, spade or the
    like, for taking hold of the load to facilitate the picking up and
    transporting of the load


CLS 280/47.28
TXT Vehicles under subclass 47.27 which are provided with an auxiliary toe,
    shelf or rack means which is positioned adjacent to the main toe and
    movably related thereto.


CLS 280/47.29
TXT Vehicles under subclass 47.27 in which the toe means is adjustable or
    otherwise movable relative to the frame on which it is mounted.


CLS 280/47.3
TXT Vehicles under subclass 47.17 which are disclosed as having only a single
    wheel or roller.

    (1)     Note.  A plurality of single wheel vehicles secured to an article
    may be classified in this subclass, provided at least one vehicle has a
    propelling handle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47.32   and 78, for other one wheeled vehicles of this class.


CLS 280/47.31
TXT Vehicles under subclass 47.3 providing a receptacle body.

    (1)     Note.  Most of the vehicles in this subclass are wheelbarrows.

    (2)     Note.  A golf bag attached to a vehicle is considered a receptacle
    body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47.23,  for vehicles of this type with a portion or all of the receptacle
    body below the level of the wheel axis at all times in the normal use of
    the vehicle.

    47.26,  for handle propelled receptacle body vehicles with laterally spaced
    wheels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    298,    Land Vehicles:  Dumping, subclass 3 for dumping vehicles having one
    wheel.


CLS 280/47.315
TXT Adjustable handle:

    Vehicles under subclass 47.17 where the handle may be moved selectively
    between different use positions.


CLS 280/47.32
TXT Vehicles under subclass 47.131 which are provided with only a single wheel
    or roller.

    (1)     Note.  A plurality of the vehicles of this subclass may be used to
    transport an article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     for one wheel vehicles not stabilized by an article or attendant.


CLS 280/47.33
TXT Vehicles under subclass 47.131 having leg structures for supporting them in
    rest position.


CLS 280/47.331
TXT Boat carrier:

    Vehicles under subclass 47.131 in the form of an attachment to a boat to
    facilitate its transportation over land.

    (1)     Note.  Attachments with mere nominal recitation of boat structure,
    necessary only to associate the attachment to the boat should be classified
    here.  If significant boat structure is claimed and necessary, as where the
    wheel will remain with the boat after launching, then proper classification
    is in Class 114.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    414.2,  where the attached devices include means to form an articulated
    vehicle, such as by the inclusion of a trailer tongue.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclass 344 for wheeled attachment which remain with the
    boat and in which the attachment pierces or otherwise cooperates with
    specifically formed boat structure, and where the attachment includes
    flotation devices to facilitate handling in the water.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 101 for landing gear attached to seaplanes
    where significant plane structure is claimed.


CLS 280/47.34
TXT Vehicles under subclass 29 which are stable when travelling and specially
    characterized as being provided with a handle means whereby the vehicle may
    be propelled by an attendant.

    (1)     Note.  Vehicles with tongues or shafts not disclosed or claimed for
    hand propulsion are placed in the subclass providing for the running gear
    structure involved.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47.17+, for handle propelled unstable vehicles stabilized by an article or
    attendant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 110+, and see the Notes
    thereunder for vehicle handles, per se.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 329+ for earth working apparatus guided
    or propelled by a walking attendant.


CLS 280/47.35
TXT Vehicles under subclass 47.34 provided with plural simultaneously usable
    distinct load supports which may be in the form of plural platforms,
    receptacles, compartments or seats, or combinations thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47.19,  for plural load supports on handle propelled vehicles stabilized by
    an article or attendant.

    79.2+,  for plural load supports on vehicles having bracketed type or
    nonsuspended axles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, appropriate subclasses for portable rack type
    supports for plural articles.


CLS 280/47.36
TXT Vehicles under subclass 47.34 in which the handle is specially adapted to
    be shiftable to a position at either end.


CLS 280/47.371
TXT Adjustable handle:

    Vehicles under subclass 47.34 where the handle may be moved selectively to
    different use positions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47.36,  for reversible handles on stable vehicles for use at either end of
    the vehicle.

    47.315, for adjustable handles on tilting vehicles.

    655.1,  for handles folded out of the way so as to change the vehicle to a
    nonuse configuration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 115 for adjustable handles, per se.

    56,     Harvesters, Digest 18 for adjustable handles in combination with a
    harvester device such as a lawn mower.


CLS 280/47.38
TXT Vehicles under subclass 47.34 provided with means for seating occupants,
    the vehicles in this and the indented subclasses being usually of the "Baby
    Carriage" type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32.5,   for vehicles seating workers near the ground.

    34+,    for extensible vehicles including baby carriages of the folding
    type.

    47.19,  for tiltable vehicles with plural seats or a single seat and a load
    support.

    47.25,  for tiltable vehicles with a single seat.

    47.35,  for stable, handle propelled vehicles with plural seats or a single
    seat and a load support.

    62,     63+ and 79, for occupant carrying vehicles having running gear as
    specified in the respective subclasses in which either no handle is
    provided or tongues and shafts for other than hand propulsions are
    disclosed.

    87.01+,for coasters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 166 for a vehicle in the nature of a
    wheeled infant carriage or crib having motor means for moving it back and
    forth in the direction of its longitudinal axis             (e.g., for
    inducing the infant to sleep); if used alternatively to transport the
    infant from one place to another, the vehicle ordinarily is propelled by an
    attendant.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, appropriate subclasses for vehicle
    bodies where no running gear is claimed or where the running gear is
    claimed by name only and where no propulsion handle is claimed.


CLS 280/47.39
TXT Vehicles under subclass 47.38 in which the body is mounted to be reversible
    end for end.


CLS 280/47.4
TXT Vehicles under subclass 47.38 in which a back or foot rest or both are
    specially modified in connection with the seating means, and generally
    provide for relative adjustment whereby the occupant may be selectively
    accommodated in either a lying or sitting position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for vehicles convertible to cribs or cradles.


CLS 280/47.41
TXT Vehicles under subclass 47.38 in which the body is supported by means,
    generally springs, either directly connected to the wheel axle means or
    connected to members attached thereto, whereby the body may have movement
    relative to the wheels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     and see the search notes thereunder, for vehicles with springs.


CLS 280/62
TXT Vehicles under subclass 29 normally traveling on three wheels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47.34+, for stable hand propelled vehicles which may be provided with three
    wheels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 210+ for a motor vehicle having a wheel
    arrangement comprising three wheels.


CLS 280/63
TXT Vehicles under subclass 29 normally traveling on two wheels.

    (1)     Note.  "Sulkies" and "gigs" are included in this group.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40      and 47.131+, for other two wheeled vehicles.

    43.1,   for a vehicle having vertically adjustable ground engaging means
    and which is unstable when in transporting position but which is stabilized
    by an attendant or an article to which the vehicle is temporarily attached.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 218+ for a motor vehicle having a wheel
    arrangement comprising two wheels.


CLS 280/64
TXT Vehicles under subclass 63 in which the wheels are adjustable during the
    vehicle travel, usually to turn or to "bank" them on curves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98+,    for vehicles running gear especially constructed for short turning.

    771+,   for occupant steered vehicles.


CLS 280/65
TXT Vehicles under subclass 63 provided with springs between the wheels and the
    load-carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     and see search notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, appropriate subclasses, for vehicle spring devices,
    per se.


CLS 280/66
TXT Vehicles under subclass 65 in which the thills are connected to the axle.


CLS 280/67
TXT Vehicles under subclass 66 in which the spring is interposed between the
    axle and thill.


CLS 280/68
TXT Vehicles under subclass 67 in which the vehicle load-carrier is supported
    solely by the thills.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70+,    for vehicles with thill mounted body but no interposed spring.


CLS 280/69
TXT Vehicles under subclass 67 in which the vehicle load-carrier is supported
    solely by the axle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72+,    for vehicles with axle mounted body but no interposed spring.


CLS 280/70
TXT Vehicles under subclass 66 in which the vehicle load-carrier is supported
    solely by the thills.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for similar vehicles having a spring interposed between the thill
    and axle.


CLS 280/71
TXT Vehicles under subclass 70 provided with adjustments to accommodate various
    loads or draft-animals.


CLS 280/72
TXT Vehicles under subclass 66 in which the vehicle load-carrier is supported
    solely by the axle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for similar vehicles having a spring interposed between the thill
    and axle.


CLS 280/73
TXT Vehicles under subclass 72 provided with adjustments to accommodate various
    loads or draft-animals.


CLS 280/74
TXT Vehicles under subclass 66 provided with adjustments to accommodate various
    loads or draft-animals.


CLS 280/75
TXT Vehicles under subclass 65 in which the thills are attached to and the
    draft is exerted through the vehicle-body.


CLS 280/76
TXT Vehicles under subclass 75 provided with adjustments to accommodate various
    loads or draft-animals.


CLS 280/77
TXT Vehicles under subclass 65 provided with adjustments to accommodate various
    loads or draft-animals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     73, 74, and 76, for other vehicle adjustments for various loads or
    draft animals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    278,    Land Vehicles:  Animal Draft Appliances, subclass 1 for vehicles
    where the adjustment is solely in the thills or their attachment to the
    vehicle.


CLS 280/78
TXT Vehicles under subclass 29 normally traveling on one wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43.1,   for a vehicle having vertically adjustable ground engaging means
    and which is unstable when in transporting position but which is stabilized
    by an attendant or an article to which the vehicle is temporarily attached.

    47.3+,  47.32 and 205+, for other one wheel vehicles.

    84,     for one wheel tongue trucks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 13 for one wheel motor carrying
    attachments for vehicles.


CLS 280/79
TXT Vehicles under subclass 29 provided with springs between the wheel or
    wheels and the load-support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11.14,  for skates with resilient foot supports.

    11.28,  for skates with resilient trucks and mountings.

    25,     for sleds with springs.

    47.22,  for tiltable handle propelled vehicles with spring suspension.

    47.41,  for stable handle propelled occupant seating type with springs.

    65+,    for two wheel vehicles having springs.

    87.03,  for yieldable occupant pushed coasters.

    96.2,   for spring mounts for stub axles.

    106.5,  for spring suspension for body frames.

    110,    for swinging and rocking axle with springs.

    112,    for rocking axle with springs.

    115,    for swinging axle of platform type with springs.

    118+,   for offset pivot swinging axle with springs.

    120+,   for swinging axle with springs.

    124,    for spring running gear.

    128     and 129, for swinging and rocking axle connections with spring.

    130,    for swinging axle connections platform type, with spring.

    134+,   for swinging connection with offset pivot and axle spring.

    136+,   for swinging axle connections with spring.

    184,    for spring clamp rein holders.

    275+,   for yielding frames and running gear for occupant propelled
    vehicles with steering.

    283+,   for yielding frames and running gear for occupant propelled
    vehicles.

    483+,   for resilient draft devices for vehicle trains.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, appropriate subclasses, for vehicle spring devices,
    per se.


CLS 280/79.11
TXT Body with bracketed-type or nonsuspended axles (e.g., platform type):

    Vehicles under subclass 29 in which (a) each wheel axle is attached to a
    platform or other type body solely by means of a bracket type support, or
    in which (b) each axle or axle bearing is secured directly to the body
    itself, without the interposition of shock absorbers.

    (1)     Note.  Vehicles having platform type bodies and generally known as
    "Baggage" trucks are found in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Patents in this subclass must have some positive inclusion
    of specialized body structure so as to receive and transport a load as a
    vehicle. The primary function of the claimed device must be transporting as
    opposed to merely supporting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32.6,   for repairmen's creepers.

    47.34,  for stable load supporting vehicles which are handle propelled.

    47.131, for unstable bodies, which when supporting a load become stable.

    62,     63+ and 78, for similar vehicles restricted to the running gear
    respectively specified.

    87.01+, for "coaster" vehicles with similar running gear attachments, most
    of which have tongues or shafts.

    114+,   127+ and 130+, for running gear, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 18+ for casters, per se.

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 51.11+ for
    pallets.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 134+ for shelved racks.


CLS 280/79.2
TXT Vehicles under subclass 79.11 in which the body is in the form of a
    container or for occupant seating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47.38,  for handle propelled occupant seating vehicles, and see the search
    notes thereto.


CLS 280/79.3
TXT Vehicles under subclass 79.11 in which the body is of the open upright
    frame type, usually providing a load support in the form of brackets,
    racks, shelves or trays.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47.19   and 47.35, for plural load support handle propelled vehicles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, appropriate subclasses for
    a horizontal planar support having plural or single surfaces which may be
    provided with wheels or casters to render it incidentally movable.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, appropriate subclasses for open or rack type
    structures per se, which may have wheels to render them incidentally
    movable.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 3+ for rack type
    vehicle bodies for special loads.


CLS 280/79.4
TXT Wheel or tire support body:

    Vehicles under subclass 79.11 with attachments or particular body structure
    configured to support the tire or wheel of another vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 28 for wheel lifters.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 426+ for wheel handlers
    which include some manipulation of the wheel in addition to mere transport.


CLS 280/79.5
TXT Bucket or can support body:

    Vehicles under subclass 79.11 which include attachments or specifically
    shaped body structure for carrying cylindrical objects with their axis
    extending vertically.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 95+ for can supports and bag holders.


CLS 280/79.6
TXT Cylindrical objects with elongated horizontal axis support body:

    Vehicles under subclass 79.11 which include attachments or specifically
    shaped body structure for receiving cylindrical objects with their axis
    horizontally.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes wheeled cradles for rugs and other
    roll goods.


CLS 280/79.7
TXT Vertically elongated rectangular object support body:

    Vehicles under subclass 79.11 which include attachments or specifically
    shaped body structure for receiving panels and other sheet goods, or other
    rectangular objects of little thickness, on their sides.


CLS 280/80.1
TXT Running gear:

    Vehicles under subclass 29 with special reference to that portion of the
    vehicle which is immediately concerned in enabling it to be moved along the
    surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93+     and 103, for stub-axle mountings for steering purposes.

    274+    and 281.1+, for velocipede frames and running gear.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclasses 1+ for resilient wheels.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 669+ and the subclasses there cited, for
    earth working apparatus with a wheel frame.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 21+ for motor vehicles with special
    wheel base.

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, for wheeled and nonwheeled
    implement frames.

    305,    Wheel Substitutes for Land Vehicles, for wheel substitutes.


CLS 280/81.1
TXT Multiple truck:

    Vehicles under subclass 80.1 having running gear composed of a plurality of
    sets of supporting wheels, the wheels of each set being so mounted as to
    constitute a substantially complete running gear unit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 22+ for motor vehicles which have wheel
    bases comprising five or more wheels.


CLS 280/81.5
TXT Vehicles under subclass 81.1 provided with means for steering the vehicle
    by the occupant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87+,    for occupant steered vehicles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 400+ for motor vehicle steering devices.


CLS 280/81.6
TXT Self-steered trucks:

    Vehicles under subclass 81.1 in which the steering occurs in response to a
    deviation of the body from movement in a straight line to permit the trucks
    to turn for proper tracking.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    442+,   for devices wherein the steering is due to an articulative linkage.


CLS 280/82
TXT Devices under subclass 80.1 specially adapted to support and guide the
    tongue of a vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  These trucks are usually used for the tongue of such
    agricultural machinery as harvesters to eliminate "side draft."


CLS 280/83
TXT Devices under subclass 82 which are adjustable to vary the height of the
    tongue.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43+,    and see the notes thereto.


CLS 280/84
TXT Devices under subclass 82 normally traveling on one wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78      and see the notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 18+ for casters.

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 428+ for bearing mounting, or supports.


CLS 280/85
TXT Devices under subclass 82 in which the axle is mounted for pivotal swinging
    movement about a vertical axis and rocking movement about a horizontal axis
    normal to its length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109+    and 126+, for swinging and rocking axles and axle connections.


CLS 280/86
TXT Vehicles under subclass 80.1 in which plural wheels and their mounting
    means are constructed for connection to the vehicle-body with capability of
    swivel motion as a unit with relation thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81.1,   for running gear comprising multiple trucks.


CLS 280/87.01
TXT Vehicles under subclass 29 comprising small vehicles for children's use,
    intended as wheeled coasters.  Includes patents showing the type of vehicle
    known as "scooter-wagons".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12+,    for coaster sleds.

    7.1     and 827, for simulations of this type and such vehicles convertible
    to other types.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 5+ for a wheeled skater support or
    walker pushed ahead of the walker or skater and provided with a seat used
    by the occupant for resting between periods of walking or skating.

    482,    Exercise Devices, subclasses 51+ for an exercise device involving
    user translation or a physical simulation thereof, particularly subclasses
    66+ for an occupant support frame having a movement facilitating feature
    for foot travel.


CLS 280/87.021
TXT Occupant-pushed:

    Vehicles under subclass 87.01 which are specially designed to be pushed
    along by contact of the occupant's hands or feet with the surface over
    which the vehicle travels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23.1,   for push type sleds.

    32.6,   for repairmans' creepers.


CLS 280/87.03
TXT Vehicles under subclass 87.021 in which the vehicle is made to yield under
    the weight of the occupant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 280/87.041
TXT Standing occupant:

    Vehicles under subclass 87.021 which are designed to be pushed along by a
    standing occupant (i.e., scooters).


CLS 280/87.042
TXT Steered by tiltable platform (e.g., skateboard):

    Vehicles under subclass 87.041 where steering is achieved by inclining the
    occupant supporting platform.

    (1)     Note.  These devices may be scooters with a post, but without
    rotation of the wheels by manipulation of the post.  More typically
    vehicles in this subclass are skateboards.


CLS 280/87.043
TXT Rear steering platform on coaster wagon:

    Vehicles under subclass 87.041 where wheel steering is accomplished by
    manual manipulation of a steering device accessible to a standing occupant
    at the trailing end of the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  The rear steering station may be in addition to a front
    steering device manipulated by a first, usually sitting, occupant.


CLS 280/87.05
TXT Vehicles under subclass 87.021 which are extensible or knockdown.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34+,    278 and 287, for other extensible or knockdown vehicles.


CLS 280/87.051
TXT Baby walker:

    Vehicles under subclass 87.021 for supporting an infant or toddler who
    propels the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  The vehicle has no steering mechanism but is merely pushed
    in a desired direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87.03,  for a baby walker with a spring suspension enabling bouncing.

    827+,   for simulations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, appropriate subclasses for specific seats, per se.

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclass 15 for an occupant
    propelled roundabout used as a trainer for foot travel.

    482,    Exercise Devices, particularly subclasses 66+ for an occupant
    support frame having a movement facilitating feature for foot travel.

    D12,    Transportation, subclass 130 for baby walker designs.


CLS 280/87.1
TXT Devices under subclass 771 operated by the foot of the occupant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    265,    for foot steered occupant propelled vehicles.


CLS 280/87.2
TXT Devices under subclass 771 in which the steering gear controls a wheel
    which is offset from the main running gear of the vehicle and which does
    not support any appreciable weight of the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    442+,   for articulated vehicles with wheel steering by articulative
    movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 244.1 for vehicles with furrow followers which
    may be connected to the steering gear of a vehicle and which are usually
    outrigged from the vehicle.  In the devices classified in Class 104 the
    follower (usually a wheel) running in the furrow guides the vehicle, and to
    do this may be connected to the steering gear of the vehicle, with the
    result that the steering gear of the vehicle may control the wheel running
    in the furrow.  In these devices the steering gear has a branch running to
    the main steered wheels of the vehicle and a branch running to the furrow
    following wheel so that this wheel and the main vehicle wheel are steered
    together.  In the type of device classifiable in Class 280 the steering
    gear runs to the outrigged wheel (which may be a furrow following wheel) to
    control that wheel which by its turning movement caused the main vehicle
    wheels to follow without any interconnection with the steering gear.

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 26 for an earth working device guided by a
    wheel running in a furrow, and subclasses 278+ for an earth working device
    with wheel steering means.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 401 for a motor vehicle provided with
    steering gear which includes a land based steering datum and means on the
    vehicle for sensing the datum, which means cooperates with a steering motor
    on the vehicle for the purpose of controlling the course of the vehicle.


CLS 280/88
TXT Vehicles under subclass 771 in which the steering-gear is associated with
    brake mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264,    for occupant propelled vehicles having similar steering and braking
    means.


CLS 280/89
TXT Vehicles under subclass 771 having means for preventing or tending to
    prevent steering motion by force exerted thereon, usually through other
    than the steering-gear.  Does not include a mere irreversible
    transmission-gearing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94,     for stub axle centering means.

    108,    for tongue antivibrators.

    268     and 271, for steering wheel centering  for occupant propelled
    vehicles.


CLS 280/90
TXT Devices under subclass 89 in which the checking means comprises a fluid
    mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 266+ for a fluid-resistance brake or dashpot of
    general utility.


CLS 280/91.1
TXT Four-wheel controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 771 wherein the steering means controls four
    supporting wheels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99+,    for four-wheel controlled short turning vehicles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 234+ for a motor vehicle having four
    wheels driven and provided with means for steering all of the driven
    wheels, and subclasses 409+ for a motor vehicle wherein all of the power
    for steering the wheels is provided by the occupant.


CLS 280/92
TXT Vehicles under subclass 771 in which the steering gear controls but one
    supporting wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270+,   for occupant propelled vehicles controlled by one wheel.


CLS 280/93
TXT Vehicles under subclass 771 in which each steered supporting-wheel has its
    individual axle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96.1+,  for stub axle mounts.

    103,    for stub axle short turn arrangements.

    269,    for stub axle steering wheels for    occupant propelled vehicles.


CLS 280/94
TXT Devices under subclass 93 provided with means tending to return the
    steering-wheels to their straight-line positions when moved therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89+,    for steering checks for occupant steered vehicles.

    268,    for steering centering means for occupant propelled vehicles.


CLS 280/95.1
TXT Link connected:

    Vehicles under subclass 93 in which the stub axles are joined by elongated
    rigid elements for unison steering movement.


CLS 280/96
TXT Devices under subclass 95.1 in which the steering gear includes a rotary
    shaft and gearing.


CLS 280/96.1
TXT Devices under subclass 93 having means for mounting a steering stub-axle
    relative to its support.  This mounting may also have in addition to the
    necessary pivoted movement other relative movements of the axle and its
    support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclasses 124.1+ for nonsteering
    stub-axles.


CLS 280/96.3
TXT Devices under subclass 96.1 where the axis of the stub-axle pivot lies in
    the plane of the wheel.


CLS 280/97
TXT Vehicles under subclass 771 having a supporting wheel axle which swings
    about a vertical pivot.


CLS 280/98
TXT Vehicle running gear under subclass 80.1 specially constructed to make a
    short turn.

    (1)     Note.  Merely a swing-axle on a single pivot directly controlled by
    shafts or tongue is not included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82+,    for vehicle tongue trucks.

    400+,   for articulated vehicles.


CLS 280/99
TXT Vehicles under subclass 98 in which four supporting-wheels are controlled
    to turn the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     for four wheel controlled occupant steered vehicles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 234+ as explained in the reference
    thereto appearing in subclass 91 above.


CLS 280/100
TXT Vehicles under subclass 99 in which two axles carrying the four
    supporting-wheels swing in opposite directions when turning the vehicle.


CLS 280/101
TXT Vehicles under subclass 100 having a pair of members, one connected to
    swing with each axle, pivotally and slidably connected together.


CLS 280/102
TXT Vehicles under subclass 100 having a pair of members crossing each other
    and connecting opposite ends of the two axles together.


CLS 280/103
TXT Vehicles under subclass 98 in which each controlled supporting-wheel has
    its individual axle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93+,    for similar running gear with occupant steering.

    443+,   for articulated vehicles having wheels mounted on stub axles and
    controlled by articulative movement between the vehicles.


CLS 280/104
TXT Vehicles under subclass 80.1 provided with means for transmitting weight
    from the running-gear to the wheels on different axles in substantially
    equal proportions regardless of inequalities of the level of the travelled
    surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     for vehicles with springs, and see the search notes thereto.

    106.5,  for body frames with spring suspension.

    109+,   111+ and 126+, for vehicles with rocking axles.

    124,    for running gear with spring devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 183+ for parallel depression type
    springs.


CLS 280/105
TXT Vehicles under subclass 80.1 in which the running gear is modified for
    roller-bearings to carry the frame on the supporting-wheels or rotating
    axles.  The presence of mere roller or ball bearing wheels does not bring a
    patent into this subclass.


CLS 280/107
TXT Vehicles under subclass 80.1 provided with means for retaining a vehicle
    body or load in position on the running-gear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35      and 47.131+, for article supporting vehicles.

    43.1,   for a vehicle having vertically adjustable ground engaging means
    and which is unstable when in transporting position but which is stabilized
    by an attendant or an article to which the vehicle is temporarily attached.

    143+,   for bolsters and standards for vehicle running gear.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 199, 200+ for body and bolster
    connections for railway cars, 236, for tanks for tenders, 355+, for freight
    cars and 453, for car body suspension and springs.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 35.1+ for body securing
    devices and 42, for stay irons for vehicle bodies.


CLS 280/108
TXT Vehicle running gear under subclass 80.1 having means for locking or
    tending to hold the vehicle tongue or shafts from lateral swing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89+,    for steering gear checks.

    94,     for stub axle centering devices.


CLS 280/109
TXT Vehicles under subclass 80.1 in which one axle is mounted for pivotal
    swinging movement about a vertical axis and rocking movement about a
    horizontal axis normal to its length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for multiple sleds with swivel and rocking connection.

    85,     for swing and rocking axle tongue trucks.

    126+,   for swing and rocking connections.


CLS 280/110
TXT Vehicles under subclass 109 provided with springs between the wheels and
    the load-carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     for vehicles with springs and see search notes thereunder.


CLS 280/111
TXT Vehicles under subclass 80.1 so constructed that the axles may rock
    relatively to each other in vertical planes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for equalized frames.

    109+,   for such axles which also swing.

    126+,   for rocking and swinging axle connections.


CLS 280/112.1
TXT Spring:

    Vehicles under subclass 111 provided with resilient members between the
    wheels and the load-carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     for vehicles with springs, and see search notes thereunder.

    104,    for equalized frames.


CLS 280/112.2
TXT Roll-responsive rocking axles for body banking:

    Vehicles under subclass 112.1 where the axles pivot in a vertical plane in
    response to rotation of the body about a longitudinal axis to angle the
    body into a turn.


CLS 280/113
TXT Vehicles under subclass 80.1 having one axle mounted for pivotal swinging
    movement about a vertical axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85,     for swinging and rocking tongue truck connections.

    109+,   for running gear having swinging and rocking axles.

    125+,   for swinging axle connections.


CLS 280/114
TXT Vehicles under subclass 113 in which each two-wheel axle and its superposed
    mounting form a substantially complete and independent running-gear unit.
    Ordinarily no reaches are used to connect the two though they may be
    employed.  Draft attachments are usually involved.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127+,   for swinging and rocking axle connections of this type.

    130+,   for swinging axle connections of platform type.


CLS 280/115
TXT Vehicles under subclass 114 provided with springs between the wheels and
    the load-carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     for vehicles with springs and see search notes thereto.


CLS 280/116
TXT Vehicles under subclass 113 provided with means for attaching shafts,
    poles, or the like for draft purposes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98      through 102, for short turn vehicles with draft attachments.

    114+,   127+, 130+, and 132, for draft attachments for running gear axles.

    139,    for hounds.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    278,    Land Vehicles:  Animal Draft Appliances, subclasses 52+ for
    specific thill-couplings.


CLS 280/117
TXT Vehicles under subclass 113 in which the vertical axis about which the
    pivotal axle swings is offset from its longitudinal axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    for swinging axle connections of this type.


CLS 280/118
TXT Vehicles under subclass 117 provided with springs between the wheels and
    the load-carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     for vehicles with springs and see the search notes thereto.

    134,    for swinging axle connections of this type.


CLS 280/119
TXT Vehicles under subclass 118 in which all the springs are leaf-springs, and
    they extend longitudinally, or substantially so, of the vehicle.


CLS 280/120
TXT Vehicles under subclass 113 provided with springs between the wheels and
    the load-carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     for vehicles with springs and see the search notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, appropriate subclasses, for vehicle spring devices,
    per se, and see the definition for subclass 2 of that class for the line.


CLS 280/121
TXT Vehicles under subclass 120 in which the springs are of the leaf type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 36.1+ and 229+ for leaf springs for
    vehicles.


CLS 280/122
TXT Vehicles under subclass 121 in which all the springs extend longitudinally,
    or substantially so, of the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    135 and 137, for longitudinal leaf springs for running gear
    swinging axles and axle connections.


CLS 280/123
TXT Vehicles under subclass 121 in which all the springs extend laterally of
    the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    115 and 118, for cross springs for vehicle running gear with swing
    axles or axle connections.


CLS 280/125
TXT Vehicles under subclass 80.1 having mounts for axles allowing them to swing
    about a vertical axis.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and intended subclasses include such
    fifth-wheel and king-bolt structures, per se, as are peculiar to vehicles
    and are not mere bearings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85+,    109+ and 113+, for swinging axles for vehicle running gear.


CLS 280/126
TXT Devices under subclass 125 in which the axle may rock about a horizontal
    axis normal to its length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for multiple truck sleds with swinging and rocking connection.

    85      and 109+, for axles which swing and rock.


CLS 280/127
TXT Devices under subclass 126 in which the axle and its mounting form a
    substantially complete and independent running-gear unit. Ordinarily no
    reaches are used to connect this axle or mount with another, though they
    may be so employed.  Draft attachments are usually involved.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114     and 130, for other platform type mountings.


CLS 280/128
TXT Devices under subclass 127 provided with springs between the wheels and the
    load-carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     for vehicles with springs and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 280/129
TXT Devices under subclass 126 provided with springs between the wheels and
    load-carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     for vehicles with springs and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 280/130
TXT Devices under subclass 125 in which the axle and its superposed mounting
    form a substantially complete and independent running gear unit.
    Ordinarily no reaches are used to connect this axle or mount to another,
    though they may be employed. Draft attachments are usually involved.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114+    and 127+, for other platform type mountings.


CLS 280/131
TXT Devices under subclass 130 provided with springs between the wheels and the
    load-carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     for vehicles with springs, and see search notes thereto.


CLS 280/132
TXT Devices under subclass 125 provided with means for attaching shafts, poles
    or the like for draft purposes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114+,   116 and 127+, for other draft attachments for vehicle running gear.

    139,    for hounds.


CLS 280/133
TXT Devices under subclass 125 having a vertical axis about which the axle
    swings, this axis being offset from its longitudinal axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for swinging axles with offset pivot.


CLS 280/134
TXT Devices under subclass 133 provided with springs between the wheels and
    load-carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118,    for swing axles having a mounting of this type.


CLS 280/135
TXT Devices under subclass 134 in which all the springs are leaf-springs, and
    they extend longitudinally, or substantially so, of the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    122 and 137, for other longitudinal springs with swinging axles.


CLS 280/136
TXT Devices under subclass 125 provided with springs between the wheels and the
    load-carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     and the subclasses noted thereunder.


CLS 280/137
TXT Devices under subclass 136 in which all the springs are leaf-springs, and
    they extend longitudinally, or substantially so, of the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    122 and 135, for other longitudinal leaf-springs for vehicle
    running gear.


CLS 280/138
TXT Devices under subclass 125 having means for preventing rattling between
    cooperating parts.  They are usually resilient means for holding the two
    rubbing members of the fifth-wheel in close contact.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 452 for sound deadeners for railway
    rolling stock.


CLS 280/139
TXT Devices under subclass 80.1 comprising braces between the tongue and front
    axle or between the reach and rear axle.


CLS 280/140
TXT Devices under subclass 80.1 comprising connecting members between the front
    and rear axle running-gear.


CLS 280/141
TXT Reaches under subclass 140 having a swivel-joint to allow the front and
    rear axle gears to oscillate in vertical planes independently of each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85+,    109+, 111+, and 126+, for other connections for rocking axles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 579+ for pitmans and
    connecting rods.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 52+ for swivel joints of general
    utility, particularly subclasses 78+.


CLS 280/142
TXT Reaches under subclass 140 which are adjustable in length.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 586 for longitudinally
    adjustable pitmans and connecting rods.


CLS 280/143
TXT Devices under subclass 80.1 comprising transverse bolsters formed with
    standards at each end and adapted to support either a load or a load
    carrier.

    (1)     Note.  The patents in this subclass and those indented under it
    show the combination of a bolster with its standard or either of the
    elements, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 380+ for similar devices for rail
    vehicles.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclass 43 for stakes and sockets
    for vehicle bodies.


CLS 280/144
TXT Bolsters under subclass 143 having means operative to vary the distance
    between the standards to accommodate varying widths of load or
    load-carriers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34+,    for extensible vehicles.


CLS 280/145
TXT Bolsters under subclass 143 having a pivotal connection between the
    standards and the bolster.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 381 for side folding stakes for
    railway cars.


CLS 280/146
TXT Bolsters under subclass 143 having means to adjust the standard vertically
    to increase or decrease its length.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 389+ for telescopic stakes for
    railway cars.


CLS 280/147
TXT Bolsters under subclass 143 having means securing the standards to the
    bolsters such that the standard can be quickly and easily removed from the
    bolster.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 382+ for releasable stakes for
    railway cars.


CLS 280/148
TXT Devices under subclass 143 having bolsters supplemental to the regular
    bolsters and either superposed thereon or in an intermediate position for
    supporting the load or load-carrier.


CLS 280/149
TXT Devices under subclass 80.1 comprising iron elements of a running-gear,
    especially U-shaped devices for securing the various parts of a running
    gear together, including also the yokes for connecting the legs of the
    U-shaped devices.


CLS 280/149.1
TXT Interchangeable axles:

    Vehicles under subclass 80.1 in which the axle carrying the running gear
    may be replaced by a different axle providing a different running gear
    arrangement.


CLS 280/149.2
TXT Longitudinally shiftable running gear:

    Vehicles under subclass 80.1 in which the running gear units may be moved
    along a line extending in the direction of travel as an assembly, typically
    to change the wheel base.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 24.02 for vertically moveable running gear
    for shifting or proportioning the load, e.g., tag axles.


CLS 280/151
TXT Mechanical devices under subclass 150 attached to a vehicle other than a
    motor-vehicle and operated by the driver of the vehicle to assist in
    starting a heavy load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 35+ for car pushing implements.

    278,    Land Vehicles:  Animal Draft Appliances, subclass 2 for load
    starters, combined with animal draft appliances.


CLS 280/152.05
TXT Dust or mud guards under subclass 847 including a wheel or tire carrying
    means, e.g., a fender well.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclass 42.12 for vehicle attached
    wheel or tire carriers when no modification of the vehicle structure is
    involved.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, appropriate subclasses for
    modifications of a vehicle body to provide a means to receive and carry a
    tire or wheel especially subclass 37.2 for auxiliary wheel compartment
    provided in the vehicle body.


CLS 280/152.1
TXT Dust and mud guards under subclass 847 especially designed for velocipedes.


CLS 280/152.2
TXT Dust and mud guards under subclass 152.1 which are combined with wheel
    guards.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160.1,  for wheel guards, per se.


CLS 280/152.3
TXT Dust and mud guards under subclass 152.1 in which the guard is flexible or
    made in sections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, for structurally
    similar devices, not vehicle dust or mud guards, particularly subclasses
    45+, for awning type; and 130+, for plural strip, slat or panel type as
    there defined.


CLS 280/153.5
TXT Devices under subclass 848 comprising anti-squeak welts or moldings adapted
    to be disposed between a mud-guard and the body or frame of a land vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 393+ for a
    structure having a relatively yieldable preformed member separating other
    components.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 628+ for a static contact seal for other than an
    internal combustion engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable.


CLS 280/154
TXT Dust and mud guards under subclass 848 having means for attaching them to
    the body of a vehicle.


CLS 280/155
TXT Dust and mud guards under subclass 847 secured to the thill or tongue of a
    vehicle.


CLS 280/156
TXT Dust and mud guards under subclass 152 secured to the wheel of the vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclass 154 for mud guards attached to
    resilient tires.


CLS 280/157
TXT Dust and mud guards under subclass 152 secured to the axle of a vehicle.


CLS 280/158.1
TXT Wheel scrapers and cleaners under subclass 855 especially designed for
    velocipedes.


CLS 280/159
TXT Devices under subclass 150 for protecting occupants of a vehicle from
    road-dust.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 77.1+ for storm fronts,
    shields, aprons, and robes for vehicle bodies.


CLS 280/160
TXT Devices under subclass 150 for fending obstacles (not persons) from contact
    with the wheels of a vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 810+ for an earth working tool positioned
    ahead of a motor vehicle and subclasses 508+ for a guard, shield or plant
    diverter for an earth working apparatus.

    293,    Vehicle Fenders, for fenders for vehicles, especially subclasses 58
    for individual wheel guards and 102+ for automobile bumpers.


CLS 280/160.1
TXT Wheel guards under subclass 160 specially designed for velocipedes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses
    144+ for a guard or housing for a belt or pulley.


CLS 280/161
TXT Devices under subclass 150 for protecting a part of a vehicle from injury
    by movement of another part thereagainst.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 452 for sound deadeners for railway
    rolling stock.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclass 41 for wear strips for
    vehicle bodies.


CLS 280/162
TXT Chafe irons under subclass 161 having a roller as a part.


CLS 280/163
TXT Devices under subclass 150 comprising a platform secured to a vehicle to
    facilitate the entry or exit of a person.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291,    for steps for occupant propelled vehicles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 182+ for a stepped
    structure of more general utility.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 443+ for steps for railway
    vehicles.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 82+ for a wall or
    floor attached ladder or step.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclass 75 for vehicle body
    footrests.


CLS 280/164.1
TXT Combined devices:

    Steps under subclass 163 having a part or attachment for performing an
    additional purpose or function.


CLS 280/164.2
TXT Steps combined with shoe scrapers:

    Devices under subclass 164.1 where the additional function is removing dirt
    from shoes or boots.

    (1)     Note.  The scraper may only provide a nominal stepping function,
    actually serving as an interim nonloaded resting position, to clean the
    boot, in the process of entering the vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 237+, for
    boot scrapers not claimed in combination with vehicle structure.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclass 199 for door sills.


CLS 280/165
TXT Steps under subclass 163 attached to the wheel or axle of the vehicle.


CLS 280/166
TXT Steps under subclass 163 having means permitting the step to be moved to
    various positions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclass 91 for a wall or floor
    attached pivoted step.


CLS 280/169
TXT Devices under subclass 163 relating to foot-engaging portion of the step.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 177+ for a wear or
    friction carrying surface of more general utility.


CLS 280/170
TXT Devices under subclass 150 comprising socket devices for holding a whip.


CLS 280/171
TXT Whip sockets under subclass 170 having means to grip the whip to hold it in
    the socket.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176,    for somewhat similar devices where the whip-gripping means is
    locked in its gripping position.


CLS 280/172
TXT Whip sockets under subclass 171 where the gripping means is a spring.


CLS 280/173
TXT Whip sockets under subclass 171 where the gripping means is a rubber gasket.


CLS 280/174
TXT Whip sockets under subclass 171 where the whip-socket is formed of
    pivotally connected sections.


CLS 280/175
TXT Devices under subclass 170 to secure a whip-socket to a vehicle part.


CLS 280/176
TXT Whip-sockets under subclass 170 having locking means to secure the whip
    against displacement.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the patents in this subclass have some form of
    whip-gripping means in combination with a lock to positively hold the said
    means in the whip-gripping position.


CLS 280/177
TXT Whip sockets under subclass 170 having means for holding the lines when not
    in use.


CLS 280/178
TXT Whip sockets under subclass 170 having means operable by the driver of a
    vehicle to use the whip without withdrawal thereof from the socket.


CLS 280/180
TXT Load binders under subclass 179 where the load is hay or similar material.


CLS 280/181
TXT Devices under subclass 150 providing means to support the reins out of
    engagement with a part of the vehicle or tail of the horse.


CLS 280/182
TXT Devices under subclass 150 providing means for holding the lines when not
    in use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177,    for reinholders combined with whip sockets.


CLS 280/183
TXT Reinholders under subclass 182 comprising a clamp.


CLS 280/184
TXT Reinholders under subclass 183 in which the clamp is spring-operated.


CLS 280/185
TXT Reinholders under subclass 184 in which the clamp has spring-pressed
    pivoted jaws.


CLS 280/186
TXT Devices under subclass 150 connected to a vehicle operable to prevent
    movement of the draft animals when left standing, to stop said
    draft-animals in case the driver loses control, and also mechanical devices
    for guiding and controlling said draft-animals.


CLS 280/187
TXT Devices under subclass 186 comprising a weight attached to a tie-line and
    secured to the vehicle in such a manner as to be readily dropped by the
    driver.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also includes the structure of the weight, per
    se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 404, for other weights.


CLS 280/188
TXT Devices under subclass 186 in which a rod pivoted to the vehicle a nd
    connected to a tie-line can by the engagement of its free end with the
    ground cause a tension of the line.


CLS 280/189
TXT Devices under subclass 186 for pulling tension on the driving-lines or
    separate tie-lines operated by the wheels of the vehicle.


CLS 280/190
TXT Devices under subclass 189 where the lines are wound upon a drum.


CLS 280/191
TXT Devices under subclass 190 having a shiftable gear transmission between the
    drum and wheel.


CLS 280/192
TXT Devices under subclass 190 provided with a clutch between the drum and
    wheel.


CLS 280/200
TXT Vehicles under subclass 29 of the type in which there is provided some
    positive means adapting the vehicle to be propelled by the occupant.

    (1)     Note.  These subclasses do not include those vehicles pushed along
    by the hands or feet of the occupant, for which see this class, subclasses
    7.1 and 87.01+.

    (2)     Note.  Due to their closeness in structure, motorcycle frames and
    running gear are included in this group.  Where features are claimed
    limiting the device to a motor vehicle, see Class 180, Motor Vehicles,
    especially subclasses 219+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43.1,   for a vehicle having vertically adjustable ground engaging means
    and which is unstable when in transporting position but which is stabilized
    by an attendant or an article to which the vehicle is temporarily attached.

    87.01+, see (1) Note.

    827,    for simulation type velocipedes, and see the Note to that subclass
    for the line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses, for
    propulsion means, per se, including cranks and pedals, and also where
    necessary vehicle parts, as frame or drive wheel, are included by name only.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 86+ for trackman's car drive.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 219+ for a motor vehicle having a wheel
    arrangement comprising two wheels in tandem relationship.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 64 for manual propulsion for aircraft.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclass 132 for a spring device useful as a
    velocipede seat support.

    384,    Bearings, subclass 431 for a plain bearing and subclass 457 for an
    antifriction bearing for a crankshaft which may include mounting or
    supporting structure for the bearing.

    440,    Marine Propulsion, subclasses 12, 21+ and 94, for hand and foot
    powered propulsion means for movement through water, and see the definition
    of "vessel" in Class 440 in the Class Definition.


CLS 280/201
TXT Vehicles under subclass 200 in which a pump is formed as a part of the
    vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202,    for pump carriers.

    216,    for pumps combined with a propelling system.

    295,    for pumps combined with props.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclasses 415+ for pumps constructed
    and arranged so as to be capable of inflating the tires while the vehicle
    is in motion.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 231+ for pumps attached to vehicles and actuated
    thereby.


CLS 280/202
TXT Vehicles under subclass 200 in which means is provided in the organized
    vehicle for carrying additional passengers or articles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47.35,  handle propelled stable vehicles having plural load supports.

    209,    for parallel connected cycles.

    222,    231+ and 273+, for plural occupant propelled and/or controlled
    vehicles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclasses 400+ for mere attachments
    for carrying articles.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 234+ for an auxiliary seat supported
    by a primary seat.


CLS 280/203
TXT Vehicles under subclass 202 in which the additional carrying means is in
    the form of a side car.


CLS 280/204
TXT Vehicles under subclass 202 in which the additional carrying means is in
    the form of a trailing vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400+,   for vehicle trains and articulated vehicles.


CLS 280/205
TXT Vehicles under subclass 200 which have a single wheel or two wheels having
    a common axis.

    (1)     Note.  Additional steadying wheels may be provided but such wheels
    are not intended to contact the ground when the vehicle is in normal
    operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47.2,   for handle-propelled tiltable type vehicles with auxiliary wheel
    stabilizing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 142 for human balance type monorail
    vehicles.


CLS 280/206
TXT Vehicles under subclass 205 in which the occupant rides within the
    periphery of the wheel.


CLS 280/207
TXT Vehicles under subclass 206 in which both (1) the occupant support rides on
    and (2) power is applied to one or more annuli concentric with the wheel
    axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 10 for motor vehicles with annular
    portable track.


CLS 280/208
TXT Vehicles under subclass 206 which have two wheels side by side.


CLS 280/209
TXT Vehicles under subclass 200 in which means is provided for connecting two
    cycles in parallel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202+,   222, 231+, and 273, for organized vehicles having means for
    carrying additional passengers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 248+ for parallel seats having means
    to couple adjacent ones together.


CLS 280/210
TXT Vehicles under subclass 200 which have some positive means operable by the
    occupant for propelling the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for vehicles propelled by a person walking alongside the vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclass 236 for means for locking the propulsion.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclass, for mechanical
    movements, per se, including cranks and pedals.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 86+ for trackmen's cars.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 64 for manual aircraft propulsion.

    440,    Marine Propulsion, subclasses 21+ for boats and other vessels
    propelled by foot or hand power, and see the definition of "vessel" in
    Class 440 in the class definition.

    482,    Exercise Devices, particularly subclasses 57+ for an exercise
    device involving user translation on a bicycle or physical simulation
    thereof.


CLS 280/211
TXT Vehicles under subclass 210 in which the propelling means is operable to
    steer the vehicle, i.e., one wheel may be driven faster than the other to
    steer the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208,    for bicycle similarly steered.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 6.2+ for motor vehicles steered by
    driving.


CLS 280/212
TXT Vehicles under subclass 210 in which the occupant operated propulsion means
    involves some means for storing energy, which energy is expended in driving
    the vehicle.


CLS 280/213
TXT Vehicles under subclass 212 in which the added power is a sail attachment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11.37,  for skaters' sails.


CLS 280/214
TXT Vehicles under subclass 212 in which the occupant operated propulsion means
    may, at least selectively, directly propel the vehicle without aid of the
    storing means.


CLS 280/215
TXT Vehicles under subclass 214 in which the added energy device is interposed
    in the occupant operated propelling train.


CLS 280/216
TXT Vehicles under subclass 215 in which the interposed energy device is a
    fluid power plant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, appropriate subclasses, for such power plants, per se.


CLS 280/217
TXT Vehicles under subclass 215 in which the interposed energy device is a
    flywheel or weight.


CLS 280/218
TXT Vehicles under subclass 210 in which the fore part of the vehicle moves
    forward alternately with the rear part.  Usually the occupant alternately
    applies and releases his weight from the vehicle seat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for similar vehicles having no wheels.

    1.181+, for similar vehicles of the simulation type.


CLS 280/219
TXT Vehicles under subclass 210 in which the propelling means is constructed to
    intermittently contact the surface over which the vehicle travels to push
    the vehicle along.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.11,  for sleds similarly propelled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 187 for a motor vehicle which includes one
    or more ski-like or runner members and wherein the vehicle is provided with
    at least one surface-engaging propulsion element and further wherein the
    element has a shuffling movement along the surface which supports it; and
    subclass 8.1 for a motor vehicle having a special driving device in the
    nature of a stepper.


CLS 280/220
TXT Vehicles under subclass 210 in which the occupant support moves during the
    propulsion of the vehicle to facilitate its propulsion.  The movable
    support usually is capable of propelling or assisting to propel the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.191+, for similar vehicles of the simulation type.

    218,    for steppers and other nonsimulating velocipedes in which the
    supports advance alternately.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, or Animal Powered, subclass 15.5 for
    motors operated by a pivoted seat.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 195.1+ for a saddle type seat,
    subclasses 285+ for a resiliently mounted seat back, and subclass 312 for
    seat bottom having resiliently mounted independently movable sections.


CLS 280/221
TXT Vehicles under subclass 220 in which the movable support is so connected
    with the propelling train as to propel or assist in propelling the vehicle.


CLS 280/222
TXT Vehicles under subclass 221 which are constructed to be propelled by more
    than one occupant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231+,   for plural occupant propelled vehicles.


CLS 280/223
TXT Vehicles under subclass 221 which have occupant operated means other than
    the movable occupant support for propelling the vehicle.


CLS 280/224
TXT Vehicles under subclass 223 in which the added propelling means is
    constructed to be operated by both the hands and feet of the operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232     and 233+, for other hand and foot propelled vehicles.


CLS 280/225
TXT Vehicles under subclass 223 in which the added propelling means is
    constructed to be operated by the hands of the occupant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242.1+, for other hand propelled vehicles.


CLS 280/226.1
TXT Movable seat:

    Vehicles under subclass 221 in which the movable occupant support is
    constructed to seat the occupant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, or Animal Powered, subclass 15.5 for
    motors operated by a pivoted seat.


CLS 280/227
TXT Vehicles under subclass 226.1 in which the crank hanger moves in unison
    with the seat.


CLS 280/228
TXT Vehicles under subclass 221 which are adapted to be operated by the feet of
    the occupant as in walking.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, or Animal Powered, subclass 16 for belt
    tread operated motors.

    482,    Exercise Devices, particularly subclasses 54 for an exercise
    treadmill device.


CLS 280/229
TXT Vehicles under subclass 220 in which the occupant support moves by reason
    of supporting wheels being eccentrically mounted.


CLS 280/230
TXT Vehicles under subclass 210 which have more than one point of power
    application by the occupant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212+,   for added or stored energy devices.

    223+,   for movable occupant support operated vehicles with added power
    application.


CLS 280/231
TXT Vehicles under subclass 230 which are designed to be propelled by more than
    one occupant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202+,   209, 222, and 273, for other plural occupant propelled vehicles.


CLS 280/232
TXT Vehicles under subclass 231 designed to be operated by the hands of one
    occupant and the feet of another or by both the hands and feet of all
    occupants.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224,    225, 233+, and 242.1+, for other hand or hand and foot operated
    vehicles.


CLS 280/233
TXT Vehicles under subclass 230 which are designed to be operated by both the
    hands and feet of the occupant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224,    225, 232, and 242.1+, for other hand and hand and foot operated
    vehicles.


CLS 280/234
TXT Vehicles under subclass 233 in which the propelling means is interconnected
    with the steering means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240,    for similar devices for single occupant vehicles.


CLS 280/235
TXT Vehicles under subclass 233 which are constructed to be steered by the seat
    of the vehicle or the body of the occupant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266,    for occupant propelled vehicles with seat or body steering.


CLS 280/236
TXT Vehicles under subclass 210 which have means for reversing the direction of
    drive or for varying the ratio of mechanical advantage between the power
    source and the wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclass, for change
    speed or reversing gearing.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, for change-speed
    or reversing planetary transmission.


CLS 280/237
TXT Vehicles under subclass 236 which have means for reversing the direction of
    drive.


CLS 280/238
TXT Vehicles under subclass 236 in which at least two trains of gearing of
    different ratio are provided with a shiftable clutch or gear adapted to put
    one or another train into operation.


CLS 280/239
TXT Vehicles under subclass 210 which are provided with three wheels in tandem.


CLS 280/240
TXT Vehicles under subclass 210 in which the propelling means is interconnected
    with the steering means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    234,    for plural power application vehicles of this type.


CLS 280/241
TXT Vehicles under subclass 210 in which the propelling means includes a belt
    or chain adapted to be intermittently gripped by the power applying means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 136+ and 138+ for similar
    mechanisms of general application.


CLS 280/242.1
TXT Hand propelled:

    Vehicles under subclass 210 in which the propulsion means is operated by
    the hands of the operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224,    225, 232, and 233, for hand propulsion in combination with some
    other occupant propulsion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 86+, for trackmen's cars.


CLS 280/243
TXT Vehicles under subclass 242.1 in which the propelling means includes a
    strap, rope or other flexible member adapted to be wound and unwound on a
    ratcheted or overrunning drum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251,    for other propulsion means of this type, e.g., foot.


CLS 280/244
TXT Vehicles under subclass 242.1 in which the propelling means includes an
    oscillating lever.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    253,    for other propulsion means of this type, e.g., foot.


CLS 280/245
TXT Velocipedes under subclass 244 in which the oscillating lever operates a
    rack and pinion to propel the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254,    for foot operated mechanisms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 29+ and 130+ for similar
    mechanisms of general application.


CLS 280/246
TXT Vehicles under subclass 244 in which the lever is connected to the drive
    wheel by a link or linkage system with a ratchet or overrunning clutch
    interposed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255,    for foot operated mechanisms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 142+ for mechanical
    movements of this type.


CLS 280/247
TXT Vehicles under subclass 244 in which the lever is connected to a crank by a
    link or linkage system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256,    for foot operated mechanisms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclass indented under
    subclass 25, for mechanical movements of this type.


CLS 280/248
TXT Vehicles under subclass 247 in which a gearing system is interposed in the
    propelling mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257,    for foot operated mechanisms.


CLS 280/249
TXT Vehicles under subclass 242.1 in which the power is applied through a hand
    wheel or crank with gearing interposed between the crank and ground wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259+,   for foot operated mechanisms.


CLS 280/250
TXT Vehicles under subclass 249 in which the gearing is a belt or chain gearing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, appropriate
    subclasses for a power transmission using a belt or chain drive system.


CLS 280/250.1
TXT Wheelchair type:

    Vehicles under subclass 242 for use by a seated disabled occupant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    647+,   for folding wheelchairs.


CLS 280/251
TXT Vehicles under subclass 210 in which the propelling means includes a strap,
    rope or other flexible member adapted to be wound and unwound on a
    ratcheted or overrunning drum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243,    for similar hand propulsion means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 136+ and 138+ for
    mechanical movements of this type.


CLS 280/252
TXT Vehicles under subclass 210 in which the power is applied by a straight
    line reciprocation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 25+ for mechanical
    movements of this type.


CLS 280/253
TXT Vehicle under subclass 210 in which the power is applied by an oscillating
    lever.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244+,   for hand propulsion means of this type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 86+ for trackmen's cars.


CLS 280/254
TXT Vehicles under subclass 253 in which the power is transmitted from the
    lever to the wheel by the inclusion of a rack and pinion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    245,    for manually operated devices of this type.


CLS 280/255
TXT Vehicles under subclass 253 in which the power is transmitted from the
    lever to the wheel by a link or linkage and a ratchet or overrunning clutch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246,    for manually operated devices of this type.


CLS 280/256
TXT Vehicles under subclass 253 in which the power is transmitted from the
    lever to the wheel by a link or linkage and crank.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247+,   for manually operated devices of this type.


CLS 280/257
TXT Vehicles under subclass 256 in which a gear train is interposed in the
    drive.


CLS 280/258
TXT Vehicles under subclass 253 in which the lever is connected to a train of
    gearing by means of a ratchet or overrunning clutch.


CLS 280/259
TXT Vehicles under subclass 210 in which the power is applied through a rotary
    crank.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249+,   for manually operated devices of this type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses, especially
    subclasses 594.1+ for cranks and pedals.


CLS 280/260
TXT Vehicles under subclass 259 in which a train of gearing is interposed
    between the crank and wheel.


CLS 280/261
TXT Vehicles under subclass 260 in which the gearing is a belt or chain gearing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, appropriate
    subclasses for a power transmission using a belt or chain drive system.


CLS 280/262
TXT Vehicles under subclass 259 in which the crank is connected to a wheel
    crank by means of a pitman or connecting rod.


CLS 280/263
TXT Vehicles under subclass 200 in which means is provided for steering the
    vehicle by the occupant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.206,  for simulation type velocipedes steered by reins.

    1.207,  for simulation type velocipedes steered by stirrups.

    211,    for occupant propelled vehicles steered by driving.

    234     and 235, for vehicles with hand and foot propulsion and combined
    steering means.

    240,    for occupant propelled vehicles with interconnected steering means.

    771+,   for vehicles steered by the occupant, but not occupant propelled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclass 233 for steering wheel locks.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 551+ for handle bars.


CLS 280/264
TXT Vehicles under subclass 263 in which the steering means is combined with
    the brake.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for occupant steered vehicles with combined steering and brake.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 24.11+ for velocipede brakes, per se.


CLS 280/265
TXT Vehicles under subclass 263 in which the vehicle is constructed to be
    steered by the feet of the occupant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.207,  for velocipede type simulations steered by stirrups.

    87.1,   for vehicles with foot operated steering means.


CLS 280/266
TXT Vehicles under subclass 263 which are constructed to be steered by the seat
    of the vehicle or by the body of the occupant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235,    for hand and foot propelled vehicles steered by seat or bodies.


CLS 280/267
TXT Vehicles under subclass 263 which are steered by means of two wheels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    771+,   for other occupant steered vehicles.


CLS 280/268
TXT Vehicles under subclass 267 in which means is provided for holding the
    vehicle in a straight course or for returning the steering wheels to their
    normal forward position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89+,    for steering gear checks.

    94,     for stub axle centering.

    271,    for one wheeled steering with centering.


CLS 280/269
TXT Vehicles under subclass 267 in which each steering wheel is mounted on a
    separate stub axle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93+,    for occupant steered running gear having stub axles.


CLS 280/270
TXT Vehicles under subclass 263 in which the steering is controlled by a single
    wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92,     for occupant steered vehicles having one wheel control.


CLS 280/271
TXT Vehicles under subclass 270 in which means is provided for holding the
    vehicle in a straight course or for returning it to the straight forward
    position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89+,    94, 108, and 268, for other steering controls or checks for
    vehicles.


CLS 280/272
TXT Vehicles under subclass 270 in which means is provided for restraining
    steering movement of the wheel.

    (1)     Note.  Includes latches for holding the wheel against turning
    movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, especially subclasses 233+ for locks claiming merely
    conventional bicycle structure in combination with a particular key
    operated or combination lock.


CLS 280/273
TXT Vehicles under subclass 270 which are designed to support and be steered by
    plural occupants.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202,    209, 222, and 231+, for other plural occupant vehicles of the
    occupant propelled type.


CLS 280/274
TXT Vehicles under subclass 270 in which only the frame and running gear is
    claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281.1+, where no steering feature is claimed. The mere naming of the
    steering head will not operate to keep the patent out of subclasses 281.1+.


CLS 280/275
TXT Frames under subclass 274 which are constructed to yield usually for the
    purpose of absorbing shocks.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    283,    for other yielding frames.


CLS 280/276
TXT Frames under subclass 275 in which the front fork or the head in which it
    swivels is constructed to yield to road shocks.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    279+,   for other front forks and heads.


CLS 280/277
TXT Front forks under subclass 276 in which the front wheel moves independently
    of the fork.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    285,    for similar constructions for the rear fork.

    286,    for this subject matter where no features are claimed limiting the
    device to a front wheel mounting.


CLS 280/278
TXT Frames under subclass 274 in which the frame is adjustable, foldable or
    knockdown usually for the purpose of shipping or storage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34+,    87.05, and 287, for other collapsible or knockdown vehicles.


CLS 280/279
TXT Frames under subclass 274 in which the invention resides in the front
    steering fork or the frame head in which it swivels.


CLS 280/280
TXT Devices under subclass 279 comprising the crown of the fork.


CLS 280/281.1
TXT Frames and running gear:

    Vehicles under subclass 200 comprising the frame or running gear of
    velocipedes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80.1+,  for vehicle running gear of other types.

    274+,   where steering features are claimed.  The mere naming of a steering
    head will not operate to keep the patent out of this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, subclass 431 for bearing mountings, or supports for pedal
    type crank.


CLS 280/282
TXT Frames under subclass 281.1 which are designed for more than two wheels.


CLS 280/283
TXT Frames under subclass 281.1 in which the frame is designed to yield usually
    for the purpose of absorbing shocks.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87.03,  for yieldable coaster frames.

    275+,   for yielding frames and gear for one  wheel controlled vehicles.


CLS 280/284
TXT Frames under subclass 283 in which the rear forks are yieldable.


CLS 280/285
TXT Frames under subclass 284 in which the rear wheel is mounted to move
    independently of the fork.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277,    for similar arrangement for front forks.

    286,    for this arrangement where no features are claimed limiting the
    device to the rear wheel mounting.


CLS 280/286
TXT Frames under subclass 283 in which the wheel is mounted to move
    independently of the fork where the invention is not limited to either the
    front or rear wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277     and 285, for front and rear wheel mountings of this type.


CLS 280/287
TXT Frames under subclass 281.1 constructed to be extended or readily taken
    apart or folded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34+     87.05, and 278, for other adjustable vehicles.


CLS 280/288
TXT Devices under subclass 281.1 comprising the rear fork, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclass 116
    for means to adjust tension in a bicycle drive chain by moving the rear
    sprocket.


CLS 280/288.1
TXT Low profile:

    Vehicles under subclass 281.1 in which the frame and running gear are
    configured and arranged to accept a recumbant or semirecumbant occupant,
    producing a vehicle with a low center of gravity and reduced wind drag.


CLS 280/288.2
TXT Combined with body:

    Vehicles under subclass 281.1 in which the frame is combined with a
    structure intended to at least partially surround the occupant.


CLS 280/288.3
TXT Hollow shell frames:

    Vehicles under subclass 281.1 in which load bearing structure is formed
    from hollow panels, typically comprised of joined hollow shell halves
    rather than a tubular skeletal truss structure.


CLS 280/288.4
TXT Attachments and accessories:

    Vehicles under subclass 200 including attachments for velocipedes and
    accessories limited to use by the occupant and not otherwise classifiable.

    (1)     Note.  The art indented hereunder is directed to a combination of
    the bicycle with some other subcombination.  Where the class for the
    subcombination provides subclasses for the subcombinations use in
    combination, the proper classification is in that other subcombination
    class.  For instance, Class 70, Locks, provides for locks in special
    applications including bicycles which have provisions to accommodate the
    lock.  Furthermore, Class 70 provides for locks which act on steering
    handles and which lock a cycle's usual driving mechanism.  Similarly, Class
    224,  Package and Article Carriers, takes article carriers even where the
    vehicle structure is changed by the inclusion of bolt holes, angle
    brackets, etc.  Where the organization of a bicycle as a whole is changed
    to provide a carrier, proper classification is in Class 280 subclass 202.
    Handle bar attachments in the form of receivers are placed in Class 224.
    Other handle bar attachments are placed in Class 74.  Windshield and front
    fairings are placed in Class 296.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152.1,  158.1 and 160.1, for mud guards, wheel scrapers, and wheel guards
    respectively, for other vehicles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclasses 233 and 236 for locks for bicycles.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 55.1+ for handle bars;
    551.8 for attachments to handle bars and 594.1+ for cranks and pedals.

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclasses 87+ for canopies.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclasses 412+ for carriers for
    bicycles.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 78+ for cowls and wind
    shields.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 195.1+ for a saddle seat, per se, or
    with only enough vehicle structure as is necessary to support the saddle
    seat.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclass 92
    for a belt or chain cleaner mounted on a velocipede.


CLS 280/290
TXT Devices under subclass 288.4 comprising body harness for velocipede
    occupants.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 770 for tethering a human being and
    subclass 771 for a tether attached to a vehicle;  see search notes of these
    subclasses for further field of search.


CLS 280/291
TXT Devices under subclass 288.4 comprising steps and foot rests for
    velocipedes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163+,   for other vehicle steps and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 280/292
TXT Attachments under subclass 288.4 for towing a velocipede behind either
    another velocipede or some other vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400+,   for vehicle trains and articulated vehicles.


CLS 280/293
TXT Devices under subclass 288.4 for propping up a velocipede when not in use
    or for steadying the vehicle against overturning when in motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203,    for side-car carriers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 5 and 17-22 for velocipede racks and
    stands.


CLS 280/294
TXT Props under subclass 293 mounted upon or attachable to the pedals or pedal
    cranks.


CLS 280/295
TXT Props under subclass 293 combined with other devices or convertible to
    other parts or attachments of velocipedes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    294,    for pedals convertible to props.


CLS 280/296
TXT Combinations under subclass 295 of prop or steadying device and means for
    engaging a wheel of the vehicle or the propulsion means to prevent rolling
    of the vehicle. The engaging means is usually a brake.


CLS 280/297
TXT Combinations under subclass 295 of prop or steadying device significantly
    claimed with locking means to secure the prop against movement by
    unauthorized persons.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include props or steadying devices
    combined with mere latches.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclass 235 for props or steadying devices of conventional
    construction combined with specific locking devices.


CLS 280/298
TXT Props under subclass 293 which are both pivotally mounted on the vehicle
    and extensible therefrom.


CLS 280/299
TXT Devices under subclass 298 wherein the prop or steadying device is
    substantially in the form of a U-frame.


CLS 280/300
TXT Props under subclass 298 having more than one supporting leg.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    299,    for devices wherein the U-frame may have two ground engaging parts
    resembling two legs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 163.1+ for plural leg stands of general
    application.


CLS 280/301
TXT Devices under subclass 293 wherein the prop or steadying device is
    pivotally mounted on the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    298+,   for pivoted and extensible props.


CLS 280/302
TXT Props under subclass 301 which are substantially in the form of a U-frame.
    The frame may be pivoted at the base of the U so that the legs may engage
    the ground, or may be pivoted at the legs so that the base may be
    ground-engaging.  The latter type are usually wheel-straddling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    299,    for pivoted U-frames, which are extensible.


CLS 280/303
TXT Props under subclass 301 having more than one supporting leg.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300,    for pivoted plural leg props.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 163.1+ for plural leg stands of general
    application.


CLS 280/304
TXT Props under subclass 293 extensibly or slidably mounted on the velocipede.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    298+,   for props which are pivoted and extensible.


CLS 280/304.1
TXT Wheelchair:

    Vehicles under subclass 288.4 in which  the attachment is on a vehicle
    intended to be propelled by the hands of a seated occupant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclass 407 for a package or article
    carrier attached to a wheelchair, where the organization of the wheelchair
    is not changed.


CLS 280/304.2
TXT Wheel driven:

    Vehicles under subclass 288.4 in which the attachment utilizes energy
    provided by the moving wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 75 for wheel
    driven generators.


CLS 280/304.3
TXT Guards and reinforcements:

    Vehicles under subclass 288.4 where the attachment protects either the
    vehicle or the occupant.

    (1)     Note.  In some cases the guard is in the form of a reinforcement.
    Also included are devices to prevent the intrusion of clothing or body
    parts into undesired areas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclass 146
    for chain guards not claiming particular bicycle structure.


CLS 280/304.4
TXT Occupant engaging:

    Vehicles under subclass 304.3 where the guard is intended to contact the
    occupant only when a collision or unsafe condition makes the occupant's
    body move.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290,    for restraining devices in the form of harnesses which continually
    engage the occupant's body.


CLS 280/304.5
TXT Handling and carrying attachments:

    Vehicles under subclass 288.4 having devices intended to facilitate
    grasping or moving the bicycle manually taking the form of shoulder posts,
    grasping handholds, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 110+ for handles of general
    utility.


CLS 280/400
TXT Devices under subclass 29 comprising either (1) vehicles having a pivot,
    hinge or flexible section between body parts which are separately connected
    to flexibly joined or separate ground-engaging running gear units, or (2) a
    plurality of separate vehicles connected together in such manner as to
    permit relative motion between the vehicles and to permit a single source
    of draft (push or pull) to propel the vehicles as a unit.

    (1)     Note.  Where the articulated vehicle is solely disclosed for use in
    an earth working or harvesting environment, the proper classification is in
    Class 172.  No specific recitation in the claims of an earth working
    implement or harvester is necessary to cause an assignment in Class 172.
    Thus, where the articulative feature is disclosed solely in the performance
    of an earth working or harvesting operation, the body of art is not
    collected in Class 280.

    (2)     Note.  This and indented subclasses take patents for devices
    wherein one of the units is an art device such as a dumping vehicle, such
    device being claimed by name only.  Providing for the particular art
    devices is analogous to the line set forth in (1) Note above regarding the
    agricultural implement classes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvester, subclasses 6+ for ganged trailing harvesters.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 677+ and the subclasses there noted, for
    earth working apparatus with details of draft connection.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 14.1+ for motor vehicle trains.

    213,    Railway Draft Appliances, for draft appliances between vehicles
    which travel on tracks.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 3 for trains of aircraft.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclass 115 for a fluid spring device useful in
    draft gear; and subclass 138 for a spring device, other than of the fluid
    spring type, for the same use.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 52+ for articulated members in
    general.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 481 and 485 for a
    self-loading or unloading vehicle provided with a load receiving portion
    which is pivotable relative to the horizontal, and wherein the vehicle is
    of the trailer type.


CLS 280/401
TXT Devices under subclass 400 in which the connection between the articulated
    section is designed to cause and/or permit one section of the vehicle to be
    moved from a trailing position to a completely supported position on
    another section of the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  Vehicles classified here may or may not include mechanism
    for positively moving the sections to collapsed position.

    (2)     Note.  Articulated vehicles in which the coupling between the
    sections permits one section to be detached from another so that one
    section may be superposed upon the other for transportation, are classified
    in other subclasses of this group.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402,    for means to transport a vehicle by suspending one end thereof on a
    draft vehicle.


CLS 280/402
TXT Devices under subclass 400 in which the leading vehicle or draft means
    between the vehicles is provided with means to receive the axle, wheels or
    the like of a vehicle to be transported, the leading end of the transported
    vehicle being suspended so that the forward running gear does not contact
    the ground.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    418,    for normal four wheel vehicles convertible to two wheel trailers
    being intended to carry loads as trailers and not merely to be transported.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 563 for towing apparatus
    adapted to engage one end of a vehicle and elevate it into towing position.


CLS 280/403
TXT Devices under subclass 400 in which the articulated vehicles or vehicle
    sections are provided with an enclosed access opening or sealed passageway
    of substantial size therebetween to permit passage of humans from one to
    the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    424,    for passenger carrying semitrailers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 8.1+ for a railway vehicle,
    generally, with vestibule structure.


CLS 280/404
TXT Devices under subclass 400 wherein a plurality of articulated vehicles are
    each provided with load supporting means (usually in the form of bolsters)
    to receive a common relatively long load such as poles or lumber.

    (1)     Note.  The vehicles are frequently connected by means other than
    the load.


CLS 280/405.1
TXT Load distribution adjustment:

    Vehicles under subclass 400 in which (a) the trailing vehicle is
    unbalanced, the leading vehicle sustaining a vertical load as a result
    thereof, and wherein means are provided for selectively adjusting the
    proportion of the trailer load sustained by the leading vehicle and trailer
    running gear or for adjusting the point of load application longitudinally
    of the leading vehicle, or (b) the connection between the vehicles is such
    that the leading vehicle sustains a draft load having a vertical component
    and selectively adjustable means are provided to vary the longitudinal
    location of the point of application of the vertical component of the draft
    load.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes devices wherein a dolly or wheels are
    provided between the leading and trailing vehicle and means are provided to
    adjust the proportion of the trailer weight sustained by the dolly and
    leading vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    476.1,  for a mere dolly acting as a wheeled draft connection.


CLS 280/406.1
TXT Plural connections:

    Vehicles under subclass 405.1 in which there is provided a plurality of
    separate connections between the vehicles at least one of which is
    adjustable for the purpose of adjusting the load distribution.


CLS 280/406.2
TXT House trailer hitch type:

    Devices under subclass 406.1 wherein one of the connections includes an "A"
    - frame drawbar typically used for connection to a vehicle which provides a
    living space for occupants when not being towed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    483+,   for resilient connections having no adjustment to vary the load
    distribution.


CLS 280/407
TXT Devices under subclass 405.1 in which the load distribution adjustment is
    accomplished by adjusting the point of application of draft to the leading
    or propelling vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  The leading or propelling vehicle includes any part of the
    draft mechanism which is rigid therewith when in running relationship with
    other vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    446.1,  for devices wherein the virtual hitch point is shifted in response
    to turning movement of the leading vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 315+, 318+, 321, 326+, 439+, and 452+ for
    earth working implements connected to a tractor by vertically shiftable
    means which act to change the load distribution between the tractor and
    implement.


CLS 280/407.1
TXT Semitrailer type:

    Vehicles under subclass 405.1 in which the trailing vehicle has wheels at
    the rear end only, the front end being supported on the leading vehicle at
    or ahead of the wheels and axles thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    476.1,  for wheeled dollies having no load adjustment mechanism.


CLS 280/408
TXT Devices under subclass 400 in which a single vehicle is provided with means
    at both the leading and trailing ends thereof for attaching the same to
    another vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  Most of the patents in this and indented subclasses are
    directed to a train of vehicles or a single vehicle intended for use in
    train with other vehicles.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this and indented subclasses are vehicles having
    a coupling at both ends thereof merely for the purpose of allowing them to
    be drawn from either end.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, for vehicle trains adapted to travel on
    tracks.


CLS 280/409
TXT Devices under subclass 408 in which the draft means at the front and rear
    of the vehicle are so located or the draft means between the adjacent
    vehicles of a train of vehicles are so disposed that when operated in train
    the longitudinal center lines of the vehicles will be horizontally spaced
    from one another under at least one condition of straight line motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    456.1+, for a pair of articulated vehicles which are laterally offset from
    one another, the offset being adjustable.

    472+,   for a pair of articulated vehicles which are laterally offset from
    one another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 6+ for gang type harvesters.


CLS 280/410
TXT Devices under subclass 408 in which there is provided a direct draft
    transmitting connection between the front and rear draft means on the
    vehicle such that when the vehicle is being operated in train no draft load
    from the succeeding vehicle is transmitted to the frame or running gear
    thereof.


CLS 280/411.1
TXT Multiple trailing vehicles:

    Vehicles under subclass 400 in which there is provided a leading or
    propelling vehicle and a plurality of trailing or propelled vehicles drawn
    by the propelling vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    408+,   for a plurality of articulated vehicles coupled one behind the
    other, each having draft means at both the front and rear.

    476.1,  for a wheeled draft connection which serves only to connect a
    leading and trailing vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 6+ for gang type harvesters, and subclasses
    473.5 and 474+ for carriers associated with harvesters.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 310+ for plural wheeled earth working
    implements and subclasses 624+ for a plurality of earth working implements
    connected to a forward transverse draft bar.


CLS 280/412
TXT Devices under subclass 411.1 in which the relative position of at least one
    of the vehicles with respect to the others may be selectively changed.


CLS 280/413
TXT Devices under subclass 412 in which there are at least two trailing
    vehicles which travel substantially side by side and adjustable means are
    provided to selectively vary the relative positions of these vehicles
    longitudinally.


CLS 280/414.1
TXT Boat carrying type:

    Devices under subclass 400 in which the articulated vehicles are
    constructed to accommodate a boat for transporting the same.

    (1)     Note.  Cross-references of all boat-carrying trailers are being
    collected here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34+,    for extensible vehicles.

    43.11,  for a vehicle having a vertically adjustable wheel, the axis of
    which may be removed to a position above the load carrying surface of the
    vehicle.

    47.131+, for tiltable vehicles stabilized by being attached to an article,
    in some instances a boat, especially subclass 47.331 for such vehicles
    having floats thereon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclass 270 for amphibious vehicles; and subclass 344 for
    boats having attached running gear or wheels adapting the boat to be pulled
    over land, the wheels remaining attached to the boat when used in the water.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, appropriate subclasses for a vehicle
    which is adapted to receive, transport, and relinquish a boat.


CLS 280/414.2
TXT Temporarily attached wheel assembly:
    Devices under subclass 414.1 wherein the boat carrying type of vehicle is
    made up of wheeled assemblies comprising no more than wheels, and axle, and
    means to fasten the assembly to the boat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclass 344 for boats having attached running gear or
    wheels adapting the boat to be pulled over land, the wheels remaining
    attached to the boat when used in the water.


CLS 280/414.3
TXT Boat suspending means:

    Device under subclass 414.1 wherein the boat is supported from flexible
    members attached to a frame which is above the boat.


CLS 280/414.5
TXT Devices under subclass 400 comprising a leading propelling vehicle and a
    trailing vehicle having at least one ground wheel, the wheel being
    vertically adjustable with respect to the trailing vehicle frame (i.e.,
    running gear) by means of an actuator.

    (1)     Note.  The actuator may comprise a servomotor or an attendant
    manipulated lever, gear or the like which provides mechanical advantage.

    (2)     Note.  The patents in this subclass may also involve a concurrent
    vertical adjustment of the draft member with respect to the vehicle frame.

    (3)     Note.  This definition does not include apparatus in which the
    frame or running gear is rocked about the wheel axis, without any other
    relative vertical movement of the axis with respect to the vehicle frame.
    For such subject matter for manipulating an earth working apparatus see
    Class 172, subclasses 323+.

    (4)     Note.  This definition is not intended to include a retractable
    landing gear for a semitrailer.  See subclasses 423.1+ for such devices.
    The definition also does not include a draft connection between articulated
    vehicles with a retractable ground support.  See subclass 475 for such
    devices.  The definition also does not include a wheeled draft connection.
    See subclass 476.1 for such devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43+,    for a vehicle having a vertically adjustable wheel.

    43.17+, for vehicles having wheel means and a running gear and actuating
    means to move the wheel means relative to the running gear.

    414,    for boat trailers with vertically adjustable wheels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 318+ for an actuator on a tractor for
    moving a wheel on an implement vertically with respect to the implement,
    subclasses 326+ for actuating means on a trailing wheeled implement for
    moving the draft means vertically and especially subclass 328 for said
    means interconnected with means to move a wheel vertically.  Also see (2)
    Note above and subclasses 395+ for earth working apparatus having a wheel
    vertically adjustable with respect to a frame.


CLS 280/415.1
TXT Convertible:

    Vehicles under subclass 400 so designed that the character of the device or
    its mode of operation can be changed by reassembling all or some of its
    parts in a different relationship to each other or by the addition or
    omission of a part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    474,    for selectively rigid or flexible couplings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, appropriate subclasses for conversions enabling
    transport of harvesting apparatus.

    172,    Earth Working, appropriate subclasses for implement carriers which
    are converted for movement on roads.


CLS 280/416
TXT Devices under subclass 415.1 in which a vehicle is provided with draft
    means which is convertible so that the vehicle may be drawn by either
    animals or another vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    278,    Land Vehicles:  Animal Draft Appliances, for animal draft
    appliances, per se.


CLS 280/416.1
TXT Convertible or interchangeable from one type coupling to another:

    Vehicles under subclass 415.1 where the articulated connection may be
    changed to a different type of connection by the replacement, rearrangement
    or modification of the coupling members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    476.1,  for wheeled dollies converting a semi to a full trailer or
    modifying the connection.

    500+,   for specific hitches, per se.


CLS 280/416.2
TXT From three point hitch:

    Vehicles under subclass 416.1 which include a frame or other device
    attachable to a tractor three point hitch and carrying another type of
    draft means (e.g., a one or two point hitch).

    (1)     Note.  Devices in this class enable a tractor, having a three point
    hitch used to pull an earth engaging implement, to be modified for pulling
    a wheeled device which is not an earth working implement.  Where the
    adaptation is made from a three point hitch to another type draft yet still
    intended to pull an earth working implement, as disclosed, the proper
    classification is in Class 172.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 248 for convertible earth working hitches.


CLS 280/416.3
TXT Male and female coupling member:

    Vehicles under subclass 415.1 in which a vehicle alternatively presents
    either a male or female coupling element for connection with another
    vehicle having a coupling member of either the female or male type.


CLS 280/417.1
TXT To or from gooseneck:

    Vehicles under subclass 416.1 where one mode of the conversion provides an
    articulated hitch including an inverted U or L shaped member between the
    leading and trailing vehicle, the U or L shape providing clearance for
    existing leading vehicle structure, such as the tailgate, rear deck or
    trunk, or enabling a difference in elevation between the tractor and
    trailer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    425.2,  for shiftable but nonconvertible goosenecks.


CLS 280/418
TXT Devices under subclass 415.1 in which at least one of the vehicles is
    convertible from a four- wheel to a two-wheel vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes vehicles which are intended for use
    as four wheel vehicles only when used independently, but are converted to
    two wheel vehicles when connected with other vehicles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402,    for normally four wheeled vehicles which have the forward wheels
    lifted from the ground for transport purposes.


CLS 280/418.1
TXT Semitrailer-type vehicle:

    Vehicles under subclass 415.1 where the conversion involves unbalanced
    trailing vehicles having running gear at the rear thereof.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes semitrailers adapted to be
    nonpivotally attached to the rear end of another trailer.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not include mere convertible bodies or
    convertible hitches.  The conversion must affect the mode of articulation.
    Conversions of nonarticulated vehicles to semitrailers by the addition of
    an articulated front connection and or rear wheels is included in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    416.1,  for fifth wheels convertible to other type hitches.

    453,    for fifth wheels.

    476.1,  for semitrailers interconnected for articulation utilizing a
    wheeled dolly.


CLS 280/419
TXT Devices under subclass 400 in which each of the articulated vehicles has
    wheels thereon which are adapted to be turned with respect to the vehicles
    for steering purposes and wherein a connection is provided between the
    steerable wheels of the vehicles such that when the wheels of one vehicle
    are turned the wheels of the other vehicle are also turned.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    426     and 442+, for articulated vehicles in which the wheels of a
    trailing unit are steered in response to articulative movement between the
    vehicles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 280 for an earth working implement wheel
    steered by an interconnecting means between it and the steering wheel of a
    motor vehicle.


CLS 280/420
TXT Devices under subclass 400 in which a connection other than the draft
    connection is provided between the vehicles to transmit power from one
    vehicle to the other for miscellaneous purposes such as braking or lighting.

    (1)     Note.  Connections between the vehicles which form a necessary part
    of the articulative relationship therebetween, as for example, steering or
    tracking connections are not included in this or indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    419,    for steering connections between the wheel of a leading and
    trailing vehicle.

    442+,   for auxiliary connections between a leading and trailing vehicle
    for steering the trailer wheels.

    456.1+, for plural connections between a leading and trailing vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 315+ for an earth working apparatus
    comprising a trailing implement with an actuator controlled from a tractor.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 14.1+ for power transmission means
    between the sections of a motor vehicle train.


CLS 280/421
TXT Devices under subclass 420 in which the service connection between the
    vehicles comprises means to conduct fluid from one vehicle to the other
    vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 351+ for a valved fluid flow line
    supported from an automobile.

    213,    Railway Draft Appliances, subclass 76 for the combination of a
    railway draft coupling and a train pipe coupling.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 24+ for the combination of a
    coupling, a guide and support means, and  subclasses 61+ for a coupling
    combined with a support, especially subclass 62 wherein the support
    comprises vehicle means.


CLS 280/422
TXT Devices under subclass 420 in which the service connection between the
    vehicles comprises means to transmit electrical power from one vehicle to
    the other vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, subclass 11 for
    transmission of current from a single source to a plurality of vehicles in
    series.

    213,    Railway Draft Appliances, subclasses 1.3+ for the combination of a
    railway draft coupling and electrical connecting means.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, especially subclasses 34+ for an electrical
    connector combined with a "named" vehicle.


CLS 280/423.1
TXT Semitrailer:

    Vehicles under subclass 400 in which there is provided a tractor capable of
    independent use and an unbalanced trailing vehicle having running gear at
    the rear end thereof, the forward end of the trailer being supported on the
    back of the tractor at or forward of the rear axle of the tractor by an
    articulated connection or fifth wheel which connection transmits all of the
    draft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    476.1,  for wheeled dollies between the tractor and trailer.

    763.1,  for semitrailer land gear.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 418+ for semitrailers having retractable ground supports or
    jacks which are extended by power or force increasing mechanism to raise
    and support the forward end of the semitrailer when detached from the
    tractor and wherein no other significant vehicle structure is claimed.  The
    inclusion of coupling or brake means, for example, is considered to be
    significant vehicle structure.


CLS 280/424
TXT Devices under subclass 423.1 having means to accommodate passengers, at
    least some of whom are carried in the trailing vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403,    for articulated vehicles having an enclosed passage for passengers
    between the vehicle sections.


CLS 280/425.1
TXT Coupling and uncoupling with facilitating lift means:

    Vehicles under subclass 423.1 in which there is provided power or manually
    actuated lift means on the tractor or reacting between the tractor and
    trailer to vertically position the connecting members (a) for coupling, or
    (b) to raise the trailer after coupling.

    (1)     Note.  Devices wherein the trailer is raised or lowered by relative
    movement between the vehicles and direct contact with a camming surface on
    the tractor are not included in this subclass.  This subclass does include
    devices wherein the tractor fifth wheel member is elevated or lowered by
    cams on the tractor, the power being provided by movement of the tractor.

    (2)     Note.  Also included are tractors commonly referred to as "terminal
    tractors" having fifth wheels which are raised after coupling to enable
    trailer movement without retracting the landing gear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    477+,   for coupling facilitating devices for articulated vehicles other
    than the semitrailer type and see the search notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    298,    Land Vehicles:  Dumping, subclass 22 for dumping bodies raised by
    the fifth wheel.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 482 for a coupling lift to
    lower the rear end of the trailer to facilitate loading.


CLS 280/425.2
TXT With additional detachable or shiftable gooseneck:

    Vehicles under subclass 425.1 in which, in addition to the coupling
    facilitation, the articulated connection is at the forward end of an
    inverted L or U shaped member attached to the leading end of a trailer and
    the coupling facilitating lift is between the tractor and the gooseneck.

    (1)     Note.  Coupling facilitation between the trailer and the gooseneck
    is not proper for this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The L or U shaped member may be disconnected or shifted
    relative to the trailer principally for lowering the trailer bed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    441.2,  for a shiftable gooseneck having no coupling facilitation between
    the tractor, and where coupling between the trailer and the gooseneck is
    facilitated.


CLS 280/426
TXT Devices under subclass 423.1 in which the trailer has wheels which are
    mounted to turn with respect to the body or frame for steering movements,
    such steering movements being controlled by the change in angular
    relationship between the tractor and trailer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    442+,   for articulative vehicles of other than the semitrailer type
    wherein the trailer wheels are steered by a change in angular relationship
    between the vehicles, and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 280/427
TXT Devices under subclass 423.1 which are provided with two or more of the
    following:  (1) retractable landing gear to support the trailer when in
    uncoupled condition, (2) brakes to retard or prevent movement of the
    trailer, and (3) coupling mechanisms to detachably connect the trailer and
    tractor, the operation of at least two of these mechanisms being
    interdependent; i.e., the operation of one of the mechanisms actuates the
    other mechanism(s), or operation of one of the mechanisms is a condition
    precedent to the operation of the other(s).


CLS 280/428
TXT Devices under subclass 427 including interdependent operation of the
    trailer brakes and coupling mechanism.


CLS 280/429
TXT Devices under subclass 427 in which the trailer landing gear is retracted
    or extended by the action of coupling or uncoupling the tractor and trailer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    431,    for an interlock between the coupling and landing gear which
    prevents uncoupling of the vehicles with the landing gear retracted or
    prevents retraction of the landing gear until the vehicles are coupled.


CLS 280/430
TXT Devices under subclass 429 in which the trailer coupling member, i.e., the
    member which cooperates with a complementary member on the tractor to
    establish draft connection between the vehicles, is mounted to move
    rectilinearly along the central axis of the trailer during coupling action
    and such movement results in actuation of the landing gear.


CLS 280/431
TXT Devices under subclass 427 in which the coupling means between the vehicles
    is provided with a latch or lock, the latch and landing gear being so
    related that the vehicles cannot be uncoupled unless the landing gear is
    extended and/or the landing gear cannot be retracted before the vehicles
    are coupled together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    429+,   for trailer landing gear which is extended and/or retracted by the
    action of coupling and uncoupling the vehicles.


CLS 280/432
TXT Devices under subclass 423.1 in which there is provided means to prevent
    excessive horizontal angular swing or overriding of the trailer with
    respect to the tractor or means to prevent separation of the tractor and
    trailer in the event that the coupling means should fail.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    457,    for auxiliary safety connections which act to prevent separation of
    the vehicles in case of failure of the primary connection and wherein the
    vehicles are not of the semitrailer type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 112 and 142 for trains of vehicles in which the
    brakes of the rear vehicle are applied by the tendency of the rear vehicle
    to override the leading vehicle.


CLS 280/433
TXT Devices under subclass 423.1 directed to the means by which the tractor and
    semitrailer are releasably and articulatively connected and including no
    more of the vehicle structure than is necessary to mount the connecting
    means.

    (1)     Note.  The nominal inclusion of the running gear of the vehicles
    does not exclude a patent from this or indented subclasses.


CLS 280/434
TXT Devices under subclass 433 in which the connecting means carried by the two
    vehicles assume a coupled or connected relationship as a result of movement
    of one vehicle toward the other in a horizontal plane, requiring no manual
    manipulation at the time of making the connection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    508+,   for self-coupling connections between articulated vehicles other
    than the semitrailer type.


CLS 280/435
TXT Devices under subclass 434 in which the connecting means on one of the
    vehicles includes a pair of jaw or hook members which are pivoted about
    axes transverse to the line of draft and which coact with a complementary
    coupling part on the other vehicle to connect the vehicles together.


CLS 280/436
TXT Devices under subclass 435 in which the pivotal axes for the pivoted jaws
    are so located that the draft applied to the jaws by the complementary
    coupling member biases the jaws to a closed position.


CLS 280/437
TXT Devices under subclass 434 in which one of the vehicles is provided with a
    member which pivots about a horizontal axis which is transverse to the line
    of draft and coacts with a complementary coupling part on the other vehicle
    to effect connection of the vehicles.


CLS 280/438.1
TXT Movably mounted:

    Vehicles under subclass 433 in which at least one of the fifth wheel or
    coupling members is mounted on its vehicle in such manner as to allow
    articulative movement between the vehicles when in coupled or connected
    relationship in addition to the articulative movement permitted by the
    detachable connection between the vehicles.

    (1)     Note.  One example of such an additional articulation axis is the
    transverse pivot axis for a fifth wheel plate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    407.1+, for adjustment of the coupling to distribute the load between
    leading and trailing vehicles.

    446.1+, where the position of a connection is automatically changed in
    response to load or draft connections.

    492+,   for other connections having plural articulation axes.


CLS 280/439
TXT Devices under subclass 438.1 in which the movement of at least one of the
    fifth wheel or coupling members with respect to the vehicle on which it is
    mounted is resisted by resilient means which provides a restoring force
    tending to restore the member to a given position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    483+,   for resilient connections between articulated vehicles of other
    types.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, for spring devices, per se.


CLS 280/440
TXT Devices under subclass 439 in which the resilient means consists at least
    in part of rubber or analogous material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    485,    for resilient means of the rubber block type between vehicles of
    other than the semitrailer types which resists articulation in a plurality
    of directions.


CLS 280/441
TXT Devices under subclass 439 in which at least one of the fifth wheel or
    coupling elements is mounted so as to be movably longitudinally of the
    vehicle to which it is connected and such movement is resisted by springs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    486+,   for resilient connections between vehicles of other than the
    semitrailer type which resist relative movements between the vehicles in
    the line of draft.


CLS 280/441.1
TXT Turntable-type fifth wheel coupling:

    Vehicles under subclass 438.1 in which the tractor carried fifth wheel
    elements are mounted on a platform which rotates about a vertical axis.
    The articulation between the tractor and trailer during steering takes
    place about the turntable axis rather than about the kingpin.


CLS 280/441.2
TXT Detachable or shiftable gooseneck type:

    Vehicles under subclass 423.1 in which the trailer includes an inverted L
    or U shaped member the forward end of which carries an articulated
    connection at a higher elevation than the load body and in which the L or U
    shaped member may be disconnected, raised, or lowered from the trailer
    principally to enable the trailer to come closer to the ground for loading.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    425.2,  for additional lifting means which guide and lift the gooseneck to
    attach it to the leading vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 481 for a self-loading
    vehicle with a lowerable trailer front end and where a ramp is claimed.


CLS 280/442
TXT Devices under subclass 400 in which one or more of the vehicles has wheels
    movably mounted thereon for steering movements and such steering movements
    are controlled by a change in articulative relationship between the
    vehicles.

    (1)     Note.  Merely a single swinging axle which is directly connected to
    the draft connection between the vehicles to be swung thereby is excluded
    from this and indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  The turning of a single dirigible wheel or closely paired
    wheels of tricycle running gear is included here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80.1+,  for running gear and particularly subclass 87.2 for outrigged
    wheels controlled by the steering gear of a vehicle, subclasses 98+ for
    short turn running gear for trailers and subclasses 113+ and 125+ for
    swinging axles for trailers wherein articulated vehicles are not claimed.

    419,    for articulated vehicles each vehicle having wheels mounted for
    steering movement and steering of the wheels on one vehicle resulting in
    steering of the wheels of the other vehicle.

    426,    for articulated vehicles of the semitrailer type in which the
    trailer wheels are steered in response to articulative movement of the
    vehicles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 282 for a wheel on a trailing earth working
    implement steered by articulative movement between the implement and a
    tractor.


CLS 280/443
TXT Devices under subclass 442 in which each of the wheels which is controlled
    by articulative movement of the vehicles is mounted on an individual axle
    which is pivoted at its end to the vehicle.


CLS 280/444
TXT Devices under subclass 443 in which there is provided a vertical pivotal
    connection between the vehicle and draft member and the wheels of said
    vehicle are connected to the draft member and swing on their individual
    axles in response to horizontal turning of the draft member about the
    vertical pivot.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for vehicles having wheels mounted on stub axles which are turned
    in response to pivoting of a draft member, articulated vehicles not being
    claimed.


CLS 280/445
TXT Devices under subclass 444 having means whereby the wheels may be
    disconnected from the drawbar so that pivoting of the drawbar does not turn
    the wheels or having means whereby the drawbar or a portion thereof may be
    held against pivoting to prevent turning of the wheels.


CLS 280/446.1
TXT Condition responsive connections:

    Vehicles under subclass 400 in which there is a connection or draft
    relationship between the vehicles which is modified in response to a change
    in draft condition (e.g., increased load or stress reversal) or
    articulative relationship of the vehicles.

    (1)     Note.  A connection or draft relationship between two vehicles is
    modified if, for example, the type of articulation is changed (e.g., from
    pivoted to rigid connection); or the location of the point of draft
    application (either real or virtual) to either vehicle is changed; or the
    distance between the vehicles is changed or one vehicle is positively
    canted with respect to the other as a result of articulative movement of
    the vehicles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    439+    and 483+, for resilient connections between articulated vehicles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 7+ for earth working apparatus with an
    automatically controlled power means which responds to changes in draft
    force between a trailing implement and a tractor, and subclass 239 for an
    earth working implement with a draft connection to a tractor, said draft
    connection comprising a linkage which responds to change in draft force.


CLS 280/447
TXT Devices under subclass 446.1 in which the point of application of draft
    from the trailing vehicle to the leading vehicle, or vice versa, is free to
    move under operating conditions laterally with respect to leading or
    trailing vehicles, respectively.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    467+,   for devices wherein the point of application of draft load to a
    leading or trailing vehicle is selectively adjustable laterally of the
    vehicle.


CLS 280/448
TXT Devices under subclass 446.1 in which a reversal of the direction of
    stress; i.e., tension to compression or vice versa, in the means connecting
    the vehicles causes a change in the articulation or the manner in which the
    vehicles are articulated.

    (1)     Note.  The connection between the vehicles may be a rigid
    connection for one of the conditions of stress.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    474,    for connections between articulated vehicles which may selectively
    be made rigid or flexible.


CLS 280/449
TXT Devices under subclass 446.1 in which the draft connection between the
    vehicles is automatically disconnected in response to a predetermined
    excessive stress therein.

    (1)     Note.  The release of the connection between the vehicles upon
    overload may be only a partial release, allowing an increase in distance
    between the vehicles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 261+ for earth working apparatus with
    parts which shift upon the occurrence of an overload.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 14.5 for motor vehicle trains with
    overload release means between the vehicles.

    278,    Land Vehicles:  Animal Draft Appliances, subclass 22 for automatic
    horse detachers.


CLS 280/450
TXT Devices under subclass 449 in which the overload release mechanism includes
    a notched or shouldered draft bar, the notch seating a resiliently biased
    detent carried by the member receiving the draft bar, which detent upon
    overload is forced away from the notch to release the draft bar.


CLS 280/451
TXT Devices under subclass 449 in which the draft connection includes a member
    which is destructible upon the occurrence of a predetermined overload.

    (1)     Note.  The destructible element is usually in the form of a break
    pin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 271 for earth working apparatus with a
    frangible means which permits shifting of a part on the occurrence of an
    overload.


CLS 280/452
TXT Devices under subclass 449 which include a coupling member having at least
    one element in the form of a retaining hook or jaw to receive a
    complementary coupling element and being pivoted about an axis transverse
    to the direction of draft, the hook or jaw being movable about the pivot in
    response to overload to release the complementary coupling element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 265+ for an earth working tool swingable
    about a fixed axis on the occurrence of an overload.


CLS 280/453
TXT Devices under subclass 452 in which the hook or jaw and its pivot are
    movable in a straight line in the direction of draft, such movement
    resulting in release of the hook for movement about the pivot.


CLS 280/454
TXT Devices under subclass 452 in which the pivoted hook and coupling member on
    which the hook is mounted each have a link pivoted thereto, the two links
    also being pivoted one on the other.


CLS 280/455
TXT Devices under subclass 452 in which the hook or jaw is held in the coupled
    or retaining position by a resiliently biased member and under overload
    condition overcomes the resilient bias and swings clear and free of the
    member to release the complementary coupling element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 264+ for an earth working apparatus
    comprising a tool shifted upon the occurrence of an overload and a spring
    return device, and subclass 269 for an earth working apparatus comprising a
    tool shifted upon the occurrence of an overload and a resilient latch.


CLS 280/455.1
TXT Antisway hitch:

    Vehicles under subclass 446.1 wherein the ability of the trailing vehicle
    to pivot relative to the leading vehicle is retarded by friction or other
    snubbing devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    432,    for safety devices for semitrailers which prevent jackknifing.

    474,    for selectively rigid or flexible couplings.


CLS 280/456.1
TXT Plural or laterally adjustable connections:

    Vehicles under subclass 400 wherein there is provided (a) a plurality of
    distinct connections between a pair of articulated vehicles, or (b) a
    connection between the vehicles whereby the trailing vehicle or its draft
    connection, including that part mounted on the leading vehicle, can be
    selectively secured in or positively shifted to plural positions at least
    one of which is offset from or at a horizontal angle to the center line of
    the leading vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  A connection between two vehicles includes a connection
    directly between the vehicles or between structure rigid with the vehicles
    (including a rigidly mounted draft bar) and such connection need not be
    secured to each vehicle, but may merely engage therewith such as in a
    vertical load bearing relationship.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    442+,   for plural connections between articulated vehicles wherein one of
    the connections serves to steer the trailer wheels in response to
    articulative movement.

    472,    for nonadjustable, laterally offset vehicles.


CLS 280/457
TXT Devices under subclass 456.1 wherein there is provided in addition to the
    primary draft connection between the vehicles an additional connection
    which transmits the draft in case of failure of the primary draft
    connection, but serves no function nor transmits any draft when the primary
    connection is intact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    433,    for safety devices used in connection with semitrailer type
    articulated vehicles.  However, safety couplings to prevent separation of a
    semitrailer upon failure of the primary coupling have been cross-referenced
    here.


CLS 280/458
TXT Devices under subclass 456.1 in which the connection between the vehicles
    comprises a pair of members each of which is connected to both the leading
    and trailing vehicle, the members crossing one another to give the
    appearance of an X when viewed in plan.


CLS 280/459
TXT Devices under subclass 456.1 in which there is provided a draft member
    pivoted about a vertical axis on both the leading and trailing vehicle and
    an additional connection between the vehicles is provided such that
    pivoting of one of the vehicles with respect to the draft member will
    enforce a proportional pivoting of the second vehicle with respect to the
    draft member.


CLS 280/460.1
TXT Laterally spaced parallel connections:

    Vehicles under subclass 456.1 in which a plurality of separate connections
    is provided between the articulated vehicles, at least two of the
    connections being substantially parallel and spaced from one another in a
    horizontal plane.


CLS 280/461.1
TXT Vertically spaced connections:

    Vehicles under subclass 456.1 in which there is provided a plurality of
    connections between the articulated vehicles, the connections being located
    at different elevations on each vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    497,    for a draft or hitch member which is connected to a leading vehicle
    at vertically spaced points.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 439+ for an earth working apparatus
    having a mast type hitch.


CLS 280/462
TXT Devices under subclass 456.1 in which the trailing vehicle is provided with
    a draft tongue or bar which may be selectively adjusted to vary the fixed
    horizontal angularity between the tongue and trailing vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  Devices wherein the trailing vehicle is provided with a
    swinging axle and a draft member, the horizontal angularity of which is
    adjustable relative to the axle, are included in this and indented
    subclasses.


CLS 280/463
TXT Devices under subclass 462 in which means are provided which operate to
    move the draft member from one adjusted position to another.

    (1)     Note.  Devices in which the tongue is moved from one position to
    another merely by direct manual manipulation thereof, with no mechanical
    advantage, are not included in this and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    468+,   for articulated vehicles which are laterally or angularly
    adjustable and having an actuator to effect the adjustment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 324+ for an earth working apparatus
    comprising a trailing ground supported frame with an actuator for moving
    the tongue of the trailing means laterally.


CLS 280/464
TXT Devices under subclass 463 in which the actuator comprises gearing.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of gearing, see Class 74, Machine Element
    or Mechanism, subclass 640.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47+,    for articulated vehicles which are laterally or angularly
    adjustable and have gearing to effect the adjustment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 640+ for gearing, per se.


CLS 280/465
TXT Devices under subclass 464 in which the gearing comprises a screw and
    nonrotary nut, rotation of the screw causing a relative longitudinal
    movement of the screw and nut to effect adjustment of the tongue.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    470,    for articulated vehicles which are laterally or angularly
    adjustable by means of a screw and nonrotary nut.


CLS 280/466
TXT Devices under subclass 464 in which the gearing comprises a sprocket or
    drum and a flexible chain or belt, cooperating therewith, rotation of the
    sprocket effecting adjustment of the tongue.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    471,    for articulated vehicles which are laterally or angularly
    adjustable by means of a belt and sprocket.


CLS 280/467
TXT Devices under subclass 456.1 wherein the vehicles are provided with
    connecting means whereby the trailing vehicle or its draft connection to
    the leading vehicle (including the draft member mounted on the leading
    vehicle) may be selectively adjusted or positively shifted to various
    positions at least one of which is spaced horizontally from or positioned
    at an angle to the center line of the leading vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    462+,   for articulated vehicles in which the trailing vehicle has an
    angularly adjustable tongue whereby the relative lateral positions of the
    vehicles may be changed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 446+ for a laterally adjustable earth
    working implement coupled to a tractor with a mast type hitch, and
    subclasses 476+ for a laterally adjustable earth working implement coupled
    to a tractor and adapted to be lifted for transport on the tractor by an
    actuator.


CLS 280/468
TXT Devices under subclass 467 in which means are provided which operate to
    move or adjust the laterally or angularly adjustable member from one
    position to another.

    (1)     Note.  Devices in which the adjustable member is moved from one
    position to another merely by direct manual manipulation thereof without
    mechanical advantage are not included in this and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    463+,   for articulated vehicles, the trailing vehicle having a tongue
    which is angularly adjustable by means of an actuator.


CLS 280/469
TXT Devices under subclass 468 in which the actuator comprises gearing.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of gearing see Class 74, subclass 640.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    464+,   for articulated vehicles, the trailing vehicle having a tongue
    which is angularly adjustable by means of gearing.


CLS 280/470
TXT Devices under subclass 469 in which the gearing comprises a screw and
    nonrotary nut, rotation of the screw causing relative longitudinal movement
    of the screw and nut to effect the lateral or angular adjustment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    465,    for articulated vehicles, the trailing vehicle having a tongue
    which is angularly adjustable by means of a screw and nonrotary nut.


CLS 280/471
TXT Devices under subclass 469 in which the gearing comprises a sprocket or
    drum and a flexible chain or belt cooperating therewith, rotation of the
    sprocket effecting the lateral or angular adjustment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    466,    for articulated vehicles, the trailing vehicle having a tongue
    which is angularly adjustable by means of a belt and sprocket.


CLS 280/472
TXT Devices under subclass 400 in which there is provided a leading or
    propelling vehicle and a trailing or propelled vehicle, the longitudinal
    axes of the vehicles being laterally spaced from one another with respect
    to the direction of travel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    409,    for a train of more than two vehicles, the vehicles being laterally
    offset with respect to one another.

    411.1+, for a leading vehicle and a plurality of trailing vehicles which
    are not in tandem with one another.

    462+    and 467+, for articulated vehicles which may be adjusted to travel
    in paths laterally offset from one another.


CLS 280/473
TXT Devices under subclass 472 in which at least one element of the draft
    connection between the vehicles is attached to the drawing or propelling
    vehicle at a point forward of the rear axle and extends from the vehicle in
    front of the rear wheel, the drawn vehicle usually traveling at the side of
    the propelling vehicle.


CLS 280/474
TXT Devices under subclass 400 in which the draft connection between the
    articulated vehicles includes at least one joint which may be adjusted to
    constitute either a rigid or a movable connection during operation of the
    vehicles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    445,    for articulated vehicles having a draft member which is pivoted to
    one of the vehicles to steer the wheels thereof upon pivoting and wherein
    the draft member may be locked against pivoting.

    448,    for a connection between articulated vehicles where the type of
    articulation is modified in response to a change of direction of stress in
    the draft connection.

    478.1+, for a draft member which is releasable from a normally fixed
    position on a vehicle to facilitate connection to another vehicle and then
    returned to its initial position.


CLS 280/475
TXT Devices under subclass 400 in which the draft connection between the
    articulated vehicles is provided with means for engaging the ground to
    partially support one of the vehicles when uncoupled from the other
    vehicle, the support means being movable to a retracted or inoperative
    position when the vehicles are coupled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150.5,  for vehicles, including trailers, having retractable ground support
    to support same when not in motion or detached from another vehicle,
    articulated vehicles not being claimed.

    427+,   for semitrailer landing gear the operation of which is correlated
    with the coupling action or trailer brakes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements of Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 418+ for vehicles having retractable ground support means or
    jacks which are extended by power or force increasing mechanism and wherein
    no other significant vehicle structure is claimed.  The mere mounting of
    the jack or support on a vehicle tongue is not sufficient to exclude a
    patent from Class 254.


CLS 280/476.1
TXT Wheeled draft connection:

    Vehicles under subclass 400 in which the draft connection between the
    articulated vehicles is provided with a ground engaging wheel or wheels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    475,    for a draft connection between articulated vehicles which is
    provided with retractable ground support means which may include a wheel
    for performing a supporting function when the vehicles are uncoupled.

    767,    for other auxiliary wheels for vehicles.


CLS 280/477
TXT Devices under subclass 400 having means designed to lessen the labor
    involved in effecting a connection or disconnection between the vehicles.

    (1)     Note.  Coupling parts which merely automatically connect upon
    contact or relative movement or which may be disconnected merely by
    operation from a remote point are not included in this or indented
    subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  The provision of means in addition to the coupling elements
    to guide coupling elements into engaging relation upon relative movement of
    the vehicle is included here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    475,    for a draft member provided with retractable means to support the
    vehicle on the ground when not coupled to another vehicle.

    504+,   for couplings, per se, especially subclasses 508+ for self-coupling
    devices.  See (1) Note.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 272+ for an earth working implement with
    means to facilitate mounting of the implement on a motor vehicle.


CLS 280/478.1
TXT Draft element bodily shiftable:

    Vehicles under subclass 477 in which the draft or coupling member on one of
    the vehicles is releasable from its normal position on the vehicle to
    permit connection with the cooperating element on the other vehicle and is
    then returned to the normal position.

    (1)     Note.  The normal position of a draft or coupling member on a
    vehicle is defined as that position or range of positions that the part
    assumes or may assume when the vehicle is in running, articulated
    relationship with another vehicle.


CLS 280/479.1
TXT With motor:

    Vehicles under subclass 478.1 in which a nonmanual power means is provided
    to move the shiftable draft element.


CLS 280/479.2
TXT Telescoping drawbar swingable on horizontal guide:

    Vehicles under subclass 478.1 where the drawbar or trailer tongue may
    elongate or retract as well as slide horizontally on a guide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    479.3,  for devices where the retraction is accompanied by forced centering.


CLS 280/479.3
TXT Extensible swingable tow bar with coacting guide for centering:

    Vehicles under subclass 478.1 where either the tow bar or trailer tongue is
    extensible out if its guide to facilitate coupling with another vehicle
    after which, during its retraction, wedges, cams or other surfaces react
    against a guide to center the bar in its normal position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    477,    for a mere ramp or wedge on one vehicle which guides a
    nonextensible tow bar on another vehicle upon relative movement of the two
    vehicles.


CLS 280/480
TXT Devices under subclass 400 in which the draft connection between the
    vehicles is capable of transmitting tension forces, but is incapable of
    transmitting compression forces between the vehicles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 305+ for combined
    fasteners, and subclasses 115+ for cord and rope holders.


CLS 280/480.1
TXT With particular storage for retracted position:

    Vehicles under subclass 480 where the tensile draft connection is stored
    when not in use in or on particular structure of the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  Typically this structure is a reel holding a tow cable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 370+, particularly
    subclasses 390.7, 391+, and 403+ for a reeling device associated with a
    vehicle.


CLS 280/481
TXT Devices under subclass 400 in which there is a leading and trailing vehicle
    (with respect to the direction of motion), the motive power being supplied
    by the trailing vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes patents claiming a device whose primary
    disclosed function is to push another vehicle, or patents claiming a
    fending device of general utility, but having a claim limited to the
    function of pushing another vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    213,    Railway Draft Appliances, subclasses 220+ for railway car end
    bumpers or buffers, and subclass 224 for means (e.g., rods) mounted on a
    railway car which can be used to push a car located on a parallel track.

    293,    Vehicle Fenders, for fenders of general utility which may be
    incidentally disclosed as usable to push vehicles.


CLS 280/482
TXT Devices under subclass 400 in which the normal running distance between a
    leading and trailing vehicle may be selectively changed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    446.1+, for connections between articulated vehicles which increase in
    length responsive to articulative movement between the vehicles.

    478.1+, for a draft element which may be extended from the vehicle to
    effect connection with another vehicle and is then returned to its initial
    position.


CLS 280/483
TXT Devices under subclass 400 in which the articulated connection between the
    vehicles or between the draft means and at least one of the vehicles is
    resiliently biased by spring means or the equivalent against movement in at
    least one direction from a given position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    439+,   for resilient connections between articulated vehicles of the
    semitrailer type.

    449+, for overload release couplings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 678 for an earth working implement with a
    spring biased hitch.

    267,    Spring Devices, for spring devices, per se.


CLS 280/484
TXT Devices under subclass 483 in which the articulated connection between the
    vehicles allows relative movement of the vehicles in a plurality of
    directions or senses, resilient means being provided to resist movement in
    at least two directions.

    (1)     Note.  Where the articulation between the vehicles includes a pivot
    or axis of relative movement and resilient means are provided to resist
    movement in either direction from a neutral position about the pivot or
    along the axis, such is not considered to be a bias in plural directions.


CLS 280/485
TXT Devices under subclass 484 in which the resilient means resisting movements
    in a plurality of directions is made up of a single element such as a coil
    spring or block of rubber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    440,    for resiliently mounted fifth wheel members for semitrailers
    wherein the resilient means includes rubber or the equivalent.


CLS 280/486
TXT Devices under subclass 483 in which the vehicles are connected together by
    a connection allowing limited relative movement therebetween in the
    direction of draft and resilient means is provided to resist such movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    441,    for semitrailers having fifth wheel elements which may slide
    longitudinally, such sliding movement being resisted by springs.


CLS 280/487
TXT Devices under subclass 486 wherein the connection allowing movement between
    the vehicles in the direction of draft is resiliently biased to an
    intermediate or neutral position and the resilient means resists movement
    therefrom in either direction.

    (1)     Note.  The devices in this subclass are designed to provide a
    resilient connection between the vehicles for either tension or compression
    in the draft means.


CLS 280/488
TXT Devices under subclass 483 in which the draft connection between the
    vehicles is provided with a pivot the axis of which is vertical and
    resilient means is provided to resist articulation of the draft means about
    this axis.


CLS 280/489
TXT Apparatus under subclass 483 in which the draft connection between the
    vehicles is provided with a pivot the axis of which is horizontal and
    generally transverse to the line of draft and resilient means is provided
    to resist articulation of the draft means about this axis.


CLS 280/490.1
TXT Vertically adjustable:

    Vehicles under subclass 400 in which the elevation of the draft or coupling
    member on at least one of the vehicles may be selectively adjusted with
    respect to the ground or the vehicle in order to be at the proper height
    for receiving the corresponding member on the other vehicle, or the
    coupling member on one of the vehicles provides a plurality of vertically
    spaced connecting points with which the corresponding coupling member on
    the other vehicle can be selectively connected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    478.1+, for a draft or coupling member which may be vertically shifted with
    respect to the vehicle on which it is mounted to facilitate connection with
    another vehicle and is then returned to its original position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 321 for an earth working apparatus
    comprising an actuator on a vehicle for moving a wheeled implement,
    subclasses 439+ for an earth working implement with a mast type hitch, and
    subclasses 452+ for an earth working apparatus comprising an actuator
    adapted to lift an implement for transport on a tractor.


CLS 280/491.1
TXT Retractable, foldable or knockdown:

    Vehicles under subclass 400 in which the draft member is movable from the
    position occupied on a vehicle when connected to another vehicle to a
    nonuse or hidden position on the vehicle or in which the draft means is
    removable from the vehicle and is capable of being folded or disassembled
    to facilitate handling or storage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    475,    for a vehicle draft member which is provided with a retractable
    stand for supporting the vehicle when in uncoupled condition.

    482,    for draft devices which are extensible to vary the running distance
    between two vehicles.

    638+,   for extensible vehicles.


CLS 280/491.2
TXT Telescoping:

    Vehicles under subclass 491.1 in which the draft means has two members, one
    of which slides linearly within the other.

    (1)     Note.  This telescopic motion may be compounded by some minor
    pivotal motion to accommodate the hitch in its final stored position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    479.2   and 479.3, for draft members which may extend to facilitate
    connection and retract to a normal use position.

    482,    for draft members which may telescope to plural adjusted draft
    positions.


CLS 280/491.3
TXT Pivoting to nonuse position with single draft member:

    Vehicles under subclass 491.1 in which the connection is achieved by a
    single draft member which pivots to its stored position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    491.4,  where the connection is achieved by a draft member with braces
    which fold.


CLS 280/491.4
TXT With folding braces movable to collapsed position:

    Devices under subclass 491.1 where the draft member is rigidly braced in
    its operative position by vehicle connected members which fold or otherwise
    collapse to a nonuse position.

    (1)     Note.  The draft member itself may collapse by either pivoting or
    sliding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    491.3,  where only a single, unbraced draft member pivots to a stored
    position.


CLS 280/491.5
TXT Readily demountable hitch:

    Vehicles under subclass 491.1 characterized by particular structure to
    easily and selectively detach the hitch or draft member.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes temporarily attached hitches.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    495+,   for vehicle mountings which are not intended to be selectively and
    readily removed.


CLS 280/492
TXT Devices under subclass 400 in which the connection between the vehicles
    includes at least two pivots, the axes of which are spaced apart in the
    direction of draft, or includes at least two pivots the axes of which
    intersect, provided the axis of one of the pivots is in or parallel to the
    line of draft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    504+,   for couplings having universal movement, especially subclasses 511+
    for ball and socket couplings.


CLS 280/493
TXT Devices under subclass 492 in which the vehicles are connected together by
    a rigid draft member which is articulated at each end to one of the
    vehicles.


CLS 280/494
TXT Devices under subclass 493 wherein the tow bar is connected to one of the
    vehicles by a horizontal axis pivot only and is connected to the other
    vehicle by a vertical axis pivot or universal joint.


CLS 280/495
TXT Devices under subclass 400 which comprise noncoupling type joints,
    mountings and connections serving to attach a draft member more or less
    permanently to a vehicle and in which more is claimed than the mere fact of
    attachment of the member to the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  The normally separable coupling element is usually found at
    the other end of the draft member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    483+,   for a resilient connection between a draft member and vehicle.

    504+,   for detachable coupling connections between articulated vehicles.


CLS 280/496
TXT Devices under subclass 495 in which the draft transmitting means between a
    leading and trailing vehicle is connected to the leading vehicle at a point
    forward of the axis of the rear axle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    473,    for laterally offset vehicles in which the draft connection to the
    leading or propelling vehicle is forward of the rear axle and extends to
    the side of the vehicle in front of the rear wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 297+ for earth working apparatus
    comprising earth working tools positioned forward of the rear of a motor
    vehicle.


CLS 280/497
TXT Devices under subclass 495 in which the draft element or hitch member of
    the leading vehicle is connected thereto or to structure rigid therewith at
    a plurality of points having different elevations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    461.1,  for plural connections between a leading and trailing vehicle which
    are connected to each vehicle at different elevations.


CLS 280/498
TXT Devices under subclass 495 in which the mounting of the draft or coupling
    member on the vehicle includes a pivot allowing relative movement of the
    member and vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    492+,   for draft connections between articulated vehicles having plural
    spaced joints.


CLS 280/499
TXT Devices under subclass 498 in which the draft member is connected to the
    vehicle by a pivot, the axis of which is vertical, and the vehicle is
    provided a horizontal track or guide spaced from the pivot and engaging the
    draft member to guide the movement of the member in a horizontal plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    447,    for hitches on which the draft member has its bearing on a
    horizontal track or guide and travels freely thereon as the leading vehicle
    turns.

    467+,   for devices wherein the draft element is adjustably secured to a
    horizontally extending bar or guide to change the lateral position of the
    trailing vehicle with respect to the leading vehicle.


CLS 280/500
TXT Devices under subclass 495 in which a vehicle is provided with a fender or
    bumper which is modified to form or have connected thereto a coupling
    element for connecting another vehicle, or in which a coupling element is
    connected to the vehicle fender or bumper by a removable clamp which
    embraces the bumper structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    505,    for couplings in which a conventional, unmodified bumper forms one
    element of the coupling connection by which a pair of articulated vehicles
    are connected and disconnected.


CLS 280/501
TXT Devices under subclass 500 in which the coupling element is connected to
    some other portion of the vehicle in addition to being connected to the
    bumper.


CLS 280/502
TXT Devices under subclass 500 in which the coupling element is connected to
    the fender or bumper by elements which grip the bumper and require no
    modification of the bumper structure to effect the connection.


CLS 280/503
TXT Devices under subclass 495 in which the draft member is connected to the
    vehicle axle, axle housing or gear housing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116     and 132, for a vehicle having a swinging axle with a draft member
    connected thereto.


CLS 280/504
TXT Devices under subclass 400 in which the articulated vehicles are provided
    with complementary parts which are releasably connected together to form
    the draft connection between the vehicles.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses include subcombinations of
    couplings or coupling elements which are disclosed for use in connecting
    articulated vehicles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    433+,   for couplings or fifth wheels for releasably connecting a tractor
    and semitrailer.

    495+,   for detachable connections, including clamps, between a coupling
    element and its associated vehicle.


CLS 280/505
TXT Devices under subclass 504 in which at least one of the vehicles is
    provided with a conventional fender or bumper which forms one element of
    the detachable coupling between the vehicles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500+,   for devices wherein one element of a detachable draft coupling
    connection is secured to the bumper of a vehicle by a clamp, or the
    conventional bumper structure is modified in some manner to form or have
    secured thereto one element of a detachable coupling connection.


CLS 280/506
TXT Devices under subclass 504 in which the coupling is provided with means to
    reduce noise or shocks due to vibration or play in the coupling parts
    during use.


CLS 280/507
TXT Devices under subclass 504 in which means are provided to prevent damage or
    access to the coupling parts, particularly when in uncoupled relation, or
    in which means are provided to lock the coupling parts together to prevent
    unauthorized disconnection.


CLS 280/508
TXT Devices under subclass 504 in which the opposing coupling members
    automatically assume a coupled or connected relationship as a result of
    relative movement toward one another in a horizontal plane and require no
    manual manipulation at the time of making the connection.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes patents where a manual manipulation
    may be required to preset or condition one of the coupling parts for the
    connecting action prior to relative movement and actual connection of the
    parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    434+,   for semitrailer self-coupling devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 275 for earth working apparatus comprising
    a self-coupling connection between a motor vehicle and an implement.


CLS 280/509
TXT Devices under subclass 508 in which one of the coupling members includes a
    movable element which is biased to an open position by a spring or gravity
    or the equivalent to receive a complementary coupling member and is moved
    to a closed or coupled position by the action of the complementary coupling
    member during the coupling operation.


CLS 280/510
TXT Devices under subclass 508 in which one of the coupling members has a
    movable element which normally occupies a closed position to retain the
    complementary coupling member and is moved by movement of the complementary
    member during coupling operation to pass the member after which it returns
    to the closed position.


CLS 280/511
TXT Devices under subclass 504 in which the complementary coupling parts are in
    the form of a ball and a socket.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    508+,   for ball and socket couplings of the self-coupling type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 91+ for ball and socket joints
    of general utility.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 90, 114, and 127+  for ball and
    socket joints of general utility.


CLS 280/512
TXT Devices under subclass 511 in which the socket has a portion or portions
    thereof movable about a fixed axis or axes to permit assembly of the ball
    therein.

    (1)     Note.  Ball and socket joints wherein a portion of the socket is
    subjected to compound motion to allow assembly are not included, but will
    be found in the subclass under which this subclass is indented.


CLS 280/513
TXT Devices under subclass 511 in which the socket has a portion or portions
    thereof movable rectilinearly to permit assembly of the ball therein.


CLS 280/514
TXT Devices under subclass 504 in which each of the coupling members consists
    of a rigid and integral part which is interfitted with the complementary
    coupling member, the members being maintained in coupled relationship by
    the shape of the parts and draft and gravity forces acting thereon.

    (1)     Note.  The coupling elements may be movably connected to the
    respective vehicles and need to be rigid only in that portion which
    directly cooperates with the complementary coupling element to effect the
    connection between the vehicles.


CLS 280/515
TXT Devices under subclass 504 which comprises a coupling member including two
    spaced, relatively fixed elements with aligned apertures, a second coupling
    member having an aperture or eye disposable between the relatively fixed
    elements of the first coupling member with the three apertures aligned, and
    a pin member insertable through the apertures and serving to transmit all
    of the draft of the coupling.


CLS 280/600
TXT Skates under subclass 11.12 having broad runners (substantially as wide or
    wider than the human foot) and short in length (when compared to an average
    ski) especially designed to traverse snow.


CLS 280/601
TXT Devices under subclass 11.12 having runners substantially as wide as the
    human foot and far greater in length that a skate, specifically designed
    for down-hill gliding over snow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    611+,   for ski bindings or fastening devices when only that part of the
    ski which is necessary to make the binding function is claimed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclass 4.5 for snow shoes.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclasses 68+ for water skis
    not including a propelling means.


CLS 280/602
TXT Skis under subclass 601 provided with means to adjust or control the amount
    of longitudinal flexibility or concavity.


CLS 280/603
TXT Skis under subclass 601 provided with structure allowing each ski to be
    made shorter (or longer) relative its longitudinal axis.


CLS 280/604
TXT Skis under subclass 601 provided with structure which 1) prevents or
    minimizes slipping when climbing a hill and/or 2) which increases friction
    between the ski and the snow surface to cause the ski to stop or
    drastically slow down.


CLS 280/605
TXT Skis under subclass 604 wherein the braking means is a member which pivots
    to and from its operative braking position.


CLS 280/606
TXT Skis under subclass 601 provided with 1) means to adjust or control the
    direction of forward movement or 2) handle structure which provides a rest
    or steadying means for the skier.


CLS 280/607
TXT Skis under subclass 601 provided with specific structure or a separate
    plate member on which the skiers foot or boot sole rests.


CLS 280/608
TXT Skis under subclass 601 provided with edge structure which 1) protects the
    ski from abuse or wear and/or 2) helps to guide or keep the ski moving in a
    relatively straight line.


CLS 280/609
TXT Skis under subclass 601 wherein the bottom or snow engaging surface is
    provided with a special or other than flat shape or contour.


CLS 280/610
TXT Skis under subclass 601 made from a plurality of bonded layers and/or from
    a synthetic or man-made material.

    (1)     Note.  An all metal ski is not considered a synthetic material for
    purposes of this subclass.  For all metal, search subclass 601.


CLS 280/611
TXT Devices under subclass 11.3 especially designed to secure skis to a shoe or
    boot.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    600+,   for skis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclass 117.6 for a ski boot with sole
    structure related to but not positively reciting a ski binding or its
    specific structure or means to dynamically interact with the ski binding.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclass 70 for water skis and
    their fastenings.


CLS 280/612
TXT Fasteners under subclass 611 wherein the fastening means utilizes one or
    more magnets.


CLS 280/613
TXT Devices under subclass 611 wherein the fastener operator and/or fastener is
    located in or under the boot sole or on a plate attached to the boot sole.


CLS 280/614
TXT Devices under subclass 611 in which the ski fastener means may be
    alternately converted from the cross-country type (only the toe of the boot
    fastened to the ski) to the downhill type (toe and heel of the boot
    fastened to the ski), such conversion being obtainable while the boot is
    attached, in one form or the other, to the ski.


CLS 280/615
TXT Devices under subclass 611 wherein only the toe of the boot is secured to
    the ski, allowing the heel to move unrestrained. Simple toe straps are
    included herein.


CLS 280/616
TXT Devices under subclass 611 wherein the toe fastener and the heel fastener
    are interconnected by linkage means which moves each fastener to and from
    its fastening position simultaneously.


CLS 280/617
TXT Devices under subclass 611 wherein the toe fastener and the heel fastener
    are mounted on a common support element or guide means, such means being
    other than the ski.


CLS 280/618
TXT Devices under subclass 617 wherein the common support element or guide
    means is mounted on the ski in such a manner as to be movable relative
    thereto or releasable therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are the fastening means wherein
    the boot and binding release as a unit from the ski.


CLS 280/619
TXT Devices under subclass 611 wherein the fastener is in the form of a cable
    or strap-like element, such element engaging the heel of the boot and/or
    the ankle area of the boot.


CLS 280/620
TXT Devices under subclass 619 wherein the cable or strap-like element is
    mounted on a support element or plate, and such support element or plate is
    movably and/or releasably mounted on the ski.


CLS 280/621
TXT Devices under subclass 619 wherein the ski has mounted thereon, means to
    tighten the cable or strap-like element against the heel or ankle of the
    boot.


CLS 280/622
TXT Devices under subclass 619 provided with means to 1) break or sever the
    cable or strap-like element or 2) means to pull such element away from
    fastening engagement with the boot.


CLS 280/623
TXT Devices under subclass 611 wherein the fastener is in the form of a boot
    sole or heel engaging clamp or hold-down.  Each ski may support one or more
    fastening devices which may be similar or diverse in construction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    616,    for hold-downs or clamp interconnected for simultaneous operation.


CLS 280/624
TXT Devices under subclass 623 wherein the hold-down is positioned at the sides
    of the boot and/or at the heel of the boot, but not at the toe of the boot.
     Such fastening means or hold-downs are known in the art as "Spademan"
    bindings.


CLS 280/625
TXT Devices under subclass 623 wherein each hold-down or clamp has two or more
    boot sole engaging members which may or may not be separately operable.


CLS 280/626
TXT Devices under subclass 623 wherein the hold-down or clamp is pivotable
    about a horizontal axis, a vertical axis or both.

    (1)     Note.  Toe irons or side cheeks which adjust to different sizes
    about a vertical axis are not considered pivotable for this subclass, but
    will be found in this class (280) subclass 635.


CLS 280/627
TXT Devices under subclass 626 wherein the pivotable hold-down or clamp is used
    in conjunction with a side-cheek or other nonpivotable hold-down or clamp.


CLS 280/628
TXT Devices under subclass 626 wherein the fastener is mounted so as to pivot
    on at least two axes, one being horizontal and the other vertical.


CLS 280/629
TXT Devices under subclass 626 wherein a single hold-down structure is
    pivotable about one or more vertical axes.


CLS 280/630
TXT Devices under subclass 629 wherein the hold-down pivots about only one axis
    and that axis is fixed.


CLS 280/631
TXT Devices under subclass 626 wherein the hold-down pivots on a single
    horizontal axis which is fixed in a position transverse of the ski.


CLS 280/632
TXT Devices under subclass 631 provided with a latch or catch means to hold the
    pivoted hold-down in a boot engaging position.


CLS 280/633
TXT Hold-downs or clamps under subclass 623 wherein the means supporting the
    hold-down or clamp is adjustable relative to and/or detachable from the ski.


CLS 280/634
TXT Hold-downs or clamps under subclass 623 wherein the structure is specific
    to the hold-down detent or spring tension structure and/or adjustment means
    therefor.


CLS 280/635
TXT Devices under subclass 623 which are fixed to or pivotally mounted on the
    ski and designed to engage the sides of the ski boot sole, adjacent the toe
    end, in a wedging manner as to heel engaging cable or other suitable means
    forces the boot forward.


CLS 280/636
TXT Devices under subclass 611 having means between the ski boot sole and the
    ski for supporting and guiding the movement of the boot relative to the ski
    and/or for reducing friction therebetween.


CLS 280/637
TXT Devices under subclass 611 having a tether or safety line between the ski
    boot and the ski, the purpose of which being to prevent the ski from being
    lost should the ski be separated from the boot.


CLS 280/638
TXT Wheeled vehicles under subclass 29 constructed in such a manner so as to
    allow the physical dimension of the vehicle, or part thereof, to vary or
    change.

    (1)     Note.  The following features, generally associated with vehicles
    of the type found in this class, subclasses 47.1 to 47.41 are not
    considered extensible:



    A.      Detachable or changeable bodies or body portions which are intended
    to be attached or removed merely for the purposes of selectively adapting
    the vehicle to carry different types of loads without change in a vehicle
    dimension other than that produced by the different bodies (subclass 47.18).

    B.      Transitory changes in the wheel and axle positions to aid in
    loading (subclass 47.21).

    C.      Changes in the position of a loading toe or of a rack associated
    with the toe (subclasses 47.27+).

    D.      Retractable elements, as for example, rest legs which do not, when
    extended, produce a substantial change in an overall dimension of the
    vehicle (subclass 47.33).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87.05,  for extensible coasters.

    278     and 287, for extensible and knockdown  occupant propelled vehicles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 67 for a structure of
    more general application having telescoping sub and main enclosures.


CLS 280/639
TXT Vehicles under subclass 638 which vary dimension by folding from a
    condition of use to a more compact or smaller nonuse form, for ease of
    storage or shipment.

    (1)     Note.  Folding baby-carriages are found in this group.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9+,     for vehicles with wheels and runners, the wheels or runners being
    retracting.

    20,     for folding sleds.

    32.6,   for folding repairmen's creepers, 47.25 and 47.38+ for nonfolding,
    occupant seating carts or baby-carriages.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 16.1+ for a chair or seat having
    relatively folding bottom, back and legs; subclasses 311+ for a seat bottom
    movable relative to the remaining structure; subclass 350 for a laterally
    folding or collapsible back; and subclasses 353+ for a back movable
    relative to the remaining structure.


CLS 280/640
TXT Folding vehicles under subclass 639 designed to movably support a casket or
    stretcher.


CLS 280/641
TXT Folding vehicles under subclass 38 in which the axis of each wheel-carrier
    pivot is arranged in a direction transverse to the normal forward direction
    of travel of the vehicle.


CLS 280/642
TXT Folding vehicles under subclass 641 which are in the form of a manually
    powered chair, baby stroller, carriage, perambulator, etc., and are
    structurally stable without the aid of the operator.


CLS 280/643
TXT Folding vehicles under subclass 642 designed to provide a secondary
    function different from a primary function, by the addition, subtraction or
    rearrangement of parts; e.g., carriage to stroller or bed to seat.


CLS 280/644
TXT Folding vehicles under subclass 642 wherein the vehicle body, as opposed to
    the framework and wheel carriers, is made of a flexible material, such as
    leather or cloth.


CLS 280/645
TXT Folding vehicles under subclass 641 comprising a manually powered vehicle,
    adapted to rely upon the operator for equilibrium when in operation, and
    having wheel carriers which are pivoted to the vehicle frame structure.


CLS 280/646
TXT Folding vehicles under subclass 645 having a pair of wheels mounted upon
    members which are adapted to swing toward each other from opposite sides of
    the vehicles as the vehicle is being folded.


CLS 280/647
TXT Folding vehicles under subclass 639 which are manually powered and designed
    to carry an animate occupant in a specific position.


CLS 280/648
TXT Folding vehicles under subclass 647 designed to provide a secondary
    function different from that of a primary function by the addition,
    subtraction or rearrangement of parts, e.g., carriage to stroller or bed to
    seat.


CLS 280/649
TXT Folding vehicles under subclass 647 comprising a frame, itself comprised of
    plurality of elongated members, at least two of which are on each side of
    the vehicle and are pivotally connected to each other intermediate their
    ends.


CLS 280/650
TXT Folding vehicles under subclass 647 intended to carry the occupant in a
    seated position.


CLS 280/651
TXT Wheeled vehicles under subclass 639 comprising a simple vehicle designed to
    support and transport a load and being powered by manual pushing or pulling.


CLS 280/652
TXT Folding carts under subclass 651 having one or two wheels and relying upon
    the manual operator for equilibrium when in operation.


CLS 280/653
TXT Folding carts under subclass 652 having one wheel on the front end and two
    handles on the rear end.


CLS 280/654
TXT Folding carts under subclass 652 having a frame member, a manually
    engagable handle at upper end thereof and a wheel or wheels attached to the
    lower end thereof.


CLS 280/655
TXT Folding carts under subclass 652 provided with a manually engageable handle
    means, such handle means designed to collapse or fold from a use to a
    nonuse position.


CLS 280/655.1
TXT Handle only is collapsible:

    Vehicles under subclass 639 where only the handle is folded and retracted
    so as to change the overall dimensions of the vehicle in changing from a
    use to a non-use vehicle condition.

    (1)     Note.  Where handle movement is additional to other parts
    collapsing, see subclasses above.


CLS 280/656
TXT Extensible vehicles under subclass 638 structurally designed to by pulled
    or towed behind another wheeled vehicle on which the trailer is dependent
    for motion.


CLS 280/657
TXT Extensible vehicles under subclass 638 designed to transport or aid in the
    transport of an animal or human being.


CLS 280/658
TXT Extensible vehicles under subclass 657 designed for a baby or small child.


CLS 280/659
TXT Extensible vehicles under subclass 638 designed to transport an article
    utilizing manual power.


CLS 280/660
TXT Stub axle mounts under subclass 96.1 having one or more springs located
    between the axle and load carrier or vehicle frame, to cushion the
    movements of the axle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    688,    for the broad concept of suspension systems for wheeled vehicles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclasses 133 and 136 for
    nonsteering stub axles showing cushioning springs.


CLS 280/661
TXT Suspensions under subclass 660 provided with manual means to adjust the
    caster and/or camber adjustment of the front wheel.


CLS 280/662
TXT Suspension means under subclass 660 comprising two or more diverse or
    different spring types, e.g., leaf and coil.


CLS 280/663
TXT Suspension means under subclass 660 combined with a lever or rod-like
    member or members designed to stabilize one or both of the front wheels.


CLS 280/664
TXT Suspension means under subclass 663 wherein the spring is of the torsion
    type, providing its flexibility about its own longitudinal axis.


CLS 280/665
TXT Devices under subclass 664 wherein the torsion spring serves to stabilize
    one or both of the steerable wheels, such stabilization tending to force
    the plane of the wheels into a position perpendicular to the ground surface.


CLS 280/666
TXT Devices under subclass 663 wherein the spring is in the shape of a helix or
    coil.


CLS 280/667
TXT Devices under subclass 666 wherein the coil spring is physically located
    above the uppermost of plural lever arms.


CLS 280/668
TXT Devices under subclass 666 wherein the coil spring is mounted on a strut or
    rod which rotates about its longitudinal axes during the steering act, such
    strut being connected at its lower end to a single control lever or arm.
    Such constructions are known in the art as "MacPherson-type" suspensions.


CLS 280/669
TXT Suspension means under subclass 660 wherein the spring is made up of one or
    more flat, elongated flexible elements commonly known as leaf springs.


CLS 280/670
TXT Suspension means under subclass 660 wherein the spring is in the shape of a
    helix or coil.


CLS 280/671
TXT Suspension means under subclass 660 wherein the spring is made of rubber or
    rubber-like material.


CLS 280/672
TXT Suspension means under subclass 660 comprising one or more fluid (liquid or
    gas) springs.


CLS 280/673
TXT Suspension means under subclass 660 wherein the claims are drawn to the
    structure of elements of the suspension system or joints therebetween.


CLS 280/674
TXT Devices under subclass 673 wherein the structural feature claimed is of the
    ball joint type.


CLS 280/675
TXT Devices under subclass 673 wherein the structure of the suspension system
    provides a spatial or geometric relationship between the various parts, for
    example, the relative inclination between the control arm and some other
    structural part.


CLS 280/676
TXT Land vehicles under subclass 104 in which the axles between which the
    weight or load is equalized include two or more axles in tandem, so located
    at one end of the frame of the vehicle that additional means are required
    for supporting the other end of the frame.


CLS 280/677
TXT Tandem axles under subclass 676 wherein each of the tandem axles is
    associated with or attached, one at either end, to an elongate beam member
    and the beam member being pivotally connected at or near its center to the
    frame of the vehicle.


CLS 280/678
TXT Tandem axles with walking beams, under subclass 677 provided with a
    suspension means having one or more fluid type (liquid or gas) springs.


CLS 280/679
TXT Tandem axles with walking beams, under subclass 677 provided with a
    suspension means having one or more torsion type spring elements.


CLS 280/680
TXT Tandem axles with walking beams, under subclass 677 provided with a
    suspension means having one or more leaf type spring elements.


CLS 280/681
TXT Tandem axles with walking beams, under subclass 677 provided with a
    suspension means comprising one or more rubber spring or cushioning
    elements.


CLS 280/682
TXT Tandem axles under subclass 676 wherein each axle is attached to a leaf
    spring means at approximately the center thereof, the outboard end of each
    leaf spring being pivotally connected to the vehicle frame and the inboard
    end of each spring being pivotally connected to a "rocker" means or
    assembly, such means or assembly being pivotally attached, at its center,
    to the vehicle frame.


CLS 280/683
TXT Tandem axles under subclass 676 provided with a fluid (liquid or gas)
    spring or spring suspension system between the axles and vehicle frame.


CLS 280/684
TXT Tandem axles under subclass 676 provided with a suspension means between
    the axles and vehicle frame, such suspension means comprising spring means
    of the torsion type.


CLS 280/685
TXT Tandem axles under subclass 676 provided with a suspension means between
    the axles and vehicle frame, such suspension means comprising spring means
    of the coil or helix type.


CLS 280/686
TXT Tandem axles under subclass 676 provided with a suspension means between
    the axles and vehicle frame, such suspension means comprising spring means
    of the leaf type.


CLS 280/687
TXT Tandem axles under subclass 676 provided with a suspension means between
    the axles and the vehicle frame, such suspension means comprising spring or
    cushioning means made of rubber or a similar resilient substance.


CLS 280/688
TXT Vehicles under subclass 80.1 provided with a spring or spring system
    between the wheels and load carrier or vehicle frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104+,   for equalized frames for vehicles.

    267,    for springs, per se, including vehicle springs, wherein no physical
    connection to the vehicle is claimed.

    660+,   for occupant steered vehicles having spring suspension means.


CLS 280/689
TXT Suspensions under subclass 688 including means to prevent the vehicle from
    tipping or leaning while rounding a curve.


CLS 280/690
TXT Suspensions under subclass 688 wherein the suspended wheel is totally
    independent in both control and movement from all other wheels.

    (1)     Note.  If a fluid line connects two or more wheels (for suspension
    purposes) the system is not considered "independent" for this or indented
    subclasses.


CLS 280/691
TXT Suspensions under subclass 690 wherein the suspended wheel is a steerable
    wheel.


CLS 280/692
TXT Steerable wheels under subclass 691 suspended by spring means comprising
    two or more diverse or different spring types, e.g., leaf and coil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    697,    for independent nonsteerable wheel suspension means involving
    plural diverse springs.

    715,    for nonindependent wheel suspension means involving plural diverse
    springs.


CLS 280/693
TXT Steerable wheels under subclass 691 suspended by fluid spring suspension
    means.


CLS 280/694
TXT Steerable wheels under subclass 691 suspended by leaf spring suspension
    means.


CLS 280/695
TXT Steerable wheels subclass 691 suspended by torsion spring suspension means.


CLS 280/696
TXT Steerable wheels under subclass 691 suspended by coil spring suspension
    means.


CLS 280/697
TXT Independent suspension means under subclass 690 comprising two or more
    diverse or different spring types, e.g., leaf and coil.


CLS 280/698
TXT Independent suspension means under subclass 690 comprising one or more
    fluid type (liquid or gas) springs.


CLS 280/699
TXT Independent suspension means under subclass 690 comprising one or more leaf
    type springs.


CLS 280/700
TXT Independent suspension means under subclass 690 comprising one or more
    torsion type springs.


CLS 280/701
TXT Independent suspension means under subclass 690 comprising one or more coil
    type springs.


CLS 280/702
TXT Suspension means under subclass 688 comprising one or more fluid type
    (liquid or gas) springs.


CLS 280/703
TXT Fluid suspension means under subclass 702 provided with structure to
    prevent or reduce 1) vehicle nose-dive (front end depression) caused by
    rapid vehicle deceleration and/or 2) vehicle squat (rear end depression)
    caused by rapid vehicle acceleration.


CLS 280/704
TXT Fluid suspension means under subclass 702 provided with structure to raise
    or lower a vehicle wheel from or to contact with the road surface.


CLS 280/705
TXT Fluid suspension means under subclass 702 of a type usually found in
    military tanks or similar tracked vehicles wherein the actual spring
    structure is encased in an "arm" structure, one end of the "arm" being
    pivoted to the vehicle body, the other end being in engagement with the
    track.


CLS 280/706
TXT Fluid suspension means under subclass 702 wherein the amount of fluid
    pressure available within the fluid spring is controlled by the application
    of a vacuum or negative pressure.  The vacuum source is usually, but not
    necessarily, the vehicle engine.


CLS 280/707
TXT Fluid suspension means under subclass 702 having an electric control means
    for adjusting the rigidity of the suspension means, the height of the
    vehicle body with respect to the ground surface or the distance between the
    wheel and the vehicle body.


CLS 280/708
TXT Fluid suspension means under subclass 702 wherein 1) each individual spring
    means utilized both liquid and gas in its operation, or 2) a fluid spring
    and a gas spring are connected together in such a manner as to operate as
    one.


CLS 280/709
TXT Fluid suspension means under subclass 702 wherein the fluid is a liquid.


CLS 280/710
TXT Hydraulic suspension means under subclass 709 working in unison or combined
    with nonfluid type springs.


CLS 280/711
TXT Fluid suspension means under subclass 702 wherein the fluid is gas.


CLS 280/712
TXT Pneumatic suspension means under subclass 711 working in unison or combined
    with nonfluid type springs.


CLS 280/713
TXT Pneumatic suspension means under subclass 711 having a linkage or lever
    means which is attached at one end to the load carrying position or vehicle
    frame and which is attached at the other end to pneumatic suspension means,
    the purpose of which being to stabilize or support the pneumatic suspension
    means.


CLS 280/714
TXT Fluid suspension means under subclass 702 wherein the main thrust of the
    claimed disclosure is in a specific valve or valving arrangement.


CLS 280/715
TXT Suspension means under subclass 688 comprising two or more diverse or
    different spring types, e.g., leaf and coil.


CLS 280/716
TXT Suspension means under subclass 688 wherein the suspension means comprises
    rubber spring means.


CLS 280/717
TXT Rubber suspension means under subclass 716 wherein the suspension means is
    a torsion bar or spring means.


CLS 280/718
TXT Suspension means under subclass 688 wherein the suspension means comprises
    leaf spring means.


CLS 280/719
TXT Leaf spring suspension means under subclass 718 wherein the leaf spring
    lies in a plane which is at right angles to the plane in which the
    suspended wheel lies.


CLS 280/720
TXT Leaf spring suspension means under subclass 718 wherein the leaf spring
    consists of a single leaf.


CLS 280/721
TXT Suspension means under subclass 688 wherein the suspension means comprises
    a torsion bar or spring means.


CLS 280/722
TXT Torsion suspension means under subclass 721 wherein the torsion bar or
    spring is in the shape of a helix or coil.


CLS 280/723
TXT Torsion suspension means under subclass 721 wherein the torsion bar or
    spring means lies in a plane which is at right angles to the plane in which
    the suspended wheel lies.


CLS 280/724
TXT Suspension means under subclass 688 wherein the spring is in the shape of a
    helix or coil.


CLS 280/725
TXT Coil suspension means under subclass 724 having a linkage or lever means
    which is attached at one end to the load carrying portion of the vehicle or
    vehicle frame and which is attached at the other end to the coil suspension
    means, the purpose of which being to stabilize or support the coil
    suspension means.


CLS 280/726
TXT Coil suspension means under subclass 725 wherein the lever stabilizer or
    support means lies in a plane which is at right angles to the plane in
    which the suspended wheel lies.


CLS 280/727
TXT Devices under subclass 29 adapted for attachment to various parts of a
    vehicle to perform some special function.


CLS 280/728.1
TXT Inflatable passenger restraint or confinement (e.g., air bag) or attachment:

    Devices under subclass 727 wherein the attachment comprises a bag designed
    to inflate upon impact of the vehicle with an external object and thereby
    confine a vehicle occupant in a protective environment made up of a
    confinement bag and a vehicle seat.

    (1)     Note.  A passenger restraining device of the inflatable type is
    provided for only in this class (280).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    801.1,  for safety belts, per se.


CLS 280/728.2
TXT With specific mounting feature:

    Devices under subclass 728.1 combined with means to connect:  (a) the bag
    housing to a vehicle, (b) the bag to a housing or an inflator or (c) an
    inflator to a housing.


CLS 280/728.3
TXT Deployment door:

    Devices under subclass 728.1 having a cover or lid which opens upon
    inflation of the bag.


CLS 280/729
TXT Devices under subclasses 728.1+ wherein the confinement (air bag) is made
    of a plurality of individual compartments or is made of two or more bags,
    one within the other.


CLS 280/730.1
TXT Inflated confinement specially positioned
    relative to occupant or conforming to the body shape of occupant:

    Devices under subclass 728.1 wherein the confinement, when inflated, is (a)
    positioned in a particular manner with respect to the occupant's body or
    (b) is shaped or contoured with respect to a particular part of the
    occupant's body.


CLS 280/730.2
TXT Mounted in vehicle and positioned laterally of occupant:

    Devices under subclass 730.1 wherein the confinement is stored during its
    nonuse or uninflated condition within the vehicle at the side of the
    occupant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 216.1+ for a crash seat.


CLS 280/731
TXT Devices under subclasses 728.1+ wherein the confinement is stored in its
    nonuse or deflated condition within or on the vehicle steering column.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    777,    for a land vehicle of the wheeled type provided with means whereby
    one or more of its wheels may be steered by an occupant and wherein the
    steering column or other element of the means is movable in response to a
    collision, and see especially (1) Note of that subclass.


CLS 280/732
TXT Devices under subclasses 728.1+ wherein the confinement is stored in its
    nonuse or deflated condition within or on the vehicle instrument panel or
    "dash-board".


CLS 280/733
TXT Devices under subclasses 728.1+ wherein the inflatable confinement is 1)
    shaped as or resembles a belt, strap or harness arrangement and/or 2) is
    combined with a belt, strap or harness arrangement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    801.1+, for noninflatable safety belt and harness arrangements and for
    inflatable safety belt and harness arrangements which inflate under
    conditions other than upon impact or impending impact.


CLS 280/734
TXT Devices under subclasses 728.1+ which are inflated in response to one or
    more particular vehicle conditions which assume impending collision or
    crash.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 268+ for a motor vehicle provided with a
    belt or harness for restraining an occupant and with means whereby the belt
    or harness controls, or is controlled by, the functioning of a vehicle
    system or component; and subclasses 271+ for a motor vehicle provided with
    means (frequently a means which is responsive to a condition of the vehicle
    or its operation) for promoting the safety of the vehicle, its occupant or
    load, or an external object.


CLS 280/735
TXT Devices under subclass 734 wherein the confinement inflation initiation
    means and or condition sensor is electrical.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.45+ for
    electric switch sensors.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 10.1
    to complete the search for electric control for air bags.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 436 and 438 for electrical
    alarms or indicators of collision or contact with an external object or
    responsive to a condition of the vehicle.


CLS 280/736
TXT Devices under subclasses 728.1+ having an inflation fluid source or
    generator and the means to control such fluid flow from the source to the
    confinement or to the atmosphere or such fluid flow from the confinement to
    the atmosphere.


CLS 280/737
TXT Devices under subclass 736 provided with means to open or rupture a closure
    in the fluid source to allow the inflation fluid to flow to the confinement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 67+ for destructible valve control.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 3 for gas dispensing that can be used with an
    air bag and subclass 5 for gas dispensing with a cutter or punch.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclasses 90+ for mechanical
    inflation means (e.g., lever actuated compressed gas release).


CLS 280/738
TXT Devices under subclass 736 having means to draw ambient air into the flow
    line and mix such air with the inflation fluid, such mixture being the
    total or resultant inflation fluid which fills the confinement.


CLS 280/739
TXT Devices under subclass 736 provided with means to deflate the confinement
    after inflation thereof.


CLS 280/740
TXT Devices under subclass 736 wherein the confinement is provided with means
    to diffuse or deflect the stream of inflation fluid, thereby spreading the
    stream of inflation fluid from a single point to a more general area within
    the confinement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, appropriate subclasses for specific filter
    structure, per se.


CLS 280/741
TXT Devices under subclasses 728.1+ having a specific inflation fluid source or
    generator therefor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 200+ for igniters, per se,
    and subclasses 530 and 531 for cartridged gas generators.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 164, 165, and 166 for gas generators
    that can be used with an air bag.


CLS 280/742
TXT Devices under subclasses 728.1+ having a specific inflation fluid control
    therefor.

    (1)     Note. See search notes in subclass 737 above.


CLS 280/743.1
TXT Specific confinement structure:

    Devices under subclass 728.1 wherein the confinement or the bag is provided
    with a specific shape or is defined by its specific structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 3 for flexible bags which are inflatable.

    493,    Manufacturing Container of Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 405+ for bag folding, per se.


CLS 280/743.2
TXT With confinement expansion regulating tether or strap:

    Devices under subclass 743.1 combined with a strip or band which controls
    the inflation of the bag to conform to a certain shape or limit the
    extension of the bag.


CLS 280/748
TXT Devices under subclass 727 designed to protect a vehicle occupant from
    injury should the vehicle sharply decelerate or collide with another object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    728.1+, for inflatable "air-bag" confinements.

    801.1+, for seat belts and shoulder harnesses.


CLS 280/749
TXT Devices under subclass 748 comprising nets, curtains, transparent sheets or
    the like, designed to catch or restrain the forward movement of a vehicle
    occupant, should the vehicle sharply decelerate or collide with another
    object.


CLS 280/750
TXT Devices under subclass 748 connected to the vehicle steering wheel or
    column and designed to protect the vehicle driver by cushioning the driver
    impact on the steering wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    731,    for "air-bag" type confinements associated with a vehicle steering
    column.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 492+ for steering posts,
    per se, subclass 552 for steering wheels, per se.


CLS 280/751
TXT Devices under subclass 748 wherein the safety guard comprises 1) the
    addition of padding to the standard interior vehicle elements and/or 2)
    addition of nonstandard, padded elements to the vehicle interior, all of
    which being designed to cushion an occupant impact upon the element should
    a collision occur.


CLS 280/752
TXT Devices under subclass 751 wherein 1) the padded member is the vehicle
    instrument panel or dashboard or 2) the instrument panel or dashboard is
    modified in such a manner as to receive a padded or cushioned member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 90.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclass 70 for similar art.


CLS 280/753
TXT Devices under subclass 751 which move from an inoperative position to an
    operative position upon the occurrence of a condition, that condition
    usually being rapid deceleration.


CLS 280/754
TXT Devices under subclass 727 which extend between the vehicle frame (or other
    unsprung portion) and the vehicle axle (or other sprung portion) for the
    purpose of preventing the vehicle spring from flexing in either or both
    directions.

    (1)     Note.  These devices are usually used to lock the vehicle spring
    and body together to prevent having to raise the body of an automobile
    excessively off the ground to change a tire.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 199+ for a motor vehicle which is
    provided with powered, ground-engaging means for producing, or assisting in
    the production of, lateral movement of the vehicle (e.g., for parking), and
    see particularly (2) Note of subclass 199 regarding the frequent
    appearance, in that area, of a device or element for preventing the sagging
    of a wheel and its suspension members when the portion of the vehicle to
    which they are attached is raised.


CLS 280/755
TXT Devices under subclass 727 designed to stabilize or otherwise keep the
    vehicle from rolling or tilting past a given point.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 282+ for a motor vehicle which is
    provided with means for promoting the safety of the vehicle, its occupant
    or load, or an external object, and wherein the means is one which may be
    responsive to the sensing of a tilt of the vehicle.


CLS 280/756
TXT Devices under subclass 727 wherein the vehicle is provided with one or more
    bar arrangements extending over and around the occupant compartment, such
    bar or bar arrangement designed 1) to protect the occupant from being
    crushed should the vehicle overturn and/or 2) protect the occupant from
    object falling from overhead.


CLS 280/757
TXT Devices under subclass 727 which can be attached to a conventional vehicle
    and which are designed to provide traction with the road surface to
    eliminate skid or slide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 5+ for a brake for nonrail vehicle, which brake
    is applied to the ground for the purpose of either checking the vehicle's
    forward motion or preventing side motion or skidding thereof.


CLS 280/758
TXT Devices under subclass 757 wherein the added traction is provided by a
    shift in position of movable weights, such shift caused by the centrifugal
    force generated as the vehicle begins to change direction.


CLS 280/759
TXT Devices under subclass 757 wherein the added traction is provided by the
    addition of static weight masses.


CLS 280/760
TXT Devices under subclass 727 wherein the attachment is in the form or 1) a
    platform or shelf type accessory or 2) the means by which tractor
    accessories are mounted or attached to the tractor frame.


CLS 280/761
TXT Devices under subclass 727 wherein the attachment is in the form of a
    manually actuated device designed to minimize the physical effort required
    to parallel park a vehicle.  The devices usually take the form of means to
    relieve a major portion of the weight of the steering wheels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 199+ for a motor vehicle which is
    provided with powered, ground-engaging means for producing, or assisting in
    the production of, lateral movement of the vehicle (e.g., for parking); and
    subclass 204 for a motor vehicle which is provided with a device for
    programmably operating the vehicle's steerable wheels during a parking
    maneuver of the vehicle.


CLS 280/762
TXT Attachments under subclass 727 which are attached to and used on the
    exterior of the vehicle.


CLS 280/763.1
TXT Retractable prop, support or stabilizer:
    Device under subclass 762 which provides the vehicle with a means to brace
    or hold the vehicle in a fixed or established position, such means being
    carried by the vehicle in a nonuse, stored position, and such means
    provided with a mechanism which will extend or otherwise move the means
    into a use position, when the vehicle is not in motion.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are devices which relieve the vehicle
    suspension or vehicle wheels of the weight of the vehicle in order to
    stabilize the vehicle in a working position, e.g., outrigger.  Also
    included are devices which level a stationary vehicle relative to an
    unlevel vehicle supporting surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implement or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 418+ for a vehicle attached jack which is extended by a power or
    force increasing mechanism, to lift the vehicle or a part thereof off of
    the vehicle supporting surface, for the purposes of repair to the vehicle
    or to position the vehicle relative to something else, e.g., positioning a
    semitrailer relative to a tractor for coupling to or uncoupling from the
    trailer.

    293,    Vehicle Fenders, for the combination of a jack and a vehicle bumper.


CLS 280/764.1
TXT With actuator for pivoted support:
    Device under subclass 763.1 wherein the prop, support or stabilizer is
    hinged to the vehicle frame in such manner so as to pivot or swing into or
    out of an operative position, and such prop, support or stabilizer is
    provided with structural means to initiate or bring about such movement.


CLS 280/765.1
TXT Having additional translating or telescoping movement:

    Device under subclass 864.1 wherein the swinging or pivoting movement is
    coupled with a translating, telescoping or otherwise elongating movement,
    both movements being necessary to bring the prop, support or stabilizer
    into operative position.


CLS 280/766.1
TXT With actuator for translating or telescoping movement:

    Device under subclass 763.1 wherein the prop, support or stabilizer moves
    in operative position by means of a translating, telescoping or otherwise
    elongating movement, and such prop, support or stabilizer is provided with
    structural means to initiate or bring such movement about.


CLS 280/767
TXT Substitute or auxiliary wheels under subclass 762 for assuming the weight
    of the vehicle when either the tires, wheels or axles thereof are disabled
    for any reason.


CLS 280/768
TXT Devices under subclass 762 wherein the attachment is a skirt or barrier to
    be used in conjunction with a house trailer, mobile home or the like, such
    skirt to extend from the floor level to the trailer to the ground and
    usually being for purpose of insulation, storage and/or appearance.


CLS 280/769
TXT Device under subclass 762 designed to support and carry a load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, for a vehicle supported article
    carrier, where the organization of the vehicle is unchanged.


CLS 280/770
TXT Devices under subclass 762 designed to protect a particular part of the
    vehicle from externally caused damage.


CLS 280/771
TXT Occupant steered:
    Vehicles under subclass 80.1 having steering means operable by the occupant
    of the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16      and 21.1, for occupant-steered sleds.

    47.11,  for hand-propelled vehicles with steering means.

    263+,   for occupant-propelled vehicles with  steering means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 400+ for a motor having means for
    guiding it, and see the search notes therein to other subclasses of that
    class (180) which relate to the steering of a motor vehicle.


CLS 280/772
TXT With cornering tipping deterrent:

    Apparatus under subclass 771 comprising means for 1) counteracting external
    forces tending to overturn the vehicle, or 2) at least improve the turning
    characteristics of a vehicle during travel in a curved path.


CLS 280/773
TXT With manually powered hydraulic steering:
    Apparatus under subclass 771 comprising steerable wheel moving means
    comprising a liquid impelling means powered by the normal manual steering
    action of a vehicle operator, the impelled liquid providing the force to
    steer the vehicle.


CLS 280/774
TXT With remote position steering:

    Apparatus under subclass 771 wherein addition to the normal steering
    arrangement there is provided means by which the vehicle operator may guide
    the vehicle from a position spaced from the normal operator's steering
    position.


CLS 280/775
TXT With adjustable steering wheel or column:
    Apparatus under subclass 771 wherein the steering wheel is movable to at
    least one other operating position at the occupant's steering station.

    (1)     Note.  The steering wheel may be moved to either another use or to
    a nonuse position.


CLS 280/776
TXT Including bias means maintaining steerable wheel and elongate surface
    engagement (e.g., furrow followers):

    Apparatus under subclass 771 in which there is provided means connected to
    a movable steering part for either urging or maintaining a steerable ground
    engaging wheel in engagement with elongate side wall or a rut, curb, or the
    like for steering the vehicle thereby (e.g., furrow followers).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87.2,   for another land vehicle of the occupant steered type which is
    adapted to follow a rut, curb, or the like, but wherein an additional wheel
    is provided for engaging such a surface feature, and see the search notes
    of that subclass (87.2) for related art in other classes.


CLS 280/777
TXT Steering column or wheel movable in response to collision:

    Apparatus under subclass 771 wherein the steering means includes parts
    either movable or deformable upon receipt of an excessive frontal impacting
    force so that possible injury thereby to the occupant (vehicle operator) is
    either avoided or minimized.

    (1)     Note.  A bag inflatable or impact mounted on a steering column is
    not considered to be a movable or deformable steering part for
    classification here, see Class 280, subclasses 728+.  However, an
    inflatable air bag mounted on a steering means having claimed movable or
    deformable parts responsive to an impact force in excess of a normal
    operating force is considered proper for classification here.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass are patents in which steering
    mechanism is moved by either the impact of a collision or by a vehicle
    operator in response to forces of a collision.


CLS 280/778
TXT Plural steering hand grips or noncoaxial steering wheel and column:

    Apparatus under subclass 771 comprising either plural manually engageable
    and movable steering members or a manually engageable steering wheel
    rotating about an axis other than the axis of its associated steering
    column means for steering the vehicle.


CLS 280/779
TXT With steering column mount or support: Apparatus under subclass 771
    comprising the structure fixedly holding the steering post or column in
    place on the vehicle.


CLS 280/780
TXT Having nonrigid member:

    Apparatus under subclass 779 wherein the means to hold and maintain the
    steering post or column in its normal operating position includes either a
    resilient or a pliant means to allow for slight (either misalignment or
    relative) movement between the steering post or column and the vehicle.


CLS 280/781
TXT Vehicle frame:

    Wheeled running gear under subclass 80.1 having a frame on which a vehicle
    body may be mounted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 633+ for openwork
    structures such as trusses or trellises; and subclasses 720.1+ for
    elongated rigid members having general application including vehicle use as
    disclosed.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 397 and 404 for passenger and
    freight car frames.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 291+ for a motor vehicle wherein the
    motor and the body frame are related specifically to one another; and
    subclass 311 for a frame for a vehicle, which frame includes a feature
    peculiar to a vehicle of the motor-propelled kind.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 178 through 187 and
    203+ for vehicle frames claimed in combination with body structure and a
    disclosure of or a broadly claimed reference to running gear.


CLS 280/782
TXT Forming fluid or electrical conduit means or having other means to
    accommodate the transmission of a force or signal: Apparatus under subclass
    781 in which the frame, or a portion thereof is constructed (1) to serve as
    a fluid or electrical conductor, or (2) to accommodate means for the
    transmission of energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5+,     for a vehicle having a vehicle service tank.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclasses 400+ for vehicle attached
    carriers.


CLS 280/783
TXT Having storage compartment:

    Apparatus under subclass 781 in which the vehicle frame is particularly
    constructed to encompass or to form a means usable to store or confine a
    miscellaneous article or substance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5+      for a vehicle having a service tank attached thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclass classes 400+ for vehicle
    attached carriers.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 10+ for a vehicle body
    which is a convertible box; and subclasses 37+ for vehicle bodies having an
    auxiliary article compartment.


CLS 280/784
TXT Having impact absorbing means:

    Apparatus under subclass 781 in which a portion or all of the frame is
    designed to permanently or temporarily change shape or dimension upon
    impact of the frame with another body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    293,    Vehicle Fenders, subclasses 107+, 129, 131, and 132+ for impact
    absorbing bumpers for vehicles.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclass 189 for impact absorbing
    body structure.


CLS 280/785
TXT Assembled from prefabricated connectable sections:

    Apparatus under subclass 781 in which the frame is an assemblage of a
    plurality of unitary preassembled structural members adapted to be
    interconnected or otherwise joined together.


CLS 280/786
TXT Single longitudinal beam type:

    Apparatus under subclass 781 having a single backbone type beam member
    comprising the sole longitudinal structural member extending substantially
    the length of the frame.


CLS 280/787
TXT With spring suspension means:

    Apparatus under subclass 786 in which the frame member is provided with a
    spring suspension means whereby said frame is mounted to its supporting
    structure (e.g., running gear).


CLS 280/788
TXT With resilient means for suspension:
    Apparatus under subclass 781 in which the frame member is provided with a
    spring suspension means whereby said frame is mounted to its supporting
    structure (e.g., running gear).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass accepts the combination of a specific type of
    frame and a suspension; however, when the claim is directed to the
    suspension with only a nominal recitation of frame structure, search this
    class, subclasses 660+ for the steerable suspension, or search this class,
    subclasses 688+ for the nonsteerable type of suspension.


CLS 280/789
TXT Trailer type:

    Apparatus under subclass 781 in which the frame is specifically constructed
    for use in a nonpowered vehicle to be pulled by a tractor or other vehicle
    having self-propelling means.

    (1)     Note.  Patents are classified in this subclass in which the type of
    vehicle is claimed nominally (e.g., semitrailer, boat trailer, etc.);
    however, patents claiming structure which accommodates a specific load or
    which are specific to any type of vehicle are classified with that type of
    vehicle.  See this class, subclasses 423.1+ for semitrailers; and
    subclasses 414+ for boat trailers.

    (2)     Note. Patents are classified in this subclass in which a hitching
    means for the trailer is nominally claimed.  Patents claiming vehicles and
    specific hitch structure are classified in this class, subclasses 491.1+.


CLS 280/790
TXT Having vertically offset load bearing surface:

    Apparatus under subclass 781 in which a section of the frame when viewed in
    side elevation, has a portion which is vertically offset from at least
    another portion of said frame along its length and said portion is capable
    of supporting a load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for vehicle frames claimed in combination with a body having a drop
    portion, or frames having a drop portion claimed in combination with body
    means and/or axle(s) for wheels.


CLS 280/791
TXT Pinched frame type:

    Apparatus under subclass 781 formed of a plurality of first vehicle frame
    sections having elongated members extending longitudinally and spaced
    transversely of the vehicle, said sections being spaced longitudinally of
    the vehicle and connected by other longitudinal frame means of lesser
    transverse dimension than that of the first frame sections.


CLS 280/792
TXT Wide-hipped frame type:

    Apparatus under subclass 781 in which the shape of the frame as seen in
    plan view includes a wide box-shaped mid portion and narrower sections
    extending from said mid portion in both fore and aft directions.


CLS 280/793
TXT X-frame type:

    Apparatus under subclass 781 having members which form an X as the frame is
    seen in plan view.


CLS 280/794
TXT Transverse frame members form "X":
    Apparatus under subclass 793 in which the frame is provided with members
    extending generally transversely of the frame and which are crossed or
    otherwise interconnected to form an X as seen in plan view.


CLS 280/795
TXT Transverse member is body support:
    Apparatus under subclass 781 wherein the frame is provided with a
    transversely extending member by which a body may be supported.


CLS 280/796
TXT Having tubular transverse frame member:
    Apparatus under subclass 781 having a transverse frame member which is
    circular or oval shaped in cross section.


CLS 280/797
TXT Longitudinal frame member is box-shaped:
    Apparatus under subclass 781 having a longitudinal frame member which is
    square or rectangular shaped in cross section.


CLS 280/798
TXT Longitudinal frame member is tubular:
    Apparatus under subclass 781 having a longitudinal frame member which is
    circular or oval shaped in cross section.


CLS 280/799
TXT Longitudinal frame member is an "I" beam:
    Apparatus under subclass 781 having a longitudinally extending frame member
    which is I-shaped in cross section.


CLS 280/800
TXT Longitudinal frame member is channel-shaped:

    Apparatus under subclass 781 having a longitudinally extending member which
    is channel-shaped in cross section.


CLS 280/801.1
TXT Safety belt or harness, e.g., lap belt or shoulder harness:
    Apparatus under subclass 727 wherein the vehicle is provided with a
    flexible, straplike member engageable with the body of a vehicle occupant
    and preventing, restraining, or limiting movement of the occupant relative
    to the vehicle should the vehicle sharply decelerate, collide with another
    object, or be involved in any other sudden, unexpected movement.

    (1)     Note.  A safety belt or harness included in this and the indented
    subclasses must be combined with significant vehicle structure such as, (a)
    where the vehicle structure has been specifically modified in some way to
    accommodate the belt or harness device, (b) where the vehicle structure
    operationally cooperates with the belt or harness device (e.g., the folding
    of the front seat back moves belt system to allow occupant access to the
    rear seat of the vehicle or the belt or harness device relies upon the
    opening or closing of a vehicle door for its operation), or (c) where the
    belt or harness device is combined with other extraneous vehicle structure
    (e.g., a door or a portion thereof, a door opening, a dashboard, a
    windshield, a vehicle, brake or bumper, a rocker panel, or seating
    arrangements peculiar to a vehicle).  Mere, incidental attachment of the
    belt or harness device or accessories therefor to named, conventional
    vehicle body portions (e.g., the vehicle body or frame, center post,
    transmission tunnel, roof rail, floor pan, side panel, or vehicle seat) or
    the location of a portion of the belt or harness device relative to such
    named, conventional vehicle body portions does not constitute significant
    vehicle structure and will, accordingly, place the document in Class 297,
    subclasses 468+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    733,    for an inflatable device designed to inflate upon impact or
    impending impact where the inflatable device is (a) shaped as or resembles
    a belt, strap, or harness arrangement or (b) is combined with belt, strap,
    or harness arrangement.

    801.2,  for a safety belt or harness having an adjustable anchor means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., particularly subclasses 572+ for a
    device in the nature of a buckle for joining two straplike members.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 268+ for a safety belt or harness
    operationally combined with a motor vehicle system (e.g., the ignition
    circuit) or a component (e.g., the transmission selector lever).

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 468+ for a safety belt or harness
    device, per se, combined with a seat or combined merely with named,
    conventional vehicle body portions, see (1) Note above.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 457.1 for a specific,
    vehicle-mounted, electrical system which may involve a circuit which
    includes elements of a seat belt.


CLS 280/801.2
TXT Having adjustable anchor means:
    Apparatus under subclass 801.1 wherein a support for the flexible,
    straplike member is attached to a mounting means; the mounting means
    includes a device which permits at least two selective operational
    positions for the support.

    (1)     Note.  The mounting means is rigidly fixed to the vehicle structure
    other than a vehicle seat (e.g., door, floor, or roof).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Support, subclass 297.31 for step-by-step adjustment of anchor
    means.

    297,    Chair and Seats, subclasses 468+ for a support attached to a
    mounting means connected to a vehicle seat.


CLS 280/802
TXT Passive restraint system:

    Apparatus under subclasses 801.1+ wherein at least a portion of the
    apparatus is automatically movable from a vehicle entry position, in which
    position the occupant can easily enter the vehicle, to an occupant
    restraining position without any deliberate or manipulative occupant effort
    upon the apparatus itself.


CLS 280/803
TXT Having belt retractor mounted on vehicle closure:

    Apparatus under subclass 802 including a take-up device mounted on or in a
    vehicle closure member (e.g., a vehicle door) to withdraw or take-up at
    least a portion of the straplike member onto or into the closure member.


CLS 280/804
TXT Having belt connected to member slidable in a vehicle-mounted track:

    Apparatus under 802 wherein the vehicle is provided with a trackway and the
    straplike member is connected to a slide member movable along the trackway
    such that the slide member slides in one direction to move the straplike
    member to an easy-enter position and slides in the opposite direction to
    move the straplike member to an occupant restraining position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS

    801.2,  for safety belt or harness having an adjustable anchor means.


CLS 280/805
TXT With energy absorber:

    Apparatus under subclasses 801.1+ wherein the straplike member is provided
    with means to cushion, soften, or neutralize the shock or strain on the
    occupant's body as the occupant is forced against the restraint upon sudden
    deceleration or impact.


CLS 280/806
TXT Inertia responsive locking or tightening of belt or harness:

    Apparatus under subclasses 801.1+ wherein the straplike member allows at
    least some limited movement of the occupant's body relative to his seat
    during normal operation of the vehicle and includes means, responsive to a
    sudden deceleration or impact of the vehicle, to either (a) lock the
    straplike member against extension thereof by the occupant's body as the
    occupant is forced against the straplike member so as to restrain the
    occupant to his seat or (b) tighten the straplike member by means of a
    takeup device about the occupant's body so as to restrain the occupant to
    his seat.


CLS 280/807
TXT Retractable:

    Apparatus under subclasses 801.1+ wherein the straplike member is connected
    to a take-up device to withdraw or take-up at least a portion of the
    straplike member to a stowed or out-of-way position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 370+ for a reeling
    device on which strap material can be wound.


CLS 280/808
TXT Shoulder belt or harness:

    Apparatus under subclasses 801.1+ wherein the straplike member is
    engageable with and restrains the upper portion of the vehicle occupant's
    body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    801.2,  for safety belt or harness having an adjustable anchor means.


CLS 280/809
TXT SKI OR SKATE APPLIANCE OR ATTACHMENT:
    Device under the class definition especially designed to be (a) useable
    with or as an attachment for skates or skis, or (b) to be used by a skater
    or skier while pursuing a skating or skiing activity.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes supports connected with the skates and
    those held by hand in the nature of ski poles.  Self-sustaining frame
    devices which aid in the support of the weight of the person are regarded
    as amusement or exercise devices and are classified in either Class 472 or
    Class 482 as indicated by the search note below.

    (2)     Note.  "Skates" include ice skates and roller skates.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    604,    for an attachment for a ski which engages the snow to prevent slip
    or to brake the movement of the ski; and subclass 611 for ski-to-boot
    connecting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 16+ for devices for protecting the hands of
    skiers in gripping tow cables.

    104,    Railways, subclasses 173+ particularly subclasses 178, 180, and
    202+, for towing cables for skiers and for devices for gripping ski tow
    cables.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclass 19 for diverse
    coating tools including solid material for rubbing contact.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclass 68 for water skis.

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclasses 14+ for an occupant
    propelled roundabout    used as a skater support.

    482,    Exercise Devices, subclasses 51+ for an exercise device involving
    user translation, e.g., skiing, skating, etc., or physical simulation
    thereof, particularly subclass 70 for an exercise device which may simulate
    Nordic skiing and subclass 71 for an exercise device related to
    conditioning or developing a muscle related to Alpine skiing.


CLS 280/810
TXT Wind sail for propelling or braking skier or skater:

    Device under subclass 809 comprising a means having a relatively large area
    which a skier or skater may present to the wind either for the purpose of
    propulsion thereby or as a motion retardation means.

    (1)     Note.  The sail may be carried by the skier or skater or it may be
    attached to the skater or ski.


CLS 280/811
TXT Ice or roller skate boot attachment (e.g., cover, protector, etc.):

    Device under subclass 809 adapted to be attached or applied to a boot or
    shoe used for ice or roller skating.

    (1)     Note.  These devices include warmers, scuff preventing means, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclasses 7.1+ for overshoes.


CLS 280/812
TXT Seat supported by ski pole:
    Device under subclass 809 having means which may be supported by one or
    more ski poles and thereby form a surface upon which a person may sit
    either in a stationary position or while skiing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    826,    for sticks or rods which support a skier or skater while straddling
    the same while in motion.


CLS 280/813
TXT Ski or pole having means to scrape snow or ice from ski or boot: Device
    under subclass 809 wherein a ski pole or a ski itself is provided with a
    means which may be moved against a ski or boot having snow or ice adhering
    thereto for the purpose of removing said snow or ice.


CLS 280/814
TXT Clamp, tie, or case for carrying or storage of skis:
    Device under subclass 809 having a means which may or may not be separably
    attached to a ski or to a plurality of skis for the purpose of (a) securing
    a plurality of skis together in a manner whereby they may not be used for
    skiing, or (b) securing a ski or skis to a relatively stationary object for
    storage.

    (1)     Note.  The means may be adapted additionally to be attached to a
    ski pole.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    818,    for means securing a pair of skis together while being used for
    skiing for the purpose of training the skier to maintain the skis in a
    given relative relationship; and subclass 601 for skis which may have means
    built therein (i.e., magnets) to hold a pair together.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 315.1 for a bag or
    receptacle for skis.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 70.5 for supports or racks for slender
    articles such as skis.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclasses 309+, 323, 602, 917 for a
    body supported ski carrier, and 917.5 for a vehicle supported ski carrier.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 137 for
    hand-held ski carrier having handles, especially subclass 147 for carrier
    adapted to support skis as well as other articles (e.g., boots, poles,
    etc.).


CLS 280/815
TXT Prevents warp, maintains camber, or conforms to ski shape:
    Device under subclass 814 wherein said securing means is particularly
    shaped or is applicable to the ski at a point or points thereon whereby,
    when applied, the skis is warped to, or maintained in, a particularly
    desired configuration.


CLS 280/816
TXT Combined:
    Device under subclass 809 combined with means which, if claimed per se,
    would be classified in another class, and wherein the other class is not a
    locus for said means combined with other devices, and which is not merely a
    part or subcombination of a ski, skate, or ski pole.

    (1)     Note.  The means include a compass, light, liquid container,
    crutch, pyrotechnic device, marker, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 201 for electric heaters combined with
    other devices.


CLS 280/817
TXT Anti-crossover for skis:
    Device under subclass 809 in which a bar or deflecting means is provided on
    at least one of the skis worn by a skier to prevent one ski from riding
    over the top of the other ski while skiing.


CLS 280/818
TXT Having means interconnecting skis for training: Device under subclass 809
    having means whereby the skis of a pair, being used by skier, or secured
    together to establish a given positional relationship between said skis in
    order to assist the skier in learning to ski.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    814+    for clamping means for securing skis together or to other objects
    for nonuse purposes.

    845+    for skis used to form runners of a runner-equipped vehicle (i.e.,
    sled).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclass 73 for water skis
    having means to secure a pair together for training purposes.


CLS 280/819
TXT Ski pole:
    Device under subclass 809 being an elongated means to be carried by the
    hand of and used to assist in the stabilization movement or braking of a
    skater or skier.


CLS 280/820
TXT Having means to interconnect with another pole: Device under subclass 819
    having means on at least one of a pair of elongated means whereby a
    plurality of said means may be secured together for carrying or for storage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    814,    for clamps which secure a plurality of skis together for storage
    and which may simultaneously secure a ski pole thereto.


CLS 280/821
TXT Hand grip:
    Device under subclass 819 wherein said elongated means is provided with a
    means adapted particularly to be engaged by the user's hand or wrist.


CLS 280/822
TXT Having quick release means:
    Device under subclass 821 wherein the hand or wrist engagable means is
    attached to the elongated means and is adapted to detach itself from the
    elongated means in an emergency when the force tending toward separation
    exceeds a predetermined amount.


CLS 280/823
TXT Adjustable length (e.g., retractable tip):
    Device under subclass 819 in which the length of the elongated means may be
    changed either so that it may be  made to penetrate the snow or ice more
    readily or so that it is more accommodating to the height of the user.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    809,    for ski poles which may be collapsed to a nonuseable condition but
    which is not adjustable in length when in the useable condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclass for an elongated
    member having means whereby its length may be adjusted.


CLS 280/824
TXT Ring or basket:
    Device under subclass 819 having dishlike means having an axis of rotation
    which is secured to or forms a part of the elongated means along said axis
    to offer resistance against penetration of snow or ice by said elongated
    means.


CLS 280/825
TXT Scabbards for ice or roller skates:
    Device under subclass 809 comprising a cover to protect an ice skate runner
    or the wheel of a roller skate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, appropriate subclasses for body and
    belt carriers for skates.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 137 for hand
    carriers for skates.


CLS 280/826
TXT Riding stick:
    Device under subclass 809 comprising a stick or rod to be straddled by a
    skater or skier to at least partially support the skater or skier while in
    motion, said stick or rod may be provided with a ground-engaging roller or
    runner at one end thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    812,    for ski poles having seat means supported thereby upon which a
    person may sit.


CLS 280/827
TXT SIMULATIONS OF THE VELOCIPEDE TYPE:

    Vehicles under the class definition in which some object is simulated.

    (1)     Note.  This group includes both those vehicles which have positive
    occupant propelling means and those which are adapted to be pushed along by
    the occupant.  Also, vehicles which include a simulation and are propelled
    by a walking (nonoccupant) attendant are included herein.

    (2)     Note.  Simulations comprise both the forms which are claimed
    specifically as figures having bodies, heads, legs, ears, etc., or as
    having equipment such as saddles, stirrups, reins, etc., and those
    disclosed simulations having claimed features which necessarily import or
    require structure or arrangements not found in nonsimulation type vehicles.
     Examples of such features are steering or driving mechanisms housed in
    bodies of substantial depth or thickness, or arranged to by-pass or
    accommodate figure parts not claimed as such but having no useful place in
    the conventional vehicle, as projecting heads or feet not used for support.
     Automobile simulations for subclasses 827 and 828 comprise body and
    running gear combinations having structure, the chief purpose of which is
    to render the vehicle attractive to children by imitating features
    characteristic of automobiles, as sound effects, simulations of brakes,
    headlights, radiators, etc., hoods, cowls, rear decks or fenders.  A body
    comprising a flat board claimed as having the outline of an automobile is
    considered a simulation.  Vehicles have not been classified herein on a
    purely disclosure basis except as an alternative to placing the patent in
    subclass 1 of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87.01+, for nonsimulation type vehicles having neither power means nor
    positive occupant propelling, but adapted to coast or be pushed along by
    the occupant.

    200+,   for nonsimulating type vehicles having positive occupant propelling
    means, and for occupant propelled vehicles having mere figurehead steering
    bar or shaft where no specific structure of the head is claimed, as reins,
    jaws, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, appropriate subclasses for a wheeled toy
    which is a simulation of something.  A simulation for Class 280 is
    distinguished from a Class 446 Toy, in that the device 1) must have
    structure enabling operation in a mode consistent with typical vehicular
    activity, and 2) must be capable of supporting, and as disclosed intended
    to carry, a rider.


CLS 280/828
TXT Occupant propelled:

    Vehicles under subclass 827 of the type in which there is provided some
    positive means adapting the vehicle to be propelled by the occupant.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include those adapted to be pushed
    along by the occupant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.1+   and 200+, for other vehicles with occupant propelling means.


CLS 280/829
TXT Boat:

    Vehicles under subclass 828 in which the object simulated is a boat.


CLS 280/830
TXT TANK OR BOILER:

    Vehicles under the class definition where the frame is specially adapted to
    carry a boiler or tank.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 255+ for flow control between tanks and
    subclasses 899+ for fluid handling in vehicles.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 36+ for a motor vehicle of the steam
    traction engine type; subclass 69.4 for a tank for a vehicle where the
    motor is positively recited; subclasses 303+ for a motor vehicle,
    generally, having means to generate steam and a motor for utilizing the
    steam to propel the vehicle; and subclass 310 for a motor vehicle of the
    kind described for subclass 303, but wherein the vehicle's motor is not
    claimed; also, see subclass 225 for a motor vehicle having a wheel
    arrangement comprising two wheels in tandem relationship and wherein an
    element of the vehicle's frame, or a fender of the vehicle, constitutes
    also either an exhaust passageway or a fuel reservoir.

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 18 for tanks with no particular vehicle
    structure claimed.

    410,    Freight Accommodation on Freight Carrier, subclass 68 for a land
    vehicle freight carrier for transporting containers of fluid or bulk
    material.


CLS 280/831
TXT Tank forms load support:

    Vehicles under subclass 830 wherein the tank is configured to support other
    loads on the vehicle.


CLS 280/832
TXT Insulated tank walls:

    Vehicles under subclass 830 wherein the tank walls have special provisions
    to deter the passage of heat through the walls by interposition of an
    appropriate insulator.


CLS 280/833
TXT Saddle type; vehicle frame straddling:

    Vehicles under subclass 830 wherein the fluid is contained in two separate
    tanks, one on each side of the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  The separate tanks may be directly interconnected
    structurally or indirectly by the vehicle frame.


CLS 280/834
TXT Service tank:

    Vehicles under subclass 830 where the tank contains a fluid for use by the
    prime mover to produce propulsion.


CLS 280/835
TXT Cycle type:

    Vehicles under subclass 834 wherein the service tank is attached to a
    vehicle of the type where the occupant rides astride of the frame.


CLS 280/836
TXT Ground engaging or rolling wheel type:

    Vehicles under subclass 830 wherein the tank or boiler itself forms a
    ground contacting means which aids in the movement of the vehicle.


CLS 280/837
TXT Semitrailer tank vehicle:

    Vehicles under subclass 830 provided with ground engaging means at one end
    only, the other end being adapted to be attached to a leading vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    838,    for tanks mounted on a common frame with the cab and power plant.

    839,    for tanks mounted on stable trailers.


CLS 280/838
TXT Tank truck:

    Vehicles under subclass 830 wherein the external walls of the tank define
    the exterior surface of the vehicle and the power plant, cab and tank are
    all mounted on a common frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    837,    for tanks mounted on a semitrailer.

    839,    for tanks mounted on stable trailers.


CLS 280/839
TXT Trailer tank vehicle:

    Vehicles under subclass 830 having forward and rearward ground engaging
    means and a draft device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    837,    for tanks mounted on a semitrailer.

    838,    for tanks mounted on a common frame with the cab and power plant.


CLS 280/840
TXT BODY-LEVELING DEVICES:

    Vehicles under the class definition comprising (a) means for keeping the
    body portion of a vehicle level responsive to a means sensing an actual or
    incipient nonlevel condition, or (b) an adjustable means extending between
    the running gear and the body of a vehicle which is operative to level the
    body.

    (1)     Note.  The "running gear" in this definition is a framework portion
    (e.g., an axle extending between wheels on opposite sides of the vehicle)
    intimately associated with ground engaging means, such as wheels, and
    acting to connect the body portion of the vehicle to the ground engaging
    means.

    (2)     Note.  For vehicles in which a body may be kept level by adjusting
    means extending between the wheels and the running gear, see subclasses 43+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30+,    for a vehicle which is convertible from a wheeled vehicle to a
    nonvehicular structure.

    43+,    for a vehicle comprising a running gear and a wheel means, and
    means whereby the wheel means may be vertically adjusted relative to the
    running gear.

    150.5,  for a vehicle which is provided with a retractable prop or stand
    which may be extended to stabilize the vehicle when not in motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 206+ for platform adjustments for harvesters.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 164 for railroad tracks with
    levelers.

    172,    Earth Working, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 395+
    for earth working apparatus comprising vertically adjustable wheels,
    subclasses 400+ for means interconnecting the wheels of an earth working
    implement whereby they may be moved, simultaneously, vertically with
    respect to the frame, subclass 406 for an earth working apparatus with an
    actuator for adjusting wheels on different axles, and an additional
    actuator for changing the relative position of the wheels, subclasses 446+
    for laterally adjustable earth working tools which may involve a leveling
    feature, subclasses 459+ for an earth working element which is swingable
    about an axis which extends substantially in the direction of movement of
    the apparatus over the ground, and subclass 466 for an earth working tool
    which is lifted and held raised for transport by a means other than the
    lifting means.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 39 and 41 for motor vehicles with
    leveling means.

    298,    Land Vehicles:  Dumping, appropriate subclasses, for vehicles other
    than track or rail vehicles adapted to carry a load with means to
    manipulate the vehicle so that a considerable part of the load will move by
    gravity to unload the vehicle.


CLS 280/841
TXT SKATES:

    Devices under the class definition to be secured to the feet of the rider
    whereby he may propel himself over land, ice or snow and commonly called
    skates.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.13,   for convertible skates.


CLS 280/842
TXT Ski simulators:

    Devices under subclass 841 intended to simulate gliding over snow when used
    on dry land.


CLS 280/843
TXT Ball type roller skates:

    Devices under subclass 841 where the ground contacting running gear is in
    the form of spherical members.


CLS 280/844
TXT Endless tread skates:

    Devices under subclass 841 where the ground contacting running gear is in
    the form of a continuous band.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    305,    Wheel Substitutes for Land Vehicles, appropriate subclasses for
    endless treads, per se.


CLS 280/845
TXT RUNNER VEHICLE:

    Vehicles under the class definition provided with surfaces slidably
    engaging the supporting-surface over which the vehicle moves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8+,     for vehicles having wheels and runners.

    11.12+, for runner skates.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating subclasses 196+ for roadway snow excavators and 411+ for
    sleded scoops.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 387+ for earth working apparatus with
    runners.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 182+ for a motor vehicle which includes
    one or more ski-like or runner members.


CLS 280/846
TXT Idler arm steering linkage:

    Devices under subclass 95.1 in which the linkage includes a center link
    moved laterally by the steering gear arm attached at one end and an
    additional pivotal arm attached between the opposite center link end and
    the frame or chassis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     for devices in which the details of the gearing for moving the
    steering arm are claimed.


CLS 280/847
TXT Dust and mud guards:

    Devices under subclass 727 for protecting the occupants of a vehicle or the
    vehicle itself from the dust and mud incident to the use of that vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 508+ for earth working apparatus with a
    guard, shield or plant diverter.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 84+ for windshields,
    per se.


CLS 280/848
TXT Body attached:

    Dust and mud guards under subclass 847 secured to the body (load-carrier)
    of a vehicle.


CLS 280/849
TXT Fender skirts:

    Devices under subclass 848 for closing the fender opening to the front or
    rear wheels.

    (1)     Note.  The device may be arranged to move as the wheel turns for
    steering.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    292,    Closure Fasteners, Digest 1 for fender shield fasteners.


CLS 280/850
TXT Scuff pads and covering shields for fenders:

    Devices under subclass 848 for protecting the interior or exterior fender
    surfaces.


CLS 280/851
TXT Splash guards:

    Devices under subclass 847 comprising auxiliary guard members secured to a
    mudguard or adjacent rigid portion of a vehicle and disposed to the front
    or rear of the vehicle wheels to catch the splash therefrom.


CLS 280/852
TXT For velocipedes:

    Auxiliary devices under subclass 851 to prevent water splash up from
    velocipede wheels.


CLS 280/853
TXT Apertured fender wall with closures:

    Fenders under subclass 847 provided with lid type closures to enable access
    inside the fender to a gasoline filler tube or to the wheel itself for
    installing tire chains.

    (1)     Note.  The lid may also be combined with license plate holders or
    tail lights.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    292,    Closure Fastener, appropriate subclasses for closure fasteners.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclass 1 for body accessories.


CLS 280/854
TXT Fender braces:

    Fenders under subclass 847 provided with devices which secure and steady
    the fender to the frame.


CLS 280/855
TXT Wheel scrapers and cleaners:

    Devices under subclass 150, for removing mud, stones, nails, or other
    attached substances, from the periphery of wheels, either by scraping,
    brushing, or otherwise removing the substances.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 558+ for cleaning means for earth working
    disks.


CLS 280/856
TXT Wheel scrapers for dual wheels:

    Devices under subclass 855 for removing substances from paired wheels
    mounted on each end of an axle.

               CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 280/900
TXT RUNNER VEHICLE ATTACHMENTS:

    Collection of art relating to attachments for sleds including brakes,
    runner guides, etc.


CLS 280/901
TXT ADAPTATION OF NONSPECIALIZED VEHICLES TO SEMITRAILER TRACTORS:

    Collection of art related to standard vehicles which may be converted to
    act as a tractor for a semitrailer by the addition or rearrangement of
    coupling structure at or forward of the rear axle (i.e., fifth wheels
    placed in the bed of a pick up truck, hitches located in trunk or on roof
    of a passenger vehicle).


CLS 281/
TTL BOOKS, STRIPS, AND LEAVES

CLS 281/
TXT Books, strips, and leaves and various combinations thereof, combinations
    thereof with other things for which no other place is provided, processes
    of making where the processes are fully disclosed in the articles, and
    accessories to books, strips, and leaves, such as protectors, book-leaf
    holders and marks, and holders, therefor, for which no other place is
    provided.

    (1)     Note.  A book consists of two or more sheets secured together (a)
    only at their margins or (b) only at a restricted field within the margins
    or (c) only at their margins and at a restricted field within the margins.
    A folded sheet has not been classified as a book.  When a margin of one
    sheet is attached to a margin of another sheet to obtain in effect a single
    sheet of greater area, the resulting article is still regarded as a sheet
    rather than a book.

    (2)     Note.  A "strip" is a sheet folded back and forth along at least
    two fold lines and unattached to anything or attached to a backing either
    at the ends only or in such a way that the folded portions can be
    successively released without mutilation, or it is a sheet rolled up. Also
    patents claiming fold lines or other features for so folding or rolling up
    sheets are classified as "strips".

    (3)     Note.  A "leaf" is a sheet other than a strip.

    (4)     Note.  A "sheet" is a body having two parallel surfaces both
    dimensions of which are large in comparison with the third dimension of the
    body.

    (5)     Note.  Leaf arrangements which merely facilitate removal of a leaf
    from an arrangement or package are found in Class 206, Special Receptacle
    or Package, subclasses 449+; the inclusion of means to separate a leaf from
    the residue so that it may be dispensed and will effect classification in
    Class 221, Article Dispensing.  A permanently-bound book with leaf
    perforations for leaf removal is found in this class (281).

    (6)     Note.  A sheet retention means providing nondestructive sheet
    recovery therefrom in combination with the sheet mounted thereon and where
    such sheet in addition includes structure (e.g., line of perforations,
    etc.), permitting destructive recovery of a portion thereof is placed in
    Class 402, Binder Device Releasably Engaging Aperture or Notch of Sheet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 2 for a device specially
    adapted for the purpose of keeping an album and other book-like structure
    closed when not in use.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 642.02+ for a label
    holder, per se, or in combination with a label; subclasses 124.01+ for a
    card having advertising matter or pictures thereon; subclass 359 for a
    folder including identification means in the form of a label, label holder
    or a portion intended to receive indicia and subclass 360 for a sheet
    including identification means in the form of a label, label holder or tab
    to receive indicia.

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 400+ for a sewn single or plural layer stock
    material product.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, appropriate subclasses for (1) a
    single-layer, waterlaid, fibrous sheet or web, or (2) a plural-layer sheet
    or web including a layer of fibers applied to a second layer by a process
    provided for in that class (162); 181.1 and particularly subclass 141,
    which include any nonstructural fiber (or fiber-containing) sheet or web
    (e.g., a particular blend of fibers), regardless of whether waterlaid or
    not).

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package subclasses 449+ for a sheet package
    and see (5) Note, above.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for devices not
    otherwise provided for, for dispensing or feeding discrete articles from a
    source of supply, and especially subclasses 33+ for such devices in which
    flexible sheet-like articles are distorted as they are separated from the
    source of supply.

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, appropriate subclasses, especially
    subclasses 27+ for pads or stacks of individual sheets, and subclass 32 for
    zigzag folded supply package.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 550+ and 570+ for an
    unwinding device or coil holder of general use.

    283,    Printed Matter, for (1) a strip, book or leaf bearing indicia which
    primarily effect an intellectual impression other than the aesthetic or (2)
    the combination of such strip, book or leaf with other things not
    classifiable elsewhere.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web,
    or sheet, especially subclasses 121+ for such a product which is folded,
    subclasses 131+ for such a product which includes a component having
    apertures, and subclasses 156+ for such a product including a component
    which varies in thickness, subclass 181  for such a product including a
    component which is nonplanar, but of uniform, thickness, and comprises
    parallel adjacent folds (e.g., pleats).


CLS 281/2
TXT Comprising in each case a strip or strips and a leaf or leaves, but no
    other sheet material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    283,    Printed Matter, subclass 61.

    462,    Books, Strips, and Leaves for Manifolding, subclasses 8+.


CLS 281/3.1
TXT BOOK AND LEAF:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a book* combined with
    an additional leaf*.

            *  These terms are defined in the class definition of this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    462,    Books, Strips, and Leaves for Manifolding, subclasses 17+.


CLS 281/4
TXT The cover of one of the books is removable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     19.1+ and 34, for other removable book covers.


CLS 281/4.1
TXT Blotter leaf:

    Subject matter under subclass 3.1 wherein the additional leaf is made of an
    absorbent material and is intended to be used for drying a surface that has
    just been written on in ink by soaking up and excess ink.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 89.1+ and
    95+ for blotting means there classified.


CLS 281/5
TXT Involving in each case a strip or strips, but no other sheet material.

    (1)     Note.  See Note 2 after the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 338+ and 530+ for a
    hinged display device in the form of a folded sheet including means to
    secure display items (e.g., cards, pictures, etc.), thereon; and subclass
    359 for a folder (i.e., sheet folded only once) including identification
    means in the form of a discrete label, label holder or a portion intended
    to receive a number, letter or mark.

    283,    Printed Matter, subclasses 61 and 62.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 121+ for a stock
    material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or sheet which
    includes a component having a fold at the edge, and subclass 181 for such a
    product including a component which is nonplanar but of uniform thickness
    and comprises parallel adjacent folds (e.g., pleats).

    462,    Books, Strips, and Leaves for Manifolding, subclasses 2+, 6, 7, 8+,
    and 25+.


CLS 281/6
TXT Comprising hard smooth surfaces, over which the strips pass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    462,    Books, Strips, and Leaves for Manifolding, subclasses 14, 41, and
    47.


CLS 281/7
TXT Means being present for retaining one or more strips after use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    462,    Books, Strips, and Leaves for Manifolding, subclasses 9+ and 27+.


CLS 281/8
TXT Some unusual facility for feeding a strip being involved.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    462,    Books, Strips, and Leaves for Manifolding, subclasses 10+, 29, 32+,
    37+, 40+, and 46+.


CLS 281/9
TXT There being present some means for attaching the device to a support.


CLS 281/10
TXT Including means for retaining leaves, formed by cutting up one or more of
    the strips.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    462,    Books, Strips, and Leaves for Manifolding, subclasses 12 and 36+.


CLS 281/11
TXT Some unusual facility for feeding a strip being involved.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2       and 8.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    462,    Books, Strips, and Leaves for Manifolding, subclasses 37 and 38.


CLS 281/12
TXT Including some means for securing the device to a support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9.


CLS 281/13
TXT The attaching means being capable of use where a wall is the support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9.


CLS 281/14
TXT Means being present for retaining one or more of the strips after use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      and indented subclasses.


CLS 281/15.1
TXT BOOK, ELEMENT, THEREOF, OR ACCESSORY THEREFOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a book*, a part or
    subcombination of a book, or an accessory, not classifiable elsewhere,
    which is specifically adapted for use with a book.

            *  This term is defined in the class definition of this class.

    (1)     Note.  Accessories for a book may be such things as protectors,
    book hangers, or book-leaf holders and marks.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.1+,   for a book combined with an additional leaf.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    283,    Printed Matter, subclasses 63.1+ for a book carrying indicia.

    462,    Books, Strips, and Leaves for Manifolding, subclasses 7+, 17+, 53,
    54, and 55+.


CLS 281/16
TXT More than one book being involved in the invention in each patent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    462,    Books, Strips, and Leaves for Manifolding, subclasses 20, 21, and
    57+.


CLS 281/17
TXT The cover of one of the books being removable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    462,    Books, Strips, and Leaves for Manifolding, subclasses 20, 21, and
    57+.


CLS 281/18
TXT The books or some part of them being sealed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    283,    Printed Matter, subclasses 72+.


CLS 281/19.1
TXT Removable cover:

    A book under subclass 15.1 including a cover which can be releasably
    secured to and placed around the book, the body of the book having some
    modification necessitated by the particular cover associated with the book.

    (1)     Note.  In each patent in this and the indented subclass there is
    involved some modification of the body of the book, made necessary by the
    particular cover associated with it. A removable cover which does not
    necessitate any modification of the body of a book is classified in this
    class, subclass 34.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.17    and 34, for other removable book covers.


CLS 281/19.2
TXT Loop engaging:

    A book under subclass 19.1 including at least one structure which is or
    which resembles a closed or substantially closed ring, coil, or any other
    closed or substantially closed loop by which the body of the book may be
    releasably secured to the cover.


CLS 281/20
TXT Means applied in book backs, sides, and leaves for protecting the books
    against hard usage.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 29, and indented subclasses,
    for book-covers.


CLS 281/21.1
TXT Binding:

    Subject matter under subclass 15.1 related to the means which permanently
    secure the leaves* together to form the book or which permanently secure
    the cover to the body of the book.

            * This term is defined in the class definition of this class.


CLS 281/22
TXT The signatures or leaves being spaced apart, usually by the interposition
    of filler-strips.


CLS 281/23
TXT The signatures or leaves being secured to strip of substantially the same
    length as the signatures and leaves.


CLS 281/24
TXT The signatures or leaves being secured to intermediate elements of
    substantially the same thickness as the signatures or leaves attached to
    them and the intermediate elements being secured together to form the book.


CLS 281/26
TXT The backs of the signatures and leaves being slotted, the planes of the
    cuts being inclined to the plane of the backs.


CLS 281/27
TXT The bindings including cords passed through the leaves or signatures and
    usually tied or looped together at intervals or sewed or tied to a backing
    or to bands.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23.


CLS 281/27.1
TXT Ring or arch:

    Subject matter under subclass 21.1 wherein the leaves of the book have a
    registering aperture formed in their corresponding margins or have
    correspondingly spaces apertures formed along their corresponding margins;
    and wherein the leaves are permanently secured together (a) by one or more
    rings or loops passed through the registering apertures of the leaves, (b)
    by a continuous length of wirelike material that is helically or spirally
    wound into a coil and passed through the registering apertures of the
    leaves, (c) by a continuous length of wirelike material that is bent or
    formed into an alternating series of oppositely disposed fingerlike loops
    which are then arched or curved toward one another to form a series of
    substantially closed rings or loops passed through the registering
    apertures of the leaves, or (d) by a comblike structure in which the
    fingers are arched or curved toward the back of the comb forming closed or
    substantially closed loops or rings passed through the registering
    apertures of the leaves.

    (1)     Note.  A closed or substantially closed ring, coil, or loop may
    have a configuration other than circular as, for example, a D-shaped
    configuration.

    (2)     Note.  It is to be understood that in the definitions of this and
    the indented subclass, the term "leaves" may also include the covers of
    books which are bound simultaneously together with the leaves by the same
    binding means. Accordingly, these covers would usually have an aperture or
    apertures corresponding to the apertures in the leaves.


CLS 281/27.2
TXT Metallic:

    Subject matter under subclass 27.1 wherein the ring or arch type securing
    means includes some element made from metallic material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27.3,   for a securing means other than the ring or arch type which
    includes some metallic element, and see the Search Class Notes appended
    thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    140,    Wireworking, subclasses 92.3+ for a process or apparatus for
    intercoiling a rotated helix with the aligned edge perforations of sheets
    or leaves to make a "spiral" bound book.


CLS 281/27.3
TXT Metallic:

    Subject matter under subclass 21.1 in which the means which permanently
    secures the parts of the book together includes some element made from
    metallic material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27.2,   for a ring or arch type securing means which includes some metallic
    element, and see the Search Class Note appended thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus for applying a member, e.g., a staple, to work.

    270,    Sheet-Material Associating, subclasses 37+, 52.18 and 58.08+ for
    similar securing means, e.g., stapling.

    402,    Binder Device Releasably Engaging Aperture or Notch of Sheet,
    subclasses 8+ for a sheet binder device of that class including a pliant,
    deformable sheet retainer and especially subclasses 14+ for such a device
    in which the sheet retainer (e.g., a metal strap, etc.) may be folded to
    secure the sheet.


CLS 281/28
TXT Head-bands, rings, and other elements restricted to use in the binding of
    books.


CLS 281/29
TXT Protecting means placed outside the bodies of books and overlying them.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      17 and 19.1+, for removable book covers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    402,    Binder Device Releasably Engaging Aperture or Notch of Sheet,
    subclasses 73+ for a cover, per se, for a device of that class (402).


CLS 281/30
TXT Covers combined with pencils or pencil-holders.


CLS 281/31
TXT Covers with pockets attached or covers modified so as to include pockets or
    receptacles.


CLS 281/32
TXT Covers combined with means attached to them for pulling them out from their
    positions on shelves.


CLS 281/33
TXT There being some means connected with the covers which adapt the books to
    be set up as easels.

    (1)     Note.  Compare with the following loci: Class 40, Card, Picture, or
    Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 341+ for a copy holding easel which includes an
    adjustable line guide or adjustable copy; Class 400, Typewriting Machines,
    subclass 718 for such a copy holder combined with a typewriter; and Class
    248, Supports, subclasses 441.1+ the residual locus for copy holders and
    other easels as well.


CLS 281/34
TXT Book covers which can be placed removable around books without modification
    of the bodies of the books.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      17 and 19.1+, for other removable book covers.


CLS 281/35
TXT Limp covers for books.


CLS 281/36
TXT Inventions relating to the backs of covers.

    (1)     Note.  The connection between a back and the sides is placed here,
    as is also the combination of a back with the connection between the back
    and the sides.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29      through 35.


CLS 281/37
TXT Inventions restricted to the sides of covers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29      through 35.


CLS 281/38
TXT Inventions pertaining to the sheet elements of the bodies of books.

    (1)     Note.  Leaves which are sealed are placed in this class, subclass
    18.

    (2)     Note.  Compare Class 283, Printed Matter, for leaves bearing
    printed matter.


CLS 281/39
TXT Leaves in combination with elements bearing erasable features, also leaves
    having parts modified so as to be erasable surfaces.

    (1)     Note.  Elements having or bearing erasable surfaces are classified
    in Class 434, Education and Demonstration subclasses 408+, and indented
    subclasses.


CLS 281/40
TXT Leaves modified or mounted so as to render the books in which they are
    bound flat-opening.


CLS 281/41
TXT The inventions being embodied in single leaves.


CLS 281/42
TXT Devices for holding book-leaves open, book-leaf clasps not otherwise
    classifiable, devices having some parts permanently secured to the books
    for marking places therein, devices to be applied to specific kinds of
    books for marking places therein, and devices intended to mark positions in
    books, but which have other functions besides.

    (1)     Note.  Leaf clasps and fasteners are in Class 24, Buckles, Buttons,
    Clasps, etc., subclasses 67+ and 326+.

    (2)     Note.  Place-indicators for books and leaves other than those
    included in the above definition are in Class 40, Card, Picture, or Sign
    Exhibiting, subclasses 352+, and in Class 116, Signals and Indicators,
    subclasses 234+.


CLS 281/43
TXT Book hanger:

    Subject matter under subclass 15.1 comprising means to suspend a book
    against gravity from an elevated support.


CLS 281/44
TXT Pad holder:

    Subject matter under subclass 15.1 comprising meas to releasably secure and
    support therein or thereto a memo, scratch, or other pad or tablet intended
    to be written on consisting of a collection of leaves* which are stacked
    one on top of another and hound together at one edge, such that removal of
    an individual leaf from the securing means is intended to be accomplished
    with mutilation (e.g., tearing, ripping, etc.) of a portion of the leaf or
    its binding.

            * This term is defined in the class definition of this class.

    (1)     Note.  The stacked leaves may be bound together at one edge by glue
    or other individual leaves which are held together in a stack by the holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45+,    for a book or leaf holder in which removal of a leaf or book from
    the holding means is intended to be accomplished without mutilation (e.g.,
    tearing, deforming, etc.) of any portion of the leaf, book, or holding
    means, and see the Search Class Notes appended thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 336+ for a means for
    phone-carried indicia.


CLS 281/45
TXT Device under the class definition including means to releasably secure a
    leaf* or a book* therein or thereto in such manner that removal thereof, in
    the manner intended, from the means may be accomplished without mutilation
    (e.g., tearing, deforming, etc.), of any portion of the means, the leaf or
    the book.

            *These terms are defined in the class definition of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for a pad holder in which removal of an individual leaf from the
    holding means is intended to be accomplished with mutilation of a portion
    of the leaf or its binding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 359 for a folded sheet
    (i.e., "folder") including means for identifying the sheet or contents
    which may be disposed within the fold and subclass 360 for a sheet
    including means for identifying the sheet or articles which may be disposed
    contiguous therewith which means under subclasses 359 and 360 is in the
    form of a discrete label, label holder or portion of a sheet intended to
    receive a label (e.g., number, letter, mark, etc.).

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, subclass 27 for a severing device
    of that class (225) in combination with means to hold a pad of sheets or a
    stack of individual sheets, which sheets are to be severed (e.g., ripped,
    torn, broken, etc.), by manually forcing a portion of the sheet against a
    fixed edge of the severing device.

    283,    Printed Matter, for (1) a strip book or leaf bearing indicia which
    primarily effect an intellectual impression other than the aesthetic or (2)
    the combination of such strip, book or leaf with other things not
    classifiable elsewhere.

    402,    Binder Device Releasably Engaging Aperture or Notch of Sheet, for a
    similar device including means to engage a notch or aperture of a sheet to
    secure the sheet thereto.


CLS 281/46
TXT Device under subclass 45 wherein the device includes one or more components
    which secures:

    1.      a sheet folded upon itself which component or components cooperates
    with the fold juncture and either:

    (a)     passes through the thickness dimension thereof at the juncture of
    the fold.

    (b)     extends along the juncture of the fold.

    (c)     both (a) and (b) above,

    2.      a book to the device by cooperation with a folded sheet element
    thereof in a manner set forth in 1, above or

    3.      a book to the device which component(s) is disposed between
    adjacent pages of the book at their bound margins.


CLS 281/47
TXT Device under subclass 46 wherein the securing means is continuous with
    either the fold juncture of the leaf under part 1 or 2 of the definition of
    subclass 46 or the bound margin (e.g., sewn edge portion, etc.), of the
    pages of the book under part 3 of the definition of subclass 46.


CLS 281/48
TXT Device under subclass 47 wherein the component is of a flexible, flaccid or
    readily deformable material which is either a slender endless element
    (e.g., rubber band, etc.), or elongated element (e.g., string, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    402,    Binder Device Releasably Engaging Aperture or Notch of Sheet,
    subclasses 8+ for a device including a flexible, flaccid or deformable
    sheet retainer intended to pass through a sheet.


CLS 281/49
TXT Device under subclass 47 wherein an end portion of the securing means is
    pivotally secured to the device to permit leaf or book removal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    402,    Binder Device Releasably Engaging Aperture or Notch of Sheet,
    subclass 23 for a device wherein the pivotally attached end of the sheet
    retainer in rotatably mounted on a separate and distinct pintle.


CLS 281/50
TXT Device under subclass 46 wherein the securing means passes through an
    opening disposed at the fold of the sheet as set forth under part 1 or 2 of
    the definition of subclass 46.


CLS 281/51
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition not otherwise classified above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    462,    Books, Strips, and Leaves for Manifolding, subclass 84 for
    miscellaneous subject matter classified therein and subclass 7 for a strip,
    book and leaf combined.


CLS 283/
TTL PRINTED MATTER

CLS 283/
TXT This class consists of articles the physical structure of which, except
    strips, books, and leaves, is not a part of the inventions or is deemed to
    be conventional, bearing indicia which primarily effect intellectual
    impressions other than the esthetic, and combinations of such strips, books
    and leaves with other things not classifiable elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  A book consists of two or more sheets secured together, in
    the manner recited in note (1) of the main class definition of Class 281.

    (2)     Note.  A strip is a sheet folded back and forth along at least two
    fold lines and unattached to anything or attached to a backing either at
    one or both ends only or in such a way that the folded portions can be
    successively released without mutilation, or it is a sheet rolled up.  Also
    patents claiming fold lines or other features for so folding or rolling up
    sheets are classified as "strips".

    (3)     Note.  A leaf is a sheet other than a strip.

    (4)     Note.  Inventions relating to the structure of the individual
    indicia in three dimensions are excluded.

    (5)     Note.  Geometrical instruments coming within the above definition
    are in Class 33, Geometrical Instruments.

    (6)     Note.  For designs for printed matter, see the design classes,
    attention being called particularly to classes:



    D11,    Jewelry, Symbolic Insignia, and Ornaments.

    D18,    Printing and Office Machinery.

    D19,    Office Supplies; Artists' and Teachers' Materials.

    D20,    Sales and Advertising Equipment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 642.02+ for a label
    holder, per se, or in combination with a label; subclasses 124.01+ for a
    card having advertising matter or pictures thereon; subclass 359 for a
    folder including identification means in the form of a label, label holder
    or a portion intended to receive indicia and subclass 360 for a sheet
    including identification means in the form of a label, label holder or tab
    to receive indicia.

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 400+ for a sewn single or plural layer stock
    material product.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, appropriate subclasses for (1) a
    single-layer, waterlaid, fibrous sheet or web, or (2) a plural-layer sheet
    or web including a layer of fibers applied to a second layer by a process
    provided for in that class (162); and particularly subclasses 141-181.1,
    which include any nonstructural fiber (or fiber-containing sheet or web)
    (e.g., a particular blend of fibers), regardless of whether waterlaid or
    not.

    380,    Cryptography, appropriate subclasses for an encrypted printed or
    embossed record, combined with an encryption or decryption devices;
    however, a cryptogram or a printed cryptographic form are classified in
    this class (283).

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet, especially subclasses 121+ for such a product which is folded;
    subclasses 131+ for such a product including apertures, subclasses 156+ for
    such a product including a component which varies in thickness, subclasses
    174+ for such a product including a component which is of uniform
    thickness, but not planar and may include parallel pleats or folds, and
    subclasses 411.1+ for a composite web or sheet which is characterized by
    the compositions of the layers.  See subclass 927 for metallic stock which
    is decorative or bears an indicia.


CLS 283/2
TXT The indicia, in part at least, related to the days and months in a given
    year or series of years.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 107+ for calendars in
    general and subclass 335 for pens and pencils carrying calendar indicia.


CLS 283/3
TXT The indicia denoting the relation of the time units being distributed over
    two or more sheets, there being some means which facilitate the location of
    the sheet bearing any particular time unit.


CLS 283/4
TXT A plurality of books being involved in each invention.


CLS 283/5
TXT The indicia being of such character as to enable a voter to express a
    choice in an election.


CLS 283/17
TXT A part or all of the indicia having a hidden meaning.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclass 495 for a tape or card reading template.

    380,    Cryptography, appropriate subclasses for a printed or embossed
    record including cryptographic structure or circultry.


CLS 283/23
TXT The indicia relate to transportation or specially facilitate keeping
    records pertaining to transportation.

    (1)     Note.  Baggage-checks are in this class, subclass 20.

    (2)     Note.  Search this class, subclasses 6 and 13, and indented
    subclasses.


CLS 283/24
TXT Including indicia arranged in units covering the same distance stated in
    the ordinary units of length or intended to cover such units.


CLS 283/25
TXT The indicia authorize transportation from one stated point to another
    stated point and back.


CLS 283/26
TXT The indica comprise an authorization for repeated travel over the same
    route.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for mileage-tickets, and subclass 25 for return-tickets.


CLS 283/27
TXT Tickets of travel issued to passengers entitling them to change from one
    line to another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80.


CLS 283/28
TXT Premiums being attached to some of the tickets or the indicia on some of
    the tickets entitling the holder to some additional service or commodity.


CLS 283/29
TXT Premiums being attached to some of the tickets or the indicia on some of
    the tickets entitling the holder to some additional service or commodity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28.


CLS 283/30
TXT The indicia include a receipt with some means for indicating the amount
    paid for the transportation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     and indented subclass.


CLS 283/31
TXT Each invention involves a book.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16.


CLS 283/32
TXT Documents of information pertaining to transportation, such as tables,
    tariffs, etc.


CLS 283/33
TXT Each invention involves a book.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     24 and 31.


CLS 283/34
TXT The indicia delineate geographical features.

    (1)     Note.  Compare Class 434, Education and Demonstration, subclasses
    130+, and indented subclasses for relief-maps and for apparatus the parts
    of which have to be moved with reference to each other, so as to show some
    specific geographical facts or relations.


CLS 283/35
TXT The indicia involving means which facilitate finding some of the
    geographical features.


CLS 283/36
TXT The indicia comprising means facilitating the location of certain items of
    information.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 359 for a folder
    including index means and subclass 360 for a sheet including index means;
    subclasses 371+ for changeable registers; subclasses 446+ for a changeable
    exhibitor device and subclasses 530+ for a changeable exhibitor including a
    plurality of hinged sheets.


CLS 283/37
TXT The indexing means involving a plurality of position-markers, usually tabs,
    for each item of information of at least a part of the items, so related to
    each other and to the item that to locate it one must go in succession from
    one marker to another until the item is reached.


CLS 283/38
TXT Each invention involving a book.


CLS 283/39
TXT The indicia which give specific index value to some of the means for
    marking the position of some of the items of information being placed
    elsewhere than upon the position-markers themselves.


CLS 283/40
TXT Each invention involving a book.


CLS 283/41
TXT The printed matter not bearing nor intended to bear any indicia beside the
    matter which facilitates the location of items of information.


CLS 283/42
TXT Each invention involving a book.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38      and 40.


CLS 283/43
TXT Each invention comprising a plurality of books.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38      and 40.


CLS 283/44
TXT The indicia pertain to the science of numbers.

    (1)     Note.  Compare apparatus classes such as 33, Geometrical
    Instruments; 434, Education and Demonstration, subclass 188, and indented
    subclasses; 73, Measuring and Testing, and 235, Registers, for apparatus
    the parts of which have to be moved with reference to each other so as to
    show a specific numerical relation.


CLS 283/45
TXT The indicia are adapted to facilitate the making of the lines involved in
    penmanship, drawing, and shorthand.

    (1)     Note.  Compare Class 434, Education and Demonstration, subclasses
    85 and 162, and indented subclasses for apparatus involving more than the
    printed matter and holders therefor, which facilitates the making of the
    lines involved in penmanship, drawing, and shorthand.


CLS 283/46
TXT The indicia facilitate the teaching of language.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 45 for printed matter which
    facilitates teaching the writing of language.

    (2)     Note.  Compare Class 434, Education and Demonstration, particularly
    subclasses 156+ for apparatus the parts of which have to be moved with
    reference to each other so as to show some specific relation which
    facilitates the teaching of language.


CLS 283/48.1
TXT TALLY:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the indicia carried by
    the indicia bearing article enable or facilitate keeping a count, score, or
    record of successive similar acts or commodities.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for an article carrying mileage indicia.

    26,     for an article carrying commutation indicia.


CLS 283/49
TXT Used in keeping game-scores.


CLS 283/50
TXT Each invention including a book.


CLS 283/51
TXT At least a part of the like units of the score are represented as severable
    parts of the printed matter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24      and 26.


CLS 283/52
TXT Each invention including a book.


CLS 283/52.1
TXT Book:

    Subject matter under subclass 48.1 wherein the indicia bearing tally
    comprises two or more sheets secured together in overlapping arrangement
    only at their corresponding margins, only at a restricted field within the
    margins, or only at their corresponding margins and at a restricted field
    within the margins.

    (1)     Note.  A folded sheet is not considered to be a book.  Also, when a
    margin of one sheet is attached to a margin of another sheet to obtain in
    effect a single sheet of greater area, the resulting article is still
    regarded as a sheet rather than a book.


CLS 283/53
TXT Documents for admission to the theater.


CLS 283/54
TXT Documents relating to insurance.


CLS 283/55
TXT Documents which facilitate the "taking of stock".


CLS 283/56
TXT Documents which by virtue of the printed matter thereon serve a dual
    purpose, one of which is to advertise some person, business, or thing, or
    documents relating solely to advertising.


CLS 283/57
TXT Documents peculiar to banking.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      9 and 12.


CLS 283/58
TXT Inventions involving bankchecks.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

     9,     11 and 12.


CLS 283/59
TXT Inventions involving certificates of deposit.


CLS 283/60.1
TXT SALES DOCUMENT:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the indicia carried by
    the indicia bearing article facilitate the taking of orders for a purchase
    or sale by waiters or other salespersons or facilitate keeping an account
    or record of such orders.


CLS 283/60.2
TXT Waiter's check:

    Subject matter under subclass 60.1 wherein the indicia of the sales
    document facilitate the taking of orders by waiters or facilitate keeping
    an account or record of such orders.


CLS 283/61
TXT Each invention comprising a strip and a leaf.


CLS 283/62
TXT Each invention comprises a strip.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 359 for a folder (i.e.,
    sheet folded only once) including identification means in the form of
    discrete label, label holder or a portion intended to receive a number,
    letter or mark.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 121+ for a
    stock material in the form of a single or plural layer web or sheet
    including a fold at the edge thereof, and subclass 181 for such a product
    which is of uniform thickness and nonplanar and includes folds (e.g.,
    pleats).


CLS 283/63.1
TXT BOOK:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the indicia bearing
    article comprises two or more sheets secured together in overlapping
    arrangement only at their corresponding margins, only at a restricted field
    within the margins, or only at their corresponding margins and at a
    restricted field within the margins.

    (1)     Note.  A folded sheet is not considered to be a book.  Also, when a
    margin of one sheet is attached to a margin of another sheet to obtain in
    effect a single sheet of greater area, the resulting article is still
    regarded as a sheet rather than a book.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     31, 33, 38, 40, 42+ 50, 52, and 52.1, for a book otherwise
    classified above.


CLS 283/64
TXT Inventions restricted to indicia-bearing covers of books.


CLS 283/64.1
TXT Accounting book:

    Subject matter under subclass 63.1 wherein the indicia carried by the book
    relate to bookkeeping or facilitate keeping a record or list of business or
    commercial transactions, commodities, or acts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66.1+,  for an accounting or listing form or sheet.


CLS 283/65
TXT There is present a leaf mounted to slide over another, so as to bring it
    into juxtaposition with any line or column, as the case may be, of that
    other leaf.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

     45.


CLS 283/66.1
TXT ACCOUNTING OR LISTING FORM OR SHEET:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the indicia carried by
    the indicia bearing article relate to bookkeeping or facilitate keeping a
    record or list of business or commercial transactions, commodities, or
    acts; and wherein the indicia bearing article comprises (a) a broad, thin
    body having two parallel surfaces both dimensions of which are large in
    comparison with the third dimension of the body or (b) a document having
    blank spaces for the insertion of information.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64.1,   for an accounting book.


CLS 283/66.2
TXT Connected:

    Subject matter under subclass 66.1 wherein there are two or more accounting
    or listing sheets which are attached to one another.


CLS 283/67
TXT METHOD:

    Subject matter under class definition drawn to a process of using printed
    matter proper in this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclasses 32 and 483+ for processes of printing printed
    matter.


CLS 283/68
TXT Fingerprint:

    Subject matter under subclass 67 wherein the printed matter is provided
    with an impression of the lines of a fingertip.

    (1)     Note.  The impression is normally produced or used for purposes of
    personal indentification.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 625+ for permanent
    identification devices.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclass 155 for education and
    demonstration systems used to teach the identification of people by
    handwriting analysis.


CLS 283/69
TXT Identifying:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein the identity of the owner of the
    fingertip is determined.


CLS 283/70
TXT Identifying:

    Subject matter under subclass 67 drawn to determining the identity of a
    person, structure, device, or apparatus.


CLS 283/71
TXT Stamp:

    Subject matter under the class definition providing for structure
    comprising a relatively small piece of paper usually issued by an official
    agency or similar entity, i.e., a government, and used to indicate payment
    by a user for a service, benefit, right or tax performed, allowed, granted
    or imposed by the agency.

    (1)     Note.  Stamps are usually issued for payment of postage fees and
    various imposed taxes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 299+ for check labels
    or tags in the form of stamps in which the stamp is specifically designed
    or attached to an article.

    101,    Printing, subclass 371 for printing devices specifically designed
    to cancel stamps.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, for stock materials or
    miscellaneous articles having a latent image.


CLS 283/72
TXT HAVING REVEALABLE CONCEALED INFORMATION, FRAUD PREVENTER OR DETECTOR, USE
    PREVENTER OR DETECTOR, OR IDENTIFIER:

    Subject matter under the class definition provided with structure or means
    associated with an indicia bearing article, i.e., printed matter, which
    either: (a) obstructs or hides information contained within or on the
    printed matter, such information being readable or understandable only by
    the use of a chemical, structure, device, or apparatus which is normally
    separate from or external to the printed matter, or by having knowledge of
    a code used with the printed matter; (b) prevents or signals an unlawful
    attempt or act of larceny of the printed matter, by the use of a chemical,
    structure, device, or apparatus which is applied to, acts upon or in some
    manner interacts with the printed matter; (c) prevents or signals an
    undesirable use of the printed matter, by the use of a chemical, structure,
    device, or apparatus which is applied to, acts upon or in some manner
    interacts with the printed matter; or (d) prevents or signals an unlawful
    or undesirable use of the printed matter, i.e., misrepresentation of
    identity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, appropriate subclasses for printing processes and
    apparatuses for making printed matter having concealable information or
    having fraud prevention or detection means.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclass 140 for identification
    and fraud preventing paper products and processes.

    235,    Registers, subclasses 380+ for systems controlled by data bearing
    records, in particular controlled by a credit card or indentification
    cards; subclasses 487+ for register systems combined with different type of
    credit cards or identification cards.

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 139+ for printed matter
    chance devices having a chance selection means.

    382,    Image Analysis, subclasses 112+ for electrical communications
    systems capable of recognizing different types of characters of printed
    matter.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 7 for coating processes for producing
    fraud or tamper detecting devices for printed matter.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 29+ for stock
    material or miscellaneous articles having a latent image or transformation;
    subclass 199 for structurally defined webs or sheets having developed image
    or soluble portion.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclass 10 for anti-fraud or tampering image products.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclass 110 for education or
    demonstration systems for identifying currency or detecting counterfeit
    coins or currency.


CLS 283/73
TXT Cryptogram (e.g., verification, tabular index):

    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the printed matter is provided
    with obstructed or hidden information readable or understandable only by
    the use of a code associated with the obstructed or hidden information.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for a cryptographic record in which all of the information is
    viewable but in which there is a hidden meaning.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    380,    Cryptography, subclass 54 for this subject matter combined with an
    optical overlay.


CLS 283/74
TXT Identifier:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 provided with structure or means which
    particularly identifies a person or an indicia bearing article.

    (1)     Note.  The structure or means may include, e.g., a picture, a
    printed description, a signature, a finger print, or similar descriptors
    and indentifiers.

    (2)     Note.  The structure or means in this subclass is exclusive of
    subject matter primarily intended to conceal information, prevent or detect
    fraud, or prevent or detect undesirable use of the structure or means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 625+ for
    identification means in the form of a check, label or tag, having specific
    means or configuration designed to cooperate with an article, object, or
    person to which the check, label or tag is to be secured or attached
    wherein the specific means or configuration is other than adhesive,
    particularly adhesive applied or layered to the back of the check, label or
    tag: or in which the identification means in the form of a check, label or
    tag has means for securing or attaching the check, label or tag to an
    article, object, or person, i.e., wherein the securing or attaching means
    is combined with the check, label or tag; or in which the identification
    means in the form of a check, label or tag is secured or attached to an
    article, object or person, i.e., wherein the check, label or tag is
    combined with the article, object, or person.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for paper articles used imprinted matter but without any printed matter.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 488+ for electric connectors
    provided with identification means.


CLS 283/75
TXT Personal:

    Subject matter under subclass 74 wherein a person is identified.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 314 for brush or combs
    provided with identifying means; subclass 330 for keys provided with
    identifying means.


CLS 283/76
TXT Having microfilm or microfiche:

    Subject matter under subclass 75 provided with a film upon which
    information is photographed greatly reduced in size, i.e., microfilm, or a
    sheet of microfilm of uniform standard size capable of storing a large
    number of pages of information, i.e., microfiche.

    (1)     Note.  The uniform size of microfiche is generally four by six
    inches.


CLS 283/77
TXT Having photograph:

    Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein structure or means particulary
    identifying a person is provided in the form of an image likeness of the
    person recorded by a camera and reproduced by on a photosensitive surface.


CLS 283/78
TXT Having fingerprint:

    Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein the means or structure is provided
    with an impression of the lines of a fingertip.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 31.5 for apparatus for producing
    fingerprints.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 1 for processes of producing
    fingerprints.


CLS 283/79
TXT Stock indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 74 for structure or means which particularly
    indentifies an indicia bearing article is configured to be attached to or
    associated with stock in bulk or in process of manufacture to indicate its
    quantity, its condition in the process of manufacture, or some other
    characteristic.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 306 for stock
    indicators specifically designed for or carried on barrel can or round box
    articles; subclass 310 for stock indicators specifically designed for or
    carried on bottles; subclass 312 for stock indicators specifically designed
    for or carried on boxes.


CLS 283/80
TXT Baggage:

    Subject matter under subclass 74 for structure or means which particularly
    indentifies an indicia bearing article is configured to be attached to or
    associated with articles utilized to carry the belongings of a person while
    traveling.


CLS 283/81
TXT Label:

    Subject matter under subclass 74 for structure or means which particularly
    identifies an indicia bearing article is provided with a tacky glue,
    cement, or similar substance used to attach the structure or means to a
    receptacle or other object.


CLS 283/82
TXT In incorporated magnetic material:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 provided with material capable of being
    magnetized.

    (1)     Note.  The magnetic material usually is either encoded with
    information which is readable or made understandable to a person by a
    device or machine, or encoded with information which signals an attempted
    theft or alteration of the printed matter.


CLS 283/83
TXT And electrically conductive material:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 provided with material capable of
    conducting electricity.


CLS 283/84
TXT Overlaying vaporizable material revealing information:

    Subject matter under subclass 83 wherein the electrically conductive
    material is layered, coated, or otherwise positioned over indicia or other
    information on the article and is composed of a substance which when
    subject to an electrical current vaporizes thereby revealing the indicia or
    other information.


CLS 283/85
TXT Utilizing electromagnetic radiation:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein either the hidden or obstructed
    information is made readable or understandable, or the larceny prevention
    or signalling occurs by the use of a specific frequency or range of
    frequencies of electromagnetic radiation.

    (1)     Note.  The electromagnetic radiation utilized may be of any or a
    variation of frequencies such as infrared, visible, or ultraviolet;
    additionally, coherent monochromatic visible light, i.e., lasers, may be
    used with subject matter of this and indented subclasses to either reveal
    the information or to prevent or signal the attemped larceny.


CLS 283/86
TXT Laser on incorporated hologram:

    Subject matter under subclass 85 wherein the information is made readable
    or understandable by the use of a coherent monochromatic visible light
    source, i.e., a laser, illuminating a developed photographic plate which
    was exposed solely by the use of a coherent monochromatic visible light
    source, i.e., a hologram, and further wherein the hologram is integral with
    or is permanently attached or associated with the printed matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    1+ for holographic systems or elements.


CLS 283/87
TXT And incorporated radiation filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 85 provided with a filter in the form of
    means or structure which allows or permits either: (a) only a specific
    range of frequencies of electromagnetic radiation to pass therethrough; or
    (b) polarized visible light to pass therethrough only when the filter is
    properly oriented relative to the angle of polarization of the light and
    wherein either (a) or (b), the filter is integral with or permanently
    attached or associated with the printed matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements,
    appropriate subclasses for optical filters or optical systems or elements
    utilizing various types of radiation filters.


CLS 283/88
TXT Infrared filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein the filter allows or permits
    electromagnetic radiation in the infrared range of the electromagnetic
    spectrum to pass therethrough.


CLS 283/89
TXT Ultraviolet filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein the filter allows or permits
    electromagnetic radiation in the ultraviolet range of the electromagnetic
    spectrum to pass therethrough.


CLS 283/90
TXT Polarized:

    Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein the filter allows polarized
    visible light to pass therethrough only when the filter is properly
    oriented relative to the angle of polarization of the light.


CLS 283/91
TXT Specific spectral transmittance and reflectance:

    Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein the printed matter is provided
    with means which allows or permits only a specific frequency or range of
    frequencies of electromagnetic radiation to pass therethrough and is
    designed or structured to cause a specific frequency or range of
    frequencies of electromagnetic radiation to bounce off or rebound, i.e.,
    reflect, from the means of the printed matter.


CLS 283/92
TXT On incorporated fluorescent material:

    Subject matter under subclass 85 wherein the printed matter is provided
    with material which when irradiated by electromagnetic radiation will emit
    electromagnetic radiation, generally of a different frequency other than
    that of the irradiating frequency.


CLS 283/93
TXT Having dot pattern:

    Subject matter under subclass 85 wherein the printed matter is provided
    with structure in the form of a specific arrangement of a plurality of
    small geometric marks generally made by an imprinting process.

    (1)     Note.  The arrangement is generally readable or understandable only
    by a or by the use of machine or device and conveys a notice or signal,
    e.g., a VOID mark, thereby preventing either unauthorized copying or other
    use of the printed matter.


CLS 283/94
TXT Utilizing superposed layers:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the article is provided with
    multiple layers of printed matter or multiple layers of indicia wherein a
    first layer is specially constructed to be virtually unalterable and the
    relation of this layer to any other layer is such that an alteration of
    said other layer is easily and readily detected.


CLS 283/95
TXT Utilizing chemical:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the information is made readable
    or understandable, or the larceny prevention or signaling occurs by the use
    of a substance which is capable of chemically reacting with a portion of
    the printed matter.


CLS 283/96
TXT Utilizing solvent:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the information is made readable
    or understandable, or the larceny prevention or signalling occurs by the
    use of a substance which is capable of dissolving a portion of the printed
    matter.


CLS 283/97
TXT Water:

    Subject matter under subclass 96 wherein the substance is a clear,
    colorless, inert liquid chemically described as HOH.


CLS 283/98
TXT By mating or cooperating separable components:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the information is made readable
    or understandable, or the larceny prevention or signalling occurs by the
    use of the printed matter being composed of plural divideable parts
    specifically configured to closely join together, i.e., mate together, or
    which work together, i.e., cooperate.


CLS 283/99
TXT By moveable components:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the information is made readable
    or understandable or the larceny prevention or signalling occurs by the use
    of the printed matter being composed of plural attached relatively moveable
    parts.


CLS 283/100
TXT By removeable material:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the information is made readable
    or understandable or the larceny prevention or signalling occurs by the use
    of material either integral with or attached to the printed matter such
    material being configured or so composed to be relatively easily separated
    or detached from the printed matter.


CLS 283/101
TXT Adhesively attached:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the material is attached to the
    printed matter by a tacky glue, cement, or similar substance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 40.1+ for
    stock material or miscellaneous articles composed of multiple layers, one
    of which is removable and attached to other layers by adhesive.


CLS 283/102
TXT Erasable:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the material is composed of a
    substance that can be separated or detached by the use of a rubbing, wiping
    or scraping action.


CLS 283/103
TXT Tearable:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the material is so configured
    that it can be separated or detached by the use of a pulling apart or
    rending action.


CLS 283/104
TXT And cutting attachment:

    Subject matter under subclass 103 provided with a device affixed to and
    capable of performing a cutting operation on the material.


CLS 283/105
TXT Perforated:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the material is provided with a
    hole produced by a piercing, punching, or boring operation.


CLS 283/106
TXT By folded portion:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the information if made readable
    or understandable or the larceny prevention or signalling occurs by the use
    of a portion of the printed matter that has been bent over or doubled unto
    itself.


CLS 283/107
TXT Having plastic laminate:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the printed matter is provided
    with a layer composed of a complex organic compound produced by
    polymerization.


CLS 283/108
TXT And differentiable sections:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein the printed matter is composed of
    a plurality of distinct layers structured, upon being subjected to a
    separating force, to disassociate into distinct, predictable portions.


CLS 283/109
TXT And transparent laminate:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein the printed matter is provided
    with a layer of material capable of transmitting light such that
    information thereunder can be observed.


CLS 283/110
TXT And translucent coating or laminate:

    Subject matter under subclass 109 further provided either with a layer of
    material which is initially fluent and which is applied and hardened to a
    surface, i.e., a coating; or a thin plate or sheet, i.e., a laminate,
    wherein the coating or laminate can transmit only a portion of visible
    light impinging thereon.


CLS 283/111
TXT And opaque laminate:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein the printed matter is provided
    with a layer of material impenetrable by light.


CLS 283/112
TXT And photograph:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein the printed matter is provided
    with an image recorded by a camera and reproduced on a photosensitive
    surface.


CLS 283/113
TXT Having watermark:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the information is made readable
    or understandable or the larceny prevention or signalling occurs by the use
    of a translucent design impressed upon the printed matter during
    manufacture and visible when the printed matter is placed between an
    observer and a strong visible light source.


CLS 283/114
TXT Having specific color:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 provided with means or structure which
    when illuminated absorbs all of the frequencies of the visible light range
    except for a specific range or frequency designated for a particular color.

    (1)     Note.  The means or structure in this subclass is usually some type
    of colored laminate or coating which by its colored nature co-operates with
    the printed matter to perform the information revelation or the larceny
    prevention or signalling.


CLS 283/115
TXT CHART OR GRAPH:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the indicia carried by
    the indicia bearing article facilitate the presentation of information in
    the form of a diagram, table, drawing, or other pictorial device or
    representation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34+,    for an indicia bearing article in which the indicia relate to maps
    or otherwise facilitate delineation of geographical, navigational, or
    astronomical features.

    44,     for an indicia bearing article in which the indicia pertain to
    mathematics or otherwise pertain to that group of sciences which deal with
    quantities, magnitudes, and forms, and to their relationships, attributes,
    etc., by the use of numbers and symbols.


CLS 283/116
TXT ENVELOPE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the indicia bearing
    article comprises a substantially flat receptacle having two walls joined
    at their edges to form a pocketlike closure made of paper or a paper
    substitute material, and wherein the receptacle is disclosed to be for use
    as an enclosure for a sheetlike article (e.g., a document) while it is
    being transported (e.g., mailed).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 68.1+ for an
    envelope in which the physical structure of the envelope is a part of the
    invention or is deemed to be unconventional.


CLS 283/117
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition not otherwise classified above.



    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS

    The documents in the following collections have been placed without regard
    to their original classification or to their claimed subject matter and are
    therefore not exhaustive of the art subject matter but are only examples of
    the art. Consequently, a complete search for an art subject matter provided
    here would require a review of the higher portions of this classification
    schedule.



CLS 283/900
TXT MEDICAL RECORD:

    Cross-reference art collection drawn to printed matter in the form of a
    record of a medical history of a person.


CLS 283/901
TXT CONCEALED DATA:

    Cross-reference art collection drawn to printed matter normally hidden or
    sealed from view.


CLS 283/902
TXT ANTI-PHOTOCOPY:

    Cross-reference art collection drawn to printed matter provided with means
    or structure preventing a portion of the printed matter from being
    reproduced by a photosensitive process.


CLS 283/903
TXT LOTTERY TICKET:

    Cross-reference art collection drawn to printed matter used in a contest in
    which tickets are distributed or sold, the winning ticket being secretly
    predetermined or ultimately selected in a chance drawing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclass 139 for chance devices provided
    with a chance selection means.


CLS 283/904
TXT CREDIT CARD:

    Cross-reference art collection drawn to printed matter used to facilitate
    business transactions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 380+ for register systems combined with
    credit cards; subclass 487 for registers provided with credit card type of
    records.


CLS 285/
TTL PIPE JOINTS OR COUPLINGS

CLS 285/
TXT Joints between two or more members, such members comprising fluid, wire or
    cable conducting pipes, tubes or tubular bodies with or without rod-like
    bodies in end-to-end or side-to-side relation or between such a member and
    a plate, wall, receptacle or other base.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 252.1+ for a
    closet bowl coupling and subclass 696 for a fitting or manifold for a sink
    or bath.

    5,      Beds, subclasses 279+, especially subclass 282 for joints and
    connections, and subclasses 288+ for corner fasteners.

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., appropriate subclasses, especially
    subclasses 588+ for head and socket separable fasteners.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 890.14+ for methods of making gas and
    water fittings.

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclasses 190-194 for analogous
    structure in pressure regulators, safety devices and leak preventers
    specialized to that art.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 58+ for an exterior
    type flashing, e.g., sealing around a chimney, subclass 95 for a conduit or
    passage means at a roof end structure, subclass 219 for a flue connection
    with a building structure, and subclasses 220.1+ for a service duct, e.g.,
    an electrical conduit within a barrier structure.

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 495+ for separating media positioned in
    a flow line.

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses, for a method of or means
    for making a metal article by plastically working a blank, e.g., forging or
    bending it.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 201, for joints or couplings
    combined with fluid meter box structure.  (More than a conventional
    statement).

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 40 for a flexible joint between
    boiler sections in a steam locomotive and subclass 47 for an articulate or
    flexible pipe connection between relatively movable parts of a steam
    locomotive.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 14.01+ for manifolds, couplings and
    claws providing means to connect teat cups with pressure and/or milk lines.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 87, for fire tube "U"
    couplings, 360+, for special water tube closures and couplings, 365 and
    511, for specialized tubes and connectors.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 307 and 312 for connections between
    stovepipes and stoves.

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 225 for joints in tobacco smoking appliances.

    137,    Fluid Handling, for fluid handling apparatus including coupling and
    pipe joints in combination with other fluid handling means, see
    particularly subclasses 231, 355.16+, 580, 614+, and 637.05.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclass for process of making a joint by a laminating
    operation.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 173+ for side by side heat exchange tubes
    connected to a header plate, and subclass 178 for a heat exchange tube with
    a support or flow connector.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 75.11+ for well heads with some fluid handling or
    other feature special to wells, especially subclasses 86.1+ for a well head
    with a sealed or anchored inner member and a valve and subclasses 88.1+ for
    a well head with a sealed or anchored inner member and a lateral port,
    subclasses 179+ and the subclasses there noted for packers situated below
    ground level and sealing the annular space between a prepositioned well
    conduit and a pipe inserted into the conduit, subclasses 206+ for expanding
    anchor means situated below ground level holding an inner pipe to a
    prepositioned well conduit.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, particularly subclasses
    17-20, 50+, 66, 67, and 71-94 for pipe joints and couplings limited to
    electrical use.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 435+ for a filter
    element positioned in a flow line or a flow line connected casing and
    subclasses 459+ for a filter element mounted on a pipe.

    213,    Railway Draft Appliances, subclass 76 for combined car and air
    train line couplings.  See the Notes thereunder.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 3.2+, 241 and 242 for receptacles and face
    plates having means for coupling pipes thereto.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 122.1+ for a method of bonding a
    nonmetal to a metal using separate metallic filler and subclass 120 for a
    method of mechanical joining and bonding a nonmetal to a metal.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 195+, 225+
    and 587.1+ for combined sprayer devices and couplings and for couplings
    specially designed for rotating or adjusting the sprayer  on the flow line.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution of Disintegration, subclasses 46.013+,
    especially subclass 46.015, for the combination of a sink joint, per se,
    classifiable in this class (285), and a comminuting means.

    248,    Supports, subclass 188 for leg attaching connections for stands.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 89.5, 148+, 149+, and 149.9
    for fluid handling apparatus including a flow path comprising a coupling
    having a valve therein.

    256,    Fences, subclasses 47+ for fence wire to post connections, and
    subclasses 65+ for fence rail to post connections.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses, for processes within the class definition for
    molding or shaping plastic materials.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a seal between two pipes or a
    pipe and a wall that are at most secured together only by friction between
    the seal and the pipe or wall, subclasses 602+ for a static contact seal
    intended for use on a pipe, conduit, or cable.

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, subclasses 9.1+ for a connection between a
    holder and tool or work-piece having the gripping means or seat on or
    within the holder.  See the Search Notes thereunder.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 248+ for wave
    guide joints or couplings, which claim significant wave propagation
    characteristics, and subclasses 109+ for such joints or couplings providing
    a branched circuit.

    403,    Joints and Connections, for joints or connection in general.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, for the combination
    of a pipe joint or coupling with means to drill in the manner of that class.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for electrical
    connectors and see section IV of the class definition of that class (439)
    for the line between Class 439 and the other classes where joints or
    couplings can be found.


CLS 285/1
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including means responsive to a
    predetermined force to release the means holding the joint together to
    prevent injury to the parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33+,    for a coupling with means to effect a quick release in addition to
    a normal release.

    304,    for a "breakaway" type coupling comprising a friction detent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 67+ for a destructible or deformable
    element control of fluid handling means.  See the Search Notes thereunder.


CLS 285/2
TXT Devices under subclass 1 which include a frangible or deformable element;
    e.g., a shear pin or bolt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for a frangible element essential to the making or disassembly of
    the joint.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 59+ for freeze condition responsive
    safety means in fluid handling means.


CLS 285/3
TXT Subject matter under the class definition which includes a frangible
    element that is cut or broken prior to assembly or disassembly of the joint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for a coupling with a safety release including a frangible element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 67+ for flow control means responsive to
    frangible means, and subclass 797 for a frangible element in a flow control
    means.

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 265 for a frangible closure in a metallic
    receptacle.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 541.1+ for dispensers with frangible outlet
    elements.


CLS 285/4
TXT Subject matter under subclass 3 including score lines or grooves whereby
    the size or angle of a piece may be varied prior to assembly by cutting or
    breaking along the line or groove.


CLS 285/5
TXT Devices under the class definition particular to irrigation pipe lines and
    generally including guide means to facilitate the coupling operation and/or
    support means for supporting the coupling and the pipe above ground level.
    The support may be a static support or a transporting means such as a sled
    or wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61+,    for the combination of a support and a coupling.


CLS 285/6
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5 including means wherein a latch can be
    released by manipulation of the pipe, e.g., by relative rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    307,    for essential catches manipulated by conduit motion.


CLS 285/7
TXT Subject matter under the class definition peculiar to couplings in
    household vacuum cleaners; e.g., between the blower or intake pipe and the
    dirt receptacle, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 300.1+ for
    vacuum cleaner combinations.


CLS 285/8
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising a readily detachable coupling
    member generally of the socket type with means to engage the spigot end of
    a faucet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243     and 322+, for contractible sockets.

    374+,   for packed sockets.

    399+,   for socket joints.


CLS 285/9.1
TXT WITH MAGNETIC ELEMENT:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein two or more members are
    in coupled relation and wherein there is provided a component having
    magnetic properties configured to aid in holding the members together.


CLS 285/9.2
TXT CONTACT ONLY:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein two or more members are
    held in a coupled relation solely by physical contact of portions of the
    members in the absence of either separate coupling means or of specific
    coupling  structure of the members.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 383+ for the combination of a receiver, dispenser and joint
    therebetween.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 149.7 for a valve flow line
    section joined to another by a contact only, or friction, joint, where the
    act of joining operates the valve in opposition to a spring biasing it.


CLS 285/10
TXT Devices under the class definition wherein a liquid seals a joint to
    prevent escape of the line flow to the exterior of the flow path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94,     for couplings with lubricating means.

    95+,    for couplings wherein a seal is enhanced by the line pressure.

    284.1+, for molded joints.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 246+ for liquid sealing at a valve
    interface; subclass 247 for liquid trap seals, and see the Search Notes
    thereunder.


CLS 285/11
TXT Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein the sealing is between juxtaposed
    surfaces which are relatively movable.


CLS 285/12
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising means whereby the type of
    joint can be changed by reassembling all or some of its parts in a
    different relationship or by the addition of a part or parts.


CLS 285/13
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which means are provided to
    catch or otherwise dispose of material dripping or leaking from the joint.
    By drip or leakage is meant material which escapes to the exterior of the
    normal flow path and also includes condensate and water derived from
    melting ice or frost.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 312+ for leak or drip disposal means in
    fluid handling devices.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 108+ for drip, leakage or waste catching or
    disposal in dispensers.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a seal between two pipes or a
    pipe and a wall that are at most secured together only by friction between
    the seal and the pipe or wall, subclass 429 for a dynamic close proximity
    impeller-type seal having a fluid collector or receiver.


CLS 285/14
TXT Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein one element of the coupling is
    provided with holes or channels to aid in the disposal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 165 for a grated inlet
    surface drain with weep means.


CLS 285/15
TXT Devices under the class definition in which the device, or parts of the
    device, are equipped with means to restore, or aid in restoring the device
    to its former condition after decay, injury or partial destruction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31+,    for coupling means insertable between two fixed pipe ends.

    148.6+, for compound joints, which include an external packing and
    compressor therefor.

    337,    for external packing means, generally disclosed to stop leakage
    around an existing joint.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 315+ for repair features in fluid
    material handling systems and valves and see the Search Notes thereunder.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 97+ for pipe repair devices,
    especially subclass 99 for external patches with means for stopping leaks
    in a pipe or joint but which are not structurally related to the joint.


CLS 285/16
TXT Subject matter under subclass 15 including means whereby a coupling part
    (e.g., a part of the fitting wall or part of a lining) can be readily
    replaced when worn, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45+,    for coupling housings or linings to control heat exchange or to
    protect the coupling.


CLS 285/17
TXT Subject matter under subclass 16 including provision of alternate wear
    parts.


CLS 285/18
TXT Devices under the class definition with auxiliary means to aid in the
    assembly or disassembly (other than mere conventional wrench engaging
    portions) or having a particular relationship of parts solely to facilitate
    the assembly or disassembly in extremely difficult or impossible places
    (e.g., inserted section between fixed ends).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16+,    for means to aid in the replacing of wear element.

    123.3+, for packed joints with external separable clamps.

    148.6+, for compound joints including separable clamps for encircling an
    existing jointed pipe.

    391,    for segmental threads to permit coupling of screw means by partial
    rotation.


CLS 285/19
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 comprising plural distinct joints, a
    tubular member and two or more fixed spaced plates with a combination
    relationship therebetween whereby the tubular member may be coupled to the
    plates (e.g., a flue between boiler plates).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31+,    for means to insert a section between fixed pipe ends.

    154.1+, for pipe to box couplings wherein at least two walls are essential
    to one joint.


CLS 285/20
TXT Subject matter under subclass 19 wherein the tubular member extends
    entirely through at least one of the plates with addition joint means on
    its free end (e.g., waste pipe and overflow connections).


CLS 285/21.1
TXT Molded joint facilitator:

    Subject matter under subclass 18 which is particularly required for either
    the assembly or the disassembly of the joint elements; e.g., a pouring
    shroud or a means to cause fusion between joint elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284+,   for molded joints in general and also see  the associated search
    notes.


CLS 285/21.2
TXT Having embedded facilitator:

    Subject matter under subclass 21.1 wherein a means is encased within at
    least one joint element to perfect the joint; e.g., a heating element
    inside at least one joint element which is capable of causing fusion
    between the joint elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    273.9, 274.2, and 379.7 for application of electrical energy to fuse joints.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 535 and 544 for heating devices which
    are used to fuse plastic elements.


CLS 285/21.3
TXT Having solvent facilitator:

    Subject matter under subclass 21.1 in which a fluid is used to dissolve
    portions of adjoining joint element surfaces to cause a chemical fusion
    bond therebetween.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    305 and 308.2 for methods of solvent bonding.


CLS 285/22
TXT Subject matter under subclass 21 comprising spacing means to position the
    pipe ends properly for the joining operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27+,    for means to guide the ends into coupling relation and see the
    Search Notes thereunder.


CLS 285/23
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 having combined with a part of the device
    a holding means which is inoperative in the assembled operating device for
    (1) supporting the device during assembly or disassembly, or (2) for
    immobilizing a moving part, to permit transportation or safe storage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for a spacer in a molded joint.

    27+,    for guide means to align the parts during assembly or coupling and
    see the Search Notes thereunder.

    182,    for elbows with knock-down nesting features.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 316 for similar means in fluid handling
    apparatus and see the Search Notes thereunder.


CLS 285/24
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 including means to gather and align
    cooperating portions of a coupling to register the coupling interfaces and
    supporting means to maintain the cooperating coupling portions in
    substantial mating position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5+,     for irrigation type couplings many of which include a guide and
    support.


CLS 285/25
TXT Subject matter under subclass 24 involving couplings for two or more lines
    which do not unite within the scope of the combination of elements claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28+,    for a coupling plus a guide.

    63,     for a coupling plus a support.

    120.1+, for plural noncommunicating lines which do not claim the guide and
    support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    213,    Railway Draft Appliances, subclass 76 for combined car and air
    train line couplings.


CLS 285/26
TXT Subject matter under subclass 25 including means to restrain the separation
    of the coupling elements (e.g., a latch or lock means).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     for the combination of a latch or lock, a guide and coupling means.

    80,     for the combination limited to a lock and coupling means.

    81+,    for an auxiliary latch and coupling means.


CLS 285/27
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 comprising guide means to gather and align
    the members into coupling position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for irrigation couplings which include guide means.

    330,    for an interlocked or lapped interface.

    332+,   for a conically tapered interface.

    347,    for a cylindrical shank which may align the pipe ends.


CLS 285/28
TXT Subject matter under subclass 27 including coupling means for two or more
    lines, which do not unite within the scope of the combination of elements
    claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for this subcombination plus a support.

    120.1,  for a mere coupling for plural    noncommunicating flow paths.


CLS 285/29
TXT Subject matter under subclass 28 including means to restrain the separation
    of the coupling elements (e.g., a latch or lock means).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for this combination plus a support.

    80,     for the combination of a lock and coupling means.

    81+,    for means blocking the release of the  joint holding means.


CLS 285/30
TXT Devices under subclass 18 having spacing means for supporting coupling
    parts of two distinct pipes in mating position with respect to the mating
    coupling parts of the inlet and outlet of a receptacle (e.g., water meter
    case) or of fixed pipe ends.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120.1+, for pipe connections providing plural noncommunicating paths.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 201 for connections between
    combined volume and rate of flow meters.


CLS 285/31
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 wherein means are provided for the lateral
    insertion of a section between the ends of two fixed pipes to complete the
    line.


CLS 285/32
TXT Subject matter under subclass 31 including telescopic portions which have
    screw threads therebetween for effecting the adjustment of the length of
    the insertable section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145.1+, for a telescopic joint in combination with a diverse type joint
    which permits motion between the coupled parts.

    298+,   for mere telescopic joints.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for an articulated
    threaded connection in general, and especially subclass 296 for a threaded
    inserted section in general.


CLS 285/33
TXT Devices under subclass 18 comprising primary means for holding a joint
    together and means for readily releasing the holding means whereby the
    joint may be disassembled by two modes of operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for a coupling with a safety release.

    304,    for a breakaway type coupling including a friction-type detent.

    345+,   for a coupling with a frictionally  retained spigot.


CLS 285/34
TXT Subject matter under subclass 33 comprising segmental threads mounted to be
    radially moved out of grasping relationship.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322,    for a contractible socket.  See the Search Notes thereunder.

    391,    for a screw coupling with interrupted threads.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    89,     Ordnance, subclasses 20.2+ for interrupted threads on breech
    closures.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclass 72 for other
    interrupted threads on wall and panel closures.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed Tool-Deformed or Locked-Threaded
    Fastener subclasses 417+ for screws and bolts provided with
    circumferentially interrupted threads.


CLS 285/35
TXT Subject matter under subclass 34 wherein the segmental threads are
    pivotally mounted on the female member.


CLS 285/36
TXT Devices under subclass 18 comprising an attached stop means which limits
    the endwise motion of the members to prevent the jamming of the threads.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333+,   355+ and 390+, for integral stop shoulders in screw joints.


CLS 285/37
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 including means for facilitating the
    winding of a packing in the coupling or a wrapped type holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254,    for nonmetal to metal joints having an external holder comprising a
    wrapped band.


CLS 285/38
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 comprising extraneous means to aid in the
    connection of a coupling or hand wheel means to assist in the rotation of a
    part thereof in the making or disassembly of the joint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for a coupling with a particular tool engaging means or combined
    with a tool.

    308+,   for a coupling with an essential catch having means to operate the
    catch.


CLS 285/39
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 comprising tool engaging means having a
    particular arrangement with respect to the joint elements or a joint having
    specific tool engaging means in combination with the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for a coupling having a hand wheel for rotary engagement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 53+ for a wrench, per se.


CLS 285/40
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 including means to form a thread upon
    assembly of one member into another by relative longitudinal movement.


CLS 285/41
TXT Subject matter under the class definition combined with means for heating
    or cooling the joint or a part thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    187,    for a temperature responsive coupling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 334+ for a heating or cooling means
    combined with fluid handling means.  See the Search Notes thereunder.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 32 for means to protect a pipe
    during thawing and freezing.


CLS 285/42
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising a shield generally
    including a sheet of ductile material shaped to turn water at the junction
    of a pipe (e.g. vent stack) with a roof or floor surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 58+ for an exterior
    type, e.g., chimney, flashing including building structure.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 163+ for a grated
    inlet surface drain which may have a flashed joint.


CLS 285/43
TXT Subject matter under subclass 42 wherein the roof is at an angle to the
    horizontal.


CLS 285/44
TXT Subject matter under subclass 43 including means to compensate for
    variations in the pitch of  roofs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184,    for couplings permitting angular adjustment between connected
    sections.


CLS 285/45
TXT Devices under the class definition in which the joint is completely or
    partially surrounded by a housing to control heat exchange or to act as a
    protective or ornamental cover, or is provided with a protective liner, or
    electrical insulation means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114+,   for strain relief combinations.

    123.1+, for a coupling for concentric plural noncommunicating pipes.

    123.3+, for inner to spaced outer tube coupling.

    222.1+, for sheathed flexible pipe involving more than one distinct
    connection.

    287.1,  for means for preventing the entrance  of roots to a joint.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 100-178 for appropriate pipe
    structure, per se.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclass for methods of making electrical insulation by a
    laminating operation.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet, and especially subclass 920 (a cross-reference art collection) for a
    product having a heating insulating feature.


CLS 285/46
TXT Subject matter under subclass 45 in which the joint includes a member which
    surrounds a pipe or pipes and covers the opening through which the pipe
    passes through a wall, generally for ornamental appearance and supporting
    or centering the coupling in an opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61+,    for the combination of a support and coupling and see the Search
    Notes thereunder.

    189+,   for pipe to plate joints, especially subclass 193 wherein a portion
    of a fixture (e.g. a faucet) passes through a wall.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 359 for escutcheon type supports in fluid
    handling systems and see the Search Notes thereunder.


CLS 285/47
TXT Subject matter under subclass 45 wherein means are provided to insulate one
    part of a joint from another part or from a third member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, particularly subclasses
    17+, 19+, 21+, 64, 65, and 71-94 for conduit and cable joints with
    structure having an electrical function only.


CLS 285/48
TXT Subject matter under subclass 47 comprising serially connected parts having
    insulation to prevent heat or vibration transfer, or the flow of
    electricity therebetween.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, particularly subclasses
    17-22, 64, 65, and 71-94 for conduit and cable joints having claimed
    electrical characteristics.


CLS 285/49
TXT Subject matter under subclass 48 including a conduit, generally a resilient
    member, between pipe ends to prevent transmitting noise and vibration from
    one pipe to another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148.13+, for serial diverse couplings comprising diverse materials, one of
    which is nonmetal.  See the Search Notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 212+ for mufflers and sound filters.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 560+ for resilient supports.


CLS 285/50
TXT Subject matter under subclass 48 wherein the insulation or a portion
    thereof is within a joint intermediate the joints for connection to means
    external of the coupling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144.1+, for serial relative movable joints.

    148.1+, for serial diverse joints in a single  flow path or line.


CLS 285/51
TXT Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein the intermediate joint comprises a
    ball and socket joint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261,    for a ball and socket joint.  See the Search Notes thereunder.


CLS 285/52
TXT Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein the intermediate joint comprises a
    flanged nut or internally threaded thimble with an inwardly extending
    flange or its equivalent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    354,    for a packed screw thimble joint.


CLS 285/53
TXT Subject matter under subclass 48 comprising a sleeve joint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    369+,   for a packed sleeve.


CLS 285/54
TXT Subject matter under subclass 48 comprising a socket-type joint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231+,   for a flexible joint having a socketed packing.

    374+,   for a packed socket joint.


CLS 285/55
TXT Subject matter under subclass 45 comprising a protective cover or layer
    which may be inside the coupling or outside it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47+,    for insulated couplings.

    222.1+, for a coupling for a plural layer pipe, which provide distinct
    connections for two or more layers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 375 for similar structure combined with
    flow control means.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 124+ for lined or covered
    flexible fabric pipe; subclass 131 for flexible pipe having a spirally
    wound liner; subclasses 137+ for other lined or covered flexible pipe; and
    subclasses 140+ for other lined or covered pipe.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for methods of making heat insulating covers.

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 470 for receptacle linings.


CLS 285/56
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including means to support (e.g.,
    a flange) the toilet on a floor in combination with joint means between the
    toilet and soil pipe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61+,    for couplings in combination with supports.

    136.1+, for a pipe or rod to pipe to plate joint system.

    189+,   for pipe to plate joints, especially subclasses 192+ for scant type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 252.1+ for floor
    support and connection means between a flush closet and a soil pipe, and
    subclass 211 for a closet ventilation fitting limited to that use.


CLS 285/57
TXT Subject matter under subclass 56 including a flexible diaphragm or bellows
    in the joint means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223+,   for a flexible joint between rigid members, especially subclass 225
    for a diaphragm, and subclass 226 for a bellows.


CLS 285/58
TXT Subject matter under subclass 56 including an intermediate member between
    the soil pipe and the toilet requiring a separate joint between each.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148.1+, for a joint system of serial diverse joints.


CLS 285/59
TXT Subject matter under subclass 58 wherein the toilet includes a tapered
    spigot outlet to the soil pipe.


CLS 285/60
TXT Subject matter under subclass 56 wherein the toilet includes a tapered
    spigot outlet to the pipe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59,     for tapered spigot outlets to an intermediate coupling.


CLS 285/61
TXT Devices under the class definition combined with means for supporting a
    joint relative to means external of the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5+,     for an irrigation type coupling.

    24+,    for the combination of a guide and support with a coupling.

    42+,    for a roof or floor drain flashing type coupling.

    46+,    for an escutcheon type cover which may also support.

    56+,    for a floor supported water-closet    coupling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 110 for antennas and
    subclass 146 for guyed masts.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 343+ for a fluid handling and support
    combination.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 112 for the
    combination of a coupling, support and nozzle.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 38+ for a staff support and subclasses 49+ for
    a pipe or cable support.


CLS 285/62
TXT Subject matter under subclass 61 in which the support is a vehicle, e.g.,
    automobile, wagon, railroad car, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 899+ for this combination combined with
    flow controllers.  See the Search Notes thereunder.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 421 for a draft connection between vehicles
    combined with a service connection to conduct power fluid therebetween.


CLS 285/63
TXT Subject matter under subclass 62 in which the vehicle is a railroad car or
    locomotive or a part thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24+,    for the combination of a support, guide and coupling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 345+ and 347+ for this combination
    combined with valve means.  See the Search Notes thereunder.

    248,    Supports, subclass 53, for the support, per se.


CLS 285/64
TXT Subject matter under subclass 61 in which the support is a structural
    member of a building immovably joined to the ground.


CLS 285/65
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which the members have
    identical meeting ends and detent means to have identical ends and detent
    means, which coact with an intermediate means to complete the joint, e.g.,
    railway car hose couplings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24+,    for similar couplings in combination with a support and guide.

    27+,    for similar couplings in combination with a guide means.

    62+,    for similar couplings in combination with supports.


CLS 285/66
TXT Subject matter under subclass 65 comprising an intermediate between
    identical ends.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    369+,   for a packed sleeve joint.  See the Search Notes thereunder.


CLS 285/67
TXT Subject matter under subclass 65 including lapping portions which limit the
    coupling motion to a radial direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for side slide couplings with a line pressure responsive seal.

    325+,   for other side slide couplings.


CLS 285/68
TXT Subject matter under subclass 65 in which the members have ports which are
    at right angles to the line flow.


CLS 285/69
TXT Subject matter under subclass 68 including supplemental detent means (e.g.,
    latch) to hold the parts in coupled position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81+,    for auxiliary latches in combination with other types of couplings
    to positively hold the coupling in coupled relationship.

    305+,   for detents which are essential to the making of the joint.


CLS 285/70
TXT Subject matter under subclass 65 in which the members have ports which are
    longitudinal with respect to the flow path.


CLS 285/71
TXT Subject matter under subclass 70 provided with a pivoted hook or loop for
    joining and locking the joint.


CLS 285/72
TXT Subject matter under subclass 71 including supplemental detent means (e.g.,
    latch) to hold the parts in coupled position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81+,    for auxiliary latches in combination with other types of couplings.

    305+,   for detents which are essential to the making of the joint.


CLS 285/73
TXT Subject matter under subclass 70 including means for holding the members in
    coupled relationship comprising an integral hook.


CLS 285/74
TXT Subject matter under subclass 73 wherein hooks on one side of the port are
    so related that they are engaged by a rocking or oscillating movement about
    a transverse axis with respect to the port axis.


CLS 285/75
TXT Subject matter under subclass 74 wherein the member reciprocates with
    respect to a coupling head and includes means to force the member toward
    coupling position.


CLS 285/76
TXT Subject matter under subclass 74 including supplemental means to hold the
    parts in coupled position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81+,    for auxiliary latches in combination with other types of coupling.

    305+,   for detents which are essential to the making of the joint.


CLS 285/77
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 wherein the detent reciprocates to and
    from locking position.


CLS 285/78
TXT Subject matter under subclass 77 wherein the detent is a key or wedge means.


CLS 285/79
TXT Subject matter under subclass 73 including supplemental means to hold the
    parts in coupled position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76+,    for auxiliary latches in similar couplings limited to oscillating
    engagement.

    81+,    for auxiliary latches in combination with other types of couplings.

    305+,   for detents which are essential to the making of the joint.


CLS 285/80
TXT Subject matter under the class definition combined with lock means for
    preventing unauthorized opening of a joint or seal means for indicating
    tampering with the joint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81+,    for a means to block the disassembly of a joint (e.g., auxiliary
    latch, lock nut, etc.).  See the Search Notes thereunder.

    305+,   for catches essential to the making of a joint.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 383+ for locks or seals in combination
    with fluid handling means and see the Search Notes thereunder.


CLS 285/81
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising perfecting means to
    restrain or retain the means holding the parts together, the holding means
    being restrained against motion that would uncouple the joint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65+,    for auxiliary detents in train line couplers.

    80,     for joints locked or sealed against unauthorized use.

    305+,   for a coupling comprising an essential catch.

    403+,   for separable fasteners essential to a socket joint.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 614.06 and 637.05 for valved, separable
    flow path sections wherein the valves or their actuators may serve to block
    release of the means which joins the sections.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 89+ for means to block or
    disable a valve actuator and see the Search Notes thereunder, and subclass
    149.9 for a valved pipe joint or coupling wherein the valve or its actuator
    blocks release of the means which makes the joint.


CLS 285/82
TXT Subject matter under subclass 81 comprising an auxiliary latch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305+,   for a latch or catch essential to the holding of the joint parts
    together.


CLS 285/83
TXT Subject matter under subclass 82 responsive to the line pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for a line pressure responsive catch combined with a fluid pressure
    seal.

    105,    for a packing actuated pipe gripping means wherein the packing is
    responsive to line pressure.

    306,    for a line pressure responsive catch essential to the joint.


CLS 285/84
TXT Subject matter under subclass 82 wherein the latch reciprocates.


CLS 285/85
TXT Subject matter under subclass 84 comprising means to operate the latch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    308+,   for an essential catch with a manipulator.


CLS 285/86
TXT Subject matter under subclass 84 wherein the latch is a sleeve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    362     and 377, for a manipulating ring in a lugged pipe, rotary
    engagement type joint.


CLS 285/87
TXT Subject matter under subclass 82 wherein the latch has a pivoted or hinged
    motion. Leaf springs latches are included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    319,    for a leaf spring essential catch.

    320,    for a pivoted essential catch.


CLS 285/88
TXT Subject matter under subclass 87 comprising means to operate the latch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    308+,   for a manipulator for an essential catch.


CLS 285/89
TXT Subject matter under subclass 81 comprising a lock nut or lock washer.


CLS 285/90
TXT Subject matter under subclass 81 comprising a set screw.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404,    for a socket joint including a set screw as a fastening means.


CLS 285/91
TXT Subject matter under subclass 81 comprising a key way and key or pin; a
    cotter pin is included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403+,   for a socket joint including a separable fastener.


CLS 285/92
TXT Subject matter under subclass 81 comprising a thread lock.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener subclasses 259+ for a threaded bolt and nut and
    means for coupling them against rotation relative to one another and
    wherein the means comprises a thread lock; and see the search notes of that
    subclass (259) in regard to other subclasses of that class which include a
    thread lock.


CLS 285/93
TXT Devices under the class definition combined with (1) an indicator or alarm
    responsive to a condition or position of a part of the coupling or (2) with
    means which permits inspection of hidden parts or of the material inside
    the coupling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135.1+, for a detachable return bend.

    179.1,  for a coupling with an access opening.


CLS 285/94
TXT Devices under the class definition including means to lubricate a joint or
    coupling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    184,    Lubrication, subclasses 14+ for lubricators.


CLS 285/95
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising sealing means
    responsive to the line pressure or means to test the seal by utilization of
    the line pressure.  Fluid pressure balancing means are found here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306,    for a coupling including a line pressure responsive essential catch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 217+ for anti-siphon devices, and
    subclasses 525+ for resilient material valve.

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, subclass 20 for a fluid-conduit drill holding
    socket.


CLS 285/96
TXT Devices under subclass 95 in which the fluid exerting the sealing pressure
    is supplied to the sealing means (gasket) through a separate conduit
    external of the conduits being sealed.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 93 for an inflatable plug or
    closure.


CLS 285/97
TXT Devices under subclass 96 in which the sealing member (gasket) is capable
    of containing (or retaining) an inflating fluid, e.g., inner tube type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a seal between two pipes or a
    pipe and a wall that are at most secured together only by friction between
    the seal and the pipe or wall, subclass 605 for a static contact seal or an
    associated member that is hollow, fluid-filled, or inflatable and intended
    for use on a pipe, conduit or cable.


CLS 285/98
TXT Subject matter under subclass 95 comprising a flanged pipe positioned in a
    socket, said flange being locked axially.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278+,   for similar structure without fluid pressure seal.


CLS 285/99
TXT Devices under subclass 95 in which two sealing members, individually
    dispensable by fluid pressure, are adjacently positioned to expand and seal
    against each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65+,    for coupling comprising identical halves having duplicate gasket
    means.

    336,    for cooperating, opposed packing grooves.

    352,    for duplicate, coacting gasket means between the free ends of the
    coupled members.


CLS 285/100
TXT Devices under subclass 95 in which the seal is made by expanding a member
    axially to press its end into sealing relation with a contacting surface.


CLS 285/101
TXT Devices under subclass 100 in which a piston with a restricted orifice is
    slidably mounted in the flow path and is forced by the line flow against a
    gasket to make or enhance the seal.


CLS 285/102
TXT Subject matter under subclass 101 including a catch actuated by the line
    pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83,     for a coupling with line pressure responsive means blocking the
    release of the holding means.

    306,    for a coupling with a line pressure responsive essential catch.


CLS 285/103
TXT Subject matter under subclass 101 comprising means providing a slot or
    channel on one member having a traverse opening for a stud-like element on
    the other member whereby the members are coupled by lateral movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    325+,   for residual side slide couplings.


CLS 285/104
TXT Devices under subclass 95 comprising a pipe and socket with distinct pipe
    grasping means, e.g., wedge rings, intermediate the longitudinal wall of
    the pipe and socket.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    339+,   for wedge rings which are contracted into gripping relation with a
    pipe by mechanical means.  See the Search Notes thereunder.


CLS 285/105
TXT Devices under subclass 104 in which grasping of the pipe by the grasping
    means is intensified by the pressure exerted on the gripping means through
    a sealing member.


CLS 285/106
TXT Devices under subclass 95 in which a passage is provided, in the pipe wall
    or gasket by which the fluid has access to the sealing member.


CLS 285/107
TXT Devices under subclass 95 in which a pipe end is made of or provided with a
    flexible material portion which expands into sealing with a surrounding
    pipe surface under action of fluid line flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    338,    for a radially expansible packing, which is carried by the spigot.
    See the Search Notes thereunder.


CLS 285/108
TXT Devices under subclass 95 in which means, e.g., a ring or sleeve, is
    provided to hold a sealing means in position for fluid actuation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    379+,   for a gasket retainer in a packed joint.


CLS 285/109
TXT Devices under subclass 95 in which the sealing member comprises a flexible
    sleeve inserted into the two conduit ends that are joined.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for a coupling with a noise dampener comprising an intermediate
    resilient conduit.

    235+,   for a flexible joint between rigid members comprising a resilient
    sleeve.

    370+,   for internal sleeves of general application.


CLS 285/110
TXT Devices under subclass 95 comprising a sealing means having a thin lip-like
    edge, which is forced by line pressure into sealing contact with a pipe
    wall.


CLS 285/111
TXT Devices under subclass 110 in which the sealing means is C-section in
    shape, e.g., the gasket has a middle or cylindrical web portion with a
    sealing lip at each end at right angles to the web.


CLS 285/112
TXT Devices under subclass 111 in which the web portion, in section view, of
    the sealing member lies parallel to the conduit axis.


CLS 285/113
TXT Devices under subclass 95 in which the sealing member is wedge shape or
    triangular in section or is one that is forced by the fluid pressure into a
    wedge shaped chamber.


CLS 285/114
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising a means in addition to an
    otherwise complete coupling to (1) either assume all externally, originally
    applied stress tending to separate the joint or (2) to prevent rupture of a
    flexible member due to bending or twisting about its axis where the same
    joins a rigid member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45+,    for a protective cover.

    301,    for means to allow members a limited movement under application of
    original external stress.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 110 for means to prevent pipe
    rupture.


CLS 285/115
TXT Subject matter under subclass 114 wherein a sleeve or socket is provided
    with an extended part to encase the pipe at a point or area spaced from the
    interface, said part to relieve the interface of lateral strain.


CLS 285/116
TXT Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein the extended part itself is
    separable or the said part coacts with an intermediate separable element
    which is between the said part and the pipe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148.6+, for compound joints of the leak gland type.


CLS 285/117
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising means to prevent
    scattering of parts in case a joint breaks loose, e.g., a tether.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 540.11 for a broken valve parts retainer
    in a spring biased check valve.


CLS 285/118
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising members hinged for
    angular motion with motor means (e.g., fluid motor) to move the members to
    change the angle therebetween, e.g., a knuckle joint for a fishing tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, subclasses 26+ for other fluid actuated joints.


CLS 285/119
TXT Devices under the class definition which comprise devices or parts in
    addition to or combined with a coupling and (1) having functions other than
    joining or (2) which serve to perfect a coupling for its intended purpose.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    187,    for a coupling with means responsive to temperature changes for
    maintaining a seal.

    284.1,  for a joint system comprising an access opening.

    287.1,  for a molded joint including means to inhibit the growth of roots
    therein.

    293.1,  for a lining molded to a pipe end.

    306,    for a line pressure responsive essential catch.

    335+,   for a packed coupling, especially subclasses 379+ for gasket
    retainers. See the Search Notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclass 288 for a combined strainer and a pipe coupling of that
    class.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 37+ for fittings having
    means therein for directing the flow or fluid therein.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclass,
    particularly subclasses 435+ for a joint and strainer or filter combination
    of general utility.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing and Pulling Force,
    subclass 134.3 for means for wire or strand placing including guide means
    for same in a fitting.


CLS 285/120.1
TXT HAVING PLURAL INDEPENDENT PATHS:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a coupling, for two or
    more lines (e.g., conduits, pipes, tubes, hoses, etc.) having flow paths
    which do not unite within the scope of the combination of elements claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25+,    for the combination of a guide support and plural
    noncommunicating-type coupler.

    28+,    for the combination of a guide and a plural noncommunicating-type
    coupler.

    65+,    for duplicate end couplings (e.g., trainline type).

    149.1+, for a pipe or cable and box joint with plural disclosures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 594+ for plural noncommunicating flow
    paths in a fluid handling distribution system.  See the Search Notes
    thereunder.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 111+ for plural duct pipe
    structure.


CLS 285/121.1
TXT Allowing relative motion of pipes:

    Subject matter under subclass 120.1 wherein the coupling accommodates
    positional adjustment of one or more pipes to compensate for connection,
    disconnection, linear expansion, etc.


CLS 285/121.2
TXT Revolvable and telescoping:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.1 comprising a coupling for a rotatable
    (by at least 360 degrees), sectional conduit of which said sections are
    interfitted for relative axial movement.


CLS 285/121.3
TXT Revolvable:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.1 comprising a coupling for two or more
    elements, one or more of said elements being rotatable by at least 360
    degrees.


CLS 285/121.4
TXT Having spring biasing for maintaining a leak-proof seal:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.3 wherein a resilient means provides
    pressure to maintain a leak-proof seal at the coupling.


CLS 285/121.5
TXT Having specific bearing structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.3 including a means that supports,
    guides, and reduces friction between a fixed element and a moving element.


CLS 285/121.6
TXT Swiveling:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.1 comprising a coupling which has a
    pivotal arc of less than 360 degrees, or accommodates precessional motion.


CLS 285/121.7
TXT Ball and socket type:

    Subject matter under subclass 121.6 comprising a joint having a spherical
    component and a hollow fitting for receiving the spherical component.


CLS 285/122.1
TXT And at least one path having branched flow:

    Subject matter under subclass 120.1 wherein at least one of the flow paths
    is divided into a plurality of flow paths or a plurality of flow paths are
    combined into a single flow path or in which a single flow path is divided
    and then recombined (e.g., noncommunicating hot and cold water lines with
    coupling means providing plural hot outlets or plural cold outlets, or
    both).


CLS 285/123.1
TXT For concentric tubes or pipes (e.g., well casing or wellhead type):

    Subject matter under subclass 120.1 comprising means mounting an inner tube
    in spaced relation to an outer tube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222.1+, for distinct joints to a third member for at least two layers of
    plural layer pipe (e.g., sheathed).

    298+,   for adjustable length couplings, especially subclass 302 for a
    telescopic joint.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 90 for test plugs; and
    subclasses 111+ for plural duct pipe structure.

    166,    Wells, subclass 75.15, for well heads with fluid handling or other
    features special to wells, especially subclasses 86.1+, for a well head
    with an inner member sealed or anchored with respect thereto in combination
    with a valve and subclasses 88.1+for a well head with an inner member
    sealed or anchored with respect thereto in combination with a lateral port
    in the head, subclasses 179+ for packers situated below ground for sealing
    between a pre-positioned well conduit and an inserted pipe, and subclasses
    206+ for expanding anchor means situated below ground between a
    pre-positioned well conduit and an inserted pipe.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 1.1+ for valve type blowout
    preventers.


CLS 285/123.11
TXT Having slip means actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 123.5 including means for moving the member
    into and out of engagement with the wall.


CLS 285/123.12
TXT Including a seal:

    Subject matter under subclass 123.3 including a packer or pack-off type
    device that prevents or minimizes the flow of a fluid.


CLS 285/123.13
TXT Held by a means applied radially (e.g., set screw):

    Subject matter under subclass 123.12 including a packing about the inner
    tube which is fixed by a mechanical fastener along a line defined by the
    radius of the inner pipe.


CLS 285/123.14
TXT Compressed by tightening a bolt coaxial to tubing:

    Subject matter under subclass 123.12 in which the packer or pack-off device
    is squeezed by an assembly including a headed, threaded fastener.


CLS 285/123.15
TXT Double-walled or duplex joint:

    Subject matter under subclass 123.1 comprising an inner pipe concentric
    with and attached to an outer pipe, forming one unit.


CLS 285/123.16
TXT Wall configured as mating complementary type (e.g., hot air ducts):

    Subject matter under subclass 123.15 wherein the joints are interlocking
    components (e.g., having male and female configurations).


CLS 285/123.17
TXT Joint fabricated from material to compensate for movement:

    Subject matter under subclass 123.1 wherein the joint comprises a resilient
    material (e.g., plastic joint for containment pipes).


CLS 285/123.2
TXT Having plural parallel suspended inner tubes:

    Subject matter under subclass 123.1 comprising a plurality of collateral
    tubes hung within the outer tube.

    (1)     Note. This subclass typically provides for connectors, hangers or
    similar support devices for vertically supporting or suspending a pair of
    flow lines of a dual flow passage well.


CLS 285/123.3
TXT Having single suspended inner tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 123.1 in which the tubes are in a
    substantially vertical position and comprising means to hang the inner
    within the outer tube (e.g., well caps or headers).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, particularly subclass 67 for a brake mechanically connected
    to a relatively stationary structure and which holds a pipe or rod at
    various locations along the pipe's or rod's length for short, quick linear
    assembly or disassembly during a work or manufacturing operation, or
    preparatory to a working operation, done by the pipe, rod, or a pipe
    supported tool.

    294,    Handling: Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 5.5 for rod-type
    supports and hangers.


CLS 285/123.4
TXT Split ring type suspension means:

    Subject matter under subclass 123.3 wherein the inner pipe is hung on the
    outer pipe by means of a member that is in at least two pieces attached
    along a plane defined by the radius of the pipe.


CLS 285/123.5
TXT Having inner tube anchored by slip means:

    Subject matter under subclass 123.3 in which a member having a high degree
    of friction (e.g., an internally serrated member) grips the outside wall of
    the pipe to be held.


CLS 285/123.6
TXT Including packing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 123.5 incorporating a sealing device (e.g.,
    packer, pack-off, gasket).


CLS 285/123.7
TXT Having means engaging slip means and compressing packing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 123.6 in which the member and sealing device
    are held together by an assembly that forces the member into contact with
    the pipe wall plus squeezes the sealing device.


CLS 285/123.8
TXT By bolt directly connecting slip means to packing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 123.7 in which the member and the sealing
    device are held together by a headed, threaded fastener.


CLS 285/123.9
TXT Having radially applied orienting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 123.6 including a rod-like threaded device
    (e.g., plunger, hold-down screw, locking or lock-down bolt, latch, dog,
    retaining pin, etc.) designed to contact the member or inner tube for
    positioning purposes.


CLS 285/124.1
TXT Parallel paths:

    Subject matter under subclass 120.1 wherein two lines are equally distant
    at all points from each other along a significant portion of their length.


CLS 285/124.2
TXT Having spacer means for pipes or tubes:

    Subject matter under subclass 124.1 including means for maintaining a
    particular spatial relationship between the lines (e.g., aligning or
    positioning means).


CLS 285/124.3
TXT Apertured plate type:

    Subject matter under subclass 124.2 wherein the spacer is configured with
    openings (e.g., slots, holes, etc.) to accommodate the lines.


CLS 285/124.4
TXT Including a fitting, boss, or nipple means:

    Subject matter under subclass 124.2 wherein the coupling comprises a fitted
    detachable protuberance.


CLS 285/124.5
TXT Located within block type connector for ducts:

    Subject matter under subclass 124.1 including a junction box or cylinder in
    which the parallel lines are joined to their respective segments.


CLS 285/125.1
TXT FOR BRANCHED PATH:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the flow path is divided
    into a plurality of flow paths or a plurality of flow paths are combined
    into a single flow path or in which a single flow path is divided and then
    recombined with means for providing couplings for the several flow paths.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122.1,  for branched flow couplers in plural noncommunicating flow paths.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 3.2+ for analogous structures constituting
    receptacles of the outlet or junction box type.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 167+ for branched connections in
    general.


CLS 285/126.1
TXT Having an access opening and removable cover:

    Subject matter under subclass 125.1 including an opening with a closure or
    having one or more separable parts, which permit access to the interior
    thereof without disassembly of the joint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62+,    for an access opening to permit insertion or removal of a wear
    element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 583+ for a fluid handling system with an
    access opening.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 89+ for pipe closures.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 200+ for analogous closures for receptacles
    and of general utility.


CLS 285/127.1
TXT Including a swivel joint:

    Subject matter under subclass 125.1 comprising a coupling which has a
    pivotal arc of less than 360 degrees, or accommodates precessional motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    274,    for yoke-type swivels.


CLS 285/127.2
TXT Double Y-type:

    Subject matter under subclass 127.1 wherein two lines form Y's and unite at
    right angles to each other.


CLS 285/128.1
TXT Allowing for movement parallel to path (e.g., expansion joint):

    Subject matter under subclass 125.1 wherein the coupling accommodates
    positional adjustment along the longitudinal axis of one or more pipes to
    compensate for connection, disconnection, linear expansion, etc.


CLS 285/129.1
TXT And having additional, integral fitting, branch, or coupling for a means
    such as a vent:

    Subject matter under subclass 125.1 including one or more openings which
    function to admit or expel gases from a system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 209+ for
    ventilation of that art.

    48,     Gas: Heating and Illuminating, subclass 108 for couplings combined
    with structure to provide gas mixing.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 176 for a liquid seal trap with an
    air-port, subclass 215 for anti-siphon devices to fluid handling systems,
    and subclasses 583+ for vent openings in fluid distribution systems. See
    the search notes thereunder.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 76+ for injector type
    contact devices.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 151+ for jet pumps.


CLS 285/129.2
TXT Plus a bend, flange, pocket, or chamber for antisiphon:

    Subject matter under subclass 129.1 including means, generally a particular
    air chamber or arrangement of vent openings, for preventing the siphoning
    of trap liquids-seals upstream of the claimed coupling.


CLS 285/130.1
TXT Intersecting paths (e.g., X- or cross-type):

    Subject matter under subclass 125.1 wherein two lines intersect to form a
    cross or "X" configuration.


CLS 285/131.1
TXT Y-type, (symmetrical along the centerline):

    Subject matter under subclass 125.1 wherein two lines form the legs of a
    "Y" configuration, said legs being symmetrically angled from a single line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127.2,  for a double Y-type providing relative motion.


CLS 285/132.1
TXT (Y-type) having a straight portion and an angled leg:

    Subject matter under subclass 125.1 wherein one line intersects another
    line obliquely, thereby forming a "Y" configuration having one angled leg.


CLS 285/133.11
TXT T-type:

    Subject matter under subclass 125.1 wherein one line intersects another
    line orthogonally, thereby forming a "T" configuration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189+,   for a joint between a pipe end and a pipe side.


CLS 285/133.21
TXT Having a seal, gasket, O-ring, or packing:

    Subject matter under subclass 132.1 including a means which prevents or
    minimizes the flow of a fluid.


CLS 285/133.3
TXT Having a pipe-receiving bell, socket, or mouth:

    Subject matter under subclass 132.1 wherein the inside diameter of a
    portion of a fitting is larger than the outside diameter of the pipe that
    is to be received into the fitting.


CLS 285/133.4
TXT Having threaded portions:

    Subject matter under subclass 132.1 including mating helical or spiral
    ridges which act as the interconnecting mechanism.


CLS 285/133.5
TXT Having reinforcement:

    Subject matter under subclass 132.1 including structure for strengthening
    or stiffening (e.g., a fiber mesh, concrete re-bar, filament wrap, etc.).


CLS 285/133.6
TXT For thin-walled material (e.g., sheet metal):

    Subject matter under subclass 132.1 wherein the cross-sectional dimension
    from the inside diameter to the outside diameter of the cylinder forming
    the line is very small (e.g., HVAC ductwork, etc.).


CLS 285/134.1
TXT U-TYPE (E.G., RETURN BEND):

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a pipe coupling having
    parallel leg portions which are connected by a bight or "U" shaped section.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 95 for pipe closures of the
    return bend type.


CLS 285/135.1
TXT Detachable:

    Subject matter under subclass 134.1 wherein the bight or "U" section is
    easily removable or replaceable.


CLS 285/135.2
TXT Having yoke-type clamp:

    Subject matter under subclass 135.1 including a saddle-like element which
    maintains the joint between the bight and the parallel leg portions of the
    structure.


CLS 285/135.3
TXT Having a removable bushing:

    Subject matter under subclass 135.2 including a replaceable element which
    serves to line or constrain the coupling.


CLS 285/135.4
TXT Having coupling sleeve:

    Subject matter under subclass 135.1 including an encircling element (e.g.,
    a threaded nut) which secures the bight to the parallel leg portions.


CLS 285/135.5
TXT Secured by bolt:

    Subject matter under subclass 135.4 wherein the sleeve, itself, is secured
    by at least one element having a threaded stem.


CLS 285/136.1
TXT PIPE TO DISCREET NIPPLE OR SLEEVE TO PLATE (I.E., THREE SUCCESSIVE PIECES):

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising an intermediate
    tubular means between a pipe or rod and a plate or pipe side.

    (1)     Note. The nipple being a tubular connection means which is
    generally six inches or shorter in length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189+,   for a joint between the end of a pipe and a plate or pipe side.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 187+ for a rod connected to a
    plate or side through an intermediate member.


CLS 285/137.11
TXT Pipe to nipple connection dependent on nipple to plate connection:


    Subject matter under subclass 136.1 wherein the pipe-to-rod or pipe joint
    is essential to the existence of the joint with the plate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 801 for a nozzle or spout having claimed
    flow characteristics.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 46.013+
    for garbage disposal mountings.


CLS 285/138.1
TXT Ball and socket:

    Subject matter under subclass 136.1 wherein the pipe to plate joint
    comprises a spheroidal knoblike portion fitted into a mating depression.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261,    for a ball and socket joint between pipe ends.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclass 421 for this type of joint in a head lamp
    and bulkhead combination.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, subclass 370 for a threaded fastener and nut
    provided with a stay bolt bearing washer.


CLS 285/139.1
TXT Plate clamped between flanged nipple and separate fastener:

    Subject matter under subclass 136.1 wherein the plate or pipe side is
    clamped between a nut internal thereof and a shoulder or flange on the
    nipple.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154.2+, for this type of connection for sheathing of a flexible cable
    (e.g., electrical wiring, etc.).


CLS 285/139.2
TXT Nipple includes seal:

    Subject matter under subclass 139.1 including a pliable annular means
    (e.g., seal, gasket, O-ring, packing, etc.) which is intended to function
    as a leakage preventer.


CLS 285/139.3
TXT Nipple includes securing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 139.1 including an anchoring component (e.g.,
    wedge, cam, beveled edge, etc.).


CLS 285/140.1
TXT Expandable detent engages plate to hold nipple:

    Subject matter under subclass 136.1 including a resilient member (e.g.,
    finger, lug, etc.) which allows the plate and nipple components to be
    snap-fitted together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196,    for a pipe-to-plate joint comprising an expansible packing on a
    spigot.  See the Search Notes thereunder.


CLS 285/141.1
TXT Nipple sealed to plate:

    Subject matter under subclass 136.1 wherein the components are joined by a
    leakproof means (e.g., gasket, weld, etc.).


CLS 285/142.1
TXT Nipple bolted to plate:

    Subject matter under subclass 136.1 wherein the components are fastened by
    a headed, threaded member.


CLS 285/143.1
TXT Nipple threaded to plate:

    Subject matter under subclass 136.1 wherein the components have mating
    helical threads and are joined by being screwed together.


CLS 285/144.1
TXT SERIAL, RELATIVELY MOVABLE PORTIONS:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a joint having
    components which are movable with respect to each other (e.g., a universal
    swivel allowing both pivotal and rotational motion about intersecting axes,
    etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121.2,  121.3+ and 121.6+, for couplings with plural noncommunicating paths
    permitting relative motion between the coupled elements.

    181,    for serially connected adjustable elbows.

    184,    for adjustable angle joints.

    223+,   for a flexible joint, per se.

    261+,   for a ball and socket joint, per se.

    272+,   for a swivel joint, per se.

    302+,   for a telescopic joint, per se.


CLS 285/145.1
TXT Having telescoping portion:

    Subject matter under subclass 144.1 including a slidable member, thereby
    making the unit extensible or compressible.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148.27, for serial diverse joints having eccentric means providing lateral
    adjustment.


CLS 285/145.2
TXT Pivot or swivel:

    Subject matter under subclass 145.1 including a connection which
    accommodates arcuate or precessional motion of a member.


CLS 285/145.3
TXT Ball connector:

    Subject matter under subclass 145.1 including a spheroidal joint which
    connects to a corresponding mating surface (e.g., socket).


CLS 285/145.4
TXT Sleeve:

    Subject matter under subclass 145.1 including an encasement of the portion
    of the unit wherein two members are joined.


CLS 285/145.5
TXT Bellows-type:

    Subject matter under subclass 145.4 wherein the sleeve is resiliently
    deformable.


CLS 285/146.1
TXT Linked ball and socket portions:

    Subject matter under subclass 144.1 wherein a set of members are joined by
    at least partially spheroidal sections fitted to mating depressions,
    thereby forming a flexible unit.


CLS 285/146.2
TXT Having multiplex socket:

    Subject matter under subclass 146.1 wherein a single socket member is
    configured to accept registry with two or more sections having ball joint
    ends.


CLS 285/146.3
TXT Having ball between opposed  sockets:

    Subject matter under subclass 146.1 comprising two articulated opposed
    concave sockets coacting with convex surfaces on a spheroidal intermediate
    member.


CLS 285/147.1
TXT Plural swivels:

    Subject matter under subclass 144.1 comprising two or more joints which
    accommodate both pivotal and rotational motion about intersecting axes.


CLS 285/147.2
TXT Having spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 147.1 including a resilient member that
    regains its original configuration after being distorted.


CLS 285/147.3
TXT Having nozzle:

    Subject matter under subclass 147.1 including a projecting member which has
    a discharge opening.


CLS 285/148.1
TXT Serial diverse single flow path or line:

    Subject matter under subclass 144.1 comprising a plurality of diverse
    couplings arranged in serial relationship along a single line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50+,    for an intermediate joint with insulation.

    58+,    for an intermediate coupling in a floor supported water closet
    joint.

    136.1+, for serially arranged joints comprising pipe or
    rod-to-pipe-to-plate.

    181,    for an adjustable elbow.

    390     and 405, for a joint including as an element thereof a detachable
    flange.


CLS 285/148.11
TXT Diverse materials:

    Subject matter under subclass 148.1 including means to unite tubes made of
    distinctly different substances (e.g., copper to aluminum).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329,    for a particular joint interface of diverse materials.


CLS 285/148.12
TXT Having bonded component:

    Subject matter under subclass 148.11 wherein a part of the joint is secured
    by such means as (e.g., welding, soldering, brazing, leading, etc.).


CLS 285/148.13
TXT Nonmetal to metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 148.11 in which one of the united tubes is
    made of a substance other than metal (e.g., rubber, elastomer, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for a coupling between a faucet and a hose.

    49,     for a noise dampener comprising an intermediate resilient conduit.

    223+,   for a flexible joint between rigid members, especially subclasses
    235+ for a resilient sleeve.

    238+,   for a nonmetal-to-metal coupling, especially subclasses 240+ for a
    flexible tip type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclass 101 for the process of joining metal
    to nonmetal by surface bonding.


CLS 285/148.14
TXT Quick connect or release:

    Subject matter under subclass 148.13 which can be joined or disconnected
    with a simple movement (e.g., twist, push, pull, etc.).


CLS 285/148.15
TXT Having swivel:

    Subject matter under subclass 148.13 which accommodates both pivotal and
    rotational motion about intersecting axes.


CLS 285/148.16
TXT Having serrated nipple:

    Subject matter under subclass 148.13 including a short member of the
    structure which has toothlike projections on it for gripping purposes


CLS 285/148.17
TXT Having clamp:

    Subject matter under subclass 148.13 including a gripping means on the
    periphery of the joint.


CLS 285/148.18
TXT Reducer:

    Subject matter under subclass 148.13 wherein the coupling provides for a
    difference in cross-sectional areas of the lines which are joined.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123.1+, for an inner to spaced outer tube coupling.

    324,    for a reducing bushing in a contractible socket type joint.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 40+ for flow restrictors.


CLS 285/148.19
TXT Diverse coupling interfaces:

    Subject matter under subclass 148.1 wherein the boundary surface of one of
    the couplings differs from that of the other coupling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148.6+, for plural means each of which is capable of making the joint.

    328,    for a particular interface in a single joint.


CLS 285/148.2
TXT Quick connect or release:

    Subject matter under subclass 148.1 which can be joined or disconnected
    with a simple movement (e.g., twist, push, pull, etc.).


CLS 285/148.3
TXT Flexible:

    Subject matter under subclass 148.1 which is capable of withstanding a
    bending movement.


CLS 285/148.4
TXT Having swivel:

    Subject matter under subclass 148.1 which accommodates both pivotal and
    rotational motion about intersecting axes.


CLS 285/148.5
TXT Intermediate joint with expansible spigots:

    Subject matter under subclass 148.1 comprising a fitting having expansible
    ends for insertion into and between pipe ends with means intermediate the
    ends of the fitting providing a readily separable coupling.

    (1)     Note.Means for forming a continuous line of pipe for feeding the
    pipe through apparatus in a continuous process (e.g., coating) are placed
    in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    338,    for a coupling comprising a spigot carried, expansible packing.
    See the Search Notes thereunder.


CLS 285/148.6
TXT Compound coupling (e.g., leak-gland type):

    Subject matter under subclass 148.1 including at least two means, each of
    which is capable of making a single joint for effecting the connection and
    perfecting the seal between the free ends of two members (e.g., an
    internally threaded socket having external threads cooperating with a screw
    thimble to press a packing at the lap of the socket and spigot).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    for repair devices and see the Search Notes thereunder.

    115+,   for a strain relief comprising socket or sleeve extension.

    337,    for external packing at a lapped joint.

    364+,   for flanged-packed joints having clamping means.


CLS 285/148.7
TXT Having molded or bonded joint:

    Subject matter under subclass 148.6 wherein one of the means includes a
    plastic or melted material in the joint or wherein the ends of the members
    are united by fusion or by welding pressure.


CLS 285/148.8
TXT Having bolted or screwed flange or clamp:

    Subject matter under subclass 148.7 including a gripping device or
    protruding rim used in conjunction with a threaded means to secure the
    joint.


CLS 285/148.9
TXT Having bonded component:

    Subject matter under subclass 148.1 wherein a part of the joint is secured
    by such means as (e.g., welding, soldering, brazing, leading, etc.).


CLS 285/148.21
TXT Quick connect or release:

    Subject matter under subclass 148.19 which can be joined or disconnected
    with a simple movement (e.g., twist, push, pull, etc.).


CLS 285/148.22
TXT Diverse size or shape:

    Subject matter under subclass 148.1 wherein the couplings provide for a
    change in size or a difference in shape of the members to be joined.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12+,    for a convertible coupling.


CLS 285/148.23
TXT Reducer:

    Subject matter under subclass 148.22 wherein the coupling provides for a
    difference in the cross-sectional areas of the lines that are being joined.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123.1+, for an inner to spaced outer tube coupling.

    324,    for a reducing bushing in a contractible socket type joint.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 40+ for flow restrictors.


CLS 285/148.24
TXT Sheet-metal (e.g., stove duct, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 148.23 wherein the lines are very thin-walled.


CLS 285/148.25
TXT Having bolted flange:

    Subject matter under subclass 148.23 including a protruding collar held by
    a headed, threaded device.


CLS 285/148.26
TXT Having clamp:

    Subject matter under subclass 148.23 including a gripping device which is
    intended to hold the assembly together.


CLS 285/148.27
TXT Eccentric:

    Subject matter under subclass 148.22 wherein the coupling provides for an
    off-center relationship which may be adjustable with respect to the joined
    members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145.1+, for serial diverse relatively movable joints which provide for
    longitudinal and lateral adjustment.


CLS 285/148.28
TXT Having bolted or screwed flange or clamp:

    Subject matter under subclass 148.1 including a gripping device or
    protruding rim used in conjunction with a threaded means to secure the
    joint.


CLS 285/149.1
TXT CONNECTOR FOR CONDUIT HOUSING ELECTROMAGNETIC LINE:

    Subject matter under the class definition for the duct type structure
    surrounding a cable or wire-like means which is used to transmit
    electromagnetic energy.


CLS 285/150.1
TXT Underground:

    Subject matter under subclass 149.1 wherein the conduit is intended to be
    buried subterraneanly.


CLS 285/151.1
TXT Watertight:

    Subject matter under subclass 149.1 wherein the electromagnetic cable is
    sealed and impervious to liquid.


CLS 285/152.1
TXT Multiple passage:

    Subject matter under subclass 149.1 wherein the conduit has two or more
    cells for carrying the electromagnetic cable.


CLS 285/153.1
TXT Including swivel:

    Subject matter under subclass 149.1 which accommodates both pivotal and
    rotational motion about intersecting axes.


CLS 285/153.2
TXT Having plural swivels:

    Subject matter under subclass 153.1 having more than one swivel.


CLS 285/153.3
TXT Having swivel and spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 153.1 including a resilient device which is
    intended to hold the swivel in a certain position.


CLS 285/154.1
TXT Having box and connector:

    Subject matter under subclass 149.1 including means for coupling a conduit
    or cable to a box structure requiring at least two walls of the box.


CLS 285/154.2
TXT Including flexible armored sheath:

    Subject matter under subclass 154.1 in which the cable is encased in a
    spiraled metallic cover.


CLS 285/154.3
TXT Including screw operated clamp:

    Subject matter under subclass 154.2 which is secured by a gripping device
    which is tightened by turning a screw.


CLS 285/154.4
TXT Including screw operated clamp:

    Subject matter under subclass 154.1 in which the connector is secured by a
    gripping device which is tightened by turning a screw.


CLS 285/179
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising a fitting having only
    two openings with the axis of the openings intersecting at an angle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131.1+, for Y-type fittings.

    133.1+, for T-type fittings.

    134.1+, for U-type fittings.

    184+,   for a coupling including means to vary the angle between the
    connected members about an axis transverse to the members.

    189+,   for a joint between the end of one pipe and the side of another.


CLS 285/179.1
TXT With access opening:

    Subject matter under subclass 179 having an opening with a closure or
    having one or more separable parts, which permit access to the interior
    thereof without disassembly of the joint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62+,    for an access opening to permit insertion or removal of a wear
    element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 583+ for a fluid handling system with an
    access opening.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 89+ for pipe closures.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 200+ for analogous closures for receptacles
    and of general utility.


CLS 285/179.2
TXT Sheet-metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 179.1 wherein the conduit comprises very
    thin-walled material (e.g., heating duct, etc.).


CLS 285/180
TXT Subject matter under subclass 179 comprising clamping means including a
    U-shaped member astride the fitting with means to force one end of the
    fitting and a pipe end together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    197+,   for an end-to-side or plate coupling including a saddle-type clamp.


CLS 285/181
TXT Subject matter under subclass 179 including adjustable means serially
    connecting two elbows or two parts which form an elbow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144.1+, for plural movable joints.

    184+,   for an adjustable angle coupling.

    223+,   for a flexible joint between rigid members.

    261+,   for a ball and socket joint.

    272+,   for a swivel joint.

    283,    for a detachable hinge coupling.


CLS 285/182
TXT Subject matter under subclass 179 made of separable parts so shaped that
    they may be stacked in nested relation, generally for storage convenience.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for couplings with holding means used only during transportation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 6+ and 8 for sectional receptacles for
    folding and nesting receptacle parts, respectively.  See the Search Notes
    thereunder.


CLS 285/183
TXT Devices under subclass 179 in which the material is originally in sheet
    form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    424,    for other sheet material couplings.


CLS 285/184
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the angle between the two
    connected members may be varied about an axis transverse to the members and
    held in adjusted position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for adjustable angle roof flashing type joints.

    181+,   for serially connected adjustable angle elbows.

    261+,   for ball and socket joints.

    272+,   for swivel joints which allow free axial, relative movement.

    283,    for a detachable hinge coupling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 209+ for adjustable angle joints
    in general.


CLS 285/185
TXT Devices under subclass 184 wherein the pipes are held in adjusted
    relationship by a bolt extending across the joint through the flow line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191,    for a pipe-to-plate coupling including a center bolt.

    272.1,  for a hollow center bolt in a swivel joint having an access opening.


CLS 285/187
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising means responsive to
    temperature changes to maintain a good seal upon expansion or contraction
    of the coupled members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for a coupling with heating or cooling means.

    95+,    for a coupling with a fluid pressure responsive seal.

    288.3,  for means to relieve heat of welding.

    335+,   for a packed coupling.  See the  Search Notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclass 32 for joints in general provided
    with ambient condition responsive control means.


CLS 285/188
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which the joint is between
    pipe sides involving transverse openings therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68+,    for duplicate end couplings having transverse ports.


CLS 285/189
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising means for joining a
    pipe to a plate or a pipe end to a pipe side.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124.1+, for a joint system comprising means to join parallel
    noncommunicating pipes to a plate (e.g., a header).

    125.1+, especially subclass 352 for branch- type couplings including a
    joint at the free end of at least one branch.

    136.1+, for a pipe or rod-to-pipe to plate series.

    414+,   for a detachable flange.

    416,    for a welded flange.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 511+ and 512+ for tube
    and tube sheet connections for heaters and vaporizers.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 318 for sheet metal stove pipe to
    plate in conjunction with stoves and furnaces.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 173+ for side by side tubes connected to
    a header plate of a heat exchanger.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 89+ and 566+ for joints between receptacles
    and their nozzles, spouts or pouring devices.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 46.03+ for
    a sink mounted garbage disposal.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 56+ for a support for a pipe or cable in a
    plate.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 230+ for a joint between a rod
    end and a plate or side.


CLS 285/190
TXT Subject matter under subclass 189 comprising a swivel having a lateral port
    in communication with an annular opening in a surrounding sleeve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272+,   for a swivel with longitudinal ports.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, subclass 20 for a socket type fluid-conduit
    drill holding means.


CLS 285/191
TXT Subject matter under subclass 189 wherein a bolt or hook passes into the
    interior of a pipe, generally centrally thereof, sometimes completely
    through a wall, to secure the elements together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185,    for an adjustable angle type coupling including a center bolt.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 90 for nozzle and container in which the
    nozzle is attached to the container wall by an extending member, and 569
    for   connection of nozzle and container by nozzle engaging interior and
    exterior walls of the receptacle.


CLS 285/192
TXT Subject matter under subclass 189 wherein the pipe penetrates or pierces
    the plate or side and extends therethrough a distance significantly greater
    than that necessary to effect the joint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for a joint between spaced plates and pipe extending through at
    least one of the plates including an assembly means or feature.

    42+,    for a roof or floor drain flashing connection.

    56+,    for a floor supported water closet type joint.

    154.1+, for a pipe to box joint requiring two walls of the box.


CLS 285/193
TXT Subject matter under subclass 192 wherein the penetrating member is a
    portion of a fixture (e.g., a faucet shank).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for escutcheon shields combined with a joint.

    56+,    for a floor supported water closet joint.

    137.1,  for a dependent coupling comprising a pipe or rod-to-pipe-to-plate
    system of joints (e.g., china spouts to tub). See the Search Notes
    thereunder.


CLS 285/194
TXT Subject matter under subclass 192 in which the pipe is anchored in place by
    being wedged or forced against an edge of the hole in the plate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154.1+, for a pipe or cable and box coupling wherein two or more walls of a
    box are essential to the coupling.

    420,    for miscellaneous joints including clamps.  See the Search Notes
    thereunder.


CLS 285/195
TXT Subject matter under subclass 194 comprising a screw, the axis of which is
    transverse to the pipe, which applies the anchoring force thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218,    for an expansible thimble with a transverse clamping screw.


CLS 285/196
TXT Subject matter under subclass 189 comprising a packing carried by the pipe
    with means to expand the packing into holding relation with the plate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for a coupling with a fluid pressure seal comprising an expansible
    shank.

    109,    for a coupling with a fluid pressure seal comprising an expansible
    internal sleeve-type gasket.

    140.1,  for pipe or rod-to-pipe-to-plate joints including an expanding
    spigot.

    338,    for a socket joint with a spigot carried, radially expansible
    packing. See the Search Notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener subclass 370 for a threaded fastener and nut with
    a stay bolt bearing washing.


CLS 285/197
TXT Subject matter under subclass 189 including a clamp comprising a saddle
    shaped member transverse and astride one pipe with means to force a pipe
    end to a pipe side.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180,    for an elbow coupling including a saddle clamp.

    309+,   for a coupling comprising an essential catch having a manipulator
    with means to increase the contact pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 146+ for similar means for
    mounting a valve to a pipe side.


CLS 285/198
TXT Subject matter under subclass 197 wherein the saddle is a yoke and the
    forcing means is a radial screw at the bight.


CLS 285/199
TXT Subject matter under subclass 197 wherein the saddle is a yoke with
    threaded free ends which are essential to the forcing means.


CLS 285/200
TXT Subject matter under subclass 189 comprising means for connecting a pipe to
    a flexible plate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for tent-type roof flashing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclasses 415+ for inflating devices
    for resilient tires, especially subclasses 429+.


CLS 285/201
TXT Subject matter under subclass 189 comprising a short conduit connector
    secured to the plate for the purpose of reinforcing the plate wall as well
    as providing means for pipe connection.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass deals with the specific joint between the
    plate and the connector; when the joint between connector and the pipe is
    claimed search subclasses 158+ except when the joints are so related that
    making or breaking of one of the joints breaks the other, e.g., see
    subclass 207.


CLS 285/202
TXT Subject matter under subclass 201 in which the sput connector and the plate
    wall are integrally secured, e.g., a flange portion on the sput connector
    and the plate edge are rolled and pressed together.

    (1)     Note.  The sputs under subclasses 202+ are generally of one piece
    and deformation of material is the means of fastening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    330,    for a coupling having a particular interface comprising interlocked
    portions.  See the Search Notes thereunder.

    382,    for a joint involving deformation of the material thereof.  See the
    Search Notes thereunder.


CLS 285/203
TXT Subject matter under subclass 202 in which the sput connector portion,
    e.g., the sput flange, is locked to the plate edge by portions of the plate
    enclosing the sput portion.


CLS 285/204
TXT Subject matter under subclass 202 wherein a packing is provided in the
    joint between the plate edge and the sput connector.


CLS 285/205
TXT Subject matter under subclass 201 comprising a short tube (nipple) flanged
    on one end and having means, e.g., a nut, wedging ring etc., coacting
    therewith to clamp the wall between them.

    (1)     Note.  Sputs under subclasses 205+ generally comprise more than one
    piece and coaction, as by thread, between the pieces produces clamping.


CLS 285/206
TXT Devices under subclass 205 in which the sput pieces are threaded together
    so as to clamp the plate between them.


CLS 285/207
TXT Devices under subclass 206 in which means are included whereby a conduit
    introduced in the sput is clamped simultaneously with threading the sput
    pieces together to clamp the plate.


CLS 285/208
TXT Devices under subclass 206 in which the sput flange or plate aperture is
    constructed to permit fastening the sput from one side of the plate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18+,    for assembly means or features.


CLS 285/209
TXT Devices under subclass 208 in which the short tube (nipple) has a portion
    of its flange cut away to provide lug means, whereby insertion into the
    plate is facilitated.


CLS 285/210
TXT Devices under subclass 209 in which the lug means on the nipple is movably
    attached to the nipple.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    411,    Expanded, Threaded,  Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener subclasses 337+ for miscellaneous bolts or bolts
    having pivoted end locks.


CLS 285/211
TXT Subject matter under subclass 189 in which the wall to which the pipe end
    is to be attached has a counter bore containing packing material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231+,   for a flexible joint between rigid members comprising a socketed
    packing.


CLS 285/212
TXT Subject matter under subclass 211 in which a threaded means, e.g., a gland,
    compresses the packing material.

    (1)     Note.  Generally the counter bore has the thread with coacts with
    the threaded compressing member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    356+,   for a packed joint with a gland type compressor.


CLS 285/213
TXT Subject matter under subclass 189 comprising a short tube concentric with a
    plate aperture wall and a pipe or conduit being connected, e.g., where a
    thimble is a wedge ring forced between the members being connected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222     and 382, for a joint involving deformation of one or more of the
    members.


CLS 285/214
TXT Subject matter under subclass 213 in which the thimble is inside the
    conduit being connected to the plate wall and has means for increasing its
    external diameter, e.g., a wedge pin driven between the ends of a split
    thimble.


CLS 285/215
TXT Subject matter under subclass 213 in which the thimble is located between
    the plate wall aperture and the conduit.


CLS 285/216
TXT Subject matter under subclass 215 including means to increase the external
    diameter of the thimble.


CLS 285/217
TXT Subject matter under subclass 216 including clamping means for gripping the
    conduit being connected which is actuated by the expansion of the thimble.


CLS 285/218
TXT Subject matter under subclass 217 comprising a transverse screw threaded in
    the thimble to engage the conduit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404,    for a socket joint with fastening means comprising set screws.


CLS 285/219
TXT Subject matter under subclass 189 in which a pipe end is threaded into a
    plate aperture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    355,    for a packed screw joint.

    390+,   for a screw coupling.  See the Search  Notes thereunder.


CLS 285/220
TXT Subject matter under subclass 219 including sealing material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148.6+, for leak-gland type couplings.


CLS 285/221
TXT Subject matter under subclass 219 in which a transverse annular projection
    integral with the plate is threaded for connection with a pipe end.


CLS 285/222
TXT Subject matter under subclass 189 wherein the pipe is expanded (e.g., by
    metal working) into contact with the wall portion defining an opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196,    for a joint comprising a pipe end carried, expansible packing means
    and a plate.

    213+,   for a pipe-to-plate joint comprising a thimble type wedge,
    especially subclass 214 for means expanding the pipe end.

    382,    for other pipe joints involving material deformation essential to
    joining.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 523 for a method of expanding an internal
    tube.

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses 67+ and 316+ and subclass
    393 for an apparatus for expanding or flanging the end of a pipe.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, appropriate subclasses for making a joint by
    metallurgically securing one meeting face to another.

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 89 for molding apparatus for joining pipe
    sections with a fluent material.


CLS 285/222.1
TXT FOR PLURAL COMPONENT LINE (E.G., FLEXIBLE TYPE):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the line comprises
    layered annuli (e.g., supple tubing having a pliant covering, etc.).


CLS 285/222.2
TXT Metal, elastomeric (e.g., rubber), and fabric layers:

    Subject matter under subclass 222.1 comprising a tri-layered cover
    including a metallic layer, an elastomeric or rubber-like layer and a layer
    of cloth-like material.


CLS 285/222.3
TXT Elastomeric and fabric layers:

    Subject matter under subclass 222.1 comprising a dual-layered cover
    including a rubber-like layer and a layer of cloth-like material.


CLS 285/222.4
TXT Metal and elastomeric layers:

    Subject matter under subclass 222.1 comprising a dual-layered cover
    including a metallic layer and a rubber-like layer.


CLS 285/222.5
TXT Distinct metal layers (e.g., wire cloth, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 222.1 wherein each layer includes metal of
    some form.


CLS 285/223
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including a flexible material
    member that permits unrestrained motion between two rigid members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for noise dampener means including and intermediate resilient
    conduit.

    57,     for a flexible member in a floor supported water closet type joint.

    144.1+  for serial relatively movable joints.

    298+    for a variable length coupling means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 40 for a flexible connection
    between boiler sections of a steam locomotive and subclass 47 for an
    articulated or flexible pipe connection between relatively movable parts of
    a locomotive.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 82+ for a heat exchanger having a
    connector between two members allowing for expansion and contraction.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 220+ for flexibly connected
    rigid members in general.


CLS 285/224
TXT Subject matter under subclass 223 comprising means which compensates for
    expansion of conduit parts in radial as well as axial direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    187,    for temperature responsive sealing means.


CLS 285/225
TXT Devices under subclass 223 wherein the flexible joint comprises a
    plate-like member or diaphragm.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for a flexible diaphragm in a floor supported, water closet type
    joint.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 96+ for a diaphragm type
    expansible chamber device.


CLS 285/226
TXT Devices under subclass 223 comprising a corrugated tube section of flexible
    material for joining two conduit ends which permits unrestricted motion of
    the conduits.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for a flexible bellows in a floor supported, water-closet type
    joint.

    299+,   for expansion joints limited to reciprocating motion, which include
    bellows.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 34+ for a bellows type
    expansible chamber device.


CLS 285/227
TXT Devices under subclass 226 having two or more distinct bellows for joining
    the two conduit ends.


CLS 285/228
TXT Devices under subclass 227 in which the fluid pressure in one bellows
    member tends to neutralize the movement of the other bellows member.


CLS 285/229
TXT Devices under subclass 226 in which the bellows comprises a single annular
    fold or ridge with side walls.


CLS 285/230
TXT Devices under subclass 223 specifically adapted to clay, concrete or
    masonry pipe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231,    for other socketed packing type joints.


CLS 285/231
TXT Devices under subclass 223 in which a packing placed between the inner
    surface of an outer member and the spaced out surface of an inner member of
    two telescoped members provides relative lateral flexibility between the
    members.


CLS 285/232
TXT Devices under subclass 231 in which a grasping element, e.g., a wedge ring,
    is provided for holding the inner tube member (spigot) in the socket.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    339+,   for packed joints including wedge rings which are contracted into
    grasping relation with a pipe member. See the Search Notes thereunder.


CLS 285/233
TXT Devices under subclass 231 in which the inner tube member (spigot) has an
    annular ridge formed on its outer surface adapted for retaining it in the
    socket.


CLS 285/234
TXT Devices under subclass 231 in which the end of the inner tube is expanded
    to form a slanted flange adapted for retaining it within the packed socket.


CLS 285/235
TXT Devices under subclass 223 comprising an intermediate short tube of
    flexible material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for an intermediate resilient conduit as a noise dampener.

    109,    for a coupling with a fluid pressure seal comprising an internal
    flexible sleeve.

    148.13+, for serial diverse joints at least one of which is a
    nonmetal-to-metal joint.

    238+,   for a nonmetal-to-metal joint.

    369+,   for a packed sleeve joint.

    397+,   for an internal sleeve joint.

    417+,   for a sleeve joint.


CLS 285/236
TXT Devices under subclass 235 in which a fastening ring or clamp secures the
    sleeve ends to the conduit ends.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242+,   for an external clamp or holder in a nonmetal-to-metal joint.


CLS 285/237
TXT Devices under subclass 235 in which the sleeve member has a spigot at one
    end for insertion into a conduit end and a bell or socket at its other end
    to receive a conduit end.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148.1+, for serial diverse joints in a single line.  See the Search Notes
    thereunder.


CLS 285/238
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the joint is peculiar to
    the union between a nonmetal member and a metal member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148.13+, for serial diverse nonmetal-to-metal couplings.  See the Search
    Notes thereunder.

    222.1+, for a coupling for a plural layer pipe.


CLS 285/239
TXT Subject matter under subclass 238 comprising a supporting means (e.g.,
    sleeve or nipple) inserted into the nonmetal member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370+,   for an internal sleeve with packing.

    397+,   for an internal sleeve.


CLS 285/240
TXT Subject matter under subclass 239 comprising a supplemental flexible tipped
    end on the flexible pipe into which the supporting means is inserted.


CLS 285/241
TXT Subject matter under subclass 240 including means to externally clamp the
    tipped end to the supporting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242+,   for other nonmetal-to-metal couplings with external clamps.


CLS 285/242
TXT Subject matter under subclass 239 comprising an external member (e.g., a
    hose clamp) which confines the wall of the nonmetal member between it and
    the internal member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    420+,   for miscellaneous couplings comprising clamp means.


CLS 285/243
TXT Subject matter under subclass 242 comprising a socket with one or more
    slits which is contracted about the wall of the nonmetal member by the
    external clamp.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322+,   for movable jaw sockets in metal to metal joints.


CLS 285/244
TXT Subject matter under subclass 242 comprising a contractible spring that
    clamps the nonmetal member to the internal member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    318,    for a coupling with a coil spring type essential catch.

    321,    for a coupling with a resilient expanding locking ring.


CLS 285/245
TXT Subject matter under subclass 242 comprising screw means longitudinal to
    the axis of the coupled members which wedges the nonmetal member to the
    internal member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    253,    for bolted hose clamps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 19+ for hose clamps, per
    se and See the Search Notes thereunder.


CLS 285/246
TXT Subject matter under subclass 245 comprising a thimble-gland.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    353,    for a packed screw thimble joint.

    384,    for a screw thimble joint.


CLS 285/247
TXT Subject matter under subclass 245 comprising a screw thimble.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    354,    for a packed screw thimble joint.

    386+,   for a screw thimble joint.


CLS 285/248
TXT Subject matter under subclass 247 including a separable means between the
    nonmetal member and the external clamp or holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    348,    for a coupling comprising a separable packing follower.


CLS 285/249
TXT Subject matter under subclass 248 wherein the separable means is a wedge
    ring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    339+,   for a packed joint comprising wedge means.  See the Search Notes
    thereunder.


CLS 285/250
TXT Subject matter under subclass 245 comprising a screw gland.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    356+,   for a packed screw gland joint.

    393+,   for a screw gland joint.


CLS 285/251
TXT Subject matter under subclass 245 comprising threads on the internal member
    or on the holder or on both whereby the nonmetal member is forced fed and
    wedged therebetween.


CLS 285/252
TXT Subject matter under subclass 242 comprising a band type clamp with means
    to contract the band about the nonmetal member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 19+ for hose clamps, per
    se; and see the Search Notes thereunder.


CLS 285/253
TXT Subject matter under subclass 252 wherein the tightener comprises a bolt.


CLS 285/254
TXT Subject matter under subclass 242 wherein the external clamp comprises a
    wrapping of wire, string, etc.


CLS 285/255
TXT Subject matter under subclass 242 including a wedge means in the clamp.


CLS 285/256
TXT Subject matter under subclass 242 wherein the diameter of the external
    member is reduced as by metal working or deforming or the internal member
    is expanded, whereby the nonmetal member is held.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    382,    for other deformed material joints.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 505+ for a process of joining by
    deforming.


CLS 285/257
TXT Subject matter under subclass 256 wherein the external clamp includes
    bendable spur fingers which are contracted into grasping relation with the
    nonmetal member upon joining.


CLS 285/258
TXT Subject matter under subclass 256 wherein the internal member is expanded.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 523 for a method of expanding an internal
    tube.

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses 67+, 316+ and subclass 393,
    for an apparatus for expanding or flanging the end of a pipe.


CLS 285/259
TXT Subject matter under subclass 242 wherein the internal surface of the
    external clamp or holder or the external surface of the internal member, or
    both have a particular surface or surfaces for increasing the gripping
    friction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    328+,   for a coupling comprising a particular joint interface.


CLS 285/260
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein each member is of
    flexible nonmetallic material, and the flexible characteristic is essential
    to the making of the joint (e.g., canvas tubing used in mine ventilation).


CLS 285/261
TXT Devices under the class definition which comprise pipe and socket members
    having mating spherical or curved surfaces therebetween, said pipe
    constituting a ball or equivalent, to permit relative free movement between
    the parts or angular adjustment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for an insulated ball and socket joint.

    121.7,  for ball and socket joints in concentric pipe systems.

    138.1,  for a ball and socket joint in a pipe or rod to pipe-to-plate
    system.

    146.1+, for a plural serial ball and socket  system.


CLS 285/262
TXT Devices under subclass 261 including means, e.g., a link or rod, within the
    ball and socket members adapted to hold them in coupled relation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for a coupling with a strain relief.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 122+ for other ball and socket
    joints.


CLS 285/263
TXT Devices under subclass 261 comprising a plurality of spaced spherical or
    curved surfaces on one part coacting with a plurality of spaced surfaces on
    the other part, or comprising an intermediate movable spherical bearing
    within the socket part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146.3,  for a sphere intermediate two sockets providing plural joints.


CLS 285/264
TXT Devices under subclass 261 including means, e.g., trunnions on the ball
    member or axial slots in the socket, etc., which restricts angular motion
    (oscillation) between the ball and the socket member to definite axes.


CLS 285/265
TXT Devices under subclass 264 in which a ring is connected to the ball and the
    socket members by means of pivot pins adapted to permit pivoting of conduit
    members on an axis that is a diameter of the ring.


CLS 285/266
TXT Devices under subclass 261 in which the ball member comprises several
    assembled parts.


CLS 285/267
TXT Devices under subclass 261 including a packing which is urged into sealing
    contact by resilient means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    348,    for a separable follower in a packed joint.

    375,    for internal reciprocating packers in socket joints.


CLS 285/268
TXT Devices under subclass 261 which include a resilient member, e.g., a coiled
    spring, which urges the ball member into contact with the socket.


CLS 285/269
TXT Devices under subclass 268 wherein the spring element is positioned within
    the socket member.


CLS 285/270
TXT Devices under subclass 261 including means additional to the coupling
    means, e.g., take up bolts in the flange of a screw thimble coupler, for
    transmitting sealing force to the packing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    348,    for a separable packing follower in a packed joint.


CLS 285/271
TXT Devices under subclass 261 including separable elements which bear the ball
    member within the socket.


CLS 285/272
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising compensating means to unite
    the members so that one member may turn or rotate freely relative to the
    other at all times, whereby the strain imposed therebetween due to motion
    is relieved.

    (1)     Note.  Couplings requiring loosening of a means that normally
    tightens the joint before strain incurred by relative movement of the
    members is relieved are classified according to their structural features.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98,     for a swivel with a fluid pressure seal.

    121.3+, for a swivel in a plural concentric pipe system.

    147.1+, for plural serial swivels.

    184+,   for an adjustable angle coupling.

    272.1,  for a swivel with an access opening.

    283,    for a coupling including a detachable  hinge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 580 for a running joint between movable
    parts of a distribution system.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 164+ for other swivel joints.


CLS 285/272.1
TXT With access opening:

    Subject matter under subclass 272 including an opening with a closure or
    having one or more separable parts which permit access to the interior
    thereof without disassembly of the joint.


CLS 285/273
TXT Devices under subclass 272 wherein a transverse cylinder rotates upon its
    axis in a socket and in which a pipe section attached to the cylinder
    extends through a slot in the socket.


CLS 285/274
TXT Devices under subclass 272 wherein an extending arm on one pipe section
    holds the other section in swivelling relationship.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127.1+, for swivel joints in which arms of a yoke constitute branch flow
    paths.


CLS 285/275
TXT Devices under subclass 272 in which the end of one pipe is received in the
    end of another pipe and held in swivelling relationship.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    374+,   for a packed socket.  See the Search Notes thereunder.


CLS 285/276
TXT Devices under subclass 275 in which a retaining fastener comprising ball,
    ring, or pin detent means engages a groove in one of the pipe sections to
    maintain the other pipe section in rotatable engagement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305+,   for a coupling comprising a catch means essential to holding the
    joined members in coupled relation.  See the Search Notes thereunder.

    415,    for a joint including a split ring as a detachable flange.


CLS 285/277
TXT Subject matter under subclass 276 including means for moving the fastener
    to latched and/or unlatched position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    308+,   for a coupling with means essential to holding the members
    together, said means comprising a catch with a manipulator.


CLS 285/278
TXT Devices under subclass 275 in which the pipe section received has a flange
    thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98,     for similar structure having a fluid pressure actuated seal.

    354,    for a packed screw-thimble type coupling including a flanged
    spigot. See the Search Notes thereunder.


CLS 285/279
TXT Devices under subclass 278 in which a spring exerts a force against the
    flanged pipe to hold it in seated position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    375,    for a packed socket coupling having an internal reciprocating
    packer.


CLS 285/280
TXT Devices under subclass 278 in which the flanged pipe section is held within
    the socket against longitudinal movement.


CLS 285/281
TXT Devices under subclass 280 which include packing material.


CLS 285/282
TXT Subject matter under subclass 272 including means to limit the extent of
    rotation.


CLS 285/283
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising a detachable hinge
    means on one side of the pipes, whereby the pipes are pivotally connected
    together with or without means for holding the pipes in line flow position,
    generally a latch or lock means on the opposite side of the pipe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     for lock or latch means which are not essential to the making of
    the joint, but serve to prevent the disassembly of the joint.


CLS 285/284.1
TXT WITH ACCESS OPENING:

    Subject matter under the class definition including an opening with a
    closure or having one or more separable parts which permit access to the
    interior thereof without disassembly of the joint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62+,    for an access opening to permit insertion or removal of a wear
    element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 583+ for a fluid handling system with an
    access opening.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 89+ for pipe closures.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 200+ for analogous closures for receptacles
    and of general utility.


CLS 285/285.1
TXT MOLDED JOINT:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a plastic or melted
    material is used in the joint or wherein the ends of the members are united
    by fusion or by welding pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148.7,  for a molded joint in a compound coupling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, appropriate subclasses for making a joint by
    metallurgically securing one meeting face to another.

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 89 for molding apparatus for joining pipe
    sections with a fluent material.


CLS 285/286.1
TXT Interlocked:

    Subject matter under subclass 285.1 including connecting means such as
    hooking, dovetailing, meshing, etc.


CLS 285/286.2
TXT Deformed or having additional holding means:

    Subject matter under subclass 286.1 including an additional holding means,
    such as distortion of the shape of one of the members after being joined.


CLS 285/287.1
TXT With root repellent:

    Subject matter under subclass 285.1 including means to inhibit or resist
    the growth of vegetative roots between the members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45+,    for a coupling with a casing, lining or protector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 90, for similar structure in
    test plug combinations.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 52+ for expansible stopper type
    closures.

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 233, for an expansible plug closure.


CLS 285/288.1
TXT Weld:

    Subject matter under subclass 285.1 wherein the pipes are united by the
    application of extreme heat, sometimes with pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189+,   for a welded joint between a pipe and plate, especially subclasses
    201+, for a welded sput and plate connection.

    416,    for a flange welded to a pipe.


CLS 285/288.11
TXT Having pre-formed weld ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 288.1 including placement of a pre-shaped
    ring along which a welding bead is laid.


CLS 285/288.2
TXT Axially spaced:

    Subject matter under subclass 288.1 wherein the weld is placed in locations
    around the joint.


CLS 285/288.3
TXT Cold weld:

    Subject matter under subclass 288.1 wherein the weld is effected by the use
    of high pressure or vacuum without using heat.


CLS 285/288.4
TXT Flash weld:

    Subject matter under subclass 288.1 wherein the welding is done in discrete
    spots rather than a continuous bead.


CLS 285/288.5
TXT Having additional holding means:

    Subject matter under subclass 288.1 including another holding means such as
    a clamp, bolt, etc. to further secure the joint.


CLS 285/288.6
TXT Interlocked:

    Subject matter under subclass 288.5 including connecting means such as
    hooking, dovetailing, meshing, etc.


CLS 285/288.7
TXT Having disassembly feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 288.1 including the characteristic of being
    easily taken apart.


CLS 285/288.8
TXT Having crack arresting feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 288.1 including the characteristic of
    relieving the strain produced by a crack.


CLS 285/288.9
TXT Reinforced:

    Subject matter under subclass 288.1 including a reinforcement such as a
    sleeve welded over the joint weld.


CLS 285/289.1
TXT Solder:

    Subject matter under subclass 285.1 wherein the members are bonded by a
    melted metal (usually a tin alloy) cement.


CLS 285/289.2
TXT Having additional holding means:

    Subject matter under subclass 289.1 including another type of holding means
    such as a clamp, bolt, etc. in order to strengthen the joint.


CLS 285/289.3
TXT Interlocked:

    Subject matter under subclass 289.2 including connecting means such as
    hooking, dovetailing, meshing, etc.


CLS 285/289.4
TXT Having disassembly feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 289.1 including the characteristic of being
    easily taken apart.


CLS 285/289.5
TXT Having pre-placed solder:

    Subject matter under subclass 289.1 wherein the method of "tinning" is used
    by pre-placing the solder so that the application of heat is all that is
    needed to effect the bond of the joint.


CLS 285/290.1
TXT Composite pipe (ends):

    Subject matter under subclass 285.1 in which at least the ends of the
    members to be joined are of a composite material, such as cement, asphalt,
    concrete, or glass combined with other materials such as reinforcement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 140+ for pipe structure, per
    se.


CLS 285/290.2
TXT Locked reinforcement:

    Subject matter under subclass 290.1 wherein the structure is strengthened
    by imbedding hooked stay rods, which are joined together, into the conduit.


CLS 285/290.3
TXT Interlocked with pipe end:

    Subject matter under subclass 290.1 wherein a reinforcing rod in one
    section of the conduit is hooked into the end of another section of conduit.


CLS 285/290.4
TXT Having additional holding means:

    Subject matter under subclass 290.3 wherein the joint is held further by a
    means such as a bolt or clamp, etc.


CLS 285/290.5
TXT Expansion/contraction:

    Subject matter under subclass 290.1 wherein the joint is water-tight and
    constructed to provide for inordinate expansion or contraction and remain
    water-tight.


CLS 285/291.1
TXT Having screw interlock:

    Subject matter under subclass 285.1 wherein the ends of the members are
    additionally held together by means having a helical thread.


CLS 285/291.2
TXT Having interrupted thread:

    Subject matter under subclass 291.1 wherein the thread is broken
    (non-continuous) thereby being a locking thread.


CLS 285/292.1
TXT With lug and slot interlock:

    Subject matter under subclass 285.1 wherein the members are also connected
    by a projection and dependent opening or groove (e.g., a bayonet joint).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401,    for a socket joint, comprising lug and slot means. See the Search
    Notes thereunder.


CLS 285/293.1
TXT Lining or cover molded to pipe end:

    Subject matter under subclass 285.1 wherein a plastic or melted material is
    shaped to the end of a pipe as an interior or exterior cover.


CLS 285/294.1
TXT Sleeve:

    Subject matter under subclass 285.1 which includes a short tube-like
    encasement.


CLS 285/294.2
TXT Wrapped:

    Subject matter under subclass 294.1 wherein the sleeve is a tape-like or
    wound material.


CLS 285/294.3
TXT Sprue:

    Subject matter under subclass 294.1 wherein the sleeve has an aperture for
    pouring the molded material.


CLS 285/294.4
TXT Having additional holding means:

    Subject matter under subclass 294.3 including another securing means such
    as a bolt, clamp, etc.


CLS 285/295.1
TXT With packing filler:

    Subject matter under subclass 285.1 wherein filler material (e.g., oakum)
    in addition to the molding or caulking material is utilized to save on the
    amount of molding material used.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    374+,   for a coupling comprising a packed socket. See the Search Notes
    thereunder.


CLS 285/295.2
TXT Wedge ring type:

    Subject matter under subclass 295.1 wherein the filler is in the form of a
    ring having a tapered or triangular surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    339+,   for a packed joint comprising wedge means.


CLS 285/295.3
TXT Elastomeric:

    Subject matter under subclass 295.1 wherein the filler is a polymeric or
    rubber-like material.


CLS 285/296.1
TXT Sprue:

    Subject matter under subclass 285.1 including an aperture or sprue for
    pouring the molding material into the joint.


CLS 285/298
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein one member is connected
    to the other by an intermediate element capable of significant contraction
    and expansion or wherein one member projects into or telescopes with the
    other member and provides relative movement therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for a threaded telescopic insertable section.

    145.1+, for a joint system comprising serial relative movable diverse
    joints, one of which is telescopic.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 8 for receptacles having telescopic sections.
    See the Search Notes thereunder.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 333+ for adjustable length suspension
    supports, and subclass 161 for adjustable length standards for stands.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 52+ for articulated members in
    general.


CLS 285/299
TXT Devices under subclass 298 comprising a sealing means which is bellows in
    form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226+,   for a flexible joint between rigid members comprising bellows means.


CLS 285/300
TXT Subject matter under subclass 299 including a sleeve within the bellows.


CLS 285/301
TXT Devices under subclass 299 in which a stop element, e.g., a tie rod,
    restricts the extent of the bellows movement in contraction and/or
    expansion or both.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114+,   for a strain relief combined with a coupling.  See the Notes
    thereunder.


CLS 285/302
TXT Subject matter under subclass 298 adapted for reciprocation of one member
    in the other while maintaining a seal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145.1+, for a telescopic joint combined with another joint.

    154.1+, for beer barrel tappers which have a telescopic member.

    224,    for a flexible joint with means compensating for radial and
    longitudinal expansion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 354.1+ for adjustable props or braces.


CLS 285/303
TXT Subject matter under subclass 298 comprising means providing for step
    adjustment.


CLS 285/304
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising means to hold the two
    members in coupled relationship under normal operating forces but which
    will release upon application of excessive forces, e.g., a spring pressed
    ball in one member coacting with a groove in the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for safety release couplings having means to release a holding
    means on the application of excessive force.

    345+,   for a packing, which frictionally retains a member with insertion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 149.7 for a valved flow line
    section joined to another by a contact only, or friction, joint, where the
    act of joining operates the valve in opposition to a spring biasing it.


CLS 285/305
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising catch means essential
    to detachably holding the two members in coupled relation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     for a locked or sealed coupling.

    81+,    for auxiliary catches or latches which are not essential to the
    holding together of the two members, but serve to detain, block or disable
    the holding means.

    276,    for a swivel coupling with detent means.

    340     for toggle ring-type wedge means in packed joints.

    362     and 377, for manipulating rings for lugged pipes with rotary
    engagement.

    403+,   for socket type couplings having separable fasteners.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 123+ for a
    Chinese-finger- type clasp.

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, appropriate subclasses for detents in a tool or
    work holder.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, appropriate subclasses for catches in a closure
    fastener combination.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 326+ for joints in general
    comprising a biased catch or latch.


CLS 285/306
TXT Subject matter under subclass 305 including catch means responsive to the
    line pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83,     for line pressure responsive auxiliary latch means.

    102     and 104+, for similar means combined with a fluid pressure seal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclasses 55.4+ for devices which perforate or split well
    tubing by explosive means, and subclass 212 for a fluid pressure actuated
    expansible anchor.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 94 for fluid pressure biased
    latches in valve actuator combinations.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 86.24+ for
    expanding grapples adapted for use in a well bore, and subclasses 93+ for
    expanding grapples of general utility.


CLS 285/307
TXT Subject matter under subclass 305 including means to release the catch by
    conduit motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for similar structure in irrigation-type joints.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 614+ for valved, separable, flow line
    sections wherein the joining is usually effected by relative motion between
    the sections.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 89.5 and 149+ for separable
    flow line sections, one of which is valved, the joining usually being
    effected by relative motion between the sections.


CLS 285/308
TXT Subject matter under subclass 305 including means to operate the catch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 321+ for other joints involving
    a manipulatable latch.


CLS 285/309
TXT Subject matter under subclass 308 comprising means to draw the ends of the
    coupled members toward each other.


CLS 285/310
TXT Subject matter under subclass 309 requiring separate actuation of an
    independent tightening means or the movement of the latch manipulator other
    than that required for the operation of the latch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123.11,         for slip actuators for slips used to anchor an inner
    tubular member within an outer tubular member.


CLS 285/311
TXT Subject matter under subclass 309 comprising a lever system that is
    self-locking in that a pivotal connection passes dead center.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 270+ for self-locking
    tighteners in hose clamps.


CLS 285/312
TXT Subject matter under subclass 309 comprising a cam-lever.


CLS 285/313
TXT Subject matter under subclass 308 including means to releasably hold the
    catch manipulator in selected position.


CLS 285/314
TXT Subject matter under subclass 308 comprising sleeve means with cam surfaces
    which manipulate the catch.


CLS 285/315
TXT Subject matter under subclass 314 wherein the sleeve reciprocates.


CLS 285/316
TXT Subject matter under subclass 315 including spring means to bias the sleeve.


CLS 285/317
TXT Subject matter under subclass 308 wherein the catch is spring biased.


CLS 285/318
TXT Subject matter under subclass 305 comprising a contractible coil in a
    sleeve or socket that grip a spigot therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244,    for a spring hose clamp.


CLS 285/319
TXT Subject matter under subclass 305 wherein the catch means comprises a leaf
    spring.


CLS 285/320
TXT Subject matter under subclass 305 wherein the catch means is mounted to
    pivot to and from engaging position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 354.1+ for a pivoted locking plate in an
    adjustable prop or brace.

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, subclass 77 for pivoted or rotary detent in
    chucks.

    403,    Joints or Connections, subclasses 52+ for a pivoted locking plate
    in an adjustable length type rod joint.


CLS 285/321
TXT Subject matter under subclass 305 comprising an annular spring means
    carried by one member, said means coacting with a projection or groove on
    the other member upon change in shape or diameter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    276,    for a swiveled pipe in socket joint including a resilient retainer
    ring.

    340,    for a packed coupling with a toggle ring-type wedge means.


CLS 285/322
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the joint comprises a
    movable jaw member (e.g., a split socket or spigot) which is contracted or
    expanded by an external clamp or screw thimble, etc., to fasten the members
    together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for a quick release joint comprising radially moved segmented
    threads.

    243,    for a movable jaw in a nonmetal-to-metal joint.

    382,    for a joint obtained by deforming material of one or both members
    and see the Search Notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 588+ for head and socket
    separable fasteners.

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, subclasses 42, 43, and 43.1+ for split sockets,
    and subclasses 46.1+ for spring jaws.


CLS 285/323
TXT Subject matter under subclass 322 including a bushing with a wedge shaped
    cross-section whereby the jaw portion is moved.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    339+,   for a packed joint with wedge means.

    421,    for a joint having clamp means    comprising wedge means.


CLS 285/324
TXT Subject matter under subclass 322 comprising an intermediate member or
    members in the socket to adapt the socket to a smaller pipe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148.23+, for a reducing coupler, comprising serial diverse joints.


CLS 285/325
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising means whereby the
    members can be coupled only by lateral movement, e.g., socket with an
    inwardly extending flange at its outer end provided with a transverse
    opening in the socket large enough to take a spigot with an outwardly
    extending flange, which flange is too large to enter endwise in the socket.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     for duplicate end side slide couplings.

    103,    for fluid pressure sealed joints with piston type reactors and side
    slide connecting means.


CLS 285/326
TXT Subject matter under subclass 325 comprising lever means for tightening the
    joint or holding the parts in position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270,    for a ball and socket joint with a separate packing actuator.

    309+,   for an essential catch with a tightener.


CLS 285/327
TXT Subject matter under subclass 325 comprising a screw thimble tightener.
    See the Search Notes under subclass 326.


CLS 285/328
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the free ends of the
    members, which constitute the joint interface, are so constructed that the
    particular configuration of one requires a particular configuration in the
    other and/or the particular interfaces cooperate to produce some unexpected
    result.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65+,    for a duplicate end coupling (e.g., train line type).

    148.19+, for diverse interfaces in serial diverse joints.

    259,    for a nonmetal-to-metal coupling having a particular surface means
    for increasing friction between the members.


CLS 285/329
TXT Devices under subclass 328 wherein the free ends, which constitute the
    joint interface, are of different material, as in the provision of a brass
    or other metal seat on one of two iron tubes to be joined in order to
    prevent corrosion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47+,    for an insulated joint.

    148.11+, for serial diverse joints with diverse materials.

    238+,   for a coupling between a nonmetal and metal member.

    378,    for a diverse metal gasket-seat.

    422+,   for a coupling distinguished by the   material thereof.


CLS 285/330
TXT Devices under subclass 328 wherein the free ends are provided with
    interengaging elements (e.g., tongue and groove, etc.) or are keyed
    together to prevent relative rotation therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148.5,  for an intermediate joint with expansible spigots in a serial
    diverse joint system.

    202+,   for an interlocked sput and plate joint.

    291.1,  for molded joint with screw interlock.


CLS 285/331
TXT Subject matter under subclass 328 wherein the joint interface of one member
    comprises an annular socket or recess means for the reception of a distinct
    intermediate annular projection on the other member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    336,    for supplemental packing sockets for joints with an annular socket
    in each member with cooperating gasket therebetween.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclass 332 for other joints involving an
    annular recess.


CLS 285/332
TXT Subject matter under subclass 328 wherein the interface includes a
    conically or conoidally tapered free end portion on one of the members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238+,   for nonmetal to metal connections with a conical taper at an
    interface.

    331,    for devices wherein a projection on one member extends into an
    annular socket in the other member and wherein the contact between said
    projection and socket may be on a conical taper.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 334+ for other joints involving
    a tapered interface.


CLS 285/332.1
TXT Devices under subclass 332 wherein the interface is composed of mating
    curved surfaces on each member generated by a curve having the same loci
    and length of the radii thereof and rotating about its sine as an axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261+,   for joints wherein the interface is a ball and socket.


CLS 285/332.2
TXT Devices under subclass 332 wherein a sealing means is located on the
    interface of one of the members or is located at an axial end of the taper
    of either of the members for direct engagement by the other member.  The
    sealing means may be a separate element or means formed by deformation of a
    member during coupling.


CLS 285/332.3
TXT Devices under subclass 332.2 having the sealing means between the members
    and intermediate the ends of the taper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334.3,  for devices wherein an elastomeric member forms a seat for
    reception of the other member.


CLS 285/332.4
TXT Devices under subclass 332 wherein the surface of the interface of at least
    one member is interrupted to cause an irregularity therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332.2+, for devices having a packing carried by a groove in an interface.


CLS 285/333
TXT Subject matter under subclass 332.4 comprising a threaded portion generally
    on the tapered surfaces, e.g., pin and box drill pipe couplings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for pin and box drill couplings with attached thread jamming
    preventers.


CLS 285/334
TXT Subject matter under subclass 333 wherein the threads are flat crested,
    e.g., square or acme.


CLS 285/334.1
TXT Devices under subclass 332 including a separate element, other than a mere
    packing, shaped to form the interface between the members which are held in
    coupled relation by other means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332.2+, for a joint having a packed tapered interface.


CLS 285/334.2
TXT Devices under subclass 334.1 wherein the separate element is a short nipple
    which has each end tapered to mate with a taper in each of the members.


CLS 285/334.3
TXT Devices under subclass 334.1 wherein the separate member is composed of a
    rubber or rubber-like substance, or a substance having substantially the
    physical properties of rubber.


CLS 285/334.4
TXT Devices under subclass 332 wherein the tapers of each of the interfitting
    members are of a different angle, or a nontapered member engages a tapered
    member, or the members each terminate in convexly curved surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148.19+, for serial diverse joints having diverse coupling interfaces.


CLS 285/334.5
TXT Devices under subclass 332 wherein the end of one of the members has
    thereon a deformation occasioned by movement of its wall either inwardly or
    outwardly of its axis.


CLS 285/335
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including packing means to
    prevent leakage.

    (1)     Note.  Search the appropriate special joint (e.g., subclass 261,
    ball and socket) subclass for a joint having a packing limited in use
    thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10+,    for a joint with a liquid seal.

    95+,    for a joint comprising sealing means responsive to line pressure.

    187+,   for a joint with means responsive to temperature change to maintain
    the seal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a seal between two pipes or a
    pipe and a wall that are at most secured together only by friction between
    the seal and the pipe or wall, subclasses 602+ for a static contact seal
    intended for use on a pipe, conduit, or cable.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 288+, for other packed joints.


CLS 285/336
TXT Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein each of the adjacent faces of the
    members to be joined is provided with an annular, equi-radial groove for
    the mutual reception of a packing element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    349+,   for a supplemental packing socket in a socket joint.


CLS 285/337
TXT Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein an overlapped portion of a joint
    is covered by packing entirely external of the joined members and a clamp
    or collar compresses the external packing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148.6+, for compound joints which may include an externally packed joint.

    364+,   for packed flange joints with clamping means.

    413,    for clamping rings, per se, for pipe joints.


CLS 285/338
TXT Subject matter under subclass 335 including a spigot carried packing with
    means to expand the packing into sealing relationship with a surrounding
    member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95+,    for fluid pressure expanded packings.

    140.1,  for an expanding spigot in a pipe-to-pipe-to-plate joint system.

    148.5,  for an intermediate joint with expansible spigots.

    196,    for an expansible spigot carried packing in an end to side or plate
    joint.

    322,    for a coupling including a movable jaw portion on the spigot or
    bell.

    339+,   for couplings with wedge controlled packings.

    346,    for packing expanding means in a coupling providing frictional
    retention with insertion.

    348,    for couplings including a separable follower between the tightener
    and packing.

    356+,   for a packed coupling with a screw gland.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 90 for similar structure in
    test plug combination.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 358+ for expansible stopper type
    closures.

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 233 for an expansible plug closure.


CLS 285/339
TXT Subject matter under subclass 335 comprising wedge means to control the
    positioning or shape of the packing or which itself prevents leakage.

    (1)     Note.  These are mostly wedge rings which are contracted into
    gripping relation (by pushing, compressing, etc) with a pipe member to
    thereby provide a flange equivalent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for a coupling including a wedge having a frangible connection to
    the compressor (e.g., screw thimble).

    104+,   for pipe grasping wedge rings in a coupling with a fluid pressure
    sealing means.

    232,    for conduit grasping means in a flexible joint between rigid
    members.

    249,    for a wedge ring in nonmetal to metal couplings.

    295.2,  for a wedge ring-type packing filler in a molded joint.

    323,    for a wedge bushing in a movable jaw coupling.


CLS 285/340
TXT Subject matter under subclass 339 comprising one or more annular wedge
    members of relatively thin material with the edge of the central bore
    offset laterally with respect to the outer edge, whereby a force applied
    parallel to the axis of the bore will cause reduction of the effective
    diameter of the central bore.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    321,    for a coupling having a resilient ring type essential catch.


CLS 285/341
TXT Subject matter under subclass 339 including two or more pairs of coacting
    wedge surfaces so disposed that the planes thereof will intersect upon
    extension thereof, whereby mating engagement is obtained when one wedge
    surface is pushed toward the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    342,    for a single set of wedge surfaces which mate when pushed together.


CLS 285/342
TXT Subject matter under subclass 339 wherein the wedge means is pushed by an
    external pressure means into mating engagement with a cooperating wedge
    surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    341,    for double wedge surfaces.


CLS 285/343
TXT Subject matter under subclass 339 including a pressure means having a
    flared wedging surface surrounding a stationary wedge whereby the wedge is
    compressed radially inward.


CLS 285/344
TXT Subject matter under subclass 335 comprising a ring shaped gasket
    substantially circular in cross section which is rolled into and deformed
    in the gasket recess by endwise movement of the male and female members.


CLS 285/345
TXT Subject matter under subclass 335 in which a packing element fixed in a
    female member grips the male member to connect the members, as where the
    aperture in the packing is of smaller diameter than external diameter of
    the male member and the resilience of the packing holds the male after its
    insertion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for faucet type couplings, many of which are of the slip on kind.

    304,    for a coupling with a friction type detent.


CLS 285/346
TXT Subject matter under subclass 345 including means for compressing the
    packing and further reducing the aperture diameter to better grip the male.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    338,    for a coupling with a spigot carried, radially expansible packing.
    See the Search Notes thereunder.


CLS 285/347
TXT Devices under subclass 335 wherein one of the members has a cylindrical
    portion or shank extending axially beyond a shouldered portion and means to
    retain the packing on the shank.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302,    for a telescopic spigot which carries a gasket.

    332,    for tapered interface type spigot carrying a tapered gasket as part
    thereof.

    338,    for a radially expansible packing carried on a spigot.  See the
    Search Notes thereunder.


CLS 285/348
TXT Devices under subclass 335 wherein the sealing means is provided with a
    separable follower means which transmits pressure from the tightening means
    to the sealing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270,    for a separate packing actuator in a ball and socket joint.

    338,    for a spigot carried radially expansible packing.


CLS 285/349
TXT Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein the packing means is carried in a
    recess or auxiliary socket in a socket member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331,    for an annular socket-type coupling interface.

    336,    for cooperating opposed packing grooves.

    374+,   for a packed socket-type joint.


CLS 285/350
TXT Subject matter under subclass 349 wherein the packing socket includes an
    auxiliary recess into which the gasket may cold-flow upon tightening of the
    joint.


CLS 285/351
TXT Subject matter under subclass 335 comprising two or more means to seal a
    single joint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95+,    for a fluid pressure responsive seal in combination with other
    sealing means.

    148.6+, for compound joints.


CLS 285/352
TXT Subject matter under subclass 351 comprising duplicate gasket means between
    the free ends of the coupled members in coacting opposed relation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65+,    for couplings comprising identical halves.

    99,     for fluid pressure seals of this type.

    328+,   for a particular interface between the coacting free ends of the
    coupled members.

    336,    for cooperating, opposed packing grooves.


CLS 285/353
TXT Structure under subclass 335 comprising means to hold the members together
    including a separate gland portion threaded into a separate thimble
    portion, both the gland and thimble being separate from either member to be
    joined.


CLS 285/354
TXT Devices under subclass 335 including means to hold the members together,
    said means comprising an external sleeve having an internally threaded
    portion on one end to engage threads on one of the members and an inwardly
    extending flange or equivalent at the other end for sliding engagement with
    a flange or equivalent on the second member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     for an insulated screw-thimble coupling.

    386+,   for an unpacked screw-thimble coupling.


CLS 285/355
TXT Subject matter under subclass 335 comprising screw threads at the coupling
    interface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148.19+, for differential screw threads.

    328+,   for a particular interface, especially subclasses 333+ for a
    threaded conically tapered interface.

    390+,   for unpacked screw couplings.


CLS 285/356
TXT Devices under subclass 335 wherein the packing is compressed or forced into
    sealing position by a gland.  A gland is limited here to a follower
    combined (e.g., integral) with a force transmitting means (e.g., threads)
    or a part thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212,    for a screw compressed countersunk packing in a pipe-to-plate joint.

    231,    for a socketed packing-type flexible joint between rigid members.

    339+,   for packings compressed by wedging action.


CLS 285/357
TXT Subject matter under subclass 356 comprising internally and externally
    threaded force transmitting means.


CLS 285/358
TXT Subject matter under subclass 335 comprising a rotatable element having a
    groove or surface for imparting reciprocatory or oscillatory motion to a
    follower to draw the members together to force the packing into sealing
    position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    394+,   for an unpacked coupling with a tightener comprising cam means.


CLS 285/359
TXT Subject matter under subclass 358 comprising an external sleeve having an
    inwardly extending flange or equivalent on one end for sliding engagement
    with a flange or equivalent on one member and an internally extending cam
    means on the other end to engage a follower portion on the other member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    354+,   for a packed screw thimble coupling.

    386+,   for an unpacked screw thimble coupling.

    395,    for an unpacked cam thimble coupling.


CLS 285/360
TXT Subject matter under subclass 358 wherein one member has a lateral
    projection adapted to engage a projection or recess in the other member
    when rotated on its axis to hold the members in coupled relation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73,     for duplicate end couplings having rotary engagement.

    307,    for a coupling with an essential catch operated by conduit motion.

    376+    and 401+, for similar structure except for the cam surfaces.

    391+,   for interrupted thread-type couplings.


CLS 285/361
TXT Subject matter under subclass 360 comprising a slot with longitudinal and
    circumferential components and providing a cam track for the cooperating
    lug to draw the members together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    396,    for an unpacked joint including a bayonet type cam means.

    402,    for a bayonet slot and means lugged pipe in a socket joint.


CLS 285/362
TXT Subject matter under subclass 360 wherein one of the members has a
    rotatable ring mounted thereon, the ring carrying the projection or recess,
    whereby the coupling is effected by rotation of the ring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    377,    for similar structure except for cam means.


CLS 285/363
TXT Devices under subclass 335 wherein at least the free end of one of the
    members has a transverse shoulder, flange, or flange portion utilized in
    making the joint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    405+,   for a flanged joint, per se.  See the Search Notes thereunder.


CLS 285/364
TXT Devices under subclass 363 comprising bands, straps, clips, etc., which
    grip the flanges externally to hold or to hold and draw the pipe ends
    together.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 280+ for a clamp which secures a
    closure to a receptacle of the type there provided for.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148.6+, for a compound joint, which may include an external packing and a
    compressor of this type.

    337,    for an external packing with a clamp type compressor.

    400,    for a flange joint comprising at least one separable ring mounted
    on one member of a socket joint.

    406+,   for clamped flange joint, per se. See the Search Notes thereunder.


CLS 285/365
TXT Devices under subclass 364 comprising a band or ring which
    circumferentially grips the flanges to bring the pipe ends together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    407+,   for a band clamped flange joint, per se and see the search notes
    thereunder.


CLS 285/366
TXT Devices under subclass 365 in which a bolt or screw is used to tighten the
    clamping band.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    410+,   for similar devices without packing.


CLS 285/367
TXT Devices under subclass 366 in which the screw or bolt lies at a tangent to
    the clamping band circumference.


CLS 285/368
TXT Devices under subclass 364 in which the clamping means comprises at least
    one separable plate-like pipe receiving ring coacting with a flange and
    having bolts lying parallel to its axis for producing axial forces to draw
    the flanges together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    412,    for a similar unpacked joint.

    413,    for the clamping ring, per se.


CLS 285/369
TXT Subject matter under subclass 335 comprising a short tubular section
    extending between and each end thereof providing an overlapping portion
    with engaging pipe ends.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for an insulated sleeve joint.

    66,     for an intermediate sleeve in a duplicate end coupling.

    294.1+, for a molded joint including a sleeve.

    383,    for distinct spaced serial joints.

    407+,   for a flanged joint with a band type clamp.  See the Search Notes
    thereunder.

    417+,   for a sleeve joint, per se.


CLS 285/370
TXT Devices under subclass 369 in which the tubular section is inserted into
    the ends of the pipe ends.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    397,    for an unpacked sleeve.  See the Search Notes thereunder.


CLS 285/371
TXT Subject matter under subclass 370 also including an external tubular
    section overlapping the engaging pipe ends.


CLS 285/372
TXT Subject matter under subclass 369 including a common means in the means
    holding the pipe ends in the sleeve ends, whereby both pipe ends are
    released upon removal or release of the common means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 92 for conduit,
    cable or conductor joints including longitudinally divided joint casings.


CLS 285/373
TXT Subject matter under subclass 372 comprising a sleeve split lengthwise.


CLS 285/374
TXT Subject matter under subclass 335 comprising a hollow part or cavity
    involving an internal wall structure of one member which receives a male
    portion (e.g., spigot) of the other member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for an insulated socket.

    56+,    for a floor supported water closet type joint including a socket.

    121.7,  for plural, concentric ball and socket joints.

    138.1,  for a ball and socket joint in a pipe or rod-to-pipe-to-plate joint
    system.

    146.1+, for plural serial ball and sockets.

    231+,   for a socketed packing type flexible joint between rigid members.

    239+,   for nonmetal-to-metal joints including an internal member.

    260,    for a socket joint between pliable-nonmetal members.

    261+,   for ball and socket joints.

    275+,   for a pipe in socket swivel joint.

    285.1+, for a molded joint including a socket.

    295.1+, for a socketed packing filler in a molded joint.

    302,    for a telescopic socket joint.

    322+,   for a contractible socket.

    331,    for an annular socket and spigot interface.

    336,    for opposed, mating packing grooves.

    349+,   for a socket joint with a supplemental packing recess.

    399+,   for an unpacked socket joint.  See the Search Notes thereunder.


CLS 285/375
TXT Subject matter under subclass 374 including internal reciprocating means
    coacting with the sealing means to perfect the seal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101+,   for line fluid actuated reciprocating packers.

    267,    for a resiliently urged packing means in a ball and socket joint.

    279,    for a spring biased flange in a socket type swivel coupling.


CLS 285/376
TXT Subject matter under subclass 374 wherein one member has a lateral
    projection adapted to engage a projection or recess in the other member
    when rotated to hold the members in coupled relation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401+,   for similar structure without packing, and see the Search Notes
    thereunder.


CLS 285/377
TXT Subject matter under subclass 376 wherein one of the members has a
    rotatable ring mounted thereon, the ring carrying the projection or recess,
    whereby the coupling is effected by rotation of the ring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    362,    for similar structure including a cam means for drawing the members
    together.

    387+,   for a removable screw thimble.


CLS 285/378
TXT Subject matter under subclass 335 including a bushing or washer of a
    material diverse from the material of the head and upon which the gasket
    seats, generally to prevent rusting of the seat with resultant loss of
    sealing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329,    for a particular interface of diverse metal.


CLS 285/379
TXT Subject matter under subclass 335 comprising means to hold the gasket in a
    part of the joint when the joint is unassembled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for retaining means for fluid pressure seals.


CLS 285/380
TXT Subject matter under subclass 379 wherein the means comprises a resilient
    stud which engages a socket type recess in the coupling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 614+ for a resilient
    head in a head and socket separable fastener.


CLS 285/381.1
TXT TEMPERATURE RESPONSIVE JOINT ELEMENT; E.G., SHRUNK FIT:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which at least one of the
    joint elements is capable of changing configuration as a result of
    temperature modification.

    (1)     Note. Temperature modification includes either raising or lowering
    the temperature of the joint elements from their local ambient temperature
    either prior to or after assembly of the joint elements.  The change in
    temperature is accompanied by a change in one or more joint elements to its
    `remembered' shape.  After the change in shape, the joint is usually
    permitted (but is not required) to return to ambient temperature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 447 for assembly or joining by shrink-fit
    means.

    403,    Joints and Connectors, subclass 273 for shrink-fit connectors.


CLS 285/381.2
TXT Memory metal element:

    Subject matter under subclass 381.1 in which there is at least one joint
    element capable of changing configuration as a result of temperature
    modification is comprised of a metallic alloy which is able to change from
    one configuration to another that is far in excess of mere thermal
    expansion or contraction due to the applied temperature modification.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 402, 563, 675, and Digest 109 for
    materials with mechanical memory.

    604,    Surgery, subclass 281 for shape retaining memory elements.

    606,    Surgery, subclass 78 for shape memory alloys which are
    bio-compatible.


CLS 285/381.3
TXT Having intermediate member:

    Subject matter under subclass 381.2 in which there is at least one
    additional element inserted between a memory metal element and the
    remaining joint structure.

    (1)     Note. The intermediate member normally functions in a manner to
    enhance the strength of the joint.


CLS 285/381.4
TXT Memory plastic element:

    Subject matter under subclass 381.1 having at least one joint element
    formed from one of several materials commonly referred to as a plastic
    which demonstrates the capability to change from one configuration to
    another that is far in excess of mere thermal expansion or contraction due
    to the applied temperature modification.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    423,    for joint elements formed from non-
    metallic material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    86 for methods of shrinking a lamina around a cylindrical object.

    174,    Electricity, Conductors and Insulators, Digest 8 for heat
    shrinkable tubes.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating Processes,
    subclass 230 for methods of shaping by release of elastic memory and
    subclass 342 for treating articles to have a retained memory configuration.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 34.9 and 913
    for memory materials which are responsive to heat or light.


CLS 285/381.5
TXT Having intermediate member

    Subject matter under subclass 381.4 in which there is at least one
    additional element inserted between a memory plastic element and the
    remaining joint structure.

    (1)     Note. The intermediate member normally functions in a manner to
    enhance the strength of the joint.


CLS 285/382
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the joint is obtained by
    deforming the material of one or both members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for devices which deform one member into thread means.

    202+,   for sput and plate portions interlocked by deformation.

    214,    for means expanding a thimble in a pipe-to-plate joint.

    222,    for a pipe-to-plate joint united by an expanded or swaged pipe.

    256+,   for a nonmetal-to-metal joint with an external clamp and involving
    deformation of one of the elements of the joint.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 505+ for the process of joining by
    deforming and see the Search Notes thereunder.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 274+ for joints in general
    formed by deforming members in situ.


CLS 285/382.1
TXT Subject matter under subclass 382 wherein both members forming the joint
    are deformed.


CLS 285/382.2
TXT Subject matter under subclass 382.1 wherein both members are deformed at
    the same time to make a joint.


CLS 285/382.4
TXT Subject matter under subclass 382 wherein one of the members has both its
    inner and outer wall periphery enlarged.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334.5,  for couplings having a conical taper interface wherein one of the
    members has an outwardly or inwardly projecting flare formed on an end
    thereof.


CLS 285/382.5
TXT Subject matter under subclass 382.4 wherein a radially outwardly projecting
    reentrant curve is formed in the wall of one of the members, without
    material change in the wall thickness thereof.


CLS 285/382.7
TXT Subject matter under subclass 382 wherein an element distinct form the
    members of the coupling is deformed to cause deformation of one of the
    members.


CLS 285/383
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising a short intermediate
    coupling piece providing a flow portion and distinct independent socket
    elements at each end.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148+,   for serial diverse joints.

    369+,   for packed sleeve joints.

    374+,   for packed socket joints.

    399+,   for socket joints and see the note thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 300+ for two members joined by a
    distinct coupler.


CLS 285/384
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising means to hold the members
    together including a gland portion threaded into a thimble portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    353,    for a packed screw thimble gland coupling.


CLS 285/385
TXT Subject matter under subclass 384 including wedge means, generally a
    tapered ring, forced between the members being joined.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    389,    for a coupling comprising a screw thimble and wedge.


CLS 285/386
TXT Devices under the class definition including means to hold the members
    together, said means comprising an external sleeve having an internally
    threaded portion on one end to engage threads on one of the members and an
    inwardly extending flange or equivalent at the other end for sliding
    engagement with a flange or equivalent on the second member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    354,    for a packed joint with screw thimble means.

    395,    for a cam thimble type joint.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 149.4 for a valved pipe joint
    of the screw thimble type.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 342+ for a rod joint involving a
    screw thimble.


CLS 285/387
TXT Devices under subclass 386 having means (e.g., cooperating flange segments)
    or structure which permits the removal of the thimble portion over the
    flanged portion of the second member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401+,   for a pipe and socket joint having cooperating flange segments to
    hold the members together.  See the Search Notes thereunder.


CLS 285/388
TXT Devices under subclass 387 in which the flange on the member or on the
    thimble is a separable part.


CLS 285/389
TXT Subject matter under subclass 386 including wedge means, generally ring
    type, forced between the members being joined by the screw thimble.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    339+,   for a coupling comprising wedged packing.

    385,    for wedges in a screw thimble gland joint.


CLS 285/390
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising screw threads at the
    coupling interface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33+,    for a threaded joint with means to provide quick release.

    40,     for a joint with combined thread cutting means.

    148.19+, for differential threads.

    291.1+, for a screw interlock in a molded joint.

    333,    for a threaded conical interface.

    355,    for a packed screw-type joint.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, subclass 99 for analogous threaded connection
    between a chuck and tool.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclass 343 for an analogous connection
    between rods.


CLS 285/391
TXT Devices under subclass 390 in which only circumferentially spaced segments
    of the connecting members are threaded thereby allowing all the threads to
    be engaged simultaneously and tightened by less than a full turn of a
    member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for a quick release coupling having radially moved segmented
    threads (e.g., chuck type).

    396,    for a coupling with bayonet type cams.


CLS 285/392
TXT Subject matter under subclass 390 comprising an intermediate member on each
    pipe end, generally internally and externally screw threaded, with which
    the coupling means, e.g., sleeve, coacts.


CLS 285/393
TXT Subject matter under subclass 390 comprising an externally threaded sleeve
    engaging an internally threaded socket on one member with a relationship
    therebetween that the sleeve is contracted to or a separate grasping member
    is contracted upon tightening the threaded joint to cause the grasping of
    the spigot of the other member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322+,   for a contractible socket and see the Search Notes thereunder.

    353,    for a packed joint with screw thimble-gland.

    356+,   for a packed gland joint.

    384,    for a screw thimble-gland joint, per  se.

     SEARCH CLASS:

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, subclasses 32 and 49 for analogous screw
    threaded sockets.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a seal between two pipes or a
    pipe and a wall that are at most secured together only by friction between
    the seal and the pipe or wall, subclass 622 for a static contact seal
    intended for use on a pipe, conduit, or cable having a threaded, axially
    acting, clamping gland to mount or retain the seal.


CLS 285/394
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising a rotatable element
    having a groove or surface for imparting reciprocatory or oscillatory
    motion to a follower to draw the members together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    358,    for a packed coupling with a tightener comprising cam means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclass 343 for analogous structure in a
    rod joint.


CLS 285/395
TXT Subject matter under subclass 394 comprising an external sleeve having an
    inwardly extending flange or equivalent on one end for sliding engagement
    with a flange or equivalent on one member and an internally extending cam
    means on the other end to engage a follower portion on the other member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359,    for a packed cam thimble joint.

    406,    for a flanged joint with a clamp    including a wedge thimble.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclass 342 for similar structure in a rod
    joint.


CLS 285/396
TXT Subject matter under subclass 394 including a slot or groove providing a
    cam track on one member and a cooperating lug or equivalent on the other
    member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    361,    for packed joints of the bayonet type.


CLS 285/397
TXT Subject matter under the class definition united by a short tubular section
    inside the ends of the coupled members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for insulated sleeve joints.

    300,    for an internal sleeve within a flexible bellows seal of a variable
    length joint.

    370+,   for packed joints including an internal sleeve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 292+ for two members joined by
    an inserted section.


CLS 285/398
TXT Subject matter under subclass 397 also including an external tubular
    section overlapping the ends of the members joined.


CLS 285/399
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising a hollow part or
    cavity involving an internal wall structure of one member which receives a
    male portion (e.g., spigot) of the other member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    374+,   for packed socket-typed couplings and see the Search Notes
    thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 588+ for a head and
    socket separable fastener.

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, appropriate subclasses.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclass 361 for similar structure in a rod
    joint.


CLS 285/400
TXT Devices under subclass 399 in which at least one of the members carries a
    separable ring externally thereof, said ring coacting with means (e.g.,
    bolts), for drawing the members together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    364+,   for a packed clamped flanged joint. See the Search Notes thereunder.


CLS 285/401
TXT Subject matter under subclass 399 wherein one member has a lateral
    projection adapted to engage a projection or recess in the other member
    when rotated to hold the members in coupled relation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73,     for duplicate end couplings having rotary engagement.

    292.1,  for a molded joint with lug and slot interlock.

    307,    for a coupling with an essential catch operated by conduit motion.

    360+,   for similar structure with cam surfaces.

    376+,   for similar structure with packing.

    391+,   for interrupted-thread type couplings.


CLS 285/402
TXT Subject matter under subclass 401 comprising a slot with longitudinal and
    circumferential components for the cooperating lug.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    361,    for packed bayonet slot couplings including cam means.

    396,    for unpacked bayonet slot couplings with cam means.


CLS 285/403
TXT Subject matter under subclass 399 comprising a separable means whereby the
    spigot is held in the socket.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81+,    for means blocking the release of the joint holding means.

    305+,   for an essential catch or latch whereby the members are held
    together.


CLS 285/404
TXT Subject matter under subclass 403 comprising a set-screw or pin.


CLS 285/405
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein at least the free end of
    one of the members has a transverse shoulder, flange or flange portion
    utilized in making the joint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233,    for a beaded spigot in a flexible joint.

    234,    for a flared conduit end as a flange equivalent in a flexible joint.

    339+,   for packed couplings including wedge means which are flange
    equivalents.

    363+,   for packed flanged joints.

    384+,   for a flanged joint with a  screw-thimble-gland fastening means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 335+ for flanged joints in
    general.


CLS 285/406
TXT Devices under subclass 405 comprising bands, straps, clips, etc., which
    grip the flanges externally to hold and draw the pipe ends together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    364+,   for packed flange joints.  See the Search Notes thereunder.


CLS 285/407
TXT Devices under subclass 406 comprising a band having a particular
    cross-section (e.g., V-shaped) which circumferentially grips the flanges to
    draw and hold the pipe ends together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    365+,   for a similar packed joint.

    420,    for the clamp, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 19+ for ring clamps
    wherein the band is recited broadly.  See the Search Notes thereunder.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 280+ for closure fasteners for
    bottles, including a clamp.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 315+ for fastening devices for receptacle
    closures.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclasses 256.6+ for a band clamp and closure
    combination.


CLS 285/408
TXT Devices under subclass 407 which include an additional element between the
    clamping band and the external surfaces of the flanges.


CLS 285/409
TXT Devices under subclass 407 in which the ring is tightened about the flanges
    by a lever means.


CLS 285/410
TXT Devices under subclass 407 in which a bolt or screw is utilized to apply
    tightening force to the clamping band.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    366,    for a packed joint of this type.


CLS 285/411
TXT Devices under subclass 410 in which the clamping ring is made of several
    parts some of which may be pivotally connected.


CLS 285/412
TXT Subject matter under subclass 406 in which the clamping means comprises at
    least one separable plate-like pipe receiving ring coacting with a flange
    and having bolts lying parallel to its axis for producing axial forces to
    draw the flanges together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    368,    for an unpacked bolted flange ring joint.

    400,    for a socket joint with a bolted flange ring clamping means.

    413,    for a clamping ring, per se.


CLS 285/413
TXT Subject matter under subclass 406 comprising an annular plate-like body
    having an aperture and a clamping or jaw portion for transmitting axial
    forces produced in drawing the ends of the members together; such rings,
    per se, have been collected here.


CLS 285/414
TXT Subject matter under subclass 405 wherein the flange is removably attached
    to the end of a member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    388,    for removable thimble combinations including a detachable flange.


CLS 285/415
TXT Subject matter under subclass 414 the flange comprising a split annular
    member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    276,    for a ring detent in a socket type swivel.


CLS 285/416
TXT Devices under subclass 405 wherein a weld is used to attach the flange to
    the pipe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    288.1+, for a welded coupling.

    289.1+, for a soldered joint.


CLS 285/417
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising a short tubular
    section extending between and each end thereof providing an overlapping
    portion with engaging pipe ends.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    369+,   for a packed sleeve joint.  See the Search Notes thereunder.

    383,    for distinct spaced serial joints.


CLS 285/418
TXT Subject matter under subclass 417 comprising a common means in the means
    holding the free ends of the members to be joined in the sleeve ends,
    wherein both ends are released upon removal or release of the common means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    398,    for a packed internal-external sleeve joint.


CLS 285/419
TXT Subject matter under subclass 418 comprising a sleeve split lengthwise.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322+,   for a split socket providing a movable jaw portion with means to
    contract the socket.

    373,    for a packed longitudinally divided sleeve.


CLS 285/420
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising miscellaneous joints
    including clamps not otherwise provided for.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194,    for pipe to plate joints with hole edge clamps.

    236,    for a clamped resilient sleeve type flexible joint between rigid
    members.

    242+,   for an external clamp in a nonmetal to metal coupling.

    322,    for a contractible socket type coupling.

    337,    for joints with external packing and clamping means.

    364+,   for flanged pipes including packing and clamping means.

    373+,   for packed longitudinally split sleeves.

    406+,   for flanged pipes including clamping means.

    407+,   for a clamped flanged joint.

    419,    for longitudinally split sleeves.


CLS 285/421
TXT Devices under subclass 420 wherein the clamp comprises wedge means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255,    for means coupling nonmetal-to-metal members comprising wedge clamp
    means.

    339+,   for a coupling comprising wedged packing.  See the Search Notes
    thereunder.


CLS 285/422
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to the materials of
    which the coupling is made.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for tent-type roof flashing.

    148.12, for serial diverse joints comprising diverse materials.

    238,    for nonmetal to metal.

    329,    for a joint having a particular interface comprising diverse
    materials.

    378,    for a joint having a diverse material, metallic seat for a gasket.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder, Compositions and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 228+ for a composition having a continuous phase of
    free metal made by consolidating metal particles.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet, especially subclasses 416, 418, 432+, 444, 450, and 457+ for a
    nonstructural composite web or sheet including a layer of metal.


CLS 285/423
TXT Subject matter under subclass 422 which includes a synthetic resin or other
    nonmetallic material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238+,   for nonmetal to metal joints.


CLS 285/424
TXT Subject matter under subclass 422 which includes material originally in
    sheet form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 578 for an
    intermediate sheet-metal article or blank which is of nonrectangular shape.


CLS 285/425
TXT Subject matter under the class definition not elsewhere classified.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS

    The following subclasses provide for concepts illogical to the preceding
    schedule but which contain frequently searched subject matter.  As these
    subclasses contain only discretionary cross references they are of limited
    search value such that the searcher should refer to preceding subclasses
    for a complete search.


CLS 285/900
TXT BALANCED PRESSURE:

    Art collection under the class definition drawn to balanced pressure.


CLS 285/901
TXT CAP CLOSURES:

    Art collection under the class definition drawn to cap closures.


CLS 285/902
TXT CANTED RING:

    Art collection under the class definition drawn to a canted ring.


CLS 285/903
TXT CORRUGATED:

    Art collection under the class definition drawn to corrugated structure.


CLS 285/904
TXT CRYOGENIC:

    Art collection under the class definition drawn to cryogenics.


CLS 285/905
TXT DIFFERENT COEFFICIENTS OF EXPANSION:

    Art collection under the class definition drawn to different coefficients
    of expansion.


CLS 285/906
TXT EQUIVALENTS:

    Art collection under the class definition drawn to equivalents concepts.


CLS 285/907
TXT ELECTRICAL FIXTURES:

    Art collection under the class definition drawn to electrical fixtures.


CLS 285/908
TXT EXTRUSION HOLES:

    Art collection under the class definition drawn to extrusion holes.


CLS 285/909
TXT FLUOROCARBONS AND MEMORY PLASTICS:

    Art collection under the class definition drawn to fluorocarbons and memory
    plastics.


CLS 285/910
TXT GASKETS:

    Art collection under the class definition drawn to gaskets.


CLS 285/911
TXT GLASS:

    Art collection under the class definition drawn to glass.


CLS 285/912
TXT GEAR:

    Art collection under the class definition drawn to a gear.


CLS 285/913
TXT INTERDIGITATING:

    Art collection under the class definition drawn to interdigitating.


CLS 285/914
TXT IRREVERSIBLE:

    Art collection under the class definition drawn to irreversible concepts.


CLS 285/915
TXT MASTIC:

    Art collection under the class definition drawn to mastic.


CLS 285/916
TXT MOLECULAR CHANGE:

    Art collection under the class definition drawn to molecular change
    concepts.


CLS 285/917
TXT METALLIC SEALS:

    Art collection under the class definition drawn to metallic seals.


CLS 285/918
TXT O-RING:

    Art collection under the class definition drawn to O-ring.


CLS 285/919
TXT RESINOUS:

    Art collection under the class definition drawn to resinous concepts.


CLS 285/920
TXT REMOTELY CONTROLLED:

    Art collection under the class definition drawn to remotely controlled
    concepts.


CLS 285/921
TXT SNAP-FIT:

    Art collection under the class definition drawn to snap-fit concepts.


CLS 285/922
TXT SAFETY AND QUICK RELEASE FOR DRILL PIPES:

    Art collection under the class definition drawn to safety and quick release
    for drill pipe concepts.


CLS 285/923
TXT SPECIFIC MATERIAL:

    Art collection under the class definition drawn to specific materials.


CLS 285/924
TXT VENTED:

    Art collection under the class definition drawn to vented concepts.


CLS 285/925
TXT SWELLS WHEN WET:

    Art collection under the class definition drawn to a swelling when wet
    concept.

    FOREIGN ART COLLECTIONS

    The definitions for FOR 100-FOR 174 below correspond to the definitions of
    the abolished subclasses under Class 285 from which these collections were
    formed. See the Foreign Art Collection schedule for specific
    correspondences. [Note: The titles and definitions for indented art
    collections include all the details of the one(s) that are hierarchically
    superior.]


CLS 285/FOR100
TXT Foreign art collection  of (1) at least two joints of diverse
    type, or (2) two or more joints with a combination relationship
    therebetween (e.g., plural swivels permitting universal motion), or (3)
    combinations of one or more joints and two or more portions of a material
    confining means (e.g., box) having a combination relationship therebetween,
    or (4) fittings having an opening with a closure therefor or having one or
    more separable parts which permit access to the interior thereof without
    disassembly of the joint.  Mere duplications of the same joint in a single
    line are classified on the joint, per se.


CLS 285/FOR101
TXT Foreign art collection having an opening with a closure or having
    one or more separable parts, which permit access to the interior thereof
    without disassembly of the joint.


CLS 285/FOR102
TXT Foreign art collection comprising a swivel type joint.


CLS 285/FOR103
TXT Foreign art collection wherein the swivel includes a hollow bolt
    extending along the axis of swiveling.


CLS 285/FOR104
TXT Foreign art collection in which the closure comprises a removable
    bight portion of a U-type coupling and mounting means therefor.


CLS 285/FOR105
TXT Foreign art collection wherein the mounting means comprises a
    yoke-type clamp (i.e., a U-shaped member having force transmitting means
    mounted in the legs thereof to force the coupler parts together).


CLS 285/FOR106
TXT Foreign art collection including removable bushings between the
    yoke means and the pipe ends.


CLS 285/FOR107
TXT Foreign art collection comprising an elbow fitting.


CLS 285/FOR108
TXT Foreign art collection comprising means for coupling a pipe or
    cable to a box structure requiring at least two walls of the box.


CLS 285/FOR109
TXT Foreign art collection wherein the coupling means comprises a
    clamping portion which has a flange portion closing that portion of the
    aperture in the box wall not filled by the pipe or cable.


CLS 285/FOR110
TXT Foreign art collection comprising a unitary means for connecting a
    plurality of flow lines to a receptacle (e.g., barrel) including a sleeve
    or thimble lining for the opening within which the pipes make a fluid tight
    joint.


CLS 285/FOR111
TXT Foreign art collection comprising a coupling for two or more lines
    or flow paths which do not unite within the scope of the combination of
    elements claimed (e.g., means connecting plural lines to a milking machine
    receptacle).


CLS 285/FOR112
TXT Foreign art collection wherein at least one of the flow paths is
    divided into a plurality of flow paths or a plurality of flow paths are
    combined into a single flow path or in which a single flow path is divided
    and then recombined, e.g., noncommunicating hot and cold water lines with
    coupling means providing plural hot outlets or plural cold outlets, or both.


CLS 285/FOR113
TXT Concentric:

    Foreign art collection wherein the lines are concentric.


CLS 285/FOR114
TXT Having suspension means (e.g., oil well head type, etc.):

    Foreign art collection wherein a flow line is provided with means to hang
    or support another flow line in a substantially vertical position.


CLS 285/FOR115
TXT Foreign art collection wherein the coupling means provides for
    relative motion (e.g., swiveling, telescoping, etc.) between the coupled
    parts.  Drier drum couplings are here.


CLS 285/FOR116
TXT Foreign art collection wherein the relative motion is obtained at
    least in part by ball and socket means.


CLS 285/FOR117
TXT Foreign art collection wherein the coupling means provides for
    relative motion (e.g., swiveling, telescoping, etc.) between the coupled
    parts.


CLS 285/FOR118
TXT Parallel:

    Foreign art collection wherein the lines have a parallel relationship.


CLS 285/FOR119
TXT Having suspension means (e.g., oil well head type, etc.):

    Foreign art collection wherein the flow lines are provided with means to
    hang or support the lines in a substantially vertical position.


CLS 285/FOR120
TXT Foreign art collection comprising means mounting an inner tube in
    spaced relation to an outer tube with inlet or outlet means claimed for the
    inner tube only.


CLS 285/FOR121
TXT Foreign art collection including a packing about the inner tube
    which is compressed by radially acting means, e.g., set screws.


CLS 285/FOR122
TXT Foreign art collection in which the tubes are in a substantially
    vertical position and comprising means to hang the inner within the outer
    tube, e.g., well caps or headers.


CLS 285/FOR123
TXT Foreign art collection wherein the inner tube is supported on the
    outer tube by means of a radially expansible member, e.g., a split ring.


CLS 285/FOR124
TXT Foreign art collection wherein the hanging means comprises a
    coupling member having an integral support means (e.g., a shoulder) between
    two axially alined inner tube sections.


CLS 285/FOR125
TXT Foreign art collection wherein the inner tube coupling member is
    supported on a member intermediate the inner and outer tubes.


CLS 285/FOR126
TXT Foreign art collection in which a slip or internally serrated
    member grips the inner tube to provide it with a supporting shoulder.


CLS 285/FOR127
TXT Foreign art collection in which there are means for actuating
    slips into and out of engagement with the tube.


CLS 285/FOR128
TXT Foreign art collection wherein the slips and seal around the inner
    tube are one unitary assembly.


CLS 285/FOR129
TXT Foreign art collection in which a packing around the inner tube is
    compressed by the slips supporting the inner tube weight.


CLS 285/FOR130
TXT Foreign art collection wherein a packing about the inner tube is
    seated on the slip members.


CLS 285/FOR131
TXT Foreign art collection wherein a pipe comprising several layers is
    joined to a connector member and at least two of the layers are separately
    connected to or independently gripped by the connector member.


CLS 285/FOR132
TXT Foreign art collection in which a single line is divided into a
    plurality of lines or a plurality of lines are combined into a single line
    or in which a single line is divided and then recombined having means for
    providing couplings for the several lines.


CLS 285/FOR133
TXT Foreign art collection wherein at least one joint provides for
    relative motion between coupled parts.


CLS 285/FOR134
TXT Foreign art collection wherein two lines form Y's and unite at
    right angles to one another.


CLS 285/FOR135
TXT Foreign art collection having one or more openings which function
    to vent gases to or from a system.


CLS 285/FOR136
TXT Foreign art collection including means, generally a particular air
    chamber or arrangement of vent openings, for preventing the "blow-out" of
    trap liquids-seals upstream of the claimed coupling.


CLS 285/FOR137
TXT Foreign art collection comprising a coupling for a line and
    branches in the shape of the letter Y.


CLS 285/FOR138
TXT Foreign art collection requiring at least one of the joints at the
    free end portions of a T-shaped coupling.


CLS 285/FOR139
TXT Foreign art collection comprising a pipe coupling with parallel
    leg portions which are connected by a bight or U-shaped portion.


CLS 285/FOR140
TXT Foreign art collection comprising an intermediate tubular means
    between a pipe or rod and a plate or pipe side.


CLS 285/FOR141
TXT Foreign art collection wherein the pipe-to-rod or pipe joint is
    essential to the existence of the joint with the plate.


CLS 285/FOR142
TXT Foreign art collection wherein the pipe to plate joint is of the
    ball and socket type.


CLS 285/FOR143
TXT Foreign art collection wherein the plate or pipe side is clamped
    between a nut internal thereof and a shoulder or flange on the end of the
    tubular means.


CLS 285/FOR144
TXT Foreign art collection the end of the tubular means comprises
    expanding spigot means which engages the walls of a plate aperture.


CLS 285/FOR145
TXT Foreign art collection having a plural of joints in a single line,
    at least two of which provide for relative motion with respect to the
    coupled elements.


CLS 285/FOR146
TXT Foreign art collection wherein the movable joints are of diverse
    kinds, e.g., telescopic and ball and socket.  Many patents here disclose
    joints in exhaust lines for internal-combustion engines, especially
    aircraft type.


CLS 285/FOR147
TXT Foreign art collection including at least one telescopic joint.


CLS 285/FOR148
TXT Foreign art collection including at least two distinct ball and
    socket joints.


CLS 285/FOR149
TXT Foreign art collection comprising two articulated opposed concave
    spherical sockets coacting with convex ends on an intermediate member
    having the general form of a sphere.


CLS 285/FOR150
TXT Foreign art collection including at least two distinct swivel joints.


CLS 285/FOR151
TXT Foreign art collection comprising a plurality of diverse couplings
    arranged in serial relationship along a single line.


CLS 285/FOR152
TXT Foreign art collection comprising a fitting having expansible ends
    for insertion into and between pipe ends with means intermediate the ends
    of the fitting providing a readily separable coupling.  Means for forming a
    continuous line of pipe for feeding the pipe through apparatus in a
    continuous process (e.g., coating) are here.


CLS 285/FOR153
TXT Foreign art collection including at least two means, each of which
    is capable of making a single joint for effecting the connection and
    perfecting the seal between the free ends of two members, e.g., an
    internally threaded socket having external threads cooperating with a screw
    thimble to press a packing at the lap of the socket and spigot.


CLS 285/FOR154
TXT Foreign art collection wherein one of the means is a molded,
    welded or soldered joint.


CLS 285/FOR155
TXT Foreign art collection comprising means to unite tubes made of
    diverse materials (e.g., copper to aluminum).


CLS 285/FOR156
TXT Foreign art collection wherein the materials comprise nonmetal and metal.


CLS 285/FOR157
TXT Foreign art collection wherein the coupling interface of one of
    the couplings is different from the coupling interface of the other.


CLS 285/FOR158
TXT Foreign art collection wherein the couplings  provide for a change
    in size or a difference in shape of the members to be joined.


CLS 285/FOR159
TXT Foreign art collection wherein the coupling provides for a change
    in size.


CLS 285/FOR160
TXT Foreign art collection wherein the coupling provides for an
    off-center relationship which may be adjustable with respect to the joined
    members.


CLS 285/FOR161
TXT Foreign art collection wherein a plastic or melted material is
    used in the joint or wherein the ends of the members are united by fusion
    or by welding pressure.


CLS 285/FOR162
TXT Foreign art collection including means to inhibit or repeal the
    growth of roots between the members.


CLS 285/FOR163
TXT Foreign art collection wherein the pipes are united by a weld.


CLS 285/FOR164
TXT Foreign art collection wherein the members are bonded by soldering.


CLS 285/FOR165
TXT Foreign art collection in which at least the ends of the members
    to be joined are of composite material, such as cement, asphalt, concrete,
    or glass combined with other materials reinforcement.


CLS 285/FOR166
TXT Foreign art collection  in which the ends of the members are
    additionally held together by means of threads.


CLS 285/FOR167
TXT Foreign art collection in which the members are also connected by
    a lug and slot means, e.g., a bayonet joint.


CLS 285/FOR168
TXT Foreign art collection wherein a member is molded to the end of a pipe.


CLS 285/FOR169
TXT Foreign art collection which include a short sleeve or tube.


CLS 285/FOR170
TXT Foreign art collection in which the sleeve is a wrapping or taping material.


CLS 285/FOR171
TXT Foreign art collection in which the sleeve has an aperture, or
    spruce, for pouring the molding material.


CLS 285/FOR172
TXT  Foreign art collection in which filler material in addition to
    the molding or caulking material is utilized to save on the amount of
    molding material used, etc.


CLS 285/FOR173
TXT Foreign art collection in which filler is in the form of rings
    having wedging surfaces.


CLS 285/FOR174
TXT  Foreign art collection having an aperture or sprue for pouring
    the molding material into the joint.


CLS 289/
TTL KNOTS AND KNOT TYING

CLS 289/
TXT This class includes a method or an apparatus for intertwining one or more
    portions of a cord, strand or strip, while simultaneously maintaining the
    lay of the constituents, to form a knot, and the product of such method or
    apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  Tools of the nature of pliers, tweezers, crochet-hooks,
    etc., capable of other uses, but which may be employed to form knots if
    desired, are otherwise classified.  Pliers are found in Class 81, Tools,
    subclasses 300+; tweezers in Class 294, Handling:  Hand and Hoist-line
    Implements, subclass 99.2; crochet-hooks in Class 66, Textiles: Knitting,
    subclass 118.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclass 211 for knotters in combination
    with warp preparing apparatus.

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 67+, 131+ and 433+.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 22+ for
    means for uniting portions of rope or cable where the unlaying of the
    strands is involved.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclass 118 for crocket-hooks, and see (1)
    Note, supra.

    81,     Tools,  subclassess 300+ for pliers, and see (1) Note, supra.

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, subclass 12 for
    processes of and subclass 53 for apparatus for making knotted mesh fabrics.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 33+ for binder applying apparatus, not
    otherwise provided for, which include means for joining spaced portions of
    a material encircling tensioned binder, some of said means involving
    twisting of the spaced portions and subclasses 2+ for corresponding methods.

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 22 and 156.

    140,    Wireworking, subclasses 3+ and 111+ for means peculiarly adapted
    for uniting portions of wire or the like wherein the portions are held
    together only by reason of the rigidity of the material.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 35.6+ for means for
    uniting a reserve thread with the last end of the bobbin thread of a
    winding machine.

    294     Handling:  Hand and Hoist-line Implements, subclass 99.2 for
    tweezers, and see (1) Note, supra.

    493     Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 379+.


CLS 289/1.2
TXT An interlacement of portions of one or more elongated flexible elements
    (e.g., strand, rope) forming a tie or fastening and including any bend or
    hitch.


CLS 289/1.5
TXT Methods under the class definition.


CLS 289/2
TXT Devices for forming a loop through which a portion of the cord is passed
    and the loop tightened thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for a device adapted to assist the hand or operated by hand to form
    a knot.


CLS 289/3
TXT Whereby a knot is tied comprising two loops, the terminals of one extending
    through the bight of the other on the same side and one terminal of the
    second loop extending through the bight of the first loop, the other
    terminal of the second loop extending between the first terminal of the
    second loop and the terminals of the first loop.


CLS 289/4
TXT Whereby a knot is tied comprising two loops, with the terminals of each
    extending through the same side of the bight portion of the other.


CLS 289/5
TXT Having a bill comprising two members adapted to receive and hold a cord
    between them, said members extending laterally from a rotating shank.


CLS 289/6
TXT The bill is mounted on a frame, which is moved to-and-fro while the knot is
    being tied.


CLS 289/7
TXT One member of the bill moving rectilinearly toward or away from the other
    to grasp or release the cord.


CLS 289/8
TXT The bill member nearer the driving means being pivoted to swing toward the
    same.


CLS 289/9
TXT The knotter shank driven directly from a rotating shaft disposed at an
    angle thereto.


CLS 289/10
TXT Having a flat disk with notches in its periphery for holding the cord ends.


CLS 289/11
TXT Limited to the structure of a pair of cooperating members projecting from a
    shank for forming the loop and pulling a portion of cord therethrough.
    Does not include gearing for operating the members. May include cam or
    spring for opening or closing the jaw.


CLS 289/12
TXT Having a sleeve, within which is a spindle, the spindle and sleeve being
    relatively movable to form a loop, and a twine-engaging member on the end
    of the spindle to pull a portion of the cord through the loop. Sometimes
    called "cylinder-knotter".


CLS 289/13
TXT Improvement limited to means for holding the ends of the cord while the
    knot is being tied.  Includes cord-cutter when the same is carried on the
    cord-holder, the rest of the knotter being old.


CLS 289/14
TXT Comprising a flat disk with peripheral notches to hold the cord ends.


CLS 289/15
TXT Limited to means for guiding the cord in proper relation to the knot-tying
    member.


CLS 289/16
TXT Limited to means for presenting the cord to the cord-holder and attachments
    therefor. Includes knife, guard, or compressor-arm if the same is carried
    by the needle.


CLS 289/16.5
TXT MACRAME:

    Method or apparatus under the class definition for effecting or
    facilitating the knotting of cords or similar strand materials into a
    coarse lace or a decorative fringe.


CLS 289/17
TXT Means peculiarly adapted to assist the hand or operated by hand to form a
    knot.

    (1)     Note.  For implement such as marlin spikes employed in splicing
    operations, see Class 57, Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining,
    subclass 23.


CLS 289/18.1
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Tying devices which do not fall within the definition of any of the more
    specific subclasses in this class (289).


CLS 290/
TTL PRIME-MOVER DYNAMO PLANTS

CLS 290/
TXT

            This class includes patents for the production and transmission of
    electric power and does not include any specific use to which the power is
    put.  (Note.  The mere reference to or the inclusion in a claim of an
    energy-consuming device, broadly stated--as, for example, a "lamp",
    "heater", or "tool"--is not sufficient to exclude the patent from this
    class).  It includes the following groups when the invention includes some
    motor other than a dynamo electric machine in combination with a dynamo
    electric machine:

    (1)     Wherein a proximate function of the entire combination is the
    generation of electricity by a dynamo-electric machine or such generation
    combined with the transmission, storage, or control of the current
    generated.  There may be an additional function of production,
    transmission, storage, or control of some power other than electrical.

    (2)     Wherein a proximate function of the entire combination is that of
    an electric motor. There may be an additional function of production,
    transmission, storage, or control of some power other than electrical.

    (3)     Wherein the direction in which the energy flows (whether from the
    dynamo electric machine to the motor or from the motor to the
    dynamo-electric machine) is not essential to the invention.  These are
    mostly structural combinations.  Includes the combination of an
    internal-combustion engine and magneto unless the ignition system is
    claimed.  A magneto in combination with a timing means is regarded as a
    subcombination of an internal-combustion engine.

    (4)     Wherein the operation involves an interchange of energy between the
    motor and the dynamo-electric machine and the dynamo electric machine is
    not subsidiary to the motor, but may as well be a source of external energy
    as the motor.  A magneto connected with an ignition system of an
    internal-combustion engine is considered subsidiary to the
    internal-combustion engine.

    (5)     Dynamo electric-machine starters for engines, the dynamo electric
    machine being mechanically connected to the engine to drive the same.
    Claims including an engine and starter, if the latter is shown as a dynamo
    electric machine starter, are included.  Dynamo electric machines disclosed
    as starters for engines are included, even through the engine is not
    claimed, provided the elements claimed require for their operation a
    reversal of energy flow to and from the engine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, for the combinations of this class
    where the starter is merely a cranking means adjunctive to means modifying
    the operation of an internal-combustion engine, and no other structure of
    the starter of its relation to the engine is claimed than would be set
    forth by the mere inclusion of the electric motor as an element of the
    combination.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, and 192, Clutches and Power-Stop
    Control, for the combinations of this class where the starter is merely a
    cranking means for the engine and the invention resides in the gearing or
    clutch connecting the starter to the engine, respectively.

    (6)     Power production and transmission systems wherein the dynamo
    electric machine above referred to charges a storage battery.

    (1)     Note.  Pumps operated by motors, which motors are controlled by
    fluid-pressure or other fluid condition produced by the pump, are excluded.

    (2)     Note.  All patents in this class disclosing dynamo electric
    machines having a "rotary field and armature", special
    internal-combustion-engine "ignition", prime-mover "starting-motors", or
    "engine-control" features may be found by searching the subclasses having
    these terms in their titles.

    (3)     Note.  All patents disclosing batteries may be found by searching
    subclasses 16, 41 and 50, and the "starting-motor" subclasses.

    (4)     A compilation of all types of motors will be found in the Notes to
    the class definition of Class 60.


CLS 290/1
TXT Inventions within the class definition not otherwise classified.


CLS 290/2
TXT Prime-mover dynamo plants having as a function the production of heat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    237,    Heating Systems, subclass 12.3 for heat and power plants.


CLS 290/3
TXT Prime-mover dynamo plants peculiarly adapted to use on trains of vehicles.
    The particular construction of the vehicle is not included.


CLS 290/4
TXT Prime-mover dynamo plants involving two or more motors other than
    dynamo-electric machines.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.


CLS 290/5
TXT Prime-mover dynamo plants including an alternating-current dynamo electric
    machine having a field and armature, both of which are rotatable.


CLS 290/6
TXT Prime-mover dynamo plants having a dynamo-electric machine which comprises
    two or more armatures threaded by a single magnetic flux.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for plants of this character comprising dynamo electric machines
    having fields and armatures both of which rotate.


CLS 290/7
TXT Prime-mover dynamo plants including control of, by or through an electric
    circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      4 and 5.


CLS 290/8
TXT Prime-mover dynamo plants comprising a dynamo in a field-excitation circuit
    of which is another dynamo for furnishing or controlling current in the
    field-excitation circuit.

    Electric control, Traction. Electric-control prime-mover dynamo plants
    wherein a function of the combination is to move a load.  The load may be
    moved by the prime mover or by a dynamo-electric machine operating as a
    motor.  The load moved is generally that moved by the traction-wheels of a
    motor-vehicle.


CLS 290/9
TXT Electric-control traction prime-mover dynamo plants having as a function
    thereof the movement of a load by a dynamo electric machine operating as a
    motor.  The load moved is generally that moved by the traction-wheels of a
    motor-vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 140+ for generator
    fed motor systems having generator control.


CLS 290/10
TXT Electric-control prime-mover dynamo plants having a dynamo electric machine
    which acts as a traction-motor and in addition a dynamo electric machine
    which acts as a motor for starting the prime mover and as a generator.


CLS 290/11
TXT Electric-control prime-mover dynamo plants having in addition to a dynamo
    electric machine which acts as a traction-motor another dynamo-electric
    machine which acts as a motor for starting the prime mover and as a
    generator and a third dynamo electric machine which acts as a generator.


CLS 290/12
TXT Electric-control traction-motor prime-mover dynamo plants having in
    addition to the traction-motor a starting and generating dynamo and wherein
    one or more of the dynamo electric machines have both field and armature
    rotatable.


CLS 290/13
TXT Electric-control prime-mover dynamo plants including an electric
    traction-motor, a starting and generating dynamo, and an
    internal-combustion engine which is provided with special igniting means.


CLS 290/14
TXT Electric-control prime-mover dynamo plants including an electric
    traction-motor and a dynamo electric machine which operated as a generator.


CLS 290/15
TXT Electric-control prime-mover dynamo plants including a dynamo electric
    machine which acts as a traction-motor and a dynamo electric machine which
    acts as a generator, one or both of said dynamo electric machines having
    both field and armature rotatable.


CLS 290/16
TXT Electric-control prime-mover dynamo plants including a dynamo electric
    machine which acts as a traction-motor, a dynamo electric machine which
    acts as a generator, and a battery.


CLS 290/17
TXT Electric-control prime-mover dynamo plants including a dynamo electric
    machine which acts as a traction-motor, a dynamo electric machine which
    acts as a generator, and a prime mover provided with controlling means
    therefor.


CLS 290/18
TXT Electric-control prime-mover dynamo plants including a dynamo electric
    machine which acts as a traction-motor and also as a motor for starting the
    prime mover.


CLS 290/19
TXT Electric-control prime-mover dynamo plants including a dynamo electric
    machine which acts as a traction-motor, as a motor for starting the prime
    mover, and as an electric generator.


CLS 290/20
TXT Electric-control prime-mover dynamo plants including a dynamo electric
    machine which acts as a traction-motor, as a motor for starting the prime
    mover, and as an electric generator, the field and armature of said machine
    being both rotatable.


CLS 290/21
TXT Electric-control prime-mover dynamo plants including a dynamo electric
    machine which acts as a traction-motor and as a motor for starting the
    prime mover, the prime mover being provided with means for controlling the
    same.


CLS 290/22
TXT Electric-control traction prime-mover dynamo plants including a dynamo
    electric machine which acts as a motor for starting the prime mover and as
    a generator.


CLS 290/23
TXT Electric-control traction prime-mover dynamo plants including a dynamo
    electric machine which acts as a motor for starting the prime mover and as
    an electric generator and having a field and armature, both of which rotate.


CLS 290/24
TXT Electric-control traction prime-mover dynamo plants including a dynamo
    electric machine which acts as a motor for starting the prime mover and as
    a generator and has a field and armature, both of which rotate, and a prime
    mover provided with means for controlling the same.


CLS 290/25
TXT Electric-control traction prime-mover dynamo plants including a dynamo
    electric machine which acts as a motor to start the prime mover and as a
    generator and a prime mover which is provided with means for controlling
    the same.


CLS 290/26
TXT Electric-control traction prime-mover dynamo plants including a dynamo
    electric machine which acts as a motor for starting the prime mover and as
    a generator and an internal-combustion engine which is provided with
    special igniting means.


CLS 290/27
TXT Electric-control traction prime-mover dynamo plants including a dynamo
    electric machine which acts as a motor for starting the prime mover and in
    addition a dynamo electric machine which acts as a generator.


CLS 290/28
TXT Electric-control traction prime-mover dynamo plants including a dynamo
    electric machine which acts as a motor for starting the prime mover.


CLS 290/29
TXT Electric-control traction prime-mover dynamo plants which include a dynamo
    electric machine having a field and armature, both of which rotate.


CLS 290/30
TXT Prime-mover dynamo plants including a prime mover which operates a
    generator to supply current to a translating circuit and provided with
    means for automatically starting the prime mover when the translating
    circuit is closed or in response to predetermined electrical conditions.


CLS 290/31
TXT Electric-control prime-mover dynamo plants including a dynamo electric
    machine which acts as a motor for starting the prime mover and as a
    generator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30.


CLS 290/32
TXT Electric-control prime-mover dynamo plants including a dynamo electric
    machine which acts as a motor for starting the prime mover and as a
    generator and in addition a dynamo electric machine which acts as a
    generator.


CLS 290/33
TXT Electric-control prime-mover dynamo plants including a dynamo electric
    machine which acts as a motor for starting the prime mover and as a
    generator, in addition a dynamo electric machine which acts as a generator
    and an internal combustion engine which is provided with special igniting
    means.  The last-mentioned generator in general furnishes current for the
    ignition.


CLS 290/34
TXT Electric-control prime-mover dynamo plants including a dynamo electric
    machine which acts as a motor for starting the prime mover and as a
    generator, the prime mover having means for controlling the same.


CLS 290/35
TXT Electric-control prime-mover dynamo plants including a dynamo electric
    machine which acts as a motor for starting the prime mover and as a
    generator, together with an internal-combustion engine which is provided
    with special igniting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30.


CLS 290/36
TXT Electric-control prime-mover dynamo plants including a dynamo electric
    machine which acts as a motor for starting the prime mover and in addition
    a dynamo electric machine which acts as a generator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30.


CLS 290/37
TXT Electric-control prime-mover dynamo plants including a dynamo electric
    machine which acts as a motor for starting the prime mover, an additional
    dynamo electric machine which acts as a generator, and an
    internal-combustion engine which is provided with special igniting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30.


CLS 290/38
TXT Electric-control prime-mover dynamo plants including a dynamo electric
    machine which acts as a motor for starting the prime mover.


CLS 290/39
TXT Electric-control prime-mover dynamo plants including a dynamo electric
    machine having a field and armature, both of which rotate.


CLS 290/40
TXT Electric-control prime-mover dynamo plants wherein the prime mover is
    provided with means for controlling the same.  These are generally
    prime-mover-operated generators, the prime mover being automatically
    controlled in response to line-circuit conditions.

    (1)     Note.  The combination of an internal combustion engine idle speed
    control and an electric generator in which is included (a) any detail of
    the generator, (b) any relationship between a generator part and an
    internal combustion engine, or (c) any control of the internal combustion
    engine in response to the electricity produced by the generator is found
    here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 339.16+ for an internal
    combustion engine idle speed control responsive to an external load
    condition.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 236+ for
    miscellaneous electrical speed responsive systems.


CLS 290/41
TXT Electric-control prime-mover dynamo plants including an internal-combustion
    engine which is provided with special igniting means.


CLS 290/42
TXT Electric-control prime-mover dynamo plants including tide or wave motors.


CLS 290/43
TXT Electric-control prime-mover dynamo plants including a fluid-current motor.


CLS 290/44
TXT Electric-control prime-mover dynamo plants including a wind-motor.


CLS 290/45
TXT Prime-mover dynamo plants wherein a function of the combination is to move
    a load.  The load may be moved by the prime mover or by a dynamo electric
    machine operating as a motor.  The load moved is generally that moved by
    the traction-wheels of a motor-vehicle.


CLS 290/46
TXT Prime-mover dynamo plants including a dynamo electric machine which acts as
    a motor for starting the prime mover and as a generator.


CLS 290/47
TXT Prime-mover dynamo plants including a dynamo-electric machine which acts as
    a motor for starting the prime mover and in addition a dynamo electric
    machine which acts as a generator.


CLS 290/48
TXT Prime-mover dynamo plants including a dynamo electric machine which acts as
    a motor to start the prime mover.


CLS 290/49
TXT Prime-mover dynamo plants including a dynamo electric machine having a
    field and armature, both of which rotate.


CLS 290/50
TXT Prime-mover dynamo plants including electric batteries.

    (1)     Note.  For the remaining patents in this class which disclose
    batteries search subclasses 16 and 30 and the subclasses whose titles
    disclose that they contain starting-motors.


CLS 290/51
TXT Prime-mover dynamo plants including a prime mover which has means for
    controlling the same.


CLS 290/52
TXT Prime-mover dynamo plants including a dynamo electric machine which
    operates as a generator and a turbine adapted to drive the same
    mechanically connected thereto.


CLS 290/53
TXT Prime-mover dynamo plants including tide or wave motors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 495+ for motors having a buoyant working
    member motivated by the vertical rise and fall of the surface of a body of
    fluid.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 76+ for a method or
    apparatus for extracting power from waves or tides involving significant
    hydraulic works and only nominal recitation of the motor or dynamoelectric
    machine.


CLS 290/54
TXT Prime-mover dynamo plants including a fluid current motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 75+ for a method or
    apparatus for extracting power from a moving fluid involving significant
    hydraulic work structure and only nominal recitation of the fluid motor or
    dynamoelectric machine.


CLS 290/55
TXT Prime-mover dynamo plants including wind- motors.


CLS 291/
TTL TRACK SANDERS

CLS 291/
TXT Means for applying sand or like material to vehicle-wheel treads or to
    vehicle-tracks, such as automobile-roads or railway-rails, or to both the
    wheel-treads and tracks, for the purpose of increasing the tractive effect
    between such wheels and roads or rails.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for coating apparatus,
    per se, and especially subclasses 308+ for apparatus for projecting
    particulate material on work pieces.

    222,    Dispensing, for dispensing apparatus in general and see the classes
    noted in sections 12, 16, and 17 of the class definition.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 650+ for
    vehicles the sole purpose of which is to distribute sand on highways for
    use by other vehicles, and comprising a container for nonfluid material
    (sand) and means to scatter or strew the material over an extended area.


CLS 291/1
TXT Track-sanders not specifically provided for below.


CLS 291/2
TXT The sand-dispensing device is automatically operated by the slipping or
    skidding of a traction-wheel or the relative slipping of two or more
    traction-wheels.


CLS 291/3
TXT Devices in which the sand is displaced and propelled or after gravity
    release is propelled through the delivery-pipe by either air, steam, water,
    or engine exhaust-gases.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 630+ for dispensers involving fluid flow
    discharge.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 75+ for a sandblast apparatus, generally.


CLS 291/4
TXT The cinders or smoke and cinders from a steam-locomotive smoke-stack are
    utilized instead of sand.


CLS 291/5
TXT Reversing means for fluid-pressure sand-delivery apparatus to effect
    track-sanding in front of or at the rear of the traction-wheels at will.


CLS 291/6
TXT The sand-blast trap has a movable valve for determining which delivery-pipe
    is to be used and the other cut out.


CLS 291/7
TXT Supplemental attachments for fluid sand-delivery apparatus, so that in case
    of absence of or failure of fluid-pressure or at will a gravity sand-feed
    may be thrown into operation.


CLS 291/8
TXT The gravity-feed pipe has a cut-off valve and the sand-blast feed is
    through a by-pass around the gravity cut-off valve.


CLS 291/9
TXT The sand-trap is located either in the side walls or below the floor of the
    sand-dome and is swung in a vertical plane to clear the opening to the
    discharge-pipe for gravity feed.


CLS 291/10
TXT The sand-trap, usually on the floor of the sand-dome, is movably mounted
    and is swung horizontally to uncover the sand-outlet for gravity operation.


CLS 291/11.1
TXT Including sand trap:

    Service under subclass 3 comprising a retaining obstruction or horizontal
    passage to which the sand is delivered for engagement thereat by the air,
    steam, water, engine exhaust gas or other fluid. The fluid moves the sand
    over the obstruction or along the passage into the delivery pipe.


CLS 291/11.2
TXT Multiple fluid inlets for delivery pipe:

    Device under subclass 11.1 having two openings or nozzles though which the
    fluid flows to engage and move the sand to or through the delivery pipe.

    (1)     Note.  A service must have two openings or nozzles associated with
    a single, common delivery pipe for inclusion in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  In a device of this subclass, the fluid can flow from the
    two openings or nozzles concurrently or at different times.  Devices having
    a particular fluid delivery nozzle in combination with a cleanout blast
    nozzle or stirring nozzle are included in this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  A device in which fluid flowing from one opening or nozzle
    induces additional flow from a second opening or nozzle is included in this
    subclass.


CLS 291/11.3
TXT Specified means to alter inlet fluid flow:

    Device under subclass 11.1 wherein significance is attributed to means to
    change the character of a flowing fluid prior to its engagement with the
    sand.

    (1)     Note.  The character of a flowing fluid may be changed by altering
    the flow rate, the location of the flow, etc.

    (2)     Note.  A device comprising a mere valve or control means located
    upstream of the trap which changes the character of the fluid flow is not
    included in this subclass unless particular structure of the valve or
    control means is provided or unless particular valve or control means
    operation or structure is recited.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11.2,   for fluid delivery devices having a sand-trap and multiple fluid
    inlets for propelling sand to or though a delivery pipe, particularly those
    devices wherein fluid flow from the two inlets is adjusted interdependently.


CLS 291/12
TXT Movable mechanical cleaning elements, as wires or pins, for removing sand
    from the blast-nozzles in sand-traps.


CLS 291/13
TXT Special forms of ports in blast-nozzles to impart a special form to the
    air-jet or to prevent sand from backing up into the blast-nozzle and
    screens or strainers for preventing the sand from backing up through the
    blast-nozzles.


CLS 291/14
TXT The movement of the brake or engineer's valve handle at a determined point
    in its movement engages an abutment, which operates the control-valve of
    fluid sand-delivery apparatus or the sand-feeding device in a gravity sand
    apparatus or opens a port to control the sand-feeding device.


CLS 291/15
TXT The movement of some valve other than the engineer's brake-valve or of some
    movable member of a brake system operates the control-valve of a
    fluid-operated sanding device or a sand-feeding device in a gravity sanding
    apparatus.


CLS 291/16
TXT Hand-operated valves for control of fluid-pressure sanders.


CLS 291/17
TXT Sound-producing devices, air-blowers, or indicators to give warning as to
    the operation of the sand-delivery mechanism.


CLS 291/18
TXT An air or steam jet discharges into the top of the hopper for effecting
    pressure on the mass of sand or discharges into the mass of sand for the
    purposes of heating, drying, or breaking up caked sand.  This subclass does
    not include devices for blowing sand out of the hopper.


CLS 291/19
TXT Heating devices for heating or drying the sand, the compressed air, or the
    sand-delivery apparatus, as by hot air, gas-engine exhaust, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 113, 131, and 146.1+ for other dispensers
    combined with heaters.


CLS 291/20
TXT Electric-resistance heaters for sand, air, sand-hoppers, and delivery-pipes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 333 for electric motor operated impelling
    devices for dispensers.


CLS 291/21
TXT Steam chambers and pipes for heating sand and sand-delivery pipes by
    radiation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 334 for fluid motor operated impellers for
    dispensers.


CLS 291/22
TXT The sand-dispensing mechanism is driven by power, as by connection with a
    car wheel or axle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 611.1+ for ambulant dispensers adapted to
    travel on rails or tracks, and subclasses 613+ for ground wheel operated
    dispensers.


CLS 291/23
TXT The sand is dispensed by the operation of an electric motor or solenoid.


CLS 291/24
TXT The sand-dispensing mechanism is operated by a rotary or reciprocating
    pneumatic motor.


CLS 291/25
TXT Devices for releasing the sand so that it may fall by gravity to the wheel
    or track. The term "sand-feeders" is also used to include devices for
    stirring up sand in the hoppers preliminary to feeding it out.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for dispensers in general.


CLS 291/26
TXT Sand-feeding apparatus operable at will for delivering sand either in front
    of or behind the vehicle traction-wheels.


CLS 291/27
TXT The sand is fed to the delivery-pipe by a moving-chain feed.


CLS 291/28
TXT The sand releasing and stirring members have an angular to-and-fro movement
    about axes at right angles to the plane of rotation.  The releasing members
    are hinged doors, cylindrical segments, recessed or smooth, or of the
    perforated-plug-valve type.


CLS 291/29
TXT The pivoted cups cap the hopper discharge-
    openings.


CLS 291/30
TXT The entire sand-hopper is tilted to cause a discharge of the sand.


CLS 291/31
TXT The pipes for delivering sand to the track are hinged adjacent the hoppers,
    are flexible, or are bodily movable, so that when the pipes are moved or
    bent the sand-discharge is cut off.


CLS 291/32
TXT Rotary plates and cylindrical members adapted to rotate either continuously
    in the same direction or through a complete revoluton.  This subclass also
    includes centrifugal sowers.


CLS 291/33
TXT Sand mixers or discharge devices of helical or screw form.


CLS 291/34
TXT Sand-discharging and mixing plates or members having rectilinear sliding
    movement in the sides or bottoms of the sand-hoppers.


CLS 291/35
TXT Plates with pivot-axes at right angles to the plates, so that the plane of
    the plate and its plane of movement are the same.


CLS 291/36
TXT The plungers pass upwardly into the interior of the sand-hoppers and so are
    usually combined mixers and discharge-valves.


CLS 291/37
TXT Same as 36 with addition of means for giving the plunger a turning movement
    as it moves up and down in the hopper.


CLS 291/38
TXT Details of sand-hoppers not otherwise classified below.


CLS 291/39
TXT Sand-reservoirs combined with the wheel-guards of automobiles.


CLS 291/40
TXT Dome-shaped sand -reservoirs located on top of steam-locomotive boilers.


CLS 291/41
TXT Details of sand-delivery spouts and pipes not otherwise classified below.


CLS 291/42
TXT Movable devices inside the sand-pipes for cleaning them.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 148+ for other dispensers combined with a
    cleaner.


CLS 291/43
TXT A current of air or steam is blown through the delivery-pipe.  In case of a
    delivery-pipe in fluid sanding system the cleaning-current is additional to
    the sand, air, or steam blast for moving the sand.


CLS 291/44
TXT Flexible and articulated delivery-pipes designed to accommodate relative
    movement between traction-wheel frames and other parts of the vehicle due
    to relative vertical movements of such parts or to relative angular
    movement when rounding curves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 527+ for other flexible dispenser outlet
    pipes or nozzles.


CLS 291/45
TXT A plurality of sections of sand-delivery pipes having sliding connection
    with each other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 523 for other telescopic delivery pipes or
    nozzles.


CLS 291/46
TXT Details or nozzles, such as sleeves, inserts, and tip forms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 566+ for other dispenser nozzles.


CLS 291/47
TXT This includes nozzle-tips pivoted to the pipe adjacent the wheel or track.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 526+ for other movable dispenser nozzles and
    see the notes for other subclasses having such subject matter, subclasses
    533+ having swingable nozzles.


CLS 291/48
TXT Devices for preventing the passage of pebbles or coarse foreign matter to
    the sand-delivery devices.


CLS 292/
TTL CLOSURE FASTENERS

CLS 292/
TXT This class includes all bolt elements and latching devices, not combined
    with lock structure, for securing in closed or adjusted position any
    closure element, such as a door, window, gate, trunk-lid, box-cover,
    bag-frame, or the like.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclasses 276+ for closure-fasteners when combined in or with
    closure-operators, and this class (292) for devices for starting a closure
    open, or drawing it from a substantially closed to a fully closed position,
    wherein such operation is accomplished by cooperating surfaces on the latch
    bolts and keepers which function during movement of the bolts into or out
    of latching position relative to the keepers.

    70,     Locks, for key or combination locking devices.

    99,     Foods and Beverages: Apparatus, subclasses 349+ for fasteners
    combined with food compacting followers and subclass 402 for fasteners
    associated with hinged bread toaster grids.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclasses 62+ for
    devices for safes and vaults commonly known as pressure mechanisms, the
    function of which is to cam the door tight in its jamb, and which usually
    serve to crack the door to an ajar position, and subclass 63.5 for devices
    for receptacles which render the closure fastener thereof ineffective when
    the receptacle is in a condition of abnormal use.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 315+ for receptacle closure fasteners.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for article dispensing
    devices not otherwise provided for, having means to retain mechanical
    article releasing closures or article ejecting discharge assistants in
    article dispensing or nonarticle dispensing position, and see particularly
    subclasses 151+ and 154 for article dispensers having means for blocking or
    disabling ejector or releaser means and lock, latch or seal structures for
    supply containers and/or their supports, respectively.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses, for dispensing devices having
    means to latch or secure closures, valves and the movable parts of
    discharge assistants in a desired position, especially subclass 44 for a
    combined indicator and detent, and subclasses 153.05+ for fastening seals
    for dispensing devices.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven,  Headed,  Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, for permanent securing devices, such as bolts,
    nuts, screws, rivets, and the like.


CLS 292/1
TXT Closure-fastening devices under the class definition not otherwise
    classified.


CLS 292/1.5
TXT ADJUSTABLE BACKSET:
    Device under the class definition having means for varying the distance
    from the faceplate at the edge of the closure to the center of the latch
    retracting means, (e.g., handle).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    341.18, for adjustable keepers.

    Dig. 60,        for devices with provisions to adjust the bolt-throw.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclass 461, for adjustment provisions for key or
    combination locking devices.


CLS 292/2
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising bolt elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, appropriate subclasses for bolt structures which are
    controlled by key or combination devices.


CLS 292/3
TXT A plurality of bolt elements under subclass 2 which are not mere duplicates
    and independent in operation.


CLS 292/4
TXT Devices under subclass 3 at least one of which has a sliding and a rotary
    motion on a common axis to latching position.


CLS 292/5
TXT Devices under subclass 3 one or more of which slides to latching position
    and one or more swings to latching position.  The elements may be actuated
    by the same or by independent operating means.


CLS 292/6
TXT Devices under subclass 5 at least one of which has simultaneous sliding and
    swinging movement to latching position.


CLS 292/7
TXT Devices under subclass 6 which are actuated by lever-operating means.


CLS 292/8
TXT Devices under subclass 3 one or more of which has sliding movement and one
    or more has hooked engaging ends.


CLS 292/9
TXT Devices under subclass 3 at least one being a sliding bolt and one a roller.


CLS 292/10
TXT Devices under subclass 3 one or more of which has sliding movement and one
    or more is mounted on spring-arms.


CLS 292/11
TXT Devices under subclass 3 one or more of which has swinging movement and one
    or more is provided with hooked engaging ends.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for similar multiple head strucutres.


CLS 292/12
TXT Devices under subclass 3, one being a swinging bolt and one a roller.


CLS 292/13
TXT Devices under subclass 3 one or more of which has swinging movement and one
    or more is mounted on spring-arms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70+,    for other double acting bolts.


CLS 292/14
TXT Devices under subclass 3 which are double-acting and are adapted to engage
    the keeper elements and to be disengaged therefrom upon the movement of the
    closure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 414+ for a closure
    bearing with distinct biasing means which functions as a double acting
    fastener, and subclasses 428+ for a resilient closure bearing which
    functions as a double acting fastener.


CLS 292/15
TXT Devices under subclass 14 of the roller-type designed to resiliently engage
    the keeper.


CLS 292/16
TXT Devices under subclass 14 of the sliding type designed to resiliently
    engage the keeper.


CLS 292/17
TXT Devices under subclass 14 of the spring-arm type.


CLS 292/18
TXT Devices under subclass 14 of the swinging type.


CLS 292/19
TXT Devices under subclass 3 of the spring-arm type.


CLS 292/20
TXT Devices under subclass 19 at least one of which is bendable and has a
    sliding or swinging motion.


CLS 292/21
TXT Devices under subclass 3 operated by various forms of emergency or panic
    operating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92+,    for this type of operator of the single bolt type.


CLS 292/22
TXT Devices under subclass 3 of the gear type ordinarily provided with one or
    more sliding or swinging catches.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39      and 51, for gear type operating means for multiple bolts.


CLS 292/23
TXT Devices under subclass 3 of the roller type.


CLS 292/24
TXT Devices under subclass 3 having hooked-ends.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194+,   for hooked-end bolts where the pressure is against the side of the
    hook or where the hook could be dispensed with.


CLS 292/25
TXT Devices under subclass 24 having operating means.

    (1)     Note.  For the various types of operating means, search this class,
    the various similar subclasses of operating means under the several types
    of bolts.


CLS 292/26
TXT Devices under subclass 25 including link and lever elements.


CLS 292/27
TXT Devices under subclass 25 including cams or lever elements which operate
    substantially the same as cams or roll-backs.


CLS 292/28
TXT Devices under subclass 25 including flexible connections, such as pulleys
    and cords, chains, or the like.


CLS 292/29
TXT Devices under subclass 25 including levers or a combination of operating
    elements largely composed of levers.


CLS 292/30
TXT Devices under subclass 25 including push-buttons, push-pins, push-rod or
    pull-rod elements.


CLS 292/31
TXT Devices under subclass 25 having rigid means, such as handles, knobs, or
    the like.


CLS 292/32
TXT Devices under subclass 3 of the sliding type.


CLS 292/33
TXT Devices under subclass 32 having operating means.


CLS 292/34
TXT Devices under subclass 33 including cam and lever elements.


CLS 292/35
TXT Devices under subclass 33 including a combination of lever and push-rod
    elements.


CLS 292/36
TXT Devices under subclass 33 including link and lever elements.


CLS 292/37
TXT Devices under subclass 33 including cams or lever elements which operate
    substantially the same as cams or roll-backs.


CLS 292/38
TXT Devices under subclass 33 including flexible connections, such as pulleys
    and cords, chains, or the like.


CLS 292/39
TXT Devices under subclass 33 including gear devices, or rack and pinion
    elements.


CLS 292/40
TXT Devices under subclass 33 including levers or a combination of operating
    elements largely composed of levers.


CLS 292/41
TXT Devices under subclass 33 including push-buttons, push-pins, push-rod or
    pull-rod elements.


CLS 292/42
TXT Devices under subclass 33 including rigid means, such as handles, knobs, or
    the like.


CLS 292/43
TXT Devices under subclass 33 including screws or screw-threaded elements.


CLS 292/44
TXT Devices under subclass 3 of the swinging type.


CLS 292/45
TXT Devices under subclass 44 having operating means.


CLS 292/46
TXT Devices under subclass 45 including cam and lever elements.


CLS 292/47
TXT Devices under subclass 45 including link and cam elements.


CLS 292/48
TXT Devices under subclass 45 including link and lever elements.


CLS 292/49
TXT Devices under subclass 45 including cams or lever elements which operate
    substantially the same as cams or roll-backs.


CLS 292/50
TXT Devices under subclass 45 including flexible connections, such as pulleys
    and cords, chains, or the like.


CLS 292/51
TXT Devices under subclass 45 including gear devices or rack and pinion
    elements.


CLS 292/52
TXT Devices under subclass 45 including levers or a combination of operating
    elements largely composed of levers.


CLS 292/53
TXT Devices under subclass 45 including push-buttons, push-pins, push-rod or
    pull-rod elements.


CLS 292/54
TXT Devices under subclass 45 including rigid means, such as handles, knobs, or
    the like.


CLS 292/55
TXT Devices under subclass 45 including screws or screw-threaded elements.


CLS 292/56
TXT Devices under subclass 2 which swing and have rigid swinging
    keeper-engaging portions and rigid hooked-end keeper-engaging portions.


CLS 292/57
TXT Devices under subclass 2 having sliding and rotary motion about fixed axes.


CLS 292/58
TXT Devices under subclass 57 in which the sliding and rotary motion takes
    place simultaneously.


CLS 292/59
TXT Devices under subclass 57 having a plurality of rigid keeper-engaging
    portions.


CLS 292/60
TXT Devices under subclass 57 having spring projecting means.


CLS 292/61
TXT Devices under subclass 60 in which the sliding and rotary motion takes
    place simultaneously.


CLS 292/62
TXT Devices under subclass 57 having spring retracting means.


CLS 292/63
TXT Devices under subclass 2 having sliding and swinging motion to latching
    position.  The sliding and swinging motions may take place simultaneously
    or consecutively.


CLS 292/64
TXT Devices under subclass 63 having operating means not otherwise classified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68      and 69, for other sliding and swinging bolts having operating means.


CLS 292/65
TXT Devices under subclass 64 having cams or lever elements which operate
    substantially the same as cams or roll-backs.


CLS 292/66
TXT Devices under subclass 64 having levers, or a combination of operating
    elements largely composed of levers.


CLS 292/67
TXT Devices under subclass 64 having bolts having sliding rigid means, such as
    handles, knobs, or the like.


CLS 292/68
TXT Devices under subclass 63 having a plurality of rigid keeper-engaging
    portions.


CLS 292/69
TXT Devices under subclass 63 having spring retracting means.


CLS 292/70
TXT Devices under subclass 2 which are double-acting and are designed to
    resiliently or frictionally engage the keepers or frames and be disengaged
    therefrom upon movement of the closures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 414+ for a closure
    bearing with distinct biasing means which functions as a double acting
    fastener and subclasses 428+ for resilient closure bearing which functions
    as a double acting fastener.


CLS 292/71
TXT Devices under subclass 70 having sliding and swinging motion to latching
    position.


CLS 292/73
TXT Devices under subclass 70 of the roller type substantially without
    operating elements or catch elements, not otherwise classified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     77 and 79, for particularly associated rollers.


CLS 292/74
TXT Devices under subclass 70 of the sliding type.


CLS 292/75
TXT Devices under subclass 74 carrying rollers.


CLS 292/76
TXT Devices under subclass 70 of the spring-arm type.


CLS 292/77
TXT Devices under subclass 76 carrying rollers.


CLS 292/78
TXT Devices under subclass 70 of the swinging type.


CLS 292/79
TXT Devices under subclass 78 carrying rollers.


CLS 292/80
TXT Devices under subclass 2 forming a part of or carried by spring-arms.

    (1)     Note.  Spring-arm bolts having hooked ends are classified in the
    respective subclasses under Spring-arm bolts.


CLS 292/81
TXT Devices under subclass 80 having operating means not otherwise classified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     for multiple head devices with operating means.


CLS 292/82
TXT Devices under subclass 81 composed largely of link and lever elements.


CLS 292/83
TXT Devices under subclass 81 including cams or lever elements which operate
    substantially the same as cams or roll-backs.


CLS 292/84
TXT Devices under subclass 81 composed largely of flexible connections, such as
    pulleys and cords, chains, or the like.


CLS 292/85
TXT Devices under subclass 81 including levers or a combination of operating
    elements largely composed of levers.


CLS 292/86
TXT Devices under subclass 81 including push-buttons, push-pins, push-rod or
    pull-rod elements.


CLS 292/87
TXT Devices under subclass 81 including rigid means, such as handles, knobs, or
    the like.


CLS 292/88
TXT Devices under subclass 87 having seal or padlock catch devices for securing
    the bolts in adjusted position.

    (1)     Note.  For the various types of catches search the respective
    subclasses of catches in rigid operating means under the several types of
    bolts.


CLS 292/89
TXT Devices under subclass 87 having swinging catches or dogging devices for
    securing the bolts in adjusted position.

    (1)     Note.  Spring-arm bolts having distinctive operating means and
    catch means are cross-referenced into this subclass.


CLS 292/90
TXT Devices under subclass 81 including screws or screw-threaded elements.


CLS 292/91
TXT Devices under subclass 80 having two or more holding-surfaces for the
    closures.


CLS 292/92
TXT Devices under subclass 2 and connections therefor operable by emergency
    means, such as rods or bars with lever devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for multiple bolts having emergency operating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 261 and 263 for
    emergency operated means to release latches holding pressure bars on
    clothes wringers.


CLS 292/93
TXT Devices under subclass 92 including panels, plates, or doors.


CLS 292/94
TXT Devices under subclass 92 including platforms or floor-panels.


CLS 292/95
TXT Devices under subclass 2 having hooked engaging ends which have holding
    engagement with the keepers.


CLS 292/96
TXT Devices under subclass 95 having operating means not otherwise classified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110+,   117+, 122+, 129, and 131+, for other hooked end bolts with
    operating means.


CLS 292/97
TXT Devices under subclass 96 composed largely of levers or cranks, and links
    connecting the levers or cranks with the bolts.


CLS 292/98
TXT Devices under subclass 96 including cams or lever elements which operate
    substantially the same as cams or roll-backs.


CLS 292/99
TXT Devices under subclass 96 wherein the hooked-end bolts are carried by
    closures or casings, and there are means on the opposing elements for
    positively projecting the bolts into latched position on the movement of
    the closures.


CLS 292/100
TXT Devices under subclass 96 including levers or a combination of operating
    elements largely composed of levers.


CLS 292/101
TXT Devices under subclass 96 including rigid means, such as knobs, handles, or
    the like.


CLS 292/102
TXT Devices under subclass 101 with the rigid operating means or without
    operating means having a second closure element for securing the bolts in
    adjusted position or preventing access thereto.


CLS 292/103
TXT Devices under subclass 101 with the rigid operating means or without
    operating means having friction-catch devices for securing the bolts in
    adjusted position.


CLS 292/104
TXT Devices under subclass 101 with the rigid operating means or without
    operating means having padlock or seal catch devices for securing the bolts
    in adjusted position.


CLS 292/105
TXT Devices under subclass 101 with the rigid operating means or without
    operating means having screw-catch devices for positively securing the
    bolts in adjusted position.


CLS 292/106
TXT Devices under subclass 101 with the rigid operating means or without
    operating means having sliding catches or dogs for securing the bolts in
    adjusted position.

    (1)     Note.  Hooked-end bolts spring or gravity actuated or with
    distinctive operating means and having sliding catches are cross-referenced
    into this subclass.


CLS 292/107
TXT Devices under subclass 101 with the rigid operating means or without
    operating means having spring-arm catch devices for positively securing the
    bolts in adjusted position.


CLS 292/108
TXT Devices under subclass 101 with the rigid operating means or without
    operating means having swinging catches or dogs for securing the bolts in
    adjusted position.

    (1)     Note.  Hooked-end bolts spring or gravity actuated or with
    distinctive operating means and having swinging catches are
    cross-referenced into this subclass.


CLS 292/109
TXT Devices under subclass 95 having sliding and swinging motion to latching
    position.


CLS 292/110
TXT Devices under subclass 109 having operating means.


CLS 292/111
TXT Devices under subclass 110 including cams or lever elements which operate
    substantially the same as cams or roll-backs.


CLS 292/112
TXT Devices under subclass 110 including gear devices or rack and pinion
    elements.


CLS 292/113
TXT Devices under subclass 110 including levers or a combination of operating
    elements largely composed of levers.


CLS 292/114
TXT Devices under subclass 110 including rigid means, such as handles, knobs,
    or the like.


CLS 292/115
TXT Devices under subclass 110 including screws or screw-threaded elements.


CLS 292/116
TXT Devices under subclass 95 having a plurality of rigid hooked-end
    keeper-engaging portions.


CLS 292/117
TXT Devices under subclass 116 having operating means.


CLS 292/118
TXT Devices under subclass 117 including levers or a combination of operating
    elements largely composed of levers.


CLS 292/119
TXT Devices under subclass 117 including push-buttons, push-pins, push-rod or
    pull-rod elements.


CLS 292/120
TXT Devices under subclass 117 including rigid means, such as knobs, handles,
    or the like.


CLS 292/121
TXT Devices under subclass 95 which are spring-projected.


CLS 292/122
TXT Devices under subclass 121 having operating means.


CLS 292/123
TXT Devices under subclass 122 composed largely of levers or cranks and links
    connecting the levers or cranks with the bolts.


CLS 292/124
TXT Devices under subclass 122 including cams or lever elements which operate
    substantially the same as cams or roll-backs.


CLS 292/125
TXT Devices under subclass 122 consisting largely of flexible connections, such
    as pulleys and cords, chains, or the like.


CLS 292/126
TXT Devices under subclass 122 including levers or a combination of operating
    elements largely composed of levers.


CLS 292/127
TXT Devices under subclass 122 including push-buttons, push-pins, push-rod or
    pull-rod elements.


CLS 292/128
TXT Devices under subclass 122 including rigid means, such as knobs, handles,
    or the like.


CLS 292/129
TXT Devices under subclass 95 of the spring-retracted type including operating
    means and catch devices.


CLS 292/130
TXT Devices under subclass 95 operable by gravity or by mechanism including
    gravity-weights.


CLS 292/131
TXT Devices under subclass 130 having operating means.


CLS 292/132
TXT Devices under subclass 131 including cams or lever elements which operate
    substantially the same as cams or roll-backs.


CLS 292/133
TXT Devices under subclass 131 consisting largely of flexible connections, such
    as pulleys, and cords, chains, or the like.


CLS 292/134
TXT Devices under subclass 131 including levers or a combination of operating
    elements largely composed of levers.


CLS 292/135
TXT Devices under subclass 131 including push-buttons, push-pins, push-rod or
    pull-rod elements.


CLS 292/136
TXT Devices under subclass 131 including rigid means, such as handles, knobs,
    or the like.


CLS 292/137
TXT Devices under subclass 2 of the sliding type.


CLS 292/138
TXT Devices under subclass 137 having operating means not otherwise classified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157+,   164+, 177+, 184+, and 190 to 193, for other sliding bolts with
    operating means.


CLS 292/139
TXT Devices under subclass 138 composed largely of levers or cranks and links
    connecting the levers or cranks with the bolts.


CLS 292/140
TXT Devices under subclass 138 including cams or lever elements which operate
    substantially the same as cams or roll-backs.


CLS 292/141
TXT Devices under subclass 138 consisting largely of flexible connections, such
    as pulleys and cords, chains, or the like.


CLS 292/142
TXT Devices under subclass 138 including gear devices or rack and pinion
    elements.


CLS 292/143
TXT Devices under subclass 138 including levers or a combination of operating
    elements largely composed of levers.


CLS 292/144
TXT Devices under subclass 138 composed of power mechanism, such as air, water,
    steam, or electric motors and the like.


CLS 292/145
TXT Devices under subclass 138 composed of rigid means, such as handles, knobs,
    or the like.


CLS 292/146
TXT Devices under subclass 145 with the rigid operating means or without
    operating means having adjacent closure elements for operating or
    preventing access to the bolts.


CLS 292/147
TXT Devices under subclass 145 with the rigid operating means or without
    operating means having friction-catch devices for securing the bolts in
    adjusted position.


CLS 292/148
TXT Devices under subclass 145 with the rigid operating means or without
    operating means having padlock or seal catch devices for securing the bolts
    in adjusted position.


CLS 292/149
TXT Devices under subclass 145 with the rigid operating means or without
    operating means having screw-catch devices for positively securing the
    bolts in adjusted position.


CLS 292/150
TXT Devices under subclass 145 with the rigid operating means or without
    operating means having sliding catches or dogs for securing the bolts in
    adjusted position.

    (1)     Note.  Sliding bolts spring or gravity actuated or with distinctive
    operating means and having sliding catches are cross-referenced into this
    subclass.


CLS 292/151
TXT Devices under subclass 150 having sealing devices for the catches.


CLS 292/152
TXT Devices under subclass 145 with the rigid operating means or without
    operating means having spring-arm catch devices for positively securing the
    bolts in adjusted position.


CLS 292/153
TXT Devices under subclass 145 with the rigid operating means or without
    operating means having swinging catches or dogs for securing the bolts in
    adjusted position.

    (1)     Note.  Sliding bolts spring or gravity actuated or with distinctive
    operating means and having swinging catches are cross-referenced into this
    subclass.


CLS 292/154
TXT Devices under subclass 153 having sealing devices for the catches.


CLS 292/155
TXT Devices under subclass 138 composed of screws or screw-threaded elements.


CLS 292/156
TXT Devices under subclass 137 having a plurality of rigid keeper-engaging
    portions.


CLS 292/157
TXT Devices under subclass 156 having operating means.


CLS 292/158
TXT Devices under subclass 157 composed largely of levers or cranks and links
    connecting the levers or cranks with the bolts.


CLS 292/159
TXT Devices under subclass 157 composed of cams or by lever elements which
    operate substantially the same as cams or roll-backs.


CLS 292/160
TXT Devices under subclass 157 composed of gear devices or rack and pinion
    elements.


CLS 292/161
TXT Devices under subclass 157 composed of levers or by a combination of
    operating elements largely composed of levers.


CLS 292/162
TXT Devices under subclass 157 composed of rigid means, such as handles, knobs,
    or the like.


CLS 292/163
TXT Devices under subclass 137 of the spring-projected type.


CLS 292/164
TXT Devices under subclass 163 having operating means.


CLS 292/165
TXT Devices under subclass 164 composed largely of cam and lever elements.


CLS 292/166
TXT Devices under subclass 164 composed largely of levers and push-rod or
    pull-rod elements.


CLS 292/167
TXT Devices under subclass 164 composed largely of levers or cranks and link
    devices connecting the levers or cranks with the bolts.


CLS 292/168
TXT Devices under subclass 164 composed largely of links and push-rod or
    pull-rod elements.


CLS 292/169
TXT Devices under subclass 164 composed largely of cams or lever elements which
    operate substantially the same as cams or roll-backs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170,    for sliding cams.


CLS 292/169.11
TXT Device under subclass 169 wherein the fastener has structure that
    particularly adapts it to a combinational relationship with a vehicle
    closure.


CLS 292/169.12
TXT Device under subclass 169.11 having means whereby the bolt can be blocked
    or otherwise disabled by moving a closure handle located interiorly of the
    vehicle in a direction opposite to that in which it is moved to retract the
    bolt.


CLS 292/169.13
TXT Device under subclass 169 having a second bolt element to complement or
    supplement the fastening accomplished by the first such element.

    (1)     Note.  The auxiliary bolt frequently is identified as a guard bolt
    or a dead bolt.


CLS 292/169.14
TXT Device under subclass 169 having means for blocking or otherwise disabling
    the bolt from moving though some portion of its range of travel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169.13, for the disabling of a main bolt inherent in the structure of
    certain auxiliary bolts.


CLS 292/169.15
TXT Device under subclass 169.14 which (1) blocks or disables a rollback from
    moving, (2) renders ineffective the movement imparted to a rollback, or (3)
    utilizes a rollback to immobilize the bolt.


CLS 292/169.16
TXT Device under subclass 169.15 wherein separate spindles are provided, and
    each such spindle has a rollback member.


CLS 292/169.17
TXT Device under subclass 169.14 wherein a separate pivotably or rotatably
    movable operator is provided for controlling the bolt blocking or disabling
    means.

    (1)     Note.  In some rotatably movable actuators, the actuator must be
    pushed in before it can be rotated.


CLS 292/169.18
TXT Device under subclass 169.14 wherein a separate operator, movable along its
    longitudinal axis, is provided.


CLS 292/169.19
TXT Device under subclass 169 having another projection spring, usually of a
    lighter scale than the principal projection spring, that is compressed
    independently of the latter spring when the bolt head is subjected to an
    external, depressive force, but which ordinarily is compressed along with
    the principal spring when retraction is accomplished by the mechanism
    provided.


CLS 292/169.21
TXT Device under subclass 169 in which two or more rollback elements are
    provided, a portion of them functioning in one direction of spindle
    rotation and the remainder in the opposite direction.


CLS 292/169.22
TXT Device under subclass 169.21 wherein each of a plurality of separate
    spindles has at least two such rollback elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169.16, for rollback members on separate spindles where a bolt blocking or
    disabling means is involved.


CLS 292/169.23
TXT Device under subclass 169.21 wherein a common spindle of a tubular nature
    is provided, said spindle having at least two such rollback elements.


CLS 292/170
TXT Devices under subclass 164 composed largely of sliding cams or wedge
    elements.


CLS 292/171
TXT Devices under subclass 164 consisting largely of flexible connections, such
    as pulleys and cords, chains, or the like.


CLS 292/172
TXT Devices under subclass 164 composed largely of gear devices or rack and
    pinion elements.


CLS 292/173
TXT Devices under subclass 164 composed of levers or by a combination of
    operating elements largely composed of levers.


CLS 292/174
TXT Devices under subclass 164 composed of push-buttons, push-pins, push-rod or
    pull-rod elements.


CLS 292/175
TXT Devices under subclass 164 composed of rigid means, such as handles, knobs,
    or the like.


CLS 292/176
TXT Devices under subclass 164 composed of screws or screw-threaded elements.


CLS 292/177
TXT Devices under subclass 137 of the spring-retracted type.


CLS 292/178
TXT Devices under subclass 177 having friction-catch devices for holding the
    bolts in projected position.


CLS 292/179
TXT Devices under subclass 177 having sliding-catch devices for holding the
    bolts in projected position.


CLS 292/180
TXT Devices under subclass 177 having spring-arm catch devices for holding the
    bolts in projected position.


CLS 292/181
TXT Devices under subclass 177 having swinging-catch devices for holding the
    bolts in projected position.


CLS 292/182
TXT Devices under subclass 177 operable by means of cams or by lever elements
    which operate substantially the same as cams or roll-backs.


CLS 292/183
TXT Devices under subclass 137 operable by gravity or by mechanism including
    gravity-weights.


CLS 292/184
TXT Devices under subclass 183 having operating means.


CLS 292/185
TXT Devices under subclass 184 composed largely of cam and lever elements.


CLS 292/186
TXT Devices under subclass 184 composed largely of levers or cranks and link
    devices connecting the levers or cranks with the bolts.


CLS 292/187
TXT Devices under subclass 184 composed largely of cams or by lever elements
    which operate substantially the same as cams or roll-backs.


CLS 292/188
TXT Devices under subclass 184 composed of levers or by a combination of
    operating elements largely composed of levers.


CLS 292/189
TXT Devices under subclass 184 composed of rigid means, such as handles, knobs,
    or the like.


CLS 292/190
TXT Devices under subclass 137 which are curved and are with or without
    operating means and with or without catch devices.


CLS 292/191
TXT Devices under subclass 137 having lever members pivoted or fulcrumed to the
    free end of the bolt and to the casing for retracting the bolt upon
    engagement with the casing.


CLS 292/192
TXT Devices under subclass 137 having pivoted end members and operating means.


CLS 292/193
TXT Devices under subclass 137 carrying rollers, said elements or bolts being
    with or without operating means.


CLS 292/194
TXT Devices under subclass 2 which swing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240+,   for swinging and camming bolts.


CLS 292/195
TXT Devices under subclass 194 having operating means not otherwise classified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    214+,   220+, 229, 231+, and 239, for other swinging bolts with operating
    means.


CLS 292/196
TXT Devices under subclass 195 composed largely of levers or cranks and links
    connecting the levers or cranks with the bolts.


CLS 292/197
TXT Devices under subclass 195 composed of cams or by lever elements which
    operate substantially the same as cams or roll-backs.


CLS 292/198
TXT Devices under subclass 195 in which the bolts are carried by closures or
    casings, the opposing elements have means for positively projecting the
    bolts into latched position on the movement of the closures.


CLS 292/199
TXT Devices under subclass 195 composed of gear devices or rack and pinion
    elements.


CLS 292/200
TXT Devices under subclass 195 composed of levers or by a combination of
    operating elements composed largely of levers.


CLS 292/201
TXT Devices under subclass 195 composed of power mechanism, such as air, water,
    steam or electric motors, and the like.


CLS 292/202
TXT Devices under subclass 195 composed of rigid means, such as knobs, handles,
    or the like.


CLS 292/203
TXT Devices under subclass 202 with the rigid operating means or without
    operating means having adjacent closure elements for operating or
    preventing access to the bolts.


CLS 292/204
TXT Devices under subclass 202 with the rigid operating means or without
    operating means having friction-catch devices for securing the bolts in
    adjusted position.


CLS 292/205
TXT Devices under subclass 202 with the rigid operating means or without
    operating means having padlock or seal catch devices for securing the bolts
    in adjusted position.


CLS 292/206
TXT Devices under subclass 202 with the rigid operating means or without
    opeating means having screw-catch devices for positively securing the bolts
    in adjusted position.


CLS 292/207
TXT Devices under subclass 202 with the rigid operating means or without
    operating means having sliding catches or dogs for securing the bolts in
    adjusted position.

    (1)     Note.  Swinging bolts spring or gravity actuated or with
    distinctive operating means and having sliding catches are cross-referenced
    into this subclass.


CLS 292/208
TXT Devices under subclass 207 having sealing devices for the catches.


CLS 292/209
TXT Devices under subclass 202 with the rigid operating means or without
    operating means having spring-arm catch devices for positively securing the
    bolts in adjusted position.


CLS 292/210
TXT Devices under subclass 202 with the rigid operating means having swinging
    catches or dogs for securing the bolts in adjusted position.

    (1)     Note.  Swinging bolts spring or gravity actuated or with
    distinctive operating means and having swinging catches are
    cross-referenced into this subclass.


CLS 292/211
TXT Devices under subclass 210 having sealing devices for the catches.


CLS 292/212
TXT Devices under subclass 195 composed of screws or screw-threaded elements.


CLS 292/213
TXT Devices under subclass 194 having a plurality of rigid-keeper-engaging
    portions.


CLS 292/214
TXT Devices under subclass 213 having operating means.


CLS 292/215
TXT Devices under subclass 214 composed of cams or by lever elements which
    operate substantially the same as cam or roll-backs.


CLS 292/216
TXT Devices under subclass 214 in which the bolts are carried by closures or
    casings and are positively projected into latched position by the movement
    of the closure, the bolts being held in latched position by the closure or
    by catch devices.


CLS 292/217
TXT Devices under subclass 214 composed of levers or by a combination of
    operating elements largely composed of levers.


CLS 292/218
TXT Devices under subclass 214 composed of rigid means, such as knobs, handles,
    or the like.


CLS 292/219
TXT Devices under subclass 194 of the spring-projected type.


CLS 292/220
TXT Devices under subclass 219 having operating means.


CLS 292/221
TXT Devices under subclass 220 composed largely of levers and push-rod or
    pull-rod elements.


CLS 292/222
TXT Devices under subclass 220 composed largely of link and cam elements.


CLS 292/223
TXT Devices under subclass 220 composed largely of levers or cranks and links
    connecting the levers or cranks with the bolts.


CLS 292/224
TXT Devices under subclass 220 composed largely of cams or by lever elements
    which operate substantially the same as cams or roll-backs.


CLS 292/225
TXT Devices under subclass 220 consisting largely of flexible connections, such
    as pulleys and cords, chains, or the like.


CLS 292/226
TXT Devices under subclass 220 composed of levers or by a combination of
    operating elements largely composed of levers.


CLS 292/227
TXT Devices under subclass 220 composed largely of push-buttons, push-pins,
    push-rod or pull-rod elements.


CLS 292/228
TXT Devices under subclass 220 composed largely of rigid means, such as knobs,
    handles, or the like.


CLS 292/229
TXT Devices under subclass 194 of the spring-retracted type including operating
    means and catch devices.


CLS 292/230
TXT Devices under subclass 194 operable by gravity or by mechanism including
    gravity-weight.


CLS 292/231
TXT Devices under subclass 230 having operating means not otherwise classified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239,    for rollers having operating means.


CLS 292/232
TXT Devices under subclass 231 composed largely of cams or roll-backs and lever
    devices.


CLS 292/233
TXT Devices under subclass 231 composed largely of levers or cranks and links
    connecting the levers or cranks with the bolts.


CLS 292/234
TXT Devices under subclass 231 composed of cams or by lever elements which
    operate substantially the same as cams or roll-backs.


CLS 292/235
TXT Devices under subclass 231 consisting largely of flexible connections, such
    as pulleys and cords, chains, or the like.


CLS 292/236
TXT Devices under subclass 231 composed of levers or by a combination of
    operating elements largely composed of levers.


CLS 292/237
TXT Devices under subclass 231 composed of push-buttons, push-pins, push-rod or
    pull-rod elements.


CLS 292/238
TXT Devices under subclass 231 composed of rigid means, such as handles, knobs,
    or the like.


CLS 292/239
TXT Devices  under subclass 230 carrying rollers and being with or without
    operating means.


CLS 292/240
TXT Devices under subclass 2 of the swinging type, the bolts or their keepers
    having coacting cam-faces.


CLS 292/241
TXT Devices under subclass 240 operable by rigid means, such as knobs, handles,
    or the like.


CLS 292/242
TXT Devices under subclass 240 which are spring-projected and are operable by
    rigid means, such as knobs, handles, or the like.


CLS 292/243
TXT Devices under subclass 2 for fastening closures, with or without catch
    devices, and having seals adapted to be ruptured upon the operation of the
    parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    287,    for similar devices in hasps.

    331,    for similar devices in shackles.


CLS 292/244
TXT Devices under subclass 2 having means for reversing the same for in or out
    or right or left hand movement of the closure.


CLS 292/245
TXT Devices under subclass 244 operable by means of cam or roll-back and lever
    elements.


CLS 292/246
TXT Devices under subclass 2 in the form of swinging loops, bails, or open
    links for engaging the keepers.


CLS 292/247
TXT Devices under subclass 246 having sliding and swinging motion to latching
    position and operable by means of levers or cams.


CLS 292/248
TXT Devices under subclass 246 having sliding catches or dogs for securing the
    bolts in adjusted position.


CLS 292/249
TXT Devices under subclass 246 having spring-arm catches or dogs for securing
    the bolts in adjusted position.


CLS 292/250
TXT Devices under subclass 246 having swinging catches or dogs for securing the
    bolts in adjusted position.


CLS 292/251
TXT Devices under subclass 2 which are screw- threaded for engaging
    screw-threaded keepers.


CLS 292/251.5
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which the closures are secured
    in adjusted position relative to their supports by the magnetic attraction
    between parts on the closures and supports respectively.

    (1)     Note.  Magnetic means for operating latch bolts will be found in
    the "Operating Means" subclasses indented under the specific types of latch
    bolts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 209+ for magnet and electromagnet structure, per
    se.


CLS 292/252
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising ball-holding members
    on closures or casing with or without operating means and with or without
    catch devices for securing the closures in adjusted position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261,    for cylinder-holding members.

    299,    for ring-shaped members.


CLS 292/253
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising metal plates, straps,
    or wires attached to the casing or to the closures, or both, and having one
    or more parts to engage the opposing elements or to interengage and be
    secured by bending one or more of the parts.


CLS 292/254
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising bolt-releasing devices
    on the closure or casing for engaging the free end of the bolt to actuate
    the same.


CLS 292/255
TXT Devices under the class definition operable for releasing the bolts by
    mechanism including foot-operating members.


CLS 292/256
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising plates, bars, or bolts for
    engaging the closures and their casings or for engaging a plurality of
    closure elements and having devices for securing the plates and closures in
    adjusted position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 315 for closure clamps having structures
    which retain the clamps in closure-fastening position until the cover is in
    a certain position, e.g., in a partially opened, venting position, and
    subclass 316 for clamps which are held in closure fastening position by
    means operated by the internal pressure of the receptacle.


CLS 292/256.5
TXT Devices under subclass 256 for securing ships' hatches or equivalent
    closures. These may operate directly upon the hatch to clamp it in place,
    or may clamp a tarpaulin which in turn holds the hatch in place, or may
    include clamping elements for both the hatch and the tarpaulin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclass 203 for combinations of hatch structure with
    clamping means.


CLS 292/256.6
TXT Devices under subclass 256 in which the clamp is in the form of a ring.

    (1)     Note.  The ring may be continuous, split or segmental, i.e., made
    up of more than one piece.


CLS 292/256.61
TXT Devices under subclass 256.6 in which the material of the ring has portions
    thereof permanently deformed to hold the closure in place.

    (1)     Note.  This type of fastener is usually destroyed in removing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 250+ for frangible closures and
    subclasses 274+ for ring-type fasteners.


CLS 292/256.63
TXT Devices under subclass 256.6 in the form of resilient rings which exert a
    wedging action against the closures.


CLS 292/256.65
TXT Devices under subclass 256.6 combined with means to expand and/or contract
    the ring to closure fastening position.

    (1)     Note.  The ring is usually in one piece but is split.


CLS 292/256.67
TXT Devices under subclass 256.65 in the form of screw threaded means.


CLS 292/256.69
TXT Devices under subclass 256.65 in the form of levers which pass a dead
    center position to hold the ring in closure clamping position.


CLS 292/256.71
TXT Devices under subclass 256 in which the securing means includes
    screw-threaded members which bear directly against the closure and/or the
    casing.


CLS 292/256.73
TXT Devices under subclass 256 in which the securing means includes a screw and
    a nut which, respectively, engage opposite sides of the abutting portions
    of the closure and the casing.


CLS 292/256.75
TXT Devices under subclass 256.73 which are mounted to swing to and from
    closure fastening position.


CLS 292/257
TXT Devices under subclass 256 having cam devices for operating and securing
    the plates and closures in adjusted position.


CLS 292/258
TXT Devices under subclass 256 in which the devices are portable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256.6,  for portable fasteners in the form of a ring.


CLS 292/259
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising plates or bars extending
    across the closures or closure-opening and engaging keepers at their ends
    for securing the closures in adjusted position.


CLS 292/260
TXT Devices under subclass 259 having screw devices for operating and securing
    the closures in adjusted position.


CLS 292/261
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising cylindrical holding members
    on the closures or casings with or without operating means and with or
    without catch devices for securing the closures in adjusted position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252,    for ball-holding members.

    299,    for ring-shaped members.


CLS 292/262
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising links, plates, or bars
    movably connected to the closures or to the closures and casings and having
    engaging means for securing the links and closures in adjusted position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 324+ for devices for
    moving a closure and securing it in adjusted position, particularly
    subclasses 354+ and 356 for an extension link having a portion to be
    grasped by the hand of the user.


CLS 292/263
TXT Devices under subclass 262 in which the links, plates, or bars comprise
    pivoted sections.


CLS 292/264
TXT Devices under subclass 262 comprising chain devices.


CLS 292/265
TXT Devices under subclass 262 in which the links, plates, or bars are notched
    or perforated.


CLS 292/266
TXT Devices under subclass 265 wherein the engaging means comprises
    sliding-catch-engaging devices.


CLS 292/267
TXT Devices under subclass 265 wherein the engaging means comprises
    swinging-catch-engaging devices.


CLS 292/268
TXT Devices under subclass 262 in which the links, plates, or bars are slotted.


CLS 292/269
TXT Devices under subclass 268 wherein the engaging means comprises
    sliding-catch-engaging devices.


CLS 292/270
TXT Devices under subclass 268 wherein the engaging means comprises
    swinging-catch-engaging devices.


CLS 292/271
TXT Devices under subclass 262 in which the engaging means comprises notched or
    perforated keeper-engaging devices.


CLS 292/272
TXT Devices under subclass 262 in which the engaging means comprises
    slotted-keeper-engaging devices.


CLS 292/273
TXT Devices under subclass 262 having slotted, notched, or perforated keepers
    and wherein the engaging means comprises sliding-catch-engaging devices.


CLS 292/274
TXT Devices under subclass 262 having slotted, notched, or perforated keepers
    and wherein the engaging means comprises swinging-catch-engaging devices.


CLS 292/275
TXT Devices under subclass 262 wherein the engaging means comprises yieldable
    friction-catch devices.


CLS 292/276
TXT Devices under subclass 262 wherein the engaging means comprises screw-catch
    devices.


CLS 292/277
TXT Devices under subclass 262 wherein the engaging means comprises
    sliding-catch devices.


CLS 292/278
TXT Devices under subclass 262 wherein the engaging means comprises
    swinging-catch devices.


CLS 292/279
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising gear-shaped holding members
    on the closures or casings with or without operating means for securing the
    closures in adjusted position and sliding-catch devices for securing the
    gear members.


CLS 292/280
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising gear-shaped holding members
    on the closures or casings with or without operating means for securing the
    closures in adjusted position and swinging-catch devices for securing the
    gear members.


CLS 292/281
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising straps, plates, or bars for
    fastening the closures, usually hinged to one member and engaging a keeper
    on the other member.


CLS 292/282
TXT Devices under subclass 281 having seal-catch devices for securing the
    straps in adjusted position.


CLS 292/283
TXT Devices under subclass 281 having sliding catches or dogs for securing the
    straps in adjusted position.


CLS 292/284
TXT Devices under subclass 283 wherein the catches or dogs are provided with
    seal devices.


CLS 292/285
TXT Devices under subclass 281 having swinging catches or dogs for securing the
    straps in adjusted position.


CLS 292/286
TXT Devices under subclass 285 wherein the swinging catches or dogs are
    provided with seal devices for securing the straps in adjusted position.


CLS 292/287
TXT Devices under subclass 281 with or without catches and having seals adapted
    to be ruptured by the operation of the catches or hasps.


CLS 292/288
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising links, plates, or bars or
    combinations of such elements, with or without operating means, arranged as
    portable structures for securing the closures in adjusted position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258,    for portable clamps.

    289,    for portable securer plate or bar.


CLS 292/289
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising portable plates or bars,
    insertible between closures and their casings and having rigid engaging
    means.


CLS 292/290
TXT Devices under subclass 289 having sliding and swinging holding members for
    securing the closures in adjusted position.


CLS 292/291
TXT Devices under subclass 289 having screw-threaded holding members for
    securing the closures in adjusted position.


CLS 292/292
TXT Devices under subclass 289 having sliding holding members for securing the
    closures in adjusted position.


CLS 292/293
TXT Devices under subclass 292 having screw- threaded operating means for
    holding members.


CLS 292/294
TXT Devices under subclass 292 having screw-catch devices for securing the
    holding members.


CLS 292/295
TXT Devices under subclass 292 having sliding-catch devices for securing the
    holding members.


CLS 292/296
TXT Devices under subclass 292 having swinging-catch devices for securing the
    holding members.


CLS 292/297
TXT Devices under subclass 289 having swinging holding members for securing the
    closures in adjusted position.


CLS 292/298
TXT Devices under subclass 297 having catch devices for securing the holding
    members.


CLS 292/299
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising ring-shaped holding members
    on the closures or casings with or without operating means and with or
    without catch devices for securing the closures in adjusted position.


CLS 292/300
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising rigid means on the closures
    for engaging rigid means on the casings, such as undercut grooves,
    screw-threads, and bayonet-joints.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 350+ and 388 for similar devices
    in combination with hinge structure.


CLS 292/301
TXT Devices under subclass 300 having screw-threaded catch devices for
    preventing disengagement of the closures.


CLS 292/302
TXT Devices under subclass 300 having sliding catches or dogs for preventing
    disengagement of the closures.


CLS 292/303
TXT Devices under subclass 300 having spring-arm catch devices for preventing
    disengagement of the closures.


CLS 292/304
TXT Devices under subclass 300 having swinging catches or dogs for preventing
    disengagement of the closures.


CLS 292/305
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising rods or bars offset from the
    closures or casings having engaging means for securing the closures in
    adjusted position.


CLS 292/306
TXT Devices under subclass 305 in which the engaging means are friction-plate
    catch devices.


CLS 292/307
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising seals and sealing devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclasses 50 and 440 for seals specifically applied to
    locks.


CLS 292/308
TXT Devices under subclass 307 having deformable disks compressible upon the
    shackle ends.


CLS 292/309
TXT Devices under subclass 308 having reinforcing means embedded in the disks.


CLS 292/310
TXT Devices under subclass 308 comprising a single deformable sheet-metal disk.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312,    for multiple sheet-metal disks.


CLS 292/311
TXT Devices under subclass 308 comprising two or more parts of similar or
    dissimilar material.


CLS 292/312
TXT Devices under subclass 311 having a plurality of sheet-metal disks.


CLS 292/313
TXT Devices under subclass 311 having a plurality of hard and soft metal disks.


CLS 292/314
TXT Devices under subclass 307 comprising deformable rivets and eyelets
    compressible upon the shackle ends.


CLS 292/315
TXT Devices under subclass 307 comprising shackles having deformable or
    compressible ends.


CLS 292/316
TXT Devices under subclass 307 having fastening devices, such as nails, tacks,
    integral prongs, and the like, for securing the seals in place by driving.


CLS 292/317
TXT Devices under subclass 307 having shackles with interengaging ends and
    housings for inclosing the shackle ends.


CLS 292/318
TXT Devices under subclass 307 having shackles, one or both ends being provided
    with rigid engaging means and housing having resilient means engaged by
    said end or ends.


CLS 292/319
TXT Devices under subclass 307 having shackles provided with rigid ends and
    rigid and resilient means for engaging said ends.


CLS 292/320
TXT Devices under subclass 307 having shackles, one or both ends being provided
    with resilient engaging means and housings having rigid means engaged by
    said end or ends.


CLS 292/321
TXT Devices under subclass 307 having shackles, one or both ends being provided
    with resilient engaging means and housings having resilient means engaged
    by said end or ends.


CLS 292/322
TXT Devices under subclass 307 formed from a single piece of material having
    integral spring-catches.


CLS 292/323
TXT Devices under subclass 307 having shiftable or bodily-movable catches
    operable upon the insertion of the shackles.


CLS 292/324
TXT Devices under subclass 307 having shiftable split-ring catches operable
    upon the insertion of the shackles.


CLS 292/325
TXT Devices under subclass 307 comprising bands, wires, or cords for encircling
    boxes or the like, the free ends of the bands being secured by various
    sealing devices.


CLS 292/326
TXT Devices under subclass 307 having rigid disks and shackles having portions
    deformable or compressible for engagement with the disks.


CLS 292/327
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising sliding bolts, pins, or
    catches for securing hasps or the like and provided with sealing means for
    preventing the withdrawal of the bolts.


CLS 292/328
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising shackles for securing
    closures, with or without housings or casings, and having sealing devices
    for securing the shackle parts in adjusted position.


CLS 292/329
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising shackles for securing
    closures, with or without housings or casings, and having sliding catches
    or dogs for the shackles and sealing devices for the catches.


CLS 292/330
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising shackles for securing
    closures, with or without housings or casings, and having swinging catches
    or dogs for the shackles and sealing devices for the catches.


CLS 292/331
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising shackles for securing
    closures, with or without housings or casings, and having seals adapted to
    be ruptured by the operation of the parts.


CLS 292/332
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising bolts, spring or gravity
    projected, carried by the closures or the opposing elements and having
    means for holding the bolts in retracted position and means on the opposing
    elements for releasing the bolts upon the movement of either element to
    closed position.


CLS 292/333
TXT Devices under subclass 332 in which the holding means comprise sliding
    detents and the releasing means acts on the detents and bolts.


CLS 292/334
TXT Devices under subclass 332 in which the holding means comprise spring-arm
    detents and the releasing means acts on the detents and bolts.


CLS 292/335
TXT Devices under subclass 332 in which the bolts slide, the holding means
    comprise swinging detents and the releasing means acts on the detents and
    bolts.


CLS 292/336
TXT Devices under subclass 332 in which the bolts swing, the holding means
    comprise swinging detents and the releasing means acts on the detents and
    bolts.


CLS 292/336.3
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to closure fastener
    operating means in cooperation with means such as knobs or handles to be
    grasped to move a closure to adjusted position.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass in combination with a
    particular type of latch bolt will be found in this class in the "Operating
    means" subclasses indented under the particluar type of latch bolt.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 110+ for handles for closures,
    receptacles and the like, and attaching devices therefor not otherwise
    classified.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses, for operating
    mechanisms of general application.


CLS 292/336.5
TXT Devices under the class definition relating to the joint between the latch
    operating spindle and the rollback.

    (1)     Note.  The operating knob or handle and the spindle may be an
    integral unit, and the spindle-rollback joint may be claimed as a means for
    preventing the separation of this unit from the latch.

    (2)     Note. The assembly and/or the fastening of the knob or handle upon
    the spindle may fasten the spindle to the rollback.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    348+,   for the joints between the knob or handle with the latch spindle
    and see notes (1), (2), supra.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclass 380 for similar connections between lock rollbacks
    and their operating spindles.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 230+ for joints of general
    application between a rod and a base, plate or head.


CLS 292/337
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising casing structures within
    which the bolts operate.


CLS 292/338
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising plates, bars, or rods
    inclined between the closures and casings, with or without operating means
    or catches, for securing the closures in adjusted position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclass 94 for braces combined with lock mechanism.


CLS 292/339
TXT Devices under subclass 338 or combinations of such elements arranged as
    portable structures.


CLS 292/340
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising stationary or rigid
    bolt-engaging members on the closures or casings with which the latch-bolts
    engage for securing the closures in adjusted position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages: Apparatus, subclass 351 for ratchet-type
    fasteners for food compacting followers.


CLS 292/341
TXT Devices under subclass 340 in which the bolt-engaging members are segmental.


CLS 292/341.11
TXT Keepers under subclass 340 provided with means to decrease friction between
    the keeper and the latch bolt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    341.15+, for keepers having movable strikers whereby it is unnecessary for
    the latch bolt to be retracted in closing the door.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclass 464 for locks with antifriction provisions.


CLS 292/341.12
TXT Keepers under subclass 340 having provisions, other than mere means for
    manually adjusting the position of the keeper, for decreasing noise caused
    by rattling of the bolt in the keeper or by play between the door and jamb.
    Also includes means to decrease the noise accompanying closing of the door
    or throwing the latch bolt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    341.15+, for devices in which the striker is movably mounted so as to be
    pushed aside by the latch bolt when the door is moved to a closed position.

    341.18+,  for means for adjusting the position of the keeper which may
    reduce or prevent rattling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 82+ for closure checks or
    buffers and antislamming devices.

    70,     Locks, subclass 463 for silencers or mufflers for locks.


CLS 292/341.13
TXT Devices under subclass 340.12 constructed or arranged so as to cooperate
    with the latch bolt to continuously bias the bolt in the direction of
    movement of the door to a closed position.


CLS 292/341.14
TXT Keepers under subclass 340 in which a bolt or latch receiving socket is
    provided with a movable cover.


CLS 292/341.15
TXT Keepers under subclass 340 having a movable element in the form of a dog,
    catch or striker.


CLS 292/341.16
TXT Devices under subclass 341.15 in which the movable element is motor
    actuated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclasses 275+ for lock operating mechanism including motor
    means.


CLS 292/341.17
TXT Devices under subclass 341.15 in which the movable element is mounted for
    swinging or for rotational movement.


CLS 292/341.18
TXT Keepers under subclass 340 provided with means to adjust the position
    thereof or to adjust the bolt-engaging portion thereof relative to the door
    or door jamb on which the keeper is mounted so as to align the
    bolt-engaging part with the latch bolt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.5,    for adjustable backset.

    341,    for segment keepers which selectively engage a bolt for holding the
    door in various positions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclass 461 for adjustment provisions for locks.


CLS 292/341.19
TXT Devices under subclass 341.18 providing for vertical adjustment.


CLS 292/342
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising plates or bars having
    inclined or wedge surfaces located between the closures and casings or
    between projections thereon, with or without operating means or catches,
    for securing the closures in adjusted position.


CLS 292/343
TXT Devices under subclass 342 arranged as portable structures adapted to be
    inserted between the closures and casings.


CLS 292/344
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising weighted bodies arranged as
    portable structures for holding the closures in adjusted position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 404.


CLS 292/345
TXT Devices under the class definition for holding or securing the slats of
    blinds or shutters in adjusted position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclass 90.1 for a position holder
    for louvers interconnected for concurrent movement.


CLS 292/346
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising guard-plates and sliding
    devices for preventing the bolt being forced back by extraneous means.


CLS 292/347
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising rounded handles operatively
    connected to the ends of the latch-spindles.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes means for attaching the knobs to the
    knob-shanks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 543+ for handles and
    cranks of general application.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 465.1 for self-luminous flourescent or
    phosphorescent knobs and subclasses 483.1+ for fluorescent or
    phosphorescent devices.


CLS 292/348
TXT Devices under the class definition for operatively connecting or securing
    knobs or knob-shanks to the latch-spindles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    336.5,  and see notes (1) and (2) thereto, for analogous joints between the
    spindle and the rollback.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 548+ for analogous joints
    between machine element handles and their shafts.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 230+ for joints of general
    application between a rod and a base, plate or head.


CLS 292/349
TXT Devices under subclass 348 of the friction-catch type.


CLS 292/350
TXT Devices under subclass 348 comprising set-screws or screw-catch means.


CLS 292/351
TXT Devices under subclass 350 having guards for protecting or securing the
    attaching devices from accidental displacement.


CLS 292/352
TXT Devices under subclass 348 comprising sliding-catch means.


CLS 292/353
TXT Devices under subclass 348 comprising spring-arm catch means.


CLS 292/354
TXT Devices under subclass 348 comprising swinging-catch means.


CLS 292/355
TXT Devices under subclass 348 comprising wedge means.


CLS 292/356
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising bearings and
    antifriction devices on the casings or roseplates for the latch-spindles or
    knob-shanks.


CLS 292/357
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising finishing-plates surrounding
    the knob-spindles for closing the spindle-openings in the closures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 579 for metallic
    intermediate articles having a disk shape.


CLS 292/358
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising bars or shafts carrying a
    knob or knobs and operatively connected with the actuating means of the
    latch-bolt.


CLS 292/359
TXT Devices under the class definition comprising catches or holding means for
    preventing the rotation of knob-spindles.


CLS 293/
TTL VEHICLE FENDERS

CLS 293/
TXT Devices attached to vehicles--such as automobiles, railway-cars, or
    locomotives--for the purpose of removing persons and animals from the path
    of a moving vehicle or of catching and retaining the same or for receiving
    or fending off blows from other vehicles or objects.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclasses 219+ for shipboard fenders.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 727+ for miscellaneous vehicle
    attachments resembling fenders (e.g., plant spreaders, dust and mud guards).

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 212+ for fenders for
    marine structures.


CLS 293/1
TXT Devices not falling properly into any of the following subclasses.


CLS 293/2
TXT Fenders interconnected in operation with car controlling elements.

    (1)     Note.  During the reclassification of former subclasses 91+ of
    Class 180, Motor Vehicles, now subclasses 274+ thereof, it was not possible
    to review the art of this area (subclasses 2+) to determine if a conflict
    exists between the two areas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 274+ for a motor vehicle provided with a
    safety-promoting means which is responsive to the engagement of a portion
    of the perimeter (e.g., fender) of the vehicle with an external object, and
    see (1) Note of this subclass (2).


CLS 293/3
TXT The operation of the fender is concurrent with releasing device for a
    cable-grip.


CLS 293/4
TXT The fender operation is interconnected with an electric switch which
    relates to the control of the car movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 279 for a motor vehicle provided with a
    safety-promoting means which is responsive to the engagement of a portion
    of the perimeter (e.g., a fender) of the vehicle with an external object
    and wherein the response interrupts an electrical system of the vehicle or
    its motor, and see (1) Note of subclass 2 above.


CLS 293/5
TXT Movable fender devices under subclass 2 interconnected with the operation
    of a fluid brake system for the car.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 275+ for a motor vehicle provided with a
    safety-promoting means which is responsive to the engagement of a portion
    of the perimeter (e.g., a fender) of the vehicle with an external object
    and wherein the response applies one or more braking devices on the
    vehicle, and see (1) Note of subclass 2 above.


CLS 293/6
TXT The operation of a track or rail brake is connected up with the fender
    operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 275+ as explained in the reference
    thereto appearing in subclass 5 above, and see especially indented subclass
    276.


CLS 293/7
TXT A wedge or chock-block engages both the wheel and rail and is connected in
    operation with the fender.


CLS 293/8
TXT Brake-shoes for the car-wheels connected for operation with a fender.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 275+ as explained in the reference
    thereto appearing in subclass 5 above.


CLS 293/9
TXT Motors, usually pneumatic, for fender operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.


CLS 293/10
TXT Electric motors and electromagnets for fender operation and control.


CLS 293/11
TXT Driving connections from a car axis or wheel for fender operation.  This
    does not include such devices for the rotary subclasses 17 to 20.


CLS 293/12
TXT Devices under the control of the motorman for causing the fender to follow
    a cuved track in a changeable angular relation to the car.


CLS 293/13
TXT Automatic devices connected to the front truck of a car or knuckles of an
    automobile to laterally direct the fender.


CLS 293/14
TXT The interconnection of the fender with the truck and car-body is such as to
    eliminate excessive vertical oscillation of the fender.


CLS 293/15
TXT Boxes, gripping-pads, and wings for catching and retaining a body.


CLS 293/16
TXT Twin body-grasping members move in horizontal planes.


CLS 293/17
TXT Rotary drums and rollers for engaging bodies and moving them to a safe
    position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the notes thereunder.


CLS 293/18
TXT Two driven rolls which in plan form a V diverging from the front toward the
    rear.


CLS 293/19
TXT Apparatus under subclass 17 comprising a horizontal wheel arranged in front
    of the car and having a diameter substantially that of car-truck width.


CLS 293/20
TXT One or more endless body-engaging belts form all or a portion of the
    car-fender.


CLS 293/21
TXT Oscillating or reciprocatory devices for positively moving bodies
    transversely and to one side of the track.


CLS 293/22
TXT The same as subclass 21 except that a pair of projectors are used, one for
    each side of the track.


CLS 293/23
TXT The same as subclass 21 except that a member arranged transversely of the
    vehicle end is designed to yield rearwardly at one end to effect the
    shunting of the body from the track.


CLS 293/24
TXT Fenders which are projected forwardly when a body is to be engaged.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11.


CLS 293/25
TXT Fenders in which a spring-power is used for projecting the fender forwardly.


CLS 293/26
TXT The same as subclass 25 except that the fender is thrust forward by
    spring-actuated plungers, the spring being concentric with the plunger.


CLS 293/27
TXT Fenders of lazy-tongs form.


CLS 293/28
TXT Fenders which are adapted to slide rearwardly under a car-platform to get
    them out of the way when not in use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     25 and 26.


CLS 293/29
TXT The same as subclass 28 with the addition of a vertical foldable fender
    hinged to the sliding fender.


CLS 293/30
TXT Bumpers at opposite ends of a vehicle interconnected through their mounting
    means so that impact on one is absorbed by the mounting means of both.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126,    for bumpers extending entirely around a vehicle.


CLS 293/31
TXT A fender at the front of or on the dashboard of a car which may uphold a
    body and wheel-guard fender under a car-platform.  The dash-fender usually
    controls the wheel-guard fender.


CLS 293/32
TXT The front fender element lifts up usually by a body passing thereunder,
    which results in the tripping of the wheel-fender, so that the body may be
    caught therein.


CLS 293/33
TXT A vertically-depending trip-gate is located between the dash and wheel
    fenders, so that a body not caught by the dash-fender will operate the
    trip-gate and drop the wheel-fender.


CLS 293/34
TXT A fender caused to drop to the lowered position by the operator working a
    hand-lever or foot-pedal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35.


CLS 293/35
TXT The same as subclass 34 except that a depending trip-gate controls the
    drop-fender.


CLS 293/36
TXT The drop-fender is operated by direct contact with a body or through a
    contactor, such as a rope or trigger-bar, connected to the front end of the
    drop-fender.


CLS 293/37
TXT Drop-fenders having a body-contact trip, which is a buffer separate from
    the drop-fender--that is, the buffer does not drop with the drop-fender.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31      and 32.


CLS 293/38
TXT Fenders adapted to catch a body and a front barrier to retain the body, so
    that it will not fall from the front of the fender.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15.


CLS 293/39
TXT The fender has a tilting floor or receiver which tilts downward toward the
    rear to retain the body.


CLS 293/40
TXT The fender has an inclined front net, which on receiving a body pulls up
    the front end of the fender to retain the body.


CLS 293/41
TXT An upright apron drops toward the track or may be extended upwardly away
    from the track or may be expanded both upwardly and downwardly.


CLS 293/42
TXT Fenders of general scoop type not otherwise classified.


CLS 293/43
TXT Fenders of scoop type carried at all times on wheels traveling on the rails.


CLS 293/44
TXT Fenders of scoop type pivotally mounted at the rear or top.


CLS 293/45
TXT Hinged scoop-fenders adapted to fold up in front of the vehicle.


CLS 293/46
TXT Inclined-net folding fenders with a roller for winding up the net.


CLS 293/47
TXT Scoop-fender supported by swinging links.


CLS 293/48
TXT Fenders of locomotive-pilot shape, usually intended to deflect the body to
    the side of the track.


CLS 293/49
TXT The front of the fender is provided with loose rollers adapted to
    facilitate the passage of the body to the side of the track.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124,    for bar type buffers with rollers.


CLS 293/50
TXT The fender is provided with wings adapted to be extended laterally from
    each side of the fender.


CLS 293/53
TXT The body-engaging member is formed of a plurality of fingers or long teeth.


CLS 293/58
TXT Individual wheel-guards under the class definition extending downwardly in
    front of each front wheel to clear objects from the path of the wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 810+ and 297 for earth working apparatus
    which may include an earth working tool in front of a vehicle wheel.


CLS 293/102
TXT BUFFER OR BUMPER TYPE:

    Devices under the class definition being bumper means having an impact
    member comprising bars, plates, or other barrier structure attached to the
    vehicle body, frame, or other parts for the purpose of fending off blows
    from other vehicles or objects.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses include combinations of claimed
    specific bumper structure and such vehicle structure (e.g., panel, door,
    etc.) which is modified specifically to accommodate the bumper or such
    vehicle structure with which a bumper otherwise has a specific cooperative
    relationship.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 45 for carpet
    sweepers having bumper means attached thereto.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 633+ for a grille,
    per se, consisting of either a perforated sheet, plural members held at
    spaced intervals, or a single elongated member shaped to define an area;
    and subclasses 656.8 and 716.5+ for an in situ attached channel or a trim
    strip.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 98 for a radiator with an adjustable face
    covering means.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 68.6 for vehicles having radiator
    protectors. See also subclasses 274+ for a motor vehicle provided with a
    safety promoting means which is responsive to the engagement of a portion
    of the perimeter of the vehicle (e.g., fender) with an external object.

    213,    Railway Draft Appliances, subclass 9 for cushioned draft appliances
    combined with car end buffer means; and subclasses 220+ for car end bumpers
    of buffers.

    267,    Spring Devices, for fluid and other types of springs, as found, for
    example, in subclasses 116 and 139+ useful in the construction of a bumper
    for a vehicle.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 481 for artic ulated vehicles having means
    by which one vehicle push another vehicle.  Also see subclasses 415.1,
    491.1+, 500+, and 505 for articulated vehicles having means which may
    include bumper structure or modification thereof for the purpose of
    interconnecting the vehicles.  See subclass 770 for vehicle attachments
    designed to protect a particular part of the vehicle from externally caused
    damage.


CLS 293/103
TXT Having means maintaining bumper distance above road:

    Device under subclass 102 having means for mounting the bumper means on a
    vehicle so that as the vehicle body moves vertically because of irregular
    road or ground conditions or because of acceleration or deceleration, a
    constant spacing is maintained between the road and said bumper means.


CLS 293/104
TXT Vibration dampening type:

    Device under subclass 102 wherein the bumper means particularly
    constructed, either by inherent design or by the attachment of additional
    elements (e.g., spring), so that, as a unit, the bumper means tends to
    dampen shimmy or other undesirable vibration which develops in the moving
    vehicle.


CLS 293/105
TXT For use on two or three wheel cycle:

    Device under subclass 102 particularly constructed for attachment to
    bicycles, tricycles, or motorcycles.


CLS 293/106
TXT Having a storage compartment:

    Device under subclass 102 having container means for liquids, gases, or
    solids for transportation or storage and means for removing the contents of
    said container means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107+,   for bumpers having means for containing a liquid in gas in the
    impact member for the purpose of absorbing an impact force on the bumper.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclasses 489+, and 512+ for
    auxiliary luggage carriers attachable to bumpers.


CLS 293/107
TXT Having fluid means within impact means to absorb energy:

    Devices under subclass 102 wherein the impact member has gas or liquid
    confined therein by a means which takes advantage of the properties of said
    gas or liquid to absorb the force of impact of said member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    for bumpers having means which may be used for storing and
    transporting materials such as gases or liquids.

    134,    for bumpers having fluid shock absorbers interposed between the
    impact member and the vehicle structure.


CLS 293/108
TXT Bumper guard:

    Device under subclass 107 in which the liquid or gas is confined in an
    additional force impact receiving means which is attached to the main force
    impact receiving means or to some other part of the vehicle and the
    function of the additonal means is to protect a limited portion only of the
    main impact receiving means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    146+ and 149+, for structures which are an addition to the main
    impact member and which may also be directly impacted by other objects.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 500+ and 505 for impact bar guards
    designed to serve as trailer hitches.


CLS 293/109
TXT Foam filled impact means:

    Device under subclass 107 in which the liquid-or gas-confining means is a
    cellular spongy material usually made from plastic, rubber, or like
    substances.


CLS 293/110
TXT Compartmented impact means:

    Device under subclass 107 in which the gas or liquid is confined in
    relatively large isolated compartments or in compartments having means
    permitting flow or the gas or liquid between compartments to thereby absorb
    the force of impact.


CLS 293/111.1
TXT With vehicle jack:

    Device under subclass 102 having, in combination therewith, jack means
    movable between an inoperative position and an operation positions, for the
    purpose of lifting a vehicle, or a part thereof, off of the surface on
    which the vehicle is supported.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 133 for a vehicle jack wherein significance is attributed to the
    interface between the jack and the bumper; and subclasses 418+ for a jack
    attached to a vehicle at a place other than the bumper.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 763.1 for a land vehicle having an
    attached prop, support or stabilizer.


CLS 293/112
TXT With means to deflect road debris:

    Device under subclass 102 having shields, plates, or other means attached
    thereto for the purpose of fending off stones and other matter thrown from
    the roadway by the vehicle when moving.


CLS 293/113
TXT Having vehicle exhaust pipe receiving means or air scoop opening:

    Device under subclass 102 constructed with an opening therein which has the
    function either to provide a passage therethrough of (a) vehicle engine
    exhaust gases or the conduit carrying said exhaust gases or (b) air forced
    therethrough as the result of the motion of the vehicle through the ambient.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 89.2, 296, and 309 for a motor vehicle
    provided with means for handling the exhaust of its motor.


CLS 293/114
TXT With outrigger means extendable laterally from bumper:

    Device under subclass 102 having means which may be extended from the
    bumper and laterally beyond the confines of the vehicle body for the
    purpose of providing an outrigger to prevent overturning the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    for a bumper impact member in which all or a section thereof may be
    moved in a horizontal place between a plurality of operative positions by
    means other than when impacted by another object.


CLS 293/115
TXT With grille or radiator guard:

    Device under subclass 102 having attached thereto or integral therewith
    structure designed to be located forward of the vehicle radiator for the
    purpose of bending off objects which may otherwise damage said radiator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142+,   for guards which may be attached to the bumper impact means for the
    purpose of protecting a portion of the bumper and which may extend beyond
    the vertical limits of said bumper.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 633+ for vehicle
    grilles or radiator guards, per se.


CLS 293/116
TXT Convertible:

    Device under subclass 102 which by adjustment or relative rearrangement of
    its parts, or by the addition or omission of a part, is so changed as to
    become basic subject matter of another class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 415.1 for articulated vehicles having
    bumpers which may be converted to towing means.


CLS 293/117
TXT Combined:

    Device under subclass 102 combined with a device classified outside this
    class definition and not provided for in other classes or in other
    subclasses in this class.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass, for example, are combinations of bumpers
    with road brushes, bottle openers, switches, signs, lights, tool supports,
    etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 204+ for signs or
    license plates mounted on bumpers where bumper structure is not claimed
    beyond that necessary to mount the reflector.

    70,     Locks, subclasses 237+ for bumpers combined with means for locking
    the wheels against steering.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 830 for bumpers combined with tank truck
    dispensing means; and subclasses 500+ and 505 for land vehicles combined
    with bumpers which form or carry a hitch element for connecting another
    vehicle.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 711+ for antennas
    combined with, having a part of or common with, a vehicle bumper.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    515+ for signal reflectors which can be mounted on a vehicle bumper where
    bumper structure is not claimed beyond that necessary to mount the
    reflector.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 212+ for
    discharging or preventing accumulation of electric charge.


CLS 293/118
TXT Shiftable between operative and inoperative positions other than by impact:

    Device under subclass 102 having impact members or portions thereof that
    may be (a) shifted between operative and inoperative position or (b)
    carried in two or more alternative positions relative to the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  The alternative positions include other than a normal impact
    position such as an extended packing guard position, a nonuse position
    including those permitting access to the vehicle or parts thereof behind
    the bumper, and those facilitating release of interengaged objects,
    positions close to the ground, or inverted positions involving more than a
    mere adjustment of the mounting means to bring the impact member into a
    desired permanent position.

    (2)     Note.  Yielding or yieldably mounted bumpers that move only upon
    frontal impact with an object are classified elsewhere in this class such
    as subclasses 107+, 124, 129, and 132.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140,    for bumper means mounted for vertical adjustment on the vehicle
    spring horn.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclasses 495+ for combined tire
    carriers and movable section bumpers.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 415.1 for bumpers which may be converted
    into towing means; and subclass 491.1+ for draft means on a vehicle which
    may be retracted and serve as a bumper.


CLS 293/119
TXT Horizontally movable to plural operative positions other than by impact:

    Device under subclass 102 in which the impact member or a portion thereof
    is mounted on the vehicle so that it may be slid or swung horizontally and
    longitudinally of the vehicle from one operative position to another
    operative position by means other than when impacted by another object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for an impact member combined with an outrigger means which is
    extendable from the member to a position laterally of the vehicle.


CLS 293/120
TXT Composite bumper:

    Device under subclass 102 in which the impact member is constructured of a
    plurality of diverse substances permanently and rigidly interconnected to
    form a unitary device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    for a bumper impact member useable to store a material for
    transportation thereof.

    107+,   for bumper impact means wherein one of the diverse materials is
    capable of confining a gas or liquid for the purpose of absorbing the force
    of an impact.

    142,    for guards for bumper impact members which comprise a narrow strip
    of material attached to the bumper and extending longitudinally thereon
    which is designed to protect a small portion of the impact member against
    impact.


CLS 293/121
TXT Covered metal bar:

    Device under subclass 120 in which one of the materials from which the
    impact member is constructed is a solid metallic bar and having a diverse
    material completely encasing said bar.


CLS 293/122
TXT Hollow cylinder:

    Device under subclass 120 in which one of the materials from which the
    impact member is constructed is in the form of a tube.


CLS 293/123
TXT Vertically extending only:

    Device under subclass 102 in which the impact member of members are
    exclusively vertical in orientation.


CLS 293/124
TXT Flexible cord or coil sping:

    Device under subclass 102 having an impact member comprising chain, rope,
    wire, elongated rubber member, or coiled spring.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 115+ for cord and rope
    holders.


CLS 293/125
TXT Having roller impact member:

    Device under subclass 102 wherein the impact member comprises rotatable
    means which is free to rotate when impacted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for fenders having rollers for guiding engaged bodies out of the
    path of the vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclass 220 for roller fenders on ships.


CLS 293/126
TXT Bumper extends along side of vehicle:

    Device under subclass 102 which is designed to fend a blow to the side of a
    vehicle to which it is attached.

    (1)     Note.  Fore and aft end bumpers which merely project around the
    vehicle corner and are not attached to the sides are classified on other
    features.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 716.5+ for an in
    situ attached channel or trim strip of more general application which may
    be disclosed or defined as used with a vehicle.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 847+ for rub strips and moldings combined
    with vehicle bodies and mudguards.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclass 41 for wear strips.


CLS 293/127
TXT And completely encircles vehicle:

    Device under subclass 126 wherein the bumper means extends around both
    sides and ends of the vehicle.


CLS 293/128
TXT For side of vehicle only:

    Device under subclass 126 which extends from the end bumper along the side
    of the vehicle body or mudguard and is attached to the vehicle side at
    least at one point.


CLS 293/129
TXT Vehicle suspension spring absorbs force exerted on vehicle:

    Device under subclass 102 being operatively connected to a suspension
    spring means for the vehicle whereby the shock force of a blow encountered
    by said bumper is dampened by said spring as said force is thereby
    transmitted to the vehicle body or frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    for bumpers mounted on the spring horn of a vehicle frame.


CLS 293/130
TXT Single piece impact bar having plural loops in horizontal plane:

    Device under subclass 102 having a least one impact member which consists
    of a single elongated member having a loop or reverse bend located at each
    lateral extremity of the vehicle and wherein there is a single horizontal
    plane common to each bend.


CLS 293/131
TXT Bumper having lever and shock absorber mount:

    Device under subclass 102 having lever or other pivoted link means by which
    an impact force, exerted against the bumper, is transmitted to a shock
    absorbing means intermediate said link and the vehicle body or frame.


CLS 293/132
TXT Bumper having impact force absorbing means directly interposed between
    bumper and vehicle structure:

    Device under subclass 102 in which a shock dampening means is located
    intermediate the bumper impact member and the vehicle body, frame, or
    mudguard so as to attenuate the force which would be transmitted initially
    to the vehicle when the member impacts an object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131,    for bumper having a lever and shock absorber mount.


CLS 293/133
TXT One-shot type:
    Device under subclass 132 in which the usefulness of the shock-dampening
    means is destroyed as the result of its use in dampening the force of a
    single shock.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes one-shot devices which may be
    restored to useable condition by an operator-actuated means only.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 492 for one-shot type
    collapsible steering columns.

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 371+ for a plastically deformable impact
    absorber.

    213,    Railway Draft Appliances, subclass 1 for a one-shot shock absorber.


CLS 293/134
TXT Fluid shock absorber type:

    Device under subclass 132 in which the shock-dampening means employs either
    a compressible fluid or the restricted flow of either a noncompressible
    fluid or compressible fluid as the medium by which the shock force is
    attenuated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107+,   for bumpers in which the impact member contains a fluid for the
    purpose of absorbing the force of impact.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 266+ for fluid type internal-resistance motion
    retarders.


CLS 293/135
TXT Spring type:

    Device under subclass 132 in which the shock-dampening means employs the
    elasticity of a solid material as the means by which the shock force is
    attenuated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, subclass 139 for a spring support means for a
    bumper where only the spring support is claimed.


CLS 293/136
TXT Elastomeric:

    Device under subclass 135 in which the shock-dampening material is an
    elastic rubberlike substance such as a synthetic rubber or a plastic having
    some of the physical properties of rubber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, subclass 140 for elastomeric support means for a
    bumper where only the support is claimed.


CLS 293/137
TXT Coil spring:

    Device under subclass 135 in which the shock-dampening material is in the
    form of a spiral.


CLS 293/138
TXT Bumper mounted on vehicle spring supporting frame member (i.e., spring
    horn):

    Device under subclass 102 having mean attaching the bumper to the curved
    side frame of the vehicle to which the end of the vehicle suspension spring
    is attached.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129,    for a bumper mounted so that the suspension spring for the vehicle
    is also the shock absorbing means for the bumper.


CLS 293/139
TXT Sectional- or wing-type impact bar:

    Device under subclass 138 in which the impact member of the bumper
    comprises two or more sections in horizontal alignment, said sections may
    or may not be connected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149+,   for sectional- or wing-type impact bars.


CLS 293/140
TXT Vertically adjustable:

    Device under subclass 138 having means whereby the impact member may be
    secured in place at one of several possible vertical locations in a plane
    substantially normal to the ground or in an arc about a horizontal axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for bumpers having means which automatically maintain the impact
    member at a given distance vertically above the ground as the vehicle moves.

    118,    for bumper impact means mounted on the vehicle for movement between
    operative and inoperative positions.


CLS 293/141
TXT Bumper attached to vehicle mudguard:

    Device under subclass 102 having means to attach the bumper means to the
    fender or mudguard, or the bracket therefor, which extends over the vehicle
    wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126+,   for bumpers which extend along the side of a vehicle body and which
    may be attached to the vehicle mudguard.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 847+ for land vehicle mudguards.


CLS 293/142
TXT Bumper guard:

    Device under subclass 102 comprising a main horizontally extending impact
    means and additional impact-receiving means, attachable to said main impact
    means or to some other vehicle structure, to protect a limited portion only
    of the entire area of said main impact means against impact by other
    objects.

    (1)     Note.  The additional impact means may have greater height than
    width and may extend beyond the vertical limits of the main impact means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for bumper guards having gas or liquid therein for the purpose of
    absorbing the force of impact thereon.

    115,    for bumpers having additional impact means attached thereto and
    which extend vertically of the bumper as a means to protect the vehicle
    radiator.

    146+,   for vertically spaced impact bars having means interconnecting said
    bars which is not intended as a guard means for said bars.

    149+,   for sectional main impact receiving bumper means having means which
    may lay in the plane of impact merely to interconnect the sections and not
    as protection therefor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 500+ and 505 for impact bar guards
    designed to serve as trailer hitches.


CLS 293/143
TXT Increases vertical area of bumper:

    Device under subclass 142 in which the additional impact-receiving means
    extends vertically beyond the upper or lower extremities of the main
    horizontally extending impact means.

    (1)     Note.  The vertically extending means has greater height than width
    and is less than the length of the main horizontally extending impact
    member which it protects.


CLS 293/144
TXT With horizontal member:

    Device under subclass 143 having horizontally extending means which is
    spaced vertically from the main impact means and which is supported in
    place by the vertically extending impact means.


CLS 293/145
TXT Spring or pivotally mounted:

    Device under subclass 143 in which the bumper guard has spring means in the
    guard or in its attachment to the main impact means or in which the bumper
    guard may have means whereby it may pivot relative to its support.

    (1)     Note.  The guards in this subclass may be pivoted so that objects
    may be removed therefrom, to permit access to other parts of the vehicle,
    etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150,    for bumpers having horizontally extending sections which may be
    mounted to pivot about a vertical axis.


CLS 293/146
TXT Plural impact bars vertically spaced in impact plane:

    Device under subclass 102 having more than one horizontally extending
    impact bar means arranged in a vertical impact plane so that one bar means
    is spaced above another bar means.

    (1)     Note.  Clamps for joining vertically spaced impact bars are in this
    and indented subclasses except when they are used or structured for other
    specific functions, e.g., bumper guards.  For clamps used as bumper guards
    with vertically spaced impact bars see subclass 144.


CLS 293/147
TXT Impact bars intersect in the impact plane:

    Device under subclass 146 in which a plurality of the vertically spaced
    impact bar means are designed to lay in a crossed relation in the impact
    plane.

    (1)     Note.  The bars may or may not be interconnected at point where
    crossed.


CLS 293/148
TXT Impact bars connected at center to support member:

    Device under subclass 146 in which a plurality of the spaced impact bar
    means are connected with a support member, such as a backing bar,
    approximately at the midpoint between the lateral extremities of the impact
    bar means.


CLS 293/149
TXT Sectional- or wing-type impact bars:

    Device under subclass 102 having impact bar like means made up of two or
    more sections in horizontal alignment, said sections may or may not be
    connected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139,    for a sectional- or wing-type bumper mounted on the vehicle spring
    horn.


CLS 293/150
TXT End section pivotable upon impact:

    Device under subclass 149 wherein the impact sections of the bumper located
    relative the lateral extremities of the vehicle are mounted either to the
    vehicle or another section of the bumper for pivotal motion about a
    vertical axis upon impact of said section with another object.

    (1)     Note.  Bumpers in which the pivotally mounted section may break
    away or otherwise become disengaged from its support after having swung a
    predetermined arc, are included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118,    for a bumper in which the impact member or a portion thereof may be
    moved between operative and inoperative positions by means other than
    impact means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 277+ for spring hinges, per se.


CLS 293/151
TXT Having means to interconnect sections:

    Device under subclass 149 having means by which said impact sections are
    interconnected.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are those bumpers in which the
    means interconnecting the impact sections is offset from the impact plane
    of said impact sections usually to accommodate mounting a spare tire or the
    like.


CLS 293/152
TXT Interconnect means lies in bumper impact plane:

    Device under subclass 151 in which the means interconnecting the impact
    sections is itself in the impact plane of the impact sections.


CLS 293/153
TXT Overlapping bar portions:

    Device under subclass 152 in which the impact sections are overlappingly
    connected to form a continuous impact member.


CLS 293/154
TXT End connections:

    Device under subclass 102 having means connecting the extreme ends of the
    impact member and the supporting structure for said impact member.

    (1)     Note.  End connectors, per se, are in this subclass where the sole
    disclosed use is with a vehicle bumper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146+,   for plural vertically spaced impact members having end connections
    with support means.

    155,    for other joints and connections.


CLS 293/155
TXT Joints and connections:

    Device under subclass 102 having means by which the bumper assembly may be
    connected to the vehicle frame, body, or other vehicle structure, or means
    by which various parts of the bumper assembly may be connected together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154,    for connection by which the extreme ends of the impact member are
    connected to its support means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 115+ for cord and rope
    holders; and subclasses 455+ for clasps.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 200+ for bracket-type supports of general
    utility.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for joints of
    general application.


CLS 294/
TTL HANDLING:  HAND AND  HOIST-LINE IMPLEMENTS

CLS 294/
TXT         This class comprises all devices combined with handles, terminal
    elements, or attachments peculiarly adapted for engaging supporting
    articles or materials for handling or manipulating purposes and not
    structurally limited to any classified art and such combinations thereof
    and accessories therefor as not elsewhere classifiable.

    (1)     Note.  This class includes power applying element which relate to
    the engaging of the load and not to its movement thereafter, except that a
    means for applying a straight line force or push to the load after the load
    has been released from the engaging means to move the load away from the
    engaging means is classified in this class.

    (2)     Note.  The addition of wheels to any type of handlers included in
    this class, except where such addition is merely incidental, (such as
    adding casters to hoisting buckets), is held to involve transportation
    combinations.

    (3)     Note.  This class does not include hoisting machines, which are
    provided for in Class 414, Material or Article Handling.

    (4)     Note.  For hand and hoist-line terminal implements and attachments,
    classifiable on their necessary function in more elemental classes, see
    particularly, Classes 24, Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., 279, Chucks or
    Sockets, and 403, Joints and Connections.

    (5)     Note.  For hand and hoist-line terminal implements and attachments
    so specialized as to be of only limited application as handling devices see
    particularly lasses 30, Cutlery, 43, Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin
    Destroying, 56, Harvesters, 81, Tools, 111, Planting, 119, Animal Husbandry
    and 258, Railway Mail Delivery.

    (6)     Note.  For hand and hoist-line terminal implements and attachments
    involving features additional to mere handling, such as changing the shape
    or condition of the matter engaged, see particularly Classes 37,
    Excavating, and 100, Presses.

    (7)     Note.  For power applying elements that relate to the movement of
    the load see Classes 198, Conveyors:  Power-Driven, 212, Traversing Hoists,
    414, Material or Article Handling, 254, Implements or Apparatus for
    Applying Pushing or Pulling Force, and 280, Land Vehicles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 16+, for miscellaneous shields for the hands
    not specialized as handling devices.

    5,      Beds, subclasses 861+, for invalid lifts and transfer devices.

    7,      Compound Tools, for compound tools involving some features outside
    of this class.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 104.03+, 146,
    147.1+, 173, 177+, and 220.1+, for holders for cleaning implements.

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 110+ for handles.

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., appropriate subclasses, for
    nonforce transmitting or driving, holding devices and gripping elements,
    per se, handling-implement combinations not being present.  (See specific
    search notes below and 4 Note).

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 700+, for assembling-frames,
    valve-lifters, piston-ring removers and the like devices.

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 322+, for table forks.  (Also see 5 Note).

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 182, 411+, and 461, for scoops and orange
    peel and clamshell buckets.  (See 6 Note).

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 6, for fishing
    harpoons and spears.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 1.01, for tong-like devices for treating
    tobacco-plants, etc.

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 147+ for machines to form packages
    combined with means to group the contents thereof prior to completion of
    the packaging operation.

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 328.1+, for fruit gatherers.  (Also see Note
    5).

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclasses 101.1+, 111 and 113,
    for processes for making implements such as rakes, shovels, pitchforks, etc.

    81,     Tools, for a hand held tool specifically adapted to permit
    manipulation of a part, (e.g. fastener, valve) rather than merely
    transporting or moving an article from one location to another.  Class 81
    is the generic locus for pliers (subclasses 300+) and wrendus (subclasses
    53+).  See also subclass 487 for hand held holder (e.g., welding rod,
    holder) and miscellaneous hand tools having a clamp.

    100,    Presses, subclass 234 for plier type presses not elsewhere provided
    for.

    111,    Planting (See 5 Note).

    114,    Ships, subclasses 51 and 221, for tools for use in ships and ship
    making, repairing, etc.; and subclasses 378+ for releasing devices claiming
    modified boat structure, separable fastenings on hoist-line and boat, and
    those showing boat fixtures of releasing hook type.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 712+ for a device for controlling or
    handling an animal, especially subclasses 801+ for catching or holding
    animals.  (Also see 5 Note).

    140,    Wireworking, subclasses 123+ for tools for wireworking.

    166,    Wells, appropriate subclasses for processes including grappling in
    a well bore, subclass 98 for grapples combined with well anchored lifting
    means, subclass 99 for well devices with junk retrievers, subclasses 162+
    for well receptacles.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclasses 50+ for plant and
    buried object pull-up type extractor devices having a wheel or ground
    supported frame.

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 43, 44, 63, and 127 for brakes involving
    gripping and release.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 396+ for bottle holding and carrying
    devices of types other than those provided for in subclasses 27.1+ of this
    class (294).

    220,    Receptacles, appropriate subclasses, for receptacles with handles
    to be manipulated by hand.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for article dispensers
    not otherwise provided for, many of which include a supply receptacle
    containing articles to be dispensed, combined with an implement of the
    handling, hand and hoist-line implement type of removing articles from said
    supply receptacle. See particularly subclasses 210+ in which discharge
    assistants of the article adhering or gripping type are included in
    combination with a source of supply of articles.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 113-119 for devices specialized for
    holding footwear.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    appropriate subclasses, for devices wherein handling-terminals are combined
    with means for obtaining some mechanical advantage in handling the load.
    (Also see 7 Note).

    258,    Railway Mail Delivery, subclass 3, for handling implements for the
    delivery of train-orders to persons on moving trains.  (Also see 5 Note).

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses. Class 269 is the residual
    locus for patents to a device for clamping, supporting and/or holding an
    article (or articles) in position to be operated on or treated.  See notes
    thereunder for other related loci.

    279,    Chucks and Sockets (see 4 Note).

    280,    Land Vehicles, (see 7 Note).

    396,    Photography, subclasses 647+ for photographer's work handling
    devices in fluid treating apparatus.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 186 for divers tools; and
    subclasses 190+ for submarines and diving bells having remotely operated
    means (e.g., mechanical arms) for performing underwater work.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 444+, 618+ and 729+ for
    portable grapples or grappling mechanism having power means for moving or
    manipulating the mechanism.

    449,    Bee Culture, subclasses 61+ for a handling implement to be used in
    manipulating the components of a bee hive.

    452,    Butchering, subclasses 17 for oyster openers and subclasses 189+
    for supports for animal carcasses to facilitate their handling during
    butchering (gambrels).

    606,    Surgery, subclasses 205+, for forceps. 130, Threshing, subclass 4
    for corn husking pegs.

    901,    Robots, subcollection 31+ for gripping devices useable on robots.


CLS 294/1.1
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Devices under class definition not provided for under more specific titles.


CLS 294/1.2
TXT CONTACT LENS APPLICATOR:

    Devices under the class definition especially adapted for the handling of a
    contact lens during insertion or removal from the eye.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 5.1 for contact lens
    applicators which also include, in combination, a receptacle for storing
    the lenses.


CLS 294/1.3
TXT SANITARY HANDLER FOR PET DROPPINGS:

    Devices under the class definition specially adapted to handle waste
    excreted from a small domesticated animal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 257.1+ for
    dustpan type implements.


CLS 294/1.4
TXT Pole mounted:

    Devices under subclass 1.3 which are mounted on an elongated member so that
    the handling may be done by a person in a standing position.


CLS 294/1.5
TXT Catcher:

    Devices under subclass 1.4 specially adapted to intercept the waste before
    it is deposited on an underlying surface.


CLS 294/2
TXT Devices under class definition including combinations of two or more types
    of implements included within the class. Multiple or convertible or
    combined implements belonging in the same major subclass group in this
    class are classified with such groups.

    (1)     Note.  Devices involving combined features not tools or handling
    devices will be found with the specific structures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, appropriate subclass.

    42,     Firearms, subclass 93, for gun attachments forming combined
    intrenching-tools and shields.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 386+ for bottle-carriers combined with
    openers, etc.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 466+, for dispensers having auxiliary
    tilting handles.


CLS 294/3
TXT Devices under subclass 2 having one or more implements of the plier or tong
    type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, subclasses 125+, where one of the tools in the
    combination does not fall within this class.

    81,     Tools, subclasses 303+, for pliers and tongs with multiple jaws.


CLS 294/3.5
TXT Device under the class definition comprising a hand tray for holding mortar.


CLS 294/3.6
TXT ZIPPER PULLING TOOL:

    Devices under the class definition including means which releasably engages
    a zipper slider and pulls it along the interlocking surfaces of its zipper
    to open or close the zipper.

    (1)     Note.  Patents which claim the combination of a tool for moving a
    zipper slider and details of the zipper are classified in this subclass.


CLS 294/4
TXT Devices under class definition, usually of the grapple type, peculiarly
    adapted for rolling barrels or similar objects.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for swiveled grasper-terminals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 35+, for car pusher type implements, particularly the wheel
    engaging type.


CLS 294/5
TXT Devices under class definition peculiarly adapted to facilitate the
    handling of ears of hot corn at the dining table.

    (1)     Note.  Expect for specialized implements search general structural
    subclasses of this class indented under subclasses 61 and 86.4.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for swiveled grasper-terminals.

    61,     for implements in the nature of spears. (See Note 1).

    86.4,   for grapples of general utility (See Note 1).


CLS 294/5.5
TXT Rods or sticks under class definition adapted to support material thereon
    for the purpose of facilitating handling, not specially adapted for
    handling articles at a distance.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the patents in this subclass relate to sticks to
    which tobacco leaves or stalks may be strung to facilitate handling, and to
    sticks or poles for supporting sheet during drying.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19.1+,  for rods or poles peculiarly adapted for handling articles at a
    distance.

    61,     for spears.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., appropriate subclasses, for
    attaching clips, per se.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 240, for
    apparatus within that class including rod supports and not more
    specifically provided for.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 26, for devices for use in
    stringing tobacco upon sticks or unstringing tobacco therefrom.


CLS 294/6
TXT Devices under class definition peculiarly adapted to grasp objects of
    platelike form and turn them in a horizontal plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for rotatable graspers on globe manipulating poles.

    27.1,   for plate lifters generally.


CLS 294/7
TXT Devices of flat blade-like type under class definition peculiarly adapted
    to turn pancakes.


CLS 294/8
TXT Devices under subclass 7 having positively operating means to bring about
    the oscillation of the blade, usually about an axis parallel with the
    handle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclass 53.12 for rotatable globe manipulators of the pole
    type.


CLS 294/8.5
TXT Devices of the plier or tong type under class definition peculiarly adapted
    to lift clothes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for compound implements including one or more plier or tong type
    devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 300+, for pliers and tongs of general utility.


CLS 294/8.6
TXT Device under the class definition provided with prongs or other analogous
    structure for use in grasping and forcing a carpet or like covering into
    place in laying it.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 200+, for a similar device including means for affording
    mechanical advantage.


CLS 294/9
TXT Devices under class definition peculiarly adapted for use with domestic
    stoves and furnaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49+,    for fire-shovels.


CLS 294/10
TXT Devices under subclass 9 comprising combined stove implements not otherwise
    classifiable, usually lid-lifters and pokers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for miscellaneous compound tools comprising two or more types found
    in this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, subclass 109 for similar devices including a tool
    not proper for Class 294.


CLS 294/11
TXT Devices under subclass 9 known as "household" or "kitchen" tongs and
    designed to be used in connection with stoves and open grates.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99.1+,  for resilient grapples generally.

    104,    for grapples of general utility having a fixed and a movable jaw.


CLS 294/12
TXT Devices under subclass 9 including structure or form of stove-lid lifters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 116, for stove-lid lifters having
    insulated handles.


CLS 294/13
TXT Devices under subclass 12 having a pivoted grasping, latching, or bearing
    jaw.


CLS 294/14
TXT Devices under subclass 9 including household pokers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 173, for raking attachments for
    grates.


CLS 294/15
TXT Load engaging bars or frames under class definition provided with one or
    more handholds or equivalent means permitting the load to be carried or an
    article to be manipulated by one or more persons, usually at the normal
    level of the hands.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137,    for other article carriers adapted to be gripped and carried by the
    hand.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 861+, for devices specialized to handling invalids.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 29 (and see the notes thereto) for hand bars, etc., in which a
    continuously applied force operates successively to bring the apparatus
    into engagement with the load and then to handle the load.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 47.17+, 47.34+ and 79.11+ for similar
    structures having the invention in the wheels or runners.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclass 20 for wheeled stretchers.


CLS 294/16
TXT Devices under subclass 15 having pairs of load-engaging elements
    contracting or expanding against the object carried.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113+,   for pivoted jaw grapples having a surrounding frame.


CLS 294/17
TXT Devices under subclass 15 having lifting-levers provided intermediate their
    length with load-engaging hooks fixed or movably mounted thereon.  In this
    subclass are included the second-class levers (cant dogs) used for handling
    logs and heavy timbers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 302 and 303, for similar devices for
    removing stumps and stones.

    157,    Wheelwright Machines, subclasses 1.1+ particularly subclasses 1.26+
    and 1.86, and subclasses 5 and 11, for similar structures adapted for the
    mounting and demounting of rubber tires.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 35+, for car pushing implements, and 131, for single throw
    levers of general utility.


CLS 294/18
TXT Devices under subclass 15 comprising hand bars to facilitate the coupling
    and uncoupling or railway cars from a safe position, usually outside of the
    trackway.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    213,    Railway Draft Appliances, subclasses 205+, for vehicle attached
    coupling- operating tools.


CLS 294/19.1
TXT POLE MOUNTED IMPLEMENT:

    Devices under class definition comprising a handling implement mounted on
    an elongated handle for the handling of articles at a distance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86.1+,  for grappling devices peculiarly adapted to function in a well bore
    or similar earth opening.

    86.4+,  for grappling devices not clearly specialized as handling poles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, for pole mounted
    implements which fall under the Class 15 definition of cleaning (e.g.,
    scrapers, brushes, etc.) and particularly subclasses 104.05+, 146, 147.1+,
    173, 177+, and 220.1+ for terminal clamping attachments for cleaning
    elements on pole-supports.

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclass 461 for a fixture on a
    closure adapted to be engaged by a pole.

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 328 for a pole mounted fruit and nut gathers
    which usually show severing or receptacle attachments.

    81,     Tools, subclass 3.8 for devices including a pole structure provided
    with means for inserting or removing a fuse in a fuse block, and subclasses
    53.1+ for wrenches comprising pole like handle structures and peculiarly
    adapted for engaging work at a distance.

    114,    Ships, subclasses 221 and 230 for pole mounted handling implements
    wherein the sole disclosures is for use with ships.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 801+ for a hand held catching and
    holding tool for animals.

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 259, for staff type support for lighted pipes,
    cigars, etc.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 174, for pole supported dispensers.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing for pole mounted spray
    nozzles.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 351+, for props and braces of general
    application.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 394+, for operators for switches and
    valves for illumination devices.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 269 for an igniting charge holding and firing
    implement.


CLS 294/19.2
TXT Ball retriever:

    Devices under subclass 19.1 particularly adapted for retrieving balls used
    in games (e.g., golf or tennis balls).


CLS 294/19.3
TXT Grappling gaff:

    Device under subclass 19.1 wherein the handling implement has moveable
    grasping elements of a barbed or hook like configuration for the purpose of
    capturing an animate object (e.g., fish).

    (1)     Note.  These devices usually include spring biased, trigger
    actuated jaws which, upon contact with animate object, will be
    automatically actuated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110.1,  for automatically actuated pivoted jaw grapples which are not
    mounted on poles.


CLS 294/22
TXT Devices under subclass 19.1 peculiarly adapted for handling goods in the
    windows or on the shelves of stores.


CLS 294/23
TXT Devices under subclass 22 having more than one article-engaging means,
    usually to be selectively used.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for miscellaneous compound implements under the class definition.


CLS 294/23.5
TXT Poles under subclass 19.1 peculiarly adapted for use in handling laundry.


CLS 294/24
TXT Devices under subclass 19.1 having several article-engaging terminals,
    usually to be used selectively.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for miscellaneous compound tools under the class definition.

    23,     for compound implements especially adapted for handling store goods.

    87.1+,  for grapples for multiple objects.


CLS 294/25
TXT Miscellaneous hand and finger attachments under class definition designed
    to facilitate the handling of articles or material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes devices especially adapted for
    handling sheets of paper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131,    for shield devices under the class definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 16+ for a guard or protector for the hand
    against unusual conditions such as the application of a strong force, high
    temperature, etc.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 104.94 and
    227, for a wiper, dauber or polisher in the form of a mitt or cott; and
    subclass 443, for a penholder shaped to receive a hand or finger.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 95.2, for a
    hand-or finger-attachable blotter.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 712+ for body harness of general
    utility and search notes for various fields of search involving harnesses.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 7 and 8, for an
    implement of that class including a hand-or finger-attachable pocket or
    loop or strap.

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, subclasses 25+ for attachments for
    husking and shelling corn.


CLS 294/26
TXT Miscellaneous hand implements under class definition having the general
    configuration of a hook.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for compound implements, one element of which may be a hook.

    82.1+,  for hoist-line or grab hooks.

    87.1+,  for devices of the pipe-hook type for handling a plurality of
    objects.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 801, for crook type animal catchers.


CLS 294/26.5
TXT Apparatus under class definition in which a hand manipulable material
    support in the nature of a container, platform or open frame work is
    comprised of relatively displaceable portions facilitating the gravity
    discharge of the material from the support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7+,     for pancake turners.

    68.22+, for hoist-line buckets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 407 for food discharging
    supports associated with a cooking liquid bath.

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 66.1 for molds including means to apply a
    force to a molded product to remove or release the same from the mold.


CLS 294/27.1
TXT DETACHABLE PLATE AND RECEPTACLE LIFTER:

    Devices under class definition particularly adapted to handle receptacles
    of any of the various types, such as jars, cuspidors, plates, pots, etc.,
    and which are readily removable therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for plate turners.

    86.1+,  for grappling devices particularly adapted to function in a well
    bore or similar earth opening.

    86.4+,  for devices of similar structure, but of general application, and
    for crucible tongs and grapples usually of special construction for
    hoist-line operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 114+ for similar devices which
    provide a handle for a receptacle and which are designed to engage or
    cooperate with a modification of the receptacle. Conventional features or
    designs of a receptacle such as a bead are not considered a modification of
    a receptacle to receive a handle.

    81,     Tools, subclasses 3.07+, for special tools adapted for facilitating
    various operations upon fruit jars or similar articles, usually involving
    the applying or removing of covers or the loosening of packing rings  and
    subclasses 300+ for releaseable gripping tools (e.g., pliers).

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclass 39 for a trunk handle and
    subclasses 115+ for a traveling bag combined with a handle.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 396+ for bottle and jar handling
    attachments combined with bottle or jar structure.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 752+ for a handle for a receptacle wherein
    the handle structure is part of the device or the receptacle is modified to
    receive the handle.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 466+, for dispensers having auxiliary
    tilting handles.

    248,    Supports, subclass 145.6 for self supporting devices which support
    a receptacle in substantially spaced relationship to a horizontal surface
    such as a table, floor, or the ground, and include a handle.


CLS 294/28
TXT Devices under subclass 27.1 having pivoted load-engaging members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for fixed and pivoted jaw grapples.

    106+,   for pivoted jaw grapples.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 415, 347+ and 424, for pliers and tongs having
    pivotally connected jaws.


CLS 294/29
TXT Devices under subclass 28 engaging both the rim and bottom of the
    receptacle.


CLS 294/30
TXT Devices under subclass 28 having pivots upon an axis parallel with the
    handle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclass 346, for pliers and tongs having parallel pivoted
    rods.


CLS 294/31.1
TXT Rim gripping jaws:

    Devices under subclass 28 grasping the rim or edge of the receptacle or
    plate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86.4+,  for grapples of general utility.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 300+, for pliers.


CLS 294/31.2
TXT Lifting devices under subclass 27.1 comprising a strip of material adapted
    to extend around a receptacle and provide substantially continuous.

    (1)     Note.  A handle portion for these devices is usually associated
    with the means for securing the ends of the strip together or with eyelets
    formed intermediate the ends of the strip.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for band type graspers having pivotally connected sectors.

    33,     for grapples in which the strip is of resilient material and is
    formed to provide relatively movable distinct jaw portions.


CLS 294/32
TXT Devices under subclass 27.1 usually of plate or fork-like shape designed to
    be pushed under a plate or receptacle and to handle the same by supplying
    merely a bottom support for such article.


CLS 294/33
TXT Devices under subclass 27.1, in which the gripping members are so connected
    as to form spring-arms and depend upon the spring of the material to open
    or close the jaws.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99.1,   for resilient grapples of general utility.

    99.2,   for tweezers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 530+, for resilient
    clasps.


CLS 294/34
TXT Devices under subclass 27.1, in which the jaws have a relative sliding
    movement, one or both jaws moving on guides.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for fixed and movable jaw grapples.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 355+, for pliers and tongs having a sliding jaw.


CLS 294/49
TXT Hand implements under class definition comprising a stem or handle fitted
    at one end with a blade or row of tines extending in the general direction
    of the handle and designed to engage and lift a load usually when held in
    approximately horizontal position.

    (1)     Note.  Hand implements constructed with a bottom, three sides and
    an open fourth side and used like scoops, and otherwise meeting the
    definition of subclass 55, have been placed in subclass 55 even though they
    have no handle or have a handle disposed in a position otherwise than that
    set out in the definition of this subclass (49).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for pancake turners.

    61,     for fork-like devices designed to be used in a vertical position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 257.1+ for
    dust pans.

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 322+ for table and culinary forks.

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 411+ for scoop structures.

    42,     Firearms, subclass 93 for intrenching-tools.

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 400.12 for hand rakes provided with grapples.

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclasses 111 and 113 for
    making forks and shovels.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, particularly subclasses 63+,
    82, 100, 102, and 105 for wheel or runner supported devices provided with
    spaced depending teeth or tines which are adapted to comb through the earth
    and gather therefrom desired plants or like buried objects.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 371+ for hand held earth working tools
    other than shovels or forks (e.g., hoes).

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 316 for an earth boring
    device having relatively movable parts to facilitate emptying without
    disassembly.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 418 and
    419, for shovel type sifters.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 54.1, 57.1, 59.1, and 125, for racks
    with impaling means.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 131.5, for forks and shovels having fixed or movable fulcrums.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for a joint between
    a tool and a handle wherein no structure of either the tool or handle is
    included, other than that which cooperates to form the joint.


CLS 294/50
TXT Implements under subclass 49 having reciprocating elements to push the load
    from the fork-tines or shovel-blade.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for spears having clearers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 129, for forks under the definition of that class
    combined with strippers.

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 400.08+, for rakes equipped with cleaners.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 313, for an earth boring
    bit or cutter element provided with a mechanical cleaner therefor.


CLS 294/50.5
TXT Implements under subclass 50 wherein the fork or shovel is of the grappling
    type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 129, for cutlery forks having material holding
    and ejecting means.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclasses, 73+ for transplanting receptacles
    having clearing or ejecting means.

    111,    Planting, subclass 101 for an apparatus which removes a plant from
    the soil for transplanting purposes or sets a plant into the soil and which
    may use a grappling type fork or shovel


CLS 294/50.6
TXT Implements under subclass 49 peculiarly adapted to grasp, grapple or
    otherwise retain a load in or on the fork or shovel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86.4+,  for grapples of general types and see the search notes following
    the definition of subclasses 86.4+

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, subclasses 114+, for grappling type root cutters
    equipped with a cutter.

    30,     Cutlery, particularly subclasses 124+, for cutlery devices having
    means acting to hold or dispose of material, and see (7) Note to the
    definition of subclass 124 for a statement of the line.

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 400.12, for hand rakes equipped with material
    holding or receiving means of grappling type.

    111,    Planting, subclasses 118+, for devices for impregnating the earth
    with liquid or gases and having means to hold material such as water or the
    like and also provided with an earth working implement and subclasses 92+,
    101, and 106+, for similar devices for setting plants or seeds.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 132, for grappling type root pullers equipped with a fulcrum means.


CLS 294/50.7
TXT Implements under subclass 50.6 wherein the shovel blade or blades or the
    fork tines are arranged so as to form in cross section a substantially
    closed curve, usually a circle.  The load holding portion is substantially
    rigid although it may be sufficiently resilient so as to be flexed to
    contract and grasp the load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, particularly subclasses 130, 301, 302, and 316, for
    annular hand cutters.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclasses 73+, for transplanting receptacles
    adapted to and used for the purpose of removing a core of earth with a
    plant.


CLS 294/50.8
TXT Implements under subclass 50.6 wherein a movable member cooperates with the
    fork or shovel to grip the load.  The member may be another fork or shovel
    blade.


CLS 294/50.9
TXT Implements under subclass 50.8 wherein one blade or set of tines is rigid
    with the tool handle and the cooperating member is movably mounted and is
    provided with means to move it relative to the fixed blade or tines.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103.1+, for grapples of similar construction.


CLS 294/51
TXT Implements under subclass 49 having parts or adjustments permitting a
    single implement to be used as or converted into either a fork or a shovel,
    or a device of either of these types to be used as or changed to a
    different implement or a different type of the same implement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for forks or shovels combined with other handling implements.

    10,     for combined type stove implements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, particularly subclasses 114+.

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 245 for convertible or changeable earth
    working implements.


CLS 294/52
TXT Implements under subclass 51 having structural features or adjustments
    permitting them to be used as either forks or rakes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 400.04+ for hand rakes combined with tools
    other than forks.


CLS 294/53.5
TXT Implements under subclass 49 wherein the fork or shovel head is pivotally
    and adjustably attached to the handle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 400.18, 400.19 and 400.2 for hand rake heads
    adjustable mounted to a handle.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 372+ for a hand held earth working tool
    such as a hoe with an adjustable head.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 52+ for articulated joints in
    general.


CLS 294/54.5
TXT Snow shovel:

    Shovels under subclass 49 having a relatively broad blade adapted to handle
    snow or similar material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for a general purpose, manually operated scoop.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 264+ for a snow excavating scoop including
    three closed sides and an open fourth side; and subclasses 266+ for a snow
    plow wherein the blade is obliquely angled relative to the handle and is
    not designed to lift a load.


CLS 294/55
TXT Implements under subclass 49 designed to facilitate the handling of bulk
    material and usually provided with bowl-like load-engaging terminals or
    with blades having upturned side and rear edges.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for snow shovels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 264+ for a snow excavating scoop.


CLS 294/55.5
TXT Implements under subclass 49 wherein the load engaging and lifting means
    comprises a row of tines, (e.g., forks).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for fork-like devices designed to be used in a vertical position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 322+ for table and culinary forks.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, particularly subclasses 63+,
    82, 100, 102, and 105 for wheel or runner supported devices provided with
    spaced depending teeth or tines which are adapted to comb through the earth
    and gather therefrom desired plants or like buried objects.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 54.1, 57.1, 59.1, and 125, for racks
    with impaling means.


CLS 294/56
TXT Devices under subclass 49 to be attached to the edges of forks or shovels
    to reinforce them or to protect them against wear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for detachable plates for converting these tools from one type to
    another.


CLS 294/57
TXT Devices under subclass 49 include handles and attachments for handles to be
    used with hand forks and shovels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 110+ for handles, including
    handles for implements such as hoes, and see the search notes under
    subclass 110 of Class 16 for handles generally.


CLS 294/58
TXT Devices under subclass 57 includes a handle additional to the handle
    usually present and frequently detachable or adjustable, or both.  The
    point of attachment may be at any part of the implement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 114 for detachable handles,
    including auxiliary detachable handles for earth working implements such as
    hoes.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, appropriate subclasses for
    body-attached auxiliary supports combined with additional handholds.


CLS 294/59
TXT Miscellaneous devices under subclass 49 to be applied to the fork or shovel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51      and 52, for attachments for converting the shovel or fork to
    another form of implement.


CLS 294/60
TXT Devices under subclass 59 to be applied to a fork or shovel to be engaged
    by the foot of the operator.


CLS 294/61
TXT Devices under class definition which include a handle or stem fitted with
    one or more tines and designed to be plunged into or through the article
    engaged.  Spears are usually designed to be used in vertical position and
    generally have the tines centrally grouped.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.5,    for rod type supports and hangers.

    55.5,   for forks.

    86.24+,for expanding grapples peculiarly adapted for use in a well bore.

    93,     for expanding grapples.

    97,     for pivoted type expanding grapples.

    126,    for harpoon type hay forks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 164.5+, for spear-like devices for picking and
    chipping ice.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 6 for harpoon
    and spear devices specialized for fishing or trapping.

    81,     Tools, subclasses 3.47, 3.48 and 3.49 for impaling type receptacle
    closure removers.


CLS 294/62
TXT Devices under class definition for handling bricks, particularly bricks in
    rows or stacks.


CLS 294/63.1
TXT Hoist-line frame:

    Rigid or semi-rigid hoist-line terminals under subclass 62 composed of
    parts united into a structural assembly and used for the handling of brick
    stacks without breaking bulk.

    (1)     Note.  In most instances these frames are characterized by a series
    of expanding fingers at the base of the device for laterally grasping the
    lower rows of brick.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 450 and 621 for devices
    including relatively movable jaws of the type found here for grasping a
    load.


CLS 294/63.2
TXT Expanding grapple, fluid pressure inflatable:

    Devices under subclass 63.1 in which the fingers are expanded by the
    introduction of fluid pressure into a resiliently inflatable member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98.1,   for inflatable expandable grapples of more general utility.

    119.3,  for inflatable contracting grapples.


CLS 294/64.1
TXT VACUUM:

    Devices under class definition depending upon the action of a negative
    pressure to handle a load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.2,    for contact lens applicator which use a suction type grip.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    569+ for vacuum pickers in combination with a laminating device.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 206.5+, 309.3, 362, and 363 for devices of
    this character especially modified for supporting articles in fixed
    position.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclasses 5, 11 and 90+ for sheet
    feeding devices which use vacuum.

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, subclass 3 for chucks which hold workpieces
    etc., by vacuum.


CLS 294/64.2
TXT Venturi effect:

    Devices under subclass 64.1 wherein a fluid stream is conducted through a
    tube having a constricted throat to create the negative pressure.


CLS 294/64.3
TXT By positive fluid stream directed against article:

    Devices under subclass 64.1 wherein a positive pressure fluid stream is
    caused to flow over a surface of the article to be handled thereby creating
    the negative pressure.


CLS 294/65
TXT Devices under subclass 64.1 having skeleton supports adapting the device to
    lift sheet material, such as plate-glass and sheet metal.


CLS 294/65.5
TXT Devices under class definition for raising material by means of one or more
    magnets.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86.14,  for grapples controlled by a magnet which are adapted to function
    within a well bore.

    88,     for grapples controlled by magnets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 328 for an earth boring
    bit which includes a magnetized portion.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 38-40 and
    212-232 for magnetic assorting of solid materials.

    248,    Supports, subclass 206.5 and 309.3 for a magnet means for mounting
    a bracket type support.

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, subclass 128 for a magnet type chuck.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 209+ for electromagnet and magnet structure.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 606 for a self-loading or
    unloading elevator or hoist having a magnet and a grab means to engage the
    load, and subclass 737 for a vertically swinging load support having a
    magnet to engage load.


CLS 294/66.1
TXT UNDERWATER IMPLEMENT:

    Devices under the class definition specially adapted for use in an
    underwater environment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86.1+,  for grapples adapted to function within a well bore.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 317+ for suction dredgers.

    114,    Ships, subclasses 50 and 51 for raising and docking submerged
    vessels.


CLS 294/66.2
TXT With locating means:

    Devices under subclass 66.1 additionally including means to assist in the
    determination of the position of an underwater object to facilitate the
    handling thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The combination of a handling implement and a nominally
    claimed position determining means (e.g., light, T.V. camera, etc.) will
    not bar original placement in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 81 for underwater television systems having
    detailed recitations of the television system.


CLS 294/67.1
TXT HOISTLINE ATTACHED LOAD SUPPORTING FRAME:

    Rigid or semi-rigid hoistline terminals under the class definition composed
    of parts united into a structural assembly that includes portions which
    directly engage the load and which are disposed in a generally horizontal
    plane to thereby bear the load against gravity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63.1+,  for brick carrying hoistline frames.

    65,     for vacuum frames.

    81.5+,  for hoistline frames with a plurality of distinct load engaging
    units.

    68.1+,  for a hoistable container or cage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 861+ for invalid lift and transfer.

    114,    Ships, subclasses 381 for checks and lashings for bolding life
    bouts on ships.

    186,    Merchandising, subclasses 26+ and 46+ for track supported carriers
    for store and dining room service respectively.


CLS 294/67.2
TXT L-frame:

    Devices under subclass 67.1 wherein the load supporting frame is of
    generally L-shaped configuration, the lower horizontal leg of which bears
    the weight of the load and the vertical leg of which is usually connected
    to the hoistline.


CLS 294/67.21
TXT With center of gravity adjustment:

    Devices under subclass 67.2 wherein the suspension means of the L-frame is
    shiftable relative thereto to compensate for uneven load distribution so
    that a load supported thereon remains level.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67.5,   for a load shifting hoistline frame.

    81.3,   for a spacing hoist bar having a center of gravity adjustment.

    82.12,  for a cable and hook tackle having a center of gravity adjustment.

    86.41,  for a load shifting grapple.


CLS 294/67.22
TXT With load retainer:

    Devices under subclass 67.2 and additionally including structure which
    contacts the load to securely maintain it on the L-frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67.41,  for an underlying support and sling which includes a load retainer.


CLS 294/67.3
TXT Load capturing supports:

    Devices under subclass 67.1 which include opposed laterally movable load
    supporting members which are lowered around the load and then moved
    inwardly to thereby provide load support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81.5+,  for two or more distinct load capturing supports on a spacing hoist
    bar or frame.


CLS 294/67.31
TXT Pivotable about horizontal axis:

    Devices under subclass 67.3 wherein at least one of the load capturing
    supports pivots about a horizontally disposed axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81.51,  for a load capturing support pivotal about a horizontal axis and
    mounted on a spacing hoist bar or frame.

    104+,   for fixed and pivoted jaw grapples.

    106+,   for pivoted jaw grapples.


CLS 294/67.32
TXT Rotatable about vertical axis:

    Devices under subclass 67.3 wherein at least one of the load capturing
    supports rotates about a vertically disposed axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81.52,  for a load capturing support rotatable about a vertical axis and
    mounted on a spacing hoist bar or frame.


CLS 294/67.33
TXT Horizontally slideable:

    Devices under subclass 67.3 wherein at least one of the load capturing
    supports moves linearly in a horizontally disposed plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81.54,  for a horizontally slideable load capturing support mounted on a
    spacing hoist bar or frame.

    103.1+, for fixed and moveable jaw grapples.

    119.1,  for slideable jaw grapples.


CLS 294/67.4
TXT Underlying load spanning support and sling:

    Devices under subclass 67.1 wherein the load engaging portion comprises a
    rigid member which spans the underside of the load and has attached at
    opposite ends thereof flexible members which suspend the load from the
    hoistline.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81.55,  for an underlying load spanning support and sling suspended from a
    spacing hoist bar or frame.


CLS 294/67.41
TXT With load retainer:

    Devices under subclass 67.4 and additionally including structure which
    contacts the load to securely maintain it on the underlying load spanning
    support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67.22,  for a L-frame which includes a load retainer.


CLS 294/67.5
TXT Load leveling or shifting:

    Devices under subclass 67.1 wherein the suspension means of the frame is
    shiftable relative thereto (1) to compensate for uneven load distribution
    so that the load frame and load with respect to a surface or other object
    to provide for a specific spatial orientation therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67.21,  for a L-frame having a center of gravity adjustment.

    81.3,   for a spacing hoist bar or frame with a center of gravity
    adjustment.

    81.4    for a spacing hoist bar or frame with orienting means.

    82.12,  for a cable and hook tackle having a center of gravity adjustment.

    86.41,  for a load shifting grapple.


CLS 294/68.1
TXT HOISTABLE RECEPTACLE:

    Containers or cages under the class definition provided with hoistline
    terminal elements or attachments which (1) are adapted for carrying and/or
    readily dumping a load or (2) are especially adapted to be inserted into a
    body of liquid to remove a portion of the liquid or other material
    therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86.11,  for grappling means which form a lifting basket within a well bore.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 81.1+ and 83.1+ for invalid lift and transfer.

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 182 and 461 for orange peel and clamshell
    buckets.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 162+ and the subclasses there noted, for well
    receptacles, and see subclass 162 for the line between Classes 294 and 166.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 232+ for an earth
    boring device including a receptacle provided with means for cutting or
    disintegrating the material of the earth to form a hole therein.

    186,    Merchandising, subclasses 26+ and 46+ for track supported carriers
    for store and dining room service respectively.

    187,    Elevator,  Industrial Lift Truck,  or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclasses 401+ for specific elevator car structure or arrangement (e.g.,
    car framing).

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 523+ for
    gravitational separators with mechanical removers, and subclasses 532.1+
    for gravitational separators with heavier constituent traps.


CLS 294/68.2
TXT With discharge or loading means:

    Receptacles under subclass 68.1 having specific means for releasing or
    acquiring the load.


CLS 294/68.21
TXT Bottom or side discharge or loading:

    Receptacles under subclass 68.2 having means for releasing or acquiring the
    load through the bottom or side of the receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 247+ for hopper type dumping
    railway cars.

    298,    Land Vehicles:  Dumping, subclasses 24+ for hopper type dumping
    vehicles.


CLS 294/68.22
TXT Bucket or bailer type:

    Receptacles under subclass 68.21 of closed wall configuration and
    peculiarly adapted to handle a fluent material.


CLS 294/68.23
TXT Twin bucket sectors (e.g., clamshell buckets):

    Receptacles under subclass 68.22 composed of substantially identical
    sectors or parts hinged or otherwise adapted to separate to release or
    acquire the load.


CLS 294/68.24
TXT Twin doors:

    Receptacles under subclass 68.22 in which substantially identical doors are
    used to release or acquire the load.

    (1)     Note.  Usually, the twin doors cooperate with each other to open
    simultaneously.


CLS 294/68.25
TXT Vertically sliding closure:

    Receptacles under subclass 68.22 including a load retaining device which
    moves vertically to discharge or acquire the load.


CLS 294/68.26
TXT Tilting discharge or loading:

    Receptacles under subclass 68.2 having means, such as pivots, or a dropping
    or turning mechanism, to facilitate the rotation of the receptacle to
    discharge or acquire the load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122+,   for a single tilting hayfork.


CLS 294/68.27
TXT With trunnions:

    Receptacles under subclass 68.26 where the means facilitating rotation of
    the receptacle is a pair of opposed pins or gudgeons.


CLS 294/68.3
TXT Separable auxiliary hoistline means(e.g., sling, spreader frame):

    Receptacle under subclass 68.1 and additionally including hoisting means
    connected to the hoistline which is readily detachable from the receptacle
    upon load release.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74+,    for hoist-line slings, per se.

    81.1+,  for spreader frames, per se.


CLS 294/74
TXT Devices under class definition adapted for use on hoist or derrick lines,
    usually comprising flexible cables or nets partially or wholly surrounding
    the load.

    (1)     Note.  The term "cable" is used herein to designate flexible
    elements, such as rope, chain, wire, or flat bands.

    (1.5)   Note.  Where the sling structure is a mere strand with or without
    eyes or loops formed therein, see the appropriate article subclasses of the
    textile arts, viz., 57, Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining,
    subclasses 139+; 87, Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making,
    subclasses 1-13, inclusive; and 428, Stock Material or Miscellaneous
    Articles, subclasses 364+ for a structurally defined or coated strand not
    specifically provided for in any other class, and see search notes
    thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 115+ for cord and rope
    holders, per se, subclasses 698.1+ for hooks, and subclasses 598.4+ for
    snap hooks.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 139+, (see
    1.5 Note above).

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, subclasses 1-13,
    inclusive (see 1.5 Note above).

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    appropriate subclasses, for slings adapted to travel on guides in an
    elevator shaft and carry an elevator car, cage, platform or equivalent
    device.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 364+, and see
    (1.5) Note above.


CLS 294/75
TXT Devices under subclass 74 having some form of tripping device for
    discharging the load.


CLS 294/76
TXT Devices under subclass 75 having a latch located beneath the load, which is
    usually discharged through the separating of the several parts of the sling.


CLS 294/77
TXT Devices under subclass 74 includes sling-net structure.


CLS 294/81.1
TXT SPACING HOIST BAR OR FRAME:

    Devices under the class definition comprising a bar or frame supporting two
    or more distinct load engaging units in spaced relation or a hoist bar or
    fixture adapted for arranging several handling devices for use as a single
    implement.

    (1)     Note.  The individual "distinct load engaging units" must be
    capable, of and by themselves, of supporting a load, although not
    necessarily the entire load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67.1+,  for hoistline frames, per se.

    68.1+,  for containers or cages, per se.

    74+,    for hoistline slings, per se.

    82.1+,  for hoistline or grab hooks, per se.

    82.11,  for cable and hook tackles, per se.

    86.4+,  for grapples, per se.

    87.1+,  for grapples spaced along a hoist bar or frame for handling
    multiple objects wherein each load engaging grapple handles a single object.

    128+,   for multiple type hay harpoons.


CLS 294/81.2
TXT Adjustable to accommodate different size loads:

    Devices under subclass 81.1 wherein the distinct load engaging units are
    shiftable by being mounted on sections that slide one inside another.


CLS 294/81.21
TXT Telescopic:

    Devices under 81.2 wherein the distinct load engaging units are shiftable
    by being mounted on sections that slide one inside another.


CLS 294/81.3
TXT With center of gravity adjustment:

    Devices under subclass 81.1 wherein the suspension means of the hoist bar
    or frame is shiftable relative thereto to compensate for uneven load
    distribution so that a load suspended therefrom remains level.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67.5,   for a load shifting hoistline frame.

    67.21,  for a L-frame having a center of gravity adjustment.

    82.12,  for a cable and hook tackle having a center of gravity adjustment.

    86.41,  for a load shifting grapple.


CLS 294/81.4
TXT With orienting means:

    Devices under subclass 81.1 wherein means are provided on the hoist bar or
    frame to tilt or guide (1) the hoist bar or frame with respect to the load
    or (2) the combined hoist bar or frame and the load with respect to a
    surface or other object, to provide for a specific spatial orientation
    therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67.5,   for a load shifting hoistline frame.

    86.41,  for a load shifting grapple.


CLS 294/81.41
TXT Load engaging guide:

    Devices under subclass 81.4 comprising aligning means mounted on the hoist
    bar or frame which engage the load to cause alignment of the load engaging
    units relative to the load (e.g., corner guides for spreader frames).


CLS 294/81.5
TXT Load supporting units:

    Devices under subclass 81.1 wherein the load engaging units have portions
    disposed in a horizontal plane to thereby bear the load against gravity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67.2+,  for L-shaped frames, the lower leg of which bears the load against
    gravity.

    67.3+   for frames having a single distinct load engaging unit with a
    horizontal portions which bear the load against gravity.

    81.6+,  for spacing hoist bars or frames with load engaging units which
    grip the load.


CLS 294/81.51
TXT Pivotal about horizontal axis:

    Devices under subclass 81.5 wherein at least one of the components of the
    load engaging units pivots about a horizontally disposed axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67.31,  for hoistline frames having a single distinct load engaging unit at
    least one component of which pivots about a horizontally disposed axis to
    capture the load.


CLS 294/81.52
TXT Rotatable about vertical axis:

    Devices under subclass 81.5 wherein least one of the components of the load
    engaging units rotates about a vertically disposed axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67.31,  for hoistline frames having a single distinct load engaging unit,
    at least one component of which rotates about a vertically disposed axis to
    capture the load.


CLS 294/81.53
TXT Twist lock:

    Devices under subclass 81.52 where the load engaging component is
    insertable into a recess in the load and rotatable therein for attachment
    purposes.


CLS 294/81.54
TXT Horizontally slideable:

    Devices under subclass 81.5 wherein at least one of the components of the
    load engaging units moves linearly in a horizontally disposed plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67.32,  for hoistline frames having a single distinct load engaging unit,
    at least one component of which moves linearly in a horizontally disposed
    plane.


CLS 294/81.55
TXT Underlying load spanning support and sling:

    Devices under subclass 81.5 where at least one of the load supporting units
    is a rigid member which spans the under side of the load and has attached
    at opposite ends thereof flexible members which suspend the load from the
    hoist bar or frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67.4,   for a hoistline frame having an underlying load spanning support
    and sling.


CLS 294/81.56
TXT Hook:

    Devices under subclass 81.5 wherein the load supporting units are a curved
    or bent implement of hook shaped configuration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82.1+,  for hoistline hook structure, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 230.5+ and 231+ for hook
    structure of general utility.


CLS 294/81.6
TXT Load gripping units:

    Devices under subclass 81.1 wherein the load engaging units are adapted for
    grasping and firmly holding a load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64.1+,  for vacuum type gripping units, per se.

    65.5,   for magnetic type gripping units, per se.

    86.4+,  for grapples, per se.


CLS 294/81.61
TXT Pivoted gripping element:

    Devices under subclass 81.6 wherein at least one of the components of the
    load gripping units is mounted for pivotal movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104+,   for fixed and pivoted jaw grapples.

    106+,   for pivoted jaw grapples.


CLS 294/81.62
TXT Slideable gripple element:

    Devices under subclass 81.6 wherein at least one of the components of the
    load gripping units is mounted for sliding movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103.1+, for fixed and movable jaw grapples.

    119.1,  for slideable jaw grapples.


CLS 294/82.1
TXT HOISTLINE OR GRAB HOOK:

    Devices under class definition including a hook of general application
    provided with hoistline or draftline terminals.

    (1)     Note.  The line between Class 24, Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc.,
    and Class 294, Handling:  Hand and Hoistline Implements with regard to
    hooks is a disclosure line, with Class 294 being superior.  That is, if
    there is any disclosed utility, as a hoistline or grab hook, original
    placement will be in this class (294).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for hand hooks.

    66.1+,  for submarine hooks and grapples.

    81.56,  for hooks mounted on a spacing hoist bar or frame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 698.1+ for a
    separable-fastener hook of general utility, and subclasses 598.4+ for snap
    hooks of general utility, and see (1) Note above.

    278,    Land Vehicles:  Animal Draft Appliances, subclasses 111+ for trace
    hooks.


CLS 294/82.11
TXT Cable and hook tackle:

    Load engaging hooks under subclass 82.1 supported on flexible members
    through which usually the hoisting tension is applied.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74+,    for hoistline slings.


CLS 294/82.12
TXT With center of gravity adjustment:

    Cable and hook tackle under subclass 82.11 wherein a suspension means for
    the cable and hook tackle is shiftable relative to the load to compensate
    for uneven load distribution so that a load suspended therefrom remains
    level.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67.21,  for a L-frame with a center of gravity adjustment.

    67.5,   for a load shifting hoist-line frame.

    81.3,   for a spacing hoist bar or frame with a center of gravity
    adjustment.

    86.41,  for a load shifting grapple.


CLS 294/82.13
TXT Opposed load grasping hooks:

    Cable and hook tackle under subclass 82.11 wherein at least two opposing
    hooks grip a load therebetween when tension is applied to the tackle.

    (1)     Note.  Usually, the load is impaled on a pointed part of the hook.


CLS 294/82.14
TXT Choker type:

    Cable and hook tackle under subclass 82.11 wherein the tackle is a flexible
    member which is looped around the load and slideably connected back upon
    itself with the hook so that as tension is applied to the flexible member
    the loop contracts about the load.


CLS 294/82.15
TXT Driven positioning means:

    Load engaging hooks under subclass 82.1 and additionally including means to
    move the hook in either a vertical and/or or rotary motion for the purpose
    of (1) precisely orienting or locating the hook relative to the load or (2)
    for orienting and/or locating the combined hook and load with respect to a
    surface or other object, to provide for a specific spatial orientation
    therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81.4,   for a spacing hoist bar with orienting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 264+ for devices which hoist the load (e.g., winches).


CLS 294/82.16
TXT Resilient suspension means (e.g., spring or fluid):

    Load engaging hooks under subclass 82.1 including a cushioning device
    located on the hook for the purpose of absorbing shocks between the
    hoistline and the load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 266+ for dashpot type shock absorbers, per se.

    267,    Spring Devices, appropriate subclasses for spring devices, per se.


CLS 294/82.17
TXT Locking devices (i.e., hook throat closure):

    Load engaging hooks under subclass 82.1 wherein a moveable member may be
    selectively positioned in or adjacent to the throat of the hook, thereby
    restricting the opening thereof in order to prevent accidental release of
    the load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasp, etc., subclasses 241+ for hooks of general
    utility having locking devices.


CLS 294/82.18
TXT Overlapping loop forming hooks:

    Load engaging hooks under subclass 82.17 comprising a pair of pivotally
    mounted mirror image hooks which, when moved into side by side relationship
    with one another form a load confining closed loop.


CLS 294/82.19
TXT Locking arm swings in plane of hook:

    Load engaging hooks under subclass 82.17 wherein the locking device is a
    member which pivots in a plane defined by the load engaging hook.


CLS 294/82.2
TXT With pivoted latch:

    Load engaging hooks under subclass 82.19 wherein the pivoted locking arm is
    held in a load retaining position by a member which is pivotally mounted
    relative thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82.33,  for a load releasing hook having a pivoted load support with a
    pivoted latch.


CLS 294/82.21
TXT With sliding latch:

    Load engaging hooks under subclass 82.19 wherein the pivotal locking arm is
    held in a load retaining position by a member which is mounted on the
    device for linear movement relative thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82.34,  for load releasing hook having a pivoted load support with a
    sliding latch.


CLS 294/82.22
TXT Swivel locking arm:

    Load engaging hooks under subclass 82.17 wherein the locking device
    revolves about the load engaging hook.


CLS 294/82.23
TXT Slideable locking arm:

    Load engaging hooks under subclass 82.17 wherein the locking device is
    mounted on the load engaging hook so as to be linearly movable.


CLS 294/82.24
TXT Load releasing means:

    Load engaging hooks under subclass 82.1 having some special adaptation for
    detaching the load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for hoist-line, slings with latch release.

    110.1+, for automatic pivoted jaw grapples.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling or Force,
    subclass 410 for a pulley wheel element housed in a portable block, the
    block is provided with the means for fastening it to a support or a load
    which is either remotely operable or of the breakaway type.


CLS 294/82.25
TXT Parachute release means:

    Load engaging hooks under subclass 82.24 designed for instantaneous
    operation in detaching loads suspended from a parachute.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 164+ for buckles used
    for securing parachute harnesses to a person or a load.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 142+ for buckles or hooks claimed in
    combination with the parachute.


CLS 294/82.26
TXT Store ejector (e.g., aircraft carried):

    Load engaging hooks under subclass 82.24 designed for instantaneous
    operation in detaching objects from aircraft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    89,     Ordnance, subclass 1.5 for bomb, flare, and signal dropping.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 137 for store ejectors claim din combination
    with aircraft structure.


CLS 294/82.27
TXT Boat detaching:

    Load engaging hooks under subclass 82.24 designed for instantaneous
    operation in detaching boats from davit lines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclasses 377+ for connectors between a boat and the
    lowering tackle therefor.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 410 for a pulley wheel element housed in a portable block being
    provided with means for fastening it to a support or a load which is either
    remotely operable or of the breakaway type.


CLS 294/82.28
TXT Plurality of balls:

    Load engaging hooks under subclass 82.24 wherein the release means includes
    plural spherically shaped members which are moveable relative to a load
    suspension to effect load release.


CLS 294/82.29
TXT Explosive release:

    Load engaging under subclass 82.24 wherein the release means is actuated
    upon detonation of an explosive charge.


CLS 294/82.3
TXT Motor operated:

    Load engaging hooks under subclass 82.24 wherein a self-contained motor is
    provided to actuate the load releasing means.


CLS 294/82.31
TXT Pivoted load support:

    Load engaging hooks under subclass 82.24 wherein a load bearing portion of
    the hook pivots to effect load release.


CLS 294/82.32
TXT Plurality of similar coacting supports:

    Load engaging hooks under subclass 82.31 wherein the plural members of like
    configuration support the load an are simultaneously pivoted out of load
    bearing relationship to affect load release.


CLS 294/82.33
TXT With pivoted latch:

    Load engaging hooks under subclass 82.31 wherein the pivoted load support
    is held in the nonrelease position by a member which is pivotally mounted
    relative thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82.2,   for a hook having a pivoted locking device with a pivoted latch
    therefor.


CLS 294/82.34
TXT With sliding latch:

    Load engaging hooks under subclass 82.31 wherein the pivoted load support
    is held in the nonrelease position by a member which is mounted on the
    device for linear movement relative thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82.21,  for a hook having a pivoted locking device with a slideable latch
    therefor.


CLS 294/82.35
TXT Sliding load support:

    Load engaging hooks under subclass 82.24 wherein a load bearing portion of
    the hook moves linearly to effect load release.


CLS 294/82.36
TXT Load ejecting:

    Load engaging hooks under subclass 82.24 wherein the load releasing means
    applies a force or push to the load to effect load release from the hook.


CLS 294/85
TXT Hooks and graspers under class definition designed to be engaged with an
    overhead beam or rafter and provided with hoist-line terminals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86.4+,  appropriate subclass for devices not specialized to engagement with
    overhead beams or rafter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 72 for beam clamped pipe or cable brackets and
    228.1+, for beam clamped brackets of general utility.


CLS 294/86.1
TXT Grapples under subclass 86.4 that are intended to be used in a well, the
    grapple having a diameter only slightly less than the diameter of the well
    for the purpose of retrieving or placing an object in the well.

    (1)     Note.  Processes of using a well grapple in a well are classified
    in Class 166, Wells, subclass 301.

    (2)     Note.  A mere pipe joint or coupling of general utility, such as a
    screw threaded joint, is not included and will be found in appropriate
    subclasses in Class 285, Pipe Joints or Couplings. However, where a
    retrieving device for a stuck object includes a washover or cutover means
    as defined in subclass 86.34 below, the means making the connection with
    the stuck object may be a mere pipe joint or coupling of general utility
    such as a screw threaded joint.  Such mere joint or coupling is considered
    to be a "grapple" for purposes of classification in subclass 86.34 but is
    not considered a "grapple" for purposes of classification in any other
    subclass under this definition.

    (3)     Note.  The combination of a metal cutting means for cutting away
    material around a stuck object and a retrieving means for such object is
    included under this definition, see especially subclass 86.34.  The
    combination of a broadly recited washing means or earth cutting means for
    removing matter around a stuck object is also included under this
    definition, see especially subclass 86.34, though the recitation of a
    specific earth boring means causes classification in Class 175, Boring or
    Penetrating the Earth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19.1+,  for devices other than those under the definition of subclass 86.1
    having a pole and a grappling means attached thereto.

    65.5,   for magnet type well grapples.

    66.1+,  for devices other than those under the definition of subclass 86.1
    for recovering submerged objects.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclass 301 for processes for grappling objects in a well,
    subclass 98 for a grapple with a well anchored lifting means, subclass 99
    for well devices combined with junk retrieving means and for certain types
    of junk retrieving means, as set forth in the definition of subclass 99,
    subclasses 118+ and 206+ for expanding anchors used in a well, and
    subclasses 123+, 143+ and 181+ for detachable setting means for well
    devices.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 244+ for earth boring
    means including a grapple for a core of earth material.  See the reference
    to Class 294 in the class definition of Class 175 for the line between
    Classes 294 and 175.

    188,    Brakes, particularly subclass 67.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, appropriate subclasses for pipe
    connections of general utility, and particularly subclasses 384+, 386+ and
    390+ for screw threaded joint connections.  See (2) Note above.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for joints of
    general utility.

    413,    Sheet Metal container Making, subclasses 58+.

    901,    Robots, subcollections 31+ for gripping devices useable on robots.


CLS 294/86.11
TXT Devices under subclass 86.1 that have circumferentially mounted means that
    move radially inward or are flexibly mounted to move from an open to a
    closed position to form a perforated bottom closure of a container for
    retaining objects therein, whereby an object is retrieved by passing into
    the basket through the bottom thereof and is then held in the basket by
    openwork means beneath the object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68+,    for miscellaneous receptacles under the class definition which may
    be especially adapted to be inserted into a body of liquid to remove a
    portion of the liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclass 99 for well devices combined with means for
    retrieving loose objects (e.g., junk baskets), and subclass 162 for
    receptacles which have some feature special to use in a well. Also see the
    search notes under subclass 99 and 162 for the line between the receptacles
    of Class 166 and Class 294.


CLS 294/86.12
TXT Grapples under subclass 86.1 having a grappling means that is inwardly
    directed from a surrounding supporting member and other grappling means
    that is outwardly directed from a central supporting member, said means
    being formed to grapple an external surface and an internal surface
    respectively of an object within a well.


CLS 294/86.13
TXT Grapples under subclass 86.1 having additional means (e.g., a gathering
    arm) which functions separately from the grappling manipulation to
    laterally move either the grapple or the object, one relative to the other,
    to align the grapple and object to permit the grapple to engage and grapple
    the object.

    (1)     Note.  The functioning of the "additional means" must require a
    movement distinct from that of the grappling operation.  If, for example, a
    grapple is caused to be engaged by an object by a downward movement and an
    inclined surface on the grapple causes the object to move laterally
    incident to the downward movement, then this definition is not satisfied.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclasses 117.5+ for devices positionable in a well conduit
    for directing a well device laterally of the longitudinal axis of the well.


CLS 294/86.14
TXT Grapples under subclass 86.1 comprising a grapple body and a grappling
    means carried thereby and wherein a separate means is provided for causing
    the grappling means to become attached to the object being grappled, which
    separate means is operable from the surface of the well independently of
    any movement of the grapple body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for grapples of general utility having magnetic means to operate
    the grapple.

    111+,   for pivoted jaw grapples of general utility having supplemental
    cable means to operate the jaws.

    117,    for pivoted jaw grapples of general utility having an independent
    handle or bar for operating the grapple.


CLS 294/86.15
TXT Grapples under subclass 86.14 wherein the separate means comprises a fluid
    reactive element which moves by fluid pressure to move the grappling means.


CLS 294/86.16
TXT Grapples under subclass 86.1 combined with separate means secured to the
    grapple that moves laterally relative to the grapple body to engage the
    object being grappled to prevent downward movement of the grapple body
    relative to the object.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclass 98 for grapples combined with means for anchoring
    the grapple body to the interior surface of a well to permit the grapple to
    engage and lift an object relative to the anchored means, and subclasses
    206+ for well anchors, per se, having a means that is movable outwardly to
    engage and jam against a surrounding conduit wall to attach the anchor to
    the conduit wall to resist the action of gravity or a lifting force and
    which anchors are disclosed for use other than as a grapple.  Sole
    disclosure of or a statement in a claim of use as a grapple is enough for
    classification in Class 294.


CLS 294/86.17
TXT Grapples under subclass 86.1 having a grappling means that engages and
    holds an object for removal from a well, and further provided with means
    formed as part of the grapple for releasing the grappling means from its
    engaged position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86.14+,for well grapples having separate grapple operating means which may
    include releasing means, and see the search notes thereunder for other
    grapples in Class 294 of general utility having separate grapple operating
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 294 for below ground
    impact apparatus combined with a joint between two parts which may be
    selectively uncoupled below ground independently of the other joints in the
    apparatus, and subclasses 300+ for below ground impact apparatus combined
    with telescoping members and having selectively releasable means on one of
    the telescoping members for engaging and holding the other member against
    relative axial movement.


CLS 294/86.18
TXT Grapples under subclass 86.17 having means that is intended to release or
    rupture when excessive force is applied to the engaged grapple to permit
    disengagement from the grappled object.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 301 for below ground
    impact means combined with releasable telescoping members having a
    frangible connection between the telescoping members.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 1+ for pipe joints having
    means responsive to a predetermined force to release the means holding the
    joint together, and subclass 304 for pipe joints having means to hold the
    two pipe members together in assembled relationship but which will release
    upon the application of excessive forces.


CLS 294/86.19
TXT Grapples under subclass 86.17 having a spring means for moving the
    grappling means to a released position.


CLS 294/86.2
TXT Grapples under subclass 86.17 having means to latch the grappling means in
    a released position away from an object engaged position.


CLS 294/86.21
TXT Grapples under subclass 86.2 wherein the latch means is a lug on either a
    grappling member or a grapple body member, and a lateral pocket on the
    other member, the lug and lateral pocket being relatively rotatable to hold
    the grappling member in a released position.


CLS 294/86.22
TXT Grapples under subclass 86.17 having screw threaded means between the
    grappling means and the grapple body which moves the grappling means to an
    object released position.


CLS 294/86.23
TXT Grapples under subclass 86.1 combined with means to deliver a blow, or to
    jar the grapple or the object being grappled.

    (1)     Note.  The means to deliver the blow may function to set the
    grapple or to release or set an object in the well.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclass 178 for well devices combined with a jar means for
    releasing them.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 293 for below ground
    hammer or impact members, per se.


CLS 294/86.24
TXT Grapples under subclass 86.1 having a grappling means that is movable
    laterally outwardly from the grapple body for effecting grappling
    engagement with an object to be grappled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for spear devices other than those under the definition of subclass
    86.24.

    93+,    for expanding grapples of general utility.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclasses 206+, for well anchors, per se, having a means
    that is movable outwardly to engage and jam against a surrounding conduit
    wall to resist action of gravity or a lifting force and which anchors are
    disclosed for use other than as a grapple.  Sole disclosure of or a
    statement in a claim of use as a grapple is enough for classification in
    Class 294.


CLS 294/86.25
TXT Grapples under subclass 86.24 wherein the grappling means is urged
    outwardly by means including a cam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86.19,  for grappling means that is spring biased along a cam surface to a
    released position.

    86.22,  for screw thread means that moves a grappling means along a cam
    surface to a released position.

    94+,    for expanding grapples of general application having a cam
    mechanism to produce the grapple expansion.


CLS 294/86.26
TXT Grapples under subclass 86.1 having a grappling means that is movable
    laterally inwardly from the grapple body for effecting grappling engagement
    with an object to be grappled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103.1+,for grapples of general application having a fixed and a movable jaw.

    113+,   for grapples of general application having a grappling means that
    is pivoted from a load surrounding frame.


CLS 294/86.27
TXT Grapples under subclass 86.26 having a grappling means which is inwardly
    biased to an engaged position, but which is held outwardly from the engaged
    position by a holding means that may be inactivated by a tripping action to
    permit the grappling means to move inwardly to a grappling position through
    the force of the biasing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110.1+, for pivoted grapples of general utility having an automatic
    operating member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 88+ for
    trip-operated animal traps having two jawlike catching elements which move
    toward each other to grip an animal between them.


CLS 294/86.28
TXT Grapples under subclass 86.26 having a grappling means that is normally
    biased to a position outwardly of the object engaged position and is moved
    to an engaged position through the action of some mechanical movement means
    of the grapple.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99.1+,  for grapples of general utility having grappling members which are
    connected to spring arms which may normally position the grasping members
    outwardly of an object to be engaged.


CLS 294/86.29
TXT Grapples under subclass 86.26 having grappling means that pivots about a
    fixed pivot axis to an engaged position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87.22+, for plural object engaging grapples having pivotal jaw means to
    engage grooved or shouldered portions of objects.

    104,    for load engaging grapples of general application having a fixed
    jaw and a pivoted jaw.

    106+,   for load engaging grapples of general application having a pivotal
    engaging means.


CLS 294/86.3
TXT Grapples under subclass 86.26 having a grappling means that is urged
    inwardly by means including a cam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86.22,  for screw threaded means which moves a grappling means along a cam
    surface to effect releasing of a grappling means.

    87.26,  for multiple object engaging grapples of general utility having
    relatively slidable groove engaging means.

    102.1,  for grapples of general application having cammed grappling means
    within a socket for embracing a load.

    103.1+, for fixed and movable jaw grapples of general application.

    116,    for pivoted jaw grapples of general application having a cam as
    part of the operating means.


CLS 294/86.31
TXT Grapples under subclass 86.3 wherein the grappling means is biased toward
    its engaged position.


CLS 294/86.32
TXT Grapples under subclass 86.26 having a resilient grappling means that is
    normally positioned inwardly of the object engaged position but flexes
    outwardly to permit an object to move upwardly past the grappling means and
    then engages the object to prevent downward movement of the object relative
    to the grapple.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86.11,  for grapples having flexibly mounted inwardly directed means that
    forms a perforated closure for a container, which means flexes outwardly to
    permit an object to pass therethrough.

    99.1+,  for grapples of general utility having grappling arms connected so
    as to form spring-arms.


CLS 294/86.33
TXT Grapples under subclass 86.26 wherein a part of the grappling means moves
    into a position below an enlarged portion of a grappled object to form with
    the remaining part of the grapple an opening of smaller diameter than the
    diameter of the enlarged portion of the grappled object to prevent
    withdrawal of the grappled object from the grapple on upward movement of
    the grapple.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90+,    for grapples of general utility having means to engage shoulders on
    rods, pipes, or similar objects.


CLS 294/86.34
TXT Grapples under subclass 86.1 comprising (1) a tube for surrounding a stuck
    object in the well for the purpose of flowing a fluid down the tube to wash
    away matter from around the object to free it for retrieval or (2) a means
    for cutting away material around the object to free it for retrieval or to
    cut away material at the periphery of the object to free the central
    portion of the object for retrieval.

    (1)     Note.  The "grapple" under this definition may be a mere joint of
    general utility such as a screw threaded joint.  See (2) Note under
    subclass 86.1.

    (2)     Note.  A device under this definition is intended to retrieve only
    a single, unitary stuck object.  If the device is adapted to retrieve a
    plurality of objects, such as junk, it is excluded. Such devices may be
    found in numerous subclasses depending on the features claimed.  See, for
    example Class 166, Wells, subclass 99 and the notes in the definition of
    that subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclasses 55+ especially subclasses 55.1 and 55.6+ for a
    means for perforating, weakening, bending or separating the side wall of a
    pipe at an unprepared point below ground in a well combined with means for
    retrieving the pipe or a part thereof.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 244+ for an earth
    boring means combined with a means for retrieving a core sample of the
    earth, which core may include within it a stuck object. The line between
    Class 175 and Class 294 as to the subject matter of Class 294 subclass
    86.34 is that a specific recitation of earth cutting means causes
    classification in Class 175 but a mere broad recitation of such means
    permits classification in Class 294.


CLS 294/86.4
TXT GRAPPLE:

    Devices under class definition adapted for grasping a load and having
    handling or hoist-line terminals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19.1+,  for pole attached grapples.

    27.1+,  for plate and receptacle lifters.

    50.5    and 50.6+, for grappling type hand forks and shovels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    3,      Artificial Body Members, subclasses 12+ for artificial hands
    adapted to engage or grasp objects.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning subclasses 104.03+ and
    especially subclass 104.32 for the combination of grapple and flexible
    linkage organized to grasp obstructions inside a tortuous conduit.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 1, for tonglike devices for treating
    tobacco plants etc.

    70,     Locks, subclasses 16-18, for manacles and handcuffs.

    81,     Tools, for grapples specialized to work other than mere handling,
    such as bending, twisting, clamping, etc.

    100,    Presses, subclass 234 for plier type presses not elsewhere provided
    for.

    114,    Ships, subclass 51, for hoisting devices for submerged vessels.

    166,    Wells, subclass 98 for well grapples combined with well anchored
    lifting means, subclass 99 for well devices with junk retrievers (see
    subclass 99 for the line between classes 294 and 166 as to junk retrievers).

    168,    Farriery, subclasses 45 and 47 for force shoeing tools.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 249+ for an earth
    boring device of the core forming type provided with core grasping means,
    and subclasses 293+ for a below ground hammer or jar combined with an earth
    boring means.  Class 175 takes a below ground hammer or jar of general
    utility, or combined with an earth boring means.  A below ground hammer or
    jar combined with a grapple is classified in Class 294.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 75+ for hose or nozzle type supports.

    413,    Sheet Metal Container Making, subclasses 58+ for roofer's tongs.

    417,    Pumps, subclass 451, for pumps having a valve mounted in a fixed
    wall and removed by the movable pumping member.

    483,    Tool Changing,  subclasses 16+ for a machine tool combined with a
    means for transferring a tool and cross reference collection 902 for tool
    grippers.

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e. Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor,  subclasses 57+ for artificial hands adapted to
    engage or grasp object.


CLS 294/86.41
TXT Load shifting:

    Grapples under subclass 86.4 wherein the suspension means of the grapple is
    shiftable relative thereto (1) to compensate for uneven load distribution
    so that the load remains level or (2) to orient the combined grapple and
    load with the respect to a surface or other object to provide for a
    specific spatial orientation therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67.21,  for L-frame having a center of gravity adjustment.

    67.5,   for a load shifting hoist-line frame.

    81.3,   for spacing hoist bar or frame with a center of gravity adjustment.

    81.4,   for a spacing hoist bar or frame with orienting means.

    82.12,  for a cable and hook tackle having a center of gravity adjustment.


CLS 294/86.42
TXT Interwoven contractable gripper (e.g., chinese finger):

    Grapples under subclass 86.4 wherein the grapple is mesh-like general
    tubular structure which encompasses the load, the gripping action being
    controlled by forces directed along the longitudinal centerline of the tube
    to thereby expand or contract the tube about the load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 115+ for cord and rope
    holders of an interwoven contractable gripper type.

    248,    Supports, subclass 60 for pipe and cable supports of an interwoven
    contractable gripper type.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclass 373 for joints formed by an
    interwoven contractable gripper.


CLS 294/87.1
TXT Multiple grapples for multiple objects:

    Grapples under subclass 86.4 having a plurality of distinct load grasping
    units, each of which is designed to grasp an individual load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for miscellaneous compound handling implements.

    23,     for compound tools mounted on poles for handling store goods.

    24,     for poles having compound handling devices thereon.

    137+,   for other article carriers for carrying plural articles, especially
    subclass 159 for carriers having a discrete station for each article
    carried.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 303+ for tools with three or more jaws adapted to
    hold a plurality of objects.


CLS 294/87.11
TXT Confection stick handling (e.g., popsicle stick):

    Grapples under subclass 87.1 adapted to grasp elongated handling elements
    which are usually associated with confectionaries.


CLS 294/87.12
TXT Egg handler:

    Grapples under subclass 87.1 specially adapted to handle eggs.


CLS 294/87.2
TXT Grapples under subclass 87.1 designed to engage grooved or shouldered
    portions of objects.

    (1)     Note.  Structures classified here are for the most part bottle
    handling devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31.1,   for devices which grasp a receptacle by its rim or edge.

    86.33,  for shoulder or collar engaging grapples peculiarly adapted to
    function within a well bore.

    90+,    for grapples adapted to engage collars on individual articles.


CLS 294/87.22
TXT Grapples under subclass 87.2 comprising cooperating jaw means having
    relative pivotal movement to engage objects.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104+,   for fixed and pivoted jaw type of grapple.

    106+,   for grapples having pivoted jaws.


CLS 294/87.24
TXT Pivoted jaw type of grapples under subclass 87.22 in which links or levers
    are provided for controlling the pivoted movement of the jaw means.


CLS 294/87.26
TXT Grapples under subclass 87.2 in which cooperating object engaging portions
    have relative sliding movement to grasp the objects.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for plate or receptacle lifters having sliding graspers.


CLS 294/87.28
TXT Grapples under subclass 87.2 in which the object engaging and holding
    portion is rigid or integral and adapted to frictionally grasp objects
    usually through change in the angular position of the grasping element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92,     for rigid gripper type of grapple for individual articles.


CLS 294/88
TXT Devices under subclass 86.4 in which the operation of the grapple is caused
    by magnetic means or fluid-operated pistons.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86.15,  for grappling means having fluid pressure means to set the
    grappling means and which is peculiarly adapted to function in a well bore.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 182 and 461, for piston-controlled grappling
    means specialized to excavating.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 285+ for work or object holding magnetic devices.


CLS 294/89
TXT Fastening devices under subclass 86 to be inserted in holes cut in blocks
    of stone for the purpose of attaching hoisting apparatus.  The lewises are
    usually iron dovetailed tenons which fit into dovetailed mortises cut into
    the stone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93+,    for expanding grapples.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, subclasses 15+ for expanding anchors; and
    subclasses 340+ for pivoted end lock fasteners.


CLS 294/90
TXT Grapples under subclass 86.4 designed to engage shoulders on rods, pipes,
    or similar objects or shoulders on coupling members thereof and usually
    having no gripping action on the pipe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86.33,  for shoulder or collar engaging grapples peculiarly adapted to
    function within a well bore.

    87.28+, for similar grapples adapted to seize a plurality of articles.


CLS 294/91
TXT Grapples under subclass 90 in which the element upon which the collar rests
    is an integral or rigid piece usually having a latch device to prevent
    accidental disengagement of the load.


CLS 294/92
TXT Integral or rigid devices under subclass 86.4 designed to grasp an object
    directly, usually through change in the angular position of the grasping
    element causing a pinching action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86.26,  for contracting grappling means peculiarly adapted to function in a
    well bore.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 144+, for similar devices
    used with intermittent grip mechanical movement devices.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclasses 101+, for consumable electrode discharge devices (carbon arc
    lamps, et cetera), which are provided with a grip device which is designed
    to grip and release the electrode (carbon) through changes in the angular
    position of the grip device.


CLS 294/93
TXT Grapples under subclass 86.4 in which the load is internally engaged
    through the expansion of the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for opposing jaw hand bars and hand arrows.

    86.24+, for expanding grappling means peculiarly adapted to function in a
    well bore.

    89,     for lewises.

    120+,   for hay forks having similar mode of operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 72, 165 and
    212, for expansible hollow ware cleaners, and 149, for expansible mop
    holders.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 155+ for a piercing
    and expanding earth anchor.

    81,     Tools, subclasses 3.05, for shell extractors, 3.4+, for gripping
    type receptacle closure removers, 15.2+, for tire repair tools and 302, for
    expanding pliers and tweezers.

    128,    Surgery, subclass 12 for expansion-clamps for dental operations.

    166,    Wells, subclass 117.7, for means anchored against rotation in a
    conduit in a well for relatively rotating another section and subclasses
    206+ and the subclasses there noted for well devices with expanding anchor
    means, these means usually being for positioning a well device in the well
    rather than for use as a grapple.

    168,    Farriery, subclass 47 for horse hoof and shoe expanders.


CLS 294/94
TXT Grapples under subclass 93, the expanding action being produced by some
    form of cam mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86.25,  for expanding grappling means having a cam action and which is
    peculiarly adapted to function in a well bore.


CLS 294/95
TXT Grapples under subclass 94, the cam action being upon pivoted load-engaging
    elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    for cam operated pivoted jaw grapples.


CLS 294/96
TXT Grapples under subclass 94 having sliding wedge members and cooperating
    cam-tracks.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102.1+, for grapples having a socket and slip wedge.


CLS 294/97
TXT Grapples under subclass 93 in which the grasping element or elements are
    pivoted.


CLS 294/98
TXT Grapples under subclass 97 particularly designed to grasp loose material,
    such as hay.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for hay harpoons having mechanically spread barbs.


CLS 294/98.1
TXT Inflatable:

    Expanding grapples under subclass 93 wherein the grasping force is produced
    by the introduction fluid pressure into a resiliently inflatable member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63.2,   for brick carrying frames having expansible, inflatable grapples.

    119.3,  for inflatable grapples which externally engage the load.


CLS 294/99.1
TXT Resilient jaws:

    Grapples under subclass 86.4 having grasping members connected so as to
    form spring arms which depend upon the spring of the material to open or
    close the jaws.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for barrel roller type implements.

    5,      for ear corn holders.

    11,     for fire tongs.

    86.32,  for resilient grappling means peculiarly adapted to engage about an
    object in a well bore.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 72, 165 and
    212, for expansible cleaners for hollow ware, and 149 for expansible mop
    holders.

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 530+, for resilient
    clasps.

    81,     Tools, subclasses 3.34+, for hand manipulated receptacle closure
    removers, 3.41, for finger grapple type receptacle closure removers


CLS 294/99.2
TXT Hand-held (e.g., tweezer, tongs):

    Grapples under subclass 99.1 in which the device is carried by hand and
    actuation of the grasping members is accomplished by direct manual
    manipulation thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8.5,    for clothes tongs.

    11,     for fire tongs.

    33,     for resilient plate or receptacle lifters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclass 354 for surgical tweezers.

    433,    Dentistry, subclass 162 for dental tweezers.


CLS 294/100
TXT Grapples under subclasses 99.1+ having a distinct grapple operating means
    which has sliding action along the support for the jaws.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19.1+,  for poles having handling devices thereon.

    86.28,  for outwardly biased resilient grappling means adapted to close
    inwardly about an object in a well bore through a distinct operating means.

    115,    for pivoted jaw grapples with sliding operator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 149 and 154,
    for mop holders having sliding fasteners.

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., particularly subclasses 535+ for
    resilient, nonforce transmitting or driving, clasps with sliding operators.


CLS 294/101
TXT Grapples under subclass 86.4 having hook-shaped terminals, within the bight
    of which the load is lamped by a pivoted cam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82.11+, for cable and hook tackle.

    113+,   for grapples having pivoted jaws with a surrounding frame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 115+ for cord and rope
    holders.


CLS 294/102.1
TXT Socket and slip wedge:

    Grapples under subclass 86.4 having socket members, usually embracing the
    load, within which is a wedges, which grasp the load through cam action
    upon the socket casing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86.3+,  for cam operated contracting grappling means peculiarly adapted to
    function in a well bore.

    96,     for expanding grapples of this type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclasses 55+ for devices which cut or perforate well pipe
    having similar structure.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 255, for an earth boring
    device of the core forming type provided with a core grasping means of the
    sliding wedge type.

    188,    Brakes, particularly subclass 67 for slip type pope or rod brakes.


CLS 294/102.2
TXT Well pipe elevator:

    Grapples under subclass 102.1 specially adapted for raising or lowering
    pipe or tubing into or out of a well during the breaking up or making up of
    well strings.


CLS 294/103.1
TXT Grapples under subclass 86.4 having one jaw in fixed and the other in
    movable relation to the handling terminal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for fire tongs.

    19.1+,  for pole mounted implements.

    34,     for plate and receptacle lifters having sliding graspers.

    50.9,   for grappling type hand forks and shovels of this type.

    62,     for brick carriers of this type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclasses 55+ for devices which cut or perforate well pipe
    having similar structure.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 255 for an earth boring
    device of the core forming type provided with a core grasping means of the
    sliding wedge type.

    188,    Brakes, particularly subclass 67 for slip type pipe or rod brakes.


CLS 294/103.2
TXT Coil gripper:

    Grapple under subclass 103.1 specially adapted to handle material which is
    wound about a central axis.


CLS 294/104
TXT Grapples under subclass 103.1, one jaw being pivoted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62      and 87.22+, for brick carriers of this type.

    101,    for pivoted cam and hook grapples.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 364+, 367+, 381+, and 384 for similar hand tools.


CLS 294/105
TXT Grapples under subclass 104 which are particularly designed to grasp loose
    material such as hay.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98,     for expanding pivoted jaw grapples for handling hay.

    107+,   for hay fork type pivoted jaw grapples.

    120+,   for hay fork type implements.


CLS 294/106
TXT Grapples under subclass 86.4, the engaging elements being pivoted.

    (1)     Note.  "Pivoted", as used throughout this class, includes fulcrums
    other than regulation pivot-pins.

    (2)     Note.  In this group of subclasses have been placed all handling
    devices of general application coming within the definition.

    (3)     Note.  Mere finger-pieces designed to release a clip are not
    regarded as handling terminals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for fire tongs.

    28+,    for pivoted jaw plate and receptacle lifters.

    85      and 87.22, for overhead beam hooks and grapples.

    86.29,  for contracting grappling means having a pivotal grappling movement
    and which means is peculiarly adapted to function within a well bore.

    97,     for expanding grapples having pivoted jaws.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 489+, for pivoted clasps.

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 182 and 461, for orange peel and clamshell
    buckets.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 290 and 422+ for a metal-drawing gripper.

    81,     Tools, subclasses 348+ for pliers and tongs with means for pivoting
    both jaws.

    140,    Wireworking, subclass 123, for wire working implements.


CLS 294/107
TXT Grapples under subclass 106 particularly designed to grasp loose material,
    such as hay.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92,     for rigid gripper type grapples.

    98,     for expanding grapples for handling hay.

    120,    for hay fork type implements.


CLS 294/108
TXT Grapples under subclass 107 having some means additional to the pivoted
    jaws for retaining the load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121,    showing auxiliary retainers, in hayfork type implements.


CLS 294/109
TXT Grapples under subclass 107 having some trip mechanism for releasing the
    jaws to grasp or discharge the load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for jaws controlling toggle operation analogous to latching action.
     Where the tripping of a latch is preliminary to a toggle release, the
    latch feature controls the classification of the patent.


CLS 294/110.1
TXT Automatic:

    Grapples under subclass 106 having some special operating member including
    means to sense a changing condition for effecting operation of grapple.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19.3    for triggered, pole mounted fishing gaffs.

    68.21+, for bottom or side discharge hoisting buckets.

    86.27,  for contracting inwardly biased   grappling means that is held
    disengaged by a trip means and which is adapted to function within a well
    bore.

    96,     for expanding jar grapples with slip wedge.

    99.1+,  for resilient grapples.

    102.1+, for grapples with socket and slip wedge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 6 and 88, for
    trip-operated jaws.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 151+, for animal catching and holding
    tools.

    293,    Vehicle Fenders, subclasses 15+, for vehicle fenders having body
    traps.


CLS 294/110.2
TXT Cam and follower:

    Grapples under subclass 110.1 wherein a cam and cam follower arrangement is
    used to selectively allow movement of the grasping jaws between opened and
    closed positions.


CLS 294/111
TXT Grapples under subclass 106, the operation of the jaws being caused by a
    supplemental cable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86.14+, for grappling means adapted to function in a well bore and having a
    separate grapple operating means.

    107,    for toggle-operated jaws with separate cable.

    109,    for toggle-operated jaws with separate cable and latching means.


CLS 294/112
TXT Grapples under subclass 111 in which the supplemental-cable to operate the
    device is a suspension-cable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 182 and 461, for orange peel and clamshell
    buckets.


CLS 294/113
TXT Grapples under subclass 108, the grasping-jaws being pivoted upon a
    structure which surrounds the load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for surrounding frame devices having but a single pivoted jaw.


CLS 294/114
TXT Grapples under subclass 113, opposing pivoted jaws having cam action on the
    load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for hand and barrows having opposing jaws.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 31.


CLS 294/115
TXT Grapples under subclass 106 having a distinct grapple-operating means which
    has sliding action along the support for the jaws.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19.1+,  for pole mounted implements.

    100,    for resilient grapples with slide.

    104,    for fixed and pivoted jaw grapples.


CLS 294/116
TXT Grapples under subclass 106, the operation of the jaws being produced by
    some form of cam action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95,     for expanding grapples with cam spread jaws.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 134, for cam lever cord
    and rope holders.


CLS 294/117
TXT Grapples under subclass 106 having an independent handle or bar for
    operation the grapple.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86.14,  for grappling means adapted to function in a well bore and having a
    separate grapple operating means.

    115,    for pivoted jaw grapples having a sliding operator.


CLS 294/118
TXT Grapples under subclass 106, the grasping elements comprising crossed
    levers centrally fulcrumed or pivoted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28+,    for pivoted plate or receptacle graspers.

    104,    for fixed and pivoted jaw grapples.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 415+, for pliers and tongs with crossed handles.


CLS 294/119
TXT Grapples under subclass 118 having a secondary-lever system to cause the
    operation of the primary load-gripping elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 381+, for pliers and having tandem levers.


CLS 294/119.1
TXT Slideable jaws:

    Grapples under subclass 86.4 in which all of the grasping jaws have a
    relative sliding movement and usually move on guides.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for sliding graspers on a plate or receptacle lifter.

    67.33,  for slideable supports on a hoist-line attached load supporting
    frame.

    81.62,  for slideable grippers on a spacing hoist bar or frame.

    103,    for fixed and moveable jaw grapples.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 355+ for pliers and tongs having a sliding jaw.


CLS 294/119.2
TXT Band type:

    Grapples under subclass 86.4 comprising a strip of material adapted to
    extend around a load and provide substantially continuous gripping
    engagement therewith in a single plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for a plate or receptacles lifter with band type graspers having
    pivotally connected sectors.

    31.2,   for a band type plate or receptacle lifter.

    33,     for a plate or receptacle lifter having a grapple in which a strip
    of resilient material is formed to provide relative moveable distinct jaw
    portions.


CLS 294/119.3
TXT Inflatable:

    Grapples under subclass 86.4 wherein the grasping force is produced by the
    introduction of fluid pressure into a resiliently inflatable member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63.2,   for brick carrying frames having expansible inflatable grapples.

    98.1,   for inflatable expanding grapples in general.


CLS 294/119.4
TXT Swing dampener:

    Grapples under subclass 86.4 wherein the suspension means for the grapple
    includes a motion retarder to prevent undesired oscillation of the grapple.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86.12,  for hoist-line hook having a resilient suspension means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 266+ for dashpot type shock absorbers, per se.

    267,    Spring Devices, appropriate subclasses for spring devices, per se.


CLS 294/120
TXT Implements under class definition particularly designed to engage loose
    material, such as hay, not provided for under more specific "hay-fork type"
    subclasses above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49+,    for hand forks.

    98,     for expanding grapples adapted to handle hay.

    105,    for hay handling grapples having fixed and pivoted jaws.

    107+,   for hay fork type pivoted jaw   grapples.


CLS 294/121
TXT Hay-fork type implements under subclass 120 having a corkscrew-like
    load-engaging element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 157 for an auger type
    land anchor.


CLS 294/122
TXT Hay fork type implements under subclass 120, in which the load-carrying
    means is usually a tilting frame normally held in a horizontal position and
    having means controlling its position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68.26,  for tilting discharge hoisting buckets.


CLS 294/123
TXT Hay fork type implements under subclass 122 having some means additional to
    the fork for seizing and retaining hold of the load.


CLS 294/124
TXT Hay fork type implements under subclass 122 having a trip-latch to control
    the position of the fork-frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    for toggle mechanisms for forks of this type.


CLS 294/125
TXT Hay fork type implements under subclass 120 having load-engaging means
    comprising a barbed spear and cooperating fork.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for pivoted jaw hay grapple with auxiliary retainer.


CLS 294/126
TXT Hay fork type implements under subclass 120 in which the load-engaging
    means comprises a spear-shaped implement provided with barbs or shoulders
    set to prevent the disengagement of the load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for spears of general utility.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 155+ for an earth
    piercing or expanding land anchor.


CLS 294/127
TXT Harpoons under subclass 126 wherein mechanical means is provided to move
    the barbs to engaging or disengaging position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98,     for expanding grapples for handling hay.


CLS 294/128
TXT Harpoons under subclass 127 wherein a plurality of harpoon-shafts are
    associated to form the load-engaging means.


CLS 294/129
TXT Harpoons under subclass 128 wherein a trip-operated device releases the
    barb-controlling mechanism.


CLS 294/130
TXT Harpoons under subclass 127 wherein a trip-operated device releases the
    barb-controlling mechanism.


CLS 294/131
TXT Shields or protectors under class definition designed to be applied to
    devices within the class definition and to shield the hand of the operator
    while using the device or protect the implement or object handled against
    injury.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for hand and finger attached implements.

    59,     for attachments for hand forks and shovels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 16 for a guard or  protector for the hand against
    unusual conditions such as the application of a strong force, high
    temperature, etc.

    114,    Ships, subclass 221 for similar structures to prevent rats climbing
    ships' hawsers.


CLS 294/132
TXT WIRE ENGAGING AND CLAMPING MEANS FOR USE WITH CABLE TYPE WIRE TENSIONING
    APPARATUS:

    Devices under the class definition consisting of means which includes a
    portion peculiarly adapted to contact and positively grip at least one wire
    which is being tensioned by apparatus connected to the means by a cable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements of Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 199+ for portable implements or apparatus for tensioning
    flexible material or for extracting stumps or poles.


CLS 294/133
TXT Wire engaging portion of means includes rotatable, generally circular disk
    or cylinder:

    Devices under subclass 132 wherein the contacting portion includes at least
    one generally disk or cylinder which is rotated when a gripping force is
    applied to the wire.


CLS 294/134
TXT Including threaded tightener:

    Devices under subclass 132 wherein the means also includes a threaded,
    cylindrical rod cooperating with a threaded, nutlike structure to apply the
    wire gripping force to the contacting portion.


CLS 294/135
TXT Including pivotally attached and hand engaged lever:

    Devices under subclass 132 wherein the means includes a hand held and
    powered lever which pivots about a fixed axis to apply the wire gripping
    force to the contacting portion.


CLS 294/136
TXT Having curved, camming protrusion formed on lever:

    Devices under subclass 135 in which the lever has a curved, camming
    projection formed thereon which either cams against the wire contacting
    portion or the wire.


CLS 294/137
TXT ARTICLE CARRIER GRIPPED AND CARRIED BY HAND:

    Device under the class definition including means to support an article to
    be transported and which is provided with structure specifically adapted to
    be grasped and supported by the hand of the bearer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for a device comprising a combination of two or more types of
    implements included within this class.

    3.5,    for hand trays for mortar.

    5.5,    for rod-type article supports (e.g., clothes hanging bars).

    15+,    for a load-carrying bar or frame provided with one or more
    handholds permitting the load to be carried at the normal level of the
    hands.

    26,     for carriers in the form of a hook.

    27.1+,  for plate or receptacle carriers.

    62+,    for brick carriers.

    64.1+,  for carriers which hold an article by suction.

    65.5,   for carriers which hold an article by magnetic force.

    86.4+,  for grapples.

    903,    for a cross reference art collection of battery carriers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclass 120.5 for ski boot carriers.

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 110+ for handle structure, per
    se; especially subclass 114 for removable handles (viz, those which engage
    cooperating structure on the article).  Class 16 is the residual locus for
    handles claimed as a subcombination of an article.

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, subclasses 100+ for purses
    and handbags used to carry money, credit cards, and items of
    identifications on the person.

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, appropriate subclasses for trunks
    and travelling bags.  See subclass 116, for an article of hand luggage
    combined with a detachable handle.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, appropriate subclasses for a carrier
    in the form of a mercantile or display package for a particular article, or
    a receptacle configured for a particular article.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, appropriate subclasses for a support for a
    plurality of articles which is adapted to rest upon or be attached to a
    surface (no handle being claimed).

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses 5+ for wooden boxes for carrying
    articles; and subclass 122 for wooden or straw baskets.

    220,    Receptacles, appropriate subclasses for article carriers in the
    form of metal or plastic receptacles.  See subclasses 752+ for handle
    details.  A removable handle claimed in combination with cooperating
    structure on a Class 220 receptacle is classified in Class 220, subclasses
    752+.  See subclasses 485+ for wire baskets.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for article carriers
    having means to separate an article from a group of articles carried by the
    carrier.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, appropriate subclasses for body or
    vehicle supported carriers.  Carriers which are gripped and supported by
    the hand of the bearer are classified in Class 294.  Those carriers which
    can be used in either manner (e.g., car-carried on hand-held) have been
    classified as originals in Class 224.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 117.09+ for a
    paperboard box having a handle.

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses for an article holder adapted to
    rest upon or be attached to a surface (no handle being claimed).

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 3+ for a hand-held device for supporting a
    work piece while it is being treated.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 6+ for a flexible bag combined with a
    handle.


CLS 294/138
TXT Including means to cover book or sheet:

    Device under subclass 137 including one or more sheets or panels folded or
    joined to form at least a partial jacket for one or more books or sheets of
    paper.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 232 for a combined or
    convertible receptacle or package for a book or leaflet; subclasses 449+
    for a special container or package for a book or sheet; and subclasses 472
    for a book cover having an attached article retainer (no handle claimed).

    281,    Books, Strips, and Leaves, subclass 34 for removable book covers.


CLS 294/139
TXT Including support for optical instrument (e.g., camera holder):

    Device under subclass 137 specifically adapted to support an instrument
    having an optical lens.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, subclass 52 for camera
    cases.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 316.2 for a camera case or
    package.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 163.1+ for tripods.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 419+ for a camera support.


CLS 294/140
TXT Carrier for person:

    Device under subclass 137 specially adapted to support a person.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 861+ for a field stretcher carried by a person or
    persons.

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclass 96 for a body harness and/or
    tether of general utility useful for both animals or human beings, e.g., a
    harness for moving an unconscious person by means of an attached line.

    224,    Package or Article Carriers, subclass 158 for a carrier for a
    person which is attached to or worn by the bearer.


CLS 294/141
TXT Convertible to, or useable as, different device or different type carrier:

    Device under subclass 137 wherein either (a) all or a portion is useable,
    with or without modification, as an apparatus other than an article carrier
    (b) the carrier is alternately useable as a different type article carrier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclasses 1+ for convertible
    baggage.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 736+ for a package or
    receptacle convertible to or from a contents displaying mode.

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 23.86 for an arrangement of plural
    receptacles, at least one of which is combined with or convertible to
    another device.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclasses 575+ for a body attached
    carrier which is convertible to, or useable as a different device or type
    of carrier.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 4 for bag convertible to a nonbag device.


CLS 294/142
TXT Having means for supporting or mounting carrier:

    Device under subclass 141 having specific means (e.g., legs, clamp, hanger,
    etc.,) for supporting the carrier on a surface or for mounting or
    suspending the carrier from a supporting structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses for a stand or bracket, per se.


CLS 294/143
TXT Having plural receivers or supports for plural articles (e.g., rack):

    Device under subclass 142 specially configured to support a plurality of
    articles simultaneously.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159,    for a carrier, per se, having plural discrete receivers or supports
    for plural articles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, appropriate subclasses for a support comprising
    built-up or open framework structure for supporting a plurality of
    articles. Racks having handles by which the rack is adapted to be gripped
    and carried are classified in Class 294.


CLS 294/144
TXT Tray:

    Device under subclass 142 comprising a rigid platelike element having a
    horizontal article supporting surface which is substantially longer and
    wider than its thickness.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172,    for an article carrying tray, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 557+ for a shallow
    receptacle (e.g., tray) which is specially configured to hold a particular
    type article.  A tray having mere "apertures" or "circular depressions" is
    not considered to be specially configured.  Structure such as "elongated
    recesses for hypodermic syringes" is sufficient to cause classification in
    Class 206.


CLS 294/145
TXT Configured for complimentary projections on package or article:

    Device under subclass 137 provided with a plurality of protrusions or
    recesses for engagement with corresponding but opposite protrusions or
    recesses on the article to be carried.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158,    for a carrier having a component positioned in an aperture in the
    article (e.g., record carrier).


CLS 294/146
TXT Having plural diverse receivers or supports for diverse articles:

    Device under subclass 137 including two distinct article engaging or
    supporting portions, each of which is configured to engage or support a
    different type article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159,    for a carrier provided with plural discrete receivers or supports
    for plural articles of the same type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, subclass 106 for a purse or
    pocketbook combined with an article holder.


CLS 294/147
TXT Including receiver or support for ski:

    Device under subclass 146 wherein one of the engaging or supporting
    portions is specifically adapted to engage or support a ski.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 315.1 for a bag or
    receptacle for skis.

    211,    Supports:  Rocks, subclass 70.5 for a support or rack for holding a
    ski in storage.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 814 for a clamp, tie, or case for carrying
    or storage of skis, wherein the case or cover serves more than the function
    of protection.  The ski carriers in Class 280 are those in which a ski or
    pole serves as the carrying handle.


CLS 294/148
TXT Including helical spring or elastic material for engaging or supporting
    article:

    Device under subclass 137 wherein a portion which comes into direct contact
    with the article to support or retain the article comprises either an
    elongated member formed into a helix, or a strip of material, either of
    which exhibits substantial resiliency along its length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166,    for resiliently biased clamping means to secure the article to the
    carrier, or the carrier around the article, but wherein the spring or
    elastic material providing the bias does not itself contact the article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 560+ for resilient supports.


CLS 294/149
TXT Having flaccid receiver, support or fastener for article:

    Device under subclass 137 including either a portion formed of a
    nonself-sustaining pliant material which comes into direct contact with the
    article, or a member formed of such material for securing an article to the
    carrier.

    (1)     Note.  The pliant member, if separable from the remainder of the
    carrier, must be claimed as an element of the carrier for original
    placement of a patent in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170,    for a handle having means at either end to retain cord used to
    secure a package.

    171,    for a handle having a cord accommodating groove or passage along
    the length of the handle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, subclass 131 for a work holder having flaccid loop
    article engaging clamp.


CLS 294/150
TXT Including means to tighten flaccid member about article:

    Device under subclass 149 including means which provides a mechanical
    advantage to place the pliant member or portion under tension.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons and Clasps, etc., subclass 19 for bale or package
    ties with tighteners.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 51+ for a mechanism for tightening a belt, chain, cable, etc.,
    about an article.


CLS 294/151
TXT Including rigid, semirigid or reinforced panel:

    Device under subclass 149 which includes, in addition to a pliant section
    or member, a panel formed of either a self-sustaining material, or a pliant
    material combined with reinforcing members to render the panel
    self-sustaining.


CLS 294/152
TXT Having plural handles connected by flaccid receiver or support (e.g.,
    sling):

    Device under subclass 149 comprising an elongated member of pliant material
    having a member or portion at each end thereof adapted to be gripped by the
    hand.

    (1)     Note.  The two handles may be juxtaposed to be used as one handle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74+,    for hoist-line slings.

    155,    for a sling having a handle at only one end thereof.


CLS 294/153
TXT And rigid handle or bar:

    Device under subclass 149 including an elongated relatively inflexible
    member which either is adapted to be grasped directly by the hand to lift
    the carrier, or has a handle directly connected thereto.


CLS 294/154
TXT Plural discrete flaccid supporting members suspended from handle or bar at
    spaced points:

    Device under subclass 153 including a plurality of individually distinct
    pliant members attached to the handle or bar at discrete locations for
    supporting or securing the article beneath the handle or bar.


CLS 294/155
TXT And connected by cross-strap or brace (e.g., harness):

    Device under subclass 154 including an additional member intersecting and
    interconnecting a plurality of the suspended pliant members.


CLS 294/156
TXT Single web or strap (e.g., sling):

    Device under subclass 153 consisting of a single elongated pliant member
    the ends of which are connected or are adapted to be connected to the bar
    or handle, and wherein the width of the pliant member, when viewed in the
    direction of its length, is many times its thickness.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    for a sling having a handle or handle portion at each end thereof.


CLS 294/157
TXT Having parallel flaccid members forming article support:

    Device under subclass 149 including a plurality of elongated pliant members
    which are parallel to one another over a substantial portion of their
    length.


CLS 294/158
TXT Carrier component positioned in aperture in article:

    Device under subclass 137 having a portion adapted to be inserted into a
    hole in the article to position or secure the article to the carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145,    for a carrier having a plurality of protrusions to engage
    complimentary recesses in the article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 310 for a receptacle or a
    mercantile package for a sound recording and having a spindle-like retainer.

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 47+ for a holder that is inserted within a
    work aperture.


CLS 294/159
TXT Having plural discrete receivers or supports for spaced articles:

    Device under subclass 137 including a plurality of distinct article
    engaging or supporting portions, each adapted to engage or support a
    separate article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87.1+,  for a carrier having a plurality of bottle-gripping stations.

    143,    for a similar type carrier provided with means to support or mount
    the carrier (e.g., legs, aperture, etc.).

    146,    for a carrier having plural receivers or supports for diverse
    articles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 139+ for a portable
    carries for plural beverage receptacles, and subclasses 557+ for a
    tray-type receptacle having receivers or supports for articles.


CLS 294/160
TXT Separable supports:

    Device under subclass 159 comprising means to facilitate the assembly and
    disassembly of one article-supporting portion from another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    for carriers having means to facilitate the assembly or disassembly
    of an article-supporting portion from a handle portion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 23.4 for horizontally attached receptacle
    sets, wherein at least one of the receptacles is detachable from the
    remainder of the set.


CLS 294/161
TXT Vertical array:

    Device under subclass 159 wherein the article-engaging or supporting
    portions are arranged in such a manner that one of the articles is
    supported either entirely above or entirely below another article.

    (1)     Note.  The engaging and supporting portions may additionally be
    arranged in horizontally spaced relation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 503+ for specially
    configured receptacles having structural features for facilitating vertical
    stacking.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 128.1+ for terraced trays embodied in
    a surface-supported rack.

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 23.6 for horizontally attached receptacle
    sets with a stacking feature.


CLS 294/162
TXT Having movably mounted or separable means to retain articles:

    Device under subclass 159 including means to retain an article at an
    article-engaging or supporting portion, wherein the retaining means is
    either (a) assembled and disassembled to the carrier to retain or remove
    the article, or (b) is movable on the carrier to a first position to retain
    the article, and to a second position to release the article from the
    carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165,    for means to fasten one or more articles to a carrier, wherein the
    carrier does not include a discrete receiver or support for each article.


CLS 294/163
TXT Common to plural receivers or supports:
    Device under subclass 162 wherein the means to retain an article comprises
    a single member for simultaneously retaining a plurality of articles at a
    plurality of article engaging or supporting portions.


CLS 294/164
TXT Article gripping or retaining means actuated by lifting carrier:

    Device under subclass 137 including movable structure for holding or
    otherwise retaining the article on the carrier, wherein a carrying handle
    is interconnected with the holding or retaining means in such a manner as
    to move or tend to move the holding or retaining means into its operative
    position whenever a lifting force is applied to the handle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28+,    for a receptacle lifter having pivoted jaws which are actuated by
    lifting the handle.

    87.2+,  for a carrier for plural bottles and having bottle-gripping means
    actuated by lifting the carrier handle.

    167,    for other carriers having a movable handle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 142 for a receptacle or
    mercantile unit for holding plural beverage containers, and which includes
    a pivoted handle that serves to retain the containers when the handle is
    lifted.


CLS 294/165
TXT Including means to release article or to fasten carrier to or around
    article:

    Device under subclass 137 wherein the carrier includes either (a)
    manipulatable means which, when actuated, permits the article to fall free
    of or be removed from the carrier, (b) means to positively engage an
    article to secure it to the carrier, or (c) two relative movable connected
    portions which are manipulated to substantially enclose the article within
    the carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27.1+,  for means to secure a receptacle to a carrier.

    64.1+,  for carriers employing vacuum to secure an article thereon.

    65+,    for carriers employing magnetic attraction to secure an article
    thereon.

    86.4+,  for grapple-type article manipulators.

    162,    for securing means on a carrier having plural article supports.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 187.1 for article attaching means on stands; and
    subclasses 309.1+ for article attaching means on brackets.

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses for attaching means for
    securing a workpiece to a holder.


CLS 294/166
TXT Resiliently biased:

    Device under subclass 165 wherein the means to release or fasten the
    article includes a first work-engaging portion movable relative to a second
    work-engaging portion, and elastically deformable structure which functions
    to force them either toward or away from each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99.1+,  for grapple having a spring actuated jaw.

    148,    for a helical spring or elastic member which directly engages the
    article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, subclass 162 for holders having plural resiliently
    biased jaw pairs; and subclasses 254+ for resiliently biased jaws.


CLS 294/167
TXT Support or receiver movably, removably, or adjustably mounted to handle or
    handle portion (e.g., collapsible):

    Device under subclass 137 having article-engaging or supporting structure
    and either (a) means to facilitate the assembly or disassembly of said
    structure from a hand-engaged portion of the carrier, or (b) means to
    permit relative movement between said structure and a hand-engaged portion
    of the carrier.


CLS 294/168
TXT Having slidable sections:

    Device under subclass 167 including adjustable connecting means between
    article engaging or supporting structure and the remainder of the carrier,
    the connecting means comprising a first surface fastened to the engaging or
    supporting structure and in gliding contact with a second surface on the
    remainder of the carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166,    for resiliently biased sliding clamp or article enclosing structure.


CLS 294/169
TXT Having pivoted sections:

    Device under subclass 167 comprising means swingably connecting article
    engaging or supporting structure with the remainder of the carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165,    for pivoted structure which functions to retain the article on the
    carrier.


CLS 294/170
TXT Including handle having article or cord engaging means depending at each
    end:

    Device under subclass 137 comprising an elongated member adapted to be
    grasped and supported by the hand of the bearer and having means at or
    adjacent each end thereof to engage and retain an article to be carried.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153,    for a rigid handle or bar claimed in combination with an
    article-supporting strap.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 114+ for a detachable handle
    which engages structure on the article that is specially provided to
    cooperate with the handle.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 752+ for a bail handle for a receptacle.


CLS 294/171
TXT Having cord or bail accommodating groove or passage along length of handle:

    Device under subclass 137 comprising an elongated member adapted to be
    gripped and supported by the hand and having an aperture, slot, or recess,
    or a combination thereof, formed along substantially the entire length of
    the handle, and wherein a wire bail or cord which is attached to the
    article to be carried is engaged in the aperture, slot, or recess to carry
    the package.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149,    for an article or package carrier, wherein a cord or other flaccid
    retaining member is claimed as part of the carrier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclasses 6+ for a bag having a handle.


CLS 294/172
TXT Tray:

    Device under subclass 137 comprising a rigid platelike element having a
    horizontal article-supporting surface which is substantially longer and
    wider than its thickness.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144,    for a tray having legs or other means for supporting the tray on a
    surface or mounting it to a support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 557+ for a shallow
    receptacle (e.g., tray) provided with structure peculiarly adapting it for
    use with a specific type of article (e.g., "having a recess configured for
    supporting a hypodermic syringe"; however, limitation such as "a plurality
    of round apertures" or "circular recesses" is not considered to be peculiar
    to any article and those patents claiming such structure have been placed
    as originals in Class 294.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 126.1+ for tray or receptacle type
    racks.  Trays which are claimed with carrying handles or which are
    disclosed only as hand-held carriers have been classified in Class 294.

    229,    Envelops, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 100+ for
    folding paper or cardboard trays.

               CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 294/901
TXT PLATE LIFTING CLAMP:

    Handling devices which frictionally grip opposite planar surfaces of a
    plate-like element.


CLS 294/902
TXT GRIPPING ELEMENT:

    Grasping devices wherein significance is attributed to the structure of the
    element which engages the load.


CLS 294/903
TXT BATTERY CARRIER:

    Handling devices which are removably attached to vehicle battery.


CLS 294/904
TXT VEHICLE CARRIER:

    Handling devices which are removably attached to a vehicle.


CLS 294/905
TXT WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROL DEVICE:

    Devices which receive a signal transmitted by radiant energy to actuate a
    handling element.


CLS 294/906
TXT ATOMIC FUEL HANDLER:

    Devices peculiarly adapted to handle radioactive material in a nuclear
    reactor.


CLS 294/907
TXT SENSOR CONTROLLED DEVICE:

    Handling devices automatically controlled by pressure or position sensing
    means.


CLS 295/
TTL RAILWAY WHEELS AND AXLES

CLS 295/
TXT         Contains load carrying and traction wheels designed for use on
    railway-track, axles for such wheels, and means for securing such wheels
    and axles together.  In the case of mine-car axles the brackets or bearings
    for securing the axles directly to the car-bottom without a truck-frame are
    included in this class.

    (1)     Note.  For wheels for panel hangers and travelers see Class 16,
    Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 107.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 492, Rolls and Rollers, for rolls and rollers per
    se, not elsewhere provided for, and see the Notes thereto for other rolls.


CLS 295/1
TXT Arrangement and construction of railway-vehicle under the class definition
    wheels not otherwise classified below.


CLS 295/2
TXT Locomotive drive-wheels under subclass 1 embodying specific crank-pin
    construction or arrangement.


CLS 295/3
TXT Railway-vehicle wheels under subclass 1 comprising an inner and an
    outer-rotating element eccentrically arranged, the inner element supporting
    the axle and weight of the load upon the outer element and the outer
    element being adapted to run on the track-rails.


CLS 295/4
TXT Railway-vehicle wheels under subclass 1 the peripheries of which are
    provided with projecting spurs cooperating with rack-bars arranged along
    the trackway.


CLS 295/5
TXT Railway-vehicle wheels under subclass 1 having a gear-wheel rigidly
    attached to one side thereof, whereby the motive force is transmitted
    directly to the driving wheels.


CLS 295/6
TXT Locomotive drive-wheels under subclass 1 provided with weighted means for
    overcoming the disturbing action of the reciprocating parts and eliminating
    the so-called "hammer- blow" on the rails.


CLS 295/7
TXT Devices under subclass 1 for deadening or damping the noise on car-wheels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclass 207 for devices for deadening mechanical
    vibrating structure.


CLS 295/8
TXT Railway-vehicle wheels under subclass 1 consisting of concentric cast
    portions, either a rim or tire having a body portion cast therein or a hub
    having a rim or web portion cast thereon.


CLS 295/8.5
TXT Includes means under subclass 1 for changing the wheel-tread so as to adapt
    it for running on a roadway or a railway, generally by providing a
    removable rim or tread.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9.2,    for a wheel having a flange moveable for road use.


CLS 295/9.1
TXT Moveable flange:

    Device under subclass 1 comprising a railway-vehicle wheel protruding edge
    surface which holds the wheel laterally in position on a railway track.
    The protruding edge surface comprise or is carried by structure
    facilitating movement of the edge surface relative to the wheel.

    (1)     Note.  The movement may be radial, axial, or revoluble.


CLS 295/9.2
TXT Moveable for road use:

    Device under subclass 9.1 wherein the relative movement between the edge
    surface and the wheel is intended to enable operation of the wheel on a
    level, nonrail surface such as a road.

    (1)     Note.  The flange usually retracts within the diameter of the wheel
    or yields to permit operation on a level, nonrail surface.

    (2)     Note.  Flanges which yield to permit a wheel to more easily cross
    an obstruction are not included in this subclass unless operation on a
    level, nonrail surface such as a road is specified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8.5,    for wheels convertible between roads and rail use by means other
    than a moveable flange.


CLS 295/10
TXT Railway-vehicle wheels under subclass 1 adapted for revolution independent
    of the car-axle by means of an outer section or tire loosely mounted on the
    wheel hub or body.


CLS 295/11
TXT Railway-vehicle wheels under subclass 1 not classified below in which a
    cushion or filler of some elastic material as rubber, paper, or leather--is
    inserted between the rim or tire and the wheel body or hub.

    (1)     Note.  For similar devices for use with land vehicles, see Class
    152, Resilient Tires and Wheels.


CLS 295/12
TXT Railway-vehicle wheels under subclass 11 having pneumatic devices for
    supporting the wheel-tread portions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30.1,   for pneumatic tire wheels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, subclasses 4+ for a roll, per se, not elsewhere
    provided for, having an inflatible chamber.


CLS 295/13
TXT Railway-vehicle wheels under subclass 11 having wooden blocks for
    supporting the wheel-tread portions.


CLS 295/14
TXT Railway-vehicle wheels under subclass 11 in which the cushioning effect is
    produced by interposing metallic springs between the rim or tire and the
    wheel body or hub.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, subclass 42 for a roll, per se, not elsewhere
    provided for, having leaf or coil spring member.


CLS 295/15
TXT Railway-vehicle wheels under subclass 1 having the tires or rims and the
    body of the wheels formed separately and specific means not otherwise
    classified below for securing the tires and the bodies of the wheels
    together.


CLS 295/16
TXT Railway-vehicle wheels under subclass 15 having the tires or rims fastened
    to the wheel-body by welding.


CLS 295/17
TXT Railway-vehicle wheels under subclass 15 having the tires or rims and the
    body of the wheels formed separately and secured together by mean of an
    interposed filling of cast metal.


CLS 295/18
TXT Railway-vehicle wheels under subclass 15 having the tires or rims and the
    body of the wheels formed separately and secured together solely of means
    of lugs formed integral with one member and engaging recesses or integral
    lugs on the other member in interlocking relation.


CLS 295/19
TXT Railway-vehicle wheels under subclass 15 having the tires or rims and the
    body of the wheels formed separately and secured together by means by keys
    passing transversely between and recessed in the tire and wheel body at
    intervals around the circumference thereof.


CLS 295/20
TXT Railway-vehicle wheels under subclass 15 having the tires or rims and the
    body of the wheels formed separately and secured together by bolts passed
    through the overlapped flanges of both members.


CLS 295/21
TXT Railway-vehicle wheels under subclass 1 embodying specific web construction
    not otherwise classified below.  Includes wooden and split casting web
    construction.


CLS 295/22
TXT Railway-vehicle wheels under subclass 21 in which the tires or rims and hub
    are connected by a web portion composed of one or more sheet-metal disks
    and not otherwise classified below.


CLS 295/23
TXT Same as subclass 22 except that there is a plurality of disks, with a
    filler therebetween.


CLS 295/24
TXT Railway-vehicle wheels under subclass 22 in which the tire or rim is formed
    integral with the web, being pressed from a single sheet of metal.


CLS 295/25
TXT Railway-vehicle wheels under subclass 1 having the rims or tires and the
    wheel-hub formed separately and connected by a series of spokes and not
    otherwise classified below.  Includes wooden and metallic detachable spokes.


CLS 295/26
TXT Railway-vehicle wheels under subclass 25 having the spokes secured in the
    wheel by casting the hub or rim, or both, around the ends of the spokes.


CLS 295/27
TXT Railway-vehicle wheels under subclass 1 having the hub, web, and tire cast
    in one piece and not otherwise classified.


CLS 295/28
TXT Same as subclass 27 except that the webs are cast hollow.


CLS 295/29
TXT Wrought-metal car-wheels under subclass 1 produced by some forging
    operation, as roll, hammer, or die forging.


CLS 295/30
TXT Railway-car wheels under subclass 1 claimed significantly as to wheel
    structure and formed from a composition metal or entirely from a single
    metal, but treated so as to have different physical properties in the
    different parts of the wheels, such as chill-hardened rims or hubs.

    (1)     Note.  Where the wheel is claimed with no significant wheel
    structure but merely in terms of the composition or material of which it is
    composed, it will be classified in the appropriate composition or material
    class even though there is no claim to the composition or material, per se.

            In this connection the following classes should be considered:



       148, Metal Treatment, particularly subclasses 569 and 581+ for processes
    of metal casting,fusion bonding, machining, or working combined with
    significant heat treatment of railway wheels and axles to modify or
    maintain the internal physical structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical
    property of metal.  See section III, A, of the Class 148 definition to
    determine what constitutes significant heat treatment.  Without metal
    casting, fusion bonding, ma-chining, or working, Class 148 will take any
    heat treatment to modify or maintain the inter-nal physical structure
    (i.e., microstructure) or chemical property of metal.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, for articles defined solely by
    their metal or alloy composition.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 544+ for
    wheels made of metal which are so broadly claimed as to be merely stock
    material, especially subclasses 615+ for plural-layered metallic stock
    defined in terms of the composition of its components.


CLS 295/30.1
TXT Pneumatic tire wheel:

    Device under subclass 1 wherein the railway-vehicle wheel has a covering
    about its periphery which covering rides directly on the railway track
    (i.e., a tire) and it inflated with air under pressure.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter pertaining to a pneumatic tire cushion for a
    railway-vehicle wheel is not included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for pneumatic devices for supporting railway vehicle wheel tread
    portions, wherein the pneumatic devices are inserted between the rim or
    tire and the wheel body or hub.


CLS 295/31.1
TXT Wheel tread:

    Device under subclass 1 having particular construction  of a peripheral
    tread surface to the railway-vehicle wheel, which surface rides on the
    railway track.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30.1,   for particular wheel tread construction of a pneumatic tire
    railway-vehicle wheel.


CLS 295/32
TXT Railway-car running-gear under subclass 31.1 in which the weight of the car
    is sustained by roller-bearings.  Includes roller-trucks in which a
    plurality of roller-bearings or wheels linked together form one flexible
    wheel traveling around a bed, and also wheels in which the tread-surface or
    flange is provided with roller-bearings.


CLS 295/33
TXT Railway-car wheels under subclass 31.1 provided with a plurality of rim
    tread-surfaces.


CLS 295/34
TXT Railway-car wheels under subclass 31.1 the tread surfaces of which are
    integral with the wheel-body and the novelty of which resides in the
    specific form or shape of said tread-surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30.1,   for pneumatic-tire wheels which may include specific pneumatic-tire
    forms or shapes.


CLS 295/35
TXT Bearing linings or bushings under subclass 1 for railway-car wheels of the
    type which turn loosely upon their axles.


CLS 295/36.1
TXT AXLE:

    Device under the class definition comprising a shaft upon which a
    railway-vehicle wheel is supported for rotation (i.e., a railway-car axle).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for means for attaching and maintaining a railway-vehicle wheel on
    a railway-car axle for rotation with the axle.

    44+,    for means for attaching and maintaining a railway-vehicle wheel on
    a railway-car axle so as to adapt it to rotate independently of the axle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 218.1+ for railway vehicle truck
    axle box mountings.

    301,    Land Vehicles: Wheels and Axles, subclasses 124.1+ for axles under
    that class definition.

    384,    Bearings, appropriate subclasses for bearings which may support a
    railway-car axle.  See, for example, subclass 459 for radial, railway car
    journal bearings; subclasses 594 and 595+ for railway truck thrust
    bearings.  See section 2, Note (1) and the Search Notes under the class
    definition of Class 384 with regard to the lines between Classes 384 and
    295.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, subclasses 179+ for a rotary torque transmitting shaft.


CLS 295/37
TXT Railway-car axles under subclass 36.1 consisting of a stud-section inclosed
    in a sleeve-section and adapted to revolve therein, each section having a
    car-wheel secured to its outer end.


CLS 295/38
TXT Railway-car axles under subclass 36.1 divided into two sections, each
    carrying a car-wheel on the outer end thereof and having the inner ends
    journaled in a single fixed bearing between the wheels and adapted for
    revolution independent of each other.


CLS 295/39
TXT Railway-car axles under subclass 36.1 divided into sections and means not
    otherwise classified below for coupling the sections together and adapting
    them for revolution independent of each other.


CLS 295/40
TXT Same as subclass 39 in which the coupling means consist of flanged elements
    surrounding the axle-sections and secured together by bolts passing through
    the flanges thereof.


CLS 295/41
TXT Railway-car axles under subclass 36.1 adapted to be secured directly to the
    car-body.


CLS 295/42
TXT Brackets for mine-car axles under subclass 41 adapted to surround the axle
    and support it directly from the car-body.


CLS 295/42.1
TXT Positioned around or within co-extensive axle or housing by roller or ball
    bearing:

    Device under subclass 36.1 wherein the railway-vehicle wheel supporting
    shaft surrounds or is surrounded by a second shaft or shaft enclosure along
    its substantial length.  The wheel supporting shaft and the second shaft or
    shaft enclosure are held and allowed to rotate relative to each other
    means for a support (bearing) between them which support contains spherical
    or cylindrical rotating elements which reduce friction.

    (1)     Note.  A device comprising a mere journal bearing which encircles
    and supports a portion of a shaft is not included in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  A railway-car axle comprising a stud section enclosed and
    revolving within a  sleeve section, each section having a car-wheel secured
    to its outer end, is not included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for a railway-car axle comprising a stud section enclosed and
    revolving within a sleeve section, each section having a car-wheel secured
    to its outer end.


CLS 295/42.2
TXT With specified end cap fastening means:

    Device under subclass 36.1 comprising, in particular, a stop member and
    means to secure the stop member to an end of the shaft.

    (1)     Note.  The stop member usually maintains a bearing means in
    position on the axle.

    (2)     Note.  Railway axle end-cap locking plates which prevent end-cap
    securement nuts or bolts from loosening are included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49+,    means for preventing end-cap securement nuts or bolts from
    loosening are included in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, subclasses 81+ for threaded fastener locking
    means.


CLS 295/43
TXT Means under the class definition for attaching and maintaining the
    car-wheel on the axle so as to adapt it to revolve with the axle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclasses 230+ for a joint between a wheel and axle which involves only so
    much wheel or axle structure as is necessary to effect the joint.


CLS 295/44
TXT Means under the class definition for attaching and maintaining the
    car-wheel on the axle so as to adapt it to revolve independently of the
    axle and not otherwise classified below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclass 111, and indented
    subclasses.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses particularly
    subclasses 230+ for a joint between a wheel or axle including only such
    structure as is necessary to effect the joint.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, subclasses 337+ for headed fasteners with
    securing elements; and subclasses 511+ for securing elements, per se.


CLS 295/45
TXT Means under subclass 44, in which the wheel is prevented from moving
    longitudinally of the axle by means of an overhanging ring or lip on the
    axle-bracket engaging an annular recess in the outer surface of the
    wheel-hub.


CLS 295/46
TXT Means under subclass 45 wherein the axle- bracket forms in combination with
    the hub- groove, a substantially circular annular recess in which
    roller-bearings are imposed.


CLS 295/47
TXT Means under subclass 44, in which the wheel is prevented from moving
    longitudinally of the axle by means of rings, segmental collars, or
    roller-bearings in the wheel-hub engaging annular recesses in the car-axle.


CLS 295/48
TXT Means under subclass 47 wherein the longitudinal movement is prevented by a
    bolt or pin extending tangentially or radially into the axle-groove and
    providing a thrust-bearing for the wheel.


CLS 295/49
TXT Means under subclass 44, in which the longitudinal movement of the wheel is
    prevented by an end-stop member not otherwise classified below, such as a
    nut, rigid collar, or cap provided on the axle and bearing against the
    outside surface of the wheel-hub.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42.2,   for specified axle end-cap fastening means.


CLS 295/50
TXT Means under subclass 49, wherein the end stop member is held in place on
    the axle by  means of a linch or cotter pin passing through the axle.


CLS 296/
TTL LAND VEHICLES:  BODIES AND TOPS

CLS 296/
TXT         This class includes patents relating to that portion of a land
    vehicle, secured to the running-gear thereof, which operates as a
    receptacle or load carrier, together with the top or cover therefor.

    (1)     Note.  This class is subordinate to Class 280, Land-Vehicles, and
    is distinguished therefrom as set forth in the above definition.

    (2)     Note.  Patents for bodies or load carriers for special purposes
    will be found in this class unless there exist other devices for the same
    purposes, in which devices a running gear is an essential feature, in which
    latter instance they have been placed in Class 280, Land Vehicles,
    subclasses 4, 8+ or unless such bodies are for such purposes as would place
    them in a more specialized class, as Classes 180, Motor Vehicles; 212,
    Traversing Hoists; 298, Land Vehicles: Dumping; or 414, Material Or Article
    Handling.

    (3)     Note.  Patents for attachments for vehicles will be found in this
    class only when their functions limit them for use with vehicle bodies and
    tops; otherwise they will be found in Class 280, Land Vehicles, unless they
    are for such purposes as would place them in a more specialized class, as
    Classes 180, Motor Vehicles; 212, Traversing Hoists; 224, Package and
    Article Carriers; or 414 Material or Article Handling.

    (4)     Note.  Seats in vehicles will be found in this class only when some
    part of the body is modified to cooperate with the seats; otherwise they
    are classified in Class 297, Chairs and Seats.

    (5)     Note.  A door (access barrier or closure) in a vehicle body is
    found in this class (Class 296) when an accessory (e.g., trim, armrest,
    visor, etc.) or a feature correlated to a vehicle body is included. In the
    absence of such defining accessory or feature, a singular door structure is
    classified in Class 49, Movable or Removable Closures. However, the feature
    of plural doors in a vehicle body is provided in this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Clearning, subclasses 250.001+ for
    an optical-member-attachable cleaner (e.g., windshield wiper, etc.).

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, appropriate subclasses for
    particular car door structure when no defining accessory or feature
    correlated to a vehicle body is present.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses for
    enclosures and related components of more general application.  In general
    a box-like structure or a related component thereof is in Class 52 even
    though defined or disclosed as used in a vehicle.  Also a vehicle having
    means, e.g., an earth anchored brace or guy, to convert a vehicle to an in
    situ structure is also in Class 52.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 239+ for refrigeration means combined
    with a vehicle feature.

    105,    Railway Rolling-Stock, for vehicle bodies adapted for use on
    railways.

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclasses 88.01+ for sun and rain
    protectors adapted for use with the type of vehicle indicated.  Where there
    is a plurality of independent supports or a bow construction hinged at each
    end upon the body, such patents will be found in this class (296).

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, for (1) panel
    units in which a flexible fabric or other flexible sheet material forms the
    panel portion, (2) panel units formed of plural strips, slats, or panels,
    interconnected for relative motion (excluding those connected only by a
    common operator or mounted only in a common frame or on a common support),
    (3) panel units in the form of portable partitions, and (4) parts (1)-(3)
    combined with each other or with rigid closures or other panels.  Such
    devices, even though disclosed as parts of land vehicle bodies or tops have
    been placed in Class 160 (with only the exceptions set forth below and in
    the notes to particular subclasses in Class 296).



            These exceptions are:  (A) where organized to form a vehicle body
    enclosure, claimed in combination with particular additional features of
    vehicle body structure (as connections between vehicle top or bottom and
    sides, body bracing, etc.) or in a particular relation to the vehicle other
    than merely in a vehicle opening and (B) claimed in combination with
    vehicle accessories (as windshield wipers, seats, steps, rear view mirrors,
    etc.).



            In all cases where flexible filled fabric frames are solely
    disclosed, they have been placed in Class 160, Flexible or Portable
    Closure, Partition, or Panel, whether or not the fabric has been claimed.

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclasses 180+ for a traversing hoist
    attachment for a vehicle body.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 61+ for vehicles combined with
    illuminating means, where the vehicle structure is altered only to the
    extent necessary to provide for the vehicle lighting.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet, which may be used in the construction of a vehicle body or top.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclass 470 for specific body structure
    of toy vehicles.


CLS 296/1.1
TXT BODIES:

    Subject matter under the class definition including all portions of the
    land vehicle secured to the running gear operating as a receptacle or load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 51.11+ for
    industrial platforms, e.g., pallets or skids.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclass 120 for a fluid spring device useful in
    the cushioning of (a) a vehicle body on its undercarriage or (b) structure
    supported from the vehicle body frame.


CLS 296/2
TXT Specially adapted for use as cutters.


CLS 296/3
TXT Bodies in the form of a rack, usually designed to carry special loads.


CLS 296/4
TXT Racks specially adapted to carry barrels or articles of similar cylindrical
    shape.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    410,    Freight Accommodation on Freight Carrier, subclass 68 for a freight
    carrying vehicle having an integrally constructed rack for transporting
    bulk material containers; see, too, subclass(es) 31+, wherein such a rack
    is constructed to accommodate a group or article of some particular shape
    (e.g., regularly contoured, under subclasses 32+).


CLS 296/5
TXT Carrying racks designed for use in harvesting tobacco.


CLS 296/6
TXT Carrying racks designed to convey loose hay.

    (1)     Note.  For hay racks with special loading or unloading features see
    Class 414, Material or Article Handling.


CLS 296/7
TXT Having means permitting lengthening or shortening of the rack.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     provided with means whereby the length of the body may be changed.


CLS 296/8
TXT Where the rack is made of metal.


CLS 296/9
TXT Irons specially adapted for use in the construction of hay racks, such as
    clamps, clips, and ladder ties and pivots.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 149 for similar clamps and clips.


CLS 296/10
TXT Bodies convertible into different forms or shapes to adapt them for use for
    different purposes where one of the forms is the ordinary wagon box.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 783 for a vehicle frame having a storage
    compartment.


CLS 296/11
TXT Bodies convertible either to the form of a hay rack or to that of the
    ordinary wagon box.


CLS 296/12
TXT Where the rack, when in the form of a box, is specially designed to carry
    stock, (as calves, pigs, sheep, etc.).


CLS 296/13
TXT Where the upper parts of the sides of the box are pivoted to position
    either in a plane with or at an angle to the lower part of the sides.


CLS 296/14
TXT Where the sides are pivoted to position either in a vertical plane or at an
    angle to a vertical plane.


CLS 296/15
TXT Specially adapted for carrying threshed or loose grain.


CLS 296/16
TXT Wagons for carrying the dead.


CLS 296/17
TXT Provision is made for carrying both passengers and the dead.


CLS 296/18
TXT Means for securing the coffin against movement relative to the hearse.


CLS 296/19
TXT Wagons for moving sick or wounded persons.


CLS 296/20
TXT Where the load-carrier is in the form of a stretcher.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 83.1+ for hand-carried stretchers.


CLS 296/21
TXT Bodies specially adapted for advertising and displaying goods for sale.


CLS 296/22
TXT Specially adapted for the preparation and sale of food.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, for wagons including cooking appliances.


CLS 296/24.1
TXT Enclosed compartment:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.1 including bodies formed of one or more
    enclosed compartments where the invention relates to the organization as an
    entity or to features not specifically found in other subclasses of this
    class.

    (1)     Note.  Vehicles formed with enclosed compartments for some special
    purposes will be found in the appropriately-named subclasses (16 to 22,
    inclusive) of this class.

    (2)     Note.  Elements of a vehicle which may also be elements of
    enclosed-compartment vehicles--as doors, windows, tops, curtains,
    storm-front screens, etc.,--are classified under such titles in other
    subclasses of this class.


CLS 296/24.2
TXT For an animal:

    Subject matter under subclass 24.1 particularly adapted for transporting an
    animal.


CLS 296/25
TXT Where the bottom of the body is on two or more different levels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 2.

    410,    Freight Accommodation on Freight Carrier, subclass 45 for a
    dropped-center freight carrier to accommodate a massive dimension (height)
    of an article of freight.


CLS 296/26
TXT Provided with means whereby the length of the body may be changed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 638 and indented subclasses for patents
    showing means for lengthening the running-gear of a vehicle.


CLS 296/27
TXT Provided with means whereby the body may be collapsed into smaller compass,
    usually for storage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 639 and indented subclasses.


CLS 296/29
TXT Relating to inventions in the corners or other joints of the frame.


CLS 296/30
TXT Provided with metallic means for reinforcing the corners or joints.


CLS 296/32
TXT Removable boards adapted to be placed edge to edge with the sides of a
    wagon box to increase the vertical height of the sides of the box.


CLS 296/33
TXT Acting as a baffle or guide to direct the load into the box, especially
    where articles or materials are pitched or thrown into the box.


CLS 296/34
TXT Means for spacing the top boards relative to the side boards.


CLS 296/35.1
TXT Body securing device:

    Device under subclass 1.1 for securing the vehicle body to the running
    chassis frame.


CLS 296/35.2
TXT Having occupant safety feature (e.g., means to absorb collision impact,
    etc.):

    Device under subclass 35.1 wherein the body securing device includes means
    to protect an occupant of the vehicle upon accidental collision.


CLS 296/35.3
TXT Removable body:

    Device under subclass 35.1 wherein the body securing means allows the body
    or passenger compartment to be removable from the running gear or chassis
    frame as a unit.


CLS 296/35.4
TXT Baby carriage (e.g., perambulator, etc.):

    Device under subclass 35.1 wherein the body is designed in such a manner so
    as to accommodate an infant in a sitting or prone position.


CLS 296/36
TXT Means for securing the top or side boards in operative position.


CLS 296/37.1
TXT Apparatus under subclass 1.1 wherein there is provided a compartment or
    receiver formed in the body or top of a vehicle for the storage or receipt
    of articles or debris, the compartment or receiver being auxiliary to the
    main purpose of the vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclasses 400+, 311, 312, 321, and
    cross-reference art collection 928 for vehicle mounted litter and debris
    receivers attached to vehicle structure as an "add on" rather than a "built
    in" feature classifiable in this class (296).


CLS 296/37.11
TXT Apparatus under subclass 37.9 wherein the compartment or receiver is
    provided with exiting means by which the smoker's refuse is removed.


CLS 296/37.12
TXT Apparatus under subclass 37.8 wherein the compartment or receiver is
    mounted on or in the instrument panel of the vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclass 483 for a device for
    carrying an article attached to the dashboard of a vehicle, wherein the
    carrier is an add on rather than built into the body or top of the vehicle.


CLS 296/37.13
TXT Apparatus under subclass 37.8 wherein the compartment or receiver is
    mounted on or in an upright side body portion of the vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclass 482 for a vehicle mounted
    article carrier attached to the window or window frame of the vehicle as a
    add on rather than built into the body or top of the vehicle.


CLS 296/37.14
TXT Apparatus under subclass 37.8 wherein the compartment or receiver is
    mounted in or below the level of the floor of the vehicle.


CLS 296/37.15
TXT Apparatus under subclass 37.8 wherein the compartment or receiver is either
    situated beneath or is connected to any part of a seat of the vehicle.


CLS 296/37.16
TXT Apparatus under subclass 37.8 wherein the compartment or receiver is
    positioned at the rear of a seat, access thereto being made by either
    moving the back of the seat to an alternate position or by an entrance-way
    in a horizontal ledge at the rear of and adjacent the top of the seat back.


CLS 296/37.2
TXT Compartments under subclass 37.1 designed or constructed to receive wheels
    or tires.

    (1)     Note.  Wheel carriers attached to a vehicle not involving any
    modification of the vehicle structure, are classified in Class 224.

    (2)     Note.  Modification of a vehicle mud guard, i.e., fender, to
    provide a tire or wheel carrying portion are classified in Class 280.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclass 42.12 for vehicle attached
    wheel or tire carriers, see (1) Note.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 152.05 for fenders modified to receive and
    support a wheel or tire.  See (2) Note.


CLS 296/37.3
TXT Apparatus under subclass 37.1 wherein the vehicle compartment or receiver
    comprises a releasable or removable structure or housing to enclose or
    encase a vehicle spare tire or a portion thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37.2,   for a spare tire compartment or receiving well on a vehicle body
    combined with a tire cover.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 304+ for a receptacle for
    a tire.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 152.05 for fender wells for wheels or tires
    and see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 296/37.4
TXT Apparatus under subclass 37.1 wherein the compartment or receiver is formed
    in a baby carriage, go-cart, or like vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclass 409 for an article carrier
    attached to a stroller, wherein the carrier is an add on rather than built
    into the body or top of the vehicle.


CLS 296/37.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 37.1 wherein the compartment or receiver comprises
    a plurality of relatively movable parts, the parts being movable from a
    collapsed arrangement of parts to a load receiving compartment.


CLS 296/37.6
TXT Apparatus under subclass 37.1 wherein the vehicle having the compartment or
    receiver thereon is a conveyance used mainly for hauling goods and material
    other than people.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclass 402 for a device for
    carrying an article attached to a pickup truck, wherein the carrier is an
    add on rather than built into the body or top of the vehicle.


CLS 296/37.7
TXT Apparatus under subclass 37.1 in which the compartment or receiver is
    either secured to or is formed in part by the top or other generally
    horizontal covering panel spanning the width of the vehicle.


CLS 296/37.8
TXT Apparatus under subclass 37.1 wherein the compartment or receiver opens
    directly into the vehicle passenger compartment.


CLS 296/37.9
TXT Apparatus under subclass 37.8 wherein the compartment or receiver is
    provided especially to receive smoker's refuse.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 329+ for vehicle mounted ash trays in which is
    claimed a smoking feature (e.g., cigarette rest, snuffer, etc.) and see the
    notes in the definition to subclass 231.


CLS 296/38
TXT Metal pans located between the load and running-gear to catch a liquid
    dripping from the load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 571+ for a drip or drain pan, per se.


CLS 296/39.1
TXT Lining:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.1 adapted to cover at least a portion of
    the body.

    (1)     Note.  Linings included herein are generally for the purpose of
    protecting components from damage, for insulating or for sealing against
    leakage, etc.


CLS 296/39.2
TXT Open truck bed:

    Subject matter under subclass 39.1 for covering the open bed portion of the
    truck body.


CLS 296/39.3
TXT Heat or sound insulating:

    Subject matter under subclass 39.1 which is particularly adapted to reduce
    an undesirable transfer of heat or sound.


CLS 296/40
TXT Devices extending from one side of a wagon-box to the other to prevent
    spreading of the sides.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     and indented subclasses, where such devices are shown in connection
    with an end-gate.


CLS 296/41
TXT Metal strips and cleats secured to the inner surface of a wagon-box to
    prevent wear.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 161.


CLS 296/42
TXT Devices for preventing longitudinal movement of a box type of wagon-body
    relative to the bolster or standards of a vehicle running-gear.

    (1)     Note.  Patents showing devices for positively locking this type of
    vehicle-body to the bolsters or standards will be found in this class,
    subclasses 35.1+.


CLS 296/43
TXT Removable stakes and sockets therefor adapted to hold the load in place and
    usually used with platform-trucks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 380 and indented subclasses.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 143 and indented subclasses.


CLS 296/50
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1.1 including removable or swinging boards
    adapted to close the rear end of a box-wagon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, appropriate
    subclasses for end gates as set forth in the line note in the main class
    definition in this class (296).


CLS 296/51
TXT Where in a single end-gate there are combined two or more well-known types
    of end-gates.


CLS 296/52
TXT Those that are removable by raising in a vertical direction.


CLS 296/53
TXT Those that are rearwardly removable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, particularly
    subclass 216 for end gates made of slidably interconnected sections to make
    them removable and subclass 222 and indented subclasses, for the structure
    of such units, per se.


CLS 296/55
TXT Consisting of pivotally-connected sections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, particularly
    subclass 217 for pivotally interconnected sections mounted for removal from
    a support and subclass 233 and indented subclasses for such units, per se,
    with means to prevent relative pivotal motion.


CLS 296/56
TXT Hinged or pivoted to swing in an upward direction to open.


CLS 296/57.1
TXT Downwardly swinging:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 in which the end gate is hinged or pivoted
    to swing in a downward direction to open.


CLS 296/58
TXT Provided with side cleats and operating, when in an open position, to hold
    the load and give an opening for the use of a shovel or scoop to commence
    unloading.


CLS 296/59
TXT Easily removed from the wagon-body.


CLS 296/60
TXT Secured to a frame or to clips that are easily removable from the wagon-box.


CLS 296/61
TXT Also used as a loading-chute.


CLS 296/62
TXT Also used as steps.


CLS 296/63
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1.1 in which there is some modification of
    the body to cooperate with the seat or seats.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 32.5 for vehicles comprising a running gear
    and seats for persons engaged in manual labor adjacent the ground.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, appropriate subclasses for chair or seat of
    general utility.


CLS 296/64
TXT Arrangements of seats relative to other seats or to other parts of the
    vehicle-body.


CLS 296/65.1
TXT Shifting seat:

    Subject matter under subclass 63 in which the seat is shiftable from one
    position to another and there is a modification of the vehicle body.


CLS 296/66
TXT Where a part or parts of the seat form in one position a part of the
    contour or structure of the body.


CLS 296/67
TXT Having attached to the shifting seat a panel or part of the side of the
    body, which shifts with the seat to provide an opening for entrance or exit
    of persons from the vehicle.


CLS 296/68
TXT Operated by the opening or closing of the door or end-gate to shift the
    seat.


CLS 296/68.1
TXT With safety feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 65.1 which include a safety feature to
    minimize crash injuries.


CLS 296/69
TXT Convertible to other devices for use with a vehicle.


CLS 296/70
TXT The front of a vehicle body.


CLS 296/71
TXT Rails to protect the edge of the dashboards, sometimes provided with
    handles; also handles, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 181.


CLS 296/72
TXT Devices for securing the dashboard to a vehicle-body.


CLS 296/73
TXT Where the securing device permits pivoting of the dash-board.


CLS 296/74
TXT Devices for increasing the height of the dash-board.


CLS 296/75
TXT Devices on which to rest the feet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 423.1+ for a footrest with a chair or
    seat and not involving significant vehicle body structure.


CLS 296/76
TXT Closures for that portion of a vehicle-body to the rear of the seats.


CLS 296/77
TXT Devices for holding or securing a lap-robe in an operative position or
    against loss or theft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclass 23.1
    and indented subclasses and subclass 238 and indented subclasses, for lap
    robes wound on rollers where neither the relation to the vehicle nor a
    combination with other vehicle features is claimed.


CLS 296/77.1
TXT Storm-front shield, apron, or robe:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.1 for protecting the occupants of vehicles
    from storm or wind coming from the direction in which the vehicle is moving.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, appropriate
    subclasses, for land vehicle storm-front shields, aprons, and robes, as set
    forth in the line note in the main class definition of this class (296).
    Windshields not in the form of flexible or portable panels have been placed
    in Class 160 (see particularly subclass 48 and indented subclasses and
    subclass 90 and indented subclasses) only when in combination with a
    flexible or portable panel.


CLS 296/78.1
TXT Shields under subclass 77.1 especially designed for use with velocipedes.


CLS 296/79
TXT Windowed panels secured to the forward part of the top and adapted to
    protect the upper part of the occupant.


CLS 296/80
TXT Having a flexible apron secured to the lower part of the panel and usually
    secured to the dashboard.


CLS 296/81
TXT Flexible coverings secured to the front of the vehicle and also forming a
    direct covering for the occupants thereof.


CLS 296/82
TXT Devices secured to the front of a vehicle adapted to extend to partially
    protect the occupants of a vehicle.


CLS 296/83
TXT Flexible curtains adapted to entirely close the open space at the forward
    end of a vehicle provided with a top.


CLS 296/84.1
TXT Windshield:

    Subject matter under subclass 77.1 comprising transparent storm or wind
    protecting device secured to the body of a vehicle and in front of a
    vehicle seat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200     and 201, for vehicle windows positioned laterally or to the rear of
    a vehicle seat.


CLS 296/85
TXT Especially adapted for protecting the occupants of a rear seat of a vehicle.


CLS 296/86
TXT Consisting of at least two panels, one or more of which is pivoted to swing
    on horizontal pivots.


CLS 296/87
TXT Where the pivots hinge one panel to another at the edges of the panels.


CLS 296/88
TXT Two or more panels connected by a link, the link being hinged to each of
    the panels.


CLS 296/89
TXT The shield may consist of a single panel which can be slid vertically or of
    a plurality of panels one or more of which can be slid vertically.


CLS 296/90
TXT Consisting of a single panel.


CLS 296/91
TXT Devices for deflecting an air-current over the heads of the occupants of
    the vehicle, the deflected current acting as a protection by deflecting
    other currents of air.


CLS 296/92
TXT Improvements in hinger for wind-shields.


CLS 296/93
TXT Strips for closing the spaces between panels or between the wind-shield and
    the vehicle body or top.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 475.1+ for a closure
    seal, e.g., striker gasket or weather-strip, and see the search notes
    thereto for the loci of other seals.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 40+.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, cross-reference art collection 921 for a closure or weatherstrip
    seal.


CLS 296/95.1
TXT Auxiliary protector:

    Subject matter under subclass 84.1 associated with a windshield and mounted
    exteriorly thereto which shields at least a part of the windshield against
    the accumulation of material thereon (e.g., rain, snow, frost, insects,
    etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96.15+, for devices which remove debris from a windshield after it has
    accumulated thereon.

    96.18,  for clear vision slots in windshields.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, appropriate
    subclasses, for auxiliary protectors in the form of flexible and portable
    panels, as set forth in the line note to the main class definition of this
    class (296).  See particularly subclasses 48+ for windshield and awning
    type combinations, subclasses 90+ for windshields combined with other forms
    of flexible or portable panels and subclasses 368.1+ for pivoted visors of
    the flexible and portable panel type.


CLS 296/96
TXT Where the protector is panel adjustably pivoted to the wind-shield or the
    forward end of the top.


CLS 296/96.11
TXT Auxiliary windscreen (e.g., vent window, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 84.1 associated with the lateral edges of a
    windshield which either further protects the vehicle occupant from storm or
    wind coming from the direction in which the vehicle is moving or allow
    control of incoming wind for ventilation purposes.


CLS 296/96.12
TXT Full vision (i.e., wraparound):

    Subject matter under subclass 84.1 wherein opaque members such as roof
    supporting corner posts are eliminated and the transparency of the
    windshield is extended laterally towards the sides of the vehicle to
    increase horizontal arc of forward vision.


CLS 296/96.13
TXT Movably mounted to provide access:

    Subject matter under subclass 96.12 wherein the windshield must be
    displaced from its normal operative position to allow entry and exit from
    the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146.8,  for an access barrier or closure which extends transversely of the
    vehicle front or rear in a closed position.


CLS 296/96.14
TXT Multiple layered with airspace therebetween:

    Subject matter under subclass 84.1 wherein the windshield itself has plural
    layers, at least two layers of which are separated by a gaseous medium.

    (1)     Note.  This is usually done to prevent frosting or fogging of the
    windshield, or as a thermal insulation.


CLS 296/96.15
TXT Cleaner:

    Subject matter under subclass 84.1 combined with a device which removes
    accumulated material (e.g., ice, rain, snow, dirt, etc.) from the
    windshield.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 250.001+ for
    an optical-member-attachable cleaner (e.g., windshield wiper, etc.).


CLS 296/96.16
TXT Rotating windshield:

    Subject matter under subclass 96.15 wherein at least a part of the
    windshield moves about an arcuate path to aid in the removal of accumulated
    material therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  Windshields which spin to remove material by centrifugal
    force will be found here.


CLS 296/96.17
TXT With specific motor mounting for cleaner:

    Subject matter under subclass 96.15 wherein the placement of support of the
    motor which drives the cleaner is of particular significance.


CLS 296/96.18
TXT Clear vision slot:

    Subject matter under subclass 84.1 wherein a gap is provided in the
    windshield through which an occupant can view the roadway under adverse
    weather conditions.


CLS 296/96.19
TXT Glare reducing:

    Subject matter under subclass 84.1 wherein at least a part of the
    windshield itself is made of a material which optically screens harsh light
    from either the interior or exterior of the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97.1+,  for glare screens which are separate and distinct from the
    windshield itself.


CLS 296/96.2
TXT Pivoted about horizontal axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 84.1 wherein the windshield is rotatable
    about an axis which extends in a direction transverse to the direction of
    vehicle movement.


CLS 296/96.21
TXT With specific support structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 84.1 wherein particular significance is
    attributed to the manner in which the windshield is supported by the
    vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201,    for supporting frames for a vehicle window other than a windshield.


CLS 296/96.22
TXT Releasable upon impact:

    Subject matter under subclass 96.21 wherein the support structure for the
    windshield is arranged so as to give way under a significant force before
    the windshield itself would shatter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 728.1+ for "air bags" and subclasses 748+
    for other devices which are designed to protect a vehicle occupant from
    injury should the vehicle sharply decelerate or collide with another object.


CLS 296/97.1
TXT Glare screen or visor:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.1 comprising a means mounted, usually in
    combination with a windshield to protect the driver of a vehicle from the
    glare of an approaching light, usually shown in combination with a
    windshield.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95.1,   for an externally mounted glare screen or visor located outside the
    passenger compartment and in front of the windshield which would inherently
    protect the windshield.

    152,    for glare screens or visors associated with side and rear windows.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, appropriate
    subclasses, for glare screens, as set forth in the line note in the main
    class definition of this class (296); and also glare screens in the form of
    rigid panels claimed in combination with a flexible or portable panel,
    which may be an additional glare screen, except (a) where the optical
    properties of the glare screen are claimed, (b) where the specific location
    of the glare screen with respect to the car or driver is claimed (the mere
    recitation that it is mounted on the windshield not being considered a
    specific location), and (c) where the combination with other vehicle
    structure (such as the dashboard, etc.) is claimed.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 200+ for mere brackets for supporting a glare
    screen.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    603+ for glare screens combined with a mirror.


CLS 296/97.11
TXT Allowing slidable movement relative to support:

    Subject matter under subclass 97.9 in which the visor or glare screen are
    slidably movable with respect to the support.


CLS 296/97.12
TXT For mounting to pivotable arm:

    Subject matter under subclass 97.9 in which the visor or glare screen is
    attached to a pivotable arm.


CLS 296/97.13
TXT Arm having specific pivot structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 97.12 in which the pivot mechanism, usually
    at the end of the support arm, is specifically set forth.


CLS 296/97.2
TXT With specific structure or properties for diffusing or reflecting light:

    Subject matter under subclass 97.1 comprising means to control the light
    moving toward a viewer's eyes by changing its direction or reducing its
    intensity by absorbing, transmitting away, or reflecting part of the light.

    (1)     Note.  Mere naming of glare screen as being translucent, colored,
    etc., not considered significant for placement in this subclass.


CLS 296/97.21
TXT Baby carriage or child's wagon:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.1 in which the vehicle body is of the baby
    carriage, perambulator or child's wagon type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35.4,   for body securing devices for baby carriages.

    37.4,   for auxiliary article compartment on child's vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 47.38+, for hand propelled baby carriages
    and subclasses 647+, for foldable baby carriages.


CLS 296/97.22
TXT Access cover for gas tank filler pipe:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.1 in which a cover portion of the vehicle
    body is provided to allow access to the gas tank filler pipe.

    (1)     Note.  Cover often includes attached license plate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 200+ for access cover
    with details of license plate support structure.


CLS 296/97.23
TXT Floor mat with vehicle body feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.1 comprising structure for covering the
    floor of a vehicle which cooperates with vehicle body structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 138, 166 and
    167 formats, per se.


CLS 296/97.3
TXT Apertured:

    Subject matter under subclass 97.2 in which perforations diffuse light
    passing through the glare reducing means.


CLS 296/97.4
TXT With actuating means for moving:

    Subject matter under subclass 97.1 in which the glare reducing means is
    moved into a desired position by relatively movable force transmitting
    parts.


CLS 296/97.5
TXT Combined or convertible:

    Subject matter under subclass 97.1 claimed in combination with features
    other than visor or glare screen; or, having means capable of structural
    rearrangement or modification to provide a device of some other description.


CLS 296/97.6
TXT Having detachable auxiliary visor or glare screen cooperating therewith:

    Subject matter under subclass 97.1 in which an auxiliary visor or glare
    screen is added to the existing visor or glare screen to further increase
    protection of vehicle occupants from unwanted glare.


CLS 296/97.7
TXT Mounted or detachably supported on dashboard, steering column, or
    windshield:

    Subject matter under subclass 97.1 in which the glare screen is mounted or
    detachably supported on the dashboard area, steering column or windshield.

    (1)     Note.  Glare screens or visors detachably supported on frame of
    windshield are included herein.


CLS 296/97.8
TXT Having foldable, extensible, or rollable body:

    Subject matter under subclass 97.1 in which the visor or glare screen
    covers a greater area by unfolding, by extending sections included as part
    thereof or by unrolling.


CLS 296/97.9
TXT With specific mounting means therefor:

    Subject matter under subclass 97.1 wherein particular significance is
    attributed to the manner in which the visor or glare screen is supported.


CLS 296/98
TXT Consisting of a support on which a flexible cover is adapted to be
    stretched and a roller on which the cover is adapted to be rolled when not
    in use.  The support may be either permanent in position or removable or
    collapsible.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219,    for a land vehicle roof having an opening therein and a rollable
    closure therefor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclass 238 and
    indented subclasses.


CLS 296/99.1
TXT Extension:

    Tops under the class definition provided with means for increasing the
    dimension of the said tops.


CLS 296/100
TXT Devices for covering the freight-load of a vehicle or for inclosing the
    open top of a load-carrier and which function as covers for such a load
    only.


CLS 296/101
TXT Where the purpose of the vehicle is especially adapted to transport ashes
    or other refuse.


CLS 296/102
TXT Tops which when in place on the vehicle are incapable of changing their
    upright or vertical position.


CLS 296/103
TXT Detachable tops adapted, when in position on the body of the vehicle, to
    form therewith a closed vehicle of the limousine type.


CLS 296/104
TXT Where the top comprises inverted U-shaped bows, the legs of the bows
    secured to the vehicle-body and operating as a support for the covering of
    the top.


CLS 296/105
TXT Where the bows may be moved from the spaced to an adjacent position to
    collapse the top, the vertical arrangement of the bows being substantially
    unchanged.


CLS 296/106
TXT A door or gate located at the rear of the top and corresponding to the
    end-gate of the vehicle-body.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 50 and indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note. Class 160, Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel,
    appropriate subclasses, for end gates as set forth in the line note in the
    main class definition in this class (296).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, appropriate
    subclasses for end gates as set forth in the line note in the main class
    definition in this class (296).


CLS 296/107
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including tops capable of
    assuming a plurality of positions relative to the body of the vehicle and
    where in the down or inoperative position the vertical dimension of the top
    has been changed.


CLS 296/108
TXT Where the top consists of sections pivoted to permit collapse of the top to
    assume a down position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, appropriate
    subclasses, (and particularly subclass 130 and indented subclasses) for
    interconnected sections, as set forth in the line note in the main class
    definition in this class (296).


CLS 296/109
TXT Tops comprising inverted U-shaped bows movable to an adjacent position to
    collapse the top and pivoted to the vehicle-body to swing to a down
    position.


CLS 296/110
TXT Where the top is capable of assuming a plurality of up or operative
    positions.


CLS 296/111
TXT Where the top comprises a single group of substantially radiating bows
    pivoted to the vehicle-body.


CLS 296/112
TXT Comprising means for raising or lowering or assisting in raising or
    lowering a top of the type indicated.


CLS 296/113
TXT Where the tension of a spring is used for the purpose indicated.


CLS 296/114
TXT Comprising, when in up or operative position, two sets of bow groups, the
    forward set being movable to a position adjacent the rear set to permit
    collapse and movement to a down position of the top.


CLS 296/115
TXT Means for raising or lowering or assisting in raising or lowering a top of
    the type indicated.


CLS 296/116
TXT Comprising a supporting frame or bow group to which is trussed a
    forwardly-projecting frame or bow, the forwardly-projecting frame or bow
    being collapsible or movable with respect to the support to permit the top
    as a whole to assume a down position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, especially
    subclasses 19, 20, 22, and 45, and indented subclasses, for outrigged type
    devices as set forth in the line note in the main class definition in this
    class (296).


CLS 296/117
TXT Means for raising or lowering or assisting in raising or lowering a top of
    the type indicated.


CLS 296/118
TXT Patents relating to bows or the slat portion of the bows of vehicle-tops.


CLS 296/119
TXT Iron parts of bows or slats.


CLS 296/120.1
TXT Brace:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 for holding the top in an up or operative
    position by bracing.


CLS 296/121
TXT Forming parts of elements of a top or means for securing the elements of a
    top to the vehicle body.


CLS 296/122
TXT Where the joint or coupling is a pivot bolt for a brace or bow.


CLS 296/123
TXT A rail to which the top is attached, which rail is detachably carried by
    the seat back and sides.


CLS 296/124
TXT Means for supporting tops when in a down or inoperative position.


CLS 296/125
TXT Where the pivot support for the prop or base of the top is provided with a
    cushion to support the rear bow when the top is down.


CLS 296/126
TXT Where the cushion is a spring.


CLS 296/127
TXT Where the adjacent edges of the bows are provided with means to support the
    bows in spaced relation when the top is down and collapsed.


CLS 296/128
TXT Where the down-support comprises means for clamping elements of the top to
    hold it in down position.


CLS 296/129
TXT Also provided with means for spacing adjacent bows of a top.


CLS 296/130
TXT Where the clamping means is a tightened strap.


CLS 296/131
TXT Supporting means attached to the top.


CLS 296/132
TXT Attached to both the body and top.


CLS 296/133
TXT Where the supporting means of the type indicated is a spring.


CLS 296/134
TXT Where the support is a spring, excluding spring-supports of the type found
    in subclasses 126 and 133 of this class.


CLS 296/135
TXT Edge trimmings and bindings for tops.


CLS 296/136
TXT Inclosing or covering means adapted to protect the top from dust when in
    down or inoperative position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclass 115 for covers used in
    portable shelters.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclass 19.


CLS 296/138
TXT Relating to the side and rear curtains of a top.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, for side and
    rear curtains, as set forth in the line note in the main class definition
    of this class (296).


CLS 296/139
TXT Where the side curtain is secured to the door or to an extension of the
    door to open when the door is opened.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclass 102.


CLS 296/140
TXT Stored in the roof portion of the top when not in use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclass 19 and
    indented subclasses.


CLS 296/141
TXT Rolled or folded to compact form before movement to storage position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclass 23.1
    and indented subclasses.


CLS 296/142
TXT Secured to and adapted to roll on a vertical roller.


CLS 296/143
TXT Secured to and adapted to roll on a horizontal roller.


CLS 296/144
TXT Strips secured to the top and vehicle body at the rear corners of the
    vehicle to limit the forward movement of the top.


CLS 296/145
TXT Showing means for securing transparent material to an opening in a curtain.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 180
    and 237.


CLS 296/146.1
TXT Door or window with specified vehicle feature:
    Device under subclass 1.1 provided with (a) a plurality of movable or
    removable access barriers or closures blocking passageways about the
    vehicle body walls or (b) a vehicle body wall access barrier or closure
    combined with a feature or accessory of a vehicle body (e.g., sill, side
    rail, windshield, seat armrest, visor, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Movably mounted bipartite (two piece) doors, with sliding
    windows, for a single opening are considered a vehicle closure arrangement
    and are found in subclasses 149+ below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63+,    for a seat with body modification in which the body modification is
    a closure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, appropriate subclasses for
    particular car door (access barrier or closure) structure when no defining
    accessory or feature correlated to a vehicle body is present.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses for a
    barrier or panel lacking (a) features for providing movement or removal
    (e.g., hinge, closure, etc.) or (b) a vehicle body feature.


CLS 296/146.11
TXT Door hinge detail:
    Access barrier or closure under subclass 146.1 including details of
    mounting means providing a swinging movement about a pivot axis.


CLS 296/146.12
TXT Multiple hinge axes:
    Devices under subclass 146.11 wherein the mounting means has more than one
    pintle.


CLS 296/146.13
TXT Folding-type door:
    Access barrier or closure under subclass 146.1 having multiple sections
    articulated to each other.


CLS 296/146.14
TXT Window interacting with convertible top:
    Access barrier or closure under subclass 146.1 which relates to (a) a
    transparent panel displaced rearwardly of a windshield of a vehicle, in
    association with a retractable vehicle roof, or (b) a transparent panel
    mounted to the retractable roof and moving therewith.

    (1)     Note.  The association is usually provided to effect a cooperative,
    mating seal but is not limited thereto.


CLS 296/146.15
TXT Body mounted window:
    Access barrier or closure under subclass 146.1 relating to a transparent
    panel mounted on the vehicle body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84.1+,  for a transparent panel secured to a vehicle body and in front of a
    vehicle seat (e.g., windshield, etc.).

    146.2+, for a transparent panel mounted on an access barrier or closure.

    200,    for a transparent panel arranged to provide better viewing
    therethrough for the driver and/or passenger in the vehicle.

    215,    for a transparent panel fixedly mounted to a roof of a vehicle body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 393+ and the search
    notes thereunder for mounting a transparent panel and an adjacent member
    (e.g., frame, etc.).


CLS 296/146.16
TXT Movable:
    Access barrier or closure under subclass 146.15 including means for
    shifting the panel relative to the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216,    for a transparent panel movably mounted to a roof of a vehicle body
    (e.g., sun roof and/or moon roof, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 475.1+ for sealing means
    acting at the juncture of an access barrier or closure and an adjacent
    member (e.g., frame, etc.).


CLS 296/146.2
TXT Door includes window:
    Access barrier or closure under subclass 146.1 including particulars of a
    transparent panel in the barrier (e.g., mountings, window channel or
    support, seal, operating mechanism, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  A nominal recitation of a door having a window, either
    movable or fixed, is not sufficient to cause assignment to this subclass in
    the absence of particulars of the window.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclass 166 for the combination of
    an access barrier pivotal about a vertical axis and carrying an associated
    transparent panel wherein the transparent panel is mounted for movement
    distinct and separate from the pivotal movement.


CLS 296/146.3
TXT Flush mounted:
    Access barrier or closure under subclass 146.2 wherein the transparent
    panel is mounted at an outer surface substantially coplanar with adjoining
    body structure.


CLS 296/146.4
TXT Remotely actuated door:
    Vehicle body access barrier or closure under subclass 146.1 including
    manually engaged means at a separate location from that of the barrier or
    closure which causes the access barrier or closure to change location or
    securing means for the barrier or closure to lock or unlock.


CLS 296/146.5
TXT Door frame or shell:
    Vehicle body access barrier or closure under subclass 146.1 with specific
    skeletal structure or casing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202,    for supporting frame means for a vehicle body door.


CLS 296/146.6
TXT Reinforcement:
    Structure under subclass 146.5 relating to supplemental means for
    strengthening a frame or shell of the access barrier or closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188,    for means provided to eliminate or reduce impact deformation of a
    vehicle body structural member.

    189,    for means provided to absorb impact energy resulting from impacts
    by a foreign body upon a vehicle body structural member.


CLS 296/146.7
TXT Interior trim panel on door:
    Access barrier or closure under subclass 146.1 including details of an
    inwardly facing embellishment or covering.


CLS 296/146.8
TXT Door extending across front or rear of body:
    Access barrier or closure under subclass 146.1 which in a closed position
    extends transversely across the vehicle at front or rear ends (e.g.,
    hatchback type for the latter, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96.13,  for a wraparound windshield movable from a normal operative
    position to a position to allow entry and/or exit from the vehicle.


CLS 296/146.9
TXT Specific door or door opening edge feature:
    Access barrier or closure under subclass 146.1 with structural details
    relating to the intersection of (a) a barrier or closure and a vehicle body
    or (b) multiple barriers or closures (e.g., interlocking arrangements,
    sealing means, continuous roof/door contours, flush profiles, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206,    for means for securing windlace to the vehicle body to prevent wind
    from entering through otherwise open spaces or cracks around doors or
    windows.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclass 500.1 for weatherstrip of
    the windlace type.


CLS 296/147
TXT Device under subclass 146.1 provided with a top spaced from the body walls
    to form an uninterrupted passage therebetween substantially the length of
    the vehicle body, and further provided with a plurality of closures to be
    shifted to and from a position occupying the passage between the top and
    body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 332+ for railway passenger cars
    convertible from open-sided summer cars to closed-sided winter cars.


CLS 296/148
TXT Device under subclass 147 in which the closures are mounted on the sides of
    the vehicle, and in which the means mounting the panels permit them to be
    readily physically disassociated from the body to form a passage.


CLS 296/149
TXT Device under subclass 147 provided with a door and a body portion on the
    side of said door, each provided with a closure extensible therefrom, and
    each further provided with a recess or receptacle within the door and body
    portion to receive the closures when shifted from their passage blocking
    position.

    (1)     Note.  The adjacent body portion may be another door.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 372+ for a closure of
    general utility stored in a housing, and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 296/150
TXT Device under subclass 149 provided with a guiding or bracing post between
    the closures in their passage blocking position and further provided with
    means mounting the post so as to permit shifting of the post to a position
    clear of the passage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclass 316 for a retractable upper
    support which guides a closure from a housing, and subclass 365 for an
    independently movable or removable center post serving as a stop or closure
    mount for adjacent closures.


CLS 296/151
TXT Device under subclass 146.1 wherein the closure is configured so as to
    accommodate a wheel housing or a step portion of the vehicle body.


CLS 296/152
TXT Device under subclass 146.1 provided with means attached to the closure to
    add to the convenience of the vehicle's occupant or to the effectiveness of
    vehicle body, e.g., armrest, visor, noise reducer, wind hose.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 128+ for a vehicle body with accessories
    for ventilating the body, e.g., wind deflectors.


CLS 296/153
TXT Device under subclass 152 wherein the accessory comprises a device for
    supporting an arm of an occupant of the vehicle, or for covering and
    protecting the window sill from the arm of the vehicle's occupant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 411.2+ for an armrest of general
    utility and see the search notes thereto for the loci of other armrests.


CLS 296/154
TXT Device under subclass 152 wherein the accessory means comprises a device to
    convey or direct moisture away from the interior of the vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclass 476.1 for a closure face
    mounted deflector or a closure seal combined with a fluid drain, and see
    the search notes thereto for the loci of other drains and deflectors.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 128+ for an air deflector for an automobile
    window.


CLS 296/155
TXT Device under subclass 146.1 provided with a plurality of closures and
    further provided with means on opposite sides of the vehicle body for
    mounting the closures for sliding movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclass 94 for closures on opposite
    barriers interconnected for concurrent movement, and subclasses 404+ for a
    reciprocating closure of general utility.


CLS 296/156
TXT Camper:

    Apparatus under subclass 1.1 in which the portion of the land vehicle which
    operates as a receptacle or load-carrier is a body providing a living space
    for people for the purpose of camping, which may include plumbing, eating,
    sleeping, or other facilities to meet human needs, and which may have means
    to change its configuration to increase or decrease its living space or to
    reduce its outside dimensions for storage or transporting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, various subclasses for specific bed structure.

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, various subclasses for a specific
    door, window, partition, etc., structure.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 69+ for ventilators for vehicles.


CLS 296/157
TXT Having boat carrying means:

    Apparatus under subclass 156 in which the body includes a means or a
    particularly designed facility for supporting or handling a boat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclasses 343+ for boats, per se.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclasses 400+, 311, 312, and 321
    for article carrying devices attached to vehicles.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 414.1+ for boat carrying trailers.


CLS 296/158
TXT Having vehicle carrying means:

    Apparatus under subclass 156 in which the body includes a means or a
    particularly designed facility for supporting or handling a vehicle, e.g.,
    motorcycle, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclasses 400+, 311, 312, and 321
    for article carrying devices attached to vehicles.


CLS 296/159
TXT Having tent means demountable therefrom: Apparatus under subclass 156
    wherein the camper body is adapted to support all or a part of a tent
    structure, and wherein the tent may be removed from said body and erected
    or caused to stand for its intended use independently of any support from
    said body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclasses 87+ for tents, per se.


CLS 296/160
TXT Having tent solely supported by camper body roof:

    Apparatus under subclass 156 in which the camper body has a roof which is
    the sole support for an erected tent structure, said tent either engages
    said roof or extends from and is solely supported by a means adapted to be
    secured only to said roof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclasses 88.14+ for tents with
    carriers associated with a vehicle roof or trunk lid.


CLS 296/161
TXT Having tent having ground engaging means: Apparatus under subclass 156 in
    which the camper body is adapted to support a portion of an erected tent
    structure, wherein another portion of said tent is supported by means other
    then the camper body such as the ground.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclasses 88.13+ for tents
    supported by a vehicle.


CLS 296/162
TXT Having porch means:

    Apparatus under subclass 156 wherein the camper body has a platform means
    usable as a porch attached thereto or usable therewith.


CLS 296/163
TXT Having canopy means:

    Apparatus under subclass 156 wherein the camper body has a canopy connected
    therewith for use.


CLS 296/164
TXT Supported by self-propelled vehicle unit:
    Apparatus under subclass 156 in which the camper body is secured to and
    supported by a self-propelled vehicle by means permitting removal of said
    body from said vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclass 280 for means for removing a
    camper body from a self-propelled vehicle.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 45 for jacks, per se, which may be attached to a camper body.


CLS 296/165
TXT Expansible or collapsible vehicle body:
    Apparatus under subclass 164 wherein the camper body is provided with means
    permitting enlargement of its living space or with means permitting it to
    collapse to a configuration where it is not usable for its intended
    purpose, but which does decrease its overall size so that it may be
    transported more readily.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26      and 27, for extensible and collapsible vehicle bodies of general
    utility.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 64 through 72 for
    rearrangeable building sections.


CLS 296/166
TXT Having docking passage means between body and vehicle unit:

    Apparatus under subclass 164 wherein the camper body and its self-propelled
    supporting vehicle are connected together with a passage-way means
    extending between a living space of said body and a noncamper body
    passenger compartment of the vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclass 477.1 for inflatable seals.


CLS 296/167
TXT Having means to tie down body to vehicle unit:

    Apparatus under subclass 164 having a specific structure for connecting the
    camper body to its support vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35.1+,  for securing devices for vehicle bodies of general utility.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    410,    Freight Accommodation on Freight Carrier, subclass 46 for an
    on-and-off base (e.g., pallet) to be loaded onto a freight carrier together
    with the particular article (e.g., household appliance) to be shipped; and
    subclasses 52+ for the removable securement of an on-and-off load bearer
    (e.g., pallet or container) to a freight carrier.


CLS 296/168
TXT Supported on a trailer-type vehicle unit:
    Apparatus under subclass 156 for camper bodies adapted to be mounted on and
    carried by a nonself-propelled land vehicle which is designed to be towed
    by a self-propelled vehicle unit.


CLS 296/169
TXT Body having hinged side or end sections to support a bed:

    Apparatus under subclass 168 in which the camper body is provided with a
    side or an end section which is pivotally mounted and adapted to be swung
    from a vertical position, in which it forms a side or end portion of said
    body, to a horizontal position for the purpose of supporting a bed upon
    which a person may sleep.


CLS 296/170
TXT Body having slidable bed support:

    Apparatus under subclass 168 in which the camper body is provided with
    panel or other means adapted to slide from a concealed position to one in
    which it is adapted to support a bed upon which a person may sleep.


CLS 296/171
TXT Body having telescopic sections:

    Apparatus under subclass 168 wherein the camper body is composed of
    relatively movable telescopically associated sections which may be moved
    relatively and telescopically for the purpose of changing the width,
    length, or height of said body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 67 for telescoping
    sub or main enclosures.


CLS 296/172
TXT Body being expansible from one configuration usable for camping to another
    configuration usable for camping:

    Apparatus under subclass 168 wherein the camper body has means whereby its
    interior dimensions may be increased or decreased in height, width, or
    length so that, after making a dimensional change, the body continues to be
    usable for the purpose of camping.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for expansible vehicle bodies of general utility.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 64 through 72 for
    rearrangeable building structures.


CLS 296/173
TXT Body being collapsible to a configuration nonusable for camping condition:

    Apparatus under subclass 168 wherein the camper body is provided with means
    whereby it may be collapsed from a condition in which it is usable for
    camping to a condition in which it is not usable for camping but has a
    configuration more convenient for transportation or storage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for collapsible vehicle bodies of general utility.


CLS 296/174
TXT Body having hinged bed support:

    Apparatus under subclass 156 in which the camper body is provided with a
    side or an end section which is pivotally mounted and adapted to be swung
    from a vertical position, in which it forms a side or end portion of the
    body, to a horizontal position for the purpose of supporting a bed upon
    which a person may sleep.


CLS 296/175
TXT Body having telescopic sections:

    Apparatus under subclass 156 wherein the camper body is composed of
    relatively movable telescopically associated sections, which may be moved
    relatively and telescopically for the purpose of changing the width,
    length, or height of said body.


CLS 296/176
TXT Body being expansible from one configuration usable for camping to another
    configuration usable for camping:

    Apparatus under subclass 156 wherein the camper body has means whereby its
    interior dimensions may be increased or decreased in height, width, or
    length so that, after making a dimensional change, the body continues to be
    usable for the purpose of camping.


CLS 296/177
TXT Vehicles simulating standard types of vehicles (e.g., ambulance, farm
    tractor, etc.) but reduced to a size upon which a child may ride:

    Apparatus under subclass 1.1 which includes a vehicle body means
    particularly designed or intended to be a means upon which children may
    ride and which is a miniaturization or a reduced scale facsimile or
    simulation of any full scale special or general purpose vehicle either
    imagined or actually constructed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices: Toys, subclasses 269+ for wheeled figure toy and
    subclasses 431+ for other wheeled toys.


CLS 296/178
TXT Passenger bus body:

    Apparatus under subclass 1.1 which includes vehicle body means being
    particularly designed or intended to be capable of carrying more people
    than is normally considered to be the capacity of an automobile.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 781+ for frames for vehicles.


CLS 296/179
TXT For transporting passengers to or from an aircraft:

    Apparatus under subclass 178 particularly constructed as a means for
    transporting passengers to or from a grounded aircraft and having means
    which may cooperate with said aircraft whereby said passengers may either
    enter or exit said aircraft.


CLS 296/180
TXT Wagon or horse drawn vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 1.1 which includes body means designed to carry
    loads of a general or specialized nature, and which is designed to be
    pulled or pushed by connection with a beast of burden or substitute
    therefor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 63 for horse drawn vehicles.


CLS 296/180.1
TXT With distinct wind deflector:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.1 in which the wind deflector constitutes a
    distinct means for redirecting air flow around the vehicle to reduce wind
    resistance thereon.

    (1)     Note.  If primary utility and function is wind deflecting to reduce
    wind resistance or improve vehicle stability proper for this subclass.  If
    function other than wind deflecting or stability enhancing is disclosed it
    goes elsewhere in this class or another class which provides for said
    function, e.g., rear window cleaner.

    (2)     Note.  Vehicles on a single chassis which exhibit airflow
    characteristics similar to those of tractor-trailer combinations will be
    treated as pulling and towed vehicles for purposes of placement in this
    subclass and its indents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     for wind deflectors that guide air currents to protect windshield
    and other vehicle areas from accumulation of dirt, bugs, etc.

    217,    for air deflectors associated with movable roof panels above
    passenger area.


CLS 296/180.2
TXT Mounted on pulling vehicle (e.g., tractor, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 180.1 in which the wind deflector is mounted
    on the pulling vehicle.


CLS 296/180.3
TXT Adjustable angle:

    Subject matter under subclass 180.2 in which the wind deflector may be
    pivoted to provide different angles for redirecting air flow.


CLS 296/180.4
TXT Mounted on towed vehicle:

    Subject matter under subclass 180.1 in which the wind deflector is mounted
    on the towed vehicle.


CLS 296/180.5
TXT Adjustable angle:

    Subject matter under subclass 180.1 in which the wind deflector may be
    pivoted to provide different angles for redirecting air flow.


CLS 296/181
TXT Trailer body:

    Apparatus under subclass 1.1 which includes body means for carrying a load
    of a general or specialized nature, and which is adapted to be supported
    for mobility by wheel means located generally at one end of said body means
    and be a draft vehicle at the opposite end.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 400+ for articulated vehicles.


CLS 296/182
TXT Body platform:

    Apparatus under subclass 181 wherein said body means is constructed to
    provide an unobstructed planar load-supporting surface which extends the
    entire length and width of the body.


CLS 296/183
TXT Truck body:

    Apparatus under subclass 1.1 which includes body means for the purpose of
    carrying a bulk load and having a generally planar-supporting surface for
    said bulk load and vertical side and end members extending from said
    supporting surface to retain the load on said surface.


CLS 296/184
TXT Dump truck type:

    Apparatus under subclass 183 which may be tilted for removal of the load
    therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    298,    Land Vehicles:  Dumping, various subclasses for vehicles having
    various bodies from which a load may be dumped.


CLS 296/185
TXT Automobile body:

    Apparatus under subclass 1.1 which includes body means for the purpose of
    carrying generally from one to six or nine people simultaneously.


CLS 296/186
TXT Nonenclosed type:

    Apparatus under subclass 185 including side members which extend up from
    lower part of the body to more or less a line extension of the upper
    extremity of the automobile hood and devoid of a means above the heads of
    the people carried by said body.


CLS 296/187
TXT Body structural means:

    Apparatus under subclass 1.1 which includes all or part of the structural
    members which are used in the construction of a vehicle body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.1,    for vehicle bodies constructed to perform a specific function not
    provided for above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 89.1+ as explained in the reference
    thereto appearing in subclass 1 above.


CLS 296/188
TXT For reinforcing or resisting deformation from impact:

    Apparatus under subclass 187 having means particularly provided to
    eliminate or reduce the probability that the position of the vehicle body
    which impacts with a foreign body will not deform.


CLS 296/189
TXT Deformable to absorb the shock of impact: Apparatus under subclass 187
    having means particularly constructed to change shape or position relative
    to other means upon impact with a foreign body and thereby absorb energy of
    the impact.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 784 for vehicle frames having impact
    absorbing means.

    293,    Vehicle Fenders, subclasses 107+, 124, 131, 132+, and 150 for
    vehicle bumpers which change shape or are provided with means permitting
    the bumper to change its relative position with the vehicle on which it is
    mounted to thereby absorb energy of impact.


CLS 296/190
TXT Operator's cab:

    Apparatus under subclass 187 having means which constitutes that portion of
    the vehicle body which carries and/or encloses a person or persons at the
    location on said body where the operation of the vehicle may be controlled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 89.12 for a motor vehicle of the tractor
    or similar type having an enclosed operator's station; and subclasses
    89.13+ for a motor vehicle having an operator's compartment which is
    movable to a different attitude or location on the vehicle.


CLS 296/191
TXT Panel means:

    Apparatus under subclass 187 comprising the wall or shell means for the
    vehicle body.


CLS 296/192
TXT Cowl:

    Apparatus under subclass 187 comprising that portion of the body which
    flares or extends forward of the lower edge of the windshield, and which
    may include a frame means for the lower portion of the windshield.


CLS 296/193
TXT Body section:

    Apparatus under subclass 187 comprising a preassembled portion of a whole
    body which is ready for assembly to another portion of the whole body.

    (1)     Note.  For perfecting details of the body, such as windows or
    supports therefor, scuff plates, sills, fenders, ducts, door bumpers, etc.,
    see subclasses 201 and 208 below.


CLS 296/194
TXT Body front:

    Apparatus under subclass 193 having means constituting the forward part of
    said body relative to the normal direction which it travels.


CLS 296/195
TXT Body rear:

    Apparatus under subclass 193 having means constituting the after part of
    the body relative to the normal direction which it travels.


CLS 296/196
TXT Separable section:

    Apparatus under subclass 193 comprising a body portion having particular
    means by which it may be easily connected to and disconnected from another
    body portion.


CLS 296/197
TXT Modular section:

    Apparatus under subclass 193 comprising a body portion completely assembled
    with all perfecting details, if any, and requiring the addition of no other
    parts once connected to another body portion.


CLS 296/198
TXT Wheel housing or fender:

    Apparatus under subclass 193 comprising that body portion designed to at
    least partially surround a vehicle wheel.


CLS 296/199
TXT Scuff plate:

    Apparatus under subclass 187 comprising a protective plate or cover for the
    sill or other body structure which is located at the bottom of a door
    opening in the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 850 for vehicles having scuff plates.


CLS 296/200
TXT Clear view window means:

    Apparatus under subclass 187 comprising side window, back light or
    windshield means and/or supports therefor arranged to provide better
    viewing therethrough for the driver and/or passengers in the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146.15, for a transparent panel mounted on the vehicle body.


CLS 296/201
TXT Window support means:

    Apparatus under subclass 187 comprising supporting frame means for all or
    part of a window or windshield for the vehicle body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96.21,  for a windshield supporting frame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, for closures of general utility.


CLS 296/202
TXT Door support means:

    Apparatus under subclass 187 comprising supporting frame means for a
    vehicle body door.


CLS 296/203
TXT Body frame:

    Apparatus under subclass 187 for body supporting or rigidifying means for
    supporting bottom, sides, front, back and/or roof portions of the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 311+ for a frame for a vehicle, which
    frame includes a feature peculiar to a vehicle of the motor-propelled kind.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 781+ for a land vehicle of the wheeled
    type having running gear and wherein a frame for receiving a body is
    provided.


CLS 296/204
TXT Under frame:

    Apparatus under subclass 203 which includes that body supporting or
    rigidifying means which extends only beneath the body and including such
    means which may extend up the sides of said body to the area of the roof
    structure.


CLS 296/205
TXT Made of tubular members:

    Apparatus under subclass 203 in which said body supporting or rigidifying
    means is made of tubular members.


CLS 296/206
TXT Wind break securing means:

    Apparatus under subclass 187 comprising means to attach windlace to said
    body to prevent wind from entering through otherwise open spaces or cracks
    around door and windows.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclass 500.1 for weatherstrip of
    the windlace type.


CLS 296/207
TXT Door bumper:

    Apparatus under subclass 187 comprising resilient means which may be
    secured to a door or door post for said body to break the shock of a door
    slam.


CLS 296/208
TXT Ducts or conduits:

    Apparatus under subclass 187 comprising rain gutters, drainage and
    ventilation conduits which are located in or on the vehicle body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 781+ as explained in the reference
    thereto appearing in subclass 203 above; and see especially indented
    subclass 782.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 69+ for means to ventilate an automobile.


CLS 296/209
TXT Sill:

    Apparatus under subclass 187 comprising the threshold for a vehicle body
    door.

    (1)     Note.  A threshold may comprise a portion of the body floor
    adjacent to the bottom of the door, or it may include a lower portion of
    the door itself.


CLS 296/210
TXT Roof structure:

    Subject matter within the class definition relating to the uppermost
    horizontal covering means for the passenger compartment of a land vehicle,
    said covering may be formed from rigid or flexible material and may be
    provided with an aperture and a movable or removable closure for said
    aperture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98,     for roll-up covers.

    99.1,   for covers which increase the top dimension.

    100+,   for freight covers.

    102+,   for the entire vehicle top having no means whereby its dimension
    may be changed.

    107+,   for let-down tops.


CLS 296/211
TXT Having sound absorbing, insulating, or light reflecting quality:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 having means which is provided to (a)
    attenuate noise generated outside or within the covering, (b) restrict the
    transfer of heat therethrough, or (c) redirect light rays which could
    otherwise pass therethrough.


CLS 296/212
TXT Vacuum or air pressure applied to roof means:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 having means which may be evacuated or
    pressurized by a gas or liquid to cause said covering means, or part
    thereof, to assume a desired shape or configuration.


CLS 296/213
TXT Having water drainage or guide means:
    Subject matter under subclass 210 having specific means whereby rain or
    other liquid coming in contact with said covering may be directed or caused
    to flow in such a way as to not enter the passenger compartment.


CLS 296/214
TXT Having headliner or liner support:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 having (a) a second covering located
    below and spaced from said covering means to form a covering which most
    directly forms the ceiling of the passenger compartment, or (b) means for
    supporting said second covering in its operative position.


CLS 296/215
TXT Having light transmitting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 being entirely or in part comprised of
    material through which light rays may pass.


CLS 296/216
TXT Roof panel movable to uncover passenger area:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 having means movable to permit free
    communication of light or air between the passenger compartment and the
    atmosphere above said vehicle, said means may or may not be disassociable
    from the covering means or from the vehicle but is movable to a close
    position to prohibit said communication of light or air between the
    passenger compartment and the atmosphere.


CLS 296/217
TXT Having associated air deflector or guide:
    Subject matter under subclass 216 having means either fixedly or movably
    related to said movable means to redirect the natural air flow which occurs
    in the vicinity of said movable means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.1,    for an air deflector associated with the roof of a vehicle and
    which may be located proximate an opening in said roof, said deflector
    being immovably secured to the roof to affect the vehicle's slip stream
    while the closure is either in its open or closed position.


CLS 296/218
TXT Panel removable from roof:

    Subject matter under subclass 216 wherein the movable means may be removed
    from the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100+,   for a means to cover a load carried by a vehicle, the cover may be
    flexible and it may be removable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 377.01+ for a freight car body
    having a movable cover.


CLS 296/219
TXT Panel comprises hinged sections, or rollable or foldable material:

    Subject matter under subclass 216 wherein the movable means comprises (a) a
    plurality of members interconnected for relative movement, or (b) a
    material which may be flexed to a condition where certain portions
    substantially overlap.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98,     for a vehicle top which is flexible and a means upon which it may
    be rolled when not in use.

    100+,   for means to cover a load carried by a vehicle, the cover may be
    flexible and it may be removable.


CLS 296/220
TXT Panels movable to overlapping or nested relation:

    Subject matter under subclass 216 wherein the movable means comprises a
    plurality of sections movable relatively so that one may be positioned to
    overlay another or so that one may be confined within the boundaries of
    another.


CLS 296/221
TXT Panel pivots upwardly to vent mode and moves downward before sliding to
    fully open mode:

    Subject matter under subclass 216 wherein the movable means is mounted
    whereby one end thereof may swing vertically to a position above said
    covering means where it will cause that air to be deflected away therefrom
    which would normally freely flow into said passenger compartment as the
    vehicle is moved, and said movable means is additionally mounted to move
    below the level of the covering means and then be slidable to a position
    where it presents no opposition to the free flow of light or air into the
    passenger compartment from the atmosphere above.


CLS 296/222
TXT Panel slides with final closing motion having vertical component to attain
    closed and sealed condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 216 wherein the final portion of the movement
    of the movable means as it moves to its close position is closer to a
    vertical direction, if not vertical, than any of its prior direction of
    motion in the closing direction.


CLS 296/223
TXT Panel having drive or actuating means:
    Subject matter under subclass 216 wherein a mechanically or manually
    actuated means is provided by means of which the movable means may be moved.


CLS 296/224
TXT Panel latch means:

    Subject matter under subclass 216 having means by which the movable means
    may be secured against movement relative its supporting structure.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 296/900
TXT MATERIAL:

    Collection of art related to use of a particular material is a vehicle body
    or structure.


CLS 296/901
TXT Plastic:

    Collection of art under subclass 900 in which the product material is
    plastic.


CLS 297/
TTL CHAIRS AND SEATS

CLS 297/
TXT Devices for supporting the weight of a person in a seated position
    including chairs, seats, and ancillary devices not elsewhere classifiable.

    (1)     Note.  A seat is a support for bearing the weight of a person in a
    sitting position.  It comprises (1) a bottom contoured to conform to the
    shape of the buttocks of the occupant or (2) supports for two or more
    different areas of the occupant's body or (3) any support surface disclosed
    as a buttocks support in combination with a means, such as a table, desk or
    an additional buttocks support, which limits the use of such surface to the
    disclosed use.



    As used in this class, the term "seat" is distinguished from the term
    "bottom" in that the bottom is the buttock supporting portion of a seat.

    (2)     Note.  A chair is defined in subclass 445.1 below.

    (3)     Note.  A bottom is defined in subclass 452.1 below.

    (4)     Note.  A back is defined in subclass 452.1.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    411.1,  for a support engaging the armpit of a seated person.

    445.1,  for a chair and see (2) Note above.

    452.1,  and see (3) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 234+ for a closet
    seat with a cover or lid and subclasses 237+ for a closet seat, per se,
    especially subclass 239 for a detachable child's seat.  A bottom having an
    opening is retained in this class (297).  To be classified in Class 4,
    additional commode structure must be present, such as a receiver, a plug
    for the opening, a deflector shield, means for attaching the seat to the
    opening, etc.

    5,      Beds, subclasses 12.1+ for sofas convertible to beds, subclasses
    600+ for beds having movable sections adjustable relative to each other to
    support an occupant in a reclining or sitting position, subclasses 131+ for
    cushioned supporting surfaces spaced from the floor and capable of
    supporting an occupant in either a recumbent or   sitting position, and
    subclasses 652+ for cushions, per se, of general utility.  The art in Class
    5, especially in subclasses 12.1+ and 600+, is often structurally and
    functionally indistinguishable from that in this class (297).

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses for a
    panel of general utility even though disclosed or defined as being a
    component of a chair or seat.

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 323 for a seat combined with a machine of that
    class.

    70,     Locks, subclass 261 for locks for seats to prevent unauthorized use
    thereof.

    104,    Railways, subclass 115 for a chair or seat mounted on a cable
    railway, e.g., a ski lift.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 322 for railway cars having
    sleeping berth, wherein a seat back forms the upper berths, and subclasses
    345+ for seats built in the forming parts of a car structure.

    114,    Ships, subclass 194 for self-leveling chairs attached to a ship,
    and subclass 363 for a seat combined with a boat.

    128,    Surgery, appropriate subclasses for a seat combined with a means to
    treat the body, particularly subclass 33 for a seat combined with a
    vibrating massager.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 329+ for a process of making a chair or
    seat of wood.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, appropriate
    subclasses, for a flexible or portable panel usable as a seat back or
    bottom, especially subclasses 87+ for plural panels; subclasses 327+ for a
    panel supported at opposite edges by elongated elements; subclasses 371+
    for a panel mounted in a frame, and subclasses 383+ for means to fasten one
    edge of a fabric panel to an elongated supporting element.

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 431 for a seat combined with a machine of
    that class.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 122 for an aircraft fuselage having a seat.

    248,    Supports, subclass 118 for a headrest or armrest not disclosed as
    used in conjunction with a device of this class (297) and subclasses 127+
    for a stand comprising a generally horizontal article supporting surface
    combined with depending substructure to space the surface from the floor or
    ground.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 80+ for springs and their framework for
    bottom and back cushions.  They may include diverse types of spring
    material such as rubber and metal, and spring structures having different
    coefficients of resiliency for different areas of the cushion.  See, also,
    subclass 117 for the structure of a fluid spring for the same use; and
    subclasses 142+ for other types of spring elements in a spring device for
    such use.

    280,    Land Vehicles, appropriate subclasses, for the combination of a
    vehicle of the type there classified and a chair or seat.  The mere
    recitation of wheels or running gear on a chair or seat is insufficient to
    characterize that device as a Class 280 Vehicle; consequently patents
    having such structure have been classified in this class (297) on other
    features. However, additional vehicle features such as removable or
    retractable running gear, a push handle, means to propel the vehicle, a
    steering wheel or tiller, are examples of vehicle structure details which
    characterize the device as a vehicle for Class 280. Moreover, in the "baby
    walker" type of seat, a wheel-mounted bottom modified to enable the
    occupant to engage the floor or ground with his feet to move the vehicle
    (as by providing leg cut-outs, or by mounting the seat between the wheels)
    is a vehicle for Class 280.  See especially subclasses 5.2+ for an invalid
    wheel chair having means for ascending and descending steps or similar
    obstructions; subclasses 7.1+ for a device convertible from a vehicle to a
    nonvehicle; subclasses 638+ for a seat having a running gear extensible
    relative to the seat to raise or lower the seat or to extend the wheels
    from an inoperative to an operative position; subclasses 200+ for a vehicle
    having occupant propelling means; subclasses 87.051+ for a vehicle
    propelled by the foot contact of an occupant with the floor (baby walker);
    and subclasses 47.38+ for a vehicle such as a baby carriage propelled by a
    handle.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 63+ for a seat combined
    with a land vehicle body, particularly subclass 64 for the arrangement of a
    plurality of seats within a vehicle.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclass 482 for toy chairs or seats.

    606,    Surgery, subclass 242 for a seat having an orthopedic device
    designed to adjust unfractured bones into their normal position.


CLS 297/1
TXT Device under class definition comprising seat which may be rotated as a
    unit, a portion of a revolution about a horizontal axis, to present a
    previously inaccessible supporting surface for use at the same time the
    initial occupant supporting surface is rotated to a nonuse or different use
    position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92+,    for a device having a fixed standard or leg structure and wherein a
    bottom and back are rotatable relative to such structure to interchange
    their function.


CLS 297/2
TXT Device under subclass 1 wherein the previously inaccessible supporting
    surface is not classifiable, per se, in this class and is not used to
    support a person.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123,    for a bottom and back movable as a unit to convert to a table.

    129,    for a seat convertible to a nonseating device.


CLS 297/3
TXT Device under subclass 1 wherein the seat is turned end for end to expose
    the previously inaccessible supporting surface on the reverse side thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    283.1+, for a support surface which is inverted to expose the reverse side
    thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclass 33.2 for a seat in which
    the bottom and legs invert to unveil a ladder.


CLS 297/4
TXT Device under the class definition wherein a bottom is provided with means
    for attaching said bottom to the body of the occupant, so as to permit said
    occupant to walk about, carrying the bottom with him.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    393,    for an occupant attached headrest.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 17.1 for a leg or lap attached metallic
    receptacle.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclasses 101+ for a body and belt
    attached article carrier.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclasses 130+ for a body
    supporting buoyant device with a seat.


CLS 297/5
TXT Device under the class definition comprising a self-supporting frame,
    provided with a buttock support, for assisting a person in learning to
    walk; or for supporting skaters or ambulant invalids in a standing position.

    (1)     Note.  In general, walker and skater frames are in Class 135 and
    Classes 472 or 482, depending on the mode of use. Perfecting features may
    result in classification elsewhere, as indicated by the search notes below.
     The addition of a seat compels classification in this class (297).
    However, Class 280 is superior to Class 297 and a vehicle feature in these
    devices (see the note to Class 280 in the class definition of Class 297)
    will result in classification there, except that the further inclusion of
    means exterior of the device restricting its travel to a predetermined path
    makes it an amusement device for Class 472 or an exercise device for Class
    482.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclass 67 for walkers, per se,
    (i.e., without seats, wheels, or path control), operable by lifting from,
    moving across, and replacing on the ground, floor, or the like.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 7.1 for wheeled walkers propelled by seat
    occupants and convertible to a different device, such as a stroller,
    subclasses 43+ for walkers having retractable wheels; subclasses 87.051 for
    wheeled walkers propelled and steered by seated occupants; and subclasses
    809+ for skaters' appliances and attachments.

    472,    Amusement Devices, subclasses 1+ for a skater or walker supporting
    roundabout restricted to a circuitous path, particularly subclasses 14+ for
    an occupant propelled roundabout and subclass 15 for a trainer for foot
    travel.


    482,    Exercise Devices, subclasses 51+ for an exercise device which may
    support a skater or walker, particularly subclasses 66+ for an
    occupant-propelled support frame having a movement facilitating feature,
    e.g., a runner, wheel, etc., for foot travel and subclass 69 for an
    exercise device for suspending the occupant from above, e.g., a body
    harness, etc., for foot travel.


CLS 297/6
TXT Device under subclass 5 wherein a bottom is movable to an inoperative
    position either by folding against the walker frame or by detaching from
    the walker frame, so as to permit the user to enter or leave the frame or
    to move to a standing position to propel the frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331+,   for a bottom tiltable to an inoperative position.

    440.1+, for interfitting components detachably connected by a manipulated
    joint.


CLS 297/7
TXT Device under the class definition wherein the seat is provided with a guard
    or barrier to enclose the device to facilitate its use as a crib, and
    wherein the barrier is so mounted that it may be detached, moved to a
    nonuse position, or moved to a different use position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129,    for a seat convertible to a nonoccupant supporting device.

    464+,   particularly subclasses 487+ for a device to confine a seated
    occupant within or upon a seat.  The device there classified permits an
    occupant to remain seated; the device in these subclasses (7+) block that
    portion of the bottom over which the legs extend, or raises the leg rest to
    a horizontal position or otherwise prohibits use of the device as a seat
    while the crib side is in position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 93.1+ for a crib, per se, particularly subclass
    100 for a movable guard.


CLS 297/8
TXT Device under subclass 7 in which the crib side is made of a flaccid cloth.


CLS 297/9
TXT Device under subclass 7 wherein a side element is movable to that edge of
    the bottom opposite the edge from which the back extends and said side
    element extends from side to side of the bottom along that edge.


CLS 297/10
TXT Device under subclass 7 wherein the crib side, in its nonuse position, is
    confined inside or foldable against a component of the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105+,   for a supplementary body support storable within or upon a bottom.

    112+,   for a supplementary body support storable within or upon a back.


CLS 297/11
TXT Device under subclass 10 in which the crib side is confined inside or
    foldable upon the armrest.


CLS 297/12
TXT Device under subclass 10 in which the crib side is stored within or upon
    the side of the seat and is unfolded or taken sidewardly out of the seat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for a supplemental body support extensible laterally of the device.

    115+,   for an armrest extensible sideways to plural use positions.


CLS 297/13
TXT Device under the class definition, comprising a seat mounted for movement
    about a vertical axis including a bottom movable from a substantially
    horizontal use position to a substantially vertical nonuse position, said
    seat being held against rotation when the bottom is in the use position,
    but released for rotation by movement of the bottom to a nonuse position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240,    for relatively rotatable plural related seats.

    324,    for a seat in which the back is moved by folding of the bottom.

    331+,   for a bottom movable to an inoperative position, and see the search
    notes thereto for the field of search for folding bottoms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 418 for a rotatable support surface on a
    standard having means to inhibit rotation, and subclass 425 for a stand
    having a rotatable support surface provided with means to inhibit rotation.


CLS 297/14
TXT Device under the class definition comprising a bottom and back attached to
    a wall or partition having a recess or chamber which forms a housing
    therein, said bottom and back moving from an occupant supporting position
    outside said housing to a collapsed position within the confines of the
    housing.

    (1)     Note.  A wall or partition as set forth above is limited to a
    building wall, e.g., room walls, floors, etc., as distinguished from a
    panel incorporated in a bottom or back of a seat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147,    for a seat combined with a table and extensible from a wall or
    receptacle.

    234+,   for a seat foldable on or in a component of another seat.

    324,    for an interconnected bottom and back wherein the back is moved by
    folding of the bottom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 33+ for a
    horizontally supported planar surface combined with a housing and
    subclasses 42+ for a horizontally supported planar surface combined with
    other structure.

    248,    Supports, subclass 240.1 for a shelf stored in a wall housing.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 235.1+ for a seat combined
    with a cabinet wherein the cabinet housing provides means for storing
    articles in addition to the seat, and subclasses 242+ for a cabinet mounted
    on a wall or panel recess.


CLS 297/15
TXT Device under subclass 14 wherein the housing is located in the floor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclass 66 for a vehicle seat
    which folds to form a portion of the vehicle body (e.g., vehicle floor).


CLS 297/16.1
TXT COLLAPSIBLE CHAIR; I.E., RELATIVELY FOLDING BOTTOM, BACK, AND LEGS:Device
    under the class definition comprising a bottom, back, and leg wherein two
    of these components fold relative to the third component and to each other,
    and wherein one of the said two folding components is a leg.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147,    for a combined table and seat foldable  into a wall or receptacle.

    331+,   for a bottom tiltable into an operative position, and see the
    search notes thereunder for the field of search for folding bottoms.

    378.1+, for a seat provided with a back which is articulated to other
    components of the seat to swing forwardly about such articulation to
    overlie the bottom; i.e., to a nonuse position.


CLS 297/16.2
TXT Collapsed to a compact bundle having all rigid elongated elements extending
    in a single longitudinal direction:Device under subclass 16.1 comprising a
    plurality of stiff elongated members each having a longitudinal axis,
    wherein all of the elongated members when in collapsed form lie adjacent to
    one another and extend in a single longitudinal direction parallel to their
    longitudinal axes.


CLS 297/17
TXT Device under subclass 16 provided with a portable receptacle as an integral
    component thereof within which the folding components may be collapsed, or
    wherein portions of said device cooperate to form a substantially totally
    enclosed portable receptacle for the remainder of the folding elements when
    in collapsed condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14+,    for a bottom and back connected to and foldable in a wall or
    partition.

    139,    for a seat combined with a table wherein the table forms a carrying
    case for said seat.


CLS 297/18
TXT Device under subclass 16.1 comprising a pair of legs which overlap each
    other intermediate the ends thereof with one of said legs extending from a
    lower front floor or base engaging position to an upper rear position, and
    the other of said legs extending from an upper front position to a lower
    rear floor or base engaging position without any direct connection
    intermediate the ends thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258+,   and see the notes thereto for a rocker mounted seat.

    300.1+, for a bottom and back which are tiltable about a fixed pivot and
    wherein the tilting movement is resisted by a spring.

    325+,   for a bottom and back tiltable as a unit.


CLS 297/19
TXT Device under subclass 16.1 which may be oriented to a plurality of occupant
    supporting positions and comprising detent means which must be manipulated
    to achieve each particular orientation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68+,    for a leg or footrest interconnected to move relative to a bottom
    and concurrent with a back.

    316+,   for a bottom and back combination in which the back moves relative
    to a tilting bottom as the bottom tilts.

    327+,   for a bottom and back combination tiltable as a unit about a
    stationary horizontal pivot to plural use positions.

    354.12+, for a back tiltable to plural distinct occupant supporting
    positions.


CLS 297/20
TXT Device under subclass 19 provided with a rocker and wherein a leg is
    selectively engageable at various locations along said rocker.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32+,    for a chair with folding rocker.

    131+,   for a chair with rocker retractable to inoperative position.

    133,    for a chair with detachable rocker.

    258+,   for a noncollapsible rocker mounted  chair.


CLS 297/21
TXT Device under subclass 19 having a back post or frame provided with a
    member, integral therewith or carried thereby, which is settable at plural
    locations along a rear leg.


CLS 297/22
TXT Device under subclass 21 wherein the settable member is a spraglike
    element, one end of which is pivotally connected to the back post and the
    other end of which is selectively engageable at various locations along a
    rear leg.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    377,    for a tiltable back capable of assuming a plurality of occupant
    supporting positions by means of a prop behind said back.


CLS 297/23
TXT Device under subclass 22 wherein the back post is an integral extension of
    the front leg.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55+,    for relatively collapsible bottom, rear legs, and integral back and
    front leg.


CLS 297/24
TXT Device under subclass 19 wherein said manipulatable means adjustably join a
    front leg to a rear leg.


CLS 297/25
TXT Device under subclass 24 wherein said manipulatable means comprises a brace
    or tie element.


CLS 297/26
TXT Device under subclass 25 wherein said brace or tie element either comprises
    or provides direct support for a bottom.


CLS 297/27
TXT Device under subclass 19 wherein a part of said manipulatable means is
    carried by or carries an armrest.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359+,   for a noncollapsible seat provided with a back capable of being
    arranged in a plurality of occupant supporting positions and wherein a back
    pivoted armrest carries or has connected thereto means for retaining the
    back in adjusted position.


CLS 297/28
TXT Device under subclass 27 wherein said part is either integral with or
    fixedly attached to said armrest portion.


CLS 297/29
TXT Device under subclass 16.1 wherein the components are pivoted to each other
    so as to be capable of assuming a plurality of occupant supporting
    arrangements.

    (1)     Note.  The various arrangements are usually obtained by the
    occupant merely shifting his body as contrasted with subclasses 19+ wherein
    the occupant must manipulate detent means to achieve rearrangement of the
    chair.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19+,    for a chair rearrangeable to plural occupant supporting positions
    and provided with means which must be manipulated to achieve such
    rearrangement.


CLS 297/30
TXT Device under subclass 16.1 provided with a footrest and wherein as the
    other components collapse the footrest collapses simultaneously therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68+,    for a footrest interconnected to move relative to a bottom and
    concurrently with a bottom or back.

    423.19+, for footrest connected to seat for relative movement.


CLS 297/31
TXT Device under subclass 16.1 wherein the bottom and the rear leg are rigid
    and a front leg is foldable relative thereto.


CLS 297/32
TXT Device under subclass 16.1 in which the chair includes rocker members as a
    component thereof and foldable therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258+,   for a rocker-mounted chair.


CLS 297/33
TXT Device under subclass 32 in which the rocker is disengageable from one of
    the legs to permit folding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131+,   for a rocker retractable to inoperative position.

    133,    for a detachable rocker.


CLS 297/34
TXT Device under subclass 16.1 wherein the back swings rearwardly and
    downwardly.


CLS 297/35
TXT Device under subclass 16.1 provided with an armrest articulated to one or
    more of the components and collapsible relative thereto.


CLS 297/36
TXT Device under subclass 35 wherein the armrest swings sideways about a
    vertical axis or swings in a side-to-side direction about a horizontal axis.


CLS 297/37
TXT Device under subclass 36 wherein the armrest swings in a side direction
    about a horizontal axis to rest on top of or beneath the bottom.


CLS 297/38
TXT Device under subclass 35 wherein the armrest is slidably connected to one
    of the components.


CLS 297/39
TXT Device under subclass 35 wherein the armrest in cooperation with the
    bottom, back, and front leg form a collapsible parallelogram.


CLS 297/40
TXT Device under subclass 35 wherein the armrest collapses forwardly and
    downwardly to a position adjacent the legs.


CLS 297/41
TXT Device under subclass 35 wherein the armrest is pivotally connected to a
    back having a leg as an integral extension thereof.


CLS 297/42
TXT Device under subclass 16.1 wherein the chair collapses toward one side or
    from each side inwardly toward the center.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    314+,   for a laterally folding bottom.

    350+,   for a laterally folding back.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 436 for a laterally folding, plural leg stand.


CLS 297/43
TXT Device under subclass 42 wherein the bottom, back, and legs fold sideways
    to a position adjacent an upright immovable element or surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315,    for a bottom and back foldable laterally against a fixed standard.


CLS 297/44
TXT Device under subclass 42 wherein the back or bottom is divided into parts
    which fold with respect to each other as the chair is collapsed laterally.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312,    for a bottom comprising resiliently mounted, independently movable
    sections.


CLS 297/45
TXT Device under subclass 42 wherein the bottom and back supporting surfaces
    are made of a flaccid clothlike material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for a collapsible chair having a fabric bottom or back foldable in
    sections.


CLS 297/46
TXT Device under subclass 16.1 wherein the back and legs are movably joined to
    each other or to other chair components so that the back and the several
    legs each fold relative to the other and at the same time.

    (1)     Note.  The chairs in this and the indented subclasses may include
    an integral back frame and leg pair as classified below in subclasses 55+
    and 59+, but are distinguished from that art in that the chairs in the
    former subclasses have a back which moves relative to the back frame in its
    collapsing movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55+,    for an integral back and front legs interconnected with the back
    legs to fold concurrently, and see (1) Note above.

    59+,    for an integral back and rear legs interconnected with the front
    legs to fold concurrently, and see (1) Note above.


CLS 297/47
TXT Device under subclass 46 wherein the legs, in chair supporting position,
    extend generally in the same direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for a chair having independently collapsible back and parallel legs.


CLS 297/48
TXT Device under subclass 46 wherein the back is joined to both the front legs
    and the rear legs.


CLS 297/49
TXT Device under subclass 48 wherein the back is articulated to one pair of
    legs above the bottom and articulated to the other pair of legs below the
    bottom.


CLS 297/50
TXT Device under subclass 46 wherein the back is articulated to a leg above the
    articulation of the back to the bottom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for a collapsible chair having a relatively collapsible bottom,
    rear legs, and integral back and front legs wherein the rear legs are
    pivoted to the back above the back-to-bottom connection.


CLS 297/51
TXT Device under subclass 16.1 wherein the back is mounted to move
    independently of the movement of the legs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46+,    for a collapsible chair in which the back and a leg pair are
    interconnected to fold concurrently.


CLS 297/52
TXT Device under subclass 51 wherein the back is pivotally connected to a leg
    and held in the erected use position by engaging a stop means on the leg.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for a collapsible chair in which the back and legs fold
    simultaneously, and wherein the back is pivoted to and abuts a leg.


CLS 297/53
TXT Device under subclass 51 wherein the back collapses to a position
    superjacent the bottom and legs collapse to a position subjacent the bottom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for a similar device which includes laterally folding armrests.

    46+,    for a chair in which the back and legs fold concurrently to overlie
    and overlie the bottom.

    52,     for similar devices wherein the back is pivoted to and abuts a stop
    on the leg in use position.

    378.1+, for a back foldable forwardly over the bottom.


CLS 297/54
TXT Device under subclass 53 wherein the legs in chair supporting position are
    generally parallel with respect to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for a chair having noncrossed legs in which the back and legs
    collapse simultaneously.


CLS 297/55
TXT Device under subclass 16.1 wherein the relatively folding parts of the
    chair include a bottom, rear legs, and a unitary back and front legs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for a similar device having a folding armrest pivoted to an
    integral back and leg.

    46+,    for a collapsible chair having an integral back frame and leg and a
    relatively movable back, and see (1) Note thereto for the line.

    59+,    for a similar device wherein the back is integral with the back
    legs.


CLS 297/56
TXT Device under subclass 55 wherein the front legs and the rear legs decussate.


CLS 297/57
TXT Device under subclass 56 wherein the bottom is disengageable from the back
    or is connected thereto by a means which permits the bottom to move
    longitudinally of the back.


CLS 297/58
TXT Device under subclass 55 wherein the rear leg is attached to the integral
    back and front legs at a point above the juncture of the bottom and the
    back, for turning movement about said point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     for a collapsible chair in which the back and legs collapse
    simultaneously and wherein the back frame is pivoted to the leg above the
    back-to-bottom connection.


CLS 297/59
TXT Device under subclass 16.1 wherein the relatively folding parts of the
    chair include a bottom, front legs,  and a unitary back and rear legs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for a similar device having a folding armrest pivoted to an
    integral back and leg.

    46+,    for a collapsible chair having an integral back frame and leg and a
    relatively movable back, and see (1) Note thereto for the line.

    55+,    for a similar device wherein the back is integral with the front
    legs.


CLS 297/60
TXT Device under subclass 59 wherein the front legs are pivoted to the bottom
    adjacent the front edge thereof, and wherein the bottom is connected to the
    integral back and rear legs to swing about such latter connection so that
    the front of the bottom is raised, carrying the pivotally connected front
    legs upwardly with it.


CLS 297/61
TXT Device under the class definition comprising a movable headrest and a
    movable back wherein said headrest is united to the back or back supporting
    structure so that movement of either the back or the headrest causes the
    other at the same time to change its relative position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68+,    for a leg or footrest interconnected with a back for relative
    concurrent movement.

    112+,   for a back having a stored supplemental body support, such as a
    headrest.

    396,    for a headrest formed as an extension of the upper back.


CLS 297/62
TXT Device under the class definition wherein a body supporting portion of a
    seat is repositionable to effect, alone or in combination with other
    components of the same or different seats, superposed beds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112+,   for a seat having a back which is repositionable so that the rear
    surface thereof becomes an upper bunk.

    125+,   for a seat back wherein the rear portion is movable to become a
    table top.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclass 8 for stacked bunks.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 322 for a railroad car including a
    seat back movable to become an upper berth.


CLS 297/63
TXT Device under the class definition comprising a plurality of seats, and
    wherein one or more of the body supporting portions of one seat are
    repositionable with respect to the other components of that seat to form,
    in conjunction with a portion of the other seat, a support for a prone
    occupant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for seats having components reorientable to form superposed beds.

    105+,   for a seat convertible to a bed by exposing a supplemental body
    support by displacing the bottom.

    112+,   for a seat convertible to a bed by moving to use position a
    supplemental body support stored in the back.

    232+,   for plural related seats, especially subclass 233 for plural seats
    combinable to form a single seat.


CLS 297/64
TXT Device under subclass 63 wherein a back turns backwardly about a horizontal
    axis to a position behind its related bottom and forwardly of a second seat
    with its upper surface in a plane coextensive with the bottoms of both
    seats.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243,    for plural seats arranged one behind the other.

    354.12+, for a back movable rearwardly about an axis to a position behind
    its related bottom with its upper surface in a plane coextensive with the
    upper surface of the bottom.


CLS 297/65
TXT Device under subclass 64 wherein the back is connected to a bottom, and
    wherein the turning of the back about its pivot axis causes its bottom to
    move horizontally.


CLS 297/66
TXT Device under subclass 64 wherein the second seat is provided with a means
    to rest or hold the back in its horizontal position.


CLS 297/67
TXT Device under subclass 63 wherein the two seats to be utilized are
    positioned front to front, opposite each other, so that seated occupants
    confront each other.


CLS 297/68
TXT Device under the class definition wherein a leg rest or a footrest shifts
    with respect to a bottom simultaneously with a movement of either the
    bottom or a back.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    285+,   for a resiliently supported back.

    311+,   for a movable bottom.

    353+,   for a movable back.

    423.1+, for a rest for knee, leg, or foot.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 613+ for a sectional invalid bed, particularly
    subclasses 617+ for adjustable head and foot sections.

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 1+ for a
    horizontal planar supporting surface with a tiltable supporting surface.


CLS 297/69
TXT Device under subclass 68 provided with means allowing movement of the leg
    rest or footrest from a use position to a nonuse or to a different use
    position independently of the other interconnected parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    423.19+, for a foot rest or leg rest which is connected to a seat for
    relative movement.


CLS 297/70
TXT Device under subclass 69 wherein a footrest associated with a leg rest may
    be moved from one supporting position to another, regardless of any
    adjusting of the leg rest.


CLS 297/71
TXT Device under subclass 68 wherein means are provided to effect independently
    both vertical movement of the bottom and interrelated relative movement of
    the leg or footrest with respect to the bottom, and a single means is
    provided to effect or permit both motions.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are barber and dental chairs which permit an
    attendant to effect the various adjustments by a single handle which in
    selected positions releases or actuates the lock on the interrelated rests,
    actuates a pump to raise the chair, or actuates a release valve to lower
    the chair.


CLS 297/72
TXT Device under subclass 68 wherein a back is mounted to move from a rear edge
    of the bottom to the front edge, so as to alternately accommodate an
    occupant facing opposite directions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94+,    for a device of the type described above which does not have a
    footrest associated therewith.


CLS 297/73
TXT Device under subclass 72 wherein reversing of the back shifts the footrest
    therewith to a location to the rear of the seating device for use of a
    person therebehind.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    423.15, for a footrest located to the rear of a seating device.


CLS 297/74
TXT Device under subclass 73 provided with two footrests mounted on opposite
    ends of a swinging arm, said arm being interconnected with the back so that
    reversing of the back alternately swings the footrests from operative to
    inoperative positions.


CLS 297/75
TXT Device under subclass 68 wherein plural rest sections are provided which
    move relatively and concurrently.


CLS 297/76
TXT Device under subclass 75 comprising a leg rest extending downwardly from a
    bottom, and a footrest extending outwardly from said leg rest.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    423.1+, for a foot rest and leg rest where there is no movement of the
    bottom or back associated therewith.


CLS 297/77
TXT Device under subclass 68 wherein two opposing seats depend from a support
    and are mounted thereon to swing back and forth, and wherein the
    interconnected leg rest or footrest moves relative to the bottom and
    concurrently with the bottom or back as the seats swing to-and-fro.

    (1)     Note.  These devices are commonly known as "lawn swings" and
    usually include a single footrest common to both of the facing seats and
    located between the seats.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    245+,   for plural seats which face each other and oscillate to-and-fro.


CLS 297/78
TXT Device under subclass 68 provided with means interconnecting the leg rest
    and the back, said means including an armrest articulated to the back for
    movement therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323,    for a movable armrest interconnected with a relatively and
    concurrently tilting bottom and back.

    359+,   for an armrest pivoted to a tilting back, which armrest carries a
    latch or holder.


CLS 297/79
TXT Device under subclass 78 wherein the armrest is connected to one or more
    levers which are connected to the leg rest at a point below the hinge of
    the leg rest and bottom.


CLS 297/80
TXT Device under subclass 78 wherein the leg rest is provided with an integral
    portion or a member rigid therewith which projects above its connection to
    the chair frame and the armrest is immediately hinged to that projection.


CLS 297/81
TXT Device under subclass 80 wherein movement of the armrest or back causes the
    bottom to move at the same time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83+,    for a bottom movable relative to and concurrently with a back and
    leg rest.

    316+,   for a tilting bottom interconnected with a back for relative
    concurrent movement.

    340+,   for a movable bottom interconnected with a back for relative
    concurrent movement.


CLS 297/82
TXT Device under subclass 81 wherein the bottom is mounted to move relative to
    a frame by a hinge connection to the frame at the back end of the bottom,
    said frame providing the support for the seat components and spacing said
    components from a ground surface.


CLS 297/83
TXT Device under subclass 68 wherein the bottom is united to the back so that
    movement of the back causes the bottom to move at the same time and to
    change its position with respect to the back.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    316+,   for a tilting bottom interconnected with a back to move relative to
    and concurrently with the back.

    340+,   for a movable bottom interconnected with a back to move relative to
    and concurrently with the back.


CLS 297/84
TXT Device under subclass 83 wherein the rest moves to the front of, and at a
    progressively greater distance from the bottom as it moves relative to the
    bottom and back.


CLS 297/85
TXT Device under subclass 84 wherein a linkage system advances the leg rest,
    which system includes a pair of links pivoted together intermediate their
    lengths, in the manner of lazy-tongs, and wherein at least one of said
    links is journaled directly to said rest.


CLS 297/86
TXT Device under subclass 83 wherein the means which interconnects the leg rest
    to the back for relative concurrent movement also serves to interconnect
    the bottom to the back for relative concurrent movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84+,    for a common, back-connected actuator for the bottom and rest which
    moves the rest forwardly of the bottom.


CLS 297/87
TXT Device under subclass 83 wherein the bottom forms the interconnection
    between the back and rest, and movement of the bottom causes the rest to
    move relative to the bottom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84+,    for a bottom-actuated leg rest or footrest which advances forwardly
    of the bottom in its relative movement.


CLS 297/88
TXT Device under subclass 68 including an interconnected bottom and back
    disposed in fixed relationship to one another for simultaneous movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    271,    for a rocking chair having a bottom and back movable as a unit and
    provided with a leg rest wherein the leg rest oscillates on a rocking
    support in conjunction with the rocking motion of the chair.

    325+,   for a bottom and back tiltable as a unit, and see the search notes
    thereto for the loci of other movable bottom and back units.


CLS 297/89
TXT Device under subclass 88 wherein a linkage system provides for moving the
    leg rest in a forward direction away from the bottom, said system including
    a pair of levers pivoted together intermediate their lengths and with at
    least one of said levers pivoted directly to the leg rest.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85,     for a leg rest which advances on a lazy-tong linkage upon movement
    of a bottom relative to and concurrently with a back.


CLS 297/90
TXT Device under subclass 68 wherein the back is hinged to the bottom or bottom
    frame and projects below the hinge and the leg rest is united to that
    projection.


CLS 297/91
TXT Device under subclass 90 wherein the back projection is connected to the
    leg rest by two or more links.


CLS 297/92
TXT Device under the class definition comprising a chair in which the back and
    bottom elements are each reoriented to become the bottom and back,
    respectively, facing in the opposite direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for a reorientable seating device in which the entire device
    rotates as a unit, a portion of a revolution.

    94+,    for a back reversible as to a bottom.

    123,    for a bottom and back which moves as a unit to convert to a table.

    325+,   for a bottom and back which is tiltable as a unit to various
    angular positions.


CLS 297/93
TXT Device under subclass 92 wherein the bottom and back are unitized or
    integrated as a single element of the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    452.12+, for a one-piece bottom and back and see the search notes thereto
    for the loci of other one-piece bottoms and backs.


CLS 297/94
TXT Device under the class definition wherein a back is mounted to move from a
    rear edge of a bottom to the front edge so as to alternately accommodate an
    occupant facing opposite directions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72+,    for a device of type described above combined with a leg or a
    footrest interconnected to move relative to the bottom and concurrently
    with the bottom or back.

    92+,    for a seat having a back which is interchangeable and reversible
    with the bottom.


CLS 297/95
TXT Device under subclass 94 provided with means to incline the bottom from a
    first inclination to an opposite inclination in response to movement of the
    back from one edge of the seat to the opposite edge.


CLS 297/96
TXT Device under subclass 95 wherein the bottom inclining means includes a
    motion transmitting mechanism comprising two or more intermeshed,
    relatively moving members.


CLS 297/97
TXT Device under subclass 95 wherein the means to incline the bottom includes
    an operating cam connected to the back and engageable in a mating elongated
    aperture in the shifting bottom, and wherein the movement of the back moves
    the cam to shift the bottom.


CLS 297/98
TXT Device under subclass 97 wherein the operating cam is mounted on that
    structure which mounts and bears the weight of the back.


CLS 297/99
TXT Device under subclass 97 wherein the operating cam is mounted on a member
    which is connected to the back by a lost motion joint.


CLS 297/100
TXT Device under subclass 94 wherein the back is mounted on a supporting link
    extending forwardly at a right angle thereto and wherein the link is both
    immovable with respect to the back and located substantially midway of the
    lower and upper edges of the back.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for a back rigidly mounted on a bisector link and movable to a
    horizontal position to form an upper bunk over the bottom formed lower bunk.

    125,    for a back rigidly mounted on a bisector link wherein the rear of
    the back is movable to a horizontal position to become a table top.


CLS 297/101
TXT Device under subclass 94 wherein the reversing means includes a plurality
    of links pivoted to the back.


CLS 297/102
TXT Device under subclass 101 wherein the plural links cross intermediate their
    ends and are each pivoted to the back on opposite sides of the back center,
    whereby the back turns end for end in its movement from one edge of the
    seat to the opposite edge of the seat.


CLS 297/103
TXT Device under subclass 101 wherein the reversing links extend in the same
    direction, and wherein the distance between the pivot points at which they
    are connected to the back and the supporting structure is the same.


CLS 297/104
TXT Device under subclass 94 wherein the reversing means includes a link
    pivoted at one end to the back and at its other end to an armrest.


CLS 297/105
TXT Device under the class definition in which an additional, cumulative
    body-supporting panel or portion is carried in a nonuse location on or
    within the bottom of a seating device, and wherein such panel may be moved
    to a use position so as to be usable in conjunction with the bottom by the
    occupant of the bottom, and wherein a disarrangement or movement of the
    bottom is necessary to extend the panel from its nonuse to use position.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this and indented subclasses are superimposed
    seat cushions wherein one of the seat cushions is rearranged and supported
    forwardly of the other so as to be used in conjunction with the other.

    (2)     Note.  May of these panels are moved concurrently with an unfolding
    of the bottom so as to support the occupant in a different manner, i.e.,
    prone rather than sitting, and thus are often labeled "convertible", as to
    a bed. Seating devices having adjustable parts have been classified
    according to the type of adjustment rather than on the basis of
    convertibility.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188.10+, for a seat having a receptacle accessible by displacement of the
    seat.

    236+,   for a moving substitute or additional seat, as distinguished from a
    supplemental body support, stored within or beneath a bottom.

    423.2+, for leg rests storable beneath a bottom and movable out to a use
    position where the movement of the leg rest does not require a
    disarrangement of the bottom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 12.1+ for similar devices constructed to support
    plural persons, particularly subclass 14 for a bed stowed under a sofabed
    seat, subclass 25 for unfolding sofabed bottom sections, subclass 27 where
    a sofa seat is rear pivoted to be lifted to permit unfolding of a forwardly
    pivoted section concealed beneath it.


CLS 297/106
TXT Device under subclass 105 wherein the additional support is supported on a
    lazy-tong structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 521 for the definition of a
    lazy-tong.


CLS 297/107
TXT Device under subclass 105 wherein the body support is withdrawn or unfolded
    from the side of the device.


CLS 297/108
TXT Device under subclass 105 wherein the bottom is turned end for end to
    expose a body supporting member on the reverse side thereof, which member
    is a continuation of a second body supporting member, the latter concealed
    in nonuse position by the superposed bottom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 28+ for a sofa bed having a section substantially
    in the position of a seat and pivotally connected forwardly so that it may
    be inverted to form part of a bed bottom.


CLS 297/109
TXT Device under subclass 108 wherein, in addition to the second body
    supporting member, a third body supporting member is carried from a nonuse
    location to a position of use by the inverting bottom.

    (1)     Note.  The third body supporting member may be the rear portion of
    a back which is not used as a body support surface in the chair position
    but which is rearranged by the inverting bottom to be used as a body
    support surface in a bed position.


CLS 297/110
TXT Device under subclass 108 wherein an armrest or back is fixed to and
    movable with the bottom in its end for end movement, and wherein the
    armrest or an extension thereof or the back rests upon the floor in its
    inverted position to support the bottom and space it from the floor.


CLS 297/111
TXT Device under subclass 105 wherein the supplemental body support is arranged
    forwardly of the front end of the bottom in its position of use.


CLS 297/112
TXT Device under the class definition wherein an additional, cumulative body
    supporting panel is carried in a nonbody supporting location on or within a
    back and is movable to be used in conjunction with the primary or initial
    supporting surface of the back or a portion thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are back-stored panels by movement of which
    occupants are supported in a different manner, e.g., prone rather than
    sitting, and are often labeled "convertible".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for a seat having components reorientable to provide superposed
    beds.

    105+,   for a supplemental body support extensible from a bottom.

    125+,   for a back pivoted over a bottom so that the rear of the back
    becomes a table.

    188.04+, for a seat with a receptacle on or in the back thereof.

    238,    for a substitute body support withdrawable from the back to be used
    alternately with the back.

    350+,   for a laterally folding or collapsible back.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclass 16 for a vertically unfolding sofabed section.


CLS 297/113
TXT Device under subclass 112 wherein the back is provided with a recess and
    the supplemental body support comprises an armrest, the supporting surface
    of which is shiftable from its stored location in the recess to its use
    position external thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115+,   for an armrest movable from one position of use to another position
    of diverse use.

    238,    for a similar device comprising an auxiliary substitute seat
    withdrawable from a back.

    411.3+, for an armrest movable to an inoperative position externally of a
    back.


CLS 297/114
TXT Device under subclass 112 wherein the stored support moves about a fixed
    axis coextensive with or parallel to and immediately adjacent the upper
    edge of the back.


CLS 297/115
TXT Device under the class definition wherein an armrest is manipulatable to
    different special relationships with other components of the seat to
    support a different portion of the occupant's body in each relationship.

    (1)     Note.  The rest may become a headrest or footrest, or it may move
    to a coplanar relationship with the bottom to form a continuation thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for an armrest movable from a stored nonuse position within the
    back to a conjunctive use position with the back.


CLS 297/116
TXT Device under subclass 115 wherein the armrest is mounted on a horizontal
    axis extending from front to rear of the seat to swing up and down to
    various positions of use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    354.12+, for a back tiltable to various positions of use.

    411.3+, for an armrest mounted to swing from an operative to an inoperative
    position.


CLS 297/117
TXT Device under subclass 116 wherein the armrest is held in a vertical
    position of use by a disengageable means mounted on or connected to the
    back.


CLS 297/118
TXT Device under the class definition wherein by removal, reorientation, or
    addition of one or more components, there is formed another and different
    structure, (1) which if claimed alone would be classifiable in another
    class, or (2) which if claimed separately would be classified in different
    subclasses in this class (297).

    (1)     Note.  The mere adjustment of one or more body supporting parts of
    a seat relative to another either in body supporting range or to and from a
    storage position, has not been considered convertible for this and the
    indented subclasses unless such adjustment destroys the utility of such
    part as a body support.  Such patents have been classified above or below
    with the particular adjustment claimed. See the search notes to this
    subclass for the loci of such art.  However, if the relative adjustment
    destroys the utility of the device for supporting an occupant, the device
    is convertible and classified here.  For example, if a back is moved to be
    coplanar with a bottom, such movement is considered mere adjustment;
    however, if both parts are then elevated to become a table, the elevation
    may be considered to destroy the utility of the device as a body support,
    and such art has been classified below in subclasses 119+.

    (2)     Note.  In general, the addition or reorientation requirement of the
    definition of this subclass entails the employment of a member which has
    utility in one type of device but no utility in the other type of device to
    which it is converted.  For example, as pointed out in (1) Note above, a
    back which is pivoted to move with respect to the bottom has been
    classified below in subclasses 354.1+.  However, if the back pivots and
    moves forwardly of the bottom so that the previously unused rear surface of
    the back becomes a support surface such as a table, the device is
    considered convertible and is classified here.

    (3)     Note.  A removably mounted body rest, although "converting", for
    example, an armchair to an armless chair has not been considered to render
    the device convertible within the scope of this and the indented
    subclasses.  Such removable body rests have been classified with the
    particular rest, e.g., subclasses 411.23+ for an armrest removably clamped
    on a seat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for a seating device rotatable to expose a nonseating device for
    use.

    16.1+,  for a chair having components foldable relative to each other.

    68+,    for a seating device wherein the back and leg rest are concurrently
    adjustable to various rest positions.

    105+,   for a device having a supplemental body support extensible from a
    displaceable bottom to "convert" a chair to a bed by arranging a series of
    coplanar panels.

    112+,   for a back having a stored supplemental panel which is coextensible
    with the back to form a bed or table.

    115+,   for a seating device having an armrest movable to plural body
    supporting positions, some of which positions permit the device to be used
    as a bed.

    316+,   for a seating device wherein the back and bottom are interconnected
    for relative, concurrent movement.

    354.1+, for a seating device having a back adjustable to plural use
    positions, particularly subclasses 354.12+ for those with means to hold the
    back in selected positions of use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 12.1+ for devices known in the trade as "sofa
    beds" convertible to seating devices.  In general, where the sofa converts
    to a bed by merely moving the armrests, the patent is in this class (297)
    subclass 116.  Where the sofa converts to a bed by moving the back to a
    horizontal position, the device is a "sofa bed" for Class 5.  The division
    of art is primarily historical.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 33+ for a ladder
    convertible to a chair or stool.

    280,    Land Vehicles, appropriate subclasses for seats combined with a
    vehicle, particularly subclasses 7.1+ for a velocipede convertible to other
    devices or to some other type of vehicle, e.g., walker to stroller;
    subclasses 30+ for vehicles convertible from wheeled vehicles to
    nonvehicular structures; subclass 47.18 for convertible hand-propelled
    tiltable vehicles; subclasses 415.1+ for convertible articulated vehicles.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclass 69 for a seat in a
    vehicle body where the seat is convertible to another device.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclasses 25+ for furniture
    which is designed to be used as life-saving devices.


CLS 297/119
TXT Device under subclass 118 wherein the other and different structure is a
    table.

    (1)     Note.  Ironing boards have been considered tables for the purpose
    of classification in this and the indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    for a seat detachable from a subjacent table or stool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 11+ for a
    horizontally supported planar surface having convertible features.


CLS 297/120
TXT Device under subclass 119 wherein the component of the seat which is moved
    to convert the device to a table carries or has mounted thereon an
    additional panel, which panel is openable to form an extension of the
    surface of the component.


CLS 297/121
TXT Device under subclass 119 wherein a seat is converted to a table surface
    positioned between two bottoms, and usable concurrently by occupants of the
    bottoms facing each other.

    (1)     Note.  Two seats facing in opposite directions may constitute the
    "seat" referred to in the definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157.1+, for a table with opposed seats.


CLS 297/122
TXT Device under subclass 119 wherein the table is composed of two or more
    components including the bottom and back of the seating device.


CLS 297/123
TXT Device under subclass 119 wherein the joint between the bottom and back is
    fixed or immovable in the conversion movements of the chair.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for seating devices which convert to nonseating devices by moving
    as a unit about a fixed horizontal axis.  They are distinguished from the
    devices in this subclass in that the entire structure moves; in this
    subclass the components move with respect to a support, e.g., legs.

    93,     for one-piece bottom and back which are interchangeable and
    reversible.


CLS 297/124
TXT Device under subclass 119 wherein that portion of the back of the seating
    device contacted by the back of the occupant is shifted to become the table
    support surface.


CLS 297/125
TXT Device under subclass 124 wherein that surface of the back opposite to that
    contacted by the occupant is the table surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123,    for a seat convertible to a table wherein the back and bottom move
    as a unit.


CLS 297/126
TXT Device under subclass 125 in which the conversion exposes or leaves exposed
    the bottom of the seat so that an occupant may simultaneously use the
    bottom and table surface.


CLS 297/127
TXT Device under subclass 125 wherein the back rests upon the armrests in table
    position.


CLS 297/128
TXT Device under subclass 127 wherein the back has a pin and slot or similar
    track or guide articulation to the armrest to permit controlled, relative
    movement therebetween.


CLS 297/129
TXT Device under subclass 118 in which the other and different structure does
    not support a person.


CLS 297/130
TXT Device under subclass 118 which is provided with a selectively employed
    plurality of means to space or hold the occupant seating components in
    operative position.


CLS 297/131
TXT Device under subclass 130 provided with rockers which are mounted to be
    movable to a nonchair supporting position or a nonrocking, chair supporting
    position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270.1+, for a rocking chair provided with means to immobilize the rocking
    motion of the chair.


CLS 297/132
TXT Device under subclass 131 wherein each rocker is made of two or more
    jointed or connected parts, and wherein the rockers retract by moving the
    parts about the joint or connection so that the outer ends move inwardly
    toward the center.


CLS 297/133
TXT Device under subclass 130 in which the rockers are connected to the legs of
    the chair by means permitting ready removal therefrom, e.g., clamps,
    sockets, and the like, without employing fixtures mounted on the legs, so
    as to be movable from association with the legs of one chair to association
    with the legs of another chair.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for a rocker which disengages from the leg of chair to permit
    folding of the chair.


CLS 297/134
TXT Device under subclass 130 wherein a seat is readily connectable and
    disconnectable from the top of a table, or stool.


CLS 297/135
TXT Device under the class definition combined with a table, desk, or easel.

    (1)     Note.  "Desk" here refers to a writing surface as distinguished
    from a cabinet structure.  See the search note to Class 312, below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119+,   for a seat convertible to a table.

    134,    for a seat detachable from a subjacent stool or table and provided
    with alternate support.

    175+,   for means combined with a stool to facilitate milking of an animal,
    including supports specifically for a pail.

    188.01+, for a seat combined with a holder or receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 50.01+ for a
    horizontally supported planar surface combined with other structure, and
    subclasses 59+ for plural related horizontal surfaces in general.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 127+ for a stand, particularly subclasses 371+
    for a stand with a tilting support surface; subclasses 235+ for a
    bracket-mounted shelf and subclasses 441.1+ for an easel, book, or music
    score holder.

    280,    Land Vehicles, appropriate subclasses for the combination of a
    table or tray and a walker or stroller.  See search notes to subclass 5 in
    this class (297).

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 235.1+ for a receptacle
    having a cabinet partition or article support, combined with a seat.


CLS 297/136
TXT Device under subclass 135 in which the table is provided with an opening
    and the seat is supported therein or therebeneath, and at least partially
    circumscribed by the vertically projected boundaries of said table.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    for an apertured table having a seat supported within the periphery
    thereof wherein the back of the seat moves to close the table opening.


CLS 297/137
TXT Device under subclass 136 in which the seat revolves about a vertical axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    344.21+, for a bottom and back movable as a unit about a vertical axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 94+ for terraced
    horizontal planar surfaces which are rotatable, subclasses 103+ for plural
    related horizontal planar surfaces which are rotatable about a vertical
    axis, and subclasses 139+ for a horizontal planar surface rotatable about a
    vertical axis.


CLS 297/138
TXT Device under subclass 136 in which the table is provided with a horizontal
    guideway and the seat is movable therealong.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143,    for a seat positionable beneath a table in a nonuse position by
    sliding on a track or guide means.


CLS 297/139
TXT Device under subclass 135 in which the table forms a valise for the seat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157.1+, for seats disposed on opposite sides of a table.

    183.1+, for a seat combined with a handle.

    440.1+, for a knockdown seat, that is, a seat with interfitting components
    detachably connected by a manipulated joint.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 34+ for a
    horizontally supported planar surface in which a housing for the surface is
    provided by a collapsible surface.

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclasses 1+ for a valise
    convertible to other articles.


CLS 297/140
TXT Device under subclass 135 in which the seat is movable to a position of
    nonuse beneath the tabletop.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158.4+  for a table intermediate facing seats constructed so as to collapse
    into a compact form as for shipping and wherein in the collapsed state the
    seats underlie the table.


CLS 297/141
TXT Device under subclass 140 in which the seat swings to its inoperative
    position.


CLS 297/142
TXT Device under subclass 141 in which the seat is positionable beneath the
    table by means swingable in a horizontal plane about an axis perpendicular
    to said plane.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 240+ for swinging or folding bracket mounted
    shelves.


CLS 297/143
TXT Device under subclass 140 in which the seat is movable along a track to its
    nonuse position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    for a seat supported within the periphery of an apertured table and
    movable along a table mounted horizontal track.

    141+,   for a seat which pivots as well as slides in being inoperatively
    positioned beneath a table.


CLS 297/144
TXT Device under subclass 135 in which a table, desk, or easel is connected to
    move from an inoperative position inside or below a bottom to an operative
    position on the exterior thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105+,   for a bottom which moves to expose a supplementary body support.

    188.09+, for a receptacle of general utility located beneath a bottom.


CLS 297/145
TXT Device under subclass 144 in which the table, desk, or easel is connected
    to move from an inoperative position within or against an armrest to an
    operative position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188.15+, for a receptacle of general utility in or on the arm of a seat.


CLS 297/146
TXT Device under subclass 144 in which the table, desk, or easel is connected
    to move from an inoperative position within or against a back to an
    operative position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112+,   for a back carrying a stored supplemental body support.

    163+,   for a table disposed behind a seat.


CLS 297/147
TXT Device under subclass 135 wherein the table, desk, or easel and the seat
    are connected to a wall or container by means permitting movement thereof
    from an operative to an inoperative position in or against the wall or
    container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16.1+,  for a chair comprising a relatively folding bottom, back, and leg.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 33+ for a
    horizontally supported planar surface combined with a housing, subclasses
    42+ for a horizontally supported planar surface combined with other
    structure, subclasses 134+ for a folding horizontal planar surface attached
    laterally of a support, and subclass 152 for a horizontal planar surface
    attached laterally of a support.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 235+ for a bracket-supported shelf.


CLS 297/148
TXT Device under subclass 135 in which the table is borne by both arms of the
    seat through contact therewith.


CLS 297/149
TXT Device under subclass 148 in which the table is so connected to the arms as
    to be movable to various positions of use in a plane parallel to the
    horizon.


CLS 297/150
TXT Device under subclass 149 in which the connection permits further movement
    to a nonuse position.


CLS 297/151
TXT Device under subclass 149 in which the adjusting means includes a detent
    (e.g., projection or tongue) and a plurality of notches or apertures, for
    the reception thereof.


CLS 297/152
TXT Device under subclass 148 provided with means for attaching the seat and
    table to a neighboring support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250.1+, for additional bottoms supported from another seat in use position.

    452.1+, for a bottom or back with means (e.g., bracket or clamp) for
    attachment to a subjacent support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 235+ for bracket mounted shelves.


CLS 297/153
TXT Device under subclass 148 provided with means by which the table may be
    attached to the arms on which it bears and readily detached therefrom and
    from the remaining chair structure.


CLS 297/154
TXT Device under subclass 148 in which the table is movable to a nonuse
    position while the seat is in use position.


CLS 297/155
TXT Device under subclass 154 wherein the table in its nonuse position hangs to
    the side of the chair arm or is moved to a nonuse position on one side of
    the bottom.


CLS 297/156
TXT Device under subclass 135 in which occupant sits astride the seat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124+,   for similar structures wherein the face or usable side of the back
    moves to become a table top.

    195.1+, for a seat comprising a pommel and cantle.

    354.1+, for similar structures comprising backs tiltable to various use
    positions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 181+ for a trestle
    usable as straddle seat.


CLS 297/157.1
TXT Table with opposed seating:

    Device under subclass 135 wherein a table is disposed between facing seats.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121,    for a seat that is convertible to a table and plural  bottoms.

    139,    for a table with opposing seats where the table forms a carrying
    case for the seats.

    174,    for a table in front of a seat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    472,    Amusement Devices, subclass 125 for swings for multiple occupants.


CLS 297/158.1
TXT With semi-enclosing support structure (e.g., booth):

    Device under subclass 157.1 including an additional supporting structure in
    which a partially enclosed compartment is formed and defined by the
    supporting structure, table, and opposed seating.


CLS 297/158.2
TXT Movably mounted table or seat:

    Device under subclass 158.1 in which the table, seat, or supporting
    structure is constructed to be moved about an axis.


CLS 297/158.3
TXT Planar horizontal seating (e.g., picnic table):

    Device under subclass 157.1 wherein the spaced facing seats are of a flat
    nature, disposed in a plane parallel with respect to the table.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 60+ for plural
    related horizontal surfaces having a partition.


CLS 297/158.4
TXT Folding:

    Device under subclass 158.3 in which the table or seat is constructed to be
    foldable from or into a structure of reduced volume.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139,    for a table forming a carrying case.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 162+ for a
    horizontally supported planar surface wherein either  one surface is
    foldably connected to another or a support structure for a horizontal
    surface is foldably connected to the surface.


CLS 297/158.5
TXT Having separable components:

    Device under subclass 158.3 wherein each component of the seat or table
    carries or has integrally formed therein parts which (a) mate or interfit
    with each other, (b) may be moved relative to each other to selectively
    join or disjoin the components, and (c) are the sole connecting means
    utilized at the joint at which they are employed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    440.1+, for a knockdown seat, that is, a seat with interfitting components
    detachably connected by a manipulated joint.

    SEARCH  CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 180+ for plural
    related horizontal surfaces wherein a surface or a support for a surface
    can be detached.


CLS 297/159.1
TXT Folding:

    Device under subclass 157.1 in which the seat or table folds from or into a
    structure of reduced volume.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 162+ for plural
    related horizontal surfaces wherein either one surface is foldably
    connected to another or a support structure for a horizontal surface is
    foldably connected to the surface.


CLS 297/160
TXT Device under subclass 135 in which a chair arm is enlarged to form a
    writing surface, or in which a chair arm has a writing surface attached
    thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    411.2+, for a seat with an armrest.


CLS 297/161
TXT Device under subclass 160 in which the surface is connected to the seat by
    means permitting movement of the surface to various positions of use.


CLS 297/162
TXT Device under subclass 160 in which the surface is connected to the seat by
    means permitting movement of the surface to a nonuse position.


CLS 297/163
TXT Device under subclass 135 in which a table is located to the rear of the
    seat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112+,   for similar construction involving a supplemental body support
    carried in a stored position in or on a back.

    146,    for a table, desk, or easel extensible from a back.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 515+ for means
    supporting a person's head or hair while bathing.


CLS 297/164
TXT Device under subclass 163 in which the table and the seat may be separately
    perpendicularly adjusted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    338,    for a bottom vertically movable independently of an associated back.

    344.12+, for a vertically adjustable bottom and back unit.


CLS 297/165
TXT Device under subclass 164 in which the seat may be pivoted about a
    horizontal axis to a plurality of positions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    313+,   for a tiltable bottom, especially subclasses 331+ for a bottom
    tilting to an inoperative position.


CLS 297/166
TXT Device under subclass 165 in which the table and the seat are supported
    from a common supporting post or column.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 158+ for a standard-type stand.


CLS 297/167
TXT Device under subclass 163 in which the seat is pivotable about a horizontal
    axis or foldable with respect to the table.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    313+,   for a tiltable bottom, particularly subclasses 331+ where the
    bottom tilts to an inoperative position.


CLS 297/168
TXT Device under subclass 167 in which the seat is additionally adjustable
    perpendicularly.


CLS 297/169
TXT Device under subclass 167 in which the table is also pivotable about a
    horizontal axis.


CLS 297/170
TXT Device under subclass 135 in which a table is supported on a standard which
    is connected to and supported by the chair and extends therefrom.


CLS 297/171
TXT Device under subclass 170 in which the standard is an upward elongation of
    the chair leg.


CLS 297/172
TXT Device under subclass 170 in which the standard is spaced from the chair
    with a base element extending therebetween.


CLS 297/173
TXT Device under subclass 135 in which the table is swingably secured to the
    seat.


CLS 297/174
TXT Device under subclass 135 in which the table is forward of the seat.


CLS 297/175
TXT Device under the class definition combined with a means for facilitating
    the operation of milking an animal, e.g., a pail support or animal guard,
    or modified to facilitate a milking operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91+,    for a seat combined with a table or shelf support upon which a pail
    may be supported.

    188.01+, for a seat combined with a receptacle of general utility.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 200+ for pail closures in general, and
    subclasses 86.1+ for attachments for filling a receptacle.


CLS 297/176
TXT Device under subclass 175 provided with means for shielding the seat
    occupant from a blow by an animal's tail, or with a means to restrain the
    movement of an animal's tail.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    54,     Harness, particularly subclass 78 for an animal tail holder of
    general application or for preventing tail switching but combined with
    harness for a working animal.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, particularly subclasses 809+ for an
    animal-carried device for preventing its tail from switching not combined
    with a stool for milking.


CLS 297/177
TXT Device under subclass 175 wherein is provided a holder for a milking pail,
    and wherein the holder and seat are connected to each other by means which
    permit one to move with respect to the other, as to various positions of
    use, or from a use to a nonuse position.


CLS 297/178
TXT Device under subclass 177 in which the pail holder may be raised or lowered
    to various positions of use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 132 for a receptacle support wherein the
    receptacle is vertically adjustable.


CLS 297/179
TXT Device under subclass 175 comprising a pail holder selectively dimensioned
    to fit pails of various sizes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 149 for a receptacle support adjustable to
    various size receptacles.


CLS 297/180.1
TXT WITH HEAT EXCHANGER OR MEANS TO PROVIDE FLUID OR VAPOR TREATMENT:Device
    under the class definition provided with a means to heat or cool or
    transfer heat to or from a seating device or to a seated occupant, or with
    a means to subject a seating device to fume, smoke, or the like.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclass 284 for means for applying heating or cooling fluid
    to a bedstead, subclasses 421+ for heating or cooling a bed, and subclass
    422 for means for applying heating and cooling fluid to a waterbed mattress.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 125 for
    fumigators.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for structure related to the
    transfer of heat from one material to another.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclasses 56+ for the
    combination of a rocking chair and a fan operated by the rocking movement,
    wherein no significant alteration of chair structure is required to
    accommodate the fan and its operating mechanism.

    417,    Pumps, subclass 230 for a pump operated by motion of a rocking
    chair, wherein the moving fluid is not directed toward a body part of a
    seated occupant.


CLS 297/180.11
TXT Portable supplemental pad:
    Device under subclass 180.1 wherein significance is attributed to a movable
    auxiliary pad configured to rest upon an occupant-engaging surface of
    different seating devices, wherein the auxiliary pad includes a means to
    heat or cool or transfer heat from or to a seated occupant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230.1+,         for supplemental backs.

    452.42+, for primary bottom or back having a ventilating means.


CLS 297/180.12
TXT Electric heating element:
    Device under subclass 180.1 in which the heating means is an element which
    operates to convert electrical energy into heat.


CLS 297/180.13
TXT Power source propels air for heat exchange:
    Device under subclass 180.1 wherein the means for heating or cooling of a
    seated occupant includes an air propulsion means which is operated by a
    power source.


CLS 297/180.14
TXT Fan directly attached to a chair or seat component:
    Device under subclass 180.13 wherein the air propulsion means is
    incorporated within or attached to the seating device structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180.16, for a fan actuated by rocking movement of a seated occupant.


CLS 297/180.15
TXT Liquid medium:
    Device under subclass 180.1 wherein the means to transfer heat includes a
    liquid substance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 289 for a fluid
    sprinkling system combined with a chair in which there is no special
    relationship claimed between a spraying device and the chair.


CLS 297/180.16
TXT Occupant's motion actuates a ventilating means (e.g., rocking movement,
    etc.):Device under subclass 180.1 wherein the means to heat or cool a
    seated occupant includes an air-moving means which is actuated by a certain
    movement imparted to the seating device by the seated occupant (e.g.,
    to-and-fro movement, up-and-down movement, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclasses 56+ for
    impellers operated by motion of a rocking chair, wherein the impeller and
    its associated operating system are merely attached to the chair at points
    such that the chair structure is not subjected to significant alteration or
    modification.

    417,    Pumps, subclass 230 for a pump operated by motion of a chair,
    wherein the moving fluid is not directed toward a body part of a seated
    occupant.


CLS 297/181
TXT Device under the class definition including an effigy or mock-up, as of a
    horse, automobile, airplane, or the like.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 827 for velocipede simulations.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 268+ for a figure toys.

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclasses 95+ for a rockable
    animal simulation having rider seat means, e.g., a rocking horse, etc.


CLS 297/182
TXT Device under the class definition provided with means to receive waste
    matter dropped by the occupant or by a person attending the occupant, e.g.,
    a barber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135+,   for a seat combined with a table.

    188.01+, for a seat combined with a receptacle of general utility.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 515+ for a
    receptacle to hold a person's hair and waste water while the hair is being
    washed.


CLS 297/183.1
TXT WITH HANDLE:

    Device under the class definition including a portion to be grasped by a
    hand.

    (1)     Note.  The handle may be (a) grasped by the hand of an occupant to
    assist him/her in entering, leaving, or remaining on the device or (b)
    grasped by a standee (as in a common carrier) to assist him/her in
    maintaining his/her balance and stand adjacent the device or (c) grasped by
    a person to move the seat from one position or location to another.

    (2)     Note.  Sedan chairs are classified in this subclass or indented
    subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 110+ for handles, per se.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 47.11 for a wheel steered vehicle with a
    handle pushed or pulled by an attendant; subclasses 47.17+ for a tiltable
    vehicle stabilized by an attendant by means of a handle; and subclasses
    47.34+ for a handle propelled stable vehicle, especially subclasses 47.38+
    for baby carriage type.

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclasses 120 and 121+ for an
    amusement type swing actuated by a hand operator and subclass 135 for an
    occupant rocking, oscillating, or bouncing device.


CLS 297/183.2
TXT Movable to inoperative position:

    Handle under subclass 183.1 which includes means to selectively move the
    handle to a non-use location on the chair.


CLS 297/183.3
TXT Alternate use (e.g., prop for baby seat, etc.):

    Movably mounted handle under subclass 183.2 which is positionable to
    provide an additional function.


CLS 297/183.4
TXT Adjustable plural use positions:

    Handle under subclass 183.1 which includes means (e.g., a pivot) to
    selectively move it to multiple grip stops.


CLS 297/183.5
TXT For use with chair in collapsed position (e.g., stadium chair):

    Handle under subclass 183.1 accessible and/or functionable when the seat
    and back, which are hingedly connected, are in a folded state.


CLS 297/183.6
TXT For nonoccupant use:

    Handle under subclass 183.1 which is accessible for use by a person other
    than the occupant, even when the seat is being occupied.


CLS 297/183.7
TXT Seat back grip:

    Handle for nonoccupant use under subclass 183.6 located on top of the seat
    (e.g., for a standee in a common carrier).


CLS 297/183.8
TXT Detachable:

    Seat back grip under subclass 183.7 designed to be removable from the back
    without altering the chair structure.


CLS 297/183.9
TXT For use by occupant while seated:

    Handle under subclass 183.1 which is configured for arrangement or
    attachment to a seat for use by a person in a seated position.


CLS 297/184.1
TXT WITH WEATHER SHIELD OR INSECT PROTECTOR (E.G., CANOPY, SCREEN, ETC.):Device
    under the class definition including a means to shield or protect a seating
    device or a seated occupant thereof from the sun, wind, rain, or insects.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219.1+, for a mere cover for a seat component, wherein the cover forms an
    occupant engaging surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 414+ for a net or canopy for a bed.

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclasses 87+ for a canopy.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 32.5 for a vehicle with a worker's shade.


CLS 297/184.11
TXT Detachable or movable for seat occupancy:
    Device under subclass 184.1 wherein the protector is configured to be
    removable from a supporting surface of the seating device before the use
    thereof by an occupant, or is connected to the seating device so as to be
    retracted or moved to a noncovering position.


CLS 297/184.12
TXT Transparent visor:
    Device under subclass 184.1 wherein the protector includes a panel made of
    clear or tinted material for a seated occupant's vision.


CLS 297/184.13
TXT For child seat:
    Device under subclass 184.1 in which the protector is for attaching to a
    seat dimensioned to support a child.


CLS 297/184.14
TXT Enclosure type:
    Device under subclass 184.1 in which the protector is configured to
    surround or extend downwardly from an overlying top to partially or
    completely shield at least three sides of the seating device; i.e., lateral
    sides and a back side or front side.


CLS 297/184.15
TXT Flexible canopy having framework:
    Device under subclass 184.1 wherein the protector is made of flaccid
    material extending over a top of the seating device and mounted on a frame
    having members configured to support the protector.


CLS 297/184.16
TXT Umbrella type:
    Device under subclass 184.15 in which the members are elongated elements
    each having one end connected to a supporting post, and wherein the
    elements are configured to extend radially and outwardly therefrom.


CLS 297/184.17
TXT U-shaped elements have ends which converge toward a common laterally
    extending axis (e.g., baby carriage type, etc.):

    Device under subclass 184.15 wherein the members are elongated members
    which are curved across a seating surface of the seating device and each
    having two ends attached to opposite sides of the seating device, wherein
    all attachment points lie along a common linear axis extending from one
    side of the seating device to another side.


CLS 297/185
TXT Device under the class definition provided with a looking glass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    838+ for mirrors, per se.


CLS 297/186
TXT Device under the class definition combined with music making means or a
    support for such means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, appropriate subclasses for musical instruments, per se,
    especially subclass 280 for a violin support, subclass 379 for an harmonica
    support, subclass 421 for a drum support.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 13.1 for a support, per se, for a
    musical instrument.


CLS 297/187
TXT Device under the class definition comprising as support for supporting the
    knees of a person in a kneeling position and having an armrest or headrest
    extending thereabove.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    423.15,         for a kneeling stool at the rear of a seating device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclass 129 for a worker's
    kneeling support combined with nonclass structure (e.g., a brush or soap
    receptacle); and subclass 230 for a worker's kneeling support, per se.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 32.6 for a wheeled workman's kneeler.


CLS 297/188.01
TXT WITH HOLDER OR RECEPTACLE FOR DISPARATE ARTICLE:

    Device under the class definition provided with an element to support or
    contain a nonclass article.

    (1)     Note.  A receptacle is defined as peripheral walls with a closed
    end and an access opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7+,     for a foldable or removable crib side storable within or upon a
    receptacle on a seating device.

    14+,    for a bottom and back stored in a receptacle housing.

    105+,   for a supplemental baby support extensible from a receptacle below
    a displaceable bottom.

    112+,   for a supplemental body support stored in a receptacle in a back.

    135+,   for a seating device combined with a table, desk, or easel.

    236+,   for a substitute bottom withdrawable from a receptacle in a seat
    bottom.

    238,    for a substitute bottom withdrawable from a receptacle in a seat
    back.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclass 58 for a sofa bed provided with a receptacle, drawer
    or compartment.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 476+ for a container attached to or set in
    a wall.

    248,    Supports, especially subclasses 311.2+ for a bracket for a
    receptacle-type holding means.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 235.2+ for a cabinet
    combined with a generic seating device.


CLS 297/188.02
TXT Holder or receptacle collapses as seat pivots:

    Holder or receptacle under subclass 188.01 comprising a container element
    foldable as the portion of the chair used to bear the weight of a person in
    a sitting position swings about an axis.


CLS 297/188.03
TXT For apparel:

    Holder or receptacle under subclass 188.01 relating to garments or articles
    of clothing.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a seat combined with a trouser press, a hat
    rack, or a coat hanger.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for an article of clothing combined with a seat, where the clothing
    alternatively carries the seat about with the occupant during movement or
    permits the seat to become operative.

    423.1+, for a knee-, leg-, or footrest; i.e., a device which receives or
    holds a clothed leg or shod foot.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 30+ for a hat-type article support.


CLS 297/188.04
TXT On or integral with backrest:

    Holder or receptacle under subclass 188.01 supported by or supported within
    the upwardly extending portion of the seat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135+,   for a seating device combined with a table, desk, or easel.

    182,    for a device attached to a back to catch shampoo, crumbs, or other
    such debris.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 515+ for means for
    bathing a person's head or hair and also means for supporting the head or
    hair while bathing.

    433,    Dentistry, subclass 33 for a dental apparatus combined with a
    support for the patient or operator.


CLS 297/188.05
TXT Adjustable:

    Backrest holder or receptacle under subclass 188.04 mounted to the back of
    the chair by pivotal or extension means, to  selectively move it to
    multiple access locations.


CLS 297/188.06
TXT Detachable:

    Backrest holder or receptacle under subclass 188.04 designed to be
    removable from the back of the chair without altering the chair structure.


CLS 297/188.07
TXT Having closure means:

    Backrest receptacle under subclass 188.04 wherein the access opening is
    covered by a movable wall means.


CLS 297/188.08
TXT Directly under occupant seating portion:

    Holder or receptacle under subclass 188.01 located subjacent the portion of
    the chair used to bear the weight of a person in a sitting position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 479+ for a
    chair-type dry closet.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 31 for a hat-type article support
    designed to be located beneath a substantially horizontal surface, such as
    the under side of a seat.


CLS 297/188.09
TXT Accessible by displacement of seating surface:

    Holder or receptacle located beneath the seat under subclass 188.08 wherein
    entry to the container element is gained by removal of the seat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105+,   for a displaceable bottom which exposes a supplemental body support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclass 58 for a box sofa having a receptacle accessible by
    displacement of the top.


CLS 297/188.1
TXT Pivotally displaced:

    Holder or receptacle beneath the seat under subclass 188.09 wherein entry
    to the container element is gained by pivotally removing the seat.


CLS 297/188.11
TXT Horizontally slidable (e.g., drawer):

    Holder or receptacle located beneath the seating portion under subclass
    188.08 consisting of a container element adapted for linear movement
    relative to the seat, the closed end of the container being a front wall
    and the access opening of the container being located such that when the
    receptacle is moved directly underneath the seat, the opening is concealed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports: Cabinet Structure, subclasses 330.1+ for a cabinet with a
    horizontally adjustable component and subclasses 235.2+ for a cabinet
    combined with generic seat.


CLS 297/188.12
TXT Detachable:

    Holder or receptacle beneath the seat under subclass 188.08 designed to be
    removable from underneath the seat without altering the chair structure.


CLS 297/188.13
TXT Having closure means:

    Holder or receptacle beneath the seat under subclass 188.08 wherein the
    access opening is covered by a movable wall means.


CLS 297/188.14
TXT On or integral with armrest (e.g., beverage cup holder):

    Holder or receptacle under subclass 188.01 wherein the container element is
    supported by or within a means for supporting an arm of an occupant of a
    seat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135+,   for a seating device combined with a table, desk, or easel.

    411.1+, for various armrests connected to a chair or seat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 139+ for a carrier, for
    portable beverage containers in a desired arrangement and additionally
    having hand or finger engaging means to pendulously support the containers.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 74+ for bottle holders.


CLS 297/188.15
TXT Movably mounted to inoperative position:

    Armrest holder or receptacle under subclass 188.14 including means to
    selectively move the receptacle to a nonuse location.


CLS 297/188.16
TXT Into armrest:

    Armrest holder or receptacle under subclass 188.15 movable to a position
    inside the armrest.


CLS 297/188.17
TXT By sliding motion:

    Armrest holder or receptacle under subclass 188.16 movable into the armrest
    along continuous contact with a smooth surface.


CLS 297/188.18
TXT Holder detachable from armrest:

    Armrest holder or receptacle under subclass 188.14 designed to be removable
    from the armrest without altering the armrest structure.


CLS 297/188.19
TXT Having closure means:

    Armrest holder or receptacle under subclass 188.14 having an access opening
    which is covered by a movable wall means.


CLS 297/188.2
TXT Detachable from chair structure:

    Holder or receptacle under subclass 188.01 designed to be removable from
    the chair without altering the chair structure.


CLS 297/188.21
TXT Adjustable with respect to the chair structure:

    Holder or receptacle under subclass 188.01 mounted to the chair by means;
    i.e., by pivotal or extension means, to selectively move it to multiple
    access locations.


CLS 297/195.1
TXT STRADDLE SEAT (E.G., SADDLE TYPE, ETC.):
    Device under the class definition having structure configured to be sat
    astride by an occupant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156,    for a straddle-type seat combined with a table.

    219.11, for removable cover for straddle seat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    54,     Harness, subclass 37.1 for a saddle modified to be mounted on an
    animal.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclass 30+ for a carrier mounted on
    a bicycle frame wherein the mounting means are similar to the means by
    which a saddle seat is mounted on a bicycle frame.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclass 117 for a fluid spring-type spring device
    useful in a saddle seat, and subclasses 142+ for other types of spring
    devices for such use.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 202+ for an occupant-propelled
    bicycle-type vehicle in which a means is provided for carrying additional
    passengers or articles, and subclasses 281.1+ for a bicycle frame
    structure, per se, and for the combination of a bicycle and a seat where
    more of the frame is claimed than is necessary for mounting the seat.


CLS 297/195.11
TXT Other than cycle seat:
    Device under subclass 195.1 configured to be mounted on a supporting
    structure other than on a vehicle having wheels which is propelled by foot
    pedals or a motor (e.g., bicycle, tricycle, motorcycle, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Straddle seats having castors are included in this subclass.


CLS 297/195.12
TXT Plural related seats:
    Device under subclass 195.1 including an additional straddle seat which is
    integral with or spaced from the straddle seat for alternate or concurrent
    use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243,    for nonstraddle seats in tandem.


CLS 297/195.13
TXT Detachable seat:
    Device under subclass 195.12 in which the additional seat includes an
    attaching means for permitting the additional seat to be detachably mounted
    or connected to a particular support structure or the straddle seat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 202 for wheeled land vehicles of
    occupant-propelled type in combination with a seat or carrier for carrying
    additional passengers or articles. See the main class definition of this
    class for the lines between Class 297 and Class 280.


CLS 297/196
TXT Device under subclass 195.1 wherein the seat is secured to the free end of
    a beam-type spring element, the other end of which is connected to a floor
    or ground engaging base member, and wherein the spring element forms the
    sole support for the seat.


CLS 297/197
TXT Device under subclass 195.1 wherein the supporting surface of the seat
    includes a plurality of narrow, elongated spans, e.g., strands, strings,
    horizontally disposed coil springs.


CLS 297/198
TXT Device under subclass 195.1 provided with a spring support comprising
    superposed and coacting strips, plates or leaves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 627 for a support surface mounted on a laminated
    elliptic spring, and subclass 630 for a support surface mounted on a
    laminated spring.


CLS 297/199
TXT Device under subclass 195.1 wherein the seat includes or is supported by a
    compressible fluid, e.g., air constituting an elastic element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, subclass 117 for a pneumatic cushion, per se.


CLS 297/200
TXT Device under subclass 199 wherein two or more separate fluid containing
    chambers are provided.


CLS 297/201
TXT Device under subclass 195.1 wherein the seat comprises two or more separate
    and distinct occupant engaging areas which may change their position with
    respect to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    197,    for a straddle seat having a filamented supporting surface.

    312,    for a seat with independently movable resilient bottom sections.


CLS 297/202
TXT Device under subclass 195.1 wherein the occupant supporting surface
    comprises two areas separated by a notched or recessed area.


CLS 297/203
TXT Device under subclass 195.1 wherein the hindmost part of the seat is
    attached to a diagonal rod and its foremost part is separately mounted on
    its support.

    (1)     Note.  The inclined rod is usually the backbone member of a cycle
    frame.


CLS 297/204
TXT Device under subclass 195.1 provided with means to vary the tension of the
    occupant supporting surface and to hold the surface at various degrees of
    tension.


CLS 297/205
TXT Device under subclass 204 incorporated in a bracket employed in securing
    the seat on a supporting rod.


CLS 297/206
TXT Device under subclass 204 provided with a spring connected to the front
    portion of the seat and a spring connected to the rear portion of the seat,
    said springs being joined together by said adjusting means.


CLS 297/207
TXT Device under subclass 204 wherein the adjusting means comprises a
    screw-type setting means the axis of which extends in the same general
    direction as the seat.


CLS 297/208
TXT Device under subclass 195.1 wherein the seat is supported by a helix spring
    or a spirally wound resilient element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 623 for a support surface mounted on a helical
    standard; and subclasses 624+ for a support surface mounted on a helical
    spring.


CLS 297/209
TXT Device under subclass 208 wherein the axis of the coil spring is
    substantially upright.


CLS 297/210
TXT Device under subclass 209 comprising an additional coil spring positioned
    one directly above the other, and wherein one contracts while the other
    expands under load.


CLS 297/211
TXT Device under subclass 209 provided with two or more parallel rods depending
    from the seat and each rod is resiliently supported by a coil spring which
    surrounds the rod.


CLS 297/212
TXT Device under subclass 209 wherein a member is interposed between a rear
    mounted coil spring and the forward end of the seat, and wherein said
    member forms the support on which the spring is mounted and the connection
    to the forward end of the seat.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are devices in which the rear coil
    spring and the front connected member form a single integral continuous
    element.


CLS 297/213
TXT Device under subclass 208 wherein the axis of the coil spring extends in a
    direction crosswise of the seat.


CLS 297/214
TXT Device under subclass 195.1 wherein the occupant supporting side of the
    seat is upholstered, that is, provided with a padding and cover.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    452.16+ and  452.48+, for a bottom or back with a cushioned surface.


CLS 297/215
TXT Device under subclass 195.1 wherein the seat is supported by means of a
    semi-elliptical or curved resilient member.


CLS 297/215.1
TXT Including an upwardly extending portion at rear of seat:
    Device under subclass 195.1 including a raised portion at or near a rear of
    the straddle seat, wherein the raised portion is configured to extend
    upwardly above an occupant-engaging surface of the straddle seat.

    (1)     Note.  The raised portion may be continuous with or attached to the
    straddle seat.


CLS 297/215.11
TXT Extends upwardly above waist to provide back support:
    Device under subclass 215.1 wherein the raised portion is extended upwardly
    to a point substantially above the waist of a seated occupant to form a
    back rest.


CLS 297/215.12
TXT Movable back support:
    Device under subclass 215.11  in which the back support is mounted for
    movement with respect to the straddle seat.


CLS 297/215.13
TXT Adjustable to plural use positions:
    Device under subclass 195.1 wherein the straddle seat includes a means for
    setting the seat at various positions of use.


CLS 297/215.14
TXT Longitudinally:
    Device under subclass 215.13 in which the adjusting means is configured to
    allow the straddle seat to move in a fore-and-aft direction along a plane
    containing longitudinal dimensions of the seat.


CLS 297/215.15
TXT Angularly:
    Device under subclass 215.13 wherein the adjusting means is configured to
    allow the straddle seat to be pivotally moved to and fixed at different
    positions which are at various angles relative to a substantially
    horizontal plane.


CLS 297/215.16
TXT Molded plastic saddle:
    Device under subclass 195.1 wherein the straddle seat is wholly or
    partially constructed from a preshaped panel which is formed of a
    synthetic-type stock; e.g., resins, polymers, nylon, fiberglass, etc.


CLS 297/216.1
TXT CRASH SEAT:
    Device under the class definition provided with a means responsive to, and
    effective upon, an abnormal acceleration or deceleration of a vehicle
    within which it may be placed to mitigate, cushion, or neutralize the
    unusual force acting upon a seated occupant which is caused by the effect
    of such acceleration or deceleration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    470+,   and subclasses 477-480, for acceleration or deceleration responsive
    safety belts.


CLS 297/216.11
TXT Force-absorbing means incorporated into child seat:
    Device under subclass 216.1 in which the mitigating means is provided in a
    seating device dimensioned to support a seated child.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184.13, for weather shield or insect protector for supplemental child seat.

    219.12, for a removable cover for a child seat.

    250.1+, for rigid supplemental child seats which are not provided with a
    force-mitigating means.


CLS 297/216.12
TXT Force-absorbing means incorporated into headrest area:
    Device under subclass 216.1 wherein the force-mitigating means is provided
    in a head-support area of a seating device.


CLS 297/216.13
TXT Force-absorbing means incorporated into back:
    Device under subclass 216.1 wherein the force- mitigating means is attached
    to or incorporated into a back of a seating device.


CLS 297/216.14
TXT For absorbing rear-impact force:
    Device under subclass 216.13 wherein the force-absorbing means of the back
    of the seating device is configured so as to mitigate a force which acts on
    a rear of the back (e.g., an acting force may be the result of a rear
    passenger striking a front seat, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    378.11, for an inertial latch for a back that acts to prevent forward
    folding of the back when subjected to undue deceleration forces.


CLS 297/216.15
TXT Bottom and back interconnected for relative concurrent movement:Device
    under subclass 216.1 including a bottom and a back which are joined so
    that, in response to excessive force, movement of either the bottom or back
    causes the other to move at the same time and change its relative position
    with respect to the other.


CLS 297/216.16
TXT Bottom and back movable as unit in response to force:
    Device under subclass 216.1 having a bottom and a back which are
    continuously formed or joined together to form a unit, and a means to mount
    the unit to a vehicle's structure, wherein the mounting means is configured
    to permit the bottom and back to move together, in response to excessive
    force, in a manner such that their positions relative to each other are
    unchanged.


CLS 297/216.17
TXT Rectilinearly vertically:
    Device under subclass 216.16 wherein the bottom and back, in response to
    excessive force, move together in a line perpendicular to a substantially
    horizontal surface.


CLS 297/216.18
TXT In horizontal plane:
    Device under subclass 216.16 wherein the bottom and back, in response to
    excessive force, move relative to their normally set positions in a
    substantially horizontal plane.


CLS 297/216.19
TXT Tiltably:
    Device under subclass 216.16 wherein the bottom and back, in response to
    excessive force, move as a unit to a position which is inclined at an angle
    relative to a normally set position of the unit.


CLS 297/216.2
TXT Mounted on support legs:
    Device under subclass 216.19 in which the unit is connected to at least two
    elongated members which support the unit on a floor.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are telescoping or deformable
    legs.


CLS 297/217.1
TXT COMBINED:

    Device under the class definition cooperatively united with a non-class
    article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188.01+,for a chair with a holder or receptacle for a disparate article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclass 2.1 for a bed combined with another article of
    furniture.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 345+ for the combination of a
    railway car and seat.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 431+ for an earth working device combined
    with a seat.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 187+ for a workman
    supporting platform mounted on a shaft.

    194,    Check-Actuated Control Mechanisms, appropriate subclasses for a
    chair or seat combined with check or coin controlled apparatus.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 29+ for a wheeled vehicle with a seat.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 63+ for a modified
    vehicle body combined with a seat.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 508 for a self-loading
    vehicle combined with a seat.


CLS 297/217.2
TXT With measuring device:

    Seat structure under subclass 217.1 wherein the non-class article is a
    scale for determining weight or dimensions.


CLS 297/217.3
TXT With electrical feature:

    Seat structure under subclass 217.1 wherein the non-class article is a
    powered component, device, etc.


CLS 297/217.4
TXT Sound producing:

    Seat with electrical feature under subclass 217.3 wherein the non-class
    article is an audio device (e.g., radio, phonograph, speaker, etc.).


CLS 297/217.5
TXT Enclosure:

    Seat with sound producing device under subclass 217.4 wherein the audio
    device is surrounded by walls.


CLS 297/217.6
TXT Illumination:

    Seat with electrical feature under subclass 217.3 wherein the non-class
    article is a lighting fixture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 553+ for structure
    having illumination.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 97 and 127+ for furniture lighting and
    subclasses 98, 125, and 135 for various structures with lighting.


CLS 297/217.7
TXT Mounted on accommodating platform (e.g., stairs, deck, etc.):

    Combined seat under subclass 217.1 wherein the non-class article is a
    horizontal flat surface designed to hold a seat.


CLS 297/218.1
TXT UPHOLSTERY COVER DETACHABLY CONNECTED TO FRAME:

    Device under the class definition comprising a primary covering provided
    with means to disengage from the framework.

    (1)     Note.  A covering comprises a flexible panel which substantially
    confines the cushioning element (e.g., padding, stuffing, springs, etc.) of
    the seating device to its supporting framework and also forms the occupant
    engaging surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219.1+, for a supplemental cover which overlies the upholstery cover.

    440.11, for a fabric seat component detachably connected to a supporting
    frame by a manipulated joint.

    452.58+, for an upholstered bottom or back with a fixed upholstery cover.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclass 51.1 for an upholstery cover peculiar to a sofa bed;
    subclasses 402+ for an upholstery cover on a bed bottom; subclasses 482+
    for bed clothing such as sheets, mattress covers, etc.; and subclass 692
    for upholstery covers on mattresses.


CLS 297/218.2
TXT Cover connector attached to cushion:

    Upholstery cover under subclass 218.1 wherein the flexible panel fastener
    means is secured directly to the cushion.


CLS 297/218.3
TXT Cover attached by an element mounted to the frame:

    Upholstery cover under subclass 218.1 wherein the flexible panel is secured
    to the seating device by a means affixed to the framework.


CLS 297/218.4
TXT Cover connector mounted by hem inserted elongated member (e.g., drawstring,
    bar, etc.):

    Upholstery cover under subclass 218.1 wherein the flexible panel is
    provided with a peripheral pocket having a member for securing the cover to
    the seating device.


CLS 297/218.5
TXT Cover attached to frame by separate element:

    Upholstery cover under subclass 218.1 wherein the flexible panel is secured
    to the chair frame by an outside means (e.g., bracket, lacing, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    452.59+,for a fixed cover permenently attached to the framework (e.g., by
    nails, hog rings, staples, tacks, etc.).


CLS 297/219.1
TXT DETACHABLE SUPPLEMENTAL FLEXIBLE PAD OR COVER:
    Device under the class definition comprising a protective covering formed
    of a flexible panel or cushion configured to overlie and cover an
    occupant-engaging surface of a seating device, said protective covering
    includes an attaching means thereon for securing it to a part of the
    seating device.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass and in the indented subclasses
    thereunder are covers commonly known in the art as "slipcovers".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184.1+, for weather shield or insect protector for a seating device.

    218.1+, for a primary cover detachably con-nected to the frame of a seating
    device.

    230.1+, for supplemental backs.

    250.1+, for a supplemental seating device provided with rigid member.

    440.11, for a fabric seat component detachably connected to a supporting
    frame by a manipulated joint.

    452.43, for a supplemental ventilated pad configured to rest on a primary
    bottom and/or back, wherein the pad does not usually include a means to
    attach the pad to the primary bottom and/or back.

    452.58+, for a cover which is permanently fixed         to the bottom or
    back of a seating device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 482+ for bed clothing such as sheets, mattress
    covers, etc.


CLS 297/219.11
TXT For straddle seat:
    Device under subclass 219.1 wherein the cover is configured to overlie an
    occupant-engaging surface of a seat configured to be sat astride by an
    occupant (e.g., bicycle seat, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195.1+, for particular structure of straddle seats.


CLS 297/219.12
TXT For child seat:
    Device under subclass 219.1 wherein the cover is configured to overlie a
    seating device dimensioned to support a seated child.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216.11  and 250.1+, for structures of supplemental child seats.


CLS 297/220
TXT Device under subclass 219.1 in which a portion of the seating device
    covered includes a headrest.

    (1)     Note.  Accessories for a headrest, such as headrest covers, are
    included in this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    391+,   for a headrest, per se.


CLS 297/221
TXT Device under subclass 220 wherein the headrest cover is wound on a roll or
    arranged in a stack so that as a used cover section is removed a similar
    but fresh cover section is exposed.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are covers mounted on a winding
    and reeling device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223,    for a cover which is reversible or has a replaceable section which
    may be a cover supply.

    283.4,  for a seating device, with a changeable or renewable
    occupant-engaging surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

     242,   Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 370+, 520+, and 550+
    for a reeling device, winding or unwinding device for an elongated material
    of general use.


CLS 297/222
TXT Device under subclass 221 provided with a cutting edge or blade so that the
    use section may be severed from the remaining portion of the cover.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, subclasses 6+ for a device of
    general application for manually severing material of an indefinite length.


CLS 297/223
TXT Device under subclass 219.1 wherein the cover is rearrangeable to present a
    different occupant- engaging surface, e.g., turned over or the back portion
    is interchanged with the bottom portion, or a used section of the cover can
    be removed and replaced with a fresh section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221,    for a cover for a headrest provided with a cover supply so that as
    a used cover section is removed a fresh cover section is exposed.

    283.1+, for a seating device with a changeable or renewable occupant
    engaging surface.


CLS 297/224
TXT Device under subclass 219.1 in which at least a portion of the cover is
    made of resilient or stretchable material.


CLS 297/225
TXT Device under subclass 219.1 wherein the cover forms a continuous blank of
    material comprising respective panels to cover the bottom, back, and either
    the shoulders or arm portions of the seating device, said cover being
    conformable to the contours of the seating device by shaping or folding the
    panels around said portions.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are wrap around panels stitched
    together into an integral structure to form a one-piece cover.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228,    for a one-piece bottom, back, and armrest cover forming an envelope
    which is inserted over the seating device.


CLS 297/226
TXT Device under subclass 219.1 wherein the panel is provided with a peripheral
    pocket or sleevelike member and the tie means for attaching the panel to
    the seating device includes a rod or bar inserted in said pocket or member.


CLS 297/227
TXT Device under subclass 219.1 in which a portion of the seating device
    covered includes an armrest.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is an armrest cover which forms a
    separate section from the remaining bottom or back cover, but may be
    detachably secured to the bottom or back cover when placed on the seating
    device.

    (2)     Note.  Accessories for an armrest, such as armrest covers, are also
    included in this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    411.2+, for an armrest, per se.


CLS 297/228
TXT Device under subclass 227 provided with either a bottom or back panel which
    is joined to the armrest panel to form a continuous blank of material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225,    for a wrap around one-piece bottom, back, and arm rest.


CLS 297/228.1
TXT Slipcover for bottom or back:
    Device under subclass 219.1 in which the cover is in the form of a sleeve
    having an open end for fitting over a bottom or a back of the seating
    device.


CLS 297/228.11
TXT Having flexible hem-inserted securing means    (e.g., drawstring, elastic
    band, etc.):Device under subclass 219.1 wherein the cover is provided with
    a peripheral pocket having a flexible elongated member therein, for
    securing the cover to a bottom or back of the seating device.


CLS 297/228.12
TXT Having elongated flexible free-end securing means:
    Device under subclass 219.1 including a flexible elongated member attached
    to the cover, wherein the member includes a free-end which extends
    outwardly therefrom for securing the cover to the seating device.


CLS 297/228.13
TXT Having rigid or semirigid securing member (e.g., zipper, hook, ring, snap,
    button, etc.):Device under subclass 219.1 wherein the attaching means
    includes an element made of material which is substantially nonyielding or
    which yields to a slight degree.


CLS 297/229
TXT Device under subclass 219.1 wherein the cover forms a continuous blank of
    material comprising respective panels to cover the bottom and back of the
    seating device.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are bottom and back panels
    stitched together into an integral structure to form a one-piece cover.


CLS 297/230.1
TXT SUPPLEMENTAL BACK:
    Device under the class definition comprising a back configured to be
    mounted on or to be coextended with an occupant-engaging surface of a back
    of a seating device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219.1+, for a supplemental flexible pad without a rigid support frame.

    250.1+, for rigid supplemental seats.

    352,    for a portable back with means to connect it with a subjacent
    backless bottom; e.g., bleacher seat.


CLS 297/230.11
TXT Flexible occupant back-engaging surface spans framework:
    Device under subclass 230.1 in which the supplemental back includes a rigid
    skeletal structure and an occupant-engaging surface made of a flaccid
    material mounted across the rigid skeletal structure, wherein the
    occupant-engaging surface may be in the form of a panel or a plurality of
    elongated webs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    452.63, for a bottom or back support surface comprised of individual
    elongated elements.


CLS 297/230.12
TXT Including a rigid panel:
    Device under subclass 230.1 wherein the supplemental back includes a
    continuous sheet made of material which is substantially unyieldable.


CLS 297/230.13
TXT Back and supplemental back together form occupant  back-engaging
    surface:Device under subclass 230.1 wherein the supplemental back is
    configured to extend only partially over the back of the seating device
    such that an occupant's back is engaged by both the back of the seating
    device and the supplemental back concurrently.


CLS 297/230.14
TXT Including a means to adjust supplemental back relative to a seat
    back:Device under subclass 230.1 in which the supplemental back includes a
    means for varying the position of the supplemental back relative to the
    back of the seating device.


CLS 297/232
TXT Device under the class definition in which the spatial or functional
    relationship of two or more seats is involved.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63+,    for adjacent seats having components reorientable to form a single
    bed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 8+ for seating
    structure specialized to theatre or stadium use, and subclasses 182+ for a
    residual stepped structure of general utility.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 202+ for occupant-propelled vehicles with
    means for carrying additional passengers.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclass 64 for seating
    arrangements in vehicle bodies.

    472,    Amusement Devices, for an amusement device proper therefor which
    may have plural seats.


CLS 297/233
TXT Device under subclass 232 wherein the seats are connected and movable
    within the connection from a separated position of independent use to an
    adjacent position in which the several bottoms form a single, continuous
    coplanar seating surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    234+,   for plural seats which are relatively movable to effect a storage
    of one of the seats.

    248+,   for plural independent seats having means to join the seats in a
    side by side manner.


CLS 297/234
TXT Device under subclass 232 wherein a shifting of one of the seats results in
    either that seat or another seat being inoperatively situated.


CLS 297/235
TXT Device under subclass 234 wherein both seats shift to effect storage of
    one, e.g., to one beneath the other.


CLS 297/236
TXT Device under subclass 234 wherein the shifting seat in its inoperative
    situation is located below or is confined by the bottom of the other seat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188.09+, for receptacles of general utility directly under the seat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 31 for receptacles type hat supports
    mounted on the underside of a seat.


CLS 297/237
TXT Device under subclass 236 wherein the shifting seat in its operative
    position serves in place of the seat which stored it.


CLS 297/238
TXT Device under subclass 234 wherein the shifting seat is in its inoperative
    position situated within the back of the other seat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188.04+, for a seat back having thereon a receptacle of general utility.


CLS 297/239
TXT Device under subclass 232 wherein two or more seats are dimensioned or
    constructed so that components of one form a recess into which components
    of the other project and fit in telescopic relation to form a superposed
    storage stack either in a graduated or regular series of seats.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    for seats superposed and detachably connected to a subjacent table,
    stool, or walker.


CLS 297/240
TXT Device under subclass 232 wherein one of the seats is mounted to move with
    respect to the other (in use position) about a vertical axis.


CLS 297/241
TXT Device under subclass 240 wherein one of the seats is supported by a member
    rolling on the floor.


CLS 297/242
TXT Device under subclass 240 wherein two or more of the seats are rotatable
    about the same axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241,    for relatively rotatable seats wherein one seat is provided with a
    floor engaging roller.


CLS 297/243
TXT Device under subclass 232 wherein the seats are disposed one behind the
    other facing in the same direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
    195.11, for tandem straddle seats.


CLS 297/244
TXT Device under subclass 232 wherein the seats are mounted back to back facing
    in opposite directions.


CLS 297/245
TXT Device under subclass 232 wherein the seats are mounted front to front,
    opposite each other so that the occupants confront each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244,    for seats which are adjacent but laterally offset from each other
    so that the occupants face in opposite directions, e.g., "love seats".


CLS 297/246
TXT Device under subclass 245 wherein the seats are wheel mounted with means to
    limit the rotation of the wheel in each direction, to effect a to-and-fro
    motion.


CLS 297/247
TXT Device under subclass 245 wherein the seats are mounted on a curved support
    for movement to-and-fro.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258.1+, for a single rocker mounted seat.


CLS 297/248
TXT Device under subclass 232 comprising means for joining a plurality of
    independent seats to or with respect to each other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclass 64 for a
    horizontally supported planar surface made up of laterally connected
    individual units.


CLS 297/249
TXT Device under subclass 248 wherein the seats are joined laterally of each
    other by means which permit them to be turned toward or from each other so
    as to face respectively on the perimeter of a portion of a circle, or on a
    circle of different diameter or a straight line.


CLS 297/250.1
TXT SUPPLEMENTAL SEAT (E.G., CHILD SEAT, ETC.):
    Device under class definition configured to be detachably mounted to an
    occupant-engaging surface of a seating device.

    (1)     Note.  Supplemental pads having ventilating means are excluded from
    this subclass. See search notes under this subclass for such structures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216.11, for a supplemental child seat having a means for absorbing a force
    acting on the seating device, wherein the acting force may have resulted
    from a sudden acceleration or deceleration of a vehicle.

    219.1+, for a detachable pad or cover having an attaching means for
    connecting it to an occupant-engaging surface of a seating device, and
    219.12 for a supplemental pad for a child's seat.

    230.1+, for a supplemental back.

    352,    for a portable back with a bottom attacher.

    452.43+, for supplemental pad having ventilat-ing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclass 239 for an aperture
    seat either superposed over another aperture seat, or provided with a means
    to connect it to another aperture seat; subclasses 578.1+ for a seat
    detachably connected to a bathing tub.


CLS 297/251
TXT Device under subclass 250.1 wherein the auxiliary seat is mounted on an arm
    of the other seat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252,    for a similar device provided with clamps for securing it to an
    underlying board such as a bleacher or boat seat, wherein the clamps
    frequently are adaptable for securing the device to armrests of an
    underlying seat such as a barber chair.


CLS 297/252
TXT Device under subclass 250.1 wherein the other seat comprises a horizontal
    plank and the auxiliary bottom is secured thereto by a clamp extending in a
    front-to-rear direction and encompassing the plank.


CLS 297/253
TXT Device under subclass 250.1 wherein the attaching means includes means on
    the auxiliary seat temporarily inserted in the joint between the bottom and
    back of the primary seat and serving to retain the auxiliary in use
    position.


CLS 297/254
TXT Device under subclass 250.1 wherein the auxiliary bottom is joined to the
    back of the other seat.


CLS 297/255
TXT Device under subclass 254 wherein the auxiliary seat may be compacted, as
    for storage or transport.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16.1+,  for a collapsible chair comprising relatively folding bottom, back,
    and legs.

    350+,   for a laterally collapsing or folding back.


CLS 297/256
TXT Device under subclass 255 wherein the auxiliary seat includes a stiff
    platelike bottom.


CLS 297/256.1
TXT Adjustable to plural operative positions:
    Device under subclass 250.1 including a means for varying the position of
    the supplemental seat relative to the seating device such that a seated
    occupant can be supported at various distinct positions.


CLS 297/256.11
TXT Vertically:
    Device under subclass 256.1 wherein the supplemental seat is adjustably
    movable relative to the seating device to at least two positions along a
    vertical line.


CLS 297/256.12
TXT About a vertical axis; i.e., rotates:
    Device under subclass 256.1 wherein the means for varying the position of
    the supplemental seat relative to the seating device is configured to
    permit the supplemental seat to pivot or rotate relative to the seating
    device about a vertical axis.


CLS 297/256.13
TXT Tiltable:
    Device under subclass 256.1 wherein the means for varying the position of
    the supplemental seat relative to the seating device is configured to
    permit the supplemental seat to be set or inclined at different angles with
    respect to the seating device.


CLS 297/256.14
TXT Reversible:
    Device under subclass 256.1 wherein the means for varying the position of
    the supplemental seat relative to the seating device includes structure
    which permits the supplemental seat to be attached to the seating device in
    a forwardly or rearwardly facing direction.


CLS 297/256.15
TXT Having a front guard or barrier:
    Device under subclass 250.1 wherein the supplemental seat includes an
    occupant-restraining structure having a crossmember configured to extend
    above and across the lap and in front of a seated occupant so as to assist
    in restraining the seated occupant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    467,    for a crotch strap or post.

    487     and 488, for front guards or barriers on primary seats.


CLS 297/256.16
TXT Detachably mounted to a support base:
    Device under subclasses 250.1 wherein the supplemental seat includes a base
    member which rests upon the primary seating device and to which the
    supplemental seat is removably attached.


CLS 297/256.17
TXT For shopping cart:
    Device under subclass 250.1 wherein the supplemental seat is configured for
    mounting to a particular area of a wheeled shopping cart.


CLS 297/257
TXT Device under subclass 232 wherein one of the seats, or a portion thereof,
    is mounted to be displaced relative to the other seat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for suspended facing seats comprising interpivoted bottoms, backs,
    and a common footrest, which interpivoted components move relative to each
    other as the seats oscillate.

    240+,   for seats which are rotatable relative to each other.


CLS 297/258.1
TXT ROCKER-MOUNTED:

    Device under the class definition comprising a seat which is (a) attached
    to arcuate floor or base contacting member, (b) convexed on its lower
    surface to permit it to sway back and forth, or (c) resiliently mounted on
    a base supporting structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for an adjustable leg-to-rocker connection in collapsible chair.

    32+,    for a collapsible chair with a folding rocker, and especially
    subclass 33 for a rocker which disengages from a leg to permit folding.

    247,    for plural face-to-face seats which oscillate on rockers.

    272.1,  for an accessory used on a rocker.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 105+ for a cradle with a rocker base.

    248,    Supports, subclass 143 for a receptacle supporting rocker stand.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 1.175+ for a progressing rocker-type
    simulated vehicle; subclass 1.193 for a simulated vehicle of the platform
    rocking-type propelled by body motion; subclass 47.1 for a vehicle body
    mounted on wheels so that the body is rocked as the wheels rotate during
    travel.

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclass 102 for an amusement
    device appropriate therefor, consisting of an animal simulation having
    rider seat means supported on an arcuate rocking base, and subclass 114 for
    an amusement seesaw having an arcuate base.


CLS 297/259.1
TXT Bottom connected to rocker for movement supplemental to rocking motion:

    Device under subclass 258.1 wherein a movement in addition to the swaying
    motion of the chair is transmitted to the seat of the body supporting means
    by means which join the seat to the rocker.


CLS 297/259.2
TXT Providing reclining motion:

    Device under subclass 259.1 wherein the transmittal movement to the seat
    causes the body supporting means to move from a normal upright sitting
    position to one or more tilted positions.


CLS 297/259.3
TXT Providing swinging motion:

    Device under subclass 259.1 wherein the transmittal movement to the seat
    causes the body supporting means to oscillate back and forth during the
    rocking motion.

    (1)     Note. In this subclass are devices in which the bottom is suspended
    from a supporting structure arising from the rocker to permit oscillation
    of the bottom in conjunction with rocking motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273+,   for suspended seats.


CLS 297/259.4
TXT Spring attached:

    Device under subclass 259.1 comprising an elastic means joining the seat to
    the rocker to provide a bouncing motion of the body supporting means during
    the rocking motion.

    (1)     Note. In this subclass are devices in which a spring is interposed
    between the bottom and rocker so that the bottom yields during the rocking
    motion.


CLS 297/260.1
TXT With means to impart rocking motion:

    Device under subclass 258.1 provided with a mechanism which, when actuated,
    effects an initial rocking motion to the chair.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 108+ for a cradle having a rocking device.


CLS 297/260.2
TXT Motor operated:

    Device under subclass 260.1 comprising a power driving means to initiate
    and maintain the rocking motion of the chair.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclass 119 for a motor operated
    swing appropriate therefor.


CLS 297/260.3
TXT Actuating footrest:

    Device under subclass 260.1 wherein the rocking motion of the chair is
    induced by the movement of the foot supporting means.


CLS 297/261.1
TXT Track-mounted rocker (e.g., platform rocker):

    Device under subclass 258.1 provided with a rocker contacting panel or set
    of ways upon which the rockers oscillate.

    (1)     Note. These devices are known in the art as "platform rockers".


CLS 297/261.2
TXT Providing grooved guide:

    Device under subclass 261.1 wherein the contact between the rocker and
    track is an intermating of an arcuate channel and an arcuate edge.


CLS 297/261.3
TXT With anti-friction means:

    Device under subclass 261.2 provided with roller means disposed between the
    rocker and track to facilitate the rocking motion therebe-tween.


CLS 297/261.4
TXT Rocker pivotally connected to track:

    Device under subclass 261.1 comprising a member joining the rocker to the
    track which has a pivot about which the rocker swings.


CLS 297/262.1
TXT Meshed teeth engagement:

    Device under subclass 261.1 wherein the rocker and track are each formed
    either as a section of projections or as a section of recesses, and wherein
    the rolling contact of the rocker and track is an intermating of these
    sections.


CLS 297/263.1
TXT Rotatable about vertical axis to reorientate chair:

    Device under subclass 261.1 wherein the track is mounted to move around a
    vertically extending axis to permit the chair to face different directions.


CLS 297/263.2
TXT Having anti-friction means to facilitate rotation:

    Device under subclass 263.1 provided with roller means (e.g., roller, ball
    bearing) disposed between the track and the base of the chair to facilitate
    the rotation of the track upon the base.


CLS 297/264.1
TXT Spring return to neutral position:

    Device under subclass 261.1 in which an elastic element is connected to the
    track to bias the rocker to one position relative to the track and
    resiliently urge the rocker to this position when it has been displaced.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332,    for a device which biases a bottom to an inoperative position.


CLS 297/265.1
TXT Coil spring:

    Device under subclass 264.1 wherein the elastic element is a spring formed
    as a helix.


CLS 297/266.1
TXT Extensible:

    Device under subclass 265.1 wherein the displacement of the rocker
    elongates the helix.


CLS 297/267.1
TXT With opposing compressible coil spring:

    Device under subclass 266.1 provided with an additional coil spring which
    squeezes together upon displacement of the rocker to resist the elongating
    movement of the extensible coil spring.


CLS 297/268.1
TXT Leaf spring:

    Device under subclass 264.1 wherein the elastic element comprises a layer
    of flexible metallic strip.


CLS 297/268.2
TXT Transversely extending spring (e.g., torsion bar):

    Device under subclass 264.1 wherein the elastic element is disposed from
    side to side of the seat so that one end of the elastic element is adjacent
    to one rocker and the other end of the elastic element is adjacent to the
    other rocker, such that the displacement of the rocker twists the elastic
    element about its longitudinal axis.


CLS 297/269.1
TXT With means to lock rockers to track:

    Device under subclass 261.1 which includes a device to fasten or immobilize
    the rocker with respect to the track.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    328,    for means to hold a tiltable bottom and back unit in plural
    occupant supporting positions.


CLS 297/270.1
TXT With means to limit or inhibit rocking motion:

    Device under subclass 258.1 provided with a mechanism to confine the
    rocking motion to a prescribed arc of travel, or to prevent the rocking
    motion altogether.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131,    for a rocker retractable to an inoperative position.

    133,    for a detachable rocker.

    264.1+, for spring means to limit the rocking of a track mounted rocker.

    269.1+, for means to immobilize a track mounted rocker.

    310,    for means to control the rearward tipping of a chair.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclass 106 for a cradle having a rocker base provided with
    locking means.


CLS 297/270.2
TXT Pivotal stop:

    Device under subclass 270.1 wherein the means to limit or inhibit rocking
    motion rotates about an axis extending therethrough.


CLS 297/270.3
TXT Plural stops:

    Device under subclass 270.1 wherein more than one limiting or immobilizing
    means are utilized.


CLS 297/270.4
TXT To plural operative positions:

    Device under subclass 270.1 wherein the limiting or immobilizing means is
    operable to hold the chair in one of a plurality of distinct positions of
    use.


CLS 297/270.5
TXT Stop engages ground:

    Device under subclass 270.1 wherein the limiting or immobilizing means
    moves to contact the ground surface to limit the rocking movement.


CLS 297/271.1
TXT With attached footrest or legrest:

    Device under subclass 258.1 provided with a support connected to the chair
    structure and adapted for holding the foot or leg of an occupant of the
    rocking chair.


CLS 297/271.2
TXT Mounted on roller or wheel:

    Device under subclass 271.1 wherein the footrest or legrest is supported by
    a rotating means (e.g., caster, roller, wheel) to permit an easy
    reciprocating movement of said footrest or legrest when the chair is
    oscillating.

    (1)     Note. In this subclass are legrests provided with a wheel or
    rocking support which oscillates in conjunction with the rocking motion of
    the chair.


CLS 297/271.3
TXT Adjustable:

    Device under subclass 271.1 wherein the footrest or legrest may be held in
    plural positions to accommodate occupant of different sizes.


CLS 297/271.4
TXT Pivotally connected to bottom or support frame:

    Device under subclass 271.1 wherein the footrest or legrest is hingedly
    secured to the seat or support structure of the chair.


CLS 297/271.5
TXT With floor or ground contacting rocker:

    Device under subclass 258.1 wherein the convexed surface which permits the
    chair to rock, directly engages the surface which supports the chair.


CLS 297/271.6
TXT Having curved rail:

    Device under subclass 271.5 provided with a rocker which is in a shape of a
    bow.


CLS 297/272.1
TXT Rocker attachment:

    Device under subclass 258.1 comprising an accessory used on a rocker.


CLS 297/272.2
TXT Cushion or shoe:

    Device under subclass 272.1 comprising a strip of resilient rubber attached
    to the underside of the rocker to protect against or absorb the shock of
    the rocker.


CLS 297/272.3
TXT Inflatable:

    Device under subclass 272.2 wherein the cushion or shoe comprises a tube of
    resilient material (e.g., soft rubber) adapted to be inflated with a fluid
    (e.g., air).


CLS 297/272.4
TXT Tip, guard, or shield:

    Device under subclass 272.1 comprising a protective device to be secured to
    the rear end of the rocker to prevent damage to furniture by accidental
    contact therewith.


CLS 297/273
TXT Device under the class definition in which a depending hanger is mounted to
    swing to and fro, and wherein the hanger supports, or is supported by, a
    component of a seat other than a bottom, or has such other component
    threaded thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    245+,   for plural face to face seats suspended to oscillate.

    269.1,  for a seat hanging or depending from a rocker mounted supporting
    structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 120+ for a freely-suspended swinging hammock
    adapted to support the body of an occupant in prone position.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 142+ for a suspended
    platform with elevating and lowering means; and subclass 150 for a
    suspended platform.

    248,    Supports, subclass 370 for an oscillating support surface carried
    by stand mounted depending links; and subclasses 317+ for a support surface
    suspended to oscillate.

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclasses 118+ for a swing
    appropriate therefor which has a compound or erratic movement, or which is
    moved to-and-fro by a  mechanical  means.


CLS 297/274
TXT Device under subclass 273 in which the device suspended is constructed to
    engage and support an infant or small child over a large area of its body
    and is characterized by either a supple body support provided with leg
    apertures or by a flexible support adapted to engage and conform to the
    shape of an occupant's body.


CLS 297/275
TXT Device under subclass 274 comprising a flexible, girth-encircling band or
    article of clothing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    464+,   and especially subclasses 468+ for a belt or harness for holding an
    occupant in a seat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 69+ for a body garment of general application.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 770 for tethering a human being,
    subclass 771 for a tether attached to a vehicle, and subclass 857 for a
    body- or appendage-encircling collar or band for a human being.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclasses 157+ for a baby or patient
    carrier mounted on a belt or article of clothing.


CLS 297/276
TXT Device under subclass 273 wherein the depending hanger is connected to the
    bottom and wherein an armrest is threaded on the hanger.


CLS 297/277
TXT Device under subclass 273 wherein the component is a back.


CLS 297/278
TXT Device under subclass 277 wherein the connection of the suspender to the
    back may be altered to allow the back to change its position with respect
    to the bottom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    353+,   for a movable back, per se.


CLS 297/279
TXT Device under subclass 277 wherein an additional hanger is provided and is
    connected to a leg rest or foot rest.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    423.1+, for a leg rest or footrest, per se.


CLS 297/280
TXT Device under subclass 277 wherein an additional hanger is provided and
    connected to either an armrest or a member extending upwardly from and
    normal to the bottom at the side of the bottom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281,    for a seat suspended from an armrest or side frame.


CLS 297/281
TXT Device under subclass 273 wherein the adjunctive rest to which the hanger
    is connected is either an armrest or a member extending upwardly from and
    normal to the bottom at the side of the bottom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280,    for a seat suspended from a back and an armrest or side frame.


CLS 297/282
TXT Device under subclass 281 wherein the bottom is supported from a suspender
    which hangs down from an armrest, and wherein the armrest is supported by a
    means which extends downwardly from the armrest to the floor or ground.


CLS 297/283.1
TXT CHANGEABLE OR REVERSIBLE SUPPORTING SURFACE:

    Device under the class definition wherein an occupant supporting component
    is provided with a plurality of occupant contacting surfaces and is
    further provided with a means permitting the surfaces to be selectively
    moved into an occupant supporting position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for a seat rotatable as a unit about a horizontal axis to expose
    alternative support surfaces.

    92+,    for an interchangeable and reversible bottom and back.

    219.1+, for a pad or cover for a seat component particularly subclass 223
    for a slipcover having a reversible or replaceable section. Art in these
    subclasses (219.1+) is distinguished from the art in this subclass (283.1)
    in that the former comprises a cover for a primary or basic support
    surface, while the latter comprises a changeable or reversible primary
    support surface.


CLS 297/283.2
TXT Back and bottom supporting surface:

    Device under subclass 283.1 wherein the occupant supporting component,
    provided with a plurality of occupant contacting surfaces, is constructed
    to support the back and bottom of the occupant therein.


CLS 297/283.3
TXT Back supporting surfaces:

    Device under subclass 283.1 wherein the occupant supporting component,
    provided with a plurality of occupant contacting surfaces, is constructed
    to support the back of an occupant therein.


CLS 297/283.4
TXT Headrest:

    Device under subclass 283.1 wherein the occupant supporting component,
    provided with a plurality of occupant contacting surfaces, is constructed
    to support the head  of an occupant therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221+,   for a headrest with a supply of disposable covers.

    391+,   for a means to support the head of an occupant of a seating device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 118 for armrest and headrest supports.


CLS 297/284.1
TXT BOTTOM OR BACK WITH MEANS TO ALTER CONTOUR:

    Device under the class definition comprising a bottom or back with a means
    to change the profile of its occupant engaging surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    452.21+, for a contoured bottom.

    452.29+, for a contoured back.


CLS 297/284.11
TXT Located at the front of the seat bottom:
    Device under subclass 284.1 wherein the contour of the front portion of the
    seat bottom is changed.


CLS 297/284.2
TXT Having adjustment means for seat surface tension:
    Device under subclass 284.1 having a flexible occupant engaging surface
    with means to shorten or lengthen the surface material intermediate a frame
    on which it is mounted.


CLS 297/284.3
TXT Having a plurality of adjacent relatively adjustable sections:Device under
    subclass 284.1 wherein the bottom or back comprises supporting means made
    up of a plurality of adjacent sections with means to adjust the individual
    sections relative to one another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312,    for a bottom or resiliently mounted, independently movable sections.


CLS 297/284.4
TXT Providing support for lower back (i.e., lumbar) region:
    Device under subclass 284.1 wherein the adjustable contour is provided in
    the area adapted to contact the lower back region of a seated occupant.


CLS 297/284.5
TXT Portable with seat attacher:
    Device under subclass 284.4 in which the lumbar support includes means for
    detachably connecting it to a seat so as to be movable from association
    with one seat to association with another seat.


CLS 297/284.6
TXT Having a fluent material within flexible container:

    Device under subclass 284.4 in which the lumbar support has a variable
    volume controlled by introduction or removal of a fluid (e.g., with gas,
    water, air, etc.).


CLS 297/284.7
TXT Rectilinear vertical adjustment:
    Device under subclass 284.4 wherein the lumbar support is movable to
    selected positions along a substantially straight line outwardly from a
    horizontal plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284.5,  for a lumbar support detachably secured to a chair component by a
    strap, which strap may selectively secure the headrest in vertically
    adjusted position.


CLS 297/284.8
TXT Rectilinear horizontal adjustment:
    Device under subclass 284.4 wherein the lumbar support is movable to a
    selected position along a substantially straight line outwardly from a
    vertical plane.


CLS 297/284.9
TXT Providing support for the sides of a seated occupant:
    Device under 284.1 wherein the contour of the bottom or back is adjustable
    in a manner such that the longitudinal side edges of the seat provide side
    support and prohibit excessive sideways movement of an occupant.


CLS 297/285
TXT Device under the class definition comprising an elastic, pliable, flexible,
    or springy apparatus associated with a generally upright support member
    whereby displacement of the support member is resisted or countered in
    response to a force exerted by an occupant thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a back mounted on another chair or seat
    component, as a bottom, which is resiliently mounted so that movement
    thereof results in movement of the back.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    339,    for a portable back with means for attaching it to a bottom.

    353+,   for a movable back without resilient support means.

    452.1+, for a resilient back, per se, and see the search notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 652+ for a cushion, per se.

    267,    Spring Devices, appropriate subclasses, for a spring, per se.


CLS 297/286
TXT Device under subclass 285 wherein the spring means is operatively
    associated with or comprises an armrest portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359+,   for a seat having a tilting back held in adjusted position by an
    armrest pivoted to the back and carrying a latch or holder.

    411.2+, for an armrest in a static structure.


CLS 297/287
TXT Device under subclass 286 including a one-piece leg and armrest.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    411.42, for integral front leg and armrest.


CLS 297/288
TXT Device under subclass 287 including a one-piece armrest and rear leg.


CLS 297/289
TXT Device under subclass 286 wherein the spring means comprises a sliding
    piece moved by or against an elastic means, e.g., coil, within a vessel or
    about a rod.


CLS 297/290
TXT Device under subclass 286 wherein the armrest portion comprises an elastic
    leaf or rod.


CLS 297/291
TXT Device under subclass 285 wherein the back swings or turns about an axis
    and an elastic device yields to permit a turning in either of two opposing
    directions in response to occupant pressure and returns the back to its
    original position upon release of that pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 582 for a support surface pivoted intermediate
    plural springs.


CLS 297/292
TXT Device under subclass 285 where the coil spring encompasses a pivot shaft
    or rod.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 597 for a support surface biased about a
    stationary, horizontal axis by a rigid spring which surrounds the axis.


CLS 297/293
TXT Device under subclass 285 wherein said elastic means comprises a
    helically-shaped element, which is disposed about a pivot about which the
    back moves, or is itself this pivot.


CLS 297/294
TXT Device under subclass 285 wherein the means providing resiliency includes a
    one-piece springy leg and a bottom or a back.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    287,    for a resilient one-piece arm and leg.

    447.1+, for a chair having a back member   integral with a front leg.


CLS 297/295
TXT Device under subclass 294 wherein the one-piece structure includes, with a
    leg, both a bottom and a back.


CLS 297/296
TXT Device under subclass 285 wherein the springy back support comprises a
    flexible, generally vertical lever having a transverse elastic quality.


CLS 297/297
TXT Device under subclass 296 wherein the bar or rod is immovably connected to
    the seat bottom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    325+,   for a rigidly connected bottom and back which tilt as a unit.

    344.1+, for a rigidly connected bottom and back which move horizontally or
    vertically as a unit.

    445.1+, for a chair structure having relatively immovable components
    comprising a back, bottom, and legs.

    452.1+, for a relatively immovable bottom and back.


CLS 297/298
TXT Device under subclass 296 wherein the bar or rod connects with the seat
    bottom to provide for multiple use positions of the back relative to the
    bottom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    354.12+, for a nonresiliently supported back tiltable to plural use
    positions.


CLS 297/299
TXT Device under subclass 285 wherein an elastic means connects one end of the
    back to its supporting structure.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a one-piece bottom-and-back supported as
    indicated. See the search notes to subclasses 452.12+ for loci of other
    one-piece bottom-and-backs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 371+
    for framed flexible panels and subclasses 382+ for fabric-to-frame
    fastening means.


CLS 297/300.1
TXT Back and seat adjust simultaneously:

    Opposed back movement under subclass 285 wherein the elastic apparatus
    opposes movement of the upright such that when force is exerted to the
    support by the occupant, the bottom moves in at least one (x, y, or z)
    direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    344.12+, for a bottom and back unit which is movable vertically, without
    any resilient support.

    452.1+, for a static bottom and back unit, per se.

    (1)     Note. This subclass contains chairs wherein the upright support
    movement is accompanied with movement of the bottom in a non-fixed angular
    relationship.


CLS 297/300.2
TXT Back tilts while seat inclination adjusts:

    Simultaneously adjusted back and seat under subclass 300.1 wherein the
    bottom moves to an angular position relative to a generally horizontally
    plane, as the upright support pivots.


CLS 297/300.3
TXT Fluid-spring:

    Simultaneously adjusted back and seat under subclass 300.2 wherein the
    resilient member, by way of gas or liquid, resists the tilting of the back
    (i.e. hydraulic or pneumatic cylinder).


CLS 297/300.4
TXT Torsion bar or torsion spring:

    Simultaneously adjusted back and seat under subclass 300.2 wherein the
    resilient member is a solid material considerably longer than it is wide,
    or is a corkscrew-type that twists to resist the tilting of the back.


CLS 297/300.5
TXT Coil spring:

    Simultaneously adjusted back and seat under subclass 300.2 where the
    resilient member is a tight helix, and whereby movement is countered by
    compression or expansion.


CLS 297/300.6
TXT Including back movement limiting device:

    Simultaneously adjusted back and seat under subclass 300.2 further
    including means to temporarily suspend motion of the back support.


CLS 297/300.7
TXT Adjustable:

    Limiting device under subclass 300.6 wherein the means to temporarily
    suspend motion of the back support can be changed to plural positions.


CLS 297/300.8
TXT Manually:

    Adjustable limiting device under subclass 300.7 wherein the adjustable
    means to temporarily suspend motion of the back support is manipulated by
    the seated occupant by pulling, pushing, or rotating an operating handle.


CLS 297/301.1
TXT Back adjust independent of seat:

    Opposed back movement under subclass 285 wherein the elastic member opposes
    movement

    of the upright support independent of the bottom.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains chairs wherein the bottom support is
    fixed or moves independent of the upright support movement.


CLS 297/301.2
TXT Fluid-spring:

    Opposed back movement under subclass 301.1 wherein the resilient member, by
    way of gas or liquid, resists the tilting of the back (i.e. hydraulic or
    pneumatic cylinder).


CLS 297/301.3
TXT Torsion bar or torsion spring:

    Opposed back movement under subclass 301.1 wherein the resilient member is
    a solid material considerably longer than it is wide, or is a
    corkscrew-type that twists to resist the tilting of the back.


CLS 297/301.4
TXT Coil spring:

    Opposed back movement under subclass 300.1 where the resilient member is
    helical, and whereby movement is countered by compression or expansion.


CLS 297/301.5
TXT Including back movement limiting device:

    Opposed back movement under subclass 301.1, further including a means to
    temporarily suspend motion of the back support.


CLS 297/301.6
TXT Adjustable:

    Limiting device under subclass 301.5 wherein the means to temporarily
    suspend motion of the back support can be changed to plural positions.


CLS 297/301.7
TXT Manually:

    Adjustable limiting device under subclass 301.5 wherein the adjustable
    means to temporarily suspend motion of the back support is manipulated by
    the seated occupant by pulling, pushing, or rotating an operating handle.


CLS 297/302.1
TXT Back and bottom adjust in a fixed relationship:

    Opposed back movement under subclass 285 wherein the upright support and
    bottom are integrally fixed as a unit, and the elastic member opposes
    movement of the unit when force is exerted to the support by the occupant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264.1+, for a track mounted rocker where a spring returns a seat to a
    neutral position.

    325+,   for a bottom and back unit tiltable without elastic opposition.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains chairs wherein the upright support
    and the bottom support move in a fixed angular relationship (i.e, a 90_
    angle).


CLS 297/302.2
TXT Fluid-spring:

    Opposed back and bottom movement under subclass 302.1 wherein the resilient
    member, by way of gas or liquid, resists the tilting (i.e. hydraulic or
    pneumatic cylinder).


CLS 297/302.3
TXT Torsion bar or torsion spring:

    Opposed back movement under subclass 302.1 wherein the resilient member is
    a solid material considerably longer than it is wide, or is a
    corkscrew-type that twists to resist the tilting of the back.


CLS 297/302.4
TXT Coil spring:

    Opposed back and bottom movement under subclass 302.1 where the resilient
    member is helical, and whereby movement is countered by compression or
    expansion.


CLS 297/302.5
TXT Including back movement limiting device:

    Opposed back movement under subclass 302.1, further including a means to
    temporarily suspend motion of the back support.


CLS 297/302.6
TXT Adjustable:

    Limiting device under subclass 302.5 wherein the means to temporarily
    suspend motion of the back support can be changed to plural positions.


CLS 297/302.7
TXT Manually:

    Adjustable limiting device under subclass 302.6 wherein the adjustable
    means to temporarily suspend motion of the back support is manipulated by
    the seated occupant by pulling, pushing, or rotating an operating handle.


CLS 297/303.1
TXT Adjustable resistance:

    Elastic member under subclass 285 in which the apparatus can be modified to
    vary displacement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, appropriate subclasses for adjustable springs, per
    se.


CLS 297/303.2
TXT Fluid Spring:

    Opposed back and bottom movement under subclass 303.1 wherein the resilient
    member, by way of gas or liquid, resists the tilting (i.e. hydraulic or
    pneumatic cylinder).


CLS 297/303.3
TXT Torsion bar or torsion spring:

    Elastic member under subclass 303.1 wherein the resilient member is a solid
    material considerably longer than it is wide, or is a corkscrew- type that
    twists to resist the tilting of the back.


CLS 297/303.4
TXT Coil spring:

    Elastic member under subclass 303.1 where the resilient member is a tight
    helix, and whereby movement is countered by compression or expansion.


CLS 297/303.5
TXT Coaxial adjustment member extends through coil:

    Helical coil under subclass 303.4 wherein the apparatus to vary
    displacement is mounted within the helical spring and abuts against the
    helical spring to compress or expand the coil.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 577 for similar adjusting means not restricted
    to a chair or seat.


CLS 297/307
TXT Device under subclass 285 wherein the back is adjustable vertically and
    wherein the plane of the back in any position of adjustment is parallel to
    every position of adjustment.


CLS 297/308
TXT Device under subclass 307 wherein the back and the bottom move as a unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    344.12+, for a bottom-and-back unit which is movable vertically, without
    any resilient support.

    452.1+, for a static bottom-and-back unit, per se.


CLS 297/309
TXT Device under subclass 307 wherein the back is supported by the bottom and
    received its resilient support therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 560+ for a resilient support.


CLS 297/310
TXT Device under the class definition including a chair provided with means
    mounted on the chair to prevent the chair from falling over backwards,
    which means either (1) prevents any tipping movement, or (2) permits a
    limited amount of tipping but prevents tipping beyond the set limit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270.1+, for means to limit or immobilize the rocking motion of a rocker
    mounted chair.

    325+,   for a bottom and a back articulated to a base member and tiltable
    as a unit relative to the base member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 165+ for a prop
    pivoted to a ladder to prevent tipping of the ladder.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 351+ for a prop to hold an article from
    falling against the action of gravity.


CLS 297/311
TXT Device under the class definition wherein means are provided to displace or
    permit displacement of the bottom relative to the other components of a
    seating device or relative to a base member by means of an articulation
    between the bottom and the other components or between the bottom and the
    base member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for a seat wherein components, including a bottom, are rotatable a
    portion of a revolution about a horizontal axis to expose an additional
    supporting surface.

    19+,    for a collapsible chair having a movable bottom with means to hold
    the bottom in plural operative configurations between a collapsed position
    and a fully extended position.

    62,     for a chair having parts, including a bottom, which are
    repositioned to provide stacked bunks.

    65,     for adjacent seats wherein the bottom of one seat moves
    horizontally responsive to the reclining of its back.

    68+,    for a leg or footrest interconnected to move relative to a bottom
    and concurrent with a bottom.

    105+,   for a displaceable bottom which exposes a supplemental body support.

    119+,   for a bottom movable to convert a chair or seat to a table.

    135+,   for a movable bottom combined with a table.

    233,    for a seat having components, including a bottom, which are
    rearrangeable to plural seats, or wherein a bottom is movable from a nonuse
    position to a use position complementary to another seat.

    234,    for an additional bottom supported from another seat in use
    position which moves from the use position to a nonuse position.

    240+,   for plural seats in which the bottoms are relatively rotatable.

    261.1+, for a bottom adjustably mounted on rockers.

    273+,   for a suspended oscillating seat connected to or through an
    adjunctive rest.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 477+ for a jack-type device by fluid
    pumped from a reservoir.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 111+ for an intermittent
    grip type mechanical movement of general utility, and subclasses 640+ for a
    gear train, particularly subclass 424.8 for screw and nut gearing.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclasses for a
    motor actuator of general utility.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, for rotary expansible chamber
    motors, per se.


CLS 297/312
TXT Device under subclass 311 wherein the bottom comprises two or more
    separately movable parts, each provided with means which elastically yields
    under a load.

    (1)     Note.  A seat bottom comprising two or more resiliently mounted
    independently movable support sections is in this subclass.  See (2) Note
    to the definition of subclass 452.1.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201,    for a straddle seat comprising sectional or split relatively
    movable seating surfaces.


CLS 297/313
TXT Device under subclass 311 wherein the bottom moves to various angles
    relative to a horizontal plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165+,   for a tilting seat having a table therebehind, where both are
    independently vertically adjustable.

    167+,   for a tilting seat with a table therebehind.

    195.1+, for a tiltable straddle seat.

    273+,   for a suspended oscillating seat connected to or through an
    adjunctive rest.

    284.1+, for a bottom with means to alter its contour.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 371+ for a tilting support surface of a stand.


CLS 297/314
TXT Device under subclass 313 wherein the angular movement of the bottom is
    about an axis extending front to rear of the bottom.


CLS 297/315
TXT Device under subclass 314 provided with a back which moves sideways to a
    collapsed nonuse position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for a collapsible chair with a laterally folding armrest.

    42+,    for a laterally folding bottom, back, and legs.

    350+,   for a laterally folding back or back support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 240+ for a swinging or folding shelf which may
    fold laterally.


CLS 297/316
TXT Device under subclass 313 provided with a back joined to the bottom so that
    movement of either the bottom or the back causes the other to move at the
    same time and to change its position with respect to the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83+,    for relatively and concurrently moving bottom and back with an
    interconnected and relatively movable footrest.

    92+,    for interchangeable and reversible bottom and back.

    95+,    for a movable back which tilts the bottom oppositely as the back
    pivots reversibly as to the bottom.

    309,    for resiliently supported bottom and back which are relatively
    movable.

    340+,   for a nontilting bottom interconnected with a back for relative
    concurrent movement.


CLS 297/317
TXT Device under subclass 316 provided with pin and slot, guideways, or
    equivalent bearing means which permits the bottom to glide to an inclined
    position advanced of its initial position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    314+,   for a nontilting bottom which moves forwardly as the back tilts.

    322,    for interconnected bottom and back in which the bottom tilts with
    concurrent horizontal movement without sliding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 393+ for a support surface which tilts with
    incremental horizontal adjustment.


CLS 297/318
TXT Device under subclass 317 wherein the bearing means comprises an
    antifriction element, such as a ball or roller.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 430 for a support surface which moves
    horizontally on rollers.


CLS 297/319
TXT Device under subclass 316 provided with means connected to the back to
    slidably engage the bottom to force it to its inclined position upon
    movement of the back.


CLS 297/320
TXT Device under subclass 316 wherein the rear portion of the bottom is carried
    by the back.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    308,    for a resiliently supported back which is connected to the bottom
    and which moves downwardly as the bottom yields.

    309,    for a bottom which resiliently supports the back for relative
    vertical movement of the back.


CLS 297/321
TXT Device under subclass 320 wherein the forward portion of the bottom is
    pivoted to a rigid arm which is mounted for turning movement.


CLS 297/322
TXT Device under subclass 316 wherein the bottom is displaced in a horizontal
    direction while moving to an inclined position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65,     for a bottom which moves horizontally responsive to reclining of a
    back to form a single bed with an adjacent seat.

    317+,   for interconnected bottom-and-back in which the bottom slides
    forwardly while tilting.

    341+,   for a nontilting bottom which moves forwardly as the back tilts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclass 44.1 for a sofa bed in which a forward-turning back
    may horizontally advance a seat section; subclasses 47+ for a sofa bed in
    which a sliding and pivoting back may advance a seat horizontally.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 393+ for a support surface which tilts with
    incremental horizontal adjustment.


CLS 297/323
TXT Device under subclass 316 wherein an armrest, the back and the bottom are
    so connected that movement of any one of these components results in the
    movement of both of the others.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27+,    for an armrest used as set means to hold a collapsible chair in
    plural operative configurations.

    35+,    for a collapsible chair having a folding armrest.

    78+,    for a leg rest interconnected to move relative to a bottom and
    concurrent with a bottom or back, wherein said interconnection includes a
    back-connected armrest.

    287,    for a back resiliently supported by an integral leg and armrest.

    359+,   for an armrest hinged to a tiltable back.


CLS 297/324
TXT Device under subclass 316 wherein movement of the bottom from a
    substantially horizontal use position to a substantially vertical nonuse
    position causes the back to move.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331+,   for a bottom tiltable to an inoperative position and see the search
    notes thereto for the general field of search of folding bottoms.


CLS 297/325
TXT Device under subclass 313 provided with a back associated with the bottom
    and tiltable with the bottom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for a reorientable seating device wherein the bottom and back
    rotate a portion of a revolution to present previously inaccessible
    supporting surfaces.

    88+,    for a bottom rigid with a back and having a relatively and
    concurrently moving leg rest.

    92+,    for a chair with an interchangeable and reversible bottom and back.

    258.1+, for a rocker mounted seating device.

    302.1+, for a resiliently supported tilting back- and-bottom unit.

    308,    for a bottom-and-back unit vertically moving against the action of
    a spring.

    310,    for means to control rearward chair tipping.

    344.1+, for a bottom-and-back unit with     nontilting movement.


CLS 297/326
TXT Device under subclass 325 wherein the unit swings about an axis which is
    immovable and parallel to the horizon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302.1,  for a resiliently supported bottom-and- back unit which tilts as a
    unit.

    331+,   for a bottom which tilts about a horizontal pivot to an inoperative
    position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 596+ for a support surface which is biased to
    tilt about a stationary horizontal pivot.


CLS 297/327
TXT Device under subclass 326 wherein the unit tilts to two or more occupant
    supporting positions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 397 for a support surface which tilts with
    incremental adjustment about a fixed horizontal pivot.


CLS 297/328
TXT Device under subclass 327 provided with means to hold the unit at various
    positions of use, said means being located to the side of the pivot and
    separated therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    269.1+, for a track mounted rocking chair with means to hold the rockers in
    plural positions relative to the track.

    354.12+, for a tiltable back with set means to hold the back in plural
    positions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    292,    Closure Fasteners, appropriate subclasses for particular fasteners
    utilized as set means.


CLS 297/329
TXT Device under subclass 325 wherein the unit is displaced in a horizontal
    direction while moving to an inclined position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282,    for an oscillating bottom suspended from an armrest or side frame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 370 for stand mounted depending links carrying a
    support surface, and subclasses 393+ for a support surface which tilts with
    incremental horizontal adjustment.


CLS 297/330
TXT Device under subclass 313 moved by means of power driven actuating
    mechanism.


CLS 297/331
TXT Device under subclass 313 tiltable to a nonuse position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for an occupant-propelled walker or skater frame having a foldable
    bottom.

    13,     for a folding bottom which releases a rotation preventing detent.

    14+,    for folding bottom and back connected to and storable in a wall or
    partition.

    16.1+,  for relatively folding bottom, back, and leg.

    43,     for bottom and back which fold laterally against a fixed standard.

    136+,   for a seat supported within the periphery of a table and movable to
    inoperative position.

    141+,   for a seat pivotally movable to an inoperative position beneath a
    table.

    165+,   for a tiltable bottom combined with a table.

    188.02,         for simultaneously pivoting bottom and folding receptacle.

    255,    for a folding auxiliary bottom suspended from a back.

    315,    for a bottom tiltable laterally.

    324,    for a folding bottom and relatively moving back.

    325+,   for bottom and back tiltable as a  unit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 240+ for a folding shelf-type bracket; and
    subclasses 371+ for a tiltable support surface.


CLS 297/332
TXT Device under subclass 331 comprising means urging the bottom to its nonuse
    position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248+,   for means to couple adjacent seats having tilting bottoms.

    300.1,  for a back tiltable with a bottom against the action of a biasing
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 580+ for a resilient means for biasing a
    tilting support surface to a predetermined position.


CLS 297/333
TXT Device under subclass 332 wherein the biasing means includes a resilient
    means which has an axis coincident with the turning axis of the bottom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    292,    for a resilient back biased by a coil spring which surrounds a
    horizontal pivot.

    293,    for a resilient back biased by a coil spring, which comprises a
    horizontal pivot.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 72+ for spring-actuated door
    closers; and subclasses 277+ for spring hinges, per se.

    248,    Supports, subclass 597 for a spiral biasing spring coaxial with a
    horizontal pivot.


CLS 297/334
TXT Device under subclass 331 wherein the bottom is pivoted to one end of a
    rigid arm, and wherein the other end of the arm is pivotally mounted on a
    base.


CLS 297/335
TXT Device under subclass 331 wherein the bottom tilts about an axis which is
    immovable and parallel to a horizontal plane.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 596+ for a support surface which is
    resiliently biased to tilt about a stationary horizontal pivot.


CLS 297/336
TXT Device under subclass 335 wherein a portion of the bottom extends
    rearwardly of the pivot and presses against a stop member to retain the
    bottom in its use position, and separates from the stop upon tilting of the
    bottom.


CLS 297/337
TXT Devices under subclass 311 wherein the bottom is movable separately from
    the back.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    313+,   for a bottom which tilts independently of the back.


CLS 297/338
TXT Device under subclass 337 wherein the movement of the bottom is in a
    direction upwardly or downwardly from a horizontal plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    344.12+, for a bottom and back movable vertically as a unit, and see the
    search notes thereto for other fields of search of vertically adjustable
    seating devices.


CLS 297/339
TXT Device under subclass 338 moved by means employing a mechanical advantage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    364,    for a bottom-and-back unit movable vertically by force multiplying
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 404+ for a support surface adjustable
    vertically by a force multiplying means.


CLS 297/340
TXT Device under subclass 311 provided with a back joined to the bottom so that
    movement of either the bottom or the back causes the other to move at the
    same time and to change its position with respect to the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83+,    for a relatively and concurrently moving bottom and back with an
    interconnected and relatively movable footrest.

    316+,   for a tilting bottom interconnected with a back for relative
    concurrent movement.


CLS 297/341
TXT Device under subclass 340 wherein movement of either the back to various
    positions of inclinations or movement of the bottom to a position advanced
    of its initial position causes the other to move concurrently.

    (1)     Note.  The bottom may also move vertically as it moves horizontally.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282,    for an oscillating bottom suspended from an armrest.

    317+,   for a bottom which tilts and slides forwardly concurrently with a
    movement of the back.

    322,    for relatively concurrently movable bottom and back which moves
    horizontally while tilting.

    329,    for a bottom-and-back unit which moves horizontally  while tilting.

    354.1+, for a tilting back, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclass 44.1 for a sofa bed in which a forward-turning back
    may horizontally advance a seat section; subclasses 47+ for a sofa bed in
    which a sliding and pivoting back may advance a seat horizontally.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 127+ for a stand with a horizontally movable
    support surface.


CLS 297/342
TXT Device under subclass 341 wherein the upper portion of the back moves in a
    backward arc as the bottom moves forwardly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65,     for a bottom which moves horizontally responsive to the reclining
    of a back to form a single bed with an adjacent seat.


CLS 297/343
TXT Device under subclass 342 provided with pin and slot guideways, or
    equivalent bearing means joining the back to its support to facilitate
    relative movement therewith.


CLS 297/344.1
TXT Bottom and back movable as a unit:
    Device under subclass 311 provided with a back associated with the bottom
    and movable as a unit with the bottom relative to the base member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    325+,   for a bottom and back tiltable as a unit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 157+ for a support surface which moves
    vertically, and subclasses 424+ for a support surface which moves
    horizontally.


CLS 297/344.11
TXT Mounted for horizontal oscillating movement:
    Device under subclass 344.1 including a seat support structure configured
    to slide back and forth in an ongoing manner relative to the base member in
    a substantially horizontal plane.

    (1)     Note.  Bearing may be provided between the unit and the base.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258+,   for seats that oscillate in a rocking manner.

    273+,   for suspended seats which may have similar oscillating movement.


CLS 297/344.12
TXT Vertically adjustable:
    Device under subclass 344.1 wherein the unit includes a means to permit the
    unit to be adjusted up or down relative to the base member in a
    substantially vertical direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130+,   for a bottom movable vertically on an alternately usable seat mount.

    164+,   for vertically adjustable table and seat.

    338+,   for a bottom movable vertically independently of the back.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclass 11 for a bed bottom adjustable in height, and
    subclass 83.1 for an invalid-hoisting device.

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclass 96 for terraced
    horizontally supported planar surfaces which are vertically adjustable,
    subclasses 106+ for plural related horizontally supported planar surfaces
    which are vertically adjustable, subclasses 116+ for a folding horizontally
    supported planar surface provided with vertical adjustability, and
    subclasses 144.11+ for a single horizontally supported planar surface which
    is vertically adjustable.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 141+ for a platform
    with elevating or lowering means.

    248,    Supports, subclass 396 for a tilting support surface in which the
    ends are raised differentially, subclasses 157+ for a vertically adjustable
    stand or stool, subclasses 161+ for a vertically adjustable standard-type
    stand or stool, subclasses 404+ for a vertically adjustable standard-type
    stand with force-multi-plying means, subclass 405 for a vertically
    adjustable standard-type stand with screw and nut adjusting means, and
    subclass 422 for a vertically adjustable stand employing similar means.


CLS 297/344.13
TXT And horizontally adjustable:
    Device under subclass 344.12 including a means to move or permit movement
    of the unit in a direction at a right angle to the vertical direction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 419+ for a support surface adjustable
    vertically and horizontally.


CLS 297/344.14
TXT Horizontal movement concurrent with vertical movement; i.e., oblique
    movement:Device under subclass 344.12 in which the horizontal movement of
    the unit takes place at the same time as the vertical movement of the unit;
    i.e., the unit moves in a direction which is a resultant of the horizontal
    and vertical directions.


CLS 297/344.15
TXT Pivotal linkage assembly:
    Device under subclass 344.12 wherein the vertical adjustment means includes
    a plurality of elongated pivotally interconnected members.


CLS 297/344.16
TXT Gas or hydraulic cylinder:
    Device under subclass 344.15 in which the vertical adjustment means
    includes an assembly having a piston slidable inside a cylinder, wherein
    the piston contacts gas or liquid within the cylinder.


CLS 297/344.17
TXT Motor actuated:
    Device under subclass 344.15 wherein the vertical adjustment means is
    actuated by a power-driven mechanism.


CLS 297/344.18
TXT Slidably coupled components (e.g., telescoped): Device under subclass
    344.12 wherein the vertical adjustment means includes relatively movable
    interfitted elements that are either telescoped or slidably interengaged
    with each other.


CLS 297/344.19
TXT Gas or hydraulic cylinder:
    Device under subclass 344.18 wherein the vertical adjustment means includes
    an assembly having a piston slidable inside a cylinder, wherein the piston
    contacts gas or liquid within the cylinder.


CLS 297/344.2
TXT Motor actuated:
    Device under subclass 344.18 wherein the vertical adjustment means is
    actuated by a power-driven mechanism.


CLS 297/344.21
TXT About vertical axis; i.e., rotates:
    Device under subclass 344.1 wherein the unit includes structure which
    permits the unit to rotate in a substantially horizontal plane about an
    axis normal to said plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for a folding bottom which releases a rotation-preventing detent.

    137,    for seat rotatable within the periphery of an aperture table.

    142,    for a seat horizontally swinging beneath a table.

    240+,   for rotatable plural related seats.

    256.12, for a rotatable rigid supplemental seat.

    263.1+, for a rocking chair mounted on a rotatable track.

    311+,   for a rotatable bottom combined with an adjunctive rest other than
    a back.

    337+,   for a seat rotatable independently of a back.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 415+ for a rotatable standard-type stand, and
    subclasses 425+ for another type of rotatable stand.


CLS 297/344.22
TXT Including means to lock the unit at distinct rotated positions:Device under
    subclass 344.21 including an adjustment means for fixing and maintaining
    the unit at various positions of rotation.


CLS 297/344.23
TXT Motor actuated:
    Device under subclass 344.22 wherein the  adjustment means includes a
    power-driven mechanism.


CLS 297/344.24
TXT Having additional movement in horizontal plane:
    Device under subclass 344.21 including a means for allowing movement of the
    unit in a direction perpendicular to the vertical axis.


CLS 297/344.25
TXT Back tilted to permit seat rotation:
    Device under subclass 344.21 wherein the unit includes a lock mechanism
    configured to become unlocked when the back is moved to an inclined
    position to allow rotation of the unit.


CLS 297/344.26
TXT Including antifriction feature (e.g., ball bearings, etc.):
    Device under subclass 344.21 including a friction-reducing element made of
    material having a low coefficient of friction, or which is shaped to
    facilitate movement of the unit.


CLS 297/350
TXT Device under the class definition comprising a back made of flaccid
    material or of relatively movable portions, and wherein one portion is
    movable sideways relative to another portion to render the back more
    compact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42+,    for a laterally folding or collapsing chair, and particularly
    subclass 44 for a back having foldable sections.

    315,    for a laterally tilting bottom having a laterally folding back.


CLS 297/351
TXT Device under subclass 350 wherein a bottom and the back are formed of a
    single length of material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    452.13,         for a one-piece bottom and back, and see the search notes
    thereto for the loci of other one-piece bottom and back.


CLS 297/352
TXT Device under the class definition comprising a back including means by
    which it may be secured to or mounted on a horizontal supporting surface
    and readily removed therefrom, without employing fixtures mounted on the
    surface, so as to be removable from association with one surface to
    association with another surface.

    (1)     Note.  These devices are often called "bleacher seats" and are
    temporarily attached to board-type seats.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230.1+, for a similar device in combination with a primary bottom and back
    unit, or with means to connect it to a back of seat, i.e., a substitute
    back rather than an auxiliary back.

    250.1+, for a substitute bottom, which may be combined with a back, having
    means to detachably secure it to a subjacent bottom.

    382,    for a bottom hinged to a back by a fabric hinge and usable as a
    supplemental pad to overlie a primary bottom and back unit.

    440.15+, for a back interconnected with a bottom by a manipulated joint.


CLS 297/353
TXT Device under the class definition wherein means are provided to move or
    permit movement of the back relative to the other components of the seating
    device by means of an articulation of the back to the other components.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16.1+,  for relatively folding bottom, back, and legs which collapse to a
    nonuse position.

    43,     for a back combined with a bottom, foldable laterally against a
    fixed standard.

    61,     for relative, concurrent, interconnected movement of head rest and
    back.

    68+,    for a back interconnected to move relative to and concurrently with
    a leg rest.

    92,     for a seat having interchangeable and reversible bottom and back.

    94+,    for a back joined to a bottom so as to be movable to either the
    front or back of the bottom so that an occupant may selectively face
    forward or backward.

    230.1+, for a substitute back movable as a unit from association with one
    primary back to association with another primary back.

    250.1+, for a substitute bottom and a back movable as a unit from
    association with one subjacent primary bottom to association with another
    subjacent bottom.

    285+,   for a back movable against the action of a resilient means in
    operative position.

    316+,   for a bottom and back combination in which the back moves relative
    to a tilting bottom as the bottom tilts.


CLS 297/354.1
TXT Tiltable:
    Device under subclass 353 including structure configured to permit the back
    to pivot about a substantially horizontal axis to an inclined position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for a seating device which tilts as a unit about a horizontal axis
    to expose a substitute support surface.

    68+,    for a legrest or footrest interconnected to move relative to a
    bottom and concurrently with a tilting back.

    300.1+, for a back tiltable with a bottom against the action of a biasing
    means.

    316+,   for a back moving relative to a bottom concurrently with the
    tilting of the bottom.

    325+,   for a bottom and a back tiltably movable as a unit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclass 37.1 for sofa beds having reverting backs,
    subclasses 43+ for sofa beds having forwardly tilting backs, and subclass
    125 for couch hammocks having tilting backs.

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 1+ for a
    horizontally supported planar surface which is tiltable.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 47.4 for a baby carriage having a tilting
    back support.


CLS 297/354.11
TXT Pivot axis located at or adjacent to a central point of back:Device under
    subclass 354.1 wherein the pivot axis is coincident with or adjacent to a
    substantially horizontal axis passing through a point located at or near a
    midpoint of the back.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291,    for a centrally-pivoted backrest with a spring.


CLS 297/354.12
TXT Plural distinct occupant-supporting positions:
    Device under subclass 354.1 in which a means is included for adjusting and
    locking the back at various degrees of inclination relative to a bottom of
    the seating device.


CLS 297/354.13
TXT Movable to a rear-horizontal position:
    Device under subclass 354.12 wherein the back is pivotable backwardly to
    recline in a substantially horizontal position.


CLS 297/356
TXT Device under subclass 354.12 wherein the holding means is provided with a
    mechanism which compels full movement of the back in one direction before
    permitting retrograde movement in the reverse direction.


CLS 297/357
TXT Device under subclass 354.12 wherein the holding means is released to
    permit tilting of the back by moving the back in a vertical direction.


CLS 297/358
TXT Device under subclass 354.12 wherein the holding means performs a second
    function of releasing the back to permit it to be raised or lowered, and
    retaining the back at a selected vertical adjustment.


CLS 297/359
TXT Device under subclass 354.12 comprising an armrest hinged to the back and
    including means connected to or contained in the armrest for retaining the
    back in an adjusted position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27+,    for a collapsible chair having means to hold the chair in plural
    operative configurations, wherein the set means includes the armrest.

    78+,    for an armrest connected to a back and forming an interconnection
    with a leg rest, and carrying a back positioning latch or holding means.

    380+,   for a back foldable forwardly over the bottom and maintained in use
    position by a tension tie member.


CLS 297/360
TXT Device under subclass 359 in which the armrest is additionally hinged to
    the bottom.


CLS 297/361.1
TXT Mechanical operator tilts back fore and aft:
    Device under subclass 354.12 including a mechanism such as a linkage
    system, gearing, motor, piston-cylinder assembly, etc., operable to tilt
    the back in a forward or backward direction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 424.8 for screw and nut
    gearing, per se.


CLS 297/362
TXT Device under subclass 361.1 including a plurality of meshing toothed
    members.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 640+ for a gear train, per
    se.


CLS 297/362.11
TXT Motor actuated:
    Device under subclass 361.1 wherein the tilting mechanism is power operated.


CLS 297/362.12
TXT Actuated shaft:
    Device under subclass 361.1 wherein the mechanism includes an actuated rod
    member attached to the back to cause the tilting movement.


CLS 297/362.13
TXT Gas or hydraulic cylinder:
    Device under subclass 362.12 in which the actuated shaft is a reciprocating
    piston which is a part of a pneumatic or liquid operated piston-cylinder
    assembly.


CLS 297/362.14
TXT Threaded shaft:
    Device under subclass 362.12 wherein the actuated shaft includes a thread
    about its perimeter.


CLS 297/363
TXT Device under subclass 354.12 wherein the holding means includes a member
    having one or more recesses in one side thereof, and an elongated locking
    member, the latter being movable lineally along its longitudinal axis to
    engage within a selected recess.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    366+,   for rack and pawl holding means in which one of the two parts is
    pivoted to move toward and away from the other.


CLS 297/364
TXT Device under subclass 363 biased to its locking position by an elastic
    member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    369,    for a similar device in which a pivoted pawl is spring urged into
    engagement with a rack.


CLS 297/365
TXT Device under subclass 364 wherein the recessed member is shiftable
    spatially with respect to the axially sliding bolt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370+,   for a similar device in which a pivoted rack is moved about its
    pivot to disengage from a pawl.


CLS 297/366
TXT Device under subclass 354.12 wherein the holding means comprises an
    elongated element having teeth or notches extending from one side thereof,
    and a cooperating element having a tooth engaging projection thereon to
    engage between two adjacent teeth, and wherein one of the two elements is
    pivoted at one of its ends so that the elements are relatively movable to
    and from each other in the direction of tooth extension.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    356,    for a device having similar holding means provided with a mechanism
    to compel full movement of the back in one direction before permitting
    retrograde movement in the reverse direction.

    363+,   for back holding means comprising an axially moving pawl.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 144+ for a rack and pawl
    device of general utility.


CLS 297/367
TXT Device under subclass 366 provided with a handle, pedal, or the like
    connected to the pawl and engageable by an operator to move the pawl from
    engagement with its cooperating rack.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370+,   for a device to disengage a movable rack from a pawl.


CLS 297/368
TXT Device under subclass 367 wherein the actuator is integral with or fixedly
    attached to the pawl.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    371,    for a similar actuator rigid with the rack.


CLS 297/369
TXT Device under subclass 368 in which a spring biases the pawl into engagement
    with the rack.


CLS 297/370
TXT Device under subclass 366 provided with a handle, pedal, or the like
    connected to the rack and engageable by an operator to move the rack from
    engagement with its cooperating pawl.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    367+,   for a device to disengage a pawl from a rack.


CLS 297/371
TXT Device under subclass 370 wherein the actuator is integral with or fixedly
    attached to the rack.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    368+,   for a similar actuator rigid with the pawl.


CLS 297/372
TXT Device under subclass 366 wherein either the rack or pawl hingedly depends
    from the back and selectively engages with an opposite cooperating member
    on a stationary portion of the seat.


CLS 297/373
TXT Device under subclass 354.12 wherein the back and the seat component to
    which it is connected and by which it is supported are pivoted together,
    and wherein both parts of the pivot joint have meshing teeth, and wherein
    the toothed portions of the parts are selectively movable together to mesh
    the teeth and prevent relative tilting movement of the parts or movable to
    a tooth disengaged position where relative tilting may take place.


CLS 297/374
TXT Device under subclass 354.12 wherein the means to hold the back immovable
    includes two contacting relatively moving parts, and wherein a resistance
    to relative motion is generated by the contact of one part with the other,
    and wherein that contact may be increased or decreased to prevent or permit
    such relative motion.


CLS 297/375
TXT Device under subclass 374 wherein one of the parts is a bar member movable
    in the direction of its length, and the other part is a stationary gripping
    member engageable with said bar.


CLS 297/376
TXT Device under subclass 374 wherein one of the parts is a grooved bar or
    plate and the other part is a clamping bolt slidable in the groove of the
    bar or plate and operable to be clamped in a selected adjusted position
    within the groove.


CLS 297/377
TXT Device under subclass 354.12 in which a rigid, elongated element supports
    the rear side of the back in use position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 351+ for a supporting prop or brace of general
    utility.


CLS 297/378.1
TXT Foldable forwardly over bottom:
    Device under subclass 354.1 wherein the back is provided with structure
    configured to permit the back to swing forwardly toward a front of a bottom
    of the seating device to a nonuse position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for a collapsible chair in which the back folds to overlie the
    bottom.

    252,    for a bleacher-type auxiliary seat having a back foldable forwardly
    over the bottom.

    341,    for a movable bottom, wherein a back of the seating device is
    tilted to permit forward movement of the bottom.

    344.25, for a bottom and back rotatable about a vertical axis wherein the
    forward tilting of the back releases a rotation-preventing detent.


CLS 297/378.11
TXT Including inertia-responsive latch:
    Device under subclass 378.1 having a retaining member configured to hold
    the back against forward folding movement only when there is a presence of
    an inertia force, wherein upon absence of such inertia force, the back may
    be pivoted forward by an occupant without operating the retaining member.

    (1)     Note.  The inertia force is usually caused by a sudden or rapid
    deceleration of a vehicle carrying the seating device.


CLS 297/378.12
TXT Held erect by releasable latch:
    Device under subclass 378.1 including a holding means which is operated to
    prohibit forward movement of the back relative to the bottom, wherein the
    holding means is manipulatable to permit such forward movement.


CLS 297/378.13
TXT Latch element supported by structure separated from chair or seat (e.g.,
    vehicle mounted striker, etc.):Device under subclass 378.12 in which a
    portion of the holding means is mounted to a structure other than a
    component of the seating device; e.g., a vehicle wall, floor, window, etc.


CLS 297/378.14
TXT Including means to hold back in forwardly folded position:
    Device under subclass 378.1 including a means for maintaining the back in
    its forwardly folded position.


CLS 297/380
TXT Device under subclass 377 comprising a limit means acting under tension to
    restrict the rearward motion of the back.


CLS 297/381
TXT Device under subclass 380 wherein the limit means includes an armrest.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for a collapsible chair in which the armrest is connected to the
    back and front leg to transmit motion from one to another.

    78+,    for a leg rest or footrest interconnected to a back by means of an
    armrest which limits rearward movement of the back in response to
    immobilization of the leg rest.


CLS 297/382
TXT Device under subclass 378.1 which includes a flaccid cloth connector
    joining the back to a bottom to permit the back to be folded relative to
    the bottom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for a laterally collapsible chair having a fabric bottom and back.

    219.1+, for a pad or cover for a bottom and back, and means to connect the
    cover to a subjacent seat.

    234+,   for a fabric connected bottom and back claimed in combination with
    or with means to detachably connect them to a subjacent seat.

    274+,   for a fabric connected bottom and back of the baby jumper type to
    an oscillating suspender.

    299,    for a fabric one-piece bottom and back resiliently supported in
    operative position.


CLS 297/383
TXT Device under subclass 353 wherein the back moves or has a component of
    motion in a generally horizontal plane.


CLS 297/391
TXT Device under the class definition comprising means for supporting the head
    of occupant of a seating device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for a headrest interconnected with a back for relative concurrent
    movement.

    219.1+, for a headrest with a protective pad or cover.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclass 523 for a rest for
    supporting a person's head while bathing and subclass 254 for a closet
    headrest.

    5,      Beds, subclasses 613+ for a head section of an invalid bed,
    subclasses 636+ for a pillow, and subclasses 652+ for a cushion.

    248,    Supports, subclass 118 as the generic locus for a headrest.  In
    general, that art is distinguished from the headrest in this class (297) in
    that it is not disclosed as supporting the head of a seated occupant.


CLS 297/392
TXT Device under subclass 391 wherein the supporting means includes a portion
    positionable to engage the jaw of the occupant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, subclass 278 for a combined chin rest and support for a
    violin and subclass 279 for a chin rest on a violin.


CLS 297/393
TXT Device under subclass 391 including means connected to the headrest and
    cooperable with a person's body or clothing to support the headrest in its
    position of use adjacent the person's head.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for an occupant-attached seating device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 44 and 45 for an occupant attached shoulder and
    back body brace and support.


CLS 297/394
TXT Device under subclass 391 wherein an armrest is connected to or integral
    with a headrest, and wherein the combined structure may be selectively
    associated and disassociated with a seat or with different seats.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230.1,  for a headrest combined with a back and means to selectively
    support such structure from another seat.

    397+,   for a self-contained headrest movable from association with one
    seat to association with another seat.

    411.23+, for a self-contained armrest movable from association with one
    seat to association with another seat.


CLS 297/395
TXT Device under subclass 391 wherein the headrest is supported on or from a
    vertically extending panel and extends laterally therefrom, or on or from
    an upper horizontal supporting surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    411.21+, for a panel mounted armrest.


CLS 297/396
TXT Device under subclass 391 wherein the top of the back of the seat is
    enlarged to provide a distinct headrest area, distinguished (as by
    different contour or by means which permit it to move relative to the back)
    from the back proper.


CLS 297/397
TXT Device under subclass 391 comprising a headrest complete in itself, movable
    from association with one seat to association with another seat, and
    including means by which the headrest may be secured to or mounted on a
    seating device and readily removed therefrom without employing fixtures
    mounted on the seat.

    (1)     Note.  The subclasses below this and the indented subclasses (i.e.,
    subclass 403 et seq.) contain many patents in which the headrest is
    removably attached to a seat by fixture such as a seat mounted socket or
    the like.  When the fixture is attached to the seat, or the seat is
    modified to receive the headrest, the patents have not been considered
    "portable" for subclasses 397+, but have been classified on the features
    indicated in subclass 403 et seq.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    394,    for a unit consisting of a headrest and an armrest, which unit may
    be selectively associated with and disassociated with same or a different
    seat, and wherein the associating means may include fixtures mounted on the
    seat.

    411.23+, for an armrest connected to a seat by similar means.

    423.39+, for a footrest or leg rest connected to a seat by similar means.


CLS 297/398
TXT Device under subclass 397 in which the headrest is constructed of parts
    which are foldable upon vertically arranged pivots or movable sideways
    toward each other to a more compact arrangement, as for transport to
    another seat or storage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42+,    for a laterally collapsible chair.

    350+,   for a laterally collapsible back.


CLS 297/399
TXT Device under subclass 397 wherein the means by which the headrest may be
    mounted or attached comprises a pair of legs joined by a connector to form
    a letter "U", and wherein the legs straddle the chair component to hold the
    headrest in operative position.


CLS 297/400
TXT Device under subclass 399 wherein the parts of the clamp are movable
    relative to each other so as to accommodate the rest to fit seat components
    of different size or to permit attachment and removal.


CLS 297/401
TXT Device under subclass 400 in which the legs of the clamp are resiliently
    urged toward each other to yieldingly clamp the seat component therebetween.


CLS 297/402
TXT Device under subclass 400 wherein one of the legs of the clamp is movable
    toward and away from the other by means of a screw and nut device.


CLS 297/403
TXT Device under subclass 391 wherein the headrest is connected to the back by
    means which permit the rest to move to a nonuse position behind the back.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    408+,   for a headrest pivoted to move forwardly and backwardly about a
    fixed pivot.


CLS 297/404
TXT Device under subclass 391 wherein an elastic or spring means yieldingly
    supports the headrest.


CLS 297/405
TXT Device under subclass 391 wherein the supporting means is connected to the
    rest by means comprising a spherical recess in one member of the connecting
    means and a mating sphere on another member, bearing in the recess; and
    wherein relative adjusting movement is effected by moving the sphere about
    within its recess.


CLS 297/406
TXT Device under subclass 391 wherein the headrest is mounted to move toward
    one side or the other of the seat occupant's head.

    (1)     Note.  Devices in which the mounting comprises a vertical pivot are
    in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    397+,   for a headrest adjustable laterally of a chair by selective
    positioning of the detachable connection means.

    405,    for a headrest adjustable laterally by means of a ball and socket
    joint.


CLS 297/407
TXT Device under subclass 406 wherein the means by which the headrest is
    supported is movable bodily to one side or the other.


CLS 297/408
TXT Device under subclass 391 wherein the headrest is mounted to swing through
    an arc about a pivot point at various inclinations to the horizon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    405,    for a headrest adjustable angularly fore and aft by means of a ball
    and socket joint.


CLS 297/409
TXT Device under subclass 408 wherein an additional means is provided to move
    the headrest horizontally toward or away from the seat occupant.

    (1)     Note.  The additional means may be a link to one end of which the
    headrest is pivoted, the other end of the link being pivoted to or
    extensible from a mounting.


CLS 297/410
TXT Device under subclass 391 wherein the headrest is movable to selected
    position along a substantially straight line upwardly from a horizontal
    plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    397,    for a headrest detachably secured to a chair component by a strap,
    which strap may selectively secure the headrest in vertically adjusted
    positions.


CLS 297/411.1
TXT SUPPORT FOR ARMPIT:
    Device under class definition including a means to support a seated
    occupant at the juncture of the occupant's arm and shoulder.


CLS 297/411.2
TXT ARMREST:
    Device under the class definition comprising a means for supporting an arm
    of a seated occupant.

    (1)     Note.  The armrest may be formed integrally with a component of a
    chair, such as an end frame. In such case, it has been classified in this
    group of subclasses if it is disclosed as used as an armrest. If there is
    no disclosure of such use, the patent has been classified below on other
    features; e.g., in subclass 450.1, even though the structure is such that
    an occupant of the seat could rest his arm upon such component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for an armrest having a crib side storable within or upon it.

    35+,    for a collapsible chair having a folding armrest.

    78+,    for an armrest connected to the back and legrest or footrest of a
    chair to move with them relative to the bottom.

    113,    for an armrest movable from a nonuse position in a recess in the
    back to a use position.

    115+,   for an armrest movable to plural diverse use positions.

    160+,   for a chair having an enlarged arm to form a tablet support (table).

    187,    for an armrest and kneerest combined in a praying stand.

    188.15+, for an armrest having a holder or receptacle therein or thereon.

    286+,   for an armrest operatively associated with or comprising spring
    means resiliently supporting a back.

    359+,   for an armrest hinged to a tilting back and having means to hold
    the back in adjusted position.

    394,    for a portable headrest and armrest.

    411.1,  for a rest to engage or support the armpit of a seated occupant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclass 254 for an armrest
    related to a closet.

    5,      Beds, subclass 52 for an armrest related to a sofa bed.

    84,     Music, subclass 328 for means to support a player's hand and arm in
    proper position relative to a stringed instrument, and subclass 469 for an
    arm rail attached to a piano case to position the player's arm.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 118+ as the generic locus for an armrest. In
    general, it is distinguished from an armrest in Class 297 in that it is not
    disclosed as supporting the arm of a seated occupant.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclass 153 for an armrest having
    means to cover and protect the door or window sill of a vehicle body.

    602,    Surgery:  Splint, Brace, or Bandage, subclasses 21+ for an
    orthopedic device for the arm; e.g., to correct abnormal positions of the
    arm, hand, or fingers.


CLS 297/411.21
TXT Mounted to structure other than a chair or seat component:
    Armrest under subclass 411.2 supported on or mounted to structure which is
    not a component of the seating device.

    (1)     Note.  Armrest may be extended laterally from a wall, vehicle door,
    steering wheel column, etc.


CLS 297/411.22
TXT Sill suspended:
    Armrest under subclass 411.21 configured to be rested upon a substantially
    horizontal upper edge portion of an upright panel; e.g., window frame, etc.


    SEARCH  CLASS:

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclass 153 for a vehicle door
    modified to provide an armrest.


CLS 297/411.23
TXT Attachable to diverse chairs or seats; i.e., portable:
    Armrest under subclass 411.2 structured to be mounted to different seating
    devices and readily removed therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  Seating device, to which the armrest of this subclass is
    attached, is not modified for interfitting connection with the armrest.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    411.26+, for a detachable armrest mounted to a  particular seating device,
    wherein the seating device has interfitting connec-tion with the armrest.

    440.23, for a detachable armrest unit which includes front and rear legs.


CLS 297/411.24
TXT Supported by a seating surface:
    Armrest under subclass 411.23 configured to rest upon an
    occupant-supporting surface of a bottom of the seating device.

    (1)     Note.  Armrest may include mounting means for securing it to the
    seating device.


CLS 297/411.25
TXT Connected to a back:
    Armrest under subclass 411.23 including structure which is joined to a back
    (or back frame).


CLS 297/411.26
TXT Detachably interfitted to a particular chair or seat at connecting
    joint:Armrest under subclass 411.2 wherein the armrest and a seating device
    carry or have integrally formed therewith interconnecting parts which
    permit the armrest to be easily disconnected from the seating device.

    (1)     Note.  An armrest structure including a front and a rear leg which
    together form a complete unit detachably connected to a bottom and/or back
    of a seating device is found in subclass 440.23.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for an armrest releasable from a back-connected upright position.

    227,    for a detachable cover on an arm rest.

    411.23+, for a detachable armrest configured to be mounted to diverse
    seating devices.

    440.1+, for seat components joined by interfit- ting joints.

    440.23, for a detachable armrest unit which includes front and rear legs.


CLS 297/411.27
TXT To bottom:
    Armrest under subclass 411.26 detachably interfitted to a bottom (or bottom
    frame) of the seating device.


CLS 297/411.28
TXT And to back:
    Armrest under subclass 411.27 further detachably interfitted to a back or
    (back frame) of the seating device.


CLS 297/411.29
TXT To back only:
    Armrest under subclass 411.26 detachably interfitted to a back (or back
    frame) and to no other part of the seating device.


CLS 297/411.3
TXT Movable to nonuse position:
    Armrest under subclass 411.2 connected to a seating device in a manner such
    that it may be moved from a position of use to an inoperative or
    out-of-the-way position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35+,    for an armrest foldable together with the bottom, back, and legs of
    a chair from a use position to a collapsed position.

    113,    for an armrest movable from a stored position within a back to an
    operative position outwardly of the back.

    115+,   for an armrest movable from a position in which it is usable as an
    armrest to a position in which it serves a different function; e.g.,
    backrest.

    411.23+, for a portable armrest movable from association with one seat to
    association with another seat.


CLS 297/411.31
TXT Armrest or its supporting member movable about vertical axis:Armrest under
    subclass 411.3, or an armrest supporting member, hinged for movement to a
    nonuse position about an axis that extends in a substantially vertical
    direction.


CLS 297/411.32
TXT Armrest or its supporting member movable about horizontal axis:Armrest
    under subclass 411.3, or an armrest supporting member, hinged for movement
    to a nonuse position about an axis that extends in a substantially
    horizontal direction.


CLS 297/411.33
TXT Supporting member movable about plural horizontal axes:
    Armrest under subclass 411.32 connected to the seating device for pivotal
    movement about at least two substantially horizontal axes.


CLS 297/411.34
TXT Axis parallel to a lateral edge of bottom:
    Armrest under subclass 411.32 in which the horizontal axis extends in a
    front-to-back direction relative to a bottom of the seating device.


CLS 297/411.35
TXT Adjustable to multiple use positions relative to bottom or back:Armrest
    under subclass 411.2 movable to and settable at various positions of use
    relative to a bottom or a back of a seating device.


CLS 297/411.36
TXT Vertically:
    Armrest under subclass 411.35 movable to and settable at different
    positions along a substantially vertical axis.


CLS 297/411.37
TXT Laterally:
    Armrest under subclass 411.35 movable to and settable at various positions
    of use in lateral directions relative to the bottom or back of the seating
    device.


CLS 297/411.38
TXT Angularly:
    Armrest under subclass 411.35 configured to be tiltable and settable at
    various angles relative to the bottom or back of the seating device.


CLS 297/411.39
TXT Angular adjustment coincides with tilting of the back for relative
    concurrent movement:Armrest under subclass 411.38 connected to an
    inclinable back in such a manner that tilting movement of the back causes
    the armrest to be angularly adjusted at the same time to change its angular
    position with respect to the back.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for a headrest and backrest that are interconnected for relative
    concurrent movement.


CLS 297/411.4
TXT Single element forms plural spaced armrests of a chair or seat:Armrest
    under subclass 411.2 including one single member shaped to provide two
    spaced armrests of a seating device for supporting the arms of a seated
    occupant.


CLS 297/411.41
TXT And portion of back:
    Armrest under subclass 411.4 including structure to further form a back (or
    back frame) of a seating device.


CLS 297/411.42
TXT Formed as one-piece with front leg:
    Armrest under subclass 411.2 configured to be continuously formed with a
    front leg of a seating device.

    (1)     Note.  An armrest structure including a front and a rear leg which
    together form a complete unit detachably connected to a bottom and/or back
    of a seating device is found in subclass 440.23.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    287+,   for a resilient integral armrest and leg which resiliently support
    a back in operative position.


CLS 297/411.43
TXT Connected to back and front leg:
    Armrest under subclass 411.2 joined to a back and a front leg of a seating
    device.

    (1)     Note.  An armrest structure including a front and a rear leg which
    together form a complete unit detachably connected to a bottom and/or back
    of a seating device is found in subclass 440.23.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    411.42, for an armrest formed as one-piece with the front leg.

    411.45, for an armrest joined to an end frame.


CLS 297/411.44
TXT Connected to back and bottom:
    Armrest under subclass 411.2 joined to a back and a bottom of a seating
    device.


CLS 297/411.45
TXT Mounted on an upwardly extending side panel:
    Armrest under subclass 411.2 attached to or mounted on top of a side member
    of a seating device, wherein the side member is connected to a lateral edge
    of a bottom of the seating device and extended upwardly therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    411.43, for an armrest connected to the back and front leg.

    450.1,  for a chair in which the back is connected to an end frame, which
    frame may support an armrest, and see (1) Note of subclass 411.2.

     463.2, for an end frame, per se.


CLS 297/411.46
TXT Upholstered:
    Armrest under subclass 411.2 provided with a fixed covering or padding
    material for shock- absorbing or cushioning effect.


CLS 297/423.1
TXT REST FOR KNEE, LEG, OR FOOT:
    Device under the class definition wherein significance is attributed to a
    support for the knee, leg, or foot of either: (1) a seated occupant or
    partially seated occupant of a seating device; or (2)  a nonoccupant; i.e.,
    a person other than a seated or partially seated occupant of a seating
    device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for a legrest or footrest which folds concurrently with a
    collapsing chair.

    68+,    for a legrest or footrest interconnected to move relative to a
    bottom or back, particularly subclass 70 for a legrest in such a device
    movable independently of a footrest, and subclasses 75+ for a legrest and a
    footrest movable relative to each other during their movement relative to a
    bottom.

    271.1+, for a footrest or legrest in combination with a rocking chair.

    279,    for a seat suspended by a legrest or footrest connected hanger.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclass 254 for a footrest
    related to a closet.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 265+ for a
    stand to receive shoes while being cleaned or polished.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 564 for a footrest adjacent
    to a pedal to support a portion of the foot during the pedal operation.

    114,    Ships, subclass 363 for a foot brace related to a boat.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 201 for a footrail or guard related
    to a stove.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclass 77 for a radiator with means for warming
    the feet.

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses for supports of general utility.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 47.4 for a baby carriage having a seat with
    a back and/or footrest; subclass 291 for a step and footrest related to an
    occupant-propelled vehicle.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclass 75 for a footrest
    combined with significant vehicle body structure.


CLS 297/423.11
TXT For occupant's knee or shin (e.g., sit-kneel type of chair, etc.):Device
    under subclass 423.1 wherein the rest is configured to support a knee or a
    front portion of the lower leg of a seated occupant or of a semiseated
    occupant; i.e., a seated occupant who is kneeling against the rest for
    additional support.


CLS 297/423.12
TXT Adjustable relative to chair or seat to plural use positions:Device under
    subclass 423.11 including structure configured to permit the kneerest to be
    movable and settable at various positions of use relative to the seating
    device.


CLS 297/423.13
TXT Convertible to a chair or seat without kneerest:
    Device under subclass 423.11 wherein the seating device and the kneerest
    are configured such that their structures can be moved or relatively
    rearranged to transform them into a seating device having no support for a
    knee of a seated occupant (e.g., the kneerest may be moved to an
    inoperative position beneath the seating device or to a position where it
    supports the back or bottom of a seated occupant).


CLS 297/423.14
TXT For nonoccupant use (e.g., shoe salesman's stool, etc.):
    Device under subclass 423.1 wherein the rest is configured for arrangement
    relative to, or for attachment to, the seating device for use by a person
    other than an occupant who sits on the seating device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 265+ for a
    footrest on a shoe-blacking stand.


CLS 297/423.15
TXT Rest at rear of chair or seat:
    Device under subclass 413.14 wherein the rest is located at a rear of the
    seating device for supporting a knee, leg, or foot of a person other than
    the occupant of the seating device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73,     for a footrest or legrest interconnected with the bottom or back
    for relative concurrent movement.


CLS 297/423.16
TXT Kneeling stool:
    Device under subclass 423.14 having structure for supporting a nonoccupant
    who is in a kneeling position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    187,    for a prie-dieu type of kneeling stand; i.e., a kneeling stand
    combined with an armrest.


CLS 297/423.17
TXT Including a portion engaging a side of occupant's leg:
    Device under subclass 423.1 wherein the rest includes structure configured
    to contact or to apply pressure to a side of a knee, leg, or foot of a
    seated occupant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 515 for a knee-operated
    pedal or level.


CLS 297/423.18
TXT Having substitute footrest:
    Device under subclass 423.1 provided with a footrest and an additional
    footrest, wherein the additional footrest is configured to take the place
    of or to substitute for the footrest.

    (1)     Note.  The substitute footrest is usually usable by a child or
    small adult when the existing footrest is too remote relative to the
    seating surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237,    for a substitute bottom with a foot support withdrawn from a first
    seat bottom.

    238,    for plural related seats having a substitute bottom with a foot
    support withdrawn from a seat back.


CLS 297/423.19
TXT Connected to chair or seat for relative movement:
    Device under subclass 423.1 wherein the rest is configured to be attached
    to and movable relative to the seating device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105+,   for a movable legrest or footrest exposed by a displaceable bottom.


CLS 297/423.2
TXT Horizontally slidable from beneath bottom to a position in front of
    bottom:Device under subclass 423.19 wherein the rest includes structure
    configured to permit the rest to slide in a substantially horizontal plane
    from a storage position directly below a bottom of the seating device to a
    position located forward of the bottom.


CLS 297/423.21
TXT Having a floor-engaging support:
    Device under 423.2 wherein the rest is provided with a supporting leg or
    prop configured to extend downwardly to contact a floor.


CLS 297/423.22
TXT Having additional movement to an operative position:
    Device under subclass 423.2 wherein the rest includes structure configured
    to permit the rest to further move from the forwardly located position in
    front of the bottom, at which the rest is unusable by a seated occupant, to
    a position of use.


CLS 297/423.23
TXT Including means for adjusting the rest to plural operative positions:Device
    under subclass 423.22 wherein the movable rest includes structure which
    permits the rest to be set at various usable positions.


CLS 297/423.24
TXT Angular adjustment means:
    Device under subclass 423.23 in which the rest includes structure which
    permits the rest to be inclined at various angles relative to a
    substantially horizontal surface.


CLS 297/423.25
TXT Footrest movably connected to an upright support fixed to chair or
    seat:Device under subclass 423.19 wherein the rest is mounted for movement
    relative to a substantially vertical standard which is rigidly attached to
    the seating device.


CLS 297/423.26
TXT Pivoted for vertical swinging (i.e., about a horizontal axis):Device under
    subclass 423.19 wherein the rest includes structure which permits the rest
    to turn about a substantially horizontal axis.


CLS 297/423.27
TXT Having a floor-engaging support:
    Device under subclass 423.26 wherein the rest is provided with a supporting
    leg or prop which is configured to extend downwardly to contact a floor.


CLS 297/423.28
TXT Pivoted to an unusable position beneath bottom:
    Device under subclass 423.26 in which the rest is configured to swing from
    an occupant-supporting position and past a vertically oriented position to
    a storage position located directly under a bottom of the seating device.

    (1)     Note.  The upper surface of the rest must be pivoted beyond a
    vertically standing position (i.e., pivoted approximately more than 90
    degrees) to be classified here.


CLS 297/423.29
TXT Pivot axis parallel to lateral edge of bottom:
    Device under subclass 423.26 wherein the horizontal axis extends in a
    front-to-back direction relative to a bottom of the seating device.


CLS 297/423.3
TXT Pivot axis adjacent and parallel to front edge of bottom:
    Device under subclass 423.26 wherein the horizontal axis extends in a
    side-to-side direction relative to a bottom of the seating device and is
    located adjacent and parallel to a forwardmost edge of the bottom.


CLS 297/423.31
TXT Held by a prop behind rest:
    Device under subclass 423.3 including a rigid elongated element configured
    to support a rear side of the rest in a use position.


CLS 297/423.32
TXT Prop adjusts the rest to plural use positions:
    Device under subclass 423.31 wherein the prop is adjustable by a means for
    permitting the rest to be set at different positions of use.


CLS 297/423.33
TXT Adjustable friction detent:
    Device under subclass 423.32 wherein the adjustment means includes two
    contacting relatively movable parts, and wherein a resistance to relative
    motion of the moving parts is generated by the contact of one part with the
    other, and wherein that contact may be increased or decreased to prevent or
    permit such relative motion.


CLS 297/423.34
TXT Footrest moves relative to legrest:
    Device under subclass 423.3 including a footrest and a vertically swinging
    legrest, wherein the footrest is configured to be moved relative to the
    vertically swinging legrest.


CLS 297/423.35
TXT Pivotally movable footrest:
    Device under subclass 423.34 wherein the footrest is hinged to turn
    relative to the legrest about an axis.


CLS 297/423.36
TXT Slidably adjustable footrest:
    Device under subclass 423.34 in which the footrest is configured for
    sliding motion relative to the legrest.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    423.2+, for a legrest or footrest which slides beneath a bottom.


CLS 297/423.37
TXT Pivoted for lateral swinging; i.e., about vertical axis:
    Device under subclass 423.19 wherein the rest is hinged to turn about a
    substantially vertical axis.


CLS 297/423.38
TXT Rectilinearly in vertical direction:
    Device under subclass 423.19 wherein the rest is configured to move
    relative to the seating device along a straight line substantially
    perpendicular to a horizontal plane.


CLS 297/423.39
TXT Portable:
    Device under subclass 423.1 wherein the rest includes structure configured
    to permit the rest to be moved from association with one seating device to
    association with another seating device, and which may be connected thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 24 for a kneepad adapted to be worn on the person.


CLS 297/423.4
TXT Connectable to a chair or seat:
    Device under subclass 423.39 wherein the rest includes a means for securing
    the rest to the seating device.


CLS 297/423.41
TXT Self-supported:
    Device under subclass 423.39 wherein the rest unit is configured to
    independently support its own weight on a substantially horizontal surface;
    i.e., ground, floor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    391+,   for a padded stool capable of use as a footrest.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclass 129 for a worker's
    kneeling support combined with nonclass structure (e.g., receptacle), and
    subclass 230 for a worker's kneeling support, per se.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 127+ for a stand of general utility.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 32.6 for repairman's creeper or wheeled
    workman's kneeler.


CLS 297/423.42
TXT Resiliently mounted:
    Device under subclass 423.41 wherein the rest includes a spring for urging
    the rest to move toward a direction opposite to the movement direction of
    the rest.

    (1)     Note.  Movement of the rest may be obtained in response to the
    weight, pressure, or motion of an occupant imparted to the rest.


CLS 297/423.43
TXT Rocker type:
    Device under subclass 423.41 wherein the rest includes a convexed
    ground-contacting member configured to permit the rest to rock back and
    forth.


CLS 297/423.44
TXT Adjustable to plural operative positions:
    Device under subclass 423.41 in which the portable self-supported rest
    includes an adjustment means for setting the rest at different positions of
    use.


CLS 297/423.45
TXT Rectilinearly in vertical direction:
    Device under subclass 423.44 in which the adjustment means is configured to
    permit the rest to move along a straight line which extends substantially
    perpendicular to a horizontal plane.


CLS 297/423.46
TXT Angularly:
    Device under subclass 423.44 wherein the adjustment means is configured to
    permit the rest to be tilted at various angles relative to a substantially
    horizontal surface.


CLS 297/440.1
TXT HAVING DETACHABLY INTERFITTING PARTS OR COMPONENTS; I.E., KNOCKDOWN:Device
    under the class definition including two parts or components which are
    configured for interconnecting or interlocking with each other at a joint,
    and which may be moved relative to each other to selectively join or
    disjoin the parts or components, and wherein such joints are the sole
    connecting means to hold the two parts or components together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for a removable seat on an occupant- propelled walker.

    7+,     for a crib side removably connected to a seating device.

    16.1+,  for a collapsible chair wherein the components are so connected as
    to be   movable relative to each other, but not removable from each other.

    129,    for a seating device which converts to a nonoccupant supporting
    device by removing a component and replacing it with another device or in a
    different relationship.

    133,    for a rocker detachable from a seat.

    134,    for a seat detachable from a subjacent  table or stool.

    153,    for a table detachable from a chair arm.

    411.26+, for an armrest detachably connected to a seating device by
    manipulated joint.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclass 114 for a knockdown camp bed, subclass 285 for a
    knockdown and removable bed part, and subclasses 288+ for a bed corner
    fastening.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclass 151 for a kit of
    separable parts.

    248,    Supports, subclass 165 for a knockdown stand, subclasses 220.21+
    for a bracket interlocked with its support by a manipulated joint.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for joints and
    connections in general.


CLS 297/440.11
TXT Detachable fabric component:
    Device under subclass 440.1 wherein one of the parts or components is
    either: (1) made of a piece of flaccid cloth having a loop or sleeve for
    inserting or fitting into the other part or component to detachably hold
    them together; or (2) configured to detachably clamp or grip a piece of
    flaccid cloth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for a removable fabric crib side.

    218.1+, for an upholstery cover detachably connected to a frame.

    219.1+, for a detachable supplemental fabric cover having an attaching
    means for connecting the cover to a seating device.

    452.13, for a flexible panel fixed to a frame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 98.1+ for a fabric crib and subclass 122 for a
    fabric hammock.

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 153+ for a
    horizontally supported planar surface having separable components.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, appropriate
    subclasses for particular fastening means utilizing a manipulated joint.


CLS 297/440.12
TXT Sheet material folded to form a chair or seat:
    Device under subclass 440.1 in which two components are formed from a piece
    of stiff or semirigid material such as cardboard, plastic, sheet metal,
    etc., wherein the piece includes hinge or score lines therein to allow the
    piece to be folded along the score or hinge lines to form a seating device.


CLS 297/440.13
TXT Slotted components normal to each other:
    Device under subclass 440.1 wherein each of the components' joints contains
    a bifurcated portion, wherein the distance between two arms of one
    bifurcated portion of a component is equal to the thickness of the other
    component, and the joint is formed by moving the bifurcated portions of the
    components toward each other so that the arms of each bifurcated portion of
    one component straddle an apex of each bifurcated portion of the other
    component.


CLS 297/440.14
TXT Modular components:
    Device under subclass 440.1 in which one component comprises a plurality of
    independent standardized elements which are configured to be interconnected
    to form the complete component, and wherein the elements are configured to
    be relatively interchangeable with one another for various different
    structural constructions or for flexible arrangements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248,    for coupling means that join independent seats to each other.


CLS 297/440.15
TXT Interfitted back and bottom or back frame and bottom frame:
    Device under subclass 440.1 including a back or a frame on which the back
    is mounted, and a bottom or a frame on which the bottom is mounted, wherein
    the back or back frame includes structure configured to detachably join
    with a connection means of the bottom or bottom frame.


CLS 297/440.16
TXT Including a substantially upright post slidably inserted into an elongated
    recess:Device under subclass 440.15 in which one of the back or bottom, or
    one of the back frame or bottom frame, includes a substantially vertical
    extending elongated element which is received within a comparably sized
    aperture located in the other of said back or bottom, or in the other of
    said back frame or bottom frame.


CLS 297/440.17
TXT One-piece back and arm:
    Device under subclass 440.15 including an arm- rest made of one-piece
    construction with the back (or back frame) of a seating device.


CLS 297/440.18
TXT One-piece back and leg:
    Device under subclass 440.15 including a leg made of one-piece construction
    with the back (or back frame) of a seating device.


CLS 297/440.19
TXT Front leg:
    Device under subclass 440.18 wherein the leg is a front leg of the seating
    device.


CLS 297/440.2
TXT Interfitted back and back frame:
    Device under subclass 440.1 including a back and a frame on which the back
    is mounted, wherein the back includes structure configured to detachably
    closely join with a connection means of the back frame.


CLS 297/440.21
TXT Including a substantially upright post slidably inserted into an elongated
    recess:Device under subclass 440.2 in which one of the back or back frame
    includes a substantially vertical extending elongated element which is
    received within a comparably sized aperture located in the other of said
    back or back frame.


CLS 297/440.22
TXT Interfitted bottom and bottom frame:
    Device under subclass 440.1 including a bottom and a frame on which the
    bottom is mounted, wherein the bottom includes structure config-ured to
    detachably closely join with a connection means of the bottom frame.


CLS 297/440.23
TXT Front, rear legs, and armrest form a unit detachable from bottom or
    back:Device under subclass 440.1 including an armrest and a front and rear
    leg which together form a complete unit detachably connected to a bottom or
    back of a seating device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    411.23+, for a portable armrest configured to be attached to various
    seating devices, subclasses 411.26+ for detachable armrest designed for a
    particular seating device.


CLS 297/440.24
TXT Telescoping hollow parts or components:
    Device under subclass 440.1 wherein the interfitted parts include
    interfitting hollow members configured to be inserted into one another to
    detachably closely join the parts together.


CLS 297/445.1
TXT BOTTOM, BACK AND LEG, I.E., CHAIR:

    Device under class definition comprising a supporting surface for receiving
    the buttocks or posterior of an occupant combined with a surface for
    engaging and supporting the back of an occupant and having means for
    spacing and supporting said surfaces relative to the ground or floor.


CLS 297/446.1
TXT Back or back standard integral with leg:

    Device under subclass 445.1 wherein the back or the structure on which the
    back is mounted and a leg are of one-piece construction.


CLS 297/446.2
TXT Integral with plural rear legs:

    Device under subclass 446.1 wherein the one-piece construction comprises
    more than one rear leg.


CLS 297/447.1
TXT Front leg:

    Device under subclass 446.1 wherein the one-piece construction includes a
    front leg.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    294,    for a resilient back and front leg of one-piece construction.


CLS 297/447.2
TXT Integral with plural front legs:

    Device under subclass 447.1 wherein the one-piece construction includes
    more than one front leg.


CLS 297/447.3
TXT And forms lateral sides of bottom:

    Device under subclass 447.1 comprising a continuous member which extends
    forwardly from the bottom portion of the back member to the upper portion
    of the front leg and between which the seat is supported.


CLS 297/447.4
TXT Legs interbraced between bottom and ground:

    Device under subclass 446.1 wherein the legs are strengthened by a strut
    which is connected to the legs at a point intermediate the ends of the legs.


CLS 297/448.1
TXT Front leg integral with rear leg:

    Device under subclass 445.1 wherein the front and rear legs are of
    one-piece construction.


CLS 297/448.2
TXT Extends along ground surface:

    Device under subclass 448.1 wherein the one-piece construction includes a
    length that lies upon the supporting surface (e.g., floor or ground).


CLS 297/449.1
TXT Interbraced bottom, back and leg:

    Device under subclass 445.1 wherein either a single strengthening strut or
    stay is connected to each of the bottom, back and legs, or the bottom, back
    and legs are strengthened by a plurality of struts or stays which are
    connected to each other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 305+ for a braced bedstead.

    248,    Supports, subclass 440 for an interbraced support surface and legs.


CLS 297/450.1
TXT Back or bottom connected at lateral side to end support:

    Device under subclass 445.1 wherein the back or bottom is secured to a side
    member positioned laterally thereof.


CLS 297/451.1
TXT Back standard secured below or to underside of bottom:

    Device under subclass 445.1 wherein the back support is connected to the
    chair in a plane lower than the bottom or is connected to the underportion
    of the bottom.


CLS 297/451.11
TXT Plastic material:

    Device under subclass 445.1 wherein the chair is made of synthetic type
    stock (e.g., resins, polymers, fiberglass, etc.).


CLS 297/451.12
TXT Integral bottom, back and legs:

    Device under subclass 451.11 in which the plastic material which forms the
    chair is of one-piece construction.


CLS 297/451.13
TXT Hollow component:

    Device under subclass 451.11 in which the plastic element which forms the
    chair includes a cavity or space therein.


CLS 297/451.2
TXT Three support legs only:

    Device under subclass 445.1 in which the seat bottom is supported on three
    legs.


CLS 297/451.3
TXT Two support legs only:

    Device under subclass 445.1 in which two legs extend between the seat
    bottom and the ground surface.


CLS 297/451.4
TXT Single non-moving support leg:

    Device under subclass 445.1 in which the seat is supported by only one leg
    in such a manner that the seat is not movable relative thereto (e.g.,
    rotatable, vertically adjustable etc.).


CLS 297/451.5
TXT Cylindrical leg:

    Device under subclass 451.4 wherein the support leg has a circular cross
    section.


CLS 297/451.6
TXT Having diameter equal to that of bottom:

    Device under subclass 451.5 wherein the support leg together with the seat
    bottom are in the shape of a cylinder and have the same cross-sectional
    shape.


CLS 297/451.7
TXT Resilient bottom and leg:

    Device under subclass 445.1 wherein the bottom and leg together form a
    resilient frame which deforms under load and returns to its original shape
    upon release of the load.


CLS 297/451.8
TXT Modular component:

    Device under subclass 445.1 which is formed of components joined together
    and wherein some of the components are identical in shape  and size.


CLS 297/451.9
TXT Woven material (e.g., cane or basket chair):

    Device under subclass 445.1 which is made of intermeshed strips of cane or
    similar material.


CLS 297/452.1
TXT BOTTOM OR BACK:
    Device under the class definition including a seating device having
    structure configured to support or engage a back or buttocks of a seated
    occupant.

    (1)     Note.  A surface for supporting the buttocks of an occupant has
    been denominated in this schedule as a "bottom", and a surface for
    supporting a back of an occupant has been denominated a "back".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14+,    for a bottom and back connected to and storable in a wall or
    partition in nonuse position.

    92+,    for a combined bottom and back which    interchange and reverse
    their respec-tive functions.

    219.1+, for a detachably supplemental pad having a means for connecting the
    pad to a seating device.

    230.1+, for an auxiliary back supported on or from another seat or seat
    component.

    234+,   for an auxiliary bottom supported on or from another seat or seat
    component.

    252,    for an auxiliary seat having a bottom and back with means for
    attaching the device to a bleacher seat or the like.

    253,    for an auxiliary bottom and back secured in position by means
    insertable in the crevice between the primary bottom and back.

    254+,   for an auxiliary back with means for connecting it to a primary
    back.

    283.1+, for a bottom or back having a change-able or renewable support
    surface.

    284.1+, for a bottom or back having means to alter its contour.

    285+,   for a back having means to resiliently support it in operative
    position.

    311+,   for a bottom having means to move or permit movement relative to
    its sup-porting structure.

    353+,   for a back having means to move or permit movement relative to
    support-ing structure.

    354.1+, for a back having means to tilt or permit tilting.

    391+,   for a padded stool used to support an occupant in a seated position.

    445.1+, for the combination of a bottom, back,  and leg.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 652+ for a cushion.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings) appropriate subclasses for a
    panel of more general utility even though defined or disclosed as being a
    component of a chair or seat, particularly subclasses 782+ for a composite
    panel with a disparate edge or stiffening member.

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, appropriate subclasses for
    a horizontally supported planar surface of general utility.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, appropriate
    subclasses as the generic loci for a flexible panel.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclass 135 for a seat
    attachable to a tree or utility pole, subclass 230 for a workman's kneeling
    base which may function as a bottom.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 80+ for a spring panel of general
    utility as for a bottom, back, or cushion.


CLS 297/452.11
TXT Directly connected bottom and back:
    Device under subclass 452.1 wherein the seating device includes either: (1)
    a bottom and a back which are made of one-piece construction, or (2) a back
    having a lower edge joined immediately to a rear edge of a bottom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    285+,   for a back resiliently held in operative position.

    325+,   for a bottom and back joined together and tiltable as a unit.

    352,    for a back having means to detachably connect it to a horizontal
    supporting surface and see the notes thereto for other detachable backs.

    440.15+, for a bottom and back interconnected by a detachable joint.


CLS 297/452.12
TXT One-piece panel:
    Device under subclass 452.11 wherein the bottom and back are integral; i.e,
    made of a continuous length of material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93,     for an interchangeable and reversible one-piece bottom and back.

    299,    for a fabric one-piece bottom and back resiliently supported in
    operative position.

    351,    for a laterally folding one-piece fabric bottom and back.

    440.11, for a one-piece flexible bottom and back detachably connected to
    other components of a seat by a detachable joint.


CLS 297/452.13
TXT Flexible panel fixed to a frame (e.g., fabric, elastomeric sheet,
    etc.):Device under subclass 452.12 wherein the panel is made of a flaccid
    material and configured to be permanently attached to a skeletal structure
    of the bottom or back.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    440.11, for a seating device having a detachable fabric component.


CLS 297/452.14
TXT Rigid or semirigid plastic panel:
    Device under subclass 452.12 wherein the panel is a stiff panel made of a
    material formed of synthetic-type stock; e.g., resins, polymers, nylon,
    fiberglass, etc.


CLS 297/452.15
TXT Including means to provide or enhance resiliency: (e.g., slits, grooves,
    etc.):Device under subclass 452.14 wherein the panel includes a means to
    allow or improve flexing of the panel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    452.54, for a cushioned bottom or back with a spring integrally formed with
    a frame.


CLS 297/452.16
TXT Interconnected cushions for bottom and back:
    Device under subclass 452.11 wherein the bottom and back each includes
    cushioning material, and wherein the bottom cushion and back cushion are
    continuously formed or coupled together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219.1+, for flexible pad having means to detachably connect the pad to a
    seating device.


CLS 297/452.17
TXT Continuous cushioning material (e.g., one-piece cushion, bean bag):Device
    under subclass 452.16 wherein the bottom cushion and back cushion are
    either (a) continuously formed from one single piece of cushioning
    material, or (b) formed of a plurality of discrete particles of material
    that together provide a cushion support for the bottom and back of a seated
    occupant.


CLS 297/452.18
TXT Framework:
    Device under subclass 452.1 wherein significance is attributed to a
    skeletal base structure configured to underlie and support a bottom or back
    of the seating device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    440.1+, for detachably interfitted parts or components of a seating device.

    452.56, for a support panel that supports a cushion.


CLS 297/452.19
TXT Continuous bottom and back frame:
    Device under subclass 452.18 wherein the skeletal base structure includes a
    support member having a length extending downwardly from an upper portion
    of the back and forwardly to a front portion of the bottom of the seating
    device.


CLS 297/452.2
TXT Having elongated hollow member (e.g., tubular, etc.):
    Device under subclass 452.18 wherein the skeletal base structure includes
    support members formed from hollow elongated elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    440.24, for telescoping hollowed parts or components of a seating device.


CLS 297/452.21
TXT Contoured bottom:
    Device under subclass 452.1 having a bottom shaped to substantially conform
    with the shape or curvature of buttocks of a seated occupant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284.1+, for a bottom having means to change its contour.

    452.29+, for a contoured back.


CLS 297/452.22
TXT Planar bottom with a central recess:
    Device under subclass 452.21 in which the bottom comprises a substantially
    planar surface having a depression or indentation located substantially at
    a center of the bottom.


CLS 297/452.23
TXT Laterally extending contour:
    Device under subclass 452.21 wherein the bottom includes a contoured
    surface configured to extend from one lateral edge to another lateral edge
    of the bottom.


CLS 297/452.24
TXT Contoured rigid base:
    Device under 452.23 wherein the contoured surface is made of hard material;
    e.g., wood, rigid plastic, metal, etc.


CLS 297/452.25
TXT Including symmetrical thigh-support portions:
    Device under subclass 452.24 in which the contoured bottom includes
    substantially similar spaced areas configured to support the thighs of a
    seated occupant.


CLS 297/452.26
TXT Preshaped foam pad:
    Device under subclass 452.23 in which the bottom is a preshaped contoured
    surface made of cushioning material; e.g., foam rubber.

    (1)     Note.  A cushion of uniform thickness placed over a rigid contoured
    base is found in subclass 452.24.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219.1+, for detachable supplemental pad hav-ing means for connecting the
    pad to a seating device.


CLS 297/452.27
TXT Different densities of foam:
    Device under subclass 452.26 in which the preshaped contoured pad comprises
    two layers or areas made of different types of foams; i.e., foams having
    different hardness or resiliency.


CLS 297/452.28
TXT Custom fitted for a particular occupant:
    Device under subclass 452.23 wherein the contoured bottom is particularly
    shaped to conform with the exact dimensions, contours, or comfort of a
    particular individual's buttocks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    for a method of shaping an article to the body of a person.


CLS 297/452.29
TXT Contoured back:
    Device under subclass 452.1 including a back configured to substantially
    conform with the shape or curvature of a back of a seated occupant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230.1+, for a  contoured supplemental back.

    284.1+, for a back having means for changing its contour.

    411.41, for an armrest extending from a back.

    452.21+, for a contoured bottom.

    464+    and 486, for a body retainer comprising movable wings extending
    forwardly from the side edges of a back.


CLS 297/452.3
TXT For lower back; i.e., lumbar region:
    Device under subclass 452.29 wherein the back of the seating device is
    curved to provide specific support for a lower portion of a back of a
    seated occupant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284.4+, for an adjustable lumbar support.


CLS 297/452.31
TXT Rigid or semirigid preshaped panel:
    Device under subclass 452.3 wherein the contoured lower back support is
    made of a material that is substantially nonyielding or that yields to a
    slight degree.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230.12, for a supplemental back which includes a rigid panel.


CLS 297/452.32
TXT Preshaped cushioning material:
    Device under subclass 452.3 wherein the lower back support is a preshaped
    contoured surface made of cushioning material.

    (1)     Note.  A cushion of uniform thickness placed over a rigid or
    semirigid contoured base is found in subclass 452.31.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219.1+, for detachable supplemental pad hav-ing means for connecting the
    pad to a seating device.


CLS 297/452.33
TXT Laterally extending contour:
    Device under subclass 452.29 wherein the back includes a contoured surface
    configured to extend from one lateral edge to another lateral edge of the
    back of the seating device.


CLS 297/452.34
TXT Including a projected side member:
    Device under subclass 452.33 including a member configured to protrude from
    a lateral side edge of the back to an extent so as to provide substantial
    lateral support for a seated occupant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284.9,  for adjustable lateral supports.


CLS 297/452.35
TXT Preshaped cushioning material:
    Device under subclass 452.34 wherein the contoured surface is preshaped and
    made of resilient cushioning material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219.1+, for detachable supplemental pad hav-ing means for connecting the
    pad to a seating device.


CLS 297/452.36
TXT Rigid or semirigid preshaped panel:
    Device under subclass 452.34 wherein the contoured back is preshaped and
    made of material that is substantially nonyielding or that yields to a
    slight degree.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230.12, for a supplemental back which includes a rigid panel.


CLS 297/452.37
TXT Having varying density foam:
    Device under subclass 452.29 in which the contoured back comprises two
    layers or areas made of different types of foam material; i.e., foams
    having different degrees of hardness.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    452.29, for a contoured bottom including foam of different densities.


CLS 297/452.38
TXT Having a trim panel:
    Device under subclass 452.1 including an auxiliary member which is mounted
    to the bottom or back for concealing various fastening means or for
    aesthetic appearance.


CLS 297/452.39
TXT Cantilevered bottom or back:
    Device under subclass 452.1 wherein the bottom or back is attached to an
    upright support surface; e.g., wall, upright panel, etc., and extends
    outwardly therefrom.


CLS 297/452.4
TXT Having a laterally adjustable dimension:
    Device under subclass 452.1 wherein the bottom or back includes a means for
    permitting the bottom or back to expand or contract in lateral directions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233+,   for plural related seats which may shift laterally to effect the
    number of seats available for use.


CLS 297/452.41
TXT Having fluent material:
    Device under subclass 452.1 wherein the bottom or back includes a flowable
    medium; e.g., water, gas, air, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284.3   and 284.6, for seats with readily adjustable fluid containing
    portions.


CLS 297/452.42
TXT Including a ventilating means:
    Device under subclass 452.1 wherein the back or bottom includes a means to
    facilitate circulation of air to provide ventilation for a seated occupant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136+,   for a seat with means to transfer heat primarily to or from a seat
    or its occupant, or means to treat the seat as by fume, smoke, or the like.
    See the search notes to subclass 136 for the line with other classes.

    180.1+, for a seat with means to force or propel air circulation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 652.1+ for a ventilated cushion and subclasses
    724+ for a ventilated  mattress.


CLS 297/452.43
TXT Supplemental ventilating pad:
    Device under subclass 452.42 wherein the ventilating means is located on or
    within a cushion configured to rest on an occupant-supporting surface of
    the bottom or back of the seating device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219.1+, for detachable supplemental nonventilating pad having means to
    connect the pad to a seating device.


CLS 297/452.44
TXT Wire spring element between pads' layers:
    Device under subclass 452.43 including a convoluted spring wire located
    intermediate a top layer and a bottom layer of the pad.


CLS 297/452.45
TXT Projecting elements:
    Device under subclass 452.43 including protruding members attached to or
    continuously formed with an inner surface of the pad and which serves to
    space a top layer from a bottom layer of the pad.


CLS 297/452.46
TXT Apertures in primary bottom or back:
    Device under subclass 452.42 wherein the back or bottom is a primary back
    or bottom and the ventilating means are holes in the primary bottom or back
    of the seating device.


CLS 297/452.47
TXT Aperture in upholstery:
    Device under subclass 452.46 wherein the primary bottom or back of the
    seating device includes covering material; e.g., a cover, padding, etc.,
    wherein the holes are formed in the covering material of the primary bottom
    or back.


CLS 297/452.48
TXT Cushioned:
    Device under subclass 452.1 in which the bottom or back includes a padding
    material such as foam, fabric, cotton, felt, etc., for absorbing shock and
    providing comfort to a seated occupant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219.1+, for flexible pad having means to detachably connect the pad to a
    seating device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 652+ for a cushion.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 91+ for an upholstery making apparatus or
    process.


CLS 297/452.49
TXT Including a support spring:
    Device under subclass 452.48 wherein the cushioned bottom or back includes
    a resilient spring element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 230+ for a bed bottom comprising fabrics and
    spring; subclasses 246+ for a bed bottom comprising springs.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 80+ for a spring panel and see (2) Note
    of subclass 80.


CLS 297/452.5
TXT Coil compression spring:
    Device under subclass 452.49 in which the resilient spring element is in
    the form of a compressible wire having at least two revolutions which
    extend upwardly in a vertical direction to exert a bias force to a seating
    surface of the bottom or back.


CLS 297/452.51
TXT Encapsulated by cushion:
    Device under subclass 452.5 in which the coil compression spring element is
    embedded inside the cushioning material.


CLS 297/452.52
TXT Noncoil wire spring (e.g., linear or sinuous wires, etc.):
    Device under subclass 452.49 in which the spring element is made of metal
    that has been drawn into a very long thin thread or rod that is usually
    circular in cross section, and wherein the spring element is in the form of
    a straight or meandering tension or torque-type wire.


CLS 297/452.53
TXT Encapsulated by cushion:
    Device under subclass 452.52 wherein the noncoil wire spring is embedded
    internally in the cushioning material.


CLS 297/452.54
TXT Spring integral with frame of bottom or back:
    Device under subclass 452.49 in which the resilient spring element and a
    supporting frame of the bottom or back are made of one-piece construction
    (e.g., a spring and a frame integrally formed of molded plastic, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    452.15, for a one-piece plastic bottom and back panel having slits or
    grooves to enhance the resiliency.


CLS 297/452.55
TXT Including a support panel ( e.g., pan-type seat, etc.):
    Device under subclass 452.48 in which the cushioned bottom or back includes
    a platform or continuous surface made of rigid or flexible material of
    uniform thickness.


CLS 297/452.56
TXT Flexible panel (e.g., fabric or elastomeric sheet, web):

    Device under subclass 452.55 wherein the support panel is made of pliant or
    flaccid material; e.g., woven, elastic, rubberized stock, etc., in panel or
    web form to allow bending or flexing.


CLS 297/452.57
TXT Encapsulated panel:

    Device under subclass 452.55 in which the support panel is embedded
    internally in the cushioning material of the bottom or back.


CLS 297/452.58
TXT Having a fixed cover:

    Device under subclass 452.48 in which the cushioned bottom or back includes
    a cover which is bonded or permanently attached to either: 1) the
    cushioning material of the bottom or back, or 2) to a framework that
    supports the cushioned bottom or back.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218.1+, for a primary upholstery cover that is detachably secured to a
    support.


CLS 297/452.59
TXT Fastened to a support framework:

    Device under subclass 452.58 in which the cover is permanently attached to
    the framework of the cushioned bottom or back by a fastening means; e.g.,
    staples, hog-rings, tacks, etc.


CLS 297/452.6
TXT Including a fixing means extending through cushioning material:

    Device under subclass 452.59 further including a binding means for securing
    the cover to a framework of the bottom or back, wherein the binding means
    is configured to penetrate through the cushioning material of the bottom or
    back, whereby the cover is secured at points other than points at its
    perimeter.


CLS 297/452.61
TXT Bonded to cushioning material:

    Device under subclass 452.58 wherein the cover is permanently secured to
    the cushioning material by means of adhesive, heat welding, etc.


CLS 297/452.62
TXT Cover formed from a plurality of discrete sections:

    Device under subclass 452.58 in which the cover is comprised of a number of
    distinct sections which together form an occupant-engaging surface.


CLS 297/452.63
TXT Made of individual elongated members extending across a support frame
    (e.g., webs, straps, slats, stringed beads, etc.):

    Device under subclass 452.1 wherein the bottom or back is formed by a
    plurality of distinct elongated support elements which are arranged to be
    either: 1) spaced in parallel orientation or closely adjacent to each
    other, or 2) in a woven pattern.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230.11, for a supplemental back having a flexible supporting surface which
    spans a framework.


CLS 297/452.64
TXT Intermeshed ( e.g., crisscrossed, etc.):

    Device under subclass 452.63 wherein the individual support elements are
    interwoven with each other in a crossing pattern.


CLS 297/452.65
TXT Rigid or semirigid hollow shell:

    Device under subclass 452.1 wherein the bottom or back includes two
    separated layers made of material that is substantially nonyielding or that
    yields to a slight degree, wherein the layers are spaced from one another
    to form an internal space therebetween.


CLS 297/461
TXT Device under the class definition comprising a generally horizontal
    supporting surface spaced from the floor or ground by a base, legs, or
    pedestal, said supporting surface including an upper load receiving area
    softened by a cushion, stuffing, or spring.

    (1)     Note.  The presence of a chair adjunct (e.g., leg rest) categorizes
    the device as a chair or seat, and such devices are found in the
    appropriate superior subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    214,    for a straddle seat with a cushioned top.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 652+ for a cushion of general utility.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 560+ for a resilient base.


CLS 297/462
TXT Device under subclass 461 in which the spacing means comprises an enclosed
    framework with a completely encompassing skirt or upholstery cover.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188.09+, for a seat having a receptacle directly under the seat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 91+ for an upholstery making apparatus or
    process.


CLS 297/463.1
TXT CHAIR HARDWARE (E.G., BRACKET, OPERATING LEVER, LEG EXTENSION, ETC.):

    Device under the class definition including members for  mounting or aiding
    in the structural integrity of a chair or seat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 18+ for wheels, casters, or
    sliding shoes mounted for movably supporting furniture and other like
    objects.

    114,    Ships, subclass 363 for support for the body or foot of a user
    aboard a ship.


CLS 297/463.2
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Device under the class definition which is not classifiable in any prior
    subclass.


CLS 297/464
TXT BODY OR OCCUPANT RESTRAINT OR CONFINEMENT:
    Apparatus under the class definition comprising means to immobilize,
    restrict the movement of, or to position the body of an occupant relative
    to a seating device, or to retain the body in a sitting position.

    (1)     Note.  A body or occupant restraint having an attaching means and
    disclosed as connecting the body or occupant restraint to a seating device
    is included in this and the indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    391+,   for headrest.

    411.41, for an armrest extending from a back.

    423.1+, for a rest for a knee, leg, or foot.


CLS 297/465
TXT Jacket, vest, or suit restraint:

    Apparatus under subclass 464 comprising a clothinglike element or a
    garmentlike member having an attaching means adapted to be connected to a
    seating device; the garmentlike member being engageable with the upper
    torso of the body including the shoulders and the chest region such that
    the garmentlike member is provided with a pair of arm holes and a neck hole
    for the reception of the arms and the neck, respectively, of the body when
    the garmentlike member is in its body restraining condition relative to a
    seating device.


CLS 297/466
TXT Leg or arm restraint:

    Apparatus under subclass 464 including means engageable with a limb of an
    occupant to prevent or restrict the movement of the limb of an occupant
    while seated in a seating device.


CLS 297/467
TXT Having crotch strap or post:

    Apparatus under subclass 464 comprising either (a) a flexible band intended
    to pass between the legs of an occupant seated in a seating device so as to
    limit or prevent movement of the occupant's body relative to the seating
    device or (b) an upstanding, postlike member extending upwardly from the
    forward portion of a seating device and intended to be located between the
    legs of an occupant seated in the seating device so as to limit or prevent
    movement of the occupant's body relative to the seating device.


CLS 297/468
TXT Safety belt or harness, e.g., lap belt or shoulder harness:

    Apparatus under subclass 464 comprising a flexible straplike member
    engageable with the body of an occupant.

    (1)     Note.  Mere, incidental attachment of the belt or harness device or
    accessories therefor to named, conventional vehicle body portions (e.g.,
    the vehicle body or frame, center post, transmission tunnel, roof rail,
    floor pan, side panel, or vehicle seat) or the location of a portion of the
    belt or harness device relative to such named, conventional vehicle body
    portions will not exclude a document from placement in this and the
    indented subclasses.  In regard to the classification of a document between
    Class 297, subclasses 468+ and Class 280, subclasses 801.1+, classification
    in Class 280, subclasses 801.1+ is proper where a safety belt or harness
    device is combined with significant land vehicle structure. Such
    significant vehicle structure may include such examples as (a) the vehicle
    structure has been specifically modified in some way to accommodate the
    belt or harness device, (b) the vehicle structure operationally cooperates
    with the belt or harness device (i.e., the folding of the front seat back
    moves the belt system to allow occupant access to the rear seat of the
    vehicle or the belt or harness device relies upon the opening or closing of
    a vehicle door for its operation), or (c) where the belt or harness device
    is combined with other extraneous vehicle structure (e.g., a door or a
    portion thereof, a door opening, seating arrangements peculiar to a
    vehicle, a vehicle brake or bumper, a windshield, a dashboard, or a rocker
    panel).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    275,    for a baby jumper with a belt or garment restrainer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., particularly subclasses 572+ for a
    device in the nature of a buckle for joining two straplike members.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 770 for tethering a human being,
    subclass 771 for a tether attached to a vehicle, and subclass 857 for a
    body- or appendage-encircling collar or band for a human being; see search
    notes of these subclasses for further field of search.

    128,    Surgery, appropriate subclasses for a device in the nature of a
    straplike member for restraining an occupant's body during surgical
    operations or for therapeutic procedures.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 122 for a seat and safety belt combined with
    significant aircraft structure; subclass 151 for parachute harness.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 733 for a vehicle, generally, provided with
    an inflatable passenger restraint device which inflates upon impact and
    which is in the nature of, or used in conjunction with, a belt or strap;
    and subclasses 801.1+ for a safety belt or harness device combined with
    significant land vehicle structure, and see (1) Note above.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclasses 106+ for body harness
    used in buoyant devices.


CLS 297/469
TXT Passive restraint system:

    Apparatus under subclass 468 wherein the straplike member is automatically
    movable from a seat entry position so as to provide the occupant easy entry
    into the seating device to an occupant restraining position without any
    deliberate or manipulative occupant effort upon the apparatus.


CLS 297/470
TXT With means to absorb energy of acceleration:

    Apparatus under subclass 468 wherein the straplike member is provided with
    means to cushion, soften, or neutralize the shock or strain on the
    occupant's body as the occupant is forced against the restraint under
    sudden deceleration or impact conditions imposed upon a seating device or
    its supporting structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 266+ for a fluid resistance brake or shock
    absorber of general utility.


CLS 297/471
TXT Deformable or stretchable element:

    Apparatus under subclass 470 wherein the means to cushion, soften, or
    neutralize the shock or strain comprises either (a) at least a portion of
    the straplike member being formed from a stretchable material in which
    energy is absorbed during the stretching process or (b) an additional
    deformable means associated with the straplike member which absorbs energy
    during the change in the configuration of the deformable means.


CLS 297/472
TXT Element is permanently deformed, i.e., one time use:

    Apparatus under subclass 471 in which the change in the configuration of
    the deformable means is permanent so that the deformable means can be
    utilized to perform its energy absorption only one time.


CLS 297/473
TXT Belt or harness rides on seat connected slide:

    Apparatus under subclass 468 including a track or trolley fastened to a
    part of the seating device, and wherein the straplike member is attached to
    the track or trolley so as to permit the straplike member to move
    therealong.


CLS 297/474
TXT Retractable:

    Apparatus under subclass 468 wherein the straplike member is connected to a
    take-up means to withdraw or take-up the straplike member to a stowed or
    out-of-way position.


CLS 297/475
TXT Belt winds upon take-up reel:

    Apparatus under subclass 474 wherein the take-up means comprises a reel or
    drum device upon which the straplike member winds or unwinds.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 370+, 520+, and 550+
    for a reeling device, winding or unwinding device for an elongated material
    of general use.


CLS 297/476
TXT Having means to lock belt against further extension when in its occupant
    restraining position:

    Apparatus under subclass 475 including locking or clamping means to prevent
    further unwinding of the straplike member from the take-up reel, the
    locking or clamping means being operative either (a) during the act of
    placing the straplike member into the position of engagement about the body
    of the occupant or (b) during a sudden deceleration or unexpected motion
    condition imposed upon the seating device or its supporting structure after
    the straplike member has been located in the position of engagement about
    the body of the occupant of the seating device.


CLS 297/477
TXT Electrically operated:

    Apparatus under subclass 476 wherein the locking or clamping means is
    provided with electrically controlled or operated means to actuate or
    release the locking or clamping means.


CLS 297/478
TXT Inertia actuated:

    Apparatus under subclass 476 wherein the locking or clamping means is
    actuated by means responsive to a sudden deceleration, an impact condition,
    or any other sudden, unexpected motion condition imposed upon a seating
    device or its supporting structure.


CLS 297/479
TXT Having means to lock belt against further extension when in its occupant
    restraining position:

    Apparatus under subclass 474 including locking or clamping means to prevent
    further protraction or extension of the straplike member from the take-up
    means, the locking or clamping means being operative either (a) during the
    act of placing the straplike member into the position of engagement about
    the body of the occupant, or (b) during a sudden deceleration or unexpected
    motion condition imposed upon the seating device or its supporting
    structure after the straplike member has been located in the position of
    engagement about the body of the occupant of the seating device.


CLS 297/480
TXT Inertia responsive locking or tightening of belt or harness:

    Apparatus under subclass 468 wherein the straplike member allows at least
    some limited movement of the occupant's body relative to his seat while the
    straplike member is in the position of engagement about the occupant's body
    and includes means responsive to a sudden deceleration, an impact
    condition, or any other sudden, unexpected motion condition imposed upon
    the seating device or its supporting structure to either (a) lock the
    straplike member against protraction or extension thereof by the occupant's
    body as the occupant is forced against the straplike member so as to
    restrain the occupant to his seat or (b) tighten the straplike member by
    means of a take-up device about the occupant's body so as to restrain the
    occupant to his seat.


CLS 297/481
TXT Having means for storage in nonuse position or in position to be handy for
    use:

    Apparatus under subclass 468 comprising (a) means to facilitate storage of
    the straplike member into an out-of-way position during times when the
    straplike member is not used to perform its restraint function or (b) means
    to locate the straplike member in a storage position such that an occupant
    can easily find and apply the straplike member in engagement with his body.


CLS 297/482
TXT Belt or belt anchor covers:

    Apparatus under subclass 468 comprising (a) means for covering a portion of
    the straplike member or (b) boot or connector cover means for covering the
    juncture region at which the straplike member is connected to the seating
    device, to the surrounding structure supporting the seating device, or to a
    buckle means.


CLS 297/483
TXT Shoulder belt or harness:

    Apparatus under subclass 468 wherein the straplike member has means
    engageable with a shoulder of the occupant.


CLS 297/484
TXT Engageable with both shoulders of occupant: Apparatus under subclass 483
    wherein the shoulder engageable means is engageable with both shoulders of
    the occupant simultaneously.


CLS 297/485
TXT Having means providing easily releasable attachment to a chair or seat:

    Apparatus under 468 wherein the straplike member is provided with means for
    attachment thereof to a seating device and the connection between the
    attaching means and the seating device is adapted to be easily attachable
    and releasable.


CLS 297/486
TXT Shoulder restraint:

    Apparatus under subclass 464 comprising a safety guard means engageable
    with the shoulder of the occupant of a seating device.


CLS 297/487
TXT Front guard or barrier:

    Apparatus under subclass 464 comprising an obstruction positionable
    directly before an occupant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for a walker or skater frame having an occupant guard.

    7+,     for a seat with a removable or foldable crib side.

    254+,   for an auxiliary bottom with an occupant guard.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 425+ for a side guard for a bed.


CLS 297/488
TXT Padded or cushioned member:

    Apparatus under subclass 487 wherein the obstruction includes a soft
    yieldable means thereon for cushioning occupant impact upon the obstruction
    should a collision or sudden deceleration occur.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTION


CLS 297/900
TXT CHAIR FOR SUNTANNING IN THE PRONE (I.E., FACEDOWN) POSITION:

    Device under the class definition designed especially for suntanning by
    providing an opening in a body supporting member for reading, breathing,
    and the like when the user is in a prone position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    452.1+, for a seat constructed to support an occupant's back and posterior,
    in particular subclass 452.13 which provides a device under the subclass
    definition, including a flexible panel fixed to a frame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclass 111 for cots characterized by sections so that they
    may be folded or collapsed into a flat bundle of a size determined by the
    sections, subclass 638 for support for a discrete potion of user to permit
    passage of air for breathing, and subclass 656 for occupant support adapted
    for outdoor use.


CLS 298/
TTL LAND VEHICLES:  DUMPING

CLS 298/
TXT Vehicles other than track or rail vehicles and commonly known as
    dumping-wagons, dump-carts, dumping-sleighs, dumping-barrows, chute-wagons,
    etc., adapted for carrying a freight-load and so constructed and arranged
    that by manipulation of the whole or a part of the vehicle the load or some
    considerable part thereof will move by gravity to unload the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  For dump-cars see Class 105, Railway Rolling Stock, subclass
    239, and indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  For a self-loading or unloading vehicle having a load
    receiving portion which is pivotable relative to the horizontal, see Class
    414, Material Article Handling, subclasses 469+, and see especially the
    search note to this class (298) which appears in subclass 469.

    (3)     Note.  For a device for emptying a portable receptacle, see Class
    414, Material or Article Handling, subclasses 403+, and see particularly
    indented subclasses 419+.



    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, appropriate subclasses, for closures
    of the type provided for and see the search notes thereto in section IV for
    the loci of closures in other classes.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses, for other dispensing devices.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 47.17+ for handle-propelled tiltable
    vehicles, and see the search note under indented subclass 47.26 referring
    to Class 298.


CLS 298/1
TXT Patents falling within this class and not properly classifiable in other
    subclasses thereof.


CLS 298/2
TXT Specially adapted to be propelled by hand.


CLS 298/3
TXT Mounted on one wheel.


CLS 298/4
TXT Supported on runners.


CLS 298/5
TXT Dumping-vehicles of all types mounted on two wheels.


CLS 298/6
TXT Those of the type indicated where means is provided to operate an end-gate
    or cover through the dumping operation of the vehicle or means for doing so
    manually where such means is located at a distance from the end-gate or
    cover.


CLS 298/7
TXT Dumping-vehicles of any type having some modification of the vehicle to
    adapt a delivery chute thereto or some combined structure of the vehicle
    and delivery-chute.

    (1)     Note.  Chutes, per se, will be found in Class 193, Conveyors,
    Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, subclass 4, and indented subclasses.


CLS 298/8
TXT Dumping-vehicles of any type where the load is divided into separate units
    and can be separately dumped, excepting that a tiltable load-receptacle
    having removable partitions is not included, but is found in other
    subclasses of this class under proper type.


CLS 298/9
TXT Dumping vehicles under the class definition in which the load-receptacle is
    rotatable about a vertical axis prior to, during or after tilting thereof.


CLS 298/10
TXT Those in which the load-receptacle rotates about a fixed pivot to turn the
    load out of the open top of the receptacle.


CLS 298/11
TXT Where the load-receptacle is tilted to permit the load to slide off the
    bottom of the receptacle, there being also an elevation of the
    load-receptacle as a whole.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 697+, for material moving
    devices with a vertical swinging load support of the tilting shovel or fork
    type.


CLS 298/12
TXT Dumping vehicles under the class definition in which the load-receptacle as
    a whole is movable in a horizontal or downwardly inclined direction prior
    to, during or after tilting thereof.


CLS 298/13
TXT Those of the type indicated where the load is dumped at the side of the
    vehicle.


CLS 298/14
TXT Provided with additional means for effecting any of the movements of the
    load-receptacle, either to dump the load or return the receptacle to its
    load-carrying position, or both.


CLS 298/15
TXT Where the operation is effected by a movement of the vehicle as a whole or
    through the movement of some substantial part thereof.


CLS 298/16
TXT Operated by the power plant that propels the vehicle.


CLS 298/17
TXT Where the load-receptacle is capable of assuming an inclined or tilted
    position to permit the load to slide off the inclined bottom of the
    receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 166.


CLS 298/17.5
TXT Devices under subclass 17 in which the load-receptacle is (1) selectively
    tiltable about at least one of a plurality of pivot axes or (2) tiltable
    about an axis which progressively changes concurrently with the tilting
    (e.g., rocking support).


CLS 298/17.6
TXT Devices under subclass 17.5 in which the load-receptacle is optionally
    tiltable in a selected one of a plurality of different directions (e.g.,
    towards either side).


CLS 298/17.7
TXT Devices under subclass 17.6 in which the load-receptacle is optionally
    tiltable to either an end or a side.


CLS 298/17.8
TXT Devices under subclass 17.6 wherein the pivot axis about which the
    load-receptacle is tilted, during at least one tilting cycle, sequentially
    moves from one to another of a plurality of fulcrum points, (e.g., rocking
    support).


CLS 298/18
TXT Where the load is dumped at the side of the vehicle.


CLS 298/19
TXT Provided with additional means for effecting the tilting of the
    load-receptacle or returning it to its load-carrying position, or both.


CLS 298/20
TXT Where the operation is effected by a movement of the vehicle as a whole or
    through the movement of some substantial part thereof.


CLS 298/21
TXT Operated by the power plant that propels the vehicle.


CLS 298/22
TXT Provided with fluid-pressure operators.


CLS 298/23
TXT Those of the type indicated where means is provided to operate an end-gate
    or cover through the dumping operation of the vehicle or means for doing so
    manually where such means is located at a distance from the end-gate or
    cover.


CLS 298/24
TXT Consisting of a box-container having a movable part or parts adapted, when
    moved, to permit the load to fall by gravity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, particularly subclass 476, et seq.


CLS 298/25
TXT Consisting of sections pivoted together.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 29, and indented subclasses.


CLS 298/26
TXT Where the bottom as a whole is pivoted to tilt to permit the load to slide
    by gravity.

    (1)     Note.  Where the bottom is divided and each section is pivoted,
    search this class, subclass 29, and indented subclasses.


CLS 298/27
TXT Where the bottom of the load-receptacle can be opened to permit the load to
    drop by gravity to a position under the vehicle.


CLS 298/28
TXT The load-receptacle is provided with the removable part or parts indicated.


CLS 298/29
TXT Where the bottom of the load-carrier consists of a door or doors hinged to
    open and permit the load to drop.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class, subclass 25.


CLS 298/30
TXT Where the hinge extends transversely of the vehicle only.


CLS 298/31
TXT Where the hinge extends longitudinally of the vehicle only.


CLS 298/32
TXT Having a plurality of doors so hinged that they swing parallel to each
    other.


CLS 298/33
TXT So hinged that the doors swing in opposite directions.


CLS 298/34
TXT Swinging in opposite directions and toward a median of the vehicle in
    dropping the load.


CLS 298/35
TXT Swinging in opposite directions and toward the outside of the vehicle to
    drop the load.


CLS 298/36
TXT Also movable in a vertical direction.


CLS 298/37
TXT Those of the type indicated having a single door-closing operator so
    constructed that all the doors are tightly closed.  Such devices also
    permit the closing of one door in advance of another.


CLS 298/38
TXT Holding devices adapted to releasably hold a movable part of a dump-wagon
    in its normal or load-carrying position.

    (1)     Note.  Closure-fasteners of general utility will be found in Class
    292, Closure Fasteners.


CLS 299/
TTL MINING OR IN SITU  DISINTEGRATION OF  HARD MATERIAL

CLS 299/
TXT
    I.      This class provides for (a) the obtaining of valuable, naturally
    occurring minerals from the earth in a solid state (the phrase "solid
    state" including a state in which the minerals are in the form of particles
    of larger size than colloidal), (b) the obtaining of ice from a naturally
    occurring bed of ice, (c) the obtaining of naturally occurring,
    nonhydrocarbon, solid, valuable, minerals from the earth in a fluid state
    (the phrase "fluid state" including a dissolved state or a state of
    colloidal dispersion or suspension) or (d) the obtaining of any naturally
    occurring valuable material from the earth in a solid or fluid state when
    this is accomplished by the claimed use of a substantially horizontal
    tunnel providing a working space for human beings.

    II.     This class also provides for cutting, severing or breaking up of
    naturally occurring solid, hard material.  Such cutting, severing or
    breaking up of solid, hard material generally comprises, (a) recovering
    valuable material in desirable shapes or specific sized chunks, (b) forming
    an opening or cut in native material of larger cross-sectional surface area
    than the effective cutting area of the cutting means by movement of the
    means parallel to the exposed surface, or (c) forming a large horizontal
    passageway into the earth by continuously advancing a cutting device by
    means of a vehicle or the like which is limited to substantially horizontal
    operation, the cutting means forming the entire passageway in an
    uninterrupted advance movement as the vehicle or the like follows the
    cutting means into and along the passageway.

    III.    This class further includes miscellaneous subject matter which does
    not meet the criterion of I or II, but which relates to forming or using a
    large underground passageway in the earth and is not elsewhere classifiable.

    IV.     This class was partially formed from an unofficial classification
    that had been used by the Examiners for many years.  While the schedule and
    definitions are intended to be employed as completely consistant with
    present rules of classification, the claims of the patents at the time of
    the formation of this class have not been analyzed to the degree necessary
    to guarantee exact technical, original or cross-reference classification of
    all patents.

    V.      SEARCH CLASS:

    (INCLUDES STATEMENTS OF THE LINES WITH OTHER CLASSES)

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 3+ for a
    machine for cleaning foreign material from a surface.  Class 299 includes
    machines for in situ disintegration of purposely applied hard material such
    as concrete, linoleum, roofing, etc., but similar devices which remove
    accidently accumulated oil, grease, dirt, etc., are classified in Class 15.

    30,     Cutlery, appropriate subclass for a hand manipulated cutting tool
    of general utility.

    37,     Excavating, appropriate subclass for a process or apparatus for
    excavating relatively soft or alluvial material and particularly subclass 3
    for peat excavators and subclasses 307+ for dredgers.  The line between
    Class 299 and Class 37 relative generally turns on the relatively hardness
    of the material recovered, Class 299 taking devices limited by disclosure
    or claim to working hard material, with the exception that Class 37 type
    excavating when combined with separating of the excavated material into
    component parts is classified in Class 299.

    56,     Harvesters, for subject matter directed to gathering or cutting
    valuable plant products from above the surface of the earth.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 301+ for apparatus and
    methods of blasting.

    125,    Stone Working, appropriate subclass for subject matter directed to
    the manufacture or working of stone articles.  The line between Class 299
    and Class 125 generally is determined by disclosed use, Class 299 taking
    subject matter directed to working hard material in situ.  However, Class
    125 has some hand tools described as for working materials in situ, such as
    miners picks.

    166,    Wells, appropriate subclass for subject matter directed to winning
    valuable material which is naturally in the fluid state in the earth (such
    as water, oil or gas).  Furthermore, subject matter for recovering a
    hydrocarbon material from a well in a fluid state is classified in Class
    166, whether the material is described as originally in the solid state,
    merely too viscous to flow or trapped in cavities in shale or the like.
    However, if any of the valuable material is recovered in the solid state,
    or if a valuable solid material other than a hydrocarbon is converted to
    the fluid state for recovery, classification is in Class 299.  Furthermore,
    a process or structure involving the use of a tunnel (a horizontal earth
    passage in which a human works) to recover naturally occurring fluid
    (including hydrocarbon) from the earth is classified in Class 299.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, subclass 45 for processes of preventing fire,
    and subclass 64 for apparatus for fighting fire in mines.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, appropriate subclass for
    subject matter directed to the recovery of nonmineral objects or
    nonvaluable mineral objects such as stones found in soft earth adjacent the
    earth surface.  Class 171 primarily provides for the recovery of plants or
    plant products from the earth, although subject matter directed to the
    recovery of stones or manufactured articles from the earth in the same
    manner as recovering plants or plant products is also found in Class 171.

    172,    Earth Working, appropriate subclasses for subject matter relating
    to working the earth in situ.  In general, Class 172 takes apparatus of
    general utility for working both soft earth and hard earth or material such
    as rock, ice or pavement while Class 299 takes apparatus limited by
    disclosure to working hard material such as rock, coal, ice or pavement.
    However, Class 172 takes apparatus of the type in which a tool carried by a
    support is advanced over the earth by movement of the support without
    relative movement between the tool and support if such apparatus is of
    general earth working utility even if the disclosure is limited to working
    hard material such as rock.  An example of an apparatus for Class 172 is a
    ripper tooth intended to be used by being traversed over the earth by a
    tractor, the tooth being stationary with respect to the tractor when
    working the earth.  An example of a apparatus for Class 299 is a driven or
    rolling tool such as a cutter mounted on a driven chain or a rolling disk
    limited by disclosure to working rock.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, appropriate subclass for tool driving
    devices which comprise combinations peculiar to driving but do not recite
    features which limit the devices to a specific art.  Devices for driving
    impact type and mere rotary motion tools described as for mining are
    classified in Class 173.  However, Class 299 includes large tunnel forming
    type machines with material handling features which do not necessarily
    include specific structure of work disintegrating tool means and similarly
    chain type cutter driving and manipulating devices which lack specific
    cutter chain features, which were retained in Class 299 for the time being
    as peculiar to mining or in situ material disintegration functions.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, appropriate subclass for a
    process, machine or tool for initially forming or radially enlarging an
    elongated opening in the earth, such opening being formed in a sustained
    advance movement and of approximately the radial extent of the cutting area
    of the tool.  Class 299 provides for similar subject matter directed to
    enlarging an opening to the surface by moving the tool parallel to said
    surface, breaking down the material in shapes or sizes desirable for
    recovery or forming a large horizontal passageway into the earth by
    continuously advancing a cutting device by means of a horizontally
    operating vehicle which cutting device forms the passageway as the vehicle
    follows the cutting means into and along the passageway.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, appropriate subclass for a motor vehicle for
    operating or advancing a mining machine and particularly subclasses 153.1+
    for vehicles in which the motor of the vehicle is utilized as an external
    source of power.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclass for a conveyor for
    handling mined material and particularly subclasses 300+ and 506+ inclusive
    for a loading machine type endless conveyor with a coacting gatherer, which
    may be described as gathering material from a mine floor.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate subclass
    for a means of general utility to classify, separate or assort solids and
    including a cooperating means to pick up and convey material from a
    location such as a floor or the like.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate subclass
    for subject matter directed to comminuting or disintegrating material of
    general utility.  Class 299 provides for devices specialized to comminuting
    or disintegrating material in situ while Class 241 generally involves
    opposed or cooperating comminuting surfaces which break up material to
    reduce the size of elements thereof.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    road making and particularly subclass 90, which includes means for in situ
    comminution of earth or road surface and subclass 133 for tamping means.
    Subject matter relating to merely breaking up a pavement or earth crust is
    classified in Class 299.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, appropriate subclasses for a
    process or apparatus relating to structures formed in water or the earth,
    particularly subclasses 55+ for construction of underground fluid storage
    cavities; and subclasses 132+ for subject matter relating to shaft or
    tunnel structure or method or apparatus for their construction.
    Underground structures or supports, per se, are classified in Class 405 and
    also permanent shaft or tunnel lining combined with excavating hard
    material to form a shaft or tunnel, but shaft or tunnel excavation, per se,
    or combined with the temporary supporting of the walls or roof of a shaft
    or tunnel is classified in Class 299.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 311 for a static receptacle
    and means of a nongravity type for discharging the receptable and wherein
    the means includes at least one discharge assistant of the compound motion
    type and further wherein the assistant is located proximate to the bottom
    of the receptacle and is displaceable generally parallel thereto, and
    additionally wherein the assistant comprises a screw conveyer which
    includes means for loosening packed material.

    451,    Abrading, for abrading, generally.

    454,    Ventilation, appropriate subclasses for ventilation of general
    utility and particularly subclasses 168+ for ventilation specialized to use
    in mines.  Subject matter directed to a mining plan or layout, but
    involving no more than features relating to ventilating the mine is
    classified in Class 474.


    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Class 523, subclasses 132+ for a composition containing a
    synthetic resin and having utility in situ as a soil conditioner or
    stabilizer or to processes of preparing said composition.

    VI.     INDEX TO CLASSES NOTED IN THE CLASS DEFINITION AND THE SUBCLASSES
    OF THIS CLASS

    After each class listed below, the notation "See -----" refers to the class
    definition and the subclasses of Class 299 in which there are references to
    the class involved.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning.  See section V and
    subclass 36.

    29,     Metal Working.  See subclass 79.

    30,     Cutlery.  See section V and subclasses 26 and 79.

    37,     Excavating.  See section V and subclasses 7, 9, 10, 79 and 82.

    56,     Harvesters.  See section V.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosive Devices.  See section V and subclasses 13
    and 20.

    114,    Ships.  See subclasses 24 and 25.

    125,    Stone Working.  See section V and subclass 79.

    166,    Wells.  See section V and subclasses 2, 3, 4, 6, 10, 14, 16, 20,
    21, and 23.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers.  See section V and subclass 12.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects.  See section V and subclass 7.

    172,    Earth Working.  See section V and subclasses 36, 79 and 82.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting.  See section V and subclasses 1, 29, 47
    and 69.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth.  See section V and subclasses 1,
    10, 13, 14, 17, 24, 58, 61, 63, 79, 80, 81, 82, 86, 87, 91, and 94.

    180,    Motor Vehicles.  See section V and subclass 31.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven.  See section V.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids.  See section V and
    subclass 7.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing.  See subclass 17.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration.  See section V and
    subclass 79.

    248,    Supports.  See subclass 33.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force.  See
    subclasses 23, 31 and 47.

    279,    Chucks or Sockets.  See subclass 91.

    305,    Wheel Substitutes for Land Vehicles.  See subclass 31.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical.  See subclass 1.

    403,    Joints and Connections.  See subclass 91.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus.  See section V.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering.  See section V and subclasses 3,
    10, 11, 19, 31, 33.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fasteners, see subclass 23.

    414,    Material or Article Handling.  See section V.

    433,    Dentistry.  See subclass 79.

    451,    Abrading, see section V.

    454,    Ventilation.  See section V and subclasses 12 and 19.


CLS 299/1.05
TXT AUTOMATIC CONTROL; SIGNALING, OR INDICATING:
    Process or apparatus under the class definition comprising (1) sensing a
    condition which may or may not occur and initiating, modifying, or
    terminating the operation of a power operated means or (2) providing a
    visual or audible manifestation or representation of the operation of a
    device for the benefit of an observer.

    (1)     Note.  The sensing  means may comprise a cutter and may be
    integrally connected to the control means.

    (2)     Note.  A valve which senses and controls with the same surface
    (i.e., a check valve) is not included as a sensing and control means under
    this definition.  However, a valve which senses with one surface and
    controls the flow of motive fluid to a motor with a separate surface is
    included as a sensing and control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 2+ and the search there noted
    for automatic control of a tool driving or impacting device and subclasses
    20+ for indicating or signaling means.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 24+ for automatic
    control of an earth boring means, subclass 39 for bit wear signal
    generating, and subclasses 40+ for an earth boring means or process with
    signaling, indicating, testing, or measuring.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 690 for geophysical position
    responsive indicating systems.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 130+
    for generic data processing control systems.


CLS 299/1.1
TXT Ore/rock interface determination during cutting:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 1.05 where  cutting means are adjusted
    to remove a mineral in response to the detection of a point where the
    mineral ends and the nonvaluable material begins.


CLS 299/1.2
TXT On cutter head:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 1.1 where the sensor is located at or
    near the mineral contacting point.


CLS 299/1.3
TXT Of tunneling apparatus having a wall temporary support:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 1.05 where a subterranean corridor is
    formed by an earth penetrating machine with a wall engaging means, where
    the machine is adjusted to follow a predetermined path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

     405,   Hydraulic anf Earth Engineering, subclasses 141+ for boring a
    tunnel with the cutting device including a shield.


CLS 299/1.4
TXT Of hard material disintegrating machine:

    Process or apparatus under subclass 1.05 where power operated means drives
    or advances a cutting means.


CLS 299/1.5
TXT Floor working:
    Process or apparatus under subclass 1.4 in which the cutter breaks up
    material on the lower limit of a working location as distinct from a
    sidewall, endwall, or roof.


CLS 299/1.6
TXT Sidewall working:
    Process or apparatus under subclass 1.4 in which the cutter breaks up
    material which forms a substantially vertical wall as the cutter advances
    parallel to the wall.


CLS 299/1.7
TXT Of advancing material handling means or roof support:
    Process or apparatus under subclass 1.6 where a conveying means or an upper
    wall supporting means are moved with the cutter.


CLS 299/1.8
TXT Of rotary cutter with advance direction coincident to rotary axis:Process
    or apparatus under subclass 1.4 in which the cutter is continuously moved
    unidirectionally about an axis and is caused to translate along said axis.


CLS 299/1.9
TXT Of material handling means:
    Process or apparatus under subclass 1.05 where a means for moving or
    carrying material away from the position at which it is broken up is
    controlled in response to the sensed condition.

    (1)     Note.  See SEARCH CLASS  notes under section V, for distinction
    between this subclass and Classes 198 and 405.


CLS 299/2
TXT Process or apparatus under the class definition comprising recovering
    valuable material in the fluid state from the earth and including (1)
    process steps involving the construction or use of a horizontal passage in
    which a human may work or (2) the structure of a horizontal passage in
    which a human may work.

    (1)     Note.  Valuable material which is recovered from or through a
    tunnel is included under this definition even though the material may not
    be fluid in the native state (e.g., leached copper recovered in solution or
    coal gas formed by burning are included).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, appropriate subclasses for a process or apparatus for
    recovering fluids from the earth in which a tunnel is not involved, and
    particularly subclass 50 for a well with a lateral conduit.


CLS 299/3
TXT Process or apparatus under the class definition including a step or means
    for changing the physical state of a material from solid to liquid or
    gaseous in a location in the earth where it naturally occurs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for a process of obtaining valuable solid material from the earth
    as solid particles in a fluent state.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, appropriate subclass for a process or apparatus for
    converting solid hydrocarbon to a fluid in situ and recovering the valuable
    hydrocarbon through a well solely in the fluid state.  If any of the
    valuable material is recovered through a well as a solid, or a valuable
    material other than hydrocarbon is converted to fluid and recovered,
    classification is in Class 299.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 58 for subject matter
    relating to the construction of an underground fluid storage cavity by
    dissolving earth material; and subclass 131 for a process or apparatus for
    thawing the earth.


CLS 299/4
TXT Subject matter under subclass 3 directed to a plurality of cooperating
    wells, one of which receives a fluid for insertion into the earth, the
    other of which produces a fluid from the earth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclasses 269+ and see the search there noted, for a
    process comprising the use of input and output wells, especially subclasses
    272.1+ for such wells including heating and subclass 52 for plural wells.


CLS 299/5
TXT Subject matter under subclass 3 in which the state of the material is
    changed by (1) undergoing chemical change (e.g., entering into combustion
    or other chemical change) or (2) passing into solution in another material
    (e.g., salt in water).

    (1)     Note.  A state of colloidal dispersion or suspension is considered
    a dissolved condition of material.


CLS 299/6
TXT Subject matter under subclass 3 in which the material that is commercially
    desirable is converted to a fluid for recovery.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclasses 302+ for a well process involving heating and
    subclasses 57+ for well apparatus including heating means.


CLS 299/7
TXT Process or apparatus under the class definition including a step or means
    for separating matter mined or excavated from the earth into at least two
    different components.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes an excavating step or means as
    provided for in Class 37, Excavating, when combined with a step or means to
    separate components of the excavated material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, appropriate subclass for a step or means for recovering
    alluvial or soft material from an in situ location. Class 37 includes
    selectively picking up materials, (e.g., using a screen in the intake of a
    suction nozzle), but excavation which includes any separation after the
    material is picked up is classified in Class 299.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, appropriate subclass for
    process or apparatus for removing nonmineral objects close to the surface
    of the earth or from the earth and separating into constituent parts and
    subclass 16 for railroad ballast removal and assorting or separating.

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 32 for an earth working means combined with
    a means for separating parts of the earth from each other.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate subclass
    for a process or means to separate solid materials into component parts,
    and including means to convey material to or from the excavating or
    separating means.


CLS 299/8
TXT Subject matter under subclass 7 in which the components of the material are
    separated without first conveying the mined or excavated material above the
    surface of the earth in which it is naturally located or above the surface
    of a body of water beneath which it.


CLS 299/9
TXT Subject matter under subclass 7 which the material is removed from a
    submereged location.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 307+ for dredgers.


CLS 299/10
TXT Processes under the class definition.

    (1)     Note.  Processes for the subject matter of subclasses 1-9 are
    excluded from this definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclass 195 for a process of recovering alluvial or
    soft material.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 244.1+ for a process of recovering valuable fluid
    material through a well in the earth.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 61 and see the search
    there noted for a process of boring or penetrating the earth.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, appropriate subclasses for
    processes for treating or controlling earth formation, or for forming a
    structure therein.


CLS 299/11
TXT Process under subclass 10 in which a step is included for preventing a
    mining shaft or tunnel sidewall, roof or floor from caving, shifting or
    heaving.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes for example, a process including a
    step of constructing mine prop means, filling mine workings, controlling
    pressures in the mine to prevent dislocation of matter, removing pillars or
    other roof supports, etc.  However, a process including a mere step of
    removing material to leave roof supporting sections or columns of material
    in place is classified on other features.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 132+ for a process or
    apparatus for making a shaft or tunnel. Class 405 provides for (1)
    excavating a tunnel or shaft and lining it, or (2) preventing a tunnel
    shaft or sidewall, roof, or floor from caving, shifting, or heaving if not
    combined with an excavating step or means.


CLS 299/12
TXT Process under subclass 10 in which a step is included for preventing injury
    to a human working in a mine or mining operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for a process including a step for stabilizing the mine roof,
    sidewall or floor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, subclass 45 for a process of preventing fire,
    and subclass 64 for apparatus for preventing or extinguishing a fire in a
    mine.

    454,    Ventilation, particularly subclasses 168+ for a process or
    apparatus for ventilating a mine for the safety and comfort of workers,
    including mine safety doors and means for supplying entombed miners with
    air.


CLS 299/13
TXT Process under subclass 10 in which material is disintegrated by means of a
    violently expansive chemical reaction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 301+ for apparatus and
    methods of blasting.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 2+ for a process of
    boring in which an explosion in the bore hole is utilized.


CLS 299/14
TXT Process under subclass 10 in which a step is included for breaking up hard
    material in which (1) heat energy is directed into the material or (2)
    vibrational energy is applied to the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3+,     for a process of apparatus for in situ conversion of solid to fluid
    and usually involving the use of heat energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclass 177.5 and 177.6 for vibrating or fracturing
    apparatus in a well, subclass 249 for well processes comprising vibrating
    the earth.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 11+ for boring by
    directly applying heat to fluidize or comminute, subclass 17 for boring
    comprising heating within the bore and subclass 56 for vibration boring.


CLS 299/15
TXT Process under subclass 10 in which hard material in situ is removed as a
    relatively large, integral block of a predetermined shape.


CLS 299/16
TXT Process under subclass 10 in which a source of fluid at above atmospheric
    pressure is applied directly to material to mine or disintegrate the
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for a process of mining or disintegrating material by a violently
    expansive chemical reaction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclasses 305.1+ for a well process relating to placing
    fluid into or fracturing the formation.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 248 for a method or
    apparatus for installing a pile in the earth utilizing fluid jets.


CLS 299/17
TXT Process under subclass 16 in which direct fluid action is impacting against
    the material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 67 and see the search
    there noted for a process of boring by fluid erosion.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 1+ for a
    process involving a fluid jet.


CLS 299/18
TXT Processes under subclass 10 in which a step is included for carrying the
    material away from the position at which it is mined or disintegrated.


CLS 299/19
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising the structure or
    arrangement of an opening into the earth which is utilized to recover a
    valuable material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for a mine layout involving a process of stabilizing underground
    structure.

    12,     for a mine layout involving a process relating to mine safety.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 132+ for the structure
    of a shaft or tunnel, per se, including means to support shaft and tunnel
    walls, etc.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 168+ for mine structure relating to
    providing proper air supply and circulation for workers in a mine.


CLS 299/20
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a device which is inserted
    into an opening in hard material and is described as operated to apply such
    expansive pressure to the walls of the opening as to relatively move and
    break up the hard material.

    (1)     Note.  A means which is sealed into an opening and is described as
    supplying fluid pressure into the opening to break down material by
    expansive pressure, even though the fluid directly engages the material, is
    included under this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16+,    for a process of breaking down material by direct fluid pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives subclasses 301+ for a process or
    apparatus for rendering a heavy mass by the sudden release of gases under
    heavy pressure, such as an explosion.

    166,    Wells, subclass 177.5 for a means for fracturing a formation
    traversed by a well, and subclasses 179+ and the subclasses there noted for
    expansible packers or plugs, and subclasses 206+ and the subclasses there
    noted for expansible anchors.


CLS 299/21
TXT Apparatus under subclass 20 in which one element of the device is expanded
    relative to another by the application of fluid pressure to the elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclass 187 and the subclasses there noted for a packer or
    plug expanded by fluid pressure and subclass 212 and the subclasses there
    noted for an anchor expanded by fluid pressure.


CLS 299/22
TXT Apparatus under subclass 21 in which one fluid pressed element comprises a
    piston.


CLS 299/23
TXT Apparatus under subclass 20 in which the device comprises relatively
    movable elements, and an inclined face on one element cooperates with a
    face on another element to generate expansive pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclass 217 and the subclasses there noted for a wedge
    operated expanding anchor.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 104 for a wedge type pushing device of general utility.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed or Lock-Threaded
    Fastener,  subclasses 15+ for expanding core and sleeve type fasteners.


CLS 299/24
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a machine or cutter which
    is described as for the purpose of disintegrating or cutting ice.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides an art group search for machines or
    cutters for a specifically disclosed use of working on ice.  While in some
    cases the claimed device is not structurally limited to such function and
    the search must be  continued in other subclasses, many features are found
    in these patents which are of limited use such as sled runner mounted and
    floating machines, ice block forming guides, and cutters which do not
    appear to be efficiently adaptable to the working of a material as hard as
    rock.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for a process of apparatus for converting a solid such as ice to a
    fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclasses 40+ for a vessel having means to break an ice
    flow or open a harbor or the like.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 18 for a process or
    apparatus for boring or penetrating a hole in ice.


CLS 299/25
TXT Apparatus under subclass 24 in which the machine is provided with a cutter
    which, in addition to being advanced, has another movement (e.g.
    rotational) to accomplish the cutting or disintegrating action.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclass 42 for a vessel having a relatively driven cutter
    to break an ice flow or open a harbor or the like.


CLS 299/26
TXT Apparatus under subclass 25 in which the additional motion of the tool is
    reciprocatory.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 164.5+ for ice pick or chipper type cutlery.


CLS 299/27
TXT Apparatus under subclass 25 in which the function of the cutting is
    described as for the purpose of cutting out blocks of ice.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for a method of forming blocks of ice or other material in situ.

    26,     for a reciprocating cutter that is described as for the purpose of
    cutting out blocks of ice.


CLS 299/28
TXT Apparatus under subclass 27 including separate cutting blades.

    (1)     Note.  Separate cutting blades which are integrally connected are
    included under this definition.


CLS 299/29
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a cutting means and a power
    operated means to drive or advance said cutting means to cut, sever or
    break up hard material.

    (1)     Note.  For classification under this definition more of the machine
    must be claimed than a cutter tooth, plural cutter teeth or their immediate
    supporting or driving means, such structure merely comprising a cutter
    head.  A cutter head or tooth is defined in subclass 79 of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.05+,  for a mining machine having an automatic control, signaling or
    indicating feature.

    20+,    for an expansible device for breaking down material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, appropriate subclass for an apparatus of
    general utility for driving a tool.


CLS 299/30
TXT Apparatus under subclass 29 including a device to control the operation
    from a distant point such that an operator does not have to be located in
    the immediate area where the machine is working.

    (1)     Note.  A control that is specifically described as "remote" from
    the machine is included under this definition and includes control from a
    position in a tunnel of a machine located in a stop or drift, for example,
    as well as control from a location completely outside of an underground
    mine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.05+,  for a mining device having automatic control, signaling or
    indicating means and which may be remotely controlled.


CLS 299/31
TXT Apparatus under subclass 29 in which the advance causing means comprises a
    device having feet or plate type anchors which alternately engage and
    disengage the ground or the sidewalls of a tunnel to cause the apparatus to
    move forward.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 8.1+ for a stepper type motor driven
    vehicle.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 134.6 for a step by step type tractor for pulling cable in wire or
    stand placing.

    305,    Wheel Substitutes for Land Vehicles, subclasses 1+ for a stepper
    type wheel substitute.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 299+ for a walking roof
    support for use in a mine, and which may be utilized for advancing a mining
    machine.


CLS 299/32
TXT Apparatus under subclass 31 in which a cutter, that comprises a blade which
    shaves off material layer by layer by advance motion only, is moved by the
    advance-causing means.


CLS 299/33
TXT Apparatus under subclass 29 including means to prevent material which
    comprises the upper wall of an underground mine chamber from descending
    into the chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for a process of stabilizing underground mine structure, including
    supporting the mine roof.

    31+,    for a stepper type advance causing means which may also function as
    a walking roof support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 351+ for a prop or brace of general utility.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 132+ for shaft and
    tunnel linings, per se, or combined with excavating means; and subclasses
    288+ for temporary mine roof supports (props).


CLS 299/34.01
TXT Cutter attached to endless chain or cable (e.g., planer type):

    Machine under subclass 29 in which a blade, plow (plough), tooth, bit,
    pick, or disk scraper, fixed to a length of flexible power transmission
    means connected at the ends, shaves off material layer by layer by advance
    motion only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for a planer cutter for working ice.

    32,     for a planer type cutter and a stepper type means causing the
    advance thereof.


CLS 299/34.02
TXT With auxiliary cutter:

    Planer-type cutter under subclass 34.01 including an additional, separate
    or distinct mining machine (e.g., drum cutter, another planer cutter).


CLS 299/34.03
TXT Roof-type cutter:

    Auxiliary cutter under subclass 34.02 in which the shaving means is for an
    overhead portion, relative to the floor.


CLS 299/34.04
TXT Planer, plow, or knife details:

    Planer-type cutter under subclass 34.01 having a particular type of
    mounting means, having particular connections between members or portions,
    or having a particular arrangement of the shaving device.


CLS 299/34.05
TXT With fluid supply:

    Planer, plow, or knife detail under subclass 34.04 including a gas or
    liquid container.


CLS 299/34.06
TXT With vibrator:

    Planer, plow, or knife detail under subclass 34.04 including a device to
    create an rapid oscillating motion to enhance the shaving device.


CLS 299/34.07
TXT Drive details:

    Planer-type cutter under subclass 34.01 having a particular type of
    gearing, transmission, clutch, etc.


CLS 299/34.08
TXT Vertical height adjustment of entire installation:

    Planer-type cutter under subclass 34.01 in which the elevation of the
    mining machine and associated devices; e.g., conveyor, is changed relative
    to the floor.


CLS 299/34.09
TXT Chain features and connected to miner:

    Planer-type cutter under subclass 34.01 which is attached to the endless
    power transmission means; e.g., chain, in a particular arrangement.


CLS 299/34.1
TXT Guide, associated with conveyor, for chain or supply lines:

    Planer-type cutter under subclass 34.01 which includes a device, attached
    to the material handling means, that directs the endless power transmission
    means or utility pipes or cables.


CLS 299/34.11
TXT Guide for adjustment of cutter:

    Planer-type cutter under subclass 34.01 which has its orientation changed
    by a directing device.


CLS 299/34.12
TXT Pivoting cutter body:

    Planer-type cutter under subclass 34.01 which is mounted to allow rotation.


CLS 299/35
TXT Apparatus under subclass 29 in which the cutter comprises (1) a flexible,
    cable-like element which directly contacts the hard material to break it
    down or (2) a flexible, cable-like element which carries separate cutter
    teeth which directly contact the hard material, the portion of the hard
    material being cut being situated between guides over which the flexible
    cable element is drawn and the portion of the cable between said guides
    being effectively shortened in length as the cutting proceeds.


CLS 299/36.1
TXT Floor-working:

    Machine under subclass 29 in which the cutter breaks up material on the
    bottom surface of the working location, as distinct from the side or end
    walls or top surface.

     (1)    Note.  Floor working use must be specifically disclosed for
    classification under this definition.

     (2)    Note.  These devices are generally of the type supported by wheels
    or the like on a surface and the driven tool works the material of the
    supporting surface.

     (3)    Note.  This definition includes devices described as disintegrating
    linoleum or the like from floors as well as concrete or asphalt road
    surfaces.

     (4)    Note.  A device supported by a vessel floating on a body of water
    and working material on the submerged floor is included under this
    definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24+,    for a device for working ice on the bottom surface of a working
    location.

     SEARCH CLASS:

     15,    Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 78+ for a
    street sweeping machine, subclasses 93.1+ for a scraping machine and
    subclasses 98+ for a floor and wall wiping machine.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 777+ for scraper type tools,  subclasses
    133+ for diverse tools, and subclasses 518+ for rolling, rotating, or
    orbitally moving tool that works on the surface of the earth.

     404,   Road Structure, Process or Apparatus, subclasses 90+ for cutting,
    scarifying or disintegrating the pavement plus structure; e.g., drag,
    tamper, roller, to level or smooth the cut road pieces.


CLS 299/37.1
TXT Reciprocating or oscillating cutter:

    Floor working machine under subclass 36.1 in which the cutter has a cyclic
    to and fro motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for an ice working device driving a reciprocating cutter.


CLS 299/37.2
TXT Resonant vibrator driven:

    Reciprocating or oscillating cutter under subclass 37.1 which is of the
    nonlinear motion sonic generator type; e.g, eccentric weight.


CLS 299/37.3
TXT Impact or hammering-type cutter:

    Floor working machine under subclass 36.1 in which a falling weight, with
    appreciable striking velocity, hits the cutting means or is the cutting
    means.


CLS 299/37.4
TXT Hydraulic piston and cylinder-type:

    Impact or hammering cutter under subclass 37.3 wherein the falling weight
    is assisted by compressed fluid pushing on a solid mass within a tubular
    vessel.


CLS 299/37.5
TXT Hammer and anvil-type:

    Impact or hammering cutter under subclass 37.3 wherein the falling weight
    pounds a specific hardened or enlarged portion of the cutting means.


CLS 299/38.1
TXT Narrow channel-forming type:

    Reciprocating or oscillating cutter under subclass 37.1 in which the cutter
    is described as forming a slot which has a relatively small width in the
    horizontal extent.


CLS 299/39.1
TXT Rotary cutter:

    Floor working machine under subclass 36.1 in which the breaking up device
    turns about an axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25+,    for an ice working device having a rotary cutter.


CLS 299/39.2
TXT With material handling:

    Rotary cutter under subclass 39.1 including means to convey the broken up
    bottom surface.


CLS 299/39.3
TXT Slot-type cutter; e.g., pavement saw:

    Rotary cutter under subclass 39.1 in which a circular relatively thin, flat
    blade grooves the bottom surface.


CLS 299/39.4
TXT Drum-type:

    Rotary cutter under subclass 39.1 in which the breaking up device is
    mounted on a cylindrical member.


CLS 299/39.5
TXT Shiftable horizontally:

    Drum rotary cutter under subclass 39.4 which is movable in a direction
    transverse to the direction of travel.


CLS 299/39.6
TXT Height adjustment:

    Drum rotary cutter under subclass 39.4 which is movable in a direction
    substantially perpendicular to the bottom surface.


CLS 299/39.7
TXT Yieldably mounted cutter:

    Drum rotary cutter under subclass 39.4 in which the breaking up device
    connection is designed to fracture.


CLS 299/39.8
TXT Specific mount for fixed projecting cutters:

    Drum rotary cutter under subclass 39.4 in which the breaking up device has
    a particular type of attachment.


CLS 299/39.9
TXT And having rotatable cutting element:

    Rotary cutter under subclass 39.1 in which the bottom surface breaking up
    device is mounted to turn relative to the axis.


CLS 299/40.1
TXT Freely rolling cutter:

    Rotary cutter under subclass 39.1 in which the breaking up device is caused
    to move about an axis while in rolling contact with the bottom surface, due
    to the translation of the axis over the bottom surface rather than due to
    means driving the breaking up device about the axis.


CLS 299/41.1
TXT Vertical cutter axis:

    Rotary cutter under subclass 39.1 in which the cutter axis is disposed
    substantially perpendicular to the floor.


CLS 299/42
TXT Apparatus under subclass 29 in which the cutter is described as breaking up
    material which forms a substantially vertical wall as the cutter advances
    parallel to said wall.

    (1)     Note.  Sidewall working must be specifically disclosed for
    classification under this definition.

    (2)     Note. This definition provides for mining machines of the
    "longwall" type. The principal distinction of machines under this
    definition is in the relatively long distance of sustained advance and the
    problem of handling the broken up material from the sidewall of an
    underground passage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34.1,   and the search there noted for a machine which advances a planer
    type cutter, such cutter commonly disclosed as working on a sidewall.


CLS 299/43
TXT Apparatus under subclass 42 combined with means for moving or carrying
    material away from the position at which it is broken up.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for a process of mining which includes a step of conveying the
    material.

    34.1,   and see the search there noted for a planer type cutting machine,
    usually of the sidewall working type and including material handling means.

    64+,    and see the search there noted for other hard material
    disintegrating machines having material handling means.


CLS 299/44
TXT Apparatus under subclass 43 in which the means to move or carry material is
    combined with a cutter that is described as forming a cut at the bottom of
    a block of material, such material being subsequently dislodged to be
    handled by the moving or carrying means.

    (1)     Note.  A separate dislodging means does not necessarily have to be
    claimed for a patent to be included under this definition, as long as the
    cutter and conveyor are claimed and dislodging is described.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65+,    for a hard material disintegrating machine having undercutting,
    dislodging and material handling features.


CLS 299/45
TXT Apparatus under subclass 43 in which means to move or carry material away
    bodily follows the cutter into an opening being formed by the cutter during
    cutter operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     for a hard material disintegrating machine having material handling
    means which enter the cut with the cutter.


CLS 299/46
TXT Apparatus under subclass 43 in which means to move or carry material away
    is continuously, unidirectionally rotated about an axis.

    (1)     Note.  A rotary impeller which causes material to be moved or
    carried away is included under this definition whether the impeller
    directly contacts the material or not.  For example, a fluid current
    conveyor system in which a rotary impeller causes the fluid circulation
    which moves material but does not directly contact the material is included
    hereunder.

    (2)     Note.  An orbitally moving material handling means, such as an
    endless belt conveyor is not included under this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for a hard material disintegrating machine having a rotary impeller
    type material handling means.


CLS 299/47
TXT Apparatus under subclass 42 in which the cutter is caused to advance by
    means of a cable or similar flexible element to which power is applied to
    pull the apparatus along, and which is generally described as having one
    extremity anchored against a fixed point in the working area, the power
    usually being applied by coiling the other end of the flexible member about
    a drum.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclass 151 for a tool driving device
    of general utility combined with a driven flexible advance causing or
    controlling means.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 264+ for apparatus for hauling or hoisting a load including a
    driven device which contacts and pulls on a cable.


CLS 299/48
TXT Apparatus under subclass 47 in which the cutter is connected to supporting
    structure in a manner such that the cutter may be swung or otherwise moved
    as a unit relative to said supporting structure in a substantially
    horizontal direction.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of cutter see this class, subclass 79.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73+,    and see the search there noted for a machine having a cutter
    shiftable horizontally.


CLS 299/49
TXT Apparatus under subclass 47 in which the flexible element is coiled about
    an element (e.g., a drum) which rotates about a substantially horizontal
    axis.


CLS 299/50
TXT Apparatus under subclass 49 in which the axis of rotation of the element is
    substantially perpendicular to the vertical wall.


CLS 299/51
TXT Apparatus under subclass 42 in which the cutter teeth move through a path
    unidirectionally in a substantially  horizontal plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     and see the search there noted for machines having cutters with
    teeth moving in a substantially horizontal orbit.


CLS 299/52
TXT Apparatus under subclass 51 in which the cutter is connected to supporting
    structure in a manner such that the cutter may be swung or otherwise
    shifted as a unit relative to the supporting structure in a substantially
    horizontal direction.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of cutter see this class, subclass 79.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for a sidewall working machine having a cutter shiftable
    horizontally and advanced by a flexible member.

    74,     for cutter shiftable horizontally which has a cutter with teeth
    moving in a substantially horizontal plane.


CLS 299/53
TXT Apparatus under subclass 42 in which the cutter teeth move through a path
    unidirectionally in a substantially vertical plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     and the search there noted for a machine having cutter teeth which
    move in a vertical orbit.


CLS 299/54
TXT Apparatus under subclass 53 in which the cutter is connected to supporting
    structure in a manner such that the cutter may be swung or otherwise
    shifted as a unit relative to the supporting structure in a substantially
    horizontal direction.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of cutter see this class, subclass 79.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for a sidewall working machine having a cutter shiftable
    horizontally and advanced by a flexible member.

    73,     and the search there noted for a cutter which is shiftable
    horizontally.


CLS 299/55
TXT Apparatus under subclass 29 in which the cutter is continuously moved
    unidirectionally about an axis and is caused to advance in the direction of
    a line corresponding to said axis.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of cutter see this class, subclass 79.


CLS 299/56
TXT Apparatus under subclass 55 combined with means for moving or carrying
    material away from the position at which it is broken up.


CLS 299/57
TXT Apparatus under subclass 56 in which the cutting means comprises a
    plurality of cutter heads and the axes about which the heads are moved are
    spaced in a direction transverse to said axes.


CLS 299/58
TXT Apparatus under subclass 55 in which the entire machine follows the cutting
    means into the opening being formed by the cutting means as the cutting
    progresses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 92+ for a tool drive
    prime mover that follows a cutter below ground in an earth boring operation.


CLS 299/59
TXT Apparatus under subclass 58 in which the cutter means comprises two or more
    rotary heads which are driven so as to move relative to one another during
    operation.


CLS 299/60
TXT Apparatus under subclass 59 in which the cutter teeth on one of the rotary
    heads form a path of rotation which falls entirely within a circle
    described by the path of rotation of the cutter teeth on another rotary
    head.


CLS 299/61
TXT Apparatus under subclass 58 in which means are provided to change the
    radius of the effective cutting area encircled by the cutter teeth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 202 for an above ground
    means to relatively move below ground earth boring tool elements and
    subclasses 263+ for an earth boring tool having a cutter element laterally
    shiftable below ground.


CLS 299/62
TXT Apparatus under subclass 58 including cutter teeth which cyclically impact
    upon or against the hard material.


CLS 299/63
TXT Apparatus under subclass 29 in which the means severs a large block of
    material in one cutting movement relative to the material, the cutting
    means comprising an endless loop which is described as arcuately swinging
    into and behind a block of material to sever the block in one sweep.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for a mining process in which relatively large blocks of
    predetermined shape are severed.

    24+,    for an ice working process in which relatively large blocks of ice
    are severed.

    44,     for a sidewall working machine in which a conveyor cooperates with
    an undercutter, the material generally being handled in large chunks.

    55+,    for a rotary cutter head with an advance direction coincident to
    the rotary axis and which may comprise an annular core forming type cutter
    which forms a core on advance movement and may include means to break the
    core loose from the formation as a chunk upon retraction.

    65+,    for a mining machine in which a conveyor cooperates with an
    undercutter, the material generally being handled in large chunks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 403+ and see the search
    notes therein for a core forming type earth boring tool.


CLS 299/64
TXT Apparatus under subclass 29 combined with means for moving or carrying
    material away from the position at which it is broken up.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for a mining process including a step of material handling.

    34.1,   and the search notes therein for a mining machine operating a
    planer type cutter and usually including a material handling means.

    43+,    for a sidewall working machine combined with material handling
    means.

    56+,    for a machine having a rotary cutter head with advance direction
    coincident to rotary axis combined with material handling means.

    63,     for a machine having an endless loop or rotary chunk severing
    cutter and usually including a material handling means.


CLS 299/65
TXT Apparatus under subclass 64 in which the means to move or carry material is
    combined with a cutter that is described as forming a cut at the bottom of
    a block of material, such material being subsequently dislodged to be
    handled by the moving or carrying means.

    (1)     Note.  A separate dislodging means does not necessarily have to be
    claimed for a patent to be included under this definition, as long as the
    cutter and conveyor are claimed and dislodging is described.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for a sidewall working machine having an undercutter, dislodging
    and a conveying means.


CLS 299/66
TXT Apparatus under subclass 65 in which the cutter is connected to supporting
    structure in a manner such that the cutter may be swung or otherwise
    shifted as a unit relative to said supporting structure in a substantially
    horizontal direction.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of cutter see this class, subclass 79.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73+,    and see the search there noted for a machine having a cutter
    shiftable horizontally.


CLS 299/67
TXT Apparatus under subclass 64 in which means to move or carry material away
    bodily follows the cutter into an opening being formed by the cutter during
    cutter operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for a sidewall working machine having a material handler that
    enters the cut with the cutting means.

    56+,    for a rotary head mining machine with advance direction coincident
    to rotary cutter axis combined with material handling means that generally
    follow the rotary head into the opening being formed.


CLS 299/68
TXT Apparatus under subclass 64 in which means to move or carry material away
    is continuously, unidirectionally rotated about an axis.

    (1)     Note.  A rotary impeller which causes material to be moved or
    carried away is included under this definition whether the impeller
    directly contacts the material or not.  For example, a fluid current
    conveyor system in which a rotary impeller causes the fluid circulation
    which moves material but does not directly contact the material is included
    hereunder.

    (2)     Note.  An orbitally moving material handling means, such as an
    endless belt conveyor is not included under this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for a sidewall working machine having a material handling means of
    the rotary impeller type.


CLS 299/69
TXT Apparatus under subclass 29 in which the power operated means causes the
    cutter to cyclically longitudinally impact upon or against the hard
    material.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of cutter see this class, subclass 79.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for a rotary cutter head with advance direction coincident to
    rotary axis in which the drive follows the cutter into an opening formed
    thereby, and in which the rotary head carries an impact type cutter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 90+ and see the search there
    noted for a tool impacting device.


CLS 299/70
TXT Apparatus under subclass 69 in which the cutter is connected to supporting
    structure in a manner such that the cutter may be swung or otherwise
    shifted as a unit relative to the supporting structure in a substantially
    horizontal direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73+,    and see the search there noted for a machine having a cutter
    shiftable horizontally.


CLS 299/71
TXT Apparatus under subclass 29 including plural, separate cutters, the cutters
    being connected to supporting structure in such a manner as to permit the
    cutters to be bodily swung or otherwise shifted relative to each other and
    to the supporting structure.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of cutter see this class, subclass 79.


CLS 299/72
TXT Apparatus under subclass 29 in which the cutter is movable relative to its
    support so that the cutter teeth are operable in an orbit located in either
    a horizontal or a vertical plane.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of cutter see this class, subclass 79.


CLS 299/73
TXT Apparatus under subclass 29 in which the cutter is connected to supporting
    structure in a manner such that the cutter may be swung or otherwise
    shifted as a unit relative to said supporting structure in a substantially
    horizontal direction.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of cutter see this class, subclass 79.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     for a sidewall working machine having a cutter with a horizontal
    cutter tooth orbit in which the cutter is bodily movable in a horizontal
    plane.

    54,     for a sidewall working machine having a cutter with a vertical
    cutter tooth orbit in which the cutter is bodily movable in a horizontal
    plane.

    66,     for an undercutting and conveying machine having an undercutter
    bodily movable in a horizontal plane.

    70,     for an impact type mining machine having a cutter bodily movable in
    a horizontal plane.


CLS 299/74
TXT Apparatus under subclass 73 in which the cutter teeth move through a path
    unidirectionally in a plane which is substantially horizontal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     for a sidewall working machine having a horizontal tooth orbit
    cutter which is bodily movable in a horizontal plane.


CLS 299/75
TXT Apparatus under subclass 73 in which the cutter is connected to the
    supporting structure in such a manner that the cutter may be swung or
    otherwise shifted as a unit relative to said supporting structure in a
    substantially vertical direction as well as in a horizontal direction.


CLS 299/76
TXT Apparatus under subclass 29 in which the cutter is connected to supporting
    structure in such a manner that the cutter may be swung or otherwise
    shifted as a unit relative to said supporting structure in a substantially
    vertical direction.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of cutter see this class, subclass 79.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for a machine having a cutter swivelled to operate in either a
    vertical or horizontal cutter tooth orbit.

    75,     for a machine having a cutter bodily movable in a horizontal plane
    which is also bodily movable in a vertical plane.


CLS 299/77
TXT Apparatus under subclass 29 in which the cutter teeth move through a path
    unidirectionally in a plane which is substantially horizontal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for a machine having a horizontal cutter tooth orbit cutter which
    is bodily movable in a horizontal plane.


CLS 299/78
TXT Apparatus under subclass 29 in which the cutter teeth move through a path
    unidirectionally in a plane which is substantially vertical.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55+,    for a vertical cutter tooth orbit rotary cutter head with advance
    direction coincident to rotary axis.

    63,     for a machine having an endless loop or rotary chunk severing
    cutter, the teeth of which generally circulate or rotate in a vertical
    orbit.

    72,     for a machine having a cutter which is swiveled to supporting
    structure to permit the cutter to operate as a vertical or horizontal
    cutter tooth or bit cutter.

    73+,    for a machine having a cutter bodily movable in a horizontal plane,
    which may be a vertical cutter tooth orbit cutter.

    76,     for a machine having a cutter bodily movable in a vertical plane,
    generally a vertical cutter tooth orbit cutter.


CLS 299/79.1
TXT Cutter tooth or tooth head:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising (1) an element which is
    disclosed as specifically adapted to mechanically contact and selectively
    break up, scarify, or dislocate hard material, such hard material being
    described as in situ relative to the earth or (2) the immediate supporting
    means for such element.

     (1)    Note.  The term "cutter" or "cutter head" as used in the title of
    this subclass and elsewhere in the titles and the definitions of this class
    comprises at least one element as defined in this subclass and the
    immediate supporting and driving means for an element. However, a motor or
    plural, relatively moving motion-transmitting elements are not included as
    immediate driving means for an element.

     (2)    Note.  The term "cutter tooth" as used in the title of this
    subclass and elsewhere in the titles and definitions of this class,
    comprises the cutting element, per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20+,    for a device comprising relatively movable parts which are adapted
    to be inserted into an opening in material and dislocate the material by
    expansion therein.

     24+,   for a device adapted to cut, disintegrate or dislocate ice.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 165+ for cutting tools.

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 446+ for the digging edge and separable
    teeth of a scoop.

    125,    Stone Working, subclasses 36+ for a tool adapted to work hard
    material which is not in situ relative to the earth.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 681+ for earth working tools.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 327+ for a bit or bit
    element.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 291+ for
    elements for breaking up solid material, which is not in situ relative to
    the earth.

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 25+ for tools to cut natural teeth.


CLS 299/80.1
TXT Adjustable head:

    Cutter tooth or tooth head under subclass 79.1 in which a portion of the
    elements' supporting means is relatively movable and maintains the elements
    in two or more different relative positions whereby the area of the hard
    material engaged by the tool is selectively variable.

     (1)    Note.  The elements may be moved from one relative position to
    another either while the tool is operative or idle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for a mining machine having a rotary cutter head with advance
    direction coincident to the rotary axis, the drive following the cutter
    into the opening formed thereby, in which the cutting area is radially
    adjustable.

    71,     for a mining machine having relatively movable cutters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 263+ for earth boring
    or penetrating tools which are expansible during operation, and subclass
    382 for an earth boring or penetrating tool having an adjustable cutting
    element.


CLS 299/81.1
TXT Cleansing fluid passage:

    Cutter tooth or tooth head under subclass 79.1 in which the elements'
    supporting means is provided with a conduit for a fluid to make wet the
    hard material contacting portion thereof or the adjacent area of the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

     175,   Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 339+ for a rolling
    cutter bit or bit element having drilling fluid conduit details, subclass
    393 for a bit or bit element having a fluid conduit lining or element, and
    subclasses 414+ for an impact bit having an internal fluid passage.


CLS 299/81.2
TXT Fluid feed distributor or controller (e.g., manifold):

    Cleansing fluid passage under subclass 81.1 including a device with at
    least one inlet and more than two outlets.


CLS 299/81.3
TXT Nozzle or seal details:

    Cleansing fluid passage under subclass 81.1 having a particular type of
    projecting vent or fluid-tight joint.


CLS 299/82.1
TXT Endless-chain type head:

    Cutter tooth or tooth head under subclass 79.1 in which the element is
    moved by an articulated or flexible member such as a series of links or a
    cable.


    (1)     Note.  Specific structure of the flexible or articulated means or
    the supporting structure therefor must be claimed for classification under
    this definition. Merely reciting the cutter as a "chain cutter" and
    limiting the claim to cutter tooth or tooth mounting details is excluded
    and classified on other features.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     for a wire saw type cutting machine.

    63,     for an endless loop or rotary chunk severing cutting machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 353+, 394+, and 462+ for excavating devices
    having cutting elements carried by flexible means.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 100 and 542 for earth working tools
    carried on flexible means.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 89+ for an earth boring
    or penetrating tool carried on a continuously driven flexible or
    articulated member.


CLS 299/83.1
TXT Plural teeth on single link:

    Endless-chain type head under subclass 82.1 in which one of the series
    carries at least two cutting elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    for a cutter having plural teeth, but which recites no specific
    flexible or articulated member structure or support therefor.


CLS 299/84.1
TXT Nontracking tooth arrangement:

    Endless-chain type head under subclass 82.1 in which the elements carried
    by the flexible member are such that one element will describe a different
    path of travel than another element.


CLS 299/85.1
TXT Plural heads moving relative to each other:

    Cutter tooth or tooth head under subclass 79.1 in which at least two of the
    supporting means operate at different speeds or translate in different
    directions.

    (1)     Note.  The relatively movable parts may comprise separate cutter
    teeth.


    (2)     Note.  Relative movement between the parts during normal cutting
    operation must be specifically described for classification under this
    definition. For example, merely connecting a cutter element to a cutter
    head by means of resiliently biased retaining means is not included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59+,    for a mining machine having relatively driven cutters, in which the
    drive follows a cutter into an opening formed by a rotary cutter head
    having advance direction coincident to rotary axis.

    71,     for a mining machine having relative bodily movable cutters.

    80.1,   for a tool having relatively adjustable head.

    82.1,   for a chain-type cutter head.

    107,    for a rotatable bit mounting including resiliently biased retaining
    means

    109,    for a planar bit mounting including resiliently biased retaining
    means.


CLS 299/85.2
TXT Adjustable tooth:

    Cutter tooth or tooth head under subclass 79.1 in which the element is
    movable relative to its support means.


CLS 299/87.1
TXT Tooth mounted on helical head portion or head with helical conveying
    portion:

    Cutter tooth or tooth head under subclass 79.1 in which the element is
    fastened to a spiral-shaped supporting means or the supporting means has a
    spiral shape member used to move material.

    (1)     Note.  The helix does not necessarily have to be continuous in
    extent through 360 degrees for classification herein, but may comprise a
    series of teeth describing, in overall extent, a broken convolution of 360
    degrees.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 394+ for an earth
    boring or penetrating bit having a helical conveying portion.


CLS 299/95
TXT Apparatus under the class definition not provided for in other subclasses.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, devices for
    transporting mining apparatus in a mine shaft or tunnel.


CLS 299/100
TXT Percussive tooth or bit::

    Cutter tooth or tooth head under subclass 79.1 in which the element is
    operated by cyclic impact upon or against the hard material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for an ice working device having or comprising a reciprocating
    cutter.


    69+,    for a mining machine having an impact type cutter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 414+ for an impact type
    earth boring bit or bit element.


CLS 299/101
TXT Plural cutting edges on tooth, pick, or bit:

    Cutter tooth or tooth head under subclass 79.1 in which the element has
    more than one distinct contact point or line.


CLS 299/102
TXT Clamped tooth holder or tooth mount:

    Cutter tooth or tooth head under subclass 79.1 in which a means to connect
    the element to the supporting means is at least two members urged toward
    one another with a portion of the supporting means between the members.

    (1)     Note.  A mere bolt and nut or the like is not included as a
    clamping means under this definition.


CLS 299/103
TXT Clamped tooth:

    Cutter tooth or tooth head under subclass 79.1 in which the element is held
    by at least two members urged toward one another with a portion of the
    element between the members.

    (1)     Note.  A mere bolt and nut or the like is not included as a
    clamping means under this definition.


CLS 299/104
TXT Wear shield or replaceable wear sleeve:

    Cutter tooth or tooth head under subclass 79.1 including a component
    designed to abrade before the element or supporting means.


CLS 299/105
TXT Wear resistant feature for tool body (e.g., hard facing):

    Cutter tooth or tooth head under subclass 79.1 including a material; e.g.,
    tungsten carbide, placed on the element or supporting means or both in
    order to abrade or erode before the element or supporting means due to the
    higher hardness.


CLS 299/106
TXT Rolling or rotatable-type bit mount:

    Cutter tooth or tooth head under subclass 79.1 comprising a means to
    connect the cutting element to the supporting means in order to enable
    turning.

    (1)     Note.  A connection between a cutter head and drive shaft or
    between plural sections of drive shaft is not included under this
    definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    for plural cutting edges on tooth, pick, or bit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 412+ for an earth
    boring bit having plural separable cutter elements.

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, subclasses 9.1+ for a socket type holder.


CLS 299/107
TXT Having a spring biased retainer:

    Rolling or rotatable type bit mount under subclass 91.1 in which the
    connection includes a resilient member.


CLS 299/108
TXT Planar-type bit mount:

    Cutter tooth or tooth head under subclass 79.1 in which a means to connect
    the element is for an endless chain or cable.


CLS 299/109
TXT Tooth mounting spring biased:

    Planar type bit mount under subclass 91.2 in which the connection includes
    a resilient member.


CLS 299/110
TXT Rolling or rotatable bit:

    Cutter tooth or tooth head under subclass 79.1 in which the element able to
    spin, turn, or tend to spin on the material being contacted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 331, for an earth
    boring-type rolling cutter bit or rolling cutter bit element.


CLS 299/111
TXT Insert or tip shape:

    Cutter tooth or tooth head under subclass 79.1 in which the contact portion
    of a turnable element has a particular geometry.


CLS 299/112
TXT Planer-type cutter insert or tip shape:

    Cutter tooth or tooth head under subclass 79.1 in which the contact portion
    of an endless chain or cable element has a particular geometry.


CLS 299/113
TXT Insert or tip mounting feature (e.g., soldering, brazing, friction or
    interference fit):

    Cutter tooth or tooth head under subclass 79.1 in which the contact portion
    of the element is fastened in a particular manner.


CLS 300/
TTL BRUSH, BROOM, AND MOP MAKING

CLS 300/
TXT This class is intended to cover machines, appliances, and processes
    involving or for the performance of one or more of the operations necessary
    in the manufacture of brushes, brooms, or mops, except those of such
    general application to other arts or articles as to have acquired a
    distinct status elsewhere--as, for example, in nailing and stapling,
    sewing-machines, wire-working, folding-machines, woodworking.

    In the terminology of the present classification the words "brush" and
    "broom" are not used as synonymous, but as connoting, in general, certain
    distinctions--as, for example, of greater coarseness and stiffness in a
    broom than in a brush, and of animal bristles, hair, or equivalent in a
    brush, rather than the vegetable straw, splints, or equivalent of brooms;
    also of the uniformly smooth periphery and substantially circular
    cross-section which generally characterize bristles, properly so called, in
    distinction from broom materials.

    Under brush-making machines are placed those which deal with natural or
    artificial bristles of animal or vegetable origin and of the
    characteristics above mentioned or which handle metal bristles in an
    equivalent way to produce an implement whose working face consists of the
    ends of a mass of such bristles lying in substantially parallel and
    generally mutually contacting relation.  Those employing means for cutting
    wire into uniform lengths and separately inserting them in a backing are
    excluded along with means for molding rubber bristles integrally with a
    backing.  The latter is placed in Class 425, Plastic Article or Earthenware
    Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus.

    Under broom-making machines are included those which handle broom "straw"
    or equivalent material or splints or equivalents which are too stiff,
    heavy, coarse, or angular in cross-section to be properly termed "bristles".

    Because of indicated differences in the character of the material handled
    the types of machines placed under the respective stated heads are so
    different as to make it extremely unlikely that a structure placed under
    one head could anticipate one falling under the other.

    Under mop-making machines are placed those dealing with sheets, folds,
    fibers, or strands of spun, woven, or other fabric in such manner as to
    assemble them into a more or less amorphous mass capable of acting as a
    wiper, rather than as a brush or broom, and in general of capillary
    absorption and retention of foreign matter or of a suitable cleaning or
    polishing substance.  It is to be noted that in the use of a wiper for
    cleaning purposes foreign matter to be removed is carried away with the
    wiper, which is not the case with brushes or brooms.

    In the Encyclopedia Americana, edition of 1920, is an article on brushes
    and brooms whose perusal will often prove useful as a preliminary to a
    search in this class, due allowance being made for some inaccuracies and
    omissions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, appropriate subclasses under 592 + for a method
    including a step of nailing, stapling or clip clenching and not elsewhere
    classified, and subclasses 33.5+ and 243.5+ for overedge assembly
    apparatus.  See the note to Class 227 below.

    112,    Sewing, subclass 6, for a sewing machine disclosed for use in
    making brooms.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    72, for the setting or embedding or tufts or discrete elements onto a
    backing.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, appropriate subclass for
    apparatus, of general utility, for applying a member, e.g., nail, to work
    and see the reference above.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    particularly subclass 243 which pertains specifically to bristle or tufted
    article making by molding or shaping of plastic materials.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 805 for a cross-reference collection of apparatus disclosed to
    make a brush or comb.


CLS 300/1
TXT Miscellaneous inventions relating to the making of brushes, brooms, mops,
    or similar articles, not specifically classifiable under succeeding titles
    in this class and not having as sole function or operating one so generally
    useful as to warrant placing them in some other specific art-such, for
    example, as nailing and stapling, sewing-machines, boring-machines,
    folding-machines, etc.


CLS 300/2
TXT Machines for making brushes--i.e., implements whose working face is
    constituted by the ends of a mass of natural or artificial bristles
    assembled in parallel relation, in distinction from brooms, composed of
    assembled splints, stalks of broom-corn, or equivalent material, and from
    mops, composed of assembled folds, strips, sheets, or strands of spun or
    woven fabric.

    (1)     Note.  Devices for drilling, filling, tuft-gathering, feeding, or
    setting are excluded from this subclass, being placed in subclasses 3 to 9,
    of this class; also work-holders, for which see subclasses 10 and 11 of
    this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working.  See the "Search Class" note to the definition of
    this class (300).

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, appropriate subclass for
    apparatus of general utility, for applying a member, e.g., nail, to work,
    which is not provided for in the above definition.


CLS 300/3
TXT Devices for drilling holes in brush-backs and setting bunches, knots, or
    tufts of bristles in the holes to form a brush.


CLS 300/4
TXT Devices for feeding formed bunches, knots, or tufts of bristles to a
    brush-back and setting them in previously-prepared holes in the back.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for article dispensers
    (feeders) not otherwise provided for, and see the class definition of Class
    221 for a statement of the class lines and for the disposition of related
    disclosures of article and strip feeding processes and apparatus.


CLS 300/5
TXT Devices for gathering bunches, knots or tufts, of bristles from a stored
    mass and setting them in previously-prepared holes in a brush-back.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 6.


CLS 300/6
TXT Devices for gathering bunches, knots, or tufts of bristles from a stored
    mass and setting them in previously-prepared perforations in a brush-back
    by means of a looped cord or wire passing through the perforations and
    about the tuft and afterward drawn taut.


CLS 300/7
TXT Devices for gathering bunches, knots, or tufts of bristles from a stored
    mass or magazine preparatory to insertion in a hole or socket in a
    brush-back.


CLS 300/8
TXT Devices for setting formed bunches, knots, or tufts of bristles in holes in
    brush backs.


CLS 300/9
TXT Devices for filling holes in brush-backs with bristles individually
    deposited from a mass or magazine, generally by shaking or other agitation,
    to form tufts, one for each hole.


CLS 300/10
TXT Devices for holding brush-backs or blocks while being subjected to
    drilling, tuft-setting, filling, or other brush-making operations, except
    those for automatically positioning the back or block to bring to the
    working point successive areas corresponding to the desired positions of
    the tufts in the completed brush, for which see this class, subclass 11.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses. Class 269 is the residual
    locus for patents to a device for clamping, supporting and/or holding an
    article (or articles) in position to be operated on or treated.  See notes
    thereunder for other related loci.


CLS 300/11
TXT Holders for brush-backs or blocks operating to properly position with
    respect to a drill and tufting device, a tufting device alone, or other
    brush-making tool, successive areas of the block or back corresponding to
    the desired positions of the tufts in the completed brush.


CLS 300/12
TXT Machines for making brooms--i.e., implements whose working face is
    constituted by the ends of assembled splints, broom-corn cuttings, or
    equivalent material, as distinguished from the bristles of brushes (see
    subclass 2, this class), or the folds, strips, sheets, or strands, of spun
    or woven fabric of mops (see subclass 16, this class), and excluding those
    employing nails or staples, wound wire, or wire bands, for which see
    subclasses 13, 14, and 15 of this class.


CLS 300/13
TXT Broom-making machines characterized by the presence of nailing or stapling
    means especially adapted for securing broom material in place.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working.  See the "Search Class" note to the definition of
    this class (300).

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, appropriate subclass for
    apparatus, of general utility, for applying a member, e.g., nail, to work,
    which is not provided for in the above definition.


CLS 300/14
TXT Broom-making machines characterized by special means for winding wire about
    the broom material and handle or stick to secure them together.

    (1)     Note.  For machines for making strands of indefinite length by
    twisting hair or grass and winding a wrapping spirally thereon, see Class
    57, Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclass 4.


CLS 300/15
TXT Broom-making machines having provision for encircling the broom material
    with an annular wire and compressing the same to shape the broom and secure
    the material thereof to the stick or handle.


CLS 300/16
TXT Machines for so handling and securing sheets, strips, or strands of spun,
    woven, or other fabric as to constitute a mop, in distinction from a brush
    or broom.


CLS 300/17
TXT Devices for cutting off or otherwise removing irregularities of
    otherwise-completed brushes or brooms, so as to trim them to desired size
    and shape.


CLS 300/18
TXT Devices for combing or otherwise arranging bristles or other brush or broom
    materials with their ends in a common plane or for sorting them according
    to length or other characterisitic, or both.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, appropriate subclasses.


CLS 300/19
TXT Tools for performing some operation involved in the making of brushes,
    brooms, or mops and not elsewhere classified because of their special
    adaptation to this art.


CLS 300/20
TXT Devices for setting handles in otherwise completed brushes, brooms or mops.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working.  See the "Search Class" note to the definition of
    this class (300).

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, appropriate subclass for
    apparatus, of general utility, for applying a member, e.g., nail, to work
    which is not provided for in the above definition.


CLS 300/21
TXT Inventions relating to special methods, manipulations, or processes
    employed in the manufacture of brushes, brooms or mops.


CLS 301/
TTL LAND VEHICLES:  WHEELS AND  AXLES

CLS 301/
TXT This class includes the elementary structure of a running-gear for a land
    vehicle, that is, commonly known as a "wheel" or an "axle", per se.  The
    combination of a "significant" wheel or axle with "nominal" other
    structure, i.e., wherein the wheel or axle comprises the dominant feature
    or essential part, is also found in this class.

    (1)     Note.  This class is subordinate to Class 280, Land Vehicles, and
    distinguishes therefrom by the above definition.

    (2)     Note.  This class is subordinate to Class 180, Motor Vehicles.  The
    broader or more comprehensive combinations of cooperating structure of a
    wheel and axle with other elements of a motor-vehicle are classified in
    Class 180.  Such cooperating structure on the wheel and axle is found in
    this class (301) only where its modification is for wheel and axle
    structure purposes alone.

    (3)     Note.  The combination of a detailed wheel with a detailed brake is
    found in Class 301.  A brake with only enough wheel structure to support
    the brake is found in Class 188, Brakes.

    (4)     Note.  A wheel or the combination of a wheel with a resilient tire
    or with a resilient wheel component is normally found in Class 301.  A
    resilient tire, a resilient wheel, or a resilient wheel component is found
    in Class 152.  For example, a resilient tire with a rim including details
    of the rim allowing the tire to be seated thereon is found  in Class 152,
    but it is found in Class 301 if further including mounting structure for
    supporting that structure on a bearing hub.  A traction-increasing device
    supported by a wheel, even though combined with a resilient tire, is found
    in Class 301, but another traction-increasing device operative to engage
    the tread of the tire and permit resilient operation thereof is found in
    Class 152.

    (5)     Note.  A device which functions as a transportation means for a
    vehicle, but which is not a true wheel, is found in Class 180, Motor
    Vehicles, subclasses 7.1+; and Class 305, Wheel Substitutes for Land
    Vehicles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 894.3+ for a process of making (including
    assembling) a wheel or wheel part.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, for a casing for an axle; or for an
    axle (especially a motor vehicle axle) which involves improvement in the
    gear casing or in the gearing.  An axle housing, per se, (which may be
    recited as an "axle") is found in Class 301, especially subclasses 124.1+.

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels (see 4 Note).

    180,    Motor Vehicles (see Notes 2 and 5).

    280,    Land Vehicles, for a vehicle riding on a runner(s) or for a runner,
    per se.  (See also (1) Note, above.).

    305,    Wheel Substitutes for Land Vehicles, subclass 7 for a rigid
    circular track provided with a wheel or roller within the track the axis of
    which is eccentrically positioned with relation to the axis of the track,
    said wheel or roller being adapted to roll on a lower portion of the track,
    and subclasses 124+ for wheels especially modified to be used in flexible
    track apparatus for land vehicles.  For a patent claiming a wheel, per se,
    to be placed in Class 305 the wheel as disclosed must include structure
    which coacts with a track part, such as a flanged rim, or a grooved rim
    which structure is adapted to interengage with a portion of a flexible
    track.  A wheel which does not incorporate such structure, even though
    disclosed as being a flexible track-supporting wheel, is classified in this
    class (301).

    384,    Bearings, for a vehicle wheel bearing.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
     subclasses 166+ for a friction drive pulley or guide roll.




CLS 301/1
TXT Combination under class definition involving combined modification of both
    wheel and axle or modification of one which affects the operation of the
    other.


CLS 301/2
TXT Combination under subclass 1 having spring element to cushion relative
    lateral movement of the wheel.


CLS 301/2.5
TXT Combination under subclass 1 of wheel, axle and driving pedal crank, used
    chiefly in bicycle propulsion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 594.1+ for a journal
    bearing with a crank and pedal.

    384,    Bearings, subclass 431 for a plain bearing and subclass 458 for an
    antifriction bearing for a pedal type crank.


CLS 301/5.1
TXT WHEEL:
    Structure under the class definition comprising that part of a running-gear
    commonly known as a wheel, i.e., a member having a round periphery, adapted
    to turn about its center and to supportingly carry a vehicle over the land
    (1) by rolling engagement of the periphery with the land or (2) by rolling
    engagement of a tire on the periphery with the land.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 18+ for a caster including a
    wheel.

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 56 for mold for forming a vehicle wheel.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 579 for a
    metallic blank or circular shape and of width greater than its thickness.


CLS 301/5.21
TXT Balancing device:
    Wheel under subclass 5.1 comprising (1) a wheel having provision to
    equalize the weight of one portion thereof with respect to another, or (2)
    a member particularly adapted to be used on a wheel to equalize the weight
    of one portion of the wheel with respect to another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53.5,   for a weight added to a wheel to increase the traction thereof.

    SEARCH  CLASS:

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclass 154.1 for a resilient tire
    having provision to balance the tire (compared to means to balance the
    wheel or wheel and tire assembly found in this subclass.)


CLS 301/5.22
TXT Self-operating:
    Wheel under subclass 5.21 wherein the balancing device includes provision
    to allow a portion thereof to relocate to effect weight equalization
    without outside impetus.


CLS 301/5.23
TXT With peripheral roller:
    Wheel under subclass 5.1 combined with at least one additional member which
    is also adapted to function as a wheel, which additional member turns about
    a second axis, which second axis orbits about the first axis, i.e., the
    axis of the "primary" wheel.


CLS 301/5.24
TXT Having housing for tire inflation means:
    Wheel under subclass 5.1 including structure for protecting a member
    intended to transmit a filling fluid to a hollow tire thereon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclasses 450+ for an inflatable
    pneumatic tire or tire combined with a wheel, including a tire inflation
    means; and subclasses 427+ for an inflating means combined with a wheel.


CLS 301/5.3
TXT Wheel under subclass 5.1 particularly adapted to use on a roller skate.

    (1)     Note.  A roller skate wheel combined with a bearing is included in
    this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 45+ for a wheel particularly
    adapted to use on a caster.

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, for a tire or wheel under that class
    definition which might be used on a roller skate.

    384,    Bearings, for a skate bearing, per se.


CLS 301/5.7
TXT Wheel under subclass 5.3 having an antifriction bearing.


CLS 301/6.1
TXT With drive or brake attachment:
    Wheel under subclass 5.1 combined with an element (1) which transmits force
    to the wheel to effect movement thereof or (2) which receives force from
    the wheel to prevent movement thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclass 153 for a cooling device for a
    resilient tire.

    188,    Brakes, for a brake for a wheel without "significant" recitation of
    a wheel.  The combination of a "significant" brake with a "significant"
    wheel is included in this and the indented subclasses (301/6.1+).


CLS 301/6.2
TXT Aircraft wheel:
    Wheel under subclass 6.1 particularly adapted to use on an aircraft to
    support that aircraft while on the ground.


CLS 301/6.3
TXT And with brake-cooling means:
    Wheel under subclass 6.1 including provision to reduce the thermal level of
    the brake structure.


CLS 301/6.4
TXT Comprising means to utilize a fluid:
    Wheel under subclass 6.3 wherein the provision to reduce the thermal level
    uses a contained flowable medium such as a gas or liquid to carry heat away
    from the brake.

    (1)     Note.  A cooling fin intended to transfer heat to passing air does
    not "contain" a flowable medium and, therefore, is not included herein.


CLS 301/6.5
TXT Drive means on wheel:
    Wheel under subclass 6.1 combined with an element which transmits force to
    the wheel to effect movement thereof.


CLS 301/6.6
TXT Wheel supported on brake drum clear of hub:
    Wheel under subclass 6.1 combined with a brake member intended to turn
    about the wheel axis, said member having a cylindrical friction surface
    thereon, which wheel is supported by the brake member without any other
    load-bearing attachment to the vehicle.


CLS 301/6.7
TXT Brake drum supported on wheel clear of hub:
    Wheel under subclass 6.1 combined with a brake member intended to turn
    about the wheel axis, said member having a cylindrical friction surface
    thereon, which brake member is supported by the wheel member without any
    other load-bearing attachment to the vehicle.


CLS 301/6.8
TXT Disc brake:
    Wheel under subclass 6.1 including a brake member intended to turn about
    the wheel axis, said member having an axially facing friction surface
    thereon.


CLS 301/6.9
TXT For cycle-type vehicle:
    Wheel under subclass 6.1 particularly adapted to use on a two or three
    wheel bicycle or motorcycle.


CLS 301/6.91
TXT Having vibration damper or heat insulator:
    Wheel under subclass 6.1 including  (1) provision to eliminate regular,
    repetitive oscillations or (2) provision to prevent the transfer of heat.


CLS 301/7
TXT Wheel under subclass 5.1 of the type usable on an ordinary wheelbarrow.


CLS 301/8
TXT Wheel under subclass 5.1 having structure in addition to that of a
    conventional wheel for reinforcing any component part at any point.


CLS 301/9.1
TXT Detachable wheel section:
    Wheel under subclass 5.1 having means whereby a substantial part of the
    wheel, e.g., not less than a demountable rim and tire, is removably secured
    to an inner part without removing the inner part from an attached position
    on the axle.


CLS 301/9.2
TXT With provision to permit positioning of rim laterally of hub:Wheel under
    subclass 9.1 with means to allow the rim to be held on the supporting
    structure (hub) in a first axial position or alternatively in a second
    axial position.


CLS 301/10.1
TXT Demountable rim:
    Wheel under subclass 9.1 wherein the detachable, substantial part comprises
    an annular member intended (1) to rollingly engage the ground or (2) to
    support a tire intended to rollingly engage the ground.


CLS 301/11.1
TXT Rim-securing means:
    Wheel under subclass 10.1 having means to attach the rim to the periphery
    of a wheel body.


CLS 301/11.2
TXT With lock between rim and wheel body:
    Wheel under subclass 11.1 combined with means distinct from the securing
    means to prevent separation of the rim and the wheel web.


CLS 301/11.3
TXT With spacer between rim and wheel body:
    Wheel under subclass 11.1 combined with means distinct from the securing
    means to fill clearance between the radially inner surface of the rim and
    the radially outer surface of the wheel web.


CLS 301/12.1
TXT Spoke secured:
    Wheel under subclass 11.1 wherein the rim is secured directly (i.e.,
    without a separate felly) to the spokes of the wheel.


CLS 301/12.2
TXT Radially movable spoke:
    Wheel under subclass 12.1 wherein the securing means comprises a spoke with
    at least a portion thereof repositionable outwardly from the axis.


CLS 301/13.1
TXT Plural rims:
    Wheel under subclass 11.1 including more than one rim mounted on the wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclass 376 for nondemountable plural
    rims each of which is particularly adapted for use with a resilient tire.


CLS 301/13.2
TXT Dual rims:
    Wheel under subclass 13.1 including more than one rim of substantially
    equal radial extent positioned near each other along the wheel axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36.1    for dual wheels.


CLS 301/14
TXT Wheel under subclass 11.1 wherein the means for securing the rim to the
    wheel can be operated to assist in removing the rim.


CLS 301/15
TXT Wheel under subclass 11.1 including a transplit rim, i.e., a rim of
    adjustable length so that the rim is secured to the wheel by contracting
    the rim about the periphery of the wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30+     for a demountable, transversely divided rim without securing means,
    generally.


CLS 301/16
TXT Wheel under subclass 11.1 wherein the portion located radially inside the
    rim includes a component that is movable radially outwardly to engage and
    secure the rim thereon.


CLS 301/17
TXT Wheel under subclass 11.1 wherein there is a bayonet-joint connection
    between the outer periphery of the wheel and the inner periphery of the rim.


CLS 301/18
TXT Wheel under subclass 11.1 wherein the rim is secured by a wedge operable to
    exert a radial pressure on the rim.


CLS 301/19
TXT Wheel under subclass 18 wherein the wedging-surfaces extend along the axis
    of the wheel.


CLS 301/20
TXT Wheel under subclass 19 wherein the wedge has movement discrete of that of
    both the rim and the wheel web.


CLS 301/21
TXT Wheel under subclass 20 wherein the wedge comprises a tapered, helical
    member that is rotated about its axis to effect movement thereof along its
    axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for a wheel having a demountable rim secured by a radially
    extending latch bolt.


CLS 301/22
TXT Wheel under subclass 20 wherein the wedge is in the form of a ring
    extending around the periphery of the wheel.


CLS 301/23
TXT Wheel under subclass 11.1 wherein the securing means comprises a removable
    side ring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for a ring shaped wheel rim securing means comprising a wedge.


CLS 301/24
TXT Wheel under subclass 11.1 wherein the securing means comprises a removable
    side lug.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18+,    for a wheel wherein the rim is secured by a wedge operable to exert
    radial pressure on the rim.


CLS 301/25
TXT Wheel under subclass 11.1 wherein either the rim or the wheel-body carries
    a member capable of movement to lock the rim to the wheel-body.


CLS 301/26
TXT Wheel under subclass 25 wherein the securing means comprises a ring secured
    to a wheel element by means such that the ring can be moved to two
    positions, one locking the rim in place and the other in a position to
    release it.


CLS 301/27
TXT Wheel under subclass 26 wherein the securing ring includes a portion that
    is movable radially outwardly to engage and secure the rim to the wheel
    body.


CLS 301/28
TXT Wheel under subclass 25 wherein the latch comprises a helically ribbed
    member positioned with its axis extending away from the wheel axis, such
    that upon rotation about its axis the member is caused to move away from
    the wheel axis and secure the rim to the wheel body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for wheel having a removable rim secured to the wheel body by a
    radially acting bolt wedge.


CLS 301/29
TXT Wheel under subclass 25 wherein the latch is a pivoted element.


CLS 301/29.2
TXT Circumferentially divided rim:
    Wheel under subclass 11.1 having a demountable rim which is divided into
    plural axial sections, which rim is secured to the wheel body by bringing
    together the rim's sections.

    (1)     Note.  The structure of the rim is such that the sections can be
    separated only when there is no tire on the wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclasses 396+ for rim parts which are
    particularly adapted for use with a resilient tire, which rim parts are
    separable to facilitate removal of the tire.


CLS 301/30
TXT Wheel under subclass 9.1 wherein the demountable rim or a section thereof
    is divided by a cut     generally parallel to the wheel axis.


CLS 301/30.2
TXT One section both transversely and  circumferentially divided:Wheel under
    subclass 30 having a demountable rim which is divided into plural axial
    sections, which rim is secured to the wheel body by bringing together the
    rim's sections, wherein one axial section thereof is cut parallel to the
    wheel axis.


CLS 301/31
TXT Wheel under subclass 30 wherein the rim is divided by a plurality of
    transverse cuts.


CLS 301/32
TXT Wheel under subclass 31 wherein two sections of the rim are pivotally
    attached to each other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclass 377 for a rim particularly
    adapted to receive a resilient tire, which rim includes a retracting wheel
    section.


CLS 301/33
TXT Wheel under subclass 30 wherein adjacent ends of the divided rim are
    provided with means for         moving such ends into or out of aligned
    relation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    157,    Wheelwright Machines, subclasses 1.35+ for a rim-breaking device
    which is not part of the rim and is intended to be removed therefrom during
    normal use of the rim.


CLS 301/34
TXT Wheel under subclass 33 wherein the adjacent ends of the rim are provided
    with tool-receiving means to be used to align the ends of the rim.


CLS 301/35.1
TXT Circumferentially divided rim:
    Wheel under subclass 9.1 having a demountable rim which is divided into
    plural axial sections, which rim is secured to the wheel body by bringing
    together the rim's sections.

    (1)     Note.  The structure of the rim is such that the sections can be
    separated only when there is no tire on the wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclasses 396+ for rim parts which are
    particularly adapted for use with a resilient tire, which rim parts are
    separable to facilitate removal of the tire.


CLS 301/35.2
TXT Rim sections held together by bayonet joint:
    Wheel under subclass 35.1 wherein the axial sections are configured such
    that one is moved toward the other along the wheel axis, i.e., their axes,
    then rotated so that the sections interfit and cannot be separated without
    reversal of the movement.


CLS 301/35.3
TXT Rim sections held together by transversely divided locking ring:Wheel under
    subclass 35.1 wherein the axial sections are configured to interfit with an
    annular member so that they cannot be separated without removal of the
    annular member, wherein the annular member is divided by a cut generally
    parallel to the wheel axis.


CLS 301/35.51
TXT Including means to prevent relative rotation between rim and wheel
    body:Wheel under subclass 10.1 including structure adapted to interfit with
    the rim and the wheel web to secure the two members such that one will not
    turn about the wheel axis with respect to the other.


CLS 301/35.52
TXT Geared mounting mechanism:
    Wheel under subclass 9.1 wherein the detachable section comprises a toothed
    rotary member which is intended to be used to effect securement of the
    wheel on supporting structure, e.g., on an axle.


CLS 301/35.53
TXT Artillery wheel with single-acting retaining means:
    Wheel under subclass 9.1 which is particularly adapted to use in
    transporting ordnance and which includes a member for securing that wheel
    to supporting structure, such as an axle, by a single movement.


CLS 301/35.54
TXT Artillery wheel bolted to hub:
    Wheel under subclass 9.1 which is particularly adapted to use in
    transporting ordnance and which is configured to be secured to supporting
    structure, such as an axle, by a helically ribbed member interfitting with
    the supporting structure.


CLS 301/35.55
TXT By central nut:
    Wheel under subclass 35.54 wherein the helically ribbed member is
    concentric with the wheel axis.


CLS 301/35.56
TXT Wire-spoke wheel with single-acting mounting means:
    Wheel under subclass 9.1 having the hub joined to the rim by a plurality of
    generally radially extending slender rods and including a member for
    securing that wheel to supporting structure, such as an axle, by a single
    movement.


CLS 301/35.57
TXT Wire-spoke wheel bolted to hub:
    Wheel under subclass 9.1 having the hub joined to the rim by a plurality of
    generally radially extending rods and configured to be secured to
    supporting structure, such as an axle, by a helically ribbed member
    interfitting with the supporting structure.


CLS 301/35.58
TXT By central nut:
    Wheel under subclass 35.57 wherein the helically ribbed member is
    concentric with the wheel axis.


CLS 301/35.59
TXT Spoke formations bolted to hub:
    Wheel under subclass 9.1 having the hub joined to the rim by a member
    configured to appear to be a plurality of generally radially extending rods.


CLS 301/35.61
TXT Disc wheel with single-acting retaining means:
    Wheel under subclass 9.1 having the hub joined to the rim by a generally
    flat, radially extending platelike member and including a member for
    securing that wheel to supporting structure, such as an axle, by a single
    movement.


CLS 301/35.62
TXT Disc wheel bolted to hub:
    Wheel under subclass 9.1 having the hub joined to the rim by a generally
    flat, radially extending platelike member and configured to be secured to
    supporting structure, such as an axle, by a helically ribbed member
    interfitting with the supporting structure.


CLS 301/35.63
TXT By central nut:
    Wheel under subclass 35.62 wherein the helically ribbed member is
    concentric with the wheel axis.


CLS 301/36.1
TXT Dual wheels:
    Plural wheels under subclass 5.1 of substantially equal radial extent
    positioned near each other along a common wheel axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13.2,   for a single wheel supporting dual demountable rims.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclass 376 for a wheel particularly
    adapted for receiving plural resilient tires.


CLS 301/36.2
TXT Relatively rotatable:
    Dual wheels under subclass 36.1 wherein both turn about the same axis but
    may turn at different rates.


CLS 301/36.3
TXT With wear-preventing means therebetween:
    Dual wheels under subclass 36.1 combined with a member fitting between the
    wheels to reduce abrasive deterioration of the wheels or of the tires
    thereon.


CLS 301/37.1
TXT With wheel cover:
    Wheel under subclass 5.1 combined with a facing member secured to and
    rotating with the wheel, covering a substantial portion of the wheel other
    than the bearing hub to ornament or protect said wheel.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a trim member which covers less that an
    entire wheel, e.g., a rim-covering trim ring.

    (2)     Note.  A wheel cover, per se, is included herein if particularly
    adapted for attachment to a vehicle wheel.

    (3)     Note.  A wheel may include a "wheel hub" which is detachably
    secured to a "bearing hub" and which is permanently attached to the
    radially innermost portion of the wheel body.  A "hub cap" covering the
    "wheel hub" is included in this and the indented subclasses; whereas a "hub
    cap" covering only the "bearing hub" is in subclasses 108.1+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for a member which engages and covers only the axial end of the hub
    of a wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 587 for an ornamental
    or sign- carrying member to be mounted on a wheel or axle of a land vehicle
    which does not rotate when the vehicle is in motion.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 716.5+ for an in
    situ attached- type channel or trim strip for a fixed structure, generally.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 304+ for a receptacle for
    a tire.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 156 for a wheel-attached dust or mud guard
    and subclass 160 for a wheel guard for attachment to a vehicle.

    D12,    Transportation, subclasses 204+ for a design patent for a wheel.


CLS 301/37.21
TXT With anti-theft device for wheel cover:
    Wheel under subclass 37.1 combined with a member intended to make difficult
    unauthorized removal of the cover from the wheel.


CLS 301/37.22
TXT Tire sidewall:
    Wheel under subclass 37.1 wherein the facing member comprises a member
    intended to cover an axially facing portion of a ground-engaging tire.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclasses 151+ for a resilient tire or
    for the combination of a resilient tire with only that portion of a wheel
    that is particularly adapted to receive a resilient tire.  The combination
    of a detailed, nonresilient wheel with a resilient tire is in Class 301.


CLS 301/37.23
TXT Retained on wheel cover:
    Wheel under subclass 37.22 wherein the facing member includes both a
    portion extending over the tire and a portion extending over the wheel and
    wherein the portion extending over the tire is attached to the portion
    extending over the wheel.


CLS 301/37.24
TXT Trim ring covering rim only:
    Wheel under subclass 37.1 wherein the facing member is annular and is
    intended to cover only that portion of the wheel intended to support a tire.


CLS 301/37.25
TXT With relatively rotatable element:
    Wheel under subclass 37.1 combined with an additional facing member that is
    permitted to turn more than 3605 with respect to the first facing member.


CLS 301/37.26
TXT Including distinct central medallion:
    Wheel under subclass 37.1 wherein the facing member has a first portion and
    a second portion attached thereto, which second portion is positioned near
    the axis of the wheel.


CLS 301/37.27
TXT Attached to plastic cover permanently secured to wheel:
    Wheel  under  subclass  37.26  including  a  first facing member made
    primarily of organic polymeric material secured to the wheel so that it is
    not readily detachable and including a detachable central medallion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37.43,  for a plastic wheel cover permanently secured to a wheel, generally.


CLS 301/37.28
TXT Including access door:
    Wheel under subclass 37.1 wherein the facing member has an openable panel
    intended to allow admission to the vehicle wheel.


CLS 301/37.29
TXT Wire-spoke wheel simulating wheel cover:
    Wheel under subclass 37.1 wherein the facing member is configured to appear
    as a wire-spoke wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9.1+,   for a wire-spoke wheel having a detachable section, especially
    subclasses 35.56+ for such a wheel bolted to a hub, subclass 35.58 for such
    a wheel with single-acting mounting means, and subclass 35.59 for a wheel
    having a disc portion configured to appear as a wire-spoke wheel.


CLS 301/37.31
TXT Including resilient securing means:
    Wheel under subclass 37.1 having a spring member intended to hold the
    facing member in position on the web or rim.


CLS 301/37.32
TXT Resilient securing ring on cover:
    Wheel under subclass 37.31 wherein the spring member is generally annular
    about the wheel axis and is a component of the facing member.

    (1)     Note.  A spring member that extends more than 1805 about the wheel
    axis is considered to be generally annular.  Note further that the annular
    spring may be of irregular radii.


CLS 301/37.33
TXT Acting to bias portion of cover into engagement with wheel:
    Wheel under subclass 37.32 wherein the spring member yieldably urges a
    portion of the basic material of the facing member into engagement with a
    portion of the wheel itself to hold the facing member in position thereon.


CLS 301/37.34
TXT Detachable:
    Wheel under subclass 37.31 wherein the spring member is itself removable
    from  both the wheel and the facing member.


CLS 301/37.35
TXT Wheel body or rim having integral securing bump:
    Wheel under subclass 37.1 having a raised surface extending from the
    surface of the web of the wheel or from the rim intended to hold the facing
    member in position thereon.


CLS 301/37.36
TXT Bump on rim:
    Wheel under subclass 37.35 having a raised surface extending from the rim.


CLS 301/37.37
TXT Cover securing threaded means:
    Wheel under subclass 37.1 having a helically ribbed means intended to mate
    with the facing member or wheel and to hold the facing member in position
    on the wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108.4+, for a hub cap secured to a hub by a threaded means.


CLS 301/37.38
TXT Central thread:
    Wheel under subclass 37.37 wherein the helically ribbed means mates with
    the facing member or with the wheel about a helix coextensive with the
    wheel axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108.5,  for a hub cap secured to a hub by a central threaded means.


CLS 301/37.39
TXT Cover having integral securing teeth:
    Wheel under subclass 37.1 wherein the facing member has formed therefrom
    sharp protuberances intended to directly engage the wheel to thereby hold
    the facing member in position on the wheel.


CLS 301/37.41
TXT Cover securing, wheel spoke engaging means:
    Wheel under subclass 37.1 including means intended to hold the facing
    member in position on the wheel by engagement with a spoke of the wheel.


CLS 301/37.42
TXT Plastic cover:
    Wheel under subclass 37.1 wherein the cover member is made primarily of
    organic polymeric material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108.3,  for a plastic hub cap.


CLS 301/37.43
TXT Permanently secured to wheel:
    Wheel under subclass 37.42 including a first facing member made primarily
    of organic polymeric material secured to the wheel such that it is not
    readily detachable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37.27,  for a plastic wheel permanently secured to a wheel, combined with a
    detachable central medallion.


CLS 301/38.1
TXT Emergency:
    Wheel under subclass 5.1 intended to be used only when an ordinary wheel is
    unavailable and intended to be used only temporarily, either to assist or
    to take the place of the ordinary wheel.


CLS 301/39.1
TXT Tire or rim:
    Wheel under subclass 38.1 in which a tire or rim is used for emergency
    purposes instead of a whole wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclass 152 for an emergency resilient
    tire; subclass 158 for a resilient tire with a filler to support the wheel,
    as if inflated, during an emergency; and subclasses 516-521 for a run-flat
    tire, i.e., a tire with an internal support.


CLS 301/40.1
TXT Traction increasing:
    Wheel under subclass 39.1 wherein the emergency tire or rim is intended to
    increase the tractive effort of the wheel or to prevent slipping (or
    sluing) of the wheel from its intended direction of travel, and is readily
    removable from the ordinary wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41.1,   for a wheel with traction-increasing provision, generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclasses 208+ for a resilient tire
    including means to increase the traction thereof, without details of the
    supporting wheel other than details adapting the device for use with a
    resilient tire.


CLS 301/40.2
TXT Auxiliary tire mounted to one side of main wheel:
    Wheel  under  subclass  40.1  wherein  the traction increasing emergency
    wheel comprises a coaxial unit secondary to the main wheel, which is
    axially offset therefrom.


CLS 301/40.3
TXT Safety emergency tire or rim:
    Wheel under subclass 39.1 with provision to function in the event of
    unexpected failure or the ordinary wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclasses 516-521 for a run-flat tire,
    i.e., a tire with an internal support.


CLS 301/40.4
TXT Rim clamp for securing emergency tire to rim:
    Wheel under subclass 39.1 including a member intended to grip the rim to
    secure the emergency tire thereto.


CLS 301/40.5
TXT Cover cleated to wheel to provide smooth road surface:
    Wheel under subclass 39.1 comprising a tread member intended to be
    temporarily secured to the wheel body and to encase the tire therein,
    presenting a continuous tread to the surface of the roadway.


CLS 301/40.6
TXT Auxiliary wheel movable radially into emergency position:
    Wheel under subclass 38.1 comprising an auxiliary wheel having an axis
    parallel to that of the ordinary wheel, movable laterally to present the
    periphery of the wheel to the earth.


CLS 301/41.1
TXT Traction increasing:
    Wheel under subclass 5.1 including provision for increasing the tractive
    effort thereof or for preventing slipping (or sluing) of the wheel from its
    intended direction of travel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40.1,   for an  emergency  wheel  with traction-increasing provision.


CLS 301/42
TXT Wheel under subclasses 41.1+ wherein such traction-improving provision
    comprises a chain.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclasses 231+ for a
    traction-increasing chain for a resilient tire.

    305,    Wheel Substitutes for Land Vehicles, subclass 19 for an endless
    flexible track mounted about the periphery of a wheel to completely
    surround such wheel and be carried thereby.


CLS 301/43
TXT Wheel under subclass 41.1 in which the traction-increasing provision
    comprises a member extending radially beyond the ground-engaging perimeter
    of the wheel or tire.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 540+ for rolling or rotating earth
    working tools with circumferentially spaced teeth, tines, blades or the
    like.


CLS 301/44.1
TXT Removably attached:
    Wheel under subclass 43 from which the cleat is readily detached.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 556 for a rolling earth-working tool with a
    tooth or blade clamped to a hub face.


CLS 301/44.2
TXT Of resilient material:
    Wheel under subclass 44.1 wherein the removable cleat is made of material
    which after deformation will return to its original configuration.


CLS 301/44.3
TXT To rim:
    Wheel under subclass 44.1 wherein the cleat is readily removable from
    attachment to the rim of the wheel.


CLS 301/44.4
TXT To wheel body:
    Wheel under subclass 44.1 wherein the cleat is readily removable from
    attachment to the web of the wheel.


CLS 301/45
TXT Wheel under subclass 43 in which the cleat is movable with respect to its
    support for any purpose.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 545 for a rolling earth working tool with
    movable blades or teeth.

    305,    Wheel Substitutes for Land Vehicles, subclasses 4+ for a
    ground-engaging element movably secured to the rim of a wheel in the form
    of a stepper.  Class 305 takes a device in the form of a plate pivotally
    secured to the rim of a wheel and adapted to extend in a plane parallel to
    the ground when in contact therewith to simulate the action of a foot even
    though the plate is provided with a ground-engaging cleat.  The device of
    Class 305 is distinguished from that of Class 301, subclasses 45+ in that
    the traction-increasing device of Class 301 comprises a ground-engaging
    cleat which may be movably mounted on the rim of a wheel; the plate of
    Class 305 is adapted to simulate the action of a foot when in contact with
    the ground.


CLS 301/46
TXT Wheel under subclass 45 wherein such movement permits adjustment by some
    control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 541 and 546 for a rolling earth working
    tool having projecting teeth or blades and means for adjusting the teeth or
    blades.


CLS 301/47
TXT Wheel under subclass 46 wherein the cleat is carried by a supplemental
    support adapted for attachment to a conventional type of wheel.


CLS 301/48
TXT Wheel under subclass 46 wherein the cleat, during revolution of the wheel,
    is alternately projected and retracted, the projected position being at the
    ground-engaging position of the spur or cleat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 546 for a rolling earth working tool with
    alternately projecting and retracting teeth or blades.


CLS 301/49
TXT Wheel under subclass 48 wherein the cleat is carried by a supplemental
    support adapted for attachment to a conventional type of wheel.


CLS 301/50
TXT Wheel under subclass 46 including a plurality of projecting cleats each of
    which is adjustable, with respect to the wheel body, independently of the
    other cleats.


CLS 301/51
TXT Wheel under subclass 45 wherein the cleat is moved to a projected position
    by a spring.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 544 for a rolling earth working tool with a
    spring mounted tooth or blade.

    305,    Wheel Substitutes for Land Vehicles, subclass 5 for spring-biased
    elements movably mounted on the rim of a wheel forming ground-engaging feet
    as the wheel rotates.


CLS 301/52
TXT Wheel under subclass 41.1 including two rims of substantially equal radial
    extent positioned near each other along a common wheel axis with a
    projecting, traction-improving cleat extending from one rim to the other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 552+ for a rolling earth working tool
    having laterally extending bars supported on parallel rims.


CLS 301/53
TXT Wheel under subclass 41.1 wherein the ground-engaging portion of the wheel
    (other than a "tire") is provided in its face with a series of openings or
    depressions to increase the tractive effort thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 534 for a rolling earth working tool with
    openings in the rim.


CLS 301/53.5
TXT Wheel weight:
    Wheel under subclass 41.1 with provision to add mass thereto to increase
    traction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.21+,  for a weight used to balance a wheel.


CLS 301/54
TXT Wheel under subclass 5.1 wherein the rim and hub are connected by two
    means, one of which supports the load on the hub by the compression and the
    other by the tension of said means.


CLS 301/55
TXT Wheel under subclass 5.1 wherein the rim and hub are connected by means
    which supports the load on the hub by deliberately applied tension of said
    means.


CLS 301/56
TXT Wheel under subclass 55 wherein the supporting means are radial spokes each
    of which is secured at its radially inner extent to the hub at a point such
    that a radius from the point is normal to the axis of the spoke.

    (1)     Note.  A wheel may include a "wheel hub" which is detachably
    secured to a "bearing hub" and which is permanently attached to the
    radially innermost portion of the wheel body.  In this subclass, the spokes
    comprise the wheel body and may be attached to either type of hub.


CLS 301/57
TXT Wheel under subclass 55 wherein the supporting means comprises at least a
    first pair of straight rodlike members under tension, which are united at
    one end of each.


CLS 301/58
TXT Wheel under subclass 55 including details of the point of attachment of a
    straight rodlike member under tension and the outer peripheral member of
    the wheel.

    (1)     Note.  A "rim" comprises an annular member of a wheel that either
    engages the ground directly or supports a "tire" which engages the ground.
    A "felly" is a single member that is less than annular which acts in
    conjunction with other fellies as a rim.


CLS 301/59
TXT Wheel under subclass 55 including details of the point of attachment of a
    straight rodlike member under tension and the innermost member of the wheel.


CLS 301/60
TXT Wheel under subclass 59 including more than one straight rodlike member
    under tension  and including means that is to be so manipulated that all
    (or substantially all) of the spokes can be shortened at the same time.


CLS 301/61
TXT Wheel under subclass 59 including a straight rodlike member under tension,
    and including a tubular member for receiving the rodlike member, wherein
    the hub is formed with a pocket for receipt of the tubular member.


CLS 301/62
TXT Wheel under subclass 5.1 in which the load carried on the hub is supported
    by the compression of the material of the wheel between the hub and the
    ground.

    (1)     Note.  A spoke type wheel wherein tension was not deliberately
    applied to the spokes is included in this subclass.


CLS 301/63.1
TXT Disc:
    Wheel under subclass 62 including a flat or dish shaped, load-carrying
    portion between the rim and the hub.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.3+,   for a disc-type skate wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 535 for a rolling earth-working tool
    comprising a disc with a detachable rim, and subclass 604 for an
    earth-working disc, per se.


CLS 301/64.1
TXT Having spoke configuration:
    Wheel under subclass 63.1 in which the material of the supporting disc is
    shaped to simulate in form or in function the distinct spokes of a
    conventional spoke wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55+,    for a spoke wheel in which the spokes are under tension.

    62,     for a wheel in which the body is comprised of spokes without
    deliberately applied tension or under compression.

    73+,    for a spoke wheel in which the spokes are arranged in two or more
    planes.

    79+,    for a spoke wheel, generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 557 for a rolling earth-working tool
    comprising a rim with spokes.


CLS 301/64.2
TXT Wheel body formed from two discs permanently secured together:Wheel under
    subclass 64.1 including a first load-carrying  portion  and  a  second
    load-carrying portion between the rim and hub; both of which are generally
    flat or dish shaped and are fastened to each other such that they are not
    readily separable.


CLS 301/64.3
TXT Wheel formed from two discs:
    Wheel under subclass 63.1 including a first load-carrying  portion  and  a
    second load-  carrying portion between the rim and hub; both of which are
    generally flat- or dish-shaped and are fastened to each other.


CLS 301/64.4
TXT Removably secured together:
    Wheel under subclass 64.3 wherein the first and second  load-carrying,
    generally  flat- or dish-shaped, portions are detachably fastened to each
    other.


CLS 301/64.5
TXT By tab struck from disc:
    Wheel under subclass 64.4 wherein the first and second load-carrying,
    generally  flat- or  dish-shaped, portions are secured to each other by a
    flap member on one of the portions that extends into the other.


CLS 301/64.6
TXT Of fabric, wood or paper:
    Wheel under subclass 63.1 made primarily of (1) woven textile, (2)
    naturally occurring cellulose, or (3) solidified cellulose pulp.


CLS 301/64.7
TXT Of plastic:
    Wheel under subclass 63.1 made primarily of organic polymeric material.

    (1)     Note.  A disc wheel of "rubber" is included herein.


CLS 301/65
TXT Wheel under subclass 62 in which the wheel as a whole or a substantial
    whole is formed of metal by casting.


CLS 301/66
TXT Wheel under subclass 62 where two or more spokes are integrally connected.


CLS 301/67
TXT Wheel under subclass 62 including details of the point of attachment of a
    straight rodlike supporting member under compression and the outer
    peripheral member of the wheel.

    (1)     Note.  A "rim" comprises an annular member of a wheel that either
    engages the ground directly or supports a "tire" which engages the ground.
    A "felly" is a single member that is less than annular which acts in
    conjunction with other fellies as a rim.


CLS 301/68
TXT Wheel under subclass 67 in which such connecting means is adjustable.


CLS 301/69
TXT Wheel under subclass 68 in which such adjustment is accomplished by screw
    means.


CLS 301/70
TXT Wheel under subclass 67 including a straight rodlike member between the hub
    and the rim (or felly) under compression, and including a tubular member
    for receiving the rodlike member, wherein the rim is formed with a pocket
    for receipt of the tubular member.


CLS 301/71
TXT Wheel under subclass 70 wherein the separate spoke-pocket also functions to
    secure the adjacent ends of a felly together.


CLS 301/72
TXT Wheel under subclass 67 where the felly and spoke connection is also a
    joint between adjacent ends of a felly.


CLS 301/73
TXT Wheel under subclass 62  formed of two or more series of spokes arranged in
    different planes.


CLS 301/74
TXT Wheel under subclass 73 including means for connecting the spokes to the
    hub.


CLS 301/75
TXT Wheel under subclass 74 in which connection is such that it permits
    manipulation to tighten a spoke on the wheel.


CLS 301/76
TXT Wheel under subclass 74 wherein a spoke is forced into a socket formed in
    the hub.


CLS 301/77
TXT Wheel under subclass 76 wherein the hub is reinforced by a band or casing
    adjacent to the socket receiving the spoke.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    for a hub-reinforcing band or casing, generally.


CLS 301/78
TXT Wheel under subclass 74 in which the hub is formed in sections adapted to
    clamp the end of the spoke therebetween.


CLS 301/79
TXT Wheel under subclass 62 wherein the spokes of the wheel are formed in a
    single series in the same plane.


CLS 301/80
TXT Wheel under subclass 79 including details of the point of attachment of a
    straight radial rodlike wheel body member under compression and the
    radially innermost member of the wheel.


CLS 301/81
TXT Wheel under subclass 80 in which the connection is such that it permits
    manipulation to tighten a spoke on the wheel.


CLS 301/82
TXT Wheel under subclass 80 wherein a spoke is forced into a socket formed in
    the hub.


CLS 301/83
TXT Wheel under subclass 82 wherein the hub is reinforced by a band or casing
    adjacent to the sockets for receiving the spoke.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    for a hub-reinforcing band or casing, generally.


CLS 301/84
TXT Wheel under subclass 80 in which the hub is formed in sections adapted to
    clamp the end of the spoke therebetween.


CLS 301/85
TXT Wheel under subclass 84 in which the ends of a plurality of spokes are
    clamped by the hub and are so arranged relative to each other that their
    inner ends form a continuous ring.


CLS 301/86
TXT Wheel under subclass 5.1 including a particular ground-engaging means
    distinct from the body or rim which means is annular and is not intended to
    yield under compressive load when in engagement with the ground.

    (1)     Note.  A nonresilient tire, per se, to be used on a wheel is
    included herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclasses 151+ for a tire that is
    intended to yield under compressive load when in engagement with the ground.


CLS 301/87
TXT Wheel under subclass 86 particularly related to means for securing the tire
    to a conventional part of the wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11.1+,  for means to secure a demountable rim to the other portions of a
    vehicle wheel.


CLS 301/88
TXT Wheel under subclass 87 wherein the fastening means also functions to join
    the adjacent ends of felly-sections.


CLS 301/89
TXT Wheel under subclass 87 wherein the securing means comprises a filler
    member that is either (1) a tapered or (2) a relatively thin plate,
    intended to fit between adjacent wheel elements to effect securement of the
    tire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19+,    for similar means for securing a demountable rim to the other
    components of a wheel.


CLS 301/90
TXT Wheel under subclass 86 wherein the tire is provided with means to raise
    the wheel out of a streetcar track.


CLS 301/91
TXT Wheel under subclass 86 wherein the length of the tire is adjustable.


CLS 301/92
TXT Wheel under subclass 91 wherein the adjusting means is operated by a
    screw-threaded element.


CLS 301/93
TXT Wheel under subclass 92 wherein the screw is provided at opposite ends with
    right and left hand threads.


CLS 301/94
TXT Wheel under subclass 91 wherein the adjusting means is a wedge.


CLS 301/95
TXT Wheel under subclass 5.1 including that portion of a wheel intermediate the
    spokes and tire.

    (1)     Note.  A "rim" comprises an annular member of a wheel that either
    engages the ground directly or supports a "tire" which engages the ground.
    A "felly" is a single member that is less than annular which acts in
    conjunction with other fellies as a rim.

    (2)     Note.  A rim or felly, per se, to be used on a wheel is included
    herein.


CLS 301/96
TXT Wheel under subclass 95 wherein the rim or felly is made of metal.


CLS 301/97
TXT Wheel under subclass 96 wherein the metallic rim or felly is intended for
    use with a resilient tire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10.1+,  for a wheel having a detachable section comprising a rim.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclasses 151+ for a tire, per se, for
    use with the rim of this subclass or for the combination of such tire with
    only that portion of the wheel needed to receive the tire.  The combination
    of a specific wheel with a resilient tire is in this class (301).


CLS 301/98
TXT Wheel under subclass 95 wherein the rim or felly is intended for use with a
    resilient tire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10.1+,  for a wheel having a detachable section comprising a rim.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclasses 151+ for a tire, per se, for
    use with the rim of this subclass or for the combination of such tire with
    only that portion of the wheel needed to receive the tire.  The combination
    of a specific wheel with a resilient tire is in this class (301).


CLS 301/99
TXT Wheel under subclass 95 with particular reference to structure for joining
    the adjacent ends of felly-sections.


CLS 301/100
TXT Wheel under subclass 99 wherein such joint is adjustable, usually to
    tighten the wheel due to wear.


CLS 301/101
TXT Wheel under subclass 100 wherein the adjustment is accomplished by a
    screw-threaded element.


CLS 301/102
TXT Wheel under subclass 101 wherein the screw element is provided at opposite
    ends with right and left handed threads.


CLS 301/103
TXT Wheel under subclass 100 wherein the adjusting means is a wedge.


CLS 301/104
TXT Wheel under subclass 5.1 comprising the portion of a wheel extending
    between the hub and the rim or tire, which portion includes a rodlike
    generally radially extending member.

    (1)     Note.  A spoke, per se, to be used on a wheel is included herein.


CLS 301/105.1
TXT Hub:
    Wheel under subclass 5.1 comprising the radially innermost portion of the
    wheel, i.e., the portion at the axis thereof.

    (1)     Note.  A hub, per se, to be used on a wheel is included herein.


CLS 301/106
TXT Wheel under subclass 105.1 including a band or a casing adapted to surround
    and reinforce the hub.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for a plural spoke series wheel having a hub reinforcing band or
    casing adjacent the sockets for the spokes.

    83,     for a single spoke series wheel having a hub reinforcing band or
    casing adjacent the sockets for the spokes.


CLS 301/107
TXT Wheel under subclass 106 having a band which extends beyond and gives a
    finish to the outer end of the hub.


CLS 301/108.1
TXT Hub cap:
    Wheel under subclass 105.1 including a member which engages and covers an
    exposed axial end of a wheel hub.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37.1,   for a facing member which covers a more substantial portion of a
    wheel than the hub.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass  587  for  an
    ornamental  or sign-carrying member adapted to be attached to the wheel or
    axle of a land vehicle which does not rotate when the vehicle is in motion.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 200+ and see the notes thereto for a
    receptacle closure in general.


CLS 301/108.2
TXT Having transparent window:
    Wheel under subclass 108.1 wherein a portion of the hub cap is clear so
    that light may pass through.


CLS 301/108.3
TXT Plastic hub cap:
    Wheel under subclass 37.1 wherein the cover member is made primarily of
    organic polymeric material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37.42,  for a plastic wheel cover.


CLS 301/108.4
TXT Retained by threaded means:
    Wheel under subclass 108.1 including a helically ribbed fastener used to
    secure the hub cap to the hub.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37.37+, for a wheel cover secured to a wheel by a threaded means.


CLS 301/108.5
TXT Central-threaded means:
    Wheel under subclass 108.4 wherein the threaded means is concentric with
    the wheel axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37.38,  for a wheel cover secured to a wheel by a central threaded means.


CLS 301/109
TXT Wheel under subclass 105.1 having means secured to the hub comprising a
    bearing for the wheel on the axle.


CLS 301/110
TXT Wheel under subclass 109 having means for securing the bearing in the hub.


CLS 301/110.5
TXT For cycle-type vehicle:
    Wheel under subclass 6.1 particularly adapted to use on a two or three
    wheel bicycle or motorcycle.


CLS 301/110.6
TXT Circumferentially divided:
    Wheel under subclass 110.5 including a hub that is made of two pieces that
    are axially distinct from each other.


CLS 301/111
TXT Wheel under subclass 5.1 particularly directed to means for securing a
    wheel to the axle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    295,    Railway Wheels and Axles, subclasses 44+ for a similar device for a
    railway wheel.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, subclasses 337+ for a threadless bolt fastener of
    general application.


CLS 301/112
TXT Wheel under subclass 111 having detachable means secured to the axle and
    engaging against the outer face of the wheel-hub.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    295,    Railway Wheels and Axles, subclasses 49+ for a similar device for a
    railway wheel.


CLS 301/113
TXT Wheel under subclass 112 in which the end stop is or is held in place by a
    transversely extending rod, e.g., a cotter pin, passing diametrically
    through the wheel axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    295,    Railway Wheels and Axles, subclass 50 for a similar device for a
    railway wheel.


CLS 301/114
TXT Wheel under subclass 112 wherein the outer end stop is secured to the axle
    by screw means.


CLS 301/115
TXT Wheel under subclass 114 wherein the outer end stop is a plural part nut,
    one part of which is adjustable to lengthen the nut to take up wear in the
    bearing.


CLS 301/116
TXT Wheel under subclass 114 having a construction of the hub adapted for
    manipulation to engage the screw out end stop, so that by rotation of the
    wheel the screw-stop is disengaged from the axle.


CLS 301/117
TXT Wheel under subclass 114 in which the screw means is a bolt engaging a
    threaded hole in the end of the axle.


CLS 301/118
TXT Wheel under subclass 112 wherein the outer end stop is secured to the axle
    by a bayonet-joint connection.


CLS 301/119
TXT Wheel under subclass 112 wherein the outer end stop is secured to the axle
    by pivoted detent.


CLS 301/120
TXT Wheel under subclass 112 wherein the outer end stop is secured to the axle
    by a sliding detent.


CLS 301/121
TXT Wheel under subclass 111 wherein a movable-latch detent secured to either
    the wheel or the axle is adapted to engage the other to hold both elements
    assembled.


CLS 301/122
TXT Wheel under subclass 111 wherein a removable collar or sleeve on either the
    wheel or the axle is adapted, when assembled, to engage a stop on the other.


CLS 301/122.5
TXT Lug nut:
    Wheel under subclass 111 including particular helically threaded means
    intended to interfit with a corresponding other helically threaded part of
    the wheel to secure the wheel to the bearing hub.


CLS 301/123
TXT Wheel under subclass 5.1 for attachment to either the wheel or the axle and
    cooperating with the other for excluding dust, sand, and dirt from the
    wheel and axle bearing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 500+ for a dynamic, circumferential, contact seal for
    other than a piston.

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 157, 262 and 460, where means are provided to
    exclude dust, etc., from the bearing.


CLS 301/124.1
TXT AXLE:
    Structure under class definition relating to the structure for rotatably
    supporting a wheel on a vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    295,    Railway Wheels and Axles, subclasses 36.1+ for an axle under that
    definition.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, subclasses 179+ for a rotary torque transmitting shaft.


CLS 301/124.2
TXT With distinct handle to effect mounting on cycle-type vehicle:Axle under
    subclass 124.1 combined with means to attach the bearing hub of a wheel to
    an axle, which means is intended to be grasped by the hand of an operative
    and comprises a different member from the axle or the bearing hub.

    (1)     Note.  A nut having a portion extending therefrom is included
    herein if the portion is movable with respect thereto.


CLS 301/125
TXT Axle under subclass 124.1 modified for cooperation with structure which
    performs other vehicle function.


CLS 301/126
TXT Axle under subclass 124.1 which as a whole or in part rotates, the wheel
    being fixed to rotate therewith.


CLS 301/127
TXT Axle under subclass 124.1 which is substantially offset from a straight
    line by bowing or by forming cranked portions therein.


CLS 301/128
TXT Axle under subclass 124.1 which is adjustable to increase or decrease it
    length.


CLS 301/129
TXT Axle under subclass 124.1 which is trussed by braces to increase its
    strength.


CLS 301/130
TXT Axle under subclass 124.1 for emergency-repairing of a broken axle.


CLS 301/131
TXT Axle under subclass 124.1 including a terminal member distinct from the
    portion of the axle that extends under and engages the vehicle proper,
    which member is generally rodlike, is at the wheel axis, supports the wheel
    (bearings) directly, and is, in turn, supported by the vehicle-engaging
    portion of the axle.


CLS 301/132
TXT Spindle under subclass 131 including particular provision for attaching
    such spindle to the vehicle-engaging portion of the axle.


CLS 301/133
TXT Spindle under subclass 132 wherein such mounting means includes a member
    intended to yield within its elastic limit to support the wheel relative to
    the vehicle, while allowing relative movement (in addition to rotary
    movement) with respect thereto.


CLS 301/134
TXT Axle under subclass 124.1 including a terminal member distinct from the
    portion of the axle that extends under and engages the vehicle proper,
    which member is generally cuplike, is at the wheel axis, supports the wheel
    (bearings) directly, and is, in turn, supported by the vehicle-engaging
    portion of the axle over which the cuplike top fits.


CLS 301/135
TXT Skein under subclass 134 including particular provision for attaching such
    skein to the vehicle-engaging portion of the axle.


CLS 301/136
TXT Skein under subclass 135 wherein such mounting means includes a member
    intended to yield within its elastic limit to support the wheel relative to
    the vehicle, while allowing relative movement (in addition to rotary
    movement) with respect thereto.


CLS 301/137
TXT Including housing for drive mechanism:
    Axle under subclass 124.1 of a type intended to have means to transmit
    rotary force to the wheel supported thereon including particular provision
    to encase such means.


CLS 303/
TTL FLUID-PRESSURE AND ANALOGOUS BRAKE SYSTEMS

CLS 303/
TXT This class relates to the distribution of fluid to brake motors, i.e., the
    utilization of fluid-pressure in the operation of brakes.

    (1)     Note.  Systems for the distribution of pressure fluid to a
    plurality of motors other than brake motors are, for the most part in Class
    60, Power Plants, subclasses 6, 97, 420, 484, and their respective indented
    subclasses, and Class 91, Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 165+
    and 508+.

    (2)     Note.  For devices for testing fluid brake systems and triple
    valves, see Class 73, Measuring and Testing, subclass 39.

    (3)     Note.  The application of fluid-pressure operated brakes to
    motor-vehicles and to all road-vehicles will be found in Class 188, Brakes,
    subclasses 152+ and 154.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 325+ for a pressure fluid source supply
    motive fluid to an output motor of general utility, particularly subclasses
    533+ a master-slave system.  See the Search Class reference to Class 303 in
    subclass 533 of Class 60 for the line between these classes as to pulsators.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 508+ for a system of
    plural expansible chamber motors of general utility and appropriate
    subclass for an expansible chamber motor, per se.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, for apparatus for gas separation, per
    se, which merely dry or separate foreign matter from gaseous brake fluids
    or which deaerate brake liquids.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 55 for signal train-pipes supplied
    with fluid under pressure, the train brake-pipe, when used for signaling,
    being found in this subclass.

    137,    Fluid Handling, appropriate subclasses for fluid handling systems
    of more general application, and in particular see subclasses 203+ for
    devices for collecting and discharging condensate from a low point in the
    system, subclass 381 for shields to protect exposed valves, subclasses 545+
    for devices for separating foreign matter from the brake fluid, and
    subclass 598 for distribution systems including a flow passage between a
    master cylinder and a brake cylinder and means to control the fluid flow,
    e.g., "hill holders", and see the Note to the definition of this subclass
    (598).

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclasses 167+ for operations on the
    air-distribution system from points on the railway-track.

    252,    Compositions, for fluids for hydraulic brakes or for other
    hydraulic devices.

    293,    Vehicle Fenders, subclass 5 for the application of a fluid pressure
    operated brake to a motor vehicle combined with vehicle fender structure.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 130+
    for generic data processing control systems.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, for rotary expansible chamber,
    per se.


CLS 303/1
TXT Patents not elsewhere classified.


CLS 303/2
TXT Patents showing systems of distribution to two or more motive devices
    associated in one system, one of which must be a fluid-pressure motive
    device.


CLS 303/3
TXT A motor operated by a fluid is associated with an electric motive device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for distribution of fluid controlled by fluid and electric means.

    121+,   for a speed controlled braking system that controls fluid braking
    pressure.


CLS 303/4
TXT Fluid is used at two pressures, the one above atmospheric and the other at
    atmospheric pressure, in opposition to a partial vacuum.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 12 and 31 for cases in which a
    vacuum alone is used.


CLS 303/5
TXT The fluid is distributed to a plurality of receivers, one of which must be
    a brake motor.

    (1)     Note.  Devices which control brake fluid in response to a speed
    responsive actuating signal have been excluded from this subclass and its
    indented subclasses and are found in subclasses 121+ below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for patents in which an additional pipe is used to feed the
    auxiliary reservoir.

    121+,   for speed controlled regrulation of braking fluid and, therefore,
    braking action.


CLS 303/6.01
TXT Multiple motors:

    Subject matter under subclass 5 wherein the fluid is distributed to a
    plurality of fluid pressure operated motors.

    (1)     Note.  The multiple motors are usually differently related to the
    means for distributing the fluid.


CLS 303/6.1
TXT Includes patents in which one of the motors operates a door.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 105, Railway Rolling Stock, the subclasses
    indented under subclass 238.1 for door operation and door actuators.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 49, Movable or Removable Closures, subclass 334
    for a motor driven closure and see the search notes thereto for the loci of
    other closures driven by a motor.


CLS 303/7
TXT The train is divided into a plurality of sections, the fluid being
    distributed to the sections in different manner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for motorman's valves adapted for this service.


CLS 303/8
TXT The distribution of fluid to the sections of the train is controlled by a
    plurality of brake-valves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25      and 26, for other patents combining automatic and direct
    distribution.


CLS 303/9
TXT Upon a heavy reduction of control-pipe pressure a second motor is brought
    into operation.


CLS 303/9.61
TXT Separate and simultaneous control:

    Subject matter under subclass 6.01 including means for regulating the fluid
    flow to the motors such that one to the motors may be operated (a)
    independent of another motor and (b) in unison with the other motor, when
    desired.

    (1)     Note. This subclass may also include the sequential control of
    fluid pressure operated motors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50+,    for manually controlled valves where details of the manual
    operation are significant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 16 and 354 for independently operated brakes.


CLS 303/9.62
TXT Apportioning control:

    Subject matter under subclass 6.01 including means for varying the fluid
    flow to one motor relative to the flow to another motor, e.g., for varying
    the braking action of a form brake motor with respect to rear brake motor
    of a vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, particularly subclass 349 for details of apportioning
    devices brake structure.


CLS 303/9.63
TXT Failure responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.62 including a feature which functions when
    the distribution of fluid ceases to occur properly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84.1+,  for flow retarders and isolation valves which interrupt the fluid
    flow, usually upon the failure of some part of the system.


CLS 303/9.64
TXT Motorcycle:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.62 wherein the fluid is distributed to the
    fluid pressure operated motors of a motorized land vehicle having a single
    from wheel and at least one rear wheel, e.g., a motorized velocipede.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brake, subclass 344 for velocipede brake structure.


CLS 303/9.65
TXT Manual:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.62 wherein the means for varying the fluid
    flow may be actuated by a human operator.


CLS 303/9.66
TXT For pneumatic system:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.62 wherein the fluid being distributed is
    pressurized air.

    (1)     Note.  The air pressure may be in the form of a vacuum.

    (2)     Note.  The system may also include hydraulic portions.


CLS 303/9.67
TXT Inertia:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.62 wherein the means for varying the fluid
    flow includes means responsive to a resistance to acceleration, i.e., to
    inertia.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24.1,   for means for controlling fluid distribution by inertia in systems
    no to the apportioning type.


CLS 303/9.68
TXT Inertia weight:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.67 wherein significance is attributed to a
    moveable mass responsive to inertia for varying the fluid flow.


CLS 303/9.69
TXT Load:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.62 wherein the means for varying the fluid
    flow includes means responsive to a gravity induced load on a supporting
    machine, e.g., a land vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22.1+,  for means for controlling fluid distribution affected by a load but
    not of the apportioning type.


CLS 303/9.71
TXT Having significant pressure control by front brake:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.62 wherein the means for varying the fluid
    flow is substantially affected by the amount of fluid pressure present in a
    fluid line connected to a fluid pressure operated, forward motor used for
    stopping a vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  While many front/rear apportioning valves in tandem brake
    systems have a front pressure line connected thereto, significance with
    relation to affected apportioning valve operation must be claimed for a
    patent to be considered as an original classification in this subclass.


CLS 303/9.72
TXT Having multiple pistons affecting fluid flow:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.62 where in the mean for varying the fluid
    flow includes plural fluid propelling shafts to the fluid pressure operated
    motors.


CLS 303/9.73
TXT Having significant output feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.62 wherein the means for varying the fluid
    flow includes mean for importantly affecting the flow to a fluid pressure
    operated motor.


CLS 303/9.74
TXT Multiple  outlets:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.73 having plural means for importantly
    affecting the flow.


CLS 303/9.75
TXT Detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.62 wherein significance is attributed to a
    specific component of a fluid distribution system.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are control valve and system features
    relating to linkages, seals, springs and other parts of special importance.


CLS 303/9.76
TXT Spring operated motor:

    Subject matter under subclass 6.01 wherein one of the motors includes a
    resilient component working in opposition to the fluid pressure of the
    motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for fluid pressure retracting systems often used with spring
    operated motors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, particularly subclass 170 for spring applied, fluid
    pressure released brakes, per se.


CLS 303/10
TXT The fluid-distribution system is combined with a pump for accumulating a
    supply for use of the system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116.1+, for anti-lock brake system pump with a solenoid valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, for pumps, per se.


CLS 303/11
TXT The action of the pump is controlled by the pressure of the fluid pumped up.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 1+ for condition responsive control of a pump
    drive motor and 279+ for condition responsive pumped fluid control.


CLS 303/12
TXT The system includes devices for creating a partial vacuum.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 151+ for jet pumps.


CLS 303/13
TXT The distribution of the fluid is controlled by a plurality of means.


CLS 303/14
TXT Devices in which, while there is a plurality of means for controlling the
    distribution of the fluid, when the system is in operation the control is
    assumed by one, the others being suppressed.


CLS 303/15
TXT The distribution of the fluid is controlled by change of pressure in the
    control-pipe and by electric operation of the distributing-valves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for a fluid and electric distribution system.

    121+,   for a speed controlled braking system that controls fluid braking
    pressure.


CLS 303/16
TXT The electric valves are operated to reduce the pressure in the
    control-pipe, and thus give an automatic operation.

    (1)     Note.  For the use of the work "automatic" see the definition of
    this class, subclass 28.


CLS 303/17
TXT Upon the initiation of distribution at the first unit, a circuit is closed
    to continue the action electrically on other units.  A current-generator
    may be operated upon the initial action to furnish current for the
    subsequent actions on other units.


CLS 303/18
TXT Control of system of distribution by applicances outside of and not forming
    part of the system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, particularly subclass 167, and
    indented subclasses.


CLS 303/19
TXT Distribution of the fluid is initiated upon some failure of the operator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 272+ for a motor vehicle provided with
    safety-promoting means which is responsive to the incapacity or absence of
    its operator.


CLS 303/20
TXT The distribution is controlled electrically.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121+,   for and electric speed control brake system.


CLS 303/22.1
TXT LOAD CONTROL:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein int distribution of fluid
    to the brake motors of a machine, e.g., a vehicle, is regulated by means
    which responds to the weight of a gravity loading on the machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9.69,   for a load responsive type apportioning control.


CLS 303/22.2
TXT Empty and load type:

    Subject matter under subclass 22.1 wherein the rgulating means responds in
    one manner of the machine does not have a gravity loading on it and in a
    different manner in the presence of a suchh a loading.


CLS 303/22.3
TXT Alterable for different classes of service:

    Subject matter under subclass 22.2 wherein the regulating means is capable
    of being changed so that it may be used for another type of application
    e.g., used on a passenger a high speed express, or a freight type vehicle.


CLS 303/22.4
TXT Failure responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 22.1 including a feature which functions when
    the distribution of fluid ceases to occur properly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84.1+,  for flow retarders and isolation valves which interrupt the fluid
    flow usually upon the failure of some part of the system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 151+ for fluid pressure operated brakes often
    having safety devices.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 82+ for a
    fluid pressure piston which is used as an operator to open of close a
    circuit and often used in an automobile.

    340,    Communication:  Electrical, subclasses 52+ for means automatically
    responsive to a condition of a vehicle, e.g., a brake fluid pressure
    monitor.


CLS 303/22.5
TXT Responsive to fluid pressure spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 22.1 wherein the regulating means is affected
    by fluid pressure generated by the action of hydraulic or pneumatic
    suspension means used to help support the gravity loading.


CLS 303/22.6
TXT Railway vehicle:

    Subject matter under subclass 22.1 wherein the regulating means is intended
    for use on a rail guided and supported conveyance.

    (1)     Note.  While the term "railway" or similar terminology may not
    always be claimed, a patent os considered to be proper hereunder as an
    original classification of its disclosure limits it to use in a railway
    vehicle.


CLS 303/22.7
TXT Detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 22.6 wherein significance is attributed to a
    specific component of a fluid distribution system.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are control valve and system features
    relating to linkages, seals, springs, valve structure, adjustments and
    other parts of special importance.


CLS 303/22.8
TXT Detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 22.1 wherein significance is attributed to a
    specific component of a fluid distribution system.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are control valve and system features
    relating to linkage, seals, springs, valve structure, adjustments and other
    parts of special importance.


CLS 303/24.1
TXT INERTIA CONTROL:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the distribution of fluid
    is regulated by meas which is responsive to a resistance to acceleration,
    i.e., inertia.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9.67+,  for means for controlling fluid distribution by inertia in
    apportioning type systems.


CLS 303/25
TXT The fluid is fed to the motor through both an automatic and a direct
    operation.

    (1)     Note.  The word "direct" is used in the sense that the fluid is fed
    from the control-pipe into the motor.

    (2)     Note.  For the use of the word "automatic" see the definition of
    this class, subclass 28.


CLS 303/26
TXT The fluid is fed to the motor through an automatic and a direct operation,
    an additional control-pipe being used.


CLS 303/27
TXT There is both an automatic and a direct operation, the direct operation
    taking place upon a reduction in control-pipe pressure.


CLS 303/28
TXT Fluid from a local source is supplied to a motor by means of a valve
    operated in response to a change in pressure of the fluid in the
    control-pipe.


CLS 303/29
TXT Systems with supplementary control-pipe, the action being automatic with
    each pipe.


CLS 303/30
TXT Automatic systems with an additional pipe connected to pressure-supply on
    the different units.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for cases of general application in which a motor and other
    receptacle are supplied.


CLS 303/31
TXT Systems in which through a change of pressure in the control-pipe the motor
    is operated by pressure of atmosphere in opposition to a partial vacuum.

    (1)     Note.  For cases in which vacuum operation is used in systems with
    pressure above atmospheric see this class, subclass 4.

    (2)     Note.  See also this class, subclass 12 for systems including
    devices for producing a vacuum.


CLS 303/32
TXT The piston of the motor is held inactive between two equal pressures, the
    action of the motor occurring upon the expansion of compressed fluid on one
    side when the fluid on the other side is permitted to escape.


CLS 303/33
TXT A valve which in one position connects the control-pipe to the auxiliary
    reservoir and the motor to atmosphere and which upon reduction of pressure
    in the control-pipe connects the auxiliary reservoir to the motor.

    (1)     Note.  The devices included in this subclass are what are known as
    "plain triple valves".  Equalizing-valves having functions in addition to
    those just enumerated will be found under various headings implying the
    nature of these functions.


CLS 303/34
TXT A valve in which a diaphragm moving upon the rise and fall of pressure in
    the control-pipe operates a rotary valve to perform the equalizing-valve
    functions, as set forth in the preceding subclass.

    (1)     Note.  These valve structures may have functions in addition to
    those of the plain triple type, in which case the patents will be
    cross-referenced into the appropriate subclass.


CLS 303/35
TXT Devices to effect a simultaneous application of fluid to the motors of a
    series similarly related to the control-pipe.


CLS 303/36
TXT Devices to effect the simultaneous release of fluid from the motors in a
    series similarly related to the control-pipe.


CLS 303/37
TXT Devices designed to produce a simultaneous application of fluid to the
    motors of a series, the method being to secure a momentary exhaust of fluid
    from the control-pipe to the atmosphere through each equalizing-valve as
    the control-pipe pressure is lowered for an emergency operation.

    (1)     Note.  Consult this class, subclass 82 for other devices for
    momentary exhaust of control-pipe fluid upon sudden lowering of pressure.


CLS 303/38
TXT Devices designed to produce a simultaneous application of fluid to the
    motors of a series, the method being to secure a momentary exhaust of fluid
    from the control-pipe through the equalizing-valve as the control-pipe
    pressure is lowered for a service operation.


CLS 303/39
TXT Upon lowering the pressure in the control-pipe the fluid exhausts into a
    closed chamber.

    (1)     Note.  The chamber may be and usually is the motor-chamber.  This
    chamber is usually at atmospheric pressure at the beginning of the
    operation.


CLS 303/40
TXT A valve having a diaphragm to be moved by increasing fluid-pressure to
    connect a source of pressure to a motor.

    (1)     Note.  The fluid-pressure to move the diaphragm is usually supplied
    by the operation of an equalizing-valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 627.5 for system including closing and
    opening alternately seating floe controllers.


CLS 303/41
TXT Devices for counteracting the effects of unauthorized valve movements due
    to slight variations in control-pipe pressure.


CLS 303/42
TXT Devices for preventing an undesired emergency operation of an
    equalizing-valve after a series of slight reductions in control-pipe
    pressure.


CLS 303/43
TXT Devices to assure production of emergency operation regardless of the
    extent of previous service operations.


CLS 303/44
TXT Devices operating to obtain additional pressure in the motor after
    equalization for an ordinary series of service operations.


CLS 303/45
TXT Devices for moving the equalizing-valve main piston by means other than the
    usual unbalancing of pressures in control-pipe and local supply.  The
    purpose is usually to move the piston to release position when stuck.


CLS 303/46
TXT Provisions for further supply of fluid to the motor through the
    equalizing-valve to reinforce or supplement the auxiliary reservoir.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 85 for examples of supplementary
    reservoirs for various purposes.


CLS 303/47
TXT The motors in a train are charged beginning with the rear end.


CLS 303/48
TXT Systems in which the motor is fed from the supply of fluid in the
    control-pipe upon an increase of pressure in the control-pipe.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 151 for fluid- pressure-operated brakes, and
    152+ and 154 for fluid-pressure brakes adapted to use on a motor-vehicle.


CLS 303/49
TXT Direct systems in which a liquid column is interposed between the impelling
    power and the motor.


CLS 303/50
TXT Valves operated directly by a the motorman adapted to connect the source of
    fluid-supply to the motor.


CLS 303/51
TXT Valves placed in the control-pipe and adapted to be operated by some one
    other than the motorman.


CLS 303/52
TXT Motorman's valves adapted to connect the fluid-supply to a plurality of
    motors, usually differently related to the distributing agency.


CLS 303/53
TXT Motorman's valves for controlling motors differently situated with respect
    to a plurality of train-sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for systems of this type.


CLS 303/54
TXT Motorman's valves adapted to cut off the flow when the outlet-pressure
    reaches a certain value. Search this class, subclass 59.


CLS 303/55
TXT Motorman's valves in which a diaphragm is balanced by opposing pressures,
    the valve containing means for modifying the relation of the opposing
    pressures to permit the control-pipe pressure to reduce to any desired
    point.


CLS 303/56
TXT Elementary  parts.


CLS 303/57
TXT Devices for rendering available for use fluid at more than one pressure.


CLS 303/58
TXT The fluid after being used in one portion of the apparatus is conveyed into
    another portion before being permitted to exhaust into the atmosphere.


CLS 303/59
TXT Charging devices adapted to cut off the flow of fluid when the
    outlet-pressure reaches a certain valve.

    (1)     Note.  Search this class, subclass 54 for motorman's valves having
    this feature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 505+ for fluid pressure regulators, per
    se.


CLS 303/60
TXT Charging devices adapted to cut off the flow of fluid when the
    outlet-pressure reaches a certain valve, but to continue the charging when
    the outlet-pressure falls.


CLS 303/61
TXT Parts of the system are charged with fluid in impulses.


CLS 303/62
TXT After the initial charge the further charging of the motor with fluid is
    determined by the motor movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 358+ for expansible
    chamber motors having feedback control.


CLS 303/63
TXT Upon a reduction of pressure in the system to a point which may endanger
    control devices act to charge the motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 70 for analogous devices in which
    the same conditions result in a signal being given.


CLS 303/64
TXT Means in addition to the usual leak-in groove for charging the auxiliary
    reservoir.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains patents in which the movement of the
    equalizing-valve to application position is caused by the increase of
    auxiliary-reservoir pressure.


CLS 303/65
TXT Means for charging the auxiliary reservoir without releasing the motor.


CLS 303/66
TXT Means for charging the brake-pipe with fluid.

    (1)     Note.  These devices are usually directed to reinforcing the
    pipe-pressure at one or more places along the line for the purpose of
    accelerating release of the motor.


CLS 303/67
TXT Means for preventing the undesirable charging of the brake-pipe.


CLS 303/68
TXT Means for releasing fluid-pressure from the motor.


CLS 303/69
TXT Means for securing rapid release of the motor, usually through other than
    the regular channels.


CLS 303/70
TXT Means for releasing the motor by venting fluid from the auxiliary
    reservoir, and thus permitting the equalizing-valve to move to release
    position.


CLS 303/71
TXT The motor is forced to release position by the pressure of fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclass 170 for fluid pressure release of spring applied
    brakes and see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 303/72
TXT Release of motor is retarded.


CLS 303/73
TXT The motor is partially released through a loaded valve that permits a more
    or less slow reduction of pressure.


CLS 303/74
TXT Means for repeatedly placing the equalizing-valve in release position, then
    returning it to lap or blanked position, in this way releasing the motor by
    steps.


CLS 303/75
TXT Devices for preventing the release of the motor.

    (1)     Note.  These are known as "pressure- retainers".


CLS 303/76
TXT Devices for preventing the release of the motor by means of the
    manipulation of a valve under the control of the motorman.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for other patents having this type of release-preventers.


CLS 303/77
TXT The release of the motor is prevented by a valve responsive to changes of
    pressure in the brake-pipe.


CLS 303/78
TXT The release of the motor is prevented by a valve responsive to changes in
    pressure in the auxiliary reservoir.


CLS 303/79
TXT The release of the motor is prevented by a valve loaded by means of a
    spring or a weight.


CLS 303/80
TXT Means for releasing fluid-pressure from the auxiliary reservoir.


CLS 303/81
TXT Means for releasing fluid-pressure from the control-pipe.

    (1)     Note.  Devices for controlling the release to the extent of
    stopping it are also included in this subclass.


CLS 303/82
TXT Upon a sudden fall in pipe-pressure a valve is opened to permit a momentary
    discharge of fluid into the external atmosphere.

    (1)     Note.  For similar action see this class, subclasses 37 and 38.


CLS 303/83
TXT Fluid is released from the brake-pipe into a chamber.

    (1)     Note. This is comparable to the action of the equalizing-valves in
    this class, subclass 39.


CLS 303/84.1
TXT FLOW RETARDER:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means for interrupting
    movement of fluid as it is being distributed.

    (1)     Note. The flow is usually being interrupted due to a failure of
    some part of the system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, particularly subclasses 602+ for a device with
    multiple inlets and a single outlet for regulating fluid flow.


CLS 303/84.2
TXT Isolation valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 84.1  wherein a specific controlling
    mechanism, i.e., a valve is used to cut off and separate a portion of a
    fluid distribution system form another portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9.63,   for failure responsive apportioning control of multiple motors.

    63,     for valves responsive to system failure and which charge a motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, particularly subclass 535 for a pulsator with a
    failure indicator and subclasses 581 and 582 for pulsator structure that
    provides safety structure.

    137,    Fluid Handling, particularly subclasses 112+ for a valve that
    selects the highest inlet pressure.

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 151+ for fluid pressure operated brakes often
    having safety devices.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 82+ for a
    fluid pressure piston which is used as an operator to open or close a
    circuit and often used in a automobile.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 52+ for means automatically
    responsive to a condition to a vehicle, e.g., a brake fluid pressure
    monitor.


CLS 303/85
TXT Additional reservoirs, in most cases supplementary to the auxiliary
    reservoir.


CLS 303/86
TXT Patents not otherwise classifiable for means of operating on the
    control-pipe.


CLS 303/87
TXT Devices to neutralize the effects of a surge of fluid resulting from the
    sudden closure of a pipe under high pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 37+ for a device which
    regulates the flow of fluid to neutralize the surge of fluid.


CLS 303/89
TXT Includes devices for maintaining parts in position of application or
    release.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 24+ for locking means for
    retaining an expansible chamber device in the operative position.

    188,    Brakes, subclass 265.


CLS 303/90
TXT Valves so piped that the valve can be opened without uncoupling.


CLS 303/112
TXT Apparatus under subclass 121 wherein the braking action is regulated at
    least in part by means responsive to a force or combination of forces
    producing or tending to produce a twisting or rotating motion on a braked
    rotating member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, particularly subclass 181 for a vehicle torque responsive
    regulator.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass .034 for automatic
    interrelated power delivery controls using torque only.


CLS 303/113.1
TXT Having a valve system responsive to a wheel lock signal:
    Structure under subclass 121 wherein there is provided a fluid pressure
    regulator which includes at least in part a fluid passage opening or
    closing structure responsive to a speed deceleration (e.g., actuating a
    brake pedal).


CLS 303/113.2
TXT With traction control:
    Structure under subclass 113.1 wherein the system is provided with means to
    prevent acceleration or drive slip.


CLS 303/113.3
TXT Including booster:
    Structure under subclass 113.2 wherein the acceleration or drive slip
    prevention also includes a power assist device associated with a master
    cylinder for controlling the release and reapplication of brake pressure
    through an interaction with the power assist device.


CLS 303/113.4
TXT Including a stroke sensor:
    Structure under subclass 113.1 wherein a movement in a fluid pressure
    regulator element (e.g., a piston, brake pedal) is measured and a
    corresponding signal is utilized in an anti-lock control.


CLS 303/113.5
TXT With system apportioning control:
    Structure under subclass 113.1 in which the fluid in the system is
    monitored and distributed to correct an imbalance.


CLS 303/114.1
TXT Including hydraulic power booster:
    Structure under subclass 113.1 wherein the fluid pressure regulator
    cooperates with a power assist device associated with a master cylinder for
    controlling the release and reapplication of brake pressure through an
    interaction with the power assist device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 545 for a pulsator having electrically or
    magnetically operated structure, subclass 561 for a pulsator having a
    pressure balancing free piston or a diaphragm between parallel pulsators,
    subclass 581 for plural structurally related master pistons, cylinders or
    pulsator circuits, and subclass 582 for a pulsator having a safety standby
    structure becoming operative due to the malfunction of a power booster
    system.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 391+ for booster
    arrangement with alternative means of actuation upon failure of the primary
    means of actuation.


CLS 303/114.2
TXT Parallel boosters:
    Structure under subclass 114.1 wherein power assist devices are provided
    for each wheel or each set of wheels.


CLS 303/114.3
TXT Including pneumatic power booster:
    Structure under subclass 113.1 wherein the fluid pressure regulator
    cooperates with a power assist device of the compressed air type that is
    associated with a master cylinder for controlling the release and
    reapplication of brake pressure through an interaction with the power
    assist device.


CLS 303/115.1
TXT System controlled by expansible chamber type modulator:
    Structure under subclass 113.1 wherein the fluid pressure regulator
    includes a variable volume reactive device (e.g., piston and cylinder,
    bellows type) having a motive fluid valve to regulate the pressure of the
    braking fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 439 for a motor having
    opposed working chambers and a by-pass therebetween independently
    controlled by valve means.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 625.27 for a reciprocating supply and
    exhaust multi-way valve unit of the plural disc or plug type and subclass
    625.25 for a motor operated supply and exhaust multi-way valve unit.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 25 for a fluid actuated or
    retarded pilot or servo type motor and subclass 61.3 for a valve between a
    coaxial spring biasing means and a fluid actuated flexible wall valve
    actuator.


CLS 303/115.2
TXT Having electric control:
    Apparatus under subclass 115.1 wherein the motive fluid valve is governed
    by a component operated by electricity.


CLS 303/115.3
TXT Having vacuum motor control:
    Apparatus under subclass 115.1 wherein the motive fluid valve is governed
    by a negative pressure, energy converting component.


CLS 303/115.4
TXT Having pump pressure control:
    Apparatus under subclass 115.1 wherein the motive fluid valve is governed
    by a force generated by a fluid pressurizing means.


CLS 303/115.5
TXT Pump pressure operates fluid motor:
    Apparatus under subclass 115.4 wherein the fluid pressurizing means force
    drives an energy converting device of the liquid or gaseous type.


CLS 303/115.6
TXT Including flywheel control (e.g., motorcycle type):
    Apparatus under subclass 115.1 wherein the motive fluid valve is governed
    by a device which stores kinetic energy via mechanical inertia or momentum.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 181+ for a speed responsive regulator located on
    a vehicle.


CLS 303/116.1
TXT Including pump with system solenoid valve:
    Apparatus under subclass 113.1 wherein the fluid pressure regulator
    comprises an additional fluid circuit including fluid pressurizing means
    (e.g., pump) and at least one fluid passage opening and closing structure
    which responds to an electromagnetic force for modifying the pressure of
    the braking fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for a fluid distribution system combined with a pump.


CLS 303/116.2
TXT Having pressure line isolated from master cylinder line:
    Apparatus under subclass 116.1 in which the fluid pressurizing means fluid
    source is independent of the fluid source for a mutually reactive
    expansible chambers device that operates the brake system.


CLS 303/116.3
TXT Vehicle wheel operated pump:
    Structure under subclass 116.1 in which the fluid pressurizing means is
    driven by rotation of an automobile or truck drive axle, hub, rim, and tire.


CLS 303/116.4
TXT System pump structure detail:
    Apparatus under subclass 116.1 wherein the specific structure of the fluid
    pressurizing means, e.g., chamber, piston structure, cylinder structure,
    housing, intake (section), or output (cam, push rod) effects the system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, appropriate subclasses for
    details to a rotary kinetic pump.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), appropriate subclasses
    for details to an impeller structure.

    417,    Pumps, appropriate subclasses for details to pump structure.


CLS 303/117.1
TXT Spool valve:
    Apparatus under subclass 113.1 wherein the fluid pressure regulator is a
    sliding rod with a series of fixed pistons that open or close fluid paths.


CLS 303/118.1
TXT Pneumatic (relay or motorman) type:
    Apparatus under subclass 113.1 wherein the fluid pressure regulator
    includes valve means for controlling braking pressure to admit the
    necessary amount of air pressure to the brakes of a vehicle or a railroad
    vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for a valve actuated in response to a change in fluid pressure to
    connect a source of fluid pressure to a motor.

    50,     for a motorman valve adapted to connect a source of fluid supply to
    a motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 627.5 for systems including sequentially
    closing and opening alternately seating flow controllers.


CLS 303/119.1
TXT System controlled by solenoid valve:
    Apparatus under subclass 113.1 wherein the fluid pressure regulator
    includes at least one fluid passage opening and closing structure which
    responds to an electromagnetic force.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 30.01+ for an
    electromagnetically actuated pilot or auxiliary valve for controlling a
    main valve, subclasses 129.01+ for an electrical actuator.


CLS 303/119.2
TXT System solenoid valve detail:
    Apparatus under subclass 119.1 in which the specific structure of the
    electromagnetically operated fluid pressure regulator, e.g., number of
    paths or passageways, coil, electrical contacts, armature effects the
    system.


CLS 303/119.3
TXT Housing for plural solenoids:

    System solenoid valve under subclass 119.1 in which a single container
    holds at least two electromagnetic actuators.


CLS 303/121
TXT Speed-controlled:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the braking fluid and
    therefore the braking action is regulated by velocity.

    (1)     Note.  A speed condition can be, for example, a velocity signal
    from a single wheel or plural wheels, or a velocity signal from a vehicle
    body.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass are the following: a positive
    rate-of-change of velocity (acceleration) from a wheel or plural wheels; a
    negative rate-of-change of velocity (deceleration) from a wheel or plural
    wheels; an acceleration from a vehicle body; or a deceleration from a
    vehicle body.

     SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 488+ for measuring and testing
    speed or acceleration, subclass 495 for speed or acceleration diverse
    condition indicating, and subclass 509, for speed or acceleration with
    response to a nonspeed condition.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 57 for devices to indicate when a
    predetermined speed is reached.

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 180+ for the regulation of vehicle brakes
    (nonfluid pressure) in response to speed changes.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 103 for interrelated
    power delivery speed automatic control.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclass 182 for speed control
    systems, and especially for automatic vehicle-carried braking and speed
    comparison circuits respectively.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 10.1
    for automobile mounted systems.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 441 for alarms or indicators
    which respond to vehicle speed and may also respond to variations in the
    pressure within a hydraulic brake system.

    361,    Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 236+ for
    electrical speed signal processing systems.

    477,    Interrelated Power Delivery Controls, Including Engine Control,
    subclass 40 for using an engine transmission control with brake control to
    slow a vehicle and subclasses 182+ for an engine brake control to slow a
    vehicle.

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclass 70 for indication or control of braking, acceleration, or
    deceleration; subclasses 71+ and 82+ for processing or calculating a
    parameter used to determine antiskid, antilock, or antispin.


CLS 303/122
TXT With failure responsive means:
    Speed control under subclass 121 provided with means for detecting faulty
    operation of a speed control regulator and means for overriding a speed
    condition regulator.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes systems which cycle the speed
    responsive control means in response to a simulated speed condition to
    thereby check for the proper operation of the speed responsive means and
    also includes means for monitoring various components of a speed responsive
    control means to detect any failure thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 453+ for communication
    automatically responsive to a brake condition, and subclass 515 for testing
    of an automatically responsive system by simulation of condition.


CLS 303/122.01
TXT Traction failure:
    Speed control with failure response under subclass 122 in which the
    response is to a tire-road contact area less than needed for efficient
    forward motion.


CLS 303/122.02
TXT Antilock failure with warning:
    Speed control with failure response under subclass 122 in which  wheel slip
    control faulty operation is indicated to a vehicle driver.


CLS 303/122.03
TXT Failure related to brake condition (e.g., wear, sensor or switch operation)
    with indicator:Speed control with failure response under subclass 122 in
    which the faulty operation and the state of the wheel rotation retarding or
    halting device is detected and signaled to the vehicle operator.


CLS 303/122.04
TXT Electric system failure(no warning):
    Speed control with failure response under subclass 122 in which the faulty
    operation is due to deenergization.


CLS 303/122.05
TXT Electronic or electric component (e.g., speed detector, failure sensing)
    with warning:Speed control with electric failure response under subclass
    122.04 in which the faulty operation of an energized element; e.g., rate
    sensor, is detected and indicated to a vehicle operator.


CLS 303/122.06
TXT ABS failure detected via time period of sensed wheel lock or wheel speed
    signal:Speed control with failure response under subclass 122 in which the
    faulty operation occurs during an interval when braking torque is maximum
    or ground engaging member rate is high.


CLS 303/122.07
TXT Time signal error (no warning):
    Speed control with failure response under subclass 122 in which the faulty
    operation is detected during an interval where monitoring circuits are no
    longer consistent; e.g., the wheel speed is sampled and compared to a
    previous speed (i.e., no deceleration) or a predetermined limit.


CLS 303/122.08
TXT Active circuit testing:
    Speed control with failure response under subclass 122 in which, prior to
    the braking action, a predetermined condition is used to check or analyze a
    skid control system (sensors, regulator, electrical components, etc.) to
    ensure proper operation.


CLS 303/122.09
TXT Pressure failure:
    Speed control with failure response under subclass 122 in which the faulty
    operation is due to loss of a compressed fluid.


CLS 303/122.1
TXT With warning:
    Pressure failure under subclass 122.09 in which the faulty operation is
    indicated to a vehicle operator.


CLS 303/122.11
TXT Detected via stroke sensor:
    Pressure failure under subclass 122.09 in which the faulty operation is
    during movement of the master cylinder pistons.


CLS 303/122.12
TXT Pump failure detection:
    Pressure failure under subclass 122.08 in which the faulty operation of a
    compressed fluid moving means is sensed.


CLS 303/122.13
TXT Auxiliary pressure failure:
    Pressure failure under subclass 122.08 in which the faulty operation of a
    backup system, used in case of a failure or malfunction of a main hydraulic
    pressure system, is sensed.


CLS 303/122.14
TXT With warning:
    Auxiliary pressure failure under subclass 122.13 in which the faulty
    operation is indicated to a vehicle operator.


CLS 303/122.15
TXT Pneumatic:
    Pressure failure under subclass 122.08 in which the faulty operation is in
    a system using gas; e.g., air.


CLS 303/123
TXT For a tractor-trailer type vehicle:
    Speed control under subclass 121 for a conveyance comprising towing means
    coupled to a freight carrier by a towing link.


CLS 303/124
TXT Electric brake:
    Tractor trailer speed control under subclass 123 in which motion is
    retarded or halted by an energized via application of a current and a
    voltage system.


CLS 303/125
TXT Automatic braking including speed governor or hydraulic retarder:Speed
    control under subclass 121 in which upon detection of excessive vehicle
    rate, the braking action occurs without initiation of the operator.


CLS 303/126
TXT Aircraft:

    Automatic braking under subclass 125 in which the speed control is for a
    machine or structure adapted to be completely or partially sustained by the
    air.


CLS 303/127
TXT Pneumatic:

    Speed control under subclass 121 in a system using a gas; e.g., air:


CLS 303/128
TXT For a railway vehicle (e.g., train):

    Pneumatic speed control under subclass 127 for a conveyance which rides on
    a predetermined path; e.g., track.


CLS 303/129
TXT With speed governor (hydraulic or inertia):

    Train speed control under subclass 128 in which the velocity of the
    conveyance is regulated by a system using a pressurized liquid medium or by
    a system responsive to a change of motion.


CLS 303/130
TXT Compared to fixed reference:

    Train speed control with governor under subclass 129 in which the velocity
    is contrasting an actual parameter; e.g., speed, acceleration, with a
    previously defined parameter.


CLS 303/131
TXT Plural similar inputs:

    Train speed control under subclass 128 in which at least two of the same
    condition; e.g., speeds of at least two wheels, determine the subsequent
    braking action.


CLS 303/132
TXT Speed responsive and other conditions (e.g., acceleration, pressure, track
    hazard, friction):

    Train speed control under subclass 128 in which the rate and an additional
    input determine subsequent braking action.


CLS 303/133
TXT Traction control:

    Train speed control under subclass 128 in which the braking action is
    affected by wheel skid.


CLS 303/134
TXT Compared to fixed reference:

    Train speed control under subclass 128 in which the velocity is contrasting
    an actual parameter; e.g., speed, acceleration with a previously defined
    parameter.


CLS 303/135
TXT Automatic:

    Train speed control under subclass 128 in which the braking action is
    applied without direct action by the operator.


CLS 303/136
TXT Pseudo-speed:

    Train speed control under subclass 128 in which the braking action is
    controlled by a rate determined from the difference between wheel and
    vehicle speeds.


CLS 303/137
TXT Motorcycle:

    Speed control under subclass 121 for a two-wheeled motorized vehicle.


CLS 303/138
TXT Speed, deceleration, or ABS indication:

    Speed control under subclass 121 in which a rate of vehicle travel,
    decreasing rate per time, or wheel slip is brought to the attention of a
    vehicle operator via a lamp, recorder, etc.


CLS 303/139
TXT And traction control:

    Speed control under subclass 121 in which the braking action is regulated
    by a reaction to skidding.


CLS 303/140
TXT With yaw control:

    Speed and traction control under subclass 139 including a vehicle
    side-to-side movement or angular motion about a vehicle vertical axis
    regulator.


CLS 303/141
TXT With engine torque power take-off (PTO) control:

    Speed and traction control under subclass 139 including a vehicle motor
    force producing rotation regulator.


CLS 303/142
TXT Motor control:

    Speed and traction control under subclass 139 including a vehicle engine
    force to provide braking action.


CLS 303/143
TXT With four wheel drive or all wheel drive:

    Speed and traction control under subclass 139 in which the braking action
    is designed for a vehicle with a differential for each axle.


CLS 303/144
TXT Intersecting traction and skid occurrence:

    Speed and traction control under subclass 139 in which a control unit
    compensates for a succession of a slip and spin condition.


CLS 303/145
TXT Odd condition (e.g., fuel supply cut-off, modulating valve):

    Speed and traction control under subclass 139 in which the braking action
    is controlled by an additional parameter different from the usual condition
    of acceleration or pressure.


CLS 303/146
TXT With yaw control:

    Speed control under subclass 121 in which the braking action is controlled
    by a vehicle side to side movement or angular motion about a vehicle
    vertical axis.

    (1)     Note.  Yaw control in which the braking action is controlled by
    conditions detected related to; e.g., geometry, force, friction is
    classified here.


CLS 303/147
TXT From speed sensors:

    Yaw control under subclass 146 in which the braking action is controlled by
    conditions detected related to rate.


CLS 303/148
TXT From split coefficient of friction (mu):

    Yaw control under subclass 146 in which the braking action is controlled by
    detection of a low to high road-tire resistance.


CLS 303/149
TXT Split coefficient of friction (mu):

    Speed control with failure response under subclass 121 in which the braking
    action is controlled by detection of a low to high road-tire resistance
    based on wheel deceleration versus a reference deceleration.


CLS 303/150
TXT Specific mu determination:

    Speed control under subclass 121 in which the braking action is determined
    from the tire to road contact force.


CLS 303/151
TXT Traction-motor vehicle:

    Speed control under subclass 121 in which an electric to mechanical energy
    converter is conditioned during the braking action to operate as a
    generator thereby permitting recapture of the kinetic energy during the
    braking action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149,    for regenerative brakes.


CLS 303/152
TXT Regenerative brakes:

    Speed control under subclass 121 in which a hydraulic motor normally
    driving the vehicle is conditioned during the braking action to operate as
    a generator thereby permitting recapture of the vehicle's kinetic energy
    during the braking action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148,    for traction-motor vehicle brakes.


CLS 303/153
TXT Lead signal control for antiskid:

    Speed control under subclass 121 in which a network responsive to a time
    derivative pulse of the braking action reacts to alter steering.


CLS 303/154
TXT Multiple control signal with multiple threshold:

    Speed control under subclass 121 in which the braking action is determined
    from more than one input; e.g., large spin-up rate, a small wheel speed
    versus car deviation, wheel speed, vehicle speed, slip, deceleration,
    coefficient of friction, having more than one limit condition, reference,
    or value.


CLS 303/155
TXT Braking pressure demand or braking force desire:

    Speed control under subclass 121 in which the braking action is (a)
    controlled by a response of an operator; i.e., force applied to the brake
    pedal or (b) is equalized throughout a system; e.g., front or rear brakes
    adjusted to supply more braking depending on sensed parameters such as
    wheel speed.


CLS 303/156
TXT Pulse frequency or time period controlling pressure rebuild:

    Speed control under subclass 121 in which after the braking action is
    applied, a burst of electrical energy or an interval determines a force for
    braking being restored.


CLS 303/157
TXT Pressure release control:

    Speed control under subclass 121 wherein an output signal from a
    deceleration detecting means operates to reduce a braking force.


CLS 303/158
TXT Pressure reapply control:

    Speed control under subclass 121 in which conditions; e.g., wheel velocity,
    vehicle acceleration, coefficient of friction, monitored during the braking
    action are evaluated to determine either control of the braking fluid force.


CLS 303/159
TXT Wheel pressure delay compared to reference:

    Speed control under subclass 121 in which release or reapplication of
    braking force is held back relative to a determined release or
    reapplication control signal.


CLS 303/160
TXT Pressure or specific condition (e.g., deceleration) determines wheel speed
    instead of direct speed sensor:

    Speed control under subclass 121 in which the rate of a road engaging
    member of a typical vehicle is found by changes in, for example, a
    compressed fluid system, rate per time change, vehicle rate, displacement,
    coefficient of friction, to decide braking action.


CLS 303/161
TXT Current or voltage ramp proportional to vehicle speed:

    Speed control under subclass 121 in which the braking action is dependent
    upon stepping the amperage or electric potential to rotate a brake motor to
    assure a smooth increase in force.


CLS 303/162
TXT Current control of linear piston drive motor:

    Speed control under subclass 121 in which the braking action is dependent
    upon an amperage put out by an electrical power generating device.


CLS 303/163
TXT Slip ratio:

    Speed control under subclass 121 in which the braking action is
    subsequently determined from a dimensionless number using the equation,
    vehicle speed minus wheel speed then divided by vehicle speed (at the time
    of brake impartation).


CLS 303/164
TXT Slip time versus nonslip time:

    Speed control under subclass 121 in which the braking action is based on a
    relationship between a wheel spin (slip ratio) time versus a time when no
    wheel spin occurs.


CLS 303/165
TXT Variable target slip values:

    Speed control under subclass 121 in which the braking action is affected by
    comparing a wheel spin or slippage threshold with detection of an actual
    wheel spin and altering the threshold for the spin detected.


CLS 303/166
TXT Wheel speed sensor and braking pressure sensor:

    Speed control under subclass 121 in which both the detection of rate of a
    road engaging member of a typical vehicle and detection of a compressed
    fluid decides the braking action force.


CLS 303/167
TXT Brake force or pressure determined from speed sensors:

    Speed control under subclass 121 in which the compressed braking fluid is
    regulated by a measurement of a rate of the wheel or the vehicle.


CLS 303/168
TXT Wheel generated pulse signal control (speed sensor):

    Speed control under subclass 121 in which detection of a rotating road
    engaging member by a magnetic or optical pick-up element, or a
    tachometer-type device, makes an electrical wave that is processed to
    determine braking action.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 488+ for speed sensor
    construction.


CLS 303/169
TXT Left or right speed comparison:

    Speed control under subclass 121 in which the braking action is determined
    by contrasting a driver's side wheel rate to a passenger's side wheel rate.


CLS 303/170
TXT Select high wheel speed versus select low:

    Speed control under subclass 121 in which the rate of rotation is compared
    and the braking action determined from a maximum or minimum rate.


CLS 303/171
TXT Wheel speed versus pseudo vehicle speed (e.g., from deceleration):

    Speed control under subclass 121 in which the braking action is influenced
    by a road engaging member rate exceeding a reference value of a conveyance
    rate.


CLS 303/172
TXT By direct feedback or instant wheel control:

    Speed control under subclass 171 in which the braking action is affected by
    a road engaging member rate exceeding a conveyance rate found by inputs
    from the road engaging member rate.


CLS 303/173
TXT By comparison of plural wheel speeds:

    Speed control under subclass 171 in which the braking action is altered by
    a fastest rate of a road engaging member exceeding a reference value of a
    conveyance rate found by a rate of road engaging members slower than the
    fastest rate.


CLS 303/174
TXT Previously stored wheel speed information:

    Speed control under subclass 121 in which the braking action is controlled
    by comparing a value of the road engaging member velocity held in a memory
    to the instantaneous velocity.


CLS 303/175
TXT Incipient or imminent skid measured:

    Speed control under subclass 121 in which the braking action is regulated
    by a condition of apparent or impending loss of traction of one wheel;
    e.g., front wheel, by rotating at a higher circumferential speed than
    another wheel on the same axle.


CLS 303/176
TXT Antilock control disabled or altered for acceleration or speed ranges:

    Speed control under subclass 121 in which a wheel slip correction system is
    temporarily deactivated or changed for a predetermined rate per time or
    rate limits.


CLS 303/177
TXT Sensing jerk, acceleration, or deceleration:

    Speed control under subclass 121 in which the braking action is determined
    from a first derivative of speed or by a system responsive to a change of
    rate per time motion.


CLS 303/178
TXT Wheel deceleration to find velocity error:

    Sensing acceleration under subclass 177 in which a road engaging member
    rate per time circuit produces a reference signal which is a function of a
    difference or inaccuracy between a road engaging member rate and a rate
    which is a function of the signal.


CLS 303/179
TXT Rotary and linear inertia:

    Sensing acceleration under subclass 177 in which an eccentric mass both
    rotates about an axis and reciprocates along the same axis.


CLS 303/180
TXT Rotary inertia:

    Sensing acceleration under subclass 177 in which an eccentric mass rotates
    about an axis.


CLS 303/181
TXT Linear inertia or accelerometer (includes pendulum type):

    Sensing acceleration under subclass 177 in which an eccentric mass
    reciprocates along an axis.


CLS 303/182
TXT Accelerometer versus wheel rotation sensor:

    Sensing acceleration under subclass 177 in which a road engaging member
    rate of turning is measured and compared to a rate per time.


CLS 303/183
TXT Specific acceleration or deceleration determined electronically:

    Sensing acceleration under subclass 177 wherein rate per time is found by a
    circuit which then controls braking action.


CLS 303/184
TXT Acceleration-deceleration versus timing:

    Sensing acceleration under subclass 177 in which the rate per time
    parameter compared to a specific interval controls braking action.


CLS 303/185
TXT Sensing deceleration then acceleration:

    Sensing acceleration under subclass 177 wherein the braking fluid is
    regulated to allow for a brake release in response to negative rate of
    change or velocity followed by a brake reapplication in accordance with a
    positive rate of change of velocity.


CLS 303/186
TXT Front-rear axle apportioning or speed difference:

    Speed control under subclass 121 in which the braking fluid of the
    steerable wheels and the back wheels is distributed according to the
    rotational rate.


CLS 303/187
TXT Diagonal wheels apportioning arrangement:

    Speed control under subclass 121 in which the braking fluid for a right
    front wheel is operatively connected to a left rear wheel, etc.


CLS 303/188
TXT All wheel apportioning arrangement (e.g., cross coupling):

    Speed control under subclass 121 in which the braking fluid for each road
    engaging member is operatively connected.


CLS 303/189
TXT Independent control for each wheel:

    Speed control under subclass 121 in which a separate and distinct braking
    action to every road engaging member of a typical vehicle is regulated.


CLS 303/190
TXT Four-wheel drive or all wheel drive:

    Speed control under subclass 121 wherein the braking action is designed for
    a vehicle with a differential for each axle.


CLS 303/191
TXT Odd condition or device detection (e.g., fluid or brake temperature, hill
    holder, anti-squeal controller, acoustic emission):

    Speed control under subclass 121 in which the braking action is controlled
    by an additional parameter different from the usual condition of
    acceleration or pressure.


CLS 303/192
TXT Vehicle inclination:

    Odd condition under subclass 191 in which the braking action is influenced
    by a slope of an automobile, truck, etc.


CLS 303/193
TXT With sonar or radar type sensor:

    Odd condition under subclass 191 in which the rate (or an obstruction) is
    found by a detector that operates in the (a) sonic or supersonic range, or
    (b) ultrahigh frequency or microwave part of the radio spectrum range.


CLS 303/194
TXT Hop or bounce (from vibration or oscillation) signal:

    Odd condition under subclass 191 in which high or low amplitude pulses,
    produced by a wheel going over an obstruction or falling into a hole, are
    detected during braking action.


CLS 303/195
TXT Spurious signal:

    Odd condition under subclass 191 in which pulses outside a specific
    amplitude or frequency (or both) are detected during braking action.


CLS 303/196
TXT For rough road:

    Spurious signal under subclass 195 in which the pulses are created by a
    driving surface containing irregularities such as potholes, speed bumps,
    etc.


CLS 303/197
TXT With feeler wheel:

    Odd condition under subclass 191 in which the braking action is determined
    from a road engaging member independent from the vehicle road engaging
    members.


CLS 303/198
TXT Speed and vehicle load condition (e.g., cargo):

    Odd condition under subclass 191 wherein the braking fluid is regulated by
    velocity and additional weight due to freight, extra passengers, etc.


CLS 303/199
TXT Electric control circuit detail:

    Speed control under subclass 121 which specifies a component (e.g.,
    resistor, capacitor, diode) of a system that generates the signals for
    operation.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 303/900
TXT ABS throttle control:
    Structure under the class definition wherein the anti-lock brake system
    includes a flow restriction of the brake fluid in the system.


CLS 303/901
TXT ABS check valve detail:
    Structure under the class definition wherein the anti-lock brake system
    includes the particular elements of a preset fluid regulating device which
    restricts flow in one direction.


CLS 305/
TTL WHEEL SUBSTITUTES FOR LAND  VEHICLES

CLS 305/
TXT GENERAL STATEMENT

    1.      This class relates to apparatus intended to be substituted for the
    wheel or runner of a land vehicle.  The apparatus of this class bears the
    same general relationship to a land vehicle as a wheel or runner and serves
    generally the same function but is so contructed that it can be called
    neither a wheel nor a runner.  The apparatus of the class, however, may
    include wheels or runners as subcombination portions thereof.

    2.      Apparatus of the class is characterized by the provision of means
    which facilitate the movement of the vehicle over rough terrain or
    increases the traction of the vehicle with respect to the ground.  Devices
    characteristic of the class are usually known as "Steppers" or "Endless
    Track Apparatus".

    (1)     Note.  The scope of this class is limited to wheel substitutes, per
    se, and subcombination portions thereof and does not include the
    combination of land vehicles with wheel substitutes, except where the
    claimed combination includes only a nominal recitation of the land vehicle.
     For land vehicles provided with wheel substitutes see the appropriate
    vehicle classes as indicated in the Search Notes below.

    DEFINITION OF TERMS

    FLEXIBLE TRACK
    An annular band made either of a single piece of flexible material or of a
    plurality of individual treads or sections movably connected together.

    TREAD
    A unitary ground engaging block or plate made of flexible or rigid material
    or a combination of both and provided with securing means for connection to
    similar devices to form a flexible track.

    WHEEL
    The term "wheel" as used in connection with this class includes resilient
    tires, sprocket gears, rollers or any other annular members rotatable about
    an axis and adapted to propel a flexible track or support a portion thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    (Includes statements of the line with other classes)

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclasses 78+ for chains of
    general utility.

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclasses 1+ for spring wheels,
    subclasses 213+ for anti-skid devices for resilient tire. Class 305 takes
    patents where the sole specific disclosure or a claim is to an anti-skid
    device which is adapted to be trained about a pair of longitudinally spaced
    resilient tires and intended to operate as an endless track apparatus.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 6.7 for an endless track vehicle which is
    steered by driving, subclasses 7.1+ for a motor vehicle driven in some
    other way than by the mere rotation of road wheels as traction wheels,
    subclasses 116+ for surface effect vehicles, subclass 164 for a motor
    vehicle provided with powered means for creating a fluid force to attract
    the vehicle to a surface of travel (neither subclasses 116+ nor 164
    requiring the claiming of a propulsion means or specific vehicle
    structure), and subclasses 182+ for a motor vehicle which includes one or
    more ski-like or runner members.  Class 180 (noting the specified
    exceptions) takes patents relating to a vehicle, disclosed as a motor
    vehicle where some vehicle structure or a special relationship between the
    vehicle frame and the wheel substitute is set forth in the claims,
    irrespective or whether or not any driving means is claimed. However such
    expressions as a "vehicle frame", "an axle", "a pivotal connection between
    the vehicle frame and wheel substitute carrying frame" in claims which are
    otherwise directed to specific wheel substitute structure are considered
    mere nominal recitations of vehicle structure and are not excluded from
    Class 305.  Also Class 180 takes patents claiming some element of the
    driving means of a wheel substitute except that the mere broad recitation
    of a drive means, drive axle or drive sprocket for a wheel substitute is
    not sufficient to exclude the patent from Class 305, if the vehicle is
    otherwise only nominally recited in the claims.

    188,    Brakes, for brakes, per se.  Class 305 takes the combination of a
    wheel substitute and brake therefor if some wheel substitute structure is
    claimed. The mere nominal recitation of a wheel substitute in the claims is
    not sufficient wheel substitute structure to be classified in Class 305.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses for endless belt
    conveyors.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 100+ for an aircraft landing gear in the
    form of a wheel substitute.  Class 305 takes wheel substitute landing gears
    for aircraft where no aircraft structure is claimed or where only a nominal
    relationship between the aircraft and landing gear is claimed.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 5.22 for land vehicles provided with
    endless tracks especially adapted for ascending steps, subclasses 12.11 and
    12.12 for land vehicles provided with a stepper running gear and subclass
    28.5 for land vehicles provided with wheel substitute ground engaging
    support means.  To be placed in Class 280 a patent must claim some vehicle
    structure or more than a mere nominal relationship between the vehicle
    frame and the wheel substitute apparatus.  For example the broad recitation
    of a vehicle frame, an axle, or a pivotal connection between the vehicle
    frame and the wheel substitute apparatus are considered mere nominal
    vehicle structure and a claim with these limitations would be classified in
    Class 305, if the claim is otherwise directed to the wheel substitute
    apparatus.

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclasses 41.1+ and especially
    subclasses 45+ for traction increasing devices for wheels.  Class 305 takes
    traction increasing devices in the form of plates pivotally secured to the
    rim of a wheel and adapted to extend in a plane parallel to the ground when
    in contact therewith to simulate the action of feet even though the plates
    are provided with ground penetrating cleats.  These devices distinguish
    from the subject matter in Class 301, subclasses 45+ in that the traction
    increasing devices therein are limited to ground penetrating cleats which
    are movably mounted on the rim of a wheel but are not mounted on plates
    which are adapted to simulate the action of feet when in contact with the
    ground.

    384,    Bearings, appropriate subclasses for a bearings for a rotary
    element and particularly subclass 417 for a bearing support for an idler
    pulley.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, appropriate
    subclasses for power transmission belts or chains of general utility either
    alone or in combination with a driving sprocket, and for guides or
    tensioners for such belts or chains.  Class 305 takes a patent for a
    flexible track and wheel combination or a flexible track or element
    thereof, per se, wherein the sole disclosure or a claim is to a flexible
    track apparatus for a land vehicle.  Class 474, takes a pulley, sprocket,
    or guide roll, per se, even though the pulley, sprocket, or guide roll is
    solely disclosed for use in connection with an endless track for a land
    wheel.

    INDEX TO CLASSES NOTED IN THE CLASS DEFINITION AND THE SUBCLASSES OF THIS
    CLASS


    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings.  See subclasses 186 and 187+.

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making. See class definition, and
    subclass 185.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type.  See subclasses 145+.

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels.  See class definition and subclasses 5,
    7, 19 and 34.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel.  See subclass 50.

    172,    Earth Working.  See subclasses 187+.

    180,    Motor Vehicles.  See class definition and appropriate subclasses.

    188,    Brakes, See class definition and subclass 9.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven.  See class definition.

    244,    Aeronautics.  See class definition.

    280,    Land Vehicles.  See class definition.

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles.  See class definition and
    subclasses 1, 19 and 187+.

    384,    Bearings.  See class definition.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices. See subclasses 145+.

    440,    Marine Propulsion.  See class definition.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components.  See the
    class definition and subclasses 117+, 143+, 157+, 185, and 202+.

    GENERAL NOTE:
    WHEREVER A DRAWING IS ASSOCIATED WITH A DEFINITION, IT IS MERELY USED TO
    ILLUSTRATE THE BASIC CONCEPT ENCOMPASSED BY THE DEFINITION OF THAT SUBCLASS
    AND SHOULD NOT BE CONSTRUED AS LIMITING THE SCOPE OF THE SUBJECT MATTER
    COVERED BY THAT SUBCLASS.


CLS 305/1
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising ground engaging feet or
    plates operating by a step-by-step movement during the forward travel of
    the apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 187 for a motor vehicle provided with one
    or more ski-like or runner members and wherein the vehicle has at least one
    surface-engaging propulsion element of a type which shuffles along the
    surface; and subclasses 8.1+ for a motor vehicle provided with a special
    driving device of the mechanical leg type.

    301,    Land Vehicles: Wheels and Axles, subclasses 41.1+, especially
    subclasses 45+ for traction increasing devices for wheels.  See the class
    definition of Class 305 for the line between these devices and the steppers
    of Class 305.


CLS 305/2
TXT Apparatus under subclass 1 wherein the ground engaging feet are positioned
    for ground engagement by cam means.


CLS 305/3
TXT Apparatus under subclass 1 wherein each of the ground engaging feet are
    pivotally connected to a rotating support by a plurality of links.


CLS 305/4
TXT Apparatus under subclass 1 wherein the ground engaging feet or plates are
    movably connected to the rim of a wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for an endless flexible track trained about a single wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    301,    Land Vehicles: Wheels and Axles, subclasses 44.1+ for ground
    engaging cleats movably secured directly to the rim of a wheel rather than
    to plates or feet which are movably secured to the rim of a wheel.


CLS 305/5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 4 in which the ground engaging feet are
    resiliently mounted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclasses 5+ for spring wheels.

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclass 51 for spring projected
    ground engaging cleats movably secured to the rim of a wheel.


CLS 305/6
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a rigid track adapted to be
    mounted on a vehicle to travel therewith and to form the ground support
    therefor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 9 for motor vehicles provided with rigid
    portable tracks.


CLS 305/7
TXT Apparatus under subclass 6 wherein said rigid track comprises a rigid
    circular rim.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus under this definition usually comprises a rigid
    circular rim and a wheel or roller within the rim, the axis of which is
    eccentrically positioned with relation to the axis of the rim, said wheel
    or roller being adapted to roll on a lower portion of the periphery of the
    rim.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclasses 17+ for a spring wheel
    provided with a rigid annular band extending about the periphery of the
    wheel outside of the springs, the axis of the wheel and band being
    concentric.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 10 for rigid circular tracks provided with
    driving means.

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 586+ for a wheel structure comprising a fixed
    inner portion, an outer rim and antifriction elements interposed between
    the fixed inner portion and the rim.


CLS 305/8
TXT Apparatus under the class definition provided with means adapting the
    apparatus to travel over a railroad rail.


CLS 305/9
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means for retarding the
    motion of or stopping the apparatus either by friction or by positive
    engagement of elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 6.7 for a motor vehicle provided with a
    flexible track which is steered by braking the track on one side or the
    other of the vehicle.

    188,    Brakes, appropriate subclasses for brakes, per se, or a brake
    combined with a nominally claimed wheel substitute.


CLS 305/15
TXT Apparatus under the class definition (1) combined with a device outside of
    the class definition and not provided for in other subclasses of this class
    or (2) so constructed that by rearrangement of its parts it may be
    converted from an apparatus performing a function within the class
    definition to an apparatus performing a distinctly different kind of
    function either within or without the class definition.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example, patents relating to a
    device comprising a wheel and an endless track each contacting the ground
    in operative position simultaneously, (2) a device comprising a wheel
    having a flexible rim which can be deformed to an elliptical shape and be
    made to operate as a flexible track, and (3) a device comprising a wheel
    and a flexible track combined therewith in such a way that the wheel alone
    may contact the ground or by a manipulation of the parts, the flexible
    track may be made to contact the ground.

    (2)     Note.  Patents relating to wheel substitute devices (e.g., flexible
    tracks) disclosed as merely assembled with or substituted for a wheel or
    wheels to convert the wheel or wheels to a wheel substitute device are not
    included in this definition.  See subclasses 124+ and 143+ for such
    patents.  If however the patent relates to a device in which a wheel
    contacting the ground and a wheel substitute means are each present at the
    same time the patent comes within the definition. See part (3) of (1) Note.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for an attachment to be secured to a track tread to prevent the
    cleats of the tread from digging into the ground.

    124+    and 143+, for wheel substitute devices which may comprise track
    means associated with wheels to convert the wheels to a wheel substitute,
    the track means not being present in the device when the wheel is in
    operation so as to contact the ground.

    187+,   for a detachable ground penetrating cleat for a track tread.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 9.26+ for a wheel vehicle adapted to be
    converted into an endless flexible track vehicle.


CLS 305/19
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a flexible track mounted
    about the periphery of a single wheel to completely surround such wheel and
    be carried solely thereby.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for steppers comprising plates pivotally secured to the rim of a
    wheel to act as ground engaging feet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclasses 208+ for antiskid devices
    for resilient tires.

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclass 42 for chain-type
    antiskid devices for wheels.


CLS 305/20
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a flexible track apparatus
    including wheels and wherein one of the wheels is positioned on top of the
    upper track run.

    (1)     Note.  For the meaning of "wheel" see the class definition.


CLS 305/33
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a flexible track apparatus
    including a pair of longitudinally spaced wheels, a flexible track trained
    about said wheels and a flexible belt interposed between and in engagement
    with the track and wheels to cause the track to run over the wheels.


CLS 305/34
TXT Apparatus under the class definition wherein a portion of the apparatus is
    adapted to be extended or swelled with a fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclasses 450+ for pneumatic tires.


CLS 305/40
TXT Apparatus under subclass 185 wherein a flexible track comprises a plurality
    of ground engaging treads connected together by means of an elongated
    flexible element.

    (1)     Note.  Included under this definition are tracks formed of metallic
    treads connected together by means of ropes, metal cables or elongated
    metallic bands.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157+,   for treads connected together by means of elongated nonmetallic
    straps or bands which may or may not be metal reinforced.


CLS 305/41
TXT Apparatus under subclass 185 in which the connecting means between the
    track treads includes an element having spring-like qualities to form a
    resilient connection.


CLS 305/42
TXT Apparatus under subclass 41 wherein the tread connecting means includes a
    transverse pin extending through a bushing made of resilient compressible
    material, the bushing being either vulcanized to the pin or press fitted
    thereon so that rotation of the pin can only be effected by torsional
    distortion of the bushing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202+,   for track treads connected together by means for a transversely
    extending horizontal connector pin.


CLS 305/43
TXT Apparatus under subclass 41 wherein said element is a compressible
    rubber-like member.


CLS 305/44
TXT Apparatus under subclass 185 wherein the track is especially designed to
    permit steering of said track while traveling over the ground.

    (1)     Note.  The specifically designed feature to permit steering usually
    comprises a special relationship of the track with its ground run support
    to prevent disengagement of the flexible track from its supporting
    structure when steering, or means such as a universal connection between
    the track treads to prevent undue stress between track treads when steering.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34      and 157+, for tracks made of flexible nonmetallic material.

    40,     for tracks formed of rigid treads connected together by means of
    elongated flexible cables.

    43,     for track treads interconnected by means of a longitudinally
    extending rubber hinge member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 6.7 for a motor vehicle with an endless
    flexible track which is steered by driving and subclasses 9.44+ for a motor
    vehicle with an endless flexible track which is provided with steering
    means.


CLS 305/45
TXT Apparatus under subclass 185 wherein the connection between the individual
    track treads is such as to allow the distance between adjacent treads to be
    selectively increased or decreased.


CLS 305/46
TXT Apparatus under subclass 185 in which the track treads are provided with a
    spring or rubber biased ground engaging portion.


CLS 305/47
TXT Apparatus under subclass 185 in which means are provided on the track
    treads to prevent the track from flexing in one direction.


CLS 305/48
TXT Apparatus under subclass 47 in which said means includes outstanding
    projections on each track tread which projections coact to prevent flexing
    of the track in one direction.


CLS 305/49
TXT Apparatus under subclass 48 in which means are provided for connecting
    adjacent outstanding projections together for limited relative movement.


CLS 305/50
TXT Apparatus under subclass 185 wherein the treads are provided with
    interengaging fastening portions formed either integrally therewith of
    preassembled thereto so that adjacent treads may be secured together
    without the addition of a separate connecting or fastening member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclass 235 for
    adjacent panels secured together by means of interengaging curled or bent
    side edges on the panels.


CLS 305/51
TXT Apparatus under subclass 185 comprising an attachment secured to a track
    tread to prevent ground penetrating cleats on the track tread from cutting
    into a road surface.


CLS 305/52
TXT Apparatus under subclass 185 wherein a track tread has an anti-friction
    roller means mounted thereon adapted to contact a track supporting frame or
    wheel, or adapted to form the ground engaging portion of the track.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    for a frame carried track provided with roller antifriction means.


CLS 305/53
TXT Apparatus under subclass 185 in which a complete track tread is formed in
    one piece.

    (1)     Note.  To be classified under this definition the complete tread as
    finally assembled to form the track must be made in one piece, either cast,
    molded, machined or bent into shape from a single piece of sheet metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47+,    for one-piece treads provided with means to prevent track sag.

    50,     for one-piece treads which are adapted to be secured to each other
    without the use of separate fasteners.

    157+,   for molded rubber-like treads.


CLS 305/59
TXT Including noncylindrical or hollow connector pin:

    Apparatus under subclass 202 wherein at least a portion of the cylindrical
    element has a cavity or opening formed thereon or has a surface which is
    not circular in cross section.

    (1)     Note. The noncircular portion of the pin must be a part thereof
    which engages within a bearing portion of the parts to be connected, and
    not merely the head of the pin.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118,    for a connector pin having a passage formed therein for
    transmitting a lubricating fluid.


CLS 305/60
TXT Apparatus under the class definition not provided for in any of the above
    subclasses.


CLS 305/100
TXT WITH MEANS TO REMOVE OR EXCLUDE FOREIGN MATTER (E.G., SEAL, SCRAPER):

    Apparatus under the class definition including a seal, scraper, guide, or
    shroud to expel or prevent the entry of dirt or other outlying object from
    any part of the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    for a track carried roller antifriction means.

    167+,   for a metallic embedded reinforcement including snowmobile clip.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 608+ for a guard for a
    rotary member.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 84 for a dust guard in general.

    184,    Lubrication, subclasses 15.1+ for a belt, cable, chain, or conveyor
    lubricator.

    277, Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or process.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 855+ for a wheel scraper or cleaner.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclass 92
    for a cleaning device for a belt, pulley, or guide roll in general.



    A - Main frame
    B - Drive sprocket
    C - Teeth
    D - Segment
    E - Hub flange
    F - Hub
    G - Interconnected links
    H - Track shoe
    J - Pin
    K - Intermediate bushing
    L - Annular shroud or guard


CLS 305/101
TXT With means between track links or shoes:

    Apparatus under subclass 100 including means integral or made separately to
    present a sealed outer surface both when in a horizontal position or when
    in a curved position, thereby preventing the undesirable ingress of foreign
    matter between the tread segments.



    A - Chain track
    B - Sprocket wheel
    C - Sprockets
    D, E - Chain plate
    F - Cleat having same thickness as chain
            plate
    G - Opening filled with elastomeric material
    H - Projecting pieces for improved traction


CLS 305/102
TXT With peripheral seal between bushing and track link:

    Apparatus under subclass 100 including a waterproof and dustproof
    elastomeric ring or similar element located on each side at or near the
    surface of the sleeve around the connecting pin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearing, subclasses 13+ for a rotary plain bearing having a
    specified seal.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclass 207
    for a positive drive belt formed of rigid links having a nonmetallic part.



    A, B, C - Track shoe collars
    D, E, F - Track pin assembly
    G - Spherical bearing
    H - Elastomeric seal


CLS 305/103
TXT With end seal between bushing and track link:

    Apparatus under subclass 100 including a waterproof and dustproof
    elastomeric ring or similar element located at the outermost section to
    engage the removable sleeve of metal or other material joining the two
    inflexible belt components.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117+,   for a distinct lubricating passage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 161+ for a ring or annular spider.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclass 91
    for a structure facilitating lubrication of belt, pulley, or guide roll;
    subclass 207 for a belt formed of rigid links including a nonmetallic part;
    subclasses 226+ for a link including discrete members forming laterally
    spaced sides of opening for a pulley tooth.



    A - Seal assembly
    B - Inner link
    C - Main body portion
    D - Track pin bushing
    E - Track pin
    F - Track pin outer end portion
    H - Main body portion
    J - Outer link


CLS 305/104
TXT And at connector pin:

    Apparatus under subclass 103 wherein the seal is located about a pivot pin
    which interconnects the overlapped ends of a pair of inflexible belt
    components.

    (1)     Note. The pin connecting each pair of inflexible belt components
    allows flexing to enable the track to pass around the driver and idler
    sprockets and to accommodate unevenness of terrain.

    (2)     Note. The end seal is between bushing, track, and the connector pin.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for a torsion bushing between the pin and the track link.

    47+     for a track or tread having a sag prevention means.

    59,     for a noncylindrical or hollow connector pin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 380+ for means to retain a
    pintle in a hinge.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 161+ for a ring or annular spider



    A, B, C - Upper, middle and lower links
    D - Offset boss
    E - Overlap
    F - Counter bore
    G - Central hole in offset boss
    H - Pin
    J - Bushing
    K - Seal


CLS 305/105
TXT With seal between connector pin and bushing:

    Apparatus under subclass 100 including a waterproof and dustproof
    elastomeric ring or similar element located between a cylindrical element
    used to fasten two adjacent belt links and the removable sleeve of metal or
    other material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for a peripheral seal between the bushing and track link.

    103+,   for an end seal between the bushing and track link.

    106,    for a seal between the connector pin and track link.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclass 207
    for a positive drive belt formed of rigid links and having a nonmetallic
    part.



    A - Track link assembly
    B, C - Pair of link members
    D, E - Pair of link members
    F - Bushing
    G, H - Annular recess in the bushing end
            portions
    J - Track pins
    K, L - Circumferential sealing grooves  in the
                connector pin
    M, N - Sealing members between the bushing
            and connector pin


CLS 305/106
TXT With seal between connector pin and track link:

    Apparatus under subclass 100 wherein the dustproof and waterproof
    elastomeric element is located between a usually cylindrical element used
    to fasten the two inflexible belt components and the recess formed in one
    of the two belt components itself.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103+,   for a seal between bushing and track link.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 18+ for a flexible sealing
    diaphragm attached to a moving rod and to a casing.

    384,    Bearings, subclass 138 for a unitary bearing and seal; and subclass
    256 for an adjustable roller end support.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, subclass 353 for a securing means rotatable about
    fastener element and having opposed ramp surfaces; and subclass 517 for a
    resilient metallic retainer ring.



    A - Side link
    B - Connector pin
    C - Bushing or sleeve
    D - Link opening for pin
    E - Annular recess in link for sleeve
    F - Link opening for sleeve
    G - Annular recess in link for seal
    H - Seal assembly
    J - Seal ring
    K - Annular resilient member


CLS 305/107
TXT With deflector plate, track guide means, or scraper:

    Apparatus under subclass 100 including a smooth, usually nearly flat and
    relatively thin piece of metal or other material or a single or plurality
    of a set of teeth or blades to push or expel the accumulated dirt, to
    prevent dirt and debris from entering the elements, or to maintain the
    surface clean of mud and rocks and having a contrivance with a directing
    edge, surface, or channel for maintaining the tracks on wheels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for combined or convertible wheel substitutes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 6.7 for an endless flexible track;
    subclass 8.7 for an endless, flexible driving device including tracks
    substituted for driving wheels; and subclasses 184+ for a propulsion
    element of endless track type.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 95+ for a wheel scraper or cleaner.

    440,    Marine Propulsion, subclasses 95+ for a flexible endless propelling
    means.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclass 92
    for a cleaning device for a belt, pulley, or guide roll.



    A - Track
    B - Dirt, mud
    C - Pusher plate supported by hyd. cylinder
    D - Hydraulic cylinder
    E - Hydraulic control mechanism for
            pusher plate
    F - Main frame




    A - Side frame
    B - Scraper assembly
    C - Support roller of upper track section
    D, E - Scraper teeth
    F - Bridge section
    G, H - Side wing sections

    M - Mud
    P - Pillow blocks


CLS 305/108
TXT With deflector or guard mounted to track body:

    Apparatus under subclass 107 including a lug or a beveled or wedge-shaped
    projecting rib secured to endless belt shoe for aiding in cleaning the
    belt, support wheels, or vehicle undercarriage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111+,   for a self-cleaning tread or track unit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 190+ for an endless track type element.

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 494+ for a conveyor having
    means to facilitate cleaning of the conveyor.


CLS 305/109
TXT With deflector plate mounted to lateral side of track:

    Apparatus under subclass 107 including a scraper plate or a flexible guard
    element secured on the track roller frame or vehicle body to prevent
    foreign matter from entering the track area or to guide the rollers or
    track relative to one another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for miscellaneous subject matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 6.7 for an endless flexible track;
    subclass 8.7 for an endless or rotary type stepper; and subclass 9.64 for a
    belt- or chain-driven toothed wheel drive.

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 494+ for a conveyor having
    means to facilitate cleaning.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 855+ for a wheel scraper or cleaner.



    A, B, C, D - Track roller frame assembly
    E - Track assembly
    F - Pair of track rollers or track links
    G, G1 - Flexible guard rail
    H - Backup detector plate


CLS 305/110
TXT With scraper mounted to scrape track or wheel:

    Apparatus under subclass 107 including a plate positioned on the vehicle
    body to remove debris from at least one surface of the drive wheels or
    support rollers.


CLS 305/111
TXT With self-cleaning tread or track unit:

    Apparatus under subclass 100 including an endless chain of pivotally
    connected links having a notch at one end and a tongue at the other end
    traveling with the track unit to scrape automatically from the track shoes
    or other part of the vehicle any accumulation of dirt, snow, or mud.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 190+ for an endless track type element
    having a surface-engaging propulsion element.

    474,    Endless Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclass 901 for
    a pulley or guide roll for a track of an endless track vehicle.



    Cleaner or cleaning chain F traverse with track to
    clean track A.
    A - Endless chain or link track
    B - Track shoe
    C - Sprocket wheel
    D - Support frame
    E - Support
    F - Cleaning or cleaning link
    G - Notch
    H - Tongue
    J - Loop
    K - Pivot


CLS 305/112
TXT Including self-cleaning endless belt:

    Apparatus under subclass 111 including a continuous track for automatic
    removal of mud, snow, and other debris.

    (1)     Note. The continuous track includes at least a pair of laterally
    spaced driving teeth, wherein the teeth in one row are located in staggered
    relation to the teeth in the other row and the staggered and spaced
    location of the driving teeth result in automatic removal of debris.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for a wheel on top of upper track run.

    195+,   for a sprocket and track engagement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 9.62+ for a belt or chain driven toothed
    wheel drive.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclass 153
    for a positive drive pulley or guide roll having a particular belt;
    subclass 205 wherein the drive surfaces are formed integral with a
    continuous flexible member.



    A - Endless track
    B - Belt portion
    C, D - Laterally spaced rows of teeth
    E - Driving teeth
    F - Belt strip
    G, H, J - Inner/outer teeth surface
    K - Driving sprocket rim
    L, M - Hub with central
    N - Driving lugs


CLS 305/113
TXT Having openings through side or base of shoe or link:

    Apparatus under subclass 111 including an endless positive track composed
    of individual track shoes being connected together to afford the ready
    passage, discharge, or extrusion of the mud, snow, chips, and other debris.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195,    for a sprocket and track engagement.

    202+,   for a separate transverse connector pin between treads.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclasses 225+ for a plate or bar type
    antiskid device.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses
    156+ for a belt formed of rigid links having sequential links pivoted about
    discrete pivot pin; subclasses 233+ for a positive drive belt formed of
    rigid links having a discrete member inter connecting pulley-tooth
    receiving links.



    A -Track shoe
    B, C - Track shoe sidewalls
    D, E - Adjacent track shoe lugs
    F - Common grouser
    G - Link
    H - Fastening means
    J - Support plate
    K - Opening thru plate "J" provides egress
            of entrapped debris


CLS 305/114
TXT With particular shoe, lug, grouser structure, or material:

    Apparatus under subclass 111 wherein the surfaces of a metal socket or
    plate or a projection or ridge are formed to extend angularly with respect
    to the socket or ridge axis and with respect to each other, thereby
    squeezing or extruding mud or dirt from between the operating parts.

    (1)     Note. The significance is attributed to the configuration of the
    shoe, lug, or grouser, which facilitates cleaning or prevents collection of
    mud, snow, or debris.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48+,    for a projecting truss type sag prevention means.

    53,     for a one-piece track tread.

    185,    for a track or tread structure in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclass 185.1 for an antiskid external
    track for a single wheel.



    A - Male part of shoe or lug
    B - Pin hole
    C - Locking part
    D - Inclined face
    E - Boss
    F - Flat face
    G - Bridging part
    H - Convex face
    J - Inclined face
    K - Flat face


CLS 305/115
TXT With self-cleaning sprocket or drive wheel:

    Apparatus under subclass 100 wherein a circular device with a hub at the
    center communicating the motion is provided with relief cutouts or openings
    or a specific configuration to clean itself of mud and foreign substances
    or move such substances outwardly of the vehicle and free of endless chain.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclass 92
    for a cleaning device for a belt, pulley or guide roll; subclass 901 for a
    pulley or guide roll for a track of an endless track vehicle.


CLS 305/116
TXT TRACK GUIDE OR ALIGNMENT MECHANISM:

    Subject matter under the class definition including an adjustment device
    consisting of a wheel carriage with a support arm and coupling means having
    a pair of plate members or similar structure to assist in correcting the
    proper relative position of the endless ground engaging band.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153,    for a longitudinally adjustable means for tensioning track.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 9.38 for a portable endless track with a
    ground wheel having a steering mechanism; subclass 9.52 for an adjustable
    track support mounted for vertical movement.

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclass 806 for a revolvable means
    engaging a carrier belt face automatically to correct belt training
    deviation.



    A - Sprocket wheel              G - Teeth
    B - Drive axle          H - Sides of teeth
    C - Endless chain               J - Root face region
    D - Hub         K - Relief cutouts
    E - Outer rim           L - Bushing
    F - Web


CLS 305/117
TXT WITH LUBRICATION:

    Apparatus under the class definition including a discrete space, channel,
    or troughlike receptacle filled with a substance capable of reducing
    friction to the bearing and to the belt due to the deformation suffered by
    passing around the peripheral curve of the pulley.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198     and 201, for a link or shoe structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 844.1+ for a carrier belt
    structure.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclass 91
    for a structure facilitating lubrication of belt, pulley or guide roll;
    subclasses 208+ for a belt structure formed of rigid links.



CLS 305/118
TXT Including passage in connector pin:

    Apparatus under subclass 117 wherein the lubricant is provided within the
    space around a metal bar interconnecting the overlapped ends of a pair of
    an endless chain links.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    184,    Lubrication, subclass 105.3 for a nipple or fitting type
    lubrication. (e.g., grease fitting)

    384,    Bearings, subclass 138 for a unitary bearing or seal; subclass 282
    for a special sleeve or liner with a bearing surface insert

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclass 152 for articulated members with a
    pivoted pin.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclass 91
    for a structure facilitating lubrication of a belt, pulley, or guide roll.



CLS 305/119
TXT Including passage in or for roller structure:

    Apparatus under subclass 117 wherein the lubricant space or channel is
    provided within or for an endless track cylinder assembly mounted on the
    track frame intermediate the track sprocket and the idler wheel usually
    used for maintaining the lower run of the endless track in firm engagement
    with the underlying terrain.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 308+ for lubricating a fixed shaft with a
    capillary type of internal feed; subclass 418 for lubricating a rotary
    elongated roller.



    A - Elongated shaft
    B - Bolts to secure shaft to track frame
    C - Spaced rails forming track frame
    D - Roller
    E - Guiding flanges
    F - Bearings
    G - End collars
    H - Thrust washers
    J, K - Seals
    L - Lubricant reservoir
    M - Lubricant receiving port
    N - Radial bore establishes fluid communication


CLS 305/120
TXT WITH FRAME CARRIED ENDLESS TRACK:

    Apparatus under the class definition including a flexible continuous band
    guided or supported by a basic structural unit made up of a plurality of
    beams, plates, or angle irons.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 193 for an endless track type element with
    a vertically movable track support.


CLS 305/121
TXT With roller antifriction means:

    Apparatus under subclass 120 wherein a plurality of balls or cylinders is
    provided between the track and the frame to facilitate movement about the
    frame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    111,    Planting, subclass 42 for an endless belt tripped hill-planting
    machine.

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclass 814 for a spring biasing device
    for tensioning an endless conveyor belt; subclass 842 for a rotatable
    support, guide, or holddown means for a conveyor belt.



CLS 305/122
TXT Track carried:

    Apparatus under subclass 121 wherein the rollers are attached to and
    carried by a continuous ground engaging band.



    A - Frame
    B - Endless band
    C - Rollers


CLS 305/123
TXT Rollers engage toothed wheel:

    Apparatus under subclass 121 wherein the ball or a cylinder of hard
    material contacts the sprocket wheel.



    A - Rigid frame F - Sprocket wheel
    B - Transverse axles    G - Vertical rigid support
    C - Rubber tires        H - Rollers
    D - Cleat or tread      J - Rollers
    E - Endless band


CLS 305/124
TXT WITH TRACK SUPPORT INTERMEDIATE OF END WHEELS:

    Apparatus under the class definition including a continuous ground engaging
    band having at least a pair of longitudinally spaced foremost and rearmost
    circular elements having a hub at the center and further including a band
    holding means or sag prevention means situated at the middle of the
    foremost and rearmost circular elements.

    (1)     Note. Subject matter of this subclass includes means to support the
    upper or lower run of the endless band to maintain tension, to guide the
    band, or to support the vehicle and maintain contact between the lower run
    of the band and the ground.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 9.5+ for an endless flexible track
    support mounted for vertical movement.



    A - Main frame
    B - Endless chain track
    C - Rear wheel
    D - Idler wheel
    E - Roller truck frame
    F - Rollers
    G - Support spring
    H - Guide rollers
    J - Support bar
    K - Links
    L - Link pin


CLS 305/125
TXT Including end wheel support for movement to maintain track tension:

    Apparatus under subclass 124 wherein at least one of the rearmost wheels is
    mounted for longitudinal adjustment to prevent slackening of the band.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses
    133+ for a guide roll mounted for movement of its axis along a arcuate path
    for tensioning the endless belt.



CLS 305/126
TXT Intermediate support includes wheel contacting upper and lower track runs:

    Apparatus under subclass 124 wherein the holding means at the middle of the
    endless band includes at least one circular element touching both the top
    and bottom portion of the endless band.



CLS 305/127
TXT Including elongated slide or frame support:

    Apparatus under subclass 124 including at least a pair of elongated
    laterally spaced means adapted to hold the vehicle on the track and keep
    the track in contact with the ground.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 193 for an endless type element with a
    vertically movable support located intermediate to the forward and rearward
    extremities of the track.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 5.22 for a step or abutment ascending type
    vehicle with an endless track.



CLS 305/128
TXT Combined with at least one intermediate roller:

    Apparatus under subclass 127 wherein the elongated slide support further
    includes a cylindrical element made of hard material located at the
    midportion of the continuous belt to hold the belt in a position away from
    or in addition to the slide support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 193 for an endless type element with a
    vertically movable support located intermediate the forward and rearward
    extremities of the track.



    A - Elongated slide support
    B - Endless track
    C - Wheel or roller


CLS 305/129
TXT With roller support contacting lower track run:

    Apparatus under subclass 124 including a holding means consisting of at
    least one cylindrical element engaging the bottom portion of the endless
    band.


CLS 305/130
TXT With frame mounted rollers:

    Apparatus under subclass 129 wherein the holding means includes a plurality
    of cylindrical elements made of hard material and attached to the basic
    structural unit made of a plurality of beams, plates, or angle irons.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 9.52 for an adjustable track support
    mounted for vertical movement.



CLS 305/131
TXT Adjustable or movable frame:

    Apparatus under subclass 130 wherein the basic supporting structural unit
    is positionable from one position to another position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 9.54+ wherein the track support mounted
    for vertical movement includes a spring.



CLS 305/132
TXT With roller support mounted for movement individually or in pairs:

    Apparatus under subclass 129 wherein the cylindrical track holding means is
    adapted to change in its position either singularly or as a plurality of a
    set of two with respect to the remaining holding means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 9.58 for an adjustable track support
    mounted for vertical movement having a leaf or torsion spring; subclass 193
    for an endless track type element having a vertically movable track support.



CLS 305/133
TXT Including individual roller mounted for movement at end of arm:

    Apparatus under subclass 132 wherein the singular cylindrical element is
    positioned for rotational movement at the end of a pivotable elongate
    member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 9.58 for a track support mounted for
    vertical movement having a leaf, torsion, or coil spring.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 685 for a tandem axle equalizing frame with
    a coil or leaf spring suspension.



CLS 305/134
TXT Including walking beam or pivoting arm:

    Apparatus under subclass 132 wherein the track suspension mechanism
    includes an elongate rocking first member or members rotatably mounted at
    one end on a support means, and a second swingable member or members
    aligned with the first member or members and with the lower track of the
    vehicle to maintain the track in constant contact with the ground surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 677+ for a tandem axle equalized frame
    with a walking beam.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclass 134
    for plural guide rolls engaging a single endless track; subclass 135 for a
    guide roll spring biased in the belt-tensioning direction.



    A - Endless track
    B - Carrier axle
    C - Trunion (pivot connection)
    D - Main walking beam
    E - Trunion (pivot connection)
    F - Walking beams (secondary)
    G - Track rollers
    H - Bearings


CLS 305/135
TXT With high drive arrangement:

    Apparatus under subclass 129 wherein the lower run of the endless track is
    guided by the train of wheels which is being suspended by a beam and leg
    assembly from a journal tube such that the entire endless track unit can
    oscillate about the axle housing and the axle as an axis and wherein the
    driving wheel is arranged as the uppermost rotatable member.



    A - Vehicle frame
    B - Vehicle body
    C - Apron
    D - Frame for flanged wheels
    E, F, G - Flanged wheels
    H - Endless truck engaging flanged wheels


CLS 305/136
TXT Specific roller structure, per se:

    Apparatus under subclass 129 wherein the significance is attributed to the
    shape or configuration of the cylindrical element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 572+ for a flywheel or
    rotor structure, per se.

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclasses 17+ for a spring wheel
    structure, per se.

    295,    Railway Wheels and Axles, subclasses 11+ for a wheel structure, per
    se.

    301,    Land Vehicles: Wheels and Axles, subclasses 63.1+ for a specific
    disc type compression wheel structure, per se.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclass 177
    for a friction drive pulley or guide roll; subclass 191 for a pulley or
    guide roll structure with a nonmetallic belt engaging surface; subclass 901
    for a pulley or guide roll structure for the track of an endless track
    vehicle.



    A - Roller or resilient tire    D - Central ribs
    B - Rim         E - Load bearing surface
    C - Axle                F - Guide grooves


CLS 305/137
TXT Including structure to engage track (e.g., wear surface, cushion):

    Apparatus under subclass 136 including specific configuration of the roller
    for partially contacting or meshing with the endless band.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclasses 306+ for a resilient tire
    with a sectional abutting sections; subclass 323 for a resilient tire with
    a integral cushion.

    295,    Railway Wheels and Axles, subclasses 11+ for a railway wheel with a
    tire cushion; subclasses 31.1+ for a wheel  tread.

    301,    Land Vehicles: Wheels and Axles, subclass 11.3 for a detachable
    wheel section having a spacer between the rim and the wheel body;
    subclasses 63.1+ for a disc type compression wheel.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclass 161
    for a positive drive pulley or guide roll with a nonmetallic component;
    subclass 164 for a positive drive pulley or guide roll having axially
    spaced sets of belt engaging surfaces; subclass 191 for a pulley or guide
    roll with a nonmetallic belt engaging surface; subclass 901 for a pulley or
    guide roll for the track of an endless track vehicle.



    A-Roller or wheel               D,E - Wheel panels
    B-Hub           F,G - Rim outer and inner
    C - Rim                 surfaces


CLS 305/138
TXT With roller mounting means:

    Apparatus under subclass 129 including the specifics of the attachment
    structure (e.g., clamp, pin, key) for securing the cylindrical element to
    the truck frame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 416+ for a plain bearing especially adapted
    for a pulley or roller type rotary member.



    A - Truck frame
    B - Roller assembly
    C - Resilient cushions
    D - Roller
    E, F - Links to interconnect roller assembly
    G - Link off set
    H - Bell crank
    J - Pivot
    K - Truck frame side member


CLS 305/139
TXT With intermediate upper track run support:

    Apparatus under subclass 129 including holding means at the middle place of
    the top portion of the endless band.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 906 for adjustable axles.



    A - Endless track
    B-F - Constitutes intermediate upper track
            run support.
    G - Sprocket wheel
    H - Idler sprocket wheel
    J - Truck frame
    K - Rollers


CLS 305/140
TXT With endless roller chain support:

    Apparatus under subclass 129 wherein the holding means includes a frame as
    a continuous band made of individual links and further provided with
    cylindrical elements trained to run around the frame to extend between the
    frame and the lower run of the track.



    A - Axle hung rocker beam
    B - Runner blocks
    C - Roller chain
    D - Track lugs
    E, F - Sprocket wheels


CLS 305/141
TXT With vertically movable wheel support:

    Apparatus under subclass 129 wherein the holding means includes a frame and
    a plurality of a circular rim with a hub or a disc, capable of rotating on
    a central axis, mounted on the frame and being individually positionable
    perpendicular to the direction of the vehicle motion.


CLS 305/142
TXT With plural wheel support:

    Apparatus under subclass 129 wherein the holding means includes two or more
    elements consisting of a circular rim with a hub or a disc, capable of
    rotating on a central axis.


CLS 305/143
TXT WITH MEANS FOR TENSIONING TRACK BY MOVING AT LEAST ONE END WHEEL:

    Apparatus under the class definition including a flexible endless band or
    belt trained about a pair of longitudinally spaced distal wheels being
    adjustable either in a vertical or longitudinal direction with relation to
    the other wheel to prevent overtightening or slackening of the band or belt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120+,   for a frame carried endless track.

    125,    for an end wheel support to maintain track tension.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 9.5+ for an endless flexible track
    having an adjustable track support mounted for a vertical movement.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 28.5 for a wheel substitute for land
    vehicles.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses
    101+ for a tensioning means for power transmission belts; subclass 901 for
    a cross-reference art collection of patents on pulleys or guide rolls for
    the track of an endless track vehicle.


CLS 305/144
TXT Condition responsive (e.g., inclination, speed, operator command):

    Apparatus under subclass 143 wherein the automatic adjustment of the track
    tension includes a system utilizing a valve in association with a track
    adjustment system for adjusting the track tension by providing a control
    for actuating the tensioner element in response to the degree of slope or
    rate of change of distance with time of the vehicle, or a manual signal
    from the operator.


CLS 305/145
TXT Having hydraulic adjusting means:

    Apparatus under subclass 143 wherein the means for tensioning track is
    operated by use of a fluid in a spring mechanism to actuate a correcting
    movement in response to changes in the tension of the track.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 129 for an abutment connection
    working member and the power transmission device.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 9.52 for an additional track support
    mounted for vertical movement.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclass 110
    for a tension adjuster driven by a fluid motor.


CLS 305/146
TXT Including spring device (e.g., coil spring):

    Apparatus under subclass 145 wherein the hydraulic piston is provided with
    an additional resilient means to maintain tension of the track and allow
    recoil thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors: Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 449+ for a motive fluid
    valve with plural separately controlled waste passages for a single working
    member.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 26 for a resilient element to
    prevent movement of the working member; subclasses 61+ for relatively
    movable working members; subclass 84 for resilient means interposed between
    the working member and a relatively movable power transmission element;
    subclasses 153+ for a expansible chamber device with a lubricating means.

    184,    Lubrication, subclasses 18+ for a cylinder lubricator.

    213,    Railway Draft Appliances, subclass 43 for a fluid spring.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclass 64.11 for a vehicle spring with
    compressible fluid; subclasses 118+ for a expansible-contractible chamber
    device.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclass 138
    for a guide roll spring biased in the belt-tensioning direction.







    A - Track roller frame
    B - Spring recoil assembly
    C - Stop
    D - Housing
    E - Coil spring
    F - Movable piston
    G - Block closes piston at one end
    H - Circular plate secured to piston block
    (Shifting piston to the left compresses the coil spring)


CLS 305/147
TXT Coil spring housed within hydraulic cylinder:

    Apparatus under subclass 146 wherein the resilient element is operatively
    installed inside the casing of the tubular fluid chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclass 305 for an inertia-
    resistance motion retarder having a piston reciprocating along the axis of
    oscillation; subclasses 311+ for a thrust member reciprocating in the
    enclosed chamber.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 10.5 for a metallic spring stretcher or compressor (e.g., leaf,
    helical, or coil spring).

    267,    Spring Devices, subclass 34 for a compound coil and fluid pressure
    spring; subclass 221 for a fluid retarder having a helical coil spring.


CLS 305/148
TXT Including gas recoil:

    Apparatus under subclass 145 including a compressible fluid accumulator
    track system having a sudden backward movement utilizing a hydraulic
    adjusting means to provide a differential movement connection to maintain
    reasonable backward movement forces over a long range of sudden backward
    movement.



    A - Vehicle frame
    B - Trunion
    C - Connecting rod to yoke
    D - Housing
    E - Gas chamber
    F - Cylinder bore
    G - Free piston
    H - Open-ended
    J - Open-ended cylinder box
    K - Piston
    L - Fluid chamber


CLS 305/149
TXT With vent or relief valve:

    Apparatus under subclass 145 including an aperture or a membranous element
    to allow the pressurized fluid to escape at a controlled rate from the
    hydraulic tensioning device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors, Expansible Chambers Type, subclass 168 for the control of a
    motive fluid for a one working member in response to the position of the
    second; subclasses 449+ for a motive fluid valve including plural
    separately controlled waste passages for a single working member.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 596+ for a supply and exhaust fluid
    handling systems; subclasses 599+ for a system dividing into parallel flow
    paths with recombining.



CLS 305/150
TXT Vertically movable end wheel:

    Apparatus under subclass 143 wherein the adjustable distal wheel is secured
    in various positions not parallel to the direction of travel.



CLS 305/151
TXT Biased by spring only:

    Apparatus under subclass 143 wherein the endwheel is acted upon by a device
    capable of deflecting so as to store energy and be used as a source of
    power for tensioning the track.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 92 for a occupant steered running gear
    which is one-wheel controlled.


CLS 305/152
TXT Longitudinally outwardly biased by coil spring only:

    Apparatus under subclass 151 including a movable wheel mounted on a
    transverse axle movable in the direction away from the direction of travel
    and is acted upon by a spiral elastic element used as a source of power for
    tensioning the track.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for a steerable track or tread.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 70+ for an elastic extension device such
    as a compression spring.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 83+ for an articulated member
    lockable at a fixed position.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, subclass 49 for a coupling device including an endless chain
    engaged with circumferential teeth on coupled members.



    A - Endless resilient band      K, L - Floating end
    B, C - Supports for roller                   rollers on
    D - Terrain (ground surface)               swingable arms
    E - Shaft               M - Coil spring
    F - Radial flanges                       mechanism
    G, H - Load rollers     N - Radial flanges
    J - Idler roller


CLS 305/153
TXT Longitudinally adjustable:

    Apparatus under subclass 143 wherein one of the distal wheels is
    selectively secured in various positions closer to or farther away from the
    other wheel.

    (1)     Note. This subclass includes structure wherein an extension member
    is secured to one end of a wheel carrying frame to elongate such frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120+,   for a frame carried flexible track wherein the frame is formed in
    sections which are adjustable relative to each other to maintain track
    tension.

    126,    wherein the intermediate support includes wheel contacting upper
    and lower track runs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses
    101+ for means for adjusting belt tension or for shifting belt, pulley, or
    guide roll.


CLS 305/154
TXT Including threaded tension adjuster:

    Apparatus under subclass 153 wherein the device to change or regulate the
    tensile stress in the endless band includes a screw member provided with a
    tensile stress changing nut.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 9.54 for an endless flexible portable
    track having a track support mounted for vertical movement including a
    longitudinally extending coil spring; and subclass 190 for a skilike runner
    member with one surface engaging endless track type propulsion element.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 28.5 for a wheel substitute; subclass 255
    for a coil spring including an adjustment for spring loading.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses
    135 and 138 for a guide roll spring biased in the belt tensioning direction.



CLS 305/155
TXT With intermediate support member (e.g., linkage):

    Apparatus under subclass 143 including a longitudinally extending beam
    having an inner and outer ends and a transversely extending shaft on the
    vehicle connected to a midportion of the beam for supporting the beam to
    rock front and center wheels freely about a transverse axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    for an endwheel support for movement to maintain track tension.

    153+,   for a longitudinally adjustable tension adjuster.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 81.1 for a multiple track running gear;
    subclass 679 for a running gear equalized frame with a torsion type
    suspension; subclass 685 for a running gear equalized frame with a
    coil-type suspension.



CLS 305/156
TXT Tensioner contained within idler wheel:

    Apparatus under subclass 143 wherein the device to change or regulate the
    tensile stress in the endless band is provided within the device such as a
    circular disk or a circular rim with a hub, capable of rotating on a
    central axis and solely used to reverse the direction of rotation or to
    modify the spacing of the centers, without affecting the overall ratios of
    the drive.



    A - Vehicle chassis     H - Tension adjustment device
    B - Endless track,              J - Track roller
    C- Track shoe           K - Beam
    D - Drive wheel         L - Pin,
    E - Idler wheel         M - Empty space
    F - Idler-wheel carrier
    G - Support body


CLS 305/157
TXT ENDLESS BELT HAVING NONMETALLIC TRACK OR TREAD:

    Apparatus under the class definition including a continuous band having a
    ground engaging surface or projection made of high strength molded plastic,
    Teflon, synthetic rubber, or other similar material.


CLS 305/158
TXT Track formed of flexible sections:

    Apparatus under subclass 157 wherein the continuous band consists of a
    plurality of interconnected, resilient segments.


CLS 305/159
TXT Track formed of rigid nonmetallic links:

    Apparatus under subclass 157 wherein the continuous belt is formed of
    inflexible components connected to each other by articulated joints
    presenting profiled supporting surfaces made of rubber or high strength
    molded plastic or similar material to permit relative movement of the
    components so that the belt is capable of conforming to the curvature of
    the pulley or sprocket drive face.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41+,    for a resilient connector between treads.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 698+ for a load-engaging belt
    having load-impelling projected cross members joined by mechanical
    fastening means; subclasses 850+ for a carrier belt structure formed of or
    including pivotally interconnected rigid links.

    301,    Land Vehicles: Wheels and Axles, subclasses 43+ for a traction
    increasing projecting cleat made of a resilient material.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclass 207
    for a belt formed of rigid links including nonmetallic part; subclasses
    232+ for a link including common member forming laterally spaced sides of
    opening for a pulley tooth.



    A - Tubular bodies              E - Intermediate links
    B - Underside running pad       F - Successive chain links      C - End
    connector links G - Connecting pin rodsD - Chain tooth          H -
    Roll-off surfaces


CLS 305/160
TXT Lug, shoe, or grouser structure, per se:

    Apparatus under subclass 159 wherein the significance is attributed to the
    shape or configuration of the traction plate, projection, socket, or cleat,
    which projects from the belt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for a one-piece track tread.

    114,    for a self-cleaning shoe, lug, or grouser structure.

    191+,   for a grouser structure.

    198,    for a link or shoe structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclass 211 for a embedded antiskid
    tread.

    301,    Land Vehicles: Wheels and Axles, subclass 44.2 for a traction
    increasing projecting cleat made of a resilient material.



    A - Tread member
    B - Metal support member
    C - Mounting apertures
    D, E, F - Composite molded polymeric material
    G - Wear surface


CLS 305/161
TXT With mounting means:

    Apparatus under subclass 160 including the specifics of the attachment
    structure (e.g., clamp, pin, key, interlocking surface) for releasably
    securing a lug, shoe, or grouser.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 455+ for the specifics of the attachment
    structure for releasably securing a tooth or adaptor.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 91+
    for a tooth mounting means.




    A - Grouser plate
    B - Bushing pin
    C - Lock bolt
    D - Bifurcated fastening plate
    E - Resilient bushing
    F, G - Rubberlike tread pad
    H - Support plate
    J - Support plate
    K, L - Grouser plate lips


CLS 305/162
TXT Including threaded fastening means:

    Apparatus under subclass 161 wherein the securing means includes a metal
    collar, having an internal helical ridge, to fit a cylinder core having a
    outer helical ridge of approximately triangular, square, or rounded section
    for holding the tread pad or traction cleat firmly.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 406.1+ for a separate connector,
    fastener, or retainer independently attached to one member.



    A -Track shoe
    B, C - Portions of adjoining track shoes
    D, E - Elastomeric grouser
    F, G - Bolt & nut assembly
    H - Associated link
    J - Projecting rib
    K - Anchor plate (releasably secured)


CLS 305/163
TXT With noncylindrical or hollow connector pin:

    Apparatus under subclass 159 including a bridging member bridging the gap
    between the adjacent track links or including means consisting of parallel
    spaced tubularly formed pivot bearing sleeves extending transversely of the
    track for rigidly connecting the track shoes to the frame members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41+,    for a resilient connector between treads.

    59,     for a metallic noncylindrical or hollow connector pin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclasses 5+ for a sprocket
    chain making; subclasses 84+ for chain links making; and subclass 900 for a
    plastic chain or link making.



    A - Pivot bearing sleeves
    B - Pivot pins
    C - Rubber bushings
    D - Connecting web
    E, F - Rubber block with wheel contacting face
    G, H - Bottom tread shoe with a metal plate "H"
    J - Grouser or cleat
    K - Fastening means for recurring metal
             plate with tread block


CLS 305/164
TXT Including metal sleeve for connector pin:

    Apparatus under subclass 159 wherein a tubular reinforcing core made of a
    ductile material is incorporated within the rubber tread block or track
    shoe to receive a cylindrical metallic piece used for joining the track
    links together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for a torsion bushing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 851+ wherein separate pins
    interconnect links of a carrier belt structure formed of rigid links.



    A - Tubular sleeves adapted to receive link
            pins and elastic bushings
    B, C - End plates brazed or welded to sleeves
    D - Tapped hole in the endplate


    E - Electronic material abuts the track
            wheels
    F, G - Fastening means


CLS 305/165
TXT Track formed of endless flexible belt:

    Apparatus under subclass 157 wherein the continuous ground engaging band is
    formed of a pliant material to permit the band to conform to the
    circumferential curvature of the pulley, wheel, or guide roll.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for a track or tread having a resiliently biased ground engaging
    portion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 9+ for an endless flexible portable
    track.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 100+ for an endless track.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses
    204+ for a positive drive belt wherein the drive surface on the belt is
    formed in or interconnected by a continuous flexible member; and subclass
    253 wherein the belt is formed by interconnecting opposite ends of an
    elongated member.



    A - Drive wheel
    B - Ground supporting wheels
    C - Flexible belt
    D - Belt shoes
    E - Shoe lips


CLS 305/166
TXT Including plural layers of different materials:

    Apparatus under subclass 165 wherein the belt includes at least two strata
    of distinct constituent, the constituent in one of the stratums being

    of distinct chemical or mechanical composition than the constituent in the
    other of the strata.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclass 264
    for a friction drive belt wherein the belt includes at least two distinct
    layers of different or similar composition.


CLS 305/167
TXT With metallic embedded reinforcement:

    Apparatus under subclass 165 including at least one element made of a
    lustrous, fusable, malleable, or ductile material incorporated within the
    flexible belt layer for additional strength.




    A - Top layer           D - Hole to receive     B - Bottom
    layer                         sprocket toothC - Metallic reinforcement  E -
    Flexible belt


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47+,    for a track or tread having sag prevention means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclass 270
    for a friction drive belt wherein the belt is made of a fabric web and
    includes an additional layer of metallic reinforcement.


CLS 305/168
TXT Including clip for snowmobile track:

    Apparatus under subclass 167 wherein the inner surface of the flexible
    traction belt includes a plurality of longitudinally aligned hardened
    elements to form a low friction and reinforced region to contact or receive
    the elongate supporting rails of a snowmobile suspension.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for an elongate slide or frame support.



    A - Traction belt
    B - Sprocket wheel tooth aperture
    C - Projecting studs
    D - Metallic embedded reinforcement
    E - Rubber bonds of traction belt
    F - Additional wear clips


CLS 305/169
TXT Including means for sprocket tooth engagement (e.g., lug, aperture):

    Apparatus under subclass 167 wherein the endless belt includes spaced
    apertures lined with metal reinforcing clips extending through the
    apertures for contacting the pointed projection of the driving wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclass 834 for a carrier belt drive
    means including wheel with radial teeth engaging carrier belt or means
    connected therewith; and subclass 847 for a carrier belt structure
    including separate reinforcing elements.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclass 204
    for a positive drive belt including drive surfaces on the belt formed in or
    interconnected by continuous flexible member.



    A - Endless belt
    B - Tension resistant nonmetallic cord
    C - Metallic reinforcement
    D - Sprocket receiving aperture
    E - Traction surface
    F - Traction lug
    G - Metal clip
    H - Integral clip tabs


CLS 305/170
TXT Reinforcement is endless:

    Apparatus under subclass 167 including at least one metallic cable means
    formed from a continuous length looped around the continuous band track so
    as to form a continuous reinforcing layer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclass 847 for a carrier belt structure
    having separate reinforcing elements.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses
    261+ for a friction drive belt including plural superposed layers each
    having strands particularly oriented relative to the belt dimension.



    A - Endless belt
    B - Traction lugs
    C - Sprocket wheel apertures
    D - Endless reinforcing cable


CLS 305/171
TXT Including core bar reinforcement:

    Apparatus under subclass 170 wherein a plurality of spaced rigid members of
    uniform cross section are embedded extending transversely of the endless
    band.


CLS 305/172
TXT With overlapping core bar sections:

    Apparatus under subclass 171 wherein the rigid member having uniform cross
    section lies or extends partly over or upon an adjacent rigid member.



    A - Endless band
    B - Wire cable reinforcement
    C, D - Overlapping core bars
    E - Bolts for bar
    F - Removable wear member
    G - Integral guide plate
    H - Sprocket wheel
    J - Guide pulleys
    K - Bolts for holding sprocket & pulley together


CLS 305/173
TXT Including sprocket wheel or roller guide lug or projection:

    Apparatus under subclass 171 including an integral piece of uniform cross
    section having an integral protrusion serving both for directing the motion
    of the track on the wheel or roller and for bracing the track against
    transverse movement.



    A - Rubber endless track
    B - Core bar
    C - Core bar wing
    D - Endless embedded reinforcement
    E - Projection
    F, G - Traveling surface
    H - Traveling surface


CLS 305/174
TXT Plural lugs or projections:

    Apparatus under subclass 173 including at least a pair of central
    protrusions formed upright in opposed relationship at predetermined
    intervals in the central area of each core bar.



    A - Rubber belt
    B - Cove bar
    C, D - Pair of central projections
    E - Recess
    F - Sprocket tooth hole
    G - Steel cord reinforcement


CLS 305/175
TXT Including additional reinforcement for sprocket wheel:

    Apparatus under subclass 174 including at least one rib or rectangular
    plate extending upwardly from the core body between the protrusions and
    oriented perpendicularly to the protrusions for increasing the core bar
    strength in the area of engagement with the toothed wheel.



    A - Core body
    B - Rubber crawler
    C - Crawler body
    D - Steel cable reinforcement
    E - Pair of core protrusions
    F - Rib reinforcement
    G - Drive tumbler
    H - Sprocket teeth
    J - Outer rollers


CLS 305/176
TXT Portion of resilient belt overlaps core bar (e.g., roller engagement
    surface):

    Apparatus under subclass 170 wherein the area of the rigid member which
    supports the roller is embedded in the endless belt material.


CLS 305/177
TXT Including core bar reinforcement:

    Apparatus under subclass 167 wherein a plurality of spaced rigid members of
    uniform cross section are embedded extending transversely of the endless
    band.


CLS 305/178
TXT With integral grouser:

    Apparatus under subclass 165 including a plurality of stiffening members
    embedded in the body of the endless belt extending transversely across the
    width of the belt at least substantially at a right angle to the
    longitudinal direction to implant transverse rigidity to the belt and
    increase traction with the ground.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for an interposed friction drive belt.



    A - Belt track
    B - Belt body of elastomeric material
    C - Flat inner drive-contacting surface
    D - Ground-contacting traction surface
    E - Integral transverse grouser
    F - Lateral belt raised portion
    G - Sprocket teeth openings


CLS 305/179
TXT With reinforcement in or at grouser formation:

    Apparatus under subclass 178 including a cast-in metal beam or a separate
    metal beam or similar element provided adjacent the transverse rib portion
    to further increase the strength of the traction belt in the area of the
    grouser formation.



    A - Transverse stiffener
    B - Flexible track
    C - Reinforcement
    D - Stiffener perforations
    E - Traction element
    F - Transverse tread bar
    G - Track tensile
    H - Transverse reinforcement sections
    J - Drive means
    K - Longitudinal groove
    L, M - Tab with wear resistance surface
    N - Track inner surface


CLS 305/180
TXT With removable lug or grouser:

    Apparatus under subclass 165 including a plurality of separable or
    changeable stiffening members extending transversely across the width of
    the belt at least substantially at a right angle to the longitudinal
    direction to impart transverse rigidity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    187+,   for a detachable grouser for an endless chain track.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclass 698 for a load-engaging belt
    having load-impelling projecting cross members joined by mechanical
    fastening means.



    A - Flexible track
    B - Reinforced rubber belt
    C - Transverse grouser (removable)
    D - Skid contraction lug
    E - Drive lugs


CLS 305/181
TXT Grouser connects plural adjacent belts:

    Apparatus under subclass 165 wherein the stiffening member links together
    more than one parallel endless bands in the transverse direction.



    A - Endless track
    B - Parallel rubber belts
    C - Grouser bar assembly
    D - Inner belt surface
    E - Opposed belt outer edges
    F - Outer grouser bar member
    G - Spaced belt inside edges
    H - Grouser mounting means


CLS 305/182
TXT Including discrete connector to connect opposite belt ends:

    Apparatus under subclass 165 including a distinct element for joining the
    two distal ends of the continuous ground engaging band to create an endless
    loop.


CLS 305/183
TXT With connecting means for reinforcing elements:

    Apparatus under subclass 157 including means for joining the adjacent ends
    of elongated strengthening elements imbedded in nonmetallic parts of the
    flexible track.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167+,   for a flexible track made of nonmetallic material and provided with
    embedded metallic reinforcing elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 846+ for an endless conveyor
    belt structure including separate reinforcing elements.


CLS 305/184
TXT With friction drive structure:

    Apparatus under subclass 157 wherein the belt configuration includes a
    motion transmitting surface or surfaces for motion transmitting engagement
    with a pulley or drive wheel by motion resisting contact with the pulley or
    drive wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 844.1+ for a conveyor belt
    structure.

    301,    Land Vehicles: Wheels and Axles, subclasses 43+ for a friction
    increasing projecting cleat.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclass 167
    for a friction drive belt in combination with a friction drive pulley or
    guide roll; and subclasses 237+ for a friction drive belt.


CLS 305/185
TXT TRACKS OR TREADS:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising an annular band made either
    of a single piece of flexible material or of a plurality of individual
    sections movably connected together.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclasses 78+ for a chain of
    general utility.

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 850+ for a conveyor belt formed
    of or including pivotally interconnected rigid links.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses
    206+ for a positive drive belt formed of rigid links.


CLS 305/186
TXT Having master link:

    Apparatus under subclass 185 wherein a pivotable connecting piece for
    connecting the endless track shoes includes two-piece part, each piece part
    being adapted to receive a pin and having a mating surface to couple and
    interlock with that of the other piece part and wherein the respective
    mating surfaces of the two pieces define a juncture of the master track
    link and each has an interlocking contact surface, these surfaces coacting
    to resist tensile force and thrust force exerted on the connecting piece at
    the pin connection of each piece part.

    (1)     Note. Master link is the first link removed so that the track can
    be disassembled and the last to be assembled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclass 85 for a detachable
    chain link.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclass 294 wherein the member ends are
    joined by a laterally inserted section.



    A - Track shoe
    B - Master link
    C - Track pin
    D - Bushing
    E, F - Two-piece parts of master link
    G, H - Mating surfaces of link part E and F


CLS 305/187
TXT With detachable grouser for endless chain track:

    Apparatus under subclass 185 including a separable lateral ground
    penetrating cleat, stiffener, or projection for a continuous track for
    increasing traction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for a track or tread with a street plate.

    160+,   for a lug, shoe, or grouser structure for a nonmetallic endless
    belt.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 91+ for a blade movable with respect to
    the cyclically driven carrier; subclass 100 for a blade on an endless
    driven belt or chain.

    301,    Land Vehicles: Wheels and Axles, subclasses 43+ for a traction
    increasing removably attached projecting cleat.



    A - Track assembly
    B - Link assemblies
    C - Interconnected links
    D - Connector pin
    E - Cylindrical bushing
    F - Grouser plate
    G - Track shoe
    H - Mounting holes


CLS 305/188
TXT Including additional locking means to eliminate stress concentration:


    Apparatus under subclass 187 including further distinct holding means or
    particular configuration of the separable ground-engaging cleat which
    receives force and prevents excessive force on the cleat-fastening means.


CLS 305/189
TXT Including nonmetallic part or component:

    Apparatus under subclass 187 including a pad or block made of high strength
    rubber or other elastomeric material to reduce noise or vibration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    301,    Land Vehicles: Wheels and Axles, subclass 44.2 for a traction
    increasing projecting cleat made of resilient material.



    A - Grouser plate
    B - Track (endless)
    C - Extended end connector  (outboard side)
    D - End connector (inboard side)
    R - Flange portion
    F - Grouser base portion
    G - Grouser bracket
    H - Bolt aperture
    J - Nonmetallic block
    K - Flotation plate


CLS 305/190
TXT Reversible:

    Apparatus under subclass 187 wherein the grouser plate or the track shoe is
    rearranged to provide a new and unused ground-engaging or sprocket engaging
    bearing surfaces.



    A - Connector pin
    B - Bushing
    C - Track  link
    D - Track link upper surface
    E - Track link lower surface
    F, G  - Grouser plate with mounting bosser
    H, J - Track shoes with mounting aperture
    K - Fastening means

    Note:  Grouser plate F and truck shoe H are
             interchanged at surface E and D.


CLS 305/191
TXT Grouser structure, per se:

    Apparatus under subclass 187 wherein the significance is attributed to the
    shape or components of the projecting cleat or shoe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for a one-piece track tread.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    301,    Land Vehicles, Wheels and Axles, subclasses 44.3 and 44.4 for a
    traction increasing projecting cleat removably attached to a rim or to a
    wheel body.



    A - Grouser bar
    B - Base of the bar
    C - Bolt apertures
    D - Forward planner service
    E - Rearward planner service
    F - Elongated track traction portion
    G - Bearing surface
    H - Curved edges
    J - End surface


CLS 305/192
TXT Specific material (e.g., hardness, welding, method of manufacture):

    Apparatus under subclass 191 wherein the significance is attributed to the
    particular property or type of the basic matter from which the grouser
    plate is made (e.g., resistance to cutting, indentation or abrasion,
    process of making, process of joining the grouser plates).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 141.1+ for the process of fusion
    bonding including shaping; and subclasses 173.1+ for the process of shaping
    by deforming prior to bonding.


CLS 305/193
TXT With guide means for interfitting with sprocket wheel or roller:

    Apparatus under subclass 185 including a contrivance having a directing
    edge, surface, channel, or projection placed face-to-face with the toothed
    wheel or a hollow flanged drum or a device usually made of metal and
    attached to the track shoe for engaging the drive wheel or the idler wheels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48+,    for a truss-type tread provided with means adapted to interfit with
    a supporting wheel.

    126,    wherein the intermediate support includes wheel contacting upper
    and lower track runs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclass 840 for a support, guide, or hold
    down means for a carrier belt wherein the guide exerts a lateral force on a
    non-load supporting belt surface.

    301,    Land Vehicles: Wheels and Axles, subclasses 1+ for a combined wheel
    and axle modification including cushioned lateral thrust.



    A, B - Lateral guide elements
    C, D, E, F -  Endless belt
    G - Track bar
    H - Cleat or projection
    J - Flank coincides with drive roller flank
    K - Drive roller
    L - Drive roller flank



    A - Guide assembly
    B - Guide section
    C - Drive section


CLS 305/194
TXT Track wheel wear protection (e.g., track element protection):

    Apparatus under subclass 193 including usually a guard ring to serve as a
    guard for the track tire against contact with the guide lugs and to protect
    against the deterioration due to frictional contact.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses
    190+ for a friction drive pulley or guide roll including a nonmetallic
    belt-engaging surface portion.



    A, B - Wheel  rim
    C - Tire
    D, E, F - Wear protective rings
    G - Guiding tooth
    H - Track chain


CLS 305/195
TXT Sprocket and track engagement:

    Apparatus under subclass 193 wherein the cooperating interengaging means to
    retain track and toothed wheel in position includes an inwardly extending
    lug or guiding mandrel or guiding jaws adapted to be received by the wheel
    tooth spaces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 443 for rotary bodies with
    sound-deadening means.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 9.62 for an endless flexible toothed wheel
    drive; subclass 192 for plural endless tracks with interconnected drive or
    support means.

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclass 834 for an endless conveyor
    including wheel with a radial teeth-engaging carrier belt.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 28.5 for wheeled substitute for a land
    vehicle.



    A - Sprocket wheel
    B - Endless track
    C - Spaced aperture (for tooth)
    D - Sprocket tooth
    E - Interconnected chain eye pieces
    F - Underside of track plate
    G - Projecting lugs
    H - Groove to fit toothed width
    J - Additional lugs (underside of track plate)


CLS 305/196
TXT Track formed of rigid links:

    Apparatus under subclass 195 wherein the continuous ground engaging band is
    formed of inflexible components connected with each other by articulated
    joints presenting profiled supporting surfaces to permit relative movement
    of the components so that the band is capable of conforming to the
    curvature of the sprocket drive face.

    (1)     Note. The rigid links are configured to receive the sprocket wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159+,   for an endless track formed of rigid nonmetallic links.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses
    155+ for an endless belt formed of rigid links.



    A - Rigid link
    B - Traveling mechanism plate
    C, D - Nonskid slipproof studs
    E - Face engages with sprocket wheel tooth face
    F - Recess to make link lighter


CLS 305/197
TXT Having nonmetallic part or component (e.g., at area of engagement):

    Apparatus under subclass 196 including an impact pad or block made of
    rubber or other elastomeric material to reduce noise, vibration, or wear
    caused by the engagement of the sprocket and the inflexible components.

    (1)     Note. The resilient impact lug reduces track noise and wear due to
    metal-to-metal impact of the track against the sprocket wheel. The initial
    contact is made by the lug so that the impact energy is absorbed prior to
    engagement of the track bushings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189,    for a detachable grouser for an endless chain track having a
    nonmetallic part or component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Device, subclasses 292+ for a elastomeric vehicle spring
    device.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclass 161
    for a positive drive pulley or guide roll having a nonmetallic part; and
    subclass 207 for a positive drive belt formed of rigid links including a
    nonmetallic part.



    A - Drive sprocket
    B - Notches
    C - Bushings
    D - Track pins
    E - Track shoe
    F - Nonmetallic part
    G - Fastening means
    H - Mounting strip


CLS 305/198
TXT Link or shoe structure, per se:

    Apparatus under subclass 196 wherein the significance is attributed to the
    shape or configuration of the inflexible component or the traction plate.



    A - Track line
    B - Connector pin bores
    C - Removable vail
    D, E - Weldments
    F, G - Cross bores to avoid stress


CLS 305/199
TXT Sprocket wheel structure, per se:

    Apparatus under subclass 195 wherein the significance is attributed to the
    shape or configuration of the toothed wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses
    152+ for a positive drive pulley or guide roll; subclasses 184+ for a
    pulley or guide roll having plural, discrete belts; subclass 901 for a
    pulley or guide roll structure for the track of an endless track vehicle.



    A - Sprocket wheel rim
    B, C, D - Wheel teeth
    E - Relief or vent openings
    F - Openings to reduce weight


CLS 305/200
TXT Track formed of rigid links:

    Apparatus under subclass 193 wherein the continuous band for vehicle having
    a drive wheel or roller consists of a plurality of individual inflexible
    components located adjacent to one another and forming a broad band and
    being held together at short distances from one another by transverse ribs
    or plates.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196+,   for a sprocket wheel track formed of rigid links.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 6.7 for an endless flexible track; and
    subclass 9.44 for an endless flexible portable track with steering means.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses
    155+ for a belt formed of rigid links adapted for a positive drive pulley
    or guide roll.



    A - Endless belt tread
    B - Link chain
    C - Transverse tread plate
    D - Alternate links
    E - Grooves for tread plate
    F - Connector links
    G - Semicylindrical guide members
    H - Grouser or projecting cleat
    T1, T2 - Drive wheels or drive rollers


CLS 305/201
TXT Link or shoe structure, per se:

    Apparatus under subclass 200 wherein the significance is attributed to the
    shape or configuration of the inflexible component or the traction plate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198,    for a link or shoe structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    59,     Chain, Staple and Horseshoe Making, subclass 35.1 for a chain blank
    and a process of making.



    A - Link pin
    B - Link
    C - Sleeve
    D - Threaded  plug
    E - Shoe
    F - Shoe guide
    G - Tire or wheel


CLS 305/202
TXT Separate transverse connector pin between treads:

    Apparatus under subclass 185 wherein the joint between the track shoes
    includes a cylindrical element engaging adjacent shoes and extending
    horizontally to the direction of travel of the track.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for track treads provided with rubber torsion bushings for
    receiving a connector pin.

    47+,    for a flexible track provided with sag prevention means, and
    wherein the individual treads are interconnected by means of a horizontally
    extending transverse connector pin.

    53,     for one-piece track treads connected together by means of a
    separate transverse connector pin.

    105     and 106, wherein the track treads are interconnected by means of a
    separate pin and provided with means to seal the connection against the
    entry of the dirt.

    118,    for a lubrication passage in the pin.

    164,    for rubber treads provided with embedded transverse connector pins
    receiving bushings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 259 for a discrete retaining means
    for pivoted contacting surfaces.

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 891.1 for a method of making a part of a
    traction apparatus.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclass 222
    for a rigid link belt including threaded connection between the pin and the
    locking member; and subclasses 228+ for a discrete connector extending
    through laterally aligned apertures in adjacent links.



    A, B, C - (Inside-Outside) Link members
    D, E - Intermediate link members
    F - Transverse connector pin
    G - Sleeve or bushing


CLS 305/203
TXT Including nonmetallic part or component:

    Apparatus under subclass 202 wherein the cylindrical element includes as a
    component thereof an element made of an elastomeric material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for track treads provided with rubber torsion bushings.


CLS 305/204
TXT Including additional locking member for retaining link connectors (e.g.,
    pin connectors):

    Apparatus under subclass 202 further including a connecting device such as
    a clamp for joining adjacent connecting pins.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclass 7 for sprocket chain
    link assembling.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 345+ for various interfitted
    members, especially subclasses 373+ for clamped members.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses
    220+ wherein the common locking member retains longitudinally spaced
    connectors.



    A -Link connector pin
    B, C, D, E - Clamps
    F - Locking screw
    G - Drive wheel
    H - Path of travel

              CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTION


CLS 305/900
TXT MASTER LINK:

    Cross reference art collection drawn to links used to join the free ends
    of, and thereby complete the formation of, an endless track.


CLS 307/
TTL ELECTRICAL TRANSMISSION OR  INTERCONNECTION SYSTEMS

CLS 307/
TXT This is the residual class for all subject matter, not elsewhere
    classified, relating to electrical transmission or interconnection systems.

    (1)     Note.  This class was produced in 1953 by making official the
    unofficial digests which have been established by the examiners of Division
    26 during the period from about 1900 onwards.  A caveat is given: while it
    is believed that the titles and definitions are reasonably accurate, no
    assurance can be given that all the patents, issued prior to the date of
    reclassification, are in the proper subclass since only some of these
    patents were read during the reclassification project. Consequently, in
    making a thorough search in this class, it is advisable to investigate
    every subclass which may possibly be pertinent and not, in order to shorten
    the search, to rely upon the principle of superiority of subject matter
    because of position in the schedule, since that principle is applicable
    only in classes where each patent has been analyzed and placed in the
    schedule in accordance with that portion of the disclosed subject matter
    which is claimed.

    (2)     Note.  Since Class 307 takes, under the class definition, only
    subject matter relating to electrical transmission or interconnection
    systems not elsewhere classified, its scope can be determined only by
    determining the scope of other related classes, which classes are listed
    below under Search Class.  Also consult the search notes and definitions of
    these classes.

    (3)     Note.  Many mechanical classes containing electrical disclosures,
    as where a machine has, as part thereof, some electrical features, such as
    controls. Consequently, in appropriate instances, the search must extend to
    the class or classes which relate to the environment in which the
    electrical disclosure might be found.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, subclasses 600+ for electric organs having interconnection
    and switching systems.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, appropriate subclasses,
    for the physical structure of conductors. Also note subclasses 2+ for
    lightning rod systems and subclasses 5+ for systems for protecting people
    and animals from electric shock hazard.

    178,    Telegraphy, appropriate subclasses, for telegraph systems.

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, for systems for
    distributing electricity between a stationary point and a movable vehicle.
    Note particularly subclasses 2+.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses,
    for electric switches and circuit breakers.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclasses, for
    electric systems utilized in electro-chemical apparatus, such as
    electrolytic and cathode sputtering apparatus.

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses
    482+ for electric systems utilized in electric heating and welding.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, appropriate subclasses, for electric
    circuits utilized in railway switches and signals.

    250,    Radiant Energy, appropriate subclasses, for the detection of
    nuclear or invisible electromagnetic radiation, the testing of material by
    nuclear or invisible electromagnetic radiation, infrared or thermal
    document barriers, fluorescent and phosphorescent applications, invisible
    radiant energy generation controlling means and supports for tested
    material radiation sources and radiation detectors.

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants, appropriate subclasses, for electric
    circuits utilized in prime mover dynamo plants.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, appropriate subclasses,
    for the physical structure of electric generators and motors and
    electromagnetic clutches and for the circuits that relate to
    electromagnetic clutches.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses, for
    the physical structure of electric lamp and discharge devices, per se.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Consumable Electrodes, for
    arc lamp circuits.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for cathode rays tube circuits and electric lamp and space
    discharge device circuits.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    electric circuits utilized in electric motor systems.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass for a battery or capacitor charging or discharging
    circuit.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    circuits utilized in single generator systems.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, appropriate
    subclasses, for circuits utilized in voltage magnitude and phase control
    systems.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for
    circuits utilized in electrical measuring, testing and sensing systems.

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, appropriate subclasses for an
    electronic digital logic circuit.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous active device nonlinear
    circuits.

    332,    Modulators, appropriate subclasses for modulating systems.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, appropriate subclasses for
    transmission lines and networks, utilized in communications.

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, appropriate subclasses for magnetically operated switches
    and circuit breakers.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, appropriate subclasses for
    miscellaneous signaling systems.

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), appropriate subclasses for radio wave energy
    communication systems and antennas.

    346,    Recorders, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 33+ for
    systems utilized with recorders.

    348,    Television, appropriate subclasses for television systems.

    358,    Facsimile, appropriate subclasses for facsimile systems.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, appropriate
    subclasses for miscellaneous electrical systems.  Note subclasses 1+ for
    safety and protective systems, and and subclasses 139+ for control circuits
    for electromagnetic devices.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    circuits utilized in electric conversion systems.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 130+
    for generic data processing control systems; subclass 600 for electric
    hybrid computers; subclass 700 for electric digital calculating computers;
    and subclass 800 for electric analog.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 185.01+ for
    floating gate memory storage (e.g., flash memory), subclass 73 for
    recirculation of information in a storage read/write system, subclass 78
    for plural shift register memory devices, subclass 80 for magnetic shift
    register, per se, subclasses 129+ for storage systems using a particular
    storage element, subclasses 189.01+ for read/write circuits peculiar to a
    storage and retrieval system, and subclass 230 for addressing circuits
    peculiar to a storage and retrieval system.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for multiplexing
    systems.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 70, 102+, 135+,
    and 147 for electric furnaces having significant electrical circuits.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, for electrical pulse counters, dividers and shift
    registers.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 91+ for circuits
    combined with X-ray devices.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, appropriate subclasses, for telephone
    systems.

    386,    Television Signal Processing for Dynamic Recording or Reproducing,
    appropriate subclasses for television recording systems.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, for digital data
    processing systems, per se, including subclasses 101+ for data
    presentation, subclasses 180+ for reliability and availability in digital
    processing systems, subclasses 326+ for computer operator interface,
    subclasses 500+ for circuit design systems, and subclass 898 for byte level
    interactions.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    appropriate subclasses, for circuits utilized in the manufacture or repair
    of electric lamp or electric space discharge devices.


CLS 307/1
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to systems having a
    common portion in which unlike currents flow or unlike potentials exist.

    (1)     Note.  One of the currents, for example, may be a direct current
    while the other current, for example, may be a pulse current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 49 for telegraphy having plural different
    types of currents superimposed upon a common circuit.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 69, 84, 124+, 147, and 295 for amplifier
    systems involving plural signal input signal sources which may be
    superimposed.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, appropriate subclasses for
    miscellaneous communication systems having means for superimposing upon a
    common circuit plural types of current. Note particularly subclasses 288,
    531+, 693, 870.07, 870.11+, and 870.15.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for multiplex
    systems.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 66 and 90+ for telephone
    systems having means for superimposing upon a single circuit plural types
    of current.


CLS 307/2
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 having means for supplying alternating and
    direct currents.

    (1)     Note.  The alternating and direct current, for example, may be the
    superimposed unlike currents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22      and 26, for this subject matter.


CLS 307/3
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 in which the superimposed unlike currents
    have different frequencies or phase.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for similar subject matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, subclasses 600+, especially subclasses 600+ for electric
    organs having means for superimposing currents of different frequency upon
    a common circuit.

    332,    Modulators, appropriate subclasses for systems for introducing
    frequency components by a modulation process.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 1+, 39+, and 157+ for
    electric power conversion systems having means to introduce or to eliminate
    certain frequency components.


CLS 307/4
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 in which the superimposed unlike currents
    are currents of different voltage.

    (1)     Note.  One current, for example, may be the current from a source
    of constant voltage while the other current, for example, may be a current
    from a source of adjustable voltage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for similar subject matter.

    43+,    for this subject matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 98+ for systems for
    measuring voltage by balancing an unknown voltage against a known voltage
    in a common circuit.


CLS 307/5
TXT Subject matter under subclass 4 in which the different voltages are
    connected in series opposition to a voltage which has undesired variations,
    so as to produce a resultant output which is constant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    220-354, inclusive, for this subject matter.


CLS 307/6
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5 having plural converters.

    (1)     Note.  The plural converters, for example, may be the plural
    sources of series connected voltages.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    conversion systems for converting electricity, obtained from a single
    source and having a single output.


CLS 307/7
TXT Subject matter under subclass 6 having an induction transformer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 247,
    301, 305, and 328 for transformer systems.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for the structure of
    transformers and inductive reactors.


CLS 307/8
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5 having plural generators.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84      and 153, for this subject matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants, appropriate subclasses for electric
    generator systems having significant prime mover features.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    systems having a single generator.


CLS 307/9.1
TXT VEHICLE MOUNTED SYSTEMS:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising systems of electrical
    distribution mounted in vehicles.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, systems for
    distributing electric power along the length of a train made up of cars
    which can be coupled or uncoupled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclasses 277+ for an elevator car control having an electrical component
    and subclass 413 for an electrical service line connection to an elevator
    car or an arrangement of such an electrical service line.

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, subclass 2 for systems
    having significant means for distributing electricity between a stationary
    supply and a moving vehicle.

    213,    Railway Draft Appliances, subclasses 1.3+ for combined couplers and
    electrical connectors for use in railway vehicles.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, appropriate subclasses for train
    mounted systems utilized in connection with signalling or track switching.
    Note particularly subclasses 64+ and 166.1.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 77+ for
    miscellaneous vehicle mounted systems having lamps or space discharge
    devices.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass for a charging system for a vehicular battery.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 425.5+ for signalling
    systems utilized in vehicles.


CLS 307/10.1
TXT Automobile:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.1 in which the vehicle is specifically a
    motor vehicle (i.e., an automobile).


CLS 307/10.2
TXT Antitheft:

    Subject matter under subclass 10.1 including systems or devices which
    prevent unauthorized entry or use of an automobile.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 287+ for antitheft systems which prevent
    unauthorized use by controlling one or more systems during operation of the
    vehicle, as by:  (1) application of the brakes, (2) stoppage of the fuel
    supply, or (3) opening of the ignition circuit in response to a timer.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 426+ for alarms or
    indicators activated in response to an attempt at unauthorized entry or use
    of a vehicle.


CLS 307/10.3
TXT Ignition or starting circuit lock:

    Subject matter under subclass 10.2 in which the antitheft device prevents
    activation of the ignition or starting circuits of an automobile.


CLS 307/10.4
TXT Manual code input (e.g., push button):

    Subject matter under subclass 10.3 in which a plurality of manually
    operable coded push buttons are provided to activate the ignition or
    starting circuit of an automobile.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 171 for
    electrical systems and devices having a relay or solenoid activated by code
    pulses.


CLS 307/10.5
TXT Coded record input (e.g., IC card):

    Subject matter under subclass 10.3 in which the ignition or starting system
    of an automobile is activated in response to the insertion of a coded
    record (such as a magnetic or integrated circuit card) into an appropriate
    reading device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, appropriate subclasses for coded record responsive
    systems, per se.


CLS 307/10.6
TXT Ignition or starter circuits:

    Subject matter under subclass 10.1 including circuits which supply
    electrical power to a starter motor or to an ignition system of an
    automobile.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, appropriate subclasses for ignition
    systems or starting devices which activate internal-combustion engines.


CLS 307/10.7
TXT Battery protection:

    Subject matter under subclass 10.1 including device for protecting a
    battery of an automobile.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 636 for battery condition
    responsive indicating systems.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    other means to provide for the safety and protection of electrical systems
    and devices.


CLS 307/10.8
TXT Lighting circuits:

    Subject matter under subclass 10.1 including circuits for supplying
    electrical power to the various illuminating lamps of an automobile.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for systems which supply electrical power to lamp and discharge
    devices and which include recitation of the actual device.  Note
    particularly subclasses 76+ for vehicle head light systems having the lamp
    as a part thereof.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 425.5+ for vehicle lighting
    circuits used for signalling purposes.


CLS 307/11
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to systems having plural
    load circuits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 43 for overhead
    wire distributing systems having means for establishing branch connections.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for systems having plural cathode ray tubes, plural gas
    discharge devices or plural lamps.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 34+ for systems
    having plural electric motors.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous systems employing plural
    space discharge active elements.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 73, 84, 124+, 148, and 295 for amplifier
    circuits having plural loads.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 1+ for plural
    channel systems utilized in communications.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclass 92 for X-ray
    electrical systems having plural X-ray tubes.


CLS 307/12
TXT Subject matter under subclass 11 in which the plural load circuits have a
    common conductor or a common return.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to three wire direct
    current systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 112+ and 126
    for balancer sets, per se.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 202 for
    balancer set systems.


CLS 307/13
TXT Subject matter under subclass 12 relating to polyphase systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 137+ for
    polyphase systems for energizing space discharge devices or lamps.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for voltage control polyphase systems.  Note section VIII,
    subsection B of the class definition for a statement of the line between
    polyphase voltage control systems to be found in Class 323 and elsewhere.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 1+ and 148+ for phase
    conversion systems for converting one number of phases to another number of
    phases.


CLS 307/14
TXT Subject matter under subclass 13 relating to phase balancing systems for
    polyphase circuits.


CLS 307/15
TXT Subject matter under subclass 12 having plural loads connected in series.

    (1)     Note.  The system, for example, may be provided with means to
    control the voltage drop across the two loads in a certain ratio.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 185+ for
    serially connected plural space discharge device or lamp systems, such as
    constant current systems.


CLS 307/16
TXT Subject matter under subclass 12 having plural output generators.

    (1)     Note.  A single generator, for example, may have plural windings,
    some of which supply one output circuit and some of which supply another
    output circuit.


CLS 307/17
TXT Subject matter under subclass 11 relating to transformer connections.

    (1)     Note.  The subclass relates, for example, to transformer systems
    wherein a transformer has plural outputs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 215,
    247, 301, 305, 328, and 355 for transformer systems.


CLS 307/18
TXT Subject matter under subclass 11 having plural sources of supply for the
    plural load circuits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 105+ for plural
    motor systems having plural sources of supply.


CLS 307/19
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 having means for interconnecting the
    plural sources of supply in such manner that energy may be transferred from
    one source of supply to another source of supply.


CLS 307/20
TXT Subject matter under subclass 19 having means to control the magnitude of
    the energy which is transferred between one source of supply and another
    source of supply.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems.


CLS 307/21
TXT Subject matter under subclass 19 having diverse sources of energy supply.

    (1)     Note.  The diverse sources, for example, may be two alternating
    current transmission systems of different frequency which are not
    interconnected otherwise than by the circuits related to the subject matter
    of the subclass.


CLS 307/22
TXT Subject matter under subclass 21 in which the diverse sources of supply are
    sources of alternating current and direct current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2       and 26, for this subject matter.


CLS 307/23
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 having a substitute or an alternate source
    of energy.

    (1)     Note.  This substitute or alternate source of energy, for example,
    may be a standby generator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64+,    for this subject matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 3 for plural channel
    communication systems having means to automatically substitute one channel
    for another.


CLS 307/24
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 having means to control the magnitude of
    power or current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     55+ and 62, for this subject matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, for single source
    systems.


CLS 307/25
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 in which the plural sources of supply are
    diverse.


CLS 307/26
TXT Subject matter under subclass 25 in which the two sources of supply are AC
    and DC sources.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2       and 22, for this subject matter.


CLS 307/27
TXT Subject matter under subclass 25 in which the diverse sources of energy
    have different frequencies.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for this subject matter.


CLS 307/28
TXT Subject matter under subclass 25 in which the diverse source of supply have
    different voltages.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4+,     for this subject matter.


CLS 307/29
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 having means for selectively connecting
    either the plural loads or the plural sources.

    (1)     Note.  The loads or sources, for example, may be selectively
    connected in accordance with the magnitude of the power being drawn.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38+,    for this subject matter.

    125+,   for switching systems responsive to  an electric condition.


CLS 307/30
TXT Subject matter under subclass 11 having means to prevent coupling between
    one load circuit and another load circuit due to the internal impedance of
    a common source.

    (1)     Note.  The anticoupling means may, for example, be means for tuning
    the two load circuits to a certain condition of resonance to prevent
    coupling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 32+ for
    electric conductors having means to prevent inductive effects between
    adjacent circuits.  Also consult the search notes to these subclasses for
    related art.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 1+, especially
    subclasses 4+ for plural channel communication systems having means to
    prevent coupling between circuits.


CLS 307/31
TXT Subject matter under subclass 11 having means to control current or power.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to voltage regulated
    power supplies having plural outputs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 294+ for
    this subject matter when the plural loads are space discharge or lamp
    devices.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for miscellaneous means for regulating power in a single circuit.


CLS 307/32
TXT Subject matter under subclass 31 relating to the proportioning or dividing
    of the load current between plural load circuits.

    (1)     Note.  Means may be provided, for example, to keep the load current
    in one circuit constant as the load current in another circuit fluctuates.


CLS 307/33
TXT Subject matter under subclass 31 relating to means for keeping the current
    or power constant in magnitude.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to systems wherein a
    useful load is replaced by a dummy load, of equal size, when the useful
    load is no longer desired, so that the magnitude of power drawn from the
    line is constant.


CLS 307/34
TXT Subject matter under subclass 33 in which the constant magnitude control is
    achieved by controlling one or more of the load circuits.


CLS 307/35
TXT Subject matter under subclass 31 having means to limit the amount of energy
    drawn in any circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125+,   for this subject matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    220-354 for current or load regulation systems for regulating a load in a
    single circuit.


CLS 307/36
TXT Subject matter under subclass 11 relating to serially connected load
    circuits.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to systems having plural
    load circuits connected in series across a constant voltage source with
    means to insure that the voltage drop across any of the load circuits does
    not become excessive when the load in other circuits fluctuates.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for this subject matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, subclass 11 for similar
    systems wherein plural vehicles are connected in series.


CLS 307/37
TXT Subject matter under subclass 36 relating to selective series parallel
    connections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 111 for plural
    electric motors connected in series-parallel arrangements.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 346 for
    plural transformer systems wherein the transformers are connected in
    series-parallel.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825+ for miscellaneous
    selective control systems.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 191+ for
    selectively controlled relay circuits.


CLS 307/38
TXT Subject matter under subclass 11 relating to selectively connected or
    controlled load circuits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 292 for
    plural lamp or discharge device systems controlled by a manually operated
    keyboard or pattern controlled regulator, and subclasses 313+ for plural
    load device, plural lamp or discharge device systems having an electric
    switch in the supply circuit.  Note especially indented subclasses 314+ for
    preselectable switching systems.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 101+ for plural
    channel systems utilized in communications having branched circuits with
    means to effect switching of the branched circuits.


CLS 307/39
TXT Subject matter under subclass 38 automatically responsive to a condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86+     and 116+, for this subject matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 2+ for plural
    channel communication systems having means which are automatically
    responsive to a condition.


CLS 307/40
TXT Subject matter under subclass 38 in which the selectively connected or
    controlled load circuits are responsive to a code.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825+ for miscellaneous code
    responsive circuits.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 171+ for
    code responsive control systems for electromagnetic devices.


CLS 307/41
TXT Subject matter under subclass 38 having means for sequentially or
    alternatingly connecting load circuits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 323 for
    sequential starting of a plurality of lamps or space discharge devices.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 102 for sequential or
    alternate starting and/or stopping of plural electric motors.


CLS 307/42
TXT Subject matter under subclass 11 relating to circuit arrangements or
    layouts with respect to geographic territory.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to systems for
    distributing electric power along the length of a railway and, for example,
    to systems for distributing electric power along and across a grid.


CLS 307/43
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to plural supply
    circuits or sources.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18+,    for this subject matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 105+ for plural
    electric motor supply systems having plural or diverse sources and
    subclasses 123+, 248 and 440+ for single electric motor systems having
    plural sources of supply.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 69, 84, 124+, 147, and 295 for amplifier
    systems with plural input signal sources.


CLS 307/44
TXT Subject matter under subclass 43 in which one source floats across or
    compensates for voltage fluctuations in another source.


CLS 307/45
TXT Subject matter under subclass 44 having an electric conversion device
    intervening between one of the sources of power and the load.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to systems having a
    flywheel energy storage type source of power floating between the ultimate
    source of power and the load.


CLS 307/46
TXT Subject matter under subclass 45 in which the intervening converter is a
    storage battery.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48+,    for this subject matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 86+ for
    electric lamp and discharge device systems having means to automatically
    substitute one power supply for another, and subclasses 160+ for electric
    lamp and discharge device systems having plural power supplies.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass for a charging system for a vehicular battery.


CLS 307/47
TXT Subject matter under subclass 44 in which one of the energy sources is a
    dynamo electric type source.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to systems having a
    floating motor-dynamo which has a massive inertia type flywheel.


CLS 307/48
TXT Subject matter under subclass 44 having a storage battery or accumulator
    type source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for this subject matter.

    66,     for standby storage battery systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 86+ for
    electric lamp and discharge device systems having means for automatically
    substituting one power supply for another and subclasses 160+ for electric
    lamp and discharge device systems having plural power supplies.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass for a charging system for a vehicular battery.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 88 for single
    generator systems having a battery source of excitation voltage.


CLS 307/49
TXT Subject matter under subclass 48 having an auxiliary source of voltage
    connected in series with the storage battery.

    (1)     Note.  The subclass relates, for example, to systems having a main
    source of energy in the form of a battery with an auxiliary source
    connected in series therewith to act as a booster or voltage regulator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass for a charging system for a vehicular battery.


CLS 307/50
TXT Subject matter under subclass 48 having means for changing the taps of the
    cells, so that a variable number of cells are in the circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass for battery charging or discharging, especially
    subclasses 116+ for various series/parallel arrangements of cells or
    batteries.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 255
    and 340 for transformer tap changing systems.


CLS 307/51
TXT Subject matter under subclass 43 relating to circuits for controlling or
    preventing circulating currents which travel between the several supply
    circuits or sources.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to systems having an
    equalizing bus to prevent circulating currents between several generators
    in parallel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for this subject matter.


CLS 307/52
TXT Subject matter under subclass 43 having means to control the load current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for systems for controlling the current or load in a single
    circuit supplied by a single source.


CLS 307/53
TXT Subject matter under subclass 52 relating to the control of the division of
    load between plural sources.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 88 for dynamic
    breaking systems having means to divide the load upon plural motors during
    their period of acting as brake generators.


CLS 307/54
TXT Subject matter under subclass 53 relating to the control of the load
    division between serially connected generators.

    (1)     Note.  The field of one generator, for example, may be connected
    across the armature of another generator which is in series with the first
    generator.


CLS 307/55
TXT Subject matter under subclass 53 in which the load current division is in a
    fixed or predetermined ratio.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for similar subject matter.


CLS 307/56
TXT Subject matter under subclass 55 in which the plural sources are of diverse
    or unlike types.

    (1)     Note.  One source, for example, may be a DC generator while
    another, for example, may be a rotary converter.


CLS 307/57
TXT Subject matter under subclass 55 in which the plural sources are plural
    generators.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to plural generators
    connected in parallel with equalizer means for insuring that each generator
    bears its proportionate share of the load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for this subject matter.


CLS 307/58
TXT Subject matter under subclass 55 in which the plural sources are plural
    converters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    single channel conversion systems for converting current of one type into
    current of another type.


CLS 307/59
TXT Subject matter under subclass 53 relating to load current division between
    plural sources in response to the size of a peak or excess load.


CLS 307/60
TXT Subject matter under subclass 52 relating to means for keeping constant the
    load or the current drawn by one of the sources.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    220-354 for systems for limiting the current or load on a single circuit.


CLS 307/61
TXT Subject matter under subclass 60 in which the plural sources are connected
    in series.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36+     and 54, for similar subject matter.


CLS 307/62
TXT Subject matter under subclass 52 for limiting the load on the sources.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to systems having means
    for limiting the total load drawn to a predetermined level.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    220-354 for single channel systems having means to limit the load.


CLS 307/63
TXT Subject matter under subclass 52 relating to serially connected sources.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36+,    54 and 61, for this subject matter.


CLS 307/64
TXT Subject matter under subclass 43 having substitute or emergency sources of
    electric energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for this subject matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 86+ for
    lamp and space discharge device systems having means for automatically
    substituting one power supply for another.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 333 for miscellaneous signal
    communication systems having means for substituting one power supply for
    another.


CLS 307/65
TXT Subject matter under subclass 64 having plural substitute sources.

    (1)     Note.  The plural substitute sources, for example, may be provided
    with means for making them effective in a predetermined sequence.


CLS 307/66
TXT Subject matter under subclass 64 in which a substitute or emergency source
    is a storage battery.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46      and 48+, for this subject matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass for a charging system for a storage battery.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 88 for generator
    control systems having a battery source for the excitation winding.


CLS 307/67
TXT Subject matter under subclass 66 having a dynamoelectric machine for
    connecting the storage battery to the system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for this subject matter.


CLS 307/68
TXT Subject matter under subclass 64 in which the substitute or emergency
    source is a dynamoelectric source.

    (1)     Note.  The dynamoelectric source, for example, may be supplied with
    an inertia type massive flywheel and  normally act as a motor across the
    line to supply current, as a generator, when the normal voltage supply is
    interrupted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44+,    for this subject matter.  Note especially indented subclass 47.


CLS 307/69
TXT Subject matter under subclass 43 having plural supply circuits or plural
    sources distributed along a load circuit.

    (1)     Note.  The plural supply circuits or sources, for example, may be
    distributed along the length of an electric trolley circuit.


CLS 307/70
TXT Subject matter under subclass 43 relating to the transfer of a load from
    one source to another source without loss of energy to the load and without
    the paralleling of the two sources.

    (1)     Note.  The two sources, for example, may be connected to the load
    by means of current limiting impedances which are varied in opposite
    directions, so that the load is transferred smoothly from one source to the
    other source.


CLS 307/71
TXT Subject matter under subclass 43 for alternatively connecting the plural
    supply circuits or plural sources in series or in parallel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 111 for plural
    electric motors having means for connecting them either in series or in
    parallel.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass for battery charging or discharging, especially
    subclasses 116+ for various series/parallel arrangements of cells or
    batteries.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 346 for
    transformer systems having means to connect the transformers either in
    parallel or in series.


CLS 307/72
TXT Subject matter under subclass 43 in which the plural supply circuits or
    sources have diverse or unlike electrical characteristics.

    (1)     Note.  One source, for example, may be an alternating current
    source and the other source may be a direct current source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for this subject matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 106+ and 149 for
    plural electric motor systems having diverse sources of power.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging, subclass
    138 for a battery charging system having plural sources of supply.


CLS 307/73
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72 in which the diverse sources are different
    frequencies.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 807+ for electric
    motor systems having sources of different frequency of electric power, for
    regulating the speed of the motor.

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, subclasses 805, 814 and 820
    for running-speed control systems in which the frequency of a feedback
    signal is compared to the frequency of an input signal.


CLS 307/74
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72 in which the diverse or unlike electrical
    sources have different capacities.

    (1)     Note.  The diverse sources, for example, may have different voltage
    current characteristics.


CLS 307/75
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72 in which the diverse or unlike sources
    have different voltages.


CLS 307/76
TXT Subject matter under subclass 75 in which the sources of different voltage
    are generator sources.


CLS 307/77
TXT Subject matter under subclass 43 having plural supply circuits or plural
    sources connected in series.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to transformers
    connected in series.


CLS 307/78
TXT Subject matter under subclass 77 in which the sources are generators.

    (1)     Note.  Plural generators, for example, may be connected in series
    to produce a high voltage.


CLS 307/80
TXT Subject matter under subclass 43 in which the plural sources or plural
    supply circuits may be selectively or optionally connected to the load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64+,    for this subject matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 3 for miscellaneous
    plural channel communication systems having means to substitute one line
    for another.


CLS 307/81
TXT Subject matter under subclass 80 in which the plural sources or supply
    circuits are connected in a predetermined sequence.


CLS 307/82
TXT Subject matter under subclass 43 relating to plural converters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    conversion systems for converting electricity in one source circuit into a
    different type of electricity in a single load circuit.


CLS 307/83
TXT Subject matter under subclass 43 relating to plural transformers.


CLS 307/84
TXT Subject matter under subclass 43 relating to plural generators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    single generator systems.


CLS 307/85
TXT Subject matter under subclass 43 relating to connecting and disconnecting
    systems.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to systems for
    connecting and disconnecting generators.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112+,   for this subject matter.


CLS 307/86
TXT Subject matter under subclass 85 in which the connection or disconnection
    is made automatically responsive to a condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110+,   for this subject matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclasses 17+ for
    automatic condition responsive systems for connecting or disconnecting a
    single generator.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    safety and protective systems for disconnecting electric apparatus under
    fault conditions.


CLS 307/87
TXT Subject matter under subclass 86 in which the condition is the obtainment
    of a certain voltage, frequency or phase relationship.


CLS 307/89
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to systems which prevent
    induction or coupling to other systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 32+ for
    conductor structures which are designed so as to prevent interference.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 69 for telegraph systems having means to
    prevent inductive effects.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 85 for
    electric lamp and discharge device systems having means to prevent
    radiation.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 12 for communication
    type transmission networks having means to prevent inductive effects.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 84+ for inductive devices with
    electric and/or magnetic shielding, also subclass 83 for inductors where
    the core forms the casing which affords shielding for the inductor.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 841+, 851 and 905
    for antennas involving shielding.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 116+ for telephone systems
    having means to prevent inductive effects.


CLS 307/90
TXT Subject matter under subclass 89 having means for controlling the current
    which produces the induction.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to systems having means
    for eliminating harmonics produced by arcs.


CLS 307/91
TXT Subject matter under subclass 89 having means for controlling a magnetic or
    electrostatic field.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to systems having
    shielding means for preventing the radiation of a magnetic or variable
    electrostatic field.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclass 508 for an integrated circuit with a metal shield layer,
    subclasses 659 and 660 for electromagnetic energy shielding of such
    devices, and subclass 662 for devices of this type with transmission line
    shielding.


CLS 307/95
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to systems for
    preventing damage by electrolysis.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to cathodic protection
    systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 194+ for
    electrolytic apparatus, especially subclasses 196+ for electrolytic object
    protection apparatus.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, appropriate subclasses for electrolysis,
    especially subclasses 724+ for electrolytic protection of a metal or metal
    alloy object.


CLS 307/96
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to the regulation of the
    current in a system by intermittent interruption of the circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132,    for repetitive make and break systems, such as flasher systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 209+ for
    electric lamp and discharge device systems having a periodic switch in the
    supply circuit.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 519+ and the classes
    referred to in the search notes to that subclass, for electric motor
    systems having circuit making and breaking means in the supply circuit to
    control the magnitude of the energy supplied.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 70 for this
    subject matter utilized in an electric generator system.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for miscellaneous switching regulators.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses
    59+ for circuit interruption systems used in electrotherapeutics.


CLS 307/97
TXT Subject matter under subclass 96 automatically responsive to a condition.

    (1)     Note.  The condition, for example, may be speed of rotation.


CLS 307/98
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to systems having
    combined impedance means and switch means for regulating the current in the
    system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to presettable systems
    for controlling current at a future time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96+,    for this subject matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for variable impedance systems for controlling the flow of
    current in a circuit.


CLS 307/99
TXT Subject matter under subclass 98 automatically responsive to a condition.

    (1)     Note.  The condition, for example, may be an overload condition.


CLS 307/100
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to shunting and short
    circuiting systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    220-223 for impedance systems for controlling the magnitude of the current,
    in which the impedance system is connected in shunt with a source and a
    load.


CLS 307/101
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to the control of
    residual or remnant magnetism.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to a control of the
    remnant magnetism in a dynamoelectric machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 143+ for
    demagnetizing a magnetic field, and subclass 267 for demagnetizing systems
    and processes.


CLS 307/102
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to stabilized,
    anti-hunting or anti-oscillation systems.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to long distance
    transmission systems having means to stabilize the system under fault
    conditions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    safety and protective systems, such as circuit breaker systems.


CLS 307/103
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to line drop
    compensators.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to systems for
    regulating the voltage in a load circuit so that the voltage is constant
    regardless of line drop due to varying load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 21 for single
    generator systems having means to automatically compensate the system for
    variable line drop.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for this subject matter.


CLS 307/104
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to electromagnet or
    other highly inductive systems.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to systems for
    regulating the current through an electromagnet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 492 for electric motor
    systems having means to dissipate the magnetic energy of the field.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for the structure of
    transformer and inductive devices.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ for
    control circuits for electromagnetic devices.


CLS 307/105
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to harmonic filters or
    neutralizers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 167+ for wave
    filters, per se.

    334,    Tuners, appropriate subclasses for tuners, per se, which are
    closely analogous to filters.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 39+ for current
    conversion systems having filtering means.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 116+ for interference
    elimination in telephone systems.


CLS 307/106
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to systems for producing
    pulses or shaping waves.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to systems having an
    easily saturated transformer which produces a pulse output when over
    excited at its input or to other systems having nonlinear elements.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to systems producing
    pulses of particular wave shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96+,    for means for producing square waves by intermittent interruption
    of a circuit in which the ratio of the conduction to nonconduction state is
    variable, as, for example, in Tirril regulators.

    132,    for means for producing square waves by intermittent interruption
    of a circuit, where the ratio of conduction to nonconduction is not varied.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, subclasses 600+ for electrical musical instruments having
    means to produce wave forms of desired shape.

    331,    Oscillators, appropriate subclasses, for electrical oscillators in
    general, particularly subclass 55 for plural oscillators provided with a
    pulsing circuit, subclass 78 for electrical noise or random wave
    generators, subclass 87 for magnetron type oscillators provided with
    pulsing means, subclass 106 for oscillators with periodic or repetitious
    amplitude (or amplitude and frequency) varying means, subclasses 111+ for
    transistor type relaxation oscillator, subclasses 129+ for relaxation
    oscillator, utilizing gaseous space discharge devices, subclasses 143+ for
    relaxation oscillators in general, subclasses 165+ for shock-excited
    resonant circuit oscillators, and subclasses 172+ for oscillators in
    general provided with oscillator pulsing circuits.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 20 for passive wave
    shaping filters.


CLS 307/107
TXT Subject matter under subclass 106 having means for rectifying or
    derectifying.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to systems having a
    polyphase input which is rectified and controlled in such a manner as to
    produce a direct current pulse of desired wave form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclass 43 for inverter systems
    with means to add or eliminate frequency components by step wave, amplitude
    summation technique.


CLS 307/108
TXT Subject matter under subclass 106 having a capacitor.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to pulse producing
    systems in which the energy of the pulse is stored in a capacitor before
    being released.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for this subject matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 130 for this subject
    matter in combination with a reciprocating or oscillating electric motor.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    subclasses 166+ for capacitor charging or discharging.


CLS 307/109
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to systems having a
    capacitor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for this subject matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    subclasses 166+ for capacitor charging or discharging.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 208,
    218, 233, 293, 352, and 364 for voltage magnitude and phase control systems
    utilizing a capacitor.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 149 for
    read/write systems which store information in a capacitive element.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclass 103 for X-ray
    electrical systems having a capacitor with means to charge and discharge
    the capacitor.


CLS 307/110
TXT Subject matter under subclass 109 having plural capacitors which are
    charged and discharge alternately when alternately connected in parallel
    and in series, respectively or inversely.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to systems utilizing
    plural capacitors as direct current transformers or as voltage multiplying
    means, such as the "surge generators".


CLS 307/111
TXT Subject matter under the class definition which is nonresponsive to
    frequency changes.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to miscellaneous control
    systems which are provided with means to prevent the control system from
    acting in an improper manner, when the frequency of the system changes,
    where the frequency change is not significant to the operation of the
    control system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclass for
    the reading/writing of information in a static storage system.


CLS 307/112
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to miscellaneous
    switching systems.

    (1)     Note.  This is a miscellaneous class for electrical switching
    systems and the search should be continued in all cases in any other class
    which may possibly be pertinent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 362 and the
    search notes to this subclass for miscellaneous switching systems utilized
    to control a space discharge device or electric lamp.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ for
    control circuits for electromagnetic devices.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclass for
    the reading/writing of information in a static storage system.


CLS 307/113
TXT Subject matter under subclass 112 having plural switches.


CLS 307/114
TXT Subject matter under subclass 113 relating to switching systems of the
    lazy-man type.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to systems of the type
    where a single load can be controlled at either of two or more points, so
    that it is not necessary for the operator to be at the position where the
    load was previously controlled in order to control it at a subsequent time.


CLS 307/115
TXT Subject matter under subclass 113 in which the plural switches are
    selectively actuated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825+ for miscellaneous
    selective control systems utilized in communications.


CLS 307/116
TXT Subject matter under subclass 112 in which the switching system is
    automatically responsive to a condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Markers and Breakers, subclass 600 for a
    capacitive switch, absent circuitry.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 2+ for plural
    channel communication systems automatically responsive to a condition and
    subclasses 17.1+ for single channel communication systems automatically
    responsive to a condition.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+ for this subject
    matter in combination with an alarm or indicator to indicate the condition.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 33+ for a
    capacitive keyboard controlled code transmitter.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ for
    miscellaneous electromagnetic and relay switching automatically responsive
    to a condition.


CLS 307/117
TXT Subject matter under subclass 116 in which the system is responsive to
    light, heat, vibratory or radiant energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 206+ for miscellaneous photo-electric
    cell circuits.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 173+ for
    photo cell controlled electromagnetic switching and relay systems.


CLS 307/118
TXT Subject matter under subclass 116 in which the system is responsive to
    fluid pressure, density, level, velocity or humidity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 603+ for this subject
    matter in an electric alarm system.


CLS 307/119
TXT Subject matter under subclass 116 in which the system is responsive to
    mechanical force.

    (1)     Note.  The mechanical force, for example, may be indicative of the
    position of an element.


CLS 307/120
TXT Subject matter under subclass 119 in which the system is automatically
    responsive to speed, centrifugal or kinetic force.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 236+ for
    miscellaneous speed controlled systems.


CLS 307/121
TXT Subject matter under subclass 120 in which the system is automatically
    responsive to inertia or acceleration forces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 514.01+ for an inertia type
    accelerometer.


CLS 307/122
TXT Subject matter under subclass 120 in which the system is automatically
    responsive to the direction of rotation of a rotating body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 672 for this subject matter
    in combination with signal or indicating means to indicate the direction of
    rotation of the shaft.


CLS 307/123
TXT Subject matter under subclass 120 in which the system is automatically
    responsive to the speed differential of two bodies.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 243+ for
    shaft synchronizing systems.


CLS 307/124
TXT Subject matter under subclass 120 in which the system is automatically
    responsive to torque.


CLS 307/125
TXT Subject matter under subclass 116 in which the condition to which the
    system is automatically responsive is an electrical condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 635+ and 657+ for this
    subject matter in combination with an alarm or indicator to indicate the
    condition.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    safety and protective systems which are automatically responsive to a
    dangerous electrical condition, such as circuit breaker systems.


CLS 307/126
TXT Subject matter under subclass 125 in which the system is automatically
    responsive to power or energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31+     and 52+, for this subject matter.


CLS 307/127
TXT Subject matter under subclass 125 in which the electrical condition to
    which the system is responsive is a condition of polarity, phase sequence
    or reverse flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9.1+,   for vehicle mounted systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass for polarity control or sensing in a battery charging
    or discharging system, especially subclass 165 and Digest 15.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 76, 77,
    82, and 84+ for this subject matter combined with the safety and protection
    of a system or device.


CLS 307/128
TXT Subject matter under subclass 125 having a discrimination response to
    alternating current and direct current conditions.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to systems wherein a
    switching operation automatically takes place to accommodate the system to
    change of the source of power when the source changes between alternating
    and direct current conditions.


CLS 307/129
TXT Subject matter under subclass 125 in which the electrical condition, to
    which the system is automatically responsive, is frequency.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73,     for this subject matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 182+ for
    miscellaneous relay systems which are automatically responsive to frequency.


CLS 307/130
TXT Subject matter under subclass 125 in which the electrical condition to
    which the system is automatically responsive is voltage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    220-303 for voltage magnitude control systems automatically responsive to
    voltage.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 88+ for
    voltage responsive safety and protective systems, such as low voltage
    tripping systems.


CLS 307/131
TXT Subject matter under subclass 125 in which the electrical condition to
    which the system is automatically responsive is current.


CLS 307/132
TXT Subject matter under subclass 112 relating to systems having means for
    repetitively making and breaking a circuit.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to flashing systems,
    wherein the system is intermittently energized.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96+,    for this subject matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 209+ for
    this subject matter having an electric lamp or space discharge device in
    the load circuit.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 129+ for this
    subject matter having an electric motor in the load circuit.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 282
    and 351 for switching regulators.

    331,    Oscillators, appropriate subclasses, for electrical oscillators in
    general utilizing active elements other than circuit maker and breaker type
    or dynamoelectric machine type, see particularly subclass 111 for
    free-running pulse generators of the relaxation type utilizing transistors,
    subclasses 129+ for oscillators of the relaxation type utilizing gaseous
    space discharge devices, and subclasses 143+ for relaxation oscillators in
    general.


CLS 307/134
TXT Subject matter under subclass 112 relating to means for facilitating the
    operation of the system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to switching means, such
    as plugs and jacks, having means to neutralize the leakage capacitance of
    the parts of the circuit.


CLS 307/135
TXT Subject matter under subclass 134 having means to reduce the current or
    voltage of the circuit as a step, preliminary to the switching step.


CLS 307/137
TXT Subject matter under subclass 134 having means for conditioning switch
    contacts.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to systems having means
    for vibrating the switch contacts, so that they are always in a polished
    condition, because of the mechanical wear on the contacts.


CLS 307/138
TXT Subject matter under subclass 137 having means to reverse the polarity of
    the contacts during use.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to those systems in
    which polarity reversing of the contacts is used to prevent a transfer of
    metal continuously from one contact to the other with resultant pitting and
    buildup.


CLS 307/139
TXT Subject matter under subclass 112 having means for actuating the switch.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to systems having means
    to actuate the switch by both electrical and mechanical means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 2+ for electromagnetically operated switches,
    per se.


CLS 307/140
TXT Subject matter under subclass 139 having means to control a power circuit.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to remote control
    systems for regulating a circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825+ for miscellaneous
    selective systems, such as party line and remote control systems.


CLS 307/141
TXT Subject matter under subclass 139 having time delay or retarding means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 195+ for
    miscellaneous relay systems having time delay means.


CLS 307/141.4
TXT Subject matter under subclass 141 having an electromagnetic operator which,
    when energized, mechanically initiates operation of the time delay means.


CLS 307/141.8
TXT Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the time delay is achieved by
    means of serially connected switches operated by a timer.


CLS 307/142
TXT Subject matter under subclass 139 having locking, holding or breaking means
    for the switch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 194 for
    miscellaneous relay circuits having holding means, such as a locking
    contact.


CLS 307/143
TXT Subject matter under subclass 139 having an electrical actuator for the
    switch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ for
    control circuits for electromagnetic devices.


CLS 307/144
TXT Subject matter under subclass 139 in which the switch is actuated by a
    fluid pressure actuator.


CLS 307/145
TXT Subject matter under the class definition having a current collector or
    transfer device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, subclasses 2+ for systems
    of distribution utilized in electric railway systems.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 323+ for
    geophysical exploration systems having means to pass current from a moving
    electrode into the earth.  Note especially subclasses 347+.


CLS 307/146
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to unidirectional
    conductor systems.


CLS 307/147
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to conductor
    arrangements or structure.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to electric distribution
    systems utilizing conductors which are arranged in pairs for the purpose of
    gaining greater reliability of service or for the purpose of providing
    sleet melting circuits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 826 for wire
    distribution (e.g., harness, rack).


CLS 307/148
TXT Subject matter under subclass 147 having a multipart conductor with means
    to equalize the current in each of the parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 128.1+ for
    plural strand conductor assemblies, per se.


CLS 307/149
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to miscellaneous systems.


CLS 307/150
TXT Subject matter under subclass 149 relating to power packs.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to systems for supplying
    a high voltage direct current from a battery source.


CLS 307/151
TXT Subject matter under subclass 149 relating to conversion systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, appropriate subclasses for
    coded data conversion.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, appropriate subclasses for this
    subject matter.


CLS 307/152
TXT Subject matter under subclass 149 automatically responsive to the rate of
    change of a system variable.

    (1)     Note.  This system variable, for example, may be frequency or
    voltage.


CLS 307/153
TXT Subject matter under subclass 149 relating to generator control systems.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to means for keeping the
    load on a generator constant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    this subject matter.


CLS 307/154
TXT Subject matter under subclass 149 having a particular or specifically
    recited load device.

    (1)     Note.  Continue the search in the class which relates to the
    specified load device.


CLS 307/155
TXT Subject matter under subclass 154 having plural diverse type load devices.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to generators having
    both a lamp load and a power load.


CLS 307/156
TXT Subject matter under subclass 155 in which the plural load devices are
    combined in a structural manner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for the structure of
    transformer and inductive devices.


CLS 307/157
TXT Subject matter under subclass 154 relating to lamp or discharge device
    loads.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates for example, to systems for energizing
    lamps or discharge devices in series parallel combinations where the lamp
    or discharge devices are not claimed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, for this subject
    matter.


CLS 307/326
TXT PERSONNEL SAFETY OR LIMIT CONTROL FEATURES:
    Subject matter under the class definition relating to self-protective,
    personnel safety, or limit control features.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter in this subclass relates primarily to
    systems and devices for the protection of operating personnel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    protection means utilized to protect systems and devices.


CLS 307/327
TXT Parasitic current suppression:

    Subject matter under subclass 326 relating to the suppression of current
    due to some unintentional cause such as inequalities of temperature or of
    composition.


CLS 307/328
TXT Interlock:

    Subject matter under subclass 326 relating to systems or devices which
    prevent the activation of another system or device until a preliminary
    condition has been met, or to prevent hazardous operation.


CLS 307/400
TXT ELECTRETS:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein an element exhibits a
    permanent external electrostatic field due to internal polarization.

    (1)     Note.  Electrets, per se, are classified here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 886 for the mechanical manufacture of
    electrets.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses for a
    nonresinous plastic electrically insulating composition in an electrically
    noncharged state.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, subclass 2.01 and appropriate
    classes and subclasses for a resinous plastic electrically-insulating
    composition in an electrically noncharged state.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 146 for
    electrets utilized for storage and retrieval of information.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclass 170 for electrets used in a acoustic wave system.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 177 for an electrical
    thermometer having a ferroelectric sensor.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclass
    191 for electrets used in a telephone.


CLS 307/401
TXT NONLINEAR REACTOR SYSTEMS (E.G., SATURABLE):

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a nonlinear reactor
    which is a magnetic core reactor, the reactance of which is controlled by
    changing the saturation of the core by varying a superimposed
    unidirectional flux.

    (1)     Note.  This is the miscellaneous subclass for nonlinear reactor
    (e.g., saturated inductor ferrite dielectric) systems not elsewhere
    classified.  The field of search should in every instance extend to the
    class which relates to the environment in which the system might be found,
    since a system such as, for example, an oscillator or amplifier, which is
    classifiable in another class on the basis of the overall function of the
    system is not classifiable in this subclass (Class 307, subclasses 401+)
    merely because the system utilizes a nonlinear reactor.  This subclass
    will, however, take those portions of the nonlinear reactor systems which
    are so incomplete as not to furnish a basis for classification in any other
    class.

    (2)     Note.  Amplifiers having an active element which is a nonlinear
    reactor means are classified in Class 330, subclasses 7 and 8 for
    capacitive type and saturable reactor type amplifier devices, respectively.
     In general use with such devices is an a.c. power supply source.  Where no
    filter is claimed to remove such a.c., components from the output signal,
    classification is herein and not in amplifiers. However, where a
    "demodulator" or "detector" is claimed instead of a rectifier and such
    filter means are disclosed but not claimed classification is in Class 330
    with amplifiers.  See class definitions thereof, sections VI and VII.

    (3)     Note.  Saturable reactor type shift registers and counters can be
    found in the appropriate subclass in Class 365.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for highly inductive systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 249,
    302, 310, and 329 for saturable inductor voltage regulating systems.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous systems employing space
    discharge active element devices.

    329,    Demodulators, subclasses 341+ for a frequency demodulator with
    pulse forming circuits (e.g., counter type) which may include a saturable
    reactor.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 4.5+ for para- metric amplifiers; and
    subclasses 7 and 8 for capacitive and saturable reactor type amplifiers.
    See (3) Note above.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 107 for solid-state active element type
    oscillators wherein the active element may comprise ferromagnetic or
    ferroelectric material in the solid state.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 80 for negative
    resistance networks.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 227 for electromagnets with armature of the
    saturable magnetic type.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 155+ for inductive regulators (e.g.,
    saturable type of high leakage reactance type).

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclasses
    for static reactor type memory systems.


CLS 307/402
TXT Parametrons:

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein a device is used in which an
    energy source alters the value of a parameter of an energy storage element.

    (1)     Note.  A parametron is essentially a resonant circuit with a
    nonlinear reactive element which oscillates at half the driving frequency.
    The oscillation can be made to represent a binary digit by the choice
    between two stationary phases pi radians apart.

    (2)     Note.  Parametric excitation is the method of exciting and
    maintaining oscillation in which excitation results from a periodic
    variation in an energy storage element, e.g., capacitor or inductor.

    (3)     Note.  A digital circuit operates like a switch, i.e., it is either
    "on" or "off".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 4.5+ for linear parametric amplifiers.


CLS 307/403
TXT Thin film parametrons:

    Subject matter under subclass 402 wherein the parametron is composed of
    thin film elements.

    (1)     Note.  Thin film is a film of conductive or insulating material,
    usually deposited by sputtering or evaporation, that may be made in a
    pattern to form electronic components and conductors on a substrate or used
    as insulation between successive layers of components.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    293,    for thin film devices in nonlinear solid state device circuits and
    systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 87 for thin film
    devices in magnetic shift registers; and subclasses 171+ for magnetic this
    film device in systems using particular element.


CLS 307/404
TXT Using logic circuits:

    Subject matter under subclass 402 wherein circuitry that performs logical
    functions is included in the parametron.

    (1)     Note.  A logic circuit is a circuit that provides an input-output
    relationship corresponding to a Boolean-algebra logic function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    407,    for logic circuits that are not used in parametrons.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 700+
    for logic devices which perform mathematical computations.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 89 for a
    magnetic shift register used as a logic device.


CLS 307/405
TXT Using pump energizer:

    Subject matter under subclass 402 wherein a pump energizer is used in the
    parametron.

    (1)     Note.  A pump energizer is an oscillator that supplies an input
    signal to the parametron at a frequency, f, wherein the output of the
    parametron is f/2.


CLS 307/406
TXT Magnetic flip-flops:

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein a ferroresonant circuit will flip
    to one stable state at a predetermined first voltage as the potential at
    the input increases, and will flip back to the other stable state at a
    predetermined second voltage (lower than the first voltage) as the
    potential of the input is decreasing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    289+,   for flip-flop systems in general.

    414,    for magnetic flip-flop used as trigger devices.

    415,    for magnetic flip-flop used as switching devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 72, 154, 190,
    and 205 for various flip-flops utilized in a static memory system.


CLS 307/407
TXT Logic circuits:

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein a logic function is performed by
    the nonlinear reactor system.

    (1)     Note.  A logic circuit is a circuit that provides an input-output
    relationship corresponding to a Boolean-algebra logic function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404,    for logic circuits used in parametrons.

    406,    for magnetic flip-flops.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 700+
    for logic devices which perform mathematical computations.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 89 for a
    magnetic shift register used as a logic device.


CLS 307/408
TXT Multiaperture:

    Subject matter under subclass 407 wherein the nonlinear saturable core has
    more than one aperture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    422,    for multiaperture nonlinear reactors that are not utilized in logic
    systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 90 for magnetic
    shift registers that use multiaperture cell.


CLS 307/409
TXT Clocking, delay or transmission line:
    Subject matter under subclass 407 including a transmission line between
    logic stages or including timing means such as a delay or clock for
    synchronizing or maintaining a synchronization between logic stages.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    452,    453 and 480+, for clocking, delay or transmission line used for
    performing logical operations with digital information.


CLS 307/410
TXT Nor, not logie circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 407 including a Nor function that has an
    output when there is no input or both inputs (i.e., two inputs, one output)
    or a Not function that has one input, one output wherein the output is the
    inverse of the input.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    445+,   for Not, Nor, or And devices that perform logical operations with
    digital information.


CLS 307/411
TXT Exclusive or, and logic circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 407 comprising a circuit having two inputs
    wherein an output signal occurs if and only if one input is present
    (exclusive Or) or if both inputs are present (And).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    471+,   for And, Or device that performs electrical logical operations with
    digital information.


CLS 307/412
TXT Driver circuits:

    Subject matter under subclass 401 comprising an electrical circuit that
    supplies an input to the saturable reactor system.


CLS 307/413
TXT Signal sensor (e.g., current or frequency): Subject matter under subclass
    401 that performs the initial conversion or control of measurement of
    energy in a nonlinear reactor system.


CLS 307/414
TXT Magnetic trigger devices:

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein saturable reactor means are
    provided for conditionally passing spontaneously or through application of
    an external stimulus a signal from one circuit to another circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    406,    for magnetic flip-flops used as trigger devices.

    415,    for magnetic trigger devices used as switches.


CLS 307/415
TXT Magnetic switching circuits:

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein a saturable reactor is used to
    place a device or circuit in an operating or nonoperating state.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    406,    for magnetic flip-flops used as switching circuits.

    414,    for magnetic trigger devices used as switching circuits.


CLS 307/416
TXT Amplifiers using nonlinear reactors (i.e., magnetic amplifier):

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein a device is used in which one or
    more saturable reactors are used, either alone or with other circuit
    elements to obtain power gain.

    (1)     Note.  The type of devices classified here are nonlinear because
    the output is not a linear function of the input.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    490+,   for nonlinear solid-state amplifiers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 8 for saturable reactor type linear amplifying
    device.


CLS 307/417
TXT With transistors:

    Subject matter under subclass 416 wherein a transistor is used in
    combination with the saturable reactor.


CLS 307/418
TXT With feedback:

    Subject matter under subclass 416 wherein feedback is used in the magnetic
    amplifier circuit.


CLS 307/419
TXT Magnetic pulse generator:

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein a saturable reactor is used in a
    device for generating a controlled series of pulses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 291+ for miscellaneous clock or pulse waveform
    generating.


CLS 307/420
TXT Using multivibrator:

    Subject matter under subclass 419 wherein a multivibrator is used in the
    magnetic pulse generator.

    (1)     Note.  A multivibrator is a relaxation oscillator in which the in
    phase feedback voltage is obtained from two transistors.  Typically, their
    outputs are coupled through resistive-capacitive elements.  The time
    constants of the coupling elements determine the fundamental frequency,
    which may be further controlled by an external voltage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 185+ for miscellaneous stable state circuits.


CLS 307/421
TXT With specified output waveform:

    Subject matter under subclass 419 wherein a particular output waveform is
    generated.


CLS 307/422
TXT Multiaperture:

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein the saturable reactor core has
    more than one aperture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    408,    for multiaperture cores used in logic circuits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 90+ for
    multiaperture cells used in magnetic shift registers; and subclass 140 for
    multiaperture cell used in nonshifting magnetic systems.


CLS 307/423
TXT Three apertures or ladder:

    Subject matter under subclass 422 wherein the saturable reactor core has
    three or more holes or is in the form of a ladder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 91 for
    multiaperture ladder structure used in shift registers.


CLS 307/424
TXT Parametric frequency converter:

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein a device is used in which an
    energy source alters the value of a parameter of an energy storage element
    for frequency conversion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 76.41 for electric
    current frequency measuring systems, utilizing heterodyne means; and
    subclass 85 for electric current phase measuring systems utilizing
    frequency conversion.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 113+ for miscellaneous frequency conversion circuits.

    329,    Demodulators, subclasses 323+, 346  or 358+ for frequency, phase or
    amplitude modulation demodulators combining the incoming signal with a
    second locally generated signal.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 4.5+ for parametric amplifiers wherein the
    output signal waveform is an amplified replica of the input signal waveform
    and linearly related thereto.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 37+ for beat frequency oscillators.

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 117+ or 144+ for frequency or phase
    modulators, and particularly subclasses 140 and 142+ for variable reactance
    tubes in a frequency modulator.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements,
    appropriate subclasses for optical systems, per se and subclasses 326+ for
    optical or quasi - optical parametric frequency converters.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 1+ for frequency
    conversion without intermediate conversion to d.c. in cascaded or combined
    diverse conversion systems.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 313+ for frequency converters
    adapted for use in modulated carrier wave receivers and wherein an incoming
    signal-modulated carrier wave is combined or mixed with a local carrier
    wave to produce an intermediate frequency signal of value lower than that
    of the incoming modulated carrier wave.


CLS 307/650
TXT WITH NONSWITCHING MEANS RESPONSIVE TO EXTERNAL NONELECTRICAL CONDITION:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising an electronic circuit
    which has at least one nonswitching control component and is responsive to
    changes in external nonelectrical condition such as light, temperature, or
    flame and whereby an output current or voltage varies with variation of the
    external condition.

    (1)     Note.  The systems defined above are to be distinguished from
    subject matter defining apparatus for converting nonelectrical energy
    directly into electric energy (e.g., electric batteries, dynamoelectric
    generators, etc.), condition measuring or testing apparatus which utilizes
    electron tubes and having means to automatically control the operation of
    the apparatus including means to give a qualitative or quantitative
    indication of the condition or change of condition, heating systems wherein
    an electron tube system utilized for controlling current in a heating load
    is controlled by a heat responsive element as a thermostat and closed loop
    electrical servo-type systems for positioning a servo-driven element
    responsive to a change in a condition.

    (2)     Note.  Subclasses 650 through 653 pertain to circuits having
    nonswitching control components responsive to a nonelectrical condition,
    mere switching control systems responsive to external conditions have been
    excluded and are found in Class 307, subclasses 116+, condition responsive
    switching systems and Class 327, subclasses 509+, nonlinear solid-state
    external effects switching systems.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    for external effects responsive switching system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for systems
    responsive to measuring a particular condition such as subclasses 37+ for
    devices responsive to fluid pressure, subclasses 290+ for liquid level or
    depth gauge, and subclasses 570+ for devices responsive to vibration.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 358+ for expansible
    chamber motors having working member position responsive feedback control.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 211+ for fuses, primers, and
    ignition devices which utilizes electrical, magnetic wave, or radiant
    energy for proximity fuses.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 451+ for automatic feed
    means gravity, pressure or thermally controlled and subclasses 504+ for
    safety devices condition controlled.

    128,    Surgery, appropriate subclasses for electronic diagnostic apparatus
    responsive to some condition of the human body.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 87+ for self proportioning or
    correlating systems by specific gravity, temperature or heat content,
    viscosity, etc.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, appropriate subclasses for systems
    automatically responsive to external conditions.

    200,    Electricity: Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses
    for switching means responsive to nonelectrical condition such as sound
    responsive, etc. (See subclasses 52+ and particularly subclasses 61.01
    through 61.18, 80, 81, 84, and 85.)

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, appropriate subclasses for electronic
    signaling or switching means which is controlled by the condition of the
    track or the position of a train on the track.

    250,    Radiant Energy, for methods and apparatus which may employ electron
    discharge tubes with a control electrode, particularly subclasses 200+ for
    photocell circuits and apparatus, especially subclass 214 for photocell
    controlled circuits in which the photocell controls an electron tube
    apparatus, subclasses 281+ for methods and apparatus for ionic separation
    or analysis (e.g., mass spectrometers), subclasses 306+ for methods and
    apparatus for the inspection of solids or liquids by charged particles, and
    subclasses 336.1+ for methods and apparatus for the detection of nuclear or
    electromagnetic radiant energy or the testing of materials including fluent
    materials by nuclear or electromagnetic radiant energy.

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants, appropriate subclasses for dynamo
    systems controlled by some condition of the dynamo or the prime mover
    therefor.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for electrical systems controlled by a nonelectrical condition,
    see particularly subclasses 117, 118, and 119+.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclasses 82+ for
    head light control systems.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclasses 445+ for electric motor automatic starting or
    stopping means responsive to various conditions.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass for an electronic circuit in a battery or capacitor
    charging or discharging system that is responsive to a condition of a
    battery or capacitor.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, And
    Systems, subclasses 509+ for nonlinear solid-state external effects
    switching systems.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 143 for amplifiers having a temperature
    responsive impedance in the circuit.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 65+ for oscillators in combination with a
    device responsive to external physical condition and in which the subject
    matter claimed recites a free running or self-sustaining oscillator system
    such as defined in section I of the class definition of Class 331.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches, for
    mechanical switches operated as a result of electrothermal and thermal
    action.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, appropriate
    subclasses, especially subclasses 1+ for safety and protection system;
    particularly subclasses 161+ for thermal control means; subclasses 173+ for
    photosensitive devices; and subclasses 236+ for speed controlled systems.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 130+
    for data processing control systems and subclasses 400+ for the application
    of a computer in a particular art device.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for heat or
    temperature responsive measuring systems.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers
    Circuits and Systems, for pulse counters and pulse counting systems.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 44+, 51+, and 70+
    for X-ray systems used in testing.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 36+ for motor driven pumps controlled by a float.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 78+ for an electrical circuit controlling a
    burner through a means sensing the presence or absence of a flame.


CLS 307/651
TXT Temperature responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 650 wherein controlling or detecting means
    comprises means that are actuated by a change in heat such as a thermostat,
    temperature dependent resistor, or a semiconductor junction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for heat responsive devices in miscellaneous switching systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, appropriate
    subclasses for control mechanisms responsive to temperature or humidity.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 512+ for temperature responsive external effect.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical,  particularly subclasses 500+ for
    alarm systems automatically responsive to a condition, for instance,
    subclasses 584+ for temperature responsive and subclass 602 for moisture or
    humidity responsive.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for heat or
    temperature responsive measuring systems.


CLS 307/652
TXT Responsive to approach or passage of an object:

    Subject matter under subclass 650 wherein controlling or detecting means
    comprises means that react to the proximity of something that is capable of
    being sensed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.42+ for
    movable object controlled switches.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 221+ for optical or prephotocell systems
    controlled by article, person, or animal.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 509+ for proximity responsive external effects.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclasses 4+, 19+, and 31 for apparatus
    having an oscillator or other electron tube relay control means.


CLS 307/653
TXT Flame responsive (e.g., flame acts as a rectifier in circuit):

    Subject matter under subclass 650 wherein a control or detecting means is
    constituted by a flame that completes an electric circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for a condition responsive switching system which may be responsive
    to heat or a flame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 554 for prephotocell systems with a flame
    light source.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 53 for discharge
    device structure wherein a flame provides an ionized path for the discharge.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 512+ and 514+ flame responsive external effects.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 577+ and 600 for flame and
    radiant energy responsive signal systems respectively.


CLS 310/
TTL ELECTRICAL GENERATOR OR  MOTOR STRUCTURE

CLS 310/
TXT This is the residual class for all subject matter, not elsewhere
    classified, relating to electrical generator or motor structure.

    (1)     Note.  This Class was produced in 1953 by making official the
    unofficial digests which have been established by the Examiners of Division
    26 during the period from about 1900 onwards.  A caveat is given:  while it
    is believed that the titles and definitions are reasonably accurate, no
    assurance can be given that all the patents, issued prior to the date of
    reclassification, are in the proper subclass since only some of these
    individual patents were read during the reclassification project.
    Consequently, in making a thorough search in this class, it is advisable to
    investigate every subclass which may possibly be pertinent and not, in
    order to shorten the search, to rely upon the principle of superiority of
    subject matter because of position in the schedule, since that principle is
    applicable only in classes where each patent has been analyzed and placed
    in the schedule in accordance with that portion of the disclosed subject
    matter which is claimed.

    (2)     Note.  Since Class 310 takes, under the class definition, only
    subject matter relating to electrical generator or motor structure not
    elsewhere classified, its scope can be determined only by determining the
    scope of other related classes, which classes are listed below under search
    class.  Also consult the search notes in the definitions of these classes.

    (3)     Note.  Many mechanical classes contain electrical disclosures, as
    where an electrical machine is disclosed in a mechanical environment, with
    which it cooperates.  Consequently, in appropriate instances, the search
    must extend to the class or classes which relate to the environment in
    which the electrical disclosure may be found.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclass 213 for the subject
    matter of that class having electrical ventilating means.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclass 100 for the
    apparatus of that class having electric motor driving means.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for mechanical
    measuring and testing devices having electric motors or generators as part
    thereof.

    84,     Music, subclasses 600 - 722  for electrical musical instruments
    having means to generate electric currents of particular wave form for use
    in musical instruments, such as electric organs. Note particularly indented
    subclasses 1.04+ for electric generators having means which are tuned to
    resonance.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 49+ for electric locomotives.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 149 for dynamos in
    combination with electric ignition systems for internal combustion engines.

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, subclass 3 for electromagnetic
    projectile propelling means.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, appropriate
    subclasses, particularly subclass 310 for this subject matter of that class
    having electric means to operate it.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, appropriate subclass for an electric
    motor for driving a tool combined with features peculiar to tool driving.
    Generally, Class 310 includes motors having a named type of tool as a load.
     However Class 173 provides for a motor having specific impact delivering
    relationship to a tool, a passage to deliver cleansing or cooling fluid to
    a tool work surface, specific structure of a handle to manipulate a tool
    relative to work or plural motors, one of which is described as driving a
    tool and another as advancing a tool.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 381, 439 and 619 for
    electromagnetic conveyors in which the device or material being moved is
    moved by the action of a magnetic field.

    258,    Railway Mail Delivery, subclass 4 for magnetic apparatus utilized
    in railway mail delivery.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnections Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for miscellaneous electric systems having electric generators.
    Note particularly subclasses 82, 84, 151, and 153.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclass 55 for
    electric space discharge devices having combined therewith an integral
    electric generator or piezoelectric device, subclass 78 for vehicle space
    discharge device or lamp systems having a vehicle motor or vehicle motion
    driven generator.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    electric generator or motor structure having significant circuits connected
    thereto and for electric motor systems controlled by the control of the
    motor structure.  Also note subclasses 538+ for electric motors per se
    having means to control or adjust them by control of the structure of the
    motor.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass for a battery or capacitor charging system that
    utilizes an electric generator as a source of charge energy.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    electric generator having electric control systems.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    201-204 for voltage magnitude and phase control systems utilizing motor
    generator or dynamo electric machine sets.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for
    electrical measuring or testing devices and systems having electric
    generators or motors as part thereof.  Note particularly subclasses 160+
    for speed measuring systems having tachometer generators and subclasses
    76.11+ for electric meters having electric generators or motors as part
    thereof.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 220+ for electromagnets with armatures (i.e.,
    electric motor of the reciprocating type).

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for structure of inductor
    devices, (e.g., transformers and inductive reactors), particularly for
    details of induction windings and coils, magnetic cores and cooling means
    for inductor.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 102+, 150 and 174+
    for electric power conversion systems utilizing dynamoelectric machine
    converters.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    appropriate subclass for compressional wave sensing systems having
    electro-vibrational transducers and for the corresponding transducers, per
    se.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), appropriate subclasses
    for electric motor driven impellers wherein the impeller is claimed as more
    than a named load.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 410.1+ for pumps having electric drive motors.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 150+ for high temperature (Tc  30 K) superconducting devices,
    and particularly subclasses 166+ for motors or generators.


CLS 310/1
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to assemblages of
    materials utilized in the fabrication of an electric generator or motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclass 380 for the teaching of the
    construction of electric motors or generators.


CLS 310/10
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to means for converting
    electrical energy between the electrical and the mechanical state by means
    of an electromagnetic effect.

    (1)     Note.  Consult the classes referred to in the search notes to this
    class for other classes having similar subject matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 58 for amplifiers including a rotating
    dynamoelectric machine as the active element thereof. See the Notes and
    Search Notes thereunder.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 220+ for electromagnet with armature.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 140+ for similar subject matter utilized in compressional wave
    sensing and detecting systems.


CLS 310/11
TXT Subject matter under subclass 10 having a fluid which is significantly
    related to the apparatus in a manner other than cooling or lubrication.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to dynamoelectric
    machinery in which the fluid may be conductive to electricity and to
    dynamoelectric machinery in which the fluid serves as a kinetic element to
    exert mechanical force.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 92+ for the
    structure of integrating electric meters which utilize a conductive or
    genetic fluid.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclasses 100+ for thermonuclear reactions utilizing conducting gases as
    fuels.


CLS 310/12
TXT Subject matter under subclass 10 in which the dynamoelectric effect takes
    place between two relatively movable elements which are constrained to
    substantially straight line motion.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to devices which
    normally act only in a single direction such as an aircraft or projectile
    launching mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    for dynamoelectric devices in which the elements move in a straight
    line and reciprocate back and forth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 282 for a railway vehicle and track having a
    linear motor which propels and suspends the vehicle and subclasses 290+ for
    a railway vehicle and track claimed in combination with a linear motor.

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, subclass 3 for electromagnetic
    projectile propelling means.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 38, 135 and 687 for
    this subject matter in combination with an electrical system.


CLS 310/13
TXT Subject matter under subclass 12 in which both the fixed and the movable
    elements of the dynamoelectric device are provided with current carrying
    conductors or inductor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 292 for a railway vehicle and track claimed in
    combination with a linear motor having fixed and movable wound elements on
    the track and vehicle, respectively.


CLS 310/14
TXT Subject matter under subclass 12 in which the fixed and the movable
    elements of the dynamoelectric device are concentric and consist of a
    hollow winding and a plunger type armature passing thereunto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, subclass 3 for electromagnetic guns
    and projectors.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 255+ for similar subject  matter.


CLS 310/15
TXT Subject matter under subclass 10 in which the movable element of the
    dynamoelectric device moves to and fro along a straight line path or along
    an arcuate path which is so short as to be substantially a straight line.

    (1)     Note.  The term reciprocating, as used in this subclass, is limited
    to straight line motion or nonstraight line motion which is of such short
    extent that the interrelationship between the moving elements of the
    dynamoelectric device is substantially the same as if the motion were only
    along a straight line path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for straight line motion which is unidirectional and does not
    produce to-and-fro motion.

    36+,    for dynamoelectric devices which constrain the elements to
    oscillate to-and-fro motion and in which the extent of motion is such that
    some provision must be made for the nonlinear interaction between the
    relatively moving elements of the dynamoelectric device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 45 for this subject matter combined with a razor.

    84,     Music, subclasses 725+ for this subject matter utilized in an
    electrical musical instrument, such as an electric guitar.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 360 for
    this subject matter combined with a vibratory separator.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 75 for this
    subject matter in an automatic temperature or humidity regulation system.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclasses 225+ for this subject
    matter in a railway switching or signaling system.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 37, 118, 119+, 556+,
    and 686 for this subject matter in an electric motor control system.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 3 for this subject
    matter utilized in a single generator system.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 87+ for this subject matter combined with a
    periodically actuated switch.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 416+ for a reciprocating electric motor driving a
    reciprocating pump.


CLS 310/16
TXT Subject matter under subclass 15 having means for altering the temperature
    conditions of the machine.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to reciprocating motors
    having cooling means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52+,    for rotary electric motors having cooling means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 55+ for inductor devices with
    temperature modifying means (cooling means).


CLS 310/17
TXT Subject matter under subclass 15 having means for performing a function
    which is in addition to the function of the reciprocating dynamo device.


CLS 310/19
TXT Subject matter under subclass 17 having means for regulating the rate of
    motion or the duration of a period of inactivity of the reciprocating
    dynamoelectric device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 119+ for similar
    subject matter having a significant electrical circuit.


CLS 310/20
TXT Subject matter under subclass 17 having means for mechanically transforming
    the character or extent of motion delivered by or imparted to the
    dynamoelectric device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses for mechanical
    movements for converting one type of motion to another type of motion.


CLS 310/21
TXT Subject matter under subclass 20 in which the moving element of the
    dynamoelectric device is supported either by a leaf spring or by a pivot
    located at a distance from the line of relative motion of the
    dynamoelectric device which is large relative to the extent of movement.


CLS 310/22
TXT Subject matter under subclass 21 having a plurality of movable elements or
    armatures.


CLS 310/23
TXT Subject matter under subclass 20 in which the relatively movable parts of
    the dynamoelectric device are concentric and consist of a hollow winding
    and a plunger type armature passing thereunto.


CLS 310/24
TXT Subject matter under subclass 23 having a plurality of plunger type
    armatures.


CLS 310/25
TXT Subject matter under subclass 15 in which the movable parts of the
    dynamoelectric device reciprocate or vibrate at a frequency which is
    determined by the natural period of the mounting means for the movable
    parts.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to reciprocating motors
    having a tuned reed type of armature. Generally, but not invariably, a
    state of resonance exists between the natural period of the movable
    armature and the impulses of an electric field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for similar subject matter utilizing magnetostrictive means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 156 for electrical oscillators utilizing an
    electromechanical  resonator of the vibrating reed or string type (e.g.,
    tuning fork).


CLS 310/26
TXT Subject matter under subclass 15 having means to produce motion or electric
    energy by the action of magnetostriction.

    (1)     Note.  Magnetostriction is a property exhibited by some materials
    which change their physical size or shape under the action of magnetic
    fields or which produce magnetic fields when physically stressed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 118 for
    magnetostrictive motor systems.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 157 for electrical oscillators utilizing an
    electromechanical resonator of the magnetostrictive type.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 148 and 201 for
    coupling networks having magnetostrictive elements as parts thereof.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 215 for this subject matter

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 156 and 168 for magnetostrictive transducers used in underwater
    compressional wave production or sensing.


CLS 310/27
TXT Subject matter under subclass 15 in which both of the relatively movable
    parts of the dynamoelectric device include current carrying conductors or
    inductor.


CLS 310/28
TXT Subject matter under subclass 15 which is of the direct connected type.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to reciprocating
    electric motors where the reciprocating armature is directly connected to a
    source or absorber of motion.


CLS 310/29
TXT Subject matter under subclass 28 in which the relatively movable elements
    of the dynamoelectric device are supported by either of a leaf spring or a
    pivot located at a point remote from the line of motion of the
    dynamoelectric device when compared to the extent of motion of the latter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25      and 32, for this subject matter.


CLS 310/30
TXT Subject matter under subclass 28 in which the relatively movable parts of
    the dynamoelectric device are concentric and consist of a hollow winding
    and a plunger type armature passing thereunto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23      and 34+, for similar subject matter.


CLS 310/31
TXT Subject matter under subclass 15 in which the relative motion of the
    elements of the dynamoelectric device actuates an electrical switch which
    controls the flow of currents to windings associated with one of such
    elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 87+ for periodic electromagnetic switches.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 384.1+, especially
    subclasses 388.7 and 397.3 for interrupter in diaphragm and percussion type
    sound producer, respectively.


CLS 310/32
TXT Subject matter under subclass 31 in which the movable element of the
    dynamoelectric device is supported or carried by either a reed spring or a
    pivot located at a distance from the line of motion of a device which is
    large relative to the extent of motion of such element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21      and 29, for this subject matter.


CLS 310/33
TXT Subject matter under subclass 32 having plural armatures.


CLS 310/34
TXT Subject matter under subclass 31 in which the relatively movable elements
    of the dynamoelectric device include a hollow winding and an axial plunger
    or core embraced by such winding.


CLS 310/35
TXT Subject matter under subclass 34 having plural hollow windings and having
    means to energize the plural windings in sequence or at different times.


CLS 310/36
TXT Subject matter under subclass 10 in which the line of motion between the
    relatively movable elements of the dynamoelectric device lies along the arc
    of a portion of a circle and having means to accommodate such motion, over
    and above the means necessary for relative motion along a straight line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    for dynamoelectric devices having oscillate relative motion, but in
    which the extent of such motion does not require modification of the device
    because of the nonlinearity of the motion.

    40+,    for dynamoelectric devices having arcuate relative motion in which
    the  motion exceeds 3605.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 75 for the
    subject matter of that class having oscillating electric motors.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 37, 119+, 556, and
    686 for oscillating electric motor systems.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 3 for oscillating
    generator systems.


CLS 310/37
TXT Subject matter under subclass 36 in which the relative motion between the
    elements of dynamoelectric device is communicated to a load by means of
    mechanical means which alter the character or amplitude of such motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80+,    for similar subject matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses for mechanical
    movements.


CLS 310/38
TXT Subject matter under subclass 36 in which the relative motion of the
    elements of the dynamoelectric device is transmitted to a load by an
    immediate attachment and without intervening transmitting parts or
    mechanisms.


CLS 310/39
TXT Subject matter under subclass 36 in which an electric switch or its
    equivalent controls the flow of currents through windings associated with
    one of the relative movable elements of the dynamoelectric device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 87+ for vibratory switches.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 384.1+, especially
    subclasses 388.7 and 397.3 for interrupter in diaphragm and percussion type
    sound producer, respectively.


CLS 310/40
TXT Subject matter under subclass 10 in which the line of motion between the
    relatively movable elements of the dynamoelectric device lies along at
    least 360 degrees of the arc of a circle.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to dynamoelectric
    devices where the motion is continuous rotation in one direction, or where
    the rotation in one direction progresses for several turns before the
    rotation reverses in direction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclasses 69+ for arc lights having rotary electric motor means to feed
    the carbons.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 193 for bicycle lights having an electric
    generator driven by the motion of the vehicle.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 410.1+ for pumps having rotary electric drive
    motors.


CLS 310/40.5
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 including a linkage, usually between the
    motor and its support, to cause the complete motor to rotate or oscillate
    with respect to its support in response to the rotary motion of the motor
    rotor or armature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclass 100 for
    oscillating electric fans where significant details of the impeller are
    recited.


CLS 310/41
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 in which means are provided to impart
    initial rotation to the rotary element of the dynamoelectric device other
    than by the dynamoelectric effect.

    (1)     Note.  The initial rotation, for example, may be effected by a hand
    crank.


CLS 310/42
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 in which separate means are provided, or
    in which one or more parts are modified, to facilitate the process of (1)
    associating together, (2) casting of molten metal, or (3) surface cutting,
    of one or more of component parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 596+ for miscellaneous methods of making
    dynamoelectric devices.  Also consult the extensive search notes to these
    subclasses for the location of related art.


CLS 310/43
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 in which one or more component parts of
    the dynamo or electric device are fabricated of a plastic nonmetal, as by a
    casting or pressure molding operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, appropriate subclass for a process of working
    or treating glass.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses for methods for working or shaping plastic materials.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    appropriate subclasses for molding apparatus for shaping or reshaping
    plastic materials.


CLS 310/44
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 in which one or more of the component
    parts of the dynamoelectric device are fabricated or powdered or sintered
    metal particles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 228+ for sintered metal powder compositions, such as
    those resulting from a process provided for in Class 419, Powder Metallurgy
    Processes and subclasses 255+ for metal containing powders.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, appropriate subclasses for processes
    of making articles by pressing and/or sintering metal particles.


CLS 310/45
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 in which one or more parts of the
    dynamoelectric device have been treated with liquid material so as to
    retain within and/or on the surface of such parts residual amounts of such
    liquid material.

    (1)     Note.  The coating or impregnation, for example, may be for the
    windings and may serve to exclude or displace moisture therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 205 for inductor having coil turns
    cemented or embedded in plastic.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 58+ for processes of coating, per se,
    of electrical products.


CLS 310/46
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 in which one of the relatively movable
    elements of the dynamoelectric device consist merely of magnetizable
    material and is free of inductor or conductive windings.

    (1)     Note.  Since the dynamoelectric effect is necessary one of the
    attraction of the magnetizable material by magnetic pole induced therein,
    the devices of this subclass are generally motors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168+,   for inductor type generators.


CLS 310/47
TXT Subject matter under subclass 46 in which the dynamoelectric device is
    arranged to be transported or operated while held in the hand.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the motors of this subclass are disclosed as
    operating hair clippers or moving cutter type of shavers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     for portable or hand held dynamoelectric devices other than
    magnetic motors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 43+ for dry shavers.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 16 for power tables and
    stands.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 17 for this subject
    matter having a significant electric circuit.


CLS 310/48
TXT Subject matter under subclass 46 in which the motor is combined with
    additional features over and above those required for its operation as a
    motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17+,    for similar combinations with reciprocating type dynamoelectric
    devices.

    66+,    for similar combinations with rotary type dynamoelectric devices,
    other than magnetic motors.


CLS 310/49
TXT Subject matter under subclass 46 having means to cause rotation between two
    or more positions of rest and to stop at a selected position of rest until
    an adjustment is made which causes rotation to another position of rest.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to magnetic motors which
    are in the nature of servo motors or follow-up devices.


CLS 310/50
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 in which the dynamoelectric device is
    arranged to be transported or operated while held in the hand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for portable or hand type rotary magnetic motors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, appropriate subclass for a tool driving
    or impacting device and including hand manipulated tool driving or
    impacting means.  An electric motor described as for tool driving is
    classified in Class 173 if specific impact delivering relationship to a
    tool is claimed, a passage to deliver cleansing or cooling fluid to a tool
    work surface is claimed or specific structure of a handle to manipulate a
    tool relative to work is claimed.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 33 for
    electric lamp or space discharge devices having combined therewith some
    circuit element structure such as the generator, where the combination is
    adapted to be portable.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 17 for this subject
    matter in combination with a significant system.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 1 for portably
    mounted single generator systems.


CLS 310/51
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 having means to inhibit, damp-out or
    insulate against the transmission of sound or mechanical oscillations or
    vibrations of the parts of the dynamoelectric device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 573 for flywheel or rotor
    balancing means and subclass 574 for flywheel or rotor vibration damping
    means.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 100 for inductor devices such as
    transformers, having means to suppress vibration.


CLS 310/52
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 having means either to cool the
    dynamoelectric device or to contact a liquid or gas with the dynamoelectric
    device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16      and 227, for this subject matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 59 for electric locomotives having
    motor coolers.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 47+ for a structurally installed heat
    exchange means.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 55+ for inductor devices with
    temperature modifying means (cooling means).


CLS 310/53
TXT Subject matter under subclass 52 having control means.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to electric motors
    having means to control the amount of cooling or to control the amount of
    fluid contact.


CLS 310/54
TXT Subject matter under subclass 52 in which the cooling fluid or contacting
    fluid is a liquid under normal atmospheric temperatures and pressures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for this subject matter where the fluid is a conducting or kinetic
    fluid and subclass 87 for this subject matter where the dynamoelectric
    device is submersible in a liquid.


CLS 310/55
TXT Subject matter under subclass 52 in which the cooling fluid or contacting
    fluid is a gas under normal atmospheric temperatures and pressures and is
    other than atmospheric air.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to dynamoelectric
    devices having hydrogen cooling means. Hydrogen has a thermal conductivity
    greater than other common gases.


CLS 310/56
TXT Subject matter under subclass 52 having means to remove impurities from or
    otherwise condition the gas used as a cooling or contacting fluid.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to dynamoelectric
    devices having cooling means in the form of an air blast means and having
    filter means in the air passage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for this subject matter where the gas is a nonatmospheric gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, for apparatus for gas separation, per
    se.


CLS 310/57
TXT Subject matter under subclass 52 in which a fluid is retained in the
    cooling system of a dynamoelectric device without loss or replacement, so
    as to serve merely as a heat transfer medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 104.11+ for a heat exchanging system
    having an intermediate fluent material receiving and discharging heat.


CLS 310/58
TXT Subject matter under subclass 52 relating to the circulation of cooling or
    other fluid through the dynamoelectric device.

    (1)     Note.  The fluid may, for example, be forced through the
    dynamoelectric device.


CLS 310/59
TXT Subject matter under subclass 58 having plural dynamoelectric units, or
    having plural paths through which the fluid may flow.


CLS 310/60
TXT Subject matter under subclass 58 having means integral with the
    dynamoelectric device for forcing fluid through the dynamoelectric device.

    (1)     Note.  The means, for example, may be vanes attached to the rotor
    of the dynamoelectric device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 366+ and 410.1+ for electric motor driven pumps
    where the pump is of general utility and not used merely to cool the
    electric motor.


CLS 310/61
TXT Subject matter under subclass 60 having means in the rotor of the
    dynamoelectric device to provide a duct or channel to accommodate a fluid
    flow along the duct or channel.

    (1)     Note.  Frequently, for example, a radial or circumferential
    inclination of this duct or channel is sufficient to induce flow of fluid
    therethrough without other means for maintaining the flow.


CLS 310/62
TXT Subject matter under subclass 60 in which the pump or other propelling
    means for the cooling or contacting fluid is located downstream from the
    dynamoelectric device.


CLS 310/63
TXT Subject matter under subclass 60 in which the pump or other propelling
    means for the cooling or contacting fluid is located upstream from the
    dynamoelectric device.


CLS 310/64
TXT Subject matter under subclass 58 having means to facilitate, augment, or
    modify the transfer of heat from the dynamoelectric device from the cooling
    fluid or between different portions of the dynamoelectric device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 185 for a heat transmitter (e.g., fin), per
    se.


CLS 310/65
TXT Subject matter under subclass 64 in which the means for facilitating,
    augmenting, or modifying the transfer of heat includes devices for
    maintaining parts of the dynamoelectric device out of contact with each
    other, so that either the cooling fluid has access to enlarged areas of the
    device or face-to-face heat transmitting contact is avoided.

    (1)     Note.  The means for spacing the parts, for example, may provide
    cooling passages between laminae or coils.


CLS 310/66
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 combined with some other type of subject
    matter.

    (1)     Note.  The search should in all appropriate cases be continued in
    the class which relates to the environment with which the dynamoelectric
    device is combined.


CLS 310/67
TXT Subject matter under subclass 66 in which the other subject matter is in
    built or incorporated into the dynamoelectric device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 53 for electrical locomotives of
    the type in which the driving wheel is part of the electric motor.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 65.6 for a motor vehicle provided with an
    electric motor for driving it and wherein the motor may be affixed to a
    wheel of the vehicle.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 193 for bicycles light systems in which the
    bicycle light and an electric wheel driven generator are combined.


CLS 310/68
TXT Subject matter under subclass 66 in which the other subject matter is one
    or more electric circuit elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motor Power Systems, subclasses 830+ for induction
    motor systems having circuit control means built into the induction motor.


CLS 310/69
TXT Subject matter under subclass 68 having a shaft driven switch.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to blasting generators
    having a shaft driven switch.


CLS 310/70
TXT Subject matter under subclass 69 having a distributor or timer.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to ignition magnetos
    having a distributor switch or a timer switch as an integral part thereof.


CLS 310/71
TXT Subject matter under subclass 68 having connectors, terminals or lead-ins.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, subclasses 2+ for electric
    motor traction systems having a system of distribution to energize the
    electric motor.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 107 and 192 for inductive devices with
    connectors or having windings with terminals, taps or coil conductor end
    anchoring means, respectively.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for a connector
    terminal, or lead-in, per se.


CLS 310/72
TXT Subject matter under subclass 68 having an impedance device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    electric motors having significant electric circuits.


CLS 310/73
TXT Subject matter under subclass 68 having illuminating devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, appropriate subclasses for illuminating devices, per
    se, and for combined structure of illuminating and nonilluminating device.


CLS 310/74
TXT Subject matter under subclass 66 in which the other element is an inertia
    or flywheel device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 572+ for flywheels, per
    se, and for rotors, per se.


CLS 310/75
TXT Subject matter under subclass 66 in which the other element is a drive
    mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118+,   for similar subject matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 149 for internal combustion
    engines having generator igniting devices which are driven by the engine.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclass 245 for electric railway
    switching and signaling systems having a car actuated generator.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 9+ for this subject
    matter having a significant electric circuit.


CLS 310/76
TXT Subject matter under subclass 75 having a brake and a clutch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92+,    for torque transmitting electrodynamic clutches or brakes, per se,
    and for the electric control systems for these devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, appropriate subclass for
    miscellaneous clutch and brake systems.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 362+ and the other
    classes and subclasses referred to in the search notes of these subclasses
    for this subject matter having a significant electric circuit.


CLS 310/77
TXT Subject matter under subclass 75 having a brake.

    (1)     Note.  Consult the search notes to subclass 76, above.


CLS 310/78
TXT Subject matter under subclass 75 having a clutch.

    (1)     Note.  Consult the search notes to subclass 76, above.


CLS 310/79
TXT Subject matter under subclass 75 having a shaft and armature timing or
    phasing connection.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to dynamoelectric
    devices having means for adjusting the space-phase of the dynamoelectric
    device with respect to its source of mechanical energy or its mechanical
    load.


CLS 310/80
TXT Subject matter under subclass 75 having motion conversion means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses for mechanical
    movements.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 14 for this subject
    matter having a significant circuit.


CLS 310/81
TXT Subject matter under subclass 80 having an unbalanced weight.

    (1)     Note.  The subclass relates, for example, to dynamoelectric devices
    of the rotary type which have an unbalanced rotor and act to produce
    vibratory motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    601,    Surgery:  Kinesitherapy, subclasses 67+ for subject matter utilized
    for kinesitherapy.


CLS 310/82
TXT Subject matter under subclass 80 having a swash plate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 60 for swash plate
    mechanisms, per se.


CLS 310/83
TXT Subject matter under subclass 80 having gearing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 640+ for gearing, per se.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 12+ and 15 for this
    subject matter having a significant electric circuit.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, for planetary
    gearing.


CLS 310/84
TXT Subject matter under subclass 80 relating to impulse couplings.


CLS 310/85
TXT Subject matter under subclass 66 having mechanical shields or protectors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 600+ and
    the classes referred to in the search notes to Class 361, subclasses 600+
    for housings for electrical apparatus.


CLS 310/86
TXT Subject matter under subclass 85 having a shield in the air gap.


CLS 310/87
TXT Subject matter under subclass 85 having means to render the device
    submersible.


CLS 310/88
TXT Subject matter under subclass 85 having means to render the device dirt,
    moisture or explosion proof.

    (1)     Note.  A dynamoelectric device may be rendered explosion proof by
    filling all voids within the device in such manner that the passages are
    not sufficiently large to support a flame or explosion, because of the lose
    of energy from the flame or explosion by radiation to the surrounding mass
    of solid material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87,     for this subject matter when submersible.


CLS 310/89
TXT Subject matter under subclass 85 relating to housings, windows or covers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 50+ for
    miscellaneous boxes and housings for electrical apparatus having only a
    single type of electrical apparatus within the box or housing.  Also
    consult the search notes to Class 174, subclasses 50+ for related art.


CLS 310/90
TXT Subject matter under subclass 66 having means to adjust a bearing or an air
    cap or to lubricate a bearing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, appropriate subclasses for bearings or bearings and means
    to lubricate the bearing.


CLS 310/90.5
TXT Magnetic bearing:

    Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein the bearing has an induction field.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 647+, especially indented subclass 648
    for electrically heating a body while magnetically suspending or supporting
    it.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 201+ for photoelectric cell systems
    adapted for use in magnetic suspensions.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 166 for means for
    suspending a body by means of an induction field.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 151 for electric
    meters having magnetic suspensions.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ for
    control circuits for electromagnetic devices, especially subclasses 143+ or
    magnetic retention.


CLS 310/91
TXT Subject matter under subclass 66 having supports.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclass for miscellaneous supports of
    general application.


CLS 310/92
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 relating to torque transmitting clutches
    and brakes and the systems utilized with torque transmitting clutches.

    (1)     Note.  The torque which is transmitted in the devices of this and
    indented subclasses is transmitted through the medium of an electromagnetic
    field. When the torque is transmitted by frictional contact, consult the
    classes referred to below under Search Class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 862+ for torque type
    dynamometers, utilized in testing, some of which utilize electromagnetic
    clutches and brakes.

    188,    Brakes, for mechanical brakes.  Note subclasses 158+ for electric
    operators for such brakes.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, appropriate subclasses for
    mechanical clutches and for systems utilizing a mechanical clutch as part
    thereof.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclass for
    electric motor systems having an electromagnetic clutch or brake as part
    thereof.  Also consult the extensive search notes to the class definition
    of Class 318 (note particularly the reference to Classes 188 and 192 under
    section IV) for related art.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 12 for single
    generator system having an electromagnetic clutch for connecting and
    disconnecting the generator from the source of power, and subclass 40 for
    similar subject matter and which the electromagnetic clutch is utilized to
    control the speed of the generator.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 207 for
    electrostatic relay circuits, such as those which utilize piezoelectric
    devices or the Winslow effect.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 223+ for pumps having dynamoelectric clutches for
    connecting and disconnecting the pump from a source of mechanical power.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, appropriate subclasses for a flexible coupling between a
    shaft and driven member.


CLS 310/93
TXT Subject matter under subclass 92 utilized for braking.

    (1)     Note.  Consult the search notes to subclass 92, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclass 267 for a brake or shock absorber using magnetic
    flux to retard motion.


CLS 310/94
TXT Subject matter under subclass 92 having means to automatically control it.

    (1)     Note.  Consult the search notes to subclass 92, above.


CLS 310/95
TXT Subject matter under subclass 94 automatically responsive to speed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 236+ for
    miscellaneous speed controlled systems.


CLS 310/96
TXT Subject matter under subclass 92 having drive mechanism, other than the
    torque transmitting clutch or brake.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75+,    for similar subject matter utilized in rotary electric motors and
    generators.


CLS 310/97
TXT Subject matter under subclass 96 having an output bias or resistance device.


CLS 310/98
TXT Subject matter under subclass 96 having a drive motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    477,    Interrelated Power Delivery Controls, Including Engine Control, for
    interrelated control between an engine and a transmission, clutch, or brake.


CLS 310/99
TXT Subject matter under subclass 96 having gearing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83,     for similar subject matter in rotary dynamoelectric machinery.


CLS 310/100
TXT Subject matter under subclass 96 having a mechanical clutch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, appropriate subclasses for
    mechanical clutches, per se.


CLS 310/101
TXT Subject matter under subclass 92 having plural units.


CLS 310/102
TXT Subject matter under subclass 92 which is adapted to be used with a
    generator motor.


CLS 310/103
TXT Subject matter under subclass 92 in which the torque is transmitted through
    a magnetic field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92      through 102, for torque transmitting clutches in which the torque
    is transmitted through an electrostatic field or by means of the Winslow
    effect.


CLS 310/104
TXT Subject matter under subclass 103 having a shield in the air gap.

    (1)     Note.  The shield may, for example hermetically separate the rotor
    from the stator.


CLS 310/105
TXT Subject matter under subclass 103 in which the magnetic field induces eddy
    or other induced currents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166+,   for alternating current induction motors.


CLS 310/106
TXT Subject matter under subclass 105 having a magnetic reluctance feature.


CLS 310/107
TXT Subject matter under subclass 105 having collection means for the induced
    currents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219+,   for current collectors, per se.


CLS 310/108
TXT Subject matter under subclass 107 having means to deliver the current which
    is collected to an external device.

    (1)     Note.  The external device, for example, may be a variable
    resistance.


CLS 310/109
TXT Subject matter under subclass 108 in which the external device is an
    electric motor.


CLS 310/110
TXT Subject matter under subclass 108 in which the external device is an
    impedance.


CLS 310/111
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 relating to the modification of generated
    wave forms.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to wave generators and
    to generators having a special distribution of coil windings to obtain a
    specific wave form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, subclasses 725+ for electrical and musical instruments
    having generator means to generate a particular way form, such as electric
    organs.


CLS 310/112
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 relating to plural units which are
    structurally united.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to generators
    structurally united with exciters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 13 for generator
    systems having an electric motor to drive the generator.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 202 for
    balancer set systems.


CLS 310/113
TXT Subject matter under subclass 112 relating to motor generator sets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclass 104 for dynamoelectric
    machine converter systems having plural structurally united units.


CLS 310/114
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 having plural rotary elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    for subject matter having plural distinct units.


CLS 310/115
TXT Subject matter under subclass 114 in which both the field and the armature
    of a dynamoelectric device rotate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 539 for this subject
    matter in combination with a significant electric circuit.

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, subclasses 835+ for
    running-speed control systems in which the field as well as the armature
    may be rotatable.


CLS 310/116
TXT Subject matter under subclass 115 in which the amount of motion is limited.


CLS 310/117
TXT Subject matter under subclass 116 having means to mechanically bias one or
    both of the rotatable elements.


CLS 310/118
TXT Subject matter under subclass 115 having drive mechanism to interconnect
    the field and armature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75+,    for similar subject matter.


CLS 310/119
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 in which the interconnecting mechanism is
    a fluid drive mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for dynamoelectric devices having a kinetic fluid.


CLS 310/120
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 in which the drive mechanism is friction
    drive mechanism.


CLS 310/121
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 in which the interconnection drive
    mechanism includes a mechanical element whose motion is controlled by means
    other than the armature or the field.

    (1)     Note.  The mechanical element, for example, may be an escapement.


CLS 310/122
TXT Subject matter under subclass 121 in which the mechanically controlled
    element is controlled by an additional dynamoelectric machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112+,   for plural units which are structurally united.


CLS 310/123
TXT Subject matter under subclass 121 in which the mechanically controlled
    element is controlled by means of a friction brake.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for similar subject matter.


CLS 310/124
TXT Subject matter under subclass 114 having plural short circuited rotary
    elements.


CLS 310/125
TXT Subject matter under subclass 124 in which one of the short circuited
    elements is of the squirrel cage type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166+,   for alternating current induction motors having squirrel cage type
    rotors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 318+ for plural
    induction motor rotor members with a significant electric circuit which may
    include plural squirrel cage members; and subclasses 830+ for plural short
    circuited induction motor rotor members in an electric motor system
    controlled by movable motor structure.


CLS 310/126
TXT Subject matter under subclass 114 having plural armatures in a common field.


CLS 310/127
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 having plural collectors for transferring
    the current between the rotor and a stationary part of the dynamoelectric
    device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 495+ for
    miscellaneous electric motor systems having plural armature or rotor
    windings with means to control the current flowing therein.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 203 for
    dynamoelectric machine systems for controlling the voltage magnitude and
    plural sets of brushes.


CLS 310/128
TXT Subject matter under subclass 127 having both commutator and slip ring type
    collectors.


CLS 310/129
TXT Subject matter under subclass 128 adapted for use as a synchronous or
    rotary converter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 45+,
    82 and 151 for miscellaneous conversion systems having rotary converters.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 719 for synchronous
    motor systems wherein the synchronous motors are self excited.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 102+ and 174+ for
    rotary converter systems.


CLS 310/130
TXT Subject matter under subclass 129 adapted to be used for plural wire direct
    current systems.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to converters adapted to
    be used with the Edison three wire systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 202 for
    balancer set systems.


CLS 310/131
TXT Subject matter under subclass 128 having plural separate armature circuits.


CLS 310/132
TXT Subject matter under subclass 131 having a polyphase armature winding.


CLS 310/133
TXT Subject matter under subclass 128 having an armature winding which is
    common to both the commutator and the slip ring collector.


CLS 310/134
TXT Subject matter under subclass 133 having plural field windings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclass 104 for this subject
    matter in combination with a significant electric conversion circuit.


CLS 310/135
TXT Subject matter under subclass 128 having means to connect the field of the
    dynamoelectric device to the commutator collector.


CLS 310/136
TXT Subject matter under subclass 127 having plural commutator type collectors.


CLS 310/137
TXT Subject matter under subclass 136 adapted to be used as double current
    direct current machines.


CLS 310/138
TXT Subject matter under subclass 137 in which one of the commutator type
    collectors is adapted to be used as an input and the other is adapted to be
    used as an output.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to the Dynamotor type
    machines.


CLS 310/139
TXT Subject matter under subclass 137 having hetro-axial excitation.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to double current direct
    current machines having cross field excitation.


CLS 310/140
TXT Subject matter under subclass 136 having plural armature windings.


CLS 310/141
TXT Subject matter under subclass 140 having plural field windings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclass 104 for this subject
    matter in combination with a significant electric conversion circuit.


CLS 310/142
TXT Subject matter under subclass 136 having plural field windings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclass 104 for this subject
    matter in combination with significant electric conversion circuit.


CLS 310/143
TXT Subject matter under subclass 127 having plural slip ring sets.


CLS 310/144
TXT Subject matter under subclass 143 having plural armature windings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 90 for this
    subject matter when utilized in a single generator system.


CLS 310/145
TXT Subject matter under subclass 144 having plural sets of poles.


CLS 310/146
TXT Subject matter under subclass 144 in which the armature windings are
    polyphase windings.


CLS 310/147
TXT Subject matter under subclass 144 in which the slip rings are connected in
    the field circuit.


CLS 310/148
TXT Subject matter under subclass 127 having plural sets of brushes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239+    and 248+, for brush holders or rigging and for brushes, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 53 for single
    generator systems wherein the generator has an odd number of brushes as,
    for example, third brush type generator.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 203 for
    dynamoelectric voltage magnitude machines having plural sets of brushes in
    combination with a significant electrical system.


CLS 310/149
TXT Subject matter under subclass 148 having plural field windings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclass 104 for this subject
    matter in combination with a significant electric conversion circuit.


CLS 310/150
TXT Subject matter under subclass 149 having means for connecting the field
    windings in a polyphase manner.


CLS 310/151
TXT Subject matter under subclass 148 having means for connecting one brush to
    another brush by a direct connection having negligible impedance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 92 for this
    subject matter in a generating system.


CLS 310/152
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 having a permanent magnet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 84, 92, 179, 205+, and 229+ for devices
    comprising at least one permanent magnet combined with an armature.


CLS 310/153
TXT Subject matter under subclass 152 in which the permanent magnet is combined
    with a flywheel.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to flywheel magneto
    machines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 572+ for flywheels and
    rotors, per se.


CLS 310/154
TXT Subject matter under subclass 152 in which the permanent magnet is the
    stator of the dynamoelectric machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 151 for galvanometers
    and other meters having similar structure.


CLS 310/155
TXT Subject matter under subclass 154 having means, in relation with the
    permanent magnet stator, to produce a variable reluctance so that the
    amount of magnetic flux traversing a certain part of the magnetic path
    varies.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168+,   for this subject matter in nonpermanent magnet alternating current
    generators.


CLS 310/156
TXT Subject matter under subclass 152 having a permanent magnet rotor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 146 for similar
    subject matter utilized in electric meters.


CLS 310/157
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 which is vertically disposed.


CLS 310/158
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 relating to universal motors which will
    operate with either alternating current or direct current sources.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 245 and 246+ for
    universal motor systems.


CLS 310/159
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 relating to alternating current rotary
    dynamoelectric devices.


CLS 310/160
TXT Subject matter under subclass 159 relating to frequency converters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127+,   for this subject matter having plural collectors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, subclasses 725+ for this subject matter in an electrical
    musical instrument, such as an electric organ.

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, subclass 7 for this subject
    matter in a distribution system utilized for transmitting electricity to a
    moving vehicle from a stationary point.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 157+, especially
    subclasses 174+ for this subject matter in a conversion system.


CLS 310/161
TXT Subject matter under subclass 159 relating to dynamoelectric machinery for
    shifting the phase of the alternating current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    201-204 for this subclass matter in a phase control system.


CLS 310/162
TXT Subject matter under subclass 159 relating to synchronous dynamoelectric
    machinery.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 700+ for this
    subject matter in a synchronous motor system.


CLS 310/163
TXT Subject matter under subclass 162 of the reaction type.


CLS 310/164
TXT Subject matter under subclass 163 having a toroidal coil.


CLS 310/165
TXT Subject matter under subclass 162 having an electromagnetic coil which is
    adapted to be energized by direct current.


CLS 310/166
TXT Subject matter under subclass 159 of the induction motor or induction
    generator type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 727+ for induction
    motor systems.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 47 for induction
    generator systems.


CLS 310/167
TXT Subject matter under subclass 166 having means to start a dynamoelectric
    machine, which is utilized as a motor, by the use of repulsion starting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 725+ for repulsion
    motor systems; and subclass 728 for repulsion start induction motor systems.


CLS 310/168
TXT Subject matter under subclass 166 relating to inductor type generators
    wherein the magnetic circuit is varied by varying the reluctance of said
    magnetic circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155,    for this subject matter having a permanent magnet in the magnetic
    circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 47 for induction
    type generator systems.


CLS 310/169
TXT Subject matter under subclass 168 relating to high frequency generators.

    (1)     Note.  The high frequency is obtained, for example, by the use of
    saw tooth reluctance type rotor, which is rotated at a high rate of speed.


CLS 310/170
TXT Subject matter under subclass 169 relating to multi-frequency generators.


CLS 310/171
TXT Subject matter under subclass 166 relating to induction generators.

    (1)     Note.  An induction generator is a synchronous motor which is
    either self excited by connecting a large condenser in its output circuit
    or by driving it above synchronous speed while connected to an energized
    circuit.


CLS 310/172
TXT Subject matter under subclass 166 relating to shifting field type induction
    motors.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to the shaded pole type
    of induction motor in which, although only a single phase of current is
    connected to the motor, a true rotating field is obtained by the use of
    pole faces which are partly free and partly surrounded by a short circuited
    coil.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 750 for reversing
    shaded pole induction motor systems; and subclasses 781+ for shaded pole
    induction motor systems.


CLS 310/173
TXT Subject matter under subclass 159 having a commutator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127+,   for this subject matter having plural commutators.

    167,    for this subject matter in an induction motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 725+ for repulsion
    motor systems and subclasses 244+ for other alternating current motor
    systems in which the motor has a commutator.


CLS 310/174
TXT Subject matter under subclass 173 for use with a single phase of
    alternating current.


CLS 310/175
TXT Subject matter under subclass 174 in which the armature windings are
    conductively connected to the source of energy.


CLS 310/176
TXT Subject matter under subclass 174 in which the armature winding is
    connected to the source of energy by means of transformer action.


CLS 310/177
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 relating to direct current dynamoelectric
    machines.


CLS 310/178
TXT Subject matter under subclass 177 relating to homopolar dynamoelectric
    machines.

    (1)     Note.  A homopolar dynamoelectric machine is one in which the
    moving armature conductor is not in the form of a coil, but is rather in
    the form of one half of a single turn.  Generally, this is achieved by
    utilizing a disk or a cylinder as the coil with pairs of brushes to conduct
    the current from and to the conductor at spaced points.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 253 for homopolar
    motor systems.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 48 for this
    subject matter utilized in a generator system.


CLS 310/179
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 relating to windings and core structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 76.11+ for the
    structure of integrating electric meters having a rotary portion which
    operates in the manner of an electric motor.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 220+ for the structure of electromagnets.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for the structure of
    inductor and inductive reactors.


CLS 310/180
TXT Subject matter under subclass 179 relating to field or excitation windings
    or core structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 521+ for electric
    motor systems having means to control the field.


CLS 310/181
TXT Subject matter under subclass 180 having a combined permanent and
    electromagnet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152+,   for permanent magnet machines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 46 for generator
    control systems in which the generator has a combined permanent and wound
    field structure.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 229+ for devices with electromagnets combined
    with permanent magnets having an armature.


CLS 310/182
TXT Subject matter under subclass 180 having a short circuited winding or
    conductor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 73+ for inductive devices having
    closed coils or single conductor members (e.g., rings, bands, discs, etc.,
    of conductive material).


CLS 310/183
TXT Subject matter under subclass 182 having a damper type winding.

    (1)     Note.  A damper winding is a winding which acts to absorb higher
    frequencies of magnetic flux by ohmic dissipation or by the generation of
    induced currents which oppose the higher frequencies of flux.


CLS 310/184
TXT Subject matter under subclass 180 having plural field windings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclasses 63+ for this
    subject matter in a single generator system.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclass 104 for this subject
    matter in combination with a significant electric conversion circuit.


CLS 310/185
TXT Subject matter under subclass 184 having plural sets of poles.


CLS 310/186
TXT Subject matter under subclass 184 in which one of the plural field windings
    is an interpole, compensating or neutralizing pole.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185,    for this subject matter when associated with plural independent
    sets of poles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 521+ for this
    subject matter in an electric motor system.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclasses 64 to 66 for
    this subject matter in a single generator system.


CLS 310/187
TXT Subject matter under subclass 184 having a slotted or divided pole.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172,    for split phase induction motors having a divided pole, one half of
    which is surrounded by a short circuiting conductor.

    182+,   for field structure having short circuited windings or conductors,
    some of which are set into slots in the pole faces.


CLS 310/188
TXT Subject matter under subclass 184 relating to differentially related field
    windings.


CLS 310/189
TXT Subject matter under subclass 180 in which the field coil has a variable
    length or a tapped winding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 71 for this
    subject matter in a single generator system.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 150 for inductor tap changing means.

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, subclasses 835+ for
    running-speed control systems in which the length of the field winding may
    be varied.


CLS 310/190
TXT Subject matter under subclass 180 having a magnetic shunt for shifting the
    field flux.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 220+ for miscellaneous magneto-mechanical
    devices which may utilize flux shunting means, see especially subclasses
    236+.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 133 and 160+ for inductive devices
    with adjustable magnetic shunts and inductive regulators with magnetic
    shunts, respectively.


CLS 310/191
TXT Subject matter under subclass 180 having adjustable magnetic structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    190,    for the subject matter where the adjustable structure is a magnetic
    shunt.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 538+ for electric
    motor systems in which the motor structure is controlled or adjusted.
    Consult the search notes to these classes for related art.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclasses 49+ for a single
    generator system in which the magnetic structure of a generator is
    controlled or adjusted.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 132+ for inductive devices having
    plural core parts which are relatively adjustable.


CLS 310/192
TXT Subject matter under subclass 180 having nonmagnetic inserts or air gaps in
    the field or winding structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 135+, 165 and 178 for core structure
    with adjustable air gap, an air gap in the magnetic shunt of an inductive
    regulator and inductive devices having closed cores with air gaps,
    respectively.


CLS 310/193
TXT Subject matter under subclass 180 having a nonuniform core cross section.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 155+ for inductive regulators of the
    saturable type having nonuniform core cross sections, where a part of the
    core, having a small cross section, saturates before other parts of the
    core, having larger cross sections, saturate.


CLS 310/194
TXT Subject matter under subclass 180 relating to coil supports and spools.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 185 and 208 for coil supports for
    plural coil windings and coils on preformed supports or mounts (for single
    coil windings), respectively.


CLS 310/195
TXT Subject matter under subclass 179 relating to armature or primary windings
    or core structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 134+ for the
    structure of armatures utilized in integrating type electric meters.


CLS 310/196
TXT Subject matter under subclass 195 relating to the prevention of corona
    discharges.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 140+ for
    insulators having means to distribute a voltage stress along the insulator.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 70 for coil capacitance modifying surge
    potential gradient modifying means.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 212+ for
    the discharging of static electricity.


CLS 310/197
TXT Subject matter under subclass 195 having a short circuited winding or
    conductor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166+,   for complete induction motors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 73+ for inductive devices having
    closed coils or single conductor members (e.g., rings, bands, discs, etc.,
    of conductive material).


CLS 310/198
TXT Subject matter under subclass 195 having plural windings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 495+ for this
    subject matter in an electric motor system.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 90 for this
    subject matter in a single generator system.


CLS 310/199
TXT Subject matter under subclass 198 relating to combined stationary and
    rotary windings.


CLS 310/200
TXT Subject matter under subclass 195 having a variable length or a tapped
    winding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 93 for this
    subject matter in a single generator system.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 137+ for adjustable inductor having
    means to change the coil length or connections. Note especially indented
    subclass 150 for that subject matter having tap changing means.  Also see
    subclass 15 for inductive devices with variable length coils, whose length
    varies through winding and/or unwinding of the coil.


CLS 310/201
TXT Subject matter under subclass 195 in which the winding conductors are in
    the form of bars.


CLS 310/202
TXT Subject matter under subclass 195 in which the winding conductors are in
    the form of open windings.

    (1)     Note.  An open winding is a winding of the type in which, starting
    from a given point, it is not possible to reach that given point again by
    continuously going along the winding in only one direction.


CLS 310/203
TXT Subject matter under subclass 195 relating to closed windings.

    (1)     Note.  A closed winding is a winding of such type that it is
    possible to arrive at any point by leaving that point and traversing the
    winding continuously in only one direction.


CLS 310/204
TXT Subject matter under subclass 203 relating to equalizers or equalizer
    windings.


CLS 310/205
TXT Subject matter under subclass 203 relating to multiplex windings.


CLS 310/206
TXT Subject matter under subclass 203 relating to lap windings.


CLS 310/207
TXT Subject matter under subclass 203 relating wave windings.


CLS 310/208
TXT Subject matter under subclass 195 relating to coils.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194,    for similar subject matter.


CLS 310/209
TXT Subject matter under subclass 195 relating to adjustable magnetic structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 538+ for the subject
    matter in electric motor systems.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclasses 49+ for this
    subject matter in a single generator system.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 132+ for inductive devices having
    plural core parts which are relatively adjustable.


CLS 310/210
TXT Subject matter under subclass 179 relating to secondary windings or
    conductors.

    (1)     Note.  A secondary winding or conductor is one in which current is
    induced by transformer action.


CLS 310/211
TXT Subject matter under subclass 210 relating to squirrel cage type secondary
    windings.


CLS 310/212
TXT Subject matter under subclass 211 having inherently variable impedance at
    variable frequencies.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to squirrel cage rotors
    in which the rotor bars are in the form of ribbons, set in deep slots so
    that the inductive reactance of the different portions of a ribbon are
    different. This subclass also relates, for example, to double squirrel cage
    type rotors.


CLS 310/213
TXT Subject matter under subclass 179 relating to antiparasitic conductors.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to the elimination of
    skin current effects in dynamoelectric machine windings; in which, due to
    the action of different inherent reactances in different parts of a common
    conductor the current is caused to concentrate in one part of the conductor
    with resulting excess heating.  Such current concentration and excess
    heating can be avoided, for example, by dividing these conductors into a
    plurality of parallel members which are twisted about each other and
    insulated from each other everywhere except by their ends, where they are
    conductively joined.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 114 for split or
    imbricated conductors, per se.


CLS 310/214
TXT Subject matter under subclass 179 relating to coil retainers or slot
    closers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 544+ for stock
    materials, e.g., of indefinite length, which are all metal or have adjacent
    metal components.


CLS 310/215
TXT Subject matter under subclass 179 relating to slot liners.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 196+ for inductor devices (e.g.,
    transformers and inductive reactors) having supporting or spacing means
    between coil and core.


CLS 310/216
TXT Subject matter under subclass 179 relating to core features.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 210-213, 216-219 and 233+ for various
    features of magnetic core structure in inductive devices, of which
    subclasses 233+ is the general subclass for cores not elsewhere classified.


CLS 310/217
TXT Subject matter under subclass 216 relating to means for securing laminae.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 210 for inductive devices with core
    clamps, wedges or fasteners for securing magnetic core lamination.


CLS 310/218
TXT Subject matter under subclass 216 relating to pole assembly and securing
    means.


CLS 310/219
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 relating to current collectors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, subclasses 45+ for similar
    subject matter where current is collected from an extended conductor by a
    traveling brush.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 541+ for electric
    motor systems having current collector control means, such as brush
    shifting means.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclasses 53 and 54+ for
    single generator systems having brush control means for shifting the
    generator brush.

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, subclass 836 for running-speed
    control systems in which the position or number of brushes may be varied.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 1+ for a pair of relatively
    movable electrical connectors.


CLS 310/220
TXT Subject matter under subclass 219 relating to the reduction of sparking at
    the current collector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 439 for electric motor
    systems having means to control the commutation.


CLS 310/221
TXT Subject matter under subclass 220 having arc extinguishing means.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to dynamoelectric
    devices having means to extinguish arcs that result when the commutator
    flashes over.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    safety and protection of systems and devices, indented subclasses 2+ for
    arc control, subclasses 20+ for generator protective circuits, and
    subclasses 23+ for motor protective circuits.


CLS 310/222
TXT Subject matter under subclass 220 for providing a spark neutralizing
    current.


CLS 310/223
TXT Subject matter under subclass 220 having flux compensating means.


CLS 310/224
TXT Subject matter under subclass 223 in which the flux compensating means is a
    compensating pole or winding.


CLS 310/225
TXT Subject matter under subclass 223 in which the flux compensating means is a
    short circuited coil circuit.


CLS 310/226
TXT Subject matter under subclass 223 in which the flux compensating means is a
    means to introduce a distortion of the magnetic field.


CLS 310/227
TXT Subject matter under subclass 219 having cooling means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52+,    for rotary dynamoelectric machinery having cooling means for
    cooling more than the current collector per se.


CLS 310/228
TXT Subject matter under subclass 219 having cleaning, lubricating, resurfacing
    or repairing means as part thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 597 for miscellaneous methods of
    manufacturing and repairing commutators.


CLS 310/229
TXT Subject matter under subclass 219 having means to cause a brush to traverse
    along a path which is parallel to the axis of rotation of the
    dynamoelectric device.

    (1)     Note.  The brush traverse may, for example, be an adjustment to
    regulate the position of the brush or it may be, for example, a means to
    cause the brush to traverse back and forth continuously so as to distribute
    wear.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 541+ for this
    subject matter in an electric motor system.


CLS 310/230
TXT Subject matter under subclass 219 having means for circumferentially
    shifting the position of the brush in order to effect reversal of the
    direction of rotation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 292 for this subject
    matter in an electric motor system.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclasses 53 and 54+ for
    this subject matter in a single generator system.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 203 for
    this subject matter in a voltage magnitude control system.


CLS 310/231
TXT Subject matter under subclass 219 relating to rotary structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 569 for stock
    materials or intermediate articles which comprise continuous interengaged
    phases of plural metals, at least one of which contains molybdenum or
    tungsten.


CLS 310/232
TXT Subject matter under subclass 231 relating to slip rings.


CLS 310/233
TXT Subject matter under subclass 231 relating to commutators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 507 for miscellaneous methods of
    manufacturing commutators.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 138 for
    commutator segment insulators, per se.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 245+ for
    polarity reversing systems some of which have commutated type reversing
    switches.


CLS 310/234
TXT Subject matter under subclass 233 relating to winding connectors for
    connecting the winding to the commutator segments.


CLS 310/235
TXT Subject matter under subclass 233 relating to molded supports for
    supporting the commutator segments.


CLS 310/236
TXT Subject matter under subclass 233 relating to cylindrical or drum type
    commutators.


CLS 310/237
TXT Subject matter under subclass 233 relating to disk type commutators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 303+ for a multiplexing system
    having a rotary distributor.


CLS 310/238
TXT Subject matter under subclass 219 relating to fixed collector structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclasses 130+ for electrode holders for arc lamps and similar devices.


CLS 310/239
TXT Subject matter under subclass 238 relating to brush holders or rigging.


CLS 310/240
TXT Subject matter under subclass 239 relating to means for lifting the brushes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 728 for induction
    motor systems in which the induction motor starts as a repulsion motor.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclasses 54+ for this
    subject matter in a single generator system.


CLS 310/241
TXT Subject matter under subclass 239 having means for circumferentially
    adjusting the position of the brushes.


CLS 310/242
TXT Subject matter under subclass 239 relating to means for holding or guiding
    the brushes.


CLS 310/243
TXT Subject matter under subclass 239 having means for operating the brush
    rigging or holders by means of fluid pressure.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to brush rigging in
    which the pressure of the brush against the commutator is determined by
    fluid pressure.


CLS 310/244
TXT Subject matter under subclass 239 in which the brush is affixed to a
    pivoted arm.


CLS 310/245
TXT Subject matter under subclass 239 in which the brush is slidably positioned
    in its holder.


CLS 310/246
TXT Subject matter under subclass 245 having an arm which presses against the
    brush to exert pressure between the brush and the commutator or slip ring.


CLS 310/247
TXT Subject matter under subclass 245 having an axial spring to press upon the
    brush so as to exert pressure between the brush and the commutator or slip
    ring.


CLS 310/248
TXT Subject matter under subclass 238 relating to brushes, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, appropriate subclasses for
    electric arc furnaces some of which utilize electrodes which are analogous
    to the brushes of this and indented subclasses.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 326+ (note
    particularly indented subclass 357) for electrodes for electric lamp and
    discharge devices, some of which are analogous to the brushes of this and
    the indented subclasses.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 60 for arc lamp electrodes, some of which are analogous to this
    and indented subclasses.


CLS 310/249
TXT Subject matter under subclass 248 having an electrical connector.

    (1)     Note.  The electrical connector, for example, may be a copper
    pigtail which is integral with a carbon brush.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for an electrical
    connector, generally.


CLS 310/251
TXT Subject matter under subclass 250 in which the structure is made of
    composite materials.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 615+ for
    composite stock materials, such as, for example, plural metallic layers
    with interleaved nonmetallic layers.


CLS 310/252
TXT Subject matter under subclass 248 relating to the composition of the brush.

    (1)     Note.  The search should, in all instances, continue in the class
    which relates to the composition, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses for
    coating or plastic compositions in general.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 500+ for electrically conductive
    compositions and for brushes defined solely in terms of the composition of
    which they are composed.


CLS 310/253
TXT Subject matter under subclass 252 relating to carbonaceous compositions.


CLS 310/254
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 relating to stator structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 210-213, 216-219 and 233+ for various
    features of magnetic core structure of inductive devices, of which subclass
    233 is the general subclass for inductor device cores not elsewhere
    classified.


CLS 310/255
TXT Subject matter under subclass 254 relating to railway type machines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 49+ for electric locomotives.


CLS 310/256
TXT Subject matter under subclass 254 relating to the prevention of flux loss
    due to stray fields.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 84+ for inductor devices with electric
    and magnetic shielding means.


CLS 310/257
TXT Subject matter under subclass 254 relating to interfitting or claw tooth
    stators.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263,    for interfitting or claw tooth rotors.


CLS 310/258
TXT Subject matter under subclass 254 relating to stator structure of the frame
    and separate core type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 281 for electromagnets of the solenoid type having
    specific core structure of material and subclasses 297+ for core structure
    of electromagnets generally.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 212, 216+ and 233+ for core structure
    or material of inductor generally.


CLS 310/259
TXT Subject matter under subclass 258 relating to core assembly.


CLS 310/260
TXT Subject matter under subclass 258 relating to end turn supports.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270,    for end turn supports for rotors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 197 for inductor devices having coil
    clamps or wedges to secure or space coil and core.


CLS 310/261
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 relating to rotor structure, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 210-213, 216-219 and 233+ for various
    features of magnetic core structure of inductive devices, of which subclass
    233 in the general subclass for inductor device cores not elsewhere
    classified.


CLS 310/262
TXT Subject matter under subclass 261 relating to high speed rotors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168+,   especially 169+, for induction type generators utilizing high speed
    rotors.


CLS 310/263
TXT Subject matter under subclass 261 relating to interfitting or claw tooth
    rotors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257,    for interfitting or claw tooth stators.


CLS 310/264
TXT Subject matter under subclass 261 relating to armatures, per se.


CLS 310/265
TXT Subject matter under subclass 264 relating to drum type armatures.


CLS 310/266
TXT Subject matter under subclass 264 relating to hollow armatures.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to armatures having a
    double air gap.


CLS 310/267
TXT Subject matter under subclass 264 relating to ring type armatures.


CLS 310/268
TXT Subject matter under subclass 264 relating to disc type armatures.


CLS 310/269
TXT Subject matter under subclass 264 relating to salient pole armatures.


CLS 310/270
TXT Subject matter under subclass 261 relating to end turn supports.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    260,    for end turn supports for stator windings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 197 for inductor devices having coil
    clamps or wedges to secure or space core and coil.


CLS 310/271
TXT Subject matter under subclass 261 relating to banding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262,    for high speed type rotors.


CLS 310/272
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 relating to elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 567 to 617 for mechanical
    elements, per se.


CLS 310/273
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 relating to miscellaneous features not set
    forth in the indented subclasses under subclass 40.


CLS 310/300
TXT NONDYNAMOELECTRIC:

    Subject matter under the class definition which is not related to the
    conversion of energy between the electrical and mechanical state by
    electromagnetic action.

    (1)     Note.  Consult the classes referred to in the search notes to the
    class definition of this class for other classes having similar subject
    matter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10+,    for subject matter under the class definition related to the
    conversion of energy between the electrical and the mechanical state by
    means of electromagnetic action.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 116+ for the subject
    matter of this subclass in combination with an electrical system.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 2 for subject
    matter of this subclass in an electric generator system.


CLS 310/301
TXT Nuclear reaction:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 relating to the obtaining of energy in
    the electrical state from the internal energy of the atom.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to electric generators
    consisting of radioactive sources which acquire a charge due to the
    emission of electrons or other ionized particles at such a high speed as to
    go through a considerable adverse electric gradient before being collected.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 94 for electrical oscillators of the
    molecular or particle resonant type (e.g., Maser).

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclasses 100+ for fusion reactors; and subclasses 347+ for fission
    reactors.


CLS 310/302
TXT Contact potential difference:

    Subject matter under subclass 301 comprising at least a pair of metal
    electrodes having dissimilar work functions and a material (e.g., gas)
    ionized by a radioactive source, the electrodes and the material so
    arranged relative to each other that the ions of the material, under the
    influence of the field established between the electrodes are collected by
    the electrodes to provide a source of current for an external load.


CLS 310/303
TXT P-N semiconductor:

    Subject matter under subclass 301 comprising two intimately united
    semiconductor materials, one of the N type and one of the P type, and a
    radioactive source which irradiates the semiconductor materials to liberate
    charge carriers (electrons and holes) therein which flow under the
    influence of the field across the junction of the semiconductor materials
    to be collected on opposite sides of the junction and thus, provide a
    source of current for an external load.


CLS 310/304
TXT Secondary electron emission:

    Subject matter under subclass 301 wherein energy from a radioactive source
    is directed toward a material which emits electrons in response thereto,
    the emitted electrons being collected by an electrode and providing a
    source of current and potential for an external load between the electrode
    and the radioactive source and/or the electron emissive material.


CLS 310/305
TXT Direct charged particle emission:

    Subject matter under subclass 301 comprising a radioactive source of
    charged particles and electrode means (cathode and/or anode) to collect the
    charged particles to provide a source of current and potential for an
    external load between the electrodes or electrode and source.


CLS 310/306
TXT Thermal or pyromagnetic:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 in which the energy is changed between
    the electrical and the thermal state.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to means for generating
    electricity due to a change in the temperature of material, or to means for
    generating mechanical energy due to the change of magnetic flux which
    results from change of temperature.

    (2)     Note.  The combination of an electrical generator system and a
    nuclear reactor is provided for in Class 376, Induced Nuclear Reactions:
    Processes, Systems, and Elements, subclasses 317+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclasses 200+ for
    thermocouple batteries, per se.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 117 for thermoelectric
    motor systems, per se.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 2 for electrical
    generator systems in which electricity is converted to heat which in turn
    is converted into electricity.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 176 for a thermometer
    having a ferromagnetic sensor.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclasses 317+ for electrical generator systems in which the products of
    an induced nuclear reaction are converted to electricity.


CLS 310/307
TXT With heat actuated bimetal element:

    Subject matter under subclass 306 having structure comprised of at least
    two materials having different coefficients of expansion which structure is
    deformed by the energy in its thermal state, and during its deformation,
    does mechanical work.


CLS 310/308
TXT Charge accumulating:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 in which the electrical energy results
    from the incremental buildup of the potential charge over a period of
    operation of the device.


CLS 310/309
TXT Electrostatic:

    Subject matter under subclass 308 in which the electrical charge or
    potential is of static electricity.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to static electric
    generators, commonly known as Whinhurst machines.


CLS 310/310
TXT Friction:

    Subject matter under subclass 309 in which the static electricity is
    generated by frictional moving contact of two parts of the apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 207 for
    electrostatic electric relay systems such as those which utilize the
    Winslow effect, which is defined in the definition of that subclass.


CLS 310/311
TXT Piezoelectric elements and devices:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 which includes a shaped body of a
    material which exhibits an electrostatic polarization when subjected to
    mechanical stress or which exhibits a mechanical stress tending to produce
    deflection, expansion, or contraction when subjected to electrical stress,
    the body being so shaped relative to the electromechanical properties of
    the material as to render the body useful for the conversion of energy
    between the electrical and mechanical states, and combinations of such
    bodies with means which utilize or which contribute to the utilization of
    such bodies for the conversion of energy between the electrical and
    mechanical states.

    (1)     Note.  In the titles and definitions of the subclasses indented
    hereunder, the term "piezoelectric element" is used to denote the shaped
    body, per se, and the term "piezoelectric device" is used to denote the
    combination of such a shaped body and means which utilizes or which
    contributes to the utilization of such bodies for the conversion of energy
    between the electrical and mechanical states.

    (2)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses include piezoelectric
    materials in combination with electrodes for the piezoelectric materials,
    such devices in combination with ancillary devices (such as holders or
    ovens) and piezoelectric motors or generators. Piezoelectric crystals in
    combination with an art device are classified with the art device.

    (3)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses include patents relating to
    methods for using piezoelectric devices where such methods are not
    otherwise classified. Such methods are classified in the subclass providing
    for the apparatus required to perform the method.

    (4)     Note.  Neither this nor the indented subclasses include mere
    piezoelectric materials, nor the method of or apparatus for making
    piezoelectric materials or piezoelectric devices. For the excluded subject
    matter, see the search notes below.  Piezoelectric materials per se, when
    shaped to claimed configurations, where the configuration is disclosed as
    being significant to the piezoelectric property of the crystal (e.g.,
    plate, AT cut) are classified in indented subclasses 357+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for magnetostrictive transducers which may have similar circuitry
    or structure as that used with piezoelectric devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 25.35 for methods of making piezoelectric
    devices.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 170.08 and 170.09 for fluid flow
    direction measuring utilizing a piezoelectric sensor and subclass 170.33
    for a piezoelectric probe for oceanographic measuring.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 70 and 71.11 for repeaters which use
    piezoelectric elements.

    235,    Registers, subclass 924 for registers which use a ferroelectric
    element.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 370 and 492 for a radiant energy source
    which may be combined with a piezoelectric element.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 62.9 and the classes specified in the notes
    thereto, for piezoelectric compositions.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 400.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 508 for the
    combination of a piezoelectric element and a luminescent solid or liquid.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 118 for
    magnetostrictive motor systems which may be similar to piezoelectric motor
    systems.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 2 for the
    miscellaneous generator systems having a nonmagnetic generator (other than
    a piezoelectric generator).

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 727 for processes and
    means for subjecting a piezoelectric element to an electric test, as for
    the purpose of predicting its frequency drift, or determining the polarity
    of charge produced by mechanical stress, or of determining its activity.
    Search subclasses 76.39+ for frequency meters, per se.  Search subclass 109
    for electricity sensing, measuring, or testing using a piezoelectric
    element.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 5.5 for parametric amplifiers which may use
    piezoelectric material.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    230+  for light control by a piezoelectric opaque element.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 271+ for
    capacitors, per se, which may be similar in material or structure to a
    piezoelectric element.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, appropriate subclasses for such
    systems which utilize piezoelectric devices.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 145 for
    ferroelectric storage systems.  Note the polarization of the ferroelectric
    element is usually changed as a function of the stored information.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 117+ for temperature
    measuring using a vibratory effect.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 100 for piezoelectric materials
    produced by coating methods.


CLS 310/312
TXT Adding or subtracting mass:

    Subject matter under subclass 311 combined with a means for changing the
    mass of the piezoelectric element, e.g., depositing mass onto or
    evaporating mass from the surface of a piezoelectric element to change its
    resonant frequency.

    (1)     Note.  Other methods of changing the mass include grinding,
    cutting, or chemical etching.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 25.35 where the changing of the mass may be
    a step in the manufacture of a piezoelectric device.


CLS 310/313
TXT Surface acoustic wave devices:

    Subject matter under subclass 311 wherein a piezoelectric element is
    combined with, or comprises, a material or body having an elastic surface
    on which varying mechanical stresses produced by the piezoelectric element
    travel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334,    for piezoelectric generators of acoustic waves which travel through
    a body or material rather than on the surface of the body or material,
    e.g., "bulk mode".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 181 and 197 for devices wherein the surface
    wave device functions as a correlator or convolver.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 157+ for devices
    wherein the waveguide serves as a delay line, and subclasses 187+ where the
    surface wave device performs as an electric filter.


CLS 310/314
TXT Electrical systems:

    Subject matter under subclass 311 for supplying electric energy via an
    electric circuit element to piezoelectric devices and/or electric circuit
    elements which are supplied with electric energy by piezoelectric devices.

    (1)     Note.  The circuit element is other than just an electrode of the
    piezoelectric device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 67+ for piezoelectric transducers
    which couple an alternating current, electric circuit, and a device having
    mechanical vibrations for testing purposes and for the testing system which
    utilizes such transducers.

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 101+ for acoustic wave (especially seismic)
    which may utilize a piezoelectric element.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 400
    for electrical systems utilizing electrets.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 116 for electric motor
    control systems where the electric motor is of the piezoelectric type.
    Note that subclass 314 of this class (310) also contains some systems where
    electric potential is applied to a piezoelectric device.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 2 for the
    miscellaneous generator systems having a nonmagnetic generator (other than
    a piezoelectric generator).

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 727  for processes of
    and means for subjecting a piezoelectric crystal to an electric test, as
    for the purpose of predicting its frequency drift, or of determining the
    polarity of charge produced by mechanical stress, or of determining its
    activity.  Search subclasses 76.39+ for frequency meters, per se.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 5.5 for solid element wave propagating
    amplifiers wherein the solid element may be of the piezoelectric phonon
    type, and subclass 174 for amplifiers having electromechanical transducers,
    which may be piezoelectric crystals, in a signal coupling circuit.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 149 for delay
    networks utilizing piezoelectric devices, and subclasses 187+ for filters
    utilizing piezoelectric devices.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 211 for
    electric circuits for relays which may be piezoelectric.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, appropriate subclasses for such
    systems utilizing piezoelectric devices.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 140+ for piezoelectric transducers used in electrical acoustic
    wave communication.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 144 for a
    piezoelectric phonograph pickup.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 437+ for ultrasonic systems which may include a
    piezoelectric element.

    601,    Surgery:  Kinesitherapy, subclasses 15+ and 46+ for ultrasonic
    systems which may include a piezoelectric element.


CLS 310/315
TXT Temperature compensation circuits:

    Subject matter under subclass 314 having circuit elements associated with
    the piezoelectric element which compensate for changes in its piezoelectric
    properties upon changes in temperature, e.g., turnover point, impedance,
    frequency, resistance, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 116 for electromechanical resonator
    controlled oscillators which may compensate via electric circuit elements
    for changes in the resonator frequency due to the temperature change.


CLS 310/316
TXT Input circuit for simultaneous electrical and mechanical output from
    piezoelectric element:

    Subject matter under subclass 314 having electric circuit elements to drive
    the piezoelectric element wherein both the mechanical and electrical output
    therefrom are used.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type may include feedback
    circuits.

    (2)     Note.  A device such as a nondestructive testing unit which is
    electrically excited to produce an acoustic wave output and then receives
    the returning acoustic wave and converts that into an electric output is
    viewed as having sequential rather than simultaneous outputs for
    classification purposes under subclass 314.  Thus, such a device which
    includes electric-circuit elements for both input and output would usually
    be classified in subclass 317 or 319 rather than in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    318,    for the combination of an electric circuit element and an
    electrical resonator comprised of a piezoelectric device which converts an
    alternating electrical input voltage to mechanical motion which is entirely
    converted by the piezoelectric device itself back to an alternating
    electrical output voltage having the same frequency as, and in phase with
    the input voltage.

    321,    for such piezoelectric devices, per se, which include some
    structure other than the piezoelectric element itself to mechanically
    establish the resonant frequency of the device.

    326,    for such piezoelectric devices wherein the resonant frequency is
    established by mechanically damping undesired frequencies.

    348+,   for such piezoelectric devices, per se, in which the piezoelectric
    element itself determines the resonant frequency.


CLS 310/317
TXT Input circuit for mechanical output from piezoelectric element:

    Subject matter under subclass 314 having electric circuit elements for
    driving the piezoelectric element for the purpose of producing a usable
    mechanical output therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    316,    for similar subject matter having, in addition, an electrical
    output which is fed back to the input.


CLS 310/318
TXT Input circuit for electrical output from piezoelectric element:

    Subject matter under subclass 314 having electric circuit elements for
    driving the piezoelectric element for producing an electrical output from
    the piezoelectric element.

    (1)     Note.  The output may be fed back to the input circuitry or to
    additional circuitry.  Examples of devices in this subclass are circuits in
    which the piezoelectric element behaves or functions as an electric circuit
    element rather than being utilized for any mechanical output, e.g.,
    oscillators, resonators.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    316,    for similar subject matter having, in addition a utilizable
    mechanical output.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    329,    Demodulators, particularly subclass 328 for a demodulator including
    a piezoelectric element.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 73 for electron coupled oscillators employing
    piezoelectric crystals, subclass 116 for transistor oscillators employing
    an electromechanical resonator which may be of the piezoelectric type,
    subclass 139 for crystal bridge type oscillators, subclass 155 for
    oscillators utilizing a piezoelectric crystal to couple an
    electromechanical oscillator frequency determining resonator to the
    oscillator system, and subclasses 158+ for piezoelectric crystal type
    oscillator systems in general.

    332,    Modulators, especially subclasses 139+ for piezoelectric elements
    used in frequency modulators.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 155+ for
    electric oscillators used in clocks which may utilize a piezoelectric
    element.


CLS 310/319
TXT Electrical output circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 314 having an electric circuit element which
    receives the electric output from the piezoelectric element.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is generally restricted to devices that have a
    mechanical input to the piezoelectric device.  However, an exception is
    where an electric input to a piezoelectric device is acknowledged as prior
    art or merely nominally disclosed (e.g., as by schematically representing
    an A.C. or D.C. source as the input), or where the piezoelectric device
    functions as both an electromechanical transducer and a mechanical to
    electrical transducer and the electric input circuit is acknowledged as
    prior art or merely nominally disclosed (the output circuit may be to
    "protect" the input circuit from the voltage produced by the
    mechanical-electrical function).


CLS 310/320
TXT Piezoelectric slab having different resonant frequencies at different areas:

    Subject matter under subclass 311 wherein a unit of piezoelectric material
    is disclosed as having a resonant region and at least one other region that
    has a deliberately different resonant frequency from the first resonant
    region, e.g., energy trapped, dot resonator, or monolithic filter devices.

    (1)     Note.  Devices which use the energy trapping concept are
    specifically included since the regions in which the energy is trapped
    (usually under electrodes) must be different from that of the surrounding
    region (usually not electrodes).  Thus, even if the device has only one
    resonator, it has two regions with different resonant frequencies.  The
    same reasons apply to monolithic filters.

    (2)     Note.  Typical ways of providing different resonant frequencies on
    the same slab of piezoelectric material are loading portions of the
    material, or removing portions of the material, or providing changes in the
    cross section of the slab.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322,    for acoustic wave generators which may utilize a wedge or other
    shape element which has different resonant frequencies in different areas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 187+ for electric
    filters that may utilize such a piezoelectric slab.


CLS 310/321
TXT Combined with resonant structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 311 wherein the piezoelectric element is
    combined with structure whose natural frequency of vibration is disclosed
    as being the same as the operating frequency of vibration of the
    piezoelectric element.

    (1)     Note.  "Resonant structure" is intended to be structure other than
    a mere support for a piezoelectric resonator.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of devices found in this subclass would be
    composite resonators (e.g., tuning forks or electric filters) comprised of
    piezoelectric elements mounted on structure which together have a resonant
    frequency within the operating frequency of the device, the piezoelectric
    element(s) being either input and/or output transducers for the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    345     and 348, for mounting devices for piezoelectric elements that may
    resonate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, subclass 409 for tuning forks.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 70 for tuning forks.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 187+ for
    piezoelectric wave filters (combination of piezoelectric element and
    resonator).

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 155+ for
    resonant vibrators.


CLS 310/322
TXT Acoustic wave type generator or receiver:

    Subject matter under subclass 321 wherein the mechanical energy applied to
    or produced by the resonant structure is disclosed as being caused by or
    producing traveling compressions in an elastic material.

    (1)     Note.  The combination of a piezoelectric element and a cavity
    resonator is included in this subclass even though the wave is a "standing
    wave" rather than a traveling wave.

    (2)     Note.  Since devices which produce or receive acoustic waves can
    sometimes be structurally similar to mechanically coupled devices, the
    search notes for subclasses 323 and 328 should be consulted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334     and 335, for acoustic wave devices that don't necessarily use a
    resonant structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, Digest 12 for ultrasonic generators which may
    utilize a piezoelectric element.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 3 for use of
    supersonic energy in washing machines.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 67+ and 522 for piezoelectric
    transducers which couple an alternating current, electric circuit and a
    device having mechanical vibrations for testing purposes.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 451 and Digest 12 for use
    of supersonic energy in food processing.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 137+, Digests 18 and 19 for
    acoustic wave signaling devices, e.g., noise makers.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 1 and 17 for
    processes of cleaning or fluid treatment of solids which may include the
    application of ultrasonic energy.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 177 and 249 for processes and apparatus to apply
    acoustic or vibrational energy to the material surrounding a well bore.

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses .5, 106, 108, 113, 139, and 142 for acoustic
    wave generators and detectors.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 61.01 and
    Digest 20 for acoustically actuated switches.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 738 for processes or
    apparatus involving coagulation by ultrasonic vibrations, and subclass 542
    for apparatus for coagulating suspensions utilizing piezoelectric means.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 870.30 for piezoelectric
    transmitters, and subclasses 384.1+ for electrically driven noise makers.

    366,    Agitating, subclass 127 for apparatus for agitating which utilize
    piezoelectric means.

    367,    Communications, Electrical: Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 140+ for piezoelectric transducers used in electrical acoustic
    wave communication; and subclasses 197+ for sound responsive selective
    devices.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 20 and 127+ for process and
    apparatus using acoustic wave generating means.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 437+ for systems using acoustic or vibratory
    energy for medical treatment or diagnosis.

    601,    Surgery:  Kinesitherapy, subclasses 46+ for systems using acoustic
    or vibratory energy for medical treatment or diagnosis.


CLS 310/323
TXT Direct mechanical coupling:

    Subject matter under subclass 321 in which the resonant structure
    physically contacts a body on which it performs work, or from which it
    receives energy.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of subject matter in this subclass include
    ultrasonic tools, vibrators and atomizers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    328+,   for devices which may be similar, but don't operate at resonance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 167 for
    toothbrushes which may be driven by a piezoelectric element.

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 45 for a vibratory cutting device which may be
    driven by a piezoelectric element.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 1 for supersonic tools which
    may be driven at resonance by a piezoelectric element.  Note that this
    class contains mechanical amplitude transformers, per se.

    128,    Surgery, Digest 2 for ultrasonic nebulizers which may be driven by
    a piezoelectric element.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 1.1, 110.1+ and 262 for ultrasonic
    welders which may use a piezoelectric element.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 4, 102, 144,
    338, and 459 for vibrators connected to fluid systems, which vibrators may
    be driven by a piezoelectric element.

    366,    Agitating, subclass 127 for agitators or vibrators which may be
    driven by a piezoelectric element.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclass 700 for
    ultrasonic cutters which may be driven by a piezoelectric element.

    431,    Combustion, Digest 9 for ultrasonic atomizers which may be
    piezoelectrically driven.

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 86 and 119 for ultrasonic dental tools driven
    by a piezoelectric element.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 165 and 910 for ultrasonic abrading.

    601,    Surgery:  Kinesitherapy, subclasses 46+ for vibrators which may be
    driven by a piezoelectric element.


CLS 310/324
TXT Diaphragm:

    Subject matter under subclass 321 in which the resonant structure is a
    diaphragm mechanically associated with the piezoelectric element, the
    combination being resonant at the operating frequency of the piezoelectric
    element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    328,    for the combination of a diaphragm driven by a piezoelectric
    element which diaphragm is not resonant with respect to the operating
    frequency at the element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 148+ for acoustical devices which use
    diaphragms.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 338 for a noise generator
    which may include a piezoelectric element mounted on a diaphragm.


CLS 310/325
TXT Sandwich or langevin type:
    Subject matter under subclass 321 in which the piezoelectric element or
    elements are coupled to a front and/or rear mass, which combined structure
    is disclosed as being resonant at the operating wavelength.

    (1)     Note.  Devices of this subclass type may consist of, for example, a
    piezoelectric element connected to the wall of a cleaning tank, the
    combined structure being resonant at the operating wavelength or a
    piezoelectric element connected to a mechanical amplifier (horn) and a
    tool, the combined structure being resonant at the operating wavelength.
    Devices of this subclass type may be referred to as the Boldine type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    366,    Agitating, Cross-Reference Art Collection, 600 for similar resonant
    structures.


CLS 310/326
TXT Combined with damping structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 311 having the piezoelectric element combined
    with structure designed to absorb, or attenuate undesired energy emanated
    from or applied to the element.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter under subclass type does not include
    structure which merely mounts a piezoelectric resonator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, appropriate subclasses for various specific acoustic
    wave attenuators or modifiers.


CLS 310/327
TXT On back of piezoelectric element:
    Subject matter under subclass 326 in which an absorber or attenuator is in
    intimate contact with a first part of the surface of the piezoelectric
    element to remove mechanical energy therefrom while mechanical energy is
    allowed to emanate from or into another part of the surface not in the same
    plane with the first part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    335,    for piezoelectric devices which eliminate back waves by reflecting
    them to recombine them either constructively with the front wave, or
    destructively with the back wave.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 67+ for nondestructive testing
    apparatus which may use a piezoelectric element with an attenuating element
    on a surface.


CLS 310/328
TXT With mechanical energy coupling means:

    Subject matter under subclass 311 having means to apply mechanical energy
    from an external source to the piezoelectric element to mechanically stress
    the element, or means to apply mechanical energy produced by the element to
    an external load.

    (1)     Note.  The means of this subclass type are other than those whose
    only proximate function is to contribute to the proper operation of the
    piezoelectric element itself such as by supporting, housing, prestressing,
    or damping the element.  The means of this subclass type may, however,
    perform such contributory functions in addition to its energy transferring
    function. In such cases, the means may be considered as having two coequal
    proximate functions, i.e., a contributory function and a transferring
    function, the transferring function being the basis for classification in
    this subclass. Whether or not such means renders a recited combination
    classifiable in this subclass may depend on the disclosed intended use of
    the means. For example, if a piezoelectric element is recited in
    combination with a housing, the proximate function of the housing may be
    assumed to be contributory, i.e., to contribute to the proper operation of
    the piezoelectric element by protecting it from its environment, which is
    insufficient basis for placement in this subclass.  However, it may be
    disclosed that the housing is additionally intended to transfer mechanical
    energy from the piezoelectric element to a load external to the housing
    (e.g., air, as in the case of certain acoustic transducers) in which case
    the combination is classifiable here.

    (2)     Note.  The coupling means of this subclass type is not necessarily
    limited to motion transmitting members such as mechanical linkages,
    diaphragms, etc., but may include reaction members which cooperate with the
    piezoelectric element to render the element itself capable of directly
    applying its mechanical energy to a load or receiving mechanical energy
    from source.  Such means may, for example, be recited as a "support" which
    in addition to merely fixing the element in a particular location relative
    to the support itself, is disclosed as a means against which forces
    produced by the element may react in order that the element may do work on
    an external load.  In this case, the "support" is considered as having two
    proximate functions [see (1) Note above], i.e., to fixedly locate the
    element with respect to the support itself and to render the combination
    capable of applying the mechanical energy of the element to an external
    load.

    (3)     Note.  Refer to the SEARCH CLASS notes of subclass 323 for the loci
    of similar art which may contain a piezoelectric device (which may or may
    not be resonant).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323     and 325, for similar devices which may be designed to be resonant
    at the driving frequency.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 763+ for strain sensors which may
    use a piezoelectric element, subclasses 861.18 for flow meters which may
    use a piezoelectric element, subclass 290 for depth or liquid level gases
    which may utilize a piezoelectric element, and Digest 4 for various
    piezoelectric measuring and testing devices.

    84,     Music, subclasses 730+ for electric tone generators or pickups
    combined with a musical device, wherein said generator or pickup could
    utilize a piezoelectric element, and Digest 24 for various piezoelectric
    devices mechanically coupled to a musical instrument.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 827, 828 and 831 for fluid control
    devices (e.g., fluid amplifier) which may be combined with a piezoelectric
    element.

    181,    Acoustics, subclass .5 for seismic vibration detectors which may
    use a piezoelectric element.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 181 for
    switching which may utilize a piezoelectric element.

    366,    Agitating, subclass 127 for an agitating apparatus utilizing a
    piezoelectric actuating means.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 128+ for
    electromechanical storage or retrieval; and subclass 144 for piezoelectric
    phonograph pickups.

    417,    Pumps, subclass 322 for pumps which may use a piezoelectric element.


CLS 310/329
TXT Including inertia type operator:

    Subject matter under subclass 328 wherein the coupling means includes a
    massive body which is mechanically connected to a part of the peripheral
    surface of the piezoelectric element and which is movable relative to
    another part of the peripheral surface of the element in at least one
    direction so that when an accelerating force is applied to the combination
    in the one direction, the resulting acceleration of the massive body causes
    the part of the peripheral surface to which it is connected to move
    relative to the other part of the peripheral surface to thus stress the
    element between the two parts of its peripheral surface.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to acceleration or
    velocity sensing elements, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 71 for vibration sensing apparatus
    utilizing an inertia element, and subclasses 516+ for inertia-type
    accelerometers.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosive Devices, subclass 210 and Digest 5 for
    inertia operated ignites.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclass 158 for inertia operated piezoelectric transducers for use in
    underwater electrical acoustic wave communications.


CLS 310/330
TXT Bending  type:

    Subject matter under subclass 328 wherein the mechanical stresses applied
    to or produced within the piezoelectric element include a coplanar pair of
    oppositely directed moments of mechanical force.


CLS 310/331
TXT Plural elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 330 having two or more piezoelectric elements
    and wherein bending type mechanical stresses are produced in at least one
    of the elements.


CLS 310/332
TXT Multimorph:

    Subject matter under subclass 331 having at least two piezoelectric
    elements so joined and oriented that one expands while the other contracts
    to produce a bending type mechanical stress in the composite structure.

    (1)     Note.  The elements of the multimorphs of this subclass type may be
    in direct physical contact with each other or may be separated by a spacing
    means or "center vane".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 144 for the
    structure of piezoelectric phonograph pickups which utilize multimorphic
    elements.


CLS 310/333
TXT Shear or torsional type:

    Subject matter under subclass 328 wherein the mechanical stresses applied
    to or produced within the piezoelectric element include a pair of
    noncolinear, oppositely directly linear forces, or a pair of oppositely
    directed moments of mechanical force acting in parallel planes.


CLS 310/334
TXT Acoustic wave type generator or receiver:

    Subject matter under subclass 328 wherein the mechanical energy applied to
    or produced by the piezoelectric element is disclosed as being caused by or
    producing traveling compressions in an elastic material.

    (1)     Note.  See the SEARCH CLASS notes of subclass 322 above, for the
    loci of similar art which may contain a piezoelectric device (which may or
    may not be resonant).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322,    for acoustic generators and receivers using a resonant structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 149 and 187+ for
    electric delay lines or filter networks having, as a part thereof, means
    for coupling vibrational energy between a piezoelectric crystal and a
    mechanical delay line or filter.


CLS 310/335
TXT With lens or reflector:

    Subject matter under subclass 334 combined with means to change the
    direction of a ray of the acoustic wave energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics subclasses 175+ for acoustic transducers combined with a
    sound modifier.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 150 and 151 for acoustic transducers combined with a lens or
    reflector, respectively.


CLS 310/336
TXT Nondestructive testing type:

    Subject matter under subclass 334 disclosed as being used in the
    determination of physical characteristics of a body or material by
    producing acoustic wave energy to be applied to the body or material and/or
    by being mechanically stressed by acoustic wave energy received from the
    body or material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 67+ for systems which utilize the
    above transducers.


CLS 310/337
TXT Underwater type:

    Subject matter under subclass 334 wherein the piezoelectric element is
    enclosed in a submergible watertight housing, which housing provides for
    the transmission of acoustic energy between the element and the water in
    which the housing is submerged.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 141+ for similar underwater piezoelectric transducers.


CLS 310/338
TXT Force or pressure measuring type:

    Subject matter under subclass 328 wherein the electrical output of the
    piezoelectric element is disclosed as being used to indicate the magnitude
    of the mechanical force or forces stressing the element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 290, 721, 727, 763+, and 861.18+
    for various force or pressure measuring and indicating devices or systems
    which may utilize a piezoelectric transducing element.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 481+ for a cardiovascular pressure transducer
    which may utilize a piezoelectric transducing element.


CLS 310/339
TXT Voltage, spark or current generator:

    Subject matter under subclass 328 wherein mechanical energy from an
    external source is applied to the piezoelectric element to produce an
    electric potential difference between at least two electrically accessible
    points on the surface of the element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, Digest 24 for piezoelectric signal generators stimulated by
    a musical instrument.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosive Devices, subclasses 18, 210 and Digest 5
    for voltage generators which may include a piezoelectric element.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 148 for a piezoelectric spark
    generator.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 61.01 and
    Digest 20 for sound or vibration devices which produce a signal and may
    include a piezoelectric element.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 55 and 209
    for piezoelectric element spark generators.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 365 for pressure sensitive
    keyboards which generate an electric signal and may use a piezoelectric
    element.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 247+ and
    particularly subclass 260 for piezoelectric ignites.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 43, 128, 132, 254+, 258+, and Digests 58, 60
    and 63 for electric ignites which may utilize a piezoelectric element.


CLS 310/340
TXT Encapsulated or coated:

    Subject matter under subclass 311 having a protective means in direct,
    intimate contact with all surfaces of the piezoelectric element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for laminating methods including adding a moisture
    proof layer to an object.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    subclass 272 for electrical component encapsulating.

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclasses for moisture proofing by
    coating.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet, including a waterproof component, note especially subclasses 321 and
    351 (in which the web or sheet is structurally defined or has a
    structurally defined element or component), and subclasses 411+ for a
    nonstructural laminate defined merely by the composition of the layers.


CLS 310/341
TXT With temperature modifier and/or gas or vapor atmosphere control:

    Subject matter under subclass 311 having means to maintain or change the
    temperature of the piezoelectric element, or having means to control or
    confine gas or vapor around the element.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type includes, for example,
    heat sinks, heat shields, fans, and cooling fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    346,    for a piezoelectric element combined with structure whose
    properties compensate for undesired changes in the device which would
    result from temperature change.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, appropriate subclasses for
    housing and envelopes having means for conducting electricity between the
    inside and outside of the housing or envelope, including such devices as
    are used for piezoelectric elements.  See subclass 9 for those involving
    the use of a vacuum, subclass 14 for those having fluid conditioning or
    maintenance means, subclasses 15.1+ for those having temperature modifying
    means, subclasses 17.05+ and 50.5+ for hermetically sealed envelopes, and
    subclasses 50+ for miscellaneous boxes and housings.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 19+ for electric heating apparatus,
    per se, designed to produce a constant temperature.

    220,    Receptacles, appropriate subclasses for the structure of housings,
    casings, and envelopes, per se.  Note particularly subclasses 2.1+ where
    the housing, casing, or envelope is of the electric discharge tube or
    similar (such as piezoelectric crystal) type.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 69 for oscillators with outer casing or
    housing provided with means to modify the temperature therein and wherein
    the oscillator may utilize a piezoelectric crystal element, and subclass 70
    for oscillators which may utilize a piezoelectric crystal element with
    means to modify the crystal temperature.


CLS 310/342
TXT For plural piezoelectric elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 341 which includes more than one
    piezoelectric element.


CLS 310/343
TXT With heating element:

    Subject matter under subclass 341 having means to add heat to the
    piezoelectric element, which means is a heat producing element (e.g.,
    resistive heater within the crystal housing or directly in contact with the
    crystal).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 15+ for
    enclosures for circuit elements which may include a heater.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 210 for the combination of a
    piezoelectric element and a heating device.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 1 for
    temperature control devices which may include, or protect a piezoelectric
    element.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 69 and 70 for oscillators with outer casing
    or housing provided with means to modify the temperature therein, which
    oscillator may utilize a piezoelectric element.


CLS 310/344
TXT Sealed unit:

    Subject matter under subclass 341 including an airtight housing around the
    crystal element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    343,    for sealed enclosures which are heated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 8+, 17.05+ and
    50.5+ for hermetically sealed housings combined with an electric circuit
    element which may be a piezoelectric element.


CLS 310/345
TXT Supported by elastic material:

    Subject matter under subclass 311 wherein the only member (other than a
    lead wire for electrical connection to the electrodes) physically
    contacting the piezoelectric element is comprised of rubber, bulk fiber
    (e.g., glass wool), foam rubber, or other elastomer.


CLS 310/346
TXT With temperature compensating structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 311 having structure whose properties
    compensate for undesired changes in the device which would result from
    temperature change.

    (1)     Note.  Undesired changes of this subclass type cause, for example,
    force to be applied to the crystal as a result of expansion or contraction
    of the crystal or structurally associated member due to temperature
    variation. Structure of this subclass type may have, for example, matching
    or mismatching coefficients of thermal expansion.  Devices that merely
    modify the temperature, or keep the temperature around the crystal
    unchanged (e.g., heat sinks, fans, ovens, etc.), however, are provided for
    elsewhere.  See the search notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    341,    for the combination of a piezoelectric element and a temperature
    modifying means.


CLS 310/347
TXT Compensated air gap:

    Subject matter under subclass 346 wherein the device includes at least one
    electrode for the piezoelectric element which is spaced from the
    piezoelectric element to form an air gap, and the temperature compensating
    structure either keeps the air gap constant for changes in temperature, or
    else purposely varies the air gap so that the piezoelectric element's
    output remains constant for changes in temperature.


CLS 310/348
TXT With mounting or support means:

    Subject matter under subclass 311 having means to spatially position the
    piezoelectric element relative to some reference structure or reference
    point.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and those indented hereunder include, for
    example, means for mounting piezoelectric elements that function merely as
    resonators, filters, or other circuit element types of devices, i.e., an
    electrical-to-mechanical-back-to-electrical type of transducer.  The
    devices may be viewed as "passive" in that they don't perform mechanical
    work on something, or receive mechanical energy from something.


CLS 310/349
TXT Air gap:

    Subject matter under subclass 348 wherein the device includes at least one
    electrode for the piezoelectric element which is spaced from the
    piezoelectric element or contacts the piezoelectric element without being
    mechanically attached to it, i.e., the electrode merely lays on the
    piezoelectric element, or the piezoelectric element merely rests on the
    electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    347,    for air gap type devices which include a means to compensate for
    the effects temperature change could have on the device due to change in
    the air gap.


CLS 310/350
TXT Adjustable:

    Subject matter under subclass 349 having means to adjust the position of
    the electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    354,    for similar adjustable mounting structure but which clamps the
    piezoelectric element.


CLS 310/351
TXT Suspended by thin member:

    Subject matter under subclass 348 in which each member that physically
    contacts the piezoelectric element is relatively long and thin (e.g., rod,
    wire, spring, thread, string, etc.), and supports the piezoelectric element
    in the direction of its (the member's) long dimension.

    (1)     Note.  If the thin rod member also exerts a significant clamping
    pressure on the piezoelectric element, the device is classified under
    subclasses 354+ below.


CLS 310/352
TXT Point contact on major surface only:

    Subject matter under subclass 351 wherein the suspension member contacts
    the piezoelectric element only on a major surface or surfaces, and the area
    of contact is small relative to the total area of the major surface.


CLS 310/353
TXT Contact at edges only:

    Subject matter under subclass 351 wherein each suspension member contacts
    the piezoelectric element only at an edge or edges of the element.


CLS 310/354
TXT Clamped:

    Subject matter under subclass 348 wherein the mounting means exerts a
    compressive stress on the piezoelectric element to secure it to a base or
    support and not merely for the purpose of preloading an element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    350,    for adjustable mounting structure which does not actually clamp the
    piezoelectric element.


CLS 310/355
TXT Spring bias:

    Subject matter under subclass 354 in which the clamping force is the result
    of a resilient member (e.g., a spring).


CLS 310/356
TXT 90 degrees to major surface and margin clamped only:

    Subject matter under subclass 355 wherein the clamping force is applied in
    a direction perpendicular to the major surfaces, and the crystal surface is
    in physical contact with its support structure only along the outer,
    peripheral edge of the major surfaces or portion thereof.


CLS 310/357
TXT Orientation of piezoelectric polarization:
    Piezoelectric noncrystalline materials and elements under subclass 311 in
    which the direction of polarization is significant with respect to the
    piezoelectric property of the material and/or in adopting the element to
    its intended function.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass may contain methods of polarizing materials,
    per se, wherein such polarizing produces a piezoelectrically active element.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes noncrystalline piezoids such as
    amorphous quartz, or quartz crystals in a binder which may then have
    various axis aligned.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 25.35 for methods of making piezoelectric
    devices which may include the step of polarizing.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 62.9 and the classes specified in the notes
    thereto for piezoelectric compositions.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 233 for
    methods of treating articles with electric energy which may include
    polarizing.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 457+ and 472 for polarization or
    oriented vapor deposition of a possibly piezoelectric element.


CLS 310/358
TXT Ceramic composition (e.g., BaTiO3):

    Subject matter under subclass 357 in which the piezoelectric material is
    comprised of an oriented (polarized) solid polycrystalline aggregate
    material, e.g.,

    BaTiO3.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclass 391.5 for ceramic
    compositions in general.


CLS 310/359
TXT More than one poling direction (e.g., rosen transformer):

    Subject matter under subclass 358 wherein a piezoelectric element is
    polarized in a curvilinear or more than one linear direction.

    (1)     Note. This subclass may include memory devices wherein the
    polarization direction is changed to represent a stored bit of information.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 173.2 for ferroelectric
    storage systems.


CLS 310/360
TXT Rotation of crystal axis (e.g., cut angle):

    Subject matter under subclass 311 comprising piezoelectric crystalline
    materials and elements wherein the orientation of the crystallographic axis
    with respect to the piezoelectric property of the materials is recited and
    significant in adapting the element to its intended function.


CLS 310/361
TXT Quartz:

    Subject matter under subclass 360 in which the piezoelectric material is
    crystalline silicon dioxide.


CLS 310/362
TXT Rochelle salt:

    Subject matter under subclass 360 in which the piezoelectric material is
    potassium sodium tartrate.


CLS 310/363
TXT Electrode materials:

    Subject matter under subclass 311 having electrodes attached to the
    piezoelectric element wherein the composition of the electrode is uniquely
    selected to enhance either the performance of the element/electrode
    combination or facilitate its manufacture.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type includes, for example,
    materials selected because they easily adhere to a piezoelectric material
    and materials that don't effect the piezoelectric's characteristics, etc.


CLS 310/364
TXT Multilayer:

    Subject matter under subclass 363 wherein the electrode is made up of two
    or more layers of materials.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type may include, for
    example, a material directly adhered to the piezoelectric element chosen
    for its bonding ability, then covered with a layer of a material which may
    have superior conductivity, followed by a layer that resists oxidation, etc.


CLS 310/365
TXT Electrode arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 311 involving the position of the electrodes
    with respect to the piezoelectric material, including electrode size,
    shape, and placement.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to piezoelectric
    elements having coated electrodes, electrodes cemented on or otherwise
    attached, and the structure of the electrode or its position with respect
    to the piezoelectric material or another electrode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses
    120 through 124.7 and 903 for a process of bonding a metallic part to a
    nonmetallic part.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for joints of
    general utility.


CLS 310/366
TXT More than two:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 where the device has three or more
    separate electrodes.

    (1)     Note.  The electrodes may be spaced about in a single surface of
    the piezoelectric material, or may be on two or more different surfaces or
    one of the three or more electrodes may be interposed between two layers of
    piezoelectric material so as to form a "sandwich".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331+,   where the element has combined therewith means to transmit to or
    receive from the element mechanical force.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 163 for crystal oscillator systems with a
    piezoelectric crystal having three or more electrodes in circuit.


CLS 310/367
TXT Piezoelectric element shape:

    Subject matter under subclass 311 comprising piezoelectric materials and
    elements wherein the shape, proportions, or dimensions of the element or
    material is significant.

    (1)     Note.  "Element" for the purpose of this subclass includes any
    structure consisting essentially of a plurality of pieces of piezoelectric
    material intimately joined together to form a composite structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    357+,   where the specific polarization direction is significant with
    respect to the piezoelectric property.

    360+,   where the specific orientation of the crystal axis of the material
    is significant with respect to the piezoelectric property.


CLS 310/368
TXT Rectangular plate:

    Subject matter under subclass 367 wherein the shape of the piezoelectric
    element is essentially that of a solid rectangle, i.e., having three pairs
    of parallel sides.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type may include, for
    example, a cube.

    (2)     Note.  Slight deviations from the exact shape specified above will
    not operate to exclude the device from this subclass if the overall
    appearance of the element remains rectangular, i.e., one or more pairs of
    sides may not be exactly parallel, one or more surfaces may be grooved or
    machined, edges may be rounded, or holes may be in or pass through the
    device.


CLS 310/369
TXT Circular disc, ring, or cylinder:

    Subject matter under subclass 367 wherein the overall shape of the
    piezoelectric element is essentially that of a right solid cylinder.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type may include, for
    example, hollow cylindrical piezoelectric elements, split-ring or C-shaped
    elements and such elements having machined or textured surfaces if the
    overall shape is essentially as described above.


CLS 310/370
TXT "U" or  "tuning fork" shape:

    Subject matter under subclass 367 wherein the piezoelectric element is, or
    includes a portion shaped essentially like the letter "U" or "Y" or the
    letter "V" with a stem attached to the base (thus resembling a tuning fork).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is intended to include elements that may
    consist of a plurality of the above shapes, e.g., H-shaped elements and
    W-shaped elements.


CLS 310/371
TXT Sphere or hemisphere:

    Subject matter under subclass 367 wherein the shape of the piezoelectric
    element is such that its outer surface can be essentially generated by the
    revolution of a circle about one of its diameters or by one half of such a
    generated surface.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type may specifically
    include, for example, hollow spherical or hemispherical piezoelectric
    elements.

    (2)     Note.  Slight deviations from the exact shape defined above will
    not exclude a piezoelectric element from this subclass if the overall shape
    of the element is spherical or hemispherical.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTION

    The following subclasses are collections of published disclosure pertaining
    to various aspects of the electrical generator or motor art which aspects
    do not form an appropriate base for subclass classification in the
    classification schedule.

    (1)     Note.  Disclosures are placed herein for value as a search aid and
    in no instance do they represent the entire extent of the prior art.


CLS 310/800
TXT PIEZOELECTRIC POLYMERS (E.G., MYLAR, PVDF):
    Polymeric materials which are disclosed as being either inherently
    piezoelectric or have been treated (e.g., via polarizing) to give them
    usable piezoelectric properties (for example, PVDF, Mylar, frozen rubber,
    PVC, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  This cross reference art collection is intended as an aid to
    the searcher for locating these materials and the structure they are
    associated with.


CLS 312/
TTL SUPPORTS:  CABINET STRUCTURE

CLS 312/
TXT

    1.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER:

    This class provides for receptacles or enclosures, combined with article
    supporting means such as drawers, racks, shelves, etc., fixed or movable
    partly or wholly out of the enclosure to make the article supported more
    readily accessible, and enclosures combined with any nonreceptacle feature
    for which there is no other provision.  This statement is intended to
    include receptacle structures having modified features to cooperate with
    the indicated combined devices.

    Included in this class, for example, are article containing magazine type
    cabinet structures having means to facilitate the removal of articles
    therefrom in subclasses 35+, showcases in subclasses 114+, counters in
    subclasses 140.1+ outdoor type cabinets in subclasses 100+, cabinets
    designed for use in worship in subclass 33 sectional unit type cabinets in
    subclasses 107+, enclosures specially designed to house radios in subclass
    7.1, television sets in subclass 7.2, phonographs in subclasses 8.1+, and
    picture machines and film in subclass 20.

    The term "component" as used in the subclass titles and definitions relates
    to compartments, walls, doors, shelves, partitions, racks or other article
    supports, or similar parts of a compartment, fixed or removable, as in
    subclass 351, or movable, as in subclasses 222, 266+, 271+, 293.1+, and
    294+.

    2.      GENERAL LINE WITH OTHER CLASSES:

    (a)     In general, except for article supports, etc., as set forth in the
    above class definition, instrumentalities provided for in other classes
    with an enclosure solely for housing the instrumentality are classified
    with the type of instrumentality.

    (b)     Receptacle structure, per se, is not provided for herein.  Such
    structures are in the appropriate receptacle classes of which Class 220,
    Receptacles, is the generic class.  For the distribution of the receptacle
    art see the notes to the definition of Class 220.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, for a cabinet having features specialized to
    refrigeration, and see the Notes referring to Class 62 in subclasses 116,
    213, 214, 236, and 253 of this class (312).

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 606+ for casings combined
    with means to support gearing therein.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, for cabinets with combustion means to heat the
    cabinet either internally or externally, i.e., stoves, enclosures of all
    kinds in combination with means to extract heat of combustion and
    distribute it.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for housing structure having
    features peculiar to heat exchange or for a housed heat exchange means
    where the enclosure is solely for housing the heat exchange means.


    3.      SPECIAL USE TYPES AND COMBINATIONS OF WHICH A CABINET IS A PART:

    (a)     Cabinets or enclosures specially designed to house radios,
    phonograph instruments or records, picture machines or film are found in
    subclasses 7.1+, 8.1+ and 20.1 respectively.  The housed apparatus may be
    defined in general terms without the recitation of the characteristics of
    it or its particulars or relationship with the cabinets.

    Cabinets in combination with apparatus such as loud-speakers, dials, tuning
    handles or shafts, chassis and so forth, are classified with the apparatus.

    (b)     Cabinets designed solely for use in worship are in subclass 33 and
    cabinets designed specially for laboratory, dental, barber or medical use
    are in subclass 209.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclass 2.1, for beds combined with some other article of
    furniture.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, appropriate subclasses
    for protective cabinets such as fire and theft resistance safes, and
    especially subclass 63.5 for cabinets such as refrigerators including means
    to render the closure fastening means thereof ineffective when the cabinet
    is in a condition of abnormal use.

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 148+ for diaphragms mounted within a cabinet
    and subclass 199 for a speaker cabinet with specific acoustical features.

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, for receptacles and cabinets
    designed for use as trunks or traveling bags, subclasses 3+ having trunks
    convertible to bureaus and 11+ having trunks convertible to table or desk.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 19 for a container arranged
    for sacramental use and subclasses 307+ for a container for a sound
    recording (e.g., phonograph disc).

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 40 for phonograph record racks.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for article dispensers
    not otherwise provided for, and see especially subclasses 282+ for such
    dispensers including casing or support structures.

    232,    Deposit and Collection Receptacles, for deposit and collection
    receptacles not having general purpose compartments or article supports in
    addition to the deposit and collection compartment.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 702 for antennas
    combined with a radio cabinet wherein a significant relationship exists
    between the antenna and the cabinet.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 12 for cabinet
    details of a radio-phonograph; and subclasses 75.1+ for a phonograph with
    particular cabinet structure.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    150+ for loud speaker structures.

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 77+ for cabinets combined with dental
    equipment.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 347+ for combinations of a cabinet
    and radio structure in general.


    4.      CABINET SUBCOMBINATIONS:

    (a)     Closures and Doors.

    Cabinets with doors and closures are found in the various subclasses
    providing for movable components depending upon the particular type of
    motion of the closure or door. Cabinets with inner and outer closures are
    in 291 and those with a closure having an auxiliary opening are in subclass
    292.  Arrangements of doors or closures on two or more sides of a cabinet
    are provided for in subclasses 283+.  Folding cardboard type cabinets with
    sliding doors are provided for in subclass 260.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, appropriate subclasses, for a
    closure of the type provided for and see the search notes thereto in
    section IV for the loci of closures in other classes.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, for flexible
    closures and see the notes thereto for related art.



    (b)     Closure Fasteners and Locks:

    With the exception of a few special types of locking and latching devices
    provided for in subclasses 107.5, 215, 216+, 222, and 333 such devices for
    movable cabinet parts have not been set out since they are of the types
    that can be adequately cross-referenced in Classes 70 and 292.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclass 503 for a closure panel
    modified to accommodate a latch or lock and see the search notes thereto
    for the loci of other closure latches or locks.

    70,     Locks, for locks, per se.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 237+ and 273+ for bottles and jars
    with closure fastenings.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses 56+ and 89, for closure fasteners on
    wooden receptacles.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 315+ for closure fasteners combined with
    metallic receptacle structure.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, for door or closure fasteners, per se.


    (c)     Guides for Drawers and Other Sliding Components:

    Horizontally sliding cabinet drawers, shelves, closures, etc., provided
    with guide means are in subclasses 330.1+. Other combinations of cabinet
    components and guide means therefor are classified in the subclass
    providing for the particular type of component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 82 for drawer stops, per se.

    384,    Bearings, for guides or slides for supporting drawers, trays or
    shelves for sliding movement.



    (d)     Handles:

    Cabinets with carrying handles are in subclass 244 and those having both a
    carrying handle and a particular supporting means usable independently of
    the handle are in subclass 243.

    Movable cabinet components or parts provided with a handle mounted thereon
    and movable therewith as a unit are in subclasses 332.1, 333, and 348.6

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 110+ for handles, per se, and
    see the notes to subclass 110 of that class for the location of other
    related handle combinations.





    (e)     Operators:

    Cabinet components or parts provided with power driven means are in
    subclasses 319.5+.

    (f)     Panels and Walls:

    This class is not concerned with wall or panel structure, per se, since
    such structures are provided for in other classes.  Cabinets having walls
    of foraminous material have been provided for in subclass 213 and those
    with spaced walls or with insulation are provided for in subclass 214.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), for a construction forming an
    enclosure of the type which is erected or assembled at the job site.  Class
    52 also takes (1) a component, e.g., panel, of more general utility which
    is structurally similar to those used in in situ type structures, even
    though defined or disclosed as having another art use, or (2) in situ
    erected type enclosures combined with an article or article support where
    additional structure not merely housing the article or article support is
    defined, see particularly subclasses 27+.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, for flexible
    panels of the flexible or portable panel type.

    220,    Receptacles, and the notes thereto for receptacle or housing
    structure and see particularly subclasses 415 and 469 and the notes thereto
    for receptacle structures of the spaced wall or insulated type and
    subclasses 639+ for receptacle wall structure.





    (g)     Cabinet Supports:

    Cabinet structures including supporting or mounting means for the cabinet
    are specifically provided for in subclasses 243 to 248, 249.1-249.13,
    351.1-351.14.

    Outdoor type cabinets with wall or window mounting means are found in
    subclasses 101+.

    Canopy or curtain type cabinets with wall mounting means are in subclasses
    4+.

    Cabinet supporting means combined with any of the cabinets provided for in
    subclasses 3 to 241 are classified with the particular type of cabinet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 476+ for wall or ground mounted receptacles.

    248,    Supports, and the notes thereto for supports generally and see
    particularly subclasses indented under subclass 127 for receptacle type
    stands; see also subclasses 188.2+ for furniture leveling devices and
    subclass 188.8 for furniture legs and feet and terminal tips or shoes
    therefor.


    (h)     Tables, Racks and Other Article Supports:

    Cabinet structures associated with a leg supported table which can be
    removed from and used independently of the structure are classified in
    subclass 277.  Other cabinet combinations involving a table or shelf are
    found in subclasses 281+ and 313+.  Movable racks and other article
    supports are found in substantially all of the subclasses involving movable
    components.  Show cases with racks are in subclasses 126+ and 128+.
    Cabinets with external racks or article supports are in subclasses 280+.
    Cabinets with fixed or merely removable racks or other article supports are
    found particularly in subclasses 293 and 351.  Cabinets with supporting
    means for a typewriter, adding machine, dictaphone or sewing machine are in
    subclasses 208.1 - 208.6, and 223.1+.  Subclass 231 has cabinet structure
    with means to support a supply of paper in position to be written on and
    subclass 233 for cabinets with means to support a book in position to be
    read.  Cabinets with article supporting means of the disappearing
    instrument type are in subclasses 21+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, appropriate subclasses for
    tables, generally; especially subclasses 33+ for a horizontally supported
    planar surface combined with an enclosure for housing it in an inoperative
    position, subclasses 134+ for a folding horizontally supported planar
    surface attached laterally of a support such as a cabinet, and subclass 152
    for a horizontally supported planar surface attached laterally of a support.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 1.3 for rack structures combined with
    enclosing storage space for housing the rack in inoperative position, and
    appropriate subclasses, for cabinets having exteriorly mounted racks, the
    included portion of the cabinet structure providing only for mounting or
    operation of the rack.

    248,    Supports, and the notes to the class definition, for supports,
    generally; and especially subclasses 441.1+ for an easel, book or music
    score holder.


    5.      MISCELLANEOUS SEARCH NOTES AND INDEX TO CLASS REFERENCES IN
    PRECEDING SECTIONS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 619+, for basins,
    subclasses 538+, for tubs, per se, or in combination with an enclosure
    therefor, there being no cabinet features such as drawers, racks, shelves,
    etc., and no compartments for general storage purposes beyond the
    compartment formed by the basin enclosure, and subclasses 656 for sink
    drainboards.

    5,      Beds, see section 3.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 258 for cases
    and containers for shoe blacking boxes and kits.

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, see sections 4(c) and 4(d).

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclasses 103+ for ironing board
    support or mount.

    42,     Firearms, the various "magazine" subclasses, for cartridge
    magazines and combinations thereof with guns.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 55 for bait
    holders.

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, see section 4(a).

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), see section 4 (f).

    62,     Refrigeration, see section 2.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 232, for tubs
    especially designed for the fluid treatment of textiles.

    70,     Locks, see section 4 (b).

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 431, for instrument casing
    structures.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, see section 2.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, see section 3.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 416+ for housings specially adapted to
    confine animals.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, see section 2.

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 286+ for toilet kits including a toilet article
    combined with a receptacle which may be in the form of a rack or cabinet.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, see section 4(a)
    and 4(f).

    165,    Heat Exchange, see section 2.

    174,    Electricity: Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 48+ and 50+ for
    inclosures having electrical structure.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, see section
    3.

    181,    Acoustics, see section 3.

    190,    Trunks, and Hand-Carried Luggage, see section 3.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, see section 3, in the class
    definition.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 370+ for
    bins, casing, compartments, receptacles, etc., enclosing sifters there
    being no compartments of general utility included.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, see sections 3 and 4(h).

    215,    Bottles and Jars, see section 4(b).

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, see section 4(b).

    220,    Receptacles, see section 2, 4(b), 4(f) and 4(g).

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses, and especially
    subclasses 282+ for article dispensers not otherwise provided for including
    cabinet and support structures therefor.  The line between Classes 221 and
    312 is as follows:  Class 221 will take any cabinet serving as a source of
    supply for discrete articles combined with means to eject or release such
    articles by means which are recognized in the class definition of Class 221
    as dispensing means, without regard to the presence or absence of cabinet
    structure.  Class 312 will take cabinet structures involving a source of
    supply of articles and not including such dispensing means.  Attention is
    directed to subclasses 35+ of Class 312, in which are classified cabinet
    structures of the magazine type for containing articles and having means
    facilitating the removal thereof.  See also section 3.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 129.1 for the combination of a cabinet and a
    bulk dispenser, subclasses 173+ takes a fluent material dispensing
    container and a casing solely therefor.  Throughout the class (222) are
    container structures having combined therewith bulk dispensing features.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 107, for boxes and baskets especially
    designed to hold sewing accessories such as, work, spools, needles, pins,
    scissors, etc.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, for paper receptacles
    and paper receptacle blanks.

    232,    Deposit and Collection Receptacles, see section 3.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclass 79 for casings and heat shields for
    radiators.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, for a housing combined with
    winding or unwinding, usually in the form of a specified coil support or
    guide structure for dispensing elongated material.  Generally a continuous
    strip towel-type hand dryer in Class 242 is provided with a roll core or
    spindle while those in Class 312, subclasses 39+ are not.

    248,    Supports, see sections 4(g) and 4(h).

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    838+ for mirrors and mirror systems, per se.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 127+ for combinations of a source of light
    and an article of furniture is modified merely for the promotion of
    illumination and subclasses 125+ for the combination of a source of light
    and a showcase modified only for the promotion of illumination.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, see section 3.

    384,    Bearings, see section 4(c).

    396,    Photography, subclasses 589+ for light-excluding cases or cabinets
    used in processing exposed film.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 118+ for a kit;
    i.e., a holder or receptacle for coating material and a removable
    applicator or spreader for the material.

    433,    Dentistry, see section 3.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 408+ for furniture designed
    for educational demonstrations or instruction and subclasses 61+ for
    blackboards not combined with cabinet structure.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 71+ for a toy which serves as,
    or has been converted from, a container; and subclass 482 for toy furniture.

    455,    Telecommunications, see section 3.

    604,    Surgery, subclass 309 for applying solid materials to the body.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclass 81
    for cabinets having combined therewith means for applying to the body any
    one or combination of light or analogous rays, electricity or thermal
    treatments.


CLS 312/1
TXT Apparatus under class definition including an opening in a barrier and
    flexible means mounted at the opening and entirely closing it or sealing
    against an operating member, e.g., hand, between opposite sides of the
    barrier thus allowing an operator to manipulate an object on the distal
    side of the barrier without leakage of fluid through the opening.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is the residual home of the defined structure.
     Many classes contain patents to such structures combined with art
    features; e.g., surgical devices; work handling; specific machines as
    abrading, washing, drying, welding, etc.  Such patents are classified in
    the appropriate art class.  Exemplary instances are noted under "SEARCH
    CLASS".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 16+ for a hand or arm guard and protector,
    subclasses 158 for a mitten, 159+ for a glove, and subclass 270 for a
    sleeve closure, per se.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 242 for means
    to seal an opening in a treating chamber against gas or vapor leakage and
    provide for the feeding of material through the opening.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 17.8 for devices providing
    motion transfer through an imperforate seal and subclasses 18+ for a
    flexible sealing diaphragm attached to a moving rod and to a casing.

    128,    Surgery, appropriate subclass for an enclosure with a surgical
    operating device or with a feature specialized to a surgical operating
    device.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclass 200 for spray or
    jet supplying and/or applying means with a closable work-treating chamber.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 83 for a
    circuit maker or breaker actuated by a fluid pressure diaphragm, and
    subclass 86 for circuit-controllers incorporated in mats or treads and
    adapted to be operated by a person stepping on them.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 694+ for miscellaneous attachments for
    metallic receptacles.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 189+ for means joining a pipe
    to a plate.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 50+ for manipulative chemical
    laboratory devices.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 75+ for a sandblasting machine of general
    utility.

    454,    Ventilation, appropriate subclasses for a ventilated enclosure, per
    se, and subclass 184 specifically for the ventilation of a cabinet which
    houses electrical or electronic components.


CLS 312/3
TXT Cabinet structures under the class definition generally of a skeleton-frame
    nature, designed to be inclosed largely or entirely by flexible material,
    as fabric.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31.05+, for liquid wetted fabric wall cabinets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclasses 87+ for canopies.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 180 for racks with screens or curtains.


CLS 312/4
TXT Structures under subclass 3 designed to be mounted in or on or secured to a
    wall surface.


CLS 312/5
TXT Devices under subclass 4 so made that they may be knocked down or folded to
    occupy a small space.


CLS 312/6
TXT Devices under subclass 3 with means whereby they may be knocked down or
    folded to occupy a small space.


CLS 312/7.1
TXT RADIO TYPE:

    Cabinets under the class definition designed to house radio apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  See section 3, a, of the main class definition for a more
    complete statement on radio cabinets and see the search notes to such
    section for the distribution of related combinations in other classes.


CLS 312/7.2
TXT TELEVISION TYPE:

    Subject matter under the class definition having a video feature (e.g.,
    viewing screen) associated with the cabinet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 836+ for cabinet structure in combination
    with television components.


CLS 312/8.1
TXT FOR PHONOGRAPH RECORD PLAYER:
    Cabinet structure under the class definition having structure particularly
    configured to support a device for reproducing sound that has been
    mechanically transcribed in a groove on a circular disk or cylinder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9.1+,   for cabinet having structure to support an audio or visual
    recording medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, Digests 12-14 for tape
    or phonograph record cleaner.

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 148+, for diaphragms mounted within a cabinet
    and subclass 199 for a speaker cabinet with specific acoustical features..

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 307+ for a container
    under the class definition for removably containing an article which
    includes machine readable information registered thereon.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 40 for frame structure to support
    phonograph record.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for operating or
    ejecting mechanism of an article dispenser which is not limited to the
    handling of phonograph records and not otherwise specialized to the
    phonograph art.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 133 for
    recording medium disk container.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 86 and 87 for lighting of phonograph or
    sound reproducing equipment.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 12 and 75.1+
    for cabinet structure of a sound reproducing machine.

    D14,    Recording, Communication, or Information Retrieval Equipment,
    subclasses 175+ for console type radio or phonograph, subclasses 199+ and
    204+ for speaker, phonograph housing, or housing of a video or audio
    recording, transmission or playback equipment.


CLS 312/8.11
TXT Record compartment situated under player compartment:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 8.6 wherein the record compartment is
    located below the record player compartment.


CLS 312/8.12
TXT Player accessible through front of cabinet:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 8.1 including an opening or closure at the
    front of the cabinet for access to the record player.


CLS 312/8.13
TXT Player accessible through top of cabinet:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 8.1 including an opening or closure on the
    top of the cabinet for access to the record player.


CLS 312/8.14
TXT Removable closure:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 8.13 including a particular closure on the
    top of the cabinet which can easily be detached from the cabinet.


CLS 312/8.15
TXT Pivoted closure:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 8.13 including a closure on the top of the
    cabinet which can be pivoted about an axis.


CLS 312/8.16
TXT Having a movable speaker compartment closure:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 8.1 including a speaker chamber having a
    movable closure to provide access to the speaker chamber.


CLS 312/8.2
TXT Having pivoted or rotating player support:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 8.1 wherein the player support structure
    is configured to be pivoted or rotated about an axis.


CLS 312/8.3
TXT About a vertical axis:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 8.2 wherein the player support is pivoted
    or rotated about a vertical axis.


CLS 312/8.4
TXT Portable:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 8.2 in the form of a compact carrying case
    for easy transportation.


CLS 312/8.5
TXT Having sliding player support:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 8.1 including structure configured to
    permit the record player to slide.


CLS 312/8.6
TXT Having separate phonograph record compartment:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 8.1 having a compartment in which a record
    player is supported and another compartment particularly adapted for
    storing a record.


CLS 312/8.7
TXT Including interconnected or interrelated  player and record compartment
    doors:Cabinet structure under subclass 8.6 including a movable or removable
    closure for the record player compartment and another movable or removable
    closure for the record compartment, wherein a means is provided such that
    movement of one compartment closure causes movement of the other
    compartment closure.


CLS 312/8.8
TXT Including movable record support:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 8.6 further including structure for
    supporting a record and which can be moved relative to the cabinet housing.



CLS 312/8.9
TXT Record compartment situated above or beside player compartment:Cabinet
    structure under subclass 8.6 wherein the record compartment is located over
    or to a side of the record player compartment.


CLS 312/9.1
TXT FOR STORING AUDIO OR VISUAL RECORDING MEDIUM (E.G., COMPACT DISC,
    PHONOGRAPH RECORD, FILM, TAPE):Cabinet structure under the class definition
    including structure specifically configured to support optically or
    magnetically recording medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 307+ for a container
    under the class definition for removably containing an article which
    includes machine readable information registered thereon.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 40 for frame structure to support
    phonograph record.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for operating or
    ejecting mechanism of an article dispenser which is not limited to the
    handling of phonograph records and not otherwise specialized to the
    phonograph art.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 133 for
    record medium disk container.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 86 and 87 for lighting of phonograph or
    sound reproducing equipment.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 12 and 75.1+
    for cabinet structure of a sound reproducing machine.

    D14,    Recording, Communication, or Information Retrieval Equipment,
    subclasses 175+ for console type radio or phonograph, subclasses 199+ and
    204+ for speaker, phonograph housing, or housing of a video or audio
    recording, transmission or playback equipment.


CLS 312/9.11
TXT Removed by individual ejector:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 9.9 wherein an individual mechanism is
    provided for each of a plurality of stored recording media and which
    operates to partially or completely deliver a recording medium from the
    inside to the outside of the cabinet housing.


CLS 312/9.12
TXT And a master selector:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 9.11 wherein a means is provided for
    selecting one of a plurality of recording media, and is connected to or
    operates to selectively engage one of the recording medium ejectors to
    partially or completely deliver the selected recording medium from the
    inside to the outside of the cabinet housing.


CLS 312/9.13
TXT Removable key-type selector:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 9.12 wherein the selecting means includes
    a member separable from the cabinet structure and configured to fit into an
    opening in the cabinet to actuate one of the ejectors to deliver the chosen
    recording medium partially or completely from inside to the outside of the
    cabinet housing.


CLS 312/9.14
TXT Sliding selector:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 9.12 wherein a recording medium is removed
    partially or completely from the cabinet housing by sliding the selector to
    a position to actuate one of the individual ejectors.


CLS 312/9.15
TXT Pivoting or rotating selector:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 9.12 wherein a recording medium is removed
    by pivoting or rotating the selector to a position to actuate one of the
    individual ejectors.


CLS 312/9.16
TXT Activated by manually pushing the ejecting mechanism:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 9.11 wherein a recording medium can be
    partially or completely removed from the cabinet housing by manually
    pushing one ejecting mechanism to activate an ejector associated with the
    chosen recording medium.


CLS 312/9.17
TXT Including individual support:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 9.16 including an individual support means
    for each recording medium.


CLS 312/9.18
TXT Tilting support causes recording medium to roll out:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 9.17 wherein one individual support is
    caused to incline forward when one of the individual ejectors is pushed to
    make the recording medium to roll partially or completely out of the
    cabinet housing.


CLS 312/9.19
TXT Ejector returned by a spring:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 9.16 wherein the ejector is biased by a
    spring to return to its recording medium storing position when the pushing
    force is removed.


CLS 312/9.2
TXT Cylinder:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 9.1 wherein the support structure is
    particularly configured to support a tubular shape recording medium.


CLS 312/9.21
TXT Movable blocking member:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 9.16 including a blocking member which is
    integral with or connected to one of the ejecting mechanisms, and is in
    contact with a recording medium to keep the same in place, wherein the
    recording medium is released from the cabinet housing by manually pushing
    the ejecting mechanism to disengage the blocking member from the recording
    medium.


CLS 312/9.22
TXT Spring biased recording medium:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 9.21 wherein the ejecting mechanism
    includes a spring to move the recording medium partially or completely out
    of the cabinet housing when the blocking member is disengaged from the
    recording medium.


CLS 312/9.23
TXT Lifting ejector:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 9.16 wherein one of the ejectors includes
    structure adapted to raise a recording medium partially or completely from
    the inside to the outside of the cabinet housing when the associated
    ejecting mechanism is pushed.


CLS 312/9.24
TXT Fulcrum ejector:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 9.16 wherein one ejecting mechanism
    includes a lever pivotally attached to the cabinet housing and which pivots
    to cause a recording medium to move partially or completely outside of the
    cabinet housing.


CLS 312/9.25
TXT Including interactive linkage:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 9.24 wherein the ejecting mechanism
    includes a linkage system having members which interact to cause the lever
    to pivot.


CLS 312/9.26
TXT Horizontally oriented recording medium:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 9.16 including a means to support a
    recording medium in a horizontal position.


CLS 312/9.27
TXT Activated by manually pulling out the ejecting mechanism:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 9.11 wherein a recording medium can be
    partially or completely removed from the cabinet housing by manually
    pulling one ejecting mechanism to activate an ejector associated with the
    chosen recording medium.


CLS 312/9.28
TXT To eject recording medium together with   holder:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 9.27 including a separate holder for each
    of a plurality of recording media, wherein a recording medium is ejected
    together with its associated holder when the ejector is activated.


CLS 312/9.29
TXT Removed by a master ejector:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 9.9 including a traveling ejector adapted
    to be moved to a selected position to partially or completely remove a
    selected recording medium from the cabinet.


CLS 312/9.3
TXT On a sliding shelf:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 9.2 wherein the support structure is a
    platform which is contrained for gliding movement relative to the cabinet
    housing.


CLS 312/9.31
TXT Stored in a carousel:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 9.29 wherein a recording medium is
    supported inside or on one of a plurality of compartments, shelves, etc.,
    carried by a revolving structure.


CLS 312/9.32
TXT Supported on a shelf:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 9.29 wherein the support structure is a
    platform spaced above the floor of the cabinet housing.


CLS 312/9.33
TXT Including a manual rotary selector:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 9.32 including a selector which is
    manually rotated to move the traveling ejector to a position for engagement
    with the chosen recording medium.


CLS 312/9.34
TXT Including a manual sliding selector:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 9.32 including a selector which is moved
    and constrained for gliding movement along a path to move the traveling
    ejector to a position for engagement with the chosen recording medium.


CLS 312/9.35
TXT And a manual pull-out operator:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 9.34 further including an element integral
    with or connected to the master ejector and which is adapted to be manually
    pulled to actuate the master ejector to partially or completely remove the
    recording medium from the cabinet housing.


CLS 312/9.36
TXT And a manual push fulcrum operator:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 9.34 including an operating element
    integral with or connected to the master ejector and which is adapted to be
    manually pushed to actuate the master ejector, wherein the master ejector
    comprises a lever which pivots to push the chosen recording medium
    partially or completely outside of the cabinet housing.


CLS 312/9.37
TXT Including interactive linkage:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 9.36 including a linkage system having
    members which interacts to cause the lever to pivot.


CLS 312/9.38
TXT Multiple recording media ejector:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 9.29 wherein the master ejector operates
    to simultaneously remove a chosen group of recording media from the storage
    position.


CLS 312/9.4
TXT Pivoting or rotating support:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 9.2 wherein the recording medium is
    supported for pivotal or rotating motion.


CLS 312/9.41
TXT Recording medium shifted with the closure:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 9.9 wherein the support structure is
    connected to the cabinet closure and includes structure to support a
    recording medium, wherein the stored recording medium moves together with
    the cabinet closure as the cabinet closure is opened.


CLS 312/9.42
TXT Support integral with the closure:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 9.41 wherein the recording medium
    supporting structure is a structural part of the closure.


CLS 312/9.43
TXT Plural recording media shifted with the closure:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 9.41 including structure to support a
    plurality of recording media.


CLS 312/9.44
TXT Support integral with the closure:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 9.43 wherein the recording media
    supporting structure is a structural part of the closure.


CLS 312/9.45
TXT On rotary support:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 9.9 wherein the medium is supported on a
    cabinet which is rotated.


CLS 312/9.46
TXT About a vertical axis:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 9.45 wherein the axis of rotation is a
    vertical axis.


CLS 312/9.47
TXT Manually slidable recording medium or medium support:
    Cabinet structures under subclass 9.9 wherein a disk or parallelpiped
    shaped recording medium can be exposed or removed partially or completely
    from the cabinet housing by manually sliding the recording medium or medium
    support structure.


CLS 312/9.48
TXT Horizontally oriented recording medium:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 9.47 wherein the support structure is
    configured to support a recording medium in a horizontal position.


CLS 312/9.5
TXT Including a drive belt:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 9.4 including a mechanism having an
    endless motion transmitting belt for pivoting or rotating the recording
    medium.


CLS 312/9.51
TXT On terraced shelves:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 9.48 wherein the support structure
    comprises a plurality of shelves forming a stepped arrangement.


CLS 312/9.52
TXT Plural recording media on shelf:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 9.48 wherein the supporting means is
    configured for supporting more than one recording medium.


CLS 312/9.53
TXT Vertically oriented recording medium:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 9.47 wherein the support structure is
    configured to support a recording medium on an edge for storage.


CLS 312/9.54
TXT And removed vertically:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 9.53 wherein a recording medium is adapted
    to be removed from the cabinet housing by moving the recording medium
    upwardly in a vertical direction.


CLS 312/9.55
TXT Holder for multiple recording media
    Cabinet structure under subclass 9.53 including a sleeve for storing more
    than one recording medium.


CLS 312/9.56
TXT Stored in individual holder:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 9.53 wherein one recording medium is
    stored in a sleeve.


CLS 312/9.57
TXT Spring biased:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 9.47 including a spring means for
    assisting the sliding motion of the recording medium or recording medium
    support.


CLS 312/9.58
TXT Manually pivotable recording medium or medium support:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 9.9  wherein a disk or parallelpiped
    shaped recording medium can be exposed or removed partially or completely
    from the cabinet housing by manually pivoting the recording medium or
    medium support structure.


CLS 312/9.59
TXT Suspended medium support:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 9.58 wherein the support structure is
    pivotally connected to the cabinet housing at or near the top of the
    housing to suspend the recording medium therefrom.


CLS 312/9.6
TXT Rotating closure type:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 9.4 wherein the recording medium is
    carried by a rotating closure.


CLS 312/9.61
TXT Removable support:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 9.58 wherein the support structure is
    configured for easy removal from the cabinet housing.


CLS 312/9.63
TXT Spring retainer:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 9.9 including a an elastically deformable
    member for applying a yielding force directly to a recording medium to hold
    the same firmly in storage position.


CLS 312/9.64
TXT Portable:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 9.9 in the form of a compact portable case
    for easy transportation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9.8,    for carrying case having structure for storing or supporting
    cylindrical phonograph record, 208.6 for sewing machine carrying case, 902
    for various types of carrying case, 244 for structure with carrying handle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist Line Implements, subclasses 137+ for
    article carrier which can be gripped and carried by hand.


CLS 312/9.7
TXT Rotatable about a vertical axis:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 9.4 wherein the recording medium is
    rotatable about a vertical axis.


CLS 312/9.8
TXT Portable:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 9.2 in the form of a compact carrying case
    for easy transportation from place to place.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9.64    for carrying case having structure for supporting disks or
    parallelepiped recording media, subclass 208.6 for sewing machine carrying
    case, subclass 902 for various types of carrying case, subclass 244 for
    structure with carrying handle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 137+ for
    article carrier which can be gripped and carried by hand.


CLS 312/9.9
TXT Disk or parallelepiped shape:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 9.1 wherein the support structure is
    particularly configured for supporting a flat round or parallelepiped shape
    recording medium.

    (1)     Note.  A parallelepiped shape is a structure with six faces,
    wherein each face being a plane figure with four sides wherein the opposite
    sides are parallel and equal.


CLS 312/10.1
TXT FOR PROJECTOR:
    Cabinet structure under the class definition including structure
    particularly configured to support an optical apparatus for projecting
    image of still or moving pictures upon a screen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.2,    for cabinet with a television adjunct.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 917+ for video display screen support.

    348,    Television, subclasses 836+ for cabinet or chassis of a picture
    reproducer.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 34+, 242, and 243 for housing
    or supports of an optic or motion pictures device, subclass 104 for cabinet
    type projector.

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, subclass 19 for picture and sound record
    carrier system, subclass 18 for cabinet enclosing projector, subclass 119
    for housing of an optic or image projector.


CLS 312/21
TXT Cabinet structures under the class definition having special means for
    housing and supporting instruments or machines so that relative guided
    motion between the latter and the cabinet structure results in placement of
    the instrument or machine in a position exposed for use or in a position,
    as for storage, out of the way in the cabinet structure.  Some of the
    patents include the instrument housed by name only but in general if any
    instrument structure is recited, the combination is classified with the
    instrument.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194+,   for spaced pedestal type cabinets, per se.

    208.1+, 208.5+, 223.3, and 223.4, for cabinets having means to support or
    house typewriters, adding machines, sewing machines, computers or computer
    related equipments, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 217.1+ for sewing machine tables.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 500+ for hold-downs to secure the machine on
    the disappearing leaf or table.


CLS 312/22
TXT Subject matter under subclass 21 in which the special supporting means is
    combined with the closure of the cabinet.


CLS 312/23
TXT Subject matter under subclass 22 in which the special supporting means is
    interconnected with the closure.


CLS 312/24
TXT Subject matter under subclass 23 in which the special supporting means is
    also connected to the fixed casing solely by a swingable link or linkage
    capable of relative movement with reference to the instrument or machine
    and its support.


CLS 312/25
TXT Subject matter under subclass 23 in which the special supporting means is
    also mounted for movement on a trackway or guideway.


CLS 312/26
TXT Subject matter under subclass 23 in which the special supporting means is
    also mounted for pivotal movement about an axis fixed with respect to the
    casing or cabinet structure.


CLS 312/27
TXT Subject matter under subclass 21 in which the special supporting means is
    connected to the fixed casing solely by a swingable link or linkage capable
    of relative motion with reference to the instrument or machine and its
    support.


CLS 312/28
TXT Subject matter under subclass 27 in which the support for the instrument is
    also mounted for movement on a trackway or guideway.


CLS 312/29
TXT Subject matter under subclass 21 in which the special supporting means is a
    trackway or guideway.


CLS 312/30
TXT Subject matter under subclass 21 in which the special supporting means is
    pivoted on a fixed axis.


CLS 312/31
TXT Containers under the class definition combined with means to treat
    contained material or articles with a gas or vapor, usually by the
    operation of a slow diffuser or absorber, generally of the static type as
    sponges, or other liquid wetted means, where the combination includes more
    structure of the container than is necessary to mount the treating means or
    where the particular mode of combination between the treating means and the
    container is set forth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    27,     Undertaking, subclass 11, for corpse preserving coffins.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, for devices which in
    addition to the drying or gas or vapor contact function, have positive
    means, such as heaters, coolers, blowers, regenerators, material handling,
    et cetera, to facilitate such function.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 55 for bait
    holders.

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclasses for specific refrigeration
    apparatus and see the reference to Class 62 in subclass 31.01 of this class
    (312).

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 108+ for solid sorbent
    apparatus for gas separation.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 467+ for a container
    for food that is being subjected to a modified atmosphere.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 726+ for apparatus for coating with a
    gaseous or vaporized coating material having positive means to vaporize the
    coating material or material handling means.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 281 for dough raisers.

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 300+ for patents claiming tobacco treating
    processes or for containers combined with tobacco handling apparatus or
    dynamic gas treating means.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 213+ for an insect proof
    container, subclasses 205+ for a container including an ancillary content
    contacting medium (e.g., antiseptic means).

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 87.1+ for containers with disinfectant
    devices.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 135+ for article dispensers combined
    with means to treat the articles dispensed and which are not otherwise
    provided for.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 190 for fluent material dispensers with
    material treatment or conditioning means.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 86 for garment hangers with material
    treatment means.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 34+ for slow
    diffusers, per se, or for slow diffusers combined with holders.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, particularly subclasses 94+, 100+
    and 108+, for containers combined with gas and liquid contact devices, and
    having positive or dynamic means to promote gas and liquid contact such as
    conduits or passages to admit or direct air into contact with the liquid.

    454,    Ventilation, subclass 183 for provision safes in which the food
    chamber has conduits communicating with a celler or well, or the outside
    atmosphere and see the notes thereunder.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, for a composition comprising a sorbent, per se, and see
    especially subclasses 60+ and 400+.


CLS 312/31.01
TXT Devices under subclass 31 having liquid wetted means exposed to, or
    forming, a material holding chamber, so that the liquid is continuously in
    contact with either an unconfined gas that contacts the material in the
    chamber or with an unconfined gas exterior to the chamber and a gas that
    contacts the material in the chamber.  The liquid supply receptacle may
    also contain ice, and the liquid wetted means may be a pan of water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31.1+,  for liquid wetted means continuously exposed to the atmosphere
    because a small area has been left exposed for the purpose of readily
    renewing the liquid charge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 72 for forced
    air circulators or heaters or both included in devices having a wetted
    surface exposed to material chamber and continuously contacted by an
    unconfined gas.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 287 for wetted wall type refrigerators and
    subclasses 304+ for cooling apparatus utilizing gas-liquid contact means
    wherein the treating and contacting fluid does not contact the material
    within a cooled space.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 110, 157, 223, 291, 328, and 337 for
    ventilation devices which humidify the air.


CLS 312/31.02
TXT Devices under subclass 31.01 which can be set up from or disjointed into,
    unassembled elements, or which comprise components whose aggregate volume
    can either be increased to or decreased from the operative volume of the
    container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5+,     for knockdown fabric wall cabinets, per se.


CLS 312/31.03
TXT Subject matter under subclass 31.01 in which one or more walls of the
    material holding chamber are wetted with a liquid. The wetting liquid
    supply may be in the space formed by plural walls.


CLS 312/31.04
TXT Devices under subclass 31.03 having ceramic or similar porous mass walls as
    the sole liquid wetted means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 94+ for gas and liquid
    contact devices which include a porous mass.


CLS 312/31.05
TXT Devices under subclass 31.03 having porous fabric sheets as the sole liquid
    wetted means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 100+ for gas and
    liquid contact devices which include porous sheets.


CLS 312/31.06
TXT Subject matter under subclass 31.05 in which movement of the liquid along
    the walls is chiefly in a downward direction, there being means for
    collecting the drip from the lower portion of the walls.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 103 and 106, for
    porous sheet gas and liquid contact devices having liquid downflow.


CLS 312/31.1
TXT Devices under subclass 31 having the treating means mounted on that wall or
    other part of the container which is ordinarily moved to gain access to the
    interior thereof for removal of the contents.


CLS 312/31.2
TXT Devices under subclass 31 having the treating means located in such a
    manner that they may be accessible for recharging or replacement without
    giving access to the container interior for removal of the contents.


CLS 312/31.3
TXT Devices under subclass 31.2 having a movably mounted holder for the
    treating means.


CLS 312/33
TXT Cabinet structures under the class definition designed solely for use in
    worship.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 19 for receptacles
    specifically arranged for sacramental use.


CLS 312/34.1
TXT FOR SHEET MATERIAL (E.G., TOWEL):
    Cabinet structure under the class definition including structure
    particularly configured for supporting a piece, roll, or stack of sheet
    material.

    (1)     Note.  Particular housing of a roll with a nominal recitation of an
    axially supported roll holder (e.g., spindle, spool, etc.,) or mounting
    structure therefore, without a means to particularly facilitate winding or
    unwinding (e.g., particular relationship between the roll holder and the
    housing, particular roll drive means, feeding mechanism, winding or
    unwinding mechanisms, etc.) is classified in Class 312.

            Particular housing that peripherally supports a roll, without
    recitation of a means to particularly facilitate winding or unwinding
    (e.g., particular relationship between the roll support and the housing,
    particular roll drive means, feeding mechanism, winding and unwinding
    mechanism, etc.) is classified here in Class 312.  Class 312 takes
    particular housing with nominal recitation of a drive means (e.g., cranking
    means, feeding means, etc.).  See search notes refer to Class 242 below.

            Exception to the above notes:  Class 312 will take housing of a
    continuous reusable type of towel (usually made of cloth) wherein the
    housing sometimes includes details of an axially supported roll holder, or
    mounting structure therefore, or details of a means to facilitate winding
    or unwinding (e.g., particular relationship between the roll support and
    the housing, a roll drive means, winding or unwinding mechanism, etc.).
    This type of housing usually includes a means to store the solided portion
    of the towel (e.g., a take-up roll, a storing compartment, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclass 243.3 for a
    continous roll of flat covers.

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses for movable cutting means for sheet
    material.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 389+ for container or
    wrapper for coiled or wound material with or without support structure
    wherein the coiling or winding is disclosed as performed while said
    material is disassociated from encompassing container or wrapper.  The term
    "disassociated" indicates that there is a destruction of wrapper, package,
    cover material retainer structure in order to wind or unwind material,
    subclasses 39+ for special receptacle for ticket, subclass 233 for special
    receptacle wherein one of the contents is a roll or thin sheets to be
    removed one at a time, subclasses 225+ for special receptacle wherein one
    of the contents is a sheet or roll.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 135  or  45+ for support or shelf-type
    support of sheet or textile sheet material, subclasses 6 and 16 for towel
    service type racks, per se.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 33+ for napkin holders, subclass 25
    for progressively destroyed cellular magazine type supply source,
    subclasses 70+ for rolled or folded web type magazine, subclasses 282+ for
    article dispensing with a casing or support which is not otherwise provided
    for. Class 221 does not take apparatus which forms articles by cutting them
    from a continuous strip.  Class 221 will take cabinet serving as or source
    of supply for discrete articles combined with means to eject or release
    such articles (dispensing means), without regard to the presence or absence
    of cabinet structure.

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, appropriate subclasses for devices
    or processes accomplishing manual severing of indefinite or fixed length
    material wherein a static blade having a severing edge is provided.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading edge or trailing ends to effect movement of the material,
    subclasses 127+ for dispenser, subclass 188 for means to advance material,
    subclasses 135 and 136 for means to select or adjust increments of advance
    material.  Class 226 will take an original patent claiming means for
    positively moving an indeterminate length strip provided that the supply
    roll and its mounting is not specially recited.  A patent claiming a device
    wherein the strip is directly grasp to pull the strip out of the cabinet,
    will be placed as an original in Class 312.

    232,    Deposit and Collection Receptacles, subclass 18 for ticket
    registers and recorders.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 550+ and 590+ for
    dispensing elongated material from a coil.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, appropriate subclasses for sheet
    feeding means, per se, when not necessarily reeling or unreeling.


CLS 312/34.11
TXT Including a take-up roll:
    Cabinet structures under subclass 34.9 wherein the means for storing the
    used portion of the continuous towel includes a roll upon which the used
    portion of the continuous towel is wound.


CLS 312/34.12
TXT Electrical drive means for supply or take up roll:
    Cabinet structures under subclass 34.11 including a power operated element
    connected to one of the rolls for winding or unwinding the continuous towel.


CLS 312/34.13
TXT Stop-timer mechanism:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 34.11 including means operates to stop the
    dispensing operation after a predetermined length of towel and to delay
    resetting of a dispensing mechanism for a predetermined length of time
    prior to a subsequent dispensing operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 15 and 16 for article dispenser
    having timing or delay mechanism.


CLS 312/34.14
TXT Dash pot:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 34.13 wherein the stop-timer mechanism
    comprises a reciprocable piston-cylinder device that operates to retard
    resetting of the dispensing mechanism for a predetermined length of time.


CLS 312/34.15
TXT Suction cup:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 34.13 wherein the stop-timer mechanism
    comprises a suction cup which operates to retard resetting of the
    dispensing mechanism for a predetermined length of time.


CLS 312/34.16
TXT Stop-manual-release mechanism:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 34.11 including a means for stopping the
    dispensing operation after a pre-determined length of towel and a means
    manually operated by a person to permit further dispensing operation.


CLS 312/34.17
TXT Spring driven take-up roll:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 34.11 further including a spring means for
    drawing a hanging soiled loop or end of the continuous towel into the
    cabinet housing.


CLS 312/34.18
TXT Drawer magazine type:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 34.8 including structure in the nature of
    a drawer and in which the sheet material is directly unwound without
    removing the roll of sheet material from the drawer.


CLS 312/34.19
TXT Including external manual operating means:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 34.8 including a member which is exposed
    externally outside of the cabinet housing and adapted to be manually
    operated by a person to dispense the sheet material from the roll.


CLS 312/34.2
TXT Rotatable cabinet:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 34.1 wherein the cabinet is  rotatable
    about an axis.


CLS 312/34.21
TXT And plural outlets:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 34.19 including a plurality of openings
    through which sheet material from a roll may be dispensed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34.3,   34.7 and 34.23, for cabinet structure having plural outlets.


CLS 312/34.22
TXT Including a reserved supply roll:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 34.8 comprising an area or compartment
    particularly configured for holding an extra roll of sheet material.


CLS 312/34.23
TXT Having plural outlets:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 34.8 having plurality of openings each
    through which sheet material may be dispensed or removed.


CLS 312/34.24
TXT For mounting in a wall recess:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 34.8 including structure particularly
    configured for mounting the cabinet housing into a cavity of a room
    partition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242,    for structure mounted in wall or panel recess.


CLS 312/34.3
TXT Having plural outlets:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 34.2 including a plurality of openings
    each through which sheet material may be dispensed or removed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34.7,   34.21 and 34.23, for cabinet structure having plural outlets.


CLS 312/34.4
TXT Stacked or folded:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 34.1 including structure particularly
    configured to accommodate sheet material which is folded into layers or
    stacked upon each others.


CLS 312/34.5
TXT Including means for storing used portion of a continuous towel:Cabinet
    structure under subclass 34.4 including structure particularly configured
    to accommodate the used portion of a folded, continuous piece of towel.



CLS 312/34.6
TXT Including a take-up roll:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 34.5 wherein the means for storing the
    used portion of the continuous towel includes a roller upon which the used
    portion of the continuous towel is wound.


CLS 312/34.7
TXT Having plural outlets:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 34.4 including structure particularly
    configured to accommodate a plurality of stacks of sheet material, and a
    plurality of openings each through which sheet material from one stack may
    be dispensed or removed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34.3,   34.21 and 34.23, for cabinet structure having plural outlets.


CLS 312/34.8
TXT In roll form:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 34.1 comprising structure particularly
    configured for supporting a supply roll of sheet material.


CLS 312/34.9
TXT Including means for storing used portion of a continuous towel:Cabinet
    structures under subclass 34.8 including structure particularly configured
    to accommodate the used portion of a continuous roll of sheet.


CLS 312/35
TXT Cabinet structures under the class definition designed for use in storing
    articles and comprising a magazine to contain a supply of articles and
    outlet means through which the articles may be removed and including means
    whereby the ease with which such articles may be removed is increased.  The
    term "article" is here used in sharper distinction from the term "bulk" and
    means a definitely shaped thing, not so small as substances ordinarily
    dispensed in bulk, as nuts, granular or fluent material, cards, sheets,
    stamps, tickets, or material dispensed by winding from a roll and then
    cutting off the dispensed part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for similar structures,
    including means to release, discharge or eject the articles therefrom, and
    see sections I and II of the class definition of that class (221) for
    definition and explanation of the features which establish the distinction
    between removal facilitating structure and dispensing means.


CLS 312/36
TXT Devices under subclass 35, provided with means for lowering the temperature
    of or maintaining a low temperature of the articles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 378+ for structure specialized to
    refrigeration combined with a material handler.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 150 and 286 for article dispensing
    devices not otherwise provided for, including cabinet structure and
    provided respectively with cooling means or with a spaced casing structure.


CLS 312/42
TXT Devices under subclass 35 which hold the articles stacked against one
    another.


CLS 312/43
TXT Devices under subclass 42 in which the articles are cup-shaped.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50+,    for foldable paper cups which are stacked in flat folded condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for article dispensing
    devices not otherwise provided for, many of which are for cup-shaped
    articles.  Subclasses 63, 221+, 289+, and 303+ represent the best
    collections of such art.


CLS 312/45
TXT Devices under subclass 42 in which the articles are cylindrically-shaped.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclasses 196, 199, 239, 602, and 660+ for cartridge holding magazines
    combined with means to support them from the body or belt.

    453,    Coin Handling, appropriate subclasses for appliances and machines
    limited to use in facilitating or transferring coins in coin handling.


CLS 312/49
TXT Subject matter under subclass 42 in which the articles are ball-shaped.


CLS 312/50
TXT Devices under subclass 42 in which the articles are in the form of cards or
    sheets.


CLS 312/59
TXT Devices under subclass 50 in which the cards or sheets are retained in
    rotatable magazines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 113 and 119+ for rotatably mounted
    plural source article dispensing devices and see also subclasses 76+ for
    cellular magazine type article dispensers in many of which the cellular
    magazine structures are rotatably mounted.


CLS 312/60
TXT Devices under subclass 50 in which the cards or sheets are retained in a
    magazine which is at a perceptible angle with the horizontal plane, so that
    the magazine is a chute or column.


CLS 312/61
TXT Devices under subclass 60 having a follower to press the cards or sheets
    towards the outlet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Articles Dispensing, subclasses 56+, 226+, and 279+ for article
    dispensing devices not otherwise provided for, having follower structures
    included therein.


CLS 312/71
TXT Devices under subclass 42 having a follower to press the stacked articles
    (other than cards or sheets) toward an egress outlet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for similar devices in which the articles are cards or sheets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 226+ and 279+ for article dispensing
    devices including follower means.


CLS 312/72
TXT Devices under subclass 35 in which the articles are cylindrical.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    453,    Coin Handling, appropriate subclasses for appliances and machines
    limited to use in facilitating or transferring coins.


CLS 312/73
TXT Devices under subclass 72 in which the cylindrical articles are relatively
    long and slender.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Packages, subclasses 96+ for pocket match
    safes.


CLS 312/86
TXT Devices under subclass 73 having means for igniting the article ejected.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 85+ for a tobacco
    container with igniter means for the content.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 136+ for article dispensing devices
    not otherwise provided for, including igniting means.


CLS 312/91
TXT Devices under subclass 35 in which the articles are advanced toward an
    outlet by means of a web conveyor to which they are secured by friction or
    other means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 25 for web conveyors in the form of
    cellular magazines which serve as a supply source for articles to be
    dispensed and which are progressively destroyed in the dispensing of the
    articles, subclasses 70+ for rolled or folded web type cellular magazine
    article supply source structures in article dispensing devices, subclasses
    84+ for flexible conveyor belt carried cell structure as article source of
    supply structure, and subclass 253 for other article dispensing devices in
    which discharge assistant means are carried upon endless belt structure.


CLS 312/97
TXT Devices under subclass 35 having an endless carrier to bring the article to
    the outlet where they may be removed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses, including 606,
    688.1, and 844.1+ for endless conveyor structure.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 84+ for article dispensers in which
    a cellular magazine type supply source is carried on flexible conveyor belt
    structure, and subclass 253 for article dispensers having discharge
    assistants which are carried on endless belt structures.


CLS 312/97.1
TXT Devices under subclass 35 having a plurality of article magazines rotatable
    about a single common axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59,     for rotatable magazine structures for retaining cards or sheets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 113 and 119+ for plural source
    article dispensing devices having rotatably mounted sources of supply.


CLS 312/100
TXT Cabinet structures under the class definition designed to be stationed,
    when in use, outdoors.


CLS 312/101
TXT Devices under subclass 100 mounted outdoors on the wall or window of a
    building.


CLS 312/102
TXT Devices under subclass 101 having transparent wall structure to form a show
    case.


CLS 312/107
TXT Cabinet structures under the class definition comprising assembled cabinet
    parts, as bases, compartments, and tops or individual cabinets to be
    interfitted or interlocked with one another to form a built-up cabinet.
    Also joints or connecters and aligning devices used for securing the units
    together.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 97 and the notes thereto
    for container stacking devices generally.


CLS 312/107.5
TXT Structures under subclass 107 having movable components which can be
    simultaneously secured against movement by a bar or chain having portions
    positioned across the paths of motion of said components.


CLS 312/108
TXT Devices under subclass 107 designed so that each unit can be knocked down
    to take up less space.  A special form of this construction is where the
    parts are foldable.


CLS 312/109
TXT Subject matter under subclass 107 relating to door or closure constructions.


CLS 312/110
TXT Devices under subclass 109 having means to equalize the motion of the door
    or closure on its bearings or guides to prevent binding.


CLS 312/111
TXT Devices under subclass 107 comprising joining devices or connecters for
    securing sectional units of cabinet structures together and also for
    aligning such sectional units and keeping them in line.


CLS 312/114
TXT Cabinet structures under the class definition with transparent wall
    structures so that articles placed within the cabinet structure are visible
    from the outside. This subclass also includes transparent counter
    protectors or guards in the nature of partial show cases.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 88 for drying
    apparatus with display or inspecting means.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses for a
    residual structure having a fixed panel which may be a pane, particularly
    subclasses 171.3+ for a residual panel with treating means, subclass 201
    for a bay window, subclass 204.52 for a vented double pane panel,
    subclasses 204.591+ for resilient means spacing a pane from an edging,
    subclasses 455+ for a sectioned framed panel, subclasses 475.1+ from a
    peripheral frame surrounding a panel, and subclasses 777+ and 800.11+ for
    an interfitting edge frame and panel.


CLS 312/115
TXT Devices under subclass 114 provided with sprinklers or sprayers, such as
    are used to spray vegetables in the cabinet structure with water.


CLS 312/116
TXT Devices under subclass 114 designed as refrigerators.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for dispensing cabinets having cooling means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 246+ for a cooled display type cabinet
    having specific means to promote cooling, e.g., aiding air circulation or
    having a specifically defined refrigeration means.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 150 for article dispensing
    combinations including cabinet structure and cooling or heating means, and
    see also subclass 286 for article dispensing devices having space casings.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 131 for jacketed compartments, and subclass
    146.1 for dispensers with cooling means.


CLS 312/117
TXT Devices under subclass 114 having compartments.


CLS 312/118
TXT Devices under subclass 117 having a compartment for reserve stock or supply
    of articles and another compartment for samples of the same.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 561, for a compartmented
    tray-type container.


CLS 312/119
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein the compartment is slidable to
    permit access.


CLS 312/120
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein the compartment is pivotally
    mounted.


CLS 312/121
TXT Devices under subclass 118 having a stock compartment which has a filling
    opening and a dispensing opening, so that in connecting the two openings,
    it acts as a chute or hopper.


CLS 312/122
TXT Subject matter under subclass 117 wherein the compartment is slidable to
    permit access.


CLS 312/123
TXT Subject matter under subclass 117 wherein the compartment is pivotally
    mounted.


CLS 312/124
TXT Subject matter under subclass 117 in which a compartment has a filling
    opening and a dispensing opening, so that the compartment acts as a chute
    in connecting these two openings.


CLS 312/125
TXT Devices under subclass 117 which are rotatable independent of the cabinet
    or are rotatable with the cabinet.


CLS 312/126
TXT Devices under subclass 114 including trays which form a regular part of the
    cabinet structure.


CLS 312/127
TXT Devices under subclass 126 connected to the closure of the cabinet by means
    intermediate the tray and closure and adapted for relative motion with the
    tray.


CLS 312/128
TXT Devices under subclass 114 including racks.


CLS 312/129
TXT Devices under subclass 128 including racks which are combined with the
    closure of the cabinet structure.


CLS 312/130
TXT Devices under subclass 129 including racks connected with the closure by
    means intermediate the rack and closure and adapted to have relative motion
    with the rack.


CLS 312/131
TXT Devices under subclass 129 with a trackway or guide, so that they may be
    withdrawn from the cabinet structure proper.


CLS 312/132
TXT Devices under subclass 128 mounted for movement on a trackway or guide.


CLS 312/133
TXT Devices under subclass 132 having the article support of the rack also
    mounted for pivotal movement.


CLS 312/134
TXT Devices under subclass 128 in which the article-supporting elements are
    mounted on flexible endless carriers designed for travel over guides
    ordinarily rotatable.


CLS 312/135
TXT Subject matter under subclass 128 comprising rotatable racks or rotatable
    cabinets inclosing racks.


CLS 312/136
TXT Devices under subclass 128 pivotally- mounted.


CLS 312/137
TXT Devices under subclass 114 comprising partial show cases to be mounted on
    counters to protect or guard the merchandise from being handled by the
    public.


CLS 312/138.1
TXT With closure (e.g., door):

    Devices under subclass 114 with a movable component for closing the cabinet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    321.5,  for a cabinet not of the showcase type with a closure including an
    article support, e.g., a household refrigerator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, appropriate subclasses for the
    structure of a closure, per se, and particularly subclasses 381+ for
    closures of general utility mounted for swinging.


CLS 312/139
TXT Devices under subclass 138.1 with special means for operating them.


CLS 312/139.1
TXT Movable sequentially, pivotally and rectilinearly:

    Devices under subclass 138.1 in which the closure is mounted to move with
    two subsequent components of motion, one component including swinging and
    the other sliding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 254+ for closures of
    general utility mounted for sequential translation and pivoting.


CLS 312/139.2
TXT Rectilinear movement:

    Devices under subclass 138.1 in which the closure is mounted to slide along
    a straight line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclass 404+ for closures of
    general utility mounted for reciprocation.


CLS 312/140
TXT Devices under subclass 114 with special fasteners, joints, or connectors,
    for securing adjacent glass walls together. This subclass includes also
    these fasteners, joints, or connectors, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 764+ for a shaft,
    e.g., frame member, with a separable retainer for a facer, e.g., pane.


CLS 312/140.1
TXT Structures under the class definition in the nature of a table or bench on
    which goods are displayed for inspection and sale, usually distinguished by
    being inclosed at the front and sides and frequently having drawers or
    compartments. Details of structure, as tops and attachments, are also here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclasses 10+ for
    counters provided with means for protection against attack.


CLS 312/140.2
TXT Counters under subclass 140.1 of a portable or knockdown nature.


CLS 312/140.3
TXT Subject matter under subclass 140.1 relating to the top structure.


CLS 312/140.4
TXT Subject matter under subclass 140.1 relating to attachments for counters.


CLS 312/183
TXT Structures under the class definition in which the article supports or
    components are specially adapted for the support of cards or sheets by the
    provision in the organization of means for releasably securing the cards or
    sheets, generally in a stacked relationship, to the article supports.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Pictures, or Sign Exhibiting, appropriate subclasses for
    support means and receptacles for display sheet or cards; subclasses 377+
    and 493 for a rotatable carrier tray, subclasses 380+ and 508+ for a tray
    display items requiring planar motion for exposure, and subclasses 388+ and
    530+ for hinge mounted display trays and subclass 359 for a folder
    including index receiving means.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 67.1+ for a
    file folder or file envelope.

    402,    Binder Device Releasably Engaging Aperture or Notch of Sheet,
    appropriate subclass for a sheet retainer device in the form of means which
    passes through the thickness dimension of a sheet or a group of sheets to
    releasably secure the same in either geometrically congruent relation or in
    haphazard arrangement so that destruction of the sheet upon removal from
    the sheet retainer device may be accomplished without mutilation of either
    the device or sheet.


CLS 312/184
TXT Structures under subclass 183 in which the cards or sheets are supported
    substantially vertically and depend from the support structure.


CLS 312/185
TXT Structures under subclass 183 in which the card or sheet carrying
    components are each movable to an unhoused or accessible position, wherein
    there is coaction between housing structure and components whereby the
    retainers hold the sheets only when the component is housed.


CLS 312/186
TXT Structures under subclass 185, the article supports comprising cylindrical
    drums or containers rotatable about a horizontal axis having peripheral
    card or sheet carrying compartments and provided with retaining elements
    for securing the cards or sheets in the compartments when the compartments
    are in any but the uppermost position.


CLS 312/187
TXT Structures under subclass 185, the housing carrying a sheet retainer for
    each component.


CLS 312/188
TXT Structures under subclass 183, the components having closures which are
    particularly shaped to coact with the card or sheets to retain them when
    the closure is in the closed position.


CLS 312/189
TXT Structures under subclass 183, the cards or sheets being strung or impaled
    upon the securing means.


CLS 312/190
TXT Structures under subclass 183, in which the securing means are spring urged
    to retaining position.


CLS 312/191
TXT Structures under subclass 190, in which the sheet supports are relatively
    movably supported in a face to back relationship.


CLS 312/192
TXT Structures under subclass 190, in which each of the card or sheet supports
    is swingable about a vertical axis from a housed position to a position of
    access.


CLS 312/193
TXT Structures under subclass 183, in which the securing means comprise fixed,
    nongripping elements.


CLS 312/193.4
TXT And a card selector:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 183 including a mechanism which operates
    to locate a selected card.


CLS 312/194
TXT Structures under the class definition continuously organized when
    completely set up, to provide (1) at least one pedestal having one or more
    compartments, (2) at least a second pedestal, spaced therefrom, being in
    the form of one or more compartments or a leg, and (3) a table or
    equivalent work surface positioned across or between the spaced pedestals,
    or movable to and from a position across or between the pedestals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21+,    for spaced pedestal type cabinets combined with disappearing
    instrument type supports.

    107+,   for additive-unit type cabinets in which the supporting units are
    adjacent.

    239,    for spaced pedestal cabinets in which the pedestal structure is
    merely a support and has no storage utility.

    294+,   particularly 314, for a table or equivalent work surface and a
    floor contacting support movable relative to an enclosure structure so as
    to convert the enclosure structure to a spaced pedestal type cabinet.


CLS 312/195
TXT Structures under subclass 194, which can be readily set up from or
    disjointed into, unassembled elements, or which comprise foldable or
    sectional components which permit the structure to be collapsed into
    smaller volume for shipment or storage, usually by eliminating the knee
    space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for similar structure in curtain type cabinets.

    31.02,  for vapor treating knockdown cabinets.


CLS 312/196
TXT Structures under subclass 194 in which there is additional structure above
    the table, which may completely cover or enclose the table if one or more
    parts of such structure are movable to expose the table surface, or movable
    to and from housed position beneath the table.


CLS 312/197
TXT Structures under subclass 194 in which at least one pedestal compartment is
    mounted to swing or to rotate relative to the pedestal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195,    for pedestals which pivot to inoperative position and thereby
    eliminate the knee space.


CLS 312/198
TXT Structures under the class definition in which there are two or more
    individually complete housing sections, polygonal in horizontal
    cross-section and having four or more top, side, or bottom exposed walls
    not enclosed by walls of another housing section, each having one or more
    compartments, at least two being   connected to a common support and spaced
    from each other, connected to each other in spaced relation, or connected
    with each other for relative motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107+,   for additive-unit type cabinets, the units of which are connected
    neither for relative motion nor in spaced relation.

    194+,   for spaced section cabinets having a table or table top extending
    there between.

    294+,   for housing sections with less than four such sides, as a movable
    or removable compartment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclasses 1+ and 19+ for plural
    section trunks, and 40+ for suitcases or traveling bags.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses 13 and 45 for plural section boxes
    and crates.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 23.2+ for horizontally attached receptacle
    sets, and subclasses 23.83+ for arrangement of plural receptacles having no
    cabinet features.


CLS 312/199
TXT Structures under subclass 198 in which one section closes another when they
    are in one relative position or one section is open for access when they
    are in another relative position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclass 49, for safes
    having complementary sections which close face-to-face.


CLS 312/200
TXT Structures under subclass 199 in which the plural sections may be moved as
    a unit in addition to the relative closing motion.


CLS 312/201
TXT Structures under subclass 198 in which the sections are connected either to
    one another or to a common support so that at least one section is mounted
    to move relative to another section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107+,   for additive-unit type cabinets in which one unit is movably
    mounted on another unit, but only for the purpose of assembly or
    disassembly.

    199+,   where there are two complete cabinet sections at least one movable
    relative to the other so that when moved to face-to-face position each
    closes the other.


CLS 312/202
TXT Structures under subclass 201 in which at least one complete cabinet
    section is mounted to rotate about its axis.


CLS 312/203
TXT Structures under subclass 198 in which one cabinet section is supported in
    spaced relation above another, a table being mounted to slide in the space
    between the two.


CLS 312/204
TXT Structures under the class definition having either ornamental
    characteristics, features that simulate devices other than cabinets, or
    that simulate other cabinet parts (e.g., a wall panel that simulates a
    drawer), or provided with at least one compartment whose presence is
    unobvious from the structure employed.


CLS 312/205
TXT Structures under the class definition in which the overall dimensions may
    be changed to provide for a plurality of operative volumes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257.1+, for knockdown structures which have only one operative volume.


CLS 312/206
TXT Structures under the class definition specially designed to house one or
    more brushes, brooms or mops, and having either additional storage space or
    means to support the structure, or both.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 258 for shoe
    shine kits, wherein the coating implement (i.e., applier or spreader) is
    not claimed.

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 286+ for containers for a brush and at least one
    other toilet article.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 361+ for a brush
    container, per se.  A brush receptacle plus means to support such container
    will be found in this (312) class.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 65+ for racks for supporting two or
    more brush type articles or one such article and at least one different
    article.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 110+ for supports for single brush type
    articles.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 118+ for the
    combination of a container for a supply of coating material and an
    applicator removable therefrom for application of the material to a work
    surface.


CLS 312/207
TXT Structures under subclass 206 in which the handle of the brush, broom or
    mop projects from the housing.


CLS 312/208.1
TXT FOR KEY-BOARD WRITING MACHINE (E.G., TYPEWRITER):
    Cabinet under the class definition including structure particularly
    configured for supporting a machine having a keyboard for producing letters
    or figures.

    (1)     Note.  Structures for housing or supporting a computer or computer
    related equipment such as a printer, display unit, etc., are found in
    subclass 223.2 or 223.3.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 637+ for machinery supports not restricted to
    use with a cabinet structure.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 691+ for frame, casing or support
    for typewriter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21+,    for related structure of the disappearing instrument type.


CLS 312/208.2
TXT Including work-sheet storing area:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 208.1 including a separate compartment or
    area for supporting paper to be fed to the key board writing machine.


CLS 312/208.3
TXT Having particular machine-cover detail:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 208.1 wherein significance is attributed
    to a machine cover which is movable or removable with respect to a
    supporting structure for a key-board writing machine and configured to
    partially or completely enclose the key board writing machine.


CLS 312/208.4
TXT Portable:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 208.1 in the form of a compact carrying
    case by which the keyboard-writing machine may be easily transported.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8.4,    9.8, 9.64, 208.6, 244, and 902, for different types of portable
    cases.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclass 685 for typewriter built into a
    carrying case.


CLS 312/208.5
TXT FOR SEWING MACHINE:
    Cabinet structure under the class definition having structure particularly
    configured for supporting a sewing machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21+,    for structure for supporting disappearing instrument type machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 217.1+ for sewing machines with table or stand.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 90 for sewing machine lighting.


CLS 312/208.6
TXT Portable:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 208.5 having means to facilitate carrying
    by hand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9.8     or 9.64, for carrying case having structure for storing or
    supporting cylindrical, disk or parallel-piped shaped phonograph record,
    subclass 208.2 for typewriter carrying case, subclass 244 for structure
    with carrying handle, subclass 902 for different types of carrying cases.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 137+ for
    article carrier which can be gripped and carried by hand.


CLS 312/209
TXT Structures under the class definition specially designed for laboratory,
    dental, barber or medical use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 363+ for a body treatment
    tool container.

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 77+ for cabinets combined with dental
    equipment.


CLS 312/210
TXT Structures under the class definition which partially enclose an object
    supported independently of the cabinet and which have additional storage
    space or rack structure of general utility.  The wall or floor which
    supports the object, together with the mask or screen type cabinet, may
    form a complete enclosure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284,    for bottomless covers associated with a table member and forming a
    container when shifted to noncovering position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 549+ for tub
    enclosures.


CLS 312/210.5
TXT Structures under the class definition combined with material sifting means,
    there being also a cabinet component not directly associated with the
    sifting function.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 374 for
    cabinets with sifters and having no compartments of general utility.


CLS 312/211
TXT Structures under the class definition having a general purpose compartment
    and a deposit and collection compartment, which (1) is filled through one
    opening and emptied from another opening, though the filling opening may be
    auxiliary to the collection opening; (2) receives at intervals and is
    emptied at one time, or is filled at one time and collected from at
    intervals; and (3) requires the deposited material to travel along a
    vertical or inclined path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229,    for liquid drains and dust collectors.

    283+,   particularly 287+, for cabinets having deposit openings in one side
    and collection openings in an opposite side, there being no vertical travel
    of the deposited material.

    292,    for a closure in a closure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 97+ for article dispensers not
    otherwise provided for, combined with a second nondispensing compartment
    and see especially subclass 102 in which said compartment is for used
    articles and is therefore in the nature of a deposit and collection
    receptacle.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 130+ for cabinets having general purpose
    compartments and a specific fluent material dispenser, and subclass 457 for
    cabinets having a deposit opening, a collection opening, and means, such as
    a partition, to cause the deposited material to assume an angle of repose
    to facilitate its removal.

    232,    Deposit and Collection Receptacles, appropriate subclass for such
    devices not having general purpose compartments.


CLS 312/212
TXT Structures under subclass 211 in which the compartment into which the
    articles or materials are deposited is movably mounted.


CLS 312/213
TXT Structures under the class definition having at least one exterior wall
    (which may be a movably mounted or removable closure wall) formed with at
    least one ventilating opening there through or formed at least in part by
    foraminous material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3+,     for cabinets formed of flexible material, as fabric.

    31.01+, for cabinets having foraminous walls in combination with liquid
    wetted means.

    206+,   for brush, broom or mop cabinets with ventilating features.

    234,    for cabinets having wall openings for the purpose of displaying the
    contents.

    292,    for cabinets having a main closure with an auxiliary closure, if
    the latter permits access to at least part of the housing contents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 201+ for
    cabinet structure combined with added drying means such as fans.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 409 and 410+ for an enclosure having
    features peculiar to refrigeration and with an exterior port.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 485+ for wire receptacles, and subclasses
    676 and 913 for ventilated wall structure.

    454,    Ventilation, appropriate subclasses for cabinets or cabinet
    structure, including significant ventilation structure, and specifically
    subclass 184 for the ventilation of a cabinet which houses electrical or
    electronic components.


CLS 312/215
TXT Structures under the main class definition having a plurality of locked or
    latched movable parts which can be individually unlocked or unlatched
    either by a single means which can be positioned to select a desired lock
    or latch operator, or by a plurality of individual operators which are
    grouped together so as to be accessible from one portion only of the
    cabinet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 15+ for jail type
    closures with similar latching devices.


CLS 312/216
TXT Structures under the main class definition having two or more movable or
    removable components which can be simultaneously secured against movement
    by a bar or chain positioned across the paths of motion of said components.
     The bar may consist of a marginal extension of a door or of an exterior
    wall of a movable compartment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107.5,  for similar structure in sectional unit cabinets.

    310+,   for a movable component, such as a closure, which confronts one or
    more housed components and blocks movement thereof, unless and until moved
    to unblocking position.

    324,    for two closures which pivot in opposite directions to housed
    position about spaced and parallel axis, the marginal portion of one
    closure overlapping the other when both are in housed position.


CLS 312/217
TXT Structures under subclass 216 housed within the device and having portions
    or adjuncts positioned across the paths of motion of said components or of
    accessories carried by said components, and subcombinations and elements
    peculiar to the defined organizations.


CLS 312/218
TXT Structures under subclass 217 wherein a manually operable rectilinearly
    reciprocating rod actuates said bar or rod member to or from its locking
    position.


CLS 312/219
TXT Structures under subclass 217 wherein the motion of a separable key is
    imparted to said bar or rod member to shift it from its locking position.


CLS 312/220
TXT Structures under subclass 217 having a movable closure which actuates said
    bar or rod member to or from its locking position.


CLS 312/221
TXT Structures under subclass 217 having a movable compartment which actuates
    said bar or rod member to or from its locking position.


CLS 312/222
TXT Structures under the main class definition having a movable component
    provided with a latch which is actuated to or from latching position by
    another component, movable or removable, or by the motion of a latch for
    the latter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    292,    Closure Fasteners, appropriate subclasses particularly subclasses
    99, 102, 146, 182, 198, 203, and 216, for closure catch operators.


CLS 312/223.1
TXT FOR PARTICULAR ELECTRICAL DEVICE OR COMPONENT:
    Cabinet structure under the class definition including structure for
    housing or supporting electrical wiring, component, device, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Many patents classified in other subclasses disclose
    electrical devices or features.  However, only those patents that attribute
    significantly to the electrical features have been cross-referenced here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208.1,  for structure adapted to support or house typewriter or keyboard
    writing machine, subclass 208.5 for structure adapted to support or house a
    sewing machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 20+ for power
    driven planar surfaces.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 52.1+ for boxes
    and housing with electric device or mounting means.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 26 for electric fixture type.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 49+ for pipe or cable supports.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 600+ for
    housing and mounting assemblies with plural diverse active electrical
    components, e.g., transistors, microprocessors, tubes, etc.


CLS 312/223.2
TXT Housing for computer or computer related equipment:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 223.1 including structure particularly
    configured for housing or covering plural diverse electronic parts or
    components of a computer or computer related equipment and which is
    normally sold with the computer or computer related equipment as a
    merchandised unit.

    (1)     Note.  The housing of a computer or computer related equipment
    which is normally sold with the computer as a unit and directly encloses or
    covers diverse electronic components of the computer or computer related
    equipment, without positive recitation of a computer or computer related
    equipment is classified in this subclass. Housing of a computer or computer
    related equipment in combination with a positive nominal recitation of a
    computer or computer related equipment is classified in Class 361.

    (2)     Note.  The terms "display panel" is interpreted in light of the
    disclosure as follows: positive recitation of a "display panel" will be
    classified under this subclass if referring to a covering panel of a
    display unit, and will be classified under Class 361 if referring to a
    panel display unit (which inherently comprises diverse electrical
    components).

    (3)     Note.  Positive recitation of a "computer" or computer related
    equipment will be classified in this subclass if by disclosure is intended
    to mean a housing itself for covering or enclosing a computer or computer
    related equipment, and will be classified in Class 361 if interpreted as a
    positive recitation of a computer or computer related equipment (which
    inherently comprises diverse electrical components).

    (4)     Note.  Examples of computer related equipment are: printer,
    keyboard, display unit, etc.


CLS 312/223.3
TXT Work station or support furniture for computer or computer related
    equipment:Cabinet structure under subclass 223.1 including structure
    particularly configured for supporting a computer or computer related
    equipment.

    (1)     Note.  Cabinet or work station of furniture type which includes
    structures for supporting a computer or computer related equipment, without
    a positive recitation of a computer or computer related equipment is
    classified in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Claims that include language such as "means for supporting a
    computer . . ." and followed by the phrase:" . . . said computer" does not
    necessarily constitute a positive recitation of a computer.  In such case
    classification will be depend on whether or not the recited computer is an
    absolutely necessary element of the claimed combination.

    (3)     Note.  Positive recitation of a "computer" or computer related
    equipment will be classified in this subclass if by disclosure is intended
    to mean a housing itself for covering or enclosing a computer or computer
    related equipment, and will be classified in Class 361 if interpreted as a
    positive recitation of a computer or computer related equipment (which
    inherently comprises diverse electrical components).


CLS 312/223.4
TXT Telephone:
    Cabinet under subclass 223.1 including structure particularly configured
    for supporting a telephone unit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclass 88 for telephone equipment lighting.


CLS 312/223.5
TXT Illumination means:
    Cabinet under subclass 223.1 wherein significance is attributed to the
    lighting distribution inside or outside of the cabinet housing or to the
    attachment of the lighting fixture to the cabinet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 88 for
    apparatus having illuminating means.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 367 for portable slide
    viewer with internal light source, subclasses 553+ for structure having
    illumination.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 264 for a cabinet having specific
    refrigerating means and provided with illuminating or radiant treating
    means.

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclass 23 for structure
    including illuminating means.

    132,    Toilet, subclass 288 for illuminated toilet kit.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 17+, 48+ and
    50+ for housing specially designed only for electrical equipment and see
    the class definition section 7 and Note 15 thereto.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 220 for heating device having
    illuminator.

    348,    Television, subclass 842 for cabinet or chassis with light shield.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 97, 127+ for furniture lighting, 98, 125,
    135 for various structures with illuminator.


CLS 312/223.6
TXT Particular electrical wiring feature:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 223.1 wherein significance is attributed
    to structure particularly configured to accommodate electrical wiring.


CLS 312/224
TXT Structures under the class definition having a mirror.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    838+ for mirrors, per se.


CLS 312/225
TXT Structures under subclass 224 in which there are two or more mirrors.


CLS 312/226
TXT Structures under subclass 224 in which the mirror is mounted for motion.


CLS 312/227
TXT Structures under subclass 226 in which the movable mirror is (1)
    interconnected with a closure so as to move when the closure moves, (2)
    mounted on a closure or (3) forms a closure.


CLS 312/228
TXT Structures under the class definition having a basin or tub claimed as a
    part of the combination.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210,    for cabinets which partially enclose an independently supported
    basin or tub.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 619+, particularly
    subclass 630 for basins and subclasses 538+ for tubs, per se, or in
    combination with an enclosure therefor, there being no cabinet features
    such as drawers, racks, shelves, etc., and no compartments for general
    storage purposes beyond the compartment formed by the basin enclosure.


CLS 312/228.1
TXT Having particular shelf or rack:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 228 wherein significance is attributed to
    a particular article support or article support mounting structure inside
    the basin or tub.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclass 58 for dishwasher
    machine with electrically operated door latch.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 181.1 for support or rack made of wire.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 487 and 488 for dish or dishwasher rack,
    per se.


CLS 312/229
TXT Structures under the class definition having any one or any combination of
    (1) means to drain liquids from the structure or some part thereof, (2) a
    pan in which draining liquid or dust may collect, (3) means to allow dust
    to settle to the bottom of the structure, or (4) a splash board.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209,    for laboratory, dental, barber, or medical cabinets having such
    structure.

    228,    for disclosed basin or tub combinations having drains,
    drain-boards, or splash boards for the basin or tub.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclass 637 for sink
    drainboards.

    222,    Dispensing, particularly subclasses 108+ for dispensers with drains
    and see section 7 of the main class definition.


CLS 312/230
TXT Structures under the class definition having an erasable surface, (e.g., a
    blackboard) as a part of the combination.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 408+ for such subject
    matter without cabinet features.


CLS 312/231
TXT Structures under the class definition claimed in combination with either or
    both (1) a drafting board or (2) means for holding a supply of material
    (usually paper) in a position to be written upon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233,    for combinations with means to hold a book or other copy in a
    position to be read.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    281,    Books, Strips, and Leaves, for such structures, per se, and in
    combination with means other than a table surface to support the same in
    position to be written upon.

    462,    Books, Strips, and Leaves for  Manifolding, for means for
    associating plural sheets or strips so that matter written upon the topmost
    is duplicated in the others and in combination with means to support the
    same in position to be written upon.


CLS 312/232
TXT Structures under the class definition claimed in combination with an
    inkwell.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclass 26.2 for an
    inkwell attached to a desk and opening upwardly.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 69.2 for an inkstand and penrack,
    combined.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 577 for an inkstand comprising a dispensing
    inkwell and a base therefor.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 118+ for the
    combination of ink supply means and a pen removable therefrom for use
    independently thereof.


CLS 312/233
TXT Structures under the class definition having means for supporting a book or
    other copy in a position in which it can be read.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231,    for combinations with means to support material in a position to be
    written upon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, for advertising exhibitors in
    general; and see subclasses 341+ for copy holders, including a movable line
    guide or copy.

    84,     Music, subclass 180, for pianos having music desks or racks and
    subclasses 486+ for music holders having leaf turning means.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 441.1+ for an easel, book, copy, or music
    score holder.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 718+ for a copy holder combined
    with or having means for attachment to a typewriter; which copy holder
    includes either (a) a copy support permitting adjustment of copy relative
    to a viewing locus or (b) an adjustable indicator (e.g., line guide).


CLS 312/234
TXT Structures under the class definition having any one of any combination of
    an exhibitor of any kind, a display opening in a wall, a signal or
    indicator of any kind, or an arrangement by which a stock is maintained of
    a stored commodity and means separate from the stated stock are provided to
    exhibit a sample.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114+,   for housings having transparent outer walls.

    118+,   for showcases of the stock and sample type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, for such structure, per se, and
    in combination with housings therefor.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 459.1 for a special
    receptacle or package with an indicator and subclass 459.5 for a special
    receptacle or package with indicia.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses 9, 10, 11, 58, and 63, for those
    that display their contents.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 2+ for article dispensers not
    elsewhere provided for, combined with indicating, signaling or exhibiting
    means.


CLS 312/234.1
TXT Devices under subclass 234, in which the indicators are means to identify
    the contents of one or more components.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, appropriate subclass for a
    device which retains or supports a display item or an assembly of display
    items, with an index or other selective means of identification for the
    item.


CLS 312/234.2
TXT Devices under subclass 234.1 in which the indicators comprise labels on
    components or compartments together with a list associated with the
    structure and relating to the subject matter of the material in the labeled
    compartments.


CLS 312/234.3
TXT Devices under subclass 234.2 in which the list is mounted on a component
    closure.


CLS 312/234.4
TXT Devices under subclass 234.1 in which the indicators comprise labels on
    stationary elements of the structure, usually of the "pigeonhole type", to
    identify the contents of adjacent sheet holding components.


CLS 312/234.5
TXT Devices under subclass 234.1 in which the indicators are on components
    movable from a housed to an access position.


CLS 312/235.1
TXT WITH STEP:

    Devices under the class definition in combination with a device adapted to
    support a person in standing position.

     SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclass 25 for a surface
    of that class incorporating a receptacle.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 70+ for a cabinet
    storing a supple fire escape or ladder, the cabinet features being only
    such as are necessary for the support or housing of the fire escape or
    ladder.


CLS 312/235.2
TXT WITH SEAT OR REST:

    Devices under the class definition in combination with a device adapted to
    support a person in sitting position or to support a specific body part;
    e.g., footrest, backrest.

    (1)     Note.  Class 312 only contains nominal recitations of seat
    structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 188.01+ for a seat combined with
    holder or receptacle for disparate articles.


CLS 312/235.3
TXT Seat storable within cabinet:

    Devices with seat or rest under subclass 235.2 adapted to have the body
    support stored within, and alternately removed therefrom.

     SEARCH CLASS:

     297,   Chairs and Seats, subclass 14 for a bottom and back connected to
    and storable within a wall or partition, there being provision for storage
    of the seat structure only.


CLS 312/235.4
TXT Component rearrangeable to form seat:

    Devices with seat or rest under subclass 235.2 in which the cabinet has a
    movable element which reorients to provide the seat.


CLS 312/235.5
TXT Cabinet with seat component:

    Devices with seat or rest under subclass 235.2 which serve as part of the
    body support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235.2,  for a cabinet modified to provide additional function as a seat
    (e.g., a  hassock, a trunk, etc.).

    235.4,  for a cabinet having a component which can be shifted to add the
    function of a seat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 188.01+ for a seat combined with
    holder or receptacle for disparate articles.


CLS 312/235.6
TXT Cabinet forming armrest:

    Devices with seat or rest under subclass 235.5 which serve as part of the
    arm support.


CLS 312/235.7
TXT Cabinet forming backrest:

    Devices with seat or rest under subclass 235.5 which serve as part of the
    back support.


CLS 312/235.8
TXT Diverse cabinet adapted to be mounted upon seat:

    Devices with seat or rest under subclass 235.2  which are separate from,
    and designed to be supported upon, the body support.


CLS 312/235.9
TXT Diverse seat and cabinet fixedly connected (e.g., classroom desk):

    Devices with seat or rest under subclass 235.2  which are separate from,
    but rigidly attached to, the body support.

     SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 135+ for a seat combined with a table,
    desk, or easel.


CLS 312/236
TXT Structures under the class definition combined with heating, cooling or
    heat exchange means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31.01+, for cabinets combined with liquid wetted means which may evaporate
    to cool housed material.

    36,     for article-dispensing cabinets having cooling means.

    116,    for showcase type cabinets combined with a refrigerator.

    223.1+, for cabinets combined with electric stoves or heaters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, particularly
    subclasses 108+, 179+, 192+, 201+, and 549+, for cabinets having structure
    peculiar to that class.

    62,     Refrigeration, for a cabinet having means specialized to
    refrigeration such as a solid refrigerant handler or refrigeration
    producing means, particularly subclasses 404+ for a cabinet with a gas
    controller or director, subclass 430 for a cabinet with an intermediate
    heat transfer means, and subclasses 440+ for another cooled storage
    enclosure.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, for cabinets with combustion means to heat the
    cabinet either internally or externally, i.e., stoves and enclosures of all
    kinds in combination with means to extract heat of combustion and
    distribute it.  It has such means in combination with an enclosure for the
    stove.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for (1) a housed heat
    exchanger where the enclosure is solely for housing the heat exchange
    means; (2) for an enclosure with a specific heat exchanger, and (3) for an
    enclosure with a heat exchanger in which there is a specific heat
    transferring relationship between the heat exchanger and the enclosure.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclass 130 for a box receiving a refrigerant
    and a container for refrigeratable contents, the latter in spaced relation
    from the box walls and bottom.


CLS 312/237
TXT Cabinets under the class definition in combination with features other than
    cabinet structure.

    (1)     Note.  A cabinet is a receptacle combined with a rack, table,
    drawer, shelf or other article supports. Considered as part of cabinet are
    means for supporting the cabinet, carrying handle therefor, convertibility
    and knockdown features, means to movably or removably mount or interconnect
    any of the enumerated parts and operating means for such parts.

    (2)     Note.  In this subclass are, for example, combinations with a music
    box, a pencil sharpening mechanism, an insect guard, a repairman's creeper,
    etc.

    (3)     Note.  All preceding subclasses must be investigated for particular
    combinations.

    (4)     Note.  See the notes to section 3 of the main class definition for
    combinations of cabinets with other devices located in other classes.


CLS 312/238
TXT Structures under the class definition designed to fit into the corner of a
    room when in use.  The walls of the room may substitute for some of the
    cabinet walls.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242,    for cabinets mounted in wall recesses or apertures.

    245+,   for cabinets supported by spaced walls or panels which do not
    converge to form a corner of a room.


CLS 312/239
TXT Structure under the class definition having a recess or niche which permits
    a person to sit or stand either closer to the cabinet than would otherwise
    be possible or within the cabinet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194+,   for spaced pedestal cabinets which provide knee room for a person
    seated at the desk.

    235.2+, for cabinets combined with chairs or seats.

    278+,   for cabinets having an externally stepped arrangement not designed
    to enable a person to sit or stand adjacent to the cabinet.


CLS 312/240
TXT A structure under the class definition having components which can be
    re-arranged to change it to a structure not having a housing function, a
    different form of housing classified in another class, or a housing
    classified in this class but having components which are replaceable by
    other or auxiliary components of either different size or form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198+,   for plural section cabinets having components which are
    rearrangeable for conversion purpose.

    283+,   for cabinets accessible from plural sides and providing either a
    table surface and storage space or a table surface having upstanding guard
    flanges for at least one-half of its perimeter.

    293.1+, for movable and merely removable components.

    294+,   for movable components.


CLS 312/241
TXT Structures under subclass 240 having parts which can be rearranged to
    provide only a table surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266+,   for cabinets having two or more interconnected shelves that can be
    moved into coplanar relation to form a table.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 11+ for a
    horizontally supported planar surface having convertible characteristics,
    and subclasses 34+ for a housing for a horizontally supported planar
    surface which is formed by a collapsible surface.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 144 for an
    article-transporting tray convertible to a table.


CLS 312/242
TXT Structures under the class definition which are mounted in an aperture or
    recess in a wall, floor, ceiling or panel.  May include a table, or other
    type panel in which the only compartment structure is an aperture or recess
    therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238,    for cabinets mounted in a corner of a room.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 263 for a cabinet having specific
    refrigerating features mounted in or on a vertical wall.


CLS 312/243
TXT Structures under the class definition having a plurality of independent
    devices for supporting the housing structure, at least one of said devices
    being inoperative when another is serving as a support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 558 for a support adapted to be converted from
    one type of support to another or to support an article in different
    positions or orientations by rearrangement, substitution, or removal of one
    or more parts; and subclasses 126, 207, 518, and 645 for supports having
    characteristics which adapt them for alternative mounting or for use as
    supports of different types.


CLS 312/244
TXT Structure under the class definition having means adapted to be grasped by
    the hand for the purpose of lifting or carrying the complete structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclass 39, for trunks with
    handles and subclasses 115+ for traveling bags with handles.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 752+ for receptacles of that class with
    handles.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 465.1+ for devices of that class with
    handles.


CLS 312/245
TXT Structures under the class definition having mounting or supporting means
    associated with a wall, ceiling, vertical panel, the underside of a
    horizontal panel, or a pair of spaced vertical panels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4+,     for wall mounted cabinets of flexible or fabric walls.

    101+,   for wall mounted cabinets of the outdoor type.

    194+,   for housings supported on one of a plurality of pedestal walls
    spacedly connected by a table top.

    198+,   for arrangements of plural housings, at least one of which may be
    wall or panel mounted.

    206+,   for wall mounted brush cabinets.

    242,    for housings mounted in a wall or panel recess.

    249.1+, for cabinets movably mounted on the floor of a room or the topside
    of a panel.

    351.1+  for cabinets with particular support structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 2.1, 58 and 308 for cabinets attached to or
    inserted in beds.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 263 for a cabinet having specific
    refrigeration features mounted in or on a vertical wall.


CLS 312/246
TXT Structures under subclass 245 having a housing or compartment movable
    (mostly rectilinearly movable, or rectilinearly and pivotally movable)
    relative to the supporting panel, which may form one wall of the housing.


CLS 312/247
TXT Structures under subclass 246 wherein the housing or compartment is
    suspended from the ceiling of a room or other superior support and is
    vertically movable relative to the support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243,    for suspended cabinets with special floor engaging supports.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    appropriate subclasses, particularly 401+ for an elevator car which
    transports, but does not store, a load.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 317+ for suspended article supports,
    particularly subclass 318, for suspended receptacles.


CLS 312/248
TXT Structures under subclass 246 wherein the housing or compartment is merely
    movable by rotating, revolving, tilting, rocking or any combination of
    these motions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199+    and 201+, for plural housings (with or without housed movable
    compartments) connected to each other for relative motion.

    242,    for complete housings movably mounted in a wall or panel aperture.

    246+,   for housings movably associated with a vertical wall or panel, or
    with the underside of a horizontal panel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 127+ and 200+ for cabinet supporting stands
    and brackets not claiming significant cabinet structure, particularly
    subclasses 132, 157 and 161+ for vertically adjustable stands, subclasses
    188.2+ for furniture elevating or leveling devices, and subclasses 311.2+
    for pivoted drawer brackets.


CLS 312/249.1
TXT MOVABLY MOUNTED CABINET HOUSING:
    Cabinet structure under the class definition wherein the cabinet housing is
    mounted either (a) on a wheel for easy moving, or (b) on a support such as
    a stand, pedestal, bracket, or leg which allows movement of the cabinet
    housing relative to the support.


CLS 312/249.11
TXT Having sliding drawer:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 249.8 including a horizontally movable
    compartment configured to slide into and out of the cabinet housing.


CLS 312/249.12
TXT And exterior shelf:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 249.11 including an article supporting
    platform located on the exterior of the cabinet housing and which can not
    be moved into the cabinet housing.


CLS 312/249.13
TXT Having exterior shelf:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 249.8 including an article supporting
    platform located on the exterior of the cabinet housing and which can not
    be moved into the cabinet housing.


CLS 312/249.2
TXT Revolvable on vertical axis:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 249.1 wherein the cabinet housing is
    mounted on a support for rotation about a vertical axis.


CLS 312/249.3
TXT Having closure situated at top of cabinet housing:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 249.2 including an opening on a top
    surface of the cabinet, and a closure movable or removable from the opening
    to provide access to the interior of the cabinet housing.


CLS 312/249.4
TXT Having sliding drawer:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 249.2 including a horizontally movable
    compartment configured to slide into and out of the cabinet housing.


CLS 312/249.5
TXT And exterior shelf:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 249.4 and an article supporting platform
    located on the exterior of the cabinet housing and which can not be moved
    into the cabinet housing.


CLS 312/249.6
TXT Having exterior shelf:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 249.2 including an article supporting
    platform located on the exterior of the cabinet housing and which can not
    be moved into the cabinet housing.


CLS 312/249.7
TXT Pivotal cabinet housing:
    Structure under subclass 249.1 wherein the cabinet housing is pivoted on a
    support.


CLS 312/249.8
TXT Wheeled:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 249.1 wherein the cabinet housing is
    supported on a wheel whereby the cabinet can be easily moved from place to
    place.


CLS 312/249.9
TXT Including roll-out assembly:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 249.8 wherein significance is attributed
    to a wheeled unit having a plurality of article support structures such as
    shelves, drawers, compartments, etc., wherein the unit is normally situated
    inside an opening of the cabinet housing and can easily be wheeled out from
    the cabinet housing through the opening.


CLS 312/257.1
TXT KNOCKDOWN OR SETUP-TYPE:

    Devices under the class definition in which the cabinet is formed by a
    plurality of elements which can be alternately either assembled and
    disassembled, or erected and folded.

    (1)     Note.  The assembled or erected elements form a usable receptacle
    or enclosure, while the disassembled or folded elements facilitate storage
    or an alternate use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for curtain type knockdown wall cabinets.

    6,      for curtain type knockdown cabinets.

    31.02,  for knockdown vapor treatment cabinets.

    108,    for knockdown sectional unit cabinets.

    195,    for knockdown kneehole desks.

    205,    for cabinets which can be folded from one operative volume to a
    smaller or larger operative volume.

    240+,   for cabinets convertible to structure having no storage function.

    348.1+, for knockdown drawers or similar movable components.

    351.1+, for cabinet housing supports.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses 12+ for knockdown wooden box
    structures.


CLS 312/258
TXT Structures under subclass 257.1 in which at least two main walls are
    pivoted to a third wall or in which two opposite walls are connected by
    links that permit one wall to collapse towards the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199+,   for cabinets having pivoted sections which constitute mutual
    closures.


CLS 312/259
TXT Structures under subclass 258 having stiff but flexible walls, usually of
    cardboard and usually scored at the fold lines.


CLS 312/260
TXT Structures under subclass 259 having an opening in a wall and one or more
    slidable mounted closure sheets or panels therefor, or having guides for
    such sheets or panels.


CLS 312/261
TXT Structures under subclass 259 having compartments which are slidable to or
    from housed position or having guides for such compartments.


CLS 312/262
TXT Structures under subclass 258 in which two vertical sidewalls are pivoted
    either to a rigid backwall on axes adjacent its vertical edges or to flange
    members integral with, or secured to, said backwall edges.


CLS 312/263
TXT Structures under subclass 257.1 in which adjacent walls are joined at their
    meeting edges by rigid interlocking means, such as dovetailed
    tongue-and-groove or plural stud-and-keyhole parts, which are either
    integral with or rigidly secured to, said walls in more than one direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    265.5,  for knockdown cabinets having adjacent sidewalls adapted to connect
    but not interlock.


CLS 312/264
TXT Structures under subclass 257.1 in which opposite walls are joined by
    rigid, tying, interlock members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263,    for similar joints, where the tie member is also an external wall
    of the structure.


CLS 312/265
TXT Structures under subclass 264 in which the tie members are inside the
    structure secured by readily detachable means, such as bolts, nuts or
    cotters, accessible from the exterior side of said walls.


CLS 312/265.1
TXT Skeletal frame:

    Devices under subclass 257.1 having a framework designed to support
    elements forming sides of the cabinet.


CLS 312/265.2
TXT Parallel panels connected by skeletal frame members:

    Devices under subclass 265.1 in which side elements in planes parallel to
    each other (i.e., on opposite sides of the cabinet) are linked by the
    framework.


CLS 312/265.3
TXT Parallel panels are vertically oriented:

    Devices under subclass 265.2 in which the linked side elements stand
    upright (i.e., in a vertical plane).


CLS 312/265.4
TXT Free-standing in final configuration:

    Devices under subclass 265.1 in which the assembled framework independently
    maintains the same configuration as the assembled cabinet.


CLS 312/265.5
TXT Connecting panels:

    Devices under subclass 257.1 having substantially planar elements adapted
    to form sides of the cabinet, in which planar elements on adjacent sides of
    the cabinet are adapted to be linked by separable fastening means.

    (1)     Note.  The fastening means may take the form of one or more bolts,
    a locking element, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263,    for cabinets having adjacent sidewalls adapted to be interlocked by
    means integral with one or more of the elements.


CLS 312/265.6
TXT Removable panel:

    Devices under subclass 257.1 having as part of the cabinet a substantially
    planar element which is adapted to be readily separated from the remainder
    of the cabinet.


CLS 312/266
TXT Structures under the class definition having compartments, shelves or
    article supports which are maintained continuously level or upright while
    revolving about a horizontal axis that is spaced from their center of
    gravity.  The axis of revolution need not be stationary.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24      and 27+, for continuously level supports for
    disappearing-instrument type cabinets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 94+ for terraced
    rotatable horizontally supported surfaces, subclasses 102+ for rotatable
    plural related horizontally supported surfaces and subclasses 139+ for a
    rotatable horizontally supported surface.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 2, for terraced shelf racks convertible
    to table.


CLS 312/267
TXT Structure under subclass 266 in which the compartments, shelves or article
    supports are not movable beyond the confines of the housing.


CLS 312/268
TXT Structures under subclass 267 having one or more flexible endless conveyors
    which carry the continuously level or self-righting components from an
    inaccessible housed position to a position opposite an access opening of
    the structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     for web conveyors in article dispensers, and 97, for endless
    conveyors in article dispensers.

    134,    for show case type cabinets with endless carriers.


CLS 312/269
TXT Structures under subclass 266 having a rigid panel which forms an outer
    wall of the structure and is mounted on the structure for pivotal movement
    about a fixed axis, the pivotal movement of the panel accompanying
    constrained and relative motion of the continuously level or self-righting
    part.


CLS 312/270.1
TXT HAVING A MOVABLE COMPARTMENT WITH IN-HOUSED COVER:

    Cabinet under the class definition having a movable compartment and a cover
    for closing the compartment within the cabinet.

    (1)     Note.  The walls or bottom of the compartment is not considered to
    be a cover, and the cover may remain within the housing or move together
    with the compartment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291,    for cabinet having an outer closure for an access opening in an
    external wall of a cabinet and an inner closure for closing the same
    opening or a portion thereof or closing an access opening to an inner
    compartment.

    296,    for cabinets having wiper strips adjacent a surface of a movable
    compartment for preventing any article or substance on said surface moving
    past said strip, or structures to prevent dust or foreign matter entering
    the cabinet housing or its components.

    310,    for structures having a closure and a movable housed part, such as
    a drawer, in which the closure must be moved before the movable housed part
    can be moved from an inaccessible position to an accessible position.


CLS 312/270.2
TXT Pivotally movable compartment:

    Cabinet under subclass 270.1 in which the compartment is pivotally attached
    to the cabinet between an accessible position and an inaccessible position
    of the compartment.


CLS 312/270.3
TXT Horizontally movable compartment:

    Cabinet under subclass 270.1 in which the compartment is adapted for
    horizontally slidable movement between an accessible position to an
    inaccessible position.


CLS 312/271
TXT Structures under the class definition having at least two components, such
    as compartments, walls, doors, shelves, partitions, racks or other article
    supports, or similar parts of a compartment, so associated and mounted that
    movement of one imparts constrained motion to the other.  Includes
    flexible-type components of three or more strip, slat or panel elements
    connected edge to edge for constrained relative motion and movable to
    face-to-face or zigzag position or interconnected with another component.
    Details, such as movable guide bars, supporting arms, props, latch bolts,
    operating lever, etc., are not regarded as cabinet components.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21+,    for disappearing-instrument type cabinets having interconnected
    parts.

    266+,   for interconnected parts, one of which is continuously level or
    self-righting while revolving around a horizontal axis.

    270.1+, for closures supported inside a cabinet and movable into position
    upon contact with an associated compartment that is being moved into housed
    position.

    297+,   for fabric-type components, and for flexible-type components which
    comprise three or more strip, slat or panel elements connected edge to edge
    for constrained relative motion along an angular or curved path, that
    portion of the component adjacent the path always forming a corresponding
    surface.

    298+,   for plural parts which move relatively as a unit, particularly
    where the relative motion is not constrained and is caused by gravity, and
    also where, during relative motion, one of the parts can remain stationary.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.62+ for
    electric circuit makers and breakers actuated by the movement of a closure.


CLS 312/272
TXT Structures under subclass 271 in which one of the interconnected parts is
    vertically movable, nonpivoted, and at least partly housed when in
    retracted position.


CLS 312/272.5
TXT Structures under subclass 272 in which the vertically movable part is
    interconnected with a rigid panel which forms an outer wall of the
    structure and is mounted for pivotal movement about a fixed axis.


CLS 312/273
TXT Structures under subclass 271 in which one of the interconnected parts is
    horizontally movable, nonpivoted, and at least partly housed when in
    retracted position.


CLS 312/274
TXT Structures under subclass 273 in which the horizontally movable part is
    interconnected with a rigid panel which forms an outer wall of the
    structure and is mounted for pivotal movement about a fixed axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 340 for stove ovens with sliding
    shelves or racks that are moved out or in by the opening or closing of the
    oven door.


CLS 312/275
TXT Structures under subclass 271 in which one of the interconnected parts is a
    rigid panel which forms an outer wall of the structure and is mounted for
    pivotal movement about a fixed axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23+,    for disappearing-instrument closures interconnected with other
    movable parts.


CLS 312/276
TXT Structures under subclass 275 in which the wall pivots about a fixed
    horizontal axis.


CLS 312/277
TXT Structures under the class definition associated with a leg supported table
    which can be removed from, and used independently of, the structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 33+ for a
    horizontally supported planar surface which is movable into or out of a
    housing, or which is merely removable from a housing, and which cannot
    function as a supporting surface when in housed position.


CLS 312/278
TXT Structures under the class definition having at least one re-entrant or
    stepped angle formed by the exterior walls or limits of the structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196,    for cabinets having spaced pedestals connected by a table and
    having structure above the table which is of set-back formation or which
    forms a set-back with the table and its subjacent pedestals.

    280+,   for cabinets having a re-entrant angle formed by the housing and a
    projecting wall which forms a continuously external support.


CLS 312/279
TXT Structures under subclass 278 in which there is a lower housing portion
    surmounted by an upper housing portion of less depth (from front to rear)
    than the lower portion and by a table, shelf or closure panel, all having
    substantially the same length, the rear walls of the upper and lower
    portions being substantially in the same plane, the table, shelf or closure
    panel being positioned in front of the upper portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196,    for spaced pedestal desks having a cabinet across the rear portion
    of a table member which bridges the pedestals.

    203,    for structures involving one cabinet mounted above a larger cabinet
    and a table slidable therebetween.


CLS 312/280
TXT Structures under the class definition having various types of article
    supports, such as brackets, racks, shelves or tables, mounted on the
    outside of the housing and not being movable to housed position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    313+,   for cabinet top panels which pivot to nontable position.

    318,    for continuously external rests or guides for compartments,
    closures or racks movable from housed position.


CLS 312/281
TXT Structures under subclass 280 having shelves, tables, or portions of the
    top or bottom walls of a housing, which lie either in a horizontal or
    slightly inclined plane and extend outwardly from the vertical sidewalls of
    the housing or beyond those planes which contain the vertical sidewalls.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201+,   for continuously external trays or cabinets which are horizontally
    movable from a position above the supporting cabinet to a position beyond
    the sidewalls of the supporting cabinet.

    277,    for projecting tables provided with legs so that the table can be
    removed from, and used independently of, the cabinet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 134+ for a
    folding horizontally supported planar surface which is attached laterally
    of a support such as a cabinet wall and having no more of the cabinet
    structure than is necessary to provide a support for the surface, and
    subclass 152 for similar structure which does not fold.


CLS 312/282
TXT Structures under subclass 281 in which a shelf or table extends away from
    the housing and is movable so as to lie either on the top wall of the
    housing or adjacent one of the sidewalls.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201,    for continuously external trays or cabinets which are movable onto
    the supporting cabinet section.

    313+,   for closure panels which are movable to projecting shelf or table
    position.


CLS 312/283
TXT Structures under the class definition, which permit access to housed parts
    or contents from more than one side of the structure by having, in
    association with at least two sides, any of the following; an open side, a
    movable or removable wall, compartment, shelf, table, rack or other article
    support.  A compartment, rack, shelf, table or other article support which
    is mounted to slide or pivot through a wall of the structure, makes of that
    wall an "accessible side", while a movable closure or wall, even though
    slidable or pivotal beyond one or more sides of the structures, makes only
    that side closed by the wall an "accessible side".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194+,   for spaced pedestal type cabinets which may be accessible from more
    than one side.

    198+,   for arrangements of plural and sectional cabinets, many of which
    are accessible from plural sides.

    211+,   for cabinets which are accessible from more than one side because
    of the presence of a deposit and collection compartment.

    246+    and 249.1+, for movable housings having fixed supports, the motion
    of the housing permitting access to its contents from more than one side of
    the support.

    313+,   for cabinets having a sloping sidewall panel which is movable to
    table position.

    330.1+, for closures which, in uncovering one side of the housing, slide
    through or across one or more sidewalls.


CLS 312/284
TXT Structures under subclass 283 comprising a table-like surface and a
    bottomless housing supported on said surface to form an enclosure, the
    housing being shiftable away from said surface to expose any article
    thereon.  An upstanding flange on one wall of the table may form one wall
    of the dome cover.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199+    and 201+, for dome type covers associated with another cabinet
    section.

    210,    for similar bottomless cover structures not having a table member
    to form a complete housing.

    240+,   for bottomless housings convertible to tables or racks by shifting
    some or all of the dome walls so that the storage function is eliminated.


CLS 312/285
TXT Structures under subclass 283 which are accessible (1) from all vertical
    sides, (2) from the entire perimeter, or (3) from less than all vertical
    sides, or the entire perimeter, provided that the directions from which the
    structures are accessible are at least equivalent either to the three
    directions from which a structure, triangular in cross-section, would be
    accessible under (1), or to the four directions from which a structure,
    rectangular in cross-section, would be accessible under (1).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249.2+, for housings rotatable on fixed supports and having an opening in
    one sidewall, the rotation of the housing permitting access to its contents
    from all sides of the support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 126.1+ for tiers of trays which are
    accessible from all vertical sides.


CLS 312/286
TXT Structures under subclass 283 having at least one compartment, shelf, rack,
    table or other article support, which can be moved alternately through
    opposite sides of the housing structure.


CLS 312/287
TXT Structures under subclass 283 which have only four vertical sides, two of
    which are opposite each other and permit access to the contents of the
    structure.  The four vertical sides may each be irregular in vertical
    section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    285,    for four sided cabinets which are accessible from all four vertical
    sides.

    286,    for cabinets having at least one compartment, shelf, etc., which
    can be withdrawn from one side, rehoused and then withdrawn from the
    opposite side.


CLS 312/289
TXT Structures under subclass 287 being also accessible from the top, a third
    vertical side, or both.


CLS 312/290
TXT Structures under subclass 283 which are accessible from the top and from
    one or more vertical sides.


CLS 312/291
TXT Structures under the class definition having a closure for an access
    opening in an external wall and having a second closure inside the
    structure for closing the same opening or a portion thereof or for closing
    an access opening to an inner compartment.  The closures may be either
    movably. mounted on the structure or merely removable therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270.1+, for compartments which, when moved to housed position, are closed
    by a nonshelf member supported inside the housing.

    310+,   for cabinets having closures which must be moved to open position
    before movable housed parts, such as compartments, can be withdrawn to
    accessible position outside the cabinet.


CLS 312/292
TXT Structures under the class definition which are optionally accessible
    through a main opening having a movable or removable closure, or through an
    auxiliary opening in said closure, the auxiliary opening also having a
    movable or removable closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211,    for deposit slots or openings in a closure for a collection opening
    and see the notes thereunder.

    271+,   for closures comprising three or more strips, slats, or panels
    connected one to another for relative movement, the panels being connected
    edge to edge and foldable face-to-face or zigzag.

    295,    for movable closures having auxiliary openings therein, the closure
    permitting access to the housing only through the auxiliary openings.


CLS 312/293.1
TXT HAVING A CLOSURE AND A DETACHABLE COMPONENT:

    Cabinet under the class definition having a movable closure which allows
    access to the interior from the exterior of the cabinet and a compartment
    or portion thereof (i.e., shelf, partition, rack, etc.) which can be
    completely removed from the cabinet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310,    for structures having a closure and a movable housed part, such as
    a drawer,in which the closure must be moved before the movable housed part
    can be moved from an inaccessible position to an accessible position.


CLS 312/293.2
TXT Pivotal closure:

    Cabinet under subclass 293.1 wherein the detachable component is entirely
    housed within the cabinet and is removable from the cabinet through a
    pivotal closure.


CLS 312/293.3
TXT Removable closure:

    Cabinet under subclass 293.1 wherein the detachable component is removable
    from the cabinet after separating a cabinet closure from the cabinet.


CLS 312/294
TXT Structures under the class definition housing components, such as
    compartments, walls, doors, shelves, partitions, racks or other article
    supports, or similar parts of a compartment which are so mounted that they
    remain supported by the housing structure during movement from operative or
    accessible position either to an inoperative or inaccessible position or to
    another operative or accessible position.

    (1)     Note.  The motion of a movably mounted component, as set forth in a
    subclass title or definition, does not include any motion which is
    incidental to the mounting or dismounting of the component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198+,   for arrangements of plural cabinets wherein each cabinet may have
    movable components.

    212,    for deposit and collection type cabinets having a movable
    collection compartment.

    220     and 221, for movable closures and compartments which operate
    concealed gangbar type locking or latching means.

    222,    for movable components having latches operated by other movable
    components or their latches.

    226+,   for cabinets having movably mounted mirrors.

    246+,   for compartments movably mounted on a wall, ceiling, vertical
    panel, the underside of a horizontal panel, or between a pair of spaced
    vertical panels.

    266+,   for continuously level or self-righting components which revolve
    about a horizontal axis.

    270.1+, for compartments movable to housed position and closed by a member
    supported inside the cabinet.

    271+,   for interconnected movable components.

    280+,   for components mounted outside the cabinet and not movable into the
    cabinet.

    286,    for components movable alternately through opposite vertical sides
    of a cabinet.

    293.1+, for cabinets having both movably mounted and merely removable
    closures.


CLS 312/295
TXT Structures under subclass 294 having a movable closure which, in uncovering
    one accessible portion of the housing, covers either another accessible
    portion or a movable closure therefore, and thus permits access to one
    portion of the housing while preventing access to another previously
    accessible portion.  Includes a movable wall or frame member having an
    access opening therein which is adjacent one accessible portion of the
    housing, the wall or frame member being shifted in order to position its
    access opening adjacent other accessible portions of the housing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324,    for at least two closures which pivot to housed position in
    opposite directions, either closure permitting complete access when swung
    open through an arc of 90 degrees, but blocking another closure when swung
    180 degrees.


CLS 312/296
TXT Structures under subclass 294 having one or more of the following:  (1) a
    wiper strip adjacent a surface of a movable part for preventing any article
    or substance on said surface moving past said strip, (2) either yieldable
    strips or interfitting contact surfaces between the housing and its movable
    parts to prevent air, dust or foreign matter entering the housing or its
    components, and (3) means associated with the rear wall of a movable
    compartment or rack to prevent the loss of warm or cold air from a housing
    when the compartment is moved to accessible position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270.1+, for closure panels inside a housing which are contacted by movable
    compartments upon reaching housed position.

    291,    for seals comprising inner and outer closure members, provided
    neither closure forms the front or rear wall of a movable compartment or
    shelf.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 475.1+ for a closure
    seal, e.g., striker gasket as weather-strip and see the search notes
    thereto for the loci of other seals.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclass 75 for safe
    closure seals.

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 378 for packing in closures of metallic
    receptacles, and subclasses 614 and 681 for receptacle seam packing.


CLS 312/297
TXT Structures under subclass 294 having flexible components which either are
    formed of flexible material, or comprise three or more strip, slat or panel
    elements connected edge to edge so as to follow an angular or curved path
    to an inoperative position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3+,     for cabinets having fabric walls.

    213,    for cabinets having closure panels of wire mesh or other material
    permitting ventilation.

    260,    for foldable cardboard cabinets having flexible sliding closures.

    271+,   for flexible type components which are movably interconnected with
    another component or which if comprising three or more strips, slats or
    panels are foldable face to face or zigzag.


CLS 312/298
TXT Structures under subclass 294 having two or more components so mounted that
    (1) all can move simultaneously without relative motion and (2) at least
    one component can move with respect to another without causing motion in
    the latter.


CLS 312/299
TXT Structures under subclass 298 in which the plural components remain within
    the limits of the housing during their simultaneous motion.


CLS 312/300
TXT Structures under subclass 298 in which the plural components, when moving
    simultaneously and without relative motion, have only pivotal and
    nonsliding motion.


CLS 312/301
TXT Structures under subclass 298 in which the relatively movable components
    have no pivotal motion and move only in a horizontal direction.


CLS 312/302
TXT Structures under subclass 301 having one or more components that can at
    least pivot relatively to another component.


CLS 312/303
TXT Structures under subclass 302 in which the pivotal axis of relative motion
    of the components is horizontal and is transverse to the direction of
    motion of the group of components.


CLS 312/304
TXT Structures under subclass 294 in which at least one of the housed
    components remains substantially within the limits of the housing during
    movement from operative to inoperative position or to another operative
    position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    267+,   for continuously housed compartments, shelves or article supports
    which are self-righting, or which remain level, while revolving about
    horizontal axis.


CLS 312/305
TXT Structures under subclass 304 mounted so as to rotate or pivot about an
    axis extending near or through the center of component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202,    for axially rotatable cabinet sections.

    249.2+, for axially rotatable cabinets.


CLS 312/306
TXT Structures under subclass 304 in which the motion of the continuously
    housed component is nonpivotal and in a vertical direction.


CLS 312/307
TXT Structures under subclass 304 having an angular or curvilinear trackway
    which guides a component.


CLS 312/308
TXT Structures under subclass 294 having two or more movably mounted
    components, at least one of which is readily detachable from another, and
    in one position is wholly supported by another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    293.1+, for cabinets having at least one movably mounted part and at least
    one part which is merely removable.

    298+,   for plural parts movable relatively and as a unit, even though one
    of such parts is also removable.


CLS 312/309
TXT Structures under subclass 294 having at least two different types of
    component such as a door and a drawer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    293.1+, for plural components one of which is merely removable and the
    other which remains supported by the housing during movement.


CLS 312/310
TXT Structures under subclass 309 in which one of the components, when both are
    in housed, inoperative or inaccessible position, must be moved before the
    other can be moved.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216,    for doors and exterior walls of movable compartments having
    marginal extensions or marginal portions which overlap and block movement
    of two or more housed components, unless and until the door or compartment
    is moved from closed position.

    222,    for sequentially movable diverse parts wherein the movement of one
    part release the latch of another movable part.


CLS 312/311
TXT Structures under subclass 310 in which a pivoted closure must be moved
    before a nonpivoted part can be moved in a horizontal direction from housed
    to accessible position.


CLS 312/312
TXT Structures under subclass 294 in which the components are rectilinearly and
    nonpivotally movable to, or from, housed position in any direction which is
    not horizontal.  The component may have pivotal motion before, but not
    after, it begins to move rectilinearly to housed position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272,    for interconnected movable components, at least one of which is
    vertically and nonpivotally movable.


CLS 312/313
TXT Structures under subclass 294 in which a panel pivots from a horizontal
    position, in which it functions as a shelf or table, to any nonhorizontal
    position.  The panel may have rectilinear as well as pivotal motion.
    Includes cabinet tops which pivot about a horizontal axis to and from a
    table position.  Either the inner or outer surfaces, or both, may function
    as a table surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 33+ for a
    horizontally supported planar surface combined with a housing, in which the
    surface cannot function as a support in the housed position, and subclasses
    1+ for a tiltable horizontally supported planar surface.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses 60+ for props to support a hinged
    cabinet lid in raised position, no more of the cabinet being claimed than
    is necessary to mount the prop and the lid.


CLS 312/314
TXT Structures under subclass 313 in which the panel, while in horizontal
    position, has a movable support that contacts the surface (usually a table
    top or floor) upon which the housing structure is supported. Includes
    panels which, in table position, rest directly upon that surface supporting
    the housing.


CLS 312/315
TXT Structures under subclass 313 in which the panel is a rigid housing wall
    that pivots to table or shelf position about a fixed horizontal axis.


CLS 312/316
TXT Structures under subclass 315 in which the panel is supported in table or
    shelf position by a bracket which contacts the under side of the panel, or,
    if the panel is a cabinet top, it is supported by the body portion of the
    cabinet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    279,    for stepped or set-back cabinets in which the horizontal step
    portion also functions as a subjacent support for an upper closure wall
    that pivots to table position.


CLS 312/317.1
TXT Support for movable component contacts cabinet's supporting surface:

    Devices under subclass 294 in which the movable component has its own
    supporting member engaging the cabinet's supporting structure (e.g., a
    table top or floor).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    314,    for a movable panel adapted to function as a table and having a
    floor support.


CLS 312/317.2
TXT Component supported independently of cabinet:

    Devices under subclass 317.1 in which the movable component's supporting
    member upholds the component without relying upon the cabinet for
    maintaining the component in supported position.


CLS 312/317.3
TXT Component forms horizontal planar support (e.g., table):

    Devices under subclass 317.1 in which the movable component comprises a
    rigid, substantially flat surface supported in a horizontal plane.


CLS 312/318
TXT Structures under subclass 294 having a continuously external guide which is
    transversed by a complementary guide member of a component during motion of
    the component to or from housed position, or having a continuously external
    support or rest which is contacted by a component after the component is
    moved from housed position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278+,   for cabinets having an external set-back which supports a component
    movable from housed position.

    317.1,  for floor engaging supports which are carried by components movable
    from housed position.


CLS 312/319.1
TXT Having biasing means:

    Structure under subclass 294 wherein significance is attributed to a means
    for urging a component of the cabinet, e.g., drawer, shelf, compartment,
    article support, etc., to move from one position to another.


CLS 312/319.2
TXT For a pivotal structure:

    Structure under subclass 319.1 wherein the biasing means operates to urge a
    component of the cabinet to pivot from one position to another.


CLS 312/319.3
TXT Continuously leveled:

    Cabinet structure under subclass 319.2 wherein the pivotal component of the
    cabinet is maintained in a horizontal attitude throughout its movement.


CLS 312/319.4
TXT Counterbalance weight:

    Structure under subclass 319.1 wherein the biasing means includes a weight
    which operates to urge a cabinet component from one position to another.


CLS 312/319.5
TXT Having power driven means:

    Cabinet structure under subclass 294 wherein one of the movable components
    is moved by a mechanism operated by a power source.


CLS 312/319.6
TXT Pivotal operator:

    Cabinet structure under subclass 319.5 wherein the power operated mechanism
    includes a member which pivots to move the movable component.


CLS 312/319.7
TXT Rotary operator:

    Cabinet structure under subclass 319.5 wherein the power operated mechanism
    includes a rotating member which operates to move the movable component.


CLS 312/319.8
TXT Linear operator:

    Cabinet structure under subclass 319.5 wherein the power operated mechanism
    includes a piston-cylinder device or operates to actuate a member linearly
    to move the movable components.


CLS 312/319.9
TXT Having foot-operated means:

    Cabinet structure under subclass 294 wherein one of the movable components
    is moved by a member located exterior of the cabinet housing and adapted to
    be engaged by a person's foot.


CLS 312/321
TXT Structures under subclass 294 having horizontally spaced guides or tracks
    for article carrying bars, such as garment hangers, which are supported at
    each end by the guides and are movable therealong from housed position to a
    position outside of the structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, for similar devices, particularly
    subclasses 13+ when combined with convertible wardrobe structure, subclass
    36, when combined with a stet.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 94.02, for the rack structure, per se.


CLS 312/321.5
TXT Door-type closure having article support:

    Devices under subclass 294 with a movable, substantially planar component
    adapted to close the cabinet, wherein the component carries support means
    (e.g., a rack, etc.).


CLS 312/322
TXT Structures under subclass 294, in which a component, in moving to or from
    housed position, or from one operative or accessible position to another,
    has at least two consecutive motions, exclusive of any motion which is
    incidental to the mounting or dismounting of the component, one of which is
    pivotal and the other rectilinear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     for sliding and pivoting disappearing instrument supports.

    133,    for sliding and pivoting racks in showcase type cabinets.


CLS 312/323
TXT Structures under subclass 322 in which the rectilinear motion is
    horizontal, and the pivotal motion is about one or more horizontal axes.


CLS 312/324
TXT Structures under subclass 294, having at least one component pivoting
    clockwise to house position, and another pivoting counterclockwise, the
    axes of pivot being spaced and parallel.


CLS 312/325
TXT Structures under subclass 294 having one or more components pivotal about a
    movable axis, the components being pivoted on an arm which is pivotally
    connected to the housing, either on a fixed axis or through one or more
    links.  The pivoted arm or linkage either supports the component or
    constrains it to nonrectilinear motion about the shifting axis.


CLS 312/326
TXT Structures under subclass 294 having one or more nonrectilinearly movable
    components which pivot about a fixed axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 334+ for pivoted closures.


CLS 312/327
TXT Structures under subclass 326 in which the fixed axis is horizontal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315+,   for shelves or tables which pivot to nontable position about a
    fixed horizontal axis.

    323,    for components which sequentially slide horizontally and pivot
    about a horizontal axis.


CLS 312/328
TXT Structures under subclass 327 in which the fixed axis is adjacent to, or
    within the plane of, that side of the housing through which, or toward
    which, the component moves to a housed position.


CLS 312/329
TXT Structures under subclass 326 in which the fixed axis is adjacent to, or
    within the plane of, that side of the housing through which, or toward
    which, the component moves to housed position.


CLS 312/330.1
TXT Horizontally movable (e.g., drawer):

    Devices under subclass 294 including a component limited to movement along
    a substantially straight-line in a  horizontal direction.

    (1)     Note.  The component may move to and from a housed position, or it
    may move between positions of relative accessibility.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273,    for interconnected movable components, at least one of which is
    limited to rectilinear movement in a horizontal direction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 382 for a drawer or other movable component
    within a refrigeration apparatus.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 339 for an oven-rack or shelf within
    a stove, adapted to be withdrawn from the stove.


CLS 312/331
TXT Structures under subclass 330.1 having means, such as racks and pinions,
    pivoted links, and plural cables, to cause opposing sides of a component to
    travel at the same speed in order to prevent a twisting motion of the
    component or a binding action between the sides of the component and the
    adjacent surfaces of the housing walls.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266+,   for continuously level or selfrighting components supported by
    pivoting links so as to revolve about a horizontal axis.

    334.3,  for independently operating lazy-tong guides on opposite sides of a
    component.


CLS 312/332
TXT Structures under subclass 330.1 having a guide, runner, or trackway for the
    component which can yield in a direction transverse to the rectilinear path
    of the component in order to prevent sticking or binding of the component
    during motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334.1+, for guides which move relatively to the component and the housing
    in a direction or in a plane which is parallel to the path of the
    component's motion.


CLS 312/332.1
TXT Having handle cooperating with a latch:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 330.1 including a handle or structure
    attached thereto which causes the operation of a latch mechanism for
    securing the movable component in closed position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 558 for drawer having hinged tiltable front
    panel.


CLS 312/333
TXT Structures under subclass 330.1 having any one or more of the following:
    (1) a device either to latch or lock the component in open position; (2) a
    device either to latch or lock the device in closed position; or (3) means,
    such as an anti-friction guide roller subsiding into a depression in the
    rollers trackway, to insure complete closing movement of the component or
    to prevent rebound thereof, the weight of the component effecting the
    closing movement. Includes spring arm latches and spring pressed bolts
    which also effect complete closing of the component or prevent rebound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215,    for a plurality of components having individual locks or latches
    actuated by a single selector or by a group of remote operators.

    216+,   for a gang-bar type lock or latch for plural movable components.

    222,    for locks or latches for one component actuated by another
    component or its lock or latch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclasses 85+ for drawer locks and 95+, for locks for
    sliding doors.


CLS 312/334.1
TXT Having guide assembly:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 330.1 including a slide attached to and
    moves with the drawer, and a guide attached to a wall of the cabinet
    housing, wherein the slide is engaged with and moves relative to the guide
    to facilitate movement of the drawer in and out of the cabinet housing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, subclass 20 for drawer bearing, per se, subclass 22 for a
    drawer bearing having anchoring or aligning means, subclass 18 for ball
    bearing for drawer, subclass 19 for roller bearing for drawer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    317.1+, for relatively movable guides or supports which contact the floor.

    318,    for continuously external guides, supports or rests for components
    movable from housed position.

    322+,   for relatively movable guides which permit the component to move
    rectilinearly and pivotally in sequence.

    331,    for relatively movable guides embodying an equalizer, such as
    pivoted links which prevent a twisting motion of the component, or a
    lazy-tongs on one side of the component which is connected by an operator
    to a lazy-tongs on an opposite side.

    332,    for guides which yield transversely to the path of the component's
    motion in order to reduce sliding friction.


CLS 312/334.11
TXT Ball bearing:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 334.8 wherein the guide assembly includes
    a spherical rolling anti-friction element.


CLS 312/334.12
TXT Roller bearing:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 334.8 wherein the guide assembly includes
    a cylindrical rolling anti-friction elements.


CLS 312/334.13
TXT Including a carriage:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 334.12 wherein the intermediate member is
    in the form of a platform or two side members connected by a cross member,
    wherein the platform or the cross member is located below the bottom wall
    of the drawer.


CLS 312/334.14
TXT And below a bottom wall of the drawer:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 334.7 including an additional guide
    assembly which is located at a bottom wall of the drawer.


CLS 312/334.15
TXT Including roller or ball bearing:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 334.14 wherein the guide assembly includes
    a cylindrical or a spherical rolling anti-friction elements.


CLS 312/334.16
TXT Having anti-friction feature:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 334.7 wherein the guide assembly includes
    a friction reducing element made of material having low friction
    characteristic or shaped to render movement of the drawer more quiet and
    facile.


CLS 312/334.17
TXT Ball bearing:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 334.16 wherein the anti-friction feature
    includes a spherical rolling anti-friction element.


CLS 312/334.18
TXT Roller bearing:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 334.16 wherein the anti-friction feature
    includes a a cylindrical rolling anti-friction element.


CLS 312/334.19
TXT On cabinet and drawer:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 334.18 wherein the drawer and cabinet each
    includes a roller bearing.


CLS 312/334.2
TXT Lever type:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 334.1 wherein the guide assembly comprises
    a linkage system  attached to the cabinet housing and the drawer, which
    operates to guide the drawer into and out of the cabinet housing.


CLS 312/334.21
TXT On drawer:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 334.18 wherein the roller is mounted on
    the drawer.


CLS 312/334.22
TXT Including plural diverse guide assemblies:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 334.7 including two structurally different
    types of guide assemblies.


CLS 312/334.23
TXT Suspension guide:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 334.1 wherein the drawer is suspended and
    supported by a guide assembly which is located above the  sidewalls of the
    drawer.


CLS 312/334.24
TXT And subjacent guide:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 334.23 including an additional guide
    assembly which is located below the bottom wall of the drawer.


CLS 312/334.25
TXT Including roller or ball bearing:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 334.24 wherein the guide assembly includes
    a cylindrical or spherical rolling anti-friction element.


CLS 312/334.26
TXT Including roller or ball bearing:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 334.23 wherein the guide assembly includes
    a cylindrical or spherical rolling anti-friction element.


CLS 312/334.27
TXT Subjacent guide:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 334.1 wherein the drawer is supported by a
    guide assembly which is located below a bottom wall of a drawer.


CLS 312/334.28
TXT And superjacent guide:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 334.27 including an additional guide
    assembly which is located above the sidewalls of the drawer.


CLS 312/334.29
TXT Including vertically separable slide and guide:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 334.27 wherein the guide includes
    structure which cooperates with the slide such that the slide can be
    separated from the guide by lifting the drawer upwardly in vertical
    direction.


CLS 312/334.3
TXT Lazy-tong:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 334.2 wherein the linkage system includes
    a series of diagonal pairs of crossing members, each pair being pivoted
    together between their ends and connected with the next pair at the ends so
    that the arrangement, as a whole, can be extended or retracted.


CLS 312/334.31
TXT Including guide enclosed by a slide:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 334.27 wherein the slide attached to the
    drawer includes structure to partially or completely house the guide.


CLS 312/334.32
TXT Pull-out guide assembly:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 334.27 wherein the guide assembly further
    includes an intermediate member having sliding engagement with the slide
    and the guide, and which operates to move relative to both when moving  the
    drawer into and out of the cabinet housing.


CLS 312/334.33
TXT Including roller or ball bearing:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 334.32 wherein the guide assembly includes
    a cylindrical or spherical rolling anti-friction element.


CLS 312/334.34
TXT Slide having drawer's length:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 334.32 wherein the length of the slide
    attached to the drawer is approximately equal to the length of the drawer.


CLS 312/334.35
TXT Including slide integral with sheet metal drawer:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 334.32 wherein the drawer is made of sheet
    metal material and includes a slide integrally formed with the sheet metal
    of the drawer.


CLS 312/334.36
TXT Having anti-friction feature:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 334.27 wherein the guide assembly includes
    a friction reducing element made of material having low friction
    characteristic or shaped to render movement of the drawer more quiet and
    facile.


CLS 312/334.37
TXT Including ball and roller bearing:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 334.36 wherein the anti-friction feature
    includes a cylindrical and a spherical rolling anti-friction element.


CLS 312/334.38
TXT Ball bearing:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 334.36 wherein the anti-friction feature
    includes a spherical rolling anti-friction element.


CLS 312/334.39
TXT Roller bearing:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 334.36 wherein the anti-friction feature
    includes a cylindrical rolling anti-friction element.


CLS 312/334.4
TXT Vertically adjustable:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 334.1 wherein the guide assembly can be
    selectively moved and fixed to any of plurality of vertically arranged
    positions.


CLS 312/334.41
TXT On cabinet and drawer:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 334.39 wherein the roller bearing is
    mounted on both the cabinet and the drawer.


CLS 312/334.42
TXT On drawer:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 334.39 wherein the roller bearing is
    mounted on the drawer.


CLS 312/334.43
TXT Single roller:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 334.42 wherein a single roller only is
    mounted on the drawer.


CLS 312/334.44
TXT And particular stop means:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 334.1 including a means to limit the
    sliding movement of a drawer into or out of the cabinet housing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 82+ for motion limiting devices
    for slidable components.

    384,    Bearings, subclass 21 for a drawer stop, per se.


CLS 312/334.45
TXT Engaging roller or ball bearing:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 334.44 wherein the stop means engages a
    cylindrical or spherical rolling anti-friction element to limit the
    extended drawer movement.


CLS 312/334.46
TXT Resilient releasable stop:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 334.44 wherein the limit means is a
    springy member which is flexed or bent to an operative or inoperative
    position.


CLS 312/334.47
TXT Pivot stop:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 334.44 wherein the limit means can be
    pivoted.


CLS 312/334.5
TXT Horizontally adjustable:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 334.1 wherein the guide assembly can be
    selectively moved to any of plurality of horizontally arranged positions.


CLS 312/334.6
TXT At bottom corner:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 334.1 wherein the guide assembly extends
    along an edge with one portion on a sidewall and another portion on a
    bottom wall of the drawer.


CLS 312/334.7
TXT Between vertical sidewalls of drawer and cabinet:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 334.1 wherein the drawer is supported by a
    guide assembly which is located between a vertical sidewall of the drawer
    and a vertical sidewall of the cabinet housing.


CLS 312/334.8
TXT Pull-out guide assembly:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 334.7 wherein the guide assembly further
    includes an intermediate member having sliding engagement with the slide
    and the guide, and which operates to move relative to both when moving the
    drawer into and out of the cabinet housing.


CLS 312/334.9
TXT Including roller and ball bearing:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 334.8 wherein the guide assembly includes
    a cylindrical and spherical rolling anti-friction elements.


CLS 312/348.1
TXT Knockdown or setup type:

    Devices under subclass 330.1 in which the component is formed by a
    plurality of parts which can be alternately either assembled and
    disassembled, or erected and folded.


CLS 312/348.2
TXT Plurality of parts, held together by distinct fastening elements (e.g.,
    bolts):

    Devices under subclass 348.1 in which the parts are adapted to be locked in
    assembled position by a plurality of separate locking elements.


CLS 312/348.3
TXT Compartmented:

    Devices under subclass 330.1 including means dividing the component's
    interior into several discrete spaces.


CLS 312/348.4
TXT Facing (e.g., drawer front or face plate):

    Devices under subclass 330.1 in which significance is attributed to that
    part of the movable component adapted to face the outside of the cabinet.


CLS 312/348.5
TXT For holding document or pad:

    Devices under subclass 330.1 in which the movable component includes
    structure for gripping or accommodating a unitary group of sheets.


CLS 312/348.6
TXT Including particular handle:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 330.1 wherein significance is attributed
    to structure of a grasping element of a drawer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 110+ for miscellaneous
    detachable handle structure.

    81,     Tools, subclasses 489+ for particular handle structure.


CLS 312/349
TXT Structures under the class definition having guide means external thereto
    or on the exterior surface thereof.


CLS 312/350
TXT Structures under the class definition in which the housing or housing walls
    are provided with internal guides or trackways for movable components.


CLS 312/351
TXT Structures under the class definition housing either fixed or removable
    components, such as receptacles, shelves, articles supporting partitions,
    racks or other means to support articles or material in spaced relation to
    the bottom wall of the structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, particularly subclasses 12 and 35
    for trunks and suitcases having merely removable components.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 557+ for an article
    holding tray accessible through the top and subclasses 278+ for a retainer
    for an item of apparel.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses 18+ for cell-type compartments and
    partitions.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 600+ for cell-type compartments and cell
    structure useful only in metal receptacles.


CLS 312/351.1
TXT HAVING PARTICULAR CABINET SUPPORT:
    Cabinet structure under the class definition wherein significance is
    attributed to structure of a supporting member such as a stand, pedestal,
    frame, leg, wheel, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 297 for a cabinet with an external support
    for a refrigerator housing.

    248,    Supports, subclass 129 for cabinet stands mounted on wheels,
    subclasses 346.01+ for supporting bases, subclasses 133+, 144, and 145 for
    stands which support a cabinet for pivotal motion.


CLS 312/351.11
TXT Wheel mounting feature:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 351.1 wherein significance is attributed
    to structure for mounting a roller upon which the cabinet housing is
    supported.


CLS 312/351.12
TXT Detachable:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 351.11 wherein the mounting structure
    permits the supporting roller to be easily removed from the cabinet.


CLS 312/351.13
TXT And means to prevent moving:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 351.11 including a means to prevent the
    cabinet from rolling.


CLS 312/351.14
TXT Attached to building structure:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 351.13 wherein the means for preventing
    movement of the cabinet comprises structure for temporarily fixing the
    cabinet to a building structure, e.g., wall, door, floor, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242,    for structure mounted in wall or panel recess.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 476+ for wall supported container.


CLS 312/351.2
TXT Single pedestal:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 351.1 wherein the cabinet is supported by
    only one elongated column.


CLS 312/351.3
TXT Legs:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 351.1 including two vertically extending
    members for supporting the cabinet above a surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 677 and 163.1+ for structure having plural
    particular foot or legs, 157, 419+, 274.1+, 323+, and 354.1+ for adjustable
    supports, subclasses 678+ for particular base or platform support.


CLS 312/351.4
TXT U-shaped form:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 351.3 wherein the supporting member is in
    the form of a U-shape structure forming two legs.


CLS 312/351.5
TXT Interconnected:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 351.3 including structure for connecting
    the two legs together.


CLS 312/351.6
TXT Pivotally:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 351.5 wherein the legs are hinged
    together.


CLS 312/351.7
TXT Support base frame:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 351.5 wherein the support member is a
    separate frame unit having two legs connected by a cross member, and
    configured such that the cabinet housing rests on the unit.


CLS 312/351.8
TXT By a horizontal exterior cross member:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 351.5 including a horizontally extending
    member, spaced apart from  and located outside of the cabinet housing,
    which connects one leg to another.


CLS 312/351.9
TXT Pivotally connected to cabinet housing:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 351.3 including a leg which is pivotally
    connected to the cabinet housing.


CLS 312/352
TXT Structures under the class definition not herein-before provided for.


CLS 312/400
TXT SPACED INSULATED WALL:

    Structure under the class definition having an outer wall and a liner or
    inner wall connected together to form a hollow wall structure with an
    insulation layer therebetween.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses 4, 128+, and 131 for, respectively,
    a tank, box, or other receptacle of the class comprising wall elements
    defining a temperature barrier to the contents.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 415+ for receptacles having multi-layer
    barrier structure.


CLS 312/401
TXT Refrigerator cabinet:
    Structure under subclass 400 wherein the interior of the cabinet is adapted
    to be kept at a temperature cooler than the exterior cabinet ambient
    temperature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    for refrigerators having transparent wall structure.

    321.5,  for closure having particular structures for supporting article(s).

    SEARCH CLASS:

     62,    Refrigeration, subclasses 440+ for a cooled enclosure having
    features peculiar to refrigeration which may include insulated wall
    structure.

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 467 for containers with a means to lower or
    retain the temperature level of content stored therein.


CLS 312/402
TXT Including exterior-access drawer:

    Cabinet under subclass 401 including a horizontally slidable compartment
    having one wall defining a movable closure to provide access to the
    interior from the exterior of the compartment.


CLS 312/403
TXT Including hot compartment:

    Cabinet under subclass 401 including an additional compartment which is
    adapted to be kept at a temperature warmer than the exterior cabinet
    ambient temperature.


CLS 312/404
TXT Including particular storage compartment:

    Cabinet under subclass 401 including a receptacle provided within the
    cabinet for article storage.


CLS 312/405
TXT Closure structure:

    Cabinet under subclass 401 wherein significance is attributed to a movable
    closure which allows access to the interior from the exterior of the
    cabinet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291,    for cabinet with inner and outer closures.

    296,    for closure seals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 475.1+ for a closure
    seal, e.g., striker gasket as weather-strip and see the search notes
    thereto for the loci of other seals.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclass 75 for safe
    closure seals.


CLS 312/405.1
TXT Having article support:

    Cabinet under subclass 405 wherein the closure includes structure for
    holding objects on one side of the closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    321.5,  for closure having particular structures for supporting article(s).


CLS 312/406
TXT Wall structure:

    Cabinet under subclass 401 wherein significance is attributed to particular
    construction of the cabinet wall(s).


CLS 312/406.1
TXT Including means to relieve thermal stress:

    Cabinet under subclass 406 wherein the liner or inner wall includes means
    to reduce stress forming across the wall due to extreme temperature changes.


CLS 312/406.2
TXT Wall-Ends connection:


    Cabinet under subclass 406 wherein two walls or the outer wall and inner
    wall each having an end portion connected together by a breaker strip or
    separate member for bridging or sealing the gap between the end portions of
    the walls.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    407     and 407.1, for structures of the wall end-portions of a
    refrigerator divider.


CLS 312/407
TXT Refrigerating-zones divider:

    Cabinet under subclass 406 wherein significance is attributed to structure
    of a partition which separates the interior of the cabinet into distinct
    chambers.


CLS 312/407.1
TXT Having opening:

    Cabinet under subclass 407 including an opening in the partition to permit
    flow of air from one chamber to another.


CLS 312/408
TXT Shelf or shelf-supporting structure:

    Cabinet under subclass 401 wherein significance is attributed to the
    structure of an article support member or to structures for attaching an
    article support member to the inner wall or liner of the cabinet.


CLS 312/409
TXT Fire-resistant cabinet:

    Cabinet under subclass 400 having structure particularly adapted to protect
    the contents of the cabinet from deleterious effects of heat and moisture.


CLS 312/410
TXT Particular oven shelf, rack, or support therefore:
    Cabinet structure under subclass 400 wherein significance is attributed to
    a an article support or article support mounting structure inside an oven.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 181.1 for structure made of wire.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 487 and 488 for dish or dishwasher rack,
    per se.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 312/901
TXT FAN-OUT HOLDERS FOR RECORDING MEDIA:
    Cross reference art collection concerned with holders for recording media
    such as tapes, films, phonograph records, etc. which are connected in
    series, wherein each holder is hinged on an edge for swinging from side to
    side.


CLS 312/902
TXT CARRYING CASE:
    Cross-reference art collection concerned with compact portable cases which
    is usually provided with a handle, and adapted for easy transportation of
    articles, tools, devices, etc., from place to place.


CLS 313/
TTL ELECTRIC LAMP AND DISCHARGE  DEVICES

CLS 313/
TXT


    I.      DEFINITIONS OF TERMS USED IN THE CLASS:

    ELECTRIC LAMP

    A device for converting electrical energy into visible light or ultraviolet
    light.  Most lamps also generate infrared rays, but infrared ray generators
    are included only when they have structure analogous to electric lamps or
    electric space discharge devices.  See the notes below.  Electric lamps may
    be in the form of electric space discharge devices, for which see the next
    paragraph.

    ELECTRIC SPACE DISCHARGE DEVICES (for which the shorter expression
    "DISCHARGE DEVICES" is used in these definitions)

    Any device which is intended to have an electrical current flow between two
    spaced electrodes, at least part of the path followed by the discharge
    being constituted by a gas, vapor, or vacuum.

    CATHODE RAY DEVICE

    A discharge device having means for forming the electric discharge into a
    restricted beam or ray, usually pencil-like.

    PYRO-ELECTRIC LAMP

    An electric lamp which has as the light emitting body a material which is a
    second class conductor.  The lamps are designed to have the pyro-electric
    body heated by a separate source until the pyro-electric material becomes
    conductive and then the current flow through the pyro-electric body
    maintains the second class conductor material at a temperature at which it
    emits light.

    PHOTO-CELLS

    A device to be used in an electrical circuit which is provided with means
    responsive to light or analogous rays for altering the operation of the
    device.  The only photocells included in this class are photosensitive
    discharge devices and photosensitive electric lamps.

    PHOTO-SENSITIVE

    A device provided with means sensitive to light or analogous rays for
    altering the operation of the device.

    X-RAY TUBE

    A discharge device designed to generate X-rays.

    SPARK PLUG

    A unitary spark gap having a plurality of insulated electrodes arranged out
    of contact with each other so that the space discharge is a "jump spark"
    and usually having a shell or sleeve designed to be attached to an opening
    in an internal combustion engine or other device, the shell or sleeve
    carrying one or more electrodes within it which are insulated from the
    shell or sleeve by an insulating bushing or other insulation.  The shell or
    sleeve often carries an electrode which cooperates with the other insulated
    electrode to form the jump-spark gap.  Included are the devices known as
    spark plugs usually used on the ordinary automotive internal combustion
    engine.  Also included are spark plugs for other uses which are similar in
    structure.  It does not include ignitors where the spark is made by moving
    the electrodes into contact and then separating them to draw the spark.  It
    does not include ignitors which are not similar in structure to the
    automobile spark plug even if they are of the jump spark type.  Spark plugs
    having only a single electrode which are designed to be used with some
    other device, as the cylinder head, so as to form a jump spark therewith
    are also excluded.

    THREE OR MORE ELECTRODE DISCHARGE DEVICES

    Any discharge device having three or more electrodes whether all of the
    electrodes have lead-wires for connection to the supply circuit or not.  In
    some of the three or more electrode discharge devices, the electrodes are
    arranged with one or more electrodes disposed in the interelectrode space
    or in the discharge path between two other electrodes, and have only the
    outer electrodes provided with lead-wires for connecting to the supply
    circuit, the discharge passing from the outer electrodes to the interposed
    electrode so that the discharge device has a plurality of series connected
    discharge spaces.

    ELECTRODE

    A filament or glower of an electric lamp or a member arranged to emit,
    and/or collect, and/or control the movement of electrons or ions in a
    discharge device.

    CATHODE

    An electrode which acts as the negative device.  In some discharge devices,
    such as spark gaps, there is no difference in structure between the cathode
    and anode.  Consequently, the use of the words "cathode" and "anode" have
    been avoided except where there is some significance in structure between
    the two electrodes.

    FILAMENT

    A wire, ribbon or rod conducting member.  It may be made of metal or
    nonmetal.  In this class filaments, per se, are classified in subclasses
    341+ irrespective of whether the filament is to be used in a lamp or
    discharge device, and irrespective of whether the filament is to be heated
    by passing a current through the filament (directly heated cathode) or is
    to be heated by the discharge in a discharge device (see thermionic
    cathode).

    INCANDESCENT LAMP

    Lamps which are provided with a filament or glower adapted to be heated to
    incandescence by the passage of an electric current therethrough.

    GLOWER

    Any body made of a material which when heated by the passage of an electric
    current therethrough emits light rays.  The term glower includes filaments
    and also includes other bodies which are not of filamentary dimensions such
    as, rods and bars made of second class conductors.

    SECOND CLASS CONDUCTORS

    A material having a very high electrical resistance at ordinary
    temperatures and a low resistance when heated.  Glowers formed of oxides,
    such as Th2 or the rare earth oxides, used in the pyro-electric (e.g.,
    Nernst) type of incandescent lamp are examples of second class conductors.

    DIRECTLY HEATED CATHODE:

    A filament designed to have its terminals connected to a source of current,
    the filament being heated by the current passing through it.

    INDIRECTLY-HEATED CATHODE (Equipotential cathode)

    A cathode designed to be heated to its emitting temperature by a separate
    heating element.

    HEATED CATHODE

    Either a directly heated cathode or an indirectly heated cathode.

    THERMIONIC CATHODE

    A cathode designed to operate at an elevated temperature. The expression,
    "thermionic cathode" includes directly heated cathodes, indirectly heated
    cathodes, and also cathodes which are designed to be heated by ionic
    bombardment to the electron emitting temperature.

    LOW WORK FUNCTION ELECTRODE (cold cathode, cathodes containing or coated
    with electron emissive material)

    A cathode containing or coated with a material which readily emits
    electrons, i.e., a material which has a low work function.  Examples of
    such materials are the alkali metals and their oxides, alkaline earth
    metals and their oxides, thorium, magnesium. The expression "low work
    function electrode" includes thermionic electrodes which contain or are
    coated with electron emissive material, photosensitive cathodes, secondary
    emissive cathodes as well as cathodes which emit electrons without being
    heated.

    EMISSIVE CATHODE

    A low work function electrode.

    SECONDARY EMISSIVE CATHODE

    A cathode designed to emit electrons by virtue of the impact by electrons
    upon the electron emissive surface.  See section XIV of the class
    definition for the classification of secondary emissive cathodes, per se.
    See cathanode below.

    CATHANODE

    An electrode designed to serve as an anode with respect to a cathode and to
    be heated by the discharge so that another surface of the electrode emits
    electrons to a second anode.  See subclass 305 for discharge devices having
    a cathanode.

    IONIC CATHODE

    A virtual cathode formed by a discharge in a gas or vapor between two
    electrodes, the discharge serving to supply electrons to a third electrode.
     See subclass 588 for discharge devices having an ionic cathode.

    PHOTO-SENSITIVE ELECTRODE

    An electrode which has its electrical properties changed by the action of
    light or analogous ray energy.  The ray energy may be X-rays, ultraviolet
    rays, infrared rays, or any analogous radiation.  See section XIV of the
    class definition for the classification of photosensitive electrodes, per
    se.

    PHOTO-SENSITIVE CATHODE

    An electrode which emits electrons when subjected to the action of light or
    analogous rays. Discharge devices having a photosensitive cathode or other
    photosensitive electrode are classified in subclasses 523+ in this class.
    See photosensitive electrode above.  See section XIV of the class
    definition for the classification of photosensitive cathodes, per se.

    ANODES

    An electrode which acts as the positive terminal of the discharge or which
    acts as the positive terminal of an electric field to cause a discharge or
    accelerate the electrons in a discharge.  See the definition of cathode
    above, and the definition of control electrode below.

    TARGET

    In an X-ray tube, cathode-ray tube, or other beam type discharge device,
    the anode or the member against which the principal electron or ion stream
    impinges.  See the definition of anode above.

    ANTI-CATHODE

    Same as "target" or anode. Used in reference to X-ray tube anodes.

    CONTROL ELECTRODE

    An electrode designed to influence or control the discharge current flowing
    between other electrodes.  It may depend for its effect on either its
    electro-static effect or on the current flow thereto. The most common type
    of control electrode is the control grid.  Since, however, the grid may be
    used as an anode, and the anode as a grid in many types of discharge
    devices, the use of the expression "control electrode" has been avoided
    where possible and similar structures placed together irrespective of
    whether the disclosure indicated that the grid electrode is to be used as
    an anode or control electrode. Patents relating to discharge devices having
    one or more grid electrodes interposed between a cathode and an anode are
    classified in subclasses 293+ or in the subclasses referred to in the notes
    to these subclasses.  See subclass 308 and the subclasses referred to in
    the notes thereto for other discharge devices having a control electrode.

    GRID ELECTRODE

    An electrode having one or more apertures therein, usually formed of
    open-work material, such as wire mesh, perforated sheet material, or of
    wires or bars as of coiled wire, or other foraminous structure, and
    sometimes used as the control electrode in a discharge device.  As pointed
    out in the definition of "control electrode" above, the terms "grid
    electrode" and "control electrode" are not synonymous in this class.

    AUXILIARY STARTING ELECTRODE

    An electrode designed for use in a discharge device having at least two
    principal discharge electrodes and the auxiliary starting electrode.  The
    starting electrode is designed to be connected in the circuit so that the
    discharge is initiated between it and one of the principal electrodes, the
    auxiliary discharge conditioning the discharge space so that a discharge
    between the principal electrodes can be established.  An auxiliary starting
    electrode does not necessarily differ in structure or material from any
    other electrode. Auxiliary starting electrodes are usually simple
    electrodes, a wire or rod, and are usually not formed from as heavy or
    strong material as the principal electrodes.  Usually an auxiliary starting
    electrode is placed close to a principal electrode so that the discharge
    may be initiated between the auxiliary starting electrode and the main
    electrode at a smaller voltage than is necessary to initiate the discharge
    between the principal electrodes.  The auxiliary starting electrode may be
    supplied with current only during the starting period or it may be supplied
    with current during the operation of the device so that a continuous
    discharge takes place between it an done of the principal electrodes to
    assure ionization in the discharge space so that the discharge between the
    principal electrodes may take place at the proper time.  The latter type of
    auxiliary starting electrodes are also known as "holding electrodes".
    Where a plurality of auxiliary starting electrodes are used, they may be
    spaced at intervals between the principal electrodes so that the discharge
    may first be established between one principal electrode and the nearer
    auxiliary starting electrode, then to a more remote auxiliary starting
    electrode and so on until the discharge is established between the
    principal electrodes.  If a plurality of auxiliary starting electrodes are
    used, one may be placed close to each of a plurality of principal
    electrodes.  In as much as the determination of whether or not an electrode
    is an auxiliary starting electrode depends upon the circuit connections to
    the discharge device, and this class includes only the structure of the
    discharge device, per se, only in subclasses 170+ (liquid electrode
    discharge devices) and subclasses 596+ and 601+ (gas or vapor-type
    discharge devices) is the classification based upon one of the electrodes
    being an auxiliary starting electrode.

    HOLDING ELECTRODES

    See the definition of auxiliary starting electrode above.

    SHIELDS

    Structures used in lamps and discharge devices to modify the electrical
    characteristics thereof, or structures which are used to protect the lamp
    or discharge device from external influences, or structures which are used
    to protect parts of the device from influences, such as electron
    bombardment, originating in another part of the device, and other
    structures used for protective purposes.  Shields do not include mere
    electrodes even though the electrode is defined as being a shielding
    electrode. Where an electrode of a discharge device is provided with
    shielding structure in addition to the structure provided for influencing
    the electric space discharge, such additional structure is considered to be
    shielding structure.  Examples of such additional shielding are where an
    indirectly heated cathode is provided with a flange for shielding the
    discharge space from the influence of the cathode heater current, or where
    an anode, grid, or lead wire is provided with shielding means to shield the
    lead-in wires from the effects of electrostatic fields.  Metal or
    conductive envelopes for discharge devices are not considered to be shields
    where the envelope is designed to function as an electrode of the discharge
    device, such as an anode.  Where the metal or conductive envelope is
    disclosed as being provided for shielding purposes and not an electrode,
    the envelope is considered to be a shield.

    FLUORESCENT OR PHOSPHORESCENT MATERIAL

    A material which absorbs radiant energy of one wave length (e.g., light)
    and is excited thereby to cause it to emit radiant energy of another wave
    length (e.g., light of another wave length), or a material which is
    excitable by the impact of electrons, ions, or analogous energy (e.g.,
    gamma rays) thereon to emit light energy without becoming incandescent.

    GETTERS

    Materials which, when used in closed containers, reduce the gas or vapor
    content of the container.  A getter may react with the gas or vapor in the
    container to form a solid nonvaporizable material, or to adsorb or absorb
    the gas or vapor, or may reduce the amount of the gas or vapor in the
    container in any other way.  The material may be a getter for one gas or
    vapor and may not have any effect upon another gas or vapor.

    GAS OR VAPOR GENERATING MATERIAL

    Solid or liquid material which is placed within the envelope and generates
    a gas or vapor by virtue of a chemical change, by volatilization, or by
    giving off an absorbed gas or vapor.  It may do this during normal
    operation or it may be caused to do so by treatment preliminary to placing
    the device in operation.

    ENVELOPE

    A gas tight enclosure for an electric lamp or discharge device.  It may be
    evacuated or filled with a gas or vapor.  In general the distinction
    between an envelope and a mere jacket, casing or housing is that the
    envelope is sealed, so as to be gas tight.

    CASING

    A container or enclosure for a lamp or discharge device, or a part thereof.
     See Envelope above.

    JACKET

    Same as casing above.

    BASE

    A member attached to the lamp or discharge device so that it may be
    attached to a supporting socket or supported on a surface.  The base
    usually includes electrical connector means for connecting the lamp or
    discharge device in a circuit.  Where the lamp or discharge device is
    provided with an envelope, the base is usually attached to the envelope, as
    by cementing, or the envelope is formed so as to have an integral base
    portion.

    LEAD-IN

    The conductor used to transmit electric current or potential from the
    exterior of the envelope or casing into the interior of the envelope or
    casing. Where the envelope is made of glass it usually consists of a
    conductor which passes through the wall of the envelope and which is sealed
    to the glass by a glass-to-metal seal.

    II.     GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    1.      This is the generic class for electric lamp and electric space
    discharge device structure.

    2.      Examples of such devices are electric incandescent lamps, gas or
    vapor filled electric discharge tubes, including lamps, mercury arc
    devices, vacuum discharge tubes, radio tubes, cyclotrons, cathode-ray
    tubes, photosensitive discharge devices, secondary emission electron
    multipliers, spark plugs, and open air arc and spark devices.

    III.    LAMPS AND DISCHARGE DEVICE STRUCTURE CLASSIFIED ELSEWHERE

    1.      X-RAY TUBES AND TARGETS

    Class 378, X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 119+ provides
    for sources of X-rays or gamma rays.

    2.      INSULATORS WITH ARCING DEVICES

    Class 174, Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 140+
    provides for insulators of the type designed to support electrical
    conductors for distribution systems (such as power lines, telephone lines)
    which have combined there with arcing horns or electrodes for preventing
    concentration of the electrical stress between the conductor and the
    support for the insulator or to prevent arcs between the conductor and its
    support from discharging over the surface of or through the insulator.  The
    structures in Class 174 are analogous to some of the arc and spark devices
    in this class in that they include two arc or spark electrodes which are
    insulated from each other by means of an insulator. However, the devices in
    Class 174 usually include some structure which is specialized to their use
    in supporting and insulating a distribution conductor with respect to the
    supporting means. Subclass 144 provides for the arcing devices, per se,
    especially designed for use with the insulators of subclasses 140 to 143.

    3.      LIGHTNING ARRESTERS

    Class 313 includes lightning arresters where the only structure is an arc
    or spark gap.  Excluded are lightning arresters which include an arc or
    spark gap in combination with an impedance element such as a resistance, or
    inductance.  Also excluded are arc or spark gap arresters in combination
    with a circuit maker or breaker such as a thermostatic switch or fuse.
    Excluded from Class 313 are the lightning arresters of the arc or spark gap
    type which are designed to have the electrodes brought into physical
    contact upon a prolonged discharge or which are provided with a material,
    such as, a fusible substance which melts and flows between the electrodes
    to short-circuit the electrodes upon a prolonged discharge.

    Among the excluded types of lightning arresters is the type including a
    mass of particulate particles, each particle being insulated from the
    other, usually by a coating upon the surface of the particle.  When a
    discharge passes from particle to particle, the surface material becomes
    conductive making a short-circuit through the mass.  If the particles
    remain conductively insulated and the current is transmitted through the
    mass of particles by the arc or spark, then the device is included within
    the scope of Class 313.

    For the excluded types of lightning arresters,

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 32+ for
    lightning arrestors having a space discharge device and circuit impedance
    element structurally combined to make an integral unit.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclasses 28+ for combined thermal switches and lightning arrestors.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 117+ for
    the lightning arresters generally.

    5.      ELECTRIC LAMP PROVIDED WITH STRUCTURE FOR HOLDING A MATERIAL TO BE
    HEATED

    Class 219, Electric Heating, subclass 521 provides for the structure of
    electric lamps where the lamp is provided with structure for holding a
    material to be heated.  In some of these lamps, the envelope is made in the
    form of a receptacle so that the heat from the lamp filament will heat a
    material in the receptacle.  Other of the lamps have means provided in the
    lamp base for holding the material to be heated.

    5.5     MOLECULAR OR ATOMIC BEAM DEVICES

    Devices for producing and propagating a unidirectional stream of neutral
    molecules or atoms through a vacuum, usually with thermal velocity, and/or
    for exciting such molecules and atoms at a resonance frequency are
    classified in Class 250, Radiant Energy, subclass 251.

    6.      MASS SPECTROMETERS

    Discharge Devices of the type used in the separation or the analysis of
    materials utilizing the mass to electric charge ratio of particles are
    classified in Class 250, Radiant Energy, subclasses 281+.

    7.      ELECTRON MICROSCOPES

    For discharge devices used to produce electrons or ions and having means
    for subjecting objects or materials to the electrons or ions, including
    electron microscopes, see Class 250, Radiant Energy, subclasses 309 and 311.

    8.      CATHODE RAY OSCILLOGRAPHS

    Cathode ray discharge devices provided with means for making a record of
    the trace of the cathode beam (usually means for impressing the beam upon a
    photographic film or means for impressing the trace made upon a fluorescent
    screen upon a photographic film) are classified in Class 347, Incremental
    Printing of Symbolic Information, subclasses 121+ and 226+ irrespective of
    whether the recording means is within or without the envelope of the
    cathode-ray device.

    9.      CONSUMABLE ELECTRODE DISCHARGE DEVICES (e.g., ARC LAMPS, ETC.)

    Class 314, Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Consumable Electrodes,
    provides for arc and other electric space discharge lamps or devices which
    are provided with at least one electrode which is consumed during the
    operation of the discharge device and such devices in combination with
    electric current supply systems therefor.  Substantially all of the lamps
    in Class 314 are characterized by being provided with feeding means to move
    the electrodes together as the electrode is consumed.

    Patents claiming an "arc discharge device" or an "arc lamp" are not
    classified in Class 314 unless the claims are limited by claimed subject
    matter to discharge devices of the consumable electrode type.  Class 313
    provides for arc lamp and discharge device structure which is of general
    utility and not necessarily limited to use with devices of the consumable
    electrode type.  The electrodes for the consumable electrode type discharge
    devices are classified with other electrodes in Class 313 except for the
    consumption feed type electrodes in  Class 314 subclass 60.  See section
    XIV below for the classification of electrodes in Class 313.

    10.     LAMPS AND DISCHARGE DEVICES HAVING A CIRCUIT ELEMENT INCLUDED
    THEREIN

    Class 315, Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclasses 3+ and
    32+ provide for discharge devices and lamps which have a circuit element
    (e.g., switch, impedance, etc.,) structurally combined with the lamp or
    discharge device, see subclasses 3+ where the discharge device is a
    cathode-ray tube.  The circuit element may be within the base of the lamp
    or discharge device or within the enclosing envelope of the lamp or
    discharge device.

    An electromagnet connected in circuit with an electrode does not prevent
    classification of a lamp or space discharge device in Class 313 if the
    electromagnet is an operator for moving an electrode (see subclass 152) or
    if the electromagnet generates a magnetic flux which influences the
    operation of the lamp or space discharge device (see subclasses 153+). The
    inherent resistance of an electrode, although significant to the operation
    of the device, is not considered a circuit element such as would prevent
    classification in Class 313.

    11.     DISCHARGE DEVICES STRUCTURALLY COMBINED WITH AND IN CIRCUIT
    RELATION WITH INCANDESCENT LAMPS

    Class 315, Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 46+ and
    49 provide for the combination of a discharge device and a filamentary lamp
    which are structurally combined in a single unitary structure and where the
    lamp filament is in circuit relation with the electrodes of the discharge
    device.  See subclasses 46+ where the lamp filament is connected in shunt
    with the discharge electrodes and subclasses 409 and 410 where the lamp
    filament is connected in series with the discharge electrodes.

    12.     DISCHARGE DEVICES HAVING THE CATHODE HEATER OR OTHER STRUCTURALLY
    COMBINED HEATER IN CIRCUIT RELATION THEREWITH

    Class 315, Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclasses 46+
    and 49 provide for discharge devices which include an electric heater
    (e.g., the cathode heater filament for an indirectly heated cathode, or
    other heater) which is connected in circuit relationship with the discharge
    electrodes.  See subclasses 46+ where the heater is connected in shunt to
    the discharge electrodes and subclass 49 where the heater is in series with
    the discharge electrodes.  Not included in Class 313 in accordance with the
    line stated in this section are discharge devices having a directly heated
    or filamentary cathode which is necessarily in series with the discharge
    electrodes.

    13.     GAS PUMPS AND FANS

    Class 417, Pumps, subclasses 48+ provides for pumps utilizing a space
    discharge.  See subclass 49 of Class 417 for a statement of the line.

    IV.     LAMP AND DISCHARGE DEVICE SYSTEMS

    This class does not include electric systems for supplying electric current
    and/or potential to electric lamps or to discharge devices.

    Patents which claim a lamp or discharge device having electrodes which are
    adapted to have current or potential impressed upon the electrodes or which
    claim a lamp or discharge device with means recited broadly (no specific
    means, such as a battery, source etc., being included) to impress current
    or potential on the electrodes are classified in this class as lamps or
    discharge devices unless some circuit elements are claimed which positively
    limit the claims to a system rather than to a lamp or discharge device, per
    se.  However, where the relative potentials between the electrodes are
    claimed, the patent is classified as a system.  For example, a claim to a
    discharge device having an anode adapted to be maintained at a high
    positive potential, a control electrode adapted to be maintained at a low
    negative potential, and a cathode adapted to be maintained at ground
    potential will be excluded from this class and will be found in the
    appropriate system class.

    For discharge devices and lamp systems,

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 336.1 for miscellaneous electric systems
    for detecting or measuring invisible ray energy (e.g., Geiger-Mueller
    counter systems, etc.); and subclasses 200+ for miscellaneous electric
    systems which are controlled by a photo-electric discharge device.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Consumable Electrodes, for
    electric systems for supplying electric current to discharge devices of the
    consumable electrode (e.g., arc lamp) type.  See section III, (9) with
    respect to consumable electrode discharge devices.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclasses 1-11,
    12.1, 13.1-17, and 364-410 for miscellaneous systems for supplying electric
    current and/or potential to a cathode-ray tube, subclasses 3+ and 32+ for
    electric lamp and discharge devices which have a circuit element
    structurally combined with the lamp or discharge device, subclasses 76 to
    363 for miscellaneous systems for supplying electric current and/or
    potential to electric lamps, and to discharge devices of the gas or vapor
    type, and subclass 411 for power supplies utilizing the magnetic energy of
    an output transformer of a cathode ray deflection circuit.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous systems employing space
    discharge active element devices.

    331,    Oscillators, appropriate subclasses for electrical oscillators
    utilizing space discharge devices of particular construction, especially
    subclasses 6+ and 79+ for beam tube oscillators, subclasses 5 and 86+ for
    magnetron type oscillators, subclasses 78 and 126+ for gaseous space
    discharge type oscillators, subclass 98 for oscillators utilizing disk seal
    tubes enclosed by distributed parameter resonators, and subclass 184 for
    oscillators utilizing a space discharge device of particular construction.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 91+ provides for
    systems for supplying electric current and/or potential to X-ray tubes.

    V.      METHOD OF OPERATING LAMPS OR DISCHARGE DEVICE

    Patents which claim a method of operating a lamp or discharge device are
    excluded from this class and will be found in the class which provides for
    the system which is required to operate the device.  See Section IV for the
    classification of electric lamp and discharge device systems.

    VI.     METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR SUBJECTING OBJECTS, ARTICLES AND
    MATERIALS TO RAY ENERGY OR ELECTRONS OR IONS GENERATED BY DISCHARGE DEVICES
    OR LAMPS

    Class 313 does not include either processes or apparatus for subjecting
    materials, articles or objects to the ray energy (e.g., ultraviolet light,
    X-rays, etc.) or to electrons, ions, arcs or sparks generated by electric
    lamps or discharge devices.

    For such methods and apparatus,

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, for the irradiation of material by nuclear or
    electromagnetic wave or particle radiation, especially subclasses 324+ for
    methods and apparatus to subject material to corona irradiation, subclasses
    432+ for methods and apparatus to contained, supported or transferred
    material with an irradiating source for the material, subclasses 453.11+
    for object supports with or without an irradiating source for the supported
    object, subclasses 458.1+ for methods and apparatus to irradiate
    fluorescent and phosphorescent materials and subclass 492.1 for methods and
    apparatus to irradiate objects or materials.

    Also note that subclasses 281+ provides for methods and apparatus for the
    ionic separation or analysis of materials utilizing the mass to electric
    charge ratio of particles (e.g., mass spectrometers).

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    appropriate subclasses, particular subclasses 156+ for processes of
    treating materials with ray energy within a nuclear reactor, or for
    processes and apparatus for carrying out nuclear changes by the use of ray
    or similar energy.  See subclasses 100+ for fusion reactions and reactors
    and subclasses 347+ for fission reactions and reactors.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, appropriate subclasses for
    subjecting objects to X-rays or gamma rays.

    VII.    COMBINED WITH A SUPPORT

    Where the support is a casing, jacket, electrical connector (e.g., socket)
    or includes means for modifying the temperature of the lamp or discharge
    device, see sections VIII, IX, XI, and XII below.

    Lamps including discharge device lamps combined with a supporting means for
    the lamp are excluded from the class and will be found in Class 362,
    Illumination or one of the classes specified in the notes to that class.

    Class 313 is the generic class for discharge devices in combination with
    supporting means for the discharge device.

    250,    Radiant Energy, provides for generators of invisible ray energy in
    combinations with the means for supporting the ray generating means where
    not elsewhere provided.  See subclasses 423+ for methods and apparatus for
    ion generation and subclasses 493.1+ for methods and apparatus for radiant
    energy generation and sources.

    348,    Television, subclasses 373+ and 825+ for cathode-ray tubes utilized
    in television systems and provided with a supporting means.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 119+ for sources,
    combined with supports.

    VIII.   COMBINED WITH TEMPERATURE MODIFYING MEANS

    1.      WITH ENCLOSING CASING OR JACKET:

    Class 313 is a generic class for all discharge devices where significant
    discharge device structure is claimed in combination with a jacket, casing
    or enclosure having means to modify the temperature of the discharge
    device, such combinations will be found in subclasses 11+.

    Class 362, Illumination, or one of the classes specified in the notes
    thereto, provides for all lamps including those of the discharge device
    type, which have a separable casing, jacket or enclosure about the lamp and
    which include means to modify the temperature of the lamp.  See especially
    subclasses 294 and 373 of Class 362.  Included in Class 313 are all lamps,
    per se, and discharge devices, per se, which are provided with a double
    walled envelope or two sealed enclosing envelopes, the second envelope
    being an integral part of the lamp or discharge device structure, the space
    between the two envelope portions being evacuated or filled with heat
    transfer or insulating means to modify the temperature of the lamp or
    discharge device.  See subclasses 25+ of Class 313 for the subject matter.

    250,    Radiant Energy, provides for invisible ray generators which are
    enclosed within a separable casing or housing and which are provided with
    means for modifying the temperature of the ray generator where not provided
    for elsewhere. See subclasses 423+ for invisible radiant energy generation
    and sources.  Subclass 238 provides for photocells including those of the
    discharge device type which include a separable casing or housing and means
    to modify the temperature of the photocell.

    Class 174, Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, provides for a mere
    housing, casing or envelope for an electrical device, such as a lamp or
    discharge device, where no significant structure of the device is claimed
    with means for modifying the temperature of the device and which has
    electrical features combined therewith, such as connector structure.  See
    subclasses 15.1+ where the housing, casing or envelope is combined with
    means for feeding, circulating or distributing a temperature modifying
    fluid and see subclasses 50+ where the temperature modifying means for the
    housing, casing, or envelope does not require circulation of a fluid, as
    for example, by having heat radiating fins or a heat conductive path.

    Class 165, Heat Exchange, takes patents claiming heat exchange apparatus
    combined with a device to be cooled or heated thereby if no structure of
    said device is included other than the structure necessary for cooperation
    with the heat exchange apparatus, the mere naming of the device as a lamp
    or discharge device will not be sufficient to exclude the patent from Class
    165.

    See especially subclasses 47+ for a structurally installed heat exchanger;
    subclass 74 for a device to be heated or cooled projecting into and
    removably secured to a container for a heat exchange fluid; and subclass 80
    for a removable device removably retained in a heat exchanger.

    2.      LAMP, DISCHARGE DEVICES, AND ENVELOPES THEREFOR WITH TEMPERATURE
    MODIFYING MEANS

    Class 313, provides for all lamp and discharge device structures, per se,
    where significant lamp or discharge device structure is claimed and which
    include means for modifying the temperature of the lamp or discharge
    device, excepting lamps and discharge devices of the consumable electrode
    type which are classified in Class 314, Electric Lamp and Discharge
    Devices:  Consumable Electrodes, subclasses 26+.

    See section VIII, 1 above when the lamp or discharge device is provided
    with a separable casing, jacket, or enclosure and which include means to
    modify the temperature of the lamp or discharge device, and also see
    section VIII, 1 with respect to photocells provided with temperature
    modifying means where no significant photocell structure is claimed.

    See subclasses 11+ of Class 313 for lamp and discharge device structure
    which include means for modifying the temperature of the lamp or discharge
    device.  Included are lamp and discharge devices, per se, having heating
    means for raising the temperature of the device, devices with electrodes
    provided with cooling ducts or heat radiators, devices with means to modify
    the temperature of the envelope, including double walled envelopes or two
    sealed enclosing envelopes with a heat conducting or heat insulating medium
    (including vacuum) in the space between the two envelope walls, devices
    with heat conducting or insulating members, etc. Also included in
    subclasses 11+ is the structure of electrodes for lamps and discharge
    devices which are provided with means to modify the temperature of the
    electrode (e.g., electrodes with cooling fins, fluid ducts, heat
    transmission means, etc.).

    Excluded from Class 313 are mere envelopes, for electric lamps or discharge
    devices provided with temperature modifying means where no significant lamp
    or discharge device structure is claimed.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, provides for envelopes
    designed for use with electrical devices, including those for electric
    lamps and space discharge devices, and which include electrical features
    (such as lead-in conductors for the lamp) but which do not include any
    significant characteristics of the electrical device, and means to modify
    the temperature of the device or envelope.  See subclasses 15.1+ where the
    envelope is combined with means for feeding, circulating or distributing a
    temperature modifying fluid, and see subclasses 50.5+ where the temperature
    modifying means for the envelope does not require circulation of a fluid
    as, for example, by having heat radiating fins or a heat conductive path.

    Envelopes and casings provided with heat exchange means, including a mere
    metallic envelope defined as an anode or a similar electrode with heat
    exchange means, are classified in Class 165, Heat Exchange.  See subclasses
    177+ for a tubular structure with heat transfer means, and subclass 185 for
    a heat transmitter, per se.

    Parts of lamps and discharge devices, such as electrode clamps or
    electrical connectors provided with heat modifying means are classified
    with the appropriate device, e.g., with the clamp or connector, etc.

    IX.     COMBINED WITH A SEPARABLE CASING, JACKET, SHIELD, OR ENVELOPE
    PROTECTIVE MEANS

    Where the lamp or discharge device and casing or jacket includes means to
    modify the temperature of the lamp or discharge device, see section VIII
    above.

    See section XII of the class definition with respect to the classification
    of lamps and discharge devices provided with an envelope or a nonseparable
    casing or jacket.

    Class 313 is a generic class for the combination of significant discharge
    device structure and a separable casing jacket, shield or enclosure, or
    envelope protective means and provides for all discharge devices other than
    lamps which are not otherwise classified where significant discharge device
    structure is claimed in combination with a casing, jacket, shield, or
    envelope protective means.  Included in Class 313 are all lamps which have
    a double wall envelope where the second envelope which encloses the first
    envelope is integrally united with the first envelope so that the two
    envelope walls constitute an integral structure. Where the second envelope
    wall is not integral with the lamp envelope, that is, it is removable
    therefrom, the patent is excluded from Class 313 and will be found in Class
    362, Illumination, or one of the classes specified in the notes to that
    class.  See especially subclass 363 of Class 362.  See Class 174,
    appropriate subclasses for the combination of an envelope, box or housing
    (such as a lamp or discharge device envelope) and either a separable or
    integral casing or housing where electrical features are claimed, see the
    reference to Class 174 in this section below for the particular subclasses
    to be searched.  Also see the reference to Class 220 below.

    In Class 313, see subclasses 25+, 312, 315, 317+, and 634+ for lamps and
    discharge devices which have an integral double wall envelope.  See
    subclass 312, for discharge devices having an envelope and a casing or
    jacket therefor.  See subclass 313 where the discharge device is provided
    with an electrical shield.  See subclass 324 for other discharge devices
    provided with a casing or jacket.

    Class 362, Illumination, or one of the classes specified in the notes
    thereto provides for all combinations of lamps including those of the
    discharge device type in combination with separable casing, jacket, shield
    or enclosure.

    250,    Radiant Energy, provides for generators of invisible ray energy
    (e.g., ultraviolet ray) which have combined therewith a separable casing or
    jacket not provided for elsewhere. See subclasses 423+ for ion generation
    and subclasses 493.1+ for invisible radiant energy generation and sources.
    Subclass 239 provides for the combination of a photocell including those of
    the discharge type in combination with a separable casing or housing.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 193+ for source
    supports, per se.

    Class 174, Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, is the generic class
    for the combination of an electrical device recited by name only (e.g., no
    significant characteristics of the device are recited, and the device may
    be a discharge device or lamp) and the separable casing, jacket, shield or
    enclosure where electrical features are involved such as the lead-in
    conductors for the device.  See section 7 of the class definition of Class
    174 for the subclasses in Class 174 which provide for boxes, housings and
    envelopes in Class 174.  These subclasses also provide for the combination
    with a separable casing, jacket, shield or enclosure where electrical
    features are claimed.  Note especially subclasses 35 and 50.51 in Class
    174.  See the reference to Class 220 below.

    Class 188, Brakes, provides, in subclasses 378+ for caps or jackets to be
    placed upon the envelope of a discharge device or a lamp to damp the
    vibrations thereof due to the inertia of the cap or jacket; and in subclass
    381 for similar caps or jackets which damp the vibrations due to friction
    between the device and the cap or jacket; in both cases, wherein no
    significant features of the lamp or discharge device is claimed.

    Class 392, Electric Resistance Heating Devices, subclasses 407+ provides
    for electrical heaters which include an electric lamp and a reflector,
    casing or other housing.  See section III, 5 for electric lamps provided
    with structure for holding a material to be heated.

    Class 220, Receptacles, is the miscellaneous class for boxes, housings,
    casings, jackets and other containers and provides for envelopes for lamps
    and discharge devices and the separable jackets, boxes, casings, for
    discharge devices other than lamps.  Class 220 does not provide for the
    combination of a lamp or discharge device and a box, housing, casing,
    jacket or other container even though the lamp or discharge device is
    recited by name only.  Such combinations are found in Class 174,
    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators.  See subclasses 2.1+, of Class 220
    for the separable jackets, casings and housings for discharge devices in
    Class 220.  Also see section XII below with respect to the gas tight
    envelope structure in subclasses 2.1+ of Class 220.

    348,    Television, subclasses 818+ for cathode-ray tubes of the signal
    receiving type and provided with a shield or envelope protective means.

    X.      COMBINED WITH OPTICAL DEVICE OR HAVING SPECIAL RAY TRANSPARENT
    ENVELOPE (e.g., filter, reflector, lens, light distributor or modifier
    light shield, light shade, ultraviolet ray transparent portion, or light
    obscuring means).

    Class 313 provides for all lamps and discharge devices which have an
    integral part of the lamp an optical means combined therewith or which are
    provided with an envelope at least a portion of which is made of a glass or
    material especially designed to transmit a particular portion of the
    spectrum, such as ultraviolet, infrared, or only a restricted portion of
    the visible spectrum.  This includes lamps and discharge devices with light
    filters, reflectors, refractors, etc. within the envelope of the lamp or
    coated upon or forming a part of the envelope of the lamp. See subclasses
    110+, for this art.  See subclass 112 for lamps and discharge devices where
    the claims are limited to the envelope being made of a glass or other
    material (e.g., quartz) which transmits a particular portion of the
    spectrum or a restricted portion of the spectrum.

    See section XII below for the classification of envelopes, jackets, and
    casings, per se, for lamps and discharge devices.

    Class 313 does not provide for any discharge devices or lamps where the
    optical device is separable from the lamp or discharge device, that is, it
    is not an integral part of the lamp or discharge device.

    Class 362, Illumination, or one of the classes specified in the notes
    thereto, provides for all lamps including those of the discharge device
    which have a separable optical device, light shade, light obscuring means,
    lamp protector or other illuminating device combined therewith.  In the art
    in Class 362, and the related classes specified in the notes thereto will
    be found devices such as lanterns, projectors, signal lights, etc., where
    the lamp may be readily replaced or changed without modifying or altering
    the structure of the electric lamp.  The devices in Class 362 and the
    classes referred to in the notes thereto ordinarily include an electrical
    socket or other connector into which the lamp base is placed.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 503.1+ provides for invisible ray
    generators combined with a separable optical or ray modifying means where
    not classified elsewhere.  Subclasses 216 to 236 provide for the
    combination of a photoelectric cell including those of the discharge device
    type in combination with separable optical means used to project light upon
    the photocell.

    348,    Television, subclasses 335+ and 832+ for cathode-ray tubes utilized
    in television systems and combined with an optical device.

    XI.     COMBINED WITH ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR STRUCTURE

    Class 313 provides for the combination of all electric lamps and discharge
    devices where significant lamp or discharge device structure is recited in
    combination with an electric connector for connecting the lamp or discharge
    device in an electric circuit. See subclasses 49+ of Class 313 where the
    lamp or discharge device is combined with a separable or detachable
    electric connector (e.g., a socket), and subclasses 318.01+ of Class 313
    where the lamp or discharge device is provided with an electrical connector
    which is a part of the lamp or discharge device (e.g., a base on the lamp).

    1.      LAMPS AND DISCHARGE DEVICES COMBINED WITH A SEPARABLE ELECTRIC
    CONNECTOR

    Class 439, Electrical Connectors, provides for an electrical connector, per
    se.  Also included in that class is a combination not provided for
    elsewhere, or of such nature as to be best grouped with the electrical
    connector.  For example, a "named" lamp combined with a specific connector
    is included in Class 439.  The reference to a "filament" or to the support
    structure is considered to make a claimed lamp "significant" whereas a
    reference to the "envelope" is not considered to be more than naming of the
    lamp.  Further examples, included in Class 439 is the combination of an
    electrical lamp base with an "incandescent" lamp, a "fluorescent" lamp, or
    a "gas filled" lamp, provided that there is no claimed reference to other
    illuminating portions of the lamp.  Reference to the particular shape of
    the envelope will not exclude placement of a patent from Class 439 if no
    structure is recited which limits the envelope to use with a lamp or
    discharge device.

    Class 174, Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, provides for a box or
    housing including a hermetically sealed envelope such as an envelope for an
    electric lamp or discharge device where electrical features are claimed in
    combination with a separable electric connector or socket.  Class 174
    provides for such a combination where significant features of the box or
    housing is recited in addition to the electrical connector features on the
    envelope or in the socket or separable connector.  Note that in Class 174,
    in these subclasses, the electrical device in the box or housing may be
    recited by name only.  See especially subclasses 17.08 and 50.52+ where the
    box or housing is a hermetically sealed envelope such as is used for
    electric lamps or discharge devices.

    This class (Class 313), Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices) provides for
    the combination of an electrical lamp with a base or socket including a
    filament, or other reference to electrodes of the lamp.

    2.      LAMPS AND DISCHARGE DEVICES WHICH INCLUDE ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR
    STRUCTURE

    For reference to lamps and discharge devices with a base, where no
    electrical connector structure is involved, see section XII, 1 below.

    Class 439, Electrical Connectors, provides for a device having significant
    electrical connector structure combined with named other structure or with
    such other structure as is not provided for elsewhere.  See the discussion
    under XI, 1. above.  See especially subclasses 611+ for the combination of
    an electrical connector with a vitreous envelope secured thereto.

    See Class 174, Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 17+ and
    50+ for envelopes, boxes and housings for electric lamps and discharge
    devices which are of general utility and where electrical features are
    claimed which are provided with an electrical connector where significant
    structure of the box, housing or envelope is claimed in addition to the
    electrical connector structure.  See subclasses 17.08 and 50.52+ for Class
    174 for hermetically sealed envelopes where significant structure of the
    envelope is recited in combination with electrical connector structure.
    These subclasses in Class 174 provide the envelopes having lead-in wires
    sealed therein which are designed to form contacts (usually plug type
    contacts) where structure of the envelope in addition to the lead-in wire
    structure is recited.  Note especially subclass 50.53 where the envelope or
    seal for the envelope is formed of a conductive material and is used as the
    electrical connector for the device within the envelope.

    3.      ELECTRODES COMBINED WITH CONNECTOR STRUCTURE

    Class 313 includes all electrodes for electric lamps and discharge devices
    where significant lamp or discharge device electrode structure is claimed
    in combination with an electrical connector for the electrode, or where the
    electrode is provided with electrical connector structure.  Merely reciting
    that the electrode is a metallic or nonmetallic rod or wire, or that the
    electrode has a particular cross-section where the connector is attached to
    the connector is not considered to be significant electrode structure.

    Class 439, Electrical Connectors, provides for a device having electrical
    connector structure where no significant structure for the device is
    recited other than that necessary to provide for or to cooperate with
    electrical connector structure.  Class 439 includes an electrode for an
    electric lamp or space discharge device where the only structure of the
    electrode recited is that necessary to provide for or to cooperate with
    electrical connector structure.  Class 439 also provides for the
    combination of an electrical connector and means to shield the connector
    portions from radiating electromagnetic waves for which see subclasses 607+.

    Class 279, Chucks or Sockets, provides for chucks and sockets for holding
    rod-like bodies and tools.  Some of the chucks and sockets are designed to
    hold electrodes such as the carbon rods used in arc lamps.

    403,    Joints and Connections, is a class of joints of general
    application. See the search notes thereto for other classes which provide
    for joints or connections.

    XII.    ENVELOPES, CASINGS AND JACKETS FOR LAMPS AND DISCHARGE DEVICES

    Class 313 provides for the combination of electric lamps and discharge
    devices which are provided with a envelope, and for electric lamps and
    discharge devices which are provided with a casing or jacket which is an
    integral part of the lamp or discharge device.  Subclass 112 provides for
    lamps and discharge devices where the claims are limited to the envelope
    being made of a glass or other material (e.g., quartz) which transmits a
    particular portion of the spectrum or a restricted portion of the spectrum.
     See subclasses 317+ for lamps and discharge devices with envelopes and
    subclass 324 for discharge devices and lamps with casings or jackets.

    See section IX of the class definition with respect to the classification
    of lamps and discharge devices which are provided with separable casing,
    jacket, shield or envelope protective means.

    1.      WITH ATTACHED BASE

    Where the attached base includes electrical connector means see section XI
    above.

    Class 220, Receptacles, subclasses 2.1+ provides for the combination of
    envelope structure with an attached base where no electrical features are
    claimed.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for the joint
    between an envelope and its attached base where no structure of the
    envelope other than that providing for the joint is included.  See section
    XI, 3, for other classes which provide for joints.

    2.      WITH LEAD-IN STRUCTURE

    Class 174, Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, is the generic class
    for boxes, housings, and envelopes for electrical devices including
    electric lamps and discharge devices where the box, housing or envelope
    includes means to couple a conductor to the box, housing, or envelope, or
    has means for passing a lead-in conductor into the box or housing.  Class
    174 also provides for boxes, housings, and envelopes which are provided
    with other significant electrical structure or which are claimed as having
    an electrical device therein where no significant characteristics of the
    electrical device are recited.  See section 7 of the class definition of
    Class 174 for the particular subclasses which provide for such boxes,
    housings and envelopes in Class 174, especially subclass 50.5 and the
    subclasses specified in the Notes thereto where the box, housing or
    envelope is hermetically sealed including such devices as are made of
    ceramic, vitreous or nonmetallic plastic material (e.g., glass), and is
    provided with lead-in conductors for passing electric current into the
    interior. Note that if the lead-in conductors are of such rigidity to form
    contacts (usually plug-type contacts), the device is classified in Class
    173 unless significant structure of the device in addition to the connector
    structure is recited as pointed out in section XI, 2 above.  Any
    specification of electric lamp or discharge device structure in addition to
    naming the type of lamp or discharge device will cause classification of
    the patent in Class 313.  Where the claims are drawn to an electrical
    device broadly defined within the envelope, the patent is classified in
    Class 174.  See section 7 of the class definition of Class 174. Claims
    which are drawn to a discharge device or electric lamp or a particular
    type, such as a gas filled discharge device, or an incandescent lamp where
    only envelope and lead-in structures are claimed are classified in Class
    174.

    ---CDEF---For lead-in and seal structure such as glass to metal seals, see
    section
    XIII below.

    3.      WITH IDENTIFYING INDICATING MARK

    Class 116, Signals and Indicators, subclasses 216+ provides for lamp or
    discharge device envelopes or casings which are provided with an
    identifying mark which changes its appearance if the lamp or discharge
    device is used for an appreciable time.

    4.      DEFINED ONLY BY COMPOSITION

    Envelopes, jackets and casings which are defined only by their composition
    will be found in the appropriate composition class.

    Class 156, Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    subclasses 99+ for methods of making laminated glass structures.

    Class 428, Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 34.1+ for a
    hollow or container type article (e.g., lamp bulb) defined only as a base
    with a coating thereon, subclasses 426+ for a nonstructural composite web
    or sheet including a layer of glass, and subclasses 913 and 917
    (cross-reference art collections) for a product which is responsive to
    light (e.g., fluorescent or phosphorescent) and a product which is
    electro-luminescent.

    Class 501, Compositions:  Ceramic, subclasses 11+ for lamp and space
    discharge device envelopes defined only as being made of glass compositions
    and for glass compositions, per se.

    5.      STRUCTURE

    Class 220, Receptacles, subclasses 2.1+ are the generic place for the
    structure of the envelope, casing, or jacket for lamps and discharge
    devices where no significant electrical features are included.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 522.1+ provides for casings and jackets
    for use with generators of invisible ray energy (e.g., ultraviolet) where
    structure is claimed which limits the jacket to use with such invisible ray
    energy and subclass 239 provides for photocells where no significant
    characteristics of the photocell is recited which include an envelope or
    housing for the photocell.

    XIII.BUSHINGS, GLASS-TO-METAL SEALS AND LEAD-IN CONDUCTORS

    See section XI, 2, for lamps and discharge devices which are provided with
    electrical connector means such as a base having prongs thereon and which
    sometimes include bushings or lead-in conductors for conducting electricity
    through the wall of the housing, jacket or envelope of the lamp or
    discharge device to the electrodes within the casing, jacket or envelope.
    See section XII, 2, for housings, jackets, and envelopes for electric lamps
    and discharge devices which are provided with lead-in or bushing structure
    for passing electric current through the wall of the housing, jacket, or
    envelope to the interior of the device.

    Class 174, Electricity: Conductors and Insulators, subclass 151 provides
    for insulators for insulating a conductor from a wall through which the
    conductor extends. Subclass 152 provides for those devices known as
    bushings, in which a portion of the insulating element extends into the
    opening in the wall.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 228+ for consolidated metal powder compositions.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for a joint between
    a metal member and a glass or ceramic member.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 544+ is the
    generic place for all metal or adjacent metals containing materials not
    elsewhere classified.

    XIV.    ELECTRODES AND SHIELDS

    Class 313 provides for all electrodes and shields, per se, excepting the
    consumption feed type electrodes in Class 314, Electric Lamp and Discharge
    Devices: Consumable Electrodes, subclass 60.  Class 313 includes electrodes
    and shields formed of two or more parts with a joint therebetween where
    significant electrode or shield structure is claimed.  Class 314, subclass
    60 provides for electrodes which are limited by claimed structure to use in
    discharge devices (arc lamps) in which the feed or motion of one of the
    electrodes towards the other is accomplished by the destruction of the
    electrode or a portion thereof due to the discharge.

    Electrodes and shields which include no more structure than a base having
    one or more coatings thereon are excluded from Class 313.  Merely naming
    the electrode or shield as a wire, filament, rod, ribbon or strand is not
    sufficient structure to cause classification in Class 313.  Electrodes and
    shields which are defined only by their composition are excluded from this
    class. The excluded art relating to electrodes and shields will be found in
    the classes listed below:

    1.      ELECTRODES AND SHIELDS WITH JOINTS THEREBETWEEN

    Where the only structure of the electrode or shield recited is that the
    electrode or shield is composed of two or more parts with means to join the
    parts together, the patents will be found in the appropriate class
    providing for the joint.

    See section XI, 3 for a reference to the classes which provide for joint
    structure.

    Where an electrical feature is claimed in addition to the joint but no
    significant structure other than that required to make the joint is
    recited, the patent will be found in Class 439 Electrical Connectors, in
    the appropriate subclass providing for the electrical connector structure.
    For example, where an electrode is composed of two rod-like portions and
    one portion is provided with a hollow screw threaded socket and the other
    is provided with the screw threaded end to fit into the socket, the patent
    is classified in Class 403, Joints and Connections. However, if the
    structure includes means such as a portion of higher electrical
    conductivity to insure good electrical contact between the portions, the
    patent would be classified in Class 439.

    2.      COATED ELECTRODES OR SHIELDS AND COMPOSITIONS

    Class 75, Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use
    Therein, Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal
    Particulate Mixtures, subclasses 228+ for metal stock, filaments and wire
    made of consolidated metal particles.

    Class 205, Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods
    of Preparing the Compositions, subclass 50 for a product (other than one
    containing two or more contiguous metallic layers) produced by electrolysis
    involving electrolytic marking, battery electrode active material forming,
    electroforming, or electrolytic coating.

    Class 252, Compositions, subclasses 500+ for compositions which conduct or
    emit electrons and for electrically conductive or emissive devices defined
    solely by the composition of which they are composed.  Thus the
    compositions may be specialized for use as electron emissive compositions
    or for preparing electrodes, filaments and shields for electric lamps or
    electric space discharge devices.

    Class 420, Alloys or Metallic Compositions, appropriate subclasses for
    metal strands, filaments or wire made of alloys or single metals.

    Class 423, Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 445+ provides for
    carbon, per se, and carbon articles defined solely in terms of the material
    from which they are made.

    Class 427, Coating Processes, subclasses 58+ for processes of coating, per
    se, wherein the product is an electrical product.

    Class 428, Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 375+ and
    544+ provide for a rod, strand, fiber or filament with a coating thereon,
    which coated products may be electron emissive or miscellaneous conductors
    such as metal rods, wires or filaments with various coating thereon,
    including insulating coatings and also for electrodes which are merely
    composite laminates defined in terms of the composition of the components.

    3.      METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR MANUFACTURING ELECTRODES

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 825+ is the generic place for methods not
    elsewhere classified of mechanical manufacturing an electrical conductor or
    circuit and subclasses 745+ for corresponding apparatus.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    47 is the generic place for methods not elsewhere classified of making
    electrical conductors of indefinite length.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    is the generic place for methods and apparatus for manufacturing electrodes
    for electric lamps and discharge devices.  See subclasses 35+ and 46+ for
    the processes of making electrodes.  See the search notes to these
    subclasses for the classes which provide for either process or apparatus
    for manufacturing electrodes.

    Class 427, Coating Processes, subclasses 58+ for processes of coating, per
    se, wherein the product is an electrical product.

    XV.     FLUORESCENT AND PHOSPHORESCENT COATING AND COMPOSITIONS

    Class 313 provides for electric lamps and discharge devices where
    significant lamp or discharge device structure is claimed which include as
    a part thereof a fluorescent or phosphorescent material. See subclasses
    416+ for cathode-ray tubes which have a fluorescent or phosphorescent
    target and subclasses 483+ for other discharge devices and lamps having an
    electrode or the envelope coated with or containing a fluorescent or
    phosphorescent material, or which otherwise include as a part thereof a
    fluorescent or phosphorescent material.

    Class 362, Illumination, subclass 84 provides for illuminating devices
    which include a source of light and a separable illuminating fixture which
    is coated with or contains a fluorescent or phosphorescent material.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 483.1+ provides for fluorescent and
    phosphorescent screens.

    Class 252, Compositions, subclasses 301.16-301.6 is the generic place for
    fluorescent or phosphorescent materials.

    Class 427, Coating Processes, subclasses 64+ for coating processes, per se,
    wherein the product is an electrical product with a fluorescent or
    phosphorescent base or coating.

    XVI.GETTERS AND GAS OR VAPOR GENERATING MATERIALS

    Class 313, subclasses 549+ provides for all electric lamps and discharge
    devices which have combined therewith a getter or a gas or vapor generating
    material, irrespective of whether the getter or gas or vapor generating
    means, is to be used during the manufacture of the device, or to be used
    during the operation of the device, or to be used as needed after the
    device has been operated.  Subclasses 549+ also provides for electrode
    structure combined with containers or receptacles for the getter or the gas
    or vapor generating material.  For electrodes which involve significant
    electrode structure with a coating or a getter material thereon, see
    subclass 355 and the subclasses referred to in the notes thereto.  For the
    classification of electrodes which involve only a base with a coating of a
    getter material thereon, or which involves only an electrode defined by its
    compositions, see section XIV above.

    Class 252, Compositions, subclass 181.1 and the classes specified in the
    notes to the Definition of those subclasses, provides for compositions
    which are designed for use as getters or electric lamp or discharge devices
    or which are designed for use in generating a gas or vapor within the
    envelope or jacket of an electric lamp or space discharge device.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 48+ for electrical or getter-type means.

    XVII. DEFLECTION AND FOCUSING MAGNETS

    Class 335, Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 210+ provides for electromagnets designed for
    use with electric lamps and discharge devices.  Such magnets include those
    used with the cathode-ray tubes classified in subclasses 75+ of Class 313
    to deflect the cathode ray beam, those used with the cathode ray tubes
    classified in subclasses 441+ to focus, concentrate or accelerate the
    cathode ray, and those used with the other discharge devices and lamps in
    subclasses 153+.

    Class 317, will take deflecting magnets provided with a plurality of coils
    to deflect the cathode ray in a plurality of directions, (e.g., vertically,
    and horizontally).  Class 317 will also take magnets for focusing,
    concentrating or accelerating cathode rays even if the magnet is provided
    with a plurality of separate coils.  Class 317 however excludes magnets for
    cathode-ray tubes which have a plurality of coils to generate both a
    deflecting field and a focusing, concentrating and/or accelerating field.
    Such excluded patents are classified in Class 313 in subclasses 421+.

    XVIII. INFRARED RAY GENERATORS

    Class 313 does not provide for devices for converting electrical energy
    into infrared ray energy, excepting in special cases. Many lamps and
    discharge devices inherently generate infrared ray energy in their
    operation.  Class 313 will take therefore, electric lamps and discharge
    devices which are stated to be for the purpose of generating infrared ray
    energy when such lamps and discharge devices are substantially identical in
    structure with lamps and discharge devices intended to generate visible
    light or ultraviolet light or other analogous ray energy.  Class 313 will
    take such devices even though the device includes means for preventing
    light energy other than the infrared ray energy from being emitted, such as
    having the envelope wall formed of an opaque material. Such infrared ray
    generators are classified in Class 313 in the subclasses providing for the
    structure of the analogous lamp or discharge device, see especially
    subclass 112 where the lamp or discharge device has an envelope made of the
    material which is especially transparent to infrared ray energy and
    subclass 117 where the lamp or discharge device is provided with a light
    obscuring means such as an opaque coating on the envelope wall.

    Class 313 does not provide for the infrared generator in combination with a
    reflector, guard, support, separable casing, or jacket.  For such excluded
    subject matter and other infrared ray generators see Class 219, Electric
    Heating, subclass 553.

    XIX.METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR MANUFACTURING OR REPAIRING ELECTRIC LAMPS OR
    DISCHARGE DEVICES OR SALVAGING PARTS THEREOF

    Class 313 does not provide for the processes or apparatus used either to
    manufacture or repair electric lamps or discharge devices.  It should be
    noted, however, that Class 313 does provide in subclasses 174+ for electric
    lamp and discharge devices which are provided with a getter, a gas or vapor
    generating means, or pressure regulating means, see section XVI above.

    Class 445, Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device
    Manufacturing, is the generic place for a process or an apparatus for
    manufacturing an electric lamp, a discharge device, an electrode or another
    part thereof.  The search notes for Class 445 should be consulted as to the
    other classes and subclasses which provide for processes or apparatus used
    in manufacture an electric lamp, discharge device or a part thereof.
    Subclass 2 provides for a process which is limited to use in repairing or
    reconditioning a lamp or discharge device, or to use in salvaging one or
    more parts of a lamp or discharge device.  Subclass 61 provides for the
    corresponding apparatus.

    XX.     SYSTEMS, APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR TESTING ELECTRIC LAMPS AND
    DISCHARGE DEVICES

    Class 315, Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 364+ is
    the generic place for testing electric lamps or discharge devices.

    XXI.RELATIONSHIP OF CLASSES 313 to 445, Electric Lamp or Space Discharge
    Component or Device Manufacturing

    In view of the statements in the above sections, the relationship between
    the classes and subclasses mentioned can be shown in schedule form thusly:

    313     Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices

    314     Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Consumable Electrodes

    315     Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems

    445     Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing

    XXII.DISTINCTION BETWEEN DISCHARGE DEVICES AND ELECTRIC SWITCHES

    Some types of electric switches are closely analogous in structure to some
    types of discharge devices.  This is especially true with respect to the
    type of discharge device where the electrodes of the discharge device are
    placed in contact and then separated from each other to establish the
    discharge.  Some types of switches include means, such as electromagnets,
    to extinguish the arc between the switch contacts when the switch is
    opened.  Some types of discharge devices include means, such as
    electromagnets, to defect or otherwise alter the characteristics of the
    discharge between the electrodes.

    The distinction between electric switches and discharge devices, therefore,
    depends in some cases principally upon the disclosed purpose of the
    structure claimed by the patent.  Where the discharge is only an incident
    to the separating of the switch contacts and the purpose of the structure
    is to open or close a circuit, the device will be considered an electric
    switch for the purpose of classification.  When the electrodes are placed
    in physical contact to close the circuit, and separated from each other to
    interrupt the circuit, the device will be classified as a switch. Where the
    purpose of the claimed structure is to establish a space discharge by
    contacting the electrodes with each other and then separating the
    electrodes, the device is considered to be a discharge device for Class 313.

    Excluded from Class 313 are devices which are designed normally to have a
    discharge between the electrodes and which include means operative after
    either prolonged use or overload to establish a short-circuit path from one
    of the electrodes to the other electrode so as to extinguish the space
    discharge.  See section III, 3, relative to lightning arresters of this
    type.

    For switches which are somewhat analogous in structure to space discharge
    devices, see Class 200, Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass
    144 where the switch is provided with means to separate the switch contacts
    from each other to open the circuit, the switch structure including means
    to extinguish the space discharge formed when the switch contacts are
    opened.

    XXIII.DISTINCTION BETWEEN DISCHARGE DEVICES AND ELECTRIC CONDENSERS AND
    OTHER STATIC FIELD PRODUCING MEANS

    Some types of space discharge devices are closely analogous in structure to
    some types of electric condensers and other static field producing devices.
     In these cases the device usually consists of two electrodes separated by
    air, gas, vapor or vacuum and are designed to have an electric potential
    impressed thereon.  Where the device is intended to have a current flow
    between the electrodes either by ionization or by electron flow, the device
    is considered to be a space discharge device for Class 313.  However, if
    the device is designed for use without ionization between the electrodes or
    without transmitting current by electron flow then the device will be
    excluded from Class 313 and found in the other appropriate class.

    Most devices other than the electric condensers of the type referred to
    above which are excluded from Class 313 are devices for treating materials
    such as ozonizers, electrical precipitators, disinfecting and sterilizing
    apparatus.

    The Classification of such devices is referred to in section VI, above.

    See Class 361, Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses
    271+ for electric condensers, per se.

    XXIV.  RELATED ART

    Class 338, Electrical Resistors, appropriate subclasses, for electrical
    resistors, per se.  Some of the resistance elements in Class 338 are
    somewhat analogous to the filaments used in electric lamps and space
    discharge devices.  Note that subclasses 500+ in Class 252 provides for
    electrically conductive or emissive compositions which include resistance
    defined solely by their composition.

    Class 431, Combustion, subclasses 358+ for flash lamps in which a solid
    fuel is burned and which have electric igniting means for initiating
    combustion of the fuel, e.g., "photoflash bulbs".  The distinction between
    a photoflash bulb found in Class 431, Combustion, subclasses 358+ and an
    electric lamp is that in the photoflash bulb there is a solid fuel usually
    aluminum or magnesium foil and an electric filament for igniting the foil
    so that the foil burns and the light is due to the combustion of the foil.
    In other types of photoflash bulbs the filament is made of a material which
    burns and the light is due to the combustion of the filament.  In an
    incandescent electric lamp the light is due only to the heat generated by
    the current passing through the filament and the filament is not intended
    to be burned.  The lamp ordinarily is provided with a noncombustible gas or
    a vacuum to prevent combustion of the filament while the devices in Class
    431 are provided with an atmosphere of combustible gas.

    INDEX TO CLASSES REFERRED TO IN THE PREVIOUS SECTIONS

                            Section No.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical

    Processes, Compositions

    for Use Therein,

    Consolidated Metal

    Powder Compositions

    and Loose Metal

    Particulate Mixtures,

    subs. 228+, Metal

    stock (e.g.,

    filaments and wire)

    composed of an

    alloy.          XIV,2

    116,    Signals and

    Indicators,

    subs. 216+,

    Envelopes with

    identifying

    indicating mark.        XII,3

    174,    Electricity:

    Conductors and

    Insulators,

    generic class for boxes,

    casings, jackets

    and envelope with

    lead-in conductors

    or means to

    couple conductors

    to the box,

    casing or jacket        XII,2

    Generic class

    for electrical

    device combined

    with casing,

    jacket or shield        IX

    Lamp and discharge

    device envelopes

    with electrical

    connector structure     XI,2

    Boxes and housings

    (e.g., envelopes and

    casings for lamp and

    discharge devices)

    with electric

    connector               XI,1,2

    subs. 15+,

    Housings,

    casings, or

    envelopes for

    electrical devices

    (e.g., lamp or

    discharge devices)

    with means for

    modifying the

    temperature of the

    device          VIII,1 and 2

    sub. 17, Boxes

    and housings with

    electric connector      XI,2

    sub. 17.08,

    Hermetically sealed

    envelope  with

    electric connector      XI,2

    sub. 35,

    Miscellaneous

    electrical shields      IX

    subs. 50+,

    Miscellaneous boxes

    and housings for

    electrical devices      X

    sub. 50, Boxes

    and housings with

    electric connector      XI,2

    sub. 50.5,

    Hermetically sealed

    envelopes with lead-

    in conductors   XII,2

    sub. 50.51,

    Hermetically sealed

    envelope with

    separable casing or

    jacket          IX

    subs. 50.52+,

    Hermetically sealed

    envelope with

    electrical

    connector               XI,2

    subs. 140+, Line

    insulators with

    arcing device   III,2

    sub. 144, Arcing

    device, per se,

    for line insulators     II,2

    sub. 151,

    Insulators for

    passing conductors

    through walls or

    plates          XIII

    sub. 152, Electri-

    cal bushings    XIII

    188,    Brakes,

    subs. 378+ and 381 for,

    vibration dampening

    device for lamps and

    discharge devices       IX

    200,    Electricity:

    Circuit Makers

    and Breakers,

    Switches distinguished

    from discharge

    devices         XXII

    sub. 144, Switches

    with arc

    extinguishing

    means           XII

    219,    Electric

    Heating,

    subs. 45, 407 and 521

    Electric lamps for heating

    materials               III,5;IX

    220,    Receptacles

    Generic class

    for boxes, casings,

    jackets and

    containers      IX

    subs. 2.1+,

    Casings, jackets

    and envelopes for

    electric lamps and

    discharge devices       X;XII,1 and 5

    250,    Radiant Energy,

    subs. 200+, Photo-

    electric

    controlled systems      IV

    subs. 216+,

    Photocells with

    separable

    optical means   X

    sub. 238, For

    photocells with

    temperature

    modifying means III,1

    sub. 239,

    Photocells with

    a casing

    or housing      IX; XII,5

    subs. 281+,

    Mass spectrometers

    for the

    separation

    or analysis of

    materials               III,6;VI

    sub. 311,

    Electron

    microscopes     III,7

    subs. 336.1+,

    Systems for

    utilizing a

    space detecting

    or measuring

    invisible ray

    energy          IV

    subs. 324+, 432+,

    453.1+, and

    492.1 Methods and

    for apparatus

    subjecting

    objects and

    materials       to electrons,

    ions, arcs and

    sparks          VI

    Methods and

    apparatus for

    treating objects

    and materials

    with ray energy

    subs. 423+, 453.1+,

    Invisible ray

    generators combined

    with a support  VII

    subs.  483.1+,

    Fluorescent and

    phosphorescent

    screens         XV

    subs. 493.1+,

    Invisible ray

    generator       combined

    with a separable

    casing and

    having temperature

    modifying means VIII,1

    Ultraviolet ray

    generators combined

    with a support  VII

    Ultraviolet ray

    generators with

    separable casing

    or jacket               IX

    Ultraviolet ray

    generator combined

    with a separable

    casing and having

    temperature modifying

    means           VIII,1

    Invisible ray

    generators with

    separable casing

    or jacket               IX

    subs. 503.1+,

    Invisible ray

    generators with

    optical device  X

    Invisible ray

    generator with

    separable ray

    filter                  X

    subs. 522.1+,

    Casing and jackets

    limited to

    use with invisible

    ray generators  XII,5

    252,    Compositions,

    sub. 181.1,

    Getter and

    gas or vapor

    generating

    compositions    XVI

    subs. 301.16-301.6

    Phosphorescent and

    fluorescent

    materials               XIV;XV

    subs. 500+,

    Electrically

    conductive

    and emissive

    compositions    XIV,2; XXIV

    279,    Chucks or Sockets,

    (e.g., electrical

    connectors)     XI,3

    314,    Electric Lamp

    and Discharge

    Devices: Consumable

    Electrodes,

    (e.g., arc

    lamps with means

    for feeding the

    electrodes)

    Systems         III,9;XXI;IV

    subs. 26+,

    Consumable electrode

    discharge device,

    with temperature

    modifying means

    sub. 60, Consump-

    tion feed type

    electrodes      XIV

    315,    Electric Lamp

    and Discharge

    Devices:  Systems       XXI

    subs. 1-11, 12.1,

    13.1-17 and 364-410,

    Systems of supply

    for cathode-ray

    tubes           IV

    subs. 3+, Cathode-

    ray tubes

    structure

    combined with a

    circuit element III,10;IV

    subs. 32+, Electric

    lamps and

    discharge devices

    structurally combined

    with a circuit

    element         III,10;IV

    subs. 32+, Lightning

    arrestor  structurally

    combined with a

    discharge device        III,3

    subs. 46+, Discharge

    devices having

    a lamp filament or

    heating resistance

    in shunt with the

    electrodes      III,11 and 12

    sub. 49, Discharge

    devices having

    a lamp filament

    or heating resistance

    in series with the

    discharge elec-

    trodes          III,11 and 12

    subs. 76-363,

    Systems of supply

    for electric lamps

    and gas or

    vapor type

    discharge devices       IV

    subs. 364+, Testing

    electric

    lamps or

    discharge devices       XX

    331,    Oscillators

    sub. 5, Magnetron

    oscillator with

    automatic frequency

    stabilization   IV

    subs. 6+, Klystron

    oscillator with

    automatic frequency

    stabilization   IV

    sub. 78, Electric

    noise generators

    using gas tubes IV

    subs. 79+, Beam

    tube oscillators        IV

    sub. 98, Oscillators

    using disk seal

    tube                    IV

    subs. 126+, Oscil-

    lator using gaseous

    space discharge

    device          V

    sub. 184, Oscil-

    lator using unique

    space discharge

    device          IV

    335,    Electricity:

    Magnetically

    Operated

    Switches,

    Magnets, and

    Electromagnets,

    subs. 210+,

    for electromagnets

    for focusing and

    deflecting              XVII

    338,    Electrical

    Resistors               XXIV

    347,    Incremental

    Printing

    of Symbolic

    Information,

    subs. 121+

    and 226+                III,8

    361,    Electricity:

    Electrical Systems

    and Devices

    subs. 117+,

    lightning arrester      III,3

    subs. 271+,

    condensers

    distinguished

    from discharge

    devices         XXIII

    362,    Illumination

    Lamps combined

    with a support  VII

    Lamps combined with

    a separable casing

    or jacket and having

    temperature modifying

    means           VIII,

    Lamps combined

    with a separable

    casing, jacket,

    shield or enclosure     IX

    Lamps with separable

    optical devices,

    light shade, light

    obscuring means,

    lamp protector

    or other illuminating

    devices         X

    sub. 84, Illuminating

    devices with a

    fluorescent or

    phosphorescent

    material                XV

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma

    Ray Systems or

    Devices         VI

    subs. 91+,

    Electronic

    circuits                IV

    subs. 119+,

    Sources         III,VII

    subs. 193+,

    Source supports IX

    417,    Pumps,

    subs. 48+

    for pumps

    utilizing a

    space discharge

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic
    Compounds,

    subs. 445+,

    carbon, per se  XIV,2

    427,    Coating Processes

    subs. 58+       XIV,2

    subs. 64+,      XV

    428,    Stock Material or

    Miscellaneous Articles,

    subs. 34.1+, Hollow

    Articles (e.g., lamp

    bulbs) with a

    coating thereon XII,4

    subs. 426+,

    Laminated glass

    structure               XII,4

    sub. 913 and  917,

    Phosphorescent,

    fluorescent and

    electroluminescent      XII,4

    subs. 375+, Coated

    conductors or

    conductors or

    emitters or electrodes

    with emissive

    coatings thereon        XIV,2

    439     Electrical

    Connectors
    Device with
    separable
    electrical
    connector               XI,1
    Device with
    electrical
    connector               XI,2
    Electrode with
    connector
    structure               XI,3
    Electrode and
    shield with
    joint between
    parts           XIV,1
    subs. 607+,
    Connector with
    anti-inductive shield   XI,3
    subs. 611+,
    Connector having
    vitreous envelope
    secured thereto XI,2

    431,    Combustion

    subs. 358+,

    "photo-flash

    bulbs".         XXIV

    445,    Electric Lamp or

    Space Discharge

    Component or

    Device

    Manufacturing   XIX,XXI

    subs. 35+, Methods

    of Manufacturing

    Electrodes      XIV

    subs. 46+, Methods

    of Manufacturing

    Electrodes      XIV 3

    501,    Compositions:
    Ceramic,
    subs. 11+
    for glass
    compositions,
    per se.         VII


CLS 313/1
TXT Subject matter under class definition wherein the plurality of electric
    lamps or discharge devices or an electric lamp and a discharge device are
    structurally combined in a single device to form a single unitary device.

    (1)     Note.  This or the indented subclasses do not include the following
    subject matter even though such subject matter is within the subclass
    definition.

    a.      An incandescent lamp having a plurality of filaments or glowers all
    within the same envelope is not included in this or the indented subclasses
    but will be found in subclass 316 below, or in one of the subclasses
    specified in the search notes of that subclass.

    b.      Structural combinations of an incandescent lamp and a discharge
    device where the filament of the lamp is connected in shunt with the
    discharge electrodes of the discharge device.  See Class 315, Electric Lamp
    and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclasses 46+ for this subject matter.

    c.      Structural combinations of an incandescent lamp and a discharge
    device where the lamp filament is connected in series with the discharge
    electrodes of the discharge device.  See Class 315, Electric Lamp and
    Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclass 49 for this subject matter.

    d.      Structural combinations consisting of a firing gap of a spark plug,
    and an intensifier gap connected in series therewith, see subclasses 123+
    for this subject matter.

    (2)     Note.  In many of the devices in this and the indented subclasses
    the plurality of devices are enclosed within the same envelope.

    (3)     Note.  Where the subject matter includes a plurality of discharge
    devices which are structurally combined, to be classified in this or the
    indented subclasses there must not be a common electrode for the plurality
    of discharge devices.  For example, discharge devices having a single
    cathode and a plurality of anodes which cooperate with the single cathode
    are excluded from this and the indented subclasses even though the
    disclosure states that the device may be used in place of a plurality of
    discharge device.  Included in this and the indented subclasses are
    structural combinations of plural discharge devices and lamps or a
    discharge device and a lamp where there is an interelectrode connection
    between the electrodes of the different devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306,    and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto for discharge
    devices which are provided with a plurality of anodes and/or cathodes.
    Included in subclasses 306+ are space discharge devices having a plurality
    of similar gaps connected in series, such as for example, a row of spaced
    sphere electrodes in which a discharge takes place along the length of the
    row.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclasses 7+, for the combination of a consumable electrode discharge
    device (e.g., an arc lamp or similar device having means for feeding the
    electrodes together as they are consumed) and another type of discharge
    device or electric lamp.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 3+, 32,
    35+, and 64+ for the structural combination of a plurality of discharge
    devices, or lamps, or a discharge device and a lamp where the structural
    combination includes a circuit element (e.g., switch, impedance, etc.), see
    subclasses 3+ where one of the devices is a cathode-ray tube, subclass 32
    where the combination includes a lamp and a discharge device, subclasses
    35+ where the combination includes a plurality of discharge devices, and
    subclasses 64+ where the combination includes a plurality of lamp filaments
    (multifilament lamps).  In the devices in Class 315, the circuit element
    may be connected between electrodes of different ones of the combined
    devices, or to an electrode of one of the devices, or not connected to any
    of the combined devices but be merely mounted in the envelope, base or
    other part of the unitary device.  For the structural combinations of
    incandescent lamps and discharge devices connected in circuit relation,
    which are classified in Class 315, see (1) Note, parts b and c, above.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 9, 92 and 193+
    for plural source systems or devices.


CLS 313/2.1
TXT Cathode-ray tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 in which one of the devices is a
    cathode-ray generating device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 3+ for
    devices which include the structural combination of a plurality of
    cathode-ray tubes and which have a circuit element (e.g., switch,
    inductance, condensers, resistances, etc.) structurally combined therewith.
     See especially subclasses 5.14+ for cathode-ray tube circuits wherein a
    plurality of rays pass through or in a hollow distributed parameter device,
    such as a wave guide, cavity resonator, or coaxial line; and subclasses
    5.16+, 5.27, 5.28, and 5.39+ for cathode-ray tube system including a
    plurality of hollow distributed parameter devices having a cathode ray
    passing through or in.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    364+,   for cathode ray devices, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 9 for
    systems for supplying electric current and/or potential to a plurality of
    cathode-ray tubes.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclass 92 for the
    structural combination of a plurality of X-ray tubes and a circuit element
    which is combined therewith.


CLS 313/3
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 in which one electrode of one of the
    devices is electrically connected to an electrode of another of the devices.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass and class are structural
    combinations of a discharge device and an incandescent lamp where the lamp
    filament is connected either in series or in shunt relation with the
    discharge electrodes. The excluded devices will be found in Class 315,
    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclasses 46+ where the
    filament is connected in shunt relation to the discharge electrodes and in
    subclass 49 where the filament is connected in series relation with the
    discharge electrodes.

    (2)     Note.  If the connection between the electrodes includes a circuit
    element such as a resistor, capacitor, inductance, switch, or the like the
    combination is not classified in this class but in Class 315.  The devices
    in this subclass have a conductive connection but no more.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, (see (1) Note) above,
    and subclasses 3+, 32+, 35+, 64+ for the structural combination of a
    plurality of discharge devices, or lamps, or a discharge device and a lamp
    where the structural combination includes a circuit element (e.g., switch,
    impedance, etc.), connected between electrodes of different ones of such
    devices.  See the notes to subclass 1 for the subclasses which provide for
    the different types of devices.


CLS 313/5
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 in which one of the structurally combined
    devices is a discharge device with a control electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    308,    and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto for other
    discharge devices which are provided with a control electrode.


CLS 313/6
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5 which includes a plurality of discharge
    devices each having a control electrode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 3+ and 35+
    where the structural combination also includes a circuit element (e.g.,
    switch, impedance, etc.), see subclasses 3+ where the devices are
    cathode-ray tubes and subclasses 35+ for other plural discharge devices.


CLS 313/7
TXT Subject matter under the class definition where the lamp or discharge
    device is provided with an envelope and has an evacuating pump connected to
    the envelope for evacuating the envelope.

    (1)     Note.  In the devices in this subclass the evacuating pump is
    designed for connection to the lamp or discharge device during the use of
    the lamp or discharge device.  Where the arrangement is only for use during
    the manufacturing of the lamp or discharge device see the reference to
    Class 226 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    549+,   for devices under the class definition provided with envelopes and
    having a getter, a gas or vapor generating means or a pressure regulating
    means associated therewith.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 79+ and 403+ for methods of and
    apparatus for gas filling and/or evacuating receptacles combined with
    closing including lamps and discharge devices, and see the Notes to
    subclass 403 for the disposition of related art.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 4, 8 and 65+ for methods of and apparatus for inducing a gas or
    vapor into or evacuating the envelope of an electric lamp or space
    discharge device.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 108+ for
    electric lamp or a gas or vapor type discharge device systems where the
    lamp or discharge device is provided with means for regulating the pressure
    within the envelope of the device and the system includes means to supply
    electrical energy to the lamp or discharge device or to control the
    pressure regulating means.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclass 123 for X-ray tube
    systems where the X-ray tube is provided with means for controlling the
    pressure within the envelope of the tube.

    417,    Pumps, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous evacuating pumps.


CLS 313/8
TXT Discharge devices under the class definition which have a body other than
    an electrode, placed adjacent to the discharge space and which is designed
    to be heated to incandescence by the space discharge.

    (1)     Note.  The body which is designed to be heated to incandescence is
    not designed to be connected into the circuit in any way but is only a
    light emitting body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305,    and the subclasses specified in the notes to the definitions of
    that subclass for discharge devices which have an electrode designed to be
    heated by the discharge, including devices having cathanodes.


CLS 313/9
TXT Devices within the class definition having a filament and an additional
    body other than an electrode designed to be heated to incandescence by the
    filament.

    (1)     Note.  The body designed to be heated to incandescence is not
    designed to be connected in the circuit in anyway but is designed only to
    be a light emitting body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for pyroelectric type electric lamps which include a body designed
    to be heated from a separate source such as an electric filament.  The body
    being a second class conductor and being connected in the circuit so that
    when heated it will conduct electric current and be heated by the current
    flowing through it.

    305+,   and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto for discharge
    devices which have an electrode which is designed to be heated to
    incandescence by the electric space discharge between the cathode and the
    electrode.


CLS 313/10
TXT Subject matter under the class definition where the lamp or discharge
    device is provided with means to indicate the temperature of some part of
    the device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 100+ for temperature
    measurement, per se.


CLS 313/11
TXT Subject matter under the class definition where a lamp, discharge device or
    an electrode therefor is provided with means or is combined with means for
    modifying the temperature of the device, the electrode, or some other part
    thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Neither this nor any of the indented subclasses provide for
    electric lamps including those of the discharge device type, photosensitive
    discharge devices nor generators of invisible radiation such as X-ray
    tubes, ultraviolet ray generators in combination with a separable casing
    for the lamp or device which is provided with means for modifying the
    temperature of the lamp or device.  See section VIII of the class
    definition for the classes which provide for the excluded subject matter.

    (2)     Note.  Indented subclass 26 provides for discharge devices and
    lamps which are provided with an envelope formed of two spaced apart
    integral walls, the space between the walls being evacuated, gas filled, or
    otherwise containing means to modify the temperature of the lamp or
    discharge device.  See sections VIII,1, and XII of the class definition for
    the classification of double wall envelopes, per se.

    (3)     Note.  Discharge devices and lamps provided only with directly
    heated filaments, indirectly heated cathodes or other types of thermionic
    cathodes, are not included in this or the indented subclasses. This and the
    indented subclasses provide only for lamps and discharge devices which have
    means in addition to the filament or cathode for modifying the temperature
    of the lamp or discharge device.  Note that discharge devices having liquid
    electrodes (e.g., mercury vapor device) and electric heaters therefor are
    in subclass 16 and discharge devices having liquid electrodes and other
    types of temperature modifiers for the liquid electrode are in subclass 29.

    (4)     Note.  See section VIII of the class definition for other classes
    which provide for the miscellaneous heat transfer apparatus such as
    envelopes and casings for lamps or discharge devices with temperature
    modifying means.

    (5)     Note.  Discharge devices and lamps having a movable electrode
    actuated by a thermally responsive means such as a thermostat, with or
    without a heating means for the thermally actuated moving means, are not
    classified in this and indented subclasses, but are found in subclass 151.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclasses 26+ for consumable electrode discharge devices provided with
    temperature modifying means and the electrical systems therefor.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 50 for
    electric lamps and discharge devices which are provided with means for
    modifying the temperature of at least part of the lamp or discharge device,
    the temperature modifying means being either combined with or forming an
    electrical impedance element.  In subclass 50, of Class 315 will be found,
    for example, discharge devices which are provided with means to conduct a
    cooling fluid to the discharge device where the conduits for conducting the
    cooling fluid are arranged to form a high resistance path between a
    discharge device and the source of cooling fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151,    see (5) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes, see the
    reference to Class 314 above.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 112+ and
    the subclasses specified in the notes to those subclasses for electric lamp
    and discharge device systems wherein the lamp or discharge device is
    provided with means for modifying its temperature and the system includes
    means to supply current to the lamp or discharge device or to control the
    temperature modifying means.  See the reference to Class 315, subclass 50
    above.


CLS 313/11.5
TXT Unitary devices under subclass 11 known as spark plugs.

    (1)     Note.  See section I, Definitions of Terms Used in the Class, of
    the class definition, for a definition of spark plugs.  In general, the
    spark plugs classified herein are the jump-spark type found in the gasoline
    engine of an automobile.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains patents relating to spark plugs where
    the temperature modification of some part of the plug is material.  If the
    plug is provided with gaskets or joints are of high or low heat
    conductivity, the patent would be included.  A plug having gaskets or
    joints formed of particular materials would be classified in subclasses
    144+ if it was not stated the materials were selected for their temperature
    modification properties.

    (3)     Note.  Preheating of the gas charge (before the spark jumps) by
    heat left in the spark plug from a previous explosion stroke cycle is not
    basis for classification in this subclass unless such preheating is
    accomplished by means which are especially provided to alter the
    temperature of the spark plug.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for spark plugs having means to feed a fluid, such as priming fluid
    or air, where there is no disclosure that the temperature of the spark plug
    is affected by the fluid feed.

    126,    for spark plugs having means to move an electrode in response to a
    thermal change and having no means to influence the thermal characteristics
    of the spark plug.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 15.3 and 152
    for spark plug type electrical bushings (a spark plug with no sparking
    electrodes claimed) having temperature modifying means.  See subclass 15.3
    where the bushing is combined with means for feeding, circulating or
    distributing a temperature modifying fluid.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 190+ and 485+ for an electrical
    connector, including the spark plug type, with temperature modifying means.


CLS 313/12
TXT Subject matter under subclass 11 in which the temperature modifying means
    includes a closed path for circulating the temperature modifying means from
    the lamp or discharge device to a heat exchange means and then back to the
    lamp or discharge device to again modify the temperature of the lamp or
    discharge device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 104.11+ recirculating heat exchange
    system of general application.


CLS 313/13
TXT Subject matter under subclass 11 in which a control means is provided for
    controlling the operation of the temperature modifying means.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are discharge devices in casings
    provided with apertures which are controlled by thermostatic means so as to
    regulate the amount of cooling air which flows over the discharge device.
    If the thermostatic means controls an electric circuit which in turn
    controls an electric circuit which in turn controls electrical means for
    controlling the apertures, the patent is excluded from this class and will
    be found in Class 315.  See the reference to class 315 below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 279+ for miscellaneous heat exchange
    apparatus provided with automatic control means.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, appropriate
    subclasses for automatic temperature regulation, per se.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 117 and the
    subclasses specified in the notes thereto for discharge devices and lamps
    which are provided with temperature modifying means and which include
    electrical circuit means for controlling the operation of the temperature
    modifying means.


CLS 313/14
TXT Subject matter under subclass 11 having a glower formed of a second class
    conductor designed for connection into an electrical circuit, and having
    means for heating the glower to render it conductive.

    (1)     Note.  The devices in this subclass are mostly pyroelectric lamps.

    (2)     Note.  See "Definitions of Terms Used in this Class" in the class
    definition for a definition of second class conductor, glower, pyroelectric
    lamps.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for devices under class definition which include a filament and a
    body not designed to be connected into an electrical circuit which is
    heated to incandescence by the filament.

    326+,   for the structure of pyroelectric glowers, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 500+ for pyroelectric glower compositions.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 115+ for
    pyroelectric lamp systems having an electric heater for the glower and
    circuit means for controlling or supplying electric current to the glower
    or the heater element, and subclass 359 for miscellaneous systems for
    supplying electric current to pyroelectric lamps.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 25+ for electrical resistors whose
    resistance value is responsive to a change in ambient temperature.


CLS 313/15
TXT Subject matter under subclass 11 in which the temperature modifier is an
    electric heater.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include lamps or discharge devices
    where the only heating means for the lamp or discharge device is a light
    emitting filament, a directly heated or indirectly heated cathode or other
    thermionic cathode or where the heating means is a means for heating a gas
    or vapor generating material (e.g., a getter).  See subclasses 549+ for the
    discharge devices and lamps with electric heating means for a gas or vapor
    generating material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     where the lamp is a pyroelectric lamp and is provided with an
    electric heater to heat the glower.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 115+ for
    electric lamp and discharge device systems where the lamp or discharge
    device is provided with an electrical heater to modify the temperature of
    the lamp or discharge device and the system includes means to control or
    supply current to the heater or the lamp or discharge device.


CLS 313/16
TXT Subject matter under subclass 15 in which the lamp or discharge device is
    provided with a liquid electrode and the electric heater is provided to
    heat the liquid electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     for other devices under subclass 11 having liquid electrode and
    having temperature modifying means for the liquid electrode.

    163+,   for other liquid electrode discharge devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 115+ for
    lamp and discharge device systems where the lamp or discharge device is
    provided with a liquid electrode and an electric heater therefor, the
    system including means to control or to supply current to the heater or to
    the lamp or discharge device.


CLS 313/17
TXT Subject matter under subclass 11 in which a lamp or discharge device is
    provided with a an integral spaced double walled envelope, and discharge
    devices which are provided with envelopes and in which the means for
    modifying the temperature of the discharge device includes a jacket or
    casing which encloses the envelope of the device or a portion thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Neither this nor any of the indented subclasses provide for
    electric lamps including those of the discharge device type, photosensitive
    discharge devices nor generators of invisible radiation such as X-ray
    tubes, ultraviolet ray generators in combination with a separable casing
    for the lamp or device which is provided with means for modifying the
    temperature of the lamp or device.  See section VIII of the class
    definition for the classes which provide for the excluded subject matter.

    (2)     Note.  The double-walled envelopes specified above includes only
    walls which are spaced apart.  The double walled envelope may be provided
    with means for circulating a fluid between the spaced walls or the space
    between the walls may be evacuated, gas filled or filled with a heat
    insulating or transmitting material.  See sections VIII, 1 and XII of the
    class definition for the classification of double-wall envelopes, per se.

    (3)     Note.  The jacket or casing which encloses the discharge device or
    lamp must have its walls spaced from the envelope of the lamp or discharge
    device.  Where the device is provided with a sleeve with heat exchange
    means such as radiating fins which fit over and into contact with the
    envelope of the device, the device is excluded from this and the indented
    subclass and will be found in subclass 44 below.

    (4)     Note.  Included as separable casings and jackets are structures
    formed of coiled conduits which are designed to receive the discharge
    device and to transfer heat to or from the envelope of the discharge device.

    (5)     Note.  See section VIII, 1 of the class definition for other
    classes which provide for the miscellaneous heat transfer apparatus such as
    envelopes and casings for lamps or discharge devices which are provided
    with temperature modifying means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     see (3) Note, above.

    312,    and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto for devices under
    the class definition which are provided with an envelope and which have a
    casing or jacket for the envelope.

    324,    and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto for devices under
    the class definition which do not have an envelope but which have a casing
    or jacket for the device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 74 for a removable device to be heated or
    cooled projecting into a casing, and subclasses 154+ for coaxial enclosures.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 12.1+ for receptacles of glass or
    other ceramic or similar materials, of the bottle, jar, or jug type, which
    are encased in a protective casing or jacket or having spaced walls.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 2.1+ for miscellaneous envelopes, casings
    and jackets designed for use with electric lamps, discharge devices and
    similar devices and subclasses 415+ for miscellaneous receptacles having
    double walls where the inner and outer walls are spaced apart, with or
    without intervening packing or insulation.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclasses 26+ for discharge devices of the consumable electrode type
    (e.g., arc lamps) which are provided with means for modifying the
    temperature of a portion of the device, the temperature modifying means
    including a separable casing or jacket for a portion of the device.


CLS 313/18
TXT Subject matter under subclass 17 in which the envelope of the lamp or
    discharge device is provided with an integral double wall envelope made in
    whole or in part of electrically conductive material, and discharge devices
    which are provided with envelopes formed in whole or in part of
    electrically conductive material and in which the casing or jacket encloses
    the electrically conductive portion of the envelope or a portion thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for other lamps and discharge devices under subclass 11 which have
    a conductive envelope and which are provided with means for modifying the
    temperature of the envelope wall. Included in subclass 44 are discharge
    devices which are provided with a separable sleeve which fits about a
    portion of the envelope wall, the sleeve being provided with heat exchange
    means (e.g., radiating fins).

    246+,   for discharge devices which are provided with a conductive envelope
    portion (e.g., anode) and means to support one or more electrodes (e.g.,
    cathode, grid) within the conductive envelope portion usually by means of
    the closure for the conductive envelope portion.

    317+,   for devices under the class definition having envelopes or a part
    thereof made of conductive material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 2.3 for envelopes for discharge devices and
    lamps which are made in whole or in part of conductive material.


CLS 313/19
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 wherein the lamp or discharge device has a
    plurality of electrodes and means are provided for modifying the
    temperature of a plurality of the electrodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for other lamps and discharge devices which are provided with a
    plurality of electrodes, a double wall jacket or casing for the envelope
    and means for circulating a fluid within the double wall envelope, casing,
    or jacket to modify the temperature of a plurality of the electrodes.

    28,     for other lamps and discharge devices which are provided with a
    plurality of electrodes, a double wall envelope or a casing or jacket for
    the envelope and means for modifying the temperature of a plurality of the
    electrodes.


CLS 313/20
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 where the lamp or discharge device
    includes a temperature modifying baffle structure which extends across or
    into the envelope.

    (1)     Note.  In some of the devices in this subclass the baffle comprises
    a re-entrant portion of the envelope wall and the temperature modifying
    fluid may enter the re-entrant portion.  In other of the devices, a heat
    transfer device, such as a radiator member for containing a heat transfer
    fluid, is enclosed within the envelope of the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for other lamps and discharge devices which do not have an
    enclosing casing or jacket and which have an internal temperature modifying
    baffle.

    34,     for lamps and discharge devices which do not have an enclosing
    casing or jacket where the envelope is provided with a condensing chamber
    or surface.


CLS 313/21
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 in which the conductive envelope portion
    of the lamp or discharge device is cylindrical in form and is designed for
    use as one of the electrodes of the device.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the devices in this subclass are discharge devices
    such as are used as the transmitting tube in radio transmitting systems.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246+,   for discharge devices which are provided with a cylindrical
    conductive envelope portion (e.g., anode) and means to support one or more
    electrodes (e.g., cathode, grid) within the conductive envelope portion
    usually by means of the closure for the cylindrical envelope portion.

    317+,   and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto for other lamps
    and discharge devices under the class definition in which an electrode
    forms a portion of the envelope.


CLS 313/22
TXT Subject matter under subclass 17 in which the structure is designed so that
    a temperature modifying fluid may be circulated in the space between the
    envelope and the jacket or casing or between the walls of the double walled
    envelope.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18+,    where the envelope of the lamp or discharge device is made in whole
    or part of conductive material.

    36,     for discharge devices and lamps which are not provided with an
    envelope but which includes a jacket or casing for the discharge device or
    lamp or a part thereof, and means to apply a temperature modifying fluid to
    the lamp or discharge device.  Some of the devices in subclass 36 are
    open-air arc lamps with casing means around portions of the lamp to direct
    a cooling fluid into contact with a portion of the lamp.


CLS 313/23
TXT Subject matter under subclass 22 where the lamp or discharge device has a
    plurality of electrodes and means are provided for modifying the
    temperature of a plurality of the electrodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     where the lamp or discharge device is provided with an envelope
    which is made in whole or part of a conductive material.

    28,     for other lamps and discharge devices which are provided with a
    plurality of electrodes, a double wall envelope or a casing or jacket for
    the envelope and means for modifying the temperature of a plurality of the
    electrodes.


CLS 313/24
TXT Subject matter under subclass 22 having means (e.g., baffles) within the
    casing or jacket which encloses the envelope or between the walls of the
    double-walled envelope for directing the flow of the temperature modifying
    fluid as it flows through the casing, jacket or doubled envelope.


CLS 313/25
TXT Devices under subclass 17 in which the space between the double wall
    envelopes or between the envelope and the casing or jacket is sealed off
    from the atmosphere and from the space within the envelope of the lamp or
    discharge device.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes electric lamps whether of the
    discharge device type or not, photosensitive discharge devices, generators
    of invisible ray energy (e.g., X-ray tubes, ultraviolet lamps, etc.) only
    when the casing or jacket is integrally united with the envelope of the
    device.  See (1) Note to the definition of subclass 11 with respect to the
    classification of such subject matter where the casing or jacket is not
    integrally united.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for other discharge devices and lamps which are provided with a
    double wall envelope or which have a jacket or casing for the envelope of
    the device, the space between the envelope walls or between the casing or
    jacket and the envelope containing a heat conserving or heat insulating
    material.

    312,    and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto, for
    miscellaneous and discharge devices which are provided with an envelope and
    a casing or jacket for the envelope.

    317+,   for miscellaneous lamps and discharge devices which are provided
    with a double-wall envelope where the heat transmitting properties of the
    double wall envelope are not involved.


CLS 313/26
TXT Subject matter under subclass 25 in which the lamp or discharge device is
    provided with a double wall envelope, the envelope walls being formed as a
    unitary, integral body.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are lamps and discharge devices
    which are provided with a double-walled envelope or an envelope and a
    casing where the space between the double walls or between the envelope and
    casing is evacuated or filled with a gas or vapor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    317+,   for miscellaneous lamps and discharge devices which are provided
    with a double walled envelope where the heat transmitting properties of the
    double-wall envelope are not involved.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclass 13.1 for receptacles of the bottle or
    jar type made of glass or other ceramic or similar materials and having
    spaced walls, with the interwall space evacuated or filled with a gas or
    vapor for heat insulation purposes.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 2.1+ for double walled envelopes designed
    for use with lamps and discharge devices.


CLS 313/27
TXT Subject matter under subclass 17 in which the space between the casing or
    jacket which encloses the envelope or the space between the double-walled
    envelope, includes means for preventing the flow of heat to or from the
    device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25+,    where the space between the double walls or between the envelope
    and the casing or jacket is sealed off from the atmosphere and from the
    space within the envelope of the device.  The sealed off space may be
    evacuated or filled with a gas or vapor.  Note indented subclass 26 for
    discharge devices and lamps provided with an integral double-wall envelope.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclass 13.1 for receptacles of the bottle or
    jar type made of glass or other ceramic or similar material and having
    spaced walls with the interwall space containing a heat insulating means.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 2.1+ for double-walled envelopes designed
    for use for lamps and discharge devices, subclasses 415+ for miscellaneous
    receptacles having double-walls where the inner and outer walls are spaced
    apart and the intervening space contains a heat insulating material.


CLS 313/28
TXT Subject matter under subclass 17 where the lamp or discharge device is
    provided with a plurality of electrodes and means are provided for
    modifying the temperature of a plurality of the electrodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     where the envelope of the lamp or discharge device is made in whole
    or part of electrical conductive material.

    23,     where the structure includes means to circulate a fluid between the
    walls of a double walled envelope of a lamp or discharge device or between
    the envelope and the enclosing casing or jacket of a discharge device.


CLS 313/29
TXT Devices under subclass 11 having a liquid electrode and having means for
    modifying the temperature of the liquid electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     where the means for modifying the temperature of the liquid
    electrode is an electric heater.

    163+,   for liquid electrode discharge devices, per se.


CLS 313/30
TXT Devices under subclass 11 where the lamp or discharge device is provided
    with a hollow electrode or a hollow electrode lead conductor, means being
    provided to modify the temperature of the hollow portion of the electrode
    or the electrode lead.

    (1)     Note.  In many of the devices in this subclass a fluid is
    circulated into the hollow electrode or electrode lead. See indented
    subclasses 31 and 32 where the hollow electrode or lead constitutes a
    closed path so that fluid may be circulated through the electrode or lead.


CLS 313/31
TXT Devices under subclass 30 in which the electrode is in the form of a fluid
    conduit which is in the form of a coil.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 100-178 for pipe structure,
    per se.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for a heat exchanger, per se.


CLS 313/32
TXT Devices under subclass 30 in which the hollow electrode or lead is provided
    with a closed conduit designed for the passage of a temperature modifying
    fluid therethrough.

    (1)     Note.  In many of the devices in this subclass the electrode or
    lead is provided with two coaxial tubes one within the other and the fluid
    flows in one direction through the inner tube and in the opposite direction
    between the walls of the inner and outer tubes, but this subclass is not
    limited to such devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     where the electrode is in the form of a conduit which is in the
    form of a coil.

    35+,    and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto for devices under
    subclass 11 in which the temperature modifying means includes means for
    applying a temperature modifying fluid (e.g., a cooling fluid) to some part
    of the device, which part may be an electrode or lead.


CLS 313/33
TXT Devices under subclass 11 having an envelope and having a temperature
    modifying baffle entending across or into the interior of the envelope.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     where the envelope is made in whole or part of conductive material
    and has a double-wall or is enclosed within a casing or jacket.


CLS 313/34
TXT Devices under subclass 11 where the device is provided with an envelope,
    the envelope including a chamber having a surface which has a large heat
    dissipating surface for condensing vapors generated during the operation of
    the device.

    (1)     Note.  Most of the devices in this subclass are mercury vapor
    discharge devices and the condensing surface is designed to condense the
    mercury vapor into its liquid state.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass are all discharge devices where
    the envelope is provided with any portion such as an enlarged portion or a
    portion located in a place which remains relatively cool during the
    operation of the device, where the purpose of such portion is to condense
    vapors and to change the vapors to either their liquid or solid state.

    (3)     Note.  See section VIII (2) for the classification of envelopes
    designed for use with lamps and discharge devices which are provided with
    temperature modifying means.  See section XII of the class definition for
    the classification of envelopes, per se, designed for use with electric
    lamps and discharge devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17+,    where the device is provided with either a double-wall or a jacket
    or casing for the envelope.  Note especially indented subclass 20 where the
    device is provided with an internal temperature modifying baffle and
    subclasses 22+, where means are provided for circulating a fluid in contact
    with the envelope wall.

    33,     for devices within the definition of subclass 11 where the envelope
    of a device is provided with an internal temperature modifying baffle.

    35,     for discharge devices and lamps which are provided with envelopes
    with tubular passageways or conduits formed in the envelope and passing
    through the lamp near the filament or other heated portion of the device so
    that the conduit becomes hot and the heated air rises to draw cold air in
    at the bottom of the conduit.


CLS 313/35
TXT Subject matter under subclass 11 wherein the temperature of the discharge
    device or lamp is modified by applying a heat exchange liquid to the
    discharge device or lamp or where the structure includes means to direct
    the flow of the temperature modifying fluid.

    (1)     Note.  Subclasses 35+, includes discharge devices and lamps which
    do not have envelopes and which are provided with means for contacting a
    portion of the device with a heat exchange fluid or liquid.  The fluid or
    liquid containing means may be arranged so that the fluid or liquid may be
    circulated.  Also included are lamps and discharge devices with envelopes
    with tubular passage ways or conduits formed in the envelope and passing
    through the lamp near the filament, or other heated portion of the device
    so that the conduit becomes hot and the heated air rises to draw cold air
    in at the bottom of the conduit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     where the apparatus includes a recirculating system with a heat
    exchanger in it so that the temperature modifying fluid is circulated from
    the lamp or discharge device to the heat exchanger then back again to the
    lamp or discharge device.

    17+,    where the lamp or discharge device is provided either with a spaced
    double-walled envelope or with an envelope and a casing or jacket around
    the envelope, the structure including means to modify the temperature of
    the lamp or discharge device.  See especially subclasses 22+, where means
    are provided to circulate a temperature modifying fluid in the space
    between the double-walls of the envelope or between the envelope and the
    casing or jacket.

    29,     where the lamp or discharge device is provided with a liquid
    electrode.

    30+,    where the lamp or discharge device is provided with a hollow
    electrode or a hollow electrode lead conductor and means are provided to
    modify the temperature of the hollow portion of the electrode or electrode
    lead.

    33,     where lamp or discharge device is provided with an envelope and an
    internal temperature modifying baffle which extends across or into the
    envelope.

    34,     where the envelope is provided with either a condensing chamber or
    condensing surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclasses 26+ for discharge devices of the consumable electrode type
    (e.g., arc lamps) which are provided with means for directing the flow of a
    temperature modifying medium over a portion of the device. The flow
    directing means may include a casing or jacket for a portion of the device.
     See indented subclass 29 where the temperature of the device is modified
    by means of a heat exchange liquid.


CLS 313/36
TXT Devices under subclass 35 in which the means for applying the temperature
    modifying fluid includes a jacket or casing which surrounds at least a part
    of the lamp or discharge device or which is associated with the means for
    applying the temperature modifying fluid so as to direct the temperature
    modifying fluid upon some part of the lamp or discharge device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17+,    where the lamp or discharge device is provided either with a spaced
    double walled envelope or with an envelope that has a casing or jacket
    which surrounds at least a portion of the envelope.

    324,    for miscellaneous electric lamps and discharge devices which do not
    have envelopes but which are provided with casings and jackets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 74 for a removable device projecting into a
    chamber containing a heat exchanger fluid.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclasses 26+ for discharge devices of the consumable electrode type
    (e.g., arc lamps) which are provided with a jacket or casing for directing
    the flow of a temperature modifying medium over a portion of the device.


CLS 313/37
TXT Devices under subclass 11 which are provided with a filament, a directly
    heated cathode or an indirectly heated cathode and which include means to
    modify the temperature of the filament or cathode.

    (1)     Note.  The structure must include more than a filament, a directly
    heated cathode or an indirectly heated cathode.  For example, included in
    this and the indented subclass are devices in which a heat conserving
    shield is placed about the cathode to conserve the heat of the cathode and
    devices which have means to conduct heat from a portion of the cathode so
    as to reduce the temperature of the cathode portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39+,    for other devices under subclass 11 which are provided with a
    cathode which may be a thermionic cathode other than a directly or
    indirectly heated cathode and which includes means to modify the
    temperature of the cathode.

    337+,   for the structures of indirectly heated cathodes, per se.

    341+,   for the structure of filaments and directly heated cathodes.

    346,    for the structure of thermionic cathodes.


CLS 313/38
TXT Devices under subclass 37 in which the temperature modifying means is a
    hollow shield which surrounds at least a portion of the filament or heated
    cathode.


CLS 313/39
TXT Devices under subclass 11 which are provided with an envelope and an
    electrode within the envelope, heat transfer means being provided to modify
    the temperature of the electrode.

    (1)     Note.  The heat transfer means may be mounted upon or form a part
    of the electrode.  For example, an electrode may be formed with a heat
    indicating surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16      and 29, where the electrode is a liquid electrode.  See subclass 16
    where an electric heater is provided for the liquid electrode.

    23      and 28, where the device is either provided with a double spaced
    wall envelope or is provided with an envelope and a jacket or casing which
    surrounds at least a portion of the envelope and means are provided to
    modify the temperature of a plurality of electrodes within the envelope.
    See subclass 23, where the structure includes means to circulate a heat
    transfer fluid between the envelope walls or between the envelope and the
    casing or jacket.

    28,     see the reference to subclass 23 above.

    29,     see the reference to subclass 16 above.

    30+,    where the electrode or the electrode lead is hollow and means are
    provided to modify the temperature of the hollow portion of the electrode
    or lead.

    37+,    where the electrode which has its temperature modified is either a
    filament or a thermionic cathode.

    42,     for devices under subclass 11 which are provided with an envelope
    and an electrode lead-in conductor or an electrode support, the electrode
    lead-in or the electrode lead-in support having heat transfer means mounted
    thereon or including means to modify the flow of heat along the electrode
    lead-in or support.  Subclass 42 also provides for devices under subclass
    11, which are provided with an envelope and which have the heat transfer
    means mounted upon a lead-in wire exterior to the envelope of the device.

    43,     for devices under subclass 11 which are provided with an envelope
    and which have temperature modifying means to protect the lead-in-seal or
    the stem of the envelope from excessive temperatures.

    44,     for discharge devices under subclass 11 which have the envelope
    formed of conductive material, the conductive material being designed for
    use as an electrode, heat transfer means being arranged to modify the
    temperature of the conductive envelope wall.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 127+ for X-ray
    tubes provided with movable targets, usually rotatable, so that the
    temperature of the target may be maintained cool by moving the target and
    changing the area exposed to the electron beam during the operation of the
    device.


CLS 313/40
TXT Devices under subclass 39 in which the temperature modifier comprises a
    radiating surface adapted to transmit or receive radiant heat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for other devices under subclass 11 in which the temperature
    modifying means is a radiating surface adapted to transmit or receive
    radiant heat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 133 for a heat exchanger with a coated,
    roughened or polished surface, and subclasses 177+ for a tubular structure
    with heat transfer means.


CLS 313/41
TXT Devices under subclass 40 in which the radiating surface is either composed
    of a material or is coated with a material which is designed to readily
    radiate heat or in which the radiating surface is roughened to facilitate
    the radiation.


CLS 313/42
TXT Devices under subclass 11 which are provided with an envelope and electrode
    within the envelope and a lead-in conductor or electrode support for the
    electrode, the device having either a heat transfer means mounted upon the
    lead-in or electrode support or the lead-in or the electrode support
    including means to modify the flow of heat along the lead-in or support.

    (1)     Note.  The heat exchange means may be mounted upon the lead-in
    conductor exteriorly of the envelope.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30+,    where the electrode lead-in conductor is hollow (e.g., is provided
    with a conduit) and means are provided to modify the temperature of the
    hollow portion of the lead-in.

    39+,    for devices under subclass 11 which have a heat transfer means
    mounted upon or forming a part of an electrode within the envelope of the
    device.

    43,     for devices under subclass 11 which are provided with means to
    protect the lead-in-seal or stem of the envelope from excessive
    temperatures.


CLS 313/43
TXT Devices under subclass 11 in which the device is provided with an envelope
    and an electrode lead-in-seal or a stem and temperature modifying means are
    provided for protecting the lead-in-seal or the stem of the envelope from
    excessive temperatures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     where the device includes a heat transfer means mounted upon the
    lead-in conductor or electrode support or where the lead-in conductor or
    support is formed so as to modify the flow of heat along the lead-in
    conductor or support.


CLS 313/44
TXT Devices under subclass 11 which are provided with an envelope and where the
    temperature modifier is designed to modify the temperature of the envelope
    wall or some portion thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16      and 29, for devices which have a liquid electrode in contact with
    the envelope wall and which are provided with means to modify the
    temperature of the liquid electrode.  See subclass 16 where the temperature
    modifier is an electric heater.

    17+,    where the device is provided with a spaced double wall envelope or
    is provided with a casing or jacket for the envelope, the structure
    including means to modify the temperature of the envelope wall.

    29,     see the reference to subclass 16 above. 34, where the envelope is
    provided with a chamber or surface for condensing vapors generated within
    the envelope.

    35,     where the envelope wall has its temperature modified by using
    liquids or where the temperature modifying means includes means for
    directing the flow of the temperature modifying fluid.

    42,     where the device is provided with a temperature modifying means
    mounted on or forming a part of the lead-in conductor or electrode support
    so as to prevent the transmission of heat to the envelope from the
    electrodes.

    43,     where the envelope is provided with means for protecting the
    lead-in seal or stem of the envelope from excessive temperatures.


CLS 313/45
TXT Devices under subclass 11 in which the temperature modifier comprises a
    radiating surface adapted to transmit or receive radiant heat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40+,    where an electrode within an envelope  is provided with a radiating
    surface.


CLS 313/46
TXT Devices under subclass 11 in which the temperature modifier is a means for
    conducting heat.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are devices which have a portion
    made of a large size or of a special material so that the heat will be
    conducted from a place which it is desired to keep cool to a place where
    the heat will be dissipated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 177+ for a tubular structure with
    attached heat transmitter.


CLS 313/47
TXT Devices under subclass 11 which include means for preventing the flow of
    heat to or from the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25+     and 27, for devices under subclass 11 where the device is provided
    with a spaced double wall envelope, or where the device is provided with an
    envelope and a casing or jacket for the envelope, see subclasses 25+ where
    the space between the double walls or between the envelope and the casing
    or jacket is sealed and either evacuated or filled with a gas or vapor
    (e.g., for heat insulation), and see subclass 27 where the space between
    the double walls or between the envelope and casing contains other heat
    insulating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous receptacles
    provided with heat insulating means, see especially subclasses 2.1+ for
    envelopes and casings designed for use with lamps and discharge devices,
    and subclasses 400+ and 415+ for miscellaneous receptacles provided with
    linings.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 62 for miscellaneous heat insulating
    compositions.


CLS 313/48
TXT Devices within the class definition which are provided with a handle.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass excludes electric lamps including those of the
    discharge device type where the handle is separable from the electric lamp.
     For the excluded electric lamps, see Class 362, Illumination, appropriate
    subclasses, see especially subclasses 190+ for portable self contained
    illuminating devices which include a casing or handle for the lamp and
    means to supply the lamp with electricity (e.g., flashlights), subclasses
    399+, and subclasses 382+ for miscellaneous light supports including
    separable handles for electric lamps.

    (2)     Note.  Among the devices included in this subclass are spark gaps
    mounted on handles such as are used to ignite gas burners.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for devices under the class definition combined with a support or a
    detachable electrical connector for the device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclasses, for arc welding electrode
    holders in which a handle supports a single electrode.  Where the handle
    supports two or more electrodes and the device is not structurally limited
    to use in electric welding or heating, classification is in Class 313.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 33 for
    portable self contained devices which include a source of energy, a
    discharge device of the arc, spark, gas or vapor type (other than a lamp),
    and the system for connecting the source of energy to the discharge device.

    362,    Illumination, see (1) Note, above.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclass 88
    for electric lamps which are limited by claimed structure to use for
    therapeutic purposes which are provided with a handle and subclass 150 for
    discharge devices which are designed to transmit high frequency electric
    current into the human body which are provided with a handle. The devices
    in this subclass sometimes include an envelope with a confined gas or
    vapor, an electrode within the envelope  and a handle for the device, the
    human body being used as the other electrode in the use of the device.


CLS 313/49
TXT Subject matter under the class definition where the lamp or discharge
    device is provided with a support or has combined therewith a detachable
    electrical connector.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass excludes electric lamps including those of the
    discharge device type, generators of invisible rays (e.g., X-ray tubes,
    ultraviolet ray generators) in combination with a separable support for the
    device.  See section VII of the class definition for the excluded subject
    matter.

    (2)     Note.  See section XI of the class definition of this class (Class
    313) for the location of a distinct electrical connector and for line notes
    distinguishing this class and Class 439, Electrical Connectors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 138 for
    insulating supports for elongated tubular lamps. Also, see the reference to
    Class 248, subclass 50, below.

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous supports.  Note
    especially subclass 50 for supports designed to support elongated tubing
    such as gas or vapor lamps (see the reference to Class 174, above), and
    subclasses 500+ for the combination of a lamp or discharge device envelope
    and a support therefor (e.g., a socket) with where no electrical features
    are claimed.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 296+ for an electrical coupling
    part with coupling movement actuating means or retaining means in addition
    to the contact thereof; and subclasses 527+ for a connector having mounting
     or supporting means.  Class 439 includes the combination of a specific
    electrical connector with a broadly recited electric lamp.  See (2) above.


CLS 313/50
TXT Subject matter under subclass 49 in which a support is designed to reduce
    the transmission of vibrations from and/or to the supported lamp or
    discharge device and subject matter under subclass 49 in which the support
    is resilient.

    (1)     Note.  The support may be a detachable electric connector (e.g.,
    socket structure).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 378+ for devices having significant mass, which
    are attached to articles for damping the vibrations by inertia; and
    subclass 381 for devices damping vibrations by friction.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 560+ for resilient supports.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 306 and 390, for illuminating devices
    which include a resilient light support.


CLS 313/51
TXT Subject matter under subclass 49 in which the support is detachable and
    includes an electrical connector for the lamp or discharge device, and
    lamps and discharge device which have combined therewith a detachable
    electrical connector.

    (1)     Note.  See section VII of the class definition for the
    classification of lamps including discharge devices, lamps, generators of
    invisible ray energy (e.g., X-ray tubes, ultraviolet ray generators), in
    combination with a detachable support which may include an electrical
    connector for the device. See section XI of the class definition for the
    classification of detachable electrical connectors, per se, and the line
    between this class and Class 439, Electrical Connectors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 500+ for hold-down devices of general
    application.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 296+ especially subclasses 357+
    for the combination of an electrical connector with the envelope of a lamp,
    including a resilient finger for holding that device to a  mating
    electrical connector.


CLS 313/52
TXT Devices within the class definition which are convertible from one type of
    device to another type of device.

    (1)     Note.  Many discharge devices may be considered to be convertible
    from one type of discharge device to another type of discharge device
    simply by not using some of the electrodes of the discharge device.  For
    example the usual triode may be used as a half-way rectifier by not
    connecting the grid in any circuit.  In the device in this subclass some
    means must be provided which is limited to use in converting the device
    from one type of device to another type of device.  An example of the
    subject matter in this subclass is an incandescent lamp which has the lead
    wires coated with electron emissive material so that when the filament
    fails a glow discharge may take place between the coated lead wires thus
    converting the incandescent lamp to a discharge device type lamp.  Note
    that where the converting means is an electric switch or other circuit
    element such as an impedance, the device is excluded from this class and
    will be found in Class 315, subclasses 32+.  Also excluded from this
    subclass are incandescent lamps having plural filaments, such as a high
    resistance filament and a low resistance filament, which may be converted
    from one type of incandescent lamp to another merely by connecting one
    filament or the other in the circuit.

    (2)     Note.  See section III, 3 of the class definition for the
    classification of lightning arresters of the arc or spark type which are
    designed to have the electrodes brought into contact with each other upon
    prolonged use of the device thereby establishing a conductive path through
    the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for plural unit devices under the class definition, that is,
    devices which include in structural combination a plurality of discharge
    devices, a plurality of lamps other than mere multiple filament lamps, or a
    lamp and discharge device.

    236,    for devices under the class definition which are provided with a
    spare or extra electrode which is not used until one of the electrodes
    fails to operate properly when the spare or extra electrode is used to
    replace the defective electrode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, see (1) Note above.


CLS 313/53
TXT Discharge devices under the class definition in which a flame provides an
    ionized path for the discharge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 15+ for apparatus for smoke
    precipitation of the electrostatic type having electrodes between which the
    combustion products (e.g., smoke) are passed and which attract particles in
    the combustion products by means of electrostatic fields.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 594 for high tension ignition
    systems for internal combustion engines, which include a jump type spark
    gap igniter operating within a cylinder.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 247+ for
    electrical devices for igniting combustible material which include spark or
    arc electrodes and means to bring the electrodes into contact with the
    combustible material.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 25 for a burner control circuit utilizing the
    current rectifying effect of a flame and subclasses 78+ for a burner
    controlled by an electric control circuit that senses flame.


CLS 313/54
TXT Devices within the class definition which are provided with a radioactive
    material, the radioactive properties of the material being utilized in the
    operation of the device.

    (1)     Note.  In the patents in this subclass the radioactive property of
    the material must have some significance in the operation of the device.
    The mere use of a radioactive substance such as thorium on or in a cathode
    to render it electron emissive, the use of uranium stained glass, or other
    such uses of radioactive materials where the radioactive properties of the
    material are not involved in the operation of the device is not considered
    sufficient to cause classification of the device in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 381 and 382 for an invisible radiant
    energy responsive gas discharge device having a radioactive gas, a gas
    borne radioactive material or a radioactive source within the device to
    ionize the gas of the device.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 625+ for radioactive compositions, per se.


CLS 313/62
TXT Discharge devices under the class definition provided with magnetic means
    for confining the path of the particles of the space discharge into a
    circular path and having means for accelerating the particles tangentially
    of the circular path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153+,   for other devices under the class definition which have a magnetic
    device associated therewith.

    359.1+, for discharge devices including means to accelerate positive or
    negative ions.

    421+,   for cathode-ray tubes with means to deflect a beam of electrons.

    441+,   for cathode-ray tubes including means to accelerate a focus or beam
    of electrons.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclass 502 for a
    cyclotron.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    appropriate subclasses for nuclear reactions and nuclear reactors.


CLS 313/93
TXT Devices under the class definition which are provided with means responsive
    to invisible radiant energy other than ultraviolet rays or heat rays or
    radio waves, for altering the operation of the device.

    (1)     Note.  Such rays may be protons, alpha particles, X-rays, gamma
    rays, cosmic rays or similar ray energy.

    (2)     Note.  Many discharge devices having an envelope and a confined gas
    or vapor atmosphere may be used as Geiger-Mueller counter tubes.  This
    subclass is limited to devices which include some structure which is
    especially provided because the device is responsive to the invisible ray
    energy and to discharge devices which are claimed as being Geiger-Mueller
    counter tubes.  For other types of gas or vapor discharge devices see
    subclasses 182+, and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for devices within the class definition which include a radioactive
    material.

    103+,   for devices within the class definition having an electrode which
    is secondarily emissive, i.e., which emits secondary electrons when
    bombarded by primary electrons from another source.

    523+,   for photosensitive devices within the class definition. Especially
    see indented subclass 539 for those which are designed to be responsive to
    radiant energy, (ultraviolet or heat rays or visible light) of particular
    wave lengths.

    539,    see reference to subclasses 523+, above.

    567     see (2) note, above.


CLS 313/103
TXT Discharge devices under the class definition having a secondary emissive
    electrode.

    (1)     Note.  The devices in this subclass are also known as "electron
    multipliers".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    for devices under the class definition provided with means to
    prevent secondary emission from some part of the device.

    346,    and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto, for secondary
    emissive electrodes, per se.

    377,    387 and 399, for cathode-ray tubes with a secondary emissive
    electrode.

    532+,   where the discharge device includes a photosensitive electrode in
    addition to the secondary emissive electrode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 39.63 for
    discharge devices having an electrode formed so as to provide a structure
    having distributed inductance and capacitance and operable in a magnetic
    field (e.g., magnetrons), the discharge device being provided with a
    secondary emissive electrode.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 572+ for miscellaneous secondary emissive circuits.

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses  for demodulators or detectors
    generally with secondary emission.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 42 for amplifiers having a secondary emitter
    discharge device.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 89 for oscillator systems utilizing a
    magnetron type tube having a secondary electron emissive electrode, and
    subclass 133 for negative resistance oscillators utilizing a tube of the
    secondary electron emissive type.


CLS 313/104
TXT Discharge devices under subclass 103 having a plurality of secondarily
    emissive electrodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306+,   and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto for other
    discharge devices which have a plurality of cathodes.


CLS 313/105
TXT Discharge devices under subclass 104 having three or more secondarily
    emissive electrodes.


CLS 313/106
TXT Devices under the class definition provided with means to prevent the
    emission of secondary electrons from some part of the device.

    (1)     Note.  Discharge devices which have one or more control electrodes
    and in which the only means provided to suppress the secondary emissive is
    that one or more of the control electrodes may be used as a secondary
    emissive suppressing electrode are not included in this or the indented
    subclass but will be found in subclasses 293+, or one of the subclasses
    specified in the notes thereto.


CLS 313/107
TXT Devices under subclass 106 in which the secondary emission suppression is
    secured by the use of a nonelectron emissive material.

    (1)     Note.  In the devices in this subclass the part which is to be
    nonemissive may be made of a nonemissive material or coated with a
    nonemissive material.

    (2)     Note.  See section XIV of the class definition for the
    classification of electrodes where no structure of the electrode is
    involved other than composition of the materials used to form the
    electrodes, coated electrodes which involve no more structure than a base
    with one or more coatings thereon, and for the processes of making or
    coating electrodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    353,    for electrodes, per se, which are made of two or more portions or
    which have a coating upon a portion of the electrode, one portion of the
    electrode being a nondischarge sustaining portion.

    355,    and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto for coated
    electrodes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 500+, and the subclasses specified in the
    notes thereto for materials and compositions for discharge device
    electrodes.


CLS 313/107.5
TXT Discharge devices under the class definition provided with means between
    the cathode and anode to change the width of the electron stream between
    the anode and the cathode.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are discharge devices of the
    so-called "magic eye" type which have an annular anode coated with
    fluorescent material surrounding an emissive central cathode and a control
    electrode for varying the width of the discharge between the cathode and
    anode so that as the potential of the control electrode varies the width of
    the nonluminous portion of the anode varies.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    293+,   and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto, for other
    discharge devices which have a control grid or other apertured electrode
    interposed between the cathode and anode, see especially indented subclass
    299 where the discharge device is provided with a plurality of control
    electrodes with the apertures in the different electrodes in alignment
    (e.g., beam power type tubes).

    364+,   for cathode-ray tubes provided with means to focus the electrons
    into a restricted beam and with means for deflecting the beam over the
    surface of a target.  See especially indented subclasses 461+ where the
    target is a fluorescent or phosphorescent screen.

    483+,   for other discharge devices provided with fluorescent material.


CLS 313/110
TXT Devices under the class definition which have an optical device
    structurally combined with the device so that the optical device and the
    lamp or discharge device constitutes a single integral device and devices
    under the class definition which are provided with an envelope which is
    designed to be especially transparent to particular wave lengths of radiant
    energy.

    (1)     Note.  Optical devices as defined in the subclass definition
    include lenses, polarizers, reflectors, light diffusers, light valves,
    light obscuring means or any other means designed to alter the transmission
    of light rays in any manner.

    (2)     Note.  See section IX of the class definition for the
    classification of lamps and discharge devices which are combined with a
    separable casing, jacket, shield, or envelope protective means.  See
    section X of the class definition for the classification of lamps and
    discharge devices which are combined with a separable optical device.  See
    section XII of the class definition for the classification of envelopes,
    per se, for lamps and discharge devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359.1,  for discharge devices of the positive ion accelerator type which
    are provided with windows through which the positive lens may pass.

    420,    for cathode ray devices provided with electron permeable windows.

    461+,   for cathode-ray tubes provided with fluorescent or phosphorescent
    screens or targets.

    465,    for cathode ray devices provided with light valves.

    483+,   for devices having a fluorescent material as a part thereof.

    539,    for photosensitive devices provided with means for transmitting
    particular portions of the light spectrum to the photosensitive element of
    the device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    642+ for lenses.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 351+ for antiglare lens and subclasses
    326+ for light refractors (e.g., lenses) for use with illuminating devices
    where the refractor is separable from the source of light.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 121+ for X-ray
    tubes which are provided with screening means to eliminate unwanted
    secondary X-rays.


CLS 313/111
TXT Devices under subclass 110 which have structurally combined therewith a
    plurality of optical devices of diverse types (e.g., a reflector and a lens
    or a filter and a polarizer).


CLS 313/112
TXT Devices under subclass 110 in which the optical device is a polarizer, a
    light filter, or which are provided with an envelope which is designed to
    be especially transparent to particular wave lengths of radiant energy.

    (1)     Note.  See section XII of the class definition for the
    classification of envelopes including those made of special compositions
    for electric lamps and discharge devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 299.01+ for liquid crystal containing
    compositions useful in making optical filters and subclasses 582+ for other
    compositions useful in making optical filters.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    483+ for light polarizers and subclasses 350+ and 885+ for optical filters.

    427,    Coating Processes, for processes of coating, per se, wherein the
    product is an optical element.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 415, 417 and
    426+ for a nonstructural composite web or sheet embodying a layer of glass.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, subclasses 11+ for glass compositions
    capable of filtering light.


CLS 313/113
TXT Devices under subclass 110 in which the optical device is a light reflector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    838+ for reflectors, per se.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 341+, and the subclasses specified in the
    notes thereto for reflectors for use with light projectors where the
    reflector is separable from the source of light.

    427,    Coating Processes, for processes of coating, per se, wherein the
    product is an optical element.


CLS 313/114
TXT Devices under subclass 113 having a plurality of reflectors.


CLS 313/115
TXT Devices under subclass 113 in which the lamp is an incandescent lamp having
    a plurality of filaments or glowers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    316,    and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto for other lamps
    which are provided with a plurality of filaments or glowers.


CLS 313/116
TXT Devices under subclass 110 in which the optical device is a light diffusing
    means.

    (1)     Note.  Incandescent lamps with frosted globes are included in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    663+ for methods of etching glass to produce a light diffusing surface
    thereon.

    427,    Coating Processes, for processes of coating, per se, wherein the
    product is an optical element.


CLS 313/117
TXT Devices under subclass 110 in which the optical device is a light valve, or
    a light shield or other light obscuring means for preventing transmission
    of light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    364+,   for cathode ray devices provided with light valves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    227+ and 238+ for light valves, per se.


CLS 313/118
TXT Unitary devices under the class definition known as spark plugs.

    (1)     Note.  See section I, Definition of Terms Used in Class, of the
    class definition of spark plugs.  In general, the spark plugs classified
    herein are the jump spark type found in the gasoline engine of an
    automobile.

    (2)     Note.  The shell is the part having means usually threaded for
    attachment to the cylinder.  The shell may be made of more than one piece.
    Some plugs do not have a shell, the insulating core being attached directly
    to the cylinder, as by having screw threads thereon.  The core is the
    insulating means fastened to the shell and holding the center electrode
    with respect to the shell.  It may consist of several parts which may or
    may not be cemented to each other.  The center electrode is the electrode
    or wire extending from the exterior to the interior of the spark plug and
    which is insulated from the shell by the core.  There may be several center
    electrodes insulated from each other.  The spark electrodes are the
    electrodes between which the jump spark is formed.  The ignition spark gap
    is the gap on the interior of the spark plug designed to ignite the
    combustible fuel.  A spark gap is constituted by two or more spark
    electrodes.  The interior of the spark plug is the portion which will be
    exposed to the combustible gas.  The exterior is the part usually exposed
    to atmosphere and which has the connector for the ignition wire mounted
    thereon. Electrode chamber is the space defined by the interior part of the
    core and the shell and exposed to the combustible gas in the engine.  It
    may be substantially flat in some cases.

    (3)     Note.  Spark plugs are collected here on the basis of use, art and
    structure. Spark plugs having the usual structure of a shell, an insulating
    core with one or more electrodes therein are found here.  Due to the rules
    of classification, certain types of spark plugs and combinations of spark
    plugs with accessories are classified in the lower numbered subclasses of
    this class.  Also, since the presence or absence of claimed sparking
    electrodes determines the classification in this class, a number of other
    classes provide for bushings, connectors, shields, joints and other
    subcombination features.  Such other subclasses and classes are referred to
    in the notes below, and in cases where only a few patents are classified in
    other subclasses or classes and which are not noted in the notes,
    cross-reference patents have been placed in this and the indented
    subclasses.

    (4)     Note.  Spark Intensifiers for Spark Plugs:  Intensifier spark gaps
    designed for use with spark plugs are not classified in this or the
    indented subclasses unless the intensifier gap is a unitary part of the
    complete spark plug when see subclasses 123+.  Where only the spark plug
    bushing (i.e., shell, core, center wire) is claimed, no ignition spark
    electrodes being claimed, the intensifier gap being located in or on the
    bushing, the patent is likewise excluded and classified as an intensifier
    gap.  Some of the subclasses to be searched for these intensifier gaps are:

    1+,     where there are a plurality of intensifier gaps in a unitary device.

    51,     where the intensifier is claimed in combination with a detachable
    electric connector.

    110+,where the intensifier includes an optical element as a lens, mirror,
    etc.

    146+,where the intensifier is provided with a movable or adjustable
    electrode or shield (e.g., a screw threaded electrode so that the size of
    the gap may be adjusted).

    238+,especially 243, 267, 268 where the supporting or spacing structure for
    mounting the intensifier electrodes are claimed.  See subclass 267 where
    the electrodes are rods or rod-like members, subclass 268 where the
    electrodes are held apart by an insulating member between the electrodes,
    and subclass 243 for the other type.

    324,    for the intensifiers with a casing including those having a
    transparent window.

    567,    especially 620+, 622, 634+ where the intensifier is mounted in a
    sealed envelope containing gas or vapor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for unitary devices providing two or more separate spark plug gaps
    or providing a spark plug gap and another discharge device, but excluding
    spark plugs with intensifier gaps for which see subclasses 123+ and spark
    plugs with a plurality of series spark gaps for which see subclass 123.

    10,     for spark plugs combined with a temperature indicator.

    11.5,   for spark plugs with temperature modifying means.

    51,     for spark plugs claimed in combination with a detachable electric
    connector (e.g., the connector on the lead-in wire).

    54,     for spark plugs which include a radioactive material.

    110+,   for spark plug devices which include means, see subclass 110 where
    the plug includes a lens, subclass 113 where the plug is combined with a
    mirror, subclass 116 where the plug includes a prism or light diffusing
    means.

    513+,   where the plug includes indicia or a scale (e.g., to show width
    between the ignition electrodes).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 104.011 for
    spark plug cleaners.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 118.1+ for spark plug testing
    devices.  Also see Class 324, subclasses 378+ for spark plug testers.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 143+, especially subclasses
    169 and 594+ for this subject matter in combination with an internal
    combustion engine or engine accessory.  Subclass 169 relates, for example,
    to the combination of a spark plug and a cylinder head; the combination of
    a plug and cylinder space in which the interior of the skirt has a special
    claimed relationship to the cylinder volume the combination of a spark plug
    with an adaptor of the screw coupling type (which, for example, permits a
    small plug to be inserted in a large hole or which acts to extend the shell
    skirt to provide a chamber for the spark), etc.  Also search Class 123 for
    plural separate spark plugs such as, for example, a plurality of adjustable
    spark plugs having means to adjust them.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 37+ for fittings or adapters
    to be interposed between the spark plug and the cylinder which include a
    flow regulator or baffle.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, appropriate subclasses for
    spark plug type electrical bushings (i.e., a spark plug with no sparking
    electrodes claimed), and electrical shields for spark plugs.  See
    subclasses 15.1+ for such bushings combined with means for feeding,
    circulating or distributing a fluid, such as a cooling liquid or air,
    subclass 31 for such bushings with a fluid (air) vent, valve or other fluid
    feeding means combined therewith (e.g., a priming means), subclass 35 for
    such bushings with an electrical shield about it and for the spark plug
    shields, per se, and subclasses 152+ for such bushings, per se, including
    such bushings as are provided with thermal modifying means (e.g., heat
    radiating fins or heat conductive members) and electrical connectors. Note
    that Class 174 provides for subcombinations of spark plug type bushings
    which are less than a complete bushing and more than is provided for in
    other subcombination classes (e.g., the combination of the insulator and
    center electrode which involves more structure than a mere joint would be
    in Class 174 rather than one of the classes providing for joints.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, appropriate subclasses for fittings or
    adapters having joint means to attach one end of the fitting to the engine
    and joint means at the other end to receive a spark plug.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 32+ for
    space discharge devices, such as spark plugs, having integral therewith a
    circuit element such as a resistor, condenser or switch. Note particularly
    indented subclass 46 for spark plugs having a resistor in shunt to the
    sparking electrodes which is adapted to flash-over when traversed by a high
    current impulse, said flash-over serving to ignite the combustion charge;
    indented subclasses 51+ for spark plugs having a plurality of circuit
    elements, such as a resistor and a condenser; subclass 56 for spark plugs
    having an integral switch; subclass 57 for spark plugs having an integral
    transformer, and subclass 58 for spark plugs having a suppressor resistor.
    Note that spark plugs having only an integral intensifier (i.e., series
    connected gap) are classified in subclasses 123+ of Class 313.  The
    presence of a separable connector or merely conductive lead (e.g., ignition
    cable) will not prevent classification in Class 315, subclasses 32+ if the
    device is otherwise classifiable there. Class 315 also provides for systems
    for supplying electrical energy to spark gaps.  Note especially subclasses
    209+ for such systems having a periodic switch (e.g., a timer switch) in
    the circuit and subclasses 211+ where there are a plurality of spark plugs
    and the system includes a distributor type switch.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 247+ for
    miscellaneous ignitors and ignitor systems.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for a joint between
    metal and glass or ceramic members.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for an electrical
    connector or certain connector related accessories.  Note that Class 439
    includes the combination of an electrical connector with a named spark
    plug.  Search especially subclasses 125+ for an electrical connector having
    a spark or glow plug cover.  Also, search subclasses 191+ for the
    combination of an electrical connector with a fluent material transmission
    line.  Search subclasses 271+ for an electrical connector with a packing or
    gasket to seal the joint with a mating connector; subclasses 312+ for a
    coupling part with coupling part movement-actuating means or retaining
    means in addition to a contact thereof with relatively pivotable concentric
    movement-actuating or retaining ring.  Search Class 439, subclasses 607+
    for a connector with a radiation shielding means; and subclasses 625+ for a
    connector with insulation other than a conductor sheath.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    subclass 7 for methods of manufacturing spark plugs.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, appropriate subclasses for ceramic
    compositions used for spark plug insulators.  Note especially subclasses
    127+ and 134+ for clay containing compositions; and subclasses 141+ for
    titanate and similar material containing compositions.


CLS 313/119
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 having means, integral with the spark
    plug, permitting the removal of a part of the spark plug from normal
    operating position with respect to the portion of the shell which is
    attachable to the cylinder, without forming an open passageway from the
    cylinder to the atmosphere.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are only unitary spark plugs.  See
    Class 123, Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 143+, especially 169 for
    similar subject matter where the plug is combined with another separable
    device (as a fitting with a valve) which permits removing of the plug
    without stopping the engine.

    (2)     Note.  These spark plugs are designed usually to permit inspection
    or repair of the ignition spark gap electrodes or of the interior end of
    the insulator without stopping the operation of the engine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236,    for other discharge devices which have a stand-by or spare
    electrode.

    237,    for other discharge devices which have electrode replacement means
    or are demountable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, appropriate subclasses for automatically operated
    valves.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, appropriate subclasses for manually
    operated valves.


CLS 313/120
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 provided with a passageway for a fluid
    extending through the spark plug structure from the interior of the spark
    plug to the exterior or to a fluid feed line so that a liquid or gas may
    flow between the electrode chamber and the exterior of the spark plug or
    the fluid feed line.

    (1)     Note.  The passageway may be provided with a valve so that the
    fluid may pass in one direction only or have a valve so that the fluid feed
    line may be closed or opened as desired.

    (2)     Note.  The fluid feed or air vent, for example, may supply priming
    fluid to the ignition spark gap space, or may blow oil off the electrodes
    or allow some of the burned gas to escape. Included in this subclass are
    spark plugs in combination with integral fuel injection nozzles.

    (3)     Note.  The fluid feed or air vent may, for example, act as an
    observation port for visual inspection of the ignition spark gap or as a
    port for the insertion of a cleaner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11.5,   for this subject matter when the fluid passageway is for the
    purpose of supplying a cooling fluid (e.g., air) to the spark plug.

    119,    for spark plugs having valve means arranged so that the interior of
    the plug or part of the shell may be sealed off to permit removal or
    inspection of at least part of the plug without stopping the engine.

    143,    for spark plugs having gas directing means, such as baffles or
    valves in the electrode chamber where there is no fluent passageway between
    the interior and the exterior of the plug.

    231.01+, for other discharge devices which have a fluent material supply
    means or flow directing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 179.9+ for priming devices
    for internal combustion engines.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 455+ for automatically operated valves
    responsive to the fluid passing through the valve, see especially
    subclasses 511+ for automatically operated check valves.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses,
    for fuel injection nozzles for internal combustion engines, especially
    subclasses 86 through 96, and 584+. See also (2) Note, above.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, appropriate subclasses for manually
    operated valves.


CLS 313/121
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 in which the whole or a portion thereof
    is reversible.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to spark plugs in which
    the core can be reversed, so that the center electrode tip becomes the
    binding post and vice versa.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144+,   for spark plugs having specific joint structure such as between the
    insulator and the shell.

    236,    for other discharge devices which are provided with a stand-by or
    spare electrode.


CLS 313/122
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 in which one of the ignition spark
    electrodes is supported by the shell, and is mounted so as to be removable
    therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  The removable electrode supported by the shell may be
    attached to a  sleeve or other supporting means fastened between the shell
    and core so that the core must be removed to remove the electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128,    for spark plugs wherein the core supports a plurality of separate
    ignition electrodes with individual lead-in wires which are insulated from
    each other.


CLS 313/123
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 having a plurality of spark gaps
    connected in series.

    (1)     Note.  The plural gaps may be located on the interior portion of
    the plug (e.g., used to ignite the combustible gas) or one or more of the
    gaps may be located in or on some other portion of the spark plug.

    (2)     Note.  Spark gaps in series with the igniter spark gap, when not
    exposed to the cylinder charge, are often referred to as intensifier gaps,
    since they prevent voltage break-down until a voltage level, higher than
    would otherwise be required, is reached.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306+,   and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto for miscellaneous
    discharge devices having a plurality of gaps in series.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 180+ for
    systems for supplying electrical energy to a plurality of different type
    spark gaps, subclasses 185+ for systems for supplying electrical energy to
    a plurality of series connected spark gaps, subclass 334 and the subclasses
    specified in the notes thereto, for supplying electrical energy to a
    discharge device having three or more series arranged electrodes.


CLS 313/124
TXT Subject matter under subclass 123 in which one of the series gaps is
    located in the lead-in path which includes the center electrode connector
    for the ignition wire and the ignition spark electrode conductively
    attached to or formed by the center electrode, the gap being located
    outside of the interior portion of the spark plug (e.g., not in the
    electrode chamber).

    (1)     Note.  Where all of the series gaps are exposed to the cylinder
    charge so as to form ignition spark gaps, or where the intensifier is
    located, not in the center electrode but rather in a noncenter electrode
    return circuit or lead-in, the art will be found in subclass 123 above.

    (2)     Note.  The center electrode may be formed of plural parts with the
    spaced electrode parts forming the intensifier gap, or the center electrode
    may be spaced from the connector for the ignition wire so as to form an
    intensifier gap with a portion of the connector structure, or it may be
    otherwise arranged so as to be in the center electrode lead-in path.

    (3)     Note.  Spark Intensifiers for Spark Plugs:  Intensifier spark gaps
    designed for use with spark plugs are not classified in this or the
    indented subclasses unless the intensifier gap is a unitary part of the
    complete spark plug, when see subclasses 123+.  Where only the spark plug
    bushing (i.e., shell, core, center wire) is claimed, no ignition spark
    electrodes being claimed, the intensifier gap being located in or on the
    bushing, the patent is likewise excluded and classified as an intensifier
    gap.  Some of the subclasses to be searched for these intensifier gaps are:

    1+,     where there are a plurality of intensifier gaps in a unitary device.

    51,     where the intensifier is claimed in combination with a detachable
    electric connector.

    110+,where the intensifier includes an optical element as a lens, mirror,
    etc.

    146+,where the intensifier is provided with a movable or adjustable
    electrode or shield (e.g., a screw threaded electrode so that the size of
    the gap may be adjusted).

    567,    especially 620+, 622, 634+ where the intensifier is mounted in a
    sealed envelope containing gas or vapor.

    282+,especially 243, 267, 268 where the supporting or spacing structure for
    mounting the intensifier electrodes are claimed.  See subclass 267 where
    the electrodes are rods or rod-like members, subclass 268 where the
    electrodes are held apart by an insulating member between the electrodes,
    and subclass 243 for the other type.

    324,    for the intensifiers with a casing including those having a
    transparent window.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 58+ for
    similar subject matter having a circuit impedance such as, for example, a
    nonlinear resistor in the center electrode lead-in.


CLS 313/125
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 having an ignition spark electrode which
    is movable into two different positions.

    (1)     Note.  For the purpose of this definition, an electrode which is
    variably positioned by plastic distortion thereof (as, for example, when
    points are "set" to a desired position by bending to provide a particular
    gap length) is not considered to be movable.  Where the distortion is an
    elastic deformation as, for example, due to vibration, the art is in this
    and the indented subclass.

    (2)     Note.  In general, this subclass includes spark plugs provided with
    means whereby an electrode may be moved other than by plastic distortion
    without disassembly of the spark plug. The electrode may be moved for
    cleaning or for obtaining a variable width ignition gap.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    for this subject matter where the spark plug can be removed from
    normal operating position without stopping the engine.

    120,    for spark plugs having a reversible electrode which can assume one
    position or a reversed position.

    122,    for spark plugs having a removable electrode on the shell.

    127,    for spark plugs having stationary electrodes and a movable cleaner.

    143,    for spark plugs having a movable baffle or gas directing means for
    the electrode chamber.

    146+,   for other space discharge devices having a movable electrode.


CLS 313/126
TXT Subject matter under subclass 125 in which the electrode is automatically
    moved.

    (1)     Note.  The electrode may be moved, for example, by engine vibration
    or by a thermostat.  The motion may be effected so as, for example, to
    adjust the spacing of the spark gap electrodes or to clean the electrodes.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass also includes spark plugs having means for
    automatically moving electrodes and means for disabling said first
    mentioned means so that the electrodes can optionally be held immovable.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass includes spark plugs having both manual and
    automatic means to move an electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for spark plugs having automatically moved cleaners.

    143,    for spark plugs having automatically moved baffles or gas directing
    means for the electrode chamber.


CLS 313/127
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 having a cleaner.

    (1)     Note.  The cleaner may, for example, be a movable scraper which
    scrapes the electrode tips or movable balls which knock carbon off the
    insulator.

    (2)     Note.  Many spark plugs are "self cleaning" by virtue of their
    operating at a sufficiently high temperature to burn off carbon deposits.
    Such spark plugs are not classified in this subclass unless they have means
    for cleaning in addition to the means which produce the high temperature
    operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for spark plugs having fluid feed or vent means, through which
    means a cleaner may be inserted to clean the electrodes or other parts.

    125+,   for this subject matter in which an electrode is movable as, for
    example, where an electrode can be rubbed against another electrode or
    where an electrode vibrates during use to shake off deposits or where a
    movable scraper is an electrode tip.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 104.011 for
    spark plug cleaners, per se.


CLS 313/128
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 having plural ignition spark electrodes
    which are insulated from the shell, and from each other, each of the so
    insulated electrodes having its own lead-in structure.

    (1)     Note.  The spark plug may have three or more ignition spark
    electrodes, one of which is mounted on the shell, at least two of the
    others being insulated from the shell and having individual lead-in
    conductors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123+,   for spark plugs having plural series connected ignition gaps.

    140,    for spark plugs having a plurality of parallel connected gaps,
    e.g., having a plurality of ignition spark electrodes connected together
    which cooperate with the electrode mounted on the shell to form a plurality
    of parallel connected ignition gaps.

    306+,   and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto for other
    discharge devices having three or more electrodes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 626+ and 709+ for electrical
    connector structure having a plurality of terminals which are insulated
    from each other mounted upon an insulating member.


CLS 313/129
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 having a transparent part.

    (1)     Note.  The transparent part may, for example, make the spark or
    explosion inside the engine cylinder visible to an observer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110+,   for spark plugs where the transparent part is an optical device
    such as, for example, a lens.  See subclass 116 where the transparent part
    has light diffusing properties.

    120,    for spark plugs having fluid feed or air vent means, through which
    the spark gap may be observed.

    124,    for spark plugs having an intensifier gap and the portion of the
    plug having the intensifier gap is provided with an observation window or
    is made transparent.

    324,    for miscellaneous spark gaps which are provided with a casing
    having a transparent part.


CLS 313/130
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 having nonconducting material interposed
    between or closely adjacent the ignition spark gap.

    (1)     Note.  The nonconducting material, for example, may be provided
    with a minute aperture through which the spark must pass, or it may be an
    impervious barrier between the electrodes.

    (2)     Note.  For the purpose of this definition, the material is closely
    adjacent the spark gap if it is so close that it affects the sparking.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143,    for spark plugs having an insulator end at the ignition spark gap
    end of the plug of particular shape.

    325,    for miscellaneous spark gaps having an insulator material within or
    closely adjacent to the spark electrodes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 46 for
    similar subject matter where the material with or closely adjacent the gap
    is a resistance material.


CLS 313/131
TXT Subject matter under subclass 130 in which the material is so situated that
    the spark is caused to follow the surface of the insulator or to follow a
    path which is not the shortest path between electrodes.

    (1)     Note.  For example, the insulating material may form a barrier
    between the sparking electrodes so that the spark must jump the barrier.


CLS 313/132
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 having a groove or analogous surface
    structure or having a narrow space which is disclosed as drawing or holding
    fluid by capillary action.

    (1)     Note.  The fluid, for example, may be condensed oil mist which is
    drawn away from the electrode points by capillary action.

    (2)     Note.  The narrow space may be formed, for example, between two
    facing flat electrodes of extended area positioned closely together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141+,   and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto, for spark plug
    ignition electrode structure, not having capillary grooves, in which
    condensed fluid is drawn away from electrode points by gravity action due
    to the inclination of a surface of the electrode.


CLS 313/133
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 having an ignition electrode whose shape
    is that of a ball or a substantial portion of a ball.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to spark plugs in which
    one electrode is a substantially hemispherical or hemispheroidal surface
    formed of a thin sheet material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    325,    and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto for other
    discharge devices having ball electrodes, and subclass 326 for the
    electrodes, per se.


CLS 313/134
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 having electrical shielding means to
    shield the spark plug.

    (1)     Note.  The shielding means ordinarily are used to prevent the
    ignition current used with the spark plug from radiating or otherwise
    establishing unwanted electrical effects.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    313,    for other space discharge devices having electric shielding means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 146.5+ for shielded
    ignition systems for internal combustion engines.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 32+ for
    electrical conductors having shielding means and see subclass 35 for the
    miscellaneous electrical shielding structure including that designed for
    use with spark plugs, or spark plug type bushings.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 85 for
    miscellaneous space discharge device systems including some spark ignition
    systems having shielding means and consult the search notes of subclass 85
    for a list of related art.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 125+ for an electrical connector
    with a spark or glow plug cover; and subclasses 607+ for an electrical
    connector having or providing an inductive or capacitive shield.


CLS 313/135
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 having significant connector structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for spark plugs having a detachable connector such as, for example,
    a spark plug with a connector part attached thereto in combination with the
    connector part attached to the ignition wire and designed to be attached to
    the spark plug connector.

    134,    for this subject matter wherein the spark plug includes electrical
    shielding means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 152 for spark
    plug type bushings (i.e., having no ignition sparking points claimed) in
    combination with an electrical connector when more bushing structure is
    recited than is necessary for mounting or supporting the connector.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for an electrical
    connector and for certain accessories. Class 439 provides for an electrical
    connector combined with a "named" spark plug, (i.e., no more of the spark
    plug is claimed than is necessary to support or attach the connector to the
    spark plug).  Search subclasses 125+ for a spark plug connector with a
    cover, or for a spark plug cover, per se; subclasses 191+ for an electrical
    connector combined with a fluid line conduit (e.g., air vent or priming
    means); subclasses 271+ for an electrical connector with a packing or
    gasket to seal the joint between the connector and a mating connector;
    subclasses 312+ for an electrical connector with a coupling
    movement-actuating relatively pivotable concentric ring in addition to the
    contacts thereof; subclasses 607+ for an electrical connector with a
    radiation shielding means; and appropriate other subclasses for an
    electrical connector generally which may be used on a spark plug.


CLS 313/136
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 in which the portion of the center
    electrode which is encased by the insulating core structure consists of
    more than one part.

    (1)     Note.  For the purpose of classification in this subclass,
    necessary terminal structure immediately adjacent the end of the insulator
    shall not be considered to be one of the aforementioned parts, nor shall a
    coated or covered wire (as, for example, in the cored rod) be considered to
    be plural parts for classification in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The parts may be physically united as by welding a rod of
    one metal to a rod of another metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124,    for this subject matter where the plural parts are separated so as
    to form an intensifier gap.


CLS 313/137
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 having the insulating core formed of a
    plurality of parts.

    (1)     Note.  For the purpose of classification in this subclass, stacked
    parallel laminations of mica will not be considered to be plural members,
    but mica members whose planes are not parallel (as, for example, a rolled
    mica tube surrounded by flat mica washers) are considered to be plural
    members.  A thin cement layer which is utilized to adhere together parts of
    the spark plug or to make joints gas tight is not considered to be an
    insulating member even though it may, in fact, be an insulator.

    (2)     Note.  The different parts of the core may be cemented together or
    may be held together by mechanical means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130+,   for spark plugs having an insulating member in or closely adjacent
    to the spark gap.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 152+ for
    insulated bushings, including spark plug type bushings (i.e., not having
    claimed ignition spark electrodes).


CLS 313/138
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 having plural ignition electrodes each of
    which is a pure figure of revolution about the longitudinal axis of the
    plug.

    (1)     Note.  Where an electrode is only in part a figure of revolution,
    such as being a disk and in part not a figure of revolution, such as having
    a supporting spur, a perforated supporting means or a perforation,
    classification is not in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    for this subject matter where one of  the electrodes is ball shaped.

    139     and 140, for similar subject matter in which one of the electrodes
    is not a pure figure of revolution.  See subclass 139 where one of the
    electrodes is a disk or ring and the other electrode is not a pure figure
    of revolution, or where one electrode is only a section of a disk or ring
    and subclass 140 where one of the electrodes has a multi-pointed or
    serrated edge.


CLS 313/139
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 having an ignition electrode whose shape
    is that of a ring or disk or a sector of a ring or disk.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    for this subject matter having a ball shaped electrode.

    138,    for this subject matter having plural ignition electrodes each of
    which are pure figures of revolution about the longitudinal axis of the
    plug, one of the electordes being a ring or disk.


CLS 313/140
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 having means to define plural distinct
    ignition spark gap spaces which are electrically connected in parallel.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, spark plugs having a
    plurality of separate center electrodes which are connected in parallel and
    which all cooperate with one or more other electrodes to define parallel
    gaps, spark gaps having a multipointed electrode cooperating with another
    electrode so that each point of the electrode defines a sparking electrode
    with the other electrode, and spark plugs having a plurality of shell
    electrodes which cooperate with the same center electrode.

    (2)     Note.  Some of the spark plugs in this subclass are intended to
    make the plug efficient over a longer period of time by having the spark
    shift to another electrode or place on the electrode as the spark gap space
    widens due to the "pitting" or wearing action of the spark.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass does not include spark plugs having two
    electrodes formed of smooth wires or rods which are mounted in parallel or
    convergent relation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123+,   for spark plugs having plural ignition spark gaps which are
    electrically connected in series.

    236,    for space discharge devices having a stand-by or spare electrode.

    306+,   for other space discharge devices having three or more distinct
    electrodes.

    309,    for other space discharge devices having a multipointed or serrated
    edge electrode, and subclass 351 for the electrodes, per se.


CLS 313/141
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 having significant ignition electrode
    structure, interelectrode spacing, or inter-electrode spatial relationship,
    or having an ignition electrode formed of particular material.

    (1)     Note.  An electrode for a spark plug defined only by the
    composition of which it is made is not classified herein.  Such electrodes
    are classified in Class 75, Specialized Metallurgical Processes,
    Compositions for Use Therein, Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and
    Loose Metal Particulate, if made of a pure metal, or an alloy.  Subclasses
    228+ provides for sintered or consolidated metal powder stock material.
    Class 148 provides for such electrodes defined solely by their metal or
    alloy composition and which are distinguished by their internal structure
    or characteristics of the metal or metal alloy (e.g., produced by a Class
    148 treatment).  Class 428, Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles,
    subclasses 544+ provides for electrode materials which as defined are only
    metal wire or other metallic stock material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    for this subject matter where the shell electrode is readily
    removable or demountable.

    123+,   for this subject matter having plural series gaps.

    132,    for this subject matter where an electrode has a capillary groove.

    133,    for this subject matter where an electrode is ball shaped.

    138,    for this subject matter where both electrodes are pure figures of
    revolution about the plug axis.

    139,    for this subject matter where the electrode is shaped like a ring
    or disk or sector of a ring or disk.

    140,    for this subject matter having plural distinct parallel gaps, such
    as, for example, those formed between a serrated and a smooth electrode.

    311,    for space discharge devices having electrodes made of particular
    materials.

    326+,   for miscellaneous discharge device electrode structure.


CLS 313/142
TXT Subject matter under subclass 141 in which the spatial relation and
    construction of the ignition electrodes is such that the spark gap between
    them coincides with the longitudinal axis of the plug.

    (1)     Note.  Electrodes of extended area will be considered, for the
    purpose of classification in this subclass, to have the spark gap on the
    axis of the plug if the sparking faces of the electrodes are symmetric
    about the axis and the spacing gap between the electrodes coincides
    substantially with the axis of the plug.  This note is applicable where the
    electrodes are plane sheets of material spaced along the longitudinal axis
    of the plug.


CLS 313/143
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 having means to provide an electrode
    chamber of significant shape, or having an insulator whose exposed cylinder
    end has a significant shape, or having a shell skirt of particular shape,
    or having a baffle or gas directing means.

    (1)     Note.  The insulator end, for example, may be ridged so as to
    provide a longer leakage current path.  The baffle, for example, may
    prevent oil vapor from reaching the insulator, or it may cause gas currents
    to concentrate in the vicinity of the electrode points.

    (2)     Note.  The baffle may or may not be movable.

    (3)     Note.  Spark plugs in combination with separable adapters are not
    included herein.  See Class 123, Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 169
    for this combination.  Adapters which are no more than a pipe fitting with
    means to attach the plug at one end and the fitting to the plug at the
    other end and which include joint structure will be found in the
    appropriate subclasses of Class 285, Pipe Joints or Couplings.  Fittings or
    adapters which include flow regulator or baffle structure are classified in
    Class 138, Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 37+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for spark plugs having a movable cleaner, such as, for example, a
    movable scraper within the electrode chamber.


CLS 313/144
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 having significant joint structure.

    (1)     Note.  Where there is a significant joint between the center
    electrode and core in addition to a joint between other parts, such as the
    shell and core, subclass 145 must also be searched.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    for spark plugs which are provided with a joint involving structure
    so that a part of the plug may be removed from operating position without
    stopping the engine (e.g., the insulator may be removed from the shell and
    means are provided to seal off the opening in the shell).

    121,    where the spark plug is provided with joint structure so that some
    part (e.g., the insulator) may be removed and replaced in the reverse
    position.

    137,    for the subject matter when the insulating core is formed of a
    plurality of parts.

    238+,   especially subclasses 243, 267 and 268 for other space discharge
    devices with supporting and spacing structures which involve joints between
    the parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 169 for spark plugs in
    combination with an internal combustion engine or engine accessory.
    Included in Class 123 are joints between the spark plug and the cylinder
    where significant cylinder structure is recited.  Also, included in Class
    123 is the combination of a spark plug with an adapter designed to hold the
    plug at one end and designed to be attached to the cylinder at the other
    end (e.g., to use a small sized plug in a larger sized cylinder opening).

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 138 for
    miscellaneous insulated rod joints and subclass 152 for spark plug type
    electrical bushings (i.e., a spark plug with no ignition sparking
    electrodes claimed) having joint structure between the parts of the bushing.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, appropriate subclasses for mere pipe
    joints including insulated pipe joints.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for rod joints of
    general application.  Note that insulated rod joints are in Class 174,
    subclass 138, or one of the classes specified in the notes thereto.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 625+ for an electrical connector
    mounted on or attached to an electrical insulator.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, appropriate subclasses for ceramic
    compositions or the electric insulating type, such as cements for joints,
    and for electric insulators defined merely by their composition, especially
    subclasses 127+ and 134+ for clay containing compositions; and subclasses
    141+ for titanate and similar material containing compositions.


CLS 313/145
TXT Subject matter under subclass 144 in which the said joint is between the
    center electrode and the insulating core.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes spark plugs having a significant
    joint between the center electrode and the insulating core or significant
    joint structure between the shell and core in addition to the significant
    joint between the center electrode and core. Where the only significant
    joint is between the insulator and the shell, search subclass 144.

    (2)     Note.  For other classes providing for closely related subject
    matter, see the search notes to subclass 144.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    where the joint structure includes a fluid valve.

    124,    where there is an intensifier in the center electrode.

    128,    where there is a plurality of insulated center electrodes.

    136,    where the center electrode is made of a plurality of parts.


CLS 313/146
TXT Devices under the class definition having at least one electrode or shield
    which is movable relative to another electrode or shield or to some other
    part of the device.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes devices where the electrode or shield
    is designed to be moved during the operation of the device and also
    includes devices where the electrode or shield is mounted so as to be moved
    for adjustment and need not be moved during the operation of the device.
    For example, included in this and the indented subclasses are spark gaps
    having one of the electrodes mounted by means of screw threads so that the
    electrodes can be moved closer or further apart.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125+,   where the device is a spark plug.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 29, 39+, and 94 for
    electrical precipitators which have movable electrodes.

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, appropriate subclasses for
    means for transmitting electricity from a fixed point or contact to an
    object which is movable.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    appropriate subclasses for arc lamps and similar discharge devices of the
    consumable electrode type having an electrode which is movable in order to
    feed it towards another electrode to maintain the proper length discharge
    space as the electrode is consumed by the discharge.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 327+ for
    systems for supplying electrical energy to discharge devices which are
    designed to be started by placing the electrodes into contact with each
    other and then separating the electrodes from each other (e.g., which have
    a movable electrode), and subclass 357 for electric systems for supplying
    electrical energy to other discharge devices of the gas or vapor type which
    have a movable electrode.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclass 135, where the
    device is an X-ray tube.


CLS 313/147
TXT Devices under subclass 146 having a plurality of movable electrodes or
    shields.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclasses 51+, for discharge devices of the consumable electrode type
    (e.g., arc lamps) which have a plurality of movable electrodes.


CLS 313/148
TXT Devices under subclass 146 which are provided with an envelope and which
    have a portion of the envelope wall movable, the means for moving the
    electrode or shield being connected to the movable envelope wall.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 17.8 for miscellaneous
    structures for transmitting mechanical motion through a wall by means
    including an imperforate movable envelope wall portion.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 230+ for joints between a
    rod-like body transverse to a plate-like body.


CLS 313/149
TXT Devices under subclass 146 in which the movable electrode or shield is
    mounted so as to rotate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclasses 42+ for discharge devices of the consumable electrode type
    (e.g., arc lamps), which are provided with rotary electrodes.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclass 135, for this
    subject matter where the  device is an X-ray generator.


CLS 313/150
TXT Devices under subclass 146 having a movable liquid electrode.

    (1)     Note.  Since all devices having liquid electrodes may have the
    electrode moved by tilting the device so as to cause the electrode to flow,
    this subclass includes only those devices which are provided with a liquid
    electrode which may be moved by means other than the mere tilting of the
    device.  Some of the devices in this subclass have means for changing the
    level of a liquid electrode and some are provided with means for producing
    a jet or fountain of liquid from the region of the liquid electrode for
    starting a discharge, but the subclass is not limited to such types.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163+,   for other discharge devices under the class definition which are
    provided with liquid electrodes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 327+ for
    systems for supplying electrical energy to discharge devices which have a
    liquid electrode and which are provided with means for moving the liquid
    electrode into contact with another electrode to start the device into
    operation, see subclasses 328+ where the device is designed to be started
    by tilting the discharge device so as to bring the liquid electrode into
    contact with another electrode.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 263+ for liquid electrode type lamps
    (e.g., mercury vapor lamps) in combination with a separable support for the
    lamp.


CLS 313/151
TXT Devices under subclass 146 having thermally operable means for moving the
    electrode or shield.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146+,   for movable electrode discharge devices in which an electrode is
    moved by the blast of gas or fluid which results from vaporization or
    thermal expansion of the gas or fluid due to the presence of a space
    discharge. Such thermal vaporization or expansion is not deemed to be
    "thermally actuated" for subclass 151.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclasses 89+ for discharge devices of the consumable electrode type
    (e.g., arc lamps) which are provided with a thermostatic means for moving
    the electrodes.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 39.59 for
    discharge devices having an electrode formed so as to provide a structure
    having distributed inductance and capacitance and operable in a magnetic
    field (e.g., magnetrons), the device having thermally actuated means for
    varying the tuning of the reactive structure, subclasses 331+, for systems
    for supplying electrical energy to discharge devices of the gas or vapor
    type including those which are provided with a liquid electrode where the
    discharge device is provided with an auxiliary starting electrode which is
    moved into contact with and then separated from one of the principal
    electrodes by thermostatic means to start the discharge device.


CLS 313/152
TXT Devices under subclass 146 having a magnetic means for moving the electrode
    or shield.

    (1)     Note.  The magnetic means may be an electromagnet connected in
    circuit with an electrode.  A mere conductive connection is not sufficient
    circuit to exclude the organization from Class 313.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153+,   and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto for other devices
    under the class definition which are provided with a magnetic device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes, for
    consumable electrode type arc lamps and other consumable electrode type
    discharge devices having magnetic means for feeding one of the electrodes
    towards the other electrode as it or they are consumed in the discharge or
    for separating the electrodes from each other to start the space discharge.
    See especially subclasses 66+, 69+, 78, 105+, and 113+; not that subclasses
    69+, provides for rotary electric motors while the other subclasses
    mentioned provide for electromagnets.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 39.59 for
    discharge devices having an electrode formed so as to provide a structure
    having distributed inductance and capacitance and operable in a magnetic
    field (e.g., magnetrons), the device being provided with magnetically
    actuated means for varying the impedance of the distributed impedance
    structure, subclasses 331+ for systems for supplying electrical energy to
    discharge devices of the gas or vapor type including those which are
    provided with a liquid electrode where the discharge device is provided
    with an auxiliary starting electrode which is moved into contact with and
    then separated from one of the principal electrodes by magnetic means to
    start the discharge device.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 220+ for electromagnets with armatures.


CLS 313/153
TXT Subject matter under the class definition where the lamp or discharge
    device has a magnetic device associated therewith.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the devices in this and the indented subclasses are
    discharge devices in which the magnetic field is designed to influence the
    space discharge but these subclasses are not limited to such devices.

    (2)     Note.  This and the indented subclass includes devices in which an
    electrode generates the magnetic field, such as having an electrode made in
    coil form to generate the magnetic field.

    (3)     Note.  Where the lamp or discharge device is provided with an
    envelope, the magnetic field generating means may be within or without the
    envelope.

    (4)     Note. See section XVII of the class definition for the
    classification of deflection and focusing magnets.

    (5)     Note.  The magnetic means may be an electromagnet connected in
    circuit with an electrode.  A mere conductive connection is not sufficient
    circuit to exclude the organization from Class 313.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for cyclotrons which include magnetic means.

    152,    for devices under the class definition which are provided with a
    movable electrode and with magnetic means for moving the electrode.

    421,    426, 427, 433, and 440, for cathode-ray tubes provided with
    magnetic means for deflecting a beam of electrons.

    442,    for cathode-ray tubes provided with means to focus a beam of
    electrons.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    218,    High-Voltage Switches With Arc Preventing and Extinguishing
    Devices, subclass 22 for electric switches provided with magnetic means for
    suppressing arcs when the circuit is opened.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 281+ for methods and apparatus for ionic
    separation or analysis (e.g., mass spectrometry) particularly subclass 296
    for plural diverse field type ion path selecting means and subclasses 298+
    which include magnetic means for detecting the movement of ionic particles,
    subclass 309 for positive ion microscopes and subclasses 396+ for electron
    or ion beam deflection or focussing means which may include a magnetic
    deflection or focussing member.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 20 for consumable electrode type discharge devices (e.g., arc
    lamps) provided with magnetic means for influencing the space discharge.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 40 and 41+
    for discharge devices of the magnetron type, that is, discharge devices
    which are provided with magnetic means for influencing the space discharge
    and which have the electrodes formed as inductive impedances (e.g.,
    resonators) or which have the electrodes connected by inductive impedances;
    subclasses 236, 267, 338, and 344+ for electrical systems for supplying
    electrical energy to electric lamps or discharge devices of the gas or
    vapor type, where the lamp or discharge device is provided with an
    electromagnet for influencing its operation.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 510+ for miscellaneous circuits which are magnetically
    effected.


    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 5 and 86+ for electrical oscillators
    utilizing a magnetically controlled space discharge device (e.g.,
    magnetron).

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 210+.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 64 and 107, for
    electric arc furnaces in which the arc is deflected out of its normal path
    by a magnetic field.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclasses 100+ for the use of magnetic devices in apparatus for containing
    a plasma yielding, or intended to yield, thermonuclear reactions.


CLS 313/154
TXT Subject matter under subclass 153 where the lamp or discharge device has a
    plurality of magnetic devices and/or having magnetic means for producing a
    plurality of distinct magnetic fields.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    421,    426, 427, 433, and 440, for cathode-ray tubes provided with
    magnetic means for deflecting a beam of electrons.

    442,    for cathode-ray tubes provided with means to focus a beam of
    electrons.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 343 for
    systems for supplying electrical energy to discharge devices of the gas or
    vapor type having a plurality of electromagnetic means for influencing the
    discharge.


CLS 313/155
TXT Subject matter under subclass 153 in which at least a portion of the means
    for generating the magnetic field is an electrode of the lamp or discharge
    device.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of the devices in this subclass are devices in
    which a pole face of the magnet also acts as a discharge electrode and
    devices in which an electrode is formed into a coil so that the current
    therethrough will produce a magnetic field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    342,    for the structure of noninductive filaments.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 40 for lamps
    and discharge devices which have an electrode formed as an inductive
    impedance.  Included in subclass 40 are "magnetrons" having plural anodes,
    the anodes and the connection therebetween forming "cavity resonators"
    (e.g., inductive impedances).  Similar magnetrons will be found in subclass
    42 of Class 315, where the plural anodes are connected by inductive
    impedances.


CLS 313/156
TXT Subject matter under subclass 153 which includes a discharge device, the
    magnetic field generating means being arranged so that the generated
    magnetic field extends transversely of the discharge space between the
    discharge electrodes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 39.71 for
    discharge, devices having an electrode formed so as to provide a structure
    having distributed inductance and capacitance, and operable in a magnetic
    field (e.g., magnetrons), the device having significant magnetic field
    generating or pole structure.


CLS 313/157
TXT Subject matter under subclass 156 in which one or more elongated tubular
    electrodes (e.g., anode and/or grid) surrounds another elongated electrode
    (e.g., cathode), the magnetic means being arranged to generate a magnetic
    field which extends along the axis of the elongated electrodes.


CLS 313/158
TXT Subject matter under subclass 157 in which the magnetic means includes
    magnetic poles which extend across and face the ends of the concentrically
    arranged elongated electrodes and are axially spaced from the electrodes.

    (1)     Note.  The magnetic pole piece faces are usually planar and
    mutually parallel.


CLS 313/159
TXT Subject matter under subclass 158 wherein at least one of the magnetic pole
    pieces has an opening therein and an electrode supporting member extends
    into the opening in the pole piece.


CLS 313/160
TXT Subject matter under subclass 153 wherein the lamp or discharge device is
    provided with an envelope.

    (1)     Note.  The magnetic field generating means may be within or without
    envelope.


CLS 313/161
TXT Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein the envelope contains a gas or
    vapor.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes discharge devices having a gas or
    vapor at a sufficient pressure to cause ionization of the gas or the
    electric discharge and devices wherein the claims state that the device
    contains a gas or vapor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    567,    and the subclass specified in the notes thereto for other devices
    under the class definition which are provided with an envelope and a gas or
    vapor atmosphere.


CLS 313/162
TXT Subject matter under subclass 160 where the lamp or discharge device has
    three or more electrodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306+,   and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto, for other
    discharge devices under the class definition which have three or more
    electrodes.


CLS 313/163
TXT Discharge devices under the class definition having at least one liquid
    electrode.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this and the indented subclasses are discharge
    devices which have mercury or mercury amalgam electrodes and discharge
    devices having electrodes made of material which becomes liquid only during
    the operation of the discharge device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for liquid electrode discharge devices in combination with an
    evacuating pump.

    16,     for liquid electrode discharge devices in combination with electric
    heater means for heating the liquid electrode.

    18+,    for liquid electrode discharge devices such as mercury vapor
    rectifiers which are provided with a metallic envelope and a casing or
    jacket enclosing the envelope and having means for modifying the
    temperature of the discharge device.

    22+,    for liquid electrode discharge devices provided with a casing or
    jacket and means for circulating a heat transfer fluid in contact with the
    discharge device.

    29,     for miscellaneous liquid electrode discharge devices with means for
    modifying the temperature of the liquid electrode.

    33,     and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto for liquid
    electrode discharge devices provided with an envelope and an internal
    temperature modifying baffle for modifying the temperature of the vapor
    within the envelope.

    34,     for liquid electrode discharge devices provided with an envelope
    which has condensing chamber or surface for condensing the electrode vapor
    into liquid form.

    150,    for liquid electrode discharge devices wherein the liquid electrode
    is movable.

    328,    for liquid electrode receptacles for use with liquid electrode
    discharge devices.

    549+,   for discharge devices under the class definition which are provided
    with means, such as a body of mercury, which is designed to be vaporized
    during the operation of the device to supply the gas or vapor atmosphere in
    the device, see subclasses 559+ where the electrode is formed of or is
    coated with a material (e.g., an alkali metal) which vaporizes during the
    operation of the device to supply the gas or vapor atmosphere in the device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity: Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.05, 61.47,
    80, 81.6, and 182+ for liquid contact electric switches in which an
    electric circuit is made through a conducting liquid.

    218,    High-Voltage Switches With Arc Preventing and Extinguishing
    Devices, subclasses 1+ for liquid contact electric switches in which an
    electric circuit is made through a conducting liquid.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for systems for supplying electrical energy to liquid electrode
    lamps during the starting and operating periods.  See subclasses 289+,
    where the system includes means for generating a surge of potential during
    the starting period.  See subclasses 327+, where the electrodes are in
    contact with each other during the starting.  See subclasses 328+, where
    the discharge device is tilted to flow the liquid electrode into contact
    with the other electrode.  See subclasses 330+ and 335+ where the device is
    provided with an auxiliary starting electrode.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 47+ for electromagnetically operated switches
    utilizing conductive liquid.


CLS 313/164
TXT Discharge devices under subclass 163 provided with means to prevent damage
    to the device by movement of the liquid during handling.


CLS 313/165
TXT Discharge devices under subclass 163 having a plurality of liquid
    electrodes.

    (1)     Note.  One of the liquid electrodes may be an auxiliary starting
    electrode, an auxiliary holding electrode, or both liquid electrodes may be
    principal discharge electrodes.


CLS 313/166
TXT Discharge devices under subclass 163 having an envelope and having an
    electrode exteriorly of the envelope.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes discharge devices provided with two
    electrodes within the envelope and a metal band surrounding the envelope in
    the vicinity of the liquid electrode.  The external electrode may also be a
    conductor member exterior of the envelope which extends from one of the
    electrodes into the vicinity of the liquid electrode.  Also included are
    envelopes having re-entrant portions, a wire or rod electrode being within
    the re-entrant portion and exterior to the space enclosed by the envelope.
    The auxiliary electrodes in the devices in this subclass are often used to
    electrically stress the region near the liquid electrode to facilitate the
    initiation of the discharge in the device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 349+ and
    the subclasses specified in the notes thereto, for miscellaneous systems
    for supplying electrical energy to discharge devices of the liquid
    electrode type which are provided with a discharge controlling means,
    (e.g., external electrode).

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses and particularly subclass 368
    for an amplitude modulation demodulator utilizing an electron discharge
    device which may include an exterior liquid electrode.


CLS 313/167
TXT Discharge devices under subclass 163 having a liquid electrode and another
    principle discharge electrode (e.g., anode) and having a grid electrode or
    other apertured electrode located in the discharge space between the liquid
    electrode and the other principle electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    326,    for the miscellaneous electrodes which are provided with only a
    single aperture.

    348+,   for the structure of grid electrodes and other foraminous
    electrodes.

    356,    for the structure of tubular and other hollow sleeve-like
    electrodes.

    597+,   for gas or vapor discharge devices which are provided with a grid
    or apertured electrode interposed in the discharge space, the grid or
    apertured electrode and the anode being within a hollow shield.  The
    structures in subclasses 597+ are closely analogous to those used with
    liquid electrode discharge devices.  Also 597+, for other discharge devices
    having an envelope and a confined atmosphere or gas or vapor which have a
    grid or other apertured electrode interposed in the discharge space between
    the cathode and the anode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 349+ and
    the subclasses specified in the notes thereto for systems for supplying
    electrical energy to gas or vapor discharge devices and to liquid electrode
    discharge devices which have control electrodes.


CLS 313/168
TXT Discharge devices under subclass 163 having an envelope which is formed so
    as to have a portion for the liquid electrode and at least two separate
    anode chamber portions with anodes therein.

    (1)     Note.  In the structures in this subclass, the anode chambers serve
    to shield the anodes from each other so that discharges from one anode to
    another are made more difficult.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for liquid electrode devices which are provided with a condensing
    chamber and separate anode chambers for the anodes.

    169,    for the liquid electrode discharge devices which have a plurality
    of anodes with shielding means to prevent discharges between the anodes.

    634+,   for gas or vapor type discharge devices which are distinguished by
    the envelope structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 2.1+, for the structure of envelopes, per
    se, for discharge devices.


CLS 313/169
TXT Discharge devices under subclass 163 which has a plurality of anodes and
    which have a shield interposed between two of the anodes to prevent
    discharges from one anode to the other.

    (1)     Note.  In some of the devices in this subclass, each of the anodes
    is surrounded by a tubular sleeve which is the anode shield.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239,    for miscellaneous supporting structures for shields.

    326+,   for miscellaneous shield structures, note subclass 356 for the
    structure of tubular or hollow sleeve-like shields.

    590,    for other gas or vapor type discharge devices which have a shield
    interposed between two of the anodes to prevent a discharge therebetween.

    597+,   for gas or vapor type discharge devices which are provided with a
    hollow shield which encloses an anode and a grid-like electrode, the shield
    serving to prevent undesired discharges to the anode.

    614,    for gas or vapor type discharge devices which are provided with an
    anode shield to prevent undesired discharges to the anode.


CLS 313/170
TXT Discharge devices under subclass 163 having an auxiliary starting or
    holding electrode in addition to the principal discharge electrodes.

    (1)     Note.  See the "Definition of terms used in this class" in the
    class definition for the definition of "auxiliary starting electrode" and
    "holding electrode".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146+,   where the auxiliary electrode is movably mounted so that it may be
    brought into contact with the liquid electrode, see indented subclass 150,
    where the auxiliary electrode is a movable liquid electrode.

    596     and 601+, for other gas or vapor type discharge devices within the
    class definition which have an auxiliary starting electrode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 34, for discharge devices of the consumable electrode type (e.g.,
    arc lamps) which are provided with an auxiliary starting electrode.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses, for systems for supplying electrical energy to liquid electrode
    discharge devices during the starting and operating periods; see subclasses
    289+, where the systems include means for generating a surge of potential
    during the starting period, subclasses 330+, where the auxiliary electrode
    and one of the principal electrodes are brought into contact with each
    other during the starting operation, and subclasses 335+, for the
    miscellaneous systems where the discharge device is provided with an
    auxiliary starting or holding electrode.


CLS 313/171
TXT Discharge devices under subclass 170 in which the auxiliary electrode is in
    contact with or is wholly or partially immersed in the liquid electrode.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes discharge devices where the auxiliary
    electrode is encased in an insulating covering, the insulated electrode
    being wholly or partially immersed in the liquid electrode.  Also included
    are discharge devices which have a starting electrode of the "ignition"
    type (e.g., an electrode of high resistance material) which is in contact
    with the liquid electrode.


CLS 313/172
TXT Discharge devices under subclass 163 in which the liquid electrode makes
    contact with a plurality of other electrodes.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes discharge devices having two
    electrodes which are wholly or partially immersed in a conducting liquid
    (e.g., mercury), there being no electrical contact to the liquid excepting
    that made by the electrodes which are immersed in it. The devices in use
    are intended to volatilize the liquid thereby interrupting the circuit
    between the two electrodes to establish a discharge, the liquid forming the
    gas or vapor in which the discharge is to be maintained.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232,    for discharge devices in which the electrodes are immersed in a
    nonconducting liquid, the discharge creating a path for itself through the
    liquid.


CLS 313/173
TXT Discharge devices under subclass 163 provided with means to prevent the
    discharge from wandering over the surface of the liquid electrode.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of the devices found in this subclass are liquid
    electrode discharge devices having a pointed rod extending from the liquid
    electrode and discharge devices having restricting means such as an
    apertured baffle so that the discharge must pass through the aperture to
    reach the liquid electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    328,    for liquid electrode receptacles for use with liquid electrode
    discharge devices.


CLS 313/230
TXT Discharge devices under the class definition which are provided with an
    electrode or other device for emitting positive ions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163+,   for discharge devices which have a liquid electrode (e.g.,
    mercury), which is the source of positive ions during the operation of the
    device.

    359.1+, for discharge devices provided with means to form and accelerate
    positive or negative ions.

    567,    for discharge devices which are provided with an envelope
    containing an atmosphere of gas or vapor, the gas or vapor being ionized in
    the operation of the device and therefore being a source of positive ions.


CLS 313/231.01
TXT FLUENT MATERIAL SUPPLY OR FLOW DIRECTING MEANS:

    Subject matter under the class definition including (a) means to direct the
    flow of fluent material into the discharge area of a discharge device, (b)
    means to direct the flow of fluent material into contact with some part of
    the device, (c) means to direct the flow of gas vapor or smoke generated by
    an electrode in the operation of the device, or (d) means to direct the
    flow of gases or vapors which are caused to circulate due to having been
    heated by an electrode, the space discharge, or other part of the device.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes both lamps and space discharge
    devices with fluent material flow directing means. The space discharge
    devices in this and indented subclasses are not restricted to discharge
    devices having discharge electrodes but include discharge devices with an
    electrodeless discharge, for example, an induction-type discharge device.

    (2)     Note.  Smoke as used in this subclass includes all particles given
    off by the filament or an electrode in the operation of the device.

    (3)     Note.  Patents disclosing incandescent lamps and discharge devices
    having an envelope enclosing a gas or vapor, the device being provided with
    means to direct the flow of the gas or vapor which circulates within the
    envelope due to the gas or vapor becoming heated are cross-referenced to
    this subclass.

    (4)     Note.  See section VI of the class definition for a reference to
    other classes which provide for the treating of fluids with ray energy,
    electrons, or ions generated by space discharge devices or lamps.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     where the device is provided with an envelope and in internal
    temperature modifying baffle.

    34,     where the device is provided with an envelope which has a
    condensing chamber or surface for condensing the vapors within the envelope.

    35+,    for devices which are provided with means for directing the flow of
    a temperature modifying fluid to some part of the device.

    120,    for spark plugs provided with means to supply fluid from the
    exterior of the spark plug to the electrode chamber (e.g., with a priming
    cup).

    143,    for spark plugs having the electrode chamber shaped so as to direct
    the flow of gas or vapor.

    359.1+, for ion generators with means for accelerating the ions.

    564,    where the device is provided with an envelope and contains a getter
    or a gas or vapor generating material within the envelope and is provided
    with means for causing the material deposited from the getter or vapor to
    deposit in a particular place within the device.

    609+,   for discharge devices which are provided with an envelope
    containing a gas or vapor and which have a partition, baffle, constricting
    means, or a portion of the envelope wall between the discharge electrodes
    to alter the direction of the discharge or to constrict the area of the
    discharge path within the device.

    626,    for devices which are provided with an envelope containing a gas or
    vapor and which have shielding means for the electrode lead-in or electrode
    support to prevent the deposited material from being deposited in contact
    with the electrode lead-in or support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 15+ for electrostatic
    precipitators having analogous structure.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 251 for devices for producing and
    propagating a unidirectional stream of neutral molecules or atoms through a
    vacuum, usually with thermal velocity; subclasses 281+ for methods and
    apparatus for ionic separation or analysis; especially subclass 288 which
    includes a sample supply or invisible radiation responsive gas; subclasses
    379+ for discharge device apparatus which includes means to supply the gas
    into the discharge devices; subclasses 396+ for means to deflect, scan,
    spread, or focus a performed beam of ions; and subclasses 423+ for ion
    generation methods and apparatus in which a material is treated or
    irradiated.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 20 for discharge devices of the consumable electrode type (e.g.,
    arc lamps) which are provided with means for directing a fluent material
    into the discharge space to deflect the discharge out of its normal path;
    subclass 22 for consumable electrode discharge devices which have means to
    feed a fluent material (which may be solid particles) to the discharge
    space; and subclasses 26+ for consumable electrode discharge devices which
    are provided with a ventilator or fume director, see especially indented
    subclass 28.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 111.01+
    for discharge device load with fluent material supply to the discharge
    space.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 210 for ion or electron beam deflecting magnets,
    per se, and the search notes thereto for combinations including such magnet
    means.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclasses 100+ for processes or devices for directing or injecting
    electrically charged or accelerated particles into a plasma body wherein
    the intent is to obtain a nuclear fusion reaction.


CLS 313/231.11
TXT Lightning or surge arrester:

    Subject matter under subclass 231.01 including two electrodes designed and
    positioned to provide an internal series gap to protect an electric
    apparatus from high transient voltages.


CLS 313/231.21
TXT Expulsion type:

    Subject matter under subclass 231.11 including an arcing chamber in which a
    gas evolving or other arc-extinguishing material is brought into contact
    with the arc to interrupt the follow current.


CLS 313/231.31
TXT Plasma:

    Subject matter under subclass 231.01 including means for producing a plasma.

    (1)     Note.  Usually plasmas have a neutral net charge, but not
    necessarily so.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231.71, for arc discharge devices which produce visible light.


CLS 313/231.41
TXT Arc discharge type:

    Subject matter under subclass 231.31 including two electrodes between which
    an arc is developed and including structure to direct the produced plasma
    in a direction out of the device.


CLS 313/231.51
TXT With tangential fluent supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 231.41 including means for directing fluent
    material to the area of the arc and tangentially with respect to the
    direction the plasma is directed.


CLS 313/231.61
TXT Electromagentic output (i.e., light):

    Subject matter under subclass 231.41 including means to provide a visible
    light output.


CLS 313/231.71
TXT Arc discharge lamp or radiation source:

    Subject matter under subclass 231.01 including two electrodes between which
    an arc is developed and wherein the arc is the source of radiant energy.


CLS 313/232
TXT Devices under the class definition having an electrode which is wholly or
    partially immersed in a liquid.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes discharge devices which have the
    electrode wholly or partially immersed in a nonconducting liquid.  Where
    the electrodes are immersed in a conducting liquid see the subclasses
    referred to in the search notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto for devices which
    using liquids or which have means for directing the flow of a fluid towards
    some part of the device for the purpose of modifying the temperature of the
    device.

    163+    and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto, for discharge
    devices which are provided with a liquid electrode.  In the devices in
    subclasses 163+ the liquid electrode ordinarily has a lead-in wire immersed
    in the liquid and another electrode which may also be liquid which is not
    immersed in the liquid.  However, see the reference to subclass 172, infra.
     See subclass 171 where the discharge device is provided with an auxiliary
    starting electrode which is wholly or partially immersed in the liquid
    electrode.  See subclass 172 where a plurality of nonliquid electrodes are
    immersed in a liquid electrode which is vaporized during the operation of
    the discharge device the liquid supplying the vapor atmosphere for the
    device and serving to initiate the discharge between the nonliquid
    electrodes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.05, 61.47,
    81.6, 141, and 182+ for liquid contact switches.

    218,    High-Voltage Switches With Arc Preventing and Extinguishing
    Devices, subclasses 1+ for liquid contact switches.

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 47+ for electromagnetically actuated liquid
    contact switches.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 435 for
    electrolytic interrupters.


CLS 313/233
TXT Devices under the class definition which include an envelope and which are
    defined by the degree of vacuum in the envelope.

    (1)     Note.  The devices in the subclass contain no appreciable amount of
    gas and are intended to be operated as vacuum devices.  However, merely
    defining a device as a vacuum device will not be sufficient to cause
    classification of the patent in this subclass unless the degree of vacuum
    is specified.  Devices defined merely as vacuum devices are classified in
    the other appropriate subclass in this class.  Subclass 567 of this class
    provides for devices with a gas or vapor in the envelope even though the
    device is not intended to be operated with ionization of the gas or vapor.
    If the claims state that the device contains a gas or vapor, the patent is
    classified in subclass 567 even though the pressure is such that the device
    has the characteristics of a vacuum device.  See subclass 577, for such gas
    or vapor devices where the pressure is only a hundred microns (0.1 mm.) or
    less.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    567,    see (1) Note, above.

    577,    see (1) Note, above.


CLS 313/234
TXT Discharge devices under the class definition which include an envelope and
    which have at least one electrode of the device exterior to the space
    enclosed by the envelope.

    (1)     Note.  Some of the discharge devices in this subclass have one or
    more electrodes within the envelope and another electrode exterior to the
    envelope.  For example, the discharge device may have a cathode and an
    anode within the envelope, and a control electrode exterior to the envelope.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not include devices under the class
    definition which have an envelope formed in whole or part of metal or other
    conductive material and being designed for use as an electrode.  For such
    devices, see the subclasses referred to under "SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS"
    below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166,    where the discharge device is provided with a liquid (e.g.,
    mercury) electrode.

    246+,   for discharge devices which include an envelope, a part of the
    envelope being formed of metal or conductive material which is designed for
    use as an electrode, the device including means for supporting and/or
    spacing a plurality of electrodes in the envelope.

    607,    where the envelope contains a gas or vapor (i.e., gas or vapor type
    discharge devices).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses and particularly subclass 368
    for an amplitude modulation demodulator utilizing an electron discharge
    device which may include an exterior electrode.


CLS 313/235
TXT Devices under the class definition which include a plurality of electrodes
    which are maintained in imperfect electrical contact, the devices being
    designed so that the passage of electrical current from one electrode to
    the other will either produce light or cause the electrodes to be heated
    adjacent the ends of the electrodes which are in contact with each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315+,   and the subclasses specified in the notes to the definition of
    those subclasses for other incandescent lamps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    appropriate subclasses, for consumable electrode devices (e.g., arc lamps)
    which are provided with means for feeding one electrode towards the other
    as the electrode is consumed.


CLS 313/236
TXT Devices under the class definition which have a plurality of similar
    electrodes and which are provided with means other than the mere terminals
    of the electrodes so that one of the similar electrodes can be used to the
    exclusion of the other, the means being capable of selecting either of the
    similar electrodes for use.

    (1)     Note.  Some of the devices in this subclass are designed so that
    one electrode may be used until the electrode fails to operate properly and
    then another electrode may be substituted for the electrode which failed.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not include devices, which include no
    more structure than a device having the electrodes connected to separate
    terminals so that different electrodes may be selectively energized by
    connecting their respective terminals to proper sources of electrical
    current or potential without altering in any way the structure of the lamp
    or discharge device.  For example, excluded is a multiple filament lamp
    which is provided with three or four terminals so that either filament may
    be energized by connecting the current supply conductors to the proper
    filament terminals.  Also excluded is the control grid type discharge
    device which may be operated as a diode rectifier by either connecting the
    control grid to the anode or leaving the control grid unconnected.  The
    devices in this subclass include some structure in the lamp or discharge
    device which is provided only to make it possible to selectively use the
    electrodes.  For example, included in this subclass are two filament
    devices having three terminals for the filaments, one terminal being
    covered by insulation until one of the filaments fails when the insulation
    is removed and the other filament used. Also included are devices having
    two filaments with two terminals, one filament not being connected to a
    terminal, the device being provided with means for connecting the second
    filament to the terminals when the first filament fails.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     for devices under the class definition which are provided with
    means for converting the device into a different type of device, such as
    converting a three electrode discharge device so that it operates as a two
    electrode device.

    121,    for spark plugs having reversible parts so that a new part can be
    substituted for a worn part by reversing a part (e.g., as the core and
    center electrode).

    128,    for spark plugs having a plurality of center electrodes so that one
    may be used when the other is worn.

    140,    for spark plugs having a plurality of electrodes or an electrode
    with plural joints cooperating with another electrode so that as one
    electrode wears and the spark gap becomes too wide the spark will form
    between another electrode or electrode point (e.g., multigap spark plugs).

    237,    for devices under the class definition which are provided with
    means for replacing an electrode which is defective or which are provided
    with an envelope and parts that are made so that the device can be readily
    disassembled to repair a defective portion of the device.

    306+,   and the subclasses specified in the notes to the definition of
    those subclasses for discharge devices with three or more electrodes.

    316,    and the subclasses specified in the notes to the definition of
    those subclasses for  lamps having a plurality of filaments or glowers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclasses 1+ for discharge devices of the consumable electrode type (e.g.,
    arc lamps and similar devices provided with means for feeding the
    electrodes together) which have means for substituting one electrode for
    another when the first electrode is consumed or fails to operate properly.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 32+ for
    electric lamps and discharge devices which have structurally combined
    therewith a cir cuit element, such as a switch or fuse, which circuit
    element may be for the purpose of permitting the selective use of the
    electrodes of the device, see especially indented subclass 65 for lamps and
    discharge devices which include a plurality of filaments, one of which is
    maintained in nonoperated condition while another is in operative condition
    and which have means for automatically substituting the nonoperating
    filament for the operating filament when either the operating filament
    fails or when the conditions of the supply circuit change so that it is
    desirable that the nonoperating filament be substituted for the operating
    filament.  Subclasses 88+, for systems for supplying electrical energy to
    lamps and discharge devices which are provided with means for automatically
    substituting another electrode in the lamp or discharge device for an
    electrode which has failed or which is provided with means for substituting
    another lamp or discharge device for a lamp or discharge device which has
    failed.


CLS 313/237
TXT Devices under the class definition which are provided with an envelope and
    which have means for replacing a defective electrode, or which the envelope
    and parts of the device made so the device can be readily disassembled to
    repair or replace a part of the device.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are devices provided with glass or
    other envelopes which are made so that the envelope can be readily opened
    or an opening made therein so that a new electrode can be inserted in the
    device.  Also included are devices which have an electrode in the envelope
    not mounted on its supports or in position for use and which include means
    so that the electrode can be brought into position on the supports to
    replace a defective electrode.  The defective electrode is usually removed
    from contact with its lead wires or supporting means and a new electrode
    substituted for the defective electrode, the defective electrode being
    stored within the device or entirely removed from the device. Where the
    device has a plurality of electrodes which are provided with individual
    lead wires or supporting means, one electrode remaining inactive while
    another is active, means being provided to change the connections to the
    terminals of the electrodes so that the inactive electrode may be used if
    it is so desired, see subclass 236 of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118+,   for spark plugs which are demountable see subclass 119 where the
    spark plug is provided with sealing off means so that a part (e.g., the
    core) can be removed and repaired without stopping the ending, subclass 121
    where the repair is made by reversing the position of a part (e.g., of the
    insulator), subclass 122 where the spark plug has a removable electrode on
    the shell, and subclasses 144+ for spark plugs with particular joint
    structure permitting disassembly of the plug.

    236,    where the device includes a plurality of electrodes and which are
    provided with means so that one electrode can be used to the exclusion of
    another until the first electrode fails and has means for substituting the
    second electrode therefor.  See (1) Note above.

    314,    for devices under the class definition which are especially
    designed to be nonrepairable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 2.1+ for envelopes, per se, for lamps and
    discharge devices.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclasses 1+ for discharge devices of the consumable electrode type (e.g.,
    arc lamps and similar devices provided with means for feeding the
    electrodes together) which have means for replacing and electrode with
    another when the first electrode is consumed or fails to operate properly.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    subclass 2 for methods for repairing electric lamps and discharge devices
    and subclass 61 for the corresponding apparatus.


CLS 313/238
TXT Devices under the class definition having means for supporting an electrode
    or a shielding structure, and/or provided with means to space an electrode,
    or a shield, or a support for an electrode or shield with respect to
    another part of the device.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses provide only for patents
    which claim significant supporting and/or spacing structure for the
    electrode or shield. Where the claim broadly recites supporting and/or
    spacing means for the electrode and shield and no structure of the
    supporting and/or spacing means is included in the claim, the patent is
    excluded from this and the indented subclasses and will be found in one of
    the other appropriate subclasses of this class.  Where the patent for the
    device discloses or claims structure in addition to the supporting and/or
    spacing structure for an electrode or a shield, the patent is classified in
    this or one of the indented subclasses, and is cross-referenced for the
    additional structure to the other subclasses below these subclasses.  This
    and the indented subclasses also include cross-references of lamps and
    discharge devices which disclose specific supporting and/or spacing
    structure for an electrode or shield which are classified in the preceding
    subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  A spacer is a means, such as a rod, bar, or plate, provided
    to maintain an electrode or shield or a supporting member in spaced
    relation with respect to another part of the device, and is usually in
    addition to the means for supporting the electrode or shield with respect
    to the supporting base or envelope of the device.  Members interposed
    between two different electrodes or electrode supports are considered
    spacing members.  Members interposed between an electrode and the envelope
    of the device which are not intended to support the mass of the electrode
    with respect to the envelope are spacing members.  Where one electrode is
    mounted upon a second electrode, as for example, being wound upon or coiled
    about the second electrode, the second electrode is a spacing member.
    Spacers are usually mounted upon, and supported by, an electrode or
    electrode support, but a spacer interposed between two electrodes may serve
    to at least partially support the third electrode with respect to a
    supporting base.

    (3)     Note.  For the definition of "electrode" and "shield", see
    "Definition of Terms Used in this Class" in the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for devices under the class definition which have a heat transfer
    means (e.g., cooling fins) mounted upon an electrode support or which have
    an electrode support designed to modify the flow of heat along the
    electrode support (e.g., to restrict or accelerate the flow of heat).

    49,     for devices under the class definition which are provided with a
    support for the device.

    118+,   for spark plugs with supporting and spacing structure. 146, for
    devices under the class definition which have an electrode or shield
    movably mounted upon its support.

    237,    for devices under the class definition which have an electrode and
    a spare electrode, the supporting means for the electrode being designed so
    that the first electrode may be removed from its support when it fails to
    operate properly and the second electrode substituted therefor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous supports for
    articles.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    appropriate subclasses for discharge devices of the consumable electrode
    type (e.g., arc lamps and similar devices which are provided with means for
    feeding the electrodes together as they are consumed) which have supporting
    and/or spacing structure for an electrode or shield.


CLS 313/239
TXT Devices under subclass 238 having supporting and/or spacing structure for a
    shield.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of shield, see "Definition of Terms Used
    in this Class" in the class definition.  Note that shields do not include
    shield grid electrodes, see the reference to subclass 265 below.

    (2)     Note.  Devices which are provided with an envelope made in whole or
    part of metal or conductive material and which include supporting and/or
    spacing structure for an electrode or shield other than the metal or
    conductive envelope portion (such as an electrode or shield within the
    envelope or an electrode or shield exterior to the envelope) are classified
    as follows. This subclass includes those devices with a metal or conductive
    envelope where the the envelope is disclosed or claimed as being provided
    for shielding purposes and where such envelope is not designed for use as
    an electrode of the device, such as the anode, and no other shielding
    structure is claimed.  Where other shielding structure is claimed, the
    patent is classified in the appropriate indented subclass.  Where the metal
    or conductive envelope is designed for use as an electrode, the patent is
    classified in either subclasses 246+ where the supporting and/or spacing
    structure for a plurality of electrodes is claimed or in subclass 317 where
    no other supporting or spacing structure is claimed.  Where the metal or
    conductive envelope is not claimed not disclosed as either a shield or as
    an electrode, but one or more electrodes are supported by the conductive
    envelope portion, the patent is classified in subclass 248 where the
    supporting and/or spacing structure for a plurality of electrodes is
    claimed and in subclass 281 or 282 where the supporting and/or spacing
    structure for only a single electrode is claimed. Envelopes, per se, having
    at least a portion of the envelope formed of metal or conductive material
    are in Class 220, subclass 2.3, or in one of the classes specified in the
    notes to the definition of that subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11+,    for devices under the subclass which are provided with means for
    supporting and/or spacing a heat transfer device (e.g., radiating fins), or
    which are provided with means for supporting and/or spacing a heat
    shielding means. See especially subclasses 37+ where the device is provided
    with a heat shield for a cathode or filament, and subclass 47 for devices
    with miscellaneous heat shields.

    265,    for discharge devices under subclass 238 which have means for
    supporting a grid electrode or other apertured electrode between two other
    electrodes (e.g., which have means for supporting a shield grid) but which
    do not have any means for supporting or spacing a shield.

    246+,   see (2) Note, above.

    248,    see (2) Note, above.

    281,    see (2) Note, above.

    282,    see (2) Note, above.

    317,    see (2) Note, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

     220,   Receptacles, subclass 2.3, see (2) Note, above.


CLS 313/240
TXT Devices under subclass 239 having the shield supported by an electrode, an
    electrode support, or an electrode spacing member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11+,    for devices under the subclass definition which have a heat
    transfer means or a heat shielding means mounted upon an electrode,
    electrode support or electrode spacing member.  See subclasses 37+ for
    devices with filaments or cathodes which are provided with heat shields,
    subclasses 39+ where the heat transfer means or heat shield is for an
    electrode within the envelope, usually being supported on or forming part
    of the electrode, and subclass 42 where the heat is mounted upon an
    electrode support.


CLS 313/241
TXT Discharge devices under subclass 240 having a plurality of electrodes
    mounted in side by side, concentric or co-axial relation, one end of the
    electrodes being positioned in substantially co-planar relation, and the
    shield being supported so that it extends across the ends of the electrodes.


CLS 313/242
TXT Devices under subclass 239 in which the device is enclosed within an
    envelope which is provided with a stem, the shield being either supported
    by the stem or the stem being formed so as to constitute a shield.

    (1)     Note.  A stem is the portion of the envelope which is usually used
    for supporting the support wires for the electrodes and for sealing in the
    lead-in wires for the electrodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for devices under the class definition which are provided with a
    heat transfer device or a heat shield for protecting the lead-in-seal or
    the stem of the envelope.

    219,    for discharge devices which have an envelope containing an
    atmosphere of gas or vapor, the discharge device including a shield which
    is supported by the stem or which is a part of the stem for shielding the
    electrode support or lead-in wire.

    317+,   for devices under the class definition which have an enclosing
    envelope.


CLS 313/243
TXT Discharge devices under subclass 238 having means for supporting a
    plurality of electrodes of the discharge device or having means for spacing
    a plurality of electrodes of the discharge device either from each other or
    with respect to another part of the discharge device.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and subclasses 267 and 268 provide for the
    discharge devices which do not have an envelope and which have supporting
    and/or spacing structure for a plurality of electrodes.  Indented subclass
    244 provides for discharge devices which have an envelope and supporting
    and/or spacing structure for plural electrodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118+,   for spark plugs having supporting and spacing structure for a
    plurality of spark electrodes.


CLS 313/244
TXT Discharge devices under subclass 243 in which the device is enclosed within
    an envelope, the electrodes being supported by or forming part of the
    enclosing envelope.

    (1)     Note.  The electrodes need not be supported directly upon the
    envelope, but may be supported upon support rods or other support members
    which are supported by the enclosing envelope.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239+,   where the discharge device also includes supporting and/or spacing
    structure for a shield.

    283,    and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto for other devices
    under the class definition which include an envelope and an electrode, the
    electrode being supported by the envelope.


CLS 313/245
TXT Discharge devices under subclass 244 having means for supporting and/or
    spacing three or more electrodes which are arranged to form a plurality of
    separate discharge spaces.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are discharge devices having a
    plurality of anodes and a cathode, or a plurality of cathodes and an anode.
     Also included are cross-references of discharge devices of the plural unit
    type (e.g., each cathode having a separate anode) where significant
    supporting and/or spacing structure is disclosed.

    (2)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses do not provide for the
    supporting and spacing structure for discharge devices which are provided
    only with a cathode, a second electrode (e.g., anode) with which the
    cathode forms a first discharge space, and a third electrode in the form of
    a grid or foraminous electrode interposed in the discharge space formed by
    the cathode and second electrode even though the disclosure and claims of
    the patent state that the third electrode is intended to receive electrons
    emitted by the cathode.  The supporting and/or spacing structure for such
    discharge devices is in subclass 265 and the subclasses specified in the
    notes to the definition of that subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for plural unit discharge devices (i.e., discharge devices having a
    plurality of separate cathodes, each cathode having a separate anode).

    239+,   for this subject matter where the discharge device includes a
    shield between the separate discharge spaces and means for supporting the
    shield.

    265,    see (2) note, above.

    306+,   and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto for patents for
    discharge devices having three or more electrodes arranged to form a
    plurality of separate discharge spaces where no significant supporting
    and/or spacing structure for the electrodes is claimed.


CLS 313/246
TXT Discharge devices under subclass 244 having at least one of the electrodes
    forming at least part of the envelope wall.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses include patents for
    discharge devices where the device has at least a portion of the envelope
    formed of metal or conductive material, the metal or conductive portion of
    the envelope being defined as an electrode, and where the claims include
    the supporting and/or spacing structure for a plurality of electrodes.
    Where only a single electrode which forms at least part of the envelope
    wall is claimed, the patent is classified in Class 220, Receptacles,
    subclass 2.3 if only envelope structure is claimed or in subclasses 317+ of
    class 313 if structure is claimed which limits the device to being a
    discharge device.  See section XII of the class definition.  Where the
    conductive envelope forms a shield for the enclosed electrodes, and
    supporting or spacing structure for the electrodes is claimed the patent is
    classified in subclasses 239+.  (See (2) Note to the definition of subclass
    239).  Where the conductive envelope forms neither a shield nor an
    electrode, but has a plurality of electrodes supported by the conductive
    wall portion, the patent is classified in subclass 248. Envelopes, per se,
    which have a conductive wall portion are in subclasses 317+ or in one of
    the classes specified in the notes to the definition of that subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18+,    for discharge devices which have an electrode forming part of the
    envelope wall and which have a casing or jacket surrounding the electrode,
    the casing or jacket being designed to receive a heat transfer medium
    (e.g., fluid cooled metal envelope devices).

    239+,   see (1) Note above.

    248,    see (1) Note above.

    281,    for devices having an electrode supported in an aperture in a
    conductive wall.

    282,    for devices having an electrode supported by supports which form
    part of or are attached to the conductive wall of an envelope.

    317+,   see (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 2.3 see (1) note above.


CLS 313/247
TXT Discharge devices under subclass 246 wherein the electrode which forms part
    of the envelope wall is in the form of a hollow body having an open end,
    the open end being closed either by means of another electrode which is
    electrically insulated from the hollow electrode or by a closure which
    supports another electrode in electrical insulating relation with respect
    to the hollow electrode.


CLS 313/248
TXT Discharge devices under subclass 244 which have at least part of the
    envelope formed of electrically conductive material, a plurality of
    electrodes or supports for a plurality of electrodes being supported by the
    conductive portion of the envelope wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239+,   where the discharge device is enclosed within an envelope which has
    a conductive wall portion, and the wall portion is disclosed or claimed as
    being a shield.  See note 2 to the definition of subclass 239.

    246+,   where the conductive wall portion is claimed or disclosed as being
    an electrode, and supporting and/or spacing structure for a plurality of
    electrodes is claimed.

    281,    for devices under the class definition having the conductive
    envelope portion provided with an aperture and an electrode mounted in or
    around the aperture.

    282,    for devices under subclass 238 where the device is provided with an
    envelope, the electrode support being either formed of or attached to a
    conductive wall portion of the envelope.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 2.3 for envelopes, per se, with conductive
    wall portions.


CLS 313/249
TXT Discharge devices under subclass 244 where the envelope is elongated, the
    electrodes being mounted in spaced relation along the longitudinal axis of
    the envelope.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    245,    for discharge devices with supporting and/or spacing structure for
    three or more electrodes which are arranged to form a plurality of separate
    discharge spaces, a plurality of the electrodes being mounted in spaced
    relation along the length of another electrode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 98 for oscillators utilizing disk seal tubes
    (e.g., lighthouse, pencil tube) enclosed by distributed parameter
    resonators.


CLS 313/250
TXT Devices under subclass 249 provided with electrode spacing means interposed
    between different electrodes or different electrode supports.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of "spacer", see (2) Note to the
    definition of subclass 238.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257+,   for other  discharge devices having a plurality of electrodes
    supported upon supporting rods, wires or tubes which are supported by the
    envelope of the device, the device being provided with spacing means for
    the electrodes or electrode supports.

    285,    for devices within the class definition which are provided with an
    envelope and which have an electrode supported by means of a plurality of
    support wires, rods, or tubes which are supported by the envelope, a spacer
    member being provided between the different electrode support wires, rods
    or tubes.

    288,    for devices within the class definition which are provided with an
    envelope and which have an electrode supported by means of a supporting
    wire, rod, or tube which is supported by the envelope, a spacer member
    being provided between the electrode or the electrode support and the
    envelope wall.


CLS 313/251
TXT Discharge devices under subclass 249 having a plurality of electrodes
    supported by a common support wire, rod or tube, the electrodes being
    spaced along the longitudinal axis of the supporting wire, rod or tube.


CLS 313/252
TXT Discharge devices under subclass 244 having electrodes which are supported
    by supporting structure, such as wires, rods, or tubes, the supporting
    structure being supported by the envelope.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11+,    for devices under the class definition which are provided with an
    envelope and which have a heat transfer device (e.g., radiating fins, etc.)
    or means to modify the temperature of the device (e.g., heat conserving
    means) mounted upon the electrode or electrode support.  See subclass 37
    where the filament or cathode is provided with such means, subclass 39
    where the heat transfer means or temperature modifying device is for an
    electrode, and subclass 42 where such means are mounted upon an electrode
    support.

    245,    where the discharge device has the electrodes arranged to form a
    plurality of separate discharge spaces (e.g., has plural cathodes and/or
    anodes).

    246+,   where at least one of the electrodes forms at least part of the
    envelope wall.

    248,    in which the envelope is formed of conductive material the
    electrode supports being supported by the conductive envelope wall.

    249+,   where the envelope is elongated and the electrodes are mounted in
    spaced relation along the longitudinal axis of the envelope.

    284+,   and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto for devices
    within the class definition which have an envelope and an electrode
    supported by a supporting member which is supported by the envelope.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity: Conductors and Insulators, subclass 50.54 for
    miscellaneous hermetically sealed envelopes of general application which
    are limited to electrical use which include means to mount an electrical
    device within the envelope.


CLS 313/253
TXT Discharge devices under subclass 252 which have at least one of the
    supporting wires, rods, or tubes supported by a part of the envelope wall
    which is opposite to or spaced at a distance from the part of the envelope
    wall which supports either a different portion of the same support wire,
    rod or tube or another supporting wire, rod or tube.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses do not include discharge
    devices where all the supporting rods, wires or tubes are sealed into a
    common stem or press of the envelope even though the support wires, rods or
    tubes are widely spaced from each other.

    (2)     Note.  One of the common type structures found in this and the
    indented subclasses is the so-called "multiple ended" discharge devices,
    that is discharge devices having a stem or press at each end of a
    substantially tubular envelope, a support wire, rod, or tube being
    supported by each of the stems or presses.

    (3)     Note.  The support wires, rods or tubes which are supported by the
    opposed parts of the envelope may support the same electrode or different
    electrodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247,    where the envelope wall includes a hollow conductive part which is
    designed for use as an electrode, other electrodes being supported within
    the envelope by means of one or more support wires, rods or tubes which are
    supported by the opposed end closures of the hollow electrode.

    274,    for devices under the class definition having a filament enclosed
    within an envelope, the filament being supported by supporting means which
    are supported by opposed or spaced parts of the envelope.

    286,    for devices under the class definition having an electrode enclosed
    within an envelope, the electrode being supported by one or more support
    rods, wires or tubes which are supported by opposed parts of the envelope
    wall.


CLS 313/254
TXT Discharge devices under subclass 253 wherein electrode support wires, rods
    or tubes are supported by three or more opposed or spaced parts of the
    envelope wall.


CLS 313/255
TXT Discharge devices under subclass 253 which have the support wire, rod or
    tube which supports an electrode supported by a plurality of spaced or
    opposed parts of the envelope, or which have an electrode supported by a
    plurality of support wires, rods or tubes, different ones of the support
    wires, rods or tubes being supported by different opposed or spaced parts
    of the envelope.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for the patents for the discharge
    devices where the support structure for a plurality of electrodes is
    claimed, at least one electrode being supported by a support wire, rod or
    tube which is supported by opposed or spaced parts of the envelope.  Where
    the discharge device has one electrode supported by support wires, rods or
    tubes which are supported by only one portion of the envelope, and another
    electrode supported by support wires, rods or tubes which are supported
    only by an opposed or spaced part of the envelope, the patent will be
    classified in subclass 253 or subclass 254.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247,    where the envelope wall includes a hollow conductive part which is
    designed for use as an electrode, another electrode being supported by
    means of one or more support wires, rods or tubes which are supported by
    the opposed end closures of the hollow electrode.


CLS 313/256
TXT Discharge devices under subclass 252 where the supporting structure is a
    rod or tube made of insulating or ceramic material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257+,   for discharge devices under subclass 252 which have a spacing
    structure which includes an insulating or ceramic member between the
    electrodes or electrode supports, or between one or more electrodes or
    electrode supports and the envelope wall.  See subclass 262 where the
    spacing structure includes a ceramic (e.g., glass) bead.

    289,    for devices under the class definition which have and envelope and
    a supporting rod or tube which is formed of insulating or ceramic material
    for supporting the electrode of the device.


CLS 313/257
TXT Discharge devices under subclass 252 which have a spacer member interposed
    between different electrodes or different electrode supports.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of "spacer" see (2) Note to the
    definition of subclass 238.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241,    where the discharge device has a spacer member and a shielding
    member extending across the ends of a plurality of electrodes.

    250,    where the discharge device has an elongated envelope and the
    electrodes are supported along the longitudinal axis of the envelope, a
    spacer member being interposed between different electrodes or different
    electrode supports.

    255,    where the discharge device is a double ended device, that is it has
    an electrode supported by support wires, rods or tubes which are supported
    at both of two opposed or spaced parts of the envelope.

    268,    for discharge devices which are not enclosed within an envelope
    which have a spacer member interposed between the electrodes.

    285+,   for devices under the class definition which have an electrode
    supported by means of a plurality of support wires, rods or tubes within an
    envelope, a spacer member being interposed between at least two of the
    support wires, rods or tubes or between the electrode or the electrode
    support and the envelope.  See subclass 288 where the spacer is between the
    envelope and the electrode or support.

    292,    for miscellaneous supporting and spacing elements, per se.


CLS 313/258
TXT Discharge devices under subclass 257 having a spacer member interposed
    between the envelope of the discharge device and an electrode or an
    electrode support.

    (1)     Note.  The spacer member which engages the envelope may be the same
    spacer member which it interposed between the different electrodes or
    electrode supports, or it may be a spacer member in addition to the
    inter-electrode or inter-electrode support spacer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    288,    for devices under the class definition which have an envelope and
    an electrode within the envelope supported by a wire, rod or tube which is
    supported by the envelope, a spacer member being interposed between the
    envelope and the electrode or electrode support.


CLS 313/259
TXT Discharge devices under subclass 257 in which the spacing member is formed
    by an insulating coating.

    (1)     Note.  In some of the discharge devices in this subclass, an
    electrode or electrode support is coated with an insulating coating, and
    another electrode is wound upon or coiled about the electrode or electrode
    support, the insulating coating spacing and insulating the electrode from
    the supporting electrode or electrode support.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes devices where the spacer member is
    formed of conductive material provided with an insulating coating so that
    the electrodes will be spaced and insulated from each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    355,    for the structure of electrodes which have a coating thereon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product (in the form of a single or plural layer web,
    sheet, rod, fiber or filament), and especially subclasses 375+ for
    electrodes for lamps and discharge devices which involve no more than a
    base with a coating thereon.


CLS 313/260
TXT Discharge devices under subclass 257 having the electrodes mounted in side
    by side, concentric or co-axial relation, one end of the electrodes being
    positioned in substantially co-planar relation, an electrode spacer having
    the form of a plate or bar mounted in contact with the electrodes or
    electrode supports to maintain the electrodes in spaced relation with each
    other, the plate or bar extending across the ends of the electrodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241,    where the discharge device is also provided with a shield member
    which extends across the ends of the electrodes.

    255,    where the electrode supports are supported by both of two opposed
    or spaced parts of the envelope (e.g., double ended discharge devices).


CLS 313/261
TXT Discharge devices under subclass 260 having a plate or bar electrode spacer
    which extends across the ends of the electrodes at each of the opposite
    ends of the electrodes.


CLS 313/262
TXT Discharge devices under subclass 257 having a plurality of the wires, rods
    or tubes which support the electrodes from the envelope wall joined to an
    insulating or ceramic bead, or which have a plurality of wires or rods
    attached to different electrodes and joined to an insulating or ceramic
    bead so that the wires or rods and the bead serve to maintain one electrode
    in spaced relation to another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256,    for discharge devices under subclass 252, which have an insulating
    or ceramic supporting rod or tube which supports the electrodes and is
    supported by the envelope, a plurality of electrodes having wires or rods
    attached to them, the wires or rods being joined to the insulating or
    ceramic support rod so as to space one electrode from another.


CLS 313/263
TXT Discharge devices under subclass 252 having supporting means for an
    indirectly heated cathode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    260+,   where the discharge device has a plurality of electrodes including
    an indirectly heated cathode mounted in side by side, co-axial, or
    concentric relation, one end of the electrodes being positioned in
    substantially coplanar relation, a plate or bar electrode spacer extending
    across the ends of the electrodes.  See subclass 261 where the discharge
    device has a plate or bar electrode spacer at each end of the electrode
    assembly.

    270,    for other supporting structure for indirectly heated cathodes.


CLS 313/264
TXT Discharge devices under subclass 252 having supporting means for a
    U-shaped, V-shaped or plural section filament.

    (1)     Note.  W-shaped filaments are included as V-shaped filaments.

    (2)     Note.  A plural section filament is a filament which is composed of
    a plurality fo filament wires connected to common leading-in wires.  The
    plurality of filaments may be connected to the leading-in wires so that the
    filament sections are electrically connected in parallel, or a filament
    section may be connected to a leading-in wire and a conductive support,
    another filament section being connected to the same conductive support and
    another leading-in wire so that the filament sections are electrically
    connected in series.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    260+,   where the discharge device has a plurality of electrodes including
    a U-shaped, V-shaped or plural section filament mounted in side by side,
    co-axial or concentric relation, one end of the electrodes being positioned
    in substantially co-planar relation, a plate or bar electrode spacer
    extending across the ends of the electrodes.  See subclass 261 where the
    device has a plate or bar electrode spacer at each end of the electrode
    assembly.

    271+,   for other devices under the class definition which have supporting
    structure for filaments.


CLS 313/265
TXT Miscellaneous discharge devices under subclass 252 having a foraminous or
    grid electrode supported between two other electrodes.

    (1)     Note.  As this is the miscellaneous subclass under subclass 252
    where the discharge device is provided with a grid or apertured electrode,
    cross-references of disclosures classified either as original copies or
    cross-reference copies in subclass 253 to 264 are not placed in this
    subclass.

    (2)     Note.  In some of the devices in this subclass the foraminous or
    grid electrode is intended to be used to control the discharge between the
    anode and cathode of the discharge device. In other of the devices, the
    interposed foraminous or grid-like electrode is intended to be used as an
    anode in the discharge device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241,    where the discharge device is provided with a plurality of
    discharge electrodes which are mounted in side by side, coaxial or
    concentric relation, an end of the electrodes being located in
    substantially coplanar relation, a shield electrode extending across the
    ends of the electrodes.

    245,    where the discharge device includes four or more electrodes which
    are arranged to form at least two different discharge spaces, one of the
    discharge spaces having a foraminous or grid electrode mounted therein.

    247,    for this subject matter where the envelope of the discharge device
    is formed of metal or conductive material, the hollow metal or conductive
    portion of the envelope being designed for use as an electrode of the
    discharge device, and having a foraminous or grid electrode supported by
    the end closure of the hollow metal or conductive envelope portion.

    248,    where the envelope of the discharge device is made of metal or
    conductive material, and a plurality of electrodes, including a foraminous
    or grid electrode, are supported by the metallic or conductive envelope
    wall.

    249,    for this subject matter where the discharge device envelope is
    elongated, and a plurality of electrodes, including a foraminous or grid
    electrode, are supported in spaced relation along the longitudinal axis of
    the envelope.

    253     through 264, see (1) Note, above.

    293+    for patents for discharge devices within the class definition which
    have a foraminous or grid electrode interposed between two other electrodes
    and where no significant supporting and/or spacing structure for the
    electrodes is claimed.

    348+,   for the structure of foraminous or grid electrodes, per se.


CLS 313/266
TXT Devices under subclass 252 which have the structure of the envelope part or
    the envelope stem or press which supports the electrode supporting wire,
    rod or tube modified.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes patents where significant structure
    of the envelope part, stem or press which supports the electrode supporting
    wire, rod or tube is claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242,    where the discharge device has a shield supported by or forming
    part of the envelope stem.

    246+,   for discharge devices under subclass 243 which have at least a
    portion of the envelope wall formed of metal or conductive material, the
    metallic or conductive portion being designed for use as an electrode,
    means being provided to support an electrode within the discharge device.

    248,    for discharge devices under subclass 243 which have have at least a
    part of the envelope wall formed of metal or conductive material, a
    plurality of electrodes being supported by the metallic or conductive wall
    of the envelope.

    271,    for devices under subclass 238 where the device has an envelope and
    a filament supported within the envelope, the structure of the envelope
    part or the envelope stem or press which supports the electrode supporting
    structure being modified.

    290,    for miscellaneous devices under subclass 238 where the device has
    an envelope and an electrode supported within the envelope, the structure
    of the envelope part or the envelope stem or press which supports the
    electrode supporting structure being modified.

    317+,   and the classes and subclasses specified in the notes to the
    definition of those subclasses for the structure of envelopes for discharge
    devices and electric lamps.

    626,    for gas or vapor type discharge devices which have a shield (where
    may be a part of the envelope wall, stem or press) for an electrode support.


CLS 313/267
TXT Discharge devices under subclass 243 having means for supporting and/or
    spacing a plurality of rod-like electrodes.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes arc lamps and similar discharge
    devices which are provided with a plurality of rod-like electrodes and
    which are usually intended to have the arc or other discharge maintained
    between the ends of the electrodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238,    for patents claiming the structure for supporting only a single rod
    electrode of a discharge device.

    325,    for patents claiming electric discharge devices having rod-like
    electrodes where no significant supporting and/or spacing structure is
    claimed.

    357,    and the subclasses specified in the notes to the definition of that
    subclass for the structure of rod electrodes, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, Consumable Electrodes,
    appropriate subclasses for discharge devices of the consumable electrode
    type (e.g., arc lamps and similar devices having means for feeding the
    electrodes together as they are consumed) which have supporting and/or
    spacing structure for a plurality of rod-like electrodes.


CLS 313/268
TXT Miscellaneous discharge devices under subclass 243 which have an insulating
    spacer member interposed between two of the discharge electrodes.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of "spacer", see (2) Note to the
    definition of subclass 238.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246,    for discharge devices which have a tubular envelope portion of
    insulating material, the ends of the tubular member having closures of
    conductive material which are designed for use as electrodes of the
    discharge device, the electrodes and the insulating tubular portion forming
    the envelope of the discharge device.

    257+,   and the subclasses specified in the notes to the definition of
    those subclasses for discharge devices which are provided with an envelope
    and which have an insulating spacer interposed between two discharge
    electrodes or their supports, the electrodes being supported by support
    wires, rods or tubes within the envelope.


CLS 313/269
TXT Devices under subclass 238 which have in addition to the supporting and/or
    spacing structure for the electrodes, means to damp mechanical vibrations
    of an electrode or an electrode support.

    (1)     Note.  The means provided is sometimes a weight mounted upon the
    electrode or electrode support so as to give the electrode a greater mass
    so that the vibrations are damped.

    (2)     Note.  Where the vibration damping means involves only the
    structure of the electrode or the electrode supporting means, such as
    providing either rigid or resilient supporting means or making the
    electrode or its support of a specific shape, the patent is not classified
    in this subclass, but will be found in subclass 238 or one of the other
    subclasses indented under subclass 238.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     for devices under the class definition which are provided with a
    detachable electric connector (e.g., socket) or support which includes
    resilient supporting means for the lamp or discharge device or which is
    provided with vibration damping means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, for miscellaneous means for retarding the motion of moving
    mechanism by friction, by positive engagement of elements or by the
    internal resistance of a fluid or a field of force.  See especially
    subclasses 378+ for structures which include a weight designed for
    attachment to a moving member to damp the vibrations of the member.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 560+ for miscellaneous resilient supports.


CLS 313/270
TXT Devices under subclass 238 which have supporting and/or spacing structure
    for an indirectly heated cathode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263,    and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto where the device
    is a discharge device which has a plurality of electrodes including an
    indirectly heated cathode supported by support structure within an envelope.

    310,    and the subclasses specified in the notes to the definition of that
    subclass for discharge devices which have an indirectly heated cathode.

    337+,   for the structure of indirectly heated cathodes, per se.


CLS 313/271
TXT Devices under subclass 238 which have supporting and/or spacing structure
    for a filament.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the patents in this and the indented subclasses are
    patents for incandescent lamps.  Where only the supporting and spacing
    structure for an incandescent lamp filament is disclosed and claimed, the
    patent is classified in this or one of the indented subclasses and is not
    cross-referenced into any of the subclasses below this or the indented
    subclasses.  Where novel structure in addition to the mere filament
    supporting and/or spacing structure is disclosed or claimed, appropriate
    cross-references are made.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244+,   for discharge devices under subclass 238 which have an envelope and
    a plurality of electrodes, one of which is a filament supported within the
    envelope.

    315+,   for miscellaneous incandescent lamps.  Patents claiming
    incandescent lamps but which do not claim any significant supporting and/or
    spacing structure for the lamp filament are classified in subclasses 315+
    or in one of the subclasses specified in the notes to the definition of
    that subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 49+ for miscellaneous pipe or cable supports.


CLS 313/272
TXT Devices under subclass 271 having supporting and/or spacing structure for a
    plurality of filaments at least two of which are separately energizable.

    (1)     Note.  Where the device has a plurality of filaments all of which
    are connected to the same lead-in wires so that all of the filaments must
    be energized together, the structure is considered to be supporting and/or
    spacing structure for a plural section filament and classified in subclass
    273.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    245,    for discharge devices under subclass 238 which have means for
    supporting and/or spacing a plurality of electrodes which form a plurality
    of separate discharge spaces, at least two of which are emissive filaments.

    273,    see (1) Notes, above.

    306,    and the subclasses specified in the notes to the definition of that
    subclass for discharge devices under the class definition which have a
    plurality of emissive filaments and which do not include any significant
    supporting and/or spacing structure for the electrodes.

    316,    for incandescent lamps which have a plurality of separately
    energized filaments which do not involve any significant supporting and/or
    spacing structure for the filaments.


CLS 313/273
TXT Devices under subclass 271 having supporting and/or spacing structure for a
    plural section filament.

    (1)     Note.  A plural section filament is a filament which is composed of
    a plurality of filament wires connected to common leading-in wires.  The
    plurality of filaments may be connected to the leading-in wires so that the
    filament sections are electrically connected in parallel, or a filament
    section may be connected to a leading-in wire and a conductive support,
    another filament section being connected to the same conductive support and
    another leading-in wire so that the filament sections are electrically
    connected in series.  One of the filament sections may have supports which
    are separate from the supporting structure for another filament section,
    the filaments being electrically connected by leading-in wires which may or
    may not also be supports for the filament sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264,    for discharge devices under subclass 238 having an envelope and a
    plurality of electrodes including a plural section filament supported
    within the envelope.

    272,    for devices under subclass 271 for supporting a plurality of
    separately energizable filaments.


CLS 313/274
TXT Devices under subclass 271 which have the filament within an envelope, the
    filament being supported within the envelope by means of supports (e.g.,
    support wires, rods, or tubes), at least one of the supports being
    supported by a part of the envelope wall which is opposed to or spaced at a
    distance from the part of the envelope wall which supports either a
    different portion of the same support or another support.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclass does not include devices
    where all the supporting and/or spacing means are sealed into a common stem
    or press of the envelope even though the supporting and/or spacing means
    are widely spaced from each other.

    (2)     Note.  Some devices in this subclass have the lead-in wires which
    pass through the envelope wall at the same end of the envelope so that only
    a single base is needed for the device.

    (3)     Note.  One of the more common structures found in this subclass is
    the so-called "multiple-ended" incandescent lamp, that is, a lamp having a
    stem or press at each end of a substantially tubular envelope, the filament
    supports being supported by each of the stems or presses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    253+,   for discharge devices having an envelope and support structure for
    a plurality of electrodes.  The support structure being supported by
    opposed or spaced portions of the envelope.  See subclass 255 where the
    same electrode is supported by supports which are supported at spaced or
    opposed portions of the envelope.

    286,    for other devices under subclass 238 which have an envelope and an
    electrode therein, the electrode being supported by means of supports
    (e.g., wires, rods or tubes) which are supported by opposed or spaced parts
    of the envelope wall.

    288,    and the subclasses specified in the notes to the definition of this
    subclass for other devices under subclass 238 which have an envelope and an
    electrode therein, a spacer member being positioned between the envelope
    wall and the electrode or an electrode support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 99 for conduits
    for electrical conductors which have interior supports for supporting one
    or more electric conductors therein.


CLS 313/275
TXT Devices under subclass 271 in which the supporting structure for the
    filament includes an electrically insulating member.

    (1)     Note.  Including in this subclass are supporting structures such as
    glass or ceramic rods having metal hooks or anchors attached to it for
    supporting the filament.  Also included are supporting structures wherein,
    a glass bead is mounted upon a metal supporting rod, the glass bead having
    means for supporting the filament.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257,    for discharge devices under subclass 238 which have an envelope and
    a plurality of electrodes supported by supports, within the envelope, an
    insulating spacer member being interposed between a plurality of the
    electrodes or electrode supports, a filament being supported by the
    insulating spacer member.

    289,    for other devices under subclass 238 which have an envelope and an
    electrode other than a filament supported by means of an insulating or
    ceramic support rod or tube within the envelope.


CLS 313/276
TXT Devices under subclass 275 which have the insulating member which supports
    the filament supported by an electrically conductive supporting member
    (e.g., wire, rod or tube.)

    (1)     Note.  The conductive wire, rod or tube may be used as one of the
    lead-in wires for conducting electrical current to the filament.

    (2)     Note.  Among the structures found in this are devices having an
    insulating plate or bar supported by a conductive wire or rod, a filament
    being supported by the insulator.  Sometimes, the filament is V-shaped or
    W-shaped, and the insulating rod is provided with means to engage and
    support the filament at a plurality of points.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257,    for discharge devices under subclass 238 which have an envelope and
    a plurality of electrodes supported by conductive supports within the
    envelope an insulating spacer member being interposed between a plurality
    of the electrodes or electrode supports, a filament being supported by the
    insulating spacer member.

    264,    for discharge devices under subclass 238 which have an envelope and
    a plurality of electrodes therein, the supporting structure for the
    electrodes including means to support a U-shaped, V-shaped or W-shaped
    filament.

    285,    for devices under subclass 238 which are provided with an envelope
    and an electrode other than a filament, therein, the electrode being
    supported by an intermediate supporting member, such as an insulating
    plate, rod, or bead, the intermediate member being supported by a
    conductive support.


CLS 313/277
TXT Devices under subclass 275 having an insulating standard or rod which
    supports filament anchors or brackets, the filament anchors or brackets
    engaging and supporting the filament.

    (1)     Note.  The devices in this and the indented subclass include
    incandescent lamps which are provided with an envelope have a stem, a glass
    or ceramic rod or standard being supported by the stem, the rod or standard
    usually being fused to or being integral with the stem, filament supporting
    brackets or anchors being attached to the rod or standard, usually by
    fusing the brackets or anchors to the rod or standard, the filament being
    supported by the supporting brackets.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    289,    and the subclasses specified in the notes to the definition of that
    subclass for other devices under subclass 238 which have an envelope and an
    electrode other than a filament supported by an insulating or ceramic
    support rod therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 65+ for brackets for supporting pipe or
    cables, subclasses 300+ for brackets formed of sheet material, and
    subclasses 302+ for brackets formed of wire.


CLS 313/278
TXT Devices under subclass 271 which include means to apply a tension force to
    the filament.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257,    for discharge devices which are provided with an envelope and a
    plurality of electrodes supported by supports therein, a spacer member
    being interposed between the electrodes or the electrode supports, a
    filament being supported by tension applying means, the tension means being
    supported by the spacing member.

    284+,   for devices under subclass 238 which include an envelope and an
    electrode supported by supporting means therein, the supporting means being
    resilient or flexible.


CLS 313/279
TXT Devices under subclass 271 which have supporting means which engage and
    support the filament intermediate the ends of the filament.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273,    where the device includes means for supporting a plural section
    filament, that is, a filament which is composed of a plurality of separate
    sections of filament wire.

    274,    where the device includes an envelope, and the filament supports
    are supported by opposed or spaced parts of the envelope wall.

    276,    where the device has the filament supported by an electrical
    insulating member, the insulating member being supported by an electrically
    conductive wire, rod or tube.

    277,    for this subject matter where the device is provided with an
    insulating standard or rod having a plurality of filament anchors or
    brackets supported by the rod or standard, so that the filament is
    supported at one or more intermediate points.

    278,    for this subject matter where the support which engages the
    intermediate portion of the filament includes means for maintaining the
    filament under a tension force.


CLS 313/281
TXT Devices under subclass 238 which have the support for the electrode mounted
    in or around an aperture in a conductive wall or plate.

    (1)     Note.  In some of the devices in this subclass, the support for the
    electrode or the electrode is intended to pass through the conductive wall
    or plate.  In other devices, the electrode supporting means surrounds an
    aperture in the conductive wall or plate and the electrode is located in
    the same side of the wall or plate as the supporting means, the aperture
    being provided so that the electrode may cooperate through the aperture
    with other means located upon the opposite side of the wall or plate.

    (2)     Note.  Neither the electrode nor its supporting means need
    necessarily be insulated from the conductive wall or plate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282,    and the subclasses specified in the notes to the definition of that
    subclass for devices under subclass 238 which have an envelope which has a
    portion of the wall made of metal or conductive material and an electrode,
    the electrode being supported by the conductive wall portion or being
    supported by means of a support which is supported by the conductive wall
    portion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 151+ for
    devices for insulating a conductor from a wall or plate through which the
    conductor extends.


CLS 313/282
TXT Devices under subclass 238 which have an envelope and an electrode, at
    least part of the envelope formed of electrically conductive material,
    either the electrode being supported by the conductive portion of the
    envelope wall or having the electrode supported by supporting means which
    is supported by the conductive portion of the envelope wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239+,   where the device is enclosed within an envelope which has an
    electrically conducting envelope wall portion, the wall portion being
    disclosed or claimed as being a shield.

    246+,   where the devices is a discharge device and the conductive envelope
    wall portion is disclosed or claimed as being an electrode of the device,
    the supporting and/or spacing structure for a plurality of electrodes which
    are supported by the conductive wall portion being claimed.

    248,    where the devices is a discharge device having a conductive
    envelope wall portion which is not disclosed or claimed as being either a
    shield or an electrode and the supporting and/or spacing structure for a
    plurality of electrodes which are supported by the conductive wall portion
    is claimed.

    281,    where the device has a conductive envelope portion which is
    provided with an aperture an electrode being mounted in or around the
    aperture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 2.3 for envelopes, per se, which have
    conductive wall portions.


CLS 313/283
TXT Devices under subclass 238 which have an envelope, the electrode being
    supported by the envelope.

    (1)     Note.  The electrode need not be supported directly upon the
    envelope, but may be supported upon support rods or other support members
    which are supported by the enclosing envelope.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239+,   for devices under subclass 238 which have an envelope and a shield
    enclosed by the envelope, the shield being supported by the envelope.

    244+,   for this subject matter where the device is a discharge device and
    a plurality of electrodes are supported by the envelope.

    269,    for this subject matter where the device includes a vibration
    damping means for damping vibrations of the electrode or electrode support.

    270,    for this subject matter where the electrode is an indirectly heated
    cathode.

    271,    for this subject matter where the electrode is a filament.

    281,    where the envelope has a conductive wall portion with an aperture
    in it, the electrode support being mounted in or around the aperture.

    282,    where the envelope is provided with a conductive wall portion, this
    electrode being supported by the conductive wall portion.


CLS 313/284
TXT Devices under subclass 283 which have the electrode supported by a
    supporting member which is supported by the envelope.

    (1)     Note.  In the devices of this and the indented subclasses, the
    electrode is supported within the envelope by means of supporting member,
    the supporting member being attached to and supported by the envelope.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 50.54 for
    miscellaneous hermetically sealed envelopes of general application which
    are limited to electrical use which include means to mount an electrical
    device within the envelope.


CLS 313/285
TXT Devices under subclass 284 having the electrode supported by a supporting
    wire, rod, or tube, which is supported by the envelope.

    (1)     Note.  The supporting wire, rod or tube is sometimes sealed into
    the stem or press of the envelope and is usually used as the lead-in wire
    for the electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252+,   and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto where the device
    is a discharge device having a plurality of electrodes supported by the
    envelope.

    271+,   and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto where the
    electrode which is supported is a filament.

    282,    where the envelope is provided with a metallic or conductive part,
    the support wire, rod or tube being supported by the metallic or conductive
    part of the envelope.


CLS 313/286
TXT Devices under subclass 285 which have (1) the electrode supported by a
    plurality of support wires, rods or tubes at least one of the support
    wires, rods, or tubes being supported by a part of the envelope wall which
    is opposite to or spaced at a distance from the part of the envelope wall
    which supports another of the supporting wires, rods or tubes, or (2) which
    have at least one of the supporting wires, rods or tubes for the electrode
    supported by a part of the envelope wall which is opposite to or spaced at
    a distance from the part of the envelope wall which supports a different
    portion of the support wire, rod or tube.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include devices where all the support
    rods, wires or tubes are sealed into a common stem or press of the envelope
    even though the support wires, rods or tubes are widely spaced from each
    other.

    (2)     Note.  One of the common types of structures found in this and the
    indented subclasses is the so-called "multiple ended" devices, that is
    devices having a stem or press at each end of a substantially tubular
    envelope, an electrode support wire, rod, or tube being supported by each
    of the stems or presses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255,    where the device is a discharge device having a plurality of
    electrodes, at least one of the electrodes being supported by support
    wires, rods or tubes which are supported by spaced or opposed parts of the
    envelope wall.

    274,    where the electrode supported by the support wires, rods or tubes
    is a filament.

    318.01+, for a device within the class definition which is provided with an
    envelope, the device having at least a base and an electrical connector
    attached to spaced or opposed parts of the envelope.

    318.12, for a device within the class definition having an envelope and an
    electrical connector attached to spaced or opposed parts of the envelope


CLS 313/287
TXT Devices under subclass 285 in which the envelope has a stem or press, the
    support wire, rod or tube being attached to and supported by a ring shaped
    clamping member or collar, the ring shaped member or collar being fastened
    about the stem or press.


CLS 313/288
TXT Devices under subclass 285 having a spacer member interposed between the
    envelope of the discharge device and an electrode or electrode support.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of spacer, see (2) note to the definition
    of subclass 238.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258,    where the device is a discharge device having a plurality of
    electrodes.

    292,    for miscellaneous spacing elements, per se.


CLS 313/289
TXT Devices under subclass 285 which have the supporting rod or tube formed of
    insulating or ceramic material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256,    for discharge devices which have a plurality of electrodes enclosed
    within an envelope, an insulating or ceramic electrode supporting rod being
    supported by the envelope.

    275+,   where the electrode supported is a filament.


CLS 313/290
TXT Devices under subclass 285 which have the structure of the envelope part or
    the envelope stem or press which supports the electrode supporting wire,
    rod or tube modified.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes patents where significant structure
    of the envelope part, stem or press which supports the electrode supporting
    wire, rod or tube is claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266,    where the device is a discharge device having a plurality of
    electrodes supported by supporting wires, rods or tubes.

    271,    where the electrode supported by the support wires, rods or tubes
    is a filament.

    281,    where the envelope includes a conductive wall portion having an
    aperture, the support being mounted in or around the aperture in the
    conductive wall portion.

    282,    where the envelope is provided with a metallic or conductive wall
    portion, the electrode support being attached to the conductive wall
    portion.

    317+    and the classes specified in the notes to the definition of those
    subclasses for the structure of envelopes for lamps and discharge devices.


CLS 313/291
TXT Devices under subclass 283 in which the electrode is a conductive coating
    upon the envelope wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    355,    and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto for miscellaneous
    coated electrodes.

    485,    for devices under the class definition which have a fluorescent or
    phosphorescent material coated upon the envelope wall.

    541+,   for photosensitive discharge devices which have the cathode coated
    upon the envelope wall.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 105+ for processes of coating the
    interior of hollow electrical articles.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 34.1+ for a
    tube or conduct type of article which may have a coating on the internal
    wall thereof.


CLS 313/292
TXT Miscellaneous supporting and spacing elements which are not classified in
    any other class and which are designed for use with the devices under
    subclass 238.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 138 for
    miscellaneous supports and spacing members which are made of insulating
    material.

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses, for miscellaneous supports.


CLS 313/293
TXT Discharge devices under the class definition which are provided with three
    or more electrodes, at least one of the electrodes being an apertured or
    grid-like electrode, the apertured or grid-like electrode being interposed
    between two of the other electrodes so that a straight line drawn between
    the two other electrodes will pass through the apertured or grid-like
    electrode.

    (1)     Note.  The apertured or grid-like electrode may be formed of open
    work material such as wire mesh or perforated sheet material, or may be
    formed of wires or bars, such as coiled wire or otherwise provided with one
    or more openings in the wall of the electrode.

    (2)     Note.  To be classified in this subclass the claims must state that
    the grid electrode is interposed between two other electrodes.  Where a
    patent claims only that the discharge device includes a cathode, an anode,
    and a grid electrode, the patent is excluded from this and the indented
    subclasses and will be classified in subclass 308 or one of the subclasses
    specified in the notes to the definitions of that subclass.

    (3)     Note.  In some of the devices in this and the indented subclasses
    the foraminous or grid-like electrode is intended to be used to control the
    discharge between the cathode and anode of the discharge device.  In other
    of the devices, the interposed foraminous or grid-like electrode is
    intended to be used as an anode in the discharge device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5+,     where the device includes a plurality of separate discharge devices
    which are structurally combined to form a single unitary device (e.g.,
    multiple unit devices), one or more of the discharge devices having an
    apertured or grid electrode interposed in the discharge space between two
    of the electrodes.

    146+,   where the apertured or grid electrode is mounted so that it is
    movable.

    153+,   where the discharge device is also provided with a magnetic device
    for influencing the space discharge.

    167,    where the discharge device has a liquid electrode.

    238+,   for patents for discharge devices which include an apertured or
    grid electrode interposed between two other electrodes where significant
    supporting and/or spacing structure for the electrodes is claimed.  Where
    the claims include significant supporting and/or spacing structure for the
    electrodes, the patent is classified in subclasses 238+ and
    cross-referenced to this or one of the indented subclasses when structure
    in addition to the supporting and/or spacing structure for the electrodes
    is claimed or disclosed.  See especially indented subclass 265.

    308,    and the subclasses specified in the notes to the definition of that
    subclass for other discharge devices which are provided with a discharge
    control electrode.  Also see note 2 above.

    325,    for discharge devices provided with an electrode which is formed of
    nonforaminous material which is permeable to electrons.

    326,    for electrode structures which have only a single aperture.

    348+,   for the structure of foraminous and grid-like electrodes, per se.

    356,    for the structure of tubular and other hollow sleeve-like
    electrodes.

    441,    and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto, for cathode ray
    devices which have an apertured electrode interposed between the cathode
    and the target for concentrating, shaping, accelerating, or decelerating
    the cathode-ray beam.

    537,    for photosensitive discharge devices which have an apertured or
    grid electrode interposed between two other electrodes.

    597+,   and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto where the
    discharge device is provided with an envelope containing an atmosphere of
    gas or vapor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 33 to 63
    for discharge devices which have a grid or other apertured electrode
    interposed in the discharge space between two electrodes and which also
    have a circuit element (e.g., inductance switch, resistor) structurally
    combined with the discharge device so as to form a unitary device.  See
    subclass 34 where the discharge device includes an antenna, subclasses 35+
    where the structural combination includes a plurality of such discharge
    devices and a circuit element, subclass 39 where the discharge device
    includes a wave guide, coaxial cable or resonate parallel wire transmission
    line, subclass 39.63 where the discharge device has an electrode formed so
    as to provide a structure having distributed inductance and capacitance,
    and operable in a magnetic field (e.g., magnetrons), subclasses 41+ where
    the discharge device has an inductive impedance connected between the
    electrodes, 51+, where the discharge device has structurally combined
    therewith an electric generator or piezo-electric device, and subclasses
    56+ for the miscellaneous discharge devices which have an apertured or grid
    electrode interposed in a discharge space between two other electrodes and
    which have a circuit element structurally combined therewith.


CLS 313/294
TXT Discharge devices under subclass 293 which have a foraminous or grid-like
    electrode interposed in the inter-electrode space and spaced form one of
    the other electrodes so that different parts of the foraminous or grid-like
    electrode are at different distances from such other electrode.

    (1)     Note.  The foraminous or grid electrode may be uniformly spaced
    from one of the other electrodes, the second of the other electrodes begin
    nonuniformly spaced from the foraminous or grid electrode and from the
    other electrode.  This subclass includes discharge devices where the
    foraminous or grid electrode is eccentrically spaced in the space between
    the cathode and anode, and discharge devices where the foraminous or
    grid-like electrode is spaced in parallel relationship with the cathode and
    anode but has a different cross-section configuration from that of the
    cathode or anode (e.g., where the anode is circular and concentric with the
    cathode, the grid electrode being oval in cross-section).

    (2)     Note.  Some of the devices in this subclass are intended to be used
    as variable-mu discharge devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    349,    for structure of foraminous and grid-like electrodes where the
    electrode wall surface which is provided with the openings does not form a
    straight hollow sleeve and is of a nonstraight surface configuration with
    the openings in the electrode lying in at least two different planes, and
    for the structure of foraminous and grid-like electrodes having the wall
    surface of the electrode which contains the openings in the form of a
    hollow sleeve, the sleeve having a cross-sectional area at one region of
    the electrode, which is different from the cross-sectional area at another
    region of the electrode, such as electrodes which are in the form of a
    truncated cone, sphere, or which are barrel shaped or hour-glass shaped.


CLS 313/295
TXT Discharge devices under subclass 293 which have a foraminous or grid-like
    electrode interposed in the inter-electrode space, the foraminous or
    grid-like electrode having the ratio of area of free passage through the
    openings in the electrode to the obturating area of the electrode in one
    region different from such ratio in another region of the electrode.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes discharge devices having a foraminous
    or grid-like electrode interposed between two other electrodes where the
    foraminous or grid-like electrode has at least one opening in the electrode
    of a different area from the area of another of the openings, or where the
    openings in the electrode are nonuniformly spaced with respect to each
    other, or where the electrode is formed of a wire coil or helix which has a
    nonuniform pitch for the turns of the coil or helix.

    (2)     Note.  Some of the devices in this subclass are intended to be used
    as variable-mu discharge devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    349,    for foraminous and grid-like electrodes which have a ratio of free
    passage area to obturating area in one region of the electrode which is
    different from such ration in another region of the electrode.


CLS 313/296
TXT Discharge devices under subclass 293 which have a plurality of apertured or
    grid-like electrodes interposed in the inter-electrode space defined by
    other electrodes.


CLS 313/297
TXT Discharge devices under subclass 296 having a plurality of apertured or
    grid-like electrodes interposed in superimposed relation with respect to
    each other in the inter-electrode space so that a straight line drawn
    between the electrodes which define the inter-electrode space will pass
    through both of the apertured or grid-like electrodes.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, plural grid discharge
    devices such as discharge devices provided with a screen grid and a control
    grid, discharge devices with two control grids, discharge devices with a
    control grid and a suppressor grid, and discharge devices where one of the
    apertured or grid-like electrodes is intended to be used as a first anode
    and another apertured or grid-like electrode is intended to be used as a
    control grid, one of the electrodes defining the inter-electrode space
    being a second anode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    295,    where one of the grid-like electrodes has the ratio of area of free
    passage through the openings in the electrode to the obturating area of the
    electrode different from such ratio in another region of the electrode
    (e.g., variable-mu discharge devices).

    447,    for cathode ray devices which have a plurality of apertured or
    grid-like electrodes interposed between the cathode and the target.

    599,    where the discharge device is provided with an envelope containing
    an atmosphere of gas or vapor.


CLS 313/298
TXT Discharge devices under subclass 297 which are provided with either a
    plurality of separate cathode or a plurality of separate nonemissive
    electrodes (e.g., anodes) in addition to the interposed apertured or
    grid-like electrodes, so that the discharge device has at least two
    separate inter-electrode spaces, at least two apertured or grid-like
    electrodes being interposed in one of the inter-electrode spaces in
    superimposed relation with respect to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5+,     for plural unit discharge devices which have at least two cathodes
    and an anode for each of the cathodes, at least one of the discharge
    devices having a plurality of serially arranged apertured or grid-like
    electrodes interposed in the inter-electrode space.

    301,    for other discharge devices which are provided with a plurality of
    inter-electrode spaces, at least two of the inter-electrode spaces having
    an apertured or grid-like electrode disposed therein, or at least one of
    the inter-electrode spaces having a plurality of apertured or grid-like
    electrodes in nonsuperimposed relation.


CLS 313/299
TXT Discharge devices under subclass 297 where the openings in at least two of
    the apertured or grid-like electrodes are located in aligned relation upon
    a straight line drawn between the electrodes defining the inter-electrode
    space so that the effective obstructing area of such two apertured or
    grid-like electrodes to the space discharge is not greater than the
    effective obstructing area of either of the two foraminous or grid-like
    electrodes.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes only patents as originals which claim
    the aligned relationship of the openings in the two apertured or grid-like
    electrodes.  Only patents where there is a definite statement in the
    specification that the openings in the two apertured or grid-like
    electrodes are aligned along a straight line are cross-referenced into this
    subclass.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes discharge devices of the type known
    as beam power tubes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    409+,   for plural beam generators which may include control electrons.

    447+,   for control electrodes between the cathode and target.


CLS 313/300
TXT Discharge devices under subclass 297 having three or more apertured or
    grid-like electrodes interposed in superimposed relation with respect to
    each other in the inter-electrode space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    447,    for cathode-ray tubes which have three or more apertured or
    grid-like electrodes interposed between the cathode and target.

    599,    where the discharge device has an envelope containing an atmosphere
    of gas or vapor


CLS 313/301
TXT Discharge devices under subclass 296 which have either a plurality of
    separate cathodes or a plurality of separate nonemissive electrodes (e.g.,
    anodes) in addition to the interposed apertured or grid-like electrodes so
    that the discharge device has at least two separate inter-electrode spaces.

    (1)     Note.  In the discharge devices in this subclass there may be a
    plurality of apertured or grid-like electrodes in one of the
    inter-electrode spaces, the apertured or grid-like electrodes being in
    nonsuperimposed relation, or there may be only one apertured or grid-like
    electrode in each of the inter-electrode spaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for plural unit discharge devices which have at least two cathodes
    and a separate anode for each cathode there being an apertured or grid-like
    electrode interposed in the discharge space between each anode and cathode.

    239+    and 245, for discharge devices which include significant supporting
    and/or spacing structure for a plurality of discharge electrodes which form
    a plurality of separate inter-electrode discharge spaces.  See subclasses
    239+ where the device includes supporting and/or spacing structure for a
    shield member which is interposed between two of the separate discharge
    spaces.

    245,    see the reference to subclass 239 above.

    296,    for discharge devices having only one inter-electrode discharge
    space and which have a plurality of apertured or grid-like electrodes in
    the inter-electrode discharge space in nonsuperimposed relation.

    298,    where at least one of the inter-electrode spaces contains a
    plurality of apertured or grid-like electrodes in superimposed relation
    with respect to each other.

    302     and 303, for discharge devices having a plurality of
    inter-electrode spaces, an apertured or grid-like electrode being
    interposed in only one of the inter-electrode spaces.  See subclass 302
    where the discharge device has a plurality of cathodes, and subclass 303
    where the discharge device has a plurality of nonemissive electrodes (e.g.,
    anodes).

    597+,   where the discharge device has an envelope containing a gas or
    vapor.


CLS 313/302
TXT Discharge devices under subclass 293 which have a plurality of separate
    cathodes.

    (1)     Note.  The discharge device may be provided with a nonemissive
    electrode (e.g., anode) in addition to the apertured or grid-like electrode
    so that the discharge device has a plurality of separate inter-electrode
    spaces and the apertured or grid-like electrode may be interposed in both
    of the inter-electrode spaces or may be interposed in only one of the
    inter-electrode spaces, or the discharge device may have only a plurality
    of separate cathodes with the apertured or grid-like electrode disposed in
    the space between two of the cathodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5+,     for plural unit discharge devices which have at least two cathodes
    and an anode for each cathode, one or more of the inter-electrode spaces
    having an apertured or grid-like electrode therein.

    245,    for discharge devices which have significant supporting and/or
    spacing structure for a plurality of electrodes which form a plurality of
    separate discharge spaces.

    298,    where the discharge device has a plurality of separate discharge
    spaces with a plurality of superimposed apertured or grid-like electrodes
    in at least one inter-electrode space.

    301,    where the discharge device has a plurality of inter-electrode
    spaces with a plurality of apertured or grid-like electrodes interposed in
    the inter-electrode space in nonsuperimposed relation.

    306+,   and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto for other
    discharge devices provided with a plurality of separate cathodes.

    409+,   for cathode ray tubes which have a plurality of cathodes and an
    apertured or grid-like electrode interposed in the space between one of the
    cathodes and the target.

    597+,   where the discharge device has an envelope containing a gas or
    vapor.


CLS 313/303
TXT Discharge devices under subclass 293 which have a plurality of separate
    nonemissive electrodes (e.g., anodes) in addition to the interposed
    apertured or grid-like electrode.

    (1)     Note.  In the discharge devices in this subclass which have a
    plurality of anodes, the apertured or grid-like electrode may be interposed
    in only one of the inter-electrode spaces (e.g., the device having a triode
    section and a diode section) or the apertured or grid-like electrode may be
    interposed in a plurality of the inter-electrode spaces.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes discharge devices which have a
    cathode, an anode, an apertured or grid-like electrode interposed between
    the cathode and anode, and an electrode or shield (e.g., shield grid)
    disposed outside of the inter-electrode discharge space (e.g., having a
    shield grid which surrounds a cylindrical anode).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5+,     for plural unit discharge devices which have at least two anodes
    and a cathode for each anode, one or more of the inter-electrode spaces
    having an apertured or grid-like electrode therein.

    245,    for discharge devices which include significant supporting and/or
    spacing structure for a plurality of discharge electrodes which form a
    plurality of separate discharge spaces.

    298,    for this subject matter where the discharge device has a plurality
    of apertured or grid-like electrodes interposed between two other
    electrodes in superimposed relation with respect to each other.

    301,    where the discharge device has a plurality of apertured or
    grid-like electrodes, the discharge device having either an apertured or
    grid-like electrode in each inter-electrode space or a plurality of
    apertured or grid-like electrodes in one discharge space in nonsuperimposed
    relation.

    302,    for discharge devices provided with a plurality of cathodes and an
    apertured or grid-like electrode interposed in one of the discharge spaces.

    306+,   and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto for other
    discharge devices provided with a plurality of anodes.


CLS 313/304
TXT Discharge devices under subclass 293 which have a cathode which is composed
    of a plurality of parallel sections, the apertured or grid-like electrode
    being provided with a plurality of tubular parts, each tubular part of the
    apertured or grid-like electrode completely surrounding a different one of
    the parallel sections of the cathode.

    (1)     Note.  The tubular apertured or grid-like electrode sometimes has
    the form of a figure 8 in cross-section, a cathode section being disposed
    within each loop of the figure 8 with the cathode extending parallel to the
    longitudinal axis of the tubular apertured or grid-like electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264,    for discharge devices which include significant supporting and/or
    spacing structure for a plural section filament.

    302,    for discharge devices having a plurality of separate cathodes and a
    foraminous or grid-like electrode interposed in the inter-electrode space.


CLS 313/305
TXT Discharge devices under the class definition which have an anode or target
    which is designed to be heated by the electron bombardment form the cathode.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes discharge devices of the cathanode
    type i.e., discharge devices which have an electrode, known as the
    cathanode, which is the anode with respect to a cathode which bombards it
    with electrons, the electron bombardment being designed to heat the
    cathanode to electron emission temperature so that another surface of the
    cathanode will emit electrons to a third electrode which serves as the
    anode for the cathode surface of the cathanode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for discharge devices which are provided with a separate body which
    is not intended to be used as an electrode and which is designed to be
    heated to incandescence by the space discharge.

    39+     and 47, for discharge devices which are provided with means for
    preventing the flow of heat away from an electrode.  See subclasses 39+
    where the electrode is within an envelope.

    103+,   and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto for discharge
    devices having an electrode which emits secondary electrons when bombarded
    by primary electrons.

    337+,   for the structure of indirectly heated cathodes, per se.

    347,    for the structure of electrodes which are designed to be
    incandescible upon electron bombardment.

    464,    for cathode-ray tubes having anodes or targets which are designed
    to be heated to incandescence by the cathode beam.

    588,    for discharge devices which have an envelope and an atmosphere of
    gas or vapor, the discharge device having two electrodes between which an
    ionizing discharge is to be maintained, the ionizing discharge being a
    source of electrons for a discharge to a third electrode, the discharge to
    the third electrode being nonionizing (electronic).

    627+,   for discharge devices which contain a gas or vapor and which have
    an electrode designed to be used alternately as a cathode and as an anode
    when the discharge device is used with alternating current, the electrode
    being designed to be heated to electron emissive temperature by the ionic
    bombardment.  Also, 627+, for discharge devices containing an atmosphere of
    gas or vapor which have an incandescible anode.


CLS 313/306
TXT Discharge devices under the class definition which have three or more
    electrodes.

    (1)     Note.  See the "Definition of Terms Used in the Class" in the class
    definition for the definition of a three or more electrode discharge device.

    (2)     Note.  This is a residual subclass and provides only for discharge
    devices having three or more electrodes which are not provided for in the
    subclasses above.  The search should include the subclasses providing for
    special types of discharge devices where a specific type of discharge
    device is involved.  For example, secondary emissive discharge devices
    (e.g., electron multipliers) having three or more electrodes are classified
    in subclasses 103+ above and not cross-referenced to this subclass.  Where
    the discharge device is provided for in some general subclass above, such
    as subclasses 11+ (with temperature modifier), or subclasses 238+ (with
    support and/or spacing structure for electrode and/or shield) and structure
    in addition to that provided for in the general subclass being disclosed,
    and the patent is not cross-referenced to a subclass providing for a
    special type of discharge device, the patent is cross-referenced into this
    subclass.The notes below refer to some of the subclasses which specifically
    provide for three or more electrode discharge devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for plural unit discharge devices which have at least two cathodes
    and an anode for each cathode.

    103+,   and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto, for discharge
    devices of the secondary emitter type (e.g., electron multiplier) which
    have three or more electrodes.

    123+    and 140, for spark plugs having 3 or more electrodes.

    162,    for discharge devices which have three or more electrodes and a
    magnetic device for influencing the space discharge.

    166,    167 through 169, 170+ and 172, for liquid (e.g., mercury) electrode
    discharge devices having three or more electrodes. See subclass 166 where
    one of the electrodes is external of the envelope, 167 where one of the
    electrodes is an apertured or grid-like electrode, 168 and 169, where a
    plurality of the electrodes are anodes, 170+ where one of the electrodes is
    an auxiliary starting electrode, and subclass 172 for liquid electrode
    discharge devices which have two electrodes immersed in the liquid
    electrode, the liquid electrode being vaporized to initiate the discharge
    and to supply the gas or vapor atmosphere in the device.

    234,    where the discharge device has one of the three or more electrodes
    exterior to the envelope of the device.

    236,    for discharge devices which are provided with three or more
    electrodes and means for selectively using the electrodes so that the
    discharge device may be operated without one of the electrodes being
    operated, one electrode being substituted for the other when the first
    operated electrode becomes defective.

    238+,   for discharge devices which include supporting and/or spacing
    structure for three or more electrodes. If structure in addition to the
    electrode supporting and/or spacing structure is disclosed or is claimed,
    the patent is cross-referenced to this or one of the indented subclasses
    where the discharge device has three or more electrodes if it is not
    specifically provided for in a subclass other than subclasses 238+ which
    precedes this subclass (306).

    293+,   for discharge devices which have an apertured or grid-like
    electrode interposed in the inter-electrode space between two other
    electrodes.

    305,    for discharge devices which have an electrode designed to act as a
    cathode with respect to one electrode and an anode with respect to a
    cathode, the electrode being heated by the bombardment of electrons from
    the cathode and emitting electrons to the anode.

    364+,   for cathode-ray tube having three or more electrodes.

    531,    for photosensitive discharge devices which have a plurality of
    photosensitive electrodes.

    540,    for photosensitive discharge devices which have a plurality of
    cathodes, at least one of which is not photosensitive and 540, for
    photosensitive discharge devices which have a plurality of anodes.

    581,    where the discharge device has an envelope which contains a gas or
    vapor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclasses 7+ for consumable electrode discharge devices (e.g., arc lamps
    and similar devices having means to feed the electrodes together as they
    are consumed) where the structure includes at least two cathodes each
    having a separate anode, subclass 31 for polyphase A. C. type consumable
    electrode type devices, subclass 33 where the consumable electrode
    discharge device is provided with three or more series connected
    electrodes, and subclasses 36+ for the consumable electrode discharge
    devices which have a plurality of cathodes or a plurality of anodes.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 5.16+,
    5.27, 5.28, and 5.39+ for cathode-ray tube circuits including a plurality
    of hollow distributed parameter devices such as a wave guide, cavity
    resonator, or co-axial line through or in which the ray passes; and
    subclasses 34 to 63 for discharge devices which have three or more
    electrodes and which have structurally combined therewith a circuit element
    such as an electric switch or an impedance.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 124 and 134 for
    X-ray devices which have a plurality of cathodes or anodes.


CLS 313/307
TXT Discharge devices under subclass 306 which have four or more electrodes.

    (1)     Note.  In some of the discharge devices in this subclass, one or
    more of the electrodes are intended to be used merely as discharge control
    electrodes.

    (2)     Note.  This is a residual subclass and provides only for discharge
    devices having four or more electrodes which are not provided for in the
    subclasses above.  The search should include the subclasses above which
    provide for special types of discharge devices where a specific type of
    discharge device is involved.  For example, secondary emissive discharge
    devices (e.g., electron multipliers) having four or more electrodes are
    classified in subclasses 103+ above and not cross-referenced to this
    subclass.  Where the discharge device is provided for in some general
    subclass above, such as subclasses 11+ (with temperature modifier), or
    subclasses 238+ (with support and/or spacing structure for electrode and/or
    shield), and is not cross-referenced to a subclass providing for a special
    type of discharge device, the patent is cross-referenced into this
    subclass. The notes below refer to some of the subclasses which
    specifically provide for four or more electrode discharge devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for plural unit discharge devices which have at least two cathodes
    and an anode for each cathode.

    103+,   and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto, for discharge
    devices of the secondary emitter type (e.g., electron multiplier) which
    have four or more electrodes.

    238+,   for discharge devices which include supporting and/or spacing
    structure for three or more electrodes.If structure in addition to the
    electrode supporting and/or spacing structure is disclosed or is claimed,
    the patent is cross-referenced to this subclass where the discharge device
    has four or more electrodes if it is not specifically provided for in a
    subclass other than subclasses 238+ which precedes this subclass.

    293,    for discharge devices which have an apertured or grid-like
    electrode interposed in the discharge space between a cathode and another
    electrode (e.g., anode), a fourth electrode being located outside of the
    discharge space (e.g., a shield grid around a cylindrical anode).

    296+,   for discharge devices which have four or more electrodes, at least
    two of the electrodes being apertured or grid-like electrodes which are
    interposed in the inter-electrode space defined by other electrodes.

    364+,   for cathode-ray tube having four or more electrodes.

    581,    where the discharge device has an envelope which contains a gas or
    vapor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 7 for consumable electrode discharge devices (e.g., arc lamps and
    similar devices having means to feed the electrodes together as they are
    consumed) where the structure includes at least two cathodes each having a
    separate anode; subclass 33 where the consumable electrode discharge device
    is provided with four or more series connected electrodes and subclasses
    36+ where the consumable electrode discharge device has a plurality of
    cathodes or a plurality of anodes and has four or more electrodes.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 34 through
    63 for discharge devices which have four or more electrodes and which have
    structurally combined therewith a circuit element such as an electric
    switch or an impedance.


CLS 313/308
TXT Discharge devices under subclass 306 which have a discharge control
    electrode.

    (1)     Note.  This is the residual subclass providing for discharge
    devices having three electrodes, one of the electrodes being designated as
    a control electrode.  As pointed out in "Definition of Terms Used in the
    Class", a control electrode is an electrode designed to influence or
    control the discharge current flowing between other electrodes.
    Accordingly, whether or not an electrode is a control electrode will depend
    upon the system which is used with the discharge device.  The search should
    include the subclasses above which provide for special types of discharge
    devices where a specific type of discharge device is involved.  For
    example, secondary emissive discharge devices (e.g., electron multipliers)
    having a control electrode are classified in subclasses 103+ above.  Where
    the control electrode is an apertured or grid-like electrode interposed in
    the discharge space between two other electrodes, the patent is classified
    in subclasses 293+ above.  Where the discharge device is provided for in
    some general subclass above, such as subclasses 11+ (with temperature
    modifier), or subclasses 238+ (with support and/or spacing structure for
    electrode and/or shield), and is not cross-referenced to a subclass
    providing for a special type of discharge device, the patent is
    cross-referenced into this subclass.  The notes below refer to some of the
    subclasses which specifically provide for four or more electrode discharge
    devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5+,     for plural unit discharge devices (e.g., discharge devices having
    at least two cathodes and an anode for each cathode) at least one of the
    discharge devices having a control electrode.

    153+,   for discharge devices having a control electrode and also a
    magnetic device for influencing the space discharge.

    166,    167 and 170+, for liquid electrode discharge devices which are
    provided with a control electrode.  See subclass 166 where the control
    electrode is external of the envelope of the device; 167, where the control
    electrode is an apertured or grid-like electrode interposed between the
    cathode and anode and 170+, where the control electrode is an auxiliary
    starting or holding electrode.

    234,    where the control electrode is exterior to the envelope of the
    discharge device.

    243+,   for discharge devices having significant supporting and/or spacing
    structure for a plurality of electrodes, one of which is a control
    electrode.  If structure in addition to the electrode supporting and/or
    spacing structure is disclosed or claimed, the patent is cross-referenced
    to this subclass where the discharge device has a control electrode unless
    the device is specifically provided for in a subclass other than subclasses
    243+ which precedes this subclass.

    293+,   where the control electrode is an apertured or grid-like electrode
    interposed in the discharge space defined by two other electrodes.

    307,    where the discharge device has four or more electrodes, one of
    which is a control electrode.

    447,    and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto for cathode-ray
    tubes which have a control electrode.

    537,    for photosensitive discharge devices which have a control electrode.

    581,    where the discharge device has an envelope containing an atmosphere
    of gas or vapor and a control electrode.


CLS 313/309
TXT Discharge devices under the class definition having an electrode which has
    a plurality of pointed needle-like portions or which has a serrated edge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140,    for this subject matter in spark plugs.

    351,    for the structure of multipointed or serrated edge electrodes, per
    se.


CLS 313/310
TXT Discharge devices under the class definition which have a thermionic or
    emissive cathode.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is the residual subclass providing for
    discharge devices which have thermionic or emissive cathodes which are not
    provided for in the above subclasses. This subclass does not contain
    cross-references of devices classified in the preceding subclasses where
    the sole novelty in the cathode is in the structure or the cathode.  For
    such cross-references, see subclasses 337+ where the cathode is an
    indirectly heated cathode, 341+, where the cathode is a filament or
    resistance heated electrode, 346 for cathodes which contain or are coated
    with electron emissive material.  This subclass does not contain
    cross-references of devices classified in the preceding subclasses where
    the sole novelty in the cathode is the composition of the cathode.  For
    such cross-references, see the classes referred to in section XIV, 2 of the
    class definition. Neither does this subclass contain cross-references to
    patents where the sole novelty is in the supporting and/or spacing
    structure for either the cathode or the cathode and the other electrodes.
    The search should include the subclasses above which provide for special
    types of discharge devices where a specific type of discharge device is
    involved.For example, cathode-ray tubes with thermionic or emissive
    cathodes are classified in subclasses 364+ above. Where the discharge
    device is provided for in some general subclass, such as subclasses 11+
    (with temperature modifier) and structure of the cathode is claimed in
    addition to that provided for in either the general or specific subclasses
    preceding this subclass, the patent is cross-referenced into this subclass.
     See the search notes below for a reference to some of the subclasses which
    provide for discharge devices having a thermionic or emissive cathode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for plural unit discharge devices which have at least two cathodes
    and at least one anode for each cathode.

    16,     for discharge devices which have a liquid electrode and an electric
    heater for the liquid electrode.

    37+,    where the cathode is provided with means other than the mere
    filament or heater for modifying the temperature of the cathode (e.g., a
    heat shield).

    103+,   for secondary emitter discharge devices (e.g., electron multiplier)
    which have emissive cathodes.

    163+,   for discharge devices which have a liquid (e.g., mercury cathode)
    616, 627+ and 630 for discharge devices which contain a gas or vapor and
    which have a thermionic or emissive cathode.  See subclass 616 where the
    device is provided with means to shield the cathode from positive ion
    bombardment, subclasses 627+ where the device has a heated or thermionic
    cathode, and subclass 630 for the miscellaneous gas or vapor discharge
    devices with emissive cathodes.

    233,    for discharge devices which are defined by the degree of vacuum and
    which include a thermionic or emissive cathode.

    244+,   for discharge devices which are provided with means for supporting
    and/or spacing a plurality of electrodes, one of which may be a thermionic
    or emissive cathode.  See (1) Note above.

    270,    for discharge devices which are provided with means for supporting
    and/or spacing an indirectly heated cathode.  See (1) Note above.

    271,    for devices having means for supporting and/or spacing a filament.
    See (1) Note above.

    293+,   for discharge devices which have a thermionic or emissive cathode
    and other electrode and an apertured or grid-like electrode interposed
    between the cathode and the other electrode.  See subclass 302 where the
    discharge device has a plurality of cathodes and subclass 304 where the
    discharge device is provided with a plural section cathode having the
    cathode wires parallel to each other.

    305,    for discharge devices which have a cathode and other electrode
    which is designed to be used as an anode with respect to the first cathode
    and to be heated by the electron bombardment from the first cathode, the
    electrode having another surface which when heated emits electrons to a
    third electrode, (e.g., cathanode type discharge device).

    315+,   for incandescent lamps which have a filament or glower.

    337+,   see (1) Note, above.

    341+,   see (1) Note, above.

    346,    see (1) Note, above.

    364+,   for cathode-ray tubes which have a thermionic or emissive cathode.
    See subclass 409 where the cathode-ray tube has a plurality of cathodes.

    523+,   for photosensitive devices which have an emissive cathode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 121+ for X-ray
    tubes which have a thermionic or emissive cathode.


CLS 313/311
TXT Discharge devices under the class definition which have an electrode
    defined by the composition of which it is composed.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides only for patents for discharge
    devices but which specify that the device has an electrode formed of a
    particular composition or material.  Electrode composition and materials
    are classified in Class 252, Compositions, subclasses 500+ or in one of the
    related classes as pointed out in section XIV, 2 of the class definition.
    Consequently, patents disclosing electrode compositions and materials for
    discharge devices are not cross-referenced into this subclass solely for
    the composition or material, but are cross-referenced in one of the classes
    specified in section XIV of the class definitions.  However, this subclass
    does contain some cross-references of patents where the electrode is
    specified as being made of some well known material, such as brass or zinc
    which is novel in its relationship in the discharge device although the
    composition, per se, is not new.  This subclass is restricted to
    disclosures where there is some significance in the use of the particular
    material or composition in a discharge device.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes patents either as originals or
    cross-references for discharge devices which specify that one electrode is
    composed of a specified composition or material and another electrode is
    composed of a specified composition or material and another electrode is
    composed of a different composition.

    (3)     Note.  The composition or material may be a coating upon the
    electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     where the electrode includes a radio active material.

    103+,   where the electrode includes a material which emits secondary
    electrons when bombarded by primary electrons.

    107,    where the electrode includes a material which does not emit
    secondary electrons when bombarded by primary electrons.

    150     and 163+, where the electrode is a liquid electrode (e.g., mercury).

    230     and 359.1+for discharge devices having an evacuated envelope and an
    electrode which will emit positive ions.

    483+,   where the electrode includes a fluorescent or phosphorescent
    material.

    523+,   where the electrode includes a photo-sensitive material.

    559,    where the electrode includes a getter material or a material
    designed to generate a gas or vapor within the envelope of the device.

    561,    where the device has an envelope which contains a getter or a gas
    or vapor generating material which is defined by its composition and also
    has an electrode defined by its composition.

    627+    and 630, where the device has an envelope containing a gas or vapor
    and an electron emissive cathode.  See subclasses 627+ where the cathode is
    a heated or thermionic cathode.

    633,    where the device is provided with an envelope containing a gas or
    vapor and has an electrode defined by the composition or material of which
    it is composed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, see (1) Note, above.


CLS 313/312
TXT Devices under the class definition having envelopes and having a separable
    casing or jacket surrounding the envelope or a portion thereof.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is the residual subclass providing for lamps
    and discharge devices which have an envelope and a separable casing or
    jacket surrounding the envelope or a portion thereof and which are not
    provided for in specific subclasses above.  This subclass contains
    cross-references of lamps and discharge devices classified in the preceding
    subclasses which do not specifically provide for the combination of a lamp
    or discharge device with an envelope having a casing therefor.  The
    structures of envelopes in combination with a casing therefor are
    classified in other classes as set forth in sections VIII and IX of the
    class definition.  Accordingly the cross-references are placed in this
    subclass of lamps and discharge devices which have envelopes and a casing
    therefor only when there is some significance in the fact that the device
    enclosed within the envelope is a lamp or discharge device.  To complete
    the search for this subject matter the specific subclasses referred to in
    the notes below must be searched.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for lamps or discharge
    devices which have an integral double wall envelope.   For this excluded
    subject matter see subclasses 317+ below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17+,    where the lamp or discharge device is provided with an envelope and
    has a casing or jacket for the envelope, the space between the casing and
    the envelope being designed to contain either a heat transfer medium, a
    heat insulating medium or to be evacuated.

    317+,   for envelopes which have double spaced walls.  See (2) Note, above.

    324,    for devices under the class definition which do not have an
    envelope but which are provided with a casing or jacket which is not gas
    tight and which wholly or partially surrounds the device.


CLS 313/313
TXT Devices under the class definition provided with electrical shielding means
    or with means for distributing the static charges which accumulate upon the
    parts of the device or for the prevention of the accumulation of static
    charges upon parts of the device or for preventing undesired electric space
    discharges, such as arcs, between the parts of the device.

    (1)     Note.  For a definition of shield, see "Definition of Terms Used in
    the Class Definition".

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes devices provided with means to
    prevent the accumulation of undesired static discharges upon the envelope
    of the device.  This subclass also includes devices provided with means to
    prevent electric space discharges between the lead wires for the electrodes
    of the device.

    (3)     Note.  This is the residual subclass and provides for all lamp and
    discharge devices which are not specifically provided for in the preceding
    subclasses which have an electrical shield or a static charge distribution
    means combined therewith.  Accordingly, cross-references have been placed
    in this subclass of patents classified in the preceding subclasses of lamps
    and discharge devices having an electrical shield or static charge
    distribution means excepting in the case where such patent is classified in
    a specific subclass preceding this subclass which provides for such subject
    matter.  A complete field of search for this subject matter will therefore
    include the subclasses set forth in the notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11+,    where the shield is a heated shield or is provided with means for
    modifying the temperature of the shield (having a heat radiating surface),
    see indented subclass 33 for devices having an envelope and an internal
    temperature modifying baffle, and subclass 38 for devices having a heat
    shield for the filament or heated cathode.

    134,    for spark plugs having an electrical shield (e.g., radio shielding).

    168,    for liquid electrode discharge devices (e.g., mercury) which have
    the anodes shielded from each other by being placed in separate chambers of
    the envelope.

    169,    for liquid electrode discharge devices having a plurality of anodes
    with one or more anode arc shields.

    590,    592, 597+, 608, 609+, 614, 616, and 626, where the device includes
    an envelope containing a gas or vapor. Where the device is a discharge
    device having three or more electrodes see subclasses 590, 592 and 597+.
    See subclass 590 where a shield is interposed between two of the electrodes
    to prevent a discharge therebetween, subclass 592 where there is a hollow
    shield which surrounds at least a part of the discharge path and which has
    an apertured or grid-like electrode within the shield and subclasses 597+
    where an apertured or grid-like electrode (e.g., shield electrode) is
    interposed between two other electrodes.  See subclass 608 where a
    discharge device has particulate material between the discharge electrodes,
    subclasses 609+ where a discharge device has a partition, baffle,
    constricting means or a portion of the envelope wall interposed in the
    discharge space between the electrodes, subclass 614 for discharge devices
    provided with an anode shield, subclass 616 for discharge devices which are
    provided with a positive ion or cathode shield, and subclass 626 for lamps
    and discharge devices which have a shield for the electrode or an electrode
    support.

    239+,   where the device is provided with significant supporting and/or
    spacing structure for the shield.

    293+,   for discharge devices which have an apertured or grid-like
    electrode (e.g., a shield electrode) interposed in the discharge space
    between two electrodes, see subclass 293, where the discharge device has in
    addition a fourth electrode or shield disposed outside of the discharge
    space.

    326+,   for the structure of shields, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 35+ for
    miscellaneous electrical shields or screens, per se, and for envelopes,
    boxes and housings which are of general utility (including those similar to
    those used for electric lamps and discharge devices) which are provided
    with or include as a part thereof an electromagnetic or electrostatic
    shielding means, subclasses 140+ for insulators provided with conductive
    means to modify the electrical characteristics of the insulator, including
    arcing horns, means for preventing the concentration of electrical
    stresses, means for modifying surface resistance, and grading means for
    modifying the voltage gradient.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 32 for
    electric lamps and space discharge devices which have a condenser,
    inductance or other circuit element structurally combined therewith so as
    to form a unitary device.  Electric lamps and discharge devices which are
    provided with a condenser or other circuit impedance to modify the
    distribution of electrostatic charges upon the parts of the lamp or
    discharge device are in Class 315, subclasses 32+.  Note indented
    subclasses 58+ of Class 315 and the subclasses specified in the notes to
    the definition of those subclasses where a discharge device is structurally
    combined with a condenser or other circuit impedance, and subclass 85 for
    electrical systems for electric lamps and electric space discharge devices
    having shielding means for part of the system to prevent radiation of
    electromagnetic waves from and/or to the system or some part thereof.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclass 139 for X-ray
    discharge devices having electrostatic field stress distributing means for
    increasing the impedance of the dielectric paths between the electrodes and
    subclass 143 for X-ray tubes having means for absorbing the secondary X-ray
    radiation.


CLS 313/314
TXT Devices under the class definition which are provided with means for
    preventing the repair of the device.

    (1)     Note.  Some of the devices in this subclass are provided with means
    to cause the envelope of the device to shatter when an attempt is made to
    open the envelope for the purpose of repairing or replacing the filament or
    other electrode.  Other of the devices are provided with means to prevent
    the filament or other electrode from being attached to the lead wires.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236,    for devices within the class definition which are provided with a
    spare or extra electrode which is to be substituted for a defective
    electrode.

    237,    for devices within the class definition which have an envelope and
    parts which are especially designed so that the device may be disassembled
    to repair an electrode or another part of the device and for devices within
    the class definition which are provided with means for replacing a
    defective electrode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 2.1+, for envelopes, per se, for lamps and
    discharge devices.


CLS 313/315
TXT Lamps under the class definition which are provided with a glower or
    filament adapted to be heated to incandescence by the passage of an
    electric current therethrough.

    (1)     Note.  The glower or filament may be but need not be contained
    within an enclosing envelope.

    (2)     Note.  This is residual subclass and provides only for incandescent
    lamps which are not specifically provided for in the subclasses above.
    Where the incandescent lamp is provided for in some general subclass above
    such as subclasses 11+ (with temperature modifier), and is not
    cross-referenced to a subclass specifically providing for incandescent
    lamps and structure of the lamp is claimed in addition to that provided for
    in either the general or specific subclass, the patent is cross-referenced
    into this subclass.   The notes below refer to subclasses above which
    specifically provide for incandescent lamps.

    (3)     Note.  Where the only significant lamp structure recited is the
    envelope, or the envelope and the base for the envelope, the filament or
    light emitting body being recited broadly or by name only, and where there
    is no relationship recited between the filament or the light emitting body
    and the envelope except that the filament or body is within the envelope,
    the patent is classified in subclasses 317+.  For example, a claim directed
    to a particular shaped envelope which states merely that there is a
    filament or light emitting body within the envelope is classified in
    subclass 317.  A claim which includes an envelope, either broadly or
    specifically recited, and a base and which state merely that the envelope
    contains a filament or light emitting body is classified in subclasses
    318.01+.

    (4)     Note.  Where the only significant lamp structure recited is the
    structure of the filament or glower with or without a lead wire or
    connector, the claim merely stating that the filament or glower is within
    or a part of an incandescent lamp, the patent is classified in subclasses
    326+, especially in subclasses 341+.  For example, a claim which recites an
    incandescent lamp provided with a filament of a particular structure
    without stating any other relationship of the filament to the other parts
    of the lamp is classified in subclasses 326+.  Where the patent claims an
    envelope having a filament or glower being defined by either its structure
    or by its composition, the patent is classified in this subclass (315).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for plural unit devices under the class definition which include at
    least one incandescent lamp unit and a discharge device unit.  Note that
    incandescent lamps having only plural filaments or glowers are not
    classified in subclasses 1+ but are in indented subclass 316.

    9,      for incandescent lamps which include a filament or glower and a
    separate body, not an electrode, which is designed to be heated to
    incandescene by the filament or glower.

    110+,   for incandescent lamps which have integrally combined therewith an
    optical device or which have the envelope made of a material which
    transmits a particular portion of the spectrum (e.g., ultraviolet light).
    See subclass 112 where the optical device is a polarizer, a filter or where
    the envelope is special ray transmissive.  See subclasses 113+ where the
    optical device is a reflector; subclass 116 where the optical device is a
    light diffusing means and subclass 117 where the optical device is a light
    valve or light obscuring means.

    235,    for incandescent lamps which include two electrodes which are
    maintained in imperfect contact, the lamps being designed so that the
    passage of electric current from one electrode to the other produces light
    adjacent the ends of the electrodes which are in contact with each other.

    271+,   for incandescent lamps having supporting and/or spacing structure
    for the filament or glower.  Where the only significant lamp structure
    recited is the supporting and/or spacing structure for the filament or
    glower either with or without the enclosing envelope, the patent is
    classified in subclasses 271+ of this class.  Where the structure is
    disclosed or claimed in addition to the filament or glower supporting
    and/or spacing structure, the patent is classified in subclasses 271+ and
    cross-referenced to this or the indented subclass.

    313,    for incandescent lamps provided with means for preventing the
    accumulation of static charges upon parts of the lamp or for preventing
    undesired arc or other discharges between the parts of the lamp.

    314,    for incandescent lamps which are provided with means which prevents
    repair of the incandescent lamp.

    331+,   for the structure of lamp filaments and glowers which have combined
    therewith a lead wire or connector. See (4) Note above.

    341+,   for the structure of filaments and glowers.  See (4) Note above.

    549+,   where the incandescent lamp has an envelope which contains a
    getter, a gas or vapor generating material or is provided with means for
    regulating the pressure within the envelope.

    578+,   where the incandescent lamp has an envelope which contains a gas or
    vapor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 32+
    especially subclasses 32, 46+, 49, 51+, and 64 through 74 for incandescent
    lamps which have structurally combined therewith a circuit element such as
    an electric switch or an impedance.  See subclasses 46+ for the structural
    combination of an incandescent lamp and a discharge device where the lamp
    filament is connected in shunt relation to the discharge electrode,
    subclass 49 for the structural combination of an incandescent lamp and a
    discharge device where the lamp filament is connected in series with the
    discharge device.  See subclasses 51+ where the incandescent lamp has a
    plurality of circuit elements combined therewith.


CLS 313/316
TXT Lamps under subclass 315 which are provided with a plurality of filaments
    or glowers, the filaments or glowers being provided with separate terminals
    so that the filaments or glowers are adapted to be independently energized.

    (1)     Note.  One terminal may have a plurality of filaments or glowers
    connected to it, the filaments or glowers being provided with separate
    terminals for the other ends of the filaments or glowers so that they may
    be independently energized.

    (2)     Note.  See notes (2) to (4) in the definition of subclass 315 with
    respect to the classification of multiple filament lamps in the subclasses
    which precede subclass 315 and this indented subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    where the lamp has a reflector integrally combined therewith.

    236,    for multiple filament electric lamps which are provided with means,
    other than the mere terminals of the lamp, so that one of the filaments or
    glowers may be used to the exclusion of the other, the means being capable
    of selecting either of the filaments or glowers for use.

    272,    for lamps which including significant supporting and/or spacing
    structure for a plurality of filaments or glowers.   Where the only
    significant lamp structure claimed is the supporting and/or spacing
    structure for the filaments or glowers, either with or without the
    enclosing envelope, the patent is classified in subclass 272.   Where
    structure is disclosed or claimed in addition to the supporting and/or
    spacing structure for the filaments or glowers, the patent is classified in
    subclass 272 and cross-referenced to this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 64+ where
    the lamp has structurally combined therewith a circuit element such as an
    electric switch or impedance.  Note that indented subclass 65 has multiple
    filament or glower lamps which include switch means in the lamp to energize
    one filament when another filament fails to operate properly.


CLS 313/317
TXT Devices under the class definition provided with an envelope which encloses
    the electrodes of the device.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides only for lamps and discharge devices
    which are provided with an envelope when there is some significance in the
    use of the envelope in a lamp or discharge device.   Also, included are
    lamps and discharge devices which are provided with a specific envelope
    where the claims state that the envelope contains one or more electrodes of
    a discharge device, a lamp filament, or other structure sufficient to
    exclude the patent from the classes which provide for the envelope and
    envelopes with bases, per se.  Envelopes, per se, for lamps and discharge
    devices are classified in Class 220, Receptacles, subclasses 2.1+, or Class
    174, Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators if claimed in combination with
    the lead-in structure, or in Class 439, Electrical Connectors, if claimed
    in combination with electrical connector structure as pointed out in
    sections XI and XII of the class definition.  See sections XI and XII of
    the class definition for the line between Class 313 and the other classes
    with respect to the subject matter provided for in this subclass.
    Consequently, patents disclosing envelopes for electric lamps and discharge
    devices are not cross-referenced into this subclass solely for the envelope
    structure of for the structure of the envelope and its base (electrical
    connector), but are cross-referenced in one of the classes specified in
    sections XI and XII of the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17+,    where the envelope of the device is provided with a jacket or
    casing for modifying the temperature of the envelope (e.g., cooling,
    heating or insulating the device), see subclasses 25+ where the envelope is
    provided with spaced double walls and includes means (e.g., vacuum, gas,
    insulating material) in the space between the envelope walls for modifying
    the temperature of the lamp or discharge device.

    33,     where the envelope is provided with an internal temperature
    modifying baffle.

    34,     where the envelope is provided with a condensing chamber or surface
    to cool the gas or vapor within the envelope.

    44,     where the envelope wall is provided with means to modify the
    temperature of the device (e.g., heat radiating means, etc.).

    109,    where the envelope is coated or contains a fluorescent or
    phosphorescent material.

    110+,   where the envelope is provided with optical means (e.g., lens,
    etc.) to modify the ray energy passing through the envelope wall, see
    subclass 112 where the optical means is a polarizer, or filter, subclass
    113 where the optical means is a reflector, subclass 116 where the envelope
    wall is light diffusing, and subclass 117 where the optical means is a
    light valve or light obscuring means.

    148,    where the device has a movable electrode and a portion of the
    envelope wall is moveable to transmit motion to the movable electrode.

    168,    for liquid electrode (e.g., mercury) discharge devices having a
    plurality of anodes, the envelope being provided with separate anode
    chambers.

    237,    where the envelope and the parts of the device are made so that the
    device can be readily disassembled to repair or replace a part of the
    device.

    242,    for devices under the class definition which have means for
    supporting a shield, the shield being supported by or forming part of the
    stem of the envelope.

    246+    and 248, for discharge devices having an envelope and means for
    supporting and/or spacing a plurality of electrodes therein, the envelope
    being formed of conductive material.  See subclasses 246+ where the
    conductive envelope portion is an electrode of the device.

    266,    for discharge devices under the class definition having a plurality
    of electrode supported by wires, rods, or tubes within an envelope, the
    structure of the envelope or the envelope stem which supports the electrode
    supports being modified.

    282,    for devices which have an envelope with an electrically conductive
    (e.g., metal) envelope portion which supports an electrode within the
    envelope.

    290,    for devices under the class definition having an electrode
    supported by a wire, rod or tube within an envelope, the structure of the
    envelope or the envelope stem which supports the electrode support being
    modified.

    312,    where the device is provided with an envelope and has a separable
    casing or jacket which wholly or partially surrounds the envelope.

    313,    for devices under the class definition provided with means for
    preventing the accumulating of static charges upon the envelope.

    314,    for devices under the class definition provided with envelopes
    which shatter when an attempt is made to open the envelope for the purpose
    of repairing the electrodes of the device.

    315+,   for incandescent lamps provided with an envelope.  See (3) Note to
    the definition of subclass 315 for the incandescent lamps which are
    classified in this and the indented subclass.

    530,    where the device is a photo-sensitive discharge device having the
    cathode on the envelope wall.

    547,    where the envelope is provided with valve means for introducing a
    gas or vapor into or withdrawing a gas or vapor from the envelope.

    609+,   for gas or vapor discharge devices where the envelope is shaped so
    that a portion of the envelope is interposed in the straight line path
    between the electrodes (e.g., coiled, U-shaped, etc.) or where the envelope
    is provided with a restricted cross-sectional portion so as to provide a
    partition or baffle between the discharge electrodes.

    626,    where the device includes an envelope containing an atmosphere of a
    gas or vapor and a lead-in wire, the stem of the envelope being formed so
    as to shield the lead-in wire from deleterious influences, such as
    sputtered particles, vaporized metals, etc.

    634+    and 636, where the device includes an envelope containing an
    atmosphere of gas or vapor.  See subclasses 634+ where the device is
    defined by the structure of the envelope and subclass 636 where the device
    is defined by the composition of the envelope.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, see (1) Note, above.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 2.1+ see (1) Note, above.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, and see (1) Note, above.


CLS 313/318.01
TXT Having base and connector:

    Devices under subclass 317 wherein the envelope is provided with a base
    attached to the envelope, the base being provided with contact means for
    making electrical connection to the electrodes of the device.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides only for lamps and discharge devices
    which have an envelope and the base therefor when there is some
    significance in the fact that the device within the envelope is a lamp or
    discharge device. This subclass, therefore, is subject to all the
    limitations set forth in the notes to the definition of subclass 317.  As
    pointed out in section XI, 2 of the class definition, lamps and discharge
    devices having an envelope with a base therefor where the base includes
    electrical connector means (e.g., contact prongs) are classified in Class
    439, Electrical Connectors, where no significant structure of the lamp or
    discharge device is claimed. Likewise, lamps and discharge devices having
    an envelope with an attached base where the structure claimed relates
    solely to the joint between the base and the envelope are classified in
    Class 403, Joints and Connections, as pointed out in section XII, 1 of the
    class definition. Envelopes having a base thereon are classified in Class
    220, Receptacles, subclasses 2.1+ where electrical features are not
    claimed. See section XII, 1 of the class definition. Consequently patents
    disclosing lamps and discharge devices which have an envelope and the base
    thereon are not cross-referenced into this subclass solely for the
    structure of the envelope and its base (electrical connector) but are
    cross-referenced in one of the classes specified in sections XI and XII of
    the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247,    253+, 274, and 286, for devices under the class definition which
    have an envelope and an electrode which is supported by support structure
    such as lead-in conductors, wires, rods, or tubes which are supported by
    opposed or spaced parts of the envelope wall (double-ended devices). See
    subclass 247 where the device is a discharge device and the envelope has a
    portion of the wall formed of conductive material which is designed for use
    as an electrode, subclasses 253+ for other discharge devices having
    supporting means for a plurality of electrodes, at least one of which is so
    supported, subclass 274 where the device has a filament so supported, and
    subclass 286 for miscellaneous devices under the class definition having an
    electrode so supported.

    315,    for incandescent lamps provided with a base where the base is
    accurately located with respect to the filament or light emitting body so
    as to form a prefocused lamp.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 2.1+, and see (1) Note above.

    403,    Joints and Connections, see (1) Note above.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 611+ for electrical connectors
    having a vitreous envelope secured to an electrical contact or coupling
    part (i.e., lamp or tube base type), and see subclasses 660+ for various
    types of connectors, per se, which may or may not be disclosed as being
    subcombinations of a lamp or space discharge device. Also, see (1) Note
    above.


CLS 313/318.02
TXT Secure to each end of a double-ended or tubular envelope:

    Devices under subclass 318.01 wherein the envelope has a cylindrical form
    or a particular form that has two opposite ends and wherein the base is
    supported by one end of the envelope which is opposite to the other end of
    the envelope which is secured to either a different portion of the same
    base or another base.


CLS 313/318.03
TXT Having an annular contact disposed concentrically about the longitudinal
    axis of the envelope:

    Devices under subclass 318.01 wherein the base has at least two contacts,
    at least one of which is annular and concentric about a longitudinal axis
    of the envelope or about an axis of engagement to a corresponding socket.


CLS 313/318.04
TXT Having screw thread coupling contact:

    Devices under subclass 318.03 wherein the annular contact is concentrically
    disposed about a central contact and is in the form of a sleeve having
    grooves or threads which function to mechanically and electrically couple
    the base to a corresponding socket having a mating annular grooved or
    threaded contact and a central contact.


CLS 313/318.05
TXT Having spaced, longitudinally engaging, pronglike contacts:

    Devices under subclass 318.01 wherein the base has extending therefrom at
    least two elongated, fingerlike contacts which are spaced apart and
    electrically insulated one from another.


CLS 313/318.06
TXT Having three or more electrical contacts:

    Devices under subclass 318.01 wherein the base includes three or more
    electrical contacts.


CLS 313/318.07
TXT Associated with pinch (or press) seal of envelope:

    Devices under subclass 318.01 wherein the base is attached to a sealed
    portion of the envelope, the seal portion being flat and having two major
    surfaces and two minor surfaces.


CLS 313/318.08
TXT Base attached to the envelope with cement or adhesive:

    Devices under subclass 318.01 wherein the base is attached to the envelope
    with a cement or adhesive-type material.


CLS 313/318.09
TXT Base attached to the envelope with friction or other mechanical means:

    Devices under subclass 318.01 wherein the base is friction fitted to the
    envelope or is secured to the envelope using other mechanical means such as
    a screw, nut, bolt, etc.


CLS 313/318.1
TXT Resilient mechanical means for attaching the base to the envelope:

    Devices under subclass 318.09 wherein the base is secured to the envelope
    with mechanical means, the mechanical means being resilient (or elastic or
    flexible) and the resilience of the mechanical means enabling the
    attachment of the base to the envelope.


CLS 313/318.11
TXT Having a reflector in combination with base:

    Devices under subclass 318.01 wherein the base is formed as a part of a
    radiant energy reflecting structure or is attached to an end portion of a
    radiant energy reflecting structure.


CLS 313/318.12
TXT Having a connector:

    Devices under subclass 317 wherein the envelope is provided with electrical
    contact means for making electrical connection to the electrodes of the
    device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    318.01, for an envelope having both a base and a connector means.


CLS 313/323
TXT Lamps and discharge devices under the class definition claimed in
    combination with structure classifiable, per se, in other classes when such
    combinations are not classified in any of the subclasses in this class
    preceding this subclass.

    (1)     Note.  In this and the indented subclass, for example, are lamps
    and discharge devices which have a casing (other than an envelope  or a
    casing provided for temperature modifying purposes), and combinations with
    signal or indicator means.

    (2)     Note.  This and the indented subclass contains cross-references of
    patents for lamps and discharge devices classified in the preceding
    subclasses which do not specifically provide for combined subject matter.


CLS 313/324
TXT Subject matter under subclass 323 where the lamp or discharge device is
    provided with a jacket or casing which wholly or partially surrounds the
    lamp or discharge device.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for lamps (including those of
    the discharge device type) in combination with a separable casing or jacket
    for the lamp.  For the classification of the excluded subject matter, see
    sections VIII and IX of the class definition. Likewise, this subclass does
    not provide for certain types of discharge devices such as cathode-ray
    tubes and photo-cells in combination with a separable casing or jacket
    therefor.  For the classification of this excluded subject matter, see
    sections VIII and IX of the class definition.  See section VII where the
    structure includes means for modifying the temperature of the lamp or
    discharge device.  Separable casings and jackets, per se, are provided for
    in other classes.  See section VIII where the casing or jacket is designed
    for use with temperature modifying means for the lamp or discharge device
    or includes temperature modifying means and section XII for the
    classification of miscellaneous separable casings and jackets, per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     where the device is provided with a jacket or casing for directing
    the flow of a temperature modifying medium about some part of the device.

    312,    and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto, where the lamp
    or the discharge device is provided with an envelope and a casing or jacket
    which wholly or partially encloses the envelope.

    313,    where the casing includes means for shielding the enclosed device
    or is provided with means for preventing the accumulation of static charges
    upon the casing or jacket.

    317+,   and the subclass specified in the notes thereto where the casing or
    jacket is an envelope for the lamp or discharge device.


CLS 313/325
TXT Discharge devices under the class definition which are not classifiable in
    any of the subclasses above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes discharge devices having an electrode
    formed of solid material which is electron permeable, discharge devices
    which have an insulating material in the discharge space and miscellaneous
    lightning arrestors of the space discharge type which are not provided for
    in the preceding subclasses.


CLS 313/326
TXT Electrodes and shields for electric lamps and electric space discharge
    devices which are defined by their structure.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of "electrodes" and "shields", see
    "DEFINITIONS OF TERMS USED" in the class definition.

    (2)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses do not include electrodes
    and shields which are defined solely by their composition.  Also excluded
    are electrodes and shield which are defined by their composition and the
    only structure defined is that the electrode is a wire, rod, strip,
    cylinder.  Also excluded are electrodes and shields which involve no more
    structure than a base having a coating thereon. For the classes which
    provide for the excluded subject matter and the distinction between such
    classes, see section XIV, 2, of the class definition.

    (3)     Note.  Joints and connections between an electrode or shield and a
    lead wire or connector are not included in this or the indented subclass
    unless the structure claimed includes some significant structure of the
    electrode or shield beyond that which is provided for making the joint or
    connection. Where the structure of the electrode or shield is not involved
    excepting such structure as is necessary for the joint, even though the
    joint is claimed as being for electrically connecting the parts, see the
    classes referred to in section XI, 3 of the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11+,    where the electrode structure includes means for modifying the
    temperature of the electrode (e.g., hollow electrodes having conduits
    therein for circulating a cooling fluid therethrough, electrodes having
    heat radiating surfaces, electrodes provided with heat insulating means).

    54,     where the electrode contains or is coated with a radio-active
    material.

    631+,   for devices under the class definition having an envelope
    containing a gas or vapor and an electrode of particular structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 95 and 98 for electrodes for
    electrical precipitators.

    219,    Electric Heating,  subclasses 145.1+ and 146.1+ for electrodes
    designed for use in arc welding.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 60 for electrodes limited by claimed structure to use in discharge
    devices of the consumable electrode type, where the feed of an electrode
    towards another of the electrodes is accomplished by the consummation of
    the electrode material or by the destruction of obstructions to the motion
    of the electrode.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 121+ and 143+ for
    X-ray tube electrodes; and subclasses 145+ and 203 for shields.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 364+ for a
    rod, strand, fiber or filament which is coated or is structurally defined,
    but omits structure (e.g., terminals or leads) which defines an electrode
    or a shield, or a product for classification elsewhere, and subclass 560
    for a metallic composite in which a component has metal particles held in a
    nonmetal which acts as a binder.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    subclasses 35+, 46+ and 60+ and the classes specified in the notes thereto
    for processes and apparatus for making electrodes and shield for electric
    lamps and space discharge devices.


CLS 313/327
TXT Electrodes under subclass 326 which are composed at one end of an unbaked
    material, the unbaked material being designed to be baked by heat applied
    to the electrode during the use of the electrode.

    (1)     Note. The heat to bake the electrode may be generated by a space
    discharge, or by the heat generated by the resistance to the passage of the
    current which flows from the end of the electrode to the lead-in conductor
    for the electrode.

    (2)     Note.  With respect to the subject matter of this subclass, there
    is little distinction between the process of making the article and the
    process of using the article. Therefore, any claims relating to processes
    of making self-baking electrodes will be deemed to be directed to a process
    of using the same where the process includes the baking in the use of the
    electrode article.  For classes which relate to processes of using
    self-baking electrodes, see the search notes below.  Processes of using the
    electrodes are classified with the art to which the process relates.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 280+ for
    self-baking or Soederberg electrodes limited to use in electrolytic
    apparatus. Where the disclosure is that the electrode can be used in an
    electrolytic device and the claimed structure does not necessarily so limit
    the electrode to such use, the patent is classified in Class 313 and cross
    referenced to Class 204.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses, for processes within the class definition, for
    molding or shaping plastic materials, particularly subclasses 104+ and 614+
    pertaining specifically to molding of electrical articles.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 89 and 97 for
    self-baking electrodes in electric furnaces.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    subclasses 1+ and 60+ for Methods and Apparatus for the miscellaneous
    manufacture of electric light and space discharge devices and the
    electrodes therefor.


CLS 313/328
TXT Structures under subclass 326 designed for use as a receptacle for a liquid
    electrode (e.g., mercury).

    (1)     Note.  The structures in this subclass include receptacles for
    liquid electrodes where the receptacle is to be attached to an envelope of
    the discharge device, receptacles for liquid electrodes which are designed
    to be placed within the envelope, and the structure of the envelope portion
    which is to receive the liquid electrode.

    (2)     Note.  The receptacles in this subclass usually include means to
    conduct electricity to the liquid electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for liquid electrode discharge devices which have an electric
    heater for the liquid electrode.

    29,     for liquid electrode discharge devices which have means for
    modifying the temperature of the liquid electrode.

    150,    for liquid electrode discharge devices which have a movable liquid
    electrode.

    163+,   for the miscellaneous liquid electrode discharge devices, see
    subclass 173 where the liquid electrode includes means to prevent the space
    discharge from wandering over the liquid electrode surface.


CLS 313/329
TXT Electrodes under subclass 326 where the electrode surface is in the form of
    minute conductive areas insulated electrically from each other and arranged
    in the manner of a mosaic surface.

    (1)     Note.  The insulation may be of high resistance so as to allow the
    leakage of electricity from one area to another.

    (2)     Note.  In many of the patents in this subclass, the small minute
    areas are photosensitive, but they need not be photosensitive.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    367+,   for cathode-ray tubes having a photosensitive mosaic electrode.

    531+,   for miscellaneous photosensitive discharge devices having a
    photosensitive mosaic electrode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 77+ for processes of coating wherein
    the product is electron emissive or suppressive.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 376 for an
    electrode having a discontinuous coating thereon which may be of the mosaic
    type, and which includes no more structure than a base having one or more
    coatings thereon.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    subclasses 52 and 60+ and the classes specified in the notes thereto, for
    processes and apparatus for making mosaic electrodes.


CLS 313/331
TXT Electrodes and shields under subclass 326 which have combined therewith a
    lead-wire or an electrical connector.

    (1)     Note.  An electrical connector is defined for the purpose of
    classification in these subclasses as any device or means which is provided
    for the purpose of attaching a lead wire or conductor to the electrode or
    shield.  The connector may be a part of the electrode or shield structure
    or may be merely attached mechanically to the electrode or shield.

    (2)     Note.  Joints and connections between an electrode or shield and a
    lead wire or connector are not included in this or the indented subclasses
    unless the structure claimed includes some significant structure of the
    electrode or shield beyond that which is provided for making the joint or
    connection.  Where the structure of the electrode or shield is not involved
    excepting such structure as is necessary for the joint, even though the
    joint is claimed as being for electrically connecting the parts, see the
    classes referred to in section XI, 3 of the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238+,   for devices under the class definition which have supporting and/or
    spacing structure for the electrode or shield.  In some of the devices in
    subclasses 238+ the electrode support is made of electrically conductive
    material and is used as a lead-in conductor to conduct electricity to the
    electrode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 144 for arcing
    rings and electrodes which include as a part thereof electrical connector
    structure, per se, which are specifically designed for use with the
    insulators of Class 174.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 500+ for electrically conductive
    compositions even if they are coating or plastic compositions such as
    electrically conductive cements specialized for use in joining an electrode
    to its lead wire or connector.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, subclasses 591 for alloys designed
    for use in soldering, brazing or welding an electrode to its lead wire or
    connector.


CLS 313/332
TXT Structure under subclass 331 having, (1) a connector or coupling section
    mounted between and joined to the electrode or shield and the lead wire or
    connector, or (2) a material interposed between the electrode or shield and
    the lead wire or connector.

    (1)     Note.  In some of the patents in this subclass, the interposed
    section or material is used to join the electrode or shield to the lead
    wire where the electrode or shield and the lead wire will not unite
    directly to each other because of the material used for the electrode or
    shield or lead wire.  In others, the interposed section or material is used
    only to secure a better electrical or mechanical joint.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for joints and
    connections of general utility even though designated as an electrical
    connection.


CLS 313/333
TXT Structure under subclass 331 where the electrode or shield is a filament or
    formed of wire and the lead wire or connector is attached to the filament
    or wire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    271+,   for devices under the class definition which have significant
    supporting and/or spacing structures for a filament.  In some of these
    devices, the supporting members are formed of electrically conductive
    material and are designed to be used as the lead-in conductor to conduct
    electricity to the electrode.

    332,    when there is, (1) a connector or coupling section mounted between
    and joined to the filament or wire and the lead wire or connector, or (2) a
    material is interposed between the electrode or shield and the lead wire or
    connector.

    341+,   for the structure of filaments for electric lamps and discharge
    devices.

    348+,   for electrodes and shields for electric lamps and discharge devices
    other than filaments which are made of wire (e.g., grids).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for a mere
    connection between a filament or wire and another wire even though
    designated as an electrical connection.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for an electrical
    connector, generally, and for the combination of an electrical connector
    with a "named" electric lamp.  See the class definition of that class
    (439), section IV, for the line between Class 439 and other classes which
    provide for joint structure.


CLS 313/334
TXT Structure under subclass 331 where the electrode or shield is formed at
    least in part of a nonmetallic material and the lead wire or connector is
    connected to the nonmetallic part of the electrode or shield.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333,    where the electrode is a filament, or an electrode or shield formed
    of filamentary strands which has its end structure modified to facilitate
    connecting the lead wire or connector to the filament, electrode or shield.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 500+ for electrically conductive
    compositions even if they are coating or plastic compositions such as
    electrically conductive cements specialized for use in joining a
    nonmetallic electrode or shield to a connector.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for a joint of
    general utility even though designated as an electrical connection.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 416, 418,
    432+, 444, 450, and 457+ for a nonstructural composite web or sheet
    embodying a layer of metal next to a nonmetal.


CLS 313/335
TXT Structure under subclass 331 where the electrode or shield is in the form
    of a rod-like body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238+,   for devices under the class definitions which are provided with
    supporting and/or spacing structures for a rod electrode.  In some of these
    devices, the supporting member is designed for use as the lead-in conductor
    to conduct electricity to the rod.  See indented subclass 267 where the
    supporting structure for supporting a plurality of rod electrodes is
    claimed.  See subclass 238 where the support structure for a single rod
    electrode is claimed.

    333,    where the electrode or shield is a filament or is formed of wire.

    357,    for the structure or rod electrodes or shields, per se.


CLS 313/336
TXT Cathodes under subclass 326 where the cathode is designed so that the
    electron emission from the cathode is restricted to a point-like area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    364+,   for cathode-ray tubes having point source cathodes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 121+ for X-ray
    tubes having point source cathodes.


CLS 313/337
TXT Cathodes under subclass 326 which include a cathode member and a source of
    heat energy for heating the cathode member, the heating means being a
    member or device separate from the cathode member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270,    and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto for devices under
    the class definition which include supporting and/or spacing structure for
    an indirectly heated cathode.

    305,    for discharge devices provided with at least three electrodes, a
    cathode emitting electrons to a first anode which is heated by the space
    discharge, the heated anode having a surface which when heated emits
    electrons to a second anode (the third electrode).  These devices are
    sometimes known as "cathanode" devices.

    310,    and the subclasses specified in the notes to the definition of that
    subclass for discharge devices which have an indirectly heated cathode.

    336,    where the cathode is designed so that the electron emission is
    restricted to a point-like area.

    341+,   for filaments and other resistance heated electrodes for electric
    lamps and space discharge devices.


CLS 313/338
TXT Cathodes under subclass 337 where the cathode is provided with a plurality
    of electron emissive sections which are electrically insulated from each
    other so that the cathode affords a plurality of electrically independent
    cathode sections.


CLS 313/339
TXT Cathodes under subclass 337 where the cathode member is formed with a
    hollow cavity, the cathode member being designed to emit electrons from the
    interior walls of the hollow cavity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    346,    for cathodes under subclass 643 which include a body or mass of
    electron emissive material which is at least partly enclosed within a
    support or carrier member, the support or carrier being permeable to
    electrons, or being permeable to the electron emissive material so that the
    material can permeate the support or carrier and form a coating thereon.


CLS 313/340
TXT Cathodes under subclass 337 which are provided with an electrical
    insulating material between the cathode member and the heating means for
    the cathode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 137+ for
    insulators, note subclass 138 for cathode heater insulators, per se, and
    subclasses 110+ for insulated electric conductors.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 531 for electric heaters provided with
    insulating means including the combination of an electrical heater and
    insulating means for an indirectly heated cathode where the cathode is not
    included in the claims.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 570+ for fluent electrical insulating
    materials and compositions.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 226+ for electrical resistors
    having a casing or housing around the resistance element.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 58+ for processes of coating, per se,
    wherein the product is an electrical product.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 375+ for a
    filament or electrode for electric lamps and space discharge devices which
    have an insulting coating thereon.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, appropriate subclasses for ceramic
    electrical insulating compositions, especially subclasses 127+ and 134+ for
    clay containing compositions; and subclasses 141+ for titanates and similar
    material containing compositions.


CLS 313/341
TXT Electrodes under subclass 326 which are either, (1) filaments, or (2) of
    the type which are designed to be heated by the flow of electric current
    through the electrode.

    (1)     Note.  For the other classes which provide for filaments and
    resistance heated electrodes including those for use in electric lamps and
    discharge devices, and for the processes and apparatus for making filaments
    and resistance heated electrodes, see section XIV, 2 of the class
    definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    271+,   for devices under the class definition which have a filament and
    which have supporting and/or spacing structure for the filament.

    310,    and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto for discharge
    devices which are provided with a filament or resistance heated cathode.

    315+,   for incandescent lamps with filaments or resistance heated glowers.

    336,    where the electrode is electron emissive, the electrode being
    designed so that the electron emission is restricted to a point-like area.

    337+,   and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto where the
    electrode is an indirectly heated cathode, that is, the cathode includes an
    electron emissive part and a separate heating means to heat the emissive
    part to the electron emitting temperature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 364+ for a
    filament which is coated or is structurally defined, but omits structure
    (e.g., terminals or leads), which defines an electrode for Class 313 or a
    product elsewhere classified.


CLS 313/342
TXT Filaments and electrodes under subclass 341 where the parts of the filament
    and electrodes are arranged so as to reduce to a minimum the
    electromagnetic or electrostatic field which is generated by the current
    flowing through the filament or electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    337+,   for indirectly heated cathodes which are provided with means to
    shield the electrons emitted by the cathode from the electromagnetic or
    electrostatic field generated by the heating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 32+ for
    conductors of the noninductive type.


CLS 313/343
TXT Filaments and electrodes under subclass 341 which are composed of a
    plurality of inter-engaged wires or strands assembled to form a single
    electrode structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 200+ and the
    classes specified in the notes thereto for spun, twisted or twined strands.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 128.1+ for
    plural strand conductors.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 608 for metallic
    stock material which embodies interengaged fibers.


CLS 313/344
TXT Filaments and electrodes under subclass 341 where the filament is formed
    into a coil.

    (1)     Note.  A coil is defined for the purpose of classification in this
    subclass as a filament or electrode having at least one convolution.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    341,    for mere U-shaped, V-shaped or looped filaments and electrodes
    within the definition of subclass 341.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 592 for metallic
    stock material in the shape of a helix or which has a helical component.


CLS 313/345
TXT Filaments and electrodes under subclass 341 where the filament or electrode
    is provided with a coating.

    (1)     Note.  The coating may be either electron emissive or not electron
    emissive.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes only those patents which claim
    structure of the filament or electrode other than merely reciting that the
    electrode is a filament, rod cathode, electrode or base, which is provided
    with a coating.  Where no more is claimed than the mere base with a coating
    thereon, the patent is classified in one of the classes specified in
    section XIV, 2 of the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    346,    for the structure of other electrodes under subclass 326 which are
    provided with an electron emissive coating.

    355,    for the structure of other electrodes under subclass 326 which have
    a coating thereon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 554 for a metal
    particle-containing stock material composite.


CLS 313/346
TXT Electrodes under subclass 326 which are made at least in part of electron
    emissive material or which are coated with electron emissive material.

    (1)     Note.  Where no structure other than the mere composition of the
    electrode is claimed, or no structure other than the mere composition of
    the base and/or coating is claimed, the patent is excluded from Class 313.
    Merely naming the electrode as a wire, rod, filament, plate or electrode
    will not cause classification in Class 313.  For the classification of
    electrodes defined only by their composition, and for coated electrodes
    involving only a base with a coating thereon, see section XIV, 2 of the
    class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310,    and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto for discharge
    devices which are provided with an emissive cathode.

    329,    for the structure of electron emissive mosaic electrodes.

    336,    for the structure of electron emissive electrodes where the
    electron emission is restricted to a point-like source.

    337,    for the structure of electron emissive indirectly heated cathodes.

    341,    for the structure of electron emissive filaments and resistance
    heated electrodes, see indented subclass 345 where the filament or
    resistance heated electrode has an emissive coating thereon.

    353,    for electrode structure where a portion of the electrode is a
    nondischarge sustaining portion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 58+ for processes of coating, per se,
    wherein the product is an electrical product.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 375+ for a
    filament or electrode which may be made at least in part from electron
    emissive material or which is coated with electron emissive material, and
    subclass 553 for an electrode comprising a particulate metal component
    adjacent to a nonparticulate metal component.


CLS 313/347
TXT Electrodes under subclass 326 which are constructed so that at least a
    small area of the electrode becomes incandescent when bombarded by
    electrons.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is limited to electrodes which are especially
    designed to have a portion of the electrode become incandescent when
    bombarded by electrons and does not include electrodes, such as anodes,
    which may become heated only as an undesired incident of their operation.

    (2)     Note.  Some of the electrodes in this subclass are intended for use
    as targets in cathode-ray tubes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    346,    for electrodes containing and/or coated with electron emissive
    material designed for use in discharge devices, usually of the type
    containing a gas or vapor, and which are designed to become heated by the
    bombardment of the electric space discharge so that they become thermionic
    electrodes.

    305,    for miscellaneous discharge devices which have an anode which is
    designed to be heated by the space discharge. Included in subclass 305 are
    discharge devices where the heated anode has a surface designed to emit
    electrons to a second anode (an electrode other than the cathode which
    emits electrons to the heated anode).

    464,    for cathode ray devices provided with targets adapted to be
    rendered incandescent by the cathode beam.

    627+,   for discharge devices of the gas or vapor type having a thermionic
    cathode which is heated by the space discharge.  Also 627+, for discharge
    devices of the gas or vapor type having an anode which is heated to
    incandescence by the space discharge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, for X-ray tube targets or
    anticathodes.


CLS 313/348
TXT Electrodes and shields under subclass 326 which are formed of open-work
    material such as wire mesh or perforated sheet material, or which are
    formed of wires or bars, or which are otherwise provided with openings in
    the wall of the electrode or shield.

    (1)     Note.  Some of the electrodes in this subclass are intended for
    discharge control electrodes or grid electrodes, but also included are all
    foraminous and grid-like electrode structures even though claimed as being
    used for anodes, cathodes or other electrodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    293+,   and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto for discharge
    devices which have a foraminous or grid-like electrode disposed in the
    inter-electrode space between two other electrodes.

    346,    where the foraminous or open-work electrode forms a support or
    carrier for a body or mass of electron emissive material, the body or mass
    of electron emissive material being at least partly enclosed within the
    foraminous or open-work electrode contains or is coated with electron
    emissive material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    245,    Wire Fabrics and Structure, appropriate subclasses for flexible
    wire or slat-and-wire fabrics.

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 1+ for an open mesh material.


CLS 313/349
TXT Electrodes and shields under subclass 348, (1) having the ratio of area of
    free passage through the openings in the electrode or shield to the
    obturating area of the electrode or shield in one region of the electrode
    or shield different from such ratio in another region of the electrode or
    shield, (2) where the electrode or shield wall surface is not a cylindrical
    hollow sleeve and is of a nonstraight surface configuration with the
    foraminous wall of the electrode or shield lying in at least two different
    planes, or (3) having the foraminous wall surface of the electrode or
    shield in the form of a hollow sleeve, the sleeve having the
    cross-sectional area at one region of the electrode or shield different
    from the cross-sectional area at another region of the electrode or shield.

    (1)     Note.  Under (1) in the subclass definition is included electrodes
    and shields having at least one opening in the electrode or shield of a
    different area from the area of another of the openings, or electrodes and
    shields having the openings in the electrode or shield nonuniformly spaced
    with respect to each other, or electrodes and shields formed of a wire coil
    or helix which has a nonuniform pitch for the turns of the coil or helix.
    Under (3) in the subclass definition is included electrodes and shields the
    wall surface of which is conical, in the form of a truncated cone,
    barrel-shape or spherical.

    (2)     Note.  Many of the electrodes in this subclass are intended for use
    as discharge control electrodes in discharge devices of the variable-mu
    type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    294,    for discharge devices having a foraminous or grid electrode
    interposed in the discharge space between two other electrodes, the
    foraminous or grid electrode being nonuniformly spaced from the other
    electrodes (e.g., the foraminous or grid electrode being eccentrically
    mounted, or being noncylindrical with respect to concentric electrodes,
    etc.).

    295,    for discharge devices having a foraminous or grid electrode
    interposed in the discharge space between two other electrodes, the
    foraminous or grid electrode having a nonuniform mesh area.

    348     and 350, for foraminous or open-work electrodes and shields where
    the wall surface is a straight hollow sleeve and is uniformly foraminous
    over its surface.


CLS 313/350
TXT Electrodes and shields under subclass 348 where the electrode or shield is
    formed of rods, wire or mesh material which is attached to one or more rods
    or posts so as to give the desired rigidity to the electrode or shield.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    245,    Wire Fabrics and Structure, subclass 11 for slat and wire fabrics.


CLS 313/351
TXT Electrodes and shields under subclass 326 where the electrode or shield is
    provided with, (1) a plurality of pointed needle-like portions, or (2) with
    a serrated edge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    309,    for discharge devices which have a multipointed or serrated edge
    electrode.


CLS 313/352
TXT Electrodes and shields under subclass 326 which are composed of a plurality
    of parts or sections, one of the parts or sections being composed of a
    different material from the material of which another part or section is
    composed.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses includes the structure of
    electrodes and shields which are formed of one material and which are
    coated with another material.

    (2)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses do not include electrodes
    or shields which are composed of a plurality of materials which are mere
    constituents of a single composition or alloy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    337+,   where the electrode is an indirectly heated cathode.

    343,    for this subject matter where the electrode is a filament or
    resistance heated electrode which has a wire or strand wound upon another
    filament or rod which is of a different composition from the composition of
    the filament or rod.

    346,    for this subject matter where the electrode is made of a material
    containing or is coated with electron emissive material or includes a body
    or mass of electron emissive material which is at least partly enclosed by
    a support or carrier which is permeable to electrons or to the electron
    emissive material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, where the electrode is an
    X-ray target or anti-cathode.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 548+ for
    composite metallic stock having metal particles, and subclasses 615+ for
    other composite metallic stock.


CLS 313/353
TXT Electrodes under subclass 352 where the electrode is provided with a part
    or section which is formed of a material which will not sustain an electric
    space discharge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106+,   for discharge devices having means for preventing the emission of
    secondary electrons, note subclass 107 where the electrode is formed of or
    coated with a nonemissive material.


CLS 313/354
TXT Electrodes under subclass 352 where the electrode is formed in the shape of
    a rod, the rod being provided with a core part which is formed of a
    material which is of different composition from the material of which the
    body part of the rod is composed.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes cored rods designed for use as arc
    lamp electrodes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 375+ for a rod
    which has a coating, impregnation or core.


CLS 313/355
TXT Electrodes and shields under subclass 352 where, (1) the electrode is
    provided with a coating, or (2) the electrode or shield is formed of a
    plurality of laminations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329,    where the electrode is a mosaic electrode.

    336,    where the electrode is electron emissive electrode and is provided
    with a coating, the electrode being designed to emit electrons only from a
    small point-like area.

    337+,   where the electrode is an indirectly heated cathode.

    345,    where the electrode is a filament or resistance heated electrode
    which is provided with a coating.

    346,    where the electrode is provided with an electron emissive coating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 98+ for a
    stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer which has
    structure (e.g., dimension or aperture), subclasses 221+ for such a product
    embodying an element or component which is structurally defined (e.g.,
    porous or size of fiber), subclasses 357+ for a structurally defined or
    coated rod, strand, fiber, filament or other element, and subclasses 411.1+
    and 615+ for nonmetallic and metallic composites, respectively, defined in
    terms of the composition of their components.


CLS 313/356
TXT Electrodes and shields under subclass 326 which are in the form of tubes or
    hollow sleeves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331,    where the tubular or hollow sleeve electrode or shield is provided
    with a lead wire or connector.

    337+,   where the tubular or hollow sleeve electrode is part of an
    indirectly heated cathode.

    341,    where the tubular or hollow sleeve electrode is a filament or
    resistance heated electrode.

    346,    where the tubular or sleeve electrode is made of a material
    containing or is coated with electron emissive material or at least
    partially encloses a body or mass of electron emissive material.

    348+,   where the tubular or hollow sleeve is formed of foraminous or open
    work material.

    354,    where the tubular or sleeve electrode contains a core made of a
    different composition from the composition of the tube or sleeve material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 39.77 for
    discharge devices having a hollow tubular electrode formed so as to provide
    a structure having distributed inductance and capacitance (e.g., cavity
    resonator), and operable in a magnetic field (e.g., magnetrons), and for
    the electrode, per se.


CLS 313/357
TXT Electrodes and shields under subclass 326 which are in the form of rods.

    (1)     Note.  Where no structure of the electrode or shield is recited
    except that it is a rod formed of a particular composition, the patent is
    excluded from Class 313 and will be found in Class 252, Compositions,
    subclasses 502+ or one of the classes specified in the notes to the
    definition of those subclasses.  See section XIV, 2 of the definition of
    Class 313.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238+,   for devices under the class definition which are provided with a
    rod electrode and supporting and/or spacing structure for the rod
    electrode.  See indented subclass 267 where the device is provided with
    supporting and/or spacing structure for a plurality of rod electrodes.  See
    subclass 238 where the supporting structure for a single rod electrode is
    claimed.

    335,    where the rod is provided with a lead wire or connector.

    341+,   for filaments and resistance heated electrodes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 364+ for a rod
    which is structurally defined or coated, and not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 313/358
TXT Miscellaneous subject matter under the class definition which is not
    provided for in any of the preceding subclasses in this class.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes electrolytic light sources.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315+,   for miscellaneous incandescent lamps.

    325,    for miscellaneous discharge devices.


CLS 313/359.1
TXT WITH POSITIVE OR NEGATIVE ION ACCELERATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition which are provided with means for
    generation positive or negative ions and which are provided with means to
    accelerate the ions.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the devices in this subclass are provided with means
    such as an ion transparent window for allowing ions to emerge from the
    envelope of the discharge device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for cyclotrons.

    230,    for discharge devices which are provided with an evacuated envelope
    and which have means for generating positive ions.

    231.01+,for discharge devices with means for supplying fluent material to
    the discharge space.

    364+,   for cathode-ray tubes which may include means for controlling or
    deflecting an electron beam.

    567,    for discharge devices which include an envelope and a confined
    atmosphere of gas or vapor and which necessarily generate positive ions in
    their operation.

    588,    for gas or vapor-type discharge devices which are provided with an
    envelope having two portions, one of the portions containing electrodes
    designed to generate an ionizing discharge, the ionizing discharge
    supplying electrons to an electrode in the second portion of the device;
    the second portion being designed to operate with an electronic discharge.
    The two portions of the envelope may be separated by a barrier which is
    permeable to ions but impermeable to the gas or vapor in the first envelope
    portions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 251 for devices for producing and
    propagating a unidirectional stream of neutral molecules or atoms through a
    vacuum, usually with thermal velocity; subclasses 281+ for methods and
    apparatus for ionic separation or analysis; especially subclass 288 which
    includes a sample supply or invisible radiation responsive gas; subclasses
    379+ for discharge device apparatus which includes means to supply the gas
    into the discharge device; subclasses 396+ for means to deflect, scan,
    spread, or focus a performed beam of ions; and subclasses 423+ for ion
    generation methods and apparatus in which a material is treated or
    irradiated.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 111.01+
    for discharge device load with fluent material supply to the discharge
    space.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 510+ for miscellaneous circuits which are magnetically
    effected.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 210 for ion or electron beam deflecting magnets,
    per se, and the search notes thereto for combinations including such magnet
    means.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions: Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 100+ for the utilization of a
    plasma in fusion reactions or where it is intended to obtain a nuclear
    fusion reaction; and subclasses 156+ and apparatus for processes for
    changing the nucleus of a substance by the use of ray energy including an
    ion beam.


CLS 313/360.1
TXT Plural apertured electrodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 359.1 including two or more apertured
    electrodes.

    (1)     Note.  In general, the electrodes here are accelerating electrodes.


CLS 313/361.1
TXT Means for deflecting or focusing:

    Subject matter under subclass 359.1 including means to deflect, scan,
    spread, or focus the ions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 396+ for the deflection or focusing of a
    preformed beam of ions.


CLS 313/362.1
TXT Supplying ionizable material (e.g., gas or vapor):

    Subject matter under subclass 359.1 including means for delivering an
    ionizable fluent material to a discharge device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231.01+,for means for supplying or directing fluent material to a discharge
    device.


CLS 313/363.1
TXT Extraction or target electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 359.1 including an electrode for removing or
    receiving ions.


CLS 313/364
TXT Subject matter under class definition including means to generate a beam of
    electrons in the form of a ray or to exchange energy therewith.

    (1)     Note.  Cathode-ray tubes in general are characterized by being
    provided with one or more focusing electrodes or electromagnets for forming
    the electric space discharge into a restricted beam or ray of elemental
    cross-section.  However, some cathode-ray tubes utilize the gas pressure
    within the envelope of the discharge device to form the cathode stream into
    a restricted pencil ray beam and such devices are included in this and the
    indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses do not include discharge
    devices of the so-called beam power type where the sole means for forming
    the electron stream into a restricted beam or ray is a plurality of grid
    electrodes or other apertured electrodes between the cathode and anode,
    with the apertures of the grid or other electrodes in alignment.  However,
    this and the indented subclasses do include discharge devices similar in
    structure where in addition to the plurality of grid or apertured
    electrodes, other means (e.g., electrodes) are provided for the sole
    purpose of forming the discharge into a restricted beam or ray.  The
    excluded subject matter will be found in subclass 299 of this class.

    (3)     Note.  This and the indented subclass do not include discharge
    devices which are provided only with means for varying the width of the
    electron stream and which do not include any means whose purpose is to form
    the discharge into a restricted beam or ray.  See subclass 107.5, for the
    excluded subject matter including discharge devices of the "magic eye" type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.1,    for plural unit devices under the class definition where one of the
    devices is a cathode-ray tube.

    107.5,  see (3) Note, above.

    299,    see (2) Note, above.

    359.1,  for discharge devices with means to accelerate positive or negative
    ions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 251 for neutron generators, subclasses
    281+ for methods and apparatus for mass spectrometers which use discharge
    devices in the separation and analysis of material, subclass 305 for
    methods and apparatus for analyzing electrons by separating them on a
    velocity or momentum basis, subclasses 306+ for the inspection of solids or
    liquids by discharged particles and particularly subclass 311 for electron
    microscopes, subclasses 396+ for electron or ion beam deflection or
    focussing, means, subclasses 440.11+ for object supports used in charged
    particle inspection systems, subclasses 493.1+ for evacuable chamber device
    with radiation detectors or detector supports and subclasses 492.1+ methods
    and apparatus to irradiate object or materials generally.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 3+ for
    cathode ray devices which have structurally combined therewith a circuit
    element, (e.g., a switch, impedance, cavity resonator, etc.).

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, subclasses 226+ for
    cathode-ray oscilloscopes (e.g., cathode-ray tubes having means, such as
    photographic film, to make a record of the trace of the cathode ray), and
    subclasses 121+ for electrostatic recorders using electron beam in an air
    tight envelope for creating a charged pattern.

    348,    Television, subclasses 325+ and 805+ for cathode-ray tubes utilized
    in television systems in combination with optical elements, supports, and
    specific circuitry peculiar to television.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 121+ for X-ray
    tubes.


CLS 313/365
TXT Subject matter under subclass 364 including structure responsive to
    electromagnetic radiation or compressional waves.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are structures which emit electrons or change
    conductivity when irradiated with light, and structures responding
    piezoelectrically to compressional waves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.1,    for plural unit devices within the class definition which include a
    cathode ray device with a fluorescent screen and a photosensitive device,
    the light emitted by the fluorescent screen activating the photosensitive
    electrode.

    346,    and the classes and subclasses specified in the notes thereto, for
    photo-emissive cathodes, per se.

    523+,   for other photosensitive devices under the class definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 330+ and 361+ for light amplifiers
    responsive to invisible radiation, subclass 213 for "light amplifiers",
    i.e., devices having a photosensitive cathode, and a fluorescent screen
    which is excited by the emission from the cathode so that there is
    correspondence between the light falling on the cathode and the light
    output of the fluorescent screen, and subclasses 216+ for cathode-ray tubes
    which are provided with a photosensitive electrode in combination with a
    separable optical means for controlling the light impressed upon the
    photosensitive electrode.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 10+ for
    systems for supplying electrical energy to cathode-ray tubes, the system
    including light sensitive means to control the operation of the cathode-ray
    tube.  The cathode-ray tube in the system may have a light sensitive
    electrode.


CLS 313/366
TXT Subject matter under subclass 365 including a semiconductor depletion layer
    device responsive to irradiation.

    (1)     Note.  The barrier may be induced or formed by doping.


CLS 313/367
TXT Subject matter under subclass 366 wherein the semiconductor depletion layer
    devices are disposed in a mosaic.

    (1)     Note.  The term mosaic is intended to include strips, stripes, or
    bands.


CLS 313/368
TXT Subject matter under subclass 367 wherein more than one depletion layer
    form an element of the mosaic.


CLS 313/369
TXT Subject matter under subclass 365 including structure responsive to pressure

    (1)     Note.  Devices responsive to compressional waves are included here.


CLS 313/370
TXT Subject matter under subclass 365 including a conductive light previous
    film, layer or element adjacent the responsive structure specified in terms
    of chemical composition or construction.


CLS 313/371
TXT Subject matter under subclass 365 including an optical element associated
    with the responsive structure to filter, reflect, refract, or restrict
    light.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are filters, masks, lenses, reflectors and
    light conducting elements.


CLS 313/372
TXT Subject matter under subclass 371 wherein the optical means conducts light
    by total internal reflection.

    (1)     Note.  The light conducting element is generally in the form of a
    fiber or rod.


CLS 313/373
TXT Subject matter under subclass 365 including a cathode element which emits
    electrons in response to light.


CLS 313/374
TXT Subject matter under subclass 373 wherein the photo-emissive cathode is
    formed of small discrete emissive elements in a mosaic pattern.

    (1)     Note.  A mosaic pattern includes strips, stripes, or bands.


CLS 313/375
TXT Subject matter under subclass 373 wherein the photo-emissive cathode is in
    the form of more than one film, coating or layer on a substrate each being
    photo-emissive.


CLS 313/376
TXT Subject matter under subclass 373 including an electrode which receives the
    electron cloud emitted by the photo-emissive cathode and forms a latent
    electrical image corresponding to the image on the photo-emissive cathode.

    (1)     Note.  The target receives the cathode ray.


CLS 313/377
TXT Subject matter under subclass 376 including means for providing electron
    multiplication at the target in response to the electron cloud from the
    photo-emissive cathode or means for providing electron multiplication of
    electrons returning from the target.

    (1)     Note.  The means providing the electron multiplication at the
    target may be located between the photo-emissive cathode and the target or
    be part of the target.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    379,    for an electron multiplier receiving electrons returning from the
    photo-emissive cathode.


CLS 313/378
TXT Subject matter under subclass 376 including structure to support the target.


CLS 313/379
TXT Subject matter under subclass 373 including an electron multiplier
    responding to electrons returning from the photo-emissive cathode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    377,    for an electron multiplier receiving electrons returning from a
    target.


CLS 313/380
TXT Subject matter under subclass 373 wherein the photo-emissive cathode is
    adapted to respond to electromagnetic radiation other than visible light.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is structure of or associated with the cathode
    to make it particularly sensitive to, for example, infrared radiation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    388,    for photoconductive elements made sensitive to particular
    frequencies of electromagnetic radiation.


CLS 313/381
TXT Subject matter under subclass 373 including an aperture across which an
    electron cloud from the photo-emissive cathode may be scanned, an elemental
    part of the scanned cloud emanating as a ray from the opposite side of the
    aperture.


CLS 313/382
TXT Subject matter under subclass 373 including structure to focus the electron
    beam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    389,    for similar structure including a photo-conductive element.

    414,    for plural beam generators with a focusing electrode.

    442,    for cathode-ray tubes with magnetic focus.


CLS 313/383
TXT Subject matter under subclass 373 including an additional electrode or
    support for the additional electrode or the photo-emissive cathode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    390,    for similar subject matter with a photo-conductive element.


CLS 313/384
TXT Subject matter under subclass 365 including an element which changes in
    conductivity in response to light.


CLS 313/385
TXT Subject matter under subclass 384 wherein the photoconductive element is in
    the form of a layer having a specified chemical composition.


CLS 313/386
TXT Subject matter under subclass 385 wherein the photoconductive element is
    composed of plural layers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    375,    for plural photo-emissive layers forming the cathode.


CLS 313/387
TXT Subject matter under subclass 384 including an element which emits
    electrons in response to electrons reflected from the photoconductive
    element.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are photomultipliers.


CLS 313/388
TXT Subject matter under subclass 384 wherein the photoconductive element is
    adapted to respond to electromagnetic radiation other than visible light.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is structure of or associated with the
    photoconductor to make it particularly sensitive to, for example, infrared
    radiation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    380,    for photo-emissive cathode made sensitive to particular frequencies
    of electromagnetic radiation.


CLS 313/389
TXT Subject matter under subclass 384 including structure to focus the cathode
    ray.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    382,    for similar structure including a photo-emissive cathode.

    414,    for plural beam generator with a focusing electrode.

    442,    for cathode-ray tubes with magnetic focus.


CLS 313/390
TXT Subject matter under subclass 384 including an additional electrode or
    support for the additional electrode or the photoconductive element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    383,    for similar subject matter with a photo-emissive cathode

    417,    for electrode support structure in a plural beam tube.

    438,    for means for supporting electrostatic deflection structure.

    456+,   for means for supporting an electrode in the electron gun structure.


CLS 313/391
TXT Subject matter under subclass 364 including an electrode capable of
    converting the energy from a cathode ray to a charge distribution.

    (1)     Note.  In general, a writing and reading cathode-ray beam is
    required to place the charge on the storage electrode and to derive
    information from it.


CLS 313/392
TXT Subject matter under subclass 391 wherein the storage electrode is a
    depletion layer device.

    (1)     Note.  The depletion layer may be induced or formed by doping.


CLS 313/393
TXT Subject matter under subclass 391 wherein the storage electrode is located
    intermediate two electron guns with one gun on each side of the storage
    electrode.


CLS 313/394
TXT Subject matter under subclass 391 wherein the storage element is the anode
    or is contiguous with the anode in the form of a separate continuous layer.

    (1)     Note.  The continuous type storage element requires scanning to
    read the stored charge distribution.


CLS 313/395
TXT Subject matter under subclass 391 wherein the storage element is in the
    form of a mesh having voids or a sheet having perforations and coated with
    a storage material.


CLS 313/396
TXT Subject matter under subclass 391 including means for flooding the storage
    electrode with electrons.


CLS 313/397
TXT Subject matter under subclass 391 including a display screen for providing
    an image corresponding to the storage electrode charge distribution,
    storage and display are effected by the same element or contacting elements.


CLS 313/398
TXT Subject matter under subclass 397 wherein storage and display are effected
    by the same element or contacting elements.


CLS 313/399
TXT Subject matter under subclass 364 which includes a secondary emissive
    electrode.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are electron multipliers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    346,    and the classes and subclasses specified in the notes thereto for
    secondary emissive electrodes, per se.

    377,    379 and 387, for secondary emissive electrodes in pick-up tubes.

    391,    for storage tubes which may include a secondary emissive electrode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 11, 12.1,
    for systems for supplying electrical energy to cathode-ray tubes which
    include a secondary emissive electrode.

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses, for demodulators with
    secondary emission.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 42 for amplifiers having a secondary emissive
    tube.


CLS 313/400
TXT Subject matter under subclass 399 including an element producing a visual
    display in response to electron irradiation from the secondary emissive
    electrode.


CLS 313/401
TXT Subject matter under subclass 399 wherein the emissive material is in the
    form of a picture or symbol or the emissive material is masked to provide a
    signal indicative of a picture or symbol.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass is generally for the
    purpose of providing a video signal of a test pattern or the like.


CLS 313/402
TXT Subject matter under subclass 364 including an electrode having apertures,
    correlated with groups of color emissive elements of display screen,
    structure securing the electrode, or electrode frame; or an electron shield
    associated with the electrode or frame.

    (1)     Note.  The nominal recitation of a supported or unsupported shadow
    mask is not sufficient for classification in this subclass.


CLS 313/403
TXT Subject matter under subclass 402 wherein the shadow made has noncircular
    apertures.


CLS 313/404
TXT Subject matter under subclass 402 including a resilient element securing
    the mask or mask frame to the cathode ray device.


CLS 313/405
TXT Subject matter under subclass 404 wherein the resilient support comprises
    dissimilar metals associated in such a way as to move the mask in response
    to temperature changes.


CLS 313/406
TXT Subject matter under subclass 404 including studs to which the resilient
    elements are attached, secured, or connected.


CLS 313/407
TXT Subject matter under subclass 402 including a frame for supporting the
    shadow mask or shield.


CLS 313/408
TXT Subject matter under subclass 402 including a phosphor screen.


CLS 313/409
TXT Subject matter under subclass 364 including structure to produce or control
    a plurality of electron beams.

    (1)     Note.  These devices may have a plurality of beam forming cathodes,
    each with beam forming means associated therewith, or a single cathode with
    means associated therewith for forming the discharge into a plurality of
    separate beams directed severally toward different targets or different
    parts of the same target.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.1,    for plural unit devices under the class definition which include
    two cathode ray devices, each being provided with its own beam forming
    means and provided with a separate target for each beam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 5.14+ for
    cathode-ray tube circuits which include a plurality of beam forming
    cathodes and a hollow distributed parameter device such as a wave guide,
    resonator, or co-axial line, the beams formed by the cathodes passing
    through or in the device; and subclasses 368.11+ for a cathode-ray device
    having convergence control circuitry.  See also (1) Note under subclass
    5.14 and subclasses 13.1+ for systems for supplying electrical energy to
    cathode-ray tubes which are provided with means for forming a plurality of
    separate cathode-ray beams.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclass 134 for X-ray
    devices under the class definition which include a plurality of cathodes.


CLS 313/410
TXT Subject matter under subclass 409 including means to define a pattern in
    the form of a number or letter.


CLS 313/411
TXT Subject matter under subclass 409 including means for deriving plural beams
    from a single cathode.


CLS 313/412
TXT Subject matter under subclass 409 including means for affecting the beam
    paths so that all beams strike the same point.


CLS 313/413
TXT Subject matter under subclass 409 including means for deflecting one or
    more beams.

    (1)     Note.  Focusing is not considered deflection.


CLS 313/414
TXT Subject matter under subclass 409 including means for focusing and
    accelerating one or more of the electron beams.


CLS 313/415
TXT Subject matter under subclass 409 including a fluorescent or phosphorescent
    screen.


CLS 313/416
TXT Subject matter under subclass 415 including elements having subelements in
    more than one plane which geometrically discriminate between or among
    electron beams.


CLS 313/417
TXT Subject matter under subclass 409 including means for supporting one or
    more, of the beam generating or controlling electrodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    383     and 390, for electrode support structure in an image pickup tube.

    438,    for means for supporting electrostatic deflection structure.

    456+,   for means for supporting an electrode in the electron gun structure.


CLS 313/418
TXT Subject matter under subclass 364 including an output electrode for
    supplying electrical information which is a function of cathode intensity
    or position.


CLS 313/419
TXT Subject matter under subclass 418 including more than one output electrode.


CLS 313/420
TXT Subject matter under subclass 364 having a window which is permeable to
    electrons so that the electrons may pass through the window and out of the
    envelope containing the discharge electrodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    317,    for other devices under the class definition provided with an
    electron permeable envelope.

    359.1+, for discharge devices under the class definition which are provided
    with means for accelerating positive ions and which may be provided with an
    ion transparent envelope.

    588,    for gas or vapor type discharge devices provided with one chamber
    in which an ionizing discharge is adpated to be maintained, an electron
    permeable barrier being provided so that electrons from the ionizing
    discharge can pass into a second chamber where an electronic discharge is
    designed to be maintained.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 2.1+, for envelopes, per se, for lamps and
    discharge devices, note that subclass 2.3 provides for such envelopes where
    a portion of the envelope is made of conductive material.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 306+ for methods and apparatus to
    inspect solids or liquids by charged particles and subclasses 492.1+ for
    the irradiation of objects and material generally.


CLS 313/421
TXT Subject matter under subclass 364 having means to deflect the beam.

    (1)     Note.  A pair of electrodes, one on each side of the beam path so
    that a potential applied to them causes one to attract and the other to
    repel the beam is considered to be a single deflecting means.  Two such
    pairs of electrodes each pair operable separately of the other pair are
    considered to constitute two deflecting means.  In general any means
    capable of deflecting the beam out of its path in a single direction is
    considered a single deflecting means, and any means capable of deflecting
    the beam out of its path in two dimensions is considered to be plural
    deflecting means.  Also considered to be cathode-ray tubes with plural
    deflecting means are cathode-ray tubes which are provided with means to
    deflect the cathode ray into different directions in a single plane.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes cathode- ray tubes which are provided
    with a single magnetic means for deflecting the cathode ray.

    (3)     Note.  For the classification of deflection magnets, per se, see
    section XVII of the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153,    for other discharge devices provided with magnetic means for
    influencing the discharge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 364+ and
    indented subclasses for electric systems for supplying electric current
    and/or potentials to cathode-ray tubes, which are provided with ray
    deflecting circuits, subclasses 393+ where the cathode ray is swept in
    different planes (e.g., horizontal and vertical sweeping), subclasses 391+
    where the cathode ray is merely deflected (e.g., bent) and also swept in
    one plane or is swept in two different directions in a single plane, and
    subclasses 399+ for the systems for supplying electric currents to the
    deflecting electromagnets of a cathode-ray tube.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 80 for oscillator systems utilizing a
    cathode-ray tube of the ray sweeping or deflecting type.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 210+ for magnetic deflecting or focusing
    structure external to a cathode-ray tube.


CLS 313/422
TXT Subject matter under subclass 421 wherein the deflection is greater than
    110 degree or the cathode ray is asymmetrically deflected.

    (1)     Note.  The general purpose of these tubes is to minimize the front
    to back dimension.


CLS 313/423
TXT Subject matter under subclass 421 wherein the beam deflecting means causes
    the cathode ray to have a vector component opposite to the direction it was
    traveling before deflection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    422,    for deflection arrangements used in flat type tubes.


CLS 313/424
TXT Subject matter under subclass 421 wherein ions are deflected out of the
    electron beam to prevent undesirable effects.


CLS 313/425
TXT Subject matter under subclass 421 wherein the deflecting means is utilized
    to center the cathode ray beam.


CLS 313/426
TXT Subject matter under subclass 421 including a plurality of beam deflecting
    means.

    (1)     Note.  The plurality of deflecting means may deflect one or more
    beams.


CLS 313/427
TXT Subject matter under subclass 426 including three or more beam deflecting
    means.

    (1)     Note.  The deflecting means may all be electrostatic, all
    electromagnetic or may include both electrostatic and electromagnetic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    409+    and in particular 413 for the deflection of plural cathode rays.


CLS 313/428
TXT Subject matter under subclass 427 including means for causing plural beams
    to intersect at a specified point.


CLS 313/429
TXT Subject matter under subclass 427 wherein the deflecting means is
    positioned near the viewing screen.

    (1)     Note.  Such placement of the deflecting means is termed "post
    deflection".


CLS 313/430
TXT Subject matter under subclass 429 wherein the deflecting means is located
    external to the tube.


CLS 313/431
TXT Subject matter under subclass 427 wherein at least two of the deflecting
    means are magnetic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    440,    for cathode-ray tube with yoke.


CLS 313/432
TXT Subject matter under subclass 426 wherein at least two of the deflecting
    means provide electrostatic attraction or repulsion of the cathode ray.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    439,    for single electrostatic deflection means.


CLS 313/433
TXT Subject matter under subclass 432 including magnetic deflecting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    413,    for means for deflecting plural beams.

    431,    for two or more magnetic means for deflecting the electron beam.

    440,    for cathode-ray tube with yoke.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 210+ for magnetic deflecting or focusing
    structure external to a cathode-ray tube.


CLS 313/434
TXT Subject matter under subclass 432 wherein the deflecting members include
    plates or areas of plate surfaces which are nonparallel or asymmetric.


CLS 313/435
TXT Subject matter under subclass 434 wherein at least one surface of the
    deflecting means is nonplanar.


CLS 313/436
TXT Subject matter under subclass 432 wherein the deflecting means overlap each
    other or are enclosed by other electrodes or shielding.


CLS 313/437
TXT Subject matter under subclass 432 including means to correct distortion due
    to deflection.


CLS 313/438
TXT Subject matter under subclass 432 including structure for supporting the
    deflecting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    383     and 390, for electrode support structure in an image pickup tube.

    417,    for electrode support structure in a plural beam tube.

    456+,   for means for supporting an electrode in the electron gun structure.


CLS 313/439
TXT Subject matter under subclass 421 wherein the deflecting means provides
    electrostatic attraction or repulsion of the cathode ray.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    432,    for plural electrostatic deflection means.


CLS 313/440
TXT Subject matter under subclass 421 including coil laminations surrounding
    the cathode ray to provide deflection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    413,    for means for deflecting plural beams.

    431,    for two or more magnetic means for deflecting the beam.

    433,    for one or two magnetic means combined with electrostatic means for
    deflecting the beam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 210+ for means external of a cathode-ray tube to
    deflect or form the beam.


CLS 313/441
TXT Subject matter under subclass 364 including a cathode source of electrons,
    electrodes or magnetic elements for controlling electron velocity or beam
    cross section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    409,    for similar subject matter where more than one beam is generated or
    controlled.

    421,    for similar subject matter including means for deflecting the beam.


CLS 313/442
TXT Subject matter under subclass 441 including magnetic means for defining
    beams cross-section.


CLS 313/443
TXT Subject matter under subclass 442 wherein the magnetic focus structure
    forms part of or is located within the envelope.


CLS 313/444
TXT Subject matter under subclass 441 including a plurality of electrodes and
    one or more insulating members serially disposed relative to the beam and
    secured together in a contiguous fashion.


CLS 313/445
TXT Subject matter under subclass 441 including an electrode or electrode
    surface positioned at an acute angle with respect to a plane perpendicular
    to the electron beam axis for the purpose of deflecting ions off axis.


CLS 313/446
TXT Subject matter under subclass 441 including a cathode.


CLS 313/447
TXT Subject matter under subclass 446 including an electrode located
    immediately adjacent the cathode for regulating the velocity of an electron
    or electron beam density.


CLS 313/448
TXT Subject matter under subclass 447 including an anode.


CLS 313/449
TXT Subject matter under subclass 448 including an additional electrode.


CLS 313/450
TXT Subject matter under subclass 449 wherein the additional electrode is a
    conductive coating on the envelope wall or is a conductive helical wire.


CLS 313/451
TXT Subject matter under subclass 448 including support structure for the anode.


CLS 313/452
TXT Subject matter under subclass 446 including a focus electrode immediate the
    cathode.


CLS 313/453
TXT Subject matter under subclass 452 wherein the focus electrode and cathode
    produce a beam that is noncircular in cross-section.


CLS 313/454
TXT Subject matter under subclass 452 wherein the cathode surface is curved.


CLS 313/455
TXT Subject matter under subclass 454 wherein the cathode and associated
    electrodes produce a hollow beam in which the electron density increases
    radially from the beam center.


CLS 313/456
TXT Subject matter under 441 including structure for supporting an electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    383     and 390, for electrode support structure in an image pickup tube.

    417,    for electrode support structure in a plural beam tube.

    438,    for means for supporting electrostatic deflection structure.


CLS 313/457
TXT Subject matter under subclass 456 wherein the support structure is in the
    form of an insulating rod or rods supporting an electrode and extending
    parallel to the electron beam.


CLS 313/458
TXT Subject matter under subclass 441 including an electrode.


CLS 313/459
TXT Subject matter under subclass 458 including structure to provide for
    movement of an electrode.


CLS 313/460
TXT Subject matter under subclass 458 including more than one electrode.


CLS 313/461
TXT Subject matter under subclass 364 including means for converting the energy
    of a cathode ray into light or for modulating light in accordance with the
    ray energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    483+,   for noncathode ray devices including a luminescent solid or liquid
    material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 483.1+ for luminescent devices
    responsive to invisible radiation.

    348,    Television, subclasses 744+ for television projection devices that
    may utilize a cathode-ray beam to modulate light.


CLS 313/462
TXT Subject matter under subclass 461 including indicia on or embedded in the
    screen.


CLS 313/463
TXT Subject matter under subclass 461 wherein the light output of the screen
    capable of luminescence in an electric field is modified by a cathode ray.


CLS 313/464
TXT Subject matter under subclass 461 wherein the screen is of a material which
    incandesces when heated by the bombardment of electrons.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305,    and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto for other
    discharge devices under the class definition having anodes adapted to be
    heated by the discharge.

    347,    and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto for electrodes,
    per se, which are designed to be incandescible upon electron bombardment.


CLS 313/465
TXT Subject matter under subclass 461 in which the screen includes means to
    regulate the amount of light which can pass through it; the regulation of
    the light transmissibility of the screen being controlled by the cathode
    ray.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for other devices under the class definition which have
    structurally combined therewith a light valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 744+ for television projection devices that
    may use a cathode-ray beam to regulate the light transmissibility of a
    screen, which screen regulates the amount of light transmitted.

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    227+ and 238+ for light valves, per se.


CLS 313/466
TXT Subject matter under subclass 461 including a layer which is not
    luminescent overlying the luminescent layer.


CLS 313/467
TXT Subject matter under subclass 461 including a particular phosphor
    composition.


CLS 313/468
TXT Subject matter under subclass 467 wherein the phosphor composition is
    formed from a rare earth element.


CLS 313/469
TXT Subject matter under subclass 467 including a face plate and the phosphors
    composition is dispersed in the face plate material.


CLS 313/470
TXT Subject matter under subclass 461 including discrete phosphor elements
    arranged in a mosaic pattern.


CLS 313/471
TXT Subject matter under subclass 470 including a phosphor positioned on the
    screen which when excited gives an indication of the position of the
    electron beam.

    (1)     Note.  In operation light from the beam indexing element or
    elements is generally received by a detector.


CLS 313/472
TXT Subject matter under subclass 470 wherein the mosaic is a dot pattern.


CLS 313/473
TXT Subject matter under subclass 461 wherein the screen comprises more than
    one light-generating or modulating layers.


CLS 313/474
TXT Subject matter under subclass 461 including optical means combined with the
    screen.


CLS 313/475
TXT Subject matter under subclass 474 wherein the optical means includes a
    light conducting fiber or rod which conducts light by total internal
    reflection.


CLS 313/476
TXT Subject matter under subclass 461 including means for securing the screen
    relative to the cathode ray device.


CLS 313/477
TXT Subject matter under subclass 364 including an envelope.


CLS 313/478
TXT Subject matter under subclass 477 including optical means external of the
    envelope for reflecting, refracting, or transmitting light.


CLS 313/479
TXT Subject matter under subclass 477 including means for protecting the
    envelope or preventing radiation from entering or leaving the envelope.


CLS 313/480
TXT Subject matter under subclass 477 wherein the chemical composition of the
    envelope is specified.


CLS 313/481
TXT Subject matter under subclass 477 including means to increase the degree of
    vacuum or including a gas.


CLS 313/482
TXT Subject matter under subclass 477 including means integral with and
    internal the envelope for supporting or attaching electrodes or means
    integral with and external the envelope particularly adapted for mounting
    the envelope or for supporting deflecting structure thereof.


CLS 313/483
TXT Subject matter under the class definition which include a liquid or solid
    material that produces radiant energy in response to excitation.

    (1)     Note.  Included here, for example, are electroluminescent and
    electrochemiluminescent devices.

    (2)     Note.  See section XV of the class definition for fluorescent and
    phosphorescent screens, coatings, and compositions, and the method for
    coating bases with fluorescent or phosphorescent materials.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    461+,   for cathode ray devices having a fluorescent screen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses, for electric systems for supplying electric energy to electric
    lamps which are provided with a fluorescent or phosphorescent material.
    Note that systems for supplying electric energy to electronic tubes which
    are provided with a fluorescent or phosphorescent material for the purpose
    of emitting light are considered to be lamp systems classified in Class 315.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses  36, 37, 41+, 44+, 47, 60+,
    73, 74+, 76+, and 82+ for selective electrically controlled visual display
    systems.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 84 for illuminating devices which have
    combined therewith a fluorescent or phosphorescent material.


CLS 313/484
TXT Subject matter under subclass 483 including a gaseous medium in which a
    discharge is developed.


CLS 313/485
TXT Subject matter under subclass 484 which includes an envelope and
    fluorescent or phosphorescent material applied to or embedded in the wall
    of the envelope.

    (1)     Note.  The fluorescent or phosphorescent material may be in direct
    contact with the envelope wall or separated from it by a layer or coating
    on the envelope for example, a phosphor layer overlying a protective layer
    disposed directly on the envelope wall.

    (2)     Note.  The fluorescent or phosphorescent material may be applied as
    a coating to either the interior or the exterior of the envelope.

    (3)     Note.  Included here are devices having two envelopes where the
    fluorescent or phosphorescent material may be applied to or embedded in
    either envelope wall, however, generally a high pressure discharge tube is
    enclosed and supported within a sealed outer envelope which is internally
    coated with a phosphor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    461+,   for cathode-ray tubes which have a florescent or phosphorescent
    material applied to the envelope wall.


CLS 313/486
TXT Subject matter under subclass 485 wherein the chemical composition, size,
    shape, or optical property of the phosphor is specified.


CLS 313/487
TXT Subject matter under subclass 486 wherein there are plural phosphors.


CLS 313/488
TXT Subject matter under subclass 485 wherein an aperture or discontinuity is
    provided in the fluorescent or phosphorescent layer or coating or wherein
    some other means is provided to permit or direct light from the interior of
    the envelope.


CLS 313/489
TXT Subject matter under subclass 485 including a film, coating, or element on
    the envelope or the fluorescent or phosphorescent material for protection
    or an optical filter to limit the frequency of the emitted light.


CLS 313/490
TXT Subject matter under subclass 485 wherein mercury or an alloy of mercury
    with another metal is provided within the envelope to maintain the
    mercury-vapor pressure.


CLS 313/491
TXT Subject matter under subclass 485 including one or more electrodes having a
    particular structure or chemical composition.


CLS 313/492
TXT Subject matter under subclass 491 including an additional electrode or
    shielding structure mounted adjacent an electrode to protect either the
    electrode, the envelope, or the fluorescent or phosphorescent coating.

    (1)     Note.  The additional electrode may be a starting electrode.


CLS 313/493
TXT Subject matter under subclass 485 wherein the envelope has a particular
    configuration or chemical composition.


CLS 313/494
TXT Subject matter under subclass 483 wherein the electrodes are in the same
    plane.


CLS 313/495
TXT Subject matter under subclass 483 including an evacuated envelope, a
    fluorescent or phosphorescent material within the envelope, an electron
    source, and an anode cooperating to bombard the fluorescent or
    phosphorescent material.


CLS 313/496
TXT Subject matter under subclass 495 wherein the anode is segmented and
    wherein the fluorescent or phosphorescent material is applied to the
    segments.


CLS 313/497
TXT Subject matter under subclass 496 including an electrode between cathode
    and anode segments to direct or permit electrons to strike a particular
    segment.


CLS 313/498
TXT Subject matter under subclass 483 in which the luminescent material is an
    insulating material that emits light based on the principle of intrinsic
    luminescence, i.e., where an applied electric field generates free carriers
    in the device (since the material, being an insulator, has no free carriers
    to be accelerated by the applied field) to initiate light emission
    mechanism(s) in the material, or other solid-state material (e.g.,
    semiconductor) which either operates by a mechanism not `elsewhere
    classified, or only nominally recites a mechanism (e.g., injection
    luminescence) elsewhere classified.

    (1)     Note.  Intrinsic luminescence is to be distinguished from injection
    luminescence, the latter being the mechanism of operation of incoherent
    luminescent active solid state devices which are properly classified as ORs
    in Class 257.  Typical injection luminescence devices include pn junctions
    (including), Schottky barriers, metal-insulator-semiconductor (MIS)
    structures, and traveling high speed domains, e.g., Gunn domain and
    acoustoelectric wave generated domains.

    (2)     Note.  When structural details of an incoherent light emitting
    injection solid-state type luminescent element are claimed, classification
    as an original (OR) is in Class 257.

    (3)     Note.  When structural details of a coherent light emitting
    solid-state type luminescent element are claimed, classification as an
    original (OR) is in Class 372.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 10, 11, 21, 53-56, 113-118, 184-189, 225-234, 257, 258, 290-294,
    and 414-466 for radiation-sensitive active semiconductors injection
    luminescent devices, and subclasses 613+ for active semiconductor injection
    luminescent devices containing group II-VI compounds.


CLS 313/499
TXT Subject matter under subclass 498 in which the solid-state luminescent
    material is a semiconductor that emits light based on the principle of
    intrinsic luminescence, e.g., pn junction semiconductor type.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is limited to subject matter with only nominal
    recitation of a luminescent element, i.e., with no significant structural
    details thereof, but with recitation of details of a light modifier,
    envelope, encapsulation, header, or other peripheral feature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 64+ for fluorescent or phosphorescent
    base coating, subclasses 74+ for a coating process to form a photoemissive
    element, and subclasses 77+ for a coating process to form an electron
    emissive element.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, subclass 29 for
    methods of making a semiconductor solid-state device having combined
    therewith a luminescent material layer.


CLS 313/500
TXT Subject matter under subclass 499 including a plurality of semiconductor
    luminescent material devices disposed in a regular spaced relationship in
    two or more dimensions with respect to each other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 44+ and 82+ for selective
    electrically controlled visual display systems.


CLS 313/501
TXT Subject matter under subclass 499 including another luminescent material
    which emits light in response to being irradiated by light from the
    semiconductive luminescent material device.


CLS 313/502
TXT Subject matter under subclass 498 including a material in which a phosphor
    is implanted.


CLS 313/503
TXT Subject matter under subclass 498 wherein the phosphor or electrode
    composition is specified.


CLS 313/504
TXT Subject matter under subclass 503 wherein the phosphor is an organic
    compound.


CLS 313/505
TXT Subject matter under subclass 498 including a plurality of electrodes
    between which the luminescent material is disposed and wherein at least
    some of the electrodes are arranged in rows and columns.


CLS 313/506
TXT Subject matter under subclass 498 including more than one layer of material
    disposed between two electrodes and wherein one of the layers is
    luminescent.

    (1)     Note.  The plural layers may, for example, be two or more
    luminescent layers.


CLS 313/507
TXT Subject matter under subclass 506 including a photosenstive layer.

    (1)     Note.  The photosensitive layer may be photoconductive or
    photo-emissive.


CLS 313/508
TXT Subject matter under subclass 506 including a piezoelectric layer.


CLS 313/509
TXT Subject matter under subclass 506 including a dielectric layer.


CLS 313/510
TXT Subject matter under subclass 498 including an electrode in the shape of a
    character or wherein the luminescent material is so shaped.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 33+ for selective electrically
    controlled visual display systems having segmented display elements.


CLS 313/511
TXT Subject matter under subclass 498 including two electrodes between which
    the luminescent material is disposed and wherein the electrodes and
    luminescent material are flexible.


CLS 313/512
TXT Subject matter under subclass 498 including protective envelope or
    encapsulation means surrounding the luminescent material.


CLS 313/513
TXT Subject matter under class definition including an indicia or indicating
    scale formed on or within the envelope of the device.

    (1)     Note.  The filament or electrodes of the device may be formed into
    the shape of indicia or have indicia or a scale formed thereon.

    (2)     Note.  See section VII of the class definition for the
    classification ofelectric lamps including those of the discharge device
    type, and cathode ray discharge devices combined with a separable support
    for the lamp or discharge device (e.g., electric signs which include a lamp
    and a mounting panel).

    (3)     Note.  Section IX of the class definition for the classification of
    electric lamps, including those of the discharge device type, and cathode
    ray discharge devices combined with a separable casing or jacket for the
    lamp or discharge device (e.g., electric signs which include a lamp and a
    casing, oscillographs with casings).

    (4)     Note.  See section X of the class definition for the classification
    of electric lamps including those of the discharge device type and cathode
    ray discharge devices in combination with a separable optical device (e.g.,
    mirror, reflector, etc.), for the lamp or discharge device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107.5,  for variable width electron stream discharge device which have a
    fluorescent screen or other anode having a scale or indicia formed thereon
    (e.g., magic eye-type tubes).

    462,    for cathode-ray tubes which are provided with targets or ray
    receiving means which have a scale or indicia formed thereon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 541+ for illuminated
    signs which include electric lamps of the type classified in this subclass
    in Class 313 in combination with separable sign supporting structure for
    the lamp.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses, for miscellaneous systems, for supplying electrical energy to
    electric lamps and gas or vapor type discharge devices, including such
    lamps and discharge devices as have indicia as a part thereof.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 122 for spark gaps
    having scales for indicating the separation of the electrodes, and designed
    for use as voltmeters.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 33+ for selective electrically
    controlled visual display systems having segmented display elements.


CLS 313/514
TXT Subject matter under subclass 513 including a gaseous medium in which a
    discharge may take place.


CLS 313/515
TXT Subject matter under subclass 514 including an envelope in the shape of a
    character confining the gaseous discharge medium.


CLS 313/516
TXT Subject matter under subclass 514 including at least one electrode having a
    character shaped aperture.


CLS 313/517
TXT Subject matter under subclass 514 including a plurality of electrode
    segments which form a character.


CLS 313/518
TXT Subject matter under subclass 517 including a dielectric (insulating) layer
    of material between electrode segments.


CLS 313/519
TXT Subject matter under subclass 517 including a plurality of character
    displays juxtaposed.


CLS 313/520
TXT Subject matter under subclass 514 including a display electrode wherein a
    single electrode is in the shape of a character.


CLS 313/521
TXT Subject matter under subclass 520 including a plurality of integrant
    display electrodes arranged one behind the other.


CLS 313/522
TXT Subject matter under subclass 513 including a filament in the shape of a
    character.


CLS 313/523
TXT PHOTOSENSITIVE:

    Subject matter under the class definition which includes an electric lamp
    or discharge device having an electrode or electrical element which will
    react photoelectrically to electromagnetic radiation of the visible and
    certain invisible types not classified elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  "Photoelectric" is the effect of electromagnetic radiation
    on material which causes photoconductive, photoemissive, photovoltaic and
    photoelectromagnetic effects.

    (2)     Note.  Included are lamp or discharge devices responsive to X-ray,
    ultraviolet, visile and infrared radiation.

    (3)     Note.  Also included are subcombinations of an electric lamp or
    discharge device having a photosensitive member, incomplete photosensitive
    devices of this class which will react photoelectrically when completed and
    photocathodes not classified else where.

    (4)     Note.  Included are photocathodes, per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for a structurally combined lamp and discharge device, plural lamps
    or plural discharge devices.

    7+,     for a lamp or discharge device with a vacuum pump.

    11+,    for a lamp or discharge device with a temperature modifier.

    54+,    for a lamp or discharge device with radioactive material.

    93,     for a geiger-mueller counter tube.

    373+,   for a cathode-ray tube with a photoemissive cathode.

    384+,   for a cathode-ray tube with a photoconductive cathode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 138+ for electronic envelope
    header, terminal or stem making means.

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclasses 243+ for a
    photoelectric device, particularly subclass 254 for photoemissive devices.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 317+ for coated stock material which
    can be a photocathode.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 192.1+ for
    forming a photosensitive member by cathode sputtering.

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 2.1 for an envelope of an electric lamp or
    similar device.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 200 for photocell circuits and apparatus,
    subclasses 330+ for infrared to visible imaging, and subclasses 336.1+ for
    invisible radiant energy responsive electric signalling.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 501.1 for light sensitive electrically
    conductive or emissive compositions.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 10, 11, 21, 53-56, 113-118, 184-189, 225-234, 257, 258, 290-294,
    and 414-466 for radiation-sensitive active semiconductor devices,
    subclasses 13, 79-103, and 918 for incoherent light emitting injection
    luminescent devices, subclasses 80-85 for semiconductor light emitting
    sources combined with semiconductor light responsive devices, and
    subclasses 613+ for active semiconductor injection luminescent devices
    containing group II-VI compounds.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 117
    for switching systems responsive to light or radiant energy.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 149+ for
    such a system with radiant energy sensitive control means.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 640 for photoelectric
    or optical error detecting positional servo systems, and subclass 480 for
    radiant energy responsive automatic and/or with time delay means motive
    power systems.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 403+ for electric
    lamp or discharge device testing.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 514+ for miscellaneous circuits responsive to light.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 66 for a light responsive oscillator.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 15+ for electric resistors which
    change resistance responsive to electromagnetic radiation.

    348,    Television, appropriate subclasses.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, particularly subclasses 402+ for
    testing shade or color and subclasses 213+ for photometers.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 173+ for
    control circuits for electromagnetic devices including light responsive
    control circuits.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 1+ for specific
    applications.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 213+ for a photographic exposure control
    circuit which is light responsive.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 74+ for processes of making
    photocathodes by coating a base and subclasses 160+ for X-ray, ultraviolet
    or infrared responsive coatings.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 98+ for a
    structurally defined web or sheet which may have photosensitive properties.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, subclass 20 for
    methods of making semiconductor-based electron emitters, subclasses 22+ for
    methods of making light emissive semiconductor devices, and subclasses 57+
    for methods of making light responsive semiconductor devices.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    subclasses 1+ for a method of manufacture, repair or salvage and subclasses
    66+ for apparatus used in manufacture, repair or salvage

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 600 for light wave communications.


CLS 313/524
TXT With optical device:

    Subject matter under subclass 523 wherein the lamp or discharge device
    includes an optical element of the physical type integral therewith.

    (1)     Note.  See section "X" of the class definitions for an optical
    device not integral with a Class 313 device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110+,   for electric lamp or discharge with an integral optical device or
    special ray transmissive envelope.

    371+,   for a cathode-ray tube with an optical element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 216+ for optical or photocell systems.

    348,    Television, subclasses 195+ for mechanical optical scanning.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, particularly 73.1 for optical fiber
    testing, subclasses 124+ for a lens or reflective image former testing and
    subclasses 128+ for refraction testing.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    350+ for optics having significant infrared or ultraviolet properties,
    subclasses 838+ for a reflector, subclasses 885+ for a filter, subclasses
    642+ for a lens.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 32 for a light source and modifier and
    subclasses 317+ for a light modifier.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclass 140 for an X-ray
    discharge device having a special ray transmissive window.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, appropriate subclasses for a light transmitting
    fiber, waveguide or rod.


CLS 313/525
TXT Having phosphor screen:

    Subject matter under subclass 523 wherein the lamp or discharge device
    includes within an envelope a photoemissive cathode or element which
    responds to electromagnetic radiation to emit electrons and a phosphor
    screen which converts, (1) the electrons emitted by the electrode or device
    into electromagnetic radiation, or (2) electromagnetic radiation into
    different electromagnetic radiation to which the electrode or member is
    responsive to emit electrons.

    (1)     Note.  The envelope is transmissive to electromagnetic radiation
    received through it from outside the envelope and transmissive of the
    electromagentic radiation released by the screen from the inside of the
    envelope.

    (2)     Note.  See section "XV" of the class definitions, "Fluorescent and
    Phosphorescent Coating and Compositions" for a classification of such
    fluorescent and phosphorescent compositions, coatings, methods of coating
    and electrical devices using the same.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    461+,   for cathode-ray tube with phosphor screen.

    483+,   for an electric lamp or discharge device with a luminescent solid
    or liquid material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, subclass 25 for the manufacturing
    of a phosphor screen involving etching.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 213+ for light amplifier circuits,
    subclasses 337+ for invisible radiant energy responsive signalling with
    heating of luminophors, subclasses 361+ for invisible radiant energy
    responsive electric signalling including a luminophor, particularly
    subclass 366 having plural or composite phosphors, subclasses 458.1+ for a
    radiation source and a luminophor responsive to the source and subclasses
    483.1+ for nonelectrical luminescent devices, per se, which detect
    invisible radiation.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 301.16 for organic luminescent material
    containing compositions, subclass 301.36 for inorganic luminescent
    compositions with organic nonluminescent material and subclasses 301.4+ for
    inorganic luminescent compositions.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 34 for chemiluminescent light, subclass 84
    for a light source or light source support and luminescent material and
    subclass 260 for a fluorescent type light source or light source support
    and modifier.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclass 42 for
    stereofluoroscopy and subclasses 44+ for fluorescent applications.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 64+ for coating processes, per se,
    wherein the product is an electrical product with a fluorescent or
    phosphorescent base or coating.


CLS 313/526
TXT Proximity focus type:

    Subject matter under subclass 525 wherein the electrode is a photocathode
    having an extensive area so that an electromagnetic radiation image
    external to the device may be projected onto the photocathode, through the
    envelope, to emit electrons in the shape of the electromagentic radiation
    image and the screen is placed close enough to the cathode so that no
    focusing is required to have the electron image impact the screen.


CLS 313/527
TXT Photocathode responsive to phosphor:

    Subject matter under subclass 525 wherein the phosphor screen is responsive
    to electromagnetic radiation hitting the phosphor to convert the radiation
    to a lower frequency of radiation to which the photoemissive cathode is
    responsive, the lower frequency electromagnetic radiation upon hitting the
    photoemissive cathode causes the photoemissive cathode to emit electrons in
    the response to the lower frequency.


CLS 313/528
TXT With electron multiplier:

    Subject matter under subclass 525 which includes between the photoemissive
    cathode and the phosphor screen an electrode which emits, upon being hit by
    an electron emitted by the photoemissive cathode, a plurality of secondary
    electrons to increase the magnitude of the electron current which impact on
    the phosphor screen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103+,   for a secondary emitter type discharge device.

    399+,   for a cathode-ray tube having a secondary emissive electrode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 207 for a circuit having a photocell with
    an electron multiplier.

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclass 359 for a demodulator using
    secondary emission.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 42 for an amplifier with a secondary electron
    emission amplifying device.


CLS 313/529
TXT With control electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 525 which includes between the photoemissive
    cathode and the phosphor screen an electrical element to control the
    photoemissive electrons emitted by the cathode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103+,   for a secondary emitter type lamp or discharge devices.

    399+,   for a cathode-ray tube with a secondary emissive electrode.

    532+,   for a photosensitive lamp or discharge device having a secondary
    electron emissive electrode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 207 for a photocell controlled circuit
    having a secondary emissive electron multiplier.

    329,    Demodulators and Detectors, subclasses 148+ for a demodulator and
    detector with secondary emission.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 42 for an amplifier with secondary electron
    emission tube amplifying device.


CLS 313/530
TXT With photocathode on envelope:

    Subject matter under subclass 525 wherein the photoemissive cathode is on
    the envelope wall.


CLS 313/531
TXT Having plural photosensitive electrodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 523 wherein the lamp or discharge device
    includes a plurality of photosensitive electrodes within a common envelope.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are a plurality of photosensitive cathodes
    with one or more anodes within a common envelope.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329,    for a photosensitive mosaic electrode, per se.

    375,    for a cathode-ray tube with plural photoemissive layers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 208.2+ for a photocell controlled
    circuit having plural photocells or plural photosensitive electrodes.


CLS 313/532
TXT Photomultiplier:

    Subject matter under subclass 523 wherein the discharge device includes a
    secondary electron emissive electrode which emits secondary electrons as a
    result of the photoelectrons from a photocathode hitting the secondary
    electron emissive electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for secondary emitter type electric lamp or discharge device.

    399+,   for a cathode-ray tube with a secondary emissive electrode.

    538,    for gas phototubes wherein the ionized gas is an electron secondary
    emission multiplier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 207 for a photocell controlled circuit
    with an electron multiplier.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 11 for
    cathode-ray tube circuits with radiant energy sensitive control means
    having a secondary emission stage in the cathode-ray tube, and subclass
    12.1 for a cathode-ray tube with a secondary emission stage in the
    cathode-ray tube.

    329,    Demodulators, subclass 359 for such a device with secondary
    emission.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 42 for an amplifier with a secondary electron
    emission amplifying device.


CLS 313/533
TXT Having plural dynodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 532 wherein there are a plurality of
    secondary emissive electrodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104+,   for a lamp or discharge device having plural secondary emissive
    electrodes.


CLS 313/534
TXT Channel or circular type:

    Subject matter under subclass 533 including, (1) a plurality of passageways
    to direct the photoelectrons emitted by the photocathode and each
    passageway has a surface which emits secondary electrons as a result of the
    photoemitted electrons hitting the secondary electron emissive surface in
    its travel through the passageway, or (2) plural dynodes placed serially in
    a circular manner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for a lamp or discharge device having a channel multiplier.

    105,    for a lamp or discharge device with three or more channel
    multipliers.


CLS 313/535
TXT Venetian blind type:

    Subject matter under subclass 533 wherein there are a plurality of spaced
    slat-like secondary electron emissive electrodes at an angle to the
    direction of movement of photoemissive electrons emitted by the
    photoemissive cathode.


CLS 313/536
TXT Box or linear type:

    Subject matter under subclass 523 wherein there are plural serial secondary
    electron electrodes wherein, (1) there are two successive box-like
    secondary electroemissive electrodes alternately on each side of an
    imaginary plane, or (2) there is a secondary electron emissive electrode
    alternately on each side of an imaginary plane.


CLS 313/537
TXT Having a control electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 523 including an electrical element to
    control the electrical current flow in the operation of the lamp or
    discharge device.

    (1)     Note.  In addition to electrodes to control the current produced by
    the lamp or discharge device, there are elements which emit electrons under
    the action of radiation to control the current produced by the lamp or
    discharge device.

    (2)     Note.  The term "control" includes the rate of current flow, the
    focusing of the current in the device, and separation of positive ions
    resulting from gas bombarment within the device.

    (3)     Note.  The control electrode may be photosensitive rather than
    acting in an electrostatic manner to influence the current within the
    device.  The control electrode can be controlled by photosensitive means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    308,    for discharge device including a control electrode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 222.1+ for photocell circuit or
    apparatus.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 149+ for
    systems having a lamp or discharge device to control a lamp or discharge
    device.


CLS 313/538
TXT Gas phototube:

    Subject matter under subclass 523 wherein there is an ionizable gas within
    an envelope and the electrode is photoemissive so that photoelectrons
    hitting the gas causes the gas to ionize to release additional electrons.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    532+,   for a vacuum tube photomultiplier.

    567+,   for a lamp or discharge device having gas or vapor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for a gas phototube circuit or
    apparatus, subclasses 374+ for invisible radiant energy responsive electric
    signalling device having a gas responsive to the invisible radiant energy
    rather than a photocathode.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 149+ for
    an electric lamp or discharge device system including a radiant energy
    sensitive control means.


CLS 313/539
TXT Responsive to ultraviolet radiation:

    Subject matter under subclass 523 wherein the electrode is a photoemissive
    cathode responsive to ultraviolet radiation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110+,   for a lamp or discharge device with an optical device or a special
    ray transmissive envelope.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 372+ for an invisible radiant energy
    responsive electric signalling system having ultraviolet responsive means.


CLS 313/540
TXT Having plural anodes or cathodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 523 wherein the lamp or discharge device
    includes a plurality of anodes or cathodes within a common envelope.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302,    for discharge devices with an apertured electrode interposed
    between two electrodes where there are plural cathodes.

    303,    for discharge devices with an apertured electrode interposed
    between two electrodes where there are plural anodes.

    306,    for other discharge devices having a plurality of anodes or
    cathodes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 208.2+ for photocell controlled circuit
    having plural anodes or cathodes.


CLS 313/541
TXT Having photocathode on tube wall:

    Subject matter under subclass 523 wherein the photoemissive cathode is on
    the envelope wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    530,    for a photosensitive lamp or discharge device having a phosphor
    screen and a photocathode on the lamp or discharge envelope.

    538,    for a gas phototube having a photocathode on the envelope wall.

    544,    for a photocathode combined with an envelope.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 74+ for photoelectric coating on a
    member which is an electrical product.


CLS 313/542
TXT Photocathode:

    Subject matter under subclass 523 wherein the electrode absorbs infrared,
    visible, or ultraviolet electromagnetic radiation so that some of the
    electrons of the material absorb enough energy as a result of the
    electromagnetic radiation to escape from the surface of the material.

    (1)     Note.  Photocathodes claimed as bases with coatings or layers which
    emit electrons upon irradiation by electromagnetic radiation of the
    ultraviolet, visible, infrared light are classified here.

    (2)     Note.  See section "XIV" "ELECTRODES AND SHIELDS" of the class
    definitions for a discussion on electrodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    326+,   for an electrode, per se, which may be a photocathode or
    photosensitive and used in a lamp or discharge device, particularly
    subclass 329 for mosaic electrodes which includes photosensitive mosaic
    electrodes.

    329,    for mosaic photosensitive electrodes.

    365+,   for a cathode-ray tube with a photosensitive electrode.

    367+,   for cathode-ray tubes having mosaic potosensitive electrodes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    140,    Wireworking, subclass 71.5 for electric lamp or discharge device
    electrode making or forming.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 317+ for coated stock material.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 501.1 for electrically emissive
    photosensitive compositions.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 74+ for photoelectric coating
    processes.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    subclasses 35+ for processes of assembling an electrode, subclasses 46+ for
    processes of making an electrode and subclasses 60+ for corresponding
    apparatus, especially subclass 67 for electrode assembly means.


CLS 313/543
TXT With phosphor:

    Subject matter under subclass 542 which includes a phosphor screen which
    is, (1) responsive to electromagnetic radiation to change the frequency of
    the electromagnetic radiation to electromagnetic energy to which the
    photoemissive electrode is responsive to emit photoemissive electrons from
    its surface, or (2) responsive to the photoemissive electrons emitted by
    the photoemissive electrode as a result of the bombardment by the
    electromagnetic radiation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    483+,   for a lamp or discharge device with a luminescent solid or liquid
    material.

    525+,   for a lamp or discharge device of the photosensitive type having a
    phosphor screen responsive to a photocathode or a photocathode responsive
    to a phosphor screen.


CLS 313/544
TXT With envelope:

    Subject matter under subclass 543 which includes a container generally to
    enclose the photocathode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    364+,   for an image pickup tube with a photoemissive cathode.

    532+,   for a photomultiplier which includes a photoemissive cathode within
    an envelope.

    538,    for a gas or vapor phototube which includes a photoemissive cathode
    within an envelope.

    541,    for a phototube having a photocathode on the tube wall.


CLS 313/545
TXT HAVING VALVE WITH GETTER, GAS/VAPOR GENERATING MATERIAL OR PRESSURE CONTROL
    MEANS:

    Subject matter under the class definition which includes as electric lamp
    or a discharge device having an envelope with an opening, a passageway with
    a device to close or open the passageway connected to the opening to permit
    the passage of gas or vapor including a getter into or out of the envelope
    for the purpose of controlling the operation including the regulation of
    the gas or vapor pressure of the lamp or discharge device.

    (1)     Note.  The subcombination of the valve for an electric lamp or
    discharge device is here unless provided for elsewhere.

    (2)     Note.  The reservoir for the gas or vapor to be admitted to the
    lamp or discharge device can be also claimed.

    (3)     Note.  The purpose may be for pressure regulation of the gas or
    vapor pressure of the lamp or discharge device or for gettering an unwanted
    gas or vapor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for a lamp or discharge device with an evacuating pump.

    11+,    for a lamp, discharge device or electrode combined with means to
    modify the temperature of the lamp, discharge device or electrode or some
    other part thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 251.1 for liquid valves, per se.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 8 for processes of exhausting a lamp envelope, and inserting a gas
    or vapor into the exhausted envelope.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 3+ for gas or vapor dispensing into an
    evacuated envelope by the use of a valve.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, for a valve.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 110 for
    valve controlled confined gas or vapor load device with pressure regulating
    means.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, subclasses 52+ for expansion and contraction of
    pump fluid processes.


CLS 313/546
TXT WITH FRANGIBLE CAPSULE CONTAINING GETTER, GAS OR VAPOR GENERATING MATERIAL:

    Subject matter under the class definition which includes a sealed capsule
    holding a getter or a gas or vapor generating material, capable of being
    opened within the envelope so that the material can enter the inside of the
    envelope to perform some function.

    (1)     Note.  The container can be unsealed by breaking the container,
    melting at least a portion of the container, penetrating the container, or
    destroying the sealed container in any way to cause the material to enter
    the inside of the envelope.

    (2)     Note.  Here is the subcombination of an envelope of a lamp or
    discharge device and a frangible container with material within the inside
    of the envelope.

    (3)     Note.  Material in the container may be solid, gas or liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 7 for a gas or vapor in a receiver with the evacuation of the
    receiver for processes.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 181.1+ for getter compositions or gas or
    vapor generating material compositions which may be stored in a capsule.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 48+ for electric or getter type pumps where the
    claims do not state the gettering action is within a lamp or discharge
    device (single disclosure appears to control the classification).

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    subclasses 9+ for a process which includes generating gas or vapor or
    coating by gas vapor, mist or smoke within an envelope combined with an
    assembly operation, subclass 16 for a process of gas introduction into an
    electric lamp or discharge device with generating gas or vapor within the
    envelope, subclass 19 for a process which includes the generating a gas or
    vapor, mist or smoke within an envelop which requires induction heating to
    release the generated material, subclasses 38+ for a process which includes
    the evacuation of a lamp or discharge device and some other operation,
    subclasses 53+ for a process which includes evacuation, degasification or
    gas, vapor or liquid introduction into a lamp or discharge device envelope
    and the step of gettering within the envelope and subclasses 70 and 73 for
    apparatus to evacuate, degasify and/or gas, vapor or liquid introduction
    into a lamp or discharge envelope.


CLS 313/547
TXT HAVING HEATING MEANS TO CONTROL GAS/VAPOR, GAS OR VAPOR GENERATING MEANS OR
    GETTER MEANS:

    Subject matter under the class definition which includes an envelope for a
    lamp or discharge device, at least an electrode within the envelope and
    electric heating means to maintain or control the temperature or the
    pressure of gas or vapor within certain limits within the envelope, to
    cause the generation of gas or vapor within the envelope or to control a
    getter within the envelope to remove a gas or vapor from the gas to vapor
    within the tube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    552,    for a gas or vapor lamp of discharge device having pressure control
    of the gas or vapor generally.

    553+,   for a lamp or discharge device having a getter.


CLS 313/548
TXT Incandescent lamp gettering:

    Subject matter under subclass 547 wherein the electric heating means is
    used for the purpose of heating getter material within the envelope to
    remove unwanted gas or vapor from the gas or vapor within the envelope of
    an incandescent lamp.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315+,   for an incandescent lampgenerally.

    557,    for an incandescent lamp and getter including getter material where
    no additional heating means to heat the getter is claimed.

    578+,   for a gas or vapor incandescent lamp.


CLS 313/549
TXT Discharge device gettering:

    Subject matter under subclass 547 wherein the electric heating means is
    used for the purpose of heating the getter material within the envelope to
    remove unwanted gas or vapor from the gas or vapor within the envelope of
    an electrical discharge device.

    (1)     Note.  Here the getter or the getter support may be part of the
    heating means.

    (2)     Note.  Included are electrical resistance, induction or any other
    type of electric heaters for the purpose of heating the getter in the
    envelope.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    553+,   for a discharge device of the gas, vapor or the vacuum type with a
    getter whether it is a lamp or electronic tube where no additional heating
    means is claimed.


CLS 313/550
TXT Vapor generating:

    Subject matter under subclass 547 wherein the electric heating means is
    used to create a vapor from material within the envelope.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    564+,   for a lamp or discharge device having vapor generating material
    where no additional heating means is claimed.


CLS 313/551
TXT Gas generating:

    Subject matter under subclass 547 wherein the electric heating means is
    used to create a gas from material within the envelope.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    563,    for a lamp or discharge device having gas generating material where
    no additional heating means is claimed.


CLS 313/552
TXT HAVING PRESSURE CONTROL OF GAS OR VAPOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition which includes a gas or vapor
    within the envelope, at least an electrode within the envelope and material
    of structure to release or take up gas vapor within the envelope to control
    the pressure of the gas or vapor within the envelope.

    (1)     Note.  Here gas or vapor may be added or subtracted from the gas or
    vapor within the envelope to control the pressure or the temperature of the
    gas or vapor within the envelope more than one time.

    (2)     Note.  The lamp or discharge device itself in its normal operation
    creates the energy which controls the material or structure to release or
    remove gas or vapor from the amount of gas or vapor within the lamp or
    discharge device.

    (3)     Note.  Pressure control requires the ability to add or subtract gas
    or vapor from the gas or vapor within the envelope.  The temperature of the
    gas or vapor determines whether gas or vapor is added to subtracted.

    (4)     Note.  The vacuum of a vacuum tube is considered to be pressure on
    the gas or vapor within the envelope.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11+,    for a lamp or discharge device with a temperature modifier.

    547+,   for pressure control of gas or vapor using heating means rather
    than the heat evolved during the operation of the tube.


CLS 313/553
TXT WITH GETTER:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a lamp or discharge
    device having a gas or vapor within an envelope detrimental to the
    operation of the lamp or discharge device and a material to remove the
    detrimental gas or vapor or lessen the amount of the detrimental gas or
    vapor in the atmosphere of the envelope.

    (1)     Note.  The subcombination of an envelope and a getter within the
    envelope will be placed in this group of subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  The getter receives heat from the filament of a lamp, a
    cathode heater of a tube, or the electrical discharge of a tube.

    (3)     Note.  Getters may be of the absorption, adsorption, chemical
    reaction type or by any means solely within the envelope.

    (4)     Note.  Support structure for a getter or with a getter where the
    only disclosure is for an electric lamp or discharge device will be placed
    with the appropriate subclass as a subcombination not elsewhere classified.

    (5)     Note.  Getter materials for vacuum tubes are classified in this
    subclass.


CLS 313/554
TXT Plural:

    Subject matter under subclass 553 wherein there are at least two getter
    materials or structures within the envelope of the lamp or discharge device.


CLS 313/555
TXT Diverse:

    Subject matter under subclass 554 wherein the plural getters include at
    least two different elements, or compounds, or an element and a compound
    within the envelope of the electric lamp or discharge device.

    (1)     Note.  A getter may change an element or a compound within the
    sealed envelope into other substances and a second getter may in turn
    change the resulting products of the first gettering action into other
    chemical substances.

    (2)     Note.  Here the plural diverse getters may be in name only and may
    affect the same unwanted element or compound within the envelope.


CLS 313/556
TXT And vapor generator:

    Subject matter under subclass 553 which includes, in addition to the
    getter, a material to produce a vapor within the envelope.


CLS 313/557
TXT Incandescent lamp type:

    Subject matter under subclass 553 wherein there is an incandescent filament
    within the envelope.


CLS 313/558
TXT Electrode includes getter, supports getter or is connected to getter:

    Subject matter under subclass 553 including an electrode which, (1)
    includes getter material, (2) supports a getter, or (3) is connected to a
    getter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    559,    for a getter mounted on an electrode support.


CLS 313/559
TXT Mounted on electrode support:

    Subject matter under subclass 553 wherein the getter or getter material is
    mounted on a support for an electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    558,    for a getter, forming part of an electrode, supported by an
    electrode or connected to an electrode.


CLS 313/560
TXT With structure to direct or shield from getter:

    Subject matter under subclass 553 which includes structure to direct or
    cause the gas or vapor of the supported getter to be deposited only in
    certain areas within the envelope.

    (1)     Note.  The subcombination of a discharge envelope with a support
    for a getter with a directional type outlet is classified here.

    (2)     Note.  Classified here are getters within a discharge device
    envelope having an electrode with a shield to prevent the getter material
    from being deposited in unwanted areas of the tube or with a container with
    an outlet to have the getter material leave the container in a
    predetermined direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    481,    for a cathode-ray tube with a getter.

    558,    for a getter, part of an electrode, supported by an electrode or
    connected to an electrode.

    565,    for a contained getter without means to direct the gas or vapor of
    the getter.


CLS 313/561
TXT With contained getter:

    Subject matter under subclass 553 which includes a getter material
    supported by a holder.


CLS 313/562
TXT Gas or vapor device type:

    Subject matter under subclass 553 wherein the getter is used in a gas or
    vapor type tube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    553,    for a vacuum tube getter.


CLS 313/563
TXT HAVING GAS GENERATING MATERIAL:

    Subject matter under the class definition which includes an envelope for a
    lamp or discharge device, at least an electrode or a filament and a
    material within the envelope capable of emitting a gas.

    (1)     Note.  The subcombination of an envelope of a lamp or discharge
    device and a gas within the envelope and a material which will generate a
    gas is here in the absence of another class to take this subcombination.
    Also an electrode, per se, with gas generating material is here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    551,    for gas generating means within the envelope having heating means
    other than the heat developed in the operation of the lamp or discharge
    device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 0.6+ for a receptacle
    with a gas therein.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 108 for gas
    or vapor type load device with pressure regulating means and subclasses
    111.01+ for a discharge device load with fluent material supply to
    discharge space.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 120 for gas
    filled space discharge device in safety and protection of systems and
    devices to dissipate high voltage arcs.


CLS 313/564
TXT HAVING VAPOR GENERATING MATERIAL:

    Subject matter under the class definition which includes an envelope for an
    electric lamp or discharge device, at least an electrode and a substance
    capable of being vaporized within the envelope.

    (1)     Note.  A vapor is the gasified state of a liquid or a solid
    material.

    (2)     Note.  No electrical heating means is claimed to change the
    substance from a solid or a liquid to a vapor.  See subclass 550 for
    heating means to heat vapor generating material.  In this subclass the heat
    evolved in the operation of the tube changes the vaporizable substance to a
    vapor.

    (3)     Note.  The subcombination of an envelope of a lamp or discharge
    device and a material capable of being vaporized is here in the absence of
    a class to take the subcombination.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    550,    for a lamp or discharge device having electrical heating means to
    vaporize material.

    554,    for temperature or pressure control of a gas or vapor.

    555,    for a lamp or discharge device having a getter which is a vapor
    generating material.

    571,    for a lamp or discharge device envelope with a gas or vapor fill.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 2+
    particularly 14 for arc blowout for main breaker contact by means of a
    fluid or gas and subclass 121 for high voltage dissipation by means of a
    fluid.


CLS 313/565
TXT Mercury vapor material:

    Subject matter under subclass 564 wherein the substance to be vaporized is
    mercury.


CLS 313/566
TXT Electrode or electrode support includes material:

    Subject matter under subclass 564 wherein the electrode composition or
    structure or the support for the electrode includes the substance capable
    of being vaporized.


CLS 313/567
TXT WITH GAS OR VAPOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition which includes a lamp or
    discharge device having a gas or vapor within an envelope.


CLS 313/568
TXT Having a particular total or partial pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 567 wherein the gas or vapor pressure within
    the envelope is stated as being a specific pressure or in a range of
    pressures.

    (1)     Note.  The unit of pressure, torr, is the same as a millimeter of
    pressure.

    (2)     Note.  The patents are placed on the basis of the highest pressure
    of the total or the partial pressure recited in the claim.

    (3)     Note.  Here are patents which include a gas or vapor fill of less
    than one torr, but greater than .1 torr.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233,    for a lamp or discharge device which is defined in terms of the
    degree of vacuum within the envelope of the lamp or discharge device.
    However, claims reciting a gas or vapor at less than 0.1 torr are
    classified in subclass 577.

    549,    for a lamp or discharge device having a heating means to control
    the gas or vapor pressure within the envelope of the lamp or discharge
    device.

    552,    for a lamp or discharge device having means to control the gas or
    vapor pressure within the envelope of the lamp or discharge device, using
    the heat developed in the operation of the lamp or discharge device.

    637,    for a lamp or discharge device having a particular gas or vapor
    including mixtures of gases or vapors.


CLS 313/569
TXT Incandescent lamp:

    Subject matter under subclass 568 which includes a filament type lamp.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315+,   for incandescent glower or filament type lamps with or without an
    enclosing envelope.

    548,    for incandescent lamp gettering by heating means.

    557,    for incandescent lamp with getter including gettering and gettering
    material.

    578+,   for a gas or vapor type incandescent lamp.


CLS 313/570
TXT Greater than 760 torr:

    Subject matter under subclass 568 wherein the gas or vapor pressure is in
    excess of one atomsphere.

    (1)     Note.  One torr is equal to one millimeter of pressure.


CLS 313/571
TXT Includes mercury in gas or vapor fill:

    Subject matter under subclass 570 which includes mercury in the gas or
    vapor.


CLS 313/572
TXT One torr thru 760 torr:

    Subject matter under subclass 568 wherein the gas or vapor pressure within
    the envelope is from one torr to and including 760 torr.


CLS 313/573
TXT Having specified envelope detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 572 wherein the envelope is defined in terms
    of some envelope feature.

    (1)     Note.  The feature may be structural, or composition, or some
    optical feature, but not merely transparent, translucent, sealed or
    vitreous.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass are patents to both envelope
    detail and electrode detail.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    317+,   for a lamp or discharge device having a particular envelope.

    634+,   for a gas or vapor discharge device envelope having particular
    structure including envelopes with a layer or coating or material.

    636,    for a gas or vapor discharge device having a particular envelope
    composition.


CLS 313/574
TXT With electrode structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 572 which includes a structural detail of an
    electrode.

    (1)     Note.  For electrode material or composition, see subclasses 568+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238+,   for a lamp or discharge device with a support and/or spacing
    structure for electrode and/or shield.

    326+,   for lamp or discharge device electrode or shield structures, per se.

    615,    for a gas or vapor discharge device having a crater electrode and a
    shield.

    617,    for a gas vapor discharge device having a spur electrode.

    618,    for a gas or vapor discharge device having a hollow cathode.

    622,    for a gas or vapor discharge device having diverse electrodes.

    630,    for a gas or discharge device having an electrode of alkali,
    alkaline, or rare earth material.

    631+,   for a gas or vapor discharge device having particular electrode
    structure.

    633,    for a gas or vapor discharge device having cathode or anode of
    composition.


CLS 313/575
TXT Composite:

    Subject matter under subclass 574 including an electrode made of more than
    one part or material.

    (1)     Note.  Here are electrodes having a base material with a coated, or
    layered type electrode.

    (2)     Note.  The composite electrode is generally a cathode having a low
    work function material to increase electron emission.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    352+,   for composite electrodes.


CLS 313/576
TXT With rare gas:

    Subject matter under subclass 575 which also includes noble gas.

    (1)     Note.  The rare gases are helium, neon, argon, krypton or xenon.
    These gases are also know as the noble or inert gases.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    641,    for a lamp or discharge device having a mercury vapor, rare earth
    metal and a rare gas atomsphere.

    642,    for a lamp or discharge device including a mercury vapor and a rare
    gas atmosphere.

    643,    for a lamp or discharge device including one or more rare gases.


CLS 313/577
TXT Less than .1 torr:

    Subject matter under subclass 568 wherein the total or partical pressure of
    the gas or vapor is below one-tenth torr.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233,    for lamp or discharge devices which are defined in terms of the
    magnitude of the vacuum of the lamp or discharge device.


CLS 313/578
TXT Incandescent filament lamp:

    Subject matter under subclass 567 which includes an electrical filament
    capable of being energized within the envelope so that the filament as a
    result of the energization is heated to emit electromagnetic radiation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for a lamp or discharge device with a temperature modifier for a
    filament or heated cathode.

    110+,   for an incandescent lamp having an optical device or a a special
    ray transmissive envelope intergal therewith.

    315+,   for incandescent lamp having a glower or filament adapted to be
    heated to incandescence by passage of current therethrough.

    317+,   for significant envelope or envelope and base structure and a
    filament or light emitter body in name only or broadly and no relationship
    to other parts of the lamp.

    341+,   for a lamp only with significant filament or glower structure.

    557,    for a getter integral with an incandescent lamp.

    563,    for a lamp having a gas generating material.

    564+,   for a lamp having vapor generating material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, particularly subclass
    46 for a combined load device or load device temperature modifying means
    wherein there is a filament, electric heater, or resistance in shunt with
    the discharge electrodes of a discharge device load, subclass 49 for a
    filament or electric in series with a discharge device load and subclasses
    82+ for headlight systems.


CLS 313/579
TXT Tungsten-halogen cycle lamp:

    Subject matter under subclass 578 wherein the filament is tungsten and the
    gas includes, (1) a hologen, or (2) a halogen compound containing gas, or
    (3) a halogen compound within the envelope.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    548,    for a lamp or discharge device having heating means to control an
    incandescent lamp getter.

    557,    for an incandescent lamp having a getter.


CLS 313/580
TXT With filter, barrier, screen, shield, electric terminal or fuse:

    Subject matter under subclass 578 which includes, (1) a physical screen to
    trap unwanted material as vaporized filament material, (2) a screen or
    shield for preventing an explosion, or fire within the lamp, (3) a quick
    make and break electrical connector attached to the filament, (4) a barrier
    to contain or impede the circulation of gas or vapor within the envelope,
    or (5) an integral fuse in circuit with the filament.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    579,    for tungsten filament-halogen cycle lamps that lessens blackening
    of the lamp envelope.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, for apparatus for gas separation, per
    se.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 119+ for
    an electric lamp with an automatic shunt or cut-off.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclasses 142+ for fusible element actuated switch.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 611+ for a quick make or break
    electrical connector with a vitreous envelope secured to contact or
    coupling part.


CLS 313/581
TXT Three or more electrode discharge device:

    Subject matter under subclass 567 wherein the discharge device includes at
    least three electrodes within the envelope.

    (1)     Note.  See the "Definitions of Terms Used in the Class", section I
    for the definition of the term "electrode".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162,    for a discharge device or lamp having a movable electrode or shield
    in an envelope having three or more electrodes.

    163+,   for a liquid electrode discharge device having three or more
    electrodes, particularly subclass 168 for plural anodes in separate
    envelope chambers.

    306+,   for a discharge device having three or more electrodes.

    568+,   for a lamp or discharge device having a particular total or partial
    gas or vapor pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 334+ and
    the subclasses specified in the notes for systems for supplying electrical
    energy to gas or vapor discharge devices which have a plurality of cathodes
    and/or anodes and subclasses 349+ and the subclasses cited in the notes
    thereto for systems supplying electrical energy to gas or vapor type
    discharge devices which have a control electrode.


CLS 313/582
TXT Multiple gaseous discharge display panel:

    Subject matter under subclass 581 wherein the envelope has an extended
    viewing surface, a first set and a second set of electrode, of the second
    set produce a point of light in the ionized gas to form a visual display.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 169.4 for a
    gas display panel device having diverse type energizing or bias supplies to
    different electrodes of a plural anode and/or cathode load device.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 41+ for selective electrically
    controlled visual display systems having segmented, fluid, light-emitting
    display elements, and subclasses 60+ for selective electrically controlled
    visual display systems having fluid light-emitting display elements
    arranged in a matrix or array.


CLS 313/583
TXT Having electric terminal detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 582 where there is included electrical
    terminal structure connected to the electrodes to supply power to ionize
    the gas.

    (1)     Note.  Since the bulk of the patents here do not claim the gas as
    ionizable and some do not include in the claim more than two electrodes,
    the patents are placed here on the basis of the disclosure having an
    envelope with a gas therein and at least one electrode associated with the
    gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 17+ for boxes
    and housings with fluids or vacuum particularly subclass 18 with bushing,
    terminal or lead in and subclasses 50.5+ for hermetic sealed envelope type
    boxes and housings.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 55+ for an electrical connector
    with a preformed panel circuit arrangement without specific electronic
    structure; and subclasses 611+ for an electrical connector or contact
    having a vitreous-type envelope secured thereto.


CLS 313/584
TXT Having intersecting electrode sets:

    Subject matter under subclass 582 wherein the electrodes of the first set
    are at an angle to the electrodes of the second set so that an electrode of
    one set can intersect each of the electrodes of the other set to create a
    plurality of points of light when the sets of electrodes and the gas are
    appropriately energized.


CLS 313/585
TXT With three sets of electrodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 584 which includes a third set of electrodes
    spaced from the second set of electrodes.


CLS 313/586
TXT With dielectric member:

    Subject matter under subclass 584 wherein there is a dielectric medium
    between the ionizable gas and at least one set of the electrodes.

    (1)     Note.  One of the sets may have one electrode, but the second set
    has plural electrodes.

    (2)     Note.  The dielectric medium may be claimed as a composition with
    or without the thickness of the medium or in terms of the thickness of the
    medium.

    (3)     Note.  The type of display panel here is energized by an
    alternating current supply supply rather than direct current.


CLS 313/587
TXT And additional layer on member:

    Subject matter under subclass 586 wherein the dielectric medium has another
    layer of material.

    (1)     Note.  The layers may be a coating or a laminate and one of the
    layers may be electron emissive.


CLS 313/588
TXT Amplifier, cathanode or ionic cathode:

    Subject matter under subclass 581 which includes, (1) a cathode and an
    anode between which the main electron flow takes place after the gas or
    vapor ionizes and a control electrode which does not lose control of the
    electron flow between the cathode and the anode after the gas or vapor
    ionizes, (2) an auxiliary cathode and an anode with the gas or vapor in
    between which functions, when the appropriate voltage is placed on the
    auxiliary cathode and the anode, to ionize the gas or the vapor to create
    electrons which form the electron current in the envelope, or (3) an
    auxillary cathode and an auxillary anode which causes the gas or vapor to
    ionize, when the appropriate voltage is placed between them and cause the
    electrons formed by the ionization to bombard the auxillary anode which in
    turn gives off secondary electrons which acts as the main cathode of the
    device.

    (1)     Note.  See the "Definition of Terms Used in the Class", section I
    of class definition for the terms "cathanode" and "ionic cathanode".

    (2)     Note.  Some the discharge device in this subclass are provided with
    means, such as a barrier, between two discharge spaces, so that different
    pressures of gas or different kinds of gas may be maintained in the
    respective discharge space, the barrier being electron permeable.  Other of
    the discharge spaces have the electron receiving electrode so spaced with
    respect to the ionizing discharge electrodes that the electrons do not
    attain sufficient velocity or do not travel through sufficiently long
    distance to ionize the gas or vapor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305,    for cathanode type discharge device which is provided with two
    electron emissive electrodes and another electrode, one electron emissive
    electrode being designed to emit electrons to the second electron emitting
    electrode to heat the second emitting electrode to its emitting
    temperature, the second emitting electrode being designed to emit electrons
    to the third electrode.

    359.1+, for discharge devices with means to form and accelerate positive
    ion or megative ions.

    420,    for a cathode-ray tube which is provided with a electron permeable
    window.

    598,    for a gas or vapor discharge device with three or more electrodes
    one of which is an apertured grid, the space between two of the electrodes
    is less than the mean free path spacing of the gas or vapor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 4+ for maser type amplifying devices and
    subclass 41 for gas or vapor type amplifying device.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 126 for a gaseous space discharge device.

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, particularly subclasses 55+ for gas or
    vapor media generators.


CLS 313/589
TXT Counter, indicator or switching tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 581 wherein there is a plurality of the same
    type of anode or cathode and an electrode of the opposite type, conduction
    of the gas or vapor when ionzed between the electrode of the opposite type
    and one of the plurality of the same type electrodes can be shifted to
    another electrode of the plurality of the same type electrodes and the same
    electrode of the opposite type whereby the tube can function as counter,
    indicator or a switching tube.

    (1)     Note.  The envelope may or may not be transmissive to the light
    caused by the ionization of the gas or vapor in the operation of the tube.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 84.61 for
    pulse storing systems of the gaseous discharge tube type having plural
    cathode or anodes and subclass 169.2 for a plural power supply to a plural
    cathode and/or anode load device having diverse type energizing or bias
    supplies to different electrodes including shifting, of register, counter
    or display.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 103 for counting or dividing chains using
    gas filled tubes.


CLS 313/590
TXT With shield to prevent discharge between electrodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 581 which includes a physical barrier within
    the envelope to prevent the passage of an electrical discharge from one
    electrode to another electrode.

    (1)     Note.  Classified here are barriers to prevent a discharge between
    two anodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    609+,   for baffles, partition or constricting means to control the
    discharge path within the discharge device.

    613+,   for electron shields to prevent a discharge to the electrode.


CLS 313/591
TXT Having cathode heater:

    Subject matter under subclass 581 wherein there is a cathode which is
    electrically heated by the passage of an electrical current through an
    electrical resistance element which may be the cathode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    337+,   for indirectly heated cathodes, per se.

    341+,   for filament or resistance heated electrodes, per se.

    629,    for gas or vapor tubes having a resistance heated cathode.


CLS 313/592
TXT With control electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 591 wherein there is a control grid electrode
    whose function is to ionize the gas or vapor within the envelope.

    (1)     Note.  Here the grid electrode loses control of the ionized gas
    when the gas or vapor becomes ionized.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163+,   for liquid electrode device particularly subclasses 170+ for an
    auxiliary starting or holding electrode.

    588,    for a gas or vapor discharge device wherein the grid does not lose
    control of the discharge.


CLS 313/593
TXT Plural:

    Subject matter under subclass 592 wherein there are two or more control
    electrodes within the envelope.

    (1)     Note.  If a thyratron is claimed, the cathode may be stated as a
    "cathode" rather than a thermionic or an electrically heated cathode.

    (2)     Note.  Classified here are shield grid thyratrons.


CLS 313/594
TXT Start electrode exterior to envelope:

    Subject matter under subclass 581 wherein there is a starting electrode on
    the outside of the envelope, the start electrode when electrically
    energized along with the electrodes within the envelope of the gas or vapor
    tube, causes the gas or vapor to ionize to form the discharge current in
    the envelope.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166,    for a liquid electrode discharge device having a starting band or
    external electrode.

    595+,   for gas or vapor three electrode discharge device with an internal
    start or control electrode in the discharge path.

    601+,   for three electrode gas or vapor discharge device where a start
    electrode is not in main discharge path.

    607,    for a gas or vapor discharge device having an electrode on the
    outside of the envelope.


CLS 313/595
TXT Internal start or control electrode between discharge electrodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 581 wherein the start or control electrode is
    between two spaced electrodes which are capable of having an electrical
    discharge there between in use, the start or control electrode being
    capable of starting or controlling the discharge of the ionized gas or
    vapor between the two spaced electrodes.


CLS 313/596
TXT Strip electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 595 wherein the electrode between the two
    spaced electrodes is an elongated electrical conductor.

    (1)     Note.  The strip electrode may be electrically connected to either
    of the two spaced electrodes.

    (2)     Note.  The discharge devices here are generally double-ended tubes
    but the subclass is not restricted to such type tubes.

    (3)     Note.  The two spaced electrodes are heated filaments, but the
    subclass is not restricted to electrically heated resistance electrodes.


CLS 313/597
TXT Interposed apertured electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 595 wherein the start or control electrode
    has at least one opening there through or formed to make a conduit to
    permit the passage of the electrical discharge, between the two electrodes.

    (1)     Note.  The control or start electrode can be grid like or in the
    form of an open cylinder.


CLS 313/598
TXT Mean free-path spacing:

    Subject matter under subclass 597 wherein the interposed apertured
    electrode is spaced from another electrode a distance which is less than
    the mean free path distance of an electron in the gas or vapor within the
    device.

    (1)     Note.  The mean free path of an electron is the average distance an
    electron may travel in the gas or vapor without producing ionization of the
    gas or vapor.  As the mean free path distance depends upon a number of
    factors, not all of which necessarily involve structure of the discharge
    device, this subclass includes patents which claim two electrodes as being
    within the mean free path distance and include as cross references patents
    which disclose that the electrodes are within the mean free path distance.

    (2)     Note.  The electrodes between which the apertured electrode is
    interposed may be spaced from each other a distance less than the mean free
    path length.


CLS 313/599
TXT Plural serial apertured electrodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 597 wherein there are more than one apertured
    electrode in series in the electrical discharge path of the discharge
    device.


CLS 313/600
TXT Two interposed electrodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 595 wherein there are at least two electrodes
    between the two spaced electrodes.

    (1)     Note.  Included are auxiliary electrodes which ionize the gas or
    vapor of the discharge device but are not in the main discharge path.


CLS 313/601
TXT Start electrode not in main discharge path:

    Subject matter under subclass 581 wherein one of the electrodes is a
    starting, trigger or control electrode and two of the electrodes are the
    discharge electrodes of the discharge device, the one electrode is placed
    out of the discharge path between the main discharge electrodes of the
    discharge device.


CLS 313/602
TXT Trigger electrode concentric with discharge electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 601 wherein the start or the control
    electrode is placed with respect to one of the two discharge electrodes so
    that they both have a common axis.


CLS 313/603
TXT Triggerable vacuum gap device:

    Subject matter under subclass 601 wherein there is a starting electrode
    which injects an ionized gas or vapor into the discharge device as a result
    of an overload so that an electrical discharge can be transferred to the
    discharge electrodes of the discharge device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231.01+, for a fluent material supply or flow directing means in a
    discharge device lamp, radiation source or discharge device.


CLS 313/604
TXT Plural serial electrodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 581 wherein two of the electrodes are the
    main discharge electrodes and there is at least another electrode in
    between wherein all electrodes are in series with each other so that, when
    an ionized discharge takes place between successive electrodes, the voltage
    drop between two successive electrodes is proportional to the distance
    between the two electrodes with respect to the overall distance between the
    main discharge electrodes.

    (1)     Note.  The tubes here can be voltage regulators, voltage dividers
    or overvoltage protection devices for a circuit or for the tube itself.


CLS 313/605
TXT Mean free-path spacing of envelope portions or content parts:

    Subject matter under subclass 567 wherein one envelope portion or a part of
    the device is spaced from another envelope portion or part of the device a
    distance which is less than the mean free-path length distance.

    (1)     Note.  The mean free-path distance of an electron is the average
    distance an electron may travel in the gas or vapor without producing
    ionization of the gas or vapor.  As the mean free-path length depends upon
    a number of factors, not all of which involve structure of the device, this
    and the indented subclass include patents which claim the parts as being
    within the mean free-path distance and include as cross references patents
    that disclose that the parts are within the mean free-path distance.


CLS 313/606
TXT Electrode spacing related to mean free path length:

    Subject matter under subclass 605 wherein at least a portion of the
    electrode is spaced a distance from a portion of another electrode less
    than the mean free path spacing.

    (1)     Note.  The spacing may be for the purpose of restricting current
    flow from one electrode or may be for the purpose of insulating one portion
    of an electrode from a portion of another electrode even though other
    portions of the electrodes are spaced a distance which permits ionization
    between such portions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    598,    for a gas or vapor discharge device having a grid like or apertured
    electrode interposed in the discharge path between two discharge
    electrodes, the distance between the discharge electrodes being less than
    the means free path length.

    620,    for a gas or vapor discharge device having the spacing between
    electrodes cited as being a specific distance or a range of distances or
    being based upon the gas or vapor pressure or the operating electrical
    power.

    621,    for a gas or vapor discharge device having the electrodes spaced
    from each other in terms of a geometrical relationship.


CLS 313/607
TXT Having electrode exterior to envelope:

    Subject matter under subclass 567 wherein at least one electrode of the
    discharge device is on the outside of the envelope.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    594,    for a gas or vapor discharge device having at least three
    electrodes one of which is on the outside of the envelope.


CLS 313/608
TXT Single electrode type discharge device, or including particulate material:

    Subject matter under subclass 567 which include discharge devices having
    only one electrode; or which have a space between two electrodes which is
    at least partially filled with particulate material.

    (1)     Note.  When the discharge device has but one electrode and the
    voltage to operate the device is applied between the single electrode and
    some other object, such as ground, the electrostatic field at the discharge
    device along with the gas pressure and the device structure is capable of
    causing ionization of the gas or vapor within the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    325,    for a discharge device having an insulating material in the
    discharge space.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses
    154+ for discharge devices which are designed to transmit high frequency
    electric current into the human body, the devices include an envelope with
    a confined gas or vapor and an electrode within the envelope, the human
    body being used as the other electrode to establish a space discharge in
    the device.


CLS 313/609
TXT Having baffle, partition, or constricting means affecting discharge:

    Subject matter under subclass 567 which includes physical structure within
    the envelope to change the direction of the electrical discharge within the
    envelope or which can be part of the envelope to change the area of the
    discharge flowing within the envelope.

    (1)     Note.  Shields for an electrode which may act as a baffle are
    classified in subclasses 613+.

    (2)     Note.  Electrical type of control of the discharge is not
    classified here.

    (3)     Note.  In these indented subclasses, there is no structure to stop
    the electrical discharge from continuing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for a lamp or discharge device having an envelope with internal
    temperature modifying baffle.

    317+,   for a lamp or discharge device having a particular envelope
    structure.

    325,    for a miscellaneous discharge device which has an insulating
    material in the discharge space.

    608,    for a gas or vapor discharge device including particulate material
    between discharge electrode.

    613+,   for an electrode with a baffle to prevent an electrical discharge
    from hitting the electrode except in a specific direction.

    634,    for a gas or vapor discharge device having an envelope with a
    nonlinear discharge path.


CLS 313/610
TXT Partition:

    Subject matter under subclass 609 wherein the physical means within the
    envelope not only guides the direction of the discharge but also changes
    the cross-sectional area of the discharge that can flow through the
    envelope and lengthens the discharge path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    611+,   for a partition that only changes the area of the discharge between
    electrodes.


CLS 313/611
TXT Constriction means:

    Subject matter under subclasses 609+ wherein the structure includes, (1)
    envelope structure which changes the cross-sectional area of the envelope,
    or (2) physical means within the envelope to reduce the cross-sectional
    area of the discharge of the discharge device.

    (1)     Note.  A constriction reduces the area of the electrical discharge
    at least in one position of the discharge path within the tube and does not
    change the length of the discharge path.


CLS 313/612
TXT Substantially the full length of discharge path:

    Subject matter under subclass 611 wherein the physical means to reduce the
    cross-sectional area of the discharge extends substantially the entire
    length of the discharge between main electrodes of the tube.


CLS 313/613
TXT Having electrode shield:

    Subject matter under subclass 567 which includes a protective member, (1)
    to protect the electrode from the ionized gas or vapor within the envelope,
    or (2) to restrict the area of the electrode available to receive the
    ionized discharge of gas or vapor.

    (1)     Note.  See the definitions of the terms used in section I of the
    general notes to this class for the word "shield".

    (2)     Note.  The shield may be an conductor or an insulator.

    (3)     Note.  Here is an electrode surrounded by a conductive or an
    insulative shield which limits the area of the electrode to receive the
    ionized gas or vapor discharge in the envelope.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147,    for a lamp or discharge device having a movable shield.

    239+,   for devices having a support and/or spacing structure for electrode
    and/or shield.

    326+,   for shield structures, defined by structure, for a lamp or
    discharge device.

    492,    for a lamp or discharge device with luminescent solid or liquid
    material and gaseous discharge medium having the solid or liquid on the
    envelope and an electrode shield.

    590,    for a three or more electrode gas or vapor discharge device with a
    shield to prevent discharge between electrodes.

    592+,   for a three or more electrode gas or vapor discharge device with a
    shield grid electrode.

    626,    for a gas or vapor discharge device having electrode leading
    shields.


CLS 313/614
TXT With anode shield:

    Subject matter under subclass 613 wherein the electrode is an anode or the
    electrode acts as an anode during the portion of an alternating voltage
    supplying power to the electrode and the member prevents bombardment of the
    anode or electrode by positive ions or restricts the area of the anode or
    electrode available to the discharge of the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168,    for liquid electrode discharge device which has a plurality of
    anodes and an envelope having a plurality of separate anode chambers.

    169,    for a liquid electrode discharge device which is provided with a
    plurality of anodes, at least one anode having a shield.

    590,    for three or more electrode gas or vapor discharge device including
    a plurality of anodes, at least one anode having a shield.

    609+,   for a gas or vapor discharge device having physical barrier or
    partition between the electrodes of a discharge path to cause the discharge
    to travel along a longer path between the electrodes or a constricting
    means in the discharge path which reduces the cross-sectional area of the
    discharge path to a smaller area than the rest of the path.

    616,    for a gas or vapor discharge device with a positive ion or cathode
    shield.


CLS 313/615
TXT Crater electrode with shield:

    Subject matter under subclass 613 wherein the electrode is a cathode with a
    hollowed out cavity, and there is also an anode and a dielectric shield
    touching both the cathode and the anode to prevent an electrical discharge
    between the cathode and the anode except at predetermined locations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    618,    for a gas or vapor discharge device having a crater electrode.


CLS 313/616
TXT With positive ion or cathode shield:

    Subject matter under subclass 613 wherein the gas or vapor within the
    envelope becomes ionized in the operation of the device and the electrode
    is a cathode separated from an anode by the ionized gas or vapor and there
    is a barrier protecting the cathode so that the positive ions will hit the
    barrier to protect the cathode.

    (1)     Note.  The shield is generally connected electrically to dissipate
    the electrical charge as a result of the ions hitting shield.

    (2)     Note.  Shields or anode plates about a thermic cathode achieve a
    reduction of the anode voltage drop and slows down the darkening of a lamp
    or electronic tube without damage to the cathode.

    (3)     Note.  An electrical cathode shield is an auxiliary electrode
    electrically acting as an anode in alternate half cycles of a.c. operation
    of a discharge device.

    (4)     Note.  The positive ion shield need not for the purpose of
    shielding the cathode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    614,    for a gas or vapor discharge device having an anode shield.


CLS 313/617
TXT Having spur electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 567 wherein the electrode is provided with a
    starting spur extending from the electrode towards another electrode.

    (1)     Note.  A starting spur is usually a wire or strip of metal which is
    attached to an electrode and extends close to another electrode, the
    starting spur serving to initiate the discharge between it and the other
    electrode when the device is put into operation, the discharge transferred
    to the other electrode after the initial discharge has been initiated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    592+,   for a gas or vapor discharge device having a cathode heater and a
    starting electrode.

    594,    for a gas or vapor discharge device having a start electrode
    exterior to envelope.

    595+,   for a gas or vapor discharge device with a start electrode between
    discharge electrodes.

    601+,   for a gas or vapor discharge device with a start electrode not in
    the main discharge path.


CLS 313/618
TXT Having hollow cathode:

    Subject matter under subclass 567 wherein the electrode is a cathode which
    has at least a portion which is a cavity or is a hollow cylinder.

    (1)     Note.  Crater type glow discharge lamp sources are here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    615,    for a gas or vapor device with a shield between the hollow cathode
    and the anode.

    631+,   for a gas or vapor discharge device having a hollow or tubular
    electrode.


CLS 313/619
TXT Negative or cathode glow device:

    Subject matter under subclass 567 wherein there are two electrodes and the
    electrodes and the electrode spacing are so designed that during the
    operation of the device only the negative or cathode glow portion of the
    discharge will generate visible light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    615,    for a gas or vapor discharge device having a shield between the
    anode and crater type cathode to control the type and the shape of
    electrical discharge.

    618,    for a gas or vapor discharge device having a hollow or crater like
    cathode to confine the luminous electrical discharge to the interior or
    hollow of the cathode.


CLS 313/620
TXT Having specified electrode spacing:

    Subject matter under subclass 567 wherein there are two electrodes spaced
    from each other in terms of, (1) the distance between the electrodes or a
    range of distances between them, or (2) the distance between them stated
    relative to a parameter of the discharge device or an operating parameter
    of the device.

    (1)     Note.  The parameter may be an electrical parameter with respect to
    the spacing of the electrodes or a nonelectrical parameter of the discharge
    device with respect to the spacing of the electrodes.

    (2)     Note.  Included in the parameter are the, (1) gas or vapor pressure
    of the discharge device with respect to the spacing between electrodes or
    the product of the gas or vapor pressure and the spacing between the
    electrodes, and (2) the electrical power to operate the discharge device
    with respect to the electrode spacing or the voltage necessary to operate
    the discharge device with respect to the electrode spacing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    581+,   for a three or more electrode gas or vapor discharge device,
    particularly subclass 602 for an interposed grid like or apertured
    electrode in the discharge space between two other electrodes, the spacing
    between the interposed electrode and another of the electrodes being less
    than the mean free path distance.

    605,    for a gas or vapor discharge device where the distance between
    electrodes is less than the mean free path distance.

    619,    for a gas or vapor discharge device where the spacing between the
    electrodes is such, when operated, to emit visible light only by the
    negative or cathode glow discharge.


CLS 313/621
TXT Having electrodes with geometrical relationship:

    Subject matter under subclass 567 wherein there are two electrodes spaced
    from each other in terms of a geometrical condition.

    (1)     Note.  The geometrical relationship involves the spacing between
    electrodes in terms of being parallel, nonparallel, concentric or other
    spatial relationship.

    (2)     Note.  For classification here, the geometrical relationship must
    be claimed or disclosed.


CLS 313/622
TXT Discharge device with diverse electrodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 567 wherein there are two electrodes which
    differ in their structure or in the material composing the electrodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    581+,   for a gas or vapor discharge device having three or more electrodes
    at least one is different in structure of material from the others.

    609,    for a gas or vapor discharge device where an electrode is exterior
    to the device envelope.

    616,    for a gas or vapor discharge device having a cathode which is
    provided with a positive or other shielding structure.


CLS 313/623
TXT Having electrode lead-in or electrode support sealed to envelope:

    Subject matter under subclass 567 wherein the envelope has an open end and
    means to seal the open end of the envelope which includes and lead-in wire
    or an electrode support sealed to the means to seal the envelope.

    (1)     Note.  Here are also the patents dealing with the sealing of the
    ends of the envelope which are more than a nominal recitation of the seal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for a lamp or discharge device having a temperature modifier for a
    lead-in seal or stem protection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 49 for a process of bonding metal to
    the glass part formed from shapeless mass in a mold cavity, subclasses
    59.1+ for a process of fusion bonding of glass to a metal part and subclass
    154 for an apparatus for fusion bonding glass to metal.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 17.07 for a box
    or housing with a fluid or vacuum of the sealed envelope type and
    subclasses 50.61+ for a box or housing of the sealed envelope type with a
    bonded seal for a conductive member.


CLS 313/624
TXT End cap seal:

    Subject matter under subclass 623 wherein the open end is closed by a
    closure which fits over and about the end of the envelope to seal the
    envelope.


CLS 313/625
TXT End plug seal:

    Subject matter under subclass 623 wherein the open end of the envelope is
    closed by a closure which fits into the open end to seal the envelope.


CLS 313/626
TXT Having lead-in shield:

    Subject matter under subclass 567 having means to shield the lead-in wire
    or a support from an electrode.

    (1)     Note.  The shielding means can be for the purpose of preventing an
    electric discharge from being established between the lead-in wire or
    support and another part of the device or for preventing a deposit of
    sputtered material upon the lead-in wire or supports, or for any other
    shielding purpose.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168,    for liquid electrode discharge device which has an anode and an
    anode lead-in wire in separate anode chambers.

    169,    for a liquid electrode discharge device having plural anodes and a
    shield between the anodes and anode lead-in wires to prevent a discharge
    there between.

    239+,   for devices which are provided with a supporting and/or spacing
    structure for a shield.

    313,    for devices provided with means to distribute or prevent static
    charges or means to prevent deleterious electrical discharges.

    317+,   for devices of this class which include an envelope with lead-in
    conductors.

    590,    for a three or more electrode gas or vapor discharge device having
    a shield to prevent a discharge between two of the electrodes.

    594,    for a three or more electrode gas or vapor device wherein there is
    a grid or other apertured electrode arranged within an anode shield.

    614,    for a discharge device having an anode shield to prevent undesired
    discharges to the anode or anode lead-in.

    616,    for a discharge device having a shield to protect some part of the
    device such as the cathode, from the effects of positive ion bombarment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 50.59 for
    hermetic sealed envelope with lead-in conductors of general utility which
    has shielding means between the lead-in conductors or the joint between the
    envelope and a lead-in conductor.


CLS 313/627
TXT Having electrode heated by space discharge current:

    Subject matter under subclass 567 wherein the electrode is bombarded by a
    charged particle of the ionized gas or vapor which constitutes the
    electrical discharge within the envelope of the tube which is attracted to
    the electrode by an electrical force.

    (1)     Note.  The gas or vapor discharge is not restricted to the
    discharge between the main electrodes of the tube.

    (2)     Note.  All or part of the electrode is of therminonically active
    material.

    (3)     Note.  The discharge may be from electrons or ions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39+,    for a discharge device with a filament or a heated cathode with
    means to modify the temperature of the cathode of filament.

    310,    for a discharge device having a thermionic cathode.

    346+,   for thermionic electrode, per se, and the notes to the other
    subclasses and classes.

    347,    for an electrode which becomes incandescent when subjected to
    electron bombarment.

    558,    for a lamp or discharge device with an electrode which includes or
    is coated with a getter.

    566,    for a lamp or discharge device with a filament or a heated cathode
    electrode which includes or is coated with a vapor generating material.

    567+,   for a gas or vapor discharge device particularly subclasses 591+
    for three or more electrode device having a cathode heater.


CLS 313/628
TXT Coil type:

    Subject matter under subclass 627 wherein at least part of the electrode is
    in the form of a wound spiral.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for a lamp or discharge device having a tubular hollow coil
    electrode with a temperature modifier for the coil.

    344,    for a coiled resistance heated electrode, per se.


CLS 313/629
TXT Having resistance heated cathode:

    Subject matter under subclass 567 wherein the electrode is a cathode and
    the cathode is heated by the passage of electrical current through it or
    indirectly heated by the passage of an electrical current through a
    resistive element.

    (1)     Note.  For a gas or vapor discharge device having an electrode
    heated by a space discharge current, see subclasses 627+.

    (2)     Note.  Subclass 616 includes a cathode shield and a heated
    electrode where the heated electrode when negative is the cathode and the
    shield is used to prevent positive ion bombardment of the electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37+,    for a lamp or discharge device with a temperature modifier for a
    heated cathode.

    310,    for other discharge devices which have a directly heated cathode or
    an indirectly heated cathode.

    337+,   for an indirectly heated cathode, per se.

    341+,   for a resistance heated cathode, per se.

    591+,   for three or more electrode gas or vapor discharge device having a
    heated cathode.

    616,    for a positive ion or cathode electrode shield.

    627+,   for an electrode heated by space discharge current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 94+ for
    systems for supplying electrical energy to the cathode or cathode heater of
    a discharge device.


CLS 313/630
TXT Having electrode of alkali, alkaline or rare earth material:

    Subject matter under subclass 567 wherein the electrode includes within the
    envelope, structure or a material containing an alkali, alkaline or a rare
    earth as an element or in compound form.

    (1)     Note.  If composite electrode structure is an electron emissive
    material coated or laminated electrode, see subclass 631.

    (2)     Note.  See the "SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS" notes in subclass 631.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    326+,   for a discharge device electrode, particularly subclasses 337+ for
    a indirectly heated cathode, subclasses 341+ for a resistance heated
    cathode and 346 for cathode containing and/or coated with an electron
    emissive material.

    591+,   for a three or more electrode gas or vapor discharge device having
    a cathode heater.

    618,    for a gas or vapor discharge device having a hollow cathode.

    631,    for an electron emissive coated or laminated electrode.

    636+,   for a gas or vapor discharge device having an electrode heated by
    space discharge current.

    639,    for a space discharge device having a resistance heated cathode.


CLS 313/631
TXT Having particular electrode structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 567 wherein the structure of an electrode is
    significantly recited.

    (1)     Note.  See the general class notes, "XI, section 3", for an
    electrode combined with connector structure and "XIV" for an electrode/or
    shield.

    (2)     Note.  An electrode, per se, is not here.  See subclasses 326+ for
    an electrode, per se.

    (3)     Note.  A gas or vapor lamp containing a coated electrode is here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5+,     for a plural unit lamp or discharge device having at least a
    discharge device with a control unit.

    16,     for a liquid electrode with an electric heater.

    30+,    for a hollow electrode with temperature modifier.

    39+,    for an electrode with a temperature modifier within an envelope.

    146+,   for a discharge device with movable electrode.

    155,    for a lamp or discharge device with a magnetic device where an
    electrode generates a magnetic field.

    163+,   for liquid electrode discharge device.

    238+,   for a lamp or discharge device with support and/or spacing
    structure for an electrode.

    326+,   for an electrode structure for a lamp or discharge device.

    523+,   for photosensitive device having a photosensitive electrode and
    subclasses 543+ for photocathode, per se.

    558,    for a lamp or discharge device where an electrode includes a
    getter, supports a getter or is connected to a getter.

    566,    for a lamp or discharge device having a vapor generator having an
    electrode with vapor generating material.

    574+,   for a gas or vapor discharge device having a particular total or
    partial gas or vapor pressure.

    581+,   for a gas or vapor, three or more electrode, discharge device,
    particularly 591+ for a device with a cathode heater with or without a
    control electrode, subclasses 595+ for a start electrode between discharge
    electrodes and subclasses 601+ for start electrode not in main discharge
    path.

    607,    for a gas or vapor discharge device with an electrode exterior on
    the outside of the envelope.

    608,    for a single electrode type gas or vapor discharge device.

    621,    for a gas or vapor discharge device having a hallow cathode.

    627+,   for a gas or vapor discharge device having an electrode heated by
    space discharge current.

    629,    for a gas or vapor discharge device having a resistance heated
    cathode.

    630,    for a gas or vapor discharge device having an electrode of alkali;
    alkaline or rare earth material in structure or composition form.


CLS 313/632
TXT Cathode or anode:

    Subject matter under subclass 631 wherein the electrode is a cathode or an
    anode.

    (1)     Note.  Included are lamps or discharge devices of the gas or vapor
    type which operate on direct current or pulsating current in one direction,
    for example, a flash tube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    633,    for an electrode composition used in a discharge device.


CLS 313/633
TXT Electrode composition:

    Subject matter under subclass 567 wherein the composition of an electrode
    is significantly recited.

    (1)     Note.  See section XIV, 2 of the class definition. Patents
    disclosing electrode compositions or materials for use in gas or vapor
    lamps or discharge devices are discussed in this section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    311,    for a discharge device having an electrode of particular material.
    Also, see the subclasses specified in the notes for discharge devices
    having an electrode defined by composition or material.

    558,    for an electrode which includes a getter or is coated with a getter
    material.

    566,    for an electrode which includes a vapor generating material or is
    coated with a vapor generating material.

    627+,   for thermionic cathodes which are formed or coated with a
    particular composition.

    629,    for resistance heated cathodes which include a particular
    composition.

    630,    for an electrode which includes alkali, alkaline or rare earth
    material.

    634+,   for an electrode having particular structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 500+ for electrically conductive or
    emissive compositions.


CLS 313/634
TXT Envelope with particular structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 567 wherein a structural detail of the
    envelope is significantly recited.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25+,    for means in the space between the envelope walls for modifying the
    temperature of the lamp or discharge device.

    33,     for an envelope provided with an internal temperature modifying
    baffle.

    34,     for an envelope provided with a condensing chamber or surface to
    cool the gas or vapor within the envelope.

    44,     for means to modify the temperature of the device (e.g., heat
    radiating means, etc.).

    110+,   for optical means (e.g., lens, etc.) to modify the ray energy
    passing through the envelope wall, see subclass 112 where the optical means
    is a polarizer, or filter, subclass 113 where the optical means is a
    reflector, subclass 116 where the envelope wall is light diffusing, and
    subclass 117 where the optical means is a light valve or light obscuring
    means.

    168,    for liquid electrode (e.g., mercury) discharge devices having a
    plurality of anodes, the envelope being provided with separate anode
    chambers.

    317,    for a lamp or discharge device envelope with an electrode or
    filament or where there is some significance in the use of the envelope in
    a lamp or discharge device.

    515,    for a lamp or discharge device with character display having a
    character shaped envelope.

    547,    for valve means for introducing a gas or vapor into or withdrawing
    a gas or vapor from the envelope.

    567,    for a lamp of discharge device envelope with a gas or vapor.

    577,    for a lamp or discharge device having particular total or partial
    gas or vapor pressure having an envelope detail.

    609+,   for a discharge device having a baffle, partition or constricting
    means affecting discharge.

    623+,   for discharge device having lead-in wire, electrode support or
    electrode sealed to envelope including envelope end seals.

    636,    for envelope compositions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 17+ for boxes
    and housings filled with a fluid and subclasses 50+ for boxes and housings
    with electrical features not restricted for use in a lamp or discharge
    device.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 0.6+ for gas containers.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 2.1+ for an envelope of an electric lamp or
    similar device.


CLS 313/635
TXT Envelope layer or coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 634 wherein the envelope has a coating or
    layer on the internal or external surface of the envelope.

    (1)     Note.  The covering is considered structure. If the coating is used
    as an electrode see the electrode subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  A glaze on the inside or the outside of the envelope is
    considered structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 50 for vacuum or fluid pressure chamber
    type coating apparatus and subclasses 620+ for coating apparatus using
    means to apply electrical and/or radiant energy to work and/or coating
    material.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    99+ for methods of making an optically transparent sandwich.

    427,    Coating Processes, 106+ for processes for coating a hollow
    electrical article or the product produced.


CLS 313/636
TXT Envelope composition:

    Subject matter under subclass 567 wherein the composition of the envelope
    is significantly recited.

    (1)     Note.  Here discharge devices including lamps and electronic
    devices are classified.

    (2)     Note. Envelopes defined only by composition will be found in the
    appropriate composition class.  See section XII, part 4 of the class
    definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, subclass 54 for a glass composition
    containing greater than ninety per cent silica.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110+,   for a special ray transmissive envelope formed of a specific
    composition having optical properties, particularly subclass 112 where the
    envelope wall includes a polarizing composition or a light filtering
    material, subclasses 113+ wherein the envelope has material which has light
    reflecting properties, subclass 116 wherein the envelope has light
    diffusing material and subclass 117 wherein the envelope has material with
    light valve properties or light obscuring properties.

    317,    for an envelope of the lamp or discharge device with electrical
    lamp or discharge device structure or there is some significance in the use
    of the envelope in a lamp or discharge device.

    480,    for an envelope composition of a cathode-ray tube.


CLS 313/637
TXT With particular gas or vapor:

    Subject matter under subclass 567 wherein the gas or vapor within the
    envelope is defined in terms of its composition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161,    for a lamp or discharge device with magnetic device and a gas or
    vapor within lamp or device.

    481,    for a cathode-ray tube having a gas therein.

    484+,   for a lamp or discharge device having a luminescent solid or liquid
    and a gaseous discharge medium.

    515+,   for a lamp or discharge device with character display and a gaseous
    discharge medium.

    538,    for a gas phototube.

    545,    for a lamp or discharge device with a valve and gas or vapor
    generating material.

    546,    for a lamp or discharge device with a frangible capsule containing
    gas or vapor generating material.

    547+,   for a lamp or discharge device with heating means to control gas or
    vapor or gas or vapor generating means.

    563,    for a lamp or discharge device with gas generating material.

    564+,   for a lamp or discharge device with vapor generating material.

    568+,   for a lamp or discharge device having a particular total or partial
    gas or vapor pressure.

    580,    for incandescent lamp having a tungsten-halogen cycle.

    595+,   for a three or more electrode device having a gas or vapor and a
    heated cathode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 372+ for gaseous compositions and the
    processes for making them.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 210+ for modifying or
    removing component of normally gaseous mixture and subclass 262 for an
    inert or noble gas or compound thereof, subclasses 351+ for nitrogen or
    compound thereof, subclasses 414+ for carbon or compound thereof and
    subclasses 644+ for nitrogen or compound thereof.


CLS 313/638
TXT With metal vapor:

    Subject matter under subclass 637 wherein the composition includes a metal
    vapor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 155+ for an alkaline
    earth metal, subclasses 179+ for an alkali metal, compound, subclasses 99+
    for mercury containing compound, and subclass 263 for rare earth compound.


CLS 313/639
TXT Mercury vapor:

    Subject matter under subclass 638 wherein the composition of the vapor
    includes mercury vapor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150,    for a discharge device having a movable liquid mercury electrode.

    163+,   for a discharge device having a liquid mercury electrode.


CLS 313/640
TXT And rare earth metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 639 wherein a rare earth metal is included in
    the composition.

    (1)     Note.  The "rare earth" element are metallic in character.

    (2)     Note.  Misch metal is an alloy of iron with mixture of rare earth
    metals.

    (3)     Note.  The "rare earth" elements include the atomic numbers from 57
    to 71.


CLS 313/641
TXT With rare gas:

    Subject matter under subclass 640 wherein the composition includes a rare
    gas.


CLS 313/642
TXT And rare gas:

    Subject matter under subclass 639 wherein the composition includes a rare
    gas.


CLS 313/643
TXT One or more rare gases:

    Subject matter under subclass 637 wherein the composition includes at least
    one noble gas.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the patents includes a mixture of noble gases or gas
    of the noble type and another type gas.

    (2)     Note.  The noble "gases" are helium, neon, argon, krypton and xenon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclass 262 for an inert or
    noble gas or compound thereof.


CLS 314/
TTL ELECTRIC LAMP AND DISCHARGE DEVICES:  CONSUMABLE  ELECTRODES

CLS 314/
TXT Electric space discharge devices having at least one electrode formed of
    and/or containing a solid material which is consumed during the operation
    of the discharge device, and such devices in combination with a current
    supply system therefor.

    (1)     Note.  Most of the discharge devices in this class are provided
    with means to feed the electrodes of the discharge device together so as to
    compensate for the consumption of the consumable electrode and to maintain
    the proper distance for the space discharge between the electrode, the
    feeding being intermittent or continuous.

    (2)     Note.  This class does not provide for electric space discharge
    devices with mechanisms for bringing together and separating the electrodes
    of a discharge device merely to initiate the discharge unless the claims
    are limited by claimed subject matter to discharge device of the consumable
    electrode type.  For discharge devices, per se, electrodes together and
    then separating them so as to initiate the discharge, search Class 313,
    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 146+. Search Class 315,
    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclasses 327+ for systems
    where the discharge device is not a consumable electrode discharge device
    and the system includes means to bring the electrodes together and then to
    separate them to initiate the discharge.

    (3)     Note.  Patents claiming an "arc discharge device" or an "arc lamp",
    or arc discharge device circuits, or arc lamp circuits, and are not
    classified in this class unless the claims are limited by claimed subject
    matter to discharge devices of the consumable electrode type.

    For arc lamps, arc discharge devices, and methods and apparatus for
    utilizing arc discharge devices for treating materials, objects or spaces,
    see "SEARCH CLASS" below.

    (4)     Note.  This class does not provide for electrical systems including
    a consumable electrode discharge device and another device which is not a
    discharge device or lamp, such systems being classified in Class 307,
    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 155+, or in
    the class which provides for the particular art to which they relate,
    except that this class does provide in subclasses 13 and 14 for systems
    wherein an impedance is substituted in the circuit for the consumable
    electrode device when the consumable electrode device is removed from the
    circuit, and provides in subclasses 115 and 135 for systems wherein an
    impedance is included in the circuit of the discharge device when the sole
    function of the impedance is to regulate the current flow to the consumable
    electrode discharge device.

    (5)     Note.  The line between this class and other classes is as follows:



            This class does not take methods or apparatus for utilizing
    consumable electrode space discharge devices for treating materials or
    objects, or for apparatus or methods where the consumable electrode
    discharge device is utilized to generate ray energy, such as ultra violet
    light, for treating materials or objects.  For such methods and apparatus,
    see "SEARCH CLASS" below.  This class does take all patents claiming merely
    means for feeding the consumable electrode to compensate for the
    consumption of the electrode even though the electrode is disclosed as
    being for a particular art device, such as an electric furnace or arc
    welding or heating device.  Merely naming one of the electrodes as a
    particular material or object broadly defined, such as "the work to be
    welded and/or heated," will not exclude the patent from this class provided
    the claims are directly only to the feeding means for the consumable
    electrode.



            This class does not take electrical systems which are provided with
    a consumable electrode discharge device for controlling and/or modifying
    the current and/or potential supplied to a load device other than a
    consumable electrode discharge device. For such systems search the
    appropriate electrical system class.



            This class does not include illumination devices provided with
    consumable electrode discharge device lamps.  Such illumination devices are
    classified in Class 362, Illumination; see "search class" below for the
    subclasses in Class 362 which provide for such illumination devices.

    (6)     Note.  This class, except in subclass 60, does not provide for
    electrodes, per se, for consumable electrode discharge devices nor for the
    electrode holders, clamps, or electrodes where the structure claimed is not
    limited by claimed subject matter to use with consumable electrode
    discharge devices provided with means for feeding the electrodes to
    compensate for the consumption of the electrode.  Class 373, Industrial
    Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 67+ and 88+, provides for arc furnace
    electrodes, Class 219, Electric Heating, subclasses 121.11+, for arc
    welding electrodes, and Class 313, Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices,
    subclasses 326+ for miscellaneous discharge devices electrode structure.
    See subclass 357 for rod-like electrodes of the type usually used with
    consumable electrode discharge devices.  Note that Class 252, subclass 500,
    and the classes specified in the Notes thereto, provides for the materials
    for use for making discharge device electrodes and for discharge device
    electrodes which are defined only by the material of which they are
    composed.  See section XI, 3 of the class definition of Class 313 for the
    classification of electrodes for discharge devices which are provided with
    electrical connector structure.

    (7)     Note.  For electric systems for supplying electric current and/or
    potential to electric lamps and discharge devices other than consumable
    electrode discharge devices, search classes:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, appropriate
    subclasses, for all such supply systems for electric lamp and for such
    supply systems for electric space discharger devices of the gas or vapor
    ionization type, including arc and spark devices.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems appropriate subclasses for  miscellaneous electric space discharge
    systems not otherwise classified.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 50+, especially 121.11+, for electric
    arc welding and heating apparatus provided with consumable electrodes.
    Class 219 provides for all patents which are limited by claimed subject
    matter to electric arc welding and/or heating, including, for example, such
    patents as claim means for holding, handling, feeding, and/or moving the
    work which is to be welded and/or heated.  Class 219 also provides for all
    hand held tools for holding an electrode, such as are used in manual
    welding.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 281+ for methods and apparatus for the
    ionic separation or analysis of materials wherein the material maybe
    ionized by subjecting the material to electronic or ionic bombardment,
    subclass 306 for method and apparatus to inspect solid or liquid materials
    by charged particles, subclass 324 for methods and apparatus to corona
    irradiate materials, subclasses 440.11+ for object supports to irradiate
    objects by charged particles in a vacuum and subclasses 492.1+ to irradiate
    objects or materials generally.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses for arc
    lamps and electric space discharge devices other than the consumable
    electrode type.  Class 313, subclasses 238, 243, 267 and 268 provide for
    the supporting and spacing structure for electrodes for arc lamps which are
    not within a sealed envelope.  Subclass 325 of Class 313 also contains many
    patents for arc discharge devices which are not within a sealed casing or
    envelope.  See (2) note above for the subclasses in class 313 which provide
    for discharge devices with movable electrodes, and (6) note above for the
    subclasses in Class 313 which provide for the electrodes for discharge
    devices.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    220-354 for systems for controlling voltage or current in a single circuit.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 78 and 126 for oscillator systems utilizing
    gaseous space discharge devices, particularly subclass 127, indented under
    subclass 126, wherein the space discharge device is of the spark or open
    arc type.

    362,    Illumination, appropriate subclasses, for arc lamps provided with
    means to modify and/or distribute the illumination, and/or with protective
    means, such as casings, globes, or guards, and for the supports and holders
    for arc lamps.  Particular reference is made to the following subclasses:

    Subclass 20 for automatic substitution of light sources, one of which may
    be of the carbon arc type.

    Subclass 210 for plural, carbon arc-type light sources.

    Subclass 228 for plural light sources, one of which may be of the carbon
    arc type.

    Subclasses 261+ for carbon arc-type light source combined with a light
    modifier.

    Subclasses 362+ for housings for carbon arc-type light sources.

    Subclass 376 for guard means for carbon arc-type light sources.

    Subclass 416 for arc lamp hangers.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 67+, for electric
    arc furnaces provided with consumable electrodes.


CLS 314/1
TXT Subject matter under the class definition having (1) two or more discharge
    devices, at least one of which is of the consumable electrode type, or (2)
    a consumable electrode device and a lamp, or (3) a consumable electrode
    discharge device having a plurality of cathodes and/or anodes, and provided
    with means for operating one of the discharge devices, lamps, or one of the
    cathodes and/or anodes and its corresponding electrode while the other
    discharge device, lamp or electrode is maintained in a nonoperative
    condition until the first operated device or electrode fails, either
    through consumption of the electrode, or some other condition rendering it
    inoperative, and having means provided which operate automatically in
    response to either the failure of the first operated device or electrodes,
    or the consumption of the electrode in the consumable electrode device, to
    place the other device or electrodes in operative condition whereby such
    other device or electrodes are substituted for the first operated device or
    electrodes.

    (1)     Note.  The device or electrodes which are substituted for the first
    operated device or electrodes need not be in the same electrical circuit,
    and the substitution may be made for the purpose of maintaining a
    discharge, or maintaining the light, or maintaining a load in the circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for discharge devices and systems under the class definition
    provided with a signaling means, or alarm means to indicate some condition
    in the discharge device.

    10      and indented subclasses, for discharge devices and systems under
    the class definition provided with automatically operating means to
    complete an electrical circuit in shunt about the discharge device or some
    part thereof, and/or to open the electric circuit of the discharge device
    or some part thereof, such means being automatically operated in response
    to some condition of the discharge device which prevents further operation
    of the discharge device in the normal manner.

    34,     for discharge devices under the class definition and the current
    supply systems therefor wherein the discharge device is provided with at
    least two principal electrodes and an auxiliary starting electrode, the
    discharge being initiated between one of the principal electrodes and the
    starting electrode, the discharge being then transferred to the other
    principal electrode and maintained only between the principal electrodes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 236, for
    miscellaneous space discharge devices which are provided with a spare
    electrode to be used in place of a defective electrode, and subclass 237
    for miscellaneous discharge devices which are especially designed so that a
    defective electrode may be replaced or especially designed to be readily
    taken apart so that they may be repaired.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 87 and
    subclass 88, for miscellaneous current supply systems for electric lamps
    and/or electric space discharge devices other than consumable electrode
    discharge devices, the system being provided with automatically operated
    means for substituting another lamp, discharge device, or electrode when
    the first operated lamp, discharge device, or electrode fails to operate
    properly.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 20, for lanterns designed to use a plurality
    of light sources, one of which may be an arc lamp, and provided with means
    for automatically substituting another light source in event the first
    operated light source is destroyed or extinguished.


CLS 314/2
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 having an electric switch which is
    automatically operated in response to the failure of the first operated
    discharge device, lamp or electrodes to complete the circuit to the second
    operated device or electrodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     16 and 17 and indented subclasses, for discharge devices, and
    systems under the class definition provided with an automatically operated
    electric switch means for completing an electrical circuit in shunt about
    the discharge device or some part thereof, and/or to open the electric
    circuit of the discharge device or some part thereof, such switch means
    being automatically operated in response to some condition of the discharge
    device which prevents further normal operation of the discharge device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses,
    for electric switches of general application especially subclass 47, for
    limit switches.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 93, for
    miscellaneous electric lamp and/or electric space discharge device systems
    which are provided with an automatically operating electric switch for
    substituting another lamp, discharge device, or electrode when the first
    operated lamp, discharge device or electrode fails to operate properly.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 2 for electromagnetically actuated switches.


CLS 314/3
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 having (1) two or more consumable electrode
    discharge devices, or (2) a consumable electrode discharge device having a
    plurality of cathodes and/or anodes included in the same circuit, wherein
    the separating mechanism for the movable electrodes operates to separate
    the movable electrodes from the other electrodes either (1) simultaneously,
    or (2) one of the movable electrodes is separated from its other electrode
    an instant before the other movable electrode is separated from its other
    electrode, so that the discharge is maintained only between one of the
    movable electrodes and the other electrode due to the difference in
    impedance in the two branch circuits containing the respective discharge
    devices or electrodes.


CLS 314/4
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a consumable electrode discharge
    device is provided with a plurality of cathodes and/or anodes, two or more
    of the electrodes being movable, the movable electrodes being operated by
    means of the same motive power means.

    (1)     Note.  In most of the devices in this subclass, one of the movable
    electrodes is held stationary while the first operated electrode is fed to
    the discharge, and means are provided for automatically releasing the
    stationary electrode so that it may be actuated by the feed regulating
    mechanism when the first operated electrode is consumed or fails to operate.

    (2)     Note.  Continue the search in subclass 3 of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for miscellaneous discharge devices and systems under the class
    definition wherein the discharge device is provided with two or more
    anodes, and has two or more movable electrodes connected together by
    mechanical means so that these movable electrodes are moved by the same
    motive power means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 2, for mechanisms for
    releasing or tripping mechanisms of general application.


CLS 314/5
TXT Subject matter under subclass 4 provided with a receptacle for containing
    and storing at least one electrode in addition to the electrode which is to
    be first operated, with means for delivering an electrode from the storage
    container to the proper position in the discharge device to be used as the
    electrode for the discharge device when the electrode which has therebefore
    been maintaining the discharge has been wholly or partially consumed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for article dispensing
    devices not otherwise provided for, including devices for dispensing
    cylindrical articles such as rod shaped electrodes.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 45 and 72 for article
    retaining magazines having article removal facilitating means, for holding
    cylindrical articles such as rod-shaped electrodes and making them
    available for removal therefrom.


CLS 314/6
TXT Subject matter under subclass 4 wherein an electro-responsive device, which
    is automatically operated in response to the failure of the first operated
    electrode, is used to place the second operated electrode in operative
    condition.

    (1)     Note.  Continue the search in subclass 2 of this class.


CLS 314/7
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein (1) two or more
    consumable electrode discharge devices, or (2) a consumable electrode
    discharge device and another type, of electric space discharge device or
    lamp are claimed.

    (1)     Note.  To be classified in this subclass or the indented subclasses
    as plural consumable electrode-type discharge devices there must be
    provided a cathode, an anode, and a separate electrode separating and
    feeding mechanism for each consumable electrode discharge device, although
    the electrode separating and/or feeding mechanism of one device, may be
    influenced by the voltage and/or current flow in the other device.  The
    plurality of discharge devices may be mounted in a single frame.

            Where there are a plurality of cathodes and/or anodes, and only a
    single electrode cooperating with the plural cathodes or anodes, the patent
    is classified as a single device in subclass 36 and indented subclasses of
    this class, even though there is a plurality of movable electrodes each of
    which is actuated by a separate electrode feed regulating mechanism.

    (2)     Note.  For electrical systems for supplying electric current to two
    or more lamps or discharge devices other than consumable electrode devices,
    search classes:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclass 312 and the
    subclasses specified in the notes to the definition of those subclasses,
    for all such supply systems for a plurality of electric lamps and for such
    supply systems for a plurality of electric space discharge devices of the
    gas or vapor ionization type, note especially indented subclass 324, where
    there are a plurality of discharge devices.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 530+ for miscellaneous circuits with specific source of
    supply or bias voltage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1       and indented subclasses, for plural consumable electrode discharge
    devices, or for a consumable electrode discharge device and another type of
    discharge device or lamp, provided with means for operating one of the
    discharge devices or lamps while the other device or lamp is maintained in
    nonoperative condition until the first operated device or lamp fails and
    then automatically substituting the second device or lamp for the first
    operated device or lamp.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 1, for miscellaneous
    structures which include either a plurality of lamps or a plurality of
    discharge devices integrally combined in a single unitary structure or
    which include a discharge device and an electric lamp integrally combined
    in a single unitary structure.

    362,    Illumination, appropriate subclasses, especially subclass 210 for
    plural carbon arc-type light sources, and subclasses 228+ for plural light
    sources, one of which may be of the carbon arc type.


CLS 314/8
TXT Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein two or more of the discharge
    devices are connected in series relation in the circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for discharge devices and systems under the class definition
    wherein the discharge device is provided with three or more electrodes
    connected in electrical series relation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, and appropriate subclasses, for miscellaneous
    systems not otherwise classified, which include a plurality of series
    connected discharge devices.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 179 and
    indented subclasses, subclass 185 and indented subclasses, and the
    subclasses specified in the notes to the definitions of those subclasses,
    for miscellaneous systems for supplying electric current to series
    connected electric lamps and/or electric space discharge devices of the gas
    or vapor ionization type.


CLS 314/9
TXT Subject matter under the class definition provided with signaling means, or
    indicator means, or alarm means operated by some part of the consumable
    electrode discharge device or the electrical circuits therefor to indicate
    some condition in the discharge device.

    (1)     Note.  The condition indicated may be the amount of consumption of
    the electrodes or the time that the discharge device has been operated, or
    the degree of heat of some part of the discharge device, or any other
    desired condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1       and indented subclasses, for systems including (1) a consumable
    electrode discharge device and another device or lamp, or (2) a consumable
    electrode discharge device having a plurality of cathodes and/or anodes,
    and provided with means for automatically substituting for (a) the
    consumable electrode discharge device the other discharge device or lamp,
    or (b) the first operated electrode another electrode, when the first
    operated device or electrode fails to maintain the discharge or is
    extinguished.

    10      and indented subclasses, for discharge devices and systems under
    the class definition provided with automatically operating means to
    complete an electrical circuit in shunt about the discharge device or some
    part thereof, and/or to open the electric circuit of the discharge device
    or some part thereof, such means being automatically operated in response
    to some condition of the discharge device which prevents further operation
    of the discharge device in the normal manner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclasses, for nonelectrical
    signals and indicators of general application.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 120 and
    subclass 129, and its indented subclasses, for miscellaneous systems for
    supplying electric current to electric lamps and/or electric space
    discharge devices of the gas or vapor ionization type, the system including
    signal means, indicator means, or alarm means for indicating some condition
    affecting the operation of the system.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+ for electric signaling
    and alarm systems automatically responsive to a condition.


CLS 314/10
TXT Subject matter under the class definition provided with means to complete
    an electrical in shunt about the discharge device or some part thereof,
    and/or to open the electric circuit of the discharge device or some part
    thereof, such means being automatically operated (1) when the electrodes
    have been consumed, or (2) when the feed regulating mechanism fails to feed
    the feeding electrode, or (3) when an electrode is broken and/or becomes
    nonconductive, or (4) when the supply voltage becomes either too high or
    too low for the proper operation of the discharge device, or (5) after the
    electrodes have been in operation for a predetermined time.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes discharge devices having means on the
    electrode and/or the electrode holding rod or mechanism for preventing
    further feeding of the feeding electrode when the feeding electrode has
    been consumed to a predetermined extent thereby opening the electrical
    circuit by keeping the electrodes too far apart to maintain an electrical
    discharge between them.

    (2)     Note.  In many of the devices in this subclass the shunt circuit is
    placed about only the regulating mechanism, such as the magnet coils, or
    only the circuit to the regulating mechanism is open circuited, the circuit
    to the electrodes being maintained, the electrodes being permitted either
    to come into contact and thereby establish a short circuit, or to maintain
    the discharge until the electrodes have been consumed to such an extent
    that the electrodes are spaced too far apart to maintain the discharge
    between them, thereby opening the circuit through the discharge device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1       and indented subclasses, for systems including (1) a consumable
    electrode discharge device and another electric discharge device or lamp,
    or (2) a consumable electrode discharge device having a plurality of
    cathodes and/or anodes, and provided with means for automatically
    substituting for (a) the consumable electrode discharge device the other
    discharge device or lamp, or (b) the first operated electrode another
    electrode, when the first operated device or electrode fails to maintain
    the discharge or is extinguished.

    9,      for discharge devices and systems under the class definition
    provided with signaling means, indicating means and/or alarm means operated
    by some means responsive to a condition of the discharge device to indicate
    such condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 65 and
    119, and its indented subclasses for miscellaneous systems for supplying
    electric current to electric lamps and/or electric space discharge devices
    of the gas or vapor ionization type, the system being provided with
    automatically operated shunt-circuit closing or cut-out means for the lamp
    or discharge device.


CLS 314/11
TXT Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein an electrical circuit in shunt is
    completed about the discharge device or some part thereof.

    (1)     Note.  In many of the devices in this subclass the shunt circuit is
    placed about only the regulating mechanism, such as the magnet coils.

    (2)     Note.  The shunt circuit is usually of lower resistance than the
    resistance of the discharge device and/or the part around which it is
    completed and is often a "short circuit", but it may be of higher
    resistance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 75, and
    subclass 125 and indented subclass, for miscellaneous systems for supplying
    electric current to electric lamps and/or electric space discharge devices
    or the gas or vapor ionization type, the system being provided with
    automatically operated shunt-circuit closing means for the lamp or
    discharge device.


CLS 314/12
TXT Subject matter under subclass 11 having the feed regulating mechanism
    operated and/or controlled by electromagnetic means, the coil of one of the
    electromagnets, of the feed regulating mechanism being included in the
    shunt circuit when it is completed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113     and indented subclasses, for electro-magnetically operated and/or
    controlled feed mechanism for consumable electrode discharge devices.


CLS 314/13
TXT Subject matter under subclass 11 provided with an electrical impedance in
    the shunt circuit.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes arrangements wherein an
    electroresponsive switch, such as an electromagnetic or thermostatic
    switch, is included in the shunt circuit, and the switch actuating means,
    such as the coil or the heater for the thermostat, is included in the shunt
    circuit so as to hold the switch in operated condition as long as the
    supply voltage is maintained.

    (2)     Note.  Continue the search in subclass 12 of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      3, 4 and 6, for systems including (1) a consumable electrode
    discharge device and another electric discharge device or lamp, or (2) a
    consumable electric discharge device having a plurality of cathodes and/or
    anodes, and provided with means for automatically substituting for (a) the
    consumable electrode discharge device the other discharge device or lamp,
    or (b) for the first operated electrode another electrode, when the first
    operated device or electrode fails to maintain the discharge or is
    extinguished, the substituted device or electrode being placed in shunt to
    the first operated device or electrode.


CLS 314/14
TXT Subject matter under subclass 13 having the feed regulating mechanism
    operated by electro-responsive means, such as an electromagnet, and having
    the switch which completes the shunt circuit actuated by the movement of
    the feed regulating mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  Continue the search in subclass 12 of this class.

    (2)     Note.  In most of the devices in this subclass, the feed regulating
    mechanism is given an abnormal movement when the electrodes are either
    consumed or fail to feed, and the abnormal movement of the feed regulating
    mechanism is utilized to operate the shunt circuit completing switch to its
    circuit completing position.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass does not include discharge devices having the
    switch operated by means of a cam, projection, detent or other means
    carried by the electrode rod, or electrode supporting means, or some other
    part of the discharge device which moves in relation to the movement of the
    electrode so that the switch is operated only when the electrode has been
    moved to a predetermined position.  Discharge devices having only this type
    of shunt switch operation to complete the circuit through the shunt
    impedance are in subclass 13.


CLS 314/15
TXT Subject matter under subclass 11 wherein the switch which completes the
    shunt circuit is an electroresponsive switch operated by means of voltage
    and/or current changes in the circuit of the discharge device.

    (1)     Note.  Continue the search in subclasses 13 and 14 of this class.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not include discharge devices having the
    switch operated by means of a cam, projection, detent or other means
    carried by the electrode rod or electrode supporting means, or some other
    part of the discharge device which moves in relation to the movement of the
    electrode, so that the switch is operated only when the electrode has been
    moved to a predetermined position. Discharge devices having only this type
    of shunt switch operation are in subclass 11 or in indented subclasses 12
    and 13.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 2 for electromagnetic responsive switches of
    general application.

    337,    Electricity: Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    appropriate subclasses of electrothermally actuated switches of general
    application.


CLS 314/16
TXT Subject matter under subclass 15 having the feed regulating mechanism
    operated by the electro-responsive means, such as an electromagnet, and
    having the shunt circuit switch actuated by the movement of the feed
    regulating mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  Continue the search in subclasses 12 and 14 of this class.

    (2)     Note.  In most of the devices in this subclass, the feed regulating
    mechanism is given an abnormal movement when the electrodes are either
    consumed or fail to feed, and this abnormal movement is utilized to operate
    the shunt circuit switch.


CLS 314/17
TXT Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein an electric switch is actuated to
    control the circuit of the discharge device.

    (1)     Note.  Continue the search in subclass 11 and indented subclasses
    of this class, for similar shunt circuit closing combinations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for systems including (1) a consumable electrode discharge device
    and another electric discharge device or lamp, or (2) a consumable
    electrode discharge device having a plurality of cathodes and/or anodes,
    and provided with automatically operated electric switch means for
    substituting for (a) the consumable electrode discharge device the other
    discharge device or lamp, or (b) the first operated electrode another
    electrode, when the first operated device fails to maintain the discharge
    or is extinguished.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses,
    for electric switches of general application.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 74 and
    indented subclass and subclass 127 and indented subclass, for miscellaneous
    systems for supplying electric current to electric lamps and/or electric
    space discharge devices of the gas or vapor ionization type, the system
    being provided with an automatically operated electric switch for
    completing a shunt circuit about or opening, the circuit of the lamp or
    discharge device.


CLS 314/18
TXT Subject matter under subclass 17 wherein the switch is an electroresponsive
    switch operated by means of voltage and/or current changes in the circuit
    of the discharge device.

    (1)     Note.  Continue the search in subclasses 12, 13, 14, 15 and 16 of
    this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 2 for electromagnetic responsive switches of
    general application.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    appropriate subclasses for electrothermally actuated switches of general
    application.


CLS 314/19
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 having the feed regulating mechanism
    operated by electro-responsive means, such as an electromagnet, and having
    the switch actuated by the movement of the feed regulating mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  Continue the search in subclasses 12, 14 and 16 of this
    class.

    (2)     Note.  In most of the devices in this subclass, the feed regulating
    mechanism is given an abnormal movement when the electrodes are either
    consumed or fail to feed, and the abnormal movement is utilized to operate
    the switch.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass does not include discharge devices having the
    switch operated by means of a cam, projection, detent or other means
    carried by the electrode rod or electrode supporting means, or some other
    part of the discharge device which moves in relation to the movement of the
    electrode, so that the switch is operated only when the electrode has been
    moved to a predetermined position. Discharge devices having only this type
    of switch operation are in subclass 17.


CLS 314/20
TXT Subject matter under the class definition provided with means for
    deflecting the electric discharge which is formed between the electrodes
    from the path the discharge would normally occupy in the absence of the
    deflecting means.

    (1)     Note.  In most of the patents in this subclass an electromagnet is
    positioned adjacent the discharge area between the electrodes, and the
    magnetic lines of force of the electromagnet cause the discharge to be
    deflected from the path the discharge would occupy in the absence of the
    electromagnet, but this subclass also includes patents wherein the
    deflecting means is means for directing a jet of gas towards the discharge,
    or other means for deflecting the discharge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for consumable electrode discharge devices provided with means to
    feed an initially fluent material to the discharge.

    28,     for consumable electrode discharge devices provided with a
    ventilator, fume director and/or condenser.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 153, for
    miscellaneous discharge devices which are provided with an electromagnet
    for deflecting the space discharge, and subclasses 231.01+ for
    miscellaneous discharge devices which are provided with means for directing
    a jet of fluent material towards the discharge for deflecting the space
    discharge.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, for miscellaneous
    systems for supplying electric current and/or potential to electric space
    discharge devices including electric space discharge lamps, the discharge
    device being provided with means for deflecting the discharge from the path
    it would normally occupy, subclasses 111.01+, where the deflecting means is
    a jet of gas or other fluent material, subclass 267 and subclass 344, where
    the deflecting means is an electromagnet.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 64 and 107, for
    electric arc furnaces provided with means for deflecting the arc from its
    normal path.


CLS 314/21
TXT Subject matter under the class definition provided with means to supply a
    material to the discharge area between the electrodes, the material being
    either a fluent material and/or designed to be converted to a fluent
    material by the heat of the discharge.

    (1)     Note.  The material may be a material (1) which is consumed by
    combustion in the discharge and/or (2) which is heated by the discharge and
    which converts such heat into radiant energy rays such as light, and/or (3)
    to facilitate the flow of discharge current between the electrodes, and/or
    (4) which is a flux, and/or (5) to retard oxidation or combustion.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes patents wherein a material is placed
    about or in contact with the movable electrode so as to wholly or partially
    cover the electrode, as a coating, as it is fed to the discharge.  Search
    Class 252, Compositions, subclass 500, for the coating compositions for use
    on the electrodes of consumable electrode discharge devices, Class 313,
    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 354 for cored rod electrodes
    (e.g., "carbons") and subclass 355 for the miscellaneous electrode
    structures which have a coating thereon, and Class 428, Stock Material or
    Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 375 for electrodes for arc discharge
    devices which involve non electrical structure and are generally merely a
    base (e.g., rod) with at least one coating thereon.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass does not include patents wherein the only
    material to be supplied to the discharge is the material of the electrodes,
    such as consumable electrodes discharge devices having electrodes
    containing flaming and/or luminous salts.  Such consumable electrode
    devices are classified on the type of discharge device and/or the type of
    feeding mechanism used to regulate the feed of the electrodes.

    (4)     Note.  Compare this subclass and subclass 25 of this class.

            Search Class 252, Subclass 500 and the classes specified in the
    Notes thereto for the composition of electrodes which contain flaming
    and/or luminous materials.  Also see (2) Note above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for consumable electrode discharge devices provided with means for
    directing a jet of gas towards the discharge for deflecting the discharge
    from its normal path.

    129,    for consumable electrode discharge devices provided with means to
    transfer the electric current from the lead wires to the movable electrode,
    including such transfer devices used with electrodes having a covering of
    nonconducting material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 50, especially 121.11+, for electric
    welding and heating with feeding of material to be welded or heated into
    the discharge zone.  Note also subclass 72 where a different material, such
    as slag or a gas, is fed to the weld or heating zone.

    252,    Compositions, see (2) Note and (4) Note above.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 231.01+, for
    miscellaneous discharge devices which are provided with means to supply a
    fluent material to the discharge space.  Also see (2) Note above.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 79+, for electric
    furnaces provided with means for feeding the material to be treated into
    the discharge area.

    427,    Coating  Processes, see (2) Note above.


CLS 314/22
TXT Subject matter under subclass 21 designed to feed an initially fluent
    material into the discharge area.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, see the reference to this
    class under (7) Search Class, in the Notes to subclass 21, above.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 111.01+,
    for miscellaneous systems for supplying electric current and/or potential
    to electric space discharge devices of the gas or vapor ionization type,
    including space discharge lamps, the discharge device being provided with
    means to supply a fluent material to the discharge space.


CLS 314/23
TXT Subject matter under the class definition provided with means operated by
    the discharge device mechanism to remove and/or to penetrate deposits of
    electrically nonconductive material on the discharge end of one of the
    electrodes so that good electrical contact can be made between the
    discharge electrodes whereby the discharge can be more easily initiated
    between the electrodes when they are brought into contact with each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for consumable electrode discharge devices provided with means for
    feeding an auxiliary material to the discharge area between the electrodes
    for the purpose of cleaning the electrodes.

    34,     for consumable electrode discharge devices having two principal
    discharge electrodes and an auxiliary electrode designed to initiate a
    discharge between itself and one of the principal electrodes, the auxiliary
    electrode being placed with respect to the principal electrode so that the
    discharge is initiated at a part of the principal electrode which is not
    covered with a nonconductive deposit, the discharge being shifted to the
    principal electrodes when the nonconducting deposit has been heated and
    rendered conducting.


CLS 314/24
TXT Subject matter under subclass 23 of the type having means for feeding the
    electrodes into contact with each other and then separating the electrodes
    to initiate the discharge, and provided with means by which (if the
    electrodes are not brought into contact electrically, even though they may
    be in physical contact, so that the discharge cannot be initiated) the
    electrodes are repeatedly separated and fed towards each other until the
    obstruction to the flow of current between the electrodes is removed from
    the space between the electrodes.

    (1)     Note.  Discharge devices wherein the electrodes are manually moved,
    and which may have the electrodes repeatedly contacted by operation of the
    manual moving means, are not included in this subclass but are in
    subclasses 57 and 58 of this class.


CLS 314/25
TXT Subject matter under the class definition provided with a device known in
    the art as an economizer which is placed in proximity to the discharge end
    of at least one of the electrodes.

    (1)     Note.  An economizer may be defined for the purpose of
    classification in this subclass as (1) a mass of refractory material placed
    near the discharge end of at least one of the electrodes, usually
    surrounding the discharge end of the electrode, and designed to receive
    heat from the electrode and to either return the heat to the electrode or
    to convert the heat into radiant energy rays, such as light, and/or (2) a
    body, usually cup-shaped, placed around the discharge end of one of the
    electrodes and designed to retard the flow of fumes from the electrodes so
    as to either conserve the heat of the electrode and/or to facilitate
    complete combustion of the combustible gases in the fumes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for consumable electrode discharge devices provided with
    ventilating means, fume flow shields, fume condenser, and/or temperature
    modifying means.


CLS 314/26
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the discharge device is
    provided with (1) means to direct and/or circulate a gas or vapor, which
    may be air, in contact with at least part of the discharge device structure
    such as the electrode and/or electrode moving mechanism, and/or (2) means
    to prevent the gaseous fumes given off by the discharge from flowing into
    contact with the electrode moving mechanism, and/or (3) means to cool the
    gaseous fumes given off by the discharge so as to cause condensation of the
    more readily condensable constituents of the fumes, and/or (4) means for
    cooling and/or heating at least part of the discharge structure, such
    heating means being in addition to the heat generated by the discharge
    between the electrodes and/or (5) means to obstruct or to facilitate the
    flow of heated generated by the electrodes to other parts of the discharge
    device structure.

    (1)     Note.  Continue the search in subclass 25 of this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 47 for a structurally installed heat
    exchanger, and appropriate subclasses for a heat exchanger, per se.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 11, for miscellaneous
    discharge devices which are provided with means for cooling and/or heating
    at least part of the discharge device structure, and subclasses 231.01+ for
    discharge devices of other than the consumable electrode types which are
    provided with a gas or vapor flow directing means.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 112, for
    miscellaneous systems for supplying current and/or potential to electric
    lamps and electric space discharge devices of the gas or vapor ionization
    type, the lamp or discharge device being provided with heating and/or
    cooling means for the lamp or discharge device structure.


CLS 314/27
TXT Subject matter under subclass 26 having such means movable mounted and
    having the mounting means connected to the electrode and/or the electrode
    moving mechanism so as to be moved in proportion to the movement of the
    electrode to maintain such means in spaced relation to the discharge end of
    the movable electrode.


CLS 314/28
TXT Discharged devices under subclass 26 provided with a ventilator, fume
    director and/or a fume condenser.

    (1)     Note.  A mere baffle to prevent the fumes from flowing into contact
    with the electrode moving mechanism is not considered to be a fume director
    within the meaning of the definition of this subclass, but a conduit to
    carry the fumes and to prevent the circulation of the fumes around the
    electrode moving mechanism is considered to be a fume director within the
    meaning of the definition of this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes casings placed only about the
    electrode moving mechanism and provided with ventilating means, but where
    the casing is an enclosure for the entire discharge device, the patent is
    classified in Class 362, Illumination, subclasses 21, 22, 159, 183, 198,
    261-265, 276, 294, 367, and 373.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 20, 33 and 34 for
    discharge devices which are inclosed within a sealed envelope and which are
    provided with an internal temperature modifying baffle or a condensing
    chamber or surface to cool the vapors within the envelope.

    454,    Ventilation, appropriate subclasses, for apparatus for supplying
    air to or removing it from enclosures.


CLS 314/29
TXT Subject matter under subclass 26 wherein the means to modify the
    temperature of at least a part of the discharge device structure, such as
    the electrode and/or the electrode holder, includes means for circulating a
    heat transfer liquid in contact with the part which is to have its
    temperature modified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for consumable electrode discharge devices provided with means to
    supply an initially fluent material to the inter- electrode discharge area.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 35 and the subclasses
    specified in the Notes to those subclasses for miscellaneous discharge
    devices which are provided with means for circulating a heat transfer in
    contact with a part of the discharge device.


CLS 314/30
TXT Subject matter under subclass 26 wherein the means to modify the
    temperature of at least part of the discharge device structure, such as the
    electrode and/or the electrode holder, includes a plurality of fins,
    flanges or other means for increasing the heat transfer surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 177 for a tubular structure with heat
    transfer means, and subclass 185 for a heat transmitter, per se.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 45 and 46 and the
    subclasses specified in the Notes thereto for miscellaneous discharge
    devices which are provided with either a heat radiating surface or a heat
    conducting means.


CLS 314/31
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the discharge device is
    supplied with polyphase alternating current.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes system wherein the electrodes are
    supplied with alternating current of one phase, and the electrode moving
    mechanism is supplied with alternating current of a different phase.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes systems wherein the alternating
    current source is a single phase source of supply, and means are provided
    for dividing the current into two or more out of phase currents for
    supplying polyphase alternating currents to the discharge device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 137 and
    indented subclasses, for miscellaneous systems for supplying electric lamps
    and/or electric space discharge devices of the gas or vapor ionization type
    with polyphase alternating current.  Note especially subclass 138, for such
    systems where single phase current is converted to polyphase.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 5 for the structure of polyphase
    transformers and inductive reactors of general utility.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 148+ for phase
    conversion systems (e.g., single phase to polyphase and vice versa).


CLS 314/32
TXT Subject matter under the class definition having a transformer connected to
    the current supply circuit of the discharge device.

    (1)     Note.  The transformer may be connected so as to convert the
    discharge current to a different value, or may have one of its windings is
    series or parallel with the discharge electrodes, the other winding being
    connected to the electrode regulating mechanism.

    (2)     Note.  Continue search in subclass 31 of this class.

    (3)     Note.  Other alternating current consumable electrode discharge
    devices are classified on the type of discharge or on the type of feed
    mechanism used to regulate the feed of the electrodes and the search should
    be for these characteristic features rather than for discharge devices
    which are disclosed as being particularly suitable for use in alternating
    current.  Particular attention is called to subclasses 23, 24, 34 and 69 of
    this class, as many of the patents in these subclasses are disclosed as
    being particularly useful with alternating current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 57, 70,
    276 and 354, and the subclasses specified in the notes to the definition of
    those subclasses for miscellaneous systems which include a transformer for
    supplying electric current and/or potentials to electric lamps and electric
    space discharge devices of the gas or vapor ionization type.  See
    subclasses 57, 70 and 276, where the transformer is in the supply circuit,
    and subclass 354 where the transformer is in the control circuit of a
    discharge-control-type space discharge devices.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 247
    and 355, and the subclasses specified in the notes to the definitions of
    those subclasses, for miscellaneous transformer systems and for systems for
    controlling the current and/or voltage in a single circuit by means
    including a transformer.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for the structure of
    transformers and inductive reactors.


CLS 314/33
TXT Subject matter under the class definition having three or more discharge
    electrodes, the electrodes being connected in series relation in the
    discharge current circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for systems including two or more consumable electrode discharge
    devices connected in series relation in the circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 306, and the
    subclasses specified in the Notes thereto for miscellaneous discharge
    devices which have three or more discharge electrodes which are arranged so
    that the discharge electrodes are in series relationship with each other.


CLS 314/34
TXT Subject matter under the class definition provided with two or more
    principal electrodes and an auxiliary starting electrode, the starting
    electrode being connected in the discharge circuit and placed with respect
    to one of the principal electrodes so that the discharge is initiated
    between the principal electrode, and the starting electrode, the discharge
    then being transferred to the other principal electrode, the starting
    electrode then being either deenergized or removed from the discharge space
    so that the discharge is maintained only between the principal electrodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for consumable electrode discharge devices having three or more
    electrodes wherein the discharge is initiated between two of the
    electrodes, and is maintained between these electrodes until at least one
    of the electrodes consumed and/or fails to maintain the discharge, the
    discharge then being shifted to another electrode or to other electrodes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 591 to 603 for
    miscellaneous discharge devices which are provided with an envelope
    containing an atmosphere of gas or vapor and which have an auxiliary
    staring electrode, and subclass 306 for miscellaneous discharge devices
    which are provided with three or more electrodes one of which may be an
    auxiliary starting electrode.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 335 and
    indented subclass, and the subclasses specified in the notes to the
    definitions of those subclasses, for miscellaneous systems for supplying
    electric current and/or potentials to electric space discharge devices of
    the gas or vapor ionization type, the discharge device being provided with
    an auxiliary starting electrode.


CLS 314/35
TXT Subject matter under the class definition provided with an auxiliary
    electrode which is in circuit with the electrode moving mechanism, the flow
    of current in the auxiliary electrode circuit controlling the operation of
    the electrode moving mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  In the devices of this subclass the auxiliary electrode is
    not supplied with discharge current, but is placed in or near the discharge
    space and is usually connected to one of the discharge electrodes through a
    circuit containing the electrode moving mechanism so that the difference in
    potential between the auxiliary electrode and the discharge electrode
    controls the operation of the electrode moving mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for consumable electrode discharge devices having three or more
    electrodes connected in electrical series relation and the electric current
    supply systems therefor.

    34,     for consumable electrode discharge devices provided with an
    auxiliary starting electrode and the electric current supply systems
    therefor.


CLS 314/36
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the discharge device is
    provided with two or more cathodes and/or two or more anodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1       and indented subclasses, for consumable electrode discharge devices
    having three or more electrodes wherein the discharge is initiated between
    two of the electrodes and is maintained between these electrodes until at
    least one of the electrodes is consumed, the discharge then being shifted
    to another electrode or to other electrodes.

    31,     for consumable electrode discharge devices having three or more
    electrodes supplied with polyphase alternating current.

    33,     for consumable electrode discharge devices having three or more
    electrodes connected in series in the electrical circuit.

    34,     for consumable electrode discharge devices having two or more
    electrodes, one of the electrodes designed only to initiate the discharge
    between two or more of the other electrodes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 307 and the
    subclasses specified in the Notes thereto for miscellaneous discharge
    devices which are provided with a plurality of cathodes and a plurality of
    anodes.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 334 and
    indented subclasses and the subclasses specified in the notes to the
    definitions of those subclasses, for miscellaneous systems for supplying
    electric current and/or potential to a plural cathode and/or anode
    discharge device of the gas or vapor ionization type.


CLS 314/37
TXT Subject matter under subclass 36 wherein the feed of at least one of the
    electrodes is accomplished by the consumption of the electrode material or
    by destruction by the heat of the discharge of obstructions to the motion
    of the electrodes.

    (1)     Note.  Where the electrode is connected to source of power, as a
    mechanical or electrical motor, which transmits motion to the electrode to
    cause it to feed, the feeding is not considered to be of the consumption
    feed type although the loss in weight of the electrode due to the
    consumption of the electrode may effect the feed or control the operation
    of the source of power.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass provides for discharge devices having three or
    more electrodes, one or more of which are fed by consumption feeding and
    others of which are fed by mechanical means.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass includes discharge devices having two or more
    of the electrodes placed so that the adjacent ends of the electrodes abut
    each other, the abutting electrodes acting in effect as a single electrode
    with respect to one or more other electrodes, the feeding of the abutting
    electrodes being accomplished by the consumption of either of the abutting
    electrodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59,     for other consumable electrode discharge devices of the consumption
    feed type, and subclass 60, for electrodes limited by claimed subject
    matter to use with consumption feed-type consumable electrode discharge
    devices.


CLS 314/38
TXT Subject matter under subclass 36 having two or more movable electrodes
    connected together by mechanical means so that these movable electrodes are
    each moved by the same motive power means.

    (1)     Note.  In many of the patents in this subclass the two movable
    electrodes each cooperate with the same third electrode to establish the
    electrical discharge.

    (2)     Note.  Continue the search in subclass 37 of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3       and 4 and indented subclasses, for consumable electrode discharge
    devices having three or more electrodes wherein the discharge is initiated
    between two of the electrodes and is maintained between these electrodes
    until at least one of the electrodes is consumed, the discharge then being
    shifted to another electrode or to other electrodes, and having two or more
    movable electrodes connected together by mechanical means so that these
    movable electrodes are operated by the same motive power means.

    33,     for consumable electrode devices having three or more electrodes
    connected in series relation in the circuit, and having two or more movable
    electrodes connected together by mechanical means so that these movable
    electrodes are operated by the same motive power means.

    53,     and indented subclasses, for miscellaneous consumable electrode
    discharge devices having the electrodes connected together by mechanical
    means so that the electrodes are each fed towards the other by the same
    motive power means during the feeding operation.


CLS 314/39
TXT Subject matter under the class definition having the electrode holder
    mechanism arranged (1) to oscillate (including reciprocate) one of the
    electrodes across the end of the other electrode and/or (2) to rotate one
    of the electrodes about an axis which is either concentric or eccentric
    with an axis of the electrode during the operation of the discharge device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46      and indented subclasses, for consumable electrode discharge devices
    having inclined or parallel electrodes and having one of the electrodes
    pivotally mounted in a support.

    134,    for consumable electrode discharge devices provided with adjustable
    supporting means for the electrodes so that the electrodes may be placed in
    different positions with respect to the supporting frame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 50+, especially indented subclasses
    125.11 and 125.12 for electric arc welding with a rotating or oscillating
    electrode.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 146, for
    miscellaneous discharge devices having a movable electrode.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 94+ and 105+, for
    electric arc furnaces provided with means for moving the furnace charge and
    the electrodes relative to each other in a similar manner.


CLS 314/40
TXT Subject matter under subclass 39 having a common source of motive power for
    feeding the electrodes and oscillating and/or rotating the electrodes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 20-24, for mechanical
    mechanism for deriving two or more different types of motion or for
    deriving the same type of motion and an additional motion of a different
    type from one type of motion.


CLS 314/41
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 wherein the motive power means supplies
    rotary motion to the electrode moving mechanism, the feed mechanism, for
    feeding the electrodes being actuated from the rotary motion of the motive
    power.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 22-24, for mechanical
    mechanisms for deriving reciprocating and rotary motion from rotary motion.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 431+ for apparatus for
    advancing and rotating an elongated article by means adapted to engage the
    article between its ends.


CLS 314/42
TXT Subject matter under subclass 39 wherein the electrode is designed to
    rotate about an axis which is either concentric or eccentric with an axis
    of the electrode during the operation of the discharge device.

    (1)     Note.  Continue the search in subclass 41 of this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 431+ for apparatus for
    advancing and rotating an elongated article by means adapted to engage the
    article between its ends.


CLS 314/43
TXT Subject matter under subclass 42 wherein two or more electrodes have rotary
    motion during the operation of the discharge device.


CLS 314/44
TXT Subject matter under the class definition provided with an electrode in the
    form of a disk or flat plate.


CLS 314/45
TXT Subject matter under the class definition provided with electrodes which
    have their longitudinal axes either inclined or parallel with respect to
    each other.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes all patents, either as originals or
    cross references, claiming consumable electrode discharge devices having
    the axes of the electrodes in other than straight line relationship with
    respect to each other.


CLS 314/46
TXT Subject matter under subclass 45 having one of the electrodes pivotally
    mounted in a support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for consumable electrode discharge devices provided with means to
    either (1) oscillate one of the electrodes across the end of the other
    electrode, and/or (2) to rotate one of the electrodes about an axis which
    is either concentric or eccentric with an axis of the electrode.


CLS 314/47
TXT Subject matter under subclass 46 having plural electrodes pivotally mounted
    in a support.



    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains as original patents only patents
    claiming consumable electrode discharge devices having two electrodes which
    are each pivotally mounted, but takes as cross references patents from
    preceding subclasses, such as subclass 36 and indented subclasses, claiming
    consumable electrode discharge devices having three or more electrodes,
    where two or more of the electrodes are either mounted in inclined or
    parallel with respect to each other and which are pivotally mounted.


CLS 314/48
TXT Subject matter under subclass 47 wherein the feeding motion of the feeding
    electrode is along a straight line in the direction of the longitudinal
    axis of the feeding electrode.

    (1)     Note.  Search this class, subclass 48, for discharge devices under
    subclass 46 provided with linear feeds and one pivoted electrode.


CLS 314/49
TXT Subject matter under subclass 46 wherein the feeding motion of the feeding
    electrode is along a straight line in the direction of the longitudinal
    axis of the feeding electrode.

    (1)     Note.  Continue the search in subclass 48 of this class.


CLS 314/50
TXT Subject matter under subclass 45 having the electrodes connected together
    by mechanical means so that each of the electrodes is moved by the same
    feeding mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  Continue the search in subclasses 47 and 48 of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for consumable electrode discharge devices having three or more
    electrodes and having two or more of the electrodes placed so that the ends
    of these electrodes abut each other, and having the longitudinal axis of
    these electrodes inclined with respect to each other, the abutting
    electrodes acting in effect as a single electrode with respect to the other
    electrodes, the feeding of the abutting electrodes being accomplished by
    the consumption of either of the abutting electrodes.

    38,     for consumable electrode discharge devices having three or more
    discharge electrodes and having two or more movable electrodes connected
    together by mechanical means so that these movable electrodes are each
    moved by the same motive power means.

    53      and indented subclasses, for miscellaneous consumable electrode
    discharge devices provided with plural movable electrodes which are
    connected together by mechanical means so that each of the electrodes is
    fed by the same motive power means.


CLS 314/51
TXT Subject matter under the class definition provided with a plurality of
    electrodes which are movably mounted.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and the indented subclasses contain as
    original patents only patents claiming consumable electrode discharge
    devices having only two electrodes, both movable, but take as cross
    references patents from preceding subclasses, such as subclass 36 and
    indented subclasses, claiming consumable electrode discharge devices having
    three or more electrodes, where two or more of the electrodes are movably
    mounted.

    (2)     Note.  In most of the devices in this subclass each of the
    electrodes is mounted so as to be moved towards and away from the other
    electrode for other than feeding purposes; plural movable electrodes for
    feeding purposes being in the indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3       and 4 and indented subclasses, for consumable electrode discharge
    devices having three or more electrodes wherein the discharge is initiated
    between two of the electrodes and is maintained between these electrodes
    until at least one of the electrodes is consumed or fails to maintain the
    discharge, the discharge then being shifted to another electrode or
    electrodes, and having the first operated consumable electrode and the
    substituted electrode connected together by mechanical means so that these
    movable electrodes are each operated by the same mechanical means.

    31,     33, 36 and indented subclasses, for consumable electrode discharge
    devices provided with three or more electrodes and having at least two of
    the electrodes mounted so as to be movable with respect to the other
    electrodes.

    34,     for consumable electrode discharge devices having three or more
    electrodes, one of the electrodes being designed only to be moved towards
    and away from one of the principal electrodes to initiate the discharge
    between two of the other principal electrodes, and one or the principal
    electrodes being mounted so as to be movable to compensate for the
    consumption of the consumable electrode.

    47      and 48, for consumable electrode discharge devices provided with
    plural pivoted electrodes which are mounted in inclined or parallel
    relation with respect to each other.


CLS 314/52
TXT Subject matter under subclass 51 wherein the electrodes are each adapted to
    be moved towards the other during the feeding operation of the discharge
    device.


CLS 314/53
TXT Subject matter under subclass 52 having the electrodes connected together
    by mechanical means so that each of the electrodes is fed by the same
    motive power means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for consumable electrode discharge devices having a plurality of
    cathodes and/or anodes and having two or more electrodes placed so that the
    ends of the electrodes abut each other, the abutting electrodes acting in
    effect as a single electrode with respect to the other electrodes, the
    feeding of the abutting electrodes being accomplished by the consumption of
    either of the abutting electrodes.

    47,     48 and 50, for consumable electrode discharge devices having the
    electrodes mounted so that their longitudinal axes are in other than
    straight line relation with respect to each other, and having the
    electrodes connected together by mechanical means so that each of the
    electrodes is moved by the same motive power means.


CLS 314/54
TXT Subject matter under subclass 53 provided with means whereby one of the
    electrodes may be moved separately from the motion given to the electrodes
    by the interconnected means.

    (1)     Note.  In most of the devices in this subclass both of the
    electrodes are moved during the feeding operation, but only one of the
    electrodes is moved to separate the electrodes.

    (2)     Note.  Wherein only one electrode is moved for feeding purposes and
    the other electrode is moved only for separating purpose, see subclass 51
    of this class.


CLS 314/55
TXT Subject matter under subclass 53 wherein the feeding mechanism feeds one of
    the electrodes at a different rate from the rate at which the other
    electrode is fed.


CLS 314/56
TXT Subject matter under subclass 53 wherein the means for connecting the
    electrodes together is gearing, or a belt or a chain.

    (1)     Note.  Continue the search in subclasses 54 and 55 of this class.


CLS 314/57
TXT Subject matter under the class definition provided with means manually
    operated for transmitting motion to the electrode for feeding the electrode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses, especially
    subclasses 471, 479 and 491 and their indented subclasses, for manually
    operative mechanism of general application.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 146+, for
    miscellaneous discharge devices provided with a movable electrode and a
    manually operated means for moving the electrode.


CLS 314/58
TXT Subject matter under subclass 57 provided with power means for feeding the
    electrode.

    (1)     Note.  In the devices in this subclass the electrodes may be
    manually operated in case of failure of the power means, or the position of
    the electrodes may be adjusted manually to compensate for nonuniform
    feeding by the power means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses, especially
    subclass 625, for mechanism of general application for operation by either
    manual or power means.


CLS 314/59
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the feed of the electrode
    is accomplished by the consumption of the electrode material or by the
    destruction by the heat of the discharge of obstructions to the motion of
    the electrode.

    (1)     Note.  Where the electrode is connected to a source of power, as a
    mechanical or electrical motor, which transmits motion to the electrode to
    cause it to feed, the patent is not classified in this subclass although
    the loss in weight of the electrode due to the consumption of the electrode
    may effect the feed or control the operation of the source of power.

    (2)     Note.  Continue the search in subclass 37 of this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 235, for discharge
    devices which have two electrodes which are maintained in imperfect
    electrical contact so that the passage of electric current from one
    electrode to the other will produce light or cause the electrode to be
    heated.  In some of these devices, the electrodes are consumed and are fed
    together in a manner analogous to the discharge devices of this subclass
    (59) of Class 314.


CLS 314/60
TXT Electrodes limited by claimed structure to use with devices of the kind
    specified in subclass 59.

    (1)     Note.  These are the only electrodes, per se, in this class.  For
    other electrodes, per se, including other consumable electrodes, per se,
    see note (6) to the main class definition.


CLS 314/61
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the means for
    transmitting power from the power source to the electrode moving mechanism
    includes a fluid transmission system and a motor actuated by the fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 325 for combined pump and motors, the pump
    supplying fluid pressure to the motor.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, for single motors of the
    expansible chamber type with the fluid control systems therefor.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 12 for fluid actuated valves.

    303,    Fluid-Pressure and Analogous Brake  System, subclasses 6.01+ for
    plural motors with fluid control systems therefor.

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, appropriate subclasses for
    fluid actuated rotary motors, per se.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, for rotary expansible chamber
    devices, per se.


CLS 314/62
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which initiation of the
    feeding of an electrode is dependent upon the speed of a motor, the motor
    being caused to operate in response to some characteristic of the apparatus
    indicating improper spacing between the discharge electrodes.

    (1)     Note.  Three common types are:  (1) The feeding of the electrode
    depends upon the speed differential between two motors; (2) A motor drives
    an electrical generator which supplies current to the feed operating means,
    the motor and the generator being arranged in the system so that the motor
    must attain some minimum speed before the generator will deliver the
    requisite energy to initiate the feeding operation; (3) The motor drives a
    feed responsive device and when the motor attains some predetermined speed,
    the speed responsive device initiates the electrode feeding operation.

    (2)     Note.  When the motor upon whose speed the initiation of the
    feeding operation is dependent is an electric motor, the characteristic
    which varies its speed is most commonly the voltage across the discharge
    electrodes and/or the current supplied to the discharge electrodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for consumable electrode discharge devices wherein the means for
    supplying power to move the electrodes is a rotary electric motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 488 for a speed responsive device,
    per se.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 80 for speed
    responsive electrical switches of general application.


CLS 314/63
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the feeding of the
    electrode is controlled by means of a device sensitive to the radiant
    energy generated by the electric discharge.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes thermostatic devices which are
    actuated by the radiant heat of the discharge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89      and 90, for consumable electric discharge devices provided with
    thermostats heated by means other than the discharge between the electrodes
    for moving or controlling the operation of the movable electrode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 200, and the classes and subclasses
    specified in the Notes thereto for photocell controlled electric circuits
    and photocell apparatus, particularly subclass 205, where the photocell
    controls the light source which illuminates it.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 149, for
    miscellaneous systems for supplying electric current and/or potential to
    electric lamps and/or electric space discharge devices of the gas or vapor
    ionization type, the system including a device sensitive to radiant energy
    (photocell, et cetera).

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 16 for electric motor
    systems which are controlled by means of radiant electromagnetic waves
    (e.g., radio waves), subclass 460 for electric motor systems controlled by
    sonic or supersonic vibrations, and subclass 480 for electric motor systems
    controlled by radiant energy such as light, infrared rays, etc.

    337,    Electricity: Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclass 298 for thermally actuated switches of general application.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.69 and 825.72 are the
    generic subclasses for the control of apparatus and devices at a distance
    by means of radio wave energy.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 100+ for a thermometer.


CLS 314/64
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the circuit for
    controlling the operation of the motive power means includes as electric
    discharge device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 200 and
    subclass 352 for miscellaneous systems for supplying an electric current
    and/or potential to an electric lamp and/or electric space discharge device
    of the gas or vapor ionization type, the system including an electric space
    discharge device. See subclass 200 where the discharge device is in the
    supply circuit of the lamp or discharge device, and subclass 352 where the
    discharge device is in the control circuit of the discharge control means
    of a discharge control type discharge device.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 518+ for miscellaneous control circuits which may
    include electron space discharge devices.


CLS 314/65
TXT Subject matter under the class definition provided with one mechanism for
    moving an electrode in the separating direction and separate means for
    moving the same electrode in the feeding direction.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include (1) mechanisms which connect
    the electrode to a source of motive power in one direction of motion of the
    motive power means for moving the electrode against the force of gravity or
    against the resistance of a spring or weight and which release the
    electrode from engagement with the source of motive power in the other
    direction of motion of the motive power means or when the motive power
    means is de-energized so that the electrode is free to move under the
    influence of gravity or the bias of the spring or weight, (2) mechanisms
    such as reversible motors or reversible transmission means, such as
    reversible gearing, or (3) other mechanisms which are reversible in their
    operation and which are used in one direction of their motion for feeding
    the electrodes, and in the other direction for separating the electrodes.

    Such mechanisms are excluded even though supplemental means are provided
    for controlling or aiding the release of the electrode from the motive
    power means or for controlling the mechanism to reverse the operation.
    Such mechanisms are in the subclasses below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     52 and 54, for consumable electrode discharge devices wherein one
    of the electrodes is moved to separate the electrodes from each other, and
    the other electrode is moved to feed the electrodes together.


CLS 314/66
TXT Subject matter under subclass 65 wherein the power for moving the electrode
    in the separating direction is supplied by means of an electromagnet having
    a movable armature.

    (1)     Note.  Continue the search in subclasses 37 and 54 of this class.


CLS 314/67
TXT Subject matter under subclass 66 provided with an electromagnet having a
    movable armature (which is separate from the separating electromagnet and
    armature) for moving the electrode in the feeding direction.


CLS 314/68
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the electrode feeding
    mechanism positively feeds the electrode during the feeding operation as
    distinguished from permitting the electrode to fail under the influence of
    gravity.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and the indented subclasses constitute the
    miscellaneous place for mechanisms for feeding the electrode positively
    where this is claimed.  The succeeding subclasses, starting with subclass
    82, ordinarily have positive electrode separating means, and gravity
    electrode feed means, or feed means so broadly claimed as not be limited to
    positive feed means.

    (2)     Note.  Continue the search in subclasses 21, 22, 51, 52, 58 and 65
    and indented subclasses of this class.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass includes feeding mechanisms wherein a spring
    or weight furnishes the motive power for feeding the electrode, excepting,
    where the only weight is the weight of the electrode and/or the electrode
    holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37      and 59, for consumable electrode discharge devices wherein the feed
    of the electrode is accomplished by the consumption of the electrode
    material or by the destruction by the heat of the discharge of obstructions
    to the motion of the electrode, the electrode usually being biased by means
    of a spring or other positively acting means to move the electrode or the
    obstructing means against a holding stop.

    41,     for consumable electrode discharge devices having power driven
    means for both rotating and positively feeding the consumable electrode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 146, for
    miscellaneous discharge devices which have a movable electrode and power
    means for moving the electrode.


CLS 314/69
TXT Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein the means for supplying the power
    to move the electrodes is a rotary electric motor.

    (1)     Note.  Most of the systems in this subclass and the indented
    subclasses have the motor connected in the circuit so as to be controlled
    in response to the condition of the electric discharge so that when the
    electrodes are spaced too far apart the motor will be rotated so as to feed
    the electrodes together.

    (2)     Note.  Most of the systems in this subclass and the indented
    subclasses are also arranged to cause the motor to separate the electrodes
    in the event they are too close together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for discharge devices and systems under the class definition in
    which the initiation of the feeding of an electrode is dependent upon the
    speed of a motor, the motor being caused to operate in response to some
    characteristic of the discharge device indicating improper inter-electrode
    spacing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 40 for rotary
    electric motors.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses, for
    electric motor control.


CLS 314/70
TXT Subject matter under subclass 69 provided with means to apply a braking
    force to the motor.

    (1)     Note.  In many of the systems in this subclass when the motor
    energizing circuit is opened after the electrodes have been moved to or
    almost to the proper position, an impedance in the system then acts as a
    load upon the motor, which is then acting as a generator, whereby the motor
    is dynamically braked.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71      and 72, for systems under subclass 69 which include means for
    changing the impedance of the circuit supplying current to the motor for
    purposes other than dynamic braking.

    74,     for systems under subclass 69 provided with means for varying the
    operating characteristics of an electric switch placed in the motor circuit.

    75,     for systems under subclass 69 where the motor is supplied from a
    source of current which is separate from the current supply for the
    discharge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 362. for electric
    motor braking control.


CLS 314/71
TXT Subject matter under subclass 69 provided with means for changing the
    impedance of the circuit supplying current to the motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for systems under subclass 69 provided with an impedance in the
    motor circuit which acts as a dynamic brake on the motor when the
    electrodes have been moved to or almost to the proper position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 508, and the search
    notes thereunder, for electric motor control by impedance in the primary or
    armature circuit.


CLS 314/72
TXT Subject matter under subclass 71 having the circuit for controlling the
    supply of current to the motor controlled by an electric switch, the switch
    being operated in response to the condition of the electric discharge.

    (1)     Note.  In many of the systems in this subclass, the switch controls
    a shunt placed about an impedance in the motor circuit, the shunt being
    opened to place the impedance in the motor circuit to retard the speed of
    rotation of the motor when the electrodes have been fed almost into contact
    with each other, thereby preventing overfeeding.

    (2)     Note.  For other electric motor controlled feeding systems wherein
    the motor rotates at varying speeds, see subclasses 70, 75 and 76 of this
    class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for systems under subclass 69 provided with an impedance in the
    motor circuit which acts as a dynamic brake on the motor when the
    electrodes have been moved to or almost to the proper position.

    73      and 74, for other systems under subclass 69 having switch
    controlled motor circuits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 515 and the search
    notes thereunder, for electric motor control by switch means in combination
    with resistance in the armature or primary circuit.


CLS 314/73
TXT Subject matter under subclass 69 having the circuit for controlling the
    supply of current to the motor controlled by an electric switch, the switch
    being operated in response to the condition of the electric discharge.

    (1)     Note.  Continue the search in subclasses 70 and 72 of this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 519, and the search
    notes thereunder for electric motor control by means of armature or primary
    circuit making and breaking devices.


CLS 314/74
TXT Subject matter under subclass 73 provided with means for varying the
    operating characteristics of the electric switch.

    (1)     Note.  In most of the systems in this subclass the switch when
    operated to one position controls means to change the switch operating
    characteristics so that the switch will be operated to the reverse position
    in response to a different change in current and/or potential than that
    required to operate the switch without such auxiliary means so that the
    motor circuit may be opened and/or closed a short time before the motor has
    moved the electrodes to the desired distance of inter-electrode spacing,
    thereby preventing overrunning of the motor with consequential improper
    electrode spacing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for systems under subclass 69 provided with an impedance in the
    motor circuit which acts as a dynamic brake on the motor when the
    electrodes have been moved to or almost to the proper position.

    115     and 116, for miscellaneous systems under the class definition
    provided with means for regulating the flow of current and/or voltage to
    the electromagnet which operates and/or controls the electrode feeding
    mechanism.


CLS 314/75
TXT Subject matter under subclass 69 wherein the motor is supplied from a
    source of current which is separate from the current supply for the
    discharge electrodes.

    (1)     Note.  In most systems in this subclass the current and/or
    potential supplied by the auxiliary current source is controlled in
    response to a condition of the electric discharge to control the feed motor.

    (2)     Note.  Continue the search in subclasses 31, 70, 72, 73 and 74 of
    this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for discharge devices and systems under the class definition in
    which the initiation of the feeding of an electrode is dependent upon the
    speed of an electric motor, the motor being caused to operate in response
    to some characteristics, such as the voltage across the discharge electrode
    of the discharge device indicating improper inter-electrode spacing.


CLS 314/76
TXT Subject matter under subclass 69 wherein the armature or the field of the
    motor contains two windings differentially wound.

    (1)     Note.  In most of the systems in this subclass the difference in
    the amount of energization of the differential windings determines the
    direction in which the motor operates and the speed with which it operates.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 499 and the search
    notes thereunder for motor control by means of armature having plural
    opposed windings; subclass 525 and the search notes thereunder for motor
    control by plural opposed field windings.


CLS 314/77
TXT Subject matter under subclass 68 having a pawl and ratchet mechanism for
    transmitting motion to the electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for consumable electrode discharge devices of the nonpositive
    feeding type in which the electrode is connected to a rotatable member,
    such as a gear, which is held against rotation by a brake or detent, the
    power necessary to rotate the rotatable member to separate the electrodes
    being transmitted to the rotatable member by moving the brake or detent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 111 and indented subclasses,
    especially subclasses 149 and indented subclasses, 155, 167, 168 and 169,
    for intermittent grip mechanisms of the pawl and ratchet type.


CLS 314/78
TXT Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein the means for supplying the power
    for moving the electrodes is an electromagnet provided with a movable
    armature.

    (1)     Note.  The armature is usually connected to an intermittent grip
    mechanism for transmitting motion of the armature to the electrode.

    (2)     Note.  Continue the search in subclasses 67 and 77 of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for other consumable electrode discharge devices provided with an
    electromagnet for separating the electrodes and/or controlling the
    operation of the electrode feeding mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 111 and indented subclasses,
    for intermittent grip mechanisms.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 152, for
    miscellaneous discharge devices which have a movable electrode and an
    electromagnet for moving it.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 135 for linear motor
    systems.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 220 for electromagnets with armatures.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ for
    electro- magnet circuits.


CLS 314/79
TXT Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein the control of the application of
    power to the electrodes for feeding is secured by controlling the power
    transmission means.

    (1)     Note. This subclass includes arrangements for controlling a clutch
    interposed in the transmitting mechanism between the power source and the
    electrode.

    (2)     Note.  Continue the search in subclass 61 of this class.

    (3)     Note.  For power transmission control generally search classes: 74,
    Machine Element or Mechanism. 188, Brakes. 192, Clutches and Power-Stop
    Control.


CLS 314/80
TXT Subject matter under subclass 79 wherein the mechanism for transmitting
    power to the electrode includes a gear train.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for consumable electrode discharge devices having a power means for
    both rotating and feeding the consumable electrode, the feeding operation
    being controlled by controlling the operation of a gear train.


CLS 314/81
TXT Subject matter under subclass 80 provided with means for changing the
    engagement of the gears so as to reverse the direction of movement of the
    driven member, the motion of the driving member being in the same direction
    in both directions of movement of the driven member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses, especially
    subclasses 404 and 404.5, for reversing gear arrangements of general
    application.


CLS 314/82
TXT Subject matter under the class definition provided with an escapement to
    control the rate of movement of the movable electrode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 1.5, for escapement of
    general application.

    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, or Animal Powered, subclasses 5 and 31,
    for weight operated motors controlled by escapements, and subclass 38, for
    spring motors with escapements.


CLS 314/83
TXT Subject matter under the class definition having a rotatable member, such
    as a gear, which is connected to the electrode so that by controlling the
    rotation of the rotatable member the feeding of the electrode may be
    controlled, the rotatable member being held against rotation in the
    direction of feeding by means of a brake, which may be a gear detent or
    pawl when the rotatable member is a gear, the electrode being permitted to
    move in the feeding direction by releasing the gear detent or brake from
    holding position with respect to the rotatable member.

    (1)     Note.  Continue the search in subclass 82 of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for consumable electrode discharge devices provided with mechanisms
    which include a pawl and ratchet for positively feeding the electrode.

    79,     for consumable electrode discharge devices provided with mechanisms
    which include gear trains, for positively feeding the electrode.


CLS 314/84
TXT Subject matter under subclass 83 having the rotatable feed control member
    mounted in a movable frame and having the means for controlling the feed
    connected to the frame to move it, the rotatable member being brought into
    engagement with the gear-detent or brake when the frame is moved in one
    direction to prevent rotation of the rotatable member and being disengaged
    from the gear-detent or brake when the frame is moved in the other
    direction thereby permitting the rotatable member to rotate and feed the
    electrode.

    (1)     Note.  In most of the devices in this subclass when the frame is
    moved in the direction in which the gear-detent or brake engages with the
    rotatable member, the gear-detent or brake will prevent the periphery of
    the rotatable member from moving with respect to the gear-detent or brake
    during at least part of such frame movement, thereby (1) causing rotation
    of the rotatable member about its on axis, the rotary motion of the
    rotatable member being transmitted to the electrode to move the electrode
    in the separating direction and/or (2) moving the electrode in the
    separating direction by the lifting action of the frame movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 126 for intermittent grip
    type mechanical movements of general application operating in an analogous
    manner to the subject matter of this subclass.


CLS 314/85
TXT Subject matter under subclass 84 having the rotatable member journaled in a
    pivoted frame.

    (1)     Note.  In most of the devices in this subclass the  pivot of the
    frame is eccentric with respect to the axis of rotation of the rotatable
    member.

    (2)     Note.  Continue the search in subclass 82 of this class.


CLS 314/86
TXT Subject matter under subclass 85 provided with a plurality of
    electromagnets for moving the frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121,    for other consumable electrode discharge devices having the
    separating and feed controlling mechanism controlled by a plurality of
    electromagnets.


CLS 314/87
TXT Subject matter under subclass 83 wherein the rotary member is prevented
    from rotating in the direction to control the feed of the electrode by
    means of the gear-detent or brake while the electrodes are being separated.

    (1)     Note.  Continue the search in subclasses 82 and 84 of this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 111, particularly subclass
    126, for intermittent-grip-type mechanical movements of general application
    which operate in an analogous manner to the subject matter of this subclass.


CLS 314/88
TXT Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein the power necessary to rotate the
    rotatable member in the direction which causes the electrodes to separate
    is transmitted to the rotatable member by moving the gear-detent or brake.

    (1)     Note.  Compare this class and subclass 84 of this class.


CLS 314/89
TXT Subject matter under the class definition provided (1) with a thermostatic
    device for supplying the energy for separating the electrode, or (2) a
    thermostat which controls the operation of the feed controlling mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  Continue to search in subclass 63 of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     for consumable electrode discharge devices provided with
    thermostatic means for operating and/or controlling the operation of the
    feeding mechanism where the thermostatic means is heated by the heat
    radiated by the electric discharge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 151, for
    miscellaneous discharge devices which have a movable electrode and a
    thermostatic means for moving it.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 117 for
    thermo-electric motor systems.

    337,    Electricity: Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    appropriate subclasses for electrothermally and thermally actuated switches
    of general application.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 100+ for a thermometer.


CLS 314/90
TXT Subject matter under subclass 89 provided with mechanical means, such as a
    spring or weight, for receiving and storing energy from the thermostatic
    device and which is connected to the electrode separating or feed
    controlling mechanism for moving the mechanism when the stored energy is
    released.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92,     for other consumable electrode discharge devices provided with a
    mechanical energy storing device.


CLS 314/91
TXT Subject matter under the class definition provided with a resilient member,
    such as a spring, or a lost motion connection between (1) the source of
    power and the mechanism for transmitting separating motion to the
    electrodes, or (2) the means for operating the mechanism for releasing the
    electrode and the release mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  In most of the patents in this subclass, the resilient or
    lost motion connection prevents small movements of the power source or the
    means for operating the electrode release mechanism from being transmitted
    to the electrode or the electrode release mechanism, thereby preventing
    spurious separating or feeding.


CLS 314/92
TXT Subject matter under the class definition provided with mechanical means,
    such as spring or weight, for receiving and storing energy received from
    another source of energy, and which is connected to the electrode
    separating or feed controlling mechanism for moving the mechanism when the
    stored energy is released.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include consumable electrode
    discharge devices where the only energy storing weight is the weight of the
    electrode and/or the electrode supporting mechanism which is lifted against
    the force of gravity.

    (2)     Note.  Continue the search in subclass 91 of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37      and 59, for consumable electrode discharge devices wherein the feed
    of the electrode is accomplished by the consumption of the electrode
    material or by the destruction by the heat of the discharge of obstructions
    to the motion of the electrode, and having the electrode biased by means of
    a spring or other positively acting means so as to move the electrode or
    the obstructing means against a holding stop.

    98,     for consumable electrode discharge devices provided with means to
    counterbalance the weight of the movable electrode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, or Animal Powered, for spring and weight
    operated motors.


CLS 314/93
TXT Subject matter under subclass 92 provided with a releasable clutch for
    gripping the electrode and/or the electrode rod in one direction of its
    motion and for releasing the electrode and/or the electrode rod in the
    other direction of its motion, and an energy storing device for biasing the
    clutch to either its gripping or releasing position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    for consumable electrode discharge devices of the releasable
    electrode or rod gripper type other than those provided with energy storing
    means.


CLS 314/94
TXT Subject matter under subclass 92 wherein the means for supplying the energy
    to the energy storing device is an electrical device of translating
    electrical energy into mechanical energy.


CLS 314/95
TXT Subject matter under subclass 94 wherein the regulating mechanism includes
    a lever, and the energy storing device is connected to the lever so as to
    bias the lever to one of its positions and the electrical device moves the
    lever to a different position in opposition to the bias of the energy
    storing device.


CLS 314/96
TXT Subject matter under subclass 95 wherein the biasing means is a spring.

    (1)     Note.  Continue the search in subclass 90 of this class.


CLS 314/97
TXT Subject matter under subclass 94 wherein the energy storing means is a
    spring.

    (1)     Note.  Continue the search in subclasses 90 and 96 of this class.


CLS 314/98
TXT Subject matter under the class definition provided with means to
    counterbalance the weight of the movable electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94      and indented subclasses, for consumable electrode space discharge
    devices having the electrode moving mechanism biased by means of a spring
    or weight in one direction of its motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 123.1, 280.11, 292.11, 297.11, and 325 for
    adjustable supports of general application provided with weight
    counterbalances; and subclass 264 for counterbalance weights.


CLS 314/99
TXT Subject matter under the class definition provided with means, such as a
    dash-pot, for retarding the motion of the electrodes and/or the electrode
    separating and/or feed controlling mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, for brakes and retarding mechanisms of general application.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 239 for electromagnets having armatures and time
    delay means.


CLS 314/100
TXT Subject matter under subclass 99 having the retarder connected to the
    electrode holder so as to control the rate of feeding throughout the
    feeding movement of the electrode.

    (1)     Note.  In most of the patents in this subclass during the feeding
    operation the electrode is released from engagement with the electrode
    operating mechanism, the electrode falling under the influence of gravity,
    with the rate of falling being determined by the retarder.

    (2)     Note.  Continue the search in this class, subclass 82, for
    consumable electrode discharge devices wherein the rate of motion of the
    feeding electrode while feeding is regulated by an escapement.

    (3)     Note.  Continue the search in this class, subclass 68 and indented
    subclasses, particularly subclass 70, for consumable electrode discharge
    devices provided with positive acting electrode feeding mechanisms and
    means for controlling the rate of feed of the positively fed electrode.


CLS 314/101
TXT Subject matter under the class definition provided with a clutch mechanism
    interposed between the motive power mechanism and the electrode, the clutch
    gripping the electrode and/or the electrode holder rod during one direction
    of motion of the motive power means, thereby applying motive power to the
    electrode for moving the electrode in one direction, and releasing the
    electrode and/or the electrode holder from connection with the motive power
    means when the motive power means begins to move in the opposite direction
    so that the electrode is free to move in such other direction without
    regard to the amount of motion of the motive power means.

    (1)     Note.  In most of the devices in this subclass the electrode falls
    under the influence of gravity during the feeding operation, consumable
    electrode discharge devices of the positive feed type being in subclass 68
    and indented subclass of this class.

    (2)     Note.  Continue the search in subclasses 3, 90 and 93 of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83,     for electrode feed control mechanism having a rotatable member, and
    means, such as a brake, to hold the rotatable member from rotation in the
    feeding direction, especially subclass 88, where the power necessary to
    rotate the rotatable member in the separating direction is transmitted to
    the rotatable member by moving the brake or other member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 111 and indented subclasses,
    for intermittent-grip-type mechanical movements of general application,
    subclass 144 and indented subclasses, for grip units and features, and
    especially subclass 162 and indented subclasses, for rod grippers, per se,
    of general application.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclass 120 for rod,
    wire and tube feeders of the intermittent type.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 86.4+, for
    miscellaneous devices provided with handling or hoist line terminals for
    grasping a rod or other load of general application.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 119, for reciprocating
    electric motor systems.


CLS 314/102
TXT Subject matter under subclass 101 provided with two or more gripping
    devices which are  separately operated.

    (1)     Note.  One of the clutches may grip the electrode during the
    separating stroke and the other hold the electrode against movement after
    the electric discharge has been established.


CLS 314/103
TXT Subject matter under subclass 101 provided with means to limit the motion
    of the carbon moving means during the separation of the carbons without
    releasing the clutch from the electrode and/or the electrode holder.

    (1)     Note.  Continue the search in subclass 102 of this class.


CLS 314/104
TXT Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein the gripping members of the
    clutch form, at least in part, the armature of an electromagnet.

    (1)     Note.  The electromagnet may be the electromagnet which supplies
    the energy necessary to move the movable electrode.


CLS 314/105
TXT Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein the means for supplying the power
    for controlling electrode movement is an electromagnet.

    (1)     Note.  Continue the search in subclasses 38, 102, 103, and 104 of
    this class.


CLS 314/106
TXT Subject matter under subclass 105 having two or more electromagnet coils
    which may be on the same or different cores.  Usually one of the coils is
    connected in an electrical shunt with the discharge space and the other in
    series electrically with the discharge space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121,    for other consumable electrode discharge devices provided with two
    or more electromagnet coils for controlling the electrode movement.


CLS 314/107
TXT Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein there are three or more
    electromagnet coils.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    for other consumable electrode discharge devices provided with
    three or more electromagnet coils for controlling the electrode movement.


CLS 314/108
TXT Subject matter under subclass 106 having the armatures of the
    electromagnets connected by means of a mechanical lever system to a single
    device transmitting motion to the electrode clutch or having a single lever
    or magnetic material acting as a common armature for two or more
    electromagnets.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123,    for other consumable electrode discharge devices provided with two
    or more electromagnet coils and an interconnected lever system for
    controlling the electrode movement.


CLS 314/109
TXT Subject matter under subclass 108 having the armatures of the
    electromagnets connected to a common oscillating lever, or having a lever
    of magnetic material acting as a common armature for two or more
    electromagnets.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124,    for other consumable electrode discharge devices provided with two
    or more electromagnet coils and a common oscillating lever or armature for
    controlling the electrode movement.

    126,    for consumable-electrode-type discharge devices with
    electromagnetically operated means for controlling the movable electrode
    wherein the armature is actuated by the resultant electromagnetic field
    generated by two or more magnetic coils.


CLS 314/110
TXT Subject matter under subclass 106 having the electromagnet coils mounted
    upon the same axis.  The coils may be concentrically mounted or placed in
    end-to-end relationship about the same axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    for other consumable-electrode discharge devices provided with two
    or more coaxial coils for controlling the electrode movement.


CLS 314/111
TXT Subject matter under subclass 105 wherein the electrode and/or the
    electrode holder and the electromagnet are concentrically mounted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for other consumable electrode discharge devices provided with an
    electromagnet for controlling the electrode movement, the electromagnet and
    the electrode and/or electrode holder being concentrically mounted.


CLS 314/112
TXT Subject matter under the class definition having the electrode and/or the
    electrode rod, and/or the electrode holding frame slidably mounted in
    guides so as to be movable, the electrode being held against motion by a
    brake mechanism, so that when the brake is released the electrode may move.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82      and 83 and indented subclasses, for consumable electrode discharge
    devices having the electrode connected to a rotatable member, such as a
    gear, and having the feeding of the consumable electrode controlled by
    means of a gear-dented or brake which cooperates with the rotatable member
    to control its rotation and thereby the feeding of the electrode.

    90,     93 and 101, and indented subclasses, for consumable electrode
    discharge devices provided with a clutch mechanism which is designed to
    grip the electrode and/or the electrode holder and move it in one direction
    under the influence of motive power means, and to release the electrode
    and/or electrode rod so that the electrode is free to move in the other
    direction without regard to the amount of motion of the motive power means.


CLS 314/113
TXT Subject matter under the class definition provided with (1) an
    electromagnet for supplying the energy for separating an electrode, or (2)
    with an electromagnet which controls the operation of the feeding mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  Continue the search in subclasses 67, 70, 77, and 90 of this
    class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     77 and 78, for consumable electrode discharge devices having an
    electromagnet for supplying the energy for moving the electrode in the
    feeding direction.

    41,     61, 70, 72, 73, and 79 and indented subclasses, for consumable
    electrode discharge devices provided with electromagnetic means for
    controlling the operation of mechanism which feeds the electrode by
    positively moving the electrode.

    82,     83 and indented subclasses, 90, 93 and 112, for consumable
    electrode discharge devices provided with electromagnetic means for
    operating mechanism to release the consumable electrode from its holding
    means so that the electrode may be moved in the feeding direction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 220 for electromagnets with and without armatures.


CLS 314/114
TXT Subject matter under subclass 113 provided with means (including switching
    arrangements not provided for by preceding subclasses) for controlling the
    current or voltage supplied to the electromagnet coils.

    (1)     Note.  Where the electromagnetic operating or controlling means
    includes one or more coils which are in series and/or in shunt with the
    discharge electrodes, and no means, other than the variations in the
    impedance of the electric discharge, are provided to control the flow of
    current in the series and/or shunt circuit, the patent is excluded from
    this subclass and the indented subclasses, and will be found in subclass
    113 or subclasses 119-128 below.

    (2)     Note.  Continue the search in subclasses 24, 61, 63, 67, 71, 73,
    77, 78, and 79 and indented subclasses of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10      and indented subclasses, for consumable electrode discharge devices
    having electromagnetic means for operating and/or controlling the operation
    of the feed regulating mechanism and provided with means to place a shunt
    about or to open the circuit of the electromagnet when the electrode is
    consumed or fails to maintain the discharge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ for
    electromagnet circuits of general application.


CLS 314/115
TXT Subject matter under subclass 114 provided with means for quantitatively
    regulating the current and/or voltage supplied to the electromagnet coils.

    (1)     Note.  For mere switching systems,see this class, subclass 114 or
    indented subclasses 117 and 118.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135,    for miscellaneous consumable electrode discharge device systems
    provided with means to regulate the current and/or voltage supplied to the
    discharge device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    220-354, for systems for controlling the magnitude of the current and/or
    voltage in a single circuit.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for the structure of
    transformers and inductive reactors.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 68 for mechanically variable
    electric resistors.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ for
    miscellaneous systems of supplying current to an electromagnet.


CLS 314/116
TXT Subject matter under subclass 115 provided with means responsive to
    electric current and/or potential, for controlling the operation of the
    regulating means.

    (1)     Note.  Continue the search in subclass 74 of this class.


CLS 314/117
TXT Subject matter under subclass 114 wherein the current or voltage supplied
    to an electromagnet connected in shunt with the discharge electrodes is
    controlled.


CLS 314/118
TXT Subject matter under subclass 117 wherein the current or voltage supplies
    to an electromagnet connected in series with the discharge electrodes is
    controlled.


CLS 314/119
TXT Subject matter under subclass 113 provided with electromagnetically
    operated means for moving the electrode in the separating direction.

    (1)     Note.  Continue the search in subclasses 82, 83 and indented
    subclasses, 102, 103, 104, and 105 and indented subclasses of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3       and 4 and indented subclasses, for consumable-electrode discharge
    devices having three or more electrodes and electromagnetic-operated means
    for separating and feeding the electrodes, and having means for first
    initiating the discharge between two of the electrodes and maintaining the
    discharge between these electrodes until at least one of the electrodes is
    consumed or fails to maintain the discharge, the discharge then being
    shifted to another electrode or to other electrodes.

    10      and indented subclasses, for consumable electrode discharge devices
    having electromagnetic operated means for separating and feeding the
    electrodes and provided with means either to complete a shunt about the
    discharge device or some part thereof, such as the electromagnets, or to
    open the circuit of the discharge device or some part thereof when the
    consumable electrode has been consumed or when the discharge is
    extinguished.

    23      and 24, for consumable-electrode discharge devices for separating
    and feeding the electrodes and provided with means operated by the
    electromagnets for removing and/or penetrating deposits of electrically
    nonconductive material on the ends of the electrodes.

    31,     for consumable-electrodes discharge devices having
    electromagnetically-operated means for separating and feeding the
    electrodes and designed for operation with polyphase alternating current.

    33      and 36 and indented subclasses, for consumable electrode discharge
    devices having three or more electrodes and electromagnetically-operated
    means for separating and feeding the electrodes.

    44,     for consumable-electrode discharge devices having disk or plate
    electrodes and electromagnetic-operated means for separating and feeding
    the electrodes.

    45,     for consumable-electrode discharge devices having the electrodes
    either inclined or parallel with respect to each other and
    electromagnetic-operated means for separating and feeding the electrodes.

    51      and indented subclasses, for consumable electrode discharge devices
    having at least two movable electrodes and electromagnetic-operated means
    for separating and feeding the electrodes.

    66,     for consumable-electrode discharge devices having electromagnetic
    means for separating the electrode and means other than the electromagnetic
    means which operate separately from the separating magnet for feeding the
    electrodes together, and subclass 67, where the feeding of the electrodes
    is operated by an electromagnet which operates separately from the
    separating magnet.

    77      and 78, for consumable-electrode discharge devices having the
    electromagnetic-operated means for separating and feeding the electrode,
    the feeding mechanism being a positively acting mechanism.

    91      and 94 and indented subclasses, for consumable electrode discharge
    devices provided with electromagnetic means for separating and controlling
    feeding of the electrodes and having an energy storing device, such as a
    spring or weight, for receiving energy from the electromagnet in one
    direction of motion of the electromagnet and for releasing energy in the
    other direction of motion of the electromagnet.

    99,     for consumable-electrode discharge devices having an
    electromagnetic means for separating and controlling feeding of the
    electrodes and provided with means for retarding either the motion of the
    electromagnetic and/or the movable electrode.


CLS 314/120
TXT Subject matter under subclass 119 wherein an electromagnetic coil is
    movably mounted.


CLS 314/121
TXT Subject matter under subclass 119 having two or more electromagnet coils
    which may be on the same or different cores.

    (1)     Note.  Usually, one of the coils is connected in an electrical
    shunt with the discharge space and the other is connected is series
    electrically with the discharge space.

    (2)     Note.  Continue the search in subclasses 67, 86, 106, 118, and 120
    of this class.


CLS 314/122
TXT Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein there are three or more
    electromagnet coils.

    (1)     Note.  Continue the search in subclass 107 of this class.


CLS 314/123
TXT Subject matter under subclass 121 having the armatures of the
    electromagnets connected by means of a mechanical lever system to a single
    device transmitting motion to the electrode, or having a single lever of
    magnetic material acting as a common armature for two or more
    electromagnets.

    (1)     Note.  Continue the search in subclass 108 of this class.


CLS 314/124
TXT Subject matter under subclass 123 having the armatures of the
    electromagnets connected to a common oscillating lever, or having an
    oscillating lever acting as a common armature for two or more
    electromagnets.

    (1)     Note.  Continue to search in subclass 109 of this class.


CLS 314/125
TXT Subject matter under subclass 121 having the electromagnet coils mounted
    upon the same axis.  The coils may be concentrically mounted or placed in
    end-to-end relationship about the same axis.

    (1)     Note.  Continue the search in subclass 110 of this class.


CLS 314/126
TXT Subject matter under subclass 121 provided with a movable armature which is
    connected to the electrode so that the motion of the armature is
    transmitted to the electrode, the position of the armature being determined
    by the resultant flux generated by two electromagnets, one of which
    generates a flux which opposes the flux of the other electromagnet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    109, 123, and 124, for consumable- electrode discharge devices
    having electro-magnetically-operated feed regulating mechanism with two or
    more electromagnet coils and having the armatures of the electromagnets
    connected by means of a lever system to a single device transmitting motion
    to or controlling motion of the electrode, or having a single lever of
    magnetic material acting as a common armature for two or more of the
    electromagnets so that the position of the feed regulating mechanism is
    determined by the resultant magnetic action of the electromagnetic coils.

    110     and 125, for consumable-electrode discharge devices having
    electromagnetically-operated feed regulating mechanism with two or more
    electromagnet coils which are mounted upon the same axis so that the
    armature which cooperates with the coils has its position determined by the
    resultant magnetic action of the coaxial coils.


CLS 314/127
TXT Subject matter under subclass 119 wherein the electrode and/or the
    electrode holder and the electromagnet are concentrically mounted.

    (1)     Note.  Continue to search in subclasses 111 and 120 of this class.


CLS 314/128
TXT Subject matter under subclass 113 provided with means to suppress
    vibrations of the electromagnet, or its armature, the vibrations being
    usually due to the use of alternating current for energizing the
    electromagnet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     99 and 100, for consumable-electrode discharge devices having
    electromagnetically-operated feed regulating and/or controlling mechanism
    and an escapement or retarding mechanism for regulating the motion of the
    feed regulating and/or controlling mechanism.

    91,     for consumable-electrode discharge devices having
    electromagnetically-operated feed regulating and/or controlling mechanism
    and having a resilient member, such as a spring, or a lost motion
    connection between the electromagnet and the electrode and/or electrode
    release mechanism to prevent small movements of the electromagnet from
    being transmitted to the electrode and/or the electrode release mechanism,
    thereby preventing spurious movements of the electrodes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 243 for alternating current responsive
    electromagnets with armatures.


CLS 314/129
TXT Devices under the class definition provided with means to transfer the
    electric current from the lead wires to the movable electrode.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition of Class 313, Electric Lamp and
    Discharge Devices, section XI, 3 for the classification of electrodes for
    discharge devices where the electrode is provided with an electrical
    connector which is fastened to the electrode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, appropriate subclasses, for
    means for transmitting electrical energy between relatively movable
    objects, note especially subclass 1 for miscellaneous devices for
    transferring electrical energy from a stationary contact to a moving
    conductor.


CLS 314/130
TXT Devices under the class definition provided with means for supporting the
    mechanism of the discharge device.

    (1)     Note.  Search this class, appropriate subclasses above for patents
    relating to the supporting means for the feed regulating mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for consumable-electrode discharge devices provided with means for
    supporting an electromagnet or other means near the discharge area for
    deflecting the electric discharge from the path it would normally occupy in
    the absence of the deflecting means.

    21,     for consumable-electrode discharge devices provided with means for
    supporting a device for supplying a material, either solid or fluent, to
    the discharge area between the electrodes.

    25,     for consumable-electrode discharge devices provided with means for
    supporting an economizer near the discharge end of at least one electrode.

    26,     for consumable-electrode discharge devices provided with means to
    support a ventilator, fume flow shield, fume condenser and/or temperature
    modifying means.

    33,     for consumable-electrode discharge devices provided with means for
    supporting three or more electrodes and the feed regulating mechanism
    therefor.

    39,     for indented subclasses, for consumable-electrode discharge devices
    having means for supporting the electrode for either oscillatory and/or
    rotary motion about its own axis.

    44,     for consumable-electrode discharge devices with frames and
    electrode support for supporting disk or plate shaped electrodes.

    45,     and indented subclasses, for consumable-electrode discharge devices
    with frames and electrode supports for supporting electrodes which have
    their longitudinal axes either inclined or parallel with respect to each
    other

    51      and indented subclasses, for consumable-electrode discharge devices
    with frames and electrode supports for supporting a plurality of movable
    electrodes.

    37      and 59, for consumable-electrode discharge devices with supports
    for supporting the electrodes of consumption-feed-type consumable-electrode
    discharge devices.

    57      and 58, for consumable-electrode discharge devices of the manual
    feed type provided with means for supporting the electrodes and the
    manually operative mechanism.

    61,     for consumable-electrode discharge devices of the fluid motor
    operated type provided with means for supporting the electrodes and the
    fluid motor regulating system.

    69,     for consumable-electrode discharge devices having frames and
    electrode supports for supporting the electrodes and an electric motor for
    supplying the motive power for feeding the consumable electrode.

    79,     for consumable-electrode discharge devices having frames and
    supports for supporting the electrodes and the power transmission means for
    transmitting motion to the electrodes of consumable-electrode discharge
    devices of the positive feed type where the control of the feeding is
    secured by controlling the transmission of power to the electrode.

    89      and 90, for consumable-electrode discharge devices provided with
    means for supporting thermostatically operated and/or thermostatically
    controlled electrode moving mechanism.

    98,     for consumable-electrode discharge devices provided with means for
    supporting the counterbalancing structure for counterbalancing the weight
    of the electrode.

    99,     for consumable-electrode discharge devices provided with means for
    supporting a retarding device for regulating the rate of movement of the
    electrode and/or the electrode regulating mechanism.

    113     and indented subclasses, and the subclasses referred to in the
    notes of these subclasses, for consumable-electrode discharge devices
    provided with means for supporting electromagnetically-operated and/or
    electromagnetically- controlled electrode moving mechanism.

    129,    for supporting structure provided with means to transfer the
    current from the lead-wires to the movable electrode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 238 for miscellaneous
    discharge devices which are provided with means for supporting the
    electrodes and other parts of the discharge device.  See subclasses 238,
    243, 267 and 268, where the discharge device is not enclosed within a
    sealed envelope.


CLS 314/131
TXT Devices under subclass 130 having an electrical switch supported by the
    discharge device structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for consumable-electrode discharge devices provided with an
    electric switch for shifting the current to another electrode or to another
    discharge device or lamp when the consumable electrode has been consumed or
    fails to maintain the discharge.

    11      and 17 and indented subclasses, for consumable-electrode discharge
    devices provided with an electric switch to either open the circuit or to
    close a shunt circuit about the discharge device when the consumable
    electrode has been consumed or fails to maintain the discharge.

    24,     for consumable-electrode discharge devices provided with an
    electric switch for controlling the operation of the feed regulating
    machinism so that the electrodes will be repeatedly separated and brought
    into physical contact is made between the electrodes so that the discharge
    is started.

    63,     for consumable-electrode discharge device systems having the feed
    regulating mechanism for the discharge device controlled by an electric
    switch, the operation of the switch being controlled by radiant energy
    means, such as radiant heat or light.

    70,     72, 73 and 74, for consumable-electrode discharge device systems
    having electric motor operated means for feeding the electrodes of the
    discharge device, and having the motor circuit controlled by an electric
    switch.

    114     and indented subclasses, for consumable-electrode discharge devices
    provided with either an electromagnet for moving the electrode or with an
    electromagnet which controls the operation of the feeding mechanism and
    having an electric switch which controls the circuit of the electromagnet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, for electrical switches
    of general application.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 32 and
    indented subclasses, especially subclasses 32, 47, 56, 63 and subclass 64,
    and indented subclasses, subclasses 72, 73 and subclass 74 and indented
    subclass, for all electric lamps and electric space discharge devices,
    other than consumable-electrode discharge devices which have structurally
    combined therewith an electric switch.


CLS 314/132
TXT Devices under subclass 130 having an electrical impedance supported by the
    discharge device structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13      and 14, for consumable-electrode discharge devices having an
    impedance which is placed in shunt circuit about the discharge device when
    the electrode is consumed or fails to maintain the discharge.

    113     and indented subclasses, where the impedance is the coil of the
    separating and/or feed control electromagnet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 32 and
    indented subclasses, especially subclasses 38, 40, 41 and indented
    subclasses, 46 and indented subclasses, 49, 52, and indented subclasses 58,
    and indented subclasses, and subclass 71 for all electric lamp and
    discharge devices which have structurally combined therewith an electrical
    impedance.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, appropriate subclasses, for
    electric generator regulators of general application.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    220-354, for systems for controlling the magnitude of the current and/or
    voltage in a single circuit.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for the structure of
    transformers and inductive reactors.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, appropriate subclasses, for electric resistor
    structure.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ for
    control circuits for electromagnetic devices, and subclasses 271+ and 503+
    for condensers.


CLS 314/133
TXT Devices under subclass 130 provided with means for guiding and maintaining
    the electrodes in alignment with each other or in the desired angular
    relation with respect to the discharge space.

    (1)     Note.  Continue the search in subclasses 5, 21, 22, 25, 39 and
    indented subclasses, and 45, and indented subclasses of this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 238 for miscellaneous
    discharge devices which are provided with means for supporting the
    electrodes in the desired position. See subclasses 238, 243, 267 and 268,
    where the discharge device is not inclosed in a sealed envelope.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 94+, for electric
    arc furnaces provided with guides for maintaining the furnace electrodes in
    proper position.

    384,    Bearings, subclass 7 and indented subclasses, for bearings for
    elements which have a sliding line movement upon the supporting member,
    especially subclass 29, wherein the bearing is a cylinder.


CLS 314/134
TXT Devices under subclass 130 wherein the supporting structure is adjustable
    so that the electrodes may be placed in different positions with respect to
    the supporting frame.

    (1)     Note.  Patents claiming specific adjusting means to maintain the
    electrodes in spaced relationship required for the maintenance of the
    electric discharge are classified in the subclasses above.  This subclass
    includes only the adjustable supports for the electrodes which permit the
    electrodes to be placed in different positions with respect to the
    supporting frame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 146, for
    miscellaneous discharge devices which have a movable electrode so that the
    electrodes may be placed in different positions with respect to each other.


CLS 314/135
TXT Systems under the class definition including means to regulate the current
    or voltage supplied to the discharge device.

    (1)     Note.  Continue the search in subclasses 115 and 116 of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132,    for patents relating to the means for mounting an impedance in the
    consumable electrodes type of discharge device structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 291 and
    indented subclasses, and the subclasses referred to in the notes to the
    definitions of those subclasses for miscellaneous systems which include
    regulating means for supplying electric current and/or potential to
    electric lamps and/or electric space discharge devices of the gas or vapor
    ionization type.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    220-354, for systems for controlling the magnitude of the current and/or
    voltage in a single circuit.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for the structure of
    transformers and inductive reactors.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ for
    miscellaneous systems of supplying current to an electromagnet.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 102+, for control
    systems for controlling the operation of the current and/or potential of
    electric arc furnaces.


CLS 314/136
TXT Miscellaneous consumable electrode electric space discharge devices and
    such devices in combination with the circuits for supplying electric
    current thereto which are not provided for in any of the other subclasses
    in this class.


CLS 315/
TTL ELECTRIC LAMP AND DISCHARGE  DEVICES:  SYSTEMS

CLS 315/
TXT Definitions of Terms Used.





    1.      LAMPS:
    Are defined for the purpose of classification in this class as including a
    device designed for converting electrical energy into ray energy,
    regardless of whether the ray energy is within the visible or invisible
    part of the spectrum, but excluding (1) generators of X-rays, and (2)
    generators designed primarily to generate infrared rays.  Lamps may be in
    the form of electric space discharge devices, for which see the next
    paragraph.





    2.      ELECTRIC SPACE DISCHARGE DEVICES:
    The shorter expression "DISCHARGE DEVICES" is used in these definitions,
    are defined for the purpose of classification in this class as including
    any device which is intended to have an electrical current flow between two
    spaced electrodes, at least part of the path followed by the discharge
    being constituted by a gas, vapor, or vacuum.





    3.      GAS OR VAPOR DISCHARGE DEVICE:
    Any type of electric space discharge which, as claimed, depends upon
    ionization of a gas or vapor for its operation. Discharge devices which
    have their discharge electrodes in an unconfined (non-enclosed) atmosphere
    as well as those having their discharge electrodes in a confined (enclosed)
    atmosphere are included in this definition.





    4.      HIGH-VACUUM TUBE:
    A vacuum tube evacuated to such a degree that its electrical
    characteristics are essentially unaffected by gaseous ionization.





    5.      PRINCIPAL ELECTRODES:
    The "two spaced electrodes" referred to in the definition of electric space
    discharge devices, between which the discharge current is primarily
    intended to flow.





    6.      DISCHARGE CONTROL DEVICE:
    Any means associated with the discharge device (for example only, an
    electromagnet, a control grid or an auxiliary discharge electrode) intended
    to be used to control or influence the discharge between the principal
    electrodes of the discharge device.





    7.      DISCHARGE CONTROL ELECTRODE:
    Any electrode which is designed to influence or control the discharge
    between the principal electrodes.  It may be a control grid or an auxiliary
    discharge electrode. It may depend for its effect on either its
    electro-static effect or on the current flow thereto.





    8.      AUXILIARY DISCHARGE ELECTRODE:
    An electrode which is connected in the circuit so that the discharge is
    initiated between it and one of the principal electrodes, the auxiliary
    discharge conditioning the discharge space between the principal electrodes
    so that a discharge between the principal electrodes can be established.





    9.      LOAD DEVICE:
    The device to which the system supplies electrical energy and which, as
    claimed, constitutes the final or ultimate device for utilizing the
    electrical energy of the system.



    This is a restricted class in which are assembled patents on the special
    types of electric lamp and electric space discharge device systems set
    forth in the following sections, and includes:

    (1)     STRUCTURAL COMBINATIONS WITH CIRCUIT ELEMENTS:

            Electric lamps and electric space discharge devices of any type
    (including cathode-ray tubes) with or without a discharge control device,
    combined with other circuit elements all of which (other than a mere source
    of current and/or potential supply if claimed) are structurally combined
    therewith to form a unitary device.  Such structurally combined circuit
    elements may be in either or both the input or output circuit of a
    discharge device, or in neither circuit, and may be used for any purpose.
    Such means appear in this class is subclasses 3+ and subclasses 32+.  If
    any circuit element is not structurally combined as stated above, the
    patent is treated as stated in the following sections, see sections 6, IV;
    7; and 8 especially.

    (2)     STRUCTURAL COMBINATIONS WITH HEATING AND/OR COOLING MEANS:

            The subject matter of section (1), combined with means for heating
    and/or cooling the lamp or discharge device structure, which heating and/or
    cooling means is either structurally combined with the lamp or discharge
    device, or with an electrical circuit element, or forms an electrical
    circuit element.  All electrical circuit elements (except a mere source of
    current and/or potential supply, if claimed) which are not structurally
    combined with the lamp or discharge device must be structurally combined
    with the heating and/or cooling means; see subclass 32 and indented
    subclasses.  If any circuit element is not structurally combined as stated
    in this and the preceding section (1), the patent is treated as stated in
    the following sections (see section 8, II, (d) for other
    temperature-modifying combinations).

    (3)     CATHODE-RAY TUBES:

            combined with an electric system for the supply and control of
    current and/or potential thereto as the ultimate load on the system.
    Sections (1) and (2), above, deal with other special cathode-ray tube
    systems in this class. Such means appear in this class (315) in subclasses
    1+.

    (4)             I       LAMPS AND/OR DISCHARGE DEVICES AS SOLE LOAD DEVICES:

                            with an electric system for supplying current
    and/or potential thereto. If there is any other type of electric load
    device, as either the sole ultimate load device or in addition to the lamp
    and/or discharge device load, the patent is in some other appropriate
    class.  The load may be constituted by one or more lamps alone, by one or
    more discharge devices alone, or by any combination therebetween subject to
    the limitations noted below in this section and in the following sections.
    Discharge devices having a claimed output circuit are in this class only in
    the special cases set forth in paragraphs (1), (2), and (6)

                    II      Where systems are provided with an impedance in the
    supply circuit of the lamp or discharge device, and the sole function of
    the impedance is to regulate current flow to the lamp or discharge device,
    the impedance is not considered a load device.

                    III     Systems wherein an impedance is substituted in the
    circuit when a lamp or discharge device is removed therefrom so that the
    impedance provides a substitute load on the system are included in this
    class, see subclass 119 and the indented subclasses.

    (5)     LAMPS:

            With an electric system for supply and control of current and/or
    potential thereto as the ultimate load on the system.

    (6)             I       ELECTRIC SPACE DISCHARGE DEVICES:

                            Combined with an electric system for the supply
    and/or control of current and/or potential supplied thereto, the discharge
    device being the ultimate load in the system, where the system of supply
    and/or control is to result as its sole function in either or both:

                            (a) causing a discharge to take place, or

                            (b) mere regulation of the discharge.

                    II      In this type of system, the output circuit may be
    claimed if it is claimed so broadly as to be in effect the mere completion
    of the circuit so that a discharge may take place.

                    III     This type of system is included even though the
    type of current flowing in the anode-cathode circuit is specified as being
    different from the supply current (as, for example, d.c. and a.c.,
    respectively, as in the mercury arc type of discharge device).

                    IV      Due to differences in operating characteristics
    between:

                            (c) gas or vapor discharge devices, and

                            (d) high vacuum discharge devices.

                            Systems limited to these two different types have
    been treated differently, see sections (7) and (8) below.

                    V       The preceding limitations cause exclusion from this
    class of:

                            (e) The regulation and/or control of the current
    and/or potential in a circuit by means of a discharge device, even though
    no load device in the regulated and/or controlled circuit is claimed, and
    the discharge device is under the terms of the claim the ultimate load
    device.

                            (f) Those systems having one or more discharge
    devices constituting the ultimate load on the system, where the system
    includes means which limit the system to use for purposes other than, or in
    addition to, (a) or (b) above (e.g., to amplify, modulate, etc.).

    (7)             I       GAS OR VAPOR DISCHARGE DEVICES:

                            combined with an electric system as defined in
    section (6) are included in this class when the claims are restricted to
    discharge devices of the gas or vapor type, and:

                            (a) where they are only principal electrodes,

                            (b) where there are one or more discharge control
    electrodes in addition to the principal electrodes which do not function to
    retain control of the discharge after it is initiated to regulate the same,

                            (c) where there is an electromagnetic discharge
    control device (other than or in addition to electrodes as in (a) or (b)
    even though it controls the discharge after it is initiated.

                    II      Where there is a discharge control electrode of any
    kind, or a nonelectrode discharge control device other than
    electromagnetic, and the system is so designed that the discharge control
    device or electrode retains control of the discharge after it is initiated
    to regulate the same (continuous control type), the patent is excluded from
    this class.

                    III     Where the discharge device in the system is
    disclosed as being of the gas or vapor type, but the claims are not so
    limited (the device being claimed broadly as a discharge device), the
    patent is not classified in this class, but in some other class appropriate
    to the subject matter claimed, except in the particular instances set forth
    in section (8).

    (8)     HIGH VACUUM-TYPE DISCHARGE DEVICES, AND GAS OR VAPOR-TYPE DISCHARGE
    DEVICES CLAIMED BROADLY:

            Combined with an electric system as defined in section (6) are
    included in this class only in the following particular situations (being
    in all other instances excluded):

                    I       Structural combinations as defined in sections (1)
    and (2) with or without discharge control means;

                    II      Where the only electrodes claimed are the principal
    electrodes (no discharge control device of any kind being claimed) and the
    patent is classifiable in one of the following subclasses:

                            (a) 86+ having means to automatically substitute a
    second source of current and/or potential supply

                            (b) 88+ having means to automatically substitute a
    second discharge device for an operating discharge device when it fails to
    operate properly,

                            (c) 94+ having means to supply current to the
    cathode or cathode heater of the discharge device,

                            (d) 112+ having means to modify the temperature of
    the discharge device, either the temperature modifying medium being
    automatically controlled or the discharge device supply circuit being
    controlled by the temperature modifying medium, (see section (2) on other
    temperature modifying combinations).

    (9)     PLURAL LOAD DEVICE SYSTEMS:

            Circuits are classified in this class as being plural load device
    systems where they have any one or any combination of the following, and in
    any circuit relationship, including where one is in a control circuit of
    another:

                    (a)     where the circuit claimed includes two or more
    lamps;

                    (b)     where the circuit claimed includes two or more
    discharge devices, at least two being limited in the claims to the gas or
    vapor type;

                    (c)     where the circuit claimed includes at least one
    lamp and at least one discharge device limited in the claims to the gas or
    vapor- type.

    (10)    ART USES AND COMBINATIONS WITH ART DEVICES:

            Only to the following limited extent, the lamp and/or discharge
    device system claimed is subject to all of the limitations of parts (1)
    through (9) of this definition. The must be no classification in any other
    class on the basis of the art use or combination with the particular
    article, device or apparatus claimed.  There mere designation of a lamp by
    an art name (as an ultraviolet or other special ray generator) or the mere
    designation of a discharge device or one or more of the principal
    electrodes thereof by an art name (as a spark plug, igniter, naming a
    principal electrode as work to be heated or welded) will not exclude the
    patent from this class in the absence of further art limitations.  For
    further details of the lines with particular arts, see the notes appended
    to the main class definition and to the definitions of the subclasses,
    particularly subclass 76 and indented subclasses for combinations with
    particular articles, devices, or apparatus.

    (11)    TESTING ELECTRIC LAMPS AND DISCHARGE DEVICES:

            Where the system is designed to operate the lamp or discharge
    device as a load device and the system includes means to indicate some
    condition thereof, the system is classified with the systems of operation
    in this class.  Subclasses 120+ and provide for such operating systems
    combined with signal, indicator, or alarm.  Electrical circuits, apparatus,
    and methods which are limited in their use to testing the operativeness or
    determining the characteristics of electric lamps or electric discharge
    devices of any type and which are limited in their use to the sole purpose
    of such testing are in Class 324, Electricity:  Measuring and Testing,
    subclasses 403+, even though the system includes an electric lamp or
    discharge device as the means for indicating the operativeness or
    characteristics of the device under test.

    (12)    Patents which claim a method of operating a lamp or a gas or vapor
    discharge device are classified in this class (315).  The patent is
    classified in the subclass which provides for the system which is required
    to operate the device.  For example, a claim which recites a method of
    operating a lamp by first passing a current of one magnitude through the
    lamp and in then increasing the current flow through the lamp would be
    classified in subclass 291 as a system having regulating means in the
    system.

    NOTES

    (1)     NOTE:  LAMP AND DISCHARGE DEVICE STRUCTURE:

            Patents claiming an electric lamp or discharge device structure and
    means broadly to supply electric energy or potentials thereto are
    classified in the classes noted below as a lamp or discharge device
    structure.  If the relative magnitude or relationship of the electric
    energy or potential is specified in the claims, the patent is classified as
    an electrical system and cross-referenced for the lamp or discharge device
    structure.  Where two or more lamps and/or discharge devices are
    structurally combined to form a unitary device (there being no circuit
    element in addition to such structure), the structural combination is
    classified in the classes noted below even though the electrodes thereof
    are interconnected, except in the following particular instances:

                    (a)     subclass 46 and indented subclasses and subclass 49
    for the combination of an incandescent filament lamp and a discharge device
    structurally combined to form a unitary structure, the filament connected
    to form a circuit impedance or heater for the discharge device load.


            For other structures and structural combinations, see classes:


    313,            Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses
    for the structure of electric lamps and discharge devices, per se.  See
    subclasses 1+ for a plurality of discharge devices (including discharge
    device lamps) or a discharge device and an incandescent lamp which are
    structurally combined to form a unitary device.

    314,            Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    which class takes such structures, even though combined with lamp and/or
    discharge devices of other types.

    (2)     NOTE:  SPACE DISCHARGE IGNITERS:

            This class provides for systems for supplying electric energy to
    one or more discharge devices of the "spark plug" or "ignition" type when
    the claims are limited to a discharge device.  Where the claims are not so
    limited, being drawn to an ignition device broadly (not limited to a
    discharge device, spark plug, or spark gap), the patent is placed in the
    appropriate igniter classification and cross-referenced to this class.
    Also ignition systems, even though limited to a discharge device, when
    claimed in combination with fuel burning apparatus, are classified with the
    type of fuel burning apparatus, (see also main class definition, section
    (10)).

            For such ignition device systems and combinations, see particularly
    classes:


    123,            Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 147 and 594+.

    290,            Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants, subclasses 13, 26, 33, 35, 37,
    and 41 for such plants having an internal combustion engine provided with
    ignition means of the discharge device type (spark plugs).

    361,            Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses
    247+.

    431,            Combustion, subclasses 264+ for a spark electrode in front
    of or adjacent the fuel discharge of a burner.

    (3)     NOTE:  LOAD DEVICES OTHER THAN OR IN ADDITION TO LAMPS AND/OR
    DISCHARGE DEVICES:

            (See main class definition section (4).  Where the system claimed
    includes a load device other than a lamp and/or discharge device, even
    though lamps and/or discharge devices constitute a part of the system,
    either as additional load devices or as part of the system of regulation
    and/or control of such other load device, the patent is excluded from this
    class, and will be found in the class appropriate to the type of load
    device or combined load devices.

            Class 315 provides for electrical systems limited to supplying
    electric current and/or potential to one or more electronic tubes of of the
    gas or vapor type.  Many of these systems inherently convert A.C. to D.C.
    or D.C. to A.C. Some are inherently oscillation generators.  Where the
    system is limited by claimed subject matter to supplying a load circuit, it
    is excluded from Class 315.  Merely claiming the circuit necessary to
    connect the anode to the cathode as a load circuit is not sufficient to
    exclude the system from Class 315.  Claiming a load device, either
    specifically or broadly in the output circuit will exclude the system from
    Class 315.  Claiming subject matter which would not be provided unless the
    system were to be used for supplying a load device is sufficient to exclude
    the system from Class 315. For example, reciting means in the output
    circuit responsive to overload conditions in output circuit to control the
    system will exclude the system from Class 315.  Attention is particularly
    directed to the following classes:


    307,            Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems,
    subclasses:


    11+     for plural load circuit systems; subclasses

    43+     for plural supply circuits or sources, particularly subclasses 48+
    and 66+ in which one of the sources of electrical current is a storage
    battery (see Class 320, below, for battery charging and/or discharging
    systems).

    154+    for systems for supplying one or more particular load devices not
    elsewhere classifiable but particularly subclass 157 in which the load is a
    lamp or discharge device.

    314,            Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 7 provides for systems for supplying such type discharge device
    and another type discharge device or lamp.

    320,            Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass for a battery or capacitor charging or discharging
    system.

    323,            Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems,
    subclasses 227 and 291 and the subclasses specified in the notes to the
    definitions of those subclasses for systems for controlling the magnitude
    of the current and/or voltage in a single circuit having a discharge device
    as the control means.  The discharge device may be either a vacuum tube or
    a gas or vapor tube.  The systems in Class 323 include more than the mere
    circuit for supplying electric current or potential to the discharge device
    for merely causing a discharge to take place within the tube or for
    regulating the discharge within the tube.  Many of the systems in Class 323
    are closely analogous to the systems in this class.  See section VII, B of
    the class definition of Class 323 for the line between this class (315) and
    Class 323.

    363,            Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 74+ for
    rectifying and derectifying systems with automatic voltage and/or current
    magnitude control wherein the control means may be an electronic tube
    having a discharge control means.  Many of the systems in Class 363 are
    closely analogous to the systems in this class (315).  See section VI, 7 of
    the class definition of Class 363 for the line between this class (315) and
    Class 363.

    378,            X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 91+ for
    circuits for energizing or control of X-ray devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 541+ for illuminated
    signs in combination with the systems for supplying electric current to the
    lamps.

    84,     Music, subclass 464 for electric lamp systems combined with musical
    instruments for providing color or light effect.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 80+ for electrostatic
    precipitators having voltage supply means or circuitry for applying
    electrical potential thereto.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 483 for methods and
    apparatus for subjecting foods and beverages to an electric space discharge.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, see note (2) above.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses
    for electric switches.  Some types of electric switches are closely
    analogous in structure to some types of electric space discharge devices.
    This is especially true with respect to the type of electric space
    discharge device where the electrodes of the discharge device are normally
    in contact under open circuit conditions, the electrodes being separated
    from each other when the current is applied to the circuit, the space
    discharge being established by separating or drawing apart the electrodes.
    An electric switch of the thermostatic type where the contacts of the
    switch are normally open when no current is applied to the circuit which
    includes the switch, the switch including means to establish an electric
    space discharge between the contacts, the space discharge heating the
    thermostat so that the thermostat moves the switch contacts into circuit
    closing position to establish a conductive path for the current through the
    contacts and to short-circuit or extinguish the space discharge, is closely
    analogous in structure to space discharge devices of the type which is
    classified in this class (315) in subclasses 56+ as a combined switch and
    discharge device.  The distinction between electric switches and space
    discharge devices, therefore, depends in some cases principally upon the
    disclosed purpose of the structure claimed by the patent.  Where the space
    discharge is only an incident to the separating of the switch contacts and
    the purpose of the structure is to open or close a circuit, the device will
    be considered an electric switch for the purpose of classification.  Where
    the purpose of the claimed structure is to establish an electric space
    discharge by contacting the electrodes with each other, the device is
    considered to be an electric space discharge device. This class (315)
    includes, in subclasses 56+, combined space discharge devices and electric
    switch structures where the device claimed includes electrodes other than
    the switch electrodes, their supports, or lead-in means for establishing an
    electric space discharge.  To be classified in Class 315, the device
    claimed must include at least one electrode which has no purpose other than
    to operate as an electric space discharge electrode. Where the only
    discharge electrodes are also switch means, the patent will be classified
    in Class 200.



            For switches which are somewhat analogous in structure to space
    discharge devices, see Class 200, subclasses:



    144,            where the switch is provided with means to separate the
    switch contacts from each other to open the circuit, the switch structure
    including means to extinguish the space discharge formed when the switch
    contacts are opened.

    182+,   for mercury and other liquid contact switches which are closely
    analogous in structure to mercury vapor and other liquid electrode lamps
    and discharge devices.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 155+, 164+,
    192.1+, and 298.01+ for methods for subjecting materials to electric space
    discharges for performing chemical changes and analogous purposes.  See
    Class 422, Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 186+ for apparatus for subjecting
    reactants to electromagnetic wave energy (other than visible light) or
    corpuscular radiation; e.g. radioactive particles, for initiating or
    perfecting a reaction.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 50+, especially indented subclasses
    121.11+ for systems for supplying electrical energy to arc welding and/or
    heating apparatus.  Class 315 provides electric systems for supplying
    electric current to an electric arc where the arc is specified by name only
    as a welding and/or heating arc.  The patent will not be excluded from
    Class 315 even though one of the electrodes is named as the material or
    object broadly defined, such as "the work to be welded and/or heated".
    Where the claimed subject matter is limited to the welding and/or heating
    art, such as, for example, by claiming the means for holding, handling,
    feeding, and/or moving the work to be welded and/or heated, the patent is
    classified in Class 219.

    250,    Radiant Energy, is the generic class for electric discharge
    systems.  In this class, subclass:


    200+,   is the generic place for photoelectric device circuits. Class 315
    provides for systems wherein the ultimate load device in the system is
    either a lamp or gas or vapor discharge device, and the system includes
    means for controlling the operation of the load device by means of radiant
    energy.  In Class 315, the load device may be a radiant energy sensitive
    device; that is a lamp or discharge device whose operation is altered when
    subjected to radiant energy, or the system may include a radiant energy
    sensitive device such as a photocell which controls the operation of the
    load device.

    251,            provides for devices for producing and propagating a
    unidirectional stream of neutral molecules or atoms through a vacuum,
    usually with thermal velocity.

    281+,   provides for methods and apparatus for the ionic separation or
    analysis of a material utilizing the mass to electric charge ratio of ionic
    particles of the material.

    324+,   has methods and apparatus of irradiating material by corona
    radiation.

    432+,   is the place for irradiating fluent material which is contained,
    supported, or transferred from one place to another. subclasses 440.11+ is
    for a supported object subjected to charged particles used to inspect the
    object for a radiant source, and subclasses 454.11+, in addition to an
    irradiated object support, includes a support for a radiation source.

    458.1+, is the generic place for methods and apparatus to irradiate
    fluorescent or phosphorescent devices including self-luminous articles
    particularly those used as signalling alignment or indicating devices.

    492.1+, is the generic place for the irradiation of material or objects by
    wave or particles of energy of the nuclear or electromagnetic wave type.
    Where not elsewhere classified, Class 315 includes systems provided with a
    load device of the con- fined gas or vapor type with means regulating the
    gas or vapor pressure in the confined space, or systems having a discharge
    device load with means to supply fluent material to the outer electrode
    discharge space, or systems having a load device and provided with means to
    supply fluent material to the load device to modify the temperature of the
    discharge device, only when the disclosed or claimed purpose of the fluent
    material supply is to modify the operation of the discharge device.  Where
    the purpose of the claimed subject matter is to treat the fluent material
    either with rays generated by the discharge, or to subject the material to
    the influence of the discharge, the patent is classified in Class 250 or
    other appropriate class which provides for the particular art.

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants, see (2) Note above.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, see (3) Note
    above.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, see (1) Note above.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Consumable Electrodes,
    appropriate subclasses for electric lamps and discharge devices of the
    consumable electrode type, and such devices in combination with the
    electric system for supplying current or potential to the device.  Also see
    notes (1) and (3) above.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, see (3) Note
    above.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 403+ for apparatus
    or methods for electrically testing electric lamps or space discharge
    devices.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, for miscellaneous electron discharge device circuits.

    329,    Demodulators, for amplitude, frequency, phase, or pulse demodulator
    which may include an electron discharge device as a demodulating element
    (315).

    330,    Amplifiers, appropriate subclasses for amplifier systems including
    gas tubes, cathode-ray tubes, traveling wave tubes, magnetrons, etc., which
    are of the type of tubes in circuits classified in this class.

    331,    Oscillators, is the generic class for electrical oscillators.  Many
    systems using electric lamps of the gaseous or vapor discharge type
    inherently generate oscillations during operation. Class 315, therefore,
    provides for all systems for merely supplying electric current or potential
    to gaseous or vapor discharge devices whether the system is claimed as an
    oscillation generator or merely as a lamp circuit provided that the system
    is not limited by claimed subject matter to use as an oscillation
    generator, such as, for example, means to transfer the oscillating electric
    energy to another circuit or means to use the oscillating energy.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    appropriate subclasses for thermal switches which are combined with space
    discharge devices.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, appropriate subclasses for electric
    signals and signaling systems wherein an electric lamp is used as the
    signal means, and for miscellaneous signaling systems which include
    discharge devices as a part thereof.  Merely defining the lamp as a signal
    will not exclude the patent from Class 315, even though the circuit of the
    lamp is controlled in accordance with the operated or nonoperated condition
    of some device.  Class 315 provides in subclasses 120 and 129+ for supply
    systems for lamps and gas or vapor discharge devices which include a signal
    to indicate the condition of the load device or the circuit.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, appropriate subclasses for selective
    control of data presentation on a display device.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 247+ for
    the detonation of an explosive charge.

    362,    Illumination, generic class for illuminating devices provided with
    means to modify and/or distribute the illumination, and/or with protective
    means, such as casings, globes, or guards, and for the supports and holders
    for lamps (other than mere sockets) and such electric lamp illuminating
    devices when claimed in combination with the source of supply for the lamp.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    various conversion systems including electronic tubes and their control.
    The systems of Class 363 are closely analogous to the systems of this class
    (315).  In many cases, the distinction between a Class 363 system and a
    Class 315 system will be significant claiming of a load circuit or load
    device.  Many of the systems of Class 315 will inherently operate as a
    current convertor because of the basic property of many electronic tubes to
    conduct current in one direction only.  In such cases, the inclusion of the
    load circuit or load device may be determinative as to whether the system
    as claimed relates to a conversion system.  The following subclasses of
    Class 363 are of particular interest.  See subclasses 50+ for protective
    systems for electronic tube current convertors; subclasses 74+ for current
    conversion systems with automatic voltage and/or current magnitude control
    which may include electronic tube control; subclasses 83, 94, and 99 for
    current conversion systems with electronic tube line circuit control means;
    subclasses 111+ for electronic tube current conversion systems; subclass
    151 for electronic tube phase conversion systems; subclasses 166+ for
    electronic tube frequency conversion systems, see (3) Note above.  For the
    line between this class (315) and Class 363, see section VI, 7 of the class
    definition of Class 363.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 742 for
    the use of a CRT in digital arithmetical operations, and subclass 855 for
    the use of CRT in function generation.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 60+ for electric
    arc furnaces.  Class 315 provides for systems for supplying electric
    current to arc furnaces provided that the arc furnace is included by name
    only. Where the claims include significant furnaces structure, or are
    otherwise limited to the furnaces art, the patent is classified in Class
    373.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclasses 91+ for circuits for energizing or controlling
    X-ray tubes.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 48+ for pumps utilizing a space discharge.  See
    subclass 49 of Class 417 for a statement of the line.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 22+ for processes of disinfecting,
    deodorizing, preserving, or sterilizing using an electric space charge
    device.

    431,    Combustion, see note (2) above.


CLS 315/1
TXT Subject matter under the class definition for supplying electric current
    and/or potential to cathode-ray tubes, and/or cathode-ray tubes combined
    with a circuit element which is structurally combined with the cathode-ray
    tube so as to form a unitary device.

    (1)     Note.  Cathode-ray tubes are defined for the purpose of
    classification in this subclass as an electric space discharge device which
    is provided with means to form the electric space discharge into a
    restricted beam or ray, usually pencil- like.

    (2)     Note.  Where a system includes the cathode-ray tube system as a
    part thereof, the patent is excluded and will be found with the particular
    art which provides for the complete system.

    (3)     Note.  These subclasses do not include systems which are limited by
    claimed subject matter to using the cathode-ray tube for controlling the
    current and/or potential supplied to a load device other than a cathode-ray
    tube, for which see the class appropriate to the load device.  Where the
    output circuit claimed includes more circuit elements than is necessary for
    the mere current and/or potential supply for the cathode-ray tube, the
    system is considered to be limited to use for supplying and/or controlling
    the current and/or potential to load device and, therefore, excluded from
    these subclasses.

    (4)     Note.  Systems which include a cath-ode-ray tube having either a
    discharge intensity modulating means or a discharge focusing means and
    discharge deflecting means are excluded from these subclasses where the
    claims include significant features of the circuits for supplying the
    controlling currents and/or potentials to the modulating means or focusing
    means and the deflecting means from the controlling source.  For example, a
    system which includes means for separating the video or image and
    synchronizing signals from each other and applying them to the cathode-ray
    tube is classified with the art to which the system relates; i.e.,
    television if the purpose of the system is to reproduce an optical image.

            Included in these subclasses are systems which recite broadly means
    for applying current and/or potential to the intensity control means or the
    focusing means and to the deflecting electrodes as well as patents which
    claim systems for controlling the discharge intensity or the focusing
    solely in dependence upon conditions in the cathode-ray tube current or
    potential supply system, such as, for example, applying a control potential
    to the intensity control means or focusing means in dependence upon the
    rate of ray deflection or in dependence upon the direction of ray
    deflection (blackout circuits).

    (5)     Note.  Merely claiming either the source of signal potential for
    controlling the discharge intensity control means, the focusing means, or
    the discharge deflecting means will not exclude the patent from these
    subclasses as long as the source of signal potential is claimed broadly so
    that it could be any source of potential.  Where the system claimed
    includes a source of signal potentials and means to separate the potentials
    and to apply one to the vertical sweep means, and the other to the
    horizontal sweep means, the patent is not excluded from these subclasses as
    long as the source of signal potential is claimed broadly and is no more
    than a source of periodic potentials.  Where such synchronizing circuit for
    the ray deflecting means is claimed in addition to significant features of
    the ray modulating circuit, the patent is excluded.

    (6)     Note.  Merely claiming the source of signals to control the start
    of the ray deflecting circuit as a synchronizing potential will not exclude
    the patent from these subclasses as long as the source of ray deflecting
    control potential is claimed broadly and is only the control potential for
    the ray deflecting means.

    (7)     Note.  These subclasses do not include the combination of a
    cathode-ray tube and mechanical or optical devices, such as lenses,
    mirrors, et cetera, which are used with the cathode-ray tube even if the
    system of supply for the cathode-ray tube is claimed.  Merely using a
    voltage to deflect a cathode-ray beam so as to form a scale upon the screen
    of the cathode-ray tube will not exclude the patent from Class 315.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 281+ for methods and apparatus for the
    ionic separation or analysis of materials utilizing the mass to electric
    charge ratio of ionic particles of the material.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 2.1 for the
    structural combination of a cathode-ray tube combined with an electric
    space discharge device or an electric lamp so as to form a unitary device,
    and subclasses 364+ for cathode-ray tube structures.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 88 for devices for
    indicating the phase relations of electric quantities, which devices
    comprise cathode-ray tubes, and subclass 121 for cathode-ray galvanometers.
     Where the system claimed includes means for applying a current or
    potential under examination, or an unknown current or voltage, to the
    cathode-ray tube, the system is not excluded from Class 315 unless some
    means is claimed to enable the desired information to be derived other than
    merely observing the trace of the ray on an uncharted luminous screen, or
    unless the cathode-ray tube is claimed in combination with significant
    features of the circuit to be investigated.  Merely naming the circuit to
    be investigated as a source of pulsating or alternating current will not be
    sufficient to exclude the patent from Class 315.

    329,    Demodulators, for demodulators which may include an electron
    discharge device.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 43 and 44+ for amplifier systems including
    electron beam tubes.

    346,    Recorders, appropriate subclass for cathode-ray devices in
    combination with photographic recording means.  Class 346 provides for such
    combinations where the system for operating the cathode-ray tube is claimed
    when the system is of general application and not otherwise classified.

    348,    Television, subclasses 284+, 325+, 377+, 379, 380+, and 805+ for
    television systems which include a cathode-ray tube.  Cathode-ray tubes in
    combination with optical means, such as lenses, mirrors, etc., are in Class
    386, subclass 130 when used for television, and Class 358, subclasses 500+
    for synchronizing in facsimile systems which include a cathode-ray tube.
    See Notes (4), (5), and (6) above for the line between subclasses 500+ and
    those subclasses (1+).

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 91+ for X-ray
    tube circuits.


CLS 315/3
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 in which cathode-ray tubes are combined
    with circuit elements, all of which are structurally combined therewith to
    form a unitary device, see main class definition, sections (1) and (2).

    (1)     Note.  The circuit element may be mounted within or on the base or
    envelope of the cathode-ray tube.

    (2)     Note.  These subclasses include the combination of a cathode-ray
    tube load device and a circuit element where the tube and the circuit
    element are formed of separable parts, but are provided with means for
    fastening or assembling the parts together to form a unitary device.

    (3)     Note.  Examples of devices considered to be circuit elements are
    electric switches, resistances, capacities, inductors, transmission lines
    of the distributed parameter type (e.g., coaxial lines), waveguides,
    antennas, transformers, structures formed so as to act as if possessed of
    distributed inductance and capacitance (e.g., resonators) and any other
    circuit element.

    (4)     Note.  The circuit combined with the cathode-ray tube need not be a
    circuit element to be used in the circuit of the cathode-ray tube load
    device, but may be provided with separate terminals so as to be usable in
    any desired relation.

    (5)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses include cathode-ray tubes
    wherein the electrodes and/or the electrode leads are formed so as to
    function as inductances.  This and the indented subclasses do not include
    cathode-ray tubes wherein the electrodes are formed of resistive material
    and no other circuit element is combined with the cathode-ray tube.

    (6)     Note.  Patents claiming a cathode-ray tube in combination with a
    separable socket receptacle or connector for the cathode-ray tube, the
    socket receptacles or connector including a circuit element, are not
    classified in these subclasses, but will be found either in subclass 1 or
    in the other subclasses under subclass 1.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     and indented subclasses for other types of electric discharge
    devices and for electric lamps combined with circuit elements, all of which
    are structurally combined to form a unitary device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 365+ provides for
    cathode- ray tubes which have a photosensitive electrode.  Included in
    these subclasses in Class 313 are cathode-ray tubes where the
    photosensitive electrode is not in physical contact with a conductive
    supporting base or where the conductive supporting base is of high
    resistance material.  No effort has been made to separate the cathode-ray
    tubes with photosensitive electrodes such as mosaic electrodes from each
    other on the basis of whether or not the electrode has a capacitor effect,
    a resistance effect, or is conductively connected to its lead-in conductor.
     All such cath-ode-ray tube structure has been placed in subclasses 365+ of
    Class 313.


CLS 315/3.5
TXT Subject matter under subclass 3 in which a transmission line or device
    arranged to propagate a traveling electromagnetic wave is constructed and
    arranged to have a wave component the velocity of which is reduced in
    comparison to the wave velocity in free space; and in conjunction therewith
    are means for generating an electron beam whose path is in such proximity
    to the path of said traveling wave component as to permit an exchange of
    energy between such beam and the traveling wave propagated along the
    transmission path.

    (1)     Note.  Transmission line or device is defined to include any device
    which is used to guide or constrain electrical wave energy and to convey
    the energy from one place to another.  Included are conductors and
    waveguides.

    (2)     Note.  The transmission device may be constructed as a spiral or
    helix so that the wave has an axial velocity component along the helix
    which is lower than the free space velocity of the wave, or the
    transmission device may be loaded as by inductive members to reduce the
    velocity of the traveling wave.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for cathode-ray tubes of the traveling wave type not included in
    this subclass or subclasses 4+.

    4+,     for other cathode-ray tubes which have structurally combined
    therewith an inductive or distributed parameter-type inductive structure
    (e.g., waveguide, coaxial cable, or parallel wire transmission line).  See
    subclasses 5+ for traveling wave-type cathode-ray tubes having a hollow
    transmission line (e.g., waveguide) for a traveling wave, and having an
    electron beam means which is transverse to the transmission line so that
    energy may be exchanged between the beam and the traveling wave.

    39.3,   for other traveling wave-type electronic tubes having a velocity
    reducing-type transmission line but which do not have the space discharge
    path focussed or otherwise shaped into a beam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 600 for miscellaneous circuits with particular beam tube
    structure.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 43 for amplifier systems having traveling wave
    tubes. See section XVI of the Class Definition of Class 330.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 82 for oscillation generating systems using
    beam tubes of the traveling wave type.

    332,    Modulators, especially subclasses 134, 147+, and 165+  for
    modulator systems using traveling wave tubes of the type classified in this
    subclass.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 22 for transmission
    lines of the distributed parameter type (e.g., waveguides, long lines)
    having dissipating terminations, subclasses 138+ for delay networks,
    subclasses 32+ for impedance matching networks for transmission lines,
    subclass 81 for transmission lines of the long line with an attenuator
    means, and attenuators especially designed for use over a frequency band or
    for use in transmission lines of the distributed parameter type, and
    subclasses 236+ for the structure of transmission lines of the distributed
    parameter type.


CLS 315/3.6
TXT Subject matter under subclass 3.5 which is provided with a plurality of
    transmission lines or devices, or which has the transmission line or device
    constructed so as to have a section which has different characteristics
    from another section.

    (1)     Note.  For example, the device may have a plurality of beams and a
    plurality of transmission lines, or a single beam with a plurality of
    transmission lines arranged parallel to each other or in series relation
    along the path of the beam, or may have the transmission line arranged to
    have different retarding times along its length or have portions provided
    with coatings or other means to provide different attenuation at different
    portions of the line.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not include subject matter under subclass
    3.5 where the transmission line or device is only provided with impedance
    matching means designed to facilitate the coupling of the transmission line
    or device to an input or output coupling means (even though such impedance
    matching means involves differences in structure in the transmission line
    or device such as changing the spacing of the turns of a spiral
    transmission line).  Such subject matter is classified in subclass 3.5 in
    the absence of other structure, causing classification in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.16+,  5.27, 5.28, and 5.39+, for traveling wave tubes having a plurality
    of hollow transmission lines (e.g., waveguides), at least one line being
    designed to propagate a traveling wave, and having means producing an
    electron beam transverse to the transmission lines so that energy may be
    exchanged between the beam and the energy in the transmission lines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 22 for transmission
    lines of the distributed parameter type having dissipating terminators,
    subclass 81 for transmission lines and devices with an attenuator means and
    attenuators especially designed for use with transmission lines and devices
    of the distributed parameter type, and subclasses 236+ for the structure of
    transmission lines and devices of the distributed parameter type.


CLS 315/4
TXT Subject matter under subclass 3 wherein the circuit element structurally
    combined with the cathode-ray tube is an inductor or a structure formed so
    as to act as if it possessed inductance with or without capacitance.

    (1)     Note.  The inductive circuit structure may be a waveguide, a
    coaxial line, a hollow resonator, or a parallel wire transmission line or
    any other structure having or acting as if it had inductance or inductance
    and capacitance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39+,    for other discharge devices which have structurally combined
    therewith a waveguide, coaxial cable, or other transmission line having
    distributed inductance and capacitance.

    39.51+, for magnetrons which have an electrode with a portion formed to
    provide both distributed inductance and capacitance and a magnetic means
    for influencing the space discharge.

    40,     for other discharge devices having an electrode formed as an
    inductor or as a structure having inductive impedance.

    62,     and the subclasses specified in the notes to the definition of that
    subclass, for other discharge devices which are structurally combined with
    an inductive impedance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 219+ for electric
    resonators of the distributed parameter type, per se, and subclasses 236+
    for other transmission line structure having distributed inductance and
    capacitance such as waveguides, coaxial cables, etc.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for the structure of
    transformers and inductive reactors.


CLS 315/5
TXT Subject matter under subclass 4 wherein the inductor or inductive and
    capacitive device constitutes a substantially closed hollow conductive
    structure having, or acting as if it had distributed inductance and/or
    capacitance, the ray traversing at least part of the hollow space, and
    usually passing through the conductive structure by openings provided in
    the conductive structure.

    (1)     Note.  The conductive structure may be a waveguide, cavity
    resonator, or coaxial line.  An electromagnetic field usually exits in the
    hollow space, energy being transferred between the ray and the field.  A
    parallel wire Lecher-type line with the ray passing between the wires is
    not, in itself, a hollow distributed parameter device for classification
    here, but rather is classified in subclass 4 above. However, where the
    Lecher line has added portions to provide a hollow space or includes holes
    in its wires for passage of the ray, classification is in these subclasses
    (5+).

    (2)     Note.  For classification here the ray may originate within the
    device and either pass beyond or terminate within the device; or the ray
    may originate beyond the device and either pass through or terminate within
    the device. Where the ray merely passes across an opening in the hollow
    distributed parameter device without entry, classification is in subclass 4
    above, even though a coupling exists between the ray and the
    electromagnetic field within the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.5+,   for traveling wave tubes with delay-type transmission lines, which
    may have distributed parameters.

    14+,    for other cathode-ray tube systems wherein a plurality of means are
    provided accelerating and/or decelerating the electrons in the cathode-ray.

    39.51+  and 40, for other discharge devices having an electrode formed as
    an inductive impedance or inductive structure.

    41+,    for other electric discharge devices having an inductive impedance
    which is structurally combined with the discharge device connected between
    two of the electrodes of the discharge device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 45+ for amplifiers having an electron beam
    tube coupled to cavity resonator, including those of types classified in
    this and indented subclasses.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 81+ for electrical oscillators using a beam
    tube wherein the beam of charged particles passes through or into a hollow
    distributed parameter device, particularly indented subclass 83 wherein the
    beam passes through plural cavities.  See also the reference to Class 331
    under "SEARCH CLASS" in the class definition.

    332,    Modulators, especially subclasses 131+, 147+, and 165+ for electron
    bunching-type modulators.  See also (3) Note under the Class Definition.


CLS 315/5.11
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5 including a secondary emission electrode on
    which the ray impinges to produce another ray or to augment the impinging
    ray.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.14+,  for a hollow distributed parameter device having a plurality of
    rays passing through or in.

    12.1,   for cathode-ray tube circuits generally with secondary emission.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 399+ for
    cathode-ray tubes, per se, having a secondary emission electrode.


CLS 315/5.12
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5.11 wherein the ray passing through or in
    the hollow device impinges on a secondary emission electrode to produce
    another ray which passes through or in the same device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.18+,  for a hollow distributed parameter device having a ray passing
    through or in, and returning to the device by other than secondary emission
    means.


CLS 315/5.13
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5 including a magnetron, the hollow device
    through which the ray passes constituting the resonator of the magnetron.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass usually is a magnetron
    having an additional cathode projecting a ray through the magnetron
    resonator for tuning purposes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.14+,  for a hollow distributed parameter device having a plurality of
    rays passing through or in.

    5.53+,  for a hollow distributed parameter device having a ray passing
    through or in and involving tuning.

    39.51,  for distributed parameter resonator type magnetrons, and especially
    subclass 39.57 for such magnetrons with variable tuning by electron
    emission in or adjacent the resonator space, no means being included to
    form the emission into a restricted beam or ray.


CLS 315/5.14
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5 wherein each of a plurality of distinct
    rays pass through or in a single hollow device.

    (1)     Note.  A plurality of rays exit as when projected from separate or
    distinguishable cathodes.  When a single cathode projects a ray which is
    broken into a plurality of pencil rays as by an apertured mask or other
    dividing structure, these pencil rays are not considered plural for
    purposes of classification in this subclass. When two distinct cathodes
    produce each a ray which merges over at least a part of the ray path,
    classification is not barred from this subclass.  See especially indented
    subclass 5.15.  A mere plurality of structures each having a hollow
    distributed parameter device with a ray passing therethrough is not
    classified here, but elsewhere under subclass 5.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.12,   for a hollow distributed parameter device with a ray passing
    through or in, and a second ray also passing through or in and produced by
    the first ray through secondary emission.

    5.13,   for magnetrons having a ray passing through or in the hollow
    distributed parameter portion.

    5.18+,  for a hollow distributed parameter device, where the ray, after
    passing through or in, returns to the hollow device, and especially
    indented subclass 5.23 where the device is thermally tuned as by a
    cathode-ray.

    13.1,   for plural ray cathode-ray tube circuits generally.


CLS 315/5.15
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5.14 wherein the plurality of rays are
    projected along the same path, at least during passage in or through the
    hollow device.

    (1)     Note.  Mere intersection in the hollow device of two rays projected
    in different directions is not sufficient for classification here, but
    rather in subclass 5.14 above.


CLS 315/5.16
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5.14 together with an additional hollow
    distributed parameter device, the plurality of rays passing through or in
    the additional device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.27    and 5.28, for plural hollow distributed parameter devices having a
    ray passing through or in, which ray is deflected or reflected.

    5.39+,  for plural hollow distributed parameter devices generally having a
    ray passing through or in.


CLS 315/5.17
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5.16 wherein one of the rays is projected in
    a reverse direction from the other ray or rays through the respective
    hollow devices, to constitute a feedback coupling from the output to the
    input device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.44+,  for plural hollow distributed parameter devices having a ray
    passing through or in, and a feedback connection between the devices.


CLS 315/5.18
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5 wherein substantially all of the ray passes
    from the interior of the hollow device and beyond the exterior of the
    device, and then returns to the interior of the device.

    (1)     Note.  The ray may return to the hollow device by the same path as
    it leaves the device as a result of reflection, or the ray may follow a
    curved path as a result of deflection, or the ray may follow a straight
    path, the device being formed to intercept the ray after the ray passes out
    of the device.

    (2)     Note.  For classification in this and the indented subclasses, it
    is necessary that the ray return to the interior of the device.  When the
    ray merely returns to engage the exterior of the device, classification is
    in subclasses 5.24+ or 5.33.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.12,   for a hollow distributed parameter device with a ray returning
    thereto as a result of secondary emission.

    5.24+,  for a hollow distributed parameter device whose ray passing through
    or in is deflected or reflected.  See (2) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 84 for electric wave generating systems
    utilizing a charged particle or electron beam tube of the reflex type.


CLS 315/5.19
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5.18 wherein the ray in returning to the
    hollow device retraces the path followed in leaving the device, and/or
    wherein the ray reenters the hollow device through the same aperture as it
    left the device.


CLS 315/5.21
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5.19 wherein the hollow device is resonant at
    a particular frequency, together with structure for changing or permitting
    change in the resonant frequency.

    (1)     Note.  Reflex klystrons whose frequency is controlled by variation
    of the repeller voltage are not classified here, but in subclass 5.19, if
    otherwise within the scope of subclass 5.19.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.46+,  for plural tunable hollow distributed parameter devices having a
    ray passing through or in.

    5.53+,  for single tunable hollow distributed parameter devices generally
    having a ray passing through or in.


CLS 315/5.22
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5.21, wherein the hollow device has a
    flexible wall to adjust the shape or a dimension of the device, usually for
    varying the width of the gap in the device across which the cathode-ray
    travels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.48,   for plural hollow distributed parameter devices having a ray
    passing through or in, at least one of the devices having a flexible wall
    for tuning purposes.

    5.54,   for a single plural hollow distributed parameter device having a
    ray passing through or in, and having a flexible wall for tuning purposes.


CLS 315/5.23
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5.22 including structure which is connected
    to or part of the flexible wall for moving this wall in response to a
    temperature change induced in the structure, or for compensating for
    movement of this wall due to temperature effects.


CLS 315/5.24
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5 wherein structure is provided for changing
    the path of substantially the entire ray from a first direction to a second
    direction.

    (1)     Note.  Only patents are classified here the entire cross section of
    whose ray is deflected from a first to a second direction.  Focusing,
    concentrating, dispersing, and velocity sorting the ray are classified
    elsewhere.  See for example subclasses 5.34+ and 5.38.

    (2)     Note.  The deflection may be greater than 90o and may even be 180o
    to constitute a complete reflection of the ray.  However, see subclasses
    5.18+ for subject matter under subclass 5 where the ray is reflected or
    deflected to return to the device.

    (3)     Note.  The deflected ray may also be rotated, as for example, in a
    conical path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.11+,  for a hollow distributed parameter device with a ray passing
    through or in, whose effective direction is changed by a secondary emission
    grid.

    5.18+,  for a hollow distributed parameter device wherein the ray after
    passing through or in is deflected or reflected to return to the device.
    See also (2) Note above.

    5.34+,  for a hollow distributed parameter device with a ray passing
    through or in which is focused or concentrated.  See also (1) Note above.

    5.38,   for a hollow distributed parameter device with a ray passing
    through or in, and including an anode which disperses or scatters the ray
    therein.

    364+,   for cathode-ray tube circuits generally, wherein the cathode is
    deflected.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 80 for electric wave generating systems
    utilizing a charged particle or electron beam tube with beam sweeping or
    deflecting means.


CLS 315/5.25
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5.24 wherein the hollow device is provided
    with an opening in its wall, the ray sweeping between the opening and the
    wall to be alternately passed and blocked.


CLS 315/5.26
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5.24 wherein the hollow device deflects the
    ray passing through or in.


CLS 315/5.27
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5.26 including a plurality of hollow
    distributed parameter devices through or in which a single ray passes, at
    least one of the hollow devices deflecting the ray.

    (1)     Note.  The hollow devices may be arranged to successively deflect
    the ray passing through or in or one device may be arranged to deflect the
    ray while the other device collects the deflected ray.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.16+,  for plural hollow distributed parameter devices wherein each of a
    plurality of rays passes through all the devices.

    5.28,   for plural hollow distributed parameter devices having a single ray
    passing through or in, the ray being deflected by structure other than the
    device.

    5.39+,  for plural hollow distributed parameter devices in general having a
    single ray passing in or through.


CLS 315/5.28
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5.24, including a plurality of hollow
    distributed parameter devices having a single ray passing through or in.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.16+,  for plural hollow distributed parameter devices, wherein each of a
    plurality of rays passes through all the devices.

    5.27,   for plural hollow distributed parameter devices having a single ray
    passing through or in, wherein at least one of the devices deflects the ray.

    5.39+,  for plural hollow devices in general having a single ray passing in
    or through.


CLS 315/5.29
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5 wherein the ray has a cross sectional
    dimension which is significantly related to and an appreciable part of the
    wavelength of signal energy in the cathode-ray tube, and/or wherein the ray
    has a significant shape; the dimension and/or shape usually persisting over
    the entire path of the ray, and at least during passage through the device.

    (1)     Note.  The patents in this main subclass (5.29) usually have a flat
    weblike ray.

    (2)     Note.  The particular shape and/or dimension is usually produced by
    a cathode of particular shape and/or dimension; e.g. elongated, annular, or
    cylindrical cathode.

    (3)     Note.  Subject matter including grids of distributed parameter
    devices which have openings peculiarly adapted to pass rays of a particular
    transverse shape or dimension are classified in this subclass, the ray or
    the means producing the ray being recited in the claim.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.14+,  for a hollow distributed parameter device with plural rays passing
    through or in, the rays having a particular transverse dimension and/or
    shape.

    5.24+,  for a hollow distributed parameter device with a ray passing
    through or in, wherein the deflection of the ray provides a ray path having
    a particular shape or dimension, such as a particular bent or spiral ray.

    5.37,   for a distributed parameter device with a ray passing through or
    in, wherein the grids have a particular shape or dimension not related to
    the transverse shape or dimension of the ray.  See (2) Note above.


CLS 315/5.31
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5.29, wherein the ray is formed as a hollow
    tube with the cathode at one end, which ray may be circular or rectangular
    in cross section.


CLS 315/5.32
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5.29, wherein the ray is formed as a flat
    disk with the cathode positioned in a plane of the disk, and at the center
    of the disk or coaxial with the center of the disk.


CLS 315/5.33
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5 wherein the hollow device also constitutes
    a ray anode or cathode, or wherein the ray anode or cathode is an integral
    part of the hollow device, or wherein the ray anode or cathode is mounted
    in a wall of the hollow device and has an appreciable portion within the
    interior space of the hollow device.

    (1)     Note.  Where the ray anode or cathode is integral with the hollow
    device, but entirely external to the hollow space and separated from the
    hollow space by a grid, classification is not in this subclass, but in
    subclasses 5.37 or 5.38 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.38,   for a hollow distributed parameter device with a ray passing in or
    through, and including a particular anode or collector structure.


CLS 315/5.34
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5 wherein the cathode-ray tube is provided
    with means for focusing and/or concentrating the cathode-ray.

    (1)     Note.  Concentrating or focusing the cathode-ray is used in this
    definition to mean either to reduce the cross section area of the
    cathode-ray across its width or to bring the ray to a focus; that is, the
    ray is either converged toward a point, or is diverged as if it had
    originated at a point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.24+,  for a hollow distributed parameter device wherein the entire cross
    section of the ray passing through or in is substantially uniformly
    deflected in one direction.

    5.41,   for hollow distributed parameter devices wherein the ray passing
    through or in is accelerated or decelerated uniformly over its cross
    sectional area.

    14+,    for cathode-ray tube circuits generally with plural concentrating,
    accelerating, and/or decelerating stages.

    382,    for cathode-ray tube circuits generally including means for
    focusing or concentrating the ray.


CLS 315/5.35
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5.34, wherein the focusing or concentrating
    means provides a magnetic field in a direction to focus or concentrate the
    ray.

    (1)     Note.  This focusing means may be a permanent magnet, or a
    conducting coil or loop with or without a magnetic core or yoke.


CLS 315/5.36
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5 wherein the hollow device and its
    electrodes are readily separable.

    (1)     Note.  The patents classified here usually disclose disc electrodes
    projecting through the envelope of a tube, and a cavity resonator or
    waveguide having its opposite walls secured to the respective electrodes,
    as by screw or spring clamping.


CLS 315/5.37
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5 wherein the hollow device is provided with
    a grid and significant ray reacting details of this grid are claimed.

    (1)     Note.  The grids of this subclass are only those which are
    associated with the device at its gap, and through which the ray passes.
    Accelerating or focusing grids disposed along the ray path but not an
    intimate part of the hollow device, are not within the scope of this
    subclass.  Subclasses 5.34+ and 5.41, respectively, provide for ray
    focusing and concentrating and ray accelerating between hollow devices
    generally within the scope of subclass 5.

    (2)     Note.  A hollow device provided with a mere plurality of grids is
    not considered to be a significant grid detail for classification here.  A
    particular relationship between the plurality of grids must be claimed or
    significant details must be claimed for classification in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.11+,  for a hollow distributed parameter device having a ray passing
    through or in together with a secondary emission grid.

    5.24+,  for a hollow distributed parameter device wherein a grid deflects
    the ray passing through or in.

    5.29+,  for a hollow distributed parameter device with a ray of a
    particular transverse shape or electrical dimension passing through or in,
    the grids of the device having openings shaped to pass a ray of such shape
    or dimension.

    5.34+,  for a hollow distributed parameter device wherein grids generally
    focus or concentrate the ray passing through or in.  See also (1) Note
    above.

    5.36,   for a hollow distributed parameter device through or in which a ray
    passes, the device being removable from its grids.

    5.41,   for hollow distributed parameter devices with a grid for
    accelerating or decelerating the ray between the devices.  See also (1)
    Note above.


CLS 315/5.38
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5 including an anode or collector,
    significant details of the anode or collector being claimed.

    (1)     Note.  The anode or collector as here used is the electrode which
    the ray strikes after passing into or through the last hollow device, and
    where the particles forming the ray are removed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.33,   for a hollow distributed parameter device with a ray passing
    through or in which is also a ray anode or collector.


CLS 315/5.39
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5 including a plurality of hollow distributed
    parameter devices with the ray passing through or in at least two of the
    devices.

    (1)     Note.  For classification here the ray must pass through or in at
    least two of the devices.  A system of two devices with the ray passing
    through or in only one device, the other device being merely coupled to the
    ray as by being connected to the cathode and control grid, without the ray
    passing through or in the other device is not classified here, but
    elsewhere under subclasses 5+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.14+,  for one or more hollow distributed parameter devices with a
    plurality of rays passing through or in and especially indented subclasses
    47+ for a plurality of such devices.

    5.27,   for plural hollow distributed parameter devices, one of which
    deflects the ray passing through or in.

    5.28,   for plural hollow distributed parameter devices, where the ray
    passing through or in is deflected.

    5.33,   for plural distributed parameter devices, one of the devices being
    a ray anode or cathode.

    5.51,   for a hollow distributed parameter device with the ray passing
    through or in, the device having a plurality of gaps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 6+ and 83 for electric wave generating
    systems utilizing a charged particle or electron beam tube wherein the beam
    passes through plural hollow resonators (e.g., Klystron).


CLS 315/5.41
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5.39 including structure for increasing or
    decreasing the velocity of the ray particles uniformly over the
    cross-section area of the ray during their passage between the hollow
    devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.34+,  for hollow plural distributed parameter devices with structure for
    focusing or concentrating the ray between the devices, which may involve
    accelerating or decelerating the beam differently over its cross section.

    5.37,   for hollow distributed parameter devices with particular grid
    structure which may accelerate or decelerate the ray particles.

    5.42,   for plural hollow distributed parameter devices wherein the devices
    are excited from a common source for accelerating the ray during passage
    across the gaps of the respective devices.

    14+,    for cathode-ray tube circuits generally with a plurality of means
    for accelerating and/or decelerating the cathode-ray.


CLS 315/5.42
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5.39 wherein the interiors of the hollow
    devices are excited directly from a common source, the phase of the energy
    as applied to the interiors of the respective devices being such as to
    accelerate the ray during passage across the gaps of the respective
    devices, whereby the ray is progressively accelerated during passage
    through the devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.41,   for plural distributed parameter devices wherein the ray is
    accelerated or decelerated between the devices.


CLS 315/5.43
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5.39 wherein at least two of the hollow
    devices are tuned to different resonant frequencies.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the resonant frequencies are harmonically related,
    and devices so related may be used in frequency multipliers.


CLS 315/5.44
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5.39 wherein an electrical connection exists
    between the interiors of the hollow devices to transmit electrical energy
    between the devices, but in a direction opposite to that which the ray
    transmits.

    (1)     Note.  The feedback connection may be either regenerative,
    degenerative, or sufficient to produce oscillations.  If the feedback
    connection is a ray, in addition to the ray normally passing through the
    devices, classification is in subclass 5.17 above.

    (2)     Note.  If the claims recite even broadly a load or output fed by
    the cathode-ray tube circuit herein classified, the load or output being
    disclosed as external to the envelope of the cathode-ray tube,
    classification is in Class 327, Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear
    Devices, Circuits, and Systems, appropriate subclasses, or in Class 331,
    Oscillators, appropriate subclasses, depending whether the energy fed back
    is insufficient or sufficient respectively to sustain oscillation.
    However, a coupling probe or loop to abstract energy from the output device
    is not sufficient to preclude classification here (5.44), even though
    designated as an output or load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.17,   for devices with a feedback connection therebetween, the connection
    being by a ray in addition to the ray normally passing through the devices.
     See also (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 45+ for amplifiers having electron beam
    tubes coupled to cavity resonators, including those with feedback circuits.

    331,    Oscillators, appropriate subclasses for electrical oscillators
    utilizing positive feedback to generate oscillations.  See also (2) Note
    above.


CLS 315/5.45
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5.44 including three or more hollow
    distributed parameter devices through which the ray passes with an
    electrical connection between at least two of the devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.49,   for three or more hollow distributed parameter devices in general
    through which a ray passes.


CLS 315/5.46
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5.39, wherein at least one of the hollow
    devices is resonant at a particular frequency together with structure for
    changing or permitting change in the resonant frequency.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.13,   for a magnetron having a ray passing in or through its resonator
    for tuning purposes.

    5.21+,  for a tunable hollow distributed parameter device wherein the ray
    returns to the device after passing through or in it.

    5.53+,  for a single hollow distributed parameter device having a ray
    passing through or in, and which is tunable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 250 for wave meters utilizing tunable
    coupling networks or adjustable long line sections as resonators.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 219+ for
    resonators of the distributed parameter type whose resonant frequency may
    be adjusted, and which are adpated for passage of a cathode-ray through or
    in.

    334,    Tuners, appropriate subclasses for tuned networks for use in wave
    energy apparatus and comprising inductance and capacitance elements in
    circuit arrangement and in which structure is provided for adjusting one or
    both of these elements for changing the mean resonant frequency of the
    circuit.


CLS 315/5.47
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5.46 wherein at least two of the hollow
    resonant devices include frequency changing structure and wherein the
    frequency changing structures of the respective devices are linked
    together; e.g., mechanically or electrically, so that the resonance
    frequencies of the respective devices are changed simultaneously.

    (1)     Note.  Two such devices whose tuning is independently adjustable
    but which may each be adjusted together to change the resonant frequencies
    as by manual manipulation are not classified in this subclass.  For
    classification here, there must be a positive linkage between the devices
    to produce simultaneous frequencies change, although independent frequency
    change may also be present in addition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 1, 10+, and 20 through 110
    for mechanical structure for tuning a plurality of distributed parameter
    devices.


CLS 315/5.48
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5.46 wherein at least one of the hollow
    devices has, for tuning purposes, a flexible wall to adjust the shape of a
    dimension of the device, usually for varying the width of the gap in the
    device across which the cathode-ray travels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.22+,  for a hollow distributed parameter device with a flexible wall,
    wherein the ray returns to the device after passing through or in.

    5.47,   for a plurality of hollow distributed parameter devices having
    flexible walls, which are linked together for simultaneous adjustment of
    the tuning of the devices.

    5.54,   for a single hollow distributed parameter device through or in
    which a ray passes, the device having a flexible wall.


CLS 315/5.49
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5.39 including at least three hollow
    distributed parameter devices with the ray passing through or in at least
    three of the devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.45,   for at least three hollow distributed parameter devices as above
    defined with feedback coupling between at least two of the devices.


CLS 315/5.51
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5 wherein the hollow device has a plurality
    of gaps displaced along the path of the ray, each gap providing an
    interaction between the ray and the interior of the device.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the gaps are formed by a drift tube between the gaps
    and by reentrant portions surrounding the ray between the gaps and the
    walls of the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.44+,  for plural hollow distributed parameter devices with the ray
    passing through each device and feedback coupling between the devices.

    5.52,   for a hollow distributed parameter device with the ray passing
    through or in and having a reentract portion surrounding the ray.


CLS 315/5.52
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5 wherein the hollow device has a portion of
    its wall extending inwardly towards an opposing wall, the portion
    surrounding the cathode-ray as it enters or leaves the device.

    (1)     Note.  The purpose of the reentrant portion is to shorten the gap
    coupling the cathode-ray to the device, to shield the cathode-ray, and to
    increase the capacity of the device.  Two reentrant portions are often
    provided, extending toward each other from opposing walls to provide the
    gap therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.51,   for a hollow distributed parameter device with plural gaps, and
    having a reentrant portion surrounding the ray passing through the device.


CLS 315/5.53
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5 wherein the hollow device is a resonator
    having an adjustable shape or dimension to permit variation of the resonant
    frequency, or wherein the device includes or is combined with structure
    which varies the resonant frequency.

    (1)     Note.  The width of the resonator gap across which the cathode-ray
    travels may be varied to alter the capacity shunting the resonator, thus
    changing the resonator frequency.

    (2)     Note.  The structure which varies the resonant frequency may be
    another resonator.  See subclasses 5.39+ for plural resonators where the
    ray passes through the plurality of resonators.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.13,   for a magnetron having a ray passing through or in the hollow
    distributed parameter device for tuning purposes.

    5.14+,  for a hollow distributed parameter device having an additional ray
    passing through or in for tuning purposes.

    5.21+,  for a tunable hollow distributed parameter device having a ray
    passing through or in, the ray returning to the device.

    5.46+,  for a plurality of hollow distributed parameter devices at least on
    being tunable and a single ray passing through each.

    39,     for a discharge device load generally (noncathode-ray tube) with a
    distributed parameter line, which is tunable.

    39.55+, for distributed parameter resonator- type magnetrons with variable
    tuning.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 250 for wave meters utilizing tunable
    coupling networds or adjustable long line sections as resonators.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 45 for amplifier systems having electron beam
    tubes coupled to cavity resonators including those having subject matter of
    the type classified in this subclass.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 219+ for
    resonators of the distributed parameter type whose resonant frequency may
    be adjusted, and which are adpated for passage of a cathode-ray
    therethrough.

    334,    Tuners, appropriate subclasses for tuned networks for use in wave
    energy apparatus and comprising inductance and capacitance elements in
    circuit arrangements and in which structure is provided for adjusting one
    or both of these elements for changing the mean resonant frequency of the
    circuit.


CLS 315/5.54
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5.53 wherein the hollow device has a flexible
    wall to adjust the shape or a dimension of the device, usually for varying
    the width of the gap in the device across which the cathode-ray travels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.22+,  for a hollow distributed parameter device having a ray passing
    through or in, which ray returns to the device, the device having a
    flexible wall to adjust the tuning.

    5.48,   for a plurality of tunable hollow distributed parameter devices and
    a single ray passing through each, and at least one of the devices having a
    flexible wall for tuning.


CLS 315/7
TXT Subject matter under subclass 4 wherein the cathode-ray tube is provided
    with a pair of electrostatic deflecting electrodes and an inductive
    impedance or structure is connected to the deflecting electrodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    364+,   for other cathode-ray tube circuits provided with means for
    periodically deflecting the cathode-ray by pulsating and/or alternating
    current.


CLS 315/8
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the system is provided with means,
    or where there is shielding means for part of the system to prevent stray
    electromagnetic fields from deflecting the cathode-ray from the desired
    path.

    (1)     Note.  Where the patent claims the source of interference, as a
    transformer, etc., but does not claim its connection in its own circuit,
    the patent is included in this subclass. Where the device causing the
    interference is claimed as connected in its own system, the patent is
    classified with the art which provides for the combination of a cathode-ray
    tube system and the system which includes the source of interference. If
    the interfering device is in the circuit of the cathode-ray tube, the
    patent is classified in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85,     for other systems under the class definition wherein the system
    includes means, or where there is shielding means for part of the system,
    to prevent radiation of electromagnetic waves to and/or from the system or
    some part thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 364+ for
    cathode-ray tubes provided with shielding means for the tube and subclass
    313 and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto for miscellaneous
    discharge devices provided with shielding means.


CLS 315/8.51
TXT Pulse storing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein  the cathode-ray tube  system
    accumulates or stores pulse energy for later retrieval.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84.51+, for electrical pulse storage systems of the gaseous discharge tube
    type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 17.5 for telegraph transmitters having means
    for accumulating information in advance of actual transmission.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 111+ for electrical
    systems having means for storing electrical energy for measuring purposes.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclass 12 for a cathode-ray
    tube digital pattern reading-type coded data convertor or generator.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 700+
    and 800+, respectively, for digital or analog calculators with electrical
    means for storing numerical data in electric pulse form for a later
    retrieval.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 118 and 128
    for reading/writing of information by means of an electron beam.


CLS 315/8.61
TXT Plural cathode-ray tubes or ray-type tubes:

    Subject matter under subclass 8.51 wherein the system comprises two or more
    cathode-ray tubes or which system utilizes a cathode-ray tube having two or
    more cathode-rays.

    SEARCH  THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for cathode-ray tube systems in general having a plurality of
    cathode-ray tubes connected in the system.

    13.1,   for cathode-ray tube systems in general wherein the cathode-ray
    tube is provided with means for forming a plurality of separate cathode-ray
    beams.


CLS 315/9
TXT Systems under subclass 1 having a plurality of cathode-ray tube devices
    connected in the system.

    (1)     Note.  One of the cathode-ray tubes may be in the supply circuit or
    control circuit of the other cathode-ray tube, or both cathode-ray tubes
    may constitute load devices in the circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8.61,   for plural cathode-ray tube systems utilized in storing or code
    translation systems.

    13.1,   for cathode-ray tube systems wherein the cathode-ray tube is
    provided with a plurality of cathode-ray beams.

    324,    and indented subclass, and the subclasses specified in the notes to
    the definitions of those subclasses for systems under the class definition
    having plural discharge device loads.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 2.1, for structures
    which include a plurality of cathode-ray tubes which are structurally
    combined so as to form a unitary device (e.g., such as being enclosed
    within a common envelope) and subclasses 409+ for cathode-ray tubes which
    are provided with a plurality of cathodes.  See subclasses 409+ where the
    cathode-ray tube has means to form a plurality of cathode-ray beams.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 99 for plural cathode-ray tube systems
    utilized in pulse counting.


CLS 315/10
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the system includes means for
    controlling the operation of the cathode-ray device by means of radiant
    energy.

    (1)     Note.  The cathode-ray tube may include a radiant energy ray
    sensitive electrode, that is, the operation of the cathode-ray device is
    altered when subjected to radiant energy, or the system may include a
    radiant energy sensitive device, such as a photocell, which controls the
    operation of the cathode-ray tube when subjected to radiant energy.

    (2)     Note.  The term "radiant energy" as used in these definitions
    includes radiant energy of any type, such as X-ray, light rays whether
    within the visible or invisible spectrum, Hertzian waves and other radiant
    electrical energy excepting the electrons emitted from the cathode-ray tube
    electrodes, and emanations from radioactive substances.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass does not include the combination of a
    cathode-ray tube and an optical device, such as a lens or mirror, etc.,
    which is used with the cathode-ray tube for directing radiant energy to the
    sensitive element or generated radiant energy from the tube, even if the
    system of supply for the cathode-ray tube is claimed, the patent being
    classified with the art appropriate to the combination.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149,    and indented subclasses for other systems under the class
    definition wherein the system includes means for controlling the operation
    of the load device by means of radiant energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for photocell circuits and
    apparatus. Indented subclass 549 includes a cathode-ray tube device which
    illuminates a photocell and is controlled by said photocell while indented
    subclass 214 contains cathode-ray device of the image convertor or light
    amplifier type.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 365+ for
    cathode-ray tube structures which are photosensitive.

    348,    Television, subclasses 162+ for television systems responsive to
    radiant energy in the invisible spectrum and subclass 325 for television
    systems using a photoelectric controlled cathode-ray tube.


CLS 315/11
TXT Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein the cathode-ray tube is provided
    with a secondary emissive electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.1,   for other cathode-ray tube systems wherein the cathode-ray tube is
    provided with a secondary emissive electrode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 379 for cathode-ray
    tube structures which are photosensitive and which have a secondary
    emissive electrode.


CLS 315/11.5
TXT Color convergence controlled by photodetector: Subject matter under
    subclass 10 including a light-responsive device which controls the
    convergence in response to a characteristic of an image or pattern produced
    on the screen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    368.11+, for color convergence control circuitry for a cathode-ray tube,
    absent photodetector control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 549 for radiation responsive control
    circuitry for a cathode-ray tube including pre-photocell optical structure.


CLS 315/12.1
TXT With secondary emission stage in the cathode- ray tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the cathode-ray tube is provided
    with a secondary emissive electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.11+,  for cathode-ray tube circuits wherein a cathode-ray passes through
    a hollow distributed parameter device, the ray impinging on a secondary
    emission electrode to produce another ray or to augment the impinging ray.

    11,     for cathode-ray tube systems wherein the system includes means for
    controlling the operation of the cathode-ray tube by means of radiant
    energy, the cathode-ray tube being provided with a secondary emissive
    electrode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 379 and 399 for
    cathode-ray tube structures which include a secondary emissive electrode.

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses for demodulators with
    secondary emission.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 42 for amplifier systems having a tube
    containing a secondary emissive electrode.


CLS 315/13.1
TXT Plural ray-type tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the cathode-ray tube is provided
    with means for forming a plurality of separate cathode-ray beams.

    (1)     Note.  The cathode-ray tube may be provided with a plurality of
    cathodes or a single cathode with means for separating the emission from
    the cathode into a plurality of rays.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.14+,  for cathode-ray tube circuits wherein a plurality of rays passes
    through or in a hollow distributed parameter device.

    8.61,   for plural beam cathode-ray tubes utilized in pulse counting,
    storing, or code translation systems.

    9,      for cathode-ray tube systems under subclass 1 which include a
    plurality of cathode-ray tubes in the system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 409+ for
    cathode-ray tube structures which are provided with means to form a
    plurality of cathode- ray beams.


CLS 315/13.11
TXT Storage tubes:

    Subject matter under subclass 13.1 wherein changeable information is stored
    in the form of charged or uncharged areas of the screen of the cathode-ray
    tube.


CLS 315/14
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the cathode-ray tube is provided
    with a plurality of means for either concentrating, accelerating and/or
    de-accelerating the cathode-ray, and the system includes means for
    supplying electric current and/or potential to such means.

    (1)     Note.  The concentrating, accelerating, and/or de-accelerating
    means may be electrostatic, electromagnetic, or both.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5+,     for cathode-ray tube circuits wherein the ray passes through or in
    a hollow distributed parameter device, the ray being accelerated or
    decelerated while so passing, and especially subclasses 5.16+, 5.27, 5.28,
    and 5.41 where the ray passes through a plurality of such devices; and
    subclasses 5.34+ where structure is included for concentrating the ray.

    13.1,   for cathode-ray tube systems wherein the cathode-ray tube is
    provided with means for forming a plurality of cath-ode-ray beams in the
    tube, each of the beams being provided with concentrating, accelerating,
    and/or de-accelerating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 441+ for
    cathode-ray tube structures which have a plurality of electrodes between
    the cathode and the target (e.g., a plurality of accelerating and/or
    decelerating electrodes, and/or concentrating electrodes, and/or modulating
    electrodes).


CLS 315/15
TXT Subject matter under subclass 14, wherein the cathode-ray tube is provided
    with three or more means for concentrating, accelerating, and/or
    de-accelerating the cathode-ray.


CLS 315/16
TXT Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein the current and/or potential
    applied to the concentrating, accelerating, and/or de-accelerating means
    which forms the intermediate stage is less than the current and/or
    potential applied to the concentrating, accelerating, and/or
    de-accelerating means which form the stages on either side of such
    intermediate stage.


CLS 315/17
TXT Subject matter under subclass 14 wherein the cathode-ray tube is provided
    with ray deflecting means, the ray deflecting means being positioned so as
    to deflect the ray between two of the concentrating, accelerating, and/or
    de-accelerating stages, or to cause the ray to be deflected in one of the
    concentrating, accelerating, and/or de-accelerating stages.

    (1)     Note.  The ray deflecting means may be mounted within one of the
    concentrating, accelerating, and/or de-accelerating electrodes or means, or
    may be interposed between two such means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.27    and 5.28, for cathode-ray tube circuits including a plurality of
    hollow distributed parameter devices with the ray passing through or in,
    the ray being reflected or deflected.

    364+,   for other cathode-ray tube systems wherein the cathode-ray tube is
    provided with ray deflecting means.


CLS 315/30
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the cathode-ray tube is provided
    with ray modulating means, and the circuit includes means to apply
    potential and/or current to the ray modulating means.

    (1)     Note.  Ray modulating means is defined as being any means for
    varying the number of electrons in the cathode-ray beam, and to exclude
    focusing, concentrating, and ray accelerating means.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not include systems wherein the only ray
    control means is a means which is supplied with current and/or potential to
    maintain a constant accelerating and/or de-accelerating field for the
    cathode-ray.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     and the indented subclasses and the subclasses specified in the
    notes to the definition of these subclasses for other systems wherein the
    cathode-ray tube is provided with a plurality of accelerating and/or
    de-accelerating stages.

    349,    and the indented subclasses and the subclasses referred to in the
    notes to the definition of these subclasses for systems under the class
    definition which include a gas or vapor discharge device which is provided
    with a discharge control means.

    364+,   where the cathode-ray tube is provided with ray sweep means, and
    the system includes means for supplying current and/or potential to the
    sweep means and to the discharge intensity control means.

    380+,   where the system includes means for applying suitable potential
    and/or current to the ray intensity control means to prevent the ray from
    being projected upon the ray receiving anode or target when the ray sweep
    circuit becomes inoperative to continue the ray sweeping.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 446+ and the
    subclasses specified in the Notes thereto for cathode-ray tube structures
    which have a ray modulating means.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous systems which include a
    discharge device provided with a discharge control means.


CLS 315/32
TXT Subject matter under the class definition, sections (1) and (2).

    (1)     Note.  If any circuit element is not structurally combined with the
    discharge device structure or the heating and/or cooling means, the patent
    is classified in the class which provides for the claimed system.  Where
    the claimed system is classified in this class, the patent is classified in
    this or the indented subclasses, and cross-referenced to the appropriate
    succeeding subclass.  Their mere recitation of the source of potential for
    the discharge device will not exclude the patent from these subclasses.
    For the classes which provide for such systems as are excluded from these
    subclasses, search Class 327, Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear
    Devices, Circuits, and Systems and the classes and subclasses specified in
    the main class search notes to that class.

    (2)     Note.  The circuit element may be mounted within or on the base or
    envelope of the load device where the load device is an electric lamp or
    electric discharge device designed to operate in a vacuum, or an atmosphere
    of confined gas or vapor.

    (3)     Note.  Mere electrical heaters which are used only to heat the load
    device and which are not used as impedances in any circuit other than the
    heater circuit are not included in this or the indented subclasses.

    (4)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses include the combination of
    a load device or the load device temperature- modifying means and a circuit
    element where the load device or the temperature modifying means and the
    circuit element are formed of separable parts, but are provided with means
    for fastening or assembling the parts together to form a unitary structure.
    However, this and the indented subclasses do not include combinations of a
    load device with a separable socket or connector which may include a
    circuit element in the socket or connector.  See (8) Note below.

    (5)     Note.  Examples of electrical devices considered to be circuit
    elements are electric switches, resistances, capacities, inductances,
    transmission lines, antennas, transformers, and any other circuit elements.

    (6)     Note.  The circuit element combined with the load device need not
    be a circuit element to be used in the circuit of the load device, but may
    be provided with separate terminals so as to be usable in any desired
    relation.

    (7)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses include load devices
    wherein the electrodes and/or the electrode leads are formed so as to
    function as inductances.  This or the indented subclasses do not include
    load devices wherein the electrodes are formed of resistive material, and
    no other circuit impedance is combined with the discharge device, except
    (1) where a discharge device load and an incandescent filament lamp are
    structurally combined in one device, or (2) where a discharge device load
    is provided with a resistance heatable cathode or an electric resistance
    cathode heater device, the incandescent filament or the cathode resistance,
    or the heater resistance being connected with the discharge device so as to
    function as an impedance device in the discharge device circuit.  This or
    indented subclasses do not include discharge devices having the only
    condenser effect formed by the inter-electrode or inter-electrode lead
    capacity.  Such load devices will be found in the classes which provide for
    electric lamp and discharge device structures.

    (8)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses do not include patents
    wherein the load device is claimed in combination with a separable socket,
    receptacle, or connector for the load device, the socket, receptacle, or
    connector including a circuit element.  Such patents are classified as a
    system in the appropriate system class.  Where the load device and the
    socket or other connector are constructed and arranged with respect for
    each other, so that the contacts on the load device and socket may be used
    as switch contacts, the patent is classified in this or the indented
    subclasses.  This and the indented subclasses do not include the
    combination of a load device and a transmission line or waveguide where the
    transmission line or waveguide is designed to have an electrical connection
    with the load device and no part of the transmission line or waveguide is
    within the envelope or otherwise an integral part of the load device.

    (9)     Note.  The line between this and the indented subclasses and the
    classes which provide for the structural combination of a plug, socket, or
    other connector which has structurally combined therewith an electric
    circuit element is that where the connector is claimed as a part of a lamp
    or discharge device, such as the base, and the lamp or discharge device is
    recited by name only, the patent is classified in the appropriate class
    which provides for the combined connector and circuit element.  For
    sockets, receptacles, and connectors structurally combined with circuit
    elements, see classes:



    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 51 and indented
    subclasses and the other subclasses specified in the notes to subclass 51
    where the circuit element is an electric switch.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 68+ for mechanically variable
    electrical resistors, and especially subclasses 70+ for such variable
    resistors in or on a lamp socket, and subclass 219 for fixed resistors in
    or on a lamp socket or base.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ where
    the circuit element is an electromagnetic devices and subclasses 271+ where
    the circuit element is a condenser.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      and indented subclasses for cathode-ray tubes which are combined
    with other circuit elements, all of which are structurally combined
    therewith to form a unitary device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, see (9) Note above.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    appropriate subclasses for electric discharge devices of the consumable
    electrode type which are structurally combined with a circuit element.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 107 and the Notes thereto, for the
    structural combination of a connector and a transformer or an inductive
    reactor.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, see (9) Note, above.


CLS 315/33
TXT Subject matter under subclass 32 wherein the combined structure includes a
    source of potential and the other circuit elements necessary to operate the
    load device so that the combined structure forms a self-contained device
    which may be transported from one place to another.

    (1)     Note.  The device need not be designed to be carried about by a
    person.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes only those self-contained devices
    which are not otherwise provided for in other classes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for other load devices structurally united with a generator of
    current and/or potential.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, appropriate subclasses for
    portable, self-contained, illuminated signs.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 16 and 17 for
    portable, self-contained, illuminated signaling devices for fishing
    apparatus, and subclasses 17.5+, for portable, self-contained, illuminated
    bait.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 50 for portable
    generators or motors.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 48 for space
    discharge devices, per se, which are provided with a handle.  The devices
    in Class 313 do not include any circuit element in addition to the space
    discharge device.  For example, if the structure includes a resistance, a
    switch, or other circuit element, the patent is classified in this subclass
    of Class 315.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 1 for portably
    mounted generator systems.

    362,    Illumination, appropriate subclasses, for articles such as
    firearms, canes, etc., which include an electric lamp and the source of
    potential therefor to make a self-contained, illuminated article, and
    especially subclasses 157+ for portable self-contained electric lamps, such
    as flashlights.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 67 and
    227, for illuminated clocks.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclasses 13+ for illuminated
    buoys.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 346 and 351 for portable radio sets.


CLS 315/34
TXT Subject matter under subclass 32 having an antenna combined with the
    structure of the load device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), appropriate subclasses for radio apparatus and
    Class 343, Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 700+ for
    antennas, per se, and particularly subclass 701 for antennas having an
    electric space discharge device, whose space discharge forms part of the
    antenna or its coupling network, and not otherwise classified.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 269+ for radio receivers provided
    with antenna.


CLS 315/35
TXT Subject matter under subclass 32, wherein (1) a plurality of electric
    discharge device loads are each structurally combined with the same circuit
    element, or (2) a plurality of discharge device loads are each provided
    with means to cool and/or heat at least part of the discharge device loads,
    the cooling means being either structurally combined with or forming an
    electrical circuit element.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes load devices having an enclosing
    envelope, the envelope enclosing a plurality of discharge devices, the
    circuit element being mounted either within the enclosing envelope, or
    within the base or connector, or otherwise structurally combined with the
    discharge device.

    (2)     Note.  Where a plural discharge device system is claimed which is
    within the class definition, and the discharge devices are structurally
    combined in a single device, but no circuit element is combined with the
    discharge device structure, the patent is classified as a plural discharge
    device system in one of the other appropriate subclasses of this class.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass includes two or more load devices, each
    supplied with a cooling fluid from a common source of coolant, the cooling
    conduits being either formed as circuit impedances or structurally combined
    with a circuit impedance.

    (4)     Note.  Patents claiming two or more discharge devices which are
    structurally united, such as being within the same envelope or enclosure,
    and having the electrodes of the respective discharge devices connected
    together, but not claiming any circuit element other than the conductive
    connector, are not included in this or the indented subclasses, see Class
    313, Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 1+.


CLS 315/36
TXT Subject matter under subclass 35, wherein the discharge device loads are
    connected in electrical series relation with respect to each other and the
    source of discharge current for the discharge devices.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, a load device which
    includes in structural combination a circuit element a rectifying discharge
    device, and a discharge device load connected to the rectifier so as to be
    supplied with discharge current by a source of current supply through the
    rectifier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189,    and indented subclass and the subclasses specified in the notes to
    the definition of these subclasses, for other series connected discharge
    device systems under the class definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 8, for plural series connected consumable electrode discharge
    devices and the system therefor, subclass 33, for consumable electrode
    discharge devices provided with three or more series connected discharge
    electrodes, and the system therefor.


CLS 315/37
TXT Subject matter under subclass 35 wherein at least one of the load devices
    is a discharge device provided with a discharge control electrode, and the
    cathode-anode circuit of one of the discharge devices includes means to
    impress a potential on such control electrode.

    (1)     Note. Some of the patents in this subclass are multiple stage
    discharge devices having the discharge device units connected in cascade
    relation.


CLS 315/38
TXT Subject matter under subclass 35, wherein at least two of the discharge
    device loads each have at least one electrode connected either to the
    opposite terminals of a circuit impedance or to similar impedances which
    are connected together at their terminals which are not connected to the
    electrodes, the electrode of each of the discharge device units which is
    connected to the circuit impedance being similar in its function to the
    electrode of the other discharge device unit which is connected to the
    circuit impedance.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, a device containing two
    discharge device loads and a circuit impedance, the anodes of the discharge
    devices being connected to opposite ends of the impedance.

    (2)     Note.  Some of the patents in this subclass are multiple unit
    discharge devices having the discharge device units connected in push-pull
    relation.


CLS 315/39
TXT Subject matter under subclass 32 having an electric discharge device load
    structurally combined with an electric wave transmission device or line
    having or acting as if it had distributed inductance or capacitance.

    (1)     Note.  See (8) Note to subclass 32.

    (2)     Note.  The transmission device or line may be a waveguide, a
    coaxial line or a parallel wire transmission line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.5+    and 4+, for this subject matter where the discharge device includes
    means to focus or otherwise shape the electron stream into a beam.  See
    subclasses 3.5+ where the transmission line or device includes means to
    exhibit a wave component of a traveling wave, the velocity of which is
    reduced in comparison to the wave velocity in free space.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity, Conductors and Insulators, subclass 28 and indented
    subclass, and subclass 102 and indented subclasses for coaxial cables,
    subclasses 27 and 113 for parallel wire cables.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 5, 6+, 79+, 86+, 93, and 96+ for electrical
    oscillation systems wherein a space discharge device is combined with a
    distributed parameter impedance device.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, particularly subclass 13 for
    resonator type breakdown discharge systems; e.g., T-R or R-T systems, the
    tube and resonant device being combined in a separable and nonintegral
    manner, subclasses 219+ for resonant parallel transmission lines, per se,
    subclasses 236+ for long lines in general, subclasses 239+ under subclass
    236 for electric waveguides, per se, particularly adapted for propagating
    electrical waves having an electric or magnetic field component extending
    in the direction of propagation, and subclasses 243+ under subclass 236 for
    coaxial cables, per se, whose distributed electrical parameters determine
    the wave propagating characteristics of the cable.


CLS 315/39.3
TXT Subject matter under subclass 39 in which the transmission line with
    distributed parameters incorporated in the tube structure is arranged to
    propagate a traveling electro-magnetic wave and is constructed and arranged
    to have a wave component the velocity of which is reduced in comparison
    with the wave velocity in free space; and in conjunction therewith are
    means for generating an electron stream whose path is in proximity to the
    path of said traveling wave component so as to permit an exchange of energy
    between the electron stream and the traveling wave propagated along the
    transmission path.

    (1)     Note.  The transmission line or waveguide may be constructed as a
    spiral or helix so that the wave has an axial velocity component along the
    helix which is lower than the free space velocity of the wave, or the
    transmission line or waveguide may be loaded as by inductive members to
    reduce the velocity of the traveling wave.  Another type included is a
    transmission line formed by an electrode having a plurality of resonant
    cavities formed in the electrode adjacent to an along the path to be taken
    by the electron stream, the structure being such that a traveling wave may
    be propagated along the length of the structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for miscellaneous discharge device systems using tubes such as are
    classified in this subclass.

    3.5+,   for this subject matter where the discharge device includes means
    to focus or otherwise shape the electron stream into a beam.

    39.51+, 40 and 41+, for other discharge devices which have structurally
    combined therewith an inductor or which have an electrode formed so as to
    act as if it possessed inductance, with or without a capacitive impedance
    combined with or inherent in the structure.  The devices in these
    subclasses are distinguished from the devices in subclass 39.3 primarily in
    that the distributed parameter structure in these subclasses is not a
    transmission line arranged to propagate a traveling wave.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 43 for amplifier systems which include
    traveling wave tubes.  See section XVI of the Class Definitions of Class
    330.

    332,    Modulators, especially subclasses 131+, 147+ and 165+  for
    modulator systems having tubes of the type here classified.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 22 for transmission
    lines of the distributed parameter type (e.g., waveguides, long lines)
    having dissipating terminations, subclasses 138+ for delay networks,
    subclasses 32+ for impedance matching networks for transmission lines,
    subclass 81 for transmission lines of the long line with an attenuator
    means, and attenuators especially designed for use over a frequency band or
    for use in transmission lines of the distributed parameter type, and
    subclasses 236+ for the structure of transmission lines of the distributed
    parameter type.


CLS 315/39.51
TXT Subject matter under subclass 32 wherein the device is a discharge device
    having an electrode or a portion thereof formed so as to provide structure
    having distributed impedance parameters and having or acting as if it had
    inductance and capacitance, and which are provided with means for
    subjecting the discharge space to an electromagnetic field, the device
    being designed to operate so that there is interaction between the space
    discharge and the distributed impedance structure.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this and the indented subclasses are discharge
    devices which are known as magnetrons and which have an electrode formed so
    as to have distributed inductance and capacitance, or having an electrode
    formed with a resonant cavity, or having an electrode with interleaved
    fingers arranged to form a resonant structure (e.g., interdigital anode),
    or having an electrode formed as a flat strip, or spiral, or perforated so
    as to form a structure having distributed inductance and capacitance (e.g.,
    a resonator).  Note that subclasses 40 and 42 also contain certain types of
    "magnetrons".

    (2)     Note.  The devices in this subclass are designed for use with a
    magnetic field. For similar devices where the electrodes are formed so as
    to provide a structure having distributed inductance and capacitance or
    where an electrode is formed as an inductor and which do not have
    electromagnetic means for influencing the space discharge, see this class,
    subclass 40.  Also see subclass 40 for devices where an electrode is formed
    as an inductor and a separate capacitor is used to form a resonant or tuned
    circuit, with or without a magnetic field means.  See (1) Note, above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.5+,   for traveling wave cathode-ray circuits with delay type
    transmission lines.

    5.13,   for a cathode-ray tube circuit with a distributed parameter
    resonator type magnetron, the cathode-ray passing through or in the
    resonator of the magnetron.

    35+,    for devices under subclass 32 wherein there are two separate
    magnetron devices within the envelope.

    39+,    for discharge devices of this type wherein the device includes a
    transmission line having distributed parameters (e.g., a waveguide, a
    coaxial cable or a parallel wire transmission line).  See (1) Note, above.
    Note especially that subclass 39.3 provides for devices very similar to the
    devices in this and the indented subclasses where the structure having the
    distributed parameters is formed as a transmission line arranged to
    propagate a traveling wave.

    40,     see (2) Note, above.

    42,     for discharge devices under subclass 32 having an inductor
    connected to an electrode of the discharge device.  The device may also
    include a capacitance so as to form a tuned or resonant circuit. The
    devices in subclass 42 may include a magnetic means for influencing the
    space discharge (e.g., one type of magnetron). See (1) Note, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 153+ for
    miscellaneous discharge devices which are provided with an electromagnet
    for subjecting the discharge space to a magnetic field.  These subclasses
    in Class 313 provide for so-called magnetrons when the structure of the
    electrode or other portion which is formed to have the distributed
    impedance structure is not claimed.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 47+ for amplifier systems using magnetrons
    including those of the type classified in this and indented subclasses.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 5 and 86+ for oscillator systems of the
    magnetron type.

    332,    Modulators, especially subclasses 132, 147+ and 166 for modulating
    systems using magnetrons of the type classified in this subclass.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 219+ for
    resonators of the distributor parameter type.  See subclasses 227+ for the
    cavity or waveguide type.


CLS 315/39.53
TXT Devices under subclass 39.51 provided with means for coupling oscillating
    electrical energy to or extracting oscillatory electrical energy from the
    distributed impedance structure of the discharge devices.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the patents in this subclass show the combination of
    a magnetron with a coupling loop or other coupling means for transferring
    energy to or from the distributed impedance structure (e.g., resonator) of
    the discharge device.  Where the coupling means includes significant
    transmission line structure, such as a coaxial cable, a parallel wire
    transmission line or a waveguide, the patent is classified in subclass 39
    and cross-referenced to this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     see (1) Note, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 24 for coupling
    networks for transferring oscillatory electrical energy to or from a
    structure or circuit of the long line or distributed parameter type.


CLS 315/39.55
TXT Devices under subclass 39.51 which are provided with means to change the
    tuning or the impedance of the distributed impedance structure of the
    discharge device.

    (1)     Note.  The variable tuning means may be provided for maintaining
    the impedance or tuning of the device constant (e.g., such as compensating
    for changes caused by temperature conditions in the impedance structure) or
    it may be for the purpose of varying the impedance of the device.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not include structure such as strapping
    which is utilized to cause all of the distributed impedance structures or
    parts to have a common impedance value such as magnetrons having a
    plurality of cavity resonators and straps between selected anode segments
    so that all of the resonators operate at the same frequency.  For such
    excluded subject matter, see subclass 39.69, below.

    (3)     Note.  The means for tuning or varying the impedance of the
    distributed impedance structure may be means for varying the geometrical
    configuration of the distributed impedance structure or means for creating
    or changing the space charge in the distributed impedance structure as by
    the use of an electric space discharge to project electrons into or
    adjacent to a resonant space or by the use of a movable tuning element.
    Where the means for changing the tuning or impedance includes an input or
    output coupling means, the search should be in subclass 39.53.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.13,   for a distributed parameter resonator type magnetron, with a
    cathode-ray passing through or in the resonator of the magnetron for tuning
    purposes.

    39.53,  see (3) Note.

    39.71,  for devices under subclass 39.51 which are provided with a magnetic
    field generating means and means for varying the strength or orientation of
    the magnetic field.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 5 for magnetron oscillators wherein the
    generator frequency is controlled by an automatic frequency stabilization
    control loop, and subclass 90 for magnetron type oscillators with frequency
    adjusting means.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 235 for resonant
    structures of the distributed parameter type which are provided with tuning
    means, see subclasses 227+ for the cavity or waveguide type, and subclasses
    236+ for long lines with means for varying the impedance of the line, see
    subclasses 239+ for waveguides and subclasses 243+ for coaxial cables.

    334,    Tuners, appropriate subclasses for variable tuners, per se, and
    especially subclasses 41+ for resonant line tuners of the distributed
    parameter type.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for variable inductors,
    per se.


CLS 315/39.57
TXT Devices under subclass 39.55 in which an electron emissive means is
    provided to project electrons into or adjacent the space formed by the
    distributed impedance structure to change the tuning or impedance of the
    distributed impedance structure.

    (1)     Note.  The electron emissive means must be in addition to the
    cathode of the device in order to be classified in this subclass.  It may
    be a secondary electron emissive means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.23,   for cathode-ray tube circuits including a hollow distributed
    parameter device having a flexible wall adjustable for tuning purposes, and
    wherein the ray passes through or in and returns to the device, the
    flexible wall being thermally controlled.

    39.63,  for other discharge devices under subclass 39.51 which are provided
    with an auxiliary anode, or cathode, or control electrode or secondary
    emitter electrode.


CLS 315/39.59
TXT Devices under subclass 39.55 which have a movable element for varying the
    tuning or impedance of the distributed impedance structure, the movable
    element being actuated by a thermal or magnetic motor means.

    (1)     Note.  The thermal motor means may be a thermostat.  The magnetic
    motor means may be an electromagnet.

    (2)     Note.  The thermal or magnetic motor means may vary the position of
    one portion of the distributed impedance structure with respect to some
    other portion or a tuning element may be moved into proximity to or away
    from some portion of the impedance structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 151 for miscellaneous
    discharge devices which are provided with a movable electrode or shield
    where the means for moving the electrode or shield is a thermal motor
    means, and subclass 152 for miscellaneous discharge devices having a
    movable electrode or shield which is moved by a magnetically actuated means.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 30+ for inductors which are provided
    with thermally or magnetically actuated means to vary the inductive
    impedance.


CLS 315/39.61
TXT Devices under subclass 39.55 which are provided with a movable tuning
    element which may be moved to and from or within the distributed impedance
    structure to vary the tuning or impedance.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include magnetrons where the only
    movable structure is a part of the distributed impedance structure.  For
    example, in a cavity resonator if only the dimensions of the structure
    forming the cavity are varied, the patent is excluded from this subclass.
    If a tuning element is inserted into or near the cavity to vary the tuning,
    the patent is included in this subclass.  The excluded subject matter will
    be found in subclasses 39.55 or 39.57.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.55,  see (1) Note.

    39.59,  for this subject matter where the means for moving the tuning
    element is a thermal or magnetic actuator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 146+ for
    miscellaneous discharge devices which have a movable electrode or shield.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 20, 30+, 45, 75+, and 130+ for
    inductors which are provided with a movable element other than the coil
    structure for varying the inductive impedance.


CLS 315/39.63
TXT Devices under subclass 39.51 which are provided with a control electrode,
    an auxiliary anode, an auxiliary cathode or a secondary emitter electrode.

    (1)     Note.  The secondary emitter electrode may be upon the same support
    as the primary cathode.  The auxiliary electrode need not be formed so as
    to provide a portion of the distributed impedance structure.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes either as originals or as
    cross-references substantially all magnetrons which are provided with more
    than two electrodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.55,  for magnetrons under subclass 39.51 which have an electrode
    designed for use in tuning or varying the reactance of the distributed
    impedance of the structure.

    39.57,  for devices under subclass 39.51 which are provided with an
    auxiliary cathode for use in tuning the distributed impedance structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 103+ for
    miscellaneous discharge devices which are provided with a secondary
    emissive electrode, subclasses 293+ for miscellaneous discharge devices
    which are provided with a control electrode interposed in the discharge
    space between the cathode and the anode, subclass 306 for miscellaneous
    discharge devices having three or more electrodes (e.g., plural anodes or
    plural cathodes), and subclass 308 for miscellaneous discharge devices
    which are provided with a discharge control electrode.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 89 for electric wave generation systems
    utilizing a magnetron-type device with a secondary emissive electrode.


CLS 315/39.65
TXT Devices under subclass 39.51 wherein an electrode or portion thereof is
    formed so as to provide a plurality of distributed impedance structures,
    the geometrical configuration or the inductance and the capacitance of at
    least one of the structures being substantially different from the
    geometrical configuration or the inductance and capacitance of another of
    the structures.

    (1)     Note.  The different distributed impedance structures may be
    designed to operate at different frequencies, or to eliminate undesired
    modes of operation, or for other purposes.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not include such distributed impedance
    structures which are only incidentally of different size or which operate
    at different undesired frequencies and which may be provided with strapping
    or other means to make all the structures operate at the same frequency or
    to reduce undesired modes of operation. For such excluded subject matter,
    see the other subclasses under subclass 39.51, especially subclass 39.69
    for the devices with strapping.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass includes the structure of the electrode, per
    se, which is provided with the distributed impedance structures of
    different impedances.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.61,  for devices under subclass 39.51 which have a movable tuning
    element which may be moved to and from or within the distributed impedance
    structures to vary the parameters of the structure.


CLS 315/39.67
TXT Devices under subclass 39.51 which are provided with a tubular anode having
    the distributed impedance structure as a part thereof and which have a
    cathode disposed within the anode so as not to be at the center of the
    anode or which has the cathode disposed on the axis of the anode but
    axially displaced so it is not centrally located within the ends of the
    anode.


CLS 315/39.69
TXT Devices under subclass 39.51 which have a plurality of distributed
    impedance structures and which have the structures interconnected by straps
    or wires which are located so as to be adjacent and electrically coupled to
    the plurality of structures so as to tend to restrict the structures to
    operation at a common frequency or tend to constrain the structures to
    operation in one or more particular modes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.55,  for devices under subclass 39.51 which are provided with variable
    tuning or impedance varying means for the distributed impedance structure
    means.


CLS 315/39.71
TXT Devices under subclass 39.51 which are provided with significantly claimed
    magnetic field generating or magnetic pole structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 156+ for other
    discharge devices which are provided with similar magnetic field generating
    and pole structure.  The subclass in Class 313 provides for similar
    magnetic field and pole structure when the device is not claimed as being a
    magnetron.


CLS 315/39.73
TXT Devices under subclass 39.51 wherein the electrode has a resonant structure
    formed by interleaved finger-like segments, alternate segments being
    connected together at one end, other segments being connected together at
    the opposite end.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes the structure of the electrode, per
    se, which is provided with the interdigital structure.


CLS 315/39.75
TXT Devices under subclass 39.51 in which the anode is provided with a cavity
    which due to its geometry and its electrical properties, is resonant.

    (1)     Note.  The anode may be a circular block having therein a resonant
    cavity, or it may be a circular structure formed with vanes, the space
    between the vanes forming a resonant cavity.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes magnetrons with the specified type of
    electrode, and also the electrode, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 356 for miscellaneous
    anodes which are of tubular or hollow sleeve form.


CLS 315/39.77
TXT Devices under subclass 39.51 which are provided with a resonant cavity
    coupled to the anode structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     where a discharge device has structurally combined therewith a
    waveguide.

    39.73,  for this subject matter where the anode structure is formed so as
    to provide an interdigital electrode.

    39.75,  where the anode structure includes a resonant cavity.


CLS 315/40
TXT Subject matter under subclass 32 having an electrode of the load device
    formed so as to function as an inductance.

    (1)     Note.  The devices in this subclass may include a separate
    capacitor to form a resonant or tuned circuit, and may include a magnetic
    field generating means (the device may be a magnetron). Where an electrode
    is formed so as to provide distributed inductance and capacitance (e.g.,
    cavity resonator) and the device is designed to operate in a magnetic
    field, see subclasses 39.51+.  This subclass (40) includes somewhat similar
    devices having an electrode formed so as to provide distributed inductance
    and capacitance and where the device is not designed to operate in a
    magnetic field.  See subclass 42 where the device has separate inductor
    connected between different anodes or different cathodes with or without a
    capacitor (e.g., to form a resonant circuit) or a magnetic field producing
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4+,     for cathode-ray tubes having a part thereof formed so as to
    function as an inductance or as an inductance and capacitance (e.g., hollow
    resonator, waveguide).

    39+,    for this subject matter where the device having the distributed
    inductance is a transmission line having distributed parameters (e.g.,
    waveguide, coaxial cable, etc.).

    39.51,  for this subject matter where an electrode is formed to provide a
    structure having distributed inductance and capacitance (e.g., a resonator)
    and an electromagnetic device is provided for subjecting the discharge
    space to a magnetic field (e.g., magnetrons).  See (1) Note, above.

    42,     for discharge devices which are provided with a plurality of anodes
    or a plurality of cathodes and a separate inductor connected between at
    least two of the anodes or between at least two of the cathodes.  See (1)
    Note, above.

    62,     and the subclasses specified in the notes to the definition of that
    subclass, for other patents wherein an inductive impedance is structurally
    combined with a discharge device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 155 for lamps and
    discharge devices which have an electrode designed to generate a magnetic
    field.


CLS 315/41
TXT Subject matter under subclass 32, wherein the circuit element which is
    structurally combined with the load device is an inductive impedance, the
    load device being a discharge device and having the inductive impedance
    electrically connected between two of the electrodes of the discharge
    device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      and indented subclasses, for cathode- ray tubes having structurally
    combined therewith an inductive impedance which is connected between two of
    the electrodes of the cathode-ray device.

    39+,    for discharge devices which have structurally combined therewith a
    transmission line having distributed parameters (e.g., a waveguide, coaxial
    cable, etc).

    59,     for discharge device loads having impedances other than inductive
    impedances connected between the electrodes of the discharge device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for the structure of
    transformers and inductive reactors.


CLS 315/42
TXT Subject matter under subclass 41, wherein the discharge device is provided
    with a plurality of anodes or a plurality of cathodes, and the inductive
    impedance is electrically connected between (1) at least two of such
    anodes, or (2) at least two of such cathodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.51+  and 40, for discharge devices which have an electrode formed so as
    to function as an inductive impedance, or as a combined inductance and
    capacitance, see subclass 39.51 where the electrode is formed to provide
    distributed inductance and capacitance and an electromagnet is provided for
    subjecting the discharge space to a magnetic field.  Subclasses 39.51+, 40
    and 42 all include magnetrons, those in subclasses 39.51+ having an
    electrode formed to provide distributed inductance and capacitance (e.g.,
    resonator), those in subclass 40 having an electrode formed to provide only
    an inductive impedance (a separate capacitor being used), and those in
    subclass 42 having both a separate inductor and capacitor.  Subclass 40
    also provides for the devices where the electrode is formed to provide both
    distributed inductance and capacitance, but which are not designed to
    operate in a magnetic field.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 153+ for discharge
    devices which are provided with magnetic means for influencing the space
    discharge.


CLS 315/43
TXT Subject matter under subclass 41, wherein the discharge device load is
    provided with a discharge control electrode and the inductive impedance is
    electrically connected between the control electrode and another electrode
    of the discharge device.


CLS 315/44
TXT Subject matter under subclass 43, provided also with a capacitive impedance
    which is structurally combined with the discharge device structure, the
    capacitive impedance being electrically connected between the control
    electrode and another electrode of the discharge device load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for other discharge devices structurally combined with a plurality
    of impedances one of which is an inductive impedance which is connected
    between two of the electrodes of the discharge device and the other being a
    different type of impedance.


CLS 315/45
TXT Subject matter under subclass 41, wherein an impedance, in addition to the
    inductive impedance, and of some other type, is structurally combined with
    the discharge device structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4+,     for cathode-ray tubes which have structurally combined therewith an
    inductive impedance or a structure formed so as to provide both inductance
    and capacitance, (e.g., resonator).

    44,     where an inductive impedance and a capacitive impedance are
    structurally combined with the discharge device load, both of these
    impedances being connected between the control electrode and another
    electrode of the discharge device.

    53,     for other discharge device loads having structurally combined
    therewith a plurality of diverse type impedances.


CLS 315/46
TXT Subject matter under subclass 32, wherein the load device is a discharge
    device having structurally combined therewith a filament, or an electric
    resistance heater element, or a resistance, the filament, heater or
    resistance being electrically connected in shunt with the discharge
    electrodes of the discharge device.

    (1)     Note.  The filament or electric heater may be the cathode element
    or the cathode heater element of the discharge device.

    (2)     Note.  In some of the devices in this subclass the filament is
    designed to emit light either while the discharge device is operating or
    before the electric discharge is initiated between the discharge
    electrodes.  This subclass includes therefore combined discharge lamps and
    incandescent lamps where the lamp filament is connected in shunt to the
    discharge electrodes.  In some of the devices in this subclass, the
    filament or heater merely vaporizes material and/or acts as an auxiliary
    cathode until the principal discharge can be established.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for discharge devices having a filament or electric heater
    connected in electrical series with the discharge device load.

    94,     and indented subclasses, for systems under the class definition
    wherein a discharge device load is provided with a cathode made of
    resistance material, or having the cathode heated by an electrical
    resistance heater, and the system includes means to supply electric current
    to the cathode or heater.

    115,    and indented subclass, for systems under the class definition
    wherein the load device is provided with an electric heater for heating the
    load device and the system includes means to supply electric current to the
    heater.

    182,    for miscellaneous systems under the class definition which include
    a discharge device load and another diverse type load device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 1+ for the
    structural combination of a discharge device and an incandescent lamp which
    are combined so as to form a unitary device where the incandescent lamp
    filament is not connected either in shunt or in series with the discharge
    electrodes, subclasses 15+ for discharge devices which are provided with an
    electric resistance heater for the discharge device which is not connected
    either in shunt or in series with the discharge electrodes, and subclass
    310 and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto for discharge devices
    having an indirectly heated cathode, the cathode heater element not being
    connected either in shunt or in series with the discharge electrodes.


CLS 315/47
TXT Subject matter under subclass 46, having an electric switch connected in
    the shunt circuit which includes the filament, heater or resistance, the
    switch being provided with means for automatically operating the switch in
    response to some condition affecting the operation of the device.

    (1)     Note.  In some of the devices in this subclass, the switch is
    designed to open the shunt circuit of the filament, heater or resistance
    when the discharge device or the cathode have become heated sufficiently to
    establish a discharge between the electrodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    and the subclasses specified in the notes to the definition of that
    subclass, for other discharge device loads under the class definition
    provided with a cathode or cathode heater, and an automatically operating
    electric switch in the cathode or cathode heater circuit.


CLS 315/48
TXT Subject matter under subclass 46, wherein (1) the cathode heater is
    connected in electrical shunt to the discharge electrodes, or (2) having
    the filament which is connected in electrical shunt designed to function as
    a cathode in the operation of the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for this subject matter when an automatic switch is included in the
    shunt circuit.


CLS 315/49
TXT Subject matter under subclass 32 wherein the load device is a discharge
    device having structurally combined therewith a filament or an electric
    heater, the filament or heater being connected in electrical series with
    the discharge electrodes of the discharge device.

    (1)     Note.  The filament or heater may be the cathode element or the
    cathode heater element of the discharge device.

    (2)     Note.  In some of the devices in this subclass, the filament is
    designed to emit light while the discharge device is operating. This
    subclass therefore includes combined discharge lamps and incandescent lamps
    where the lamp filament is connected in series with the discharge
    electrodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for discharge devices having a filament or electric heater
    connected in electrical shunt relation with the discharge device load.

    58,     and indented subclasses, for a mere resistance having no other
    function even though in electrical series relation with the discharge
    electrodes.

    94,     and indented subclasses for systems wherein a discharge device load
    is provided with a cathode made of resistance material or having the
    cathode heated by an electric resistance heater, and the system includes
    means to supply electric current to the cathode or heater.

    115,    and indented subclass for systems under the class definition
    wherein the load device is provided with an electric heater for heating the
    load device and the system includes means to supply electric current to the
    heater.

    179,    and indented subclasses for miscellaneous systems under the class
    definition having a plurality of diverse type load devices electrically
    connected in series in the system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 1+ for the
    structural combination of a discharge device and an incandescent lamp which
    are combined so as to form a unitary device where the incandescent lamp
    filament is not connected either in shunt or in series with the discharge
    electrodes, subclasses 15+ for discharge devices which are provided with an
    electric resistance heater for the discharge device which is not connected
    either in shunt or in series with the discharge electrodes and subclass 310
    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for discharge devices
    having an indirectly heated cathode, the cathode heater element not being
    connected either in shunt or in series with the discharge electrodes.


CLS 315/50
TXT Subject matter under subclass 32, wherein the load device is provided with
    means for heating and/or cooling at least part of the load device
    structure, such means being either combined with, or forming an electrical
    impedance element.

    (1)     Note.  In many of the patents in this subclass, the conduit for
    supplying cooling fluid to the load device is coiled and forms an inductive
    impedance element.

    (2)     Note.  Mere electrical heaters which are used only to heat the load
    device and which are not used as impedances in any circuit other than the
    heater circuit are not included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     and indented subclasses, for discharge device loads having an
    electrical heater structurally combined with the discharge device and
    connected in electrical shunt to the discharge electrodes.

    49,     for discharge device loads having an electrical heater structurally
    combined with the discharge device and connected in electrical series with
    the discharge electrodes.

    112,    for other systems under the class definition wherein the load
    device is provided with temperature modifying means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 11+ for lamp
    structures and discharge device structures provided with means for
    modifying the temperature of the lamp or discharge device.


CLS 315/51
TXT Subject matter under subclass 32, having a plurality of circuit elements
    structurally combined with the load device structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for portable self-contained devices which include a source of
    potential and the other circuit elements necessary to operate the load
    device structure.

    34,     where one of the circuit elements is an antenna.

    47,     where the load device is a discharge device having a filament,
    electric heater or resistance in shunt to the discharge electrodes and an
    automatically operating electric switch is included in the shunt circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical  Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems appropriate subclasses for systems having two or more circuit
    elements which are of general application and not otherwise classified.


CLS 315/52
TXT Subject matter under subclass 51, having a plurality of impedance elements
    structurally combined with the load device structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44      and 45, where one of the impedances is an inductance which is
    electrically connected between two electrodes of a discharge device load.


CLS 315/53
TXT Subject matter under subclass 52, wherein one of the impedance elements is
    of a diverse type with respect to another of the impedance elements.

    (1)     Note.  Impedance elements differing only in size, value, or in the
    manner of connection to the load device are not considered to be of diverse
    types. Examples of impedance elements considered to be of diverse types
    with respect to each other are resistances, condensers and inductances.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     where there is an inductance and a condenser structurally combined
    with a discharge control discharge device, the inductance and the impedance
    each being connected between the control electrode and another electrode of
    the discharge device.

    45,     where one of the impedances is an inductance which is electrically
    connected between two electrodes of a discharge device load.


CLS 315/54
TXT Subject matter under subclass 52, having a plurality of inductive
    impedances structurally combined with the load device structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     and the subclasses specified in the notes to the definition of that
    subclass, for other load devices which have an inductive impedance
    structurally combined with the load device structure.

    289,    and indented subclass, and the subclasses specified in the notes to
    the definition of that subclass, for other load device systems under the
    class definition provided with an inductive impedance in the circuit.


CLS 315/55
TXT Subject matter under subclass 32, wherein the circuit element which is
    structurally combined with the load device structure is either an electric
    current generator or a piezoelectric device.

    (1)     Note.  Some of the current generators in the combinations in this
    subclass are thermoelectric devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for portable, self-contained devices and apparatus which include a
    source of potential and the other circuit elements necessary to operate the
    load device structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, appropriate
    subclasses, for electric current generating batteries.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, appropriate subclasses for
    miscellaneous electric current generators and subclass 339 for
    piezoelectric devices.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process, appropriate subclasses for electrochemical batteries.


CLS 315/56
TXT Subject matter under subclass 32, wherein the load device is a space
    discharge device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for portable, self-contained apparatus which includes a discharge
    device load.

    34,     for discharge devices combined with an antenna.

    35,     and indented subclasses, for plural discharge devices structurally
    combined with a circuit element.

    39+,    for other discharge devices which have structurally combined
    therewith a transmission line of the distributed parameter type (e.g.,
    waveguide, coaxial cable, etc).

    39.51,  for discharge devices which have an electrode formed so as to
    provide both inductive and capacitive impedance (e.g., resonator) and which
    are provided with an electromagnet for subjecting the discharge space to a
    magnetic field.

    40,     for discharge devices having an electrode formed as an inductive
    impedance or formed to provide both inductance and capacitance (e.g., a
    resonator).

    41,     and indented subclasses, for discharge devices combined with an
    inductive impedance connected between two or more electrodes of the
    discharge device.

    46,     and indented subclasses, for discharge device combined with a
    filament, heater, or resistance in shunt with the discharge electrodes.

    49,     for discharge devices combined with an electric heater or filament
    in electrical series with the discharge electrodes.

    50,     for discharge devices combined with temperature modifying means,
    the temperature modifying means being either designed to function as a
    circuit element or combined with the circuit element.

    51,     and indented subclasses, for discharge devices combined with plural
    circuit elements.

    55,     for discharge devices combined with an electric current generator
    or piezoelectric device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    appropriate subclasses for consumable electrode discharge devices which
    have structurally combined therewith an electric circuit element.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    appropriate subclasses especially subclasses 22+ for fluorescent lamp
    starting devices, 28+ for thermally actuated switches combined with space
    discharge devices, 108 for bimetallic switch operating means with spark gap
    heating means for the element.


CLS 315/57
TXT Discharge devices under subclass 56, having structurally combined therewith
    an electric transformer.

    (1)     Note.  The transformer may be designed to be connected to the
    cathode heater or cathode circuit, merely to supply current to heat the
    cathode, or it may be connected to any of the other electrodes of the
    discharge device. The patent need not specify the connection of the
    transformer for classification in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for other load devices having a transformer structurally combined
    with the load device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for the structure of
    transformers and inductive reactors. See especially subclasses 105+ and the
    notes thereto for transformers and inductive reactors combined with other
    structure.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 91+ and 119+ for
    combined X-ray tube and transformer units.


CLS 315/58
TXT Discharge devices under subclass 56, having structurally combined therewith
    an electric circuit impedance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     where the discharge device is combined with other circuit elements
    so as to constitute a portable, self-contained apparatus.

    35,     and indented subclasses, for plural discharge devices combined with
    a circuit impedance.

    39.51   and 40, for discharge devices which have an electrode formed to
    provide inductance, see subclass 39.51 where the electrode has distributed
    inductance and capacitance (e.g., a resonator) and which are provided with
    an electromagnet for subjecting the discharge space to the magnetic field,
    and subclass 40 for discharge devices for having an electrode formed as an
    inductor or as a structure having inductance and capacitance (e.g.,
    resonator).

    41,     for discharge devices combined with an inductance which is
    connected between two of the electrodes of the discharge device.

    46,     and indented subclasses for discharge devices combined with a
    filament, electric heater or resistance in shunt with the discharge
    electrodes.

    50,     for discharge devices combined with temperature modifying means,
    the temperature modifying means being either designed to function as a
    circuit impedance, or combined with a circuit impedance.

    56,     for discharge devices combined with an electric heater or filament
    in series with the discharge electrodes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 132, and the subclasses specified in the notes to the definition
    of that subclass, for consumable electrode discharge devices which have
    structurally combined therewith an electric impedance.


CLS 315/59
TXT Discharge devices under subclass 58, having the impedance electrically
    connected between two electrodes of the discharge device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39+,    for other discharge devices which have structurally combined
    therewith a transmission line of the distributed parameter type (e.g., a
    waveguide, coaxial cable, etc).

    41,     and indented subclasses, for discharge device loads, combined with
    an inductive impedance which is electrically connected between two of the
    electrodes of the discharge device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for the structure of
    transformers and inductive reactors.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, appropriate subclasses, for electrical
    resistors, per se.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 271 for
    electric condenser structure.


CLS 315/60
TXT Subject matter under subclass 59, wherein the discharge device is provided
    with a principal anode and a principal cathode and an auxiliary discharge
    electrode, the impedance being electrically connected between the auxiliary
    discharge electrode and one of the principal electrodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    234,    for systems under the class definition which include an auxiliary
    starting electrode discharge device load having a condenser connected
    between the auxiliary electrode and one of the principal electrodes.

    263,    for systems under the class definition which include an auxiliary
    starting electrode discharge device load the discharge device being
    supplied with pulsating or alternating current and having an inductance
    connected in the auxiliary electrode circuit.

    264,    for systems under the class definition which include an auxiliary
    starting electrode discharge device load, having an impedance connected in
    the auxiliary electrode circuit, the discharge device being supplied with
    pulsating or alternating current.

    335,    for miscellaneous systems under the class definition with discharge
    device load having an auxiliary starting electrode.


CLS 315/61
TXT Discharge devices under subclass 59 wherein the discharge device is
    provided with discharge control means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.63,  for discharge devices which are provided with control electrode,
    and an electrode formed to provide distributed inductance and capacitance
    (e.g., a resonator) and which have an electromagnet for influencing the
    discharge between the electrode for influencing the space discharge (e.g.,
    magnetrons).

    42,     for other discharge devices having structurally combined therewith
    an inductive impedance which is connected between either a plurality of
    anodes or a plurality of cathodes, the discharge device being provided with
    an electromagnet for influencing the discharge between the electrodes.

    63,     for other discharge control discharge devices structurally combined
    with an electric circuit element.

    335,    and indented subclass and the subclasses specified in the notes to
    the definition thereof, for systems under the class definition wherein the
    load device is a discharge device provided with an auxiliary discharge
    electrode.

    344,    and indented subclasses and the subclasses specified in the notes
    to the definition thereof for systems under the class definition wherein
    the load device is a discharge device provided with an electromagnet for
    influencing the discharge between the electrodes.

    349,    and indented subclasses and the subclasses specified in the notes
    to the definition thereof, for systems under the class definition wherein
    the load device is a discharge control discharge device.


CLS 315/62
TXT Discharge devices under subclass 58, wherein the impedance element is an
    inductive impedance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39+,    for discharge devices which have structurally combined therewith a
    transmission line of the distributed parameter type, (e.g., waveguide,
    coaxial cable, etc.).

    39.51+, for discharge devices having an electrode formed as to provide
    distributed inductance and capacitance (e.g., resonator and which are
    provided with an electromagnet for influencing the space discharge (e.g.,
    magnetrons).

    40,     for discharge devices having an electrode formed as an inductive
    impedance.

    41,     and indented subclasses, for discharge devices combined with an
    inductive impedance which is connected between two electrodes of the
    discharge device.

    54,     for discharge devices combined with a plurality of inductive
    impedances.

    223,    where the discharge device is connected to the secondary circuit of
    a current supply transformer, the primary circuit of the transformer
    including an inductance and a periodic switch.

    242     and 244, where the supply circuit of the discharge device includes
    an inductance and a condenser.

    263,    for discharge device systems wherein the discharge device is
    provided with an auxiliary starting electrode and an inductance is included
    in the auxiliary electrode circuit and the discharge device is supplied
    with alternating current.

    283,    and indented subclasses, and the subclasses specified in the notes
    to the definition of these subclasses, for discharge device systems which
    are connected to a source of alternating current supply and which are
    provided with an inductance in the supply circuit.

    289,    and indented subclass, for miscellaneous systems under the class
    definition provided with an inductance in the supply circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for the structure of
    transformers and inductive reactors.


CLS 315/63
TXT Discharge devices under subclass 56, wherein the discharge device is
    provided with discharge controlling means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.63,  for discharge devices which have a control electrode, an electrode
    formed to provide distributed inductance and capacitance and which are
    provided with an electromagnet for influencing the space discharge (e.g.,
    magnetrons).

    42,     for this subject matter where there is an inductive impedance
    connected between either a plurality of cathodes or a plurality of anodes
    of the discharge device, the discharge device being provided with
    electromagnet means for influencing the discharge.

    61,     for this subject matter where the discharge device is a discharge
    control discharge device and an impedance is connected between two
    electrodes of the discharge device.

    335,    and indented subclass and the subclasses specified in the notes to
    the definition thereof, for systems under the class definition wherein the
    load device is a discharge device provided with an auxiliary discharge
    electrode.

    344,    and the subclasses specified in the notes to the definition thereof
    for systems under the class definition wherein the load device is a
    discharge device provided with an electromagnet for influencing the
    discharge between the electrodes.

    349,    and indented subclasses and the subclasses specified in the notes
    to the definition thereof, for systems under the class definition wherein
    the load device is a discharge control discharge device.


CLS 315/64
TXT Subject matter under subclass 32, wherein the load device is provided with
    a plurality of filaments.

    (1)     Note.  Where a multiple filament load device system within the
    class definition is claimed, but no circuit element is combined with the
    load device structure, the patent is classified as a plural load device
    system in one of the other appropriate subclasses of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     for multiple unit discharge devices having combined therewith a
    circuit element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 51.03 and
    indented subclass and 51.05 and indented subclass, for electric connectors,
    such as plugs, sockets, etc., combined with either single or plural switch
    means in a unitary structure or which are capable of functioning as a
    switch and which may be operated so as to open or close a selected part
    only of a plurality of circuits under control of the switch means.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 310 and subclasses
    specified in the Notes thereto for discharge devices which are provided
    with a plurality of filaments (e.g., filamentary cathodes or filamentary
    cathode heaters), and subclass 316 and the subclasses specified in the
    Notes thereto for multiple filament incandescent lamps.


CLS 315/65
TXT Multiple filament load devices under subclass 64, provided with means for
    maintaining one of the filaments in nonoperating connection with respect to
    the current supply circuit while another of the filaments is maintained in
    operative relation with respect to the supply circuit, means being provided
    which operate automatically (1) in response to either the failure of the
    operatively connected filament to operate properly or its failure to
    operate at all, or (2) when excessive voltage or current conditions prevail
    which would tend to damage the operating filament, to connect the
    nonoperating filament in operative relation to the supply circuit and to
    disconnect the operating filament from the supply circuit whereby one
    filament is substituted for the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87      and 88, and indented subclasses for other systems under the class
    definition for automatically substituting one electrode or load device for
    another when the first operated electrode or load device fails or is
    subjected to excessive current or voltage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 236, for electric
    lamps and discharge devices which have a plurality of similar electrodes
    and which are provided with means so that one electrode can be used to the
    exclusion of another, and the excluded electrode can be substituted for the
    first operated electrode when such electrode becomes defective.


CLS 315/66
TXT Multiple filament load devices under subclass 64, wherein the filaments are
    connected in electrical series relation with respect to each other.

    (1)     Note.  Some of the devices in this subclass provide switch means
    for connecting one only of the filaments to the supply circuit or to
    connect a plurality of the filaments in series with respect to the supply
    circuit. Some of the devices provide switch means to connect the filaments
    in either series or parallel relationship with respect to the supply
    circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185,    and indented subclasses, and the subclasses specified in the notes
    to the definition of these subclasses, for other series connected load
    devices under the class definition.


CLS 315/67
TXT Multiple filament load devices under subclass 64, wherein the filaments
    have different resistances with respect to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    178,    and indented subclasses for other systems under the class
    definition which include a plurality of load devices of different
    resistances.


CLS 315/68
TXT Multiple filament load devices under subclass 64 provided with three or
    more filaments and with means for connecting all or a selected number only
    of the total number of filaments to the supply circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    317,    and indented subclasses for miscellaneous load device systems under
    the class definition provided with switch means for controlling the
    circuits of three or more load devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 51.03 and
    indented subclass and subclass 51.06, for electric coupling devices, such
    as plugs, sockets, et cetera, combined with either single or plural switch
    means in a unitary structure, or which are capable of functioning as a
    switch, and which may be operated so as to open or close a selected part
    only of three or more circuits under control of the switch means.


CLS 315/69
TXT Multiple filament load devices under subclass 64, provided with means for
    connecting a plurality of filaments in electrical parallel relation with
    respect to the supply circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312,    and indented subclasses for miscellaneous plural load device
    systems under the class definition, especially subclass 313, and indented
    subclasses, for plural load device systems provided with an electric switch
    in the supply circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 51.03 and
    indented subclass, and 51.05 and indented subclass, for connectors, such as
    plugs and sockets, combined with switch means, or which are capable of
    functioning as a switch, and which may be operated so as to open or close a
    selected part only of a plurality of circuits under control of the switch
    means.


CLS 315/70
TXT Subject matter under subclass 32 having an electric transformer
    structurally combined with the load device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for discharge device loads structurally combined with a transformer.

    276,    and the indented subclasses and the subclasses specified in the
    notes to the definition of those subclasses for systems under the class
    definition having a transformer in the circuit of the load device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for the structure of
    transformers and inductive reactors.


CLS 315/71
TXT Subject matter under subclass 32 having an electric circuit impedance
    structurally combined with the load device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     and indented subclasses for this subject matter, where the load
    device is a discharge device having an inductive impedance connected
    between the electrodes.

    52,     and indented subclasses for this subject matter, where there are a
    plurality of impedances structurally combined with the load device.

    58,     and indented subclasses, for this subject matter, where the load
    device is a discharge device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    appropriate subclasses, especially subclass 132, for consumable electrode
    discharge devices structurally combined with an impedance.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for the structure of
    transformers and inductive reactors.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, appropriate subclasses for electrical
    resistors, per se.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Device, subclasses 271+ for
    the structure of capacitors.


CLS 315/72
TXT Subject matter under subclass 32 having an electric periodic switch
    structurally combined with the load device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209,    and indented subclasses and the subclasses specified in the notes
    to the definition of those subclasses, for systems under the class
    definition provided with a periodic switch in the supply circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 19+ for
    periodic switches including those which are structurally combined with an
    electric connector, such as a plug or socket.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 87+ for electromagnetically operated periodic
    switches.


CLS 315/73
TXT Subject matter under subclass 32 wherein the load device is provided with
    an envelope, bulb or enclosure for providing a confined atmosphere of gas,
    vapor or vacuum about the electrodes of the load device and having an
    electric switch structurally united therewith, the switch being mounted
    inside of the envelope, bulb, or enclosure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56+,    for electric space discharge devices which have an electric switch
    structurally combined therewith, including such combinations where the
    switch is within the envelope of the device.


CLS 315/74
TXT Subject matter under subclass 32, wherein the electric switch is
    structurally connected with the load device so as to complete an electrical
    circuit in shunt about the load device or some part thereof, and/or to open
    the load device current supply circuit, the switch being designed to
    automatically operate (1) when the load device becomes nonconductive or
    fails to operate properly, or (2) when the supply voltage and/or current
    becomes too high or too low for the proper operation of the load device, or
    (3) when more than a desired number of load devices are connected to the
    supply circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    and indented subclasses for other systems under the class
    definition provided with an automatic shunt or cut-out for the load device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 10 and indented subclasses for consumable electrode discharge
    devices having an automatic shunt circuit closing means or cutout means
    structurally combined with the discharge device.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 6+ for automatically operated electromagnets
    circuit interrupting devices.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclasses 15+ for thermal current shunt circuit closing switches.


CLS 315/75
TXT Subject matter under subclass 74, wherein the electric switch is connected
    to complete an electric circuit in shunt about the load device or some part
    thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    and indented subclass, and the subclasses specified in the notes to
    that subclass, for other systems under the class definition provided with
    an automatic shunt for the load device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 11, and indented subclasses, for consumable electrode discharge
    devices having an automatic shunt circuit closing means structurally
    combined with the discharge device.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclasses 15+ for thermal current shunt circuit closing switches.


CLS 315/76
TXT Systems under the class definition limited to use with particular articles,
    devices, or apparatus and which are not provided for in other classes.

    (1)     Note.  In most of the systems included in this and the indented
    subclasses, one or more of the circuit elements of the system are combined
    with some part of a particular article, device, or apparatus, such as, for
    example, having the switch which controls the supply of current to the load
    device operated by the brake pedal of an automobile.

    (2)     Note.  See the notes to the main class definition for other classes
    which provide for the combination of particular articles, device and
    apparatus, which include a discharge device system.

    (3)     Note.  For illuminated devices and articles and the electrical
    systems for supplying electric current to the illuminating means therefor,
    see the appropriate art classification of the particular device or article
    which is illuminated.  See especially classes:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, for illuminated cards, pictures
    and signs combined with particular articles or devices.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, appropriate subclasses for illuminated
    signals combined with particular articles and devices. Note particularly
    subclasses 468+, 310.01+, 691, and 870.07+.

    362,    Illumination, appropriate subclasses for illuminating devices
    combined with particular articles and devices.


CLS 315/77
TXT Systems under subclass 76 limited to use with a vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  The word "vehicle", as used in this and the indented
    subclasses, includes ships, boats, aircraft, elevators, and other
    conveyances.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this and the indented subclasses are lighting
    systems for controlling the supply of electric current to lamps in the
    vehicle.  Such systems are included even though the lights are claimed as
    "head lights" "tail lights", "side lights", "spot lights", or any similar
    named light as long as the claims do not include any mounting of the lamp
    or illuminating structure used with the lamp, but claim the lamp by name
    only. The mere statement that the lamp is mounted at the rear, side, front,
    or at another part of the vehicle or ship will not exclude the patent from
    the subclass.  This and the indented subclasses include patents, event
    though no particular vehicle structure is claimed, where the lights are
    claimed as head lights, tail lights, side lights, spot lights, etc. For a
    complete search for all systems for supplying and/or controlling the supply
    of electric current to one or more electric lamps, the search should
    include the other appropriate subclasses of this class.

    (3)     Note.  For vehicles, ships, and boat structure, search classes:

    114,    Ships,

    180,    Motor Vehicles,

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,

    244,    Aeronautics,

    280,    Land Vehicles,

    293,    Vehicle Fenders, subclass 115 for vehicle grille and bumper
    combinations which may provide openings therein permitting light radiation
    therethrough from vehicle-attached lamps.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops,

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles,

    305,    Wheel Substitutes for Land Vehicles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, appropriate subclasses, for
    illuminated pictures and signs combined with vehicle, ship, or boat
    structure.

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, appropriate subclasses for
    systems and structure for transmitting electricity to vehicles.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses
    indented under subclass 52 for electric switches combined with vehicle,
    ship, or boat structure.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 9.1+
    for electrical systems mounted on vehicles.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass for a charging system for a vehicular battery used to
    supply energy to an electric lamp.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 1 for portably
    mounted generator systems.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 945+ and 984+ for
    illuminated signals combined with vehicle, ship or boat structure.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 61+ and indented subclasses for
    illuminating devices combined with vehicle structure.


CLS 315/78
TXT Systems under subclass 77 provided with a magneto-electric current
    generator for supplying electric current to the load device, the
    magneto-electric generator being driven by either the motor which propels
    the vehicle or by some driving means which is actuated when the vehicle is
    moving.

    (1)     Note.  Systems having the generator driven by one of the vehicle
    wheels or the vehicle axle are here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302,    and indented subclasses for systems under the class definition
    provided with means for regulating the supply of electric current to the
    load device by regulating the operation of the current generator, subclass
    303 having regulation by prime mover control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants, for motor-driven magnetoelectric
    generators, and systems of general application including such motor driven
    generators.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, appropriate subclasses for
    generators, per se.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass for charging a vehicular battery from an energy source
    powered by the vehicle.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    systems for regulating the current output of generators.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 193 for illuminating devices adapted for use
    on bicycles and similar vehicles provided with an electric lamp and having
    a wheel driven generator for supplying current to the lamp.


CLS 315/79
TXT Systems under subclass 77 provided with means responsive to the speed of
    either the motor which propels the vehicle or the speed of the vehicle for
    controlling the supply of electric current to the load device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     for systems under the class definition where the generator which
    supplies the current to the load device is driven by the vehicle motor or
    by some driving means actuated by the vehicle's motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 488+ for a speed responsive
    device, per se.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 146.5+ for spark ignition
    systems for internal combustion engines which include a periodic switch
    driven by some part of the engine for timing the spark with reference to
    the engine cycle.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 80 for
    centrifugal switches.


CLS 315/80
TXT Systems under subclass 77 having a means which controls the operation of
    the load device combined with and operated by a device which controls the
    operation of the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  The means controlling the operation of the load device may
    be an electric switch or current regulating means or any other means
    affecting the operation of the load device.

    (2)     Note.  The vehicle operation controlling means may be the means by
    which the vehicle is steered, or the means for starting or stopping the
    vehicle or its motor, or any other means affecting the operation of the
    vehicle.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass does not include load device controllers which
    are only mounted on the vehicle controller, but are not operated thereby.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     for systems having the load device current generator driven by the
    vehicle motor or some means driven by the motion of the vehicle.

    79,     for systems having the load device controlled by either the speed
    of the vehicle or of the vehicle motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses
    indented under subclass 52, particularly subclasses 61.27+, 61.54+ and
    61.87 to 61.91 for electric switches combined with vehicle controller
    structure; see also subclass 332.2.


CLS 315/81
TXT Systems under subclass 80, wherein the load device control means is
    combined with and operated by the steering mechanism of the vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.27+,
    61.54+, and 61.87 to 61.91 for electric switches controlled by lever or
    wheel shafts such as steering wheels; see also subclass 332.2.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 36 for structural combinations of vehicle
    illuminating means and means to energize the light source upon turning of
    the vehicle, and subclasses 37+, respectively, for structural combinations
    of vehicle illuminating means and means to shift the position of the
    illuminating means upon turning of the vehicle.


CLS 315/82
TXT Systems under subclass 77 wherein the load device is stated to be a vehicle
    head light.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes patents wherein one or more of the
    load devices is stated to be a head light, but no structure of the head
    light is claimed, the head light being claimed by name only.  To make a
    complete search for all means for controlling one or more head lights, the
    search must include the other appropriate subclasses of this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+, and the classes and subclasses
    specified in the Notes thereto for photocell controlled electric circuits
    and photocell apparatus, in which the photocell may respond to light from
    the headlights of a vehicle.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 257+ for the structure of vehicle head
    lights.


CLS 315/83
TXT Systems under subclass 82 wherein there are two or more lamps in the head
    light or the head light lamp includes two or more filaments, the system
    including means for supplying operating current to one or the other of the
    lamps or filaments from the source of supply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     and indented subclasses for multiple filament lamps having combined
    therewith an electric circuit element, such as an electric switch.

    294,    and indented subclasses of this class, especially subclass 296 for
    systems for regulating the supply of current to two or more load devices so
    that one load device will receive more current than another.

    317,    and indented subclasses and 322 for systems provided with an
    electric switch for connecting one or the other of a plurality of load
    devices to the source of supply.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 316 and the
    subclasses specified in the Notes thereto for multiple filament lamps.


CLS 315/84
TXT Systems under subclass 76, having a means which controls the operation of
    the load device operated by a door or other closure member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 61.62 and
    subclasses 61.69 to 61.83, for door or sash operated electric switches.


CLS 315/84.51
TXT PULSE STORING SYSTEMS OF THE GASEOUS DISCHARGE TUBE TYPE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a gaseous space discharge
    device system is designed to respond to discrete electrical pulses and
    which system accumulates or stores electrical pulse energy for later
    retrieval.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8.51+,  for pulse storing or systems employing cathode-ray tubes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 17.5 for telegraph transmitters having means
    for accumulation information in advance of actual transmission.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 111+ for electrical
    systems having means for storing electrical energy for measuring purposes.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 103 for counting chains using gas filled
    tubes.


CLS 315/84.61
TXT With plural cathode or anode tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 84.51 wherein the gaseous space discharge
    tube system comprises space discharge means having two or more cathodes or
    two or more anodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334+,   and the subclasses referred to in the Notes to the definitions of
    these subclasses, for other systems under the class definition provided
    with a plural cathode or anode discharge device load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 100 for counting means using multicathode
    gas discharge tubes.


CLS 315/85
TXT Systems under the class definition wherein the system is provided with
    means, or where there is shielding means for part of the system, to prevent
    radiation of electromagnetic waves from and/or to the system or some part
    thereof.

    (1)     Note.  For electrical systems provided with anti-inductive means,
    search the appropriate system class, especially class:



    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 146.5 and indented
    subclasses, for internal combustion engines with shielded ignition system.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 32, and indented
    subclasses for anti-inductive conductors and conductor arrangements,
    subclass 50 and indented subclasses for electrical boxes, receptacles and
    containers, subclass 78 for terminal end structure of conduits, cables and
    conductors provided with means to connect a ground wire thereto.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 49 and 69.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 89+.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, particularly subclass 12 for
    transmission line inductive or radiation interference reduction systems,
    and subclasses 243+ for transmission lines of the shielded type.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 288+, 310.01+ and 500+ for
    electric signaling systems combined with other electric signaling or
    nonsignaling systems.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 841+ for antennas
    with an electrical shield; subclass 851 for antennas with a coupling
    network having a radiation suppressor; and subclass 905 for antennas
    combined with a shielded transmission line.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 392, 394, 398, 402+, 406+,
    and 415.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 300+ for shielding in a radio
    receiver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 239+ for electric
    lamps and electric space discharge devices which are provided with
    shielding means to shield the electrodes or some part of the device and
    significant supporting and/or spacing structure for the shielding means is
    claimed.  Subclass 313 (of Class 313) provides for other electric lamps and
    electric space discharge devices which are provided with shielding means.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 300+ for sheilding in a radio
    receiver.


CLS 315/86
TXT Systems under the class definition provided with at least two sources of
    electrical energy and at least one load device, and provided with means for
    supplying energy to operate a load device from one of the sources of
    electrical energy while the other source of electrical energy is maintained
    in a nonsupplying condition, and having means which operate automatically
    in response to some condition affecting the operation of the system to
    connect the nonsupplying source of energy in the system so that it can
    become operative to supply energy to either the same load device or a
    different load device than the load device supplied by the first operated
    source of electrical energy.

    (1)     Note.  The condition which causes the second operated source of
    energy to be connected in the system may be any one or any combination of
    (1) the failure of the first operated source of energy to deliver
    sufficient energy to a load device, (2) an abnormal rise in voltage or
    current output of the first operated source of energy, (3) when the second
    operated source of energy has attained a sufficient voltage and current
    output to supply the load device with energy, (4) any other condition
    affecting the operation of the system which makes it desirable that a
    source of energy other than the first operated source of energy be used to
    supply a load device.

    (2)     Note.  This and the indented subclass are not restricted to gas or
    vapor discharge devices or electric lamps as the load device, but includes
    all discharge device systems provided with means to automatically
    substitute another source of current supply for the source of current
    supply which is first used to supply current, excepting such systems in
    which the discharge device load is a discharge control type gas or vapor
    discharge device and the system includes means to supply current and/or
    potential to the discharge control means.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass does not include systems wherein the one
    source of energy is a storage battery designed to be charged from the other
    source of energy, and to be connected to supply the load device when the
    other source of energy becomes inactive.  Such systems are considered to be
    systems which include the battery as a load device and will be found for
    the most part in Class 307, Electrical Transmission or Interconnection
    Systems, subclasses 46, 48+ and 66+, and Class 320, Electricity:  Battery
    or Capacitor Charging or Discharging, having a battery charging and/or
    discharging, per se, many patents disclosing, but not claiming an
    additional lamp or discharge device load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    and indented subclasses for systems under the class definition
    provided with means automatically operating to either complete a shunt
    circuit about the load device or to open the circuit of the load device,
    the automatically operating means being operated in response to some
    condition which prevents further normal operation of the load device.

    160,    and indented subclasses for other systems under the class
    definition provided with two or more sources of current supply.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, see (3) Note.


CLS 315/87
TXT Systems under subclass 86, having in addition subject matter as defined in
    subclass 88 and the notes thereto.

    (1)     Note.  In many of the systems in this subclass, the first operated
    source of electrical energy is connected to the first operated load device
    or electrode, the automatically operating means being operative to connect
    the second operated source of electrical energy to the second operated load
    device to thereby substitute a different source of electric energy and a
    different load device for the first operated source of energy and load
    device.  The respective sources of supply and load devices or electrodes
    may constitute separate circuits except for the control of the substituted
    circuit in response to the condition of the first operated circuit.


CLS 315/88
TXT Systems under the class definition having (1) a nonoperating load device
    connected in the circuit in addition to a load device connected in
    operating condition in the circuit, or (2) a load device connected in the
    system which has at least one nonoperating electrode in addition to the
    electrode or electrodes which are connected in operating relation in the
    circuit; the system being arranged to operate the operating load device or
    electrode while the nonoperating load device or electrode is maintained in
    a nonoperative condition until the first operated load device either fails
    to operate properly, or is subjected to such excessive voltage or current
    conditions as would tend to damage the operating load device or electrode,
    the system being provided with means which operate automatically in
    response to either such failure of the first operated device or electrodes,
    or in response to such excessive voltage or current conditions to connect
    the nonoperating load device or electrode in operative relation in the
    system whereby such nonoperating load device or electrode is substituted
    for the first operated device or electrodes.

    (1)     Note.  In systems provided with an incandescent lamp as the load
    device, the filament or other incandescent body is considered to be an
    electrode within the meaning of this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes systems wherein the load device is a
    discharge device having a plurality of cathodes and/or anodes, one of the
    cathodes or anodes and its corresponding electrode being connected in
    operative relation in the circuit until one of these electrodes fails or is
    subjected to excessive voltage or current when the automatically operating
    means connects the nonoperated electrode in operative condition in the
    circuit so as to substitute the such electrode for the first operated
    electrode.

    (3)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses are not restricted to gas
    or vapor discharge device or electric lamps as the load device, but include
    all discharge systems which are provided with means to automatically
    substitute another discharge device for the operating discharge device when
    the operating discharge device fails to operate properly excepting such
    systems in which the discharge device load is a discharge control discharge
    device other than the discontinuous control type gas or vapor discharge
    device and the system includes means to supply current and/or potential to
    the discharge control means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65,     for multiple filament load devices which have structurally combined
    therewith automatically operating means to substitute a second filament for
    the first operated filament when the first operated filament fails to
    operate properly.

    87,     for this subject matter where the system also includes
    automatically operated means to substitute a second source of power supply
    for the first operated source of power supply.

    129,    and indented subclasses, for systems having a signal, indicator, or
    alarm which may be a lamp or discharge device, and see the reference to
    this subclass (88) in the notes to the definition of subclass 129 for the
    line between this subclass (88) and subclass 129.

    312,    and the subclasses specified in the notes to the definition of that
    subclass for other plural load device systems under the class definition.

    334,    and indented subclasses and the subclasses specified in the notes
    to the definition of those subclasses for other plural cathode and anode
    discharge device loads.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 1 and indented subclasses for consumable electrode discharge
    devices and the systems therefor, provided with (1) automatic means, for
    substituting another consumable electrode discharge device or other
    discharge device or lamp for the first operated consumable electrode
    discharge device, or (2) automatic means for substituting a consumable
    electrode discharge device for a first operated discharge device or lamp,
    or (3) automatic means for substituting another electrode for the first
    operated electrode of the consumable electrode discharge device.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 254 and indented subclass for illuminating
    devices provided with an electric lamp, device including means for
    substituting another light source for the light source in use in event the
    light source in use is destroyed or extinguished.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 50+ for electronic
    tube current conversion systems having protective means responsive to
    dangerous or undesirable conditions within the electronic convertor for
    correcting the condition or disabling the convertor.


CLS 315/89
TXT Systems under subclass 88 in which two or more substitute load devices or
    electrodes are provided for successive substitution as required.


CLS 315/90
TXT Systems under subclass 88 provided with a plurality of first to be operated
    load devices or electrodes and a nonoperating load device or electrode, the
    nonoperating load device or electrode being connected in the system so that
    it may be automatically substituted for any one of the first operated load
    devices or electrodes which either fail or are subjected to excessive
    voltage or current conditions.


CLS 315/91
TXT Systems under subclass 88 provided with means for automatically
    substituting the nonoperating load device or electrode for the first to
    operate load device or electrode in response to excessive voltage or
    current conditions as would tend to damage the first to operate load device
    or electrode.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes systems provided with an electric
    discharge gap connected in electrical parallel with the source of supply
    and the load device, the spark gap being adapted to ionize and to dissipate
    any voltage or current surge and thereby protect the load device from such
    surge.  It also includes similar systems wherein the discharge gap is
    designed to replace the load device when the load device fails, the spark
    gap becoming ionized due to the increase in voltage in the circuit caused
    by the failure of the load device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    systems of general application.  Note indented subclasses 117+ for
    lightning arresters.


CLS 315/92
TXT Systems under subclass 88 wherein the load device or electrode which is
    substituted for the first operated load device or electrode is of a diverse
    type.

    (1)     Note.  To be considered diverse type load devices, or electrodes,
    the devices or electrodes must differ in some electrical characteristic.
    Mere difference in color or shape is not enough to make the load devices of
    different characteristics within the meaning of this subclass.  Discharge
    devices containing different gases, or having different starting or
    operating characteristics, or a different number or types of electrodes are
    considered to be of diverse types.  Load devices having different
    impedances are considered to be of diverse types.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87,     for this subject matter where the system also includes
    automatically operating means to substitute a second source of current
    supply for the first operated source of current supply.

    178,    and the indented subclasses and the subclasses specified in the
    notes to the definition of those subclasses for other plural load device
    systems under the class definition provided with a plurality of load
    devices of diverse types.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 1 and indented subclasses for similar systems if either the first
    operated device or the substituted device is a consumable electrode
    discharge device.


CLS 315/93
TXT Systems under subclass 88 having an electric switch which is automatically
    operated in response to the failure of the first operated load device or
    electrode to complete the circuit to the second operated load device or
    electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65,     for multiple filament load devices which are structurally combined
    with an automatically operated electric switch for substituting a second
    filament, for a first operated filament.

    87,     for this subject matter where the system also includes
    automatically operating means to substitute a second source of power supply
    for the first operated source of power supply.

    92,     for this subject matter where the substituted device is of a
    different type than the first operated device.

    119,    and indented subclasses for systems provided with an automatically
    operating electric switch for completing an electrical circuit in shunt
    about the load device, such switch means being automatically operated in
    response to some condition which prevents further normal operation of the
    load device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses
    for electric switches of general application.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 2 for consumable electrode discharge devices, and the systems
    therefor, provided with an automatically operating current shifting switch
    to substitute (1) another discharge device, or lamp for the first operated
    electrode discharge device or lamp if either the first operated or
    substituted device is a consumable electrode discharge device, or (2)
    another electrode for the first operated electrode of the consumable
    electrode device, the switch means being automatically operated in response
    to some condition which prevents further normal operation of the load
    device.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 2+ for electromagnetically operated switches of
    general ap-plication.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclasses 14+ for electrothermally actuated switches.


CLS 315/94
TXT Systems under the class definition having a load device connected in the
    system, the load device being a discharge device provided with (1) a
    thermionic cathode adapted to be heated by electric current other than the
    discharge current flowing through the cathode, or (2) a cathode of the
    indirectly heated type, that is, a thermionic cathode which is heated by
    the heat generated in an electric heater element adjacent the cathode, the
    system being provided with electric circuit means to apply electric current
    to the cathode or the cathode heater element.

    (1)     Note.  The subclass does not include patents wherein the claims
    merely state that the load device in the system is provided with a heated
    thermionic cathode or an indirectly heated cathode and no significant
    features of the cathode or heating circuit supply are claimed.  Such
    patents are in the other appropriate subclasses of the class.

    (2)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses are not restricted to gas
    or vapor discharge devices or lamps as the load devices, but include all
    discharge device systems wherein the discharge device includes a thermionic
    cathode adapted to be heated by electric current other than the discharge
    current, or an indirectly heated cathode provided with an electric heater
    element, the system including circuit means to supply current to the
    cathode or heater element, excepting such systems in which the discharge
    device load is a discharge control discharge device other than the
    discontinuous control type gas or vapor discharge device and the system
    includes means to supply current and/or potential to the discharge control
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    for systems in which the load device is provided with means for
    modifying the temperature of the load device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 310 and the
    subclasses specified in the Notes thereto for discharge device structures
    where the discharge device is provided with an indirectly heated cathode or
    a resistance heated cathode.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 227
    and 291, for systems for controlling the current and/or voltage magnitude
    by means of an electronic tube wherein the control of the electronic tube
    is by cathode element control.  A usual cathode element control is cathode
    temperature control.

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses for demodulators with
    significant power supply circuitry.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 113 for amplifier systems including those with
    polyphase power supplies which may supply the tube heaters; subclass 115
    for amplifiers including unrectified a.c. supply to vacuum tube filamentary
    cathodes; subclass 127 for vacuum tube amplifier systems including those
    having means to control the power supply of a filamentary cathode or
    cathode heater; subclasses 201, 205, and 206 for vacuum tube amplifiers
    including power supply to filamentary cathodes.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclass 113 for electronic tube
    current conversion systems wherein the control of the electronic tube
    convertor is by cathode element control.  A usual cathode element control
    is cathode temperature control.


CLS 315/95
TXT Systems under subclass 94 having a plurality of discharge device load
    devices connected in the system.

    (1)     Note.  Where the circuit has a single discharge device with a
    supply circuit in which there is a second discharge device which is limited
    in the claims to being of the gas or vapor type, the patent is classified
    as a plural discharge device load system even though the second discharge
    device is in controlling relation to the first, see the main class
    definition section (9). Conversely where the second discharge device is
    claimed broadly (not being limited in the claims to being of the gas or
    vapor type) it is not treated as a second load device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for plural load device systems provided with means for modifying
    the temperature of the load devices.

    324,    and the subclasses specified in the notes to the definition of that
    subclass, for other plural discharge device load device systems.


CLS 315/96
TXT Systems under subclass 95 having the cathodes and/or the cathode heaters of
    a plurality of discharge device load devices connected in electrical series
    relation with respect to each other and the source of cathode or heater
    current supply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99,     and indented subclass for systems under subclass 94 wherein a load
    device in the system is provided with a plurality of cathodes and/or
    cathode heaters which are connected in electrical series relation with
    respect to each other.

    185,    and indented subclasses for systems provided with a plurality of
    load devices connected in electrical series relation with respect to each
    other.


CLS 315/97
TXT Systems under subclass 95, wherein the cathode or cathode heater current
    supply circuit is supplied with pulsating or alternating current.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes plural load device systems wherein
    the cathode or heater circuit includes a rectifier for rectifying
    alternating current, the rectified current being supplied to the cathode or
    heater circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    for other systems under subclass 94 provided with a rectifier
    and/or an electric space discharge device in the cathode supply circuit.

    105,    and indented subclass for other systems under subclass 94 having
    the cathode or heater circuit supplied with pulsating or alternating
    current.

    250,    and indented subclasses for systems provided with a plurality of
    load devices and a source of pulsating or alternating current supply for
    the load device.


CLS 315/98
TXT Systems under subclass 94, wherein the load device in the system is
    provided with a plurality of thermionic cathodes or cathode heaters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334,    and indented subclasses for systems wherein the load device is an
    electric discharge device provided with a plurality of cathodes and/or a
    plurality of anodes.


CLS 315/99
TXT Systems under subclass 98 wherein a plurality of the cathodes and/or
    cathode heaters are connected in electrical series relation with respect to
    each other and the source of cathode or heater current supply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     for systems under subclass 94 having a plurality of load devices
    connected in the system, the cathodes and/or heaters of two or more of the
    load devices being connected in electrical series relation with respect to
    each other.


CLS 315/100
TXT Systems under subclass 99 provided with a thermostatic electric switch
    connected in the electrical series circuit which includes the plurality of
    cathodes and/or cathode heaters, the thermostatic switch being connected in
    the circuit to open and close the series circuit.

    (1)     Note.  In most of the systems in this subclass, the cathodes and/or
    heaters are connected in series relation until they have become heated to
    the operating temperature, the thermostatic switch then opening the series
    circuit so that the cathodes and/or heaters and the source of current
    supply are no longer in series relation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99,     for corresponding systems having other than thermostatic switches.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclass 14 for electrothermally actuated switches.


CLS 315/101
TXT Systems under subclass 94 having a discharge device and/or an electric
    current rectifier connected either in electrical shunt relation or
    electrical series relation with the cathode or the cathode heater and the
    source of cathode or cathode heater current supply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200,    and indented subclasses, for systems provided with a space
    discharge device and/or an electric current rectifier connected in the
    current supply circuit for the load device.


CLS 315/102
TXT Systems under subclass 94 provided with means in the system to delay the
    application of the discharge maintaining potential to the discharge
    electrodes until the cathode has reached its operating temperature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 33+ for
    retarded (time delay) electric switches, per se.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 227
    and 291 for electronic tube regulators.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 59+ for electromagnetically operated switches,
    per se.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclass 115 for current
    conversion systems having an electronic tube convertor including means to
    delay the application of discharge potential to the electronic tube until
    the cathode has reached its operating temperature. The systems in Class
    363, subclass 115, are closely analogous to the systems in this and
    indented subclasses.  See section VI, 7 of the class definition of Class
    363 for the line between this class (315) and Class 363.


CLS 315/103
TXT Systems under subclass 102 provided with means for generating a surge of
    potential which is higher than the potential of the source of supply and
    for applying the potential surge to the discharge electrodes after the
    cathode has reached its operating temperature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263     and 289+, for other systems under the class definition provided
    with means for impressing a potential surge on the discharge electrodes to
    initiate a discharge in the discharge device.


CLS 315/104
TXT Systems under subclass 102 wherein the means for delaying the application
    of the discharge potential to the discharge electrodes is controlled by
    thermostatic means.

    (1)     Note.  The heat to operate the thermostat may be supplied from the
    cathode or the cathode heater or from an electrical heating element other
    than the cathode or the cathode heater connected in the system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclasses 14+ for electrothermally actuated switches and subclass 298 for
    thermally controlled switches.


CLS 315/105
TXT Systems under subclass 94 wherein the cathode or the cathode heater current
    supply circuit is supplied with pulsating or alternating current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97,     for this subject matter where there are a plurality of load devices
    in the system.

    101,    for systems under subclass 94 wherein the system includes an
    electric current rectifier in the cathode or cathode heater circuit to
    rectify the current supplied to the cathode or heater.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 113 and 115 for amplifier systems including
    a polyphase power supply and a.c. power supply, respectively.


CLS 315/106
TXT Systems under subclass 105 provided with (1) means to open the cathode or
    the cathode heater circuit, or (2) means to regulate the current supplied
    to the cathode or the cathode heater circuit, such means being
    automatically operated in response to some condition.

    (1)     Note.  The condition causing the opening of the cathode circuit may
    be (1) when the cathode or cathode heater supply voltage and/or current
    becomes too low or too high for proper operation of the load device, or (2)
    when more or less than the desired electrical impedance is present in the
    cathode or cathode heater circuit or (3) when the load device fails to
    operate in the desired manner, or (4) any condition affecting the operation
    of the load device.  The current supplied to the cathode may be regulated
    automatically in response to any condition affecting the operation of the
    load device, such as, the temperature of the load device or the surrounding
    atmosphere, or the variations of potential of the source of supply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99+,    for systems under subclass 98, wherein the discharge device is
    provided with a plurality of cathodes or cathode heaters being connected in
    series relation until they have reached their operating temperature, the
    series connection then being automatically opened so that the main
    discharge may be initiated.

    107,    for other systems under subclass 94 provided with means for
    automatically opening the cathode or cathode heater circuit or for
    automatically regulating the current supplied to the cathode or cathode
    heater.

    114     and 116, for systems under the class definition having electrical
    means to heat the load device, the circuit supplying electric current to
    the heating means being provided with an automatic cutout or voltage
    regulator.

    119+,   for systems provided with means for automatically opening the
    circuit of the load device in response to some condition affecting the
    operation of the load device.

    307+,   for systems under the class definition provided with means for
    automatically regulating the current and/or potential supplied to the load
    device in response to some condition affecting the operation of the load
    device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    220-354, for miscellaneous systems for controlling the magnitude of the
    current and/or potential in a single circuit.


CLS 315/107
TXT Systems under subclass 94 provided (1) with means to open the cathode or
    the cathode heater circuit, or (2) means to regulate the current supplied
    to the cathode, or the cathode heater circuit, such means being
    automatically operated in response to some condition.

    (1)     Note.  The condition causing the opening of the cathode circuit may
    be (1) when the cathode or cathode heater supply voltage and/or current
    becomes too low or too high for proper operation of the load device, or (2)
    when more or less than the desired electrical impedance is present in the
    cathode or cathode heater circuit or (3) when the load device fails to
    operate in the desired manner, or (4) any condition affecting the operation
    of the load device.  The current supplied to the cathode may be regulated
    automatically in response to any condition affecting the operation of the
    load device, such as, the temperature of the load device or the surrounding
    atmosphere, or the variations of potential of the source of supply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99+,    for systems under subclass 98, wherein the discharge device is
    provided with a plurality of cathodes or cathode heaters being connected in
    series relation until they have reached their operating temperature, the
    series connection then being automatically opened so that the main
    discharge may be initiated.

    106,    for this subject matter where the current supply for the cathode or
    cathode heater circuit is pulsating and/or alternating current.

    114     and 116, for systems under the class definition having electrical
    means to heat the load device, the circuit supplying electric current to
    the heating means being provided with an automatic cutout or voltage
    regulator.

    119+,   for systems under the class definition provided with means for
    automatically opening the circuit of the load device in response to some
    condition affecting the operation of the load device.

    307+,   for systems under the class definition provided with means for
    automatically regulating the current and/or potential supplied to the load
    device in response to some condition affecting the operation of the load
    device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    220-354, for miscellaneous systems for controlling the magnitude of the
    current and/or potential in a single circuit.


CLS 315/108
TXT Systems under the class definition wherein the load device is of the type
    which operates in a confined atmosphere of gas or vapor and includes (1)
    means for evacuating the gas or vapor, and/or (2) means for admitting gas
    or vapor into the interior of the enclosure of the load device, the system
    including means to cause such pressure regulating means to become operative
    when the gas pressure deviates from normal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 79+ and 403+ for methods of and
    apparatus for gas filling and/or evacuating of lamps or discharge devices
    combined with closing.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 4, 8, and 65+ for methods of and apparatus for inducing a gas or
    vapor into or evacuating the envelope of an electric lamp or space
    discharge device.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 281+ for methods and apparatus for the
    ionic separation or analysis of materials utilizing the mass to electric
    charge ratio of ionic particles of the material.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 7, for the structure
    of an electric lamp or discharge device which has combined therewith an
    evacuating pump designed to be used during the operation of the lamp or
    discharge device (as distinguished from such a combination designed only
    for use during the manufacture of the lamp or discharge device) and
    subclasses 545 to 566 for lamp and discharge device structures which are
    provided with a getter, a gas or vapor generating means or other pressure
    regulating means.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclass 123 for X-ray tubes
    with vacuum control means.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    subclasses 9+, for processes of generating a gas or vapor from a material
    within the envelope of an electric lamp or discharge device and subclass 55
    and the subclasses specified in the notes to the definitions of those
    subclasses for processes of gettering electric lamps or discharge devices.


CLS 315/109
TXT Systems under subclass 108, wherein the load device is a space discharge
    device provided with at least one auxiliary electrode in addition to the
    principal discharge electrodes, the discharge between such auxiliary
    electrode and another electrode when the gas pressure in the enclosure
    deviates from normal controlling the operation of the gas or vapor
    regulating means, the auxiliary electrode being either (1) connected in a
    control circuit so that the flow of current in the auxiliary electrode
    circuit controls the operation of the gas pressure regulating means or (2)
    the auxiliary electrode being composed of or containing a material which
    when heated by the auxiliary discharge releases or absorbs the required gas
    or vapor to maintain the desired pressure in the enclosure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 558+ and 566 for
    the structure of space discharge devices which have an electrode or
    electrode support containing or coated with a getter material, or a gas or
    vapor generating material.


CLS 315/110
TXT Systems under subclass 108 wherein the load device is connected to the
    pressure regulating device by a conduit which includes a valve, the system
    including means to operate the valve when the gas pressure deviates from
    normal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 455+ for valves which are responsive to
    a change in line condition, such as pressure.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 545, for lamps and
    discharge device structure which include a valve so that the lamp or
    discharge device may be either evacuated or have gas or vapor introduced
    into the lamp or discharge device.


CLS 315/111.01
TXT DISCHARGE DEVICE LOAD WITH FLUENT MATERIAL SUPPLY TO THE DISCHARGE SPACE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein, the load device in the
    system is a discharge device, means being provided to supply a fluent
    material to the discharge area.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes systems in which the supply of fluent
    material is (a) for supplying a stabilizing ionizable or combustible gas to
    the discharge area, (b) for the purpose of extinguishing the discharge, (c)
    for deflecting the discharge from the path it would normally take, or (d)
    for any other purpose not otherwise provided for in some particular art
    area.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes induction-type discharge load devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108+,   for systems under the class definition wherein the load device is
    of the type which operates in a confined atmosphere of gas or vapor and
    includes means for regulating the pressure of the gas or vapor in the
    interior of the load device enclosure, the systems including means to cause
    the pressure regulating means to become operative when the pressure
    deviates from normal.

    112+,   for systems under the class definition wherein the load device is
    provided with means for heating and/or cooling at least part of the load
    device structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 251 for devices for producing and
    propagating a unidirectional stream of neutral molecules or atoms through a
    vacuum, usually with thermal velocity; subclasses 281+ for methods and
    apparatus for the ionic separation or analysis of materials utilizing the
    mass to electric charge ratio of ionic particles of the materials, the
    apparatus sometimes used including means to subject a gas or vapor to
    electron or ionic bombardment for the purpose of charging the particles;
    subclasses 306+ for methods and apparatus for the inspection of solids or
    liquids by charged particles; subclasses 324+ for methods and apparatus for
    subjecting materials to corona radiation; subclasses 432+ for an
    irradiating source and a fluent material containment, support, or transfer
    means to permit the irradiation of the fluent material; and subclasses
    492.1+ for the irradiation of objects or materials.  Search the classes
    specified in the Class 250 notes for other classes and the appropriate
    subclasses which provide for other apparatus for either supplying a fluent
    material to an electrical discharge or for subjecting a fluent material to
    an electrical discharge.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 545 to 552 for the
    structure of discharge devices which are provided with an envelope and with
    means for regulating the pressure of the gas, vapor, or vacuum within the
    envelope; subclasses 231.01+ for discharge devices which are provided with
    means to supply fluent material to the discharge space; and subclasses
    359.1+ for means for generating and accelerating positive or negative ions.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclasses 21+ for consumable electrode discharge devices, and the systems
    therefor, where the consumable electrode discharge device is provided with
    means to supply a material, which may be fluent material, to the discharge
    area between the electrodes.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 210 for ion or electron beam deflecting magnets
    per se and the search notes thereto for combinations including such magnet
    means.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclasses 100+ for devices and methods utilizing a plasma where the
    disclosed or claimed intent is to effect nuclear fusion reactions.


CLS 315/111.11
TXT With tangential fluent material supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 111.01 including means for directing the
    fluent material in a direction which is tangential to the discharge space.


CLS 315/111.21
TXT Plasma generating:

    Subject matter under subclass 111.01 including means for producing a plasma.

    (1)     Note.  Usually plasmas have a neutral net charge, but not
    necessarily so.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 231.31 for discharge
    devices, per se, which produce a plasma.


CLS 315/111.31
TXT With extraction electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 111.21 including means for removing ions of
    one charge from the plasma or discharge space.


CLS 315/111.41
TXT With magnetic field:

    Subject matter under subclass 111.21 including means for generating a
    magnetic field.


CLS 315/111.51
TXT Induction type:

    Subject matter under subclass 111.41 wherein the discharge is sustained by
    a high intensity magnetic field.


CLS 315/111.61
TXT Acceleration:

    Subject matter under subclass 111.41 wherein the means for producing a
    magnetic field accelerates the plasma.


CLS 315/111.71
TXT Plasma containment:

    Subject matter under subclass 111.41 wherein the magnetic field confines
    the plasma.


CLS 315/111.81
TXT Electron or ion source:

    Subject matter under subclass 111.01 including means for producing
    electrons or ions.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are electron sources of general utility.


CLS 315/111.91
TXT Gas ionization type (e.g., ion pump or gauge source):

    Subject matter under subclass 111.81 wherein the fluent material is
    bombarded by electrons or ions to produce ions.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are ion sources for ion pumps and ionization
    gauges.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 359.1+ for ion
    sources with means to accelerate the ions.

    417,    Pumps, subclass 49 for ion pumps.


CLS 315/112
TXT Systems under the class definition wherein the load device in the system is
    provided with means for heating and/or cooling at least part of the load
    device structure.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses are not restricted to gas
    or vapor discharge devices and lamps as load devices or vapor, but include
    all discharge device systems wherein the discharge device is provided with
    means for heating and/or cooling the discharge devices, and the system
    includes means automatically operated in response to some condition
    affecting the operation of the load device to control the operation of the
    load device, or the system includes means controlled by the temperature
    modifying medium for altering the operation of the discharge device
    excepting such systems in which the discharge device load is a discharge
    control discharge device other than the discontinuous control type gas or
    vapor discharge device and the system includes means to supply current
    and/or potential to the discharge control means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     for discharge devices or lamps under the class definition which are
    combined with means for heating and/or cooling the lamp or discharge device
    structure, either the lamp or discharge device, or the heating and/or
    cooling means being structurally combined with an electric circuit element
    to form a unitary device, or the heating and/or cooling means forming an
    electrical circuit element, the lamp or discharge device, and the heating
    and/or cooling means, being structurally united to form a unitary device.

    94,     and indented subclasses for systems wherein the load device in the
    system is a discharge device provided with either (1) a thermionic cathode
    adapted to be heated by an electric current flowing through the cathode, or
    (2) a cathode of the indirectly heated type, the system including means to
    apply electric current to the cathode or the cathode heater element.

    108,    and indented subclasses, for systems having the load device in the
    system provided with gas or vapor pressure regulating means, the gas or
    vapor pressure regulating means being responsive to heat.  For example,
    such systems wherein the load device is provided with a material which
    either vaporizes, or releases, or absorbs gas, when the material is heated.

    111.01, for systems under the class definition where the load device is a
    discharge device, means being provided to supply fluent material to the
    discharge area between the electrodes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 11+ for the
    structure of discharge devices and electric lamps which are provided with
    means for heating and/or cooling at least part of the discharge device or
    lamp.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 26 and indented subclasses, for consumable electrode discharge
    devices provided with temperature modifying means, and the electrical
    systems therefor.


CLS 315/113
TXT Systems under subclass 112 having a plurality of load devices connected in
    the system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312,    and the subclasses specified in the notes to the definition of that
    subclass, for other plural load device systems within the class definition.


CLS 315/114
TXT Systems under subclass 113 wherein the load devices are provided with
    electrical heating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95,     and indented subclasses, for systems under the class definition
    provided with a plurality of discharge device load devices, the discharge
    devices having either thermionic cathodes designed to be heated by the
    passage of an electric current or indirectly heated cathodes, the system
    including means to supply electric current to the cathode or the cathode
    heater element.


CLS 315/115
TXT Systems under subclass 112 wherein the load device is provided with
    electrical heating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     and indented subclasses, for discharge devices which have
    structurally combined therewith so as to form a unitary device, a filament,
    electric heater, or resistance, the filament, heater, or resistance being
    connected in electrical shunt to the discharge electrodes.

    49,     for discharge devices which have structurally combined therewith,
    so as to form a unitary device, a filament or electric heater, the filament
    or heater being connected in electrical series with the discharge device.

    94,     and indented subclasses, for systems having a discharge device load
    device, the discharge device having either a thermionic cathode designed to
    be heated by the passage of an electric current or an indirectly heated
    cathode, the system including means to apply electric current to the
    cathode or the cathode heater element.

    114,    for this subject matter where there are a plurality of load devices
    in the system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 15+, for the
    structure of discharge devices and electric lamps which are provided with
    an electrical heating means for heating the lamp or discharge device.


CLS 315/116
TXT Systems under subclass 115 provided with (1) means to open the current
    supply circuit for the heating means, or (2) means to regulate the current
    supplied to the heating means, such means being automatically operated in
    response to some condition.

    (1)     Note.  The condition causing the opening of the heater circuit or
    the operation of the regulating means may be (1) when the load device
    current and/or voltage becomes too high or too low, or (2) the temperature
    of the load device, or (3) any other condition affecting the operation of
    the load device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106     and 109, for systems provided with a discharge device load device
    of the type having either a thermionic cathode designed to be heated by the
    flow of current there through or an indirectly heated cathode, the system
    including an automatic cutout or voltage regulator in the cathode or
    cathode heater current supply circuit.

    114,    for this subject matter where there are a plurality of load devices
    in the system.

    117,    for systems under subclass 112 provided with means other than
    electric heating means for modifying the temperature of the load device,
    such temperature modifying means being automatically controlled in response
    to some condition affecting the operation of the load device.

    119,    and indented subclasses, for systems provided with an automatic
    cutout for the load device.

    307,    and indented subclasses, for systems provided with automatic
    regulating means to regulate the supply of current to the load device.


CLS 315/117
TXT Systems under subclass 112 provided with means for controlling the
    operation of the heating and/or cooling means, such means being
    automatically controlled in response to some condition affecting the
    operation of the load device.

    (1)     Note.  The condition controlling the temperature responsive means
    may be (1) the amount of current flow through the load device, or (2) the
    temperature of the load device, or (3) any other condition affecting the
    operation of the load device.

    (2)     Note.  See note (1) to the definition of subclass 112.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114     and 116, for this subject matter where the heating means is an
    electrical heater.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 429 for apparatus or methods for
    subjecting fluent materials to radiant energy rays or emanations, the
    apparatus being provided with means to control the flow of fluent material.
     Some of the apparatus in subclass 429 of Class 250 includes electrical
    systems which are closely analogous to the systems in this subclass.  Where
    the fluent material is disclosed merely as a temperature modifying medium
    for the lamp or discharge devices, classification is in Class 315.  Where
    the fluent material is disclosed as a material being treated,
    classification is in Class 250.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 13, for electric
    lamps and discharge devices which are combined with means for modifying the
    temperature of the discharge device or lamp and which have means for
    controlling the operation of the temperature modifier in the apparatus. In
    Class 313 no electrical system for the lamp or discharge device is provided
    nor is there any electrical control system for controlling the operation of
    the temperature modifier. The excluded systems are found in this class
    (315) and not in Class 313.


CLS 315/118
TXT Systems under subclass 112 provided with means controlled by the
    temperature modifying medium for altering the operation of the load device.

    (1)     Note.  The control exercised over the load device may be to open
    the circuit of the load device, to regulate the current supply to the load
    device, or any other control necessary for either the protection or the
    proper operation of the load device in view of the condition of the
    temperature modifying medium.

    (2)     Note.  The temperature modifying means may control the load device
    in response to (1) the temperature of the temperature modifying medium, or
    (2) the rate of flow of the temperature modifying medium, or (3) any other
    condition which would affect the operation of the load device.

    (3)     Note.  See note (1) to the definition of subclass 112.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 429 and 430 for methods and apparatus
    for subjecting fluent materials to radiant energy rays or emanations, the
    apparatus being provided with means controlled by the fluent material being
    treated to control the operation of the radiant energy ray generator.  Some
    of the apparatus in subclasses 430 and 453.11+ of Class 250 includes
    electrical systems which are closely analogous to the systems in this
    subclass.  Where the fluent material is disclosed merely as a temperature
    modifying medium for the lamp or discharge device, classification is in
    Class 315.  Where fluent material is disclosed as a material being treated,
    classification is in Class 250.


CLS 315/119
TXT Systems under the class definition provided with means to complete an
    electrical circuit in shunt about a load device or some part thereof,
    and/or to open the load device current supply circuit, such means being
    automatically operated (1) when the load device becomes nonconductive or
    fails to operate properly, or (2) when the supply voltage and/or current
    becomes too low or too high for the proper operation of the load device or
    (3) when more than a desired number of load devices are connected to the
    supply circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for lamps and discharge devices which have structurally combined
    therewith, so as to form a unitary device, an automatically operating
    electric switch which is connected with the lamp or discharge device so as
    to either open the circuit or close a shunt circuit about the lamp or
    discharge device when it fails to operate properly.

    88,     and indented subclasses, for systems provided with (1) two or more
    load devices, or (2) a load device of the electric discharge type having a
    plurality of cathodes and/or anodes, or (3) an electric lamp provided with
    two or more filaments, and provided with means for automatically
    substituting for (a) one of the load devices, another of the load devices,
    or (b) the first operated electrode, another electrode, or (c) the first
    operated filament, another filament, when the first operated device,
    electrode, or filament fails to operate properly.

    106     and 107, for systems under the class definition wherein the load
    device is a discharge device having a thermionic cathode heated by the
    passage of electric current or an indirectly heated cathode, the cathode or
    cathode heater circuit including means to automatically open the cathode or
    the cathode heater circuit in response to some condition affecting the
    operation of the load device.

    114     and 116, for systems wherein the load device is provided with
    electric heating means, the current supply circuit for the heating means
    being provided with an automatic cutout.

    118,    for systems under the class definition wherein the load device is
    provided with a temperature modifying means, the temperature modifying
    means controlling the operation of a cutout switch for the load device.

    129,    and indented subclasses, for systems provided with signal means,
    indicating means, and/or alarm means operated by some means responsive to a
    condition of the load device to indicate such condition.

    340,    for other systems under the class definition wherein the load
    device is a discharge device and the system includes means in the
    cathode-anode circuit for interrupting or extinguishing the flow of
    electric discharge current between the cathode and the anode.

    360,    for systems provided with a time controlled means for (1) supplying
    a current to the load device for a predetermined time, or (2) interrupting
    the supply of current to the load device after a predetermined time lapse.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 10 and indented subclasses, for consumable electrode discharge
    devices, and the systems therefor, provided with an automatic shunt circuit
    closing means or an automatic cutout means.


CLS 315/120
TXT Systems under subclass 119 having combined therewith signaling means, or
    indicator means, or alarm means operated by some part of the load device or
    the electrical circuits therefor to indicate some condition in the load
    device or the circuits therefor.

    (1)     Note.  The condition indicated in the systems in this subclass is
    usually the condition which causes the shunt circuit closing means or the
    cutout means to operate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129,    and indented subclasses, for other systems under the class
    definition provided with signaling means, or indicator means, or alarm
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 10, for the structure
    of electric lamps and discharge devices which are provided with a
    temperature indicator, and subclasses 323+ for lamps and discharge devices
    which have combined therewith a signaling means, indicator means or alarm
    means.  In the devices of Class 313 there is no electrical system for
    supplying current to the lamp or discharge device and there is no
    electrical system for controlling the signal indicator or alarm.  The
    excluded systems are in this class (315) and not in Class 313.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 403+ for apparatus
    or methods for electrically testing electric lamps or space discharge
    devices.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 635+ for electrical signal
    or alarm systems responsive to or controlled by some condition of some
    electrical apparatus.


CLS 315/121
TXT Systems under subclass 119, having a plurality of load devices connected in
    the system.

    (1)     Note.  The automatic shunt or cutout means may operate to complete
    a shunt circuit about and/or to cutout only one of the plurality of load
    devices, or its supply circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312,    and the subclasses specified in the notes to the definition of that
    subclass, for other plural load device systems within the class definition.


CLS 315/122
TXT Systems under subclass 121 wherein two or more of the load devices are
    connected in electrical series relation with respect to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179,    and indented subclasses, for other systems having plural diverse
    type load devices connected in series relation and without an automatic
    shunt and/or cutout.

    185,    and indented subclasses, for miscellaneous series connected load
    devices without an automatic shunt and/or cutout.


CLS 315/123
TXT Systems under subclass 119 having (1) a plurality of automatic shunt
    circuit closing means, (2) a plurality of automatic cutouts, or (3) both an
    automatic shunt circuit closing means and an automatic cutout means
    connected in the system.


CLS 315/124
TXT Systems under subclass 119 wherein the load device is provided with an
    auxiliary electrode, the operation of the shunt circuit closing means
    and/or of the cutout means being controlled by the current and/or potential
    in the circuit which includes the auxiliary electrode.

    (1)     Note.  In some of the systems in this subclass, the load device is
    an incandescent filament lamp having an auxiliary electrode mounted in
    proximity to the filament, the auxiliary electrode being connected in the
    system so that when the filament is broken, the resultant arc contacts the
    auxiliary electrode and the shunt circuit closing means or the cut-out
    means is operated in response to the current flow in the auxiliary
    electrode circuit.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes systems in which the load device is a
    discharge device having an auxiliary starting or keep-alive electrode, the
    automatic shunt circuit closing means or cut-out means being operated in
    response to the current flow conditions in the auxiliary electrode circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    335,    and the indented subclass and the subclasses specified in the notes
    to the definition of those subclasses for other systems under the class
    definition in which the load device is a discharge device provided with an
    auxiliary electrode.


CLS 315/125
TXT Systems under subclass 119 wherein the electrical circuit in shunt is
    completed about the load device or some part thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The shunt circuit may be of lower or higher resistance than
    the resistance of the load device and/or the part around which it is
    completed, and is often a "short-circuit".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for lamps and discharge devices which have structurally combined
    therewith, so as to form a unitary device, an automatically operated
    electric switch connected to the lamp or discharge device so as to complete
    an electrical shunt about the lamp or discharge device when it fails to
    operate properly.

    122,    for this subject matter where the system includes a plurality of
    series connected load devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 11 and indented subclasses, for consumable electrode discharge
    devices, and the systems therefor, provided with an automatic shunt circuit
    closing means.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 70 for
    miscellaneous systems having means to restore the circuit by closing a
    shunt circuit about a load device.


CLS 315/126
TXT Systems under subclass 125 provided with an electrical impedance in the
    shunt circuit.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes systems wherein an electro-responsive
    switch, such as an electromagnetic or thermostatic switch, is utilized to
    close the shunt circuit, and the switch operating means, such as the
    electromagnet coil, or the heater for the thermostat, is included in the
    shunt circuit so as to hold the switch in operated condition as long as the
    supply voltage is maintained.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    for this subject matter where the system includes a plurality of
    series connected load devices.

    306,    for systems provided with a current and/or voltage regulator for
    the load device connected in shunt relation to the load device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 13, and indented subclass, for consumable electrode discharge
    device systems provided with an automatic shunt circuit closing means for
    connecting a compensating impedance in shunt to the discharge device.


CLS 315/127
TXT Systems under subclass 119 provided with an electrically operated switch to
    control the circuit of the discharge device, the switch being operated by
    means of the current and/or potential changes in the supply circuit of the
    load device.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes systems provided with a fuse.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for this subject matter where the system includes signal means, an
    indicator, or an alarm.

    121,    and indented subclass, for this subject matter where there are a
    plurality of load devices in the system.

    123,    for this subject matter where the system includes a plurality of
    shunts and/or cutouts.

    124,    for this subject matter where the electrically operated switch is
    controlled by an auxiliary electrode in the load device.

    125,    and indented subclass, for this subject matter where the switch
    closes a shunt circuit about the load device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 15 and indented subclass, for consumable electrode discharge
    devices, and the systems therefor provided with an electrically operated
    switch operated by means of current changes in the circuit of the discharge
    device to complete a shunt circuit about the discharge device, and subclass
    18 and indented subclass for such systems for cutting out or opening the
    circuit of the discharge device.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 2+ for electromagnetically actuated switches of
    general application.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclasses 14+ for electrothermally responsive electric switches of general
    application.


CLS 315/128
TXT Systems under subclass 127 wherein the electrical switch is provided with a
    plurality of operating means.

    (1)     Note.  The switch may be provided with two or more electromagnet
    coils, or may be a combined thermostatic and electromagnet switch or be
    provided with any other kind of plural operating means.

    (2)     Note.  The switch may be arranged so that either of the switch
    operating means may actuate the switch, or the switch may be arranged so
    that the switch will be actuated only when both of the actuating means are
    at a predetermined condition, or the switch may be arranged so that one of
    the means furnishes a biasing force against or for actuation, the other
    switch operating means completing the actuation of the switch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 177+ for electromagnetically operated switches
    having plural operating magnet means and subclass 266 for electromagnets
    with armature utilizing plural coils or magnets.


CLS 315/129
TXT Systems under the class definition provided with signaling means, or
    indicator means, or alarm means operated by some part of the load device or
    the electrical circuits therefor to indicate some condition in the load
    device or the circuits therefor.

    (1)     Note.  The condition indicated may be the operative or inoperative
    condition of the load device or the circuit therefor, or the time that the
    load device has been operated, or the degree of heat of some part of the
    discharge device, or any other desired condition.

    (2)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses do not include systems
    where a lamp or gas or vapor discharge device is the sole signal or
    indicator means to show some condition in system except where the casing or
    mounting for the signal lamp or discharge device which is used as a signal
    is claimed.  Patents excluded are cross-referenced to this or the indented
    subclasses and are cross-referenced to this or the indented subclasses and
    are classified either as a plural load device system or in subclasses 88+
    where the signal lamp or discharge device is operative only on failure of a
    first operated lamp or discharge device to operate properly.  See the
    reference to subclasses 88+ under "Search This Class, Subclass", below.
    Where one of the lamps or discharge devices is claimed broadly as a
    signaling means, the patent is placed in this or the indented subclasses
    and cross-referenced to the other appropriate subclasses in this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     and indented subclasses, where the system includes two load devices
    and the system is arranged so that one of the load devices is energized
    only after the first load device fails to operate, even though the second
    operated load device is disclosed and claimed as a signal for the first
    operated load device, excepting where the casing or mounting for the load
    device which is used as a signal is claimed when the patent is placed in
    this subclass (129) or the indented subclasses and cross-referenced to
    subclass 88, and indented subclasses.

    119,    and indented subclasses, for systems under the class definition
    provided with automatically operating means to complete an electrical
    circuit in shunt about the discharge device or some part thereof, and/or to
    open the electric circuit of the discharge device or some part thereof,
    such means being automatically operated in response to some condition of
    the discharge device which prevents further operation of the discharge
    device in the normal manner, especially subclass 120 where the system also
    includes automatically operating means to open the circuit and/or close a
    shunt circuit about the load device when the load device fails to operate
    properly.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclasses, for nonelectrical
    signals and indicators of general application.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 10, for the structure
    of electric lamps and discharge devices which are provided with a
    temperature indicator and subclasses 323+ for lamps and discharge devices
    which have combined therewith a signaling means, indicator means or alarm
    means.  In the devices in Class 313 there is no electrical system for
    supplying current to the lamp or discharge device and there is no
    electrical system for controlling the signal indicator or alarm.  The
    excluded systems are in this class (315) and not in Class 313.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 9, for consumable electrode discharge devices, and the systems
    therefor provided with signaling means, or indicator means, or alarm means.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 403+ for apparatus
    or methods for electrically testing electric lamps or space discharge
    devices.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+ for electric signaling
    systems automatically responsive to a condition, particularly subclasses
    641+ for a signalling light condition responsive indicating system.


CLS 315/130
TXT Systems under subclass 129 having a plurality of load devices connected in
    the system.

    (1)     Note.  The signal, indicator, or alarm means may indicate the
    condition of only one of the plurality of load devices, or of its supply
    circuit.

    (2)     Note.  Where a single lamp or a single discharge device is the
    ultimate load device, and the system includes an additional lamp and/or
    discharge device in the circuit which is connected in the circuit so as to
    control and/or modify the current and/or potential supplied to such single
    ultimate load device, the patent is classified as a plural load device
    system if (a) the controlling and/or modifying device is a lamp, or (b) the
    controlling and/or modifying device is limited in the claims to being a gas
    or vapor discharge device.  Conversely, such a system is not classified as
    a plural load device system where the controlling and/or modifying device
    is claimed broadly as a discharge device even though it is disclosed as a
    gas or vapor discharge device.

            The controlling and/or modifying device may be connected in the
    control circuit of the discharge device where the ultimate load device is a
    discharge control discharge device, and the same basis of classification is
    used as is set forth above.


CLS 315/131
TXT Systems under subclass 130 having the signal, indicator, or alarm means so
    arranged that the condition of any one of two or more of the load devices
    or of their supply circuits will be indicated by the signal, indicator or
    alarm means.


CLS 315/132
TXT Systems under subclass 131 provided with a plurality of signaling means, or
    indicator means, or alarm means.

    (1)     Note.  Each of the signal, indicator, or alarm means may indicate
    the condition of only one of the load devices or its supply circuit, or
    there may be a plurality of signal, indicator, or alarm means, one of which
    may be arranged to indicate the condition of two or more of the load
    devices, or their supply circuits.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    for plural signals, indicators, or alarms associated with single
    load devices.


CLS 315/133
TXT Systems under subclass 129 provided with a plurality of signaling means, or
    indicator means, or alarm means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132,    for plural load device systems under the class definition provided
    with a plurality of signal, indicator, or alarm means for selectively
    indicating the condition of a plurality of load devices or their supply
    circuits.


CLS 315/134
TXT Systems under subclass 129 provided with a device sensitive to the radiant
    energy generated by the load device for controlling the operation of the
    signal, indicator, or alarm means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149,    and indented subclasses, for systems not having indicators, etc.,
    provided with a radiant energy sensitive device for controlling the
    operation of the load device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ and the classes and subclasses
    specified in the Notes thereto for photocell control electric circuits and
    photocell apparatus.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclasses 298+ for thermally responsive electric switches.


CLS 315/135
TXT Systems under subclass 129 provided with a discharge device or rectifier
    connected in the circuit of the signal, indicator or alarm means, the
    signal, indicator or alarm means being controlled by the current flowing
    through the discharge device or the rectifier.

    (1)     Note.  Where the discharge device in the signal, indicator, or
    alarm means circuit is of the type defined in the class definition as being
    included as a load device in this class, the patent is classified as a
    plural load device system in subclass 130 and indented subclasses above
    even though the discharge device is not disclosed or claimed as anything
    more than a means for controlling the current flow to the signal,
    indicator, or alarm means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200,    and indented subclasses, for systems provided with a discharge
    device or rectifier connected either in electrical series relation or
    electrical shunt relation to the load device and the source of current
    supply for the load device.


CLS 315/136
TXT Systems under subclass 129 having an electrical signal, indicator, or alarm
    means, the circuit of the electrical signal, indicator, or alarm means
    being controlled by an electrically operated electric switch which is
    actuated in response to some condition of the load device or its supply
    circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, particularly subclass 12
    and indented subclass.

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 2+ for electromagnetically operated switches of
    general application.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    appropriate subclasses.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+ for electric signaling
    systems automatically responsive to a condition.


CLS 315/137
TXT Systems under the class definition provided with (1) means for supplying
    electrical energy from a source of polyphase alternating currents to one or
    more load devices, or (2) a source of polyphase alternating current and
    means for converting the polyphase alternating currents to current of
    another character which is supplied to one or more load devices.

    (1)     Note.  In the systems of (1) above, the source of current may be
    either a direct or single phase alternating current, the system including
    means to convert the current to polyphase alternating currents which are
    supplied to one or more load devices.

    (2)     Note.  In the system of (2) above, the polyphase alternating
    currents may be converted to either single phase alternating current or
    direct current which is supplied to one or more devices.

    (3)     Note.  Where a single lamp or a single discharge device is the
    ultimate load device, and the system includes an additional lamp and or
    discharge device in the circuit which is connected in the circuit so as to
    control and/or modify the current and/or potential supplied to such single
    ultimate load device, the patent is classified as a plural load device
    system if (a) the controlling and/or modifying device is a lamp, or (b) the
    controlling and/or modifying device is limited in the claims to being a gas
    or vapor discharge device.  Conversely, such a system is not classified as
    a plural load device system where the controlling and/or modifying device
    is claimed broadly as a discharge device even though it is disclosed as a
    gas or vapor discharge device.

            The controlling and/or modifying device may be connected in the
    control circuit of the discharge device where the ultimate load device is a
    discharge control discharge device, and the same basis of classification is
    used as is set forth above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160,    and indented subclasses, for systems provided with a plurality of
    sources of current supply, not especially indented subclass 174, for such
    systems having a plurality of alternating current supplies of diverse types.

    194,    and indented subclasses, for systems wherein the discharge device
    is provided with discharge controlling means, such as a grid electrode, and
    the discharge control circuit includes means to shift the phase of the
    control current or potential with respect to the pulsating and alternating
    current in the cathode-anode circuit of the discharge device.  In the
    systems of subclass 194 and indented subclasses, the source of supply
    current for the load device need not be a pulsating or alternating current.
     Where the source of supply current is pulsating or alternating, and the
    control means is claimed as an auxiliary starting electrode, the patent is
    classified in this subclass (137) or the indented subclasses and
    cross-referenced to subclass 194 and indented subclasses. Where the claims
    only recite a control device even though an auxiliary starting electrode is
    disclosed, the patent is classified in subclass 194 and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 13+
    for polyphase circuits of general application.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 31, for consumable electrode discharge devices in combination with
    means for supplying polyphase alternating currents to the discharge device.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, appropriate
    subclasses, for polyphase alternating current systems having a single input
    and a single output circuit and provided with means for controlling the
    voltage and/or current and/or phase of the polyphase alternating current.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    conversion systems which are supplied with polyphase alternating currents,
    particularly subclasses 1+ for combined or plural conversions systems;
    subclasses 13+ for current conversion (e.g., rectification,
    decertification) systems; subclasses 148+ for systems for converting an
    input alternating current having one number of phases into alternating
    current having a different number of phases; and subclasses 157+ for
    frequency conversion systems which may be supplied with polyphase
    alternating current.


CLS 315/138
TXT Systems under subclass 137 provided with (1) a source of single phase
    alternating current and means to convert the single phase current to
    polyphase alternating currents, or (2) a source of polyphase alternating
    currents and means to convert the polyphase currents to either single phase
    currents or polyphase alternating currents of a different number of phases.

    (1)     Note.  Systems under the class definition provided with a single
    phase source of supply and "phase splitting" means for supplying the load
    device with polyphase currents are in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194,    and indented subclasses, for systems under the class definition
    wherein the load device is a discharge control discharge device having
    discharge control means, and the control circuit includes means to shift
    the phase of the control current or voltage with respect to the current
    flowing in the cathode-anode circuit of the load device.  For the line
    between this subclass (138) and subclass 194 and indented subclasses, see
    the notes to the definition of subclass 137.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 2+ and the subclasses
    mentioned in the notes thereto, for systems for converting an alternating
    current having one number of phases into alternating current having another
    number of phases either alone or in combination with current and/or
    frequency conversion.


CLS 315/139
TXT Systems under subclass 138 wherein the source of supply is a source of
    polyphase alternating currents.


CLS 315/140
TXT Systems under subclass 139 provided with means for converting the polyphase
    alternating currents of the supply source to polyphase alternating currents
    of a greater number of phases which are supplied to the load device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    for systems under the class definition for converting single phase
    alternating currents to polyphase alternating currents.


CLS 315/141
TXT Systems under subclass 137 provided with transformer means connected
    between the source of supply and the load device for supplying electric
    current to the load device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140,    for this subject matter where the system includes phase multiplying
    means.

    276,    and indented subclasses, and the subclasses specified in the notes
    thereto for other systems in this class provided with a transformer in the
    supply circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 361, for
    miscellaneous polyphase transformer systems.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 5+ for the structure of polyphase
    transformers and inductive reactors.


CLS 315/142
TXT Systems under subclass 141 wherein the transformer means includes at least
    two sets of transformer windings, each of the sets of transformer windings
    including a plurality of windings connected to a common connecting point,
    the two common connecting points being connected together by means of an
    inductive winding which either constitutes, or is a part of, an interphase
    transformer.

    (1)     Note.  One of the more common types of transformer means included
    in the subclasses is the type wherein the secondary of the transformer is
    provided with two star connected polyphase windings, the neutral points
    being connected together by means of an inductance, the star connected
    windings being connected to either (1) a plurality of discharge devices or
    (2) to the anodes of a plural cathode and/or anode discharge device, the
    common return conductor from the plural discharge devices or the return
    conductor from the cathode of the plural cathode and/or anode discharge
    device being connected to the midpoint of the inductance so that the
    inductance functions as an interphase autotransformer.


CLS 315/143
TXT Systems under subclass 141 in which the transformer means is provided with
    a plurality of phase coils, and means are provided for connecting the phase
    coils in different manners with respect to each other.

    (1)     Note.  One of the more common types of transformer means included
    in this subclass is the type in which the primary or secondary phase coils
    may be connected either in star or delta.


CLS 315/144
TXT Systems under subclass 141 having a plurality of load devices connected to
    the transformer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    and indented subclasses, for this subject matter where there is a
    phase changing transformer in the supply circuit of the plurality of load
    devices, especially indented subclass 140, where the transformer means is a
    phase multiplying means.

    146,    for other plural load device systems under subclass 137 where there
    are a plurality of discharge control discharge device load devices in the
    system.


CLS 315/145
TXT Systems under subclass 141 in which the load device which is connected to
    the transformer is a discharge device having two or more cathodes and/or
    two or more anodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147,    and indented subclass, for other systems under subclass 137 wherein
    the load device is a plural cathode and/or anode discharge device.

    260,    and indented subclasses, for other alternating current systems
    under the class systems wherein the load device is a plural cathode and/or
    anode discharge device.

    334,    and indented subclasses, and the subclasses specified in the notes
    to the definition of those subclasses, for other systems under the class
    definition wherein the load device is a plural cathode and/or anode
    discharge device.


CLS 315/146
TXT Systems under subclass 137 having a plurality of discharge device load
    devices in the system, the discharge devices being provided with a
    discharge controlling means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195,    and indented subclasses, for systems wherein there are a plurality
    of discharge control discharge device load devices, the system including
    phase shifting means to vary the phase of the discharge controlling current
    and/or potential with respect to the current flow in the cathode-anode
    circuit of the discharge device.

    252,    and see the notes thereto for other alternating current systems
    which include a plurality of discharge control discharge device load
    devices.

    325,    and the subclasses specified in the notes to the definition of that
    subclass, for other systems which include a plurality of discharge control
    discharge device load devices.


CLS 315/147
TXT Systems under subclass 137 in which the load device is a discharge device
    having two or more cathodes and/or two or more cathodes and/or two or more
    anodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145,    for this subject matter where the system includes a transformer in
    the supply circuit of the load device.

    260,    and indented subclasses, for other systems under the class
    definition wherein a plural cathode and/or anode load device is supplied
    with alternating current.

    334,    and indented subclasses, and the subclasses specified in the notes
    to the definition of those subclasses, for other plural cathode and/or
    anode load device systems.


CLS 315/148
TXT Systems under subclass 147 in which the discharge device is provided with a
    discharge controlling means.

    (1)     Note.  Systems under subclass 147 in which the discharge device is
    provided with an auxiliary discharge electrode are classified in this
    subclass.  The auxiliary electrode may be supplied with alternating current
    which is out of phase with the current supplied to the principal electrode,
    or the principal electrodes may be connected to a polyphase system and the
    auxiliary electrode may be supplied with current of any character.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146,    for polyphase systems which include two or more discharge device
    loads, having a discharge controlling means.

    261,    and indented subclasses, subclass 267, and subclass 268 and
    indented subclasses, for nonpolyphase alternating current systems having a
    discharge device load with a discharge controlling means; subclass 261 and
    indented subclasses, for plural cathode and/or anode type with an auxiliary
    starting electrode, subclass 267, for those with an electromagnet control
    means, and subclass 268 and indented subclasses for those with
    miscellaneous control means.

    335,    and indented subclass, subclass 339, subclass 341 and indented
    subclasses, subclass 344 and indented subclasses, and subclass 349 and
    indented subclasses, for nonalternating current systems having a discharge
    device load with a discharge controlling means; and subclass 335 and
    indented subclass, and subclass 339, for plural cathode and/or anode type,
    subclass 335, with an auxiliary starting electrode and subclass 339 with
    miscellaneous discharge controlling means; subclass 341 and indented
    subclasses, for devices having plural discharge control means; subclass 349
    and indented subclasses, for devices having miscellaneous discharge control
    means.


CLS 315/149
TXT Systems under the class definition wherein the system includes means for
    controlling the operation of the load device by means of radiant energy.

    (1)     Note.  The load device may be a radiant energy sensitive device,
    that is, a load device whose operation is altered when subjected to radiant
    energy, or the system may include a radiant energy sensitive device, such
    as a photocell, which controls the operation of the load device when
    subjected to radiant  energy.

    (2)     Note.  The term "radiant energy" as used in this subclass and the
    indented subclasses includes radiant energy of any type, such as X-ray,
    light rays whether within the visible spectrum or not, Herztian waves and
    other radiated electrical energy, and emanations from radio-active
    substances.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     and indented subclass, for cathode-ray tube loads with radiant
    energy sensitive control means.

    34,     for structurally combined load devices and antenna.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ and the classes and subclasses
    specified in the Notes thereto for photocell controlled electric circuits
    and photocell apparatus.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 63, for consumable electrode discharge device systems provided
    with a radiant energy ray device for controlling the operation of the
    consumable electrode device.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.69 and 825.72 are the
    generic subclasses for the control of apparatus and devices at a distance
    by means of radio wave energy.


CLS 315/150
TXT Systems under subclass 149 wherein the load device is a radiant energy
    sensitive device, that is, a load device whose operation is altered when
    subjected to radiant energy rays.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 523+ and the
    subclasses specified in the Notes thereto for radiant energy sensitive
    electric lamps and discharge device structures, per se.


CLS 315/151
TXT Systems under subclass 149 having the radiant energy sensitive device
    arranged with respect to the load device so that radiant energy generated
    by the load device is applied to the radiant energy sensitive device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 205, for similar systems where the system
    is provided with means for supplying output current to a device other than
    a lamp or gas or vapor type electronic tube or when the system includes
    significant apparatus, such as supporting or mounting means for the lamp or
    gas or vapor tube, which is excluded from this class (315) by the class
    definition.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 63, for consumable electrode discharge device systems, having the
    spacing of the discharge electrodes with respect to each other controlled
    by a radiant energy sensitive device which is subjected to the radiant
    energy generated by the discharge between such electrodes.


CLS 315/152
TXT Systems under subclass 149 having a plurality of load devices connected in
    the system.

    (1)     Note.  Where a single lamp or a single discharge device is the
    ultimate load device, and the system includes an additional lamp and/or
    discharge device in the circuit which is connected in the circuit so as to
    control and/or modify the current and/or potential supplied to such single
    ultimate load device, the patent is classified as a plural load device
    system if (a) the controlling and/or modifying device is a lamp, or (b) the
    controlling and/or modifying device is limited in the claims to being a gas
    or vapor discharge device.  Conversely, such a system is not classified as
    a plural load device system where the controlling and/or modifying device
    is claimed broadly as a discharge device, even though it is disclosed as a
    gas or vapor discharge device.

            The controlling and/or modifying device may be connected in the
    control circuit of the discharge device where the ultimate load device is a
    discharge control discharge device, and the same basis of classification is
    used as is set forth above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312,    and indented subclasses, and the subclasses referred to in the
    notes to the definition for other plural load device systems under the
    class definition.


CLS 315/153
TXT Systems under subclass 152 wherein one or more of the load devices may be
    energized separately from the other load device in the system, the
    selection of the load device or devices to be energized being controlled by
    the radiant energy sensitive means.


CLS 315/154
TXT Systems under subclass 153 wherein the means for selecting the load device
    or devices to be energized is an electrically operated switch whose
    operation is controlled by the radiant energy sensitive means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    313,    and indented subclasses, for other plural load device systems under
    the class definition provided with selective switching means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 173+ for
    photocell controlled relay circuits.


CLS 315/155
TXT Systems under subclass 149 having a plurality of radiant energy sensitive
    devices connected in the system.


CLS 315/156
TXT Systems under subclass 149 having a discharge device connected either in
    electrical series relation or electrical shunt relation to the source of
    current supply for the load device and the load device the operation of the
    discharge device being controlled by the radiant energy sensitive means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200,    and indented subclasses, and the subclasses referred to in the
    notes to the definition, for other systems under the class definition
    provided with a discharge device or rectifier in the supply circuit of the
    load device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 206+, for miscellaneous electric
    circuits which are controlled by a photocell.


CLS 315/157
TXT Systems under subclass 149 wherein the load device is a discharge device
    having a discharge controlling means, and the system includes means for
    applying an electric current and/or potential to the discharge control
    means, the application of the discharge controlling current and/or
    potential being controlled by the radiant sensitive means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    335,    and indented subclass and the subclasses specified in the notes to
    the definition of these subclasses, for discharge device loads having an
    auxiliary starting electrode.

    339,    and subclass 341 and indented subclasses, and the subclasses
    specified in the notes to those subclasses for discharge device loads
    provided with a plurality of discharge control means.

    344,    and indented subclasses, and the subclasses specified in the notes
    to those subclasses, for discharge device loads when the discharge control
    means is an electromagnet.

    349,    and the subclasses specified in the notes to those subclasses, for
    other discharge device loads provided with discharge control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 206+, for miscellaneous electric
    circuits which are controlled by a photocell.


CLS 315/158
TXT Systems under subclass 149 provided with means to regulate the current or
    voltage supplied to the load device, the regulating means being controlled
    by the radiant energy sensitive devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151,    for this subject matter where the system includes means to subject
    the radiant energy sensitive device to the radiant energy generated by the
    load device the radiant energy device controlling the regulating means.

    291,    and indented subclasses for other systems provided with means to
    regulate the current and/or voltage supplied to the load device.


CLS 315/159
TXT Systems under subclass 149 provided with an electrically operated circuit
    controlling switch whose operation is controlled by the radiant energy
    sensitive means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    313,    and indented subclasses, and subclass 362, and the subclasses
    specified in the notes to the definition of those subclasses for other
    systems which include a switch in the supply circuit of the load device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 173+ for
    photocell controlled relay circuits.


CLS 315/160
TXT Systems under the class definition provided with two or more sources of
    current supply.

    (1)     Note.  The sources of current supply may be of the same or diverse
    types and each of the sources may supply current to the same load device
    either simultaneously or alternately or each of the sources may supply
    current to a separate load device.

    (2)     Note.  To be diverse type current supplies, the current supplies
    must differ in some electrical characteristics.  Alternating currents of
    different frequencies, a source of current of constant potential and a
    source of current of varying potential, a rectified alternating current and
    a source of direct current, are examples of diverse type current supplies.
    Where the circuit for supplying the load device with current includes a
    current modifying means which may be used at selected intervals to modify
    the current flowing in the supply circuit so that the load device is
    sometimes supplied with one type of current from the source of supply and
    is at other times supplied from the same source of supply with the modified
    current, the system is not included in this subclass or the indented
    subclasses, but will be found in the appropriate subclasses below.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass does not include systems wherein one source of
    energy is a storage battery or similar device designed to be charged at
    least at times from either the other source of supply or from an
    independent source of current supply.  Such systems are considered to
    include a load device other than a discharge device or lamp and therefore
    not within the definition of this class and will be found for the most part
    in Class 307, Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems,
    subclasses 46, 48+, 66+, and 155+, and Class 320, Electricity:  Battery or
    Capacitor Charging or Discharging, having battery charging and/or
    discharging, per se, many patents disclosing, but not claiming, an
    additional lamp or discharge device load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86,     for systems including means to supply a load device with current
    from one source and automatically operated means to substitute a second
    source of current supply when the first source fails to operate properly,
    including substitution of a second diverse source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, see (3) Note
    above.


CLS 315/161
TXT Systems under subclass 160 having a plurality of load devices in the system.

    (1)     Note.  Where a single lamp or a single discharge device is the
    ultimate load device, and the system includes an additional lamp and/or
    discharge device in the circuit which is connected in the circuit so as to
    control and/or modify the current and/or potential supplied to such single
    ultimate load device, the patent is classified as a plural load device
    system, if (a) the controlling and/or modifying device is a lamp, or (b)
    the controlling and/or modifying device is limited in the claims to being
    as a gas or vapor discharge device.  Conversely, such a system is not
    classified as a plural load device system where the controlling and/or
    modifying device is claimed broadly as a discharge device, even though it
    is disclosed as a gas or vapor discharge device.

            The controlling and/or modifying device may be connected in the
    control circuit of the discharge device where the ultimate load device is a
    discharge control discharge device, and the same basis of classification is
    used as is set forth above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312,    and indented subclasses, and the subclasses specified in the notes
    to the definition of that subclass for other plural load device systems
    under the class definition.


CLS 315/162
TXT Systems under subclass 161 wherein at least one of the load devices is of a
    different type from that of another of the load devices.

    (1)     Note.  To be considered diverse type load devices, the load devices
    must differ in some electrical characteristics.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87,     for systems under the class definition wherein the system includes
    a plurality of diverse type load devices and a plurality of sources of
    current supply of diverse types, the system including means to supply
    current to one of the load devices from one of the sources of current
    supply and automatically operated means to substitute another diverse type
    load device and diverse type current supply for the first operated load
    device and current supply when they fail to operate properly.

    178,    and indented subclasses, and see the notes to the definitions
    thereof for other systems having plural load devices of diverse types.


CLS 315/163
TXT Systems under subclass 162 wherein at least two of the sources of current
    supply are of diverse types and at least one of the load devices is
    supplied with current from each of the two diverse current supplies
    simultaneously.

    (1)     Note.  The types of current supplies which are considered to be
    diverse types are defined in the notes to the definition of subclass 160.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166,    for systems having plural load devices of the same type and a
    plurality of diverse type current sources which simultaneously supply
    current to at least one load device.

    176,    for single load device systems which include a plurality of diverse
    type current sources which simultaneously supply current thereto.


CLS 315/164
TXT Systems under subclass 161 wherein at least two sources of current supply
    are connected in electrical series relation with respect to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170,    for single load device systems provided with a plurality of series
    connected current supply sources.


CLS 315/165
TXT Systems under subclass 161 wherein at least two sources of current supply
    are of diverse types.

    (1)     Note.  The types of current supplies which are considered to be
    diverse types are defined in the notes to the definition of subclass 160 of
    this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162,    for this subject matter where there are a plurality of diverse type
    load devices in the system.

    175,    and indented subclasses, and the subclasses specified in the notes
    to the definitions thereof, for other systems wherein at least two of the
    sources of current supply are of diverse types.


CLS 315/166
TXT Systems under subclass 165 wherein at least one of the load devices is
    supplied with current from each of two diverse current supplies
    simultaneously.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163,    for this subject matter where there are plural load devices of
    diverse types.

    164     and 170, where the sources of current supply are connected in
    electrical series relation with respect to each other.

    176,    for this subject matter where there is a single load device.


CLS 315/167
TXT Systems under subclass 160 wherein the load device is a discharge device
    which has two or more cathodes and/or two or more anodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334,    and indented subclasses, and the subclasses specified in the notes
    thereto for other plural cathode and/or anode load device systems.


CLS 315/168
TXT Systems under subclass 167 wherein the discharge device is provided with at
    least one principal anode and at least one principal cathode and an
    auxiliary discharge electrode, the discharge device being connected in the
    system with one source of supply connected between a principal cathode and
    a principal anode and another source of supply of a diverse type connected
    between the auxiliary discharge electrode and one of the principal
    electrodes.

    (1)     Note.  The type of current supplies which are considered to be
    diverse types are defined in note (2) to the definition of subclass 160.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169.1+, for other systems wherein different electrodes of a plural cathode
    and/or anode load device are supplied with diverse types of current.

    335,    and indented subclass, and the subclasses specified in the notes to
    the definition of these subclasses, for other discharge device systems
    wherein the discharge device is provided with an auxiliary starting
    electrode.


CLS 315/169.1
TXT Diverse-type energizing or bias supplies to different electrodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 in which the discharge device is
    connected so that the discharge path between one anode and cathode is
    supplied with energizing or bias current from one source of supply and a
    different discharge path between another anode and cathode path is supplied
    with current from another source of supply of a diverse type.

    (1)     Note.  Distinction should be made between subject matter claiming
    energizing or bias potentials which may turn on a display either entirely
    or in a nonimage mode, classifiable here, and subject matter claiming
    selective energizing, pulsing or other input responsive signaling which
    results in a display producing a light image or message which subject
    matter is classifiable in Class 345.

    (2)     Note.  The type of current (energizing or bias) supplies which are
    considered to be diverse are defined in Note (2) of the definition of
    subclass 160. Other examples of diverse current sources may be lines
    carrying different "phases" of a clock pulse source, or lines carrying
    different time based pulses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168,    for this subject matter where the discharge device is provided with
    an auxiliary discharge electrode, one source of current being connected to
    the principal cathode and the principal electrode and one of the principal
    electrodes.

    337,    for systems wherein the load device is a plural cathode and/or
    anode discharge device, the discharge device being supplied with current
    for the different anodes or cathodes from a single source of supply and
    means being provided so that different potentials are maintained at
    different anodes or cathodes.


CLS 315/169.2
TXT Including shifting of register, counter, or display:

    Subject matter under subclass 169.1 in which the effect of the energizing
    currents is to make the discharge path in the discharge device move from
    one position to a next position.

    (1)     Note.  Such discharge path movement or shifting may be a
    subcombination of pulse input into a register, and added count in a
    counter, or the input of display array control signals into a gas panel
    display.  Caveat:  Where "writing", "erasing", data responsive, or other
    selective structure or function is recited, such a claim to the combination
    of display panel and selective control is classified in Class 345.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, for magnetic registers
    for data storage, subclasses 185.01+ for floating gate memory storage
    (e.g., flash memory).

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems.


CLS 315/169.3
TXT Electroluminescent device:

    Subject matter under subclass 169.1 in which the discharge device includes
    electroluminescent material.


CLS 315/169.4
TXT Gas display panel devices:

    Subject matter under subclass 169.1 in which the discharge device is a gas
    or plasma panel.


CLS 315/170
TXT Systems under subclass 160, wherein at least two sources of current supply
    are connected in electrical series relation with respect to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164,    for this subject matter where there are a plurality of load devices
    in the system.


CLS 315/171
TXT Systems under subclass 160 provided with a discharge device or an electric
    current rectifier connected either in electrical series relation or
    electrical shunt relation to the load device and one of the sources of
    current supply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200,    and indented subclasses, for other systems provided with a
    rectifier or a discharge device in the supply circuit of the load device.


CLS 315/172
TXT Systems under subclass 160 having a periodic switch connected in at least
    one of the current supply circuits so as to periodically interrupt or vary
    the flow of current to the load device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209,    and indented subclasses for other systems provided with a periodic
    switch connected in the supply circuit of the load device.


CLS 315/173
TXT Systems under subclass 160 having a condenser connected either in
    electrical series relation or electrical shunt relation to the load device
    and one of the sources of current supply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227,    and indented subclasses, for other systems provided with a
    condenser in the supply circuit of the load device.


CLS 315/174
TXT Systems under subclass 160 wherein at least two of the sources of supply
    are pulsating and/or alternating current sources, the current sources being
    of a diverse type with respect to each other.

    (1)     Note.  The types of current supplies which are considered to be
    diverse types are defined in note (2) to the definition of subclass 160 of
    this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246,    and indented subclasses, for other systems wherein the load device
    is connected to a source of alternating current supply.


CLS 315/175
TXT Systems under subclass 160 wherein two of the sources of current supply are
    of diverse types.

    (1)     Note.  The type of current supplies which are considered to be
    diverse types are defined in note (2) to the definition of subclass 160, of
    this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86,     and indented subclass for systems wherein means are provided to
    operate the load device from one source of supply while a second source of
    the same or diverse type is maintained in nonoperating condition, and the
    system includes means which operate automatically in response to some
    condition affecting the operation of the system, such as a failure of the
    current supply source, to connect the nonoperating source of energy in
    operative relation in the system to supply current to the load device.


CLS 315/176
TXT Systems under subclass 175 wherein a load device is supplied with current
    from each of the two diverse current supplies simultaneously.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163,    for this subject matter where there are plural diverse type load
    devices.

    164,    where the current supply sources are connected in electrical series
    relation and there are plural load devices of the same type.

    166,    for this subject matter where there are plural load devices of the
    same type.

    168     and 169, for this subject matter where the load device is a plural
    cathode and/or anode discharge device.

    170,    where there is a single load device and the current supplies are
    connected in electrical series relation.

    174,    for this subject matter in which there are diverse pulsating and/or
    alternating current supplies.


CLS 315/177
TXT Systems under the class definition provided with a transformer connected
    between the source of supply and a load device for supplying electric
    current and/or potential to the load device, the system also including a
    load device connected in the primary circuit of the transformer.

    (1)     Note.  Where a single lamp or a single discharge device is the
    ultimate load device, and the system includes an additional lamp and/or
    discharge device in the circuit which is connected in the circuit so as to
    control and/or modify the current and/or potential supplied to such single
    ultimate load device, the patent is classified as a plural load device
    system if (a) the controlling and/or modifying device is a lamp, or (b) the
    controlling and/or modifying device is limited in the claims to being a gas
    or vapor discharge device.  Conversely, such a system is not classified as
    a plural load device system where the controlling and/or modifying device
    is claimed broadly as a discharge device even though it is disclosed as a
    gas or vapor discharge device.

            The controlling and/or modifying device may be connected in the
    control circuit of the discharge device where the ultimate load device is a
    discharge control discharge device, and the same basis of classification is
    used as is set forth above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200,    and indented subclasses and the subclasses referred to in the notes
    to the definitions thereof for other systems provided with a discharge
    device or rectifier in the supply circuit of a load device.

    254,    and the subclasses specified in the notes to the definition of
    these subclasses, for other plural load device systems having a transformer
    connected in the supply circuit.

    276,    and indented subclasses, and the subclasses specified in the notes
    to these subclasses for other single load device systems having a
    transformer connected in the supply circuit of the load device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    355-363, for miscellaneous transformer systems.


CLS 315/178
TXT Systems under the class definition having two or more load devices
    connected in the system, at least one of the load devices being of a
    different type from another of the load devices.

    (1)     Note.  To be considered diverse type load devices, the load devices
    must differ in some electrical characteristic.  Mere difference in color or
    shape is not enough to make the load devices of different characteristics
    within the meaning of the definition of this subclass. Discharge devices
    containing different gases, or having different starting or operating
    characteristics, or having a different number or types of electrodes are
    considered to be of diverse types. Load devices having different impedances
    are considered to be diverse types.

    (2)     Note.  Where a single lamp or a single discharge device is the
    ultimate load device, and the system includes an additional lamp and/or
    discharge device in the circuit which is connected in the circuit so as to
    control and/or modify the current and/or potential supplied to such single
    ultimate load device, the patent is classified as a plural load device
    system if (a) the controlling and/or modifying device is a lamp, or (b) the
    controlling and/or modifying device is limited in the claims to being a gas
    or vapor discharge device.  Conversely, such a system is not classified as
    a plural load device system where the controlling and/or modifying device
    is claimed broadly as a discharge device even though it is disclosed as a
    gas or vapor discharge device.

            The controlling and/or modifying device may be connected in the
    control circuit of the discharge device where the ultimate load device is a
    discharge control discharge device, and the same basis of classification is
    used as is set forth above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for an incandescent lamp filament and a discharge device which are
    structurally combined in one envelope with the filament connected in shunt
    relation with the discharge electrodes.

    67,     for multiple filament lamps having structurally combined therewith
    an electric circuit element such as a switch, the filaments being of
    different resistance.

    87,     and subclass 88 and indented subclasses, for systems provided with
    two or more load devices, of the same or different types, one of which is
    maintained in nonoperating condition until the first operated fails to
    operate properly, the system being provided with means to automatically
    substitute the nonoperated load device for the load device which fails to
    operate properly.

    162,    and indented subclass, where there is a plurality of load devices
    and a plurality of sources of current supply.

    177,    where one of the load devices is in the primary circuit of the
    current supply transformer, and the other is in the secondary circuit.

    200,    and indented subclasses, for systems provided with a discharge
    device or rectifier which is not a diverse load device in the supply
    circuit of the load device.

    349,    and indented subclasses and the subclasses referred to in the notes
    to the definition of those subclasses for systems provided with a discharge
    device which is not a diverse load device in the discharge control circuit
    of the discharge device load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 7, where one of the load devices is a consumable electrode
    discharge device.


CLS 315/179
TXT Systems under subclass 178 having two or more different type load devices
    connected in electrical series relation with respect to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for devices which include an electric filament lamp and a discharge
    device which are structurally combined into a single unitary device, the
    filament and the discharge device being connected in electrical series
    relation.

    177,    for systems provided with a load device in the secondary circuit of
    he the supply transformer and a load device in the primary circuit of the
    transformer.

    185,    and indented subclasses, for systems provided with a plurality of
    similar type load devices connected in electrical series relation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 8, where one of the series connected devices is a consumable
    electrode discharge device.


CLS 315/180
TXT Systems under subclass 179 wherein at least two of the series connected
    load devices are electric space discharge devices which are each of a
    different type from that of the other load device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for devices which include a plurality of discharge device units and
    an electrical circuit which are all structurally combined in a single
    unitary structure, the discharge device units being connected in electrical
    series relation.

    189,    and indented subclass, for systems which include a plurality of
    series connected electric discharge devices which are of a similar type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 8, where one of the series connected discharge devices is a
    consumable electrode discharge device.


CLS 315/181
TXT Systems under subclass 180 wherein at least one of the series connected
    discharge devices is of the type which conducts more current in one
    direction of current flow between the principal discharge electrodes than
    is conducted in the other direction of current flow between the principal
    discharge electrodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    190,    for systems provided with a plurality of series connected
    asymmetrical discharge devices which are of similar types.


CLS 315/182
TXT Systems under subclass 178 wherein at least one of the load devices in the
    system is a discharge device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclass 92 for circuits for
    plural X-ray sources.


CLS 315/183
TXT Systems under subclass 182 wherein there are at least two discharge device
    loads which are of different types.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180,    and indented subclass, where the diverse type discharge devices are
    connected in electric series relation.

    324,    and indented subclass, and the subclasses referred to in the notes
    to the definitions thereof for other plural discharge device loads.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 7 and indented subclass, where one of the discharge devices is a
    consumable electrode discharge device.


CLS 315/184
TXT Systems under the class definition wherein each side of the supply circuit
    consists of at least a pair of conductors, the conductors on one side of
    the supply circuit being adapted to be connected to one pole of the source
    of supply, the conductors on the other side of the supply circuit being
    adapted to be connected to the opposite pole of the source of supply, at
    least three load devices being connected between these two pairs of
    conductors, at least one conductor of each pair of conductors on each side
    of the supply circuit having at least two load devices connected thereto,
    each of these two load devices being connected to different conductors of
    the pair of conductors on the other side of the supply circuit, so that by
    connecting one conductor on each side of the supply circuit to the source
    of supply, a selected one of the load devices may be supplied with current,
    for example:



CLS 315/185
TXT Systems under the class definition having two or more load devices
    connected in electrical series relation with respect to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for devices having a plurality of discharge device units and an
    electrical circuit element structurally combined in a single unitary
    device, the discharge devices being connected in electrical series relation.

    49,     for devices having a filament lamp and a discharge device
    structurally combined in a single unitary structure, the lamp and discharge
    device being connected in electrical series relation.

    66,     for multiple filament lamps structurally combined with a circuit
    element, such as a switch, the filaments being adapted to be connected in
    electrical series relation.

    96,     and subclass 99 and indented subclass, for series connected
    cathodes or heaters.

    122,    where an automatic shunt or cut-out means is provided to open the
    circuit of, or to close a shunt about, the circuit of at least one of the
    series connected load devices when the load device fails to operate
    properly.

    177,    for systems provided with a load device in the secondary of a
    supply transformer, and another load device in the primary circuit of the
    supply transformer.

    179,    for the subject matter of this subclass where the series connected
    load devices are of diverse types.

    256,    for systems under the definition of subclass 363, wherein a
    transformer is connected in the supply circuit of two or more nonseries
    connected load devices, the primaries of the transformers being connected
    in electrical series relation with respect to each other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 8, for systems provided with a plurality of series connected
    consumable discharge devices.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 65+ for systems
    wherein a single current conversion is attained by plural convertors which
    may be electronic tubes connected in series.


CLS 315/186
TXT Systems under subclass 185 having a periodic switch connected in the
    current supply circuit so as to periodically interrupt or vary the flow of
    current to at least one of the load devices.

    (1)     Note.  The periodic switch may be connected in shunt to a load
    device so as to periodically interrupt or vary the flow of current to the
    load device by completing a shunt circuit about the load device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    and indented subclasses, for systems having automatic means to
    close a shunt circuit about a load device.

    210,    and indented subclasses, and the subclasses referred to in the
    notes to the definitions thereof for other plural load device systems with
    a periodic switch in the circuit.


CLS 315/187
TXT Systems under subclass 185 provided with a condenser connected either in
    electrical series relation or electrical shunt relation to at least one of
    the series connected load devices and the source of supply for the load
    device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228,    and indented subclasses and the notes to the definitions thereof
    for other plural load device systems with a condenser in the supply circuit.


CLS 315/188
TXT Systems under subclass 187 wherein the condenser is connected in electrical
    shunt relation with respect to at least one of the load devices and the
    source of supply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232,    for other plural load device systems having a condenser connected
    in shunt to a load device.

    241,    and indented subclasses, for single load device systems having a
    condenser connected in shunt to the load device.


CLS 315/189
TXT Systems under subclass 185 wherein the series connected load devices are
    discharge devices.

    (1)     Note.  Where a single lamp or a single discharge device is the
    ultimate load device, and the system includes an additional lamp and/or
    discharge device in the circuit which is connected in the circuit so as to
    control and/or modify the current and/or potential supplied to such single
    ultimate load device, the patent is classified as a plural load device
    system, if (a) the controlling and/or modifying device is a lamp, or (b)
    the controlling and/or modifying device is limited in the claims to being a
    gas or vapor discharge device.  Conversely, such a system is not classified
    as a plural load device system where the controlling and/or modifying
    device is claimed broadly as a discharge device even though it is disclosed
    as a gas or vapor discharge device.

            The controlling and/or modifying device may be connected in the
    control circuit of the discharge device where the ultimate load device is a
    discharge control discharge device, and the same basis of classification is
    used as is set forth above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for devices which include a plurality of discharge device units and
    an electrical circuit element structurally combined in a single unitary
    structure, the discharge devices being connected in electrical series
    relation.

    180,    and indented subclass, for systems under the class definition which
    include a plurality of series connected diverse type discharge device loads.

    187,    and indented subclass, for systems under subclass 185 provided with
    a plurality of discharge device loads and having a condenser connected in
    shunt to at least one of the load devices.

    324,    and indented subclass, and the subclasses referred to in the notes
    to those subclasses, for other plural discharge device load systems under
    the class definition.


CLS 315/190
TXT Systems under subclass 189 wherein the series connected load devices are of
    the type which conduct more current in one direction of current flow
    between the principal discharge electrodes than is conducted in the other
    direction of current flow between the principal discharge electrodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181,    for this subject matter where the series connected asymmetrical
    discharge devices are of diverse types.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 65+ for systems
    wherein a single current conversion is attained by plural convertors which
    may be unidirectionally conductive electronic tubes connected in series.


CLS 315/191
TXT Systems under subclass 185 wherein the system includes means for changing
    the connection of at least two of the load devices from electrical series
    relation to electrical parallel relation with respect to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66,     for multiple filament lamps structurally combined with electric
    circuit means, such as an electric switch and having the filaments
    connected to the circuit means so that the filaments may be energized
    either in electrical series or parallel relation.

    192,    for systems under subclass 185 having combined with the series
    connected load devices, a load device connected in parallel with respect to
    at least one of the series connected load devices.


CLS 315/192
TXT Systems under subclass 185 having a load device connected in electrical
    parallel relation with at least one of the series connected load devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191,    for systems under subclass 185 having means to change the series
    connection of at least one of the load devices to a parallel connection.


CLS 315/193
TXT Systems under subclass 185 having an electrical circuit maker and breaker
    connected in the system for controlling the supply of current to at least
    one of the series connected load devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     and indented subclasses, for multiple filament lamps structurally
    combined with an electric switch.

    186,    for series connected load device systems having a periodic switch.

    313,    and indented subclasses and the subclasses referred to in the notes
    to those subclasses, for other plural load device systems provided with an
    electric switch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses,
    for electric switches, per se.


CLS 315/194
TXT Systems under the class definition having a load device which is a
    discharge device provided with a discharge control means, such as a grid
    electrode, an electromagnet for influencing the space discharge, or an
    auxiliary starting electrode, the discharge device being either (1)
    supplied with a pulsating and/or alternating current and/or (2) the
    cathode-anode circuit of the discharge device being so connected in the
    system that a pulsating and/or alternating current flows therein; the
    system including means to apply current and/or potential to the control
    means, the circuit controlling the application of the control potential
    including phase shifting means, so that the control current and/or
    potential may be applied to the control means in time phase relation to the
    pulsating and/or alternating current in the supply circuit and/or in the
    cathode-anode of the load device.

    (1)     Note.  Neither the current and/or potential applied to the
    discharge device nor the control means need be a pulsating and/or
    alternating current and/or potential.  For example, the load device may be
    supplied with discharge current from a source of unidirectional current
    with the system so arranged that a circuit connecting the cathode-anode of
    the discharge device has a pulsating current flowing therein, the control
    means being supplied with unidirectional current, the system being provided
    with circuit elements including phase shifting means responsive to the
    pulsating current in the cathode-anode circuit to control the time of
    application of the unidirectional current and or potential to the control
    means.

    (2)     Note.  When the current supply for the discharge device is an
    alternating or pulsating current, and the discharge device is provided with
    an auxiliary starting electrode which is supplied with pulsating or
    alternating current which is out of phase with the alternating current in
    the discharge supply circuit, the patent is classified as a polyphase
    supply system in subclass 137 and indented subclasses, note especially
    subclasses 145 and 147.  Where the system includes means to supply the
    auxiliary starting electrode with pulsating current from the supply
    circuit, and the auxiliary electrode circuit includes phase shifting means
    to shift the phase of the alternating current in the auxiliary electrode
    circuit with respect to the current in the supply circuit, the patent is
    classified in subclass 140 as a phase multiplying system.  Where the claims
    only recite a control device for the discharge device, even though an
    auxiliary starting electrode is disclosed, the patent is classified in this
    subclass (194) or the indented subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  Where the discharge device is supplied with discharge
    current from a source of pulsating and/or alternating current and the
    control means is supplied with a pulsating and/or alternating current
    and/or potential, the current and/or potential in the control circuit need
    not have its phase shifted with respect to the supply current, but the
    phase shifting means may only determine the time of application of the
    control current and/or potential to the control means with respect to the
    current wave of the supply current.

    (4)     Note.  Systems wherein the current and/or potential supplied to the
    control means is merely varied in magnitude, the magnitude of the control
    current and/or potential with respect to the supply current for the load
    device determining the time at which the control means becomes effective to
    alter the operation of the discharge device are not included.  For such
    systems, see the subclasses under "SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS" below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137,    see note (2) above.

    140,    see note (2) above.

    145,    see note (2) above.

    147,    see note (2) above.

    335,    and indented subclass, and the subclasses specified in the notes to
    the definitions of these subclasses, where the discharge control means for
    the discharge device load device is an auxiliary starting electrode, the
    system including means to vary the magnitude of the current and/or
    potential supplied to the auxiliary starting electrode,

    341,    and indented subclasses, and the subclasses specified in the notes
    to the definition of those subclasses, where the discharge device load
    device is provided with a plurality of discharge control means, the system
    including means to vary the magnitude of the control current and/or
    potential supplied to at least one of the control means.

    344,    and indented subclasses, and the subclasses specified in the notes
    to the definition of those subclasses where the discharge device load
    device is provided with an electromagnet for influencing the discharge, and
    the system includes means to vary the magnitude of the current supplied to
    the electromagnet.

    349,    and indented subclasses and the subclasses specified in the notes
    to the definition of those subclasses for miscellaneous systems under the
    class definition wherein the load device is a discharge control discharge
    device and the system includes means to vary the magnitude of the current
    and/or potential supplied to the load device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 237,
    300, and 320, for systems for controlling the magnitude of the current or
    voltage in a single circuit by means of a discharge device having a
    discharge control device (e.g., grid), the discharge device circuit
    including means for shifting the phase of the potential in the discharge
    control device circuit with respect to the potential in the output circuit.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclass 118 and the subclasses
    mentioned in the notes thereto, for electronic tube current conversion
    systems wherein the control of the electronic tube includes phase control
    of potential applied to the discharge control means.  The systems in Class
    363 are very closely analogous to the systems in this and the indented
    subclasses.  For the line between Class 363 and this class (315), see
    section VI, 7 of the class definition of Class 363.


CLS 315/195
TXT Systems under subclass 194, wherein the system includes two or more
    discharge control discharge device loads.

    (1)     Note.  Where a single lamp or a single discharge device is the
    ultimate load device, and the system includes an additional lamp and/or
    discharge device in the circuit which is connected in the circuit so as to
    control and/or modify the current and/or potential supplied to such single
    ultimate load device, the patent is classified as a plural load device
    system, if (a) the controlling and/or modifying device is a lamp, or (b)
    the controlling and/or modifying device is limited in the claims to being a
    gas or vapor discharge device.  Conversely, such a system is not classified
    as a plural load device system where the controlling and/or modifying
    device is claimed broadly as a discharge device even though it is disclosed
    as a gas or vapor discharge device.

            The controlling and/or modifying device may be connected in the
    control circuit of the discharge device where the ultimate load device is a
    discharge control discharge device, and the same basis of classification is
    used as is set forth above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    325,    and the subclasses referred to in the notes to the definition of
    that subclass for other systems having plural discharge control discharge
    device loads.


CLS 315/196
TXT Systems under subclass 195 wherein the discharge control discharge device
    loads are of the type which conduct more current in one direction of
    current flow between the cathode and anode electrodes than is conducted in
    the other direction of current flow therebetween, at least two of the
    discharge devices each having its anode connected to the cathode of the
    other load device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251,    for other systems provided with a plurality of inversely parallel
    connected discharge control discharge device loads.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 227
    and 291 for electronic tube regulators. See section VI, B of the class
    definition of Class 323.


CLS 315/197
TXT Systems under subclass 196 having a discharge device provided with
    discharge control means connected in the control circuit of the discharge
    control discharge device loads.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198     and 199, for other plural load device systems, wherein there is a
    discharge control discharge device in the control circuit of the discharge
    device load.

    204,    272, and 352, for other systems under the class definition provided
    with a discharge control discharge device in the control circuit; subclass
    204 where the discharge control means of the load device is an auxiliary
    starting electrode, subclass 272 and indented subclass where the discharge
    device load is supplied with alternating current, and subclass 352 and
    indented subclass for miscellaneous systems of this type.


CLS 315/198
TXT Systems under subclass 195 having a discharge device provided with
    discharge control means connected in the control circuit of the discharge
    control discharge device load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    197,    and see the notes to the definition thereof.


CLS 315/199
TXT Systems under subclass 194 having an electric space discharge device
    provided with discharge control means connected in the control circuit of
    the discharge control discharge device load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    197,    and see the notes to the definition thereof.


CLS 315/200
TXT Systems under the class definition provided with a discharge device or an
    electric current rectifier connected either in electrical series relation
    or electric shunt relation to the load device and the source of current
    supply for the load device.

    (1)     Note.  Patents claiming systems under the class definition which
    only have two or more lamps or electric space discharge devices limited in
    the claims to the gas or vapor type which are included as load devices in
    this class are not classified in this subclass or the indented subclasses,
    even though one of the devices is disclosed and claimed only as a means for
    controlling and/or modifying the current flow to one of the devices which
    is the ultimate load device.  Such patents are classified in the other
    appropriate subclasses in this class as a plural load device system.  This
    subclass and the indented subclasses include only systems under the class
    definition wherein the system includes a rectifier and or a discharge
    device of the type which is not included as a load device in this class.

    (2)     Note.  Where the only discharge device and/or rectifier is in the
    discharge control circuit of a discharge control discharge device load, the
    patent is not classified in this or the indented subclasses, unless the
    discharge control means is an auxiliary starting electrode, for which see
    subclass 203 and indented subclass.  For systems under the class definition
    having a discharge device, a rectifier in the discharge control circuit of
    a discharge control discharge device load, see subclass 352 and indented
    subclass and the subclasses specified in the notes to the definition of
    those subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for a plurality of series connected discharge devices combined with
    an electric circuit element, all of which are structurally combined to form
    a unitary device.

    46,     for a discharge device and a filament which are structurally
    combined to form a unitary device, the filament being connected in
    electrical shunt to the discharge electrodes.

    49,     for a discharge device and a filament which are structurally
    combined to form a unitary device, the filament being in electrical series
    with the discharge device.

    101,    for systems wherein the load device is a discharge device provided
    with a thermionic cathode heated by the passage of electric current, or an
    indirectly heated cathode, the cathode or the cathode heater circuit having
    a discharge device and/or an electric current rectifier connected either in
    electrical series relation or electrical shunt relation with respect to the
    cathode or cathode heater and the source of supply.

    171,    for systems where there are a plurality of sources of current
    supply, one of the supply circuits having a discharge device or rectifier
    therein.

    179,    for systems having a plurality of diverse type load devices which
    are connected in electrical series relation, one of the load devices being
    a discharge device.

    189,    for systems where there are a plurality of series connected
    discharge device loads.

    324,    and indented subclass and the subclasses referred to in the notes
    to the definition of that subclass for systems under the class definition
    which include a plurality of discharge device loads.

    352,    see note (2) above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 64, for consumable electrode discharge device systems which
    include a space discharge device for controlling the operation of the
    electrode feeding mechanism.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 227
    and 291, for miscellaneous systems having one or more discharge devices for
    controlling the magnitude of the current and/or voltage in a single circuit.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous circuits utilizing a
    discharge device to control the flow of current or potential to a load
    device.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 74+ for rectifying or
    derectifying systems with automatic voltage and/or current magnitude
    control; subclasses 83, 94, and 99 for rectifying or derectifying systems
    with line circuit control by means of an electronic tube; and subclasses
    111+ for rectifying or derectifying systems wherein the convertor is an
    electronic tube.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclass 104 for X-ray tube
    power supplies with specific rectifier.


CLS 315/201
TXT Systems under subclass 200 having two or more load devices in the system.

    (1)     Note.  See note (1) to the definition of subclass 200 of this class.


CLS 315/202
TXT Systems under subclass 200 wherein the load device in the system is an
    electric space discharge device which has two or more cathodes and/or two
    or more anodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334,    and indented subclasses and the subclasses referred to in the notes
    to the definition of these subclasses, for other systems under the class
    definition provided with a plural cathode and/or anode discharge device
    load.


CLS 315/203
TXT Systems under subclass 202 wherein the discharge device is provided with at
    least one principal anode and at least one principal cathode and an
    auxiliary discharge electrode, the discharge device and/or the rectifier
    being included in the circuit which supplies current or potential to the
    auxiliary electrode.

    (1)     Note.  Where the system includes a plurality of discharge devices,
    one of which is connected in the control circuit of the discharge device
    which is the load in the circuit, the patent is classified as a plural load
    device system in the subclasses above where the discharge device in the
    control circuit is claimed as a discharge device whose operation depends
    upon gas or vapor ionization even though the system is claimed as only
    having one ultimate load device.  Where the controlling discharge device is
    claimed merely as a discharge device even though it is disclosed as a
    gaseous ionization discharge device, the system is not considered to be a
    plural load device system for the purpose of classification.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    335,    and indented subclass, and the subclasses referred to in the notes
    to the definition of these subclasses, for other systems provided with a
    discharge device load having an auxiliary discharge electrode.

    352,    and indented subclass, for other systems under the class definition
    provided with a discharge control discharge load and having an electric
    discharge device in the control circuit, where the discharge control device
    is other than an auxiliary starting electrode.


CLS 315/204
TXT Systems under subclass 203 wherein the discharge device which is connected
    in the auxiliary electrode circuit is provided with discharge control means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    197,    198, and 199, for systems under the class definition wherein the
    load device is provided with discharge control means, which may be an
    auxiliary starting electrode, and the control circuit includes a discharge
    control discharge device and means to shift the phase of the pulsating
    and/or alternating current or potential in the control circuit with respect
    to the pulsating and/or alternating current in the cathode-anode circuit.

    208,    for other systems under subclass 200 provided with a discharge
    control discharge device in the supply circuit of the load device.


CLS 315/205
TXT Systems under subclass 200 provided with either (1) two or more discharge
    devices or rectifiers, or (2) a rectifier and a discharge device in the
    supply circuit of the load device.

    (1)     Note.  Where the system includes a plurality of discharge devices,
    the output of one controlling only the electric discharge control means,
    such as the grid, of another discharge device (cascade connected) and the
    load device is connected in the circuit with the cathode-anode circuit of
    only one of the space discharge devices, the patent is excluded from this
    subclass and will be found in one of the other subclasses under subclass
    200.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 227
    and 291, for miscellaneous systems having a plurality of discharge devices
    for controlling the magnitude of the current and/or voltage in a single
    circuit.


CLS 315/206
TXT Systems under subclass 200 provided with a transformer connected between
    the source of supply and the load device for supplying electric current or
    potential to the load device and having this discharge device and/or the
    rectifier connected in the primary circuit of the transformer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    276,    and indented subclasses and the subclasses specified in the notes
    to those subclasses, for other systems under the class definition provided
    with a transformer in the supply circuit of the load device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 227
    and 291, for miscellaneous systems having one or more discharge devices in
    the primary circuit of a transformer for controlling the magnitude of the
    current and/or voltage in a single circuit.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 83, 94, and 99 for
    rectifying or derectifying systems with line circuit control by means of an
    electronic tube.


CLS 315/207
TXT Systems under subclass 200 having the discharge device or rectifier
    connected in electrical shunt relation to the source of supply and the load
    device.


CLS 315/208
TXT Systems under subclass 200 having a discharge device which is provided with
    discharge control means such as a grid electrode, connected in the supply
    circuit of the load device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204,    for this subject matter where the discharge control discharge
    device is in the auxiliary electrode circuit.

    352,    and indented subclass and the subclasses specified in the notes to
    the definition of those subclasses for systems under the class definition
    where the load device is a discharge control discharge device, and the
    control circuit includes a discharge device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 227
    and 291 and the subclasses specified in the notes to the definition of
    those subclasses, for miscellaneous systems having a discharge device which
    is provided with a discharge control device for controlling the magnitude
    of the current and/or voltage in a single circuit.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 111+ and the
    subclasses mentioned in the notes thereto, for current conversion systems
    wherein either the convertor or a control device comprises an electronic
    tube having discharge control means (e.g., grid).


CLS 315/209
TXT Systems under the class definition having a periodic switch connected in
    the current supply circuit for the load device so as to periodically
    interrupt or vary the flow of current to the load device.

    (1)     Note.  The periodic switch may be connected in shunt to the load
    device so as to periodically interrupt or vary the flow of current to the
    load device by completing a shunt circuit about the load device.

    (2)     Note.  Some of the systems in this and the indented subclasses are
    ignition systems for supplying electrical energy to spark gaps of the spark
    plug type. For the line between this class and Class 123,
    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 146.5, Sparkers, see the notes to the
    class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for electric lamps having a periodic switch structurally combined
    therewith so as to form a unitary device.

    172,    where there are two sources of current supply for the load device,
    one of the supply circuits including a periodic switch.

    186,    where there are a plurality of load devices connected in series
    relation and the system includes a periodic switch.

    246,    and indented subclasses, for systems having no periodic switch
    wherein alternating or pulsating current is supplied to the load device.
    Note especially subclass 287 for systems where the source of supply may be
    direct current and a voltage regulator which periodically increases and
    decreases the current supplied to the load device is included in the supply
    system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, see Note (2) above.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 19+ for
    periodic electric switches.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 96+
    for circuit interrupting regulators.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclasses 69+, for
    periodic interruption of generator field circuit and subclass 94 for
    interruption of generator armature circuit.

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 87+ for periodic electromagnetically operated
    switches.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclass 51 for periodically operated electrothermally actuated switches
    and subclasses 302+ for periodically operated thermal switches.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    circuit interruption systems utilized for safety purposes.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 106+ and subclass 177
    for conversion systems wherein the convertor comprises a periodic switch.


CLS 315/210
TXT Systems under subclass 209 having two or more load devices in the system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312,    and indented subclasses, and the subclasses specified in the notes
    to these subclasses, for other plural load device systems under the class
    definition.


CLS 315/211
TXT Systems under subclass 210 wherein (1) two or more periodic switches are
    provided in the circuit, or (2) the periodic switch is a multiple circuit
    multiplecontact switch, the supply circuit of each of two or more of the
    load devices including one of the periodic switches or one of the contacts
    of the multiple contact switch, such switch means being arranged to open
    and close the circuits in sequence so that current is supplied to the load
    devices in time sequence.

    (1)     Note.  Some of the patents in this and the indented subclasses are
    ignition systems for supplying electrical energy to a plurality of spark
    gaps (plugs) in timed sequence.  For the line between this class and Class
    123, Internal Combustion Engines, subclass 146.5, Sparkers, see the notes
    to the main definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226,    for single load device systems under subclass 209 provided with a
    plurality of periodic switches or a multiple contact periodic switch in the
    supply circuit of the load device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, see note (1) above.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 23 and indented
    subclasses for multiple contact periodic switches.


CLS 315/212
TXT Systems under subclass 211 provided with a transformer connected between
    the source of supply and at least one of the load devices for supplying
    electric current and/or potential to the load device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219,    and indented subclasses, for single load device systems under
    subclass 209 provided with a transformer in the supply circuit of the load
    device and having a periodic switch in the primary circuit of the
    transformer.

    254,    and indented subclasses, for other plural load device systems
    provided with a transformer in the supply circuit of at least one load
    device.

    276,    and indented subclasses and the subclasses specified in the notes
    to the definition of those subclasses for other systems provided with a
    transformer in the supply circuit of the load device.


CLS 315/213
TXT Systems under subclass 212 wherein the system includes a plurality of
    transformers, the secondaries of each of the transformers being connected
    to one or more of the load devices, the primaries of the transformers being
    connected to the periodic distributing switch means so that the primary
    circuits of the transformers are energized in timed sequence with respect
    to each other, thereby energizing the load devices in timed sequence with
    respect to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220,    for single load device systems under subclass 209 provided with a
    plurality of transformers in the supply circuit of a load device, a
    periodic switch being included in the primary circuit of at least one
    transformer.

    255,    and indented subclass, for other plural load device plural
    transformer systems, each transformer secondary including a load device.


CLS 315/214
TXT Systems under subclass 212 having a periodic switch (in addition to the
    distributor switch means) in the primary circuit of the transformer so as
    to periodically interrupt the primary circuit, the distributor type
    periodic switch means being in the secondary circuit of the transformer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213,    for plural load device systems under subclass 212, where a
    distribution type periodic switch is included in the primary circuits of
    the transformer.

    215,    for additional periodic switches in circuits having no transformer.

    222,    for single load device systems under subclass 209 wherein there is
    a transformer in the supply circuit of the load device, and the primary and
    secondary circuits are periodically interrupted by periodic switch means.


CLS 315/215
TXT Systems under subclass 211 having a periodic switch (in addition to the
    distributor switch means) connected in series relation with the
    distributing type periodic switch means so that the supply circuit for at
    least one load device is periodically interrupted by both.



    (1)     Note.  The second periodic switch need not operate in timed
    relation to the operation of the distributor type periodic switch means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    214,    where the distributing switch means is connected to the secondary
    of a transformer the primary circuit of the transformer including a
    periodic switch.


CLS 315/216
TXT Systems under subclass 211 in which the distributor type periodic switch
    means comprises two or more switches each of which periodically interrupts
    the supply to one or more of the load devices, the switches having
    electrical operating means (such as an electromagnet or electrically heated
    thermostat) and means causing the electrical operating means to operate the
    switches in time sequence with respect to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    214     and 215, for such systems having an additional periodic switch to
    control energy delivered either to or from the distributor switch means.

    226,    for single load device systems under subclass 209 having a
    plurality of periodic switches or a multiple contact periodic switch in the
    supply circuit of the load device.


CLS 315/217
TXT Systems under subclass 210 wherein the periodic switch is connected in the
    circuit so that it may be selectively connected in the supply circuit of
    either of two or more of the load devices.


CLS 315/218
TXT Systems under subclass 209 wherein a magneto-electric generator is utilized
    as the source of supply for the load device.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes only systems under subclass 209
    wherein the source of supply is limited by claimed subject matter to being
    a magneto- electric generator.


CLS 315/219
TXT Systems under subclass 209 provided with a transformer connected between
    the source of supply and the load device for supplying electric current or
    potential to the load device and having the periodic switch connected in
    the primary circuit of the transformer so as to periodically interrupt the
    primary circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212,    and indented subclasses, for periodic switch controlled systems
    having plural loads and a transformer in the supply circuit.

    276,    and indented subclasses and the subclasses specified in the notes
    to the definition of those subclasses for other systems under the class
    definition which have a transformer connected in the supply circuit of the
    load device.


CLS 315/220
TXT Systems under subclass 219 having two or more transformers connected in the
    supply circuit of the load device.

    (1)     Note.  The transformers may be connected in the supply circuit so
    that the primary circuit of one transformer is connected to the secondary
    circuit of another transformer, or may have their primaries and/or
    secondaries connected in electrical series or shunt relation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277,    for other systems provided with a plurality of transformers
    connected in the supply circuit of a load device.


CLS 315/221
TXT Systems under subclass 219 having the primary circuit of the transformer
    connected to the secondary circuit by current conductive means.

    (1)     Note.  The current conductive means may be an inductance, a
    condenser, or a conductor.


CLS 315/222
TXT Systems under subclass 219 wherein the circuits which are connected to two
    or more of the transformer coils are periodically interrupted.

    (1)     Note.  The circuits which are periodically interrupted may be the
    primary and secondary circuits, or may be two or more different primary or
    secondary circuits.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213,    for plural load device systems provided with a transformer in the
    supply circuit of each of the load devices, the primary circuits of the
    plural transformers being connected to a distributor type periodic
    switching means so that the primary circuits are closed in timed sequence
    with respect to each other.

    214,    for this subject matter where there are a plurality of load devices
    in the system and a transformer in the supply circuit, a periodic switch
    being connected in the primary circuit and a distributor type periodic
    switch means being connected in the secondary circuit.

    226,    for systems under subclass 209 which are provided with a plurality
    of periodic switches or a multiple contact periodic switch in the supply
    circuit of the load device.


CLS 315/223
TXT Systems under subclass 219 having a condenser or an inductance connected in
    the primary circuit of the transformer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227,    and indented subclasses and the subclasses specified in the notes
    to the definition of those subclasses, for other systems provided with a
    condenser in the supply circuit of the load device.

    289     and indented subclass and the subclasses specified in the notes to
    those subclasses, for other systems under the class definition provided
    with an inductance connected in the supply circuit of the load device.


CLS 315/224
TXT Systems under subclass 209 having an impedance or a current or voltage
    regulator connected in the supply circuit of the load device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223,    for this subject matter where there is a transformer connected in
    the supply circuit of the load device, the primary circuit including a
    periodic switch and a condenser or inductance.

    291,    and indented subclasses, and the subclasses specified in the notes
    to the definition of those subclasses, for other systems under the class
    definition provided with a current or voltage regulator in the supply
    circuit of the load device.


CLS 315/225
TXT Systems under subclass 209 having means provided for rendering the periodic
    switch inoperative to interrupt the circuit when it is so desired.

    (1)     Note.  The means provided may be means to hold the contacts of the
    periodic switch in circuit closing position or to close a shunt circuit
    about the switch.


CLS 315/226
TXT Systems under subclass 209 wherein (1) the periodic switch is provided with
    two or more pairs of circuit interrupting contacts, or (2) two or more
    periodic switches are provided in the circuit, the circuit being
    intermittently interrupted at two or more different places.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216,    for this subject matter where there are a plurality of load devices
    in the system and a plurality of electrically operated periodic switches
    are used to distribute the current to the load devices.

    222,    for this subject matter where there is a transformer in the supply
    circuit of the load device and there are periodic switch means to interrupt
    the primary circuit and the secondary circuit of the transformer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 23, and
    indented subclasses, for multiple contact periodic switches, per se.


CLS 315/227
TXT Systems under the class definition provided with a condenser connected
    either in electrical series relation or electrical shunt relation to the
    load device and the source of current supply for the load device.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes systems having a condenser and
    discharge device, the condenser being charged by a suitable source of
    potential until the potential is sufficient to ionize the discharge space
    of the discharge device, when the condenser is discharged through the
    discharge device.  Such systems are included whether the system is stated
    to be for the production of oscillations or merely for the production of
    the space discharge (light generation).  In some of the systems, the
    condenser is connected so as to form, with the other circuit elements, an
    oscillatory circuit.  Such oscillatory circuit systems are included even
    though it is not clear from the patent that the discharge gas is ionized
    with each oscillatory impulse of current.  Where it is clear that the
    oscillatory circuit is merely fed with current through the discharge
    device, and the oscillatory current does not ionize the discharge space but
    continues to oscillate in a closed circuit which does not include the
    discharge device, the oscillatory circuit is considered as a load device
    and the patent is excluded from this class, and will be found in Class 331,
    Oscillators, particularly subclasses 126+ for electrical oscillator systems
    of the gaseous space discharge device type utilizing a capacitor as one of
    the frequency determining elements of the system, indented subclass 128
    providing for systems wherein the gaseous space discharge device provides
    for shock-excitation of an LC circuit, subclasses 143+ for relaxation
    oscillator utilizing space discharge devices and wherein an RC time
    constant network determines the period or frequency of the generated
    oscillation and subclasses 165+ for oscillators in general comprising a
    shock-excited resonant circuit or some related class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44      and 45, for devices which include a discharge device, an inductance
    and a condenser which are structurally combined in a unitary device.

    58,     for discharge devices having structurally combined therewith a
    condenser.

    71,     for lamps having structurally combined therewith a condenser.

    173,    for systems which include two sources of current supply for the
    load device, one of the supply circuits including a condenser.

    187,    and indented subclass, for systems wherein a plurality of load
    devices are connected in electrical series relation, a condenser being
    connected in the circuit.

    223,    for systems which include a transformer in the supply circuit of
    the load device, a periodic switch and a condenser being included in the
    primary circuit of the supply transformer.

    224,    for systems under the class definition which include a condenser
    and a periodic switch in the supply circuit of the load device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 364 and
    the subclasses specified in the notes to the definition of that subclass,
    for miscellaneous condenser systems and for miscellaneous systems having a
    condenser for controlling the magnitude of the current and/or voltage in a
    single circuit.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclass 103 for X-ray tube
    systems wherein the X-ray tube is designed to be energized by the discharge
    from a charged condenser.


CLS 315/228
TXT Systems under subclass 227 having two or more load devices in the system.

    (1)     Note.  Where a single lamp or a single discharge device is the
    ultimate load device, and the system includes an additional lamp and/or
    discharge device in the circuit which is connected in the circuit so as to
    control and/or modify the current and/or potential supplied to such single
    ultimate load device, the patent is classified as a plural load device
    system, if (a) the controlling and/or modifying device is a lamp, or (b)
    the controlling and/or modifying device is limited in the claims to being a
    gas or vapor discharge device.  Conversely, such a system is not classified
    as a plural load device system where the controlling and/or modifying
    device is claimed broadly as a discharge device, even though it is
    disclosed as a gas or vapor discharge device.

            The controlling and/or modifying device may be connected in the
    control circuit of the discharge device where the ultimate load device is a
    discharge control discharge device, and the same basis of classification is
    used as is set forth above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    187,    for this subject matter where the plurality of load devices are
    connected in electrical series relation.

    312,    and indented subclasses, and the subclasses referred to in the
    notes to the definition thereof for other plural load device systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 126+ for gaseous space discharge device
    type oscillators which may employ plural gaseous discharge devices,
    especially indented subclass 130 for relaxation oscillators utilizing
    plural gaseous devices.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 91+ for X- ray
    tube systems wherein the X-ray tube is designed to be energized by the
    discharge from a charge condenser.


CLS 315/229
TXT Systems under subclass 228 wherein the load devices are discharge devices
    of the type which conduct more current in one direction of current flow
    between the cathode and anode electrodes of the discharge device than is
    conducted in the other direction of current flow between the cathode and
    anode electrodes, and having the condenser connected in a circuit between
    similar principal discharge electrodes (such as between the anode or
    between the cathodes of two of the electric discharge devices).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235,    for systems wherein the load device is a plural cathode and/or
    anode load device and the system includes a condenser connected either
    between the anodes or between the cathodes.


CLS 315/230
TXT Systems under subclass 228 wherein the load devices are discharge devices
    of the type having two or more principal electrodes and a discharge
    controlling means, and the system includes means for controlling the
    electric discharge device by applying electric current or potential to the
    control means.

    (1)     Note.  For other systems under subclass 227 wherein the load device
    is a device having discharge control means, search this class, subclass
    234, where the control means is an auxiliary starting electrode, and
    subclass 237 and indented subclasses for other such systems.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229,    for this subject matter where the discharge devices are of the
    asymmetrical type and a condenser is connected between either the anodes or
    the cathodes of such asymmetrical load devices.

    234,    see the note above.

    237,    see the note above.


CLS 315/231
TXT Systems under subclass 228 wherein at least two load devices are each
    connected in electrical series relation with a condenser, each of the
    series connected load devices and condensers being connected in electrical
    shunt relation to the other series connected load device and condenser.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    187,    and indented subclass, where the load devices are in series
    relation with each other.


CLS 315/232
TXT Systems under subclass 228 wherein the condenser is connected in electrical
    shunt relation with respect to at least one of the load devices and the
    source of supply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188,    for this subject matter where the load devices are connected in
    electrical series relation with respect to each other.

    241,    for single load device systems under subclass 227 having a
    condenser in shunt to the load device.


CLS 315/233
TXT Systems under subclass 227 wherein the load device in the system is a
    discharge device which has two or more cathodes and/or two or more anodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334,    and indented subclasses and the subclasses specified in the notes
    to the definitions of these subclasses, for other systems provided with a
    plural cathode and/or anode load device.


CLS 315/234
TXT Systems under subclass 233 wherein the electric discharge device is
    provided with at least one principal anode and at least one principal
    cathode and an auxiliary discharge electrode, a condenser being included in
    the circuit which supplies current or potential to the auxiliary discharge
    electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    335,    and indented subclass, and the subclasses specified in the notes to
    the definitions of those subclasses, for other systems having an auxiliary
    starting electrode discharge device load.


CLS 315/235
TXT Systems under subclass 223 wherein the condenser is connected in a circuit
    between two or more similar principal electrodes (such as between two
    anodes or between two cathodes).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229,    for plural discharge device loads under subclass 227 having a
    condenser connected between the anodes or between cathodes of at least two
    load devices.


CLS 315/236
TXT Systems under subclass 227 wherein the load device is a discharge device
    and an electromagnet is placed adjacent to the interelectrode discharge
    space of the discharge device so that the space discharge is influenced by
    the magnetic flux.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    344,    and indented subclasses and the subclasses specified in the notes
    to the definitions of those subclasses, for other systems provided with an
    electromagnet for influencing the discharge in a discharge device load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclasses 100+ for the use of magnetic field or flux in plasma heating and
    containment.


CLS 315/237
TXT Systems under subclass 227 wherein the load device is an electric discharge
    device provided with a discharge controlling means, and the system includes
    means for controlling the electric discharge by applying an electric
    current and/or potential to the control means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    234,    for systems where the discharge control means for the discharge
    device is an auxiliary starting electrode having a condenser connected in
    its circuit.

    236,    for systems where the discharge controlling means is an
    electromagnet for influencing the electric discharge.

    349,    and indented subclasses and the subclasses specified in the notes
    to the definitions of those subclasses for other systems under the class
    definition having a discharge control discharge device load.


CLS 315/238
TXT Systems under subclass 237 having (in addition to a condenser in the supply
    circuit) a condenser connected in a circuit which includes the control
    electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    234,    for this subject matter where the discharge control means is an
    auxiliary starting electrode and the condenser is connected in the
    auxiliary starting electrode circuit.

    355,    and indented subclass and the subclasses referred to in the notes
    to the definition of those subclasses, for other systems provided with a
    condenser in the control circuit of the discharge control discharge device
    load.


CLS 315/239
TXT Systems under subclass 227 provided with a transformer, one of the windings
    of the transformer being in the circuit which includes both the condenser
    and the load device.

    (1)     Note.  Where the load device is connected to the source of supply
    by means of a transformer, the load device being connected to the secondary
    of this transformer and there is no condenser connected in the circuit,
    other than in the primary circuit of the supply transformer, the patent is
    excluded from this subclass and will be found in the subclasses below, the
    primary circuit being considered only a source of pulsating or A. C.
    potential for the secondary circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223,    for systems which include a transformer in the supply circuit of
    the load device, the primary circuit of the transformer including a
    periodic switch and a condenser.

    276,    and indented subclasses and the subclasses specified in the notes
    to the definition of those subclasses, for other systems under the class
    definition having a transformer in the supply circuit of the load device.


CLS 315/240
TXT Systems under subclass 227 provided with a switch which is connected to the
    circuit which includes the condenser so that the condenser may be connected
    in the system in different ways or disconnected from the system.

    (1)     Note.  The switch may be connected in the system so that (1) the
    condenser may be disconnected from the load device during the condenser
    charging period and then connected to the load device to discharge to the
    load device, or (2) the condenser may be included or excluded from the
    system, or (3) the condenser may be placed either in electrical series or
    shunt relation with respect to the load device, or (4) the circuit
    connections of the condenser may be altered in any desired manner.


CLS 315/241
TXT Systems under subclass 227 wherein the condenser is connected in electrical
    shunt relation with respect to the load device and the source of supply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188,    for this subject matter where there are a plurality of series
    connected load devices, and a condenser is connected in shunt relation to
    at least one of the load devices.

    232,    for this subject matter where there are a plurality of load devices
    and a condenser is connected in shunt relation to at least one of the load
    devices.

    236,    for this subject matter where there is electromagnetic means for
    influencing the discharge in a discharge load.

    237,    and indented subclass, for this subject matter where the load
    device is a discharge control discharge device.


CLS 315/242
TXT Systems under subclass 241 having an inductance connected in the circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for discharge control discharge devices which have combined
    therewith an inductance and a condenser, all structurally combined in a
    single unitary device, the condenser and the inductance being connected
    between the discharge control electrode and another electrode of the
    discharge device.

    53,     for discharge devices which have combined therewith an inductance
    and an impedance, all structurally combined in a single unitary device.

    244,    for other systems under subclass 227 having an inductance in the
    circuit.

    289,    and indented subclass, and the subclasses specified in the notes to
    the definition of those subclasses, for other systems under the class
    definition provided with an inductance in the circuit.


CLS 315/243
TXT Systems under subclass 242 having an inductance connected in the current
    supply circuit in electrical series relation with the source of supply and
    the load device.

    (1)     Note.  The shunt circuit which includes the condenser may be
    connected between the source of supply and the inductance or between the
    inductance and the load device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244,    for other systems under subclass 227 which include an inductance in
    the circuit.


CLS 315/244
TXT Systems under subclass 227 having an inductance in addition to the
    condenser.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for devices which include a lamp or discharge device, a condenser,
    and an inductance, all structurally combined to form a unitary structure.

    242,    and indented subclass, for this subject matter where the condenser
    is connected in shunt relation to the load device.

    289,    and indented subclass and the subclasses referred to in the notes
    to the definition of those subclasses, for other systems under the class
    definition provided with an inductance.


CLS 315/245
TXT Systems under subclass 227 provided with a resistance in a circuit which
    includes the condenser.

    (1)     Note.  The resistance may be (1) in electrical series relation with
    the source of supply and the condenser so that the charging current for the
    condenser flows through the condenser, or (2) in electrical series relation
    with the condenser and the load device so that the condenser discharges its
    current through the resistance and the load device, or (3) in electrical
    shunt relation to the condenser so that there is a flow of current through
    the resistance during the charging and/or discharge periods of the
    condenser.


CLS 315/246
TXT Systems under the class definition wherein the load devices in the system
    is supplied with either pulsating or alternating current or potential (but
    not both).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for discharge devices which are structurally combined with a
    transformer so as to form a unitary device.

    70,     for load devices other than discharge devices which are
    structurally combined with a transformer so as to form a unitary device.

    72,     for load devices having combined therewith a periodic switch, the
    switch and load device being structurally combined so as to form a unitary
    device and the periodic switch periodically interrupting the current
    supplied to the load device.

    97,     and subclass 105 and the indented subclass, for systems under the
    class definition wherein the load device is a discharge device provided
    with either a thermionic cathode heated by the passage of electric current
    or an indirectly treated cathode, the cathode or the cathode heater being
    supplied by a source of pulsating and/or alternating current.

    105,    see the reference to subclass 97, above.

    137,    and indented subclasses, for this subject matter where the system
    is a polyphase alternating current system.

    156,    where the system includes a source of pulsating and/or alternating
    current supply for the load device, a discharge device and/or rectifier
    being connected in the supply circuit, the discharge device or rectifier
    being controlled by a radiant energy sensitive device (photocell).

    171,    where the system includes a plurality of sources of current supply
    for the load device, one of the sources of current supply being a pulsating
    and/or alternating source and having a discharge device or rectifier in the
    supply circuit to the load device.

    172,    where the system includes a plurality of sources of current supply
    for the load device, one of the supply circuits including a periodic switch
    for periodically interrupting the supply of current to the load device.

    174,    where there are a plurality of diverse type pulsating and/or
    alternating current supplies for the load device, or both alternating and
    pulsating current supplies.

    177,    for this subject matter where there is a transformer in the power
    supply circuit, there being a load device in the primary circuit of the
    transformer and another load device in the secondary circuit.

    186,    for systems which include a plurality of series connected load
    devices, the supply circuit for the load devices including a periodic
    switch to periodically interrupt the supply of current.

    194,    for this subject matter where the load device is a discharge
    control discharge device, and phase shifting means are used to regulate the
    current and/or potential supplied to the discharge control means.

    200,    where the system includes a pulsating and/or alternating current
    supply source for the load device, the supply circuit including a rectifier
    and/or discharge device.

    209,    and indented subclasses, for systems which include a periodic
    switch in the supply circuit of the load device for periodically
    interrupting the supply of current to the load device.

    227,    and indented subclasses, for systems under the class definition
    wherein a condenser is included in the load device circuit so that the load
    device is energized periodically by the current discharged from the
    condenser.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    appropriate subclasses, for systems for supplying pulsating and/or
    alternating current to consumable electrode discharge devices, note
    especially subclasses 31 and 32.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 106 and 107 for
    X-ray tube power supplies having pulse or A. C. output.


CLS 315/247
TXT Systems under subclass 246 having combined therewith means designed to
    alter the power factor of the system.

    (1)     Note.  To be classified in this subclass, there must be included in
    the system some device which has no function other than to alter the power
    factor of the system.  Systems under the definition of subclass 246 having
    the circuit elements designed to give a desired power factor are not
    included in this subclass but are in the subclasses below.  For example,
    for systems under the definition of subclass 246, having a transformer in
    the circuit supplying power to the load device, the transformer being
    designed to give a particular power factor, search subclass 276 and
    indented subclasses below.


CLS 315/248
TXT Systems under subclass 246 wherein the load device in the system is a
    discharge device of the type which has an envelope (such as a glass bulb),
    containing an atmosphere of gas or vapor, the system including a magnetic
    coil mounted in inductive relation to the confined gas or vapor in the
    envelope and a generator of high frequency current connected to the
    magnetic coil so that the gas or vapor may be subjected to a high frequency
    field to ionize the gas or vapor within the envelope.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 153+, especially
    indented subclass 161, for the structure of discharge devices, per se,
    which have combined therewith a magnetic field producing means.


CLS 315/249
TXT Systems under subclass 246 wherein the load device in the system is a
    discharge device having the electrodes formed of conductive rods or wires
    which are arranged in physical parallel relation with respect to each other
    and having the source of supply designed to impress voltage waves upon the
    electrode system so that an electric discharge is established between the
    electrodes at the antinodes of the potential wave, the system being
    provided with means to cause the antinodes of potential, and therefore the
    electric discharge, to traverse the electrodes along their length.

    (1)     Note.  This type of system is used for developing a scanning ray
    for television purposes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    345,    for systems under the class definition wherein the discharge device
    is provided with parallel mounted rod or wire like electrodes, and an
    electromagnet is used to cause the discharge to traverse the electrodes
    along their length.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses for
    discharge device structures, per se.  See subclass 325 for discharge
    devices which involve only two electrodes.  See subclasses 306+ and the
    subclasses specified in the Notes thereto for discharge devices which have
    three or more electrodes.

    348,    Television, subclasses 800+ for television systems using such
    discharge devices.


CLS 315/250
TXT Systems under subclass 246 having two or more load devices in the system.

    (1)     Note.  Where a single lamp or a single discharge device is the
    ultimate load device, and the system includes an additional lamp and/or
    discharge device in the circuit which is connected in the circuit so as to
    control and/or modify the current and/or potential supplied to such single
    ultimate load device, the patent is classified as a plural load device
    system, if (a) the controlling and/or modifying device is a lamp, or (b)
    the controlling and/or modifying device is limited in the claims to being a
    gas or vapor discharge device.  Conversely, such a system is not classified
    as a plural load device system where the controlling and/or modifying
    device is claimed broadly as a discharge device even though it is disclosed
    as a gas or vapor discharge device.

    The controlling and/or modifying device may be connected in the control
    circuit of the discharge device where the ultimate load device is a
    discharge control discharge device, and the same basis of classification is
    used as is set forth above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97,     for systems provided with a plurality of load devices, the load
    devices having thermionic cathodes heated by the passage of electric
    current or indirectly heated cathodes, the cathode or cathode heater
    circuits being supplied with pulsating or alternating current.

    137+,   for this subject matter where the source of supply for the load
    devices is polyphase alternating current.

    177,    for this subject matter where there is a transformer in the supply
    circuit, a load device being connected in the primary circuit of the
    transformer and another load device being connected in the secondary
    circuit of the transformer.

    186,    for systems which include a plurality of series connected load
    devices, the supply circuit including a periodic switch to periodically
    interrupt the supply of current to at least one of the load devices.

    195,    for this subject matter where the load devices are discharge
    control discharge device load devices, and the system includes means to
    shift the phase of the current and/or potential supplied to the control
    means with respect to the current in the anode-cathode circuit.

    201,    for plural load device systems wherein the source of supply is a
    source of alternating or pulsating current, and a rectifier and/or an
    electric space discharge device is connected in the supply circuit of at
    least one of the load devices.

    228,    and indented subclasses, for plural load device systems wherein a
    condenser is included in the circuit of at least one of the load devices so
    that the load device is periodically energized by the current discharged
    from the condenser.


CLS 315/251
TXT Systems under subclass 250 wherein the load devices are discharge devices
    of the type which conduct more current in one direction of current flow
    between the cathode and anode electrodes of the discharge device than is
    conducted in the other direction of current flow between the cathode and
    anode electrodes, and at least two of the discharge devices each have its
    anode connected to the cathode of the other load device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196     and indented subclass, for this subject matter where the load
    devices are discharge control discharge device load devices and the system
    includes means to shift the phase of the current and/or potential applied
    to the discharge control means with respect to the current in the
    cathode-anode circuit of the discharge devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 227
    and 291 for electronic tube regulators. See section VI, B, of the class
    definition of Class 323.


CLS 315/252
TXT Systems under subclass 250 wherein the load devices are discharge devices
    of the type having two or more principal electrodes and a discharge
    controlling means, and the system includes means for controlling the
    electric discharge device by applying electric current or potential to the
    control means.

    (1)     Note.  For other systems under subclass 246 wherein a discharge
    device load is provided with discharge controlling means, search this
    class, subclass 261 and indented subclasses where the discharge controlling
    means is an auxiliary starting electrode, subclass 267 where the
    controlling means is an electromagnet, and subclass 268 and indented
    subclasses, for other miscellaneous discharge control discharge device
    systems.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195,    for this subject matter where the system includes means to shift
    the phase of the discharge control current and/or potential with respect to
    the current in the cathode-anode circuit of the load devices.

    251,    for this subject matter where the discharge devices are inverse
    parallel connected asymmetrical discharge devices.

    261,    see (1) Note. above.

    267,    see (1) Note. above.

    268,    see (1) Note. above.

    325,    and the subclasses specified in the notes to the definition thereof
    for other plural discharge control discharge device loads.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 227 and
    291 for electronic tube regulators. See section VI, B, of the class
    definition of Class 323.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 116 and 121+ for
    current conversion systems having an electronic tube convertor provided
    with discharge control means; subclasses 83, 94, and 99 for current
    conversion systems having an electronic tube line circuit control means
    provided with discharge control means.  The systems in Class 363 are
    closely analogous to those in this subclass.  See section VI, 7 of the
    class definition of Class 363 for the line between Class 315 and Class 363.


CLS 315/253
TXT Systems under subclass 250 wherein the load devices are electric space
    discharge devices of the type which conduct more current in one direction
    of current flow between the cathode and anode electrodes than is conducted
    in the other direction of current flow between the cathode and anode
    electrodes, the load devices being connected to an alternating current
    source so that a discharge is established alternately in the discharge
    devices with each half of the alternating current wave.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252,    for this subject matter where the discharge devices are discharge
    control discharge devices.

    265,    for full wave systems wherein the load device is a plural cathode
    and/or anode load device.


CLS 315/254
TXT Systems under subclass 250 provided with a transformer connected between
    the source of supply and at least one of the load devices for supplying
    electric current and/or potential to the load device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144,    for this subject matter for polyphase alternating current systems.

    177,    for this subject matter where one load device is connected in the
    primary circuit of the transformer and another is connected in the
    secondary circuit of the transformer.

    212,    for plural load device systems having a distributor type periodic
    switch means and a transformer in the supply circuit of the load devices.

    276,    and indented subclasses and the subclasses specified in the notes
    to the definition of that subclass, for other systems with a transformer in
    the supply circuit of a load device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    355-363, and the subclasses specified in the Notes to the definitions of
    those subclasses, for miscellaneous transformer systems and for systems
    having a transformer for controlling the magnitude of the current and/or
    voltage in a single circuit.


CLS 315/255
TXT Systems under subclass 254 provided with two or more transformers in the
    supply circuit.

    (1)     Note.  Two or more of the load devices may each have a transformer
    in its supply circuit, or there may be a plurality of transformers in the
    supply circuit of one of the load devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257,    for plural load device systems under subclass 254 having a plural
    secondary or tapped secondary in the supply circuit of the load devices.

    277,    for other systems provided with a plurality of transformers in the
    supply circuit of the load device.


CLS 315/256
TXT Systems under subclass 255 wherein two or more of the load devices each
    have a transformer in its supply circuit and the primary coils of the
    transformers are connected in electrical series relation with respect to
    each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185,    and indented subclasses, for plural load device systems under the
    class definition wherein the load devices are connected in electrical
    series relation.


CLS 315/257
TXT Systems under subclass 254 wherein the transformer is provided with (1) two
    or more secondary coils, or (2) a tapped secondary coil, and a load device
    is connected to each of the secondary coils or each of the sections of the
    tapped secondary coil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278,    for other systems under the class definition provided with a
    transformer in the supply circuit of a load device, the transformer being
    provided with three windings.

    282,    for other systems with tapped transformers in the supply circuit of
    the load device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 251
    and 332, for miscellaneous systems having a plural primary or secondary
    winding transformer for controlling the magnitude of the current and/or
    voltage in a single circuit.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for the structure of
    transformers and inductive reactors with plural coils.


CLS 315/258
TXT Systems under subclass 250 provided with an inductance connected either in
    electrical series relation or electrical shunt relation to at least one of
    the load devices and the source of current supply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    283,    and indented subclasses, for other pulsating or A. C. systems
    having an inductance connected in the supply circuit.

    289,    and indented subclass, and the subclasses specified in the notes to
    the definition of those subclasses for other systems provided with an
    inductance in the supply circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 247,
    301, 305, and 328, and the subclasses specified in the notes to the
    definition of those subclasses for miscellaneous reactor systems and for
    systems having an inductance for controlling the magnitude of the current
    and/or voltage in a single circuit.


CLS 315/259
TXT Systems under subclass 258 wherein the inductance in the circuit is a
    variable inductance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284,    and indented subclasses, for other systems under subclass 246
    having a variable inductance in the supply circuit of the load device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 247,
    301, 305, and 328 and the subclasses specified in the notes to the
    definition of these subclasses, for systems having a variable inductance
    for controlling the magnitude of the current and/or voltage in a single
    circuit.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for the structure of
    variable transformers and inductive reactors including saturable reactors.


CLS 315/260
TXT Systems under subclass 246 wherein the load device in the system is an
    electric space discharge device which has two or more cathodes and/or two
    or more anodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145,    for this subject matter where the discharge device is connected in
    a ployphase A. C. supply system and there is a transformer in the supply
    circuit.

    147,    and indented subclass, for this subject matter where the discharge
    device is connected in a ployphase A. C. supply system.

    334     and indented subclasses, and the subclasses referred to in the
    notes to the definition of those subclasses, for other systems under the
    class definition wherein the load device is provided with a plurality of
    cathodes or anodes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 306+ and the
    subclasses specified in the Notes thereto for the structure of discharge
    devices which have two or more cathodes or two or more anodes.


CLS 315/261
TXT Systems under subclass 260 wherein the electric discharge device is
    provided with at least one principal anode and at least one principal
    cathode and an auxiliary discharge electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194,    for this subject matter where the system includes means to shift
    the phase of the current supplied to the auxiliary starting electrode with
    respect to the current flowing in the principal electrode circuit.

    268,    and indented subclasses, for systems wherein the discharge device
    is provided with an auxiliary electrode placed adjacent one of the
    principal electrodes, usually the cathode, and having the auxiliary
    electrode connected to a source of potential so that an electrostatic field
    is created near the principal electrode to facilitate initiating the
    discharge, the electrostatic electrode being arranged with respect to the
    principal electrode that there is no flow of discharge current to the
    electrostatic electrode.  In such systems, the discharge electrodes are
    usually enclosed in a vitreous envelope and the auxiliary control electrode
    is placed on the outside of the envelope near the cathode.

    335,    and indented subclass, and the subclasses specified in the notes to
    the definition of these subclasses, for other systems under the class
    definition wherein the load device is provided with an auxiliary starting
    electrode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 592+, 594, 595+,
    and 601+ for discharge devices which are provided with an envelope
    containing a gas or vapor and which have an auxiliary starting electrode,
    and subclasses 306+ for other discharge devices which have an auxiliary
    starting electrode.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 227
    and 291 for electronic tube regulators. See section VI, B, of the class
    definition of Class 323.


CLS 315/262
TXT Systems under subclass 261 provided with (1) a transformer connected
    between the source of supply and the discharge device for supplying
    electric current or potential to the auxiliary electrode circuit, or (2) a
    transformer connected between the source of supply and the discharge device
    for supplying electric current or potential to the principal electrodes of
    the discharge device, the transformer being provided with an auxiliary
    winding which supplies current or potential to the auxiliary electrode
    circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    276,    and indented subclasses and the subclasses specified in the notes
    to the definition of those subclasses, for other systems provided with a
    transformer in the supply circuit of the load device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    355-363 and the subclasses specified in the notes to the definition of
    these subclasses for miscellaneous transformer systems.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for the structure of
    transformers and inductive reactors having plural windings.


CLS 315/263
TXT Systems under subclass 261 having (1) means for generating a surge of
    potential which is higher than the potential of the source of supply and
    applying the potential surge to the auxiliary electrode, or (2) an
    inductance in electrical series relation in the circuit which supplies
    potential to the auxiliary electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262,    for systems wherein a transformer is utilized to impress a higher
    or lower potential or current on the auxiliary electrode than that
    impressed upon the principal electrodes.

    283,    and indented subclasses, and the subclasses specified in the notes
    to the definition of those subclasses, for other systems under subclass 246
    having an inductance in the supply circuit of the load device.

    289,    and indented subclass, and the subclasses specified in the notes to
    the definition of those subclasses, for other systems under the class
    definition provided with an inductance or surge generating means in the
    supply circuit of the load device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    355-363, and the subclasses specified in the notes to the definitions of
    these subclasses for miscellaneous reactor systems.


CLS 315/264
TXT Systems under subclass 261 in which an impedance is connected between the
    auxiliary electrode and the source of current supply of the principal
    electrodes of the discharge device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263,    for this subject matter where the impedance is an inductance.

    337,    for other plural cathode and/or anode load device systems having an
    impedance connected between two cathodes or anodes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    364-370 and the subclasses specified in the notes to the definition of
    these subclasses for miscellaneous impedance systems.


CLS 315/265
TXT Systems under subclass 260 wherein the electrical discharge device is
    connected to an alternating current supply circuit so that two of the
    electrodes (such as the anodes) have impressed thereon, alternately, a
    positive and negative potential, one of these electrodes being positive
    when the other is negative, and having the electrode (such as the cathode)
    which cooperates with these electrodes (anodes) connected to a point in the
    circuit which has a potential intermediate that of the alternating
    potential impressed on the first mentioned electrodes so that a discharge
    is established between an anode and a cathode on each half of the
    alternating current wave.

    (1)     Note.  The discharge device may have two cathodes and an anode with
    the discharge alternating between the anode and different cathodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140,    for full wave systems where the supply circuit is a polyphase
    alternating current system and includes phase multiplying means in the
    supply circuit.

    141,    for full wave systems where the supply circuit is a polyphase
    alternating current system and includes a transformer in the supply circuit.

    146,    for full wave systems where there are a plurality of discharge
    control discharge device load devices connected in a polyphase alternating
    current supply system.

    147,    for the subject matter where the discharge device is connected to a
    polyphase alternating current supply system.

    195,    for full wave systems where there are a plurality of discharge
    control discharge device load devices in the system, and the system
    includes means to shift the phase of the control current and/or potential
    with respect to the current in the cathode-anode circuit.

    253,    for miscellaneous full wave systems under subclass 246 where there
    are a plurality of asymmetrical discharge device load devices in the system.


CLS 315/266
TXT Systems under subclass 265 provided with a transformer connected between
    the source of supply and the load device for supplying electric current or
    potential to the load device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145,    for this subject matter where the discharge device is connected in
    a polyphase alternating current supply system.

    276,    and indented subclasses and the subclasses referred to in the notes
    to the definition of those subclasses, for other systems provided with a
    transformer in the supply circuit.


CLS 315/267
TXT Systems under subclass 246 wherein the load device is a discharge device
    and an electromagnet is placed adjacent to the interelectrode discharge
    space of the discharge device so that the space discharge is influenced by
    the magnetic flux.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    344,    and indented subclasses and the subclasses specified in the notes
    to the definition of those subclasses, for other systems under the class
    definition provided with an electric discharge device load and an
    electromagnet for influencing the electric discharge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 153+ for the
    structure of discharge devices which are provided with an electromagnet.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 227
    and 291 for electronic tube regulators. See section VI, B, of the class
    definition of Class 323.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclasses 100+ for the use of magnetic field or flux in plasma heating and
    containment.


CLS 315/268
TXT Systems under subclass 246 wherein the load device is a discharge device
    provided with a discharge controlling means and the system includes means
    for controlling the electric discharge by applying an electric current
    and/or potential to the control means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148,    for this subject matter where the discharge device is a plural
    cathode and/or anode discharge device and is provided with discharge
    control means, the discharge device being connected in a polyphase
    alternating current supply system.

    194,    and indented subclasses, for this subject matter where the system
    includes means to shift the phase of the discharge controlling current
    and/or potential with respect to the current in the cathode-anode circuit.

    251,    for this subject matter where there are a plurality of discharge
    control devices in the system, the discharge devices being of the
    asymmetrical type, and being connected in inverse parallel relation with
    respect to each other.

    252,    for this subject matter where there are a plurality of discharge
    control discharge devices in the system.

    261,    and indented subclasses, for systems under subclass 246 where the
    discharge control means is an auxiliary starting electrode.

    267,    for systems under subclass 246 where the discharge controlling
    means is an electromagnet.

    349,    and indented subclasses and the subclasses specified in the notes
    to the definition of those subclasses, for other systems wherein the load
    device is a discharge control discharge device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 308, and the
    subclasses specified in the Notes thereto for the structure of discharge
    devices which are provided with a discharge control electrode.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 227
    and 291 for electronic tube regulators. See section VI, B, of the class
    definition of Class 323.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 116 and 121+, and the
    subclasses mentioned in the notes thereto, for electronic tube conversion
    systems wherein the electronic tube convertor is provided a discharge
    control device for controlling the output current.  Some of the systems in
    Class 363 are closely analogous to the systems of this subclass.  See
    section VI, 7 of the class definition of Class 363 for the line between
    Class 315 and Class 363.


CLS 315/269
TXT Systems under subclass 268 wherein the discharge device is provided with
    two or more discharge controlling means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    341,    and indented subclasses and the subclasses specified in the notes
    to the definition of those subclasses, for other systems provided with a
    discharge control discharge device load device having a plurality of
    discharge controlling means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 296+ for the
    structure of discharge devices which have a plurality of control grids.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 227
    and 291 for electronic tube regulators. See section VI, B, of the class
    definition of Class 323.


CLS 315/270
TXT Systems under subclass 268 provided with means to apply two or more
    different currents and/or potential to the discharge control means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    350,    and indented subclass, for other systems under the class definition
    having a discharge control discharge device load and being provided with
    means to apply two or more different currents and/or potentials to the
    discharge control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 227
    and 291 for electronic tube regulators. See section VI, B, of the class
    definition of Class 323.


CLS 315/271
TXT Systems under subclass 270 provided with means to apply a pulsating and an
    alternating potential or two or more different pulsating or alternating
    potentials to the discharge control means.

    (1)     Note.  In systems coming within the definition of subclass 268
    wherein a transformer is provided which has two or more primary windings,
    each energized by pulsating or alternating current and having the secondary
    connected to the control circuit, the patent is placed in subclass 274
    below and not in this subclass.  Where two or more transformers are
    provided and the secondary windings are connected either in series or
    parallel, with the resultant potential impressed upon the control means,
    the patent is placed in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160,    and indented subclasses, for plural power supplies.

    274,    see (1) "Note." above.

    351,    for other systems under the class definition provided with means to
    supply two or more different pulsating and/or alternating currents to the
    control means of a discharge control discharge device load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 227
    and 291 for electronic tube regulators. See section VI, B, of the class
    definition of Class 323.


CLS 315/272
TXT Systems under subclass 268 provided with a rectifier and/or an electric
    space discharge device connected in the control circuit of the discharge
    device.

    (1)     Note.  Where the system includes a plurality of discharge devices,
    one of which is connected in the control circuit of the discharge device
    which is the load in the circuit, the patent is classified as a plural load
    device system in the subclasses above, where the discharge device in the
    control circuit is claimed as a discharge device whose operation depends
    upon gaseous ionization even though the system is claimed as only having
    one ultimate load device.  Where the controlling discharge device is
    claimed merely as a discharge device even though it is disclosed as a
    gaseous ionization discharge device, the system is not considered to be a
    plural load device system for the purpose of classification.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    197,    198, and 199, for this subject matter where the system includes
    means to shift the phase of the control current and/or potential with
    respect to the current flowing in the cathode-anode circuit.

    198,    see the reference to 197, above.

    199,    see the reference to 197, above.

    203,    and indented subclass, where the discharge control means is an
    auxiliary starting electrode and there is a rectifier or discharge in the
    auxiliary electrode circuit.

    352,    and indented subclass and the subclasses specified in the notes to
    the definitions of those subclasses, for other systems under the class
    definition provided with a discharge control discharge device load device
    and having a rectifier or discharge device in the control circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 227
    and 291 for electronic tube regulators. See section VI, B, of the class
    definition of Class 323.


CLS 315/273
TXT Systems under subclass 272 provided with a condenser connected in the
    control circuit of the discharge load device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    275,    for other systems under subclass 268 having a condenser connected
    in the control circuit.

    353,    for other systems under the class definition provided with a
    discharge control discharge device load and having a condenser and a
    rectifier or a discharge device connected in the control circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 364, for
    miscellaneous condenser systems.


CLS 315/274
TXT Systems under subclass 268 provided with a transformer connected in the
    control circuit of the discharge device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262,    where the discharge control means is an auxiliary starting
    electrode and a transformer is connected in the auxiliary starting
    electrode circuit.

    354,    for other systems under the class definition having a discharge
    control discharge device load and having a transformer connected in the
    control circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 355, for
    miscellaneous transformer systems.


CLS 315/275
TXT Systems under subclass 268 provided with a condenser connected in the
    control circuit of the discharge device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    234,    where the control device is an auxiliary starting electrode and a
    condenser is connected in the starting electrode circuit.

    273,    for other systems under subclass 268, having a condenser and a
    rectifier and/or discharge device connected in the control circuit.

    355,    and indented subclass, for other systems under the class definition
    having a discharge control discharge device load, and having a condenser
    connected in the control circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 364, for
    miscellaneous condenser systems.


CLS 315/276
TXT Systems under subclass 246 provided with a transformer connected between
    the source of supply and the load device for supplying electric current
    and/or potential to the load device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for discharge devices combined with a transformer, the discharge
    device and transformer being structurally combined in a single unitary
    device.

    70,     for miscellaneous load devices which are structurally combined with
    a transformer so as to form a unitary device.

    141,    and indented subclasses, for this subject matter where the supply
    system is a polyphase alternating current system.

    177,    for this subject matter where there is a load device in both the
    primary and secondary circuits of the transformer.

    206,    for this subject matter where there is a rectifier and/or discharge
    device in the primary circuit of the transformer.

    212,    and indented subclasses, for plural load device systems having a
    transformer and a distributor type periodic switch means in the supply
    circuit.

    219,    and indented subclasses, for systems having a transformer in the
    supply circuit of the load device and a periodic switch in the primary
    circuit of the transformer.

    239,    where there is a condenser and transformer in the supply circuit.

    254,    and indented subclasses, for this subject matter where there are a
    plurality of load devices in the system.

    262,    for this subject matter where the discharge device is an auxiliary
    starting electrode discharge device, and there is a transformer in the
    auxiliary starting electrode circuit.

    266,    for this subject matter where the load device is a plural cathode
    and/or anode discharge device, and the system is a full wave system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 32, for systems for supplying current to discharge devices of the
    consumable electrode type in which a transformer is used to supply the
    current to the discharge device.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    355-363, and the subclasses specified in the notes to the definitions of
    those subclasses for miscellaneous transformer systems and for
    miscellaneous systems having a transformer for controlling the magnitude of
    the current and/or voltage in a single circuit.


CLS 315/277
TXT Systems under subclass 276 provided with two or more transformers in the
    supply circuit of the load device.

    (1)     Note.  The transformers may have their primaries and/or secondaries
    connected in electrical series or shunt relation, or the transformers may
    be connected in cascade, that is, with the primary of one transformer
    connected to the secondary of another transformer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220,    for systems having a plurality of transformers in the supply
    circuit of the load device and having a periodic switch in the primary
    circuit of at least one of the transformers.

    255,    and indented subclass, for plural load device systems under
    subclass 246 having a plurality of transformers in the supply circuit of
    the load devices.

    278,    where the transformer is provided with only one primary winding or
    only one secondary winding, and there are a plurality of cooperating
    windings.


CLS 315/278
TXT Systems under subclass 276 wherein the transformer is of the type having
    three or more coils or windings.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include systems provided with
    transformers having only a primary and secondary coil with one or both of
    the coils tapped, but the transformer used in the system must have three or
    more separate coils, although two or more of the coils may be connected in
    series, usually so that the current flow through one of the series
    connected coils flows in the opposite direction to the current flow through
    the other series connected coil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257,    for plural load device systems under the class definition having a
    plural secondary or tapped secondary transformer in the supply circuit.

    282,    for such systems having tapped coils.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 249,
    302, 310, 329, and 355, for miscellaneous transformer systems and for
    transformer systems for controlling the magnitude of the current and/or
    voltage in a single circuit where the transformer has an auxiliary
    saturating winding.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for the structure of
    transformers and inductive reactors including those with three or more
    coils or windings.


CLS 315/279
TXT Systems under subclass 276 provided with means in the primary circuit of
    the transformer for regulating the current or voltage supplied to the load
    device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291,    and indented subclasses, for other systems under the class
    definition which include a current or voltage regulator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 247,
    301, 305, 328, and 355, for miscellaneous transformer systems and for
    systems having a transformer for controlling the magnitude of the current
    and/or voltage in a single circuit, the transformer being provided with
    current regulating means in its primary circuit.


CLS 315/280
TXT Systems under subclass 276 having means provided in the system so that the
    transformer may be connected in the system so as to function either (1) as
    a transformer for the current or voltage supplied to the load device, or
    (2) as merely an inductance in the supply circuit, the transformer being
    converted to an inductance by connecting one or both of the transformer
    coils in electrical series with the source of supply and the load device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258,    and indented subclass, for plural load device systems having an
    inductance in the circuit and a pulsating or A. C. supply.

    283,    and indented subclasses, for other systems under subclass 246,
    provided with an inductance in the circuit.


CLS 315/281
TXT Systems under subclass 276 in which the transformer is provided with means
    for varying the inductive coupling between the windings, the inductive
    coupling being varied by (1) arranging one of the transformer windings so
    as to have free relative movement with respect to the other winding and/or
    the transformer core, or (2) arranging the transformer core so as to have
    free relative movement with respect to the transformer windings, or (3)
    using a transformer having a core made of two or more parts, at least one
    of the parts being arranged so as to have free relative movement with
    respect to another of the core parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    285,    for systems having a relatively movable core and coil type
    inductance in the supply circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 264
    and 347, for miscellaneous transformer systems and for systems having a
    transformer for controlling the magnitude of the current and/or voltage in
    a single circuit, the transformer having an adjustable or movable winding
    or coil.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 115+ and the subclasses specified in
    the Notes thereto for the structure of transformers having relatively
    movable coils, and subclasses 130+ and the subclasses specified in the
    Notes thereto for transformers having a relatively movable core and coil.


CLS 315/282
TXT Systems under subclass 276 in which the transformer is provided with means
    for changing the effective ratio of the input current or voltage to the
    output current or voltage.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of transformers such as are used in the systems in
    this subclass are transformers having taps in the coils to vary the number
    of turns in the coil, or transformers having a high leakage path for the
    magnetic flux in the core, or transformers having the core designed to be
    saturated under certain load conditions in the magnetizing winding and to
    be unsaturated under other load conditions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257,    for pulsating or A. C. supply, plural load device systems having a
    plural secondary or a tapped secondary transformer in the supply circuit.

    278,    for this subject matter where the transformer has three or more
    coils.

    279,    for this subject matter where there is a current regulating means
    in the primary circuit.

    281,    for this subject matter where the transformer is of the relatively
    movable coil and core type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    355-363 and the subclasses specified in the notes to the definition of
    those subclasses for miscellaneous transformer systems and for transformer
    systems for controlling the magnitude of the current and/or voltage in a
    single circuit.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for the structure of
    transformers and inductive reactors. See especially subclass 150 and the
    subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for transformers with tapped
    coils; and subclasses 155+ for transformers and inductive reactors of the
    leakage reactance type and of the saturating type.


CLS 315/283
TXT Systems under subclass 246 provided with an inductance connected either in
    electrical series relation or electrical shunt relation to the load device
    and the source of current supply for the load device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258,    and indented subclass, for this subject matter where there are a
    plurality of load devices in the system.

    265,    for this subject matter where the load device is a plural cathode
    and/or anode discharge device and there is an inductance in the system, the
    system being a full wave system.

    280,    for this subject matter where the supply circuit includes a
    transformer, the transformer being convertible to an inductance.

    289,    and indented subclass and the subclasses referred to in the notes
    to the definition of those subclasses, for other systems under the class
    definition provided with an inductance in the supply circuit of the load
    device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    355-363, and the subclasses specified in the notes to the definition of
    those subclasses for miscellaneous reactor systems and for systems having
    an inductance for controlling the magnitude of the current and/or voltage
    in a single circuit.


CLS 315/284
TXT Systems under subclass 283 wherein the inductance in the circuit is a
    variable inductance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259,    for this subject matter where there are a plurality of load devices
    in the system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    355-363, and the subclasses specified in the notes to the definition of
    those subclasses for systems having a variable inductance for controlling
    the magnitude of the current and/or voltage in a single circuit.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for the structure of
    adjustable inductive impedances.


CLS 315/285
TXT Systems under subclass 284 wherein the inductance coil is provided with a
    magnetic core, (1) the coil and the core being arranged so as to have free
    relative movement with respect to each other, or (2) the core being made of
    two or more parts, at least one of the core parts being arranged so as to
    have free relative movement with respect to another of the core parts so as
    to vary the magnetic reluctance of the core, so that the current through
    the coil is more or less relatively impeded depending on the relative
    positions which the core and coil or the core parts occupy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281,    for systems having a relatively movable core and coil type
    transformer in the supply circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 264
    and 347, for miscellaneous reactor systems and systems for controlling the
    magnitude of the current and/or voltage in a single circuit by means of a
    reactor, the reactor having a movable coil and/or core.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 115+ and the subclasses specified in
    the Notes thereto for the structure of inductive impedances having
    relatively movable coils, and subclasses 130+ and the subclasses specified
    in the Notes thereto for inductive impedances having a relatively movable
    core and coil and subclasses 155+ for inductive impedances of the
    regulating type which do not have moving parts (e.g., saturating type).


CLS 315/286
TXT Systems under subclass 285 wherein the movable (coil or core) part is
    biased against movement by suitable biasing means, such as a spring or
    weight, the relative movement of the coil and core or the core parts being
    brought about by variations of the magnetic flux generated by the
    variations of the current in the coils, the value of the current in the
    supply circuit being thereby less dependent upon changes in the resistance
    of the load device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 40+ for the structure of inductive
    impedances which have a biased movable coil or core, the position of the
    movable part being controlled by the current in the impedance.


CLS 315/287
TXT Systems under subclass 246 provided with means in the supply circuit of the
    load device to vary the current or voltage applied to the load device
    between a low and high value at constantly recurring intervals.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for systems under the class
    definition wherein the source of current or voltage supply is a direct
    source, and the periodic regulator converts the current or potential to
    pulsating current or potential.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209,    and indented subclasses, for systems under the class definition
    provided with a periodic switch in the supply circuit of the load device.


CLS 315/288
TXT Systems under the class definition wherein the distributing system for
    supplying current to the load device has three or more wires with two wires
    connected to the source of supply so that a desired voltage is maintained
    between them, the other wires being connected in the system so that the
    potential between any of these wires and either of the first mentioned two
    wires is less than the potential between the first mentioned two wires.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, either as originals or cross
    references, patents relating to systems wherein a load device of the type
    which is within the class definition can be connected between the two wires
    of higher potential or between the intermediate wire and one of the higher
    potential wires so as to impress either a high or low potential on the load
    device.  Also included are patents for supplying current to a plurality of
    load devices by means of a three wire distribution system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137,    and indented subclasses, for systems wherein the load device is
    supplied with polyphase alternating current by means of a three or more
    wire polyphase alternating current distributing system.

    160,    and indented subclasses, for systems which are provided with a
    plurality of sources of current supply for one or more load devices.

    184,    for systems wherein each side of the current supply is connected to
    two or more conductors, three or more load devices being connected between
    the two sides of the line, each load device being connected to a different
    pair of conductors from the conductors connected to the other load devices.

    250,    and subclass 265, and indented subclass, for systems having an
    alternating current supply source for the load device or devices and having
    the load device or devices connected so as to be operative on each half
    wave of the alternating current cycle.  In many of these systems the wires
    connecting the load device or devices to the alternating current source are
    arranged so as to constitute a three wire distribution system or to be
    closely analogous to a three wire distribution system.


CLS 315/289
TXT Systems under the class definition provided with (1) means for generating a
    surge of potential which is higher than the potential of the source of
    supply is provided in the circuit of the load device, or (2) an inductance
    connected either in electrical series relation or electrical shunt relation
    to the load device and the source of current supply for the load device.

    (1)     Note.  In many of the systems in this subclass, and indented
    subclasses, the load device is an electric space discharge device which
    requires a higher potential to start its operation than to continue its
    operation after it has been started.  Also included are other systems
    wherein a surge generator or inductance is provided for other reasons.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      and indented subclasses, for cathode-ray tubes which have
    structurally combined therewith, so as to form a unitary device, an
    inductance.

    40,     for discharge devices or lamps having an electrode formed as an
    inductive impedance.

    41,     and indented subclasses, for discharge devices having structurally
    combined therewith, so as to form a unitary device, an inductive impedance,
    such impedance being connected between the electrodes of the discharge
    device.

    54,     for discharge devices and lamps having a plurality of inductive
    impedances structurally combined therewith so as to form a unitary device.

    62,     for discharge devices having an inductive impedance structurally
    combined therewith to form a unitary device.

    103,    for systems wherein the load device is a discharge device having a
    thermionic cathode designed to be heated by the passage of heating current
    through it, or an indirectly heated cathode having an electric heating
    means, the system including means to heat supply heating current to the
    cathode or cathode heater and to delay the application of the discharge
    potential to the discharge electrodes until the cathode has reached
    operating temperature, the system also including means to apply a surge of
    potential to the discharge electrodes when the discharge potential is first
    connected to the discharge electrodes.

    223,    where the supply circuit of the load device includes a transformer,
    the primary circuit of the transformer including a periodic switch and an
    inductance.

    242,    and indented subclass, for this subject matter where there is a
    condenser in shunt to the load device and the inductance is also included
    in the circuit.

    244,    for miscellaneous systems where there is also a condenser in the
    supply circuit of the load device in addition to the inductance.

    258,    and indented subclass, for this subject matter where the source of
    supply current is pulsating and/or alternating.

    263,    for this subject matter where the load device is an auxiliary
    starting electrode discharge device, the auxiliary starting electrode
    circuit including an inductance or a surge generating means.

    276,    and indented subclasses and the subclasses specified in the notes
    to the definition of those subclasses, for systems under the class
    definition having a transformer in the supply circuit of the load device.

    283,    and indented subclasses, for this subject matter where the load
    device is supplied with pulsating and/or alternating current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    355-363, and the subclasses specified in the notes to the definition of
    those subclasses for miscellaneous reactor systems and for systems having
    an inductance for controlling the magnitude of the current and/or voltage
    in a single circuit.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for the structure of
    transformers and inductive reactors.


CLS 315/290
TXT Systems under subclass 289 provided with an electric circuit maker and
    breaker or interrupter in the circuit which includes the inductance.

    (1)     Note.  The circuit interrupter may be an electric switch or an
    electrolytic device or other means for making and breaking the inductance
    circuit.

    (2)     Note.  In many of the systems in this subclass, the source of
    current supply, the inductance, and the load device, which may be a
    discharge device, are connected in electrical series relation when the load
    device is operating, and the circuit interrupter is connected so as to
    shunt the load device so that the source of supply and the inductance are
    connected in electrical series relation when the load device is not in
    operative condition whereby current may flow through the inductance, the
    circuit interrupter when opened or placed in its second closed position
    then placing the load device in series with the inductance so that the high
    potential surge generated by the inductance when the circuit is interrupted
    is impressed upon the load device to initiate operation of the load device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for this subject matter where the discharge device is of the type
    which has a thermionic cathode designed to be heated by the passage of
    current through it, or which has an indirectly heated cathode, the system
    including means to supply heating current to the cathode or cathode heater
    and to delay the application of discharge potential to the electrodes until
    the cathode has reached its operating temperature, the system also
    including means to apply a surge of potential to the discharge electrodes
    when the discharge electrodes when the discharge potential is applied to
    the electrodes.

    209,    and indented subclasses for systems having a periodic switch in the
    supply circuit of the load device, especially subclass 223 where a periodic
    switch and inductance are connected in the primary circuit of the load
    device current supply transformer.

    263,    for this subject matter where the load device is an auxiliary
    starting electrode discharge device and the inductance is connected in the
    auxiliary starting electrode circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 268+ for
    the structure of transformers and inductive reactors combined with a line
    switch.


CLS 315/291
TXT Systems under the class definition which include means to regulate the
    current and/or voltage supplied to the load device.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include systems wherein the load
    device is a space discharge device having a discharge control means, such
    as a control grid, electromagnet or auxiliary starting electrode, and the
    only means for regulating the discharge current is the discharge control
    means.  For such systems, see subclass 349 and indented subclasses of this
    class and the subclasses specified in the notes to the definition of those
    subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for devices which include a plurality of series connected discharge
    devices and an electrical circuit element, all of which are structurally
    combined in a single unitary device, one of the discharge devices and/or
    the circuit element forming means to regulate the flow of current to the
    other discharge device.

    71,     for miscellaneous discharge devices which have structurally
    combined therewith, so as to form a unitary device, an electrical impedance.

    106     and 107, wherein the discharge device in the system is provided
    with a thermionic cathode designed to be heated by the passage of current
    through it or an indirectly heated cathode, the system including means to
    supply the cathode or cathode heater circuit with current, the cathode or
    cathode heater circuit including voltage regulating means for the cathode
    or cathode heater circuit.

    116,    for systems where the load device is provided with electric heating
    means, the heater circuit including a regulator for the heating current.

    151,    for systems wherein the load device circuit includes a radiant
    energy responsive means (photocell), the load device irradiating the
    radiant energy responsive device and thereby regulating the current flow in
    the load device circuit.

    156,    wherein the supply circuit of the load device includes a discharge
    device to control the supply of current to the load device, the discharge
    device being controlled by radiant energy responsive means (photocell).

    158,    for miscellaneous systems wherein the regulating means for
    controlling the current flow to the load device is controlled by radiant
    energy responsive means (photocell).

    171,    for systems where there are plural sources of current supply for
    the load device, one of the supply circuits including a discharge device
    and/or rectifier for controlling the supply of current from one of the
    current sources to the load device.

    200,    for systems where there is an electric discharge device or
    rectifier in the supply circuit of the load device to control the flow of
    current to the load device.

    224,    for systems wherein the supply circuit for the load device includes
    a periodic switch and an impedance or current regulator.

    277,    for systems wherein the pulsating or alternating current is
    supplied to the load device and there are a plurality of transformers in
    the supply circuit, the transformers including means to regulate the supply
    of current to the load device.

    279,    for systems wherein pulsating or alternating current is supplied to
    the load device, a transformer being included in the supply circuit and a
    current regulating means being included in the primary circuit of the
    transformer.

    280,    for systems wherein pulsating or alternating current is supplied to
    the load device, a transformer being included in the supply circuit, the
    transformer being connected in the circuit so that it may be converted into
    an inductance.

    281,    for systems wherein pulsating or alternating current is supplied to
    the load device, a movable core and coil-type transformer being connected
    in the supply circuit of the load device.

    282,    for miscellaneous systems wherein pulsating and/or alternating
    current is supplied to the load device, a regulating transformer being
    included in the supply circuit.

    287,    for this subject matter wherein the regulator is a periodic-type
    current and/or voltage regulator.

    289,    for miscellaneous systems where there is an inductance in the
    supply circuit and see the notes to such subclass.

    349,    see  (1) "Note." above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 135, for systems provided with means to regulate the current or
    voltage supplied to discharge devices of the consumable electrode type.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    generator regulating systems, particularly subclasses 17+, for automatic
    generator regulating systems.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    220-354, for miscellaneous systems for controlling the magnitude of the
    current and/or voltage in a single circuit.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous distribution systems
    which include regulators.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for the structure of
    transformers and inductive reactors, including tap-change transformers and
    saturable reactors.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 68+ for mechanically variable
    electrical resistors, such as rheostats and potentiometers.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 291+ for
    the structure of variable condensors.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 74+ for current
    conversion systems having automatic voltage and/or current magnitude
    control; and subclass 149 for phase conversion systems having automatic
    voltage magnitude and/or phase control.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 91+, for X-ray
    tube systems provided with means for maintaining the discharge rate in the
    tube constant, and subclass 103 for X-ray tube systems which include a
    current or voltage regulating means.


CLS 315/292
TXT Systems under subclass 291 wherein the means for controlling the amount of
    impedance connected in the supply circuit of the load device is (1) a
    perforated card, sheet, or strip having the perforations arranged in a
    pattern so that the number and/or location of the perforations control the
    operation of the regulator operator means, for (2) a pattern member having
    a particular shape which cooperates with the regulator operating means to
    control the operation of the regulators, or (3) a keyboard consisting of a
    plurality of manually actuated keys, each of which controls the operation
    of the regulating means associated therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    316,    for other keyboard or pattern controlled switching systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses,
    for keyboard switches, and subclass 46, for pattern switches.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 38+
    for selectively controlled plural load circuits, including those controlled
    by a program or sequence determining means.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 168+ for selective
    electrically controlled visual display systems actuated by a keyboard.


CLS 315/293
TXT Systems under subclass 291, wherein (1) the supply circuit of the load
    device includes at least two impedances, means being provided for
    selectively connecting either of the two impedances in the supply circuit
    of the load device, or (2) the regulator in the supply circuit of the load
    device is designed to have its impedance varied over a range of values,
    means being provided to preselect the value of the impedance to be
    connected in the circuit and means being provided to effect a transition
    from one of the impedance values and to stop such transition at the
    preselected impedance value.

    (1)     Note.  The systems in this subclass are designed to energize the
    load device with current of one intensity and while the load device is
    energized to preselect the value of the impedance which is to be connected
    in the circuit for the subsequent energization of the load device.

    (2)     Note.  The systems in this subclass are often used to control stage
    and theater lights.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    292,    for preselectable regulator systems of the keyboard or pattern
    controlled type.

    314,    for plural load device systems which include preselectable
    switching means.


CLS 315/294
TXT Systems under subclass 291 which include means to regulate the current or
    voltage supplied to two or more of the load devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    292,    for this subject matter where the regulating means is controlled by
    a keyboard or pattern controlled mechanism.

    293,    for this subject matter where the system includes pre-selectable
    regulating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 31+
    for plural load circuit systems having regulators therefor.


CLS 315/295
TXT Systems under subclass 294 provided with means for selectively connecting
    at least one regulating means in the supply circuit of either of two load
    devices.


CLS 315/296
TXT Systems under subclass 294 having the regulating means connected in the
    circuit so that by varying the regulating means, the impedance in one of
    the load device circuits is decreased and the impedance in another load
    device circuit is increased.


CLS 315/297
TXT Systems under subclass 294, wherein the regulation of the current or
    potential supplied to the load device is automatically controlled in
    response to some condition.

    (1)     Note.  The condition controlling the regulation may be the current
    or potential of the load device circuit, some condition, such as the
    temperature, of the load device, or the temperature of the atmosphere in
    which the load device operates or any other condition affecting the
    operation of the load device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301,    for miscellaneous systems where there are a plurality of automatic
    regulators in the system.

    307,    and indented subclasses, for miscellaneous systems which include an
    automatic regulating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 30+ for the structure of transformers
    and inductive reactors which are designed to have their effective impedance
    varied in response to a condition.


CLS 315/298
TXT Systems under subclass 294, wherein two or more regulators are provided for
    regulating the current and/or voltage supplied to two or more of the load
    devices, each of these two regulators having a movable means to vary the
    effective impedance of the regulator in the load device circuit, the
    movable means of each of these regulators being mechanically connected to a
    common operating member.


CLS 315/299
TXT Systems under subclass 291, wherein the current or voltage supply to the
    load device is controlled by (1) two or more diverse type regulating means,
    or (2) two or more regulating means of the same or diverse type which are
    operated by separate operating means, or (3) two or more regulating means
    connected in the system in different ways so as to control the current
    and/or voltage by exercising different effects in the systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 31+
    for plural load circuit systems having regulators therefor.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    220-354 for miscellaneous regulators which may have diverse type regulating
    means.


CLS 315/300
TXT Systems under subclass 299, wherein one of the regulating means is a
    generator of current and means are provided for varying some characteristic
    of the generating means so as to vary the current or voltage output of the
    generating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302,    and indented subclasses, for other systems under subclass 291,
    provided with means for controlling the current generating means for
    regulating the current supplied to the load device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, appropriate subclasses, for
    miscellaneous regulation systems wherein the regulation is controlled by
    the current generating means.


CLS 315/301
TXT Systems under subclass 299 wherein two or more of the regulating means are
    designed to be controlled automatically in response to some condition.

    (1)     Note.  The condition controlling the operation of the regulating
    means may be the current or potential of the circuit of the load device,
    some condition of the load device such as its temperature, or the
    temperature of the atmosphere in which the load device is operating, or any
    other condition affecting the operation of the load device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    307,    and indented subclasses, for other systems under subclass 291
    provided with automatically controlled current regulating means.


CLS 315/302
TXT Systems under subclass 291 wherein regulation is secured by varying some
    characteristic of the current or voltage generator, or by varying the
    number of generators used to supply the current or voltage, so as to vary
    the current or voltage output of the generating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300,    for this subject matter where there are a plurality of regulating
    means in the system, one of the regulating means being a current generating
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, appropriate subclasses, for
    miscellaneous generator regulator systems.


CLS 315/303
TXT Systems under subclass 302, wherein the current or voltage is generated by
    a dynamoelectric machine, and means are provided for controlling the
    operation of the prime mover for the dynamoelectric machine so as to
    regulate the output of the dynamoelectric generator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     where the system is combined with vehicle structure, the generator
    being driven by the motor of the vehicle or some part of the vehicle which
    varies its speed due to variations in speed of the vehicle, such as a wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants, appropriate subclasses, for prime-mover
    dynamoelectric machines and the control means therefor which are of general
    application excepting when the prime mover is a dynamoelectric machine
    (electric motor).

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclasses 14+, for
    generator systems having combined control of generator and driving means
    and subclasses 38+, for generator systems having driving means control.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 102+, 150 for
    conversion systems and 174+, including dynamoelectric convertors.


CLS 315/304
TXT Systems under subclass 302 wherein the current or voltage generator is a
    dynamoelectric generator having a plurality of exciting fields.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclasses 63+, for
    generator systems wherein the generator control includes a plurality of
    field windings.


CLS 315/305
TXT Systems under subclass 304 wherein the generator is provided with three or
    more exciting fields.


CLS 315/306
TXT Systems under subclass 291 wherein the regulator is placed in shunt circuit
    to the load device so that part of the current from the source of current
    supply is diverted from the load device to the regulator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    and indented subclasses, for systems under the class definition
    provided with means for automatically completing a circuit in shunt to the
    load device when the load device becomes (1) inoperative through failure of
    some part, such as the filament where the load device is a lamp, or (2)
    when the supply voltage becomes either too high or too low for the proper
    operation of the device.  The shunt circuit is usually completed in the
    systems in subclass 119 and indented subclasses by the closing of an
    electric switch.

    207,    for systems under the class definition having a discharge device
    connected in shunt to the load device, the discharge device being adapted
    to regulate the current flow to the load device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    220-233, for systems for controlling the magnitude of the current and/or
    voltage in a single circuit by means of an impedance connected in shunt
    with the circuit.


CLS 315/307
TXT Systems under subclass 291 wherein the regulation of the current or
    potential supplied to the load device is automatically controlled in
    response to some condition.

    (1)     Note.  The conditions controlling the regulation may be the current
    or potential of the load device circuit, some condition of the load device
    such as the temperature of the load device, or the temperature of the
    atmosphere in which the load device is operating, or any other condition
    affecting the operation of the load device.

    (2)     Note.  See the notes to subclass 291.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278,    for this subject matter where the supply circuit of the load device
    includes a three or more coil-type transformer for automatically regulating
    the supply of current to the load device.

    291,    see note (2) above.

    297,    for this subject matter where there are a plurality of load devices
    in the system.

    301,    for this subject matter where there are a plurality of automatic
    regulators in the system.

    302,    and indented subclasses, for this subject matter where the
    automatic regulators effect the operation of the supply current generating
    means.

    306,    for this subject matter where the automatic regulating means is
    connected in shunt relation to the load device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 31+
    for plural load circuit systems having means for automatically controlling
    the current or power therein.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclasses 17+, for
    automatic generator regulation systems of general application.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    234-303, for systems for controlling the magnitude of the current and/or
    voltage in a single circuit by means of an automatically controlled
    impedance.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 30+ for the structure of transformers
    and inductive reactors which are designed to have their effective impedance
    varied in response to a condition.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 74+ for current
    conversion systems having automatic voltage and/or current magnitude
    control; and subclass 149 for phase conversion systems having automatic
    voltage magnitude and/or phase control.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 102+, for electric
    arc furnace systems provided with current and/or voltage regulating means.


CLS 315/308
TXT Systems under subclass 307 wherein the regulating means is responsive to
    two or more conditions; such as, the current and the voltage of the
    circuit, or a condition of the load device and the current or voltage of
    the circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301,    for systems under subclass 291, provided with a plurality of
    automatically operated regulators in the supply circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    234-303, for automatically controlled systems for controlling the magnitude
    of the current and/or voltage in a single circuit by means of an impedance
    which is controlled in response to a plurality of conditions.


CLS 315/309
TXT Systems under subclass 307, wherein the regulating means is responsive to a
    thermal condition.

    (1)     Note.  The thermal condition may be, for example, (1) the heat
    generated by the current in the load device circuit flowing through an
    impedance, or (2) the heat generated by the load device, or (3) the
    temperature of the atmosphere in which the load device is operating.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes ballast resistance devices placed in
    the circuit of the load device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 236
    and 245, for automatically controlled systems for controlling the magnitude
    of the current and/or voltage in a single circuit by means of an impedance
    which is responsive to a thermal condition.


CLS 315/310
TXT Systems under subclass 307 wherein the system includes a current limiting
    impedance and means to open and close a low impedance shunt circuit about
    the current limiting impedance, the shunt circuit controlling means being
    operated automatically in response to some condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    296-298, for systems having a resistor which may be short circuited for
    controlling the magnitude of the current and/or voltage in a single circuit.


CLS 315/311
TXT Systems under subclass 307 wherein the regulating means is a device
    designed to have its impedance varied automatically in response to some
    condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply, or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    234-303, for systems having an automatically controlled impedance for
    controlling the magnitude of the current and/or voltage in a single circuit.


CLS 315/312
TXT Systems under the class definition having a plurality of load devices
    connected in the system.

    (1)     Note.  Where the claimed system includes a plurality of lamps or
    discharge devices and one is connected in the circuit so as to control or
    modify the current flow to the other which is the ultimate load device in
    the system, or where a lamp or discharge device is connected in the control
    circuit of the discharge control discharge device where the load device is
    a discharge control discharge device, the patent is classified as a plural
    load device system where the controlling and/or modifying device is a lamp
    or discharge device whose operation depends upon gas or vapor ionization
    even though the system is claimed as having only one ultimate load device.
    Where the controlling and/or modifying device is claimed, merely as a
    discharge device, even though it is disclosed as a gaseous ionization
    discharge device, the controlling and/or modifying device is not considered
    to be a load device for the purpose of classification.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     and indented subclasses, for devices which include a plurality of
    discharge device units and an electrical circuit element which are all
    structurally combined in a unitary device.

    46,     for devices which include an electric lamp of the filament type and
    a discharge device unit structurally combined in a unitary device, the lamp
    being connected in shunt to the discharge electrodes.

    49,     for devices which include an electric lamp of the filament type and
    a discharge device unit structurally combined in a unitary device, the lamp
    being connected in series relation to the discharge electrodes.

    64,     and indented subclasses, for multiple filament lamps structurally
    combined with a circuit element.

    88,     for systems with means to automatically substitute another load
    device when the operating load device fails.

    95,     for plural discharge device load device systems, the discharge
    devices having heatable cathodes, and the system including means to supply
    current to the cathodes or cathode heaters.

    113,    and indented subclass, for plural load device systems provided with
    means for modifying the temperature of the load devices.

    121,    and indented subclass, for plural load device systems with
    automatically operating means to close a shunt circuit about or to open the
    circuit of one or more of the load devices.

    130,    for plural load device systems provided with a signal indicator or
    alarm.

    137,    and indented subclasses, for polyphase alternating current plural
    load device systems.

    152,    and indented subclasses, for plural load device systems which
    include a radiant energy sensitive device (photocell).

    161,    and indented subclasses, for plural load device systems wherein
    there are a plurality of sources of current supply for the load devices.

    177,    where there is one load device in the secondary of the supply
    transformer and another in the primary circuit.

    178,    and indented subclasses, for plural load device systems wherein two
    or more of the load devices are of the diverse types.

    184,    for systems wherein the load devices are connected between
    different pairs of paired supply conductors.

    185,    for plural electrical series connected load devices.

    195,    and indented subclasses, for plural discharge control discharge
    device loads with phase shifting means in the discharge control circuits.

    201,    for plural load device systems with a discharge device or rectifier
    in the supply circuit of at least one of the load devices.

    210,    and indented subclasses, for plural load device systems with a
    periodic switch in the supply circuit of at least one of the load devices.

    228,    and indented subclasses, for plural load device systems with a
    condenser in the circuit of at least one of the load devices.

    250,    and indented subclasses, for plural load device systems supplied
    with alternating or pulsating current.

    288,    for three or more wire systems which include a plurality of load
    devices.

    292,    293, and subclass 294, and indented subclasses, for plural load
    device systems with current or voltage regulating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 7, and indented subclass, for systems which include a plurality of
    consumable electrode discharge devices, or a consumable electrode discharge
    device and a lamp or discharge device of another type.


CLS 315/313
TXT Systems under subclass 312 having an electrical circuit maker and breaker
    in the current supply circuit to the load device for selectively
    controlling the supply of current to the load devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     and indented subclasses, for multiple filament lamps which are
    structurally combined with an electric switch.

    121,    for this subject matter where the switch means is an automatic
    shunt and/or cutout.

    154,    for this subject matter where there is a switch means connected in
    the circuit to select the load device to be energized, the switch means
    being controlled by a radiant energy sensitive device (photocell).

    184,    for this subject matter where each side of the supply circuit
    includes a plurality of pairs of conductors, three or more load devices,
    each being connected to a different pair of the conductors.

    186,    for this subject matter where there are a plurality of series
    connected load devices, a periodic switch being included in the supply
    circuit.

    191,    for this subject matter where there are a plurality of series
    connected load devices, the system including switch means so the load
    devices may be converted from series connected to parallel connected.

    193,    for this subject matter where there is a plurality of series
    connected load devices, the system including switching means.

    210,    for this subject matter where there is a periodic switch which
    periodically connects different ones of the load devices to the source of
    current supply in timed sequence.

    362,    and the subclasses specified in the notes to the definition of that
    subclass for other systems under the class definition provided with an
    electric switch in the supply circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 1+, subclasses 23+, subclasses 37 and 46 for multiple
    circuit control electric switches.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 38+
    for plural load circuit systems having means for selectively connecting
    said load circuits.

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 48, 60, 72, 88, and 106+ for electromagnetically
    actuated multiple circuit control switches.


CLS 315/314
TXT Systems under subclass 313 wherein the system includes a switching system
    for controlling the connection of the load devices to the source of supply,
    the switching system including a primary or master switch and a secondary
    switch, the primary and the secondary switch each having two circuit
    closing positions, the source of supply being adapted to be connected to
    the primary switching means, the primary switch selectively closing the
    circuit to either the secondary switch or another circuit, the secondary
    switch means selectively closing either of two circuits so as to connect
    either of these two circuits to the source of supply through the primary
    and secondary switches, the circuits closed by the primary and the
    secondary switches in each of their operated positions serving to close the
    circuit from the source of supply to at least one of the load devices, for
    example:



    (1)     Note.  The circuits closed by the primary and secondary switch may
    be the circuit through which current flows to the load device, or may be
    the circuits supplying current to electrically controlled or operated
    switches, connected in the load device circuits, the electrically
    controlled or operated switch connecting the load devices directly to the
    source of supply for the load devices.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes systems wherein there are only two
    load devices, a different one of the load devices being energized in each
    of the circuit closing positions of the secondary switch and one of the
    load devices being energized when the primary switch is in the circuit
    closing switch positions which does not include the secondary switch.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass includes systems wherein there are three or
    more load devices, a different one of two of the load devices being
    energized in each of the circuit closing positions of the secondary switch
    positions and the third load device being energized when the primary switch
    is in the circuit closing position which does not include the secondary
    switch.

    (4)     Note.  The systems in this subclass are designed to permit the
    selection of the load device to be energized from the group of load devices
    controlled by the secondary switch means prior to the closing of the
    circuit to the secondary switch means by the primary switch means.

    (5)     Note.  The systems in this subclass are often used to control stage
    and theater lights.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    293,    for pre-selectable regulating systems.

    316,    for switching systems under subclass 313 wherein the switching
    means includes a keyboard or pattern (perforated sheet).

    317,    and indented subclasses, for other systems under subclass 313
    wherein there are three or more load devices.

    320,    and indented subclass, for other systems under subclass 313 having
    a plurality of switches in the supply circuit.

    322,    for other systems under subclass 313 provided with an alternate
    circuit closing switch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 38+
    for plural load circuit systems having means for selectively connecting
    said load circuits.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 1+ for visual display systems
    with preselectable switching systems included for providing selective
    electrical control of the display.


CLS 315/315
TXT Systems under subclass 314 wherein the circuit controlling switches for
    closing the circuit from the source of supply to the load device circuits
    are electrically controlled or operated switches, the pre-selectable
    switches being connected in the circuit of the electrically controlled or
    operated load device circuit switches and serving to select the electrical
    switch controller or operator to be energized, and thereby to select the
    load device circuits which are to be energized.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 38+
    for switching systems of general application for controlling two or more
    load device circuits.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ for
    relay switching systems of general application.


CLS 315/316
TXT Systems under subclass 313 wherein the switch for controlling the load
    device circuits is (1) a switch wherein the contacts are controlled by
    either a perforated card, sheet, or strip, having the perforations arranged
    as a pattern so that the number and/or the location of the perforations
    determine which of the switch contacts are to be operated or (2) a pattern
    member having a particular shape which cooperates with the switch contacts
    to determine which of the switch contacts are to be operated, or (3) a
    switch which is provided with a keyboard consisting of a plurality of
    manually actuated keys, each of which controls the operation of the switch
    contacts associated therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    292,    for keyboard operated or pattern controlled regulating systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses,
    for keyboard operated switches and subclass 46, for pattern sheet
    controlled switches.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 168+ for selective
    electrically controlled visual display systems actuated by a keyboard.


CLS 315/317
TXT Systems under subclass 313 having three or more load device circuits.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for multiple filament lamps having three or more filaments and
    having an electric switch structurally combined therewith so as to form a
    unitary device.

    184,    for this subject matter where each side of the supply circuit
    includes a plurality of conductors, there being three or more load devices,
    each of the load devices being connected to a different pair of the supply
    conductors.

    211,    for this subject matter where there is a periodic switch which
    periodically connects different ones of the load devices to the source of
    current supply in timed sequence.

    314,    for this subject matter where the switch means is a preselectable
    switching system.

    316,    for this subject matter where the switch means is operated by
    keyboard means or is controlled by a pattern.


CLS 315/318
TXT Systems under subclass 317 wherein the switch means is provided with at
    least two circuit closing positions, the circuit being completed from the
    source of supply to a group consisting of two or more load devices in each
    of the circuit closing positions, each of the groups including a load
    device not included by the other groups and at least one load device which
    is included by at least one other group.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    314,    and indented subclass, where the system is a preselectable
    switching system.


CLS 315/319
TXT Systems under subclass 318 wherein the switch means is provided with at
    least four different circuit closing positions, the switch means being
    connected in the circuit so as to complete the circuit from the source of
    supply to a group of load device circuits in each of its circuit closing
    positions, each of the groups containing a different combination of load
    devices from that of each of the other groups.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    314,    and indented subclass, where the system includes preselectable
    switching means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 1+ for visual display systems
    with switching means included for providing selective electrical control of
    the display.


CLS 315/320
TXT Systems under subclass 313 having two or more switches connected in the
    circuit between the source of supply and the load devices.

    (1)     Note.  The system may have a switch in the circuit between each
    load device and the source of supply or there may be a plurality of
    switches in the circuit between the source of supply and one or more of the
    load devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    314,    and indented subclass, where the system includes preselectable
    switch means.


CLS 315/321
TXT Systems under subclass 320 wherein there is a switch in each of at least
    two load device circuits, and a master switch is connected in the system so
    as to be capable of closing the circuit from the source of supply to these
    two load devices irrespective of the open or closed position of any other
    switches in the load device circuits.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    361,    for systems under the class definition provided with a load device
    and two control means located at different places in the supply circuit for
    controlling the supply of current to the load device, each of the control
    means (switch) being designed to perform the same control function
    irrespective of the condition of operation of the other control device
    (i.e., open and close the circuit to the source of supply, so called lazy
    man system).


CLS 315/322
TXT Systems under subclass 313 which include at least two load device circuits
    and an electric switch having two or more contacts each of which is
    connected to a different one of the load device circuits, the cooperating
    contact means being arranged to close the circuit from the source of supply
    to one of the load devices to the exclusion of the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for multiple filament load devices which have an electric switch
    structurally combined therewith, the switch being designed to close the
    circuit to one of the filaments to the exclusion of another.

    83,     for this subject matter where the load devices are claimed as being
    vehicle (automobile) headlight systems.

    211,    and indented subclasses, for this subject matter where the system
    includes a periodic distributor type switch which periodically connects
    different ones of the load devices to the source of current supply in timed
    sequence.

    317,    for systems under subclass 313 wherein the system includes a switch
    for closing the circuit to three or more load device circuits in
    progressive order.

    320,    and indented subclass, for systems under subclass 313 wherein two
    or more switches are provided so that any one of two or more load devices
    may be supplied with current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 1+, 23+, 37
    for multiple circuit control and multiple contact electric switches.

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 106+ for electromagnetically actuated switches
    of the multiple contact type.


CLS 315/323
TXT Systems under subclass 312 provided with means to start the load devices
    into operation one after another in sequence.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     and indented subclasses for devices which include a filament lamp
    and a discharge device structurally united in a unitary structure, the
    filament being connected in shunt to the discharge electrode, and the
    device being designed so that the filament becomes luminous before the
    electric discharge is established between the discharge electrodes.

    65,     for multiple filament load devices which have an automatically
    operating circuit element, such as a switch, structurally combined with the
    load device so as to form a unitary device, the automatically operating
    means substituting a second filament for the first operated filament when
    the first operated filament fails to operate properly.

    87,     and subclass 88 and indented subclasses, for systems in which a
    load device is operated until it fails to operate properly when
    automatically operated means substitute another load device for the first
    operated load device.

    137,    and indented subclasses, for systems having a plurality of load
    devices supplied with polyphase alternating current, the sequence of
    operation being determined by the phases of the alternating current.

    195,    where the load devices are discharge control discharge devices, and
    the system includes phase shifting means for controlling the discharge
    control means to thereby determine the sequence of operation.

    211,    and indented subclasses, where the system includes a distributor
    type periodic switch.

    229,    where a commutating condenser is connected to either the cathodes
    or the anodes of a plurality of discharge device loads so as to cause them
    to operate alternately.

    250,    and indented subclasses where the current supplied to a plurality
    of load devices is alternating current.

    294,    and indented subclasses where the sequential operation is
    controlled by regulating means.

    313,    and indented subclasses, where the sequential operation is
    controlled by electric switch means.


CLS 315/324
TXT Systems under subclass 312 having two or more discharge device loads in the
    system.

    (1)     Note.  Where a single lamp or a single discharge device is the
    ultimate load device, and the system includes an additional lamp and/or
    discharge device in the circuit which is connected in the circuit so as to
    control and/or modify the current and/or potential supplied to such single
    ultimate load device, the patent is classified as a plural load device
    system if (a) the controlling and/or modifying device is a lamp, or (b) the
    controlling and/or modifying device is limited in the claims to being a gas
    or vapor discharge device.  Conversely, such a system is not classified as
    a plural load device system where the controlling and/or modifying device
    is claimed broadly as a discharge device even though it is disclosed as a
    gas or vapor discharge device.

            The controlling and/or modifying device may be connected in the
    control circuit of the discharge device where the ultimate load device is a
    discharge control discharge device, and the same basis of classification is
    used as is set forth above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35+,    for devices which include a plurality of discharge devices and an
    electrical circuit element which are structurally combined in a unitary
    device.

    86+,    where the system includes means to automatically substitute another
    source of supply for the discharge devices when the first operated source
    fails to operate properly.

    88,     and indented subclasses, where the system includes means to
    automatically substitute another discharge device when the first operated
    discharge device fails to operate properly.

    95,     and indented subclasses, where the discharge devices are provided
    with resistance heated cathodes or indirectly heated cathodes, and the
    system includes means to supply current to the cathodes or the cathode
    heaters.

    113,    and indented subclass, where the discharge devices are provided
    with temperature modifying means.

    121,    and indented subclass, for systems provided with means to complete
    a shunt circuit about or to open the circuit of one of the discharge
    devices when the discharge device fails to operate properly.

    130,    and indented subclasses, for systems provided with a signal,
    indicator, or alarm for at least one of the discharge devices.

    137,    and indented subclasses, for polyphase alternating current systems
    with discharge device load devices.

    152,    and indented subclasses, where the system includes a radiant energy
    sensitive device (photocell).

    161,    and indented subclasses, where the system includes a plurality of
    sources of current supply for the discharge devices.

    177,    where the system includes a discharge device load in the secondary
    circuit and another discharge device load in the primary circuit of a
    current supply transformer.

    180,    and indented subclass, for plural series connected diverse type
    discharge device load devices.

    182,    and indented subclass, for plural diverse type discharge device
    load device systems.

    189,    and indented subclass, for plural series connected discharge device
    load devices.

    195,    and indented subclasses, for plural discharge control discharge
    device, load device systems which are provided with phase shifting means in
    the control circuits of the discharge control means.

    201,    where the system includes an electric space discharge device or
    rectifier in the supply circuit.

    228,    and indented subclasses, where the system includes a condenser in
    the supply circuit.

    250,    and indented subclasses, where the source of supply is alternating
    current.

    323,    where the system includes means to start the discharge devices into
    operation one after another in sequence.

    326,    and indented subclasses, for other systems provided with a single
    discharge device load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 7, and indented subclass, for systems which include a plurality of
    consumable electrode discharge devices.


CLS 315/325
TXT Systems under subclass 324 wherein the load devices are discharge devices
    which are provided with a discharge controlling means.

    (1)     Note.  The discharge controlling means may be a grid electrode, an
    electromagnet for influencing the space discharge, an auxiliary starting
    electrode or other means for controlling the space discharge in the
    discharge device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     and indented subclasses, for devices which include a plurality of
    discharge control discharge device load devices and a circuit element, all
    of which are structurally combined in a single unitary device.

    146,    where the source of supply is polyphase alternating current.

    195,    where the control circuit includes phase shifting means for
    shifting the phase of the control current and/or voltage with respect to
    the cathode-anode current.

    230,    where there is a condenser in the supply circuit.

    252,    where the supply current for the discharge device is alternating
    current.

    349,    and indented subclasses, and the subclasses referred to in the
    notes to the definition of those subclasses for systems wherein the single
    load device is a discharge control discharge device.


CLS 315/326
TXT Systems under the class definition wherein the load device is a discharge
    device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for cathode-ray discharge devices which have an electrical circuit
    element structurally combined therewith so as to form a unitary device.

    34,     for discharge devices which have an antenna structurally combined
    therewith so as to form a unitary device.

    39,     for discharge devices which have a waveguide, coaxial cable or
    resonant parallel wire transmission line structurally combined therewith so
    as to form a unitary device.

    40,     for discharge devices having an electrode formed as an inductive
    impedance.


    46,     for devices which include a discharge device and a filament lamp
    which are structurally combined in a single unitary device, the filament
    being connected in shunt with the discharge electrodes.

    49,     for devices which include a discharge device and a filament lamp
    which are structurally combined in a single unitary device, the filament
    being connected in series relation with respect to the discharge electrodes.

    50,     for discharge devices which are provided with temperature modifying
    means, the temperature modifying means being formed so as to act as a
    circuit impedance or combined with a circuit impedance, the discharge
    device, temperature modifying means, and the impedance all being
    structurally combined in a single unitary device.

    51,     for discharge devices which have a plurality of impedances
    structurally combined therewith so as to form a unitary device.

    55,     for discharge devices which have an electric generator or
    piezoelectric device structurally combined with the discharge device so as
    to form a unitary device.

    56,     for miscellaneous discharge devices which have an electric circuit
    element structurally combined therewith so as to form a unitary device.

    85,     where the discharge device is provided with radiation preventing or
    shielding means.

    86,     and indented subclass, for systems for automatically substituting
    another source of supply for the discharge device when the first operated
    source of supply fails to operate.

    94,     and indented subclasses, for discharge devices with resistance type
    thermionic cathodes or indirectly heated cathodes and the source of current
    supply for the cathode or cathode heater.

    108,    and indented subclasses, where the discharge device is of the
    confined gas or vapor type and is provided with pressure regulating means.

    111.01, where the discharge device includes means to supply a fluent
    material to the discharge space.

    112,    and indented subclasses, where the discharge device includes
    temperature modifying means.

    119,    and indented subclasses, where the system includes automatic means
    to open the circuit of or to complete a shunt circuit about the discharge
    device when it fails to operate properly.

    129,    and indented subclasses, where the system includes a signal,
    indicator, or alarm.

    137,    and indented subclasses, where the source of supply current is
    polyphase current.

    149,    and indented subclasses, where the circuit includes a radiant
    energy ray sensitive device (photocell).

    160,    and indented subclasses, where the system is provided with a
    plurality of sources of current supply for the discharge device.

    178,    and indented subclasses, where the system includes a plurality of
    diverse type load devices, one of the load devices being a discharge device.

    194,    and indented subclasses, where the load device has discharge
    control means and the control circuit includes phase shifting means to
    shift the phase of the control current or voltage with respect to the
    cathode-anode current.

    200,    and indented subclasses, where there is a discharge device or
    rectifier in the supply circuit.

    209,    and indented subclasses, where there is a periodic switch in the
    supply circuit.

    227,    and indented subclasses, where there is a condenser in the supply
    circuit.

    246,    and indented subclasses where the source of supply current is
    pulsating or alternating current.

    291,    and indented subclasses, where the system includes a current and/or
    voltage regulator.

    324,    and indented subclass, and the subclasses referred to in the notes
    to the definitions of those subclasses, for systems provided with a
    plurality of discharge device loads.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses for the
    structure of discharge devices, per se.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    appropriate subclasses, for systems wherein the load device is an electric
    space discharge device of the consumable electrode type (such as carbon arc
    lamps, et cetera).

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 227
    and 291 for electronic tube regulators. See section VI, B, of the class
    definition of Class 323.


CLS 315/327
TXT Systems under subclass 326 wherein the discharge device is of the type
    wherein the discharge between the electrodes is initiated by bringing the
    electrodes into physical contact with each other and then separating the
    electrodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263,    and subclass 289, and indented subclass, for systems provided with
    an inductance or a surge generator in the circuit of the electrodes and
    designed to impress a high potential surge on the electrodes when the
    electrodes are separated from each other, after having been placed in
    physical contact.

    291,    and indented subclasses, for systems wherein means are provided for
    regulating the current in the supply circuit when the electrodes are placed
    in physical contact with each other.

    357,    for other movable electrode discharge device systems not of the
    discharge drawing type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 146+ for discharge
    devices, per se, which are provided with movable electrodes (other than
    mere liquid electrodes) which may be brought into contact with each other,
    and subclasses 163+ for liquid electrode discharge devices (e.g., mercury
    arc lamps and rectifiers).

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    appropriate subclasses, for discharge devices of the consumable electrode
    type wherein the discharge is initiated by bringing the electrodes into
    physical contact with each other and then separating the electrodes, the
    discharge device being provided with means for feeding the electrodes
    together to compensate for the consumption of the electrode material during
    the discharge, and the circuits therefor.  Class 314, Electric Lamp and
    Discharge Devices:  Consumable Electrodes, includes carbon arc lamps and
    the circuits therefor.


CLS 315/328
TXT Systems under subclass 327 wherein the discharge device is mounted so that
    it can be tilted, and one of the electrodes is either a liquid or movably
    mounted so that when the discharge device is tilted the electrodes are
    brought into physical contact with each other, and when the device is
    restored to its operating position, the discharge is drawn between the
    electrodes.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes patents wherein the only significant
    support structure for the discharge device claimed is that which is
    provided so that the discharge device may be tilted for starting.  Where
    more of the discharge device support structure is claimed than that
    necessary for mounting the discharge device so that it can be tilted during
    starting, the patent is excluded from this subclass even though the system
    is claimed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 49, for miscellaneous
    discharge devices having means for supporting the discharge device so that
    it may be tilted for starting.

    362,    Illumination, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 382+
    for electric light supports.


CLS 315/329
TXT Systems under subclass 328 wherein the means for tilting the discharge
    device is controlled by electrical means.


CLS 315/330
TXT Systems under subclass 327 wherein the electric discharge device is
    provided with at least one principal anode and a principal cathode and an
    auxiliary discharge electrode with the auxiliary electrode mounted so as to
    physically contact one of the principal electrodes, at least; during the
    starting period of the discharge device, the auxiliary electrode being
    arranged in the circuit so that the discharge is initiated between the
    auxiliary electrode and one of the principal electrodes, the auxiliary
    discharge conditioning the discharge space between the principal electrodes
    so that a discharge between the principal electrodes can be established.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168,    for this subject matter where the system includes a different type
    of current supply means for the auxiliary starting electrode from the type
    of current supply for the principal electrodes.

    194,    and indented subclasses, for this subject matter where the system
    includes means to shift the phase of the pulsating and/or alternating
    current in the auxiliary electrode circuit with respect to the phase of the
    current in the cathode-anode circuit of the load device.

    203,    for this subject matter where there is a discharge device or
    rectifier in the auxiliary electrode circuit.

    234,    for this subject matter where there is a condenser in the auxiliary
    electrode circuit.

    261,    and indented subclasses, for this subject matter where the
    discharge device is supplied with pulsating or alternating current.

    335,    and indented subclass, and the subclasses referred to in the notes
    to the definitions of those subclasses, for other systems under the class
    definition wherein the discharge device load device is provided with an
    auxiliary starting electrode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 146+ for discharge
    devices, per se, which have an auxiliary starting electrode of the
    discharge drawing type where the auxiliary starting electrode is movable
    and subclasses 170+ for discharge devices, per se, which have a liquid
    electrode and an auxiliary starting electrode of the discharge drawing type.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 34, for consumable electrode discharge devices (arc lamps) having
    an auxiliary discharge drawing starting electrode and the circuit therefor.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 227
    and 291 for electronic tube regulators. See section VI, B, of the class
    definition of Class 323.


CLS 315/331
TXT Systems under subclass 330 wherein the auxiliary starting electrode of the
    discharge device is mounted so as to be movable into physical contact with
    one of the principal electrodes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 146+ for discharge
    devices, per se, which are provided with a movable discharge drawing
    auxiliary starting electrode.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 34, for consumable electrode discharge devices (carbon arc lamps)
    having a movable auxiliary discharge drawing starting electrode and the
    circuit therefor.


CLS 315/332
TXT Systems under subclass 331 provided with electrically operated means for
    moving the auxiliary electrode with respect to the principal electrode, and
    having an automatically operated electric switch for controlling the
    circuit of the electrically operated auxiliary electrode moving means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 146+ for discharge
    devices, per se, which have a movable discharge drawing auxiliary starting
    electrode where the operating means for moving the auxiliary electrode is
    an electrical means.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 34, for discharge devices of the consumable electrode type (carbon
    arc lamps, et cetera) having an auxiliary discharge drawing starting
    electrode and provided with an automatically operated switch for
    controlling the circuit of the auxiliary electrode moving means.


CLS 315/333
TXT Systems under subclass 327 provided with electrically operated means for
    moving the electrodes into physical contact with each other and for
    separating the electrode and having the automatically operated means for
    opening the circuit of the electrically operated electrode moving mechanism
    when the space discharge is initiated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332,    where the discharge device is provided with a movable auxiliary
    starting electrode, the electrode moving mechanism circuit including an
    automatically operated switch for controlling the operation of the
    electrode moving mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 34, 35, 58, 61, 62, 63, 64,
    subclass 68 and indented subclasses, and subclass 114 and indented
    subclasses, for electric discharge devices of the consumable electrode type
    (carbon arc lamp, et cetera) and the systems therefor where the discharge
    device is provided with electrically operated means for bringing the
    electrodes into contact with each other and for separating the electrodes
    and having automatically operated means for opening the circuit of the
    electrically operated electrode moving mechanism when the discharge is
    initiated.


CLS 315/334
TXT Systems under subclass 326 wherein the discharge device is provided with
    two or more cathodes and/or two or more anodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     where the discharge device has structurally combined therewith an
    inductance which is connected between either a plurality of anodes, or a
    plurality of cathodes.

    60,     where the discharge device includes an auxiliary starting electrode
    and an impedance is structurally combined with the discharge device
    structure and connected to the auxiliary starting electrode.

    84.61,  for plural cathode or anode tubes utilized in storing systems.

    109,    where the discharge device is provided with an auxiliary electrode,
    the auxiliary electrode being included in a circuit which controls the
    operation of a gas or vapor replenishing means for the discharge device.

    124,    where the discharge device includes an auxiliary electrode which
    controls the operation of a shunt circuit closing means or a cutout means
    for isolating the discharge device from the supply source when the
    discharge fails to operate properly.

    145,    and subclass 147 and indented subclasses, where the discharge
    device is supplied with polyphase alternating current.

    167,    and indented subclasses, where there are a plurality of sources of
    current supply for the discharge device.

    202,    and indented subclasses, where the supply circuit includes an
    electric space discharge device.

    233,    and indented subclasses, where the supply circuit includes a
    condenser.

    260,    and indented subclasses, where the source of supply is a pulsating
    and/or alternating current.

    330,    and indented subclasses, where the discharge device is provided
    with an auxiliary starting electrode which is brought into contact with one
    of the principal electrodes to initiate the discharge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 306+ and the
    subclasses specified in the Notes thereto for the structure of discharge
    devices which have a plurality of cathodes or a plurality of anodes.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 36 and indented subclasses, for consumable electrode discharge
    devices provided with a plurality of cathodes, or anodes, and the systems
    therefor.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 100 for counters using multicathode gas
    discharge tubes.


CLS 315/335
TXT Systems under subclass 334 wherein the discharge device is provided with at
    least one principal anode and at least one principal cathode and an
    auxiliary discharge electrode with the auxiliary electrode connected in the
    circuit so that the discharge is initiated between the auxiliary electrode
    and one of the principal electrodes, the auxiliary discharge conditioning
    the discharge space between the principal electrodes so that a discharge
    between the principal electrodes can be established.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     where the discharge device is structurally combined with a circuit
    impedance which is connected between the auxiliary starting and one of the
    principal electrodes.

    168,    where the auxiliary starting electrode is supplied with current
    from a different source of current than that which supplies the current to
    the principal electrodes.

    194,    and indented subclasses, where the auxiliary starting electrode is
    used as a discharge control electrode, and the auxiliary starting electrode
    circuit includes phase shifting means to shift the phase of the current in
    the auxiliary electrode circuit with respect to the current in the
    principal electrode circuit.

    203,    and indented subclass, where the auxiliary starting electrode
    circuit includes a discharge device or rectifier.

    234,    where the auxiliary starting electrode circuit includes a condenser.

    261,    and indented subclasses, where the discharge device is supplied
    with pulsating or alternating current.

    330,    and indented subclasses, where the auxiliary starting electrode is
    designed to physically contact one of the principal electrodes to initiate
    the discharge.

    337,    for systems wherein one or more of the plural cathodes or of the
    plural anodes has a potential impressed thereon which is of a different
    magnitude from the potential impressed upon another electrode of the same
    type.

    349,    and indented subclasses, for other systems provided with discharge
    control means for controlling the initiation of the discharge in the
    discharge device. These subclasses include systems wherein the discharge
    device is provided with an auxiliary electrode placed adjacent one of the
    principal electrodes, usually the cathode, and having the auxiliary
    electrode connected to a source of potential so that an electrostatic field
    is created near the principal electrode to facilitate initiating the
    discharge, the electrostatic electrode being arranged with respect to the
    principal electrode so that there is no flow of discharge current to the
    electrostatic electrode.  In such systems, the discharge electrodes are
    usually enclosed in a vitreous envelope, and the auxiliary control
    electrode is placed on the outside of the envelope near the cathode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 592+, 594, 595+,
    and 601+, for discharge devices which are provided with an envelope
    containing an atmosphere of gas or vapor and which have an atmosphere of
    gas or vapor and which have an auxiliary starting electrode, and subclasses
    306+ and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto for other discharge
    devices which have an auxiliary starting electrode.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 34, for consumable electrode discharge device systems, the
    consumable electrode discharge device being provided with an auxiliary
    starting electrode.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 227
    and 291 for electronic tube regulators. See section VI, B, of the class
    definition of Class 323.


CLS 315/336
TXT Systems under subclass 335 wherein the discharge device is provided with
    two or more starting electrodes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 599, 600, for
    discharge devices, per se, which have an envelope containing a gas or vapor
    and a plurality of auxiliary starting electrodes, and subclass 308 and the
    subclasses specified in the Notes thereto for other discharge devices which
    have a plurality of auxiliary starting electrodes.


CLS 315/337
TXT Systems under subclass 334 having the source of current supply connected to
    two or more similar electrodes, such as two or more anodes, the system
    including means to apply a different potential to one of the electrodes
    from that applied to another of the electrodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    for systems which include two or more sources of current supply and
    a plural cathode and/or anode discharge device load, one of the sources of
    current supply being connected to one of the similar electrodes, such as,
    an anode, and the other source of current supply being connected to the
    other similar electrode, such as the other anode; note especially
    subclasses 168, and 169.1+, where the two sources of current supply are of
    diverse character.

    168,    see the reference to subclass 167. 169.1, see the reference to
    subclass 167. 335, and the subclasses referred to in the notes to the
    definition of that subclass where one of the electrodes is an auxiliary
    starting electrode.


CLS 315/338
TXT Systems under subclass 334 wherein an electromagnet is placed adjacent the
    interelectrode discharge space so that the space discharge is influenced by
    the magnetic flux.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for discharge devices having structurally combined therewith an
    inductive impedance which is connected between either a plurality of anodes
    or a plurality of cathodes of the discharge device, the discharge device
    being provided with an electromagnet for influencing the discharge between
    the electrodes.

    343,    and subclass 344 and indented subclasses, and the subclasses
    specified in the notes to the definition of those subclasses, for other
    systems wherein the discharge device load is provided with an electromagnet
    for influencing the discharge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 153+ for the
    structure of discharge devices, per se, which are provided with an
    electromagnet.  See especially subclass 162 where the discharge device is
    provided with an envelope and has three or more electrodes.


CLS 315/339
TXT Systems under subclass 334 wherein the electric discharge load device is
    provided with a discharge controlling means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148,    for this subject matter where the discharge device is supplied with
    polyphase alternating current.

    335,    and indented subclass, for systems wherein the discharge
    controlling means is an auxiliary starting electrode.

    338,    for this subject matter where the discharge control means is an
    electromagnet.

    349,    and indented subclasses and the subclasses specified in the notes
    to the definition of those subclasses for other systems wherein the
    discharge device load is provided with a discharge control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 298, 302, and 303 for
    the structure of discharge devices, per se, which have a plurality of
    anodes or a plurality of cathodes and a discharge control grid.


CLS 315/340
TXT Systems under subclass 326 having means in the cathode-anode circuit for
    interrupting or extinguishing the flow of electric discharge current
    between the cathode and anode.

    (1)     Note.  The search should be continued in the appropriate subclasses
    above for systems where the space discharge device is provided with current
    of a particular character and means are provided for interrupting the flow
    of interelectrode discharge current.  For example, search subclass 261 and
    indented subclasses, subclass 268 and indented subclasses, where the
    discharge device is supplied with alternating current and a discharge
    control means is provided for the discharge device, the discharge being
    extinguished by the alternating current in each cycle of the alternating
    current wave, and the discharge controlling means being operative either to
    permit the discharge to be formed or to suppress the discharge on the
    succeeding cycle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261,    see (1) Note. above.

    268,    see (1) Note. above.


CLS 315/341
TXT Systems under subclass 326 wherein the discharge device is provided with
    two or more discharge controlling means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148,    338, 339, where the load device is a plural cathode and/or anode
    load device, and a discharge control device is included in each of the
    plurality of cathode-anode circuits; subclass 148 where the discharge
    device is supplied with polyphase alternating current and subclass 338
    where the discharge control means is an electromagnet.

    336,    where the discharge device is provided with a plurality of
    auxiliary starting electrodes.

    338,    see the reference to subclass 148 above.

    339,    see the reference to subclass 148 above.

    349,    and indented subclasses and the subclasses specified in the notes
    to the definitions of those subclasses for other systems wherein the load
    device is a discharge control discharge device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 153+ for the
    structure of discharge devices, per se, which are provided with means for
    generating a magnetic field and which also have a discharge control
    electrode; subclass 154 for discharge devices which are provided with means
    for generating a plurality of magnetic fields; subclasses 296+ and the
    subclasses specified in the Notes thereto for the structure of discharge
    devices which are provided with a plurality of control grids, and subclass
    308 for other discharge devices which are provided with two or more
    discharge controlling means.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 227
    and 291 for electronic tube regulators. See section VI, B, of the class
    definition of Class 323.


CLS 315/342
TXT Systems under subclass 341 wherein the discharge device is provided with
    diverse types of discharge controlling means.

    (1)     Note.  Auxiliary starting electrodes, electromagnets, electrostatic
    control devices (control grids) are each considered to be of a diverse type
    with respect to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    335,    and indented subclass, for this subject matter where one of the
    control means is an auxiliary starting electrode.

    338,    where the discharge device is a plural cathode and/or anode
    discharge device and electromagnetic means are provided for influencing the
    discharge.

    339,    where the discharge device is a plural cathode and/or anode
    discharge device and the discharge device is provided with discharge
    control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses, for
    the structure of discharge devices, per se, which are provided with diverse
    types of discharge controlling means.  See the reference to Class 313 in
    the Notes to subclass 341 above for the particular subclasses to be
    searched.


CLS 315/343
TXT Systems under subclass 341 wherein two or more electromagnets are placed
    adjacent the inter-electrode discharge space so that space discharge is
    influenced by the magnetic flux of the electromagnets.

    (1)     Note.  Electromagnetic devices which have two or more separate
    coils on a common core are considered to be a plurality of electromagnets
    in so far as classification in this subclass is concerned.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    344,    and indented subclasses and the subclasses specified in the notes
    to the definitions of those subclasses, for other systems wherein the load
    device is a discharge device having a discharge influencing electromagnet
    associated therewith.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 154 for the structure
    of discharge devices, per se, which are provided with means for generating
    a plurality of electromagnetic fields for influencing the discharge.


CLS 315/344
TXT Systems under subclass 326 wherein an electromagnet is placed adjacent the
    interelectrode discharge space so that the space discharge is influenced by
    the magnetic flux.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for discharge devices having structurally combined therewith an
    inductive impedance which is connected between either a plurality of anodes
    or a plurality of cathodes of the discharge device, the discharge device
    being provided with an electromagnet for influencing the discharge between
    the electrodes.

    236,    for this subject matter where there is a condenser in the supply
    circuit of the discharge device.

    267,    for this subject matter where the discharge device is supplied with
    pulsating or alternating current.

    338,    for this subject matter where the discharge device is provided with
    two or more cathodes and/or two or more anodes.

    342,    for this subject matter where the discharge device is provided with
    a plurality of different control means, one of which is an electromagnet.

    343,    for this subject matter where there are a plurality of
    electromagnets for influencing the discharge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 153+ for the
    structure of lamps and discharge devices which are provided with an
    electromagnet.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 20, for consumable electrode discharge devices having a discharge
    deflecting electromagnet, and the circuits therefor.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 227
    and 291 for electronic tube regulators. See section VI, B, of the class
    definition of Class 323.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 64 and 107, for
    electric furnaces provided with means to deflect the arc from its normal
    path.


CLS 315/345
TXT Systems under subclass 344, wherein the discharge device has the discharge
    electrodes in the form of elongated members, usually in rod or wire form,
    the electrodes being either parallel or inclined with respect to each
    other, and the discharge being formed between the electrodes at one point
    and moved along the electrodes by means of the magnetic field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249,    for systems under the class definition wherein the discharge device
    is provided with wire or rod-like electrodes which are arranged in physical
    parallel relation with respect to each other, the source of supply current
    being alternating current and designed to establish a discharge at the
    antinodes of the potential wave, the system including means to cause the
    antinodes of potential, and therefore the electric discharge, to traverse
    the electrodes along their length.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 153+ for the
    structure of the discharge device, per se, for use in the systems in this
    subclass of Class 315.


CLS 315/346
TXT Systems under subclass 344 provided with means to supply two or more
    currents to the electromagnet coil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    350,    and indented subclass, and the subclasses specified in the notes to
    the definitions thereof for other systems having a discharge control
    discharge device load device and provided with means to apply two or more
    currents or potentials to the discharge control means.


CLS 315/347
TXT Systems under subclass 344 wherein the electric discharge device and the
    electromagnet coil are connected together in electrical series relation.


CLS 315/348
TXT Systems under subclass 344 wherein the electromagnet is energized by
    pulsating or alternating current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    267,    for this subject matter where the load device is supplied with
    pulsating or alternating current.

    345,    for this subject matter where the discharge device is formed with a
    plurality of parallel rail or rod-like electrodes.


CLS 315/349
TXT Systems under subclass 326 wherein the electric discharge load device is
    provided with a discharge controlling means, and the system includes means
    for controlling the electric current and/or potential supplied to the
    control means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     and indented subclass, subclasses 61, 63, for devices which include
    a discharge control discharge device and an electrical circuit element
    structurally combined in a unitary device.

    157,    where the control circuit includes a radiant energy responsive
    device (photocell).

    194,    and indented subclasses, where the control circuit includes phase
    shifting means for shifting the phase of the current and/or voltage in the
    control circuit with respect to the current in the cathode-anode circuit of
    the discharge device.

    237,    and indented subclass, where there is a condenser in the supply
    circuit of the discharge device load.

    268,    and indented subclasses, where the source of supply current for the
    discharge device load is pulsating or alternating current.

    325,    and the subclasses specified in the notes to the definition of that
    subclass, for systems under the class definition having a plurality of
    discharge control discharge device load devices in the system.

    335,    and indented subclass, and the subclasses specified in the notes to
    the definition of those subclasses for systems under the class definition
    provided with a discharge device load device which is provided with an
    auxiliary starting electrode for controlling the discharge.

    341,    and indented subclasses, for systems under the class definition
    wherein the load device is a discharge device provided with a plurality of
    discharge controlling means (such as a grid electrode and an electromagnet).

    344,    and indented subclasses and the subclasses specified in the notes
    to the definition of those subclasses for systems under the class
    definition wherein the load device is a discharge device provided with an
    electromagnet for influencing the discharge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 308 and the
    subclasses specified in the Notes thereto for the structure of discharge
    devices, per se, which have a discharge controlling electrode.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 35, for consumable electrode discharge device systems wherein the
    discharge device includes an auxiliary electrode placed adjacent to the
    discharge space, the auxiliary electrode circuit controlling the operation
    of the electrode feeding mechanism of the discharge device.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 227
    and 291 for electronic tube regulators. See section VI, B, of the class
    definition of Class 323.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous space discharge device
    systems not otherwise classified wherein the space discharge device is
    provided with a discharge controlling means.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 111+, and the
    subclasses mentioned in the notes thereto, for electronic tube conversion
    systems wherein the electronic tube is provided with a discharge control
    means (e.g., grid) and the potential applied to the control means is
    controlled.  Some of the systems of Class 363 are closely analogous to the
    systems of this subclass.  See section VI, 7 of the class definition of
    Class 363 for the line between Class 315 and Class 363.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclass 113 for X-ray tube
    systems including a space discharge control element.


CLS 315/350
TXT Systems under subclass 349 provided with means to apply two or more
    potentials to the discharge control means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270,    and indented subclass, for this subject matter where the discharge
    device is supplied with pulsating or alternating current.

    346,    for systems under the class definition wherein the control means
    for the discharge device is an electromagnet which is supplied with two or
    more currents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 227
    and 291 for electronic tube regulators. See section VI, B, of the class
    definition of Class 323.


CLS 315/351
TXT Systems under subclass 350 provided with means to apply a pulsating and an
    alternating current and/or potential, or two or more different pulsating or
    alternating currents and/or potentials to the discharge control means.

    (1)     Note.  In systems wherein a transformer is provided which has its
    secondary connected to the discharge control circuits, two or more
    primaries each energized by pulsating or alternating current and having the
    secondary connected to the control circuit, the patent is placed in
    subclass 354 below and not in this subclass.  Where two or more
    transformers are provided, and the secondary windings are connected either
    in series or parallel with the resultant potential impressed upon the
    control means, the patent is placed in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    271,    for this subject matter where the discharge device is supplied with
    pulsating or alternating current.

    354,    see (1) Note. above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 227
    and 291 for electronic tube regulators. See section VI, B, of the class
    definition of Class 323.


CLS 315/352
TXT Systems under subclass 349 having a rectifier and/or an electric discharge
    device connected in the control circuit of the discharge device.

    (1)     Note.  Where the system includes a plurality of discharge devices,
    one of which is connected in the control circuit of the discharge device
    which is the load in the circuit, the patent is classified as a plural load
    device system in the subclasses above where the discharge in the control
    circuit is claimed as a discharge device whose operation depends upon gas
    or vapor ionization even though the system is claimed as only having one
    ultimate load device.  Where the controlling discharge device is claimed
    merely as a discharge device even though it is disclosed as a gaseous
    ionization discharge device, the system is not considered to be a plural
    load device is claimed merely as a discharge device system for the purpose
    of classification.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157,    for this subject matter where the discharge control discharge
    device load device is controlled by a radiant energy responsive device
    (photocell).

    197,    198, 199, for this subject matter where the discharge control
    circuit includes a discharge control discharge device and means for
    shifting the phase of the pulsating or alternating current in the control
    circuit with respect to the current in the cathode-anode circuit of the
    load device.

    203,    and indented subclass, for systems under the class definition
    wherein the load device is a discharge device having an auxiliary starting
    electrode, and the auxiliary starting electrode circuit includes an
    electric discharge device or rectifier.

    272,    for this subject matter where the discharge device load device is
    supplied with pulsating or alternating current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 227
    and 291 for electronic tube regulators. See section VI, B, of the class
    definition of Class 323.


CLS 315/353
TXT Systems under subclass 352 provided with a condenser connected in the
    control circuit of the discharge device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227,    and indented subclasses, for condensers in the supply circuit for
    this subject matter.

    273,    where the discharge device is supplied with pulsating or
    alternating current.

    355,    and indented subclass, for other systems under subclass 349 having
    a condenser in the control circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 364, for
    miscellaneous condenser systems.


CLS 315/354
TXT Systems under subclass 349 having a transformer connected in the control
    circuit of the discharge device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262,    where the load device is a discharge device having an auxiliary
    starting electrode, a transformer being included in the auxiliary starting
    electrode circuit.

    274,    for this subject matter where the discharge device is supplied with
    pulsating or alternating current.

    276,    and indented subclasses, and the subclasses specified in the notes
    thereto for transformers in the supply circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    355-363, for miscellaneous transformer systems.


CLS 315/355
TXT Systems under subclass 349 having a condenser connected in the control
    circuit of the discharge device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227,    and indented subclasses, for systems having a discharge device
    load, the supply circuit including a condenser.

    234,    for systems wherein the load device is a discharge device having an
    auxiliary starting electrode, a condenser being included in the auxiliary
    starting electrode circuit.

    238,    for this subject matter where there is a condenser in the control
    circuit of the discharge device and another condenser in the supply circuit
    of the discharge device.

    273,    for this subject matter where the discharge device is supplied with
    pulsating or alternating current and there is also a discharge device or
    rectifier in the control circuit.

    275,    for this subject matter where the discharge device is supplied with
    pulsating or alternating current.

    353,    for this subject matter where there is also a discharge device or
    rectifier in the control circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 364, for
    miscellaneous condenser systems.


CLS 315/356
TXT Systems under subclass 355 having an inductance connected in the control
    circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     and indented subclass, for devices which include a discharge
    control discharge device and an inductance structurally combined in a
    unitary device, the inductance being connected between the control means
    and one of the discharge electrodes.

    263,    for systems having a discharge device load, the discharge device
    being provided with an auxiliary starting electrode, the starting electrode
    circuit including an inductance.

    289,    and indented subclass, and the subclasses specified in the notes to
    the definitions of those subclasses, for other systems which include an
    inductance in the circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    355-370, for miscellaneous impedance systems having a reactor and condenser
    therein.


CLS 315/357
TXT Systems under subclass 326 wherein the discharge device is provided with an
    electrode which is movable with respect to its cooperating discharge
    electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327,    for this subject matter where the electrode is designed to be moved
    into contact with another electrode during the starting period for drawing
    the discharge when the electrodes are separated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 146+ for the
    structure of discharge devices, per se, which have a movable electrode.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    appropriate subclasses, for consumable electrode discharge devices having
    means provided for feeding one of the electrodes toward the other to
    compensate for the consumption of the electrode material, and the
    electrical systems therefor.


CLS 315/358
TXT Systems under subclass 326 wherein the discharge device contains two or
    more different gases and/or vapors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 637+, for the
    structure of discharge devices, per se, having a confined atmosphere of two
    or more gases and/or vapors.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 171+ for
    electrical relay systems of the code responsive or secret type.


CLS 315/359
TXT Systems under the class definition wherein the load device through which
    the current passes is formed of a pyroelectric material.

    (1)     Note.  Pyroelectric materials, or second class conducting
    materials, have a high electrical resistance at ordinary temperatures, and
    low electrical resistance when heated to a high temperature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114     and subclass 115 and indented subclass, for systems having a
    pyroelectric load device which is provided with an electric heater for the
    pyroelectric material, the system including means to supply electric
    current to the heater.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 14 for the structure
    of pyro-electric type lamps where the lamp is provided with a heating means
    for heating the pyroelectric material, and subclass 315 for the structure
    of other pyroelectric lamps.


CLS 315/360
TXT Systems under the class definition provided with a time controlled means
    for (1) supplying operating current or potential to the load device after a
    predetermined time lapse, or (2) supplying current or potential to the load
    device for a predetermined time, or (3) altering the flow of current or
    potential to the load device after a predetermined time, or (4)
    interrupting the supply of current or potential to the load device after a
    predetermined time lapse.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209,    and indented subclasses, for systems wherein a periodic electric
    switch is provided in the supply circuit of the load device.

    227,    and indented subclasses, for systems wherein a condenser is
    connected in the supply circuit of the load device so that the discharge of
    the stored electrical energy in the condenser is applied to the load
    device, the condenser being connected in the load device circuit so as to
    be charged and discharged periodically.

    291,    and indented subclasses, for systems provided with means for
    regulating the current and/or voltage applied to the load device.

    313,    for systems wherein the system includes two or more load devices
    and is provided with an electric switch in the supply circuit of one of the
    load devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 33+, for time
    controlled electric switches.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 96+ for X-ray
    systems with exposure timer.


CLS 315/361
TXT Systems under the class definition provided with two control means located
    at different places in the supply circuit for controlling the supply of
    current to the load device, the two of the control means each being
    designed to perform the same control functions as that performed by the
    other of the two control means, irrespective of the condition of operation
    of the other of the two control means.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes systems wherein two switches are
    provided in the circuit of the load device, each of the switches being
    connected in the circuit so that it can open or close the circuit of the
    load device, irrespective of the position of the other switch.  Also,
    included in this subclass are systems wherein a single switch opens and
    closes the supply circuit to the load device, this switch being operable by
    either of two remotely located switches.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass also includes cross references of patents
    wherein the control means for the current supply for the load device is a
    current regulator, the system being designed so that the regulation may be
    effected from two or more different points.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass does not include systems wherein two or more
    control means, such as electric switches, are connected in the circuit in
    such a manner that if one of the control means is in the operated position
    to deprive the load device of current, the other control means, even if
    placed in the "on" position cannot close the circuit to supply current to
    the load device because of the position of operation of the first control
    means.  For such systems, where the control means is a regulator, search
    this class, subclass 299, and indented subclasses and where the control
    means is a switch, search this class, subclass 362.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272,    see (3) Note above.

    299,    see (3) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnnection Systems, subclasses
    113+ for systems of general application provided with two or more control
    means located at different places for controlling the supply of current or
    potential to a load device.


CLS 315/362
TXT Systems under the class definition having an electrical circuit maker
    and/or breaker in the current supply circuit to the load device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     and indented subclasses, and especially subclass 63, subclass 64,
    and indented subclasses, 72, 73, subclass 74 and indented subclass, for
    devices which include an electric lamp or discharge device which has
    structurally combined therewith an electric switch.

    63,     see the reference to subclass 32 above.

    64,     see the reference to subclass 32 above.

    72,     see the reference to subclass 32 above.

    73,     see the reference to subclass 32 above.

    74,     see the reference to subclass 32 above.

    76,     for this subject matter where the load device system is combined
    with the structure of some particular art device, such as a vehicle, such
    combinations usually including a switch operated by some part of the art
    device, such as for example, brake pedal in the case of a vehicle.

    86,     and indented subclass, for systems which include automatically
    operating switching means for substituting another source of current supply
    for the load device when the operating source of current supply fails to
    operate properly.

    88,     and indented subclasses, for systems which include automatically
    operating switching means for substituting another load device for the
    operating load device when the operating load device fails to operate
    properly.

    100,    where the load device is a discharge device provided with a
    plurality of cathodes or cathode heaters connected in series relation with
    respect to each other, and the series circuit includes a thermostatic
    switch.

    106     and 107, where the load device is a discharge device provided with
    a circuit for supplying current to the cathode or cathode heater circuit,
    the supply current for the cathode or cathode heater including an
    automatically operated cutout switch.

    116,    where the load device is provided with an electric heater for
    modifying the temperature of the load device, the heater circuit including
    an automatically operated cutout switch.

    119,    and indented subclasses, where the system is provided with an
    automatically operated switch for closing a shunt circuit about, or opening
    the circuit of, the load device when the load device fails to operate
    properly.

    136,    where the system includes a signal, indicator, or alarm device and
    the circuit of the signal, indicator, or alarm is controlled by an
    electrically operated switch.

    159,    where the system includes a radiant energy responsive device
    (photocell) which controls the operation of an electric switch in the
    supply circuit of the load device.

    172     and 186, subclass 209 and indented subclasses, where the supply
    circuit of the load device includes a periodic switch.

    186,    see the reference to subclass 172 above.

    191,    192 and 193, where the system includes a plurality of series
    connected load devices and an electric switch in the circuit.

    192,    see the reference to subclass 191 above.

    193,    see the reference to subclass 191 above.

    209,    see the reference to subclass 172 above.

    240,    where the supply circuit of the load device includes a condenser,
    and an electric switch is provided to connect the condenser to the load
    device.

    290,    where the supply circuit of the load device includes an inductance
    and there is an electric switch in the inductance circuit.

    313,    and indented subclasses, and the subclasses specified in the notes
    to the definition of those subclasses for plural load device systems
    provided with an electric switch in the circuit.

    340,    where the load device is an electric discharge device, and an
    electric switch is provided in the cathode-anode circuit of the discharge
    device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses,
    for the structure of electrical circuit makers and breakers.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 112+
    for miscellaneous electrical systems having a switch in the current supply
    circuit.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 131, and the subclasses referred to in the notes to the definition
    of that subclass, for consumable electrode discharge devices provided with
    switches, and the systems therefor, which include electric switches.

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, appropriate subclasses for electromagnetically operated
    circuit makers and breakers.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    appropriate subclasses for electrothermal and thermally actuated switches.

    362,    Illumination, appropriate subclasses, for illumination devices and
    fixtures having an electric light source and provided with an electric
    switch for controlling the flow of current to the electric light, note
    especially subclass 36, for vehicles with electric lighting devices to
    illuminate the direction toward which the vehicle is turned and lighted
    only during the turning of the vehicle, subclasses 21+, for lanterns having
    electric light sources which are provided with mechanism responsive to
    dangerous conditions for interrupting the supply of current to the lamp,
    subclasses 285+ for lanterns of the projector type with adjustable light
    focusing means, and having the light focusing device coupled with electric
    switch means to control the current supply to the lamp, subclasses 394+ for
    lamp supports which normally hold the light in an inaccessible position and
    which may be adjusted so that the lamp may be reached for trimming,
    cleaning, or repairing, and which are provided with an electric switch, the
    switch usually being arranged so as to connect the lamp with the current
    supply circuit only when the lamp has reached its inaccessible or operating
    position, and subclasses 394+ and indented subclass, for illuminating
    fixtures provided with an electric switch for the light source.


CLS 315/363
TXT Systems under the class definition which are not provided for in any of the
    preceding subclasses of this class.


CLS 315/364
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 which includes a cathode-ray tube including
    a cathode-ray beam source, cathode-ray deflection means operably connected
    with the cathode tube and an electrical circuit connected to the deflection
    means to deliver, when energized, voltage or current to the deflection
    means to move the cathode-ray beam from one position to another within the
    tube and methods corresponding to the above apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this group of subclasses are subcombinations
    which include the deflection means and the electrical circuit to energize
    the deflection means when not elsewhere classified.

    (2)     Note.  The electric circuit connected to the deflection means,
    instead of directly causing a cathode-ray to be deflected may, when acting
    in conjunction with another electrical force on a cathode-ray beam cause,
    by a change of current or potential, deflection of the cathode-ray beam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for cathode-ray beam tubes wherein the cathode-ray tube is not the
    ultimate load in the system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 281+ for deflection circuits used in the
    ionic separation or analyses of material and subclasses 396+ for deflection
    circuits to deflect a charged particle beam used to bombard material or a
    detector.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 421+ for
    cathode-ray tubes including deflection means.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, particulary subclasses 121 and
    250 for test devices using a cathode-ray tube.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 10+ for cathode-ray tube
    display systems with selective electrical control for providing more than
    two visual outputs.

    348,    Television, subclasses 284+, 325+, 377+, 379, 380+, and 805+ for
    television systems utilizing a cathode-ray tube.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, appropriate subclasses,
    and see the search class note in the class definition of this class (315).


CLS 315/365
TXT Subject matter under subclass 364 wherein the cathode-ray tube includes a
    cathode-ray beam impenetrable member having at least an area in the shape
    of a symbol or a code pulse configuration which permits passage of the
    cathode-ray beam through only the area of the member at that point in the
    shape of the symbol or the pulse code configuration and the deflection
    means causes the cathode-ray beam to be deflected so the cathode-ray beam
    can pass through the area under the control of the electrical circuit and
    other character generators not provided for elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  Class 345, subclasses 17 and 26, includes character
    generators which form the symbol on a fluorescent screen of a cathode-ray
    tube.  However, selective electrical control must be claimed.  Included in
    Class 345, subclasses 10+ are symbol generators which form a cathode-ray
    pattern of the symbol by (1) a claimed raster scan of a cathode-ray beam
    synchronized with the control of the cathode-ray beam and by (2) a claimed
    line vector generation apparatus synchronized with the control of the
    cathode-ray beam.  Also included are animation generators of the
    cathode-ray tube type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8.51,   for code translating systems generally, subclass 9 for symbol
    generators of the type found in subclass 365 where plural cathode-ray tubes
    are used.

    13,     for symbol generators of the type found in subclass 365 where
    plural distinct cathode-rays are utilized within a cathode-ray tube to form
    a character.

    367,    for one or more deflector circuits used in a single beam
    cathode-ray tube wherein a digital to analog device is used to create the
    deflection current or voltage required to deflect the cathode-ray beam of
    the tube.

    391,    for plural cathode-ray deflection circuits with or without a
    cathode-ray beam controlled by the deflection circuit.

    399+,   for coil type deflection circuits generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 10+ for cathode-ray tube
    display systems with selective electrical control which may include
    character generators and/or animation generators.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, appropriate subclasses,
    and see the search class note in the class definition of this class (315).


CLS 315/366
TXT Subject matter under subclass 364 wherein the cathode-ray tube has a
    fluorescent screen and the deflection means, when energized through the
    electrical circuit, causes the cathode-ray beam, when moving from the
    source to the screen, to be deflected at some time parallel to the
    cathode-ray screen.

    (1)     Note.  The electrical circuit and the deflection means can
    periodically sweep the beam across the screen or just deflect the beam
    parallel to the screen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13.1,   for plural ray beam deflection circuits which include a flat type
    cathode-ray tube.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 422 for flat type
    cathode-ray tubes.

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 55, 138, 142+, and 176+ for radar
    systems and subclasses 350+ for directive systems which may utilize a flat
    cathode-ray type tube and a deflection system to move the cathode-ray beam
    parallel to the screen of the tube prior to the beam striking the screen.

    348,    Television, subclasses 805+ which may include a flat cathode-ray
    tube.


CLS 315/367
TXT Subject matter under subclass 364 wherein the electrical circuit includes
    means, having an input responsive to digital signals, to convert the
    digital signals into an analog signal, which analog signal is applied to
    the deflection means.

    (1)     Note.  The bulk of the patents here have an electrical multiple
    output register responsive to digital signals wherein the multiple outputs
    are all connected to the deflection means whereby the sum of the outputs
    determine the extent of the deflection of the cathode-ray beam within the
    cathode-ray tube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8.51,   for counting circuits responsive to digital pulses which cause a
    cathode-ray tube to store in analog fashion the sum of the pulses.

    368.12+,for this subject matter in a color convergence control circuit

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclass 155 for
    digital-to-analog code convertors in electrical communication systems.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 10+ for cathode-ray tube
    display systems with selective electrical control which may include
    digital-to-analog convertors.


CLS 315/368.11
TXT Including color convergence control:

    Subject matter under subclass 364 which includes at least two electron beam
    deflection elements connected in a circuit which generates a time varying
    signal to permit the focusing and scanning of plural electron beams in the
    envelope of a cathode-ray tube in one or two directions at each and every
    point on a screen of the cathode-ray tube.

    (1)     Note.  The deflection elements may be either electrostatic or
    electromagnetic, and are usually additional to a deflection arrangement
    providing for scanning by the electron beam.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass are combinations which do not
    include either a vertical or horizontal deflection device, but only the
    claimed statement that the cathode ray beam deflection circuit is a source
    for a dynamic convergence circuit.

    (3)     Note.  Included in this subclass are claimed subcombinations which
    state a waveform source energizes the winding of a convergence
    electro-magnet.

    (4)     Note.  Included in this subclass is subject matter which may have
    only a claimed statement that the convergence circuit is energized from
    line or frame frequency components.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11.5,   for color convergence control circuitry for a cathode-ray tube,
    having photodetector control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 412 for cathode-ray
    tube structure for plural beam convergence, absent circuitry.

    348,    Television, subclass 807 for a color television receiver having a
    cathode-ray tube.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 418+ for the application of a
    CRT in control of data presentation.


CLS 315/368.12
TXT Including specified signal storage (e.g., memory, register, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 368.11 including storage of values for the
    convergence control signal for subsequent retrieval.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    367,    for this subject matter including an analog to digital signal
    conversion circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, appropriate
    subclasses for dynamic magnetic information storage not limited to color
    convergence control.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclasses
    for static information storage not limited to color convergence control,
    particularly subclasses 185.01+ for floating gate memory storage (e.g.,
    flash memory).

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, appropriate subclasses
    for dynamic information storage not limited to color convergence control.


CLS 315/368.13
TXT Interpolation:

    Subject matter under subclass 368.12 wherein a convergence signal has
    values which lie between stored discrete values.

    (1)     Note.  The values of the convergence signal are determined by a
    proportionate or other fraction of the interval between the stored values.


CLS 315/368.15
TXT Including electrostatic element (e.g., electrode, lens, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 368.11 including structure that produces an
    electrostatic field which deflects the electron beam.


CLS 315/368.16
TXT Offset apertures in plural sequential electrodes;

    Subject matter under subclass 368.15 having successive electrodes with
    apertures so as to form plural paths for the several beams which are not
    parallel with each other or with the axis of travel of the beam in the tube.


CLS 315/368.17
TXT Including signal delay circuitry:

    Subject matter under subclass 368.11 including circuitry to shift time
    relations of two or more control signals.

    (1)     Note.  Signal phase control circuitry is included in this subclass.


CLS 315/368.18
TXT Including specified waveform generating circuitry:

    Subject matter under subclass 368.11 including a circuit arrangement to
    produce a control signal having a recited amplitude dependence on time.


CLS 315/368.19
TXT By nonlinear device (e.g., square law device, diode, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 368.18 wherein the convergence control signal
    is produced by a circuit having a nonlinear voltage to current
    characteristic.


CLS 315/368.21
TXT Parabolic waveform:

    Subject matter under subclass 368.18 wherein the control signal has a
    component which is proportional to the square of the elapsed time.


CLS 315/368.22
TXT By integrating of signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 368.21 wherein the control signal is produced
    by integrating the amplitude of a signal with respect to time.

    (1)     Note.  The signal to be integrated is often a ramp signal derived
    from a scanning deflection circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 733 for
    integration by a digital computer and subclass 829 for integration by an
    analog computer.


CLS 315/368.23
TXT By multiplying of signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 368.21 wherein the control signal is produced
    by a circuit which performs multiplication of two signals.

    (1)     Note.  The two signals are often two representations of a single
    signal.

    (2)     Note.  The signal to be multiplied is often a ramp signal derived
    from a scanning deflection circuit.


CLS 315/368.24
TXT Static convergence feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 368.11 further including a circuit or element
    providing an additional constant electric field or magnetic flux which is
    combined with the time varying field to form the focussing field for
    convergence.


CLS 315/368.25
TXT Including core or winding structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 368.11 including a structural feature of the
    core or winding arrangement of the convergence electromagnet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, for electromagnets, cores, or coils, per se.


CLS 315/368.26
TXT Adjacent to or integral with deflection winding or housing structure
    therefor:

    Subject matter under subclass 368.25 in which the convergence coil is
    positioned within or close to a housing for deflection coils.


CLS 315/368.27
TXT Including particular magnetic field distribution:

    Subject matter under subclass 368.25 which specifically describes the
    spatial distribution of the intensity of the magnetic flux.


CLS 315/368.28
TXT Including plural cores or coils:

    Subject matter under subclass 368.25 which describes plural distinct
    magnetic core elements or electrical conductor windings.


CLS 315/369
TXT Subject matter under subclass 364 wherein the cathode-ray tube includes a
    target, a cathode- ray beam source, and an electrical circuit.  The
    electrical circuit includes circuitry connected to the target to correct or
    regulate the deflection of the cathode-ray beam through the deflection
    means as a function of the beam hitting the target.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for retrace control due to
    impingement of the cathode-ray on a target.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.1    and 13.1, for cathode-ray tubes with secondary emission stages and
    plural cathode-rays, respectively, which may include means on the target
    thereof for control of the deflection circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 67+ for a cathode-ray tube type color
    television display having circuitry to sense the ray beam to control or
    indicate the position of the beam.


CLS 315/370
TXT Subject matter under subclass 364 wherein the cathode-ray tube has a
    cathode-ray beam source and (1) the deflection means is placed in a certain
    manner or of a configuration to correct or improve the cathode-ray beam
    pattern caused by the energized deflection means acting upon the beam or
    (2) there is an electrical element or an electrical network connected to
    the electrical circuit or the deflection means to correct or diminish the
    distortion of the beam pattern caused by the energized electrical circuit,
    deflection means, or the cathode-ray tube.

    (1)     Note.  Included are television circuits which include a horizontal
    or vertical deflection circuit whose deflection waveform is modified in
    parabolic fashion by another waveform including the deflection waveform of
    the other horizontal or vertical circuit to correct for pin cushion, barrel
    or keystone type distortions of the cathode-ray beam pattern.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    368,    for dynamic color convergence circuits to correct the focus of the
    cathode-ray beam dependent upon the vertical or horizontal deflection
    circuits.

    369,    for the correction of the vertical or horizontal deflection circuit
    dependent upon the cathode-ray beam striking a target.

    382,    for the combination of a deflection circuit to deflect the
    cathode-rays of a cathode-ray tube and a circuit connected to a focus
    electrode to control the cathode-ray beam in its movement to the target of
    the cathode-ray tube.

    387,    for linearity control circuits utilizing feedback networks in the
    cathode-ray tube deflection circuits.

    401,    for distortion correction circuits utilizing a saturable magnetic
    device in the deflection circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 133 for miscellaneous sawtooth generation with distortion
    regulation and subclass 317 for miscellaneous amplitude controlled
    distortion compensation.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 149 for amplifiers wherein a hum noise or
    distortion bucking signal is introduced into the amplifier signal channel.

    348,    Television, subclasses 251 and 615 for shading and black spot
    correction circuitry.


CLS 315/371
TXT Subject matter under subclass 370 wherein the electrical circuit includes a
    source of a deflection waveform which is delivered to the deflection means
    and the electrical network delivers another waveform or signal to the
    electrical circuit or the deflection means to modulate the deflection
    waveform so that a composite waveform is delivered to the deflection means
    to correct or diminish some type of distortion received by the energized
    electrical circuit, deflection means, or the cathode-ray tube.


CLS 315/372
TXT Subject matter under subclass 364 wherein the cathode-ray tube includes a
    cathode-ray beam source and a plurality of spaced targets to receive the
    cathode-ray beam under the control of the deflection means when the
    cathode-ray tube and its deflection means are energized.

    (1)     Note.  The term "target" includes anodes, collectors, and
    electrodes.

    (2)     Note.  Under this group, no fluorescent targets are included.  For
    color fluorescent targets are include.  For color fluorescent screens
    wherein phosphors emit various colors when energized, see subclass 375.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3+,     for a cathode-ray tube having plural targets combined with an
    integral circuit element.

    8.51+,  for pulse counting, storing, or a code translating system having a
    plural target cathode-ray tube and means to deflect a cathode-ray beam
    within the tube from one to another target.

    9,      for cathode-ray tube systems including plural cathode-ray tubes, at
    least one of the tubes having plural targets.

    12.1,   for a cathode-ray tube circuit including a cathode-ray tube having
    plural targets with secondary emissive properties.

    13.1,   for a cathode-ray tube circuit including a cathode-ray tube with
    plural targets responsive to plural ray beams formed in the tube.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 3+ for automatic telegraphic which contain a
    cathode-ray tube having plural cathode-ray targets.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 419 for a cathode-ray
    tube having plural targets each target when impacted by the cathode-ray
    beam transmitting the beam current to an external circuit.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 79+ for charged particle beam tubes which
    include plural targets and deflection means for moving the charged particle
    beam in such a manner as to produce an oscillatory electrical output.


CLS 315/373
TXT Subject matter under subclass 372 wherein the targets are spaced from each
    other and arranged peripherally with respect to the cathode-ray beam source.

    (1)     Note.  Included are switching tubes which sequentially rotate a
    cathode-ray beam from target to target.  The deflection means may be a
    rotating electrostatic field or a combination of a magnetic field and a
    plurality of electrodes which cooperate with the cathode-ray beam to cause
    the beam to rotate in one direction or to be selectively controlled by the
    electrodes to allow the cathode-ray beam to stop in its rotary movement and
    strike a specific target.

    (2)     Note.  The magnetic field necessary to obtain beam deflection in
    certain of the radial switching tubes may or may not be claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.51+, for distributed parameter resonator type magnetrons having a
    plurality of electrodes peripherally arranged around the cathode-ray beam
    emitting electrode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 157+ for magnetic
    type discharge devices with a plurality of electrodes arranged
    concentrically about a cathode in the discharge device.


CLS 315/374
TXT Subject matter under subclass 372 wherein the targets have flat cathode-ray
    beam receiving surfaces and the ray receiving surfaces are all arranged in
    a single plane.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are switching tube circuits which may or may
    not be sequentially operated from target to target.


CLS 315/375
TXT Subject matter under subclass 364 wherein the cathode-ray tube includes a
    cathode-ray beam source and a fluorescent screen formed of plural phosphor
    materials, each material being capable of emitting a different color of
    light when struck by the cathode-ray beam and the electrical circuit
    connected to the deflection means, acting alone or in combination with
    focusing means or phasing means, has circuitry to cause the cathode-ray
    beam, when present, to impinge selectively on one or more phosphor
    materials.

    (1)     Note.  Switching circuits which rely on secondary emission to
    excite the various phosphors of a color to be are found in subclasses 10+
    of this class.

    (2)     Note.  See subclass 369 for deflection circuits which select the
    appropriate phosphor in a color tube and which also control the deflections
    of the cathode-ray beam striking a target.

    (3)     Note.  The deflection means for the most part is the post
    deflection type. However, some systems utilize a raster type deflection
    means in combination with a mask or focus screen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for a light detector system responsive to the light emitted from a
    screen of a colored cathode-ray tube, which system corrects its direction
    of the rays hitting the screen through the deflection system associated
    with the tube.

    13,     for cathode-ray tube circuits which include plural cathode-ray beam
    tubes and wherein the plural beams may be arranged to excite a plurality of
    separate, distinct color phosphors.

    368,    for cathode-ray tube deflection circuits which include a color
    convergence control circuit and which have a plural phosphor target.

    369,    for cathode-ray tube deflection circuits which include a target
    which controls the deflection of a cathode-ray beam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 486.1, for fluorescent or phosphorescent
    devices having plural luminescent materials.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 399+ for color
    cathode-ray tubes with secondary emissive electrodes, 402+ for color shadow
    masks per se or in combination with a color cathode-ray tube, 426+ for
    plural cathode-ray deflection means, and 429+ for post deflection electrode
    grid arrangements.

    348,    Television, subclass 810 for a plural phosphor cathode-ray tube
    color television system including deflection circuits to direct the ray
    beam to the proper phosphor of the tube.


CLS 315/376
TXT Subject matter under subclass 375 wherein the deflection means is a plural
    electrostatic electrode grid system separate from the screen, and the
    cathode-ray beam, when present, passes through the electrode system so that
    the electrical circuit, when energized, places different voltages on the
    individual electrodes to electrically move the cathode-ray beams to strike
    one or more of the phosphor materials at any given time.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 461+ for
    cathode-ray color screens, per se, or claimed as a part of a cathode-ray
    tube.

    348,    Television, subclass 815 for a plural phosphor cathode-ray tube
    television system including an auxiliary deflection circuit located near
    the plural phosphors to select the proper color phosphors of the tube.


CLS 315/377
TXT Subject matter under subclass 364 wherein the cathode-ray tube includes a
    cathode-ray beam source, fluorescent target, and a marker circuit whereby
    the cathode-ray beam is caused to produce a periodically recurring
    indication pattern, or marker on the fluorescent target by the effect of
    the marker circuit on the cathode-ray beam, when the marker circuit is
    energized.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for markers caused by intensity
    control of the cathode-ray beam when distinctly claimed as a marker.  For
    intensity control in general, see subclasses 383+.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass are cathode-ray tube marker
    circuitry subcombinations with energization means connected thereto which
    are connected to deflection means to give a pulse input to the deflection
    means but wherein the deflection means is not distinctly claimed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 600+ for devices
    determining impedance, admittance and related quantities which may employ a
    marker signal generator.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for electron space discharge devices having
    a particular wave output with a marker pulse.

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 138, 142+ and 182+ for echo type
    communication systems which utilize a cathode-ray tube including a marker
    circuit.

    348,    Television, subclass 601 for television systems which include
    circuitry to generate and display a marker on a cathode-ray tube.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 3+ for light type radar
    systems which may have electronic markers on cathode-ray radar displays.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclass 113 for sonar devices which have a cathode-ray display having an
    electronic marker.


CLS 315/378
TXT Subject matter under subclass 364 wherein the cathode-ray tube includes a
    cathode-ray beam source and a fluorescent target to receive the cathode-ray
    beam and the deflection means includes (1) two deflection means
    orthoepically positioned with respect to each other and operably connected
    to the cathode-ray tube, each deflection means having an electrical circuit
    including a periodic waveform generator, the two waveforms being out of
    phase with respect to each other by ninety degrees to cause both deflection
    means to act simultaneously upon the cathode-ray beam to form a circular,
    spiral, or radial trace on the target or (2) a deflection means connected
    to the electrical circuit to cause the cathode-ray beam to strike the
    target in a radial manner at various angular degrees about a point on the
    target or (3) deflection means including a combination of mechanical and
    electrical means to cause the cathode-ray beam to describe a circular trace
    on the fluorescent target when the cathode-ray beam source and deflection
    circuitry are energized.

    (1)     Note.  Included are circular, spiral, and sector sweep circuits.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    372+,   for plural target cathode-ray tubes which may utilize a circular,
    spiral, or radial sweep system to control the cathode-ray beam of the tube.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 176+ for radar systems having a
    cathode-ray tube readout which may use a circular, spiral, or radial
    deflection of the cathode-ray beam of the tube.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclass 113 for compressional wave echo location systems having a
    cathode-ray tube readout which uses a circular, spiral, or radial
    deflection of the cathode-ray beam of the tube.


CLS 315/379
TXT Subject matter under subclass 364 wherein the cathode-ray tube has
    associated with it (1) circuitry for the regulation of the energization of
    the cathode-ray tube, (2) circuitry for the regulation of the cathode-ray
    beam current, density, or velocity in the tube, (3) circuitry for focusing
    the cathode-ray beam in the tube, or (4) circuitry under the control of the
    electrical circuit or the deflection means for controlling the cathode-ray
    beam of the tube.

    (1)     Note.  The term focusing includes the concentration of an electron
    beam or the converging or diverging of the rays of the beam by an
    electrostatic or magnetic lens.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.1,   for cathode-ray tube circuits which may include regulation of
    secondary emission in a cathode-ray tube.

    13.1,   for cathode-ray tube circuits which may include regulation of the
    concentration of a plurality of cathode-ray beams.

    368,    for cathode-ray tube convergence circuits for concentration of a
    plurality of cathode-ray beams, e.g., in color cathode-ray tubes.

    369,    for cathode-ray tube deflection circuits wherein the target
    controls deflection of the cathode-ray beam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 530+ for tubes with a particular source of power or
    bias voltage and subclass 549 for miscellaneous circuits with hum or
    interaction prevention means.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 20+ for data responsive
    selective intensity control in connection with driving a cathode-ray tube.

    348,    Television, subclasses 284+, 325+, 377+, 379, 380+, and 805+ for
    regulation means or circuitry to control the scanning cathode-ray beam of a
    television system.


CLS 315/380
TXT Subject matter under subclass 379 wherein the circuit which controls the
    deflection means functions to control the cathode-ray beam of the tube only
    at initiation or termination of the cathode-ray beam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 118+ for echo systems of the distance
    determining pulse type wherein the echo may cause actuation of a
    cathode-ray tube display device.

    348,    Television, subclasses 377 for a color television system having a
    circuit to control the high voltage anode or the intensity of the cathode
    rays of a color television tube to prevent tube damage or X-ray emission
    from the tube.


CLS 315/381
TXT Subject matter under subclass 380 wherein the cathode-ray tube has a
    cathode or grid electrode and the circuitry for the control of the
    cathode-ray beam at the initiation or termination of the beam controls the
    beam through the grid or cathode of the cathode-ray tube.


CLS 315/382
TXT Subject matter under subclass 379 wherein the circuitry associated with the
    cathode-ray tube for control of the cathode-ray beam, when present,
    comprises circuitry for concentration or diffusing the cathode-ray beam to
    produce a desired cathode-ray beam cross sectional shape and sharpness.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14+,    for cathode-ray tube circuits with a plurality of cathode-ray beam
    concentrating stages.

    31,     for cathode-ray tube circuits including circuitry for focusing or
    concentrating the cathode-ray beam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 311 for electron microscopes with means
    for focusing the electron beam on a target specimen, and 396+ for devices
    or systems with charged particle beam focusing.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 414, 442, and 452+
    for cathode-ray tubes which include means for focusing a cathode-ray beam
    on the target of the cathode-ray tube.


CLS 315/382.1
TXT For television:

    Subject matter under subclass 382 wherein the circuit is adapted for use
    with cathode-ray tubes in television systems.


CLS 315/383
TXT Subject matter under subclass 379 wherein the brightness of a trace on the
    screen of the cathode-ray tube is controlled in such a manner as to
    turn-off, turn-on, or vary the brightness of a spot produced by a
    cathode-ray on the screen of the cathode-ray tube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for cathode-ray tube circuits which vary the intensity of a primary
    cathode-ray beam to influence the rate of secondary emission in a
    cathode-ray tube.

    377,    for cathode-ray tube deflection circuits with marker means in which
    the marker may be produced by intensification of the cathode-ray beam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 107+, 133, 139+, and 146 for pulse
    type distance and direction determination systems of the radar type wherein
    the display may be produced by intensity modulation of the cathode-ray beam
    in the system.


CLS 315/384
TXT Subject matter under subclass 383 in which the cathode-ray is turned-off
    during normal operation of the cathode-ray tube.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter in which a cathode-ray is turned-on or
    turned-off by deflecting the cathode-ray to a portion of the cathode-ray
    tube where a trace will not form due to lack of a phosphor material is
    excluded from this subclass and may be found in subclass 379 for broad
    control of a cathode-ray.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 634+ for the blanking of the cathode-ray
    beam of a picture tube in television systems which may also claim the
    deflection circuitry for the cathode-ray beam in a television image signal
    processing circuitry.


CLS 315/385
TXT Subject matter under subclass 383 wherein the cathode-ray is turned on
    during normal operation of the cathode-ray tube and a trace appears on the
    screen of the cathode-ray tube.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 20+ for data responsive
    selective intensity control in connection with driving a cathode-ray tube.

    348,    Television, subclass 635 for the unblanking of the cathode-ray beam
    of a color picture tube which may also include the deflection circuitry for
    the cathode-ray beam in a television processing circuit.


CLS 315/386
TXT Subject matter under subclass 383 wherein the deflection means, and the
    circuit connected thereto are responsible for a change in the cathode-ray
    beam density, current, or velocity which in turn results in control of the
    brightness of a trace on the screen or target of the cathode-ray tube.


CLS 315/387
TXT Subject matter under subclass 364 wherein the electrical circuitry
    connected to the deflection means includes at least one feedback loop.

    (1)     Note.  Compensation for nonlinearity in the deflection of the
    cathode-ray caused by the deflection means or components of the deflection
    circuit are included here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370,    for cathode-ray deflection circuits which include circuitry for
    distortion, correction or reduction generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 137 for miscellaneous sawtooth waveform generation with
    particular feedback and subclass 590 for miscellaneous circuits with
    particular feedback.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 75+, appropriate subclasses, for signal
    feedbacks in amplifier circuits.


CLS 315/388
TXT Subject matter under subclass 387 wherein the circuitry for deflection of
    the cathode-ray beam of the cathode-ray tube includes a plurality of
    feedback loops.

    (1)     Note.  The plural feedbacks may comprise plural negative feedback
    loops, plural positive feedback loops, or combined positive and negative
    feedback loops.


CLS 315/389
TXT Subject matter under subclass 387 wherein the circuitry includes a feedback
    loop of the degenerative type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    388,    for plural feedback circuits which may include at least one
    negative feedback loop or circuit.


CLS 315/390
TXT Subject matter under subclass 389 wherein the circuitry consists only of
    circuits containing tube devices and is completely void of all solid state
    devices or circuitry.


CLS 315/391
TXT Subject matter under subclass 364 wherein the cathode-ray tube includes a
    cathode-ray beam source and a target and the deflection circuitry includes
    plural, separate, deflection means and each deflection means has its own
    electrical circuit whereby the individual electrical circuits, when
    energized, cause the cathode-ray beam, when present, to be deflected by
    each deflection means in its passage from the beam source to the target.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for ray deflecting means with plural concentrating accelerating,
    and/or de-accelerating stages.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 421+ for
    cathode-ray tubes with beam deflection means; especially subclasses 426+
    for plural beam deflecting means.

    348,    Television, subclasses 284+, 325+, and 805+ for television systems
    with means for deflecting a cathode-ray beam in plural directions.


CLS 315/392
TXT Subject matter under subclass 391 wherein the target produces a visible
    trace when hit by a cathode-ray beam and the deflection means and
    electrical circuits electrically connected thereto when energized cause a
    plurality of visible indications or traces to be displayed on the target
    which will enable simultaneous or sequential viewing of the displayed
    indications or traces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for plural displays or traces on the cathode-ray tube screen
    produced by plural cathode-rays.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, for display of plural
    waveforms and analysis thereof.


CLS 315/393
TXT Subject matter under subclass 391 wherein each electrical circuits includes
    a generator delivering to its deflection means, a current or voltage
    waveform which periodically sweeps the cathode-ray beam across the target,
    and both electrical circuits are connected together to cause both waveforms
    to sweep the cathode-ray beam at the same time.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 142+ and 176+ for radar systems which
    utilize an indicator having a cathode-ray beam deflected onto a screen of a
    cathode-ray tube by means of synchronized horizontal vertical deflection
    systems.

    348,    Television, subclasses 805+ for cathode-ray tube color television
    systems and appropriate subclasses for noncolor television systems
    utilizing horizontal and vertical synchronized sweep circuits.


CLS 315/394
TXT Subject matter under subclass 391 wherein the cathode-ray beam is plurally
    deflected in the same deflection plane by energization of the deflection
    circuits.

    (1)     Note.  The deflection in the same plane may be in the same or the
    opposite direction to be proper for this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes cathode-ray tube circuits which
    provide for cathode-ray wobble means in the deflection circuit in addition
    to the normal deflection means.


CLS 315/395
TXT Subject matter under subclass 364 wherein the electrical circuit connected
    to the deflection means causes deflection of the cathode-ray beam, when
    present, and includes circuitry for applying a plurality of voltages or
    currents to the deflection means to cause the cathode-ray beam to move in
    one direction.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass, the deflection means will deflect
    cathode-rays within a cathode-ray tube in only one direction transverse to
    the movement of the cathode-rays within a cathode-ray tube.

    (2)     Note.  The voltages or currents applied to the deflection means may
    be of the same type or different in character. Also the plural currents or
    voltages may be delivered simultaneously or alternately to the deflection
    means.

    (3)     Note.  Magnetic flyback deflection circuits which induce a second
    current sequentially to the deflection means are in subclasses 405+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    398,    for centering of a cathode-ray beam wherein a direct current or
    voltage and a waveform current or voltage is supplied to the deflection
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 284+, 325+, 377+, 379, 380+, and 805+ for
    television systems which may include more than one current or voltage
    applied to the deflection means.


CLS 315/396
TXT Subject matter under subclass 395 wherein the deflection means includes two
    deflection elements and the electrical circuit includes means connected to
    each of the deflection elements to simultaneously deliver voltage or
    current to each of the deflection elements so that the voltage or current
    delivered to each deflection element is one hundred an eighty degrees out
    of phase with respect to each other.

    (1)     Note.  Each deflection element may have its own amplifier or one
    amplifier may deliver the voltage or current to both of the deflection
    elements.

    (2)     Note.  Plural voltages or currents may be applied to center the
    cathode-ray beam in addition to the push-pull deflection voltages.

    (3)     Note.  Solid state and tube amplifiers are both grouped together in
    this section.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 55 for amplifiers with distributed parameter
    type coupling having a push-pull circuit arrangement, and subclass 81 for
    push- pull circuits utilizing a feedback type amplifier, subclasses 118+
    for amplifiers which include a push-pull stage.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 114 for solid state active element
    oscillators which function in a push-pull mode.


CLS 315/397
TXT Subject matter under subclass 396 wherein the elements are deflection coils
    and the means connected to each of the deflection elements includes a
    separate amplifier having an input and an output, connected through its
    output to each of the coils and means connected to the input of each
    amplifier to cause the current to increase through one of the coils and its
    associated amplifier while at the same time causing the current to decrease
    through the other coil and its associated amplifier.


CLS 315/398
TXT Subject matter under subclass 395 wherein the circuit includes an
    arrangement to provide current or voltage to the deflecting means, which
    current or voltage in use with a cathode-ray tube, will establish the
    initial static position at which cathode-rays will strike the target of a
    cathode-ray tube.


CLS 315/399
TXT Subject matter under subclass 364 wherein the deflection means is a
    cathode-ray deflection coil, and the coil, when energized through the
    electrical circuit, produces a magnetic field which interacts with the
    cathode-ray beam when present in the tube to move the beam transverse to
    and simultaneously with the movement of the beam within the tube.

    (1)     Note.  The art herein is mainly magnetic sweep circuits which will
    move a cathode-ray beam within a cathode-ray tube in one direction only.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 210+ for magnetic electron or ion beam
    deflection devices, per se.


CLS 315/400
TXT Subject matter under subclass 399 wherein the electrical circuit includes a
    magnetic saturable element.

    (1)     Note.  A magnetic saturable element for this subclass includes a
    saturable reactor, a saturating reactor, or a saturable transformer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 401+
    for nonlinear reactor systems.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 206,
    214, 249, 302, 310, and 329 for voltage magnitude control systems utilizing
    saturable reactors.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 8 for amplifier systems wherein the active
    element is a saturable core reactor.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 155+ for inductive regulators of the
    saturable core type.


CLS 315/401
TXT Subject matter under subclass 399 wherein the electrical circuit includes a
    heat responsive electrical element.

    (1)     Note.  The deflection circuit may include a sweep waveform
    generator, and output amplifier responsive to the generator, and
    connections to the deflection coil from the amplifier.  The temperature
    responsive elements may be in the generator, amplifier, or in the
    connections to the deflection coil.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 143 for thermally responsive impedance
    amplifiers.

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 217 for electron or ion beam deflecting
    electromagnets responsive to temperature.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 7 for resistors wherein the
    resistance value is temperature compensated.


CLS 315/402
TXT Subject matter under subclass 399 wherein the electrical circuit includes a
    voltage dependent resistor.

    (1)     Note.  A voltage dependent resistor is one which does not follow
    Ohm's law and has a negative temperature coefficient of resistance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    293-298 for an automatic impedance system responsive to voltage and/or
    current.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 20+ for resistors whose resistance
    value is responsive to current or voltage.


CLS 315/403
TXT Subject matter under subclass 399 wherein the electrical circuit connected
    to the deflection coil includes an amplifier having an input and an output,
    and the output of the amplifier is connected to the deflection coil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    378,    for circular, spiral or radial sweeps which include a deflection
    coil circuit having an amplifier.

    379+,   for amplifiers type deflection coil circuits which additionally
    include a control of the cathode-ray beam.

    387+,   for amplifier feedback type deflection coil circuits.

    391+,   for amplifier type deflection coil circuits which deflect a
    cathode-ray beam at plural different locations in the same direction or
    will deflect the beam in two different directions simultaneously or
    sequentially.

    395+,   for amplifier type deflection circuits applying plural potentials
    or currents additively or sequentially to a deflection coil, particularly
    subclass 397 for push-pull deflection coil circuits.


CLS 315/404
TXT Subject matter under subclass 403 wherein the amplifier is of the electric
    space discharge type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    379+,   for coil deflection circuits using a tube type amplifier combined
    with a control of the cathode-ray beam.

    387+,   for feedback deflection coil circuits which include a tube type
    amplifier.

    391+,   for plural deflection circuits which include tube type amplifiers.

    395+,   for coil type deflection circuits which include tube type
    amplifiers to deliver plural currents to a deflection coil, particularly
    subclass 397 for a push-pull coil type deflection circuit.

    409+,   for electrostatic type deflection circuits which include a tube
    type amplifier.


CLS 315/405
TXT Subject matter under subclass 404 wherein the electrical circuit includes a
    transformer and the transformer is connected between the output of the
    amplifier and the deflection coil.

    (1)     Note.  The transformer may be (1) formed of two windings where one
    winding is connected to the output of the amplifier and the other winding,
    by induction, delivers current to the deflection coil, (2) a multiple
    tapped winding wherein the output from the amplifier flows through a
    portion of the tapped winding to induce a voltage in another portion of the
    tapped winding which is connected to the deflection coil, or (3) have the
    output current of the amplifier tube passing through a winding or a portion
    of the winding of the transformer and the current through the winding
    causes a voltage across the winding which energizes the deflection coil.


CLS 315/406
TXT Subject matter under subclass 405 wherein there is included a diode or
    additional amplifier to selectively pass current produced by the induced
    voltages of the transformer or deflection coil, the movement of the current
    through the diode or amplifier being used as a power source.

    (1)     Note.  The power source may be to supply the second anode voltage
    for a cathode-ray tube or kinescope or to boost the plate voltage of an
    amplifier tube.


CLS 315/407
TXT Subject matter under subclass 404 wherein the electrical circuit includes a
    diode or another amplifier device connected in circuit across the
    deflection coil.

    (1)     Note.  The diode or another amplifier may receive current at the
    same time the deflection coil does from the amplifier or the diode or
    another amplifier may receive current from the coil when the amplifier is
    not conducting.

    (2)     Note.  Herein are diodes or amplifiers across the deflection coil
    used to damp the energy of oscillation caused by the shock energization of
    the coil when the amplifier is cutoff.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    406,    for deflection coil circuits which include a power recovery circuit
    in the amplifier-transformer deflection coil circuit and which may include
    a damper tube connected across the transformer or deflection coils.


CLS 315/408
TXT Subject matter under subclass 399 wherein the electrical circuit connected
    to the deflection coil includes a solid state switching device.

    (1)     Note.  A solid-state switching device is a semiconductor which may
    be a diode or a multielectrode element such as a silicon controlled
    rectifier, a silicon controlled switch, or a four-layer Shockley diode
    wherein no amplification of the current takes place in passing through the
    switching device to the deflection coil.

    (2)     Note.  The combination of a deflection circuit including the
    switching device and a power supply energized from the deflection circuit
    is also in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    379+,   for deflection circuits combined with an added control of the
    cathode-ray beam.

    391+,   for plural cathode-ray deflection circuits which deflect a
    cathode-ray beam at plural locations or in a plurality of directions and
    wherein any of the circuits may include a solid state switch.

    395+,   for deflection circuits which apply plural potentials or currents
    to the deflection means wherein the circuits may include a solid state
    switch in the deflection circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 25.02+ for processes and apparatus for
    making barrier layer devices.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 131+ for miscellaneous sawtooth or sweep waveform
    generation utilizing a solid-state device, subclasses 438+ for a four or
    more layer device (e.g., SCR) gating circuit, and subclasses 493+ for a two
    electrode solid-state device gating circuit.


CLS 315/409
TXT Subject matter under subclass 364 wherein the deflection means is a pair of
    electrostatic plates and the electrical circuit, connected to the pair of
    plates, includes a space discharge device, the electrostatic plates when
    energized by the circuit causes an electrostatic field which interacts with
    the beam to move the beam in a directing transverse to and simultaneously
    with the movement of the beam within the tube.

    (1)     Note.  The term "space discharge device" includes diodes and tube
    type amplifiers wherein an electric current flows between two spaced
    electrodes in an envelope and the space is constituted by a gas, vapor, or
    a vacuum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    364+,   for deflection circuits including solid state diodes or amplifying
    devices connected to the deflection means.

    379+,   for a deflection circuit to deflect a cathode-ray beam in one or
    more directions transverse to the movement of the beam and additional
    cathode-ray beam control.

    391+,   for plural separate cathode-ray beam deflection circuits to deflect
    the cathode-ray beam in one direction or in two orthogonal directions
    transverse to the movement of the cathode-ray beam.

    395+,   for cathode-ray beam deflection circuits which require plural
    currents or potentials to operate the deflection means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 131+ for miscellaneous sawtooth waveform generation
    which may include an electron discharge device.

    330,    Amplifiers, appropriate subclasses for electric circuits which
    utilize a space discharge amplifying device.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 129+ for relaxation oscillators using gas
    tubes and subclasses 143+ for relaxation oscillators utilizing a vacuum
    tube to form a deflection waveform to be applied to a deflection means of a
    cathode-ray tube.


CLS 315/410
TXT Subject matter under subclass 409 wherein the electrical circuit includes a
    condenser and connections between the condenser and the discharge device to
    cause the condenser when charged, to discharge through the discharge device.

    (1)     Note.  The circuits for the most part here are sweep circuits but
    the circuits are generally not claimed as having the condenser periodically
    charged and discharged.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227,    and indented subclasses, for systems under the class definition,
    which include a condenser and a discharge device of the gas or vapor
    ionization type, the condenser being charged through the gas or vapor tube.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 108
    for waveform or waveshape determinative or pulse producing systems which
    include a capacitor.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    subclasses 166+ for charging or discharging a capacitor, per se.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 183 for a pulse generated by a capacitor discharging
    through an electron tube.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 131 and 152 for relaxation oscillators
    using the charging and discharging of a capacitor to form a deflection
    waveform to be applied to a cathode-ray tube deflection means.


CLS 315/411
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 which includes a transformer forming part
    of a cathode-ray beam deflection circuit and a circuit powered by the
    transformer connected to the transformer, said circuit being a power source
    (1) to supply energy to an electrode of a cathode-ray tube or to an element
    connected to the cathode-ray tube or (2) to regulate the energy delivered
    through the deflection circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for a circuit to supply potential or current to a cathode-ray tube
    modulating means.

    291+,   for current or voltage regulation of a circuit supplying potential
    or current to an electric lamp or discharge device generally.

    364+,   particularly subclass 406 for a cathode-ray beam deflection circuit
    source for a power supply which energizes one or more cathode-ray tube
    electrodes.

    382,    for a circuit to supply potential or current to a cathode-ray tube
    focusing or concentrating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 277
    and 291 for magnetic field control of an electric space discharge device
    for controlling the voltage or current to a load generally.

    348,    Television, subclasses 377+, 379, 380+, and  730 for television
    systems which may include a deflection circuit energized power supply to
    regulate the beam intensity of the picture tube.


CLS 315/500
TXT HIGH ENERGY PARTICLE ACCELERATOR TUBE:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a subcombination
    consisting of a space discharge tube device combined with a particular
    circuit means, wherein the space discharge means includes at least one
    electron or other charged particle accelerating type tube.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass, the high energy charged particle has
    energies in excess of one million electron volts (eV).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 281+ for methods and apparatus for the
    ionic separation or analysis of material (e.g., mass spectrometer),
    subclasses 306+ for methods and apparatus for the inspection of solids or
    liquids by charged particles (e.g., electron microscope), and subclasses
    423+ for methods and apparatus for generating ions.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclasses 100+ and 190+ for processes and/or devices utilizing accelerated
    particles in obtaining thermonuclear reactions or in treating materials
    with accelerated neutron particles.


CLS 315/501
TXT Magnetic field acceleration means:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 including means for initially
    accelerating the electrons or other charged particles by a time-varying
    magnetic flux and additional means for providing a cyclically varying
    electric field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5+,     for a low energy particle (i.e., cathode ray) being accelerated by
    an inductive field.


CLS 315/502
TXT Cyclotron:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein the space discharge tube means
    includes two large, flat, hollow, semicircular segments of thin metal
    placed with their diametric edges closely parallel, the two segments being
    given a high frequency alternating potential difference, producing a
    rapidly oscillating field in the space between them, whereby a free charged
    particle (e.g., proton, deuteron, or alpha particle) released in the space
    is caused to be pulled first in one direction and then another.

    (1)     Note.  The influence of a magnetic field perpendicular to the plane
    of the segments causes the free particles to follow a circular path (i.e.,
    as in a cyclotron).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 62 for the structure
    of cyclotrons, and subclasses 359.1+ for positive ion accelerator structure
    without having electric control circuitry.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclass 112 for cyclotron-type acceleration of nuclei.


CLS 315/503
TXT Synchrotron:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein the space discharge tube means
    includes means for accelerating charged particles (e.g., electrons) in a
    circular orbit in an increasing magnetic field, which means consists of
    means for generating an alternating electric field and applying it in
    synchronism with the orbital motion of the particles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclasses 100+ for the utilization of a synchrotron-type device in
    confining and controlling a plasma to yield thermonuclear reactions.


CLS 315/504
TXT Betatron:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein the space discharge tube means
    includes a particle accelerating means comprising a device in which the
    circular orbit of the accelerated particles (e.g., electrons) has a
    constant radius, the particles being accelerated by a rapidly changing
    magnetic field.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclasses 100+ for the utilization of a betatron-type device in confining
    and controlling a plasma to yield thermonuclear reactions.


CLS 315/505
TXT Linear accelerator (Linac):

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein the electrons or other charged
    particles are accelerated along a straight line.

    (1)     Note.  These include magnetic induction type accelerators and all
    types of ``Linac" accelerators (radio frequency quadrupole, RFQ; drift tube
    linac, DTL; coupled cavity linac, CCL; and side coupled linac, SCL).


CLS 315/506
TXT Electrostatic accelerator means:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein the electrons or other charged
    particles are accelerated by a change of electric field without magnetic
    influence.


CLS 315/507
TXT With injection or extraction means:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 including (a) means combined with a
    source for introducing the electrons or other charged particles into a path
    or (b) means for ejecting the electrons or other charged particles after
    desired energy levels have been obtained.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 423+ for methods and apparatus for
    generating ions.


CLS 318/
TTL ELECTRICITY:  MOTIVE POWER  SYSTEMS

CLS 318/
TXT

    I.      BASIC SUBJECT MATTER OF THE CLASS:

    A.      This is the generic class for system of electrical supply and/or of
    control for one or more electric motors where the electric motor is claimed
    in combination with such systems of supply and/or control and the electric
    motor as claimed constitutes the ultimate and sole electrical load device
    supplied by the system or constitutes the ultimate and sole electrical
    device being controlled.

    B.      Definition of Terms Used.

    For the purposes of this class, certain terms are defined as follows:

    1.      ELECTRIC MOTOR:

    a.      A machine which transforms electric energy into mechanical energy.

    b.      SPECIAL TYPES OF MOTORS The several designations applied to
    distinguish the several types of motors such as series motors, induction
    motors, synchronous motors, etc., shall apply to those motors whose normal
    running  characteristics are so described.  Thus a synchronous motor is one
    which runs as a synchronous motor under normal running or load  conditions.
     This is true even though the motor may be driven by some other device
    either (mechanical or electrical) during the starting and/or accelerating
    period or may operate on some other motor principle during the starting or
    accelerating period.  Such an instance may be illustrated by a synchronous
    motor which is provided with means to cause it to start as an induction
    motor and subsequently and normally run at synchronous speed.  Such a motor
    is considered to be a synchronous motor, since under normal running
    conditions, it exhibits all the characteristics of a synchronous motor.

    c.      NONMAGNETIC MOTOR
    A motor having means other than a magnetic field producing means for
    producing a mechanical force.  Example of nonmagnetic motors are
    piezo-electric crystals, thermo-electric motors.

    d.      IMPACT,  MECHANICAL   SHOCK, OR VIBRATION-PRODUCING MOTORAn
    electric motor having means for moving one of the motor parts into impact
    or percussive contact with one or more other parts of either the motor
    structure or a part which is structurally combined with the motor
    structure, or a motor whose prime or essential function is to transmit
    mechanical shock or vibrations to a device or mechanism secured to the
    motor or upon which the motor may be mounted, (e.g., rotary motor with the
    rotor unbalanced to produce vibrations which are transmitted to its support.

    e.      MAGNETOSTRICTIVE MOTOR
    A motor having a magnetizable member or which has its dimensions changed as
    a result of changing currents in the electromagnetic field producing means
    which effects the magnetizable member, the physical distortion or change in
    dimensions producing the mechanical energy.

    f.      RECIPROCATING OR OSCILLATING MOTOR
    A motor which is structurally arranged or constructed so as to have a
    limited degree of movement, and which is provided with means for moving the
    movable (working element) of the motor to-and-fro repeatedly over
    substantially the same path or arc of movement (including rotations about
    an axis co-incident with the geometrical or center-or-gravity axis of the
    movable element of the motor). Compare this definition and the definition
    of "LINEAR MOVEMENT MOTORS" in section IB1g.

    g.      LINEAR MOVEMENT MOTORS
    A motor having means for causing the working element to move in a
    substantially linear or uni-directional path.  The path may be straight,
    curved, tortuous, or even closed upon itself, provided the movable element
    is not pivoted for rotation about an axis.  The motor may have means for
    reversing the direction of movement of the movable element.  Where the
    reversing means includes means for periodically or repeatedly reversing the
    motor at predetermined intervals, the motor system is considered to be an
    oscillating or reciprocating motor system. See the definition of
    OSCILLATING OR RECIPROCATING MOTOR in section IB1f.

    h.      SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR
    An alternating-current or a pulsating current motor which, under
    running-speed conditions, operates at an average speed which is always
    exactly proportional to the frequency or periodicity of the source which
    supplies electric energy to the armature or primary circuit of the motor
    and which speed is independent of the voltage of the source, the magnitude
    of the field excitation, or the load on the motor.

    i.      INDUCTION MOTORS
    An asynchronous alternating current motor which operates during running
    speed conditions as a result of electromagnetic induction and which has at
    least two electrical conductors which are mounted or positioned in
    electromagnetic relationship with each other and for movement relative to
    each other, and in which alternating current energy delivered to one of the
    conductors ("primary" or "inducing" member) induces in the other of said
    conductors ("secondary" or "induced" member) an alternating current and the
    mechanical energy is obtained as a result of the electromagnetic inductive
    action between the magnetic field generated by the alternating current in
    the one conductor and the magnetic field generated by the induced current
    in the other conductor. The secondary or induced winding is usually short
    circuited or shunted by means of an impedance.  An example of an induction
    motor is the squirrel cage motor, that is, a motor where the secondary
    winding consists of a plurality of short-circuited bars.  See the
    definition of a "repulsion motor".

    j.      REPULSION MOTOR
    An induction motor (defined in section I, B, 1, i above) in which the
    secondary or induced member is provided with a commutator, the commutator
    being engaged with a pair of circumferencially spaced short-circuited
    brushes, and in which either means (e.g., an auxiliary winding) is provided
    in inductive relation to the secondary to produce a magnetic field in time
    phase with, and displaced in relation to, the field produced by the primary
    or inducing member, or the brushes are displaced from the mid-position
    between adjacent primary (winding) pole positions whereby the motor may
    operate continuously under running-speed conditions.  See the definition of
    self-commutated impulse or reluctance motors in section IB1n.

    k.      ALTERNATING-CURRENT COMMUTATING MOTOR
    A motor having a commutator electrically connected to a winding of the
    motor, the motor being designed to operate on alternating current.  Such
    motors are sometimes referred to as "series A-C motors", "universal
    motors".  See the definition of Repulsion motor in section IB1j above, and
    the definition of self-commutated impulse or reluctance motors in section
    IB1n below.

    l.      SERIES MOTOR
    A motor having at least one field producing winding and at least one
    armature winding, all of the field-producing windings which are connected
    to be energized being electrically connected in series-circuit relationship
    with all of the armature windings which are connected to be energized.

    m.      HOMOPOLAR OR UNIFORM-FIELD MOTORS
    A noncommutating motor having a magnetic field producing means combined
    with one or more electric conductors mounted to move relative to and in
    proximity to the field producing means, the field producing means being so
    constructed or energized that the magnetic field produced thereby is, at
    any instant of time, of the same polarity or direction throughout its
    extent with reference to the path of travel of the movable electric
    conductor or conductors.

    n.      SELF-COMMUTATED IMPULSE OR RELUCTANCE MOTORS
    A rotary motor of the type in which the rotor element tends to assume a
    predetermined angular position when the motor is continuously energized and
    is provided with a commutator or circuit making and breaking device which
    is actuated by the motor to determine the instants of time at which the
    field producing windings thereof are energized and de-energized relative to
    the angular position of the rotary element. See the definition of a
    Repulsion Motor in section IB1j above.

    2.      CIRCUIT MAKING AND/OR BREAKING DEVICE
    A device for fully establishing and/or fully interrupting the electrical
    conductivity of an electrical path or circuit between two or more points in
    an electrical circuit by relative movement of electrically conductive
    elements into and/or out of physical contact with each other.

    3.      IMPEDANCE OR IMPEDANCE DEVICE
    A means having inductance, capacity, resistance or any combination thereof
    and excluding any source of electric energy.

    4.      DEFINITION OF MOTOR OPERATION CONTROL:

    a.      ACCELERATION CONTROL Controlling the change of speed of an electric
    motor from zero speed to some running speed value and vice versa, or from
    one running speed value to another running speed value. Mere starting of
    the motor is not considered to be acceleration control unless the
    acceleration of the motor is controlled after the starting operation.
    Acceleration control includes deceleration control.  Deceleration control
    differs from motor braking in that in deceleration control no means are
    utilized for applying an opposing torque or output force to the driving
    member of the motor.  In deceleration control, for example, the power input
    to the motor is varied to decelerate the motor.  See the definition of
    braking below. Mere stopping of the motor by opening the supply circuit is
    not deceleration control in the absence of any means to control the rate of
    stopping, but is mere stopping.

    For the distinction between acceleration control and running speed control,
    see section IB4g of the class definition.

    b.      AUTOMATIC STARTING AND STOPPING
    Starting, stopping, or the combination of these two operations is treated
    in this class as a single motor operation.  Automatic starting and stopping
    (i.e., starting or stopping which is initiated in response to a condition)
    is classified for the most part in subclass 445 or in the subclasses
    specified in the notes to the definition of those subclasses.  If the
    stopping control involves motor braking, then the patent is classified in
    the braking control subclasses.  If the stopping control involves motor
    deceleration control, but not motor braking, then the patent is classified
    in the motor acceleration control subclasses.  If the starting control
    involves motor acceleration control, then the patent is classified in the
    motor acceleration subclasses. See section IB4k for the classification
    where the system has means for automatic starting or stopping of the motor
    and also means for performing another control operation.  Where the motor
    is stopped and then started in the reverse direction of motion, the patent
    is classified in the motor reversing control subclasses.  See section IB4f,
    below, for a definition of motor reversing control.  Where the motor
    armature or primary current is controlled during the starting and/or
    stopping period other than for acceleration, deceleration, or braking
    control, see section IB4e of the class definition.

    c.      MOTOR BRAKING CONTROL
    Includes any device or means for applying a torque or force to the power
    output element of the electric motor in a direction which is in opposition
    to the motor torque or force (resulting from electrical energization of, or
    the kinetic or potential energy stored in, the motor) and tending to
    retard, stop or prevent movement of the motor--excepting, of course, mere
    useful load devices actuated by the motor, or such forces that are normally
    inherent in the motor structure, per se, such as bearing friction, windage,
    eddy current reaction, etc. However, means providing for substantially
    increased or accentuated eddy currents in the motor structure to increase
    the retarding or braking effect, are classified herein. Examples of braking
    means included herein, include, auxiliary eddy-current disks, electric
    generators, fans, pumps, propellers and other motor shaft loading devices
    when such devices are limited in the claims to the function of braking the
    motor.  When such shaft loading devices are not limited as claimed to the
    function of braking, classification is not herein, but in some other
    appropriate place.  For the distinction between braking control and
    deceleration control see section IB4a of the class definition above.
    Braking of the motor to control the running speed of the motor (e.g., to
    maintain the speed constant) is classified in the running speed control
    subclasses.  For the distinction between motor braking and motor reversing,
    see section IB4f below.

    d.      MOTOR DECELERATION CONTROL
    See the definition of motor acceleration control in section IB4a for the
    definition of motor deceleration control.

    e.      MOTOR LOAD CONTROL
    Controlling the mechanical load actuated by the motor or controlling the
    motor armature or primary current during the starting and/or stopping
    period of the motor.  Where the current is controlled to control the
    acceleration or deceleration of the motor, the system is classified as
    motor acceleration or deceleration control, see section IB4a of the class
    definition.  Where the current is controlled to effect motor braking the
    system is classified as braking control see section IB4c of the class
    definition.

    f.      REVERSING CONTROL
    Motor systems in which means are provided for operating the motor in one
    direction at one time and in the opposite direction at another time, or for
    causing the motor to operate in a direction opposite to that in which it
    has previously been operating.  In reversing motor systems, means must be
    provided for causing the motor to produce a torque in both directions of
    operations.  Where the motor current is controlled only to bring the motor
    to a stop or to brake the motor, there being no operation in the reverse
    direction, the system is classified as motor braking or as motor
    deceleration control, depending upon whether the motor is merely braked or
    whether the rate of deceleration is controlled. See section IB4a of the
    class definition for a definition of deceleration control and section IB4c
    of the class definition for a definition of braking control.

    g.      RUNNING SPEED CONTROL
    Motor systems in which means are provided for regulating or controlling the
    speed of an electric motor after it has been accelerated to some operating
    speed at which it is designed to run until the work or useful load device
    driven by the motor has performed its duty at that speed.

    (1)     Note.  Means for controlling the speed of the motor during the
    starting or accelerating period of operation (i.e., means for controlling
    the rate of change of speed) are not classified herein even though the
    claims may term such control as "speed" control, but are classified under
    "acceleration".  For a definition of acceleration control, see section
    IB4a, of the class definition.

            Since it is common practice to use the acceleration means for also
    controlling the running-speed of the motor, patents in which both
    acceleration and running-speed are claimed and in which both controls are
    effected by precisely  the  same means in whole or in part, classification
    will be on the basis of acceleration control only.  Under these
    circumstances of control when some claims refer only to "running-speed"
    control and/or some other claims refer only to acceleration control,
    classification will only be on the basis of the acceleration control.

            When, however, acceleration and running-speed control means are
    claimed in combination and any means not a part of the acceleration means
    are used to control the running-speed, classification will be on the basis
    of combined motor-operation controls including acceleration and
    running-speed control.

            Where means are employed to affect the magnitude of the
    running-speed of an electric motor and the magnitude of the means (e.g.,
    resistance, reactance, voltage, etc.), or the position (e.g., angle of
    brush position), of the running-speed control means is not varied or
    changed, either inherently or otherwise, at any time during the period of
    acceleration, classification will be on the basis of running-speed control
    and not on the basis of acceleration control even though there may be some
    effect on the rate of acceleration.  For example, a motor speed control
    system comprising a fixed resistor connected in the armature circuit, the
    magnitude of the resistance of which resistor does not vary appreciably
    under the conditions of use and which resistor is not varied or removed
    from the circuit during the acceleration period is classifiable under
    running speed control and not under acceleration control.

            Since some running-speed control means may be similar or even
    identical with some acceleration control means, searches for motor
    acceleration control should be, in appropriate instances, extended to
    include the running-speed control art.



    h.      STARTING AND/OR STOPPING
    Generally, the only motor systems classified as starting and stopping are
    those where the supply circuit to the motor is merely closed in the case of
    starting, or the supply circuit is opened in the case of stopping, there
    being no control of the rate of starting or stopping, or no auxiliary means
    to brake the motor.  See section IB4a of the class definition for the
    starting and/or stopping systems which include motor acceleration and/or
    deceleration control means.  See section IB4c of the class definition for
    the stopping systems which include motor braking.  See section IB4e for the
    class definition for motor systems where the armature or primary circuit is
    controlled during the starting and/or stopping period for purposes other
    than motor acceleration, deceleration or braking control.  Motor systems
    having only starting and/or stopping control are classified in the
    miscellaneous subclasses of this class.  For example, subclasses 445+
    include the motor systems where automatically controlled means control the
    starting and/or stopping. Subclasses 543+ include the motor systems where
    the system includes a three or more position motor controller to control
    the starting and/or stopping.

    k.      DIVERSE MOTOR OPERATIONS
    For the purpose of classification in the subclasses entitled "plural,
    diverse motor operations control" the following limitations are applied
    relative to the nature of the several operations:

    (I).    Starting, stopping, or the combination of these two operations is
    treated as a single motor operation control. However, since mere starting
    or stopping is an incident to many other motor operations (such, for
    example, as acceleration, reversing, braking to a stop, etc. in which
    actual starting or stopping may take place) such mere starting and/or
    stopping will not be considered a motor operation control which is included
    in this subclass as combinable with other motor operations, unless means
    are provided for effecting an automatic  starting and/or stopping in
    response to a predetermined condition. Thus, ordinary (e.g., manual)
    starting or stopping combined with running-speed control is not included in
    the plural diverse motor operations control subclasses, whereas automatic
    starting and stopping in response to thermal changes combined with means
    for causing the motor to run in either direction (reversing) is included as
    plural diverse motor operations control.  For example; automatic opening of
    motor circuit at limit of travel plus simultaneously shorting the armature
    for dynamic braking is classified as combined braking and automatic
    starting and/or stopping.  Likewise, automatically opening the circuit of
    the motor while running at an appreciable speed coupled with a braking
    operation simultaneously with or shortly thereafter is considered a plural
    operational control.  The following motor operations controls are included
    in the plural diverse motor operations control subclasses:

    (a).    Reversing control

    (b).    Acceleration control

    (c).    Running-speed con              trol

    (d).    Braking control

    (e).    Motor load control,               and

    (f).            Automatic starting                 and/or stopping.

            For definitions of the various individual controls listed above see
    the other sections under section IB4 of this  class which pertain to the
    several individual motor controls.

            The following are not included herein as combinable motor controls:

    (a).Phase or Power Factor Control.

    (b).Temperature control of the motor, including heating or cooling thereof.

    (c).Signalling, testing, indicating or measuring of conditions in or about
    the motor.

    (d).Ordinary or mere starting and/or stopping of the motor.

    (e).Phase splitting or phase conversion to adapt a motor for operation from
    a source of electrical supply having a different number of phases than that
    for which the motor is wound.

    (f).    Means for lubricating the motor.


    C.      Generic or normally recited electric motor

    1.      Generic Motor System With Disclosed But Not Claimed Electric Motor.

    Motor systems where the disclosure states that any one of a plurality of
    motors may be used in the system, one of which is an electric motor and
    another is a non-electric motor, and there is no claim limiting the system
    to having a non-electric motor, are classified in Class 318.

    Where the system includes two or more motors, see section I, G below.

    2.      Motor Recited by Name Only

    The mere inclusion of the electric motor by name only (e.g., an "electric
    motor") as an element of the combination is sufficient basis for
    classification in this Class. That is, no details of structure of the motor
    or no details of relationship between the motor and the system of supply
    and/or control--other than merely being connected so as to be supplied
    and/or controlled by the system--are necessary.

    Where, however, the electric motor is not specifically claimed as such, but
    is claimed only broadly as "a load device", an "electric translating
    device", "a power consuming device", or any other general load device
    expression which does not necessitate that the load device be an electric
    motor, classification is not in this class, but in some other appropriate
    class which provides for the electric system, per se. This is true even if
    the only disclosed load or controlled device is an electric motor.
    However, where the load or controlled device is disclosed as an electric
    motor but is claimed in general terms and an operating characteristic is
    significantly ascribed to such device which characteristic (e.g., speed,
    revolutions, limit-of-travel), is substantially only associated with
    electric motor, classification will be in this class on the assumption that
    an electric motor is in fact claimed.  Likewise, where characteristic parts
    of an electric motor are recited classification is herein even though the
    expression "electric motor" or its equivalent is not literally present in
    the claims.

    D.      Motor as Ultimate Load Device (Follow-up Systems)

    The fact that the electric motor is the ultimate load device of the system
    or that it is the ultimate device being controlled may not always be
    apparent from the language of the claims.  For example, an arrangement
    wherein means responsive to a condition (such as motor speed) of the motor
    is provided to actuate motor control or supply means to control the motor
    is a motor system.

    Applying this to a "follow-up" type of motor control wherein a motor is
    started, stopped and reversed in response to a condition of unbalance of an
    electrical network and wherein the operation of the motor also rebalances
    the network, the arrangement is a motor system since the network and its
    rebalance constitutes the control for the motor.

    However, if the above motor drives a specific load device provided for in
    another class (see section IE below), then the patent is excluded from this
    class.  For example, if the above motor drives an indicator for indicating
    the voltage of a system to which the network is connected, the overall
    arrangement is a voltage measuring system classified in Class 324.
    Similarly if the above motor drives a rheostat which regulates the voltage
    of a generator, the combination is a generation system classified in Class
    322.

    E.      Load Device Driven By The Motor (Including Power, Motion, Force, or
    Torque Transmitting Devices)

    1.      This class provides for systems of electric supply and/or control
    for electric motors in combination with load devices driven by the motor
    when such combination is not provided for in other classes.  The definition
    of, and/or the patents in, the several art classes which provide for the
    combination of particular load devices and the motive power means therefor
    will determine the lines that exist between the several classes and this
    class.  Consequently, the lines as thus determined may be different for
    different classes.

    2.      Motor Driven Device Not Significantly Claimed.

    In general, however, Class 318 provides for electric systems of supply
    and/or control for electric motors in combination with the load device
    driven thereby where the load device is claimed so broadly that it has no
    particular significance in the system as claimed other than a mere load
    device.  Thus the combination of an electric motor system and a load device
    driven by the motor wherein the load device is recited in general terms
    only (such as, for example, "a load device", a "Variable load", a "highly
    fluctuating load", "means actuated by the motor", a "Gradually increasing
    load", etc.) or in specific terms, but by name only (such for example, as a
    "vehicle", an "airplane", a "rolling mill", "grinding rolls", "gearing".
    etc.) and wherein no details of the structure of the specific load device
    or no details of relationship between the motor system and the specific
    load device, other than that merely necessary broadly to locate the motor
    or to constitute a support for the motor or to merely connect the motor to
    the load device, are set forth, is classified in this class.

    3.      Motor Driven Device Significantly Claimed

    This class, also provides for the combination of an electric motor system
    in combination with specific load devices wherein details of structure of
    the specific load device or details of relationship between the motor
    system and the specific load device are set forth only when no provision is
    made for such combination in any other class.

    4.      Plural Motor Driven Devices

    Where two or more motor driven load devices are claimed, classification
    will be in some other class.  For example only, in electric welding
    apparatus, the combination of electric motor actuating welding electrodes
    and a fan directed to cause air to circulate around the electrodes, which
    fan is actuated by another electric motor, classification is in the art
    which provides for such combinations; namely, Class 219.  If no other class
    provides for the combination of the specific plural motor driven load
    devices, classification will be in an appropriate subclass in Class 318
    depending on whether or not one or more of the load devices are
    significantly claimed.  See section IE5 below.  However, note that subclass
    39 of Class 318 provides for work and feed or indexing combinations, that
    is, motor systems having two motors, one motor driving the work and tool
    with respect to each other, and the other motor driving the means for
    positioning or feeding the tool with respect to the work.

    5.      Classification of Motor Driven Load Devices in This Class

    The combination of a motor system and a load device driven thereby where
    the load device is claimed broadly (by name only) is classified in this
    class on the basis of the motor system and not on the basis of the
    combination of the motor system and the load device.

    The combination of a motor system and a specific load device which is
    classified in this class (see section IE3 above), is classified in this
    class on the basis of the combination in subclasses 3+.  See the reference
    to Motor Driven Power, Force or Torque Transmitting Devices in section IE6
    below.

    6.      Motor Systems and Power, Motion, Force or Torque Transmitting
    Devices Driven Thereby.

    The applications of sections IE1 to 5 above, with respect to a motor system
    where the motor drives a clutch or gearing is as follows:

    a.      Clutches.  An electric motor system where the motor drives or
    actuates a clutch is not classified in Class 318 when (a) details of
    structure of the clutch, (b) details of relationship between the motor (or
    the electrical system therefor) and the clutch (or its control means) other
    than a mere driving or connecting relationship, or (c) operating or control
    means for the clutch are set forth.  Where, however, the clutch is so
    broadly claimed (such as by name only) as to merely constitute a load
    device actuated by the electric motor, classification is in this class.
    The motor driven clutches excluded from Class 318 are differently
    classified.  Electric or magnetic clutches of the type in which the
    transmission of force is solely through the agency or medium of a magnetic
    field of force are classified in Class 310, Electrical Generator or Motor
    Structure, subclass 92; fluid clutches or fluid drives in which the
    transmission of force is solely through the agency of a fluid are
    classifiable in Class 60, subclasses 52+; and mechanical clutches for the
    main part are classified in Class 192.

    b.      The combination of an electric motor system of the type
    classifiable, per se, in this class (318) with gearing of the type
    classifiable, per se, in Class 74 (Machine Element or Mechanism) is as
    follows: Where a gearing arrangement is set forth with or without an
    electric motor drive means therefor and with control means for the gearing
    other than the drive means, classification is in Class 74, even though the
    control means includes an electric motor actuator.  Where a significant
    electric motor system is set forth as the driving means for significant
    gearing, classification is in this class (318), subclasses 3+, provided no
    means for controlling the operation of the gearing is claimed.  Where a
    significant electric motor system is set forth as driving means for gearing
    recited by name only, the gearing is considered to be "load" and
    classification is in this class (318), the subclass depending on the
    significant electric motor control or supply set forth.

    c.      The combination of an electric motor system of the type
    classifiable, per se, in this class (318) with a positive stop mechanism of
    the type classifiable, per se, in Class 192 (Clutches and Power-Stop
    Control) is as follows: Where an electric motor driven device is combined
    with a mechanical stop mechanism, and the mechanism stops the drive
    independently of any motor control or deenergization, even though the
    stopping of the drive incidently causes control or deenergization of the
    motor, classification is in Class 192, Clutches and Power-Stop Control.
    Where the stopping operation requires control of the motor as well as
    operation of the stop mechanism classification is in this class (318).

    d.      Class 477, Interrelated Power Delivery Controls, Including Engine
    Control, was formed in 1993 from patents in Classes 74 and 192 relating to
    interrelated controls between an engine and a transmission, brake, or
    clutch.  Therefore the line between Class 318 and Class 477 is the same as
    exists between Class 318 and Classes 74 and 192 as set forth in I,E,6, (a),
    (b), and (c) above.

    7.      Electric Motor Control and/or Supply System as a Control Means in a
    More Comprehensive System

    Where an electric motor drives or actuates specific means for controlling a
    specific device, classification will, in general, be in the art relating to
    the specific controlled device or in the art relating to the specific
    controlling means.  For example, an electric motor control system
    automatically responsive to the speed of an internal combustion engine
    combined with means actuated by the electric motor for moving the throttle
    of the internal combustion engine to maintain the speed of the engine
    constant would not be classifiable in this Class (318), but would be
    classifiable in the art relating to throttle control of internal combustion
    engines.

    Where, however, the same motor control system is claimed, per se, (i.e.,
    without being limited to actuating the throttle) classification would be in
    this class.  And this is true even if the motor were controlled in response
    to the speed of the internal combustion engine, if the motor is not limited
    to controlling the engine.

    8.      One Electric Motor Control System Connected to Operate the Controls
    or the Supply for Another Electric Motor.

    Where one electric motor is disclosed for the purpose of operating some
    useful load device and has means for controlling the motor, the controlling
    means including a second electric motor system whose sole purpose is to
    control the load motor, classification of such combination is in this class
    (318) on the basis of the control of the (single) load motor and not on the
    basis of plural motors.

    F.      Electric Motor Systems Combined With Other Electrical Systems

    1.      Combined With Adjunctive or Ancillary Systems.

    The combination of an electrical system of supply and/or control for an
    electric motor of the type classifiable, per se, in this Class with
    electrical systems for producing some useful effect or result other than
    supplying and/or controlling the electric motor, which latter systems are
    subordinate to and operate in conjunction with the motor, the devices
    driven thereby, and/or the system of supply and/or control for the motor,
    to perform some effect or result thereupon or to indicate, test, measure,
    record, calibrate, etc. conditions in (or of) the motor, the devices
    actuated thereby and/or the system of supply and/or control for the motor,
    is classified in this class (318).

    For example:

    A system of current, voltage and power-factor measurements connected to
    measure electrical conditions in various parts of an operative electric
    motor speed control system is classified in this class (318).

    For example:

    A system for periodically recalibrating a bridge network to cause it to be
    maintained at some standard operating condition in combination with that
    bridge network connected to an electric motor so as to control the electric
    motor, is classified in this class (318).

    2.      Combined With Coordinate Electrical Systems

    The combination of an electrical system of supply and/or control of the
    type classifiable, per se, in this Class with one or more other electrical
    systems the function of which other system is to produce or effect a result
    which is distinct from the motor control or supply system but which may,
    however, be related to the operation of the motor system so as to cooperate
    therewith or which may have some portion thereof constituting a portion in
    common with both systems, is classified in some other appropriate class,
    notably Class 307, Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems,
    subclass 11.

    For example:

    A system of supply and control for an electric motor in combination with a
    communication system for sending signals and messages not restricted to the
    control and operation of the electric transmission circuit, would not be
    classifiable in this class (318) but would be classifiable in Class 307,
    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 11+.

    G.      Electric Motor Combined With Other Driving Means

    This class provides for the combination of one or more electric motors
    operating as driving means with one or more driving means which are not
    electric motors only when such combination is not elsewhere provide for.

    In general, however, plural driving means when all or one more thereof are
    other than electric motors, are provided for elsewhere.  For examples,
    plural, diverse types of motors which are nonelectric motors, are provided
    for in Class 60, Power Plants - notably subclasses 698+.

    However, typical of the art not provided for elsewhere and which is
    included herein, are the combinations of one or more electric motor
    (operating as driving means) with axle-operated driving means or
    manually-operated driving means.  Class 185, Motors: Spring, Weight, or
    Animal Powered, is the generic class for motors.

    II.     Electric Motors Not Used To Convert Electrical Energy To Mechanical
    Energy

    Electric machines although designated as "electric motors" but which are so
    connected and used to function as means not for converting electrical
    energy into mechanical energy but for some other purpose, are not
    classified herein. Electric motors to be classifiable herein must be
    connected or controlled so as to function as electric motors.

    III.    Electric Motor Structure

    The structure of electric motors (as distinguished from the systems of
    supply and control) is excluded from this class. See Class 310, Electrical
    Generator or Motor Structure, appropriate subclasses.

    IV.     Systems Generic to Motors or Generators

    Where the system includes a dynamo-electric machine, and the machine is
    disclosed but not claimed as either an electric motor or an electric
    generator, the patent is excluded from this class and is classified in
    Class 322, if the claimed system is otherwise within the definition of
    Class 322, and provided that no structure or circuit is claimed that limits
    the system to being a motor system (in case the machine is disclosed as
    being a motor). Where the machine is claimed as being either a motor or
    generator, the patent is classified in Class 322.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclass 213 for ventilating
    devices for railway-car closets where an air pump is operated by an
    electric motor.

    30,     Cutlery, appropriate subclasses for electric motor driven cutlery
    tools.

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclass 38 for platen presser
    smoothing, (ironing) machines having two press platens with a pivotedally
    electric motor operated movable head or bed.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 470+ for electric
    motor operated changeable exhibitors.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclass 100 for
    electrically driven textile apparatus for spinning, twisting or twining.

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 6 for the combination of plural diverse
    motors (including electric motors combined with nonelectric motors), and
    subclass 97 for plural nonelectric motors.  See sections IE6a and IG of the
    class definition.

    70,     Locks, subclass 271 for predetermined elapsed time interval
    controlled electric locks operated by an electric motor, 277 for electric
    motor operated lock operating mechanism, 434 for electric motor operated
    recorders for recording the condition of a lock operating mechanism.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, see section IE6 of the class
    definition.

    84,     Music, subclasses 3, 9, 11, 19, 107, 113, 405, and 407 for electric
    motor operated musical devices, subclass 123 for electric motor operated
    note selector sheet winding and rewinding mechanisms.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 35 and 49+ for electric motor
    driven locomotives.

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, subclass 3 for electromagnetic guns
    and projectors for projecting missiles through the air.

    132,    Toilet, subclass 75.8 for electric motor driven manicuring.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclass 310 for
    electric motor operated roll type flexible panel or fabric (roller blinds
    or shades) devices, and subclass 331 for motor operated arrangements having
    drape type flexible panel or fabric type devices.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 220 for electric powered two wheel
    vehicles; subclass 65 for miscellaneous electric powered vehicles, subclass
    443 for electric powered steering for vehicles.

    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, or Animal Powered, is the generic class of
    motors.

    187     Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclasses 247+ for computer control of an elevator, subclasses 277+ for an
    electric control for the power source of the drive means of an elevator,
    and subclass 280 for a door actuated electric control for the power source
    of the drive means of an elevator.

    188,    Brakes, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous braking systems
    and devices see subclasses 157 and 158+ for electric motor operated brakes.
     The general line between electric motor braking in Class 318 and the
    braking art in Class 188 and 303 is as follows. The nominal combination of
    an "electric motor" and a particular brake or braking system for braking
    the electric motor, in which combination no details of structure of the
    electric motor or no electric motor circuit relationships are set forth in
    the claim, is classified in Classes 188 and 303. Where any particulars of
    structure characteristic of an electric motor or any electric motor
    circuits relationships are set forth, classification is in Class 318.
    However, see "Note 1" appended to the search reference to Class 192,
    immediately following, for further information regarding the line between
    Class 318 and other classes for "motor control and brake" combinations.
    Whenever the braking means are connected or arranged or operated to brake a
    device actuated by the motor and thus only indirectly brake the motor,
    classification is in Class 318 provided that the motor is always braked
    whenever the brake is made effective and provided also that the load device
    to which the motor is connected does not determine classification
    elsewhere.  However, if the braking means as claimed are effective at any
    time to brake the load device without simultaneously braking the motor or
    if the braking means is effective at any time to brake any device not
    actuated by the motor, classification is not in Class 318.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass .02 for electric motor
    control and clutch; subclasses 1.1+ for electric motor control and brake.
    See section IE6 of the class definition for the line between Classes 192
    and 318 with respect to motor control and clutch control.  The line between
    Class 192, subclasses 1.1+, motor control and brake control, and Class 318
    is as follows: Where there is any control of the electric motor combined
    with additional means for braking the motor wherein the motor is always
    braked whenever the braking means is rendered effective, classification is
    in Class 318.  Where the braking means is applied to some device not
    actuated or driven by the electric motor, or where the braking means is
    applied to a device which is actuated or driven by the electric motor, but
    wherein means are provided for discontinuing the driving relationship
    between the motor and its driven device so that braking can be applied to
    the driven device without simultaneously braking the motor, classification
    is in Class 192.

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses, for electric motor
    driven conveyors.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 80 for electric
    motor driven centrifugal switches.

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclass 226 for electric motor driven overhead
    cranes, subclasses 331+ for electric motor operated self propelled hoists.

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclasses for electric motor
    actuated and controlled electric heating systems, see subclass 4 for
    electric welding apparatus having electric motors for moving the welding
    electrodes.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 52+ for electric motor controlled dispensing
    apparatus.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, for temperature and
    humidity regulating systems which include an electric motor, particularly
    subclass 74 for electric motor actuated systems.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 175+ is the generic subclass for systems
    and apparatus for automatically controlling the steering of a mobile device
    in two or three dimensions by electrical means.  See the Search Notes to
    subclasses 175+ for the other classes which provide for systems and
    apparatus for the control of the steering or motion of mobile craft by
    means of electric motors and for a statement as to the line between the
    classes.  Also see section I, (E) of the class definition of Class 318.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclass 221 for electric motor
    actuated signal systems.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 129.01 for electric motor
    actuated valves.

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants, subclasses 9+ for prime mover dynamo
    plants involving electric traction motors; subclasses 10+, 22+, 30, 31+,
    36+, 38, 46, 47, and 48 for electric motor starters for prime mover dynamo
    plants.

    303,    Fluid-Pressure and Analogous  Brake System, for fluid-pressure
    brake systems, per se, of general application. The line between Class 303
    and Class 318 parallels the line between Class 188 and Class 318, and is
    stated in the remarks under the search reference to Class 188, above.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 11+
    for plural load circuit systems, and see section I, F, 2 of the class
    definition.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, appropriate subclasses for
    structure of electrical motors, and see section I, E, 6 (a) and section III
    of the class definition.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 62 for control systems for controlling the operation of a
    consumable electrode type discharge device (arc lamp) where the system is
    controlled in response to the speed of an electric motor, subclasses 68+
    and the subclasses specified in the Notes to the definition of those
    subclasses for electric motor driven feeding mechanism for feeding an
    electrode in a consumable electrode type discharge device (arc lamp), see
    indented subclasses 69+ where the motor is a rotary electric motor, and
    subclasses 105+ and 113+ consumable electrode discharge devices having
    electromagnetic motor means for separating the electrodes from each other.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclasses for a generator source for a battery or capacitor
    charging or discharging system.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, electric motor systems are
    found throughout the class both as driving means for the generator and as a
    control therefor.  Although the following subclasses have many motor
    systems, the list is neither complete nor exhaustive.  See subclass 16 for
    electric motor driven generator systems having simultaneous control of
    motor and generator; subclass 39 for electric motor driven generator
    systems having electric motor control; subclasses 70, 71, 80, and 84 for
    generator control systems employing electric motor systems therein.  See
    section IV of the class definition of Class 322.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    201-204 for dynamoelectric systems; and subclasses 220-354 for regulators
    which may include motors.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclass for
    electrical measuring systems which include electric motor systems.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 2 for electromagnetically actuated switches,
    especially subclasses 68+ for motor operated switches, subclasses 209+ for
    magnets and electromagnets with or without armatures.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclasses 15+ for thermal current thermostatically operated switches.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, for electric signaling systems which
    include electric motor systems, particularly subclass 870.43 for telemetric
    systems which include electric motor systems, such as, for example,
    follow-up systems.

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 61+ and 73+ for control where
    reflected or otherwise returned radio wave energy (e.g., radar) is
    utilized.  See the search notes in the class definition of Class 342 for
    the other subclasses and classes which provide for radiant energy systems
    for controlling devices and apparatus.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ for
    relay and electromagnet circuits.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 272 for projectors having electromagnetic
    motor operated tiltable or rotatable reflector and bulb unit and subclass
    286 for projectors having electromagnetic motor operated adjustable light
    source.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    systems for rectification, derectification, phase conversion, frequency
    conversion, or combinations thereof.  See subclasses 102+ for
    dynamoelectric current converter systems; subclass 150 for dynamoelectric
    phase converter systems; and subclasses 174+ for dynamoelectric frequency
    converter systems.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 130+
    for generic data processing control systems.  This subclass will accept the
    following claimed subject matter:  (1) Electric control systems where the
    end load or device is not an electric motor.  (2) Control systems which may
    include a positional servo system but the ultimated claimed load is not a
    positional servo control.  (3) Control systems where a positional servo
    means is not the sole load.  (4) Control systems where a specific stored
    programmable digital computer is used in a positional control system.  This
    is generally indicted by the presence of a flow chart for data processing;
    subclass 400 for control systems which are limited by the claims to a
    particular process or have a specific utility.

    368,    Horology, subclasses 66, 76, 218, and 321 for electric motor driven
    clocks and the electric systems therefore, and subclasses 250 and 250-254
    for electrically operated alarms for clocks.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 132+ for an
    electric motor (piezoelectric or electromagnetic) driven recording stylus
    and driving circuitry.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 354+ for synchronizing
    systems for digital communication in general.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 80+ for
    control systems where the ultimate load is a robot arm or arm segment.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), for electric motor
    driven impellers (propellers).

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 410.1+ for electric motor driven pumps and
    subclass 416 for pumps driven by a reciprocating electric motor.

    440,    Marine Propulsion, for significant boat and ship structure combined
    with electric motor propulsion means.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 144+, 483, 484+ for toy
    electrically driven machinery.

    483,    Tool Changing, generally for a process or apparatus including a
    tool transfer means combined with a tool support or storage means.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 150+ for high temperature (Tc > 30 K) superconducting devices,
    and particularly subclasses 166+ for motors or generators.

    601,    Surgery:  Kinesitherapy, subclasses 70+, 87+, 93+, and 101+ for
    electric motor operated kinesitherapy (message) devices.

    901,    Robots, subcollection 2+ for robot arm motion controllers.

    V.      Motor Systems Other Than Electric Motor Systems

    A compilation of all types of motors will be found in the Notes to the
    class definition of Class 60.


CLS 318/1
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which one or more electric
    motors are combined with one or more means (other than a motor) for driving
    or actuating one or more load devices, e.g., axle drives.

    (1)     Note.  See section I, G, of the class definition for the line
    between this class and other classes which provide for the combination of
    an electric motor and a nonelectric motor.

    (2)     Note.  Where the electric motor or motors and other driving means
    drive or are part of an art device, classification is with the art device
    and not in this class.  See section I, E, of the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for plural electric motor drives for plural particular load devices.

    8,      for plural electric motor drives for single particular load devices.

    34+,    for plural electric motor drives arranged to drive one or more
    general load devices.

    150     and 161, for motors combined with flywheels for actuating load
    devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 698 for the combination of plural diverse
    motors, including electrical motor combined with nonelectrical motors.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 165+ and 508+ for
    plural expansible chamber motors.

    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, or Animal Powered, is the generic class of
    motors.


CLS 318/2
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 in which one or more electric motors are
    combined with manually actuated means for driving or actuating one or more
    load devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 479.01 for plural
    controlling or actuating elements for levers and linkages in general and
    subclasses 625+ for alternate hand or power operators, where no electric
    motor control is claimed.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 9 for systems
    wherein a generator is actuated by plural driving means, one of them being
    manual.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses 1+
    for  inputs from independent power sources to a planetary gear transmission.


CLS 318/3
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which one or more electric
    motors are connected or arranged to be connected to actuate one or more
    particular or specific load devices which load devices must constitute a
    significant part of the combination; and in which means are also provided
    for controlling or supplying electric energy to the electric motor or
    motors.

    (1)     Note.  See section I, E, in the class definition for a statement in
    regard to the combination of electric motors and load devices driven
    thereby included to this class.

    (2)     Note.  Significant power, torque, force or motion transmitting
    mechanism is considered to be a particular or specific load device for
    classification in this or the indented subclasses.  See section I, E, 6, of
    the class definition for the combinations of motor supply and/or control
    and the power, torque, force or motion transmitting mechanism driven
    thereby which are included in this class.

    (3)     Note.  Where the particular load device is a flywheel merely,
    classification is not herein but in appropriate subclasses below.  Note
    subclass 161 in particular.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for electric motor systems of the work and feed or indexing type of
    motor combination where there are a plurality of motors.

    161,    for an electric motor driving a flywheel, see (2) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    See the classes listed under the class definition.


CLS 318/4
TXT Subject matter under subclass 3 in which there are two or more particular
    load devices driven by one or more electric motors and in which one or more
    of the load devices are structurally different from or are operated or
    controlled differently (e.g., with respect to time, mode or degree of
    operation or control, particular means employed to effect the operation or
    control) than one or more of the other of the load devices.

    (1)     Note.  Where the plural driven devices operate as a unit, all
    receiving the same kind and degree of control so that they function as a
    single (although sometimes variable) unit, classification will be in this
    class along with the single driven devices.

    (2)     Note.  Where two or more load devices are claimed and at least one
    of the load devices is significantly claimed, classification will be in
    this subclass or a subclass indented hereunder.

    (3)     Note.  This and the indented subclass include the combination of an
    electric motor driving a particular or specific load device and a power,
    force or motion transmitting mechanism, the latter mechanism having means
    for driving a load device other than the first mentioned particular or
    specific load device.


CLS 318/5
TXT Subject matter under subclass 4 in which two or more electric motors are
    provided to drive the driven devices and in which one of the motors is
    arranged to drive one of the driven devices and another of the motors is
    arranged to drive another of the driven devices; or, in which one of the
    motors is supplied with electrical energy differently or is controlled
    differently with respect to time, load, speed, etc., from another of the
    motors, or in which one of the motors is substantially different
    structurally from another motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for subject matter within the class definition having an electric
    motor driving means and a nonmotor driving means.

    8+,     for plural electric motors driving single particular load devices.

    34+,    for miscellaneous plural electric motor systems within the class
    definition.

    39,     for electric motor systems of the work and feed or indexing type of
    motor combination where there are a plurality of motors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 165+ and 508+ for
    plural expansible chamber motors.


CLS 318/6
TXT Subject matter under subclass 3 in which means are provided for controlling
    one or more electric motors so as to control the tension or tautness in a
    material being driven, conveyed, or otherwise moved by the motor at some
    predetermined value or within some predetermined limits.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    362+,   for patents relating to braking of load devices driven by electric
    motors.

    432,    for patents relating to constant motor current or load or torque
    control.

    436,    for patents relating to motor systems for producing torque while
    the motor is not running but is still energized.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 6 for a metal-shaping apparatus combined
    with a condition responsive device for automatically controlling the
    operation of the apparatus and subclass 183 for a metal deforming apparatus
    for deflecting successively presented portions of work by tension applied
    thereto.

    112,    Sewing, subclass 254 for tensioning devices for sewing machines.

    114,    Ships, subclasses 213+ for tension relieving devices on ships.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclass 10 for a
    feeder controlled by the tension in a strand or web.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 410+ and 147+ for a
    device for controlling tension in a running length of elongated material.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 274+ for apparatus for hauling or hoisting a load, including a
    cable-pulling drum having a mechanism linked to the drum, or a rotating
    element of the drive for the drum, for generating a control impulse to the
    drive motor of the drum when the torque on the drum varies.

    440,    Marine Propulsion, subclass 34 for ship towing by cables, wherein
    means may be provided for controlling the cable tension or tautness.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses
    101+ for means for adjusting belt tension in a power transmission.


CLS 318/7
TXT Subject matter under subclass 6 in which two or more motors are controlled
    and in which one or more of the motors are controlled differently from one
    or more other of the motors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     and the subclasses specified in the notes to the definitions of
    those subclasses, for plural electric motor systems in general.


CLS 318/8
TXT Subject matter under subclass 3 in which two or more electric motors are
    employed to drive a particular load device and in which one or more of the
    motors (1) are substantially different, structurally, or (2) are controlled
    or operated differently with respect to time, load, speed, etc., from one
    or more other of the motors.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes subject matter within the class
    definition where plural diverse or diversely controlled electric motors
    drive differential gearing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for subject matter within the class definition having an electric
    motor driving means and a nonmotor driving means.

    5,      for plural electric motors driving plural diverse, or diversely
    controlled particular load devices.

    7,      for this subject matter where the plural motors control the tension
    or tautness of a material being driven, conveyed or moved by the motor.

    34,     and the subclasses specified in the Notes to the definitions of
    those subclasses for other plural electric motor systems within the class
    definition.

    39,     for electric motor systems of the work and feed or indexing type of
    motor combination where there are a plurality of motors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 716 a system of plural motors having a
    common output and not provided for elsewhere.  See the search note in the
    definition of subclass 698 of Class 60.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 165+ and 508+ for
    plural expansible chamber motors.


CLS 318/9
TXT Subject matter under subclass 3 in which the particular motor driven device
    comprises means for receiving and transmitting mechanical power, torque,
    force, or motion from the electric motor to some load device adapted to be
    actuated thereby.

    (1)     Note.  Section I, E, 6 of the class definition for the combinations
    of an electric motor and a power, torque, force or motion transmitting
    mechanism included in this class.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass excludes motor driven clutches and motor
    driven magnetic field type of transmitting device.  See Search Class below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4+,     for such transmitting mechanisms in combination with other
    particular load devices, all actuated by electric motors, the transmitting
    mechanism having means for driving a load device other than the particular
    load device.

    8,      for such a transmitting mechanism driven by two or more electric
    motors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 75+ for
    electric motors having drive mechanism therefor, and subclasses 92+ for the
    combination of an electric motor and a magnetic field type of transmitting
    mechanism.  See (1) Note above.

    477,    Interrelated Power Delivery Controls, Including Engine Control, for
    interrelated control between a motor and a transmission, clutch, or brake.
    See (1) Note above.


CLS 318/10
TXT Subject matter under subclass 9 in which the means driven by the motor is
    adapted to drive a load shaft or device in a forward and in a reverse
    direction without reversing the direction of operation of the motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 202, 355, 361, 376+, 404,
    and other appropriate subclasses for reversing gearing, and also
    "Mechanical movement" subclasses involving oscillating or reciprocating
    motions.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 21 for the combination of
    a clutch and a reversing gear.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems and Components, subclasses
    1+ for control for forward and reverse in an endless belt power
    transmission.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, appropriate
    subclasses for reversing gearing in planetary transmissions.

    476,    Friction Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses 15+
    for friction gear transmissions having a forward and reverse feature.


CLS 318/11
TXT Subject matter under subclass 9 in which the transmitting mechanism is
    adapted to drive a load device at two or more speeds for a given single
    speed of the electric motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for variable speed power or motion transmitting mechanism
    (differential gearing) driven by plural diverse or diversely controlled
    electric motors, as by driving two input shafts, to obtain a variable speed
    of the output shaft of the gearing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses for the
    particular mechanical variable speed transmission device, per se.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 92+ for
    variable speed magnetic-field type clutch driven by electric or other
    motors.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, appropriate
    subclasses for a variable speed endless belt power transmission.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, appropriate
    subclasses for variable speed gearing in planetary transmission.


CLS 318/12
TXT Subject matter under subclass 11 in which the variable speed transmission
    is mechanical gearing provided with means for producing two or more output
    speeds when the input or receiving element thereof is being driven at a
    single speed.

    (1)     Note.  For a definition of "mechanical gearing", see (1) Note under
    subclass 15, hereinafter.

    (2)     Note.  See section I, E, 6, b, of the class definition for a
    reference to the electric motor driven gearing in this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for miscellaneous electric motor driven mechanical gearing within
    the class definition.  See Note 1 above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 640+ for the structure of
    the variable speed gearing, per se.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 83 for gear
    drives for electrical generators or motors.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, appropriate
    subclasses for variable speed planetary gearing.


CLS 318/13
TXT Subject matter under subclass 12 in which the variable speed gearing is a
    differential gearing with means for varying the output speed of the gearing
    when the speed of the driving electric motor is at a predetermined single
    value.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for this subject matter where the differential gearing is driven by
    plural, diverse, or diversely controlled electric motors.


CLS 318/14
TXT Subject matter under subclass 9 in which the power transmitting mechanism
    is a device which receives a force or motion from an electric motor having
    one type or kind of motion (i.e., rotary, linear, etc.) and delivers the
    force or motion by an element of the device which moves with a different
    type or kind of motion (i.e., linear, reciprocating, rotary, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses under "Mechanical
    Movements" beginning with subclass 20 for details of the motion converting
    mechanism, per se.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 80+ for motion
    converting drive mechanism for an electric motor and subclasses 92+ for
    magnetically energized motion converting means.


CLS 318/15
TXT Subject matter under subclass 9 in which the power transmitting mechanism
    is a mechanical gearing or gear.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this Class, "Mechanical Gearing" is
    described as a device comprising two or more relatively rotatable solid
    bodies each provided with interengaging elements or frictional contact
    surfaces whereby one or more of the relatively rotating bodies, operating
    in rolling contact with another of said bodies, will transmit to or receive
    force or motion from said other body by virtue of such rolling contact.
    This includes belt gearing.

            Also a "gear" is described as one of the relatively rotating bodies
    in the preceding paragraph.

    (2)     Note.  See section I, E, 6, b, for a reference to the electric
    motor driven gearing in this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for mechanical gearing driven by plural diverse or diversely
    controlled electric motors.

    10,     for electric motor driven reversible gearing.

    12,     for electric motor driven variable speed gearing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, for gearing, per se.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 83 for gear
    drives for electric motors.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, appropriate
    subclasses for an endless belt power transmission.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, for planetary
    gearing, per se.


CLS 318/16
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which the electric motor is
    supplied with and/or controlled by electric space-transmitted
    electromagnetic or electrostatic energy.  (e.g., radio energy).

    (1)     Note.  Unitary or structurally organized devices commonly known as
    electromagnets, electric motors, electrostatic motors, etc., in which an
    air gap or a displaceable dielectric or nonmagnetic substance is present
    and across which electromagnetic or electrostatic lines of force extend to
    an armature thereof, are not included in the above recited means.

    (2)     Note.  The magnitude of the distance between the transmitter of
    energy or signals and the receiver is not critical since they may be
    separated merely by a thin membrane, a wall between rooms, or miles between
    stations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    480,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes to the definition of that
    subclass for motor systems within the class definition which are controlled
    by radiant energy, other than electromagnetic or electrostatic energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, subclass 10 for electrical
    transmission to vehicles by magnetic induction.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 175+ is the generic subclass for systems
    and apparatus for automatically controlling the steering of a mobile device
    in two or three dimensions by electrical means, including such control
    systems which utilize radiant energy.  See the Notes to the definition of
    that subclass for the other classes which provide for systems and apparatus
    for the control of the steering or motion of mobile devices and for a
    statement as to the lines between the classes.

    334,    Tuners, subclass 9 for a remote controlled variable tuner having an
    electromagnetic operator.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.69 and 825.72 are the
    generic subclasses for systems for the control of apparatus and devices at
    a distance by means of radio wave energy.

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 61+ for radio wave signal control if
    reflected or otherwise returned (e.g., radar) energy is utilized;
    subclasses 422+ provides for direction finding receivers having movable
    antennas which are orientated in the direction of the received signal by
    means of an electric motor system.  See the search notes in Class 342 for
    other subclasses and classes which provide for radiant energy systems for
    controlling apparatus and devices.


CLS 318/17
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which means are provided for
    portably supporting an electric motor or the electrical system of supply
    and/or control therefor, the supporting means being particularly adapted
    for moving the motor or the system from one place to a different place.

    (1)     Note.  By way of example only, the following means are illustrative
    of portably-supporting means included in this subclass:  runners or skids,
    wheels or rollers, drags or "stone-boats", floating devices or boats,
    vehicle, airplane, lighter-than-aircraft, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Where the motor is limited to actuating means which propel
    the supporting means therefor, classification is not in this class but in
    motor vehicles or in some other appropriate class except in those instances
    where the combination is nominal and is classified on basis of
    subcombination elsewhere in this class.

    (3)     Note.  Handles, hooks, eyes, etc., connected to, attached, or
    built-in a motor are not considered as portably mounting means.

    (4)     Note.  Electric motors with means for adjustable positioning the
    motor on an otherwise fixed support for the purpose of alignment,
    levelling, belt-tightening, etc., are not included herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    See the classes listed under "Search Class" in the class definition for
    other classes which provide for portably mounted electric motors or
    portable systems for electric motors.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 47 for portable
    or hand held rotary magnetic motors and subclass 50 for portable rotary
    electric motors.


CLS 318/34
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which there are two or more
    electric motors forming the ultimate load on the system of which one or
    more thereof are:

    1.      Substantially structurally different than, or

    2.      Supplied by substantially different sources of electrical supply
    than, or

    3.      Controlled substantially differently than one or more others of the
    motors.

    (1)     Note.  For example only, it is interpreted that:

     (1)    Motors differ structurally when they are different in size,
    capacity, structural details, etc.

     (2)    Motors are supplied by different sources of supply when the sources
    differ (1) in kind or type (e.g., a.c. and d.c., generators and electrical
    converters, different types of electrical converters, different types of
    generators, etc.) or (2) when the sources differ in size or capacity, or in
    magnitude of an electrical characteristic thereof, such for example as
    frequency, voltage.

    (3)     Motors are controlled differently when they are controlled at
    different times, in different degrees or magnitude, by different control
    means, by control means in different motor circuits, etc.

    (2)     Note.  When the system of supply and control is not limited as
    above, that is, when the motors are controlled as a unit, classification
    will be in the subclasses with single motors.

    (3)     Note.  The several motors must have a useful output serverally and
    individually (i.e., they must be "work" motors).  When a motor merely
    actuates a control element for controlling another motor, such motor is not
    a useful output or work motor such as is classified herein.

    (4)     Note.  Plural motors implies the existence of two distinct motors.
    Two distinct motors may be encased in a common housing, be intricately
    interfitting, or mounted on a common base.  However, each must have its
    distinct field structure and its distinct primary or armature structure,
    and each must be magnetically distinct, from the other.  A motor element
    having a common field structure, a common field flux or a common path for
    the field flux, even though excited by separate windings fed from each
    armature and two separate armature structures, is not considered a plural
    motor device.  Likewise, a common armature with separate windings supplied
    by different sources, but in which the fluxes traverse common parts or
    paths is not a plural motor device.

    (5)     Note.  Motor systems having a plurality of motors, one or more of
    which run at a constant speed or are not provided with any significant
    motor control means, and only one of the motors being provided with
    significant control means, are not classified in subclasses 34+, but will
    be found in the subclasses below which provide for the control system for
    the single motor which is controlled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for this subject matter where two or more motors drive plural
    particular load devices.

    7,      for this subject matter where the plural motors control the tension
    or tautness of a material being driven or moved by the motors.

    8,      for this subject matter where two or more motors drive a particular
    load device.

    19,     for this subject matter where the system has two or more follow-up
    motors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 698+ for plural motors in general,
    including the combination of an electrical motor and a nonelectrical motor.
     See the search notes in the definition of subclass 698 of Class 60 for a
    listing of plural motor subclasses.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 165+ and 508+ for
    plural expansible chamber motors.

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants, subclass 4 for electric generation
    systems having two or more prime movers, at least one of which is a
    nonelectric prime mover, for actuating a generator or generators.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 112+ for plural
    rotary dynamo-electric units electrically distinct but structurally united;
    subclasses 114+ for rotary electric motors or generators having plural
    rotors; subclasses 127+ for electric motors having two or more commutator
    and/or sets of slip rings.


CLS 318/35
TXT Subject matter under subclass 34 in which there are one or more motors
    having one kind of driving or output motion (e.g., rotary motion) and one
    or more other motors having another king of output or driving motion (e.g.,
    linear motion) and wherein the motors are each adapted to drive or actuate
    a useful load device separately or in common.


CLS 318/37
TXT Subject matter under subclass 34 in which two or more of the diverse or
    diversely controlled motors are reciprocating or oscillating motors.

    (1)     Note.  See section I, B, 1, f, for the definition of a
    "reciprocating or oscillating" motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119+,   for miscellaneous reciprocating or oscillating motor systems in
    this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 15+ for
    reciprocating motors and subclass 36 for oscillating motors.


CLS 318/38
TXT Subject matter under subclass 34 in which two or more of the diverse or
    diversely controlled motors are linear-movement motors.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of "linear-movement motors", see section
    I, B, 1, g. of the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135,    for miscellaneous linear-movement motors in this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 12+ for linear
    motors.


CLS 318/39
TXT Subject matter under subclass 34 in which one or more electric motors,
    hereinafter referred to as "work" motors, are arranged to actuate means for
    producing relative motion between.

    1.      A thing to be treated, traversed or operated on, hereinafter
    referred to as
    the "work", and

    2.      A tool, or traversing or operating mechanism, hereinafter referred
    to as
    the "tool", the tool being adapted to perform some work or operation on or
    with respect to the work, combined with one or more other electric motors,
    hereinafter referred to as the "feed" or "indexing" motors, arranged to
    control.

    3.      The rate of feed of the "work" to the "tool" or vice versa, or

    4.      The position of the "tool", spacially or angularly, relative to the
    path of
    movement of the work or the tool whichever is driven by the work motor.

    (1)     Note.  In accordance with the class definition, when the work and
    feed motor combination is limited to actuating particular driven devices,
    classification will not be in this subclass (39) but will be classified in
    some other class.  See section I. E. of the class definition.  Inclusion of
    the devices operated by the motors by name only, such as a "reciprocating
    table", or "a carriage", a "movable tool holder" where no significant
    structure of the machine operated by the motors, will not be sufficient to
    exclude the patent from this subclass.

            When, however, the motors are claimed as being related as work and
    feed or indexing motors with respect to each other and their operations are
    related to each other, classification will be in this subclass.
    Designation of the motors as "work" and "feed" or "indexing" motors is
    sufficient basis for classification herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3+,     for motor systems having particular load devices, see subclass 4
    where the motors drive a plurality of load devices, and subclass 8 for
    plural motor drives for a single particular load device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, work and feed motor arrangements are found
    throughout the class, particularly note subclasses 33+ for combined
    machines employing work and feed motor combinations.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 5+, 8+
    and 14+ for the combination of a drilling machine of that class type with a
    control means actuated by an external stimulus.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, especially subclasses 10+, 50+,
    75+, 79+, 183+, 185+, 332, and 339+ for a work feed motor arrangement in
    combination with a gear cutting machine.

    451,    Abrading, eork and feed motor arrangements are found throughout the
    class, most being found in subclasses 1+, 294, and 331+.


CLS 318/40
TXT Subject matter under subclass 34 in which means, other than an electric
    motor, are provided for causing the rotary work-element of one or more of
    the electric motors to tend to return to a previously occupied position
    when moved therefrom as a result of energization of the motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119+,   for motor systems having reciprocating or oscillating motors which
    are biassed to cause the movable element of the motor to move in one
    direction of the reciprocating movement.

    159+,   for miscellaneous motor systems having a motor which is biassed
    against rotation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 470 for resiliently
    connected levers and linkage systems.

    267,    Spring Devices, for structure of spring devices, per se.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 15+ for the
    structure of reciprocating motors having biasing means for causing the
    movable element to move in one direction of the reciprocating movement.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 131 for electric
    meters having biased pointers or indicators.


CLS 318/41
TXT Subject matter under subclass 34 in which means are provided for
    electrically interconnecting the winding of an electric motor to the
    winding of another electric motor, or for electrically interconnecting a
    winding on an auxiliary dynamo-electric machine connected to the rotor of
    an electric motor to the winding of an auxiliary dynamo-electric machine
    connected to the rotor of another electric motor; said interconnections
    being so arranged that when the two electric motors operate at
    predetermined relative speeds and/or phase relationships substantially no
    current flows in said interconnections, but that when said relative speeds
    or phase relationship depart from said relationships current flow occurs in
    the interconnection in a direction which tends to restore the said speed
    and/or phase relationships between the motors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24      and 30, for follow-up electric motor systems of the synchronous
    type in which the transmitter (a dynamo-electric machine) is electrically
    interconnected with the receiver (an electric motor) and in which movement
    of one machine tends to cause intercirculating currents to flow resulting
    in a tendency toward synchronous movement therewith of the other
    dynamo-electric machine.

    45,     for mechanically interconnected electric motors.

    68,     for miscellaneous plural motor systems having means for controlling
    the relative speeds of the motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 702 for synchronizing arrangements for
    nonelectric motors.

    348,    Television, subclasses 500+ for television systems having
    synchronizing systems for synchronizing motors at the transmitting and
    receiving stations with respect to each other.

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 409+ for facsimile systems having
    synchronizing systems for synchronizing motors at the transmitting and
    receiving stations with respect to each other.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 303+ for a multiplexing system
    having a rotary distributing switch at the transmitting and receiving
    stations.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 354+ for synchronizing
    systems for digital communications in general.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclass 34 for plural
    impellers having synchronizing means.


CLS 318/42
TXT Subject matter under subclass 41 in which an auxiliary dynamo-electric
    machine is connected to the rotors of each of two or more electric motors,
    and the synchronizing interconnections are connected between the windings
    on the auxiliary dynamo-electric machines.

    (1)     Note.  These dynamo-electric machines normally operate as
    generators when the motors are operated at a predetermined speed and/or
    phase relationship and develop voltages that are substantially equal and in
    opposition to each other. When, the predetermined speed and/or phase
    relationships do not exist the magnitude or the phase of the opposing
    voltages is such as to cause one of the dynamo-electric machines to supply
    electric energy to the other, the delivering dynamo-electric machine
    thereby tending to load and hence reduce the speed of the motor to which it
    is connected and the receiving dynamo-electric machine tending to aid the
    electric motor to which it is connected and, hence, to tend to increase the
    speed thereof whereby the two motors are subjected to forces tending to
    restore the predetermined speed and/or phase relationship therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for two or more motors each driving a tachometer generator the
    armature circuits of which are connected in series opposition with each
    other and also in series with some electric current responsive device to
    detect current flow in the circuits of the interconnected generators and as
    a result initiate changes in the relative speeds of the motors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission of Interconnection Systems, subclass 32 for
    electrical systems in which two or more load circuits have control means
    for proportioning or dividing the total load therebetween; subclass 84 for
    parallel generators which supply energy to a useful load.


CLS 318/43
TXT Subject matter under subclass 41 in which each of the interconnected motors
    is either a direct-current motor or an alternating current motor having
    both a commutator and one or more slip rings, the synchronizing
    interconnections being connected to the slip rings.

    (1)     Note.  See section I, B, 1, k, for a definition of an "alternating
    current commutator" motor.


CLS 318/44
TXT Subject matter under subclass 41 in which two or more of the motors are
    induction motors, the interconnections being made between the secondaries
    (induced windings).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    818+,   for controlling induction motors by controlling the secondary
    circuit thereof.


CLS 318/45
TXT Subject matter under subclass 34 in which means are provided for coupling,
    mechanically, the driving or output members of two or more motors in a
    fixed or predetermined ratio of movement.

    (1)     Note.  Where one motor is connected to actuate an element of a
    second motor which element is not the working or output member of the
    second motor, classification is not in this subclass or subclasses indented
    hereinunder but in some other appropriate subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The following coupled motors are included in this subclass.


    1.      Two motors rigidly and directly connected to a common load shaft
    whether in
    a common or separate housing so long as each of the motor units is a
    distinct unit capable of operating by itself.

    2.      Two or more motors coupled together through a variable speed gearing
    which
    is adjustable to effect different coupling or speed ratios between the
    motors but when adjusted to any particular ratio, does not permit the
    motors to operate at any other ratio of speeds.

    3.      Two or more motors positively but resiliently, connected to a common
    load
    shaft so that each motor is capable of slight movement relative to its
    shaft but further movement in the same direction is inhibited.

    4.      Two or more motors geared to a common load.

    (3)     Note.  The following motors are not included in this subclass:


    1.      Two or more motors connected to a common load by any means where
    slippage
    or racing of one motor may occur relative to another; such, for example, as
    two motors driving separate wheels of a vehicle which wheels are not
    positively geared or linked together by a means other than the common
    smooth rail or roadbed.  See subclass 52 for this subject matter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     see Note 3 above.

    137,    for motor systems which include an auxiliary motor for producing
    mechanical torque on the principal during starting or acceleration periods
    only.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 49+ for multiple motored electric
    locomotives the several wheels or axles of which may be mechanically
    interconnected by means of parallel or side rods.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass .02 for two motors
    coupled through a clutch.


CLS 318/46
TXT Subject matter under subclass 45 in which one or more of the motors have
    electrical or mechanical characteristics which are different than the
    corresponding characteristic of one or more others of the motors.

    (1)     Note.  For example, two motors having materially different
    speed-torque characteristics are included herein.


CLS 318/47
TXT Subject matter under subclass 46 in which one or more of the motors is a
    synchronous motor and one or more others of the motors is a non-synchronous
    motor.

    (1)     Note.  For a definition of a synchronous motor, see section I, B,
    1, h, of the class definition.


CLS 318/48
TXT Subject matter under subclass 45 in which one or more of the motors are
    connected to a rotary member so as to exert a torque therein in one
    direction and one or more others of the motors are connected to the same
    rotary member so as to exert torque therein in the opposite direction
    (either simultaneously or otherwise).

    (1)     Note.  Usually, where the torque is applied simultaneously, the
    shaft is turned in one direction by the motor generating the largest torque.


CLS 318/49
TXT Subject matter under subclass 34 in which there are one or more motors
    adapted to be connected to one or more sources of electric energy to
    convert part of the energy into mechanical energy and part into electrical
    energy and in which there are one or more other motors combined with means
    for supplying the last named motors with the converted electrical energy.

    (1)     Note.  Arrangements within the definition of this subclass include:


    1.      A wound-secondary induction motor in the secondary circuit of which
    is
    connected the primary or armature windings of another ac motor, both
    motors, being adapted to perform useful work.

    2.      A direct current motor adapted to perform useful work and in
    addition
    thereto driving a d-c generator the output of which is supplied to another
    electric motor.

    (2)     Note.  Means may be provided for also connecting the same motors in
    other relations with each other.  For example the circuit may be arranged
    so that the motors may be connected in cascade, or in series or in parallel.

    (3)     Note.  For cascade arrangements the armatures of the several motors
    may not be connected conductively in series; that is, the same current may
    not pass through one motor and then be conducted on to another motor
    electrically in series with said one motor.  Usually, the armature of one
    motor is connected to the secondary of another (induction) motor.



            The above may be considered to be plural motors with separate
    sources of supply, also they may be considered to be electrically in series.

    (4)     Note.  When electric energy is led to one machine which may be
    referred to as a "motor" but which serves only to convert electrical energy
    and to supply the converted energy to a motor which has a mechanical energy
    output, the first machine is merely considered a converter and not a motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45+,    for this subject matter where two or more cascade connected motors
    are mechanically coupled together in a fixed or predetermined ratio of
    movement.

    731+,   for doubly fed induction motor systems e.g., where both the primary
    and secondary windings of the motor are connected to sources of electric
    energy.


CLS 318/50
TXT Subject matter under subclass 49 in which means are provided for connecting
    the motors in electrical relationship with each other in other than cascade
    or tandem relation.

    (1)     Note.  For example, the system may be arranged so that the motors
    may be connected in cascade or tandem, or in series, or in parallel.


CLS 318/51
TXT Subject matter under subclass 34 in which means are provided for
    controlling one or more motors to effect one operational control thereof
    and for controlling one or more other motors to effect a different
    operational control thereof.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is designed to include systems in which the
    controls for different motors (which may be of the same type) differ from
    each other; i.e., substantially the same operational control is not
    exercised over all motors.

            The same kind or type of control applied to different motors merely
    at different times is not included herein. For example, see subclass 67 for
    plural motor systems where means are provided for running one motor at a
    different speed from another, and subclass 91 for plural motor systems
    having means to accelerate or decelerate the motors in succession or
    selectively.

    (2)     Note.  For example, means may be provided for controlling the
    running speed only of one motor and for controlling the rate of
    acceleration only of another motor whether at the same or different times.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     for plural motor systems where one motor has a different type of
    motion from the motion of another motor (rotary motor and reciprocating
    motor).

    39+,    for work and feed or indexing motor combinations involving
    different controls for different motors.

    53,     for plural motor systems where the system includes means for
    effecting two or more diverse operations of the motors (reversing, running
    speed control, braking, acceleration, deceleration, automatic stopping or
    starting) the control operations being effected upon all the motors, either
    simultaneously or in sequence.

    67,     see Note 1 above.

    91,     see Note 1 above.


CLS 318/52
TXT Subject matter under subclass 34 in which means are provided for reducing
    the speed of, or reducing the electrical power input to, one or more
    electric motors when one or more of the electric motors is slipping or
    racing while operating as a motor.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes means which sense:



    (1)     A sudden increase in speed (that is, a high rate of change of
    speed) of one or more electric motors, or

    (2)     A speed of one or more electric motors the speed of which is
    considerably in excess of normal or rated speed thereof, or

    (3)     A substantial change in the relative speeds of two or more motors
    connected to operate a common load device or physically interconnected load
    devices so that the motors normally tend to operate at a predetermined
    ratio of speeds and effects a reduction in speed of one or more of the
    motors when the above speed conditions exist.

    (2)     Note.  "Slipping" usually occurs when the motor fails to drive its
    load, through failure of the mechanical connection between the motor and
    load, and thereby increases its speed due to a lack of load on the motor.
    An example of slipping is the case of a traction motor driving a wheel, the
    wheel may fail to grip the rail or road bed and "spin", thereby reducing
    the load on the motor.

    (3)     Note.  Where the control means affects the operation at all speeds
    loads such as maintaining the speed of or load on the motor or motors
    constant, or maintaining a predetermined load division between several
    motors, classification is not in this subclass, but is classified herein
    below in the appropriate subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68+,    for plural motor systems having relative running speed control of
    plural motors.

    98+,    for plural motor systems having loads or currents division between
    two or more motors.


CLS 318/53
TXT Subject matter under subclass 34 in which means are provided for effecting
    two or more diverse operations of two or more motors.

    (1)     Note.  Combinations of the following single operations are included
    in this subclass.



    (a)     Reversing control

    (b)     Acceleration control

    (c)     Running-speed control

    (d)     Braking control

    (e)     Motor Load control

    (f)     Automatic stopping and/or starting

            The following are not considered to be a single operation such as
    when combined with only one of the operations in (a) to (f) or with each
    other form plural diverse motor-operation control for classification in
    these subclasses.

    (1)     Phase or Power Factor control

    (2)     Temperature control of the motor

    (3)     Signalling, Testing, Indicating or measuring conditions in the
    motor or its system

    (4)     Ordinary (manual) stopping and/or starting

    (5)     Phase splitting or phase conversion to supply the motor

    (6)     Lubricating the motor

            For example, operation (a) with any one or more of operations (1)
    to (6) are not classified in these subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for this subject matter where the system includes plural motors in
    which one or more of the motors is controlled differently than one or more
    of the others.

    67,     for plural motor systems where the system includes means for
    running one of the motors at a different speed from the speed of another
    motor.

    255+,   for motor systems having plural, diverse motor operations control
    the single electric motors.


CLS 318/54
TXT Subject matter under subclass 53 in which one of the control means is a
    means for reversing the motors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65+,    for plural motor systems having means for controlling the reversing
    of the motors.

    256+,   for single motor systems having control means for reversing the
    motor.


CLS 318/55
TXT Subject matter under subclass 54 in which means are provided for also
    controlling the running-speed of the motors.

    (1)     Note.  When the means which is used for controlling the
    acceleration and/or deceleration of the motors is also used for controlling
    the running speed of the motors, no other running-speed control means being
    claimed, classification will be in an appropriate subclass which includes
    acceleration control.  See subclasses 58, 61, 64 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59+,    and the subclasses specified in the search Notes thereto for other
    plural motor systems having means for running-speed control of plural
    motors, and another means for a different motor control operation.

    64,     and the subclasses specified in the Notes to the definition of that
    subclass for other plural motor systems having means for controlling the
    acceleration of the motor and means for performing a different type of
    motor control operation.  See Note (1) above.

    257+,   for single motor systems having the combination of reversing and
    running-speed controls.


CLS 318/56
TXT Subject matter under subclass 55 in which means are also provided for
    controlling the motors by braking the same.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     and the subclasses specified in the search Notes thereto, for other
    plural motor systems having controls of plural motors including braking
    thereof and another diverse type of operation.

    258+,   for single motor systems having means for the combined reversing,
    running-speed control and braking.


CLS 318/57
TXT Subject matter under subclass 54 in which means are also provided for
    controlling the motors by braking.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for this subject matter where the system includes means for
    reversing and braking with running-speed control of the plural motors.

    63,     and the subclasses specified in the search Notes thereto, for other
    plural motor systems having means for controlling the braking and another
    different type of operation of the motor.

    258+    and 261+, for the single motor systems having control means for
    reversing and braking the motor.


CLS 318/58
TXT Subject matter under subclass 54 in which means are provided for also
    controlling the rate of the motors acceleration and or deceleration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for plural motor
    systems having means for controlling the acceleration and/or deceleration
    of the motors and means for performing a different motor control operation.

    259     and 260, for single motor systems having means for the reversing
    and acceleration and/or deceleration of the motor.


CLS 318/59
TXT Subject matter under subclass 53 in which means are provided for
    controlling the running speed of the motors in addition to one or more
    other motor operations.

    (1)     Note.  Where the same means which is used for controlling the
    acceleration and/or deceleration of the motors is also used to control the
    running speed of the motors, no other running speed control being claimed,
    classification will not be herein but in the appropriate acceleration
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     and the subclasses specified in the definition of that subclass for
    plural motor systems having means for controlling the acceleration of the
    motor and for performing another motor control operation.

    66+,    for plural motor systems having means for controlling the running
    speeds of the motors.

    101+,   for this subject matter where the system includes running-speed
    control and reversing control.

    268,    for single motor systems which have means for controlling the
    running speed of the motor and having means for performing another control
    operation.


CLS 318/60
TXT Subject matter under subclass 59 in which means are also provided for
    braking the motors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for this subject matter where the system includes means to control
    the running-speed, the braking and reversing.

    63,     and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto for plural motor
    systems having means for controlling the braking of the motors and for
    performing another control operation.

    269+,   and the subclasses specified in the search Notes thereto for single
    motor systems having combined running speed control and braking control.


CLS 318/61
TXT Subject matter under subclass 59 in which means are provided for also
    controlling the acceleration and/or deceleration of the motors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55+,    for this subject matter where the system includes means to control
    the running speed, acceleration and/or deceleration and reversing and with
    or without braking control of plural motors.

    58,     for this subject matter where the system includes means to control
    the acceleration and/or deceleration and reversing.

    64,     and the subclasses specified in the Notes to the definition of that
    subclass for other plural motor systems having means to control the
    acceleration and/or deceleration and to perform a different motor control
    operation.

    271,    and the subclasses specified in the search Notes thereto, for
    combined running speed and acceleration and/or deceleration controls of
    single motors.


CLS 318/62
TXT Subject matter under subclass 59 in which means are also provided for
    automatically starting and/or stopping the motors in response to one or
    more predetermined conditions and/or with means to effect a predetermined
    time delay in one or more operational controls of the motors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    for plural motor systems having means for controlling the starting
    and/or stopping of the motor.

    272,    for single motor systems having combined running speed control and
    automatic starting and/or stopping for single motors.


CLS 318/63
TXT Subject matter under subclass 53 in which means are provided for braking
    the motors in addition to one or more other operational controls of the
    motors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for this subject matter where the system includes means for
    braking, controlling the running speed and reversing.

    57,     for this subject matter where the motor system includes means for
    braking and reversing.

    60,     for this subject matter where the motor system includes means for
    braking and controlling the running speed.

    273,    and the subclasses specified in the Search Notes thereto for single
    motor systems having braking control combined with other
    motor-operation-controls.


CLS 318/64
TXT Subject matter under subclass 53 in which means are provided for
    controlling the rate of acceleration and/or deceleration of the motors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for this subject matter where the system includes means to control
    the acceleration and/or deceleration, the running speed and reversing.

    58,     for this subject matter where the system includes means to control
    the acceleration and/or deceleration and reversing.

    61,     for this subject matter where the system includes means to control
    the acceleration and/or deceleration and the running speed.

    63,     for this subject matter where the system also includes means to
    control the braking.

    90+,    for plural motor systems provided with means for controlling the
    acceleration and/or deceleration of the motors.

    276,    and the subclasses specified in the Search Notes thereto, for
    single motor systems having acceleration and deceleration control combined
    with other motor operational controls.


CLS 318/65
TXT Subject matter under subclass 34 in which means are provided for causing
    two or more electric motors to operate in one direction at one time and in
    a reverse direction at another time.

    (1)     Note.  Reversing the motor connections or reversing the application
    of power to the motors while running, and terminating the application of
    power to the motors prior to or substantially at the time when the speed of
    the motors approach zero speed is not included herein but is classified
    under braking. See subclasses 86+, for braking control for plural motors.
    There must be a substantial operation of the motors in a reverse direction
    to be classified herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54+,    for this subject matter where the system has means for reversing
    and performing a different control of plural motors.

    86+,    see Note (1) above.

    280+,   and the subclasses specified in the Notes to the definition for
    single motor systems with reversing control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission of Interconnection Systems, subclass 127
    for switching systems which respond to a reverse polarity.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclasses, especially Digest 15, for polarity control in a
    battery or capacitor charging or discharging system.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclasses 5+ for generator
    polarity control.


CLS 318/66
TXT Subject matter under subclass 34 in which means are provided for
    controlling the running speed of two or more electric motors.

    (1)     Note.  Where the same means which is used to control the
    acceleration and/or deceleration of the motor is also used to control the
    running speed of the motors, no other running control means being claimed,
    classification will not be herein but in the more appropriate acceleration
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59+,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes to the definition of
    those subclasses for this subject matter where the system includes means
    for running speed control and another different type of motor control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 53+
    for load current division among a plurality of generators, frequently by
    control of their running speed.

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, subclasses 800+ and 825+ for
    single motor running-speed control systems with, and without, feedback,
    respectively.


CLS 318/67
TXT Subject matter under subclass 66 in which means are provided for running
    one or more motors at one speed and one or more other motors at another
    speed simultaneously.

    (1)     Note.  At times, all the motors may be run at the same speed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for work and feed or indexing  motor control systems in which the
    work and feed motor may operate at different speeds.


CLS 318/68
TXT Subject matter under subclass 66 in which means are provided for
    controlling or regulating the speed of one or more electric motors relative
    to the speed of one or more other electric motors.

    (1)     Note.  This or the indented subclasses do not include systems where
    the running speed of all the motors is controlled as a group.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41+,    for this subject matter where there are electrical synchronizing
    connections between a plurality of motors so that when the speed of one
    motor changes with respect to another motor, one of the motors will act
    either as a prime mover for a generator or as a generator to supply
    electric energy to the other motor.

    45+,    for plural motor systems where the motors have the driving members
    coupled mechanically together.

    52,     for this subject matter where means are provided for reducing the
    speed of or reducing the electric energy supplied to a motor when such
    motor is "slipping" or racing.

    90+,    for plural motor systems where the acceleration and/or deceleration
    of one motor may be related to the acceleration and/or deceleration of
    another motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 700 for plural motors of other types in
    which the speed of one or more motors may be controlled with reference to
    the speed of one or more other motors.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 511+ for controlling
    one expansible chamber motor in response to a condition of another.

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants, subclass 4 for plural prime movers one
    of which is nonelectric, driving electric generators in which the speed of
    one or more prime movers may be controlled relative to speed of one or more
    other prime movers.


CLS 318/69
TXT Subject matter under subclass 68 in which means are provided for detecting
    or sensing a difference in speed between two or more of the motors and for
    initiating the operation of the means for controlling the relative speeds
    of the motors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 507 for a device responsive to the
    difference in speed between two bodies.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 36 for systems
    wherein the speed of a generator is compared with the speed of a reference
    device (which might be an electric motor) and means are provided for
    regulating the speed of the generator relative to the reference device.

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, subclasses 800+ for single
    motor running-speed control systems with feedback.


CLS 318/70
TXT Subject matter under subclass 69 in which the speed difference detecting or
    sensing means comprises an electrical device which, per se, generates,
    converts or controls electrical energy, or is activated thereby.

    (1)     Note.  The detecting or sensing means itself must be an electrical
    device an not merely a nonelectrical device constituting an actuator for an
    electrical device.  For example, an electromagnet having two windings and
    an armature actuated thereby wherein one winding is energized by current
    varying with the speed of one motor, the other winding energized by current
    varying with the speed of another motor and the armature, responsive to the
    resulting energization of the electromagnet, constitutes an electrical type
    detector; namely, an electromagnet. However, a differential gearing device,
    one gear of which is moved at a rate which varies with the speed of one
    motor, another gear which is moved at a rate varying with the speed of
    another motor and the output element of the gearing connected to actuate an
    electric switch is not an example of an electrical detector; but is a
    mechanical type detector (namely, a differential gear) functioning as an
    operator for an electrical device; namely, the switch.


CLS 318/71
TXT Subject matter under subclass 70 in which each of two or more of the motors
    is provided with means for generating electrical voltages and/or currents
    or is provided with means for controlling a separate voltage or current,
    the detecting or sensing means being operated by the difference in
    magnitude between the two separately generated or controlled voltages or
    currents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41+,    for plural motor systems where there are electrical synchronizing
    connections between a plurality or the motors.


CLS 318/72
TXT Subject matter under subclass 70 in which a dynamoelectric machine is
    provided for sensing or detecting the difference in speed between two or
    more motors.

    (1)     Note.  A common arrangement of a dynamoelectric machines as a
    detector comprises connecting the armature structure thereof to one motor
    and the field structure thereof to another motor with the result that when
    the motors run at the same speed both parts of the dynamoelectric machine
    will operate at the same speed and, no e.m.f. will be generated in the
    machine.  When the motors operate at different speeds, the parts of the
    dynamoelectric machine will have relative motion with respect to each other
    and will generate an e.m.f. which will have a magnitude which is
    proportional to the magnitude of the difference in speeds of the two parts
    of the dynamoelectric machine.


CLS 318/73
TXT Subject matter under subclass 70 in which the detector comprises an
    impedance device having one or more parts driven synchronously with one or
    more motors and one or more other parts of the impedance driven
    synchronously with one or more other motors; or one or more parts of an
    impedance is actuated synchronously with one or more motors and one or more
    parts of another impedance device is actuated synchronously with one or
    more other motors.


CLS 318/74
TXT Subject matter under subclass 70 in which the detector comprises one or
    more electric switches one or more parts of which switches are operated
    synchronously with one or more motors and one or more other parts of the
    switches are operated synchronously with one or more other motors.


CLS 318/75
TXT Subject matter under subclass 74 in which the detector comprises two or
    more electric switches connected electrically in series with each other.


CLS 318/76
TXT Subject matter under subclass 69 in which the detector comprises a
    differential gearing device in which an input element of the gearing is
    driven by one or more motors another input element is driven by one or more
    other motors so that the differential or output element of the gearing
    operates in response to the relative speeds of the motors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for motor systems in this class having a plurality of motors
    driving a differential gearing as the load device for the motors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, appropriate
    subclasses for control of plural power sources and for differential
    planetary gearing, per se.


CLS 318/77
TXT Subject matter under subclass 68 in which means are provided for
    controlling the speed of a motor in response to changes in speed of another
    motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41+,    for plural motor systems having synchronizing interconnections
    between the motors so that one motor may supply energy to another motor
    when the speed ratio varies.


CLS 318/78
TXT Subject matter under subclass 77 in which means are provided for
    controlling the speed of said other motor by controlling the frequency of
    alternating current supplied to said motor or by controlling the rate at
    which electrical impulses are supplied to said other motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    723+,   for synchronous motor systems having frequency control of the
    supply current for the motors.

    807+,   for induction motor systems having frequency control of the supply
    of a.c. to the motor.


CLS 318/79
TXT Subject matter under subclass 68 in which means are provided for
    controlling the armature (or primary) circuit of one or more of the motors
    in combination with means for also controlling the field (or secondary)
    circuit of one or more motors, simultaneously or separately.

    (1)     Note.  The armature and field which are controlled may be of the
    same or different motors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82+,    for plural motor systems having means for controlling the group
    speed of plural motors by controlling the armature circuit of the motors.

    84,     for plural motor systems having means for controlling the group
    speed of plural motors by controlling the field circuit of the motors.

    92,     for plural motors systems having acceleration and/or deceleration
    control by the combined control of the armature and the field circuits.

    493,    and the subclasses listed in the Search Notes thereto, for
    miscellaneous motor systems with combined control of the armature and the
    field circuits.


CLS 318/80
TXT Subject matter under subclass 68 in which means are provided for
    controlling the armature or primary circuit of one or more of the motors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41+,    for plural motor systems having synchronizing interconnections
    between the motors so that the armature of one motor may be supplied with
    energy from the other motor when the speed ratio varies.

    79,     for this subject matter where the system includes armature circuit
    control combined with field circuit control.

    82+,    for plural motor systems having means for controlling the (group)
    speed of the plurality of electric motors by controlling the armature or
    primary circuits.

    94+,    for plural motor systems having armature circuit control means for
    controlling the acceleration and/or deceleration of a plurality of electric
    motors.

    494+,   and the subclasses specified in the search notes thereto, for motor
    systems having means for controlling the armature circuits.


CLS 318/81
TXT Subject matter under subclass 68 in which means are provided for
    controlling the field or secondary circuit of one or more of the motors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     for this subject matter where the system includes field or
    secondary circuit control in combination with armature or primary circuit
    control.

    84,     for plural motor systems having field or secondary circuit control
    for controlling the (group) speed of a plurality of electric motors.

    97,     for plural motor systems having field circuit control for
    acceleration and/or deceleration control of the motors.

    521+,   and the subclasses specified in the search notes thereto, for motor
    systems having field circuit control means.


CLS 318/82
TXT Subject matter under subclass 66 in which means are provided for
    controlling the armature or primary circuits of a plurality of motors to
    control the (group) speed of the motors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     for this subject matter where the armature or primary circuit
    control is for controlling the relative speed of one motor with respect to
    another motor.

    94,     for plural motor systems having armature circuit control for
    controlling plural motors during the acceleration and/or deceleration of
    the motors.

    494,    and the subclasses listed under the search notes thereto, for
    miscellaneous motor systems having armature circuit control.


CLS 318/83
TXT Subject matter under subclass 82 in which means are provided for connecting
    the armature conductors or windings of one or more motors in series
    relationship with the armature conductors or windings of one or more other
    motors at one time and in parallel relationship therewith at another time;
    or for connecting the armature conductors or windings of one or more motors
    in series with the armature conductors or windings of one or more other
    motors and simultaneously connecting the armature conductors or windings of
    one or more third motors in parallel with the armature conductors or
    windings of one or more other motors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93,     for plural motor systems having series parallel connection of the
    armature circuits of plural motors during the acceleration thereof.

    111,    and the subclasses listed in the search notes thereto, for other
    plural motor systems having series parallel connections of the armature
    windings.

    497,    and the subclasses specified in the search notes thereto, for
    single motor systems having parallel connections of two or more armature or
    primary windings.


CLS 318/84
TXT Subject matter under subclass 66 in which means are provided for
    controlling the field circuit or the secondary circuit of two or more
    motors for controlling the (group) speed of the motors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     for plural motor systems having combined armature and field circuit
    control for controlling the relative speed between two or more motors.

    81,     for plural motor systems having fields or secondary circuit control
    for controlling relative speed between two or more of the motors.

    97,     for plural motor systems having field or secondary circuit control
    of two or more motors during the acceleration period thereof.

    521+,   and the subclasses listed in the search notes thereto, for single
    motor systems having field circuit control for the motor.


CLS 318/85
TXT Subject matter under subclass 34 in which means are provided for causing a
    movable motive element of one or more electric motors to occupy or assume a
    predetermined relative position or phase with respect to a movable motive
    element of one or more other electric motors either while stationary or
    while in motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41+,    for plural motor systems having electrical synchronizing
    interconnections between a plurality of motors for maintaining the motors
    in substantially constant speed and phase interrelationship.

    45+,    plural motor systems having a plurality of motors mechanically
    coupled (e.g., as by a common shaft) in a fixed or predetermined ratio of
    movement.

    52+,    for plural motor systems having means for controlling "slipping" or
    racing of one or more electric motors.

    68+,    for plural motor systems having speed control systems for
    controlling the running speed on one or more electric motors relative to
    the speed of one or more other electric motors including means for
    maintaining equal speeds and/or the same angular or phase relationships.

    437,    for single motor systems having means for phasing, or angular or
    linear positional control, of the motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 698+ for means for synchronizing plural
    motors in general.

    178,    Telegraphy.  See the classes referred to in the search notes of
    subclass 53 for other classes which provide for electrical systems for
    synchronization of rotary shafts.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 85+
    for systems for connecting or disconnecting a plurality of previously
    synchronized generators.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 304+ for synchronization of
    rotary switches in a multiplex system.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 354+ for synchronizing
    systems for pulse communications in general.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclass 34 for plural
    impellers having synchronizing means.


CLS 318/86
TXT Subject matter under subclass 34 in which means are provided for braking
    the motors.

    (1)     Note.  See section I, B, 4, c, of the class definition for a
    definition of braking control.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for plural motor systems having means for braking one or more
    motors and means for performing some other operational control to one or
    more other motors.

    63,     and the subclasses listed in the search notes thereto, for plural
    motor systems having means for braking plural motors combined with some
    other motor operation control for the motors.

    362+,   and the subclasses listed in the search notes thereto, for single
    motor systems having means for braking the motors.


CLS 318/87
TXT Subject matter under subclass 86 in which braking is effected by means
    which cause one or more of the motors to operate as a generator thus
    retarding the motor and load devices operated thereby.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    375+,   and the classes and subclasses listed in the Search Notes thereto,
    for single motor systems having dynamic braking of the motor.


CLS 318/88
TXT Subject matter under subclass 87 in which means are provided for
    controlling the magnitude of the current delivered by one or more of the
    motors being braked relative to the magnitude of the current delivered by
    one or more others of the motors being braked.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51+,    for plural motor systems having means for braking one of the motors
    and means for performing a different control operation upon another motor.

    98+,    for plural motor systems having means for load or current division
    between plural motors during motor operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants, appropriate subclasses for load division
    between nonelectric motor driven generators in general.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 53 for
    systems of load current division among a plurality of generators or sources.


CLS 318/89
TXT Subject matter under subclass 87 in which means are provided for connecting
    the generating or armature circuit of one or more of the motors to the
    field or exciting circuit of one or more others of the motors during the
    braking period to supply the exciting or field current to said other motors.


CLS 318/90
TXT Subject matter under subclass 34 in which means are provided for
    controlling the acceleration and/or deceleration of two or more electric
    motors.

    (1)     Note.  See section I, B, 4, a, of the class definition for a
    definition of "acceleration control".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     and the subclasses specified in the Search Notes thereto, for
    plural motor systems having means for acceleration and/or deceleration
    control of two or more motors combined with another motor-operation control
    for the motors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, subclasses 842+ and 848+ for
    single motor acceleration control systems with, and without, feedback,
    respectively.


CLS 318/91
TXT Subject matter under subclass 90 in which means are provided for
    accelerating and/or deceleration of one or more electric motors and
    subsequently accelerating and/or decelerating one or more other electric
    motors; or in which means are provided for accelerating and/or decelerating
    two or more electric motors and with which means one or more of the motors
    can be accelerated and/or decelerated without accelerating one or more
    others of the motors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for plural motor systems having means for sequential or successive
    starting and/or stopping of two or more motors.

    103,    for plural motor systems having means for selectively starting
    and/or stopping one or more electric motors without starting and/or
    stopping one or more others of the motors.


CLS 318/92
TXT Subject matter under subclass 90 in which means are provided for
    controlling both the armature (or primary) circuits and the field or
    (secondary) circuits of the motors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79      and 82, for plural motor systems having combined armature (or
    primary) and field (or secondary) circuit control for running speed control
    of plural motors.

    493,    and the subclasses specified in the Search Notes thereto, for
    miscellaneous motor systems having combined armature (or primary) and field
    (or secondary) circuits control.


CLS 318/93
TXT Subject matter under subclass 92 in which means are provided for connecting
    the armature or primary circuits of two or more electric motors in series
    circuit relationship with respect to each other at one time and in parallel
    circuit relationship with respect to each other at another time; or for
    connecting two or more electric motors in parallel circuit relationship
    with respect to each other and simultaneously two or more motors in series
    circuit relationship with respect to each other.

    (1)     Note.  One of more of the motors in the parallel connected group
    referred to in the latter part of the above definition may constitute one
    or more of the motors in the series connected group. For example, a single
    motor may be connected in series with a group of three motors which three
    motors are all connected in parallel relationship with respect to one
    another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95,     for plural motor systems having means for connecting the motor
    armatures in series-parallel connections for acceleration and/or
    deceleration control.

    111,    and the subclasses listed under the Search Notes thereto, for other
    plural motor systems having series-parallel arrangements of the plural
    motors.

    497,    and the subclasses specified in the Search Notes thereto, for
    single motor systems having series-parallel connections of two or more
    armature or primary windings.


CLS 318/94
TXT Subject matter under subclass 90 in which means are provided for
    controlling the armature or primary circuits of the motors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82+,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes to the definition of the
    subclass, for armature or primary circuit control of plural motors during
    the running speed operation thereof.

    92,     for this subject matter where the system has armature circuit
    control combined with field circuit control for acceleration and/or
    deceleration control.

    104,    for plural motor systems having armature or primary circuit control
    of the motors during starting and/or stopping of the motor.

    494,    and the subclasses specified in the search notes thereto, for
    single motor systems having armature or primary circuit control of single
    motors.


CLS 318/95
TXT Subject matter under subclass 94 in which means are provided for connecting
    the armature or primary circuits of two or more electric motors in series
    circuit relationship with respect to each other at one time and in parallel
    circuit relationship with respect to each other at another time; or for
    connecting the armature or primary circuits of two or more electric motors
    in series circuit relationship with respect to one another and
    simultaneously connecting the armature or primary circuits of two or more
    motors in parallel circuit relationship with respect to one another.

    (1)     Note.  One or more of the motors in the parallel connected group,
    referred to in the latter part of the above definition, may constitute one
    or more of the motors in the series connected group.  For example, a single
    motor may be connected in series with a group of three motors which three
    motors are all connected in parallel relationship with respect to one
    another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93,     for this subject matter where means are provided for series
    parallel connection of the motor armatures combined with motor field
    control.

    111,    and the subclasses listed under the Search Notes in the definition
    of that subclass, for plural motor systems having series parallel
    arrangements of the motors.

    495,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes to the definition of that
    subclass for miscellaneous motor systems having series parallel armature
    connecting means.


CLS 318/96
TXT Subject matter under subclass 95 in which means are provided for providing
    impedance in the armature or primary circuits of the motors.

    (1)     Note.  See section I, B, 3, of the class definition for a
    definition of "impedance".


CLS 318/97
TXT Subject matter under subclass 90 in which means are provided for
    controlling the field or secondary circuits of the electric motors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     and the subclasses specified in the Notes to the definition of that
    subclass for plural motor systems having field circuit control for
    controlling the running speed of the motors.

    100,    for plural motor systems having field control for load control of
    the motors.

    521,    and the subclasses specified in the Search Notes thereto, for
    miscellaneous motor systems having field or secondary circuit control.


CLS 318/98
TXT Subject matter under subclass 34 in which means are provided for
    controlling the magnitude of the load which is driven or actuated by the
    motors, or for otherwise controlling the magnitude or amount of work done
    by the motors; or for controlling the division of load or current between
    the motors.

    (1)     Note.  For mere starting and/or stopping of the motors, search
    subclass 101.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5       and 8, for plural motor systems having plural motors employed to
    drive particular load devices, the system including motor load control
    means particularly in subclass 8 where plural motors drive an ultimate load
    device through a differential gearing whereby a predetermined ratio of load
    may be effected on the motors.

    7,      for plural motor systems where the relative torque on the motors
    may be controlled to effect a predetermined tension in a material driven or
    conveyed by the motors.

    39,     for plural motor systems of the work-and-feed-motor combination
    type where control of feed-motor may affect load on the work-motor.

    41,     for plural motor systems where the motors have electrical
    synchronizing interconnections in which the interconnection may affect the
    relative loads on the several motors.

    45+,    for plural motor systems where the armature or work output members
    of the motors are mechanically interconnected.

    52,     for plural motor systems having racing or slipping control which
    may affect the load on or between the several motors.

    68+,    for plural motor systems having the relative speed control between
    motors which may affect the load on or between the motors.

    88,     for plural motor systems having control of the load or current
    division between several motors during dynamic braking of motors.

    430+,   for single motor systems having motor load control during the
    starting or stopping.

    432,    for single motor systems having means for maintaining a
    substantially constant load upon the motor.

    434,    for single motor systems having means for maintaining the load upon
    the motor from exceeding predetermined limits or going below a
    predetermined limit.

    474,    for single motor systems having automatic control of the motor in
    response to load conditions.


CLS 318/99
TXT Subject matter under subclass 98 in which means are provided for
    controlling the division of load current so that the ratio of division is
    or can be maintained at some fixed or predetermined ratio.

    (1)     Note.  The means may be adjustable so that the ratio can be varied
    from one fixed or predetermined value to another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for plural motor systems having load or current division between
    motors when acting as generators during dynamic braking.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 32 for
    systems for proportioning the electrical energy supply to a plurality of
    load circuits and subclass 53 for systems of load division among a
    plurality of generators or sources.


CLS 318/100
TXT Subject matter under subclass 99 in which means are provided for
    controlling the field or secondary circuits of the electric motors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    521+,   and the subclasses specified in the Search Notes thereto, for
    miscellaneous motor circuits having field circuit control means.


CLS 318/101
TXT Subject matter under subclass 34 in which means are provided for starting
    and/or stopping one or more of a group of two or more electric motors.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is a residual subclass for patents relating
    primarily to starting and/or stopping of electric motors.  Starting and/or
    stopping of electric motors is an incident of, or is combined with many
    other motor operations controls.  For example, when accelerating a motor
    from rest to its normal running speed the motor is started as a necessary
    incident; likewise in decelerating, or braking to a condition of inaction,
    a motor is stopped.  Also in reversing, a motor is usually stopped and
    started in the reverse direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18+,    for follow-up systems of electric motor control wherein the motor
    is started as a result of the movement of the transmitter and stopped as a
    result of the stoppage of the transmitter.

    53,     for plural motor systems having automatic starting and/or stopping
    of plural motors in combination with other motor operations control.

    90+,    for plural motor systems having starting and/or stopping as a part
    of the acceleration and/or deceleration control of plural electric motors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 116.5+ for means for
    terminating the transmission of power to various driven devices.


CLS 318/102
TXT Subject matter under subclass 101 in which means are provided for starting
    or stopping two or more electric motors one after another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     for plural motor systems having means for selectively accelerating
    and/or decelerating two or more motors one after another.


CLS 318/103
TXT Subject matter under subclass 101 in which means are provided for starting
    or stopping one or more electric motors without starting and/or stopping
    one or more other electric motors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     for plural motor systems having means for accelerating and/or
    decelerating plural motors, the system being arranged so that one or more
    motors can be accelerated and/or decelerated without accelerating and/or
    decelerating another motor.


CLS 318/104
TXT Subject matter under subclass 101 in which means are provided in the
    armature (or primary) circuit for starting and/or stopping the motors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    494,    particularly 519+, for single motor systems having starting and/or
    stopping control by means of armature circuit control.


CLS 318/105
TXT Subject matter under subclass 34 in which two or more sources of electrical
    supply are provided to supply energy to the armature or primary circuits
    of the motors, one or more of which sources of supply are different in
    kind, type, degree or magnitude or are differently controlled, with respect
    to one or more others of the sources.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    440+,   and the subclasses specified in the Notes to the definition of that
    subclass for other systems which comprise plural sources of supply for the
    armature circuits of motors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 18+
    for systems including a plurality of sources of supply for a plurality of
    loads, and subclasses 43+ for systems having a plurality of supply circuits
    or sources.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclasses 86+ for
    generators having a field circuit energized from plural sources of supply.


CLS 318/106
TXT Subject matter under subclass 105 in which one or more of the sources are
    substantially different in respect to (1) structure of the sources or (2)
    the nature or magnitude of an electrical characteristic of the sources,
    than one or more others of the sources.

    (1)     Note.  For example, an internal combustion engine driven dynamo and
    an electric converter, or a secondary battery and a thermocouple are
    examples of diverse or unlike sources by virtue of their different
    structures; while two sources may differ from one another in their nature
    in that one may be a.c.and the other d.c., or in the magnitude of
    electrical characteristics such as having different voltages or different
    frequencies, or different capacities.


CLS 318/107
TXT Subject matter under subclass 106 in which the sources comprise one or more
    a.c. sources and one or more d.c. sources.

    (1)     Note.  A "pulsating" source is a d.c. source for purposes of this
    class. Where, however, a d.c. source and an a.c. source are connected to a
    circuit to produce a pulsating current or voltage in the circuit,
    classification will be on the basis of plural Sources.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    441,    for motor systems having the combination of a.c. and d.c. sources
    for a single motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 72+
    for systems having a plurality of supply circuits or sources having unlike
    electrical characteristics.


CLS 318/108
TXT Subject matter under subclass 107 in which one or more of the sources of
    supply, supply electric energy at one voltage magnitude and one or more
    others of the sources supply energy at another magnitude of voltage.

    (1)     Note.  Two voltages are of different magnitudes if, at any time
    during normal operation, one of them has a magnitude substantially
    different in effective value than the other.  Hence, if the magnitude of
    one of the sources is varied relative to the magnitude of the other so as
    not to be the same, the two sources are considered to be of different
    voltages.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109,    for plural motor systems having similar types of sources (e.g., all
    a.c sources or all d.c. sources) for the motors in which one or more of the
    sources differ in voltage magnitude from one or more others of the sources.

    442,    for motor systems having plural sources of supply for a single
    motor in which the voltages of the sources differ in magnitude from one
    another.


CLS 318/109
TXT Subject matter under subclass 106 in which one or more of the sources
    differs in magnitude from one or more others of the sources.

    (1)     Note.  Two voltages differ in magnitude when at any time one of
    them has a magnitude which differs in effective value from the magnitude of
    the other. Hence, if the magnitude of the voltage of one of the sources is
    varied relative to the magnitude of the voltage of another source, in order
    to make them different the two sources are considered to be of different
    magnitudes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for this subject matter where one of the voltage sources is an a.c.
    source and another is a d.c. source.

    442,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes to that subclass for
    motor systems having plural sources of supply for single motor.


CLS 318/110
TXT Subject matter under subclass 106 in which one or more of the sources have
    a different frequency than one or more others of the sources.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    440,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for motor
    systems having plural sources of supply for a single motor which sources
    may differ in frequency.


CLS 318/111
TXT Subject matter under subclass 34 in which means are provided for connecting
    the armature or primary windings of one or more electric motors in series
    circuit relationship with the armature or primary windings of one or more
    other electric motors at one time and in parallel circuit relationship at
    another time; or for connecting the armature or primary windings of one or
    more electric motors in series circuit relationship with the armature or
    primary windings of one or more other electric motors, and simultaneously
    connecting the armature or primary circuit of one or more electric motors
    in parallel circuit relationship with the armature of primary circuit of
    one or more other electric motors.

    (1)     Note.  In the simultaneous series parallel relationship set forth
    in the latter half of the above definition, one or more of the motors
    connected in the series circuit relationship may constitute one or more of
    the motors which are connected in the parallel relationship.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83+,    for this subject matter where the series parallel connection of
    armature of primary circuits of the motors is for running speed control.

    84      and 97, for series parallel connections of field windings of plural
    motors for running speed control and acceleration control, respectively.

    93      and 95+, for this subject matter where the series parallel
    connection of the armature or primary circuits is for acceleration control.

    95,     see subclass 93 above.

    97,     see subclass 84 above.

    497,    and the subclasses specific in the Notes thereto, for motor systems
    having series parallel connections of plural armature or primary windings
    of a single electric motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 37 for
    plural load circuit systems in which the load circuits may be connected
    either in a series or parallel relationship, and subclass 71 for systems of
    plural electrical sources in which the sources may be connected either in a
    series or parallel relationship.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 192 and the
    Search Notes thereto for series parallel connected lamps and space
    discharge devices.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclasses for series or parallel connection of batteries in a
    system for charging or discharging a battery, especially subclasses 116+.


CLS 318/112
TXT Subject matter under subclass 34 in which means are provided for connecting
    the armature or primary circuits of one or more electric motors in parallel
    circuit relationship with the armature or primary circuits of one or more
    other electric motors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for this subject matter where the armature or primary circuits are
    connected in parallel for load or current division during braking.

    98,     for this subject matter where the armature or primary circuits are
    connected in parallel for load control.

    111,    for this subject matter where the armature circuits are connected
    in series at one time and in parallel at another, or where there are
    parallel connected armature circuits of plural motors and series connected
    armature circuits of plural motors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 11+
    for systems in which a plurality of loads or load circuits may be connected
    in parallel, and subclasses 43+ for systems in which a plurality of sources
    or supply circuits may be connected in parallel.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 312+ and
    the Search Notes thereto for parallel connected lamps and space discharge
    devices.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclasses for series or parallel connection of batteries in a
    system for charging or discharging a battery, especially subclasses 116+.


CLS 318/113
TXT Subject matter unde r subclass 34 in which means are provided for
    connecting the armature or primary circuits of one or more electric motors
    in series circuit relationship with the armature or primary circuits of one
    or more other electric motors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49+,    for motor systems having plural motors electrically connected in
    cascade or in tandem (that is, where the electrical output of one
    constitutes the electrical input to another).

    111,    for plural motor systems in which the armature or primary circuits
    of a plurality of motors are connected both in series and in parallel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 185+ and
    the Search Notes thereto, for plural series-connected-electric lamp and
    space discharge devices.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclasses for series or parallel connection of batteries in a
    system for charging or discharging a battery, especially subclasses 116+.


CLS 318/114
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which (1) means are provided
    for actuating one or more parts of an electric motor relative to and into
    impact or percussive contact with one or more other parts which are either
    parts of the motor structure or are structurally combined with the motor
    (i.e., not merely other parts which constitute a device or work piece to be
    operated on by the motor and to which the motor may be attached or
    relatively positioned temporarily); or (2) the motor is a shock or
    vibration producing type of motor the prime or essential function of which
    motor is to transmit mechanical shock or vibrations to a mechanism or
    device upon which the motor may be supported or to which the motor may be
    clamped or otherwise secured.

    (1)     Note.  A motor system having electric motor which is limited to
    having any useful output member other than that for producing impact shock
    or vibration as defined in parts (1) and (2) above, is not classified
    herein, but is classified in one of the other appropriate subclasses and
    cross-referenced to this subclass for the impact, shock or vibration
    producing feature.

    (2)     Note.  The shock or vibration producing motor may be a rotary
    electric motor in which the rotary element is decidedly unbalanced
    dynamically so that upon rotation it will produce pronounced reactive
    forces to cause the motor frame to transmit forces to the support or body
    with which it may be in contact and, hence, cause shock or vibration in
    said support or body.

            For example, mere reciprocating or oscillating motors which may or
    may not produce impact by the movable motor element, depending on the
    proximity of the motor having the movable element to the work or device to
    be operated upon or to be actuated by the motor are not included herein but
    will be found in subclass 119.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    see Note 2 above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 463+ and see Notes thereto.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclass 117 for an impacting device
    having a hammer head driven by an electric motor.


CLS 318/115
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which means are provided for
    giving the working or output member of the motor two or more types of
    motion either simultaneously or not.

    (1)     Note.  For example only, an electric motor which is adapted to
    rotate and simultaneously reciprocate is included herein.  Likewise, a
    motor designed to rotate while d.c. is applied to its terminals and
    reciprocate when pulsating or a.c. is applied to its terminals is
    classified herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     for plural motors systems in which one or more motors has one type
    of motion another motor has a different type of motion.


CLS 318/116
TXT Subject matter under the class definition which the electric motor converts
    electric to mechanical energy by means other than magnetic induction.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of nonmagnetic motors are piezoelectric crystals,
    thermal-electric motors, electrostatic motors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for this subject matter where the system includes a plurality of
    non-magnetic motors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 300+ for
    nondynamoelectric motors, per se.


CLS 318/117
TXT Subject matter under subclass 116 in which the motor comprises a member
    which undergoes substantial changes in shape, position and/or dimensions
    when heated, and means for electrical heating, the member.

    (1)     Note.  When electric current is conducted through the above
    mentioned member thereby causing the member to become heated, separate
    heating means are not necessary.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 523 for a motor in which a confined unit of
    mass of gas is heated electrically to produce expansion; subclass 528 for a
    motor operated by the expansion of a solid mass heated by its resistance to
    flow of an electrical current; and subclass 513 for a motor operated by the
    expansion of fluid in an expansible chamber containing an electric heating
    means.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 306 for thermal
    or pyromagnetic electric motors.


CLS 318/118
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which the motor is of the
    magneto-striction type.

    (1)     Note.  See section I, B, 1, e, of the class definition for a
    definition of a magneto-strictive motor.


    Commonly, the magnetizable member is (1) restrained from moving at a point
    along a dimension thereof but is free to move at other points along and in
    the direction of such dimension, and is (2) combined with a solenoid or
    winding which surrounds the magnetizable member and the axis of which
    winding is concentric or parallel with such dimension; as a result of which
    the magnetizable member will change in dimension when, the magnetic field
    is changed the mechanical motion of the member being available for power
    output purposes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    for other motor systems having magnetic motors of the reciprocating
    or oscillating type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 300 for
    magneto-strictive motors, per se.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 215 for magnetostrictive magnets, per se.


CLS 318/119
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which the motor is a
    reciprocating or oscillating type of electric motor.

    (1)     Note.  See section I, B, 1, f, of the class definition for a
    definition of reciprocating or oscillating type motor.

    (2)     Note.  Either of the terms "reciprocating" or "oscillating" when
    used separately in the titles and definitions in this class will be
    construed to include the other, unless clearly indicated otherwise.

    (3)     Note.  For motor systems having the conventional rotary electric
    motor constructed for unlimited degree of movement in a given direction
    combined with means for periodically reversing the motor (e.g., reversed
    (1) in response to a "limit of travel" in either direction of rotation, (2)
    under control of some time-measuring mechanism, (3) after a predetermined
    number of revolutions, (4) etc.), see appropriate subclasses hereinafter
    under "Reversing, periodic or repetitious", subclass 281.

            Where the "motor" has means for actuating in one direction only
    (including arrangements whereby electric means or gravity and electric
    means can effect actuation in the one direction only) and consequently, the
    return movement must be effected manually or by some nonmotor means;
    classification is not herein.  For example, a motor system having a motor
    having a vertically disposed and freely movable element and electrical
    means for effecting an upward motion only and wherein gravity can effect
    the return or downward motion; classification is herein.  However, where
    the movable member of the motor is horizontally disposed and no energy
    storing means, such as a spring or compressible gas chamber, is provided to
    return the member after actuated by electric means (which are effective in
    one direction only), classification is not herein, but is classified as
    "linear motor" system or as an electromagnet with armature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for reciprocating or oscillating motors combined with
    motion-converting mechanisms.  (For example, the combination of a
    reciprocating electric motor supply and/or control system combined with
    means for converting the reciprocatory motion of the motor to a rotary
    motion will be found in subclass 14).

    21,     for this subject matter where the motor system is a follow-up
    system having a reciprocating or oscillating motor.

    35,     for this subject matter where the motor system has the combination
    of an oscillating or reciprocating motor and another motor having a
    different type of motor (e.g., combination of a reciprocating and a rotary
    motor).

    37,     for this subject matter where the system includes a plurality of
    reciprocating or oscillating motors.

    116+,   for this subject matter where the motor is a magneto-striction type
    of motor in which periodic magnetization of the core part effects periodic
    dimensional changes in the core part thus resulting in reciprocating motion
    of the core part.

    135,    for motor systems having a linear-movement motor.

    159+,   for motor system which has the rotor element biased against
    rotation by virtue of which the rotor element is returned when the motor is
    deenergized or the energization is reduced. 281+, see (3) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclasses for
    reciprocating and oscillating type expansible chamber motors.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 1-3 and 18+ and 198+ for
    internal combustion engines of the reciprocating type.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 15 for
    reciprocating electric motor structure, per se, and subclass 36 for
    oscillating electric motor structure, per se.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 3 for
    reciprocating and/or oscillating generator systems.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 220 for electromagnets with armatures.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclass 64 for
    impellers of the reciprocating type and subclass 79 for impellers of the
    oscillating type.


CLS 318/120
TXT Subject matter under subclass 119 in which means are provided for stopping
    the motor after it has made a predetermined number of reciprocations or
    cycles.

    (1)     Note.  For example, a reciprocating motor which when started
    operates to make one reciprocation, stroke or cycle and stops, is
    classified herein.

    (2)     Note.  Where the stopping is effected by mechanical stopping means,
    such as brake, stop means, classification is not in this class but in some
    other appropriate class.  Note Class 192, subclasses 116.5+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    463,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for motor
    systems having automatic stopping of rotary motors after a predetermined
    degree of movement of the motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 116, see (2) Note above.


CLS 318/121
TXT Subject matter under subclass 119 in which means are provided for producing
    a magnetic field of force in the motor, which field (or the resultant of
    the component elements thereof) is caused to occupy a succession of
    positions in the path or direction of travel of the reciprocable member of
    the motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135,    for motor systems having linear-movement motors with means for
    producing progressing or travelling field.

    148,    for induction and synchronous motors supplied by controlled
    generators.

    195+,   for motor systems having an induction motor with means for
    producing a travelling magnetic field.

    700+,   for motor systems having a synchronous motor with means for
    producing a travelling magnetic field.


CLS 318/122
TXT Subject matter under subclass 119 in which the motor is provided with two
    or more energizing windings one or more of which are different
    structurally, or energized or controlled differently than one or more
    others of the windings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121,    for this subject matter where the system includes two or more
    windings for producing a travelling or progressive magnetic motor field
    flux.

    495,    and the subclasses listed in the Search Notes thereto, for other
    motor control systems in which the motor has two or more energizing
    windings.


CLS 318/123
TXT Subject matter under subclass 122 in which there is either a polyphase
    alternating current supply, or two or more sources of supply, one or more
    of which are different or differently controlled than one or more others of
    the sources, connected to supply energy to the two or more of the motor
    windings.

    (1)     Note.  All the phases or sources of supply may be connected to each
    of the several windings, or one or more of the sources or phases may be
    connected to one or more of the windings and one or more others of the
    sources or phases may be connected to one or more others of the windings.
    The several sources or phases may be connected simultaneously or at
    different times.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    495+,   and the Search Notes thereto, for plural motor systems having
    winding motors with plural sources therefor.

    500,    and the Search Notes thereto, for motor systems having plural
    sources of supply for a single motor having a single armature or primary
    winding.


CLS 318/124
TXT Subject matter under subclass 123 in which at least one of the sources is a
    unidirectional current source (including pulsating d.c. current) and at
    least one other of the sources is an alternating (i.e., reversing polarity)
    current source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    441,    and the subclasses listed in the Search Notes thereto, for other
    motor systems having a.c., and d.c. sources of supply for the motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 22 for
    plural load circuit systems supplied either from an AC of DC source, and
    subclasses 43+ for systems having a plurality of supply circuits or sources
    which may be AC or DC.


CLS 318/125
TXT Subject matter under subclass 122 in which one or more unidirectionally
    conductive devices are connected in the energizing circuit of one or more
    of the windings.

    (1)     Note.  Systems where the unidirectionally conductive devices are
    connected in series with or in shunt to the windings are included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    505,    and the Search Notes thereto for other motor systems having
    space-discharge devices in the circuits thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 111 and 125+ for
    rectifying systems including unidirectionally conductive devices.


CLS 318/126
TXT Subject matter under subclass 119 in which means are provided for
    controlling the electric circuit which supplies the electric energy to the
    energizing winding of the motor.

    (1)     Note.  The control of the electric circuit includes (1) control of
    the immediate circuit to the windings (as, for example, opening and closing
    the circuit, controlling a space-discharge device or an impedance connected
    in series with the circuit and the motor winding, or introducing an aiding
    or opposing source of e.m.f. in the circuit in addition to the main or
    prime source of e.m.f.) and also (2) control of the source of energy which
    supplies the energizing current to the motor (as, for example, controlling
    the energy input to the source, as by controlling a prime mover which
    drives a generator, or by controlling the electrical input to an electrical
    converter).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140,    for generator fed motor systems wherein the motor is controlled by
    controlling the generator.

    494,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for other motor
    control systems wherein the armature or primary circuit thereto is provided
    with control means.

    521,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for other motor
    control systems where in the field or secondary circuit thereto is provided
    with control means.


CLS 318/127
TXT Subject matter under subclass 126 wherein automatic means are provided so
    that the energizing winding is controlled in response to the position,
    movement, limit of travel, amplitude or rate of change of movement of the
    motor or the device actuated thereby; or in response to the noise, sound or
    mechanical vibrations produced by the motor parts or by the motor actuated
    device; magnitude of energizing current or occurrences of pulses in the
    energizing circuit.

    (1)     Note.  This is a limited automatic subclass and does not include
    sensing means responsive to any but the above specified conditions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    445+,   and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for other motor
    systems having automatic control responsive to predetermined conditions in
    general.


CLS 318/128
TXT Subject matter under subclass 127 in which the sensing means responds to
    noise, sound, or mechanical vibrations of or emanating from the motor being
    controlled or the device actuated by the motor, or responds to the
    amplitude or magnitude or the rate of movement of, or the limit-of-travel
    or other position of the motor being controlled or the device actuated by
    the motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    For other motor systems having automatic control in response to the
    particular conditions enumerated in the definition above, search the
    following subclasses and the pertinent subclasses listed in the Search
    Notes thereto.

    452,    for plural diverse conditions.

    456,    for rate-of-change of a condition.

    460,    for noise, sound, or mechanical vibrations.

    461,    for speed or rate of movement of motor or other body.

    466,    for movement, position, or limit-of-travel of motor or other device
    or body.


CLS 318/129
TXT Subject matter under subclass 126 in which means are provided for producing
    a succession of electrical pulses in the energizing circuit of the winding,
    the periodicity of the pulses being such that the motor to which the pulses
    are supplied is maintained in substantially continuous motion by the
    succession of pulses.

    (1)     Note.  A mere means for producing electric pulses (i.e., there
    being no details of structure of the means or any details of relationship
    between the means and the motor to which the pulses are supplied--other
    than the mere connection thereto) is insufficient basis for classification
    herein.  For example, recitation by name only of the means for producing
    periodic pulses such as "an a-c source", a "source of pulsations", an
    "oscillator", etc., does not constitute a means for producing periodic
    pulses which is classifiable herein.

    (2)     Note.  Where the means for producing the pulses may or may not
    produce the succession of pulses, classification is not herein.  For
    example, a manually operated circuit interrupter in the supply circuit to
    the motor may be operated to produce a single pulse or a succession of
    pulses depending on the will of the operator and is not classifiable
    herein.  Likewise, a circuit interrupter which closes the circuit in
    response to a condition (such as temperature or pressure) which condition
    may sometimes vary to cause the circuit to be periodically interrupted, is
    not classified herein. However, in the latter case, if the condition
    response means causes electrical pulses from a source of pulsating current
    to be supplied to the winding, such a system would be classified herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122+,   for systems under subclass 119 which include means for periodically
    energizing one or more windings of a plural winding motor.

    127+,   for this subject matter where the system includes means responsive
    to predetermined conditions in or of the motor for controlling the motor,
    including controlling the application or the periodicity of pulses to the
    motor.

    503,    and the subclasses listed in the Search Notes thereto, for other
    motor control systems in which periodic pulses are supplied to the motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 96+
    for circuit interrupting systems for regulating the average value of
    current flowing through an electrical circuit, and subclass 132 for
    intermittent circuit interruption systems, such as "flashing systems", of
    general application.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclasses 69+ for systems
    wherein a generator field circuit is interrupted to regulate the field
    current.


CLS 318/130
TXT Subject matter under subclass 129 in which the means for producing the
    periodic pulses comprise either an electrical self-oscillating circuit or a
    condenser changing and/or discharging circuit.

    (1)     Note.  Where the condenser changing and/or discharging is merely an
    adjunct to the system of supply such as a filter means, for example; and
    does not operate to have a substantial effect in determining the rate which
    the pulses are supplied to the motor, classification is not herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 108
    for systems wherein a condenser is charged and discharged to produce a
    series of pulses.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    subclasses 166+ for a system for charging or discharging a capacitor.

    331,    Oscillators, appropriate subclasses, for self-sustained electric
    wave generators, per se, particularly subclasses 111+, 129+ and 143+ for
    relaxation oscillators utilizing an RC time constant network to determine
    the period of oscillation.


CLS 318/131
TXT Subject matter under subclass 129 in which the means for producing the
    periodic pulses includes a device of means which is actuated or controlled
    by a motor, or escapement device to control the periodicity of the pulses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 1.5 for escapements, per se,
    of general application.

    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, or Animal Powered, subclasses 5, 31, and
    38 for escapement controlled spring and weight motors.


CLS 318/132
TXT Subject matter under subclass 126 in which the means for controlling the
    energizing circuit of the motor includes a space-discharge device or an
    unidirectionally-conductive device connected in series with or in shunt to
    the energizing winding of the motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    for this subject matter where the motor has plural windings.

    505,    and the subclasses specified in the search notes thereto, for other
    motor control systems having space-discharge devices in the armature or
    primary circuit of the motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 518+ for miscellaneous electron discharge device
    control circuits.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 111 and 125+ for
    rectifying systems including space discharge devices and other
    unidirectionally conductive devices.


CLS 318/133
TXT Subject matter under subclass 126 in which the control means comprises one
    or more impedance devices in series and/or in shunt to the motor windings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132,    for this subject matter where the impedance device is a
    space-discharge or unidirectionally conductive device.

    508+,   and subclasses specified in the search notes appended thereto, for
    other motor control systems wherein impedance devices are employed in the
    energizing circuit of an electric motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    364-370 for miscellaneous impedance systems.


CLS 318/134
TXT Subject matter under subclass 126 in which the control means comprise
    circuit making and/or breaking devices in series with the energizing
    circuit of the motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129+,   for this subject matter where the system includes circuit making
    and/or breaking devices combined with means for periodically actuating them.

    519+,   and the subclasses specified in the search notes appended thereto,
    for other motor control systems having circuit making and/or breaking means
    in the armature or primary circuit of the motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electric Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 112+
    for searching systems.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    safety systems using circuit breakers, and subclass 139+ for relay and
    electromagnetic switch circuits.


CLS 318/135
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which the motor is linear
    movement type of electric motor.

    (1)     Note.  See section I, B, 1, g, of the class definition for a
    definition of a linear movement motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for linear-movement motors in follow-up systems.

    35,     for linear-movement motor combined with another electric motor
    having a different type (e.g., rotary) of movement.

    38,     for plural linear-movement motor systems.

    115,    for motor systems which have single motors having diverse types of
    motion, including linear movement.

    119,    for reciprocating or oscillating type motor systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclasses 282 and 290+ for a railway vehicle and track
    claimed in combination with a linear propulsion motor and control system
    therefor.

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, subclass 3 for electromagnetic guns
    and projectors.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 12 for structural
    details of linear motors, per se.


CLS 318/136
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which means, other than the
    motor being controlled and its electrical circuits, are provided for
    producing a mechanical turning effort to the rotor element of the motor
    during the starting and/or the accelerating period of operation of the
    motor, and which means is deenergized, disconnected, or otherwise
    incapacitated to assist in actuating the motor under running-speed
    conditions.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is designed to include those devices which are
    employed to start an electric motor which is inherently not-self-starting
    and also to include those which assist the motor in attaining running speed
    conditions in order to reduce the heavy demand of electric current required
    to bring a motor up to running speed when operating without starting
    assistance. The device must be distinct from the motor and produce a
    turning effort independently of the magnetic turning effort produced by the
    motor itself. The device can be structurally united with motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for motor systems which have an electric motor combined with a
    nonmotor driving means.

    45+,    for electric motor systems having plural motor mechanically
    connected or coupled in a fixed predetermined ratio of movement during
    normal running periods.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 6+ for mechanical devices,
    per se, for starting engines in general.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 53 for expansible
    chamber motors of the engine rotating or starting type.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 179.1+, for starting
    devices for internal combustion engines.

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants, subclasses 10+, 18+, 22+, 27, 28, 30,
    31+, 36+, 38, 46, 47, and 48 for dynamo-electric machines used as starting
    motors for prime-mover dynamo plants.


CLS 318/137
TXT Subject matter under subclass 136 in which the auxiliary means comprises a
    motor.

    (1)     Note.  See Search Notes for subclass 136 above.


CLS 318/138
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which space discharge devices
    are connected in the armature or primary circuit of the motor and are
    connected so as to effect the commutation of the motor.

    (1)     Note.  The interposition of an induction transformer or other
    electric converter between the space discharge devices and the armature of
    the motor does not prevent classification herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 323 and
    subclasses specified in the notes for sequentially operated gas or vapor
    filled space discharge devices systems.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 518+ for miscellaneous electron discharge device
    control circuits.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 166+ for electronic
    tube frequency converter systems.

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, art collections 913+ for other
    motor control systems utilizing space discharge devices in the control
    circuitry.


CLS 318/139
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which the armature or primary
    circuit of an electric motor is supplied by electric energy from one or
    more primary or secondary electric batteries which constitute the only
    source of supply for the motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    440+,   for motor systems where there are plural sources of electric energy
    for the armature or primary circuit which include nonbattery sources.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass for charging or discharging a battery.


CLS 318/140
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which an electric generator is
    provided for supplying electric energy to the armature or primary circuit
    of an electric motor and in which means are also provided for controlling
    the generator to thereby control the operation of the electric motor.

    (1)     Note.  An "electric generator" includes any means for converting
    nonelectrical energy into electrical energy.  Thus it includes
    photo-electric and thermoelectric generators, primary or secondary
    batteries, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Where more than one generator is provided to supply the
    energy, means must be provided for controlling each generator.  See
    subclasses 440+ where no means are provided for controlling one of the
    generators.

    (3)     Note.  Where the only generator control means comprises means
    connected in the circuit between the generator terminals and the motor
    terminals, classification is not in this or its indented subclasses but in
    some other appropriate subclass in the class.

    (4)     Note.  Mere inherent regulation of the generator (i.e., regulation
    of the output of the generator resulting merely from structural features of
    the generator) is not sufficient basis for classification herein except in
    those instances where the regulation functions to substantially vary the
    operation of the motor.  Thus a flat-compounded generator operates to
    produce a substantially constant output voltage with varying load and,
    hence, performs or produces no regulating function on the motor other than
    would any constant voltage source.  Likewise, the proportion of parts and
    airgaps, degree of excitation, resistance of the several conductive
    elements of the generator, etc., are instrumental in determining the
    operating characteristics of the generator and generally tend toward
    generator operating characteristics which have no particular effect on the
    operation of the motor supplied thereby other than to supply a source of
    energy, the voltage variation of which is not substantially
    disadvantageous. However, a series-generator, or a decidedly
    over-compounded or a decidedly under-compounded generator, or one with a
    differentially wound series field exciting winding may have operating
    characteristics which very materially varies the operation of the motor
    with changes in motor load.  This type of regulation is considered
    sufficient basis for classification herein.

            Any control or regulating means for maintaining constant current or
    power output from the generator with a varying motor load, by generator
    control, is sufficient basis for classification herein.

    (5)     Note.  Means for "controlling the generator" include means for
    varying the speed of the generator by controlling the driving means
    therefor, or for adjusting the structure of the generator.

    (6)     Note.  Means for controlling excitation of a.c. generator
    (supplying energy to primary circuit of synchronous motor) in response to
    motor primary circuit current to control pullout torque or to "stiffen the
    coupling between the generator and motor" is included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139,    for this subject matter for motor systems having electric batteries
    for supplying electric energy to the motor.

    440,    see Note 2 above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, for generator control of
    general application.  The appropriate subclass or subclasses would depend
    on the particular generator control involved.


CLS 318/141
TXT Subject matter under subclass 140 in which means are provided for
    automatically controlling the generator in response to a predetermined
    condition, or in which time-delay means are provided for retarding or
    delaying the operation of the generator control means, whether initiated
    manually or otherwise.

    (1)     Note.  The condition need not be one that exists in, about or
    pertaining to the motor or generator of the system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    445+,   and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for other
    automatic control systems for electric motors, and for other motor control
    systems which include a time-delay means for the control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants, subclasses 1 through 44 for prime-mover
    generator plants in which the generator may be automatically controlled in
    response to some predetermined condition.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass for a battery charging system supplied by a generator
    source.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclasses 17+ for
    automatic control of generators in general.


CLS 318/142
TXT Subject matter under subclass 141 in which means are provided for
    automatically controlling the generator in response to two or more diverse
    conditions, or for automatically controlling the generator in response to
    one condition and with means for introducing a time-delay in the operation
    of the generator control.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are systems in which the only time
    delay means operates to delay the operation of the means responsive to the
    condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    452+,   and the classes specified in the Search Notes thereto, for other
    motor control systems having the motor controlled in response to plural
    conditions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 18 for automatic
    generator control with time delay; subclasses 22+ for automatic generator
    control in response to plural conditions.


CLS 318/143
TXT Subject matter under subclass 142 in which two or more of the conditions
    comprise electrical conditions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    454+,   and the subclasses specified in the Search Notes thereto, for other
    motor control systems having the motor controlled in response to plural
    electrical conditions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclasses 24+ for
    automatic generator control in response to plural electrical conditions.


CLS 318/144
TXT Subject matter under subclass 141 in which means are provided for
    controlling the generator in response to the magnitude or rate of change of
    magnitude of the current in the armature or primary circuit of the motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    458,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for other motor
    control systems which are responsive to the rate of change of an electrical
    condition.

    474+,   and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for other motor
    control systems which are responsive to the current in the armature or
    primary circuit of the motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 27 for automatic
    generator control in response to generator armature current.


CLS 318/145
TXT Subject matter under subclass 141 in which means are provided for
    controlling the generator in response to the magnitude or the rate of
    change of magnitude of the terminal voltage or the counter electromotive
    force of the motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    458,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for other motor
    control systems which are responsive to the rate-of-change of an electrical
    condition.

    459,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for other motor
    control systems which are responsive to the terminal or counter
    electromotive force of the motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 19 for generator
    control systems responsive to rate-of-change of an electrical condition;
    subclass 29 for automatic generator control in response to generator
    voltage.


CLS 318/146
TXT Subject matter under subclass 141 in which means are provided for
    controlling the generator in response to the speed of the motor or a device
    driven thereby.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145,    for this subject matter where the generator control is responsive
    to the terminal voltage or c.e.m.f. of the motor, which may vary with the
    speed of the motor.

    461,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for other motor
    control systems which are responsive to the speed of the motor or of other
    devices.


CLS 318/147
TXT Subject matter under subclass 141 in which means are provided for
    controlling the generator in response to the speed of the generator or the
    frequency of the voltage or current generated thereby, or in response to
    the speed of the generator driving means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145,    for motor control systems which are responsive to the terminal
    voltage or the c.e.m.f. of the motor which may correspond with the armature
    circuit voltage of the generator and hence to the speed of the generator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclasses 29+ for
    automatic generator control in response to the speed or frequency of the
    generator.


CLS 318/148
TXT Subject matter under subclass 140 in which the motor is an alternating
    current motor (i.e., a motor which operates when the armature or primary
    circuit is supplied with alternating current) and in which the generator
    supplies an alternating current to the armature or primary circuit of the
    motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244,    for other alternating current commutating motor systems.

    700+,   for other synchronous motor systems. 725+ for other repulsion motor
    systems.  727+ for other induction motor systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 159 for
    structural details of alternating current motors, per se.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    alternating current generator control systems.  In Class 322 classification
    is not determined by whether the generator output is a.c. or d.c. and the
    appropriate subclass would depend on the particular control or response of
    the generator.


CLS 318/149
TXT Subject matter under subclass 140 in which there are two or more generators
    which supply the armature or primary circuits of the electric motor, in
    which one or more of the generators are structurally different or are
    controlled differently (e.g., with respect to time, degree or magnitude,
    etc.) than one or more others of the generators, and in which means are
    provided for controlling a plurality of generators.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    440+,   and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto; for motor
    systems having plural sources of supply for the armature or primary circuit
    of electric motors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 72+
    for plural generators or sources, having unlike electrical characteristics,
    which supply a common load circuit.


CLS 318/150
TXT Subject matter under subclass 140 in which a flywheel or other massive body
    is mounted for rotation with the rotor of either the generator or the motor.

    (1)     Note.  Where the rotor, per se, of the generator or of the motor is
    specifically limited to being massive, classification is herein.

            Also where the flywheel or other massive body is mounted other than
    directly on the shaft of the rotor of the generator or motor but is
    mechanically connected in driving relation to the rotor, classification is
    herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for other motor
    systems wherein the motor has a flywheel or other massive rotary member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 572+ for details of
    structure of flywheels and rotors, per se.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 4 for generator
    systems where the generator is provided with flywheels or massive moving
    parts.


CLS 318/151
TXT Subject matter under subclass 140 in which means are provided for
    controlling the electric circuit which extends from the generator armature
    to the motor armature and additional means are provided for controlling the
    generator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139,    for this subject matter where the system is a battery-fed motor
    systems having control of the battery and the circuit therefrom to the
    motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for control of electrical transmission lines either with or
    without control of the supply or load connected thereto.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass for battery charging or discharging from a regulated
    source.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclasses 7+ for combined
    control of generator and load circuit.


CLS 318/152
TXT Subject matter under subclass 151 in which means are also provided for
    controlling the motor, which means is in addition to the control of the
    supply circuit extending to the primary circuit of the motor and the
    control of the generator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    491,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for other motor
    control systems having combined motor circuit and motor structure control.

    493,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for other motor
    control systems having combined armature or primary circuit and field or
    secondary circuit controls.


CLS 318/153
TXT Subject matter under subclass 140 in which means are provided for
    controlling the generator and additional means are provided for controlling
    the motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139,    for the subject matter where the system includes a battery-fed
    motor and both the battery and the motor are controlled.

    152,    for this subject matter where the system includes means for the
    combined control of the generator, the transmission circuit to the motor,
    and of the motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants, for combined control of nonelectric
    prime-mover and the generator driven thereby, which generators may supply
    electric motors.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclasses 14+ for combined
    control of the generator and the driving means therefor.


CLS 318/154
TXT Subject matter under subclass 153 in which the control means effect control
    of the field or secondary circuit of both the generator and of the motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    521,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto for motor field
    or secondary circuit control in motor control systems in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclasses 59+ for
    generator field circuit control.


CLS 318/156
TXT Subject matter under subclass 140 in which two or more distinct means are
    provided for controlling the generator, one or more of which control means
    are different structurally or are controlled differently (e.g., at
    different times, different degree or magnitude of control, etc.) than one
    or more others of the control means.

    (1)     Note.  Means for controlling the generator driving means so as to
    vary the generator speed is considered a "generator control means."

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 45 for combined
    diverse generator controls.


CLS 318/157
TXT Subject matter under subclass 140 in which means are provided for
    controlling the speed of the generator by controlling the driving means
    therefor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    700+,   for this subject matter where the system includes means for
    controlling the speed of the generator combined with other control means
    for the generator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants, for variable speed nonelectric prime
    movers which drive generators.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclasses 14+ for combined
    control of generator and driving means; subclasses 29+ for automatic
    control of generator or driving means control in response to speed or
    frequency of the generator; subclasses 38+ for generator driving means
    control; subclasses 40+ for power transmitting mechanism control.


CLS 318/158
TXT Subject matter under subclass 140 in which means are provided for
    controlling the field circuit of the generator.

    (1)     Note.  Providing the generator with plural, diverse or diversely
    arranged, field windings, or providing means for varying the active length
    (such as by tapping) of the field winding are included in field circuit
    control, when such are such as to substantially modify the operation of the
    electric motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154,    for this subject matter where the system includes means for the
    combined control of the generator field and the motor field.

    156,    for motor circuits under subclass 140 having field circuit control
    combined with other control means for the generator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclasses 59+ for
    generator field circuit control in general.


CLS 318/159
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which the motor comprises a
    rotatable power output element (rotor) combined with means for exerting a
    torque in opposition to and simultaneously with the motor torque.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of means for producing the opposing torque which
    are included in this subclass:  elastic or spring devices interconnecting
    the rotor and stationary part of the motor; a pulley or drum mounted on the
    rotor with a weighted flexible member attached thereto and adapted to
    rotate the rotor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for motor systems having nonelectric means for actuating a load
    device in addition to an electric motor as an actuator.

    45+,    see Note 2 above.

    119+,   for reciprocating motor systems in which the reciprocating element
    may be biassed by gravity or by force-producing means in one direction of
    actuating and electrically in the other direction of actuation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 129.01 for valves with
    electrical actuators.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 15+ for
    reciprocating electrical motors having a biassing means present.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 131 for electrically
    driven or actuated meter movements having biassed indicating means.


CLS 318/160
TXT Subject matter under subclass 159 in which the biassing means comprises a
    spring or other means which when flexed or distorted inherently tends to
    reassume its previous shape or dimension.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, for structural details of springs, per se.


CLS 318/161
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which a flywheel or other
    massive rotatably mounted body is mounted in driving relationship with the
    motor rotor or other working member in such manner that energy transfer can
    take place from the motor to the flywheel or other massive rotary member
    and vice versa.

    (1)     Note.  Systems in which the rotary or other working element, per
    se, of the motor is limited to being massive are included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45+,    for motor systems in which the movable working element of one motor
    is mechanically interconnected with the movable working element of another
    motor which may have a flywheel effect.

    150,    for generator-fed motor systems which have flywheels or other
    massive bodies on the rotary elements of either the generator or the motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 572 for flywheel and rotor
    structures, per se.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 179.1+ for inertia starters
    for internal combustion engines in which an electric motor may store energy
    in a rapidly revolving flywheel which is then connected to the engine to
    start it.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses .02 to .098 and 116.5
    for flywheels in combination with clutching means for connecting and
    disconnecting the flywheel through the clutch to the load or driven device,
    particularly to permit or to cause immediate stoppage of the load or driven
    device in cases of necessity.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 4 for generators
    system which have generators with flywheels or massive moving parts.


CLS 318/162
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which means are provided for
    controlling the operation of an electric motor in accordance with a
    predetermined schedule, said means comprising patterns, templates,
    perforated sheets, or other shaped or treated control devices having a
    configuration or design varying in accordance with a predetermined schedule
    of control to which it is desired to subject the motor.  The systems
    included herein are "open-loop" controls and thus are not servomechanisms.

    (1)     Note.  The operations of the motor may comprise plural, diverse
    motor operations or variations in a single operation such as operating the
    motor at a plurality of running speeds.

    (2)     Note.  For example merely, speed control means which are actuated
    by a perforated sheet running at constant speed in which a sensing or
    detecting means contacting the sheet senses the presence of the
    perforations and initiates the operation of speed control means to cause
    the motor to operate at one speed when sensing device contacts unperforated
    portion of the sheet and at other speeds when contacting the perforated
    portions of the sheet, would be included herein.

    (3)     Note.  For plural cams on a common shaft, each effecting a single
    change in electric motor control, classification is in subclasses 543+ of
    this class.

    (4)     Note.  Where the system is a closed loop position servomechanism,
    the classification is not herein, but in subclasses 567+, above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    543+,   see Note 3, above.

    567,    see (4) Note, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 64 wherein the speed of metal working
    machines is controlled by pattern, templates, etc.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 567+ for cam means, per se.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 46 for pattern
    sheet controlled electric switches.

    901,    Robots, subcollection 3 for the programming of a robot arm.


CLS 318/163
TXT Subject matter under subclass 162 in which means are provided for
    automatically varying the running speed of a motor in accordance with a
    predetermined schedule means.

    (1)     Note.  For example merely, speed control means which are actuated
    by a constant speed perforated sheet or by a constant speed cam and
    follower arrangement so as to cause the motor to run at different speeds as
    different portions of the perforated sheet or cam surface past a control
    position, are included in this group.


CLS 318/164
TXT Subject matter under subclass 163 in which means are provided for repeating
    a predetermined speed schedule as a result of which the same speed-control
    cycle is traversed two or more times.


CLS 318/244
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which the motor is an
    alternating-current commutating motor.

    (1)     Note.  See section I, B, 1, k, of the class definition for a
    definition of alternating current commutator motor. Such motors are
    commonly referred to as a "series a-c motors", a "universal motor", and an
    "a-c commutator motor".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for plural motor systems having alternating-current commutating
    motors with electrical synchronizing interconnections between the windings
    of the motors.

    135,    for linear-movement motor systems with commutating means for
    progressively energizing an a-c supplied field winding of the motor.

    138,    for a-c supplied motors having space-discharge devices operating as
    commutating devices for the several windings of the motor.

    700+,   for synchronous (a-c) motor systems where the motor is provided
    with commutators.

    725+,   for repulsion motor systems where the motor is provided with
    commutated windings.

    737     and 738, for induction motor systems where the motor is provided
    with a commutated winding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 173 for AC
    commutator motors, per se.


CLS 318/245
TXT Subject matter under subclass 244 in which the motor is designed and
    constructed to run when connected directly and solely to either a
    direct-current or an alternating-current source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246+,   and the subclasses specified in the Notes to the definition of
    those subclasses for series motor systems having series motor provided with
    commutators.


CLS 318/246
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which the motor is provided
    with means for causing it to operate only as a series motor for at least an
    appreciable portion of its operation as a motor.

    (1)     Note.  See section I, B, 1, 1, of the class definition for a
    definition of a series motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244,    for a.c. series commutated motor systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 158 for universal
    (AC or DC) motors, and subclass 177 for DC motors.


CLS 318/247
TXT Subject matter under subclass 246 in which means are provided for operating
    the motor as a series motor, and also operating the motor as a nonseries
    motor.

    (1)     Note.  As an example, an elevator motor may be provided with means
    for causing it to operate as a series motor during the lift period, and as
    a shunt motor during the return period.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    375+,   for motor systems having means for operating a motor as a generator
    during dynamic braking of the motor.


CLS 318/248
TXT Subject matter under subclass 246 in which two or more immediate sources of
    e.m.f. are provided to supply electric energy to the conducting elements of
    a series motor.

    (1)     Note.  Two sources of e. m. f. connected in series opposition in
    the circuit of a motor winding are included herein. Two circuits from a
    single voltage divider or from spaced sets of brushes on a single generator
    commutator, are examples of sources of electro-motive-force included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500,    and the subclasses listed in the Search Notes thereto, for
    miscellaneous motor systems having plural sources of armature circuit
    supply for the motor.

    530,    and the subclasses specified in the Search Notes thereto, for motor
    systems having plural sources of supply for the field or secondary circuit
    of the electric motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 43+
    for systems having plural sources of supply of electrical energy for a
    single load circuit.


CLS 318/249
TXT Subject matter under subclass 246 in which impedance means are provided for
    controlling the series motor circuits.

    (1)     Note.  Space-discharge devices (including grid controlled vacuum
    tubes and gas-filled or vapor-filled tubes) are considered impedance
    devices when used to regulate the magnitude of current flow in a circuit
    having a source of electric voltage connected therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    493,    and the subclasses specified in the Search Notes thereto, for other
    motor systems controlled by means of impedance devices in the armature and
    field circuits of the motors.

    508,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for motor
    systems controlled by means of an impedance in the armature circuit.

    533,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto for motor systems
    controlled by means of an impedance in the field circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    364-370 for miscellaneous impedance systems.


CLS 318/250
TXT Subject matter under subclass 249 in which the impedance means is connected
    in series with all, or a part, of the series field winding and
    simultaneously connected in parallel with part, or all of the armature
    winding of the motor.


CLS 318/251
TXT Subject matter under subclass 246 in which means are provided for
    controlling the circuit of the field-producing winding.

    (1)     Note.  The mere provision of a plurality of diverse or diversely
    controlled field coils is sufficient basis for classification herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249,    for field-control of a series motor by means of impedance devices
    in the field circuit.

    521,    and the subclasses specified in the Search Notes thereto, for motor
    systems having field circuit control means for the motors.


CLS 318/252
TXT Subject matter under subclass 251 in which the motor is provided with two
    or more field windings, one or more of which are structurally different, or
    connected in the motor circuit differently, or controlled differently
    (e.g., with respect to time, degree or magnitude of control, etc.) from one
    or more others of the windings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    523,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for
    miscellaneous motor control systems wherein the motors have plural field
    windings.


CLS 318/253
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which the motor is a
    noncommutating electric motor and comprises a magnetic-field producing
    means combined with one or more electric conductors mounted to move
    relative to and in proximity to the field-producing means, said
    field-producing means being so constructed and/or energized that the
    magnetic field produced thereby is, at any instant of time, of the same
    polarity or direction throughout its extent with reference to the path of
    travel of the movable electric conductor or conductors.

    (1)     Note.  The motors in this subclass are known as "homopolar motors".

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes alternating current and direct
    current motors.

    (3)     Note.  In the case of direct current field energization, the
    direction of the generated c.e.m.f. in the armature conductors is always
    unidirectional when the conductors move in a continuous direction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 178 for homopolar
    dynamoelectric machines.


CLS 318/254
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which a rotary electric motor,
    of the type in which the rotary element tends to assume a predetermined
    angular position when the motor is continuously energized, is provided with
    a commutator or circuit making and breaking means which is actuated by the
    motor to determine the instants of time at which the field producing
    winding or windings thereof are energized and de-energized relative to the
    angular position of the rotary element of the motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    for motors systems having space-discharge devices for commutating
    the current to the motor.

    244,    for alternating current commutating motor systems.

    246,    for series motor systems where the motor has commutators.

    519+,   and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for
    miscellaneous motor systems having circuit making and breaking means in the
    armature or primary circuit of the motor.

    700+,   for synchronous motor systems where the motor has commutators.

    737     and 738, for induction motor systems where the motor has
    commutators.


CLS 318/255
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which means are provided for
    effecting or causing two or more diverse operations of an electric motor.

    (1)     Note.  See I, B, 4, of the class definition for the various motor
    operations which are included in or excluded from the list of operations
    comprehended by this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for plural motor systems having means for effecting plural, diverse
    motor-operations for the motors.

    201+,   for induction motor systems having means for effecting plural
    diverse operations.

    280+,   for motor reversing systems.

    301+,   for motor running-speed control systems.

    362+,   for motor braking systems.

    384+,   for motor acceleration control systems.

    432+,   for motor load control systems.

    445+,   for automatic motor starting and/or stopping systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, subclasses 800+ and 825+ for
    single motor running-speed control systems with, and without, feedback
    respectively; and subclasses 842+ and 848+ for single motor acceleration
    control systems with, and without, feedback respectively.


CLS 318/256
TXT Subject matter under subclass 255 in which means are included for causing
    an electric motor to reverse its direction of operation.

    (1)     Note.  For a definition of "motor-reversing", see I, B, 4, f, of
    the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54+,    for plural motor systems provided with means for effecting plural,
    diverse motor-operations control, including reversing.

    280+,   and the subclasses specified in the Notes to the definition of
    those subclasses for motor-reversing in single motor systems.


CLS 318/257
TXT Subject matter under subclass 256 in which means are provided for also
    controlling the running-speed of an electric motor.

    (1)     Note.  For a definition of "running-speed control" see I, B, 4, g,
    of the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55+,    for plural motor systems having means for effecting plural motor
    operations including reversing and running speed control.

    268+,   and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for motor
    systems having means for effecting running speed control and another
    control operation.


CLS 318/258
TXT Subject matter under subclass 257 in which means are provided for also
    effecting braking of the electric motor.

    (1)     Note.  For a definition of "braking" as applied to electric motors,
    see section I, B, 4, e, of the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for plural motor systems having means for effecting reversing,
    running speed and braking operations for the motors.

    273+,   and the subclasses specified in the Search Notes thereto, for
    miscellaneous motor systems having means for effecting motor braking
    control and another motor operation control.

    362+,   and the subclasses specified in the Notes to the definition of
    those subclasses for miscellaneous motor braking systems.


CLS 318/259
TXT Subject matter under subclass 258 in which means are provided for also
    controlling acceleration of an electric motor.

    (1)     Note.  For a definition of "acceleration", see section I, B, 4, a,
    of the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for plural motor systems having means for effecting reversing,
    running-speed control, braking and acceleration of the motors.

    276,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for
    miscellaneous motor systems having means for effecting acceleration control
    and another control operation.


CLS 318/260
TXT Subject matter under subclass 257 in which means are provided for also
    controlling the acceleration of an electric motor.

    (1)     Note.  For a definition of "acceleration", see section I, B, 4, a,
    of the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for plural motor systems having reversing, running-speed control
    and acceleration control for a plurality of electric motors.

    259,    for motor systems having acceleration control with braking, running
    speed control and reversing of the motor.

    276+,   and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for motor
    systems having motor acceleration control and another motor control.


CLS 318/261
TXT Subject matter under subclass 256 in which means are also provided for
    effecting braking control of the electric motor.

    (1)     Note.  For a definition of "braking", see section I, B, 4, e, of
    the class definition.

    (2)     Note.  Where braking is effected by phase reversal (i.e., by
    "plugging") while the motor is running and the application of power is
    terminated when motor substantially comes to a stop, braking only is
    effected.  If power is left on and motor runs in reverse direction,
    classification is under combined reversing and braking controls in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     and the subclasses specified in the Notes to the definition of that
    subclass for plural motor systems having braking and reversing control for
    the motors.

    258+,   for motor systems having braking control and reversing control.

    273+,   and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for motor
    systems having braking control and another control.

    362+,   for miscellaneous motor systems having braking control.


CLS 318/262
TXT Subject matter under subclass 261 in which means are also provided for
    acceleration control of the electric motor.

    (1)     Note.  For a definition of "acceleration", see section I, B, 4, a,
    of the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for plural motor
    systems having acceleration with braking and reversing of the motors.

    259,    for this subject matter where the system is also provided with
    means for running-speed control.

    276+,   and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for motor
    systems having acceleration control and another motor operation control.


CLS 318/263
TXT Subject matter under subclass 256 in which means are provided for also
    controlling the acceleration of the motor.

    (1)     Note.  For a definition of "acceleration", see section I, B, 4, a,
    of the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for plural motor systems having acceleration control and reversing
    control.

    259,    for this subject matter where the system includes means for
    running-speed control and braking control.

    260,    for this subject matter where the system includes means for
    running-speed control.

    262,    for this subject matter where the system includes means for braking
    control.

    276,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for
    miscellaneous motor systems having acceleration control and another
    motor-operation control.

    384+,   for miscellaneous motor systems having acceleration control.


CLS 318/264
TXT Subject matter under subclass 256 in which means are also provided for
    automatically starting and/or stopping the motor in response to
    predetermined conditions.

    (1)     Note.  See section  I, B, 4, b, of the class definition for
    limitations on starting and/or stopping controls included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for follow-up motor systems in which reversible motors are started
    in one direction or the other either manually or automatically and stops
    automatically after the motor runs an amount proportional to (1) the change
    in position of a transmitter or (2) the change in some condition.

    54+,    for automatic starting and/or stopping combined with reversing in
    plural motor systems.

    272,    for motor systems having running-speed control and automatic
    starting and/or stopping control.

    275,    for motor systems having motor braking control and automatic
    starting and/or stopping control.

    277,    for motor systems having acceleration control and automatic
    starting and/or stopping control.

    445+,   and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for
    miscellaneous motor systems having automatic starting and/or stopping of
    the motor.


CLS 318/265
TXT Subject matter under subclass 264 in which means are provided for effecting
    stopping of the motor after it or the load device driven thereby has moved
    a predetermined amount or has reached or attained a predetermined position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18+,    for follow-up control systems for electric motors in which the
    motors are generally reversible and automatically stop when they reach a
    position (angular or linear) which corresponds to the degree of change of a
    transmitter.

    54+,    for plural motor systems having reversing with automatic starting
    and/or stopping including stopping upon predetermined movement or position
    of a motor.

    466+,   for miscellaneous motor systems having automatic starting and/or
    stopping in response to predetermined movement or position.


CLS 318/266
TXT Subject matter under subclass 265 in which means are provided for stopping
    the electric motor when it, or a load device driven thereby, substantially
    reaches its limit of travel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    468+,   for miscellaneous motor system having limit-of-travel stopping
    control


CLS 318/267
TXT Subject matter under subclass 266 in which the control means for reversing
    and starting and/or stopping comprise two circuits the energization of one
    of which controls the starting in one direction and the energization of the
    other of which effects starting in the opposite direction and in which the
    arrangements are such that, with one of the circuits energized for
    operation in one direction, when the motor is automatically stopped at its
    limit of travel, it cannot be started until the other circuit is energized.

    (1)     Note.  In the systems in this subclass, each time the motor is
    stopped at the limit of travel it can only be restarted in the reverse
    direction by another circuit, i.e., it cannot be restarted in the same
    direction of operation.


CLS 318/268
TXT Subject matter under subclass 255 in which means are also provided for
    controlling the running-speed of the motor.

    (1)     Note.  For a definition of "running-speed control", see section I,
    B, 4, g, of the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59+,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for plural motor
    systems having running-speed control means and another diverse motor
    control means.

    257+,   for this subject matter where the system includes motor reversing
    control means.


CLS 318/269
TXT Subject matter under subclass 268 in which means are provided for also
    effecting braking of the electric motor.

    (1)     Note.  For a definition of "braking", see section I, B, 4, e, of
    the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto for plural motor
    systems having braking control and running-speed control.

    258+,   for this subject matter where the system includes running-speed
    control means and motor reversing control.

    261+,   for this subject matter where the system includes means for motor
    reversing control.

    273+,   and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for motor
    systems having braking control and another motor operation control.

    362+,   for miscellaneous motor systems having braking control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 76 and 77 for
    structured combinations of an electrical motor and a brake.


CLS 318/270
TXT Subject matter under subclass 269 in which means are provided for also
    controlling the acceleration of the motor.

    (1)     Note.  For a definition of "acceleration", see section I, B, 4, a,
    of the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto for plural motor
    systems having running-speed control, braking control and acceleration.

    259,    for this subject matter where the system includes means for motor
    reversing control.

    276+,   and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for motor
    systems having motor acceleration control and another motor-operation
    control.


CLS 318/271
TXT Subject matter under subclass 268 in which means are also provided for
    controlling the acceleration of the motor.

    (1)     Note.  For a definition of "acceleration", see section I, B, 4, a,
    of the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for plural motor
    systems having running speed control and acceleration control.

    259,    for this subject matter where the system includes means for motor
    reversing control and braking control.

    260,    for this subject matter where the system includes means for motor
    reversing control.

    270,    for this subject matter where the system includes means for motor
    braking control.

    273,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for motor
    systems having acceleration control and another motor operation control.


CLS 318/272
TXT Subject matter under subclass 268 in which means are provided for also
    automatically starting and/or stopping the motor.

    (1)     Note.  For a definition of "Automatic Starting and/or Stopping" see
    section I, B, 4, b, of the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for plural motor systems having running-speed control and automatic
    starting and stopping.

    445+,   for miscellaneous motor systems having automatic starting and/or
    stopping control.


CLS 318/273
TXT Subject matter under subclass 255 in which means are provided for also
    braking the electric motor.

    (1)     Note.  For a definition of "braking" see section I, B, 4, e, of the
    class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     and the subclasses specified in the Search Notes thereto, for
    plural motor systems having means for motor braking control and means for
    effecting another motor operation.

    258+,   for this subject matter where the system includes means for
    running-speed control and motor reversing control.

    261+,   for this subject matter where the system includes means for motor
    reversing control.

    269+,   for this subject matter where the system includes means for running
    speed control.

    362+,   for miscellaneous motor systems having braking control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, for braking means, per se, for general purposes.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 76 and 77 for
    structured combinations of an electrical motor and a brake.


CLS 318/274
TXT Subject matter under subclass 273 in which means are provided for also
    controlling acceleration of the motor.

    (1)     Note.  For a definition of "acceleration" see section I, B, 4, a,
    of the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for plural motor
    systems having braking control and acceleration control.

    259,    for this subject matter where the system includes means for motor
    reversing and for running-speed control.

    262,    for this subject matter where the system includes means for motor
    reversing control.

    270,    for this subject matter where the system includes means for
    running-speed control.

    276,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for motor
    systems having acceleration control and another motor operation control.


CLS 318/275
TXT Subject matter under subclass 273 in which means are provided for also
    automatically starting and/or stopping the electric motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    445+,   for miscellaneous motor systems having automatic starting and/or
    stopping control.


CLS 318/276
TXT Subject matter under subclass 255 in which means are provided for also
    controlling the acceleration of the motor.

    (1)     Note.  For definition of "acceleration" see section I, B, 4, a, of
    the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for plural motor
    systems having means for effecting acceleration control and another motor
    control operation.

    259,    for this subject matter where the system includes means for motor
    reversing control, running-speed control and braking control.

    260,    for this subject matter where the system includes means for motor
    reversing control and running-speed control.

    262,    for this subject matter where the system includes means for motor
    reversing control and braking control.

    263,    for this subject matter where the system includes means for motor
    reversing control.

    270,    for this subject matter where the system includes means for running
    speed control and braking control.

    271,    for this subject matter where the system includes means for
    running-speed control.

    274,    for this subject matter where the system includes means for motor
    braking control.


CLS 318/277
TXT Subject matter under subclass 276 in which means are also provided for
    automatically effecting the starting and/or stopping of the motor in
    response to one or more predetermined conditions.

    (1)     Note.  For limitations on the starting and/or stopping controls
    included in this subclass, see section I, B, 4, b, of the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for plural motor
    systems having acceleration control means and means for effecting another
    control operation, such as automatic starting and/or stopping.

    445,    and the miscellaneous motor systems having automatic starting
    and/or stopping control.


CLS 318/278
TXT Subject matter under subclass 277 in which means are provided for starting
    and/or stopping the electric motor in response to one or more conditions of
    which at least one is an electrical condition.


CLS 318/279
TXT Subject matter under subclass 278 in which the automatic control means
    comprises means responsive to an electrical condition for stopping the
    motor which means, however, has been rendered inoperative or is otherwise
    less responsive to the electrical condition during the acceleration period
    of the motor.

    (1)     Note.  Characteristic of the subject matter of this subclass are
    those acceleration systems in which overload or excessive-current cut-outs
    are provided for automatically stopping the motor by opening the armature
    or primary circuit thereof when the armature or primary current exceeds a
    predetermined value during the full-speed operation of the motor but
    wherein means are provided for preventing or reducing the tendency of such
    cut-out to operate during the acceleration period of such motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    447,    for miscellaneous automatic electric motor control systems in which
    the condition sensing means is rendered inoperative or less responsive
    during particular limited periods of operation of the motor.


CLS 318/280
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which means are provided for
    causing an electric motor to operate in one direction at one time and in
    the opposite direction at another time, or for causing an electric motor to
    operate in a direction opposite to that in which it has previously been
    operating.

    (1)     Note.  In reversing motor systems, means must be provided for
    establishing an electrically produced torque in both directions of
    operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for the combination of an electric motor and reversible power or
    motion transmitting means actuated thereby.

    48,     for plural motor systems having the motors mechanically coupled in
    torque opposition.

    65,     and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for reversing
    control in plural motor systems.

    119+,   for reciprocating or oscillating motor systems in which periodic
    reversal is an inherent function during normal operation of the motor.

    159+,   and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for biassed
    motor systems, in which the biassing means will cause the motor to move to
    a prior position when the energization of the motor is reduced.

    256+,   and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto for motor systems
    having reversing control means and means for effecting another control
    operation.

    739+,   and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for reversal of
    induction motors.


CLS 318/281
TXT Subject matter under subclass 280 in which means are provided for
    repeatedly reversing the direction of operation of the motor in accordance
    with the schedule of operation of a continuously operating controller.

    (1)     Note.  Means which operate to cause a motor to operate in one
    direction or another depending on a change in a condition, and in which the
    change may or may not occur, are not included herein.  However, reversing
    means actuated repeatedly by a continuously running motor or a timing
    mechanism are included.  The periodicity of reversal need not be regular,
    i.e., not as uniformly spaced periods of time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    for reciprocating or oscillating motor systems having motors which
    periodically reverse their directions of operation.

    443,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for other motor
    systems having periodically actuated motor control means.


CLS 318/282
TXT Subject matter under subclass 281 in which means are provided for reversing
    the motor in response to a predetermined number of revolutions of or other
    movement or position of the electric motor or of the load device actuated
    thereby.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286,    for means for effecting a periodic reversals of electric motors
    automatically in response to the movement or position of the motor or the
    device driven thereby.

    461+,   and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for other motor
    control systems having the motor automatically controlled in response to
    the speed or rate of movement of the motor or device driven thereby.

    466+,   and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for other motor
    control systems having the motor automatically controlled in response to
    the movement, position or limit of travel of the motor or other body or
    device.


CLS 318/283
TXT Subject matter under subclass 280 wherein means responsive to a
    predetermined condition are provided for controlling the motor reversing
    means or where time delay means are provided for controlling the motor
    reversing means after operation thereof has been initiated.

    (1)     Note.  Where time delay means are provided, the control operation
    may be initiated manually.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    445+,   and the subclasses specified in the Search Notes thereto, for other
    automatic control systems for electric motors having the motor
    automatically controlled in response to predetermined conditions and/or
    having time delay means for the motor control means.


CLS 318/284
TXT Subject matter under subclass 283 in which means are provided for delaying
    the application of electric energy to the motor in the reverse direction
    for reversing the motor until the motor has substantially stopped or has
    substantially come to rest from a previous operation in the opposite
    direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    285,    for motor systems with means for initiating the reversal of an
    electric motor at a particular instant of time or after the lapse or a
    predetermined interval of time, or to effect reversal thereof a
    predetermined time after the initiation of the reversing control of the
    motor.

    374,    for motor braking systems wherein braking is produced by "plugging"
    and the flow of energy is interrupted when the motor speed drops to zero.


CLS 318/285
TXT Subject matter under subclass 283 in which means are provided for
    initiating the reversal of a motor at a particular instant of time (e.g.,
    8:30 A.M., 5:00 P.M.) or after the lapse or passage of a predetermined
    interval of time (e.g., 4 seconds, 4 hours) or for delaying or retarding
    the application of reverse power to a motor for a predetermined interval of
    time after the reversing control operation has been initiated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281,    for this subject matter where there are periodic or intermittent
    reversals in response to passage or lapse of time.

    284,    for motor systems having means for delaying reversing of the
    electric motor until it has substantially stopped from a previous operation.

    484+,   and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for other motor
    systems having time-delay means for controlling the motor control means
    after operation of the control means has been initiated.


CLS 318/286
TXT Subject matter under subclass 283 in which means are provided for reversing
    the motor in response to a predetermined number of revolutions or other
    movement of, or to a predetermined position of, the motor or a load device
    actuated thereby.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119+,   for reciprocating or oscillating motor systems in which reversal of
    the motor is automatically effected as the motor approaches the end or
    limit of its movement in each direction of movement.

    282+,   for this subject matter where there is periodic or repetitious
    reversal of the motor controlled in response to movement or position of the
    motor or the device driven thereby.

    461+    and 466, and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for
    other motor systems having automatic control of the motor in response to
    the movement or the position of the motor or a device driven thereby.  See
    subclass 887 where the control is in response to the speed or
    rate-of-movement of the motor or driven device.

    466+,   see the reference to subclass 461.


CLS 318/287
TXT Subject matter under subclass 280 in which means are provided for effecting
    reversal of the motor by means in the armature or primary circuit of the
    motor.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes armature or primary circuit control
    combined with the field circuit control and/or with motor structure control
    means for reversing the motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126,    for reciprocating or oscillating motor systems with armature or
    primary circuit control of the motor.

    494+,   and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto for miscellaneous
    motor systems having armature or primary circuit control.


CLS 318/288
TXT Subject matter under subclass 287 in which the reversal is effected by
    means of two or more armature or primary winding, one or more of which are
    structurally different or controlled differently from one or more others of
    the windings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    297+,   for reversing motor systems where the motor has plural, diverse or
    diversely controlled, field windings.

    495+,   and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for other motor
    systems where the motor has plural armature or primary windings.


CLS 318/289
TXT Subject matter under subclass 288 in which the motor is an alternating
    current motor having two or more phase windings and in which means are
    provided for reversing the time phase sequence of the currents supplied to
    two or more of the phase windings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121,    for reciprocating or oscillating motor systems with means for
    reversing the motor by phase reversal.

    207,    for induction motor systems with means for reversing the motor by
    phase reversal.

    373+,   for motor systems having means for braking the motors by "plugging"
    which may be effected by phase reversal.

    496,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for
    miscellaneous motor systems where the motor has polyphase windings.


CLS 318/290
TXT Subject matter under subclass 288 in which means are provided for
    selectively energizing one or more of the armature windings without
    energizing one or more others thereof to effect reversal of operation of
    the motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    for energizing two or more windings in sequence or alternation in
    reciprocating or alternating motor systems.

    297+,   for motor reversing systems where the motor is reversed by
    selectively energized field windings.

    495+,   and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for
    miscellaneous motor systems where the motor has a plurality of diversely
    controlled armature windings.

    750,    for motor systems having means for reversing the motor by shading
    coils wherein one coil may be selectively operated (closed) for one
    direction or operation and another operated for a reverse direction of
    operation.


CLS 318/291
TXT Subject matter under subclass 287 in which means are provided for reversing
    the direction of current flow in the armature or primary circuit conductors
    of the motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151,    for generator-fed motor systems having means for reversing the
    motor.

    300+,   for motor systems having means reversing a motor by reversing the
    field circuit current.

    373+,   for motor systems having means for braking the motor by "plugging"
    or by reversing the power applied to the motor which includes reversing the
    armature current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 127
    for switching systems responsive to polarity or reverse current flow.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 5 for generator
    systems having means to control the polarity of the generated voltage.


CLS 318/292
TXT Subject matter under subclass 291 in which means are provided for shifting
    the commutator brushes to which the armature circuit is connected, or in
    which means are provided for selectively using one set of brushes at one
    time and using another set at another time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    541,    and the subclasses specified in the Search Notes thereto, for
    miscellaneous motor control systems having motor brush adjustment or
    control means.


CLS 318/293
TXT Subject matter under subclass 291 in which means are provided for reversing
    polarity of the current supplied to the armature or primary circuit of the
    motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140+,   for the subject matter in generator-fed motor systems.

    300+,   for motor reversing systems where the polarity of the field circuit
    current is reversed.

    373+,   for motor braking by "plugging" wherein the armature current
    polarity is reversed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 138
    for polarity reversing systems for electrical switch contacts.


CLS 318/294
TXT Subject matter under subclass 293 in which a plurality of electrical
    devices are provided and connected in a Wheatstone bridge arrangement, the
    output circuit of which arrangement is connected to the armature circuit of
    the motor.

    (1)     Note.  For definition of Wheatstone-bridge arrangement" see (1)
    Note to the definition of subclass 29.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     for follow-up motor systems having a Wheatstone bridge arrangement
    for causing the motor to run in one direction or the other by controlling
    the polarity of the motor current.

    509+,   and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto for miscellaneous
    motor systems having a Wheatstone bridge in the armature circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 365 for
    miscellaneous Wheatstone bridge arrangements.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 169 for wave filters
    of the Wheatstone bridge or lattice type.


CLS 318/295
TXT Subject matter under subclass 293 in which means for providing current of
    reversible polarity comprise an impedance device having one or more
    conductors positionable in energy transfer relationship to the impedance
    and movable therealong.

    (1)     Note.  Typical of polarity-reversing potentiometers is a resistor
    having d.c. input leads connected to the ends of the resistor and two
    output conductors connected to the motor armature each output conductor
    slidably engaging the resistor intermediate the ends thereof, so that by
    sliding one of the output conductors past the other, the polarity of the
    d.c. current supplied to the armature circuit is reversed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 15 for
    voltage divider systems.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation, subclass 364 for
    miscellaneous resistance systems.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 68 for mechanically variable
    electrical resistors, per se, such as rheostats and potentiometers.


CLS 318/296
TXT Subject matter under subclass 280 in which means are provided for effecting
    reversal of the motor by means in the field circuit of the motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    521,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for other motor
    control systems having motor field circuit control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 104
    for systems containing electromagnets or other highly inductive devices.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 180 for structure
    of the field windings.


CLS 318/297
TXT Subject matter under subclass 296 in which the motor is provided with two
    or more field-producing windings one or more of which is structurally
    different, differently connected, or controlled differently than one or
    more others of the windings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    523,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for other motor
    control systems in which a motor has two or more field windings.


CLS 318/298
TXT Subject matter under subclass 297 in which means are provided for
    energizing all of the field windings at the same time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    521+,   particularly 524 to 527 and the subclasses specified in the Notes
    thereto, for miscellaneous control systems for motors having two or more
    field windings which are simultaneously energized.


CLS 318/299
TXT Subject matter under subclass 298 in which means are provided for
    establishing an electrical path of negligible impedance across the
    terminals of one of the field producing windings so that said winding
    becomes substantially de-energized when the electrical path is closed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    528,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for other motor
    control systems wherein one or more windings of a plural field windings
    motor are short circuited.


CLS 318/300
TXT Subject matter under subclass 296 in which means are provided for reversing
    the flow of current in the motor field producing winding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    293+,   for motor systems having means for reversing the motor by reversing
    the current in the armature or primary circuit thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 127
    for switching systems responsive to polarity or reverse current.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 6 for generator
    systems having means to control the polarity by controlling the generator
    excitation.


CLS 318/362
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which means are provided for
    braking the motor.

    (1)     Note.  For definition of motor braking control, see section I, B,
    4, e, of the class definition.

    (2)     Note.  Whenever the motor is braked by "plugging" (i.e., by power
    reversal while motor is running) and energization is continued so that
    motor operates in the reverse direction, classification is in combination
    reversing and braking.  See subclass 261.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86      and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for plural motor
    systems having braking control.

    159,    for motor systems where the motor has means (e.g., springs) for
    biassing the motor against rotation.

    161,    for motor systems where the motor has a fly-wheel or other massive
    rotary member for retarding an increase in speed of the motor.

    273     and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for motor
    systems having braking control and another motor-operation control.

    703,    for braking means in synchronous motor systems.

    757     and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for braking
    means in induction motor systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous braking devices in
    general.  See the class definition of Class 318 for the line between Class
    188 and 318.

    303,    Fluid-Pressure and Analogous  Brake System, for miscellaneous fluid
    pressure brake systems.  See the reference to Class 303 in the Notes to the
    class definition of Class 318 for the line between Class 303 and Class 318.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 76 and 77 for
    structured combinations of an electrical motor and a brake.

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, art collection 932 for other
    single motor running-speed control systems wherein means are provided for
    braking the motor while still electrically energized for operation in the
    same direction in which the motor operated prior to the braking.

    477,    Interrelated Power Delivery Controls, Including Engine Control, for
    interrelated control between a motor and a transmission, clutch, or brake.
    See the notes in I,E,6, for the line.


CLS 318/363
TXT Subject matter under subclass 362 in which means are provided for
    controlling the back voltage or counter-electro-motive-force of the motor
    while the motor is in motion and its armature or primary circuit is
    disconnected from its power source so that if or when the motor is
    reconnected to its source of power, a surge of current flow from the motor
    to the source will not take place, thus avoiding excessive or undesirable
    braking action at the time of reconnection to the source.


CLS 318/364
TXT Subject matter under subclass 362 in which means are provided for sensing
    the existence of a predetermined condition which sensing means in turn
    initiates the operation of means for controlling the braking of the motor,
    or where time delay means are provided for controlling the motor braking
    means after the operation has been initiated.

    (1)     Note.  Where time delay means are provided, the control operation
    may be initiated manually.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    445,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for
    miscellaneous motor control systems which operate in response to
    predetermined conditions and/or with time delay means.


CLS 318/365
TXT Subject matter under subclass 364 in which sensing means are provided which
    respond to two or more conditions which are diverse in kind (e.g.,
    temperature, voltage, current, etc.), or which respond to different
    characteristics (e.g., magnitude and rate-of-change of a condition) of a
    single condition, or which respond to one or more conditions in combination
    with means for effecting a predetermined time delay in the functioning of
    the braking means after the operation thereof has been initiated manually
    or otherwise.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    452,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for other motor
    control systems which are responsive to plural diverse conditions and/or to
    a single condition and which are also provided with time delay means for
    the control operation.


CLS 318/366
TXT Subject matter under subclass 364 in which the sensing means are responsive
    to a condition in or of the motor being braked or a device actuated by the
    motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    449     through 477, inclusive, and the subclasses specified in the Notes
    thereto, for other motor control systems responsive to conditions in or of
    the motor being controlled or in or of the device actuated thereby.


CLS 318/367
TXT Subject matter under subclass 366 in which the sensing means is responsive
    to the magnitude or the rate-of-change of the magnitude of the electric
    current in the armature or primary circuit of the motor being braked.

    (1)     Note.  Where the sensing means comprises a relay which is
    responsive to the terminal voltage of the electric motor (i.e., connected
    to shunt to the motor armature circuit) such sensing means is treated as
    being responsive to the terminal or c.e.m.f. voltage of the motor and not
    to the armature current thereof, and is classified in subclass 368.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    368,    see (1) Note above.

    474,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for other motor
    control systems responsive to the armature or primary current of the motor
    being controlled.


CLS 318/368
TXT Subject matter under subclass 366 in which the sensing means are responsive
    to the magnitude of, or the rate-of-change of the magnitude of the terminal
    voltage or the counter-electromotive-force of the motor being braked.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    459,    and the subclasses specified in the Search Notes thereto, for other
    motor control systems which are responsive to the terminal voltage or
    counter-electromotive-force of the motor being controlled.


CLS 318/369
TXT Subject matter under subclass 366 in which the sensing means are responsive
    to the speed (or rate-of-change thereof) degree or amount of movement, or
    the position (angular or linear) of the motor or device driven thereby.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    456,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for
    miscellaneous motor systems having automatic control means responsive to
    the rate-of-change of a condition.

    460,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for
    miscellaneous motor systems having automatic control means responsive to
    sound, supersonic vibration or mechanical vibration.

    461,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for
    miscellaneous motor systems with automatic control means responsive to the
    speed or rate-of-movement of a body.

    466,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for
    miscellaneous motor systems with automatic control means responsive to the
    movement, position or limit of travel of the motor or a device driven by
    the motor.


CLS 318/370
TXT Subject matter under subclass 362 in which two or more braking means are
    provided, one or more of which braking means are structurally different, or
    are differently controlled or are controlled by structurally different
    means than one or more others of the braking means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188,    Brakes, appropriate subclasses, particularly noting subclasses 4,
    35, 64, 65.3, 68, 79, 105, 143, 156, and 204 for plural brake systems of
    general applications.


CLS 318/371
TXT Subject matter under subclass 370 in which the plural braking means
    includes friction braking means combined with "plugging" and/or with
    dynamic braking.

    (1)     Note.  For definition of "friction", "plugging", and "dynamic"
    braking, see definitions of subclasses 372, 373 and 375, respectively.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    372,    for motor braking systems of the friction brake type.

    373,    for motor braking systems of the "plugging" or application of
    reverse power to the motor type.

    375,    for dynamic motor braking systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, appropriate subclasses, for the combination of diverse
    types of braking devices in general. Particularly note subclass 159 wherein
    one form of braking means is actuated by current from a motor (acting as a
    generator) which also brakes by virtue of its dynamic action.


CLS 318/372
TXT Subject matter under subclass 362 in which the braking means comprises a
    frictional contact surface adapted to engage a cooperating frictional
    surface which is connected to or is a part of the movable output element of
    the motor being braked.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370,    for this subject matter where the system includes frictional
    braking means and another type of braking means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, appropriate subclasses, for the structure of friction
    braking means, per se.


CLS 318/373
TXT Subject matter under subclass 362 in which means are provided for applying
    electric energy to an electric motor in such a direction or manner that a
    torque or force is developed in the motor as a result of such energization
    which torque or force opposes the tendency of the motor to continue in
    motion if in motion, or to move if not in motion.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes those motor control systems in which
    the flow of energy to the motor is reversed while the motor is still in
    motion, or in which the motor is energized in a direction to hold the motor
    stationary or motionless when the motor is urged to move, while not
    energized.

    (2)     Note.  Where the application of reverse power is continued after
    the forward motion of the motor has been reduced to zero so that the motor
    operates a substantial amount in the reverse direction, classification is
    not herein, but under combined reversing and braking controls in preceding
    subclasses.  Note particularly subclass 261.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210,    for braking of induction motors by phase-reversal (i.e., by
    plugging).

    261,    and the subclass specified in the Notes thereto, for motor systems
    having braking by application of reverse power combined with continued
    reverse energization with consequent reverse operation of the motor.  See
    (2) Note above.

    280,    and the Search Notes thereto, for motor systems having means for
    reversing the application of power to a motor for effecting a substantial
    operation of the motor in the reverse direction (Motor-reversing control).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 61 for electric controls for
    electric-motor driven locomotives that may involve "plugging" or
    application of reverse power for braking purposes.


CLS 318/374
TXT Subject matter under subclass 373 in which means are provided for
    interrupting the flow of energy to the motor substantially at the time that
    the motor speed is reduced to zero.

    (1)     Note.  The termination of the flow of electric energy to an
    electric motor as the motor speed substantially reaches zero is considered
    part of the operation of braking and not another motor control operation,
    such as automatic stopping of the motor; and hence, such systems are not
    considered combined braking and automatic stopping systems but rather
    merely a braking system, per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    461,    for motor systems having automatic control means for merely
    stopping the motor when the speed of the motor falls below a predetermined
    value.

    519,    for motor systems having an armature or primary circuit making
    and/or braking device for stopping the motor.


CLS 318/375
TXT Subject matter under subclass 362 in which the motor to be controlled is
    braked as a result of the motor being converted into an electric generator,
    which supplies electric energy to an electric circuit.

    (1)     Note.  An electric motor to be controlled can be converted into an
    electric generator (1) merely as a result of change in the operating
    conditions (such as mere change in speed of the motor so that its c.e.m.f.
    exceeds the applied voltage), (2) by appropriately changing the electric
    circuits of the motor, or (3) by properly changing the circuit constants in
    existing motor circuits so that the c.e.m.f. generated by the motor exceeds
    any value of voltage applied to the motor.

            An electric motor is converted to a braking generator whenever the
    generated e.m.f. within the motor exceeds in magnitude the opposing
    potentials, if any, that are applied to the motor and whenever the
    generating circuit is simultaneously connected to a closed electric
    circuit.  The "closed electric circuit" may comprise a low resistance
    (dead) short circuit, a useful-load circuit (including the circuit which
    supplies the electric energy to the motor during motoring operation) or a
    purely resistive (dissipating) circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87,     for dynamic braking of two or more electric motors.

    373,    for miscellaneous systems for "plugging" (application of reverse
    power) an electric motor.

    759,    for dynamic braking of an induction motor.

    763,    for "plugging" (application of reverse power) of an induction motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 49 (particularly noting subclass
    61) for dynamic braking of electric locomotives.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 65 for vehicles having electric motors to
    supply the motive power and wherein dynamic braking may be effected to
    retard the vehicle.

    188,    Brakes, subclass 159 for electric operators for braking devices in
    which the operator therefor is energized by motors operating as generators.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 93 for
    dynamoelectric brakes.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, for generation systems, per
    se, and the controls therefor.


CLS 318/376
TXT Subject matter under subclass 375 in which means are provided for returning
    or delivering the electrical energy generated in the motor while operating
    as a generator to the circuit which supplies the electric energy to the
    motor when operating as a motor.

    (1)     Note.  This type of braking is commonly referred to as
    "regenerative" to "recuperative" braking.


CLS 318/377
TXT Subject matter under subclass 376 in which means are provided for producing
    a voltage comprising means other than that which constitutes the source of
    armature or primary circuit voltage for the motor when operating as a motor
    and other than the motor itself when operating as a generator during
    braking.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89,     for braking in plural motor systems wherein one or more motors are
    converted into generators for supplying exciting current to other motors
    operating as generators.


CLS 318/378
TXT Subject matter under subclass 377 in which means are provided for
    connecting the additional source of e.m.f. in series with the armature or
    primary circuit of the motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    440,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for other motor
    control systems in which two or more diverse sources of supply are used for
    electric motors.

    500     and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for other motor
    control systems in which two or more electrical sources of supply are
    connected electrically in series with each other and in series with the
    armature or primary winding of the motor.


CLS 318/379
TXT Subject matter under subclass 375 in which means are provided for
    immediately  connecting the terminals of the generating circuit of the
    motor through an electrical circuit, with or without additional control or
    dissipative devices in the last named circuit.

    (1)     Note.  Where the motor is connected to supply energy to a
    distribution circuit adapted to supply various and sundry electrical
    devices and appliances at remote or indefinite points, classification is
    not herein.  See Class 307, Electrical Transmission or Interconnection
    Systems, subclass 11.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 11,
    see (1) Note above.


CLS 318/380
TXT Subject matter under subclass 379 in which impedance devices or other
    current-controlling devices are connected in the locally closed circuit.

    (1)     Note.  Where the "other current-controlling device" is a useful
    electric load device for performing some useful purpose other than as a
    mere current-controlling device, classification is not herein.  For
    example, where the load device is a light generating device used for
    illumination purposes or is a secondary battery in which energy is stored
    indefinitely for any purpose, classification is not herein.  See Class 307,
    electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 11.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    508,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for other motor
    control systems wherein impedance devices are connected in the armature or
    primary circuit of the motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 11,
    see (1) Note above.


CLS 318/381
TXT Subject matter under subclass 379 in which means are provided for
    controlling the field or secondary circuit of the motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    493,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for other motor
    control systems having both armature circuit control and field circuit
    control.

    521,    and the subclasses specified in the Search Notes thereto, for other
    motor control systems having field or secondary circuit control.


CLS 318/382
TXT Subject matter under subclass 362 in which the braking means comprise (1)
    an electric generator connected to be driven by the motor for the purpose
    of braking the motor or (2) Magnetic-Flux-producing means which operate
    directly through the agency of the flux, per se, to oppose, by magnetic
    repulsion or by magnetic attraction, the tendency of the motor to continue
    in motion, if in motion, or to move if not in motion.

    (1)     Note.  Magnetic operators for other types of brakes (e.g.,
    friction, fluid, etc.) are  not included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    375,    for systems wherein the motor itself is converted into an electric
    generator to operate as a braking means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclass 104 for means for braking devices in general by
    means of generators or other magnetic devices.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 39 and the
    subclasses specified in the Notes thereto for generator systems having a
    motor driven generator.

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, art collection 931 for single
    motor running-speed control systems wherein a generator is driven by the
    motor, while the motor is electrically energized, which generator acts as a
    retarding or braking means to affect the running-speed of the motor.


CLS 318/383
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which means are provided for
    preventing braking of an electric motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    362,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for means for
    merely applying or removing the brakes (brake operators) from electric
    motors, and see indented subclasses.

    364     and 365, for motor braking systems having means for merely delaying
    the application of braking to an electric motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 105 to 189 for brake operators, per se.


CLS 318/430
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which means are provided for
    controlling the mechanical load actuated by the motor or for controlling
    the motor armature or primary current, torque or force during the starting
    and/or the stopping period of the motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255,    for this subject matter where there is motor load control combined
    with automatic starting and/or stopping of the motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, subclasses 842+ and 848+ for
    single motor acceleration control systems with, and without, feedback,
    respectively.


CLS 318/431
TXT Subject matter under subclass 430 in which means are provided for
    controlling the motor torque at the instant of starting in order to insure
    that the motor torque is great enough to overcome the starting-from-rest or
    static friction opposition to motor movement.


CLS 318/432
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which means are provided for
    maintaining substantially constant the magnitude of the motor armature or
    primary current, the watts supplied to the motor, the mechanical load
    connected or applied to the motor, or the torque or force exerted by the
    motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    434,    for motor systems in which means are provided for preventing the
    load driven by the motor, the motor current, or the watts supplied to the
    motor, or the torque exerted by the motor from exceeding a predetermined
    maximum or a minimum value.  Where the system includes means to prevent the
    motor load, motor current, watts or torque from exceeding both a maximum
    and minimum value, the patent is classified in this subclass 432.

    SEARCH  CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    220-354 for constant current systems in general.


CLS 318/433
TXT Subject matter under subclass 432 in which means are provided for
    maintaining a constant motor current, load, and/or torque control by
    controlling the physical load device actuated by the motor.


CLS 318/434
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which means are provided for
    preventing the load connected or applied to the motor, the armature or
    primary current of the motor, the watts supplied to the motor, or the
    torque or force exerted by the motor from merely exceeding a predetermined
    maximum or predetermined minimum value.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    432,    for this subject matter where the system includes means for
    preventing the motor current, load, or the torque or force exerted by the
    motor, from exceeding both a predetermined maximum and minimum value.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 274
    and 284 for regulators with threshold detection.


CLS 318/436
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which means are provided for
    energizing an electric motor to produce a substantial output force or
    torque which is insufficient under prevailing conditions to cause the motor
    to start.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is designed to include mere torque or force
    producing motors which, under the conditions of loading, cannot cause the
    useful load device to move appreciably, other than to effect a mere slack,
    play or back-lash take-up movement, but which motor nevertheless exerts a
    sustained torque or force on the load device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for motor systems specifically limited to maintain a tension in a
    cable, belt, strand or strip material under running or stationary
    conditions.

    40,     for plural motors systems having at least one motor biased against
    rotation.

    159,    for motor systems having means (other than a useful load device)
    for biassing the motor against rotation.

    430,    for motor systems having means for controlling the motor torque at
    the starting period to insure that the motor will start, and for motor
    systems having means for stalling or overloading the motor while the motor
    is energized.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 98 for electric
    meters wherein the motive-power element of the meter is energized to exert
    torque on a non-moving pointer to hold it in an indicating position.

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, subclasses 848+ for single
    motor acceleration control systems wherein a motor is energized while
    stationary, but which motor immediately starts and controllably accelerates
    to a running condition.


CLS 318/437
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which means are provided for
    positioning or phasing the movable (working) element on an electric motor
    with reference to some object, fixed or in motion, or with reference to
    cyclic conditions or time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for follow-up systems of electric motor control wherein a motor is
    positioned relatively to a transmitting or controlling member or with
    reference to a predetermined condition.

    41,     for this subject matter where one motor is in predetermined
    relative position with respect to another motor by means of electrical
    synchronizing interconnections between the motors.

    45,     for this subject matter where two or more motors are mechanically
    coupled together so that their movable elements are constrained to maintain
    a predetermined relative phase or angular position with respect to each
    other.

    68,     for this subject matter where one motor has its speed and/or phase
    relationship controlled with respect to another motor under running speed
    conditions.

    85,     for miscellaneous motor systems having means for synchronizing,
    resynchronizing or phasing control of two or more electric motors.

    136,    for motor systems having means for starting or accelerating motors
    other than by electrical energization of the motor, including means for
    synchronizing or phasing the motors relative to an a.c. source of supply to
    which the motors are to be connected.

    466,    for motor systems having means for automatically stopping a motor
    when it reaches a predetermined position.


CLS 318/438
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which means are provided for
    controlling the power factor (i.e., the phase angle between the line
    voltage and resulting line current which is supplied to the primary
    circuit) of the energy supplied by an alternating current source to the
    armature or primary circuit of an electric motor.

    (1)     Note.  For the combination of power factor control and one or more
    motor operations control, see appropriate subclass for the particular
    operations control.  Power factor control is not such a control as is
    combinable with other controls to constitute plural diverse controls.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165,    for motor systems having synchronous motor control, particularly
    field-circuit control, which may modify the power factor of the energy
    supplied to the motor.  Particularly note subclass 179 for synchronous
    motor systems having automatic control means which is responsive to power
    factor, phase angle, power, or watts in the motor armature circuit.

    508,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes to the definition thereof
    for miscellaneous motor systems having the armature circuit controlled by
    means of impedances (reactors, condensers, etc.) in the armature circuit.

    729,    and the subclasses listed in the Search Notes thereto, for power
    factor control in induction motor systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    205-211 for power factor control systems.


CLS 318/439
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which means are provided for
    facilitating or otherwise controlling commutation in commutator motors.

    (1)     Note.  For example, means for preventing or reducing deleterious
    effects incident to, or accompanying, commutation in electric motors are
    included herein; such effects including large intercommutator bar currents,
    heating of commutator bars and brushes, flashover between bars, arcing and
    pitting of commutator bars and brushes, etc.  Periodically or repeatedly
    reversing polarity of direct current supplied to commutator motors to
    reduce pitting, corrosion metal transfer between brush and commutator is
    included herein.  Shifting of brushes to reduce sparking is included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    for motor systems having electric space discharge means for
    commutating the motor.

    434,    for motor systems having means for limiting motor armature or
    primary circuit current or load which may also reduce or otherwise control
    sparking, flash-over or other deleterious effects at the commutator in a
    commutator type motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 220 for spark
    reduction means for commutators for dynamoelectric machines.


CLS 318/440
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which two or more sources of
    electrical energy are provided for the armature or primary circuit of
    electric motors one or more of said sources (1) having one or more
    characteristics (e.g., size, frequency, voltage, etc.) which are
    substantially different from one or more corresponding characteristics of
    one or more others of the sources, or (2) are controlled substantially
    differently (e.g., with respect to time, degree of control, type of control
    means, etc.) from one or more others of the sources.

    (1)     Note.  Where a plurality of sources are connected in electrical
    series, or in series, or in series parallel in the armature or primary
    circuit of a motor, there being no significant diverse characteristics of
    the sources claimed or no different control of the sources claimed, the
    patent is excluded from this subclass.  See subclass 504 and the subclasses
    specified in the Notes to the definition of that subclass for such excluded
    subject matter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    for motor systems having plural diverse, or diversely controlled
    sources of armature or primary circuit supply for plural motors.

    119     and 123, for motor systems having a polyphase source of supply for
    a reciprocating or oscillating motor.

    149,    for motor systems having plural, diverse or diversely controlled
    generators for supplying electric energy to the armature or primary
    circuits of motors.

    248,    for motor systems having plural, diverse or diversely controlled
    sources of e.m.f. for a series motor.

    500,    see Note 1 above. 731, for motor systems having plural sources of
    supply for an induction motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 18 for
    systems interconnecting a plurality of sources of electrical energy so that
    they supply a plurality of load devices or load circuits; subclass 43 for
    systems interconnecting a plurality of sources of electrical energy so that
    they can supply a common load or load circuit.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 86 for
    automatic substitution of power supply; subclass 137 for polyphases source
    of supply; subclass 160 for plural power supplies, all for lamp or
    space-discharge device systems.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclasses, particularly subclass 138, for a plural source of
    supply for a battery or condenser in a charging or discharging system.


CLS 318/441
TXT Subject matter under subclass 440 in which one or more of the sources are
    an alternating current type of source and one or more others of which are a
    direct current type of source.

    (1)     Note.  A pulsating source in which the instantaneous polarity never
    reverses is classified as a direct current source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for plural motor systems having a.c. and d.c. sources of supply.


CLS 318/442
TXT Subject matter under subclass 440 in which one or more of the sources have
    a different (effective value) voltage than one or more others of the
    sources.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108     and 109, for plural motor systems having plural sources of supply
    one or more of which sources have a voltage which is different (in
    effective value) than the voltage of one or more others of the sources.


CLS 318/443
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which means are provided for
    effecting a motor operation two or more times in succession at regular or
    irregular intervals of time.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes those systems of repetitious,
    periodic, or successive operations of a motor in which once the operation
    of the motor is initiated, either manually or automatically, the operation
    will take place a plurality of times by virtue of the inherent law or mode
    of operation of the control means.

    (2)     Note.  Where the operation is controlled by some
    condition-sensitive device and the operation is effected each time a
    predetermined condition exists but where the condition may or may not exist
    so that as a result the operation may or may not occur or take place,
    classification is not herein but in some other appropriate subclass. See
    subclass 445 herein below, and the subclasses listed in the Search Notes
    thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for motor systems having means for successively starting and/or
    stopping or for periodically or repeatedly starting and/or stopping two or
    more electric motors.

    119,    for this subject matter where the motor is a reciprocating or
    oscillating electric motor which is periodic or repetitious in its
    operation by virtue of its normal mode of operation (i.e., its working or
    useful output member periodically stops and reverses).

    162,    for pattern, template, perforated sheet or other predetermined
    schedule means which can be operated to give repeated or cyclic motor
    operation controls.

    281,    for motor systems having means for periodically reversing a motor.

    431,    for motor systems having means for repeatedly applying starting
    impulses to a motor to overcome starting friction.


CLS 318/444
TXT Subject matter under subclass 443 in which means are provided for changing
    the periodicity or time interval of different motor operations.


CLS 318/445
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which (1) means are provided
    for sensing the existence of or the magnitude of a predetermined condition
    (e.g., temperature, time, speed of a device, etc.) combined with means for
    controlling the motor and in which the sensing means initiates the
    operation of the motor control means upon the occurrence of the
    predetermined condition; and/or (2) in which time-delay or retarding means
    are provided for retarding or delaying the operation of the motor control
    means whether the operation is initiated manually or automatically.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and the subclasses indented hereinunder will
    be the places where automatic starting and/or stopping, per se, of electric
    motors will be classified.  See section I,B,4,b, of the class definition of
    automatic starting and/or stopping of electric motors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for electric motor follow-up systems in which a motor starts
    (including automatic starting in response to a change in a condition) and
    automatically stops when motor moves a distance proportional to the degree
    of movement of a controller or to the degree of change of a condition.

    69,     for speed difference detectors in plural motor systems for
    automatically controlling the relative speeds of the motors in response to
    a difference in speed between the motors.

    77,     for motor systems having devices responsive to speed of one motor
    which controls speed of another electric motor.

    120     and 127, for motor systems having means for automatically
    controlling a reciprocating or oscillating motor.

    141,    for generator supplied motor systems having means for automatically
    controlling the generator.

    162,    for motor systems having means for automatically controlling an
    electric motor by means of templates, perforated sheets and other
    predetermined schedule means.

    174,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes to the definition of
    those subclasses for automatic control of synchronous motors.

    221,    for induction motor systems having automatic control and/or time
    delay means for the control of an impedance type converter or dephasing
    means for controlling the armature or primary circuit of the motor.

    283,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes to the definition of
    those subclasses for miscellaneous motor systems having automatic control
    of the reversing of electric motors.

    364,    for miscellaneous motor systems having automatic controls of the
    braking of electric motors.

    432,    for miscellaneous motor systems having automatic means for
    maintaining constant load or constant current in electric motors.

    700,    for induction motor systems having automatic control and/or time
    delay means for the control of a primary circuit impedance of the motor.

    822,    for induction motor systems having automatic control of an
    impedance in the secondary circuit of the motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, see (4) Note of class definition and the
    search notes thereto, for condition responsive systems, per se.

    334,    Tuners, subclass 9 for remotely controlled variable tuners having
    an electromagnetic operator.


CLS 318/446
TXT Subject matter under subclass 445 in which means other than automatic means
    (e.g., manual means) are also provided for effecting a particular control
    of an electric motor.

    (1)     Note.  The automatic control means and the nonautomatic control
    means may be arranged to operate conjointly or exclusively of each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for motor systems having means in addition to an electric motor for
    actuating a load device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 479.01 and the Search Notes
    thereto, for plural operators or controlling elements for single load
    devices in general.


CLS 318/447
TXT Subject matter under subclass 445 in which means are provided for rendering
    the sensing mechanism entirely nonresponsive or incapacitated, or less
    responsive to the predetermined conditions for a particular and limited
    period of time which is less than the time required for an operating cycle
    of the motor.

    (1)     Note.  For example, an overload cutout may be rendered inoperative
    during the starting period of a motor so that it will not trip during the
    particular and limited period that the motor is starting, but will be fully
    operative during the running period of the motor.

    (2)     Note.  Where the sensing or control means is merely delayed or
    retarded (e.g., by means of a dash pot or other retarding means), so that
    the rate at which the sensing means responds or the control means operates
    is reduced, classification is not herein, but in subclass 484 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    279,    for means for rendering the overload sensing mechanism less
    responsive during the accelerating period of the motor.

    484,    see Note 2 above.


CLS 318/448
TXT Subject matter under subclass 445 in which means are provided for
    preventing or for reducing the tendency of the motor control means to cause
    the motor to "hunt" overtravel or to be over-compensated.  The systems
    included herein are "open loop" controls and thus are not servomechanisms.

    (1)     Note.  "Overcompensation" is defined for the purposes of this class
    as that condition which exists when the automatic control means, in
    consequence of its sensing means responding to a change in some
    predetermined condition, cause the operation or control of the motor to be
    extended or continued beyond that necessary to restore the condition to the
    desired value.

            "Overtravel" is defined as the movement of the motor, or devices
    actuated thereby, beyond that necessary to cause the condition to be
    restored to the desired value and is the direct and proximate result of the
    "overcompensation" defined above.

            "Hunting" is defined as that condition which exists as a result of
    "overcompensation" or "overtravel" in which the sensing means again
    responds to the extended or excessive change in condition beyond that
    desired to cause the control means to effect a control of the motor in the
    opposite direction. Should the control means again overcompensate, the
    operation of the control means may be initiated for several or for an
    indefinite number of times.  These successive operations or controls of the
    motor in an attempt to restore the condition to a predetermined value is
    known as "hunting"; and the means provided to prevent or reduce hunting are
    known as "anti-hunting" means.

    (2)     Note.  Where the system is a closed loop position servomechanism,
    classification is not herein, but in subclass 611, above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    362,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for motor
    systems having means for braking a motor in order to prevent overtravel of
    a motor after the energy flow thereto has been terminated.

    611,    see Note (2) above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 39 for
    anti-hunting means in electric generating systems.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 19 for
    differentiating or integrating networks of the passive type.


CLS 318/449
TXT Subject matter under subclass 445 in which means are provided for producing
    a force, motion, or other quantitative characteristic constituting a
    standard, master, or reference value or quantity, in combination with means
    for comparing such value or quantity with a value or quantity of a
    corresponding characteristic derived from or as a result of the operation
    of the motor to be controlled, and for controlling the motor in accordance
    with the magnitude or variations in magnitude of the resultant of the
    compared values or quantities.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for electric motor follow-up systems in which when the
    "transmitter" is operated continuously the follow-up motor may vary in
    speed (see particularly subclass 23) in accordance with variations in the
    speed of operation of the transmitter which thus acts as a standard or
    reference device.

    69,     for plural motor systems having means for controlling the relative
    speed of two or more electric motors wherein a speed difference detector is
    employed for comparing the relative speeds of the motor with respect to
    each other and means are provided responsive to the speed difference
    detector for controlling the speed of one motor relative to that of another.

    77,     for plural motor systems in which means responsive to the speed of
    one motor constitutes a speed controlling means for another motor.

    329,    for motor systems having means to control the motor running-speed
    in response to the speed or frequency of any master device other than the
    source of supply for the armature circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 36 for generator
    control with respect to a standard master or reference device.


CLS 318/450
TXT Subject matter under subclass 449 in which the comparing means (i.e., the
    means which detects a change in, or a difference between, the values or
    quantities being compared) comprise electrical means, e.g., coils, electric
    meters or indicators, dynamoelectric machines, electrical impedances, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for plural motor systems having electrical type detectors in
    running-speed control systems wherein the speed of one motor is compared by
    electrical means with the speed of another.


CLS 318/451
TXT Subject matter under subclass 449 in which a tuning-fork or other
    mechanically vibratable device is used as a standard, master, or reference
    device with which the operation or control of the motor is compared and
    controlled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    for motor systems where the motor is an electrically driven
    tuning-fork.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, subclass 457 for tuning-fork, per se, when used for
    producing musical notes.


CLS 318/452
TXT Subject matter under subclass 445, (1) in which the sensing means are
    provided with means which respond to two or more conditions, one or more of
    which are diverse in type or character than one or more others of the
    conditions or (2) in which means are employed for sensing one or more
    conditions, diverse or otherwise, in combination with means for delaying or
    retarding the operation of the sensing means or the control means after
    control thereof has been initiated by the sensing means.

    (1)     Note.  The magnitude of a condition (e.g., 40-volts) and the
    rate-of-change (e.g., 1 volt per second) of a condition are considered
    plural, diverse conditions for purpose of classification herein.  Two
    magnitudes of a different order of the same condition (e.g., 40-volts and
    60-volts) are not considered plural diverse conditions for purposes of
    classification herein.

    (2)     Note.  Automatic starting of a motor in response to one condition
    and stopping in response to different kind of condition is included herein,
    for example.

    (3)     Note.  The sensing means which responds to two or more diverse
    conditions may comprise either separate means one of which responds to one
    condition and another of which responds to another condition, or a single
    means which is simultaneously responsive to diverse conditions (e.g., an
    electromagnet having the winding made of a thermally responsive material,
    such as iron wire, which is inherently responsive to voltage or current and
    also temperature).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142,    for automatic control in response to plural diverse conditions
    and/or with automatic control in response to a condition in combination
    with time delay or retarding means, of a generator in a generator-fed-motor
    system.

    365,    for automatic control of motor braking in response to plural
    diverse conditions and/or with time-delay means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 40 for generator
    control responsive to plural conditions.


CLS 318/453
TXT Subject matter under subclass 452 in which the sensing means is responsive
    to one or more electrical conditions (e.g., voltage, frequency, current,
    etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142,    for automatic control of a generator in a generator-fed-motor
    system in which the sensing means is responsive to plural diverse
    conditions including one or more electrical conditions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 41 for generator
    control in response to plural conditions including an electrical condition.


CLS 318/454
TXT Subject matter under subclass 453 in which the sensing means respond to two
    or more predetermined electrical conditions, one or more of which
    conditions are different in kind or character (e.g., voltage, current,
    frequency, watts, power-factor, etc.) than one or more others of the
    conditions.

    (1)     Note.  The magnitude of an electrical characteristic (e.g.,
    50-volts, 10 amperes, etc.) and the rate-of-change of magnitude of the same
    characteristic (e.g., 1-volt per second change, or 2-amperes per minute
    change) are considered to be diverse electrical conditions and, hence, are
    included within the definition of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143,    for automatic control of generator-fed motor systems in response to
    plural, diverse electrical conditions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 42 for generator
    control in response to plural electrical conditions.


CLS 318/455
TXT Subject matter under subclass 454 in which the sensing means are responsive
    to both voltage and current including watts or watthours based on both
    voltage and current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 43 for generator
    control in response to voltage and current.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclasses 136, 137, 139, and 140 for watt or watt-hour
    meters, per se.


CLS 318/456
TXT Subject matter under subclass 445 in which the sensing means is responsive
    to the rate-of-change of a condition (e.g., from 72o F to 73o F in 10
    minutes, four (4) pounds pressure change per hour, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Means responsive to rate of change of position (i.e., the
    speed) of the motor or other body are not included herein but will be found
    herein below.  See subclass 461. However, means responsive to
    rate-of-change of speed (i.e., acceleration) are classified herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    461,    see Note 1 above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 19 for rate of
    change responsive generator control.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 19 for
    differentiating or integrating networks of the passive type.


CLS 318/457
TXT Subject matter under subclass 456 in which means are provided for sensing,
    detecting, or measuring the rate-of-change of a condition comprising a
    device having an inertia member which is relatively displaced in response
    to a rate-of-change of a condition.


CLS 318/458
TXT Subject matter under subclass 456 in which the sensing means is responsive
    to the rate-of-change of an electrical condition.


CLS 318/459
TXT Subject matter under subclass 445 in which the sensing means are responsive
    to the armature or primary circuit voltage, the terminal voltage, or the
    counter-electromotive-force of the motor being controlled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145,    for generator-fed-motor systems having the generator controlled in
    response to the terminal voltage or counter e.m.f. of the motor.

    368,    for motor systems having the braking of the motor controlled in
    response to the terminal voltage or counter e.m.f. of the motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 29 for generator
    control in response to generator voltage.


CLS 318/460
TXT Subject matter under subclass 445 in which the sensing means are responsive
    to noise, sound, or other mechanical vibrations of bodies.

    (1)     Note.  Means for sensing (or which are responsive to) electrostatic
    or magnetic waves are not included herein, even if the said waves are
    produced or originated by mechanically vibrating bodies.

    (2)     Note.  Means for sensing compressional waves transmitted by means
    of solids, liquids, or gases (including natural media such as earth, water,
    and atmosphere) are included herein regardless of the frequency thereof
    (i.e., whether audible or supersonic).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128,    for motor systems having automatic control of reciprocating or
    oscillating electric motors in response to the sound, noise, or vibration
    in or of the motors or devices actuated thereby.

    480,    for motor systems having automatic control of the motor in response
    to radiant energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 825.72 is the generic subclass
    for systems for the control of apparatus and devices at a distance by means
    of radio wave energy.  See the Search Notes in the class definition of
    Class 343 for the other classes which provide for means for the control of
    an apparatus or device by means of compressional waves.


CLS 318/461
TXT Subject matter under subclass 445 in which the sensing means are responsive
    to the speed (angular or linear velocity) or rate-of-movement of the motor
    being controlled or of any other body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     and the subclasses specified in the Notes to the definition of
    those subclasses for automatic running-speed control of one motor with
    reference to the running-speed of another motor.

    128,    for control of a reciprocating or oscillating motor in response to
    rate-of-movement thereof.

    146,    for automatic control of the generator in a generator-fed-motor
    system in response to the speed of the motor being controlled or of a
    device driven thereby.

    286,    for automatic reversing of the motor being controlled in response
    to movement (including speed) of the motor or of a device driven thereby.

    369,    for automatic control of braking of an electric motor in response
    to the speed thereof or of devices driven thereby.

    715     and 721, for control of synchronous motor in response to speed
    thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 30 for generator
    control in response to the speed of the generator.


CLS 318/462
TXT Subject matter under subclass 461 in which the sensing means comprises a
    centrifugally operating device for detecting the speed conditions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 535 for a speed responsive device
    of the centrifugal weight type, per se.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 31 for generator
    control in response to generator speed by means of a centrifugal device.


CLS 318/463
TXT Subject matter under subclass 461 in which the sensing means comprises a
    tachometer device.

    (1)     Note.  A "tachometer device" is defined as a device adapted to be
    connected to a moving body and to develop a force, pressure (including
    electrical potential) or other quantity which varies with the speed of the
    moving body which force, pressure or other quantity is availed of to
    actuate another device to a degree varying with the speed of the moving
    body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    449,    and the Search Notes thereto, for motor systems having a tachometer
    device in which the output thereof is compared with the output of a master
    or standard device for the purpose of automatically controlling motor
    operations.

    462,    and the Search Notes thereto, for speed responsive devices of the
    centrifugal type for motor control systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, appropriate subclasses for
    generator structure, per se, which may be used as electric tachometers.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 32 for generator
    systems having generator control in response to generator speed wherein the
    sensing device is a tachometer.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 160 for speed
    measuring systems wherein electric tachometers are used as speed indicators.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 236 for
    speed responsive means including tachometers for controlling electrical
    systems in response to the speed of some device.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, for appropriate subclasses, for
    rotary expansible chamber devices, per se.


CLS 318/464
TXT Subject matter under subclass 463 in which the speed sensing device
    comprises an electric generator connected to be driven by and in proportion
    to the speed of the motor or other moving body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, appropriate subclasses, for
    motor driven generators in general.


CLS 318/465
TXT Subject matter under subclass 461 in which means are provided for
    controlling an electric motor in response to speeds of motors or of other
    bodies when the speed is in excess or above a predetermined value.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    462,    for this subject matter where the speed sensing means is a
    centrifugal device.

    463,    for this subject matter where the speed sensing means is a
    tachometer device.


CLS 318/466
TXT Subject matter under subclass 445 in which the sensing means are responsive
    to a predetermined (1) movement (e.g., mere condition of motion, number of
    revolutions, etc.), (2) limit-of-travel, or (3) other position (e.g., mere
    presence of, altitude or elevation, etc.) of the motor being controlled or
    of any body or device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for follow-up motor systems in which the  motor is started and/or
    stopped in response to the position of the "Transmitter".

    120,    for motor systems having means for stopping a reciprocating or
    oscillating motor in response to a predetermined number of revolutions or
    cycles.

    128,    for motor systems having means for controlling a reciprocating or
    oscillating electric motor in response to movement or position of the motor
    or device actuated thereby.

    286,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes to the definition of that
    subclass for automatic control of motor reversing in response to movement
    or position of motor or device actuated thereby.

    369,    for motor systems having automatic control of the braking of a
    motor in response to movement or position of the motor or device driven
    thereby.

    396,    for motor systems having automatic control of the acceleration of a
    motor in response to the movement or position of the motor or device driven
    thereby.

    461,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for motor
    systems having means responsive to rate-of-change of position (i.e.,
    velocity, speed) of the motor or other devices.


CLS 318/467
TXT Subject matter under subclass 466 in which two or more means are provided
    for sensing or determining two or more positions or limits-of-travel of the
    motor or other device.  The systems included herein are "open-loop"
    controls and thus are not servomechanisms.

    (1)     Note.  For example, a plurality of push buttons may be provided,
    each determining a different position or a different limit-of-travel at
    which the sensing means will function to initiate operation of the motor
    control means.

    (2)     Note.  A single position or limit-of-travel determining means which
    is merely adjustable so as to initiate a motor control operation when any
    of a number of possible positions or limits-of-travel are reached, is not
    included herein.

    (3)     Note.  Where the system is a closed loop position servomechanism,
    classification is not herein, but in subclass 600 or 672, above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    600     and 672, see Note (2) above.


CLS 318/468
TXT Subject matter under subclass 466 in which the sensing means is responsive
    to limit-of-travel of the working element of the controlled motor or of any
    other device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128,    for motor systems having automatic means for controlling
    intermittent energization of an electric reciprocating or oscillating motor
    when at the limit-of-travel of the working element of the motor.

    266,    for motor systems having means for stopping motor at
    limit-of-travel thereof combined with other motor controls.

    286,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes to the definition of that
    subclass for motor systems having means for reversing an electric motor
    when it reaches the limit-of-travel thereof.

    369,    for motor systems having means for controlling the motor braking
    means at the limit-of-travel of the motor or of the means driven thereby.


CLS 318/469
TXT Subject matter under subclass 468 in which means are provided for
    overloading the motor automatically when the limit-of-travel has been
    attained.

    (1)     Note.  For example, when the motor or a device actuated thereby
    reaches its limit-of-travel it may contact a compression spring or an
    abutment device placed permanently or temporarily or momentarily in its
    path thereby placing increased load on the motor resulting in increased
    armature circuit current which may be availed of to effect the particular
    motor control desired.


CLS 318/470
TXT Subject matter under subclass 466 in which the sensing means responds to
    the mere magnitude of movement (e.g., linear or angular displacements) of
    the motor being controlled or of any other device.

    (1)     Note.  For example, the sensing  means may be responsive to a
    predetermined linear movement of eight (8) inches, or of one (1) mile; or
    to a predetermined angular movement of thirty (30) degrees or of six (6)
    revolutions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128,    for motor systems having automatic control of a reciprocating or
    oscillating motor in response to mere magnitude of movement of the motor or
    means driven thereby.

    286,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes to the definition of that
    subclass for motor systems having automatic control of the reversing of the
    motor in response to movement of the motor or a device driven thereby.

    369,    for motor systems having automatic control of the braking of the
    motor in response to movement of the motor or a device driven thereby.


CLS 318/471
TXT Subject matter under subclass 445 in which the sensing means responds to
    thermal or temperature conditions in or of any predetermined device or at
    any predetermined place or position.

    (1)     Note.  Response of the sensing means to the particular temperature
    (e.g., 300C, 70oF.) or amount of temperature change (e.g., 300C. change)
    without reference to the actual temperature or the amount of available heat
    stored in a body (e.g., 100 calories) is included herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, appropriate
    (thermal) subclasses, noting subclasses 67 to 104 for thermally responsive
    means in automatic temperature control systems, and especially subclass 74,
    for thermally controlled electric motor actuated temperature control
    devices.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 34 for generator
    control in response to thermal conditions.


CLS 318/472
TXT Subject matter under subclass 471 in which the sensing means is arranged to
    be responsive to the temperature or thermal conditions of an impedance in
    the circuit of the motor being controlled, or of other means employed for
    controlling the motor.


CLS 318/473
TXT Subject matter under subclass 471 in which the sensing means are connected
    or arranged to be responsive to thermal condition in or immediately about
    the motor being controlled.

    (1)     Note.  Sensing means connected or arranged to be responsive to
    ambient temperature conditions which substantially represent the
    temperature of the medium (e.g., air, or oil if submerged in oil, etc.) in
    which the motor is located, are included herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 35 for generator
    control in response to thermal conditions in the generator or driving means.


CLS 318/474
TXT Subject matter under subclass 445 in which the sensing means responds to a
    predetermined motor load, torque, armature or primary circuit current, or
    secondary circuit current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144,    for automatic control of the generator in generator-fed-motor
    systems in response to the armature or primary circuit current of the motor.

    367,    for this subject matter for the automatic control of the braking of
    an electric motor in response to the armature or primary current of the
    motor.

    706     and 714, for automatic control of a synchronous motor in response
    to the armature or primary circuit current.

    825,    for automatic control of a secondary circuit impedance in an
    induction motor in response to the primary or secondary current of the
    motor.


CLS 318/475
TXT Subject matter under subclass 474 in which a mechanical device is provided
    to sense or detect the existence of a predetermined load on the motor.

    (1)     Note.  As an example, a resilient shaft coupling device, the load
    end of which is variably displaced under varying load conditions with
    respect to the motor end of the coupling, can be used in combination with
    contact devices or variable impedance devices whereby the relative movement
    between the parts of the coupling device is availed of to actuate the
    contacting or impedance device in response to changes in load to initiate
    operation of control means for the motor.


CLS 318/476
TXT Subject matter under subclass 474 in which the sensing means responds when
    the magnitude of the load attains or exceeds a predetermined value.


CLS 318/477
TXT Subject matter under subclass 476 in which the load on the motor or the
    armature or primary circuit of the motor is caused to be increased to a
    magnitude in excess of or above a predetermined value at the will of an
    operator or by means which is designated to, and will cause the motor to be
    overloaded at a time selected by the operator or designer.

    (1)     Note.  For example, an operator may deliberately increase the load
    on the motor by manually increasing the load actuated by the motor, or by
    manipulating the motor controls so as to cause the motor to draw an
    excessive current; or a temporary obstruction may be placed in the path of
    movement of the motor or device actuated thereby which will cause the motor
    to exert greater effort with resultant increase in motor current, as a
    result of which some motor control will be exercised.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    469,    for motor systems having automatic means for controlling the motor
    at its limit-of-travel (by means located at the limit-of-travel of the
    motor or device actuated thereby for overloading the motor) in order to
    cause the circuit of the motor to be opened or otherwise controlled.


CLS 318/478
TXT Subject matter under subclass 445 in which the sensing means responds to
    electrical conditions in circuits other than the circuit to which the motor
    being controlled is connected.


CLS 318/479
TXT Subject matter under subclass 478 in which the sensing means is responsive
    to the voltage of the other circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    459,    and the subclasses specified in the Search Notes thereto, for
    automatic motor control systems in which the sensing means is responsive to
    the terminal, line, or counter-electromotive-force of the motor being
    controlled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 29 for generator
    systems wherein a motor responsive to generator voltage is used to control
    the generator or its driving means.


CLS 318/480
TXT Subject matter under subclass 445 in which the sensing means responds to
    the mere presence or absence of, or the frequency, (i.e., color) intensity,
    magnitude or amount of radiant energy.

    (1)     Note.  Sensing means which respond to the visible spectrum of light
    are included herein.  Those means which respond to the infra-red or heat
    waves are classified in subclass 471 above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for motor systems in which the motor is controlled or operated by
    space transmitted electromagnetic or electrostatic energy.

    460,    for automatic control systems for electric motors where the motor
    is controlled by sound or supersonic vibrations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 200 and the classes and subclasses
    specified in the notes to the definitions of these subclasses for
    photo-cell controlled circuits and photo-cell apparatus.


CLS 318/481
TXT Subject matter under subclass 445 in which the sensing means is responsive
    to the pressure in, (1) a fluid medium (i.e., gaseous or a liquid medium)
    or (2) a granular medium (i.e., a mass of particulate material or of
    discrete particles, such as, for example, sand, wheat, grains, shot, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    482,    and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto, for motor
    systems having the automatic control of an electric motor in response to
    the level of a fluid or of a granular material.


CLS 318/482
TXT Subject matter under subclass 445 in which the sensing means is responsive
    to the level of (1) a fluid material or medium (i.e., a gaseous or a liquid
    material or medium) or (2) a granular (i.e., particulate or discrete
    particles) material or medium (e.g., sand, grain, shot, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    481,    and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto, for motor
    systems having automatic control of the motor in response to the pressure
    in a fluid or granular material or medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclass 36, for a float controlled motor driving a pump.


CLS 318/483
TXT Subject matter under subclass 445 in which the sensing means is responsive
    to the presence of, or the degree or amount of, moisture, wetness, or
    humidity, in a solid, liquid, or gaseous mass or body.

    (1)     Note.  Systems of motor control responsive, for example, to the
    amount of moisture (i.e., water) in a lubricating oil, the amount of water
    vapor in a tobacco storage space, or the amount of alcohol in a fabric are
    included herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 44 and the
    search notes thereto, for humidity sensing means in automatic humidity
    control systems.


CLS 318/484
TXT Subject matter under subclass 445 in which the sensing means are responsive
    to the occurrence of a particular instant of time (e.g., 8:30 A.M., 5:00
    P.M., etc.), or to the passage of a predetermined interval of time (e.g.,
    20-minutes, 4-hours, etc.), or in which means are provided for delaying or
    retarding the operation of the motor control means (e.g., by means of
    dash-pots, slow-speed operation of the motor control means by a slow-speed
    motor or through speed-reducing gearing, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Since in any automatic control system the waiting period for
    any predetermined condition to occur means, by necessity a passage of some
    intervening interval of time, every automatic motor control system
    involves, therefore, a time-delay in a broad sense.  However, in such
    automatic control systems the time interval is indefinite and may vary in
    magnitude from an infinitesimally short period to an indefinitely long
    period. The time or time intervals intended to be included herein are of
    reasonably definite and of predetermined values and, consequently, the
    means included herein must be capable by its inherent mode of operation of
    causing a control to occur at some precise time or after the lapse of a
    reasonably definite and fixed (although adjustable) period of time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    285,    for this subject matter where the system includes means for the
    automatic control of the reversing of a motor in response to instants of,
    or passage of a predetermined interval of time, or where the control means
    includes time delay means.

    447,    for automatically controlled motor systems having means for
    rendering the condition-sensing means nonresponsive or less responsive for
    limited periods of time.


CLS 318/485
TXT Subject matter under subclass 484 in which the time-delay means comprises a
    dash-pot or other mechanical braking device for effecting a time delay in
    the operation of the motor control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclass 266 for a fluid-resistance brake or dashpot of
    general utility.


CLS 318/486
TXT Subject matter under subclass 484 in which the time-controlling or
    time-delay means comprises a motor connected to actuate the control means,
    the motor operating the control being designed so that an appreciable
    amount of time elapse during the movement of the motor before the control
    means is actuated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclasses for
    expansible chamber motors, per se.

    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, or Animal Powered, appropriate subclasses,
    for the structure of miscellaneous mechanical motors.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, appropriate subclasses for
    electric motor structure, per se.


CLS 318/487
TXT Subject matter under subclass 484 in which the time-controlling or
    time-delay means comprises an electromagnetic device in the control circuit
    of the motor, the electromagnetic device having means for affecting the
    rate of rise and fall of the current through the electromagnet or for
    affecting the rate of increase or decrease in the magnetic flux associated
    with the electromagnet, for the purpose of controlling the time of
    operation of the control means.


CLS 318/488
TXT Subject matter under subclass 445 in which the sensing means are responsive
    to physical tension, compression or other stress in a body of material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for motor systems having a motor actuated means for maintaining a
    predetermined tension in a body of material.

    460,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for
    automatically controlled motor systems having sensing means responsive to
    stresses due to waves of compression and rarefaction in sound transmitting
    mediums and bodies (e.g., sound, mechanical vibration).

    471,    for automatically controlled motor systems having sensing means
    responsive to thermal stresses.

    481,    for automatically controlled motor systems having sensing means
    responsive to stresses in fluids or granular material due to the pressure
    in, fluid or material.


CLS 318/489
TXT Subject matter under subclass 445 in which the sensing means are responsive
    to direction, grade, inclination, angular position, or to a deviation or
    change from a predetermined value thereof.  The systems included herein are
    "open-loop" controls and thus are not servomechanisms.

    (1)     Note.  Where the system is closed loop position servomechanism,
    classification is not herein, but in subclass 580, above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    580,    see Note (1), above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 300 for direction sensing and
    indicating.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 5 for structure of
    gyroscopes, per se.


CLS 318/490
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which means, in addition to
    the motor supply and/or control system, are provided for signalling,
    recording, metering or measuring, or testing conditions in or about the
    motor and/or its system of supply and/or control, or the operation or the
    state of operation of the motor.

    (1)     Note.  The line that exists between the class (Class 318) and other
    classes which relate to signalling, recording, metering or measuring, or
    testing, per se, is, in general, as follows:



    (1)     Where the claimed subject matter only nominally includes the motor
    or a conventional part or circuit thereof (such, for example, as "a motor",
    and "electric motor", a "motor armature", a "motor field winding", etc.) in
    combination with signalling, recording, metering or measuring, or testing
    means set forth in detail, classification will be on the basis of testing,
    metering, signalling, etc., in the classes appropriate thereto.

    (2)     Where the claimed subject matter includes detailed motor control
    and/or supply circuits or where parts of the motor or its supply and/or
    control circuits are claimed which do not pertain directly, immediately and
    only to the signalling, metering or measuring, or testing means (claimed
    broady or in detail), classification is in this class.  In other words
    where the motor and its supply and/or control circuits are significantly
    claimed (i.e., the claims are substantially and particularly limited to
    other than a mere or nominal motor circuit) classification is in this
    class; but when the motor or its circuit is included only nominally in the
    manner of an example or as a broad or general illustration, classification
    is in some other class appropriate to the signalling, recording, etc.

    (3)     Systems involving mere detecting or condition-sensing means but
    with no scale or indicator attached thereto are not classified in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous
    measuring and testing apparatus.  See subclass 862 for dynameters.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous
    signals and indicators.

    235,    Registers, appropriate subclasses, for miscellaneous counting and
    registering apparatus and systems.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, appropriate subclasses, for
    miscellaneous electric signaling systems.

    346,    Recorders, appropriate subclasses, for miscellaneous recording
    apparatus and systems.


CLS 318/491
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which means are provided for
    controlling the physical structure (e.g., shifting commutator brushes, pole
    pieces or other magnetic structure, coil position, etc., relative to other
    structure) of an electric motor and for also controlling an electric
    circuit connected to the motor for affecting the supply of energy to, or
    the operation of the motor.

    (1)     Note.  Rotary movement of a rotary electric motor resulting from
    electric energization of the motor is not bias for classification herein.
    However, axial movement of the rotor other than by the magnetic force of
    the motor is structure control included herein.



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    538,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes to the definition of
    those subclasses for electric motor systems having means for controlling
    the motor structure.

    830,    for combined control of motor structure and motor circuit in
    induction motor systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    388,    Electricity:   Motor Control Systems, subclasses 835+ for single
    motor running-speed control systems having combined control of motor
    structure and motor circuit.


CLS 318/492
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which means are provided for
    effecting, or for controlling the dissipation of magnetic energy stored in
    magnetic circuit of the field or secondary winding of an electric motor.

    (1)     Note.  Such means include means for reducing the tendency toward
    the generation of high potentials in the field winding circuit due to the
    collapse of the magnetic field flux when the field circuit is opened.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    379,    for motor systems having means for locally closing the armature
    circuit of an electric motor for dynamic braking purposes, which may
    incidentally provide for dissipation of magnetic energy stored in the
    armature or primary winding circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 104
    for systems including electromagnets or other highly inductive devices.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 212 for
    means for discharging static electrical charges in general, and subclass
    123 for electric circuits for electromagnets in general, in which means may
    be provided for dissipating the stored magnetic energy.


CLS 318/493
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which means are provided for
    controlling the armature or primary circuit of the motor and also for
    controlling the field or the secondary circuit of the motor.

    (1)     Note.  The above means may include a single control means (e.g.,
    potentiometer type rheostat connected so as to be simultaneously in the
    field circuit and the armature circuit of a motor) or it may include a
    separate control means in each of the circuits of the motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     for plural motor systems having combined armature or primary
    circuit control for running-speed control.

    92,     for plural motor systems having combined armature or primary
    circuit control with field or secondary circuit control for acceleration
    control.

    153,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto for motor systems
    having combined control of the generator and of the motor in a
    generator-fed motor systems, including such systems having control of the
    field or secondary circuit of the motor.

    215,    and the subclass specified in the Notes thereto for motor systems
    having combined primary and secondary circuits control for an induction
    motor systems.

    527,    for motor systems having means for connecting one or more circuit
    windings in series with the armature or primary circuit.

    700     and 705, and the subclass specified in the Note to the definition
    of that subclass for motor systems having combined armature or primary
    control and field circuit control for a synchronous motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 45 for combined
    control of the armature or primary circuit and the field circuit of
    electric generators.

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, subclasses 801+, 803+ and 826+
    for single motor running-speed control systems; and subclasses 843 and 849+
    for single motor acceleration control systems; wherein the energization of
    a field winding, or of both a field winding and an armature winding, is
    controlled.


CLS 318/494
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which means are provided for
    controlling the armature or primary circuit of the motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto for this subject
    matter in plural motor systems having running-speed control.

    94,     for this subject matter in plural motor systems having acceleration
    control.

    104,    for this subject matter in plural motor systems having starting
    and/or stopping control.

    105,    for this subject matter in plural motor systems having plural
    sources of operational supply for the motors.

    111,    for this subject matter in plural motor systems having
    series-parallel connected motors.

    112,    for this subject matter in plural motor systems having
    parallel-connected motors.

    113,    for this subject matter in plural motor systems having series
    connected motors.

    126,    for this subject matter where the control is of the energizing
    circuit of a reciprocating or oscillating motor.

    138,    for this subject matter where the system has space-discharge-device
    for commutating the motor.

    139,    for this subject matter where the motor is supplied by primary or
    secondary batteries.

    140,    for this subject matter where the motor is supplied by an electric
    generator, the generator output being controlled to control the motor.

    246,    for this subject matter where the motor is a series motor.

    254,    for this subject matter where the motor is a self-commutated
    impulse or reluctance motor.

    287,    for this subject matter for the control of motor-reversing systems.

    373,    for this subject matter where the control is for "plugging" or is
    the application of reverse power to the motor for braking the motor.

    375,    for this subject matter where the control is for dynamic braking of
    the motor.

    430,    for this subject matter where the armature current is controlled
    during the starting or stopping period.

    432,    for this subject matter where the system includes means to maintain
    the armature current approximately constant.

    434,    for this subject matter where the system includes means to prevent
    the armature current from either exceeding a maximum value or diminishing
    below a minimum value.

    436,    for this subject matter where the system includes means for
    energizing a motor while not in motion.

    438,    for this subject matter where the system includes means to the
    power factor of the armature or line circuit.

    439,    for motor commutation control systems.

    440,    for this subject matter where there are plural sources of supply
    for a single motor.

    474,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes to the definition of
    those subclasses for this subject matter where the system has automatic
    means to control the armature circuit or has means to effect a time delay
    in the operation of the armature circuit control means.

    493     and the subclasses specified in the Search Notes thereto, for
    armature or primary circuit control of an electric motor combined with the
    field or secondary control thereof.

    720     and the subclasses specified in the Notes to the definition of that
    subclass where the motor is a synchronous motor.

    767     and the subclasses specified in the Notes to the definition of that
    subclass where the motor is an induction motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, subclasses 809+, 816+, 828+,
    and 830+ for control of the armature circuit only in single motor
    running-speed control systems with, and without, feedback respectively; and
    subclasses 844+ and 853+ for similar control in single motor acceleration
    control systems.


CLS 318/495
TXT Subject matter under subclass 494 in which two or more armature or primary
    windings are provided on the motor and (1) in which one or more of the
    windings are substantially different structurally from one or more others
    of the windings (including being different with respect to composition of
    winding, arrangement or shape of the winding, or physical dimensions
    thereof) or (2) in which one or more of the windings are controlled
    substantially differently from one or more others of the windings
    (including control at different time, different degrees of excitation,
    different kinds or types of energizing currents, or polarized differently).

    (1)     Note.  As examples only, the following windings, are considered
    plural, diverse or diversely controlled windings within the meaning of this
    class:



    I       Structurally unitary winding in which connections are made to
    conduct current from a point intermediate the ends thereof to either end
    selectively or to both ends simultaneously, regardless of the relative
    polarity of the individual turns of the winding or the number of turns
    thereof on either side of the intermediate point of connection.

    II      Structurally unitary winding in which some of the turns thereof are
    polarized differently from some of the other turns.

    (2)     Note.  As examples only, the following windings are not considered
    plural, diverse or diversely controlled windings within the meaning of this
    class:



    1       Structurally unitary windings in which all turns are polarized
    relatively the same (as determined when a polarizing current is conducted
    from one end of the winding to the other) and in which:

    (a)     External connections are made so that current can be conducted
    through the winding from a  point of the winding to one or more other
    points in the same direction along the winding, or

    (b)     External connections are made to conduct current through the
    winding from any point of the winding to another point thereof and means
    are provided to shunt or by-pass the current around one or more turns
    intermediate the points at which the above external connections are made.

    II      Structurally independent windings which are physically separated
    from each other but which in all other respects are not substantially
    different or are not controlled substantially differently with respect to
    each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    for this subject matter where the motors are reciprocating or
    oscillating motors having plural windings.

    288,    for this subject matter in motor reversing systems where the motors
    have plural armature or primary windings.

    770,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes to those subclasses for
    this subject matter where the motors are induction motors having plural
    primary windings.

    781,    for this subject matter where the motors are single phase motors
    having auxiliary primary windings for starting and/or running purposes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 127 for
    dynamoelectric devices having two or more current collecting  means, such
    as commutators or sets of slip rings, connected to different windings of
    the devices.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 90 for generator
    systems where the generator has plural armature circuits or windings.


CLS 318/496
TXT Subject matter under subclass 495 in which the armature or primary windings
    comprises two or more windings or sections thereof, one or more of which
    are displaced in space relation to one or more others of the windings and
    which windings or sections thereof are designed and adapted to be connected
    to a polyphase source of supply (i.e., two or more sources of alternating
    current having the same frequency and being displaced in time phase
    relation to each other).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for this subject matter in plural motor systems having plural
    induction motors of the polyphase type having synchronizing connections
    between their secondaries.

    49,     for this subject matter in plural motor systems having plural
    motors connected in cascade or tandem, one of which motors generally being
    an induction motor of the polyphase type.

    121,    for this subject matter where the motor is a reciprocating or
    oscillating motor which is provided with polyphase windings to produce a
    progressing or traveling motor field flux.

    123,    for this subject matter where the motor is a reciprocating or
    oscillating type motor having polyphase windings.

    289,    for this subject matter in motor reversing systems having means for
    reversing the phases of the polyphase supply.

    700,    for synchronous motor systems many of which are polyphase motors.

    768,    771 and 781, for this subject matter in induction motor systems
    where the motor is provided with split-phase or polyphase windings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 132 for polyphase
    armature windings for plural collector dynamoelectric machines.


CLS 318/497
TXT Subject matter under subclass 495 in which means are provided for
    connecting the several armature or primary windings in series circuit
    relationship with respect to each other at one time and in parallel circuit
    relationship with respect to each other at another time; or for connecting
    two or more of the windings in parallel circuit relationship with respect
    to each other and for, simultaneously, connecting two or more of the
    windings in series circuit relationship with respect to each other.

    (1)     Note.  One of the windings in a parallel connected group may
    constitute one of the windings in the series connected group as, for
    example, where one armature or primary winding may be parallel connected
    windings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111,    and the subclasses specified in the definition of that subclass for
    series parallel connections of armature or primary circuits of two or more
    motors, i.e., the motors are connected in series-parallel relationships
    with respect to each other.

    771,    for this subject matter in induction motor control systems wherein
    the polyphase windings may be connected in delta-star relationships.


CLS 318/498
TXT Subject matter under subclass 495 in which means are provided for
    energizing or controlling a predetermined one of the windings and for,
    subsequently, energizing or controlling another winding (i.e., for
    energizing or controlling the windings in a predetermined order or sequence
    which means may, however, be adjustable so as to change from one
    predetermined order or sequence to another predetermined order or sequence).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     for motor systems for accelerating two or more motors in succession
    or selectively, which includes accelerating the motors in a predetermined
    sequence.

    102,    for motor systems for starting and/or stopping plural motors in
    sequence or in succession, which includes starting and/or stopping motors
    in a predetermined order or sequence.


CLS 318/499
TXT Subject matter under subclass 495 in which means are provided for
    energizing one or more windings or turns so as to produce a magnetic flux
    in one direction and for energizing one or more other windings or turns so
    as to produce a flux (in the magnetic circuit of the first named windings
    or turns) in a direction opposite to the first named direction.

    (1)     Note.  The windings or turns may be energized or controlled
    concurrently or at different times.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for motor systems having mechanically coupled motors energized in
    torque opposition.

    290,    for motor reversing systems in which motors having oppositely wound
    windings are selectively energized.

    293,    for motor systems having means for reversing the polarity of the
    current supplied to a single armature winding in order to reverse a motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 65 for generator
    systems having a generator with differentially wound field windings.


CLS 318/500
TXT Subject matter under subclass 494 in which two or more sources of
    electromotive force are connected in series, parallel, or
    series-parallel-circuit relationship with respect to each other and in
    which one or more of the sources are different in structure or are
    differently controlled (e.g., with respect to time, magnitude of control,
    mode of interconnection, etc.) from one or more others of the sources so as
    to control the resultant voltage applied to the motor armature.

    (1)     Note.  Idly running electric motors or electrolytic cells, for
    example, which are connected in series with a source of potential and
    armature circuit of the motor so as to develop or generate a
    counter-electromotive force are included herein.

    (2)     Note.  Voltage drops across impedance devices merely connected in
    series with the motor, or the counter-electromotive forces developed within
    the motor armature winding are not included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    for motor systems having plural diverse sources of supply for
    plural motors.

    149,    for this subject matter in generator-fed motor systems having
    plural controlled generators, generators being in the armature or primary
    circuit of the motor.

    248,    for series-motor systems having plural sources of voltage including
    plural sources connected in the armature or primary circuit.

    293,    for this subject matter in systems having opposed sources of supply
    in the armature circuit of the motor to determine the direction of current
    flow therethrough (polarity) for reversing the motor.

    440,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes to the definition of
    those subclasses for this subject matter where there are a plurality of
    diverse or diversely controlled sources of supply.  If there is no
    significant diverse characteristics of the sources claimed or no different
    control of the sources claimed, the patent is classified in subclass 500
    and not in subclass 440.


CLS 318/501
TXT Subject matter under subclass 494 in which means are provided for shunting
    or short-circuiting in whole or in part the armature or primary winding of
    a motor by a conductor or circuit of low impedance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    379,    for this subject matter where the system has means for
    short-circuiting a motor armature winding in order to dynamically brake the
    motor.

    528,    and the subclasses specified in Notes thereto for motor systems
    having means for shunting or short-circuiting a motor field winding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 91 generator
    systems for shunting or short-circuiting an armature winding.


CLS 318/502
TXT Subject matter under subclass 494 in which means are provided for varying
    or changing the effective length of the armature or primary winding of an
    electric motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    501,    for this subject matter where the effective length is varied by
    short-circuiting part of the winding.

    531,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for motor
    systems having variable length field windings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 93 for generator
    systems having a tapped or sectionalized armature winding.


CLS 318/503
TXT Subject matter under subclass 494 in which means are provided for
    controlling the frequency, or the rate of pulsations, of the current
    supplied to the armature or primary circuit of the motor.

    (1)     Note.  Where means are provided for merely repeatedly making and
    braking the armature or primary circuit, see subclass 519, below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for plural motor systems having cascaded or tandem connected motors
    in which the frequency of the current supplied to the second motor depends
    on the slip of the first or preceding motor (i.e., the motor having its
    primary circuit connected to the a.c. supply circuit).

    129,    for oscillating or reciprocating motor systems in which the speed
    of operation of the motors is controlled by controlling the frequency of
    the current or current pulses supplied to the motors.

    148,    for generator-fed motor systems which have an alternating current
    generator, the speed or frequency output of the generator being controlled.

    807,    for induction motor systems wherein the frequency of the current to
    the primary circuit is varied.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants, appropriate subclasses for means for
    controlling the speed and frequency of alternators by controlling the speed
    of a nonelectric prime mover which drives the alternator.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    generating systems in which the frequency of the generated current is
    controlled.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 36 for oscillators for supplying alternating
    current of variable or fixed frequency to circuits of general application.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclass 157 for frequency
    conversion systems for controlling the frequency applied to load circuits
    in general.


CLS 318/504
TXT Subject matter under subclass 494 in which means are provided for
    controlling the magnitude of the voltage supplied to the armature or
    primary circuit of the motor being controlled.

    (1)     Note.  When the voltage is controlled by means of impedance means
    (such as space-discharge devices, resistors, inductors and capacitors
    merely connected in series or in parallel, but not in series and in
    parallel simultaneously-,) which do not form a voltage divider with respect
    to the motor armature, classification is not herein, but in some other
    subclass herein below.  Note subclasses 505 and 508.

    (2)     Note.  Where voltage is controlled only by means of circuit making
    and breaking of the armature or primary circuit, classification is not
    herein but is in subclass 519 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for plural motor systems having cascade or tandem connected motors
    in which the voltage supplied to the second motor depends on the speed or
    slip of the first motor.

    139,    for motor systems in which primary or secondary-batteries are
    employed to supply to armature current.

    140,    for generator-fed motor systems wherein the generator is controlled
    to control the current supplied to the motor armature.

    500,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto for this subject
    matter where the voltage control is effected by a plurality of sources of
    supply for the armature circuit.

    505,    see Note 1 above with respect to space-discharge devices in the
    primary circuit.

    508,    see Note 1 above with respect to impedances in the primary circuit.

    519,    see Note 2 above.

    812,    for primary circuit voltage control in induction motor systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants, appropriate subclasses for variable
    voltage generating systems having nonelectric prime mover control.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 129 for variable
    voltage rotary converters, per se.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass for a variable voltage supply for a battery or
    condenser charging or discharging system.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, appropriate subclasses, for
    variable voltage generating system, per se.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    220-354 for variable voltage supply systems, per se.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 13+ and the
    subclasses mentioned in the notes thereto for variable voltage current
    conversion systems.


CLS 318/505
TXT Subject matter under subclass 494 in which a space-discharge device is
    connected in series or in parallel with the armature or primary circuit of
    the motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132,    for reciprocating or oscillating motor systems having
    space-discharge devices in the input circuit thereto.

    138,    for motor systems having space-discharge devices for commutating
    the current supplied to the motor.

    504,    for this subject matter where one or more space-discharge devices
    is a part of or forms a voltage converter (divider).

    508,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for other motor
    systems having an impedance device in the armature or primary circuit of
    the electric motor.

    786,    800, and 807, for this subject matter where the motor is an
    induction motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses, for miscellaneous systems for controlling gas or vapor filled
    space-discharge devices.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 227
    and 291 for electric space discharge device systems for voltage magnitude
    control.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous space discharge device
    circuits.


CLS 318/506
TXT Subject matter under subclass 505 in which a plurality of space-discharge
    devices are provided, the principal electrodes of at least one of which
    devices are connected to the armature or primary circuit of the motor, and
    in which one of the space-discharge devices is structurally different or is
    connected or arranged or controlled differently than the other of the
    space-discharge devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    504,    for this subject matter where the space-discharge devices are a
    part of or form a voltage converter (divider).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 227
    and 291 for electric space discharge device systems for voltage magnitude
    control involving plural space discharge devices.


CLS 318/507
TXT Subject matter under subclass 505 in which the space-discharge device
    includes a cathode, and anode, and (a) an electrostatic element (e.g., a
    control grid) which is adapted to have an electric potential established
    between it and the cathode, or (b) a magnetic-field producing means;
    wherein the elements (a), (b) are positioned relative to the cathode and
    anode so as to control the space-current flow between the cathode and the
    anode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 227
    and 291, for electric space discharge device systems for voltage magnitude
    control having discharge controlled device (e.g., grid) control.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous electric space discharge
    device circuits having a control electrode and subclasses 510+ for such
    circuits which are magnetically effected.


CLS 318/508
TXT Subject matter under subclass 494 in which means are provided for
    connecting one or more impedance devices (e.g., resistors, reactors,
    capacitors) in series and/or in parallel to the armature or primary circuit
    of an electric motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     for this subject matter in acceleration control systems for plural
    motors.

    133,    for this subject matter in reciprocating and oscillating motor
    systems.

    249,    for this subject matter in series  motors systems.

    380,    for this subject matter in motor systems for dynamic braking.

    505,    and subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for motor systems
    having space-discharge devices in the armature or primary circuit of the
    motor.

    751,    784, 785, and 794, for impedance-type phase converter or dephasing
    means for adapting an induction motor for operation from a single phase
    source of supply.

    784,    794, 804, and 814, for this subject matter in induction motor
    systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 364 for
    circuit control in general by means of impedances.


CLS 318/509
TXT Subject matter under subclass 508 in which there are provided a plurality
    of impedance devices each of which is directly connected in the armature or
    primary circuit of the motor and in which one of the impedance devices is
    structurally different, differently controlled or connected than another of
    the impedances.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    504,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for voltage
    conversion (e.g., voltage dividers, etc.) in motor systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 364 for
    plural impedance networks, per se.


CLS 318/510
TXT Subject matter under subclass 509 in which the impedances comprise a
    reactor and a capacitor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    355-363 for circuit impedance systems including both a reactor and a
    capacitor.

    334,    Turners, appropriate subclasses for tuned networks for use in wave
    energy apparatus and comprising inductance and capacitance elements in
    circuit arrangement to form a resonant circuit and in which structure is
    provided for adjusting one or both of these elements for changing the mean
    resonant frequency of the circuit.


CLS 318/511
TXT Subject matter under subclass 508 in which the impedance device is of the
    type in which the impedance of the device inherently changes appreciably in
    magnitude (e.g., with mere lapse of time, change in potential applied
    thereto or current flowing therethrough, change in temperature or physical
    pressure applied thereto, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Impedances such as reactors and condensers whose value of
    impedance changes in consequence merely of a change in the frequency of the
    electric energy supplied thereto are not included herein.  Should the
    impedance of these devices change inherently, however, with the frequency
    remaining constant, classification is herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    767,    for motor systems having inherently variable impedance devices in
    the primary circuit of an induction motor. See particularly subclasses 788,
    796, 797, 804, 815, and 892.

    821,    for motor systems having a inherently variable impedance device in
    the secondary circuit of an induction motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 364 for
    miscellaneous impedance systems.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 30 for adjustable induction apparatus
    designed to have its impedance automatically controlled in response to a
    condition, and subclass 155 for the structure of inductive regulators (of
    the saturable or high leakage reactance type) having no movable adjustable
    feature.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 2 for strain gauge type electrical
    resistors, and subclass 13 for electrical resistors whose value changes in
    response to a condition.


CLS 318/512
TXT Subject matter under subclass 508 in which the impedance device comprises a
    reactor or choke coil.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 355 for
    impedance networks including reactors.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for the structure of
    inductive reactors and transformers.


CLS 318/513
TXT Subject matter under subclass 512 in which auxiliary means are provided for
    saturating the magnetic core or a part thereof of the reactor.

    (1)     Note.  For example, an auxiliary winding on the reactor combined
    with means for supplying either a.c. or d.c. current thereto sufficiently
    to magnetically saturate the core, would be included herein.

            Merely increasing the current through the usual winding on the
    reactor until the core becomes saturated, is not included herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 206,
    249, 302, 310, and 329 for systems wherein saturable reactors are used for
    control purposes.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 155 for the structure of inductive
    regulators of the saturable or high reactance type, which have no movable
    adjustable feature.


CLS 318/514
TXT Subject matter under subclass 508 in which the impedance device comprises a
    resistor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    509,    and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto, for this subject
    matter where the impedances comprise a plurality of resistors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    295-298 for control systems in general which include resistors as the
    controlling element.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, appropriate subclasses, for electrical
    resistors, per se.


CLS 318/515
TXT Subject matter under subclass 514 in which means are provided for short
    circuiting the resistor in whole or in substantial part by a conductor of
    negligible resistance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 83, for generation
    systems in which means are provided for short-circuiting the field circuit
    resistors.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    295-298, for control systems in general which include short circuited
    resistors as the controlling element.


CLS 318/516
TXT Subject matter under subclass 515 in which means are provided for short
    circuiting different sections or portions of the resistor at different
    times (i.e., without going through all intermediate and infinitesimal
    values of resistance).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 85 for generator
    field circuit control by means of resistors with means to short circuit the
    resistors step by step.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 297 for
    control systems in general which include resistors which are short
    circuited step by step as the controlling element.


CLS 318/519
TXT Subject matter under subclass 494 in which means are provided for making
    and/or breaking the armature or primary circuit of the motor.

    (1)     Note.  See section I, B, 2 of the class definition for the
    definition of "circuit making and/or breaking" as used in this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    for plural motor systems having starting and or stopping means for
    the motor which comprise mainly circuit making and or breaking of the
    armature or primary circuit of the motor.

    134,    for reciprocating or oscillating motor systems having means for
    making and or breaking the line or supply circuit to the motor.

    264,    for automatic starting and or stopping of a motor combined with
    some other motor operation control, wherein the starting and stopping is
    generally effected by armature or primary circuit making and or breaking.

    272,    see the reference to subclass 264, above.

    275,    see the reference to subclass 264, above.

    277,    see the reference to subclass 264, above.

    374,    for motor braking systems by means of "plugging" (i.e., application
    of reverse power to a forwardly running motor) in which the armature or
    primary circuit is opened substantially at the moment that the motor
    reaches zero speed.

    443,    for periodically or repetitiously starting an electric motor by
    opening and closing the motor circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, all subclasses for the
    structure of circuit makers and breakers.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 96 for
    intermittent regulatory interruption of an electrical system, and subclass
    112 for switching systems.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclasses 72 to 74 for switch controlled motor circuits in electric motor
    feeding mechanisms for discharge electrodes.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass for a battery or condenser charging or discharging
    system that includes circuit making or breaking.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 69 for means for
    making and/or breaking the field circuit of an electric generator.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ for
    relay circuits in which an electric circuit is generally made and/or broken
    and for electron magnetic switching systems in general.


CLS 318/520
TXT Subject matter under subclass 519 in which the circuit making and/or
    breaking means are provided with electromagnetically operating means for
    operating the circuit making and/or breaking means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 2 for the structure of electromagnetic switches.


CLS 318/521
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which means are provided for
    controlling (1) the electric circuit which is connected to the
    magnetic-flux producing means of the motor, or (2) the electric circuit
    which is connected to the secondary (i.e., induced) member of an
    alternating current motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     for plural motor systems having means for controlling the speed of
    one or more electric motors relative to the speed of one or more other
    electric motors by controlling the field or secondary circuit of one or
    more of the motors.

    84,     for plural motor systems having means for controlling the speed of
    two or more electric motors by controlling the field or secondary circuits
    of the motors.

    89,     for braking systems in plural motor systems in which one or more of
    the motors are converted into exciters for supplying field excitation to
    the remaining motors during the braking period.

    97,     for plural motor systems having means for controlling the field or
    secondary circuit of one or more electric motors for controlling the
    acceleration of two or more motors.

    100,    for plural motor systems having field or secondary circuit control
    of the motors to effect a fixed or predetermined ratio of load or current
    division between the motors.

    153,    for generator-fed motor systems having combined control of
    generator field circuit and of the field circuit of the motor supplied by
    the generator.

    190,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes to the definition of
    those subclasses for synchronous motor systems in which means are provided
    for controlling the field circuit of the motor.

    232,    for induction motor systems having secondary circuit control of the
    motor.

    246,    for motor systems in which the motor is connected to run as a
    series motor and in which substantially all circuit control affects the
    field excitation.

    296,    for this subject matter in motor reversing systems.

    381,    for dynamic braking motor systems in which there is field circuit
    control when the armature circuit is locally closed (e.g., short circuited).

    493,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for motor
    systems having field circuit control combined with armature or primary
    circuit control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 59 for field
    circuit control of electric generators.

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, subclasses 801+ and 826+ for
    single motor running-speed control systems; and subclasses 843 and 849+ for
    single motor acceleration control systems; wherein the energization of a
    field winding, or of both a field winding and an armature winding, is
    controlled.


CLS 318/523
TXT Subject matter under subclass 521 in which the motor is provided with two
    or more field-producing windings one or more of which are different
    structurally, connected differently, or controlled differently or by
    different means, than one or more others of the motors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252,    for this subject matter in series-motor systems.

    297,    for this subject matter in motor reversing systems.

    495,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for motor
    systems where the motor has plural armature or primary windings.

    700,    for this subject matter in synchronous motors systems.

    818,    for this subject matter in induction motors systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 63 for generator
    systems where the generator has plural field windings.


CLS 318/524
TXT Subject matter under subclass 523 in which means are provided for
    establishing one number of field poles at one time and another number at
    another time (e.g., 4-pole and 6-poles).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    704,    for this subject matter in synchronous motor systems.

    773,    for this subject matter in induction motor systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 62 for generator
    systems, having a generator having a convertible number of sets of poles.


CLS 318/525
TXT Subject matter under subclass 523 in which means are provided for
    energizing one or more field producing windings, turns, or conductors, so
    as to produce a magnetic field in one direction in a magnetic path, and for
    energizing one or more other windings, turns, or conductors so as to
    produce a magnetic field in the opposite direction in the same magnetic
    path either at the same time or at different times.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    499,    and subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for motor systems
    having a motor with plural armature or primary windings wound in magnetic
    opposition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 64, for generator
    systems having a generator with plural, differentially related, field
    windings.


CLS 318/526
TXT Subject matter under subclass 523 in which means are provided for
    connecting the several field windings or conductors in series-circuit
    relationship with respect to each other at one time and in parallel-circuit
    relationship with respect to each other at another time, or for connecting
    two or more of the windings in series circuit relationship and two or more
    windings in parallel circuit relationship with respect to each other all at
    the same time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111,    for systems having means for connecting two or more motors in
    series-parallel circuit relationships.

    497,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for motor
    systems having means for connecting plural armature or primary circuit
    windings of a motor in series-parallel circuit relationships.


CLS 318/527
TXT Subject matter under subclass 523 in which means are provided for
    connecting one or more of the field windings in series with the armature or
    primary circuit of the motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244,    for alternating-current commutating motors wherein it is common to
    have a field winding connected in series with the armature or primary
    circuit of the motor.

    246,    for series motors, in general, in which a field winding is
    connected in series with the armature or primary circuit of the motor.

    493,    for motor systems having both field circuit control and armature
    circuit control.


CLS 318/528
TXT Subject matter under subclass 523 in which means are provided for short
    circuiting a field winding in whole or in part with a conductor of
    substantially negligible resistance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    299,    for this subject matter in motor reversing system.

    501,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for motor
    systems having means for short-circuiting an armature or primary winding in
    whole or in part.

    700,    for synchronous motor systems having means for short-circuiting the
    field winding during the starting period of motor operation.

    818,    for means for short-circuiting the secondary winding of an
    induction motor for short-circuiting impedances in the secondary circuit of
    the motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 68 for generator
    systems having means for short circuiting a field winding.


CLS 318/529
TXT Subject matter under subclass 523 in which means are provided for
    energizing one or more of the field windings or conductors without
    energizing one or more others.

    (1)     Note.  The means may be operative at times to also energize all of
    the windings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    524,    for this subject matter where the motor is of the convertible
    number of poles type (e.g., convertible from 4 to 6 pole).

    528,    for this subject matter where the system includes means to
    short-circuit a field winding.

    819,    for induction motor systems in which means are provided for varying
    the effective number of conductors or turns in the secondary of the motor.


CLS 318/530
TXT Subject matter under subclass 521 in which there are provided two or more
    sources of voltage for the motor field circuit, one or more of such sources
    being different structurally, differently connected or differently
    controlled than one or more others of the sources.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for motor
    systems, in which the armature or primary circuit of the motor is provided
    with two or more sources of supply.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 86 for generator
    systems wherein two or more voltage sources are provided for the field
    circuit of the generator.


CLS 318/531
TXT Subject matter under subclass 521 in which means are provided for tapping
    or otherwise varying the active length of a field winding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    523,    for motor systems having plural field windings where the windings
    are selectively or partially energized.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 71 for generator
    control systems in which means are provided for tapping or otherwise
    varying the effective length of the generator field winding.


CLS 318/532
TXT Subject matter under subclass 521 in which the principal electrodes (e.g.,
    cathode and anode) of a space-discharge device is connected to the field
    winding circuit of an electric motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    505,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for motor
    systems having space-discharge devices in the armature or primary circuit
    of the electric motor.

    818,    for space-discharge devices in the secondary circuit of an
    induction motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for means for controlling and supplying electric energy to
    gas-filled space-discharge devices, per se.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 72 for generator
    systems having the generator field circuit controlled by means of space
    discharge devices.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 227
    and 291 for electric space discharge device systems for voltage magnitude
    control.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous control circuits wherein
    a space discharge device is the controlling element.


CLS 318/533
TXT Subject matter under subclass 521 in which impedance devices are provided
    in the field circuit of a motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249,    for series motor systems having impedance devices either in series
    or in parallel to the series field winding.

    532,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for field
    control by means of space-discharge devices.

    700,    for this subject matter in synchronous motor systems.

    821,    for induction motor systems having impedance devices in the
    secondary circuit thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 75 for generation
    systems having impedance devices in the field circuit of the generator.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 364 for
    miscellaneous circuit control by means of impedances.


CLS 318/534
TXT Subject matter under subclass 533 in which two or more impedances are
    provided in the field circuit; one or more of which are structurally
    different or are differently controlled or controlled by means which are
    different with respect to each other, than one or more others of the
    impedances.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    509,    and the subclasses specified in Notes thereto, for motor systems
    having the armature or primary circuit controlled by means of plural
    impedance devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 76 for generator
    systems having the generator field circuit controlled by means of plural
    impedances.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    220-354 for miscellaneous load control by means of impedance devices
    including plural impedances.


CLS 318/535
TXT Subject matter under subclass 534 in which the several impedances are
    connected in a Wheatstone bridge (i.e., four-arm) arrangement with respect
    to each other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 77 for Wheatstone
    bridge arrangements of impedances in the field circuit of generators.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 365 for
    Wheatstone bridge arrangements of impedances in general.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 169 for wave filters
    of the Wheatstone bridge or lattice type.


CLS 318/536
TXT Subject matter under subclass 521 in which means are provided for
    physically making and/or breaking the field circuit of the motor.

    (1)     Note.  See section I, B, 2, of the class definition for a
    definition of "Circuit making and breaking".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    519,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for motor
    systems having means for making and/or breaking the armature or primary
    circuit of the electric motor.

    529,    for motor systems where the motor has a plurality of field windings
    and means are provided for selectively energizing the field windings
    thereby generally necessitating the making and/or breaking of the circuit
    to one or more of the windings.

    705,    for synchronous motors starting as repulsion or induction motors
    wherein means are provided for connecting or disconnecting the field
    exciting means.

    716,    for this subject matter in synchronous motors systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 69 for generator
    systems having means for making and/or breaking the field circuit of an
    electric generator.


CLS 318/537
TXT Subject matter under subclass 536 in which means are provided for making
    and breaking the circuit intermittently or repetitiously.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 19 to 32 for
    structure of periodic switches, per se.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 96 for
    intermittent regulatory interruption of an electrical system, and subclass
    132 for periodically or repetitiously making and breaking an electric
    circuit.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 70 for generator
    systems having periodic or repetitious circuit making and/or breaking of
    the field circuit of an electric generator.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 87 for electromagnetically operated periodic
    switches.


CLS 318/538
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which means are provided for
    relatively moving one or more structural elements of a motor relative to
    one or more other structural elements of an electric motor.

    (1)     Note.  Mere motion of the working element of the motor relative to
    other parts of the motor as a result of normal excitation of the motor
    during the normal working cycle thereof are not included herein.

    (2)     Note.  Where a motor having one type of normal working motion
    (e.g., rotary) also has another type of motion (e.g., axial movement) for
    producing some useful external work (e.g., operating a clutch lever to
    clutch the motor to some work load, but wherein the clutch is not claimed,
    but the several types of motions of the motor are claimed), classification
    is not herein but in some other appropriate subclass.  See subclass 115.
    However, where a motor having one type of useful work motion, also has
    another type of movement of the working element for regulatory or control
    purposes for the motor, classification is in this subclass (538).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    for motor systems having a motor having plural, diverse types of
    motion of the working element of the motor. See (2) Note above.

    136,    for motor systems having auxiliary means for producing mechanical
    torque on the working element of a motor during the starting or
    accelerating period.

    159,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes to the definition of that
    subclass for motor systems having means for biassing the rotary working
    element of the motor against angular movement.

    437,    for phasing, or angular or linear position control of a motor
    wherein a motor element may be moved without energizing the motor.

    491,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto, for this subject
    matter where the system also includes means for controlling the motor
    circuits.

    830,    for this subject matter in induction motors systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, appropriate subclasses for
    structure of the motor, per se.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 49 for generator
    systems which are controlled by adjusting or varying the magnetic structure
    of the generator; see subclass 54 for generator systems wherein the
    generator control involves the current collecting mechanism.

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, subclasses 835+ for single
    motor running-speed control systems having combined control of motor
    structure and motor circuit.


CLS 318/539
TXT Subject matter under subclass 538 in which means are provided for moving or
    permitting to move, both the armature or primary member of the motor and
    the field or secondary member of the motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 115 for structure
    of a motor in which both the field and armature are incorporated in
    separate rotary elements.


CLS 318/540
TXT Subject matter under subclass 538 in which means are provided for
    relatively moving the rotor element axially (i.e., along the axis about
    which the motor revolves) with respect to the remainder of the motor
    structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    for motor systems having a motor having plural, diverse types of
    motion which commonly include axial movement. See (2) Note to the
    definition of subclass 538 for the distinction between the subclass and
    subclass 115.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 51 for generator
    systems wherein the generator is controlled by moving or adjusting the
    rotor element axially.


CLS 318/541
TXT Subject matter under subclass 538 in which means are provided for moving or
    adjusting the brushes or other current-collector or current-transfer means
    of the motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 229 for
    dynamoelectric devices in which a current collecting brush is caused to
    traverse across the surface of the cooperating collector element transverse
    to the direction of motion therebetween; subclass 230 for current
    collecting brushes which are circumferentially adjusted upon the reversal
    of direction of motion of a dynamoelectric device; subclass 241 for means
    for circumferentially adjusting normally fixed brush holders.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 54 for generator
    systems having generator control by means of movable or adjustable brushes
    particularly subclass 55 wherein the brushes are movable or adjustable
    circumferentially.


CLS 318/542
TXT Subject matter under subclass 541 in which means are provided for moving
    the brush or other current-collector or current-transfer means toward or
    away from its cooperating part.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes means for completely separating the
    brushes, etc., from the cooperating part and means for merely varying or
    changing the contact pressure therebetween.


CLS 318/543
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which the electric motor is
    controlled or regulated by a controller having three or more definite
    positions of control in which the degree or magnitude or kind of control at
    any one position differs substantially from that which is obtained when the
    controller is in either of at least two of the other positions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 469 for miscellaneous
    control lever and linkage systems.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 1 to 18, 23
    for multiple contact circuit makers and breakers.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 112
    for miscellaneous switching systems.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 106 for electromagnetically operated switches of
    the plural contact type.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 68 for mechanically variable
    electrical resistors, and especially subclass 185 for mechanically variable
    electrical resistors having intervening connectors between the contact and
    resistance element (e.g., taps) so that the resistance value changes in
    steps.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 139 for
    miscellaneous relay circuits.


CLS 318/544
TXT Subject matter under subclass 543 in which a three-or-more-position
    controller is combined with some other motor control device between which
    there is some particular inter-relationship; such as, for example, a
    predetermined sequence of operation, a mechanical or electrical interlock,
    etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53      and 255, for plural diverse motor operations control systems in
    which it is common to have a three-or-more-position controller combined
    with some other controller wherein each controller effects a different
    motor operation, see subclass 53 for plural motor systems and subclass 255
    for miscellaneous motor systems.

    255,    see the reference to subclass 53 above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 471 and 479.01 for
    miscellaneous control lever and linkage systems having plural controlled
    elements or plural controlling elements, respectively.


CLS 318/545
TXT Subject matter under subclass 544 in which the three-or-more-position
    controller is combined with a main line or armature or primary circuit
    switch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     264, 272, 275, and 277 for plural diverse motor operations control
    systems which include automatic starting and/or stopping which is usually
    effected by circuit maker and breaker in the main line circuit to the
    motor, see subclass 62 for plural motor systems, subclasses 264, 272, 275,
    and 277 for miscellaneous motor systems having plural diverse motor
    operations.

    264,    see the reference to subclass 62, above.

    272,    see the reference to subclass 62, above.

    275,    see the reference to subclass 62, above.

    277,    see the reference to subclass 62, above.


CLS 318/546
TXT Subject matter under subclass 543 in which two or more
    three-or-more-position controllers are provided for controlling one or more
    motors, one of the controllers being different structurally or being
    differently controlled than another of the controllers.


CLS 318/547
TXT Subject matter under subclass 546 in which a plurality of means are
    provided for controlling the motor controllers, which means are positioned
    physically apart so as to constitute two stations or locations from which
    the operation of the controllers may be controlled.


CLS 318/548
TXT Subject matter under subclass 543 in which a plurality of means are
    provided for controlling the operation of a three-or-more-position motor
    controller, which means are positioned physically apart so as to constitute
    a plurality of stations or locations from which the operation of the
    controllers may be controlled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    547,    for this subject matter where the systems include plural
    controllers.


CLS 318/549
TXT Subject matter under subclass 543 in which means are provided for returning
    the controller, or which make it necessary that the controller be returned,
    substantially completely or fully to the "off", "starting", or "neutral"
    position after having been operated or started from such positions in a
    previous operation before it can become effective in controlling a
    subsequent motor operation.


CLS 318/550
TXT Subject matter under subclass 549 in which motive power means are provided
    for operating the three-or-more-position controller through part or all of
    its path of travel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    552,    and the subclasses specified in the search notes thereto, for other
    motor systems having power-operated motor controllers.


CLS 318/551
TXT Subject matter under subclass 543 in which means are provided for operating
    the three-or-more-position controllers by knee or by foot of the operator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 512 and 515 and the
    subclasses specified in the notes thereto, for miscellaneous
    foot-and-knee-operated  control levers and linkages.


CLS 318/552
TXT Subject matter under subclass 543 in which motive power means are provided
    for operating the three-or-more-position motor controller through all or
    part of its path of travel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    550,    for this subject matter where the power operated controller is
    provided with means for returning or necessitating that the controller be
    returned to its "off", "starting", or "neutral" position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, and 185, Motors:  Spring, Weight, or Animal Powered,
    and the classes and subclasses specified in the notes to these classes, for
    the structure of the power actuating means, per se.

    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, or Animal Powered, see the reference to
    class 60, above.


CLS 318/553
TXT Subject matter under subclass 552 in which the three-or-more-position
    controller is provided with two or more sets or pairs of electrical
    contacts with separate or individual actuators for each set or pair of
    contacts.


CLS 318/554
TXT Subject matter under subclass 553 in which one or more of the actuating
    means for the sets or pairs of contacts are electromagnets (including
    electric motors).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    555,    and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto, for other motor
    systems having electromagnetic actuating means for three-or-more-position
    motor controllers.


CLS 318/555
TXT Subject matter under subclass 552 in which one or more of the actuators are
    electromagnets (including electric motors).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    554,    for this subject matter where there is electromagnetic actuating
    means for separately or individually actuated controller contacts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, appropriate subclasses for electromagnetically operated
    switches, per se.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 139 for
    miscellaneous relay and electromagnet circuits.


CLS 318/556
TXT Subject matter under subclass 555 in which the electromagnetic actuating
    means comprise an electromagnetic means having a reciprocating or
    oscillating type of motor for its operating or working member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    for miscellaneous motor systems in which the motor, which is the
    load device in the system, is a reciprocating or oscillating type of motor.

    557,    for motor systems having other means for operating a
    three-or-more-position motor controller intermittently or step-by-step.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 15 for
    reciprocating motors, and subclass 36 for oscillating motors.


CLS 318/557
TXT Subject matter under subclass 555 in which the electromagnetic actuating
    means is a motor having an intermittent or step-by-step movement in a
    single direction of operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135,    for miscellaneous motor systems in which the motor, which is the
    load device in the system, is a linear-movement motor.

    556,    for this subject matter where the motor for actuating the
    controller is a reciprocating or oscillating electromagnetic means
    (including electric motors).


CLS 318/558
TXT Subject matter under the class definition not classifiable in any of the
    preceding subclasses.


CLS 318/560
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising a system which
    maintains a prescribed relationship between the position of a member or a
    function of the position and the value of a arbitrarily varied command
    signal by detecting an error between the actual position of the member or
    the actual value of the function of the position and the position or value
    commanded by the signal and controlling a motor of the servo system in
    response to the detected error.

    (1)     Note.  From the definition set forth above, it is obvious the
    systems classified hereinunder are feedback control systems in which the
    directly controlled variable is mechanical position and the terminology
    employed will generally be that encountered in the feedback control art.
    Such feedback controlled mechanically positioning systems are also known as
    servo control or servomechanisms.

    (2)     Note.  Since Class 318 takes, under the class definition only
    electric motor control systems, then a search, in order to be complete,
    must in appropriate situations extend to Classes:  33, 77, 91, 235, 244,
    250, 307, 310, 327, 329, 330, 340, 346, 361, and 409.

    (3)     Note.  If a servo system is presented which only discloses fluid
    motors and the claims are broad enough to cover either fluid or electric
    motors, the appropriate fluid motor class accepts the application.  If the
    same type system is presented in which it is disclosed that the motor may
    be either fluid or electric, Class 318 accepts the application.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    690,    for self-synchronous motor systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, appropriate
    subclass; see the search class note in the class definition of this class
    (318).

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 80+ for
    robot control.

    901,    Robots, subcollection 9 for positional servo systems for robots.


CLS 318/561
TXT Subject matter under subclass 560 in which the system may include means to
    measure or evaluate its own performance and automatically adjust one or
    more of its parameters in response to a change in internal or external
    environmental conditions, or where the system has been initially designed
    for optimum performance such as a bang-bang servo.

    (1)     Note.  For example, an output from the system may be compared with
    the output from a desired response model or computer and the error produced
    employed to adjust the system gain.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 175+ for autopilots with adaptive or
    optimizing features.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 69+,
    which inter alia, includes random access magnetic storage devices employing
    "bang-bang" servos.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 148+
    for data processing adaptive or optimizing control systems.


CLS 318/562
TXT Subject matter under subclass 560 in which the system includes at least one
    element or one data-transmission link common to two or more servo loops and
    include in each of the loop on either a time sharing or multiplexing basis.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are systems in which a single computer
    provides command signals for two or more servo systems on a time sharing
    basis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communication:  Electrical, subclasses 825+ for communications
    systems in which a lesser number of communication lines control plural
    remote devices, and subclasses 870.13+ for time division telemetering of
    plural transmitters.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for multiplex
    systems.


CLS 318/563
TXT System under subclass 560 in which the system includes means to protect or
    guard against system failure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 360 for fluid motor
    systems with fail safe features.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 175+ for fail safe circuitry used in
    conjunction with autopilots.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 326+
    for electrical transmission or interconnection systems with fail safe or
    protection features.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    electrical systems with fail safe features.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 184+
    for protective or reliability features in combination with a data
    processing control system.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 180+ for
    reliability and availability, fault recovery, locating, and avoidance in
    digital data processing systems; and subclasses 750.01+ for power control
    in a digital data processing system.


CLS 318/564
TXT Subject matter under subclass 563 in which the system includes a plurality
    of channels arranged such that should a failure occur in one channel,
    operation of the system is maintained by the remaining channel or channels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 175+ for redundant controls in autopilots.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 407+ for miscellaneous gating circuits having plural
    inputs and a single output and subclasses 415+ for miscellaneous gating
    circuits having a single input and plural outputs.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 3 for wave
    transmission lines and networks with automatic control for lines
    substitution.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 62+ for
    plural parallel interconnected feeders for electrical systems.


CLS 318/565
TXT Subject matter under subclass 563 in which the system includes one or more
    elements whose sole function is to test or monitor the performance of
    similar elements in the servo loop and to disable the servo upon a failure
    of one of the similar elements.

    (1)     Note.  For example, a system operating in response to the amplified
    output of a first gyro may be provided with a second gyro and amplifier,
    which first gyro system is disabled when the output from the second
    amplifier differs substantially from the system output.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 77, for autopilots with monitoring control.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 648 for motor condition
    responsive indicating systems.


CLS 318/566
TXT Subject matter under subclass 563 in which means are provided for limiting
    the response of the system to excessive or large error signals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    445+,   for open loop systems which include automatic starting or stopping
    of a motor under various conditions.

    635,    for servo systems which include signal, voltage or current
    limitation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 371 for fluid motor
    systems with pressure limitation.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 175+ for autopilots with maneuver, force or
    load limiting.


CLS 318/567
TXT Subject matter under subclass 560 having means whereby the command signal
    for the system is varied in response to a predetermined program or pattern
    thereby establishing a predetermined pattern or schedule for the positions
    of the controlled member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162+,   for open loop pattern control systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 64 for automatic machines which perform a
    cycle or operations in response to some mechanism.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclasses 215+ and 231+ for automatic
    knitting machines which perform a sequence of operations.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 36 and 37 for fluid
    motor systems responsive to a pattern or program.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 167.01
    and 474.01, respectively, for supervisory control or programmable digital
    computers; see the search class note in the class definition of this class
    (318).

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planning, subclasses 2+, 79+, 245+, and
    289+ for a gear cutting, milling, or planning machine adapted to operate in
    response to a pattern or program.


CLS 318/568.1
TXT With program recording or composing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 567 including means for initially producing
    the program of control instructions to which the system subsequently
    responds.


CLS 318/568.11
TXT Multifunction manipulator (i.e., robot):

    Subject matter under subclass 568.1 wherein the system is a reprogrammable
    multifunction manipulator designed to move devices through variable
    programmed motions for the performance of changeable tasks on a repetitive
    basis without human intervention.

    (1)     Note.  A robot usually has an arm (elongated appendage) which
    normally has three or more degrees of freedom.

    (2)     Note.  A robot must be reprogrammable to perform a variety of
    different tasks.  Thus, a numerically controlled machine tool, which may
    have an arm, but which is designed to perform only a fixed set of tasks, is
    not a robot.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 80+ for
    robot control.

    901,    Robots, appropriate subclasses for cross-reference art collections
    of robot motion controls.


CLS 318/568.12
TXT Mobile robot:

    Subject matter under subclass 568.11 in which the robot includes a base
    which is moveable without restraint under the control of a programmable
    guidance system.

    (1)     Note.  A robot with a base which is guided for movement along a
    track so that the base must follow the track is not considered to be a
    mobile robot.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclasses 23+ for mobile robot control systems.

    901,    Robots, subclass 1 for an art collection of mobile robots.


CLS 318/568.13
TXT With particular program teaching method:

    Subject matter under subclass 568.11 including methods of instructing or
    programming the robot to perform the steps of a desired sequence of
    manipulations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 80+ for
    robot control.

    901,    Robots, subclasses 3+ for program teaching methods for robots.


CLS 318/568.14
TXT Manual lead through:

    Subject matter under subclass 568.13 wherein the robot is "taught" the
    steps of a desired sequence of manipulations by actual performance of the
    steps while the robot's control system is in a memory mode, with the robot
    subsequently performing the memorized sequence without human intervention.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes stepping the robot through a desired
    sequence of motions under keyboard control while the outputs of detectors
    associated with the joints of the robot's arm are recorded.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 80+ for
    robot control.

    901,    Robots, subclass 4 for manual lead through teaching of robots.


CLS 318/568.15
TXT With particular interpolation means:

    Subject matter under subclass 568.11 in which the motion of the robot is
    defined by a plurality of discrete points along the path to be followed and
    a means is provided for generating continuous motion between the points.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 87 for robot
    control with  interpolation.


CLS 318/568.16
TXT With particular sensing device:

    Subject matter under subclass 568.11 in which a particular sensing device
    is used in monitoring or control of the robot.

    (1)     Note.  Sensing devices include:  video camera, force sensor,
    "absolute" position detector, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 93+ for
    robot control with particular sensor.

    901,    Robots, subclass 46 for robot sensing devices.


CLS 318/568.17
TXT With multimode control (e.g., course-fine, position-force, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 568.11 in which more than one mode of control
    is provided.

    (1)     Note.  Modes of control include:  course positioning, fine
    positioning, velocity, acceleration, and force.

    (2)     Note.  Inclusion of a compliance means on the robot is considered
    to constitute a position-force multimode control.


CLS 318/568.18
TXT Including velocity control:

    Subject matter under subclass 568.17 wherein one of the modes of control is
    control of velocity (including acceleration and deceleration).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    901,    Robots, subclass 20 for speed altering provisions in a robot.


CLS 318/568.19
TXT With particular coordinate transformation means:

    Subject matter under subclass 568.11 in which a transformation is made
    either (a), from one coordinate system to another (e.g., spherical polar
    coordinates to cartesian coordinates), or (b) from one reference frame to
    another (e.g., a reference frame associated with an "end effector" to a
    reference frame associated with the base of the robot).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 86 for robot
    control with coordinate transformation.


CLS 318/568.2
TXT With plural control systems (e.g., the interaction of plural processors to
    control the plural joints of a single robot:

    Subject matter under subclass 568.11 in which (a) plural robots interact,
    (b) a robot interacts with a numerically controlled machine tool or
    conveyor, or (c) plural computers interact in the control of a single robot.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 84 for robot
    control with plural processors.

    901,    Robots, subclasses 6+ for communication between a robot and another
    machine including another robot.


CLS 318/568.21
TXT Including end effector (e.g., gripping jaw, micromanipulator, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 568.2 including a device, usually attached to
    the robot arm, which extends the capability of the robot by one or more
    degrees of freedom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 80+ for
    robot control.

    901,    Robots, subclasses 30+ for robot end effectors.


CLS 318/568.22
TXT With particular compensation (e.g., gain, offset, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 568.11 in which provision is made for
    improving the performance of a robot by applying a correction to a control
    instruction to compensate for a predictable inaccuracy in the positioning
    of the robot.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 89 for robot
    control with compensation.


CLS 318/568.23
TXT Including program modification:

    Subject matter under subclass 568.22 wherein the correction is applied by
    modifying the control program so that future repetitions of the robot's
    actions are precompensated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 85+ for
    robot control with program modification.


CLS 318/568.24
TXT With reliability enhancement means (e.g., monitoring, redundant circuits,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 568.11 in which means are provided for
    monitoring the performance of the robot and appropriate actions are taken
    in the event a fault is detected.

    (1)     Note.  Fault response reactions include:  (a) sounding an alarm, or
    otherwise alerting a human operator, (b) interrupting the action of the
    robot (shut down), or (c) selecting an alternate program path or device to
    circumvent the fault producing program step or device (redundant system).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 85+ for
    robot control with enhancing techniques.


CLS 318/568.25
TXT Including display device:

    Subject matter under subclass 568.24 including means for displaying
    information relevant to locating and diagnosing faults in the robot or its
    control system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 99 for robot
    control with particular operator interface.


CLS 318/569
TXT Subject matter under subclass 560 including digital or numerical systems
    wherein the control system programming means utilizes numerical values,
    digital signals or coded pulses corresponding to desired positions of the
    control.  Usually these numerical or digital signals are recorded on
    punched cards, punched tapes, magnetic tapes, or optical tapes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    600+,   for digital servo systems, per se, where the input command is not
    necessarily from a program.


CLS 318/570
TXT Subject matter under subclass 569 in which motion of a member along two or
    more axes is controlled simultaneously to provide a continuous
    predetermined path along which the member is directed.


CLS 318/571
TXT Subject matter under subclass 570 in which means are provided for
    controlling the tangential velocity of the member along the path.


CLS 318/572
TXT Subject matter under subclass 570 in which means are provided for (1)
    varying the reference points from which the coordinates of the system are
    measured or (2) compensating the system for variation in the diameter of
    the tool, such compensation being precalculated.


CLS 318/573
TXT Subject matter under subclass 570 in which the input data is represented by
    a plurality of discrete points along the path to be followed and the system
    includes means to interpolate between the points so that the ultimate servo
    command is a smoothly varying function.


CLS 318/574
TXT Subject matter under subclass 569 in which the system programming means
    directs a member to move from a first point having a first set or
    coordinates to a second point having a second set of coordinates and in
    which the path taken by the member between points is not a material
    consideration.


CLS 318/575
TXT Subject matter under subclass 560 wherein the program input is a pattern in
    analog form, and means responsive thereto being used to position a member
    along one or more axes.


CLS 318/576
TXT Subject matter under subclass 575 in which the pattern to be followed is
    provided by a line, seam, or edge and the pattern follower is
    non-mechanical.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162,    for open-loop analog pattern controls.

    653,    for servo systems in which the position measuring instrument is a
    magnetic transducer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 124.01+, for systems which
    automatically position a welding machine over a seam.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planning, subclasses 290+ for a planning
    machine controlled by a line follower.


CLS 318/577
TXT Subject matter under subclass 576 in which the means to sense the line,
    seam or edge is a photoelectric means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    640,    for photoelectric or optical measuring instruments as an error
    detector in a servo system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclass 20 for systems
    wherein the material advanced is maintained in a predetermined path by
    photoelectric control.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 202 for photoelectric line followers
    wherein the novelty lies in the photoelectric portion of the circuit.


CLS 318/578
TXT Subject matter under subclass 575 in which the pattern to be followed is
    provided by a cam or template.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162+,   for open-loop, analog pattern control systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 567 where a machine follows
    a groove or predetermined contour.

    82,     Turning, subclasses 19 and 55 for automatic turning machines which
    follows a cam or template.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 79+ for a pattern
    controlled milling machine.


CLS 318/579
TXT Subject matter under subclass 575 in which the system controlled makes a
    plurality of passes of ever increasing precision.

    (1)     Note.  For example, a patterned controlled machine tool which make
    a rough cut and ultimately a finish cut with as many intermediate cuts as
    are necessary.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 288+ for a planning
    machine which functions in the manner of the device of this subclass.


CLS 318/580
TXT Subject matter under subclass 560 in which the servomechanism guides a
    vehicle about a single axis, wherein the novelty is chiefly in the
    servomechanism and not in the guidance system.

    (1)     Note.  The systems classified hereinunder specifically exclude
    multiple axes vehicle guidance systems, which systems are classified in
    Class 244, Aeronautics, subclass 77, which subclass is the generic place
    for steering of dirigible craft in two or three dimensions by electrical
    means. See particularly (2) Note of Class 244, subclass 77, as to the line
    between subclass 77 and the other motor and vehicle classes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    575+,   for analogous pattern controlled systems in which a controlled
    member follows a path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 204+ for direction indicator
    means, per se.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 5 for structure of
    gyroscopes, per se.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclass 384 for drop bombs having
    direction controlling devices which may be automatic.

    114,    Ships, subclass 144 for steering mechanisms for ships which may be
    automatic.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 167+ for a motor vehicle provided with
    means for controlling its operation responsive to electromagnetic
    radiation, magnetic force, or sound waves received from a source, or
    reflected from an object or surface, which is located apart from the
    vehicle; and subclass 79.1 for a motor vehicle having a steering gear of
    the electric power assist type.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 76+, see (1) Note above.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 907+, 945+, and 984+ for
    traffic and vehicle communication systems including aircraft and nautical
    controls.

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclasses 1+ for data processing systems in the application of vehicle
    control.


CLS 318/581
TXT Subject matter under subclass 580 in which the steering control signal is
    obtained by radio.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for open-loop remote controls including space transmitted
    electromagnetic or electrostatic energy (e.g., radio) control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 3.13, 3.14, and 3.19 for electromagnetic
    wave or radio guidance.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.69 and 825.72 are the
    generic subclasses for the control of apparatus and devices at a distance
    by means of radio wave energy.

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 385+ for directive beacons used in
    radio guidance.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 68 for remotely controlled modulated
    carrier wave communication systems.


CLS 318/582
TXT Subject matter under subclass 580 in which the steering control is obtained
    by celestial means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 3.18 for guidance systems employing a
    celestial body.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 203.1, for photoelectric systems
    responsive to a point of illumination such as a star, etc.


CLS 318/583
TXT Subject matter under subclass 580 in which the steering control is a
    landing system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 63 and 81 for guidance system including
    landing assists.

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 410+ for radio wave beacons which
    provide a glide path.

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclasses 15 and 16 respectively, for vehicle control of take-off or
    landing.


CLS 318/584
TXT Subject matter under subclass 580 in which the steering control is an
    altitude or pitch control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 175+ for aircraft guidance.


CLS 318/585
TXT Subject matter under subclass 580 in which the steering control is a "Roll"
    control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 175+ for aircraft guidance.


CLS 318/586
TXT Subject matter under subclass 580 in which the steering control is a "Yaw"
    control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 175+ for aircraft guidance systems.


CLS 318/587
TXT Subject matter under subclass 580 in which the steering control is for a
    land vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 167+ and 79.1 as explained in the
    reference to Class 180 appearing in subclass 580 above.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 901+ for traffic control of
    vehicles.


CLS 318/588
TXT Subject matter under subclass 580 in which the steering control is for a
    marine vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    589,    for steering controls for submarines or torpedoes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclass 144 for steering mechanisms for ships which may be
    automatic.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 984+ for control of
    nautical vehicles.


CLS 318/589
TXT Subject matter under subclass 588 in which the marine vehicle is a
    submarine or torpedo.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    588,    for steering systems for marine vehicles.


CLS 318/590
TXT Subject matter under subclass 580 in which the servomechanism may operate
    or be operated in a plurality of different modes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 180+
    for data processing control systems which include multiple modes.


CLS 318/591
TXT Subject matter under subclass 590 in which the servomechanism includes
    features to provided for smooth transition from one operating mode to the
    next.

    (1)     Note.  For example, a servo control system for shifting from manual
    control to automatic control or vice-versa which includes means to prevent
    the changeover until the servo error signal shaft would be negligible.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    591     and 649, for inertial or inclination devices which also include an
    erecting control.

    609     and 610, for "reset" systems (P I and P I D controllers) with
    manual to automatic features.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 5 for erecting gyroscopes.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 175+ for aircraft guidance systems with
    manual to automatic and vice-versa features.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 64+,
    85+, and 125+ for electrical interconnection systems with means to connect
    or disconnect responsive to various electrical conditions.


CLS 318/592
TXT Subject matter under subclass 590 in which a plurality of position error
    detectors, one for each operating mode, are provided. The first of these
    position error detectors provides a coarse signal which is indicative of
    the rough or approximate final position.  When the "coarse" position is
    approached, the "fine" position error detectors successively take over and
    precisely direct the servo to it final position.  Complete servo control is
    thus realized at all time.

    (1)     Note.  The servo systems classified herein differ from the
    "slewing" systems in subclass 597, in that the error signal maintains full
    control of the servo during the "coarse" positioning mode; whereas in the
    "slewing" control mode, control by the error signal is lost.


CLS 318/593
TXT Subject matter under subclass 592 in which separate servo motors are
    provided for each of the operating modes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    625,    for systems which include plural servomotors.


CLS 318/594
TXT Subject matter under subclass 592 in which the system in at least one
    operating mode is controlled by digital means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    569+,   for digital servo systems responsive to a program or pattern.

    600+,   for digital servo systems, per se.


CLS 318/595
TXT Subject matter under subclass 592 in which the position error detectors for
    each mode are synchros.  A synchro is a rotary position sensing
    transformer.  The different speeds are usually obtained by use of a gear
    train.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    654+,   for synchro systems, per se.

    660,    for systems in which one of the synchros may be an "Inductosyn". An
    "Inductosyn" is a planar two phase synchro.

    661,    for resolver systems, per se.  A resolver is merely a two phase
    synchro.

    692,    for "self-synchronous" motor controls in which the receivers are
    selsyn motors.  A selsyn motor is a device similar to a synchro but which
    produces torque.


CLS 318/596
TXT Subject matter under subclass 590 in which the servo system includes means
    responsive to the error signal to operate the servo full on or completely
    off until a desires position operating range is attained at which point a
    proportional control means assumes control to bring the servo to a
    predetermined final position.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also includes systems in which during the
    "on-off" mode, the power may be periodically switched on and off.

    (2)     Note.  The servo systems classified herein differ from the
    "slewing" systems is subclass 597 in that the error signal maintains full
    control of the servo during both "on-off" and proportional control modes,
    whereas in a slewing control system control by the error signal is lost.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    597+,   for slewing motor controls and subclasses 672+, for "on-off" motor
    controls.


CLS 318/597
TXT Subject matter under subclass 590 in which the servo system, includes means
    which, in response to a predetermined type of error signal saturates and
    applies maximum power to the servo motor.  During this mode of operation,
    the error signal loses control of the servo motor which runs at maximum
    rate toward its ultimate position. This mode is defined as the "slewing"
    mode. Means are provided whereby the error signal regains control under the
    proper conditions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    561,    for "band-bang" servos which are somewhat similar to slewing
    systems except that the end position is continuously predicted and thus the
    error signal does not lose control.


CLS 318/598
TXT Subject matter under subclass 597 in which a separate "slewing" motor is
    provided when the system operates in the "slewing" mode.


CLS 318/599
TXT Subject matter under subclass 580 in which electric power pulses of fixed
    magnitude and variable width are periodically applied and removed from the
    servo motor.  The variation in width is in accordance with the servo error
    signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    341     and 345, for similar type systems for motor speed control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    329,    Demodulators, subclass 106 for pulse width demodulators, per se.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 26 and 41 for
    conversion systems which may include pulse width modulation.


CLS 318/600
TXT Subject matter under subclass 560 in which the command signal is digital or
    numerical. A digital or numerical command is one which is composed of one
    or more discrete symbols which may form a code.  These symbols may take the
    form of any of the following examples:

    (1)     The presence or absence of a discrete value of electrical voltage
    or current.

    (2)     The presence or absence of a perforated hole in a tape or card.

    (3)     The presence or absence of a discrete mechanical movement.

    (4)     The making or breaking of an electrical switch.

            The above examples are not exclusive but merely representative.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    569+,   for programmed controlled digital servo systems.

    594,    for digital fine and coarse systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, appropriate
    subclass; see the search class note in the class definition of this class
    (318).


CLS 318/601
TXT Subject matter under subclass 600 in which the system error signal is
    obtained by comparison of the digital command signal with a position
    feedback signal which is also in digital form.  Included herein are systems
    in which the position feedback includes an analog to digital converter for
    generating the feedback in digital form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, for code converters,
    generators or transmitters.


CLS 318/602
TXT Subject matter under subclass 601 in which the digital position feedback is
    obtained from a commutating switch encoder, which encoder usually converts
    position information of analogue to digital form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, for encoders, per se.


CLS 318/603
TXT Subject matter under subclass 600 in which a counting means acts as the
    comparator between the command signal and the position signal.

    (1)     Note.  For example:  If the member is to be positioned a certain
    increment from its present position, the command signal introduces a count
    into the counting means which is proportional to the distance to be moved,
    an error signal is generated which causes the member to move toward its
    final position, a feedback position indicator causes the counting-means to
    count back toward zero; and upon reaching zero the member is properly
    positioned, the error signal is no longer generated and the system waits
    for the next command.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, for pulse counting circuits.


CLS 318/604
TXT Subject matter under subclass 600 in which the digital command signal is
    converted to an analog signal which is compared with an analog position
    signal to form the system error signal.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are systems which feature specific digital
    to analog converters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 126+ for digital to
    or from analog converters.


CLS 318/605
TXT Subject matter under subclass 604 in which the analog comparision is by
    means of a synchro or resolver system.  A synchro is a rotary transformer
    used for the instantaneous electrical transmission or reception of the
    angular position data of rotating parts.  A resolver is a rotary
    transformer for resolving a vector into two mutually perpendicular
    components, such as translating error angle into electrical information
    corresponding to sine and cosine of rotor angle.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are systems in which the synchro or resolver
    transmitter is simulated by the digital to analog converter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    569,    and especially subclass 573, for programmed controlled digital
    systems in which a synchro or resolver transmitter simulation may be
    employed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 602 for
    electric hybrid computers, and subclasses 718.01+ for digital function
    generation.


CLS 318/606
TXT Subject matter under subclass 560 in which modulator means are provided
    wherein the command signal or feedback signal either frequency modulates,
    or phase modulates a system carrier.  The system carrier is a wave suitable
    for being modulated to transmit intelligence.  The modulation represents
    the information, and the original wave is used only as the carrier of the
    modulation.  Combinations of phase and frequency modulation are commonly
    referred to as frequency modulation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    684,    for servo systems in which the novelty lies in the modulator which
    may be a frequency or phase modulator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 117+ for a frequency modulator and
    subclasses 144+ for a phase modulator, per se.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 870.18, 870.25, and 870.26
    for frequency or phase modulated telemetering systems and subclass 351, for
    code transmitters in which the frequency of the carrier is modulated in
    accordance with the code.

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar Navigation), subclasses 128+, 134+, 200+, and 202 for radio wave
    communications.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 42+ for frequency or phase modulated
    carrier systems, per se.


CLS 318/607
TXT Subject matter under subclass 606 in which the system includes a reference
    signal of the same frequency as the carrier frequency which is used with
    means to compare it with the modulated signal to obtain the modulating wave.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    684,    for servo systems in which the novelty lies in the detector which
    may be an F M detector.  Also subclass 318, for motor speed control by
    electrical frequency difference type detector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 42 for miscellaneous frequency comparison between a fixed
    frequency signal and a variable frequency signal.

    329,    Demodulators, subclasses 103 and 110+ for frequency demodulation,
    per se.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.71+ for frequency
    responsive remote control systems.


CLS 318/608
TXT Subject matter under subclass 606 in which the system includes a reference
    signal of the same frequency as the carrier frequency and of a fixed phase
    which is used with means to compare it with the phase modulated signal to
    obtain the modulating wave.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    683,    for servo systems with particular phase sensitive discriminators.
    Also, subclass 314, for motor speed control with electrical phase
    difference type detectors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 76.52+ and 76.77+
    for measuring and testing systems which include phase comparison.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 3+ for phase comparison of plural inputs.

    329,    Demodulators, subclasses 103 and 110 for phase demodulation, per se.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 825.70 for phase responsive
    remote control systems.


CLS 318/609
TXT Subject matter under subclass 560 in which two error detectors are
    provided:  One which detects the instantaneous positional errors and
    attempts to immediately correct for them.  This detector contributes what
    is termed "proportional" control to the system.  The second error detector
    senses the instantaneous position with respect to the long term average
    position.  This detector contributes what is a termed "reset" or "integral"
    control to the system.  The two signals are summed to provide a composite
    system error signal.

    (1)     Note.  In the systems classified herein, the "reset" or "integral"
    control is provided to increase long term system stability and it is really
    a special form of "lag" circuit.  A "lag" circuit is any electrical circuit
    which integrates.

    (2)     Note.  Systems of this nature may control any type or process such
    as temperature control, fluid flow, a chemical condition, mixtures, etc.,
    as a result the art is widely scattered.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    621,    for systems which include lead and/or lag compensation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electrical Heating, subclass 497 for electric heating systems which
    may include reset control features.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 518+ for miscellaneous control circuits which may
    include reset features.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 130+
    for computer controlled manufacturing process controllers which may include
    reset features.


CLS 318/610
TXT Subject matter under subclass 609 in which a third error detector is
    provided which detects the rate of change of the position and contributes
    what is termed a "rate" or "differential" control to the system.  This rate
    signal is also summed with the two previous signal to provided a composite
    system error signal.

    (1)     Note.  In the systems classified herein, the "rate" or
    "differential" control is provided to increase short system stability and
    is really a special form or a "leaf" circuit.  A "lead" circuit is any
    electrical circuit which differentiates.

    (2)     Note.  In the systems classified herein, the "rate" or
    "differential" control is often provided to prevent "reset windup".  "Reset
    windup" is an art term which means that the system is unstable when
    subjected to quickly changing error signals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    621,    for systems which include lead and/or lag compensation.


CLS 318/611
TXT Subject matter under subclass 560 in which the system includes stabilizing
    means which prevents hunting and minimizes overshooting of the commanded
    position.

    (1)     Note.  Hunting is a condition of instability in a feedback control
    device which is essentially an uncontrolled oscillation due to insufficient
    feedback, improper phase shift or underdamping.  The oscillations cause the
    positioned element to swing about its commanded position without stopping
    at the position.

    (2)     Note.  Overshooting is a damped oscillation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    448,    for automatic starting or stopping motor controls which include
    anti-hunt control.


CLS 318/612
TXT Subject matter under subclass 611 in which the stabilizing means is by
    electrical means such as dynamic braking of the servo motors as the system
    approaches balance. Dynamic braking is forcing the motor to act as a
    generator which thus absorbs its rotational energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211,    for induction motor braking systems using dynamic braking.  Also
    subclasses 371 and 375, for motor braking systems using dynamic braking.


CLS 318/613
TXT Subject matter under subclass 612 in which dynamic braking is achieved by
    introducing D. C. into the windings of an A. C. servo motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211,    for induction motor dynamic braking by D. C. in A. C. windings.


CLS 318/614
TXT Subject matter under subclass 611 in which the stabilizing  means is by
    friction braking as the system approaches balance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    371     and 372, for motor control systems with friction braking.


CLS 318/615
TXT Subject matter under subclass 611 in which the stabilizing means employees
    a separate auxiliary feedback loop in addition to the positional feedback
    loop.


CLS 318/616
TXT Subject matter under subclass 615 in which the auxiliary feedback loop
    senses the rate of positioning and introduces a signal proportional to the
    rate into the servo loop to reduce the magnitude of the servo error signal
    as the final position is approached.

    (1)     Note.  For example, the counter E. M. F. of the servo motor can be
    measured to obtain the rate signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 364 for fluid motor
    control systems which include rate feedback.


CLS 318/617
TXT Subject matter under subclass 616 in which the rate sensing circuit is made
    variable to further enhance the stabilizing effect.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    651,    for position servos which include an error detector responsive to
    acceleration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 364 for fluid motor
    control systems which include variable rate feedback.


CLS 318/618
TXT Subject matter under subclass 616 in which the means to sense the rate is
    an electrical tachometer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312     and 326, for electric motor speed control which employ electrical
    tachometers or equivalent devices for speed control.


CLS 318/619
TXT Subject matter under subclass 611 in which the stabilizing means is a means
    for changing the gain of the servo loop of its bandwidth.  The bandwidth is
    the upper and lower limit of frequencies to which the servo will respond.

    (1)     Note.  For example, the variable gain element in the loop may be
    used to make the loop less sensitive to large error signals with means to
    increase the gain as balance is achieved.

    (2)     Note.  For example, the bandwidth may be made variable so the loop
    is made more or less sensitive to certain frequency components which are
    present in the command signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    561,    for adaptive or optionizing controls which may utilize variable
    gain elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 175+ aircraft controls which include
    variable gain or bandwidth systems.


CLS 318/620
TXT Subject matter under subclass 611 in which the stabilizing means is a
    nonlinear circuit.

    (1)     Note.  For example, the circuit may include a nonlinear resistor
    which changes its effective value in response to the applied voltage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 379 for nonlinear fluid
    motor systems.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 132 for measuring and
    testing devices which use nonlinear elements (e.g., thyrite).

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous nonlinear circuits and
    particularly subclasses 334+ for an output signal which is a nonlinear
    mathematical function of an input signal.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 110 for nonlinear impedance in the feedback
    path of an amplifier.  Also subclass 183 for nonlinear devices as
    interstage coupling.


CLS 318/621
TXT Subject matter under subclass 611 in which the stabilizing means is a lead
    or lag circuit or a combination of both.  A "lead" circuit is defined as a
    circuit whose output voltage leads the input voltage over a certain range
    of frequencies. Sometimes it may be referred to as an "integrating" circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    609,    for "reset" servomechanisms which use integral and differential
    compensation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 335 for miscellaneous differentiating circuits and
    subclasses 336+ for miscellaneous integrating circuits.


CLS 318/622
TXT Subject matter under subclass 621 in which the lead and lag circuit is
    adapted for use in an A. C. servo loop.

    (1)     Note.  Since many lead and lag circuits will only operate on D. C.
    Voltages, the systems classified herein may include:  Means to demodulate
    the A. C. signals in an A. C. servo loop, passing the demodulated signal
    through the lead or lag circuit, and then remodulating the resultant signal.


CLS 318/623
TXT Subject matter under subclass 611 in which the stabilizing means is a load
    stabilizer where the positioned load may have appreciable inertia.

    (1)     Note.  For example, the load stabilizer may be a viscous, magnetic
    or friction damper.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 125 for measuring and
    testing devices which include damping of this type.


CLS 318/624
TXT Subject matter under subclass 611 in which the stabilizing means is a
    deadband in the servo loop which requires the servo error signal to be of a
    predetermined threshold magnitude before any control takes place.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 175+ for aircraft control systems which
    include deadband devices for control purposes.


CLS 318/625
TXT Subject matter under subclass 560 in which the system includes more than
    one motor.


CLS 318/626
TXT Subject matter under subclass 560 in which means are provided to prevent
    the servo loop from driving the positioned member beyond predetermined
    limits.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are synchro systems which include means to
    prevent a synchro from locking onto a balance point which is 1800 out of
    phase with the proper balance point.


CLS 318/627
TXT Subject matter under subclass 560 in which the servo system scans the
    sector between the limit stops.


CLS 318/628
TXT Subject matter under subclass 560 in which the servo system is a "Feelback"
    system. "Feelback" is that characteristic of a servo system in which the
    servo system does not apply all the force required in positioning the
    member, but is a manual assist device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for motor controls including manual driving means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 434, for fluid
    servomechanisms including "Feelback" is included.


CLS 318/629
TXT Subject matter under subclass 560 in which means are provided to eliminate
    from any of the servo loop signals an unwanted harmonic, an undesirable
    voltage component, or a quadrature component.

    (1)     Note.  For example, an unwanted harmonic may be eliminated by the
    use of filtering.

    (2)     Note.  For example, an undesirable voltage or quadrature signal may
    be bucked out of the system by introducing a signal of equal but opposite
    magnitude.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 549 for miscellaneous circuits with hum or interaction
    prevention and subclasses 551+ for miscellaneous unwanted signal
    elimination.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 39+ for electrical
    conversion systems including means to eliminate an unwanted harmonic.


CLS 318/630
TXT Subject matter under subclass 560 in which some means to prevent "backlash"
    is provided to increase the accuracy of the positioned member.  "Backlash"
    is an inherent inaccuracy more or less present in ever mechanical device
    caused by the "give" between parts.  Backlash is also present in electrical
    components.  Included herein are systems which do not specifically recite
    the term "backlash" but effectively compensate for it by always approaching
    balance from the same direction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 409 and 440+, machine
    elements, for means to eliminate backlash from gearing.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 124+ for
    a boring or drilling machine with provision to compensate for backlash.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling or Planing, subclass 146 for a gear cutting
    machine with backlash compensation.


CLS 318/631
TXT Subject matter under subclass 560 in which means are provided to eliminate
    static friction.  Static friction is usually higher than running friction
    and has a deleterious effect on servo performance.

    (1)     Note.  For example, by applying a low magnitude A. C. signal to the
    motor at all times, the rotor of the motor continuously vibrates at null to
    eliminate the static friction.  The application of an A. C. signal is
    termed using a "Dither" voltage.


CLS 318/632
TXT Subject matter under subclass 560 in which a compensating means is provided
    to improve servo performance.

    (1)     Note.  For example, velocity compensation may be introduced into
    the servo loop to decrease the magnitude of the servo error signal and thus
    increase the ability of the servomechanism to correctly follow the command
    signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    655,    for synchro differential systems in which various compensation
    signals are added by means of the differential synchro.


CLS 318/633
TXT Subject matter under subclass 560 in which the compensating means
    compensates for "Two cycle error".  "Two cycle error" is that
    characteristic of a position sensing device, usually caused by finite
    mechanical tolerances, which causes the device to exhibit a non-random
    error during each cycle of operation which repeats itself twice.

    (1)     Note.  For example, the rotor of a synchro, because of mechanical
    limitation, will wobble minutely back and forth during 3605 of rotation and
    cause a "Two cycle error".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    654+    and 661, for synchro or resolver systems, per se, which may include
    such features.


CLS 318/634
TXT Subject matter under subclass 632 in which the compensating means
    compensates for temperature effects on the servo.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 105+ for electrical
    measuring and testing instruments including thermal compensation.


CLS 318/635
TXT Subject matter under subclass 560 in which means are provided to limit the
    magnitude of a servo signal, or some voltage or current in the servo system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 306+ for miscellaneous amplitude limiting circuits.


CLS 318/636
TXT Subject matter under subclass 560 in which a servo signal is not
    continuously measured, but is periodically sampled at a rate high enough so
    that there are no deleterious effects on servo performance. Also included
    herein are that class of servomechanisms termed "sample data" control
    systems.

    (1)     Note.  Not included herein are systems in which the D. C. signal is
    converted into an equivalent A. C. signal by means of a "chopper" or a
    modulator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331     and 341, for motor speed control systems which may include similar
    techniques.


CLS 318/637
TXT Subject matter under subclass 560 in which included in the system is same
    form of analog computation.  In other words, a mathematical problem solving
    servomechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    661,    for resolver systems which, for example, solve vector problems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 600+
    and 800+, respectively, for electric hybrid computers or analog computers
    which may include analog circuits employing servomechanisms.


CLS 318/638
TXT Subject matter under subclass 560 in which a particular error detecting
    means is provided.  An error detector is a device which compares the
    command signal with the feedback signal and produces an error signal
    related to the difference between these signals.


CLS 318/639
TXT Subject matter under subclass 638 in which the error detector is responsive
    to plural, diverse conditions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    452+,   for open-loop automatic motor controls responsive to plural,
    diverse conditions.


CLS 318/640
TXT Subject matter under subclass 638 in which the error detector is a radiant
    energy photoelectric or optical measuring instrument.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    480,    for open-loop automatic motor controls responsive radiant energy.

    577,    for photoeclectric line followers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for radiant energy devices and
    systems employing photocells.


CLS 318/641
TXT Subject matter under subclass 638 in which the error detecting means is a
    temperature measuring instrument.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    471+,   for open-loop automatic motor controls responsive to thermal
    conditions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 497+, electric heating, for automatic
    regulating or control for electric heating means responsive to temperature.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 584+, electrical
    communication systems automatically responsive to temperature.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 168 for a self-rebalancing
    electrical thermometer.


CLS 318/642
TXT Subject matter under subclass 638 in which the error detecting means is a
    liquid level measuring instrument.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    482,    for open-loop automatic motor controls responsive to liquid level
    or level of a granular material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 290+ for measuring and testing
    devices which measure liquid level.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 612+ for electrical
    communication systems automatically responsive to the level of a fluent or
    pulverized material.


CLS 318/643
TXT Subject matter under subclass 638 in which the error detecting means is a
    moisture content or wetness measuring instrument.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    483,    for open-loop automatic motor control responsive to moisture
    content or wetness.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 29.02+ for measuring and testing
    devices employing hygrometers.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 602 for electrical
    communications systems automatically responsive to moisture or humidity.


CLS 318/644
TXT Subject matter under subclass 638 in which the error detecting means is a
    flow measuring instrument.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 861+ for measuring and testing
    devices employing flow measuring instruments.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 606+ for electrical
    communication systems automatically responsive to flow of fluent or
    pulverized material.


CLS 318/645
TXT Subject matter under subclass 638 in which the error detecting means is a
    fluid pressure measuring instrument.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    481,    for open-loop automatic motor controls responsive to pressure in a
    fluid or granular material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 37+ for measuring and testing
    devices with pressure measuring instruments.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 626 for electrical
    communication systems automatically responsive to pressure.


CLS 318/646
TXT Subject matter under subclass 638 in which the error detecting means is a
    force or weight measuring instrument.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 769+ for specific circuit
    structure in apparatus for measuring stress or strain.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 666 for electrical
    communication systems automatically responsive to weight.

    346,    Recorders, subclasses 9+ for weight responsive recorders.


CLS 318/647
TXT Subject matter under subclass 638 in which the error detecting means is a
    magnetic field measuring instrument.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 355+ for geometrical
    instruments which measure magnetic fields.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 244 for electrical
    measuring and testing instruments which measure a magnetic field.


CLS 318/648
TXT Subject matter under subclass 638 in which the error detecting means is an
    inertial, direction, or inclination measuring instrument.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 340+ for geometric instruments
    which measure direction, inclination or inertia.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 79 and 80 for automatic control of aircraft
    responsive to gyroscopes or pendulums.


CLS 318/649
TXT Subject matter under subclass 648 in which the measuring instrument
    includes a stable platform.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    591,    for multiple mode servomechanisms with mode engagement features
    such as the erection of gyroscopes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 321+ for geometrical
    instruments which include one or more gyroscopic elements that may form a
    stable platform.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 5+ for gyroscopes, per se,
    and other related features.


CLS 318/650
TXT Subject matter under subclass 638 in which the error detecting means is a
    current, voltage or electrical power measuring instrument.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    453+    and 474+, for open-loop automatic motor control systems responsive
    to current, voltage, or power.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 76.11+ for
    electrical measuring and testing which is responsive to electricity, per se.


CLS 318/651
TXT Subject matter under subclass 638 in which the error detecting means is an
    acceleration measuring instrument.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    617,    for servomechanisms with variable rate compensation.  Also,
    subclass 648, for servomechanisms with inertia measuring instruments.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 488+ for measuring and testing
    devices responsive to acceleration.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 3.2 for missile guidance systems in which the
    control is responsive to acceleration.


CLS 318/652
TXT Subject matter under subclass 638 in which the system includes a particular
    position measuring instrument.


CLS 318/653
TXT Subject matter under subclass 652 in which the position measuring
    instrument is a magnetic transducer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 115+ for inductor devices of the
    relatively movable coil or core type.


CLS 318/654
TXT Subject matter under subclass 652 in which the particular position
    measuring instrument is a synchro.  A synchro is a rotary transformer used
    for the instantaneous electrical transmission or reception of angular
    position data of rotating parts.  Included herein are systems in which both
    the command signal and the feedback position signal are obtained from
    synchros.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 115+, especially subclasses 122+, for
    inductor devices of the relatively movable core and coil type.


CLS 318/655
TXT Subject matter under subclass 654 in which a differential synchro circuit
    is used.  A differential synchro is a synchro in which both the stator and
    the rotor are relatively rotatable with respect to fixed reference, and the
    angular positional data obtained from such a device in the sum or
    difference of the two rotations.


CLS 318/656
TXT Subject matter under subclasses 652 in which the particular position
    measuring instrument is a differential transformer. A differential
    transformer is a position indicating transformer with at least one primary
    winding and a plurality of secondary windings, the secondary windings are
    in bucking or aiding relationship. Some portion of the magnetic circuit of
    the transformer will affect the coupling of the secondary windings in
    responses to position and the secondary windings will give a voltage
    indication of the position sensed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 115+ for inductor devices of the
    relatively movable core and coil type.


CLS 318/657
TXT Subject matter under subclass 656 in which the differential transformer is
    the linear type.  Included herein are relatively movable core and coil type
    linear differential transformers.  A linear differential transformer is one
    in which the coils and core are physically arranged on line.


CLS 318/658
TXT Subject matter under subclass 656 in which the differential transformer is
    of the "E" type.  An "E" type differential transformer is one in which the
    magnetic structure takes the form of an E.


CLS 318/659
TXT Subject matter under subclass 656 in which the differential transformer is
    a "Microsyn" type.  A microsyn is a rotary type differential transformer in
    which the coils and core are relatively angularly movable.


CLS 318/660
TXT Subject matter under subclass 652 in which the particular position
    measuring instrument is an "Inductosyn".  An "Inductosyn" is a rotary or
    linear synchro-like device in which the rotor and stator windings move
    relative to each other in parallel planes.  Included herein are devices in
    which the rotor and stator windings are printed circuits.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    654+    and 661, for synchro or resolver type systems which are directly
    analogous in function to "Inductosyns".


CLS 318/661
TXT Subject matter under subclass 652 in which the particular position
    measuring instrument is a resolver.  A resolver is a rotary transformer
    which has two phase windings on either or both the rotor and stator and may
    be used for resolving a vector into two mutually perpendicular components,
    such as translating rotor angle into electrical information corresponding
    to the sine and cosine of rotor angle.  A resolver may also be considered
    as a two phase synchro.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    654+,   for synchro systems, per se.


CLS 318/662
TXT Subject matter under subclass 652 in which the particular position
    measuring instrument is a variable capacitor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 277+ for
    variable capacitors, per se.


CLS 318/663
TXT Subject matter under subclass 652 in which the particular position
    measuring instrument is a potentiometer.  A potentiometer is any voltage
    dividing circuit.  Included herein are systems using autotransformers as A.
    C. potentiometers. Also included herein are systems in which the command
    signal is introduced by one half of a Wheatstone bridge and the feedback
    potentiometer forms the other half of the bridge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 68+ for mechanically variable
    resistors.


CLS 318/664
TXT Subject matter under subclass 663 in which the position measuring
    potentiometer is circular and means are provided to sense the minor arc to
    be travelled in reaching the commanded position whereby positioning will be
    achieved in minimum time.


CLS 318/665
TXT Subject matter under subclass 663 in which the position measuring
    potentiometer is circular and means are provided to allow continuous
    rotation of the wiper beyond 3600.


CLS 318/666
TXT Subject matter under subclass 663 in which both the mechanical length of
    the potentiometer and the tap are both controllable.


CLS 318/667
TXT Subject matter under subclass 663 in which the feedback loop contains a
    bridge circuit which does not necessarily null out when the servo loop is
    balanced.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are potentiometer systems in
    which the feedback potentiometer forms one half of a Wheatstone bridge.
    See definition of 663, supra.


CLS 318/668
TXT Subject matter under subclass 667 in which the bridge circuit includes
    means for recalibration.


CLS 318/669
TXT Subject matter under subclass 652 in which the particular position
    measuring instrument is a means for measuring the length of a standing
    wave.  This means may take the form of a resonator, mechanical or
    electrical, dependent upon the type of wave being measured.


CLS 318/670
TXT Subject matter under subclass 652 in which the particular position
    measuring instrument is a means for measuring contact resistance.


CLS 318/671
TXT Subject matter under subclass 560 in which the servo system includes a
    particular motor control responsive to the actuating signal.


CLS 318/672
TXT Subject matter under subclass 671 in which the particular motor control is
    the discontinuous or "on-off" type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    599,    for "on-off" and proportional control systems.


CLS 318/673
TXT Subject matter under subclass 672 in which the discontinuous or "on-off"
    motor control is part of a "seeking" switch system.  A "seeking" switch
    system is one in which the motor moves the wiper of a multiposition
    noncoded switch until a circuit which includes the motor and the switch is
    found which deenergizes the motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    602,    for analogous digital systems in which the motor drives a
    commutating switch type digital encoder.


CLS 318/674
TXT Subject matter under subclass 672 in which the discontinuous or "on-off"
    motor control is controlled by a Wheatstone bridge circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    663,    for potentiometer systems which may be of the Wheatstone type.


CLS 318/675
TXT Subject matter under subclass 671 in which the transmitter or initiating
    controller comprises at least two relatively movable parts one of which is
    moved to effect starting of the follow-up motor and the other of which is
    actuated by the motor or devices driven thereby in a direction so as to
    follow the said one part.

    (1)     Note.  The following is an illustrative example.



CLS 318/676
TXT Subject matter under subclass 671 in which means are provided for causing
    the follow-up motor to return the transmitter to its normal or original
    position at which position the motor is not adapted to run or operate.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a transmitter returned follow-up arrangement
    comprises a differential gearing where in one element is driven by a
    control shaft, another element is driven by a controlled motor and the
    third element devices a circuit controlling means such as a switch.  When
    the switch is in the neutral position, the arrangement is at rest.  If the
    control shaft turns, the third element of the gearing drives the switch to
    an operating position to initiate operation of the motor to drive the
    second gearing element to drive the third gearing element to return the
    switch to neutral.  The following is an illustrative example.



CLS 318/677
TXT Subject matter under subclass 671 in which the particular motor control
    system includes a particular servoamplifier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 1+ for amplifiers, per se.


CLS 318/678
TXT Subject matter under subclass 677 in which the particular servoamplifier
    includes a differential amplifier.  A differential amplifier consists of
    two amplifying devices in parallel with a one common path (e.g., common
    cathode or common emmiter), which senses the difference between a signal on
    the control electrode of the first amplifying device with the signal on the
    control electrode of the second amplifying device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 69 for sum and difference amplifiers and
    subclass 116 for balanced to unbalanced amplifiers. See the notes
    thereunder.


CLS 318/679
TXT Subject matter under subclass 677 in which the particular servoamplifier
    includes diverse types of amplifiers in the various stages.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 3 for amplifiers with plural diverse type
    amplifying devices.


CLS 318/680
TXT Subject matter under subclass 677 in which the particular servoamplifier is
    a magnetic amplifier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 8 for saturable reactor type amplifiers and
    subclass 63, for magnetic amplifiers.


CLS 318/681
TXT Subject matter under subclass 671 in which the particular servoamplifier is
    a solid-state amplifier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 250+ for solid-state amplifiers.


CLS 318/682
TXT Subject matter under subclass 677 in which the particular servoamplifier is
    a rotating amplifier.  For example, a generator with plural field winding
    which control current, voltage or power output.  Included herein are
    "Ward-Leonard" control systems.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140+,   for generator-fed motor speed control systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, for single generator
    systems in which the generator is connected as an amplifier.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 58 for rotating amplifiers, per se.


CLS 318/683
TXT Subject matter under subclass 671 in which the particular motor control
    includes a particular phase discriminator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    608,    for position servomechanisms using phase comparison.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    329,    Demodulators, subclasses 103 and 110+, for particular phase
    demodulators or detectors.


CLS 318/684
TXT Subject matter under subclass 671 in which the particular motor control
    includes a particular modulator or detector.  Included herein are "chopper"
    systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 9 and 10 for chopper or modulated amplifying
    systems.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 87+ for magnetically operated periodic switches
    (e.g., vibrators).


CLS 318/685
TXT Subject matter under subclass 671 in which the particular motor control is
    used to control a "Step-by-step" or stepping motor; and the servo loop is
    closed by feeding back a position signal from the motor shaft back to the
    servo input.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    696,    for "open-loop" stepping motor control systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 49 for the
    structure of stepping motors.


CLS 318/686
TXT Subject matter under subclass 671 in which the particular motor control is
    used to control a reciprocating or oscillating motor.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of a "reciprocating" or "oscillating"
    motor, see section I, B, f, of the class definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 15+ for
    reciprocating electric motors and subclasses 36+ for oscillating electric
    motors.


CLS 318/687
TXT Subject matter under subclass 671 in which the particular motor control is
    used to control a linear movement motor.

    (1)     Note.  For a definition of "linear-movement" motor, see section I,
    B, g, of the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135,    and the subclasses specified in the Notes to the definition of that
    subclass for other linear-movement motor systems.

    686,    for reciprocating or oscillating motor systems under subclass 671.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 12+ for linear
    electric motors.


CLS 318/688
TXT Subject matter under subclass 671 in which the particular motor control is
    used to control a shaded pole motor.  A shaded pole motor is a single phase
    induction or hysterysis motor where field shifting or distortion means is
    provided to determine direction of rotation.


CLS 318/689
TXT Subject matter under subclass 671 in which the particular motor control is
    used to control a torque motor.  A torque motor is any motor which may
    operate in an energized but non-rotating mode primarily, to provide
    torsional force to the positioned load.


CLS 318/690
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which a motor acts as a
    receiver or slave device with respect to a master or transmitter device.
    The receiver motor is termed "self-synchronous" in that it has the ability
    to produce torque in direct response to a command from the transmitter and
    to position itself in response to the command.  No additional feedback loop
    or servomotors are included in these systems.

    (1)     Note.  In the systems in this and the indented subclasses, the
    position or movement of the receiver motor is always substantially
    synchronized with the transmitter command.


CLS 318/691
TXT Subject matter under subclass 690 which means are provided for receiving a
    signal or control energy from the transmitter and delivering to the
    receiver motor a signal or control energy, the magnitude or energy content
    of which is appreciably greater than that received from the transmitter.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass excludes mere voltage or current transformer
    systems where the magnitude of either the voltage or current output is
    greater than the input voltage or current, but the energy content at the
    output is the same or less than the input energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    505+,   for motor armature or primary circuit control by space discharge
    devices.

    727+,   for induction motor control by space discharge devices in the
    primary circuit.

    818+,   for induction motor control by space discharge devices in the field
    or secondary circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for miscellaneous systems for controlling the output of
    electrical energy by means of a smaller quantity of electrical energy.

    330,    Amplifiers, appropriate subclasses for amplifiers generally (where
    the output signal wave shape is a substantial replica of the input wave
    shape).


CLS 318/692
TXT Subject matter under subclass 690 in which the transmitter is of the same
    or similar structure as its self-synchronous receiver motor.

    (1)     Note.  Systems classified herein are not to be confused with
    synchro transformer systems found in subclass 654, supra.  A synchro
    transformer is an angular position pickoff device which cannot develop
    torque as can self-synchronous motor systems.

    (2)     Note.  The transmitter and receiver windings of the systems in this
    subclass are some times called "selsyn" devices.

    (3)     Note.  The following is an illustrative example:



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    654+,   for synchro-transformer systems, see (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for the structure of
    transformers and inductive reactors.


CLS 318/693
TXT Subject matter under subclass 690 in which the transmitter comprises an
    impedance device which is effective to vary the characteristics of the
    voltage or current supplied to the receiver device.


CLS 318/694
TXT Subject matter under subclass 690 in which the transmitter comprises a
    dynamo-electric machine in which the field producing means and the brushes
    are angularly adjustable relative to each other and the electrical circuits
    extending from the transmitter are connected at the transmitter end thereof
    to the commutator brushes.


CLS 318/695
TXT Subject matter under subclass 690 in which the transmitter comprises a
    multiple contact switch with control circuits extending from the several
    contacts and a distributing contactor relatively movable into and out of
    contact with the said several contacts.

    (1)     Note.  The following is an illustrative example.



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    693,    for impedance-type transmitters having relatively movable
    commutator and brush.


CLS 318/696
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which a rotary electric motor;
    of the type in which the rotary element tends to assume a predetermined
    angular position when the motor is continuously energized; indexes in
    discrete angular increments of essentially uniform magnitude as a function
    of pulse inputs derived from outside the motor.

    (1)     Note.  The pulses supplied to the motors used in these systems are
    not responsive to rotor movement or position.

    (2)     Note.  Nonstepping space discharge commutated motors are classified
    in subclass 138.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    685,    for closed-loop servomechanisms which employ stepping motors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 49 for the
    structure of stepping motors.


CLS 318/700
TXT SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR SYSTEMS:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the system of supply
    and/or control is for a synchronous motor.

    (1)     Note.  See section I (B,1,h) of the class definition for the
    definition of a "synchronous motor" as used in this subclass and the
    subclasses indented hereunder.

    (2)     Note.  Where the frequency or the periodicity of the armature or
    primary circuit currents is determined solely by means actuated by the
    motor itself, classification is not herein but in some other appropriate
    subclass.  See subclass 254.

    (3)     Note.  In synchronous motors an energized alternating current
    winding produces a rotating electromagnetic field on a first member, and a
    fixed polarity magnetic field on a second member is rotatively movable with
    respect to the first member.  The interaction of the two magnetic fields
    produces the rotation of the motor. The alternating current winding is
    referred to as the armature or the primary winding, and when the fixed
    field is produced by an energized winding, the energized winding is called
    the field winding.

    (4)     Note.  Since synchronous motors are frequently used for phase or
    power-factor control purposes either (a) solely for such purposes by merely
    being connected to a power circuit with no load device being connected to
    the motor and generally, but not necessarily, having field excitation
    control means, or (b) for the combined purposes of phase or power-factor
    control and for driving useful load devices, it has been deemed advisable
    to classify the patents relating to synchronous motor systems in accordance
    with the function or functions performed thereby.

            Accordingly, synchronous "motor" systems will be classified on the
    basis of phase or power-factor control when the claimed subject matter is
    limited to such functions and all other synchronous motor systems will be
    classified on the basis of synchronous motors regardless of the disclosure
    in the respective specifications.

            Thus, for example, synchronous "motor" systems will be classified
    on the basis of:



    A.      Phase or Power-Factor Control

            When the claimed subject matter

    1.      refers to, or designates, the synchronous motor as

    a.      "phase adjusting means",

    b.      "phase modifier",

    c.      "synchronous phase  modifier",

    d.      "synchronous condenser",

    e.      "or any other means, the title of which definitely signifies that
    its function is to control phase or power factor such as, for example, as a

    f.      "synchronous machine for correcting or modifying the power factor",
    or

    g.      "synchronous motor for varying the power factor" which synchronous
    motor or machine is not limited to driving or actuating a useful load
    device and is connected to an electric circuit or system which is capable
    of supplying driving energy to the machine and which system is susceptible
    to having its phase or power factor affected by the machine.

    2.      refers to, or designates, the synchronous motor as a

    a.      "synchronous machine", or a

    b.      "synchronous motor"



            and limits the motor or machine to being unloaded and is connected
    to an appropriate source of energy which is capable of supplying driving
    energy thereto which source is susceptible to having its phase or power
    factor affected by the machine.

    3.      refers to, or designates, the synchronous motor as a

    a.      "synchronous machine", or a

    b.      "synchronous motor"



            and is connected to an electrical system to which other load or
    translating devices or circuits are also connected, none of which other
    loads, however, being electric motors or otherwise limited to a particular
    art device or load such as, for example, a "lamp", "secondary battery",
    "space-discharge device", etc., and which synchronous machine or motor is
    not limited to driving or actuating a useful mechanical load device,
    regardless of whether excitation control means are claimed or not.

    B.      Synchronous Motor Systems

            When the claimed subject matter:

    1.      refers to, or designates, the synchronous "motor" as a

    a.      "synchronous machine", or a

    b.      "synchronous motor", and


    2.      is not included under part "A", immediately preceding, and

    3.      is not disclosed solely as a source of electric energy.

    (5)     Note.  In this subclass and those indented hereunder, where the
    synchronous motor has at least one stationary member and at least one
    rotating member movable relative to the stationary member, the fixed member
    is called the "stator" and the rotating member is called the "rotor".

    (6)     Note.  Methods consistent with the apparatus in this group of
    subclasses will be placed with the appropriate apparatus.

    (7)     Note.  In this subclass are synchronous motor systems which include
    both an armature or primary circuit and a direct current field excitation
    circuit where changeover from subsynchronous operation to synchronous
    operation or vice versa is involved.  Also here are motor systems which do
    not require a d.c. field excitation circuit for synchronous operation but
    are double fed alternating current motor systems which operate at one or
    more synchronous speeds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for motor systems which include a synchronous and a nonsynchronous
    motor mechanically interconnected in a fixed or predetermined ratio of
    movement.

    119+,   for motor systems having a reciprocating or oscillating motor that
    operates synchronously with the periodicity of the source which supplies
    the electric energy thereto.

    148,    for generator-fed synchronous motor wherein the motor is controlled
    by controlling the generator.

    254,    see (2) Note above.

    560+,   for follow-up electric motor systems in which the motor controlled
    is a synchronous motor or operates, if at all, at a speed substantially
    synchronously with the motion of the transmitter.

    731,    for doubly fed induction motors which can run at synchronous speeds.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    201-204 for phase control systems including synchronous dynamoelectric
    machines.


CLS 318/701
TXT Hysteresis or reluctance motor systems:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein the motor includes a motor
    winding energized with alternating current by the system of supply and/or
    control to form a rotating magnetic field and (a) a rotor member of high
    magnetic retentivity which acquires a fixed magnetic field by induction
    from the energized winding and is thus attracted to the rotating field to
    rotate at the speed of the rotating field or (b) a rotor member which
    assumes a position of minimum magnetic reluctance with respect to the
    rotating magnetic field and, as a result of the magnetic field's rotation,
    rotates at the speed of the rotating magnetic field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254,    for motor systems having a self-commutated motor in which the rotor
    tends to assume positions of minimum magnetic reluctance when energized.


CLS 318/702
TXT Antihunting or damping:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 which includes means to reduce or
    eliminate variations in the speed of the energized synchronous motor from
    the synchronous speed.

    (1)     Note.  Braking to maintain the synchronous motor speed constant is
    considered to be "running speed control", see section I (B,4,c) of the
    general class notes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161,    for motors having flywheels or other massive rotary member which
    may act to reduce hunting.

    448,    and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto for automatic
    motor systems which include antihunting means.

    704+,   for synchronous motor synchronization systems which includes
    squirrel cage or other short circuited windings which may act as
    antihunting or damping means during running speed operation.


CLS 318/703
TXT Braking:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 which includes means to slow down or stop
    the rotation of the energized synchronous motor.

    (1)     Note.  See the general class notes, section I (B,4,a), for the
    distinction between braking and deceleration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    362+,   and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto for other motor
    systems having means for braking action types of electric motors.

    757+,   for the braking of induction motors by power reversal and
    mechanical and dynamic braking means.


CLS 318/704
TXT Pole changing motor winding circuits:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 which includes an alternating current
    motor winding connected to an electric circuit, or a field winding
    connected to an electric circuit, or both an alternating current winding
    and a field winding each connected to an electric circuit wherein the
    electric circuit in each instance includes switching means to change the
    number of magnetic poles of the motor winding or windings.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type includes motors or
    subcombinations of motors capable of running at more than one speed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    352,    for field or secondary control circuits for changing the number of
    poles in field windings or secondary motor windings in running speed
    control circuits.

    524,    for field or secondary control circuits for changing the number of
    poles in field windings generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 62 for generators
    having a convertible number of poles.


CLS 318/705
TXT Synchronization systems:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein the motor includes an alternating
    current winding and a field winding and the system includes an alternating
    current circuit connected to the alternating current winding of the motor
    to generate a rotating electromagnetic field, means to rotate the motor
    near synchronous speed and a circuit connected to the field winding of the
    motor to form a direct current magnetic field when the motor is rotating at
    near-synchronous speed so that the direct current field being attracted to
    the rotating magnetic field of the motor will rotate the motor at the speed
    of the rotating field.

    (1)     Note.  As used in this subclass group, the term "synchronization"
    refers to the changing over of the operation of the synchronous motor from
    mechanical rotation by any means to rotation by the rotating magnetic field
    of the motor at the speed of the rotating field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    700,    for synchronous motor systems which may include the primary or
    armature motor circuit and the field excitation circuit where
    synchronization is not claimed.

    716+,   for synchronous motor field circuits where no armature or
    alternating current circuits are also claimed.

    720+,   for synchronous motor armature or primary circuits where no field
    circuit is also claimed.


CLS 318/706
TXT With armature power removal upon failure to synchronize or loss of
    synchronism:

    Subject matter under subclass 705 wherein the system includes an
    alternating current circuit having a switching means to apply a.c. power to
    the a.c. winding of the motor and means responsive to some condition of the
    energized motor related to the operation of the motor at subsynchronous
    speed to control the switching means to de-energize the a.c. winding of the
    motor upon failure of the motor to achieve or maintain rotation at the
    speed of the rotating magnetic field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    445,    and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto for automatic
    control of other electric motors including automatic starting and/or
    stopping of electric motors.

    519,    for armature circuit control of electric motor system generally by
    the making and/or braking of the motor armature circuit.


CLS 318/707
TXT Upon failure to resynchronize:

    Subject matter under subclass 706 which includes a second switching means
    in the circuit connected to the field winding, the means responsive to a
    condition of the energized motor detecting the failure of the motor to
    synchronize and controlling the second switching means to remove the d.c.
    power from the field and to reapply power to the field a predetermined
    number of times and controlling the first switching means to remove power
    from the a.c. winding of the motor if the motor still does not synchronize.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    437,    and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto, for motor
    systems having means for phasing nonsynchronous motors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 85+
    for systems of interconnecting plural supply circuits or plural generators
    for synchronous operation.


CLS 318/708
TXT Responsive to thermal electrical element in system:

    Subject matter under subclass 706 wherein the means responsive to some
    condition includes a heat sensitive electrical element to control the
    switching means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    471+,   for motor control means responsive to thermal conditions of the
    motor circuit or in or about the motor.

    511,    for inherently or self-variable impedance for motor armature
    circuits generally which include an impedance whose value changes as a
    result of temperature changes.


CLS 318/709
TXT Having different armature voltage prior to synchronism:

    Subject matter under subclass 705 wherein the alternating current winding
    circuit includes electrical means to apply one alternating voltage to the
    alternating currore synchronous operation and another value of voltage to
    the motor for synchronous motor operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    504,    for voltage motor armature circuit control generally.


CLS 318/710
TXT With D.C. field removal:

    Subject matter under subclass 705 which includes means responsive to the
    loss of synchronism in the motor to control the circuit connected to the
    field winding of the motor to cut the d.c. power to the field winding of
    the motor.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type not only removes the
    d.c. power from the field winding but can also reapply the d.c. power to
    the field winding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    536+,   and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto for other motor
    control systems in which the field circuit is made and/or broken.

    712,    for synchronous motor synchronization systems to apply the d.c.
    field to a synchronous motor.

    716,    for field circuits of synchronous motor systems where the power to
    the circuit may be switched on or off.


CLS 318/711
TXT With electronic control element in system:

    Subject matter under subclass 710 wherein the means to control the circuit
    includes an electronic element to regulate the removal of d.c. power from
    the d.c. field winding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    532,    for general motor field or secondary circuit control by means of a
    space discharge device in the field circuit.

    716+,   for the control of power to the field winding of the synchronous
    motor.


CLS 318/712
TXT With field excitation application:

    Subject matter under subclass 705 wherein the circuit connected to the
    field winding includes switching means to connect a direct current source
    of power to the field winding of the motor.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type includes
    electromagnetic and electronic switches.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    536+,   for general motor field or secondary circuit control by making or
    braking the circuit.

    710+,   for synchronous motor synchronization systems including means to
    remove the direct current excitation of the field circuitry.

    716+,   for synchronous motor field excitation circuits only with means to
    apply or remove the excitation from the circuits.


CLS 318/713
TXT Responsive to slip voltage frequency in d.c. field winding:

    Subject matter under subclass 712 wherein the rotating magnetic field and
    the speed of the rotating motor induce an a.c. voltage in the field winding
    and which includes means responsive to the frequency of the induced voltage
    to control the switching means to apply the direct current power to the
    field winding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    521+,   for motor field or secondary circuit control generally.

    717,    for synchronous motor field excitation application circuits
    controlled by the frequency of the voltage induced in the field winding
    circuits.

    827,    for induction motor secondary circuit control responsive to the
    frequency of the secondary circuit.


CLS 318/714
TXT Responsive to armature current:

    Subject matter under subclass 712 having means sensing the current in the
    alternating current circuit to control the switching means to connect a
    source of direct current to the direct current winding of the motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    521,    for motor field or secondary circuit control generally.

    717,    for synchronous motor field circuits responsive to a motor
    condition.


CLS 318/715
TXT Responsive to rotor speed or rotor driven member:

    Subject matter under subclass 712 wherein the switching means is actuated
    by means responsive to the angular velocity of the rotor or to movement of
    a member driven by the rotor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    461+,   for speed or rate of movement including tachometer-type detectors
    for controlling motor circuits generally.

    717+,   for synchronous motor field circuits, particularly subclass 719 for
    synchronous motor speed responsive field power sources.


CLS 318/716
TXT Field winding circuits:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 which includes a field winding of a
    synchronous motor and an electric circuit connected to the winding.

    (1)     Note.  The circuits of this subclass type include those which
    energize or control the field winding as by the adjustment, change, or
    regulation of the direct current winding of the synchronous motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    521+,   for motor field secondary circuit control generally.

    700+,   for synchronous motor systems including both an armature circuit
    and a field circuit where synchronization of the motor is not claimed.

    710+,   for synchronous motor synchronization systems which include field
    winding excitation removal.

    712,    for synchronous motor synchronization systems which include field
    winding excitation applications.


CLS 318/717
TXT Responsive to a motor condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 716 wherein the field winding circuit is
    controlled by some condition of the motor.

    (1)     Note.  Motor conditions of this subclass type include, for example,
    current in the motor, power factor in the motor, the power taken by the
    motor, and the speed of the motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    453+,   for generally controlling a motor in response to plural conditions
    one of which may be an electrical condition.

    459,    for generally controlling a motor in response to terminal voltage
    or counterelectromotive force of controlled motor.

    471,    for generally controlling a motor in response to thermal conditions
    of the motor control means or in or about the motor.

    474+,   for generally controlling motor in response to armature or
    secondary circuit current in the motor.

    708,    for synchronous motor synchronization systems responsive to a
    thermal electric element in the system to control the armature power
    removal upon failure to synchronize or loss of synchronization.

    713,    for synchronous motor synchronizing systems responsive to slip
    voltage frequency in the d.c. field winding to control excitation of field
    winding.

    714,    for synchronous motor synchronization systems responsive to motor
    armature current to control excitation of motor field winding.

    715,    for synchronous motor synchronization systems responsive to motor
    rotor speed or driven member to control excitation of the motor field
    winding.


CLS 318/718
TXT Induced voltage in field winding:

    Subject matter under subclass 717 wherein a rotating magnetic field from an
    alternating current winding and rotating rotor induce a voltage in the
    field winding includes a switching circuit under the control of the induced
    voltage to control direct current to the field winding.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type includes, for example,
    relay and electronic switching circuits.

    (2)     Note.  Subject matter classified in this subclass may include a
    armature or alternating current winding, but will not include circuits
    connected to the armature winding.  See subclass 700 for synchronous motors
    with circuits connected to the field and the alternating current winding
    when the energized motor is in the running mode but not being started.

    (3)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type includes, for example,
    brushless motor solid-state switching device circuits to control the
    application of direct current to the field winding after the motor is near
    synchronous speed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    459,    for general motor control means responsive to terminal voltage or
    counterelectromotive force of the controlled motor.


CLS 318/719
TXT Speed responsive field power sources:

    Subject matter under subclass 717 wherein the electric circuit connected to
    the field winding includes direct current power sources whose power is
    dependent upon the speed of the synchronous motor rotor.

    (1)     Note.  The direct current sources of this subclass type include,
    for example, d.c. generators and a.c. to d.c. converters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    464,    for motor control generally responsive to an electric generator
    tachometer responsive to the speed of the motor.


CLS 318/720
TXT Armature winding circuits:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 which includes an alternating current
    winding of the motor.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type includes, for example,
    circuits to energize or control the alternating current winding of the
    motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    494+,   for armature circuit control of motor generally.

    704,    for synchronous motor pole changing motor winding circuits.

    706+,   for synchronous motor synchronization systems which remove power
    form motor armature upon failure to synchronize or upon loss of
    synchronization.

    719,    for synchronous motor synchronization systems wherein the motor
    armature winding is different prior to synchronism.

    767+,   for induction motor circuit control circuits.


CLS 318/721
TXT Responsive to rotor shape position or speed:

    Subject matter under subclass 720 wherein the electric circuit includes
    means to regulate the energization of the alternating current winding of
    the motor under the control of the rotor rotation.

    (1)     Note.  The regulating means may be controlled by, for example, the
    speed of the rotor and the position of the rotor shape with respect to the
    location of the rotating alternating electromagnetic field or with respect
    to the position of a direct current electromagnetic field or permanent
    magnet field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    461+,   for speed or rate of movement control of a motor generally.


CLS 318/722
TXT Having electronic power conversion circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 720 wherein the electric circuit includes a
    static type of power converter which generates an electric wave-form which
    can be used by the alternating current winding of the motor.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass types includes, for example,
    cycloconverters, rectifier inverters, and controlled and free-running
    oscillators and vibrators which can generate electricity having a waveform
    useable by the motor.

    (2)     Note.  The power converter of this subclass type can include vacuum
    tubes or solid-state devices which must be electrically powered to operate
    as a generator.

    (3)     Note.  The frequency of the converters of this subclass type can be
    varied or switched between two different frequencies, and generally with a
    change in frequency the voltage of the waveform is changed accordingly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    for space discharge commutated motors.

    768,    for three phase induction motors operated from a single phase
    source.

    800+,   for induction motor primary circuits including controlled power
    conversion during motor starting.

    807+,   for induction motor primary circuits involving frequency control of
    the circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 151
    for conversion systems and subclass 154 for miscellaneous systems with a
    specifically recited load device.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 365+ for miscellaneous gating circuits and subclasses
    100+ for miscellaneous signal shaping, converting, or generating.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 13+ for current
    conversions, subclasses 148+ for phase conversions; and subclasses 157+ for
    frequency conversions.


CLS 318/723
TXT Having variable frequency supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 720 wherein the electric circuit has means to
    vary the rate of cyclic variations of the electrical energy supplied to the
    alternating current winding of the motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110+,   for plural diverse or diversely controlled electric motors having
    plural diverse or diversely controlled sources for armature circuits having
    different frequencies.

    503,    for armature circuit control of motors, generally, which includes
    controlling the frequency or pulsations of current supplied to the armature
    circuit.

    700+,   for synchronous motors having doubly fed circuits where
    synchronization or resynchronization is not involved.

    704+,   for synchronous motor synchronization systems.

    807+,   for induction motor primary circuit frequency control.


CLS 318/724
TXT Having a plurality of windings or winding portions:

    Subject matter under subclass 720 wherein the alternating current winding
    of the motor consists of more than one winding or wherein such winding is
    formed of sections which are connected together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    495+,   for armature motor circuits, generally, having plural diverse or
    diversely controlled armature windings.

    502,    for armature motor circuits, generally, having a variable length or
    tapped armature winding.

    700+,   for synchronous motors with armature and field circuits.

    705+,   for synchronous motor synchronization and resynchronization systems.

    767+,   for induction motor primary circuits which require plural windings
    out of phase to start the motor.


CLS 318/725
TXT REPULSION MOTOR SYSTEMS:

    Subject matter under the class definition where the system of supply and/or
    control is connected to a repulsion motor.

    (1)     Note.  See section I (B,1,j) of the class definition for the
    meaning of "repulsion motor" as used in the titles and definitions of this
    subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder.  Such motors as are
    described in this section but having closed circuits between the brushes
    (rather than merely "short" circuits) are also classifiable in this
    subclass or in the subclasses indented hereunder provided that these motors
    function as repulsion motors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244+,   for alternating current commutating motor systems which do not
    require short-circuited brushes or close-circuited brushes in the operation
    of the motor.

    728,    for repulsion motor start, induction motor run systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 173+ for
    commutated alternating current motors.


CLS 318/726
TXT With added motor winding or convertible to series motor:

    Subject matter under subclass 725 wherein (a) the motor includes more than
    one winding forming the inducing electromagnetic field, (b) the motor
    armature has an added winding in addition to the commutated induced
    winding, or (c) the system has circuitry to place the field or inducing
    winding in series with the commutated winding of the motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244+,   for alternating current series motor circuits.


CLS 318/727
TXT INDUCTION MOTOR SYSTEMS:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the system of supply
    and/or control is for an induction motor.

    (1)     Note.  See section I (B,1,i) of the class definition for the
    definition of "induction motor" as used in the titles and definition of
    this subclass and of the subclasses indented hereunder.

    (2)     Note.  In this subclass and those indented hereunder, where only
    one of the two conductors [see section (B,1,i) of the class definition]
    rotates relative to the motor supporting structure, that conductor and the
    motor structure rotating with it is referred to in the title and
    definitions as the "rotor", and the fixed part of the motor is referred to
    as the "stator".

    (3)     Note.  Nominal recitation of an induction motor (i.e., by name
    only) is an insufficient basis for classification in this subclass or the
    subclasses indented hereunder.  For classification in this subclass or in
    the subclasses indented hereunder, some electrical or structural
    characteristic of induction motors (e.g., "secondary winding", "induced
    current winding") must be recited.

    (4)     Note.  The induction motors included in the systems classifiable in
    this subclass or in the subclasses indented hereunder must be of the type
    which rotate continuously for at least one complete revolution (3600).  For
    motors which rotate continuously for less than one complete revolution
    ("stepping motors") see the note to subclass 696 of this class in the
    search notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for motor systems having two or more induction motors with
    synchronizing interconnections between the induction motor secondaries.

    49+,    for electrically cascaded motors one or more of which are induction
    motors.

    121,    for motor systems having reciprocating motors which operate on the
    principle of the induction motor.

    135,    for motor systems having linear movement motors which operate on
    the principle of the induction motor.

    148,    for induction motors which are supplied by alternating current
    generators, the generators being provided with generator control means.

    696,    for stepping motors.

    700+,   for synchronous motor systems where the motor is provided with
    means for starting and/or accelerating the motor as an induction motor.

    725+,   for repulsion motors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 166+ for the
    structure of induction motors.


CLS 318/728
TXT Repulsion start:

    Subject matter under subclass 727 having a switching means in the secondary
    circuit of the motor arranged so that, when starting, the current induced
    in the secondary member creates an electromagnetic field which reacts with
    the electromagnetic field formed by the primary member to cause the motor
    to accelerate and having means to run the motor as an induction motor after
    starting.

    (1)     Note.  The switching means of this subclass type includes, for
    example, a commutator and brushes.

    (2)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type includes, for example,
    repulsion-induction motors.

    (3)     Note.  The means to run the motor as an induction motor may or may
    not include the switching means.

    (4)     Note.  See section I (B,1,j) of the general class notes for the
    definition of a "repulsion motor".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    725,    for repulsion motor systems generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 173 for
    alternating current commutating motors.


CLS 318/729
TXT Power-factor control:

    Subject matter under subclass 727 wherein the system includes means
    connected to the primary member, the secondary member, or to both to change
    the electrical angle between the voltage and the current in one or both of
    the members.

    (1)     Note.  Means for adapting an induction motor for operation from a
    source of supply having a number of phases different from that for which
    the motor is wound are not included here even though the power factor may
    be affected by such means, particularly when condensers are employed in a
    phase splitting arrangement.  Such art is in subclass 781.

    (2)     Note.  The change of phase may be for starting or running the motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    438,    for miscellaneous motor systems having power-factor control means.

    781+,   for induction motors operating from a single phase source,
    particularly subclasses 794+.  See (1) Note above.

    809,    for voltage phase angle control of the primary motor circuit.

    816,    for split phase motor primary circuit voltage control.


CLS 318/730
TXT With plural separately movable rotors:

    Subject matter under subclass 727 wherein the induction motor includes two
    rotors rotatable with respect to each other.

    (1)     Note.  One rotor may support the primary member and the other rotor
    may support the secondary member, or one primary member may be on a stator
    and the secondary may be supported on one rotor with a second primary
    member on the other rotor, and the system to supply or control may be
    connected to the primary members, the secondary members, or to both.

    (2)     Note.  The rotation of the motor may be reversed in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    731+,   for induction motors of the double fed type.

    737,    for self-cascaded, double fed induction motors.


CLS 318/731
TXT With voltage source connected to motor secondary:

    Subject matter under subclass 727 wherein the secondary member is connected
    to a system which supplies it with a voltage in addition to the voltage
    electromagnetically induced by the primary member.

    (1)     Note.  The systems of this subclass type, for example, control the
    speed or the torque of the energized motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49+,    for cascaded electrical motors which include induction motors
    having other motors connected in series with the secondary circuit thereof.

    730,    for plural rotor induction motor systems.

    737,    for self-cascaded induction motor systems.


CLS 318/732
TXT Electronic device controls current in secondary circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 731 wherein the system includes a three
    terminal electronic device having two terminals connected in circuit with
    the motor secondary and having the third terminal control the passage of
    current between the other two terminals to or from the secondary member of
    the motor.

    (1)     Note.  The controlled electronic device of this subclass type is an
    electric valve which can control the amount of electrons or holes passing
    through the device.  These devices include solid-state switches,
    thyratrons, and controlled vacuum and gas tubes.  Saturable reactors are
    not included.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 365+ for miscellaneous gating circuits.


CLS 318/733
TXT Commutator connected to secondary winding:

    Subject matter under subclass 731 wherein the secondary member is energized
    through a rotary switch at least one contact of which is stationary with
    respect to the secondary member and another contact of which rotates
    relative thereto with another part of the motor.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 738 of this class for the definition of a
    "rotary switch".


CLS 318/734
TXT Slip rings connected to secondary winding:

    Subject matter under subclass 731 wherein the secondary member is energized
    continuously through at least two sliding contacts at least one of which is
    stationary with respect to the secondary winding.

    (1)     Note.  Slip rings are a rotary electrical interconnection device to
    join two conductive members and consists usually of a resilient electrical
    member in contact with a circular electrically conductive member.


CLS 318/735
TXT Rotor shaft coupled to dynamoelectric machine:

    Subject matter under subclass 734 wherein the secondary member and the
    sliding contact stationary with respect thereto are mounted on the
    induction motor shaft and the shaft is mechanically coupled to another
    dynamoelectric device.


CLS 318/736
TXT Slip rings connected to dynamoelectric machine winding:

    Subject matter under subclass 735 wherein the dynamoelectric device has
    windings and the secondary winding of the induction motor is connected
    through the sliding contacts to a winding of the dynamoelectric device.


CLS 318/737
TXT Self-cascaded motor windings:

    Subject matter under subclass 727 wherein the relatively movable members
    consist of plural windings on each separate member, a first winding on one
    member being in inductive relation with a second winding on the other
    member, a third winding on the other member being connected to the second
    winding, and a fourth winding on the one member being connected to the
    third winding.

    (1)     Note.  The winding arrangements of this subclass type are in one
    induction motor rather than in cascaded machines.

    (2)     Note.  The term "connected" includes an electrical or an inductive
    connection between windings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49+,    for cascaded plural induction motors.

    734+,   for doubly fed induction motor systems.

    738,    for induction motor systems with a commutated winding generally.


CLS 318/738
TXT With commutated winding:

    Subject matter under subclass 727 wherein the primary winding, secondary
    winding, or some other winding of the motor is energized through a rotary
    switch at least one contact of which is stationary with respect to the
    energized winding and another contact rotates relative thereto with some
    other part of the motor.

    (1)     Note.  The rotary switch of this subclass type is usually a rotary
    electrical interconnection device which has a ring or disc of individual
    electrically insulated conducting sections around the periphery of the ring
    or disc and has brushes contacting the sections serially by the motion of
    the brushes or ring or disc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    for space-discharge-device commutated motor systems.

    244,    for a.c., current-commutating motor systems.

    439,    for motor commutation control systems generally.

    725,    for repulsion motor supply or control circuits.

    728,    for circuits to supply or control repulsion start-induction run
    motors and repulsion-induction motors.

    733,    for induction motor circuits having a commutator connected directly
    to the secondary winding of the motor which has a voltage source also
    connected to it.

    734,    for induction motor circuits whose secondary winding has slip rings
    directly connected thereto, a voltage supplied to it, and has a separate
    dynamoelectric machine with a commutator forming part of the electrical
    system.

    737,    for self-cascaded double fed induction motor systems using a
    commutated auxiliary winding in the motor to supply a voltage to the
    induction motor secondary.


CLS 318/739
TXT Reversing:

    Subject matter under subclass 727 wherein the system connected to the
    primary winding of the motor includes means to change the direction of the
    rotation of the motor.

    (1)     Note.  See section I (B,4,f) of the class notes for the distinction
    between reversing and braking.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65,     for the reversing of plural motors.

    256+,   for plural diverse motor controls, generally, which include motor
    reversing.

    280+,   for more reversing generally.


CLS 318/740
TXT With diverse motor operation:

    Subject matter under subclass 739 wherein the system includes means to
    perform some additional motor operation.

    (1)     Note.  See section I (B,4,k) of the general class notes as to what
    is included as a motor operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256+,   and the search notes thereto for motor systems having a plurality
    of unlike motor operations.


CLS 318/741
TXT With braking:

    Subject matter under subclass 740 wherein the additional operation is
    braking.

    (1)     Note.  See section I (B,4,c) of the general class notes for the
    definition of "motor braking".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258,    for general motor systems which include reversing, running speed
    control, and braking.

    261+,   and the notes thereto for motor systems having both reversing and
    braking functions.

    362+,   for motor braking systems generally.

    757+,   for braking of induction motors.


CLS 318/742
TXT Electromagnetic brakes:

    Subject matter under subclass 741 wherein the braking action is a result of
    electromagnetic force.

    (1)     Note.  The force of this subclass type may be within the motor or
    external to the motor and physically transmitted to it.

    (2)     Note.  Electromagnetic brakes of this subclass type include, for
    example, eddy current brakes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    362+,   for motors braking, particularly subclass 373 for plugging and
    subclass 375 for dynamic braking.

    759+,   for electromagnetic dynamic braking of induction motors.

    765,    for eddy current braking of induction motors.


CLS 318/743
TXT Generator action:

    Subject matter under subclass 742 wherein the braking is a result of
    electromagnetic energy created within the motor as a result of the rotation
    of the motor.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type includes, for example,
    regenerative braking.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    375+,   for dynamic braking of motors generally.

    759+,   for dynamic braking of induction motors.


CLS 318/744
TXT Plugging:

    Subject matter under subclass 742 wherein the electromagnetic action is a
    result of reversal of current or phase reversal within the primary member
    of the energized motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    373+,   for miscellaneous dynamic braking systems for motors.

    763+,   for systems to plug induction motors.


CLS 318/745
TXT With controlled saturable reactor in primary circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 739 wherein the system includes a controlled
    saturable magnetic device having a control winding and a power winding, the
    power winding being connected between a power source and the primary
    winding of the motor, and the control winding being energizable to vary the
    impedance and the phase of the power winding to reverse the rotation of the
    motor.


CLS 318/746
TXT Two phase motor:

    Subject matter under subclass 745 wherein the motor reversed is a two phase
    motor.


CLS 318/747
TXT Two phase motor:

    Subject matter under subclass 739 wherein the motor reversed is a two phase
    motor.


CLS 318/748
TXT With plural primary windings or winding portions having common connection:

    Subject matter under subclass 747 wherein the primary motor member includes
    two windings each having an end connected to form a common terminal or a
    single winding having a center tap.


CLS 318/749
TXT Operating from a single phase source:

    Subject matter under subclass 739 wherein the energized motor is powered by
    a single phase source.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type includes single phase
    power source which can be converted to a two or three phase power source to
    run the induction motor.


CLS 318/750
TXT Shaded pole motor:

    Subject matter under subclass 749 wherein the energized motor has a main
    magnetic field and the reversing means includes auxiliary motor windings
    which develop a magnetic field out of phase with the main field to change
    the direction of the resultant field to reverse the motor.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type includes selectively
    short-circuited and close-circuited auxiliary windings and auxiliary
    windings which, when receiving properly phased voltages, act in the same
    manner as short-circuited or close-circuited windings.


CLS 318/751
TXT Split phase motor with capacitor interchangeably connected in series with
    either primary winding:

    Subject matter under subclass 749 wherein the primary member includes two
    windings, a capacitor, and means to connect either winding with the
    capacitor so that the motor can selectively rotate in either direction.


CLS 318/752
TXT With controlled electronic device to provide the series connection:

    Subject matter under subclass 751 wherein the means to connect either
    winding with the capacitor includes a three terminal electronic device
    where two of the terminals pass current through the device under the
    control of the third terminal which thereby determines which winding is in
    circuit with the capacitor or permits current to flow through the windings
    and the capacitor.


CLS 318/753
TXT With de-energizable start winding:

    Subject matter under subclass 749 wherein the primary member includes a run
    and a start winding and the reversing means includes means to apply power
    to both of the windings and to cut out the start winding after the motor
    has come up to speed.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass and in the subclasses indented hereunder
    are manual, relay, and solid-state type switching to reverse the phase of
    the start winding with respect to the run winding of the motor so that the
    rotation of the motor rotor can be reversed.

    (2)     Note.  The means to remove the start winding includes manual,
    centrifugal, and electromagnetic means.


CLS 318/754
TXT With separate winding or winding portion energized for each direction of
    rotation:

    Subject matter under subclass 753 wherein the run or the start winding has
    more than one winding or has tapped portions and the reversing means has a
    switch means connecting the one or the other winding or both winding or a
    portion of the windings to reverse the direction of the motor.


CLS 318/755
TXT Automatic current reversal on start winding:

    Subject matter under subclass 753 wherein the reversing means includes a
    self-acting switch which reverses the direction of the current through the
    start winding after the start and the run windings are energized so that
    when the start winding is de-energized and subsequently reenergized the
    motor will rotate in the other direction.

    (1)     Note.  The switch of this subclass type is self-acting in the sense
    that it is actuated as a result of the operation.

    (2)     Note.  The reversal can be as a result of (a) a centrifugal switch,
    (b) a thermal switch, or (c) an electromagnetic relay or some other means.


CLS 318/756
TXT With controlled electronic switch for phase reversal:

    Subject matter under subclass 739 wherein the means to change direction of
    the motor includes an on-off electronic device with a control terminal
    which operates to determine when to permit or stop the transfer of power
    through the device itself from a power source to the motor or through a
    relay actuated by the on-off device.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass for example are three
    phase-reversing circuits with cycloconverters or rectifier inverters.


CLS 318/757
TXT Braking:

    Subject matter under subclass 727 wherein the system includes means or
    devices for applying a torque or force to the motor in a direction opposite
    to the torque or force of the motor for the purpose of slowing down or
    stopping the rotation of the motor.

    (1)     Note.  See section I (B,4,a,c, and f) of the general notes to this
    class for what constitutes braking, reversing, and deceleration of a motor.


CLS 318/758
TXT With diverse operation:

    Subject matter under subclass 757 wherein there is included means to
    perform an additional motor operation.

    (1)     Note.  See section I (B,4,k) of the general class notes as to what
    constitutes plural diverse motor operations.


CLS 318/759
TXT Dynamic braking:

    Subject matter under subclass 757 wherein the means for applying a torque
    or force to the motor includes the primary and secondary members of the
    motor which when rotating relative to each other interact to form a
    generator action which produces a force opposite to the motor rotation to
    slow down or stop the motor.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type includes regenerative
    type braking systems.


CLS 318/760
TXT Direct current primary winding braking circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 759 wherein the means for applying a torque
    or force to the motor includes circuitry to apply direct current to the
    primary member so that the rotation of the motor causes the primary member
    to develop an induced voltage which causes a force in a direction opposite
    to the motor rotation to slow down or stop the motor.


CLS 318/761
TXT Rotating rotor controls braking current in primary winding:

    Subject matter under subclass 760 wherein the rotating part of the motor
    controls the primary circuitry so as to apply direct current to the primary
    member.


CLS 318/762
TXT With A.C. to D.C. conversion circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 760 wherein the circuitry includes an
    electrical device which transforms an alternating current into direct
    current for the primary member of the motor.


CLS 318/763
TXT Reversal of power to primary winding:

    Subject matter under subclass 757 wherein the means for applying a torque
    or force to the motor includes circuitry to change the direction of current
    or the phase through the primary winding of the motor to create an
    electromagnetic force in the secondary winding of the motor in a direction
    opposite to the direction of rotation of the motor to slow down or stop the
    motor.

    (1)     Note.  The method of reversing the motor connections to apply
    braking action is known as "plugging".


CLS 318/764
TXT Three phase power reversal:

    Subject matter under subclass 763 wherein the circuitry to change the
    direction of current or the phase is in a three phase motor circuit.


CLS 318/765
TXT Eddy current braking circuits:

    Subject matter under subclass 757 wherein the motor rotor has an electrical
    conducting member connected thereto and an electrical winding associated
    with the conducting member such that current passing through the winding
    creates a changing electromagnetic field within the conducting member which
    induces eddy currents which create an electromagnetic force in a direction
    which opposes rotation of the motor to slow or stop the motor.


CLS 318/766
TXT Primary and secondary circuits:

    Subject matter under subclass 727 wherein the system to supply and or
    control connected to the motor includes an electric circuit connected to
    both the primary and to the secondary winding of the motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    493,    for miscellaneous motor systems having combined armature or primary
    control and field or secondary control of the motor.

    725,    for repulsion motors having primary and secondary circuits.

    731,    for induction motors which have a primary circuit and a secondary
    circuit with a voltage source in addition to the secondary induced voltage.

    739,    for induction motor reversing circuits with a secondary speed
    control circuit.

    757,    for induction motor braking circuits having a primary and a
    secondary circuit.


CLS 318/767
TXT Primary circuit control:

    Subject matter under subclass 727 wherein the system to supply and or
    control the motor includes a circuit connected to the primary winding of
    the motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    494,    for miscellaneous motor systems for controlling the armature or
    primary circuits of the electric motor.

    766,    for primary and secondary induction motor circuits.


CLS 318/768
TXT Three phase motor operated from single phase source:

    Subject matter under subclass 767 wherein the circuit includes means to
    transform power from a single phase source into three phase power to
    energize a three phase motor.


CLS 318/769
TXT With dynamoelectric converter:

    Subject matter under subclass 768 wherein the means to transform power from
    a single phase source into three phase power includes a rotary
    dynamoelectric machine.


CLS 318/770
TXT Dual voltage motors:

    Subject matter under subclass 767 wherein the motor is adapted to operate
    from either of two possible alternating voltages and the circuit connects
    the primary member of the motor to one of the two alternating voltages.


CLS 318/771
TXT Delta-wye, plural wye, or plural delta connected primary windings:

    Subject matter under subclass 767 wherein the primary member comprises a
    plurality of windings and the circuit connected to the windings permits (a)
    a star-delta connection of the windings, (b) two or more star connections
    of the windings, (c) two or more delta connections of the windings.

    (1)     Note.  A star connection is a polyphase circuit in which all
    circuit paths from each point of power connection go to a common point.

    (2)     Note.  A delta connection is a polyphase circuit in which all
    circuit paths form a triangle with the apex of each path intersection being
    connected to a power source.


CLS 318/772
TXT Plural speed:

    Subject matter under subclass 767 wherein the primary member comprises a
    plurality of windings or winding portions and the circuit includes means
    connected to the windings or winding portions to cause the motor to rotate
    at several nominal discrete speeds.

    (1)     Note.  The speeds here are not limited to the synchronous speeds of
    the motor.

    (2)     Note.  Speed of the motor can be controlled by change of frequency
    of the power supply, change in the number of poles, or a change in the slip
    of the motor.  Only the change in the number of poles is included in this
    group of subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  Generally, the speed selected is determined by changing the
    connections between the winding portions or the number of the winding turns
    energized.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    773+,   for poles changing systems to change the speed of the motor.

    807+,   for frequency control systems to change the speed of the motor.

    821+,   for impedance control of the motor secondary to change the speed of
    the motor.


CLS 318/773
TXT Pole changing:

    Subject matter under subclass 772 wherein the means connected to the
    windings provides a predetermined number of primary magnetic poles at one
    operating speed and a different number of poles for another operating speed.


CLS 318/774
TXT Single phase motor:

    Subject matter under subclass 773 wherein the motor controlled is a single
    phase motor.


CLS 318/775
TXT Separate primary running winding for each pole number, alternately
    energized:

    Subject matter under subclass 774 wherein each predetermined number of
    poles is produced by the energization of a separate primary winding.


CLS 318/776
TXT Entire primary running winding energized for each running speed:

    Subject matter under subclass 774 wherein the means connected to the
    windings or winding portions electrically rearranged the windings or
    winding portions to produce a different number of poles and energize all of
    the windings or winding portions in all running speeds of the motor.


CLS 318/777
TXT Separate primary running winding for each pole number, alternately
    energized:

    Subject matter under subclass 773 wherein each number of poles is produced
    by the energization of a separate primary winding.


CLS 318/778
TXT Starting control:

    Subject matter under subclass 767 wherein the circuit provides means to
    supply electric energy to the motor or to control flow of the current in
    the primary circuit for initiating motor rotation or controlling the motor
    during acceleration from rest.


CLS 318/779
TXT With speed control:

    Subject matter under subclass 778 wherein means are provided for
    controlling motor speed during any mode of motor operation.

    (1)     Note.  Motor operation is defined in the general class notes in
    section I (B, 4).


CLS 318/780
TXT Three phase motor with variable transformer to initially adjust voltage to
    motor windings:

    Subject matter under subclass 778 wherein the circuit includes transformer
    means to enable the application of a voltage value for starting which is
    different from the voltage applied during running of a three phase motor.

    (1)     Note.  Tapped transformer windings or auto-transformers are
    included in this subclass.


CLS 318/781
TXT Operating from a single phase source:

    Subject matter under subclass 778 wherein the means to supply electric
    energy to the motor is a single phase source of electric supply.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are shaded pole motors.


CLS 318/782
TXT With protective features:

    Subject matter under subclass 781 wherein means are provided to protect the
    motor from harmful operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 24+ for
    motor protective condition responsive circuits.


CLS 318/783
TXT Thermal starting and thermal overload protection:

    Subject matter under subclass 782 wherein the means to protect the motor
    includes heat responsive means for controlling the motor starting and for
    protecting against current overload in the motor.


CLS 318/784
TXT Impedance for reducing current during starting operation:

    Subject matter under subclass 781 wherein the means to control the flow of
    current in the primary member or a portion thereof during starting includes
    impedance means.


CLS 318/785
TXT Start winding removed during running operation:

    Subject matter under subclass 781 wherein the primary member consists of a
    main primary winding and a start winding and the circuit includes means for
    de-energizing the start winding by removing part or all of the start
    winding from the circuit which supplies the electrical energy to the start
    and the run winding.

    (1)     Note.  The main primary winding is the run winding of the motor.


CLS 318/786
TXT By electronic switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 785 wherein the means for removing part or
    all of the start winding includes an electronic switch means to de-energize
    the start winding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 365+ for miscellaneous gating or switching systems.


CLS 318/787
TXT With transformer for sensing the run winding current:

    Subject matter under subclass 786 wherein the electronic switch means is
    controlled in response to the output voltage of a sensing transformer which
    provides a measure of the current flowing in the main winding circuit.


CLS 318/788
TXT With variable temperature coefficient resistor in switch control circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 786 wherein the electronic switch means is
    controlled by a circuit which includes a resistor whose resistance is a
    function of its temperature.


CLS 318/789
TXT By electromagnetic switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 785 wherein an electromagnetic switch means
    is provided for de-energizing the start winding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 2+ for electromagnetic switches, per se.


CLS 318/790
TXT With relay coil in series with main winding:

    Subject matter under subclass 789 wherein the switch includes an operating
    coil for the electromagnetic switch in series with the main primary winding.


CLS 318/791
TXT By thermal switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 785 wherein a heat responsive switch means is
    provided for de-energizing the start winding.


CLS 318/792
TXT With variable temperature coefficient impedance element:

    Subject matter under subclass 791 wherein the heat responsive switch means
    includes an element whose impedance is a function of its temperature.


CLS 318/793
TXT By centrifugal switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 785 wherein the start winding is de-energized
    by a switch actuated by centrifugal force developed by the rotating motor.


CLS 318/794
TXT Capacitor run motor with different capacitance at starting:

    Subject matter under subclass 781 wherein the motor is a split phase motor
    and the primary member has two or more primary windings energized in both
    the starting and the running modes of operation, at least one winding
    having in circuit therewith capacitance whose value is different in each
    operating mode.


CLS 318/795
TXT With plural capacitors:

    Subject matter under subclass 794 wherein there are two or more capacitors
    to change the effective capacitance in circuit with at least one winding.


CLS 318/796
TXT Saturable winding in capacitor run motor circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 781 wherein there is a split phase
    capacitance motor having a saturable winding in circuit with the capacitor
    and the primary windings, which has a reactance value in the starting mode
    different from that of its reactance in the running mode.


CLS 318/797
TXT Phase splitting using stator winding mutual inductance or saturable winding:

    Subject matter under subclass 781 wherein the primary member includes two
    or more primary windings and the mutual inductance between the windings or
    a saturable winding is used to cause a phase splitting effect between the
    windings to create the starting torque to rotate the motor.


CLS 318/798
TXT Responsive to motor condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 767 wherein means is provided to sense a
    motor condition and the circuit connected to the primary member of the
    motor is controlled by the sensing means.

    (1)     Note.  The motor condition is some characteristic of the motor
    which is affected by the operation of the motor.  Such characteristics may
    be electrical or electromagnetic and include speed, slip, current, voltage,
    or magnetic flux.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    806,    for motor control means responsive to a condition other than a
    motor condition.


CLS 318/799
TXT Responsive to speed or rotation phase angle:

    Subject matter under subclass 798 wherein the means to sense is responsive
    to the speed or the rotational phase angle of the motor being controlled or
    a device driven by the motor.


CLS 318/800
TXT With controlled power conversion:

    Subject matter under subclass 799 wherein the circuit connected to the
    primary member of the motor includes a power conversion means controlled by
    the speed or rotational phase angle responsive means.


CLS 318/801
TXT Including inverter:

    Subject matter under subclass 800 wherein the power conversion means
    includes one or more inverter circuits.

    (1)     Note.  An inverter circuit changes a direct current source of power
    into an alternating source of power.


CLS 318/802
TXT Responsive to an additional condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 801 wherein the circuit connected to the
    primary member of the motor is responsive to another condition as well as
    being responsive to the speed or the rotational phase angle of the motor.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type includes feedback
    sensing of a motor condition or some characteristic of the motor control
    circuit and may include the sensing of motor current, voltage, or a signal
    indicative of some characteristic of the control circuit.


CLS 318/803
TXT With controlled A.C. to D.C. circuit in inverter supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 802 wherein the one or more inverter circuits
    includes an a.c. to d.c. converter having means to adjust the direct
    current output voltage of the converter.

    (1)     Note.  A converter is an electrical device that transforms one type
    of electricity to another type.


CLS 318/804
TXT With controlled magnetic reactance:

    Subject matter under subclass 799 wherein the circuit connected to the
    primary member of the motor includes a controlled magnetic reactance.

    (1)     Note.  The controlled reactance of this subclass type includes
    magnetic amplifiers, saturable reactors, and transformers having a winding
    in circuit with the primary winding of the motor wherein the winding
    reactance is changed as a result of the mutual inductance between this
    winding and another winding of the transformer.


CLS 318/805
TXT Responsive to motor voltage:

    Subject matter under subclass 798 wherein the motor condition sensed is the
    motor voltage.


CLS 318/806
TXT Condition responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 767 wherein there is means to sense a
    condition other than a motor condition and the circuit connected to the
    primary member of the motor is controlled by the means to sense the
    condition.

    (1)     Note.   A condition is some quantity which is capable of being
    sensed including, for example, temperature, pressure, voltage delivered to
    the circuit, or some manifestation of the motor environment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    798,    for motor control means responsive to some condition of the motor.


CLS 318/807
TXT Frequency control:

    Subject matter under subclass 767 wherein the circuit connected to the
    primary member of the motor includes means to regulate the frequency of the
    current or voltage supplied to the primary member.

    (1)     Note.  Regulation used here means to adjust or fix the rate of the
    cyclic current or voltage delivered to the primary winding of the motor,
    and includes control of the frequency to deliver a constant frequency or a
    variable frequency to the primary winding of the motor.


CLS 318/808
TXT With voltage magnitude control:

    Subject matter under subclass 807 wherein means are also provided to
    regulate the magnitude of the voltage applied to the primary member of the
    motor.

    (1)     Note.  The means to regulate this subclass type consists of means
    to adjust or fix the value of the voltage so that the voltage can be
    constant or selectively varied.


CLS 318/809
TXT With voltage phase angle control:

    Subject matter under subclass 807 wherein the voltage supplied to the
    primary member is a repetitious sinusoidal waveform and the means to
    regulate the frequency of the voltage supplied to the primary member
    includes means to regulate the phase angle of the waveform at which the
    remainder of the waveform of each cycle is applied to the primary member.

    (1)     Note.  Phase angle is the angle in electrical degrees of the
    waveform between the beginning of the waveform at 00 and the end of the
    waveform at 3600 at which the waveform is applied to the motor winding.

    (2)     Note.  Regulation includes the control of the phase angle at a
    constant angle or a variable angle.


CLS 318/810
TXT With voltage pulse time control:

    Subject matter under subclass 807 wherein the voltage waveforms applied to
    the primary member of the motor is a pulse waveform having alternating
    positive and negative polarity portions, and the means to regulate the
    frequency of the voltage includes means to regulate the time at which the
    pulses are started and ended.

    (1)     Note.  Regulation includes the starting and ending of the pulses at
    a constant time or a variable time.


CLS 318/811
TXT Pulse width modulation or chopping:

    Subject matter under subclass 810 wherein each positive and negative
    polarity portion of the applied waveforms comprises a plurality of pulses
    of variable width.


CLS 318/812
TXT Voltage control:

    Subject matter under subclass 767 wherein the circuit connected to the
    primary member of the motor includes means for regulating the voltage
    applied to the circuit.

    (1)     Note.  Regulation includes a constant or a selectively variable
    voltage control.


CLS 318/813
TXT With transformer:

    Subject matter under subclass 812 wherein the means for regulating the
    voltage includes a transformer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for transformers, per se.


CLS 318/814
TXT With impedance control:

    Subject matter under subclass 812 wherein the means for regulating the
    voltage includes a variable impedance.


CLS 318/815
TXT Saturable reactor:

    Subject matter under subclass 814 wherein the variable impedance is a
    saturable reactor.


CLS 318/816
TXT Single phase, split phase motors:

    Subject matter under subclass 812 wherein the motor is operated from a
    single phase source as a split phase motor.


CLS 318/817
TXT With capacitor:

    Subject matter under subclass 816 wherein a capacitor is used to effect
    phase splitting in the motor.


CLS 318/818
TXT Secondary circuit control:

    Subject matter under subclass 727 wherein the system to supply and or
    control the motor includes a circuit connected to the secondary member of
    the motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for plural induction motor systems having synchronizing
    interconnections between motor secondaries.

    49,     for an induction motor having an electric motor connected to the
    secondary circuit (i.e., connected in tandem) of the induction motor.

    521+,   and the subclasses specified in the search notes thereto for
    miscellaneous motor systems having secondary circuit control of the motor.

    729,    for power factor control in the primary or secondary circuit of an
    induction motor.

    731+,   for primary and secondary induction  motor circuits having a
    voltage source connected to the motor secondary.

    766,    for primary and secondary induction motor circuits.


CLS 318/819
TXT Open secondary member or portion thereof with means to open or close the
    circuit thereto:

    Subject matter under subclass 818 wherein the circuit connected to the
    secondary member includes switch means to turn off or on the current in the
    secondary member or a portion thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The secondary member portion may consist of one winding or a
    plurality of windings and the switch means may control the current through
    all of the windings or one or more windings.

    (2)     Note.  The switch means includes controlled and uncontrolled
    electronic devices, mechanical and automatic switches which act only to
    open or close the secondary motor winding or a part of the secondary motor
    winding.  The electronic devices include thyratrons, silicon-controlled
    rectifiers, silicon-controlled switches, and four-layered diodes, but
    amplifier-type tube or solid-state devices which can act as a switch and
    additionally function as an amplifier are not included.


CLS 318/820
TXT Closed secondary member or member portion with means to change electrical
    characteristics thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 818 wherein the secondary member or a portion
    thereof is always in a closed electrical path with the circuit and the
    circuit includes means connectable to the member or member portion to
    change the electrical characteristics thereof.


CLS 318/821
TXT Impedance control of secondary circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 818 wherein the circuit includes an
    electrical impedance element of the resistive, inductive, or the capacitive
    type to control the current in the secondary member of the motor.

    (1)     Note.  Here the voltage induced in the secondary member by the
    primary member creates a current which is controlled by an impedance
    element forming part of the circuit.

    (2)     Note.  Means to add, remove, or vary the secondary impedance
    element is included in this group of subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    533,    and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto for miscellaneous
    motor systems having impedance devices in the field or secondary circuit of
    the motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    220-354 for impedance voltage magnitude controlled systems.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for inductors, per se.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, appropriate subclasses for resistors, per se.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 271 for
    capacitors, per se.


CLS 318/822
TXT Responsive to motor condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 821 wherein the impedance element of the
    circuit is controlled by a motor characteristic.

    (1)     Note.  The motor characteristics include secondary motor voltage,
    the secondary motor current, the primary motor current, and the motor rotor
    speed.

    (2)     Note.  The term "controlled" includes the addition, removal, the
    shorting out, or somehow changing the value of the impedance element or
    elements of the circuit.


CLS 318/823
TXT Rotor speed or position responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 822 wherein the motor characteristics are the
    motor rotor speed or the position of the rotor with respect to the inducing
    magnetic field of the motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 120+
    for speed responsive switching systems.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, for speed
    controlled impedance systems.


CLS 318/824
TXT Centrifugal force of rotor controls secondary circuit impedance:

    Subject matter under subclass 823 wherein a mass movable radially of the
    motor rotor in response to a force caused by the speed rotation of the
    rotor controls the impedance element of the circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 120
    for centrifugal force responsive switching systems.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    293-298 for output responsive impedance systems.


CLS 318/825
TXT Induction motor current:

    Subject matter under subclass 822 wherein the motor characteristic is the
    current flowing in a member of the motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 131
    for current controlled switching systems.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    293-298 for current or current and voltage controlled impedance systems.


CLS 318/826
TXT Primary motor current:

    Subject matter under subclass 825 wherein the current is flowing in a
    primary member of the motor.

    (1)     Note.  In the subject matter of this subclass type current may flow
    in the primary and the secondary members of the motor.


CLS 318/827
TXT Frequency of secondary current:

    Subject matter under subclass 822 wherein the motor characteristic is the
    frequency of the voltage induced in the secondary member or the relative
    frequencies of the current in the primary and the secondary members of the
    motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 129
    for frequency controlled switching systems.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    293-298 for electrical condition controlled impedance systems.


CLS 318/828
TXT Secondary voltage:

    Subject matter under subclass 822 wherein the motor characteristic is the
    voltage of the secondary circuit of the motor or the voltage across an
    impedance element of the motor secondary circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 130
    for voltage controlled switching systems.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    293-298 for voltage or voltage and current controlled impedance systems.


CLS 318/829
TXT By manual operation:

    Subject matter under subclass 821 wherein the impedance element of the
    circuit is controlled totally by manual means requiring only human force.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 821 for relay operated switching circuits to
    control the adding, removal, or the changing of impedance elements in the
    secondary circuit of the motor.

    (2)     Note.  The term "control" as used herein means to add, remove, or
    somehow change the impedance of a resistive, inductive, or capacitive
    electrical element.


CLS 318/830
TXT With relatively movable cooperating motor parts to control energized motor:

    Subject matter under subclass 727 wherein the motor includes plural
    cooperating members which are movable relative to each other physically and
    means to move the members with respect to each other, this relative
    movement is in addition to motion caused by the electromagnetic interaction
    between the rotor and the stator of the motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    for motors with diverse motions.

    491,    and the notes thereto for miscellaneous motor control systems with
    both circuit and structure control of the motor.

    538+,   for miscellaneous motor structure adjustment or control systems
    wherein the motor structure is controlled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 191 for field or
    excitation windings or core structure having adjustable magnetic structure;
    and subclass 209 for armature or primary windings or core structure with
    adjustable magnetic structure.


CLS 318/831
TXT Axially movable cooperating parts:

    Subject matter under subclass 830 wherein one of the two relatively movable
    parts is movable in the direction of an axis.

    (1)     Note.  "Axial" as used herein means situated in the direction of or
    along an axis.

    (2)     Note.  Included are movable rotary dual motor rotors cooperating
    with a movable stator and rotary dual, in-line rotors cooperating with a
    fixed stator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    for motors with diverse motions including axial movement of the
    rotor by the magnetic forces of the motor in addition to the rotary or
    angular movement of the rotor even though the reverse axial movement is
    effected by gravity only when the motor energization is reduced.


CLS 318/832
TXT Dual stators, one or both angularly movable:
    Subject matter under subclass 830 wherein the motor includes a double
    stator and at least one stator is angularly movable with respect to the
    other stator.


CLS 320/
TTL ELECTRICITY:  BATTERY OR CAPACITOR CHARGING OR DISCHARGING

CLS 320/
TXT

    I.      CLASS DEFINITION

    A.      Introductory note

            Where a term, phrase, or derivation thereof appears in italics in
    this Class definition, that term or phrase is defined in Section II,
    DEFINITIONS OF TERMS USED, below. Use of such italics may be limited to
    once per sentence or paragraph for better readability.

    B.      General statement of Class subject matter

            This class provides for a method or apparatus for controlled or
    regulated charging, discharging, or combined charging and discharging of
    one or more voltaic cells, batteries, or capacitors.

    C.      Scope of Class

            This is the residual class for subject matter relating to:

    (A)     a method or apparatus for charging or electrically rejuvenating
    (e.g., depolarizing, etc.) a voltaic cell, battery, or electrical
    capacitor, wherein said charging or rejuvenating is accomplished by
    controlled addition of electrical energy into the cell, battery, or
    capacitor;

    (B)     a method or apparatus for discharging a voltaic cell, battery, or
    electrical capacitor, wherein discharging is accomplished by controlled
    release of electrical energy from the cell, battery, or capacitor into a
    nominal electrical load, and further wherein the voltaic cell, battery,
    capacitor, or combination thereof comprises the only source of supply for
    the load;

    (C)     a method or apparatus for combined charging and discharging,
    whether or not the charging and discharging occur simultaneously;

    (D)     a method or apparatus for charging, discharging, or combined
    charging and discharging, in combination with subject matter auxiliary or
    appurtenant thereto for measuring, testing, signalling or indicating a
    charge or related condition of a cell, battery, capacitor, or operation of
    a related charge or discharge circuit with respect to a charging or
    discharging function or condition; or

    (E)     a cell, battery, or capacitor structurally combined with a
    generator or electrical converter, whether or not electrical
    interconnection therebetween is recited.

    (1)     Note. The term "capacitor" has replaced the archaic term
    "condenser" used in previous definition(s) of this class. However, these
    terms are to be interpreted herein as being interchangeable and therefor
    synonymous in scope and breadth, irrespective of the modern accepted
    interpretation of the term "condenser." See Section II, DEFINITIONS OF
    TERMS USED, below.

    (2)     Note. This class provides for charging or discharging of a plural
    battery or capacitor arrangement (e.g., battery pack, etc.), with or
    without a controlled generator. However, charging or discharging of a
    single battery or capacitor with a controlled generator is classified
    elsewhere. See Section III, RELATED SEARCH IN OTHER CLASSES, below.

    (3)     Note. This class provides for a charging circuit where a cell,
    battery, or capacitor forms the only intended useful load for the circuit.
    Where a load diverse from a cell, battery, or capacitor to be charged is
    recited, or where there is recited an additional circuit having utility
    outside of this class, original classification is outside of this class
    unless specifically provided for herein.

    (4)     Note. A nominal electrical load for receiving discharge energy may
    be either a single load or a plural load that functions or appears as a
    single load to a discharge circuit. The load must be recited only by its
    electrical characteristics (e.g., a D.C. load, a capacitive load, etc.),
    and may also be recited as a nominal variable load. Unless specifically
    provided for herein, original classification is outside of this class where:

    (a)     the recited load is identified by its nonelectrical characteristics
    or its particular-art purpose (e.g., electric motor, welding, electrolysis,
    etc.);

    (b)     plural loads function or appear to a discharge circuit as other
    than a single or merely variable electrical load; or

    (c)     a source, other than a voltaic cell, battery, capacitor, or
    combination thereof, is recited for supplying the load, unless specifically
    provided for herein (See (8) Note, below).

    (5)     Note. If an electrical load is disclosed as a battery or a
    capacitor, then claimed recitation of the load as a "battery," "capacitor,"
    etc., is sufficient basis for classification herein. If, however, the load
    is recited as an "electric device," an "electric load," a "translation
    device," etc., classification is based upon another significant limitation
    and not on the basis of the disclosure of the particular load device,
    unless there is no appropriate place for the classification elsewhere.

    (6)     Note. If a supply source for a single load is disclosed as a
    battery or capacitor and the load is not specified or limited to a
    particular art, claimed recitation of the source as a "battery" or
    "capacitor" is sufficient basis for classification herein. However,
    classification of the same is elsewhere if the claimed recitation of the
    load is in general terminology, e.g., "a source," "a source of emf," "a
    source of voltage or current," etc., where proper classification is based
    upon a limitation other than the claimed source.

    (7)     Note. A method or apparatus for manufacturing a battery, capacitor,
    or part thereof is classified elsewhere (see Section III, below), even if
    combined with charging or discharging. However, an apparatus for charging
    or discharging, per se, is classified in this class even if an intended use
    is recited for charging or discharging, per se, during, or as a
    subcombination of, a manufacturing process. This should be contrasted with
    a method for charging or discharging which is limited to being incident to
    manufacture, which is excluded from this class and controls classification
    when subject matter for this class is also claimed.

    (8)     Note. Where there is a combination of charging and discharging
    recited:

    (a)     there may be one or more sources of charge energy, which may
    include one or more cells, batteries, or capacitors;

    (b)     a cell, battery, or capacitor to be charged may be the cell,
    battery, or capacitor to be discharged;

    (c)     a source of charge energy other than a cell, battery or capacitor
    (hereinafter nonbattery source) may supply a load or discharge circuit
    simultaneously with a cell, battery, or capacitor to be discharged, except
    where:

            (i)     the cell, battery or capacitor to be discharged can supply
    the load or discharge circuit only when the nonbattery source is connected
    to supply the load or discharge circuit;

            (ii)    the nonbattery source can energize the load or discharge
    circuit without the cell, battery, or capacitor to be discharged.

    (9)     Note. Where no subclass specifically provides for a method
    appropriate for this class, classification is proper in a subclass that
    provides for a device to practice the method.



    II.     DEFINITIONS OF TERMS USED

    BATTERY

    A unit source of D.C. voltage consisting of a plurality of voltaic cells
    electrically connected in series, parallel, or both, to increase available
    voltage or power from a single cell. "Plural batteries" include a
    combination or association of two or more structurally dependent, or
    independent, battery units.

    CAPACITOR

    An electrical energy storage device consisting essentially of two
    electrically conductive surfaces (e.g., plates, electrodes, etc.) separated
    by an insulator or dielectric (e.g., air, paper, mica glass, plastic, oil,
    etc.), whereby an electric charge, in the form of a direct voltage between
    said conductive surfaces, can be either stored on said surfaces or released
    therefrom to a load. "Plural capacitors" include a combination or
    association of two or more structurally dependent, or independent,
    capacitor units.

    CELL

    Short for, or used interchangeably with, a voltaic cell only in this class.

    CHARGE: BATTERY OR CELL

    The act of adding electrical energy (e.g., supplying current, etc.) into a
    battery or cell from a diverse source of electrical energy to increase the
    amount of useful and available chemical energy stored in the battery or
    cell; or, the amount of chemical energy stored in a battery or cell that is
    available for useful conversion to electrical energy for supplying an
    electric load.

    CHARGE: CAPACITOR

    The act of applying an electric potential across the electrodes or plates
    of a capacitor from a diverse source of electrical energy to increase the
    amount of useful and available electrical energy stored in the capacitor,
    or the amount of energy stored in a capacitor that is available for release
    to usefully supply electrical energy to an electric load.

    CHARGING CIRCUIT

    The electric circuit or path that extends from a charging source to a
    battery, cell, or capacitor to be charged.

    CHARGING SOURCE

    The immediate source from which electric energy is derived for addition
    into a battery, cell, or capacitor, where the polarity of the source is
    such as to cause current to flow in opposition to the normal polarity of
    the battery, cell, or capacitor, if the latter is polarized, and may be,
    for example:

            (1)     a mere charging circuit;

            (2)     means for collecting atmospheric, parasitic, or other stray
    electric charge or currents;

            (3)     means for converting electrical energy having one or more
    particular electrical characteristics into electrical energy having a
    different characteristic (e.g., electrical converters such as a combination
    alternating current source and rectifier, where the rectifier is considered
    to be the "immediate source";


            (4)     means for converting energy, other than electrical, into
    electric energy (e.g., electrical generator, fuel cell, etc.).

    CHARGING SOURCE CONTROL

    Any control that effects the flow of energy from a charging source,
    including (a) direct control of the charging source itself or (b) the flow
    or delivery of energy from the charging source to a load.

    CIRCUIT MAKING AND/OR BREAKING

    Fully establishing and/or fully interrupting the conductivity of an
    electrical path between two or more points in an electrical circuit by
    physical movement of electrically conductive elements into and out of
    physical contact with each other.

    CONDENSER

    An obsolete or out-of-favor term for "capacitor." Although still used in
    the automotive field to refer to a capacitor used across ignition points to
    prevent arcing, it is interpreted as being synonymous with "capacitor" in
    this class, with no implied limitation to its use.

    DEPOLARIZATION

    The process of preserving or restoring a primary cell by partially or
    completely removing its increased resistance (i.e., polarization) as the
    potential of an electrode changes during electrolysis.

    DISCHARGE

    The act of removing available electrical energy from storage in a battery,
    cell, or capacitor via flow of electric current from the battery or
    capacitor to a load.

    DISCHARGE CIRCUIT

    An electrical device or path which allows flow of electrical current from a
    battery or capacitor to an electrical load, especially that path or device
    that controls or regulates said flow.

    FUEL CELL

    An electrochemical generator that uses the reaction of oxygen and a
    hydrocarbon fuel, or derivative thereof (e.g., hydrogen, etc.), to convert
    chemical energy into electricity. It is distinguishable from a voltaic cell
    because of its use of a hydrocarbon for fuel, and because it can operate
    continuously without a voltaic cell's inherent chemical degradation of
    electrodes, as long as fuel and oxygen are available or supplied.

    LOAD, LOAD DEVICE, OR LOAD CIRCUIT

    Any electrical device for usefully converting or consuming electrical
    energy other than those devices which are merely accessory, auxiliary, or
    appurtenant to the source and/or the circuit which supplies electric
    energy. [An accessory or auxiliary device is a device used to affect
    operation, control, or care of a source and/or supply circuit and may, for
    example, comprise a device employed: (i) to test, indicate, or measure a
    condition of or in a source or supply circuit, or (ii) to regulate or
    control the flow of electric energy from or through the source or supply
    circuit.]

    PRIMARY CELL OR BATTERY

    A cell or battery that cannot have its available charge usefully increased
    (i.e., recharged like a secondary cell) by an electric current passing
    through it after having been discharged from a usefully charged condition
    (i.e., the chemical reaction is not reversible). (See the definition of
    Depolarization, above).

    REGULATION

    Control of one or more characteristics or conditions whereby said
    characteristics or conditions can be maintained at some predetermined
    value, or can be varied over a plurality of values.

    SECONDARY CELL OR BATTERY

    A cell or battery that may have its available charge usefully increased
    (i.e., recharged) by an electric current passing through it after having
    been discharged from a usefully charged condition (i.e., the chemical
    reaction is reversible).

    VOLTAIC CELL

    An elementary unit source of electrical energy stored as chemical energy,
    comprising two separated dissimilar electrodes bridged by an electrolyte,
    wherein said unit source produces a potential difference across said
    electrodes in a chemical reaction involving said electrodes and electrolyte
    that converts chemical energy into electrical energy. [Synonymous with
    cell, but distinguished from a fuel cell, in which the electrodes are not
    required to be chemically involved in the primary reaction.]

    III.    RELATED SEARCH IN OTHER CLASSES

    Since substantially any electrical system or any special-art combination in
    which an electrical system is a part may charge or discharge a battery or
    capacitor, whereby said charging or discharging is inherent in the
    operation thereof, the following SEARCH CLASS notes are not represented as
    being exhaustive of such subject matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    136,    Batteries: Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, for a structure for
    converting heat or light directly into electrical energy.

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, for a process involving the
    use of electrolysis or wave energy, a product solely disclosed as made by
    such process, apparatus for performing such process, or an electrolyte
    composition for use in such process.

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants, for a combination of a prime mover
    (other than a dynamoelectric machine) and a dynamoelectric machine which
    supplies energy to or absorbs energy from a battery, particularly
    subclasses 16 and 50 and the subclasses indicating that the dynamoelectric
    machine is for starting purposes.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 9.1+
    for an electrical system for a vehicle, such as railway car or automobile,
    which typically include a storage battery therein; subclass 46 for an
    electrical system having plural sources, one of which is a battery
    connected to the system through an intervening converter; subclasses 48+
    for an electrical system in which a storage battery floats across another
    source of current; subclasses 66+ in which a storage battery serves as an
    emergency or substitute source of current; subclass 108 for an electrical
    system for producing a pulse by use of a capacitor; and subclasses 109+ for
    an electrical system that includes a capacitor for a purpose such as a
    voltage dropping impedance or a voltage doubler.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, for an electric lamp
    or discharge device as a load into which a battery or condenser discharges,
    particularly subclasses 33 and 86 through 87 for a battery combination, and
    appropriate subclasses for a capacitor combination.

    318,    Electricity: Motive Power Systems, subclass 139 for an electric
    motor system wherein the motor is supplied only by a primary or secondary
    battery and subclasses 440+ for an electric motor system wherein the motor
    is supplied by plural sources, one of which might be a primary or secondary
    battery.

    322,    Electricity: Single Generator Systems, for a generator system that
    supplies a single load circuit.

    323,    Electricity: Power Supply or Regulation Systems, for
    voltage-magnitude control system.

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclasses 425+ for testing an
    electrolytic device such as a battery.

    330,    Amplifiers, appropriate subclasses for amplifier circuitry, per se.

    331,    Oscillators, particularly subclasses 111+, 129+, and 143+ for a
    relaxation oscillator that utilizes an RC time-constant network to
    determine the period of a pulse or oscillation.

    332,    Modulators, appropriate subclass, for a modulator circuit, per se.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, particularly subclasses 175+
    for a wave filter for passing electrical energy of one frequency or range
    of frequencies, while attenuating electrical energy of another frequency or
    range of frequencies.

    361,    Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 271+ for an
    electrostatic capacitor and subclasses 502+ for an electrolytic capacitor.

    362,    Illumination, particularly subclasses 61+ for battery-supplied
    vehicle lighting and subclasses 157+ for a portable, self-contained,
    battery-supplied illuminating device.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 13+ (and subclasses
    mentioned in the notes thereto) for a rectifying system.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclass 103 for an X-ray
    electrical system with capacitor discharge.

    429,    Chemistry: Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclass 18 for a buoy having a
    battery-supplied illuminating means.

    607,    Surgery: Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, for medical
    application of electric energy to the body, particularly subclass 149 for
    body wear that includes electrodes of dissimilar materials which form a
    battery with body perspiration as the electrolyte.


CLS 320/100
TXT PRIMARY CELL DEPOLARIZATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition for lowering the resistance of a
    primary cell by addition of electrical energy sufficient to remove a
    polarized coating from an electrode of the cell or battery.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    429,    Chemistry: Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product and
    Process, subclass 52 for activation of an inactive cell and subclasses 96
    through 100 for cell support for a removable cell.


CLS 320/101
TXT WIND, SOLAR, THERMAL, OR FUEL-CELL SOURCE:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a charging source
    having means for deriving electrical energy from weather-related air flow,
    light energy, heat, or from an electrochemical generator in which chemical
    energy from the reaction of air or oxygen and a fuel (e.g, hydrocarbons,
    etc.) is converted directly into electricity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    for plural or alternate sources for charging.

    139,    for pulse-controlled charging.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    136,    Batteries: Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclasses 291+ for
    applications of photoelectric.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 906 for
    solar cell systems.


CLS 320/102
TXT With shuntless charging source control:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 including means for regulating only the
    flow of charging current in series between the charging source and the load
    (i.e., the means for regulating is absent any means to bypass charging
    current around the load).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128,    for battery charging and discharging.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    136,    Batteries: Thermoelectric and Photoelectric subclasses 291+ for
    applications of photoelectric batteries.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 46,
    64, and 66 for batteries being used as emergency sources.

    323,    Electricity: Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 906 for
    solar cell systems.


CLS 320/103
TXT ONE CELL OR BATTERY CHARGES ANOTHER:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the charging source for
    charging a first cell or battery includes a second cell or battery.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for the structure of the battery charger.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 46,
    64, and 66 for batteries being used as substitute sources.


CLS 320/104
TXT Vehicle battery charging:

    Subject matter under subclass 103 wherein significance is attributed to the
    type of battery to be charged, wherein said battery is intended for use
    with a conveying device (e.g., automobile, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Commonly, the battery being charged is six volts or a
    multiple thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    for batteries connected in series.

    139+,   for pulse control during battery charging.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 149+
    for miscellaneous systems which include power packs.


CLS 320/105
TXT Employing "jumper" cable:

    Subject matter under subclass 104 wherein use is made of a charging circuit
    between the first battery and the second battery that includes a pair of
    conductors, each of which includes an end connector (e.g., alligator clip,
    etc.) adapted to be removably connected to a vehicle battery terminal to
    supply charging current thereto, the pair of conductors being commonly
    referred to as "jumper cables."

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for the structure of the battery charger.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    191,    Electricity: Transmission to Vehicles, subclass 12.4 for flexible
    extensions with a connector plug or receptacle.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses
    10.1+ for battery protection in vehicle mounted systems..

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 636 for a condition responsive
    indicating system for a battery.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclass 504 for a connector with a flaccid
    conductor and with an additional connector spaced there along adapted to
    connect a battery and subclass 624 for plural contacts at the end of a
    cable having sheath enclosing insulated conductors.


CLS 320/106
TXT MEANS TO IDENTIFY CELL OR BATTERY TYPE:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a sensor for
    determining or recognizing the general attributes of a cell or battery to
    be charged (e.g., rechargeable vs. nonrechargeable, chemical makeup, charge
    capacity, etc.).

    (1)     Note. This subclass provides for determining battery size by means
    other than merely ascertaining whether the battery physically fits a
    charging structure aperture shape or cell holder size.

    (2)     Note.  The identifying means of this subclass enables a charging
    system to proceed with charging or for preventing such an attempt where,
    for example, the charging system determines that the cell or battery is not
    of a compatible type to be charged by the charging system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for the structure of a battery charger which will accept different
    size batteries merely by how the battery physically fits the charger
    structure.

    125,    for diverse charging or discharging rates for plural batteries.

    138,    for plural or alternate sources.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product and
    Process, subclass 1 for a battery with a nonbattery electrical component
    electrically connected within the cell casing other than testing or
    indicating components, subclass 9 for diverse cells in a support means and
    subclass 99 for support for plural cells.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 89 for portable transmitter and
    receiver.


CLS 320/107
TXT CELL OR BATTERY CHARGER STRUCTURE:

    Subject matter under the class definition including battery charger
    mechanical arrangement or design.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product and
    Process, subclass 52 for activation of an inactive cell and subclasses 99
    through 100 for support for a plurality of cells and the support itself.


CLS 320/108
TXT Charger inductively coupled to cell or battery:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein the charging circuit includes a
    transformer to transfer electrical energy between the charging source and
    the load to be charged (e.g., with the primary winding of the transformer
    connected to the charging source and the secondary winding of the
    transformer connected to the battery).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139,    for pulse control battery charging.

    109,    for charging station for electric vehicles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, Dig. 2 for separable inductor devices.


CLS 320/109
TXT Charging station for electrically powered vehicle:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 including charging structure constructed
    and arranged to charge a battery of the type constructed and intended to
    provide electrical energy for a vehicle having an electrodynamic prime
    mover, whether or not the battery is mounted in the vehicle or removed
    therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 34 for vehicle battery replacer.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 65.1 for electric motor vehicles.

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, subclass 2+ for systems of
    distributions.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses
    10.1+ for vehicle mounted systems in an automobile.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 281+ for charging or
    discharging means including elevating devices.


CLS 320/110
TXT For diverse sizes of cells, batteries, or battery packs:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 including means structurally adapted to
    accommodate -- or structurally adaptable or rearrangeable to accommodate --
    for charging purposes, cells, batteries, or assemblages of plural batteries
    (i.e., battery packs) having different physical dimensions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    for a battery characteristic determined for other than aperture
    shape or cell holder size of the battery charger, or for other battery-type
    determinations other than physical size.

    113,    for a battery pack with a charger stand or base.

    125,    for diverse charging or discharging rates for plural batteries or
    cells, without charger structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    429,    Chemistry: Electrical current Producing Apparatus, Product and
    Process, subclasses 99 through 100 for support for a plurality of cells and
    the support itself.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 89 through 90 for portable
    transmitter and receiver and the housing for the transmitter and receiver,
    respectively.


CLS 320/111
TXT Having plug for A-C receptacle:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein the charger structure includes a
    male connector constructed and arranged to connect to a conventional
    household alternating-current outlet jack.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electrical Heating, subclass 225 for a tool or instrument with
    heated clamp means.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 183 for a container for a rechargeable
    electrical source with external connections.


CLS 320/112
TXT For battery pack:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein the charger structure is
    constructed and arranged to charge or discharge an assemblage of plural
    batteries.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclass 183 for a container for a rechargeable
    electrical source with external connections.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product and
    Process, subclasses 96+ for cell support for a removable cell.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 89 for portable transmitters and
    receivers and subclass 90 for housings therefor.


CLS 320/113
TXT With charger stand or base adapted to hold battery pack:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 further including a supporting structure
    for the charger structure, said supporting structure having further means
    for supporting the battery pack during charging.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclass 183 for a container for a rechargeable
    electrical source with external connections.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product and
    Process, subclasses 96+ for cell support for a removable cell.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 89 for portable transmitters and
    receivers and subclass 90 for housings therefor.


CLS 320/114
TXT For handheld device:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 including means constructed and arranged
    to charge a battery or cell in a handheld device.

    (1)     Note.  The means constructed to charge a battery may be integral
    with the handheld device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, Dig. 1 for rechargeable
    devices.

    30,     Cutlery, Dig. 1 for rechargeable cutting devices.

    310,    Electric Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 50 for a
    dynamoelectric portable or hand tool.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 183 for a container (e.g., flashlight, etc.)
    for a rechargeable electrical source with external connections.


CLS 320/115
TXT With charger stand or base:

    Subject matter under subclass 114 further including a supporting structure
    for the charger structure, said supporting structure having further means
    for supporting the battery pack during charging.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, Dig. 1 for rechargeable
    devices.

    30,     Cutlery, Dig. 1 for rechargeable cutting devices.

    310,    Electric Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 50 for a
    dynamoelectric portable or hand tool.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 183 for a container (e.g., flashlight, etc.)
    for a rechargeable electrical source with external connections.


CLS 320/116
TXT SERIALLY CONNECTED BATTERIES OR CELLS:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein plural individual cells
    or batteries are recited as being electrically attached to each other in
    succession or end-to-end relationship such that a single path is provided
    for flow of current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124,    for sequential charging or sequential discharging of batteries or
    cells.


CLS 320/117
TXT Switchable to parallel connection:

    Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein the plural individual batteries
    or cells are recited as being switchable between a series-connected
    relationship and a parallel-connected relationship.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 10.1
    for vehicle mounted systems for an automobile, subclass 48 for storage
    battery or accumulator-type source, subclass 66 for a storage battery or
    accumulator being used as a substitute or emergency source, and subclass 71
    for series-parallel connections of sources.


CLS 320/118
TXT With discharge of cells or batteries:

    Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein electrical energy is released
    from the series-connected cells or batteries.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124,    for sequential charging or sequential discharging of batteries.

    127,    for battery discharging or battery discharging and charging.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 66 for
    a storage battery or accumulator being used as a substitute or emergency
    source.


CLS 320/119
TXT With individual charging of plural batteries or cells:

    Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein each one of plural
    serially-connected batteries or cells is separately charged by use of
    multiple charging circuits.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    for bypassing certain cells, usually those fully charged, while
    charging a plural cell battery.

    125,    for diverse charging or discharging rates for plural batteries or
    cells.

    124,    for sequential charging or sequential discharging of batteries or
    cells.

    128+,   for battery discharging and charging.


CLS 320/120
TXT Having variable number of cells or batteries in series:

    Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein the total quantity of individual
    cells or batteries connected in series is changeable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 36 for
    serially connected load circuits and subclass 41 for sequential or
    alternating connections of load circuits.


CLS 320/121
TXT Switchable cells (e.g., for voltage regulation, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 120 including means for switching a cell or
    cells into or out of serially-connected relationship with another cell or
    cells.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135,    for battery discharging with the regulation of the output.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 41 for
    sequential or alternation connections of load circuits.


CLS 320/122
TXT Bypassable battery cell:

    Subject matter under subclass 120 including means for shunting charging
    current away from an individual cell in a plurality of serially-connected
    cells to another cell or cells when the individual cell is fully charged.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    for charging series connected cells or batteries individually and
    independently using multiple charging lines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 48+
    for storage battery or accumulator-type source, subclass 53 for load
    current division, and subclass 77 for series connected sources.

    361,    Electricity, Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 54+ for
    load shunting by fault responsive means.


CLS 320/123
TXT With generator charging source:

    Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein a means for converting mechanical
    energy into electrical energy is employed as a charging source for the
    serially-connected cells or batteries.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    for plural or alternate source for battery charging.

    139,    for pulse control battery charging.


CLS 320/124
TXT SEQUENTIAL CHARGING OR DISCHARGING OF BATTERIES OR CELLS:

    Subject matter under the class definition including successive charging or
    discharging of plural batteries or cells.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    for charging individual cells in series.

    128+,   for battery discharging and charging.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 64
    and 66 for substitute or emergency sources.


CLS 320/125
TXT DIVERSE CHARGING OR DISCHARGING RATES FOR PLURAL BATTERIES:

    Subject matter under the class definition including the addition (or
    release) of electrical energy from multiple batteries at different energy
    flow per unit time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    for collectively charging series-connected cells while bypassing a
    fully charged cell.

    160,    for multi-rate charging.


CLS 320/126
TXT PARALLEL CONNECTED BATTERIES:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the positive and negative
    terminals of each of a plurality of batteries to be charged or discharged
    are electrically connected, respectively, to the positive and negative
    terminals of the other batteries.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124,    for sequential charging or discharging of batteries or cells
    connected in parallel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 56 for
    load current control of diverse sources and subclass 66 for accumulator
    substitute sources.


CLS 320/127
TXT BATTERY OR CELL DISCHARGING:

    Subject matter under the class definition including the release of stored
    energy from a battery or cell.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclasses 426+ for using a
    battery testing device.

    340,    Communications Electrical, subclass 636 for a condition responsive
    indicating system for a battery.


CLS 320/128
TXT With charging:

    Battery or cell discharging under subclass 127 further including addition
    of electrical energy into the battery or cell sufficient to increase the
    chemical energy of the battery or cell.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135+,   for battery discharging with regulation of the output.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 66 for
    a battery or accumulator employed as a substitute or emergency source.


CLS 320/129
TXT Pulsed discharge:

    Subject matter under subclass 128 wherein a momentary burst (i.e., pulse)of
    stored energy is removed from a battery or cell during the charging thereof
    (e.g., as in a discharge pulse between charging pulses).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139+,   for pulse control during charging.

    164+,   for time control of charging.


CLS 320/130
TXT Cycling (e.g., discharge/charge cycle, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 128 wherein the battery or cell is repeatedly
    fully discharged prior to full recharging.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164+,   for time control of charging.


CLS 320/131
TXT Deep discharge (e.g., conditioning, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein all, or substantially all, of the
    stored energy in a battery or cell is removed from the battery or cell in
    the discharge portion of the cycle (e.g., to condition the battery or cell
    for charging, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity, Measuring and Testing, subclasses 426+ for using a
    battery testing device.


CLS 320/132
TXT With state-of-charge detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein the quantity of energy stored in
    the battery or cell is determined within the discharge/charge cycle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149,    for detecting the integral of current or voltage to determine the
    total charge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclasses 426+ for using a
    battery testing device.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 636 for battery condition
    indication.


CLS 320/133
TXT Time control:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 including means for regulating an
    interval of charging or discharging.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155+,   for time control of charging.


CLS 320/134
TXT With battery or cell condition monitoring (e.g., for protection from
    overcharging, heating, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 128 wherein a physical characteristic (e.g.,
    state of charge, temperature, etc.) of a battery or cell is determined
    during charging or discharging thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Battery or cell monitoring is common to prevent degradation
    or destruction of the battery or cell during charging or discharging (e.g.,
    due to deep discharge, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149,    for detecting the integral of current or voltage to determine the
    total charge.

    155,    for detecting the differential of the voltage or current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclasses 426+ for using a
    battery testing device.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 636 for a condition responsive
    indicating system for a battery.


CLS 320/135
TXT Regulated discharging:

    Subject matter under subclass 127 including means for controlling the
    release of stored energy from a battery or cell.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 92 for safety
    and protection of systems and devices against under voltage.


CLS 320/136
TXT With battery or cell condition monitoring (e.g., for protection from
    overcharging, heating, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein a physical characteristic (e.g.,
    state of charge, temperature, etc.) of a battery or cell is determined
    during discharge thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Battery or cell monitoring is common to prevent degradation
    or destruction of the battery or cell during charging or discharging (e.g.,
    due to deep discharge, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclasses 426+ for using a
    battery testing device.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 636 for a condition responsive
    indicating system for a battery.


CLS 320/137
TXT BATTERY OR CELL CHARGING:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means to add electrical
    energy into a battery or cell sufficient to increase the useful and
    available chemical energy stored therein.


CLS 320/138
TXT Plural charging sources:

    Subject matter under subclass 137 including means to enable use of two or
    more diverse charging sources, or means for selectively enabling one or
    more diverse charging sources to add electrical energy into a battery or
    cell.

    (1)     Note. This feature would commonly be used to, for example, allow a
    charger to have the flexibility to use charging sources of different
    voltages, current (i.e., AC or DC), or availability for use, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 44+
    for one source compensating for another source.


CLS 320/139
TXT Pulsed:

    Subject matter under subclass 137 wherein the electrical energy is added in
    a series of current bursts (i.e., pulses).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASSES:

    155+,   for time control.

    162+,   for amplitude of current or voltage detected.


CLS 320/140
TXT With DC-DC converter (e.g., flyback supply, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 139 including detailed structure of means for
    creating direct-current pulses from a direct-current supply.

    (1)     Note. The direct-current supply may in turn be derived from a
    rectified alternating current source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157,    for peak of current or voltage detected without pulse control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    363,    Electrical Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 15+ for current
    conversion including DC-AC-DC converter.


CLS 320/141
TXT Pulse modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 including means for actively varying a
    characteristic (e.g., width, amplitude, duty cycle, etc.) of the pulses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASSES:

    162+,   for detecting the amplitude of current or voltage.


CLS 320/142
TXT Phase controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 including means for switching the pulses
    on and off based upon the phase of an alternating current source utilized
    to supply energy for the pulses (e.g., using silicon controlled rectifiers,
    etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150,    for thermal condition detected.


CLS 320/143
TXT With voltage compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 142 further including means to adjust the
    phase control (e.g., SCR conduction, etc.) based upon the voltage of a
    battery or cell being charged.


CLS 320/144
TXT And temperature compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 143 further including means to adjust the
    phase control (e.g., SC conduction, etc.) based upon the temperature of a
    battery or cell being charged.


CLS 320/145
TXT Pulse-width modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the pulse characteristic varied
    is the time duration of the pulses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148,    for peak of current or voltage detected.

    150+,   for thermal condition detected.

    155+,   for time control.

    162+,   for amplitude of current or voltage detected.


CLS 320/146
TXT Hysteresis type (e.g., antichattering, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 139 including control means for starting and
    stoppingcharging (or changing the rate of charging) of a battery or cell
    at, respectively, different battery or cell voltage levels.

    (1)     Note.  Typically, a battery-voltage control "window" is used to
    prevent instability or oscillation in a charger on/off cycle or a fast
    charge/trickle charge cycle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162+,   for amplitude or voltage detected.


CLS 320/147
TXT Gas controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 137 including means for varying the rate of
    charging based upon the rate or amount of gas evolution in a battery or
    cell during charging.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    429,    Chemistry: Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process, subclass 58 for a sealed cell having gas prevention or elimination
    means and subclasses 61+ for control means responsive to battery condition
    sensing means.


CLS 320/148
TXT With peak detection of current or voltage (e.g., delta-V or delta-I
    utilized, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 137 wherein the peak magnitude of charging
    current or battery or cell voltage is determined during charging to
    indicate when a state of full charge of the battery or cell is reached.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155+,   for time control charging.

    160+,   for multi-rate charging.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclass for signal discriminating, per se, based upon
    signal waveshape, amplitude, etc.


CLS 320/149
TXT With detection of current or voltage integral (e.g., total charge, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 137 wherein the integrated magnitude of
    charging current or battery or cell voltage is determined during charging
    to determine the state of charge of the battery or cell.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASSES:

    155+,   for time control charging.

    160,    for multi-rate charging.


CLS 320/150
TXT With thermal condition detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 137 means to determine, or means responsive
    to, the temperature of a battery or cell during charging.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154,    for employment of a thermal switch, such as a thermostat.

    160,    for multi-rate charging.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    429,    Chemistry: Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process, subclasses 61 and 62 for control means responsive to battery
    condition sensing means including temperature control.


CLS 320/151
TXT Detection of current or voltage differential (e.g., slope, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 150 including means to determine the
    time-rate-of-change of the magnitude of charging current or battery or cell
    voltage to determine the state of charge of the battery or cell.


CLS 320/152
TXT Detection of current or voltage amplitude:

    Subject matter under subclass 150 including means to measure the magnitude
    of charging current or the battery or cell voltage to determine the
    state-of-charge of the battery or cell.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157+,   for amplitude of voltage or current detection combined with time
    control.

    160,    for multi-rate charging.

    162,    for amplitude of current or voltage detection.


CLS 320/153
TXT Temperature compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 152 including means to vary a parameter of
    charging in response to detected temperature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity: Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 907 for
    temperature compensation of a semiconductor.


CLS 320/154
TXT Thermal switch (e.g., thermostat, bimetallic switch, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 150 wherein the means to detect temperature
    includes a heat-actuated switch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    429,    Chemistry: Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process, subclasses 61 and 62 for control means responsive to battery
    condition sensing means.


CLS 320/155
TXT Time control:

    Subject matter under subclass 137 means to regulate charging based upon a
    predetermined period of time.


CLS 320/156
TXT Detection of current or voltage differential (e.g., slope, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 155 including means to determine the
    time-rate-of-change of the magnitude of charging current or battery or cell
    voltage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151,    for differentiating the detected charging current or voltage to
    determine the state of charge in addition to detecting the thermal
    condition.

    160,    for multi-rate charging.


CLS 320/157
TXT Detection of current or voltage amplitude:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 including means to measure the magnitude
    of charging current or the battery or cell voltage to determine the
    state-of-charge of the battery or cell.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    for detecting the amplitude of the current or voltage in addition
    to detecting the thermal condition.

    160,    for multi-rate charging without time control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 116
    for condition responsive switching systems and subclass 141 for switch
    actuation with time delay or retardation means.


CLS 320/158
TXT Having solid-state control device:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 wherein the means to regulate charging
    includes a semiconductor control element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160,    for multi-rate charging without time control.


CLS 320/159
TXT Detection of current and voltage amplitude:

    Subject matter under subclass 158 including means to measure the magnitude
    of charging current and the magnitude of battery or cell voltage to
    determine the state-of-charge of the battery or cell.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160,    for detection of current and voltage in multi-rate charging without
    time control.


CLS 320/160
TXT Multi-rate charging (e.g., plural charge rates before a maintenance charge,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 137 wherein the quantity of energy added per
    unit time (i.e., charge rate) is changed to another charge rate during a
    charge to rated capacity.

    (1)     Note. The change of charge rate, for purposes of placement in this
    subclass, does not include a change of rates from a charging to rated
    capacity and a rate employed only for keeping a battery or cell in a fully
    charged condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162+,   for detection of current or voltage amplitude.


CLS 320/161
TXT With detection of current or voltage differential (e.g., slope, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 137 including means to determine the
    time-rate-of-change of the magnitude of charging current or battery or cell
    voltage to determine the state-of-charge of the battery or cell.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151,    for differential of current or voltage detection in addition to
    thermal condition detection.

    156,    for differential of current or voltage detection in addition to
    time control.


CLS 320/162
TXT With detection of current or voltage amplitude:

    Subject matter under subclass 137 including means to measure the magnitude
    of charging current or the battery or cell voltage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    for detecting the amplitude of the current or voltage in addition
    to detecting the thermal condition.

    157,    for detecting the amplitude of the current or voltage in addition
    to having time control.


CLS 320/163
TXT Having solid-state control device:

    Subject matter under subclass 162 including a semiconductor regulating
    element.


CLS 320/164
TXT Detection of current and voltage amplitude:

    Subject matter under subclass 163 including means to measure the magnitude
    of charging current and the magnitude of battery or cell voltage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159,    for detecting the amplitude of both current and voltage in addition
    to time control.


CLS 320/165
TXT With current sensing to detect proper battery connection (e.g., polarity,
    ripple, reverse current, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 137 for sensing the current to detect a
    proper battery connection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclass 133 for
    nonquantitative measuring, testing, or sensing of electricity (i.e.,
    polarity tester).

    361,    Electricity, Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 245+ for
    polarity reversing, manual and automatic.


CLS 320/166
TXT CAPACITOR CHARGING OR DISCHARGING:

    Subject matter under the class definition for increasing or decreasing the
    amount of stored electrical energy in a capacitor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 109+
    for charging and discharging capacitors.

    363,    Electrical Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 59+ for current
    conversion with voltage multiplication means.


CLS 320/167
TXT For large capacitance (e.g., "super" capacitor, memory backup capacitor,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 166 for charging or discharging a capacitor
    which, via a high-capacity storage characteristic (e.g., on the order of a
    Farad, etc.), has utility as a battery or cell in terms of energy storage.

    FOREIGN ART COLLECTIONS

    The definitions for FOR 100 through FOR 171 below correspond to the
    definitions of the abolished subclasses under Class 320 from which these
    collections were formed.  See the Foreign Art Collections in the Class 320
    schedule for specific correspondences. [Note: The titles and definitions
    for indented art collections include all the details of the one(s) that are
    hierarchically superior.]


CLS 320/FOR100
TXT Foreign art collection for condenser charging and/or discharging.


CLS 320/FOR101
TXT Foreign art collection for battery charging and/or discharging.


CLS 320/FOR102
TXT Foreign art collection in which the battery is of the primary
    type; i.e., battery of the type which produces electric energy as a result
    of electrochemical action, which action, is not efficiently reversible and,
    hence, the battery when discharged cannot be efficiently recharged by
    electric current.


CLS 320/FOR103
TXT Foreign art collection in which means are provided for passing an
    electric current through the primary battery to thereby improve its ability
    and/or its operation as a source of voltage or current.


CLS 320/FOR104
TXT Foreign art collection in which means are provided for both
    charging and discharging.


CLS 320/FOR105
TXT Foreign art collection in which there are two or more batteries,
    structurally dependent or independent, and (a) in which means operate to
    treat at least one battery differently (with respect to time, mode or
    character, of treatment) than at least one other battery, or (b) in which
    any battery has a circuit controlling element not included in the circuit
    of another battery, or (c) in which all batteries are treated in one
    relationship at one time and all are treated in another relationship at
    another time.


CLS 320/FOR106
TXT Foreign art collection in which means are provided for connecting
    the batteries in series, with respect to one another, at one time and in
    parallel at another time, or for connecting some in series and others in
    parallel at the same time.


CLS 320/FOR107
TXT Foreign art collection in which means are provided (a) for
    effectively removing one or more batteries from a charging circuit and
    placing the same in a discharging circuit, (b) for effectively removing one
    or more other batteries from a discharging circuit and placing the same in
    a charging circuit, (c) or both.


CLS 320/FOR108
TXT Foreign art collection in which means are provided for regulating
    both (a) the charging circuit or charging source, and (b) the discharging
    circuit, simultaneously or otherwise.


CLS 320/FOR109
TXT Foreign art collection in which means are provided for controlling
    the charging source and/or the charging circuit as a result of the
    operating of, or conditions in, the discharging circuit.


CLS 320/FOR110
TXT Foreign art collection in which means operate to start and/or stop
    battery charging.


CLS 320/FOR111
TXT Foreign art collection in which means operate to control the
    charging generator.


CLS 320/FOR112
TXT Foreign art collection in which there are means which effect
    regulation of the discharging circuit.


CLS 320/FOR113
TXT Foreign art collection in which there are means which effect
    alternate (never simultaneous) charging and discharging.


CLS 320/FOR114
TXT Foreign art collection in which there are two or more batteries,
    structurally dependent or independent, and (a) in which means operate to
    treat at least one battery differently (with respect to time, mode, or
    character, of treatment) than at least one battery and/or (b) in which any
    battery has a circuit controlling element not included in the circuit of
    another battery, and/or in which all of the batteries are connected in one
    relationship at one time and all are connected in another relationship at
    another time.


CLS 320/FOR115
TXT Foreign art collection in which means operate to connect the
    batteries in series, relative to each other, at one time and to connect
    them in parallel at another time, or to connect some of the batteries in
    series and others in parallel at the same time.


CLS 320/FOR116
TXT Foreign art collection in which means operate to connect the
    batteries so that the current which passes through one battery also passes,
    in whole or in part, through each of the other batteries connected in the
    circuit; while at no time can the current divide so that part passes
    through one battery and another part of the current passes through another
    battery.


CLS 320/FOR117
TXT Foreign art collection in which means operate to vary the number
    of batteries which are connected in series.


CLS 320/FOR118
TXT Foreign art collection in which means operate to charge or
    discharge the batteries at successive intervals, said intervals being
    spaced by other intervals during which the battery current is substantially
    zero.


CLS 320/FOR119
TXT Foreign art collection in which means operate to charge a battery
    at a high rate in a short period of time.


CLS 320/FOR120
TXT Foreign art collection in which means operate to charge or
    discharge a battery at successive intervals of time, said intervals being
    spaced by other intervals during which the battery current is substantially
    zero.


CLS 320/FOR121
TXT Foreign art collection in which means operate to either charge or
    discharge the battery at two or more rates other than zero.


CLS 320/FOR122
TXT Foreign art collection in which means operate to reduce the rate
    of charging.


CLS 320/FOR123
TXT Foreign art collection in which means operate to effect three or
    more rates of charging other than zero rate.


CLS 320/FOR124
TXT Foreign art collection in which means are provided to control the
    polarity of (a) the charging source and/or charging circuit relative to the
    battery, or (b) the battery relative to the discharging circuit and/or the
    load device.


CLS 320/FOR125
TXT Foreign art collection in which reversing switches control the polarity.


CLS 320/FOR126
TXT Foreign art collection in which there are means for controlling
    the charging source and additional means for controlling the circuit
    extending from the source to the battery.


CLS 320/FOR127
TXT Foreign art collection in which the means for controlling the
    circuit extending from the source to the battery make and/or break the said
    circuit.


CLS 320/FOR128
TXT Foreign art collection in which the means operate both (a) to
    regulate and (b) to make or break either the charging circuit or the
    discharging circuit.


CLS 320/FOR129
TXT Foreign art collection in which means are provided for sensing a
    predetermined cause or condition (e.g., temperature, time, voltage, et
    cetera) which sensing means in turn initiate operation of additional means
    which perform some control function.


CLS 320/FOR130
TXT Foreign art collection in which (1) means are provided for sensing
    two or more different predetermined conditions and/or (2) means are
    provided for sensing a predetermined condition and there is also provided
    means for a predetermined length of time after the sensing means respond to
    the predetermined condition.


CLS 320/FOR131
TXT Foreign art collection in which the sensing means will respond to
    both voltage and current magnitudes.


CLS 320/FOR132
TXT Foreign art collection in which the control means operate to make
    and/or break the charging circuit or the discharging circuit.


CLS 320/FOR133
TXT Foreign art collection in which at least one of the control means
    operates to make and/or break the charging circuit or the discharging
    circuit.


CLS 320/FOR134
TXT Foreign art collection in which the sensing means respond to
    temperature changes at any place.


CLS 320/FOR135
TXT Foreign art collection in which the control means operate to make
    and/or break either the charging circuit or the discharging circuit.


CLS 320/FOR136
TXT Foreign art collection in which the sensing means respond upon the
    occurrence of a predetermined instant of time (e.g., 8:30 A.M., 5:00 P.M.,
    et cetera), or upon the passage of a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10
    sec., 8 hrs., et cetera).


CLS 320/FOR137
TXT Foreign art collection in which the control means operate to make
    and/or break either the charging circuit or the discharging circuit.


CLS 320/FOR138
TXT Foreign art collection in which the sensing means are responsive
    to a predetermined voltage magnitude or a predetermined current magnitude
    in any circuit.


CLS 320/FOR139
TXT Foreign art collection in which the control means operate to make
    and/or break either the charging circuit or the discharging circuit.


CLS 320/FOR140
TXT Foreign art collection in which the sensing means respond to the
    linear or angular velocity of any body.


CLS 320/FOR141
TXT Foreign art collection in which the control means operate to make
    and/or break either the charging circuit or the discharging circuit.


CLS 320/FOR142
TXT Foreign art collection in which the sensing means operate in
    response to the state or degree of battery change.


CLS 320/FOR143
TXT Foreign art collection in which the sensing means include an
    ampere-hour or a watt-hour type of device, which device is so connected as
    to measure the energy input or the energy output of the battery being
    charged or discharged.


CLS 320/FOR144
TXT Foreign art collection in which the control means operate to make
    and/or break either the charging circuit or the discharging circuit.


CLS 320/FOR145
TXT Foreign art collection in which the sensing means include a
    pressure responsive device which is so connected as to respond to the
    pressure generated by the gas liberated by a battery being charged or
    discharged.


CLS 320/FOR146
TXT Foreign art collection in which the control means operate to make
    and/or break either the charging circuit or the discharging circuit.


CLS 320/FOR147
TXT Foreign art collection in which means are provided to indicate,
    signal, measure, and/or test a result, condition, or circumstance
    immediately associated with the battery, its charging source or circuit, or
    its discharging circuit or load device.


CLS 320/FOR148
TXT Foreign art collection in which means are provided for controlling
    either the charging circuit or the discharging circuit.


CLS 320/FOR149
TXT Foreign art collection in which there are two or more sources of
    e.m.f., simultaneously connected in series, relative to each other, in the
    charging circuit, in bucking and/or boosting relationship.


CLS 320/FOR150
TXT Foreign art collection in which an impedance is connected in the
    battery circuit.


CLS 320/FOR151
TXT Foreign art collection in which the impedance is of the type in
    which the impedance to the flow of electric current therethrough varies
    with change in physical pressure applied thereto, and in which means are
    provided for applying a variable physical pressure to the impedance.


CLS 320/FOR152
TXT Foreign art collection in which a unidirectionally conductive
    means is connected in series with the charging or the discharging circuit,
    said conductive means offering appreciably more impedance to the flow of
    current therethrough in one direction than in the other.


CLS 320/FOR153
TXT Foreign art collection in which means are provided for
    substantially establishing and/or interrupting the conductivity of the
    battery circuit by relative physical movement of electrically conductive
    element into and out of physical contact with each other.


CLS 320/FOR154
TXT Foreign art collection in which two or more means are provided for
    establishing and/or interrupting the battery circuit in two or more places.


CLS 320/FOR155
TXT Foreign art collection in which (a) two or more sources of supply
    of different kinds are provided in the charging circuit even though they
    receive the same character of treatment or (b) two or more sources of
    supply of either the same or different kinds are provided in the charging
    circuit where one or more of such sources are treated differently (with
    respect to time, mode or character of treatment) than one or more others of
    such sources.


CLS 320/FOR156
TXT Foreign art collection in which means are provided for receiving
    electric energy of alternating polarity, converting it into electrical
    energy of unidirectional polarity and delivering it to a battery charging
    circuit.


CLS 320/FOR157
TXT Foreign art collection in which the rectifying means are of the
    type which includes (a) an electric conductor, (b) means for producing
    magnetic lines of force, (c) means for producing relative motion between
    the conductor and the lines of force in a direction which extends at an
    angle to the lines of force, and (d) means for collecting and/or conducting
    current from the conductor to the battery charging circuit.


CLS 320/FOR158
TXT Foreign art collection in which the rectifying means include
    conductive means connected to the charging circuit, which conductive means
    offer appreciably less impedance to the flow of current therethrough in one
    direction than in the other direction.


CLS 320/FOR159
TXT Foreign art collection in which the unidirectionally conductive
    type of rectifier includes devices having electrodes spaced apart in a
    gaseous or a vacuous medium and between which electrodes the electric
    current being rectified can be caused to flow.


CLS 320/FOR160
TXT Foreign art collection in which the source of supply for charging
    a battery comprises means for converting nonelectric energy into electric
    energy and for supplying the electric energy to the charging circuit.


CLS 320/FOR161
TXT Foreign art collection in which means are provided for physically
    starting and/or stopping the charging generator.


CLS 320/FOR162
TXT Foreign art collection in which means are provided for connecting
    the generator to a source of electric energy to start the motive power
    means which are used to drive the generator during charging operation.


CLS 320/FOR163
TXT Foreign art collection in which the generator is of the type which
    comprises an armature or induced conductor, winding means for producing a
    magnetic field of force, and means for producing relative movement between
    the conductor and the field of force, and in which means are provided for
    controlling the circuit of the field producing winding.


CLS 320/FOR164
TXT Foreign art collection in which the means for controlling the
    circuit of the field winding comprise another magnetic flux producing
    winding; said last named winding being operated or treated differently with
    respect to time, manner or electrical connection, or degree of control
    thereover, than the first named winding means.


CLS 320/FOR165
TXT Foreign art collection in which one or more of the field windings
    are connected or energized so as to produce a magnetomotive force which
    opposes the magnetomotive force of one or more of the other field windings.


CLS 320/FOR166
TXT Foreign art collection in which two or more sources of e.m.f., are
    connected in series with each other and with the field producing winding.


CLS 320/FOR167
TXT Foreign art collection in which the means for controlling the
    circuit of the field-producing winding comprise an impedance connected in
    the circuit.


CLS 320/FOR168
TXT Foreign art collection in which means are provided for
    short-circuiting the impedance, in whole or in part, by conducting means of
    negligible resistance which operate to short circuit the entire impedance
    in one step, or parts of the impedance in one or more major steps, i.e.,
    without passing through intermediate and infinitesimal values of said
    impedance.


CLS 320/FOR169
TXT Foreign art collection in which the impedance is of the type in
    which the resistance to the flow of current therethrough varies with change
    in physical pressure applied thereto, and in which means are provided for
    applying a variable physical pressure to the impedance.


CLS 320/FOR170
TXT Foreign art collection in which means are provided for
    substantially short-circuiting or grounding the terminals of the armature
    or generating conductors of the generator.


CLS 320/FOR171
TXT Foreign art collection in which means are provided for controlling
    the structure of the generator.


CLS 322/
TTL ELECTRICITY: SINGLE GENERATOR SYSTEMS

CLS 322/
TXT

    I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER:

    A.      This is the Generic Class for:

    Single electric energy generators for supplying single load circuits, there
    being means to regulate or control the generator output, which means may be
    electrical or nonelectrical and may act in the prime mover for the
    generator, the power transmission means between the generator prime mover
    and the generator, the generator, or the armature (output) circuit of the
    generator, or any combination thereof.

    B.      Definition of Terms Used:

    ELECTRIC GENERATING:  as used herein involves the conversion of any
    character of nonelectric energy to electric energy.

    ELECTRIC ENERGY GENERATORS:  as used herein are devices and apparatus for
    converting any character of nonelectric energy to electric energy.

    LOAD CIRCUIT:  includes the system into which the electric energy from the
    electric generator is supplied, and may include a load device recited
    broadly or by name only (such as a welding load) in some cases.  See
    section II of the class definition below.

    C.      Generator Recited by Name Only:

    Systems as defined in section I, A above are included in this class even
    though the generator is recited by name only if the system includes means
    for the regulation or control of the generator output.  Systems which
    include a generator recited by name only, no significant characteristics of
    the generator or its control being claimed, are classified with the system,
    even though the type of current and/or voltage produced by the generator is
    recited (i.e., as a 60 cycle generator), the generator being considered
    only a source of energy for the system.  For such excluded systems, see the
    classes referred to under "Search Class" below.

    D.      Load in Output Circuit Recited by Name Only or Significantly:

    1.      Class 322 provides for single generator supplied single load
    systems as defined in section I, A, above not otherwise classified even
    though the electric load in the output circuit is recited by name only or
    by its electrical characteristics, the system defined otherwise being drawn
    to the control of the generator.

    2.      Systems having significant characteristics of the circuit elements
    in the load circuit other than or in addition to those for the control or
    regulation of the generator are classified according to the type of load
    circuit or load device claimed even though significant generator structure
    or control is also claimed.

    3.      The following indicates in more detail the classification lines
    followed in applying paragraphs 1 and 2 where significant generator
    regulation or control is claimed in combination with electric load or load
    circuit features.

    a.      Generator with Transformer or Inductance only in the Load Circuit:

    Where the transformer or inductance is recited by name only, the system is
    in Class 322. Where significant characteristics of the transformer or
    transformer circuit are claimed, the system is classified as a transformer
    system.  Merely reciting that the transformer has primary and secondary
    windings or that the transformer is an auto transformer is not a recitation
    of significant transformer structure or circuit. A recitation that the
    transformer is a variable ratio transformer is a recitation of significant
    transformer structure.  Likewise systems having a significant structure of
    an inductance or inductance circuit are classified according to the type of
    system formed by the inductance.  A recitation that the inductance is
    variable is a recitation of significant inductance structure. For the
    systems which provide for systems having transformers and/or inductances
    therein, see class 323 referred to under "SEARCH CLASS" below.

    b.      Generator with Condenser Only in Load Circuit:

    Where the condenser is recited by name only, the system is classified in
    Class 322, except in the following cases:

    (a)     where the system is designed for the specific purpose of charging
    and discharging the condenser, such a system being classified in Class 320,
    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging, subclasses 166+ .

    (b)     where the condenser is provided solely to control the
    characteristics of the load circuit (power factor control regulators) such
    a system being classified in class 323 listed under "SEARCH CLASS" below.

    (c)     or where the condenser is defined by significant condenser
    structure, such a system being classified in Class 323, Electricity: Power
    Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 364.

    c.      Generator and Resistor Only in Load Circuit:

    Where the resistor is recited by name only, the system is classified in
    Class 322.  Where significant characteristics of the resistor or resistor
    system is claimed, the system is classified as a resistor system. Also
    merely reciting a variable resistance is not considered to be a recitation
    of significant resistor or resistor system.  If in the foregoing systems,
    structure of the resistor is recited, the patent will be excluded from
    Class 322.

    d.      Generator and Electric Switch Only in the Load Circuit:

    Where the switch is recited by name only, the system is classified in Class
    322.  Where significant switch structure or switching system is claimed,
    the patent is excluded from Class 322.  Where an overload switch when open
    includes a resistor in the circuit to limit the generator current flow, the
    patent is classified in Class 322.  Also, a switch in the load circuit to
    prevent reverse current flow to the generator is classified in Class 322.

    e.      Generator with frequency changing means and/or phase converting
    means and/or current converting means and/or phase control means:

    Where the generator supplies a load circuit which includes any of the
    following means, a frequency changing means, a phase converting means, a
    current converting means, or a phase controlling means, the patent is
    excluded from Class 322 whether the means in the load circuit is claimed
    broadly or specifically. For such excluded systems, see the references to
    Classes 363, Electric Power Conversion Systems, and 323 Electricity:  Power
    Supply or Regulation Systems, under "SEARCH CLASS" below.

    f.      Generator and Testing Means for Generator, Signal or Indicator for
    Generator, Recorder for Generator, Measuring Means for Generator:

    Where the generator system includes by name only testing means for the
    generator, a recorder for the generator or measuring means (voltage,
    frequency, current, etc.) for the generator, the system is classified in
    Class 322.  Class 322 also takes such systems where the system includes a
    plurality of such means recited by name only.  If any significant
    characteristics of the testing means, signal or indicating means or
    recorder, or measuring means are recited, the system is classified with the
    particular means.  For the classes which provide for such means, see the
    classes referred to under "Search Class" below.

    g.      Battery Charging and Discharging Systems:

    This class excludes generator supplied battery charging systems, battery
    discharging systems, and the combined charging and discharging systems for
    one or more batteries.  Such systems are in Class 320, Electricity: Battery
    or Capacitor Charging or Discharging .  See the reference to Class 320
    under "Search Class" below.

    h.      Generator and Plural Circuit Elements or Means in the Load Circuit:

    Where the generator load circuit includes a plurality of circuit elements
    or means, and one of the circuit elements is a transformer, a frequency
    changing means, a phase modification means, or a phase regulation means,
    even though recited by name only, such system is excluded from Class 322.
    Where the generator load circuit includes a plurality of circuit elements
    or means, none of which are these recited in the foregoing paragraph, and
    such elements are recited by name only, and there is no recitation of the
    manner of connection of the elements to make any particular type of art
    system (as an impedance regulator), then the system is classified in Class
    322.  Where the system includes any significant characteristics of any of
    the plurality of circuit elements or of their connection with respect to
    each other in the load circuit, the system is classified according to the
    type system formed by the load circuit elements.

    E.      Polyphase Generator and Load Circuit:

    This class includes polyphase generator systems for supplying a single
    polyphase load circuit where significant generator structure or control is
    recited and if the polyphase load circuit is not excluded from the class by
    the limitation of section I, D, above.  A polyphase load circuit including
    a plurality of single phase load circuits is excluded from Class 322 as
    being a plural load circuit.

    F.      Plural Generators and/or Plural Load Circuits:

    1.      Plural Generators:

            Systems having a plurality of generators supplying a single load
    circuit or having a plurality of generators supplying a plurality of load
    circuits are excluded from Class 322.  However, Class 322 does include
    single generator systems having one or more generators used as the source
    of excitation for the generator which supplies the single load circuit.
    See subclasses 59+.  For the excluded subject matter, see the classes
    listed under "Search Class."

    2.      Plural Load Circuits:

            Where the patent discloses a generating system and a plurality of
    load circuits supplied by a generator, but the plurality of load circuits
    are not claimed, the patent is included in Class 322.  Where significant
    characteristics of the load circuits are claimed, so that the load circuits
    do not constitute a single load circuit, the patent is classified in the
    classes listed under "Search Class."

    G.      Generating Systems With Nonmagnetic generator:

    This class provides for generating systems as defined in section I,A, above
    having a nonmagnetic generator which are not otherwise classified.
    Nonmagnetic generators include:

    a.      Battery generators.

    b.      Thermoelectric generators.

    c.      Photoelectric generators.

    d.      Piezoelectric generators.

    e.      Electrostatic generators.

    f.      Friction generators.

            For the other classes and subclasses which provide for generating
    systems having a nonmagnetic generator, search class:

    a.      Battery charging or discharging:

    320,    Electricity:  Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass for a battery charging either another battery or a
    capacitor, or for a generator-supplied battery charging system.

    b.      Thermoelectric generators:

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclasses 200+ for
    structure of thermoelectro generators.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, appropriate subclass
    69 for thermocouples used in temperature regulating systems.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 306 for
    pyromagnetic electric generators and generation systems.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 179+ for a temperature
    measuring system having a thermoelectric sensor.



    c.      photoelectric generators:

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric subclass 89, for
    structure of photoelectric generators.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+, for miscellaneous photo cell
    controlled electric circuits and photocell apparatus, particularly subclass
    212 where the photocell is a self-generating type cell (e.g., battery)
    which supplies electric current to the circuit.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 10, 11, 21, 53-56, 72, 80-85, 113-118, 184-189, 225-234,
    257-258, 290-294, 414, and 431-466 for light responsive active
    semiconductor devices.



    d.      piezoelectric generators:

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclass
    173 for piezoelectric microphones and subclass 190 for a piezoelectric
    speaker.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 311+ for
    piezoelectric generators and generation systems.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclass 55 for
    electric lamps and electrical space discharge devices (radio tubes) which
    have a piezoelectric device structurally combined therewith so as to form a
    unitary device.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 73 for crystal oscillators of the
    electron-coupled type, subclass 139 for crystal oscillators of the bridge
    type, subclass 155 for oscillators wherein a piezoelectric crystal drives
    or is driven by the electro-mechanical frequency determining resonator of
    the oscillator and subclass 158 for crystal oscillators in general.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 148+ for delay
    networks of the electro- mechanical transducer type, which may include a
    piezoelectric device, and subclasses 187+ for wave filters of the
    piezoelectric type.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 10 for piezoelectric devices
    used in submarine signaling.



    e.      Electro-state generators:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 309 for
    electrostatic generators.

    361,    Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 271+ for
    condenser structure.



    f.      Friction generators:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 310 for friction
    generators.



    H.      Nonelectrical Means Controlling the Generator:

    Systems as defined in section I, A, above are included in this class where
    the only control means for the generator is a nonelectrical means (such as
    a mechanical or hydraulic system) controlling the operation of the
    generator prime mover, or the power transmission between the prime mover
    and the generator.

    Where the prime mover is a nonelectric prime mover, see section I, J, b.
    Where the generator control means which controls only the generator
    structure (such as the generator magnetic structure or the brushes) no
    other generator control being provided, the subject matter is considered to
    be only generator structure and is excluded from Class 322.  Where the
    generator control means includes electric means and nonelectric means, the
    subject matter is considered to be a generator control or regulation system
    included in Class 322.

    J.      Prime Mover Driven Generator Systems:

    a.      Electric Motor Driven Generator Systems:

            This class provides for systems as defined in section I, A, above
    wherein the prime mover for the electric generator is an electric motor
    where significant generator structure or circuit is claimed, except where
    there is a significant relationship between the characteristics of the
    input circuit for the motor with relation to the output circuit of the
    generator so that the generator and its motor prime mover constitutes a
    translating device in a system for converting electric energy having
    particular characteristics to electric energy having other characteristics.
     Such excluded systems are classified in Class 363, Electric Power
    Conversion Systems. Included in Class 322, in subclasses 10+ are motor
    generator systems where the generator is used as a motor to start the
    motor, the motor after the starting period is over, serving as a prime
    mover for the generator.  Motor generator systems where the generator is
    recited by name only and is only a nominal load for the motor are excluded
    from Class 322 and are classified in Class 318, Electricity: Motive Power
    Systems as a motor system.  See the reference to Classes 321, 318 and 333
    under "Search Class" below.

    b.      nonelectric Motor Driven Generator Systems: Electric generating
    systems having the generator driven by a nonelectric prime mover and where
    either significant characteristics of the prime mover or significant prime
    mover control features are set forth are excluded from Class 322, and are
    classified in Class 290, Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants.

    II.     GENERATOR STRUCTURE, PER SE:

    This class provides for electrical system as distinguished from the
    structure of the devices capable of translating nonelectric to electric
    energy.  See section I, H, above.  For the classes which provide for
    generator structure, per se, see the classes referred to under "Search
    Class" below.

    III.    SYSTEMS GENERIC TO MOTORS OR GENERATORS:

    Where the system includes a dynamo-electric machine, and the machine is
    disclosed but not claimed as either an electric motor or and electric
    generator, the patent is classified in Class 322, if the claimed system is
    otherwise within the definition of Class 322, and provided that no
    structure or circuit is claimed that limits the system to being a motor
    system (in case the machine is disclosed as being a motor. Where the
    machine is claimed as being either a motor or generator, the patent is
    classified in Class 322).  However, see Class 505, Superconductor
    Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process, subclasses 150+ for high
    temperature (Tc  30 K) superconducting devices, and particularly subclasses
    166+ for motors or generators containing high temperature superconductors.

    IV.     GENERATOR SYSTEMS COMBINED WITH OTHER SYSTEMS:

    Where a generating system is part of an art system or other system, it is
    classified with such art device or other system.  For a partial list of the
    classes that provide for such art systems or other systems, see the classes
    listed under "Search Class" below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, and appropriate subclasses, for
    generator supplied signs, see subclasses 541+, for illuminated signs.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 16 and 17, for
    generator supplied signaling devices, subclass 42.07, for generator
    supplied illuminated bait, subclasses 98+, for generator supplied
    electrocuting trap, subclass 112, for generator supplied electrocuting
    devices for insects, and subclass 113, for generator supplied illuminated
    traps for insects, and subclass 27, for generator supplied devices to
    illuminate artificial and live bait.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 1.3, for generator supplied systems of
    electroculture for plants.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, and appropriate subclasses, for generator
    systems used in measuring and testing apparatus.  See note 3, C,
    Electrical, to the class definition of Class 73, for the line between
    Classes 73 and 322.  In Class 73, see subclasses 862+, for dynamometer
    systems for measuring torque, moments work or power by measuring the force
    exerted or power exerted by a prime mover for a dynamoelectric generating
    machine, see indented subclass 862.191 for such systems where the power is
    measured during transmission.

    84,     Music, subclasses 600+, for electric musical instruments utilizing
    an electric generator for electrical tone generation.  See subclasses
    1.04+, where the generator includes a tuned sound wave generator or
    resonator (such as tuned reed or string) subclass 1.18 where the instrument
    includes an electro-optical type (photo-cell) generator, subclasses 1.19+,
    for the instruments with generators (usually dynamoelectric generators) and
    means for the selective control of the tone partials, and subclass 1.28 for
    the instruments with pattern or sound record type generators.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 35+, for locomotives in which a
    prime mover runs an electric generator for generating electricity which
    supplies current for electric motors to drive the locomotive, and
    subclasses 49+, for generator supplied electric locomotives, see indented
    subclasses 50+, for electric locomotives which carry primary or storage
    batteries for the supply of electricity to the motors or other car devices.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 143+, for generator
    supplied ignition systems for internal combustion engines; see subclass
    148, for the high tension ignition systems including those having a
    dynamoelectric generator; and subclass 149, for ignition systems having a
    dynamoelectric generator operated by an engine, the dynamo supplying the
    ignition current, and for combined dynamo-electric generator and ignitors
    and for dynamoelectric generators which are especially designed for use
    with internal combustion engines for supplying the ignition current.

    136,    Batteries: Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, see section I, G, of
    the class definition for a reference to battery generators, per se.

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 159+, for brakes operated by means of electric
    current furnished by the motors, acting as generators.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, is the generic class for
    chemical apparatus and systems involving electric and wave energy and
    including arrangements wherein the source of electric energy is a generator.

    219,    Electric Heating, for generator supplied heating and welding
    systems.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, see section I, G, b,
    of the class definition above for a reference to the nonelectromagnetic
    induction generator systems in Class 236.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, for generator supplied electric
    railway switch and signal systems; see subclass 245, for car actuated
    generators, that is, devices by which the energy of the moving vehicle is
    converted into electrical energy for actuating switches and/or signals.

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants, see section I, J, of the class
    definition above, for a reference to nonelectric prime mover driven
    electric generators.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 11+
    for systems wherein one or more generators are interconnected with two or
    more load circuits, and subclasses 43+ for systems wherein two or more
    generators supply an electrical system.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    appropriate subclasses, for generator supplied consumable electrode devices
    (arc lamps, arc welding, electrodes, etc.).

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, and the classes and
    subclasses specified in the notes to the definition of that class, for
    generator supplied electric lamps and electric space discharge devices.
    See subclass 33, for the portable self-contained systems in class 315;
    subclass 55 for lamps and electric space discharge devices having an
    electric current generator combined therewith to form a self-contained
    unit; subclass 78, for class 315 systems having the electric current
    generator driven by a vehicle motor or driven in response to the motion of
    a vehicle; and subclass 302, for regulating systems within class 315, where
    the system includes means to control the current generator.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, for generator supplied motor
    systems.  See section J of the class definition above for motor driven
    generator systems. See section III of the class definition of Class 322 for
    the line between Classes 318 and 322 with respect to systems having a
    dynamoelectric machine where the machine is disclosed as a motor, but is
    not claimed as a motor and where the claimed system is generic to either a
    motor or generator.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass for a generator-supplied battery charging system (See
    section I, D, 3, g, and I, G, of this class definition for the line between
    Classes 320 and 322 with respect to a generator-supplied battery load); and
    subclasses 166+ for a generator-supplied capacitor charging circuit (See
    section I, D, 3, b, of this class definition for the line between Classes
    320 and 322 with respect to a generator supplying a load capacitor.).

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, for miscellaneous
    voltage magnitude controlled systems and miscellaneous phase controlled
    systems.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses, for
    testing apparatus having electric generators for supplying the electric
    current for the testing, electric systems for testing the characteristics
    of electric generators (see section I, D, 3, f, of the class definition of
    Class 322, for a statement of the general line between Classes 324 and 322
    for generator systems provided with a testing means), and testing apparatus
    using electric generator systems for indicating some characteristic of the
    device being tested (such as speed).

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 71 for oscillation generating systems wherein
    a generator of raw A.C. may be employed as source of power or bias for the
    oscillator, and subclasses 185+ for oscillation generating systems having a
    particular source of power or bias voltage, which source may be a generator
    of the type classified in Class 322.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 148+ for delay
    networks of the electromechanical type, wherein the mechanical coupling
    between the motor and the generator determines the delay characteristics of
    the network, subclasses 167+ for wave filter networks, particularly
    subclasses 186+ for wave filters of the electromechanical type, wherein the
    mechanical coupling between the motor and the generator determines the
    propagation characteristic of the filter.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, appropriate subclasses, for generator
    systems having an electric signal or indicator; see section I, D, 3 (f) of
    the class definition of Class 322 for the general line between Class 322
    and Class 340 with respect to such systems.  See section I, G, (d) of the
    class definition of Class 322 for a reference to the nonelectromagnetic
    induction generators in Class 340.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ for
    relay systems, subclasses 236+ for speed-controlled systems which include
    an electric current generator system, and subclasses 247+ for igniting
    systems having electric generators for supplying the igniting device.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 193 for bicycle driven generators for
    supplying a lamp; subclasses 157+ for miscellaneous portable self-contained
    electric lamps (flashlights).

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    conversion systems which may be supplied by a generator.  Subclasses 102+
    for dynamoelectric machine current converter systems wherein the converter
    might be a motor-generator set or an analogous machine; subclass 150 for
    dynamoelectric phase converter systems; subclasses 174+ for dynamoelectric
    machine frequency converter systems, particularly subclass 175 wherein the
    converter comprises a motor-generator set.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 144 for a
    piezoelectric phonograph pickup; and subclasses 146+ for an electromagnetic
    phonograph pickup.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, and appropriate subclasses,
    for electric generator supplied furnaces, note especially subclasses 102+,
    for arc furnace control systems, and subclasses 135+, for resistance
    furnace control systems.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, see section I, G, of this class
    (322) definition for a reference to a measuring system having a
    thermoelectric sensor.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    appropriate subclasses for nuclear reactors, per se, which may be combined
    with electric generator systems of this class (322).  For the line between
    Class 376 and the energy generating classes see the class definition of
    Class 376 under II (1) and (2a).

    379,    Telephonic Communications, appropriate subclasses for a telephone
    device or system with power source detail, subclass 371 for magneto
    signalling in a telephone system.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclass
    177 for a moving coil microphone structure.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), appropriate subclasses
    for a generator system combined with significant impeller structure.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclasses 1+ for generator
    supplied buoys; and subclasses 13+ for illuminated buoys.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 95 for generator supplied portable
    radio transmitters and receivers; and see subclass 351 for portable
    self-contained receivers.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 150+ for high temperature (Tc  30 K) superconducting devices,
    and particularly subclasses 166+ for motors or generators containing high
    temperature superconductors.


    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, appropriate
    subclasses, especially subclass 1, electric generator supplied surgical
    apparatus, also for chairs and seats combined with an electric generator
    (rocking of the chair used to operate dynamoelectric generator), subclass
    149 for devices to be worn on the person, as belts, bands, etc., which
    include an electric generator (usually  a battery), and subclasses 115+ for
    portable self contained medical apparatus for applying electric energy to
    the body and including an electric generator.


CLS 322/1
TXT Subject matter within the class definition wherein the system is modified
    to produce an arrangement which is peculiarly adapted to be mounted on a
    movable device.

    (1)     Note.  The mere fact that a generating system is made so light and
    small that it may be readily carried does not put the system in this
    subclass.  Some modification of the system to the movable device is
    necessary.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, appropriate subclasses, for
    portable generator supplied self-contained signs, see subclasses 541+, for
    illuminated signs.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 16, 17 for
    portable, generator supplied illuminated signaling devices for fishing
    apparatus, subclass 17.6 for portable supplied illuminated bait, and
    subclass 17.5, for portable, generator supplied bait illuminators.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 35+ and 49+, for generator
    supplied locomotives.  See subclass 35, for such locomotives in which a
    prime mover runs an electric generator which supplies current to the
    electric motors for driving the generator.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 143+, for generator
    supplied ignition systems for internal combustion engines.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 50 for portable
    or hand held dynamoelectric machines.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharging Devices:  Systems, subclass 33 for
    miscellaneous portable self-contained generator supplied lamp and electric
    space discharging devices lamps and electric space discharging devices
    which have an electric generator structurally combined therewith so as to
    form a unitary device.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 262 for
    portable self-contained electric igniting devices such as cigar lighters.

    362,    Illumination, appropriate subclasses for articles, such as
    firearms, canes, etc., which include an electric lamp and the source of
    potential therefor to make a portable self-contained illuminated article;
    subclass 193 for bicycle driven generators for supplying a lamp; and
    subclasses 157+ for portable self-contained electric lamp, such as
    flashlights.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclasses 13+ for illuminated
    buoys.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 351 for portable radio receivers.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal and Electrical Application, subclass 149
    for electrosurgical devices to be worn on the person, as belts, bands,
    etc., which include an electric generator (usually a battery) and
    subclasses 115+ for portable self-contained medical apparatus for applying
    electric energy to the body and including an electric generator.


CLS 322/2
TXT Subject matter within the class definition wherein the generation of
    electric energy does not involve electromagnetic induction.

    (1)     Note.  See section I, G, of the class definition for a statement as
    to the type of systems included in this subclass.


CLS 322/3
TXT Subject matter within the class definition wherein the generator has a
    moving generating means which may be either the armature or field structure
    which has a reciprocating motion.

    (1)     Note.  The motion may be either rectilinear or curvilinear.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 15+ for
    reciprocating generator structure, and subclasses 36+ for oscillating
    generator structure.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 119+, for
    reciprocating or oscillating type of motor systems.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 255+ for electromagnets with reciprocating
    armature.


CLS 322/4
TXT Subject matter within the class definition wherein the generator is
    provided with a flywheel or depends on the use of a massive moving element
    to give the moving element a high inertia characteristic.

    (1)     Note.  The usual purpose of the arrangements of this subclass is to
    minimize minor deviations of the speed of the moving element from its
    average value.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 572+, for flywheel
    structure.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 150 for generator fed
    motor systems with flywheel on generator or motor and subclass 161 for
    motors having flywheels or other massive rotary members.


CLS 322/5
TXT Subject matter within the class definition wherein the polarity of the
    output voltage of the generator is controlled.

    (1)     Note.  The control may be either to maintain a predetermined
    polarity of the output voltage or to reverse the polarity of the output
    voltage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 140, for generator
    polarity control in generator fed motor systems.

    320,    Electricity:  Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass especially subclass 165 and Dig. 15 for polarity
    monitoring or control in a battery or capacitor charging or discharging
    system.


CLS 322/6
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5 wherein the generator polarity is
    controlled by controlling the generator excitation.

    (1)     Note.  Such excitation control may take the form of:  a. Reversal
    of field current. b. Changing the relative strengths of opposed field
    windings. c. Alternate energization of opposed field windings.


CLS 322/7
TXT Subject matter within the class definition wherein both the generator and
    the load circuit (armature circuit) are controlled.

    (1)     Note.  For a statement of the generator and load circuit control
    systems included and excluded from this class, see the class definition,
    especially section I, D.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for systems within the class definition where the generator is
    provided with a plurality of diverse generator control means (i.e., control
    for the armature and fields).

    89,     for systems within the class definition where the generator control
    includes means to control the armature or primary circuit of the generator.


CLS 322/8
TXT Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein the load circuit control includes
    load circuit making and breaking.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass for voltage regulation or circuit making or breaking
    in a battery or capacitor charging or discharging system.


CLS 322/9
TXT Subject matter within the class definition wherein the generator is driven
    by two or more driving means.

    (1)     Note.  Where one of the driving means is a nonelectric prime mover
    and the characteristics of the prime mover are significant or the prime
    mover control is set forth, the subject matter is to be found in Class 290,
    regardless of the characteristics or operation of the other driving means.
    See section I, J, of the class definition for a statement of the general
    line with Class 290.

    (2)     Note.  See section I, H, of the class definition for a reference to
    the nonelectric generator control systems for electric generators and/or
    the generator driving means included in this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14+,    for systems within the class definition having combined control of
    the generator and the driving means.

    17+,    for systems within the class definition having automatic control of
    the generator or driving means.

    38+,    for systems within the class definition having driving means
    control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    290,    Prime Mover Dynamo Plants, see Note (1) above.


CLS 322/10
TXT Subject matter within the class definition wherein means are provided for
    starting and/or stopping the generator.  This involves the physical
    starting and putting the machine into service or taking it out of service
    and stopping it.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, appropriate subclasses, for
    clutches, subclasses 3.21+, for a combination of vortex-flow drive and
    clutch, subclasses 3.5+, for miscellaneous mechanism for the joint control
    of a transmission mechanism and a clutch, subclasses 4+ for the joint
    control of transmission connection and braking mechanism, subclasses 12+,
    for mechanism for applying a clutch and brake alternately to drive and
    retard or stop a mechanism, subclasses 116.5+, for miscellaneous mechanism,
    usually automatic, for stopping a machine.

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants, subclasses 34+ and subclasses 40+, for
    nonelectric prime mover driven generator plants having means for physically
    starting and/or stopping the generator.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 85+
    for interconnection systems having means for connecting or disconnecting a
    plurality of electrical generators.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass for a battery or capacitor charging or discharging
    system that employs a generator.

    477,    Interrelated Power Delivery Controls, Including Engine Control, for
    joint control of a motor and a transmission, clutch, or brake.


CLS 322/11
TXT Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein the starting or stopping of the
    generator is initiated automatically in response to predetermined
    conditions.  Sensing means is provided which is responsive to the condition
    or conditions and initiates the activity of either starting or stopping.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for systems within the class definition having automatic control of
    the generator or driving means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants, subclasses 40+, for nonelectric prime
    mover driven generator plants having automatic means for physical starting
    and/or stopping of the generator.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 86+ for systems
    wherein a generator is started and connected in circuit with other
    generators in response to a condition, such as load demand.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass for a battery or capacitor charging or discharging
    system that employs a generator.


CLS 322/12
TXT Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein a clutching means between the
    generator and driving means is provided for connecting or completely
    disconnecting the drive connection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40+,    which relates to arrangements for controlling a generator by
    controlling the power transmitting mechanism including slip clutches (e.g.,
    magnetic) which do not completely disconnect.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses .03 to .098 for
    mechanism for joint control of a nonelectric motor and clutch, subclass .02
    where the motor is electric, and subclasses 30+ for mechanical clutches.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 92+ for
    magnetic clutches.


CLS 322/13
TXT Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein the driving means for the
    generator is an electric motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for miscellaneous systems within the class definition having
    driving means control for an electric motor driving a generator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 113 for
    structurally united motor generator sets.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 430 to 558 for
    electric motor starting and/or stopping systems.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass for a battery or capacitor charging or discharging
    system that employs a generator.


CLS 322/14
TXT Subject matter within the class definition wherein the system is provided
    with controls for both the generator and the driving means.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition, especially section I,J,a, for a
    statement of the motor generator systems included and excluded from class
    322.

    (2)     Note.  See section I, H, of the class definition for a reference to
    the nonelectric control means for electric generator and/or the generator
    driving means included in this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10+,    for systems within the class definition having means for the
    physical starting and/or stopping of the generator.

    17+,    for systems within the class definition having automatic control of
    the generator or the driving means.

    38+,    for miscellaneous systems within the class definition having
    driving means control.

    44+,    for miscellaneous systems within the class definition having
    generator control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 140+, for generator
    fed motor systems having generator control wherein the generator control
    includes generator and driving means control.


CLS 322/15
TXT Subject matter under subclass 14 wherein the control of the generator and
    the driving means is performed simultaneously.

    (1)     Note.  Usually a single handle or other operating device operates
    both control devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 140+, for generator
    fed motor systems having generator control wherein the generator control
    includes simultaneous generator and driving means control.


CLS 322/16
TXT Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein the generator driving means is an
    electric motor.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition, especially section I, J, a, for a
    statement as to the electric motor driven generator systems included and
    excluded from Class 322.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for systems under the class definition having means for the
    physical starting and/or stopping of the generator where the driving means
    for the generator is an electric motor.

    39,     for miscellaneous systems within the class definition having an
    electric motor for driving the generator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 140+, for generator
    fed motor systems wherein the generator control includes simultaneous
    generator and electric motor driving means control.


CLS 322/17
TXT Subject matter within the class definition wherein the generator or driving
    means are provided with automatic means so that either is controlled in
    response to predetermined conditions.  Sensing means are provided which are
    responsive to the condition or conditions to effectuate the control.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for automatic starting and/or stopping of the generator in response
    to predetermined conditions.

    38,     for miscellaneous systems within the class definition having
    driving means control.

    44,     for miscellaneous systems within the class definition having
    generator control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 141+, for generator
    fed motor systems having automatic generator control.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass for a battery or capacitor charging or discharging
    system with automatic regulation.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, for miscellaneous
    voltage and phase control systems.

    330,    Amplifiers, appropriate subclasses, for amplifier systems,
    generally, including those which may be used in the automatic control of
    generators, particularly subclass 58 in the amplifier systems of which the
    active element is a rotating dynamoelectric machine.


CLS 322/18
TXT Subject matter under subclass 17 wherein the automatic response means
    includes a time delay means to delay the response.

    (1)     Note.  The purpose of such arrangement is to prevent unnecessary
    operation of the control device in response to temporary short time
    deviations from the controlled condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 142+, for generator
    fed motor systems with control of the generator responsive to predetermined
    conditions with time delay in the response.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    especially subclasses 155+ for a battery or capacitor charging or
    discharging system with time control.


CLS 322/19
TXT Subject matter under subclass 17 wherein the automatic control means
    include (1) means responsive to the rate of change of a condition are
    provided for modifying the response of a control device or (2) means are
    provided for minimizing or eliminating the tendency of a control device to
    hunt.

    (1)     Note.  In most cases anti-hunt devices are responsive to rate of
    change and most rate of change responsive devices are used for anti-hunt
    purposes. However, the two devices may have other applications.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 141+ for generator
    fed motor systems having generator control including antihunt or rate of
    change, response, and subclasses 611+, for electric motor position
    servomechanisms.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass for a battery or capacitor charging or discharging
    system with automatic control responsive to a rate of change of condition.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 19 for
    differentiating or integrating networks of the passive type.


CLS 322/20
TXT Subject matter under subclass 17 wherein the automatic control means
    include means responsive to the power factor of the load circuit of the
    generator or phase relationships therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    205-219 for power factor and phase control systems.


CLS 322/21
TXT Subject matter under subclass 17 wherein the control arrangement includes
    line drop compensation means.

    (1)     Note.  The line drop compensation means usually includes an
    electrical equivalent of the load circuit so that the current and voltage
    drops may be duplicated therein.

    (2)     Note.  The control of this subclass permits control of the
    generator and/or its driving means to maintain a predetermined condition at
    a point in the load circuit removed from the generator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for systems within the definition of subclass 17 having the
    automatic control means of other than the line drop compensation type
    responsive to current and voltage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 103
    for line drop compensation systems, per se.


CLS 322/22
TXT Subject matter under subclass 17 wherein the automatic control means are
    responsive to two or more conditions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 452+ for plural
    condition responsive electric motor systems.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass for a battery or capacitor charging or discharging
    system with automatic control responsive to plural conditions.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    234-303, for automatic control of impedance systems in response to plural
    conditions.


CLS 322/23
TXT Subject matter under subclass 22 wherein the plural conditions to which the
    automatic control means are responsive include an electrical condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 453+, for electric
    motor systems responsive to plural conditions including an electrical
    condition.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass for a battery or capacitor charging or discharging
    system with automatic control responsive to plural conditions which include
    an electrical condition.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    234-303, for automatic impedance control systems responsive to plural
    conditions including an electrical condition.


CLS 322/24
TXT Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein the plural conditions to which the
    automatic control means are responsive are electrical conditions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 454+, for electric
    motor systems responsive to plural electrical conditions and subclass 143
    for generator fed motor systems having generator control responsive to
    plural conditions.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass for a battery or capacitor charging or discharging
    system with automatic control responsive to plural conditions.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    234-303, for impedance systems responsive to plural electrical conditions.


CLS 322/25
TXT Subject matter under subclass 24 wherein the plural electrical conditions
    to which the automatic control means are responsive are current and voltage.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes subject matter where the plural
    conditions to which the automatic control means is responsive is the
    product of current and voltage (power).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for subject matter under subclass 17 where the automatic control
    means is responsive to the product of voltage, current and the cosine of
    the included angle.

    21,     for voltage and current responsive line drop compensation systems
    for generator systems.

    27,     for subject matter under subclass 17 where the automatic control
    means is controlled in response to the generator current out-put.  Where
    the generator voltage is substantially constant, this may be considered to
    be a power response.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 143 for generator fed
    motor systems having generator control responsive to voltage and current
    and subclass 455 for electric motor systems responsive to voltage and
    current.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass for a battery or capacitor charging or discharging
    system with automatic control responsive to voltage and current conditions.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    234-303, for automatic impedance systems responsive to voltage and current.


CLS 322/26
TXT Subject matter under subclass 17 wherein the automatic control means is
    responsive to light or utilizes a photo-sensitive circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+, and the classes and subclasses
    specified in the Notes to the definition of these subclasses for photocell
    controlled circuits and photocell apparatus.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    221-902, for light responsive electric space discharge device voltage
    magnitude control systems.


CLS 322/27
TXT Subject matter under subclass 17 wherein the automatic control means is
    responsive to generator current output.

    (1)     Note.  Where the generator voltage is substantially constant this
    may be considered to be a power response.  For actual power output response
    (e.g., voltage and current product or the product of voltage, current and
    cosine of included angle), search this class, subclasses 20 and 25.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for automatic control in response to phase relationships.  See Note
    1 above.

    25,     for automatic control in response to voltage and current.  See Note
    1 above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass for a battery or capacitor charging or discharging
    system with automatic control responsive to a current condition.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    220-354, for constant current systems.


CLS 322/28
TXT Subject matter under subclass 17 wherein the automatic control means is
    controlled in response to the generator output voltage or the voltage of
    the circuit supplied by the generator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for generator systems under subclass 17 wherein the control
    arrangement includes line drop compensation means (i.e., usually an
    electrical equivalent of the load circuit so that the current and voltage
    drops may be duplicated therein) so as to permit control of the generator
    system to maintain a predetermined condition at a point in the load circuit
    remote from the generator.

    25,     and the subclasses specified in the notes to the definition of that
    subclass for generator systems under subclass 17 having the automatic
    control means responsive to current and voltage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass for a battery or capacitor charging or discharging
    system with automatic control responsive to a voltage condition.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    220-354, for constant voltage systems.


CLS 322/29
TXT Subject matter under subclass 17 wherein the automatic control of the
    generator is in response to the speed or frequency of the generator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 87 for
    systems for the interconnection of plural generators upon attainment of a
    predetermined frequency condition.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass for source regulation in a battery or capacitor
    charging or discharging system.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 160+ for speed
    measuring, and subclasses 76.39+ for frequency measuring.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 236+ for
    speed responsive systems.

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, art collections 924+ for
    running-speed control systems including a feedback device responsive to the
    speed of the motor.


CLS 322/30
TXT Subject matter under subclass 29 wherein the speed or frequency responsive
    device includes a centrifugal or fly-weight governor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 488+ for a speed responsive
    device, per se.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 80 for
    centrifugal switches.

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, art collections 924+ for
    running-speed control systems including a centrifugal feedback device
    responsive to the speed of the motor.


CLS 322/31
TXT Subject matter under subclass 29 wherein a tachometer device is utilized to
    produce an energy output which is a measure of the speed and such output is
    used to provide the control.

    (1)     Note.  Although the tachometer device is in most cases an electric
    generator whose output voltage or frequency is proportional to the speed,
    other devices are also used (e.g., pumps etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, appropriate subclasses for
    tachometer generators, per se.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 160+ for speed
    measuring systems using a tachometer generator.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 236+ for
    speed responsive systems using a tachometer generator.

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, subclasses 800+ for
    running-speed control systems including a feedback device responsive to the
    speed of the motor.


CLS 322/32
TXT Subject matter under subclass 29 wherein a frequency responsive device or
    network is utilized to produce a control dependent on the speed of
    frequency for controlling the generator or driving means.

    (1)     Note.  The frequency responsive device or network may take such
    diverse forms as a synchronous motor, a frequency meter or a tuned circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 76.39+ for electric
    frequency measuring.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 1+ for electrical oscillation generating
    systems having a phase or frequency sensing means for automatically
    stabilizing the frequency of the generated oscillations.

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, subclasses 800+, especially
    805, 814 and 820 for running-speed control systems including frequency
    responsive feedback devices or networks.


CLS 322/33
TXT Subject matter under subclass 17 wherein the automatic control of the
    generator or driving means is in response to temperature or thermal
    conditions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for systems within the class definition which have a thermoelectric
    generator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclasses 4+ for the
    structure of thermoelectric generators.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 471+ for thermally
    responsive motor control.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    subclasses 150+ for battery charging with detection of a thermal condition.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 369, for
    thermal responsive impedance systems in general.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 92, 104 and 106 for
    thermally actuated electric meters.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    appropriate subclasses for electrothermally and thermally actuated switches.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 584+ for electric signaling
    systems automatically responsive to temperature.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 179+ for a thermoelectric
    sensor in a temperature measuring system.

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, art collection 934 for
    running-speed control systems including a feedback device responsive to a
    thermal condition.


CLS 322/34
TXT Subject matter under subclass 33 wherein the thermal condition or
    conditions to which the control is responsive exists in the generator
    and/or driving means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 473 for motor control
    responsive to thermal conditions of the motor.


CLS 322/35
TXT Subject matter under subclass 17 wherein the generator or driving means is
    automatically controlled in response to fluid pressure.

    (1)     Note.  The fluid pressure may be wind pressure.

    (2)     Note.  Where fluid pressure is varied in response to some other
    condition, the other condition should be searched. For example, a generator
    system controlled by means of a voltage responsive hydraulic arrangement
    should be searched in subclass 28.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     see note 1 above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, art collections 929+ for
    running-speed or acceleration control systems including a feedback device
    responsive to fluid pressure.


CLS 322/36
TXT Subject matter under subclass 17 wherein the automatic control arrangement
    includes means for setting up a reference standard with means for comparing
    the condition to be controlled with the reference standard. The control
    system is usually responsive to the difference between the reference
    standard and the condition.

    (1)     Note.  The particular condition set up by the standard is not
    material in this subclass.  If the particular condition (e.g., voltage,
    frequency, etc.) is significant, the preceding subclasses under subclass 17
    relating to the particular condition should be searched.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for systems under subclass 17 having the automatic control means
    controlled in accordance with electrical conditions in a circuit other than
    the circuit in which the generator is connected.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 449+, for electric
    motor control having automatic control with respect to a standard, master
    or reference device.


CLS 322/37
TXT Subject matter under subclass 17 wherein the generator or driving means is
    controlled in accordance with electrical conditions in a circuit other than
    that in which the generator is connected.

    (1)     Note.  In most cases the generator is a control element which
    controls some device which is connected to the circuit:  (e.g., the
    generator may be an exciter controlled in accordance with the output
    voltage of a main generator or the generator may be an amplifier device for
    controlling a motor in accordance with its load).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for generator systems under subclass 17 wherein the automatic
    control arrangement includes means for setting up a reference standard with
    means for comparing the condition to be controlled with the reference
    standard.

    59+,    for exciter generator control.

    78,     for generator control wherein a generator provides an auxiliary
    electromotive force in the field circuit of a main generator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 530, for motor field
    circuit control having plural sources wherein a generator is one of the
    sources and is controlled in accordance with an electrical condition of the
    motor and 521+ for exciter generator control of a motor field circuit.


CLS 322/38
TXT Subject matter within the class definition wherein the generator driving
    means is controlled to control the system.

    (1)     Note.  See section I,H, of the  class definition for a reference to
    the nonelectrical control means for the generator driving means included in
    this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for generator systems within the class definition having a
    plurality of driving means.

    10+,    for generator systems within the class definition having means to
    control the generator driving means for starting and/or stopping the
    generator (putting the generator into and/or out of service).

    14+,    for this subject matter wherein the system is provided with
    controls for both the generator and the driving means.

    17+,    for this subject matter where the system includes automatic control
    of the driving means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, for prime mover
    driven generator supplied electric lamp and gas or vapor discharge systems,
    the system including control means for the prime mover.


CLS 322/39
TXT Subject matter under subclass 38 wherein the generator is driven by an
    electric motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for generator systems within the class definition which have the
    generator driven by a plurality of electric motors.

    16,     for this subject matter where the system includes controls for both
    the electric motor and the generator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 102+, 150, and 174+
    for dynamoelectric machine converter systems which may have electric motor
    driving means control or its equivalent.  For the electric motor driven
    generator systems which are considered to be conversion systems, see
    section I, J, A, of the class definition of this class (322).


CLS 322/40
TXT Subject matter within the class definition wherein a power transmitting
    mechanism is interposed between the generator and driving means and the
    transmitting mechanism is controlled to control the energy supplied to the
    generator by the driving means.

    (1)     Note.  See section I, H, of the class definition for a reference to
    the nonelectrical means for controlling the power transmission means for
    the generator included in this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10+,    for this subject matter where the system includes means to control
    power transmission mechanism for starting and/or stopping the generator
    (putting the generator into and/or out of service), see indented subclass
    12 where the system includes a clutching means between the generator and
    driving means for connecting or completely disconnecting the drive
    connection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 325+, for a fluid transmission, per se, in
    which a driven fluid impeller supplies motive fluid to an output motor.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, appropriate subclasses for
    clutches and mechanism involving the joint control of the application of
    power and brake or other stopping means.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 92+ for
    magnetic clutches.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, for planetary
    gearing power transmissions.

    476,    Friction Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclass 11 for
    electric or magnetic control of friction gear transmissions.


CLS 322/41
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 wherein the power transmitting mechanism
    is of the friction type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass .02 to .098, for
    mechanism for the joint control of a motor and clutch, subclass 3.5, for
    mechanism for the joint control of the power transmission and a brake,
    subclasses 12+, for mechanism having a clutch and brake applied alternately
    to drive and retard the mechanism, subclasses 30+, for clutches, see
    indented subclasses 103+, for speed responsive clutches.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses 183+,
    for frictional planetary gearing.

    476,    Friction Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclass 11 for
    electric or magnetic control of friction gear transmissions.


CLS 322/42
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 wherein the friction type power
    transmitting mechanism is in the form of a belt drive.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, appropriate
    subclasses for an endless belt power transmission.


CLS 322/43
TXT Subject matter under subclass 42 wherein the belt drive is controlled by
    controlling belt slip.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, appropriate
    subclasses for variable speed belt drive; and subclasses 101+ for means for
    adjusting belt tension.


CLS 322/44
TXT Subject matter within the class definition and not classified in one of the
    preceding subclasses wherein the generator system is controlled by
    controlling the generator.

    (1)     Note.  See section I, H, of the class definition for a reference to
    the nonelectric control system for generators included in this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for this subject matter where the electric generator is not of the
    electromagnetic induction type.

    3,      for this subject matter where the generator is a reciprocating
    and/or oscillating type generator.

    4,      for this subject matter where the generator is provided with
    flywheels or massive moving parts.

    5+,     for this subject matter where the polarity of the output voltage of
    the generator is controlled.

    7,      for this subject matter where the system includes control of the
    generating means and control of the output circuit.

    9,      for this subject matter where the generator is provided with a
    plurality of driving means.

    10+,    for this subject matter where means are provided for stopping or
    starting the generator (putting the generator into service or stopping the
    generator).

    14+,    for this subject matter where there is also control of the
    generator driving means.

    17+,    for this subject matter where the system includes automatic control
    means for the generator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 302+, and
    the subclasses specified in the notes to the definitions of subclasses for
    generator supplied lamps and gas or vapor discharge device systems, the
    generator being provided with control means.

    330,    Amplifiers, particularly subclass 58 for amplifiers having a
    dynamoelectric machine as the active element.


CLS 322/45
TXT Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein the generator control is
    effectuated by a plurality of diverse controls (e.g., combined control by
    controlling field structure and field excitation).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7+,     for this subject matter where the systems include control of the
    generating means and control of the armature circuit.

    17+,    for this subject matter where the system includes automatic control
    means for the generator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 491, for combined
    motor circuit and motor structure controls and subclass 493 for combined
    armature and field circuit controls.


CLS 322/46
TXT Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein the generator field structure
    combines permanent magnet and wound field structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 181 for structure
    of a generator having both a permanent magnet and a wound field structure.


CLS 322/47
TXT Subject matter under subclass 43 wherein the generator is an induction
    generator.

    (1)     Note.  An induction generator is a dynamoelectric machine having
    the same structure as an induction motor.  It operates as a generator when
    connected to a line which can supply a leading current component for
    exciting the machine and it is driven at a greater than synchronous speed.
    Since it is structurally identical with an induction motor, Classes 172 and
    318 should be searched for structural features.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 166+ for
    induction motor structure.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 727+ for induction
    motor systems.  See (1) Note above.


CLS 322/48
TXT Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein the generator is an acyclic or
    homopolar type generator.

    (1)     Note.  An acyclic or homopolar generator is a generator in which
    the voltage generated in the active conductors maintains the same direction
    with respect to those conductors.  Such machines are of the commutatorless
    type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 178 for the
    structure of a homopolar or acyclic generator.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 253, for homopolar
    motor systems.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclasses 100+ for plasma generating and control devices, yielding or
    intended to yield sustained nuclear (fusion) reactions.


CLS 322/49
TXT Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein the generator is controlled by
    controlling the structure of parts which form at least a portion of the
    magnetic circuit of the generator.

    (1)     Note.  See sections I, H, of the class definition for a reference
    to the nonelectric control means for generator structure which is excluded
    from this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for systems within the class definition where the generator has a
    moving generating means which may be the armature or the field structure
    which has a reciprocating motion.

    57,     for generator control under subclass 44 where the generator control
    means includes means for saturating the generator magnetic structure by
    means of a winding which is in noninductive relationship to the armature or
    field winding of the generator.

    59+,    for generator control under subclass 44 where the generator is
    controlled by controlling an excitation winding.  See indented subclasses
    59+, for generator control by means of a variable length field winding.

    89+,    for generator control under subclass 44 where the generator is
    controlled by controlling the armature circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 191 for
    adjustable magnetic structure for generators.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclasses, particularly subclass 123, for a battery or
    capacitor charging or discharging system including a generator.

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, subclasses 835+ for
    running-speed control systems in which motor structure is altered.


CLS 322/50
TXT Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein the generator magnetic structure
    includes a magnetic shunt for the field flux.  Such shunt diverts the field
    flux away from the armature.


CLS 322/51
TXT Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein the generator magnetic structure
    control relates to the rotor element or rotating member of the generator.

    (1)     Note.  While the rotor element usually is the armature in a direct
    current machine, it may be either the armature or field structure of an
    alternating current machine depending on its design.


CLS 322/52
TXT Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein the generator magnetic structure
    control relates to the stator element or the portion of the generator which
    contains the stationary (nonrotary) parts of the magnetic circuit.

    (1)     Note.  While the stator element usually is the field structure in a
    direct current machine, it may be either the armature or field structure of
    an alternating current machine depending on its design.


CLS 322/53
TXT Subject matter under subclass 44 where the generator has one or more pairs
    of load brushes and an auxiliary (or third) brush intermediately positioned
    between the load brushes with one of the generator windings (field or
    armature) or a portion thereof or a circuit connected between the auxiliary
    brush and one load brush.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes systems having a third brush type
    generator with the field winding or a field winding connected between the
    auxiliary (or third) brush and one load brush. Also included are generator
    systems having the armature winding or a portion thereof connected to a
    short circuit between the auxiliary (or third brush) and one load brush.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54+,    for generator systems within the class definition where the
    generator control includes means to adjust the position of the generator
    brushes.

    91+,    for generator systems within the class definition where the
    generator is controlled by short circuiting the armature winding or a
    portion thereof, see indented subclass 92 where the generator is provided
    with a pair of auxiliary brushes and the short circuit is between the
    auxiliary brushes (cross-field generators).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 9.1+
    for third brush generators used in electric systems on vehicles.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 148 for
    dynamoelectric machines having a third brush or additional sets of brushes.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclasses, particularly subclass 123, for a battery or
    capacitor charging or discharging system including a generator.


CLS 322/54
TXT Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein the generator control includes
    means to adjust the current collecting mechanism (brushes).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes adjusting the position of the brush
    and brush lifting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 240 for brush
    lifters for dynamoelectric machines, and subclass 241 for circumferential
    adjustment of the brushes for a dynamoelectric machine.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 292, for motor
    reversing systems by brush shifting and subclass 541 for motor control by
    brush or other current collector or transfer means control.

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, subclass 836 for running-speed
    control systems in which brushes are moved.


CLS 322/55
TXT Subject matter under subclass 54 wherein the current collecting mechanism
    control includes circumferential movement of the mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 241 for
    circumferential adjustment of the brushes for a dynamoelectric machine.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 292 for motor
    reversing by circumferential movement of brushes, and subclass 541, for
    motor control by circumferential movement of brushes.

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, subclass 836 for running-speed
    control systems in which brushes are moved.


CLS 322/56
TXT Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein the circumferentially movable
    current collecting mechanism is moved continuously.


CLS 322/57
TXT Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein the generator control includes
    means for saturating at least a portion of the generator magnetic structure
    without introducing therein a magneto-motive force which either aids or
    opposes the magneto-motive force produced by the armature or field windings.

    (1)     Note.  The saturating means is usually a winding which is in
    inductive relationship to the magnetic structure to be saturated, and which
    is in noninductive relationship to the armature and field windings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for generator systems within the class definition where the
    generator is controlled by controlling the structure of parts which form at
    least part of the magnetic circuit of the generator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 249,
    302, 310, and 329, for saturable reactors.


CLS 322/58
TXT Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein the system includes means for
    suppressing, eliminating or minimizing undesired frequencies.

    (1)     Note.  The suppressing, eliminating or minimizing means may be in
    any of the generator circuits (excitation circuit, armature circuit, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 167+ for wave
    filter networks.


CLS 322/59
TXT Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein the generator is controlled by
    controlling an excitation winding or an excitation winding circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for generator systems within the class definition which are
    provided with means to control the polarity of the generator by controlling
    the excitation of the generator.

    45,     for this subject matter where the generator is controlled by a
    plurality of diverse controls (e.g. controlling field structure and field
    excitation).

    46,     for generator control systems under subclass 44 where the generator
    field structure combines permanent magnet and wound field structure.

    48,     for generator control systems under subclass 44 where the generator
    is an acyclic or homopolar generator with means to control an excitation
    winding or an excitation winding circuit.

    49+,    for generator control systems under subclass 44 where the generator
    is controlled by controlling the structure of the parts which form the
    magnetic circuit of the generator.

    53,     for generator control systems under subclass 44 where the generator
    has an odd number of brushes (3rd brush type) including such systems where
    the generator has a field winding connected between the auxiliary (3rd)
    brush and one of the load brushes.

    54+,    for generator control systems under subclass 44 where the generator
    control includes means to adjust the current collection mechanism (brushes).

    57,     for generator control systems under subclass 44 where the generator
    control includes means for saturating at least a portion of the generator
    structure by means of a winding which is in noninductive relationship to
    the armature and field winding.

    58,     for generator control systems under subclass 44 where the system
    includes means (such as a filter) for eliminating, suppressing or
    minimizing undesired frequencies.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, and subclasses 521+, for motor
    field circuit control, subclasses 710+ for synchronous motor field
    excitation removal; subclasses 712+ for synchronous motor field excitation
    application; subclasses 716+ for synchronous motor field circuits.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclasses, particularly subclass 123, for a battery or
    capacitor charging or discharging system including a generator.

    330,    Amplifiers, particularly subclass 58 for amplifier systems whose
    active element is a rotating dynamoelectric machine.

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, subclasses 843 and 849+ for
    field circuit acceleration control systems.


CLS 322/60
TXT Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein a substitute or auxiliary source
    of voltage is provided to energize the excitation circuit of the generator
    during the starting period so that the generator can "build up" its output
    voltage means being provided for discontinuing the supply to the excitation
    circuit from the substitute or auxiliary source when the generator has
    attained a predetermined output voltage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for generator systems within the class definition where means are
    provided for physical starting and putting the generator into service.

    28,     for generator systems within the class definition having automatic
    control means responsive to the generator output voltage for discontinuing
    the supply of the voltage to the excitation circuit when the generator
    output voltage has attained a predetermined value.

    86,     for generator systems under subclass 59 having the generator
    excitation circuit supplied from two or more sources of electric energy,
    both sources usually being used during the normal operation of the
    generator.


CLS 322/61
TXT Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the current supplied to the
    excitation circuit is alternating current.

    (1)     Note.  Where alternating current is rectified and the rectified
    current is supplied to the field winding, this patent is not classified in
    this subclass but will be found in subclass 79.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     see note 1, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 244+, for
    alternating current commutating motors, subclasses 246+, for alternating
    current series motors, subclass 700, for synchronous motor alternating
    current energized field circuits; subclasses 731+ for induction motors
    having a secondary winding energized also by alternating current; subclass
    737 for induction motors having an added primary winding energized by
    induction from a secondary motor winding.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 174+ for
    dynamoelectric frequency converter systems wherein the converter is excited
    with alternating current.


CLS 322/62
TXT Subject matter under subclass 59 where the generator has a plurality of
    poles, the generator or the excitation circuit being designed so that the
    generator may be operated as a generator having one number of sets of poles
    or as a generator having another and different number of sets of poles.

    (1)     Note.  For example, the generator may be provided with eight poles,
    the generator or the excitation circuit being arranged so that the
    generator may be operated as an eight pole generator or a four pole
    generator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 704 for plural pole
    type synchronous motors, subclasses 773+ for plural pole type induction
    motors, and subclass 524 for plural pole type motor systems.


CLS 322/63
TXT Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the generator is provided with
    more than one field winding.

    (1)     Note.  A plurality of windings connected in series or parallel to
    produce only one magnetic field is considered to be only a single field
    winding.  To be classified in this or the indented subclasses, the
    generator should have a plurality of windings connected in circuit to
    produce a plurality of different magnetic fields. One of the windings may
    produce a magnetic field which opposes the field produced by another
    winding in indented subclass 64.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for generator systems under subclass 44, where the generator is
    provided with a winding for saturating at least a portion of the generator
    magnetic structure without introducing a magneto-motive force which either
    aids or opposes the magneto-motive force produced by the field or armature
    winding.

    62,     for generator systems under subclass 59, where the field windings
    or excitation circuits are designed so that the generator may be operated
    as either a generator having one number of sets of poles or as a generator
    having another and different number of sets of poles (i.e., either an
    8-pole or a 4-pole generator).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electric Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 184+ for
    dynamoelectric machine structure having a plurality of field or excitation
    windings.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 304+, for
    electric lamp and gas or vapor discharge device systems having the supply
    generator supplied with a plurality of fields for regulating the system.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 297+, for motor
    reversing systems having plural field windings, and subclasses 523+, for
    motor control systems having plural field windings, subclasses 700+ for
    synchronous motor systems having plural field windings, particularly
    subclasses 716+ for field circuits of synchronous motors.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclasses, particularly subclass 123, for a battery or
    capacitor charging or discharging system including a generator.

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, subclasses 801+, 803+ and 826+
    for running-speed control systems for motors with more than one field
    winding, and 843 and 849+ for acceleration control systems for motors with
    more than one field winding.


CLS 322/64
TXT Subject matter under subclass 63 wherein the magnetomotive force of at
    least one field winding is opposed to the magnetomotive force of at least
    one other field winding.

    (1)     Note.  Where the generator includes a plurality of field windings,
    some of which are opposed and others aid, the subject matter is found in
    this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 188 for
    dynamoelectric machines having plural differentially related field windings.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 525, for motor systems
    wherein the motor is provided with plural differentially related field
    windings.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclasses, particularly subclass 123, for a battery or
    capacitor charging or discharging system including a generator.


CLS 322/65
TXT Subject matter under subclass 63 wherein the generator is provided with
    interpole or commutating pole windings.

    (1)     Note.  An interpole or commutating pole is an auxiliary pole member
    placed between the main pole pieces of a commutating machine.  Its exciting
    winding carries a current proportional to the load current and produces a
    magnetomotive force which minimizes or eliminates sparking at the brushes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 186 for
    dynamoelectric machines having interpole or commutating pole winding
    structure.


CLS 322/66
TXT Subject matter under subclass 63 wherein the plural field windings include
    compensating windings.

    (1)     Note.  Compensating windings are windings placed in slots in the
    pole faces of the generator pole pieces which produce a magnetomotive force
    equal and opposite to that produced by the armature and so prevent field
    distortion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 186 for
    dynamoelectric machines having compensating winding structure.


CLS 322/67
TXT Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the excitation of the generator is
    produced by a series field winding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63+,    for this subject matter where the generator has other field
    windings in addition to the series field winding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 246+, for series
    motor systems.


CLS 322/68
TXT Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the excitation of the generator is
    controlled by short circuiting a field winding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     for generator control under subclass 44 where the generator is
    provided with a magnetic shunt to shunt the field flux from the armature.

    71,     for generator control where only a portion of the field winding is
    short circuited so that the generator is controlled by varying the length
    of a field winding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 528, for motor control
    with means to short circuit a field winding and subclass 299 for motor
    reversing control with means for short circuiting one or more field
    windings.


CLS 322/69
TXT Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the generator excitation is
    controlled by interrupting the supply of voltage to a field winding by
    means of a circuit maker and breaker.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for generator control under subclass 44 where the supply of voltage
    to the excitation circuit is interrupted by lifting the generator brushes.

    72+,    for generator control under subclass 59 where the excitation
    circuit is controlled by means of an electric space discharge device,
    vacuum tube gas vapor tube, or arc which may at times interrupt the supply
    of voltage to a field winding.

    83,     for generator control under subclass 59 where the excitation
    circuit is controlled by short circuiting a resistor in the excitation
    circuit, thereby varying the flow of current to a field winding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 104
    for electrical systems which include therein an electromagnet or other
    highly inductive device.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 710+ for synchronous
    motors having field circuit control by breaking the field supply circuit.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 52+ for
    safety and protection systems where the source of energy is controlled to
    control an improper operating condition (e.g., line fault).


CLS 322/70
TXT Subject matter under subclass 69 wherein the generator excitation circuit
    is intermittently completed and opened.

    (1)     Note.  The effective average excitation current is determined by
    the frequency of the interruption and the ratio of the time the circuit is
    completed to the time the circuit is broken.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     for generator control systems under subclass 59 where a resistor in
    series with a field winding is periodically short circuited.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 19+ for
    miscellaneous periodic switches.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 96+
    for electrical systems which are regulated by an intermittent regulatory
    interruption of the system.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 537 for motor control
    by intermittently or repetitiously operated field circuit making and/or
    breaking means.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 87+ for electromagnetically operated periodic
    switches.


CLS 322/71
TXT Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the generator excitation is
    controlled by varying the length of the field windings.

    (1)     Note.  The variation in length of the field winding is usually
    attained by providing the field winding with taps.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for generator control systems under subclass 44 where the control
    of the generator is effected by controlling the structure of the magnetic
    circuit of the generator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 189 for
    dynamoelectric machine structure having the field or excitation windings
    adjustable as to effective length, as by taps.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 235 for induction
    motor secondary circuit control having variable number of effective
    conductors or turns, and subclass 531, for motor control by variable length
    field winding.


CLS 322/72
TXT Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the generator excitation circuit
    is controlled by means of one or more electric space discharge devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for systems for controlling the operation of electric lamps and
    gas or vapor discharge devices.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, and 532, for motor control by
    space discharge device in field circuit.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 227
    and 291, for space discharge device regulating systems.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 518+ for miscellaneous control circuits utilizing an
    electronic space discharge device.

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, art collections 913+ for motor
    control systems including space discharge devices.


CLS 322/73
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the space discharge device is
    provided with a discharge control device in addition to the load current
    carrying electrodes.

    (1)     Note.  The control device controls the conductivity of the space
    discharge device.  It may take such forms as an electrostatic grid, an
    electromagnetic winding for a magnetic field in which the discharge is
    controlled or an igniting device for initiating the flow of current in a
    vapor or gas discharge device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 349+ and
    the subclasses specified in the notes to the definition of those subclasses
    for systems for controlling the operation of gas or vapor discharge devices
    (including lamps) of the discharge control type.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 677+, particularly
    subclass 682, for position servomechanisms including space discharge type
    controls subclasses 700+ for induction motor control  having primary or
    armature circuit control by space discharge devices, subclasses 727+ for
    induction motor control having secondary circuit by space discharge
    devices, subclasses 505+, for motor control by space discharge devices in
    armature circuit, and subclass 532 for motor control by space discharge
    devices having control elements in field circuit.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation  Systems, subclasses 227
    and 291, for space discharge regulating systems wherein the space discharge
    device is provided with a discharge control element.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 518+ for miscellaneous control circuits utilizing an
    electronic space discharge device.

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, art collections 913+ for motor
    control systems including space discharge devices.


CLS 322/74
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the space discharge device or
    devices are electric arcs.

    (1)     Note.  The systems in this subclass are limited to those in which
    the discharge is between electrodes exposed to the atmosphere.  Other
    systems under subclass 72 where the discharge has negative resistance
    characteristics (arc) are in subclass 72 or indented subclass 73 where the
    discharge device has a control device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     see note 1 above.

    73,     see note 1 above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    appropriate subclasses for systems, including arc discharge devices of the
    consumable electrode type which are provided with means for controlling
    current flowing in the arc.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 326+ and
    the subclasses specified in the notes to these subclasses, for
    miscellaneous systems for controlling the operation of electric arcs.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 227
    and 291, for space discharge device regulating systems of the electric arc
    type.


CLS 322/75
TXT Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the excitation of the generator is
    controlled by means of impedance in the excitation circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for generator field control by means of space discharge devices.
    Under some conditions, a space discharge device may be used as an impedance
    and subclasses 72+ should be searched for such systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 249+, for series
    motor control by means of motor circuit impedance, and subclasses 534+ and
    533+, for motor control by field circuit impedance, subclasses 700+ for
    synchronous motor control, particularly subclasses 710+ for field circuit
    control by means of impedance; subclass 784 for impedance control of the
    induction motor primary circuit during starting; subclass 792 for single
    phase start winding removal control circuit which includes a variable
    temperature coefficient impedance in circuit; subclasses 794+ for split
    phase capacitor motor circuits; subclass 796 for split phase capacitor
    motor circuits including a saturable winding in the circuits; subclass 797
    for split phase motor circuits using saturable winding in the circuits;
    subclass 804 for induction motor primary circuits responsive to speed or
    rotation phase angle with controlled magnetic reactance in circuits;
    subclasses 814+ for voltage control of induction motor primary circuit by
    impedance; subclasses 816+ for split phase induction motors with voltage
    control of primary circuit by impedance; subclasses 821+ for induction
    motor control with impedance in secondary circuit.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclasses, particularly subclass 123, for a battery or
    capacitor charging or discharging system including a generator.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 364, for
    impedance systems in general.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 68+ for mechanically variable
    electrical resistors such as rheostats.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 277+ for
    variable condensers.

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, subclasses 800+ and 825+ for
    motor speed control systems and 842+ and 848+ for motor acceleration
    control systems including selectable or variable impedance devices.


CLS 322/76
TXT Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein the generator excitation circuit
    impedance control involves plural impedances.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes arrangements wherein there are a
    plurality of different impedances in the field circuit.  A sectionalized
    impedance is not considered to be a plurality of impedances (e.g., a
    plurality of resistance sections connected in series with means for
    controlling the number of sections in the field circuit would be searched
    in subclass 80).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80+,    see note 1 above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 534, for motor control
    by plural field circuit impedances.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclasses, particularly subclass 123, for a battery or
    capacitor charging or discharging system including a generator.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 364, for
    impedance systems involving plural impedances.


CLS 322/77
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 wherein the plural impedances form a
    bridge.

    (1)     Note.  A bridge is a four terminal closed circuit impedance network
    having alternate terminals connected to input and output terminals
    respectively.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 663+, for position
    servomechanisms which may include a bridge in the error detector circuit
    and subclass 535 for motor control by means of bridge network impedance
    control.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 365, for
    bridge networks.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 600+ for impedance
    measuring bridge networks, and subclasses 98+ and 101 for bridge networks
    utilized in electric meters.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 169 for wave filters
    of the Wheatstone bridge or lattice type.


CLS 322/78
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 wherein the plural impedances in the
    excitation circuit make up a tuned or resonant circuit.  Such circuit must
    include both capacitance and inductance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 175+ for wave
    filters of the resonant, discrete frequency selective type, and subclasses
    219+ for resonators of the distributed parameter type.

    334,    Tuners, appropriate subclass for tuned networks for use in wave
    energy apparatus and comprising inductance and capacitance elements in
    circuit arrangement to form a resonant circuit and in which structure is
    provided for adjusting one or both of these elements for changing the mean
    resonant frequency of the circuit.


CLS 322/79
TXT Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein a rectifier or unidirectionally
    conductive element is used as an excitation circuit impedance.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is not concerned with the use of a rectifier
    in the excitation circuit to convert alternating to direct current.  Such
    an arrangement is found throughout subclasses 59 to 88 depending on the
    significant control arrangement of the excitation circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59+,    see note 1 above.

    78+,    for generator excitation control systems under subclass 59 having a
    plurality of impedances.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses for active solid-state devices which may be used as
    rectifying elements.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 364, for
    circuits using rectifiers as impedance elements.


CLS 322/80
TXT Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein the generator excitation circuit
    is controlled by means of one or more resistors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76+,    for generator excitation control systems under subclass 59 having a
    plurality of impedances.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 700+, particularly
    subclasses 716+, for synchronous motor field control by resistance;
    subclass 784 for resistance control of the induction motor primary circuit
    during starting; subclass 814 for resistance control of the primary circuit
    voltage during running; subclasses 821+ for resistance control of the
    induction motor secondary during running; subclasses 238+, for induction
    motor secondary circuit control by resistance, and subclasses 533+ for
    motor field resistance control.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclasses, particularly subclass 123, for a battery or
    capacitor charging or discharging system including a generator.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 364, for
    miscellaneous resistance systems.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, appropriate subclasses, for electrical
    resistors and rheostats.

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, subclasses 800+ and 825+ for
    motor speed control systems and 842+ and 848+ for motor acceleration
    control systems including selectable or variable impedance devices.


CLS 322/81
TXT Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the excitation circuit resistor is
    a temperature variable resistor.

    (1)     Note.  Thermally varied resistances may either be (1) resistors
    whose resistance varies inherently with variation in temperature (e.g., the
    resistance of copper increases with increase in temperature while the
    resistance of carbon decreases with increase in temperature) or (2)
    resistors which are varied by means of a temperature responsive operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33+,    for automatic control of the generator in response to thermal
    conditions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 471+, for thermally
    responsive motor control systems and subclass 533 for motor control having
    thermally varied field resistance.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    subclasses 150+ for a charging or discharging circuit for a battery or
    capacitor that includes thermal condition detection.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 369, for
    thermally varied resistance systems.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 25+ for variable electrical
    resistors responsive to a change in ambient temperature.


CLS 322/82
TXT Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the excitation circuit resistor is
    a pressure variable resistor.

    (1)     Note.  Although the usual pressure varied resistor takes the form
    of a carbon pile, this subclass is not restricted thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for generator systems within the class definition wherein the
    generator is automatically controlled in response to a condition (as a
    pressure condition), see indented subclass 35 for such automatic control
    systems where the generator is controlled in response to fluid pressure.

    35,     for fluid pressure responsive generator control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 481 for electric motor
    control in response to pressure in a fluid or granular material and
    subclass 533 for motor field circuit control including pressure varied
    resistor.

    320,    Electricity: Battery and Condenser Charging and Discharging,
    subclass 70, for generation systems for battery charging with pressure
    varied impedance field circuit control.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 295, for
    resistance systems including pressure varied resistors.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 36+ for fluid or gas pressure
    actuated electrical resistors, and subclasses 99+ for electrical resistors
    of the compressible type.


CLS 322/83
TXT Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the generator excitation circuit
    is controlled by short circuiting the resistor or a portion thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for generator control systems under subclass 59 where the
    excitation of the generator is controlled by short circuiting a field
    winding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 533, for electric
    motor field circuit control by short circuiting a resistor.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 297
    and 298, for resistance systems including short circuited resistors.


CLS 322/84
TXT Subject matter under subclass 83 wherein the short circuit of the control
    resistor is intermittently completed and opened.

    (1)     Note.  In the systems in this subclass the effective value of the
    resistor is determined by the periodicity of the circuit making and
    breaking and the ratio of the time the shunting circuit is open to the time
    it is closed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for generator control by continuous making and breaking of the
    excitation. In subclass 70 the excitation circuit is periodically opened
    and closed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 533 for motor control
    by means of intermittently short circuiting and opening a short circuit
    about a resistance in the excitation circuit.


CLS 322/85
TXT Subject matter under subclass 83 wherein the excitation circuit resistor is
    short circuited step by step.

    (1)     Note.  In some of the systems in this subclass, the resistor is
    divided into a plurality of sections and switching means are provided so
    that each of the portions may be short circuited in regular order so that
    at one extreme of the switching operation all sections are short circuited
    and at the other extreme, none of the sections are short circuited.  To be
    classified in this subclass, the resistor need not be arranged so that the
    sections are short circuited in regular order.  The system may be arranged
    so that the resistor sections may be short circuited in any order desired.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 533 for motor control
    short circuiting step by step of field resistor.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 297, for
    resistance systems wherein a resistor is short circuited step by step.


CLS 322/86
TXT Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the generator excitation circuit
    is energized from two or more sources of electric energy and the excitation
    current depends on the resultant of the two or more voltages impressed
    thereby.

    (1)     Note.  Usually one of the sources of electric energy is the
    generator output to which is added or from which is subtracted the
    auxiliary electromotive force.  Usually both sources of electric energy are
    used in the normal operation of the generator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for generator systems under subclass 59 having a substitute or
    auxiliary source of electric energy to energize the excitation circuit
    during the starting period, the supply from the substitute or  auxiliary
    source being discontinued after the generator has "built up" to a
    predetermined voltage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmissions or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 43+
    for electrical systems in which a single load is supplied by a plurality of
    sources or supply circuits for electrical energy.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, and subclass 530 for motor
    control by field circuit having plural sources of field circuit voltage.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclasses, particularly subclass 123, for a battery or
    capacitor charging or discharging system including a generator.


CLS 322/87
TXT Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein one of the sources of electric
    energy is a dynamoelectric machine other than the load generator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 76 for
    interconnection systems for plural generators of different voltages,
    subclasses 78+ for systems of series connected generators, and subclass 84
    for systems including plural generators.


CLS 322/88
TXT Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein one of the sources of electric
    energy is a battery.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 48+
    for systems having plural sources of current in which one source is a
    battery floating across the line, and subclasses 66+ for systems having
    plural alternative sources of current in which one source is a battery.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass for  charging or discharging plural batteries.


CLS 322/89
TXT Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein the generator is controlled by
    controlling the armature circuit, or the primary circuit of the generator.

    (1)     Note.  Since the armature circuit or primary circuit of the
    generator may be extended to a system of distribution, to a load circuit or
    to a load device, see the class definition, especially section I,D, for the
    general line between Class 322 and other classes which have generator
    supplied load circuits, or systems of distribution or load devices.  This
    and the indented subclasses include the generator supplied systems in Class
    322 which are not classified in the subclass above and which have means in
    the armature circuit for controlling the generator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for generator control systems within the class definition having
    means to control the polarity of the generator.

    7,      for generator control systems within the class definition where
    both the generator and the load circuit are controlled.  See note 1 to the
    definition of subclass 89.

    14,     for generator control systems within the class definition where
    both the generator and the generating driving means are controlled.

    17+,    for this subject matter where the armature circuit is automatically
    controlled in response to a condition.

    45,     for generator control under subclass 44 where the generator control
    is effectuated by a plurality of diverse controls one of which may be
    controlling the armature or primary circuit.

    47,     for this subject matter where the generator is an induction type
    generator.

    48,     for this subject matter where the generator is an acyclic or
    homopolar generator.

    49,     for generator control under subclass 44 where the generator is
    controlled by controlling the structure of parts which form at least a part
    of the magnetic circuit of the generator, see indented subclass 51 where
    the magnetic structure so controlled is the rotating member of the
    generator (i.e., either the armature or field), and indented subclass 52
    where the magnetic structure so controlled is the stator element of the
    generator (i.e., either the armature or the field).

    53,     for generator control under subclass 44 where the generator is
    provided with an odd number of brushes (i.e., has an auxiliary brush), and
    the generator control means includes an armature winding or a portion
    thereof connected to a short circuit between the odd or auxiliary brush and
    one of the load brushes.

    54+,    for generator control systems under subclass 44 where the generator
    control includes means to adjust the current collecting mechanism (i.e.,
    brushes).

    57,     for generator control systems under subclass 44 where the control
    includes means for saturating at least a portion of the generator magnetic
    structure by means of a winding which is in noninductive relationship to
    the armature and field windings.

    58,     for generator control systems under subclass 44 where the system
    includes means (such as a filter) for eliminating, suppressing, or
    minimizing undesired frequencies.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 112+
    for switching systems.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 706 for synchronous
    motor synchronizing systems with armature winding removal upon failure to
    synchronize or loss of synchronism; subclass 709 for synchronous motor
    synchronizing systems having different armature winding voltage prior to
    synchronism; subclasses 720+ for armature circuits for synchronous motor
    systems; subclasses 767+ for primary circuit control of induction motors;
    subclasses 287+, for motor reversing by armature circuit control, and
    subclass 494, for motor control by armature circuit control.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclasses, particularly subclass 123, for a battery or
    capacitor charging or discharging system including a generator.

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, subclasses 800+ and 825+ for
    motor speed control systems and 842+ and 848+ for motor acceleration
    control systems.


CLS 322/90
TXT Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the armature circuit control
    comprises plural armature circuits or windings.

    (1)     Note.  A plurality of windings connected in series or parallel so
    that they constitute only one electrical armature winding is not classified
    as plural armature windings.  To be classified in this subclass, the
    generator must have a plurality of armature windings connected to form
    different armature circuits.  The plurality of armature windings may be
    designed so that they might be connected in series or parallel to supply a
    single load circuit or one of the windings may be for control purposes only.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 11+
    for plural load circuit systems, and subclasses 43+ for plural supply
    circuit systems.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 140+ for plural
    commutator generators having plural armature windings, subclasses 144+ for
    plural slip ring generators having plural armature windings, and subclasses
    198+ for plural armature winding structure.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 724 for synchronous
    motor armature circuits having a plurality of windings or winding portions;
    subclass 737 for self-cascaded induction motor systems having a plurality
    of primary windings; subclasses 768+ for three phase winding induction
    motor systems operated from a single phase source; subclass 770 for
    induction motor primary circuits of the dual voltage type; subclass 771 for
    delta-wye, plural wye, or delta-delta connected induction motor primary
    circuits; subclass 775 for plural speed single induction motors having a
    separate primary winding for each speed; subclass 777 for plural speed
    induction motors having a separate primary winding for each speed;
    subclasses 288+, for motor reversing by plural armature windings.


CLS 322/91
TXT Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the generator is controlled by
    short circuiting the armature winding or a portion thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for generator control systems under subclass 44 where the generator
    is an induction generator.

    53,     for the subject matter where the generator is provided with an odd
    number of brushes (i.e., has an auxiliary brush) and the generator control
    means includes an armature winding or a portion thereof connected to a
    short circuit between the odd or auxiliary brush and one of the load
    brushes.

    95+,    for generator control by shunting the armature winding through an
    impedance.  Subclass 91 differs from subclass 95 in that in subclass 95 the
    armature is shunted through a resistance and in this subclass (91) the
    shunt connection has negligible impedance.  See subclass 98 where the shunt
    circuit contains a resistance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 100
    for systems including means for shunting or short circuiting the same.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 177 for
    dynamoelectric machines having a short circuited winding or conductor.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 379+, for motor
    braking systems having armature short circuiting and subclass 501 for motor
    armature circuit control by shunting armature in whole or in part.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclasses, particularly subclass 123, for a battery or
    capacitor charging or discharging system including a generator.


CLS 322/92
TXT Subject matter under subclass 91 wherein the generator is provided with a
    set of auxiliary brushes spaced 180 electrical degrees apart in addition to
    the usual load circuit brushes and the short circuit connection is between
    the auxiliary brushes.

    (1)     Note.  The usual purpose of the above arrangement is to increase
    armature reaction flux which produces a field in quadrature to the flux
    produced by the field windings.  These devices are called "cross-field
    generators" in the art.  These devices find application for such uses as
    constant current welding generators and as dynamoelectric amplifier devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     if the generator is provided with an odd or auxiliary brush, and
    the armature winding or a portion thereof is connected to a short circuit
    between the odd or auxiliary brush and one of the main brushes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 151 for
    dynamoelectric machines having a pair of additional short circuited brushes.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 58 for amplifiers whose active element is a
    rotating dynamoelectric machine.


CLS 322/93
TXT Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the generator armature circuit
    control includes a tapped or sectionalized armature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91+,    for generator armature control under subclass 89 where the
    generator is controlled by short circuiting a portion of the armature
    winding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 200 for structure
    of dynamoelectric machines having tapped or sectionalized armatures.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 502, for motor
    armature control having variable length or tapped armature winding.


CLS 322/94
TXT Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the generator armature circuit
    control includes armature circuit making and/or breaking.

    (1)     Note.  The above arrangement is peculiarly applicable for use in
    battery charging systems wherein a reverse current cutout is interposed
    between the generator and battery. Particular attention is directed to
    Class 320 in the search notes below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, and subclasses 519+, for motor
    control by means of armature circuit making and/or breaking devices.

    320,    Electricity:  Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclasses, particularly subclass 123, for a battery or
    capacitor charging or discharging system including a generator.


CLS 322/95
TXT Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the generator armature control is
    by means of impedance in circuit with the armature.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition, especially sections I, D, for a
    statement as to other classes which provide for a generator sup
    plied load circuit where the load circuit is controlled by an impedance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91+,    for generator systems having armature or primary circuit control
    where the system includes means to short circuit the armature winding of
    the generator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 700+, particularly
    subclass 720, for synchronous motor systems impedance control of the
    armature circuit during starting or running; subclass 784 for impedance
    control of the primary circuit of induction motors during starting;
    subclass 792 for primary circuit control of the start winding of single
    phase motors during starting by a variable temperature coefficient
    impedance element; subclasses 794+ for impedance control of split phase
    capacitor motors; subclass 796 for saturable winding impedance control of
    the primary circuit of split phase capacitor run motors; subclass 797 for
    phase splitting of the primary circuit of split phase motors by a saturable
    winding; subclass 804 for induction motor primary circuit control with a
    controlled magnetic reactance; subclasses 814+ for inductor motor primary
    circuit control by means of impedance, and subclasses 508+ for motor
    control by means of impedances in armature circuit.

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, subclasses 800+ and 825+ for
    motor speed control systems and 842+ and 848+ for motor acceleration
    control systems including selectable or variable impedance devices.


CLS 322/96
TXT Subject matter under subclass 95 wherein the generator armature control is
    by means of a plurality of impedances in circuit with the armature.

    (1)     Note.  The plurality of impedances must be different impedance
    elements.  A tapped or sectionalized impedance element is not a plurality
    of impedances.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, and subclasses 509+, for motor
    control by means of plural impedances in armature circuit.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 364, for
    impedance systems including a plurality of impedances.

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, subclasses 800+ and 825+ for
    motor speed control systems and 842+ and 848+ for motor acceleration
    control systems including selectable or variable impedance devices.


CLS 322/97
TXT Subject matter under subclass 95 wherein the armature circuit impedance is
    a resistance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, and subclasses 514+, for motor
    control by armature circuit resistor.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 369, for
    resistance systems.

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, subclasses 800+ and 825+ for
    motor speed control systems and 842+ and 848+ for motor acceleration
    control systems including selectable or variable impedance devices.


CLS 322/98
TXT Subject matter under subclass 97 wherein the resistance is connected across
    the generator brushes or in shunt to the generator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91+,    for generator control by short circuiting of armature winding.  In
    subclass 91, the shunt circuit is of negligible impedance.


CLS 322/99
TXT Subject matter within the class definition wherein the system is provided
    with signals, indicators, recorders, or testing means.

    (1)     Note.  For a statement of the systems in this class which include a
    signal, indicator recorder, or testing, and the general line between Class
    322 and the other classes providing for similar subject matter, see section
    I, D, 3, f, of the definition of Class 322.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclasses for nonelectric
    signals and indicators.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for
    electric testing.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+ for electric signaling
    systems automatically responsive to a condition.

    346,    Recorders, appropriate subclasses for recording arrangements.


CLS 322/100
TXT Subject matter within the class definition not classified in any of the
    foregoing subclasses.




CLS 323/
TTL ELECTRICITY:  POWER SUPPLY OR REGULATION SYSTEMS

CLS 323/
TXT

    I.      INTRODUCTION

    Subclasses 201 through 371 and 901-911 are the result of a reclassification
    of the subject matter originally contained in subclasses 1-129, now
    abolished, of Class 323.  In this reclassification, no substantive change
    has been made in the class definition or the scope of subject matter
    covered in this class.  The reclassification was done for the purpose of
    rearranging that subject matter in a manner which facilitates efficient
    searching of the more modern technology and which more obviously delineates
    the miscellaneous transformer and impedance systems from the control
    systems.  As a result of the delineation noted above, many of the
    cross-references which were present in the earlier subclasses have been
    eliminated.  Appropriate search notes have been placed throughout the
    definitions as a guide to other areas containing similar subject matter and
    as a caution against burdensome cross-referencing between the similar areas.

    II.     GLOSSARY

    CONTROL

    Includes either the maintenance of a condition at a predetermined value or
    the variation of a condition from one value to another.

    AUTOMATIC CONTROL

    Includes means for sensing the existence of, the magnitude or level of, or
    a deviation of a predetermined condition (e.g., the existence, magnitude of
    change of temperature, voltage, etc.) combined with means for initiating
    the operation of a control means to perform a control function on the
    system upon the occurrence of the predetermined condition.

    MAGNITUDE OR LEVEL CONTROL

    Includes controlling either the amplitude of the current or voltage or
    controlling the average or effective value of the current or voltage, even
    through the amplitude is not controlled.

    PHASE CONTROL

    Includes the maintenance of a predetermined value of or the predetermined
    variation of the value of the phase angle between the current and voltage
    of a circuit or of the phase angle of the current or voltage of a circuit
    with respect to itself or to the current or voltage of another circuit.

    FINAL CONTROL DEVICE

    That element or group of elements which ultimately produces the controlled
    output of a system.  This excludes any condition sensors or control signal
    processing circuitry.

    TRANSFORMER

    An electrical device which transfers electric energy from one circuit to
    another circuit at the same frequency solely by electromagnetic induction.

    THREE OR MORE TERMINAL SEMICONDUCTIVE DEVICES

    A transistor, semiconductor-controlled rectifier or other such controllable
    solid-state device.

    ELECTRONIC TUBE

    An apparatus which is intended to have an electric current flow between two
    spaced electrodes, at least part of the current path being constituted by a
    gas, vapor, or vacuum, "Electronic Tube" is used as the name for an
    electric space discharge device in this class.  Included are discharge
    devices which operate in the open, i.e., not in an enclosed envelope.

    IMPEDANCE

    Includes an inductance, a capacitance, or a resistance or any combination
    thereof and excluding any source of electric energy. Inductances are
    usually grouped with transformers in the subclasses that follow.

    ELECTRICAL SOURCE CIRCUIT

    The input terminals which are to be connected to a source of electrical
    energy.

    LOAD CIRCUIT

    The output terminals which are to be connected to a device which is to be
    supplied with electrical energy.

    OUTPUT CIRCUIT

    Is the same as load circuit.

    INPUT CIRCUIT

    Is the same as electrical source circuit.

    III.    GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    A.      Class Scope

    1.      This is the generic class for electrical systems wherein a single
    electrical source is coupled to a single electrical load circuit and means
    are provided which control the magnitude or level of the current or voltage
    of either or both of said circuits and/or the phase angle between the
    current or voltage of either or both of said circuits.

    2.      This is also the generic class for transformer systems, see section
    VIII below.

    3.      This is also the generic class for impedance systems, see section
    IX below.

    B.      Voltage Magnitude and Phase Control Systems

    In order to be classified in this class, the system must operate to control
    only (1) the magnitude of the current or voltage and/or (2) the phase angle
    between the current and voltage of an electric circuit.  Where the system
    operates to perform some other additional function, classification is not
    herein.  For a partial list of the classes which provide for such excluded
    systems, see the classes listed under "SEARCH CLASS" below.

    C.      Load in Output Circuit

    1.      This class provides for voltage and/or current magnitude and phase
    control systems as defined in section III, A and B, even though the
    electric load in the output circuit is recited by its characteristics
    (e.g., "an inductive load", a load having a negative current-resistance
    characteristic, etc.).

    2.      Systems wherein a particular load device is recited in the output
    circuit are classified with the particular art even though the load device
    is recited by name only (e.g., "a motor", "an electric furnace", etc.).
    For a partial list of such art systems, see classes listed under "SEARCH
    CLASS" below.

    3.      This class does not provide for systems having plural load circuits
    whether the plural load circuits are in different output circuits (see
    section III, D, below) or in the same circuit, except where the plural
    loads in a single output circuit are similar type loads that are not
    excluded by paragraph 2 above.  Therefore, if there are a plurality of
    diverse loads in the same output circuit even though recited only by their
    characteristics (e.g., a highly inductive load and a low inductive load),
    then the system is excluded from this class.

    D.      Voltage Magnitude and Phase Control Systems Having Plural Input
    and/or Plural Output Circuits

    This class excludes systems having a plurality of either electrical source
    (input) circuits or output circuits. Where the system including the
    plurality of input and/or output circuits comprises or is part of an art
    device, classification is with the art device.  For other such systems, see
    Class 307 under "SEARCH CLASS" below.

    E.      Regulating or Control Device Structure

    This class provides for the electrical system as distinguished from the
    structure of the devices which may be used in or as part of the system.
    For the structure of such regulating and control devices, see "SEARCH
    CLASS" below.

    IV.     SYSTEMS HAVING PLURAL DIVERSE TYPE MEANS USED FOR CONTROL PURPOSES

    Where the system includes a plurality of different types of devices which
    form the basis of the principal subdivision of the class, that is, a
    dynamoelectric system, and/or an electronic tube, and/or a transformer,
    and/or an impedance, the original classification is in the first occurring
    (lowest numbered) subclass which has a definition that will include one or
    more of such types of devices.

    V.      DYNAMOELECTRIC MACHINES

    This class provides for voltage and/or current magnitude and/or phase
    control systems as defined in section III, above, where the means
    interposed between the source circuit and the load circuit for controlling
    the voltage and/or current magnitude and/or phase includes a dynamoelectric
    machine, excepting the following:

    1.      Motor-Generator Sets.

            This class does not take those systems wherein an electrical source
    energizes an electric motor which drives a generator whose output supplies
    an electric load circuit.  This organization is considered to be an
    electric motor driven generator system classified in Class 322,
    Electricity: Single Generator Systems.

    2.      Dynamoelectric Machine Conversion Systems

            This class does not take dynamoelectric machine conversion systems
    wherein the input electrical energy is converted into output electrical
    energy whose character differs from the input energy.  For a partial list
    of such systems, see classes listed under "SEARCH CLASS" below.

    VI.     ELECTRONIC TUBE SYSTEMS

    A.      This class provides for voltage and/or current magnitude control
    systems as defined in section III, above, where the means interposed
    between the electrical source circuit and the load circuit for controlling
    the voltage and/or current magnitude includes an electronic tube.  An
    electronic tube may be a vacuum tube, a gas tube, a vapor tube, or an open
    gap.

    B.      Where the electronic tube system operates to perform any function
    not provided for in this class, or any function in addition to the
    functions provided for by this class (e.g., rectification, phase
    conversion, frequency conversion), classification is not herein.  For a
    partial list of such systems, see classes listed under "SEARCH CLASS" below.

    The line between Class 323 and Class 327, Miscellaneous Active Electrical
    Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and Systems, appropriate subclasses, and 315,
    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, are as follows:

    Class 315 provides for systems which include a gas vapor type electronic
    tube and means for supplying electric current and/or potential to the tube
    where the tube is the sole ultimate load device and where the result of the
    system is to merely cause a discharge to take place or to merely regulate
    the discharge in the tube.  Also included in subclass 94 of Class 315 are
    systems for merely supplying heating current to the cathode or cathode
    heater of any type of electronic tube, which systems may also include the
    anode supply for the tube without being excluded from the class.  Merely
    claiming an output circuit does not exclude the system from Class 315 as
    long as no load device in the output circuit is claimed, or as long as no
    other circuit elements which limit the system to use in supplying current
    and/or potential to another load device are claimed. The limitations on
    Class 315 will therefore not exclude a system from Class 315 where the
    operation of the discharge device is controlled so as to maintain the
    discharge voltage and/or current at a predetermined value or to vary the
    discharge current and/or voltage from one value to another even though such
    regulation of the discharge device results in regulating the current and/or
    voltage in the output circuit.

    Class 323 provides for systems where the sole function of the electronic
    tube system is to control the magnitude of the electric current and/or
    voltage supplied to a circuit, either to maintain the current and/or
    voltage at a predetermined value or to vary the current and/or voltage at a
    predetermined value or to vary the current and/or voltage from one value to
    another.

    Class 327 is a miscellaneous place to classify electronic tube systems, and
    as among these three classes takes any such system excluded from the other
    classes.  In Class 327 will be found miscellaneous systems including an
    electronic tube and having means for supplying current and/or potential to
    the electronic tube (power supply systems).  Among the other types of
    electronic tube systems classified in Class 327 are wave shaping systems,
    plus producing systems and switching systems (electronic tubes utilized to
    connect an input circuit to an output circuit in the manner of a circuit
    maker or breaker).

    In general, for electronic tube systems as among these three classes,
    classification is determined as follows:  If restricted to the functions
    provided for under Class 323, classification is therein unless it is of the
    special type provided for in Class 315.  If the system involves some
    function not provided for by Class 323, classification is in Class 327,
    appropriate subclasses, unless it is for a special type provided for in
    Class 315.

    VII.    TAP-CHANGING SYSTEMS

    A.      This is the generic class for tap- changing systems, that is,
    systems for changing by electric switch means the connection of a circuit
    from one point to another point on a winding or for changing by electric
    switch means one value of impedance to another value of impedance of a
    system.

    B.      Where the tap-changing system is applied to a particular art,
    classification is with the art device, e.g., a tap-changing system for
    changing the connection of a generator armature circuit from one point on
    the generator field winding to another point on the field winding is
    classified in Class 322, Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass
    71.

    C.      This class also provides for tap changing wherein a tap-changing
    system is part of a significant system for which provision is made in the
    class, e.g., transformer systems with tap changing are provided for in
    subclasses 255 and 340.

    D.      Usually, but not necessarily, the current flowing to or from the
    circuit from or to the winding or impedance is not interrupted during the
    tap-changing operation.

    VIII.   TRANSFORMER SYSTEMS

    A.      This class takes subject matter under section III of the class
    definition wherein the means interposed between the electrical source and
    the electrical load circuit for controlling the voltage and/or current
    magnitude and/or phase comprises a transformer. Systems within the class
    definition are included herein even though the transformer is recited by
    name only.

    This is the generic class for transformer systems, that is, systems in
    which a transformer supplies an output circuit, or in which a load device
    not otherwise classified is supplied with electricity by a transformer.

    This class will therefore take any system of supply to a transformer if no
    other class provides for the subject matter claimed.  Many classes have
    systems specialized for the purposes of such class with a transformer
    system as a part of the combination.

    This class excludes systems where a plurality of electrical source circuits
    are coupled to one or more output circuits, or where a plurality of output
    circuits are coupled to one or more source circuits.

    This excludes systems where a plurality of distinct transformers which are
    coupled to a single source have their outputs coupled in current and/or
    voltage adding or subtracting relation. Likewise, systems having a single
    transformer with plural primary windings are excluded if the connection of
    the primary windings to the source is diverse; that is, if one primary
    winding circuit contains different circuit elements or has different
    circuit characteristics than another. Likewise, systems having a single
    transformer with plural secondaries connected to supply output circuits are
    excluded from this class.

    B.      Polyphase Systems

    Although this class excludes systems wherein a plurality of electrical
    source circuits are coupled to one or more output circuits, systems wherein
    the energy of a single polyphase source is transferred by a polyphase
    transformer to a single polyphase output circuit having the same number of
    phases as the input circuit for energizing a single polyphase load circuit
    are considered to be systems having a single source and a single load
    circuit within the definition of this class.

    C.      Tuning Systems and Coupling Systems Involving Frequency
    Characteristics

    1.      This class excludes tuning systems wherein the combination of
    transformer and impedance is used to control the resonant characteristics
    of the system with respect to a particular impressed frequency.  For
    systems having the combination of a transformer and capacitance element
    connected in such a manner as to form a variable tuned circuit, the mean
    resonant frequency of which is adjustable, see Class 334 under "SEARCH
    CLASS" below.

    2.      This class excludes coupling systems which are effective over
    predetermined frequency ranges or wherein frequency characteristics are
    controlled or varied.  For such systems, see Class 333 under "SEARCH CLASS"
    below.

    IX.     IMPEDANCE SYSTEMS

    A.      This class takes subject matter under section III of the class
    definition wherein the means interposed between the electrical source and
    the electrical load circuit for controlling the voltage and/or current
    magnitude and/or phase consists of one or more impedances.

    This is the generic class for impedance systems, that is, systems in which
    there is an impedance between a single source and single output circuit, or
    in which a load device per section III, C, is combined with an impedance in
    the single circuit supplying the same. Many other classes provide for
    systems where the output of the system is defined as having an impedance
    connected in the output.

    B.      Turning Systems and Coupling Systems Involving Frequency
    Characteristics

    This class excludes tuning systems where the impedance means is used to
    control the resonant characteristics of the system with respect to a
    particular impressed frequency and coupling systems using impedances which
    are effective over a predetermined frequency range or where frequency
    characteristics are controlled or varied.  For the excluded systems, see
    the reference to Class 333 and Class 334 under "SEARCH CLASS" below.

    X.      VOLTAGE MAGNITUDE CONTROL SYSTEMS INVOLVING CIRCUIT INTERRUPTION

    This class takes those systems wherein the voltage, current, or power are
    regulated or controlled by the interruption of the circuit carrying the
    load current except where a claimed load would cause classification
    elsewhere.

    XI.     CONVERSION SYSTEMS

    This class excludes systems where the input energy is converted into output
    energy whose characteristics differ from the input energy, such as
    converting direct current to alternating current or vice versa, changing
    the number of phases of polyphase current, or changing the frequency.

    XII. SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 43 for space induction telegraph systems
    (i.e., using spaced transformer coils to transmit the signals by
    induction); and subclass 64 for telegraph systems using line conductors for
    the signal transmission and having an induction coil or transformer for
    coupling the signal current in the local circuit to the main line, or for
    coupling sections of the main line together.

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, subclass 10 for
    space-induction systems for supplying electrical energy to a moving body.
    These systems usually include a transformer primary along the path to be
    followed by the body and a secondary mounted upon the moving body.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 193 for systems
    for supplying electrolytic and other electrical and wave energy chemical
    apparatus with electric current, including current and/or voltage magnitude
    and/or phase control means.  Some of the systems in Class 204 are designed
    to supply a constant current to the electrical or wave energy chemical
    apparatus.

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclasses for electric heating
    systems which include current and/or voltage magnitude and/or phase control
    means; see subclasses 600+ for inductive heating, subclasses 678+ for
    microwave heating, and subclasses 764+ for capacitive dielectric heating;
    see subclass 108 for transformer-supplied heating systems; note especially
    subclass 116 where the device to be heated forms the secondary of the
    transformer; see subclass 130.1 for electric welding and heating systems
    involving an electric arc as a load which requires substantially constant
    current energization; and see subclass 482 for the miscellaneous systems
    for supplying electric current to electrical heating elements.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclasses 8, 63, and 194 for railway
    switch and signaling systems using spaced inductive means (e.g.,
    transformer coils) to transmit the signal energy by space induction.

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants.  Current and/or voltage magnitude
    control systems are found throughout the class as electrical controls for
    generator systems having a nonelectric prime mover.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, is the generic
    class for electric circuit networks of general application and takes
    systems not otherwise classified, wherein a plurality of circuits are
    coupled to one or more circuits.  The systems may include space discharge
    devices, transformers, or impedances as coupling means or phase control
    means.  Subclass 11 provides for systems having a plurality of output
    circuits; subclass 43 provides for a plurality of input circuits or
    sources; and subclass 96 provides for intermittent regulatory interruption
    of the system.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, appropriate subclasses for
    the structure of dynamoelectric converters, generators, dynamotors,
    metadynes, balancer sets, motors, and synchronous condensers.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    appropriate subclasses for systems for supplying electric current to arc
    lamps and other consumable electrode type discharge devices which systems
    include current or voltage magnitude control means.  Some of the systems in
    Class 314 are constant current systems.  See subclass 32 for such systems
    with a transformer in the supply circuit; subclass 64 for electronic tub
    controlled systems for controlling the feeding of consumable electrode; and
    subclass 135 for miscellaneous systems with current or voltage regulations.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, provides for some
    systems which are closely analogous to the systems in this class (323).
    See section VI, B above for the line between Class 315 and Class 323.
    Subclass 1 is the generic subclass for systems for supplying current and/or
    potentials to a cathode-ray tube; subclass 32 provides for the structure of
    electronic tubes which have combined therewith a circuit element, such as
    an impedance (see subclass 57 for electronic tubes which have a transformer
    structurally combined therewith); and subclass 58 and the subclasses
    specified in the search notes thereto provide for electronic tubes which
    have an impedance combined therewith; subclass 70 provides for the
    structural combination of an electric lamp and a transformer; subclasses 76
    to 363 are the generic subclasses for systems for supplying electric
    current or potential to an electric lamp or a gas or vapor filled
    electronic tube for merely causing a discharge to take place within the
    electronic tube or for regulating the discharge within the tube; subclass
    94 is the generic subclass for supplying heating current to the cathode or
    cathode heater of an electronic tube of any type; subclass 194 provides for
    systems for regulating the control current of potential applied to the
    control element of an electronic tube of the gas or vapor filled type by
    means of phase shifting means; subclass 276 and the subclasses specified in
    the notes to the definitions thereof provide for systems having
    transformers in the supply circuit; subclass 291 and the subclasses
    specified in the notes to the definition thereof provide for regulation
    systems within the class definition; and subclass 354 and the subclasses
    specified in the notes to the definition thereof provide for systems having
    a transformer in the control circuit.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, provide for systems for
    supplying electricity to one or more motors, which systems include current
    and/or voltage magnitude and/or phase control systems.  For motors systems
    having means for regulating the motor to maintain the motor current at a
    predetermined value, see subclass 432 which relates to constant motor
    current control and subclass 434 which relates to motor current limitation.
    For motor systems which include electric space discharge device systems for
    current and/or voltage magnitude control, see subclass 767 for induction
    motor circuit control by means of electric space discharge devices in the
    motor primary circuit; subclass 818 for induction motor circuit control by
    means of electric space discharge devices in the motor secondary circuit;
    subclass 505 for electric motor armature or primary circuit control by
    means of electric space discharge devices; and subclass 532 for electric
    motor field or secondary circuit control by means of electric space
    discharge device.  For motor systems which include a transformer, and
    subclass 504 for motor armature voltage control by means of transformers.
    For motor systems which include an impedance, see the appropriate
    subclasses, see subclass 508 and the subclasses specified in the notes to
    the definition of that subclass for impedance-controlled armature or
    primary circuits; and subclass 533 and the subclasses specified in the
    notes to the definition of those subclasses for impedance-controlled field
    or secondary circuits.  For motor systems which include phase control
    means, see subclass 700 for synchronous motor systems which often are used
    for phase control in addition to driving a mechanical load.  Note subclass
    438 which provides for power factor control of the armature or line circuit
    of a motor.

    320,    Electricity:  Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass for a power supply or regulation system in a battery
    or capacitor charging or discharging system.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    single generator systems having current or voltage magnitude and/or phase
    control means.  Practically every generator system is a current and/or
    voltage magnitude control system, and the controls therefor are analogous
    to the controls for other voltage magnitude control systems.  See section V
    above for the classification of motor-generator systems.  Class 322
    provides for systems having an impedance or a transformer recited by name
    only in the output circuit of the generator even though the impedance or
    transformer does not control the generator.  See subclasses 16 and 39 for
    electric motor driven generator systems; subclass 28 for systems wherein an
    electric generator supplies a load circuit and the generator is controlled
    in response to the output current to maintain output current constant; and
    subclass 71 for generator systems having tapped field windings, see section
    VII above.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous nonlinear electrical
    circuitry.

    330,    Amplifiers, appropriate subclasses for amplifiers of general
    application wherein the output signal waveform is a substantial replica of
    the input signal waveform:  for transistors amplifiers, search subclass
    250; for transistor amplifiers with special power supply means, search
    subclasses 296 and 297; for saturable reactor amplifiers; for power supply
    control for series arranged transistors, search subclass 296 and subclass
    70 for series arranged vacuum tube amplifiers; for power supply control and
    power supply circuits, search subclasses 96, 123, and 127; and for power
    supply circuits, per se, search subclass 199; for thermal impedances,
    search subclass 143; and for controlled impedance, search subclass 144.

    331,    Oscillators, appropriate subclasses for oscillator systems with
    transformer or impedance in the output circuit, particularly subclass 74
    for oscillators combined with a particular output coupling network.  See
    also subclass 186 of Class 331 for oscillators provided with a particular
    regulated source of power or bias.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, provides for coupling
    networks which have attenuation and/or delay characteristics over a
    frequency range for attenuating and/or delaying in a predetermined manner
    wave energy passing therethrough, including equalizers, delay networks, and
    filters.  This class also provides for passive networks which modify the
    amplitude characteristics of the wave energy passing therethrough, namely,
    differentiating or integrating systems, wave shaping systems, and
    attenuators.  See subclass 1 for coupling, differentiating or integrating,
    wave shaping, and attenuating networks in plural channel systems; subclass
    19 for differentiating or integrating systems of the passive type; subclass
    20 for wave shaping systems of the passive type; subclass 24 for coupling
    networks; subclass 28 for equalizers with attenuation or attenuation and
    phase distortion characteristics over a frequency range; and subclass 81
    for attenuators which reduce the intensity of the energy passing
    therethrough by dissipation, while maintaining substantially constant input
    and/or output impedance therein.

    334,    Tuners, appropriate subclasses for tuned networks for use in wave
    energy apparatus and comprising inductance and capacitance elements in
    circuit arrangement to form a resonant circuit and in which structure is
    provided for adjusting one or both of these elements for changing the means
    resonant frequency of the circuit. Note especially subclasses 59 and 61 for
    tuned networks where a transformer may be used in the resonant system.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for the structure of
    transformers and inductive reactors.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, appropriate subclasses for electrical
    resistor and rheostat structure.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 139 for
    miscellaneous systems for supplying current to an electromagnet, some of
    those systems being closely analogous to the systems in this class (323).
    If the ultimate load in the system is an electromagnet, then classification
    is in Class 361.  Search subclass 271 for condensers.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclass 1 for combined or
    plural conversion systems; subclass 13 for rectifying or derectifying
    systems (particularly subclass 50 for such systems provided with protective
    means; subclass 74 for such systems having automatic voltage and/or current
    magnitude control; subclass 83 for such systems having line circuit control
    by an electronic tube; subclass 111 for such systems where the converter is
    an electronic tube); subclass 151 for phase conversion systems wherein the
    converter includes an electronic tube; and subclass 166 for frequency
    conversion systems wherein the converter includes an electronic  tube.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, appropriate subclasses for
    electric furnace control systems which include current or voltage magnitude
    control means and/or phase control means. Class 373 includes transformer
    supplied and transformer-controlled electric furnaces, and impedance
    controlled electric furnaces.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclass 101, for X-ray
    systems which include power supplies and regulators.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclass 55 for telephone systems using
    spaced transformer inductive means (e.g., transformer coils) to transmit
    the signal by space induction.

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, art collections 913 for motor
    control systems including a space discharge device.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclass 37 for diagnostics of power supplied
    to an electrophotographic device, subclasses 88+ for machine operations
    with power supply, and subclasses 168+ for charging a photoconductive
    member.

    455,    Telecommunications, provides for radio receiving and transmitting
    systems in combination with their power supplies, which power supplies may
    include voltage magnitude and/or phase control means.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 150+ for high temperature (Tc  30 K) superconducting devices,
    and particularly subclasses 166+ for motors or generators, or 211+ for
    electrical energy storage devices, inductors, transformers, magnetic
    switches, etc.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 9+ for magnetic fields applied to the body for
    therapeutic purposes.


CLS 323/201
TXT INCLUDING A DYNAMOELECTRIC MACHINE:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a dynamoelectric
    machine as the final control device within a power supply or regulation
    system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include those systems wherein the
    electrical source energizes an electric motor which drives a generator
    whose output supplies a load circuit.  This organization is considered to
    be an electric motor-driven generator system classified in Class 322,
    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, see subclass 16 for
    electric motor-driven generator systems having combined control of the
    motor and generator; subclass 25 for electric generator systems wherein the
    generator or the generator driving means is controlled in response to the
    generator current and voltage; subclass 27 for electric generator systems
    wherein the generator or the generator driving means is controlled in
    response to the generator current; and subclass 39 for electric generator
    systems having control means for the generator driving means.


CLS 323/202
TXT Balancer sets:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the controlling means comprises a
    plurality of dynamoelectric machines electrically connected in series with
    their rotors mechanically connected together.

    (1)     Note.  Such plurality of dynamoelectric machines is known in the
    art as a balancer set.

    (2)     Note.  A common connection of the systems in this subclass is with
    the plurality of dynamoelectric machines connected in series across the
    source of supply and the load circuit connected across a fewer number of
    dynamoelectric machines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 112 for plural
    dynamoelectric machines which are structurally united, such as in a motor
    generator set.


CLS 323/203
TXT With plural sets of slip rings or brushes:
    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the controlling means comprises a
    dynamoelectric machine having a plurality of commutators or a plurality of
    sets of brushes or a plurality of sets of slip rings.

    (1)     Note.  A dynamotor (a machine which combines both motor and
    generator action in one magnetic field, either with two armatures or with
    one armature having two separate windings) is an example of a
    dynamoelectric machine having plural commutators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 127 for plural
    collector type dynamoelectric machines.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 53 for single
    generator systems wherein the generator is of the third brush type; and
    subclass 92 for single generator systems wherein the generator is provided
    with at least two sets of brushes cooperating with a single commutator and
    one of the sets is short-circuited.


CLS 323/204
TXT Condition responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the dynamoelectric machine is
    controlled in response to a condition of the system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 17 for automatic
    control of generator or driving means.


CLS 323/205
TXT FOR REACTIVE POWER CONTROL:

    Subject matter under the class definition which includes the control,
    elimination, or compensation for power having a difference in phase between
    voltage and current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212,    for systems which control the phase of voltage or current within
    one circuit with respect to the phase of voltage or current in a different
    circuit.


CLS 323/206
TXT Using saturable inductor:

    Subject matter under subclass 205 wherein the element which produces the
    compensation for the difference in phase is an inductor having a
    controllably saturable core.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    214,    for saturable inductors used in phase shift systems.

    249,    for saturable transformers used in output level responsive voltage
    or current regulators.

    302,    for saturable inductors used in input level responsive voltage or
    current regulators.

    310,    for saturable transformers used in self-regulating systems.

    329,    for saturable transformers used in external or operator controlled
    regulators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for structural features of
    inductor devices, per se.


CLS 323/207
TXT Using converter:

    Subject matter under subclass 205 including an a.c. to d.c. to a.c.
    converter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclass 34 for a.c. to d.c. to
    a.c. converters, per se.


CLS 323/208
TXT Using impedance:

    Subject matter under subclass 205 wherein the element which produces the
    compensation for the difference in phase is impedance (e.g., capacitive or
    inductive).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218,    for impedances used in phase shift systems.

    233,    293, 304, and 352, for impedances used in voltage or current
    regulators.


CLS 323/209
TXT Switched impedance:

    Subject matter under subclass 208 wherein the impedance is connected to the
    main power circuit through a switch which is controllably operable.


CLS 323/210
TXT Static switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 209 where the switch is a controllable
    electronic tube or semiconductive device.


CLS 323/211
TXT Digitally controlled:

    Subject matter under subclasses 210 wherein the circuitry which controls
    the static switch contains logic elements which process a signal having
    discrete states.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241,    283 and 322, for digital control of various voltage or current
    regulators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, appropriate subclasses for
    digital logic devices.


CLS 323/212
TXT FOR PHASE SHIFT OR CONTROL:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means to maintain a
    predetermined value or deviation in the value of the phase angle between
    the voltage or current of the output circuit with respect to a standard or
    with respect to the voltage or current of the input circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205,    for systems which control the phase relationship between voltage
    and current within the same circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 141+ for phase synchronizing and subclasses 231+ for a
    phase shift of less than an input signal period.


CLS 323/213
TXT By splitting and combining:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 including means which develop multiple
    phases from a single input and sums these phases in such proportion that a
    desired resultant phase is produced.


CLS 323/214
TXT Using saturable inductor:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 wherein the element which produces the
    shift in phase is an inductor having a controllably saturable core.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206,    and the subclasses noted in the definition thereof for saturable
    inductances used in other systems.


CLS 323/215
TXT Using transformer:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 wherein the element which produces the
    shift in phase is a transformer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247,    305 and 328, for transformers used in voltage or current regulators.

    355,    for miscellaneous transformer systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, for transformers, per se.


CLS 323/216
TXT With movable structure or winding:

    Subject matter under subclass 215 wherein the transformer includes at least
    one movable element, the movement thereof producing the shift in phase.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264     and 347, for transformers with movable elements used in voltage or
    current regulators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 115 and 130 for transformers with
    movable elements.


CLS 323/217
TXT Using a three or more terminal semiconductive device:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 wherein the element which produces the
    shift in phase is a transistor or semiconductor controlled rectifier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223,    265, 311, and 349, for solid-state devices used as final control
    elements in voltage or current regulators.


CLS 323/218
TXT Using impedance:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 wherein the device which produces the
    shift in phase includes a capacitor, resistor, or inductor or combinations
    thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208,    and the subclasses noted in the definition thereof for impedances
    used in other systems.


CLS 323/219
TXT In bridge:

    Subject matter under subclass 218 wherein the impedance is connected in a
    bridge circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    365,    for miscellaneous impedance systems including bridge arrangements.


CLS 323/220
TXT IN SHUNT WITH SOURCE OR LOAD:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a final control device
    which is in parallel with the source circuit or the load circuit and
    functions to controllably divert at least part of the source's energy away
    from the load.

    (1)     Note.  Transformers which function to controllably couple a source
    to a load, although they may appear to be connected in shunt with the
    source or load, are not classified here since they do not function to
    divert energy.

    (2)     Note.  Although not specifically included within each of the
    following definitions, shunt regulators usually include:  (a) some means
    which produces a control signal which could be indicative of the input,
    output, or some condition external to the regulator, (b) some processing
    circuit which makes use of the control signal, and (c) a final control
    device which is controlled by the output of the processing circuit thus
    producing a controlled output of the system.


CLS 323/221
TXT Photo responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein the final control device or an
    element within its control circuit is responsive to light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    902,    for optical coupling between a semiconductive device and another
    element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200 through 239 for photocell systems.


CLS 323/222
TXT Using choke and switch across source:
    Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein an inductor is connected across a
    source through a switch which is intermittently operated and it is the duty
    cycle of the switch which determines the amount of energy which is diverted
    from the load.

    (1)     Note.  The switch may take the form of mechanically operated
    contacts, a transistor, a SCR, a saturable reactor or other such on-off
    type devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232,    for shunt regulators using inductors (usually saturable) as the
    final control device.

    282     and 351, for nonshunt switching regulators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 15 and 124 for d.c.
    to a.c. to d.c. converters.


CLS 323/223
TXT Using a three or more terminal semiconductive device:

    Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein the final control device within
    the shunt circuit is a transistor or semiconductor controlled rectifier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    265,    311 and 349, for semiconductive devices as final control devices in
    nonshunt regulators.


CLS 323/224
TXT With additional series regulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 223 wherein an additional stage of regulation
    is provided in the form of a series regulator.


CLS 323/225
TXT Plural devices:

    Subject matter under subclass 223 wherein the shunt regulator is made up of
    more than one semiconductive device acting as the final control device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    268     and 350, for plural final control devices in series regulators.


CLS 323/226
TXT Linearly acting:

    Subject matter under subclass 223 wherein the semiconductive device is
    operated within its linear range.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273,    303 and 349, for series regulators which include linearly acting
    final control devices.


CLS 323/227
TXT Using electronic tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein the final control device within
    the shunt circuit is an electric space discharge device.


CLS 323/228
TXT With additional series regulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 227 wherein an additional stage of regulation
    is provided in the form of a series regulator.


CLS 323/229
TXT Using diode:

    Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein the final control device within
    the shunt circuit is a diode.


CLS 323/230
TXT Inverse parallel:

    Subject matter under subclass 229 wherein a pair of diodes are connected in
    parallel but opposite directions to act as the final control device.


CLS 323/231
TXT Zener:

    Subject matter under subclass 229 wherein the diode is a zener diode.


CLS 323/232
TXT Using inductor:

    Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein the final control device within
    the shunt circuit is an inductor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222,    for shunt regulators using an inductor and a switch across the
    source.

    247,    305 and 328, for inductors used in nonshunt regulators.


CLS 323/233
TXT Using impedance:

    Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein the final control device within
    the shunt circuit is an impedance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208,    and the subclasses noted in the definition thereof for impedances
    used in other systems.


CLS 323/234
TXT OUTPUT LEVEL RESPONSIVE:

    Subject matter under the class definition which maintains an output at a
    desired level through the use of means which responds to deviation in the
    output level and produces a change in the output which is opposite to the
    deviation.

    (1)     Note.  Although not specifically included within each of the
    following definitions, output level responsive systems usually include (a)
    some means which produces a signal indicative of a condition of the load
    which is dependent on the output level of the system or the output level of
    the system itself, (b) some processing circuit which makes use of the
    signal mentioned above, and (c) a final control device which is controlled
    by the output of the processing circuit thus producing a controlled output
    of the system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 535+ for regulators of this type which may have a
    semiconductive device as the claimed load.


CLS 323/235
TXT Zero switching:

    Subject matter under subclass 234 wherein the input is alternating current
    and the final control device is a switch which is caused to change to its
    conductive state at or about the zero axis crossing of the input waveform.

    (1)     Note.  Usually, the average power applied to the load is controlled
    by varying the number of half or full cycles of input waveform that is
    permitted to flow to the load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    319,    for external or operator controlled systems of this type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 451+ for semiconductor controlled rectifiers which are
    involved in zero point switching.


CLS 323/236
TXT Nonelectrical condition sensing:

    Subject matter under subclass 235 wherein the means which responds to the
    output is a sensor which measures a nonelectrical condition (such as heat)
    of the system or its load, the condition being dependent upon the output of
    the system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    245,    for phase controlled switching devices with nonelectrical condition
    sensors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 482 for power supply means with
    nonelectrical condition sensing having a heating system as the load.


CLS 323/237
TXT Phase controlled switching using electronic tube or a three or more
    terminal semiconductive device:

    Subject matter under subclass 234 wherein the input is alternating current
    and the final control device is an electronic tube or three or more
    terminal semiconductive device which is caused to change to its conductive
    state at a controllable point following the zero axis crossing of the input
    waveform.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300,    for input level responsive phase controlled switching systems.

    320,    for external or operator controlled phase controlled switching
    systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 447+ for semiconductor controlled rectifiers which are
    involved in phase switching.


CLS 323/238
TXT With soft start:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 wherein at the time of start up of the
    system, the output is gradually increased over a plurality of cycles from
    zero to the desired level.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    321,    for soft start of external or operator controlled systems.


CLS 323/239
TXT Including single unidirectional element with bidirectional pass:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 wherein the final control device is
    capable of carrying current in only one direction but the circuit is
    arranged in such fashion that both polarities of the input are passed or
    controlled.

    (1)     Note.  The unidirectional element may be a tube or semiconductive
    device connected within a diode bridge circuit so as to pass both
    polarities of the alternating current or a tube or a semiconductive device
    bridged by a single diode whereby one polarity of the applied AC is
    controlled and the other polarity is uncontrolled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324,    for external or operator controlled devices of this type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 448 for AC gating SCR's in a bridge.


CLS 323/240
TXT Including saturable inductor in trigger circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 including a signal shaping circuit
    between the means responsive to the output and the final control element,
    that signal shaping circuit including a saturable inductor.

    (1)     Note.  The trigger circuit may be a magnetic amplifier having an
    output winding coupled to the control electrode of a tube or semiconductive
    device.


CLS 323/241
TXT With digital control:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 including a signal processing circuit
    between the means responsive to the output and the final control device,
    that signal processing circuit including logic elements which process
    signals having discrete states.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211,    and the subclasses noted in the definition thereof for digitally
    controlled systems.


CLS 323/242
TXT Including ramp generator or controlled capacitor charging:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 including circuitry which produces a
    gradually changing signal which is ultimately proportional to the output of
    the device.

    (1)     Note.  The changing signal may take the form of a sawtooth with a
    repeating ramp and return to an initial value. Controlled capacitor
    charging involves charging a capacitor to some predetermined value at which
    value a controllable device such as a transistor, unijunction transistor,
    or programmable unijunction transistor, goes into another state of
    conduction or exerts a controlling influence on another device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    288     and 326, for other systems including ramp generators or controlled
    capacitor charging circuits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 131+ for a miscellaneous ramp or sawtooth waveform
    generator.


CLS 323/243
TXT As input to comparator:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 wherein the gradually changing signal is
    applied to a circuit which compares it to another signal (usually a
    standard).


CLS 323/244
TXT With synchronization:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 including means which detects a time
    characteristic of the input waveform, such as its zero crossing point, and
    produces a signal indicative thereof which is used to properly time the
    action of the final control device.


CLS 323/245
TXT With nonelectrical condition sensing:
    Subject matter under subclass 237 wherein the means which responds to the
    output is a sensor which measures a nonelectrical condition such as heat of
    the system or its load, the condition being dependent upon the output of
    the system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236,    for zero switching devices with nonelectrical condition sensors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 482 for power supply means with
    nonelectrical condition sensing having a heating system as the load.


CLS 323/246
TXT With plural condition sensing:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 including means for sensing a condition
    of the system or its load, such means being in addition to the means
    responsive to deviation in the output of the system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes sensing combinations of voltage,
    current, power factor, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    275,    for devices of this type wherein the final control device is a
    linearly acting three or more terminal semiconductive device.


CLS 323/247
TXT Using a transformer or inductor as the final control device:

    Subject matter under subclass 234 wherein the device within the systems
    which is the ultimate controller of the output is a transformer or inductor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301,    for transformers or inductors used in input level responsive
    devices.

    305,    for transformers or inductors used in self-regulating devices.

    328,    for transformers or inductors used in external or operator
    controlled devices.

    355,    for miscellaneous transformer or inductor devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for transformer or
    inductor structure.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 35 for
    transformer protection.


CLS 323/248
TXT Ferroresonant:

    Subject matter under subclass 247 wherein the transformer is associated
    with elements which causes it to resonate.

    (1)     Note.  A ferroresonant transformer usually includes a saturable
    core and a capacitor (usually termed a ferrocapacitor) connected to one of
    the windings thereof.

    (2)     Note.  Also included in this subclass are parametric transformers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306,    for self-regulating systems using ferroresonant transformers.


CLS 323/249
TXT Controllably saturable:

    Subject matter under subclass 247 wherein the transformer or inductor
    includes a core, the level of saturation thereof being controllable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302,    for input level responsive devices of this type.

    310,    for self-regulating devices of this type.

    329,    for external or operator controlled devices of this type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 8 for magnetic amplifiers.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 155 for inductive regulators with no
    moving parts.


CLS 323/250
TXT With specific core structure (e.g., gap, aperture, slot, permanent magnet):

    Subject matter under subclass 249 wherein the core includes a gap,
    aperture, or slot therein or a permanent magnet associated therewith.


CLS 323/251
TXT With plural power windings:

    Subject matter under subclass 249 wherein the saturable transformer
    includes a plurality of windings through which the voltage or current which
    is to be controlled is conducted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332,    for external or operator controlled devices of this type.


CLS 323/252
TXT In bridge configuration or in bridge arm:
    Subject matter under subclass 251 wherein the plural power windings are
    parts of a bridge circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333,    for external or operator controlled devices of this type.


CLS 323/253
TXT On different cores:

    Subject matter under subclass 251 wherein each of the power windings is on
    a different core of a multicore transformer arrangement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    335,    for external or operator controlled devices of this type.


CLS 323/254
TXT With electronic tube or a three or more terminal semiconductive device in
    control circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 249 wherein the control circuit includes at
    least one electronics tube or three or more terminal semiconductive device
    connected to the control winding of the transformer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    339,    for external or operator controlled devices of this type.


CLS 323/255
TXT Having a variable length winding (e.g., tapped) as the final control
    device: Subject matter under subclass 247 wherein at least one of the
    windings of the transformer includes at least one contact intermediate the
    end contacts of the winding and means is provided to select between the
    several contacts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    340,    for external or operator controlled devices of this type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 11 for tap
    changing switches, per se.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 137 for transformers with tap changing
    switches.


CLS 323/256
TXT With motor driven tap switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 255 wherein the means to select between the
    several contacts is operated by a motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    341,    for external or operator controlled devices of this type.


CLS 323/257
TXT Including an electronic tube or a three or more terminal semiconductive
    device in control circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 256 including a signal processing circuit
    between the means responsive to the output and the motor, the signal
    processing circuit including at least one electronic tube or three or more
    terminal semiconductive device.


CLS 323/258
TXT With electronic tube or a three or more terminal semiconductive device as
    tap switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 255 wherein at least one of the several
    contacts is connected to the output through an electronic tube or a three
    or more terminal semiconductive device.

    (1)     Note.  Devices in this subclass may include mechanical tap changers
    having a tube or semiconductive device associated therewith, usually for
    the purpose of arc suppression.


CLS 323/259
TXT Having a winding in series with the source and load (e.g., buck-boost):

    Subject matter under subclass 247 wherein the load current is conducted
    from the source to the load through a winding of the transformer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    344,    for external or operator controlled devices of this type.


CLS 323/260
TXT With motor in control circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 259 including a signal processing circuit
    between the means responsive to the output level and the final control
    device, the signal processing circuit including a motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256     and 341, for motor-driven tap changers used in devices having
    variable length windings as final control devices.


CLS 323/261
TXT With saturable reactor in control circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 259 including a signal processing circuit
    between the means responsive to the output and the final control device,
    that signal processing circuit including a saturable reactor.


CLS 323/262
TXT Plural windings in series:

    Subject matter under subclass 259 wherein the final control device includes
    a plurality of windings in series between the source and the load.


CLS 323/263
TXT With electronic tube or a three or more terminal semiconductive device in
    control circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 259 including a signal processing circuit
    between the means responsive to the output and the final control device,
    the signal processing circuit including at least one electronic tube or
    three or more terminal semiconductor device.


CLS 323/264
TXT Having movable structure or winding:
    Subject matter under subclass 247 wherein the transformer includes movable
    magnetic shunts, shield, windings, or other such structure and it is the
    positioning of such structure that determines the ultimate output.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    347,    for external or operator controlled devices of this type.


CLS 323/265
TXT Using a three or more terminal: semiconductive device as the final control
    device:

    Subject matter under subclass 234 wherein the final control device within
    the output level responsive system is a transistor or semiconductor
    controlled rectifier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223,    for shunt regulators.

    311,    for self-regulating devices.

    349,    for external or operator controlled devices all using three or more
    terminal semiconductive devices as final control devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 501 for devices of this type having
    electric heating devices as a load.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 438+ and 530+ for subcombinations of systems using
    semiconductive devices as final control devices.


CLS 323/266
TXT Including pre or post regulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 265 wherein the system includes two stages of
    regulation, at least one of which is responsive to the output level.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224,    for plural stage regulators wherein one of the stages is in shunt
    with the source or load.


CLS 323/267
TXT Including plural loads commonly controlled: Subject matter under subclass
    265 wherein the system supplies several loads through commonly controlled
    devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 11 for
    plural load systems which are responsive to each load individually.


CLS 323/268
TXT Including plural final control devices:
    Subject matter under subclass 265 wherein the system includes a plurality
    of transistors or semiconductor controlled rectifiers, each contributing to
    the final control of the output.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225,    for shunt regulators with plural final control devices.

    350,    for external or operator controlled devices of this type.


CLS 323/269
TXT Linearly acting parallel connected:

    Subject matter under subclass 268 wherein the plural devices are connected
    in parallel and are operated in their linear range.


CLS 323/270
TXT Linearly acting series connected:

    Subject matter under subclass 268 wherein the plural devices are connected
    in series and are operated in their linear range.


CLS 323/271
TXT Switched (e.g., on-off control):

    Subject matter under subclass 268 wherein the plural devices are operated
    such that they are either conductive or nonconductive.


CLS 323/272
TXT Parallel connected:

    Subject matter under subclass 271 wherein the plural devices are connected
    in parallel.


CLS 323/273
TXT Linearly acting:

    Subject matter under subclass 265 wherein the system includes a single
    final control device which is operated in its linear range.


CLS 323/274
TXT With threshold detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 273 wherein the system includes means which
    responds within a predetermined range or the means abruptly changes its
    conductive state at a predetermined level of the output.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284,    for switching regulators with threshold detection.


CLS 323/275
TXT With plural condition sensing:

    Subject matter under subclass 273 including means for sensing a condition
    of the system or its load, such means being in addition to the means
    responsive to deviation in the output of the system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes sensing combinations of voltage,
    current, power factor, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246,    for devices of this type wherein the final control device is a
    phase controlled switch.

    285,    for switching regulators with plural condition sensing.


CLS 323/276
TXT For protection system:

    Subject matter under subclass 275 including means to detect conditions
    which could cause possibly destructive failure of the system, its
    components or the load and means to prevent such failure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1 and 18
    for protective systems, per se.


CLS 323/277
TXT With current sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 including means to sense the load current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 93 for
    current sensors in protective systems.


CLS 323/278
TXT Having base-emitter of transistor coupled across sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 277 wherein the current sensor includes an
    impedance connected in series with the load and the base-emitter junction
    of a transistor is connected across the impedance.


CLS 323/279
TXT Including final control device parameter:

    Subject matter under subclass 275 wherein the additional condition is a
    parameter of the final control device such as its temperature, the current
    it is carrying, or the voltage across it.


CLS 323/280
TXT With a specific feedback amplifier (e.g., integrator, summer):

    Subject matter under subclass 273 including a signal processing circuit
    between the means responsive to the output level and the final control
    device, the signal processing circuit including an amplifier in a feedback
    path, the amplifier including such elements as cascaded stages, summing
    junctions, or additional feedback circuitry.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, appropriate subclasses for amplifiers, per se.


CLS 323/281
TXT With reference voltage circuitry:

    Subject matter subclass 273 including a signal processing circuit between
    the means responsive to the output level and the final control device, the
    signal processing circuit including means to develop a standard voltage
    which is used as a reference in the signal processing circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    313,    for self-regulating devices which derive a voltage reference.


CLS 323/282
TXT Switched (e.g., switching regulators):
    Subject matter under subclass 265 wherein the system includes a single
    final control device which is operated in such manner that it is either
    conductive or nonconductive.

    (1)     Note.  The most common devices found herein are regulators wherein
    a switch such as a transistor is operated in a closed or open state.  When
    closed an inductor typically stores energy, and when open, a flyback or
    catch diode will continue the flow of current or release of energy through
    the inductor to the load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222,    for shunt type switching regulators.

    351,    for external or operator controlled  switching regulators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 15 and 124 for d.c.
    to a.c. to d.c. converters.


CLS 323/283
TXT Digitally controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 282 including a signal processing circuit
    between the means responsive to the output and the final control device,
    that signal processing circuit including logic elements which process a
    signal having discrete states.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211,    and the subclasses noted in the definition thereof for digitally
    controlled systems.


CLS 323/284
TXT With threshold detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 282 wherein the system includes means which
    responds within a predetermined range of the output or the means abruptly
    changes its conductive state at a predetermined level of the output.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    274,    for linearly acting regulators with threshold detection.


CLS 323/285
TXT With plural condition sensing:

    Subject matter under subclass 282 including means for sensing a condition
    of the system or its load, such means being in addition to the means
    responsive to deviation in the output of the system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes sensing combinations of voltage,
    current, power factor, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246,    for devices of this type wherein the final control device is a
    phase controlled switch.

    275,    for devices of this type wherein the final control device is a
    linearly acting three or more terminal semiconductive device.


CLS 323/286
TXT Including filter sensing:

    Subject matter under subclass 285 wherein the additional condition is a
    condition of a filter used to smooth the output of the switched final
    control device.

    (1)     Note.  The filter is typically a diode, choke, capacitor
    arrangement and the sensor is usually associated with the choke element.


CLS 323/287
TXT In flyback path:

    Subject matter under subclass 286 wherein the filter includes a diode
    (typically termed flyback, catch, or freewheeling diode) and the sensor is
    disposed in the diode path.


CLS 323/288
TXT With ramp generator or controlled capacitor charging:

    Subject matter under subclass 282 including circuitry which produces a
    gradually changing signal which is ultimately proportional to the output of
    the device.

    (1)     Note.  The changing signal may take the form of a sawtooth with a
    repeating ramp and return to an initial value. Controlled capacitor
    charging involves charging a capacitor to some predetermined value at which
    value a controllable device such as a transistor, unijunction transistor,
    or programmable unijunction transistor goes into another state of
    conduction or exerts a controlling influence on another device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242     and 326, for other systems including ramp generators or controlled
    capacitor charging circuits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 131+ for a miscellaneous ramp or sawtooth waveform
    generator.


CLS 323/289
TXT With base drive control dissipation:
    Subject matter under subclass 282 including means connected to the base of
    a switching transistor to minimize the dissipation of power within the
    transistor at its turn-on and turn-off times.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 579 and 585 for miscellaneous devices concerning
    minority carrier storage.


CLS 323/290
TXT With inductor in control circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 282 including a signal processing circuit
    between the means responsive to the output level and the final control
    device, the signal processing circuit including an inductor.


CLS 323/291
TXT Using an electronic tube as the final control device:

    Subject matter under subclass 234 wherein the final control device within
    the output level responsive system is an electric space discharge device
    such as a vacuum or gas tube.


CLS 323/292
TXT With a three or more terminal semiconductive device in control circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 291 including a signal processing circuit
    between the output level responsive means and the final control device, the
    signal processing circuit including a transistor or semiconductive
    controlled rectifier.


CLS 323/293
TXT Using an impedance as the final control device:

    Subject matter under subclass 234 wherein the final control device within
    the output level responsive system is an impedance such as a resistor,
    capacitor, or diode.

    (1)     Note.  Inductors are not included herein.  See subclass 247 above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208,    and the subclasses noted in the definition thereof, for impedances
    used as final control devices in other systems.


CLS 323/294
TXT Hall effect device, magnetoresistor or thermistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 293 wherein the impedance is a Hall effect
    device or a resistor which changes its resistance in accordance with the
    strength of a magnetic field or temperature.


CLS 323/295
TXT Pressure sensitive resistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 293 wherein the impedance is a resistor which
    changes its resistance in accordance with the pressure applied thereto.


CLS 323/296
TXT Liquid contact resistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 293 wherein the impedance is a resistor which
    changes its resistance in accordance with the degree of contact with a
    conductive liquid.


CLS 323/297
TXT Plural selective resistors:

    Subject matter under subclass 293 wherein a plurality of individual
    resistors are connected in a circuit which allows each resistor or a
    combination of resistors to be used as the final control device.


CLS 323/298
TXT Variable resistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 293 wherein different portions or a
    combination of portions of a single resistance element may be used as the
    final control device.


CLS 323/299
TXT INPUT LEVEL RESPONSIVE:

    Subject matter under the class definition which maintains an output at a
    desired level through the use of control means responsive to the input
    level.

    (1)     Note.  Although not specifically included within each of the
    following definitions, input level responsive systems usually include (a)
    some means which produces a signal indicative of the input level of the
    system, (b) some processing circuit which makes use of the signal mentioned
    above, and (c) a final control device which is controlled by the output of
    the processing circuit, thus producing a controlled output of the system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 538+ for regulators of this type having a
    semiconductive device as the claimed load.


CLS 323/300
TXT Phase controlled switching using electronic tube or a three or more
    terminal semiconductive device:

    Subject matter under subclass 299 wherein the input is alternating current
    and the final control device is an electronic tube or three or more
    terminal semiconductive device which is caused to change to its conductive
    state at a controllable point following the zero axis crossing of the input
    waveform.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237,    for output level responsive phase controlled switching systems.

    320,    for external or operator controlled phase controlled switching
    systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 453+ for semiconductor controlled rectifiers which are
    involved in phase switching.


CLS 323/301
TXT Using a transformer or inductor as the final control device:

    Subject matter under subclass 299 wherein the device within the system
    which is the ultimate controller of the output is a transformer or inductor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247,    for transformers or inductors used in output level responsive
    devices.

    305,    for transformers or inductors used in self-regulating devices.

    328,    for transformers or inductors used in external or operator
    controlled devices.

    355,    for miscellaneous transformer or inductor devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for transformer or
    inductor structure.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 35 for
    transformer protection.


CLS 323/302
TXT Saturable:

    Subject matter under subclass 301 wherein the transformer or inductor
    includes a core, the level of saturation thereof being controllable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249,    for output level responsive devices of this type.

    310,    for self-regulating devices of this type.

    329,    for external or operator controlled devices of this type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 8 for magnetic amplifiers.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 155 for inductive regulators with no
    moving parts.


CLS 323/303
TXT Using a linearly acting final control device:

    Subject matter under subclass 299 wherein the final control device is
    operated within its linear range.


CLS 323/304
TXT SELF-REGULATING (E.G., NONRETROACTIVE):
    Subject matter under the class definition which maintains an output at a
    desired level through the use of means which exhibit inherent limiting
    characteristics.

    (1)     Note.  Example of means which exhibit inherent limiting
    characteristics are zener diodes and neon tubes.


CLS 323/305
TXT Using a transformer or inductor as the final control device:

    Subject matter under subclass 304 wherein the device within the system
    which is the ultimate controller of the output is a transformer or inductor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247,    for transformers or inductors used in output level responsive
    devices.

    301,    for transformers or inductors used in input level responsive
    devices.

    328,    for transformers or inductors used in external or operator
    controlled devices.

    355,    for miscellaneous transformer or inductor devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for transformer or
    inductor structure.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 35 for
    transformer protection.


CLS 323/306
TXT Ferroresonant:

    Subject matter under subclass 305 wherein the transformer is associated
    with elements which causes it to resonate.

    (1)     Note.  A ferroresonant transformer usually includes a saturable
    core and a capacitor (usually termed a ferrocapacitor) connected to one of
    the windings thereof.

    (2)     Note.  Also included in this subclass are parametric transformers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248,    for output level responsive systems using ferroresonant
    transformers.


CLS 323/307
TXT With plural cores:

    Subject matter under subclass 306 wherein the ferroresonant transformer has
    at least two cores.


CLS 323/308
TXT With core having an air gap or magnetic shunt:

    Subject matter under subclass 306 wherein the core of the ferroresonant
    transformer includes an air gap within one of the legs thereof or a
    magnetically permeable leg which bridges the core.


CLS 323/309
TXT Including a ferrocapacitor across a tertiary winding:

    Subject matter under subclass 308 wherein the ferroresonant transformer has
    at least three windings and a capacitor is connected in a series closed
    circuit with one of the windings.


CLS 323/310
TXT Controllably saturable:

    Subject matter under subclass 305 wherein the transformer includes a core,
    the level of saturation thereof being controllable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249,    for output level responsive devices of this type.

    302,    for input level responsive devices of this type.

    329,    for external or operator controlled devices of this type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 8 for magnetic amplifiers.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 155 for inductive regulators with no
    moving parts.


CLS 323/311
TXT Using a three or more terminal semiconductive device as the final control
    device:

    Subject matter under subclass 304 wherein the final control device within
    the self-regulating system is a transistor or semiconductor controlled
    rectifier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223,    for shunt regulators.

    265,    for output level responsive devices.

    349,    for external or operator controlled devices, all using three or
    more terminal semiconductive devices as final control devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 501 for devices of this type having
    electric heating devices as a load.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 438+ and 530+ for subcombinations of systems using
    semiconductive devices as final control devices.


CLS 323/312
TXT For current stabilization:

    Subject matter under subclass 311 wherein the system functions to regulate
    current therethrough.


CLS 323/313
TXT To derive a voltage reference (e.g., band gap regulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 312 wherein the current within the device is
    stabilized for the purpose of producing a stabilized reference voltage at
    its output.

    (1)     Note.  Devices herein generate a reference potential related to an
    inherent property such as the band gap potential of a semiconductor
    material such as silicon.  The band gap potential is the difference in
    energy between the energy level of the bottom of the conduction band and
    the energy level of the top of the valence band.


CLS 323/314
TXT With additional stage:

    Subject matter under subclass 313 wherein an additional controlled device
    is connected between the final control device circuit and the ultimate
    output.


CLS 323/315
TXT Including parallel paths (e.g., current mirror):

    Subject matter under subclass 312 wherein at least two stabilized current
    paths are in parallel with each other, usually the currents bearing a
    predetermined relation to each other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 530+ for semiconductor device bias supplies of this
    type.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 288 for current mirror amplifiers.


CLS 323/316
TXT With amplifier connected to or between current paths:

    Subject matter under subclass 315 wherein an additional controlled device
    is connected between the stabilized current paths or as an output to at
    least one of the paths.


CLS 323/317
TXT With switched final control device:

    Subject matter under subclass 315 wherein the controlling device within at
    least one of the paths is operated in a switching mode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272,    for parallel connected, switched final control devices in output
    level responsive systems.


CLS 323/318
TXT EXTERNAL OR OPERATOR CONTROLLED:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means for controlling
    an output through the action of an externally generated signal or the
    adjustment of an element within the system by an operator of the system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    234,    for systems which are controlled in response to the output level of
    the system.

    299,    for systems which are controlled in response to the input level of
    the system.

    304,    for systems which are controlled by the inherent characteristics of
    the elements which make up the system.


CLS 323/319
TXT Zero switching:

    Subject matter under subclass 318 wherein the input is alternating current
    and the final control device is a switch which is caused to change to its
    conductive state at or about the zero axis crossing of the input waveform.

    (1)     Note.  Usually, the average power applied to the load is controlled
    by varying the number of half or full cycles of input waveform that is
    permitted to flow to the load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235,    for output level responsive systems of this type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 451+ for semiconductor controlled rectifiers which are
    involved in zero point switching.


CLS 323/320
TXT Phase controlled switching using electronic tube or a three or more
    terminal semiconductive device:

    Subject matter under subclass 318 wherein the input is alternating current
    and the final control device is an electronic tube or three or more
    terminal semiconductive device which is caused to change to its conductive
    state at a controllable point following the zero axis crossing of the input
    waveform.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237,    for output responsive phase controlled switching systems.

    300,    for input responsive phase controlled switching systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 447+ for semiconductor controlled rectifiers which are
    involved in phase switching.


CLS 323/321
TXT With soft start:

    Subject matter under subclass 320 wherein at the time of start up of the
    system, the output is gradually increased over a plurality of cycles from
    zero to the desired level.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238,    for output responsive systems of this type.


CLS 323/322
TXT With digital control:

    Subject matter under subclass 320 including a control signal processing
    circuit which includes logic elements which process a signal having
    discrete states.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211,    for reactive power systems which are digitally controlled.

    241,    for digitally controlled phase controlled switching systems.

    283,    for output responsive digitally controlled solid-state systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, appropriate subclasses for
    digital logic circuits.


CLS 323/323
TXT With interval timer:

    Subject matter under subclass 320 which includes means for predetermining
    the length of time of operation of the system or a part thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    319,    for zero switching devices which may include interval timers.


CLS 323/324
TXT Using single unidirectional element with bidirectional pass:

    Subject matter under subclass 320 wherein the final control device is
    capable of carrying current in only one direction but the circuit is
    arranged in such fashion that both polarities of the input are passed or
    controlled.

    (1)     Note.  The unidirectional element may be a tube or semiconductive
    device connected within a diode bridge circuit so as to pass both
    polarities of the alternating current, or a tube or a semiconductive device
    bridged by a single diode whereby one polarity of the applied AC is
    controlled and the other polarity is uncontrolled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239,    for output responsive systems of this type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 448 for miscellaneous gating SCR's in a bridge.


CLS 323/325
TXT With a three or more terminal semiconductive device in trigger
    circuit:Subject matter under subclass 320 including a control signal
    shaping circuit between the controlling input and the final control
    element, the shaping circuit including at least one transistor or SCR
    device.


CLS 323/326
TXT Including ramp generator or controlled capacitor charging:

    Subject matter under subclass 325 including circuitry which produces a
    gradually changing signal (usually by controlling the rate of charge of a
    capacitor) which is then used in the trigger circuit to produce the
    controlling input to the final control element.

    (1)     Note.  The changing signal may take the form of a sawtooth with a
    repeating ramp and return to an initial value. Controlled capacitor
    charging involves charging a capacitor to some predetermined value at which
    value a controllable device such as a transistor, unijunction transistor,
    or programmable unijunction transistor goes into another state of
    conduction or exerts a controlling influence on another device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242     and 288, for ramp generators used in output level responsive
    systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 131+ for a miscellaneous ramp or sawtooth waveform
    generator.


CLS 323/327
TXT With passive element only in trigger circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 320 including a control signal shaping
    circuit between the controlling input and the final control element, the
    shaping circuit including passive elements such as resistors and capacitors
    only.


CLS 323/328
TXT Using a transformer or inductor as the final control device:

    Subject matter under subclass 318 wherein the device within the system
    which is the ultimate controller of the output is a transformer or inductor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247,    for systems of this type which are responsive to the output level
    of the system.

    301,    for transformers or inductors used in input level responsive
    devices.

    305,    for transformers or inductors used in self-regulating devices.

    355,    for miscellaneous transformer or inductor devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for transformer or
    inductor structure.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 35 for
    transformer protection.


CLS 323/329
TXT Controllably saturable:

    Subject matter under subclass 328 wherein the transformer includes a core,
    the level of saturation thereof being controllable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249,    for output level responsive devices of this type.

    302,    for input level responsive devices of this type.

    310,    for self-regulating devices of this type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 8 for magnetic amplifiers.

    336,    Inductors Devices, subclass 155 for inductive regulators with no
    moving parts.


CLS 323/330
TXT With permanent magnet:

    Subject matter under subclass 329 which includes a permanent magnet as part
    of or in addition to the saturable core.


CLS 323/331
TXT With core having a gap, aperture, or slot:
    Subject matter under subclass 329 wherein the core includes a gap,
    aperture, or slot therein.


CLS 323/332
TXT With plural power windings:

    Subject matter under subclass 329 wherein the saturable transformer
    includes a plurality of windings through which the voltage or current which
    is to be controlled is conducted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251,    for output level responsive devices of this type.


CLS 323/333
TXT In bridge configuration or in bridge arm: Subject matter under subclass 332
    wherein the plural power windings are parts of a bridge circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252,    for output level responsive devices of this type.


CLS 323/334
TXT On different legs of single core:

    Subject matter under subclass 332 wherein each of the power windings is on
    a different leg of a multilegged core.


CLS 323/335
TXT On different cores:

    Subject matter under subclass 332 wherein each of the power windings is on
    a different core of a multicore transformer arrangement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    253,    for output level responsive devices of this type.


CLS 323/336
TXT Multistage:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein the output of all but the last
    transformer is connected as the input of the succeeding transformer.


CLS 323/337
TXT Push-pull:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein the different cores of the
    transformer arrangement operate on different polarities of the voltage or
    current to be treated.


CLS 323/338
TXT With plural cores:

    Subject matter under subclass 329 wherein a single power winding is wound
    about plural adjacent cores.


CLS 323/339
TXT Including an electronic tube or a three or more terminal semiconductive
    device in control circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 329 wherein the control circuit includes at
    least one electronic tube or three or more terminal semiconductive device
    connected to the control winding of the transformer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254,    for output level responsive devices of this type.


CLS 323/340
TXT Having a variable length winding (e.g., tapped) as the final control device:

    Subject matter under subclass 328 wherein at least one of the windings of
    the transformer includes at least one contact intermediate the end contacts
    of the winding and means is provided to select between the several contacts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255,    for output level responsive devices of this type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 11 for tap
    changing switches, per se.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 137 for transformers with tap
    changingswitches.


CLS 323/341
TXT With motor driven tap switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 340 wherein the means to select between the
    several contacts is operated by a motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256,    for output level responsive devices of this type.


CLS 323/342
TXT With other transformer:

    Subject matter under subclass 340 wherein the system includes a transformer
    in addition to the tapped transformer.


CLS 323/343
TXT With a three or more terminal semiconductive device:

    Subject matter under subclass 340 including a transistor or SCR as part of
    a control circuit within the device or having a switching means connected
    to each tap, the switching means being a transistor or SCR.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258,    for transistors or SCRs used as tap switches in output level
    responsive devices.


CLS 323/344
TXT Having a winding in series with the source and load (e.g., buck-boost):

    Subject matter under subclass 328 wherein the load current is conducted
    from the source to the load through a winding of the transformer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259,    for output level responsive devices of this type.


CLS 323/345
TXT Having a switch in series with winding:
    Subject matter under subclass 328 wherein at least one of the windings of
    the transformer has a switch in series therewith and it is the relative
    lengths of the on and off times of the switch that determines the ultimate
    output.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222,    for shunt regulators having a choke and switch connected across the
    source circuit.


CLS 323/346
TXT Having series-parallel connectable windings:

    Subject matter under subclass 328 wherein the transformer includes a
    plurality of windings which are arranged in such fashion that they may be
    selectably connected in series or parallel or a combination series-parallel
    circuit.


CLS 323/347
TXT Having movable structure or winding:
    Subject matter under subclass 328 wherein the transformer includes movable
    magnetic shunts, shields, windings, or other such structure and it is the
    positioning of such structure that determines the ultimate output.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264,    for output level responsive devices of this type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 195 for inductive
    telemetering transmitters having movable structure or windings.


CLS 323/348
TXT Including rotary motion:

    Subject matter under subclass 347 wherein the structure or winding is
    movable about an axis.


CLS 323/349
TXT Using a three or more terminal semiconductive device as the final control
    device:

    Subject matter under subclass 318 wherein the device which ultimately
    controls the level of the output is a transistor or SCR.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223,    for shunt regulators.

    265,    for output level responsive devices.

    311,    for self-regulating devices, all using three or more terminal
    semiconductive devices as final control devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 501 for devices of this type having
    electric heating devices as a load.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 438+ and 530+ for subcombinations of systems using
    semiconductive devices as final control devices.


CLS 323/350
TXT Including plural final control devices:
    Subject matter under subclass 349 wherein the system includes a plurality
    of transistors or semiconductor controlled rectifiers, each contributing to
    the final control of the output.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225,    for shunt regulators with plural final control devices.

    268,    for output level responsive devices of this type.


CLS 323/351
TXT Switched (e.g., switching regulators):

    Subject matter under subclass 349 wherein the system includes a single
    final control device which is operated in such a manner that it is either
    conductive or nonconductive.

    (1)     Note.  The most common devices found herein are regulators wherein
    a switch such as a transistor is operated in a closed or open state.  When
    closed an inductor typically stores energy, and when open, a flyback or
    catch diode will continue the flow of current or release of energy through
    the inductor to the load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222,    for shunt type switching regulators. 282,for output level
    responsive switching regulators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 15 and 124 for d.c.
    to a.c. to d.c. converters.


CLS 323/352
TXT Using an impedance as the final control device:

    Subject matter under subclass 318 wherein the final control device within
    the system is an impedance such as a resistor, capacitor, or diode.

    (1)     Note.  Inductors are not included herein.  See subclass 328 above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208,    and the subclasses noted in the definition thereof, for impedances
    used as final control devices in other systems.


CLS 323/353
TXT Resistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 352 wherein the impedance is a resistor.


CLS 323/354
TXT Selective:

    Subject matter under subclass 353 wherein a plurality of individual
    resistors are connected in a circuit which allows each resistor or a
    combination of resistors to be used as the final control device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    297,    for output level responsive devices of this type.


CLS 323/355
TXT INCLUDING A TRANSFORMER OR AN INDUCTOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which a load device not
    elsewhere classified is supplied with electricity by a transformer, or the
    combination of a transformer or inductor with circuitry not elsewhere
    classifiable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206,    214, 215, 232, 247, 301, 305, and 328, for transformers or
    inductors used in various control systems within this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, for transformers or inductors, per se.


CLS 323/356
TXT With compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 355 wherein the transformer has associated
    therewith circuitry which corrects for undesired phase shift or other
    discrepancy between the expected and actual outputs of the transformer.


CLS 323/357
TXT For current transformer:

    Subject matter under subclass 356 wherein the transformer is a current
    transformer.

    (1)     Note.  See the definition of current transformer in subclass 358
    below.


CLS 323/358
TXT Current transformer:

    Subject matter under subclass 355 wherein the transformer is an instrument
    transformer having its primary winding (which may be a single conductor)
    connected in series with a circuit carrying the current to be measured.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 127 for measuring
    devices including transformers.


CLS 323/359
TXT Potential transformer:

    Subject matter under subclass 355 wherein the transformer is an instrument
    transformer having its primary winding connected in parallel with a
    circuit, the voltage of which is to be measured.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 127 for measuring
    devices including transformers.


CLS 323/360
TXT Superconductive:

    Subject matter under subclass 355 wherein the transformer includes a
    winding whose resistance is essentially zero.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 527+ for miscellaneous superconductive circuits.


CLS 323/361
TXT Polyphase or plural transformers:

    Subject matter under subclass 355 wherein the transformer arrangement is
    adapted to handle more than one phase of electric energy or is made up of
    more than one transformer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 5 for poly-phase transformers, per se.


CLS 323/362
TXT With core having permanent magnet or air gap:

    Subject matter under subclass 355 including a permanent magnet associated
    with the core of the transformer or having a gap in one of the legs thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250,    308, 330, and 331, for various devices including transformers with
    cores of this type.


CLS 323/363
TXT Inductor with or in a bridge:

    Subject matter under subclass 355 including at least one inductor in
    combination with a bridge circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    365,    for other impedances in bridge circuits.


CLS 323/364
TXT INCLUDING AN IMPEDANCE:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which a load device not
    elsewhere classified is supplied with electricity through an impedance
    arrangement or a combination of impedances not elsewhere classifiable.

    (1)     Note.  Inductors are not included herein.  See subclass 355 above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208,    and the subclasses noted in the definition thereof, for impedances
    used as final control devices in other systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, for resistors, per se.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 271 and
    500+ for capacitors, per se.


CLS 323/365
TXT In a bridge:

    Subject matter under subclass 364 wherein the impedance are connected in a
    bridge configuration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 69, 74,
    78, and 91 for temperature regulating systems which include impedance
    bridge networks as the control means.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 663 and 674 for
    electric motor position servomechanisms which may include an impedance
    bridge network; subclass 294 for motor reversing systems wherein the
    armature current reversal means includes an impedance bridge network; and
    subclass 535 for motor field circuit control systems which include an
    impedance bridge network.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 77 for single
    generator systems where the generator field circuit is controlled by means
    of an impedance bridge network.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 98, 101, and 600+ for electric testing systems
    involving impedance bridge arrangements.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 72, 146, and 175 for amplifier systems
    including, respectively, series arranged tubes with each tube in the arm of
    a bridge; a bridge with a tube in at least one arm; and a Wheatstone bridge
    network in a coupling circuit.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 110 and 138 for bridge type oscillators
    wherein the frequency determining element of the oscillator comprises a
    balanced lattice or similar type network having two pairs of conjugately
    related terminals.

    332,    Modulators, subclass 172 for a an amplitude modulator including
    bridge arrangements.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 1 for hybrid type
    networks which may include Wheatstone bridge impedance arrangements.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 510, 563, and 599 for
    condition responsive systems using a Wheatstone bridge.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 17, 58, 68, 98, 132,
    and 136 for converters including bridges.


CLS 323/366
TXT Thermistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 wherein the bridge includes a thermistor
    in at least one of its arms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    369,    for nonbridge thermistor arrangements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 183+ for similar subject
    matter controlling an indicator.


CLS 323/367
TXT Resistor only:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 wherein the bridge includes resistance
    elements only.


CLS 323/368
TXT Hall effect device or magnetoresistor:
    Subject matter under subclass 364 wherein the impedance arrangement
    includes a device which changes its impedance in accordance with the
    strength of a magnetic field applied thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 32 for magnetic field responsive
    resistors, per se.


CLS 323/369
TXT Thermistor or resistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 364 wherein the impedance arrangement
    includes at least one resistor which may be responsive to temperature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 183+ for similar subject
    matter controlling an indicator.


CLS 323/370
TXT With capacitor:

    Subject matter under subclass 369 having a capacitor in addition to the
    resistor.


CLS 323/371
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition not classifiable above.

               CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 323/901
TXT STARTING CIRCUITS:

    Art collection of disclosures including means to initiate circuit operation
    or to overcome an initial inoperative state of an element or circuit.


CLS 323/902
TXT OPTICAL COUPLING TO SEMICONDUCTOR:

    Art collection of disclosures including light emitting means coupled to a
    photoresponsive semiconductor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 551 for signal isolators, including
    optically coupled light emitters and semiconductor light receivers.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 80-85 for incoherent light emitters coupled to active
    solid-state device light detector elements, per se.


CLS 323/903
TXT PRECIPITATORS:

    Art collection of disclosures including power systems or regulators where
    the load is an electrostatic precipitator which removes particulate matter
    such as dirt from a gas, such as air.


CLS 323/904
TXT TOUCH SYSTEMS:

    Art collection of disclosures including the sensing of a change in
    capacitance, temperature, or other condition produced by a person touching
    or being in the immediate proximity of a part of the system.


CLS 323/905
TXT LAMP DIMMER STRUCTURE:

    Art collection of disclosures including an electrical control circuit
    housed or positioned within structure, such as a wall socket or a lamp
    socket, related to manually varying or controlling the output of a lamp.


CLS 323/906
TXT SOLAR CELL SYSTEMS:

    Art collection of disclosures including regulators having as a power source
    an array of solar cells and/or battery systems such as those in spacecraft.


CLS 323/907
TXT TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION OF SEMICONDUCTOR:

    Art collection of disclosures including semiconductors exhibiting
    temperature dependencies and means are provided to compensate for or to
    offset the temperature dependency.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 238 for temperature compensated photocells.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 706,707, and 712-722 for such devices with cooling means.


CLS 323/908
TXT INRUSH CURRENT LIMITERS:

    Art collection of disclosures including a component or circuit to limit,
    prevent, or lessen the initial surge of current that accompanies equipment
    turn-on.


CLS 323/909
TXT REMOTE SENSING:

    Art collection of disclosures including a power supply or regulator
    remotely located by long leads, cables, or wires, from a sensor or load.


CLS 323/910
TXT TWO OF THREE PHASES REGULATED:

    Art collection of disclosures including a three-phase system having
    regulating or control means in only two of the three phases.


CLS 323/911
TXT MEDICAL ELECTRONICS:

    Art collection of disclosures including a power supply or regulator
    particularly adapted to medical purposes such as electro-surgical units,
    body organ analyses, or electro-therapeutic units.


CLS 324/
TTL ELECTRICITY:  MEASURING AND  TESTING

CLS 324/
TXT This is the residual home for all subject matter, not elsewhere classified,
    relating to the measuring, testing (or sensing) of electric properties,
    (e.g., determining ground resistivity, determining frequency of an
    alternating current, determining kilowatt hour demand), or the measuring,
    testing or sensing of nonelectric properties by electric means (e.g.,
    determining moisture, a nonelectric property, by measuring conductance with
    a resistance bridge; determining speed, a nonelectric property by use of an
    electric tachometer).

    (1)     Note.  Measuring and testing have been distinguished as being
    quantitative and qualitative, respectively, but in these definitions the
    terms are used synonymously.

    (2)     Note.  This class was produced in 1953 by  making official the
    unofficial digests which had been established by the Examiners of Class 175
    (Division 48) during the period from about 1905 to 1952, and, in the case
    of subclasses 76+, by cursorily revising the unofficial digests which had
    been established by the Examiners of Classes 171 and 172 (Division 69)
    during the period from about 1902 to 1952.  A caveat is given: While it is
    believed that the titles and definitions are reasonably correct, no
    assurance can be given that all of the patents, issued prior to the date of
    reclassification, are in the proper subclass, since only some of the
    individual patents were read during the reclassification project.
    Consequently, in making a thorough search in this class, it is advisable to
    investigate every subclass which may possibly be pertinent and not, in
    order to shorten the search, to rely upon the principle of superiority of
    subclass subject matter because of position in schedule, since the
    principle is applicable only in classes where each patent has been analyzed
    and placed in the schedule in accordance with that portion of the disclosed
    subject matter which is claimed.

    (3)     Note.  Measuring and testing requires sensing and signaling or
    indicating to exhibit the result of the sensing. Sensing is synonymous with
     condition responsive.  Sensing merely detects the presence and/or
    magnitude of the condition.

    (4)     Note.  Since many other classes include condition responsive
    subclasses, often entitled automatically responsive or automatic, the
    search for sensing, in order to be complete, must extend to the class which
    relates to the environment in which the sensing occurs.  Some of these
    classes are listed below under SEARCH CLASS.

    (5)     Note.  Since Class 324 takes, under the class definition, only
    measuring and testing not elsewhere classified, the search, in order to be
    complete, must in appropriate instances extend to the other classes listed
    below under SEARCH CLASS.

    (6)     Note.  The combination of the subject matter of this class (324)
    and an art environment is generally classified with the art environment
    where that environment is significant, either by virtue of a significant
    disclosed relationship or by virtue of a claimed relationship, as where a
    test is made of the condition of a portion of a telephone system without
    making said portion of the telephone system unavailable for use.  Where the
    art environment is recited by name only the combination may be classified,
    in some instances, with the art environment, and in others, in this class
    (324). For a list of some of the other classes which contain pertinent
    subject matter, see the classes referred to under SEARCH CLASS.

    (7)     Note.  Subclasses 870.01+ take telemetric-signaling means useful in
    transmitting a measured quantity, not limited to any particular measuring
    instrument provided for in other classes, while Class 324 takes such
    telemetric-signaling means in combination with a particular measuring means
    of the type provided for in Class 324.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 25.35 for the electrical measuring, testing
    or sensing of piezoelectric crystals combined with the manufacture thereof,
    and subclass 25.41 for the electrical measuring, testing or sensing of
    condensers combined with the manufacture thereof.

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 125+, for the determination of
    distance, and subclasses 300+, for magnetic field direction sensing and
    indicating.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for nonelectrical
    measuring and testing and for electrical measuring and testing of the
    following types:



            Gas analysis by electrical thermal determination, subclasses 26+.
    Moisture determination by electrical thermal conductivity, subclass 75.
    Stress and strain gages, subclass 760.  Surface and cutting edge
    determination by sliding pick-up subclasses 104+.  Motor and engine
    determinations (i.e., not merely ignition system), subclasses 116+. Liquid
    level gages; immersible electrode type, subclass 304; float type,
    subclasses 305+. Fluid pressure (e.g., Pirani type), subclass 755.  Speed,
    subclasses 488+.



    100,    Presses, subclass 99 for presses having electrical measuring,
    testing or sensing means.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    47+ for methods of making or joining conductors of indefinite length.

    178,    Telegraphy, appropriate subclasses particularly subclass 69, for
    telegraphy combined with electrical measuring, testing or sensing.

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 101+, for geophysical or subsurface
    exploration involving mechanically transmitting or receiving sound waves,
    subclasses 123+ for mechanical sound echo systems in general, and subclass
    125 for mechanical sound location means.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 400, for the
    analytical and testing apparatus related to the subject matter of that
    class, and subclass 242 for electrolytic cells, per se, (e.g., Beckmann
    cell).

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, appropriate subclasses for electrolysis
    utilized for electrochemistry and especially subclasses 775+ as the
    residual home for a process of electrolytic analysis or testing, per se.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, for the subject
    matter of that class even if the basis of the separation is an electrical
    determination.  Note subclasses 127.1+ for electrostatic separation and
    subclasses 212 and 213+ for magnetic separators, subclasses 511, 524+, 536,
    and 576 for photoelectric assorting.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for miscellaneous photoelectric
    cell circuits, subclass 250 for wave meters for measuring the wavelength or
    frequency of radio and microwaves, subclass 281 for methods and apparatus
    for ionic separation or analysis, subclasses 302+ for fluorescent and
    radioactive tracer methods, subclasses 336.1+ for the detection of
    invisible radiation or the examination of material by invisible radiation
    using radiant energy responsive electric signalling means, subclasses 428+
    for fluent material containing, support or transfer means with or without
    an irradiating source or radiating fluent material, subclasses 453.11+ for
    supports for objects of irradiation, subclasses 458.1+ for luminophor
    irradiation, subclasses 472.1+ for nonelectric invisible radiation
    detectors, subclasses 493.1+ for radiant energy generation and sources,
    subclasses 505.1+ for radiation controlling means and subclasses 522.1+ for
    source supports.

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, appropriate subclasses for games (e.g.,
    pin-ball machines, target range) having electrical indicators.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 111
    for systems which are nonresponsive to frequency change and subclass 152
    for systems which are responsive to rate of change.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 10 for the subject
    matter of that class with integral temperature indicators.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Consumable Electrodes,
    appropriate subclasses (note particularly subclass 9) for the subject
    matter of that class combined with measuring, testing or sensing.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, appropriate
    subclasses (note particularly subclasses 129+) for the subject matter of
    that class combined with measuring, testing or sensing.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    automatically responsive motor systems and subclass 490 for motor systems
    having signals, meters, recorders or testing devices.

    320,    Electricity:  Battery and Condenser Charging and Discharging,
    subclass 48 for battery charging and discharging systems having indicating,
    signaling and/or testing means.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclasses 17+ for the
    subject matter of that class automatically responsive to a condition.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    234-303 for the subject matter of that class automatically responsive to a
    condition.

    329,    Demodulators, for amplitude frequency, phase or pulse demodulators
    which may include an indicator.

    330,    Amplifiers, appropriate subclasses, for amplifiers, generally,
    which may be used in electrical measuring and testing circuits,
    particularly subclass 2 for amplifier condition testing or measuring.
    Where the amplifier is used merely as a part of an arrangement to measure
    or test a condition other than that of the amplifier, itself,
    classification is not in Class 330 but in the appropriate subclass of Class
    324.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 44 for oscillator systems provided with
    frequency  calibrating or testing means, and subclass 64 for oscillator
    systems provided with indicator, signal or alarm.

    332,    Modulators, appropriate subclasses particularly subclasses 118 and
    150 for the modulators having indicating, observing and/or signaling means.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclasses 2+, 14 and 17.1+ for the subject matter of that
    class automatically responsive to a condition.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 30+ for the subject matter of that
    class automatically responsive to a condition.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, appropriate subclasses, for subject
    matter sometimes similar to that in Class 324.  Often, but not invariably,
    the line between these two classes is as follows:  If the testing system is
    permanently associated with the environment being tested, as in a machine
    monitoring device or in a burglar alarm, classification is in Class 340,
    while if it is temporarily associated, as in a portable test set, such as
    used by linemen, classification is in Class 324.  Note particularly
    subclasses 870.01+ for telemetering and subclasses 500+ for signaling,
    automatically responsive to a condition.  Also see the reference to Class
    136, supra.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 5+ for reflected
    and/or otherwise returned radio wave energy wave measuring,     testing and
    sensing systems, such as RADAR and ponder systems, and subclasses 350+ for
    direction finding radio systems.

    346,    Recorders, for recorders which record the operation of machines or
    workmen. Many of these recorders, especially in subclasses 33+ record the
    result of a measurement, test or sensing operation. Generally, but not
    invariably, a Class 324 disclosure, when combined with a recorder, is
    classified in Class 324.

    348,    Television, subclasses 180+ for monitoring, testing, or measuring
    television signals or apparatus.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, for measuring and testing light,
    materials and articles by means of visible light particularly subclasses
    23+ for optical stroboscopes, subclasses 27+ for velocity or velocity and
    height measurements, subclasses 213+ for photometers, subclasses 237+ for
    apparatus for flaw detection subclasses 300+ for spectroscopic examination,
    subclasses 432+ for light transmission tests and subclasses 445+ for light
    reflection tests.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    safety systems responsive to an unsafe condition, such as circuit breaker
    systems, and subclasses 236+ for speed responsive electrical systems.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 74, 164 and 165 for
    the subject matter of that class automatically responsive to a condition.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for data processing systems or calculating computers which are
    utilized for testing, measuring, or monitoring the operation of an external
    device or quantity.  The external device or quantity must be only nominally
    claimed.  Subclass areas relative to electrical testing and measuring are
    as follows:

            Seismology, subclass 421.  Well-logging, subclass 422. Impedance,
    subclass 482. Voltage, current or power, subclass 483.  Frequency, subclass
    484.  Pulse, subclass 456. Waveform, subclass 487. Circuit analysis,
    subclass 489.  Integrated circuit, subclass 490. Atomic or nuclear physics,
    subclass 527.  Particle counting, subclass 555. Speed or velocity, subclass
    565. Acceleration, subclass 566. Time or time interval, subclass 569.
    Calibration, subclass 571.  Noise reduction, subclass 574.  Fourier
    analysis, subclass 576.  With control of testing or measuring apparatus,
    subclass 579.  Programmed test conditions, subclass 580. Simulation of
    electrical phenomenon, subclass 802.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 200 wherein a
    defective memory device is used to store information, subclass 201 for
    specifics of a memory device which is tested for defects or erroneous
    information.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 155+ for
    time measuring by clocks having electrical features.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, for
    digital data error correction.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for a
    measurement or test of a thermal quantity, whether performed electrically
    or nonelectrically, except for a measurement or test involving a particle
    spin determination.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclasses 245+ for processes or device for testing, measuring, etc., of a
    condition of a nuclear reactor during its operation.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclasses 44+, 51+ and 70+ for X-ray systems used in testing.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclasses 1+, for telephony combined with electrical measuring, testing or
    sensing.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 183.13
    through 183.15 for reliability and availability, and subclasses 180+ for
    computer software testing (e.g., state, design, etc.) and
    sequence-of-events monitors (e.g., protocol or logic state analyzer) in a
    digital data processing system.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 50+ and 105+ for apparatus for
    electrical measuring, testing, or sensing combined with significant
    chemical reaction or control.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product and
    Process, subclasses 61+ for automatic battery control means combined with
    the battery, and subclasses 90+ for battery     having measuring, testing,
    and indicating means.  See subclasses 20+ of Class 324 and subclass 636 of
    Class 340 for this subject matter.

    434,    Education, and Demonstration appropriate subclasses, for electrical
    measuring, testing or sensing in combination with education.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 1+ for
    processes of electrical measuring, testing, or sensing combined with
    significant chemical reaction or control.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 488+ for a connector having
    indicating means or identifying means.

    455,    Telecommunications, appropriate subclasses for radio systems having
    electrical measuring testing or sensing means for indicating the operative
    condition of the radio system.

    473,    Amusement Devices:  Games, and its incorporated class (273,
    Amusement Devices:   Games), for a game device or apparatus (e.g., a
    pin-ball machine, target range, aerial projectile target device, bowling
    alley apparatus, golfing apparatus, simulated game apparatus, chance
    device, etc.) which may have an electrical indicator.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 150+ for high temperature (Tc > 30 K) superconducting device,
    and particularly subclasses 160+ for measuring or testing system or device;
    and subclass 310 for a process of measuring or testing a superconductive
    property.


CLS 324/66
TXT Subject matter under the class definition for determining the location of a
    particular conductor or for identifying a particular conductor out of many.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, the determination of a
    particular phase of polyphase conductors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 1+, for testing devices used
    in telephony to identify or locate a particular line.


CLS 324/67
TXT Subject matter under subclass 66 for determining the location of a
    conductor at a point which is inaccessible.

    (1)     Note.  The conductor, for example, may be located in a conduit
    inside a wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    326+,   for similar subject matter utilized to determine the location of
    conductors which are buried in the earth.


CLS 324/71.1
TXT DETERMINING NONELECTRIC PROPERTIES BY MEASURING ELECTRIC PROPERTIES:

    Subject matter under the class definition for determining a nonelectric
    property by measuring an electric property.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for the determination of a nonelectric property by measuring
    capacity.

    65,     for the determination of a nonelectric property by measuring
    resistance.


CLS 324/71.2
TXT Erosion:

    Subject matter under subclass 71.1 where the nonelectric property measured
    relates to the amount of material removed from an object.


CLS 324/71.3
TXT Beam of atomic particles:

    Subject matter under subclass 71.1 where the property being measured is
    some characteristic of a beam of atomic particles.


CLS 324/71.4
TXT Particle counting:

    Subject matter under subclass 71.1 where the measurement means includes
    means for counting particles.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this subclass there should be recited
    significant details in regard to handling or preparing the particles to be
    counted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclasses 10+ for particle counting, per se, and see
    also the search notes thereunder.


CLS 324/71.5
TXT Semiconductors for nonelectrical property:

    Subject matter under subclass 71.1 including semiconductive means for
    sensing variations in the nonelectrical property being measured.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, subclasses 17+ for
    methods of making semiconductor electrical devices combined with
    measurement of an electrical condition.


CLS 324/71.6
TXT Superconductors:

    Subject matter under subclass 71.1 where the nonelectric properties being
    determined are those of superconductors.


CLS 324/72
TXT Subject matter under the class definition for determining voltage, phase,
    current, power, frequency or a related quantity in a specific environment.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, voltmeters, per se, in
    combination with a specific lightning rod.  See (3) Note to the definition
    of subclass 76 for a statement of the line between subclasses 72 and 76.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76+,    for a measurement of electricity, per se, when not related to a
    specific environment.  Note particularly subclass 157 for the measurement
    of electricity combined with some other feature.


CLS 324/72.5
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72 having a voltage probe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    for volt meters and ammeters having rectifiers in a probe.

    149,    for voltmeters and ammeters having a probe.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for probe conductor
    structure, per se.


CLS 324/73.1
TXT PLURAL, AUTOMATICALLY SEQUENTIAL TESTS:
    Subject matter under the class definition for measuring or determining two
    or more electrical characteristics of an electrical circuit or circuit
    element, or for measuring or determining a single electrical characteristic
    of two or more electrical circuits or circuit elements, wherein the
    measurements or determinations are made one after another without human
    intervention.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is the residual locus of processes and
    apparatus which automatically perform sequential tests of the Class 324
    type, none of which tests are provided for by subclasses preceding this one
    in the Class 324 schedule.  Similar processes and apparatus in which one of
    the plural tests is provided for in a preceding subclass will be found in
    that subclass.  For example, a patent claiming means for automatically
    testing a circuit for an "open circuit" caused by the failure of a circuit
    element, followed automatically by a test to determine the input/output
    characteristics of the circuit is classifiable as an "original" in
    subclasses 500+.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is the locus of processes and apparatus for
    performing, in automatic sequence, two or more Class 324 type tests which
    otherwise may be provided for in subclasses following this one in the Class
    324 schedule.  For example, a patent claiming a testing apparatus
    consisting of a combination of means to determine frequency, means to
    compare phase, and means to permit a human operator to switch from one
    means to another is classifiable as an "original" in subclasses 78+.

    (3)     Note.  Subject matter for performing plural, Class 324 type tests
    simultaneously but not sequentially will be found in subclasses determined
    by the tests, per se.

    (4)     Note.  Electrical characteristics measured by the subject matter of
    this subclass type include the response of a circuit or circuit element to
    a particular electrical input and includes such tests to determine the
    existence of miswired circuits.  For similar subject matter used to detect
    the presence of short or open circuits caused by failures in circuit
    elements or their interconnections, see the reference below to subclasses
    500+ in the search notes to other subclasses in this class.

    (5)     Note.  The measurements of this subclass type may result in either
    quantitative or qualitative ("go-no-go") indications.

    (6)     Note.  The automatic, sequential measurement of the analog
    responses of a circuit or circuit element to two different input levels is
    classifiable in this subclass.  The response of a circuit or circuit
    element to a pattern of high and low digital input signals is classifiable
    in Class 371.

    (7)     Note.  Testing means of this subclass type produce a distinct
    indication for each of the plural tests, Hence, testing means comprising
    plural transducers or detectors, each of outputs are combined to produce
    only on indication is not classifiable in this subclass unless the whole
    test is automatically repeated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for plural tests employing plural meters, which tests are not
    automatically sequenced.

    115+,   for plural tests employing plural meter ranges, which tests are not
    automatically sequenced.

    133,    for plural go-no-go tests which are not automatically sequenced.

    140,    for testing means having plural inputs, which means does not
    include automatic sequencing.

    459+,   for measuring or testing electrical parameters of printed circuits
    with an ionizable gas.

    500+,   for plural tests explicitly for the purpose of detecting failures
    in circuits or circuit elements consisting of open or short circuits.

    754+,   for probes, per se, which might be suitable for use with subject
    matter of this subclass type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, especially subclass
    556, for diverse electrical test used to classify, separate or sort
    articles, and subclasses 571+ for sorting by sensing properties of articles
    by electrical testing means.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 306+ for plural sequential tests
    involving testing by charged particles, especially subclass 310 for
    automatic sequential tests of printed circuits using an electron probe, and
    subclasses 363+ for automatic sequential tests of electrical circuits and
    devices using radiant energy and invisible-to-visible light converters.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 653 for electrical alarms
    responsive to circuits for testing electrical circuits or components.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, appropriate
    subclasses, especially subclasses 481+ and 550+, for automatic sequential
    testing of electric circuits or elements by programmed computers.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery,
    appropriate subclasses for  analysis of a digital signal to determine a
    fault or error in information content.

    382,    Image Analysis, appropriate subclasses for automatic, sequential
    tests of printed circuits using image comparison.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 115 and 226 for the testing of radio
    transmitters and receivers, respectively, which may include automatic
    sequential tests.


CLS 324/74
TXT Subject matter under the class definition for testing and calibrating
    electric meters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130,    for electric meters, per se, having self-calibrating features.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 1.01+, for the proving or
    calibrating of mechanical instruments.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 571 for
    testing and calibrating which include a computation.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 1+ for calibration or
    testing of a thermally responsive instrument.


CLS 324/75
TXT Subject matter under subclass 74 in which the testing or calibrating is
    done by stroboscopic means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses, for flashing lamp systems.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 23+ for optical
    stroboscopes.


CLS 324/76.11
TXT MEASURING, TESTING, OR SENSING ELECTRICITY, PER SE:
    Subject matter under the class definition relating to the measurement of
    electric voltages or currents, or combinations thereof, when said electric
    voltages and currents do not occur in a significantly recited external
    environment.

    (1)     Note.  Measurement requires sensing and some indication of the
    result of the sensing.  The indication can be quantitative, as in a
    calibrated voltmeter, or qualitative, as in an uncalibrated cathode-ray
    oscilloscope or a "hot line" indicator.  No distinction is made in these
    subclasses between testing and measuring.

    (2)     Note.  The definition is not limited to subject matter which
    indicates the result of the measurement, but covers the sensing
    subcombination as well.  Such  subcombinations, when disclosed as having
    utility only in the measurement of this subclass, are generally classified
    here, but when disclosed to a specific art device, are classified in one of
    the classes referred to under the search notes.

    (3)     Note. The recited external environment is significant to the
    measurement when there is a disclosed significant relation or when the
    claims recite, by more than name only, more of the environment than is
    necessary for the performance of the measurement.  When the external
    environment is not significant, for example, a meter which indicates the
    phase difference between A-C voltages in different circuits, will be
    classified in this class even though one of the inputs is recited as being
    from a generator and the other as being from a power system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for this subject matter in combination with a specific environment.
     See (3) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for nonelectrical
    measuring and testing and for electrical measuring and testing in
    combination with non- electrical measuring and testing.  See the proceeding
    Class 324 definition notes for specific subclasses.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 1+ for
    cathode-ray tube circuits of general application, including those for
    producing a visual grid on the face of the tube for calibration purposes.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 870.01+ for  telemetering
    systems for indicating at a remote point the value of a local condition.
    Class 324  provides for significant measuring, testing, or sensing of
    electricity, per se, and the indication of the result, whether by a
    telemetering system or otherwise.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for
    measuring and testing light.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 23 for illuminated dial or scale, some of
    which can be used as voltage or current indicators.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 241+ for testing (other than
    synchronization) of a multiplex communication element.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery,
    appropriate subclasses for measuring and testing of an error
    detection/correction or fault detection/recovery device of information
    content.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for thermal
    measuring and testing.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 224+ for measuring and
    testing of pulse or digital communications device.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 1+ for diagnostic testing,
    malfunction indication, or electrical condition measurement of a telephonic
    communication device.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 115 for measuring and testing of a
    transmitter and subclass 226 for measuring and testing of a receiver in
    telecommunications.


CLS 324/76.12
TXT Analysis of complex waves:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.11 whereby one or more components of a
    periodic wave made up of a combination of several frequencies or several
    sine waves superimposed on one another has components which are examined.

    (1)     Note.  Such analysis as is found in this subclass is usually
    referred to as Fourier analysis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76.39+, for the measurement of frequency of a cyclic current or voltage,
    per se.

    76.77+, for the measurement of phase of cyclic voltage or current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 861.06 for volume or rate of flow
    meters measuring transit time of a tracer or tag by correlator means.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 487 for
    the determination of a waveform which includes a detailed computation and
    nominal measuring and testing.

    704,    Data Processing:  Speech Signal Processing, Linguistics, Language
    Translation, and Audio Compression/Decompression, subclasses 205+ for
    determination of the component  frequencies in a speech signal.


CLS 324/76.13
TXT Amplitude distribution:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.12 comprising means to measure an extent
    of dispersion of magnitude variation in the component of the complex wave.

    (1)     Note.  The amplitudes may be statistically analyzed.


CLS 324/76.14
TXT Radiometer (e.g., microwave, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 76.13 having means that detect and measure
    radiant energy either at separate wave lengths or integrated over a broad
    wavelength band in the complex wave.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS;

    76.56,  for microwave frequency detection in digital output used in
    determining the frequency of cyclic current or voltage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 250 for the measurement of radio or
    microwaves by an absorption wavemeter

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), appropriate subclasses for directive radio wave
    systems and devices used in communication.


CLS 324/76.15
TXT With sampler:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.13 including a device whose output is a
    series of discrete values representative of the values of an input at a
    series of points in time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76.24,  for sampling in a frequency spectrum analyzer.

    76.38,  for sampling, per se, in analysis of complex waves.

    76.42,  for sampling by frequency comparison in frequency of cyclic current
    or voltage.

    76.58,  for sampling in digital output by phase comparison.


CLS 324/76.16
TXT With counter:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.13 including a device capable of changing
    stages in a specified sequence upon receiving appropriate signals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76.48,  for counters in digital output by frequency comparison used to
    determine the frequency of cyclic current or voltage.

    76.62,  for counters in digital output by phase comparison used to
    determine the frequency of cyclic current or voltage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 19 where pulses are counted in systems for
    determining the value of some parameters.


CLS 324/76.17
TXT With integrator:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.13 whereby summing of a signal is derived.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 336+ for miscellaneous integrating circuits.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 828
    and 829+ for analog integrators, per se.


CLS 324/76.18
TXT With slope detector:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.13 comprising means to monitor the rise
    over the run in a wave.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76.25,  for slope detection in frequency spectrum analyzers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 14+ for miscellaneous slope detecting circuits and
    subclass 170 for slope control of a pulse waveform.


CLS 324/76.19
TXT Frequency spectrum analyzer:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.12 including means that show an energy
    distribution as a function of frequency for a given signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 485 for
    frequency spectrum in measuring and testing using electrical computers.


CLS 324/76.21
TXT By Fourier analysis:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.19 wherein the energy distribution is
    taken at discrete harmonic components, i.e., harmonics, of the given
    signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 576,
    726.01+, and 827 for Fourier analysis in electrical computers and data
    processing.


CLS 324/76.22
TXT Real-time spectrum analyzer:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.19 including a device which operates with
    sufficient speed that the energy distribution is determined within set
    timing limits.


CLS 324/76.23
TXT With mixer:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.19 including a circuit that generates
    output frequencies equal to the sum or difference of two input frequencies.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76.43,  for plural mixers used in frequency comparison for the
    determination of cyclic current or voltage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 313+ for mixers, per se.


CLS 324/76.24
TXT With sampler:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.19 including a device whose output is a
    series of discrete values representative of the values of an input at a
    series of points in time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76.15,  for sampling used in Amplitude distribution devices.

    76.38,  for sampling, per se, in analysis of complex waves.

    76.42,  for sampling by frequency comparison in determination of frequency
    of cyclic current or voltage.

    76.58,  for sampling in digital output by phase comparison in determination
    of frequency of cyclic current or voltage.


CLS 324/76.25
TXT With slope detector:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.19 comprising means to monitor the rise
    over the run in a wave.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76.18,  for slope detection in amplitude distribution.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 14+ for miscellaneous slope detecting circuits and
    subclass 170 for slope control of a pulse waveform.


CLS 324/76.26
TXT Scanning-panoramic receiver:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.19 including a radio receiver that
    displays, on the screen of a cathode-ray tube, the presence and relative
    strength of all signals within a wide frequency range.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 364+ for
    cathode- ray tube deflections circuits.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 145+ for panoramic display, per se.


CLS 324/76.27
TXT With particular sweep circuit:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.26 including a specific circuit which
    produces at regular intervals, an approximately linear, circular, or other
    movement of a beam in a cathode-ray tube.


CLS 324/76.28
TXT Digital filter:
    Subject matter under subclass 77.11 wherein an input signal is operated on
    by means of digital circuitry to alter the frequency spectrum of the input
    signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76.29,  for filtering in frequency spectrum analyzers.

    76.31,  for parallel filters in frequency spectrum analysis.

    76.44,  for filtering in frequency comparison used to determine the
    frequency of cyclic current or voltage.

    76.68,  for filtering in phase comparison used to determine the frequency
    of cyclic current or voltage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, appropriate subclasses for
    filters and filtering in wave transmission lines and networks.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 572 for
    filtering in operations performed in measuring testing or monitoring in
    electrical computers and data processing systems.


CLS 324/76.29
TXT With filtering:
    Subject matter under subclass 77.11 including a network of resistors,
    inductors, or capacitors which offers comparatively little opposition to
    certain frequencies, while blocking or attenuating other frequencies.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76.44+, for filtering in frequency comparison for determination of the
    frequency of cyclic current or voltage.

    76.68,  for filtering in phase comparison for the determination of the
    frequency of cyclic current or voltage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, appropriate subclasses for
    filters and filtering in wave transmission lines and networks.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 572 for
    filtering in operations performed in measuring testing or monitoring in
    electrical computers and data processing systems.


CLS 324/76.31
TXT Parallel filters:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.29 including  parallel connected network
    of resistors, inductors, or capacitors which offers comparatively little
    opposition to certain frequencies, while blocking or attenuating other
    frequencies.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76.28,  for digital filters in frequency spectrum analysis.

    76.44,  for filtering in frequency comparison used to determine the
    frequency of cyclic current or voltage.

    76.68,  for filtering in phase comparison used to determine the frequency
    of cyclic current or voltage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, appropriate subclasses for
    filters and filtering in wave transmission lines and networks.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 572 for
    filtering in operations performed in measuring, testing, or monitoring in
    electrical computers and data processing systems.


CLS 324/76.32
TXT With space discharge device:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.31 comprising any device which is intended
    to have an electrical current flow between two spaced electrodes, at least
    part of the path followed by the discharge being constituted by a gas,
    vapor, or vacuum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76.76,  for space discharge device in frequency of cyclic current or
    voltage devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, for space discharge devices,
    per se.


CLS 324/76.33
TXT Correlation:
    Subject matter under subclass 77.11 including means to measure the
    similarity of two or more signals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses
    728.03+ for correlation in electric digital calculating computers.


CLS 324/76.34
TXT With space discharge device:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.33 comprising any device which is intended
    to have an electrical current flow between two spaced electrodes, at least
    part of the path followed by the discharge being constituted by a gas,
    vapor, or vacuum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76.76,  for space discharge device in frequency of cyclic current or
    voltage devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, for space.


CLS 324/76.35
TXT With delay line:
    Subject matter under subclass 77.11 comprising a real or artificial
    transmission line or equivalent component that slows a signal for a
    predetermined length of time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76.54,  for delay line in phase comparison in frequency of cyclic current
    or voltage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, appropriate subclasses for
    delay lines in wave transmission lines and networks.


CLS 324/76.36
TXT With optics:
    Subject matter under subclass 77.11 comprising lenses, prisms, or mirrors
    to be used in the frequency spectrum analyzer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, for optics measuring and  testing,
    per se.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements,
    appropriate subclasses for optical systems and devices that may be used in
    measuring and testing.


CLS 324/76.37
TXT Bragg cell:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.36 comprising acousto-optic means to
    redirect light by the method of Bragg diffraction.


CLS 324/76.38
TXT With sampler:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.12 including a device whose output is a
    series of discrete values representative of the values of an input at a
    series of points in time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76.15,  for sampling in amplitude distribution devices.

    76.24,  for sampling in a frequency spectrum analyzer.

    76.42,  for sampling by frequency comparison in frequency of cyclic current
    or voltage.

    76.58,  for sampling in digital output by phase comparison.


CLS 324/76.39
TXT Frequency of cyclic current or voltage (e.g., cyclic counting etc.):Subject
    matter under subclass 76.11 relating to the measuring of the frequency of
    an electric voltage or current which fluctuates in a periodic manner.

    (1)     Note.  Generally, when an intangible electric voltage measurement
    occurs in a significant environment (for  example, when the measurement is
    of the synchronizing frequency in a communication system) the class which
    provides for the environment also provides for the frequency measurement in
    that environment. The search should therefore, in appropriate instances,
    extend to other classes. An environment recited by name only is not
    considered to be significant.

    (2)     Note.  The frequency measurement may be indicated in various
    manners, as in terms of frequency error, deviation, or average frequency
    over a period of time. The measurement and indication may be either
    qualitative or quantitative.

    (3)     Note.  It is impossible to vary the frequency of a periodically
    varying voltage without concomitantantly varying its phase.  Consequently,
    when the frequency changes slowly, it may be possible to indicate frequency
    by measuring phase angle. In those instances the search should extend to
    subclasses 76.77+, especially subclass 91, since synchronization is usually
    concerned with obtaining a zero phase angle rather than with obtaining a
    mere equality of frequency.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160+,   for electrical measuring of speed, for example, the speed of
    rotating shafts or bullets, and for measuring the average frequency of
    random events, such as the occurrence of random electrical impulses and for
    timing means utilized to electrically determine the time interval between
    points spaced in time, when said points are not determined by the
    fluctuations of a periodically varying voltage, as when the points are
    determined, for example, by a randomly varying voltage or by the events at
    a race track.

    76.12+, for complex wave analysis, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, subclasses 454+ for tuning devices utilized in the tuning of
    musical instruments, some of which will measure the frequency of an unknown
    sound.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 250 for the measurement of radio or
    microwaves by an absorption wavemeter.

    329,    Demodulators, subclasses 311+ for pulse demodulators or  detectors;
    subclasses 315+ for frequency demodulators; and subclasses 345+ for phase
    demodulators.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 44 for oscillators provided with  means or
    the method for calibrating the oscillator with respect to its generated
    frequency and subclass 64 for oscillators.

    332,    Modulators, subclass 118 for frequency modulators having frequency
    measuring means and for the frequency meters, per se, when limited to use
    with modulation.

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), appropriate subclasses for radar systems. Note
    particularly subclasses 104+ for such systems (for example, by measuring
    the frequency shift due to the doppler effect) and subclasses 128+ for such
    systems which utilize frequency modulated waves.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 236+ for
    speed sensing and speed controlled systems, such as synchronizing systems.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 484 for
    frequency determination which includes a computation.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 15+ and
    155+ for clocks which serve as standards in frequency measurements.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, appropriate subclasses for frequency of cyclic
    current or voltage  in cycle counters or cycle counting.


CLS 324/76.41
TXT Frequency comparison (e. g., heterodyne, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 76.39 having means to compare two frequencies
    with each other.

    (1)     Note.  The two frequencies are usually, but not necessarily,
    sinusoidal.

    (2)     Note.  One frequency, for example, may serve as a time base for an
    oscilloscope upon which the other frequency is displayed, or the two
    frequencies may be heterodyned to make a beat which has a mathematically
    determinable frequency with respect to the two frequencies.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76.77+, especially subclass 91, for this subject matter when the frequency
    comparison is for synchronizing purposes. See also (3) Note to subclass
    76.39.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 1+ for
    cathode-ray tube circuits that can be used in frequency comparison (e.g.,
    oscilloscopes, etc).

    331,    Oscillators, for oscillators whose generated frequency can be
    varied or which can serve as frequency standards. By way of example,
    subclasses 37+ of Class 331 provides for beat frequency oscillator systems,
    and subclass 44 provides for oscillators with frequency calibration of
    oscillator.

    334,    Tuners, appropriate subclasses for tuned networks for use in wave
    energy apparatus and comprising inductance and capacitance elements in
    circuit arrangement to form a resonant circuit and in which structure is
    provided for adjusting one or both of these elements for changing the mean
    resonant frequency of the circuit. Note especially subclasses 30+ for
    tuners combined with resonant indicators.

    455,    Telecommunications, for this subject matter in combination with a
    radio receiving system, particularly subclasses 145+ for panoramic
    receivers.


CLS 324/76.42
TXT With sampler:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.41 including a device whose output is a
    series of discrete values representative of the values of an input at a
    series of points in time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76.15,  for sampling in amplitude distribution devices.

    76.24,  for sampling in a frequency spectrum analyzer.

    76.38,  for sampling, per se, in analysis of complex waves current, or
    voltage.

    76.58,  for sampling in digital output by phase comparison.


CLS 324/76.43
TXT With plural mixers:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.41 including more than one circuit that
    generates output frequencies equal to the sum and the difference of two
    input frequencies.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76.23,  for mixers in frequency spectrum analyzers

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 313+ for mixers, per se.


CLS 324/76.44
TXT With filtering:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.41 including a  selective network of
    resistors, inductors, or capacitors which offers comparatively little
    opposition to certain frequencies,while blocking or attenuating other
    frequencies.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76.28,  for digital filters in frequency spectrum analysis.

    76.29+, for filtering in frequency spectrum analyzer.

    76.31,  for parallel filters in frequency spectrum analysis.

    76.68,  for filtering in phase comparison used to determine the frequency
    of cyclic current or voltage.


CLS 324/76.45
TXT Bandpass:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.44 that limits the range of frequencies
    that will be passed through a device.


CLS 324/76.46
TXT Plural:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.44 including more than one filter.


CLS 324/76.47
TXT Digital output:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.41 comprising an output signal which
    represents the size of a stimulus or input signal in the form of a series
    of discrete quantities which are coded to represent digits in a system of
    numerical notation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76.55+, for digital output by phase comparison in frequency of cyclic
    current or voltage.

    76.82+, for digital output in phase comparison, per se.


CLS 324/76.48
TXT With counter:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.47 including a device capable of changing
    stages in a specified sequence upon receiving appropriate signals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76.16,  for counters in amplitude distribution devices.

    76.62,  for plural counters in digital output by phase comparison.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 19 where pulses are counted in systems for
    determining the value of some parameters.


CLS 324/76.49
TXT Tuned mechanical resonator (e.g., reed, piezocrystal, etc.):Subject matter
    under subclass 76.39 having a mechanical resonating system and an
    electromechanical transducer to drive the mechanical resonating system in
    accordance with the electric voltage or current.

    (1)     Note.  The mechanical resonator is usually a reed and its vibration
    can be visually observed, but it may be a quartz crystal whose motion is
    not visible or some other resonator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 141+ and 186+ for
    electromechanical filters utilizing mechanical resonating systems.


CLS 324/76.51
TXT By tuning (e.g., to resonance, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 76.39 having  circuit which may be adjusted
    for resonance at a particular frequency or other predetermined condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76.41+, for this subject matter in combination with heterodyning means.

    76.49+, for this subject matter where the tuned current has a tuned
    mechanically resonant element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 250 for this subject matter in combination
    with a radio or carrier wave communication   frequency

    334,    Tuners, appropriate subclasses for tuned networks for use in wave
    energy apparatus and comprising inductance and capacitance elements in
    circuit arrangement to form a resonant circuit and in which  structure is
    provided for adjusting one or both of these elements for changing the mean
    resonant frequency of the circuit.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 154.1+ for indicator means combined
    with frequency selection means in a radio receiver.


CLS 324/76.52
TXT By phase comparison:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.39 having angle relationship means as a
    part thereof, in order to perform the frequency measurement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76.77+, for the phase comparison means, per se.


CLS 324/76.53
TXT With phase lock:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.52 comprising means of making the phase of
    an oscillator signal follow exactly the phase of a reference signal.


CLS 324/76.54
TXT With delay line:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.52 comprising a real or artificial
    transmission line or equivalent component that slows a signal for a
    predetermined length of time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76.35,  for delay line in frequency spectrum analyzer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, appropriate subclasses for
    delay lines in wave transmission lines and networks.


CLS 324/76.55
TXT Digital output:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.52 comprising an output signal which
    represents the size of a stimulus or input signal in the form of a series
    of discrete quantities which are coded to represent digits in a system of
    numerical notation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS,SUBCLASS:

    76.47+, for digital output in frequency comparison.

    76.82   for digital output in phase comparison, per se.


CLS 324/76.56
TXT With microwave frequency detection:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.55 comprising means to detect frequencies
    of 1000mhz plus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76.14,  for radiometers in amplitude distribution used in analysis of
    complex waves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 250 for the measurement of radio or
    microwaves by an absorption wavemeter.

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), appropriate subclasses for directive radio wave
    systems and devices used in communication.


CLS 324/76.57
TXT With tone detection:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.55 comprising means to detect a sound
    sensation having pitch.


CLS 324/76.58
TXT With sampler:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.55 including a device whose output is a
    series of discrete values representative of the values of an input at a
    series of points in time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS,SUBCLASS:

    76.15,  for sampling in amplitude distribution devices.

    76.24,  for sampling in a frequency spectrum analyzer.

    76.38,  for sampling used in analysis of complex waves.

    76.42,  for sampling in frequency comparison used in determination of
    frequency of cyclic current or voltage.


CLS 324/76.59
TXT With multiplexing:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.55 including a device for simultaneous
    transmission of two or more signals in either or both directions over the
    same transmission path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, for multiplex communications, per se.


CLS 324/76.61
TXT With memory:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.55 comprising means to collect and hold
    information until it is needed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, for memories, per se.


CLS 324/76.62
TXT With counter:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.55 including  devices capable of changing
    stages in a specified sequence upon receiving appropriate signals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76.16,  for counters in amplitude distribution devices.

    76.48,  for counters in digital output by frequency comparison used in
    determining the frequency of cyclic current or voltage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 19 where pulses are counted in systems for
    determining the value of some parameters.


CLS 324/76.63
TXT Using register:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.62 including a device in which information
    is stored in and serially transferred through a storage medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, for mechanical registers, per se.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, for electrical registers, per se.


CLS 324/76.64
TXT Plural:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.62 comprising more than one counter.


CLS 324/76.65
TXT With space discharge device:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.55 comprising any device which is intended
    to have an electrical current flow between two spaced electrodes, at least
    part of the path followed by the discharge being constituted by a gas,
    vapor, or vacuum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76.76,  for space discharge device in frequency of cyclic current or
    voltage devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, for space discharge devices,
    per se.


CLS 324/76.66
TXT With capacitive energy storage:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.52 comprising conductors and dielectrics
    that store electrical energy.


CLS 324/76.67
TXT With space discharge device:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.66 comprising any device which is intended
    to have an electrical current flow between two spaced electrodes, at least
    part of the path followed by the discharge being constituted by a gas,
    vapor, or vacuum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76.76,  for space discharge device in frequency of cyclic current or
    voltage devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, for space discharge devices,
    per se.


CLS 324/76.68
TXT With filtering:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.52 including a network of resistors,
    inductors, or capacitors which offers comparatively little opposition to
    certain frequencies, while blocking or attenuating other frequencies.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76.28,  for digital filters in frequency spectrum analysis.

    76.29+, for filtering in frequency spectrum analyzer.

    76.31,  for parallel filters in frequency spectrum analysis.

    76.44,  for filtering in frequency comparison used to determine the
    frequency of cyclic current or voltage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, appropriate subclasses for
    filters and filtering in wave transmission lines and networks.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 572 for
    filtering in operations performed in measuring, testing, or monitoring in
    electrical computers and data processing systems.


CLS 324/76.69
TXT Current output proportional to frequency:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.52 whereby the current is related  to the
    frequency by a constant.


CLS 324/76.71
TXT Nulling circuit:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.52 comprising a circuit that indicates
    when current, voltage, or power is zero.


CLS 324/76.72
TXT Qualitative output:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.52 whereby an output indicates conformance
    to specifications of a device.

    (1)     Note.  This is usually a go or no situation.


CLS 324/76.73
TXT With saturable device:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.52 comprising a magnetic-core reactor, the
    reactance of which is controlled by changing the saturation of the core by
    varying a superimposed unidirectional flux.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76.75,  for inductive sensing used in determining the frequency of cyclic
    current or voltage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 401+
    for Nonlinear Reactors Systems (e.g., Saturable), per se.


CLS 324/76.74
TXT Deviation measurement:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.52 comprising a device that measures the
    difference between the actual and specified values of a quantity.


CLS 324/76.75
TXT Having inductive sensing:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.39 comprising detecting means which senses
    an inductance or detects the inducing of a voltage through mutual or
    electrostatic induction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76.73,  for a saturable device in by phase comparison used in determining
    the frequency of cyclic current or voltage.

    200+,   for devices and methods to sense and indicate the sensing of a
    magnetic field, per se.


CLS 324/76.76
TXT With space discharge device:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.39 comprising any device which is intended
    to have an electrical current flow between two spaced electrodes, at least
    part of the path followed by the discharge being constituted by a gas,
    vapor, or vacuum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76.65,  for space discharge device in digital output by phase comparison.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, for space discharge devices,
    per se.


CLS 324/76.77
TXT Phase comparison (e.g., between cyclic pulse voltage and sinusoidal
    current, etc.):Subject matter under subclass 76.11 relating to the
    measuring of a phase relationship between an electric voltage or current
    which fluctuates in a periodic manner and another electric voltage or
    current which fluctuates in the same manner.

    (1)     Note.  Generally, when the measurement of an intangible phase
    relationship occurs in a significant environment (for example, when the
    measurement is of the phase difference between voltages produced by two
    generators in an electric generating system) the search is in this class
    which provides for the phase measurement in that environment. The search
    should therefore, in appropriate instances, extend to other classes. An
    environment recited by name only is not considered to be significant.

    (2)     Note.  The voltage or current usually fluctuates in a sinusoidal
    manner, but may fluctuate in any other periodic manner.

    (3)     Note.  The phase measurement may be indicated in various manners,
    as in terms of phase angle, power factor, time lag or advance, or
    otherwise.  The measurement and indication may be either quantitative or
    qualitative (as, for example, "lead" and "lag").

    (4)     Note.  The two periodic voltages or currents need not be supplied
    to the system as inputs.  For example, one of these periodic voltages may
    be supplied to the system as the unknown input  while the other can be
    derived from the unknown input by an averaging process or can be supplied
    by a stable oscillator which is part of the system, or it can be supplied
    by a mechanically moving standard.

    (5)     Note.  It is impossible to vary the phase of a periodically
    fluctuating voltage or current without concomitantly varying its frequency.
     Consequently, especially when phase angles vary rapidly, it may be
    possible to indicate phase angle by measuring frequency.  In those
    instances the search should extend to subclasses 76.39+ of this class.

    (6)     Note.  One of the voltages or currents may be of a different type
    than the other voltage or current; for example, one may be a sinusoidal
    voltage while the other may be a pulse current, or one of the voltages may
    be a harmonic of the other voltage and the measurement may be of the phase
    relationship between harmonics of the same frequency.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76.52,  for phase comparison in frequency of cyclic current or voltage
    devices.

    141     and 142, for watt meters and voltmeters which do not indicate phase
    angle but respond to it.

    160+,   for the measurement of phase angle between an electrical voltage or
    current and the angular position of a rotating machine which generates or
    is supplied by said voltage or current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    329,    Demodulators, subclasses 311+ for pulse demodulators using locally
    generated oscillations, subclasses 336+ for frequency demodulator employing
    phase shift, and subclass 346 for using locally generated oscillations.


CLS 324/76.78
TXT Quadrature sensing:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.77 comprising means to detect the state or
    condition of two related periodic functions or two related points separated
    by a quarter of a cycle, or 90 electrical degrees.


CLS 324/76.79
TXT Feedback control, electrical:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.77 having electrical means to control a
    return path from an output terminal to an input terminal of at least one
    functional circuit device or circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, appropriate subclasses for feedback, per se.


CLS 324/76.81
TXT Feedback control, mechanical:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.77 having mechanical means to control a
    return path from an output terminal to an input terminal of at least one
    functional circuit device or circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, appropriate subclasses for feedback, per se.


CLS 324/76.82
TXT Digital output:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.77 comprising an output signal which
    represents the size of a stimulus or input signal in the form of a series
    of discrete quantities which are coded to represent digits in a system of
    numerical notation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76.47,  for digital output in frequency comparison in frequency of cyclic
    current or voltage.

    76.55,  for digital output in by phase comparison in frequency of cyclic
    current or voltage.


CLS 324/76.83
TXT Analog output:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.77 having an output quantity which varies
    smoothly over a continuous range of values rather than in discrete steps.


CLS 324/77.11
TXT Nonscanning:
    Subject matter under subclass 76.19 wherein the frequency components of the
    spectrum are acquired simultaneously.


CLS 324/84
TXT Subject matter under subclass 83 having a wave guide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 239+, for wave
    guides, per se.  Also consult the search notes to that subclass for the
    other classes which make provision for wave guides.


CLS 324/85
TXT Subject matter under subclass 83 having means to change the frequency of a
    voltage or current into another frequency which varies in correspondence
    therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     for frequency measuring using zero or countable beat heterodyne.

    82,     for the subject matter of this subclass (85) used to measure
    frequency.


CLS 324/86
TXT Subject matter under subclass 83 in which one of the electric voltages or
    currents is obtained from a polyphase source.

    (1)     Note.  In order that a disclosure be classified in this subclass,
    the polyphase source must be significantly related to the phase
    measurement.  For example, the average phase angle of three phases of a
    three phase circuit may be compared with the phase of a single phase
    circuit.  A polyphase source which supplies only a single phase voltage or
    current to the measuring equipment, without more, is not significantly
    related to the phase measurement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for the measurement of positive, negative and zero sequence
    components of a three phase system.


CLS 324/87
TXT Subject matter under subclass 83 having a lamp or space discharge device or
    nonlinear device.

    (1)     Note.  The lamp and space discharge device of this subclass are of
    the type which are classified in Class 313 and defined in the class
    definition of that class.  The nonlinear device is one whose
    voltage-current relationship is significantly nonlinear, as, for example, a
    thermistor, contact rectifier, thyrite resistor, transistor, saturable
    reactor or nonlinear condenser.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, see (1) Note above.


CLS 324/88
TXT Subject matter under subclass 87 having a cathode ray tube.

    (1)     Note.  The cathode-ray tube usually serves as an indicator, but not
    necessarily so.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 364+, for
    cathode-ray tubes, per se.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 1+ for
    cathode- ray tube circuits of general application.


CLS 324/89
TXT Subject matter under subclass 87 having a space discharge device of the
    discharge control type.

    (1)     Note.  The discharge may be controlled, for example, by means of a
    grid or by means of a magnetic field.  The space discharge device may be of
    either the vacuum, gas or vapor type.


CLS 324/90
TXT Subject matter under subclass 83 having an indicating instrument of the
    type which has a stator element which produces a magnetic field by means of
    a supplied current.

    (1)     Note.  The electrodynamometer instruments usually do not have a
    permanent magnetic field, but not necessarily so.  They are, for example,
    of the ratio-meter type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144,    for the electrodynamometer instrument, per se.


CLS 324/91
TXT Subject matter under subclass 83 for indicating if two voltages or currents
    are in phase.

    (1)     Note.  The indication may be quantitative or qualitative, as, for
    example, "lead" and "lag".  The measurement must be of a phase angle and
    not of some unrelated quantity. Thus, for example, a mere voltmeter, even
    though designated a "synchroscope", is not classified here but is
    classified with the appropriate art.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84      through 90, for this subject matter where the synchroscope is of
    the type set forth in subclasses 84 through 90.


CLS 324/92
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 having fluid means as a part thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The fluid means must be significant to the electrical
    measurement or to the apparatus used in the measurement, and may be used,
    for example, as an expansible means in a thermal meter, as a lubricant, or
    as a cooling means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155,    for meter pivots and bearings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 861+ for fluid rate of flow or
    volume meters, 290+ for fluid depth gages, and 700+ for fluid pressure
    gages.

    137,    Fluid Handling, appropriate subclasses, for the subject matter of
    that class. Note subclasses 123+ for syphons, and subclasses 334+ for fluid
    handling with heating.


CLS 324/93
TXT Subject matter under subclass 92 in which the fluid is electrically
    conductive and having means to cause electricity to flow through the fluid.

    (1)     Note.  The fluid is usually mercury, but may be any other
    conductive fluid, such as a molten alloy.  Herein are found, inter alia,
    mercury type ampere hour meters.


CLS 324/94
TXT Subject matter under subclass 93 in which the fluid is electrolytic and
    having means to cause an electrolytic action to take place.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, appropriate subclasses for electrolysis
    utilized for electrochemistry and especially subclasses 775+ as the
    residual home for a process of electrolytic analysis or testing, per se.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 62.2 for electrolytes utilized in electrical
    devices, such as electrolytic condensers and rectifiers.


CLS 324/95
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 having a wave guide or electrically long
    line.

    (1)     Note.  A cavity resonator is a special case of a wave guide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94+,    for similar subject matter utilized in electrical testing other
    than the measuring of electricity, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 236+, for long
    lines and wave guides, per se, and consult the class notes of Class 333 and
    the subclass definition notes for a definition of these terms.


CLS 324/96
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 utilizing radiant energy means as a part
    thereof.

    (1)     Note.  A voltage being measured may, for example, be applied to an
    electric light and the luminuous flux produced by the light may be taken as
    a measure of the voltage being measured.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, appropriate subclasses for the detections of
    nuclear or invisible radiant energy particularly subclasses 336.1+ for
    invisible radiant energy responsive electric signalling devices.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 703 for antenna
    combined with structure which tells the magnitude of the signal energy
    flowing in, to or from the antenna, a significant relationship existing
    between the antenna and the measuring structure.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 46 for incandescent
    standards, and subclasses 213+ for photometers.


CLS 324/97
TXT Subject matter under subclass 96 having means to direct the radiant energy
    in beams.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, reflection
    galvanometers of the mirror type and pointer instruments having optical
    means to project an enlarged image of the pointer onto a scale.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154,    for rotors that are mounted on filar suspensions.


CLS 324/98
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 having means for actively bringing a state
    of balance between mechanical or electrical forces into existence.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, potentiometers in which
    the potential of an unknown voltage is balanced against the potential of a
    standard cell.

    (2)     Note.  The mere passive balancing that occurs in an instrument such
    as the D'Arsonval meter, where the spring restoring torque equals the rotor
    torque, is not the type of balancing which is the subject matter of this
    subclass.  But balancing without deflection, for example, is found here.


CLS 324/99
TXT Subject matter under subclass 98 having automatic means for bringing about
    the state of balance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 560+, and the
    classes referred to in the search notes to these subclasses for follow-up
    electric motor systems, also known as rebalancing and servo motor systems.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 144+ for amplifier systems including
    automatically variable impedance in the signal path.


CLS 324/100
TXT Subject matter under subclass 99 in which the result of the balancing
    operation is recorded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for similar subject matter not having automatic balancing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, subclasses 31 and 32 for this subject matter.


CLS 324/101
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 having a Wheatstone bridge and having
    means to indicate the current which results because of the unbalance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57+,    for Wheatstone bridges used to measure impedance.

    98+,    for this subject matter having a Wheatstone bridge which is
    balanced.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 365, for
    miscellaneous Wheatsone bridge circuits and consult the search notes to
    that subclass for a list of the other classes which have provision for
    Wheatstone bridges.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 72, 146 and 175, for amplifier systems
    wherein series arranged vacuum tubes are in the arms of a bridge, wherein
    at least one arm of a Wheatstone bridge, and wherein there is a Wheatstone
    bridge in the signal coupling circuit, respectively.


CLS 324/102
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 which is responsive to a transient or
    which is used to determine some characteristic of a transient or some
    characteristic of a portion of a wave form of a cyclic wave.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, the determination of
    the complete wave form of a transient, such as results when a short circuit
    occurs on a transmission line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100     and 113, for recorders which are equally responsive to transients
    and steady state voltages.

    103+,   for peak voltmeters or maximum current ammeters.

    121,    for cathode ray oscilloscopes which are equally responsive to
    steady state and transient voltages.


CLS 324/103
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 having means for indicating the demand for
    electricity, averaged over a set period of time, or having means for
    indicating the consumption of electricity exceeding a set minimum or having
    means for indicating the maximum or minimum value of the electricity.

    (1)     Note.  The demand may be indicated in various manners, as by
    average demand over a period of time larger than the set period of time,
    maximum demand, integrated demand, or otherwise, and may be expressed in
    terms of watts, voltamperes or otherwise.  The excess consumption may
    likewise be expressed in various manners, such as integrated excess or
    excess demand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for the measurement of some characteristic of a transient, other
    than mere maximum or minimum.

    116,    for multi-rate registering meters which register at different rates
    depending upon demand.

    139,    for time controlled meters which do not measure demand.


CLS 324/104
TXT Subject matter under subclass 103 having means whose temperature is varied
    in accordance with the electricity being measured and having means,
    responsive to said temperature variation for indicating the demand, excess
    consumption, maximum, or minimum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92,     for this subject matter having fluid means, such as thermal
    expansion meters.


CLS 324/105
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 having means which are significant because
    of some thermal relationship.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, cooling features and
    means for compensating an instrument for changes in the ambient
    temperature.  Thermally actuated meters are in indented subclass 106.


CLS 324/106
TXT Subject matter under subclass 105 having means whose temperature is varied
    in accordance with the electricity being measured and having means,
    responsive to said temperature variation, for indicating the result of the
    measurement.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, hot wire ammeters of
    both the expansion or bimetallic type and the thermocouple type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92,     for this subject matter having fluid means, such as thermal fluid
    expansion meters.

    104,    for this subject matter for indicating demand, excess, maximum or
    minimum.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 100+, for thermometers,
    per se.


CLS 324/107
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 responsive to the voltages or currents in
    a polyphase system.

    (1)     Note.  A polyphase system is a group of alternating current
    circuits, usually interconnected, which enter or leave a region at more
    than two points of entry or exit, and which are so energized that in the
    steady state the alternating currents through the point of entry or exit
    and the alternating potential differences between them all have
    substantially equal periods, but have differences in phase and may have
    differences in wave form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140+,   for single phase systems of the three wire type, having means to
    measure the energy in such systems.  Note that some of such metering
    systems are inherently capable of also measuring polyphase energy.  Also
    consult the search notes to subclass 140.


CLS 324/108
TXT Subject matter under subclass 107 for measuring the positive, negative or
    zero sequence of current of voltage in the polyphase system or responsive
    to one of these factors.


CLS 324/109
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 having means for utilizing electrostatic
    attraction or repulsion or piezo-electric action in order to respond to the
    electricity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78+     and 83+, for this subject matter when utilized to measure frequency
    or compare phase as, for example, in synchroscopes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 309 for
    electrostatic motors and subclasses 311+ for piezo-electric devices and
    systems, per se.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 271+ for
    electrostatic condensers, per se.


CLS 324/110
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 for protecting the electric measuring
    apparatus or for combating attempts to cause the meter to read inaccurately.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, meters combined with
    fuses to protect the meter against accidental overloads and meters that are
    provided with special circuit means to cause the meter to continue to
    register if the potential coil is disconnected by a customer of a utility
    company who is attempting to defraud the company.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156,    for meters having casings which serve to protect the meter
    mechanically.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 659+ for
    meters having casings and similar structures to protect the meters
    mechanically.


CLS 324/111
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 having means to store the electricity
    which is being measured.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates to storage means, such as condenser
    banks, which store the electricity in such a manner that the original wave
    form can be recovered, and also relates to condensers which are used to
    integrate the electricity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 17.5, for telegraph systems having storage
    means for temporarily holding signals.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 8.51+ for
    cathode ray tube systems for accumulating or storing electrical pulse
    energy for later retrieval, and subclasses 84.51+ for similar electrical
    pulse storage systems utilizing electric space discharge devices of the
    gaseous type.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclass for
    the storage and retrieval of information. This class excludes the mere
    storage of control signals.


CLS 324/112
TXT Subject matter under subclass 111 in which the electricity is stored in an
    extended tape or wire or in a sheet medium.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates to, for example, the storage of the
    electricity in a disk, similar to a phonograph record, and to the storage
    of the electricity in magnetic wire or tape.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, for magnetic
    recording or reproducing.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclass for
    the storage and retrieval of information. This class excludes the mere
    storage of control signals.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, for dynamic storage of
    information signals.


CLS 324/113
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 for recording the result of the
    measurement of the electricity.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the Classes have provision for their own recording
    systems, consequently, in appropriate instances, the search for a recorder
    should extend to the class relating to the environment in which the
    recorder might be found.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, appropriate subclasses, for this same subject matter.
    In Class 346 there is no subclass which relates specifically to the
    recording of electricity, per se, but the recorders are classified on the
    basis of the manner in which the record is made. Note subclass 150.2 in
    which an electric spark is utilized to mark a phenomenal record.

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, subclasses 111+ for
    electric recorders comprising means for applying electricity to a medium
    for recording an image.


CLS 324/114
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 having plural meters.

    (1)     Note.  The meters may be of the same or of different kinds and may
    be separated or may be combined to one case.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    for single meters which have plural ranges or plural scales.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 870.41 and 870.15 for
    telemetering systems having plural receivers or meters.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 660 for
    switchboards having plural meters.


CLS 324/115
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 having plural ranges, plural scales, or
    plural registration rates.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for meters having plural scales or plural ranges where both scales
    or both ranges are simultaneously usable, (i.e., where there are plural
    meters).


CLS 324/116
TXT Subject matter under subclass 115 having a register.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, watt hour meters which
    register at one rate for an initial period and then register at a different
    rate for other periods.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for demand meters, per se, i.e., meters that indicate purely demand
    and not some quantity of which demand is but a factor.

    139,    for time controlled meters of the registering type which do not
    register at plural rates.


CLS 324/117
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 having magnetic means in which a
    significant amount of saturation occurs during the operation thereof.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to metering systems
    having magnetic amplifiers and to meters having saturated pole tips.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 249,
    302, 310, and 329, for magnetic amplifiers of the nonlinear type.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 10 for amplifier systems wherein the active
    element is a saturable core reactor.


CLS 324/118
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 having means to modulate the voltage or
    current being measured onto a carrier wave and having further means to
    demodulate the resulting modulating carrier wave into a replica of the
    original voltage or current.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to direct current
    voltmeters which measure a very small direct current voltage which small
    voltage is amplified in the modulator-demodulator apparatus so that it is
    large enough to actuate a conventional meter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    329,    Demodulators,  appropriate subclasses for demodulators, per se.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 10 for modulator-demodulator amplifiers, per
    se.

    332,    Modulators, appropriate subclasses, for modulators.


CLS 324/119
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 having a rectifier.

    (1)     Note.  The rectifier may be used, for example, to change an
    alternating current input into a direct current output, or the rectifier
    may be used merely as a nonlinear element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    miscellaneous rectifying systems.


CLS 324/120
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 having means to transform the voltage or
    current to be measured into a different current or voltage and having means
    to measure said different voltage or current.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example, systems where a DC
    voltage is changed into an AC voltage which is measured as an AC voltage,
    systems wherein the input voltage is converted into a pulse voltage and
    systems wherein the input voltage is converted from one frequency into
    another frequency.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118,    for this subject matter wherein the input voltage or current is
    first modulated and then demodulated.

    119,    for this subject matter having a rectifier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 870.01+ for telemetering
    systems having no significant measuring, testing or sensing of the
    condition to be telemetered.  Some telemetering systems utilize current
    conversion means.  Note indented subclasses 870.19+ for telemetering
    systems in which the value of the condition is represented by a pulse code.


CLS 324/121
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 having a cathode-ray tube.

    (1)     Note.  The cathode-ray tube may be an indicator as, for example, a
    cathode ray oscilloscope or a "magic eye" tube, or the cathode-ray tube may
    be a control tube of some type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for this subject matter utilized to measure phase displacement
    between two voltages.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 364+, for
    cathode-ray tubes, per se.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 1+, for
    cathode- ray tubes circuits of general application. Note that Class 315
    includes, among its cathode-ray tube systems, those systems in which an
    unknown voltage is applied to the deflecting means of the cathode-ray tube
    so that the unknown voltage may be observed.  The system is not excluded
    from Class 315 unless some means is claimed to enable the desired
    information to be derived other than merely observing the trace of the ray
    on an unchartered luminous screen.


CLS 324/122
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 having a gaseous discharge device.

    (1)     Note.  A gaseous discharge device is defined as being a device
    having two spaced electrodes between which electricity flows and having
    either gas or vapor in the space between the electrodes.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, spark gap volt meters
    and metering systems using a gaseous discharge device as a nonlinear
    impedance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 567+ for gaseous
    discharge devices, per se.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for miscellaneous gas discharge device systems.


CLS 324/123
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 having an amplifier or having a space
    discharge device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for this subject matter utilizing magnetic saturation type
    amplifiers.

    121,    for this subject matter when the space discharge device is a
    cathode-ray tube.

    122,    for this subject matter when the space discharge device is a
    gaseous discharge device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, for amplifiers, per se.


CLS 324/124
TXT Subject matter under subclass 123 having an inverted amplifier.

    (1)     Note.  An inverted amplifier is defined as one having an
    amplification factor which is less than unity.  Usually this is achieved by
    connecting the input circuit to the plate of a vacuum tube and taking the
    output from the grid of a vacuum tube.  The inverted amplifier acts as an
    attenuating circuit to couple the meter to the source of voltage or current
    being measured.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 250 for inverted transistor amplifiers, and
    subclasses 160+ and 162+ for inverted amplifiers of the vacuum tube type.


CLS 324/125
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 having means to control the mechanical
    vibrations which result because of inertia, elasticity, and damping or
    having means to control vibrations which arise outside or inside the
    measuring means.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, instruments having
    "dead beat" characteristics.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123,    for this subject matter having amplifier means with negative feed
    back control, for the purpose of controlling the inertia effects.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 430 for instrument mechanism
    dampening, per se, subclasses 514.12+ for fluid or fluent material
    dampening of an inertial member in an acceleration measuring apparatus, and
    subclass 514.14 for vibration dampening in an inertial-type acceleration
    measuring apparatus.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 560+ for resilient supports.


CLS 324/126
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 having means for coupling the measuring
    device to the source of current or voltage being measured.

    (1)     Note.  Such means, for example, may be an attenuator or an
    instrument shunt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    for this subject matter in instruments having plural ranges.

    149,    for measuring instruments having mere prods, probes or other
    terminal structure without circuit elements other than conductors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 24+ for coupling
    networks, per se.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 49 for electrical resistors of the
    shunt type.


CLS 324/127
TXT Subject matter under subclass 126 in which the coupling means is a
    transformer.

    (1)     Note.  The transformer, for example, may be of the type having a
    core which can be opened to admit a current carrying conductor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129,    for instruments having pole pieces which will admit a nonunitary
    input conductor without disconnecting or cutting said implement conductor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for the structure of
    transformers, per se.  Of special interest are subclass 172, for
    "Fractional turn" type inductive devices (including transformers), and
    subclasses 173+ and 175+ which include current transformers.


CLS 324/128
TXT Subject matter under subclass 126 in which the coupling means is a
    selective filter.

    (1)     Note.  The filter may be a high pass, low pass or band pass filter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 167+, for wave
    filters, per se.


CLS 324/129
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 having pole piece means so constructed
    that they will admit an input conductor without cutting or disconnecting
    said conductor.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, "hook on" ammeters of
    the type not equipped with an integral transformer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for similar subject matter utilizing a transformer of the split
    core type.


CLS 324/130
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 having means for self-calibrating the
    instrument.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74+,    for calibrating means for electric instruments, per se.


CLS 324/131
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 in which the measuring instrument
    indications are of the suppressed zero type.

    (1)     Note.  Suppressed zero refers to that condition of instrument in
    which the scale reading does not extend from zero to an upper value but
    rather from an intermediate value to an upper value.


CLS 324/132
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 in which the measuring instrument
    indications are of the nonlinear type.

    (1)     Note.  The instrument deflection, for example, may be related to
    the input current or voltage in a logarithmic manner.


CLS 324/133
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 for giving a nonquantitative indication.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, polarity testers and
    "hot-line" indicators.

    (2)     Note.  A quantitative instrument may be modified into a
    nonquantitative instrument by merely omitting the scale.  Consequently, in
    appropriate instances, the search should extend to the pertinent
    quantitative type subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, appropriate subclasses for similar
    subject matter.  Also see the search note to Class 340 in the class
    definition of this class (324).

    362,    Illumination, appropriate subclasses, for electric lamp luminaries,
    many of which could be used as nonquantitative indicators.


CLS 324/134
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 having a commutator or having a reversing
    switch or having a pulsating switch.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, DC watt hour meters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses
    for the structure of switches, per se.

    310,    Electric Generator or Motor Structure, appropriate subclasses, for
    motors having commutators.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ for
    relay systems, per se.


CLS 324/135
TXT Subject matter under subclass 134 having a rotor which oscillates between
    two positions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 430 for instrument mechanism
    dampening, per se, subclasses 514.12+ for fluid or fluent material
    dampening of an inertial member in an acceleration measuring apparatus, and
    subclass 514.14 for vibration dampening in an inertial-type acceleration
    measuring apparatus.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 36+ for
    oscillating motors, per se.


CLS 324/136
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 having a rolling ball or a rolling wheel.

    (1)     Note.  The ball or wheel are usually part of an integrating
    mechanism, but may be part of a speed transmission.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 121 for area integrators, per se.

    235,    Registers, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 65, 66
    and 68, for calculating devices and machines having integrating features.


CLS 324/137
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 having a rotor upon which torque is
    exerted by means of an electo-magnetic field which produces eddy current in
    the rotor.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, the familiar AC
    integrating watt hour meter.  The rotor is often known as a Ferraris disk.

    (2)     Note.  The rotor in this subclass may rotate continuously or may
    rotate through only a certain angle as determined by the stiffness of a
    spring which restrains further rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    for this subject matter where the eddy current rotor is merely a
    drag disk.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 166+ for eddy
    current motors of general application.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 727+ for eddy
    current motor systems of general application.  Note particularly indented
    subclasses 781+, for eddy current motors which operate from a single phase
    source.


CLS 324/138
TXT Subject matter under subclass 137 having means to vary the time-phase
    relationship between two alternating magnetic fields.

    (1)     Note.  The time-phase relationship, for example, may be adjusted so
    as to bring the alternating magnetic fields into time quadrature, or it may
    be adjusted so that they are slightly out of quadrature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148,    for other measuring means having phase shift means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 729 for power-factor
    control of induction motor systems including eddy current motor systems.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    212-219 for phase shifting means, per se.


CLS 324/139
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 having rotary motor driving means which
    rotate constantly, independently of the electricity being measured, or
    having time control means or having means which oscillate.

    (1)     Note.  Time control means may be, for example, a clock which
    rotates at a constant speed or an electric synchronous motor which rotates
    at a constant speed.  Oscillating means may be means such as an anchor
    escapement or a stepping ratchet.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to integrating meters
    wherein an element periodically oscillates at an amplitude which is
    determined by the quantity to be integrated (variable stroke) or at a
    radius which is determined by that quantity (variable radius).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103+,   for demand, excess, maximum or minimum meters which provide a final
    indication of which time is but a factor.

    116,    for multi-rate registering meters which register at different rates
    in accordance with a function of time.

    135,    for oscillating measuring means in which a pulsating or reversing
    switch is associated with the oscillating means.

    136,    for variable radius type meters which utilize a rolling ball or
    wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses, for ratchet
    mechanisms.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, for clocks and
    watches.  Note subclasses 155+, for those having electrical features.


CLS 324/140
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 having plural inputs to the measuring
    means.

    (1)     Note.  A single circuit can furnish plural inputs to the measuring
    means, since a single circuit can carry a voltage and a current
    independently of each other.  Thus, the indented subclasses contain watt
    meters and volt-ampere meters of the type which are not found in subclasses
    above.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, ratio meters and
    summation meters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62+,    for complete resistance measuring systems including, as a part
    thereof, ratio meters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 870.01+ for telemetering
    systems for indicating at a remote point the value of a local condition.
    Note subclasses 870.11+ where the condition at plural localities is sensed.
     Note subclasses 870.19+ where the value of the condition is coded into a
    pulse type code.


CLS 324/141
TXT Subject matter under subclass 140 for measuring volt amperes.

    (1)     Note.  The volt amperes may be either real or reactive.  Reactive
    volt amperes are often referred to as volt vars,

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137+,   for this subject matter having an eddy current rotor.


CLS 324/142
TXT Subject matter under subclass 140 for measuring watts.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example, watt meters of the
    dynamometer type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    for this subject matter having a commutator or a reversing or
    pulsating switch.

    137+,   for this subject matter having an eddy current rotor.


CLS 324/143
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 having plural active motor elements.

    (1)     Note.  The plural active motor element may be mounted on a single
    shaft to operate a single indicator, or they may be mounted on two shafts
    to operate two rotary arms whose variable point of intersection determines
    the final indication.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for plural meters.

    115,    for a single meter having plural ranges or scales.


CLS 324/144
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 having a stationary means to produce a
    magnetic field by the flow of electricity through a winding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, electrodynamometer type
    instruments having only a single input.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134+,   for this subject matter having a rotor with a commutator or
    reversing or pulsating switch.

    137+,   for this subject matter having an eddy current rotor.

    140+,   for this subject matter having plural inputs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 10+, for dynamo
    electric structure of general application.


CLS 324/145
TXT Subject matter under subclass 144 having a core armature which is attracted
    by the magnetic field and which moves, under said attraction, along its own
    axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 255+ for plunger type solenoids, per se.


CLS 324/146
TXT Subject matter under subclass 144 having a permanent magnet.

    (1)     Note.  The permanent magnet may supplement the magnetic field
    produced by the electromagnet or it may be acted upon by the
    electromagnetic field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147,    for similar subject matter having soft instead of hard iron.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 299+ for similar subject matter, not restricted
    to the measurement of electricity.


CLS 324/147
TXT Subject matter under subclass 144 having an iron rotor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146,    for this subject matter where the iron rotor is or becomes a
    permanent magnet under any conditions of operation.


CLS 324/149
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 having a probe, a prod or a specific
    terminal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72.5,   for similar subject matter in combination with a high frequency
    testing device.

    119,    for this subject matter having a rectifier in the probe.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 668 for
    meter terminal or connector arrangements.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for an electrical
    terminal, per se.


CLS 324/150
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 having a rotor which has a coil which is
    eccentrically mounted with respect to the axis of the rotor.

    (1)     Note.  The coil, for example, may be of rectangular shape and the
    axis of the rotor may correspond with one of the sides of the rectangle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140,    for this subject matter having plural inputs, as in ratio-meters.


CLS 324/151
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 having a permanent magnet.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to D'Arsonval type
    instruments and to magnetic suspensions for instrument rotors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146,    for this subject matter also having a magnetic field produced by an
    electromagnet.

    171+,   for similar subject matter not restricted to the measurement of
    electricity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 90.5 for a
    bearing having a magnetic suspension.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 302+ for permanent magnets, per se.


CLS 324/152
TXT Subject matter under subclass 151 in which the permanent magnet is
    associated with an eddy current means and the permanent magnet acts as a
    drag for the eddy current means.

    (1)     Note.  The eddy current means usually is a disk rotor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for excess type meters which utilize a hysteresis type brake (which
    has a constant counter-torque at all speeds) having a permanent magnet and
    for meters in which the torque on the drag magnet actuates an indicator by
    movement of the drag magnet

    137+,   for similar subject matter where an eddy current disk acts both as
    a motive element and a drag element.

    139,    for meters having a rotor which is driven by a constant torque
    device and having a brake whose drag is determined by the electricity to be
    measured.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 103+, for
    magnetic field type torque transmitting brakes and clutches.


CLS 324/153
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 having a register.

    (1)     Note.  A registering means is herein defined as being a device
    which converts a linear or rotational movement into a number which
    corresponds to the movement and is a measure thereof.  Generally the
    register is provided with means for separately indicating the value of the
    several digits which go to make up the number that is a measure of the
    indication.


CLS 324/154
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 having a rotor.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, rotors provided with
    filar suspensions, rotors having means for setting them to zero, and rotors
    having means to balance them.


CLS 324/155
TXT Subject matter under subclass 154 having significant bearing or pivot
    structure.

    (1)     Note.  A bearing or pivot is significant when it is claimed by more
    than name only or when it is disclosed as being significant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151,    for magnetic suspensions which decrease friction by decreasing
    bearing load.

    403+,   for meters with fluid means, such as lubricating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 90.5 for a
    bearing having a magnetic suspension.


CLS 324/156
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 having a casing for the instrument.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 431, for this subject matter.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, for miscellaneous casings.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 659+ for
    special meter casings, and subclasses 664+ for meter mounting arrangements.


CLS 324/157
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 combined with some other type of subject
    matter.

    (1)     Note.  The meter, for example, may be combined with a specific type
    of distribution system.

    (2)     Note.  A meter in a specific environment, generally, but not
    invariably, is classified with the specific environment.  Consequently, in
    appropriate instances, the search should extend to the class which relates
    to the environment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for the measurement of electricity in a specific environment.

    116,    for multi-rate registering meters which may, for example, be
    combined with two load circuits having loads of different tariff rates.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for systems for distributing electricity.


CLS 324/158.1
TXT MISCELLANEOUS

    Subject matter under the class definition not provided for in any preceding
    subclass.


CLS 324/160
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein are provided processes or
    means to produce an electrical signal representative of the time rate of
    change of position (speed) of a physical element and to indicate, in
    response to said signal, said time rate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 178+, for navigational speed
    measuring devices such as ship's logs, leeway incidence or rate of climb;
    subclasses 861+, for volume or rate of flow meters; subclasses 488+, for
    mechanical speed measuring devices and indented subclasses 519.01+, for
    permanent magnet type speedometers.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 441 and 446, for vehicle
    speed actuated signals and subclasses 670+, for speed actuated signals and
    alarms in general.

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 104+ for radar type systems which
    determine the velocity of an object.

    346,    Recorders, subclass 18, for recorders combined with a speed
    indicator or alarm.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 27+, for velocity or
    velocity/height measuring systems including optical sighting systems.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 51 and
    subclasses 236+ for control systems responsive to speed.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 565
    and 566, respectively, for determining speed or acceleration which includes
    a computation.


CLS 324/161
TXT Subject matter under subclass 160 in which means are provided for comparing
    one speed signal with another speed signal or a reference signal.

    (1)     Note.  The comparison means is not necessarily electrical.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     for comparison of the frequencies of two electrical signals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 123,
    for switching systems responsive to the differential speed between two
    bodies.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 243+ for
    the synchronization of rotating shafts which requires a comparison of the
    speeds of the shafts.  Also consult the search notes to that subclass for a
    compilation of other pertinent classes.


CLS 324/162
TXT Subject matter under subclass 160 including means producing an electrical
    signal representative of the time rate of change of speed or a physical
    object.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates to electrical accelerometers other
    than, for example, those which sense acceleration by means of an inertial
    element.

    (2)     Note.  The means of this subclass may include means responsive to
    acceleration, per se, or means responsive to a speed signal to derive the
    acceleration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 514.01+, for means indicating
    acceleration including an inertial element.  See (1) Note above.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 121,
    for switching systems responsive to acceleration.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 669, for acceleration or
    deceleration responsive signals or alarms.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 566 for
    the determination of acceleration and further derivatives which include a
    computation.


CLS 324/163
TXT Subject matter under subclass 160 in which means for producing a signal
    representative of speed includes means to convert mechanical motion into an
    electrical signal whose output amplitude is a function of the speed being
    measured, and in which the indicating means measures said amplitude.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166+,   for electrical generators of speed signals whose frequency is a
    function of the speed being measured.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 10+, for
    dynamoelectric generator structure.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, appropriate subclasses, for
    single dynamoelectric generator systems.


CLS 324/164
TXT Subject matter under subclass 163 in which the electrical generator
    includes a conductive, nonferromagnetic armature whose movement is
    representative of the speed being measured, means to induce an electric
    current in said armature and means responsive to the current to indicate
    the speed of the armature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 171, for
    induction generator structure.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 47, for induction
    generator systems.


CLS 324/165
TXT Subject matter under subclass 163 combined with means to indicate the sense
    of motion (e.g., forward or backward, clockwise or counter clockwise)
    within a given path, of the object whose speed is being measured.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 204, for direction indicators in
    general which are responsive to some force.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 200+, for mechanically actuated
    shaft rotation indicators.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 122,
    for switching systems responsive to direction of rotation.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 465, for signal means for
    automatically indicating the direction of movement of a vehicle, and
    subclasses 671+, for signal means for indicating machine shaft rotation or
    direction.


CLS 324/166
TXT Subject matter under subclass 160 in which the signal producing means
    produces a periodic electrical signal whose frequency is a function of the
    speed being measured.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, apparatus in which an
    electrical pulse is produced each time the moving object traverses a fixed
    increment of distance.  The movement thus sensed may be either linear or
    angular (e.g., rotary).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78+,    for the measurement of the frequency of cyclic electric currents of
    voltages.


CLS 324/167
TXT Subject matter under subclass 166 including electro-magnetic, indicator
    driving means energized by the speed signal to produce a rotating  magnetic
    field whose rotation is synchronized with the frequency of the speed signal.

    (1)     Note.  The rotating magnetic field may drive freely rotating
    armature or a restrained armature either of which is, in turn, connected to
    some means to indicate the speed of the rotating field and, thus, the
    object whose speed is being measured.


CLS 324/168
TXT Subject matter under subclass 166 in which the means for producing a signal
    includes an electrical circuit breaker actuated at a frequency
    representative of the speed being measured.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 19+, for
    periodically actuated switches.


CLS 324/169
TXT Subject matter under subclass 168 in which the switch is also a component
    of an internal combustion engine ignition system.


CLS 324/170
TXT Subject matter under subclass 169 wherein the speed measuring  means is
    connected to the secondary circuit of the ignition system; the voltage
    fluctuations of the secondary circuit thereby producing the speed signal.


CLS 324/171
TXT Subject matter under subclass 168 combined with means to indicate the
    distance the object whose speed is being measured has traveled during the
    speed measuring interval.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes revolution counters as well as
    odometers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 490, for mechanical speed and
    distance measuring systems.


CLS 324/172
TXT Subject matter under subclass 166 in which means for producing a speed
    signal includes a recording medium and means to move it at a speed
    proportional to speed being measured.


CLS 324/173
TXT Subject matter under subclass 166 in which the means for producing a speed
    signal included means producing a magnetic field and further means
    sensitive to changes in the field to produce an electrical signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200,    for magnetic detectors and systems therefor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 519.01 for a speed measuring device
    using a magnetic drag cup.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 40+, for rotary
    dynamoelectric generator structure.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    single dynamoelectric generator systems.


CLS 324/174
TXT Subject matter under subclass 173 in which the means for producing a
    magnetic field includes a permanent magnet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 152+ for
    rotary, dynamoelectric generator structure including permanent magnets.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 46, for single
    dynamoelectric permanent-magnet generator systems.


CLS 324/175
TXT Subject matter under subclass 166 in which means for producing a speed
    signal includes means responsive to radiant energy (i.e., electromagnetic
    or atomic radiation) to produce or alter an electric current.


CLS 324/176
TXT Subject matter under subclass 160 in which the means for producing the
    electric speed signal includes a variable circuit element whose impedance
    varies as a function of the position of the object in the path along which
    its speed is being measured.

    (1)     Note.  The impedance of the circuit element of this subclass being
    a function of displacement, the current through the element may, for
    example, be differentiated with respect to time to produce the speed signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    178,    and the subclasses indented thereunder for systems including an
    element whose electrical characteristics change in response to the passage
    of an object.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 514.39+, for apparatus including
    a mechanical speed indicating device with electrical means for sensing its
    indication, for example, a flyball governor with electrical means for
    sensing the radial displacement of the flyball.


CLS 324/177
TXT Subject matter under subclass 160 in which the means producing an electric
    speed signal is responsive to the supply voltage or current of an electric
    motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, and subclass 490, for electric
    motors with signals, meters, recorders or testing devices.

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, appropriate subclasses,
    together with art collection 928.1, for running-speed and acceleration
    control systems for  responsive to terminal electromotive force.


CLS 324/178
TXT Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein the means for producing a speed
    signal includes means responsive to the passage (event) of an object past a
    plurality spaced locations.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, systems for measuring
    the time taken by an object such as projectile or vehicle to move through a
    measured distance.  The "event" being the passage of the object past the
    ends of the measured distance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181+,   for systems for measuring the duration of time intervals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 167, for apparatus for testing
    ordinance and projectiles.

    346,    Recorders, subclass 38, for recorders actuated responsive to
    ordinance.


CLS 324/179
TXT Subject matter under subclass 178 in which the means responsive to the
    passage of an object is sensitive to magnetic field variations caused by
    passage of the object through magnetic field.


CLS 324/180
TXT Subject matter under subclass 178 in which the means responsive to the
    passage of an object includes an electrical switch actuated directly by the
    object.

    (1)     Note.  The switch of this subclass may be frangible.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses
    for switches or particular structure or type, particularly subclass 47, for
    limit switches adapted to be actuated by the motion of a machine part, and
    subclass 61.41, for stationary switch structure having an actuator
    responsive to the passage of a transient object


CLS 324/200
TXT MAGNETIC:

    Subject matter under the class definition which includes apparatus to sense
    and indicate the sensing of a magnetic field and elements or
    subcombinations of apparatus to sense and indicate the sensing of the
    magnetic field where not elsewhere provided.

    (1)     Note.  Method claims pertaining to the subject matter of this group
    of subclasses will be placed with the corresponding apparatus subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  The term "elements" includes magnetic sensors, per se, and
    energized sensors not provided for in another class.

    (3)     Note.  The apparatus to indicate includes a visible or latent
    recording of the result of a magnetic field sensing.

    (4)     Note.  The magnetic field sensed may be a portion of a magnetic
    field or a portion of a magnetic field in a material.

    (5)     Note.  Included in this group of subclasses are:  the measuring or
    testing of magnetic fields, the measuring, testing, or sensing of material
    of metal or nonmetal by means of magnetic fields for electrical, magnetic,
    and other properties of the material, subcombinations of the apparatus to
    measure or test magnetic fields or materials by magnetic fields not
    provided for elsewhere, magnetic field sensors not classified elsewhere,
    supports for material tested by magnetic fields, and supports for magnetic
    field sensing devices.

    (6)     Note.  This is the generic subclass for the location,
    identification, or testing of (1) metal ores, (2) unwanted metals, or (3)
    the presence of metal in a nonmetal environment.  In these cases the metal
    is located, identified, or tested by its interaction with a magnetic field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for short or open coil tests, the number of coil turns tests, and
    coil polarity tests.

    55,     for transformer properties testing. 300+, for nuclear or electronic
    testing. 323+, for geophysical subsurface and surface testing. 376+, for
    core sample magnetic orientation testing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 450.5 for a metal casting apparatus
    including control means influenced by a magnetic sensor.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 8 for
    magnetizing or demagnetizing precedent to a separation, subclasses 38+ for
    the combination of a magnetic separation with another physical separation
    of a solid from a solid, subclasses 72+ for the magnetic testing and
    separation of objects from other objects, and subclasses 212+ for the
    separation of material by magnetic separation.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 250+ for the detection of invisible
    electromagnetic energy and the testing of material by invisible
    electromagnetic radiation, subclasses 493.1+ for radiant energy generation
    and sources, and subclasses 505.1+ for radiation controlling means.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 44 for oscillators with frequency calibration
    or testing.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antenna, subclass 17.7 for radar
    systems with testing or calibrating, and subclass 703 for antennas with
    means to measure radiated antenna signal energy.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 33+ for the measurement
    of distance by light, subclasses 300+ for the examination of visible light
    by spectros-copy, subclasses 138+ for angle or axial alignment testing,
    subclasses 372+ for mensuration or configuration comparison, subclasses
    401+ for color tests, and subclasses 213+ for the examination of visible
    light generally.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 31 for
    monitoring or testing the progress of recording.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 67.1+, 115, and 226.1+ for measuring
    and testing of communication equipment.


CLS 324/201
TXT Susceptibility:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the apparatus to sense and
    indicate the sensing of a magnetic field is responsive to a magnetic field
    modified by material which has magnetic properties, the indication of the
    sensing being directly or indirectly representative of the ease with which
    the material can be magnetized.

    (1)     Note.  The ratio of the intensity of magnetization of the material
    to the magnetic intensity of the field causing the magnetization of the
    material is known as susceptibility.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204,    for apparatus to test gas, liquids, and fluent particles entrained
    in a fluid.

    228,    for apparatus to test materials which require a magnetic test field
    including torque magnetometers.


CLS 324/202
TXT Calibration:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 which includes means to present a known
    magnetic field to the apparatus to sense and indicate the sensing of the
    magnetic field so that the sensing and indication can be noted to see if
    the apparatus to sense and indicate gives the correct response to the
    sensed known magnetic field.

    (1)     Note.  The known magnetic field may be a magnetic field of known
    magnetic intensity and type of wave, or the field can be a known magnetic
    field which is modified by a member whose effect on the field is known.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for testing and calibrating electric meters.

    130,    for self-calibrating instruments which measure voltage or current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 1.01+ for proving or calibrating
    test instruments.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 252.1 for methods of calibration or
    standardization of radiant energy test devices.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 46 for electrical lamp
    circuits forming light standards, and subclasses 421+ for color charts.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 1+ for calibration or
    testing of a thermally responsive instrument.


CLS 324/203
TXT Curie point determination:
    Subject matter under subclass 200 which includes means to create a magnetic
    field in which is placed a heated ferromagnetic material, the apparatus to
    sense and indicate being responsive to the magnetic field modified by the
    heated material to determine whether the heated material is at least at or
    below the critical temperature at which the heated material loses its
    ferromagnetism.

    (1)     Note.  The apparatus to sense and indicate the magnetic field may
    be a magnet which functions to pass its magnetic flux through the material
    to induce magnetism in the material if its temperature is below the Curie
    point of the material to attract the material to the magnet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224,    for the temperature control of the test material or an element of
    the test circuit.

    228,    for permanent magnets which locate ferromagnetic material by
    inducing magnetism in the material and noting the relative movement of the
    permanent magnet to material to be located.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, particularly subclasses 195+ for flame cutting or
    burning combined with sensing, subclasses 215+ for processes of carburizing
    or nitriding of metal combined with sensing or testing, subclass 240 for
    testing combined with reactive coating of metal, or subclasses 508+ for
    processes of measuring, testing, or sensing combined with treatment of
    solid or semi-solid metal to modify or maintain the internal physical
    structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical property of metal.  If
    casting, fusion bonding, machining, or working is combined with the
    treatment of solid or semi-solid metal to modify or maintain the internal
    physical structure (i.e., microstructure), there is a requirement that
    there be significant heat treatment as defined in section III, A, of the
    Class 148 definition.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 209+ for magnets and electromagnets.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 597 for a ferromagnetic
    temperature sensor in a signalling system; and subclasses 577 and 600 for
    ferromagnetic flame and radiation sensors, respectively, in a signalling
    system.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 43+ for optical
    pyrometers.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 158 for
    temperature indicating instruments with systems for magnetizing,
    demagnetizing, or controlling a magnetic field.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 176 for a thermometer
    having a ferromagnetic sensor.


CLS 324/204
TXT Fluid material examination:
    Subject matter under subclass 200 which includes a magnetic field in which
    a gas or liquid material is placed for examination by the magnetic field,
    the apparatus to sense and indicate being responsive to the field modified
    by the gas or liquid material to give an indication of some property of the
    material examined.

    (1)     Note.  Particles may be entrained in the gas or liquid examined
    magnetically in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, subclasses 232+ for gas analysis
    processes.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 23+ for gas analysis,
    particularly subclass 27 for paramagnetic gas analysis by magnetic and
    thermal means, and subclass 194 for magnetic induction type flow meters.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 27 and 28 for processes of
    gas separation using magnetism.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 1+ for magnetic separation
    means for gas separation.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 38
    through 40 for the magnetic separation of a solid from a solid, liquid, or
    a gas combined with another type of separation, and subclass 232 for the
    separation of a solid from a solid or liquid magnetically when in a fluid
    suspension.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 695 for processes of
    precipitation of a solid from a liquid by magnetic means, and subclasses
    222+ for apparatus to magnetically treat material under the class
    definition.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 306 for the inspection of liquids by
    electrically charged particles, subclasses 343+ for the infrared
    examination of contained fluent material, subclass 356.1 for flow metering
    by radiant energy apparatus, subclass 357.1 for fluent material level
    examination by radiant energy, subclasses 373+ for the ultraviolet
    examination of contained fluent material, subclasses 383+ for the
    examination of emissive fluent type or radiation transmissive fluent
    material by ionized gas-type detector, subclasses 428+ for fluent material
    containment, support, or transfer means combined with radiant energy
    treatment, subclasses 564+ for photocell sensing of fluent material, and
    subclasses 573+ for optical or prephotocell systems to sense fluent
    material by photoelectric means.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 70 for oil testing by
    visible light; subclass 398 for the inspection of container content by
    light; subclasses 409+ for color transmission testing of fluids; and
    subclasses 441+ for the examination of liquid particle suspensions by
    visible light.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 83+ for analysis of apparatus
    involving a chemical reaction.


CLS 324/205
TXT Permanent magnet testing:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 which involves the testing of permanent
    magnets which have their own static magnetic field, the apparatus to sense
    and indicate the sensing of the field including a field sensing member
    placed in the field and an indicator responsive to the member.

    (1)     Note.  The sensing member may be a fixed or movable permanent
    magnet, a member that can be temporarily magnetized by the field of the
    tested magnet, an electrically conductive member that causes eddy currents
    in response to the field, or a sensing coil that is fixed or movable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228,    for the testing of material by a magnetic field and the sensing of
    the material modified field by a nonelectrically energized field sensor.

    256,    for the sensing of a magnetic field by a movable energized sensing
    coil magnetometer.

    259,    for a magnet or magnet member sensor type magnetometer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 302+ for permanent magnets.


CLS 324/206
TXT Movable random length material measurement:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 which includes a movable magnetizable
    member and a magnetic marking means to form magnetic field marks on the
    member in the direction of its movement, and wherein the apparatus to sense
    and indicate the sensing of the magnetic field is responsive to the marks
    and indicates the sum of the marks as an indication of its length or
    compares the sensed marks to indicate a deviation of its length between
    markings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 732+ for feeding a fabric or
    cord through a fabric or cord distance measuring device in contact with the
    fabric or cord.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 10+ for
    control means actuated in response to marks on advancing material.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclass 431 for a winding machine
    under the control of an electrical property of an article being wound, and
    subclasses 334.3, 334.4, 28+, 534+, and 563+ for a detector or stop which
    may measure length of an elongated material being wound or unwound.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 141+ for
    electromechanical transducer-type time delays.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 1+
    for recording or reproducing from an element of diverse utility, and
    subclass 6 for recording or playback apparatus combined with metering or
    sensing.


CLS 324/207.11
TXT Displacement:
    Subject matter under subclass 200 which includes a device to note the
    change in position of one member with respect to another member, the device
    having means to create a magnetic field and having either (1) the means
    supported by one of the members, or (2) the members included in a magnetic
    circuit in the magnetic field, the apparatus to sense and indicate the
    sensing of the magnetic field being responsive to the change in the
    magnetic field to note the movement of one of the members with respect to
    the other member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 18+ for position determining or writing
    (e.g., hand writing analysis).

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclass 15 for a displacement
    responsive magnetic pattern element with a digital code signal generating
    circuit.


CLS 324/207.12
TXT Compensation for measurement:
    Subject matter under subclass 207.11 which includes a device, circuit or
    circuit component that corrects an undesirable condition which affects the
    displacement measurement.


CLS 324/207.13
TXT Having particular sensor means:
    Subject matter under subclass 207.11 which includes a device having a
    specific function or structure that detects the presence of, or a change in
    the level of a magnetic field.


CLS 324/207.14
TXT Diverse sensors:
    Subject matter under subclass 207.13 in which two or more different types
    of sensors are used simultaneously or alternatively.

    (1)     Note.  Plural measurements involve two or more different types of
    measurements such as linear and rotary, whereas diverse measurement
    includes two or more sensors for one or more measurements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207.23, for plural measurements.


CLS 324/207.15
TXT Inductive:
    Subject matter under subclass 207.13 wherein sensing device is an inductor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for inductors not
    specifically used in testing.


CLS 324/207.16
TXT Electrically energized:
    Subject matter under subclass 207.15 containing one or more sources of
    electrical energy for energizing sensor means to produce a magnetic field.


CLS 324/207.17
TXT Separate pick-up:
    Subject matter under subclass 207.16 in which a magnetic sensor is a
    receiver means that generates a signal in response to an electrically
    energized transmitter.


CLS 324/207.18
TXT Differential type (e.g., LVDT):
    Subject matter under subclass 207.16 wherein (1) a sensor measures two
    separate stimuli and provides an output proportionate to the difference
    between them or (2) a transformer uses two or more primary sensor signals,
    or (3) a transformer uses two or more secondary sensor signals to provide a
    differential output.

    (1)     Note.  LVDT is an abbreviation meaning linear variable differential
    transformer.


CLS 324/207.19
TXT Differential bridge circuit:
    Subject matter under subclass 207.16 wherein an imbalance in a bridge
    circuit is based upon the difference between at least two inductive sensors
    forming at least two legs of the bridge circuit.


CLS 324/207.20
TXT Hall effect:
    Subject matter under subclass 207.13 wherein the sensor uses the Hall
    effect to give an output voltage proportional to magnetic field strength.

    (1)     Note.  Hall effect is the description given to the following
    phenomena:  when a conductor, through which a current is flowing, is placed
    in a  magnetic field, a potential difference is generated between the two
    opposed edges of the conductor in the direction mutually perpendicular to
    both the field and the conductor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251,    for hall plate magnetometers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 6 for hall effect amplifiers.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 32 for resistance value responsive
    to a condition wherein magnetic field or compass utilizes Hall effect.


CLS 324/207.21
TXT Magnetoresistive:
    Subject matter under subclass 207.13 wherein a sensor is a semiconductor
    material in which the electrical resistance is a function of the applied
    magnetic field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252,    for Hall plate magnetoresistive magnetometer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 32 for a magnetic field or compass
    with resistance value responsive to a condition.


CLS 324/207.22
TXT Having particular sensed object:
    Subject matter under subclass 207.11 in which a specific configuration or
    structure of an object is such that its motion may be detected by measuring
    a change of a magnetic property associated with the object.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes sensor attachments that move with the
    device under test.


CLS 324/207.23
TXT Plural measurements (e.g., linear and rotary):
    Subject matter under subclass 207.11 wherein there are two or more
    different types of position measurement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207.14, for measurements using two or more sensors.


CLS 324/207.24
TXT Linear:
    Subject matter under subclass 207.11 in which motion in a straight line is
    determined.


CLS 324/207.25
TXT Rotary:
    Subject matter under subclass 207.11 in which (1) angular displacement is
    determined or (2) deviation from an angular path is measured.


CLS 324/207.26
TXT Approach or retreat:
    Subject matter under subclass 207.11 in which the (1) the sensing device
    gives an indication when approaching or being approached by a magnetic
    field, or (2) the sensing device gives an indication when retreating or
    being retreated by a magnetic field, or (3) an object approaches or
    retreats from the sensor's magnetic field.


CLS 324/209
TXT Stress in material measurement:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 which includes apparatus to note the
    strain within material having means to form a magnetic field in which the
    material is placed, or means to form a magnetic field in the material, the
    apparatus to sense a magnetic field and indicate the sensing of the
    magnetic field senses the magnetic field modified by the material or the
    field produced in the material and indicates the result of the test, the
    indication being a measure of the strain in the material as a result of
    some type of force imparted to or within the material.

    (1)     Note.  The means to impart the force to the material may or may not
    be claimed.

    (2)     Note.  Compressional, tensional, shear, or torsional physical force
    is used to impart strain to the material.

    (3)     Note.  The material tested can be examined for residual strain
    after the applied force is removed from the material, or the material can
    be examined for strain resulting from the applied force.

    (4)     Note.  Excluded are claims to sense the internal strain of a
    magnetic sensor which is an indication of the force applied to the sensor
    and torque or torsion sensing devices relying on magnetic characteristics.
    See Class 73, subclasses 136+ and 141+.

    (5)     Note.  Claims testing the magnetostrictive effect of material are
    classifiable here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 779 for stress or strain measuring
    system having an inductive or magnetic sensor mechanically coupled to the
    specimen and subclasses 862+ for dynamometers including subclasses 862.381+
    for the measurement of force by magnetic load cells.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 32+ for material strain
    analysis of material by visible light.


CLS 324/210
TXT Magnetic information storage element testing:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 which includes a magnetic recorder
    element to be tested magnetically, means to create a magnetic test signal
    to be either sensed by the tested element or recorded on the tested
    element, the said apparatus to sense the magnetic field either (1) being or
    including the tested element itself, or (2) sensing the recorded test
    signal on the tested element, the said apparatus to indicate the sensing of
    the test magnetic signal being responsive to the apparatus to sense the
    signal or to the recorder element tested.

    (1)     Note.  The testing device is not integral with the information
    device tested.

    (2)     Note.  A prerecorded test signal on a magnetic storage element
    tested may take the place of the means to create a test signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 603 for processes of making magnetic
    recording reproducing transducers.

    346,    Recorders, subclass 33 for a magnetic recorder with an external
    operating means, and subclass 74.2 for magnetic pictorial or graphic
    recorders.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 481+
    for testing or measuring in the application of electrical engineering.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 201 for
    specifics of a memory which are tested for defects or erroneous information.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclasses
    21.1+ for diagnostic testing of memory systems.


CLS 324/211
TXT Memory core storage element testing:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein the element tested is a nonmoving
    toroid magnetic memory element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 81 for the
    automatic magnetic testing and sorting of static cores.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 129+ for
    toroid magnetic elements in a memory system.


CLS 324/212
TXT Dynamic information element testing:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein the element tested is a movable
    magnetic storage element.

    (1)     Note.  Here are magnetic tape, drum, disc, and wire storage
    elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 31 for
    testing the progress of recording.


CLS 324/213
TXT Magnetic recording medium on magnetized object records object field:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the apparatus to sense and
    indicate the sensing of a magnetic field includes a magnetic recording
    medium applied to magnetized material so that any stray or leakage field
    from the magnetized material induces a magnetic field in the recording
    medium which is indicative of flaws in the material tested.

    (1)     Note.  The magnetic field of the recording medium is latent and
    requires, for example, magnetic particles to form a visible image of the
    induced field on the recording medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210+,   for the testing of magnetic information storage elements.

    214+,   for testing of magnetic fields or magnetized materials by magnetic
    particles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 215 and
    other related subclasses for separation of flawed articles from good
    magnetized articles based upon the change in the magnetic field of
    magnetized article due to flaws in the article.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 62.52 for flaw detections compositions.

    346,    Recorders, subclass 33 for the recording of flaws in response to an
    external flaw detection device.


CLS 324/214
TXT By paramagnetic particles:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 which includes a magnetic field detector
    composed of particles including ferromagnetic material which, when placed
    in the magnetic field, align themselves in the direction of the tested
    magnetic field to form a visual representation of the tested magnetic field.

    (1)     Note.  The particles may be of iron, nickel, or cobalt material.

    (2)     Note.  The particles when in the magnetic field act as both a
    magnetic field detector and a visual indicator of the pattern of the tested
    field at the location of the field between the magnetic poles or at the
    location of the field discontinuities.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200,    for the sensing and plotting of magnetic fields.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 62.51 for magnetic compositions useful for
    magnetic purposes.


CLS 324/215
TXT With pattern enhancing additive:

    Subject matter under subclass 214 wherein some chemical, composition,
    material, or mixture of materials is added to the paramagnetic particles to
    enhance the viewing of the particles with respect to the object tested
    after the particles are magnetized and attracted to the magnetized object
    tested.

    (1)     Note.  The chemical, composition, material, or mixture may be
    directly placed on or diffused some way into the magnetic particles, or may
    form a dry mixture with the particles or a liquid vehicle for the  magnetic
    particles.

    (2)     Note.  Coatings, dyes, and liquid and solid mixtures of material
    with the particles are in this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  Fluorescent and phosphorescent material which require
    radiation on these materials to emit light are here as well as materials
    which have optical properties to permit the particles to be more easily
    distinguished from the object and the surroundings of the test.


CLS 324/216
TXT Flaw testing:
    Subject matter under subclass 214 wherein the paramagnetic particles are
    used to test an object made of magnetic material and which includes means
    to magnetize the object to be tested to cause the parmagnetic particles,
    when upon the magnetized object, to become magnetized and adhere to the
    magnetized object or at a location where a discontinuity occurs when
    present in the object, the adhering magnetized particles arranging
    themselves in the pattern of the flux exiting from the object or in the
    pattern of a discontinuity when present in the object.

    (1)     Note.  The magnetization may be caused by direct electrical
    current, by alternating current, by alternating and direct current, or by a
    permanent magnet.

    (2)     Note.  A discontinuity is a flaw which includes a crack, fault, or
    other defect that is present in a tested object that is capable of changing
    the magnetization pattern known to be formed from a perfect object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213,    for the detection of flaws by magnetizing a material with a
    magnetic recording medium thereon to record the field of the magnetized
    material.

    215,    for particles with additives to enhance the viewing of magnetized
    particles.

    217+,   for flaw detection of railroad rails.

    452+,   for the use of particles to test flaws by electrostatic forces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 632+ for flaw detection by means
    of compressional waves.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 358.1 for pipe inspection by invisible
    radiant energy, and for tire inspection by invisible radiation, subclasses
    559.45+ for the photoelectric sensing of web, strand, or sheet material for
    defects by visible light.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, particularly subclasses 430+ for
    flaw detection in webs; and subclasses 237+ for flaw testing generally.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 4+ for flaw detection by
    a thermal determination.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or devices subclasses 58+ for X-ray flaw
    analysis.


CLS 324/217
TXT Railroad rail flaw testing:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 which includes means to magnetize a
    railroad rail to create a test magnetic field in the rail, the apparatus to
    sense and indicate the sensing of the magnetic field being responsive to
    the field of the rail to note any change in the indication from the normal
    known magnetic pattern of the magnetized rail.

    (1)     Note.  The subcombinations of means to magnetize a rail and of
    means to sense the magnetization of the rail are classified here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62+,    for the resistance testing of rails.

    65,     particularly for the flaw testing of rails by resistance means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 636+ for the testing of rails for
    flaws by vibration.

    346,    Recorders, subclass 33 for a marking device which is responsive to
    a magnetic rail flaw detection device.


CLS 324/218
TXT Rail joint cutout:

    Subject matter under subclass 217 wherein the tested rail has ends and is
    joined to other rails by connectors forming joints between the rails, and
    includes means to prevent the sensing and indicating of the magnetic field
    of the joints by the apparatus to sense and indicate the sensing of the
    magnetic field of the rail.


CLS 324/219
TXT Magnetic sensor within material:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the apparatus to sense a magnetic
    field includes a sensor placed within tested material which has magnetic
    field associated with it, the apparatus to indicate the sensing of a
    magnetic field being  responsive to the magnetic field of the material
    sensed by the sensor.


CLS 324/220
TXT Sensor supported, positioned, or moved within pipe:
    Subject matter under subclass 219 wherein the material tested is a tube and
    the sensor has (1) means to transport the sensor through the tube, or (2) a
    support to position or hold the sensor within the tube.

    (1)     Note.  The subcombination of a magnetic sensor and a support to
    hold, position, or move the sensor within a pipe is here.

    (2)     Note.  An indicator of the distance traveled by the magnetic sensor
    in the pipe may be additionally claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    260,    for magnetic sensors with a support generally.

    262,    for magnetic sensor supports, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 700 for bore extensometers,
    subclasses 772+ for rolling contact-type tube interior gauges, subclasses
    792+ for internal dial gauges, and subclasses 814+ for screw adjustment
    type inside or inside-outside gauges.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 358.1 for pipe inspection by radiant
    energy examination.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray System or Devices, subclasses 59+ for X-ray pipe
    testing.


CLS 324/221
TXT Borehole pipe testing:

    Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein the tested pipe is a casing or a
    borehole in the earth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    345,    for geological and subsurface testing for materials by a magnetic
    test.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 302+ for borehole interior
    study processes, and subclasses 304+ for borehole direction or inclination
    meters.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 152.01+ for borehole and drilling
    study apparatus.

    166,    Wells, subclass 64 for time or distance measuring, subclass 65.1
    for electrical means combined with a well, and subclass 250 for processes
    involving indicating, testing, measuring, or locating within a well.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 4.51 for boring or
    penetrating with orienting or indicting.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 253+ for geological testing or
    irradiating with radiant energy.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 248+ for
    igniting systems for explosive devices within a well bore.

    367,    Communications, Electrical: Acoustic Wave System and Devices,
    subclasses 14+ for compressional wave geophysical systems, and subclass 86
    for well bore electrical communications.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 25+
    for geochemical exploration.


CLS 324/222
TXT Hysteresis or eddy current loss testing:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the apparatus to sense and
    indicate the sensing of a magnetic field includes apparatus to measure the
    loss of energy of a cyclically varying magnetic field resulting from it
    passage through a magnetic material or through a material in which eddy
    currents are induced by the varying magnetic field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for mutual inductance tests to determine inductance which cause
    eddy currents.

    113,    for recording the result of an electrical measurement.

    121,    for a cathode-ray tube indication of an electrical measurement.

    142,    for the measurement of electrical real power.

    451,    for power loss testing of magnetic material by causing heat by
    passing cyclic current through the material and measuring the power which
    causes the heat.


CLS 324/223
TXT Hysteresis loop curve display or recording:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the apparatus to sense and
    indicate the sensing of a magnetic field is responsive to a material
    magnetized by a changing magnetic field going from a minimum to a maximum
    in one direction and than going from a minimum to a maximum in the opposite
    direction and produces a signal applied to a visual display or recorder
    which is the magnetization curve of the material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electrical Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    cathode-ray tube circuits of general application, and subclasses 364+ for
    deflection circuits for a cathode-ray tube.

    346,    Recorders, subclasses 33+ for recorders combined with external
    recorder operating means.

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, subclasses 226+ for
    recorders operated by a light beam including a cathode ray beam.


CLS 324/224
TXT With temperature control of material or element of test circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the apparatus to sense and
    indicate the sensing of a magnetic field is also responsive to magnetic
    fields modified by tested materials placed in a magnetic field and includes
    means to control the temperature of the material tested or some element of
    the apparatus to sense and indicate the sensing of the magnetic field.

    (1)     Note.  The means to control the temperature includes heating and
    cooling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248,    for superconductive magnetometers which require low temperatures to
    function.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclasses for devices to cool.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 15+ for thermal tests, and
    subclasses 339+ for temperature measuring means, per se.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclass 121 for the heat treatment of magnetic
    materials to intentionally change the magnetic properties, and subclass 509
    for heat treatment of solid or semi-solid metal to modify or maintain the
    internal physical structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical property of
    metal combined with the measuring, sensing, or testing of magnetic
    properties.

    165,    Heat Exchange, particularly subclass 58 for heating and cooling.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 50+ for metal heating, and subclass
    200 for heating devices for nonmetals.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 140 for
    thermal change compensation for electromagnetic device control circuits,
    and subclass 141 for superconductivity electromagnetic device control
    circuits.

    432,    Heating, appropriate subclass for the heating of materials
    nonelectrically.


CLS 324/225
TXT With compensation for test variable:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the apparatus to sense and
    indicate the sensing of the magnetic field includes structure to correct
    for some condition which affects the test.

    (1)     Note.  The magnetic field tested may be a magnetic field, per se,
    or a magnetic field modified by a material under test.

    (2)     Note.  The condition may be magnetic interference, the spacing of
    the material tested with respect to the magnetic sensing means, or some
    condition of the apparatus to sense and indicate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224,    for temperature control of the tested material or an element of the
    test circuit.

    244,    for magnetometers having disturbing magnetic field compensation.


CLS 324/226
TXT Combined:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the apparatus to sense and
    indicate the sensing of a magnetic field is combined with the subject
    matter of another class when not provided for elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  The examination of material by magnetic fields and the
    testing of magnetic fields are here when combined with other subject matter.

    (2)     Note.  In combination with magnetic testing are:  demagnetizing,
    the conveying of material to or from the test, or the conveying of the
    magnetic test apparatus, diverse test apparatus of other classes and
    subject matter of other classes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157,    for measuring or sensing electricity combined with other subject
    matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    194,    Check-Acurated Control Mechanisms, subclasses 320+ for material
    testers which use magnets.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 38+ for
    the separation of solids from solids by magnetizing means and other
    separation means, subclasses 567+, 609, and 636 for article separating
    means involving magnetism, and subclasses 212+ for the separation of
    magnetic material from other material which is nonmagnetic or less magnetic.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 72 for the combination of
    an optical test with other subject matter.


CLS 324/227
TXT Plural tests:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein (1) two or more variable magnetic
    parameters are separately sensed and indicated, at least one of which is
    sensed and indicated by apparatus to sense and indicate the sensing of a
    magnetic field, or (2) at least one of two or more separate tests is a
    magnetic test.

    (1)     Note.  The separate tests may be performed sequentially or
    simultaneously.

    (2)     Note.  A.  Subject matter of this subclass includes, for example,
    permeameters wherein a sensed voltage is used to indicate a change in flux
    for a given value of magnetomotive force indicated by the current causing
    the force.

            B.  Subject matter of this subclass includes, for example, (1) a
    nonmagnetic hardness test combined with a  magnetic flaw test, or (2) two
    simultaneous but spatially separated magnetic flaw tests.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403+,   for lamp and discharge device tests involving plural diverse
    characteristics or conditions.


CLS 324/228
TXT With means to create magnetic field to test material:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 which includes structure to form a
    magnetic field for testing material, the apparatus to sense and indicate
    the sensing of the magnetic field being responsive to the field as modified
    by the material tested.


CLS 324/229
TXT Thickness measuring:

    Subject matter under subclass 228 wherein the material tested has two
    different surfaces, and the distance between the surfaces is measured by
    placing the two surfaces in the magnetic field and the apparatus to sense
    and indicate the sensing of the field is responsive to the field as
    modified by the material between the two surfaces to thus sense and
    indicate the distance between the surfaces.

    (1)     Note.  Class 33, Geometrical Instruments, measures thickness by
    having contacts touching the tested material, whereas Class 324,
    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, measures thickness by sensing a change
    in magnetic property of magnetic test.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 783+ for distance measuring
    devices, particularly subclass 835 for coating thickness measurement, and
    subclasses 174+ for gauges.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 37.5 for the measurement of a
    dimension of a material by fluid means.

    250,    Radiant Energy, appropriate subclasses for the measurement of a
    dimension of a material by invisible radiation.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 380 for determining the
    thickness of light permeable material.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 7 for a thickness
    determination by a thermal test.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 50, 54+, and 89+
    for X-ray thickness measuring.


CLS 324/230
TXT Layer of layered material:

    Subject matter under subclass 229 wherein the material tested is composed
    of dissimilar layered material and the thickness of one layer is found by
    placing the layered material in the magnetic field and the apparatus to
    sense and indicate the sensing of the magnetic field is responsive to the
    magnetic field modified by the layer to thus sense and indicate the depth
    of the layer.


CLS 324/231
TXT With backing member:

    Subject matter under subclass 229 which includes a part next to one surface
    of the material and the apparatus to sense and indicate the sensing of the
    magnetic field next to the other surface opposite to the part; the part and
    the apparatus cooperating with each other to place tested material in the
    same relation each time with respect to the magnetic field and the
    apparatus to sense and indicate the sensing of the field.

    (1)     Note.  The part generally but not always is part of the magnetic
    test circuit.


CLS 324/232
TXT Plural magnetic fields in material:

    Subject matter under subclass 228 which includes means to create two or
    more magnetic fields in the tested material, the apparatus to sense and
    indicate the sensing of the magnetic field being responsive to the fields
    modified by the material to indicate some characteristic of the material.

    (1)     Note.  Included are diverse magnetic fields at the same location in
    the material, or magnetic fields at different locations in the material,
    but not two fields of the same type aiding each other at the same place in
    the material.


CLS 324/233
TXT With phase sensitive element:

    Subject matter under subclass 228 wherein the apparatus to sense and
    indicate the sensing of the magnetic field modified by the material tested
    includes an element which compares the electrical phase of the signal as
    received by the apparatus with the phase of the magnetic field used in the
    test, the difference in phase being used by the apparatus to show some
    characteristic of the tested material.

    (1)     Note.  Here are mostly eddy current tests which do not fall out in
    the preceding subclasses.  Eddy current tests not classified here will be
    found in the subclasses following when no phase detection is claimed.


CLS 324/234
TXT Electrically energized nonforce type sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 228 wherein the apparatus to sense and
    indicate the sensing of the magnetic field modified by the material
    includes a sensor which requires an electrical current to pass
    therethrough, and which senses and indicates the magnetic field other than
    by a force measurement.

    (1)     Note.  Included are self-inductance-type field sensors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228,    for the testing of material magnetically by torque magnetometers
    and electrically energized sensors of force.

    244,    for magnetometers.

    260,    for magnetic sensors not electrically energized.

    300+,   for the testing of material by nuclear or electronic induction.

    323+,   for the magnetic testing of material by a magnetic field.

    332+,   especially, which requires a magnetic field to test material within
    or part of the upper natural surface of the earth.


CLS 324/235
TXT Noncoil type:

    Subject matter under subclass 234 wherein the energized sensor does not
    rely solely on inductive effects.

    (1)     Note.  Here are sensors of the magnetoresistive and galvanomagnetic
    type which includes Hall effect sensors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251,    for Hall plate magnetometers.

    252,    for magnetoresistive and semiconductor solid-state magnetometers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 32 for magnetoresistive and for Hall
    effect devices, per se.


CLS 324/236
TXT Oscillator type:

    Subject matter under subclass 234 wherein the sensor is part of a frequency
    generator whereby the material-modified magnetic field is sensed by the
    sensor to control the frequency or the amplitude of the electrical wave
    generated by the frequency generator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    234,    for sensing material-modified magnetic fields by self-inductive
    type sensors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 65 for oscillators with a device responsive
    to an external physical condition.  See subclass 64 of Class 331 for the
    line between Classes 331 and 324.


CLS 324/237
TXT Material flaw testing:

    Subject matter under subclass 236 wherein the material is magnetically
    tested for defects in the material.


CLS 324/238
TXT Material flaw testing:

    Subject matter under subclass 234 wherein the material is magnetically
    tested for defects in the material.

    (1)     Note.  A defect is any blemish, crack, or other inherent
    imperfection in a material that weakens the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213,    for magnetic recording mediums attached to a tested magnetized
    material to record the material field.

    216,    for flaw testing of magnetized material with magnetic particles.

    217+,   for railroad flaw testing.

    219+,   for flaw testing when the sensor is within the material.

    237,    for flaw testers of the oscillator type.


CLS 324/239
TXT Induced voltage-type sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 228 wherein a voltage is induced in an
    electrical coil as a result of the change in the magnetic test field caused
    by the material tested.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219+,   for testing material by placing a magnetic sensor within the
    material tested.

    233,    for the testing of material by a test device which compares the
    phase of a test magnetic field with the phase of the signal sensed by the
    magnetic sensor.

    254,    for fixed coil magnetometers responsive to a changing magnetic
    field.

    257,    for moving coil magnetometers.

    260+,   for magnetic field detection device sensors of the induced voltage
    type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 355 for
    transformers to deliver power to a single load.

    336,    Inductor Devices, particularly subclass 221 for coil and core, and
    subclasses 222+ and 225+ for electrical windings, per se, which introduce
    electrical inductance into an electrical circuit.


CLS 324/240
TXT Material flaw testing:

    Subject matter under subclass 239 wherein the material is magnetically
    tested for defects in the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217+,   for rail flaw testing.

    219+,   for magnetic flaw sensors placed within material tested
    magnetically.

    260+,   for magnetic field dated on devices generally including those of
    the induced voltage type.


CLS 324/241
TXT Opposed induced voltage sensors:

    Subject matter under subclass 240 wherein there are two or more magnetic
    coil sensors of the magnetic field modified by the test material, the
    apparatus to indicate the sensing of the field modified by the test
    material being connected to two or more of the sensors to indicate the
    difference in the voltages induced in the sensors.


CLS 324/242
TXT Plural sensors:

    Subject matter under subclass 240 wherein there are two or more magnetic
    coil sensors of the magnetic field modified by the test material, the
    apparatus to indicate the sensing of the field modified by the test
    material being connected to two or more of the sensors to indicate the
    combined sensing of the material-modified field.


CLS 324/243
TXT Plural sensors:

    Subject matter under subclass 239 wherein there are two or more coil
    sensors of the induced voltage type, the apparatus to indicate the sensing
    of the magnetic field being connected to two or more of the sensors to note
    the combined sensing of material-modified magnetic field.


CLS 324/244
TXT Magnetometers:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the apparatus to sense and
    indicate the sensing of a magnetic field is responsive to the intensity of
    the sensed magnetic field or the direction of the sensed magnetic field.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter classifiable in this subclass includes
    subcombinations or perfecting features peculiar to magnetometers and not
    classifiable elsewhere such as field compensating means for magnetometers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227,    plural magnetic tests of a magnetic field.

    228+,   for the testing of material by magnetic fields which use
    magnetometers for the defection of the material-modified magnetic field.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 300+ for compasses,
    particularly subclasses 356+ for magnetic field responsive error
    compensation.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 32+ for
    anti-inductive structures, particularly subclass 35 for shielded coils.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 89 for
    systems to prevent induction having means to control a magnetic field, and
    subclass 101 for residual or remnant magnetism control.


CLS 324/244.1
TXT Optical:
    Subject matter under subclass 244 wherein the apparatus or method for
    sensing and indicating a magnetic field includes a medium which responds to
    the magnetic field by altering the propagation (e.g., path, passage, etc.)
    or a property (e.g., polarization) of radiant light energy therethrough,
    where the output of the medium is representative of the magnetic field
    measured.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes physical changes of the light path
    affecting the light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96+,    for devices which measure electricity using radiant energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for photocells, circuits, and
    apparatus.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 345+ for optical testing
    by light wave interference.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    280+ for changing a bulk optical parameter by an applied magnetic field.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, subclasses 12+ for environmentally sensing
    optical waveguides.


CLS 324/245
TXT Plural sensor axis misalignment correction:

    Subject matter under subclass 244 wherein the apparatus to sense and
    indicate the sensing of the magnetic field includes plural magnetic field
    sensors aligned with each other, the sensors when not aligned with each
    other producing errors in the magnetic field measurement, and means
    responsive to the sensing of the magnetic field by both sensors to adjust
    for the misalignment of the sensors, the apparatus to indicate being
    connected to the sensors.


CLS 324/246
TXT With means to align field sensor with magnetic field sensed:

    Subject matter under subclass 244 wherein the apparatus to sense and
    indicate the sensing of the magnetic field includes a movable magnetic
    field sensor of the tested magnetic field and apparatus responsive to the
    magnetic field connected to the magnetic sensor responsive to the magnetic
    field to physically move the sensor to a predetermined position with
    respect to the sensed magnetic field.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 647 for electric servo
    motors under the control of magnetic field sensing sensors.


CLS 324/247
TXT Nonparallel plural magnetic sensors:

    Subject matter under subclass 244 wherein the apparatus to sense the
    magnetic field includes several magnetic sensors positioned angularly with
    respect to each other so that an axis of another sensor will intersect the
    other axis and the apparatus to indicate is connected to the several
    sensors to note the combined sensing of the tested magnetic field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227,    for plural magnetic tests each having a magnetic field sensor.

    228,    for magnetic tests to subject material to a magnetic field.

    242,    particularly for material flaw testing apparatus using plural
    magnetic coil sensors.

    243,    for material tests using plural magnetic coil sensors to examine
    material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 300 for indicator of direction of
    force traversing material media apparatus including direction or
    inclination instruments, gyromagnetic compasses and magnetic field
    responsive instruments.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 870.33 for continuously
    variable indicating apparatus having indication transmitters of the
    magnetic flux sensor type combined with circuitry connected to the
    transmitters, and subclass 345 for code transmitters which include magnetic
    flux sensing devices, per se.


CLS 324/248
TXT Superconductive magnetometers:

    Subject matter under subclass 244 wherein the apparatus to sense and
    indicate the sensing of a magnetic field includes a sensor of the magnetic
    field or a magnetic shield for the apparatus to sense a magnetic field made
    of a material which has nearly zero resistance in one state and appreciable
    resistance in a second state.

    (1)     Note.  Superconductivity is a property possessed by some metals,
    alloys, or compounds whereby the electrical resistance of the metals,
    alloys, or compounds decreases until a critical temperature is reached and
    the resistance becomes practically zero when the temperature of the metal,
    alloy, or compound is reduced to within a few degrees of absolute zero.

    (2)     Note.  The apparatus to produce the low temperatures in the
    superconductors in order to permit the superconductors to function as a
    shield or a magnetic field sensor is not always claimed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 599 for processes of manufacturing
    superconductor electrical devices.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 44 for
    transformer systems using superconductors.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 527+ for miscellaneous superconductive circuits.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 107 for superconductive oscillators using a
    superconductive active element.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 216 for superconductive magnets and electromagnets.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 32 for superconductive resistors,
    per se.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 160+ for
    superconductive magnetic storage systems.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 93 for electrically operated registers using
    superconductors.


CLS 324/249
TXT Thin film magnetometers:

    Subject matter under subclass 244 wherein the apparatus to sense a magnetic
    field includes a thin single domain ferromagnetic film magnetized in a
    predetermined direction known as the easy axis of the film, the
    magnetization of the film upon placement in an external magnetic field to
    be tested assumes a different direction which is the resultant field vector
    of the film's easy axis and the tested field axis, means to cyclically
    change the resultant magnetic field axis of the film, sensing means to note
    the cyclical changes in the magnetic field of the film caused by the shift
    of the resultant magnetic field due to the means to cyclically change the
    resultant magnetic field axis, and the apparatus to indicate being
    connected to the sensing means to note the result of the cyclical changes
    in the film.

    (1)     Note.  A thin film is defined as a ferromagnetic element formed so
    as to have its magnetic domains aligned in a predetermined direction.  This
    is usually done by vapor depositing the film in a magnetic field.  In the
    absence of an external field the magnetization vector or magnetic moment
    will be aligned with the preferred "easy axis" of magnetization of the
    film.  The "hard axis" of the magnetization of the film is in an orthogonal
    direction to the "easy axis".  A thin magnetic film so formed has uniaxial
    anisotropy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227,    for plural separate magnetic tests.

    228+,   for means to create a magnetic test field and a magnetic sensor to
    sense the test field.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses, including subclasses 108, 414, and 421-427, for
    devices responsive to magnetic field.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 403
    for nonlinear reactor systems having thin film parametron.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 567 for miscellaneous thin film circuits.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 171+ for thin
    film magnetic signal storage systems.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 547+ for pretreatment of a substrate
    or post-treatment of a coated substrate using magnetic field or force, 598+
    to directly apply a coating using magnetic field or force.


CLS 324/250
TXT Electronic tube or microwave magnetometers:

    Subject matter under subclass 244 wherein the apparatus to sense and
    indicate the sensing of a magnetic field includes (1) an ionizable gas tube

    magnetic field sensor having electrodes connected to appropriate voltages
    wherein the tested magnetic field causes the gas to ionize at different
    electrode voltages dependent upon the strength of the magnetic field, (2)
    an energized vacuum tube magnetic field sensor having a cathode ray beam
    and one or more electrodes or a fluorescent screen connected to appropriate
    voltages to attract the beam wherein the tested magnetic field acts to
    deflect the beam an amount dependent upon the strength of the tested field,
    or (3) an electrically conductive enclosure magnetic field sensor to which
    a signal is applied having a ferromagnetic material in the enclosure
    wherein the tested field affects the material to change the signal passed
    through the enclosure dependent upon the strength of the field.

    (1)     Note.  The enclosure is a waveguide, resonant cavity, or a
    transmission line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58+,    for measuring microwave parameters or using microwave devices for
    determining nonelectric properties.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 360 for magnetic field direction
    indicating apparatus using cathode-ray tubes or photo-electric cells.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 298 for ionic separation or analysis
    apparatus using magnetic means to separate or deflections, and subclass 396
    for apparatus to deflect or focus a charged particle beam.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 153 for electric lamp
    and discharge devices having a magnetic device, and subclass 364 for
    cathode-ray tubes, particularly subclass 421 for the beam deflection means
    of the cathode-ray tube.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 399 for
    cathode-ray tube beam deflection circuits.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 141+ for
    transmission line systems utilizing magnetic effects.


CLS 324/251
TXT Hall plate magnetometers:

    Subject matter under subclass 244 wherein the apparatus to sense a magnetic
    field includes a thin sheet of conductive material whose thickness is small
    compared to a dimension of the sides of the sheet, electrical means
    connected at first diametrical points on the edge of the sheet to pass an
    electrical current through the sheet, electrical output means connected to
    second diametrical points on the edge of the sheet at right angles to the
    first diametrical points and the apparatus to indicate being connected to
    the electrical output means whereby the solid-state sheet when placed in a
    magnetic field to be measured normal to the first diametrical points will
    cause a voltage, consistent with the intensity of the tested magnetic
    field, at the second diametrical points, which voltage is sensed by the
    apparatus to indicate.

    (1)     Note.  Compensation for misalignment of axis by means of potential
    balancing is here.

    (2)     Note.  Hall plates may be made of germanium, bismuth, tellurium,
    copper, or indium antimonide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for measuring electricity, per se, with a Hall effect device.

    127,    for measuring current in a split core transformer with a Hall
    effect device.

    207.20  for magnetic displacement measurement wherein a sensor utilizes the
    Hall effect.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 3 for Hall effect
    generators or converters.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 368 for
    impedance systems including a Hall effect resistor.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 511 for miscellaneous circuits having Hall effect devices
    sensitive to external magnetic effects.

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses for magnetic demodulators
    which include Hall effect devices.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 6 for amplifiers using the Hall effect.

    332,    Modulators, subclass 172 for magnetic amplitude modulators using
    the Hall effect.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 32 for Hall effect devices, per se.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 170 for Hall
    effect magnetic signal storage devices.


CLS 324/252
TXT Semiconductor type solid-state or magneto-resistive magnetometers:

    Subject matter under subclass 244 wherein the apparatus to sense and
    indicate the sensing of a magnetic field includes (1) a resistance of
    magnetic material having a current flow there-through and an indicator
    connected to the resistance whereby the magnetic field tested passing
    through the material changes the current noted on the indicator, or (2) a
    sensor of semiconductor material having a current flow therethrough and an
    indicator connected to the sensor to note the change in current caused by
    the tested magnetic field acting on the sensor.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type includes, for example,
    p-n junction semi-conductor sensors wherein the current flow therethrough
    is used to indicate the magnetic field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207.21, for magnetic displacement measurement wherein a sensor is
    magnetoresistive.

    228,    for noncoil type magnetic sensors including transistors and other
    solid-state magnetic sensors responsive to a magnetic field modified by a
    tested material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses, including subclasses 108, 414, and 421-427, for
    devices responsive to magnetic field.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, for circuits
    including active solid-state devices controlled by a magnetic field which
    controls the voltage or current in the circuits.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 510+ for miscellaneous circuits and systems subjected
    to external magnetic effects.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 62 for magneto-resistive-type amplifiers.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 32 for magnetic field-type resistors.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 113 for
    information type magnetoresistive transducer structures.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 235 for
    control circuits for electromagnetic devices having barrier layer devices
    controlled by a magnetic field.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 158 for
    magnetoresistive storage systems.


CLS 324/253
TXT Saturable core magnetometers:

    Subject matter under subclass 244 wherein the apparatus to sense a magnetic
    field includes a ferromagnetic core having an alternating magnetic flux
    passing through the core, the magnetic field tested being concurrently
    passed through the core with the alternating flux and an electrical coil to
    sense the change in the magnetic flux caused by the magnetic field in the
    core, the apparatus to indicate being responsive to the electrical coil
    sensing the magnetic field change in the core.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228,    for the magnetic testing of material.

    236+,   particularly, which use coil-type magnetic field sensors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 361 for flux gate sensors used in
    magnetic field responsive instruments indicating the direction of force
    traversing natural media.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 47 for magnetic field
    sensors that control an electric motor servo-system.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 870.33 for continuously
    variable indicating apparatus having an inductor of the flux gate type.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 20+ and 173+ for a
    code transmitter having a flux gate magnetic sensor.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 111 for
    flux gate magnetic sensing heads to sense or record information.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 143+ for
    drive circuits for flux gate magnetic sensing devices which create the
    alternating flux for the sensing devices.


CLS 324/254
TXT Second harmonic type:

    Subject matter under subclass 253 wherein the electrical coil sensing the
    change in the magnetic field in the core is connected to the apparatus to
    indicate by means of a circuit which passes only a harmonic signal of the
    alternating magnetic flux impressed upon the core so that the apparatus to
    indicate the result of the sensing is responsive only to the harmonic
    signal passed by the circuit.


CLS 324/255
TXT Peak voltage type:

    Subject matter under subclass 253 wherein the composite alternating flux
    and the magnetic field tested produce a cyclically alternating magnetic
    flux in the core which will produce peak flux values each half cyclic of
    the alternating flux although the peaks are not symmetrical half waves of
    flux, and wherein electrical circuitry connected between the electrical
    sensing coil and the apparatus to indicate the sensing of the field
    determines the (1) peak value, (2) the difference in the peak value, or (3)
    the average value of the voltage induced in the sensing coil caused by the
    alternate half cycles of the flux in the core.


CLS 324/256
TXT Energized movable sensing coil magnetometers:
    Subject matter under subclass 244 wherein the apparatus to sense a magnetic
    field is a movable electrically energized magnetic field sensing coil, the
    magnetic field created by the coil interacts with the magnetic field tested
    to produce a force which moves the sensing coil, and the apparatus to
    indicate the sensing of the field is connected to the coil to note the
    movement of the coil.

    (1)     Note.  The magnetic field created in the sensing coil may be a
    steady state or a changing magnetic field.

    (2)     Note.  The sensing coil may turn or be vibrated by the force caused
    by the interaction of the tested magnetic field with the field of the
    sensor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236,    for magnetic field sensors of the coil type which sense the change
    in a magnetic field caused by a tested material.

    260,    for magnetic field sensors of the induction type not classified
    elsewhere.


CLS 324/257
TXT Moving coil magnetometer:

    Subject matter under subclass 244 wherein the apparatus to sense a magnetic
    field is a movable magnetic field sensing coil placed within the field to
    be tested and has means to move the movable coil, and the apparatus to
    indicate the sensing of the magnetic field is connected to the sensing coil
    whereby the coil moving in the tested field has induced therein a voltage
    proportional to the number of turns of the coil and the time it takes for
    the moving coil to complete a cycle of movement.

    (1)     Note.  The sensing coil may or may not have a ferromagnetic core.

    (2)     Note.  The movement may be rotary, vibrator, or translatory.

    (3)     Note.  A single conductor sensing a magnetic field connected to an
    indicator is included in the subject matter of this subclass type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323+,   for geophysical surface or subsurface exploration which may include
    a moving coil magnetometer to detect objects below the surface of the earth
    or material within the earth or a magnetic field within the earth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 361 for indicators of direction
    of force traversing natural media which use a rotating or vibrating
    magnetic detector.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 1 for radar devices
    which utilize a moving antenna, subclass 100 for directive radio systems
    that use a moving antenna, and subclass 757 for antennas with scanning,
    sweeping, or orienting means to move the antennas.


CLS 324/258
TXT Fixed coil-magnetometer:

    Subject matter under subclass 244 wherein the apparatus to sense a magnetic
    field is a stationary electrical coil placed in a changing magnetic field
    to be tested, and the apparatus to indicate the sensing of the field is
    connected to the coil whereby the changing magnetic field induces in the
    coil a voltage proportional to the number of turns of the coil and the time
    it takes the changing field to make a complete change.

    (1)     Note.  The tested changing field may be the movement of a magnetic
    core in the magnetic field tested, the magnetic core being moved relative
    to the sensing coil.

    (2)     Note.  The sensing coil may include a ferromagnetic core.


CLS 324/259
TXT Movable magnet or magnetic member interacts with magnetic field:

    Subject matter under subclass 244 with a movable permanent magnet acting as
    a magnetic field detector or a movable member of low magnetic reluctance
    acting as a magnetic field detector which includes material that can be
    temporarily magnetized by the tested field, the movable magnet's magnetic
    field or the magnetic field of the temporarily magnetized material reacting
    to the tested magnetic field by moving until the force between the tested
    magnetic field and the movable magnet or the movable temporarily magnetized
    material is zero.

    (1)     Note.  Magnetic polarity testers are here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205,    for permanent magnet testing.

    225,    for test apparatus with compensation for a test variable.

    256,    for magnetometers having a movable energized coil which reacts with
    a tested magnetic field to indicate the direction or strength of the tested
    field.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 310 for borehole movable magnetic
    indicators for direction or inclination, subclass 319 for gyroscopically
    mounted magnetic compasses, subclass 352 for magnetic compass type
    directional indicators, and subclasses 355+ for magnetic compasses.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 382+ for scales using permanent
    magnets to determine the force of gravity.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 205+ for permanent magnet actuated switches, and
    subclasses 302+ for magnets, per se.


CLS 324/260
TXT Magnetic field detection devices:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 which includes magnetic field sensing
    devices, per se, which are not classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213,    for a magnetic recording medium placed on a magnetized test
    material which assumes the magnetization of the material and requires iron
    particles to visibly see the pattern of recording medium.

    214,    for paramagnetic particles placed in a tested magnetic field to
    note the pattern of the test field or on a magnetized test material to note
    the magnetization pattern of the magnetized material.

    220+,   for magnetic field sensing device and a support for the device to
    hold, position, or move the device in a pipe or borehole.

    226,    for apparatus involving a magnetic field detector combined with a
    diverse art device of another class.

    228+,   for means to create a magnetic test field and a magnetic sensor of
    the test magnetic field.

    244+,   for magnetometers which involve a magnetic sensor and an indicator
    responsive to the sensor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 595 for indicating transducer making
    processes.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses, including subclasses 108, 414, and 421-427, for
    devices responsive to magnetic field.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 32+ for magnetic field or compass
    resistive devices including those of the Hall and superconductive type.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 700+ for antennas.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 110+
    for magnetic transducers, per se, used in dynamic magnetic information
    systems.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+,
    particularly subclasses 170+ for condition responsive control circuits for
    electromagnetic relay or solenoid devices, including subclasses 179+ for
    metal presence or absence devices.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, for static magnetic
    information devices and the storage elements, per se, especially subclass
    157 for magnetostrictive; and subclass 160 for superconductive information
    storage devices.

    367,    Communication, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 156 and 168 for underwater magnetostrictive transducers.


CLS 324/261
TXT With support for article:

    Subject matter under subclass 260 wherein material is to be examined
    magnetically by a magnetic field sensing device and structure is provided
    to hold the material with respect to the sensor so that the sensing can be
    performed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158.1,  for test fixtures used in electrical testing generally.

    226,    for testing material magneticallym and conveying the tested
    material to or from the test.

    262,    for supports for magnetic sensing devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 176+ for article stands, and subclasses 309+
    for article brackets.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 491.1 for means to align or position an
    object relative to a detector.


CLS 324/262
TXT Magnetic test structure elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 which includes supports for tested
    material and sensing devices, and other elements not provided for elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158,    for test fixtures and supports for sensors generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, particularly subclasses
    32+ for anti-inductive structures.

    248,    Supports, for holding devices for materials, particularly
    subclasses 2+ for machinery supports.


CLS 324/263
TXT Current through test material forms test magnetic field:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 which includes an electric circuit
    including terminals to contact a material to be magnetically tested so that
    current through the material and the terminals create a magnetic field in
    the material for test purposes.

    (1)     Note.  Demagnetization as well as magnetization can be claimed as
    long as the test material forms the test field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217+,   for testing railroad rails by magnetizing the rail and sensing the
    magnetic field in the rail with or without an indication of the sensing.

    228+,   for magnetically testing material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 209+ for magnets and electromagnets, and
    subclass 284 for magnetizing and demagnetizing magnets and electromagnets.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 5+ for inductors, per se, which are
    impedance devices which produce a magnetic field when energized.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 143+ for
    systems for magnetizing, demagnetizing, or controlling the magnetic field,
    and subclass 267 for demagnetizing systems and processes.


CLS 324/300
TXT PARTICLE PRECESSION RESONANCE:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to the measurement of
    the energy interchange between precessing atomic particles in a surrounding
    electromagnetic field.

    (1)     Note.  The energy interchange may be characterized by a ratio
    between the mechanical angular momentum and the magnetic moment of an
    atomic system.

    (2)     Note.  Precession is a change in the orientation of the axis of a
    rotating particle, the effect of which is to rotate this axis (axis of
    spin) about a line (axis of precession) perpendicular to its original
    direction and to the axis (axis of torque) of the moment producing the
    change.

    (3)     Note.  Resonant frequency is the frequency at which a given system
    or object will respond with maximum amplitude when driven by an external
    sinusoidal force of constant amplitude.


CLS 324/301
TXT Using magnetometer:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 utilizing means to measure the effects of
    external magnetic fields upon the resonance of a host material in a
    controlled electromagnetic field.

    (1)     Note.  Host material is a material in which the resonance
    properties have been determined under controlled magnetic field conditions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244+,   for magnetometers, per se.


CLS 324/302
TXT To determine direction:

    Subject matter under subclass 301 wherein the magnetometer is used to
    determine the direction of an external magnetic field relative to the
    location of the magnetometer.

    (1)     Note.  External is used to mean those magnetic fields external of
    the instrument being used.


CLS 324/303
TXT Using well logging device:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 in which earth subsurface materials are
    subjected to magnetic resonance measurement by using a well logging device
    to transport the components of the testing system to the location to be
    tested.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    346,    for systems using magnetic means to determine the electrical
    characteristics of the subsurface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 152.02+ for a process or an
    apparatus for well logging, per se, wherein the process or the apparatus is
    not purely electrical or purely magnetic.


CLS 324/304
TXT Using optical pumping or sensing device:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 in which a source of optical energy is
    applied to the sample and a resultant amount of optical energy is
    reradiated and sensed as a measure of a controlled interaction between the
    metastable state of an atomic system and a steady magnetic field.

    (1)     Note.  Metastable is the marginal energy state of an electron above
    a reference ground within an atom, and having a definite lifetime.


CLS 324/305
TXT Having particular optical cell structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 304 wherein the optical cell is designed to
    aid the sensing of reradiated optical energy.


CLS 324/306
TXT Determine fluid flow rate:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 in which a fluid is magnetically tagged
    as a net magnetization in a predetermined direction at a tagging station
    for detection at a known distance downstream at a detection station within
    a measured time interval.

    (1)     Note.  Magnetically tagged refers to the magnetic resonance of a
    fluid volume upon passage through a magnetic induction coil.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 861.11 for electromagnetic
    induction-type volume or rate of flow meters.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 112 for fluid flow indicators.

    600,    Surgery, particularly subclass 419 for magnetic resonance imaging
    or spectroscopy of fluid flow limited to medically evaluating a body liquid
    or gas traveling through a living body and where structure particularly
    adapted for placement on or in the body is claimed.


CLS 324/307
TXT Using a nuclear resonance spectrometer system:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 in which a spectrometer is used to induce
    and measure resonance in the nucleus of an atom or group of atoms.

    (1)     Note.  The spectrometer system would include at least a polarizing
    magnetic field element, a signal transmitter and receiver along with
    transducer coils coupled to a sample material being measured, and an
    indicator to readout information obtained.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, particularly subclasses 410+ for a magnetic resonance
    imaging or spectroscopy device where structure particularly adapted for
    placement on or in a living body is claimed.


CLS 324/308
TXT Including a test sample and control sample:

    Subject matter under subclass 307 in which the nuclear resonance
    measurement of an unknown material is made by comparison with the resonance
    of a known material.


CLS 324/309
TXT To obtain localized resonance within a sample:
    Subject matter under subclass 307 in which a measurement of nuclear
    magnetic resonance at controlled locations within a sample volume is
    obtained.


CLS 324/310
TXT By scanning sample frequency spectrum:

    Subject matter under subclass 307 wherein the application of pulsed energy
    to an atom nucleus over a controlled range of frequencies results in
    relative energy absorption by the atom or atoms of a sample material at
    resonance.

    (1)     Note.  Scanning may also take place as a result of an increase or
    decrease in magnetic field strength.


CLS 324/311
TXT With signal decoupling:

    Subject matter under subclass 307 in which feedback from the signal
    receiver to the transmitter is suppressed or eliminated.

    (1)     Note.  The receiver feedback is not restricted to signals from the
    receiving coil and electronic components, but also includes the received
    and reradiated energy of the resonant sample material.


CLS 324/312
TXT By spectrum storage and analysis:

    Subject matter under subclass 307 wherein the nuclear resonant frequencies
    of the sample material are transformed to memory and recalled for
    computation.

    (1)     Note.  Transformation may include the conversion of resonant
    frequency signal information from analog to digital form.


CLS 324/313
TXT Including polarizing magnetic field/radio frequency tuning:

    Subject matter under subclass 307 wherein the degree of resolution at
    resonance is a result of adjustment between magnetic field strength and the
    frequency at which magnetic resonance occurs.


CLS 324/314
TXT With conditioning of transmitter signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 307 in which the signal information applied
    to the sample to induce resonance is made to conform with the predetermined
    frequency or phase conditions of a transmitter.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter under frequency or phase control of a
    transmitted signal would involve an improvement in sample resonance
    resolution, sensitivity, stability, or possibly the removal of unwanted
    sidebands from a frequency system.


CLS 324/315
TXT With sample resonant frequency and temperature interdependence:

    Subject matter under subclass 307 in which the nuclear resonance of the
    sample material is measured as a function of temperature, or the
    temperature of the sample material is measured as a function of nuclear
    resonance.


CLS 324/316
TXT Using an electron resonance spectrometer system:
    Subject matter under subclass 300 in which a spectrometer is used to induce
    and measure electron resonance of a sample material.

    (1)     Note.  The electrons of atoms of a sample material refers to the
    electrons of a single atom as well as electrons of bonded atoms.

    (2)     Note.  A spectrometer system as used here would include at least a
    signal transmitter coupled to a microwave cavity in which a sample material
    is placed between the poles of a steady magnetic field and a receiver
    coupled to relay sample material resonance to an indicator.


CLS 324/317
TXT Including a test sample and control sample:

    Subject matter under subclass 316 wherein the electron resonance of an
    unknown material is made by comparison with the resonance of known material.


CLS 324/318
TXT Spectrometer components:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 comprising structural components of a
    spectrometer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, particularly subclass 419 for a magnetic resonance imaging
    or spectroscopy system component where structure particularly adapted for
    contacting or conforming to a body  part of a patient is claimed.


CLS 324/319
TXT Polarizing field magnet:

    Subject matter under subclass 318 comprising the details of polarizing
    field magnet structure designed specifically for use with a spectrometer.


CLS 324/320
TXT With homogeneity control:

    Subject matter under subclass 319 where magnetic circuit component design
    permits a uniform magnetic field gradient to be obtained.


CLS 324/321
TXT Sample holder structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 318 comprising sample holders to be used
    specifically with a spectrometer.


CLS 324/322
TXT Electronic circuit elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 318 comprising basic circuit elements which
    include active and passive devices designed specifically for use in a
    spectrometer system.


CLS 324/323
TXT OF GEOPHYSICAL SURFACE OR SUBSURFACE IN SITU:
    Subject matter under the class definition relating to the determination of
    an electrical characteristic of the subsurface of the earth in situ.

    (1)     Note.  Subsurface is defined as including everything, whether
    composition, article, structure, or formation which lies below the upper
    natural surface of the earth.  The upper surface is defined as being the
    uppermost nongaseous thing which lies on the earth, and may be mud, water,
    snow, leaves, dead trees, ice pavements, crops of buildings and such upper
    surface is defined as being natural if of the same type (e.g., leaves)
    which is found in nature, whether deposited by nature or not. Thus, under
    the subclass definition, the determination of geologic structure under
    building foundations or the location or treasure buried in the earth is
    included, but the location of treasure concealed in the building wall is
    not included.

    (2)     Note.  The electrical characteristics which are determined may
    include streaming, telluric, terrestrial or self-potentials, resistance,
    dielectric constant, magnetic reluctance, inductance, conductance,
    capacitance, and magnetism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    376,    for the analysis of core samples, not in situ in the earth, and
    other appropriate subclasses for the analysis of samples which are not in
    situ, or for the location of objects which are not below the natural
    surface of the earth.  Note particularly subclasses 67, 158, and 200+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, subclass 230 for geochemical
    exploration.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 152.01+ for mechanical (e.g.,
    thermal) analysis of bore holes.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 250+ for well processes including indicating,
    testing, or measuring steps; subclass 64 for well apparatus including time
    or distance measuring, temperature responsive or counting means; and
    subclass 66 for well apparatus including electrical indicating means.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 40 and particularly
    subclass 50 for the combination of earth boring with electrical earth
    formation logging.  The mere nominal recitation of a conventional earth
    boring step or means will not preclude classification in Class 324.

    181,    Acoustics, subclass .5 for nonelectrical geophysical exploration by
    the use of seismic waves.  Also note the reference to Class 340 below.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 253+ for geophysical exploration by the
    use of radiant energy of the invisible type, including electromagnetic
    waves above the microwave frequency band.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 853.8 for a wellbore
    telemetering system.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 5+ for radar
    systems which are used in geophysical exploration, as for example, radar
    sets which are lowered down a bore hole to determine the size of the bore.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 14+ for seismic prospecting using electrical acoustic wave
    systems.


CLS 324/324
TXT Including borehole fluid investigation:

    Subject matter under subclass 323 relating to the determination of an
    electrical property of the fluid in a well, borehole, or other opening in
    the earth.

    (1)     Note.  The fluid may be oil, gas, water, brine, or any other fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    438,    for determining the pH or conductivity of an electrolyte.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 152.18+ for fluid analysis in a
    borehole or drilling test wherein the analysis is not made by purely
    electrical or purely magnetic means.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 400+ as the
    residual home for apparatus used for electrolytic analysis or testing, per
    se.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 775+ as the residual home for a
    process of electrolytic analysis or testing, per se.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 62.2 for electrolytes of general utility.


CLS 324/325
TXT To determine fluid entry:

    Subject matter under subclass 324 relating to the determination of the
    subsurface location of the point or region of entry of a fluid into or out
    of a well, borehole, or other opening in the earth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 40.5 for the determination of the
    leakage or ingress of fluid from or into a conduit in situ and subclasses
    152.18+ for a rate of fluid flow measuring or fluid analysis in a borehole
    or drilling test wherein the measurement or the analysis is not made by
    purely electrical means or purely magnetic means.


CLS 324/326
TXT For small object detection or location:

    Subject matter under subclass 323 relating to the detection or location in
    the earth of items which are relatively small compared to the size of the
    geoligic formation in which they are found.

    (1)     Note.  The items may be objects such as land mines, unexploded
    shells, lost or buried treasure, pipes, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67      and 200+, for the detection of concealed objects, not below the
    natural surface of the earth, using magnetic or electromagnetic sensing, as
    the location of pipe in walls.


CLS 324/327
TXT Using oscillator coupled search head:

    Subject matter under subclass 326 wherein one or more parameters of an
    oscillator, coupled to or formed in conjunction with a coil or antenna
    moved over the region of exploration, are monitored.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332,    for subject matter under subclass 323 using a radiant energy
    transmitter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, for a particular type of oscillator circuitry.


CLS 324/328
TXT Of the beat frequency type:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 having means for mixing the search head
    signal with another signal to produce a difference frequency output.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 37+ for beat frequency oscillator circuits
    in general.


CLS 324/329
TXT Using movable transmitter and receiver:

    Subject matter under subclass 326 wherein an antenna or coil means for
    generating an electromagnetic field and a separate pickup coil or antenna
    means responsive to the electromagnetic field as modified by the object to
    be detected are transported simultaneously over the area of investigation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    330,    for transmitters and receiver combinations used in aerial surveys.

    334,    for transmitter-receiver systems for geophysical prospecting in
    general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 575 for portable transmitter-receiver
    systems.


CLS 324/330
TXT By aerial survey:

    Subject matter under subclass 323 in which the determination of the
    electrical property is made by means which are situated by a substantial
    distance above the earth's surface.

    (1)     Note.  The means may, for example, be carried by a projectile,
    rocket, aircraft, balloon, or may be supported on towers.  The
    transportation of such means in a mere surface vehicle, such as an
    automobile, is not considered to be within the scope of this subclass.


CLS 324/331
TXT For magnetic field detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 330 having means for detecting a component of
    the earth's magnetic field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    345,    for magnetic prospecting means in general.


CLS 324/332
TXT With radiant energy or nonconductive-type transmitter:

    Subject matter under subclass 323 having means for radiating electrostatic
    or electromagnetic energy into the earth and for measuring a circuit
    parameter of the radiating means.

    (1)     Note.  The means for radiating the energy, for example, may be an
    oscillator search coil, and the reaction of the formation on the oscillator
    field, due to variable loading, may furnish the indication which is desired.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327,    for the measurement of oscillator circuit parameters in small
    object detection.


CLS 324/333
TXT Within a borehole:

    Subject matter under subclass 332 in which the transmitter is adapted for
    use within a drill hole in the earth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    338,    for borehole investigation with separate pickup of radiated energy.

    346,    for borehole investigation using magnetic means.

    351,    355 and 366+, for electrode arrangements used in a borehole.


CLS 324/334
TXT With separate pickup:

    Subject matter under subclass 332 having means distinct from the radiating
    means, for detecting the energy which has been radiated.

    (1)     Note.  The earth, for example, may act as a mutual inductance to
    convey a variable amount of energy from a transmitter coil to a receiver
    coil, in dependence upon the electrical characteristics of the formation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329,    for the detection of small objects using transmitter-receiver means.

    330,    for transmitter-receiver systems used in aerial surveys.

    SEARCH CLASS

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 39+ for particular
    transmitter-receiver systems used in communication.


CLS 324/335
TXT Employing multiple frequencies:

    Subject matter under subclass 334 in which more than one frequency is
    employed for investigating the subsurface formation between the transmitter
    and pickup.

    (1)     Note.  The plurality of frequencies may be produced by varying the
    frequency of the signal from a single source, or, by provision of a
    plurality of different frequency sources.


CLS 324/336
TXT To detect transient signals:

    Subject matter under subclass 334 wherein the transmitter signal is such as
    to cause decaying secondary signals to emanate from subsurface ore bodies
    and mineral deposits and the pickup means detects such decaying secondary
    signals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    360,    for electrode systems which detect transient-type signals.


CLS 324/337
TXT To detect return wave signals:

    Subject matter under subclass 334 having the pickup means positioned at the
    same location as the transmitter for receiving reflections or reradiations
    of the transmitted signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 5+ for radar
    systems.


CLS 324/338
TXT Within a borehole:

    Subject matter under subclass 334 adapted for use within a drill hole in
    the earth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333,    for measuring parameters of a radiant energy means positioned in
    the borehole.

    346,    for borehole investigation using magnetic means.

    351+,   355 and 366+, for electrode arrangements used in a borehole.


CLS 324/339
TXT By induction logging:

    Subject matter under subclass 338 in which eddy currents are induced in the
    formations surrounding the borehole by an alternating electromagnetic field
    from a transmitter coil and a secondary electromagnetic field set up by the
    eddy currents induces an electromotive force in the pickup or receiver coil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239+,   for induced voltage-type sensors in magnetic testing.


CLS 324/340
TXT To measure susceptibility:

    Subject matter under subclass 339 relating to the measurement of magnetic
    properties of the formation.


CLS 324/341
TXT To measure dielectric constant:

    Subject matter under subclass 339 relating to the measurement of
    permittivity properties of the formation.


CLS 324/342
TXT Using a toroidal coil:

    Subject matter under subclass 339 in which one or both of the transmitter
    and pickup coils are in the configuration of a toroid.


CLS 324/343
TXT Using angularly spaced coils:

    Subject matter under subclass 339 in which the axis of one or more of the
    transmitter coils is nonparallel to the axis of one or more of the receiver
    coils.


CLS 324/344
TXT With radiant energy or nonconductive-type receiver:
    Subject matter under subclass 323 having means for receiving electrostatic
    or electromagnetic energy from above or below the surface of the earth.

    (1)     Note.  The means, for example, may be responsive to radiant energy
    produced by natural sources but not by artificial sources.  Receivers
    responsive to energy produced by an artificial source are classifiable in
    subclass 334.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332+,   for this subject matter having transmitter means to radiate
    electrostatic or electromagnetic energy into the earth.

    359,    for a radiant energy pickup means responsive to radiant energy
    produced by artificial earth currents.


CLS 324/345
TXT By magnetic means:

    Subject matter under subclass 323 having magnetic means to determine the
    electrical characteristics of the subsurface.

    (1)     Note.  For example, the magnetic field, due to artificial or
    natural earth current, may be determined.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331,    for determining the magnetic field by aerial survey.


CLS 324/346
TXT Within a borehole:

    Subject matter under subclass 345 adapted for use within a drill hole in
    the earth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    303,    for magnetic resonance measuring using well logging systems.

    333,    for measuring parameters of a radiant energy means positioned in
    the borehole.

    338,    for borehole investigation with separate pickup of radiant energy.

    351,    355 and 366+, for electrode arrangements used in a borehole.


CLS 324/347
TXT Using electrode arrays, circuits, structure, or supports:

    Subject matter under subclass 323 relating to means for introducing
    electric currents into the subsurface or for collecting electric currents
    from the subsurface by conduction.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes the structure or configuration of one
    or more electrodes and the means for supporting such electrodes.  The
    electrodes and their supports are primarily of the borehole type, although
    not limited thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    437,    445 through 449, for electrode structures and systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 2.06 and 2.1 for the structure of electrodes
    utilized in medical diagnosis, such as gelatin electrodes.


CLS 324/348
TXT For detecting naturally occurring fields, currents, or potentials:

    Subject matter under subclass 347 for measuring a field, current, or
    potential which exists as a result of the inherent nature of the subsurface
    formations and not arising by virtue of an artificial current source.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass naturally occurring fields,
    currents, or potentials are considered to include those resulting from such
    sources as electric powerlines, electrical machinery, and underground
    pipes. These sources are considered a permanent part of the environment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for detecting potentials in a specific environment.


CLS 324/349
TXT Of the telluric type:

    Subject matter under subclass 348 wherein the potentials or fields are
    associated with naturally occurring variable current which permanently
    circulate in vast sheets within the outermost layer of the earth's crust.


CLS 324/350
TXT Including magneto-telluric type:

    Subject matter under subclass 349 for carrying out the telluric
    measurements in conjunction with measurements of the earth's magnetic field.


CLS 324/351
TXT Within a borehole:

    Subject matter under subclass 348 adapted for use within a hole which has
    been drilled or is being drilled within the earth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333,    for measuring parameters of a radiant energy means positioned in
    the borehole.

    338+,   for borehole investigation with separate pickup of radiated energy.

    346,    for borehole investigation using magnetic means.

    355,    for borehole electrodes coupled to an artificial current source.

    366+,   for separate pickup electrodes.


CLS 324/352
TXT Combined with artificial source measurement:

    Subject matter under subclass 351 including one or more additional types of
    electrode measurements employing a source of electrical energy other than a
    natural source.

    (1)     Note.  The "additional" types of measurements include only those
    which would be classified within this class (324).


CLS 324/353
TXT With fluid movement or pressure variation:

    Subject matter under subclass 351 including means for causing the movement
    of the fluid or variations in the pressure of the fluid existing within the
    borehole or the formations surrounding the borehole.


CLS 324/354
TXT Coupled to artificial current source:

    Subject matter under subclass 347 in which a parameter of the current
    introduced into the subsurface is measured.


CLS 324/355
TXT Within a borehole:

    Subject matter under subclass 354 adapted for use within a drill hole in
    the earth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333,    for measuring parameters of a radiant energy means positioned in
    the borehole.

    338+,   for borehole investigation with separate pickup of radiated energy.

    346,    for borehole investigation using magnetic means.

    351+,   for borehole electrode arrangements used in detecting naturally
    occurring fields and potentials.

    366+,   for borehole electrode arrangements with current emitting
    electrodes and separate potential pickup electrodes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 152.01+ for an apparatus or a
    process for borehole testing, per se, wherein the test is not made by
    purely electrical means or by purely magnetic measuring means.


CLS 324/356
TXT While drilling:

    Subject matter under subclass 355 associated with a drill string so that
    measurements can be carried out during drilling of the borehole.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    368,    for borehole logging while drilling devices having separate pickup
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 152.03+, 152.19+, and 152.43+ for
    an apparatus or a process for borehole testing during drilling, per se,
    wherein the test is not made by purely electrical means or by purely
    magnetic measuring means.


CLS 324/357
TXT Including separate pickup of generated fields or potentials:

    Subject matter under subclass 354 having means distinct from the current
    introduction means, for detecting the fields or potentials resulting from
    the current which has been caused to flow into the subsurface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for the detection of potentials caused by current flow in
    conducting resistance measurements in general.


CLS 324/358
TXT With three electrodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 357 having three potential pickup electrodes.


CLS 324/359
TXT With nonelectrode pickup means:

    Subject matter under subclass 357 having means for detecting radiant energy
    produced by the artificial current flow, including magnetic,
    electromagnetic, and electrostatic fields.

    (1)     Note.  Subclass 345 takes precedent when detecting a magnetic field
    if the means for introducing the artificial current flow is not significant.


CLS 324/360
TXT Using a pulse-type current source:

    Subject matter under subclass 357 wherein the current introduced into the
    subsurface has an abruptly changing waveform such as a pulse, step impulse,
    square wave, etc.

    (1)     Note.  The introduced current may include a single pulse-type
    signal or a plurality of such signals.


CLS 324/361
TXT With mechanical current reversing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 360 in which the current is caused to reverse
    direction by mechanical switching apparatus.


CLS 324/362
TXT To measure induced polarization:

    Subject matter under subclass 360 adapted to determine the polarization
    effects produced at the interface between a mineral body and a surrounding
    electrolyte in response to current flow.


CLS 324/363
TXT By varying the path of current flow:

    Subject matter under subclass 357 in which the current introduced is caused
    to travel through the subsurface formations over different paths.


CLS 324/364
TXT Using frequency variation:

    Subject matter under subclass 363 in which the current flow paths are
    varied by changing the frequency of the current.


CLS 324/365
TXT Offshore:

    Subject matter under subclass 357 adapted for use on or below the surface
    of a body of water.


CLS 324/366
TXT For well logging:

    Subject matter under subclass 357 adapted for use within a drill hole in
    the earth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333,    for measuring parameters of a radiant energy means positioned in
    the borehole.

    338,    for borehole investigation with separate pickup of radiated-energy.

    346,    for borehole investigation using magnetic means.

    351,    for borehole electrode arrangements used in detecting naturally
    occurring fields and potentials.

    355,    for borehole electrodes coupled to an artificial current source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 152.02+ for formation logging,
    per se, in a borehole or a drilling test wherein the measurement or the
    analysis is not made by purely electrical means or purely magnetic means.


CLS 324/367
TXT Using a pad member:

    Subject matter under subclass 366 in which the electrodes are mounted on
    the face of a support structure (pad member) adapted to extend into
    engagement with the borehole wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    374,    for pad members used with focussing electrodes.


CLS 324/368
TXT Cased borehole:

    Subject matter under subclass 366 in which the drill hole to be
    investigated contains a metal sheath or casing.


CLS 324/369
TXT While drilling:

    Subject matter under subclass 366 associated with a drill string so that
    measurements can be carried out during drilling of the borehole.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    355,    for borehole logging while drilling in which a parameter of current
    from an artificial current source is measured.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 152.03+ for formation logging,
    per se, in a borehole while drilling, and subclasses 152.19+ and 152.43+
    for a borehole or drilling test while drilling wherein the measurement or
    the analysis is not made by purely electrical means or purely magnetic
    means.


CLS 324/370
TXT Using surface current electrodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 366 in which potentials detected along the
    borehole are created by current flowing between electrodes located at the
    earth's surface on opposite sides of the borehole.


CLS 324/371
TXT Using plural fields:

    Subject matter under subclass 366 having means for creating more than one
    field in the formations surrounding the borehole and pickup electrode means
    responsive to each of the fields.

    (1)     Note.  The fields may be created simultaneously or at different
    times and may have the same or different frequencies.


CLS 324/372
TXT Between spaced boreholes:

    Subject matter under subclass 366 in which electrode means are lowered
    within two or more drill holes in the earth for investigating the
    formations between the boreholes.


CLS 324/373
TXT Using current focussing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 366 in which main survey current and
    auxilliary guard current electrodes are provided so as to confine or
    "focus" the survey current to a thin horizontal path into the formations.


CLS 324/374
TXT Including pad member:

    Subject matter under subclass 373 in which the electrodes are mounted on
    the face of a support structure (pad member) adapted to extend into
    engagement with the borehole wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    367,    for nonfocussing electrodes mounted on a pad member.


CLS 324/375
TXT Including plural current focussing arrays:

    Subject matter under subclass 373 having more than one focussing electrode
    configuration on a single borehole tool.

    (1)     Note.  The plural configurations may include different focussing
    electrode systems such as an elongated array combined with a pad member
    array, a single type system with means for switching between electrodes to
    form the plural configurations, or separate arrays of the same type
    vertically spaced along the borehole.  This subclass does not include a
    plurality of similar pad member arrays horizontally spaced around the
    borehole.


CLS 324/376
TXT OF SUBSURFACE CORE SAMPLE:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to the analysis by
    electrical means of core samples which have been removed from the
    subsurface of the earth.

    (1)     Note.  For a definition of subsurface as used in these definitions
    see the definitions of subclass 323 of the class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323+,   for this subject matter where the core sample is analyzed in situ
    in the earth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 152.07, 152.09, and 152.11 for
    logging a formation by a core sample analysis and subclasses 152.23+ for a
    fluid flow measuring or a fluid analysis in a borehole or drilling test
    combined with sampling wherein the measurement or the analysis is not made
    by purely electrical means or purely magnetic means.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 44 providing core
    position identification for core sample orientation.


CLS 324/377
TXT For magnetic properties:

    Subject matter under subclass 376 wherein a magnetic property of the sample
    is analyzed.

    (1)     Note.  For example, magnetic orientation, susceptance,
    permeability, dip and strike.


CLS 324/378
TXT INTERNAL-COMBUSTION ENGINE IGNITION SYSTEM OR DEVICE:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to the testing of
    electrical systems and devices which cause the rapid combustion of a fuel
    in an internal-combustion engine.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, means for testing spark
    plugs, spark plug wires, coils, distributor points, magnetos, ignition
    timing, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 116+ for testing of engines which
    do not use an electrical ignition system, for example, diesel engine.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 146.5 for internal-combustion
    engine structure in combination with the ignition system under test.


CLS 324/379
TXT With analysis of displayed waveform:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 having a cathode-ray tube (CRT) display
    or a drive circuit for a CRT responsive to an electrical ignition system to
    display the waveform generated by the ignition system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    394,    for the use of a CRT in the testing of spark plugs in situ.


CLS 324/380
TXT Electronic ignition system:
    Subject matter under subclass 378 wherein the ignition system utilizes
    solid-state switching devices and electronic components.

    (1)     Note.  These electronic components are, for example, transistors,
    zener diodes and oscillators.


CLS 324/381
TXT With magnetically controlled circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 380 wherein a magnetically controlled circuit
    has no conventional distributor contact points but uses a magnetic impulse
    generator in lieu thereof to trigger the transistor through an amplifier
    unit.


CLS 324/382
TXT With capacitor discharge circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 380 wherein conventional distributor breaker
    points, or a magnetic impulse generator in the distributor, charges a
    capacitor that generally discharges to the primary coil circuit.


CLS 324/383
TXT By simulating or substituting for a component under test:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 wherein the test is made by providing the
    test instrument with a standard, or ideal, component, or components,
    arranged to be connected into the ignition system under test for similar
    components therein and thereby indicate faulty components by eliminating
    the components which are not operating properly.


CLS 324/384
TXT Using plural tests in a conventional ignition system:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 wherein two or more diverse electrical
    components in an ignition system are tested.


CLS 324/385
TXT Distributor:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 including means for testing components in
    the primary and secondary circuits of the distributor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    421+,   for contact resistance test.


CLS 324/386
TXT Dwell (i.e., cam angle):

    Subject matter under subclass 385 wherein the number of degrees the
    distributor cam rotates from the time the breaker points close until they
    open again is measured.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes instruments which measure both dwell
    and revolutions per minute.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160+,   for electrical speed measuring.


CLS 324/387
TXT Condenser:

    Subject matter under subclass 385 for testing the operation of the energy
    storing component in the primary circuit of the ignition system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60+,    for measuring capacitance.


CLS 324/388
TXT Coil:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 including means for testing the operation
    of the voltage transformer of the ignition circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59,     for measuring inductance.


CLS 324/389
TXT Magneto:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 including means for testing the operation
    of the magnetic pulse generator of the ignition circuit.


CLS 324/390
TXT Low or high tension lead:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 including means for testing the
    electrical condition of the wires in the primary or secondary circuit of
    the ignition system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for fault testing and circuit continuity.

    54,     for insulation testing.

    62,     for measuring resistance or conductivity.


CLS 324/391
TXT Ignition timing:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 including means for measuring the time
    when a high voltage surge is provided to fire a spark plug for a particular
    cylinder relative to the position of the piston in the cylinder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 116+ for measuring the timing of
    engines which do not use an electrical ignition system, for example, diesel
    engines.


CLS 324/392
TXT Using a pulse signal technique:

    Subject matter under subclass 391 wherein the timing measurement is
    achieved by using pulse signal processing (e.g., digital processing).


CLS 324/393
TXT In situ testing of spark plug:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 wherein the spark plug is tested while in
    the engine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403+,   for testing of discharge characteristics of space discharge devices
    including spark plugs.


CLS 324/394
TXT With cathode-ray tube display:

    Subject matter under subclass 393 having a cathode-ray tube (CRT) display
    or a drive circuit for a CRT responsive to an electrical ignition system to
    display the waveform generated by the ignition system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    379,    for the general use of a CRT in the testing of internal-combustion
    engine ignition systems.


CLS 324/395
TXT Using an illuminating device to indicate spark plug condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 393 wherein a glow device (e.g., lamp bulb,
    neon tube, etc.) indicates whether or not a spark plug is operating
    properly.


CLS 324/396
TXT With an air gap in series with spark plug to indicate spark plug condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 393 having the air gap connected in series
    with the spark plug secondary circuit to give an indication of the
    condition of the spark plug.


CLS 324/397
TXT By shorting the plug to ground to indicate spark plug condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 393 wherein the test to indicate the
    condition of a spark plug consists of shorting the plug to ground and
    observing the change in the speed of the engine.


CLS 324/398
TXT With air gap in ground circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 397 having the air gap connected in parallel
    with the spark plug circuit.


CLS 324/399
TXT Wherein a measured electric quantity indicates spark plug condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 393 wherein an electric characteristic (e.g.,
    current, voltage, resistance, etc.) is evaluated or measured to indicate
    whether or not a spark plug is operating properly.


CLS 324/400
TXT Spark plug removed or tested in a test fixture: Subject matter under
    subclass 378 wherein the spark plug is removed from the engine or placed in
    a test fixture to determine the condition of the plug.


CLS 324/401
TXT Using a pressure chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein the test fixture has a means for
    testing the plug under pressure.


CLS 324/402
TXT Apparatus for coupling a measuring instrument to an ignition system:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 relating to devices which pick up signals
    from the ignition system and apply them to an analyzer.


CLS 324/403
TXT ELECTRIC LAMP OR DISCHARGE DEVICE:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising systems, apparatus,
    and methods for testing the operativeness or characteristics of electric
    lamps or electric discharge devices.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, systems for determining
    the lumen output per watt of input for electric lamps.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57+,    for the measurement of the resistance of lamp filaments as long as
    the claims are not limited to the filaments being mounted in the lamp.
    These subclasses (20) provide for electrical systems for testing the
    characteristics of incandescent lamps, including the testing of the
    resistance of the filament within the lamp.

    378+,   for this subject matter utilized to test spark plugs or ignition
    systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses for methods and apparatus for automatically separating and
    assorting, or segregating in grades or classes according to physical
    characteristics, lamps, and space discharge devices.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 120 and
    129+ for systems for operating an electric lamp and/or discharge device,
    the systems including signal, indicator, or alarm means to indicate some
    condition affecting the operation of the lamp or discharge device.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 121+ for lamp beam
    direction or pattern tests with or without focussing of the lamp; subclass
    123 for tests to determine the position of a filament with respect to its
    optical system; and subclasses 213+ for photometers.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    subclasses 3+ for processes; and subclasses 63+ for apparatus for the
    manufacture of electric lamps or discharge devices which include an
    operation of testing or means to test the operativeness of the lamp or
    discharge device.

    455,    Telecommunications, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous
    apparatus and systems for testing radio circuits.


CLS 324/404
TXT Cathode-ray tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 for testing a discharge device which has
    means for forming the electric discharge into a restricted beam or ray.


CLS 324/405
TXT Vacuum tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 for testing a device which is intended to
    have an electrical current flow between two spaced electrodes, at least
    part of the path followed by the discharge being constituted by a gas,
    vapor, or vacuum.


CLS 324/406
TXT Plural tubes in the testing circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 405 having a plurality of vacuum tubes
    connected in the testing circuit during the testing operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 130 for
    miscellaneous plural load device systems having means to indicate a
    condition affecting the operation of one or more of the lamps and/or
    discharge devices; and subclasses 312+ and the subclasses specified in the
    notes to the definitions of these subclasses for miscellaneous systems for
    supplying electric energy to a plurality of lamps and/or discharge devices.


CLS 324/407
TXT Testing circuit for diverse-type tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 405 wherein the testing system or apparatus
    is provided with means so that two or more types of vacuum tubes may be
    tested by the same apparatus or system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 178+ and
    the subclasses specified in the notes to the definitions of these
    subclasses for miscellaneous systems for operating a plurality of
    diverse-type load devices.


CLS 324/408
TXT Circuit for making diverse test:
    Subject matter under subclass 405 wherein the testing circuit or apparatus
    is designed to test a plurality of different characteristics of conditions
    of vacuum tubes under examination.

    (1)     Note.  Making a plurality of tests for short circuits between
    different electrodes is considered to be plural diverse testing for this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    407,    wherein the method, apparatus, or testing circuit is designed for
    use with vacuum tubes of different types.


CLS 324/409
TXT Testing discharge space characteristic (e.g., emission):

    Subject matter under subclass 405 wherein the testing circuit or apparatus
    is designed to test the condition between two or more of the discharge
    electrodes of an electric discharge device, or is designed to test the
    characteristics of the interelectrode discharge space of a discharge device.

    (1)     Note.  These subclasses including testing for short circuits
    between the electrodes of the discharge device and also deriving an
    operating characteristic of the discharge device such as the mutual
    conductance, amplification factor, etc.  The testing of the impedance
    characteristic between one pair of electrodes is not deemed diverse type
    testing merely because that characteristic may be either normal or abnormal
    though short circuiting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    408,    for apparatus, systems, and methods for making a plurality of
    different tests.


CLS 324/410
TXT With application of current or potential to the discharge control means:

    Subject matter under subclass 409 wherein the circuit used in making the
    test includes means to impress current or potential upon the discharge
    control means of a vacuum tube.


CLS 324/411
TXT Pulsating or alternating current or potential for the discharge control
    means:

    Subject matter under subclass 410 wherein the current or potential
    impressed upon the discharge control means is pulsating or alternating
    current or potential.


CLS 324/412
TXT Pulsating or alternating current for the anode: Subject matter under
    subclass 411 wherein the circuit used in making the test includes means to
    impress pulsating or alternating current or potential upon the anode of the
    vacuum tube.


CLS 324/413
TXT Shock testing:

    Subject matter under subclass 405 in which the internal components of the
    vacuum tube are tested for mechanical vibration by striking the tube
    envelope with a hammer element.


CLS 324/414
TXT Electric lamp:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 for testing a device which converts
    electrical energy into visible light or ultraviolet light.


CLS 324/415
TXT ELECTROMECHANICAL SWITCHING DEVICE:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to the testing of
    operational characteristics of electromechanical devices which open and
    close or change the connection of a circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 635+ for monitoring the
    condition of electrical apparatus.


CLS 324/416
TXT Voltage regulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 415 which includes determining the electrical
    properties of an electromechanical device which maintains a load voltage
    nearly constant over a range of variations of input voltage and load
    current.


CLS 324/417
TXT Thermostat switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 415 wherein the device under test consists of
    a temperature responsive circuit element which transforms temperature
    change to a change in the open or closed state of mating electrical contact
    surfaces.


CLS 324/418
TXT Relay:

    Subject matter under subclass 415 wherein the device under test consists of
    a switch contact member actuated by an electromagnet acting against a
    spring biased member to open or close switch contact surfaces.


CLS 324/419
TXT Reed switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 418 in which the relay to be tested is of the
    reed switch type.


CLS 324/420
TXT To evaluate contact chatter:

    Subject matter under subclass 418 wherein the resonant frequency at which
    the relay contact surfaces make and break a circuit is determined.


CLS 324/421
TXT To evaluate contact resistance:

    Subject matter under subclass 418 in which the magnitude of resistance to
    current flow across mating contact surfaces is determined.


CLS 324/422
TXT To evaluate contact sequence of operation:

    Subject matter under subclass 418 in which the order of make and break
    operation of plural contacts is determined.


CLS 324/423
TXT To evaluate contact response time:

    Subject matter under subclass 418 in which the rate of time resulting from
    contact separation as well as closure is determined.


CLS 324/424
TXT Circuit breaker:

    Subject matter under subclass 415 in which the electrical properties
    inherent to contacts separating in a high voltage-high current circuit are
    determined.


CLS 324/425
TXT ELECTROLYTE PROPERTIES:

    Subject matter under the class definition for testing the electrolyte of
    electrolytic devices, or having electrolytic means for performing the
    testing to determine specific electrical properties of the electrolyte.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 400+ as the
    residual home for apparatus used for electrolytic analysis or testing, per
    se.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 775+ as the residual home for a
    process of electrolyltic analysis or testing, per se.


CLS 324/426
TXT Using a battery testing device:

    Subject matter under subclass 425 in which the testing device used is
    specifically designed to test the condition of or properties of a battery.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example, means for testing the
    conditions of dry cells by means which measure terminal voltage under load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76+,    for electric meters, per se, such as voltmeters which can be
    utilized to measure battery voltage.  Note especially subclass 145.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    320,    Electricity:  Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass for an indicator for a battery condition in
    combination with a battery or capacitor charging or discharging circuit.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 636 for means for permanently
    indicating the condition of a battery.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product and
    Process, subclasses 90+ for testing and indicating where specific battery
    structure is claimed.


CLS 324/427
TXT To determine ampere-hour charge capacity:

    Subject matter under subclass 426 in which the charge capacity of a battery
    is determined by external electrical measurement.


CLS 324/428
TXT Including an integrating device:

    Subject matter under subclass 427 in which a charge accumulating or
    counting device is connected to the battery terminals in order to show the
    amount of remaining battery charge.


CLS 324/429
TXT To determine load/no-load voltage:

    Subject matter under subclass 426 in which battery condition is determined
    by terminal voltage measurement with and without a connected load.


CLS 324/430
TXT To determine internal battery impedance:

    Subject matter under subclass 426 with circuitry connected to the battery
    for the purpose of measuring internal battery impedance.


CLS 324/431
TXT With temperature compensation of measured condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 426 in which a measurement of battery
    capacity is made under varied temperature conditions.


CLS 324/432
TXT To determine battery electrolyte condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 426 involving an electrical conductivity
    measurement of a battery electrolyte directly to determine a battery state
    of charge.


CLS 324/433
TXT To compare battery voltage with a reference voltage:
    Subject matter under subclass 426 for comparing a test battery terminal
    voltage with a reference voltage in an electrical circuit and determining
    battery condition as a result of the comparison.


CLS 324/434
TXT To determine plural cell condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 426 including electrical connection to the
    individual cells of a battery for status determination of each cell and
    resultant subsequent determination of the battery condition.


CLS 324/435
TXT Having particular meter scale or indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 426 having an electrical measuring instrument
    face, scale, or indicator of particular interest.


CLS 324/436
TXT Including oscillator in measurement circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 426 in which an oscillator connected to a
    battery to be measured provides an output signal corresponding to battery
    condition.


CLS 324/437
TXT Including probe structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 426 including the structural connector which
    makes contact with a battery to be tested.


CLS 324/438
TXT Using a pH determining device:

    Subject matter under subclass 425 using a device designed to determine the
    hydrogen ion concentration of an electrolyte.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 242+ for pH
    cells, per se.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 1+ for
    this subject matter involving a chemical reaction, such as, for example,
    tests in which an electrolytic determination is made subsequent to a
    chemical reaction.


CLS 324/439
TXT Using a conductivity determining device:

    Subject matter under subclass 425 using a device designed to determine the
    conductivity of an electrolyte.


CLS 324/440
TXT Which includes a dropping mercury cell:

    Subject matter under subclass 439 wherein voltage is applied to a reference
    electrode and a mercury drop electrode immersed in an electrolyte, whereby
    the oxidation or reduction at the mercury drop electrode alters the passage
    of current through the electrode thereby providing an indication of the
    conductivity of the electrolyte at that voltage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 219+ for movable
    liquid electrode cells, per se.


CLS 324/441
TXT Which includes a temperature responsive element:
    Subject matter under subclass 439 in which conductivity measurement is made
    under temperature compensated conditions.


CLS 324/442
TXT Which includes an oscillator:

    Subject matter under subclass 439 including the passage of alternating
    current generated by an oscillator through the electrolyte in which
    resultant current flow is a measure of electrolyte conductivity.


CLS 324/443
TXT Having a bridge circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 439 including a conductivity cell under test
    as the arm of a bridge circuit.


CLS 324/444
TXT Which includes current and voltage electrodes: Subject matter under
    subclass 439 including separate pairs of electrodes in which one pair
    supplies current to an electrolyte and another pair provides a voltage to
    be measured thereacross.


CLS 324/445
TXT Having inductance probe structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 439 in which an electrolyte provides a mutual
    inductance medium path between the transmitter and receiver coils of a
    probe element.


CLS 324/446
TXT Having conductance probe structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 439 in which conductance probe element is of
    particular interest.


CLS 324/447
TXT With movable or adjustable electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 446 including movement or adjustment of probe
    electrodes with respect to one another.


CLS 324/448
TXT With concentric electrodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 446 having probe electrodes positioned
    concentrically with respect to one another.


CLS 324/449
TXT With axially arranged electrodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 446 having probe electrodes positioned
    axially with respect to one another.


CLS 324/450
TXT Which includes particular cell container structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 439 in which the cell container structure is
    of particular interest.


CLS 324/451
TXT A MATERIAL PROPERTY USING THERMO-ELECTRIC PHENOMENON:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein an electromotive force is
    generated by a temperature difference between the junctions in a circuit
    composed of two homogeneous electrical conductors of dissimilar
    compositions; or in a nonhomogeneous conductor, an electromotive force is
    produced by a temperature gradient in a nonhomogeneous region and used to
    identify the different types of materials forming the junctions or to
    measure properties of these materials.

    (1)     Note.  This thermoelectric effect is often referred to as the
    Seebeck effect.

    (2)     Note.  The material under test forms an integral part of the
    thermoelectric junction across which the electromotive force is generated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    for measuring electricity, per se, having means whose temperature
    is varied in accordance with the electricity being measured.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 179+ for a thermometer
    having a thermoelectric sensor.


CLS 324/452
TXT A MATERIAL PROPERTY USING ELECTROSTATIC PHENOMENON:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein electrostatic charges are
    placed upon the material under test and monitored to determine some
    property of the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109,    for using electrostatic attraction or repulsion for measuring
    electricity, per se, rather than a material property.


CLS 324/453
TXT In a liquid:

    Subject matter under subclass 452 wherein the charged material is either a
    liquid or a material being carried along by a liquid.

    (1)     Note.  If the charged material is a gas, vapor, smoke, or particle
    in the latter environment it is classified with the subject matter under
    ionization. Only charged material in a liquid is found here.


CLS 324/454
TXT Frictionally induced:

    Subject matter under subclass 452 wherein an electrostatic charge is placed
    upon the material by the mechanical separation of electrical charges of
    opposite sign by processes such as sliding or rubbing dissimilar objects,
    and the charge is then monitored as a measure of the material property.


CLS 324/455
TXT Corona induced:

    Subject matter under subclass 452 wherein the electrostatic charge is
    placed upon the material by corona discharge.


CLS 324/456
TXT For flaw detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 452 wherein electrostatically charged
    particles are placed upon the test material and collect at flaw locations
    to indicate the position of the flaw.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216,    for magnetic particle flaw detection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, for flaw testing using fluorescent or luminescent
    materials.


CLS 324/457
TXT ELECTROSTATIC FIELD:

    Subject matter under the class definition for measuring the strength of the
    vector force field set up in the vicinity of nonmoving electrical charges.

    (1)     Note.  The instruments used for measuring an electrostatic field
    are called electrometers and this subclass is the generic location for such
    instruments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for testing potential in a specific environment using electrometers
    wherein the environment is a significant factor in the measurement.

    109,    for electrostatic attraction or repulsion measurement of
    electricity, per se.


CLS 324/458
TXT Using modulation-type electrometer:

    Subject matter under subclass 457 wherein the electrostatic phenomenon
    being monitored is modulated by movement of one of the elements of the
    electometer to thereby generate an alternating current signal proportional
    to the phenomenon being measured.

    (1)     Note.  As an example, this measurement can be in the form of a
    rotating vane cutting the electrostatic field or a plate moving toward and
    away from the field.


CLS 324/459
TXT USING IONIZATION EFFECTS:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a medium is ionized and
    the ionized medium is used to measure or monitor a property or condition
    distinct from the cause of the ionization.

    (1)     Note.  The patents here are measuring a property or condition
    separate or distinct from the ionized medium itself.

    (2)     Note.  Where the pressure of the ionized medium or its constituents
    or properties itself are being monitored, it will be found in one of the
    indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 306+ for using charged particles to
    inspect solids or liquids; also, subclasses 374+ for sensing invisible
    radiation, per se, which causes ionization.  The ionization is a measure of
    the ionizing radiation.  Testing for other than radiation, by ionizing
    means, is classified here.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, for discharge
    devices, per se, which depend upon ionization for its operation.  See
    subclasses 129+ for indicating some condition of a load device such as a
    discharge tube.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 579 for systems for detecting
    flame by ionization means; subclass 600 for systems for detecting radiant
    energy; and subclass 629 for systems for detecting smoke using ionization
    means.


CLS 324/460
TXT For monitoring pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 459 wherein the pressure within an area is
    monitored by ionizing the gas or vapor therein and then analyzing the
    ionization.

    (1)     Note.  The gas or vapor may be ionized by application of a radio
    frequency field to the area and the glow discharge then analyzed.  The
    color of the glow is an indication of pressure.

    (2)     Note.  The discharge characteristics, i.e., voltage or current can
    also be measured as an indication of pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 384 for atmospheric pressure
    measurement not involving ionization; also subclasses 700+ for fluid
    pressure measurement not involving ionization.


CLS 324/461
TXT Using a radioactive substance:

    Subject matter under subclass 460 wherein a radioactive material is used to
    ionize the gas or vapor in the environment wherein the pressure is being
    measured.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 600 for systems for detecting
    radiant energy.


CLS 324/462
TXT Using thermionic emissions:

    Subject matter under subclass 460 wherein a heated element emits electrons
    which collide with and ionize the gas or vapor in the environment wherein
    the pressure is being monitored.

    (1)     Note.  The collision produces positive ions, which are collected.
    The rate of formation of ions is approximately proportional to gas pressure.


CLS 324/463
TXT Using a magnetic field:

    Subject matter under subclass 460 wherein a magnetic field is used with an
    ionizing electron source to cause the electrons to flow in a longer path.

    (1)     Note.  This longer path increases the probability of ionizing
    collisions.

    (2)     Note.  The magnetic field here is not used to ionize the gas.  The
    field can be alternating current or direct current and can originate from
    an electromagnet or permanent magnet.


CLS 324/464
TXT For analysis of gas, vapor, or particles of matter: Subject matter under
    subclass 459 wherein a gas, vapor, or particles of matter to be monitored
    are ionized and the ionized material is then monitored to determine
    properties of the material itself.

    (1)     Note.  The discharge properties of a gas, vapor, etc., can be
    monitored, i.e., current and voltage.  Also, the glow of the discharge can
    be used to indicate the properties of the test material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, subclass 232 for gas analysis
    wherein a chemical reaction is involved.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 19+ for gas analysis wherein the
    gas is not ionized as part of the analysis.

    250,    Radiant Energy, appropriate subclasses for similar subject matter
    specifically provided for therein.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 629 for ionization gas
    detectors wherein the indication is in the form of an alarm.  If the
    indication is nonquantitative, i.e., alarm, classification is in Class 340.
     If indication is quantitative (except for smoke detectors as noted above
    in Class 250) or there is a combination of quantitative and nonquantitative
    indicators, classification is in Class 324.


CLS 324/465
TXT Using electronegative gas sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 464 wherein a gas whose molecules exhibit
    electron affinity or an ability to pick up free electrons and form negative
    ions, is sensed.

    (1)     Note.  These types of sensors normally utilize an ionization source
    to ionize a carrier gas in which the electronegative gas is present.

    (2)     Note.  These devices are often called electron capture detectors.

    (3)     Note.  Some examples of electronegative gases are O2, HCL, SO2, C12
    and Freon gas.


CLS 324/466
TXT Using a filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 464 wherein a filter or membrane is used,
    which passes only the gas, vapor, etc., which is to be tested, to the
    ionization chamber where it is ionized and analyzed.


CLS 324/467
TXT Using test material desorption:

    Subject matter under subclass 464 wherein the material to be monitored is
    placed upon a filament which is heated until the material evaporates
    (desorbs) forming ions which are then analyzed.


CLS 324/468
TXT Using thermal ionization:

    Subject matter under subclass 464 wherein the gas, vapor, etc., to be
    monitored contacts a heated positive electrode causing positive ion
    emission, which ions are then collected for analysis by a negative
    electrode spaced from the heated positive electrode.

    (1)     Note.  The mechanism here differs from thermionic emission
    ionization below since ionization is not caused by electron collision.


CLS 324/469
TXT Using a radioactive substance:

    Subject matter under subclass 464 wherein a radioactive material is used to
    ionize the gas, vapor, etc., to be analyzed.


CLS 324/470
TXT Using thermionic emission:

    Subject matter under subclass 464 wherein a heated element emits electrons
    which ionize the gas, vapor, etc., to be analyzed.


CLS 324/500
TXT FAULT DETECTING IN ELECTRIC CIRCUITS AND OF ELECTRIC COMPONENTS:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means for testing for
    the existence, or location, of an electrical defect by providing a
    quantitative or nonquantitative output.

    (1)     Note.  The indented subclasses under this subclass have three main
    sections:

    (I)     Special types of fault testing circuits and instruments.

    (II)    Circuits and instruments for locating faults.

    (III)   Circuits and instruments for testing electric elements for faults.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes fault detecting circuits and fault
    detecting instruments.

    (3)     Note.  The instruments are classified with the type of test, or the
    element tested, if a particular subclass exists.

    (4)     Note.  This subclass includes the following faults:

    (A)     Ground Fault - where defective insulation causes an electrical
    conductor to leak current to ground.

    (B)     Short Circuit - where defective insulation causes two electrical
    conductors to come in contact unintentionally.

    (C)     Open Circuit - where a electrical conductor breaks.

    (5)     Note.  If the fault detecting circuit produces a quantitative
    output indication, it is included in this subclass.

    (6)     Note.  If the fault detecting circuit produces a nonquantitative
    output indication and it is temporarily connected to the object under test,
    it is included in this subclass.

    (7)     Note.  If the fault detecting circuit produces a nonquantitative
    output indication and it is permanently connected to the object under test,
    it is not included in this subclass.  For this, see Class 340, subclasses
    500+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 635+ for determining the
    condition of electrical apparatus where a fault testing circuit produces a
    nonquantitative output and the test circuit is permanently connected to the
    apparatus under test.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 23+ for
    safety and protection of systems and devices which include fault sensing
    combined with control.


CLS 324/501
TXT Using radiant energy:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein some form of radiant energy,
    e.g., electron beam, light, etc., is used to test the continuity of a
    conductor line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71.3,   for using a beam of antomic particles to determine nonelectric
    properties by measuring electric properties.

    133,    for nonquantitative indication, e.g., polarity testers and "hot
    line" indicators.


CLS 324/502
TXT In an ignitor or detonator:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein a test is made to check the
    ability of a circuit, or component thereof to fire an explosive device.

    (1)     Note.  The test could relate to a switch for a blasting device,
    primer for electrically fired ammunition, ignition circuit of rocket
    motors, continuity testing of explosive igniting circuits, etc.


CLS 324/503
TXT In vehicle wiring:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 to determine the presence of faults
    located in vehicle circuits.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, testers for determining
    whether a short exists in the lighting circuit of an automobile.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not include the testing of ignition
    systems or devices in vehicle internal combustion engines.  Also, this
    subclass does not include the testing of vehicle generating systems.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158,    for testing vehicle generating systems.

    378+,   for testing vehicle ignition systems.


CLS 324/504
TXT With trailer:

    Subject matter under subclass 503 for testing the operability of various
    lighting and signal circuits located on trailers.


CLS 324/505
TXT Combined with window glass:

    Subject matter under subclass 503 for testing the continuity of electrical
    conductors embedded in a glass sheet, deposited on a glass sheet, or
    laminated between a pair of glass sheets.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, the testing for
    discontinuities in resistive heating strips supported on rear windows of
    motor vehicles and antenna wires located in vehicle windshields.


CLS 324/506
TXT Combined with a flashlight:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 where a flashlight is modified to include
    an electric tester.


CLS 324/507
TXT With fuse testing attachment:

    Subject matter under subclass 506 where a flashlight is modified to include
    an adapter for testing continuity in fuses.


CLS 324/508
TXT With electric power receptacle for line wire testing:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 where a tester is adapted to be inserted
    into an electric outlet socket or receptacle for testing the electrical
    circuits connected to the electrical receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, means for determining
    if a receptacle is wired correctly, the quality of a ground, continuity,
    etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    509,    for ground faults.

    541,    for insulation fault in a multiconductor cable.

    544,    for insulation fault in a single conductor cable.

    551,    for insulation fault.


CLS 324/509
TXT Of ground fault indication:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 for detecting an unintentional electrical
    path where defective insulation causes an electrical conductor to leak
    current to ground.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    508,    for determining a ground fault in a line wire connected to a
    receptacle.

    541,    for insulation fault in a multiconductor cable.

    544,    for insulation fault in a single conductor cable.

    551,    for insulation fault.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 42+ for
    ground fault protection control circuits, and subclass 170 for relay
    circuits responsive to external conditions.


CLS 324/510
TXT Of electrically operated apparatus (power tool, appliance, machine, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 509 for detecting an undesirable current
    leakage between an ungrounded and grounded part of equipment normally
    caused by defective insulation.

    (1)     Note.  The object under test could be an electric circuit, or a
    portable device, where detection is limited to a ground fault.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    511,    for electrical faults, other than a ground fault, or other faults
    in addition to a ground fault, in an electrically operated power tool,
    appliance, machine, equipment, etc.


CLS 324/511
TXT Of electrically operated apparatus (power tool, appliance, machine, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 500 for testing the condition of electric
    power tools, appliances, machines, equipment, etc., for safe use with
    respect to proper grounding, shorts or continuity.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is distinguishable from subclass 510 in that
    it includes faults, other than a ground fault, or it can include the faults
    along with a ground fault.


CLS 324/512
TXT For fault location:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 where a signal produced indicates either
    direction or distance to a fault.

    (1)     Note.  Subclasses, which are indented under fault location,
    distinguish from the main sections preceding and subsequent thereto in that
    here, under the fault location section, a determination is made as to where
    the fault is located as opposed to whether or not a fault exists.

    (2)     Note.  The indented subclasses under this subclass include a
    circuit or an instrument for determining the location of a defect.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclass 175.3, for locating faults in
    telephone lines.


CLS 324/513
TXT Where components moves while under test:

    Subject matter under subclass 512 where component under test is moved
    linearly, or by stressing, bending, rotating, jarring, vibrating, flexing,
    etc., while under test.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes for example, a cable under test
    passing a stationary sensing electrode, which locates a fault in the cable,
    as a cable is wound on a takeup reel.


CLS 324/514
TXT By exposing component to liquid or gas while under test:

    Subject matter under subclass 513 where the component under test is
    immersed, passes through, or contacts a liquid or gas while a test is being
    made.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    547,    for transformer testing.

    553,    for insulating oil testing.

    557,    testing for insulation fault of a noncircuit element.


CLS 324/515
TXT Using a particular sensing electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 513 where details of the sensing electrode
    are significant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    529,    for magnetic field sensor structure.

    530,    for electric field sensor structure.


CLS 324/516
TXT Metal chain:

    Subject matter under subclass 515 where the sensing electrode comprises
    flexible linked elements which contact the moving component under test.


CLS 324/517
TXT Wire bristles:

    Subject matter under subclass 515 where the sensing electrode comprises
    stiff flexible spring wire elements which contact the moving component
    under test.


CLS 324/518
TXT Metal pellets or beads:

    Subject matter under subclass 515 where the sensing electrode comprises
    metal spheres which contact the moving component under test.


CLS 324/519
TXT By capacitance measuring:

    Subject matter under subclass 512 where a capacitance related signal is
    used to locate a break, ground or short in a conductor.


CLS 324/520
TXT By frequency sensitive or responsive detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 512 where a frequency related signal is used
    to locate a break, ground, or short in a conductor.


CLS 324/521
TXT By phase sensitive or responsive detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 512 where a phase related signal is used to
    locate a break, ground, or short in a conductor.


CLS 324/522
TXT By voltage or current measuring:

    Subject matter under subclass 512 where a fault causes a change or
    abnormality of a normal condition to produce a voltage drop or a current
    surge etc., which is detected to locate the fault.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 56, 57,
    65, and 93 for safety and protection of systems and devices which include
    voltage and current responsive fault sensors.  Subclass 187 for voltage or
    current level condition responsive relay control circuits.


CLS 324/523
TXT Of an applied test signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 522 where a measured fault signal is derived
    from the voltage or current of a applied test signal to indicate the
    location of the fault.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    527+,   for applying a test signal where means other than voltage or
    current are measured to locate a fault.


CLS 324/524
TXT Polarity responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 522 where direction or distance to a fault is
    determined by a positive or negative signal.


CLS 324/525
TXT By resistance or impedance measuring:

    Subject matter under subclass 512 where measured resistance or impedance
    value indicate the location of a fault.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57+,    for impedance measuring and testing.

    62,     for resistance measuring.


CLS 324/526
TXT Using a bridge circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 525 where resistance values are evaluated by
    a circuit which compares the resistance values to locate a fault.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    Dig. 1, for bridge circuits.


CLS 324/527
TXT By applying a test signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 512 where a test signal is applied to the
    conductor under test to locate the fault.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    523,    for measuring the current or voltage of an applied test signal to
    locate a fault.


CLS 324/528
TXT Tracing test signal of fault location:

    Subject matter under subclass 527 where an applied test signal undergoes a
    change at the location of the fault.


CLS 324/529
TXT Using a magnetic field sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 528 where a search or exploring coil responds
    to a magnetic field produced by the applied test signal to determine fault
    location.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   for magnetic testing.


CLS 324/530
TXT Using an electric field sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 528 where a capacitive pickup device for
    probe responds to an electric field produced by the applied test signal to
    determine fault location.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for capacitance measuring.

    61,     for capacitance measuring to determine a nonelectric property.


CLS 324/531
TXT At fault site:

    Subject matter under subclass 527 where the applied test signal causes,
    creates, or produces a fault signal at or near the fault site.


CLS 324/532
TXT Using time measuring:

    Subject matter under subclass 527 where the applied test signal is
    evaluated as to time to indicate the location of a fault.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    535,    where the defect produces a fault signal which is evaluated as to
    time to indicate fault location.


CLS 324/533
TXT Of reflected test signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 532 where the defect causes the applied test
    signal to be reflected and the reflected signal is evaluated as to time to
    determine the location of the fault.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    534,    for reflection evaluation techniques which do use an applied test
    signal.


CLS 324/534
TXT By reflection technique:

    Subject matter under subclass 512 where the defect causes, creates, or
    produces a fault signal which is reflected and evaluated to indicate the
    location of the fault.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    533,    for an evaluation of a reflected applied test signal to indicate
    fault location.


CLS 324/535
TXT By time measuring:

    Subject matter under subclass 512 where a defect produces a fault signal
    which is evaluated as to time to indicate the location of the fault.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    532,    for an evaluation of the time of an applied test signal to indicate
    fault location.


CLS 324/536
TXT By spark or arc discharge:

    Subject matter under subclass 512 where a defect causes a voltage breakdown
    at a void or discontinuity to indicate the location of a fault.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    514,    where a component is tested while exposed to a liquid or a gas.

    530,    where an electric field sensor is used to locate a fault.


CLS 324/537
TXT Of individual circuit component or element:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 relating to the detection of the presence
    or absence of a defect in an electric component, or element, by giving a
    nonquantitative indication thereof.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes a circuit, or an instrument, which is
    used to test the particular component or element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for testing semiconductors for a nonelectrical property.

    378+,   for testing internal combustion engine ignition testing.

    403+,   for testing lamp or discharge devices.

    415+,   for testing switching devices.

    425+,   for battery testing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 635+ for monitoring the
    condition of electric components and elements.


CLS 324/538
TXT Electrical connectors:

    Subject matter under subclass 537 for detecting open and closed circuit
    conditions in an electrical apparatus and the correctness of inner circuit
    connections in multi-connection devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66,     for determining the location of a particular conductor or for
    identifying a particular conductor out of many.

    415+,   for the testing of operational characteristics of
    electro-mechanical devices which open and close or change the connections
    of a circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for structural
    details of electrical connectors.


CLS 324/539
TXT Multiconductor cable:

    Subject matter under subclass 537 wherein an assembly of more than one
    conductor is tested to determine if the conductors are continuous, grounded
    or shorted by giving a nonquantitative indication.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    513,    where the conductors move while under test.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 651 for testing the condition
    of plural circuit conductors.


CLS 324/540
TXT With sequencer:

    Subject matter under subclass 539 where a mechanical or electrical device
    is included which tests one cable after another for a defect.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73,     for making a plurality of tests automatically.


CLS 324/541
TXT For insulation fault:

    Subject matter under subclass 539 for checking a defect in a nonconductive
    material which separate one conductor from another and causes an
    unintentional electrical path between two conductors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    509+,   where an insulation failure in a circuit causes an unintentional
    current leakage to ground.

    544,    for an insulation defect in a single conductor.

    551+,   for detecting the presence of a defect in a nonconductive material
    used in an electric circuit or component in general.

    557+,   for detecting defects in insulating material not used in an
    electric circuit or component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 647 and 651 for testing the
    condition of insulation.


CLS 324/542
TXT Having a light or sound indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 539 where a visual or audible device makes
    information available to a human concerning the existence of a defect in a
    multiconductor cable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    503+,   for testers having light or sound indicators.

    538,    for electrical connectors having light indicators.

    540,    for multiconductor cable testers having light indicators.

    556,    for fault testing instruments and devices having lamp or light
    indicators.


CLS 324/543
TXT Single conductor cable:

    Subject matter under subclass 537 which includes a solid conductor, or
    stranded group fo solid cylindrical conductors, having a low resistance to
    flow, together with any insulation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    513+,   where a conductor si in motion while under test.


CLS 324/544
TXT For insulation fault:

    Subject matter under subclass 543 for checking a defect in a nonconductive
    material which separates the conductor from an unintentional electrical
    path to ground.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    509+,   where an insulation failure in a circuit causes an unintentional
    current leakage to ground.

    541,    for an insulation fault in a multiconductor cable.

    551+,   for detecting a defect in a nonconductive material used in an
    electric circuit or component in general.

    557+,   for detecting defects in insulating material not used in an
    electric circuit or component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 647 for testing the condition
    of insulation.


CLS 324/545
TXT Armature or rotor:

    Subject matter under subclass 537 for testing the rotating part of a
    generator or motor.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include the testing of an assembled
    motor or generator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    772,    for motor generator testing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 648 for testing the condition
    of a motor.


CLS 324/546
TXT Winding or coil:

    Subject matter under subclass 537 for testing a number of turns of wire
    wound around an iron core or onto a form made of insulating material, or
    one which is self supporting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59,     for measuring inductive reactance quantitatively.

    200+,   for magnetic field testing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 646 for testing the condition
    of a transformer.


CLS 324/547
TXT Transformer:

    Subject matter under subclass 546 for checking a defect in a component of
    an electrical device, which transfers electric energy from one winding to
    another by electromagnetic induction, and gives a "go-no-go" type of
    indication.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, the checking for
    excessive surge characteristics such as voltage, impulse produced failures,
    faults in insulation of windings, failure of insulating liquid, corone
    discharges, excessive moisture content of insulation, etc.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not include the testing of transformer
    properties, e.g., the ratio of windings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for testing transformer properties.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 646 for checking the
    condition of a transformer.


CLS 324/548
TXT Capacitor:

    Subject matter under subclass 537 for checking the condition of a circuit
    element, consisting of at least two conducting surfaces separated by an
    insulator, and giving a "go-no-go" type of indication or checking the
    condition of any part thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for measuring capacitance quantitatively.

    509,    where an insulation failure in a circuit causes an unintentional
    leakage to ground.

    541,    for insulation fault in a multiconductor cable.

    544,    for an insulation defect in a single conductor.

    551,    for detecting a defect in a nonconducting material used in an
    electric circuit or component in general.

    557+,   for detecting defects in insulating material not used in an
    electric circuit or component.


CLS 324/549
TXT Resistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 537 for checking the condition of a circuit
    element, which is designed to offer a predetermined opposition to current
    flow, by giving a "go-no-go" type of indication.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for measuring resistance or conductance quantitatively.


CLS 324/550
TXT Fuse:

    Subject matter under subclass 537 for checking the condition of a circuit
    protective element designed to open the circuit when current exceeds a
    rated value, by giving a "go-no-go" indication.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    507,    for flashlights with fuse testing attachments.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 638 for detecting the
    condition of a fuse or circuit breaker.


CLS 324/551
TXT Insulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 537 for checking a defect in a nonconductive
    material which separates the conductor from an unintentional electrical
    path between another conductor or ground.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    509+,   for ground fault indication.

    541,    for insulating fault in a multiconductor cable.

    544,    for insulation fault in a single conductor.

    548,    for insulator faults in a capacitor.

    557+,   for detecting faults in insulating material not used in an electric
    circuit or component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electric, subclass 647 for checking the condition
    insulation.


CLS 324/552
TXT Bushing:

    Subject matter under subclass 551 where the insulation qualities of an
    insulating element which electrically isolates, and is generally used to
    support, a conductor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    557,    for insulation fault of a noncircuit element.


CLS 324/553
TXT Oil:

    Subject matter under subclass 551 wherein the insulating qualities of an
    oil used in electrical equipment is tested.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    547,    for transformers where insulating oils are used.

    548,    for capacitors where insulating oils are used.


CLS 324/554
TXT Sheet material:

    Subject matter under subclass 551 where sheets of insulating material used
    for electric circuits and in electric components are tested for insulation
    qualities.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    548,    for capacitor which use insulating sheet material as a dielectric.

    557+,   for testing qualities of insulating materials in general.


CLS 324/555
TXT Instruments and devices for fault testing:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 relating to apparatus and circuits for
    detecting defects in electric circuits or electric components.

    (1)     Note.  If the apparatus is specifically designed for a special
    application, for example, testing vehicle wiring, or for further example,
    testing a particular component, such as an armature, the special
    application and particular component test take priority for classification
    purposes.


CLS 324/556
TXT Having a lamp or light indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 555 where the apparatus includes a visual
    indicator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    503+,   for testers having light or sound indicators.

    538,    for electrical connectors having light indicators.

    540,    for multiconductor cable testers having light indicators.

    542,    for multicable conductor having light or sound indicators.


CLS 324/557
TXT FOR INSULATION FAULT OF NONCIRCUIT ELEMENT:

    Subject matter under the class definition where a defect in the insulation
    of a noncircuit element is determined.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    509+,   for a ground fault.

    541,    for an insulation fault in a multiconductor.

    544,    for an insulation fault in a single conductor cable.

    551+,   for an insulation fault in general.


CLS 324/558
TXT Where element moves while under test:

    Subject matter under subclass 557 where the noncircuit element under test
    moves while under test.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    513+,   where a circuit component moves while under test.


CLS 324/559
TXT Where a moving sensing electrode scans a stationary element under test:

    Subject matter under subclass 557 where a moving sensing electrode scans a
    stationary noncircuit element under test.


CLS 324/600
TXT IMPEDANCE, ADMITTANCE OR OTHER QUANTITIES REPRESENTATIVE OF ELECTRICAL
    STIMULUS/RESPONSE RELATIONSHIPS:Subject matter under the class definition
    wherein the measurement or test means determines a property (parameter)
    defined by (1) the flow, storage or change of current value in a circuit or
    substance; or (2) the relationship between two or more electrical values in
    a circuit or substance.

    (1)     Note.  The parameter represents typically the relationship between
    a stimulus and its response, and it usually is a constant at the time of
    measurement, but may take other values under different circumstances. The
    stimulus/response relationship frequently indicates the proportionality
    between two active electrical variable. For instance, a resistance is a
    ratio between the voltage across and the current along a resistive element.
    Either the current or the voltage can be the stimulus with the resultant
    resistance value always equal to the ratio of voltage to current. Other
    parameters expressable as a ratio are, for instance, the reflection
    coefficient, a ratio between reflected and incident complex power.
    Parameters not expressable as a ratio are also covered. For instance, the
    time lag in a network is a time differential between a signal arrival at
    the input and its appearance at the output.

    (2)     Note.  The subclass also includes sensing structures and devices
    when the contribute directly to the extraction of the parameter of interest.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass also includes measurement conditions such as
    using radiant energy effects, for example heating, in preparation for
    making the test.  For electric heating see Class 219.

    (4)     Note.  This subclass includes measuring temperature for the purpose
    of compensating for temperature variations during testing. For generic
    temperature measurement see Class 374.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76+,    for measuring and testing relating to the measurement of intangible
    electrical voltage or current or combinations thereof occurring in a
    nonspecific environment.

    459+,   for electrical measuring and testing using ionization effects.


CLS 324/601
TXT Calibration:
    Subject matter under subclass 600 wherein the measurement or test device is
    compared with a standard to determine its accuracy or to establish a
    corrected scale.

    (1)     Note.  Calibration differs from a measurement in that while being
    calibrated the testing instrument itself is measured for accuracy which in
    turn is used to measure some other electrical component, device or object.

    (2)     Note.  Calibration is limited herein to the measurement of
    instruments used for the subject matter under 600.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for calibrating electric meters.

    202,    for calibration of electrical measuring or testing apparatus used
    to determine parameters of magnetic circuits or substances.

    619,    for the measurement of quantities, or parameters relating to
    selectivity, e.g., tuning.


CLS 324/602
TXT With auxiliary means to condition stimulus/response signals:Subject matter
    under subclass 600 including other than measuring or testing means to
    prepare or process the stimulus/response signal to influence or improve the
    quality of the measuring or testing.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes means for discriminating, comparing
    or selecting particular signals or parts of a signal developed from a
    substance or circuit undergoing measurement or test. Also included are
    means for stimulating circuits or substances undergoing measurement or test.


CLS 324/603
TXT For excitation:
    Subject matter under subclass 602 wherein the auxiliary means generates a
    stimulus signal component.


CLS 324/604
TXT Including marker signal generator circuit:
    Subject matter under subclass 603 wherein the auxiliary means includes a
    circuit which injects one or more pips of specific frequency onto the
    response curve from the circuit or substance being measured or tested.


CLS 324/605
TXT For response signal evaluation or processing:
    Subject matter under subclass 602 wherein the auxiliary means is used to
    analyze the parameter being measured or tested.


CLS 324/606
TXT Including a signal comparison circuit:
    Subject matter under subclass 605 wherein the several quantities are
    matched for the purpose of determining their relative values to evaluate
    signal correlation, difference or compensation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    647,    for a comparison or difference signal evaluation or process is used
    in the measurement of transmitted or reflected energy distributions.

    656,    for a comparison or difference signal evaluation or process is used
    in inductive type measurements.

    665,    for a comparison or difference signal evaluation process is used in
    capacitive type measurements for water content of objects.

    672,    for a comparison or difference signal evaluation or process is used
    where a material or object forms part of a dielectric characteristic under
    measurement.

    705,    for a comparison or difference signal evaluation or process is used
    in resistive or conductive type measurements.


CLS 324/607
TXT Including a conversion (e.g., A->D or D->A) process:
    Subject matter under subclass 605 wherein an evaluation or process
    involving the measure and takes place as part of a conversion scheme.

    (1)     Note.  The most common conversions are the A->D and D->A types, but
    conversions to other forms of signal types are also included, such as pulse
    width ratio in a dual slope integrator, for example.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, appropriate subclasses for
    code converters.


CLS 324/608
TXT Including a ratiometric function:
    Subject matter under subclass 605 wherein the evaluation or process
    includes a value which represents the ratio of a first signal to a second
    signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    614,    for signal to noise ratio measurements.

    645,    for standing wave ratio measurements.

    653,    for determining the value of Q which designates the ratio of
    reactance of the resistance of an element or circuit.

    704,    for using a ratio in resistive or conductive type measurements.


CLS 324/609
TXT For sensing:
    Subject matter under subclass 602 including an auxiliary adaptation of the
    sensing portion of the circuit to improve or influence the quality of the
    measuring or testing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    715,    for sensing involving a particular probing technique in resistive
    or conductive type measurements.


CLS 324/610
TXT Including a bridge circuit:
    Subject matter under subclass 609 wherein the additional means for sensing
    includes a bridge circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    648,    for bridge circuits used in distributive type measurements.

    651,    for bridge circuits used in vector analysis.

    657,    for bridge circuits used in inductance measurements.

    666,    for bridge circuits used to determine water content with
    capacitance measurements.

    673,    for bridge measurements used to determine the dielectric
    characteristic of a material or object under test.

    680,    for bridge circuits used in capacitive measurements.

    706,    for bridge circuits used in resistive or conductive measurements.

    725,    for miscellaneous bridge circuits.


CLS 324/611
TXT Including a remote type circuit:
    Subject matter under subclass 609 wherein the additional means for sensing
    operates at a distance from the circuit or substance being measured or
    tested.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    669+,   for providing compensation in a capacitive measuring circuit which
    determines water content.

    684,    for providing compensation for errors in capacitive measuring
    circuits.

    720,    for providing compensation for errors in resistive or conductive
    measuring circuits.


CLS 324/612
TXT Parameter related to the reproduction or fidelity of a signal affected by a
    circuit under test:Subject matter under subclass 600 wherein the parameter
    relates to the accuracy with which a circuit reproduces at its output the
    essential characteristics of a signal impressed on its input.

    (1)     Note.  Some instances of parameters relating to signal reproduction
    or fidelity are:

    (a)     a transfer function characterizing a circuital behavior,

    (b)     the desired or undesired noise characteristics of a network;

    (c)     the effects of poor common mode rejection;

    (d)     the distortion of any type induced by a network;

    (e)     tuning characteristics, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 165+ for testing or calibrating radar
    systems.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 67, 115, 226, 295 for measuring or
    testing telecommunication transmitters or receivers.


CLS 324/613
TXT Noise:
    Subject matter under subclass 612 wherein the evaluated parameter is
    representative of an unwanted electrical disturbance or a spurious signal
    in the circuit or substance being measured or tested.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 62, 296, and 501 for noise
    reduction, prevention or elimination systems.


CLS 324/614
TXT Signal to noise ratio or noise figure:
    Subject matter under subclass 613 including means to measure the ratio
    between a signal reference level and the level of unwanted noise.

    (1)     Note.  Signal to noise ratio and noise figure are usually expressed
    in DB.

    (2)     Note.  The parameter of interest expresses the amount by which a
    component, device, or network under test differs from an ideal component,
    device, or network having no noise.


CLS 324/615
TXT Transfer function type characteristics:
    Subject matter under subclass 612 wherein the parameter tested is based on
    determining how a circuit responds to input energy at different frequencies.

    (1)     Note.  The relationship is in general expressable as a complex
    entity (descriptive of multiple quantities), like a matrix, a
    multidimensional plot or a set of distributions for spectral variables.

    (2)     Note.  Generalized transfer function Network Analyzers are
    classifiable in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    638,    for microwave network analyzers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 553 for
    transfer function evaluation involving substantial computation.


CLS 324/616
TXT Gain or attenuation:
    Subject matter under subclass 615 wherein the measured or tested parameter
    is based on the increase or decrease in voltage, current or power when a
    signal is transmitted from one point to another.


CLS 324/617
TXT Response time or phase delay:
    Subject matter under subclass 615 wherein the transmission characteristic
    of the signal being evaluated relates to transit time or phase changes.


CLS 324/618
TXT Transient response or transient recovery time (e.g., damping):Subject
    matter under subclass 615 wherein the response of a circuit to an impulse
    or other instantaneous excitation is measured or tested.


CLS 324/619
TXT Selective type characteristics:
    Subject matter under subclass 615 including measuring or testing
    characteristics which determine the extent to which the desired signal can
    be distinguished from disturbances or other signals, e.g., tuning.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 47+ for circuits where an output is present only at a
    predetermined input signal frequency.


CLS 324/620
TXT Distortion:
    Subject matter under subclass 612 including measuring or testing for
    undesired changes in the waveform of a signal being evaluated.

    (1)     Note.  Distortion is different from noise in that the effects are
    in general predictable as opposed to noise, where there is no set pattern.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 551+ for unwanted signal suppression.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 63, 295+, and 501 for distortion
    prevention or reduction systems.


CLS 324/621
TXT Envelope delay:
    Subject matter under subclass 620 including measuring or testing the rate
    of change of phase shift with respect to frequency.

    (1)     Note.  The departure from a straight line defines the lack of
    uniformity in the delay for different frequencies.


CLS 324/622
TXT Phase:
    Subject matter under subclass 620 including measuring or testing the lack
    of phase linearity with respect to other signal variables.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83,     for measuring or testing phase comparison in a nonspecific
    environment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 1+ for phase discriminating.


CLS 324/623
TXT Harmonic:
    Subject matter under subclass 620 wherein the input signal is sinusoidal
    and the output signal which is a multiple of the input signal is measured
    or tested.


CLS 324/624
TXT Intermodulation:
    Subject matter under subclass 620 including measuring or testing
    nonlinearity, characterized by the appearance of frequencies in the output
    equal to the sum and differences of integral multiples of the component
    frequencies present in the input signal.


CLS 324/625
TXT Dissymmetry or asymmetry:
    Subject matter under subclass 620 including measuring or testing a lack of
    signal fidelity due to imperfect matching of parameter values.

    (1)     Note.  Some examples of dissymmetry include common mode rejection,
    hybrid directivity, etc.

    (2)     Note.  This does not include distributive lines matching impedance
    evaluations. Dissymmetry is not necessarily a nonlinearity.


CLS 324/626
TXT Nonlinearity:
    Subject matter under subclass 620 including the measuring or testing of
    distortion that occurs when the output does not rise and fall in direct in
    proportion to the input.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 334+ for circuits where the output is a nonlinear
    function of the input.


CLS 324/627
TXT Shielding effectiveness (SE):
    Subject matter under subclass 612 including measuring or testing the
    relative reduction of radiated electromagnetic energy levels caused by the
    use of an enclosure either to contain or exclude the energy.


CLS 324/628
TXT Circuit interference (e.g., crosstalk) measurement:
    Subject matter under subclass 627 for determining the amount of undesired
    coupling between two conductors in proximate relationship.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communication, subclass 6 for measurement of crosstalk
    between two telephone lines by measuring the effect on a line of a tone
    applied to an adjacent line.


CLS 324/629
TXT Distributive type parameters:
    Subject matter under subclass 600 wherein the measured or tested parameter
    cannot be taken as being concentrated at any one point in the circuit or
    substance.


CLS 324/630
TXT Plural diverse parameters:
    Subject matter under subclass 629 wherein more than one type of parameter
    is measured.


CLS 324/631
TXT Using wave polarization (e.g., field rotation):
    Subject matter under subclass 629 wherein the test substance has properties
    with directional preferences (i.e., anisotropy).

    (1)     Note.  An anisotropic substance is one that exhibits different
    properties when tested along different directions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 364+ for analogous
    testing or measuring using visible radiation.


CLS 324/632
TXT Using particular field coupling type (e.g., fringing field):Subject matter
    under subclass 629 wherein a sensor located in close proximity to a
    substance under test, produces an electric field which links or couples the
    substance under test to the sensor.

    (1)     Note.  The substance under test typically influences the
    propagation characteristics of the testing sensor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    687+,   for fringing field coupling type sensing structures in lumped
    capacitive configurations.

    688,    for use of a guard electrode to improve sensing.


CLS 324/633
TXT Using resonant frequency:
    Subject matter under subclass 629 including a circuit for measuring the
    frequency at which a measured substance will respond with maximum amplitude
    when subject to an external sinusoidal wave of a particular frequency.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    652,    for measuring a lumped type resonant circuit parameters.

    655,    for using a resonant circuit in inductive measurements.

    658,    for using a tuned or resonant circuit in capacitive measuring
    circuits.

    675,    for using a tuned or resonant circuit in capacitive measuring
    circuits.

    708,    for using a tuned or resonant circuit in resistive or conductive
    measuring circuits.


CLS 324/634
TXT To determine water content:
    Subject matter under subclass 633 wherein the analyzed parameter of a
    substance under resonant test is moisture content.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    640,    for determining water content by using electric energy transmitted
    through a substance under test.

    643,    for determining water content by using electric energy reflected
    from a substance under test.

    658     and 667, for determining moisture content of a substance using a
    resonant capacitive sensing device or apparatus.

    694+,   for determining moisture content of a substance using a resistive
    or conductive type measurement device or apparatus.

    696,    for resistive probe type structure used to determine water content.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 73+ for moisture control or
    absorption characteristics of material; and subclasses 29.02+ for
    hygrometers.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 61.04 for
    liquid responsive switches.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 35, for moisture sensing resistors.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 602+ for moisture condition
    responsive indicating systems.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 178 and
    286 for humidity responsive circuits and capacitors.


CLS 324/635
TXT To determine dimension (e.g., distance or thickness):
    Subject matter under subclass 633 wherein the size or distance of a
    substance from a reference point is measured using resonance effects.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    644,    for measuring a dimension using transmitted or reflected energy
    distributions.

    662     and 671, for dimensional measurement by using capacitive-type
    measurements.

    699,    for using conductivity effects to determine the dimensional
    characteristics of an object.

    716,    for dimensional measurement by using resistive or conductive type
    measurements.


CLS 324/636
TXT With a resonant cavity:
    Subject matter under subclass 633 including a resonant circuit type wherein
    current is distributed on an inner surface of a closed chamber.


CLS 324/637
TXT Using transmitted or reflected microwaves:
    Subject matter under subclass 629 wherein distributive type parameters
    associated with an object or substance are measured or tested using
    transmitted or returned microwaves.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 250, Radiant Energy, for microwave absorption wave
    meters for measuring microwave power, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), for object detection, distance or direction using
    transmitted or reflected radio waves.


CLS 324/638
TXT Scattering type parameters (e.g., complex reflection coefficient):Subject
    matter under subclass 637 including the measurement of characteristics at
    network ports which are complex ratios representing the amplitude and phase
    of incident and reflected power in traveling waves.

    (1)     Note.  Measurements of voltage and current become more difficult as
    frequency increases, therefore directional power ratio measurements,
    expressed as scattering parameters, are used to characterize objects at
    high frequencies.

    (2)     Note.  Microwave network analyzers belong in this subclass. Low
    frequency network analyzers belong in subclass 650 or subclass 615.


CLS 324/639
TXT Where energy is transmitted through a test substance:
    Subject matter under subclass 637 including measurement of a microwave that
    passes through an object or substance.


CLS 324/640
TXT To determine water content:
    Subject matter under subclass 639 for determining the water content of the
    test substance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    634,    for determination of water content by measuring distributive type
    parameters using resonant frequency.

    643,    for determination of water content by using electric energy
    reflected from a substance under test.

    664+,   for determination of water content by using capacitive type
    measurement.

    689,    for determination of moisture content of a substance by using a
    capacitive sensing device or apparatus.

    694+,   for determination of moisture content of a substance using a
    resistive or conductive type measurement device or apparatus.

    696,    for resistive probe structure used to determine water content.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 73+ for moisture control or
    absorption characteristics of material; and subclasses 335+ for hygrometers.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 61.04 for
    liquid responsive switches.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 35, for moisture sensing resistors.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 602+ for moisture condition
    responsive indicating systems.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 178 and
    286 for humidity responsive circuits and capacitors.


CLS 324/641
TXT To determine insertion loss:
    Subject matter under subclass 639 wherein measurement of the change
    provides information regarding the loss of power between two points on an
    object under test.


CLS 324/642
TXT Where energy is reflected (e.g., reflectometry):
    Subject matter under subclass 637 including measurement of the returned
    signal energy from a high frequency wave that strikes the surface of a test
    object, the junction of two media or a discontinuity in the medium it is
    traveling in.


CLS 324/643
TXT To determine water content:
    Subject matter under subclass 642 including measurement of the test
    substance water content.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    634,    for determination of water content by measuring distributive type
    parameters using resonant frequency.

    640,    for determination of water content by using microwave energy
    transmitted through a substance under test.

    664,    for determination of water content by using capacitive measurement.

    689,    for determination of moisture content of a substance using a
    capacitive sensing device or apparatus.

    694+,   for determination of moisture content of a substance using a
    resistive or conductive type measurement device or apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 73+ for moisture content or
    absorption characteristics of material; subclasses 335+ for hygrometers.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuits Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.04+ for
    liquid responsive switches.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 35 for moisture sensing resistors.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 602+ for moisture condition
    responsive systems.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 78 and 286
    for humidity responsive circuits and capacitors.


CLS 324/644
TXT To determine dimension (e.g., distance or thickness):
    Subject matter under subclass 642 including measurement of the physical
    characteristics of the test substance pertaining to its size or its
    distance from a reference point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    635,    for dimensional measurement of a test object by measuring the
    object's distributive type parameters using resonance.

    662     and 671, for dimensional measurement using capacitive-type
    measurements.

    716,    for dimensional measurement by using resistive or conductive type
    measurements.


CLS 324/645
TXT Having standing wave pattern:
    Subject matter under subclass 642 including measurement of the spatial
    distribution of transmitted or reflected energy on a transmission line
    formed by two sets of waves traveling in opposite direction and
    characterized by the presence of a number of points of successive maxima
    and minima in the distribution curves.

    (1)     Note.  A standing wave is also called a stationary wave and it is a
    wave disturbance which is not progressive, i.e., one in which any component
    of the field can be specified as a function of position multiplied by a
    sinusoidal function of time.

    (2)     Note.  Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR), is equal to the ratio of
    the characteristic impedance of the line to the impedance of the load
    connected to the output end of the line.

    (3)     Note.  Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) = (1+p)/(1-p) where p is
    the reflection coefficient.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    608,    for signal evaluation or processing techniques which include a
    ratio function.


CLS 324/646
TXT To determine reflection coefficient:
    Subject matter under subclass 642 including measurement of the complex
    (vector or phasor) ratio between the fields associated with the reflected
    and incident waves.


CLS 324/647
TXT Using a comparison or difference circuit:
    Subject matter under subclass 629 wherein distributive type parameters are
    measured by correlating two or more electrical quantities.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    606,    for signal evaluation or processing including comparison or
    difference techniques.

    665,    for measuring lumped type parameters by capacitive type
    measurements for water content including comparison or difference circuits.

    672,    for measuring lumped type parameters of an object or material
    including its dielectric characteristic by utilizing comparison or
    difference circuits.

    679,    for measuring lumped type parameters by capacitive type
    measurements with a comparison or difference circuit.

    705,    for measuring lumped type parameters by resistive or conductive
    type measurement including comparison or difference circuits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 1+ for comparison evaluation circuits.


CLS 324/648
TXT With a bridge circuit:
    Subject matter under subclass 647 including a multi-terminal network
    arranged so that when an electromotive force is present in one branch, the
    response of a suitable detecting device may be zeroed by suitable
    adjustment of the electrical constants of still other branches.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    610,    for measuring or testing electrical characteristics or parameters
    using bridge circuits for sensing electrical quantities.

    725,    for miscellaneous bridge circuits used in measuring or testing
    electrical characteristics or parameters.


CLS 324/649
TXT Lumped type parameters:
    Subject matter under subclass 600 including the measuring or testing of any
    circuit parameter, which for the purposes of analysis, can be considered to
    represent combined or single inductance, capacitance, resistance, etc.,
    throughout the frequency range of interest.

    (1)     Note.  Typically a "lumped" electrical parameter such as impedance
    is an impedance concentrated in a component, as distinct from being an
    impedance due to stray or distributed effects.


CLS 324/650
TXT Using phasor or vector analysis:
    Subject matter under subclass 649 including utilization of a quantity that
    has both magnitude and direction.

    (1)     Note.  The quantity may represent a parameter such as Z, which
    relates to the total opposition (i.e., resistance and reactance) a device,
    component or network offers to the flow of alternating current at a given
    frequency. Some typical parameters evaluated here are impedance, admittance
    or immittance. Low frequency network analyzers belong in this Subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Complex impedance network analyzers belong in this Subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    615,    for generalized type of transfer function parameters.

    638,    distributive type measurements of scattering type parameters
    representable as complex quantities in the microwave range (microwave
    network analyzers).


CLS 324/651
TXT With a bridge circuit:
    Subject matter under subclass 650 including a multi-terminal network used
    in a comparison or balancing configuration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    610,    for measuring or testing electrical characteristics or parameters
    using bridge circuits for sensing electrical quantities.

    648,    for measuring or testing distributive type parameters utilizing
    bridge circuits.

    657,    666, 673, 680, and 706, for measurement of lumped type parameters
    utilizing bridge circuits.

    725,    for miscellaneous bridge circuits used in measuring or testing
    electrical characteristics or parameters.


CLS 324/652
TXT Of a resonant circuit:
    Subject matter under subclass 649 including measuring or testing a circuit
    which contains both inductance and capacitance and is tuned to resonate at
    a certain frequency.

    (1)     Note.  A resonant condition exists when an inductor and capacitor
    store energy and pass the same energy back and forth. The rate at which
    this occurs is called the resonant frequency. At the resonant frequency the
    circuit is neither inductive nor capacitive, but acts as a large value of
    resistance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    633+,   for distributive type parameter measuring or testing utilizing
    resonant frequency determination.

    655,    for lumped type parameter measuring or testing utilizing inductive
    type measurement which involves a resonant circuit.

    668,    675, 682, and 708, for lumped type parameter measuring or testing
    which involves a resonant circuit.


CLS 324/653
TXT For figure of merit or Q value:
    Subject matter under subclass 649 including the determination of the ratio
    of the maximum energy stored in a cycle to the energy dissipated per cycle.


CLS 324/654
TXT Using inductive type measurement:
    Subject matter under subclass 649 including measuring a property of a
    device, element or circuit which opposes any change in the rate of current
    flow associated with a magnetic field.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 870.31+ for an inductive
    transmitter.


CLS 324/655
TXT Including a tuned or resonant circuit:
    Subject matter under subclass 654 including measuring or testing a circuit
    which contains both inductance and capacitance and is tuned to resonate at
    a certain frequency.

    (1)     Note.  A resonant condition exists when an inductor and capacitor
    store energy and pass the same energy back and forth. The rate at which
    this occurs is called the resonant frequency. At the resonant frequency the
    circuit is neither inductive nor capacitive, but exhibits resistance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    633+,   for distributive type parameter measuring or testing utilizing
    resonant frequency determination.

    652,    for lumped type parameter measuring or testing by utilizing
    reactance or susceptance measurement which involves a resonant circuit.

    668,    675, 682, and 708, for lumped type parameter measuring or testing
    which involves a resonant circuit.


CLS 324/656
TXT Including a comparison or difference circuit:
    Subject matter under subclass 654 wherein lumped type inductive values are
    measured by correlating two or more electrical quantities.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    606,    for signal evaluation or processing including comparison or
    difference techniques.

    647+,   for measuring distributive type parameters by utilizing comparison
    or difference circuits.

    665+,   for measuring lumped type parameters by capacitive type
    measurements for water content including comparison or difference circuits.

    672+,   for measuring lumped type parameters of an object or material
    including its dielectric characteristic by utilizing comparison or
    difference circuits.

    705+,   for measuring lumped type parameters by resistive or conductive
    type measurement including comparison or difference circuits.


CLS 324/657
TXT Using a bridge circuit:
    Subject matter under subclass 656 including a multi-terminal network using
    comparison or balance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    725,    for miscellaneous bridge circuits used in measuring or testing
    electrical characteristics or parameters.


CLS 324/658
TXT Using capacitive type measurement:
    Subject matter under subclass 649 including the measuring of a property of
    an element, device or circuit which relates to its capacity to store
    electrical energy by means of an electric field.

    (1)     Note.  Capacitors store energy in their electric fields while
    inductors store energy in their magnetic fields.

    (2)     Note.  There are three factors that govern a capacitor's
    capacitance:

    a.      the area (A) of parallel plates facing each other;

    b.      the distance (D) between parallel plates; and

    c.              the dielectric constant (E) of the insulating material
    between the plates.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 870.37 for a capacitive
    transmitter.


CLS 324/659
TXT With loss characteristic evaluation:
    Subject matter under subclass 658 where the parasitic energy dissipation
    associated with the capacitance is measured as part of the test.

    (1)     Note.  The loss is sometimes expressed as the percentage of power
    dissipated with respect to the reactive power stored by the capacitance.
    Another measure is given by the tangent of the angle between reactive and
    total current components.


CLS 324/660
TXT With variable electrode area:
    Subject matter under subclass 658 wherein the area of a capacitor's plate
    (i.e., electrode) is changed in effecting the measurement.


CLS 324/661
TXT With variable distance between capacitor electrodes:
    Subject matter under subclass 658 wherein the space between a capacitor's
    parallel plates is changed in effecting the measurement.


CLS 324/662
TXT To determine dimension (e.g., thickness or distance):
    Subject matter under subclass 661 wherein the physical characteristics of
    an object pertaining to its size or distance from a reference point are
    measured.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    635,    for dimensional measurement by using resonant frequency
    measurements.

    644,    for measuring a dimension using transmitted or reflected energy
    distributions.

    671,    for dimensional measurement on a dielectric object by using
    capacitive type measurements.

    716,    for dimensional measurement by using resistive or conductive type
    measurements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communication:  Electrical, subclass 870.37 for capacitive type
    dimensional measurements where a significant activity of signal
    transmission occurs after the measurement is performed.


CLS 324/663
TXT Where a material or object forms part of the dielectric being
    measured:Subject matter under subclass 658 including measurement of the
    insulating material between the two plates of a capacitor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 304 for using capacitance to
    measure level.


CLS 324/664
TXT To determine water content:
    Subject matter under subclass 663 including measurement of the material or
    object water content.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    634,    for determination of water content by measuring resonant response
    to a microwave excitation.

    640     and 643, for determination of water content by using microwave
    energy propagated through a substance under test.

    643,    for determination of water content by measuring distributive type
    parameters using reflected energy.

    689,    for determination of moisture content of a substance using a
    capacitive sensing device or apparatus.

    694+,   for determination of moisture content of a substance using a
    resistive or conductive type measurement device or apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 73+ for moisture control or
    absorption characteristics of material; and subclasses 29.02+ for
    hygrometers.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 61.04 for
    liquid responsive switches.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 35, for moisture sensing resistors.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 602+, for moisture
    condition responsive indicating systems.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 178 and
    286 for humidity responsive circuits and capacitors.


CLS 324/665
TXT By comparison or difference circuit:
    Subject matter under subclass 664 including means to match two or more
    electrical quantities for the purpose of determining their relative values
    in evaluating the water content of a material or object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    606,    for signal evaluation or processing including comparison or
    difference techniques.

    647+,   for measuring distributive type parameters by utilizing comparison
    or difference circuits.

    656+,   for measuring lumped type parameters by inductive type measurements
    including comparison or difference circuits.

    672+,   for measuring lumped type parameters of an object or material
    including its dielectric characteristic by utilizing comparison or
    difference circuits.

    705+,   for measuring lumped type parameters by resistive or conductive
    type measurement including comparison or difference circuits.


CLS 324/666
TXT Including a bridge circuit:
    Subject matter under subclass 665 including a multi-terminal network
    capable of balance or comparison.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    610,    for measuring or testing electrical characteristics or parameters
    using bridge circuits for sensing electrical quantities.

    648,    for measuring or testing distributive type parameters utilizing
    bridge circuits.

    651,    657, 673, 680, and 706, for measurement of lumped type parameters
    utilizing bridge circuits.

    725,    for miscellaneous bridge circuits used in measuring or testing
    electrical characteristics or parameters.


CLS 324/667
TXT By frequency signal response, change or processing circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 664 including circuit means to measure using
    a function of frequency signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    674+,   for measuring or testing lumped type parameters by capacitive type
    measurements including dielectric characteristic measurements by using
    frequency signal response, change or processing circuitry.

    681+,   for measuring or testing lumped type parameters by capacitive type
    measurements using frequency signal response, change or processing
    circuitry.

    707+,   for measuring or testing lumped type parameters by resistive or
    conductive type measurements using frequency signal response, change or
    processing circuitry.


CLS 324/668
TXT Including a tuned or resonant circuit:
    Subject matter under subclass 667 including a circuit which typically
    contains both inductance and capacitance and is tuned to resonate at a
    certain frequency.

    (1)     Note.  A resonant condition exists when an inductor and capacitor
    store energy and pass the same energy back and forth. The rate at which
    this occurs is called the resonant frequency. At the resonant frequency the
    circuit is neither inductive nor capacitive, but exhibits resistance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    633+,   for distributive type parameter measuring or testing utilizing
    resonant frequency determination.

    652,    for lumped type parameter measuring or testing by utilizing
    reactance or susceptance measurement which involves a resonant circuit.

    655,    675, 682, and 708, for lumped type parameter measuring or testing
    which involves a resonant circuit.


CLS 324/669
TXT With compensation means:
    Subject matter under subclass 664 including means to offset errors or
    undesirable characteristics in the measurement or test apparatus or process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    684+,   for measuring or testing lumped type parameters by capacitive
    measurement with compensation.

    720+,   for measuring or testing lumped type parameters by resistive or
    conductive measurement with compensation.


CLS 324/670
TXT For temperature variations:
    Subject matter under subclass 669 including the errors or undesirable
    characteristics caused by an increase or decrease in ambient temperature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    685,    for measuring or testing lumped type parameters by capacitive type
    measurement with compensation for temperature variation.

    721,    for measuring or testing lumped type parameters by resistive or
    conductive type measurement with compensation for temperature variation.


CLS 324/671
TXT To determine dimension (e.g., dielectric thickness):
    Subject matter under subclass 663 wherein the physical characteristics of a
    dielectric object under test pertaining to its size or distance from a
    reference point are measured.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    635,    for dimensional measurement by using resonant frequency
    measurements at microwave frequencies.

    644,    for measuring a dimension using transmitted or reflected microwave
    energy distributions.

    662,    for dimensional measurement by using capacitive type measurements.

    716,    for dimensional measurement by using resistive or conductive type
    measurements.


CLS 324/672
TXT By comparison or difference circuit:
    Subject matter under subclass 663 including means to match two or more
    electrical quantities for the purpose of determining their relative values
    in evaluating the dielectric characteristic of a material or object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    606,    for signal evaluation or processing including comparison or
    difference techniques.

    647+,   for measuring distributive type parameters by utilizing comparison
    or difference circuits.

    656+,   for measuring lumped type parameters by inductive type measurements
    including comparison or difference circuits.

    655+,   for measuring lumped type parameters of an object or material
    including its dielectric characteristic by utilizing comparison or
    difference circuits.

    679+,   for measuring lumped type parameters by capacitive type measurement
    circuitry including a comparison of difference circuit.

    705+,   for measuring lumped type parameters by resistive or conductive
    type measurement including comparison or difference circuits.


CLS 324/673
TXT Including a bridge circuit:
    Subject matter under subclass 672 including a multi-terminal network
    capable of comparison or balance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    610,    for measuring or testing electrical characteristics or parameters
    using bridge circuits for sensing electrical quantities.

    648,    for measuring or testing distributive type parameters utilizing
    bridge circuits.

    651,    657, 666, 680, and 706, for measurement of lumped type parameters
    utilizing bridge circuits.

    725,    for miscellaneous bridge circuits used in measuring or testing
    electrical characteristics or parameters.


CLS 324/674
TXT By frequency signal response, change or processing circuit:
    Subject matter under subclass 663 including circuit means to determine or
    alter a signal as a function of frequency.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    605,    for measuring or testing electrical characteristics or parameters
    using a particular technique for frequency signal evaluation or processing.

    667+,   for measuring or testing lumped type parameters by capacitive type
    measurements including dielectric characteristic measurement to determine
    water content of an object or material by using frequency signal response,
    change or processing circuitry.

    681+,   for measuring or testing lumped type parameters by capacitive type
    measurements using frequency signal response, change or processing
    circuitry.

    707+,   for measuring or testing lumped type parameters by resistive or
    conductive type measurements using frequency signal response, change or
    processing circuitry.


CLS 324/675
TXT Including a tuned or resonant circuit:
    Subject matter under subclass 674 including a circuit which typically
    contains both inductance and capacitance and is tuned to resonate at a
    certain frequency.

    (1)     Note.  A resonant condition exists when a inductor and capacitor
    store energy and pass the same energy back and forth. The rate at which
    this occurs is called the resonant frequency. At the resonant frequency the
    circuit is neither inductive nor capacitive, but exhibits resistance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    633+,   for distributive type parameter measuring or testing utilizing
    resonant frequency determination.

    652,    for lumped type parameter measuring or testing by utilizing
    reactance or susceptance measurement which involves a resonant circuit.

    655,    668, 682, and 708, for lumped type parameter measuring or testing
    which involves a resonant circuit.


CLS 324/676
TXT With pulse signal processing circuit:
    Subject matter under subclass 658 including circuit means utilizing a pulse
    signal time domain response or shaping.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    710+,   for measuring or testing lumped type parameters using resistive or
    conductive type measurements which include pulse signal processing.


CLS 324/677
TXT Including R/C time constant circuit:
    Subject matter under subclass 676 including a time-determining network of
    resistors and capacitors in which the time constant is defined as
    resistance times capacitance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    711,    for measuring or testing lumped type parameters using resistive or
    conductive type measurements which include pulse signal processing with R/C
    time constant circuitry.


CLS 324/678
TXT Including charge or discharge cycle circuit:
    Subject matter under subclass 676 including circuit means to store or
    release electrical energy periodically.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    320,    Electricity:  Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    subclasses 166+ for charging or discharging a capacitor, per se.


CLS 324/679
TXT With comparison or difference circuit:
    Subject matter under subclass 658 including means to match two or more
    electrical quantities for the purpose of determining their relative values.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    606,    for signal evaluation or processing including comparison or
    difference techniques.

    647+,   for measuring distributive type parameters by utilizing comparison
    or difference circuits.

    656+,   for measuring lumped type parameters by inductive type measurements
    including comparison or difference circuits.

    665+,   for measuring lumped type parameters of an object or material
    including its dielectric characteristic by utilizing comparison or
    difference circuits.

    672+,   for measuring lumped type parameters by capacitive type measurement
    including dielectric characteristic measurement with a comparison or
    difference circuit.

    705+,   for measuring lumped type parameters by resistive or conductive
    type measurement including comparison or difference circuits.


CLS 324/680
TXT Including a bridge circuit:
    Subject matter under subclass 679 wherein the comparison or difference
    circuit means includes a multi-terminal network capable of balance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    610,    for measuring or testing electrical characteristics or parameters
    using bridge circuits for sensing electrical quantities.

    648,    for measuring or testing distributive type parameters utilizing
    bridge circuit.

    651,    657, 666, 673, and 706, for measurement of lumped type parameters
    utilizing bridge circuits.

    725,    for miscellaneous bridge circuits used in measuring or testing
    electrical characteristics or parameters.


CLS 324/681
TXT With frequency signal response, change or processing circuit:Subject matter
    under subclass 658 including circuit means to determine or alter a signal
    as a function of frequency.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    667+,   for measuring or testing lumped type parameters by capacitive type
    measurements including dielectric characteristic measurement to determine
    water content of an object or material by using frequency signal response,
    change or processing circuitry.

    674+,   for measuring or testing lumped type parameters by capacitive type
    measurements utilizing frequency signal response, change or processing
    circuitry.

    707+,   for measuring or testing lumped type parameters by resistive or
    conductive type measurements using frequency signal response, change or
    processing circuitry.


CLS 324/682
TXT Including a tuned or resonant circuit:
    Subject matter under subclass 681 including a circuit which typically
    contains both inductance and capacitance and is tuned to resonate at a
    certain frequency.

    (1)     Note.  A resonant condition exists when an inductor and a capacitor
    store energy and pass the same energy back and forth. The rate at which
    this occurs is called the resonant frequency. At the resonant frequency the
    circuit is neither inductive nor capacitive, but exhibits resistance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    633+,   for distributive type parameter measuring or testing utilizing
    resonant frequency determination.

    652,    for lumped typed parameter measuring or testing by utilizing
    reactance or susceptance measurement which involves a resonant circuit.

    655,    668, 675, and 708, for lumped type parameter measuring or testing
    which involves a resonant circuit.


CLS 324/683
TXT With phase signal processing circuit:
    Subject matter under subclass 658 including circuit means responsive to the
    phase of an electrical signal.

    (1)     Note.  When the phase sensitive detection is used to extract
    quadrature components and compose a phasor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    650+    and 709, for measuring or testing lumped type parameters by
    resistance or conductance measurement using phase signal processing.


CLS 324/684
TXT With compensation means:
    Subject matter under subclass 658 including means to offset errors or
    undesirable characteristics in the measurement or test apparatus or process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    669+,   for measuring or testing lumped type parameters by capacitive
    measurement apparatus or process including dielectric characteristic
    measurement of a material or object for water content and compensation
    means.

    720+,   for measuring or testing lumped type parameters by resistive or
    conductive measurement with compensation.


CLS 324/685
TXT For temperature variation:
    Subject matter under subclass 684 including means to offset effects caused
    by changes in the ambient temperature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    670,    for measuring or testing lumped type parameters by capacitive type
    measurement including dielectric characteristic measurement with
    compensation for temperature variations.

    721,    for measuring or testing lumped type parameters by resistive or
    conductive type measurement with compensation for temperature variations.


CLS 324/686
TXT With capacitive sensing means:
    Subject matter under subclass 658 including probing or transducing means
    which utilizes a capacitor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 280+ for
    electrostatic capacitors responsive to external conditions.


CLS 324/687
TXT Having fringing field coupling:
    Subject matter under subclass 686 wherein the sensing means is located in
    close proximity to a test object and produces an electric field which links
    or couples the test object to itself, with a change in the electric field
    caused by the object being utilized to determine a characteristic of the
    test object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    632,    for measuring or testing distributive type parameters using field
    coupling apparatus.


CLS 324/688
TXT Including a guard or ground electrode:
    Subject matter under subclass 686 including a conducting element of offset
    or eliminate undesirable electrical effects.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    611,    for spureous and parasitic signals handling in a sensor remote from
    the detecting circuit.


CLS 324/689
TXT To determine water content:
    Subject matter under subclass 686 including measurement of the water
    content of a material of object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    640,    634 and 643, for determination of water content by using microwaves
    transmitted through a substance under test.

    664+,   for determination of water content by measuring lumped type
    parameters which includes dielectric characteristic measurement of a
    material or object.

    694+,   for determination of moisture content of a substance using a
    resistive or conductive type measurement device or apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 73+ for moisture control or
    absorption characteristics of material; and subclasses 29.02+ for
    hygrometers.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 61.04 for
    liquid responsive switches.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 35 for moisture sensing resistors.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 602+ for moisture condition
    responsive indicating systems.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 178 and
    206 for humidity responsive circuits and capacitors.


CLS 324/690
TXT Including a probe type structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 686 wherein the capacitive sensing means has
    a particular shape or configuration to improve its transducing or pickup
    function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    724,    for probe used in measuring lumped type parameters by resistive or
    conductive type measurements.


CLS 324/691
TXT Using resistance or conductance measurement:
    Subject matter under subclass 649 including measuring that property of an
    object which impedes current and results in the dissipation of power in the
    form of heat, or the property that is the factor by which the square of an
    instantaneous voltage must be multiplied to give the corresponding energy
    lost by dissipation as heat or other permanent radiation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    439+,   for using a conductivity device to determine electrolytic
    properties.

    549,    for detecting resistor faults.


CLS 324/692
TXT With living organism condition determination using conductivity
    effects:Subject matter under subclass 691 including means to evaluate
    properties of a living organism by measuring or testing its ability to
    conduct electrical current.


CLS 324/693
TXT With object or substance characteristic determination using conductivity
    effects:Subject matter under subclass 691 including means to evaluate the
    properties of an object by measuring or testing its ability to conduct
    current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    639+,   for electrical means where energy is transmitted through an object
    to determine characteristics of the object.


CLS 324/694
TXT To determine water content:
    Subject matter under subclass 693 including measurement of the water
    content of the object or substance being tested.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    634,    for determination of water content by measuring distributive type
    parameters using resonant energy.

    640,    for determination of water content by using microwave energy
    transmitted through a substance under test.

    643,    for determination of water content by measuring distributive type
    parameters using reflected energy.

    664+,   for determination of water content by measuring lumped type
    parameters which includes dielectric characteristic measurement of a
    material or object.

    689,    for determination of water content of a substance using capacitive
    sensing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 73+ for moisture control or
    absorption characteristics of material; and subclasses 335+ for hygrometers.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 61.04 for
    liquid responsive switches.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 35 for moisture sensing resistors.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 602+ for moisture condition
    responsive indicating systems.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 178 and
    206 for humidity responsive circuits and capacitors.


CLS 324/695
TXT Where the object moves while under test:
    Subject matter under subclass 694 wherein the test substance is in motion
    during the water content determination.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    513+,   for locating faults in moving elements.

    701,    for utilizing conductivity effects to determine the properties of a
    moving object, per se.


CLS 324/696
TXT With a probe structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 694 with a particular sensing configuration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    724,    for conductivity effects detectors having a probe type structure,
    per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 304 for liquid level measurements.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 280+ for
    condition responsive capacitors.


CLS 324/697
TXT For interface:
    Subject matter under subclass 693 including means to evaluate the point or
    points of contact between different substances.


CLS 324/698
TXT To determine oil qualities:
    Subject matter under subclass 693 including means to evaluate the
    properties of a fluid containing petroleum or its derivatives (i.e.,
    lubricants).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 53.05+ for lubricant testing, per
    se.


CLS 324/699
TXT To determine dimension (e.g., distance or thickness):
    Subject matter under subclass 693 including means to evaluate alterations
    in the physical shape of an object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    635,    for dimensional measurement by using resonant frequency
    measurements.

    644,    for measuring a dimension using transmitted or reflected energy
    distributions.

    662,    for dimensional measurement by using capacitive type measurements.

    671,    for dimensional measurement by using dielectric characteristic
    measurements.

    716,    for dimensional measurements by using resistive or conductive type
    measurements.


CLS 324/700
TXT Including corrosion or erosion:
    Subject matter under subclass 699 including means to evaluate the addition
    or loss of material, to or from a substance, due to environmental
    conditions.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass covers only those corrosion evaluation devices
    where the impedance of a sensor is measured. For other types of corrosion
    evaluation, search the art listed below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71.2    for electrical measuring of erosion not limited to a resistive or
    conductive measurement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 86 embrittlement or erosion testing.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 404 for corrosion
    analysis and testing.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 53 for corrosion testers.


CLS 324/701
TXT Where the object moves while under test:
    Subject matter under subclass 693 wherein the test object is in motion
    during the evaluation of the characteristics of the object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    513+,   for locating faults in moving elements.

    695,    for utilizing conductivity effects to determine the water content
    of a moving object.


CLS 324/702
TXT With radiant energy effects:
    Subject matter under subclass 691 including means to evaluate the
    properties of an object, utilizing a source of radiant energy as a
    preparation to the test.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include testing the source of
    radiation nor the product of that source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71.3    for measuring the properties of beam of particles.

    501,    for using radiant energy to test for faults (e.g., continuity of a
    conductor line).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 336+ for measurements of several
    spectral types of radiation. Also see the lines notes in the main
    definitions of this class which pertain to Class 250.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 432+ for light intensity
    measurements.


CLS 324/703
TXT Including heating:
    Subject matter under subclass 702 wherein the radiant energy increases the
    temperature of the object being evaluated.


CLS 324/704
TXT With ratio determination:
    Subject matter under subclass 691 including evaluating means which utilize
    a value which represents the ratio of a first signal to a second signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    608,    for signal evaluation or processing techniques which include a
    ratio function.

    614,    for signal to noise ratio measurements.

    653,    for determining the value of Q which designates the ratio of
    reactance to resistance of an element or circuit.


CLS 324/705
TXT With comparison or difference circuit:
    Subject matter under subclass 691 including means to match two or more
    electrical quantities for the purpose of determining their relative values.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    606,    for signal evaluation or processing including comparison or
    difference techniques.

    647+,   for measuring distributive type parameters by utilizing comparison
    or difference circuits.

    656+,   for measuring lumped type parameters by inductive type measurements
    including comparison or difference circuits.

    665+,   for measuring lumped type parameters of an object or material for
    water content including its dielectric characteristic by utilizing
    comparison or difference circuits.

    672+,   for measuring lumped type parameters by capacitive type measurement
    including dielectric characteristic measurement with a comparison or
    difference circuit.

    679+,   for measuring lumped type parameters of an object or material
    including its dielectric characteristic by utilizing comparison or
    difference circuits.


CLS 324/706
TXT Including a bridge circuit:
    Subject matter under subclass 705 wherein the comparison or difference
    circuit means includes a multi-terminal network capable of balance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    610,    for bridge circuits used with condition responsive transducers.

    648,    for bridge circuits used in distributive type measurements.

    651,    for bridge circuits used in vector analysis.

    657,    for bridge circuits used in inductance measurements.

    666,    for bridge circuits used to determine water content with
    capacitance measurements.

    673,    for bridge measurements used to determine the dielectric
    characteristics of a material or object under test.

    680,    for bridge circuits used in capacitive measurements.

    725,    for miscellaneous bridge circuits.


CLS 324/707
TXT With frequency response, change or processing circuit:
    Subject matter under subclass 691 including circuit means to determine or
    alter a signal as a function of frequency.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    667+,   for measuring or testing lumped type parameters by capacitive type
    measurements including dielectric characteristic measurement to determine
    water content of an object or material by using frequency signal response,
    change or processing circuitry.

    674+,   for measuring or testing lumped type parameters by capacitive type
    measurements utilizing frequency signal response, change or processing
    circuitry.

    681+,   for measuring or testing lumped type parameters by capacitive type
    measurements which include using frequency signal response, change or
    processing circuitry.


CLS 324/708
TXT Including a tuned or resonant circuit:
    Subject matter under subclass 707 including a circuit which typically
    contains both inductance and capacitance and is tuned to resonate at a
    certain frequency.

    (1)     Note.  A resonant condition exists when an inductor and a capacitor
    store energy and pass the same energy back and forth. The rate at which
    this occurs is called the resonant frequency. At the resonant frequency the
    circuit is neither inductive or capacitive, but acts as a large valve of
    resistance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    652,    for lumped type parameter measuring or testing by utilizing
    reactance or susceptance measurement which involves a resonant circuit.

    655,    668, 675, and 682, for lumped type parameter measuring or testing
    which involves a resonant circuit.


CLS 324/709
TXT With phase signal processing circuit:
    Subject matter under subclass 691 including circuit means responsive to the
    phase of an electrical signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    683,    for measuring or testing lumped type parameters by capacitive
    measurements with phase signal evaluation.


CLS 324/710
TXT With pulse signal processing circuit:
    Subject matter under subclass 691 including circuit means to utilize
    electrical signal pulses and their time domain response or shaping.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    676+,   for measuring or testing lumped type parameters by capacitive type
    measurement which includes pulse signal processing.


CLS 324/711
TXT Including R/C time constant circuit:
    Subject matter under subclass 710 including a time-determining network of
    resistors and capacitors.

    (1)     Note.  Time constant is defined as resistance times capacitance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    677,    for measuring or testing lumped type parameters by capacitive type
    measurement which includes pulse signal processing using R/C time constant
    circuitry.


CLS 324/712
TXT Including a digital or logic circuit:
    Subject matter under subclass 710 including a circuit wherein
    nonarithmetical operations are performed using digital electrical signal
    information.

    (1)     Note.  Electronic digital logic circuitry is classified in Class
    326.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    607,    for measurements including conversion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, appropriate subclasses for
    converter circuits which extract the value of a variable.


CLS 324/713
TXT With voltage or current signal evaluation:
    Subject matter under subclass 691 including means to measure or test the
    characteristics of an electrical signal as to its voltage or current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    522+,   for means to locate a fault using voltage or current.


CLS 324/714
TXT Including a potentiometer:
    Subject matter under subclass 713 including a variable voltage divider used
    for measuring an unknown electromotive force or potential difference.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    723,    for measuring or testing lumped type parameters using resistance or
    conductance type measurement with conductivity effects determination.


CLS 324/715
TXT Including a particular probing technique (e.g., four point probe):Subject
    matter under subclass 713 wherein electrical contact is made at a specified
    point, in particular fashion in order to effect a measurement or test.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    609,    for measuring or testing electrical characteristics or parameters
    for substance or environment evaluation using a particular sensing
    technique.


CLS 324/716
TXT To determine dimension (e.g., distance or thickness):
    Subject matter under subclass 715 including means to evaluate alterations
    in the physical shape of an object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    635,    for dimensional measurement by using resonant frequency
    measurements.

    644,    for measuring a dimension using transmitted or reflected energy
    distributions.

    662,    for dimensional measurement by using capacitive type measurements.

    671,    for dimensional measurements by using dielectric characteristic
    measurements.

    699,    for dimensional change measurement by using conductivity effects of
    lumped type parameters.


CLS 324/717
TXT To determine material composition:
    Subject matter under subclass 715 wherein the voltage or current signal
    evaluation or processing is used to determine the quantity, quality or
    percentage of substances that make up the test object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    693,    for conductivity effects measurement means to determine the
    composition of a material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 61.41 for testing for content or
    effect of a constituent of a liquid mixture.


CLS 324/718
TXT To detect a flaw defect:
    Subject matter under subclass 715 including means to detect any
    discontinuity in a substance that would be harmful to the proper
    functioning of the substance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    537,    for fault detection in circuit components.


CLS 324/719
TXT With semiconductor or IC materials quality determination using conductivity
    effects:Subject matter under subclass 691 including means to evaluate the
    properties of semiconductor or integrated circuit material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500+,   for fault testing of semiconductor devices.

    765,    for miscellaneous electrical transistor testing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 73 for automatic
    sequential tests of PC boards.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, for
    determining faults in ICs by testing information content of signals.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, subclasses 17+ for
    methods of making semiconductor electrical devices combined with
    measurement of an electrical condition.


CLS 324/720
TXT With compensation means:
    Subject matter under subclass 691 including means to offset errors or
    undesirable characteristics in the measurement or test apparatus or process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    611+,   for means to compensate for errors introduced in remote type
    evaluating circuits.

    669+,   for measuring or testing lumped type parameters by capacitive
    measurement apparatus or process including dielectric characteristic
    measurement of a material or object for water content and compensation
    means.

    684+,   for measuring or testing lumped type parameters by capacitive type
    measurement including compensation means.


CLS 324/721
TXT For temperature variation:
    Subject matter under subclass 720 including means to offset effects caused
    by changes in the ambient temperature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    670,    for measuring or testing lumped type parameters by capacitive type
    measurement including dielectric characteristic measurement with
    compensation for temperature variations.

    685,    for measuring or testing lumped type parameters by capacitive type
    measurement with compensation for temperature variations.


CLS 324/722
TXT Device or apparatus determines conductivity effects:
    Subject matter under subclass 691 including means to evaluate the ability
    of a substance to conduct electrical current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    692,    for living organism condition determination using conductivity
    effects.

    693+,   for substance characteristic determination using conductivity
    effects.

    719,    for semiconductor or IC quality determination using conductivity
    effects.


CLS 324/723
TXT Potentiometer:
    Subject matter under subclass 722 where the object being evaluated has the
    structure of a voltage divider.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    714,    for measuring or testing lumped type parameters using resistance or
    conductance measurement with a voltage or current signal evaluation or
    processing circuit which includes a potentiometer.


CLS 324/724
TXT Using a probe type structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 722 wherein the apparatus has a particular
    shape or configuration to improve its transducing or pickup function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    690,    for measuring or testing lumped type parameters with capacitive
    sensing means which include a probe type structure.

    696,    for measuring or testing lumped type parameters with water content
    determination using a conductivity effects detector with a probe type
    structure.

    715+,   for measuring or testing lumped type parameters using resistance or
    conductance type measurement with a voltage or current signal evaluation or
    processing circuit and a particular probe.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 34+ for condition responsive
    resistors.


CLS 324/725
TXT Using a particular bridge circuit:
    Subject matter under subclass 600 including a multiterminal network capable
    of balance or comparison and not elsewhere classified.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains those bridge circuits having salient
    features not readily classifiable under any of the subclasses under 600.


CLS 324/726
TXT Transformer testing (e.g., ratio):
    Subject matter under subclass 600 including means for determining
    properties of transformers.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes for example, the determination of the
    voltage ratio of instrument transformers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74+     for the determination or the properties of electric meters, per se.


CLS 324/727
TXT Piezoelectric crystal testing (e.g., frequency, resistance):Subject matter
    under subclass 600 including means for determining the properties of
    piezoelectric crystals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78+,    for the measurement of frequency.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 25.33 for this subject matter in
    combination with manufacturing.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 311+ for
    piezoelectric elements and devices, per se.


CLS 324/750
TXT System sensing fields adjacent device under test (DUT):

    Subject matter under subclass 537 for detecting faults by sensing an
    electromagnetic field produced by a device under test.


CLS 324/751
TXT Using electron beam probe:

    Subject matter under subclass 750 wherein a cathode-ray device is used to
    sense the fields.


CLS 324/752
TXT Using light probe:

    Subject matter under subclass 750 wherein light such as a laser beam is
    used to sense the fields.


CLS 324/753
TXT Using electro-optic device:

    Subject matter under subclass 750 wherein an electro-optic device such as
    an electroluminor is used to sense the fields.


CLS 324/754
TXT With probe elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 537 including a feature to enable contact
    between a device under test (DUT) and a test apparatus.


CLS 324/755
TXT Internal of or on support for device under test (DUT):

    Subject matter under subclass 754 including a support for the DUT and
    wherein probe elements are mounted in or on the support.


CLS 324/756
TXT Contact confirmation:

    Subject matter under subclass 754 including a feature to enable
    determination whether proper probe contact has been made.


CLS 324/757
TXT Probe contact enhancement:

    Subject matter under subclass 754 including a feature for aiding the probe
    to make proper contact.


CLS 324/758
TXT Probe alignment or positioning:

    Subject matter under subclass 754 including a feature for checking or
    providing for proper position of probes with respect to contact points on
    the DUT.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 399+ for optical
    alignment.


CLS 324/759
TXT With recording of test results on DUT:

    Subject matter under subclass 754 including means for receiving the results
    of a test on the DUT.


CLS 324/760
TXT With temperature control:

    Subject matter under subclass 754 including means to regulate temperature
    of the DUT or an apparatus used in testing.


CLS 324/761
TXT Pin:

    Subject matter under subclass 754 wherein the probe element is a connecting
    device such as a spring biased rod or a buckling beam (rod).


CLS 324/762
TXT Cantilever:

    Subject matter under subclass 754 including a probe element set at a first
    end of a beam wherein the beam has a first end and a second end and the
    second end is attached to a support.


CLS 324/763
TXT DUT including test circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 537 wherein a device under test (DUT) has
    integral elements which can be manipulated to configure the DUT so that
    tests can be made.

    (1)     Note.  For example, a pad of an IC may, by switching, be connected
    to enable testing of a part of the IC not normally available for testing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclass 48 for test or calibration structure.


CLS 324/764
TXT With identification of DUT:

    Subject matter under subclass 537 wherein a device under test (DUT) has
    unique marks or codes that can be read to determine the identity of the DUT.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes a DUT having identifying marks usable
    in determining faults or defects in electric components or elements.
    Identification apparatus and processes of general utility involving bar
    code are classified in Class 235, subclass 462.

    (2)     Note.  Automated analysis of an image or recognition of a pattern
    of machine readable, human language symbols are constructed entirely of
    spaced-apart, substantially parallel bars, lines or strokes is classifiable
    in Class 382, subclass 12.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclass 462 for bar code.

    382,    Image Analysis, subclass 12 for characters formed entirely of
    parallel bars.


CLS 324/765
TXT Test of semiconductor device:

    Subject matter under subclass 537 including a determination of faults in a
    material which is a solid or liquid conductor with resistivity between that
    of metals and that of insulators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, subclasses 17+ for
    methods of making semiconductor electrical devices combined with
    measurement of an electrical condition.


CLS 324/766
TXT With barrier layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 765 having a region in which the
    mobile-carrier charge density is insufficient to neutralize the net fixed
    charge density of donors and acceptors.


CLS 324/767
TXT Diode:

    Subject matter under subclass 766 including a two electrode (anode and
    cathode), single junction (PN) semiconductor device used as an active
    switching element responsive to respective input logic signals to perform
    the logic function.


CLS 324/768
TXT Bipolar transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 766 including a semiconductor device of the
    type having at least three electrodes (emitter, base, and collector), two
    potential barriers and having a controlled current flow of both majority
    and minority carriers (i.e., holes and electrons).

    (1)     Note.  A conventional bipolar transistor has three electrodes which
    include NPN or PNP type materials; in the NPN type, current flows from a
    collector terminal to an emitter terminal, and in the PNP type transistor,
    current flows from an emitter terminal to a collector terminal.


CLS 324/769
TXT Field effect transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 766 wherein a logic circuit includes one or
    more unipolar transistors in which current carriers are injected at a
    source terminal and pass to a drain terminal through a channel of
    semiconductor material whose conductivity depends largely on an electrical
    field applied to the semiconductor from a control electrode (gate).

    (1)     Note.  In a unipolar transistor, the source to drain current
    involves only one type of charge carrier (i.e, holes in a p-type material
    channel and electrons in an N-type material channel).


CLS 324/770
TXT Liquid crystal device test:

    Subject matter under 537 including test of a device whose reflectance or
    transmittance properties change when an electric field is applied.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes testing singular or plural LCD
    elements for electrical defects or faults.

    (2)     Note.  Subject matter related to optical properties of an LCD array
    to produce an image is classified in Class 345, subclass 50.

    (3)     Note.  Subject matter related to measurement of optical properties
    of LCD elements or systems is classified in Class 356.

    (4)     Note.  Subject matter related to LCD elements and systems is
    classified in Class 349, Liquid Crystal Cells, Elements and Systems,  and
    appropriate subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclass 50, for liquid crystal elements.

    349,    Liquid Crystal Cells, Elements and Systems, appropriate  subclasses
    for utilizing a liquid crystal device in general.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for LCD
    fault detection and testing, per se.


CLS 324/771
TXT Power supply test:

    Subject matter under subclass 537 including test of an electrical power
    source wherein the electrical power source is obtained by rectifying an AC
    source or using a DC source.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes electrical testing of rectifying and
    inverting power supplies. Rectifying and inverting power supplies having
    means which control magnitude or level of the current, voltage, or phase
    angle are classified in Class 323.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, for systems for
    controlling the voltage of electricity and the phase of alternating
    currents.


CLS 324/772
TXT Motor or generator fault tests:

    Subject matter under subclass 537 including fault tests of (a) prime mover
    rotating electrical machinery; (b) rotating electrical machinery which
    changes mechanical energy to electrical energy.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes the testing of an assembled motor or
    generator not elsewhere classifiable.

    (2)     Note.  Subject matter for testing just the rotating part of a motor
    or generator is classified in this class, subclass 545.

    (3)     Note.  Subject matter related to prime-mover dynamo plants is
    classified in Class 290.

    (4)     Note.  Subject matter related to electrical motor or generator
    structure is classified in Class 310.

    (5)     Note.  Subject matter related to signalling, recording, metering,
    or testing of systems of supply or control for an electric motor and the
    electric motor is classified in Class 318, subclass 490.

    (6)     Note.  Subject matter related to indicating, signalling, recording,
    or testing a single electric energy generator having means to regulate or
    control the generator output is classified in Class 322, subclass 99.

    (7)     Note.  Subject matter related to systems of acceleration or speed
    control of DC motors is classified in Class 388.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    545,    for armature or rotor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants, for electric generating plants.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, for generic structure of
    electric motors.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 490 for motor systems
    having signals, recorders, meters or testing devices.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 99 for the system
    including a signal, indicator, recorder or testing.

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, for controlling the rate of
    change of speed of a DC motor.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTION


CLS 324/800
TXT Divining rods:

    Subject matter relating to a forked branch or stick alleged to reveal
    hidden water or minerals by dipping downward.

    (1)     Note.  The existence of this subclass should not be taken to
    indicate that the Patent Office believes that divining rods are operative.
    Attention is directed to the evaluation of the divining rod in the
    following official government publication:

    Water Supply Paper 416, published by the United States Geological Survey
    and available at cost through the Government Printing Office.  The title of
    this paper is "The Divining Rod", and its author is Arthur J. Ellis.


CLS 326/
TTL ELECTRONIC DIGITAL LOGIC                     CIRCUITRY

CLS 326/
TXT
    I.      DEFINITION OF TERMS

    ELECTRONIC
    Pertaining to that branch of science which deals with the motion, emission,
    and behavior of currents of free electrons, especially in vacuum, gas, or
    phototubes and special conductors or semiconductors.  The term electronic
    is contrasted with electric, which pertains to the flow of large currents
    in metal conductors.

    ELECTRONIC DEVICE
    A device in which conduction is principally by the movement of electrons
    through a vacuum, gas, or semiconductor.  This definition excludes
    inductors, capacitors, resistors, and similar components.

    DIGITAL SIGNAL
    An electrical signal with discrete, well-defined logic levels or states.
    Digital normally means binary or two-state.

    DIGITAL CIRCUIT
    A circuit which operates at two or more discrete well-defined logic levels
    or states, in the manner of a switch, such as either ``on" or ``off" or
    ``high" or ``low" (i.e., high voltage or low voltage).

    LOGIC
    The science dealing with the basic principles and applications of truth
    tables, Boolean algebra, etc.

    SOLID-STATE
    (a) Technology utilizing solid semiconductors in place of vacuum tubes for
    amplification, rectification, or switching.  (b) Pertaining to circuits and
    components using semiconductors.

    SOLID-STATE DEVICE
    An electronic device which operates by virtue of the movement of electrons
    within a solid piece of semiconductor material.

    II.     GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    A.      BASIC SUBJECT MATTER OF CLASS

            This is the generic class for electronic digital logic devices,
    circuitry and subcombinations thereof, wherein non-arithmetical operations
    are performed upon discrete electrical signals representing a value
    normally described by numerical digits.

    (1)     Note.  An electronic device is a device in which conduction is
    principally by the movement of electrons through a vacuum, gas,
    semiconductor or superconductor.  This definition excludes inductors,
    capacitors, resistors, and similar components which deal primarily with the
    conduction of large currents of electricity through metals.

    (2)     Note.  Logic is a science dealing with the basic principles and
    applications of truth tables, Boolean algebra, etc. and is also called
    symbolic logic which is a mathematical approach to the solution of complex
    situations by the use of symbols to define basic concepts.  The three basic
    logic symbols are AND, OR, and NOT. When used in Boolean algebra, these
    symbols are somewhat analogous to addition and multiplication.

    (3)     Note.  Examples of non-arithmetical operations are selecting,
    searching, sorting, or matching.  Half-adder circuits in this class
    accepting two binary inputs are also considered non-arithmetic.

    (4)     Note.  Discrete signals are discontinuous signals which can only
    assume a finite number of states.

    (5)     Note.  Numerical digits are symbols that represent a specific
    quantity or amount of units.

    (6)     Note.  The value described may include a value represented by a
    pulse repetition rate.

    (7)     Note.  A full adder circuit, which is a half adder circuit with
    look ahead carry (three binary inputs), is considered arithmetic and is
    classified in Class 364, subclasses 700+ for electric digital calculating
    computers.

    B.      COMBINATION WITH BASIC SUBJECT MATTER INCLUDED IN THIS CLASS:

            Included in this class (326) is subject matter relating to:

    (a)     digital circuits which perform basic logic functions such as AND,
    OR, NAND, NOR, EX-OR, or NOT;

    (b)     decoder, inhibitor, multifunctional, or programmable logic
    circuits, etc., which perform basic logic functions and are used in an
    environment that is not related to any particular art provided for by other
    classes;

    (c)     circuits that are used to control the performance of digital logic
    circuits, such as accelerating, switching, reliability, transmission
    integrity, etc.;

    (d)     circuits that are used to control the functioning or to interface
    logical devices or circuitry, such as driving, clocking, or synchronizing.

     C.     COMBINATION WITH BASIC SUBJECT MATTER EXCLUDED FROM THIS CLASS:

            The combination of the subject matter of this class and another art
    environment is generally classified with the art device where the
    environment is significant by virtue of the claimed relationship.  For
    example:

            Logic devices in combination with memory systems are in Class 365,
    subclass 189.08 and Class 711, subclasses 100+.

            Logic devices in arithmetical calculators are in Class 364,
    subclasses 700+.

            Logic circuits in signal discriminators using coincidence function
    are in Class 327, subclasses 23+.

            See relevant SEARCH CLASS notes below in completing the search for
    subject matter of Class 326.

     D.     DIGITAL LOGIC DEVICES EXCLUDED FROM THIS CLASS:

            Some particular types of digital logic devices are not classified
    in this class (326), such as:

            Fluidic logic devices are in Class 235, subclasses 200+;

            Saturated non-linear reactor logic circuits are in Class 307,
    subclasses 407+;

            Detailed flip-flops, per se, generally are in Class 327, subclasses
    185+; however, a multifunctional or programmable logic having a flip-flop
    is found in this class (326), subclasses 37+ and redundant logic having a
    flip-flop is found in this class (326), subclass 12.

            Pulse counters, pulse dividers, or shift registers are in Class
    377, appropriate  subclasses.

            Optical logic gates are in Class 359, subclass 108.

            Laser logic systems are in Class 372, subclass 8.

            Neuron circuits are in Class 395, subclasses 21+.

            See relevant SEARCH CLASS notes below in completing the search for
    subject matter of Class 326.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclass 215 for ignition devices and
    systems including a logic circuit.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 444 having fluidic logic
    control means.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 65.8 for electric power control circuit
    including an electronic digital logic device.

    235,    Registers, subclasses 200+ for a fluidic logic device.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 209, 213, and 214 for logic circuits
    which control a photocell.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate   subclasses   for   non-linear, active solid-state devices,
    per se, without any significant external electrical circuitry.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, particularly
    subclasses 404 and 407+ for saturated non-linear reactor logic circuit.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 73.1 for testing of
    electrical device parameters in printed circuits.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Circuits, Devices, and
    Systems, especially subclasses 1+ for signal discriminating, comparing, or
    selecting circuits that use logic circuits; subclasses 199+ for signal
    converting, shaping, or generating circuits that use detailed flip-flops;
    and subclasses 365+ for miscellaneous gating circuits.

    329,    Demodulators, subclasses 303, 309, 310, and 343 for demodulators
    using logic gate, flip-flop, or digital logic circuitry.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 1+ and digest 3 for an oscillator having
    logic elements.

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 101 through 104 for a modulator having a
    logic element or discrete semiconductor device.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 146.2 for digital comparator
    systems and subclass 825.87 for a semiconductor crosspoint matrix switch
    with logic function.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclass 134 for analog to or
    from digital conversion with an integrated injection logic device.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    108 for an optical computing device using logic gate.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 397+ for
    printed circuit boards having diverse electrical devices.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 5 for magnetic
    bubbles including a logic device; subclass 89 for magnetic shift registers
    including a logic device; subclass 189.08 for read/write circuits including
    plural element  logic arrangement; and subclass 167 for read/write systems
    which use a simulating biological cell as a storage element.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclasses
    22.1+ for testing of the information content of a digital logic signal.

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, subclass 8 for a laser logic system.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclasses 73 and 74 for shift register including an
    input logic circuit; subclass 81 for shift register transfer means with
    logic circuit; and subclasses 116 and 117 for master-slave transfer means
    including logic circuit.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 180+ for
    reliability and availability (e.g., fault recovery, etc.) in digital data
    processing systems.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, appropriate subclass
    for methods of making semiconductor barrier layer-type logic circuits.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 55+ for a printed circuit
    assembly with detachable connectors.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process subclasses
    858 and 859 for  cross-reference art collections relating to electrical
    transmission or interconnection using digital logic circuitry.


CLS 326/1
TXT SUPERCONDUCTOR (E.G., CRYOGENIC, ETC.):

    Subject matter under the class definition including one or more logic
    circuits having at least one element whose electrical resistance becomes
    essentially zero at a very low temperature (e.g., 30 degrees Kelvin, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  This class includes superconductive devices operating at
    ``low" temperature (i.e., 30 K or lower); however, Class 505 includes
    superconductive devices operating at ``high" temperature (i.e., higher than
    30 K).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Circuits, Devices, and
    Systems, subclass 186 for superconductive stable state circuits, subclasses
    366+ for superconductive switching circuits, and subclasses 527+ for
    miscellaneous superconductive devices.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process, subclass
    1 for a superconductive material, process, or apparatus operating above 30
    K.


CLS 326/2
TXT Tunneling device:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including an electronic device whose
    operation is based on an ability (i.e., quantum mechanical nature) of
    certain atomic particles to pass through a barrier that they cannot pass
    over because of a required energy level.


CLS 326/3
TXT Josephson tunneling device:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 including an electronic fast-switching
    device, known as a Josephson junction device, which permits conduction
    through a thin dielectric insulating layer by quantum mechanical tunneling.

    (1)     Note.  The operation of a Josephson tunneling device is based on a
    theoretical consideration, that if two superconductors are brought close
    enough together, a current will flow across the gap between them.  Under
    certain conditions, a voltage appears across the gap, and a high frequency
    radiation emanates from the gap.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 367 for Josephson junction gating circuits.


CLS 326/4
TXT Plural devices (e.g., distributive device, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 3 including more than one Josephson junction
    device.


CLS 326/5
TXT Interference device (i.e., SQUID):

    Subject matter under subclass 3 including a device which controls or
    modulates electrical currents based on the quantum wave properties of a
    current carrying electrons in solids.

    (1)     Note.  A superconductive interference device is also called a
    superconductive quantum interference device or SQUID.

    (2)     Note.  A SQUID may obtain the control or modulation of electrical
    currents by, for example, causing a relative phase displacement between at
    least two currents flowing through a superconductor and combines these two
    currents after the phase displacement has been achieved, etc.


CLS 326/6
TXT Function of AND, OR, NAND, NOR, or NOT:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the logic operations are limited to
    those defined by the Boolean algebraic operations of AND, OR, NAND, NOR, or
    NOT.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104+,   for functions of AND, OR, NAND, NOR, or NOT in general.


CLS 326/7
TXT Function of AND, OR, NAND, NOR, or NOT:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the logic operations are limited to
    those defined by the Boolean algebraic operations of AND, OR, NAND, NOR, or
    NOT.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6+,     for a function of AND, OR, NAND, NOR, or NOT by a superconducting
    tunneling device.

    104+, for functions of AND, OR, NAND, NOR, or NOT in general.


CLS 326/8
TXT SECURITY (E.G., ACCESS OR COPY PREVENTION, ETC.):

    Subject matter under the class definition including an intentional
    disabling circuit which conceals or prevents obtaining stored data or
    designed integrated circuit structure.

    (1)     Note.  In this class (326), the security is performed by disabling
    or masking the circuit structure, while in Class 380, the security is
    performed by encrypting data information.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for multifunctional or programmable logic circuitry.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    380,    Cryptography, subclasses 3+ for preventing access to or copying of
    stored information.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 186+ for
    security in digital data processing systems and computers; and subclass 726
    for generic access locking in digital data processing systems.

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclasses 163+ for memory access limiting.


CLS 326/9
TXT RELIABILITY:

    Subject matter under the class definition having a device for improving the
    operational quality of a logic circuit, such that an operational procedure
    yields the same results on repeated trials.

    (1)     Note. For increasing the operational reliability, a circuit may
    include a fault detection, a warning signal indication, or an operational
    isolation such that a component failure in one channel does not affect the
    operation of the remaining channel, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for
    circuit fault detection and testing, per se.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, appropriate
    subclasses for a  voltage or current responsive fault sensor, which may
    include semiconductor devices.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 737+
    for error detection/correction or fault/recovery in the performance of
    arithmetic operations.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery,
    appropriate subclasses for subject matter limited to particular
    transmission loss or recovery of information content, (e.g., pulse coded
    data, etc.).

    395,    Information Processing System Organization,subclass 575 for
    reliability (e.g., fault recovery, etc.) in general information processing
    systems.


CLS 326/10
TXT Redundant:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein the logic circuit comprises at
    least one duplicate logic stage which will assume operation upon failure of
    an original logic stage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 526 for miscellaneous         redundant circuits.


CLS 326/11
TXT Voter circuit (e.g., majority logic, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 10 including a logic level switching circuit
    having a plurality of inputs which actuate the duplicate logic stage
    whenever one of the following conditions is obtained  (a) More than half,
    but less than all inputs are ``fault" (i.e., majority); (b) More than one,
    but less than half of all the inputs are ``fault" (i.e., minority); or (c)
    Various predetermined combinations, together or in predetermined sequence,
    of the inputs are ``fault" (i.e., weighted).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35+,    for threshold (e.g., majority, etc.) logic in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 23 for pulse coincidence discriminating.


CLS 326/12
TXT With flip-flop:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 comprising a logic circuit which has two
    or more distinct current-conductive stable states and which toggles from
    one state to the other in response to an external stimulus.

    (1)     Note.  A flip-flop is the most common memory element in a
    sequential circuit which requires a storage of previous input information.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 185+ for miscellaneous detailed flip-flop circuits.


CLS 326/13
TXT With field-effect transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 including a unipolar transistor in which
    current carriers are injected at a source terminal and pass to a drain
    terminal through a channel of semiconductor material whose conductivity
    depends largely on an electrical field applied to the semiconductor from a
    control electrode (gate).

    (1)     Note.  In a unipolar transistor, the source to drain current
    involves only one type of charge carrier (i.e., holes in a p-type material
    channel and electrons in an n-type material channel).

    (2)     Note.  Two types of FET structures are prevalent:  (a) an
    all-junction device, known as a junction FET or JFET characterized by
    having heavily doped impurity regions of one type (e.g., p-type material),
    known as gate regions, on both sides of a second type semiconductor bar
    (e.g., n+ type material, etc.) to form a pn junction and (b) a device such
    as a MOSFET/IGFET, consisting of a lightly doped substrate (e.g., p-type
    material, etc.) into which two highly doped regions (e.g., n+ type
    material, etc.) are diffused for forming source/drain regions with the area
    therebetween becoming the channel for current carriers (i.e., holes or
    electrons) and with a layer of insulating material (e.g., SiO2) grown over
    the channel surface for separating the channel from a control (i.e., gate)
    electrode.


CLS 326/14
TXT Fail-safe:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 including a device which prevents
    generating a valid output upon an operational failure of the logic
    circuitry.

    (1)     Note.  The fail-safe condition can be, for example, an automatic
    shut down of the logic circuitry or a predetermined, unchanging logic
    voltage output level.

    (2)     Note.  The fail-safe condition may be actuated, for example, by
    invalid logic input signals or loss of such signals to the input as well as
    circuit breakdown or component malfunction which traverses the desired
    logic action.


CLS 326/15
TXT Parasitic prevention in integrated circuit structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein the logic device is part of a
    monolithic integrated circuit, and is intended to prevent an unwanted
    interaction between circuit components in the monolithic integrated circuit.

    (1)     Note.  A monolithic integrated circuit is a device in which all
    components are fabricated on a single chip of silicon.  Interconnections
    among components are provided by means of metallization patterns on the
    surface of the chip structure, and the individual parts are not separable
    from the complete circuit.  External connecting wires are taken out to
    terminal pins or leads.


CLS 326/16
TXT WITH TEST FACILITATING FEATURE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the logic circuit
    includes a specific circuit or device to enable a testing function to be
    performed (e.g., a bypass circuit that connects a signal input directly to
    an output, thus bypassing the logic circuit for a testing purpose, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass comprises the testing facilitation of digital
    logic circuits; however, when the information content of a digital logic
    signal is involved, classification is in Class 371, subclasses 22.1+.

    (2)     Note.  Class 324 is the residual class for any test that involves
    the testing of electrical device parameters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for multifunctional or programmable logic circuitry.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 73.1+ for automatic
    sequential testing of electrical parameters.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclasses
    22.1+ for testing of information content of a digital logic signal.


CLS 326/17
TXT ACCELERATING SWITCHING:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a circuit to minimize
    the time delay at the turn-on or turn-off period of the switch, therefore
    increasing the switching speed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 374+ for gating or switching acceleration in general.


CLS 326/18
TXT Bipolar transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 17 including a semiconductor device of the
    type having at least three electrodes (emitter, base, and collector), two
    potential barriers and having a controlled current flow of both majority
    and minority carriers (i.e., holes and electrons).

    (1)     Note.  A conventional bipolar transistor has three electrodes which
    include npn or pnp type materials (in the npn type, current flows from a
    collector terminal to an emitter terminal and in the pnp type transistor,
    current flows from an emitter terminal to a collector terminal).


CLS 326/19
TXT With Schottky device:

    Subject matter under subclass 18 including a semiconductor device which
    operates on the principle of injecting very highly concentrated (i.e.,
    ``hot") majority carriers across a potential difference barrier which is
    formed by the junction of a metal layer deposited on a lightly doped
    semiconductor crystal.


CLS 326/20
TXT Complementary transistors:

    Subject matter under subclass 19 including at least two bipolar transistors
    of opposite conductivity types (i.e., npn and pnp).


CLS 326/21
TXT SIGNAL SENSITIVITY OR TRANSMISSION INTEGRITY:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a device to improve the
    reception of input signals at the logic circuit, or a device to maintain
    without distortion the logic signals produced at either (a) an output for
    coupling or interfacing to another stage or stages or (b) an intermediate
    location of the logic circuit to preclude signal or transmission
    deterioration (e.g., by power dissipation or by reflection, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 379+ for signal transmission integrity or spurious
    noise override in a switching circuit.


CLS 326/22
TXT Input noise margin enhancement:

    Subject matter under subclass 21 having a circuit to reduce the possibility
    of switching due to noise input instead of signal input.

    (1)     Note.  An example of reducing noise in the time domain is using a
    low pass filter at the input to filter out high frequency noise.

    (2)     Note.  An example of reducing noise in the amplitude domain is
    using a Schmitt trigger which uses a feedback mechanism to eliminate noise.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 72+ for an input signal compared to reference derived
    therefrom, subclasses 74+ for an input signal compared to plural fixed
    references, and subclasses 205+ for miscellaneous hysteresis circuits
    (including a Schmitt trigger).


CLS 326/23
TXT With field-effect transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 22 including a unipolar transistor in which
    current carriers are injected at a source terminal and pass to a drain
    terminal through a channel of semiconductor material whose conductivity
    depends largely on an electrical field applied to the semiconductor from a
    control electrode (gate).

    (1)     Note.  In a unipolar transistor, the source to drain current
    involves only one type of charge carrier (i.e., holes in a p-type material
    channel and electrons in an n-type material channel).

    (2)     Note.  Two types of FET structures are prevalent:  (a) an
    all-junction device, known as a junction FET or JFET characterized by
    having heavily doped impurity regions of one type (e.g., p-type material),
    known as gate regions, on both sides of a second type semiconductor bar
    (e.g., n+ type material, etc.) to form a pn junction and (b) a device such
    as a MOSFET/IGFET, consisting of a lightly doped substrate (e.g., p-type
    material, etc.) into which two highly doped regions (e.g., n+ type
    material, etc.) are diffused for forming source/drain regions with the area
    therebetween becoming the channel for current carriers (i.e., holes or
    electrons) and with a layer of insulating material (e.g., SiO2) grown over
    the channel surface for separating the channel from a control (i.e., gate)
    electrode.


CLS 326/24
TXT Complementary FET's:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 including at least a unit of two
    field-effect transistor elements connected in series with their gate
    terminals tied together, each having a channel of conductivity type
    opposite that of the other (e.g., p-channel vs. n-channel).


CLS 326/25
TXT Depletion or enhancement:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein the logic circuit includes a
    depletion type which has its channel conductivity on for a zero or a
    negative gate-source voltage, or an enhancement type which is normally off
    with a zero or a negative applied gate-source voltage.


CLS 326/26
TXT Output switching noise reduction:

    Subject matter under subclass 21 having a circuit to reduce noise in a
    power supply line which is a function of parasitic inductance and the
    switching current.


CLS 326/27
TXT With field-effect transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 26 including a unipolar transistor in which
    current carriers are injected at a source terminal and pass to a drain
    terminal through a channel of semiconductor material whose conductivity
    depends largely on an electrical field applied to the semiconductor from a
    control electrode (gate).

    (1)     Note.  In a unipolar transistor, the source to drain current
    involves only one type of charge carrier (i.e., holes in a p-type material
    channel and electrons in an n-type material channel).

    (2)     Note.  Two types of FET structures are prevalent:  (a) an
    all-junction device, known as a junction FET or JFET characterized by
    having heavily doped impurity regions of one type (e.g., p-type material),
    known as gate regions, on both sides of a second type semiconductor bar
    (e.g., n+ type material, etc.) to form a pn junction and (b) a device such
    as a MOSFET/IGFET, consisting of a lightly doped substrate (e.g., p-type
    material, etc.) into which two highly doped regions (e.g., n+ type
    material, etc.) are diffused for forming source/drain regions with the area
    therebetween becoming the channel for current carriers (i.e., holes or
    electrons) and with a layer of insulating material (e.g., SiO2) grown over
    the channel surface for separating the channel from a control (i.e., gate)
    electrode.


CLS 326/28
TXT With clocking:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 wherein the logic circuit is responsive to
    a predetermined time-related signal or a periodic signal in addition to an
    input logic signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93+,    for clocking or synchronizing of logic stages or gates in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems subclasses 291+ for miscellaneous clock generating circuits.


CLS 326/29
TXT Pulse shaping (e.g., squaring, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 21 including a circuit to alter the waveform
    of an output pulse signal, for example, steepening the edges of a pulse.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 100+ for miscellaneous signal converting or shaping.


CLS 326/30
TXT Bus or line termination (e.g., clamping, impedance matching, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 21 having a circuit to preclude signal or
    transmission deterioration by (a) using an impedance element to eliminate
    the reflective wave energy caused by impedance differences between the
    network and a connected circuit or (b) using a diode circuit to clamp or to
    clip the reflective wave riding on the top of an incident wave.


CLS 326/31
TXT Signal level or switching threshold stabilization:

    Subject matter under subclass 21 having a circuit to keep relatively
    constant the DC output signal levels, or the DC switching voltage levels.


CLS 326/32
TXT Temperature compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 31 wherein the output signal levels or the
    switching threshold levels are kept relatively constant in an environment
    having temperature changes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 513 for miscellaneous temperature compensation.


CLS 326/33
TXT Bias or power supply level stabilization:

    Subject matter under subclass 31 wherein the output signal levels or the
    switching threshold levels are compensated for fluctuations in voltage or
    current supply.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 538+ for miscellaneous bias stabilization circuits.


CLS 326/34
TXT With field-effect transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 31 including a unipolar transistor in which
    current carriers are injected at a source terminal and pass to a drain
    terminal through a channel of semiconductor material whose conductivity
    depends largely on an electrical field applied to the semiconductor from a
    control electrode (gate).

    (1)     Note.  In a unipolar transistor, the source to drain current
    involves only one type of charge carrier (i.e., holes in a p-type material
    channel or electrons in an n-type material channel).

    (2)     Note.  Two types of FET structures are prevalent:  (a) an
    all-junction device, known as a junction FET or JFET characterized by
    having heavily doped impurity regions of one type (e.g., p-type material),
    known as gate regions, on both sides of a second type semiconductor bar
    (e.g., n+ type material, etc.) to form a pn junction and (b) a device such
    as a MOSFET/IGFET, consisting of a lightly doped substrate (e.g., p-type
    material, etc.) into which two highly doped regions (e.g., n+ type
    material, etc.) are diffused for forming source/drain regions with the area
    therebetween becoming the channel for current carriers (i.e., holes or
    electrons) and with a layer of insulating material (e.g., SiO2) grown over
    the channel surface for separating the channel from a control (i.e., gate)
    electrode.


CLS 326/35
TXT THRESHOLD (E.G., MAJORITY, MINORITY, OR WEIGHTED INPUTS, ETC.):

    Subject matter under the class definition including a logic level switching
    circuit which has a plurality of inputs which actuate the output to switch
    to one of at least two logic levels whenever one of the following
    conditions is obtained:  (a) More than half, but less than all of the
    inputs are ``on" (i.e., majority); (b) More than one, but less than half of
    all the inputs are ``on" (i.e., minority); or (c) Various predetermined
    combinations, together or in predetermined sequence, of the inputs are
    ``on" (i.e., weighted).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for redundant logic in which a duplicate logic stage is actuated in
    response to a fault condition determined by a voter circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 50+ for signal amplitude comparators which utilize at
    least one threshold.


CLS 326/36
TXT With field-effect transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 35 including a unipolar transistor in which
    current carriers are injected at a source terminal and pass to a drain
    terminal through a channel of semiconductor material whose conductivity
    depends largely on an electrical field applied to the semiconductor from a
    control electrode (gate).

    (1)     Note.  In a unipolar transistor, the source to drain current
    involves only one type of charge carrier (i.e., holes in a p-type material
    channel or electrons in an n-type material channel).

    (2)     Note.  Two types of FET structures are prevalent:  (a) an
    all-junction device, known as a junction FET or JFET characterized by
    having heavily doped impurity regions of one type (e.g., p-type material),
    known as gate regions, on both sides of a second type semiconductor bar
    (e.g., n+ type material, etc.) to form a pn junction and (b) a device such
    as a MOSFET/IGFET, consisting of a lightly doped substrate (e.g., p-type
    material, etc.) into which two highly doped regions (e.g., n+ type
    material, etc.) are diffused for forming source/drain regions with the area
    therebetween becoming the channel for current carriers (i.e., holes or
    electrons) and with a layer of insulating material (e.g., SiO2) grown over
    the channel surface for separating the channel from a control (i.e., gate)
    electrode.


CLS 326/37
TXT MULTIFUNCTIONAL OR PROGRAMMABLE (E.G., UNIVERSAL, ETC.):

    Subject matter under the class definition including (a) a logic circuit
    capable of either producing different logic function operations from the
    same logic element or providing a particular, selected (i.e., programmed)
    logic operation from plural logic elements (e.g., an array, etc.) or (b)
    details related to the actual setting or programming of the desired logic
    functions in such a logic circuit.

    (1)     Note.  A multifunctional logic element is, for example, a single
    element capable of being changed by a control signal from an ``AND" to a
    ``NOT" logic function.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclass for
    electromagnetic storage systems, and subclasses 185.01+ for floating gate
    memory storage (e.g., flash memory).


CLS 326/38
TXT Having details of setting or programming of interconnections or logic
    functions:

    Subject matter under subclass 37 which includes specific procedures which
    establish the desired overall logic circuit operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, particularly
    subclasses 128+ and 598+ for methods of selectively interconnecting
    semiconductor barrier layer-type device arrays.


CLS 326/39
TXT Array (e.g., PLA, PAL, PLD, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 37 having a group of many similar logic
    elements connected in series or in parallel (row or column) to form a
    matrix of two or three dimensions wherein the interconnection between rows
    or columns can be selectively connected to perform a logical function.

    (1)     Note.  Programmable logic array (PLA), programmable array logic
    (PAL), or programmable logic device (PLD) are common terms to indicate
    devices included in this subclass which may be, for example, a combination
    of a programmable AND array and a programmable OR array, or all other
    possible combinations of logic functions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825+ for matrix switch with
    programmable logic circuits.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses
    716.01+ for programming logic circuits with computational means (i.e.,
    arithmetical operation) and subclasses 900+ for logic circuits which
    include data processing.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 189.08 for
    read/write circuit including plural elements logic arrangement to handle
    information signal.


CLS 326/40
TXT With flip-flop or sequential device:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 comprising a logic circuit which has two
    or more distinct current-conductive stable states which toggles from one
    state to the other in response to an external stimulus or comprising a
    series connection of such circuits.

    (1)     Note.  A flip-flop is the most common memory element in a
    sequential circuit which requires storage of previous input information.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 185+ for miscellaneous detailed flip-flop circuits.


CLS 326/41
TXT Significant integrated structure, layout, or layout interconnections:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 including an arrangement of components
    fabricated in a semiconductor material or integrated circuit chip with
    significant design emphasis on the topological arrangement of the
    components and their circuit connectors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for multifunctional or programmable logic circuits with significant
    integrated structure, layout, or layout interconnections.

    101,    for logic circuits with significant integrated structure, layout,
    or layout interconnections, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 499+ for specific integrated circuit structure with electrically
    isolated components.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 73.1+ for
    integrated circuit chip structural arrangements/layouts including
    monitoring or testing means.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 564+ for miscellaneous integrated structure, layout, or
    layout interconnections.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 488+
    for the design of circuit systems and integrated circuit structure by data
    processing and computer programming techniques.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 63+ for
    interconnection arrangements of storage elements and subclasses 94+ for
    specific integrated circuit layout of read-only memory systems.


CLS 326/42
TXT Bipolar transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 including a semiconductor device of the
    type having at least three electrodes (emitter, base, and collector), two
    potential barriers and having a controlled current flow of both majority
    and minority carriers (i.e., holes and electrons).

    (1)     Note.  A conventional bipolar transistor has three electrodes which
    include npn or pnp type materials (in the npn type, current flows from a
    collector terminal to an emitter terminal; and in the pnp type transistor,
    current flows from an emitter terminal to a collector terminal).


CLS 326/43
TXT Emitter-coupled logic or emitter-follower logic:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 wherein the logic function unit includes
    either (a) an emitter-coupled arrangement which has the emitters of plural
    input transistors connected to the emitter and the base of a referenced
    transistor and commonly grounded (biased) through a current source for
    performing a nonsaturated, differential  logic  operation  or  (b)  an
    emitter-follower arrangement which has a plurality of transistors with the
    emitters commonly coupled as an output and which produces, as an output, a
    signal which is in phase with the input logic signals.


CLS 326/44
TXT Field-effect transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 wherein the logic circuit includes a
    unipolar transistor in which current carriers are injected at a source
    terminal and pass to a drain terminal through a channel of semiconductor
    material whose conductivity depends largely on an electrical field applied
    to the semiconductor from a control electrode (gate).

    (1)     Note.  In a unipolar transistor, the source to drain current
    involves only one type of charge carrier (i.e., holes in a p-type material
    channel and electrons in an n-type material channel).

    (2)     Note.  Two types of FET structures are prevalent:  (a) an
    all-junction device, known as a junction FET or JFET characterized by
    having heavily doped impurity regions of one type (e.g., p-type material),
    known as gate regions, on both sides of a second type semiconductor bar
    (e.g., n+ type material, etc.) to form a pn junction and (b) a device such
    as a MOSFET/IGFET, consisting of a lightly doped substrate (e.g., p-type
    material, etc.) into which two highly doped regions (e.g., n+ type
    material, etc.) are diffused for forming source/drain regions with the area
    therebetween becoming the channel for current carriers (i.e., holes or
    electrons) and with a layer of insulating material (e.g., SiO2) grown over
    the channel surface for separating the channel from a control (i.e., gate)
    electrode.


CLS 326/45
TXT Complementary FET's:

    Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein the logic function unit includes
    at least two field-effect transistor elements connected in series with
    their gate terminals tied together, each having a channel of conductivity
    type opposite that of the other (e.g., p-channel vs. n-channel, etc.).


CLS 326/46
TXT Sequential (i.e., finite state machine) or with flip-flop:

    Subject matter under subclass 37 comprising a logic circuit which has an
    output state dependent on a previous input state or which has two or more
    distinct current-conductive stable states and which toggles from one state
    to the other in response to an external stimulus.

    (1)     Note.  A flip-flop is the most common memory element in a
    sequential circuit which requires a storage of previous input information.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 185+ for miscellaneous detailed flip-flop circuits.


CLS 326/47
TXT Significant integrated structure, layout, or layout interconnections:

    Subject matter under subclass 37 including an arrangement of components
    fabricated in a semiconductor material or integrated circuit chip with
    significant design emphasis on the topological arrangement of the
    components and their circuit connectors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for a programmable logic array with significant integrated
    structure, layout, or layout interconnections.

    101,    for logic circuits with significant integrated structure, layout,
    or layout interconnections, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 499+ for specific integrated circuit structure with electrical
    isolated components.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 73.1+ for
    integrated circuit chip structural arrangements/layouts including
    monitoring or testing means.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 564+ for miscellaneous integrated structure, layout, or
    layout interconnections.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 488+
    for the design of circuit systems and integrated circuit structure by data
    processing and computer programming techniques.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 63+ for
    interconnection arrangements of storage elements and subclasses 94+ for
    specific integrated circuit layout of read-only memory systems.


CLS 326/48
TXT Bipolar transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 37 including a semiconductor device of the
    type having at least three electrodes (emitter, base, and collector), two
    potential barriers, and having a controlled current flow of both majority
    and minority carriers (i.e., holes and electrons).

    (1)     Note.  A conventional bipolar transistor has three electrodes which
    include npn or pnp type materials (in the npn type, current flows from a
    collector terminal to an emitter terminal, and in the pnp type transistor,
    current flows from an emitter terminal to a collector terminal).


CLS 326/49
TXT Field-effect transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein the logic circuit includes a
    unipolar transistor in which current carriers are injected at a source
    terminal and pass to a drain terminal through a channel of semiconductor
    material whose conductivity depends largely on an electrical field applied
    to the semiconductor from a control electrode (gate).

    (1)     Note.  In a unipolar transistor, the source to drain current
    involves only one type of charge carrier (i.e., holes in a p-type material
    channel and electrons in an n-type material channel).

    (2)     Note.  Two types of FET structures are prevalent:  (a) an
    all-junction device, known as a junction FET or JFET characterized by
    having heavily doped impurity regions of one type (e.g., p-type material),
    known as gate regions, on both sides of a second type semiconductor bar
    (e.g., n+ type material, etc.) to form a pn junction and (b) a device such
    as a MOSFET/IGFET, consisting of a lightly doped substrate (e.g., p-type
    material, etc.) into which two highly doped regions (e.g., n+ type
    material, etc.) are diffused for forming source/drain regions with the area
    therebetween becoming the channel for current carriers (i.e., holes or
    electrons) and with a layer of insulating material (e.g., SiO2) grown over
    the channel surface for separating the channel from a control (i.e., gate)
    electrode.


CLS 326/50
TXT Complementary FET's:

    Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein the logic function unit includes
    at least two field-effect transistor elements connected in series with
    their gate terminals tied together, each having a channel of conductivity
    type opposite that of the other (e.g., p-channel vs. n-channel, etc.).


CLS 326/51
TXT INHIBITOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the logic circuit
    includes plural input terminals and operates in a manner such that when a
    digital ``on" signal is present at a particular input (known as the inhibit
    input) to the logic circuit, the logical output from the logic circuit is
    blocked; and when the inhibit input signal is absent, the logical output
    from the logic circuit is affected only by signals at the remaining inputs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104+,   for functions of AND, OR, NAND, NOR, or NOT.


CLS 326/52
TXT EXCLUSIVE FUNCTION (E.G., EXCLUSIVE OR, ETC.):

    Subject matter under the class definition including a logic circuit which
    produces an output signal which is a function of whether or not the inputs
    are uniformly identical.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 22 or 23+ for analogous pulse coincidence or
    anticoincidence detecting or discriminating versus the exclusive type
    processing of logical signals contained herein.


CLS 326/53
TXT Half-adder or quarter-adder:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 comprising a logic circuit which has two
    input and two output channels for binary signals, and which operates to
    produce an output signal (i.e., sum) on one of the output channels when
    one, but not both, of the input signals is present and an output (i.e.,
    carry) on the other output channel when both of the input signals are
    present.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 361 for miscellaneous circuits producing the algebraic
    sum of two or more input voltages.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems,subclasses 768+
    for the complete arithmetic operation of addition or subtraction, for
    example, full adders.


CLS 326/54
TXT Exclusive NOR:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 comprising a logic circuit which produces
    an output signal only if all logic input signals are identical (i.e., all
    are logically true or all are logically false).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 23+ for pulse coincidence detecting or discriminating.


CLS 326/55
TXT With field-effect transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 including a unipolar transistor in which
    current carriers are injected at a source terminal and pass to a drain
    terminal through a channel of semiconductor material whose conductivity
    depends largely on an electrical field applied to the semiconductor from a
    control electrode (gate).

    (1)     Note.  In a unipolar transistor, the source to drain current
    involves only one type of charge carrier (i.e., holes in a p-type material
    channel and electrons in an n-type material channel).

    (2)     Note.  Two types of FET structures are prevalent:  (a) an
    all-junction device, known as a junction FET or JFET characterized by
    having heavily doped impurity regions of one type (e.g., p-type material),
    known as gate regions, on both sides of a second type semiconductor bar
    (e.g., n+ type material, etc.) to form a pn junction and (b) a device such
    as a MOSFET/IGFET, consisting of a lightly doped substrate (e.g., p-type
    material, etc.) into which two highly doped regions (e.g., n+ type
    material, etc.) are diffused for forming source/drain regions with the area
    therebetween becoming the channel for current carriers (i.e., holes or
    electrons) and with a layer of insulating material (e.g., SiO2) grown over
    the channel surface for separating the channel from a control (i.e., gate)
    electrode.


CLS 326/56
TXT TRI-STATE (I.E., HIGH IMPEDANCE AS THIRD STATE):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the logic device produces
    any of three conditions on one line:  (a)  a definite high voltage (logic
    1); (b) a definite low voltage (logic 0); or (c) a high impedance or
    open-circuit condition (i.e., a floating state or undefined state) which
    permits another part of the circuit to determine whether the line will be
    high or low.


CLS 326/57
TXT With field-effect transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 56 wherein the logic circuit includes a
    unipolar transistor in which current carriers are injected at a source
    terminal and pass to a drain terminal through a channel of semiconductor
    material whose conductivity depends largely on an electrical field applied
    to the semiconductor from a control electrode (gate).

    (1)     Note.  In a unipolar transistor, the source to drain current
    involves only one type of charge carrier (i.e., holes in a p-type material
    channel and electrons in an n-type material channel).

    (2)     Note.  Two types of FET structures are prevalent:  (a) an
    all-junction device, known as a junction FET or JFET characterized by
    having heavily doped impurity regions of one type (e.g., p-type material),
    known as gate regions, on both sides of a second type semiconductor bar
    (e.g., n+ type material, etc.) to form a pn junction and (b) a device such
    as a MOSFET/IGFET, consisting of a lightly doped substrate (e.g., p-type
    material, etc.) into which two highly doped regions (e.g., n+ type
    material, etc.) are diffused for forming source/drain regions with the area
    therebetween becoming the channel for current carriers (i.e., holes or
    electrons) and with a layer of insulating material (e.g., SiO2) grown over
    the channel surface for separating the channel from a control (i.e., gate)
    electrode.


CLS 326/58
TXT Complementary FET's:

    Subject matter under subclass 57 including at least a unit of two
    field-effect transistors connected in series with their gate terminals tied
    together, each having a channel of conductivity type opposite that of the
    other (e.g., p-channel vs. n-channel, etc.).


CLS 326/59
TXT THREE OR MORE ACTIVE LEVELS (E.G., TERNARY, QUATENARY, ETC.):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the logic circuit is
    responsive to three or more input logic signal states, or it produces three
    or more different output logic signal states.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for tri-state circuits where logic signals are represented by two
    definite states (high or low), and a high impedance (undefined) state.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems subclasses 185+ for miscellaneous multiple stable state circuits.


CLS 326/60
TXT With conversion (e.g., three level to two level, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the logic circuit can be readily
    modified between varieties having a differing number of active states.


CLS 326/61
TXT INSULATED GATE CHARGE TRANSFER DEVICE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the logic circuit
    includes a semiconductor device having plural control electrodes separated
    from the conducting body by an insulating layer which control the
    electrostatic potential of the surface of the body in response to timely
    applied signals to effect a sequential transferring of charge.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter in this subclass includes a device having
    plural control electrodes over a conducting body (e.g., charge-coupled
    devices (CCD), etc.) or plural single control electrode devices connected
    as a unit (e.g., bucket- brigade devices (BBD), etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes)
    subclasses 215+ for an FET charge transfer device.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems subclasses 271, 277, and 284 for a miscellaneous signal delay
    circuit utilizing a charge transfer device.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 165 for frequency or
    time domain filters and delay lines utilizing charge transfer devices.


CLS 326/62
TXT INTERFACE (E.G., CURRENT DRIVE, LEVEL SHIFT, ETC.):

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising an intermediate
    circuit or a coupling circuit for providing an operational compatibility
    between noncommon logic function devices or between a logic function device
    and its circuit environment.

    (1)     Note.  The noncommon logic function device may be logic devices of
    different logic families  which require a conversion of parameters for
    operational compatibility.

    (2)     Note.  Drive circuits, including buffer arrangements which convert
    logic signals between diverse logic devices (e.g., TTL and MOS
    interfacing), which develop appropriate level signals for broadly
    addressing electrical memory storage in conjunction with logic decoding
    arrangements but not specifically disclosed for the purpose of retrieving
    stored information from a memory are also found here.

    (3)     Note.  Circuits for addressing specific memory storage locations
    are classified in Class 365, subclasses 230.01+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 108+ for miscellaneous current drivers, subclasses 318+
    for miscellaneous amplitude control in input or output circuits, and
    subclass 333 for miscellaneous interstage coupling.


CLS 326/63
TXT Logic level shifting (i.e., interface between devices of different logic
    families):

    Subject matter under subclass 62 comprising an intermediate circuit or a
    coupling circuit for providing an operational compatibility between devices
    of different logic families, wherein conversion of parameters is required
    (e.g., input logic levels, logic signal pulse widths (duty cycle), power
    supply biasing levels, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 333 for miscellaneous amplitude control for interstage
    coupling.


CLS 326/64
TXT Bi-CMOS:

    Subject matter under subclass 63 wherein the interfacing circuit includes a
    bipolar transistor and a complementary metal-oxide transistor device.

    (1)     Note.  A bipolar transistor is a semiconductor device having at
    least three electrodes (emitter, base, and collector), two potential
    barriers, and wherein a controlled current flow comprising both majority
    and minority carriers (i.e., holes and electrons).

    (2)     Note.  A CMOS or complementary metal-oxide semiconductor device is
    a device having a p-channel and an n-channel enhancement type metal-oxide
    field-effect transistor (MOSFET) which are connected in series across a
    power supply with their gates tied together.

    (3)     Note.  A MOSFET is a field-effect transistor having a metallic gate
    insulated from the channel by an oxide layer (e.g., SiO2, etc.).  A MOSFET
    is either enhancement-type (normally turned off) or depletion-type
    (normally turned on).


CLS 326/65
TXT TTL to/from CMOS:

    Subject matter under subclass 64 comprising the interfacing between a
    transistor-transistor logic device and a complementary metal-oxide
    semiconductor device.

    (1)     Note.   A transistor-transistor logic device has a forward-biased
    input transistor which is responsive to an input logic signal at each of
    its one or more emitters and with its collector being directly coupled to
    the base of an output transistor.  In TTL, the base-collector junction of
    the input transistor (usually a multiemitter type) remains forward biased
    and in saturation region when the circuit is in either the ``on" or ``off"
    condition.

    (2)     Note.  A CMOS or complementary metal-oxide semiconductor device is
    a device having a p-channel and an n-channel enhancement type metal-oxide
    field-effect transistor (MOSFET) which are connected in series across a
    power supply with their gates tied together.

    (3)     Note.  A MOSFET is a field-effect transistor having a metallic gate
    insulated from the channel by an oxide layer (e.g., SiO2, etc.).  A MOSFET
    is either enhancement-type (normally turned off) or depletion-type
    (normally turned on).


CLS 326/66
TXT ECL to/from CMOS:

    Subject matter under subclass 64 comprising the interfacing between an
    emitter-coupled logic device and a complementary metal-oxide semiconductor
    device.

    (1)     Note.  An emitter-coupled logic device is a nonsaturated bipolar
    logic device in which the emitters of the input logic transistors are
    coupled to the emitter of a reference transistor.

    (2)     Note.  A CMOS or complementary metal-oxide semiconductor device is
    a device having a p-channel and an n-channel enhancement type metal-oxide
    field-effect transistor (MOSFET) which are connected in series across a
    power supply with their gates tied together.

    (3)     Note.  A MOSFET is a field-effect transistor having a metallic gate
    insulated from the channel by an oxide layer (e.g., SiO2, etc.), A MOSFET
    is either enhancement-type (normally turned off) or depletion-type
    (normally turned on).


CLS 326/67
TXT ECL to/from TTL:

    Subject matter under subclass 64 comprising the interfacing between an
    emitter-coupled logic circuit and a transistor-transistor logic circuit.

    (1)     Note.  An emitter-coupled logic device is a nonsaturated bipolar
    logic device in which the emitters of the input logic transistors are
    coupled to the emitter of a reference transistor.

    (2)     Note.  A transistor-transistor logic device has a forward-biased
    input transistor which is responsive to an input logic signal at each of
    its one or more emitters and with its collector being directly coupled to
    the base of an output transistor.  In TTL, the base-collector junction of
    the input transistor (usually a multiemitter type) remains forward biased
    and in the saturation region when the circuit is in either the ``on" or
    ``off" condition.


CLS 326/68
TXT Field-effect transistor (e.g., JFET, MOSFET, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 63 wherein the interfacing circuit includes a
    unipolar transistor in which current carriers are injected at a source
    terminal and pass to a drain terminal through a channel of semiconductor
    material whose conductivity depends largely on an electrical field applied
    to the semiconductor from a control electrode (gate).

    (1)     Note.  In a unipolar transistor, the source to drain current
    involves only one type of charge carrier (i.e, holes in a p-type channel
    and electrons in an n-type channel).

    (2)     Note.  Two types of FET structures are prevalent:  (a) an
    all-junction device, known as a junction FET or JFET characterized by
    having heavily doped impurity regions of one type (e.g., p-type material),
    known as gate regions, on both sides of a second type semiconductor bar
    (e.g., n+ type material, etc.) to form a pn junction and (b) a device such
    as a MOSFET/IGFET, consisting of a lightly doped substrate (e.g., p-type
    material, etc.) into which two highly doped regions (e.g., n+ type
    material, etc.) are diffused for forming source/drain regions with the area
    therebetween becoming the channel for current carriers (i.e., holes or
    electrons) and with a layer of insulating material (e.g., SiO2) grown over
    the channel surface for separating the channel from a control (i.e., gate)
    electrode.


CLS 326/69
TXT ECL to/from GaAs FET (e.g., MESFET, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 68 comprising the interfacing between an
    emitter-coupled logic device and a logic device from a family of GaAs
    material semiconductor field-effect transistor.

    (1)     Note.  An emitter-coupled logic device is a nonsaturated bipolar
    logic device in which the emitters of the input logic transistors are
    coupled to the emitter of a reference transistor.

    (2)     Note.  A MESFET is a junction field-effect transistor having a gate
    junction formed by a metallic layer deposited on a lightly doped
    semiconductor material channel.  A MESFET is either made of silicon or
    gallium-arsenide material; however, GaAs type is most commonly used.


CLS 326/70
TXT TTL to/from MOS:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 comprising the interfacing between a
    transistor-transistor logic device and a metal-oxide semiconductor device.

    (1)     Note.  A transistor-transistor logic device has a forward-biased
    input transistor which is responsive to an input logic signal at each of
    its one or more emitters and with its collector being directly coupled to
    the base of an output transistor.  In TTL, the base-collector junction of
    the input transistor (usually a multiemitter type) remains forward biased
    and in the saturation region when the circuit is in either the ``on" or
    ``off" condition.

    (2)     Note.  A MOS device is a field-effect transistor that has a
    metallic gate insulated by an oxide layer from the semiconductor channel.


CLS 326/71
TXT TTL to/from CMOS:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 comprising the interfacing between a
    transistor-transistor logic device and a complementary MOS device.

    (1)     Note.  A transistor-transistor logic device has a forward-biased
    input transistor which is responsive to an input logic signal at each of
    its one or more emitters and with its collector being directly coupled to
    the base of an output transistor.  In TTL, the base-collector junction of
    the input transistor (usually a multiemitter type) remains forward biased
    and in the saturation region when the circuit is in either the ``on" or
    ``off" condition.

    (2)     Note.  A CMOS or complementary metal-oxide semiconductor device is
    a device having a p-channel and an n-channel enhancement type metal-oxide
    field-effect transistor  (MOSFET) which are connected in series across a
    power supply with their gates tied together.

    (3)     Note.  A MOSFET is a field-effect transistor having a metallic gate
    insulated from the channel by an oxide layer (e.g., SiO2).  A MOSFET is
    either enhancement-type (normally turned off) or depletion-type (normally
    turned on).


CLS 326/72
TXT Using depletion or enhancement transistors:

    Subject matter under subclass 71 which includes either a depletion type
    which is normally on for zero or negative voltage bias or an enhancement
    type which is normally off with zero or negative voltage bias applied.


CLS 326/73
TXT ECL to/from MOS:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 comprising the interfacing between an
    emitter-coupled logic device and a complementary MOS device.

    (1)     Note.  An emitter-coupled logic device is a nonsaturated bipolar
    logic device in which the emitters of the input logic transistors are
    coupled to the emitter of a reference transistor.

    (2)     Note.  A MOS device is a field-effect transistor that has a
    metallic gate insulated by an oxide layer from the semiconductor channel.


CLS 326/74
TXT ECL to/from TTL:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 comprising the interfacing between an
    emitter-coupled logic device and a transistor-transistor logic device.

    (1)     Note.  An emitter-coupled logic device is a nonsaturated bipolar
    logic device in which the emitters of the input logic transistors are
    coupled to the emitter of a reference transistor.

    (2)     Note.  A transistor-transistor logic device has a forward-biased
    input transistor which is responsive to an input logic signal at each of
    its one or more emitters and with its collector being directly coupled to
    the base of an output transistor.  In TTL, the base-collector junction of
    the input transistor (usually a multiemitter type) remains forward biased
    and in saturation region when the circuit is in either the ``on" or ``off"
    condition.


CLS 326/75
TXT Bipolar transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 63 wherein the interfacing circuit includes a
    semiconductor device having at least three electrodes (emitter, base, and
    collector), two potential barriers, and a controlled current flow of both
    majority and minority carriers (i.e., holes and electrons).


CLS 326/76
TXT TTL to/from MOS:

    Subject matter under subclass 75 comprising the interfacing between a
    transistor-transistor logic device and a metal-oxide semiconductor device.

    (1)     Note.  A transistor-transistor logic device has a forward-biased
    input transistor which is responsive to an input logic signal at each of
    its one or more emitters and with its collector being directly coupled to
    the base of an output transistor.  In TTL, the base-collector junction of
    the input transistor (usually a multiemitter type) remains forward biased
    and in saturation region when the circuit is in either the ``on" or ``off"
    condition.

    (2)     Note.  A MOS device is a field-effect transistor that has a
    metallic gate insulated by an oxide layer from the semiconductor channel.


CLS 326/77
TXT ECL to/from MOS:

    Subject matter under subclass 75 comprising the interfacing between an
    emitter-coupled logic device and a metal-oxide semiconductor device.

    (1)     Note.  An emitter-coupled logic device is a nonsaturated bipolar
    logic device in which the emitters of the input logic transistors are
    coupled to the emitter of a reference transistor.

    (2)     Note.  A MOS device is a field-effect transistor that has a
    metallic gate insulated by an oxide layer from the semiconductor channel.


CLS 326/78
TXT ECL to/from TTL:

    Subject matter under subclass 75 comprising the interfacing between an
    emitter-coupled logic device and a transistor-transistor logic device.

    (1)     Note.  An emitter-coupled logic device is a nonsaturated bipolar
    logic device in which the emitters of the input logic transistors are
    coupled to the emitter of a reference transistor.

    (2)     Note.  A transistor-transistor logic device has a forward-biased
    input transistor which is responsive to an input logic signal at each of
    its one or more emitters and with its collector being directly coupled to
    the base of an output transistor.  In TTL, the base-collector junction of
    the input transistor (usually a multiemitter type) remains forward biased
    and in saturation region when the circuit is in either the ``on" or the
    ``off" condition.


CLS 326/79
TXT Integrated Injection Logic (I2L):

    Subject matter under subclass 75 including either a complementary bipolar
    transistor pair merged on the same substrate, incorporating;  (a) a
    vertical, inverse mode npn (conversely pnp) transistor, which can have
    isolated multicollector regions, and (b) a pnp (conversely npn) lateral
    transistor which serves as a current injector to inject charge current
    directly into the vertical, inverse mode transistor base; OR a bipolar or
    FET transistor pair merged on the same substrate wherein; (a) the base of
    an inverse mode bipolar transistor is injected with charge current by a FET
    current injector, or (b) the inverse mode transistor is a FET device (e.g.,
    enhancement-mode junction field-effect transistor (enhancement JFET) with
    bipolar or FET charge current injection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    for integrated injection logic circuits, in general.


CLS 326/80
TXT Supply voltage level shifting (i.e., interface between devices of a same
    logic family with different operating voltage levels):

    Subject matter under subclass 62 comprising a circuit for translating
    signal data from one device to another device of the same logic family but
    which operate at differing voltage supply levels.

    (1)     Note.  For example, since read and write voltages for a
    programmable memory have different levels, it is necessary to provide a
    circuit which can deal with voltage of two levels and control the supply of
    the two level voltages to the memory.  Whenever such a circuit is claimed
    with a memory circuit (PROM, EPROM, etc.), classification is in Class 365.
    If a memory circuit is not claimed, classification is in Class 326.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 333 for miscellaneous interstage coupling (e.g., level
    shift, etc.).


CLS 326/81
TXT CMOS:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 including a device having a p-channel and
    an n-channel enhancement type metal-oxide field-effect transistor (MOSFET)
    which are connected in series across a power supply with their gates tied
    together.

    (1)     Note.  A MOSFET is a field-effect transistor having a metallic gate
    insulated from the channel by an oxide layer (e.g., SiO2).  A MOSFET is
    either enhancement-type (normally turned-off) or depletion-type (normally
    turned-on).


CLS 326/82
TXT Current driving (e.g., fan in/out, off chip driving, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 62 comprising a current converting circuit to
    provide an operating compatibility between a logic function device and its
    circuit environment which may be a higher current load device (off chip
    driving), or a series connection of plural small loads which result in
    higher current drawing (fan in/out).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 108+ for miscellaneous current drivers.


CLS 326/83
TXT Field-effect transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 82 wherein the current driving circuit
    includes a unipolar transistor in which current carriers are injected at a
    source terminal and pass to a drain terminal through a channel of
    semiconductor material whose conductivity depends largely on an electrical
    field applied to the semiconductor from a control electrode (gate).

    (1)     Note.  In a unipolar transistor, the source to drain current
    involves only one type of charge carrier (i.e., holes in a p-type channel
    and electrons in an n-type channel).

    (2)     Note.  Two types of FET structures are prevalent:  (a) an
    all-junction device, known as a junction FET or JFET characterized by
    having heavily doped impurity regions of one type (e.g., p-type material),
    known as gate regions, on both sides of a second type semiconductor bar
    (e.g., n+ type material, etc.) to form a pn junction and (b) a device such
    as a MOSFET/IGFET, consisting of a lightly doped substrate (e.g., p-type
    material, etc.) into which two highly doped regions (e.g., n+ type
    material, etc.) are diffused for forming source/drain regions with the area
    therebetween becoming the channel for current carriers (i.e., holes or
    electrons) and with a layer of insulating material (e.g., SiO2) grown over
    the channel surface for separating the channel from a control (i.e., gate)
    electrode.


CLS 326/84
TXT Bi-CMOS:

    Subject matter under subclass 83 wherein the current driving circuit
    includes both bipolar and complementary metal-oxide semiconductor
    transistors.

    (1)     Note.  A bipolar transistor is a semiconductor device having at
    least three electrodes (emitter, base, and collector), two potential
    barriers, and wherein a controlled current flow comprises both majority and
    minority carriers (i.e., holes and electrons).

    (2)     Note.  A CMOS or complementary metal-oxide semiconductor device is
    a device having a p-material channel and an n-material channel enhancement
    type metal-oxide field-effect transistor (MOSFET) which are connected in
    series across a power supply with their gates tied together.

    (3)     Note.  A MOSFET is a field-effect transistor having a metallic gate
    insulated from the channel by an oxide layer (e.g., SiO2).  A MOSFET is
    either enhancement-type (normally turned-off) or depletion-type (normally
    turned-on).


CLS 326/85
TXT Having plural output pull-up or pull-down transistors:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 wherein multiple transistors at the
    circuit output help maintain the output at logic high (pull-up) or logic
    low (pull-down) levels as needed.


CLS 326/86
TXT Bus driving:

    Subject matter under subclass 83 including a common path for connecting a
    number of devices in a digital system.

    (1)     Note.  For example, in a computer system, a data bus line transmits
    data between a central processing unit and several memories.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 297 for miscellaneous clock bus generating circuits.


CLS 326/87
TXT Having plural output pull-up or pull-down transistors:

    Subject matter under subclass 83 wherein multiple transistors at the
    circuit output help maintain the output at logic high (pull-up) or logic
    low (pull-down) levels as needed.


CLS 326/88
TXT With capacitive or inductive bootstrapping:

    Subject matter under subclass 83 wherein the logic circuit includes
    discrete, capacitive or inductive elements or uses its inherent capacitance
    or inductance to enhance its operating condition, to achieve full driving
    switching capabilities in response to logic input signals.

    (1)     Note.  Enhancement of the performance of the logic circuit includes
    boosting the DC level of the gating signals for one or more semiconductor
    devices, as well as boosting the attained DC levels of individual circuit
    nodal locations, usually by, for example, either a feedforward/feedback
    connection or a separate time-related, pulse signal coupled via the
    boosting element to a particular circuit location.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 589 for generic bootstrapping devices.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 156 for amplifiers which use a bootstrap
    coupling to the input of the circuit where the input is linearly related to
    the output.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 59 and 60 for
    circuits for input/output power level conversions (e.g., voltage
    multiplication, etc.).


CLS 326/89
TXT Bipolar transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 82 wherein the current driving circuit
    includes a semiconductor device having at least three electrodes (emitter,
    base, and collector), two potential barriers (npn or pnp), and having a
    controlled current flow of both majority and minority carriers (i.e., holes
    and electrons).


CLS 326/90
TXT Bus driving:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 including a common path for connecting a
    number of devices in a digital system.

    (1)     Note.  For example, in a computer system a data bus line transmits
    data between a central processing unit and several memories.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices,  Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 297 for miscellaneous clock bus generating circuits.


CLS 326/91
TXT Having plural output pull-up or pull-down transistors:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein multiple transistors at the
    circuit output help maintain the output at logic high (pull-up) or logic
    low (pull-down) levels as needed.


CLS 326/92
TXT With capacitive or inductive bootstrapping:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the logic circuit includes
    discrete, capacitive, or inductive elements or uses its inherent
    capacitance or inductance to enhance its operating condition, to achieve
    full driving switching capabilities in response to logic input signals.

    (1)     Note.  Enhancement of the performance of the logic circuit includes
    boosting the DC level of the gating signals for one or more semiconductor
    devices, as well as boosting the attained DC levels of individual circuit
    nodal locations, usually by, for example, either a feedforward/feedback
    connection or a separate time-related, pulse signal coupled via the
    boosting element to a particular circuit location.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 589 for miscellaneous bootstrapping devices.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 156 for amplifiers which use a bootstrap
    coupling to the input of the circuit where the input is linearly related to
    the output.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 59 and 60 for
    circuits for input/output power level conversions (e.g., voltage
    multiplication, etc.).


CLS 326/93
TXT CLOCKING OR SYNCHRONIZING OF LOGIC STAGES OR GATES:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein individual logic stages
    or gates are responsive to predetermined time-related signals or periodic
    signals in addition to an input logic signal.

    (1)     Note.  Plural clock signals are usually phase-sequenced for
    synchronized stage operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Circuits, Devices and
    Systems, subclass 41 for the detection of synchronization of frequencies,
    subclasses 141+ for miscellaneous synchronizing, and subclasses 291+ for
    miscellaneous clock generating.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 1 for frequency responsive synchronization
    with logic elements and appropriate subclasses for free-running signal
    generators.


CLS 326/94
TXT Metastable state prevention:

    Subject matter under subclass 93 including a circuit to prevent the
    occurrence of an undecided condition at a logic state transition.

    (1)     Note.  A metastable state can occur when a logic voltage output
    level is between the logic 0 and logic 1 levels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 198+ for initializing, resetting or protecting a steady
    state condition of a stable state circuit such as a flip-flop.


CLS 326/95
TXT Field-effect transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 93 wherein the logic circuit includes a
    unipolar transistor in which current carriers are injected at a source
    terminal and pass to a drain terminal through a channel of semiconductor
    material whose conductivity depends largely on an electrical field applied
    to the semiconductor from a control electrode (gate).

    (1)     Note.  In a unipolar transistor, the source to drain current
    involves only one type of charge carrier (i.e., holes in a p-type channel
    and electrons in an n-type channel).

    (2)     Note.  Two types of FET structures are prevalent:  (a) an
    all-junction device, known as a junction FET or JFET characterized by
    having heavily doped impurity regions of one type (e.g., p-type material),
    known as gate regions, on both sides of a second type semiconductor bar
    (e.g., n+ type material, etc.) to form a pn junction and (b) a device such
    as a MOSFET/IGFET, consisting of a lightly doped substrate (e.g., p-type
    material, etc.) into which two highly doped regions (e.g., n+ type
    material, etc.) are diffused for forming source/drain regions with the area
    therebetween becoming the channel for current carriers (i.e., holes or
    electrons) and with a layer of insulating material (e.g., SiO2) grown over
    the channel surface for separating the channel from a control (i.e., gate)
    electrode.


CLS 326/96
TXT Two or more clocks (e.g., phase clocking, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 95 wherein the logic circuit is responsive to
    two or more predetermined time-related signals or periodic signals in
    addition to the input logic signal.

    (1)     Note.  The clocking signals, if more than one, are usually
    synchronously phase-controlled for sequential activation/deactivation of
    logic elements or logic control elements (e.g., biasing voltages, etc.).


CLS 326/97
TXT MOSFET:

    Subject matter under subclass 96 includes a field-effect transistor having
    a metallic gate insulated from the channel by an oxide layer (e.g., SiO2,
    etc.).


CLS 326/98
TXT MOSFET:

    Subject matter under subclass 95 includes a field-effect transistor having
    a metallic gate insulated from the channel by an oxide layer (e.g., SiO2,
    etc.).


CLS 326/99
TXT HAVING LOGIC LEVELS CONVEYED BY SIGNAL FREQUENCY OR PHASE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the logic circuit
    receives or produces digital signals which are different in the number of
    periodic cycles in a unit of time (frequency), or in the relative timing of
    a signal in relation to another signal (phase).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 2+ for phase discriminators, subclasses 39+ for
    frequency discriminators, subclasses 113+ for frequency control, and
    subclasses 231+ for phase shift control.


CLS 326/100
TXT INTEGRATED INJECTION LOGIC:

    Subject matter under the class definition including either a complementary
    bipolar transistor pair merged on the same substrate, incorporating (a.) a
    vertical, inverse mode npn (conversely pnp) transistor, which can have
    isolated multicollector regions, and (b.) a pnp (conversely npn) lateral
    transistor which serves as a current injector to inject charge current
    directly into the vertical, inverse mode transistor base; OR a bipolar or
    FET transistor pair merged on the same substrate wherein; (a.) the base of
    an inverse mode bipolar transistor is injected with charge current by a FET
    current injector, or (b.) the inverse mode transistor is a FET device
    (e.g., enhancement-mode junction field-effect transistor (enhancement JFET,
    etc.) with bipolar or FET charge current injection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     for IIL in logic level interfacing circuits.


CLS 326/101
TXT SIGNIFICANT INTEGRATED STRUCTURE, LAYOUT, OR LAYOUT INTERCONNECTIONS:

    Subject matter under the class definition including an arrangement of
    components fabricated in a semiconductor material or integrated circuit
    chip with significant design emphasis on the topological arrangement of the
    components and their circuit connectors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for multifunctional or programmable logic circuits with significant
    integrated structure, layout, or layout interconnections.

    47,     for multifunctional or programmable logic array circuits with
    significant integrated structure, layout, or layout interconnections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses for specific nonlinear solid-state devices with
    significant integrated structure.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 73+ for integrated
    circuit chip structural arrangements/layouts including monitoring or
    testing means.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 564+ for miscellaneous integrated structure, layout, or
    layout interconnections.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 488+
    for the design of circuit systems and integrated circuit structure by data
    processing and computer programming techniques.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 63+ for
    interconnection arrangement of storage elements; subclasses 94+ for
    specific integrated circuit layout or read-only memory systems.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, particularly
    subclasses 128+ and 598+ for methods of selectively interconnecting
    semiconductor barrier layer-type device arrays.


CLS 326/102
TXT Field-effect transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein the logic means includes a
    unipolar transistor in which current carriers are injected at a source
    terminal and pass to a drain terminal through a channel of semiconductor
    material whose conductivity depends largely on an electrical field applied
    to the semiconductor from a control electrode (gate).

    (1)     Note.  In a unipolar transistor, the source to drain current
    involves only one type of charge carrier (i.e., holes in a p-type channel
    and electrons in an n-type channel).

    (2)     Note.  Two types of FET structures are prevalent:  (a) an
    all-junction device, known as a junction FET or JFET characterized by
    having heavily doped impurity regions of one type (e.g., p-type material),
    known as gate regions, on both sides of a second type semiconductor bar
    (e.g., n+ type material, etc.) to form a pn junction and (b) a device such
    as a MOSFET/IGFET, consisting of a lightly doped substrate (e.g., p-type
    material, etc.) into which two highly doped regions (e.g., n+ type
    material, etc.) are diffused for forming source/drain regions with the area
    therebetween becoming the channel for current carriers (i.e., holes or
    electrons) and with a layer of insulating material (e.g., SiO2) grown over
    the channel surface for separating the channel from a control (i.e., gate)
    electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for multifunctional or programmable logic circuits using
    field-effect transistors.


CLS 326/103
TXT Complementary FET's:

    Subject matter under subclass 102 wherein the logic function unit includes
    at least two field-effect transistor elements connected in series across a
    power supply with their gates linked together, each having a channel of
    conductivity type opposite that of the other (e.g., p-channel vs.
    n-channel, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     for multifunctional or programmable logic circuits using
    complementary FET's.


CLS 326/104
TXT FUNCTION OF AND, OR, NAND, NOR, or NOT:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the logic operations are
    limited to those defined by the Boolean algebraic operations of AND, OR,
    NAND, NOR, or NOT.

    (1)     Note.  Miscellaneous electron space discharge systems which perform
    the logic functions of this subclass are classified here or in the
    appropriate indented subclass.

    (2)     Note.  For the ``exclusive" logic functions, search this class,
    subclasses 52+.

    (3)     Note.  Multifunctional logic elements where, for example, a single
    element is capable of being changed from an ``AND" to a ``NOT" logic
    function, are classified in this class, subclasses 37+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and Systems,
    subclasses 23+ for pulse coincidence discriminators or detectors.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclass for
    electromagnetic storage systems, and subclasses 185.01+ for floating gate
    memory storage (e.g., flash memory).


CLS 326/105
TXT Decoding:

    Subject matter under subclass 104 wherein logic gates are selectively
    responsive to particular binary combinations of logic signals to provide a
    binary output command signal.

    (1)     Note.  Usually all the outputs of the plurality of gates except the
    selected logic gate remain at a particular binary level.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825+ for selective systems
    which may be code responsive.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 50+ for converting
    signals encoded in a first code to signals encoded in a second code.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 230.06+ for
    storage systems addressing by information signals especially in the
    selection of specific memory locations.


CLS 326/106
TXT With field-effect transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 105 wherein the logic circuit includes a
    unipolar transistor in which current carriers are injected at a source
    terminal and pass to a drain terminal through a channel of semiconductor
    material whose conductivity depends largely on an electrical field applied
    to the semiconductor from a control electrode (gate).

    (1)     Note.  In a unipolar transistor, the source to drain current
    involves only one type of charge carrier (i.e., holes in a p-type channel
    and electrons in an n-type channel).

    (2)     Note.  Two types of FET structures are prevalent:  (a) an
    all-junction device, known as a junction FET or JFET characterized by
    having heavily doped impurity regions of one type (e.g., p-type material,
    etc.), known as gate regions, on both sides of a second type semiconductor
    bar (e.g., n+ type material, etc.) to form a pn junction, and (b) a device
    such as a MOSFET/IGFET, consisting of a lightly doped substrate (e.g.,
    p-type material, etc.) into which two highly doped regions (e.g., n+ type
    material, etc.) are diffused for forming source/drain regions with the area
    therebetween becoming the channel for current carriers (i.e., holes or
    electrons) and with a layer of insulating material (e.g., SiO2, etc.) grown
    over the channel surface for separating the channel from a control (i.e.,
    gate) electrode.


CLS 326/107
TXT Depletion or enhancement:

    Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein the decoder includes either a
    depletion type which has channel conductivity on for zero or negative
    gate-source voltage or an enhancement type which is normally off with zero
    or negative gate- source voltage bias applied.


CLS 326/108
TXT CMOS:

    Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein the logic function unit includes
    at least two metal-oxide field-effect transistors (MOSFET), each having a
    channel of conductivity type opposite that of the other (e.g., p-channel
    vs. n-channel, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  A MOSFET is a field-effect transistor having a metallic gate
    insulated from the channel by an oxide layer (e.g., SiO2, etc.).

    (2)     Note.  Opposite channel conductivity type, as used above,
    characterizes the induced channel majority carrier conduction (i.e., holes
    for p-channel and electrons for n-channel).


CLS 326/109
TXT Bipolar and FET:

    Subject matter under subclass 104 wherein the logic circuit includes two
    types of transistors:  (a) a bipolar transistor having at least three
    electrodes (emitter, base, and collector), two potential barriers, and
    wherein a controlled current flow comprises both majority and minority
    carriers (i.e., holes and electrons) and (b) a unipolar transistor in which
    current carriers are injected at a source terminal and pass to a drain
    terminal through a channel of semiconductor material whose conductivity
    depends largely on an electrical field applied to the semiconductor from a
    control electrode (gate).

    (1)     Note.  In a unipolar transistor, the source to drain current
    involves only one type of charge carrier (i.e., holes in a p-type channel
    and electrons in an n-type channel).


CLS 326/110
TXT Bi-CMOS:

    Subject matter under subclass 109 wherein the logic function circuit
    comprises a bipolar transistor and a unit of two enhancement type
    metal-oxide field-effect transistor elements connected in series with their
    gates tied together, each element has a channel of conductivity type
    opposite that of the other (e.g., p-channel vs. n-channel, etc.).


CLS 326/111
TXT Space discharge device (e.g., vacuum tube, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 104 including an electronic device having an
    electrical current flow of charged particles (e.g., ions or electrons) in
    an area between two spaced electrodes and with at least part of that area
    being constituted by a gas, vapor, or vacuum.


CLS 326/112
TXT Field-effect transistor (e.g., JFET, etc.)

    Subject matter under subclass 104 wherein the logic circuit includes a
    unipolar transistor in which current carriers are injected at a source
    terminal and pass to a drain terminal through a channel of semiconductor
    material whose conductivity depends largely on an electrical field applied
    to the semiconductor from a control electrode (gate).

    (1)     Note.  In a unipolar transistor, the source to drain current
    involves only one type of charge carrier (i.e., holes in a p-type channel
    and electrons in an n-type channel).

    (2)     Note.  Two types of FET structures are prevalent:  (a) an
    all-junction device, known as a junction FET or JFET characterized by
    having heavily doped impurity regions of one type (e.g., p-type material),
    known as gate regions, on both sides of a second type semiconductor bar
    (e.g., n+ type material) to form a pn junction, and (b) a device such as a
    MOSFET/IGFET, consisting of a lightly doped substrate (e.g., p-type
    material) into which two highly doped regions (e.g., n+ type material) are
    diffused for forming  source/drain regions with the area therebetween
    becoming the channel for current carriers (i.e., holes or electrons) and
    with a layer of insulating material (e.g., SiO2, etc.) grown over the
    channel surface for separating the channel from a control (i.e., gate)
    electrode.


CLS 326/113
TXT Pass transistor logic or transmission gate logic:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein a field-effect transistor
    performs a logic function using power from two signal inputs which feed
    through a gate and a source (or drain) terminals with an output taken at
    the drain (or source) terminal which is an AND function of the two signal
    inputs.

    (1)     Note.  The use of pass transistor logic saves power and reduces
    transistor numbers, but lowers the operational speed.

    (2)     Note.  Transmission gate logic includes at least two field-effect
    transistor elements used as pass transistors, each having a channel of
    conductivity type opposite that of the other (i.e., complementary FET's).


CLS 326/114
TXT Wired logic (e.g., wired-OR, wired-AND, dotted logic, etc.)

    Subject matter under subclass 112 which includes a logic family having
    their output gates eliminated simply by wiring the outputs of some basic
    logic circuits together, the resultant circuit is called wired-OR or
    wired-AND depending on the type of logic, and the joint output is in turn
    input to other logic gates for performing additional logic functions.

    (1)     Note.  Wired logic is used in source-coupled logic where source
    channel outputs are wired together.  Special FET gates, such as open-drain
    gates, can be directly wired together.

    (2)     Note.  Circuits implemented using wired logic save space by
    reducing devices in number, and increasing operational speed by eliminating
    some delays due to multiple level  gating.


CLS 326/115
TXT Source-coupled logic (e.g., current mode logic (CML), differential current
    switch logic (DCSL), etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein the logic function unit includes
    an arrangement in which the source channel of plural input transistors are
    connected to the source and the gate of a referenced transistor, and are
    commonly grounded (biased) through a current source for performing a
    nonsaturated, differential logic operation.

    (1)     Note.  Current mode logic (CML) and differential current switch
    logic are other state-of-the-art expressions for a source-coupled logic
    arrangement providing complementary drain output and functioning as NOR/OR
    circuits.


CLS 326/116
TXT Schottky-gate FET (i.e., MESFET):

    Subject matter under subclass 112 including a junction field-effect
    transistor which operates on the principle of the injection of very highly
    concentrated majority carriers across a potential difference barrier which
    is formed by the junction of a lightly doped semiconductor material and a
    metal layer deposited thereon.

    (1)     Note.  A   MESFET   or    metal-semiconductor field-effect
    transistor can be made of silicon or gallium arsenide; however, GaAs type
    MESFETs are most commonly used.


CLS 326/117
TXT Depletion or enhancement:

    Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein the logic circuit includes either
    a depletion type which has channel conductivity on for zero or negative
    gate-source voltage or an enhancement type which is normally off with zero
    or negative gate-source voltage bias applied.


CLS 326/118
TXT Diode transistor logic:

    Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein diodes are active switching
    elements responsive to respective input logic signals for providing logical
    function outputs which control output transistor elements.


CLS 326/119
TXT MOSFET (i.e., metal-oxide semiconductor field-effect transistor):

    Subject matter under subclass 112 includes a field-effect transistor having
    a metallic gate insulated from the channel by an oxide layer (e.g., SiO2,
    etc.).


CLS 326/120
TXT Depletion or enhancement:

    Subject matter under subclass 119 wherein the logic circuit includes either
    a depletion type which has channel conductivity on for zero or negative
    gate-source voltage, or an enhancement type which is normally off with zero
    or negative gate-source voltage bias applied.


CLS 326/121
TXT CMOS:

    Subject matter under subclass 119 wherein the logic function unit includes
    two enhancement mode metal-oxide semiconductor field-effect transistor
    elements connected in series with gates tied together, each having a
    channel of conductivity type opposite that of the other (i.e., P-MOS vs.
    N-MOS).


CLS 326/122
TXT Complementary FET's:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein the logic function unit includes
    at least two field-effect transistor elements, each having a channel of
    conductivity type opposite that of the other (e.g., p-channel vs.
    n-channel, etc.).


CLS 326/123
TXT With semiconductor diode or negative resistance device:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein the logic function unit includes
    (a) a semiconductor device having two electrodes (anode and cathode) and a
    single junction (pn) that allows current to flow in only one direction; or
    (b) a semiconductor device characterized by an operating current-voltage
    plot having a portion with a negative slope.


CLS 326/124
TXT Bipolar transistor (e.g., RTL, DCTL, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 104 including a semiconductor device of the
    type having at least three electrodes (emitter, base, and collector), two
    potential barriers, and wherein a controlled current flow comprises both
    majority and minority carriers (i.e., holes and electrons).

    (1)     Note.  Among the logic function configurations found in this
    subclass are (a) resistor-transistor logic (RTL) that has a resistor as an
    input component coupled to the base of a bipolar transistor; and (b)
    direct-coupled transistor logic (DCTL) which is a NOR gate type of bipolar
    logic in which the output of one gate is coupled directly to the input of
    the succeeding gate.


CLS 326/125
TXT Wired logic or open collector logic (e.g., wired-OR, wired-AND, dotted
    logic, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 124 which includes a logic family having
    their output gates eliminated simply by wiring the outputs of some basic
    logic circuits together, the resultant circuit is called wired-OR or
    wired-AND depending on the type of logic, and the joint output is in turn
    input to other logic gates for performing additional logic functions.

    (1)     Note.  Wired logic is widely used in ECL having emitter outputs
    directly connected.  There are also special TTL gates, known as
    open-collector gates, where collector outputs are directly connected.


CLS 326/126
TXT Emitter-coupled or emitter-follower logic:

    Subject matter under subclass 124 wherein the logic function unit includes
    either:  (a) an emitter-coupled arrangement which has the emitters of
    plural input transistors connected to the emitter and the base of a
    referenced transistor and commonly grounded (biased) through a current
    source for performing a nonsaturated, differential logic operation; or (b)
    an emitter-follower arrangement which has a plurality of transistors with
    the emitters commonly coupled as an output and which produces, as an
    output, a signal which is in phase with the input logic signals.


CLS 326/127
TXT Current mode logic (CML):

    Subject matter under subclass 126 wherein the logic utilizes an
    emitter-coupled arrangement which provides complementary collector outputs
    and functions as a NOR/OR circuit.


CLS 326/128
TXT Transistor-transistor logic (TTL):

    Subject matter under subclass 124 wherein the logic function unit includes
    a forward-biased input transistor which is responsive to an input logic
    signal at each of its one or more emitters and with its collector being
    directly coupled to the base of an output transistor.

    (1)     Note.  In TTL, the base-collector junction of the input transistor
    (usually a multiemitter type) remains forward biased and in the saturation
    region when the circuit is in either the ``on" or ``off" condition.


CLS 326/129
TXT Complementary transistor logic (CTL):

    Subject matter under subclass 128 wherein the logic function unit includes
    transistors of opposite conductivity type (e.g., npn and pnp type, etc.).


CLS 326/130
TXT Diode-transistor logic (DTL):

    Subject matter under subclass 124 wherein diodes are active switching
    elements responsive to respective input logic signals for providing logical
    function outputs which control output transistor elements.


CLS 326/131
TXT With metal semiconductor junction diode (e.g., Schottky barrier, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein the diode transistor logic device
    includes diodes of the type which operate on the principle of the injection
    of very highly concentrated (i.e., ``hot") majority carriers across a
    potential difference barrier which is formed by the junction of a lightly
    doped semiconductor crystal and a metal layer deposited thereon.


CLS 326/132
TXT With negative resistance device (e.g., tunnel diode, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 124 wherein the bipolar transistor logic
    circuit includes a semiconductor device characterized by an operating
    current-voltage plot having a portion with a negative slope.

    (1)     Note.  Devices such as tunnel diodes, back diodes, or four or more
    layer diodes, are proper for this subclass, as well as devices which switch
    on or avalanche as a result of negative resistance conduction induced by
    increasing an electrical field condition (e.g., IMPATT or GUNN effect
    elements, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    for negative resistance diode logic functions of AND, OR, NAND,
    NOR, or NOT.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 568+ for miscellaneous negative resistance circuits.


CLS 326/133
TXT Diode:

    Subject matter under subclass 104 including a two electrode (anode and
    cathode), single junction (pn) semiconductor device used as an active
    switching element responsive to respective input logic signals to perform
    the logic function.


CLS 326/134
TXT Negative resistance diode (e.g., tunnel, gunn,  etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 133 includes a diode characterized by an
    operating current-voltage plot having a portion with a negative slope.

    (1)     Note.  Devices such as tunnel diodes, back diodes, or four or more
    layer diodes are proper for this subclass, as well as devices which switch
    on or avalanche as a result of negative resistance conduction induced by
    increasing an electrical field condition (e.g., IMPATT or GUNN effect
    elements).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132,    for a circuit having bipolar transistor and negative resistance
    diode logic functions of AND, OR, NAND, NOR, or NOT.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 568+ for miscellaneous negative resistance circuits.


CLS 326/135
TXT Negative resistance device:

    Subject matter under subclass 104 which includes a semiconductor device
    characterized by an operating current-voltage plot having a portion with a
    negative slope.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 568+ for miscellaneous negative resistance circuits.


CLS 326/136
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition not provided for in any of the
    preceding subclasses.


CLS 327/
TTL MISCELLANEOUS ACTIVE  ELECTRICAL NONLINEAR  DEVICES, CIRCUITS, AND  SYSTEMS

CLS 327/
TXT
    I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF BASIC CLASS SUBJECT MATTER
    This is the residual class for electrical devices, circuits or systems
    having an output not directly proportional to its input and comprising at
    least one component which can provide gain or can route electrical current
    and which device, circuit or system does not form a complete system such as
    is classified specifically elsewhere or a subcombination of utility only in
    such elsewhere classified system.

    (1)     Note.  The scope of patents classified herein can be determined
    only by determining the scope of other related classes which are listed
    below under SEARCH CLASS.  Also, consult search notes and definitions of
    these classes.

    (2)     Note.  Typical active components are solid-state components, vacuum
    tubes, and gas filled tubes.  However, also included would be components
    broadly claimed to have active properties, but which are not specifically
    limited to a particular embodiment such as a vacuum tube.

    II.     MAIN SUBDIVISIONS OF THIS CLASS

    A.      SPECIFIC SIGNAL DISCRIMINATING (E.G., COMPARING OR SELECTING)
    WITHOUT SUBSEQUENT CONTROLIncluded here are circuits for the comparison,
    selection, or distinguishing of specific characteristics of either an input
    signal or signals without continuous regulation of such characteristic.

    B.      SIGNAL CONVERTING, SHAPING, OR GENERATING
    Included here are circuits wherein:
    (a)     an inherent input signal parameter such as phase, frequency,
    amplitude or current is modified, maintained at some value, or changed to
    an entirely different parameter: (b) an input signal having a particular
    waveform modified into an output signal having a partially or a completely
    different waveform; or (c) an output signal of specified waveform is
    produced.

    C.      SPECIFIC INPUT TO OUTPUT FUNCTION
    Included here are circuits wherein an output signal is proportional to a
    mathematical expression involving an input signal or signals.

    (1)     Note.  Characteristically, the input signals are continuous and
    slowly varying.

    (2)     Note.  Circuitry performing Boolean Algebra functions, per se, are
    excluded herein and classified in Class 326.

    (3)     Note.  The input signals of this subclass do not contain
    information (data).  For data processing see SEARCH CLASS below.

    D.      GATING (I.E., SWITCHING INPUT TO OUTPUT)
    Included here are electron tube or solid-state gating circuits which
    distribute unmodified input signals to selected outputs.

    E.      EXTERNAL EFFECT
    Included here are circuits, not elsewhere classified responsive to or
    compensating for an ambient nonelectrical condition such as heat or
    magnetism.

    F.      WITH PARTIC+ULAR CONTROL
    Included here are circuits where current or power to a broadly recited
    device is controlled in response to a control signal.  The control signal
    may be derived from an external source or from a feedback structure
    responsive to the condition of the load.

    (1)     Note.  Where a specific load device is recited, classification will
    be in the particular class providing for the specific load device.

    G.      SPECIFIC IDENTIFIABLE DEVICE, CIRCUIT, OR SYSTEM

            Included here are circuits having a particular structure,
    arrangement, or construction not classifiable elsewhere.

    H.      MISCELLANEOUS
    Included here are systems or circuits not provided for elsewhere.

    III.    ACTIVE FILTERS
    The filters proper for this class include at least one active device
    utilized in producing the transfer function defining the frequencies that
    will be passed.


            A filter in combination with a specific load will be classified in
    the class providing for the load.

            Filtering of data (i.e., intelligence) within an electrical digital
    calculating computer is classified in Class 364, subclasses 724.011 -
    724.2.

            Filtering of data (i.e.  intelligence) within an electrical analog
    computer is classified in Class 364, subclass 825.

            The filters within the SPECIFIC IDENTIFIABLE DEVICE, CIRCUIT, OR
    SYSTEM area are active filters that suppress an unwanted input signal.  See
    section IV below for additional noise filter areas within Class 327.

    IV.     NOISE FILTERS

            Limiting, clipping, or clamping circuits which achieve transient or
    signal noise reduction by filtering or otherwise are classified in
    subclasses 310+.


            Compensation  for  a  noise  signal  which  is  a  by-product of
    switching thereof is found in subclasses 379+.

            Miscellaneous unwanted signal suppression is classified in
    subclasses 551+.

    V.      PHASE LOCK LOOP
    A nonlinear phase lock loop circuit, per se, is classified in Class 327.  A
    phase lock loop circuit in combination with a special art device, is
    classified with the special art device.  For example, a phase lock loop
    claimed in combination with an oscillator is classified in Class 331,
    subclasses 172+, a phase lock loop in combination with a telecommunication
    system is classified in Class 455, and a phase lock loop in combination
    with a pulse or digital communication system is classified in Class 375,
    subclasses 111+.

            Class 327, subclasses 147+ and 156+ provide for a phase lock loop
    to synchronize one signal with another for the creation of a replica signal.

    VI.     DIGITAL LOGIC
    Digital logic, per se, is classified in Class 326 and this includes, for
    example, multiple connections of AND, OR, or NOT gates.  However,
    combinations of multiple AND or OR gates, etc., which perform a particular
    function proper to some other class are classified in that other class.
    For example, an AND gate claimed to be used as a comparator, for example,
    will be classified in Class 327, whereas a claimed AND gate, per se, would
    be classified in Class 326.

    VII.    MULTIVIBRATOR

            Patents reciting a free running astable multivibrator, per se, are
    classified in Class 331, Oscillators.

            For example, relaxation oscillator multivibrators are classified in
    331/144.

            Multivibrators having one or more stable states are classified
    herein in subclasses 185+.

            Generally, detailed flip-flops, per se, are in this class,
    subclasses 185+; however, multifunctional or programmable logic having a
    flip-flop is in Class 326, subclasses 37+ and redundant logic having a
    flip-flop is in Class 326, subclass 12.

    VIII. INTEGRATED STRUCTURE
    An integrated circuit chip, per se, is classified in Class 257.

            Lead frames, per se, are classified in Class 257 since these are
    only used to connect an integrated circuit chip externally.

            An integrated circuit chip in combination with a single lead, a
    battery or bias without any additional circuit configuration is classified
    in Class 257.

            An integrated circuit chip in combination with an external circuit
    proper for Class 327 will be classified in Class 327 since Class 327 is
    higher than Class 257 in the overall class hierarchy.

            Circuit interconnections (e.g., point to point, lead
    interconnections, diode and transistor interconnections, etc.) within the
    confines of the integrated circuit chip itself are classified in Class 257,
    whereas circuit interconnections outside the environment of an integrated
    circuit chip are not.

            If an integrated circuit is recited with other than a nominal
    recitation of a utility, the patent will be classified in the utility class
    (e.g., Class 348 (Television), Class 365 (Static Information Storage and
    Retrieval), etc.).

    IX.     CHARGE COUPLED DEVICES
    CCD's recited as part of the circuitry within an integrated circuit chip
    are classified in Class 257.

            CCD's recited with other than a nominal recitation of utility are
    classified in the utility class (e.g., Class 326 for a logical function;
    Class 327 for delay; Class 340 Communications: Electrical; Class 348
    Television; Class 396 Photography; Class 365, Static Information Storage
    and Retrieval; Class 377/57+ (for counters), etc.).

    X.      POWER SUPPLIES
    Power supplies in combination with another art device, classifiable
    elsewhere, will be found with the other art device.  Tubes or solid-state
    device power supplies for a nonlinear device, circuit, or system, not
    elsewhere classified, will remain in this class (327).

            A power supply in  combination with a load, (i.e., a single power
    supply and a single load) without any claim to a substrate circuit is
    classified in Class 323 (ELECTRICITY:  POWER SUPPLY OR REGULATION SYSTEMS).

            The power supply patents of this class, subclasses 530+ require a
    nonlinear device, circuit, or system as a load or control for the power
    supply.  A claim to a power supply circuit in combination with a substrate
    containing a nonlinear device, circuit, or system is classified in Class
    327.

    XI.     SYSTEMS WITH SPECIFIC SOURCE OF INPUT  ENERGY ONLY IDENTIFIED BY
    CHARACTERISTIC  This class does not provide for the subject matter included
    herein in combination with a specific type of electromagnetic wave energy
    since the broad recitation of the specific source would be classifiable
    with the art containing that particular source of energy.  However, this
    class will take the systems and networks of the class in combination with a
    source of wave energy wherein the energy is expressed only as being
    composed of a band of frequencies or a source of pulses, etc., or wherein
    the source is recited by name only as a wave energy generator (such as an
    oscillator, pulse generator, etc.).  Where the specific details of the
    source are recited such systems are classified with the art which provides
    for systems utilizing such specific source.

    XII.    MECHANICAL STRUCTURE
    Claims to a specific mechanical structure in combination with generic
    circuitry are classified with the mechanical structure.  However, claims to
    broad mechanical structure in combination with specific circuitry is
    classified in this class unless provided for in a mechanical or electrical
    class and provided the circuitry is nonlinear.

    XIII. MEMORY CIRCUIT
    A generic nonlinear circuit claimed with a memory inside the circuit is
    classified in this class (327), whereas a claim to generic circuitry in
    combination with a memory external to the circuit would be classified with
    the memory class.

    XIV.     MONITORING, TEST OR CALIBRATING
    The following areas reciting monitoring, testing or calibrating take
    precedence over Class 327:

            Class 73, subclasses 1.01+ for instrument proving or calibrating;
    and subclass 865.9 for testing of apparatus.

            Class 324, subclass 601 for calibration, and subclasses 74+ for
    testing and calibrating of electric meters.

            Class 342, subclasses 165+ for testing or calibrating a radar
    system.

            Class 348, subclasses 180+ for television monitoring or testing.

            Class 358, subclass 406 for facsimile measuring or testing.

            Class 364, subclasses 571.01+ for testing and measuring which
    includes a computation.

            Class 374, subclasses 1+ for thermal measuring and testing.

            Class 455, subclass 115 for measuring, testing or monitoring of a
    transmitter and subclass 226 for measuring, testing, or monitoring of a
    receiver.  Only monitoring, testing, or calibrating, not elsewhere
    classified, and related to nonlinear devices, circuits and systems are
    classified in Class 327.  The following are examples of those found in
    Class 327: subclasses 20, 262, 292, 378, 509, and 538.

            Class 600, subclass 486 for testing means inserted in the human
    body.

    XV.     FUNCTION
    Only those nonlinear circuits or systems whose function is not specifically
    provided for elsewhere would be classified in Class 327, subclasses 334+.

    XVI. SWITCHING
    The following are examples of other areas for switching;

            Class 200 for electrical and mechanical switches.

            Class 307 for electrical transmission and interconnection switching
    systems.

            Class 335 for magnetic switches.

            Class 337 for thermal switches.

    XVII. CIRCUITS WITH ELECTRON OR OTHER CHARGED PARTICLE BEAM TUBEOnly those
    nonlinear circuits utilizing electron or other charged particle beams that
    are not classifiable in other areas would be classified in Class 327.

            Examples of electron or other charged particle beam tube circuits
    classified elsewhere are the cyclotron and CRT circuits of Class 313.

    XVIII. MODULATION OR COMMUNICATION
    Nonlinear circuits used in combination with a modulated signal are
    classified in the classes containing the communication of information via a
    modulated signal.

    XIX. ELECTRICAL CONTROL OF MACHINES
    Electrical control with a broad machine is classified with the machine, if
    a class exists for the machine.  Only those electrical control patents, not
    provided for in the machine classes, would be classified in Class 327,
    provided the circuit is nonlinear.

    XX.     NEURON CIRCUITS OR NETWORKS

            Patents reciting neuron simulator circuitry, per se, and neural
    networks are classified in Class 395, subclasses 21+.

    XXI. FUSIBLE LINK AND INTENTIONAL DESTRUCT CIRCUIT
    Miscellaneous circuits of this type are classified in Class 327, subclass
    525.

    XXII. OSCILLATORS
    Free running oscillators (including the asynchronous type) are classified
    in Class 331.

    XXIII. PERSONNEL OR DEVICE PROTECTIVE CIRCUITS
    Circuits used to protect personnel from harm, or protect devices from
    failure (e.g., overload, power surge) are excluded from this class and are
    generally classified in Class 307, subclasses 326+, or Class 361,
    subclasses 1+.

    XXIV. SYSTEMS WITH SPECIFIC LOADS IN THE OUTPUT  CIRCUIT
    This class does not provide for the subject matter in combination with a
    specific load device even though the load device is recited by name only
    (as a motor, loud-speaker, etc.).  Such systems are classified in general
    with the particular art device constituting the load.

    XXV. AMPLIFIERS
    This class does not include electronic circuits, per se, wherein a variable
    electric current or voltage input signal is applied to an electrical
    amplifying device to control a source of electrical energy applied to the
    same device, and from which is derived an output signal of substantially
    the same waveform as the input signal and substantially linearly related
    thereto.

    XXVI. LINEAR DEVICE, CIRCUITS OR SYSTEMS
    This class excludes linear resistors, reactive apparatus and insulators,
    per se.  Although the claimed solid-state device may be active or passive
    and have some insulative or reactive properties, it cannot be classified in
    this class if the device is generally thought of as being only an insulator
    or reactive apparatus such as a capacitor, inductor, transformer, motor,
    etc.

    XXVII.  COUNTERS
    Electrical pulse counters, pulse dividers, or shift registers are
    classified in Class 377.

    XXVIII. PASSIVE FILTERS
    Class 333 provides for filters utilizing lumped or distributed parameter
    passive elements.  See, for example, subclasses 167+, 186+, and 202+.

    XXIX.   SPECIAL ART DEVICES
    Special art devices are to be classified with the specified device.

    XXX.    GAS TUBE
    Circuitry utilizing gas tubes not elsewhere provided for are included here.
     See, for example, subclasses 601+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 25.01+ for semiconductor or barrier layer
    device making apparatus.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for systems and
    apparatus for making a measurement or test not provided for in other
    classes, particularly subclasses 1.01+ for instrument proving or
    calibrating, and subclass 865.9 for testing of apparatus.

    84,     Music, subclasses 600+ for electrical musical tone generation using
    transistors or space discharge devices.

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric appropriate subclasses.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 33+ for barrier layer stock material.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, appropriate subclasses for
    the physical structure of conductors.

    178,    Telegraphy, appropriate subclasses for telegraph apparatus and
    systems, particularly subclass 43 for space induction systems, and
    subclasses 66.1+ for alternating or pulsating current telegraph systems.

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, appropriate subclasses.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses
    for electric switches and circuit breakers.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus for producing chemical changes through the agency of electrical
    wave energy.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 600-780 for induction,
    electro-static  or   electro-magnetic heating systems and subclass 114 for
    welding circuits with space discharge tube control.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, appropriate subclass for electric
    circuits utilized in railway switches and signals.

    250,    Radiant Energy, appropriate subclasses for the detection of nuclear
    or electromagnetic radiant energy, the testing of material by nuclear or
    electromagnetic radiant energy, the irradiation of material by nuclear or
    electromagnetic radiant energy, electron energy analysis, the deflection or
    focussing of an ion or electron beam, and the generation of control of
    nuclear or electromagnetic radiant energy.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 62.3+ for barrier layer compositions and
    subclasses 500+ for other semiconductor compositions.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses for particular nonlinear solid-state devices, per se.

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants, appropriate subclass for electric
    circuits utilized in prime mover dynamo plants.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for circuits providing electrical transmission or
    interconnection such as those having plural energy sources or plural loads
    and class appropriate switching systems, wave form determinative networks,
    and circuits responsive to external effects such as temperature or
    magnetism.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, appropriate subclasses for
    the physical structure of electric generators and motors and
    electromagnetic clutches and for the circuits that relate to
    electromagnetic clutches, and particularly subclasses 314+ for
    piezoelectric devices in combination with tube structure where the
    significant structure claimed is that of the crystal, and the tube
    structure or circuitry is only incidentally claimed.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses for the
    physical structure of electronic lamp and discharge devices, per se.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Consumable Electrodes,
    appropriate subclasses for electric lamp and discharge devices of the arc
    discharge type which may be combined with an electron space discharge tube.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for circuits in combination with charged particle beam tubes,
    cathode-ray tubes or electric lamp and space discharge devices,
    particularly subclasses 8.51+ for pulse storage systems utilizing
    cathode-ray tubes, and subclasses 84.51+ for pulse storing systems
    comprised exclusively of gaseous discharge tubes.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 677+ for electric
    motor position servomechanisms utilizing electron space discharge
    apparatus; subclasses 126+ for energizing of winding circuit control
    responsive to condition, pulsed energy etc.; subclass 132 which relates to
    space discharge or unidirectionally conductive devices in a winding control
    circuit; subclass 138 for a space discharge device commutated motor; and
    subclasses 505+, 732, 752, 756, and 786 for motor control systems utilizing
    space discharge devices.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass for a battery or capacitor charging or discharging
    application that employs a space-discharge device.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclasses 72+ for electron
    space discharge tube systems for controlling a single generator.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for circuits utilized in power voltage magnitude and phase
    control systems.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for
    circuits utilized in electrical measuring, testing, and sensing systems.

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry,appropriate subclasses for
    combinational or sequential logic, per se.

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses for circuits extracting
    information from a carrier.

    330,    Amplifiers, appropriate subclasses for electron space discharge
    tube apparatus combined with circuitry to form an amplifier system and
    subclasses 250+ for semiconductor amplifiers.

    331,    Oscillators, appropriate subclasses for electron space discharge
    tube or solid-state apparatus combined with tuned circuit apparatus forming
    an oscillatory system of the self-sustaining type, an asynchronous
    oscillator, per se, or in combination with other circuitry or an oscillator
    combined with a phase lock loop without any intelligence claimed;
    subclasses 8+ for transistorized automatic frequency control for
    oscillators; and subclasses 108+ for solid-state oscillators.

    332,    Modulators, appropriate subclasses for circuitry which superimposes
    information on a carrier.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 19 for passive
    element wave differentiating or integrating systems, subclasses 24+ for
    passive filters, and subclass 20 for wave shaping networks of the passive
    element type.

    334,    Tuners, appropriate subclasses for tuning circuitry.

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, appropriate subclasses for magnetically operated switches
    and circuit breakers.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for passive inductive
    devices.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    appropriate subclasses for thermal switches, per se.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 146.2 for digital comparator
    systems, subclass 825.97 for electron beam type selective or remote control
    systems, subclass 825.57 for pulse responsive selective systems, subclass
    825.67 for pulse responsive counting chains which may employ an electron
    space discharge device, and subclasses 870.01+ for telemetering systems.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 50+ for code
    converters and subclasses 20+, 186, and 191 for a pulse transmitter or
    generator having a space discharge device.

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    radar, Radio Navigation), appropriate subclasses for systems for object
    detection and utilizing pulse radio wave forms and subclass 165 for testing
    or calibrating a radar system.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, appropriate subclasses for
    antennas, per se.

    348,    Television, subclasses 180+ for television monitoring or testing.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 1+ for sound accompanied
    motion pictures including active electronic devices.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 3+ for systems using
    light for distance finding and subclasses 26+ for light systems for the
    determination of velocity.

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 406 for facsimile measuring or testing.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements,
    appropriate subclasses for optical components.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, appropriate
    subclasses.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    safety and protection of  systems and devices, subclasses 100+ for current
    fault sensor with semiconductor circuit interrupter, subclasses 139+ for
    control circuits for electromagnetic devices, and subclasses 196+ for
    control circuits for electromagnetic devices with time delay including a
    semiconductor device.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    circuits utilized in electric conversion systems where a single electrical
    source is connected to a single electrical load and particularly subclasses
    94, 99, 111+, 151, and 166 for systems whereby a current or voltage of one
    characteristic is converted to a current or voltage of another
    characteristic and utilizing electron space discharge devices.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 550+
    for testing and measuring which includes a computation, subclass 742 for
    the performance of arithmetic operations by a CRT, subclasses 724.011-724.2
    for digital filters unique to digital computing, subclass 825 for analog
    filters which are unique to analog computing, and subclass 855 for function
    generation which utilizes a CRT.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 73+ for
    recirculation of information in a storage read/write system, subclass 78
    for plural shift register memory devices, subclasses 80+ for magnetic shift
    register, per se, subclasses 129+ for storage systems using a particular
    storage element, subclasses 189.01+ for read/write circuits peculiar to a
    storage and retrieval system, and subclasses 230.01+ for addressing
    circuits peculiar to a storage and retrieval system.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    appropriate subclasses.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, appropriate subclasses.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for multiplexing
    systems.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery,
    appropriate subclasses.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 70, 102+, 135+,
    and 147 for electric furnaces having significant electrical circuits.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 1+ for thermal
    calibration.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 106+ for digital
    communication synchronization.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, appropriate subclasses for electrical pulse counters,
    dividers, and shift registers and particularly subclasses 57+ for charge
    coupled devices used as a counter, pulse divider, or shift register.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 91+ for circuits
    combined with X-ray devices.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, appropriate subclasses, for telephone
    systems.

    380,    Cryptography, appropriate subclasses for cryptographic circuitry.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    94.1+ for noise suppressing audio circuitry and subclass 111 for circuitry
    combined with a specific type of microphone or loudspeaker.

    382,    Image Analysis, appropriate subclasses.

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, art collection 913 for motor
    control systems including space discharge devices.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 21+ for
    neuron circuits and networks.

    396,    Photography, appropriate subclasses for apparatus producing
    pictures on light sensitive material which may utilize electronic devices.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 58+ for coating processes wherein an
    electrical product is produced.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 620 for
    semiconductor stock material.

    437,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, appropriate
    subclasses for processes of making semiconductor devices.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    appropriate subclasses for circuits utilized in the manufacture or repair
    of electric lamp or electric space discharge devices.

    455,    Telecommunications, appropriate subclasses for telecommunication
    systems and subsystems.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 300+ for diagnostic apparatus utilizing
    transistors or tubes.


CLS 327/1
TXT SPECIFIC SIGNAL DISCRIMINATING (E.G., COMPARING, SELECTING, ETC.) WITHOUT
    SUBSEQUENT CONTROL:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein an output signal is
    derived from one or more input signals by comparing, selecting, or
    distinguishing a particular input signal parameter and which parameter is
    not continuously thereafter regulated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100+,   for signal converting, shaping, or generating which may include
    control of the type of signal parameters found herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 250 for wave meters, subclasses 281+ for
    systems adapted for ionic separation or analysis and comprising phase or
    frequency determining devices.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 683 for electric motor
    position servomechanisms involving phase comparison devices.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 32 for automatic
    frequency control for generator systems.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 212+
    for automatic phase control systems restricted to power circuits.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 76.39+ for
    frequency measuring or testing of electricity and subclasses 76.77+ for
    phase comparison systems for measuring or testing electricity and involving
    plural inputs.

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses for demodulators of signals
    which have been modulated by an intelligence signal.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 146.2 for digital comparator
    systems, subclasses 315, 825.06+, and 870.18+ for electrical circuits
    whereby an indication or signal is transmitted to a distant point and which
    signal is indicative of an electrical condition which may comprise phase or
    frequency difference.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 236+ for
    speed-controlled systems involving phase or frequency determining devices.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery,
    appropriate subclasses for error detection/correction of information
    content.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 106+ for
    synchronization in digital communications.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 130+ for a telecommunication
    receiver.


CLS 327/2
TXT By phase:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the discriminated input signal
    parameter is that fractional part of a periodic waveform which has elapsed
    relative to a fixed origin.

    (1)     Note.  If the time for one signal period is represented as 360
    degrees along a time axis, the phase position is called the phase angle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39+,    for frequency comparison circuits.

    231+,   for phase correction or control.

    261+,   for output waveform production delay.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    303,    Fluid-Pressure and Analogous  Brake System, subclasses 91+ for
    speed-controlled vehicle systems.

    329,    Demodulators, subclasses 345+ for phase angle demodulation in which
    a intelligence signal is extracted.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 1+ for systems for stabilizing the
    frequency of an oscillator utilizing phase or frequency comparison devices,
    and subclasses 37+ for systems wherein two or more frequencies are combined
    to produce a beat frequency.

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 144+ for systems wherein the  phase of a
    carrier wave is modulated by an arbitrarily varying quantity.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 214+, for frequency or phase
    modulation with particular discrimination or detection.


CLS 327/3
TXT Comparison between plural inputs (e.g., phase angle indication, lead-lag
    discriminator, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the output signal is indicative of
    the phase positioning or phase differences among two or more input signals.

    (1)     Note.  Detectors producing an output which is a result of
    demodulation of a carrier having previously been modulated by an
    intelligence waveform which varies arbitrarily will not be classified here.
     See SEARCH CLASS below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40+,    for comparison between plural input frequencies.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    329,    Demodulators, subclasses 345+ for circuits producing an output
    which is a result of demodulation of a carrier having previously been phase
    modulated by an intelligence waveform.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, appropriate subclasses for phase
    conversion circuits with phase angle sensing.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 130+ for mixers or converters
    utilized in a superheterodyne receiver (commonly referred to as a first
    detector).


CLS 327/4
TXT With transducer:

    Subject matter under subclass 3 wherein a device  is included that converts
    energy forms other than electrical into electrical energy.

    (1)     Note.  The other energy forms may be mechanical, thermal,
    hydraulic, or chemical, etc.


CLS 327/5
TXT With input derived from feedback:

    Subject matter under subclass 3 wherein a portion of the output signal is
    returned to one of the plural inputs.


CLS 327/6
TXT With electron space discharge:

    Subject matter under subclass 3 including a vacuum tube device or a gaseous
    medium within a gas tight envelope in which electron conduction takes place
    through the vacuum or gas.


CLS 327/7
TXT With reference signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 3 wherein a signal of fixed phase acts as a
    constant for comparison to a variable input.

    (1)     Note.  The reference signal is usually an input signal or produced
    from an input signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for frequency comparison between a fixed reference frequency and a
    variable input.


CLS 327/8
TXT With varying frequency:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein the reference signal varies over a
    range of different frequencies or the reference signal is compared to
    different frequency signals.


CLS 327/9
TXT With sampling:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein a reference signal is derived by
    representation of an input signal at intermittently timed intervals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91+,    for details of sampling or holding in general.


CLS 327/10
TXT Uniform pulse waveform:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein the reference signal is a series of
    pulses evenly spaced.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for a frequency comparison between a fixed reference frequency and
    a variable input.


CLS 327/11
TXT With transformer:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein an electromagnetic induction device
    transfers electrical energy from one circuit to another adjacent circuit at
    a constant frequency.

    (1)     Note.  A transformer changes voltage in direct proportion to the
    ratio of the number of turns of its primary and secondary windings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for transformer details.


CLS 327/12
TXT With logic or bistable circuit:

    Subject matter under 3 wherein the phase comparison (a) includes a device
    performing Boolean functions such as AND, OR, or exclusive-OR or (b)
    utilizes a device having two stable states.

    (1)     Note.  The combination of logic with specific phase comparison
    circuitry or function, not elsewhere classified is classified here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185+,   for particular stable state circuits including bistable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 93+ for clocking or
    synchronizing of one or more logic stages and appropriate subclasses for
    general digital logic circuitry not classified elsewhere.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 1 for automatic frequency control
    synchronization with logic elements.


CLS 327/13
TXT By shape:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein input signal discriminating is
    based upon a predetermined geometric configuration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    for sawtooth or triangular wave producing systems with slope or
    duration control.

    172+,   for pulse signal shaping with duration or width control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 525+ for sync separating systems which may
    depend upon differences in the slope or shape of the input pulses.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 296+ for static or noise elimination
    in radio receivers which may depend upon the slope or shape of the pulse
    present in the input signal applied to the receiver.


CLS 327/14
TXT Slope:

    Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein the predetermined geometric
    configuration is signal rate of change.

    (1)     Note.  The rate of change may be determined by digital means (such
    as counters) or analog means (such as slope detection using a charging
    capacitor).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    for sawtooth or triangular waveform generation with slope control.

    170,    for slope control of a pulse or clock waveform.

    261+,   for output waveform production delay.

    335,    for the miscellaneous determination of the derivative of an input
    signal.


CLS 327/15
TXT With direction (i.e., positive or negative):

    Subject matter under subclass 14 wherein the output signal indicates an
    upward or downward inclination of the input.


CLS 327/16
TXT Having feedback:

    Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein a portion of the output signal is
    returned to an input.


CLS 327/17
TXT With reference signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein a signal of predetermined shape
    acts as a constant for comparison to a variable input.


CLS 327/18
TXT By presence or absence pulse detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein an output signal is indicative of
    an unexpected occurrence or lack of occurrence of a pulse in either a
    clocking signal or a predetermined sequence of pulses.


CLS 327/19
TXT Arbitration:

    Subject matter under subclass 18 wherein a particular pulse among plural
    pulses input during a particular time interval is selected based upon a
    predetermined priority arrangement.

    SEARCH THIS  CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3+,     for phase discrimination.


CLS 327/20
TXT Monitoring (e.g., failure detection, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 18 wherein the detection of an undesired
    absent or present pulse produces an output signal which indicates a failure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    292,    for clock fault compensation.


CLS 327/21
TXT With variable frequency source:

    Subject matter under subclass 18 wherein the absent or present pulse is
    detected from a varying frequency input signal.


CLS 327/22
TXT By pulse noncoincidence:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein an output signal is produced when
    two or more input pulses are not received simultaneously.


CLS 327/23
TXT By pulse coincidence:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein an output signal is produced when
    two or more input pulse signals occur simultaneously.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 104+ for circuits
    performing fundamental Boolean Algebra functions, especially the ``AND"
    function.


CLS 327/24
TXT Edge sensing:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein a beginning or trailing end of a
    pulse is determined to occur simultaneously with a corresponding beginning
    or trailing end of another pulse.


CLS 327/25
TXT With uniform spacing:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein an output signal is produced when
    two or more input pulse signals having the same time interval between
    consecutive pulses occur simultaneously.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31+,    for detecting a pulse width or spacing in general.


CLS 327/26
TXT With pulse width detecting:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein pulse width discriminating is
    achieved via a pulse coincidence operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31+,    for detecting pulse width or spacing in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    329,    Demodulators, subclass 312 for a pulse width demodulator.


CLS 327/27
TXT With reference:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein an input pulse signal is compared
    with a predetermined standard signal.


CLS 327/28
TXT By polarity:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the input signal parameter is its
    positive or negative orientation with respect to a fixed origin.


CLS 327/29
TXT Selection of a particular polarity:

    Subject matter under subclass 28 wherein only a predetermined polarity of
    an input signal is chosen.


CLS 327/30
TXT Opposite polarity:

    Subject matter under subclass 28 wherein an output signal results from
    comparing pulses which have or are expected to have differing polarities.


CLS 327/31
TXT By pulse width or spacing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the input signal parameter is (a) a
    time interval between a leading edge and a trailing edge of a single pulse
    or (b) a time interval between a trailing edge and a leading edge of two
    consecutive pulses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172+,   for pulse signal shaping with duration or width control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communication:  Electrical, subclass 825.63 for pulse width
    selective actuation and subclass 825.64 for pulse spacing selective
    actuation.


CLS 327/32
TXT With shock-excited circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 31 including a resonant circuit which
    oscillates at its natural frequency upon application of an electrical
    impulse.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    596,    for miscellaneous circuitry containing shock excited resonant
    components.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, appropriate subclasses for free running generators
    utilizing shock excited resonant circuits.

    334,    Tuners, appropriate subclasses for tuned networks for use in wave
    energy apparatus and comprising inductance and capacitance elements in
    circuit arrangement to form a resonant circuit and in which structure is
    provided for adjusting one or both of these elements for changing the mean
    resonant frequency of the circuit.


CLS 327/33
TXT With sampling:

    Subject matter under subclass 31 including a circuit providing periodic
    representations of an input signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for phase discriminating with sampling.

    91+,    for detailed sampling or holding circuits, per se.


CLS 327/34
TXT Narrow pulse elimination or suppression:

    Subject matter under subclass 31 wherein the output signal does not include
    portions of the input signal having a pulse width shorter than a
    predetermined time interval.

    (1)     Note.  Narrow or short pulse (spurious) duration in a system may be
    noise, which is unwanted disturbances superimposed upon a useful signal and
    which tends to obscure its information content.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172+,   for rectangular or pulse waveform continuous width control.

    178+,   for rectangular or pulse waveform amplitude control which may
    include some noise reduction.

    310+,   for transient or signal noise reduction by limiting, clipping, or
    clamping.

    379+,   for noise overriding in gating or switching.

    551+,   for miscellaneous unwanted signal elimination.


CLS 327/35
TXT Separating by duration or gap (e.g., duty cycle, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 31 wherein (a) an input pulse signal is
    divided between long and short pulses contained therein or (b) a space is
    inserted between the trailing edge of a pulse and the leading edge of the
    next pulse or (c) a spacing between pulses is detected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134+,   for duration control of a triangular or sawtooth wave.

    172+,   for rectangular wave or pulse width control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    329,    Demodulators, subclass 312 for a pulse width demodulator.


CLS 327/36
TXT Selection of a particular pulse width:

    Subject matter under subclass 31 wherein a predetermined pulse width is
    chosen from a series of input pulse signals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    329,    Demodulators, subclass 312 for a pulse width demodulator.


CLS 327/37
TXT Comparison by threshold or reference:

    Subject matter under subclass 31 wherein the output signal is indicative of
    the pulse width difference between an input pulse signal and a set value or
    predetermined standard.


CLS 327/38
TXT With plural paths:

    Subject matter under subclass 31 wherein an input signal passes through
    more than one route or channel between an input terminal and an output
    terminal.


CLS 327/39
TXT By frequency:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the discriminated signal parameter
    relates to the number of times a signal repeats its basic waveform within a
    unit of time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for discriminating by phase.

    47+,    for circuits where the output is present only at a predetermined
    frequency of the input.

    113+,   for miscellaneous frequency or repetition rate control.

    114+,   for pulse generating which includes frequency or repetition rate
    control.

    231+,   for phase correction or control.

    261+,   for output waveform production delay.

    552+,   for unwanted signal suppression by an active filter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    303,    Fluid-Pressure and Analogous  Brake System, subclasses 91+ for
    speed-controlled fluid-pressure brake systems.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 76.19+ for a
    frequency spectrum analyzer and subclasses 76.39+ for measuring and testing
    of the frequency of cyclic current or voltage.

    329,    Demodulators, subclasses 315+ for frequency demodulation in which
    an intelligence signal is extracted.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 1+ for systems for stabilizing the
    frequency of an oscillator utilizing phase or frequency comparison devices
    and subclasses 37+ for systems wherein two or more frequencies are combined
    to produce a beat frequency.

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 117+ for systems wherein the frequency of a
    carrier wave is modulated by an arbitrarily varying quantity.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 484 for
    electrical computers which perform frequency measuring or testing.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 214 for frequency or phase modulation
    with particular discrimination or detection.


CLS 327/40
TXT Comparison between plural inputs:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 wherein the output signal is a function of
    the differences among two or more input signal frequencies.

    (1)     Note.  Systems wherein the claimed subject matter includes
    apparatus which responds only when a noninformation bearing input signal is
    in synchronism with a control signal locally generated (synchronous
    detectors) and which are not claimed as an integral part of a more
    comprehensive system will be classified herein.  Detectors producing an
    output which is a result of demodulation of a carrier having previously
    been modulated by an intelligence waveform which varies arbitrarily will
    not be classified here.  See SEARCH CLASS, below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for phase comparison between plural input signals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses for a circuit having an output
    which is a result of demodulation of a carrier having previously been
    frequency modulated by an intelligence waveform.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 130+, for mixers or converters
    utilized in a superheterodyne receiver (commonly referred to as a first
    detector), and subclasses 313+ for combining frequencies in a receiver to
    produce a beat frequency.


CLS 327/41
TXT With synchronous detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 40 wherein the output signal provides an
    indication of the maintenance of precise matching between two or more input
    signal frequencies.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141+,   for synchronizing control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 1+ for controlling frequency
    synchronization in oscillator circuits (e.g., phase lock loop circuits,
    etc.).

    348,    Television, subclasses 638+ and 726+ for television receivers that
    may include synchronous detectors.


CLS 327/42
TXT Fixed frequency reference signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 40 wherein a signal of constant frequency
    acts as a standard for comparison to a variable input signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7+,     for a fixed  phase signal compared to a variable input.


CLS 327/43
TXT With logic or bistable circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 40 wherein the frequency comparison of plural
    signals (a) includes a device performing Boolean functions such as AND, OR,
    or exclusive-OR or (b) utilizes a device having two stable states.

    (1)     Note.  The combination of logic with specific frequency comparison
    circuitry or function, not elsewhere classified is classified here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185+,   for particular stable state circuits including bistable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclass 93+ for clocking or
    synchronizing of one or more logic stages and appropriate subclasses for
    general digital logic circuitry not classified elsewhere.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 1 for automatic frequency control
    synchronization with logic elements.


CLS 327/44
TXT With predetermined frequency selection:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 wherein the output signal consists of a
    chosen input signal having a specific frequency characteristic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    552+,   for unwanted signal suppression by an active filter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses for circuits which select
    signals from modulated wave signals.


CLS 327/45
TXT Including sampling or reference frequency:

    Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein (a) the predetermined signal
    frequency selected is derived by representation of another known signal
    frequency at intermittent time intervals or (b) wherein a signal of fixed
    frequency is utilized in the frequency selection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7+,     for phase angle sensing circuits using a reference signal.

    42,     for a fixed frequency reference signal used in plural signal
    frequency comparison.


CLS 327/46
TXT Including plural frequency detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein more than one signal frequency is
    detected by a single circuit or system.


CLS 327/47
TXT Frequency detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 wherein an output signal is present or
    changes only at a predetermined input frequency.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for the conversion of input frequency to output current or voltage.

    113+,   for frequency or repetition rate control.

    552+,   for unwanted signal elimination by an active filter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 724.08
    for frequency detection/filtering using an electrical digital calculating
    computer.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclass 346 for a repeater with voice
    frequency discriminator.


CLS 327/48
TXT With counting:

    Subject matter under subclass 47 wherein the output signal is incremented
    or decremented at a predetermined interval thereby forming a variable duty
    cycle according to the changes in the input frequency signal.

    (1)     Note.  A counter is a device capable of changing between a sequence
    of distinguishable states upon each receipt of an input signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, for counters, per se.


CLS 327/49
TXT With logic or bistable circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 47 wherein the frequency detection (a)
    includes a device performing Boolean functions such as AND, OR, or
    exclusive-OR or (b) utilizes a device having two stable states.

    (1)     Note.  The combination of logic with specific frequency detection
    circuitry or function, not elsewhere classified, is classified here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185+,   for particular stable state circuits including bistable.

    SEARCH  THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 93+ for clocking or
    synchronizing of one or more logic stages and appropriate subclasses for
    general digital logic circuitry not classified elsewhere.


CLS 327/50
TXT By amplitude:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the discriminated input signal
    parameter is the magnitude of an electrical energy waveform measured with
    respect to a fixed origin.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    178+,   for rectangular or pulse waveform amplitude control.

    306+,   for amplitude control in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 76+ for the
    measuring or testing of electricity, per se.

    329,    Demodulators, subclasses 347+ for amplitude demodulators.


CLS 327/51
TXT With sensing amplifier:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein low-level voltages (e.g., CCD
    charges, capacitive stored signal levels, etc.) are detected and increased
    in magnitude from one level to another.

    (1)     Note.  The voltage amplitude or storage charge levels detected in
    this subclass include the type of levels found in storage memory cells of
    an array; however, the static storage and retrieval of information coupled
    with the functions of ``write", ``read-out", ``erase", etc., wherein
    voltage amplitude is sensed, is classified in Class 365, subclasses 189.01+.

    (2)     Note.  Differential comparator type sensing amplifiers including
    regenerative sensing arrangements (e.g., bistable flip-flops) are
    classified in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for discrimination by polarity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 189.01+ for
    networks including the inserting, extracting, or handling of information
    signals using  the functions of ``write", ``read-out", ``erase", etc.,
    subclasses 185.01+ for floating gate memory storage (e.g., flash memory).


CLS 327/52
TXT Differential amplifier:

    Subject matter under subclass 51 including a device responsive to the
    offset between two input voltages or currents and nonresponsive to voltages
    or currents which are identical in the two inputs.


CLS 327/53
TXT Current mirror:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein the sensing amplifier circuit
    utilizes collector current matching of two transistors when connected base
    to base and emitter to emitter.


CLS 327/54
TXT Having feedback:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein a portion of the output signal is
    returned to an input.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for a miscellaneous sense amplifier with a latching type element.


CLS 327/55
TXT Cross-coupled:

    Subject matter under subclass 54 wherein there are two elements or stages
    which are mutually interconnected (i.e., the output of one is connected to
    the input of the other and vice versa).


CLS 327/56
TXT With reference signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein a signal of fixed voltage
    potential acts as a constant for comparison to a variable input.

    (1)     Note.  The reference signal is usually an input signal or produced
    from an input signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77+,    for amplitude comparison between an input signal and a fixed
    reference, in general.


CLS 327/57
TXT With latching type element (e.g., flip-flop, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 51 wherein the sense amplifier includes a
    device providing signal retention.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185+,   for stable state circuits including bistable.


CLS 327/58
TXT Maximum or minimum amplitude:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein an output signal is caused by
    either a greatest absolute magnitude or a least absolute magnitude of an
    input signal during a time period of interest.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include comparison to a fixed
    reference or threshold.


CLS 327/59
TXT Employing input compared to output:

    Subject matter under subclass 58 wherein a portion of an output signal is
    evaluated relative to an input signal.


CLS 327/60
TXT Employing input compared to reference derived therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 58 wherein a signal from an external source
    is evaluated relative to a voltage or current obtained by processing
    signals from the same source.

    (1)     Note.  For this subclass either the processing or means therefor
    should be claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72+,    for generic amplitude comparing between an input and a reference
    derived therefrom.


CLS 327/61
TXT By diode-capacitor network:

    Subject matter under subclass 58 wherein maximum or minimum amplitude
    discriminating is achieved by an electrical energy storage element combined
    with an element  providing unidirectional current flow.


CLS 327/62
TXT Maximum and minimum amplitude:

    Subject matter under subclass 58 wherein an output signal is caused by both
    the greatest absolute magnitude and least absolute magnitude of an input
    signal during a time period of interest.


CLS 327/63
TXT Comparison between plural varying inputs:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein fluctuating input signals from two
    or more sources external to a system are evaluated relative to one another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72+,    for evaluation of an input signal relative to a reference derived
    therefrom.

    74+,    for a system wherein a signal from an external source is evaluated
    relative to plural fixed reference levels.

    77+,    for the evaluation of a signal relative to a single fixed reference
    level.

    78+,    for detection of a crossover point between an input signal and a
    reference level.


CLS 327/64
TXT With logic or bistable circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 63 wherein the comparison by amplitude (a)
    includes a device performing Boolean functions such as AND, OR, or
    exclusive-OR or (b) utilizes a device having two stable states.

    (1)     Note.  The combination of logic with specific amplitude comparison
    circuitry or function, not elsewhere classified is classified here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185+,   for particular stable state circuits including bistable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 93+ for clocking or
    synchronizing of one or more logic stages and appropriate subclasses for
    general digital logic circuitry not classified elsewhere.


CLS 327/65
TXT Differential input:

    Subject matter under subclass 63 wherein the differences between the plural
    varying input signals are initially amplified prior to further processing.


CLS 327/66
TXT Current mirror:

    Subject matter under subclass 65 wherein the comparison between plural
    varying inputs utilizes collector current matching of two transistors when
    connected base to base and emitter to emitter.


CLS 327/67
TXT Having feedback:

    Subject matter under subclass 65 wherein a portion of the output signal is
    returned to an input.


CLS 327/68
TXT Input provides varying reference signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 63 wherein at least one of the fluctuating
    inputs provides a changing signal to be used only as an evaluation standard.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for amplitude discriminating where a reference signal is internally
    derived from one of the inputs.


CLS 327/69
TXT With plural paths:

    Subject matter under subclass 63 wherein an input signal passes through
    more than one route or channel between an input terminal and an output
    terminal.


CLS 327/70
TXT With single output:

    Subject matter under subclass 69 wherein the plural paths have a common
    output.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    407+,   for plural channel input, single channel output gating systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for similar
    subject matter used with multiplexing.


CLS 327/71
TXT Three or more inputs:

    Subject matter under subclass 63 wherein the number of external signal
    sources is greater than two.


CLS 327/72
TXT Input signal compared to reference derived therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein a signal from an external source
    is evaluated relative to a voltage or current obtained by processing
    signals from the same source.

    (1)     Note.  For classification herein, either the processing or means
    therefor should be recited.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for amplitude discriminating between plural varying inputs where at
    least one of the input signals is a varying reference.

    74+,    for an input signal compared to plural fixed references.

    205+,   for stable state circuits utilizing hysteresis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuits, subclasses 22+ for input noise
    margin enhancement.


CLS 327/73
TXT Reference derived by feedback:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the processing includes extracting
    a signal from an output terminal of the circuit and applying a portion of
    the extracted signal to an input terminal.


CLS 327/74
TXT Input signal compared to plural fixed references:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein input signal amplitude is
    evaluated relative to two or more unvarying voltage or current levels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63+,    for amplitude comparison between plural varying inputs.

    72+,    for an input signal compared to a reference derived therefrom.

    77+,    for an input signal compared to a single fixed reference.

    205+,   for a stable state circuit utilizing hysteresis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuits, subclass 22 for input noise
    margin enhancement.


CLS 327/75
TXT Three or more:

    Subject matter under subclass 74 wherein there are more than two unvarying
    reference levels.


CLS 327/76
TXT With logic or bistable circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 74 wherein the comparison by amplitude
    between the input signal and plural fixed references (a) includes a device
    performing Boolean functions such as AND, OR, or exclusive-OR or (b)
    utilizes a device having two stable states.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185+,   for particular stable state circuits including bistable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, for general digital logic
    circuitry not classified elsewhere and particularly subclasses 93+ for
    clocking or synchronizing of one or more logic stages.


CLS 327/77
TXT Input signal compared to single fixed reference:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein the input signal is evaluated
    relative to a standard which is at a constant level of amplitude.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74+,    for an input signal compared to multiple fixed references.


CLS 327/78
TXT Reference level crossover detecting:

    Subject matter under subclass 77 wherein an output signal is produced when
    an input signal actually transits the reference amplitude of a comparison
    standard.

    (1)     Note.  The approach of the input signal to the reference level may
    be from either a positive or a negative direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63+,    for evaluation of plural sources of varying input signals relative
    to each other.

    74+,    for evaluation of an input signal relative to plural fixed
    thresholds.


CLS 327/79
TXT Zero crossover:

    Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein the reference level which is
    transited is zero volts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    451+,   for AC supply zero point switching utilizing a four or more layer
    device such as a thyristor.


CLS 327/80
TXT Reference determined by threshold of single circuit element:

    Subject matter under subclass 77 wherein the amplitude of the comparison
    standard is established  by one electrical component.


CLS 327/81
TXT With transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the single electrical component is
    a three terminal semiconductor device composed of n or p type material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses for transistor structure details.


CLS 327/82
TXT Plural sources of input signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 77 wherein multiple input signals are to be
    evaluated relative to a standard.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63+,    for an amplitude evaluation system having plural varying input
    signals which are to be evaluated against each other.

    72+,    for a comparator system which evaluates an input signal against a
    reference derived from the same signal.


CLS 327/83
TXT Temperature compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 77 wherein an increase or decrease in thermal
    sensitivity of a system is cancelled or reduced by the effects of a
    counterbalancing element in the system.

    (1)     Note.  A counterbalancing element may be, for example, a resistor,
    capacitor, or inductor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    513,    for miscellaneous temperature compensation.


CLS 327/84
TXT With bridge circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 77 including four or more devices with their
    input and output terminals connected in a closed loop to form a four arm
    network.

    (1)     Note.  Another arm, called the diagonal arm, may be connected
    between an input terminal and an output terminal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    587,    for a two electrode solid-state device bridge circuit.

    588,    for miscellaneous bridge circuits.


CLS 327/85
TXT Inverting input or output:

    Subject matter under subclass 77 wherein an input signal or an output
    signal is reversed in sign.


CLS 327/86
TXT With transformer:

    Subject matter under subclass 77 wherein an electromagnetic induction
    device transfers electrical energy between adjacent circuit portions at a
    constant frequency.

    (1)     Note.   A transformer changes voltage in direct proportion to the
    ratio of the number of turns of its primary and secondary windings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for transformer details.


CLS 327/87
TXT Having feedback:

    Subject matter under subclass 77 wherein a portion of the output signal is
    returned to an input.


CLS 327/88
TXT With source as reference:

    Subject matter under subclass 77 wherein a device which supplies signal
    power at a constant voltage or current level is used as a standard for
    comparison.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100+,   for signal generating.

    540+,   for stabilized bias circuits with voltage regulating.


CLS 327/89
TXT With differential amplifier:

    Subject matter under subclass 77 including a device responsive to the
    offset between two input voltages or currents and nonresponsive to voltages
    or currents which are identical in the two inputs.


CLS 327/90
TXT Comparison between two characteristics of an input signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein the output signal is
    representative of the amplitude difference between two consecutive or
    selected points of the input signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91+, for details of a sample or hold circuit.


CLS 327/91
TXT Including details of sampling or holding:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein a representation of an input
    signal magnitude at a particular point in time is produced or an
    established input signal magnitude value is maintained.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124,    for signal generation by periodic switching.

    365+,   for gating of signals, in general.


CLS 327/92
TXT With bridge circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 including four or more devices with their
    input and output terminals connected in a closed loop to form a four arm
    network.

    (1)     Note.  Another arm, called the diagonal arm, may connect an input
    terminal and an output terminal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    587,    for a two electrode solid-state device bridge circuit.

    588,    for miscellaneous bridge circuits.


CLS 327/93
TXT With reference source:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 including a device which supplies signal
    power to a sample or hold circuit at a constant voltage or current level.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100+,   for signal converting, shaping, or generating.

    530+,   for miscellaneous bias voltage supply circuits and particularly
    subclasses 538+ for a stabilized bias voltage supply circuit.


CLS 327/94
TXT Sample and hold:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 wherein a representation of an input
    signal magnitude at a particular point in time is produced and subsequently
    maintained for a time in a storage element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 122+ for sample and
    hold circuits having code generation or conversion.


CLS 327/95
TXT Having feedback:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 wherein a portion of the output signal is
    returned to an input.


CLS 327/96
TXT With differential amplifier:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 including a device responsive to the
    offset between two input voltages or currents and nonresponsive to voltages
    or currents which are identical in the two inputs.


CLS 327/97
TXT With logic or bistable circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein the comparison by amplitude (a)
    includes a device performing Boolean functions such as AND, OR, or
    exclusive-OR, or (b) utilizes a device having two stable states.

    (1)     Note.  The combination of logic with specific amplitude comparison
    circuitry or function, not elsewhere classified is classified here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185+,   for particular stable state circuits including bistable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 93+ for clocking or
    synchronizing of one or more logic stages and appropriate subclasses for
    general digital logic circuitry not classified elsewhere.


CLS 327/98
TXT By separating composite signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the output signal is a selected
    component of a multicomponent input signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     for pulse separating by width or spacing.

    551+,   for miscellaneous signal suppression which may include an active
    filter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 105
    for harmonic filters or neutralizing systems, in general.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 332+ for
    geophysical exploration systems utilizing radiant energy with separate
    detector means whereby signal components are selected or suppressed and
    subclasses 76.12+ for measuring systems which analyze complex electric
    waves.

    330,    Amplifiers, appropriate subclasses for frequency selective linear
    amplifiers.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 76 and 77 for oscillator systems combined
    with harmonic selecting means or wave filter, respectively, in the output
    circuit.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, appropriate subclasses for
    passive type wave selecting systems, particularly subclasses 167+ for wave
    filters, per se.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.71+ for selective
    systems which are frequency responsive.

    348,    Television, subclass 506 for burst separation circuitry, subclasses
    525+ for separating the synchronizing components from a composite signal
    wave, and subclasses 638+ for color signal deriving circuitry.

    704,    Data Processing:  Speech Signal Processing, Linguistics, Language
    Translation, and Audio Compression/Decompression, subclass 200 for systems
    for analyzing complex speech waves (e.g., where the fundamental pitch
    frequency of the human voice is determined).


CLS 327/99
TXT Having selection between plural continuous waveforms:

    Systems under subclass 1 wherein the output signal is one of a plurality of
    simultaneously applied input signal waveforms selected in accordance with a
    predetermined characteristic, the nonselected waveforms being attenuated or
    otherwise suppressed in such a manner that only the desired signal waveform
    appears at the output.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98,     for systems which select a signal component from a composite wave.

    407+,   for distribution systems wherein plural channels are input and the
    output consists of a signal from a selected channel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 76.12+ for analysis
    systems of a complex wave.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 76 for systems comprising an oscillator
    combined with a harmonic selection network and subclass 77 for oscillators
    with a wave selecting output filter.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 167+ for wave
    filters comprised of passive elements.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.71+ for remote control
    or selective signaling systems which are frequency responsive.

    348,    Television, subclasses 525+ for separating the synchronizing
    components from a composite signal wave.


CLS 327/100
TXT SIGNAL CONVERTING, SHAPING, OR GENERATING:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein (a) an inherent input
    signal parameter such as phase, frequency, amplitude, or current is
    modified, maintained at some value, or changed to an entirely different
    parameter, (b) an input signal having a particular waveform is modified
    into an output signal having a partially or completely different waveform,
    or (c) an output signal of specified waveform is produced.

    (1)     Note.  An example of the second type above would be sine wave to
    triangular wave modification.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass and indented subclasses do not include single
    energy systems for conversion wherein a single electrical source circuit is
    coupled to a single electrical load circuit and which involves current,
    phase or frequency conversion, and wherein the energy in the load is
    supplied solely by the source.  Such systems in general are classified in
    Class 363, Electric Power Conversion Systems, appropriate subclasses.  See
    section X of the class definition of Class 363 for other classes providing
    for conversion systems.

    (3)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass and indented subclasses are free
    running signal generators which are classified, for example, in Class 331.

    (4)     Note.  Bias circuits of the pulsing type which establish device
    operating points are classified below with the bias circuits.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334+,   for circuits whose output is proportional to a mathematical
    function of the input.

    544,    for bias circuits of the pulsating type.

    596,    for miscellaneous circuits including a free running oscillatory
    type circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclass 2.06 for electrocardiographs involving timing and
    subclasses 303.13+ for instruments for application of electricity to the
    human body involving timing.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 46 for
    regulation systems involving timing.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 2+ for systems for automatic control of
    a heating system.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 401+
    for nonlinear reactor systems (e.g., saturable) and subclasses 106+ for a
    class appropriate wave shape determinative or pulse producing system.  See
    also appropriate subclasses for plural source or load voltage magnitude and
    phase control.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclasses 364+ for
    cathode ray deflecting circuits involving timing and subclasses 209+ for
    systems involving a periodic switch in the supply circuit of a gaseous
    discharge tube.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 445 for systems of
    automatically starting and/or stopping a motor with timing, subclasses 606+
    for electric motor position servomechanisms with phase or frequency
    control, and subclass 683 for particular phase detectors used in such a
    servomechanism.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    subclasses 166+ for charging or discharging a capacitor, per se.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclasses 17+, especially
    indented subclass 18 for systems involving time delay means in the control
    of a generator or driving.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 212+
    for power supply phase control comprising an electron tube and wherein, in
    general, the tube does not act as an active element.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 83+ for phase
    indicators, subclasses 78+, particularly subclass 82 for measuring or
    testing the frequency of cyclic current or voltage by phase comparison, and
    subclasses 160+ for systems for measuring time or speed.

    330,    Amplifiers,  subclass 107 for amplifiers with phase shifting means
    in a feedback path.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 37+ for systems including an oscillator or
    oscillators generating at least two different frequencies with a signal
    combining device (e.g., mixer, modulator, etc.) having a signal input
    circuit and a signal output circuit where the oscillator or oscillators are
    connected to the signal input circuit of the combining device and the
    device output comprises the sum or difference frequency of the outputs of
    the oscillator or oscillators.

    332,    Modulators, appropriate subclasses for systems including beating a
    source of carrier frequency with a signal wave which varies arbitrarily in
    a continuous manner in accordance with some intelligence.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 18, 23, and 138+
    for delay networks comprising passive elements and subclasses 138+.  See
    (1) Note, above.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 870.24 for telemetering
    systems receiving information by pulse trains with length or spacing varied
    with respect to time.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 50+ for systems
    converting an input consisting of a coded arrangement representing a
    particular group of values to an output consisting of another coded
    arrangement.

    348,    Television, subclasses 469+ for systems generating or formatting a
    television signal.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 195+ for
    time delay networks which control a relay load switching operation.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    single energy conversion systems wherein a single electrical source circuit
    is coupled to a single electrical load circuit.  See (2) Note, above.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 313+ for mixer or converters in
    radio receiver circuits.  See (3) Note, above.


CLS 327/101
TXT Converting input current or voltage to output frequency:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein a repetition rate of an output
    signal is directly related to the magnitude of an input signal current or
    voltage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113+,   for miscellaneous frequency or repetition rate conversion or
    control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 117+ for a frequency modulator.


CLS 327/102
TXT Converting input frequency to output current or voltage:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the magnitude of output signal
    current or voltage is directly related to the repetition rate of the input
    signal.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are devices wherein an input signal of varying
    frequency is changed into a direct current output voltage which is a
    function of the input frequency.

    (2)     Note.  Since period is inversely related to frequency, input period
    conversion to output current or voltage is also included here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39+,    for frequency discrimination and particularly subclasses 47+ for
    frequency detection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    329,    Demodulators, subclasses 315+ for a frequency demodulator.


CLS 327/103
TXT Converting input voltage to output current or vice versa:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein electrical potential is changed
    to an equivalent electrical charge flow or vice versa.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclass 73 for power conversion
    systems between a constant current and a constant voltage or vice versa
    wherein a single source is connected to a single load.


CLS 327/104
TXT Converting, per se, of an AC input to corresponding DC at an unloaded
    output:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein an alternating current input
    signal wave is converted to an unloaded output wave consisting of a
    unidirectional representation of the half cycles of an input wave.

    (1)     Note.  The conversion systems in this subclass do not include
    claimed subject matter such as would define demodulators, detectors, or
    rectifier systems classified elsewhere with specific art devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28+,    for polarity selection or discrimination.

    39+,    for selection or discrimination by repetition rate (i.e.,
    frequency).

    335+,   for a differentiating network.

    336+,   for an integrating network.

    348,    for the determination of the RMS function of an input signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, appropriate subclasses for pulse producing (e.g., by
    rectification of AC signals, etc.) in combination with telegraph systems.
    In Class 178, the pulses are usually representative of a telegraph code.
    Subclasses 118+ relate to telegraph receivers which may include signal
    rectifiers.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, appropriate subclasses for railway
    signaling systems which may include signal rectifying or other conversion
    systems as subcombinations thereof.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 6 for
    systems having series connected converters of different voltages, subclass
    45 for plural supply circuits with intervening converter, subclass 58 for
    load current dividing circuits utilizing plural converters, subclass 82 for
    plural converter systems, subclasses 401+ for nonlinear reactor systems,
    and subclass 107 for wave form or wave shape determining systems with wave
    rectification.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass for charging or discharging a capacitor or battery
    where a rectifier is employed, particularly Digest 31.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 89 for phase
    comparison meters and subclass 119 for meters in general with rectifying.

    329,    Demodulators, for demodulating systems using rectification designed
    to change a signal modulated wave so as to produce in the output circuit a
    pulsating direct current representative of the signal.

    330,    Amplifiers, appropriate subclasses for amplifiers, especially
    subclass 10 for modulator-demodulator type amplifiers.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, appropriate subclasses for
    signaling systems including radar and directive radio systems which may
    include demodulating type conversion systems as subcombinations thereof.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 13+ for rectification
    and derectification involving a single source coupled to a single load in a
    power conversion system.  See the class definition and search notes as to
    lines with other classes and further fields of search for rectifying
    systems.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, appropriate subclasses and
    particularly subclasses 37+ for pulse communication systems using
    alternating or pulsating currents.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, appropriate subclasses for pulse
    producing systems with signal rectifying or other converting for use in
    telephone call transmitter systems.


CLS 327/105
TXT Synthesizer:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein an output waveform is derived
    which at any instant is proportional to the combined values of the
    corresponding instantaneous values of a plurality of input signal waveforms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3+,     for circuits where the output is a function of the phase difference
    between plural input signal wave forms.

    40+,    for circuits where the output is a function of the frequency
    difference between plural input signal wave forms.

    129,    for miscellaneous sine wave generation.

    355+,   for circuits where the output signal is a function of a plurality
    of input signals.

    361,    for mathematical summing of two or more input signals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, subclasses 600+ for generation of electrical musical tones
    utilizing synthesizing techniques.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 77 for systems for
    analyzing complex electric waves and subclass 140 for measuring and testing
    circuits which combine plural inputs.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 37+ for oscillatory circuits whose output
    comprises a beat frequency and subclasses 46+ for plural oscillator systems.

    332,    Modulators, appropriate subclasses for plural wave modulating
    circuits.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclass 20 for passive wave shaping networks.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 313+ for plural wave combining
    heterodyning systems utilized in radio receivers wherein the output is a
    beat frequency.


CLS 327/106
TXT Having stored waveform data (e.g., in ROM, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 105 wherein information about a desired
    output waveform is placed into a memory device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclasses
    for read-only memory (ROM) circuits in general.


CLS 327/107
TXT Having digital device (e.g., logic gate, flip-flop, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 105 wherein a device which operates on binary
    signals is included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185+,   for miscellaneous flip-flop circuits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, appropriate subclasses for
    logic gates, per se.


CLS 327/108
TXT Current driver:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein an input signal is modified into
    a similar output signal having an enhanced current supplying ability.

    (1)     Note.  Current driving of the type associated with electronic
    digital logic circuitry is classified in Class 326.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139,    for sawtooth signal waveform production without output current
    drive enhancement and having an inductive load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 401+
    and particularly subclass 412 for similar subject matter where a nonlinear
    reactive element (e.g., magnetic core) is claimed as forming part of the
    operative combination of the invention.

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 82+ for logic
    current driving.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclasses
    for magnetic storage of signals on magnetic cores.


CLS 327/109
TXT Having semiconductive load:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein the output drive current is
    provided to a broadly recited semiconductive device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses for detailed semiconductor structure.


CLS 327/110
TXT Having inductive load (e.g., coil, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein the output drive current is
    provided to a broadly recited element which has the property of opposing
    current flow therethrough due to a resultant magnetic field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139,    for a circuit providing a sawtooth or triangular waveform, as
    generated, to an inductive load.

    190+,   for a stable state circuit utilizing a transformer or saturable
    core device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for generic inductive
    devices.


CLS 327/111
TXT Having capacitive load:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein the output drive current is
    provided to a broadly recited element which has the property of opposing
    voltage change due to stored charge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 500+ for
    electrolytic capacitors.


CLS 327/112
TXT Push-pull:

    Subject matter under subclass 111 wherein an output circuit comprises two
    parallel identical portions each receiving signals which are the same
    except for a relative 180 degree phase offset.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 250+ and particularly subclasses 262+ for
    semiconductor push-pull amplifiers, in general.


CLS 327/113
TXT Frequency or repetition rate conversion or control:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein a frequency characteristic of an
    input signal is modified to produce an output wave of different frequency
    characteristic which has a definite relationship to that of the input wave
    or where a frequency characteristic is held essentially constant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39+,    for frequency discrimination without subsequent control.

    141+,   for miscellaneous synchronization circuits.

    231+,   for circuits providing a phase shift less than the period of an
    input signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, subclasses 600+ for apparatus for generating or modifying
    electric currents or potentials to produce varying electric currents or
    potentials in combination with or intended for use with structure for
    converting the varying electric currents or potentials into musical tones.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 250 for wave meters which may employ
    frequency changing.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 424+
    for parametric amplifier frequency converters, per se.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 79+ for electric
    wave frequency measuring systems of the heterodyne type.

    329,    Demodulators, subclasses 323+ or 346 for frequency or phase
    demodulators with oscillators.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 37+ for beat frequency oscillator systems
    and subclass 76 for systems including an oscillator combined with a
    harmonic producing or selecting network in the output.  To be classified in
    Class 331 the oscillator must be the signal source and must be capable of
    self sustained oscillation.

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 117+ or 144+ for systems wherein a first
    source is modified in frequency or phase by mixing with an arbitrarily
    varying control source.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, particularly subclasses 870.01+ for
    telemetering systems and especially subclasses 870.18+ providing for
    frequency or phase modulation systems.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, appropriate subclasses for
    systems involving object detection by reflected pulses which may utilize
    phase or frequency modulation.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 157+ for frequency
    conversion systems wherein a single electrical source is coupled to a
    single electrical load in a power conversion system.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, appropriate subclasses for pulse
    communication systems which utilize phase or frequency modulation.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, for pulse counters or counting systems.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 313+ for radio receivers including
    frequency changing means.


CLS 327/114
TXT Of output rectangular waveform:

    Subject matter under subclass 113 including  maintaining constant or
    varying the repetition rate of a continuous series of pulses having
    negligible transition times and available at a specific circuit location
    for subsequent utilization.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39+,    for frequency sensitive systems and see also the search notes
    thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, subclasses 600+ for apparatus for generating or modifying
    electric currents or potentials to produce varying electric currents or
    potentials in combination with or intended for use in converting the
    varying electric currents or potentials into musical tones.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 250 for wave meters which may employ
    frequency changing.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 424
    for parametric amplifier frequency converters.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 79 for electric wave
    frequency measuring systems of the heterodyne type.

    329,    Demodulators, subclasses 323+ for a frequency demodulator with a
    local oscillator and subclass 346 for a phase demodulator with a local
    oscillator.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 37+ for beat frequency oscillator systems
    and subclass 76 for systems including an oscillator combined with a
    harmonic producing or selecting network in the output.  (To be classified
    in Class 331 the oscillator must be the signal source and must be capable
    of self sustained oscillation).

    332,    Modulators, appropriate subclasses for systems wherein a first
    source of one frequency is modified in frequency or phase by mixing with an
    arbitrarily varying control source of another frequency or frequencies.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, appropriate subclasses for systems
    whereby information is conveyed from one point to another by pulses
    arranged in a particular sequence or whose height or duration are varied to
    represent the particular information to be conveyed, particularly
    subclasses 870.01+ for telemetering systems, and subclasses 870.18+  for
    such systems providing frequency or phase modulation.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, appropriate subclasses for pulse
    communication systems which utilize phase or frequency modulation.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, for pulse counters or counting systems.


CLS 327/115
TXT Frequency division:

    Subject matter under subclass 114 wherein the repetition rate of the output
    pulses is less than the frequency of the input signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117+,   for frequency division, in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, appropriate subclasses for analogous circuits which
    may utilize shift registers or other class appropriate devices.


CLS 327/116
TXT Frequency multiplication:

    Subject matter subclass 114 wherein the repetition rate of the output
    pulses is greater than the frequency of the input signal.

    (1)     Note.  Miscellaneous frequency mixing which produces sum or
    difference frequencies of two input frequencies is classified in subclass
    113.  Rectangular or pulse waveform frequency mixing is classified in
    subclass 114.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119+,   for frequency multiplication in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, appropriate subclasses for analogous circuits which
    may utilize shift registers or other class appropriate devices.


CLS 327/117
TXT Frequency division:

    Subject matter under subclass 113 wherein an input signal having a first
    frequency is transformed into an output signal having a second lower
    frequency where the output frequency is a submultiple of the input
    frequency.

    (1)     Note.  Included as submultiples are fractions such as two-thirds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for frequency conversion of a pulse train.

    119+,   for miscellaneous frequency multiplication.

    185+,   for particular multivibrator type which may or may not be used as a
    frequency divider.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, subclasses 600+ for apparatus for generating or modifying
    electric currents or potentials to produce varying electric currents or
    potentials in combination with or intended for use with structure for
    converting the varying electric currents or potentials into musical tones.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 157+ for frequency
    conversion systems of a single electrical source coupled to a single
    electrical load where there is no intermediate conversion to DC.


CLS 327/118
TXT Having discrete active device (e.g., transistor, triode, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 117 including an individual semiconductive or
    electron space discharge device.


CLS 327/119
TXT Frequency multiplication (e.g., harmonic generation, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 113 wherein an input signal having a first
    frequency is transformed into an output signal having a second higher
    frequency, where the output frequency is a multiple of the input frequency.

    (1)     Note.  A harmonic output frequency is an integral multiple of an
    input frequency.

    (2)     Note.  Miscellaneous frequency mixing which produces sum or
    difference frequencies of two input frequencies is classified in subclass
    113.  Rectangular or pulse waveform frequency mixing is classified in
    subclass 114.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for miscellaneous frequency mixing.

    114,    for pulse frequency mixing.

    116,    for frequency multiplication of an output rectangular or pulse
    waveform.

    117,    for miscellaneous frequency division.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, subclasses 600+ for apparatus for generating or modifying
    electric currents or potentials to produce varying electric currents or
    potentials in combination with or intended for use with structure for
    converting the varying electric currents or potentials into musical tones.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 105
    for a class appropriate harmonic filter or neutralizer.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 76 for oscillators combined with electron
    space discharge tube harmonic generating or selecting.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 157+ for frequency
    conversion systems of a single electrical source coupled to a single
    electrical load where there is no intermediate conversion to DC.


CLS 327/120
TXT With plural outputs:

    Subject matter under subclass 119 wherein multiple harmonic output waves
    are simultaneously derived from a single input wave.

    (1)     Note.  The plurality of output waves are generally derived from
    separate output terminals by filter or other load.


CLS 327/121
TXT Selective:

    Subject matter under subclass 120 wherein one or more of the multiple
    output harmonic waves may be chosen for utilization.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    407+,   for a switching circuit having plural inputs and a single output.


CLS 327/122
TXT Doubling:

    Subject matter under subclass 119 wherein the frequency of the output wave
    is exactly twice the frequency of the input wave independent of the input
    frequency.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are systems in which the claimed
    subject matter is restricted to frequency doublers even though the system
    singularly or in combination with similar systems may be used as a
    frequency multiplier other than a doubler.


CLS 327/123
TXT With particular tube or distributed parameter element:

    Subject matter under subclass 119 wherein a harmonic producing device
    comprises a particular electron space discharge device or an element whose
    respective impedance cannot be considered to be concentrated at a point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    593,    for miscellaneous circuits with distributed parameter elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 76 for oscillators combined with electron
    space discharge tube harmonic generating or selecting.


CLS 327/124
TXT By periodic switching (e.g., chopper, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein an input  signal (typically low
    magnitude DC) is regularly interrupted to form a pulsating output waveform.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291+,   for miscellaneous clock or pulse generating.

    365+,   for electronic input/output switching, in general.

    548,    for miscellaneous circuits providing a specific source of supply or
    bias using an oscillator or interrupter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 132+
    for relay repetitive make and break systems.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 10 for interrupters used in
    modulator-demodulator type amplifiers.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 106+ and subclass 177
    for circuit interrupter type converters for power systems.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for multiplex
    systems which utilize switching techniques.


CLS 327/125
TXT Generating parabolic or hyperbolic output:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein a waveform is generated having
    the shape produced by (a) a locus of points each of which has an equal
    distance to a fixed line and a fixed point or (b) a locus of points wherein
    the difference in distances from each point to two fixed points is a
    constant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 859 for
    a hyperbolic function generator using an analog computer.


CLS 327/126
TXT Generating staircase output:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 including the generation of a signal
    whose amplitude increases or decreases between three or more discrete steps
    at regular intervals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    for wave synthesizing systems.

    131+,   for sawtooth or triangular wave output.

    291+,   for an output discretely stepping between two levels.

    355+,   for systems wherein the output is a resultant function of plural
    inputs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclasses 364+ for
    step wave deflection systems used with cathode-ray tubes.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclass 530 for a multiplexing system
    using a time-division step wave signal.


CLS 327/127
TXT With differential amplifier:

    Subject matter under subclass 126 including a gain producing device
    responsive to the offset between two input voltages or currents and
    nonresponsive to voltages or currents which are identical in the two inputs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    563,    for a nonlinear amplifier circuit utilizing a differential
    amplifier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 252+ for a semiconductor differential
    amplifier in general.


CLS 327/128
TXT With rectifying element:

    Subject matter under subclass 126 including an element converting an
    alternating current wave into a corresponding direct current wave.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for a converter of an AC input to corresponding DC at an unloaded
    output.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 13+ for current
    conversion (including rectification) in a power system which connects a
    single electrical source to a single electrical load.


CLS 327/129
TXT Generating sinusoidal output:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein an input signal wave is modified
    to or triggers an alternating current sinusoidal wave at the output.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are signals having a cosinusoidal waveform.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for a shock excited tuned circuit utilized in pulse width or
    spacing selection.

    104,    for miscellaneous converters of an AC signal input to DC voltage
    output.

    105+,   for synthesizing of an output waveform.

    113+,   for systems providing frequency conversion.

    306+,   for systems wherein the amplitude of an output wave is controlled
    within specific limits.

    596,    for miscellaneous circuits including an oscillatory or shock
    excited portion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, subclasses 600+ for various systems for modifying electric
    currents or potentials in combination with converting the varying electric
    currents or potentials into sound waves for the production of musical tones.

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 419+ for systems wherein the usual 60 Hz
    commercial alternating current is converted to high frequency AC or
    pulsating current for application to the human body.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 66.1+ for systems relating to frequency
    shift keying of an alternating current signal under the influence of a
    control pulse.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 160 for
    structural details of a rotary mechanical AC frequency converter and
    subclass 161 for phase shifter type rotary AC dynamoelectric machines.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclasses 378+ and
    391+ for systems which deflect a cathode ray by a rotating electric field
    having conversion of pulse wave energy to alternating wave energy,
    subclasses 200+ for systems comprising a discharge device or rectifier in
    the supply circuit of a gaseous tube or tubes where the output may be an
    alternating circuit wave, subclasses 209+ for systems comprising a periodic
    switch in the supply circuit of a gaseous tube or tubes where the switch
    may be pulse controlled with the output an AC wave and subclasses 246+ for
    systems comprising a pulsating supply for gaseous tubes.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 138 for systems
    wherein a motor is of the space discharge device commutated type and
    wherein a pulsing current may be converted to an equivalent alternating
    current.

    331,    Oscillators, particularly subclasses 37+ for systems comprising the
    combination of oscillator with production of a beat frequency, subclass 45
    for an oscillator with polyphase output, and subclasses 172+ for an
    oscillator combined with pulse actuated control or synchronization.

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 117+ or 144+ for devices for modulating the
    phase or frequency of a carrier wave by an arbitrarily varying control wave.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 20 for systems
    comprising wave shape changing utilizing passive elements.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, appropriate subclasses for signaling
    or indicating devices responsive to pulse wave input and in which the
    output may or may not be an alternating current.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, appropriate subclasses for
    receivers for pulse wave transmitted carrier wave energy.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 13+ for systems
    involving derectification, subclasses 148+ for systems including phase
    conversion, and subclass 157 for systems including frequency conversion
    wherein a single source is connected to a single load.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 1 through 58 for pulse
    responsive systems, subclasses 62+ for systems for transmitting information
    including frequency shift keying, and subclasses 75+ for pulse responsive
    receivers.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 313+ for systems whereby an input
    modulated carrier wave is modified by a wave derived from a local
    oscillator or other source in such a manner as to obtain an output wave the
    frequency of which is the sum or difference of the input wave and the
    modifying wave (i.e., a beat frequency).


CLS 327/130
TXT Generating trapezoidal output:

    Subject matter subclass 100 wherein the output waveform comprises an
    initial sloped rise from a normal voltage level followed by a steady level
    which is followed by a sloped return to the normal voltage level and where
    the sloped portions are mirror images.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131+,   for miscellaneous circuits producing a sawtooth or triangular
    output.


CLS 327/131
TXT Generating sawtooth or triangular output:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein a waveform is generated having a
    positive slope followed immediately by a negative slope.

    (1)     Note.  The positive slope is generally gradual (e.g., by slowly
    charging a capacitor, etc.), and the negative slope is generally much more
    rapid (e.g., by quickly discharging a capacitor).

    (2)     Note.  The slopes of a sawtooth waveform produced may only
    approximate a straight line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126+,   for staircase output generation which may approximate a ramp or
    sawtooth signal.

    335+,   for differentiating networks.

    336+,   for integrating networks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Device:  Systems, subclasses 364+ for
    cathode-ray tube beam deflecting systems.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 20+, 111+, 129+, and 143+ for free running
    sawtooth wave generators.

    348,    Television, particularly subclasses 536+ for television systems
    which may include sawtooth generating circuits.


CLS 327/132
TXT With current source or current mirror:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 including a circuit portion which
    supplies a particular level of electrical current therethrough or a circuit
    portion having collector current matching in a pair of transistors having
    their bases and emitters tied together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    for linearization in a sawtooth or triangular wave generator.

    540+,   for current source regulating in a stabilized bias circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, for generic
    current regulation.


CLS 327/133
TXT With distortion control (e.g., linearization, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 131 which compensates for or introduces
    output waveform irregularities.

    (1)     Note.  Distortion is sometimes introduced to the sawtooth or
    triangular signal to balance out some anticipated subsequent circuit
    distortion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132,    for systems wherein the linearization includes a constant current
    device.

    165+,   for regenerating or restoring a rectangular waveform.

    317,    for an amplitude controlled distortion compensation circuit.

    379+,   for signal transmission integrity in a circuit providing gating of
    an unmodified input signal to an output.

    551+,   for miscellaneous unwanted signal suppression.


CLS 327/134
TXT With slope or duration control:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the inclination or the period of
    the generated output is regulated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13+,    for systems for selecting pulses as a function of slope or shape.

    130,    for a circuit generating a trapezoidal output.

    170+,   for slope control of a leading or trailing edge of a rectangular
    waveform.


CLS 327/135
TXT Having digital element:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 including a device performing a logical
    function.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a digital element is an AND gate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, appropriate subclasses for
    digital logic elements, per se.


CLS 327/136
TXT Having particular delay or sync:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 including the control of a desired time
    relationship relative to the output signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141+,   for synchronizing, per se.


CLS 327/137
TXT Having feedback:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein a portion of the output signal is
    returned to the input.


CLS 327/138
TXT Having temperature compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein undesired circuit variations due
    to a thermal condition are minimized.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    513,    for miscellaneous temperature compensation circuits.


CLS 327/139
TXT Having inductive load:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the output is supplied to a
    device producing a magnetic field which tends to inhibit any change in
    current passing therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for a circuit which enhances current driving capability to an
    inductive device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for generic inductive
    devices.


CLS 327/140
TXT With amplitude control:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 including the maintenance or modification
    of output signal magnitude.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306+    for miscellaneous amplitude control circuits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, for amplifier circuits in general.


CLS 327/141
TXT Synchronizing:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein a signal is produced which will
    (a) maintain a predetermined phase or frequency relationship between two
    sources of waves, one source being an excitation or standard source (sync
    source) and the other source being changed to achieve the predetermined
    relationship; (b) provide an initiate or stop operation to a device at a
    predetermined time; or (c) time (i.e., synchronize) the operation of some
    electrical circuit or system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185+,   for circuits having one or more stable states.

    231+,   for a phase shift which is less than the period of an input signal.

    261+,   for a time delay in producing an output waveform.

    392+,   for a delay controlled switch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 108+ for resistance welding circuits
    which may contain timing means.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclass 360 for
    timing circuits where the discharge device is the ultimate load.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems subclasses 62, 141+, 364+, 445,
    700+, 725+, and 727+ for motor control circuits containing time delay.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 160+ for time or
    speed measuring or determining.

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 93+ for logic stage
    or gate synchronizing or timing.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 20+ for synchronized automatic frequency
    stabilized TV type oscillators, subclass 55 for synchronized plural
    oscillators, subclass 87 for synchronized magnetron oscillators, subclass
    145 for synchronized free running multivibrators, subclass 149 for
    synchronized free running blocking oscillators, and subclass 153 for
    synchronized free running relaxation oscillators in general.

    348,    Television, subclasses 500+ for television synchronizing.

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 409+ for facsimile synchronization.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclass 106+ for data
    communication synchronization.


CLS 327/142
TXT Reset (e.g., initializing, starting, stopping, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein a device provides either an
    initiate or stop operation at a predetermined interval from a predetermined
    starting time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198,    for similar circuits which establish a particular stable state
    exclusive of synchronization.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclass 94 for prevention of a
    metastable state in digital logic.


CLS 327/143
TXT Responsive to power supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 142 wherein a circuit reacts to the supply of
    power thereto or the removal of power therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  The change in supplied power may be of any duration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50+,    for amplitude discriminating, comparing, or selecting without
    subsequent parameter control.

    198,    for initializing, resetting, or protecting a state of a stable
    state circuit.

    545+,   for miscellaneous signal protection or bias preservation.


CLS 327/144
TXT Using multiple clocks:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein plural square wave signals having
    precisely regulated amplitude and frequency are utilized to achieve
    synchronization.


CLS 327/145
TXT Having different frequencies:

    Subject matter under subclass 144 wherein the plural clocks have diverse
    repetition rates.


CLS 327/146
TXT With feedback:

    Subject matter under subclass 144 wherein a portion of the circuit output
    is returned to an input.

    (1)     Note.  Positive feedback occurs when a portion of an output signal
    is fed back in phase with the input to increase amplification and possibly
    cause oscillation.

    (2)     Note.  Negative feedback occurs when a portion of an output signal
    is fed back 180 degrees out of phase relative to the input.  This decreases
    amplification,  stabilizes circuit performance, and minimizes noise and
    distortion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155,    for feedback synchronization in general.


CLS 327/147
TXT Phase lock loop:

    Subject matter under subclass 146 wherein a circuit  compares the phase of
    the output signal with a reference signal and converts any difference into
    a correction voltage that changes the phase of the output so it matches
    that of the reference or input signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155+,   for phase lock loop type feedback synchronizing, in general.


CLS 327/148
TXT With charge pump:

    Subject matter under subclass 147 wherein a device which pumps elemental
    positive or negative electrical energy is included.


CLS 327/149
TXT With variable delay means:

    Subject matter under subclass 147 wherein means providing a changeable
    offset in time is included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231+,   for phase shift or control.

    261+,   for specific delay in producing an output waveform.


CLS 327/150
TXT With digital element:

    Subject matter under subclass 147 including a device performing Boolean
    algebra operations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, appropriate subclasses for an
    electronic digital element, per se.


CLS 327/151
TXT With counter:

    Subject matter under subclass 144 which includes a device which can total
    the number of pulses applied thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, appropriate subclasses for pulse counters, per se.


CLS 327/152
TXT With choice between multiple delayed clocks:

    Subject matter under subclass 144 wherein a single delayed clock is
    obtained from plural candidates.


CLS 327/153
TXT With delay means:

    Subject matter under subclass 144 including means providing a distinct
    signal time offset.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231+,   for phase shift or control.

    261+,   for specific delay in producing an output waveform.


CLS 327/154
TXT With feedforward:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein a portion of an input signal is
    advanced essentially unchanged to an output stage of the synchronizing
    circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144+,   for feedforward type synchronization using multiple clocks.


CLS 327/155
TXT With feedback:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein a portion of the circuit output
    is returned to an input.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146+,   for feedback synchronization utilizing multiple clocks.


CLS 327/156
TXT Phase lock loop:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 wherein a circuit  compares the phase of
    the output signal with a reference signal and converts any difference into
    a correction voltage that changes the phase of the output so it matches
    that of the reference or input signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147+,   for phase lock loop type feedback synchronizing using multiple
    clocks.


CLS 327/157
TXT With charge pump:

    Subject matter under subclass 156 wherein a device which pumps elemental
    positive or negative electrical energy is included.


CLS 327/158
TXT With variable delay means:

    Subject matter under subclass 156 wherein means providing a changeable
    offset in time is included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231+,   for phase shift or control.

    261+,   for specific delay in producing an output waveform.


CLS 327/159
TXT With digital element:

    Subject matter under subclass 156 including a device performing Boolean
    algebra operations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, appropriate subclasses for an
    electronic digital element, per se.


CLS 327/160
TXT With counter:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 which includes a device which can total
    the number of pulses applied thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151,    for a counter in a synchronizing circuit using multiple clocks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, appropriate subclasses for pulse counters, per se.


CLS 327/161
TXT With delay means:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 including means providing a distinct
    signal time offset.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231+,   for phase shift or control.

    261+,   for specific delay in producing an output waveform.


CLS 327/162
TXT Having reference source:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein a clock is used as a standard.


CLS 327/163
TXT By phase:

    Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein the reference source controls the
    clock output of the synchronizing circuit by a fractional part of the
    period of an input signal periodic function or wave.

    (1)     Note.  The period of a periodic function or wave is defined as 360
    electrical degrees.


CLS 327/164
TXT Generating rectangular (e.g., clock, etc.) or pulse waveform having random
    characteristic (e.g., random width, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 100 including a probabilistic factor in the
    generation of a pulsating waveform which is repetitive or intermittent and
    where an individual pulse has negligible transition times.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 78 for a free running random wave or noise
    generator.


CLS 327/165
TXT Regenerating or restoring rectangular (e.g., clock, etc.) or pulse waveform:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein a pulse waveform which has
    undergone attenuation or deformation is modified into an output pulse wave
    form whose characteristics correspond to an original pulse waveform prior
    to such attenuation or deformation.

    (1)     Note.  Usually a feedback or regenerative system is utilized to
    reshape the distorted pulse wave form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 70+ for regenerative repeaters used in
    telegraphy systems.

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclass 29 for logic signal
    sensitivity or transmission integrity pulse shaping.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 75+, 290, and 291+ for feedback amplifiers.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 7+ for signal repeaters that may
    regenerate the repeated signal and which are used in radio systems.


CLS 327/166
TXT Having digital device (e.g., logic gate, flip-flop, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 165 wherein a device which operates on binary
    signals is included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185+,   for miscellaneous flip-flop circuits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, appropriate subclasses for
    logic gates, per se.


CLS 327/167
TXT Having network providing particular mathematical function (e.g.,
    integrator, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 165 including circuitry which in response to
    a particular input value produces a corresponding output value per a
    standard mathematical relationship.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334+,   for a circuit providing a mathematical relationship between an
    input and an output.


CLS 327/168
TXT Having inductive device (e.g., transformer, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 165 including an element which has the
    property of opposing current flow therethrough due to a resultant magnetic
    field.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for generic inductive
    devices.


CLS 327/169
TXT Having negative resistance device (e.g., tunnel diode, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 165 which includes a device having the
    property that, over a portion of its characteristic I-V plot, increasing
    applied device voltage results in a decrease in device current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    568+,   for miscellaneous negative resistance circuits.


CLS 327/170
TXT Slope control of leading or trailing edge of rectangular (e.g., clock,
    etc.) or pulse waveform:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the rise time or fall time of a
    pulse is maintained constant or regulated in some manner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    for slope or duration control of a sawtooth or triangular waveform.


CLS 327/171
TXT Output pulses having opposite polarities:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein an input pulse wave form
    consisting of a series of pulses of a single polarity is converted to an
    output wave form consisting of a plurality of pulses of alternate
    polarities.

    (1)     Note.  Such pulses are often referred to as bipolar.


CLS 327/172
TXT Rectangular (e.g., clock, etc.) or pulse waveform width control:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 including maintaining constant or varying
    the length of individual pulses in a pulsating waveform which is repetitive
    or intermittent and wherein an individual pulse has negligible transition
    times.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31+,    for pulse width discriminating without subsequent control.

    398,    for delay controlled switching with predetermined activation time.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 109+ for modulation of pulse width by an
    intelligence signal.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclass 22 for communication
    systems using pulse width modulation.


CLS 327/173
TXT Pulse narrowing:

    Subject matter under subclass 172 wherein the output pulse width or
    duration is decreased relative to that at the input.

    (1)     Note.  This is also known as pulse shortening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31+,    for pulse width discriminating.

    174,    for pulse lengthening or stretching.


CLS 327/174
TXT Pulse broadening:

    Subject matter under subclass 172 wherein the output pulse width or
    duration is increased relative to that of the input.

    (1)     Note.  This is also known as pulse stretching.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31+,    for pulse width discriminating.

    173,    for pulse shortening or narrowing.


CLS 327/175
TXT Duty cycle control:

    Subject matter under subclass 172 wherein the ratio of pulse width to pulse
    separation in a periodic wave is regulated.

    SEARCH THIS  CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31+,    for pulse width or spacing discriminating without subsequent
    control thereof.


CLS 327/176
TXT Having digital device (e.g., logic gate, flip-flop, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 172 wherein a device which operates on binary
    signals is included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185+,   for miscellaneous flip-flop circuits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, appropriate subclasses for
    logic gates, per se.


CLS 327/177
TXT Having inductive device (e.g., transformer, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 172 including an element which has the
    property of opposing current flow therethrough due to a resultant magnetic
    field.

    (1)     Note.  The inductive element may be distributed or lumped.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for generic inductive
    devices.


CLS 327/178
TXT Rectangular (e.g., clock, etc.) or pulse waveform amplitude control:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the magnitude of an output pulse
    wave is regulated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306+,   for systems which regulate the height or amplitude of an input
    wave, in general.


CLS 327/179
TXT Gain:

    Subject matter under subclass 178 wherein the ratio of output to input
    amplitude levels is regulated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306+,   for miscellaneous amplitude control circuits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, appropriate subclasses for generic amplifying circuits.


CLS 327/180
TXT Limiting, clipping, or clamping:

    Subject matter under subclass 178 wherein the pulse has particular
    amplitude level constraints.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    309+,   for limiting, clipping, or clamping circuits, in general.


CLS 327/181
TXT Electromagnetic pulse forming:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein a pulse of energy is produced
    which has simultaneously varying electric and magnetic fields which are at
    right angles to each other.

    (1)     Note.  This includes, for example, the production of pulsed RF or
    microwaves.


CLS 327/182
TXT Delay line or capacitor storage element charged or discharged through or by
    a relaxation oscillator type circuit to form pulse:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 including a distributed parameter wave
    conveying network or analogous structure or capacitive retention device
    with a respective charge or discharge path through an oscillator which
    slowly charges and rapidly discharges an inductor or capacitor through a
    resistor to form a pulse.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass will not ordinarily contain subject matter
    wherein the capacitor constitutes an element of a free running relaxation
    oscillator circuit (such as provided for in Class 331, Oscillators).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183+,   for other systems utilizing storage or delay elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 143+ for relaxation oscillators, per se.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, appropriate subclasses for
    transmission lines, per se.


CLS 327/183
TXT Delay line or capacitor storage element charges or discharges through a
    tube to form pulse:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 including a distributed parameter wave
    conveying network or analogous structure or capacitive retention device
    adapted to be charged or discharged through the electron path of an
    electron space discharge device to form a pulse.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, appropriate subclasses for
    transmission lines, per se.


CLS 327/184
TXT Rectangular (e.g., clock, etc.) or pulse waveform generating by conversion
    from input AC (e.g., sine, etc.) wave:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein an input signal from which the
    rectangular or pulse output is derived comprises a signal having both
    positive and negative portions.

    (1)     Note.  Typically, the AC signal is a sinusoidal wave.


CLS 327/185
TXT Particular stable state circuit (e.g., tristable, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 100 comprising a circuit which will remain in
    a distinct current conductive steady-state condition unless toggled
    therefrom by a trigger input.

    (1)     Note.  The condition to which the circuit may be toggled may itself
    be stable or it may be unstable.

    (2)     Note.  Detailed flip-flops, per se, generally are contained herein;
    however, multifunctional or programmable logic having a flip-flop is
    classified in Class 326, subclasses 37+, and redundant logic having a
    flip-flop is classified in Class 326, subclass 12.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    365+,   for gating of an unmodified input signal to an output.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclass 12 for redundant logic
    and flip-flop, subclasses 40 and 46 for programmable logic and flip-flop,
    and subclasses 59+ for logic circuits having three or more active states.

    331,    Oscillators, appropriate subclasses for free running oscillators
    (e.g., astable circuits).


CLS 327/186
TXT Superconductive (e.g., cryogenic, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 185 wherein the circuit incorporates elements
    which exhibit a marked decrease in electrical resistance (to essentially
    zero ohms) at a temperature less than or equal to 30 K.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    366+,   for superconductive gating or switching.

    527+,   for miscellaneous cryogenic device circuits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 1+ for
    superconductive electronic digital logic circuits.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process, for high
    temperature (i.e., greater than 30 K) superconductive apparatus, materials,
    or processes.


CLS 327/187
TXT External effect device (e.g., light, heat, magnetic, or mechanical force
    sensitive devices, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 185 wherein an ambient force or field
    provides a toggling stimulus to the stable state circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    369+,   for an external effect controlled superconductive gating circuit.

    509+,   for miscellaneous external effect device circuits.


CLS 327/188
TXT Minority carrier storage effect:

    Subject matter under subclass 185 which utilizes or varies the
    concentration of electrons in p-type material or holes in n-type material
    which accumulate at a pn semiconductor junction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    579,    for miscellaneous circuits utilizing minority carrier storage in a
    three or more electrode solid-state device.

    585,    for miscellaneous circuits utilizing a minority carrier storage
    diode.


CLS 327/189
TXT Storage diode (e.g., step recovery, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 188 including a two-terminal unidirectionally
    conductive semiconductor device having minority carriers which accumulate
    at the pn  junction when the diode is forward biased and which are suddenly
    swept away as  back biasing increases to a certain point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    585,    for miscellaneous circuits using minority carrier storage diodes.


CLS 327/190
TXT With transformer or saturable core device:

    Subject matter under subclass 185 including a device whose ratio of input
    voltage to output voltage is directly proportional to the ratio of primary
    windings to secondary windings therein or a magnetic core reactor having
    reactance modified by varying the core saturation through a superimposed
    unidirectional flux.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300,    for clock or pulse waveform generators utilizing a saturable
    inductance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 401+
    for nonlinear reactor systems (e.g., saturable) in electrical transmission
    or interconnection systems.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for generic inductive
    devices.


CLS 327/191
TXT Blocking oscillator:

    Subject matter under subclass 190 wherein the circuit includes transformer
    coupled feedback in which output current flows for only one half cycle
    before the oscillation is halted due to blocking of the input and the
    oscillation is resumed after the input becomes unblocked.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 112 for free running solid-state blocking
    oscillators.


CLS 327/192
TXT Negative resistance transistor (e.g., unijunction, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 185 including a transistor  whose
    characteristic  on  a  current-voltage plot has a portion with a downward
    slope.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    568,    for miscellaneous negative resistance circuits.


CLS 327/193
TXT Four or more layer device (e.g., trigistor, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 192 wherein the transistor contains more than
    three adjacent regions having differing conductivities.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    582,    for miscellaneous four or more layer device circuits.


CLS 327/194
TXT Zener or capacitive diode:

    Subject matter under subclass 185 including a diode having a threshold
    voltage above which the applied voltage must rise before the diode junction
    breaks down allowing the current flow across the junction to suddenly rise
    or including a voltage responsive two terminal semiconductor device whose
    capacitance varies as a result of changes in the space charge at a pn
    junction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302,    for clock or pulse waveform generating utilizing storage diodes.

    584,    for miscellaneous zener diode circuits.

    586,    for miscellaneous capacitive diode circuits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 603+ for avalanche diodes, per se.


CLS 327/195
TXT Negative resistance diode having ``N"-shape characteristic on I-V plot
    (e.g., tunnel diode, backward diode, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 185 including a diode whose characteristic on
    a current versus voltage plot (i.e., with the current plotted on the Y axis
    and the voltage on the X axis) has an ``N"-shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    570,    for miscellaneous circuits using such diodes.


CLS 327/196
TXT Negative resistance diode having ``S"-shape characteristic on I-V plot
    (e.g., four or more layer semiconductor device, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 185 including a diode whose characteristic on
    a current versus voltage plot (i.e., with the current plotted on the Y axis
    and the voltage on the X axis) has an ``S"-shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    571,    for miscellaneous circuits using such diodes.


CLS 327/197
TXT Convertible circuit (e.g., bistable to monostable, D-type to T-type, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 185 wherein (a) a stable state circuit with
    an initial number of stable states may be readily modified to one having a
    different number of stable states or (b) a stable state circuit with a
    fixed number of stable states can be readily modified between differing
    input configurations.


CLS 327/198
TXT Initializing, resetting, or protecting a steady state condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 185 including the establishment of a starting
    condition in a stable state circuit, the restoration of a stable circuit to
    a previous stable-state condition, or the prevention of deterioration of an
    already established stable-state condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91+,    for amplitude detection circuits including details of sampling or
    holding (e.g., capacitive storage element).

    142+,   for a synchronizing type reset circuit.

    315+,   for maintaining a predetermined input/output level ratio by
    limiting, clipping, or clamping.

    545,    for protection of nonlinear solid-state signal or circuit
    conditions against power or bias supply loss or perturbations, per se, and
    see search notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclass 94 for logic
    metastable state prevention.


CLS 327/199
TXT Circuit having only two stable states (i.e., bistable):

    Subject matter under subclass 185 including a circuit   with   exactly
    two   distinct   current-conductive steady-state conditions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227+,   for monostable (single stable state) circuits, per se.

    291+,   for miscellaneous clock or pulse waveform generating.

    365+,   for switching of an unmodified input to an output.


CLS 327/200
TXT Dynamic bistable:

    Subject matter under subclass 199 wherein a particular stable state is
    maintained by charge storing elements which must be regularly recharged.


CLS 327/201
TXT Complementary clock inputs:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 which includes two inputs for clocks
    which are inverses of each other.


CLS 327/202
TXT Master-slave bistable latch:

    Subject matter under subclass 199 wherein the bistable device includes a
    controlling circuit section, otherwise known as the ``master" stage and a
    subsequent controlled section, known as the ``slave" stage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216,    for cross-coupled JK input bistable circuits in general,

    217,    for cross-coupled RS input bistable circuits in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclasses 115+ for counters and dividers including
    master-slave circuits as transfer means.


CLS 327/203
TXT Including field-effect transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 202 which includes a unipolar transistor in
    which current carriers are injected at a source terminal and pass to a
    drain terminal through a channel of semiconductor material whose
    conductivity depends largely on an electrical field applied to the
    semiconductor from a control electrode (gate).

    (1)     Note.  In a unipolar transistor, the source to drain current
    involves only one type of charge carrier (i.e., holes in a p-type channel
    and electrons in an n-type channel).

    (2)     Note.  Two types of FET structures are prevalent:  (a) an
    all-junction device, known as a junction FET or JFET characterized by
    having heavily doped impurity regions of one type (e.g., p-type material),
    known as gate regions, on both sides of a second type semiconductor bar
    (e.g., n+ type material) to form a pn junction, and (b) a device such as a
    MOSFET/IGFET, consisting of a lightly doped substrate (e.g., p-type
    material) into which two highly doped regions (e.g., n+ type material) are
    diffused for forming source/drain regions with the area therebetween
    becoming the channel for current carriers (i.e., holes or electrons) and
    with a layer of insulating material (e.g., SiO2) grown over the channel
    surface for separating the channel from a control (i.e., gate) electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    581,    for field-effect device circuits, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 213+ for field-effect devices, per se.


CLS 327/204
TXT Including multi-emitter or multi-collector bipolar transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 202 which includes a semiconductive device
    which has current flowing through both n and p-type material and which has
    two or more emitter regions or two or more collector regions.


CLS 327/205
TXT Using hysteresis (e.g., Schmitt trigger, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 199 wherein the input voltage required to
    cause a change from a first stable state to a second stable state is
    distinctly different from that required to cause a subsequent change from
    the second stable state to the first stable state as a result of feedback.

    (1)     Note.  Electronic digital logic circuits which may utilize
    hysteresis for noise margin enhancement are classified with the logic
    circuits in Class 326.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72+,    for analogous circuitry recited as an amplitude comparator wherein
    an input is compared to a reference derived therefrom.

    74+,    for an input signal compared to plural fixed references.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuits, subclass 22 for input noise
    margin enhancement logic circuits which may utilize similar circuits.


CLS 327/206
TXT Including field-effect transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 205 which includes a unipolar transistor in
    which current carriers are injected at a source terminal and pass to a
    drain terminal through a channel of semiconductor material whose
    conductivity depends largely on an electrical field applied to the
    semiconductor from a control electrode (gate).

    (1)     Note.  In a unipolar transistor, the source to drain current
    involves only one type of charge carrier (i.e., holes in a p-type channel
    and electrons in an n-type channel).

    (2)     Note.  Two types of FET structures are prevalent:  (a) an
    all-junction device, known as a junction FET or JFET characterized by
    having heavily doped impurity regions of one type (e.g., p-type material),
    known as gate regions, on both sides of a second type semiconductor bar
    (e.g., n+ type material) to form a pn junction, and (b) a device such as a
    MOSFET/IGFET, consisting of a lightly doped substrate (e.g., p-type
    material) into which two highly doped regions (e.g., n+ type material) are
    diffused for forming source/drain regions with the area therebetween
    becoming the channel for current carriers (i.e., holes or electrons) and
    with a layer of insulating material (e.g., SiO2) grown over the channel
    surface for separating the channel from a control (i.e., gate) electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    581,    for field-effect device circuits, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 213+ for field-effect devices, per se.


CLS 327/207
TXT Including diverse solid-state devices (e.g., FET/ bipolar, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 199 wherein plural distinct types of
    semiconducting elements are utilized.

    (1)     Note.  Types of semiconducting elements include bipolar, FET, SCR,
    etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses for diverse solid-state device structure.


CLS 327/208
TXT Including field-effect transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 199 which includes a unipolar transistor in
    which current carriers are injected at a source terminal and pass to a
    drain terminal through a channel of semiconductor material whose
    conductivity depends largely on an electrical field applied to the
    semiconductor from a control electrode (gate).

    (1)     Note.  In a unipolar transistor, the source to drain current
    involves only one type of charge carrier (i.e., holes in a p-type channel
    and electrons in an n-type channel).

    (2)     Note.  Two types of FET structures are prevalent:  (a) an
    all-junction device, known as a junction FET or JFET characterized by
    having heavily doped impurity regions of one type (e.g., p-type material),
    known as gate regions, on both sides of a second type semiconductor bar
    (e.g., n+ type material) to form a pn junction, and (b) a device such as a
    MOSFET/IGFET, consisting of a lightly doped substrate (e.g., p-type
    material) into which two highly doped regions (e.g., n+ type material) are
    diffused for forming source/drain regions with the area therebetween
    becoming the channel for current carriers (i.e., holes or electrons) and
    with a layer of insulating material (e.g., SiO2) grown over the channel
    surface for separating the channel from a control (i.e., gate) electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51+,    for a sensing amplifier which may utilize an FET bistable circuit.

    581,    for miscellaneous field-effect device circuits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 213+ for field-effect devices, per se.


CLS 327/209
TXT Including enhancement and depletion devices:

    Subject matter under subclass 208 including (a) an FET device which permits
    current conduction by attracting majority carriers to a channel by an
    appropriate applied voltage and (b) an FET device which inhibits current
    conduction by repelling majority carriers away from a channel by an
    appropriate applied voltage.


CLS 327/210
TXT CMOS:

    Subject matter under subclass 208 wherein the FET  is  of  the
    complementary  metal-oxide-semiconductor type.


CLS 327/211
TXT With clock input:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 which provides an input for a separate
    triggering source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291+,   for miscellaneous circuits which generate a clock or pulse waveform.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 93+ for clocking of
    logic stages or gates.


CLS 327/212
TXT With clock input:

    Subject matter under subclass 208 which provides an input for a separate
    triggering source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291+,   for miscellaneous circuits which generate a clock or pulse waveform.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 93+ for clocking of
    logic stages or gates.


CLS 327/213
TXT Plural  independent  clock  inputs  (i.e.,  non-
    complementary):

    Subject matter under subclass 212 wherein inputs accepting multiple
    distinct triggering sources are present.

    (1)     Note.  Clocks which are merely the inverse of each other are not
    considered independent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291+,   for miscellaneous circuits which generate a clock or pulse waveform.


CLS 327/214
TXT Complementary transistors:

    Subject matter under subclass 199 wherein the circuit includes a transistor
    of the pnp type and a transistor of the npn type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    576,    for miscellaneous circuits using complementary transistors.


CLS 327/215
TXT Having at least two cross-coupling paths:

    Subject matter under subclass 199 including two active devices, each
    capable of assuming a distinct current-conductive stable state, the output
    of each device being coupled to the input of the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228,    for a monostable circuit having cross-coupled paths.


CLS 327/216
TXT JK type input:

    Subject matter under subclass 215 wherein the multivibrator has a clock
    input and two additional inputs (the ``J" and ``K" inputs) which jointly
    determine the output state of the multivibrator at the application of a
    clock pulse using the following guidelines:  (a) if both ``J" and ``K" are
    ``HIGH", the multivibrator will change state; (b) if ``J" and ``K" are both
    ``LOW", the multivibrator will maintain its current state; (c) if ``J" =
    ``HIGH" and ``K" = ``LOW", the multivibrator will go to the ``HIGH" state;
    and (d) if ``J" = ``LOW" and ``K" = ``HIGH", the multivibrator will go to
    the ``LOW" state.

    (1)     Note.  The ``HIGH" state can be considered analogous to a logic
    ``1" and the ``LOW" state can be considered analogous to a logic ``0."


CLS 327/217
TXT RS or RST type input:

    Subject matter under subclass 215 wherein the multivibrator has two inputs
    (the ``R" and ``S") in the RS case and also a third (the ``T" input) in the
    RST case and which inputs determine the output state of the multivibrator
    according to the following guidelines:  (a) if the ``S" is ``HIGH" then the
    multivibrator will go to the ``HIGH" state; (b) if the ``R" is ``HIGH",
    then the multivibrator will go to the ``LOW" state; and (c) if there is a
    ``T" input present and it is ``HIGH", the multivibrator will change state
    from its previous value.

    (1)     Note.  A ``HIGH" on both the ``R" and the ``S" inputs
    simultaneously is not permitted.

    (2)     Note.  The ``HIGH" state can be considered analogous to a logic
    ``1" and the ``LOW" state can be considered analogous to a logic ``0."


CLS 327/218
TXT D type input:

    Subject matter under subclass 215 wherein the multivibrator has a clock
    input and an additional input (the ``D" input) wherein the output state of
    the multivibrator represents the state of the ``D" input just prior to the
    most recent clock pulse.


CLS 327/219
TXT Particular device at input, output, or in cross-coupling path:

    Subject matter under subclass 215 including a specific active element at
    the multivibrator signal insertion point, the signal extraction point, or
    in the connection path between these two points.


CLS 327/220
TXT With diode:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 including a conventional two-terminal
    unidirectionally conductive active element in the input circuit, the output
    circuit, or a cross coupling path of the multivibrator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses for diverse types of diodes, per se.


CLS 327/221
TXT Parallel RC network in cross-coupling path:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 wherein a shunt-connected resistor and
    capacitor pair is inserted in one of the mutually interconnected paths.


CLS 327/222
TXT Resistor in cross-coupling path:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 wherein a device which directly relates
    voltage to current is inserted in one of the mutually interconnecting paths.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, appropriate subclasses for details of
    electrical resistors.


CLS 327/223
TXT Plural transistors of same conductivity type:

    Subject matter under subclass 199 including multiple solid-state devices
    which are all of the npn or all of the pnp variety.


CLS 327/224
TXT With single semiconductor device:

    Subject matter under subclass 199 wherein only one solid-state device is
    utilized.


CLS 327/225
TXT With logic element (e.g., NOR gate, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 199 wherein a device performing a Boolean
    algebraic function is included.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, appropriate subclasses for
    logic gates, per se.


CLS 327/226
TXT With single electron tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 199 wherein a solitary active device is
    included which possesses two or more spaced electrodes and in which current
    flow therebetween comprises elemental negatively charged particles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses for
    electron tube structure, in general.


CLS 327/227
TXT Monostable:

    Subject matter under subclass 185 wherein the circuit has a single stable
    state which can be momentarily changed to an unstable state by the
    application of a triggering signal, but which will revert to the stable
    state after a predetermined time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172+,   for a monostable used in pulse waveform width control.

    199+,   for   two   stable   state   circuits   (i.e.,
    bistable).

    291+,   for miscellaneous clock or pulse waveform generating.


CLS 327/228
TXT Having cross-coupled paths:

    Subject matter under subclass 227 including two circuit stages in which the
    output of each stage is fed back to the input of the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215+,   for a bistable circuit having at least two cross-coupled paths.


CLS 327/229
TXT Having differential circuitry:

    Subject matter under subclass 227 including circuitry responsive to the
    offset between two voltages or currents.


CLS 327/230
TXT With external feedback (i.e., output to input):

    Subject matter under subclass 227 wherein a portion of the output signal is
    returned to an input terminal.


CLS 327/231
TXT Phase shift by less than period of input:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein a fraction of the period of an
    input periodic wave signal (with one period represented as 360 degrees
    along the time axis) is maintained or shifted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for phase angle sensing without subsequent control.

    141+,   for time or phase control of one signal to cause synchronization
    with another signal.

    261+,   for specific delay in producing output waveforms.

    392+,   for delay controlled switching.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 212+
    for electric power phase shift or control circuits.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 1+ for automatic frequency stabilization
    using phase of frequency sensing means and for phase lock loop circuits in
    oscillator circuits and systems.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, appropriate subclasses for phase
    conversion circuits with control or error correction.


CLS 327/232
TXT Dependent on frequency:

    Subject matter under subclass 231 wherein the phase shift is varied
    dependent upon the number or recurrences of a periodic input signal in a
    unit of time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39+,    for frequency selecting, comparing, or discriminating without
    subsequent control.


CLS 327/233
TXT Correction to specific phase shift:

    Subject matter under subclass 231 wherein correction is made to an input
    signal phase shift to ensure that the output signal has a predetermined
    phase shift.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165+,   for pulse or rectangular wave regeneration or restoration.

    237+,   for variable or adjustable phase shifting, in general.


CLS 327/234
TXT Dependent on variable controlled phase shifts:

    Subject matter under subclass 233 wherein the desired output phase shift is
    obtained by applying changeable phase shifts to the input signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235,    for correction to specific phase shift by applying plural fixed
    phase shifts to the input signal.

    237+,   for variable or adjustable phase shifting in general.


CLS 327/235
TXT Dependent on multiple fixed phase shifts:

    Subject matter under subclass 233 wherein the desired output phase shift is
    obtained by applying a plurality of unchanging phase shifts to the input
    signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    234,    for variable phase shifts applied to an input signal to produce
    correction to a specific phase shift.


CLS 327/236
TXT By phase comparator or detector:

    Subject matter under subclass 233 wherein the phase shift change is
    effected by the output of a circuit that obtains both the magnitude and
    sign of the phase angle between two input voltages or currents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for phase discriminating or detecting without subsequent control.

    244,    for a phase comparator or detector in a variable or adjustable
    feedback circuit to control phase shift.


CLS 327/237
TXT Variable or adjustable:

    Subject matter under subclass 231 wherein the phase control is (a)
    continuously changed or (b) modifiable (either automatically or in response
    to an operator) to various fixed delays.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270,    for output waveform production delay via variable or adjustable
    multiple outputs to effect a plurality of delay intervals.

    276,    for output waveform production delay where a single output has
    variable or selectable delay.


CLS 327/238
TXT Quadrature related (i.e., 90 degrees):

    Subject matter under subclass 237 wherein the variable or adjustable phase
    shift control involves the state or condition of two related periodic
    functions or two related points separated by a quarter of a cycle or 90
    electrical degrees.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254,    for quadrature related phase shift control which is not variable or
    adjustable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 76.78 for quadrature
    sensing, per se.


CLS 327/239
TXT Non-overlapping multiple outputs:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 wherein a variable or adjustable phase
    shift circuit produces plural output clock type waves wherein no two such
    waves are permitted to be ``on" simultaneously.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for pulse noncoincidence discriminating without subsequent control.

    23+,    for pulse coincidence discriminating without subsequent control.

    259,    for non-overlapping multiple outputs in phase shift circuitry in
    general.


CLS 327/240
TXT Maintaining invariant amplitude:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 wherein a variable or adjustable phase
    control device produces an output signal having an unchanging amplitude
    relative to the input signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231,    for unchanging phase shifts with invariant amplitude.


CLS 327/241
TXT With counter or shift register:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 including (a) a circuit which totals
    input pulses to produce an output signal each time it receives a
    predetermined number of input pulses or (b) a circuit which transfers its
    digital contents along plural storage elements in a chain on the
    application of an input pulse.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241+,   for variable or adjustable phase shifting using a counter or shift
    register.

    265,    for a counter in an active element or structure wherein output
    waveform production delay is effected by the rising or falling edge of an
    input.

    273,    for a counter in an active element or structure of a multiple
    output, plural delay interval environment.

    279,    for a counter in an active element or structure of a single output
    environment having a variable or selectable delay.

    286,    for a counter with an active circuit element or structure in output
    waveform production delay.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, appropriate subclasses for counters or shift
    registers, per se.


CLS 327/242
TXT Having multiple outputs:

    Subject matter under subclass 241 wherein more than one output is produced.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    245,    for a variable or adjustable phase shift with feedback and multiple
    outputs.

    247,    for a variable or adjustable phase shift with a differential
    amplifier and multiple outputs.

    249,    for a variable or adjustable phase shift with an adder and multiple
    outputs.

    251,    for a variable or adjustable phase shift with an active time delay
    element and multiple outputs.

    253,    for a variable or adjustable phase shift with a passive time delay
    element and multiple outputs.

    257,    for multiple outputs wherein there is a 180 degree  phase
    difference between the input and output.

    258,    for a phase control circuit having multiple outputs, in general.


CLS 327/243
TXT With feedback:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 wherein a portion of the output signal is
    returned to an input.

    (1)     Note.  Positive feedback occurs when a portion of an output signal
    is fed back in phase with the input to increase amplification and possibly
    cause oscillation.

    (2)     Note.  Negative feedback occurs when a portion of an output signal
    is fed back 180 degrees out of phase relative to the input.  This decreases
    amplification,  stabilizes circuit performance, and minimizes noise and
    distortion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154,    for feedforward synchronization.

    155+,   for feedback synchronization.


CLS 327/244
TXT With phase comparator or detector:

    Subject matter under subclass 243 including a circuit whose output
    represents both the magnitude and sign of the phase angle between two input
    voltages or currents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for phase comparing without subsequent control.

    236,    for a phase comparator or detector used in correcting a specific
    phase shift.


CLS 327/245
TXT Having multiple outputs:

    Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein more than one output is produced.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242,    for a variable or adjustable phase shift with a counter or shift
    register and multiple outputs.

    247,    for a variable or adjustable phase shift with a differential
    amplifier and multiple outputs.

    249,    for a variable or adjustable phase shift with an adder and multiple
    outputs.

    251,    for a variable or adjustable phase shift with an active time delay
    element and multiple outputs.

    253,    for a variable or adjustable phase shift with a passive time delay
    element and multiple outputs.

    257,    for multiple outputs where there is a 180 degree phase difference
    between the input and output.

    258,    for a phase control circuit having multiple outputs, in general.


CLS 327/246
TXT With differential amplifier:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 wherein a circuit amplifies only the
    differences between two input signal voltages or currents and suppresses
    voltages or currents appearing simultaneously on both inputs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266,    for a differential amplifier in an active circuit element or
    structure to effect output waveform production delay via the rising or
    falling edge of a pulse signal.

    274,    for a differential amplifier in an active circuit element or
    structure to effect output waveform production delay of multiple outputs
    with a plurality of delay intervals.

    280,    for a differential amplifier in an active circuit element or
    structure to effect output waveform production delay of a single output
    with variable or selectable delay.

    287,    for a differential amplifier in an active circuit element or
    structure to effect output waveform production delay.


CLS 327/247
TXT Having multiple outputs:

    Subject matter under subclass 246 wherein more than one output is produced.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242,    for a variable or adjustable phase shift with a counter or shift
    register and multiple outputs.

    245,    for a variable or adjustable phase shift with feedback and multiple
    outputs.

    249,    for a variable or adjustable phase shift with an adder and multiple
    outputs.

    251,    for a variable or adjustable phase shift with an active time delay
    element and multiple outputs.

    253,    for a variable or adjustable phase shift with a passive time delay
    element and multiple outputs.

    257,    for multiple outputs where there is a 180 degree phase difference
    between the input and output.

    258,    for a phase control circuit having multiple outputs, in general.


CLS 327/248
TXT With adder:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 wherein a variable or adjustable device
    includes a circuit which produces the sum of two or more quantities
    impressed on it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    361,    for algebraic summing circuits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 768+
    for a digital computer providing addition or subtraction.


CLS 327/249
TXT Having multiple outputs:

    Subject matter under subclass 248 wherein more than one output is produced.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242,    for a variable or adjustable phase shift with a counter or shift
    register and multiple outputs.

    245,    for a variable or adjustable phase shift with feedback and multiple
    outputs.

    247,    for a variable or adjustable phase shift with a differential
    amplifier and multiple outputs.

    251,    for a variable or adjustable phase shift with an active time delay
    element and multiple outputs.

    253,    for a variable or adjustable phase shift with a passive time delay
    element and multiple outputs.

    257,    for multiple outputs where there is a 180 degree phase difference
    between the input and output.

    258,    for a phase control circuit having multiple outputs, in general.


CLS 327/250
TXT With active time delay element:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 wherein the time required for a signal to
    travel between two points in a circuit is controlled by an element which
    requires an external power supply other than the main input signal for its
    operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252,    for a variable or adjustable phase shift with a passive time delay
    element.


CLS 327/251
TXT Having multiple outputs:

    Subject matter under subclass 250 wherein more than one output is produced.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242,    for a variable or adjustable phase shift with a counter or shift
    register and multiple outputs.

    245,    for a variable or adjustable phase shift with feedback and multiple
    outputs.

    247,    for a variable or adjustable phase shift with a differential
    amplifier and multiple outputs.

    249,    for a variable or adjustable phase shift with an adder and multiple
    outputs.

    253,    for a variable or adjustable phase shift with a passive time delay
    element and multiple outputs.

    257,    for multiple outputs where there is a 180 degree phase difference
    between the input and output.

    258,    for a phase control circuit having multiple outputs, in general.


CLS 327/252
TXT With passive time delay element:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 wherein the time required for a signal to
    travel between two points in a circuit is controlled by an element powered
    only by an input signal, without any bias voltage.

    (1)     Note.  A passive element (such as a capacitor, resistor, or
    inductor), does not add any amplification or gain (i.e., it presents some
    loss to the system).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250,    for a variable or adjustable phase shift with an active time delay
    element.


CLS 327/253
TXT Having multiple outputs:

    Subject matter under subclass 252 wherein more than one output is produced.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242,    for a variable or adjustable phase shift with a counter or shift
    register and multiple outputs.

    245,    for a variable or adjustable phase shift with feedback and multiple
    outputs.

    247,    for a variable or adjustable phase shift with a differential
    amplifier and multiple outputs.

    249,    for a variable or adjustable phase shift with an adder and multiple
    outputs.

    251,    for a variable or adjustable phase shift with an active time delay
    element and multiple outputs.

    257,    for multiple outputs where there is a 180 degree  phase difference
    between the input and output.

    258,    for a phase control circuit having multiple outputs, in general.


CLS 327/254
TXT Quadrature related (i.e., 90 degrees):

    Subject matter under subclass 231 wherein the phase shift control includes
    the state or condition of two related periodic functions or two related
    points separated by a quarter of a cycle or 90 electrical degrees.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238,    for quadrature related phase shift control which is variable or
    adjustable.

    255,    for a phase shift control circuit where the output is in quadrature
    with respect to the input.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 76.78 for quadrature
    sensing, per se.


CLS 327/255
TXT 90 degrees between input and output:

    Subject matter under subclass 254 wherein the phase relationship between an
    output signal and an input signal is separated by a quarter of a cycle or
    90 electrical degrees.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238,    for quadrature related variable or adjustable phase shift control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 76.78 for quadrature
    sensing, per se.


CLS 327/256
TXT Phase inversion (i.e., 180 degrees between input and output):

    Subject matter under subclass 231 wherein the phase relationship between
    the input and output signal is separated by a half of a cycle or 180
    electrical degrees.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 104+ for logical
    inverters.


CLS 327/257
TXT Multiple outputs:

    Subject matter under subclass 256 wherein more than one output is produced.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242,    for a variable or adjustable phase shift with a counter or shift
    register and multiple outputs.

    245,    for a variable or adjustable phase shift with feedback and multiple
    outputs.

    247,    for a variable or adjustable phase shift with a differential
    amplifier and multiple outputs.

    249,    for a variable or adjustable phase shift with an adder and multiple
    outputs.

    251,    for a variable or adjustable phase shift with an active time delay
    element and multiple outputs.

    253,    for a variable or adjustable phase shift with a passive time delay
    element and multiple outputs.

    258,    for a phase control circuit having multiple outputs, in general.


CLS 327/258
TXT Multiple outputs:

    Subject matter under subclass 231 wherein more than one output is produced.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242,    for a variable or adjustable phase shift with a counter or shift
    register and multiple outputs.

    245,    for a variable or adjustable phase shift with feedback and multiple
    outputs.

    247,    for a variable or adjustable phase shift with a differential
    amplifier and multiple outputs.

    249,    for a variable or adjustable phase shift with an adder and multiple
    outputs.

    251,    for a variable or adjustable phase shift with an active time delay
    element and multiple outputs.

    253,    for a variable or adjustable phase shift with a passive time delay
    element and multiple outputs.

    257,    for multiple outputs where there is a 180 degree phase difference
    between the input and output.


CLS 327/259
TXT Non-overlapping:

    Subject matter under subclass 258 wherein a phase shift circuit produces
    plural output clock type waves where no two such waves are permitted to be
    ``on" simultaneously.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for pulse noncoincidence discriminating without subsequent control.

    23+,    for pulse coincidence discriminating without subsequent control.

    239,    for non-overlapping multiple outputs in a variable or adjustable
    phase shift control circuit.


CLS 327/260
TXT Producing AC power control:

    Subject matter under subclass 231 wherein an output alternating current
    signal is controlled either by a phase shift or by suppressing output
    dependent upon some phase.

    (1)     Note.  A flow of electricity which reaches a maximum in one
    direction, decreases to zero, then reverses itself and reaches a maximum in
    the opposite direction and this cycle is continuously repeated is
    alternating current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306+,   for amplitude control.

    365+,   for switching or gating of an AC signal.

    530+,   for miscellaneous circuits with specific source of supply or bias
    voltage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for power supply regulation of a single source coupled to a
    single load.


CLS 327/261
TXT Having specific delay in producing output waveform:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein an output signal is obtained at a
    predetermined time interval subsequent to the application of an input or
    control or initiating signal to a system.

    (1)     Note.  Delay controlled switching is classified below with gating
    circuits.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141+,   for time or phase control of one signal to cause synchronization
    with another signal.

    231+,   for a signal phase shift which is less than the input signal period.

    336+,   for the integration of an input signal.

    392+,   for a delay controlled switch.


CLS 327/262
TXT Including significant compensation (e.g., temperature compensated delay,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 261 wherein undesired changes in circuit
    operation due to, for example, temperature changes, component structural
    differences, or power supply fluctuations are offset.

    (1)     Note.  Regulating systems for controlling a load as well as
    compensating circuits for protecting systems and semiconductor structures
    against failure are found in Class 323.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    509+,   for miscellaneous external effect circuits.

    538,    for miscellaneous supply or bias circuits with significant
    compensation or stabilization.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 220+,
    234+, 299+, 304+, and 318+ for load controlled or regulated systems.

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclass 14 for logic circuits
    which maintain a fail-safe condition against circuit breakdown and
    subclasses 21+ for signal sensitivity or transmission integrity in logic
    circuitry.


CLS 327/263
TXT Delay interval set by rising or falling edge:

    Subject matter under subclass 261 wherein the delay time is determined by
    either (a) the interval between the occurrence of leading or trailing edges
    of a pulse signal or (b) the amount of time for the leading or trailing
    edge of a pulse waveform to rise or fall to a particular value.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for phase characteristic selecting and particularly subclasses 3+
    for phase angle sensing (e.g., lead/lag discriminators).

    172+,   for controlling the duration of pulse signals (e.g., pulse
    stretching) in pulse generators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 62 for motor speed
    control with time delay; subclasses 141+ for generator-fed motor systems
    controlled by time delay; subclasses 283+ for time delay for
    motor-reversing; and subclasses 445+ for time delay control, per se, (e.g.,
    automatic starting/stopping).

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, cross-reference art collection
    921 for running-speed control systems including a time delay.


CLS 327/264
TXT Having specific active circuit element or structure (e.g., FET,
    complementary transistors, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 263 including a particular circuit element or
    structure requiring an external power supply other than the main input
    signal for its operation and which produces some dynamic function change
    (e.g., amplification) of the applied input electrical signal basic
    characteristic.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of active circuit elements are transistors, tunnel
    diodes, or SCR's.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    268,    for a passive circuit element or structure in output waveform
    production delay wherein the delay interval is set by the rising or falling
    of an input pulse.

    272,    for an active circuit element or structure in output waveform
    production delay with multiple outputs with a plurality of delay intervals.

    278,    for an active circuit element or structure in output waveform
    production delay with a single output with a variable or selectable delay.

    283,    for a passive circuit element or structure in output waveform
    production delay with a single output with a variable or selectable delay.

    285,    for an active circuit element or structure for output waveform
    production delay.

    290,    for a passive circuit element or structure in output waveform
    production delay.


CLS 327/265
TXT With counter:

    Subject matter under subclass 264 wherein a circuit is included which
    totals input pulses to produce an output signal each time it receives a
    predetermined number of input pulses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241,    for a variable or adjustable phase shift using a counter or shift
    register.

    273,    for a counter in an active element or structure of a multiple
    output, plural delay environment.

    279,    for a counter in an active element or structure of a single output
    environment having a variable or selectable delay.

    286,    for a counter with an active circuit element or structure in output
    waveform production delay.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, appropriate subclasses for counters, per se.


CLS 327/266
TXT Differential amplifier:

    Subject matter under subclass 264 wherein a circuit amplifies only the
    differences between two input signal voltages or currents and suppresses
    voltages or currents appearing simultaneously on both inputs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246+,   for variable or adjustable phase shift control using a differential
    amplifier.

    274,    for a differential amplifier in an active circuit element or
    structure to effect output waveform production delay of multiple outputs
    with a plurality of delay intervals.

    280,    for a differential amplifier in an active circuit element or
    structure to effect output waveform production delay of a single output
    with variable or selectable delay.

    287,    for a differential amplifier in an active circuit element or
    structure to effect output waveform production delay.


CLS 327/267
TXT Electron tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 264 including a gas filled or partially or
    fully evacuated (vacuum) device which regulates current flow between spaced
    electrodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    275,    for circuits using an electron tube within an active circuit
    element or structure having multiple outputs with a plurality of delay
    intervals.

    282,    for time interval control using an electron tube within an active
    circuit element or structure having a single output with variable or
    selectable delay.

    289,    for circuits using an electron tube in a specific active circuit
    element or structure providing output waveform production delay.


CLS 327/268
TXT Having passive circuit element or structure (e.g., RLC circuit, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 263 wherein a circuit element or structure is
    powered only by an input signal without any bias voltage and produces a
    desired modification of the input signal without adding any amplification
    or gain (i.e., it presents some loss to a system).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of passive devices are capacitors, resistors, and
    inductors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264,    for an active circuit element or structure in output waveform
    production delay wherein the delay interval is set by the rising or falling
    of an input pulse.

    272,    for an active circuit element or structure in output waveform
    production delay with multiple outputs with a plurality of delay intervals.

    278,    for an active circuit element or structure in output waveform
    production delay with a single output with a variable or selectable delay.

    283,    for a passive circuit element or structure in output waveform
    production delay with a single output with a variable or selectable delay.

    285,    for an active circuit element or structure for output waveform
    production delay.

    290,    for a passive circuit element or structure in output waveform
    production delay.


CLS 327/269
TXT Multiple outputs with plurality of delay intervals:

    Subject matter under subclass 261 including plural outputs each having its
    own amount of delay.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401,    for time-delay circuits for controlling a switching or powering
    operation having plural switching elements.

    403,    for gating of plural parallel controlled signal paths.


CLS 327/270
TXT Variable or adjustable:

    Subject matter under subclass 269 wherein the multiple delay intervals are
    either (a) continuously changing or (b) changeable, automatically or in
    response to an operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237,    for variable or adjustable phase shift control.

    276,    for output waveform production delay where a single output has
    variable or adjustable delay.


CLS 327/271
TXT Including delay line or charge transfer device:

    Subject matter under subclass 269 wherein at least one time interval is
    derived from the time of propagation of a signal through a transmission
    line type means (e.g., shift register,  cascade-connected nonlinear
    amplifier stages, charge transfer element, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277,    for a delay line type structure within a single output circuit
    having variable or selectable delay intervals.

    284,    for a delay line structure or charge transfer device which is
    utilized in output waveform production delay.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclass 61 for logic circuits
    using an insulated gate charge transfer device.


CLS 327/272
TXT Having specific active circuit element or structure (e.g., FET,
    complementary transistors, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 269 including a particular circuit element or
    structure requiring an external power supply other than the main input
    signal for its operation and which produces some dynamic function change
    (e.g., amplification) of the applied input electrical signal basic
    characteristic.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of active circuit elements are transistors, tunnel
    diodes, SCRs, or ICs.

    SEARCH THIS  CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264,    for an active circuit element or structure in output waveform
    production delay wherein the delay interval is set by the rising or falling
    of an input pulse.

    268,    for a passive circuit element or structure in output waveform
    production delay wherein the delay interval is set by the rising or falling
    of an input pulse.

    278,    for an active circuit element or structure in output waveform
    production delay with a single output with a variable or selectable delay.

    283,    for a passive circuit element or structure in output waveform
    production delay with a single output with a variable or selectable delay.

    285,    for an active circuit element or structure for output waveform
    production delay.

    290,    for a passive circuit element or structure in output waveform
    production delay.


CLS 327/273
TXT With counter:

    Subject matter under subclass 272 wherein a circuit is included which
    totals input pulses to produce an output signal each time it receives a
    predetermined number of input pulses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241,    for a variable or adjustable phase shift using a counter or shift
    register.

    265,    for a counter in an active element or structure wherein output
    waveform production delay is effected by the rising or falling edge of an
    input.

    279,    for a counter in an active element or structure of a single output
    environment having a variable or selectable delay.

    286,    for a counter with an active circuit element or structure in output
    waveform production delay.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, appropriate subclasses for counters, per se.


CLS 327/274
TXT Differential amplifier:

    Subject matter under subclass 272 including a circuit which amplifies only
    the differences between two input signal voltages or currents and
    suppresses voltages or currents appearing simultaneously on both inputs.

    SEARCH THIS  CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246+,   for variable or adjustable phase shift control using a differential
    amplifier.

    266,    for a differential amplifier in an active circuit element or
    structure to effect output waveform production delay via the rising or
    falling edge of a pulse signal.

    280,    for a differential amplifier in an active circuit element or
    structure to effect output waveform production delay of a single output
    with variable or selectable delay.

    287,    for a differential amplifier in an active circuit element or
    structure to effect output waveform production delay.


CLS 327/275
TXT Electron tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 272 including a gas filled or partially or
    fully evacuated (vacuum) device which regulates current flow between spaced
    electrodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    267,    for the use of an electron tube within an active circuit element or
    structure to control the output waveform production delay via the rising or
    falling edge of an input pulse.

    282,    for output waveform production delay using an electron tube within
    an active circuit element or structure having a single output with variable
    or selectable delay.


CLS 327/276
TXT Single output with variable or selectable delay:

    Subject matter under subclass 261 including one output where the delay time
    is adjustable or may be chosen from multiple possibilities.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237,    for variable or adjustable phase shift control.

    270,    for multiple outputs which have a plurality of variable or
    adjustable delay intervals.


CLS 327/277
TXT Including delay line or charge transfer device:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 wherein the delay interval is derived
    from the time of propagation of a signal through a transmission line  type
    means  (e.g.,  shift  register,  cascade-connected nonlinear amplifier
    stages, charge transfer element, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    271,    for a delay line type structure within an output waveform
    production delay circuit having multiple outputs and a plurality of delay
    intervals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclass 61 for logic circuits
    using an insulated gate charge transfer device.


CLS 327/278
TXT Having specific active circuit element or structure (e.g., complementary
    transistors, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 276 including a particular circuit element or
    structure requiring an external power supply other than the main input
    signal for its operation and which produces some dynamic function change
    (e.g., amplification) of the applied input electrical signal basic
    characteristic.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of active circuit elements are transistors, tunnel
    diodes, SCRs, or ICs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264,    for an active circuit element or structure in output waveform
    production delay wherein the delay interval is set by the rising or falling
    of an input pulse.

    268,    for a passive circuit element or structure in output waveform
    production delay wherein the delay interval is set by the rising or falling
    of an input pulse.

    272,    for an active circuit element or structure in output waveform
    production delay with multiple outputs with a plurality of delay intervals.

    283,    for a passive circuit element or structure in output waveform
    production delay with a single output with a variable or selectable delay.

    285,    for an active circuit element or structure for output waveform
    production delay.

    290,    for a passive circuit element or structure in output waveform
    production delay.


CLS 327/279
TXT With counter:

    Subject matter under subclass 278 wherein a circuit is included which
    totals input pulses to produce an output signal each time it receives a
    predetermined number of input pulses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241,    for a variable or adjustable phase shift using a counter or shift
    register.

    265,    for a counter in an active element or structure wherein output
    waveform production delay is effected by the rising or falling edge of an
    input.

    273,    for a counter in an active element or structure of a multiple
    output, plural delay interval environment.

    286,    for a counter with an active circuit element or structure in output
    waveform production delay.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, appropriate subclasses for counters, per se.


CLS 327/280
TXT Differential amplifier:

    Subject matter under subclass 278 including a circuit which amplifies only
    the differences between two input signal voltages or currents and
    suppresses voltages or currents appearing simultaneously on both inputs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246+,   for variable or adjustable phase shift control using differential
    amplifier.

    266,    for a differential amplifier in an active circuit element or
    structure to effect output waveform production delay via the rising or
    falling edge of a pulse signal.

    274,    for a differential amplifier in an active circuit element or
    structure to effect output waveform production delay of multiple outputs
    with a plurality of delay intervals.

    287,    for a differential amplifier in an active circuit element or
    structure to effect output waveform production delay.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, for electrical amplifiers, in general.


CLS 327/281
TXT Field-effect transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 278 including a unipolar transistor in which
    current carriers are injected at a source terminal and pass to a drain
    terminal through a channel of semiconductor material whose conductivity
    depends largely on an electrical field applied to the semiconductor from a
    control electrode (gate).

    (1)     Note.  In a unipolar transistor, the source to drain current
    involves only one type of charge carrier (i.e., holes in a p-type material
    channel and electrons in an n-type material channel.

    (2)     Note.  Two types of FET structures are prevalent:  (a) an
    all-junction device, known as a junction FET or JFET characterized by
    having heavily doped impurity regions of one type (e.g., p-type material),
    known as gate regions, on both sides of a second type semiconductor bar
    (e.g., n+ type material) to form a pn junction, and (b) a device such as a
    MOSFET/IGFET, consisting of a lightly doped substrate (e.g., p-type
    material) into which two highly doped regions (e.g., n+ type material) are
    diffused for forming source/drain regions with the area therebetween
    becoming the channel for current carriers (i.e., holes or electrons) and
    with a layer of insulating material (e.g., SiO2) grown over the channel
    surface for separating the channel from a control (i.e., gate) electrode.


CLS 327/282
TXT Electron tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 278 including  a gas filled, or partially or
    fully evacuated (vacuum) device which regulates current flow between spaced
    electrodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    267,    for the use of an electron tube within an active circuit element or
    structure to control the output waveform production delay via the rising or
    falling edge of the input pulse.

    275,    for output waveform production delay using an electron tube within
    an active circuit element or structure having multiple outputs with a
    plurality of delay intervals.


CLS 327/283
TXT Having specific passive circuit element or structure (e.g., RLC circuit,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 276 wherein a circuit element or structure is
    powered only by an input signal, without any bias voltage and produces a
    desired modification on the input signal without adding any amplification
    or gain (i.e.,  it presents some loss to a system).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of passive devices are capacitors, resistors, and
    inductors.

    SEARCH THIS  CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264,    for an active circuit element or structure in output waveform
    production delay wherein the delay interval is set by the rising or falling
    of an input pulse.

    268,    for a passive circuit element or structure in output waveform
    production delay wherein the delay interval is set by the rising or falling
    of an input pulse.

    272,    for an active circuit element or structure in output waveform
    production delay with multiple outputs with a plurality of delay intervals.

    278,    for an active circuit element or structure in output waveform
    production delay with a single output with a variable or selectable delay.

    285,    for an active circuit element or structure for output waveform
    production delay.

    290,    for a passive circuit element or structure in output waveform
    production delay.


CLS 327/284
TXT Including delay line or charge transfer device:

    Subject matter under subclass 261 wherein the time interval is derived from
    the time of propagation of a signal through a transmission line  type
    means  (e.g.,  shift  register,  cascade-connected nonlinear amplifier
    stages, charge transfer element, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Passive delay lines are included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182     and 183, for pulse generators utilizing passive delay lines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclass 61 for logic circuits
    using an insulated gate charge transfer device and subclasses 93+ for logic
    function circuits including one or more stages clocked synchronously for
    transmitting signals.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 138+ for passive
    delay networks, per se.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 76 for
    recirculating storage systems including delay lines.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclasses 64+ for shift registers, in general.


CLS 327/285
TXT Having specific active circuit element or structure (e.g., complementary
    transistors, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 261 including a particular circuit element or
    structure requiring an external power supply other than the main input
    signal for its operation and which produces some dynamic function change
    (e.g., amplification) of the applied input electrical signal basic
    characteristic.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of active circuit elements are transistors, tunnel
    diodes, or SCR's.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264,    for an active circuit element or structure in output waveform
    production delay wherein the delay interval is set by the rising or falling
    of an input pulse.

    272,    for an active circuit element or structure in output waveform
    production delay with multiple outputs with a plurality of delay intervals.

    268,    for a passive circuit element or structure in output waveform
    production delay wherein the delay interval is set by the rising or falling
    of an input pulse.

    278,    for an active circuit element or structure in output waveform
    production delay with a single output with a variable or selectable delay.

    283,    for a passive circuit element or structure in output waveform
    production delay with a single output with a variable or selectable delay.

    290,    for a passive circuit element or structure in output waveform
    production delay.


CLS 327/286
TXT With counter:

    Subject matter under subclass 285 wherein a circuit is included which
    totals input pulses to produce an output signal each time it receives a
    predetermined number of input pulses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241,    for a variable or adjustable phase shift using a counter or shift
    register.

    265,    for a counter in an active element or structure wherein output
    waveform production delay is effected by the rising or falling edge of an
    input signal.

    273,    for a counter in an active element or structure of a multiple
    output, plural delay environment.

    279,    for a counter in an active element or structure of a single output
    environment having a variable or selectable delay.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, appropriate subclasses for counters, per se.


CLS 327/287
TXT Differential amplifier:

    Subject matter under subclass 285 including a circuit which amplifies only
    the differences between two input voltages or currents and suppresses
    voltages or currents appearing simultaneously on both inputs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246+,   for variable or adjustable phase shift control using a differential
    amplifier.

    266,    for a differential amplifier in an active circuit element or
    structure to effect output waveform production delay via the rising or
    falling edge of a pulse signal.

    274,    for a differential amplifier in an active circuit element or
    structure to effect output waveform production delay of multiple outputs
    with a plurality of delay intervals.

    280,    for a differential amplifier in an active circuit element or
    structure to effect output waveform production delay of a single output
    with variable or selectable delay.


CLS 327/288
TXT Field-effect transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 285 including a unipolar transistor in which
    current carriers are injected at a source terminal and pass to a drain
    terminal through a channel of semiconductor material whose conductivity
    depends largely on an electrical field applied to the semiconductor from a
    control electrode (gate).

    (1)     Note.  In a unipolar transistor, the source to drain current
    involves only one type of charge carrier (i.e., holes in a  p-type material
    channel and electrons in an n-type material channel.

    (2)     Note.  Two types of FET structures are prevalent:  (a) an
    all-junction device, known as a junction FET or JFET characterized by
    having heavily doped impurity regions of one type (e.g., p-type material),
    known as gate regions, on both sides of a second type semiconductor bar
    (e.g., n+ type material) to form a pn junction, and (b) a device such as a
    MOSFET/IGFET, consisting of a lightly doped substrate (e.g., p-type
    material) into which two highly doped regions (e.g., n+ type material) are
    diffused for forming source/drain regions with the area therebetween
    becoming the channel for current carriers (i.e., holes or electrons) and
    with a layer of insulating material (e.g., SiO2) grown over the channel
    surface for separating the channel from a control (i.e., gate) electrode.


CLS 327/289
TXT Electron tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 285 including a gas filled or partially or
    fully evacuated (vacuum) device which regulates current flow between spaced
    electrodes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 138+ for passive
    delay networks.


CLS 327/290
TXT Having specific passive circuit element or structure (e.g., RLC circuit,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 261 wherein a circuit element or structure is
    powered only by an input signal, without any bias voltage, and produces a
    desired modification on the input signal without adding any amplification
    or gain (i.e., it presents some loss to a system).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of passive devices are capacitors, resistors, and
    inductors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264,    for an active circuit element or structure in output waveform
    production delay wherein the delay interval is set by the rising or falling
    of an input pulse.

    268,    for a passive circuit element or structure in output waveform
    production delay wherein the delay interval is set by the rising or falling
    of an input pulse.

    272,    for an active circuit element or structure in output waveform
    production delay with multiple outputs with a plurality of delay intervals.

    278,    for an active circuit element or structure in output waveform
    production delay with a single output with a variable or selectable delay.

    283,    for a passive circuit element or structure in output waveform
    production delay with a single output with a variable or selectable delay.

    285,    for an active circuit element or structure for output waveform
    production delay.


CLS 327/291
TXT Clock or pulse waveform generating:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein an output waveshape is produced
    which exhibits two distinct amplitude levels and where the transition
    therebetween is rapid.

    (1)     Note.  The systems contained in this subclass and the indented
    subclasses are very similar to those found in Class 331, Oscillators; the
    distinction being that the systems in Class 331 are self sustaining or free
    running while those in  this  class  are  not  capable  of  self-sustained
    continuous operation.

    (2)     Note.  Bias circuits of the pulsing type which establish device
    operating points are classified with the bias circuits.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for systems which convert AC to corresponding DC at an unloaded
    output.

    185+,   for stable state circuits (e.g., mono- stable or bistable) which
    may provide a pulse.

    309+,   for systems wherein the output represents the input waveform with
    the peaks thereof clipped or limited between certain levels.

    336+,   for integrating networks.

    544,    for circuits with power conservation or  pulse type source of
    supply or bias.

    554,    for a switched capacitor filter having an input which accepts a
    clock signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 419+ for systems wherein an alternating current
    is converted to pulses of energy for application to the human body.

    178,    Telegraphy, appropriate subclasses for pulse producing systems
    wherein the pulses are representative of a telegraph code, particularly
    subclasses 17+ for such systems where a perforated tape or other automatic
    device controls the production of the pulses, subclasses 2+ for systems
    where a keyboard is used to produce the pulses.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 106+
    for class appropriate waveform or wave shape determinative or pulse
    producing systems and subclasses 401+ for nonlinear reactor systems.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclasses 137+ for
    polyphase AC supply and subclasses 246+ for gaseous tube systems with
    pulsating or AC supply.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 119 for measuring
    systems involving rectification.

    331,    Oscillators, appropriate subclasses, for self-sustained generators,
    particularly subclasses 20+ for TV oscillators with automatic frequency
    stabilization, subclass 61 for oscillators with plural outputs of diverse
    waveforms, subclass 75 for oscillators combined with wave shaping networks
    in the output circuit, subclass 87 for magnetron type oscillators with
    pulse forming means in the control circuit thereof, subclasses 143+ for
    pulse forming networks of the relaxation oscillators type, subclasses 165+
    for shock excited resonant circuit with pulse type keying, and subclasses
    172+ for synchronizing, triggering, or pulsing circuits for oscillators.

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 106+ for pulse modulators where the nature
    of the pulses is varied in an arbitrary manner.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 20 for wave shaping
    systems utilizing a passive element.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclasses 825.57+, for pulse responsive selective systems; subclasses
    870.19+ for pulse modulation telemetering systems; and subclasses 287+ for
    electric signaling system with transmission of a train of pulse signals.

    341,    Code Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 20+ and 173+ for a
    pulse code transmitter, and subclasses 50+ for digital to digital code
    converters.

    342,    Communications, Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), appropriate subclasses for pulse reflected wave
    systems, particularly subclasses 118+ and 147+ for radar type systems
    involving pulse generating for determining distance or direction.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 182+ for
    single and plural relays which are frequency responsive, subclass 185 for
    phase responsive relays, and subclass 186 for pulse responsive relays.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 13+ for current
    conversion (i.e., rectification or derectification) systems.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 205, 212, and 213 for
    transmitting different messages involving pulse modulation.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclass 37 for miscellaneous
    telegraph systems using pulsating currents and subclasses 59+ for
    transmitters with pulse production.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices subclass 104 for X-ray
    electrical systms utilizing rectifying means with AC or pulsating supply.

    379,    Telephonic Communication, appropriate subclasses for telephone
    pulse producing systems.


CLS 327/292
TXT Clock fault compensation or redundant clocks:

    Subject matter under subclass 291 wherein clock accuracy is ensured by
    correcting for anticipated or actual clock errors.

    (1)     Note.  This may be achieved by providing multiple clocks which can,
    if necessary, be substituted for a defective clock.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    526,    for miscellaneous redundant circuits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 10+ for redundant
    logic circuitry.


CLS 327/293
TXT With plural paths in network:

    Subject matter under subclass 291 including multiple channels between a
    signal input terminal and one or more output terminals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     69+, 293, 407+, and 415+, for other systems with plural paths or
    channels therein.


CLS 327/294
TXT With common output:

    Subject matter under subclass 293 wherein the output of each of the plural
    paths or channels is fed to a common final output point.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for similar
    subject matter used with multiplexing.


CLS 327/295
TXT Plural outputs:

    Subject matter under subclass 291 wherein multiple separate output
    waveforms are produced and appear at respective output terminals.

    (1)     Note.  The separate outputs may be of similar or diverse wave shape
    or sign.


CLS 327/296
TXT Plural clock outputs with multiple inputs:

    Subject matter under subclass 295 wherein multiple clock waveforms are
    derived at circuit outputs from plural clock inputs.


CLS 327/297
TXT Clock bus:

    Subject matter under subclass 295 wherein the clock is applied to a
    distribution network which distributes a plural series of precisely timed,
    repetitive voltage pulses to plural devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    293+,   for clock generators having plural paths.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclass 86 for bus current
    driving in a logic circuit.


CLS 327/298
TXT Single clock output with multiple inputs:

    Subject matter under subclass 291 wherein plural inputs are utilized to
    produce the single clock output.


CLS 327/299
TXT Single clock output with single clock or data input:

    Subject matter under subclass 291 wherein one series of precisely timed,
    repetitive voltage pulses of fixed frequency and amplitude or a signal
    containing information is the sole input for creating a single clock
    output.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    295+,   for plural output clock generating.


CLS 327/300
TXT With saturable inductance:

    Subject matter under subclass 291 including a magnetic core reactor having
    reactance modified by varying the core saturation through a superimposed
    unidirectional flux.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181,    for pulse generating systems comprising electromagnetic pulse
    forming.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 401+
    for nonlinear reactor, (e.g., inductor) systems, in general.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 8 for magnetic amplifiers involving saturable
    core devices.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for structural details of
    induction devices and particularly subclasses 155+ for saturable type
    inductors.


CLS 327/301
TXT With electron beam type tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 291 including at least one electron space
    discharge device whose performance depends upon the formation and control
    of one or more rays of elemental negatively charged particles.


CLS 327/302
TXT With storage diode:

    Subject matter under subclass 291 which incorporates a two-terminal
    semiconductive device having minority carriers which accumulate at a pn
    junction when the diode is forward biased and which are suddenly swept away
    after back biasing increases to a certain point.

    SEARCH THIS  CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194,    for stable state circuits utilizing capacitive diodes.

    586,    for capacitive diode circuits, in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 595+ for voltage variable capacitance diodes, per se.


CLS 327/303
TXT With rectifier:

    Subject matter under subclass 291 including a device transforming an AC
    signal to a corresponding DC signal by a device permitting only
    unidirectional current flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28+,    for systems for determining or selecting desired pulses from a
    group of pulses by polarity and in which a rectifier may be utilized.

    104,    for systems for converting from an AC input to a corresponding DC
    voltage at an unloaded output and see the search notes thereunder.

    336,    for integrating networks in which a rectifier may be utilized.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 107
    for pulse producing systems of the passive type and utilizing rectification
    or derectification.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclasses 200+ for
    discharge devices or rectifiers in the supply circuit for gaseous tubes and
    subclass 272 for pulsating or AC supply systems for gaseous tubes and
    including a rectifier in the control circuit.


CLS 327/304
TXT With inductive device (e.g., transformer, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 291 which includes an element which has the
    property of opposing current flow therethrough due to a resultant magnetic
    field.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for generic inductive
    devices.


CLS 327/305
TXT With gas tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 291 which incorporates an electron discharge
    device where a small amount of gas is ionized to permit current flow.


CLS 327/306
TXT Amplitude control:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the amplitude of an input signal
    waveform is modified, maintained, or regulated to produce the desired
    output signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50+,    for voltage signal amplitude comparison (e.g., amplitude responsive
    pulse selecting systems).

    90,     for systems wherein the output is a function of the amplitude
    difference of two points on a wave.

    178,    for amplitude control systems of a pulse or rectangular wave output.

    335,    for differentiating networks.

    336+,   for integrating networks.

    356+,   for the recited algebraic product of two input signals which may be
    analogous to gain control circuits.

    551+,   for unwanted signal suppression and particularly subclasses 552+
    for such signal suppression provided by an active filter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 234+
    for a power supply which is output level responsive.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 96, 123, 127+, and 278+ for automatic signal
    level control or for amplitude limiting of amplifier power supplies.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 182+ for amplitude control of oscillator
    output.

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 149+ for amplitude modulation systems.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 14 for amplitude
    compression and expansion systems (i.e., companders) and subclasses 15, 16,
    17.1+, and 81+ for passive element attenuator systems for controlling
    signal amplitude.

    348,    Television, subclasses 571+ for amplitude control used in
    television receivers.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 234+ for automatic volume control
    systems used in radio receivers.


CLS 327/307
TXT Baseline or DC offset correction:

    Subject matter under subclass 306 wherein the drift of a reference direct
    current component of a signal is compensated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165+,   for rectangular or pulse waveform regeneration.

    178+,   for rectangular or pulse waveform amplitude control.


CLS 327/308
TXT Variable attenuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 306 wherein an input signal amplitude is
    diminished by an adjustable but typically unchanging factor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, appropriate subclasses for amplifying circuits, in
    general.


CLS 327/309
TXT By limiting, clipping, or clamping:

    Subject matter under subclass 306 wherein (a) the output signal amplitude
    is constrained by a maximum allowed level, a minimum allowed level or both
    or (b) the upper or lower amplitude extreme of the output signal is
    maintained at a particular level.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 234+
    for a power supply which is output level responsive.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 96, 123, 127+, and 278+ for automatic signal
    level and gain control or amplitude limiting of amplifier power supplies.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 182+ for amplitude control of oscillator
    output.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 14 for amplitude
    compression and expansion systems (i.e., companders); and subclasses 15,
    16, 17.1+, and 81+ for passive element attenuator systems which control
    signal amplitude.

    348,    Television, subclasses 571+ for amplitude control such as limiting
    or clamping in a television receiver.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 34, 60, and 99+ for
    noise reduction in pulse code modulation, transmitters, and receivers and
    subclass 98 for automatic gain control in receivers.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 218+, 278+, 296+, and 501+ for noise
    or interference elimination in analog communication and subclasses 234+ for
    attenuators and automatic gain control circuits in receiver or analog
    modulated frequency converters.


CLS 327/310
TXT Transient or signal noise reduction:

    Subject matter under subclass 309 wherein the limiting, clipping, or
    clamping lessens or eliminates an intermittent spuriously generated
    component from a signal.

    (1)     Note.  Recited noise override of the type associated with gating or
    switching is classified with the gating or switching area below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    379+,   for gating circuits having improvement of signal transmission
    integrity or spurious noise override.

    551+,   for miscellaneous unwanted signal suppression.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 21+ for signal
    sensitivity enhancement or signal transmission integrity in digital logic.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 110 and
    111 for transient protection in systems or devices.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclasses
    38.1, 39.1, 40.11+, 44, and 45 for correcting digital data errors caused by
    random or burst noise signals.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 34, 51, 57, 58, 60, and
    99+ for noise reduction in pulse code modulated systems, systems using
    pulsating current, pulse transmitters, AC or pulse systems or receivers.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    13, 83, 93, and 94.1+ for noise or feedback suppression in audio systems.

    704,    Data Processing:  Speech Signal Processing, Linguistics, Language
    Translation, and Audio Compression/Decompression, subclass 233 for
    detection of speech in noise.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 63+, 114, 218+, 278+, 283+, 296+,
    and 501+ for noise or interference elimination in analog communication
    systems (e.g., transmitter and receiver at separate stations or
    transceivers, etc.).


CLS 327/311
TXT By filtering:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein the limiting, clipping or
    clamping of a signal transient is provided by a circuit which offers little
    opposition to some frequencies or DC while blocking or attenuating other
    frequencies.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329,    for tuned circuit limiters.

    552+,   for miscellaneous active filters which suppress an unwanted signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 105
    for harmonic filters and neutralizers other than nonlinear active device
    types.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 17.1+ through 20
    for filters (usually passive) for controlling amplitude, impedance
    matching, and wave shaping; subclasses 24+ for passive wave filters; and
    subclasses 213+ for active devices determining passive filter
    characteristics.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses
    724.011+ for digital filters and subclass 825 for filtering by an analog
    computer.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclass 103 for filtering in
    receivers.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 296+ and 339 for noise or
    interference elimination and for filter coupling or decoupling of stages in
    receiver or analog modulated signal frequency converter systems.


CLS 327/312
TXT By feedback limiting-clamping:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein transient or signal noise
    reduction is performed in a return path between an output terminal and an
    input terminal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    316,    for feedback circuits to maintain a constant input-output ratio
    relationship.

    323,    for feedback limiting-clamping circuits, in general.

    332,    for amplitude output level control with feedback.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 75+, 156, 258, 260, 265, 270, 271, 282, 290,
    and 291+ for amplifiers with linear feedback.


CLS 327/313
TXT Using 3 or more terminal type nonlinear devices only:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein the circuit includes one or more
    elements having an output which is not in direct proportion to its input
    and having more than two electrodes as the only type of active element.


CLS 327/314
TXT Using diode type nonlinear devices only:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein the circuit includes one or more
    two-terminal unidirectionally conductive devices as the only type of active
    element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312,    for    feedback    controlled    limiting-
    clamping.

    318+,   for diode limiting, clipping, or clamping in the input or output
    circuits.

    323,    for Schottky barrier feedback limiting-clamping circuits.

    325,    for limiting, clipping, or clamping in general which utilizes only
    diode devices.

    583,    for miscellaneous solid-state diode circuits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 130+ and 133+ for
    diode logic circuits.


CLS 327/315
TXT Providing constant input/output amplitude level ratio:

    Subject matter under subclass 309 including maintenance of the ratio of the
    input to output signal magnitudes to a fixed value.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331+,   for amplitude control circuits which maintain a constant level
    output.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 278+ for linear amplifier automatic signal
    level and gain control and subclasses 96 and 123 for amplitude limiting of
    amplifier power supplies in linear systems.


CLS 327/316
TXT By feedback control:

    Subject matter under subclass 315 wherein a circuit is controlled by a
    signal returned along a path between an output terminal and an input
    terminal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312,    for feedback limiting-clamping circuit for reducing unwanted noise
    signals.

    323,    for feedback limiting-clamping circuits, per se.


CLS 327/317
TXT Distortion compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 309 wherein an undesired waveform
    modification is corrected or reduced by imposing amplitude constraints on
    the waveform.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    for distortion control in a sawtooth or triangular waveform.

    165+,   for regenerating or restoring a rectangular waveform.

    551+,   for miscellaneous unwanted signal suppression.


CLS 327/318
TXT In input or output circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 309 wherein the limiting, clipping, or
    clamping device is a component of either a signal insertion or extraction
    point of a circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    309+,   for limiting, clipping, or clamping to control output wave shape
    characteristics, generally.

    310+,   for limiting, clipping, or clamping to remove unwanted noise
    signals.


CLS 327/319
TXT For interstage coupling:

    Subject matter under subclass 318 wherein the limiting, clipping, or
    clamping permits the joining of two or more circuit sections together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333,    for miscellaneous interstage coupling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclass 62 for interface
    circuits for logic functions, per se.


CLS 327/320
TXT Using diode:

    Subject matter under subclass 319 including one or more two-terminal
    unidirectionally conductive devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    314,    for diodes used in shunt-type limiting, clipping, or clamping for
    reducing unwanted noise signals.

    325+,   for limiting, clipping, or clamping circuits, per se, which utilize
    only diodes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses for diverse types of diodes.


CLS 327/321
TXT Clamping of output to voltage level:

    Subject matter under subclass 318 wherein the maximum or minimum value of
    an output signal is held to a particular voltage level.


CLS 327/322
TXT Of output current:

    Subject matter under subclass 318 including apparatus which regulates the
    value of the current in the output.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    540+,   for current regulating in a miscellaneous circuit having a specific
    source of power supply or bias voltage.


CLS 327/323
TXT Feedback:

    Subject matter under subclass 309 wherein a limiting, clipping, or clamping
    structure is in a return path between an output terminal and an input
    terminal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312,    for feedback limiting, clipping, or clamping in reducing unwanted
    noise signals.

    316,    for feedback circuits to maintain a constant input-output ratio
    relationship.

    332,    for constant output amplitude control with feedback.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 75+, 156, and 282+ for linear feedback
    amplifiers.


CLS 327/324
TXT By using diverse-type nonlinear devices:

    Subject matter under subclass 309 wherein plural, unlike-in-kind, nonlinear
    devices are utilized.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310+,   for diverse-type limiting, clipping, or clamping to reduce unwanted
    noise signals.

    318+,   for diverse-type limiting, clipping, or clamping in either the
    input or output circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 299 for combined diverse-type linear gain
    semiconductor devices.


CLS 327/325
TXT Using only diode active elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 309 wherein the limiting,  clipping,  or
    clamping  utilizes  a  two-terminal unidirectionally conductive device as
    the sole active circuit device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    314,    for diode shunt-type limiting, clipping, or clamping to reduce
    unwanted noise signals.

    318+,   for diode limiting, clipping, or clamping in the input or output
    circuits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistor, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses for diverse types of diodes.


CLS 327/326
TXT Avalanche or negative resistance device (e.g., zener diode, tunnel diode,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 325 wherein at least one of the diode
    elements exhibits a sharp increase of current flow with increasing reverse
    bias applied thereto or has an IV characteristic with a portion where an
    increase in applied voltage results in a decrease of current therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310+,   for negative resistance device limiting, clipping, or clamping
    which reduce transient noise signals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistor, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses for solid-state devices, per se, and particularly
    subclasses 603+ for avalanche diodes, per se.


CLS 327/327
TXT Using only transistor active elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 309 wherein the limiting, clipping, or
    clamping utilizes a three or more terminal solid-state device as the sole
    active circuit device type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310+,   for limiting, clipping, or clamping to reduce unwanted noise
    signals.

    315+,   for circuits providing constant input-output ratio level.

    574+,   for special three or more electrode solid-state devices and
    circuits, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses for solid-state devices, per se.

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, appropriate subclasses for
    transistor logic circuit arrangements.


CLS 327/328
TXT Field-effect type device:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 which includes a unipolar transistor in
    which current carriers are injected at a source terminal and pass to a
    drain terminal through a channel of semiconductor material whose
    conductivity depends largely on an electrical field applied to the
    semiconductor from a control electrode (gate).

    (1)     Note.  In a unipolar transistor, the source to drain current
    involves only one type of charge carrier (i.e., holes in a p-type channel
    and electrons in an n-type channel).

    (2)     Note.  Two types of FET structures are prevalent:  (a) an
    all-junction device, known as a junction FET or JFET characterized by
    having heavily doped impurity regions of one type (e.g., p-type material),
    known as gate regions, on both sides of a second type semiconductor bar
    (e.g., n+ type material) to form a pn junction, and (b) a device such as a
    MOSFET/IGFET, consisting of a lightly doped substrate (e.g., p-type
    material) into which two highly doped regions (e.g., n+ type material) are
    diffused for forming source/drain regions with the area therebetween
    becoming the channel for current carriers (i.e., holes or electrons) and
    with a layer of insulating material (e.g., SiO2) grown over the channel
    surface for separating the channel from a control (i.e., gate) electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51+,    for a sensing amplifier which may utilize an FET bistable circuit.

    310+,   for controlled shunt-type limiting, clipping, or clamping with one
    or more field-effect transistor devices to reduce unwanted noise signals.

    581,    for field-effect device circuits, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 213+ for field-effect devices, per se.


CLS 327/329
TXT With tuned circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 309 including an inductive/capacitive network
    having a particular resonant frequency.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    532,    for power or bias supply systems with a wave filter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    334,    Tuners, appropriate subclasses for radio wave tuning circuitry and
    devices.


CLS 327/330
TXT With rectifier or nonlinear impedance:

    Subject matter under subclass 309 including a device converting alternating
    current to direct current or an impedance where the voltage to current
    ratio is not directly related.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104     and 531, for systems with detector or rectifier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 13+for electrical
    power conversion rectifiers or inverters.


CLS 327/331
TXT Maintaining constant level output:

    Subject matter under subclass 306 wherein the amplitude of an output
    waveform is kept at a fixed level independently of the amplitude of the
    input waveform.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315+,   for a circuit providing constant input/output amplitude level ratio.


CLS 327/332
TXT With feedback:

    Subject matter under subclass 331 wherein a correction voltage is returned
    from an output circuit to a control electrode in the input.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131,    for systems utilizing cathode feedback.

    185     and 590+, for tube systems with feedback.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 75+,
    156, 258, 260, 265, 270, 271, 282, 290, and 291+ for amplifiers with linear
    feedback.


CLS 327/333
TXT Interstage coupling (e.g., level shift, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 306 wherein interconnection of two diverse
    circuits having different ranges of acceptable signal values is made
    possible.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry subclasses 62+ for logic
    interface circuits.


CLS 327/334
TXT SPECIFIC INPUT TO OUTPUT FUNCTION:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein an output is proportional
    to a nonlinear mathematical expression of an input signal.

    (1)     Note.  Characteristically the input signal is continuous and slowly
    varying with the output signal usually bearing a mathematical relationship
    to it.

    (2)     Note.  Boolean algebra functions and linear amplifiers are excluded
    from this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  The input signals in this subclass do not contain
    information (data) of any kind.  For data processing, see Search Class
    below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for discriminating systems.

    560,    for nonlinear amplifying circuits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, appropriate subclasses for
    Boolean algebra functions.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 250+ for semiconductor linear amplifiers,
    per se.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 138+ for nonlinear
    analog to digital conversion.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses
    715.011+ for digital computation and subclasses 807+ for analog computation.


CLS 327/335
TXT By differentiating:

    Subject matter under subclass 334 wherein the output signal is proportional
    to the instantaneous rate of change of the input signal.

    SEARCH THIS  CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for signal discriminating (e.g., comparing or selecting) without
    subsequent control and particularly subclasses 14+ for signal slope
    comparing or selecting.

    336+,   for signal integrating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 828 for
    an analog computer adapted to perform a differentiation on an input.


CLS 327/336
TXT By integrating:

    Subject matter under 334 wherein the output signal is proportional to a
    time integral function of the input signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14+,    for systems wherein the rate of change of an input signal is
    detected.

    100+,   for wave conversion or shaping systems which may include
    differentiating or integrating means.

    131+,   for systems producing a sawtooth output utilizing integration or
    differentiation.

    335,    for input signal differentiation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 141, 456+, 609+,
    621+, and 702 for a motor control network involving differentiation or
    integration.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 212
    through 219 for miscellaneous phase control networks which involve
    differentiating or integrating networks.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 17 for systems with means for the automatic
    frequency control of an oscillator and involving integrating networks.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 19 for a passive
    network performing differentiation or integration and being of general
    utility.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 829+
    for an analog computer adapted to perform an integration function.

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, cross-reference art
    collections 900+ for motor control systems including integration circuits.


CLS 327/337
TXT Having switched capacitance:

    Subject matter under subclass 336 wherein the time integral function is
    determined by a particular capacitor arrangement which is variable
    dependent upon a connect/disconnect path.

    SEARCH THIS  CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    365+,   for gating of an input signal between input and output.

    554,    for an adjustable filter utilizing a switched capacitive
    arrangement.


CLS 327/338
TXT With thermionic tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 336 including an electron tube which ejects
    electrons by elevating the temperature of the tube cathode.


CLS 327/339
TXT With summing or counting:

    Subject matter under subclass 336 wherein (a) a signal is produced that
    represents a weighted sum of the input signal or (b) a device is
    incremented or decremented at discrete intervals upon receipt of the input
    signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    361,    for miscellaneous summing circuits.


CLS 327/340
TXT Single vacuum tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 336 including only one device with sealed
    envelope which controls the flow of electrons between spaced electrodes
    through a fully or partially evacuated space.


CLS 327/341
TXT With compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 336 wherein an integration circuit is
    maintained in its normal operating state or offsets any undesirable changes
    in its circuitry.


CLS 327/342
TXT With transducer:

    Subject matter under subclass 336 including a device that converts energy
    forms (other than electrical) into an electrical energy signal.

    (1)     Note.  The other energy forms may be mechanical, thermal,
    hydraulic, chemical, etc.


CLS 327/343
TXT With rectifier circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 336 including a device that converts
    alternating current to direct current.

    (1)     Note.  A rectifier circuit may be used prior to integrating the
    input signal.


CLS 327/344
TXT Including RC circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 336 including a particular arrangement of
    capacitance and resistance.


CLS 327/345
TXT Having feedback:

    Subject matter under subclass 336 wherein a portion of the output signal is
    returned to an input.

    (1)     Note.  The feedback may be used to adjust the time constant of the
    time integral function.


CLS 327/346
TXT Exponential:

    Subject matter under subclass 334 wherein the output signal is proportional
    to an input signal that is raised to a particular algebraic power.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    350+,   for logarithmic functions.


CLS 327/347
TXT Square root:

    Subject matter under subclass 346 wherein the output signal is proportional
    to the input signal raised to the power of one half.


CLS 327/348
TXT RMS:

    Subject matter under subclass 347 wherein the output signal is proportional
    to the square root of the average of the squares of the input signal taken
    throughout one period.

    (1)     Note.  For example, in a sine wave, this value is 0.707 times the
    peak value of the input waveform.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for conversion of an AC signal to a corresponding DC signal at an
    unloaded output.


CLS 327/349
TXT Square function:

    Subject matter under subclass 346 wherein the output signal is proportional
    to the input signal raised to the power of two or a multiple of two.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    356+,   for the determination of the product of two inputs, in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 753
    and 813 for the evaluation of  powers by a digital or analog electrical
    calculating computer, respectively.


CLS 327/350
TXT Logarithmic:

    Subject matter under subclass 334 wherein the output signal is proportional
    to an inverse exponential function of the input signal.

    (1)     Note.  Function generators for producing internal logarithmic
    functions in analog computers are found in Class 364.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    346,    for producing exponential functions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 805 for selective visual
    display systems having specified waveform generators coupled to a display.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 748.5
    for digital computer manipulation of operands having a logarithmic format
    and subclass 857 for analog computer generated logarithmic function signals.


CLS 327/351
TXT With cascade network:

    Subject matter under subclass 350 including an arrangement of two or more
    similar circuits or stages in which an output of one circuit provides an
    input to the next circuit.

    (1)     Note.  This is also called a tandem arrangement.


CLS 327/352
TXT With summing:

    Subject matter under subclass 350 wherein an output signal is produced that
    represents the algebraic sum of applied input signals.


CLS 327/353
TXT With vacuum tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 350 including a device with sealed envelope
    which controls the flow of electrons between spaced electrodes through a
    fully or partially evacuated space.


CLS 327/354
TXT Absolute value:

    Subject matter under subclass 334 wherein an output signal is proportional
    to the negative of an input signal, if the input signal is negative, and is
    proportional to an input signal, if the input signal is positive.

    (1)     Note.  Usually, the output to input magnitude ratio is unity.


CLS 327/355
TXT Combining of plural signals:

    Subject matter under subclass 334 wherein the output is a resultant
    function of mathematically operating on two or more input signals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3+,     for systems wherein the output is a function of phase difference of
    plural input waves.

    40+,    for systems wherein the output is a function of frequency
    difference of plural input waves.

    105+,   for conversion systems for synthesizing a complex wave from a
    plurality of waves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 140+ for
    electricity measuring and testing systems which contain plural inputs
    (e.g., summation, ratio).

    348,    Television, subclasses 659+ for television matrixing systems.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for electrical computing apparatus for performing some
    particular mathematical operation and subclasses 768+ for apparatus which
    performs a complete addition.


CLS 327/356
TXT Product:

    Subject matter under subclass 355 wherein the output signal represents an
    analog multiplication of plural input signals.

    SEARCH THIS  CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113+,   for frequency control including frequency multiplication.

    178+,   for pulse waveform amplitude (e.g., gain) control.

    306+,   for miscellaneous waveform amplitude (e.g., gain) control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses
    754.01+ for digital computer multipliers and subclasses 841+ for analog
    computer multipliers.


CLS 327/357
TXT Quadrant:

    Subject matter under subclass 356 wherein the output signal represents an
    analog multiplication performed on input signals having positive or
    negative polarities.


CLS 327/358
TXT Having feedback:

    Subject matter under subclass 356 wherein a portion of the output signal is
    returned to an input.


CLS 327/359
TXT Differential amplifier:

    Subject matter under subclass 356 wherein a circuit amplifies only the
    differences between the two input signals and suppresses the input signals
    when they have identical signals.


CLS 327/360
TXT Quotient:

    Subject matter under subclass 355 wherein the output signal represents a
    ratio of plural input signals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 761+
    for digital computer dividers and subclass 850 for analog computer dividers.


CLS 327/361
TXT Summing:

    Subject matter under subclass 355 wherein an output signal is produced that
    represents an algebraic sum of input signals.


CLS 327/362
TXT With compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 334 wherein a functional circuit is
    maintained in its normal operating state or offsets any undesirable changes
    therein.

    (1)     Note.  Undesired changes in the circuit signals may be due to
    temperature fluctuations, component structural differences, power supply
    fluctuations, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    513,    for miscellaneous circuits providing temperature compensation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 220+,
    234+, 299+, 304+, and 318+ for load controlled or regulated systems.


CLS 327/363
TXT Having feedback:

    Subject matter under subclass 334 wherein a portion of the output signal is
    returned to an input.


CLS 327/364
TXT With vacuum tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 334 including a device with a sealed envelope
    which controls the flow of electrons between spaced electrodes through a
    fully or partially evacuated space.


CLS 327/365
TXT GATING (I.E., SWITCHING INPUT TO OUTPUT):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein one signal (a controlling
    signal) determines whether an input signal is transmitted without
    modification to an output or is blocked therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  The input signal may be a DC, AC, or a complex wave in the
    switching operation.

    (2)     Note.  Excluded herein are switching systems including those which
    are solely mechanical or electromechanical (either static or dynamic) and
    those handling high current or voltage.

    (3)     Note.  Switching circuits or systems peculiar to an art device are
    classified with the art device.  For example, a centralized telephone
    switching system is classified in Class 379, subclasses 242+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124,    for signal waveform generating by periodic switching (e.g.,
    chopping).

    337,    for an integrator which utilizes the switching of a capacitive
    arrangement.

    554,    for an adjustable filter which utilizes the switching of a
    capacitance into or out of the circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, for closing or opening
    an electrical circuit.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 29 for
    plural loads or sources selectively connected and subclasses 112+ for
    electrical transmission or interconnection type switching systems.

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 2+ for electromagnetically actuated switches.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches, for
    electric current switching devices which operate by heating effect.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, appropriate subclasses for an alarm or
    indicating device or system which includes a switching operation.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ for
    an interruptor or connector which is used for the purpose of safety and
    protection of a system or a device and subclasses 160+ for a solenoid or
    relay control circuit.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 802 for a position or condition responsive
    switch.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, for a single electric power
    signal being modified when transmitted from an input to a single output
    load.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 351+ for multiplex switching.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 156+, 177+, 219+, 242+, 422+,
    etc., for particular switching systems used in telephonic communication.


CLS 327/366
TXT Superconductive (e.g., cryogenic, etc.) device:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 including a switching circuit which
    operates at a very low temperature (e.g., 30 K) where the electrical
    resistance becomes essentially zero.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass comprises superconductive devices which
    operate at a temperature less than or equal to 30 K; Class 505 comprises
    superconductive devices which operate at a temperature higher than 30 K.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186,    for superconductive stable state circuits,

    527+,   for miscellaneous superconductive circuits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 1+ for
    superconductive electronic digital logic circuits.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    appropriate subclasses for superconductive devices operated at a
    temperature higher than 30 K.


CLS 327/367
TXT Josephson junction:

    Subject matter under subclass 366 including an electronic fast-switching
    device consisting of two superconductors separated by a thin layer of
    insulator which allows a low current flow therethrough by quantum
    mechanical tunneling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 3+ for electronic
    logic using a Josephson tunneling device.


CLS 327/368
TXT Critical current control:

    Subject matter under subclass 366 wherein the switching operation depends
    on a value of current that, if exceeded, may destroy the superconductivity
    of the gate conductor.


CLS 327/369
TXT External control (e.g., piezoelectric, light, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 366 wherein the switching operation is
    responsive to a physical condition, such as, mechanical stress from a
    piezoelectric element or light from an optical device, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    187,    for external effect stable state circuits.

    509+,   for miscellaneous external effect circuits.


CLS 327/370
TXT Magnetic field control:

    Subject matter under subclass 369 wherein the switching operation depends
    on a variation of a controlled magnetic field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    187,    for an external effect stable state circuit.

    510+,   for miscellaneous magnetic effect circuits.


CLS 327/371
TXT Temperature control:

    Subject matter under subclass 369 wherein the switching operation is
    responsive to a variation of temperature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    187,    for an external effect stable state circuit.

    512+,   for miscellaneous thermal effect circuits.


CLS 327/372
TXT Inductive effect:

    Subject matter under subclass 366 wherein the switching operation depends
    on a property of a circuit that tends to oppose any change of current
    because of a magnetic field associated with the current itself.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for inductive elements,
    per se.


CLS 327/373
TXT Layout:

    Subject matter under subclass 366 wherein the switching circuit is
    represented by its physical structure on a substrate with a detailed
    description of the topological arrangement and connection of conductors and
    components.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    564+,   for miscellaneous circuits reciting integrated structure which may
    include layout or layout interconnections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses for integrated structure, per se.

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 101+ for logic
    circuits utilizing significant integrated structure, layout, or layout
    interconnections.

    338,    Resistors, subclass 32 for superconducting resistors.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    appropriate subclasses for superconducting devices or circuits operating at
    a temperature greater than 30 K.


CLS 327/374
TXT Accelerating switching:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 including a circuit to minimize the time
    delay at the turn-on or turn-off period, therefore increasing the switching
    speed.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass is electronic digital logic
    switching acceleration (see search notes below).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 17+ for switching
    acceleration in electronic digital logic circuitry.


CLS 327/375
TXT Saturation prevention:

    Subject matter under subclass 374 including a circuit intended to avoid the
    concentration of charges stored in a bipolar transistor base region, such
    concentration of charges prevents the bipolar transistor from turning on or
    off quickly.


CLS 327/376
TXT Turn-on:

    Subject matter under subclass 374 including a circuit intended to reduce
    the time interval from the occurrence of a control input for turning on the
    gate to the occurrence of a current or a signal being gated to the output.


CLS 327/377
TXT Turn-off:

    Subject matter under subclass 374 including a circuit intended to reduce
    the time interval from the occurrence of a control input for turning off
    the gate to the occurrence of a current or signal being blocked at the
    gate.


CLS 327/378
TXT Compensation for variations in external physical values (e.g., temperature,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 365 including a circuit to offset an
    undesired change in the switched signal caused by the variation of a
    physical condition outside of the switching circuit, for example, variation
    in temperature, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    513,    for miscellaneous temperature compensation.


CLS 327/379
TXT Signal transmission integrity or spurious noise override:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 including a circuit to maintain signal
    transmission without impairment from unwanted or unintentionally generated
    electrical signals.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded herein are circuits which relate to signal
    sensitivity or transmission integrity in an electronic digital logic
    circuit.  These are classified in Class 326.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310+,   for transient or signal noise reduction by limiting, clipping, or
    clamping.

    551+,   for miscellaneous unwanted signal suppression.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 21+ for signal
    sensitivity or transmission integrity in electronic digital logic circuitry.


CLS 327/380
TXT Preventing quick rise gating current (i.e., di/dt):

    Subject matter under subclass 379 including a circuit for preventing, at
    the beginning of the turn-on period, an excessive current flow change at
    the control terminal which could cause damage to the switching device.


CLS 327/381
TXT Preventing quick rise gating voltage (i.e., dv/dt):

    Subject matter under subclass 379 including a circuit for preventing, at
    the beginning of the turn-on period, an excessive potential change at the
    control terminal which could cause damage to the switching device.


CLS 327/382
TXT Parasitic prevention or compensation (e.g., parasitic capacitance, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 379 including a circuit to alleviate
    detrimental changes in the switched signal caused by the presence of
    inherent non-ideal circuit elements.

    (1)     Note.  Such undesired elements can be modeled by well known
    electrical elements, such as a capacitor or inductor and are responsible
    for parasitic capacitance or parasitic inductance, respectively.

    (2)     Note.  Parasitic capacitance or parasitic inductance may be
    compensated by using impedance matching.


CLS 327/383
TXT Ensuring fully conducting state:

    Subject matter under subclass 379 including a circuit for developing an
    essentially equal potential at all nodes along the transmission path of the
    switched signal.

    (1)     Note.  Irregular potentials at different nodes along a transmission
    path are caused by non-ideal transistors which tend to remain in a
    partially conducting state.


CLS 327/384
TXT Switch noise signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 379 including a circuit which offsets an
    unwanted oscillation (ringing) or a spurious spike due to a switch being
    turned on or off.


CLS 327/385
TXT Contact bounce from mechanical switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 384 wherein an electromechanically induced
    switching noise (i.e., chatter) is offset.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 17, 81, and 101+ for systems including error
    prevention against contact bounce signals resulting from a key or keyboard
    operation.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 24+ for keyboard or
    keypad with contact debounce or antichatter feature.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, appropriate
    subclasses for protection from power or voltage surges.


CLS 327/386
TXT With clock input:

    Subject matter under subclass 385 wherein the switching circuit accepts and
    is responsive to a predetermined time-related signal or a periodic signal
    in addition to the control signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291+,   for the generation of a clock signal.


CLS 327/387
TXT Control signal derived from or responsive to input signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 379 wherein the control signal is dependent
    on or generated from a characteristic of the input signal.

    (1)     Note.  For example, in FET switching devices, a control signal
    which is responsive to the constancy or fluctuations of an input signal
    would be fed to the gate electrode to control the FET channel impedance.


CLS 327/388
TXT Additional external control signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 387 including another control signal which
    controls the switching operation and which is independent of the
    characteristic of the input signal and the first control signal.


CLS 327/389
TXT Insulated gate FET (e.g., MOSFET, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 379 wherein the circuit includes one or more
    unipolar transistors characterized by having a lightly doped substrate
    (e.g., p-type material) into which two highly doped regions (e.g., n+ type
    material) are diffused for forming source/drain regions with the area
    therebetween becoming the channel for current carriers (i.e., holes or
    electrons) when an electrical field is applied; a layer of insulating
    material (e.g., SiO2) is grown over the channel surface for separating the
    channel from a control (i.e., gate) electrode.

    (1)     Note.  In a unipolar transistor, the source to drain current
    involves only one type of charge carrier.

    (2)     Note.  A MOSFET or Metal-oxide field-effect transistor has a
    metallic gate insulated by an oxide layer from the semiconductor channel.


CLS 327/390
TXT With capacitive bootstrapping:

    Subject matter under subclass 389 wherein the IGFET switching circuit
    includes discrete, capacitive elements, or uses its inherent capacitance to
    enhance its operating condition, to achieve full switching capabilities in
    response to control signals.

    (1)     Note.  Enhancement of the performance of the switching circuit
    includes boosting the DC level of the control signals for one or more
    semiconductor devices, as well as boosting the attained DC levels of
    individual circuit nodal locations, usually by, for example, either a
    feedforward/feedback connection or a separate time-related, pulse signal
    coupled via the boosting capacitor to a particular circuit location.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    589,    for miscellaneous bootstrap circuits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 88 and 92 for logic
    bootstrap circuits.


CLS 327/391
TXT Complementary metal-oxide semiconductor (CMOS):

    Subject matter under subclass 389 including a unit of two enhancement mode
    metal-oxide field-effect transistors, each having a channel of conductivity
    type opposite that of the other (e.g., p-channel vs. n-channel) and they
    are connected in series across the power supply with gates linked together.

    (1)     Note.  In the enhancement mode, a MOSFET is normally off with zero
    gate voltage applied.

    (2)     Note.  Opposite channel conductivity type, as used above,
    characterizes the induced channel majority carrier conduction (i.e., holes
    for p-channel and electrons for n-channel).


CLS 327/392
TXT Delay controlled switch (e.g., fixed, single time of delay control, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 365 wherein there is a recited significant
    time offset between the occurrence of a gating control signal and the
    actual initiation of the gating operation.

    (1)     Note.  Time delay network systems which control the operation of a
    recited specific load circuit such as a motor, a relay, a display system,
    etc., are classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141+,   for signal synchronization.

    231+,   for phase shift of an input signal which is less than the period
    thereof.

    261+,   for time delay in producing an output waveform.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 141+ for automatic
    generator control with time delay and subclasses 445+ for motive power
    systems with time delay, per se.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 220+,
    234+, 304+, and 318+ for load controlled or regulated systems.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 195+ for
    time delay networks which control a relay load switching operation.

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, cross reference art collection
    921 for running-speed control systems including a time delay.


CLS 327/393
TXT With variable or multiple adjustable time of delay control (e.g., variable
    charge-discharge, on-delay/off-delay control, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 392 wherein the time offset is varied, for
    example, by (1) controlling a charge/discharge device to create different
    varying times, (2) changing a setting/resetting cycle, or (3) changing the
    on/off time of a control element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172+,   for pulse width or duration control.


CLS 327/394
TXT With field-effect device:

    Subject matter under subclass 393 including a circuit having one or more
    devices each having a high input impedance and low leakage, thus providing
    excellent isolation between the drive signal, which is used to switch the
    input signal from one part of the circuit to another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    399,    for a field-effect device used in a delay controlled switch.

    581,    for miscellaneous field-effect transistor circuits.


CLS 327/395
TXT Propagation through plural delay devices or paths:

    Subject matter under subclass 393 wherein the variable or adjustable delay
    is achieved by connecting the input signal to multiple delaying elements or
    circuit branches.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400,    for a delay controlled switch having propagation through plural
    delay devices or paths, in general.


CLS 327/396
TXT With plural switching elements (e.g., sequential, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 393 wherein multiple gating devices are
    utilized.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    269,    for a plurality of time delay intervals in multiple outputs.

    401,    for time delay switching using plural switching elements in a
    non-variable or non-multiple adjustable time of delay.

    403+,   for switching parallel controlled paths without any delay of the
    input.

    415+,   for applying a single input to plural outputs without any delay of
    the input.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 166+ for
    timely operated plural relays.


CLS 327/397
TXT Including negative resistance device in delay circuit(e.g., unijunction
    transistor, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 393 wherein the plot of the current-voltage
    operating characteristics of an incorporated device has a portion with a
    negative slope.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    498+,   for two electrode solid-state negative resistance gating circuits.

    568+,   for miscellaneous solid-state negative resistance device circuits.


CLS 327/398
TXT For predetermined time period:

    Subject matter under subclass 392 wherein the activation duration of the
    switch is fixed prior to such activation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172+,   for pulse waveform duration control.


CLS 327/399
TXT With field-effect device:

    Subject matter under subclass 392 including a circuit having one or more
    devices each having a high input impedance and low leakage, thus providing
    excellent isolation between the drive signal which is used to switch the
    input signal from one part of the circuit to another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    394,    for a variable or multiple adjustable time of delay control.

    581,    for miscellaneous field-effect transistor circuits.


CLS 327/400
TXT Propagation through plural delay devices or paths:

    Subject matter under subclass 392 wherein the delay is controlled by
    connecting the input signal to multiple delaying elements or circuit
    branches.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    395,    for a delay controlled switch having a variable or multiple
    adjustable delay including propagation through plural delay devices or
    paths.


CLS 327/401
TXT With plural switching elements (e.g., sequential, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 392 wherein multiple gating devices are
    utilized.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    269,    for a plurality of time delay intervals in multiple outputs.

    396,    for variable or multiple adjustable time delay using plural
    switching elements.

    403+,   for switching parallel controlled paths without any delay of the
    input.

    415+,   for applying a single input to plural outputs without any delay of
    the input.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 166+ for
    timely operated plural relays.


CLS 327/402
TXT Including negative resistance device in delay circuit (e.g., unijunction
    transistor, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 392 wherein a plot of the current-voltage
    operating characteristics of an incorporated device has a portion with a
    negative slope.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    498+    for two electrode solid-state negative resistance gating circuits.

    568+,   for miscellaneous negative resistance device circuits.


CLS 327/403
TXT Parallel controlled paths:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 comprising at least two signal paths
    having a common input and a common output, each signal path having at least
    one switch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    407+,   for converging plural inputs with single output.

    415+,   for diverging paths with a single input and plural outputs.


CLS 327/404
TXT Field-effect transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 wherein at least one path includes a
    unipolar transistor in which current carriers are injected at a source
    terminal and passed to a drain terminal through a channel of semiconductor
    material whose conductivity depends largely on an electrical field applied
    to the semiconductor from a control electrode (i.e., gate).

    (1)     Note.  In a unipolar transistor, the source to drain current
    involves only one type of charge carrier (i.e., holes in a p-type material
    channel and electrons in an n-type material channel).

    (2)     Note.  Two types of FET structures are prevalent:  (a) an
    all-junction device, known as a junction FET or JFET characterized by
    having heavily doped impurity regions of one type (e.g., p-type material),
    known as gate regions, on both sides of a second type semiconductor bar
    (e.g., n+ type material) to form a pn junction, and (b) a device such as a
    MOSFET/IGFET, consisting of a lightly doped substrate (e.g., p-type
    material) into which two highly doped regions (e.g., n+ type material) are
    diffused for forming source/drain regions with the area therebetween
    becoming the channel for current carriers (i.e., holes or electrons) and
    with a layer of insulating material (e.g., SiO2) grown over the channel
    surface for separating the channel from a control (i.e., gate) electrode.


CLS 327/405
TXT Bipolar transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 wherein at least one path includes a
    three or more electrode semiconductor device of the type having at least
    two potential barriers and having a controlled current flow of both
    majority and minority carriers (i.e., holes and electrons).

    (1)     Note.  Npn and pnp type transistors are conventional bipolar
    transistors; each has three regions, three electrodes and two junctions.
    Each of the three regions is connected externally by a terminal labeled
    emitter, base, or collector.


CLS 327/406
TXT Electron tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 wherein at least one path includes a
    vacuum tube or a gas filled tube, in which electrical currents flow between
    spaced electrodes, and in which the conduction of charged particles (e.g.,
    electrons or ions), takes place between these electrodes.


CLS 327/407
TXT Converging with plural inputs and single output:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 comprising at least two signal paths
    having separate inputs and a common output, each signal path having at
    least one switch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403+,   for controlled parallel paths.

    415+,   for diverging paths with a single input and plural outputs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for information
    multiplexing.


CLS 327/408
TXT Field-effect transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 407 wherein at least one path includes a
    unipolar transistor in which current carriers are injected at a source
    terminal and pass to a drain terminal through a channel of semiconductor
    material whose conductivity depends largely on an electrical field applied
    to the semiconductor from a control electrode (gate).

    (1)     Note.  In a unipolar transistor, the source to drain current
    involves only one type of charge carrier (i.e., holes in a p-type material
    channel and electrons in an n-type material channel).

    (2)     Note.  Two types of FET structures are prevalent:  (a) an
    all-junction device, known as a junction FET or JFET characterized by
    having heavily doped impurity regions of one type (e.g., p-type material),
    known as gate regions, on both sides of a second type semiconductor bar
    (e.g., n+ type material) to form a pn junction, and (b) a device such as a
    MOSFET/IGFET, consisting of a lightly doped substrate (e.g., p-type
    material) into which two highly doped regions (e.g., n+ type material) are
    diffused for forming source/drain regions with the area therebetween
    becoming the channel for current carriers (i.e., holes or electrons) and
    with a layer of insulating material (e.g., SiO2) grown over the channel
    surface for separating the channel from a control (i.e., gate) electrode.


CLS 327/409
TXT Push-pull circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 408 wherein the switching  circuit  includes
    two   similar field-effect transistors connected in series, having two
    input terminals and a common output terminal, and alternatively
    transmitting input signals to the output.


CLS 327/410
TXT With complementary transistor devices:

    Subject matter under subclass 409 wherein the push-pull circuit includes
    two field-effect transistors of n-type channel and p-type channel connected
    in series.


CLS 327/411
TXT Bipolar transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 407 wherein at least one path includes a
    three or more electrode semiconductor device of the type having at least
    two potential barriers and having a controlled current flow of both
    majority and minority carriers (i.e., holes and electrons).

    (1)     Note.  Npn and pnp type transistors are conventional bipolar
    transistors, each has three regions, three electrodes, and two junctions.
    Each of the three regions is connected externally by a terminal labeled
    emitter, base, or collector.


CLS 327/412
TXT Push-pull circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 411 including a circuit containing two
    similar bipolar transistors connected in series, having two input terminals
    and a common output terminal, and alternatively transmitting input signals
    to the output.


CLS 327/413
TXT With complementary transistor devices:

    Subject matter under subclass 412 including two bipolar transistors of
    opposite conductivity type connected in series (e.g., npn and pnp
    transistors).


CLS 327/414
TXT Electron tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 407 wherein at least one path includes a
    vacuum tube or a gas filled device, in which electrical currents flow
    between spaced electrodes and in which the conduction of charged particles
    (e.g., electrons) takes place between electrodes.


CLS 327/415
TXT Diverging with single input and plural outputs:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 comprising at least two signal paths
    having a single input and separate outputs, each signal path containing at
    least one switch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403+,   for controlled parallel paths.

    407+,   for converging paths with plural inputs and single output.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for information
    multiplexing.


CLS 327/416
TXT Field-effect transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 415 wherein at least one path includes a
    unipolar transistor in which current carriers are injected at a source
    terminal and passed to a drain terminal through a channel of semiconductor
    material whose conductivity depends largely on an electrical field applied
    to the semiconductor from a control electrode (i.e., gate).

    (1)     Note.  In a unipolar transistor, the source to drain current
    involves only one type of charge carrier (i.e., holes in a p-type material
    channel and electrons in an n-type material channel).

    (2)     Note.  Two types of FET structures are prevalent:  (a) an
    all-junction device, known as a junction FET or JFET characterized by
    having heavily doped impurity regions of one type (e.g., p-type material),
    known as gate regions, on both sides of a second type semiconductor bar
    (e.g., n+ type material) to form a pn junction, and (b) a device such as a
    MOSFET/IGFET, consisting of a lightly doped substrate (e.g., p-type
    material) into which two highly doped regions (e.g., n+ type material) are
    diffused for forming source/drain regions with the area therebetween
    becoming the channel for current carriers (i.e., holes or electrons) and
    with a layer of insulating material (e.g., SiO2) grown over the channel
    surface for separating the channel from a control (i.e., gate) electrode.


CLS 327/417
TXT Bipolar transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 415 wherein at least one path includes a
    three or more electrode semiconductor device of the type having at least
    two potential barriers and having a controlled current flow of both
    majority and minority carriers (i.e., holes and electrons).

    (1)     Note.  Npn and pnp type transistors are conventional bipolar
    transistors which have three regions, three electrodes and two junctions.
    Each of the three regions is connected externally by a terminal labeled
    emitter, base, or collector.


CLS 327/418
TXT Electron tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 415 wherein at least one path includes a
    vacuum tube or gas filled device, in which electrical currents flow between
    spaced electrodes and in which the conduction of charged particles (e.g.,
    electrons) takes place between electrodes.


CLS 327/419
TXT Utilizing three or more electrode solid-state device:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 including a semiconductor device
    containing three or more elements that perform one or more of the
    following:  (a) emit or collect electrons or holes, or (b) control the
    electron or hole movements by an applied electrical field.


CLS 327/420
TXT Breakdown characteristic (e.g., punch-through, tunneling, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 419 wherein the operation of the solid-state
    device is characterized by a sudden change from high dynamic electrical
    resistance to a very low dynamic resistance in a reverse biased
    semiconductor devices (e.g., a reverse biased junction between p-type and
    n-type semiconductor materials), wherein reverse current increases rapidly
    for a small increase in reverse applied voltage, and the device behaves as
    if it had negative electrical resistance.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of breakdown characteristic are punch-through or
    tunneling.  In punch-through, two adjacent diffused transistor regions
    become shorted together, causing a sharp rise in current.  In tunneling,
    particles under certain conditions have the ability to pass through a
    barrier that normally it cannot pass over because of a required energy
    level.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    580,    for miscellaneous circuits with breakdown transistor devices.

    584,    for miscellaneous circuits with breakdown diodes.


CLS 327/421
TXT Zener:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 wherein a breakdown is caused in a
    semiconductor device by the field emission of charge carriers in a
    depletion layer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    584,    for miscellaneous circuits with breakdown diodes.


CLS 327/422
TXT Avalanche:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 wherein a breakdown is caused by the
    action of a strong electric field which causes some free carriers to gain
    enough    energy to  liberate  new  hole-electron pairs by ionization.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    584,    for miscellaneous circuits with breakdown diodes.


CLS 327/423
TXT Bridge circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 419 including four or more solid-state
    devices with their input and output terminals connected in a closed loop to
    form a four arm network, and at least one solid-state device is a
    transistor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    588,    for miscellaneous bridge circuits.


CLS 327/424
TXT Field-effect transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 423 wherein at least one arm of the bridge
    circuit includes a unipolar transistor in which current carriers are
    injected at a source terminal and pass to a drain terminal through a
    channel of semiconductor material whose conductivity depends largely on an
    electrical field applied to the semiconductor from a control electrode
    (i.e., gate).

    (1)     Note.  In a unipolar transistor, the source to drain current
    involves only one type of charge carrier (i.e., holes in a p-type material
    channel and electrons in an n-type material channel).

    (2)     Note.  Two types of FET structures are prevalent:  (a) an
    all-junction device, known as a junction FET or JFET characterized by
    having heavily doped impurity regions of one type (e.g., p-type material),
    known as gate regions, on both sides of a second type semiconductor bar
    (e.g., n+ type material) to form a pn junction, and (b) a device such as a
    MOSFET/IGFET, consisting of a lightly doped substrate (e.g., p-type
    material) into which two highly doped regions (e.g., n+ type material) are
    diffused for forming source/drain regions with the area therebetween
    becoming the channel for current carriers (i.e., holes or electrons) and
    with a layer of insulating material (e.g., SiO2) grown over the channel
    surface for separating the channel from a control (i.e., gate) electrode.


CLS 327/425
TXT Bilateral transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 419 wherein the solid-state device is a
    transistor which conducts equally in either direction.


CLS 327/426
TXT Plural:

    Subject matter under subclass 425 wherein the switch comprises more than
    one bilateral transistor.


CLS 327/427
TXT Field-effect transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 419 including a unipolar transistor in which
    current carriers are injected at a source terminal and pass to a drain
    terminal through a channel of semiconductor material whose conductivity
    depends largely on an electrical field applied to the semiconductor from a
    control electrode (gate).

    (1)     Note.  In a unipolar transistor, the source to drain current
    involves only one type of charge carrier (i.e., holes in a p-type material
    channel and electrons in an n-type material channel).

    (2)     Note.  Two types of FET structures are prevalent:  (a) an
    all-junction device, known as a junction FET or JFET characterized by
    having heavily doped impurity regions of one type (e.g., p-type material),
    known as gate regions, on both sides of a second type semiconductor bar
    (e.g., n+ type material) to form a pn junction, and (b) a device such as a
    MOSFET/IGFET, consisting of a lightly doped substrate (e.g., p-type
    material) into which two highly doped regions (e.g., n+ type material) are
    diffused for forming source/drain regions with the area therebetween
    becoming the channel for current carriers (i.e., holes or electrons) and
    with a layer of insulating material (e.g., SiO2) grown over the channel
    surface for separating the channel from a control (i.e., gate) electrode.


CLS 327/428
TXT With silicon controlled rectifier (SCR):

    Subject matter under subclass 427 wherein the switching circuit includes a
    field-effect transistor and a four layer (pnpn), three junction, three
    electrode (anode, cathode, and gate) device which can be triggered into
    conduction in only one direction.


CLS 327/429
TXT Four or more electrode solid-state device:

    Subject matter under subclass 427 including a semiconductor device
    containing four or more elements that emit or collect electrons or holes,
    or that control their movements by an applied electrical field.


CLS 327/430
TXT JFET (i.e., junction field-effect transistor):

    Subject matter under subclass 427 including a field-effect transistor
    characterized by having heavily doped impurity regions of one type material
    (e.g., p-type), known as gate regions on both sides of a second type
    material semiconductor bar (e.g., n+ type) to form a pn junction.


CLS 327/431
TXT MESFET (i.e., metal semiconductor field-effect transistor):

    Subject matter under subclass 430 wherein the junction field-effect
    transistor operates on the principle of the injection of very highly
    concentrated majority carriers across a potential difference barrier which
    is formed by the junction of a lightly doped semiconductor substrate and a
    metal layer deposited thereon (i.e., Schottky gate junction).

    (1)     Note.  A MESFET can utilize a semiconductor device type silicon or
    gallium arsenide material; however, GaAs is most frequently used.


CLS 327/432
TXT With bipolar transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 427 including a field-effect transistor and a
    semiconductor device of the type having at least two potential barriers and
    having a controlled current flow of both majority and minority carriers
    (i.e., holes and electrons).


CLS 327/433
TXT Bi-CMOS:

    Subject matter under subclass 432 including a bipolar transistor and a unit
    of two enhancement mode metal-oxide field-effect transistors connected in
    series with their gates linked together, each field-effect transistor has a
    channel of conductivity type opposite that of the other (e.g., p-channel
    vs. n-channel).


CLS 327/434
TXT Insulated gate FET (e.g., MOSFET, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 427 including a unipolar transistor
    characterized by having a lightly doped substrate (e.g., p-type material)
    into which two highly doped regions (e.g., n+ type material) are diffused
    for forming source/drain regions with the area therebetween becoming the
    channel for current carriers (i.e., holes or electrons) when an electrical
    field is applied and a layer of insulating material (e.g., SiO2) is grown
    over the channel surface for separating the channel from a control (i.e.,
    gate) electrode.

    (1)     Note.  In a unipolar transistor, the source to drain current
    involves only one type of charge carrier.

    (2)     Note.  A MOSFET or Metal-oxide field-effect transistor has a
    metallic gate insulated by an oxide layer from the semiconductor channel.


CLS 327/435
TXT GaAs:

    Subject matter under subclass 434 wherein the semiconductor material is
    gallium arsenide.


CLS 327/436
TXT Plural devices in series:

    Subject matter under subclass 434 having more than one insulated gate FET
    successively connected together.


CLS 327/437
TXT Complementary metal-oxide semiconductor (CMOS):

    Subject matter under subclass 434 wherein the switching device includes a
    unit of two enhancement mode metal-oxide field-effect transistors, each
    having a channel of conductivity type opposite that of the other (e.g.,
    p-channel vs.  n-channel) and they are connected in series across the power
    supply with gates linked together.

    (1)     Note.  In the enhancement mode, a MOSFET is normally off with zero
    gate voltage applied.

    (2)     Note.  Opposite channel conductivity type, as used above,
    characterizes the induced channel majority carrier conduction (i.e., holes
    for p-channel and electrons for n-channel).


CLS 327/438
TXT Four or more layer device (e.g., thyristor, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 419 including a semiconductor device with
    four or more alternating layers of p-type and n-type material, (e.g., pnpn,
    etc.)


    (1)     Note.  A typical four layer device is a  thyristor which is a
    device comprising three or more junctions, at least one of the    junctions
       can    switch    between reverse- and forward-voltage polarity within a
    single quadrant of the anode-to-cathode voltage-current characteristics.


CLS 327/439
TXT Bipolar transistor circuit configuring SCR device:

    Subject matter under subclass 438 wherein a circuit built with bipolar
    transistors performs the same function as a silicon controlled rectifier.


CLS 327/440
TXT GTO (i.e., gate turnoff):

    Subject matter under subclass 438 including a four layer pnpn device
    similar in construction to an SCR, but which is switched into a
    nonconduction state by a polarity reverse signal applied to the gate or
    control electrode.


CLS 327/441
TXT Plural or combined with other four or more layer device:

    Subject matter under subclass 440 having more than one gate turnoff device
    or having at least one GTO and another four or more layer device.


CLS 327/442
TXT Separate ON and OFF control circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 440 wherein distinct circuits are used to
    control the turn-on and turn-off of the switching circuit.


CLS 327/443
TXT Transformer or inductor in control circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 440 wherein the control circuit includes a
    device which opposes any change of current therethrough because of a
    resultant magnetic field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    190,    for a stable state circuit utilizing a transformer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate devices for inductive elements, per
    se.


CLS 327/444
TXT Complex wave supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 438 wherein the switching device's power
    supply has a waveform which is a periodic wave either made up of a
    combination of several frequencies or several sine waves superimposed on
    one another.


CLS 327/445
TXT Silicon controlled rectifier (SCR):

    Subject matter under subclass 444 including a four layer, three junction
    device, which can be triggered into conduction in only one direction.

    (1)     Note.  The formal name of an SCR is a ``reverse-blocking triode
    thyristor".

    (2)     Note.  The three SCR terminals are called anode, cathode, and gate.


CLS 327/446
TXT Triac:

    Subject matter under subclass 445 including a bidirectional rectifier
    (essentially two SCRs in parallel) that functions as an electronically
    controlled switch for AC loads and having an npnpn structure that can be
    triggered into either forward or reverse conduction (i.e., transmits AC
    power across its anode-cathode) by a pulse applied to its gate electrode.


CLS 327/447
TXT AC supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 438 wherein the switching circuit is power
    supplied by a voltage source whose polarity changes, or alternates, with
    time.


CLS 327/448
TXT Device in bridge:

    Subject matter under subclass 447 including four or more solid-state
    devices with their input and output terminals connected in a closed loop to
    form a four arm network, which may include another arm, called a diagonal
    arm, connected across two adjacent arms of the network between an input
    terminal and an output terminal and at least one solid-state device has
    four or more semiconducting layers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    588,    for miscellaneous bridge circuits.


CLS 327/449
TXT PUT (i.e., programmable unijunction transistor):

    Subject matter under subclass 447 including a thyristor with an anode gate
    in which the anode-gate voltage differential determines the conduction or
    nonconduction state of the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    569,    for miscellaneous unijunction transistor circuits.


CLS 327/450
TXT Four electrodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 447 including a four or more layer device
    which has four terminals permitting connection to external circuits.


CLS 327/451
TXT Zero point switching:

    Subject matter under subclass 447 wherein the switching device is switched
    or forward-biased to allow conduction of the AC power through the device's
    anode-cathode region at the point in time of the AC operating cycle when
    the AC waveform crosses the zero voltage level (i.e., moving from the
    negative part of the phase to the positive part of the operating phase or
    vice-versa).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78+,    for amplitude reference crossover detecting and particularly
    subclasses 79 for amplitude detecting of zero crossover without subsequent
    control.


CLS 327/452
TXT With triac:

    Subject matter under subclass 451 including a bidirectional rectifier
    (essentially two SCRs in parallel) that functions as an electronically
    controlled switch for AC loads and having an npnpn structure that can be
    triggered into either forward or reverse conduction (i.e., transmits AC
    power across its anode-cathode) by a pulse applied to its gate electrode.


CLS 327/453
TXT Silicon controlled rectifier (SCR):

    Subject matter under subclass 447 including a four layer, three junction
    device, which can be triggered into conduction in only one direction.

    (1)     Note.  The formal name of an SCR is a ``reverse-blocking triode
    thyristor".

    (2)     Note.  The three SCR terminals are called anode, cathode, and gate.


CLS 327/454
TXT With unijunction transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 453 wherein the switching circuit includes a
    silicon controlled rectifier combined with a three-terminal semiconductor
    having only one pn junction and exhibiting a stable open-circuit negative
    resistance property.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    569,    for miscellaneous unijunction transistor circuits.


CLS 327/455
TXT Triac:

    Subject matter under subclass 453 including a bidirectional rectifier
    (essentially two SCRs in parallel) that functions as an electronically
    controlled switch for AC loads and having an npnpn structure that can be
    triggered into either forward or reverse conduction (i.e., transmits AC
    power across its anode-cathode) by a pulse applied to its gate electrode.


CLS 327/456
TXT Plural:

    Subject matter under subclass 455 including more than one triac.


CLS 327/457
TXT Combined with diac:

    Subject matter under subclass 455 including a triac and a three layer
    (npn), two terminal switching semiconductor device.

    (1)     Note.  A diac is also called a three layer diode, a two-lead
    alternating current switching   semiconductor,   or   a   two-terminal
    voltage controlled device which exhibits a bilateral negative resistance
    characteristic.


CLS 327/458
TXT Combined with diverse four or more layer device:

    Subject matter under subclass 455 including a triac and at least one
    different four or more layer device.


CLS 327/459
TXT With bipolar transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 455 including a triac and a transistor of the
    type having at least two potential barriers and having a controlled current
    flow of both majority and minority carriers (i.e., holes and electrons).


CLS 327/460
TXT Plural SCRs:

    Subject matter under subclass 453 wherein more than one silicon controlled
    rectifier device is connected along the AC power supply path.


CLS 327/461
TXT Inverse parallel connection:

    Subject matter under subclass 460 wherein two four or more layer devices
    are connected across each other, but in opposite directions (i.e., the
    cathode of one device is joined to the anode of the other device at one
    common node and vice versa at the other common node).


CLS 327/462
TXT With bipolar transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 461 wherein the switching circuit includes
    plural silicon controlled rectifiers and a transistor of the type having at
    least two potential barriers and having a controlled current flow of both
    majority and minority carriers (i.e., holes and electrons).


CLS 327/463
TXT With bipolar transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 453 wherein the switching circuit includes a
    silicon controlled rectifier and a transistor of the type having at least
    two potential barriers and having a controlled current flow of both
    majority and minority carriers (i.e., holes and electrons).


CLS 327/464
TXT Having plural four or more layer devices:

    Subject matter under subclass 447 wherein more than one four or more layer
    device is connected along the AC power supply path.


CLS 327/465
TXT DC supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 438 wherein the switching circuit is power
    supplied by a steady voltage source (i.e., its positive and negative
    terminals do not change their potentials over time).


CLS 327/466
TXT PUT (i.e., programmable unijunction transistor):

    Subject matter under subclass 465 including a thyristor with an anode gate
    in which the anode-gate voltage differential determines the conduction or
    nonconduction state of the device.


CLS 327/467
TXT Four electrodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 465 including a four or more layer device
    which has four terminals for connection to external circuits.


CLS 327/468
TXT SCR and unijunction transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 465 wherein the switching circuit includes a
    silicon controlled rectifier combined with a three-terminal semiconductor
    having only one pn junction and exhibiting a stable open circuit negative
    resistance property.


CLS 327/469
TXT Triac:

    Subject matter under subclass 465 including a bidirectional rectifier
    (essentially two SCRs in parallel) that functions as an electronically
    controlled switch and having an npnpn structure that can be triggered into
    either forward or reverse conduction by a pulse applied to its gate
    electrode.


CLS 327/470
TXT Plural devices:

    Subject matter under subclass 465 wherein more than one four or more layer
    device is connected along the DC power supply path.


CLS 327/471
TXT Series anode-cathode connection:

    Subject matter under subclass 470 wherein a plurality of four or more layer
    devices are successively connected, the positive terminal (anode) of one
    device is joined to the negative terminal (cathode) of the immediate
    adjacent device (i.e., cascade connected).


CLS 327/472
TXT Plural paths:

    Subject matter under subclass 471 having more than one string of series
    connections.


CLS 327/473
TXT Parallel connection:

    Subject matter under subclass 470 wherein a plurality of four or more layer
    devices are connected such that all positive terminals (anodes) are joined
    to a common node and all negative terminals (cathodes) are joined to
    another common node.


CLS 327/474
TXT With bipolar transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 470 having more than one four or more layer
    device combined with a transistor of the type having at least two potential
    barriers and having a controlled current flow of both majority and minority
    carriers (i.e., holes and electrons).


CLS 327/475
TXT SCR and bipolar transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 465 wherein the switching circuit includes a
    silicon controlled rectifier and a transistor of the type having at least
    two potential barriers and having a controlled current flow of both
    majority and minority carriers (i.e., holes and electrons).


CLS 327/476
TXT Triac:

    Subject matter under subclass 438 including a bidirectional rectifier
    (essentially two SCRs in parallel) that functions as an electronically
    controlled switch and having an npnpn structure that can be triggered into
    either forward or reverse conduction by a pulse applied to its gate
    electrode.


CLS 327/477
TXT Unijunction transistor (UJT):

    Subject matter under subclass 419 including a three terminal semiconductor
    having only one pn junction and exhibiting a stable open-circuit negative
    resistance property.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    569,    for miscellaneous unijunction transistor circuits.


CLS 327/478
TXT Bipolar transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 419 including a semiconductor device of the
    type having at least two potential barriers and having a controlled current
    flow of both majority and minority carriers (i.e., holes and electrons).

    (1)     Note.  Npn and pnp type transistors are conventional bipolar
    transistors which have three regions, three electrodes, and two junctions.
    Each of the three regions is connected externally by a terminal labeled
    emitter, base, or collector.


CLS 327/479
TXT Special four or more electrode device (e.g., multiple bases, three
    electrode bipolar with FET gate, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 478 wherein the bipolar transistor has more
    than three electrodes or has particular features, such as an additional FET
    gate.


CLS 327/480
TXT Multiple emitter transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 479 wherein the bipolar transistor has at
    least two emitter regions in addition to the base and collector regions.


CLS 327/481
TXT Multiple collector transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 479 wherein the bipolar transistor has at
    least two collector regions in addition to the base and emitter regions.


CLS 327/482
TXT Plural:

    Subject matter under subclass 478 having more than one bipolar transistor.


CLS 327/483
TXT Darlington connection:

    Subject matter under subclass 482 which includes a circuit of two similar
    transistors where their collectors are tied together and the emitter of the
    first transistor is directly coupled to the base of the second transistor
    such that the emitter current of the first transistor equals the base
    current of the second transistor.

    (1)     Note.  A Darlington connection is also called a Darlington pair,
    double emitter follower, or beta-multiplier.


CLS 327/484
TXT Opposite conductivity (i.e., complementary):

    Subject matter under subclass 482 wherein transistors of the npn and pnp
    type are present in the same circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    576,    for miscellaneous complementary transistor circuits.


CLS 327/485
TXT Control circuit in cascade:

    Subject matter under subclass 484 wherein the switching control circuit
    includes two similar transistors arranged in tandem, with the output of one
    connected to the input of the next.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    483,    for a bipolar Darlington connected gating circuit.


CLS 327/486
TXT Control circuit in totem pole:

    Subject matter under subclass 484 wherein the switching control circuit
    includes two similar transistors arranged in a push-pull circuit which
    alternatively operate to provide a single ended control output signal.


CLS 327/487
TXT Control circuit in cascade:

    Subject matter under subclass 482 wherein the switching control circuit
    includes two similar transistors arranged in tandem, with the output of one
    connected to the input of the next.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    483,    for a bipolar Darlington connected gating circuit.


CLS 327/488
TXT Control circuit in totem pole:

    Subject matter under subclass 482 wherein the switching control circuit
    includes two similar transistors arranged in a push-pull circuit which
    alternatively operate to provide a single ended control output signal.


CLS 327/489
TXT Control circuit with common emitter:

    Subject matter under subclass 482 wherein the switching control circuit
    includes a bipolar transistor with the emitter terminal connected to a
    common ground of the circuit, and the outputs at the collector terminal
    provide control voltages to the switch.


CLS 327/490
TXT With current mirror:

    Subject matter under subclass 489 wherein the control circuit relies on the
    collector current matching of two transistors when connected together base
    to base and emitter to emitter with one transistor having its collector
    connected to its base.

    (1)     Note.  The collector currents are matched by having a predetermined
    ratio relationship to each other.  When one of the collector current
    changes, the other also changes to keep the ratio relationship constant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 315 for
    a current regulator using a current mirror.


CLS 327/491
TXT With emitter follower:

    Subject matter under subclass 489 wherein the control circuit has a
    transistor amplifier circuit configuration which is characterized by
    relatively high input impedance, low output impedance, and a voltage gain
    of less than unity.


CLS 327/492
TXT Control circuit with common collector:

    Subject matter under subclass 482 wherein the switching control circuit
    includes a bipolar transistor with the collector terminal connected to a
    common ground of the circuit, and the outputs at the emitter terminal
    provide control voltages to the switch.


CLS 327/493
TXT Utilizing two electrode solid-state device:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 including a semiconductor device
    containing two elements that emit or collect electrons or holes, or that
    control their movements by an applied electrical field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    583+,   for miscellaneous two electrode solid-state device circuits.


CLS 327/494
TXT Bridge circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 493 including four two-electrode solid-state
    devices with their input and output terminals connected in a closed loop to
    form a four arm network.

    (1)     Note.  A bridge circuit may have another arm, called the diagonal
    arm, which is connected across two adjacent arms of the network between an
    input terminal and an output terminal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    588,    for miscellaneous bridge circuits.


CLS 327/495
TXT Combined with diverse device in at least one arm:

    Subject matter under subclass 494 wherein a two-electrode solid-state
    device is combined with another device of a different type in at least one
    of the bridge arms.


CLS 327/496
TXT Plural:

    Subject matter under subclass 494 including more than one bridge circuit.


CLS 327/497
TXT Active element in diagonal arm:

    Subject matter under subclass 494 wherein the bridge circuit has in its
    diagonal arm a specific device that requires power for functioning.


CLS 327/498
TXT Negative resistance:

    Subject matter under subclass 493 wherein the switch comprises a
    solid-state two electrode device whose characteristic on a current-voltage
    plot has a portion with a negative slope.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    568+,   for miscellaneous negative resistance device circuits.


CLS 327/499
TXT ``N"-shape curve on I-V plot (e.g., tunnel diode type, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 498 including a solid-state device whose
    characteristic on a current versus voltage plot (i.e., with the current
    plotted on the Y axis and voltage on the X axis) has an ``N"-shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195,    for a stable state circuit utilizing an ``N"-shape negative
    resistance diode.


CLS 327/500
TXT ``S"-shape curve on I-V plot (e.g., pnpn diode type, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 498 including a solid-state device whose
    characteristic on a current versus voltage plot (i.e., with the current
    plotted on the Y axis and voltage on the X axis) has an ``S"-shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196,    for a stable state circuit utilizing an ``S"-shape negative
    resistance diode.


CLS 327/501
TXT Hyperconductive diode:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein the solid-state device is a four
    layer threshold diode, one of whose outer layers is metal and wherein at a
    predetermined reverse voltage point, junction breakdown occurs to provide
    high current at very low voltages.


CLS 327/502
TXT Breakdown characteristic (e.g., zener diode, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 493 wherein the operation of the solid-state
    device is characterized by a sudden change from high dynamic electrical
    resistance to a very low dynamic resistance in a reverse biased
    semiconductor device (e.g., a reverse biased junction between p-type and
    n-type semiconductor materials, wherein reverse current increases rapidly
    for a small increase in reverse applied voltage, and the device behaves as
    if it had negative electrical resistance).

    (1)     Note.  An example of the breakdown characteristic is zener
    breakdown which is caused by the field emission of charge carriers in the
    depletion layer of the semiconductor device.  When breakdown occurs, the
    electric field intensity in the material has become so great that electrons
    are effectively ``ripped" from the valency bonding system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    580,    for miscellaneous circuits utilizing a breakdown transistor device.

    584,    for miscellaneous circuits utilizing a breakdown diode.


CLS 327/503
TXT PIN diode:

    Subject matter under subclass 493 including a two layer region (p and n),
    two electrode, single junction semiconductor device which has an intrinsic
    semiconductor (i.e., one with no dopants) sandwiched between a p-type
    layer, and an n-type layer.


CLS 327/504
TXT PN junction diode

    Subject matter under subclass 493 wherein the solid-state device has two
    regions, two terminals (anode and cathode), a single junction and conducts
    electricity much more easily in one direction than in the other.


CLS 327/505
TXT Inverse parallel connection:

    Subject matter under subclass 504 wherein two diodes are connected across
    each other, but in opposite directions (i.e., the cathode of one device is
    joined to the anode of the other device at one common node and vice versa
    at the other common node).


CLS 327/506
TXT Three or more electrode electron tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 including a vacuum or gas filled tube
    having three or more electrodes in which electrical currents flow between
    spaced electrodes and in which the conduction of charged particles (e.g.,
    electrons), takes place between the electrodes.


CLS 327/507
TXT Two electrode electron tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 including a vacuum or gas filled tube
    having two electrodes in which electrical currents flow between spaced
    electrodes, and in which the conduction of charged particles (e.g.,
    electrons), takes place between electrodes.


CLS 327/508
TXT Bridge circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 507 including four two-electrode electron
    tubes with their input and output terminals connected in a closed loop to
    form a four arm network.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    588,    for miscellaneous bridge circuits.


CLS 327/509
TXT EXTERNAL EFFECT:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the operation of the
    circuit or system depends upon some externally applied force or field such
    as radiation, light, heat, sound, mechanical pressure, etc., or where
    compensation for the effects of such externally applied force or field is
    provided.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    187,    for two or more stable state circuits using external effect devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for sensing various
    types of external influence such as, fluid pressure, vibration, etc.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 414+ for active solid-state devices, per se, responsive to a
    non-electrical signal.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, appropriate
    subclasses (e.g., subclasses 116+, 401+, 650+, etc.) for transmission or
    interconnection systems which are condition responsive.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, subclasses 48+ for
    methods of making semiconductor devices which respond to nonelectrical
    stimuli.


CLS 327/510
TXT Magnetic:

    Subject matter under subclass 509 wherein the external effect involves a
    magnetic field.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 421+ for a magnetic responsive semiconductor element, per se.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 401+
    for nonlinear reactor systems including magnetic reactors.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 244+ and
    particularly subclasses 250 and 252 for magnetometers with indicators.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 4.8 for gyromagnetic parametric amplifiers,
    subclass 6 for amplifiers with Hall effect type means, subclass 8 for
    saturable reactor type amplifiers, subclasses 47+ for magnetically
    influenced discharge device amplifiers, subclass 60 for magnetrostrictive
    type amplifiers and subclass 63 for amplifiers with magnetic means
    generally.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 5 and 86+ for magnetron oscillators,
    subclasses 6, 83, and 84 for Klystron oscillators and subclass 67 for
    oscillators with electromagnetic or electrostatic shielding.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 32 for resistance means whose value
    depends upon an applied magnetic field and see also the search notes
    thereunder.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclass 15 for a magnetic
    digital pattern reading converter.


CLS 327/511
TXT Utilizing Hall effect:

    Subject matter under subclass 510 wherein a magnetic field is applied to a
    current carrying conductor and use is made of the voltage which is produced
    between opposing edges of the conductor and which is perpendicular to both
    the current and the magnetic field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    187,    for a stable state circuit which is externally controlled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 421+ for a magnetic responsive semiconductor element, per se.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 251 for a Hall plate
    magnetometer with indicator.


CLS 327/512
TXT Temperature:

    Subject matter under subclass 509 wherein the external effect involves heat
    or thermal energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 467+ for a heat responsive semiconducting element, per se.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 66 for a temperature controlled oscillator
    and subclass 70 for oscillators with temperature modifiers and see the
    search notes thereunder.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 25+ for resistors whose value is
    responsive to ambient temperature and see the search notes thereunder.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 584+ for thermal condition
    responsive indicating systems.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 163 for a thermal sensor
    with quantitative indicator and subclass 178 for an electrical thermometer
    having a barrier layer sensing element.


CLS 327/513
TXT With compensation for temperature fluctuations:

    Subject matter under subclass 512 wherein circuit anomalies resulting from
    variations in ambient thermal conditions are counterbalanced.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83,     138, 262, and 378, for diverse types of temperature compensation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 907 for
    a voltage control circuit having temperature compensation of a
    semiconductor.

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuits, subclass 32 for temperature
    compensation in signal level or switching threshold stabilization.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 289 for a temperature compensated
    semiconductor amplifier.


CLS 327/514
TXT Light:

    Subject matter under subclass 509 wherein the external effect involves
    energy of optical wavelengths.

    (1)     Note.  Secondary emissive circuits which may utilize a light
    sensitive cathode are classified below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    573,    for a secondary emissive circuit which utilizes a light sensitive
    cathode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for circuits using photocells and
    see also the search notes thereunder.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 431+ for a light responsive semiconducting element, per se.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements,
    appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous optical systems and elements.


CLS 327/515
TXT Elements forming an array:

    Subject matter under subclass 514 wherein plural light effect elements are
    arranged into a matrix having defined rows and columns.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 294+ for a solid-state television image
    sensor having elements in an array.


CLS 327/516
TXT Utilizing conversion of mechanical variations into electrical variations
    (e.g., vibration sensitive, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 509 wherein an element of a circuit or system
    is responsive to the application of physical energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    517,    for miscellaneous touch or proximity sensitive circuits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 415+ for a pressure responsive semiconducting element, per se.


CLS 327/517
TXT Responsive to proximity or touch:

    Subject matter under subclass 509 wherein the operation of a circuit or
    system is modified by the approach of or slight contact with a physical
    object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    516,    for circuitry which utilizes the conversion of mechanical
    variations into electrical variations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 407 for tactual communication
    circuits.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 179+ for
    relays or solenoids responsive to proximity or contact.


CLS 327/518
TXT WITH PARTICULAR CONTROL:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a controlling means is a
    nonlinear device, circuit, or system which specifically controls the
    delivery of current or power to a load device connected to its output
    terminal in response to a control signal applied to its input terminal.

    (1)     Note.  A load device as included in this subclass may include any
    load which is so broadly claimed as not to restrict the system to any
    specific class or subclass.  Where a specific load device is claimed,
    classification will be in the particular class wherein the art device
    comprising the specific load device is to be found.

    (2)     Note.  Systems not especially concerned with the delivery of
    current or power to the load device, but concerned instead with the control
    of a circuit parameter such as phase, frequency, or amplitude are excluded
    from this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    407,    for a plurality of inputs appearing over a plurality of input
    channels selectively switched to a single output channel.

    415,    for means whereby a single input appearing over a single channel is
    selectively switched to a plurality of output channels.


CLS 327/519
TXT Plurality of load devices:

    Subject matter under subclass 518 wherein the output of the nonlinear
    device, circuit, or system is connected to a multiple of controlled load
    devices.

    (1)     Note.  Systems where current or voltage is applied to plural output
    loads selectively or successively as a result of a scanning operation are
    excluded from this subclass and will be found elsewhere in the class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 11+
    for electrical interconnections feeding plural loads.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for circuits containing plural discharge device loads.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses,
    especially  subclasses 34+ for plural diverse or diversely controlled
    electric motors, with systems of electrical supply or control for one or
    more electric motors where the electric motor is claimed in combination
    with such systems or control and the electric motor as claimed constitutes
    the ultimate load.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 73, 84, 124+, 148, and 295 for amplifier
    systems having plural loads.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 2 and 46+ for plural oscillator systems
    which may have plural loads and subclass 60 for a single oscillator system
    with plural output circuits.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 191+ for
    miscellaneous electric circuits controlling a plurality of relay or
    electromagnetic load devices.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for similar
    subject matter used with multiplexing.


CLS 327/520
TXT Plural active components included in a controlling circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 518 wherein the controlling means is
    constituted by a plurality of active components such as transistors,
    amplifiers, or space discharge devices.

    (1)     Note.  Active components are components in a circuit which have
    gain or direct current flow, such as transistors, amplifiers, thyristors,
    electron tubes, or tunnels diodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185,    for stable state circuits with series connected tubes.


CLS 327/521
TXT Connected in inverse parallel:

    Subject matter under subclass 520 wherein a pair of active components in
    the controlling means circuit are connected side-by-side in differing
    directions between two circuit nodes.

    (1)     Note.  For example, for a pair of electron tubes to be connected in
    inverse parallel, the anode of one device is connected to the cathode of
    another device and vice versa.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclasses 196+ and
    251 for inverse parallel connected space discharge load devices.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 227
    and 291 for voltage magnitude control systems with plural electric
    discharge devices reversely connected in parallel.


CLS 327/522
TXT Gaseous tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 520 wherein the active components include an
    electronic tube into which a small amount of gas or vapor is introduced
    after the tube has been evacuated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    601+,   for miscellaneous circuits having gas tubes of particular structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for system wherein a gaseous space discharge tube is the
    ultimate load or controls a space discharge load.


CLS 327/523
TXT Gaseous tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 518 wherein the controlling means includes an
    electronic tube into which a small amount of gas or vapor is introduced
    after the tube has been evacuated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    601+,   for miscellaneous circuits having gas tubes of particular structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for system wherein a gaseous space discharge tube is the
    ultimate load or controls a space discharge load.


CLS 327/524
TXT SPECIFIC IDENTIFIABLE DEVICE, CIRCUIT, OR SYSTEM:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a nonlinear device,
    circuit, or system has a particular structure, arrangement, or construction
    that is not classifiable elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and the indented subclasses contain subject
    matter which is neither sufficiently comprehensive nor possessive of
    sufficiently significant structure so as to be classified with a specific
    external area.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses for the
    structure of space discharge devices.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclasses 3+ and
    32+ for combined tube and circuit element structure, subclasses 5.18+ and
    5.24+ for reflex type beam tube circuits, and subclasses 88+ for automatic
    space discharge device substitution systems.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 3 for amplifiers with plural diverse
    amplifying devices, subclasses 4, 5, 43, 45, 47, and 49 wherein the
    internal tube structure forms part of the amplifier control circuit,
    subclasses 41, 42, 44+, and 64 for amplifier systems utilizing tubes of
    particular construction, subclasses 51, 52, 65+, and 127+ for systems that
    may include tube substitution; subclasses 87+, and the search notes
    thereto, for cathode follower amplifier systems; and subclasses 127+ for
    amplifier bias voltage control systems.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 5, 6+, 103, 126+, and 184 for oscillator
    systems utilizing tubes of particular construction; subclass 49 for
    oscillator substitution systems; subclass 84 for beam tube oscillators of
    the reflex type; subclasses 79+, 86+, 92+, and 103 wherein the internal
    tube structure may form part of the oscillator control circuit; and
    subclass 186 for oscillator bias voltage regulation.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclasses 100+ for subject matter of this subclass (524) when utilized in
    connection with plasma in the generation of thermonuclear reactions.


CLS 327/525
TXT Fusible link or intentional destruct circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 wherein an element burns out or is
    destroyed (i.e., is open circuited) in an interconnection or integrated
    circuit structure component when applied current or voltage exceeds a
    predetermined limit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, appropriate subclasses for fuses
    relating to munitions.

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 37+ for programmable
    logic.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 96 for fusible
    links relating to programmable read-only memory and subclass 200 for
    eliminating ``bad bit" information associated with read/write circuits.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, subclasses 467, 600,
    and 601 for methods of altering the conductivity of a fuse or antifuse
    element associated with a semiconductor integrated circuit.


CLS 327/526
TXT Redundant:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 wherein there is a duplication of
    components, devices, circuits, elements, etc., such that a duplicate will
    assume operation upon failure of the original.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 10+ for redundant
    logic circuits.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and FaultDetection/Recovery, subclass 8
    for fault recovery by replacement with a spare device.


CLS 327/527
TXT Superconductive (e.g., cryogenic, etc.) device:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 including a particular circuit which
    operates at temperatures which are approximately absolute zero (i.e., less
    than or equal to 30 K) where electrical resistance becomes essentially zero.

    (1)     Note.  Class 505 comprises superconductive devices which operate at
    a temperature higher than 30 K.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186,    for one or more stable state cryogenic circuits.

    366+,   for cryogenic gating or switching.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 1+ for
    superconductor logic circuits.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 32 for a resistive element whose
    resistance depends on the value of an applied magnetic field.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 825.79 for matrix systems
    using superconductive elements.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 160+ for
    information storage means using superconductive elements.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    appropriate subclasses for superconductive devices operating above 30 K.


CLS 327/528
TXT Josephson junction:

    Subject matter under subclass 527 wherein a current flows across a gap
    between two superconductors separated by a thin layer of insulator.

    (1)     Note.  Under certain conditions, a voltage appears across the gap,
    and high-frequency radiation emanates from it.


CLS 327/529
TXT Impact ionization:

    Subject matter under subclass 527 wherein a breakdown can occur within a
    semiconductor device as a result of operation at temperatures approaching
    absolute zero (temperatures equal to or lower than 30 K).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186,    for one or more stable state circuits including  an impact
    ionization device.


CLS 327/530
TXT With specific source of supply or bias voltage:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 wherein either (a) a DC bias potential
    other than signal voltage is applied or maintained between two or more
    electrodes in order to determine the operating point on the characteristic
    curve of a device or (b) electrical power or bias voltage is applied to a
    region of a nonlinear solid-state device or circuit.

    (1)     Note.  The claimed subject matter does not comprise significant
    structure so as to limit the power supply to those provided for in a
    particular art area.

    (2)     Note.  The systems found in this class may include means to supply
    current to the anode or filament, a potential to the grid of an electron
    tube (which is usually negative with respect to the cathode), or
    establishing or maintaining a direct current voltage between two elements
    of an electron tube.

    (3)     Note.  Claimed subject matter having biasing on and off wherein a
    switched input is identical to the output will be classified in subclasses
    365+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    365+,   for switching input supply or bias to the output wherein the input
    signal is the same as the output signal.

    531,    for biasing systems in identifiable circuits, in general.

    535+,   for biasing or power supply circuitry with significant stabilizing
    circuitry for regulating the bias or power supply level.

    597,    for particular grid control systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 18+,
    31+, and 43+ for plural power supplies, and subclass 150 for miscellaneous
    power packs, per se.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, Systems, subclasses 1+ for
    cathode-ray tube power supply circuits, subclasses 86+ for power supply
    systems for space discharge devices, in general, with automatic
    substitution in the power supply, subclasses 137+ for polyphase AC supply
    circuits, subclasses 160+ for plural power supplies, subclasses 200+ for
    circuits having a discharge device and/or rectifier in the supply circuit,
    subclass 209 for circuits having a periodic switch in the supply circuit,
    subclasses 227+ for circuits with a condenser in the supply circuit, and
    subclasses 248+ for a pulsating or AC supply circuit.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 311+
    for circuits that supply a regulated voltage, current or power to a
    nonspecific or general load device.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 113 for polyphase power supply systems,
    subclasses 114+ for unrectified AC power supply systems, subclasses 127+
    for amplifier tube biasing systems subclasses 199+ for power or bias
    supplies, in general, and subclasses 296 and 297 having particular power
    supply or biasing for linear amplifier circuits or systems.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 185+ for particular sources of power or
    bias for oscillators.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses, particularly
    subclasses 13+ for rectifying or derectifying systems which may include
    electron tubes and their control.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 91+ for X-ray
    device circuits.


CLS 327/531
TXT Fluctuating or AC source with rectifier or filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 530 wherein the power supply is converted
    from an alternating or fluctuating input voltage or current to a direct
    current or voltage via a rectifier circuit or is smoothed or integrated by
    a filter circuit.

    (1)     Note.  The power supply may contain both AC and DC components, and
    the DC component is received from the output by coupling to a rectifier or
    a filter circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for AC waveform to DC waveform output conversion at an unloaded
    output.

    330,    for amplitude limiting systems with a rectifier.

    552,    for unwanted component eliminating systems with a filter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 44+ for rectifier
    systems with smoothing filters.


CLS 327/532
TXT With particular filter circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 531 including a filter circuit with specific
    structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    552+,   for unwanted component eliminating utilizing a filter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 167+ for passive
    wave filters, especially subclasses 181+ for smoothing type filters.


CLS 327/533
TXT With battery connected across rectifier:

    Subject matter under subclass 531 wherein the conversion is accomplished
    via a battery connected across or in shunt with a rectifier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 44+
    for systems wherein one source floats across another, see particularly
    subclasses 46 and 48+ for floating sources of the storage battery type.


CLS 327/534
TXT Having particular substrate biasing:

    Subject matter under subclass 530 wherein a potential is applied to a
    substrate region of a nonlinear element or solid-state device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclass for
    electromagnetic storage systems, subclasses 185.01+ for floating gate
    memory storage (e.g., flash memory).


CLS 327/535
TXT Having stabilized bias or power supply level:

    Subject matter under subclass 534 wherein the bias or power supply level
    provided to the substrate of a nonlinear element or solid-state device is
    maintained constant.

    (1)     Note.  The stabilization may be for either voltage or current level
    to compensate for adverse conditions (e.g., nonuniformity of integrated
    chip structure, supply level perturbations, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS  CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    540+,   for stabilized electron tube circuits with voltage regulation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    motor power supply or speed control or regulation.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 311+
    for circuits that supply a regulated voltage, current, or power to a
    nonspecific or general load device.


CLS 327/536
TXT Charge pump details:

    Subject matter under subclass 535 wherein the particular substrate biasing
    circuit is regulated by a significantly recited electrical circuit
    arrangement for pumping electric charges (electrons (negative charges) or
    protons (positive charges)) into or out of the substrate to polarize the
    substrate at a negative or positive potential which is the generated bias
    voltage.


CLS 327/537
TXT With field-effect transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 535 including a unipolar transistor in which
    current carriers are injected at a source terminal and pass to a drain
    terminal through a channel of semiconductor material whose conductivity
    depends largely on an electric field applied to the semiconductor from a
    control terminal (gate).

    (1)     Note.  In a unipolar transistor, the source to drain current
    involves only one type of charge carrier (i.e., holes in a p-type material
    channel and electrons in an n-type material channel).

    (2)     Note.  Two types of FET structures are prevalent:  (a) an
    all-junction device, known as a junction FET or JFET characterized by
    having heavily doped impurity regions of one type (e.g., p-type material),
    known as gate regions, on both sides of a second type semiconductor bar
    (e.g., n+ type material) to form a pn junction, and (b) a device such as a
    MOSFET/IGFET, consisting of a lightly doped substrate (e.g., p-type
    material) into which two highly doped regions (e.g., n+ type material) are
    diffused for forming source/drain regions with the area therebetween
    becoming the channel for current carriers (i.e., holes or electrons) and
    with a layer of insulating material (e.g., SiO2) grown over the channel
    surface for separating the channel from a control (i.e., gate) electrode.


CLS 327/538
TXT Stabilized (e.g., compensated, regulated, maintained, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 530 wherein the bias circuit or a particular
    arrangement of the power supply offsets undesired changes in the circuit
    signals or maintains the circuit in its normal operating state.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    535,    for particular substrate biasing with stabilized bias or power
    supply level.


CLS 327/539
TXT Using bandgap:

    Subject matter under subclass 538 wherein a bandgap voltage of a
    semiconductor material is provided as a reference to compensate for
    variations of the voltage supply.

    (1)     Note.  Bandgap voltage is the difference in energy between the
    conduction band and the valence band in a semiconductor material (e.g., the
    bandgap voltage of silicon).


CLS 327/540
TXT With voltage source regulating:

    Subject matter under subclass 538 wherein a voltage supplied to the
    electrodes of a space discharge device or to a solid-state device is
    maintained constant at a predetermined value.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306,    for amplitude control systems of a converted or shaped signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclass 287 for
    periodic types of current or voltage regulator used with pulsating or AC
    supplies and  subclasses 291+ for current or voltage regulation systems
    where the discharge device is the ultimate load claimed.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 227
    and 291 for voltage magnitude control systems with electron discharge
    devices where there is no interposed signal controlled transducer between
    the original and controlled energy.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 127+ for control of amplifier power supplies
    or bias voltages.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 186 for oscillators with regulated power
    supplies.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 74+ for voltage or
    magnitude control for current conversion systems (e.g., rectification,
    derectification, etc.).


CLS 327/541
TXT With field-effect transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 540 including a unipolar transistor in which
    current carriers are injected at a source terminal and pass to a drain
    terminal through a channel of semiconductor material whose conductivity
    depends largely on an electric field applied to the semiconductor from a
    control terminal (gate).

    (1)     Note.  In a unipolar transistor, the source to drain current
    involves only one type of charge carriers (i.e., holes in a p-type material
    channel and electrons in an n-type material channel).

    (2)     Note.  Two types of FET structures are prevalent:  (a) an
    all-junction device, known as a junction FET or JFET characterized by
    having heavily doped impurity regions of one type (e.g., p-type material),
    known as gate regions, on both sides of a second type semiconductor bar
    (e.g., n+ type material) to form a pn junction, and (b) a device such as a
    MOSFET/IGFET, consisting of a lightly doped substrate (e.g., p-type
    material) into which two highly doped regions (e.g., n+ type material) are
    diffused for forming source/drain regions with the area therebetween
    becoming the channel for current carriers (i.e., holes or electrons) and
    with a layer of insulating material (e.g., SiO2) grown over the channel
    surface for separating the channel from a control (i.e., gate) electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    537,    for particular substrate biasing circuit with a field-effect
    transistor.


CLS 327/542
TXT With diverse type transistor devices:

    Subject matter under subclass 538 including different types of transistors
    in the same circuit.


CLS 327/543
TXT Using field-effect transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 538 wherein the circuit includes only one
    type of transistor which is a unipolar transistor in which current carriers
    are injected at a source terminal and pass to a drain terminal through a
    channel of semiconductor material whose conductivity depends largely on an
    electric field applied to the semiconductor from a control terminal (gate).

    (1)     Note.  In a unipolar transistor, the source to drain current
    involves only one type of charge carriers (i.e., holes in a p-type material
    channel and electrons in an n-type material channel).

    (2)     Note.  Two types of FET structures are prevalent:  (a) an
    all-junction device, known as a junction FET or JFET characterized by
    having heavily doped impurity regions of one type (e.g., p-type material),
    known as gate regions, on both sides of a second type semiconductor bar
    (e.g., n+ type material) to form a pn junction, and (b) a device such as a
    MOSFET/IGFET, consisting of a lightly doped substrate (e.g., p-type
    material) into which two highly doped regions (e.g., n+ type material) are
    diffused for forming source/drain regions with the area therebetween
    becoming the channel for current carriers (i.e., holes or electrons) and
    with a layer of insulating material (e.g., SiO2) grown over the channel
    surface for separating the channel from a control (i.e., gate) electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    537,    for a particular substrate biasing circuit with a field-effect
    transistor.

    541,    for a stabilized circuit with current or voltage regulating using a
    field-effect transistor.


CLS 327/544
TXT Power conservation or pulse type:

    Subject matter under subclass 530 wherein the power supply or bias level is
    reduced to conserve power or a power supply is provided for biasing having
    a periodic or nonperiodic pulsing type characteristic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100+,   for signal converting, shaping, or generating and, particularly,
    subclasses 291+ for clock type signal generation.

    545+,   for monitoring for supply or bias preservation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 227 for power
    conservation in memory systems.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclass 66 for power
    source control for timekeeping devices.


CLS 327/545
TXT Including signal protection or bias preservation:

    Subject matter under subclass 530 wherein a circuit is provided which
    guards against signal information loss or bias loss.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    379+,   for gating circuitry with means to maintain signal transmission.

    392+,   for time delay circuits to control switching operations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 51+ for circuit
    fault detection and testing, per se.

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 21+ for digital
    logic circuits or systems for improving reception sensitivity and
    maintaining transmission integrity.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 636 for battery level
    condition responsive systems.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 228 for memory
    systems with provision for prevention of data loss (e.g., backup storage or
    power).

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclass 66 for power
    source monitoring of chronological timepieces.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and FaultDetection/Recovery, appropriate
    subclasses for subject matter limited to particular loss of data by
    transmission apparatus or to the recovery of information from error or
    fault operating conditions (e.g., pulse coded data).


CLS 327/546
TXT With field-effect transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 545 including a unipolar transistor in which
    current carriers are injected at a source terminal and pass to a drain
    terminal through a channel of semiconductor material whose conductivity
    depends largely on an electric field applied to the semiconductor from a
    control terminal (gate).

    (1)     Note.  In a unipolar transistor, the source to drain current
    involves only one type of charge carrier (i.e., holes in a p-type material
    channel and electrons in an n-type material channel).

    (2)     Note.  Two types of FET structures are prevalent:  (a) an
    all-junction device, known as a junction FET or JFET characterized by
    having heavily doped impurity regions of one type (e.g., p-type material),
    known as gate regions, on both sides of a second type semiconductor bar
    (e.g., n+ type material) to form a pn junction, and (b) a device such as a
    MOSFET/IGFET, consisting of a lightly doped substrate (e.g., p-type
    material) into which two highly doped regions (e.g., n+ type material) are
    diffused for forming source/drain regions with the area therebetween
    becoming the channel for current carriers (i.e., holes or electrons) and
    with a layer of insulating material (e.g., SiO2) grown over the channel
    surface for separating the channel from a control (i.e., gate) electrode.

    SEARCH THIS  CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    537,    for particular substrate biasing circuit with field-effect
    transistor.

    541,    for a stabilized circuit with current or voltage regulating using a
    field-effect transistor.

    543,    for a stabilized circuit with a field-effect transistor.


CLS 327/547
TXT With selectively or alternately DC or AC input:

    Subject matter under subclass 530 wherein a DC or AC power is selectively
    or alternately supplied to the input of the circuit device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 18+
    and 43+ for plural power supplies, particularly subclasses 23, 29, 64+, or
    80+ for selective, substitute, or alternate sources.


CLS 327/548
TXT With oscillator or interrupter:

    Subject matter under subclass 530 wherein the power supply employs an
    oscillatory circuit as a source of varying current.

    (1)     Note.  The oscillatory circuit may comprise an interrupting type
    network.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100+,   for non-free running signal generation, and particularly 124 for
    chopper type generation.

    596,    for miscellaneous oscillatory or shock excited circuits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 10+ for
    dynamoelectric generating apparatus, particularly subclass 25 for reed
    type, subclass 26 for magneto structure type, and subclasses 31+ for self
    actuated interrupter type current generating devices.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 9 for amplifier circuits in which the input
    signal is periodically interrupted or derectified, applied to the
    amplifier, and then rectified and subclass 137 where an oscillator supplies
    or controls bias voltage.

    331,    Oscillators, appropriate subclasses for self-sustaining wave
    generators, per se.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 15+ for
    inverter-rectifiers (DC to AC to DC systems), subclasses 102+ for
    dynamoelectric machine current converters, and subclasses 106+ for circuit
    interrupter type current converters.


CLS 327/549
TXT With hum or interaction prevention:

    Subject matter under subclass 530 wherein alternating or hum components in
    an output of a power supply are prevented from appearing in the output
    system circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    551+,   for miscellaneous unwanted signal elimination.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 149 for bucking hum, noise or distortion
    introduced into the amplifier signal channel.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 39+ for current
    conversion systems that introduce or eliminate frequency components.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, appropriate
    subclasses for audio signal noise suppression.


CLS 327/550
TXT With particular filament heating circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 530 wherein a filament heating circuit with
    specific structure provides a current to heat the filament of an electron
    space discharge tube.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclasses 94+ for
    cathode or cathode heater supply circuits.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 199+ especially subclass 206 for filamentary
    heating of the filaments of an amplifier.


CLS 327/551
TXT Unwanted signal suppression:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 wherein an undesired signal or group of
    signals is diminished and wherein such subject matter is not elsewhere
    classifiable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98,     for separating composite signals.

    310+,   for transient or signal noise reduction by limiting, clipping, or
    clamping.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 21+ for signal
    sensitivity or transmission integrity which includes input noise margin
    enhancement.


CLS 327/552
TXT Active filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 551 wherein a specified frequency or a range
    of frequencies of an input signal is passed or blocked by the use of an
    active device.

    (1)     Note.  Filter circuits that do not include any active element, such
    as a transistor, an amplifier, etc., and are constituted by distributed
    parameters, lumped parameters, long line elements, or passive elements
    (resistors, capacitors, or inductors) are excluded from this subclass and
    are classified primarily in Class 333, Wave Transmission Lines and Networks.

    (2)     Note.  Filter circuits involving a systematic operation on data
    which results in a significant change in data are classified in Class 364,
    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 724.011+ for
    digital computer filtering and subclass 825 for analog computer filtering.

    SEARCH THIS  CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    311,    for transient or signal noise reduction in a filtered limiting,
    clipping, or clamping circuit.

    379,    for a gating circuit with spurious noise override.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 175+ for sound filters.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 105
    for a class appropriate harmonic filter or neutralizer.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 28 for equalizers,
    subclasses 165, 166, and 167+ for frequency or time domain filters,
    subclass 202+ for wave filters including long line elements.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.71+ for selective
    communication systems which are frequency responsive.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 39+ for conversion
    systems in combination with a filter.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses
    724.011+ for filtering of data by a digital calculating computer and
    subclass 825 for analog computer filtering.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclass 103 for noise filtering
    in a digital receiver.


CLS 327/553
TXT Adjustable:

    Subject matter under subclass 552 wherein some component or parameter of a
    filter circuit (such as filter resistor, filter capacitor, filter time
    constant, filter amplifier gain, filter input signal, etc.) is changeable
    in value by a control circuit signal.


CLS 327/554
TXT Switched capacitor filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 553 wherein a filter transfer function is
    determined by a particular capacitor arrangement which is variable
    dependent upon the switched connections controlled by an input clock signal.

    (1)     Note.  The frequency or timing of the input clock signal dictates
    the characteristics and features of the signal filtering function.

    SEARCH THIS  CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291+,   for clock signal generating.

    337,    for an integrator having a switched capacitive arrangement.

    365+,   for the gating of an electrical signal between an input and an
    output.


CLS 327/555
TXT Selective type signal filtering (e.g., from low pass to high pass, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 553 wherein different types of signal
    filtering are selected by an applied control signal.

    (1)     Note.  The filter can be changed from one permitting low frequency
    signals to flow through to one that only permits high frequency signals to
    pass, (e.g.., low pass to high pass filtering).


CLS 327/556
TXT Notch or bandreject:

    Subject matter under subclass 552 wherein a circuit arrangement attenuates
    a very narrow band of frequencies of an input signal, but will pass
    frequencies on either side (i.e., higher and lower frequencies) of the
    narrow band.


CLS 327/557
TXT Bandpass:

    Subject matter under subclass 552 wherein a circuit arrangement attenuates
    frequencies on either side of a predetermined range of frequencies of an
    input signal.


CLS 327/558
TXT Lowpass:

    Subject matter under subclass 552 wherein a circuit arrangement allows
    passage of frequencies of an input signal below a predetermined threshold
    frequency and blocks passage of frequencies above that threshold.


CLS 327/559
TXT Highpass:

    Subject matter under subclass 552 wherein a circuit arrangement allows
    passage of frequencies of an input signal above a predetermined threshold
    frequency and blocks passage of frequencies below that threshold.


CLS 327/560
TXT Nonlinear amplifying circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 wherein a non-linear circuit is combined
    with an amplifier in which the output is not a substantial replica of the
    input (e.g., the output is not linearly proportional to the input of the
    circuit).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334,    for a circuit where the output signal is functionally related to
    the input signal by a series of straight line segments.


CLS 327/561
TXT With operational amplifier:

    Subject matter under subclass 560 wherein a nonlinear circuit is combined
    with a stable, high-gain direct coupled amplifier that depends on  an
    external feedback from the output to the input of the circuit to determine
    its functional characteristics (i.e., an operational amplifier).

    (1)     Note.  An operational amplifier classifiable in this subclass must
    be combined with a source of signal energy or with a load that constitutes
    a nonlinear circuit which is not sufficiently comprehensive to be
    classified with a specific art area.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 75+ for an amplifier with feedback.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    111+ for systems which include combinations of amplifier and loud speaker
    or amplifier and microphone.


CLS 327/562
TXT With field-effect transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 561 including a unipolar transistor in which
    current carriers are injected at a source terminal and pass to a drain
    terminal through a channel of semiconductor material whose conductivity
    depends largely on an electric field applied to the semiconductor from a
    control terminal (gate).

    (1)     Note.  In a unipolar transistor, the source to drain current
    involves only one type of charge carrier (i.e., holes in a p-type material
    channel and electrons in an n-type material channel).

    (2)     Note.  Two types of FET structures are prevalent:  (a) an
    all-junction device, known as a junction FET or JFET characterized by
    having heavily doped impurity regions of one type (e.g., p-type material),
    known as gate regions, on both sides of a second type semiconductor bar
    (e.g., n+ type material) to form a pn junction, and (b) a device such as a
    MOSFET/IGFET, consisting of a lightly doped substrate (e.g., p-type
    material) into which two highly doped regions (e.g., n+ type material) are
    diffused for forming source/drain regions with the area therebetween
    becoming the channel for current carriers (i.e., holes or electrons) and
    with a layer of insulating material (e.g., SiO2) grown over the channel
    surface for separating the channel from a control (i.e., gate) electrode.


CLS 327/563
TXT With differential amplifier:

    Subject matter under subclass 560 wherein the non-linear circuit is
    combined with an amplifier having two similar input circuits so connected
    as to respond to the difference between two voltages (or currents) and
    effectively suppress voltages or currents which are alike in the two
    signals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 252+ for semiconductor differential
    amplifiers.


CLS 327/564
TXT Integrated structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 wherein a plurality of circuit elements
    or components are formed on or in a single block of semiconductor material.

    (1)     Note.  The following criteria are established to distinguish
    patents proper for Class 327 from patents proper for Class 257 (Active
    Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes)):

    (a)     A claimed integrated circuit (IC) chip, per se, is classified in
    Class 257.

    (b)     A claim to lead frames, per se, is classified in Class 257 since
    these are only used to connect an IC chip to the external environment.

    (c)     An IC chip claimed in combination with a single lead, a battery, or
    bias without any configuration is classified in Class 257 since no
    circuitry external to the chip is claimed.

    (d)     An IC chip claimed in combination with an external circuit suitable
    for Class 327 will be classified in Class 327 since Class 327 is higher
    than Class 257 in the overall class hierarchy.

    (e)     Circuit interconnections (e.g., point to point, lead
    interconnections, diode and transistor interconnections, etc.) within the
    confines of the IC chip itself are classified in Class 257, whereas these
    same interconnections outside the environment of an IC chip are classified
    in Class 327.

    (f)     If a specific or broad structure of the IC is claimed with a
    utility, the patent will be classified in the utility subclass, (e.g.,
    Class 348 (Television), Class 365 (Static Information Storage and
    Retrieval), etc.)

    (g)     Charge Coupled Devices claimed as part of the circuitry within an
    IC chip are classified in Class 257.


CLS 327/565
TXT With specific layout or layout interconnections:

    Subject matter under subclass 564 including specific design emphasis on the
    topological arrangement of the components in the circuit and the circuit
    connectors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses for specific nonlinear solid state devices with
    specific structure and especially subclasses 202+ for integrated chip
    devices having active devices arrayed in a grid.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 73+ for integrated
    circuit chip structural arrangements/layouts including monitoring or
    testing elements.

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclass 47 for multifunctional
    or programmable logic circuits with specific integrated structure layout or
    layout interconnections and subclasses 101+ for integrated structure layout
    or layout interconnections for digital logic circuits in general.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 488+
    for the design of circuit systems and integrated circuit structure by data
    processing and computer programming techniques.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, particularly
    subclasses 128+ and 598+ for methods of selectively interconnecting
    semiconductor barrier layer-type device arrays.


CLS 327/566
TXT Having field-effect transistor device:

    Subject matter under subclass 565 including a unipolar transistor in which
    current carriers are injected at a source terminal and pass to a drain
    terminal through a channel of semiconductor material whose conductivity
    depends largely on an electric field applied to the semiconductor from a
    control terminal (gate).

    (1)     Note.  In a unipolar transistor, the source to drain current
    involves only one type of charge carriers (i.e., holes in a p-type material
    channel and electrons in an n-type material channel).

    (2)     Note.  Two types of FET structures are prevalent:  (a) an
    all-junction device, known as a junction FET or JFET characterized by
    having heavily doped impurity regions of one type (e.g., p-type material),
    known as gate regions, on both sides of a second type semiconductor bar
    (e.g., n+ type material) to form a pn junction, and (b) a device such as a
    MOSFET/IGFET, consisting of a lightly doped substrate (e.g., p-type
    material) into which two highly doped regions (e.g., n+ type material) are
    diffused for forming source/drain regions with the area therebetween
    becoming the channel for current carriers (i.e., holes or electrons) and
    with a layer of insulating material (e.g., SiO2) grown over the channel
    surface for separating the channel from a control (i.e., gate) electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    581,    for nonlinear solid-state device circuits and systems with
    field-effect transistors, per se.


CLS 327/567
TXT Thin film:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 wherein a conductive, resistive, or
    capacitive passive network is deposited under a form of thin patterned
    layer, which is less than 5 micrometers in thickness, on a substrate to
    form an electronic component that is included in a nonlinear circuit or
    acts as a nonlinear element of the circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 403
    for thin film parametrons in nonlinear reactor systems.


CLS 327/568
TXT Negative resistance type:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 wherein an electron space discharge
    device or a solid-state device included in the nonlinear circuit has a
    negatively sloped portion in its current-voltage characteristic plot in
    which an increase in voltage results in a decrease in current.

    (1)     Note.  Some examples of negative resistance tubes are the dynatron
    and the transitron.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 115 for negative resistance semiconductor
    oscillators and subclasses 132+ for oscillatory circuits utilizing a
    negative resistance or negative transconductance tube means.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 213+ for negative
    resistance or reactance networks of the active element type comprising a
    two terminal network.


CLS 327/569
TXT Unijunction transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 568 including a single junction three
    electrode solid-state device with two of the electrodes being connected to
    one region and the remaining electrode being connected to another region
    wherein a signal applied to the latter electrode causes a breakdown across
    the transistor junction allowing a current to flow between the other two
    electrodes.


CLS 327/570
TXT Having ``N"-shape curve on I-V plot (e.g., tunnel diode type, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 568 including an electron space discharge
    device or a solid-state device whose characteristic on a current versus
    voltage plot (i.e., with the current plotted on the Y axis and voltage on
    the X axis) has an ``N"-shape.

    (1)     Note.  A solid-state diode having modified physical properties to
    reduce the amplitude of the negative slope portion of the curve thereby
    providing threshold operation is classified in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS  CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    571,    for a miscellaneous circuit having a device with an ``S"-shape
    negative resistance curve.


CLS 327/571
TXT Having ``S"-shape curve on I-V plot (e.g., pnpn diode type):

    Subject matter under subclass 568 including a solid-state device whose
    characteristic on a current versus voltage plot (i.e., with the current
    plotted on the Y axis and voltage on the X axis) has an ``S"-shape.

    (1)     Note.  A solid-state four layer diode, one of whose outer layers is
    a metal, breaks down at a predetermined reverse voltage point junction to
    provide high current at low voltages.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    570,    for a miscellaneous circuit having a device with an ``N"-shape
    negative resistance curve.


CLS 327/572
TXT Secondary emissive type:

    Subject matter under subclass 568 which includes an electron space
    discharge device which relies upon the phenomenon of the release of
    electrons from a structure which has been impacted by other high-velocity
    electrons.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 42 for amplifiers utilizing secondary emission
    tubes.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 133 for oscillatory circuits utilizing a
    secondary emissive tube such as a dynatron.


CLS 327/573
TXT Electron multiplier type:

    Subject matter under subclass 572 wherein the secondary emissive type tube
    includes multiple electrodes (i.e., dynodes) which attract electrons freed
    from a light sensitive cathode and thereby increase the number of flowing
    electrons.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    514+,   for miscellaneous light responsive circuits which do not provide
    electron multiplication.


CLS 327/574
TXT Utilizing a three or more electrode solid-state device:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 wherein the nonlinear circuit includes at
    least one solid-state device with more than two electrodes having a
    particularly described feature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Device (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclass for transistors or solid-state devices, per se.


CLS 327/575
TXT Darlington connection:

    Subject matter under subclass 574 wherein a nonlinear circuit includes a
    connection of two similar transistors where their collectors are tied
    together and the emitter of the first transistor is directly coupled to the
    base of the second transistor and the emitter current of the first
    transistor equals the base current of the second transistor.

    (1)     Note.  A Darlington connection is also called a Darlington pair,
    double emitter-follower or beta-multiplier.


CLS 327/576
TXT Complementary transistors:

    Subject matter under subclass 574 wherein a nonlinear circuit includes two
    transistors that have opposite conductivity (i.e., pnp and npn) and have
    matching electrical characteristics.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    214,    for bistable circuits including complementary transistors.


CLS 327/577
TXT Multiple emitter transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 574 wherein a circuit includes a three or
    more electrode solid-state device which is a junction type bipolar
    transistor having at least two emitter regions in addition to the base and
    collector regions.


CLS 327/578
TXT Multiple collector transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 574 wherein the circuit includes a three or
    more electrode solid-state device which is a junction type bipolar
    transistor having at least two collector regions in addition to base and
    emitter regions.


CLS 327/579
TXT Minority carrier storage:

    Subject matter under subclass 574 wherein a concentration of minority
    carriers occurring at a pn junction of a semiconductor is utilized,
    increased, or avoided.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    585,    for miscellaneous minority carrier storage diode circuits.


CLS 327/580
TXT Transistor breakdown device (e.g., avalanche, zener, punch through, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 574 including a transistor having a threshold
    voltage above which the applied voltage must rise before a junction
    breakdown occurs allowing a current to flow across the transistor junction.


CLS 327/581
TXT Field-effect transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 574 including a unipolar transistor in which
    current carriers are injected at a source terminal and pass to a drain
    terminal through a channel of semiconductor material whose conductivity
    depends largely on an electric field applied to the semiconductor from a
    control terminal (gate).

    (1)     Note.  In a unipolar transistor, the source to drain current
    involves only one type of charge carrier (i.e., holes in a p-type material
    channel and electrons in an n-type material channel).

    (2)     Note.  Two types of FET structures are prevalent:  (a) an
    all-junction device, known as a junction FET or JFET characterized by
    having heavily doped impurity regions of one type (e.g., p-type material),
    known as gate regions, on both sides of a second type semiconductor bar
    (e.g., n+ type material) to form a pn junction, and (b) a device such as a
    MOSFET/IGFET, consisting of a lightly doped substrate (e.g., p-type
    material) into which two highly doped regions (e.g., n+ type material) are
    diffused for forming source/drain regions with the area therebetween
    becoming the channel for current carriers (i.e., holes or electrons) and
    with a layer of insulating material (e.g., SiO2) grown over the channel
    surface for separating the channel from a control (i.e., gate) electrode.


CLS 327/582
TXT Four or more layer device (e.g., silicon-controlled rectifier, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 574 including a semiconductor device with
    four or more alternating layers having different conductivities, for
    example a pnpn device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses for a semiconductor structure, per se.


CLS 327/583
TXT Utilizing two electrode solid-state device:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 including a semiconductor device
    containing two structures that emit or collect electrons or holes, or that
    control their movements by an applied electrical field.


CLS 327/584
TXT Breakdown diode (e.g., zener diode, avalanche diode, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 583 including a diode circuit having a
    threshold voltage above which the applied voltage must rise before the
    diode junction breaks down allowing current flow across the diode pn
    junction to rise suddenly.


CLS 327/585
TXT Minority carrier storage diode (e.g., enhancement diode, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 583 including a diode wherein minority
    carriers which accumulate at the junction when the diode is forward biased
    are suddenly swept away after the back biasing increases to a certain point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    579,    for a miscellaneous minority carrier storage transistor circuit.


CLS 327/586
TXT Capacitive diode:

    Subject matter under subclass 583 including a voltage responsive diode
    whose capacitance varies as a result of changes in the space charge at the
    pn junction.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194,    for stable state circuits utilizing a capacitive diode.

    302,    for clock or pulse waveform generating utilizing a storage diode.


CLS 327/587
TXT Bridge circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 583 including four two-electrode solid-state
    devices with their input and output terminals connected in a closed loop to
    form a four arm network.

    (1)     Note.  Bridge circuits may have another arm, called a diagonal arm,
    which is connected across two adjacent arms of the network, between an
    input terminal and an output terminal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    588,    for a miscellaneous bridge circuit.


CLS 327/588
TXT With bridge circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 including a circuit wherein four
    electrical elements have their input and output terminals connected in a
    closed loop to form a four arm network.

    (1)     Note.  Bridge circuits may have another arm, called a diagonal arm,
    which is connected across two adjacent arms of the network, between an
    input terminal and an output terminal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    587,    for two electrode solid-state device with bridge circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 365 for
    Wheatstone bridges, in general.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 57+ for impedance
    measuring bridge systems and subclasses 98+ and 101 for bridge-type
    electric meter systems.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 72, 76+, 146, and 175 for amplifier networks
    utilizing bridge networks.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 110 and 138+ for bridge-type oscillator
    systems.

    332,    Modulators, subclass 172 for bridge-type amplitude modulators.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 117+, 169, 170+,
    and 197+ for passive type bridge systems.


CLS 327/589
TXT With bootstrap circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 which achieves enhanced circuit linearity
    generally by a particular signal boost feedback structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 88 and 92 for logic
    circuits with bootstrapping.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 156 for amplifiers which use a bootstrap
    coupling to the input circuit of the amplifier and in which there is a
    linear relationship between the output and the input.


CLS 327/590
TXT With particular feedback:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 wherein energy is transferred from the
    output of the circuit device to an input thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 75, 290, and 291+ for feedback amplifiers.


CLS 327/591
TXT Tube performs plural functions:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 wherein a nonlinear circuit device
    includes an electron tube which performs at least two independent
    operations either simultaneously or selectively.

    (1)     Note.  An example for this subclass is a circuit including a tube
    which may be used alternatively as a  rectifier or a non-linear amplifier,
    etc.


    SEARCH THIS  CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334+,   for a circuit which relates an output signal to an input signal by
    a mathematical operation or function.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 58 for free running oscillators wherein the
    tube or tubes of the oscillator perform other functions simultaneously with
    the oscillatory function and subclass 59 for convertible oscillator systems
    (e.g., oscillator to amplifier, etc.).


CLS 327/592
TXT With oscillation prevention:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 wherein a particular circuit prevents
    undesired oscillation or ringing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    549,    for a supply or bias source with hum prevention.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 149 for hum or noise bucking systems.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 105 for oscillators with parasitic
    oscillation control or prevention means.


CLS 327/593
TXT With distributed parameter circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 wherein a particular circuit is of the
    distributed network type, the capacitance, inductance and resistance of
    which cannot be isolated into separate lumped capacitors, inductors, or
    resistors and wherein the time factor of propagation of wave energy in the
    network is appreciable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123,    for harmonic frequency conversion systems with distributed
    parameter elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, particularly subclasses 5, 43, 44+, 47, 49, and 53+ for
    amplifiers with distributed parameter elements.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 5, 6+, 79+, 86+, 93, and 96+ for
    oscillators with distributed parameter elements.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, appropriate subclasses for
    wave transmission networks of the long line type.


CLS 327/594
TXT With particular coupling or decoupling:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 wherein a particular circuit includes an
    electrical interaction between a source and an input to the system, between
    the output of a first electrical device and the input of another such
    device, or between the input of the system and the output of the system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329,    for amplitude limiting systems with tuned circuit.

    531+,   for particular source of power or bias voltage with filter or
    rectifier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 157+ for plural stage amplifiers with
    interstage coupling means, subclasses 185+ for input and subclasses 192+
    for output coupling networks.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 72+ for oscillator circuits utilizing
    electron coupled tube means and subclasses 74+ for oscillators with
    particular output coupling network.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 3, 24, 109+, 117+,
    and 124+ for coupling networks comprised of passive elements.


CLS 327/595
TXT With particular connecting:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 wherein a particular circuit includes a
    network in which there exists a path, composed of branches of the network,
    between every pair of terminals of the network.

    (1)     Note.  Some examples of systems to be found in this subclass are
    push-pull, push-push, direct, and parallel connected networks.


CLS 327/596
TXT Including oscillatory or shock-excited circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 wherein a particular circuit includes a
    circuit capable of maintaining sustained oscillations or a resonant circuit
    capable of oscillating freely upon having an impulse of energy applied
    thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for pulse width selecting systems with shock excited circuit.

    100+,   for non-free running signal generation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 128 and 165+ for shock excited resonant
    circuit oscillators.


CLS 327/597
TXT With particular grid control:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 wherein a particular circuit includes an
    impedance network which is provided in the input circuit of a control grid
    of an electron space discharge tube whereby the conductive state of the
    tube depends upon the state of the impedance network.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 293+ for a
    discharge device with apertured electrode (e.g., grid) between two other
    electrodes.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for such discharge device systems as those which control a
    discharge device as the ultimate load therein.

    330,    Amplifiers, appropriate subclasses for grid controlled tube
    amplifiers.


CLS 327/598
TXT With particular tube structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 wherein a particular circuit includes a
    space discharge device of special tube construction or electrode
    arrangement.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and the intended subclasses will include
    structures of the tube wherein a plurality of groups of electrodes are
    contained in a single envelope, provided that there is one input circuit
    and one output circuit and the entire assembly acts as a single tube.

    (2)     Note.  For subject matter comprehending structural features of
    electrical lamp and discharge devices with no significant control circuit
    means, the search will extend to Class 313, Electric Lamp and Discharge
    Devices.  For subject matter comprehending special types of electric lamp
    and space discharge devices combined with control circuits whereby the
    conductive condition of the device is determined and wherein no load is
    included, the search will extend to Class 315, Electric Lamp and Discharge
    Devices:  Systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, for the structure of space
    discharge device, see (2) Note.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclasses 3+ and
    32+ for combined tube and circuit element structure, see (2) Note.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 3, 41, 42, 43, 44+, 47+, 49, and 64 for
    amplifier systems utilizing tubes of a particular construction.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 5, 6+, 79+, 86+, 103, 126+, and 184 for
    oscillator systems utilizing tubes of a particular construction.

    332,    Modulators,  subclasses 165+ for modulator systems utilizing tubes
    of a particular construction.


CLS 327/599
TXT Vacuum tube type:

    Subject matter under subclass 598 wherein a particular circuit includes a
    space discharge device which consists of electrodes in an evacuated tube.


CLS 327/600
TXT Beam tube structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 599 including a space discharge device which
    contains and controls a narrow electron stream.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301,    for rectangular or pulse waveform generation with electron beam
    type tube.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 281 for methods and apparatus for the
    ionic separation or analysis of material (e.g., mass spectrometer),
    subclass 306 for the inspection of solids or liquids by charged particles
    (e.g., electron microscopes), subclasses 440.1+ for irradiated object
    supports of the charged particle inspection type, and subclasses 492.1+ for
    the irradiation of objects or materials, generally.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 62 for cyclotron
    structure, subclasses 299, 359, and 364 for beam tube structures, and
    subclasses 359.1+ for the structure of positive ion accelerators.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclass 3 for beam
    tube and circuit element structure.


CLS 327/601
TXT Gas tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 598 wherein a particular circuit includes a
    space discharge device which consists of electrodes in a gas filled
    envelope or tube.


CLS 327/602
TXT With particular electrode arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 601 wherein a gaseous discharge tube device
    includes a particular electrode configuration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 567+ for electron
    space discharge devices comprised of an envelope with gas or vapor and
    which may have a particular electrode arrangement.


CLS 327/603
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition not provided for in any of the
    preceding subclasses.


CLS 329/
TTL DEMODULATORS

CLS 329/
TXT



    I.      DEFINITIONS OF TERMS:

    DEMODULATOR

    A device which extracts an arbitrarily varying modulating signal from an
    electrical or electromagnetic modulated signal of less than infrared
    frequency.

    ARBITRARILY VARYING

    Indicates having a future value which is not predictable from past values.
    (Arbitrary is the opposite of repetitious).

    REPETITIOUS WAVE

    A cyclic wave whose individual component cycles are substantially
    identical.  Examples of repetitious waves are sine waves, square waves,
    saw-tooth waves and trapezoidal waves.

    CHARACTERISTIC

    An attribute associated with the size or shape of a wave or signal.
    Examples are amplitude, frequency, or phase of a sine wave and repetition
    rate, position, amplitude, or width of a nonsine wave.

    CARRIER

    An electrical or electromagnetic repetitious sinusoidal wave.

    PULSE WAVE

    An electrical or electromagnetic repetitious nonsinusoidal wave.  Examples
    are square wave, saw-tooth wave, or trapezoidal wave.

    MODULATED SIGNAL

    A repetitious wave which has had a characteristic thereof varied by a
    modulating signal.

    MODULATING SIGNAL

    An information carrying signal whose informational content is to be
    impressed on a carrier or pulse wave.

    MODULATOR

    A device which varies a characteristic of a repetitious electrical or
    electromagnetic wave of less than infrared frequency in accordance with a
    characteristic of an arbitrarily varying modulating signal.

    II.     GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    A.      BASIC SUBJECT MATTER OF CLASS
    This is the generic class for demodulators.  A demodulator is a device
    which extracts an arbitrarily varying information carrying signal from a
    signal formed by varying a characteristic of a repetitious electrical or
    electromagnetic wave of less than infrared frequency in accordance with
    this information carrying signal.  Classification herein is broadly by the
    type of modulation exhibited by the input signal.

    B.      COMBINATIONS WITH BASIC SUBJECT MATTER INCLUDED IN THIS CLASS

    1.      A demodulator combined with perfecting structure is classified
    here.  Such structure might include, for example, a particular power supply
    for electronic devices within the demodulator.

    2.      A demodulator combined with or incorporated in other structure not
    otherwise classifiable is classified here.  This might include, for
    example, a demodulator combined with an acoustical device such as a
    loudspeaker.

    3.      A combination including both a modulator and a demodulator is
    classified in Class 332 where such combination is not provided for
    elsewhere.

    C.      MISCELLANEOUS SYSTEMS AND DEVICES USED WITH DEMODULATORS This class
    provides for (1) miscellaneous systems and devices which are not of general
    utility and which are limited to use with demodulators and (2)
    miscellaneous systems and devices useful with demodulators which are not
    otherwise classified.  An example of this would be convertible demodulators
    which convert between different types of demodulators or which convert to
    or from devices other than demodulators.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this class are pulse code demodulators and
    delta modulation demodulators which are now classified in Class 341,
    subclasses 126+ and 143.

    (2)     Note.  Several classes contain structure which is closely analogous
    to demodulators.  Particularly significant among these is Class 327,
    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and Systems.
    See the relevant SEARCH CLASS notes below in completing the search for
    subject matter of Class 329.

    (3)     Note.  Many classes contain subject matter which includes
    demodulators or analogous devices as subcombinations thereof.  Among these
    are the receivers and complete communication systems (i.e., transmitters
    and receivers) of Class 375, Pulse or Digital Communications, and 455,
    Telecommunications.  Therefore, these classes and others contained in the
    SEARCH CLASS notes below should be considered in completing the search for
    subject matter of Class 329.

    (4)     Note.  The terms "discriminator" and "detector" are often but not
    always used synonymously with "demodulator".  Classification in Class 329
    is appropriate where the terms "discriminator" or "detector" are recited
    and which clearly disclose a corresponding function of demodulation per the
    definition above.  Classification is elsewhere where no such disclosure is
    present.  See the SEARCH CLASS notes below, particularly those for Class
    327.

    (5)     Note.  Demodulators having a modulated input of less than infrared
    frequency which may utilize an internal optical element (e.g., an optical
    isolator) are classified in Class 329 by the type of modulation.

    (6)     Note.  The combination of modulation converter (e.g., FM to AM)
    with a demodulator is classified in Class 329 according to the modulation
    type of the input to the converter.  Modulation converters, per se, are
    classified in Class 332, subclasses 183+.

    (7)     Note.  For classification herein there must be complete extraction
    of the modulating signal.  Mere frequency converters (e.g., RF to IF
    mixers) are not classified here but in Class 455, Telecommunications,
    subclasses 313+.

    (8)     Note.  Subclasses 318+ and 349+ of Class 329 provide for
    demodulators, per se, with structure for noise or distortion control.
    Class 455, Telecommunications, provides for noise or interference control
    in:

    a)      a telecommunication system (i.e., transmitter and receiver),

    b)      a complete telecommunication receiver, and

    c)      a combination of two or more receiver elements (viz. wave
    collector, wave mixer or modifier, demodulator, and utilization device)
    where the combination is not elsewhere classified.  Therefore,
    consideration must be given to extending the search for demodulator noise
    control circuitry into relevant subclasses of Class 455.  See also the
    SEARCH CLASS notes below relating to Class 455.

    (9)     Note.  Subclasses 356 and 357 relate to suppressed carrier double
    sideband demodulators, per se, and single/vestigial sideband demodulators,
    per se, respectively.  Class 455, particularly subclasses 202 and 204
    accept this subject matter in combination with what may be broadly recited
    diverse receiver elements (viz. wave collector, wave modifier or mixer, and
    utilization device).  Therefore, in completing the search for demodulators
    of an amplitude modulated wave not having the full complement of carrier
    and two complete sidebands, consideration must be given to extending the
    search to relevant subclasses in Class 455.  See also the SEARCH CLASS
    notes below relating to Class 455.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for measuring or
    testing of a parameter which is typically neither electrical, optical,
    thermal, nor chemical and which may include a demodulation technique.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 66.1+ for a telegraphic system which
    transmits messages between stations using alternating or pulsating currents
    and particularly subclass 66.2 for such a system having a transmitter which
    is turned on and off, subclass 117 for a telegraphic system utilizing a
    coherer, and subclasses 118+ for telegraphic receivers in general.

    250,    Radiant Energy, appropriate subclasses for the detection of
    invisible radiation or the testing of material by invisible radiation which
    may include a modulation - demodulation technique.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses for active solid-state devices used as demodulators,
    including subclasses 10, 11, 21, 53-56, 113-118, 184-189, 225-234, 257-258,
    290-294, and 414-466 for radiation-sensitive active semiconductor devices.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 401+
    for miscellaneous nonlinear reactor systems.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 311+ for
    piezoelectric elements and devices.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses for the
    structure of electronic tubes.

    315,    Electrical Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 1+ for
    cathode-ray tube circuits with power supply or the combination of
    cathode-ray tube and circuit element in a unitary device, and subclasses
    94+ for an electron discharge device which is an ultimate load together
    with a cathode or cathode heater supply circuit.

    318,    Electricity: Motive Power Systems, subclasses 606+ for servo
    systems utilizing a feedback signal which frequency or phase modulates a
    system carrier (particularly subclasses 607 and 608 for obtaining the
    modulating wave by reference signal frequency or phase comparison,
    respectively) subclass 622 for an AC lead or lag network which may include
    a demodulation technique, and subclasses 671+ for particular servo system
    motor control (particularly subclass 684 which utilizes a specific
    demodulator).

    323,    Electricity: Power Supply or Regulation Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for control of the magnitude or phase of current or voltage in a
    system comprising a single electrical source coupled to a single electrical
    load.

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for
    measurement of electrical properties, in general, and particularly
    subclasses 76.11+ for systems measuring and testing electricity which may
    include demodulation, particularly subclasses 76.39+ for frequency
    measurement and subclasses 76.77+ for phase comparison, and subclass 118
    for modulation of voltage or current to be measured onto a carrier combined
    with subsequent structure to recover a replica of the original voltage or
    current by demodulation.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 1+ for miscellaneous signal parameter discriminating or
    comparing for input signals not carrying intelligence, particularly
    subclasses 2+ for miscellaneous phase discriminating, subclasses 31+ for
    miscellaneous pulse spacing discriminating, subclasses 39+ for
    miscellaneous frequency discriminating, and subclasses 50+ for
    miscellaneous amplitude discriminating.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 10 for an amplifier having an input which is
    the output of a modulator and an output which is the input of a subsequent
    demodulator.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 1+ for automatic oscillator frequency
    stabilization using phase or frequency sensing which may include comparison
    with a reference oscillator or a modulation technique, subclasses 46+ for
    plural oscillator systems in general, and subclass 58 for an oscillator
    with structure to perform an additional simultaneous function.

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 100+ for a frequency shift keying modulator,
    subclasses 103+ for a phase shift keying modulator, subclasses 106+ for a
    pulse modulator, subclasses 117+ for a frequency modulator, subclasses 144+
    for a phase modulator and subclasses 149+ for an amplitude modulator.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 24+ for
    transmission line coupling networks (particularly subclasses 25+ for
    balanced to unbalanced circuits, subclasses 138+ for lumped parameter delay
    lines, and subclasses165 - 212 for filters), subclasses 236+ for long
    lines, per se, and subclasses 245+ for long line elements and components.

    334,    Tuners, appropriate subclasses for tuner circuits, per se, which
    may include a broad recitation of a demodulator plus details of a tuner and
    particularly subclasses 30+ for a tuner with a resonance indicator in which
    a demodulator may be used and subclass 39 for tuners combined with other
    devices which may include a demodulator recited broadly.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for electrical circuit
    elements exhibiting inductive properties.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 1 for a coherer-type resistor and
    subclasses 13+ for a resistor whose resistance value varies in response to
    a condition such as temperature or magnetic field.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 870.01+ for telemetry
    systems and especially subclasses 870.18+ indented thereunder for such
    systems  where the quantity to be telemetered is imposed on a carrier by a
    particular type of modulation.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 126+ for a pulse
    code demodulator, per se, and subclass 143 for a delta modulation
    demodulator, per se.

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 350+ for directive radio wave systems
    which may include demodulation techniques and particularly subclasses 385+
    for a directive beacon or receiver.

    348,    Television, subclasses 638+ for a demodulator particularly adapted
    for extracting a component of a natural color television signal from a
    carrier or subcarrier, subclasses 726+ for television signal receivers and
    subcombination thereof.

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 469 for modulation onto a carrier of a
    facsimile signal derived from scanning a picture or for demodulation of
    such a modulated carrier to reconstruct the picture.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 28 for
    control of a demodulator by a reference carrier signal stored concurrently
    with the information signal to be demodulated and subclasses 29+ for
    dynamic magnetic recording or reproducing containing particular demodulator
    circuitry.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, particularly subclasses 13+ for
    current  conversion which includes generic AC to DC rectifiers and generic
    DC to AC inverters of diverse type.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclass 134 for acoustic wave demodulation in an underwater telemetry
    system.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 90 for
    demodulation of a previously modulated quadraphonic subchannel signal after
    retrieval.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for multiplexing
    systems which may utilize demodulation techniques.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for
    measurement systems responsive to an external thermal condition which may
    utilize a modulation technique.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, appropriate subclasses for
    demodulators combined with receiving structure to couple a modulated pulse
    wave from a transmission medium (i.e., a receiver) or complete systems
    (i.e., transmitter and receiver) incorporating such a combination,
    particularly subclasses 237-242+ for a system or receiver utilizing pulse
    number modulation, pulse width modulation, pulse position, frequency, or
    spacing modulation, pulse amplitude modulation, or pulse code modulation,
    subclasses 259+ for other diverse types of digital communication systems
    which may include a particular demodulator, and subclasses 316+ for other
    diverse types of digital communication receivers which may include a
    particular demodulator.

    380,    Cryptography, for all electrical communications equipment which
    process an information signal for purposes of concealment.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    1+ for broadcast stereophonic signal processing not elsewhere classified.

    386,    Television Signal Processing for Dynamic Recording or Reproducing,
    subclasses 26+ for frequency modulation of a color television signal.

    455,    Telecommunications, appropriate subclasses for nondigital
    demodulators combined with receiving structure to couple a modulated wave
    from a transmission medium (i.e., a receiver) or complete systems (i.e.,
    transmitter and receiver) incorporating such a combination, particularly
    subclass 21 for frequency conversion in a repeater including a demodulator,
    subclasses 39+ for separated transmitter and receiver which may include a
    particular demodulator, subclasses 73+ for a transceiver which may include
    a particular demodulator, and subclasses 130+ for a telecommunications
    receiver which may include a particular demodulator.


CLS 329/300
TXT FREQUENCY SHIFT KEYING OR MINIMUM SHIFT KEYING DEMODULATOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition where the demodulator extracts
    the modulating signal from a signal which has undergone frequency shift
    keying modulation or minimum shift keying modulation.

    (1)     Note.  Frequency shift keying modulation occurs when the frequency
    of a carrier is shifted among a plurality of discrete values in accordance
    with the modulating signal.

    (2)     Note.  Minimum shift keying modulation is a type of frequency shift
    keying modulation in which there is phase continuity at the frequency
    transition points.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass includes frequency shift keying demodulators,
    per se.  See the SEARCH CLASS notes below for combinations with the subject
    matter of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304+,   for a phase shift keying demodulator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 272+ for a frequency
    shift keying system (i.e., transmitter and receiver) and subclasses 322+
    for a frequency shift keying demodulator combined with receiving structure.


CLS 329/301
TXT Including discrete semiconductor device:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 containing an electrical device whose
    constituent portions are constructed from solid material having room
    temperature conductivity between that of a conductor and an insulator and
    which conductivity is typically modified through the addition of small
    amounts of dopant.

    (1)     Note.  This might include, for example, semiconductor diodes or
    transistors of diverse type.


CLS 329/302
TXT Input signal combined with local oscillator or carrier frequency signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 where the modulated signal input to the
    demodulator interacts with oscillations from a secondary source.

    (1)     Note.  The secondary oscillations may be internally generated or
    externally supplied and may be at a frequency other than that of the
    modulated input signal's carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306+,   for similar structure in a phase shift keying or quadrature
    amplitude demodulator.

    323+,   for similar structure in a frequency modulation demodulator.

    346,    for similar structure in a phase modulation demodulator.

    358+,   for similar structure in an amplitude modulation demodulator.


CLS 329/303
TXT Including logic element (e.g., logic gate or flip-flop):

    Subject matter under subclass 300 containing a component which performs a
    Boolean Algebraic operation.

    (1)     Note.  Such components may be combinational or sequential (e.g.,
    AND gates, OR gates or J-K flip-flops).


CLS 329/304
TXT PHASE SHIFT KEYING OR QUADRATURE AMPLITUDE DEMODULATOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition where the demodulator extracts
    the modulating signal from a signal which has undergone phase shift keying
    modulation or quadrature amplitude modulation.

    (1)     Note.  Phase shift keying modulation occurs when the phase of a
    carrier is shifted among a plurality of discrete angles in accordance with
    the modulating signal.

    (2)     Note.  Quadrature amplitude modulation occurs when the phase and
    amplitude of a carrier is simultaneously shifted among a plurality of
    discrete angle/magnitude pairs.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass includes phase shift keying demodulators or
    quadrature amplitude demodulators, per se.  See the SEARCH CLASS notes
    below for combinations with the subject matter of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300+,   for a frequency shift keying demodulator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclass 261 for a quadrature
    amplitude modulation system (i.e., transmitter and receiver), subclasses
    279+ for a phase shift keying system, and subclasses 322+ for a phase shift
    keying demodulator combined with receiving structure.


CLS 329/305
TXT Including discrete semiconductor device:

    Subject matter under subclass 304 containing an electrical device whose
    constituent portions are constructed from solid material having room
    temperature conductivity between that of a conductor and an insulator and
    which conductivity is typically modified through the addition of small
    amounts of dopant.

    (1)     Note.  This might include, for example, semiconductor diodes or
    transistors of diverse type.


CLS 329/306
TXT Input signal combined with local oscillator or carrier frequency signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 304 where the modulated signal input to the
    demodulator interacts therein with oscillations from a secondary source.

    (1)     Note.  The secondary oscillations may be internally generated or
    externally supplied and may be at a frequency other than that of the
    modulated input signal's carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302,    for similar structure in a frequency shift keying or minimum shift
    keying demodulator.

    323+,   for similar structure in a frequency modulation demodulator.

    346,    for similar structure in a phase modulation demodulator.

    358+,   for similar structure in an amplitude modulation demodulator.


CLS 329/307
TXT Including phase or frequency locked loop:

    Subject matter under subclass 306 in which a phase or frequency locked loop
    provides stability to or synchronization with the secondary source of
    oscillations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 1+ for phase or frequency locked loops, per
    se.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 327 and 376 for phase
    locked loops in digital receivers or synchronizers, respectively.


CLS 329/308
TXT With parallel signal combiners (e.g., costas loop):

    Subject matter under subclass 307 utilizing a plurality of signal combiners
    where the modulated input signal is combined with relatively phase shifted
    versions of the secondary oscillations, or where the secondary oscillations
    are combined with relatively phase shifted versions of the modulated input
    signal.


CLS 329/309
TXT Including logic element (e.g., logic gate or flip-flop):

    Subject matter under subclass 308 containing a component which performs a
    Boolean Algebraic operation.

    (1)     Note.  Such components may be combinational or sequential (e.g.,
    AND gates, OR gates or J-K flip-flops).


CLS 329/310
TXT Including logic element (e.g., logic gate or flip-flop):

    Subject matter under subclass 304 containing a component which performs a
    Boolean Algebraic operation.

    (1)     Note.  Such components may be combinational or sequential (e.g.,
    AND gates, OR gates or J-K flip-flops).


CLS 329/311
TXT PULSE OR INTERRUPTED CONTINUOUS WAVE DEMODULATOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition where the demodulator extracts
    the modulating signal from a modulated signal which has undergone pulse
    modulation.

    (1)     Note.  Pulse modulation occurs when a repetitious pulse wave has a
    characteristic varied in accordance with the modulating signal.

    (2)     Note.  Interrupted continuous wave modulation occurs when a pulsed
    continuous wave has a characteristic varied in accordance with the
    modulating signal.

    (3)     Note.  Examples of pulse waves are square waves, sawtooth waves,
    and trapezoidal waves.

    (4)     Note.  Comparable structure having an input which is pulse code
    modulated (PCM) or delta modulated are found in Class 341 subclasses 126+
    or 143.

    (5)     Note.  This subclass includes pulse demodulators, per se. See the
    SEARCH CLASS notes below for combinations with the subject matter of this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315+,   for a frequency modulation demodulator.

    341+,   for an FM demodulator which initially transforms the input signal
    into pulses.

    345+,   for a phase modulation demodulator.

    347+,   for an amplitude modulation demodulator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, appropriate subclasses, for
    combinations of a pulse demodulator with receiving structure.


CLS 329/312
TXT Pulse width demodulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 311 where the modulated signal input to the
    demodulator has undergone pulse width modulation.

    (1)     Note.  Pulse width modulation is a form of pulse modulation in
    which the width (duration) of the pulses is the characteristic that is
    varied.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 238 or 340+ for a
    combination of pulse width demodulator with receiving structure.


CLS 329/313
TXT Pulse position, frequency, phase or spacing demodulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 311 where the modulated signal input to the
    demodulator has undergone pulse position, frequency, phase or spacing
    modulation.

    (1)     Note.  Pulse position, frequency, phase or spacing modulation are
    forms of pulse modulation where the characteristics being varied are the
    relative positions of the pulses, the frequency (repetition rate) of the
    pulses, the phase of the pulses, or the spacing (time) between the pulses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 239 or 340+ for a
    combination of pulse position, frequency or spacing demodulator with
    receiving structure.


CLS 329/314
TXT Including discrete semiconductor device:

    Subject matter under subclass 313 containing an electrical device whose
    constituent portions are constructed from solid material having room
    temperature conductivity between that of a conductor and an insulator and
    which conductivity is typically modified through the addition of small
    amounts of dopant.

    (1)     Note.  This might include, for example, semiconductor diodes or
    transistors of diverse type.


CLS 329/315
TXT FREQUENCY MODULATION DEMODULATOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition where the demodulator extracts
    the modulating signal from a modulated signal which has undergone frequency
    modulation.

    (1)     Note.  Frequency modulation occurs when the frequency of a carrier
    is varied over a continuum of values in accordance with the modulating
    signal.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes frequency modulation demodulators,
    per se.  See the SEARCH CLASS notes below for combinations with subject
    matter of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300+,   for a frequency shift keying or minimum shift keying demodulator.

    311+,   for a pulse modulation demodulator.

    345+,   for a phase modulation demodulator.

    347+,   for an amplitude modulation demodulator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 42+ for frequency demodulation in a
    system with separated transmitter and receiver, and subclasses 205+ for a
    combination of frequency demodulator with receiving structure.


CLS 329/316
TXT Plural demodulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 315 which utilizes a diverse intermediate
    type of demodulator within the FM demodulator or combines the outputs of a
    plurality of FM demodulators or has an output selectable from a plurality
    of demodulators one of which must be an FM type.


CLS 329/317
TXT Including amplitude demodulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 316 which utilizes an intermediate amplitude
    demodulator.


CLS 329/318
TXT Having specific distortion, noise or other interference prevention,
    reduction or compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 315 including the neutralization of an
    undesirable characteristic of a frequency modulation demodulator or its
    signals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    349+,   for distortion or noise control in an amplitude modulation
    demodulator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 63+ and 501+ for noise control in a
    telecommunication system with separated transmitter and receiver,
    subclasses 210+ for carrier amplitude modulation elimination in an FM
    receiver and subclasses 296+ for receiver noise or interference control,
    particularly subclasses 309 and 312.


CLS 329/319
TXT Using feedback to reduce distortion, noise or other interference:


    Subject matter under subclass 318 which utilizes a returned portion of the
    output signal to achieve neutralization.


CLS 329/320
TXT By cancelling distortion, noise or other interference:

    Subject matter under subclass 318 which combines a derived error or
    deviation signal with an intermediate demodulator signal to achieve
    neutralization of an undesirable characteristic in the final demodulator
    output.


CLS 329/321
TXT Using amplitude limiting within the demodulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 318 which restricts the magnitude of signal
    fluctuations within the demodulator itself to achieve the neutralization.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 308+ and particularly subclass 309
    for amplitude limiting in a receiver noise elimination structure.


CLS 329/322
TXT Including microwave or distributed parameter structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 315 utilizing a structure or device which is
    peculiar to microwave frequencies or which has resistance, inductance or
    capacitance not concentrated in lumped circuit elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    354,    for similar structure in an amplitude modulation demodulator.


CLS 329/323
TXT Input signal combined with local oscillator or carrier frequency signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 315 where the modulated signal input to the
    demodulator interacts therein with oscillations from a secondary source.

    (1)     Note.  The secondary oscillations may be internally generated or
    externally supplied and may be at a frequency other than that of the
    modulated input signal's carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302,    for similar structure in a frequency shift keying or minimum shift
    keying demodulator.

    306+,   for similar structure in a phase shift keying or quadrature
    amplitude demodulator.

    346,    for similar structure in a phase modulation demodulator.

    358+,   for similar structure in an amplitude modulation demodulator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 208+ for synchronized or controlled
    local oscillator in a FM receiver and subclasses 255+ for generic local
    oscillator frequency control in a receiver.


CLS 329/324
TXT Input signal applied directly to local oscillator:

    Subject matter under subclass 323 in which the modulated input signal has a
    direct interaction with the secondary source of oscillations and where the
    modulating signal is extracted directly therefrom.


CLS 329/325
TXT Including phase or frequency locked loop:

    Subject matter under subclass 323 in which a phase or frequency locked loop
    provides stability to the secondary source of oscillations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 1+ for phase or frequency locked loops, per
    se.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 260 for phase lock loop or frequency
    synthesizer in a receiver.


CLS 329/326
TXT Including discrete semiconductor device:

    Subject matter under subclass 325 containing an electrical device whose
    constituent portions are constructed from solid material having room
    temperature conductivity between that of a conductor and an insulator and
    which conductivity is typically modified through the addition of small
    amounts of dopant.

    (1)     Note.  This might include, for example, semiconductor diodes or
    transistors of diverse type.


CLS 329/327
TXT Input signal split into plural signals:

    Subject matter under subclass 315 where the modulated signal input to the
    demodulator is separated into a plurality of closely analogous or identical
    representations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    363+,   for input signal splitting in an AM demodulator.


CLS 329/328
TXT Including piezoelectric resonant element:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 which incorporates a resonant component
    having the ability to transform mechanical energy into electrical energy
    (e.g., piezoelectric).

    (1)     Note.  Piezoelectric resonant elements are typically crystals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 311+ for
    piezoelectric elements, per se.


CLS 329/329
TXT Using a transformer to split input signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 in which the separated signal
    representations are obtained at the various wound portions of a transformer
    (e.g., primary or secondary windings).


CLS 329/330
TXT Signals taken from primary and secondary windings:

    Subject matter under subclass 329 where representations of the modulated
    input signal are extracted from the primary and the secondary windings of
    the transformer.


CLS 329/331
TXT Including plural detector diodes (e.g., ratio detector type):

    Subject matter under subclass 330 which additionally utilizes a plurality
    of diodes in demodulation.

    (1)     Note.  An example of this structure is a ratio detector where the
    ratio of a pair of diode rectified currents is proportional to frequency
    variations of an input signal.


CLS 329/332
TXT Signals taken from plural secondary windings:

    Subject matter under subclass 329 where representations of the modulated
    input signal are extracted from plural secondary windings of the
    transformer.


CLS 329/333
TXT Including plural detector diodes (e.g., ratio detector type):

    Subject matter under subclass 332 which additionally utilizes a plurality
    of diodes in demodulation.

    (1)     Note.  An example of this structure is a ratio detector where the
    ratio of a pair of diode rectified currents is proportional to frequency
    variations of an input signal.


CLS 329/334
TXT Including resonant circuits tuned above and below input signal carrier
    frequency:

    Subject matter under subclass 333 which additionally utilizes a pair of
    tuned circuits having resonant frequencies above and below the carrier
    frequency of the input signal.


CLS 329/335
TXT Including plural detector diodes (e.g., ratio detector type):

    Subject matter under subclass 329 which additionally utilizes a plurality
    of diodes in demodulation.

    (1)     Note.  An example of this structure is a ratio detector where the
    ratio of a pair of diode rectified currents is proportional to frequency
    variations of an input signal.


CLS 329/336
TXT Input signal combined with phase shifted or delayed portion of input
    signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 in which an unmodified modulated signal
    is subsequently combined with a time delayed version thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Such a time delay can also be considered to be a phase shift.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 304 for phase shifting among plural
    signal paths used in receiver noise elimination.


CLS 329/337
TXT Including lc resonant phase shift circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 336 in which an inductive-capacitive resonant
    network provides the required phase shift.


CLS 329/338
TXT Input signal split by lc resonant circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 in which the input signal is separated
    into plural representations by an inductive-capacitive resonant circuit.


CLS 329/339
TXT Including lc resonant circuits tuned above and below input signal carrier
    frequency:

    Subject matter under subclass 338 utilizing a pair of inductive-capacitive
    tuned circuits having resonant frequencies above and below the carrier
    frequency of the input signal.


CLS 329/340
TXT Including plural detector diodes (e.g., ratio detector type):

    Subject matter under subclass 327 which additionally utilizes a plurality
    of diodes in demodulation.

    (1)     Note.  An example of this structure is a ratio detector where the
    ratio of a pair of diode rectified currents is proportional to frequency
    variations of an input signal.


CLS 329/341
TXT Input signal converted to and processed in pulse form (e.g., pulse counter
    or digital type demodulator):

    Subject matter under subclass 315 in which the frequency modulated input
    signal is first changed to a pulse equivalent and then processed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    311+,   for pulse demodulators, per se.


CLS 329/342
TXT Including discrete semiconductor device:

    Subject matter under subclass 341 containing an electrical device whose
    constituent portions are constructed from solid material having room
    temperature conductivity between that of a conductor and an insulator and
    which conductivity is typically modified through the addition of small
    amounts of dopant.

    (1)     Note.  This might include, for example, semiconductor diodes or
    transistors of diverse type.


CLS 329/343
TXT Including digital logic circuitry:

    Subject matter under subclass 341 which includes processing circuitry which
    is not exclusively of an analog nature.

    (1)     Note.  Such components include, for example, AND gates, OR gates,
    and J-K flip-flops.


CLS 329/344
TXT Input signal passed through single demodulating path including resonant
    circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 315 in which the modulated input signal
    transits a single demodulating circuit path which contains a tuned circuit.


CLS 329/345
TXT PHASE MODULATION DEMODULATOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition where the demodulator extracts
    the modulating signal from a modulated signal which has undergone phase
    modulation.

    (1)     Note.  Phase modulation occurs when the phase of a carrier is
    varied over a continuum of values in accordance with the modulating signal.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes phase modulation demodulators, per
    se.  See SEARCH CLASS notes below for combinations with the subject matter
    of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304+,   for a phase shift keying or quadrature amplitude demodulator.

    311+,   for a pulse demodulator.

    315+,   for a frequency demodulator.

    347+,   for an amplitude demodulator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 42+ for phase demodulation in a
    system with separated transmitter and receiver, and subclasses 205+ for a
    combination of phase demodulator with receiving structure.


CLS 329/346
TXT Input signal combined with local oscillator or carrier frequency signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 345 where the modulated signal input to the
    demodulator interacts therein with oscillations from a secondary source.

    (1)     Note.  The secondary oscillations may be internally generated or
    externally supplied and may be at a frequency other than that of the
    modulated input signal's carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302,    for similar structure in a frequency shift keying or minimum shift
    keying demodulator.

    306+,   for similar structure in a phase shift keying or quadrature
    amplitude demodulator.

    323+,   for similar structure in a frequency modulation demodulator.

    358+,   for similar structure in an amplitude modulation demodulator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 208+ for a synchronized or
    controlled local oscillator in a phase modulation receiver and subclasses
    255+ for generic local oscillator frequency control in a receiver.


CLS 329/347
TXT AMPLITUDE MODULATION DEMODULATOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition where the demodulator extracts
    the modulating signal from an input AM signal.

    (1)     Note. Amplitude modulation is achieved by varying the amplitude of
    a carrier over a continuum of values in accordance with a modulating signal.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes amplitude modulation demodulators,
    per se.  See the SEARCH CLASS note below for combinations with the subject
    matter of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    311+,   for a pulse demodulator.

    315+,   for frequency modulation demodulator.

    345+,   for a phase modulation demodulator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 130+ for a telecommunication
    receiver utilizing an amplitude modulation demodulator as a subcombination
    thereof.


CLS 329/348
TXT Having plural demodulation outputs:

    Subject matter under subclass 347 where there are more than one output
    signal which as undergone demodulation, one of which must have undergone
    amplitude demodulation.


CLS 329/349
TXT Having specific distortion, noise or other interference prevention,
    reduction or compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 347 including the neutralization of an
    undesirable characteristic of an amplitude modulation demodulator or its
    signals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    318+,   for distortion or noise control in a frequency modulation
    demodulator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 63+ and 501+ for noise control in a
    telecommunication system with separated transmitter and receiver, and
    subclasses 296+ for receiver noise or interference control, particularly
    subclasses 309 and 312.


CLS 329/350
TXT Automatic amplitude stabilization or control:

    Subject matter under subclass 349 in which undesirable fluctuations in the
    magnitude of a demodulator signal are eliminated or reduced.


CLS 329/351
TXT Nonlinearity reduction or compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 349 where an undesirable nonlinear
    characteristic of a demodulator, its components or its signals is
    neutralized.


CLS 329/352
TXT Temperature compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 349 in which undesirable effects of ambient
    temperature on a demodulator are diminished.


CLS 329/353
TXT Noise reduction or compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 349 in which undesired signal components
    superimposed upon a desired demodulator signal are attenuated.

    (1)     Note.  In some instances, noise is generated due to an inherent
    characteristic of a demodulator circuit component.


CLS 329/354
TXT Including microwave or distributed parameter structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 347 utilizing a structure or device which is
    peculiar to microwave frequencies or which has resistance, inductance or
    capacitance not concentrated in lumped circuit elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322,    for similar structure in a frequency modulation demodulator.


CLS 329/355
TXT With electron discharge device:

    Subject matter under subclass 354 utilizing a device which has electrical
    current flow between two spaced electrodes in a gas, vapor or vacuum.

    (1)     Note.  This might include, for example, vacuum or gas tubes such as
    diodes, triodes or pentodes.

    (2)     Note.  Additional control electrodes may be present.


CLS 329/356
TXT Suppressed carrier double sideband type:

    Subject matter under subclass 347 where the input AM signal has had the
    carrier attenuated and both sidebands are present.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 46 for a suppressed carrier system
    having separated transmitter and receiver and subclass 202 for a suppressed
    carrier- type receiver.


CLS 329/357
TXT Single or vestigial sideband type:

    Subject matter under subclass 347 where the input AM signal has less than
    two complete sidebands present.

    (1)     Note.  The carrier may or may not be present in the input signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 47 for a single or vestigial sideband
    system with separated transmitter and receiver and subclasses 203 or 204
    for a single sideband or vestigial sideband-type receiver, respectively.


CLS 329/358
TXT Input signal combined with local oscillator or carrier frequency signal
    (e.g., synchronous demodulator):

    Subject matter under subclass 347 where the modulated signal input to the
    demodulator interacts therein with oscillations from a secondary source.

    (1)     Note.  The secondary oscillations may be internally generated or
    externally supplied and may be at a frequency other than that of the
    modulated input signal's carrier.

    (2)     Note.  A synchronous demodulator uses a local carrier frequency
    signal synchronized with the carrier of the modulated input signal to
    cancel out the modulated input signal's carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302,    for similar structure in a frequency shift keying or minimum shift
    keying demodulator.

    306+,   for similar structure in a phase shift keying or quadrature
    amplitude demodulator.

    323+,   for similar structure in a frequency modulation demodulator.

    346,    for similar structure in a phase modulation demodulator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 255+ for generic local oscillator
    frequency control in a receiver.


CLS 329/359
TXT Input signal applied directly to local oscillator:

    Subject matter under subclass 358 where the input AM signal interacts
    directly with the local secondary source of oscillations.


CLS 329/360
TXT Including phase or frequency locked loop:

    Subject matter under subclass 358 in which frequency stability is provided
    to the secondary source of oscillations by a phase or frequency locked loop.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 1+ for phase or frequency locked loops, per
    se.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 260 for phase locked loop or frequency
    synthesizer in a receiver.


CLS 329/361
TXT Including sampling, gating or switching:

    Subject matter under subclass 358 which additionally includes signal
    processing of an interruptive or discrete nature.

    (1)     Note.  This may include, for example, chopping of the modulated
    input signal.


CLS 329/362
TXT With three or more terminal discrete semiconductor device:

    Subject matter under subclass 361 utilizing an electrical device with three
    external connection points where the constituent portions of the device are
    constructed from solid material having room temperature conductivity
    between that of a conductor and an insulator and which conductivity is
    typically modified through the addition of small amounts of dopant.

    (1)     Note.  This might include, for example, semiconductor diodes or
    transistors of diverse type.


CLS 329/363
TXT Input signal split into plural signals:

    Subject matter under subclass 347 in which the modulated signal input to
    the demodulator is separated into a plurality of closely analogous or
    identical representations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327+,   for input signal splitting in a frequency modulation demodulator.


CLS 329/364
TXT Including three or more terminal discrete semiconductor device:

    Subject matter under subclass 363 utilizing an electrical device with three
    external connection points where the constituent portions of the device are
    constructed from solid material having room temperature conductivity
    between that of a conductor and an insulator and which conductivity is
    typically modified through the addition of small amounts of dopant.

    (1)     Note.  This might include, for example, semiconductor diodes or
    transistors of diverse type.


CLS 329/365
TXT Including diode demodulator device:

    Subject matter under subclass 363 utilizing a unidirectional electrical
    element as demodulator.

    (1)     Note.  The diodes of this subclass may be either semiconductor or
    tube type.


CLS 329/366
TXT Plural diodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 having a plurality of demodulating
    unidirectional electrical elements.


CLS 329/367
TXT Including regenerative feedback in nonoscillating demodulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 347 in which an AM demodulator, not requiring
    a supplemental source of oscillations to achieve demodulation, positively
    feeds back a portion of its output to provide signal enhancement.


CLS 329/368
TXT Electron discharge demodulator device having more than two electrodes
    (e.g., triode, tetrode, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 347 in which an AM demodulator utilizes a
    device which has electrical current flow between two spaced electrodes in a
    gas, vapor or vacuum and which current flow is controlled by an additional
    electrode.


CLS 329/369
TXT Including three or more terminal discrete semiconductor demodulator device:

    Subject matter under subclass 347 in which the AM demodulator utilizes an
    electrical device with three external connection points where the
    constituent portions of the device are constructed from solid material
    having room temperature conductivity between that of a conductor and an
    insulator and which conductivity is typically modified through the addition
    of small amounts of dopant.

    (1)     Note.  This might include, for example, semiconductor diodes or
    transistors of diverse type.


CLS 329/370
TXT Including diode demodulator device:

    Subject matter under subclass 347 where the AM demodulator incorporates a
    unidirectional electrical element.

    (1)     Note.  The diodes of this subclass may be either semiconductor or
    tube type.


CLS 329/371
TXT Coherer type demodulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 347 where the demodulating element includes
    conductors loosely resting against each other in imperfect conducting
    contact, the conductors being of such a material and shape that passage of
    a high frequency current therethrough modifies the conducting contact.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the demodulating element is formed from loosely
    packed metallic granules, whose contact resistance decreases upon passage
    of a high frequency current therethrough.  However, the contact resistance
    may increase under these conditions to constitute an anticoherer, which is
    also included here.

    (2)     Note.  The coherer often includes structure, namely, a decoherer,
    for breaking the coherence established by the high frequency current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 117 for an alternating current telegraphic
    system utilizing a coherer.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclass 43 for active solid-state type coherers.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 1 for coherer-type resistors, per se.


CLS 329/372
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition not provided for in any previous
    subclass.


CLS 330/
TTL AMPLIFIERS

CLS 330/
TXT



    I.      DEFINITIONS OF TERMS USED:

    AMPLIFIER

    Electric circuit means wherein a variable electrical current or voltage
    input signal is applied to an electrical amplifying device to control a
    source of electrical energy applied to the same device and from which is
    derived an output signal of substantially the same wave form as the input
    signal and substantially linearly related thereto.

    AMPLIFYING DEVICE

    An electrical transducer of the active type wherein the electrical energy
    supplied by one system (power supply) is controlled by the electrical
    energy supplied by another system (signal source) limited to the active
    transducer device element itself such as a vacuum tube, transistor,
    controllable gas tube, saturable reactor, variable resistive element, etc.
    See Active Elements, below.

    SEMICONDUCTOR

    A material having a specific resistance value of the order of that of
    germanium, silicon, selenium, etc; or insulators whose specific resistance
    is reduced in value to the aforesaid range in operation, by alpha particle
    or electron bombardment or other means, so that the insulators operate
    broadly as semiconductors in an electrical circuit.

    SEMICONDUCTOR AMPLIFYING DEVICE

    An amplifying device constructed of a semiconductor with suitable
    electrodes for the application of signal current, power supply energy, and
    for the derivation of output signal current.

    ELECTRONIC TUBE

    An electric space discharge device, that is, a device in which electricity
    flows from one electrode to another by means of free electrical charge
    carrier particles traveling in a vacuum, gas or vapor; included are
    electric space discharge devices (also called electronic tubes) which
    operate in the open, i.e., not in an enclosed envelope.  The electrical
    charge carrier particles may be of any type, usually electrons for vacuum
    tubes or charged ions for gas or vapor tubes.

    DISCHARGE PATH

    The path of the free electrical charge carrier particles between the
    electrodes of an electronic tube.

    INPUT CIRCUIT OR COUPLING

    The circuit or network of an amplifier extending from the source of
    electrical signal to the input electrodes of the amplifier, which may
    include the source of electrical signal.

    OUTPUT CIRCUIT OR COUPLING

    The circuit or network of an amplifier extending from the output electrodes
    of the amplifier to the load device, which may include the load.

    CASCADE AMPLIFIER

    A series of amplifiers wherein the input for each amplifier except the
    first (to which the electric signal source is connected) is coupled from
    the output of the prior amplifier.

    ELECTRIC SIGNAL SOURCE OR SIGNAL SOURCE

    The source of electrical signal energy to be amplified or the source of
    electrical signal energy which controls the electric power supply applied
    to the amplifying device.

    LOAD

    The electric device or circuit which utilizes the output signal derived
    from the amplifier after the input signal has controlled the electric power
    supply by means of the amplifying device to yield a signal which is a
    replica of the input signal but usually of greater amplitude.

    INTERSTAGE CIRCUIT OR COUPLING

    The electrical circuit or network by means of which the output signal from
    the output electrodes of the amplifying device of one stage of a cascaded
    amplifier is conveyed to the input electrodes of the amplifying device of
    the following stage of the cascade amplifier.

    SIGNAL

    A variable electrical current or voltage having characteristic variations
    in time, which characteristic variations are transmitted through an
    electrical network from a source in which the signal originates to a load
    where the signal is utilized.

    ELECTRICAL NETWORK OR NETWORK

    An arrangement of electrically connected electrical elements and/or devices
    which are capable of carrying electric a.c. or d.c. current.  Note.  A
    network does not define the structure in space of the network elements or
    their arrangement in space relative to each other; it merely defines the
    elements or devices broadly by type as to the electrical function they
    perform and the electrical connections which will carry current between
    such elements and/or devices.

    ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT

    An electrical network providing one or more closed paths.

    STRUCTURE

    Refers to any details of a circuit element as to the nature or composition
    of the material or materials of which it is made, the form or shape of the
    element or its parts or the relationship in space of such elements or parts
    or such characteristics of the elements relative to each other.

    GRID

    Is used in the conventional sense referring to the intended use and
    structure of the element in an electronic tube, particularly in a vacuum
    tube.

    DIODE

    Refers to any electronic tube, solid element, semiconductor, barrier layer
    device or other current carrier means limited to two electrodes and without
    additional magnetic or electrostatic means to influence the current flow,
    and which has marked unidirectional current characteristics.

    VACUUM TUBE

    An enclosed space evacuated of most of its gas wherein an electric
    discharge takes place between two electrodes one of which emits
    electrically charged atomic particles, generally electrons and the other
    electrode collects such particles.  The vacuum tube has at least one
    additional electrode or other means to control the flow of charged atomic
    particles between the emitter electrode and the collector electrode.  The
    electric discharge of a vacuum tube is normally an electron discharge and
    any discharge of ionized particles is normally fortuitous and unintended.
    A vacuum tube is usually involved in a four terminal network, the input
    signal being supplied to two input electrodes usually the grid (control)
    and cathode (electron emitting electrode) and the output circuit normally
    being comprised of the power supply, the anode load impedance, the anode,
    the electron discharge, the cathode impedance, the load and the output
    coupling means. Thus the cathode which is normally present in the output
    and input circuits is normally the common electrode.  Other alternative
    configurations where the input and output electrodes are not as above, as
    for example, where the anode is a common electrode and the cathode is the
    output electrode, are known and provided for in the schedule of this class.
     The terms for the grid, cathode and anode electrodes or auxiliary
    electrodes (as defined below) are referred to according to the
    predetermined use usually assigned for them regardless of the alternative
    circuit arrangements involved.  The terms input, output, and common
    electrodes are used as in these definitions.

    ELECTRODE

    (1)     In a vacuum tube, electronic tube or in any discharge device, the
    conductive elements between which the electric discharge takes place, and
    to which the power supply is applied; any additional conductive means
    placed in proximity to the electric discharge and/or other electrodes to
    affect electrostatically the discharge or the potentials of the electrodes
    with which they are in proximity.

    (2)     In a magnetic amplifying device or in a resistive amplifying
    device, (including semiconductive devices) the terminals of windings which
    influence the operation of the magnetic device or the resistor or
    semiconductor terminals by means of which electric current may flow in or
    out of the resistor or semiconductor or by means of which a potential may
    be applied to the resistor or semiconductor.

    CATHODE OR CATHODE ELECTRODE

    The negative electrode of the two electrodes of an electronic tube between
    which an electric discharge occurs (for negative charge carrier particles);
    in a vacuum tube the electrode which emits the electrons and is negatively
    charged with respect to the electrode which collects the electrons.

    ELECTRIC DISCHARGE

    The flow of current between two spaced electrodes at different potentials
    or the charge carrier particles conveying the current from one spaced
    electrode to the other.

    CHARGE CARRIER PARTICLE

    A charged particle of matter involved in a flow of space current (electric
    discharge) and by means of which such current flows (current flow other
    than an electromagnetic wave propagated in open or confined space).  Such
    charge carrier particles may be ions of a gas or charged atomic particles
    such as electrons.

    FILAMENT

    A wire, ribbon, or rod conductive member.

    DIRECTLY HEATED CATHODE OR FILAMENTARY CATHODE

    A filament designed to have its terminals connected to a source of current,
    the filament being heated by the current passing through it and effective
    to emit electrons, designed to serve as a cathode of an electronic tube as
    defined above.

    INDIRECTLY-HEATED CATHODE (equiptential cathode)

    A cathode designed to be heated to its emitting temperature by a separate
    heating element.

    CATHODE-HEATER

    A filament in proximity to an indirectly-heated cathode with terminals
    designed to receive a source of power to heat the cathode to its electron
    emitting temperature.

    GRID OR GRID ELECTRODE

    An electrode having one or more apertures therein, usually formed of
    open-work material such as wire mesh, etc., and usually used as the signal
    or control electrode, or auxiliary electrode of an electron tube.

    SIGNAL ELECTRODE OR SIGNAL GRID

    The electrode to which the signal is applied; in the case where such
    electrode is a grid electrode, the signal grid.

    CONTROL ELECTRODE

    An electrode designed to influence or control the discharge current flowing
    between other electrodes.  It may depend for its effect on either its
    electrostatic effect or on the current flow thereto. The most common types
    of control electrodes are the signal control grid, or the gain control
    electrode or grid.

    CONTROL GRID

    A control electrode having grid construction.

    GAIN CONTROL ELECTRODE

    An electrode designed, together with the electron tube in which it is
    incorporated, to receive a d.c. control voltage (other than the signal but
    which is usually derived from the signal), whereby changes in the control
    voltage change the gain of the tube.

    GAIN

    The ratio of the amplifier output power, voltage, or current to the
    amplifier input power, voltage or current.

    AUXILIARY GRID

    Any grid, of an electronic tube other than the signal input grid.

    SCREEN GRID

    A grid electrode placed between the control grid and the anode of a vacuum
    tube to reduce inter-electrode capacitance.

    ANODE

    An electrode which acts as the positive terminal of an electric discharge
    or which acts as the positive terminal of an electric field to cause a
    discharge or accelerate the electrons in an electric discharge.

    BIAS, BIAS VOLTAGE, BIAS CURRENT

    In an amplifying device, usually, a steady d.c. voltage or current applied
    between two electrodes usually referred to the input electrodes to form an
    electric reference means for the control means, which influences the
    current flow of an electronic tube or semiconductor device or the flux
    relationships of a magnetic saturable reactor.  (See also Bias Control and
    Power Supply, below).

    DISTRIBUTED PARAMETER CHARACTERISTICS

    A conductor or conductive means designed to operate at microwave or other
    high frequencies, so that the conductive means exhibits both distributed
    capacitance and distributed inductance at such frequencies.

    COMPRESSOR OR VOLUME COMPRESSOR

    A device that compresses the volume range, as in recording sound,
    radio-telephone transmission, etc.  In compressing the signal volume range
    the amplification of large signals is reduced and of small signals is
    increased.

    EXPANDER OR VOLUME EXPANDER

    A device that expands the volume range, as in recording sound,
    radio-telephone transmission, etc.  In expanding the signal volume range,
    the amplification of large signals is increased, and the amplification of
    small signals is reduced.  Expanders are used generally to restore a signal
    after compression.

    GAS OR VAPOR TUBE

    An electric discharge device which depends, for its operation, at least in
    part, upon ionization of a gas or vapor.

    POWER SUPPLY

    The source of electrical energy applied to an amplifying device which is
    controlled by the electric input signal.  The term is used herein
    generically to include also a cathode heater supply, and bias voltage or
    current supply.

    WAVE ENERGY

    An undulatory disturbance propagated through a medium, (usually periodic in
    nature), its displacement varying periodically with respect to time or
    distance or both.  The wave may be manifested in electrical, mechanical or
    acoustical form.  However, in this class the term "wave energy" refers only
    to electrical wave energy.

    WAVE TRANSMISSION DEVICE

    Any device which is used to guide or constrain electrical wave energy and
    to convey the energy from one place to another. Included are conductors,
    wave guides, resonant structures (e.g., cavities, etc.).

    DISTRIBUTED PARAMETERS

    When the impedance of a transmission device or line at the operating
    frequency or band of frequencies is due primarily to the parameters of the
    device or line itself, and in considering the inductance, capacitance and
    resistance of the device or line they must be considered as mixed together
    and spread out along the device or line rather than being considered as in
    separate discrete lumps or devices as in the case of simple series and
    parallel circuits, the transmission device or line may be said to have
    distributed parameters.  Examples of circuits with distributed parameters
    include telephone, telegraph and power lines for high frequency energy.

    WAVE GUIDE

    A transmission device designed to propagate electrical waves having an
    electric or magnetic field component extending in the direction of
    propagation.  The wave guide may be a hollow dielectric or metal tube, or a
    solid dielectric rod, the wave energy being propagated along the interior
    of the tube or rod and confined by the walls of the tube or rod.

    PASSIVE NETWORK

    A network containing no source of energy and in which no energy is
    dissipated other than that accounted for by the resistance of the
    components of the network.

    ACTIVE NETWORK

    A network containing a source of energy, or a sink of energy (i.e., a
    device for absorbing or dissipating energy other than that accounted for by
    the resistance of the components of the networks).  Merely dissipating the
    heat generated by a resistance will not cause the resistance to be an
    active element. See Amplifying Device, above.

    RESONATOR

    Devices comprising conductive enclosures, cavities, or wave transmission
    line sections of the two terminal type, and having distributed inductance
    and capacitance, the line sections being terminated in other than the
    characteristic impedance of the line sections, the devices presenting
    resonant characteristics to the existing source of wave energy.  See also
    Resonant Circuit, below.

    DELAY NETWORK

    Networks including significant structure for retarding wave energy a
    pre-determined period of time over a range of frequencies.

    LECHER LINES

    A parallel transmission line with means to tune the parallel line.

    LONG LINE

    A wave transmission device or line having distributed parameters and
    especially designed to propagate electrical wave energy where the wave
    length of the transmitted energy is relatively short when compared with the
    length of the transmission line or device.  The impedance of a long line is
    practically fixed by the constants of the line itself.  The length of the
    transmission line or device may be a multiple or a fraction of a wave
    length, e.g., 1/4, 1/2, etc., or otherwise have its length proportioned to
    the wave length of the energy with which it is to be used.

    LONG LINE ELEMENT

    A circuit element having distributed parameters, such as a resonator, or a
    wave guide.  A long line element may be a part of a long line wave
    transmission device or used in a network with other circuit elements of the
    lumped parameter type, for example, as in the case of delay networks,
    impedance matching networks, wave filters.

    CONCENTRIC LINES

    A transmission line in which one conductor extends within a second hollow
    conductor.

    PARASITIC REACTANCE, IMPEDANCE, CAPACITANCE OR INDUCTANCE

    Impedance characteristics of capacitive or inductive nature which are
    exhibited by conductive elements or conductive parts of a circuit at only
    high frequencies in a circuit designed for operation over a wide band and
    are inherent in the construction of such element or part.  The presence of
    such reactances is undesirable and generally detrimental to the proper
    operation of the circuit.  When a parasitic reactance is used as though it
    were a predetermined lumped reactance as in the case of the distributed
    capacitance of a coil being used to resonate therewith at a particular
    frequency; the distributed capacitance or other parasitic reactance is
    treated, for classification purposes, as though it were a predetermined
    lumped reactance in the circuit.  Inter-electrode capacitances similarly
    involved in amplifiers as part of a tuned circuit are similarly treated.

    PUSH-PULL STAGE

    Includes two amplifiers each as defined above under "AMPLIFIER", the input
    electrodes of each of the amplifying devices of the two amplifiers being
    balanced to ground or some other convenient electrical reference plane, the
    source of electrical signal being such, and so coupled to the input
    electrodes, that at any instant the signal on each input electrode is
    substantially equal and opposite in sign to the signal on the other input
    electrode; and wherein the signal on the output electrodes of each of the
    amplifying devices is similarly balanced to a convenient electrical
    reference plane.

    (1)     Note.  A balanced signal circuit is treated in this class as a
    special case of a single source or a single load.  See Balanced Circuit,
    below.

    (2)     Note.  A push-pull amplifier is treated in this class as a single
    channel, having a single source and a single load.

    BALANCED CIRCUIT

    A circuit having its conductors electrically symmetrical with respect to a
    reference potential plane (e.g., ground).  The potential between the two
    sides and ground are equal and of opposite sign.  For example, a horizontal
    two-wire line may be a balanced line.  See Push-Pull Stage, above.

    UNBALANCED CIRCUIT

    A circuit having its conductors electrically unsymmetrical with reference
    to a potential plane. For example, a concentric line is ordinarily
    unbalanced, the outer conductor being ordinarily connected to ground.

    PLURAL AMPLIFIER CHANNELS

    An amplifier system having at least two signal channels each containing
    separate amplifiers as defined above (wherein each amplifier may be a
    cascade amplifier), such amplifier channels may be completely separate from
    each other having separate and independent sources or loads; usually with
    some common control or they may be in parallel, having a common source and
    a common load; or the plural channels may be in branched circuits from
    separate sources or to separate loads.

    AMPLIFIER CHANNEL OR CHANNEL

    A part of an amplifier system in which a single signal path may be traced
    from a source to a load, and which path includes an amplifier as defined
    above.  Such channel may be a cascade amplifier.

    CONTROL

    A selective adjustment of an element of an amplifier to vary the operation
    of the amplifier in a desired manner, or the characteristic of a part of
    the amplifier whereby in response directly to signal, or by means of a
    developed voltage or current in response to the signal, or by a voltage
    from some outside source, the impedance characteristics of a circuit
    element, or the electrical characteristics (bias or energizing voltage) of
    an amplifying device are automatically altered to change the operation of
    the amplifier in a predetermined manner.  Such control may be by a
    nonlinear impedance element alone in a biasing or power supply circuit.
    The term control has not been applied in this class, when a nonlinear
    impedance element is in the signal path and affects the signal only,
    without any control from a separate path being applied to vary such
    impedance.

    BIAS CONTROL

    Control, as defined above applied to control of bias voltage or current of
    an amplifying device.  This is distinguished from signal feedback in that
    the bias control voltage or current has a smoothed average value which adds
    to or subtracts from the bias voltage or current and is unlike the signal
    feedback voltage which varies instantaneously with the signal at the point
    from which it is derived.  See also, Bias, Bias Voltage or Bias Current,
    above.

    FREQUENCY RESPONSIVE MEANS

    Circuit means which acts on the signal to affect some frequency component
    of the signal differently from any other frequency components of the
    signal, for example, a tuned circuit or filter circuit which eliminates a
    frequency component, or an equalizer which emphasizes the signal amplitude
    of some frequency or frequency range of the signal with respect to others
    (e.g., tone control).  See also, Frequency Selective Means, below.

    EQUALIZER

    Networks with attenuation or attenuation and phase distortion
    characteristics which vary over a frequency range for use in a wave
    transmission system for modifying the attenuation or attenuation and phase
    characteristics of the wave energy as a function of frequency.

    PHASE SHIFT

    Used to designate the change in phase relation between voltage and current
    of the same wave energy, or between the voltages or the currents of
    different wave energy of the same frequency.

    ATTENUATOR

    Devices and networks consisting of one or more elements which exhibit only
    a positive resistance effect and which reduce the intensity of the energy
    passing through the device by dissipation, (1) the elements being
    proportioned to permit a change in their value to control the energy loss
    while maintaining substantially constant input and/or output impedance of
    the device, and/or (2) the elements being proportioned to permit the device
    to be inserted in the circuit to provide an energy loss without introducing
    any reflections in the circuit, and/or (3) the elements being combined with
    a long line or long line element, and/or (4) the device or network having
    an impedance equal to the impedance of a specified long line, and/or (5)
    the device or network is claimed as being particularly modified for use
    over a frequency band so that its characteristics are particularly related
    to frequency.

    IMPEDANCE MATCHING NETWORK

    Coupling networks which include one or more impedance elements construed or
    proportioned to substantially eliminate the reflected wave energy between
    the network and at least one of the connected circuits caused by impedance
    differences.

    RESONANT CIRCUIT

    A circuit containing both inductive and capacitive reactance and in which
    the inductive reactance equals the capacitive reactance for a particular
    frequency.  The resonant circuit may be series resonant, where the reactive
    elements are in series; or parallel (anti-resonant), where the inductive
    and capacitive elements are in parallel.  See also, Resonator.

    SWITCH

    A device or means for opening or closing an electric circuit.

    REACTIVE COUPLING

    A coupling network including reactive means which may be inductive or
    capacitive.

    D.C. PATH OR D.C. CONDUCTIVE PATH

    A path for current in a network which can conduct d.c. current.

    D.C. COUPLING

    A signal coupling network including a d.c. conductive path.  In a four
    terminal network such paths must be traced between terminals on the
    circuits to and from which the coupling is made which vary in voltage with
    the signal (this excludes d.c. paths limited to ground leads or d.c. shunt
    paths).

    FREQUENCY SELECTIVE MEANS

    Network means composed of some reactive elements which permit the passage
    of certain frequency components or a frequency component and block others.
    See also, Frequency Responsive Means, above.

    FILTER

    A frequency selective means.

    POTENTIOMETER

    A network which permits the division of a voltage applied across it,
    including adjustable means to select a particular division of the voltage
    applied across the network.

    NONLINEAR IMPEDANCE OR DEVICE

    An impedance or device, which may be reactive or resistive or a combination
    of both and having the characteristic that for changes in voltage or
    current, the relationship of the voltage drop across the impedance or
    device, or the voltage applied across the impedance or device to the
    current flowing through it, is nonlinear.

    RECTIFIER

    A device with a unilateral current characteristic which permits the passage
    of only d.c. current therethrough, and which is used to convert a.c.
    current applied thereto to d.c. current.

    AMPLITUDE LIMITER

    A means in a circuit to limit the amplitude of the electrical voltage
    across it or the current in it to a value below or above a fixed
    predetermined value, particularly the former.

    THERMALLY RESPONSIVE IMPEDANCE

    An impedance element whose impedance value is responsive to the temperature
    changes therein by reason of the heat generated by the current flow
    therethrough, or the ambient temperature of the impedance element, or whose
    impedance value may be changed by separate electrical control means or
    other heat control means.

    ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCER

    Means to convert the electric signal to mechanical vibrations and means
    further to convert the mechanical vibrations back to electric signals, such
    means generally serving as either time or phase delay means or means to
    determine the transmission frequency of the coupling network.

    SIGNAL FEEDBACK

    The application of a signal derived from an output electrode, to an input
    electrode of an amplifier or a prior stage of an amplifier.  The input and
    output electrodes of the feedback may be the same or a common electrode as
    where vacuum tube space current flows through an unbypassed cathode
    impedance to change the potential on the cathode with respect to the
    control grid in accordance with the signal output. (For the distinction
    between signal feedback and bias control see the definition thereof, above).

    CATHODE IMPEDANCE

    The impedance from the cathode of an electronic tube to ground or a
    reference potential.

    SIGNAL FEEDBACK PATH

    Circuit means to apply a portion of the electrical signal output of an
    amplifier to the input of the amplifier involving a shared impedance for
    the input and output circuits.

    LOOP PATH

    In an amplifier having signal feedback, the path of the signal from the
    input point where the signal feedback is applied forward through the
    amplifier to the point in the circuit from which the signal feedback is
    derived through the signal feedback path to the aforesaid input point.

    INTER-ELECTRODE CAPACITANCE

    The capacitive reactance for signal flow between any two electrodes of a
    vacuum tube, transistor or similar device inherent in their relationship to
    each other electrostatically and which for certain frequencies and voltages
    forms a path for the signal current usually detrimental to the operation of
    the circuit.

    INTER-ELECTRODE IMPEDANCE

    An impedance between electrodes of a vacuum tube, transistor, or similar
    device inherent in its structure, and manner and frequency of operation.
    This term is generic to inter-electrode capacitance above; and includes
    also input conductance caused by the transit time of electrons, etc.

    POSITIVE FEEDBACK

    Signal feedback having at least some component thereof in phase with the
    signal at the point in the amplifier circuit where the signal feedback is
    applied.

    NEGATIVE FEEDBACK

    Signal feedback having at least some component thereof in opposite phase
    with the signal at the point where the signal feedback is applied.

    NEUTRALIZATION MEANS

    Circuit means to eliminate, mitigate, or lessen undesirable effects of
    inter-electrode capacitance or inter-electrode impedance and which may
    include the input and/or output impedance of the amplifying device involved
    (such input or output impedance includes the inter-electrode impedance of
    the input or output electrodes).

    STABILIZATION MEANS

    In an amplifier having a tendency to depart from a predetermined condition
    of operation, any circuit means used to maintain such predetermined
    condition of operation of the amplifier.  See the definition of Control
    above.

    TRANSISTOR

    An amplifying device comprising a semiconductor material to which contact
    is made by three or more electrodes.

    ELECTRIC CARRIERS OF A TRANSISTOR

    Current flow in a transistor may be by negative carriers (electrons) or
    positive carriers (holes).

    N-TYPE CONDUCTIVITY

    The characteristic of a semiconductor material, usually imparted by the
    addition of impurities of the "donor" type, of an excess of free electrons
    over holes (free positive charges) at any time at room temperature, such
    negative charge carriers or electrons being referred to as majority
    carriers for current flow in such material, and holes as minority carriers
    for such current flow.

    P-TYPE CONDUCTIVITY

    The characteristic of a semiconductor material, usually imparted by
    "acceptor" type impurities therein, of an excess of free positive carriers
    (holes) over free negative carriers (electrons), such positive carriers or
    holes being referred to as majority carriers for current flow in such
    material and the electrons as minority carriers for such current flow.

    MAJORITY CARRIERS

    See the definition of N- or P-type conductivity above.

    MINORITY CARRIERS

    See the definition of N- or P-type conductivity above.

    POINT CONTACT TRANSISTOR

    A transistor comprising a body of P- or N-type semiconductor material to
    which are attached two closely spaced electrodes connected at sharply
    defined points to the semiconductor material and a third electrode, the
    base relatively remote from the other electrodes and having a relatively
    large contact area (low resistance) for connection to the semiconductor.
    In this type of transistor the emitter is forwardly biased having, in
    N-type semiconductor material, the positive terminal of the biasing means
    connected to the emitter electrode, and for P-type semiconductor material
    the negative terminal of the biasing means connected to the emitter
    relative to the base, to inject minority carriers for the conductivity type
    semiconductor material (holes for N-type and electrons for the P-type) and
    the collector is biased reversely (having the negative terminal of the
    biasing means connected to the collector for N-type material and the
    positive terminal for P-type material), relative to the base so that
    minority carriers are collected there.

    JUNCTION IN A TRANSISTOR OR SEMI-CONDUCTOR

    The boundary of P-type and N-type semiconductor material.

    JUNCTION TRANSISTOR

    A transistor comprising two P-N Junctions back-to-back wherein a region of
    P- or N-type semiconductor material is common to both junctions (thus
    determining an NPN or a PNP junction transistor, respectively); an emitter
    electrode connected to one of the conductivity regions not common to the
    two junctions, normally forwardly biased (positive terminal of bias means
    to emitter for PNP type and negative terminal for NPN type); a collector
    electrode connected to the other conductivity region but common to the two
    junctions, reversely biased (negative terminal of bias means for the PNP
    type and positive terminal for the NPN type; and a base electrode connected
    to the region common to both junctions.  See definition of Point Contact
    Transistor above, which operates similarly in many respects.

    EMITTER ELECTRODE

    See the definition of point contact or junction type transistor above.

    COLLECTOR ELECTRODE

    See the definition of point contact or junction type transistor above.

    BASE ELECTRODE

    See the definition of point contact or junction transistor above.

    CONFIGURATION

    The arrangement of electrodes of a transistor as input and output
    electrodes, e.g., common base configuration, where the base is included in
    both the input and output circuits of a transistor amplifier.

    INTRINSIC CONDUCTIVITY

    Refers to a semiconductor material which for a certain range of conditions
    has its free electron carriers and free hole carriers in approximate
    balance, so that the semiconductor material is neither N- nor P-type.
    Sufficient change in temperature or sufficient radiant energy impinging
    upon such a body will upset this equilibrium.

    ACCEPTOR IMPURITY OR ACCEPTOR

    A material which when added to a semiconductor material in minute
    quantities, as an impurity, induces hole conduction, generally causing the
    semiconductor to be one of "P-type conductivity".

    DONOR IMPURITY OR DONOR

    A material which when added to a semiconductor in minute quantities, as an
    impurity, induces electron conduction, generally causing the semiconductor
    to become one of "N-type conductivity".

    SECONDARY EMISSION ELECTRONIC OR VACUUM TUBE

    A tube which depends for its operation, at least in part, upon the emission
    of electrons from a body due to collision of higher energy electrons with
    the body.

    SECONDARY EMISSIVE ELECTRODE

    An electrode which emits electrons upon collision with higher energy
    electrons.  Since all electrodes have this characteristic, the term applies
    only to those electrodes designed to have an electron stream or beam
    impinge thereon to emit a stream or beam of secondary electrons.

    SATURABLE REACTOR

    An inductive device having a core and at least one winding thereon in which
    the inductance is variable in accordance with magnetomotive force applied,
    up to a limiting value beyond which increased magnetomotive force does not
    change the inductance.

    II.     GENERAL STATEMENT OF THE CLASS SUBJECT MATTER:

    A.      This is the generic class for amplifiers as limited by the
    definition of amplifiers as it appears in the "Definition of Terms" above.

    B.      Included are amplifiers having all types of active elements (or
    amplifying devices, the term used in this class) as for example vacuum
    tubes, gas tubes, semiconductors, magnetic type saturable reactors, masers,
    etc., as set forth in the specific subclasses in the schedule for the
    class.  Specific types of vacuum tube amplifier devices included are,
    traveling wave type tubes, secondary emission type tubes, electron beam
    tubes, magnetrons, etc.

    C.      Included are amplifier systems having plural amplifier channels,
    cascade amplifiers, push-pull amplifiers and other amplifiers having plural
    amplifier devices.  Also included are amplifiers with plural signal sources
    or plural loads, as for example sum or difference amplifiers which have
    plural sources.

    D.      Amplifiers including the means coupling the signal source to the
    amplifier or coupling the amplifier to the load or between cascaded stages
    are also included herein.  Such coupling means include those of the
    distributed parameter type, resonant tuned circuits, filters, coupling
    designed to pass a broad band, d.c. coupled circuits, potentiometer means
    for volume control, equalizers, circuits for volume control, etc.

    E.      Amplifiers combined with tone control means are also included
    herein as indicated in "D" above for the type included in the amplifier
    coupling means, also included herein are those tone control amplifiers
    relying on signal feedback means to effect the tone control.

    F.      Amplifiers combined with amplitude (volume) control means whether
    by manual control, by control of an electrode d.c. bias, as in gain
    control, or by controlling a variable impedance means for the signal
    transmission path of the amplifier are also included herein.

    G.      Amplifiers combined with power supply means for such amplifier are
    also included herein, as well as means to control the voltage or current of
    such means.

    H.      Amplifiers combined with structural features of the amplifier or
    the amplifier circuit elements including structure of the amplifier device,
    capacitors, transformers, etc.

    I.      Amplifiers having signal feedback means.

    III.    TWO-TERMINAL NEGATIVE RESISTANCE NETWORKS:

    Such networks containing an active element (amplifying device) are not
    classified in this class, but in Class 333, Wave Transmission Lines and
    Networks, subclasses 213+.

    IV.     LIMITERS:

    Passive networks which limit the signal amplitude voltage or current are
    classified in Class 323, Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems.
    Miscellaneous limiting circuits with active device elements are classified
    in Class 327, Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits,
    and Systems, subclasses 309+.

    V.      MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRONIC TUBE CIRCUITS:

    Circuits including electron tubes (other than the limiters discussed under
    IV above) in which the signal output is not a substantial replica of the
    input signal, are classified residually in Class 327, Miscellaneous Active
    Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and Systems.  Examples of such tube
    circuits are wave conversion circuits classified in subclasses 100+,
    miscellaneous pulse generating systems classified in subclasses 291+, and
    electronic tube gating circuits classified in subclasses 365+.

    VI.     SATURABLE REACTOR CIRCUITS (MAGNETIC AMPLIFIERS):

    Such circuits which control voltage or current and are not classifiable
    herein (as for example, where the a.c. power supply current is not removed
    from the signal output by filtering or other means) classification is in
    Class 323, Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems.  Saturable
    reactor circuits for wave shaping, switching, pulse production, etc.,
    analogous to similar electronic tube circuits are classified in Class 307,
    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 401+ with
    nonlinear reactor systems, and Class 364, Electrical Computers and Data
    Processing Systems, subclass 864 for computers using magnetic amplifiers.

    VII.    NONLINEAR REACTOR CIRCUITS:

    Where a nonlinear capacitor serves as the active element or amplifying
    device in a circuit which switches, shapes a wave, or produces pulses and
    is not provided for elsewhere classification is in Class 307, Electrical
    Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 401+.  So called
    amplifier circuits including a nonlinear capacitor as the amplifying
    device, which have an a.c. source where the claims do not provide a filter
    to remove the a.c. source from the output or where a demodulator is claimed
    and no filter or other means to remove the a.c. power supply from the
    signal output circuit is disclosed, is excluded from this class and
    classified in Class 307, Electrical Transmission or Interconnection
    Systems, subclasses 401+.

    VIII.MISCELLANEOUS TRANSISTOR CIRCUITS:

    Transistor circuits which are not amplifiers or not combined with an art
    device or in a system specifically provided for in some class, are
    classified in Class 327, Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices,
    Circuits, and Systems, appropriate subclasses. Such art as miscellaneous
    transistor wave shapers, gating circuits, limiters, and pulse producers are
    classified therein.

    IX.     AMPLIFIER COMBINED WITH SPECIFIC SOURCE OF SIGNAL ENERGY:

    This class does not provide for combinations of amplifiers with a specific
    source of electric signal, such as a microphone (see Class 381, Electrical
    Audio Signal Processing and Systems, subclasses 111+), which limits the
    system to use with a particular art even though the source is claimed by
    name only.  Similarly, where the source is claimed by characteristics
    specific to the art device as for example, "a source of speech signals"
    classification is not in this class. However, classification is in this
    class where the source is claimed by its electrical characteristics not
    specific to the source device, as for example, "a high impedance source of
    electrical signal". Where the specific source, or details thereof are
    claimed, classification is with the art device so identified.

    GENERATOR OR OSCILLATOR CLAIMED BY NAME ONLY

    The terms generator or oscillator in claims, where they appear as sources
    of signal energy without further qualification except by their electrical
    characteristics such as impedance, reactance, etc., are treated as
    generalized sources of signal energy, and classification is with amplifiers
    except where specific details of the generator or oscillator are claimed;
    in such cases classification is with the type of generator claimed or with
    oscillators in Class 331, Oscillators.

    X.      AMPLIFIERS COMBINED WITH SPECIFIC LOAD:

    Where the load is claimed, broadly, or by name only as a specific
    electrical art device, as for example, as a loudspeaker, classification is
    not in this class (see Class 381, Electrical Audio Signal Processing and
    Systems, subclasses 111+) but with the load art device claimed.  Where
    characteristics of the load device are claimed, which are peculiar to the
    disclosed electrical art device or to a specific type of electrical art
    device, classification is with the load art device established in the
    claim.  Subject matter wherein general electrical characteristics of the
    load are claimed, as for example, "a load having a variable impedance", is
    classified in this or indented subclasses.

    OSCILLATOR AS A LOAD FOR AN AMPLIFIER

    Subject matter wherein an amplifier is combined with an oscillator as load
    for the amplifier is classified with amplifiers when the oscillator is
    claimed by name only; where specific details of the oscillator are claimed,
    classification is in Class 331, Oscillators.

    XI.     REPEATERS:

    Devices known in the art as repeaters which are in effect two-way
    amplifiers are not classified in this class but are classified in Class
    379, Telephonic Communications, subclasses 338+.

    XII.    AMPLIFIERS COMBINED WITH LONG LINE TRANSMISSION MEANS OR
    DISTRIBUTED PARAMETER ELEMENTS, AND AMPLIFIERS COMBINED WITH WAVE FILTERS,
    EQUALIZERS OR ATTENUATORS:

    Such subject matter is classified herein even though the amplifier is
    claimed by name only, if some detail of the co-operation of the amplifier
    with the passive network (coupling) is claimed.  (See also Class 333).

    XIII.   COMPANDERS INCLUDING AMPLIFIERS:

    Systems including means to compress a signal wave, an electrically long
    transmission line and means to expand the signal wave are not classified
    herein even when they include details of an amplifier. Companders are
    classified in Class 333, Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 14.
     Amplifiers with compressor or expander means alone not involving a
    complete compander system are classified herein.  Such subcombinations
    involving connection or maintenance of a predetermined condition of the
    transmission line are classified in Class 333.  Where such connection is of
    an amplifier condition classification is herein.

    XIV.    SYSTEMS INCLUDING PILOT CONTROL MEANS:

    Amplifiers including a pilot control frequency component in the signal
    source which is used to control the amplifier are classified herein.

    TRANSMISSION LINES COMBINED WITH PILOT CONTROL

    Such subject matter is classified in Class 333, Wave Transmission Lines and
    Networks, subclass 15, when provided with an auxiliary line for the pilot
    control signal and in Class 333, subclass 16 for those systems in which the
    pilot control signal is combined with the signal to be  transmitted.
    Subject matter involving a combination for Class 333, subclass 16 with an
    amplifier which is controlled must correct or maintain a predetermined
    condition of the transmission line for classification therein, otherwise
    classification is herein.

    PILOT FREQUENCY CONTROLLED REPEATERS

    Such subject matter is classified.

    XV.     GAS OR VAPOR TUBE CIRCUITS IN OTHER CLASSES:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, and the classes
    specified in the Notes thereto for gas or vapor tube circuits.

    XVI.    TRAVELING WAVE TUBES AND CIRCUITS:

    Classification of traveling wave tube amplifiers is in this class when it
    includes the output or load circuit. Classification otherwise where no load
    or output circuit is claimed and the circuit means which may be involved
    are an integral part of the tube, is in Class 315, Electric Lamp and
    Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclasses 3.5, 3.6 or 39.3.  Oscillators
    including a traveling wave tube are classified in Class 331, Oscillators,
    subclass 82, Traveling wave type.

    XVII.   AMPLIFIER AND A DETECTOR OR SUPERHETERODYNE CONVERTER AND AN
    AMPLIFIER:

    Such subject matter involves a subcombination peculiar to radio receivers
    and is classified with radio receivers in Class 455, Telecommunications,
    subclasses 130+ or in Class 329, Demodulators, appropriate subclasses for a
    demodulator with amplifier.  When an amplifier and a detector are claimed
    and the detector is claimed merely as a means to develop a control signal
    and not for the purpose of detecting the intelligence signal as a function
    of a receiver, classification is herein and not in receivers.  Where the
    same tube serves both as a detector and an amplifier classification is not
    in this class but in the appropriate subclass in Class 455,
    Telecommunications, particularly subclass 335, or Class 329, Demodulators,
    depending again upon the type of demodulator involved. Class 455 includes
    such combinations which comprise a reflex amplifier (subclass 342) or a
    superregenerative detector (subclasses 336+).

    XVIII.  VOLTAGE MAGNITUDE CONTROL SYSTEMS:

    Voltage magnitude control (for single source energy systems) such as line
    voltage control, etc., in general, is classified in Class 323, (see the
    class definitions) and includes current or load regulation, current and
    voltage limiting systems, transformer and impedance systems for the
    purpose.  See IV above.

    XIX.  SYSTEM OR DEVICES CLOSELY RELATED
      TO OR ANALOGOUS TO AMPLIFIERS:



    Class 307,      Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems,
    subclasses 401+, nonlinear reactor systems. See VI and VII above.

    Class 331,      Oscillators, are in the most common types, in a sense,
    merely positive feedback amplifiers without an input, and therefore the
    circuits, structures, and problems are often closely related to those of
    amplifiers. See IX and X above.

    Class 332,      Modulators, appear, usually as no more than amplifiers
    which have an input source in addition to the signal (i.e., the carrier).

    Class 505,      Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 150+ for high temperature (Tc  30 K) superconducting device; and
    particularly subclass 180 for maser-type amplifying device, or subclasses
    191+ for semiconductor device.

    XX.     SYSTEMS UTILIZING AMPLIFIERS:

    The great majority of electrical control or signaling systems utilize
    amplifiers such as are classified herein or closely related devices (as
    where the waveform of the input is not retained in the output).  Such
    systems include, also, mechanical systems with electrical control means.
    In view of such widespread use no attempt is made to list the classes of
    all or a large number of systems utilizing amplifiers.  However, the
    following include systems involving amplifiers in combinations where the
    amplifier is invariably present, involve few additional elements, or
    wherein the amplifier is usually an important component of the combination;

    250,    Radiant Energy, appropriate subclasses, for the detection of
    invisible radiant energy or the testing of materials by invisible radiant
    energy, subclasses 200+ for photocell circuits and apparatus, particularly
    subclass 214 for photocell controlled circuits including electron tube
    circuits.

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses for a demodulator with
    amplifier.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    109+ for light wave communications.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 196+ for
    electric circuits including transistors, subclasses 199+ and 205 for
    electric circuits including space discharge devices combined with relays as
    the load therefor, and subclass 204 for electric circuits including
    saturable reactors, wherein the transistor, space discharge, or saturable
    reactor circuit may be an amplifier.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    111+ for miscellaneous systems which include combinations of amplifier and
    loud speaker or microphone and amplifier. Also distribution systems,
    involving a central broadcasting system from which programs are distributed
    to local stations where the programs are amplified and reproduced, are
    classified in Class 381, subclasses 111+.  See IX and X above.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 130+ for radio receivers which may
    be limited to an amplifier and a detector; subclass 351 for portable radio
    receivers.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 150+ for high temperature (Tc  30 K) superconducting device; and
    particularly subclass 180 for maser-type amplifying device, or subclasses
    191+ for semiconductor device.

    XXI.  ELEMENTS OR CIRCUIT NETWORKS COM
       MONLY USED IN AMPLIFIERS OR AMPLIFI
      ER SYSTEMS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 32+ for
    shielding means.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    for active solid- state devices, per se.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses for the
    structure of vacuum tubes and gas and vapor tubes.  See the class
    definition of Class 313.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclasses 24+, for passive wave filters and coupling
    networks.  See XII above.

    334,    Tuners, appropriate subclasses for tuners, per se.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for the structure of
    transformers and inductor devices, generally.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 271+ and
    500+ for capacitor structure, per se.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 150+ for high temperature (Tc  30 K) superconducting device; and
    particularly subclass 180 for maser-type amplifying device, or subclasses
    191+ for semiconductor device.

    XXII.  INDEX TO CLASSES REFERRED TO IN
       PREVIOUS SECTIONS:

                                    Section No.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors
    and Insulators

            subs. 32+, shielding means      XXI

    250,    Radiant Energy  XVII

            sub.    200, Photocell Con-
    trolled  Circuit        XX

            sub.    214, Photocell Con-
    trolled Electron
    Tube Circuits   XX

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices
    (e.g., Transistors, Solid-
    State Diodes)   XXI

    307,    Electrical Transmission
    or Interconnection Systems

            subs.    401+, Nonlinear
    Reactor Systems
    (e.g., Saturable)       VI,VII,XIX

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge
    Devices, for structure of
    vacuum and gas and vapor
    tubes           XXI

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge
    Devices:  Systems       XV
    subs.    3.5, 3.6, and 39.3,
    Traveling Wave Tubes    XVI

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply
    or Regulation Systems   IV,VI,                                  XVIII

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring
    and Testing
    subs.    123+, Amplifiers
    With Meters     XX

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical
    Nonlinear Devices, Circuits,
    and Systems     VIII, XIX
    sub. 309+,
    Miscellaneous
    Limiting Circuits       IV
    sub. 100+,
    Miscellaneous
    Wave Conversion         V
    sub. 291+,
    Miscellaneous Pulse
    Generators      V
    sub. 365+,
    Miscellaneous
    Gating Circuits V

    329,    Demodulators    XVII, XX

    331,    Oscillators     IX, X, XIX
    sub.    82, Traveling Wave
    Tube Type       XVI

    332,    Modulators      XIX

    333,    Wave Transmission
    Lines and Networks      XII
    sub.    14, Amplitude
    Compression and
    Expansion Systems,
    (i.e., Companders)      XIII
    sub.    16, Pilot Current
    Controlled Systems      XIV
    subs.    24+, Coupling Net-
    works           XXI
    subs.    213+, Negative
    Resistance and/or
    Reactance Networks
    of the Active Element Type      III

    334,    Tuners          XXI

    336,    Inductor Devices        XXI

    359,    Optics:  Systems
    (Including Communication)
    and Elements, subs. 109+
    for light wave communication     XX

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical
    Systems and Devices
    subs. 196+ for transitors       XX
    subs. 199+ for space dis-
    charge devices  XX
    sub.    204 for saturable
    reactors                XX
    sub.    205 for space discharge
    devices         XX
    subs.   271+ for capacitor
    structure               XXI
    subs.    500+ for electrolytic
    capacitor structure     XXI

    364,    Electrical Computers and
    Data Processing Systems,
    subclass 864 for magnetic
    amplifiers.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal
    Processing Systems and Devices,
    subs. 111+, miscellaneous
    systems, including combi-
    nations of microphone
    and amplifier, amplifier
    and loudspeaker, and
    wired broadcast
    distribution systems    IX, X, XX
    subs. 170+, Repeaters
    (i.e Two-Way Amplifiers)        XI, XIXsub.170.4, Pilot FrequencyControlled
       XIV

    455,    Telecommunications
    subs. 130+, receivers   XVII, XX
    sub. 335, plural function tube  XVII
    sub. 336, Superregenerative
    detector                XVII
    sub. 343, Reflex amplifier      XVII
    sub. 351, Portable      XX

    505,    Superconductor Technology:      XIX,
    Apparatus, Material,    XX,
    Process         XXI



CLS 330/1
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the amplifier is combined
    with other devices or structures having an added purpose or independent
    utility, other than to perfect the amplifier, and in which the utility of
    the art device is not destroyed by removal of the amplifier and which
    combination is not provided for elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  An example of art classifiable in this class and subclass is
    an amplifier combined with an automobile accelerator pedal to control the
    volume of the amplifier.  The removal of the amplifier does not destroy the
    utility of the accelerator pedal (as it would in case of a radio receiver
    which included the amplifier or a part thereof).

    (2)     Note.  Subject matter in which a source is claimed by name only as
    a specific art device, as for example, a microphone, is classified with the
    specific art device and not with amplifiers.  Subject matter, in which the
    signal source device may be broadly claimed, not by name, but by some
    distinctive identifying feature thereof as, where a microphone source is
    claimed as a "means for converting sound signals", is not classified with
    amplifiers, but with the distinctive art device.

    (3)     Note.  The terms generator or oscillator in claims, where they
    appear as sources of signal energy without further qualification except by
    their electrical characteristics such as impedance, reactance, etc., are
    treated as generalized sources of signal energy and classification is with
    amplifiers except where specific details of the generator or oscillator are
    claimed; in such cases, classification is with the type of generator
    claimed or with oscillators in Class 331.

    (4)     Note.  Where the load is claimed, even broadly, or by name only as
    a specific electrical art device, as for example, a loudspeaker,
    classification is not in this class, but with the load art device claimed.
    Where characteristics of the load device are claimed, which are peculiar to
    the disclosed electrical art device or to a specific type of electrical art
    device, classification is with the load art device established in the claim.

    (5)     Note.  Subject matter wherein general electrical characteristics of
    the load are claimed, as for example, "a load having a variable impedance",
    is classified in this class.


CLS 330/2
TXT Subject matter under the class definition involving means or methods of
    testing amplifiers as set forth in the class definition and/or amplifiers
    as set forth in the class definition combined with indicating means to show
    a condition of the amplifier.

    (1)     Note.  Amplifiers combined with a meter or indicating means not
    involving a condition of the amplifier but where the amplifier is merely an
    instrument in facilitating such indication, are not classified in this
    class and subclass but in the appropriate subclass of Class 324,
    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing or Class 340, Communications:
    Electrical, unless they are specialized for use in the testing of a
    specific electronic art device in which case, classification is generally
    with the specific electrical art device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for
    electrical measuring and testing.  See (1) Note, above.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, appropriate subclasses for systems
    with signal or alarm indicating means particularly subclasses 500+.  See
    (1) Note, above.


CLS 330/3
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including at least two amplifying
    devices each of which is of a type different from the other.

    (1)     Note.  When each of the amplifying devices is of a type which is
    classified in different subclasses of this class providing for such
    different types of amplifying devices, such as subclass 8 for saturable
    reactor type and subclass 44 for electron beam type, classification is in
    this subclass. Where the different types of amplifying devices are types
    provided for in coordinate subclasses indented under a major genus type,
    classification is not in this subclass, but in the appropriate subclasses
    indented under subclass 250.  Diverse type vacuum tube amplifying devices
    combined in an amplifier are classified in subclass 3 when each of the
    diverse type amplifying devices is of a type separately provided for by a
    subclass in this class, as for example, a traveling wave type amplifier
    classified in subclass 43 and an electron beam tube amplifying device
    classified in subclasses 44+.  Where different types of vacuum tubes are
    involved, only one of which is provided for by a separate subclass,
    classification is not in subclass 3 but in the subclass providing for an
    amplifier having an amplifier device of that type.  Combinations of vacuum
    tube and gaseous tube amplifiers are classified herein.  Diode vacuum tube
    amplifiers combined with any other type of vacuum tube amplifier, whether
    provided for as a separate subclass or not, are classified herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150,    for cascaded vacuum tube amplifiers with amplifier devices having
    different characteristics (both amplifying devices being of the same
    general type).

    299+,   for transistor amplifiers including combined diverse type
    semiconductors.

    310,    for plural cascaded stage transistor amplifiers including
    transistors having different characteristics.


CLS 330/4
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the amplifying device
    combines (1) a substance having the characteristic that certain molecular,
    atomic, or nuclear particles thereof are capable of excitation to a higher
    energy level; (2) means to raise such particles to the higher energy level
    state; (3) means for applying an electrical signal to the amplifying
    device; and (4) means for securing the amplified output therefrom, whereby
    the aforementioned excited particles in undergoing a change from the higher
    to a lower energy state emit radiation which is released by the applied
    electrical signal, thereby to amplify it.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 251 for devices for producing and
    propagating a unidirectional stream of neutral molecules or atoms through a
    vacuum, usually at thermal velocity and including means to excite the
    molecules or atoms at a resonant frequency.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 300+ for electrical
    measuring and testing means involving nuclear induction, which refers to
    operation on a nuclear resonant principle similar to that employed in
    masers.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous circuits which may
    utilize a maser type circuit.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 94.1 for oscillators of the molecular or
    particle resonant type, e.g., maser type.

    332,    Modulators, appropriate subclasses for modulators of the molecular
    or particle resonant type, e.g., maser type.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 24 for gyrator type
    wave transmission coupling means, including devices operating on a
    molecular or nuclear resonant principle similar to that employed in masers.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    333+ for optical or quasi-optical maser-type amplifying devices.


CLS 330/4.5
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including (1) a nonlinear
    reactance, (2) means for applying an input signal frequency to said
    nonlinear reactance, (3) means for effectively applying a pumping frequency
    higher than said signal frequency to said nonlinear reactance, and (4)
    means for abstracting the amplified output therefrom, whereby sum and
    difference frequencies are produced, one or both of which (but usually the
    difference frequency [called the idler frequency] reacting with the pumping
    frequency to produce energy at the signal frequency which is combined in
    phase with the input signal.

    (1)     Note.  While the pumping frequency is higher than the signal
    frequency, the pumping frequency may be derived from a lower frequency
    source, for example, as a harmonic of the lower frequency source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for an amplifier with a capacitive amplifying device.

    8,      for an amplifier with a saturable reactor type amplifying device.

    53+,    for an amplifier with a distributed parameter coupling means.


CLS 330/4.6
TXT Subject matter under subclass 4.5 including structure for propagating
    energy of the various frequencies in interacting relationship with the
    nonlinear reactance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for maser type amplifying devices.

    5,      for solid element wave propagating devices generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnections Systems, subclass 424
    for nonoptical parametric amplifier frequency converters, per se.

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 117+ or 144+ for capacitive frequency or
    phase modulators, respectively, and subclass 173 for magnetic amplitude
    modulators.

    333,    Wave, Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 138+, for delay
    networks.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    326+ for parametric optical frequency translators.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 313+ for receivers with frequency
    modification or conversion which may use parametric-type means; and
    subclass 336 for superrangenerative receivers.


CLS 330/4.7
TXT Subject matter under subclass 4.6 wherein the propagating structure is an
    electron beam device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43+,    for travelling wave amplifiers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 3.5+ and
    39.3, for miscellaneous travelling wave tube systems.


CLS 330/4.8
TXT Subject matter under subclass 4.5 wherein the nonlinear reactance is of the
    gyromagnetic type.

    (1)     Note.  The term "gyromagnetic" as applied to material designates
    magnetically polarized material (e.g., ferrites, garnets, and ionized
    gases) having unpaired spin systems which exhibit significant precessional
    motion in an orthogonal R.F. field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.6,    for travelling wave type amplifiers involving gyromagnetic
    nonlinear reactance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 1.1 and 24.1+, for
    gyromagnetic plural channel systems and coupling networks respectively.


CLS 330/4.9
TXT Subject matter under subclass 4.5 wherein the nonlinear reactance is of the
    semiconductor type (e.g., a diode).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.6,    for travelling wave type parametric amplifiers whose nonlinear
    reactance is of the semiconductor type.

    250+,   for semiconductor amplifiers generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous nonlinear circuits.


CLS 330/5
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the amplifying device
    comprises a solid-state element wave propagating means having associated
    means, such as a distributed parameter network, for coupling a signal wave
    to be amplified to the wave propagating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4+,     for amplifiers having amplifying devices of the maser type
    including those with solid element wave propagating means.

    4.6,    for travelling wave type parametric amplifiers which may utilize
    solid-state wave propagating means.

    43,     for traveling wave tube amplifiers.

    45,     for amplifiers having amplifier devices of the electron beam type
    which include an electrode coupled to a cavity resonator.

    53+,    for amplifiers with distributed parameter type coupling.

    250+,   for amplifiers having amplifying devices of the semiconductive type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems,  appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous circuits which may
    include subject matter similar to the amplifiers classified in this
    subclass.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 94.1 for oscillators of the laser type which
    may include solid element wave propagating means.

    332,    Modulators, appropriate subclasses for modulators of the laser type
    which may include solid element wave propagating means.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclass 24 for distributed parameter transmission coupling
    means including coupling means involving solid element wave propagating
    means.

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, appropriate subclasses for laser type
    oscillators.


CLS 330/5.5
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5 wherein the solid-state means is adapted to
    propagate and amplify signal waves in the form of acoustic, ultrasonic or
    hypersonic elastic waves of the phonon  type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclass .5 for mechanical travelling wave structures
    for propagating acoustic wave.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 424
    for nonoptical parametric amplifier frequency converters which may employ
    acoustic waves (e.g., Raman or Brillcuin devices).

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 311+
    piezoelectric devices in general which may propagate elastic waves of the
    phonon type.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 138+ for wave
    delay networks and subclasses 187+ for wave filters utilizing
    piezoelelectric wave propagating elements.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    326+ for parametric optical frequency translators.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices, for
    compressional wave systems or transducers which may employ solid element
    wave propagating devices of the sonic or supersonic type.


CLS 330/6
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the amplifier includes
    means for applying or varying a magnetic field, and an electrical resistor
    subjected to such field or varying field in such manner that the value of
    the resistance transverse to the magnetic field changes, thus comprising a
    Hall Effect Device; such Hall Effect Device may comprise the amplifying
    device, per se, or may be included as a unilateralizing means (gyrator) to
    insure unilateral operation of the amplifier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for amplifiers having saturable reactor amplifying devices.

    60,     for amplifiers having magnetostrictive means in the amplifying
    device.

    62,     for amplifiers having a magnetoresistive type amplifying device.

    63,     for amplifiers having a magnetic means type amplifying device not
    elsewhere provided for.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 511 for miscellaneous circuits utilizing a Hall effect
    type element.

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses for demodulators including a
    Hall effect element.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 24 for Hall effect
    type gyrators, and subclasses 213+ for two terminal negative resistance
    networks.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 32 for electrical resistors whose
    resistance value changes in response to a magnetic field including
    resistors responding in accordance with the Hall effect.


CLS 330/7
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the amplifying device is
    a nonlinear capacitor.

    (1)     Note.  A nonlinear capacitor is one in which for any frequency, the
    ratio of the voltage across the capacitor to the current flowing through
    it, is not linear.

    (2)     Note.  To be classified in this class the output signal must be a
    substantial replica of the input signal.  Subject matter involving
    nonlinear capacitors in which the power supply, which is controlled by the
    signal, is a.c. must include filter means claimed to eliminate the a.c.
    power supply from the output signal or classification is in Class 307,
    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 40+.
    However subject matter involving nonlinear capacitor amplifying devices
    wherein an a.c., power supply is used and claiming a demodulator will be
    classified herein even where the output filter is not claimed, if the
    filter is disclosed.  It will be assumed to be part of the claimed
    demodulator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for amplifiers having saturable reactor type amplifying devices.

    10,     for amplifiers of the modulator-demodulator type.

    86,     for signal feedback amplifiers with variable impedance controlled
    by a separate path.

    95      and 110, for signal feedback amplifiers with nonlinear impedance
    means.

    143,    for amplifiers having a thermally responsive impedance.

    144+,   for amplifiers having a variable impedance for the signal channel
    controlled by a separate control path.

    164,    for amplifiers having an electronic tube or diode in an interstage
    coupling means.

    174,    for amplifiers having an electromechanical transducer (e.g.,
    piezoelectric crystal) in an interstage coupling means.

    183,    for amplifiers having a nonlinear device in an interstage d.c.
    coupling means.

    250+,   for amplifiers having semiconductor type amplifying devices,
    particularly subclass 287.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 401+
    for nonlinear reactor systems.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 271+ and
    500+ for capacitors, per se.


CLS 330/8
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the amplifying device is
    a saturable magnetic core with at least means to apply an electrical signal
    and an a.c. power supply to at least one winding thereon; the input signal
    which may be d.c. or a.c. is applied to the signal winding to control an
    a.c. power supply applied to the power winding, which may be the same
    winding or a different winding.

    (1)     Note.  To be classified in this class the signal output of the
    amplifier must be a substantial replica of the input signal.  Therefore
    subject matter involving saturable reactors without filter means is not
    classified in this class with amplifiers, but is classified in Class 323,
    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 249, 302, 310,
    and 329.  Subject matter involving saturable reactors claiming a
    "demodulator" and disclosing a filter therewith but not claiming the filter
    are assumed to claim the filter as part of the demodulator and are
    classified herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for amplifiers having capacitive type amplifying devices including
    "saturable capacitive reactor" means.

    10,     for modulator-demodulator type amplifiers.

    60,     for amplifiers having magnetostrictive means.

    62,     for amplifiers having magnetoresistive type amplifying devices.

    63,     for amplifiers having magnetic means amplifying devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 416+
    for amplifiers using nonlinear reactors with a nonlinear output signal.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 249,
    302, 310, and 329 for saturable inductive reactor circuits to control
    voltage magnitude.  See (1) Note above.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 155+ for the structure of saturable
    inductive regulators of the static type.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 204 for
    saturable reactors with electric relay or electromagnet load.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 864 for
    computers using magnetic amplifiers.


CLS 330/9
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including a periodic switching
    means common to the input and output circuits of the amplifier.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes essentially four types of subject
    matter containing a periodic switch, as follows:

    (1)     Where the signal is chopped to get a.c. which is fed to the
    amplifier and the amplifier output is chopped to get a d.c. output (this
    subject matter is the same as is classified in subclass 10 below except
    that the modulator and demodulator are of the chopper type).

    (2)     The signal to the main amplifier is not chopped but a portion to
    another amplifier is combined with a signal from the output of the first
    amplifier and the two are chopped to get an a.c. signal which is used to
    develop a corrective signal for the main amplifier.

    (3)     The input is compared to the output by a periodic switch to develop
    a correction signal, generally for drift correction.

    (4)     The input and output signal are combined and then chopped and put
    into the main amplifier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83,     for push-pull signal feedback amplifiers having a d.c. feedback
    path.

    97,     for signal feedback amplifiers having a d.c. feedback path.

    121,    for push-pull amplifiers having d.c. interstage coupling.

    125,    for plural amplifiers having a d.c. and an a.c. channel.

    159,    161, 163, and 181+, for d.c. coupling involved in the interstage
    coupling.


    187     and 191, for d.c. input coupling.

    194     and 198, for d.c. output coupling.


CLS 330/10
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including means for modulating
    the signal, which is usually d.c. or low frequency a.c. amplifying means,
    and means to restore the original signal, eliminating any carrier frequency
    components.

    (1)     Note.  The means for eliminating the carrier need not be
    specifically claimed to be classified in this class if such means are
    disclosed.  As for example, where a demodulator is claimed alone, and a
    filter means to eliminate the carrier is disclosed the filter need not be
    claimed for classification herein.  The claimed demodulator will be assumed
    to include the filter in such cases.

    (2)     Note.  Where the modulator and demodulator are of the chopper type
    see subclass 9 above.

    (3)     Note.  Including in the "means for modulating the signal" are
    chopper means to convert the signal to pulsating direct current or
    alternating current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for amplifiers having a capacitive type amplifying device including
    those which modulate and demodulate the signal.

    8,      for amplifiers having saturable reactor type amplifying devices
    including those which modulate and demodulate the signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 118, for measuring
    systems involving modulation-demodulation.

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses, for demodulator circuits.

    332,    Modulators, appropriate subclasses, for modulator circuits.


CLS 330/11
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including means to restore a d.c.
    component to the signal, usually by means of a d.c. bias source and a
    rectifier circuit supplied to the control grid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140,    for control of the input or gain control electrode including a
    rectifier in the bias circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 306+ for miscellaneous circuits with amplitude control
    means.

    348,    Television, subclasses 691+ for television systems including D.C.
    reinsertion circuits.


CLS 330/41
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the amplifying device
    includes electrodes in a gas or vapor medium and which device depends upon
    ionization of a gas or vapor for its operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclasses 161, 163 and 567+ for gas or vapor tubes, per se.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses, for circuits including gas or vapor tubes as the ultimate load
    device.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous electronic tube circuits
    including gas or vapor tubes with a control electrode, controlled in
    operation.


CLS 330/42
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the amplifying device is
    a vacuum tube including a secondary electron emissive electrode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 103+, 377, 379,
    399+, and 532+ for vacuum tubes, per se, having secondary emissive
    electrode.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, Systems subclasses 5.11+, 11,
    12.1, 39.63 for circuits including vacuum tubes as load devices having a
    secondary emissive electrode.


CLS 330/43
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the amplifying device is
    of the vacuum tube type including means for generating an electron stream
    or beam, and having additional means therein for propagating an
    electromagnetic wave or component thereof at a velocity reduced from the
    free space velocity of the wave and propagated in proximity of the electron
    stream or beam, permitting exchange of energy between the electrons and the
    electromagnetic wave.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for amplifiers having a solid element wave propagating amplifying
    device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, Systems, subclasses 3.5+ and
    39.3 for traveling wave type tubes involved as the load device in
    miscellaneous circuits.  See the search notes under subclasses 3.5 and 39.3.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 82 for traveling wave tube type oscillators.


CLS 330/44
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the amplifying device is
    a vacuum tube provided with means to form the electric space discharge into
    a restricted beam or ray, usually pencil-like.

    (1)     Note.  Means to control the electron trajectory of the electrons
    emitted from the cathode (as in magnetrons which are classified in subclass
    47 below) is not regarded as an electron beam forming means required for
    classification in this and indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  Subject matter broadly claiming so-called "beam power tubes"
    are not classified in this subclass but are classified below in the
    appropriate subclass for the circuit involved.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for amplifiers having secondary electron emission tube amplifying
    devices.

    43,     for amplifiers having traveling wave type amplifying devices. 308,
    for amplifiers including an electron beam forming means and a semiconductor
    element as a target means therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 364+ for
    cathode-ray tubes, per se.  See the search notes of Class 313.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 1+ for
    cathode- ray tubes with means to supply electric current or potential
    thereto and/or cathode ray tubes structurally combined with a circuit
    element.  See the search notes of Class 315.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 600 for miscellaneous circuits having a particular beam
    tube structure.

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses and particularly subclass 368
    for an amplitude demodulator employing an electron discharge device of
    three or more electrodes.


CLS 330/45
TXT Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein at least one electrode is coupled
    to a cavity resonator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for amplifiers having vacuum tube amplifying devices with
    distributed parameter characteristics.

    56,     for amplifiers with cavity resonator coupling means generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 83 for multicavity beam tube (Klystron)
    oscillators.


CLS 330/46
TXT Subject matter under subclass 44 including means to deflect the electron
    beam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for amplifiers having gas or vapor tube amplifying devices
    including those having means to deflect the ionized gas or vapor stream.

    65,     for amplifiers including vacuum tube amplifying devices having
    distinctive structural characteristics or specific structural details not
    elsewhere provided for in the schedule.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 421+ for
    cathode-ray tubes, per se, having electron stream or beam deflecting means.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 364+ for
    cathode- ray tubes with means for deflecting the cathode ray.


CLS 330/47
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the amplifying device is
    of the vacuum tube type including means for magnetically influencing the
    electric discharge in the device, and not provided for above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for amplifiers having a gas or vapor type amplifying device
    including those with magnetic means to deflect the ionized stream of gas or
    vapor particles.

    42,     for amplifiers having secondary emission tube amplifying devices
    including those with magnetic means.

    43,     for traveling wave type tube amplifiers which may include magnetic
    means.

    44+,    for electron beam tube amplifying devices which may include
    magnetic means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 153+ for discharge
    device combined with a magnetic device.  See the Notes and search notes of
    Class 313.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 39.51+ for
    magnetrons.  See the Notes and search Notes and search Notes of Class 315.

    329,    Demodulators, subclass 322 for a magnetron type frequency modulator
    and subclass 354 for a magnetron type amplitude modulator.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 86+ for magnetron oscillators.


CLS 330/48
TXT Subject matter under subclass 47 wherein the input signal is coupled to the
    means for magnetically influencing the electric discharge.


CLS 330/49
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the amplifying device is
    of the vacuum tube type and includes within the vacuum tube an electrode or
    other element having distributed parameter impedance characteristics.

    (1)     Note.  Distributed parameter characteristics as used in the
    definition above include long lines and long line elements such as lecher
    lines, parallel transmission lines in general, concentric lines, wave
    guides, cavity resonators, tuned transmission lines, etc., which possess
    distributed capacitance and inductance.  For the definition of such means,
    see the class definition for Class 333, Wave Transmission Lines and
    Networks. Inherent capacity or inductance as for example between electrodes
    or of a lead inside the tube when made use of as a lumped reactance circuit
    element is classified in the appropriate subclass involving the circuit;
    neutralization by feedback is classified in subclasses 76+ below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for amplifiers having a maser type amplifying device which may
    include distributed parameter impedance structure.

    5,      for amplifiers having a solid element wave propagating amplifier
    device.

    43,     for amplifiers including traveling wave tubes.

    45,     for amplifiers of the type having an electron beam tube amplifying
    device with an electrode coupled to a cavity resonator.

    53+,    for amplifiers with distributed parameter type coupling.  See the
    search notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 39+ for a
    vacuum tube combined with distributed parameter type transmission means
    structure, with the tube as the load device.  See the notes and search
    notes thereunder.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 593 for miscellaneous circuits with distributed
    parameters.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    333+ for laser amplifiers.


CLS 330/50
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including in addition to the
    amplifying device of the vacuum tube type, a similar vacuum tube, with the
    cathode unheated, so that the additional tube does not serve as an active
    element but merely presents impedance relations in the circuit similar to
    those of the amplifying device vacuum tube, usually for neutralizing the
    effects of the amplifying device interelectrode impedances.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76+,    for amplifiers having signal feedback means to compensate for
    inter-electrode impedance.  See the notes and search notes thereunder.


CLS 330/51
TXT Subject matter under the class definition combined with switch means, which
    may be of the electromechanical or electronic tube type (vacuum, gas, or
    vapor tubes), to disable or discontinue the operation of the amplifier
    automatically in response to a predetermined condition.

    (1)     Note.  Miscellaneous gating circuits are classified in Class 327,
    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and Systems,
    subclasses 365+ unless significant details of an amplifier as classified in
    the class definition of this class are claimed when classification is in
    this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65+,    for specific structure involved in the amplifier including
    structure involving switching means.

    127+,   for amplifiers having means to control power supply or bias voltage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses,
    for switches, per se.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 112+
    for electrical transmission or interconnection switching systems.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 365+ for miscellaneous gating circuits.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    electrical systems and devices with safety and  protection means including
    those involving disabling switching means; subclasses 139+ for circuits for
    electric relays.


CLS 330/52
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including means for control of
    the amplifier which may be for control of the bias of an amplifier device
    electrode or of a variable impedance for the signal channel, wherein the
    signal input includes a component of a particular frequency not involved in
    the signal for signal purpose, which is selected by a means in or
    associated with the amplifier and applied to the control means or used to
    develop a control voltage applied to the control means.

    (1)     Note.  See XIV of the class definitions above for other systems
    utilizing pilot frequency control.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85,     for signal feedback amplifiers having an amplifier in the feedback
    path.

    86,     for signal feedback amplifiers having a variable impedance in the
    feedback path controlled by a separate control path.

    96,     for signal feedback amplifiers combined with control of bias of the
    signal amplifier.

    127+,   appropriate subclasses, for control of bias or power supply,
    particularly subclasses 130 and 132.  See the search notes under subclass
    127.  See also (2) Note under subclass 130.

    143,    for amplifiers having a thermally responsive impedance which may be
    controlled by a separate means.

    144+,   for amplifiers having a variable impedance which may be controlled
    by a separate control path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, appropriate subclasses for
    pilot current controlled transmission line systems, generally.  See the
    note and search notes.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 491 and 500 for a multiplexing
    system using pilot control.


CLS 330/53
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the signal energy is
    coupled to or from the amplifying device by means including distributed
    parameter wave transmission means; or circuit networks of lumped parameters
    or impedances designed to simulate the impedance characteristics of
    distributed parameter wave transmission means.

    (1)     Note.  Distributed parameter transmission means as used in the
    definition above include long lines and long line elements such as
    telephone and telegraph lines, lecher lines, parallel transmission lines,
    in general, concentric lines, wave guides, cavity resonators, tuned
    transmission lines, etc., which possess distributed capacitance and
    inductance.  For the definition of such means and "lumped parameter or
    impedance" means as used above, see the class definition for Class 333,
    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks.  Subject matter involving inherent
    capacity or inductance, as for example, between electrodes, or of a lead
    inside a tube when made use of as a lumped reactance circuit element, is
    classified in the appropriate subclass involving the circuit.
    Neutralization by feedback is classified in subclasses 76+ below.

    (2)     Note.  Subject matter including distributed parameter circuit
    coupling means when combined with a special type of amplifying device is
    classified with the special type of device and not in this subclass.  For
    example, subclass 43, for amplifiers having traveling wave type tubes,
    which include distributed parameter type delay lines, or wave guides.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for amplifiers having plural diverse type amplifying devices.

    4,      for amplifiers having a maser type amplifying device.

    5,      for amplifiers which have solid element wave propagating amplifying
    devices.

    43,     for amplifiers having a traveling wave type tube amplifying device.

    45,     for electron beam tube amplifying devices coupled to a cavity
    resonator.

    49,     for amplifiers having an amplifying device of the vacuum tube type
    having distributed parameter characteristics.

    107,    for signal feedback amplifiers having phase shift means in the loop
    path.

    157+,   for amplifier interstage coupling.

    185+,   for amplifier input coupling.

    192+,   for amplifier output coupling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses indented under subclass 3 and subclass 39 for distributed
    parameter impedance devices.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, appropriate subclasses for
    passive distributed impedance devices.  See the notes under the class
    definitions and search notes under the pertinent subclasses of Class 333.


CLS 330/54
TXT Subject matter under subclass 53 wherein a plurality of amplifier devices
    are in a system having a single source and load, include a delay line
    coupling (which may be a distributed parameter line, or an artificial line)
    and wherein the inputs or outputs of such amplifier devices are coupled to
    such delay line means at phase displaced points.

    (1)     Note.  Push-pull amplifiers including delay line coupling, per se,
    are not classified in this subclass but in subclass 55 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124+,   for plural channel amplifiers.  See the notes and search notes
    thereunder.


CLS 330/55
TXT Subject matter under subclass 53 including at least one push-pull stage of
    amplification.

    (1)     Note.  A push-pull stage of amplification for this class requires a
    balanced input to two tubes and a balanced output therefrom; for further
    details of the definition of a push-pull stage of amplification see the
    class definitions of this class, section I.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118+,   for push-pull amplifiers generally. See the notes and search notes
    thereunder.


CLS 330/56
TXT Subject matter under subclass 53 wherein the distributed parameter wave
    transmission means is of the wave guide, cavity concentric line type and is
    resonant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for electron beam tube amplifying device coupled to a cavity
    resonator.

    94      and 109, for signal feedback amplifiers having frequency responsive
    means in the feedback path.

    302+,   for semiconductor amplifiers having frequency responsive in the
    signal transmission path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 83 for multicavity beam tube oscillators
    (Klystrons).

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 219+ for
    distributed parameter type resonators.  See the note and search notes to
    this subclass.


CLS 330/57
TXT Subject matter under subclass 53 wherein there is included as a signal
    coupling means a circuit network of lumped parameters or impedances, which
    is designed to simulate the impedance characteristics of a distributed
    parameter wave transmission means.

    (1)     Note.  Distributed parameter transmission means as used in the
    definition above include long lines and long line elements such as
    telephone and telegraph lines, lecher lines, parallel transmission lines,
    in general, concentric lines, wave guides, cavity resonators, tuned
    transmission lines, etc., which possess distributed capacitance and
    inductance.  For the definition of such means and "lumped parameter or
    impedance" means as used above, see the class definition for Class 333,
    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks.  Subject matter involving inherent
    capacity or inductance, as for example, between electrodes, or of a lead
    inside a tube when made use of as a lumped reactance circuit element, is
    classified in the appropriate subclass involving the circuit.
    Neutralization by feedback is classified in subclasses 76+ below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 23, for passive type
    artificial line, per se; and subclasses 138+, for delay lines.


CLS 330/58
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the amplifying device is
    provided with a rotating dynamoelectric means; and wherein the power supply
    electrical energy source which is controlled, may be developed by
    conversion of mechanical energy to electrical energy by the motion of the
    armature of the dynamoelectric means, the signal current being applied to
    magnetic field means of the device, so that a current is generated which
    varies with the signal current supplied; or the rotating dynamoelectric
    means may act as a motor with the signal current applied to the rotating
    means or the field means, and the rotary motion of the device may be
    utilized as a variable resistor means to effect a control of the power
    supply source.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter, as defined above, is classified herein where
    the device is disclosed as designed to amplify a signal.  Where the system
    is primarily for the conversion of electrical energy into mechanical energy
    or vice versa, or is of general utility, classification is in Class 310,
    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, or Class 322, Electricity:  Single
    Generator Systems, as described in the, SEARCH CLASS, below.  Where the
    structure of a dynamoelectric machine is claimed, alone, classification is
    in the appropriate subclass of Class 310, Electrical Generator or Motor
    Structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 10+ and
    subclasses indented thereunder for the structure of dynamoelectric
    machines, per se, especially indented subclasses 139 and 151 for the
    structure of generators of the rotary amplifier type.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, appropriate subclasses
    particularly subclass 61 for generators with alternating current excitation
    and subclasses 90 and 91+ for rotating amplifiers, especially indented
    subclass 92 for such amplifiers of the crossed-field type.


CLS 330/59
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including means controlled by
    light or activated by light which may be involved in the amplifying device,
    per se, used as a control means, or which may be included in any other part
    of the amplifier.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter wherein light controlled or activated means
    is not a part of the amplifier but is combined therewith (as for example,
    as a photo-electric cell with light means therein feeding a signal current
    to a vacuum tube amplifier) is not classified in this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    308,    for amplifiers having atomic particle or radiant energy impinging
    on a semiconductor amplifying device.  See the search notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+, appropriate subclasses for
    photocell circuits.  See also the notes and search notes under subclass 200.


CLS 330/60
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the amplifying device
    includes magnetostrictive means, that is, means for cyclically changing the
    dimensions of a body of magnetic material under the influence of a
    cyclically changing magnetic field in proximity to the body of magnetic
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174,    for interstage coupling including electromechanical transducer
    means (e.g., piezoelectric crystals).  See the search notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 148+ and 186+ for
    electromechanical transducer delay lines and filters, respectively.  See
    the search notes thereunder.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 20 for inductive devices having
    magnetostrictive (deformable) cores.


CLS 330/61
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the amplifying device, to
    which the electric input signal is applied to control the power supply
    source of electric energy also applied thereto, is a resistive means, which
    may be liquid, solid, or of granular construction.

    (1)     Note.  Not included herein, are other devices having resistive
    properties such as gas tubes, vacuum tubes, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Variable resistors, although including a sensing means
    and/or power supply means, as structure are classified in Class 338,
    Electrical Resistors.  Where such subject matter involves a load circuit,
    classification is herein, when the signal output is "substantially a
    replica of the signal input"; otherwise classification is in the
    appropriate subclass of Class 323, Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation
    Systems.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250+,   for amplifiers with semiconductor type amplifying devices.  See the
    notes and search notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for systems utilizing variable resistance
    devices of the nonlinear conductor type and which systems are not elsewhere
    classifiable.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, appropriate subclasses for the structure of
    resistors, per se, especially subclass 100.  See (1) Note above.


CLS 330/62
TXT Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein the amplifying device resistive
    means is of a type whose resistance value varies in response to a magnetic
    field or a change in magnetic field, and includes means for applying such
    magnetic field to the resistive means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for amplifiers having Hall Effect type amplifying devices.

    60,     for amplifiers having magnetostrictive means.

    63,     for amplifiers having an amplifying device with magnetic means,
    generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 511 for miscellaneous circuits using the Hall effect.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 32 for electrical resistors whose
    resistance value changes in response to a magnetic field or a change in
    magnetic field.


CLS 330/63
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the amplifying device
    includes a magnetic means to control the power supply energy or is involved
    in the structure of the amplifying device in some other manner and which is
    not provided for above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for amplifiers including Hall effect type amplifying devices.

    41,     for amplifiers including gaseous or vapor type amplifying devices
    which may have magnetic means for deflection or other purposes.

    44+,    for amplifiers having electron beam tube amplifying devices which
    may have magnetic means for beam deflection, focusing or other purposes.

    47+,    for amplifiers having magnetically influenced discharge devices
    including magnetrons.

    60,     for amplifiers having magnetostrictive means.

    62,     for amplifiers having magnetoresistive type amplifying devices.


CLS 330/64
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the amplifying device is
    of the vacuum tube type having a positively charged grid (with respect to
    the cathode) immediately adjacent the cathode, which neutralizes the
    negative space charge of the electrons emitted from the cathode so that a
    "virtual cathode" is produced on the side of the space charge grid on which
    the anode is situated, said tube having a normally negatively biased
    control grid next to the space charge grid, to which the signal is coupled,
    and an anode to receive the electrons emitted by the cathode, and which may
    have additional electrodes between the control grid and the anode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65,     for amplifiers including vacuum tubes of special structural
    characteristics.

    199+,   for power or bias voltage supply for amplifiers, see the search
    notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses, for
    discharge device structure, per se.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 524+ for miscellaneous electron tube circuits with
    space charge grid tubes.

    329,    Demodulators, subclasses 368 for an amplitude demodulator using an
    electron discharge device of three or more electrodes.


CLS 330/65
TXT Subject matter under the class definition involving the structure of any
    amplifier circuit element, such as resistors, vacuum tubes, etc., with the
    exception of the structure of transformer elements, or of the structural
    relationships of such elements in the amplifier.

    (1)     Note.  The term structure, herein, refers to the arrangement in
    space of the parts to the whole of the circuit element or of the elements
    comprising the amplifier which includes also the material of which such
    parts are constructed.  The term structure is distinguished from circuit or
    circuit arrangement in that the latter refers to an abstract schematic of
    parts identified broadly by their function in the circuit and arranged
    according to the sequence of signal current flow and not according to
    actual arrangement in space, or construction.

    (2)     Note.  Subject matter involving the structure of transformers is
    not classified in this or indented subclasses but in subclasses 171, 190,
    or 197 below.

    (3)     Note.  Subject matter involving the structure of any amplifying
    device or associated therewith, of the types specifically provided for
    above are not classified in this or indented subclasses but in the
    appropriate subclasses for those types, above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for amplifiers having distributed parameter coupling means
    including the structure of such distributed parameter means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, for the structure of
    electrical insulators and conductors.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, for the structure of
    switches and circuit breakers.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses for the
    structure of electric discharge devices (vacuum tubes and gas tubes), per
    se.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 3+ for
    combined cathode-ray tube and circuit element structure, subclasses 32+ for
    vacuum or gas tubes combined with integral circuit structure or temperature
    modifying means structure where the tube is the load device.

    334,    Tuners, appropriate subclasses for tuners, per se.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for inductor structure.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, for the structure of resistors and rheostats.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 271+ for
    capacitor structure, subclasses 600+ for housing and mounting assemblies
    with plural diverse electrical components, subclasses 679+ for electronic
    systems and devices, and subclasses 500+ for electrolytic capacitors.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for the structure of
    electrical connectors.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 130+ for radio receiver structure in
    general; and subclass 351 for portable radio receivers.


CLS 330/66
TXT Subject matter under subclass 65 wherein the capacitive electrode
    structure, inductor structure, resistors, conductors, connectors and/or
    related circuit elements form a conductive coating on a base.  For example,
    such as is produced by printing, spraying, electro-deposition or similar
    coating method, or by the removal of adherent conducting material from an
    insulating base by etching, grinding, or the like.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  conductors and Insulators, subclass 250+ for
    preformed panel circuit arrangement (e.g., printed circuits).

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 200 for inductor coil structure of the
    printed circuit type.  See the search notes thereunder.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 736+ and
    748+ for printed circuits of the type used in radios.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 55+ for connectors of the
    preformed panel circuit (e.g., printed circuit) type.


CLS 330/67
TXT Subject matter under subclass 65 wherein the structure involved is that of
    a capacitor or capacitive element of the amplifier circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157+,   appropriate subclasses thereunder for interstage coupling circuits
    involving capacitors.

    185+,   appropriate subclasses for input coupling circuits involving
    capacitors.

    192+,   appropriate subclasses for output coupling circuits involving
    capacitors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    334,    Tuners, appropriate subclasses for tuned networks for use in wave
    energy apparatus and comprising inductance and capacitance elements in
    circuit arrangement to form a resonant circuit and in which structure is
    provided for adjusting one or both of these elements for changing the mean
    resonant frequency of the circuit.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 271+ and
    503+ for capacitor structure, per se.


CLS 330/68
TXT Subject matter under subclass 65 wherein the structure is some means for
    shielding at least part of the amplifier from external electric or magnetic
    fields, or such structure to protect parts of the device from undesired
    electric or magnetic fields originating in another part of the device, or
    such structure to prevent the amplifier or a part thereof from emanating
    undesired electric or magnetic fields.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170,    for shielding involved in interstage transformers.

    190,    for shielding involved in input transformers.

    197,    for shielding involved in output transformers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 32+ for
    miscellaneous anti-inductive structures, see particularly subclasses 35+
    for miscellaneous electrical shields and screen structures not elsewhere
    classifiable.  The search notes to subclasses 32+ indicate further fields
    of search for anti-inductive and shielding structures.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 89+
    for anti-inductive means to prevent or modify the coupling between
    electrical systems, particularly subclass 91, for "shielding means".  See
    the search notes thereunder.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 12 for transmission
    line inductive or radiation interference reduction systems which include
    shielding means for the purpose.  See the search notes thereunder.

    334,    Tuners, subclass 85 for a tuner having shielding or housing means.


CLS 330/69
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including at least two sources of
    signal voltage which are combined in the amplifier so that the signal
    output of the amplifier is a linear function of the sum or difference of
    the signal input sources.

    (1)     Note.  Balanced input circuits or balanced output circuits are
    considered single signal sources or loads in this class.  Therefore a
    balanced to unbalanced amplifier is not classified in this subclass but in
    subclass 116 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for series energized vacuum tube amplifiers with plural separate
    signal inputs.

    81,     for signal feedback amplifiers having at least one push-pull stage.

    116,    for amplifiers having balanced-to-unbalanced coupling.  See (1)
    Note above.

    118+,   for amplifiers including a push-pull stage.

    124+,   for amplifiers with plural amplifier channels.

    147,    for amplifiers having plural signal inputs.  See the notes and
    search notes thereunder.

    252+    and 295, for semiconductor amplifiers having plural channels or
    plural inputs.

    301,    for semiconductor amplifiers having balanced-to-unbalanced or
    unbalanced-to-balanced coupling.


CLS 330/70
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including at least two amplifying
    devices of the vacuum tube type, each having at least three electrodes
    including a control grid electrode, wherein at least a portion of the
    anode-cathode power supply current, for one of the amplifying devices,
    flows in series from the power supply source through the space discharge
    path of the other amplifying device, so that the tubes are series energized
    (at least in part) from the power supply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87+,    for cathode impedance feedback, particularly subclass 95.

    128,    for control means for the anode circuit including diode space
    discharge paths in such circuits.

    202,    for anode power supply, generally. See the search notes thereunder.

    293     and 310+, for cascaded semiconductor amplifiers series energized
    for power.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 530+ for miscellaneous electron tube circuits with a
    particular source of power or bias voltage.

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses for a demodulator with
    particular power supply circuitry.


CLS 330/71
TXT Subject matter under subclass 70 wherein power supply current for one or
    more vacuum tube amplifying devices is supplied through at least two
    separate space discharge paths of at least two vacuum tubes.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter including separate and distinct groups of
    pairs of vacuum tubes having separate and distinct series energized space
    discharge paths is also included in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  A series of three or more vacuum tubes arranged in series
    for power supply which comprises a single discharge path for the anode
    power supply is excluded from this subclass.


CLS 330/72
TXT Subject matter under subclass 71 including two pairs of series energized
    tubes wherein one tube of each pair is supplied through its space discharge
    path with anode-cathode power supply current from the power supply source,
    and wherein each of the four vacuum tubes is arranged in the arms of a
    Wheatstone bridge.


CLS 330/73
TXT Subject matter under subclass 70 including at least two separate signal
    output circuits.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148,    for signal amplifiers having plural separate signal outputs.  See
    the notes and search notes thereunder.


CLS 330/74
TXT Subject matter under subclass 70 including at least two separate input
    circuits for each of two series energized vacuum tube amplifying devices.

    (1)     Note.  A balanced (or push-pull) input circuit is treated as a
    single input circuit in this class and not as two separate input circuits.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for sum and difference amplifiers.

    147,    for amplifiers with plural signal inputs.  See the notes and search
    notes thereunder.


CLS 330/75
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein signal feedback circuit
    means are provided to superimpose a portion of the electrical signal output
    energy on the amplifier input signal.

    (1)     Note.  The above amplifier may be any stage or group of stages of a
    cascaded amplifier.

    (2)     Note.  The signal feedback of amplifiers classified in this and
    indented subclasses is distinguished from the type of feedback which may be
    found in amplifier gain control circuits principally in subclasses 129+ in
    that the latter involves the development from the signal, of a d.c. voltage
    which is filtered and smoothed and then applied to an amplifier electrode
    to control the bias thereon; whereas in this and indented subclasses the
    feedback voltage which is applied to the input electrode varies in each
    instant in the same manner that the signal varies and may be in any phase
    relationship with the input signal (i.e., in phase, 1800 out of phase or
    any other phase angle relationship).

    (3)     Note.  The term "loop path" as used in some of the indented
    subclasses refers to the loop formed by the forward signal path from the
    signal input electrode in the circuit to which the signal feedback is
    applied to the output and in addition the signal feedback path from the
    signal output electrode from which the feedback is derived to the signal
    input electrode to which the signal feedback is applied.

    (4)     Note.  In feedback amplifiers there is an impedance shared by the
    input and output circuits which may be a transformer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291+,   for semiconductor amplifiers having signal feedback.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 590 for miscellaneous circuits with signal feedback.

    329,    Demodulators, subclass 319 for feedback used in frequency
    demodulation noise reduction, and subclass 367 for regenerative feedback in
    an amplitude demodulator.

    331,    Oscillators, appropriate subclasses, for oscillator circuits
    utilizing feedback.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for data processing control systems, particularly subclasses
    130+ for closed loop feedback systems.


CLS 330/76
TXT Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein the "signal feedback circuit
    means" are provided from compensating for or nullifying the undesirable
    feedback caused by any inter-electrode impedances of a vacuum tube
    amplifying device.

    (1)     Note.  The undesirable feedback effects are usually caused by
    capacitive inter-electrode impedance although the inter-electrode impedance
    involved may be inductive or conductive (e.g., resistive).

    (2)     Note.  Neutralization of the effects of inter-electrode impedances
    by other than feedback means is not specifically provided for in this and
    indented subclasses but is classified with the specific circuit means
    involved, as for example, in input or output coupling, (subclasses 185+ and
    192+, respectively).  Where the inter-electrode impedance is made use of,
    as for example, where the input (grid-cathode) capacitance is part of the
    tuned input circuit classification is in the appropriate subclass
    considering the inter-electrode capacitance as though it were a
    conventional external circuit element.

    (3)     Note.  Grounded grid amplifiers which inherently mitigate the
    effects of inter-electrode capacitances in vacuum tubes are classified in
    the cathode coupled subclasses for which see subclasses 186 and 193 and the
    search notes thereunder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     for amplifiers having a dummy tube.

    65+,    for the structure of elements of the amplifier circuit including
    vacuum tubes but excluding transformers, per se.

    292,    for semiconductor amplifiers involving compensating feedback for
    inter-electrode impedance (e.g., neutralization).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    329,    Demodulators, subclass 319 for feedback used in frequency
    demodulation noise reduction, and subclass 367 for regenerative feedback in
    an amplitude demodulator.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 175+ for oscillator systems wherein the
    inter-electrode impedance of the active element of the oscillator may be
    compensated for stabilizing the frequency of the generated oscillations.


CLS 330/77
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 including at least one push-pull stage of
    signal amplification.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of a push-pull stage of amplification see
    the class definitions, section I.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81+,    for feedback amplifiers having at least one push-pull stage.  See
    the search notes thereunder.

    118+,   for amplifiers including a push-pull stage.  See search notes
    thereunder. See also (1) Note above.


CLS 330/78
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 wherein the feedback for nullifying or
    mitigating the effects of inter-electrode impedance is applied to or from
    an electrode common to the input and output circuits of an amplifying
    device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87+,    for cathode impedance feedback.  (See the search notes thereunder).

    111,    for signal feedback to or from an auxiliary grid or to the anode.
    See the search notes thereunder.


CLS 330/79
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 wherein the signal feedback for
    compensating for inter-electrode impedance is coupled back to the input
    from the output by means of a transformer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165+,   for amplifiers having interstage transformer coupling.  See the
    search notes thereunder.

    188+,   for amplifier input transformer coupled circuits.  See search notes
    thereunder.

    195+,   for amplifier output transformer coupled networks.  See search
    notes thereunder.


CLS 330/80
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 wherein an inter-electrode capacitance
    which may be between the grid and cathode or anode and grid is compensated
    for by a feedback circuit including an inductance in parallel with such
    inter-electrode capacitance (in the feedback path) and resonant therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109,    for amplifiers having frequency responsive feedback means.


CLS 330/81
TXT Subject matter under subclass 75 including at least one stage of push-pull
    signal amplification.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of a stage of push-pull amplification see
    the class definitions above, section I.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for amplifiers having at least one push-pull stage and including
    feedback means to compensate for inter-electrode impedances.

    118,    for amplifiers having at least one push-pull stage.  See the search
    notes thereunder.  See also (1) Note above.


CLS 330/82
TXT Subject matter under subclass 81 including at least one signal feedback
    means wherein the signal feedback at the amplifier device input means has a
    component in phase with the input signal at this point in the circuit, and
    at least one signal feedback means wherein the signal feedback at the
    amplifier device input means has a component opposite in phase with the
    input signal at the amplifier input to which such feedback is applied.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89,     for cathode-cathode feedback for cascaded adjacent amplifier stages.

    93,     for combined diverse type feedback coupling including positive
    feedback.

    101,    for positive and negative in the same path at different frequencies.

    104,    for positive and negative feedback generally.


CLS 330/83
TXT Subject matter under subclass 81 wherein the signal feedback path from the
    output electrode of the amplifier device from which the signal feedback is
    derived to the input electrode of the amplifying device to which the signal
    feedback is applied has a d.c. conductive path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for amplifiers having periodic switching input-output comparison
    including those with d.c. conductive feedback paths.

    97,     for amplifiers having a d.c. conductive signal feedback path.


CLS 330/84
TXT Subject matter involving plural amplifier channels combined in addition,
    for one or more channels, with signal feedback means as defined in subclass
    75 above.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter wherein the signal feedback is derived from
    the signal output of one amplifier signal channel and applied to the signal
    input of another amplifier signal channel, is classified in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  For the definition of plural amplifier channels see subclass
    124 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124+,   for amplifiers with plural amplifier channels.  See the notes and
    search notes thereunder.


CLS 330/85
TXT Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein the "signal feedback circuit
    means" has an amplifier therein, as defined in the class definition, which
    may have bias control means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86,     for amplifiers having a variable impedance in a signal feedback
    path varied by a separate control path.

    96,     for amplifiers having signal feedback combined with means to
    control the bias of an electrode in the signal amplifier.

    129+,   for amplifiers having control of the input electrode or gain
    control electrode bias.  See the search notes thereunder.

    144+,   for amplifiers having a variable impedance for the signal channel
    controlled by a separate control path. See the search notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    329,    Demodulators, subclass 319 for feedback used in frequency
    demodulation noise reduction, and subclass 367 for regenerative feedback in
    an amplitude demodulator.


CLS 330/86
TXT Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein the "signal feedback circuit
    means" has a variable impedance therein, which is varied by means of a
    control which may be a variable control voltage or a motor control means,
    the control to vary the variable impedance being derived, developed and
    applied by a path separate from that involving the variable impedance and
    the immediately associated signal transmission path.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass excludes "nonlinear" or other impedances in
    the signal feedback path which vary merely by the signal feedback current
    flow therethrough and which are not provided with a "separate" means to
    control the variable impedance.  Such subject matter is classified in
    subclasses 95 and 110 of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143,    for amplifiers having a thermally responsive impedance which may be
    separately controlled.

    144+,   for amplifiers having a variable impedance for the signal channel
    varied by a separate control path. See the search notes thereunder.


CLS 330/87
TXT Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein the "signal feedback circuit
    means" or the "shared impedance of the input and output circuits" or a
    portion thereof is an impedance between the cathode of a vacuum tube
    amplifying device and ground or other convenient electrical potential
    reference plane.

    (1)     Note.  For this and indented subclasses the anode current flowing
    through the "cathode impedance" develops a variable signal potential on the
    cathode which, relative to the grid of the same amplifying device is
    effective as a negative signal feedback in that amplifying device; and
    which may in addition be applied as a signal feedback from such cathode
    impedance to another input electrode of the same amplifying device (or an
    amplifying device of a preceding stage); or to which cathode impedance a
    signal feedback may be applied from an output electrode of the same
    amplifying stage or a following signal amplifying stage.

    (2)     Note.  Subject matter involving cathode coupling, such as cathode
    follower output circuits or where coupling is to the cathode and there is
    normally no cathode impedance signal feedback as in "bootstrap" coupling
    (subclass 156, below) or where no signal feedback function is indicated, is
    not classified in this and indented subclasses but in the appropriate
    cathode coupling subclasses below such as subclasses 186+, for input
    circuit network coupling to the cathode and subclasses 193+, for output
    circuit coupling from the cathode.  See the internal search notes under
    these subclasses for other subclasses of this class involving cathode
    coupling.

    (3)     Note.  The above requirement of (2) Note, for classification in
    this and indented subclasses, namely, that where cathode coupling is
    involved an indication that signal feedback is present in the circuit,
    applies to all of these subclasses except subclass 89 involving cathode
    impedance feedback between adjacent stages.  Where there is
    cathode-to-cathode coupling of adjacent cascaded stages classification is
    in subclass 89 regardless of whether signal feedback is indicated or not.

    (4)     Note.  Subject matter involving a cathode impedance which does not
    develop a signal feedback voltage but is by-passed in such manner that a
    d.c. bias voltage is developed, or due to operating conditions, is
    disclosed, in the case of a single by-passed resistor, as developing a d.c.
    bias there across and not a voltage varying with the signal, are not
    classified in this and indented subclasses but in subclass 142 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70+,    for vacuum tube amplifying device amplifiers series energized for
    power.

    78,     for signal feedback circuits compensating for inter-electrode
    impedances to or from a common electrode.

    119,    for push-pull amplifiers involving cathode coupling.

    158+,   for interstage coupling to the cathode.

    168,    for transformer interstage coupling from the cathode.

    172+,   for interstage coupling from the cathode.

    186+,   for input coupling to the cathode.

    193+,   for output coupling from the cathode.

    291+,   for semiconductor amplifiers having signal feedback means.

    297,    for semiconductor amplifiers series energized for power.


CLS 330/88
TXT Subject matter under subclass 87 involving at least two stages of
    amplification wherein the output of each stage is coupled to the input of
    the preceding stage except the first, and wherein at least two of the
    stages are arranged as defined in subclass 87 with signal feedback from the
    cathode impedance of the latter of the cascaded stages to the cathode
    impedance of a preceding stage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92,     for signal feedback to the cathode impedance of a prior stage
    combined with diverse type signal feedback.

    98+,    for signal feedback in cascaded amplifiers generally.


CLS 330/89
TXT Subject matter under subclass 88 wherein the cathode-cathode feedback is
    between adjacent stages.

    (1)     Note.  Where there is cathode-to-cathode coupling of adjacent
    cascaded stages classification is in subclass 89 regardless of whether
    signal feedback is indicated or not.


CLS 330/90
TXT Subject matter under subclass 87 combined with a type of signal feedback as
    defined in subclass 75, which is diverse from the type of feedback defined
    in subclass 87.


CLS 330/91
TXT Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein the diverse signal feedback is
    derived from the cathode feedback impedance and fed to the input electrode
    of the same or a prior stage; or wherein the diverse signal feedback is
    derived from an output electrode of the same or a following stage and
    applied to the cathode impedance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     for signal feedback to or from a common electrode compensating for
    inter-electrode impedance.


CLS 330/92
TXT Subject matter under subclass 91 wherein the diverse signal feedback is
    derived from an electrode other than the cathode and applied to the cathode
    impedance of a prior stage whereby the diverse signal feedback path
    includes or overlaps the cathode impedance feedback path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    for amplifiers having multiple signal feedback paths in general,
    including signal feedback to the input of a prior stage.


CLS 330/93
TXT Subject matter under subclass 90 including a signal feedback means whereby
    the feedback has a component in phase with the signal applied at the input
    electrode to which the signal feedback is applied.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     for push-pull amplifiers having positive and negative feedback.

    89,     for cathode-to-cathode feedback between adjacent stages.

    101,    for positive and negative feedbacks in the same path at different
    frequencies.

    104,    for positive and negative feedback, generally.

    112,    for positive feedback, generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    329,    Demodulators, subclass 367 for an amplitude demodulator utilizing
    regenerative feedback.

    331,    Oscillators, appropriate subclasses for oscillators operating on
    the positive feedback principle.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 213+ for negative
    resistance and/or reactance networks of the active element type which
    usually include positive feedback.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 336 for superregenerative receivers;
    and subclass 337 for regenerative receivers.


CLS 330/94
TXT Subject matter under subclass 87 including in the "cathode impedance to
    ground signal feedback path" or in shunt therewith circuit means which acts
    on the signal feedback to affect some frequency component of the signal
    feedback differently from the other frequency components of the signal
    feedback, for example, a tuned circuit or filter circuit which eliminates a
    frequency component, or an equalizer which emphasizes or de-emphasizes the
    signal feedback amplitude of some frequency or frequency range of the
    signal feedback with respect to others.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for amplifiers having phase shift means in the loop path.

    109,    for amplifiers having frequency responsive signal feedback means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 24+ for passive
    coupling networks in general.


CLS 330/95
TXT Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein the "cathode impedance signal
    feedback path" has therein a nonlinear impedance circuit element, which may
    be resistive, capacitive, or inductive, and whose impedance is such, that
    the relationship for changes in voltage, between the voltage across the
    nonlinear element to the current flow therein is nonlinear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86,     for amplifiers having a variable impedance in the feedback path
    varied by a separate control path.  See the search notes thereunder.

    110,    for amplifiers having a nonlinear impedance device in the loop path.

    183,    for amplifiers having a d.c. interstage coupling means including a
    nonlinear impedance element.  See the search notes thereunder.


CLS 330/96
TXT Subject matter under subclass 75 combined with bias voltage control means
    for a signal amplifying device.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of an amplifier with bias voltage control
    see subclass 129 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129+,   for amplifiers having bias voltage control means.  See the search
    notes thereunder.


CLS 330/97
TXT Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein the signal feedback path, from the
    output electrode of the amplifying device from which the signal feedback is
    derived to the input electrode of the amplifying device to which the signal
    feedback is applied, is a d.c. conductive path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for amplifiers having periodic switching means for input-output
    comparison including those with d.c. conductive feedback paths.

    83,     for push-pull amplifiers having d.c. conductive signal feedback
    paths.


CLS 330/98
TXT Subject matter including at least two stages of amplification (each as
    defined in the class definition) wherein the means for coupling the input
    signal for each stage except the first is coupled to the means for coupling
    the output signal of the preceding amplifier; combined with signal feedback
    means as defined in subclass 75 above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88+,    for cathode-cathode signal feedback in cascaded amplifiers.

    92,     for cascaded amplifiers with signal feedback to the cathode
    impedance of a prior stage.


CLS 330/99
TXT Subject matter under subclass 98 including at least two signal feedback
    circuit means as defined therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88+,    for cascaded amplifiers having cathode-to-cathode signal feedback.

    90+,    for amplifiers having cathode impedance signal feedback combined
    with diverse type signal feedback coupling.


CLS 330/100
TXT Subject matter under subclass 99 wherein at least one of the signal
    feedback means has the signal feedback applied to the signal input of a
    prior stage so that the path of such feedback means extends to include all
    or a portion of at least one other signal feedback means (overlapping
    feedbacks).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88+,    for cascaded amplifiers having cathode-to-cathode signal feedback
    means.

    92,     for cascaded amplifiers including feedback to the cathode impedance
    of a prior stage.


CLS 330/101
TXT Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein a single signal feedback circuit
    means through an impedance shared by the same input and output circuits has
    for currents flowing through the same shared feedback impedance at one
    frequency a signal feedback in phase (positive feedback) with the signal
    input where the signal feedback is applied and at least at some other
    frequency a signal feedback component flowing through the same feedback
    impedance, in opposite phase with the signal (negative feedback).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     for amplifiers having at least one stage of push-pull amplification
    including both positive and negative feedback.

    89,     for cascaded amplifiers having cathode-cathode signal feedback
    between adjacent stages.

    93,     for amplifiers having cathode impedance feedback and positive
    feedback.

    104,    for amplifiers having multiple signal feedbacks including both
    positive and negative feedback.


CLS 330/102
TXT Subject matter under subclass 75 including signal feedback proportional to
    the current flow through the output load which receives the amplified
    signal, and signal feedback proportional to the voltage across the output
    load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    for amplifiers with signal feedback from an impedance in series
    with the output load (e.g., current feedback).


CLS 330/103
TXT Subject matter under subclass 75 including two or more signal feedback
    circuit means as therein defined and not previously provided for in this
    schedule.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88+,    for cascaded amplifiers having cathode-cathode signal feedback.

    90+,    for cathode impedance signal feedback combined with diverse type
    signal feedback.

    99+,    for cascaded amplifiers having multiple feedbacks.

    102,    for amplifiers having current and voltage feedback.


CLS 330/104
TXT Subject matter under subclass 103 including at least one signal feedback
    means having a component of the signal feedback in phase with the signal at
    the point in the circuit where the signal is applied and at least one
    signal feedback circuit means having a signal feedback component which is
    in phase opposition with the signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     for push-pull amplifiers having negative and positive feedback
    means.

    89,     for cascaded amplifiers having cathode-cathode signal feedback
    between adjacent stages.

    93,     for cathode impedance feedback combined with diverse type feedback
    coupling including positive feedback.

    101,    for positive and negative feedback in the same path at different
    frequencies.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    329,    Demodulators, subclass 367 for an amplitude demodulator utilizing
    regenerative feedback.

    331,    Oscillators, appropriate subclasses for oscillators operating on
    the positive feedback principle.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 213+ for negative
    resistance and/or reactance networks of the active element type which
    usually include positive feedback.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 336 for superregenerative receivers;
    and subclass 337 for regenerative receivers.


CLS 330/105
TXT Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein the signal feedback is from an
    impedance in series with the output load which receives the amplified
    signal, whereby the signal feedback voltage is proportional to the current
    flowing in the output load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for amplifiers having current and voltage feedback.


CLS 330/106
TXT Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein the "signal feedback circuit
    means" is in series with the signal input source between the point in the
    signal circuit from which the signal feedback is derived to the point in
    the circuit at which the signal feedback is applied.


CLS 330/107
TXT Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein the "loop path" (see (3) Note
    under subclass 75 for the definition of loop path) includes voltage or
    current phase shift or delay means which may shift the phase of the voltage
    or current of one signal frequency or signal frequency feedback component
    with respect to another or shift the phase of the voltage of the signal or
    signal feedback with respect to the current.

    (1)     Note.  Transformer or amplifier means which inherently shift the
    phase 1805 are not regarded as phase shift or voltage delay means for this
    subclass. If such transformer or amplifier include additional phase shift
    means classification is herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for amplifiers having distributed parameter coupling which may
    include electric wave delay means.

    101,    for amplifiers having positive and negative feedback in the same
    path at different frequencies.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 212
    through 219 for phase control systems in general.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 138+ for electric
    wave delay networks, of the passive type, see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 330/108
TXT Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein the signal transmission path and
    the "signal feedback circuit means" both include a potentiometer or a part
    thereof in common.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, for voltage
    magnitude control systems in general, including resistors.


CLS 330/109
TXT Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein the "signal feedback circuit
    means" includes circuit means which acts on the signal feedback to affect
    some frequency component of the signal feedback differently from the other
    frequency components of the signal, as for example, a tuned circuit which
    eliminates a frequency component of the signal feedback or an equalizer
    which emphasizes or de-emphasizes the amplitude of some frequency range of
    the signal feedback with respect to others.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94,     for frequency responsive cathode impedance feedback means.

    107,    for signal feedback amplifiers including phase shift means in the
    loop path including those involving frequency responsive feedback means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 28 and 167+ for
    frequency responsive passive coupling networks in general.  See the search
    notes thereunder.


CLS 330/110
TXT Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein the "loop path" (see (3) Note
    under subclass 75 for the definition of loop path) includes a nonlinear
    impedance circuit element, which may be resistive, capacitive, or
    inductive, and whose impedance is such for changes in voltage applied
    thereto that the relationship between the voltage across such element to
    the current flow through the element is nonlinear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86,     for amplifiers having a variable impedance in the feedback path
    varied by a separate control path.  See the search notes thereunder.

    95,     for amplifiers having a nonlinear impedance element in the cathode
    impedance feedback path.

    143,    for amplifiers having a thermally responsive impedance in the
    signal path.

    183,    for amplifiers having a d.c. interstage coupling means including a
    nonlinear impedance element.  See the search notes thereunder.


CLS 330/111
TXT Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein the amplifying device or devices
    involved are of the vacuum tube type and wherein the signal feedback is
    derived from an electrode thereof other than the anode or cathode and/or is
    applied to an electrode thereof other than the cathode or control grid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160+,   for interstage signal coupling involving coupling to the screen
    grid, plate, suppressor grid (and grid other than the control grid or
    cathode). See search notes thereunder.

    162+,   for interstage signal coupling from a grid (from an electrode other
    than anode or cathode).  See search notes thereunder.


CLS 330/112
TXT Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein the signal feedback has a
    component in phase with the signal where the feedback is applied and which
    is not provided for above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     for push-pull amplifiers including positive signal feedback.

    89,     for cascaded amplifiers having cathode-cathode signal feedback.

    93,     for cathode impedance signal feedback combined with diverse type
    signal feedback including positive signal feedback.

    101,    for positive and negative feedback in the same path at different
    frequencies.

    104,    for positive and negative feedbacks combined, generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, appropriate subclasses for oscillators operating on
    the positive feedback principle.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 213+ for negative
    resistance and/or reactance networks of the active element type which
    usually include positive feedback.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 336 for superregenerative receivers;
    and subclass 337 for regenerative receivers.


CLS 330/113
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including a polyphase power
    supply for the energizing or bias voltage supply applied to any electrode
    or for a filament or for any heater for a cathode electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114+,   for amplifiers having unrectified power supply.

    199,    for amplifiers involving power or bias voltage supply.  See the
    search notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 13+
    for plural load systems of the polyphase type.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, appropriate subclasses
    under subclasses 10+ for dynamoelectric machine structure of the polyphase
    type.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for systems in which a single source of supply is connected to a
    single load and the system includes means for controlling only the
    magnitude of the current, the voltage, and/or the phase angle between the
    current and the voltage in the system. The single source may be a polyphase
    source.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 5+ for the structure of polyphase
    inductor devices.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, particularly subclasses 148+ for
    phase conversion systems from one number of phases to a different number of
    phases.


CLS 330/114
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the source of electrical
    energy which is controlled by the electrical signal is an a.c. electrical
    source, which is applied as an a.c.  power supply directly to an electrode
    without any intervening rectifiers to rectify the a.c. electrical supply.

    (1)     Note.  Special types of amplifiers are classified above and subject
    matter involving unrectified a.c. as a power supply would be classified
    with the special type of amplifier and not herein.  The amplifiers having
    general vacuum tube amplifying devices with this feature are classified
    herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70+,    for vacuum tube amplifying devices series energized.

    113,    for amplifiers having a polyphase power supply.

    199,    for amplifiers involving power or bias voltage supply means,
    generally.  See also search notes thereunder.

    296     and 297, for semiconductor amplifiers involving bias or power
    supply circuits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, appropriate subclasses
    thereunder, for power supply means combined with means to convert a.c. to
    d.c. or vice versa.


CLS 330/115
TXT Subject matter under subclass 114 wherein the electrode, to which the a.c.
    power supply voltage is applied, is a filamentary directly heated cathode.

    (1)     Note.  A.C. power supply for heaters of indirectly heated cathodes
    are not classified in this subclass but are classified in subclass 113,
    above, in the special case where they involve a polyphase power supply.
    Amplifiers with cathode filaments heated by the anode current are
    classified in subclass 201 of this class.  Amplifiers with heater supply
    otherwise are classified in subclass 199.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses indented under subclass 94, particularly subclasses 97 and 105+
    for subject matter involving a.c. power supply to cathodes or cathode
    heaters.


CLS 330/116
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including a circuit in the signal
    path in the conductors of which electrical signal flows so that at any
    instant the signal potential in the conductors is substantially equal and
    opposite in sign with reference to ground or some other convenient
    reference potential plane; and wherein further, in the signal path there is
    included a circuit in the conductors of which signal flows which is
    unbalanced to ground comprising a single-sided output load usually of two
    conductors one of which is at ground or reference potential.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter as defined above including additional
    unbalanced output or load circuits as set forth above is also classified in
    this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Balanced circuits are considered as single sources or single
    loads in this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for sum and difference amplifiers.

    117,    for amplifiers having unbalanced to balanced coupling.

    118,    for amplifiers including a push-pull stage.  See the search notes
    thereunder.

    301,    for semiconductor amplifiers having balanced to unbalanced circuits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 594 for miscellaneous circuits with particular coupling
    or decoupling means.

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses for demodulators with balanced
    to unbalanced coupling.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 4+ and 25+ for
    balanced to unbalanced passive circuits. See the search notes under
    subclasses 4 and 25.


CLS 330/117
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including in the signal path a
    circuit electrically unbalanced to ground, or a convenient electrical
    reference potential plane, from a single source of electrical signal and
    having at some subsequent location of the signal path, with or without one
    or more intervening amplifying devices, a balanced circuit wherein at least
    two of the conductors have at any instant electrical signal flowing
    therethrough substantially equal and opposite in sign with reference to
    ground or some other convenient reference plane.

    (1)     Note.  Balanced circuits are treated as single sources of
    electrical signal or as single loads in this class.

    (2)     Note.  Phase splitters are classified in this subclass.  Phase
    inverter amplifier circuits are classified in this subclass and subclass
    116 above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    for amplifiers having balanced-to-unbalanced coupling.

    118,    for amplifiers having a push-pull stage.  See the notes and search
    notes thereunder.

    301,    for semiconductor amplifiers having unbalanced to balanced circuits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 594 for miscellaneous circuits with particular coupling
    or decoupling means.

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses for demodulators with
    unbalanced to balanced coupling.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 4+ and 25+ for
    unbalanced-to-balanced passive circuits.  See the search notes under the
    subclasses 4 and 25.


CLS 330/118
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including two amplifiers as
    defined in the class definition, the input electrodes of each of the
    amplifying devices of the two amplifiers being balanced to ground or some
    other convenient electrical reference plane, the source of electrical
    signal being such, and so coupled to the input electrodes, that at any
    instant the signal on each input electrode is substantially equal and
    opposite in sign to the signal on the other input electrode; and wherein
    the signal on the output electrodes of each of the amplifying devices is
    similarly balanced to a convenient electrical reference plane.

    (1)     Note.  A balanced signal circuit is treated as a special case of a
    single source or a single load, in this class.

    (2)     Note.  A push-pull amplifier is treated as a single channel with a
    single source and a single load in this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for push-pull amplifiers including a push-pull stage.

    69,     for sum and difference amplifiers similar in structure to push-pull
    amplifiers.

    71+,    particularly subclass 72, for push-pull amplifiers included in
    series energized vacuum tube arrangements.

    77,     for push-pull amplifiers having feedback compensation to mitigate
    inter-electrode impedance effects.

    81+,    for amplifiers having at least one push-pull stage having signal
    feedback.

    116,    for amplifiers with balanced-to-unbalanced coupling.

    117,    for amplifiers with unbalanced-to-balanced coupling including phase
    splitters.

    262+,   for semiconductor amplifiers including a push-pull stage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 595 for miscellaneous circuits including push pull
    circuits.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 4+ and 25+ for
    passive balanced networks.  See the search notes under subclasses 4 and 25.


CLS 330/119
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein the two amplifying devices in
    push-pull are vacuum tube amplifying devices and wherein the input
    electrodes or the output electrodes are the cathode electrodes of the
    vacuum tube amplifying devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158+,   for amplifiers with interstage coupling to the cathode of an
    amplifying device.

    168     and 172, for interstage coupling from the cathode.

    186+,   for input coupling to the cathode. See the search notes thereunder.

    193+,   for output coupling from the cathode. See search notes thereunder.


CLS 330/120
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 including at least two cascaded stages of
    amplification, each stages as defined in subclass 118 above and each stage
    excepting the first having its signal input coupled to the signal output of
    the preceding stage involving specific details or distinctive
    characteristics of the coupling between the stages.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157+,   for interstage coupling.  See the search notes thereunder.


CLS 330/121
TXT Subject matter under subclass 120 wherein the signal coupling path from the
    output electrode of each amplifying device of the preceding stage to the
    input electrode of the corresponding device of the following stage is a
    d.c. conductive path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159,    161, 163, 172, and 181+, for various types of interstage d.c.
    coupling.  See also the search notes thereunder.


CLS 330/122
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 involving specific details or distinctive
    characteristics of the input and/or output circuits coupling the source to
    the amplifying devices and the amplifying devices to a load, respectively.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185,    for amplifier input networks.  See the notes and search notes
    thereunder.

    192,    for amplifier output networks.  See the notes and search notes
    thereunder.


CLS 330/123
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 including means to control the power
    supply and/or bias voltage supply applied to the electrodes of the
    amplifying devices; and/or subject matter under subclass 118 involving
    specific details or distinctive characteristics of the power or bias
    voltage supply of the amplifying devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127+,   for amplifiers with control of power supply or bias voltage.  See
    the notes and search notes thereunder.

    129+,   for amplifiers with control of input electrode or gain control
    electrode bias.  See the notes and search notes thereunder.

    199+,   for amplifier power or bias supply voltages.  See the notes and
    search notes thereunder.


CLS 330/124
TXT Amplifier systems under the class definition wherein there are at least two
    signal channels each containing an amplifier as defined in the class
    definition, (Section I).

    (1)     Note.  For this and indented subclasses such amplifier channels may
    be separate; in parallel with a common source and a common load; or in
    branched circuit channels from separate sources or to separate loads.

    (2)     Note.  Sum and difference amplifiers involving two or more signal
    inputs to the same channel or a different channel where the output is
    proportionally the sum or difference of the plural inputs are not
    classified herein but in subclass 69 above.

    (3)     Note.  A balanced circuit is regarded as a single source or load
    for the purposes of classification in this class.  See definitions of
    subclasses 116 and 117, above.  A push-pull amplifier is regarded as a
    single amplifier channel for purposes of classification in this class.  See
    the definition of subclass 118 above. Balanced circuits and push-pull
    amplifiers are to be found in this class, subclasses 262+ and 301 for
    semiconductor amplifiers; subclass 55, for amplifiers having distributed
    parameter coupling; subclasses 71+ for series energized amplifier devices;
    subclass 77, for push-pull amplifiers with feedback compensation for the
    effects of inter-electrode capacitance (e.g., neutralization); subclasses
    81+, for signal feedback amplifiers having at least one push-pull stage;
    subclass 116, for amplifiers with balanced-to-unbalanced coupling;
    subclasses 117+, for amplifiers having unbalanced-to-balanced coupling; and
    subclasses 118+, for amplifiers including a push-pull stage.

    (4)     Note.  The plural channels need not amplify or operate
    simultaneously to be classified herein.  Subject matter involving plural
    channels with switching means to select with alternatively one or more
    channels to amplify a signal a classified in this or indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    See (3) Note, above.

    3,      for amplifiers having diverse type amplifying devices.

    53,     for amplifiers having distributed parameter coupling.

    69,     for sum and difference amplifiers.  See (2) Note above.

    70+,    for amplifiers with series arranged amplifier devices, particularly
    subclass 73, for plural outputs and subclass 74, for plural separate signal
    inputs.

    84,     for signal feedback amplifiers with plural amplifier channels.

    147,    for amplifiers having plural input sources.

    148,    for amplifiers having plural loads.

    151,    for cascaded amplifiers with means to by-pass a stage.

    252+    and 295, for plural semiconductor amplifier channels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 11+
    and 43+ for plural load circuit and supply circuit systems respectively.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous nonlinear circuits
    utilizing electron tube or semiconductor devices.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 1+ for plural
    channel passive network systems.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing and Systems, subclass 77 for
    program distribution systems involving distribution of a program to a
    plurality of local stations where the program is amplified and reproduced.


CLS 330/125
TXT Subject matter under subclass 124 wherein at least one of the signal
    channels has a d.c. conductive path from source to load, or where branched
    channels are involved, from or to the common junction point of the channels
    to the separate loads or from the separate sources or between common
    junction points in parallel channels; and at least one other channel has
    its signal transmission path, as set forth above, involves coupling
    circuits which will conduct only a.c. signals, because of signal coupling
    by a series condenser or transformer, and which will not conduct d.c. in
    that signal channel circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for amplifiers having periodic switching input-output comparison.

    10,     for modulator-demodulator type amplifiers.


CLS 330/126
TXT Subject matter under subclass 124 wherein at least one of the channels
    amplifies a signal of a different frequency from at least one other channel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    111+, for amplifier systems including microphones and/or loud speakers
    having plural amplifier channels which pass different frequency bands.


CLS 330/127
TXT Subject matter under the class definition combined with means to control
    the voltage of the source of electrical energy which is supplied to the
    amplifying device, or combined with means to control a bias voltage applied
    to an electrode, such control means, generally, being applied to stabilize
    the power supply or bias voltage or to alter the operation of the
    amplifying device in a predetermined manner as, for example, to control the
    signal amplitude, or means to regulate the power, heater, or filament
    supply of the amplifying device.

    (1)     Note.  Limiters of the active element type which "clip" the signal
    are not classified herein but in Class 327, Miscellaneous Active Electrical
    Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and Systems, subclasses 309+ for amplitude
    limiting means.  Limiters combined with amplifiers where the bias of an
    electrode of the amplifier is controlled to "accommodate" a given maximum
    signal (where there is no clipping of the signal) are classified herein.
    See also search notes under Class 333 Wave Transmission Lines and Networks,
    subclass 14.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for amplifiers with periodic switching input-output comparison.

    11,     for amplifiers having d.c. reinsertion circuits.

    51,     for amplifiers combined with automatic disabling switch means.

    52,     for amplifiers having pilot frequency control means.

    59,     for amplifiers having light control or activated means.

    70+,    for series energized vacuum tube amplifiers.

    85,     for signal feedback amplifiers having an amplifier in the feedback
    path including the control of bias of such feedback amplifiers.

    86,     for signal feedback amplifiers having a separately controlled
    variable impedance in the feedback path.

    96,     for signal feedback amplifiers having bias voltage control of the
    signal amplifier.

    113,    for polyphase power supply.

    114+,   for unrectified a.c. power supply for an electrode.

    123,    for control of bias voltage or power  supply voltage in push-pull
    amplifiers.

    143,    for amplifiers having a thermally responsive impedance.

    144+,   for amplifiers having a variable impedance for the signal path
    varied by a separate control path.

    164,    for cascaded amplifiers having an electronic tube or diode in the
    interstage coupling.

    174,    for cascaded amplifiers having an electro-mechanical transducer
    (e.g., piezoelectric crystal in the interstage coupling path.

    179     and 180, for cascaded amplifiers having an inductance in the anode
    or grid circuit, or a resistance in the anode and grid circuit in the
    capacitance-coupled interstage coupling, respectively.

    183,    for cascaded amplifiers having a nonlinear device in the d.c.
    interstage coupling path.

    199+,   for amplifiers with significant power or bias voltage supply.

    254     and 278+, for semiconductor amplifiers having signal amplitude
    (volume level) control including such means where the bias is controlled.

    290,    for semiconductor amplifiers having d.c. feedback bias control for
    stabilization.

    297,    for series energized cascaded semiconductor amplifiers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 31+
    and 52+ for current or voltage control of electrical transmission or
    interconnection systems.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for voltage magnitude control systems generally.

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses for automatic control of the
    bias of a demodulating element.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, particularly subclasses 2+
    for automatic control of plural channel passive networks, subclass 14 for
    compressors and expanders, subclasses 15 and 16 for pilot signal controlled
    systems, subclasses 17.1+ for automatically controlled lines or networks,
    and subclass 81 for attenuators.  See also the search Notes under these
    subclasses.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, for the structure of resistors, rheostats,
    and potentiometers, per se.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 234.1+ for automatic volume control
    in radio receivers; and subclass 343 for particular power or bias supply
    for radio receivers.


CLS 330/128
TXT Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein the "combined control means" is
    in the circuit from the power supply or bias voltage source means to the
    anode or screen grid electrode of a vacuum tube amplifying device or in
    shunt therewith, in such manner, as to control the power supply or bias
    voltage applied to the anode or screen grid electrode.

    (1)     Note.  Ordinary anode or screen grid resistors as such are not
    control means such as is classified in this subclass. However glow tubes,
    nonlinear resistors, diodes, vacuum tubes, etc., in the anode or screen
    grid supply circuit for voltage regulation and related subject matter are
    classified herein.  Such matter involving ordinary resistors or other
    nonlinear impedances in the power or bias supply circuits are classified in
    the appropriate coupling subclass, (157+, 185, or 192+), when the
    particular nonlinear element affects the signal coupling, and not the power
    supply.  Subject matter wherein such impedance is isolated from the signal
    path or is involved only in the power supply circuit or forms the means for
    isolating the power supply circuit and is not involved in signal coupling
    as, for example, signal by-pass means for the power supply, classification
    is in the appropriate subclass indented under subclass 199 below.

    (2)     Note.  Nonlinear impedances, vacuum tube impedances, thermal
    impedances, etc., in amplifier circuits as indicated are classified in this
    class in the following subclasses:

    52,     for pilot frequency control means which may utilize thermal or
    other nonlinear control means.

    70+,    for amplifier devices having the anode energized through the
    discharge path of a controlled vacuum tube.

    86,     for signal feedback amplifiers having a variable impedance in the
    feedback path.

    95      and 110, for nonlinear impedance in the cathode impedance feedback
    path and for a nonlinear impedance element in the loop path of feedback
    amplifiers respectively.

    131,    for amplifiers having a bias control voltage applied to an
    electrode separate and distinct from the signal input electrode.

    143,    for a thermally responsive impedance in the amplifier circuit (when
    not specifically involved in power or bias supply circuit as in subclass
    128).

    144+,   for variable impedance for the signal channel, controlled by a
    separate control path, particularly subclass 145 where the variable
    impedance is an electron tube or a diode.

    164,    for amplifier interstage coupling including an electronic tube or
    diode.

    174,    for amplifiers having an electromechanical transducer (e.g.,
    piezoelectric crystal) in an interstage coupling circuit.

    183,    for amplifiers having a nonlinear device in a d.c. interstage
    coupling.

    254     and 278+, for semiconductor amplifiers including nonlinear
    impedance elements used for signal volume level control.

    290,    for semiconductor amplifiers having bias control d.c. feedback
    stabilization which may involve nonlinear impedance elements.

    291,    for semiconductor signal feedback amplifiers which may involve
    nonlinear impedance elements.

    299+,   for semiconductor amplifiers combined with a semiconductor
    impedance device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    See (1) and (2) Notes above.

    70+,    for series energized vacuum tube amplifiers.

    96,     for feedback amplifiers combined with control of bias voltage of
    the signal amplifier.

    123,    for control of anode or screen grid voltage in push-pull amplifiers.

    256,    272 and 289, for semiconductor amplifiers including transistor
    temperature control.

    296+,   for cascaded semiconductor amplifiers including bias or power
    supply circuitry.

    296     and 297, for semiconductor cascaded amplifiers series energized for
    power.

    296     and 297, for semiconductor amplifiers involving bias or power
    supply circuitry.


CLS 330/129
TXT Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein the "means to control the bias
    voltage" is applied to an input electrode of the amplifying device, or to
    an electrode separate and distinct from the signal input electrodes and in
    vacuum tube amplifiers also separate and distinct from the anode or screen
    grid electrodes in order to control the bias of such electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for amplifiers having periodic switching input-output comparison.

    11,     for amplifiers with d.c. reinsertion circuits.

    52,     for amplifiers have pilot frequency control means.

    85,     for signal feedback amplifiers having an amplifier in the feedback
    path including such feedback amplifiers having means to control the bias of
    an input or gain control electrode, thereof.

    96,     for amplifiers having signal feedback with means to control the
    bias voltage on an electrode of the signal amplifier.

    123,    for bias voltage control of input or gain control electrode in
    push-pull amplifiers.

    254     and 278+, for semiconductor amplifiers having signal volume level
    control.

    290,    for semiconductor amplifiers having d.c. feedback bias control for
    stabilization.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 227
    and 291 for discharge control devices for voltage magnitude control
    including bias control means.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 309+ for miscellaneous circuits including bias voltage
    control means for amplitude limiting.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 14, 15 and 213+
    for companders, pilot line controlled systems, and active element negative
    resistors or reactors, respectively including such subject matter with bias
    control means.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    electrical conversion, including control of the line voltage.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 234.1+ for automatic volume control
    in radio receivers; and subclass 343 for particular power or bias supply
    for radio receivers.


CLS 330/130
TXT Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein the "means to control the bias
    voltage" includes a source of control voltage from a system outside the
    amplifier system itself.

    (1)     Note.  An example is a seismic amplifier wherein a battery not
    involved in supplying amplifier power or bias voltage charges an RC circuit
    which is applied to the control grid or an input grid of the amplifier when
    the shot blast is fired.  Such additional means where it includes the
    detector or other related means of the seismic system, per se, is not
    classified herein but in 367, Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave
    Systems and Devices, subclasses 14+.

    (2)     Note.  Subject matter, wherein the control voltage is derived from
    a special pilot frequency voltage transmitted to the amplifier with the
    signal to be amplified, is not classified herein, but in subclass 52 above.

    (3)     Note.  Subject matter wherein an oscillator (exclusive of any other
    source external to the amplifier) supplies the control bias is not
    classified herein but in subclass 137 below.  Also sources of bias voltage
    as such, where no cooperation from a system outside the amplifier is
    involved are classified with amplifiers.  Where specific details of the
    external system are claimed as in the example under (1) Note above, as
    qualified in the last three lines, classification is not with amplifiers
    but with the external system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for amplifiers combined with automatic disabling switch means.

    52,     see (2) Note above.

    85,     for amplifiers having an amplifier in the feedback path including
    bias control means for an electrode of such amplifier.

    86,     for amplifiers having a variable impedance in a feedback control
    path varied by a separate control path.

    137,    for amplifiers having bias control means including an oscillator in
    the control means.  See (3) Note above.

    143,    for amplifiers having a thermally responsive impedance which may be
    controlled from an external control source.

    144+,   for amplifiers having a variable impedance for the signal channel
    controlled by a separate control path which may be from an external source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 309+ for miscellaneous circuits including bias voltage
    control means for amplitude limiting.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 15, 16 and 17.1+
    for pilot line, pilot current and automatically controlled passive wave
    transmission systems.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices
    subclasses 14+, see (1) Note above.

    455,    Telecommunications, particularly subclasses 232.1+ and 341+, for
    similar subject matter in radio receivers.


CLS 330/131
TXT Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein the bias control voltage is
    applied to an electrode of the amplifying device separate and distinct from
    the electrodes to which the signal input is applied.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter as above in which the separate and distinct
    electrode to which the bias voltage is applied is the screen grid or anode
    of a vacuum tube amplifying device is not classified herein but in subclass
    128 above.


CLS 330/132
TXT Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein the "means to control the bias
    voltage" is derived from the electrical signal channel through a frequency
    selective means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     for pilot frequency control amplifiers including subject matter
    wherein the pilot control is derived from the signal channel by frequency
    selective means.

    85,     for amplifiers having an amplifier in the feedback path including
    those having bias voltage control which may be derived by frequency
    selective means.

    86,     for amplifiers having a variable impedance means in the signal
    feedback path controlled by a separate control which may be derived by a
    frequency selective means from the signal channel.

    109,    for signal feedback amplifiers having frequency responsive means in
    the feedback path.

    143,    for amplifiers having thermally responsive impedance which may be
    controlled by a voltage derived through a frequency selective means from
    the signal channel.

    144+,   for amplifiers having a variable impedance for the signal channel
    controlled by a separate control path, wherein the control voltage may be
    derived from the signal channel by a frequency responsive means.


CLS 330/133
TXT Subject matter under subclass 129 including at least two stages of
    amplification (each stage as defined in the class definition with at least
    two such stages as defined in subclass 129) such that the input signal of
    each stage except the first is the output signal of the preceding stage and
    wherein the bias control for each of at least two of the stages as defined
    in subclass 129 has some characteristic or characteristics distinctive from
    the other.


CLS 330/134
TXT Subject matter under subclass 129 including at least two separate and
    distinct bias voltage control means as therein defined, wherein the control
    voltages are applied to input or gain control electrodes, and which may be
    applied to a single amplifying device or to more than one amplifying device.

    (1)     Note.  The two separately developed bias control means may be
    combined or compared or separately applied in some manner as a single bias
    control means to a single electrode.


CLS 330/135
TXT Subject matter under subclass 129 including means to limit the maximum
    amplitude of the bias control voltage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for amplifiers having d.c. reinsertion circuits.

    138,    for amplifiers with voltage delay for bias control where the bias
    control is not effective until a predetermined minimum voltage is reached
    where such minimum voltage is fixed by biasing a rectifier or control
    discharge device so that it will not conduct until such voltage is reached.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 309+ for miscellaneous circuits with amplitude limiting
    means.

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses for automatic control of the
    bias of a demodulating element.


CLS 330/136
TXT Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein "the bias control voltage" is
    derived from the input circuit of the amplifying device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for amplifiers having periodic switching for input-output
    comparison including those amplifiers wherein a bias control voltage for
    drift correction is developed from such comparison means.

    11,     for amplifiers having d.c. reinsertion circuits.


CLS 330/137
TXT Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein the bias voltage control means
    includes an oscillator which may be itself controlled by a bias voltage
    means and from which a signal amplifier bias voltage is derived, or from
    which a control voltage, usually constant, is derived.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     for amplifiers having pilot frequency control means.

    130,    for amplifiers including bias voltage control from a source in a
    system external to and independent from the amplifier.  See (3) Note under
    subclass 130 above.


CLS 330/138
TXT Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein the "bias voltage control means"
    includes a rectifier or discharge device which is biased in such a manner
    that the rectifier or discharge device will not conduct until a
    predetermined voltage is reached, which imparts to the control means a
    "voltage delay" action and wherein the minimum voltage at which bias
    control begins may be predetermined.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    for amplifiers having plural different bias voltages provided by
    separate means including those with biased rectifiers or discharge devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 309+ for miscellaneous threshold limiters of the active
    element type.


CLS 330/139
TXT Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein "the bias voltage control means"
    includes an electronic tube to control the bias voltage which tube may be a
    gas tube or vacuum tube having a means for control thereof while the tube
    is in operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for amplifiers having periodic switching input-output comparison
    including those with electronic tubes for control.

    11,     for amplifiers having d.c. reinsertion circuits.

    85,     for amplifiers having amplifiers in the feedback path including
    bias control for the feedback amplifier.

    86,     for feedback amplifiers having a variable impedance in the feedback
    path varied by a separate control means, including those wherein the
    variable impedance is an electronic tube.

    95      and 110, for signal feedback amplifiers with nonlinear impedance
    which may be an electronic tube.

    96,     for signal feedback amplifiers wherein the signal amplifier has
    bias voltage control means, including amplifiers with an electron tube in
    such bias control means.

    114,    for amplifiers with oscillators supplying or controlling the bias.

    123,    for push-pull amplifiers having bias voltage control means
    including those with electronic tubes, in the bias control means.

    134,    for amplifiers with plural different bias voltages including
    electronic tube.

    138,    for amplifiers controlled by biased rectifiers or discharge devices.

    145,    for amplifiers having an electronic tube or diode as a variable
    impedance for the signal channel, controlled by a separate control path.

    164,    for amplifiers with an electronic tube or diode in the interstage
    coupling. See the search notes thereunder.

    296,    for semiconductors amplifiers including those with other
    transistors for bias control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, appropriate
    subclasses, for electronic tubes in voltage magnitude control circuits
    generally.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 530+ for miscellaneous electron tube circuits with bias
    control means.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 14 for amplitude
    compression and expansion systems, subclasses 15 and 16 for pilot signal
    controlled systems, 17.1+ for automatically controlled systems and 213+ for
    negative resistance or reactance active element networks.


CLS 330/140
TXT Subject matter under subclass 129 combined with a rectifier in "the bias
    voltage control means".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for amplifiers having periodic switching input-output comparison.

    11,     for amplifiers having d.c. reinsertion circuits.

    52,     for pilot frequency controlled amplifiers.

    85,     for amplifiers having amplifiers in the feedback path including
    those with bias voltage control having rectifiers in the control means.

    86,     for amplifiers having variable impedance in the feedback path
    controlled by a separate control path.

    95      and 110, for signal feedback amplifiers having nonlinear means
    which may be a diode.

    96,     for signal feedback amplifiers wherein the signal amplifier is
    provided with bias control including such bias control containing a
    rectifier.

    123,    for push-pull amplifiers including those having bias control means
    with rectifiers therein.

    134,    for amplifiers having plural different bias voltages provided by
    separate means including those having biased rectifiers in the control
    circuit.

    138,    for amplifiers having bias voltage control means including a biased
    rectifier or discharge device.

    145,    for amplifiers having an electronic tube or diode as a variable
    impedance for the signal channel controlled by a separate control path.

    164,    for amplifiers having a diode in the interstage coupling (see
    search notes under subclass 164).

    254     and 278+, for semiconductor amplifiers having signal volume level
    control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 330 for miscellaneous electron tube circuits with
    amplitude limiting and including a rectifier.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    rectifier circuits.


CLS 330/141
TXT Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein "the bias voltage control means"
    includes a circuit of resistive and reactive elements, usually of resistive
    and capacitive elements, which serves to filter or "smooth out" the d.c.
    bias voltage applied for control purposes to the amplifier device and
    wherein specific details or distinctive characteristics of such circuit are
    claimed.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are the resistive capacitive
    networks for self-biasing a vacuum tube amplifying device which are
    classified in subclass 142 immediately below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143,    for amplifiers having a thermally responsive impedance element
    including those with separate control thereof.

    144+,   for variable impedance for signal channel controlled by separate
    control path.

    199+,   for amplifiers and their power or bias voltage supply.

    254     and 278+, for semiconductor amplifiers having signal amplitude
    (volume level) control.

    290,    for semiconductor amplifiers having d.c. feedback for bias control.

    296     and 297, for semiconductor device bias or power supply circuitry.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    subclasses 166+ for charging or discharging a capacitor, per se.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 138+, for passive
    time delay networks, subclasses 181+, for smoothing type passive filter
    networks.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 44+ for conversion
    systems including D.C. smoothing filter networks.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 234.1+ for automatic volume control
    in radio receivers; and subclass 343 for particular power or bias supply
    for radio receivers.


CLS 330/142
TXT Subject matter under subclass 129 involving a vacuum tube amplifying device
    whose input electrode bias voltage and/or bias control voltage for the same
    amplifying device is supplied from a resistive circuit network in the
    cathode to ground path of the vacuum tube amplifying device whereby the
    plate current flowing through such resistor, which is usually by-passed for
    signal current frequencies, develops a d.c. bias voltage at the cathode.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter in this subclass includes both adjustable
    self-biasing means cathode circuit self-biasing means, per se, without an
    adjustable feature, for vacuum tube amplifying device input electrodes.
    Input electrode bias means without a control feature is otherwise
    classified in subclasses 203 and 204+ below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70+,    for amplifiers having series energized amplifiers devices.

    87+,    for cathode impedance feedback.

    203     and 204, for input electrode biasing.  See (1) Note above.

    254     and 278+, for semiconductor transistor amplifiers having signal
    amplitude (volume level) control.

    290,    for semiconductor amplifiers having d.c. bias control feedback for
    stabilization.

    296     and 297, for semiconductor amplifiers involving bias or power
    supply circuitry.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 530+ for miscellaneous electron tube circuits with
    particular bias means.


CLS 330/143
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the amplifier contains in
    its circuit an impedance element whose impedance value is responsive to the
    temperature changes therein by reason of the heat generated by the current
    flow therethrough, or the ambient temperature of the impedance element, or
    whose impedance value may be changed by separate electrical control means
    or other heat control means.

    (1)     Note.  Heat responsive impedance elements are species of nonlinear
    impedance elements and, as such, when appearing in a cathode impedance
    feedback circuit or generally in the loop path of a feedback amplifier are
    classified in subclass 95 or subclass 110 of this class, respectively, and
    not in this subclass.  Nonlinear impedances, including thermal impedances,
    in a  feedback path which are varied by separate control means are
    classified in subclass 86 above. Thermally responsive impedance means form
    a control means and when appearing in the voltage or power supply circuits
    of a push-pull amplifier are classified in subclass 123 of this class; and
    when appearing in the power supply or bias supply circuits, as for example,
    in the circuit from the voltage power supply to the anode or screen grid or
    in the bias supply circuit so as to control the bias of a vacuum tube
    amplifier device, classification is not herein but in the appropriate
    subclass under subclass 127 of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86,     see (1) Note above.

    95      and 110, see (1) Note above.

    123     and 127+, see (1) Note above.

    144+,   for variable impedance for the signal channel controlled by
    separate control path.

    157+,   appropriate subclasses thereunder for amplifier interstage coupling
    which may include a nonlinear device other than one thermally responsive,
    particularly subclass 164, for electronic tube or diode, and subclass 174,
    for electromechanical transducer (e.g., piezo-electric crystal) in the
    interstage coupling, and subclass 183, for a nonlinear device generally
    (other than thermally responsive) in a d.c. interstage coupling circuit.

    185+,   for nonlinear impedance elements, other than thermally
    responsive,in amplifier input circuits.

    192+,   for nonlinear impedance elements, other than thermally responsive,
    in amplifier output circuits.

    256,    272 and 289+, for semiconductor amplifiers with transistor
    temperature control.

    296     and 297, for semiconductor amplifiers involving bias or power
    supply circuitry.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 294 for
    thermally responsive impedance means for voltage magnitude control,
    generally.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for inductor structure
    particularly subclass 30, for condition responsive inductor adjusting
    means, including those responsive to thermal conditions.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 20+ for resistors whose value is
    responsive to the current therethrough or the voltage thereacross and
    subclasses 25+ for resistors whose value varies in response to ambient
    temperature conditions.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 282 for
    thermally responsive condensers, per se.



            See the search notes under the subclasses cited in these external
    search notes.


CLS 330/144
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein there is provided for the
    signal transmission path a variable impedance element or circuit which may
    be a variable resistance, or reactance, whose impedance is controlled by a
    separate control means.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of control of variable impedances classified in
    this and indented subclasses are; a control voltage secured from the signal
    output which may be rectified, filtered and applied to a biased diode or to
    the control electrode of an electronic tube to vary its impedance, or to
    control an electric motor which may vary a potentiometer or adjustable
    reactance in the signal path.

    (2)     Note.  Considering the signal coupling means as a four terminal
    network the "variable impedance" of the subclass may be in series between
    corresponding terminals or in shunt across the signal transmission path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     for amplifiers having pilot frequency control means.

    70+,    for series energized vacuum tube amplifiers.

    85,     for signal feedback amplifiers having an amplifier in the feedback
    path.

    86,     for signal feedback amplifiers having a variable impedance in the
    feedback path varied by a separate control path.

    95      and 110, for signal feedback amplifiers having a nonlinear
    impedance in the feedback path.

    96,     for signal feedback amplifiers having means to control the
    amplifier bias voltage.

    108,    for potentiometer common to signal and feedback paths.

    127+,   for amplifiers having control of power supply or bias voltage,
    particularly subclasses 138, 139, and 140.

    143,    for thermally responsive impedance in the signal path including
    those varied by a voltage or other means from a separate control path.

    155,    for amplifiers having unicontrol coupling.

    164,    for cascaded amplifiers having an electronic tube or diode in an
    interstage coupling circuit.

    174,    for cascaded amplifiers having an electromechanical transducer
    (e.g., piezo-electric crystal) in an interstage coupling path.

    183,    for cascaded amplifiers having a nonlinear device in a d.c.
    interstage coupling.

    185+,   for variable impedance in amplifier input networks.

    192+,   for variable impedance in amplifier output networks.

    293     and 296, for series energized semiconductor amplifiers.

    299+,   for combined diverse type semiconductors where one may be a
    variable impedance for the signal transmission path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 234
    through 289 for transformer and impedance systems for voltage magnitude
    control.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing subclasses 98, 99+, and 101 for
    electrical measuring and testing circuits having bridges with variable
    impedances thereon, which are varied by a separate control means.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, appropriate subclasses
    particularly subclasses 14, 15, 16, 17.1+, 81, and 213+ for wave
    transmission systems with variable impedance in the wave transmission path.

    334,    Tuners, appropriate subclasses for tuners, per se.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for the structure of
    variable inductors.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, appropriate subclasses for the structure of
    variable resistance devices.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 277+ for
    variable condenser structure.


CLS 330/145
TXT Subject matter under subclass 144 wherein the variable impedance means is
    an electron tube, either vacuum tube or gaseous which has a control means
    effective during operation of the tube, or a diode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70+,    for series energized vacuum tube amplifying devices.

    85,     for signal feedback amplifiers having an amplifier in the feedback
    path.

    138,    139 and 140, for amplifiers having means to control the input
    electrode bias voltage including respectively, biased rectifiers or
    discharge devices, electronic tube, or rectifier in the bias control
    circuit.

    164,    for cascaded amplifiers having an electronic tube or diode in the
    interstage coupling circuit.

    185+,   for amplifier input coupling networks which may have an electronic
    tube or diode as an impedance therein.

    192+,   for amplifier output coupling networks which may have an electronic
    tube or diode impedance therein.

    299+,   for combined diverse type semiconductors where one of the
    semiconductors may be a diode or transistor impedance for the signal
    transmission path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 227
    and 291 for discharge devices on voltage magnitude control systems
    generally.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 213+ for negative
    resistance and/or reactance networks of the active element type.

    334,    Tuners, subclasses 14+ for a tuner unit in which a reactance tube
    is used.


CLS 330/146
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the four arms of a
    Wheatstone bridge comprise four impedances of the amplifier circuit in such
    manner that at least one of the four impedances of the bridge is the
    discharge path of the amplifying device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for series energized vacuum tube amplifying devices with at least
    two of the devices arranged in the arms of a bridge.

    76+,    for amplifiers for compensating for interelectrode impedance
    (neutralization) by feedback where the input-output interelectrode
    impedance coupling and compensating circuits may be arranged in a balanced
    bridge.

    81,     for push-pull feedback amplifiers including plural stages which may
    have a bridge-like arrangement.

    118,    for push-pull vacuum tube amplifiers including those having plural
    stages with a bridge-like arrangement.

    175,    for interstage coupling circuits including bridge networks.

    273+,   for push-pull semiconductor amplifiers including those with plural
    stages presenting a structure similar to a bridge.

    293     and 296, for plural stage semiconductor amplifiers series energized
    which may include bridge arrangements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 252,
    333, and 365 for various impedance bridge arrangements, for voltage
    magnitude or phase control; see also the search notes under the above
    subclasses.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 169 for wave filters
    having a Wheatstone bridge arrangement.


    See also the search notes thereunder.


CLS 330/147
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein at least two separate and
    independent sources of signal energy are coupled to the input of the
    amplifying device.

    (1)     Note.  Where each of the separate sources has an amplifying device
    in its input circuit before being jointly coupled to an amplifying device,
    classification is not herein but in subclasses 84, and 124+ above.

    (2)     Note.  The two separate sources need not operate to feed signal
    energy to the amplifying device simultaneously but may operate selectively,
    for example, as by switching the sources whereby one is feeding the
    amplifying device at a time.

    (3)     Note.  A balanced circuit is treated as a single source in this
    class.  See the definition and notes under subclass 116 above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for amplifiers having distributed parameter type coupling means.

    69,     for sum and difference amplifiers.

    74,     for series energized vacuum tube amplifiers having plural separate
    inputs to series devices.

    84,     for signal amplifiers having plural amplifier channels.

    124+,   see (1) Note above, also for plural separate inputs to plural
    channels.

    185+,   for amplifiers having significant input networks.

    252+,   for semiconductor amplifiers having plural inputs or plural
    channels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 18+
    and 43+ for electrical transmission or interconnection systems having
    plural supply circuits or sources.


CLS 330/148
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein at least two separate
    signal output circuits are coupled from the output electrode or element of
    the signal amplifying device, for coupling to separate load devices.

    (1)     Note.  Where at least two of the signal output circuits each
    contain a signal amplifying device for amplifying the signal,
    classification is not herein but with plural signal amplifier channels in
    subclasses 124+ above.

    (2)     Note.  Any one or more of the separate signal output circuits may
    be switched selectively; operation need not be simultaneous for
    classification in this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  A balanced circuit is treated as a single load in this
    class.  See definition and notes for subclass 117 above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for amplifiers having distributed parameter type coupling means.

    73,     for amplifiers having series energized amplifying devices having
    plural separate output circuits.

    84,     for signal feedback amplifiers having plural amplifier channels.

    124+,   see (1) Note above, also for separate outputs from plural channels.

    192+,   for amplifiers with significant signal output circuit networks.

    252+,   for semiconductor amplifiers with plural separate signal outputs or
    plural channels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 11+
    for electric transmission or interconnection systems having plural load
    circuit systems.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous circuits having plural
    outputs.

    329,    Demodulators, subclasses 316+ for plural outputs in frequency
    demodulator and subclass 348 for plural outputs in an amplitude demodulator.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 100+ for wave
    transmission lines and networks having branched circuits.


CLS 330/149
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the signal has a hum or
    noise component inadvertently introduced therein, as where there is
    ineffective filtering of a rectified a.c. power supply or bias, and wherein
    such objectional component is removed or reduced by the same hum or noise
    component introduced into the signal path of the amplifier in such manner
    as to oppose the objectional signal component, thereby removing it from, or
    reducing it in, the output signal.

    (1)     Note.  Where such component is removed or reduced by negative
    feedback classification is in the appropriate subclass under subclass 75
    (SIGNAL FEEDBACK), above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     see (1) Note above.

    114,    for amplifiers having unrectified a.c. power supply including those
    with means to eliminate hum.

    118+,   for push-pull amplifiers which include means for opposing noise,
    hum, or other unwanted components inadvertently present with the signal,
    and wherein the compensation is inherent in the push-pull arrangement, per
    se.

    124+,   for plural channel amplifiers including those wherein an unwanted
    component in the signal is separately amplified and opposes the unwanted
    component in a channel which includes the signal and the unwanted component.

    150,    for cascaded amplifying devices of different characteristics
    including those wherein the characteristics of one stage compensate for
    those of another.

    151,    for cascaded amplifying devices with means to by-pass a stage
    wherein a feed forward component may oppose the same component in the
    signal path.

    199+,   for amplifiers with power or bias voltage supply including filters
    to eliminate hum, etc.

    296     and 297, for semiconductor amplifiers with bias or power supply
    circuitry.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 94+ for
    discharge device load systems having cathode or cathode heater power
    supply, with or without anode power supply, but excluding control electrode
    supply, including those having means for hum elimination, etc.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 549 for miscellaneous circuits with power supply and hum
    prevention or elimination means.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 167+ for wave
    filters, per se, which may be used to eliminate a frequency component,
    particularly subclasses 181+, for smoothing filters for power supply.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 39+ for electrical
    conversion systems including means to eliminate frequency components.


CLS 330/150
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including at least two stages of
    amplification (each stage as defined in the class definition and each stage
    having a vacuum tube amplifying device) such that, the input signal for
    each stage, except the first, is the output signal of the preceding stage,
    and wherein at least one of the cascaded amplifying devices has a
    significant difference in its characteristics such as a difference in the
    number of electrodes, or where the construction of each of at least two of
    the tubes is such that there is a difference in the tube characteristics,
    or where because of differences in biasing or energizing voltages the tube
    characteristics are different.

    (1)     Note.  Different types of vacuum tubes representing a genus or
    class and provided for above such as traveling wave tubes (subclass 43) and
    magnetrons (subclass 6) or traveling wave tubes and secondary emission
    tubes (subclass 42) when claimed in cascade are classified in subclass 3
    above.  Where vacuum tubes, are different in structural characteristics or
    some other feature, but all of the plural tubes fall within one of the
    genus types provided for above, as for example traveling wave tubes
    (subclass 43) classification is with the genus type and not in this
    subclass nor in subclass 3, above.

    (2)     Note.  Beam power tubes, broadly claimed with no other distinctive
    characteristics, when combined in cascade with another vacuum tube such as
    an ordinary triode are classified in this subclass and not in subclass 3 or
    subclasses 44+ above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      see (1) Note above.

    70+,    for series arranged vacuum tube amplifiers including cascaded
    amplifiers so arranged.

    310+,   for cascaded semiconductor amplifiers, particularly subclass 311
    for cascaded semiconductors of different characteristics.


CLS 330/151
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein means are provided to
    by-pass all or a part of the signal across the amplifier or of one or more
    stages of a cascade amplifier.

    (1)     Note.  For classification herein the by-pass means must be free of
    any amplifying device.  Subject matter having such additional amplifying
    device satisfies the definition for subclasses 124+ and is classified
    thereunder and not in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes subject matter involving a cascaded
    amplifier, for switching an amplifier device in or out of the cascaded
    arrangement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for amplifiers having distributed parameter coupling means,
    particularly subclass 54 for distributed amplifiers.

    70+,    for series energized amplifiers including cascaded amplifiers
    having such arrangement.

    84,     for signal feedback amplifiers having plural amplifier channels.

    88+,    92, and 98+, for cascaded amplifiers having signal feedback.

    120+,   for cascaded push-pull amplifiers.

    124+,   see (1) Note above.

    133,    for cascaded amplifiers having different bias control for different
    stages.

    145,    for amplifiers having a separately controlled tube in the signal
    path.

    147     and 148, for amplifiers having plural signal inputs and plural
    signal outputs, respectively.

    157,    for amplifier interstage couplings, per se, particularly subclass
    164, for an electronic tube or diode in the coupling circuit.

    310+,   for cascaded semiconductor amplifiers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 100+ for wave
    transmission passive network branched circuits.


CLS 330/152
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including at least three stages
    of amplification (each stage as defined in the class definition) such that,
    the input signal for each stage, except the first, is the output signal of
    the preceding stage; and where two of the interstage coupling means between
    successive amplifying devices have different characteristics.

    (1)     Note.  The following are examples of subject matter classified in
    this and indented subclasses:  one device is coupled from the plate and the
    other from the cathode; or one coupling has a tuned circuit and the other
    has not; or both couplings have circuits tuned to different frequencies or
    the two couplings may be similar but contain an impedance element or
    elements of one having different values from the corresponding element, or
    elements in the other interstage coupling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for plural diverse type amplifying devices.

    53+,    for amplifiers having distributed parameter type coupling.

    70+,    for series energized vacuum tube amplifiers.

    88,     92 and 98, for cascaded amplifiers including signal feedback.

    120+,   for interstage coupling between push-pull stages of an amplifier.

    133,    for different bias control on different stages of a cascaded
    amplifier.

    150,    for cascaded amplifiers with similar amplifying devices having
    different characteristics.

    151,    for amplifiers with means to by-pass a stage.

    157+,   for interstage coupling in an amplifier.

    310+,   for plural stage cascaded semiconductor amplifiers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for voltage magnitude and phase control systems generally, with
    various transformer and impedance networks to perform such functions.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 24+ for coupling
    networks for wave transmission, generally.


CLS 330/153
TXT Subject matter under subclass 152 wherein at least one of the interstage
    coupling means has a cathode follower signal output.

    (1)     Note.  If only the coupling of the last stage is a cathode follower
    and none of the previous stages has a cathode follower output,
    classification is not in this subclass.  For classification of cathode
    follower amplifiers and analogous subject matter see search notes
    immediately following.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    for push-pull vacuum tube amplifiers including cathode followers.

    168     and 172+, for amplifiers having a cathode follower in the
    interstage coupling.

    193+,   for amplifiers with cathode follower output coupling.

    310+,   for cascaded semiconductor amplifiers which may have an emitter
    follower stage analogous to cathode follower in a cascaded vacuum tube
    amplifier.


CLS 330/154
TXT Subject matter under subclass 152 wherein at least one of the interstage
    coupling means has a signal coupling transformer or a resonant circuit
    contained therein.

    (1)     Note.  Stagger tuned amplifiers are classified in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for amplifiers having wave guide, cavity, or concentric resonator
    coupling means.

    120,    for interstage coupling between push-pull amplifier stages
    including transformer coupling and resonant means in the coupling circuit.

    165+,   for amplifiers having transformer interstage coupling.

    302+,   for cascaded semiconductor amplifiers having frequency responsive
    signal coupling means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 24+ for wave
    transmission coupling means, generally, including resonant circuits and
    transformer coupling.

    334,    Tuners, appropriate subclasses for tuners, per se, and especially
    subclasses 59+ and 61+ for transformers used in a resonant circuit.


CLS 330/155
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein two or more elements such
    as resistors, reactors, etc., of any coupling network or different coupling
    networks, for transmission of the signal in the amplifier are constructed
    and arranged so that adjustment or control is simultaneous for such two or
    more elements, such adjustment may be for a tuner, a potentiometer, or any
    other means or any combination of such means, in the coupling circuits or
    associated circuits.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    particularly subclass 56 for distributed parameter coupling means
    including adjustment of such means.

    65+,    for structure of circuit elements when in an amplifier which may
    include the structure of adjustable circuit elements.

    108,    for a potentiometer common to the signal and feedback paths of an
    amplifier.

    116     and 117, for amplifiers with balanced-to-unbalanced and
    unbalanced-to-balanced coupling, respectively, which may involve adjustable
    circuit elements.

    120     and 122, for coupling of a push-pull amplifier which may involve
    adjustable circuit elements in the coupling.

    143,    for amplifiers with a thermally responsive impedance.

    144+,   for amplifiers having a variable impedance for the signal channel
    controlled by a separate control path.

    157+,   for amplifiers with interstage coupling which may have an
    adjustable element in the coupling.

    171,    190 and 197, for transformer structure.

    185+,   for amplifiers which may have an adjustable element in the input
    coupling.

    192+,   for amplifiers which may have an adjustable element in the output
    coupling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 24+, 81 and 219+
    for coupling means, attenuators, or distributed parameter type resonators,
    respectively, including those with variable circuit elements.

    334,    Tuners, appropriate subclasses for tuners, per se.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for variable inductor
    devices.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, appropriate subclasses for the structure of
    rheostats, and resistors.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 277+ for
    variable condensers.


CLS 330/156
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the signal input is
    floating and is applied between the control grid and cathode of a vacuum
    tube amplifying device, with the cathode having an impedance between it and
    ground which maintains the cathode voltage above ground, by reason of the
    anode current flowing through such impedance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70+,    for series energized amplifiers including those having signal
    coupling between cathode and grid similar to the subject matter in this
    subclass.

    87+,    for amplifiers having cathode impedance feedback particularly
    subclass 89 for cathode coupling between adjacent stages.

    119,    for push-pull amplifiers including coupling to the cathode.

    153+,   for amplifiers having interstage coupling to a cathode.

    186+,   for amplifiers having input coupling to a cathode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 589 for miscellaneous electron tube circuits with
    bootstrap circuit means.


CLS 330/157
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the amplifier is
    comprised of at least two amplifying devices in cascade, the two being in
    direct proximity in the cascaded circuit and wherein there are significant
    details or distinctive characteristics of the circuit by means of which the
    signal output of the preceding amplifying device is coupled to the signal
    input of the following cascaded amplifying device, or wherein the
    parameters or electrical characteristics of the output of the preceding
    device or the input of the following device, are claimed.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter disclosing interstage coupling but wherein
    only the output coupling of the first amplifying device is claimed or
    wherein only the input coupling of the following amplifying device is
    claimed is classified in this and appropriate indented subclasses and not
    with input or output coupling under subclasses 185+ or 192+, respectively.

    (2)     Note.  The output of the preceding amplifying device of the
    cascaded devices has an output electrode and a common electrode for the
    signal and the input of the following stage has an input electrode and a
    common electrode, to receive the signal.  Thus, there is involved a four
    terminal coupling network between output (including common electrode) and
    input (including common electrode) with usually two-series circuits between
    output and input electrodes and between common electrodes respectively and
    also shunt circuit elements often between such series circuits.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for plural diverse type amplifying devices which may involve
    interstage coupling between such devices.

    53+,    for coupling of distributed parameter type which may be interstage.

    65+,    for structure of circuit elements, other than transformer
    structure, which may be involved in interstage coupling.

    70+,    for interstage coupling between cascaded series energized tubes.

    88+,    92, and 98+, for interstage coupling in cascaded feedback
    amplifiers.

    120,    for interstage coupling in push-pull amplifiers.

    133,    for cascaded amplifiers having bias voltage control which may
    involve interstage coupling.

    143,    for thermally responsive impedance which may be involved in
    interstage coupling.

    144+,   for variable impedance controlled by separate control path which
    may be involved in interstage coupling.

    150,    for cascaded stages having amplifiers of different characteristics
    with interstage coupling means.

    151,    for cascaded stages with means to by-pass a stage.

    152+,   for diverse types interstage coupling in amplifiers having plural
    cascaded stages.

    155,    for unicontrol of coupling means which may involve interstage
    coupling.

    156,    for bootstrap coupling.

    185+,   for amplifiers with input coupling networks.  See (1) Note above.

    192+,   for amplifiers with output coupling networks.  See (1) Note above.

    310+,   for plural stage cascaded semiconductor amplifiers, involving
    interstage coupling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 24+, for passive
    coupling networks for wave transmission, generally.


CLS 330/158
TXT Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the signal derived from the
    preceding cascaded amplifying device is coupled to the cathode electrode of
    a following cascaded vacuum tube amplifying device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88+     and 91+, for amplifiers applying signal feedback to the cathode.

    89,     for amplifiers having adjacent cascaded stages with cathode-cathode
    coupling. See (1) Note thereunder.

    119,    for push-pull amplifiers with coupling to the cathode.

    156,    for bootstrap coupling where input signal is applied directly
    between grid and cathode.

    186+,   for input coupling to the cathode.


CLS 330/159
TXT Subject matter under subclass 158 wherein the interstage coupling has a
    d.c. conductive path for signal current from the output electrode of the
    preceding cascaded amplifying device to the input electrode of the
    following device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    187,    for amplifiers with d.c. input coupling to the cathode.


CLS 330/160
TXT Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the signal derived from the first
    of the two cascaded amplifying devices is coupled to the screen grid or an
    electrode other than the control grid or cathode, such as the anode
    electrode or the suppressor grid of the following cascaded amplifying
    device, which device is of the vacuum tube type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for space charge grid tube amplifiers wherein the first grid next
    to the cathode is biased positively with respect thereto and the signal
    input is applied to the grid next in succession from the cathode which is
    biased negatively with respect to the cathode.

    185     and 188+, for input coupling to a vacuum tube amplifying device
    including input coupling to an electrode other than the control grid or
    cathode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 124 for amplifiers
    combined with an electrical measuring device wherein the input is applied
    to the anode of the amplifying device (e.g., inverted amplifier).


CLS 330/161
TXT Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein the coupling has a d.c.
    conductive path for signal current from the output electrode of the
    preceding amplifying device to the input, electrode of the following of the
    two cascaded vacuum tube amplifying devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191,    for a d.c. amplifier input coupling which may be to an electrode of
    a vacuum tube amplifying device other than the control grid or cathode.


CLS 330/162
TXT Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the coupling between the two
    cascaded amplifying devices is from a grid, such as the screen grid,
    suppressor grid or control grid, or from between such a grid and an anode
    of the preceding amplifier device (of the vacuum tube type) of the two
    cascaded devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for amplifiers having secondary emission amplifier devices wherein
    the output may be from a secondary emissive electrode.

    192     and 195, for output coupling from a grid, such as the screen grid,
    suppressor grid or control grid or between such a grid and the anode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 124 for inverter
    amplifiers combined with measuring means where the output is from the
    control grid.


CLS 330/163
TXT Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein the coupling has a d.c.
    conductive signal path from the grid or from between the grid and anode of
    the preceding of the two cascaded amplifying devices (of the vacuum tube
    type) to the following device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198,    for d.c. output coupling which may involve coupling from a grid or
    from between a grid and the anode.


CLS 330/164
TXT Subject matter under subclass 157 in which the coupling circuit between the
    two cascaded stages has at least one path which includes an electronic
    discharge tube (which may be a gas tube or vacuum tube having control means
    effective during operation of the tube) or which includes a diode element
    which may be a glow tube, a rectifier vacuum tube diode or a dry rectifier
    diode, etc.

    (1)     Note.  The electronic tube or diode performs some function, such as
    an impedance, other than serving as an additional amplifying device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    for control of bias or power supply voltage by a biased rectifier
    or discharge device.

    139     and 140, for an amplifier including an electronic tube or
    rectifier, respectively, to control the input or gain control electrode
    bias.

    143,    where the diode or electronic tube is a thermally responsive
    element.

    145,    where the diode or electronic tube is a variable impedance
    controlled by a separate control path.

    185+,   for amplifier input circuits including any with an electronic tube
    or diode, in the input circuit (other than as a preceding amplifying stage).

    192+,   for amplifier output networks which may include an electronic tube
    or diode (other than as an amplifying stage).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 213+ for negative
    resistance and/or reactance networks which have an active element including
    electron tubes or diodes, as such active elements.


CLS 330/165
TXT Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the the signal coupling between
    the two cascaded amplifying device stages is by means of at least one
    transformer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for interstage coupling in push-pull amplifiers including
    transformer coupling.

    122,    for input or output coupling in push-pull amplifiers including
    transformer coupling.

    154,    for transformer coupling in plural stage cascaded vacuum tube
    amplifiers with at least two interstage coupling networks which have some
    different characteristic.

    188+,   for transformer coupled amplifier input circuits.

    195+,   for transformer coupled amplifier output circuits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 177+ for wave
    transmission transformer coupled circuits of the passive type, generally.

    334,    Tuners, subclasses 59+ and 61+ for tuners having a transformer in
    the resonant circuit.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses, for transformer structure.


CLS 330/166
TXT Subject matter under subclass 165 wherein, between the primary and
    secondary of the transformer, there is an additional capacitive or
    inductive reactor element which carries part of the signal current coupled
    between the two devices.


CLS 330/167
TXT Subject matter under subclass 165 wherein additional impedance which may be
    inductive, capacitive or resistive is included in either the primary or
    secondary winding circuit of the transformer which couples the signal
    between the two cascaded amplifier devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189,    for transformer input coupling with additional impedance connected
    to the primary or secondary winding circuit.

    196,    for transformer output coupling with additional impedance connected
    to the primary or secondary winding circuit.


CLS 330/168
TXT Subject matter under subclass 165 wherein means are provided to derive the
    signal from the cathode of the preceding amplifying device (of the vacuum
    tube type).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70+,    for series energized tubes which may have a cathode follower output.

    88+     and 91, for cascaded amplifiers having signal feedback to the
    cathode.

    117,    for amplifiers having unbalanced-to-balanced coupling including
    phase splitters with cathode coupled output.

    119,    for push-pull amplifier involving coupling from the cathode.

    153,    for different interstage coupling in cascaded amplifiers including
    a cathode follower stage.

    156,    for bootstrap coupled amplifiers.

    172+,   for interstage coupling from the cathode for other than transformer
    coupling.

    193,    for output networks from the cathode of the amplifying device.

    250+,   for semiconductor amplifiers having emitter signal output analogous
    to cathode follower output.


CLS 330/169
TXT Subject matter under subclass 165 wherein means are provided for adjusting
    the inductance of either the primary or secondary winding or the mutual
    inductance between the primary and secondary winding, in the latter case,
    for example, by varying the position of the primary or secondary windings
    or parts thereof relative to each other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    334,    Tuners, subclasses 61+ for tuners having mutual inductance variable
    means.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses particularly subclasses
    115+ for adjustable coupling by relatively moving coils, and subclasses
    130+ for relatively movable coil and core to vary the inductance.  Class
    336 is the general class for the structure of inductors including means to
    vary the inductance and mutual inductance.


CLS 330/170
TXT Subject matter under subclass 165 combined with shielding means, for the
    transformer, or parts thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Under interstage coupling, shielding and the structure of
    shielding are classified separately (subclass 170) from other structure of
    transformers (subclass 171).  Under input and output coupling no separate
    provision is made for shielding so that all structure of transformers in
    input or output amplifier coupling including shielding is classified in
    subclasses 190 and 197, below respectively.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for shielding combined with amplifiers or with circuit elements of
    amplifiers, generally.

    190,    for amplifier input coupling including transformer structure which
    may include shielding.

    197,    for amplifier output coupling including transformer structure which
    may include shielding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 35+, shielded
    or screened, for shielding electrical elements, generally.  See the search
    notes thereunder.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 84+ for shielding of inductors,
    generally.  See the search notes thereunder.


CLS 330/171
TXT Subject matter under subclass 165 involving the structure of the
    transformer coupling the signal between the two cascaded stages.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65+,    for structure of amplifier circuit elements other than transformers
    involved with an amplifier system.

    190,    for the structure of transformers in amplifier input coupling.

    197,    for the structure of transformers in amplifier output coupling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for transformer structure
    generally.


CLS 330/172
TXT Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the signal output is coupled form
    the cathode electrode of the preceding vacuum tube amplifier device of the
    two cascaded amplifying devices, to the input of the following amplifier
    device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70+,    for series energized vacuum tube amplifiers which may have an
    output circuit from the cathode.

    88      and 91, for cascaded vacuum tube amplifying devices with signal
    feedback from the cathode.

    89,     for amplifiers having adjacent cascaded stages with cathode-cathode
    coupling.

    117,    for amplifiers with unbalanced-to-balanced coupling including phase
    splitters with cathode output coupling.

    119,    for push-pull amplifiers with coupling from the cathode.

    153,    for plural stage cascaded vacuum tube amplifying devices with
    different coupling between stages including a cathode follower stage.

    156,    for bootstrap coupling.

    168,    for interstage transformer coupling from the cathode.

    193+,   for amplifier output coupling networks from the cathode of the
    amplifying device (cathode followers) see the notes and search notes
    thereunder.

    250+,   for semiconductor amplifiers having emitter output analogous to
    cathode follower output.


CLS 330/173
TXT Subject matter under subclass 172 wherein the coupling between the two
    cascaded amplifying devices is a d.c. conductive path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194,    for vacuum tube amplifier device output coupling circuits with d.c.
    coupling from the cathode.


CLS 330/174
TXT Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the coupling circuit between the
    two cascaded amplifier devices includes means to convert the electric
    signal to mechanical vibrations and means further to convert the mechanical
    vibrations back to electric signals, such means, generally, serving as
    either time or phase delay means or means to determine the transmission
    frequency of the coupling network.

    (1)     Note.  The electromechanical transducer means in this subclass is
    distinguished from subject matter of subclass 60 above, wherein the
    amplifying device itself includes a magnetostrictive means
    electromechanical transducer.  In this subclass, the electrical signal
    energy is not used to control another source of electrical energy applied
    to the transducer, but herein the electric signal, in being transmitted, is
    converted to mechanical energy and back to electrical energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for amplifiers having magnetostrictive means.

    185+,   for amplifier input circuits including any having an
    electromechanical transducer.  See (1) Note under subclass 157.

    192,    for amplifier output circuits including any having an
    electromechanical transducer.  See (1) Note under subclass 157.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 148+, 186, and
    187+ for delay lines using electromechanical transducers, and for wave
    filters using electromechanical transducers and piezo-electric types of
    such transducers, respectively.  See the search notes under these
    subclasses.


CLS 330/175
TXT Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the coupling includes a network
    having four impedance branches connected in series to form a closed
    circuit, two nonadjacent junction points serving as input terminals while
    the remaining two junction points serve as output terminals.

    (1)     Note.  See sections (1) and (2) under the definition of Class 333,
    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 74.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for plural amplifier devices having space discharge paths in
    different arms of a bridge.

    146,    for Wheatstone bridge with amplifier in at least one arm.

    185+,   for amplifier input coupling including any with a lattice or
    Wheatstone bridge network.  See (1) Note under subclass 157, above.

    192+,   for amplifier output coupling including any with a lattice or
    Wheatstone bridge network.  See (1) Note under subclass 157, above.


CLS 330/176
TXT Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the coupling includes a T, H, or
    Pi circuit network.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185+,   for amplifier input circuit networks including any with a T, H, or
    Pi circuit network.  See (1) Note under subclass 157, above.

    192+,   for amplifier output circuit networks including any with a T, H, or
    Pi circuit network.  See (1) Note under subclass 157, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 24+, appropriate
    subclasses thereunder for coupling circuits which may include T, H, of Pi
    networks.  See the notes and search notes under Class 333, subclass 24.


CLS 330/177
TXT Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein any path traced in series from
    the output electrode of the preceding of the two cascaded amplifying
    devices to the input electrode of the amplifier device of the following
    stage contains at least one capacitor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for push-pull amplifiers with significant interstage coupling which
    may include a blocking capacitor in such coupling.

    166,    for amplifiers with interstage transformer coupling having
    additional reactive coupling which may be a capacitor.

    185     and 186, for amplifier capacitor input coupling, generally, and to
    a cathode, respectively.

    192     and 193, for amplifier capacitor output coupling, generally, and
    from a cathode, respectively.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 24+ for coupling
    circuits generally, see notes and search notes under subclass 24.


CLS 330/178
TXT Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein the series path between the
    output electrode of the preceding of the two cascaded devices and the input
    electrode of the succeeding device has a resistor of inductance in such
    path in series with the coupling or blocking capacitor.


CLS 330/179
TXT Subject matter under subclass 177 having in addition an inductor connected
    to the anode output electrode of the preceding stage device or to the grid
    input electrode of the following stage device, in shunt across the signal
    transmission path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199+,   appropriate subclasses for circuits in the anode power supply or
    grid bias supply which may include an inductor. See the search notes under
    subclass 199, below.


CLS 330/180
TXT Subject matter under subclass 177 having in addition a resistance directly
    connected to the anode output electrode from the anode power supply of the
    preceding amplifier stage device and a resistance directly connected to the
    input grid electrode of the following amplifier stage device from the
    negative bias source or ground, each resistance being in shunt across the
    signal transmission path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199+,   for power or voltage supply circuits to the anode or grid
    electrodes which may have resistors therein.  See the search notes under
    subclass 199, below.


CLS 330/181
TXT Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the series coupling from the
    output electrode of the preceding amplifier device to the input electrode
    of the following amplifier device of the two cascaded stages has a d.c.
    conductive path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for periodic switching for input-output comparison including drift
    corrected d.c. amplifiers.

    10,     for modulator-demodulator amplifiers for amplifying d.c. signals.

    53+,    for amplifiers having distributed parameter coupling which may
    include d.c. interstage coupling.

    70+,    for series energized amplifiers.

    121,    for push-pull amplifiers having d.c. interstage coupling.

    125,    for plural amplifier channels involving a d.c. and an a.c. channel.

    159,    for interstage d.c. coupling to the cathode.

    161,    for d.c. interstage coupling to the screen grid or electrode other
    than control grid or cathode.

    163,    for d.c. interstage output coupling from a grid or between a grid
    and the anode.

    173,    for d.c. interstage coupling from the cathode.

    187,    for input d.c. coupling to the cathode.

    191,    for d.c. input coupling, generally.

    194,    for d.c. output coupling from the cathode.

    198,    for d.c. output coupling, generally.

    289,    for d.c. conductively coupled cascaded semiconductor amplifiers.

    293     and 296, for series energized cascaded semiconductor amplifiers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 24+ for wave
    transmission coupling, generally.  See, also, search notes under subclass
    24.


CLS 330/182
TXT Subject matter under subclass 181 wherein the series coupling d.c.
    conductive path between the output electrode of the preceding amplifying
    device and the input electrode of the following amplifying device contains
    therein a reactive element, such as an inductor or parallel to a d.c.
    conductive element in the series path there is a capacitive reactive
    element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for amplifiers with distributed parameter coupling which may
    involve a d.c. conductive path including a reactive element.

    107,    for signal feedback amplifiers having a phase shift network in the
    loop path.

    121,    for push-pull amplifiers having d.c. interstage coupling including
    any with series reactor element.

    143,    for amplifiers having a thermally responsive impedance.

    144+,   for amplifiers having a variable impedance in the signal path
    controlled by a separate control path.

    166,    for transformer coupled amplifier stages including a d.c. reactive
    element (inductor coil) jointing the primary and secondary windings.

    175,    for amplifiers having a lattice or Wheatstone bridge network in the
    interstage coupling circuit.

    176,    for amplifiers having a T, H, or Pi network in the interstage
    coupling.

    302+,   for semiconductor amplifiers having frequency responsive means in
    the signal transmission path.


CLS 330/183
TXT Subject matter under subclass 181 wherein the coupling contains a device
    whose impedance (which may be resistive, capacitive, or inductive or any
    combination of these) is such that the relationship of voltage across the
    device to the current flow therein is nonlinear.

    (1)     Note.  The device may be in shunt across the signal transmission
    path, or in the d.c. series path between the vacuum tube amplifying
    devices, or in any other position in the signal coupling circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86,     for signal amplifiers with a variable impedance in the feedback
    path which is varied by a separate control path.

    95,     for feedback amplifiers having a nonlinear impedance means in the
    cathode circuit.

    110,    for feedback amplifiers having a nonlinear impedance element in the
    loop path.

    127+,   for nonlinear impedances involved in circuits for the control of
    amplifier power supply or bias voltage.

    143,    for amplifiers having a thermally responsive impedance.

    144+,   for amplifiers having a variable impedance for the signal channel
    which is varied by a separate control path.

    164,    for cascaded amplifiers having an electronic tube or diode in an
    interstage coupling circuit.

    174,    for cascaded amplifiers having an electromechanical transducer such
    as a piezo-electric crystal in an interstage coupling circuit.

    185,    or appropriate indented subclass for a nonlinear device involved in
    the input coupling.

    192,    or appropriate indented subclass for a nonlinear device involved in
    the output coupling.

    299+,   for semiconductor amplifiers having a diverse type semiconductor,
    which may be a nonlinear coupling impedance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses for active solid-state devices, per se, including
    subclasses 115, 123 and 162 through 166 which are directed to devices
    involving amplification.


    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 401+
    for nonlinear reactor systems.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous nonlinear transistor and
    electron tube circuits.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, appropriate subclasses for
    wave transmission networks which may involve nonlinear impedance elements.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 13+ for nonlinear resistor
    elements.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 271+ for
    structure of a capacitor which may be nonlinear.


CLS 330/184
TXT Subject matter under subclass 181 wherein the series coupling d.c.
    conductive path between the output electrode of the preceding amplifying
    device and the input electrode of the following amplifying device of the
    two cascaded amplifying devices contains therein a resistor.


CLS 330/185
TXT Subject matter under the class definition involving significant detail or
    distinctive characteristics of the electrical circuit coupling a source of
    signal energy to the input of the amplifying device; or involving
    electrical characteristics of the source; or involving input electrical
    parameters of the amplifying device to which the signal input is coupled.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter in which a source is claimed by name only as
    a specific art device, as for example, a microphone, is classified with
    specific art device and not with amplifiers. Subject matter in which the
    source device may be broadly claimed, not by name, but by some distinctive
    identifying feature thereof, as where the microphone source is claimed as a
    "means for converting sound signals", classification is not with amplifiers
    but with the distinctive art device.

    (2)     Note.  The term "generator" or "oscillator" in claims, where either
    appears as a source of signal energy without further qualification except
    an electrical characteristic such as impedance, reactance etc., is treated
    as a generalized source of signal energy, and classification is with
    amplifiers.  Where specific details of the generator or oscillator are
    claimed, classification is with the type of generator established in the
    claims or with oscillators in Class 331, Oscillators.

    (3)     Note.  Amplifier subject matter disclosing an interstage coupling
    but wherein only the input coupling to the succeeding stage is claimed and
    no interstage coupling or details to establish such coupling are claimed,
    is not classified in this and indented subclasses but in the appropriate
    subclass indented under subclass 157, (Interstage Coupling).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65+,    for input coupling involving structure of any of the input circuit
    elements.

    74,     for plural inputs to series energized tubes.

    106,    for amplifiers having feedback in series with the input source.

    108,    for input coupling which may include a potentiometer therein common
    to the signal and feedback paths.

    116,    for amplifiers with balanced input involved in
    balanced-to-unbalanced circuits.

    117,    for amplifiers with unbalanced input involved in
    unbalanced-to-balanced circuits.

    122,    for push-pull amplifiers with significant input coupling.

    143,    for amplifiers having thermally responsive impedance which may be
    in the input coupling.

    144,    for amplifiers with variable impedance controlled by separate
    control path which may be in the input coupling.

    147,    for plural signal inputs.

    157+,   appropriate subclasses for input coupling involved in interstage
    coupling particularly subclasses 158+ and 160+.  See (3) Note under this
    subclass above.

    192,    for output coupling networks.

    252+,   for semiconductor amplifiers with plural inputs.

    275     and 301, for semiconductor amplifier devices having balanced
    coupling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 24+ for passive
    coupling networks for wave transmission generally.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, appropriate subclasses for the structure of
    rheostats or resistors which may be used in input coupling.


CLS 330/186
TXT Subject matter under subclass 185 wherein the input signal is coupled to
    the cathode of a vacuum tube amplifying device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88+     and 91+, for signal feedback to a cathode circuit, particularly
    subclass 89 for cathode-cathode coupling between adjacent stages.

    119,    for push-pull amplifiers involving coupling to the cathode.

    156,    involving coupling directly between cathode and grid.

    158+,   for interstage coupling to the cathode.

    250+,   for subject matter including semiconductor device input coupling to
    emitter, which may be the dual or analogue of an input coupling circuit to
    the cathode electrode of a vacuum tube amplifying device.


CLS 330/187
TXT Subject matter under subclass 186 wherein the input coupling network has a
    d.c. conductive path from the source of signal energy to the cathode input
    electrode of the amplifying device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159,    for d.c. interstage coupling to the cathode of a vacuum tube
    amplifying device.


CLS 330/188
TXT Subject matter under subclass 185 in which the input circuit includes a
    transformer which couples the signal energy from the signal source to the
    amplifier device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for interstage coupling between push-pull stages which may involve
    transformer coupling.

    122,    for input coupling for push-pull amplifiers which may involve
    transformer coupling.

    154,    for transformer coupling which may be involved in a cascaded
    amplifier with different interstage couplings.

    165+,   involving interstage transformer coupling.

    195+,   for output transformer coupling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 177+ for passive
    wave transmission transformer coupling circuits generally.


CLS 330/189
TXT Subject matter under subclass 188 wherein additional impedance which may be
    capacitive, inductive, or resistive is included in either the primary or
    secondary winding circuit of the input coupling transformer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    for interstage transformer coupling, with additional impedance in
    the primary or secondary winding circuit.

    195+,   for output transformer coupling including additional impedance in
    the primary or secondary winding of the transformer coupling network.


CLS 330/190
TXT Subject matter under subclass 188 involving the structure of the
    transformer in the input coupling circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65+,    for structure of amplifier system elements other than that of the
    transformer.

    170,    for interstage transformer coupling with shielding.

    171,    for interstage transformer structure.

    197,    for structure of the transformer in the output coupling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for transformer structure,
    per se.


CLS 330/191
TXT Subject matter under subclass 185 wherein the input coupling circuit has a
    d.c. conductive path from the signal input source to the signal input
    electrode of the amplifying device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for periodic switching for input-output comparison including drift
    corrected d.c. amplifiers.

    10,     for modulator-demodulator amplifiers for amplifying d.c. signals.

    53+,    for amplifiers having distributed parameter coupling means which
    may have a d.c. conductive path.

    125,    for plural amplifier channels involving a d.c. and an a.c.
    amplifier channel.

    159,    for interstage d.c. coupling to cathode.

    161,    for interstage d.c. coupling to screen grid or electrode other than
    control grid or cathode.

    163,    for d.c. interstage coupling from grid or between grid and anode.

    173,    for d.c. interstage coupling from cathode.

    181+,   for d.c. interstage coupling.

    187,    for cathode input d.c. coupling.

    194,    for d.c. coupling from cathode.

    198,    for d.c. output coupling.


CLS 330/192
TXT Subject matter under the class definition involving significant detail or
    distinctive characteristics of the electrical circuit coupling the output
    signal from the amplifying device to a load for utilizing such signal; or
    involving electrical characteristics or vacuum tube parameters such as
    output impedance of the amplifying device or impedance of the load involved
    in such coupling.

    (1)     Note.  Where the load is claimed, even broadly, or by name only as
    a specific electrical art device, as for example, as a loudspeaker,
    classification is not in this class, but with the load art device claimed.
    Where characteristics of the load device are claimed, which are peculiar to
    the disclosed electrical art device or to a specific type of electrical art
    device, classification is with the load art device established in the claim.

    (2)     Note.  Subject matter wherein general electrical characteristics of
    the load are claimed, as for example, "a load having a variable impedance",
    is classified in this or indented subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  Subject matter disclosing an interstage coupling and where
    only the output coupling of a preceding stage is claimed, is not classified
    in this and indented subclasses but in subclass 157 and appropriate
    indented subclasses thereof although the coupling is claimed to establish
    an output coupling or claimed as an output coupling.

    (4)     Note.  Subject matter wherein an amplifier combined with an
    oscillator as load for the amplifier are classified with amplifiers when
    the oscillator is claimed by name only. Where specific details of the
    oscillator are claimed classification is in Class 331, Oscillators.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for distributed parameter type output coupling.

    65+,    for output coupling involving structure of any of the output
    network circuit elements.

    73,     for plural outputs from series energized tubes.

    105,    for output coupling involving feedback from an impedance in series
    with the output load.

    108,    for output coupling including a potentiometer therein common to the
    signal and feedback paths.

    116,    for unbalanced output coupling in amplifiers having
    balanced-unbalanced coupling.

    117,    for balanced output coupling in amplifiers having
    unbalanced-balanced coupling.

    122,    for output coupling from a push-pull amplifier.

    143,    for thermally responsive impedance which may be in the output
    coupling.

    144+,   for variable impedance which may be in the output coupling.

    157+,   for interstage coupling involving coupling from the output of an
    amplifier device particularly subclasses 162+ for output coupling from grid
    or between grid and anode, subclass 168 for transformer coupling from
    cathode, 172+ for other interstage coupling from the cathode.

    185,    for input coupling networks for amplifiers.

    252+,   for semiconductor amplifiers having plural outputs.

    275     and 301, for semiconductor amplifiers having either balanced or
    unbalanced output.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 24+ for passive
    coupling networks for wave transmission in general.


CLS 330/193
TXT Subject matter under subclass 192, wherein the output signal is coupled
    from the cathode electrode of a vacuum tube amplifying device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70+,    for series energized vacuum tube amplifiers which may have the
    output coupled from the cathode of a vacuum tube amplifying device.

    88+     and 91, for signal feedback coupled from the cathode particularly
    subclass 89 for cathode-cathode coupling of adjacent stages.

    117,    for unbalanced-to-balanced coupling including phase splitters
    having cathode coupled output.

    119,    for push-pull amplifiers involving coupling from the cathode.

    153,    for cascaded amplifiers having plural interstage couplings of
    different characteristics.

    156,    for bootstrap coupling.

    168,    for transformer interstage coupling from the cathode.

    172+,   for interstage coupling from the cathode.

    250+,   for semiconductor device emitter follower circuits, analogous to
    cathode follower circuits.

    293     and 296, for series energized cascaded semiconductor amplifier
    devices which may have the output coupled from an emitter electrode of a
    transistor.


CLS 330/194
TXT Subject matter under subclass 193 in which the output coupling network has
    a d.c. conductive path from the cathode to the load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173,    for d.c. coupling from the cathode involved in interstage coupling.


CLS 330/195
TXT Subject matter under subclass 192 in which the output circuit network
    includes a transformer for coupling the signal from the amplifier device to
    the load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120     and 122, for push-pull amplifiers which may involve transformer
    output coupling.

    154,    for transformer coupling involved in plural diverse stages of a
    cascaded amplifier.

    165+,   involving interstage transformer coupling.

    188+,   for input transformer coupling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 177+ for wave
    transmission transformer coupling circuits in general.

    334,    Tuners, subclasses 59+ and 61+ for tuners having a transformer in
    the resonant circuit.


CLS 330/196
TXT Subject matter under subclass 195 where additional impedance which may be
    capacitive, inductive, or resistive is included in the primary or secondary
    winding circuit of the output coupling transformer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS

    167,    for interstage transformer coupling with additional impedance in
    the primary or secondary winding circuit.

    189,    for input transformer coupling with additional impedance connected
    in the primary or secondary winding circuit.


CLS 330/197
TXT Subject matter under subclass 195 involving the structure of the
    transformer in the output coupling circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65+,    for structure of amplifier system elements other than that of the
    transformer.

    170,    for interstage transformer coupling with shielding.

    171,    for interstage transformer structure.

    190,    for input transformer structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for transformer structure,
    per se.


CLS 330/198
TXT Subject matter under subclass 192 wherein the output coupling network has a
    d.c. conductive path from the output electrode of the amplifying device to
    the load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for periodic switching for input-output comparison including drift
    corrected d.c.amplifiers.

    10,     for modulator-demodulator amplifiers for amplifying d.c. signals.

    53+,    for amplifiers having distributed parameter coupling means which
    may have a d.c. conductive path.

    125,    for plural amplifier channels involving a d.c. and an a.c.
    amplifier channel.

    159,    for interstage d.c. coupling to cathode.

    161,    for interstage d.c. coupling to screen grid or electrode other than
    control grid or cathode.

    163,    for d.c. interstage coupling from grid or between grid and anode.

    173,    for d.c. interstage coupling from cathode.

    181+,   for d.c. interstage coupling.

    187,    for cathode input d.c. coupling.

    191,    for d.c. input coupling.

    194,    for d.c. coupling from cathode.


CLS 330/199
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which the "source of
    electrical energy" controlled by the signal input; or biasing means applied
    to the "amplifying device", or the means to apply such energy or bias, such
    as the circuits through which such source or bias is applied; or means for
    isolating such source or biasing means from the signal path or other
    amplifier circuits (by filters, isolating resistors, or other means), is
    significantly claimed, and which subject matter is not provided for in any
    of the previous subclasses.

    (1)     Note.  Merely claiming power supply source or biasing means by name
    only or broadly without significant detail or distinctive characteristics
    is insufficient for classification in this and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for maser type amplifying devices.

    5,      for solid element wave propagating amplifying devices.

    6,      for Hall effect type means.

    7,      for capacitive amplifying devices.

    8,      for saturable reactor type amplifying devices.

    41,     for gas or vapor tube amplifying devices.

    42,     for secondary electron emission tube amplifying device.

    43,     for traveling wave type tube.

    44+,    for electron beam tube amplifying device.

    47+,    for magnetically influenced discharge devices, (e.g., magnetrons).

    49,     for vacuum tube having distributed parameter impedance
    characteristics.

    58,     for rotating dynamoelectric amplifying devices.

    60,     for magnetostrictive type amplifying devices.

    61+,    for restrictive and magnetoresistive type amplifying devices.

    63,     for significant power supply or biasing means combined with an
    amplifying device and magnetic means which controls the energy of said
    power supply or biasing means, or when a magnetic means is involved in some
    other manner in the structure of an amplifying device combined with
    significant power supply or biasing means.

    64,     for space charge grid tubes biased to operate as such.

    70+,    for series energized vacuum tube amplifiers and 18 for series
    energized semiconductor amplifiers.

    113,    for polyphase power supply.

    114+,   for unrectified a.c. power supply.

    123,    for amplifiers including a push-pull stage having significant bias
    or power supply means.

    127+,   for amplifiers with means to control the bias or power supply
    voltage.

    142,    for cathode self-biasing circuits.

    149,    for hum elimination by introduction of the hum component in the
    signal path in opposed phase.

    296     and 297, for semi-conductor type amplifying devices when combined
    with significant power supply or bias means or involving related circuitry.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 149+
    for miscellaneous ``power pack'' systems.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 91+ for
    cathode or cathode heater including anode supply circuit but not including
    any grid biasing circuit.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 530+ for miscellaneous circuits combined with power
    supply or bias means.

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses for demodulators with
    particular power supply.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    333+ for laser amplifiers.


CLS 330/200
TXT Subject matter under subclass 199 where the power supply or bias means is
    for an amplifier comprising two or more stages of amplification.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for plural diverse type amplifying devices which may involve power
    supply or bias means.

    88+,    92, and 98+, for cascaded signal feedback amplifiers which may
    involve power supply or bias means.

    123,    for push-pull amplifiers, which may be cascaded, having significant
    bias or power supply means.

    124,    for plural amplifier channels which may involve cascaded amplifiers
    having significant power or bias supply means.

    133,    for different bias controls for different stages of a cascaded
    amplifier.

    150,    for cascaded amplifiers with different characteristics which may be
    different bias means or voltages.

    152+,   for cascaded amplifiers, differently coupled between stages, which
    may involve circuitry for the bias or power supply means also.

    157+,   for amplifiers with interstage coupling circuits which may involve
    circuitry for the bias or power supply means also.

    296+,   for plural stage semiconductor amplifiers involving bias or power
    supply circuitry.


CLS 330/201
TXT Subject matter under subclass 200 where the filamentary cathodes of at
    least one vacuum tube amplifying device of the plural stage amplifier
    derives its electrical heating supply either from the anode or anode power
    supply of one vacuum tube amplifying device stage of the plural stage
    amplifier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    for amplifiers having unrectified a.c. power supplied to a
    filamentary cathode (directly heated type).

    205,    for similar subject matter for a filamentary cathode also involving
    power supply or bias means for an input electrode.

    206,    for power supply or bias means applied to a filamentary cathode
    (directly heated type), generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 94+ for
    power supply or power supply circuit for cathode filament or cathode heater
    circuit with or without anode supply but not including grid biasing supply.


CLS 330/202
TXT Subject matter under subclass 199 wherein the "source of electrical
    energy", biasing means, the circuit or means for supplying such electrical
    energy or bias voltage, or isolating means for such source or bias means
    supplies the anode of a vacuum tube amplifying device or isolates such
    supply for the anode from other parts of the amplifier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70+,    for series energized amplifiers.

    128,    for control of bias or power supply voltage with control means in
    anode or screen grid circuit.

    157+,   185+ and 192+, appropriate subclasses thereunder for impedances
    from the power source to anode involved in interstage, input, and output
    coupling respectively.

    293+,   for series energized semiconductor amplifying devices.


CLS 330/203
TXT Subject matter under subclass 202 where additional bias supply or isolating
    means are furnished for an input electrode of an amplifying device.

    (1)     Note.  Input electrode refers to any electrode to which the
    electrical signal input is applied, usually the control grid physically
    next to the cathode, and the cathode which is, usually, also common to the
    input and output circuits of the amplifier, the anode being an output
    electrode.

    (2)     Note.  Cathode self-biasing circuits where the bias is established
    by the flow of plate current through the cathode impedance are not
    classified herein but in subclass 142 above.


CLS 330/204
TXT Subject matter under subclass 199 wherein the bias supply or isolating
    means is furnished to or for an input electrode of a vacuum tube amplifying
    device.

    (1)     Note.  Input electrode refers to any electrode to which the
    electrical signal input is applied, usually the control grid physically
    next to the cathode and the cathode which is usually, also common to the
    input and output circuits of the amplifier, the anode being an output
    electrode.  In grounded grid amplifiers the relationship of cathode and
    anode as described above is, of course, usually reversed.

    (2)     Note.  Cathode self-biasing circuits where the bias is established
    by the flow of plate current through the cathode impedance are not
    classified herein but in subclass 142.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157+,   185+ and 192+, for impedances in the input electrode bias circuit
    involved in interstage, input, or output coupling, respectively.


CLS 330/205
TXT Subject matter under subclass 204 wherein power supply, bias means or
    isolating means are supplied to the filamentary cathode of the vacuum tube
    amplifying device, as input electrode; and/or as cathode heating electrical
    current supply to the directly heated filamentary cathode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    for amplifiers having unrectified a.c. power supplied to a
    filamentary cathode.

    127,    for control of emission of a cathode electrode.

    201,    for power supply bias means for cathode filaments in a plural stage
    amplifier heated by the anode current or by current from the anode supply
    source.

    206,    for power supply for a filamentary cathode generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 94+ for
    power supply or power supply circuit for cathode filament or cathode heater
    circuit with or without anode supply but not including grid biasing supply.


CLS 330/206
TXT Subject matter under subclass 199 which may include the heater current
    supply for a filamentary cathode of a vacuum tube amplifying device not
    classified in any preceding subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    for amplifiers having unrectified a.c. power supplied to a
    filamentary cathode.

    127,    for control of emission of a cathode electrode.

    201,    for power supply bias means for cathode filaments in a plural stage
    amplifier heated by the anode current or by current from the anode supply
    source.

    205,    for similar subject matter for a filamentary cathode also involving
    power supply or bias means for an input electrode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 94+ for
    power supply or power supply circuit for cathode filament or cathode heater
    circuit with or without anode supply but not including grid biasing supply.


CLS 330/207
TXT Subject matter under the class definition not provided for in any of the
    subclasses above.


CLS 330/250
TXT WITH SEMICONDUCTOR AMPLIFYING DEVICE (E.G., TRANSISTOR):

    Subject matter under the class definition in which the amplifying device is
    a semiconductor.

    (1)     Note.  Semiconductors are those materials which have a specific
    resistance, for example, of the order of that of germanium, silicon,
    selenium, etc.  Subject matter including insulators which are in operation
    reduced to specific resistance values of the aforesaid range, by alpha or
    electron  bombardment, heat or other means so they act in the circuit,
    broadly, as semiconductors, are classified in this or appropriate indented
    subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  For specific types of amplifier devices in amplifiers, which
    may include a semiconductor material, see the pertinent subclass for the
    particular semiconductor device involved in this class.

    (3)     Note.  For vacuum tube amplifier device, amplifier circuits similar
    or related to semiconductor amplifier device circuits, see below the
    appropriate subclass and indented subclasses for such circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for combined plural diverse amplifying-type devices, where one of
    the amplifying devices is of the semiconductor type.

    4,      for master-type amplifying devices wherein the master excited
    substance is a semiconductor.

    4.9,    for parametric semiconductor amplifiers.

    5,      for solid element wave propagating amplifying devices wherein the
    solid element is a semiconductor.

    6,      for Hall effect-type semiconductor amplifying devices wherein the
    Hall effect material is a semiconductor.

    7,      for capacitive amplifying devices, some of which may have
    semiconductor properties.

    9,      for amplifier systems with periodic switching input-output
    comparison of signal which may have a semiconductor amplifying device.

    10,     for modulator-demodulator amplifier systems which may have
    semiconductor amplifier devices.

    11,     for amplifiers having D.C. reinsertion circuits which may include a
    semiconductor amplifying device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses integrated circuit structure with active solid-state
    devices, especially subclasses 115, 123, and 157 through 161 for
    regenerative type devices with amplification means, and subclasses 446 and
    499+ for integrated circuit devices with electrically isolated components.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous nonlinear conductor
    device (e.g., transistor) circuits.  See search notes.

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses for demodulators utilizing
    transistor elements.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, for transistor
    circuits with electric relays or electromagnetic loads.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, appropriate subclass
    for methods of making semiconductor electrical devices.


CLS 330/251
TXT Including class D amplifier:

    Subject matter under subclass 250 including an amplifier which utilizes
    switching-mode techniques.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9       and 10, for amplifiers which may use switching amplifiers as a
    subcircuit thereof.

    207,    for amplifiers using switching-mode techniques.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 365+ for transistors used in a switching mode.


CLS 330/252
TXT Including differential amplifier:

    Subject matter under subclass 250 including an amplifier having two similar
    input circuits so connected that they respond to the difference between two
    voltages or currents, but effectively suppress like voltages or currents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for tube-type amplifiers functioning in a differential mode.


CLS 330/253
TXT Having field effect transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 252 wherein a field effect transistor (FET)
    is utilized in the circuit with the differential amplifier.

    (1)     Note.  A field effect transistor (FET) is a semiconductor device in
    which the resistance between two terminals, the source and drain, depends
    on a field produced by a voltage applied to the third terminal, the gate.

    (2)     Note.  The field may modulate a depletion region, as in a junction
    FET, or it may cause a conductivity change in a channel, as in a MOS-FET.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264,    for FET in combination with push-pull utilized in complementary
    symmetry.

    269,    for FET in combination with push-pull amplifier.

    277,    for FET in other transistor amplifiers.

    300,    for FET in combined diverse-type circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 581 for field-effect transistors used in miscellaneous
    circuits.


CLS 330/254
TXT Having gain control means:

    Subject matter under subclass 252 including circuitry which controls the
    amplification of the applied signal.

    (1)     Note.  Gain is any increase in power when a signal is transmitted
    from one point to another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278+,   for other semiconductor amplifiers with gain control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 645+ for color television circuits having
    gain control.


CLS 330/255
TXT Having push-pull amplifier stage:

    Subject matter under subclass 252 including an amplifier which has two
    identical signal branches connected so as to operate in phase opposition
    and with input and output connections, each balanced to ground.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for push-pull amplifiers with feedback neutralization.

    81+,    for push-pull amplifiers with feedback.

    118+,   for vacuum tube amplifiers including a push-pull stage.

    262,    for push-pull amplifiers not in combination with differential
    amplifiers.


CLS 330/256
TXT Having temperature compensation means:

    Subject matter under subclass 252 wherein temperature compensating means
    are utilized to protect or stabilize the amplifying device from changes in
    the ambient temperature.

    (1)     Note.  Changes in the ambient temperature can change the operating
    characteristics of the amplifier and thereby change the output signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266,    for temperature compensation in complementary push-pull amplifiers.

    272,    for temperature compensation in a push-pull amplifier.

    289,    for temperature compensation in other transistor amplifiers.


CLS 330/257
TXT Having current mirror amplifier:

    Subject matter under subclass 252 wherein an amplifier having a gain which
    is substantially independent of the individual common emitter forward
    current gains of its component transistor, is utilized.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    288,    for current mirror amplifier in other transistor amplifiers.


CLS 330/258
TXT Having common mode rejection circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 252 wherein means are utilized which ignore a
    signal that appears simultaneously and in phase at both input terminals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for differential amplifiers which may include a common mode
    rejection circuit.


CLS 330/259
TXT Having D.C. feedback bias control for stabilization:

    Subject matter under subclass 252 including a feedback circuit for direct
    currents for the purpose of operating point stabilization.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for amplifiers with periodic switching for input-output comparison
    including those having feedback circuits for drift correction, etc.

    270,    for D.C. feedback in push-pull complementary symmetry amplifiers.

    290,    for D.C. feedback in other transistor amplifiers.


CLS 330/260
TXT Having signal feedback means:

    Subject matter under subclass 252 wherein a portion of the electrical
    signal output energy is applied to the input of the amplifier.

    (1)     Note.  There is a shared impedance for the input and output
    circuits involved.

    (2)     Note.  The amplifier in this subclass may be any stage or group of
    stages of a cascaded amplifier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for amplifiers with periodic switching input-output comparison
    including those with feedback circuits.

    75+,    appropriate subclasses for vacuum tube signal feedback amplifiers.

    265,    for signal feedback in complementary push-pull amplifiers.

    271,    for signal feedback in push-pull amplifier.

    282,    for signal feedback in gain control circuit.

    291,    for feedback in other transistor amplifiers.


CLS 330/261
TXT Having particular biasing arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 252 with specific details or distinctive
    characteristics of the biasing means applied to the amplifying device.

    (1)     Note.  Merely claiming biasing means or bias filter by name only,
    or broadly without significant detail or distinctive characteristics, is
    insufficient for classification in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199+,   for particular biasing in other amplifiers.

    267,    for particular biasing in combination with complementary symmetry.

    273,    for particular biasing in combination with a push-pull amplifier.

    285,    for particular biasing in gain control means.

    296,    for particular biasing in other transistor amplifiers.


CLS 330/262
TXT Including push-pull amplifier:

    Subject matter under subclass 250 including at least one push-pull
    amplifier.

    (1)     Note.  See section I under the general class for the definition of
    "Push-Pull Amplifier".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for push-pull amplifiers with feedback neutralization.

    81+,    for push-pull amplifiers with feedback.

    118+,   for vacuum tube amplifiers including a push-pull stage.

    255,    for push-pull amplifiers in combination with differential
    amplifiers.


CLS 330/263
TXT Having complementary symmetry:

    Subject matter under subclass 262 wherein semiconductor devices of opposite
    conductivity are utilized.

    (1)     Note.  Complementary symmetry is an arrangement of NPN and PNP
    transistors that provide push-pull operation from one input signal.

    (2)     Note.  There are two complementary types of conductivity in
    semiconductors:  The N-type where conduction is largely by electrons; and
    the P-type where conduction appears to be largely carried by positive
    charges (i.e., holes).  In junction transistors which consist of zones of
    more than one conductivity type of semiconductor material, the conductivity
    is determined by the control zone so that the PNP-type junction transistor
    is equivalent to an N-type semiconductor body or an N-type point contact
    semiconductor device and an NPN junction type similarly equivalent to a
    P-type of semiconductor device of a single conductivity type of material.


CLS 330/264
TXT And field effect transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 263 wherein a field effect transistor (FET)
    is utilized in the circuit.

    (1)     Note.  A field effect transistor (FET) is a semiconductor device in
    which the resistance between two terminals, the source and drain, depends
    on a field produced by a voltage applied to the third terminal, the gate.

    (2)     Note.  The field may modulate a depletion region, as in a junction
    FET, or it may cause a conductivity change in a channel, as in a MOS-FET.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    253,    for FET in combination with differential amplifiers.

    269,    for FET in combination with push-pull amplifiers.

    277,    for field effect transistors in other transistor amplifiers.

    300,    for field effect transistors in combined diverse-type semiconductor
    devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 581 for miscellaneous circuits using field-effect
    transistors.


CLS 330/265
TXT And feedback means:

    Subject matter under subclass 263 wherein a portion of the amplifier stage
    output signal is returned to the input of the amplifier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    260,    for signal feedback in differential amplifiers.

    271,    for signal feedback in push-pull amplifiers.

    282,    for signal feedback in gain control circuits.

    291,    for signal feedback in other transistor amplifiers.


CLS 330/266
TXT And temperature compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 263 wherein temperature compensating means
    are utilized to protect or stabilize the amplifying device from changes in
    the ambient temperature.

    (1)     Note.  Changes in the ambient temperature can change the operating
    characteristics of the amplifier and thereby change the output signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256,    for temperature compensation in differential amplifiers.

    272,    for temperature compensation in a push-pull amplifier.

    289,    for temperature compensation in other transistor amplifiers.


CLS 330/267
TXT And particular biasing arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 263 with specific details or distinctive
    characteristics of the biasing means applied to the amplifying device.

    (1)     Note.  Merely claiming biasing means or bias filter by name only,
    or broadly without significant detail or distinctive characteristics, is
    insufficient for classification in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199+,   for particular biasing in general.

    261,    for particular biasing in combination with a differential amplifier.

    273,    for particular biasing in combination with a push-pull amplifier.

    285,    for particular biasing in gain control circuits.

    296,    for particular biasing not in combination in any of the
    aforementioned.


CLS 330/268
TXT To eliminate crossover distortion:

    Subject matter under subclass 267 wherein distortion which occurs at the
    points of operation where the input signals cross over the zero reference
    points is eliminated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    274,    for means to eliminate crossover distortion in noncomplementary,
    symmetry push-pull amplifiers.


CLS 330/269
TXT Having field effect transistors:

    Subject matter under subclass 262 wherein a field effect transistor (FET)
    is utilized in the circuit.

    (1)     Note.  A field effect transistor (FET) is a semiconductor device in
    which the resistance between two terminals, the source and drain, depends
    on a field produced by a voltage applied to the third terminal, the gate.

    (2)     Note.  The field may modulate a depletion region, as in a junction
    FET, or it may cause a conductivity change in a channel, as in a MOS-FET.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    253,    for FET in combination with a differential amplifier.

    264,    for FET in complementary symmetry in push-pull.

    277,    for FET in other transistor amplifiers.

    300,    for FET in combined diverse-type circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 581 for miscellaneous circuits using field-effect
    transistors.


CLS 330/270
TXT Having D.C. feedback bias control for stabilization:

    Subject matter under subclass 262 with a feedback circuit for direct
    currents, for the purpose of operating point stabilization.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are devices for compensating for changes in
    temperature, aging, etc., of the semiconductor device, or devices which may
    include means such as bypass capacitors to eliminate signal feedback.

    (2)     Note.  This does not include a mere bypassed emitter resistor
    unless D.C. derived therefrom is applied to another electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for amplifiers with periodic switching for input-output comparison
    including those having feedback circuits for drift correction, etc.

    259,    for D.C. feedback in combination with a differential amplifier.

    290,    for D.C. feedback in other transistor amplifiers.


CLS 330/271
TXT Having signal feedback means:

    Subject matter under subclass 262 wherein a portion of the electrical
    signal output energy is applied to the input of the amplifier.

    (1)     Note.  There is a shared impedance for the input and output
    circuits involved.

    (2)     Note.  The amplifier of this subclass may be any stage or group of
    stages of a cascaded amplifier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for amplifiers with periodic switching input-output comparison
    including those with feedback circuits.

    75+,    appropriate subclasses for vacuum tube signal feedback amplifiers.

    265,    for feedback in complementary push-pull amplifiers.

    282,    for signal feedback in gain control circuits.

    291,    for feedback in other transistor amplifiers.


CLS 330/272
TXT Having temperature compensating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 262 wherein temperature compensating circuits
    or devices are utilized to protect or stabilize the semiconductor
    amplifying devices from changes in the ambient temperature.

    (1)     Note.  Changes in the ambient temperature of a circuit's
    environment can change the operating characteristics of the semiconductor
    amplifying device and thereby change the output signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256,    for temperature compensation in a differential amplifier.

    266,    for temperature compensation in complementary push-pull amplifiers.

    289,    for temperature compensation in other transistor amplifiers.


CLS 330/273
TXT Having particular biasing arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 262 with specific details or distinctive
    characteristics of the biasing means applied to the amplifying device.

    (1)     Note.  Merely claiming biasing means or bias filter by name only,
    or broadly without significant details or distinctive characteristics, is
    insufficient for classification in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199+,   for particular biasing in general.

    261,    for particular biasing in combination with a differential amplifier.

    267,    for particular biasing in combination with complementary symmetry.

    285,    for particular biasing in gain control circuits.

    296,    for particular biasing in other transistor amplifiers.


CLS 330/274
TXT To eliminate crossover distortion:

    Subject matter under subclass 273 wherein distortion which occurs at the
    points of operation where the input signals cross over the zero reference
    points is eliminated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    268,    for means to eliminate crossover distortion in complementary
    symmetry.


CLS 330/275
TXT Having balanced to unbalanced circuitry and vice versa:

    Subject matter under subclass 262 wherein one of the signal input means or
    signal output means is coupled to or from the semiconductor  amplifier by a
    balanced circuit, the other signal coupling means coupled to or from the
    semiconductor amplifier balanced circuit.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of a "Balanced Circuit", see section I
    under the class definition of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301,    for balanced to unbalanced circuits and vice versa in other
    transistor amplifiers.


CLS 330/276
TXT Having transformer:

    Subject matter under subclass 262 wherein a transformer is included in the
    circuit.

    (1)     Note.  The transformer can be in the input, output, interstage, or
    any combination of the aforementioned.


CLS 330/277
TXT Including field effect transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 250 wherein a field effect transistor (FET)
    is utilized in the amplifier circuit.

    (1)     Note.  A field effect transistor (FET) is a semiconductor device in
    which the resistance between two terminals, the source and drain, depends
    on a field produced by a voltage applied to the third terminal, the gate.

    (2)     Note.  The field may modulate a depletion region, as in a junction
    FET, or it may cause a conductivity change in a channel, as in a MOS-FET.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    253,    for FET in differential amplifiers.

    264,    for FET in combination with push-pull utilized in complementary
    symmetry.

    269,    for FET in combination with push-pull amplifiers.

    300,    for FET in combined  verse-type circuit.


CLS 330/278
TXT Including gain control means:

    Subject matter under subclass 250 including circuitry which controls the
    amplification of the applied signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     for amplifiers having pilot frequency control means.

    96,     for feedback amplifiers combined with control of bias voltage of a
    signal amplifier.

    123,    for push-pull amplifiers having significant power or bias supply
    circuits including those with bias control means.

    127+,   for amplifiers with control of power supply or bias voltage.

    143,    for amplifiers having a thermally responsive impedance.

    144+,   for amplifiers having a variable impedance in the signal path
    varied by a separate control path.

    155+,   for amplifiers having unicontrol of coupling or associated circuits
    including unicontrol of signal input or output potentiometers, etc.

    157+,   185+ and 192+, for interstage input or output coupling,
    respectively, including variable impedance means in such coupling.

    254,    for gain control means in combination with a differential amplifier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, particularly subclasses 14,
    16, and 17.1 for combined amplifier compressor and expander means, pilot
    controlled means, and automatically controlled systems, respectively;
    subclasses 24+ for coupling networks which may include signal amplitude
    control means; subclasses 213+ for negative resistance and/or reactance
    networks of the active element type; and subclass 81 for attenuators.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 232.1+ for volume control,
    especially subclasses 234.1+ for automatic volume control.


CLS 330/279
TXT And significant control voltage developing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 278 including specific details or distinctive
    characteristics of the gain control developing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127+,   143 and 144+, for other amplifiers having gain control systems
    which may have significant control voltage developing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 232.1+ for receivers which may have
    significant control voltage developing means as part of a gain control
    system.


CLS 330/280
TXT With delay means:

    Subject matter under subclass 279 including circuit means which impart to
    the control voltage, a minimum level at which the control voltage
    developing means begins to function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127+,   143 and 144+, for gain-controlled amplifiers which may have delay
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 242.1+ for gain-controlled receivers
    which may have delay means.


CLS 330/281
TXT With time constant means:

    Subject matter under subclass 279 including a circuit for filtering the
    control voltage, and wherein specific details or distinctive
    characteristics of such circuit are claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127+,   143 and 144+, for amplifiers which may include time-constant means
    in the control voltage path thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 239.1+ for gain-controlled receivers
    which may include time-constant means in the control voltage path thereof.


CLS 330/282
TXT Having feedback means acting as variable impedance:

    Subject matter under subclass 278 including a feedback means acting as a
    variable impedance to control the gain of the amplifier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86,     for amplifiers having variable impedance in feedback path varied by
    separate control path.


CLS 330/283
TXT Having emitter degeneration:

    Subject matter under subclass 282 including a feedback means acting as a
    variable impedance in the common electrode of the amplifier to control the
    gain of the amplifier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95,     for amplifiers having nonlinear impedance means in the cathode
    impedance feedback path.


CLS 330/284
TXT Having attenuation means in signal transmission path:

    Subject matter under subclass 278 having attenuation means in signal
    transmission path that controls the gain of the amplifier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     for amplifiers having pilot frequency control means.

    143,    for amplifiers having thermally responsive means.

    144+,   for amplifiers having variable impedance for signal channel
    controlled by separate control path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 249.1 for gain-controlled receiver
    having variable impedance in the control circuit.


CLS 330/285
TXT Having particular biasing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 278 having specific details or distinctive
    characteristics of a biasing means for applying a biasing voltage to the
    amplifying device.

    (1)     Note.  Merely claiming biasing means or bias filter by name only,
    or broadly without significant detail or distinctive characteristics, is
    insufficient for classification in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127+,   for amplifiers with control of power supply or bias voltage.

    199+,   for particular biasing in other amplifiers.

    261,    for particular biasing in differential amplifiers.

    267,    for particular biasing in combination with complementary symmetry.

    273,    for particular biasing in combination with a push-pull amplifier.

    285,    for particular biasing in gain control circuits.

    296,    for particular biasing in other transistor amplifiers.


CLS 330/286
TXT Including distributed parameter-type coupling:

    Subject matter under subclass 250 including coupling means which has both
    distributive capacitance and distributive inductance at high frequencies.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for amplifiers having distributed-type coupling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 56+ for oscillators having distributed
    parameter resonator.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 219+ for
    distributed parameter resonator, and subclasses 236+ for long lines having
    distributed parameters.


CLS 330/287
TXT Of diode type:

    Subject matter under subclass 286 including amplifying means of the diode
    type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 107 for diode-type oscillators.


CLS 330/288
TXT Including current mirror amplifier:

    Subject matter under subclass 250 wherein an amplifier having a gain which
    is substantially independent of the individual common emitter forward
    current gains of its component transistor is utilized.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257,    for current mirror amplifiers in combination with differential
    amplifiers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 530+ for miscellaneous transistor circuits used for
    power supply or bias regulation.


CLS 330/289
TXT Including temperature compensation means:

    Subject matter under subclass 250 wherein temperature compensating means
    are utilized to protect or stabilize the amplifying device from changes in
    the ambient temperature.

    (1)     Note.  Changes in the ambient temperature can change the operating
    characteristics of the amplifier and thereby change the output signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256,    for temperature compensation in a differential amplifier.

    266,    for temperature compensation in complementary push-pull amplifiers.

    272,    for temperature compensation in a push-pull amplifier.


CLS 330/290
TXT Including D.C. feedback bias control for stabilization:

    Subject matter under subclass 250 with feedback circuit for direct
    currents, for the purpose of operating point stabilization as compensating
    for changes in temperature, aging, etc., of the semiconductor device, or
    devices, which may include means such as bypass capacitors to eliminate
    signal feedback.

    (1)     Note.  This does not include a mere bypass emitter resistor unless
    D.C. derived therefrom is applied to another electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for amplifiers with periodic switching for input-output comparison
    including those having feedback circuits for drift correction, etc.

    97,     for amplifiers including D.C. path for signal feedback.

    259,    for D.C. feedback in differential amplifiers.

    270,    for D.C. feedback in push-pull complementary symmetry amplifiers.


CLS 330/291
TXT Including signal feedback means:

    Subject matter under subclass 250 wherein a portion of the electrical
    signal output energy is applied to the input of the amplifier.

    (1)     Note.  There is a shared impedance for the input and output
    circuits involved.

    (2)     Note.  The amplifier of this subclass may be any stage or group of
    stages of a cascaded amplifier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for amplifiers with periodic switching input-output comparison
    including those with feedback circuits.

    75+,    appropriate subclasses for vacuum tube signal feedback amplifiers.

    260,    for signal feedback in differential amplifiers.

    265,    for feedback in complementary push-pull amplifiers.

    271,    for signal feedback in push-pull amplifiers.

    282,    for signal feedback in gain control circuits.


CLS 330/292
TXT Having compensation for interelectrode impedance:

    Subject matter under subclass 291 wherein signal feedback means are
    provided for, compensating for, or nullifying the undesirable feedback
    caused by any of the internal interelectrode impedances of the
    semiconductor amplifying device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76+,    for neutralization through compensation by signal feedback of the
    effects of interelectrode impedance in vacuum tube amplifiers.


CLS 330/293
TXT Having negative feedback:

    Subject matter under subclass 291 wherein the signal feedback which is
    superimposed on the input signal has at least one component thereof
    opposite in phase to the input signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75+,    for signal feedback in other amplifiers.


CLS 330/294
TXT Having frequency responsive means or phase shift means in the feedback path:

    Subject matter under subclass 291 having frequency-responsive means or
    phase-shift means in the feedback path that causes corresponding changes in
    amplifier gain.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107     and 109, for amplifiers having frequency- or phase-responsive means
    in the feed-back path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 113+ for miscellaneous frequency control, subclasses
    231+ for a phase shift of less than an input signal period, subclasses 2+
    for phase discriminating without subsequent control, and subclasses 39+ for
    frequency discriminating without subsequent control.


CLS 330/295
TXT Including plural amplifier channels:

    Subject matter under subclass 250 having more than one signal transmission
    path, each of which contains an amplifier (e.g., plural inputs or plural
    outputs).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     for signal feedback amplifiers having plural channels.

    124+,   for amplifiers having plural amplifier channels.

    147,    for amplifiers having plural separate inputs.

    148,    for amplifiers having plural separate outputs.


CLS 330/296
TXT Including particular biasing arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 250 with specific details or distinctive
    characteristics of the biasing means applied to the amplifying device.

    (1)     Note.   Merely claiming biasing means or bias filter by name only,
    or broadly without significant detail or distinctive characteristics, is
    sufficient for classification in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199+,   for particular biasing in other amplifiers.

    261,    for particular biasing in differential amplifiers.

    267,    for particular biasing in combination with complementary symmetry.

    273,    for particular biasing in combination with push-pull amplifier.

    285,    for particular biasing in signal amplitude control.


CLS 330/297
TXT Including particular power supply circuitry:

    Subject matter under subclass 250 including specific details or distinctive
    characteristics of the source of electrical energy applied to the
    semiconductor amplifying device.

    (1)     Note.  This includes means to apply such energy source, the
    circuits through which such source is applied, and means for isolating such
    source from the signal path or other amplifier circuits.

    (2)     Note.  Merely claiming power supply source by name only, or broadly
    without significant detail or distinctive characteristics, is insufficient
    for classification in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199+,   for amplifiers generally involving bias or power supply.  See the
    search notes under subclass 199.


CLS 330/298
TXT Including protection means:

    Subject matter under subclass 250 including circuits or devices for
    protecting the amplifying means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207+,   for amplifiers having protection circuitry.


CLS 330/299
TXT Including combined diverse-type semiconductor device:

    Subject matter under subclass 250 including plural semiconductor devices
    and at least one semiconductor device which is different in its physical
    characteristics or in materials, and which also amplifies the signal.

    (1)     Note.  Materials which may be a diode of the nonamplifying type, or
    which may be an additional signal carrier    semiconductor amplifying
    device including an amplifier not previously provided for in this schedule.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94      and 110, for vacuum tube feedback amplifiers having nonlinear
    impedance elements.

    138     and 140, for amplifiers having a rectifier, which may be a
    semiconductor diode, in a bias control circuit for the input or gain
    control electrode.

    143,    for vacuum tube amplifiers having a thermally responsive impedance.

    144+,   for vacuum tube amplifiers having a separately controlled variable
    impedance in the signal path, which may be a semiconductor.

    164,    for vacuum tube amplifiers with a diode in the interstage coupling
    which may be a semiconductor.

    174,    for a piezoelectric crystal or electromechanical transducer broadly
    in the interstage coupling of a vacuum tube amplifier.

    183,    for vacuum tube amplifiers having D.C. interstage coupling with a
    nonlinear device therein.


CLS 330/300
TXT Bipolar or unipolar (FET):

    Subject matter under subclass 299 wherein the additional semiconductor
    device may be a bipolar or unipolar transistor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    253,    for field effect transistor (FET) in combination with a
    differential amplifier.

    264,    for FET in combination with complementary symmetry push-pull
    amplifiers.

    269,    for FET in combination with other push-pull amplifiers.

    277,    for other field effect transistors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 581 for miscellaneous FET circuits.


CLS 330/301
TXT Including balanced to unbalanced circuits and vice versa:

    Subject matter under subclass 250 wherein one of the signal input means or
    signal output means is coupled to or from the semiconductor amplifier by a
    balanced circuit, the other signal coupling means coupled to or from the
    semiconductor amplifier unbalanced circuit.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of a "Balanced Circuit", see section I
    under the class definition of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    275,    for balanced to unbalanced circuits in push-pull amplifiers.


CLS 330/302
TXT Including frequency-responsive means in the signal transmission path:

    Subject matter under subclass 250 including frequency-responsive means in
    the signal transmission path that causes corresponding changes in the
    amplifier gain.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157+,   185+ and 192+, for interstage input or output coupling,
    respectively, including variable impedance means in such coupling.

    294,    having frequency-responsive means or phase-shift means in the
    feedback path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 113+ for miscellaneous frequency control, subclasses
    231+ for a phase shift of less than an input signal period, subclasses 2+
    for phase discriminating without subsequent control, and subclasses 39+ for
    frequency discriminating without subsequent control.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 24+ for frequency
    or phase sensitive circuits in wave transmission lines and networks.


CLS 330/303
TXT Including an active device in the filter means:

    Subject matter under subclass 302 including a transistor or active diode in
    the filter network.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    109 and 294, for circuits having frequency-responsive means or
    phase-shift means in the feedback path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 552+ for miscellaneous circuits suppressing an unwanted
    signal using an active filter.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 24+ for frequency
    or phase sensitive circuits in wave transmission lines and networks.


CLS 330/304
TXT And equalizing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 302 including a network connected to a line
    to correct or control its transmission frequency characteristics.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 28 for equalizers
    used in wave transmission lines and networks.


CLS 330/305
TXT And tuning means:

    Subject matter under subclass 302 including a manually adjustable frequency
    selecting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    334,    Tuners, appropriate subclasses for tuning circuits.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 120+ for transmitters having tuning
    means; and subclasses 150.1+ for receivers having tuning means.


CLS 330/306
TXT And bandpass, broadband (e.g., wideband), or sidepass means:

    Subject matter under subclass 302 including means which determines the
    range of the frequencies of the applied signal that will be amplified.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 188.1+ for selectable band receivers.


CLS 330/307
TXT Integrated circuits:

    Subclass matter under under subclass 250 having a combination of
    interconnected elements inseparably associated on or within a continuous
    substrate.

    (1)     Note.  If a claimed preferred embodiment of a patent application
    includes details of means to apply a variable electrical signal to an IC
    amplifying device, or details of means to utilize the output of an IC
    amplifying device, that application is properly classified in Class 330,
    subclass 307.

    (2)     Note.  If, however, a claimed preferred embodiment of a patent
    application is limited to details of an IC amplifying device, without
    details of the input or output (utilization) means, or the input or output
    (utilization) means are recited in name only, then the application is
    properly classified in Class 257, appropriate integrated circuit subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses for active solid-state devices, especially
    subclasses 115, 123, and 162-166 which are directed to devices involving
    amplification.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 564+ for miscellaneous circuits which are integrated.


CLS 330/308
TXT Including atomic particle or radiant energy impinging on a semiconductor:

    Subject matter under subclass 250 in which the amplifying device
    semiconductor body is subjected to radiant energy which may be in the form
    of light, free (unrestrained) electromagnetic energy, gamma rays, etc., or
    atomic particle bombardment, such as alpha or beta rays, etc.

    (1)     Note.  If a claimed preferred embodiment of a patent application
    includes details of means to apply a variable electrical signal to an IC
    amplifying device, or details of means to utilize the output of an IC
    amplifying device, that application is properly classified in Class 330,
    subclass 307.

    (2)     Note.  If, however, a claimed preferred embodiment of a patent
    application is limited to details of an IC amplifying device without
    details of the input or output (utilization) means, or the input or output
    (utilization) means are recited in name only, then the application is
    properly classified in Class 257, appropriate integrated circuit subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for maser-type amplifying device which may involve a semiconductor.

    5,      for solid element wave propagating amplifying devices involving
    coupling or activation by electromagnetic wave energy applied through wave
    energy constraining wave propagating means, such as by wave guide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, particularly subclasses 370.01+ for methods and
    apparatus using an invisible radiant energy-responsive semiconductor device.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses for active solid-state devices, especially subclass
    115 which is directed to light responsive devices involving amplification.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses for
    discharge devices involving the structure of ray energy generating, beaming
    and focusing, in the form of electron beams, alpha ray, and X-ray
    emanations.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 1+ for
    cathode ray discharge devices involving circuits or special circuit
    structure associated with the device.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 509+ for miscellaneous nonlinear solid-state circuits
    subjected to some external effect.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    333+ for laser amplifiers.


CLS 330/309
TXT Involving structure of three diverse function electrode type:

    Subject matter under subclass 250 wherein the semiconductor device is
    provided in three diverse-type electrodes for coupling the signal energy
    input and output, additional biasing or gain control, etc., and the
    application of the controlled electrical energy source in which each
    electrode performs a distinct function.

    (1)     Note.  If a claimed preferred embodiment of a patent application
    includes details of means to apply a variable electrical signal to an IC
    amplifying device, or details of means to utilize the output of an IC
    amplifying device, that application is properly classified in Class 330,
    subclass 307.

    (2)     Note.  If, however, a claimed preferred embodiment of a patent
    application is limited to details of an IC amplifying device without
    details of the input or output (utilization) means, or the input or output
    (utilization) means are recited in name only, then the application is
    properly classified in Class 257, appropriate integrated circuit subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses for active solid-state devices, especially
    subclasses 115, 123 and 162 through 166 which are directed to devices
    involving amplification.


    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for similar semiconductor devices in
    miscellaneous circuits.


CLS 330/310
TXT Including plural stages cascaded:

    Subject matter under subclass 250 including a plurality of stages of
    amplification, such that the input signal for each stage, except the first,
    is the output of the preceding stage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for plural diverse-type amplifying devices which may be cascaded
    and which may include a semiconductor-type amplifying device.

    70+,    for series energized vacuum tube amplifiers which may be cascaded.

    88+,    92 and 98+, for cascaded amplifiers with signal feedback.

    150,    for cascaded vacuum tube amplifying devices of different
    characteristics.

    151,    for cascaded vacuum tube amplifier devices with means to bypass a
    stage.

    152+,   for cascaded vacuum tube amplifier means differently coupled
    between stages.

    157+,   for interstage coupling between stages of amplifying devices.


CLS 330/311
TXT Having different configurations:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein at least one of the cascaded
    stages is of a different configuration from at least one of the other
    cascaded stages.

    (1)     Note.  In a semiconductor amplifier having emitter, base, and
    collector electrodes, input signal current flows through two electrodes
    thereof, and output signal current flows through two electrodes thereof,
    one of the electrodes being common to both input and output circuits.
    Therefore, in the three electrode semiconductor amplifier, there is a
    common electrode, an input electrode and an output electrode.  By the
    configuration of a semi-conductor amplifier is meant the arrangement of
    base, emitter, and collector electrodes thereof, as the input, common, and
    output electrodes thereof.  The configuration is usually referred to as
    common base, common emitter, or common collector configuration, but this
    does not completely define the configuration which must have at least one
    of the other semiconductor electrodes identified by its function as input
    or output electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153,    for cascaded vacuum tube amplifier devices with differently coupled
    interstage circuits including at least one cathode follower stage.

    157+,   appropriate subclasses thereunder, for interstage coupling to or
    from electrodes and as cathode, or from electrodes such as cathode or
    screen grid not used in the majority of vacuum tube amplifiers as input or
    output electrode.

    168,    for vacuum tube interstage transformer coupling from the cathode.


CLS 331/
TTL OSCILLATORS

CLS 331/
TXT I.      DEFINITION OF TERMS USED:

    OSCILLATOR
    A system for initiating and maintaining oscillations whose frequency or
    period is fixed or determined by the physical parameters of the system.
    The fundamental elements required by an oscillator system are:  (1) a
    frequency or period determining element, such as a resonator or timing
    means, (2) a driving system for the frequency or period determining
    element, and (3) means for deriving a useful output from the oscillator
    system.  This class is restricted to oscillators for generating electrical
    oscillations or waves and specifically excludes alternating current
    generators of the mechanically driven dynamo-electric machine type.

    FREE RUNNING OSCILLATOR
    An oscillator wherein the driving system continuously supplies the losses
    of the frequency determining means so as to produce sustained oscillations.

    HARMONIC OR SINE WAVE OSCILLATOR
    A free running oscillator for generating sinusoidal or nearly sinusoidal
    waves. They usually utilize a resonator of the lumped LC or the distributed
    parameter type as the frequency determining element.

    RELAXATION OSCILLATOR
    A free running oscillator for generating decidedly non sinusoidal waves.
    They usually utilize a time constant network of the RC or RL type as the
    frequency determining element.

    SHOCK EXCITED RESONATOR OSCILLATOR
    An oscillator of the nonself-sustaining type wherein the driving system
    applies an electrical impulse to the frequency determining element (i.e.,
    resonator), which element is then permitted to oscillate freely at its
    natural frequency.

    ELECTRICAL NOISE OR RANDOM WAVE GENERATOR
    A wave generator system wherein the frequency determining element consists
    of a material medium including electrically charged, chargeable or
    ionizable particles, the application of electrical energy to the medium by
    the driving means causing random translatory motion of the charged or
    ionizable particles resulting in the generation of an infinite number of
    waves of different frequencies which are fortuitously related, having no
    definite phase relationship, period, amplitude or shape.

    TRANSIT TIME OSCILLATOR
    An oscillator system wherein the time of flight or transit angle of charged
    particles between electrodes of a space discharge device is an appreciable
    part of the cycle of the generated oscillations, the energy derived from
    the moving particles being continuously supplied to the frequency
    determining network of the oscillator in proper phase to sustain
    oscillations.  Transit time effects are utilized in magnetron, beam tube
    and retarding field type oscillators.

    MOLECULAR OR PARTICLE RESONANT OSCILLATOR
    An oscillator wherein the frequency determining element consists of a
    material medium comprising particles, molecules or atoms, the application
    of electrical energy by the driving means to the medium setting the
    particles, molecules or atoms into a state of vibration or oscillation, the
    vibration or oscillation being that of the particle, molecule or atom
    itself and not the vibration or oscillation caused by the translational
    motion of the particle, molecule or atom as a whole.

    STABILIZATION
    The maintenance of a desired condition or state of the oscillator which
    condition or state may be subject to change.

    FREQUENCY STABILIZATION
    The correction for, prevention of, or compensation for an undesired drift
    or change in the frequency of the generated waves of the oscillator from a
    desired value.

    AUTOMATIC FREQUENCY STABILIZATION
    The restoration of the generated frequency of the oscillator to a desired
    value by sensing the deviation in frequency, in direction and amount, from
    the desired value and instituting a corrective action proportional to
    sensed deviation to adjust the frequency determining element of the
    oscillator in such direction and amount so as to return the oscillator
    frequency to the desired value.

    AMPLITUDE STABILIZATION
    The correction for, prevention of, or compensation for an undesired change
    in amplitude of the generated waves of the oscillator from a desired value.

    BEAT FREQUENCY
    The resulting difference (or sum) frequency wave, among other waves,
    produced when two waves of different frequencies are combined in a
    nonlinear device.

    HETERODYNE FREQUENCY
    Beat frequency (which see).

    FREQUENCY DETERMINING ELEMENT
    A passive network or device of the resonant or time constant type, which
    network or device forms the element of the oscillator which sets or
    determines the frequency or periodicity of the generated oscillations.

    RESONATOR OR RESONANT CIRCUIT
    A frequency determining means comprised of substantially pure reactances of
    opposite signs (i.e., mass and compliance in a mechanical resonator or
    inductive and capacitive reactance in an electrical resonator) wherein the
    phenomenon of resonance (i.e., when the positive and negative reactances
    are equal) is relied upon to determine the frequency of the generated waves.

    DISTRIBUTED PARAMETER RESONATOR
    A resonator of the distributed network type, the capacitance, inductance
    and resistance of which cannot be isolated into separate lumped capacitors,
    inductors or resistors and wherein the time factor of propagation of wave
    energy in the network is appreciable.

    LC RESONATOR
    A resonant circuit comprising separate inductance and capacitance elements,
    i.e., lumped inductor and capacitor elements.

    ELECTROMECHANICAL RESONATOR
    A resonator comprising an electrically driven material body wherein the
    mass and compliance parameters of the body determine the mechanical period
    of vibration of the body and wherein the driving electrical circuit for the
    body exhibits electrical resonance characteristics which are determined by
    the mechanical period of vibration of the body.

    MOLECULAR RESONATOR
    A resonator comprising a material medium and wherein the vibration or
    oscillation of the molecules of the medium determines the resonant
    frequency of the resonator.  The vibration or oscillation is of the
    molecule itself and not that due to the translational motion of the
    molecule as a whole. See, also, above, the definition of a molecular or
    particle resonant oscillator.

    RC OR RL FREQUENCY DETERMINING NETWORK
    A network of the nonresonant type comprising either resistive and
    capacitive or resistive and inductive components.  The network, by way of
    example, may be employed:  (1) as a frequency determining phase shift
    network in a sine wave oscillator of the phase shift type, (2) as a
    frequency determining bridge network in sine wave bridge oscillators, such
    as the Wien bridge type of the double-T type or (3) as a time constant
    network in a relaxation oscillator to determine the period of the generated
    relaxation oscillations.

    FREQUENCY ADJUSTING MEANS
    Means for setting or controlling the generated frequency of the oscillator
    by varying a frequency determining element of the oscillator.

    ACTIVE ELEMENT
    A control device for exerting a control on a source of energy proportional
    to an applied control signal.  A conventional triode, having cathode,
    control grid on anode, connected as a conventional amplifier, is an example
    of an active network, a control potential applied to the grid causing a
    flow of anode current, supplied by the anode biasing source, proportional
    to the magnitude of the control potential.

    SPACE DISCHARGE DEVICE
    A device comprising at least two spaced electrodes and wherein conduction
    by charged particles, e.g., electrons, or ions, takes place between the
    electrodes.

    GASEOUS SPACE DISCHARGE DEVICE
    A space discharge device having at least two electrodes in a gaseous or
    vapor medium, conduction between the electrodes taking place by ionization
    of the medium.

    SOLID STATE ACTIVE ELEMENT
    A two-terminal or fourterminal active element of electrically conductive,
    semi-conductive, ferromagnetic or ferroelectric material in the solid
    state.  Examples are:  The Hall effect plate, semi-conductor (transistor),
    magnetic type and dielectric type amplifiers or negative resistance devices.

    SEMI-CONDUCTOR ACTIVE ELEMENT
    A solid state active element comprised of a solid material having a
    conductivity intermediate that of a good insulator and a good conductor.

    TRANSISTOR
    A semi-conductive active element having at least three electrodes so
    arranged that the application of electrical energy to one electrode
    controls the flow of current between two other electrodes.

    NEGATIVE RESISTANCE OR NEGATIVE TRANSCONDUCTANCE DEVICE
    An active element of the twoterminal type having a volt-ampere
    characteristic with negative slope over the range of voltages or currents
    wherein it is operative, that is, an increase in voltage results in a
    decrease in current, or vice versa.

    MAGNETICALLY CONTROLLED SPACE DISCHARGE DEVICE
    An active element comprising means for producing a space discharge of
    charged particles and having further means for subjecting the space
    discharge to the direct control of a magnetic field and an electric field.

    MAGNETRON
    A magnetically controlled space discharge device comprising a linear
    cathode, an anode, usually cylindrical, coaxial therewith, the magnetic
    field being parallel to longitudinal axis of the cathode, while the
    electric field is transverse thereto.

    TUBE
    An active element of the space discharge device type.  See:  active
    element; space discharge device.

    BEAM TUBE
    An active element comprising a source of charged particles, means for
    concentrating the particles into a directed beam, means for exerting a
    control on the beam (e.g., beam accelerating electrode, control grid,
    deflecting means, slow wave structure, buncher type resonator, reflector
    electrode, etc.) and means for deriving output energy from the controlled
    beam.

    KLYSTRON
    A beam tube including at least two apertured cavity resonators, the beam of
    charged particles passing through the apertures of the resonators in
    succession, and a collector electrode being provided to intercept the beam
    after passing through the resonators.  The first resonator causes bunching
    of the particles passing therethrough, the bunched particles then travel in
    a field-free region where further bunching occurs and then the bunched
    particles enter the second resonator giving up their energy to excite it
    into oscillations.

    REFLEX KLYSTRON
    A klystron utilizing only a single apertured cavity resonator through which
    the beam of charged particles passes in one direction, a repeller electrode
    being provided to repel or redirect the beam after passage through the
    resonator back through the resonator in the other direction and in proper
    phase to reinforce the oscillations set up in the resonator.

    RETARDING FIELD TUBE
    A tube having at least three electrodes, i.e., a source of electrons
    (cathode), control electrode (grid) and anode or plate electrode, the
    control electrode being biased positively with respect to the other
    electrodes.  The electrode bias potentials are so chosen that the electrons
    attracted from the cathode by the positive grid pass through the grid and
    are slowed down by the repelling effect of the less positive (or negative)
    anode field and are returned back to or through the grid.  This phenomenon
    is repeated again and again so that a cloud of electrons are caused to
    sweep back and forth through the grip, giving up energy to the grid at a
    frequency which is a function of the transit time of the cloud of
    electrons. The Barkhausen Kurz, Gill-Morrell and the reflex klystron are
    examples of oscillators utilizing a retarding field tube.

    II.     GENERAL STATEMENT OF THE CLASS SUBJECT MATTER:

    This is the generic class for electrical oscillators.

    III.    ELECTRICAL OSCILLATORS OR WAVE GENERATORSOR PRODUCERS CLASSIFIED
    ELSEWHERE:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 19+ for the
    structure of circuit makers and breakers designed to be periodically closed
    and opened.

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants, appropriate subclasses, for prime mover
    driven dynamo systems, wherein the prime mover is other than an electric
    motor and wherein the dynamo may be an alternating current generator.

    307,    Electrical Transmission of Interconnection Systems, subclasses 106+
    for class appropriate waveform or wave shape determinative or pulse
    producing systems (usually of the delay line type) to produce periodic
    pulses of predetermined wave shape in the output of the network.  Subclass
    132 provides for free-running electromagnetic circuit maker and
    breaker-type pulse producers.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, appropriate subclasses,
    for the structure of alternating current generators for converting
    mechanical energy into electrical energy; subclasses 300+ provides for
    nondynamoelectric generators (or motors) while subclasses 10+ provides for
    dynamoelectric machines, indented subclasses 40+ provides for rotary
    machines, indented subclass 159 provides for alternating current generators
    and indented subclasses 169+, in particular, provides for high frequency
    inductor generators of the variable reluctance type (e.g., Alexanderson
    alternator).

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, appropriate
    subclasses, for oscillator systems similar to those classified in this
    class (331), but wherein no means for deriving a useful output from the
    system is claimed.  See particularly subclasses 3+ for cathode-ray tube
    circuits including a cathode-ray tube combined with circuit element
    structure, indented subclasses 3.5+ provides for traveling wave tubes, and
    indented subclasses 4+ provides for cathode ray tubes including distributed
    parameter resonant devices (e.g., cavity resonators); subclasses 39+
    provides for discharge devices in general with distributed parameter
    elements (e.g., wave guides, coaxial lines, which devices usually are
    resonators); subclasses 227+ provides for gaseous space discharge device
    systems with capacitor in the supply circuit, many of these systems being
    self-sustaining oscillators.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, appropriate subclasses, for
    apparatus for converting nonelectric energy directly into electrical
    energy, which may be alternating current.  Except for subclass 2, which
    provides for nonmagnetic type generator systems (e.g., thermoelectric,
    photoelectric, piezoelectric, electrostatic generators, etc.), and subclass
    3, which provides for reciprocating or oscillating type generators, the
    remaining subclasses comprise mainly patents directed to rotating
    dynamoelectric machine generator systems.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, particularly
    subclasses 282 and 351 for intermittently operated final control devices.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 291+ for miscellaneous clock or pulse waveform
    generation which is not free running.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 19 for electric wave
    differentiating or integrating systems of the passive type; subclass 20 for
    passive type electric wave shaping networks, and subclasses 219+ for
    resonators, per se, of the distributed parameter type.

    334,    Tuners, appropriate subclasses for tuned networks for use in wave
    energy apparatus and comprising inductance and capacitance elements in
    circuit arrangement to form a resonant circuit and in which structure is
    provided for adjusting one or both of these elements for changing the mean
    resonant frequency of the circuit.

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 87+ for the structure of electromagnetically
    operated switches of the periodic type.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclasses 51, 92+ and 301+ for particular types of thermally controlled
    periodically operated switches.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 268+ for
    the structure of so-called spark, induction or ignition coils having
    integral vibratory circuit interrupters, usually in the primary winding
    circuit and indented subclasses 270+ wherein a capacitor is included.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, appropriate subclasses for wave
    generating or producing systems analogous to those classified in Class 331.
     Some of the systems for converting direct current to alternating current
    (e.g., derectifiers, inverters) in Class 363 are indistinguishable from the
    oscillators in Class 331.

            The distinction appears to be one of degree, that is, the inverters
    classified in Class 363 usually are designed to convert direct current
    power to alternating current power at commercial power frequency (e.g., 25,
    50, or 60 cycles per second).  See subclasses 1+ for combined conversion
    systems, subclasses 9+ for phase and frequency conversion, and subclasses
    15+ and 34+ for plural current conversion systems (e.g., D.C.-A.C.-D.C.,
    and A.C.-D.C.-A.C.); subclasses 13+ for current conversion systems
    (rectification, derectification), subclasses 102+ for dynamoelectric
    machine converters, subclasses 111+ for electronic tube converters,
    subclasses 123+ for semiconductor-type converters, subclass 140 for
    impedance-type converters, subclasses 106+ for circuit interrupter-type
    converters, and subclasses 157+ for frequency converting systems wherein
    input alternating current of one frequency is converted into output
    alternating current without intermediate conversion to direct current.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 150+ for high temperature (Tc  30 K) superconducting devices;
    and particularly subclass 204 for oscillators or subclass 180 for masers
    made with high temperature superconducting material.

    IV.     OSCILLATOR COMBINED WITH OTHER APPARATUS OR SYSTEMS:

    84,     Music, subclasses 671 - 722  for electric oscillator tone
    generation systems combined with, or restricted to use with, means to
    convert the generated tone waves into musical sounds.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 148 for significant internal
    combustion engine structure combined with high tension ignition system,
    which system may utilize an electric oscillator.

    178,    Telegraphy, appropriate subclasses, for telegraph apparatus and
    systems that may employ electrical oscillators; see particularly subclass
    43 for space induction systems, subclasses 66.1+ for alternating, sine or
    similar wave current telegraph systems.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclasses for
    processes and apparatus for producing chemical changes through the agency
    of electrical wave energy; see particularly subclasses 155+, 157.15+ and
    164+ for the processes, and subclasses 193+ for the corresponding apparatus
    which may utilize electrical wave energy generators or oscillators.

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclasses, for electrical heating
    systems or apparatus that may employ electrical oscillators as elements
    thereof; subclasses 600+ for inductive heating, subclasses 678+ for
    microwave heating, and subclasses 764+ for capacitive dielectric heating,

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, appropriate subclasses, for railway
    switching and signaling systems; see particularly subclasses 7+ for train
    dispatching telegraphy and telephony systems, and subclass 30 for Hertzian
    wave controlled automatic block signal systems, which systems may employ
    electrical oscillators.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, appropriate
    subclasses, provides for systems for supplying electrical energy to
    cathode-ray tubes, electric lamp, diode or gaseous space discharge devices,
    which systems may be self-oscillatory or wherein the source of supply for
    the devices may be an electrical oscillator; in particular, subclasses 364+
    provides for cathode-ray tube deflecting systems which may utilize an
    electrical oscillator as a sweep or deflection source, subclass 97 provides
    for pulsating or A.C. supply for the cathode or heater of plural load
    device systems and subclass 105 provides for pulsating or A.C. supply for
    the cathode or heater of a single load device, subclasses 137+ provides for
    polyphase A.C. supply, subclasses 160+ provides for plural power supplies
    which may be pulsating or A.C., and subclasses 246+ provides for pulsating
    or A.C. supply systems in general.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 130 for reciprocating
    motor systems wherein the energizing winding circuit of the motor is
    supplied by an electrical oscillator, and subclass 341 for electric motor
    control systems wherein the motor armature or primary circuit is supplied
    by an adjustable frequency or impulse generator or oscillator to control or
    vary the motor speed.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses, for
    electrical measuring and testing systems and apparatus which may employ
    electrical oscillators.  For example, subclasses 307+ provides for nuclear
    induction testing systems utilizing adjustable frequency oscillators to
    determine nuclear resonance characteristics of material under test.  Also,
    electrical oscillators may be employed in the following testing and
    measuring subclasses of Class 324; subclass 56 for piezoelectric crystal
    testing, subclasses 57+ for impedance and admittance measuring systems,
    subclasses 76.41+ for heterodyne type frequency measuring systems, subclass
    85 for phase comparison systems utilizing frequency conversion, and
    subclass 118 for electricity measuring systems utilizing
    modulator-demodulator means.

    329,    Demodulators, subclasses 302, 306+, 323+, 346, and 358+ for diverse
    types of demodulator with oscillators.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 10 for linear active element amplifiers of the
    modulator-demodulator type utilizing an oscillator.

    332,    Modulators, appropriate subclasses, for electrical oscillators
    provided with means for varying some characteristic of the generated wave
    (e.g., amplitude, frequency or phase of a sine wave or pulse repetition
    rate, position, amplitude, width or slope of a repetitious pulse) in
    accordance with an intelligence which continually varies in an arbitrary
    manner.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, appropriate subclasses, for electric
    signaling systems that may employ electrical oscillators; for example,
    subclasses 203+ provides for oscillators of the pulse modulated or
    modulating type in a telemetering system; similarly, subclasses 207+
    provides for phase or frequency modulated oscillators, subclass 209
    provides for amplitude modulated oscillators in a telemetering system, and
    subclasses 345+ provides for code transmitters which may employ
    oscillators; and subclasses 825.69 and 825.72 for a control signal used for
    control purposes.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, appropriate subclasses, for
    electrical apparatus or systems directed to the generation, control and
    radiation or reception of wave energy propagated through free space, which
    apparatus or systems may employ electrical oscillators; for example,
    subclasses 5+ provides for reflected or returned wave systems (object
    detection, radar), subclasses 100+ provides for directive systems.

    348,    Television, subclasses 536+ and 735 for television systems that may
    include electrical oscillators.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, appropriate
    subclasses for systems or apparatus that may employ electrical oscillators;
    particularly, subclass 203 which provides for the combination of an
    oscillator and electromagnet load and electrical oscillator controlled
    relay systems.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 1+ for cascaded or
    combined diverse conversion, subclasses 13+ for current conversion
    systems, subclasses 148+ for phase conversion, and subclasses 157+ for
    frequency conversion systems.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for oscillators
    used with multiplexing.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 354+ for pulse
    communications synchronization.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, appropriate subclasses, for
    electric furnaces that may employ an oscillator for supplying or
    controlling the electric current for the furnaces, see particularly
    subclasses 138+ for induction furnaces that may utilize an oscillator to
    supply the furnace charge melting inductor.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 91+ for transmitters using
    electrical oscillators; subclasses 130+ for receivers using electrical
    oscillators; subclasses 145+ for local oscillators in panoramic receivers;
    subclass 196 for local oscillator tuning in radio receivers; subclasses
    208+ for local oscillator control in frequency modulation receivers;
    subclasses 255+ for local oscillator control in radio receiver automatic
    frequency control; and subclasses 313+ for local oscillators
    insuperhetrodyne receivers.

    505,    Superconductor Technology: Apparatus, Material, Process, subclasses
    150+ for high temperature (Tc  30 K) superconducting systems that may
    contain oscillators; particularly subclass 204 for oscillators, or subclass
    180 for masers made with high temperature superconducting material.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses
    72+ for oscillator systems combined with or forming a part of a therapeutic
    device.

    V.      INDEX TO CLASSES REFERRED TO IN THE PREVIOUS SECTIONS:

                                    Section No.

    84,     Music

            subs. 671 - 722, electrical

            tone generation and music

            instruments with electrical

            translating devices     IV

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines

            sub. 148, high tension

            ignition systems        IV

    178,    Telegraphy      IV

            sub. 43, space induction

            systems         IV              sub. 43.5, pulse modulation

            systems         IV

            subs. 66.1+, alternating cur-

            rent telegraphy IV

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers

            and Breakers

            subs. 19+, periodic switch      III

            sub. 90, periodic electro-

            magnetic switch III

            sub. 136.3, time controlled

            or continuously driven

            thermal switch  III

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave

            Energy          IV

            subs. 154+, electrical, radi-

            ant or wave energy chemistry,

            processes and products  IV              subs. 193+, electrical,
    radi-

            ant or wave energy chemistry,
    apparatus       IV

    219,    Electric Heating        IV

            subs. 600+, for inductive heating       IV

            subs. 678+, for microwave heating       IV

            subs. 764+, for capacitive
    dielectric heating      IV

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals

            subs. 7+, train dispatching

            telegraphy or telephony

            systems         IV

            sub. 30, automatic block-

            signal systems utilizing

            Hertzian waves  IV

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants       III

    307,    Electrical Transmission or

            Interconnection Systems

            subs. 106+, waveform or shape

            determinative or pulse prod-

            ucing systems   III

            sub. 132, repetitive make

            and break switching systems     III

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor

            Structure               III

            subs. 300+, nondynamoelectric

            generator               III

            subs. 10+, dynamoelectric

            generator               III

            subs. 40+, rotary dynamoelec-

            tric generator  III

            sub. 159, rotary A.C.

            dynamoelectric generator        III

            subs. 169+, high frequency,

            inductor type, rotary
    dynamoelectric generator        III

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge

            Devices: Systems         III, IV

            subs. 3+, cathode-ray tube

            circuits, combined cathode

            ray tube and circuit element

            structure               III

            subs. 3.5+, traveling wave

            tube with delay type trans-
    mission line    III

            subs. 4+, cathode-ray tube

            combined with distributed
    parameter type resonant device
    (e.g., cavity resonator)        III

            subs. 18+, cathode ray tube

            deflecting systems      IV

            subs. 39+, discharge devices

            in general structurally

            combined with distributed

            parameter devices (e.g.,

            resonator)      III

            sub. 97, plural load devices

            with pulsating or A.C. supply

            for cathode or heater circuit     IV

            sub. 105, pulsating or A.C.

            supply for cathode or heater

            circuit         IV

            subs. 137+, polyphase A.C.

            supply          IV

            subs. 160+, plural power supp-

            lies                    IV

            subs. 227+, discharge device

            systems with capacitor in the

            supply circuit  III

            subs. 246+, pulsating or A.C.

            supply          IV

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power

            Systems

            sub. 130, reciprocating or

            oscillating motor system

            energized by means for

            producing electrical

            oscillations    IV

            sub. 341, motor speed control

            by controlling the circuit

            frequency or impulse rate of

            the armature or primary

            circuit supply  IV

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator

            Systems         III

            sub. 2, nonmagnetic type

            generator               III

            sub. 3, reciprocating or

            oscillating type generator      III

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply
    or Regulation Systems   III

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and

            Testing         IV

            subs. 307+, nuclear or elec-

            tronic induction        IV

            sub. 56, piezoelectric

            crystal testing IV

            subs. 57+, impedance and

            admittance measuring systems    IV

            subs. 76.41+, heterodyne type

            frequency measuring systems     IV

            sub. 85, phase comparison

            systems utilizing frequency

            conversion      IV

            sub. 118, electricity meas-

            uring systems utilizing

            modulator-demodulator means     IV

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical
    Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 291+ for
    miscellaneous clock or pulse
    waveform generation which is
    not free running.       III

    332,    Modulators      IV

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines

            and Networks

            sub. 19, differentiating or

            integrating systems     III

            sub. 20, wave shaping net-

            works           III

            subs. 82+, distributed para-

            meter type resonators   III

    334,    Tuners          III

    340,    Communications:  Electrical     IV

            subs. 345+, code transmitters   IV

            subs. 825.69 and 825.72,

            control system used for

            control purposes        IV

            subs. 870.18+, using a part-

            icular modulation (e.g.,

            phase, frequency, or ampli-

            tude).          IV

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave
    Antennas,       IV

            subs. 5+, reflected or re-

            turned wave systems (e.g.,

            object detection, radar)        IV

            subs. 100+, directive systems   IV

    348,    Television

            subs. 536+, automatic
    frequency control       IV
    sub. 725, automatic
    frequency control       IV

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical

            Systems and Devices

            sub. 203, relay systems

            utilizing an electrical

            oscillator              IV

            subs. 268+, structure of

            transformers with integral

            switch or capacitor     III

            sub. 270, transformer with

            integral capacitor      III

    363,    Electric Power Conversion

            Systems, appropriate subclasses

            for oscillators combined with

            power conversion systems

    370,    Multiplex Communications,

            appropriate subclasses for

            oscillators used with multiplexing.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications

            subs. 354+, synchronizing

            systems         IV

    455,    Telecommunications      IV

            subs. 130+, radio receivers

            using load oscillators  IV

            subs. 145+, local oscillators

            in panoramic receivers  IV

            sub. 196, local oscillator

            tuning in radio receivers       IV

            subs. 208+, local oscillator

            control in frequency modul-

            ation receivers IV

            subs. 255+, local oscillator

            control in radio receiver

            automatic frequency control

            systems         IV

            subs. 313+, local oscillators

            in superheterodyne receivers    IV

    505,    Superconductor  III, IV

            Technology:  Apparatus,

            Material, Process

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal,

            and Electrical Application,

            sub. 69 therapeutic appa-

            ratus employing electrical

            oscillation circuits    IV


CLS 331/1
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the oscillator has means
    to adjust its generated frequency and is also provided with a control
    circuit or loop for controlling the oscillator frequency adjusting means in
    response to deviation of the generated frequency of the oscillator from a
    desired frequency or range of frequencies in such direction and amount as
    to restore the oscillator frequency to the desired frequency or range of
    frequencies. The control circuit or loop includes:  (1) discriminator means
    for sensing the deviation of the generated frequency of the oscillator in
    direction and amount and for producing control energy proportional to such
    deviation, and (2) means responsive to the control energy and coupled to
    frequency adjusting means of the oscillator to vary the frequency adjusting
    means in such direction and amount as to restore the generated frequency of
    the oscillator to the desired frequency or range of frequencies.

    (1)     Note.  The automatic frequency stabilizing systems defined above
    are to be distinguished from the frequency stabilizing systems classified
    lower in the schedule (i.e., subclasses 41, 88, 175+) by the fact that the
    A.F.S. systems rely on sensing a drift in frequency of the generated
    oscillations and asserting a corrective control to adjust a frequency
    determining element of the oscillator in the proper sense to bring it back
    on frequency, whereas the frequency stabilizing systems classified in
    subclasses 41, 88 and 175+ do not sense a drift of frequency and retune the
    oscillator as a function of such drift, but rely on adding means to the
    oscillator system to correct or compensate, or to prevent, changes in
    oscillator circuit parameters that tend to cause an undesired change in
    oscillator frequency.  Such means may, for example, compensate for the
    affects of changes in humidity, temperature, current load impedance, tube
    impedance, electrode bias potential, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for beat frequency oscillators with frequency stabilizing means.
    See also, (1) Note, above.

    88,     for magnetron type oscillators with frequency stabilizing means.
    See, also, (1) Note, above.

    175+,   for oscillators in general with frequency stabilizing means.  See,
    also (1) Note, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 32 for
    dynamoelectric generator systems with frequency responsive devices or
    networks for automatically maintaining the frequency of the generated wave
    constant.

    329,    Demodulators, subclasses 315+ for frequency demodulators and
    subclasses 345+ for phase demodulators.

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 123+ for average condition control in
    frequency modulator distortion prevention and subclasses 155+ and 159+ for
    average condition control in an amplitude modulator.

    334,    Tuners, subclass 13 for a tuner having a saturable core element
    combined with means to automatically center the frequency of the circuit;
    subclass 16 for a tuner having a reactance tuning means combined with
    automatic frequency centering means, and subclasses 26+ for tuners having
    an electromagnetic operator combined with automatic frequency centering
    means.

    348,    Television, subclasses 536+ for synchronizing systems which may
    utilize oscillators of the automatic frequency stabilized type and subclass
    735 for television tuners which may utilize oscillators of the automatic
    frequency stabilized type.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 354+ for synchronizing
    systems which may use oscillators of the automatic frequency stabilized
    type.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 91+ for radio transmitters using
    oscillators of the automatic frequency stabilized type; and subclasses 130+
    for receivers using oscillators of the automatic frequency stabilized type.


CLS 331/2
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the generated frequency of two or
    more oscillators is automatically stabilized. The oscillators may have
    A.F.S. loops individual to each oscillator or a single A.F.S. loop may
    control two or more oscillators, or any combination of A.F.S. loops may be
    employed, provided the generated frequency of two or more oscillators is
    automatically stabilized.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46+,    for plural oscillator systems in general.


CLS 331/3
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the frequency discriminator or
    sensing means is of the molecular or atomic resonance type, comprising a
    medium, which may be solid, liquid or gaseous, the frequency selective
    properties of which are due to the vibration or oscillation of the
    individual molecule or atom itself and are not due to the translational
    motion of the molecule or atom as a whole.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for A.F.S. systems utilizing a distributed parameter type
    discriminator.

    25+,    for A.F.S. systems utilizing a signal or phase comparing type
    discriminator having at least two inputs for the signals (of the controlled
    oscillator and reference source) to be compared.

    32+,    for A.F.S. systems having a single input type discriminator.

    78,     for electrical noise or random wave generators wherein the
    translatory motions of charged or excited particles or molecules are
    utilized to generate oscillations.

    94.1,   for oscillators of the molecular or particle resonant type (e.g.,
    maser) wherein a molecular or particle resonant solid, liquid or gas
    comprises the active element of the oscillator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 251 for devices for producing and
    propagating a unidirectional stream of neutral molecules or atoms through a
    vacuum, usually at thermal velocity and including means to excite the
    molecules or atoms at a resonant frequency.


CLS 331/4
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein means are provided, in addition to
    the A.F.S. loop, for varying the oscillator frequency through a range of
    frequencies. The systems classified herein are chiefly directed to means
    for restoring A.F.S. control wherein such control is lost due to the fact
    that the oscillator frequency for some reason, such as during "warm-up" or
    some other disturbance, lies outside the "capture" range of the frequency
    discriminator, the sweep range of frequencies includes the "capture" range
    of the discriminator and serves to bring the oscillator frequency within
    the "capture" range and thereby render the A.F.S. effective.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23+,    for oscillators wherein low frequency modulation of the generated
    oscillations is utilized for A.F.S., signals representative of the
    frequency modulated oscillations being compared with signals of the
    modulating source.

    106,    for oscillator systems of the periodic amplitude and frequency
    varying type.

    178,    for oscillators in general provided with cyclic frequency sweeping
    means.


CLS 331/5
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the oscillator provided with A.F.S.
    is of the magnetic and electric field controlled space discharge device
    type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86+,    for magnetron type oscillators in general, particularly subclass
    88, for such oscillators provided with frequency stabilization means of the
    nonautomatic type.


CLS 331/6
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the oscillator provided with A.F.S.
    is of the beam tube type utilizing hollow resonator electron bunching or
    electron bunching and catching means for determining the generated
    frequency of the oscillator. Such oscillators are generally designated as
    klystron oscillators.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83,     for multi-cavity type klystron oscillators.

    84,     for reflex type klystron oscillators.


CLS 331/7
TXT Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the oscillator is provided with two
    or more oscillator frequency controls as part of the A.F.S. system.  For
    example, the A.F.S. system for a reflex klystron oscillator may (1) control
    a motor to tune the cavity for coarse tuning and at the same time (2)
    supply a bias voltage to the reflector electrode for fine tuning of the
    oscillator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10+,    for single oscillators provided with two or more A.F.S. controls.


CLS 331/8
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the A.F.S. circuit of the
    oscillator includes semiconductor means, such as transistors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107+,   for oscillators wherein the active element is of the solid state
    type and indented subclasses 108+ wherein the active element is of the
    transistor type.


CLS 331/9
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the A.F.S. control circuit of the
    oscillator is provided with a frequency sensing means of the distributed
    parameter type (e.g., cavity resonator).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for A.F.S. systems utilizing a molecular resonance type
    discriminator.

    25+,    for A.F.S. systems wherein the discriminator is of the signal or
    phase comparing type having at least two inputs for the signals (of the
    controlled oscillator and reference source) to be compared.

    32+,    for A.F.S. systems having a single input type discriminator.


CLS 331/10
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein oscillator is provided with two or
    more A.F.S. means, each having a different effect in tuning the oscillator.
     For example, one A.F.S. means may provide a coarse tuning control and
    another A.F.S. means may effect a fine tuning control of the oscillator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for plural oscillators involving plural A.F.S. control loops.

    7,      for klystron oscillators provided with two or more oscillator
    frequency controls as part of the A.F.S. systems.


CLS 331/11
TXT Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein the oscillator system is provided
    with two or more comparators or discriminators, each of which may be
    associated with a separate A.F.S. control.  By way of examples (1) one
    discriminator may have a broad band frequency response characteristic and
    another discriminator may have a narrow band frequency response
    characteristic or (2) one discriminator may be of the frequency sensitive
    type, while another discriminator may be of the phase sensitive type.


CLS 331/12
TXT Subject matter under subclass 11 wherein at least two comparators are so
    arranged that the outputs of the controlled oscillator and a reference
    oscillator are directly compared in one comparator and the output of the
    controlled oscillator is phase-shifted and then compared with the reference
    oscillator in a second comparator, the outputs of the comparators then
    being combined in a control circuit to effect tuning of the controlled
    oscillator.


CLS 331/13
TXT Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein at least one of the A.F.S.
    controls includes an electric motor for electromechanically adjusting a
    tuning reactance of the oscillator.  Usually the motor control is utilized
    for coarse tuning while another A.F.S. control of the electronic type
    (e.g., including a reactance tube) is utilized for fine tuning of the
    oscillator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for oscillators wherein low frequency modulation of the generated
    oscillations is utilized for A.F.S. and wherein the signal comparator is of
    the electric motor type.

    29,     for oscillators wherein an electromechanical signal comparator is
    utilized in the A.F.S. loop.

    35,     for A.F.S. oscillators with electromechanically controlled
    oscillator frequency adjusting means.


CLS 331/14
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein means are provided to open and
    close the A.F.S. loop of the oscillator periodically.  By way of example, a
    periodically actuated switch may connect the input of the comparator in the
    A.F.S. loop of an oscillator alternately to the oscillator output and the
    reference oscillator output.


CLS 331/15
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the A.F.S. loop circuit of the
    oscillator is provided with means to limit the amplitude, or to maintain
    the amplitude constant, or to correct or otherwise compensate for undesired
    changes in amplitude of a control signal in the loop circuit, or to disable
    the A.F.S. loop if the amplitude of the control signal (e.g., reference
    oscillator signal) is below a predetermined level (e.g., the level wherein
    noise signals may adversely affect the oscillator A.F.S. and thereby cause
    the generated frequency to be shifted outside its proper range).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for beat frequency oscillators provided with amplitude adjustment
    or control means.

    109,    for transistor oscillators provided with amplitude stabilization or
    control means.

    182+,   for oscillators in general with amplitude control or stabilization.


CLS 331/16
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the A.F.S. controlled oscillator
    includes means for setting the frequency of the generated oscillations to
    any selected frequency within a predetermined frequency range, means being
    provided to interrupt or otherwise deactivate the A.F.S. control loop of
    the controlled oscillator while changing the generated frequency from one
    value to another so as to prevent the A.F.S. loop from tending to hold the
    oscillator frequency to its previously set value, that is, the A.F.S. tends
    to drag.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 255+ for similar A.F.S. systems
    utilized in radio receivers.


CLS 331/17
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the A.F.S. loop of the oscillator
    is provided with means to modify or control the error voltage so as to
    compensate or correct for undesired changes in the error voltage brought
    about by some deficiency in the oscillator system, such as a drift in
    reference frequency, hunting due to instability around the A.F.S. loop,
    undesired shift in phase of side band frequencies, and so forth.


CLS 331/18
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the A.F.S. circuit of the
    controlled oscillator includes a source of constant frequency, which source
    serves as a frequency standard, means being provided for comparing the
    frequency of the oscillations generated by the controlled oscillator with
    the standard frequency, the frequency comparison means producing an
    electrical control or error signal which is a measure of the deviation, in
    direction and amount, of the controlled oscillator frequency from the
    standard frequency, the control or error signal being applied to the
    frequency adjustment means of the controlled oscillator in such a manner as
    to reduce the frequency difference between the generated oscillations of
    the controlled oscillator and the oscillations of the constant frequency
    source to a minimum.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    329,    Demodulators, subclasses 323+ for a frequency demodulator using an
    oscillator and subclass 346 for a phase demodulator using an oscillator.


CLS 331/19
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 wherein the reference source is a spectrum
    generator producing a plurality of waves of different frequencies, which
    waves are simultaneously fed to the comparator or discriminator of the
    A.F.S. circuit of the controlled oscillator means being provided wherein
    the generated waves of the controlled oscillator may be selectively
    locked-in to the desired frequency of the spectrum.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include those systems wherein a
    filter or harmonic selecting network is provided for selecting a single
    frequency from the range of frequencies of the spectrum source, the
    selected frequency being fed to the comparator.  Such systems are elsewhere
    in subclasses 1+, depending on the type of oscillator or type of A.F.S.
    control.


CLS 331/20
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 wherein the oscillator system is of the
    type peculiarly adapted for use in television systems (e.g., vertical or
    horizontal sweep generators), the reference source comprising synchronizing
    pulses (usually of short duration) which pulses are compared with signals
    representative of the generated waves of the controlled oscillator in a
    phase comparison means, the resulting control or error signal from the
    comparison means being utilized to adjust the frequency of the controlled
    oscillator to restore it to the desired relationship with reference
    frequency.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143+,   for relaxation oscillators in general, especially indented subclass
    145, for multivibrators with synchronizing, triggering or pulsing circuit,
    indented subclass 149, for blocking oscillators with synchronizing,
    triggering or pulsing circuit and indented subclass 153, for relaxation
    oscillators in general with synchronizing, triggering or pulsing circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 1+ for
    cathode-ray tube circuits, especially indented subclasses 378, 379+ and
    391+ for cathode ray sweep circuits which may utilize sweep generators with
    A.F.S. control combined with significant cathode ray control means or
    cathode-ray tube structure, e.g., deflecting plates, deflecting coils, etc.

    348,    Television, subclasses 536+ for automatic frequency stabilizing
    systems as an element of a more comprehensive system, e.g., controlled
    oscillator combined with sync separator.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 354+ for synchronizers
    in general.


CLS 331/21
TXT Subject matter under subclass 20 wherein means are provided to stabilize or
    lock the controlled oscillator to the low frequency (e.g., 50, 60 C.P.S.)
    power current derived from a commercial alternating current supply line.


CLS 331/22
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 wherein two or more frequency beating or
    heterodyning means, or stages, are effectively connected in the A.F.S. loop
    of the controlled oscillator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for oscillators with plural heterodyne stages in the A.F.S. loop,
    but wherein the discriminator is of the single input type, i.e., no
    comparison of the oscillator frequency with a reference frequency or source
    is made at the discriminator.

    38+,    for beat frequency oscillator systems including plural beating or
    heterodyning means.


CLS 331/23
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 wherein means are provided to frequency
    modulate the generated oscillations of the controlled oscillator by a low
    frequency reference source, signals representative of the modulated signal
    being compared with signals from the low frequency reference source in a
    signal comparator, the error signal from the output of the comparator being
    utilized to restore the generated frequency of the oscillator to the
    desired relationship with the reference frequency.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for A.F.S. oscillators wherein the frequency of the oscillator is
    swept over a range of frequencies so as to bring the generated frequency
    within the "capture" range of the discriminator.


CLS 331/24
TXT Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein the signal comparator comprises a
    polyphase motor (usually of the two phase or split-phase type) having at
    least two phase windings, the signal representative of the low frequency
    modulated oscillations of the controlled oscillator being applied to one
    phase winding and the signal representative of the low frequency source
    being applied to another phase winding of the motor, the rotor of the motor
    is mechanically coupled to the frequency adjusting means of the oscillator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for a single oscillator with plural A.F.S. means wherein at least
    one of the A.F.S. means includes an electric motor for adjusting an
    oscillator frequency control means.

    29,     for A.F.S. oscillators with electromechanical signal comparator
    means.

    35,     for A.F.S. oscillators with electromechanical controlled oscillator
    frequency adjusting means.


CLS 331/25
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 wherein a particular or significant signal
    or phase comparing network is utilized in the A.F.S. loop of the controlled
    oscillator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for single oscillator with plural A.F.S. means and including plural
    comparators.

    32,     for A.F.S. systems wherein the discriminator is of the single input
    type and wherein no signal comparison is made.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 76.52+ for systems
    for measuring the frequency of a cyclic current or voltage by phase
    comparison with a standard cyclic current or voltage, and subclasses 76.77+
    for systems for measuring electricity utilizing phase comparison means
    (e.g., phase comparison between cyclic pulse voltage and sinusoidal
    current).

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 2+ for miscellaneous phase comparison circuits and
    subclasses 39+ for miscellaneous frequency comparing circuits.

    329,    Demodulators, subclasses 315+ for frequency demodulators and
    subclasses 345+ for phase demodulators.


CLS 331/26
TXT Subject matter under subclass 25 wherein the signal or phase comparator
    includes two or more unilaterally conducting devices (e.g., diodes) as
    elements thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for oscillator systems utilizing a single input, nonsignal
    comparing, discriminator of the plural diode type in the A.F.S. control
    loop thereof.


CLS 331/27
TXT Subject matter under subclass 25 wherein the signal of phase comparator
    includes two or more active elements (e.g., triodes) as elements thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 89 for electric
    current or voltage measuring systems utilizing a phase comparator, a
    grid-controlled tube means constituting an element or elements thereof.


CLS 331/28
TXT Subject matter under subclass 25 wherein the signal or phase comparator
    includes a unilaterally conducting element (e.g., diode, triode) as an
    element thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 87+ for electric
    current or voltage measuring systems utilizing phase comparison means with
    nonlinear device (e.g., rectifier, grid controlled tube, etc.).


CLS 331/29
TXT Subject matter under subclass 25 wherein the signal or phase comparator is
    of the electromechanical type (e.g., two-phase motor, the reference source
    being applied to one phase winding and the controlled oscillator output
    being applied to the other phase winding) or a frequency comparing means of
    the synchroscope type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for A.F.S. controlled oscillators of the modulated oscillator type
    (e.g., frequency modulation of controlled oscillator) utilizing an electric
    motor comparator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 90 for electric
    current and voltage measuring systems utilizing a phase comparator of the
    electrodynamometer type, and subclass 91 for phase comparators of the
    synchroscope type.


CLS 331/30
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the A.F.S. loop of the controlled
    oscillator comprises (1) means for beating or heterodyning the generated
    oscillations of the controlled oscillator with the oscillations of the
    reference oscillator or source and (2) a single input discriminator means
    responsive to the resulting heterodyned oscillations, which discriminator
    produces an output error or control signal proportional to the frequency
    deviation of the controlled oscillator from that of the reference source,
    the error signal being utilized to restore the generated frequency of the
    controlled oscillator to the desired relationship with the reference
    frequency.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37+,    for beat frequency oscillators, per se.


CLS 331/31
TXT Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein two or more beating or
    heterodyning means are utilized in the A.F.S. loop of the controlled
    oscillator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for oscillators having plural heterodyne stages in the A.F.S. loop,
    but wherein heterodyned oscillations of the controlled oscillator and the
    reference source signal are compared in a signal or phase comparator.

    38,     for beat frequency oscillator systems including plural beating or
    heterodyning means.


CLS 331/32
TXT Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein a significant or particular
    single-input frequency deviation detecting network or discriminator is
    utilized in the A.F.S. loop of the controlled oscillator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for A.F.S. systems utilizing a molecular resonance type
    discriminator.

    9,      for A.F.S. systems utilizing a distributed parameter type
    discriminator.

    25+,    for A.F.S. systems wherein the discriminator is of the signal or
    phase comparing type, having at least two inputs for the signals (of the
    controlled oscillator and reference source) to be compared.


CLS 331/33
TXT Subject matter under subclass 32 wherein the frequency deviation detecting
    network or discriminator includes two or more unilaterally conducting
    devices (e.g., diodes) as elements thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for oscillator systems utilizing plural input signal or phase
    comparators of the plural diode type in the A.F.S. control loop thereof.


CLS 331/34
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the controlled oscillator includes
    a significant or particular means for controlling, adjusting or varying its
    generated frequency as a function of the error signal from the
    discriminator in the A.F.S. loop of the controlled oscillator. The
    particular means may be (1) the adjustable tuning element of the controlled
    oscillator (e.g., a passive reactance or a reactance tube comprising an
    element of the oscillator tank circuit), or (2)  the means for adjusting
    the tuning element of (1), (such as an electric motor drive therefor), or
    (3) the combination of (1) and (2).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177+,   for oscillators in general with particular frequency adjustment
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 219+ for
    resonators of the distributed parameter type which may be provided with
    frequency adjusting means.

    334,    Tuners, appropriate subclasses for tuners, per se.  See the
    reference to Class 334 under subclass 1 above.


CLS 331/35
TXT Subject matter under subclass 34 wherein the frequency control means
    includes an electromechanical drive for the tuning or frequency adjusting
    element of the controlled oscillator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for a single oscillator with plural A.F.S. means and wherein
    electric motor means controls or adjusts the oscillator frequency
    determining means.

    24,     for A.F.S. controlled oscillators of the modulated oscillator type
    (e.g., frequency modulation of the controlled oscillator) utilizing an
    electric motor comparator.

    29,     for A.F.S. controlled oscillators having a signal or phase
    comparator of electromechanical type.


CLS 331/36
TXT Subject matter under subclass 34 wherein the particular frequency control
    means comprises an adjustable or variable reactance element or elements of
    the frequency determining network of the controlled oscillator.  Examples
    of such elements are:  reactance tubes, saturable core inductors,
    adjustable capacitors or inductors, etc.


CLS 331/37
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising a signal producing
    system including a signal combining device (e.g., mixer, modulator) having
    signal input circuit means and a signal output circuit, at least two
    oscillators or a single oscillator simultaneously generating plural
    frequencies being connected to the input circuit means, the arrangement
    being such that the sum and/or difference frequencies (usually the
    difference frequency) of the oscillations generated by the respective
    oscillators or of the plural frequency oscillator appears in the output
    circuit of the signal combining means.

    (1)     Note.  In addition to beat frequency oscillators the beat frequency
    principle is made use of in other systems, such as modulators, Class 332,
    and in radio receivers, 455, Telecommunications, subclasses 130+ (in the
    form of autodyne, homodyne, superheterodyne and other types of beat
    reception).  In general, beat frequency oscillators classified herein
    comprise means for beating two nonarbitrary sources of slightly different
    frequencies and of substantially equal amplitudes, the proximate purpose of
    the system being to produce a stable, high level, low frequency output wave
    (by selecting the lower side band). Modulators classified in Class 332 are
    directed to means for beating a source of carrier frequency of high
    amplitude with a signal wave of low amplitude, which signal wave varies
    arbitrarily in a continuous manner in accordance with some intelligence
    (e.g., sound). Radio receiver mixers or converters classified in Class 455,
    Telecommunications, subclasses 313+ are similar to the modulators of Class
    332 except that the modulating signal wave contains, in addition to an
    arbitrary signal wave a large predictable component (the incoming carrier
    wave).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for automatic frequency stabilized oscillators with a spectrum
    frequency reference source involving beat frequency generation in the
    stabilizing circuit.

    22,     for automatic frequency stabilized oscillators with signal
    comparator and having plural heterodyne stages in the stabilizing circuit.

    30+,    for automatic frequency stabilized oscillators with a stable
    heterodyne oscillator or source.

    51,     for frequency divider systems comprising plural oscillators in
    cascade.

    53,     for frequency multiplier systems comprising plural oscillators in
    cascade.

    76,     for oscillators combined with an output coupling network, with
    space discharge device or unilaterally conductive device therein, for
    harmonic producing or selecting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 424
    for nonoptical parametric amplifier frequency converters, per se.

    332,    Modulators, see (1) Note above. Consult also the notes and search
    notes appended to the class and subclass definitions of Class 332 as to
    other fields of search for beat frequency systems.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    326+ for optical frequency translators.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 130+, see (1) Note above.


CLS 331/38
TXT Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein the system includes at least two
    signal combining means (i.e., mixers or modulators).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for automatic frequency stabilized oscillators with reference
    oscillator or source and including plural heterodyne stages in the
    frequency control circuit.

    31,     for automatic frequency stabilized oscillators with plural
    heterodyne stages in the frequency control circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 314+ for radio receivers that may
    have plural heterodyning stages.


CLS 331/39
TXT Subject matter under subclass 38 wherein the plural mixers or modulators
    are connected in concatenation or cascade in a single channel, that is, the
    output of one mixer is connected to the input of a succeeding mixer, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for frequency divider systems comprising plural oscillators
    connected in cascade.

    53,     for frequency multiplier systems comprising plural oscillators
    connected in cascade.


CLS 331/40
TXT Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein (1) means are provided for
    changing the generated frequency of at least one of the beating oscillators
    from one frequency to another, usually over a range of frequencies, the
    change may be by discrete steps or continuous over the range, or (2) means
    are provided for changing the amplitude of the generated oscillations of at
    least one of the beating oscillators or for effecting a change in amplitude
    at some other point in the system, e.g., in the mixer circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for oscillators which are automatically maintained on frequency by
    retuning means when the frequency drifts from the desired frequency,
    indented subclass 4 for search sweep of the oscillator, indented subclass
    15 for amplitude compensated oscillator.

    47,     for plural oscillator systems wherein one oscillator varies the
    amplitude or frequency of another oscillator.

    48,     for plural oscillator systems wherein at least one oscillator has
    frequency adjusting means.

    90,     for magnetron type oscillators with frequency adjusting means.

    109,    for transistor oscillators with amplitude control.

    177+,   for oscillators in general with frequency adjusting means.

    182+,   for oscillators in general with amplitude adjusting means.


CLS 331/41
TXT Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein means are provided to prevent or
    compensate for an undesired drift in output frequency of the system.  Such
    drift in frequency may be caused by (1) a change in a circuit parameter
    (due to ambient temperature variations or to the heating affects of
    currents in the circuit), (2) changes in active element characteristics,
    (3) changes in active element electrode potentials, (4) variations in load
    impedance, (5) undesired pull-in of one oscillator with respect to another
    oscillator of the system, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for oscillators of the automatic frequency stabilized type.

    88,     for magnetron type oscillators with means to stabilize the
    frequency.

    175+,   for oscillators in general provided with frequency stabilizing
    means.


CLS 331/42
TXT Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein the signal combining means is of a
    particular type, such as the high frequency type (e.g., cavity mixer) or a
    tuned circuit between oscillator and mixer which circuit may include
    frequency dividers or multipliers.


CLS 331/43
TXT Subject matter under subclass 42 wherein a wave filter is included in the
    mixer output circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for oscillators with a wave filter connected in the output circuit.


CLS 331/44
TXT Subject matter under the class definition (1) wherein means are provided to
    adjust the frequency setting means of the oscillator to make its frequency
    of oscillation correspond to the frequency (or fundamental, harmonic or
    sub-harmonic) of a source of standard frequencies or (2) means are provided
    wherein the frequency of the oscillations generated by the oscillator is
    compared with the frequency of the oscillations of a source of standard
    frequencies and the tuning position indicator or dial of the oscillator is
    graduated or marked in accordance with the results of the comparison with
    the known frequency setting or settings of the source of standard
    frequencies or (3) wherein means are provided to determine a performance
    characteristic, or characteristics, of the oscillator under prescribed
    conditions of operation (e.g., test under particular duty cycle, test under
    various load conditions, test purity of generated wave form, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for oscillators with indicator, signal, or alarm in general and
    wherein frequency calibration of the oscillator with respect to a source of
    standard frequency or test of some other characteristic of the oscillator
    are not involved.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 250 for radio or microwave absorption
    wavemeters for determining the frequency or wavelength of a radio or
    microwave.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 20+ for systems for
    testing lamps and space discharge devices in general, particularly
    subclasses 24+ for testing the discharge characteristics of space discharge
    devices (e.g., such as triodes and pentodes), subclasses 57+ for measuring
    or testing electrical apparatus wherein no details of the apparatus are
    claimed, subclasses 76.12+ for systems to analyze complex electrical waves,
    and subclasses 76.39+ for systems for measuring the frequency of cyclic
    current or voltage.


CLS 331/45
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the oscillator system is
    provided with at least two output circuit, each output producing a separate
    wave of the same frequency, the waves being displaced in phase by a fixed
    angle (other than phase coincidence or phase opposition) so as to produce a
    multiphase or polyphase set of currents or voltages.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50+,    for plural oscillators connected in cascade wherein separate
    outputs may be taken from successive oscillators.

    57,     for ring oscillators comprising three or more switching tubes in
    closed ring connection.

    60,     for single oscillator systems provided with plural separate outputs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 13+
    for polyphase systems in general.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 1+ for cascaded or
    combined diverse conversion which may include conversion from one number of
    phases to another number of phases, and subclasses 148+ for phase
    conversion systems, per se.


CLS 331/46
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising an electrical system
    including at least two significant oscillators.

    (1)     Note.  If only one oscillator is significantly claimed and the
    other oscillator or oscillators are merely recited by name only without any
    oscillator circuit detail being claimed, classification is elsewhere in
    this class in accordance with the nature of system or of the significant
    oscillator claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for oscillator systems with automatic frequency stabilization which
    may involve plural oscillators.  See especially subclasses: 2, wherein
    plural oscillators are stabilized, 18+, wherein a reference oscillator or
    source is utilized, 30+, for such systems combined with a stable heterodyne
    oscillator. 37+, for plural oscillators utilized to produce a beat
    frequency. 45, for polyphase output systems that may utilize plural
    oscillators. 71, for oscillator systems wherein raw A.C. is utilized as a
    source of power or bias.

    87,     for magnetically controlled space discharge device oscillator
    (e.g., magnetron) with particular pulsing means.

    106,    for oscillators with periodic amplitude or frequency varying means
    (e.g., tremolo, vibrato).

    145,    for multivibrator oscillators with synchronizing, triggering or
    pulsing means.

    149,    for blocking oscillators with synchronizing, triggering or pulsing
    means.

    153,    for relaxation oscillators in general with synchronizing,
    triggering and pulsing means.

    172+,   for oscillators in general with synchronizing, triggering or
    pulsing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, particularly
    subclasses 18+ for plural sources of electrical energy in general
    associated with plural output circuits and subclasses 43+ for plural
    sources of electrical energy associated with a common output or load.


CLS 331/47
TXT Subject matter under subclass 46 wherein means are provided to enable
    energy from one oscillator to modify or vary the amplitude or frequency of
    the oscillations generated by another oscillator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for automatic frequency stabilized oscillators wherein one
    oscillator sweeps the generated frequency of a frequency stabilized
    oscillator through a range of frequencies.

    106,    for oscillators with periodic or repetitious amplitude or amplitude
    and frequency varying means.

    178,    for oscillators with cyclic frequency sweeping means.


CLS 331/48
TXT Subject matter under subclass 46 wherein at least one of a plurality of
    oscillators is provided with means to change the generated frequency from
    one value to another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for plural oscillators with automatic frequency stabilization, and
    subclass 34+ for oscillators with automatic frequency stabilization having
    particular frequency control means.

    40,     for beat frequency oscillators with frequency adjusting means.

    90,     for magnetron type oscillators with frequency adjustment means.

    106,    for oscillators with periodic or repetitious frequency varying
    means.

    177+,   for oscillators in general provided with frequency adjusting means.


CLS 331/49
TXT Subject matter under subclass 46 wherein means are provided for connecting
    one or more of two or more oscillators at will to a common output circuit
    or wherein means are provided for disconnecting one oscillator from a load
    circuit and connecting another oscillator to the load circuit, i.e.,
    oscillator substitution.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 23 for
    systems for substituting a source in a plural source-plural load circuit
    system, subclass 29 for systems for selectively connecting plural sources
    to plural load circuits, subclasses 64+ for systems for substituting a
    source in a plural source-single load system, and subclass 80 for systems
    for selectively connecting a source or sources in a plural source-single
    load system.


CLS 331/50
TXT Subject matter under subclass 46 wherein two or more oscillators are
    effectively connected in concatenation, that is, the output circuit of one
    oscillator is connected to the input circuit of a second oscillator so that
    the first oscillator drives the second oscillator.  The second oscillator
    may drive a third oscillator, the third oscillator a fourth oscillator, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38+,    for beat frequency oscillator systems wherein plural beating stages
    are cascaded.

    45+,    for polyphase output oscillators which may utilize cascaded
    oscillators.

    55,     for plural oscillators wherein a periodic source, recited broadly,
    synchronizes, triggers or pulses at least one of the plural oscillators.


CLS 331/51
TXT Cascaded oscillators under subclass 50 wherein at least one succeeding
    oscillator generates oscillations of a frequency that is subharmonically
    related to the frequency of the oscillations generated by a preceding
    oscillator of the cascade.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 157+ for frequency
    conversion systems in general, wherein an input alternating current of one
    frequency is converted directly into an output alternating current of a
    different frequency.  The output frequency may be either less or greater
    than this input frequency.


CLS 331/52
TXT Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein the cascaded oscillators are of
    the semiconductor active element type (e.g., transistor).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94.1,   for molecular or particle resonant type oscillators which may
    utilize a semiconductor element.

    107+,   for oscillators of the solid state active element type.


CLS 331/53
TXT Cascaded oscillators under subclass 50 wherein at least one succeeding
    oscillator generates oscillations of a frequency that is harmonically
    related to the frequency of the oscillations generated by a preceding
    oscillator of the cascade.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76,     for a single oscillator combined with an harmonic producing or
    selecting network, which network includes a space discharge or unilaterally
    conductive device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 157+ for frequency
    conversion systems in general, wherein an input alternating current of one
    frequency is converted directly into an alternating current of another
    frequency.  The output frequency may be either greater or less than the
    input frequency.


CLS 331/54
TXT Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein at least two of the cascaded
    oscillators are of different types, such as:  Hartley and Colpitts
    oscillators, relaxation and sine wave oscillators, multivibrator and
    blocking oscillators, by way of examples.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59,     wherein a single oscillator system is provided with means to
    convert it from one type of oscillator to a diverse type.


CLS 331/55
TXT Subject matter under subclass 46 wherein at least one of a plurality of
    oscillators is provided with means for coupling the oscillator, or
    oscillators, to a periodic source of synchronizing or triggering potential
    to drive to lock the period of the oscillator, or oscillators, to the
    period of the source or to some multiple or submultiple thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18+,    for oscillators of the automatic frequency stabilized type
    synchronized with respect to a standard or reference frequency source.

    41,     for beat frequency oscillators that are locked to synchronize with
    a standard or reference frequency.

    50+,    for cascade or tandem connected oscillators.

    87,     for magnetron type oscillators with means to pulse the oscillator.

    145,    for multivibrators with synchronizing, triggering or pulsing
    circuit.

    149,    for blocking oscillators with synchronizing, triggering or pulsing
    circuits.

    153,    for relaxation oscillators in general with synchronizing,
    triggering or pulsing means.

    172+,   for oscillators in general with synchronizing, triggering or
    pulsing means.


CLS 331/56
TXT Subject matter under subclass 46 wherein the output circuits of at least
    two oscillators are effectively connected in parallel.


CLS 331/57
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the oscillator comprises
    three or more active elements connected or cascade, the output of one
    active element being connected to the input of another active element to
    form a closed chain or loop, the active elements being so connected and
    biased that they are caused to switch from a conducting to a nonconducting
    state in succession, cyclically, thereby generating self-sustained
    oscillations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for polyphase output oscillators which may be of the closed-ring
    type.

    50+,    for plural oscillators connected in cascade.

    113,    for transistor oscillators of the multivibrator type wherein two
    transistors are alternately switched.

    135+,   for phase shift oscillators which may comprise plural tubes in
    cascade in a closed loop, but wherein a switching action of the tubes does
    not take place.

    144+,   for multivibrator oscillators in general wherein two tubes are
    alternately switched.


CLS 331/58
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the oscillator circuit is
    provided with means for performing at least one other function in addition
    to the generation of oscillations, which other function is independent of
    and is intended to be performed concurrently with the production of
    oscillations by the oscillator.  An example of the type of plural function
    system falling within the foregoing definition is that of a vacuum tube
    circuit that simultaneously acts as an amplifier of extraneous waves of one
    frequency and as an oscillator with respect to waves of a different
    frequency, there being no mutual interaction between the two waves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37+,    for beat frequency oscillators wherein a single electron tube
    oscillator may act as a frequency converter, the oscillations generated by
    the oscillator being combined or mixed within the tube with externally
    supplied oscillations to produce in the output of the tube a beat frequency
    which is the algebraic sum or difference of the generated and supplied
    oscillations.

    59,     for oscillator systems that may be selectively converted from an
    oscillator to another type of electrical system, such as an amplifier, or
    detector, or to another oscillator of a different type.

    60+,    for oscillators with plural output circuits, especially indented
    subclass 61 wherein the plural outputs are of diverse wave forms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 1, 82, 93, 101, 104, and 112 for subject
    matter including plural function amplifiers which also operate as
    oscillators simultaneously.

    332,    Modulators, appropriate subclasses, wherein a single electron tube
    circuit may perform the dual function of carrier frequency generation and
    modulation.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 321+ for heterodyne receiving
    systems utilizing a frequency converter system wherein a single electron
    tube circuit may perform the dual function of local oscillation generation
    and signal frequency mixing.


CLS 331/59
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein means are provided for
    effecting a change in oscillator circuit connections or for adding or
    substituting circuit element thereto so that the system resulting from such
    change or substitution is substantially different from the original
    oscillator circuit.

    (1)     Note.  Typical systems classifiable herein are oscillators
    convertible to (1) amplifiers, (2) detectors, (3) wave meters, (4)
    triggered multivibrator, or oscillators convertible to another type of
    oscillator, for example, (5) sine wave generator to square wave generator,
    (6) Colpitts oscillator to Hartley oscillator, (7) Colpitts oscillator to
    tuned feedback oscillator, and (8) fixed frequency crystal oscillator to
    tunable LC oscillator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for oscillator systems wherein the system simultaneously performs
    some function in addition to generating oscillations (e.g., amplifies an
    external signal or detects an external signal).

    161,    for crystal oscillators wherein means are provided for substituting
    one crystal for another in the oscillator circuit.

    179,    for oscillators in general wherein the frequency of oscillation is
    adjustable in discrete steps, e.g., by switching in or substituting
    inductors and/or capacitors having different fixed values of reactance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 1, 82, 93, 101, 104, and 112 for subject
    matter including amplifiers convertible to oscillators.


CLS 331/60
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the oscillator network
    includes at least two separate and distinct output circuits.

    (1)     Note.  Push-pull output type oscillators for supplying a balance
    push-pull load are classified with the particular oscillator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for oscillators of the polyphase output type wherein the separate
    output voltages or currents are of the polyphase type, i.e., the separate
    output voltages or currents are of the same period and differ by a constant
    phase angle (other than phase coincidence or phase opposition).

    46+,    for plural oscillator systems which may have plural separate
    outputs.

    74+,    for oscillators combined with a particular output coupling network
    which network may include plural separate output circuits.


CLS 331/61
TXT Subject matter under subclass 60 wherein the electric waves derivable from
    at least two separate output circuits are of different wave shapes.
    Examples are:  sine wave and triangular wave, saw-tooth and square wave,
    sine wave and square wave, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for oscillators with space discharge device or unilaterally
    conductive device in the output circuit (e.g., for producing distorted
    waves).

    111+,   for transistor-type relaxation oscillators.

    129+,   for gas-tube type relaxation oscillators.

    143+,   for relaxation oscillators in general.


CLS 331/62
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the oscillator is
    provided with means to protect the oscillator circuit or elements thereof
    from damage due to some condition or malfunction of the oscillator circuit
    or power supply therefor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     for oscillators provided with means to protect operating personnel
    or others who may come into contact with exposed portions of the oscillator
    from electrical shock.

    67,     for oscillators provided with electromagnetic or electrostatic
    shield means to prevent undesirable couplings between elements of the
    oscillator caused by fields generated within the oscillator circuit or to
    prevent external fields from influencing the oscillator.

    68+,    for oscillators having outer casings or housings to protect the
    oscillator from damage due to external mechanical forces.

    70,     for oscillators provided with means to modify the temperature of
    the oscillator or elements thereof, wherein the means may be for the
    purpose of cooling the oscillator or elements thereof to prevent damage
    thereto that would result if the oscillator or elements thereof were
    permitted to overheat.

    182+,   for oscillators having means for controlling or maintaining the
    amplitude level of the generated oscillations and wherein the invention is
    not primarily for protecting the oscillator from overload.

    186,    for oscillators having a regulated source of power or bias and
    wherein the invention is not primarily for protecting the oscillator from
    damage due to excessive bias potential.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 326+
    for electrical systems in general having self-protective, safety or limit
    control features.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    safety and protection systems for electrical devices and equipment in
    general.  See the search notes, and under "SEARCH CLASS" of subclasses 92+
    of Class 307 and subclasses 1+ of Class 361 as to further fields of search
    for protective systems for specific electrical devices and systems.


CLS 331/63
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the oscillator is
    provided with means for protecting persons contacting the oscillator or an
    exposed portion thereof or persons controlling the oscillator from the
    danger of bodily injury or electrical shock because of the high potentials
    associated with the oscillator (e.g., the potential of the power source or
    the generated oscillations).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for oscillators having means to prevent damage to the oscillator
    circuit or elements thereof due to some condition or malfunction of the
    oscillator circuit or the power supply therefor.

    68+,    for oscillators with protective casings or housings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 5 for electric
    shock hazard protective devices in general.  See also the search notes to
    this subclass as to other fields of search for devices to protect personnel
    against electrical shock.


CLS 331/64
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the oscillator is
    provided with an indicator, signal or alarm means to indicate or signal
    some state or condition of the oscillator.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of indicating, signaling or alarm means included
    herein are (1) calibrated scales and cooperating indicators or pointers to
    indicate the frequency setting of a tunable tank circuit of the oscillator
    or to indicate the amplitude setting of an output attenuator of the
    oscillator, (2) electric meters, signals or alarms to indicate or respond
    to any current or potential of the oscillator, such as output load current
    or power, overload current, bias potential level, frequency of the
    generated oscillations, standing wave ratio of oscillator resonator, etc.,
    (3) indicating or signaling means responsive to any other condition of the
    oscillator such as temperature or humidity, by way of example.

    (2)     Note.  Systems wherein the oscillator is an element of a more
    comprehensive indicating or signaling system, for example, a system for
    performing an external (to the oscillator) chemical, physical or electrical
    measurement or test are not classified herein but in the class providing
    for such systems.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for methods of or systems for calibrating the oscillation frequency
    setting means or tuning scale of an oscillator or for testing the
    oscillation frequency characteristics of the oscillator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for physical
    measuring and testing systems or devices in general not elsewhere provided
    for.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclasses for indicators,
    signals and alarms of the mechanical type and not elsewhere classifiable.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 250 for radio and microwave absorption
    meters for determining the wavelength or frequency of a radio or microwave.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for
    electrical measuring and testing systems in general, particularly
    subclasses 76.39+ for cyclic current or voltage frequency measuring or
    testing devices.

    332,    Modulators, subclass 118 for frequency modulators and subclass 150
    for amplitude modulators with indicating means, observing means and/or
    signal, respectively.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, appropriate subclasses for electrical
    signals and alarms, especially subclasses 870.01+ for continuous variable
    indication devices and systems (e.g., telemetry) and subclass 653 for
    oscillator condition responsive signals and alarms.


CLS 331/65
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the oscillator is
    combined with means distinct from the oscillator system or wherein the
    means is a modified element of the oscillator, which means is responsive to
    a nonelectrical condition external to the oscillator, a current
    characteristic of the oscillator, (e.g., amplitude or frequency) being
    varied in accordance with changes in the sensed condition.

    (1)     Note.  The condition sensing means may, for example, comprise means
    responsive to (1) presence or absence of a material body, (2) moisture or
    humidity, (3) temperature, (4) light, (5) pressure, (6) liquid level, and
    so forth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for oscillators with automatic frequency stabilization wherein
    means are employed to sense a drift in oscillator frequency and to effect a
    tuning of the oscillator in the proper direction to maintain the oscillator
    frequency constant.

    62,     for oscillators having means to sense an undesirable condition in
    the oscillator and responsive thereto to correct the condition or so
    control the oscillator to prevent damage to the oscillator.

    69      and 70, for oscillators having means to modify the temperature of
    the oscillator or a part thereof in response to temperature changes in the
    oscillator or the relative temperature change of the oscillator and its
    ambient medium.

    176,    for oscillators whose frequency is stabilized by a temperature or
    current responsive means in the oscillator circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses, for measuring and
    testing apparatus involving sensing means for making physical measurements
    or tests not provided for in other classes.  See also, the Notes to the
    class definitions and under "SEARCH CLASS" as to condition sensing means
    classified in other classes.  See particularly under (3) Note, section C,
    of the class definition of Class 73 as to various electrical devices and
    electrical systems classes which utilize condition responsive controls.

    332,    Modulators, appropriate subclasses for modulated oscillators
    combined with specific intelligence source (e.g., electro-acoustic
    transducer).

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 129 for a
    phonograph circuit with an information modulated oscillator.


CLS 331/66
TXT Subject matter under subclass 65 wherein the condition responsive means is
    responsive to temperature or radiant energy in the form of light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176,    for frequency stabilized oscillators with temperature or current
    responsive stabilizing means in circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for visible light responsive
    photocell electric circuits or photocell apparatus in general.

    332,    Modulators, appropriate subclasses for modulated oscillators
    combined with a specific intelligence source of the photoelectric
    transducer type.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 584+ and 600 for electrical
    signal systems or alarms responsive to temperature, radiant and energy
    respectively.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 43+ for optical
    pyrometers, subclasses 402+ for shade or color testing, and subclasses 213+
    for photometers.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 121+ for a thermal
    radiation responsive thermometer, and subclasses 170+ for an electrical
    thermometer with a digital signal controlling an indicator.


CLS 331/67
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the oscillator system is
    provided (1) with means for shielding at least part of the oscillator
    system from external electric or magnetic fields, (2) with means to shield
    one or more parts of the oscillator system from electric or magnetic fields
    generated in one or more other parts of the oscillator system, (3) with
    shielding or screening means to prevent radiation of undesired electric or
    magnetic fields generated within the oscillator system.

    (1)     Note.  The electric or magnetic shield or screen to be classified
    herein must be in addition to and separate from oscillator circuit element
    structure. For example, if the electron tube of the oscillator contains a
    screen grid or


            shielding electrode as a perfecting feature of the tube this is
    considered tube structure and not shielding or screening for this subclass.
     Subclasses 72+ for instance, is directed to electron coupled oscillators
    utilizing tetrode or pentode tubes wherein the screen electrode shields or
    screens the oscillator circuit section of the tube from the output or anode
    circuit thereof.  Another example of excluded subject matter is that of an
    oscillator wherein the resonator of the oscillator encloses and forms a
    screen for the active element of the oscillator (see subclasses 97+, for
    example, for a tube enclosed by a distributed parameter type resonator).

    (2)     Note.  The shield or screen must be claimed as a magnetic, electric
    or electromagnetic shield or screen, or such limitations must be recited to
    clearly restrict the shield or screen to that use, to cause classification
    in this subclass.  Merely reciting the combination of an oscillator with an
    outer casing or housing, or as a metallic outer casing or housing, for
    example, would not be sufficient for classification herein, such
    combination being classified in subclasses 68+ below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68+,    for oscillators combined with outer casing or housing.  See (2)
    Note above.

    72+,    for electron coupled oscillators utilizing screen grid tubes.  See
    (1) Note above.

    79+,    for beam tube oscillators wherein part of the tube structure may
    include electric or magnetic shielding means.

    86+,    for magnetically controlled space discharge device oscillators
    wherein part of the discharge device may include electric or magnetic
    shielding means.

    97+,    for oscillators wherein the oscillator tube is enclosed by a
    distributed parameter resonator of the oscillator.  (See (1) Note above).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 32+ for
    miscellaneous anti-inductive structures, see particularly indented
    subclasses 35+, for miscellaneous electrical shields and screen structures
    not elsewhere classifiable. The search notes to subclasses 32+, indicate
    further fields of search for anti-inductive and shielding structure.


CLS 331/68
TXT Oscillators under the class definition provided with a casing or housing to
    enclose the oscillator.

    (1)     Note.  The function of the casing or housing surrounding the
    oscillator in the patents in this subclass is to provide primarily for the
    mechanical protection or for the control of the physical environment of the
    enclosed oscillator.

    (2)     Note.  The casing or housing includes at least the oscillator
    system and may or may not include the power supply or biasing sources for
    the oscillator.

    (3)     Note.  If the casing or housing is claimed as an electric,
    magnetic, or electro-magnetic shield or screen the patent is excluded and
    is classified in subclass 67 above.

    (4)     Note.  The casing or housing in this subclass must be independent
    of the oscillator.  For example, if the oscillator is enclosed by one of
    its own components (such as its resonator) classification is with the
    particular oscillator.  Subclasses 97+, by way of example, provides for
    oscillators wherein the active element is enclosed by a distributed
    parameter resonator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     for oscillators with electromagnetic or electrostatic shield.  See
    (3) Note above.

    79+,    for beam tube oscillators wherein the frequency determining
    structure (i.e., resonator or slow wave structure) is enclosed by the tube
    envelop.

    86+,    for magnetically controlled space discharge device oscillators
    (e.g., magnetron) wherein the frequency determining network of the
    oscillator is enclosed by the tube envelope.

    97+,    for oscillators wherein the active element is enclosed by a
    distributed parameter resonator.  See (4) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, for miscellaneous casings
    and housings for electrical devices and including the combination of the
    casing or housing with the electrical device recited by name only,
    particularly subclasses 8+ for such devices intended to be used with a
    fluid or vacuum and subclasses 50+ for such devices of general utility.
    See the search notes to the class definition of Class 174 and to subclasses
    8 and 50 and under "SEARCH CLASS" thereunder as to other fields of search
    for particular electrical devices with housings.


CLS 331/69
TXT Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein means are associated with the
    housed oscillator for controlling or modifying the temperature of the
    oscillator or elements thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66,     for oscillators combined with temperature sensing means external to
    the oscillator for controlling a characteristic of the oscillator (e.g.,
    frequency or amplitude) as a function of an externally sensed temperature.

    70,     for oscillators having means for controlling or modifying the
    temperature of the oscillator or elements thereof and wherein the
    oscillator is not combined with an enclosing housing or casing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 15.1+ for
    combined electrical device (recited by name only) casing or housing
    therefor and means for feeding, circulating or distributing a fluid or with
    means to cool either the electrical device or the fluid.


CLS 331/70
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein means are provided for
    modifying or controlling the temperature of the oscillator or elements
    thereof.

    (1)     Note.  For example, included in this subclass are oscillators
    provided with (1) crystal ovens for controlling or maintaining the
    oscillator crystal temperature constant, (2) means for forcing a cooling
    fluid through a cavity resonator of the oscillator, (3) means for
    circulating a fluid through a hollow conductor comprising the inductor of
    the LC frequency determining element of the oscillator, (4) an oscillator
    tube wherein the anode or cathode structure of the tube is provided with
    passages through which a cooling fluid is passed or wherein the external
    terminal of the anode electrode may include cooling fins.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66,     for oscillators combined with an external temperature responsive
    means for controlling a characteristic (e.g., frequency or amplitude) of
    the oscillator.

    69,     for oscillators including temperature modifying means, combined
    with an outer casing or housing.

    176,    for oscillators in general including temperature or current
    responsive means in the oscillator circuit for stabilizing the oscillator
    frequency.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 15.1+ for means
    for cooling electrical apparatus wherein no details of the apparatus are
    claimed.  See the search notes to subclass 15.1 and the class definition
    search notes of Class 174 for other fields of search with respect to
    modifying the temperature of particular electrical apparatus.


CLS 331/71
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the source of power or
    bias for the output and control electrodes or the output electrode of the
    active element of the oscillator comprises raw alternating current, which
    current is applied directly to the electrodes.

    (1)     Note.  Where the raw alternating current is merely applied to the
    control electrode of the active element of the oscillator classification is
    not in this subclass, but elsewhere in this class in accordance with the
    particular type of oscillator systems or the nature of the control.  For
    example, oscillator systems which may have alternating current applied to
    the control grid of the active element thereof may be found in subclass 47,
    wherein one oscillator is used to vary the amplitude of the oscillation
    generated by another oscillator; subclasses 50+ for cascaded or series
    connected oscillators; subclass 55 wherein plural oscillators may be
    synchronized from an external source or where one oscillator synchronizes
    another; subclass 106 for oscillators with periodic or repetitious
    amplitude and/or frequency varying means (e.g., tremolo, vibrato); and
    oscillators with synchronizing triggering or pulsing means involving grid
    bias control may be found in subclass 145 for multi-vibrators, subclass 149
    for blocking oscillators, subclass 153 for relaxation oscillators in
    general and subclasses 172+ for oscillators in general.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     see (1) Note above.

    50+,    see (1) Note above.

    55,     see (1) Note above.

    106,    see (1) Note above.

    145,    see (1) Note above.

    149,    see (1) Note above.

    153,    see (1) Note above.

    172+,   see (1) Note above.

    185+,   for oscillators with particular source of power or bias voltage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 137+ for
    gaseous space discharge device or vacuum diode systems supplied with a
    polyphase alternating current, and subclasses 246+ for similar systems
    supplied with pulsating or alternating current supply (see the search notes
    appended to subclasses 246+ for further fields of search for similar
    subject matter).

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 114+ for linear amplifiers wherein an
    unrectified alternating current is applied to an electrode of an active
    element or elements, thereof.


CLS 331/72
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the active element of the
    oscillator includes a cathode, two or more grids and an output electrode
    (e.g., conventional tetrode or pentode) and wherein the cathode and at
    least two grids are connected in circuit to form a triode oscillator, one
    of the grids acting as an anode electrode, and wherein the output electrode
    is coupled to the oscillator solely through the electron stream, so that
    the output circuit is substantially isolated from the oscillator circuit.
    In effect, the resulting circuit comprises an oscillator and power
    amplifier combined in one tube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75+,    for the combination of oscillator and output amplifier, wherein the
    oscillator and amplifier each comprise separate and distinct active
    elements.

    79+,    for beam tube type oscillators wherein the output circuit may be
    electron coupled to a directed electron beam.

    134,    for negative resistance oscillators of the transition type wherein
    a plural grid active element is utilized.

    147,    for blocking oscillators utilizing a plural grid tube.

    152,    for relaxation oscillators having a multi-grid discharge device in
    the charged capacitor circuit.


CLS 331/73
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72, wherein a piezoelectric crystal comprises
    a frequency determining element of the oscillator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    for transistor oscillators using a piezoelectric crystal.

    139,    for bridge oscillator with piezoelectric crystal in the bridge
    network.

    155,    for oscillator with a crystal driven electromechanical resonator.

    158+,   for crystal oscillators in general.


CLS 331/74
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the oscillator has
    coupled or connected to its output circuit an additional network, which
    network may be passive or active, the driven load being coupled or
    connected to the output of the additional network.

    (1)     Note.  To be classified in this and indented subclasses the
    additional output coupling network must be significantly claimed.  If it is
    claimed nominally, for example, as a transformer coupled output or a
    directly connected output, or the like, classification will be with the
    particular oscillator and not herein.

    (2)     Note.  Where the oscillator is claimed in broad terms, such as a
    wave generator, pulse generator harmonic generator, oscillator, or the
    like, so as to provide no basis for classification in this class and the
    oscillator is claimed in combination with a specific output coupling
    network, classification, in general, will be with the particular coupling
    network and not herein.  Class 333, Wave Transmission Lines and Networks,
    provides for passive type wave transmission coupling networks (e.g.,
    impedance matching networks, equalizing networks, delay lines, wave
    filters) and the class definitions and search notes of Class 333, and
    particularly, under subclass 24, entitled "coupling networks", the search
    notes and "SEARCH CLASS" thereunder should be consulted as to other classes
    which provide for particular coupling networks. Similarly, for a field of
    search for coupling networks of the active element type, the definitions,
    search notes and "SEARCH CLASS" under the appropriate subclasses of Class
    327,  Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems should be consulted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37+,    for beat frequency oscillators wherein at least two sources of
    oscillation are connected or coupled to a modulator or mixer network to
    produce an output which is the difference or the sum of the two frequencies.

    45,     for oscillators including a network for producing a polyphase
    output.

    46+,    for plural oscillators wherein one oscillator may be in the output
    circuit of another oscillator.

    72,     for electron coupled oscillators wherein a single multi-grid
    electron tube (e.g., tetrode or pentode) is so connected that one section
    of the tube acts as an oscillator and the output electrode (usually the
    anode) is coupled to the oscillator solely through the electron stream and
    acts effectively as a stage of amplification.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous systems with particular
    output circuits.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 24+ for passive
    coupling networks, per se.  See also (2) Note above.


CLS 331/75
TXT Subject matter under subclass 74 wherein the output coupling network
    includes a device having at least two spaced electrodes between which an
    electric current may be caused to flow.  Included, by way of example, are
    spark gaps, electron tubes (diodes, triodes, etc.) of the vacuum type or
    gas-filled type and solid state equivalents thereof, such as semi-conductor
    barrier layer devices (e.g., rectifier, transistors).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46+,    for plural oscillator systems wherein one oscillator may be in the
    output circuit of another oscillator.

    72,     for electron coupled oscillators wherein a single multi-grid
    electron tube (e.g., tetrode or pentode) is so connected that one section
    of the tube acts as an oscillator and the output electrode (usually the
    anode) is coupled to the oscillator solely through the electron stream and
    acts effectively as a stage of amplification.

    150,    for relaxation oscillators with output circuit connected to another
    discharge device circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission Interconnection Systems, subclasses 401+
    for miscellaneous systems utilizing nonlinear reactor devices and not
    elsewhere classifiable and subclasses 106+ for class appropriate waveform
    or wave shape determinative or pulse producing systems.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous transistor and electron
    tube nonlinear circuits.

    330,    Amplifiers, appropriate subclasses for the various types of linear
    amplifiers, per se.


CLS 331/76
TXT Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein (1) the active element is operated
    on a nonlinear portion of its characteristic so as to produce harmonics of
    the fundamental frequency of the oscillator, further filter means usually
    being provided to select a particular harmonic or harmonics of the
    harmonics generated, or (2) a wave filter selective to the desired harmonic
    or harmonics of the harmonics generated by the oscillator is included in
    the output coupling network.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for frequency dividing plural oscillator systems, wherein the
    oscillators are connected in cascade or series.

    53,     for frequency multiplying plural oscillator systems, wherein the
    oscillators are connected in cascade or series.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 105
    for miscellaneous systems employing harmonic filtering or neutralizing
    devices and not elsewhere classifiable.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 167+ for passive
    wave filters, especially subclasses 175+ for resonant discrete frequency
    selective type filters.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 157+ for frequency
    conversion systems, for directly converting a current into a current of a
    higher or lower frequency, especially subclasses 166+ for electronic tube
    frequency converting systems.


CLS 331/77
TXT Subject matter under subclass 74 wherein the output coupling network is of
    the passive type and is so designed as to pass waves of a desired frequency
    or band of frequencies with little attenuation while highly attenuating
    waves of other or undesired frequency or band of frequencies.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32+,    for oscillators having automatic frequency stabilization utilizing
    a stable heterodyne oscillator and wherein the frequency discriminator may
    be of the passive-filter type.

    43,     for beat frequency oscillators having a filter in the mixer output.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 167+ for passive
    type wave filters, per se.


CLS 331/78
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the oscillator comprises
    means for utilizing the random translatory motions of charged particles for
    generating a substantially infinite number of waves of different
    frequencies which are fortuitously related, having no definite phase
    relationship, period, amplitude or shape.  The means may be (1) a solid
    conductor, the random waves being generated by the thermal agitation of the
    free electrons, or (2) a thermionic space discharge device, wherein the
    random waves are caused by random emission of electrons (such as the shot
    effect in a temperature limited thermionic diode), or (3) a gaseous space
    discharge device wherein the thermal agitation or electrical excitation of
    the molecules, ions and electrons of the gas produces the random waves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94.1,   for molecular or particle resonant type oscillators wherein the
    generated oscillations are caused by the vibration of the particle,
    molecule or atom itself and is not due to translational motion of the
    particle, molecule or atoms as a whole.


CLS 331/79
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein (1) the active element of
    the oscillator comprises a space discharge device consisting of a source of
    charged particles, means for concentrating the particles into a directed
    beam, means for exerting a control on the beam (e.g., beam accelerating
    electrode, control grid, deflecting means, slow wave structure, buncher
    type resonator, reflector electrode, etc.) and means for deriving output
    oscillatory energy from the controlled beam.

    (1)     Note.  The active elements in this and indented subclasses are of
    the transit time or velocity variation or velocity modulation type, and
    while space charge effects influence the beam somewhat they are secondary,
    the primary effect of control of the beam being that of velocity variation.
     This action is to be contrasted with that of the space-charge control
    tubes (e.g., conventional triode) wherein the electron density is varied
    and the slight change in electron velocity during such variation is
    secondary.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6+,     for klystron oscillators provided with automatic frequency
    stabilization.

    86+,    for magnetically controlled space discharge device type oscillators
    (e.g., magnetron) wherein the space discharge device is not of the beam
    type, but which device may utilize transit time effects to produce
    oscillations.

    92+,    for retarding field tube type oscillators wherein the tube is not
    of the beam type.

    104+,   for transit time oscillators in general and wherein the active
    element is not of the beam type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 364+ for
    cathode-ray tube structure and subclass 299 for beam tube structure.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 1+ for
    cathode-ray tube systems in general, especially subclasses 3+ for systems
    utilizing cathode-ray tubes combined with circuit element structure.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 43 and 44+ for linear amplifiers which
    include an active element of the electron beam type.

    332,    Modulators, appropriate subclasses for modulators utilizing
    electron beam discharge devices.


CLS 331/80
TXT Subject matter under subclass 79 wherein the beam control means of the
    space discharge device includes means (e.g., beam deflecting electrodes or
    coils) for causing the beam to depart from its directed path.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are systems wherein the beam
    sweeping deflecting device acts as driven switching device to shock excite
    a resonant circuit into oscillation, the switching device being driven by
    an external oscillator.  For other shock-excited resonant circuit systems
    see this class subclass 128 wherein the switching element is of the gaseous
    space discharge type and subclass 166 wherein the switching element is of
    the active element type and which system is not provided for in any
    preceding subclass.  The driving oscillator in subclasses 80, 128 and 166
    is claimed in broad terms only, if the driving oscillator is significantly
    claimed classification is in some preceding subclass, such as subclasses
    74+ for the combination of specific oscillator with particular output
    coupling networks, especially indented subclasses 75+ wherein the output
    coupling network may include a space discharge device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74+,    see (1) Note above.

    75+,    see (1) Note above.

    84,     for beam tube oscillators of the reflex type wherein the beam is
    reflected so as to travel in a direction opposite to its initial direction.

    128,    see (1) Note above.

    166,    see (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 421+ for
    cathode-ray tube structures provided with ray deflection means.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 5.18+ for
    cathode-ray tube devices including a hollow distributed parameter type
    resonator wherein the ray passes through the resonator and the tube is
    provided with repeller means to return the ray to the resonator, subclasses
    5.24+ for cathode-ray tube devices including a hollow resonator through the
    ray passes and having means to deflect or reflect the ray, and subclasses
    364+ for cathode-ray tube circuits in general having means for deflecting
    the cathode-ray.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 46 for linear amplifiers utilizing beam
    deflection tubes.


CLS 331/81
TXT Subject matter under subclass 79 wherein the means for controlling the beam
    comprises a resonator or a slow wave structure (delay line) effectively in
    energy-coupling relation to the moving beam of particles, the energy
    interchange between the particles and resonator or slow wave structure due
    to relative movement therebetween resulting in a change in velocity of
    given particles along the path of the beam, such differences in velocity of
    given particles causing the particles to form in groups or bunches.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for oscillators utilizing velocity variation type active elements
    (e.g., Klystron) and having means for automatically stabilizing the
    oscillator frequency.

    86+,    for magnetically controlled space discharge device oscillators of
    the magnetron type wherein the electrons in the interaction space between
    the cathode and anode resonator may be subjected to velocity modulation and
    bunching to generate oscillations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 3+ for
    cathode-ray tubes combined with circuit element structure, especially
    indented subclasses 3.5+ for traveling wave tubes with delay transmission
    line and indented subclasses 4+ for cathode-ray tube combined with inductor
    or distributed parameter type inductive structure, and subclass 39.3 for
    traveling wave tube with delay line and wherein the active electrons are
    not in the form of a beam or ray.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 45 for velocity variation electron-beam tube
    linear amplifiers.

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 133, 147+ or 165+, for electron bunching
    type tubes (e.g., klystron) utilized in a frequency, phase or amplitude
    modulator, respectively.


CLS 331/82
TXT Subject matter under subclass 81 wherein the means controlling the beam
    comprises a transmission line of the slow wave type placed in energy
    exchanging relation to the beam of particles, the axes of the transmission
    line and the beam being in the same general direction, the transmission
    line being so constructed that the phase velocity of a component of a
    traveling electromagnetic wave propagated therealong approximates the
    velocity of the beam of particles being such that the wave gains in energy
    while the particles lose energy, the slowing down of the particles causing
    groups or bunches to form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 3.5+ for
    cathode- ray tube circuits wherein the tube is of the traveling wave type
    combined with a delay type transmission line, and subclass 39.3 for a
    discharge device of the traveling wave type with delay type transmission
    line.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 43 for linear amplifier systems of the
    traveling wave type.


CLS 331/83
TXT Subject matter under subclass 81 wherein the means controlling the beam
    includes at least two distributed parameter devices of the cavity resonator
    type, the resonators being provided with apertures, the beam of particles
    being directed through the apertures of the resonators in succession,
    exciting the resonators into oscillation. The first resonator causes
    bunching of the particles passing therethrough, the bunched particles then
    travel in a field-free region where further bunching occurs and then the
    bunched particles enter the second resonator giving up their energy to
    excite it into oscillation, a positive feedback loop from the second
    resonator to the first resonator causes sustained oscillations to be
    generated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 5.16 for
    combined cathode-ray tube with plural hollow devices where in plural rays
    pass through or in the hollow devices,  subclass 5.27 for similar devices
    utilizing a single ray and with ray deflection means.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 45 for linear electron beam type amplifier
    systems having plural resonant cavities.


CLS 331/84
TXT Subject matter under subclass 81 wherein the means controlling the beam of
    particles comprises a buncher resonator effectively placed in the path of
    the beam and interacting therewith to cause the particles to be velocity
    modulated or bunched, a repeller electrode is provided in the path of the
    bunched particles and is so biased as to reflect the bunched particles and
    cause them to return to the buncher resonator in proper phase to interact
    therewith to give additional energy to the resonator and produce sustained
    oscillations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     for beam tube oscillators of the beam sweeping or deflecting type.

    92+,    for retarding field type (e.g., Barkhausen-Kurz) oscillators
    wherein the active element is not of the beam type and wherein a cloud of
    electrons is caused to oscillate about a positively biased grid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 5.18+ for
    combined cathode-ray tube and hollow resonator structure wherein the ray is
    reflected and returns to and enters the resonator, and subclasses 5.24+ for
    similar devices wherein the ray returns to but does not enter the resonator.

    332,    Modulators, appropriate subclasses for retarding field electronic
    tube type (e.g., Barkhausen-Kurz) modulators.


CLS 331/86
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the active element of the
    oscillator consists of a space discharge device having means for producing
    a space discharge comprising charged particles, such as electrons or ions,
    and wherein further means are provided for subjecting the space discharge
    to the direct control of a magnetic field and an electric field.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes magnetrons, a specific form of
    magnetically controlled space discharge device.  The magnetron is
    essentially a diode comprising a linear cathode, an anode, usually
    cylindrical, coaxial therewith and wherein the magnetic field is parallel
    to the longitudinal axis of the cathode while the electric field is
    transverse thereto.  In the multicavity magnetron the frequency determining
    element is structurally a part of the anode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for magnetic field controlled space discharge device oscillators of
    the automatic frequency stabilized type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 433 for cathode-ray
    tube structure provided with electrostatic and electromagnetic, beam
    deflecting means and subclasses 153+ for space discharge device structure
    provided with a magnetic device, especially indented subclasses 156+ for
    space discharge devices where the magnetic field is transverse to the
    discharge.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 5.13 for
    cathode ray device with a hollow resonator combined with a magnetron,
    subclasses 399+ for cathode-ray tube systems utilizing electromagnetic beam
    deflection, and subclasses 39.51+ for distributed parameter type resonator
    magnetron space discharge devices in general wherein the resonator is a
    structural part of the space discharge device.

    329,    Demodulators, subclass 322 for a magnetron type frequency
    demodulator and subclass 354 for a magnetron type amplitude demodulator.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 47+ for linear amplifiers utilizing a
    magnetic field controlled space discharge tube as the active element
    thereof.

    332,    Modulators, particularly subclasses 132 and 166 for modulators
    utilizing magnetic field type electronic tubes (e.g., magnetron).


CLS 331/87
TXT Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein an electrical network including
    switching or keying means is provided for producing high voltage pulses of
    large energy content, which pulses are applied between electrodes (cathode
    and anode) of the active element of the oscillator to cause the oscillator
    to generate oscillations in accordance with the duration of the pulses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55+,    for synchronizing, triggering or pulsing systems involving plural
    oscillators.

    145,    for multivibrators with synchronizing, triggering or pulsing
    circuit.

    149,    for blocking oscillators with synchronizing, triggering or pulsing
    circuit.

    153,    for relaxation oscillators in general with synchronizing,
    triggering or pulsing circuit.

    172+,   for oscillators in general with synchronizing, triggering or
    pulsing circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission  or Interconnection Systems, subclasses
    106+ for waveform or wave shape determinative or pulse producing systems
    which are class appropriate and especially subclass 108 for such systems
    utilizing capacitors.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 291+ for miscellaneous clock or pulse waveform
    generation.

    332,    Modulators, particularly subclasses 132 and 166  for modulators of
    the magnetic field electronic tube type and subclasses 106+ for pulse
    modulation systems in general respectively.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 20 for passive type
    wave shaping network, and subclasses 138+ for passive type delay networks,
    per se.


CLS 331/88
TXT Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein means are provided in the
    oscillator circuit to prevent or compensate for undesirable drift or change
    in oscillator frequency caused by changes in (1) space discharge device
    characteristics or (2) circuit parameters or (3) supply or bias voltages,
    or any combination or (1), (2) or (3).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for oscillators with
    automatic frequency stabilization wherein means are provided for sensing or
    detecting an undesired change in oscillator frequency, developing a control
    or error voltage proportional to such change and applying the control or
    error voltage to means for varying or adjusting a frequency determining
    means of the oscillator in such a sense as to bring the oscillator back on
    frequency.  For such subject matter search subclasses 1+ above,
    particularly subclass 5 for magnetron type oscillators.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for oscillators utilizing magnetically controlled space discharge
    devices and having means to automatically stabilize the frequency.  See,
    also, (1) Note above.

    41+,    for beat frequency systems with frequency stabilization means.

    69,     for oscillators with outer casing, housing or shield and wherein a
    temperature modifier is provided which may aid in stabilizing the
    oscillator frequency.

    175+,   for frequency stabilized oscillators in general and not provided
    for in any preceding subclass.


CLS 331/89
TXT Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein the magnetically controlled space
    discharge device includes a secondary electron emissive electrode.

    (1)     Note.  The secondary electron emission electrode, for example, may
    be (1) an auxiliary electrode, or (2) the cathode electrode, which cathode
    may be designed to produce electrons by thermionic and secondary emission
    or by secondary emission alone (cold cathode), or (3) the anode or
    collector electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     for beam tube oscillators of the negative resistance type wherein
    the negative resistance effect may be produced by secondary electron
    emission means.

    133,    for negative resistance or negative transconductance type
    oscillators in general utilizing the phenomenon of secondary electron
    emission (e.g., dynatron oscillators).

    184,    for oscillators utilizing a secondary electron emission discharge
    device of particular construction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 103+ for the
    structure of space discharge devices including secondary electron emissive
    electrodes. See the search notes to subclasses 103+ of Class 313 as to the
    further fields of search for secondary electron emissive devices or systems
    utilizing such devices.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 39.63 for
    magnetically controlled space discharge device structures (e.g.,
    magnetrons) having secondary electron emitter means.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 213+ for negative
    resistance networks which networks may include a negative resistance device
    having a secondary emissive electrode.


CLS 331/90
TXT Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein the oscillator includes means to
    vary or change the frequency of the oscillations generated by the
    oscillator.

    (1)     Note.  The frequency adjustment of the oscillator may be effected
    in many ways, (1)  by moving a tuning element such as a variable capacitor
    or variable inductor of a resonant circuit or the short-circuiting element
    of a resonant line, (2)  by electronic control such as an auxiliary cathode
    in a resonator cavity of a multicavity magnetron, (3) by adjusting the
    strength of the magnetic field in the electron interaction space of a
    magnetron.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for oscillators having means for automatically stabilizing the
    oscillator frequency, especially indented subclass 5 wherein the oscillator
    is of the magnetron type.

    40,     for beat frequency adjustment or control.

    47,     for plural oscillators where one oscillator sweeps the frequency of
    another.

    48,     for plural oscillators having means to adjust the frequency of one
    or more oscillators.

    177+,   for oscillators in general having frequency adjusting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 39.55+ for
    distributed parameter resonator magnetron type space discharge device
    having variable tuning means.

    332,    Modulators, subclass 5 for modulator systems of magnetic field
    electronic tube type (e.g., magnetic) wherein the modulating signal may
    vary the tuning of the system.


CLS 331/91
TXT Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein the circuit constants of the
    oscillator are such that the oscillator may have several possible modes of
    operation and wherein means are provided to prevent or suppress the
    generation of modes other than the desired mode.

    (1)     Note.  Undesired mode generation is most common in magnetrons of
    the multicavity anode type and may be prevented or suppressed in various
    ways, for example, by strapping (conductively connecting) alternate
    segments of the resonant cavities, by changing the resonant cavity
    structure so that alternate cavities are resonant at different frequencies
    or by some external means such as a resonant break-down device or wave
    filter device in the output coupling line of the magnetron.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 39.65 for
    magnetron devices wherein the anode structure is of the plural diverse
    resonator type, and subclass 39.69 for magnetron devices wherein the plural
    resonators of the anode structure are strapped.


CLS 331/92
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the oscillator comprises
    an electron tube having at least three electrodes, i.e., a source of
    electrons (cathode), control electrode (grid) and an anode or plate
    electrode, the control electrode being biased positively with respect to
    the other electrodes.  The bias potentials of the electrodes are so chosen
    that the electrons attracted from the cathode by the positive grid pass
    through the grid and are slowed down by the repelling effect of the
    negative anode field and are returned back to, or through the grid.  This
    phenomenon is repeated again and again so that a cloud of electrons is
    caused to sweep back and forth through the grid, giving up energy to the
    grid at a frequency which is a function of the transit time of the
    electrons.

            Usually a frequency determining network is associated with the
    electron tube so that the frequency of the generated oscillation is a
    function of both the electron transit time and the network parameters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     for beam tube oscillators of the reflex type wherein an electron
    beam is projected through a beam permeable electrode cavity toward a
    repelling electrode which electrode reflects the beam, causing it to pass
    back through the permeable electrode or cavity.

    104,    for transit time oscillators in general not classified in any
    preceding subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    329,    Demodulators, subclass 322 for microwave frequency structure in a
    frequency demodulator and subclass 354 for microwave structure in an
    amplitude demodulator.


CLS 331/93
TXT Subject matter under subclass 92 wherein a distributed parameter frequency
    determining network is associated with the electron tube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96+,    for oscillators in general wherein the frequency determining
    network is of the distributed parameter type.


CLS 331/94.1
TXT MOLECULAR OR PARTICLE RESONANT TYPE (E.G., MASER):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the oscillator consists
    of (a) a medium which may be solid, liquid, or gaseous, comprising
    particles, molecules, or atoms; (b) means including a source of energy for
    setting the particles, molecules, or atoms into a state of vibration or
    oscillation; and (c) means to abstract electromagnetic wave energy produced
    by the vibration or oscillation of the particles, molecules, or atoms.  The
    vibration or oscillation is that of the particle, molecule, or atom itself
    and is not due to the translational motion of the particle, molecule, or
    atom as a whole.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for automatic frequency stabilized oscillators utilizing a
    frequency discriminator of the molecular resonant type.

    78,     for electrical noise or random wave generators wherein the
    translatory motions of charged particles or molecules are utilized to
    generate oscillations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 552 for devices for producing and
    propagating a unidirectional stream of neutral molecules or atoms through
    vacuum, usually at thermal velocity and including means to excite the
    molecules or atoms at a resonant frequency.

    332,    Modulators, appropriate subclasses for maser type modulators.

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, appropriate subclasses for optical
    (e.g., laser) oscillators.


CLS 331/95
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the frequency determining
    element of the oscillator comprises a variable split stator capacitor, the
    stator plates being in general circular discs having a symmetrical opening
    therein of butterfly wing configuration, the rotor plates having a
    corresponding butterfly shape and being in interleaving or meshing relation
    to the stator plates and being rotatable about an axis normal to and
    passing through the center of symmetry of the surface of the rotor plates.
    The arrangement is such that both the capacitance and inductance of the
    device vary at a function of the rotor position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96+,    for oscillators with distributed parameter resonator.

    167+,   for oscillators of the lumped parameter LC type.


CLS 331/96
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the frequency determining
    means or resonator of the oscillator is of the distributed network type,
    the capacitance, inductance and resistance of which cannot be isolated into
    separate lumped capacitors, inductors or resistors and wherein the time
    factor of propagation of wave energy in the network is appreciable.
    Examples of such a network are an open-circuited or short-circuited wave
    transmission line a quarter wave length long at the desired resonant
    frequency. Included are transmission lines wherein the principal wave may
    be of TEM mode (e.g., parallel wire and coaxial lines) or E or H mode
    having longitudinal as well as transverse wave components (e.g., hollow
    conductors, dielectric rods, single wire surface-wave mode wave guides).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for magnetron type oscillators having automatic frequency control
    and which utilize distributed parameter resonators.

    6+,     for beam tube type (e.g., Klystron) oscillators having automatic
    frequency control and which utilize cavity resonators.

    9,      for microwave oscillators having automatic frequency stabilization
    and which utilize distributed parameter resonators as discriminator means
    in the A.F.S. loop.

    79+,    for beam tube oscillators utilizing distributed parameter
    resonators.

    86+,    for oscillators having a magnetically controlled active element
    (e.g., magnetron) and which utilize distributed parameter resonators.

    93,     Retarding field type oscillators with distributed parameter
    resonators.

    95,     for oscillators wherein the frequency determining network is of the
    so-called "butterfly" type.

    154+,   for oscillators utilizing electromechanical resonators whose
    frequency may be determined by distributed physical parameters of mass,
    stiffness and mechanical friction.

    167+,   for LC oscillators in general wherein the parameters L and C are
    separate and distinct lumped elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 4+ for
    cathode-ray tube circuits and wherein the cathode-ray tube includes
    distributed parameter resonator structure and subclasses 39+ for space
    discharge device load with distributed parameter type transmission line
    (e.g., wave guide, coaxial cable) which line may act as a resonator.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 45 for a linear amplifier having an electron
    beam vacuum tube coupled to a cavity resonator; subclass 49 for a linear
    amplifier having a vacuum tube amplifying device which has distributed
    parameter characteristics which may involve a resonator; and subclass 56
    for linear amplifiers involving wave guide, cavity, of concentric line
    resonator coupling, generally.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 219+ for
    resonators of the distributed parameter type, per se.

    334,    Tuners, subclasses 41+ for tuners of the distributed parameter type.


CLS 331/97
TXT Subject matter under subclass 96 wherein the oscillator includes a
    frequency determining network comprising a hollow conductive structure,
    such as a coaxial line resonator or a cavity type resonator, and wherein
    the active element of the oscillator is effectively enclosed thereby.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     for oscillators that include an electromagnetic or electrostatic
    shield which may enclose the active element of the oscillator and wherein
    the shield is not the frequency determining network or resonator of the
    oscillator.

    68+,    wherein the oscillator is enclosed by an outer casing or housing
    which casing or housing is not the frequency determining network or
    resonator of the oscillator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 39 for the
    combination of a space discharge device with a distributed parameter
    transmission line and wherein the line may enclose the space discharge
    device.


CLS 331/98
TXT Subject matter under subclass 97 wherein the active element comprises an
    electron tube including an envelope having an axis of symmetry and wherein
    at least one electrode, usually the control grid of the tube, has an
    external contact comprising a planar disc or annulus whose center of
    revolution is on the axis of symmetry of the tube envelope and normal
    thereto. Examples of such electron tubes are the lighthouse tube and the
    pencil tube wherein the anode, grid and cathode external contacts are
    surfaces of revolution about the axis of the tube envelope and are
    displaced longitudinally there along.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 237+, especially
    subclasses 249+, for the structure of lighthouse and pencil type space
    discharge devices.


CLS 331/99
TXT PARALLEL WIRE TYPE:
    Subject matter under subclass 96 wherein the frequency determining network
    comprises at least two elongated conductors so oriented that their
    longitudinal axis are parallel, are displaced relative to each other and
    lie in a common plane.

    (1)     Note.  The cross-sectional configuration of the individual
    conductors may have any geometric form, but is usually circular, as is true
    of the well known Lecher wires, for example.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    for parallel conductor resonators wherein one conductor is
    surrounded by and within another conductor.


CLS 331/100
TXT Subject matter under subclass 99 wherein the parallel wire resonator
    oscillator includes two or more active elements connected in push-pull
    relation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for push-pull oscillators having a coaxial or shielded line type
    resonator.

    114,    for transistor oscillators of the push-pull type.

    159,    for push-pull crystal oscillators.

    168,    for push-pull LC oscillators in general.


CLS 331/101
TXT Subject matter under subclass 96 wherein the frequency determining network
    comprises at least two elongated conductors, one of the conductors being
    enclosed by and electrically shielded by the other conductor, the
    conductors being so arranged that their longitudinal axes are parallel or
    coincident (i.e., coaxial line).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97+,    for coaxial or shielded line resonators wherein the active element
    of the oscillator is enclosed by resonator structure.


CLS 331/102
TXT Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein the coaxial or shielded line type
    resonator oscillator includes two or more active elements connected in
    push-pull relation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    for push-pull oscillators having a parallel wire type resonator.

    114,    for push-pull transistor oscillators.

    159,    for push-pull crystal oscillators.

    168,    for push-pull LC oscillators in general.


CLS 331/103
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein some structure or
    structures of the active element, such as the space discharge electrodes or
    the internal leads associated therewith, have an appreciable inductive
    reactance which reactance is effectively included as part of the frequency
    determining network of the oscillator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79+,    for oscillators of the beam tube type wherein the frequency
    determining network is structurally a part of the beam tube.

    86+,    for magnetic field controlled space discharge device oscillators
    wherein the resonator is a structural part of the device (e.g., magnetron
    type with rising-sun anode blocks).


CLS 331/104
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the oscillator comprises
    an electron tube, having input and output electrodes, and a frequency
    determining network effectively coupled between the output and input
    electrodes and wherein the electrode spacing or the electrode biasing
    potentials, or both, are so chosen that the time of flight or transit angle
    of the electrons between the electrodes is an appreciable part of a cycle
    of the generated oscillations, the arrangement being such that energy is
    continuously supplied to the frequency determining network in proper phase
    to sustain oscillations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for magnetron type oscillators having automatic frequency control
    and wherein the active element may relay on electron transit time effects
    to generate oscillations.

    6+,     for beam tube oscillators (e.g., Klyston) of the velocity modulated
    type having automatic frequency stabilization.

    79+,    for beam tube oscillators wherein electron transit time effects are
    utilized to generate oscillations.

    86+,    for oscillators utilizing a magnetically controlled space discharge
    device, e.g., magnetron, which device may be of the electron transit type.

    92+,    for retarding field type oscillators (e.g., Barkhausen-Kurz)
    wherein the transit time effects of electrons oscillating about a positive
    grid are utilized to generate oscillations.


CLS 331/105
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the oscillator, when in
    operation, generates or tends to generate undesired spurious oscillations
    and wherein means are provided in the oscillator circuit to suppress,
    control or prevent the generation of such undesired oscillations.

    (1)     Note.  The spurious oscillations may be caused, for example, by (1)
    parasitic resonant circuits formed by the tube leads and interelectrode
    capacitance of the active element of the oscillator, (2) secondary emission
    effects due to positive excursions of the grid of the active element of the
    oscillator which produces a negative resistance and causes the production
    of dynatron oscillations, (3) electron transit time effects, particularly
    in a tetrode or pentode, when the grid is positive with respect to cathode
    and output electrode, which effects may produce Barkhausen oscillations,
    and (4) the radio frequency chokes in the electrode biasing circuits which
    chokes may be of such values as to cause the generation of low frequency
    parasitic oscillations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88+,    for magnetically controlled space discharge devices with means to
    stabilize the generated frequency.

    175+,   for oscillators in general with means to stabilize the generated
    frequency.


CLS 331/106
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the oscillator is
    provided with means to cyclically or repetitively vary the amplitude of the
    generated means are provided to simultaneously vary the amplitude and
    frequency of the generated wave cyclically or repetitively.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for plural oscillator systems wherein one oscillator varies the
    amplitude of the generated oscillations of another oscillator.

    55,     for plural oscillator systems provided with means to synchronize,
    trigger or pulse at least one oscillator.

    145,    for multivibrators with sync, trigger or pulsing means.

    149,    for blocking oscillators with sync, trigger or pulsing means.

    153,    for relaxation oscillators in general with sync, trigger or pulsing
    means.

    172+,   for oscillators in general with sync, trigger or pulsing means.

    182+,   for oscillators in general provided with oscillation amplitude
    control means.


CLS 331/107
TXT Oscillators under the class definition wherein the oscillator comprises at
    least two components (1) a two-terminal or four-terminal active element of
    electrically conductive, semi-conductive, ferromagnetic or ferroelectric
    material in the solid state, and (2) a frequency determining network.
    Usually the two-terminal active element constitutes a negative resistance
    so connected to the frequency determining network that the resulting
    oscillator is a two-terminal negative resistance oscillator, whereas the
    four-terminal active element is so connected to the frequency determining
    network that the resulting oscillator is of the feedback type.

    (1)     Note.  Oscillator system elements recited in the Class 331
    definition of an oscillator system occur in a Gunn element with input and
    output terminals, even though a Gunn Oscillator isn't even an integrated
    circuit.

    (2)     Note. If an oscillator system involving an active solid state
    device or integrated circuit is claimed, nominally or in detail, then it is
    properly classified in Class 331, whereas if an oscillator system is not
    claimed or a subcombination thereof which involves an active solid state
    device is claimed, and is not elsewhere classifiable, then they are
    properly classified in Class 257.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     for plural oscillator systems comprising two or more oscillators of
    the semi-conductor active element type connected in cascade.

    94,     for molecularly resonant type oscillator wherein the resonance
    properties of particles of a gas, liquid or solid are utilized to produce
    oscillations.

    126+,   for oscillators wherein the active element thereof comprises a
    device of the gaseous discharge type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    for active solid-state devices, especially subclasses 6-8 for Gunn effect
    oscillators, and subclasses 446 and 499+ for integrated circuit devices
    with electrically isolated components.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 401+
    for miscellaneous systems, not elsewhere classifiable utilizing
    ferromagnetic or ferroelectric active elements, and subclass 132 for
    switching systems of the self-sustaining repetitive make and break type,
    usually employing electromagnetic relays.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 301 for the
    structure of electric generators or motors utilizing the thermal or
    pyromagnetic properties of a solid, and subclasses 311+ for the structure
    of electric generators or motors utilizing the piezoelectric properties of
    a solid.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 2 for electrical
    systems utilizing means of the nonmagnetic type for generating electricity.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous transistor or electron
    tube nonlinear circuits.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 250+ for linear amplifiers utilizing solid
    state active elements.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 155+ for the structure of inductive
    regulators with no relatively moving parts, e.g., saturable core
    transformers or inductors.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 435 for
    liquid state, electrolytic circuit breaker devices for converting D. C. to
    pulses.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, for methods of making
    semiconductor electrical devices.


CLS 331/108
TXT Oscillators under subclass 107 in which the active element consists of a
    device of electronic conducting, semi-conductive material utilizing the
    current amplification properties of the material, which device has three or
    more electrodes.

    (1)     Note.  If an oscillator system involving an active solid state
    device or integrated circuit is claimed, nominally or in detail, then it is
    properly classified in Class 331, whereas if an oscillator system is not
    claimed or a subcombination thereof which involves an active solid state
    device is claimed, and is not elsewhere classifiable, then they are
    properly classified in Class 257.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses for active solid-state devices, including field
    effect or bipolar transistors, per se, subclasses 6-8 for Gunn effect
    oscillators, and subclasses 446 and 499+ for integrated circuit devices
    with electrically isolated components.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous transistor or electron
    tube nonlinear circuits.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 250+ for linear amplifiers systems utilizing
    transistors.


CLS 331/109
TXT Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein means are provided for adjusting,
    controlling or regulating the amplitude of the generated oscillations.  The
    oscillation amplitude control means may be manually set or varied or may be
    controlled automatically responsive to changes in some condition, such as
    the amplitude of the generated oscillations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for automatic frequency stabilized oscillators having amplitude
    compensation means.

    40,     for beat frequency oscillators with amplitude control means.

    47,     for plural oscillator systems where one oscillator varies the
    oscillation amplitude of another oscillator.

    62,     for oscillators with means to protect the oscillator against
    overload.

    65,     for oscillators whose oscillation amplitude may be controlled by
    means responsive to some external physical condition (e.g., humidity,
    pressure, temperature).

    75+,    for oscillators combined with an active element in the output
    circuit thereof which element may be a wave shaper or amplitude control
    means.

    106,    for oscillators having means for periodically or repetitiously
    varying the oscillation amplitude.

    182+,   for oscillators in general provided with amplitude control or
    stabilization means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 290 for linear transistor amplifiers having
    d.c. feedback stabilization control means; subclasses 250+ for linear
    transistor amplifiers having signal feedback means; and subclasses 278+ for
    linear transistor amplifiers having signal volume level control means.


CLS 331/110
TXT Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein the frequency determining element
    of the oscillator consists of a feedback network of the balanced lattice or
    similar type having two pairs of conjugately related terminals, one pair of
    terminals being connected to the output circuit and the other pair of
    terminals being connected to the input circuit of the transistor, the
    arrangement being such that regeneration (oscillation) occurs only at the
    desired frequency, energy at all other frequencies being attenuated because
    of degeneration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138+,   for bridge type oscillators in general.


CLS 331/111
TXT Oscillators under subclass 108 for generating nonsinusoidol waves which are
    cyclic in nature and wherein each cycle consists of a period determined by
    the charging time of a capacitor or inductor of the oscillator followed by
    a period determined by the discharge time of the capacitor or inductor
    through a resistive element of the oscillator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129+,   for relaxation oscillators of the gaseous space discharge type.

    143+,   for relaxation oscillators in general not provided for in a
    preceding subclass.  See also the search notes appended to subclass 143 as
    to further fields of search relating to relaxation oscillators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnections Systems, subclasses
    401+ for relaxation systems utilizing nonlinear reactors which systems are
    not of the free-running type.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous  relaxation circuits and
    subclasses 185+ for such circuits which may utilize a stable state circuit.


CLS 331/112
TXT Oscillators under subclass 111 comprising at least one active element of
    the transistor type, a closely-coupled transformer coupling the output
    circuit of the transistor to the input circuit in positive feedback
    relation and a time constant network in the input circuit of the
    transistor, the conduction and relaxation periods of the oscillator being
    determined by the impedance parameters of the transformer and time constant
    network.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146+,   for blocking oscillators in general.


CLS 331/113
TXT Oscillators under subclass 111 which comprise a symmetrical arrangement of
    a two-stage resistance coupled transistor amplifier in which the output of
    each stage supplies input to the other stage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144+,   for a stable or free running multivibrators in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission  or Interconnection Systems, subclasses
    401+ for miscellaneous multivibrators of the nonfree-running type employing
    active elements of ferromagnetic or ferroelectric type.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 185+ for miscellaneous stable state circuits (e.g.,
    bistable multivibrator).


CLS 331/114
TXT Oscillators under subclass 108 wherein at least two transistors of the same
    or opposite conductivity type are connected in a symmetrical balanced
    circuit arrangement so that their respective input and output signals are
    in phase opposition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    for push-pull oscillators with parallel wire type resonators.

    102,    for push-pull oscillators with coaxial line type resonators.

    159,    for crystal oscillators with plural electron tubes connected in
    push-pull.

    168,    for LC oscillators in general having plural electron tubes
    connected in push-pull.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 595 for miscellaneous circuits utilizing a push/pull
    relation.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 262+ for push-pull transistor linear
    amplifiers.


CLS 331/115
TXT Oscillators under subclass 108 in which the oscillator comprises a two
    terminal negative resistance device comprising a transistor connected to a
    tuned circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86+,    for magnetron oscillators which may be of the negative resistance
    type.

    126+,   for negative resistance oscillators of the gaseous space discharge
    type.

    132+,   for negative resistance oscillators in general not provided for in
    any preceding subclass.  See the search notes appended to this subclass for
    negative resistance devices classified in other classes.


CLS 331/116
TXT Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein the frequency determining element
    of the oscillator is of the electromechanical resonator type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73,     for electron-coupled plural grid tube oscillators utilizing
    piezoelectric crystal oscillation frequency determining means.

    139,    for bridge-type oscillators with piezoelectric crystal in bridge
    circuit.

    154+,   for oscillators in general utilizing electromechanical resonator
    means as the oscillation frequency determining means.


CLS 331/117
TXT Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein the frequency determining element
    of the oscillator is of lumped parameter LC type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95,     for oscillators wherein the LC resonator is of the butterfly type.

    96+,    for oscillators wherein the resonator is of the distributed
    parameter type.

    128,    wherein a gaseous space discharge device is utilized to impulse or
    shock excite an LC circuit.

    154+,   for oscillators having a frequency determining element of the
    electromechanical type (e.g., tuning fork, magnetostrictive, or
    piezoelectric vibrator).

    165+,   for shock-excited LC circuits in   general.

    167+,   for LC type oscillators in general.


CLS 331/126
TXT Oscillators under the class definition wherein means consisting of a
    gaseous space discharge device is utilized to control a source of energy
    for exciting the frequency determining network of the oscillator.

    (1)     Note.  A gaseous space discharge device is a device having at least
    two electrodes in a gas or vapor medium and whereby a flow of electricity
    results between the electrodes when the gas or vapor is ionized.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    appropriate subclasses, for systems wherein the discharge device is the
    ultimate load of the system and is of the consumable electrode type (e.g.,
    arc lamp).

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses, for systems wherein the gaseous space discharge device is the
    ultimate load of the system.


CLS 331/127
TXT Subject matter under subclass 126 wherein the gaseous space discharge
    device comprises at least two electrodes usually in an unconfined gas or
    vapor medium, the discharge therebetween being of the nature of a sudden
    disruptive breakdown of the medium (i.e., spark) as distinguished from an
    arc, glow or brush discharges, which discharges are of much longer duration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    appropriate subclasses, for systems wherein the discharge device is of the
    open arc, consumable electrode type (e.g., arc lamp) and wherein the device
    is the ultimate load of the system.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 112+ for electronic
    tube current conversion systems (D.C.-A.C., A.C.-D.C.) of  the open arc
    device (e.g., spark gap) type, and subclasses 166+ for frequency conversion
    systems utilizing an open arc device.


CLS 331/128
TXT Subject matter under subclass 126 wherein the gaseous space discharge
    device is utilized to impulse a resonant circuit of the lumped LC type,
    which current is then permitted to oscillate freely at its natural
    frequency.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79+,    for beam tube oscillators wherein an electron beam may shock-excite
    a resonant circuit.

    165+,   for shock-excited resonant circuits in general, not classifiable in
    any preceding subclass.


CLS 331/129
TXT Oscillators under subclass 126 for generating nonsinusoidal waves which are
    cyclic in nature and wherein each cycle consists of a period determined by
    the charging time of a capacitor or inductor of the oscillator followed by
    a period determined by the discharging time of the capacitor or inductor
    through a resistor element, the means for controlling the charge or
    discharge of the capacitor or inductor being of the gaseous space discharge
    type of the oscillator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111+,   for relaxation oscillators utilizing transistors.

    143+,   for relaxation oscillators not provided for in any preceding
    subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 401+
    for relaxation systems utilizing nonlinear reactors and which are not of
    the free-running type.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous relaxation circuits and
    subclasses 185+ for such circuits which may utilize a stable state circuit.


CLS 331/130
TXT Oscillators under subclass 129 wherein the capacitor or inductor charge or
    discharge means consists of more than a single gaseous space discharge
    device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for mulitivibrators utilizing plural transistors.

    144+,   for multivibrators utilizing plural tubes.


CLS 331/131
TXT Oscillators under subclass 129 wherein an electron tube or other
    unilaterally conducting device is included in the charging circuit or path
    of the capacitor or inductor.


CLS 331/132
TXT Oscillators under the class definition wherein the oscillator comprises a
    two-terminal negative resistance device connected to a tuned circuit, the
    absolute magnitude of the negative resistance being less than the resonant
    impedance of the tuned circuit.

    (1)     Note.  A negative resistance is a two-terminal device having a
    volt-ampere characteristic with negative slope over the range of voltages
    or currents wherein it is operative, that is, an increase in voltage
    results in a decrease in current, or vice versa.  The term "negative
    resistance" as employed herein comprehends devices designated as the
    "negative transconductance" type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86+,    for magnetron oscillators which may be of the negative resistance
    type.

    115,    for negative resistance type oscillators of the transistor type.

    126+,   for oscillators of gaseous space discharge type which may be of the
    negative resistance type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 213+ for negative
    resistance device systems, per se.


CLS 331/133
TXT Oscillators under subclass 132 wherein the negative resistance device
    relies on the phenomenon of secondary emission to produce the negative
    resistance effect.  Usually the negative resistance device is of the
    dynatron type wherein the screen grid of a tetrode is biased more
    positively than the anode thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89,     for magnetron oscillators with a secondary emissive electrode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 103+ for the
    structure of secondary emitter type discharge devices.

    329,    Demodulators, particularly subclass 368 for an amplitude
    demodulator using an electron discharge device having three or more
    electrodes.


CLS 331/134
TXT Oscillators under subclass 132 wherein the negative resistance device
    comprises a multigrid tube employing a retarding field to produce negative
    transconductance between two grids of the tube, which grids are usually
    coupled by a capacitor or a bias source.


CLS 331/135
TXT Oscillators systems under the class definition comprising a feedback
    amplifier having a predetermined phase shift between the input and output
    voltages thereof, the feedback path including a passive phase shifting
    network for providing a phase shift of such amount to cause the oscillator
    system to generate sustained oscillations.

    (1)     Note.  Oscillator systems in this subclass rely on achieving proper
    phase shift between input and output voltages of the system by a
    nonresonant passive phase shifting network to produce oscillations and
    should be distinguished from those oscillators, classified elsewhere in
    this class, whose frequency is determined by the resonant properties of an
    LC type resonator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    212-219 for phase angle control circuits effective at a single frequency.

    332,    Modulators, particularly subclasses 140 and 142+ for oscillator
    systems which may be similar to those classified in Class 331, subclasses
    135+.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 138+ for delay
    networks, per se, for retarding wave energy a predetermined period of time
    over a range of frequencies.


CLS 331/136
TXT Oscillators under subclass 135 wherein the amplifier and the passive phase
    shifting network each have a total phase shift of zero degrees.


CLS 331/137
TXT Oscillators under subclass 135 wherein the amplifier and the passive phase
    shifting network each have a total phase shift other than zero or 360
    degrees, and wherein the passive phase shifting network is of the
    ladder-type consisting only of resistive and capacitive components.
    Usually the amplifier and the passive phase shifting network each have a
    total phase shift of 180 degrees.


CLS 331/138
TXT Oscillators under the class definition wherein the frequency determining
    element of the oscillator consists of a feedback network of the balanced
    lattice or similar type having two pairs of conjugately related terminals,
    one pair of terminals being connected to the output circuit and the other
    pair of terminals being connected to the input circuit of the active
    element of the oscillator, the arrangement being such that regeneration
    occurs only at a desired frequency, energy at all other frequencies being
    attenuated due to degeneration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for transistor oscillators utilizing a bridge-type frequency
    determining network.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 365 for
    bridge networks of general application.

    332,    Modulators, subclass 172 for amplitude modulation systems utilizing
    bridge networks.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 117+ for hybrid
    networks for connecting two or more circuits in conjugate relation,
    subclasses 169+ for wave filters of the lattice type, and subclasses 170+
    for wave filters of the bridged-T type.


CLS 331/139
TXT Oscillators under subclass 138 wherein the feedback network includes a
    piezoelectric crystal for determining the generated frequency of the
    oscillator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    for crystal controlled transistor type oscillators.

    158+,   for crystal controlled oscillators in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 311+ for
    piezoelectric devices and systems not elsewhere classified, and note under
    SEARCH CLASS of Class 310 subclass 311, the extensive list of classes
    relating to piezoelectric crystals and systems utilizing crystals.

    332,    Modulators, particularly subclasses 139+ for frequency modulators
    utilizing piezoelectric crystals.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 30 for delay
    networks, and subclass 72 for filter networks utilizing piezoelectric
    crystals.


CLS 331/140
TXT Oscillators under subclass 138 wherein the feedback network includes only
    capacitance and resistance elements or inductance and resistance elements
    for determining the generated frequency of the oscillator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111+,   for transistor relaxation oscillators utilizing RC or RL timing
    networks.

    129+,   for gas tube relaxation oscillators utilizing RC or RL timing
    networks.

    137,    for phase shift oscillators with RC ladder type phase shift network.

    143,    for relaxation oscillators in general utilizing RC or RL timing
    networks.


CLS 331/141
TXT Oscillators under subclass 140 wherein the feedback network lattice
    comprises two pure resistance arms and two impedance arms, one impedance
    arm including a series-connected capacitor and resistor and the other
    impedance arm including a parallel-connected capacitor and resistor,
    positive feedback being obtained through the impedance arms and negative
    feedback through the pure resistance arms.  These oscillators are generally
    known as Wien bridge type.


CLS 331/142
TXT Oscillators under subclass 140 wherein the feedback network comprises two T
    networks connected in parallel, one T network consisting of two resistors
    in series with a capacitor connected to the common connection of the
    resistor, the other T network consisting of two capacitors in series with a
    resistor connected to the common connection of the capacitors.


CLS 331/143
TXT Oscillators under the class definition for generating nonsinusoidal waves
    which are cyclic in nature and wherein each cycle consists of a period
    determined by the charging time of a capacitor or inductor followed by a
    period determined by the discharging time of the capacitor or inductor
    through a resistive element.

    (1)     Note.  Relaxation oscillators to be classified herein must be
    free-running.  Nonfree-running relaxation oscillators are classified in
    Class 327, Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20+,    for relaxation oscillators of the television synchronized type
    involving automatic frequency control.

    59,     for an oscillator which may be converted from one type of
    oscillator to another, e.g., sinusoidal oscillator to relaxation oscillator.

    61,     for single oscillators for producing plural outputs simultaneously
    which outputs are of diverse wave form, e.g., sine wave and square wave.

    78,     for electrical noise or random    frequency generators.

    111+,   for relaxation oscillators of the transistor type.

    129+,   for relaxation oscillators utilizing gaseous space discharge
    devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 401+
    for nonlinear reactor type and subclass 132 for free-running
    electromagnetic circuit maker and breaker type pulse producers.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous relaxation circuits and
    subclasses 185+ for such circuits which may utilize a stable state circuit.


CLS 331/144
TXT Subject matter under subclass 143, wherein the relaxation oscillator
    comprises at least two discharge paths of the active element type, the
    output of each being coupled to the input of the other, at least one of the
    couplings including a resistance-capacitance or resistance-inductance
    network, the arrangement being such that the two discharge paths are caused
    to be actuated cyclically, the time constant of the network determining the
    fundamental frequency of the oscillator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for a stable or free-running multivibrators of the transistor type.

    130,    for plural gas tube relaxation oscillators which may be of the a
    stable multivibrator type.

    159+,   for crystal oscillators of the plural tube type wherein the tubes
    may be alternately conductive (e.g., push-pull oscillator).

    168,    for plural tube LC oscillators of the push-pull type.


CLS 331/145
TXT Subject matter under subclass 144 wherein the multivibrator includes an
    additional network for coupling to the oscillator a source, usually
    periodic of synchronizing or triggering potential to drive or lock the
    period of the freely running multivibrator to the period of the source or
    to some multiple or submultiple thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18+,    for oscillators of the automatic frequency controlled type wherein
    the oscillator frequency is synchronized with a standard or reference
    frequency source.

    41,     for beat frequency oscillators that are locked to or synchronized
    with a standard or reference frequency.

    55,     for plural oscillators which are synchronized relative to each
    other or to another source.

    87,     for magnetron type oscillators with means to pulse the oscillator.

    149,    for blocking oscillators with sync, trigger or pulsing circuit.

    153,    for relaxation oscillators in general with synchronizing,
    triggering or pulsing circuit.

    172+,   for oscillators in general with synchronizing, triggering or
    pulsing means.


CLS 331/146
TXT Subject matter under subclass 143 wherein the relaxation oscillator
    comprises at least one active element, a closely-coupled transformer
    coupling the output circuit of the active element to the input circuit in
    positive feedback relation and a time constant network in the input circuit
    of the active element, the conduction and relaxation periods of the
    oscillator being determined by the impedance parameters of the transformer
    and time constant network.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    for oscillators for producing periodic pulses of oscillations of
    varying amplitude and frequency.

    112,    for blocking oscillators of the transistor type.

    173,    for oscillators in general of the self-pulsed type for producing
    periodic bursts or pulses of oscillatory energy.


CLS 331/147
TXT Subject matter under subclass 146 wherein the active element of the
    oscillator comprises a plural grid tube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for electron coupled oscillators utilizing plural grid tubes.

    73+,    for crystal oscillators utilizing plural grid tubes.

    144,    for multivibrators utilizing plural grid tubes.

    152+,   for relaxation oscillators in general utilizing plural grid tubes,
    e.g., phantastron type.


CLS 331/148
TXT Subject matter under subclass 146 wherein the closely coupled transformer
    includes three or more windings effectively connected in the oscillator
    circuit.


CLS 331/149
TXT Subject matter under subclass 146 wherein the blocking oscillator includes
    an additional network for coupling to the oscillator a periodic source of
    synchronizing or triggering potential to drive or lock the period of the
    freely-running oscillator to the period of the source or to some multiple
    or submultiple thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18+,    for oscillators of the automatic frequency stabilized type
    synchronized with respect to a standard or reference frequency source.

    55,     for plural oscillators which are synchronized relative to each
    other or to another source.

    87,     for magnetron type oscillators with means to pulse the oscillator.

    145,    for multivibrators with synchronizing triggering or pulsing circuit.

    153,    for relaxation oscillators in general with synchronizing triggering
    or pulsing circuit.

    172,    for oscillators in general with synchronizing, triggering or
    pulsing means.


CLS 331/150
TXT Subject matter under subclass 143 wherein the relaxation oscillator output
    circuit is connected to another discharge device circuit.  By way of
    example the other discharge device circuit may include a capacitor, the
    charging or discharging of the capacitor generating a repetitive time base
    in accordance with the pulsations of the relaxation oscillator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for plural oscillators connected in series-parallel.

    50+,    for plural oscillators connected in cascade or series.

    75+,    for oscillators with an active element connected to the output
    thereof.


CLS 331/151
TXT Subject matter under subclass 143 wherein the relaxation oscillator
    includes a resonant circuit or a transformer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146+,   for blocking oscillators utilizing a closely coupled transformer.


CLS 331/152
TXT Subject matter under subclass 143 wherein the relaxation oscillator
    includes a multi-grid discharge device in the capacitor circuit for
    controlling the charge on the capacitor of the time constant network of the
    oscillator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73,     for crystal oscillators utilizing plural grid tubes.

    132+,   for negative resistance or negative transconductance oscillators
    utilizing plural grid tubes.

    143,    for relaxation oscillators utilizing a secondary emission discharge
    device of the plural grid type.

    147,    for blocking oscillators utilizing plural grid tubes.


CLS 331/153
TXT Subject matter under subclass 143 wherein the relaxation oscillator
    includes an additional network for coupling to the oscillator a source,
    usually periodic, of synchronizing triggering or pulsing potential to drive
    or lock the period of the freely-running oscillator to the period of the
    source or to some multiple or submultiple thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18+,    for oscillators of the automatic frequency controlled type wherein
    the oscillator is synchronized with a standard or reference frequency
    source.

    55,     for plural oscillators which are synchronized relative to each
    other or to another source.

    87,     for magnetron type oscillators with means to pulse the oscillator.

    145,    for multivibrators with a synchronizing, triggering or pulsing
    circuit.

    149,    for blocking oscillators with synchronizing, triggering or pulsing
    circuit.

    172,    for oscillators in general with synchronizing, triggering or
    pulsing means.


CLS 331/154
TXT Oscillators under the class definition wherein the frequency of the
    oscillator is determined by the mechanical period of vibration or
    oscillation of an electrically driven material body, the material body
    constituting a mechanical resonator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for automatic frequency stabilized oscillators wherein the
    phenomenon of molecular resonance is utilized to control the oscillator
    frequency.

    78,     for electrical noise or random wave generators which utilize the
    random translatory motions of charged particles for generating fortuitously
    related waves.

    94,     for molecular or particle resonant type oscillators (e.g., maser).

    116,    for electromechanical resonator controlled transistor oscillators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 15+ for the
    structure of reciprocating motors.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 114 for vibration
    producing motor systems, and subclasses 119+ for reciprocating motor
    systems.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 94 and 109 for linear amplifier systems
    having frequency responsive means in a feedback path which may be of the
    electromechanical resonator type; subclass 174 for linear amplifier systems
    which have an electromechanical transducer means in the signal coupling
    means of the amplifier.

    332,    Modulators, particularly subclasses 139+ for frequency modulators
    utilizing an electromechanical resonant element.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 148+ for delay
    networks of the electromechanical transducer type, and subclasses 186+ for
    wave filters of the electromechanical transducer type.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave System and Devices,
    subclasses 141+ for underwater transducers of the electromechanical type.


CLS 331/155
TXT Subject matter under subclass 154 wherein the mechanical resonator is
    coupled to the oscillator system by: (1) an electrooptical transducer, (2)
    a piezoelectric transducer, or (3) an electroacoustic transducer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158+,   for oscillators wherein the piezoelectric crystal constitutes the
    frequency determining element of the oscillator.


CLS 331/156
TXT Oscillators under subclass 154 wherein the resonator consists of an
    elongated member which vibrates transversely to its longitudinal dimension
    relative to a fixed point or points of support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 25 for the
    structure of vibrating reed type electric motors.


CLS 331/157
TXT Oscillators under subclass 154 wherein the resonator consists of a member
    of ferromagnetic composition having magnetostrictive properties and whose
    period of vibration or oscillation is due to the changes in dimensions
    produced by the effect of an impressed alternating magnetic field.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 26 for the
    structure of reciprocating motors of the magneto-strictive type.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 118 for
    magnetostrictive motor systems.

    367,    Communication, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems And Devices,
    appropriate subclasses for underwater transducers of the magnetostrictive
    type.


CLS 331/158
TXT Subject matter under subclass 154 wherein the frequency determining
    electrically driven material body is a crystal exhibiting the piezoelectric
    effect. Examples of such crystals are quartz, Rochelle salt, tourmaline or
    other crystal classes which do not possess a center of symmetry and wherein
    deformation of the crystal is proportional to the first power of the
    imposed electric field, the direction of deformation referring upon
    reversal of the field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for crystal oscillators provided with means to control the crystal
    temperature.

    73,     for crystal oscillators of the electron-coupled type.

    139,    for crystal oscillators of the bridge type.

    155,    for oscillators wherein a piezo crystal drives or is driven by the
    electromechanical resonator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 311+ for
    piezoelectric transducers in general.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 116 for nonmagnetic
    motor systems which includes piezoelectric motor control systems.

    322,    Electricity: Single Generator Systems, subclass 2 for nonmagnetic
    generator systems including piezoelectric type generators.

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclass 56 for piezoelectric
    crystal testing.

    332,    Modulators, subclass 26 for phase or frequency modulators utilizing
    an electromechanical resonant element which may be of the piezoelectric
    type.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 148+ for wave
    delay networks that may include piezoelectric elements, and subclasses 187+
    for electric wave filters utilizing piezoelectric crystals.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 157+ for underwater vibration transducers of the piezoelectric
    type.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 144 for a
    piezoelectric phonograph pickup.


CLS 331/159
TXT Subject matter under subclass 158 wherein the oscillator includes at least
    two active elements as necessary elements of the oscillator circuit.  By
    way of example, crystal oscillators with push-pull connected tubes are in
    this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for oscillators having a polyphase output and utilizing two or more
    tubes as active elements thereof.

    100,    for push-pull oscillators with parallel wire resonator.

    102,    for push-pull oscillators with coaxial line resonator.

    114,    for push-pull oscillators utilizing two or more transistors.

    130,    for relaxation oscillators utilizing plural gas tubes.

    144,    for multivibrators utilizing plural tubes.

    168+,   for LC oscillators in general utilizing plural tubes.


CLS 331/160
TXT Subject matter under subclass 158 wherein impedance means or automatic
    switching means are associated with the crystal to divert excessive
    currents away from the crystal or for sensing excessive currents through
    the crystal, or overvoltage across the crystal, to effectively by pass or
    disable the crystal circuit or to disconnect the crystal from the
    oscillator circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62+,    for oscillator systems combined with means to protect the
    oscillator from damage caused by undesired changes in load current,
    voltage, temperature or humidity.

    183,    for oscillator systems having means to automatically control the
    amplitude of the generated oscillations.


CLS 331/161
TXT Subject matter under subclass 158 wherein means are provided for
    effectively removing the crystal from the oscillator circuit and for
    effectively substituting another crystal therefor.  Usually, but not
    necessarily, the crystals are selectively connected and disconnected from
    the oscillator circuit by an electrical circuit maker and breaker.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for beat frequency oscillators wherein the frequency may be
    controlled by selectively substituting piezoelectric crystals.

    49,     for plural oscillator systems provided with means for selectively
    connecting one or more of two or more oscillators to a common output
    circuit.

    179,    for step-frequency change oscillator frequency adjusting means in
    general wherein LC circuits resonant at different frequencies may be
    interchangeably connected in the oscillator circuit.


CLS 331/162
TXT Subject matter under subclass 158 wherein two or more separate crystals are
    effectively connected in circuit with the active element of the oscillator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for plural oscillator systems of the beat frequency type that may
    include plural crystal oscillators.

    161+,   for crystal oscillators wherein means are provided for substituting
    at least one crystal for another crystal in the oscillator circuit.

    163,    for crystal oscillators wherein a single crystal having three or
    more electrodes so connected in the oscillator circuit as to present at
    least two separate resonant paths therein.


CLS 331/163
TXT Subject matter under subclass 158 wherein the crystal has three or more
    electrodes for establishing two or more separate resonant paths through the
    crystal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for single beat frequency oscillators of the crystal controlled
    type which utilize single crystals of the plural resonant path type and
    wherein each path may be resonant to a different frequency the two
    frequencies being beat together in the active element of the oscillator.

    162,    for crystal oscillators having plural separate crystals in circuit.


CLS 331/164
TXT Subject matter under subclass 158 wherein the crystal is effectively
    coupled between the anode or output electrode and the grid or control
    electrode of the active element of the oscillator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170+,   for LC type oscillators wherein a resonant circuit of the lumped
    circuit type is connected between the anode and cathode electrodes of the
    active element of the oscillator.


CLS 331/165
TXT Systems under the class definition wherein means is provided for applying
    an electrical impulse to a resonant circuit which circuit is then permitted
    to oscillate freely at its natural frequency.

    (1)     Note.  Systems utilizing an active element and a feed-back circuit
    to sustain forced oscillations are not considered shock-excited systems for
    classification herein, but will be found elsewhere in this class, e.g.,
    miscellaneous L-C oscillators of the active element type are classified in
    subclasses 167+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79+,    for beam tube oscillators wherein a sweeping, or modulated or
    bunched beam of charged particles may shock excite a resonator.

    128,    for systems wherein a gaseous space discharge device is utilized to
    shock-excite a resonant circuit.


CLS 331/166
TXT Shock excited resonant circuits under subclass 165 wherein a space
    discharge device having a control electrode is utilized as a switching
    means to control the electrical energy supplied to the resonant circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     for shock-excited resonant circuits wherein the active element is a
    beam tube of the beam sweeping or deflecting type.


CLS 331/167
TXT Oscillators under the class definition of the active element type wherein
    the frequency of oscillation is determined by an inductance-capacitance
    circuit of the lumped element type and which oscillators are not provided
    for in any of the preceding subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95,     for oscillators utilizing butterfly resonators.

    96,     for oscillators utilizing distributed parameter resonators.

    128,    for gas tube means to shock-excite an LC circuit.

    154+,   for oscillators utilizing electromechanical resonators.

    165+,   for systems wherein the resonator is shock-excited.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 219+ for
    distributed parameter resonators, per se.

    334,    Tuners, appropriate subclasses for tuned networks for use in wave
    energy apparatus and comprising inductance and capacitance elements in
    circuit arrangement to form a resonant circuit and in which structure is
    provided for adjusting one or both of these elements for changing the means
    resonant frequency of the circuit.


CLS 331/168
TXT Subject matter under subclass 167 wherein the oscillator system includes
    two or more active elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    for parallel wire resonator oscillators of the push-pull type.

    102,    for coaxial or shielded line resonator oscillators of the push-pull
    type.

    113,    for plural transistor oscillators of the multivibrator type.

    130,    for plural gas tube relaxation oscillators.

    144,    for plural tube multivibrators.

    159,    for plural tube crystal oscillators.


CLS 331/169
TXT Subject matter under subclass 167 wherein the inductance-capacitance
    circuit is effectively coupled or connected between the output electrode
    (anode) and the common electrode (cathode) of the active element.


CLS 331/170
TXT Subject matter under subclass 167 wherein the inductance-capacitance
    circuit is effectively coupled or connected between the output electrode
    (anode) and the input electrode (grid) of the active element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164,    for crystal oscillators with anode to grid connected crystal
    circuit.


CLS 331/171
TXT Subject matter under subclass 167 wherein the inductance-capacitance
    circuit is effectively coupled or connected between the control electrode
    (grid) and the common electrode (cathode) of the active element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164,    for crystal oscillators with crystal circuit connected between grid
    and cathode.


CLS 331/172
TXT Oscillators under the class definition wherein (1) means are provided for
    maintaining a predetermined phase or frequency relationship between two
    sources of waves, one source being an excitation or standard source (snyc
    source) and the other source being the controlled oscillator, or (2) means
    are provided to initiate or stop oscillation of the oscillator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20+,    for automatic frequency stabilized oscillators of the T.V. sync
    type.

    55,     for plural oscillator systems wherein at least one oscillator is
    synchronized, triggered or pulsed.

    87,     for magnetron type oscillators with pulsing means.

    145,    for multivibrators with sync, trigger, or pulsing means.

    149,    for blocking oscillators with sync, trigger, or pulsing means.

    153,    for relaxation oscillators is general with sync, trigger or pulsing
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 536+ for synchronizing systems peculiar to
    the television art and  having means to control the oscillator.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 354+ for synchronizing
    systems peculiar to the telegraph.


CLS 331/173
TXT Oscillators under subclass 172 wherein means are provided to initiate or
    stop oscillation of the oscillator.


CLS 331/174
TXT Oscillators under subclass 173 wherein means are provided to stop or quench
    the generation of oscillations by the oscillator by internal action of the
    oscillator.


CLS 331/175
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein means are provided in the
    oscillator circuit to prevent or compensate for undesirable drift or change
    in oscillator frequency caused by changes in oscillator frequency such as
    by changes in (1) space discharge device characteristics, (2) circuit
    parameters, or (3) supply or bias voltages, or any combination of (1), (2)
    or (3).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for oscillators with
    automatic frequency stabilization wherein means are provided for sensing or
    detecting an undesired change in oscillator frequency, developing a control
    or error voltage proportional to such change and applying the control or
    error voltage to means for adjusting a frequency determining means of the
    oscillator in such a sense as to bring the oscillator back on frequency.
    For such subject matter search subclasses 1+ above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for automatic frequency stabilized oscillators.  See also (1) Note
    above.

    41,     for beat frequency oscillator systems with frequency stabilization
    means.

    88,     for magnetron type oscillators with frequency stabilization means.


CLS 331/176
TXT Subject matter under subclass 175 wherein the oscillator circuit or
    structure is modified by the addition of a current or temperature
    responsive element thereto to compensate for the undesirable drift in
    oscillator frequency caused by the effect of current flow on the circuit
    parameters or that due to temperature changes (internal or ambient).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for an oscillator with outer casing or housing and including a
    temperature modifier, which modifier may act to stabilize the oscillator
    frequency with changes in ambient temperature.

    70,     for an oscillator provided with means for modifying or controlling
    the temperature of the oscillator or elements thereof.


CLS 331/177
TXT Oscillators under the class definition having means for setting or
    controlling the frequency of the generated wave oscillator by varying a
    frequency determining element or elements of the oscillator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for automatic frequency stabilized oscillators with means to
    compensate or correct for undesired affects when tuning the oscillator over
    a range of frequencies.

    34,     for automatic frequency stabilized oscillators with particular
    tuning or frequency adjusting means.

    40,     for beat frequency oscillator systems with frequency control means.

    48,     for plural oscillator systems with frequency adjusting means for at
    least one oscillator.

    90,     for magnetron type oscillators with frequency adjustment means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 235+ for tunable
    distributed parameter resonators.

    334,    Tuners, appropriate subclasses for tuned networks for use in wave
    energy apparatus and comprising inductance and capacitance elements in
    circuit arrangement to form a resonant circuit and in which structure is
    provided for adjusting one or both of these elements for changing the means
    resonant frequency of the circuit.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 196.1+ for radio receivers with
    tunable heterodyning oscillator.


CLS 331/178
TXT Oscillators under subclass 177 wherein means is provided for periodically
    or continuously varying the output frequency of the oscillator over a range
    of frequencies.  The means, for example, may be (1) another oscillator
    driving a reactance tube in the frequency determining circuit of the
    oscillator whose frequency is being swept, or (2) a continuously running
    motor driving a reactance element in the frequency determining circuit of
    the oscillator whose frequency is being swept.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for search sweep of an oscillator automatic frequency control
    system.

    40,     for beat frequency oscillator systems with frequency sweeping means.

    106,    for oscillator whose output amplitude varies periodically or
    repetitiously and which include frequency sweeping.


CLS 331/179
TXT Oscillators under subclass 177 having means for setting or adjusting the
    output frequency by discrete increments or steps as distinguished from a
    continuous variation of frequency from one frequency to another desired
    frequency setting.

    (1)     Note.  The means may be manually operable switches for switching
    between tuned oscillatory circuits at will.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161,    for crystal oscillators wherein the frequency of oscillation is
    changed by crystal substitution.


CLS 331/180
TXT Oscillators under subclass 177, in which the varied frequency determining
    element consists of an active element type reactance tube and wherein an
    adjustable bias control is provided for varying the effective reactance of
    the tube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for reactance tubes utilized as a frequency control means in an
    automatic frequency control (osc.) system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    332,    Modulators,  particularly subclasses 140 and 142+ for frequency
    modulators using reactance tubes.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 213+ for reactance
    tube systems, per se.

    334,    Tuners, subclasses 14+ for tuners which have a reactance tube type
    tuning means.


CLS 331/181
TXT Oscillators under subclass 177 in which the variable frequency controlling
    element consists of an inductance device provided with means to vary the
    effective inductance of the device.  By way of examples, the inductance
    device may have a core of variable permeability, means being provided to
    vary the permeability of the core and hence the inductance of the device,
    or the device may comprise a metallic member of magnetic or nonmagnetic
    material movable within the magnetic field of an inductance coil to vary
    the inductance thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for automatic frequency stabilized oscillator utilizing a
    particular frequency controlling reactance device (e.g., saturable
    inductor).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, appropriate
    subclasses, for voltage magnitude and phase control systems in general
    utilizing adjustable or variable inductance devices.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses, for the structure for
    inductors of the adjustable or variable inductance type.


CLS 331/182
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein means are provided in the
    oscillator circuit for adjusting, controlling or regulating the amplitude
    of the generated oscillations and not provided for in any preceding
    subclass.  The oscillation amplitude control means may be manually set or
    varied or may be controlled automatically responsive to changes in some
    condition, such as the amplitude of the generated oscillations.

    (1)     Note.  Class 323, Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems,
    is the generic place for current or voltage magnitude control systems in
    general wherein a single electrical source is coupled to a single
    electrical load and the classes listed under "SEARCH CLASS" of the class
    definition and "SEARCH CLASS" under specific subclasses of Class 323 should
    be consulted to locate art directed to other electrical art devices and
    systems having means to control current and voltage magnitude therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for automatic frequency stabilized oscillators having amplitude
    compensation means.

    40,     for beat frequency oscillators with amplitude control means.

    47,     for plural oscillator systems where one oscillator varies the
    oscillation amplitude of another oscillator.

    62,     for oscillators with means to protect the oscillator against
    overload.

    65+,    for oscillators whose oscillation amplitude may be controlled by
    means responsive to some external physical condition (e.g., humidity,
    pressure, temperature).

    75+,    for oscillators combined with an active element in the output
    circuit thereof which element may be a wave shaper or amplitude control
    means.

    106,    for oscillators having means for periodically or repetitiously
    varying the oscillation amplitude.

    108,    for transistor oscillators having means to control or stabilize the
    oscillation amplitude.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, appropriate
    subclasses, for current or voltage magnitude control systems in general
    wherein a single electrical source is coupled to a single electrical load
    (see also (1) Note above).

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems appropriate subclasses for current or voltage magnitude control
    systems in general wherein a plurality of circuits is coupled to one or
    more other circuits (see also (1) Note above).

    330,    Amplifiers, appropriate subclasses for amplifier systems having
    amplitude control or stabilization means, particularly subclasses 96, and
    127+.


CLS 331/183
TXT Subject matter under subclass 182 wherein means are provided for
    automatically controlling the amplitude of the generated oscillations in
    response to a change in some condition.

    (1)     Note.  The variable condition may be the amplitude of the
    oscillations generated by the oscillator, a condition within the oscillator
    (e.g., such as electrode bias variations or changes in temperature of the
    active element or other components of the oscillator) or some condition
    external to the oscillator.


CLS 331/184
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the active element of the
    oscillator comprises a discharge device of unconventional and unique
    construction not provided in any preceding subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     for electrical noise or random wave generator which may utilize
    discharge devices of unconventional structure.

    86+,    for oscillators with magnetically controlled space discharge
    devices (e.g., magnetron).

    79+,    for beam tube oscillators.

    92,     for retarding field type oscillators which may utilize discharge
    devices of unconventional structure.

    94,     for molecular or particle resonant type oscillator.

    103,    for oscillators where tube structure forms inductive part of the
    resonant circuit.

    104,    for transit time oscillators utilizing discharge devices which may
    be of unconventional structure.

    107+,   for oscillators utilizing solid state active elements.

    126+,   for oscillators utilizing gaseous space discharge devices.

    132+,   for negative resistance or transconductance type oscillators which
    may utilize space discharge devices of unconventional structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses, for
    particular space discharge device structures.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, particularly
    subclasses 3+ for combined cathode-ray tube and circuit element structure,
    and subclasses 32+ for combined discharge device or discharge device
    temperature modifying means and electric circuit device structure.


CLS 331/185
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the oscillator includes a
    source of electrical energy for supplying power to the oscillator or for
    supplying biasing potential to the electrodes of the active element of the
    oscillator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for oscillators wherein the source of power is raw (unrectified)
    alternating current.

    175,    for oscillators having means to compensate for drift of electrode
    potential of the active element of the oscillator, where such potential
    drift would cause an undesired change in oscillator frequency.

    183,    for oscillators wherein the amplitude of the generated oscillations
    is controlled by adjusting or varying the biasing potential of a electrode,
    or electrodes, of the active element of the oscillator.


CLS 331/186
TXT Subject matter under subclass 185 wherein means are provided for
    automatically controlling the amplitude of the current or voltage of the
    source of electrical energy in response to some condition.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the control means is responsive to change in
    amplitude of the current or voltage being regulated and acts to restore or
    maintain the amplitude of the current or voltage at a predetermined value.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    234-303 for automatic regulators.


CLS 331/187
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to oscillator structures
    not provided for in any preceding subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 679+ for
    structural arrangements of diverse electronic or radio type devices not
    provided for in any other class or in other subclasses of Class 361.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 899 for miscellaneous structures of
    utility in and peculiar to radio apparatus or systems.


CLS 332/
TTL MODULATORS

CLS 332/
TXT

    I.      DEFINITIONS OF TERMS USED

    MODULATOR

    Is a device which varies a characteristic of a repetitious electrical or
    electromagnetic wave of less than infrared frequency in accordance with a
    characteristic of an arbitrarily varying modulating signal.

    REPETITIOUS WAVE

    Is a cyclic wave whose individual component cycles are substantially
    identical.  Examples of repetitious waves are sine waves, square waves,
    saw-tooth waves, and trapezoidal waves.

    CHARACTERISTIC

    Is an attribute associated with the size or shape of a wave or signal.
    Examples are amplitude, frequency, or phase of a sine wave and repetition
    rate, position, amplitude or width of a nonsine wave.

    ARBITRARILY VARYING

    Indicates having a future value which is not predictable from past values.
    (Arbitrary is the opposite of repetitious).

    CARRIER

    Is an electrical or electromagnetic repetitious sinusoidal wave.

    PULSE WAVE

    Is an electrical or electromagnetic repetitious nonsinusoidal wave.
    Examples are square wave, saw-tooth wave, or trapezoidal wave.

    MODULATING SIGNAL

    Is an information carrying signal whose informational content is to be
    impressed on a carrier or pulse wave.

    II.     GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    A.      BASIC SUBJECT MATTER OF CLASS

    This is the generic class for modulators.  A modulator is a device which
    varies a characteristic of a repetitious electrical or electromagnetic wave
    of less than infrared frequency in accordance with a characteristic of an
    arbitrarily varying information carrying signal.  Classification herein is
    broadly by the type of modulation exhibited by the output signal.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this class are light wave modulators which are
    classified in Class 359, subclasses 237+

    (2)     Note.  Excluded from this class are pulse code modulators and delta
    modulators which are now classified in Class 341, subclasses 126+ and
    particularly subclass 143 for a delta modulator.

    (3)     Note.  Excluded from this class are those devices comprising an
    oscillator combined with or including a specific element which is merely
    responsive to an external physical condition (e.g., ambient temperature)
    and which thereby varies a parameter (e.g., amplitude or frequency) of the
    oscillator.  Such devices are classified in Class 331, subclasses 65+.
    However an oscillator in combination with significant modulating structure
    is classified in Class 332.

    (4)     Note.  Classes 330 Amplifiers and 331 Oscillators contain subject
    matter directed to subcombinations potentially usable in modulators (e.g.,
    an electrical amplifier combined with suitable gain control structure could
    be utilized as an amplitude modulator).  Therefore, these classes should be
    considered in completing the search for subject matter of Class 332.  See
    the related SEARCH CLASS notes below.

    (5)     Note.  Many classes contain subject matter which includes
    modulators or devices analogous to modulators as subcombinations thereof.
    Thus, as appropriate, combination classes listed below in the SEARCH CLASS
    notes should be considered in completing the search of subject matter
    relevant to Class 332.

    (6)     Note.  See section IV for nonelectrical modulators.

    B.      COMBINATIONS WITH BASIC SUBJECT MATTER INCLUDED IN THIS CLASS

    1.      A modulator combined with structure for measuring or indicating
    some aspect of the modulation process or characteristic of the modulated
    signal is classified here.  Specifically, measurement or indication of a
    frequency or amplitude modulator is classified here in subclasses 118 and
    150, respectively.

    2.      A modulator combined with a specific modulating signal source
    (e.g., microphone or photocell) is classified here by modulation type
    unless provided for elsewhere.

    3.      A modulator combined with structure to improve the modulation is
    classified here.  Such structure might include, for example, a particular
    power supply for electronic devices within the modulator or structure to
    correct for distortions in the modulated wave.

    4.      A combination including both a modulator and a demodulator is
    classified here where such combination is not provided for elsewhere.

    C.      MISCELLANEOUS SYSTEMS AND DEVICES USED WITH MODULATORS

    This class also provides for (1) miscellaneous systems and devices which
    are not of general utility and which are limited to use with modulators and
    (2) miscellaneous systems and devices useful with modulators which are not
    otherwise classified.  Examples of such subject matter are a structure
    limited in use to measurement of a modulated wave, a multiplex modulator
    where a plurality of modulating signals are imposed on a carrier or pulse
    wave, or a modulation converter where modulated energy of one character is
    converted to modulation energy of a different character (e.g., frequency
    modulation to amplitude modulation).

    III.    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for measuring or
    testing of a parameter which is typically neither electrical, optical,
    thermal, nor chemical and which may include a modulation technique.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 66.1+ for a telegraphic system which
    transmits messages between stations using alternating or pulsating currents
    and particularly subclass 66.2 for such a system having a transmitter which
    is turned on and off.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for a photocell-controlled
    modulator combined with a significant optical system for controlling the
    light intensity on the photocell, subclass 250 for radio and microwave
    wavemeters and frequency measurement systems for radio waves, subclass 263
    for an electrical wave modulated by signals emitted from a radiation
    detector in or about a well, and subclasses 336.1+ for structure comparable
    to that of subclasses 200+ described above wherein the photocell is
    responsive to invisible radiant energy.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses for active semiconductor devices, per se.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 3 for
    systems superimposing currents of diverse frequency or phase, subclass 73
    for plural supply circuits or sources of diverse frequency, and subclasses
    106+ for waveform or wave shape determinative or pulse producing systems
    which are class appropriate.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses for the
    structure of electronic tubes.

    315,    Electrical Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 3+ for a
    combination of cathode-ray tube with ray control structure which may
    utilize a modulation technique, subclass 39.3 for a travelling wave tube
    with delay line and subclasses 39.51+ for a magnetron combined with diverse
    circuit element.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 599 for pulse width
    modulated power control of a servo motor, subclasses 606+ for servo systems
    utilizing a feedback signal which frequency or phase modulates a system
    carrier, subclass 684 for a particular modulator structure used in
    servomotor control, and subclass 811 for pulse width modulated time control
    of a pulse train supplied to the primary winding of an induction motor.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for control of the magnitude or phase of current or voltage in a
    system comprising a single electrical source coupled to a single electrical
    load.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for
    measurement of electrical properties, in general, and particularly
    subclasses 76.39+ for frequency measurement of electrical waves, subclasses
    76.77+ for measurement of the phase relationship between electrical waves,
    and subclass 118 for modulation of voltage or current to be measured onto a
    carrier combined with subsequent structure to recover a replica of the
    original voltage or current by demodulation.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, particularly subclasses 113+ for miscellaneous frequency control,
    subclasses 291+ for miscellaneous clock or pulse waveform generating,
    subclasses 231+ for phase shift by less than the period of an input signal,
    and subclasses 306+ for miscellaneous amplitude control.

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses for demodulators, per se.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 10, for an amplifier having an input which is
    the output of a modulator and an output which is the input of a subsequent
    demodulator, and subclasses 127+, 144+ and 250+ for an amplifier with gain
    control structure.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 1+ for automatic frequency stabilization of
    an oscillator and indented thereunder subclasses 23+ for achieving this
    stabilization through a modulation technique, subclasses 37+ for two
    nonarbitrary sources of slightly different frequencies and substantially
    equal amplitudes which are combined to produce the respective sum or
    difference frequencies, subclasses 46+ for plural oscillator systems in
    general, subclass 58 for an oscillator with structure to perform an
    additional simultaneous function, subclasses 65+ for an oscillator
    responsive to an external condition, subclass 83 for a klystron type
    oscillator, subclasses 86+ for a magnetron type oscillator, subclass 106
    for an oscillator with repetitive amplitude variation, subclasses 177+ for
    an oscillator combined with frequency adjustment, and subclasses 182+ for
    amplitude stabilization or control in an oscillator.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 20 for passive
    networks which modify the amplitude-time characteristic of waves passing
    therethrough, and subclasses 219+ for resonators in general.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 870.01+ for telemetry
    systems and especially subclasses 870.18+ indented thereunder for such
    systems where the quantity to be telemetered is imposed on a carrier by a
    particular type of modulation.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 126+ for a pulse
    code modulator, per se, and subclass 143 for a delta modulator, per se.

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), appropriate subclasses for radar systems or
    subsystems utilizing devices (i.e., radar modulators) which vary the
    amplitude, frequency or phase of a radar signal in a nonarbitrary manner.

    348,    Television, subclass 472 for individual television signals combined
    into a specific transmission format by a pulse code modulated technique,
    subclass 642 for a natural color television signal generator including a
    modulator particularly adapted for use therein, and subclass 724 for a
    modulator using in television transmitter circuitry.

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 469 for facsimile circuitry including a
    modulator particularly adapted for use therein.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 29+
    for modulators of particular utility in dynamic magnetic recording or
    reproducing.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclass 26 for a DC-AC inverter
    having pulse width modulated automatic control of output current or
    voltage, and subclasses 41+ for a DC-AC inverter using a pulse modulation
    technique to introduce or eliminate frequency components.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 8 for a radio
    combined with an information retrieval device wherein an oscillator is
    controlled by a retrieved information signal, subclass 61 for direct
    storage or retrieval of a modulated carrier signal, subclass 62 for storage
    or retrieval involving a modulated signal wherein the carrier is partially
    or completely suppressed prior to storage and reinserted subsequent to
    retrieval, subclass 90 for storage of a quadraphonic signal utilizing
    modulation of an AC wave by at least one of the respective channels, and
    subclasses 127+ for mechanical modification or sensing of a storage medium
    which may utilize a modulation technique.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses which may have
    particular details of modulation techniques.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for
    measurement systems responsive to an external thermal condition which may
    utilize a modulation technique.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, appropriate subclasses for subject
    matter of this class combined with transmitting structure to couple a
    modulated pulse wave to a transmission medium and subclasses 237 and 242+
    for a digital communication transmitter or system utilizing pulse number
    modulation or pulse code modulation, respectively.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 64+ for a telephone speech
    signal transmitter utilizing a carrier modulation technique, and subclasses
    93+ (particularly subclass 98) for transmission of a digital message signal
    over a telephone line which may utilize a modulation technique.

    380,    Cryptography, for all electrical communications equipment which
    process an information signal for purposes of concealment and particularly
    subclasses 10+ for scrambling of a video signal using a modulation related
    technique, subclasses 31+ for cryptographic electrical signal modification
    using a plural modulation technique, and subclass 35 for cryptographic
    signal modification using a variable time delay modulation technique.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    3+ for audio systems or devices which process a stereo signal which is
    transmitted in a frequency-only modulated format, subclasses 15+ for audio
    systems or devices which process a stereo signal which is transmitted in an
    amplitude modulated or both an AM and angle modulated format, and
    subclasses 68.2 for control of the output amplitude of a hearing aid as a
    function of frequency.

    386,    Television Signal Processing for Dynamic Recording or Reproducing,
    subclasses 26+ for processing of a natural color television signal
    including frequency in modulation for recording on the same track.

    455,    Telecommunications, appropriate subclasses for subject matter of
    this class combined with transmitting structure to couple the modulated
    carrier wave to a transmission medium.

    IV.     MODULATORS OF NONELECTRICAL TYPE

    The term modulator has a variety of meanings outside of the electrical art.
     Foremost among these are fluid control devices and optical control
    devices.  Examples of fluid control type modulators can be found in the
    appropriate subclasses of:

    Class 60,               Power Plants.

    Class 62,               Refrigeration.

    Class 137,              Fluid Handling.

    Class 180,              Motor Vehicles.

    Class 303,      Fluid-Pressure and Analogous  Brake System.

    Examples of optical type modulators can be found in the appropriate
    subclasses of:

    Class 359,      Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements.

    Class 372,              Coherent Light Generators.

    Other diverse types of nonelectrical modulators can be found in the
    appropriate subclasses of:

    Class 264,      Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:
    Processes.

    Class 367,      Communications, Electrical: Acoustic Wave System and
    Devices.

    Class 430,      Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or
    Product Thereof.

    Class 432,              Heating.


CLS 332/100
TXT FREQUENCY SHIFT KEYING MODULATOR OR MINIMUM SHIFT KEYING MODULATOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which the frequency of the
    carrier is shifted among a plurality of discrete values in accordance with
    the modulating signal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and its indents provide for a minimum shift
    keying (MSK) modulator which is a frequency shift keying modulator having
    phase continuity at the frequency transition points.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes frequency shift keying modulators,
    per se.  See the SEARCH CLASS notes below for combinations with the subject
    matter of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103+,   for a phase shift keying modulator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 272+ for a frequency
    shift keying system (i.e., transmitter and receiver), and subclasses 303+
    for a frequency shift keying modulator combined with transmitting structure.


CLS 332/101
TXT Including logic element (e.g., logic gate or flip-flop):

    Subject matter under subclass 100 containing a component which performs a
    Boolean Algebraic operation.

    (1)     Note.  Such components may be combinational or sequential (e.g.,
    AND gates, OR gates or J-K flip-flops).


CLS 332/102
TXT Including discrete semiconductor device:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 containing an electrical device whose
    constituent portions are constructed from solid material having room
    temperature conductivity between that of a conductor and an insulator and
    which conductivity is typically modified through the addition of small
    amounts of dopant.

    (1)     Note.  This might include, for example, semiconductor diodes or
    transistors of diverse type.


CLS 332/103
TXT PHASE SHIFT KEYING MODULATOR OR QUADRATURE AMPLITUDE MODULATOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which the phase of the carrier
    is shifted among a plurality of discrete angles in accordance with the
    modulating signal.

    (1)     Note.  Also included here is the case where the phase and amplitude
    of the carrier are simultaneously shifted among a plurality of discrete
    angle/magnitude pairs (i.e., QAM).

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes phase shift keying modulators, or
    quadrature amplitude modulators, per se.  See the SEARCH CLASS notes below
    for combinations with the subject matter of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100+,   for a frequency shift keying modulator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclass 261 for a quadrature
    amplitude modulation system (i.e., transmitter and receiver), subclasses
    279+ for a phase shift keying system, and subclass 308 for a phase shift
    keying modulator combined with transmitting structure.


CLS 332/104
TXT Including logic element (e.g., logic gate or flip-flop):

    Subject matter under subclass 103 containing a component which performs a
    Boolean Algebraic operation.

    (1)     Note.  Such components may be combinational or sequential (e.g.,
    AND gates, OR gates or J-K flip-flops).


CLS 332/105
TXT Including discrete semiconductor device:

    Subject matter under subclass 103 containing an electrical device whose
    constituent portions are constructed from solid material having room
    temperature conductivity between that of a conductor and an insulator and
    which conductivity is typically modified through the addition of small
    amounts of dopant.

    (1)     Note.  This might include, for example, semiconductor diodes or
    transistors of diverse type.


CLS 332/106
TXT PULSE OR INTERRUPTED CONTINUOUS WAVE MODULATOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition producing a final output signal
    consisting of a repetitious pulse wave or a pulsed continuous wave having
    one or more of its characteristics varied in accordance with one or more
    modulating signals.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of pulse waves are square waves, sawtooth waves,
    and trapezoidal waves.

    (2)     Note.  If a system includes a pulse modulator, but the final output
    signal is a frequency, phase or an amplitude modulated wave, the modulator
    is classified in subclasses 117+, 144+ or 149+, respectively.

    (3)     Note.  Systems having a final output that is pulse code modulated
    (PCM) or delta modulated are found in Class 341 subclasses 126+ or 143.

    (4)     Note.  This subclass includes pulse modulators, per se.  See the
    SEARCH CLASS notes below for combinations with the subject matter of this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117+,   for a frequency modulator.

    144+,   for a phase modulator.

    149+,   for an amplitude modulator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, appropriate subclasses, for
    combinations of a pulse modulator with transmitting structure.


CLS 332/107
TXT Including stabilization or alternatively distortion, noise or other
    interference prevention, reduction, or compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 106 including the neutralization of an
    undesirable characteristic of a pulse modulator or its signals.

    (1)     Note.  Distortion may be introduced to the pulse modulating system
    in order to compensate for other inherent distortion.

    (2)     Note.  The neutralized characteristic might be some form of system
    instability.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123+,   for distortion or noise control in a frequency modulator.

    159+,   for distortion or noise control in an amplitude modulator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 254, 285 and 296 for
    noise or distortion control in a system or transmitter.


CLS 332/108
TXT Plural modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 106 having a plurality of modulators,
    modulating signals, or diverse output modulation types simultaneously
    present or individually selectable.

    (1)     Note.  At least one final output signal must be a pulse modulated
    signal for classification herein.

    (2)     Note.  Multiplex pulse modulators, per se, are classified here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119+,   for plural modulation in a frequency modulator.

    145,    for plural modulation in a phase modulator.

    151+,   for plural modulation in an amplitude modulator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses and particularly
    subclass 205 for combined pulse width and pulse position modulation,
    subclass 212 for a multiplex transmitter using pulse width modulation and
    subclass 213 for multiplex transmitter using pulse position modulation.


CLS 332/109
TXT Pulse width modulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 106 producing a pulse wave output signal in
    which the pulse width (duration) is varied by the modulating signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclass 238 for a combination of
    pulse width modulator with transmitting structure.


CLS 332/110
TXT Including discrete semiconductor device having three or more electrodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 109 utilizing a device with three external
    connection points where the constituent portions of the device are
    constructed from solid material having room temperature conductivity
    between that of a conductor and an insulator and which conductivity is
    typically modified through the addition of small amounts of dopant.

    (1)     Note.  This might include, for example, semiconductor diodes or
    transistors of diverse type.


CLS 332/111
TXT Including electron discharge device:

    Subject matter under subclass 109 utilizing a device which has electrical
    current flow between two spaced electrodes in a gas, vapor or vacuum.

    (1)     Note.  This might include, for example, vacuum or gas tubes such as
    diodes, triodes or pentodes.

    (2)     Note.  Additional control electrodes may be present.


CLS 332/112
TXT Pulse position, frequency, phase or spacing modulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 106 producing a pulse wave output signal in
    which the relative positions of the pulses, the frequency (repetition rate)
    of the pulses, the phase of the pulses, or the spacing (time) between the
    pulses is varied by the modulating signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclass 239 for a combination of
    pulse position, frequency or spacing modulator with transmitting structure.


CLS 332/113
TXT Including discrete semiconductor device having three or more electrodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 utilizing a device with three external
    connection points where the constituent portions of the device are
    constructed from solid material having room temperature conductivity
    between that of a conductor and an insulator and which conductivity is
    typically modified through the addition of small amounts of dopant.

    (1)     Note.  This might include, for example, semiconductor diodes or
    transistors of diverse type.


CLS 332/114
TXT Including electron discharge device:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 utilizing a device which has electrical
    current flow between two spaced electrodes in a gas, vapor or vacuum.

    (1)     Note.  This might include, for example, vacuum or gas tubes such as
    diodes, triodes or pentodes.

    (2)     Note.  Additional control electrodes may be present.


CLS 332/115
TXT Pulse amplitude modulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 106 producing a pulse wave output signal in
    which the amplitude of the pulses is controlled by the modulating signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 300+ for a combination
    of pulse amplitude modulator with transmitting structure, and subclasses
    268+ for a pulse amplitude modulation system (i.e., transmitter and
    receiver).


CLS 332/116
TXT Including discrete semiconductor device having three or more electrodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 115 utilizing a device with three external
    connection points where the constituent portions of the device are
    constructed from solid material having room temperature conductivity
    between that of a conductor and an insulator and which conductivity is
    typically modified through the addition of small amounts of dopant.

    (1)     Note.  This might include, for example, semiconductor diodes or
    transistors of diverse type.


CLS 332/117
TXT FREQUENCY MODULATOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which the frequency of the
    carrier is varied over a continuum of values in accordance with the
    modulating signal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes frequency modulators, per se.  See
    the SEARCH CLASS notes below for combinations with the subject matter of
    this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106+,   for a pulse modulator.

    144+,   for a phase modulator.

    149+,   for an amplitude modulator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 42+ for frequency modulation in a
    system with separated transmitter and receiver, and subclasses 110+ for a
    combination of frequency modulator with transmitting structure.


CLS 332/118
TXT Including measuring or indicating:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 combined with apparatus producing a
    qualitative or quantitative output representative of a characteristic of
    the modulator or its signals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150,    for measuring in an amplitude modulator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 64 for an oscillator with indicator.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 67.1+, for measuring or testing in a
    system with separated transmitter and receiver and subclass 115 for
    measuring or testing of a telecommunications tramsmitter.


CLS 332/119
TXT Plural modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 having a plurality of modulators,
    modulating signals, or diverse output modulation types simultaneously
    present or individually selectable.

    (1)     Note.  At least one final output signal must be a frequency
    modulated signal.

    (2)     Note.  Multiplex frequency modulators, per se, are classified here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for plural modulation in a pulse modulator.

    145,    for plural modulation in a phase modulator.

    151+,   for plural modulation in an amplitude modulator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses and particularly
    subclasses 204+ for plural diverse modulation techniques, subclass 215 for
    multiplex transmitter using phase modulation and subclass 483 for a
    multiplex transmitter using frequency modulation.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 61 for plural modulation where a
    single message is conveyed between a separated transmitter and receiver and
    subclass 102 for plural modulation in a telecommunications transmitter.


CLS 332/120
TXT Including amplitude modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 119 in which at least one modulator is an
    amplitude modulator or in which amplitude modulation is produced in
    addition to the frequency modulation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145,    for a phase modulator which includes an amplitude modulator.


CLS 332/121
TXT Including electron discharge device:

    Subject matter under subclass 120 utilizing a device which has electrical
    current flow between two spaced electrodes in a gas, vapor or vacuum.

    (1)     Note.  This might include, for example, vacuum or gas tubes such as
    diodes, triodes or pentodes.

    (2)     Note.  Additional control electrodes may be present.


CLS 332/122
TXT Including electron discharge device:

    Subject matter under subclass 119 utilizing a device which has electrical
    current flow between two spaced electrodes in a gas, vapor or vacuum.

    (1)     Note.  This might include, for example, vacuum or gas tubes such as
    diodes, triodes or pentodes.

    (2)     Note.  Additional control electrodes may be present.


CLS 332/123
TXT Including stabilization or alternatively distortion, noise or other
    interference prevention, reduction or compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 including the neutralization of an
    undesirable characteristic of a frequency modulator or its signals.

    (1)     Note.  In some instances, distortion may be introduced to the FM
    system in order to compensate for other inherent distortion.

    (2)     Note.  The neutralized characteristic might be some form of system
    instability.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for distortion or noise control in a pulse modulator.

    159+,   for distortion or noise control in an amplitude modulator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 63+ and 501+ for noise control in a
    telecommunication system with separated transmitter and receiver and
    subclass 114 for harmonic radiation control in a transmitter.


CLS 332/124
TXT Nonlinearity reduction or compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 123 which diminishes the undesired effects of
    a modulator element or circuit whose output is not directly proportional to
    its input.


CLS 332/125
TXT Automatic amplitude stabilization or control:

    Subject matter under subclass 123 where undesired signal amplitude
    variations are controlled without human intervention.

    (1)     Note.  This might include, for example, suppression of undesired
    amplitude modulation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155+,   for amplitude control in an amplitude modulator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 116 for control of carrier amplitude
    in a transmitter.


CLS 332/126
TXT Automatic frequency stabilization or control:

    Subject matter under subclass 123 in which undesired signal frequency
    variations are controlled without human intervention.

    (1)     Note. Often the frequency being controlled is that of the
    unmodulated carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161,    for frequency control in an amplitude modulator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 1+ for automatic frequency control of an
    oscillator.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 75+ for frequency stabilization in a
    transceiver, subclass 113 for frequency control of a frequency modulated
    transmitter and subclass 119 for stabilizing the carrier frequency in a
    telecommunications transmitter.


CLS 332/127
TXT Phase or frequency locked loop:

    Subject matter under subclass 126 in which a stable frequency is attained
    by utilizing a phase or frequency locked loop.


CLS 332/128
TXT Modulating signal applied to plural elements of the loop:

    Subject matter under subclass 127 in which the modulating signal is
    injected into a plurality of points within the locked loop.


CLS 332/129
TXT Including microwave or distributed parameter structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 utilizing a structure or device which is
    peculiar to microwave frequencies or which has resistance, inductance or
    capacitance not concentrated in lumped circuit elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163+,   for similar structure in an amplitude modulator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 111, for distributed parameter
    structure in a frequency modulated transmitter.


CLS 332/130
TXT With discrete semiconductor device:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 containing an electrical device whose
    constituent portions are constructed from solid material having room
    temperature conductivity between that of a conductor and an insulator and
    which conductivity is typically modified through the addition of small
    amounts of dopant.

    (1)     Note.  This might include, for example, semiconductor diodes or
    transistors of diverse type.


CLS 332/131
TXT With electron discharge device:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 combined with a device which has
    electrical current flow between two spaced electrodes in a gas, vapor or
    vacuum.

    (1)     Note.  This might include, for example, vacuum or gas tubes such as
    diodes, triodes or pentodes.

    (2)     Note.  Additional control electrodes may be present.


CLS 332/132
TXT Magnetron type:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 in which an electron beam within the
    discharge device is subject to a magnetic field.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 5.13 and
    39.51+ for a magnetron combined with diverse circuit element.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 5 for automatic frequency control of a
    magnetron oscillator and subclasses 86+ for a magnetron oscillator, per se.


CLS 332/133
TXT Klystron type:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 where the discharge device includes
    structure to vary the relative velocity of different longitudinal portions
    of the electron beam resulting in electron bunching.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 5+ for a
    cathode- ray tube circuit where the ray traverses a hollow distributed
    parameter device and particularly indented thereunder subclasses 5.21+,
    5.46+ and 5.53+ for tuning thereof.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 6+ for automatic frequency control in a
    klystron oscillator and subclass 83 for a klystron oscillator, per se.


CLS 332/134
TXT Travelling wave type:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the discharge device has
    structure to slow a travelling electromagnetic wave to more closely match
    the velocity of an electron beam with which it is interacting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 3.5+ for
    travelling wave tube combined with a delay transmission line.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 82 for a travelling wave-tube type oscillator.


CLS 332/135
TXT Including discrete semiconductor device:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 containing an electrical device whose
    constituent portions are constructed from solid material having room
    temperature conductivity between that of a conductor and an insulator and
    which conductivity is typically modified through the addition of small
    amounts of dopant.

    (1)     Note.  This might include, for example, semiconductor diodes or
    transistors of diverse type.


CLS 332/136
TXT With varactor:

    Subject matter under subclass 135 in combination with a variable
    capacitance diode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 312, 480, and 595-602 for voltage variable capacitive type
    active semiconductor devices.


CLS 332/137
TXT Including electron discharge device:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 utilizing a device which has electrical
    current flow between two spaced electrodes in a gas, vapor or vacuum.

    (1)     Note.  This might include, for example, vacuum or gas tubes such as
    diodes, triodes or pentodes.

    (2)     Note.  Additional control electrodes may be present.


CLS 332/138
TXT Particular oscillator circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 137 including details of an associated
    frequency source.

    (1)     Note.  Mere mention of an oscillator exclusive of detail is
    insufficient for classification herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, appropriate subclasses, for an oscillator, per se.


CLS 332/139
TXT Crystal oscillator type:

    Subject matter under subclass 138 in which frequency generation is
    controlled by a crystal resonator such as a piezoelectric crystal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 73, 116, 139, and 154+ for
    piezoelectric-type oscillators.


CLS 332/140
TXT With separate modulator tube (e.g., reactance tube):

    Subject matter under subclass 139 where an electron discharge device
    distinct from the crystal oscillator performs the actual modulation.


CLS 332/141
TXT L-C oscillator type:

    Subject matter under subclass 138 in which frequency generation is
    accomplished by an inductive-capacitive network.


CLS 332/142
TXT With separate modulator tube (e.g., reactance tube):

    Subject matter under subclass 141 where an electron discharge device
    distinct from the L-C oscillator performs the actual modulation.


CLS 332/143
TXT Plural Modulator Tubes:

    Subject matter under subclass 142 having a plurality of such distinct
    modulator tubes.


CLS 332/144
TXT PHASE MODULATOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which the phase of the carrier
    is varied over a continuum of values in accordance with the modulating
    signal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes phase modulators, per se.  See SEARCH
    CLASS notes below for combinations with the subject matter of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106+,   for a pulse modulator.

    117+,   for a frequency modulator.

    149+,   for an amplitude modulator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 42+ for phase modulation in a system
    with separated transmitter and receiver, and subclasses 110+ for a
    combination of a phase modulator with transmitting structure.


CLS 332/145
TXT Including amplitude modulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 144 in which at least one modulator is an
    amplitude modulator or in which amplitude modulation is produced in
    addition to phase modulation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for plural modulation in a pulse modulator.

    119+,   for plural modulation in a frequency modulator.

    151+,   for plural modulation in an amplitude modulator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses and particularly
    subclasses 204+ for plural diverse modulation techniques, subclass 215 for
    a multiplexer using phase modulation, subclass 483 for a multiplexer using
    frequency modulation, subclass 533 for a multiplexer using pulse amplitude
    modulation.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 61 for plural modulation where a
    single message is conveyed between a separated transmitter and receiver and
    subclass 102 for plural modulation in a telecommunications transmitter.


CLS 332/146
TXT Including discrete semiconductor device:

    Subject matter under subclass 144 containing an electrical device whose
    constituent portions are constructed from solid material having room
    temperature conductivity between that of a conductor and an insulator and
    which conductivity is typically modified through the addition of small
    amounts of dopant.

    (1)     Note.  This might include, for example, semiconductor diodes or
    transistors of diverse type.


CLS 332/147
TXT Including electron discharge device:

    Subject matter under subclass 144 utilizing a device which has electrical
    current flow between two spaced electrodes in a gas, vapor or vacuum.

    (1)     Note.  This might include, for example, vacuum or gas tubes such as
    diodes, triodes or pentodes.

    (2)     Note.  Additional control electrodes may be present.


CLS 332/148
TXT Push-pull circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 147 wherein there are two electrical paths
    with common output each of which contains an electron discharge device and
    in which the respective voltages are 180o out of phase with respect to the
    other.


CLS 332/149
TXT AMPLITUDE MODULATOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which the amplitude of the
    carrier is varied over a continuum of values in accordance with the
    modulating signal.

    (1)     Note.  If a system includes an amplitude modulator, but the final
    output signal is a pulse modulated, frequency modulated or phase modulated
    wave, the modulator is classified in subclasses 106+, 117+ or 144+,
    respectively.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes amplitude modulators, per se.  See
    the SEARCH CLASS notes below for combinations with the subject matter of
    this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106+,   for a pulse modulator.

    117+,   for a frequency modulator.

    144+,   for a phase modulator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 108+, for amplitude modulation in a
    telecommunications transmitter.


CLS 332/150
TXT Including measuring or indicating:

    Subject matter under subclass 149 combined with apparatus producing a
    qualitative or quantitative output representative of a characteristic of
    the modulator or its signals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118,    for measuring in a frequency modulator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 64 for an oscillator with indicator.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 67.1+, for measuring or testing in a
    system with separated transmitter and receiver and subclass 115 for
    measuring or testing of a telecommunications transmitter.


CLS 332/151
TXT Plural modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 149 having a plurality of modulators,
    modulating signals, or diverse output modulation types simultaneously
    present or individually selectable.

    (1)     Note.  At least one final output signal must be an amplitude
    modulated carrier wave.

    (2)     Note.  Multiplex amplitude modulators, per se, are classified here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for plural modulation in a pulse modulator.

    119+,   for plural modulation in a frequency modulator.

    145,    for plural modulation in a phase modulator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses and particularly
    subclasses 204+ for plural diverse modulation techniques, and subclass 533
    for a multiplexer using pulse amplitude modulation.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 61 for plural modulation where a
    single message is conveyed between a separated transmitter and receiver and
    subclass 102 for plural modulation in a telecommunications transmitter.


CLS 332/152
TXT Including discrete semiconductor device:

    Subject matter under subclass 151 containing an electrical device whose
    constituent portions are constructed from solid material having room
    temperature conductivity between that of a conductor and an insulator and
    which conductivity is typically modified through the addition of small
    amounts of dopant.

    (1)     Note.  This might include, for example, semiconductor diodes or
    transistors of diverse type.


CLS 332/153
TXT Including electron discharge device:

    Subject matter under subclass 151 utilizing a device which has electrical
    current flow between two spaced electrodes in a gas, vapor or vacuum.

    (1)     Note.  This might include, for example, vacuum or gas tubes such as
    diodes, triodes or pentodes.

    (2)     Note.  Additional control electrodes may be present.


CLS 332/154
TXT Push-pull circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 153 wherein there are two electrical paths
    with common output each of which contains an electron discharge device and
    in which the respective voltages are 180 degrees out of phase with respect
    to the other.


CLS 332/155
TXT Percent modulation control or automatic amplitude control of carrier or
    modulating signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 149 in which amplitude control is exerted on
    the carrier, the modulating signal, or the ratio therebetween without human
    intervention.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    for amplitude control in a frequency modulator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 109 and 182+ for an oscillator with
    amplitude control.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 116 for control of carrier amplitude
    in a transmitter.


CLS 332/156
TXT Over modulation prevention:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 in which the automatic amplitude control
    maintains the ratio of the modulating signal amplitude to the carrier
    signal amplitude at a value of one or less.


CLS 332/157
TXT Average carrier amplitude controlled by modulating signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 in which the average unmodulated carrier
    amplitude is adjusted to reflect the average modulating signal amplitude.


CLS 332/158
TXT Carrier output suppressed during absence of modulating signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 in which the automatic control eliminates
    the carrier in response to a lack of modulating signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167+,   for a suppressed carrier, double sideband amplitude modulator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 116 for carrier amplitude control in a
    telecommunications transmitter.


CLS 332/159
TXT Including stabilization or alternatively distortion, noise, or other
    interference prevention, reduction or compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 149 including the neutralization of an
    undesirable characteristic of an amplitude modulator or its signals.

    (1)     Note.  In some instances, distortion may be introduced to the AM
    system in order to compensate for other inherent distortion.

    (2)     Note.  The neutralized characteristic might be some form of system
    instability.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for distortion or noise control in a pulse modulator.

    123+,   for distortion or noise control in a frequency modulator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 63+ and 501+, for noise control in a
    telecommunication system with separated transmitter and receiver and
    subclass 114 for harmonic radiation control in a transmitter.


CLS 332/160
TXT Reduction or compensation of nonlinearity in modulation characteristic:

    Subject matter under subclass 159 which diminishes the undesired effects of
    a modulator element or circuit whose output is not directly proportional to
    its input.


CLS 332/161
TXT Reduction of carrier phase or frequency variations or modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 159 in which undesired fluctuations of either
    the phase or frequency of the carrier are reduced.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126+,   for frequency control in a frequency modulator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 75+ for frequency stabilization in a
    transceiver, subclass 113 for frequency control of a frequency modulated
    transmitter and subclass 119 for stabilizing the carrier frequency in a
    telecommunications transmitter.


CLS 332/162
TXT Using feedback to reduce distortion, noise, or other interference:

    Subject matter under subclass 159 in which a feedback signal is used to
    remove or control distortion.


CLS 332/163
TXT Including microwave or distributed parameter structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 149 utilizing a structure or device which is
    peculiar to microwave frequencies or which has resistance, inductance or
    capacitance not concentrated in lumped circuit elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129+,   for similar structure in a frequency modulator.


CLS 332/164
TXT With discrete semiconductor device:

    Subject matter under subclass 163 containing an electrical device whose
    constituent portions are constructed from solid material having room
    temperature conductivity between that of a conductor and an insulator and
    which conductivity is typically modified through the addition of small
    amounts of dopant.

    (1)     Note.  This might include, for example, semiconductor diodes or
    transistors of diverse type.


CLS 332/165
TXT With electron discharge device:

    Subject matter under subclass 163 combined with a device which has
    electrical current flow between two spaced electrodes in a gas, vapor, or
    vacuum.

    (1)     Note.  This might include, for example, vacuum or gas tubes such as
    diodes, triodes or pentodes.

    (2)     Note.  Additional control electrodes may be present.


CLS 332/166
TXT Magnetron type:

    Subject matter under subclass 165 in which an electron beam within the
    discharge device is subject to a magnetic field.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 5.13 and
    39.51+ for a magnetron combined with diverse circuit element.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 5 for automatic frequency control in a
    magnetron oscillator and subclasses 86+ for a magnetron oscillator, per se.


CLS 332/167
TXT Suppressed carrier double sideband type:

    Subject matter under subclass 149 in which the carrier is suppressed
    continuously or intermittently and both sidebands are intact.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 46 for a suppressed carrier system
    having separated transmitter and receiver and subclass 109 for a suppressed
    carrier amplitude modulated transmitter.


CLS 332/168
TXT Including discrete semiconductor device:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 containing an electrical device whose
    constituent portions are constructed from solid material having room
    temperature conductivity between that of a conductor and an insulator and
    which conductivity is typically modified through the addition of small
    amounts dopant.

    (1)     Note.  This might include, for example, semiconductor diodes or
    transistors of diverse type.


CLS 332/169
TXT Including electron discharge device:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 utilizing a device which has electrical
    current flow between two spaced electrodes in a gas, vapor or vacuum.

    (1)     Note.  This might include, for example, vacuum or gas tubes such as
    diodes, triodes or pentodes.

    (2)     Note.  Additional control electrodes may be present.


CLS 332/170
TXT Single or vestigial sideband type:

    Subject matter under subclass 149 in which the final output contains less
    than two complete sidebands with or without the carrier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 47 for a single or vestigial sideband
    system with separated transmitter and receiver and subclass 109 for a
    single or vestigial sideband amplitude modulated transmitter.


CLS 332/171
TXT Including electron discharge device:

    Subject matter under subclass 170 utilizing a device which has electrical
    current flow between two spaced electrodes in a gas, vapor or vacuum.

    (1)     Note.  This might include, for example, vacuum or gas tubes such as
    diodes, triodes or pentodes.

    (2)     Note.  Additional control electrodes may be present.


CLS 332/172
TXT Modulating signal applied to a bridge circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 149 in which the carrier is applied to an
    impedance bridge in which the impedance of at least one branch is varied in
    accordance with the modulating signal.


CLS 332/173
TXT Magnetic field varied by modulating signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 149 in which the amplitude of the carrier is
    varied by varying a magnetic field in accordance with the modulating signal.

    (1)     Note.  Devices which may be used to vary a magnetic field include
    saturable reactors and transformers.


CLS 332/174
TXT Resistive or dissipative device controlled by modulating signal (e.g., loss
    modulator):

    Subject matter under subclass 149 in which the energy of the carrier is
    variably absorbed, diverted or scattered in accordance with the modulating
    signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 106 for a transmitter utilizing
    absorption modulation.


CLS 332/175
TXT Variable reactance controlled by modulating signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 149 in which the amplitude of the carrier is
    varied by varying a reactance in accordance with the modulating signal.

    (1)     Note.  The variable reactance might be part of a tuning circuit,
    variation of which may be used to vary the gain of a circuit and thereby
    the amplitude of the carrier.


CLS 332/176
TXT Nonlinear device controlled by modulating signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 149 which includes a circuit element having
    an impedance which is not directly proportional to the current passing
    through it or the voltage applied to it and which controls the amplitude of
    the carrier in accordance with the modulating signal.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of nonlinear devices could be diodes, nonlinear
    crystals, thyrite resistors, or electronic tubes.


CLS 332/177
TXT Nonlinear discrete semiconductor device:

    Subject matter under subclass 176 in which the controlled circuit element
    is an electrical device whose constituent portions are constructed from
    solid material having room temperature conductivity between that of a
    conductor and an insulator and which conductivity is typically modified
    through the addition of small amounts of dopant.


CLS 332/178
TXT Including discrete semiconductor device:

    Subject matter under subclass 149 containing an electrical device whose
    constituent portions are constructed from solid material having room
    temperature conductivity between that of a conductor and an insulator and
    which conductivity is typically modified through the addition of small
    amounts of dopant.

    (1)     Note.  This might include, for example, semiconductor diodes or
    transistors of diverse type.


CLS 332/179
TXT Including electron discharge device:

    Subject matter under subclass 149 utilizing a device which has electrical
    current flow between two spaced electrodes in a gas, vapor or vacuum.

    (1)     Note.  This might include, for example, vacuum or gas tubes such as
    diodes, triodes or pentodes.

    (2)     Note.  Additional control electrodes may be present.


CLS 332/180
TXT Push-pull circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 179 wherein there are two electrical paths
    with common output each of which contains an electron discharge device and
    in which the respective voltages are 180 degrees out of phase with respect
    to the other.


CLS 332/181
TXT Plate circuit modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 179 including an electronic tube which
    generates or amplifies the carrier, and in which the modulating signal is
    applied to the anode circuit of the tube or controls a circuit element in
    the anode circuit.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes circuits in which a variable voltage
    under control of the modulating signal is added to the anode supply voltage.


CLS 332/182
TXT Grid circuit modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 179 including an electronic tube which
    generates or amplifies the carrier, and in which the modulating signal is
    applied to the grid circuit of the tube or controls a circuit element in
    the grid circuit.


CLS 332/183
TXT MODULATION CONVERTER HAVING PRE-MODULATED INPUT (E.G., FM TO AM):

    Subject matter under the class definition in which the input to a system is
    a repetitious electrical wave which has had a characteristic varied in
    accordance with a modulating signal, and in which the output of the system
    is a repetitious electrical wave having a different characteristic varied.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass excludes systems whose outputs are pulse code
    modulated (PCM) or delta modulated.  Such systems are found in Class 341
    subclasses 126+ and 143.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass excludes systems having a plurality of diverse
    type modulators wherein the input of a first modulator is an intelligence
    and the output of this modulator forms the input of a second modulator
    whose output is a different form of modulation from its input.  Such
    systems are found in subclasses 108, 119+, 145, and 151+, where the final
    output is pulse, frequency, phase or amplitude modulated, respectively.

    (3)     Note.  The combination of subject matter of this subclass with a
    subsequent demodulator is classified in Class 329.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, appropriate subclasses, for diverse-type
    conversion in a telecommunication transmitter or receiver.


CLS 332/184
TXT Between diverse pulse modulation types:

    Subject matter under subclass 183 in which conversion occurs between
    diverse types of pulse modulation.

    (1)     Note.  This might include, for example, a pulse amplitude
    modulation to pulse width modulation converter.


CLS 332/185
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition not provided for in any of the
    preceding subclasses.


CLS 333/
TTL WAVE TRANSMISSION LINES AND  NETWORKS

CLS 333/
TXT

    I.      DEFINITION OF TERMS USED:

    WAVE ENERGY

    An undulatory disturbance propagated through a medium, (usually periodic in
    nature), its displacement varying periodically with respect to time or
    distance or both.  The wave may be manifested in electrical, mechanical or
    acoustical form.  However, in this class the term "wave energy" refers only
    to electrical wave energy.

    WAVE TRANSMISSION DEVICE

    Any device which is used to guide or constrain electrical wave energy and
    to convey the energy from one place to another. Included are conductors,
    wave guides, resonant structures (e.g., cavities, etc.)

    WAVE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM

    One of more wave transmission devices with or without appropriate coupling
    networks or transmission line characteristic modifying means arranged to
    convey electrical energy from one or more places to one or more other
    physically separated places.  The system may be arranged so that different
    electrical energies may be conveyed in different directions at the same or
    different times over the system.

    TRANSMISSION LINE

    As used in the subclass definitions is synonymous with wave transmission
    devices.

    DISTRIBUTED PARAMETERS

    When the impedance of a transmission device or line at the operating
    frequency or band of frequencies is due primarily to the parameters of the
    device or line itself, and in considering the inductance, capacitance and
    resistance of the device or line they must be considered as mixed together
    and spread out along the device or line rather than being considered as in
    separate discrete lumps or devices as in the case of simple series and
    parallel circuits, the transmission device or line ay be said to have
    distributed parameters.  Examples of circuits with distributed parameters
    include telephone, telegraph and power lines for high frequency energy.

    LUMPED PARAMETERS OR IMPEDANCES

    When the impedance of a transmission line or device at the operating
    frequency may be considered as equivalent to devices concentrated at one
    point, and the parameters of the system including the line or device is not
    substantially independent of the load devices connected thereto, the
    transmission line or device may be said to have lumped parameters.  Lumped
    impedances is also used to include devices such as capacitors, inductors,
    and resistors which have their impedance concentrated at the terminals
    thereof.

    LONG LINE

    A wave transmission device or line having distributed parameters and
    especially designed to propagate electrical wave energy where the wave
    length of the transmitted energy is relatively short when compared with the
    length of the transmission line or device.  The impedance of a long line is
    practically fixed by the constants of the line itself.  The length of the
    transmission line or device may be a multiple or a fraction of a wave
    length, e.g., 1/4, 1/2, etc., or otherwise have its length proportioned to
    the wave length of the energy with which it is to be used.

    LONG LINE ELEMENT

    A circuit element having distributed parameters, such as a resonator, or a
    wave guide.  A long line element may be a part of a long line wave
    transmission device or used in a network with other circuit elements of the
    lumped parameter type, for example, as in the case of delay networks,
    impedance matching networks, wave filters.

    LOADED LINES

    A long line to which lumped impedance elements, usually capacitors or
    inductors, are added at regularly spaced points along the length thereof,
    or to which an added impedance is applied in a continuous manner, as for
    example, by wrapping a strip of magnetic material about the line or device
    to increase the inductance of the line or device.

    WAVE GUIDE

    A transmission device designed to propagate electrical waves having an
    electric or magnetic field component extending in the direction of
    propagation.  The wave guide may be a hollow dielectric or metal tube, or a
    solid dielectric rod, the wave energy being propagated along the interior
    of the tube or rod and confined by the walls of the tube or rod.

    TAPERED LONG LINE

    A long line having a physical dimension which changes progressively in the
    direction of wave propagation along the line.

    NETWORK

    A network is made up of two or more resistances, inductances, capacities or
    mutual inductances connected together in some manner.

    PASSIVE NETWORK

    A network containing no source of energy and in which no energy is
    dissipated other than that accounted for the resistance of the components
    of the network.

    ACTIVE NETWORK

    A network containing a source of energy, or a sink of energy (i.e., a
    device for absorbing or dissipating energy other than that accounted for by
    the resistance of the components of the networks).  Merely dissipating the
    heat generated by a resistance will not cause the resistance to be an
    active element.

    WAVE PROPAGATION CHARACTERISTIC

    Effect of the impedance characteristic of the transmission device upon the
    wave energy propagated by the transmission device, (e.g., the effect of
    transmission device or network to change the amplitude, phase of or delay
    in transmission as a function of frequency).  Changes in the impedance
    parameters of the transmission device or in impedances associated therewith
    change the wave propagation characteristics of the transmission device.

    FREQUENCY RESPONSIVE NETWORK

    As the frequency of the applied energy changes over a band, the impedance
    of the network varies as a function of the frequency.  Frequency responsive
    networks and devices are designed to obtain desired characteristics where a
    band of frequencies or different frequencies are involved.

    CHARACTERISTIC IMPEDANCE

    The impedance which a long line or a long line element would have if it
    were infinitely long.  A long line which is terminated in its
    characteristic impedance is not resonant.

    BALANCED CIRCUIT

    A circuit having its conductors electrically symmetrical with respect to a
    reference potential plane (e.g., ground).  The potentials between the two
    sides and ground are equal and of opposite sign.  For example, a horizontal
    two wire line may be a balanced line.

    UNBALANCED CIRCUIT

    A circuit having its conductors electrically unsymmetrical with reference
    to a potential plane. For example, a concentric line is ordinarily
    unbalanced, the outer conductor being ordinarily connected to ground.

    RESONATOR

    Devices comprising conductive enclosures, cavities, or wave transmission
    line sections of the two terminal type, and having distributed inductance
    and capacitance, the line sections being terminated in other than the
    characteristic impedance of the line sections, the devices presenting
    resonant characteristics to the existing source of wave energy.

    AMPLITUDE RANGE

    The ratio of the highest amplitude to the lowest amplitude of an undulating
    wave.

    AMPLITUDE RANGE COMPRESSOR

    A non-linear device having an input and an output, the amplitude range of
    the output wave being less than the amplitude range of the input wave.

    AMPLITUDE RANGE EXPANDER

    A non-linear device having an input and an output, the amplitude range of
    the output wave being larger than the amplitude range of the input wave.

    COMPANDER

    An amplitude range compressor connected to an amplitude range expander with
    or without an intervening transmission line so that the amplitude range of
    the input wave is first decreased in the compressor and then increased in
    the expander.

    EQUALIZER

    Networks with attenuation or attenuation and phase distortion
    characteristics which vary over a frequency range for use in a wave
    transmission system for modifying the attenuation or attenuation and phase
    characteristics of the wave energy as a function of frequency.

    DELAY NETWORK

    Networks including significant structure for retarding wave energy a
    predetermined period of time over a range of frequencies.

    WAVE SHAPING

    Passive networks for modifying an electrical wave passing therethrough so
    that the amplitude-time characteristic of the output wave is different from
    that of the input wave and which have no function classified in other
    classes.

    DISSIPATING TERMINATIONS: (FOR LONG LINES)

    Networks specialized for use with and designed for connection to the end of
    a long line transmission line and including a resistive component for
    dissipating the wave energy propagated along the line and presenting an
    essentially resistive impedance to the line.

    ARTIFICIAL LINES

    Networks for simulating impedance characteristics of a smooth or loaded
    electrically long transmission line over a frequency range.

    COUPLING NETWORKS

    (a) Networks including significant reactive structure for effecting the
    transfer of oscillatory energy from one circuit to another circuit and
    having attenuation and/or delay characteristics over a frequency range for
    attenuating and/or delaying in a predetermined manner wave energy passing
    therethrough, and/or providing an impedance match between the network and
    at least one of the circuits; (b) smoothing type wave filters having shunt
    capacitance, or series inductance, or both usually designed to pass direct
    current and to reduce the effect of any undesired alternating or pulsating
    current, or to pass direct current and low frequency alternating current or
    pulsating current and to reduce the effect of any undesired higher
    frequency alternating or pulsating current.

    IMPEDANCE MATCHING NETWORK

    Coupling networks which include one or more impedance elements construed or
    proportioned to substantially eliminate the reflected wave energy between
    the network and at least one of the connected circuits caused by impedance
    differences.

    WAVE FILTER

    Coupling networks which include significant structure permitting free
    transmission of electric waves of a single frequency or band of frequencies
    (which may include zero frequency) while attenuating substantially electric
    waves having other frequencies, or attenuating substantially electric waves
    of a single frequency or band of frequencies (which may include zero
    frequency) while permitting free transmission of electric waves having
    other frequencies.

    ATTENUATOR

    Devices and networks consisting of one or more elements which exhibit only
    a positive resistance effect and which reduce the intensity of the energy
    passing through the device by dissipation, (a) the elements being
    proportioned to permit a change in their value to control the energy loss
    while maintaining substantially constant input and/or output impedance of
    the device, and/or (b) the elements being proportioned to permit the device
    to be inserted in the circuit to provide an energy loss without introducing
    any reflections in the circuit, and/or (c) the elements being combined with
    a long line or long line element, and/or (d) the device or network having
    an impedance equal to the impedance of a specified long line, and/or (e)
    the device or network is claimed as being particularly modified for use
    over a frequency band so that its characteristics are particularly related
    to frequency.

    HYBRID TYPE NETWORK

    A network for coupling one wave transmission line to two or more wave
    transmission lines in such manner that there is a conjugate relation
    between at least two of these coupled transmission lines to prevent any
    interchange of energy between the conjugately related lines.

    WAVE TRAP

    A resonant circuit designed to exclude the energy of one particular
    frequency.  It is analogous to a filter which is used to block one
    frequency and to pass other frequencies.  It usually has circuit components
    equivalent to a filter, but may be used only to exclude energy of a
    particular frequency from a circuit.

    PHASE SHIFT

    Used to designate the change in phase relation between voltage and current
    of the same wave energy, or between the voltages or the currents of
    different wave energy of the same frequency.

    PHASE DISTORTION CHARACTERISTIC

    Used to designate the change in displacement of different frequency
    components of a band of frequencies transmitted by a transmission device or
    network.  For example, certain frequencies of the band will be retarded or
    advanced a different amount than other frequencies.

    DELAY

    Includes phase distortion and also includes the retardation of a single
    pulse with respect to time.

    PHASE DISTORTION

    Results from different frequencies travelling with different velocities
    such that their relative arrival times differ from their relative starting
    times.

    II.     GENERAL STATEMENT OF THE CLASS SUBJECT MATTER:

    A.      This class includes electric wave transmission systems wherein
    electromagnetic wave energy is guided or constrained by a wave transmission
    device of the long line type other than loaded lines.

    B.      Included are passive wave transmission networks simulating the
    characteristics of a long line wave transmission systems or wave guides,
    such as artificial lines, delay networks, resonators, impedance matching
    networks, equalizers, wave filters and transmission line terminations.

    C.      Also included are passive coupling networks and terminating
    networks having either lumped or distributed electrical circuit parameters
    and having impedance characteristics peculiarly adapted for use with the
    wave transmission systems of "A" above, or which are designed to be
    frequency responsive, or which are designed to be effective over or within
    a range of frequencies, for example, impedance matching networks, hybrid
    networks, coupling networks, wave shaping networks, phase shifting
    networks, wave filters, equalizers and attenuators.

    D.      Smoothing type wave filters having shunt capacitance, or series
    inductance, or both, usually designed to pass direct current and to reduce
    the effect of any undesired alternating or pulsating current superimposed
    on the direct current, or to pass direct current and low frequency
    alternating current or pulsating current and to reduce the effect of an
    undesired higher frequency alternating or pulsating current.

    E.      Networks including a wave transmission device and means for
    decreasing the amplitude range of the signal applied to the transmission
    device as the signal increases in amplitude and means for increasing or
    restoring the amplitude range of the signal after the transmission over the
    transmission device (i.e., companders).

    F.      Passive networks for producing an output wave which is the time
    derivative or time integral of the input wave (i.e., differentiating or
    integrating systems).

    G.      Systems including active elements for producing across at least two
    of the system terminals a negative resistance, and/or an inductance, or
    capacitance which may be positive or negative.

    H.      Wave traps using long line elements.

    I.      Transmission systems including only one or more of the systems or
    networks defined in sections "A" to "H" above and such systems in
    combination with current or voltage magnitude control means of the passive
    type.  Systems including two or more of the networks or systems defined in
    sections "A" to "H" are classified as set forth in section IV below.

    K.      Components and elements not constituting a complete system or
    network limited by claimed structure to use in the systems or network of
    section "A", above and not otherwise classified, and also long line
    elements.

    III.    ACTIVE NETWORK:

    The systems classified in this class ordinarily contain no active elements,
    the only exceptions being the amplitude compression and expansion systems
    (companders) in subclass 14, and negative resistance and/or reactance
    networks of the active element type in subclasses 213+.

    IV.     SYSTEM AND NETWORKS INCLUDING TWO OR MORE OF THE NETWORKS AS
    DEFINED IN SECTIONS "A" TO "H" OF SECTION II, ABOVE:

    Such systems and networks which include two or more of the networks or
    systems so that each has its own function, and one is not merely part of
    the other, are classified in the first occurring subclass and
    cross-referenced to the later occurring subclass or subclasses.  For
    instance, a filter (subclasses 167+) combined with a wave shaper (subclass
    20) is classified in subclass 20 and cross-referenced to subclasses 167+.
    Where the combinations of the plural networks are useful as a third device
    having its own function provided for in the schedule, the patent is
    classified in the subclass providing for the third device.  For example,
    the combination of a resonator (subclasses 219+) and a long line
    (subclasses 236+) which results in an interference elimination device
    (subclass 12) would be classified in subclass 12 and cross-referenced to
    subclasses 219+ and 236+ for novel resonator or long line structure if
    necessary.  Where one of the networks is only a part of another network,
    the patent is classified on the basis of the combination and
    cross-referenced if necessary for the part.  For example, a filter
    (subclasses 167+) including a long line element with impedance matching
    (subclass 32) where the over-all function of the network is filtering and
    not impedance matching, is classified in subclasses 202+ and
    cross-referenced to subclasses 33+ if necessary.

    V.      NETWORKS AND SYSTEMS WITH SPECIFIC SOURCE OF INPUT ENERGY:

    This class does not provide for the subject matter of the class (Sections A
    to K of II above) in combination with a specific source of electromagnetic
    wave energy, such as a microphone, which limits the system to use with a
    particular art even though the source is recited by name only.  However,
    this class will take the systems and networks of the class in combination
    with a source of wave energy which is recited by its characteristics; for
    example, as being composed of a band of frequencies with only odd
    harmonics, or where the source is recited only as a general class of wave
    energy generators, such as an oscillator, etc., where the specific
    characteristics and details of the source are recited, such as specific
    oscillator system details, the system or network is classified with the
    specific source.

    VI.     NETWORKS AND SYSTEMS WITH SPECIFIC LOADS IN THE OUTPUT CIRCUIT:

    This class does not provide for the subject matter of the class (Sections A
    to K of II, above) in combination with a specific load device supplied with
    energy by the system or network, even though the load device is recited by
    name only (as a motor, loudspeaker, piezoelectric crystal, etc.). Such
    systems and networks are classified with the art which provides for the
    systems of supply for the specific load device.

    VII.    SYSTEMS AND NETWORKS AND COMPONENTS IN OTHER CLASSES GENERIC TO THE
    SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS CLASS.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, appropriate subclasses for conduits
    (including wave guides) and conduit and pipe accessories disclosed for
    electrical use even though the conduit is made of or lined with metal or
    insulating material unless there is claimed some structure or feature which
    limits the same to electrical use in addition to mere pipe or conduit
    structure.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, appropriate subclasses for
    housings, conductor and conduit structure and for conductor and conduit
    joint and end structure which include electrical features and which are not
    defined as having long line characteristics, and subclasses 137+ for
    insulator structures. See subclasses 32+ for conductor arrangements and
    structures for preventing or reducing the detrimental effects due to either
    the self-inductance of a single conductor or mutual inductance between
    plural conductors, subclasses 27 and 113+ for parallel or twisted conductor
    structure, subclasses 28+ and 102+ for coaxial and shielded cable
    structure, subclasses 37+ for underground conductor structure, subclasses
    38, 43, 49, and 71+ for branched electrical conductor structure, and
    subclasses 40+ for overhead conductor structure.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses
    for electric switches of general utility and not limited by claimed
    structure to use with long lines.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, for
    miscellaneous transmission or interconnection systems not otherwise
    classified.  For example, Class 307 provides for subject matter similar to
    that classified in Class 323 where there are plural input circuits and/or
    plural output circuits.  Class 307 also provides for some systems which
    include one or more long line elements where the system includes an active
    element so that the system is excluded from Class 333.  See the pulse
    forming and wave shaping in subclasses 106+ for example.  Class 307 is also
    the miscellaneous class for anti-inductive systems (see subclasses 89+).

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, provides for
    miscellaneous transformer systems in subclass 355 and for miscellaneous
    impedance systems in subclass 364, where the system or network has only a
    single input and a single output. Class 323 also provides for the
    miscellaneous systems for controlling the magnitude of the current and/or
    the voltage and/or for controlling the phase in systems and networks having
    only a single input and a single output circuit where the same current is
    in the output as is in the input.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous nonlinear circuits which
    may utilize an active device such as a transistor or electron tube.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for transformers and
    inductors which are not designed to be frequency responsive (e.g., not
    having points of resonance within the range of frequencies over which the
    device is designed to operate).

    338,    Electrical Resistors, appropriate subclasses, for fixed and
    variable electric resistors, per se.  See (2) Note under Class 333,
    subclass 22, for the distinction between the resistors in Class 338 and the
    dissipating terminals for long lines.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 150+ for high temperature (Tc  30 K) superconducting devices,
    and particularly subclasses 210+ for transmission line and networks,
    electrical energy storage devices, magnetic coils, wires, cable, etc.

    VIII.   WAVE TRANSMISSION LINE AND NET
            WORKS ANALOGOUS TO THOSE IN
            THIS CLASS, BUT WHICH ARE CLASSI
            FIED ELSEWHERE.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 45 provides for loaded lines and all systems
    and networks analogous to the systems or networks in this class (333) which
    include loaded lines.  Subclasses 69+ includes patents relating to line
    clearing, circuit maintenance and anti-inductive lines analogous to similar
    systems in subclass 12 of Class 333.

    334,    Tuners, provides for tuners which are closely analogous to the wave
    filters in this class.  The tuners usually have inductance and capacitance
    elements of the lumped type together with means to vary either the
    inductance or capacitance element or both in order to change the mean
    resonant frequency of the tuner.  The tuners in Class 334 may include one
    or more long line elements in addition to a lumped inductor or capacitor;
    or the tuner may consist of a distributed parameter type tuning unit which
    is adjusted in discrete, distinct steps; or where two or more distributed
    parameter type tuning units are ganged together either mechanically and/or
    electrically so as to have their mean resonant frequency adjusted in
    unison.  Where only the band width of a filter is varied without varying
    the mean resonant frequency, classification is in this class (333).

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclass 398 includes loaded line
    systems and anti-inductive systems analogous to the subject matter of this
    class (333).

    455,    Telecommunications, appropriate subclasses for filters analogous to
    those in this class and forming an element of radio communication systems.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 150+ for high temperature (Tc  30 K) superconducting devices,
    and particularly subclasses 210+ for transmission line and networks,
    electrical energy storage devices, magnetic coils, wires, cable, etc.

    IX.     TESTING AND MEASURING SYSTEMS FOR WAVE TRANSMISSION LINES AND
    NETWORKS.

    This class (333) will take systems for determining the electrical wave
    propagation characteristics of transmission lines and networks falling
    within the class definition, provided that significant details of the
    transmission line or network are claimed.  That is, merely claiming the
    line or network by name only (e.g., as a transmission line, coupling
    network or resonator) or characterizing it as a four terminal or two
    terminal impedance network would not be sufficient basis for classification
    in this class, classification would then be in one of the classes indicated
    below, depending on the nature of the test or measurement.

    LONG TELEPHONE LINES:

    Systems and apparatus for testing long telephone lines to determine
    impedance irregularities, unbalance in loaded lines, impedance versus
    frequency characteristics, impedance versus delay characteristics, or other
    long telephone line characteristics are classified in Class 379, Telephonic
    Communications, subclasses 22+.

    POWER, VOLTAGE AND/OR CURRENT DETERMINATION IN WAVE TRANSMISSION LINES OR
    NETWORKS:

    Apparatus for measuring the voltage or current, or the voltage or current
    standing wave ratio, or power dissipation in wave transmission lines are
    classified in Class 324, Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses
    72, 95, 140+, and  612+.

    IMPEDANCE CHARACTERISTIC OF NETWORKS OR NETWORK ELEMENTS:

    Systems for determining the inductance, capacitance or resistance, or any
    of these properties over a range of frequencies, of four-terminal or
    two-terminal impedance networks in general are classified in Class 324,
    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 600+.  Phase shift or phase
    relations between voltages or currents or voltage and current in electrical
    systems in general are classified in Class 324, Electricity:  Measuring and
    Testing, subclasses 76.77+.

    WAVE FREQUENCY DETERMINATION SYSTEMS:
    Having means giving a direct quantitative indication of the frequency of
    electrical currents are classified in Class 324, Electricity:  Measuring
    and Testing, subclasses 76.12+ and 76.39+.  Frequency meters which measure
    frequency by utilizing phase shift networks are classified in Class 324,
    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 76.52+.



    WAVE METERS:

    For determining the wave length of electrical waves are classified in Class
    250, Radiant Energy, subclass 250 and in Class 324, Electricity:  Measuring
    and Testing, subclasses 76.39+, especially subclasses 76.41+ and 76.51.

    ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION FIELD STRENGTH MEASUREMENT:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 76.11+.

    WAVE ANALYZING SYSTEMS:

    Devices for determining the individual frequency components of a complex
    electric wave, and such devices which also determine the amplitude or
    relative phase positions of the different frequency components of the
    complex wave are classified in Class 324, Electricity:  Measuring and
    Testing, subclasses 76.12+. Speech wave analyzing devices are classified in
    Class 704, Data Processing:  Speech Signal Processing, Linguistics,
    Language Translation, and Audio Compression/Decompression, subclasses 200+.

    X.      CONDUCTOR STRUCTURE, ARRANGEMENTS AND COMPONENTS

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, provides for conduit and pipe structure
    and accessories.  See section VII above.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, provides for conductor
    structure, insulator structure and transmission accessories (e.g., boxes,
    shields, housing).

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 46 provides for loading coils for use with
    loaded lines.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, provides for electric
    switches (see section VII above).

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 661-664.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 147+
    is the miscellaneous subclass for conductor arrangements or structure. (See
    section VII above).

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 355
    provides for the miscellaneous structural arrangement of a transformer and
    other electrical devices which are connected together, and subclass 364
    provides for the miscellaneous structural arrangements of impedance
    elements, which are connected together to form a network.

    334,    Tuners, provides for tuners, per se. (See section VIII above).

    336,    Inductor Devices, provided for inductors and transformers.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, provides for fixed and variable resistors.
    (See section VII above).

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 271+ for
    capacitors, subclasses 600+ for miscellaneous arrangements for mounting two
    or more different circuit elements which are not in circuit arrangement
    (including printed circuits), and subclasses 503+ for electrolytic
    capacitors.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 443+ provides for telephone
    induction coils.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, provides for miscellaneous connector
    structure (see subclasses 55+ for preformed or printed circuit arrangements
    involving only conductors and connector structure).

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 334+ for miscellaneous circuitry and
    apparatus which are specialized to use with radio apparatus.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 150+ for high temperature (Tc  30 K) superconducting devices,
    and particularly subclasses 210+ for transmission line and networks,
    electrical energy storage devices, magnetic coils, wires, cable, etc.


    XI.     SYSTEMS UTILIZING WAVE TRANSMISSION LINES AND NETWORKS:

    84,     Music, subclasses 661, 699 or 736 for electrical tone generating
    and music instruments with electric translating devices including coupling
    networks or wave filters.

    178,    Telegraphy, for telegraph systems utilizing wave transmission lines
    and networks, especially subclass 43, for space induction radiation
    systems, subclasses 45+ for loaded transmission line systems; subclass 49
    for systems wherein currents (signaling or otherwise) and telegraph signal
    currents are superposed on the same transmission path, subclass 63 for
    cable systems including means for correcting for telegraph signal
    distortion caused by cable capacitance; subclass 64 for wave transmission
    line systems including mutual induction type coupling networks or
    transformers; subclasses 66.1+ for  alternating current systems, other than
    harmonic or vibrating reed systems (for which see subclass 47); subclasses
    66.1+ for pulsating current systems; and subclass 69 for telegraph systems
    wherein wave transmission networks are utilized to correct for the
    deleterious effects of line charges and surges which may cause signal
    distortion.

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, subclasses 2+ for
    electrical transmission line systems and coupling means for transmitting
    electric current between relatively movable source and load and subclass 10
    for systems wherein the transmission of energy between the relatively
    movable source and load is effected through an induction field coupling
    means.

    219,    Electric Heating, wherein wave transmission lines or coupling
    networks are employed in electrical heating systems.  Note subclasses 600+
    for inductive heating, subclasses 678+ for microwave heating, and
    subclasses 764+ for capacitive dielectric heating, subclasses 50+,
    especially subclasses 108+ and 130.1+ for metal heating systems, and
    subclasses 482+ for electrical heating systems in general.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, for wave transmission networks that
    may be employed in railway electric signaling and control, especially
    subclasses 7+ for train telegraphy and telephony used for train
    dispatching, subclass 30 for automatic block signal systems controlled by
    hertzian waves, subclass 61 for automatic block signal systems wherein the
    signal and propulsion currents are superimposed, subclass 63 for cab signal
    or train control systems wherein signals or control currents are
    transferred between the train and the transmission line by induction and
    subclasses 72, 81+ for systems wherein the signaling energy is derived from
    the propulsion current.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, is the generic
    place for electrical energy distributing and/or controlling and/or
    generating systems for which provision is not made in any other electrical
    system class.  By way of example provision is made for the following:



            Subclasses 1+ for systems with super- imposed unlike currents,
    subclasses 11+ for plural load systems, subclasses 43+ for plural supply
    circuits or sources, subclasses 401+ for semi-conductor (i.e., transistor)
    electric or transductor system, subclasses 89+ for anti-induction or
    coupling to other systems, subclasses 326+ for self protective, safety or
    limit control systems, subclasses 98+ for combined impedance and switch
    systems, subclass 103 for line drop compensation, subclass 104 for
    electromagnet or highly inductive systems, subclass 105 for harmonic
    filtering or neutralizing systems, subclasses 106+ for wave form, wave
    shaping or pulse producing systems, subclasses 112+ for switching systems,
    subclasses 147+ for conductor arrangements or structure and subclasses 149+
    for miscellaneous systems.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, particularly
    subclasses 4+ for cathode-ray tubes having long line elements or resonators
    structurally combined therewith, subclass 39 for a space discharge device
    structurally combined with wave guide, coaxial cable or resonant parallel
    wire transmission line, and subclass 40 for space discharge devices with an
    electrode formed as an inductive impedance (e.g., magnetron).

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, for electrical testing systems
    utilizing wave transmission networks or for measuring impedance
    characteristics of electrical networks in general, subclasses 72, 95, 140+,
    and 612+ for electric power, current and/or voltage measuring systems for
    systems employing wave transmission lines or networks for determining
    reflected power or standing wave amplitude ratios and subclasses 76.77+ for
    electric phase angle measuring systems including electric wave transmission
    lines or networks used for time delay or coupling purposes.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous circuits which may
    incorporate a transmission line device.

    329,    Demodulators, subclasses 322 and 354+ for a demodulator with
    distributed electrical parameters.

    330,    Amplifiers, appropriate subclasses, for one way amplifiers
    utilizing wave transmission networks or filters for input, output, or
    interstage coupling, particularly subclasses 53+, 116, 117, 120+, 122,
    157+, 185+, and 192+.

    331,    Oscillators, for oscillation generators utilizing wave transmission
    lines and networks as elements thereof, particularly subclasses 5, 6+, 9,
    79+, 86+, 93, and 96+ for oscillator systems employing distributed
    parameter networks or resonators, subclasses 110 and 138+ for oscillators
    employing bridge networks, subclasses 86+, 115, 126+, and 132+ for
    oscillators of the negative resistance type, subclass 135+ for oscillators
    employing phase shift networks, subclasses 74+ for oscillators combined
    with a particular output coupling network and subclasses 73, 116, 139, and
    154+ for oscillators employing an electromechanical resonator.

    332,    Modulators, for modulation systems utilizing wave coupling
    networks, long line sections or negative impedance devices as elements
    thereof, particularly subclasses 129+ and 138+ under frequency modulators
    and subclasses 163+, 175 and 176+ under amplitude modulators.

    334,    Tuners, appropriate subclasses for tuned networks for use in wave
    energy apparatus and comprising inductance and capacitance elements in
    circuit arrangement to form a resonant circuit and in which structure is
    provided for adjusting one or both of these elements for changing the mean
    resonant frequency of the circuit.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, for electrical communication systems
    in general having wave transmission lines and networks as elements thereof,
    particularly subclasses 825.37+ for party line type selective systems,
    subclasses 825.57+ for pulse responsive selective systems, subclass 825.70
    for phase responsive selective systems, subclasses 825.71+ for frequency
    responsive selective systems, subclasses 825.77+ for amplitude responsive
    systems, subclasses 870.01+ continuously variable indication systems (e.g.,
    telemetering), subclasses 286+ for miscellaneous signaling systems, and
    subclasses 310.01+ for composite signaling systems (e.g., signal over power
    line).

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave, for radio wave energy systems which
    employ wave transmission lines and networks as elements thereof, subclasses
    5+ for reflected or returned wave systems, (e.g., object detection radar),
    subclasses 350+ for directive systems (including polarization), subclasses
    700+ for antennas involving wave transmission lines and networks including
    long line sections, usually resonant, designed to act as space radiators or
    collectors of electromagnetic waves.  See (11) Note under subclass 700 of
    Class 343 for classification lines between coupling networks and antennas
    with such coupling networks.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, for magnetic
    recorders or reproducers having wave transmission networks as elements
    thereof.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 107+ for
    wave transmission networks for use in surge suppression circuits, and
    subclasses 117+ for lightning arresters.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, particularly subclasses 2+, 9+
    and 36 for phase conversion systems (e.g., m-phase to n-phase) combined
    with other types of conversion, subclasses 39+ for current conversion
    systems combined with means to eliminate undesired frequency components
    (e.g., filter), and subclasses 148+ for phase conversion systems, per se.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, appropriate
    subclasses, particularly subclass 802 for the simulation of electrical
    phenomenon; subclass 824 for correlation or convolution with tapped delay
    line, and subclass 825 for electrical analog filtering devices.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclass for
    read/write static storage systems, particularly subclass 194, 198, and 223
    which include delay, transmission, and bridge means for a read/write
    circuit.

    367,    Communication, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 197+ for selective systems which are sound responsive.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for multiplexing
    systems, particularly subclass 272 for a sextuplex system, subclasses 273+
    for a quadruplex system, subclasses 276+ for a duplex system, and subclass
    297 for a diplex system.

    379,    Telephony, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 90+ for
    composite systems, employing wave transmission networks wherein voice
    signal systems are combined with other electrical systems, such as
    telegraph, power or lighting systems, (Note:  this class, Class 333,
    subclasses 1+ provides for plural channel systems wherein passive means,
    such as wave filters, are employed to separate plural messages or signals);
    subclass 78 for wave transmission networks used to compensate for or
    prevent detrimental effects on telephone systems of internal or external
    induction or radiation fields; subclass 79 for such systems under subclass
    78, utilizing capacitive reactance for compensation and subclass 80, under
    subclass 78, wherein the compensation means comprises impedance coils;
    subclass 81, for telephone substation circuits employing wave coupling
    networks of the conjugate or Whetstone bridge type and/or balancing
    networks; subclass 82 for space induction radiation systems having wave
    transmission networks as elements thereof, subclasses 170+ for telephone
    repeaters (i.e., two-way amplifiers) utilizing hybrid networks and line
    balancing networks; subclasses 172+ for coupling devices of the induction
    coil type associated with telephone instruments; subclass 174 for
    anti-induction devices including wave transmission networks for preventing
    the undesirable effects of induction in telephone systems or instruments,
    other than those anti-induction devices in subscribers circuits, for which
    see subclasses 78+, 81; and subclass 175 for testing devices utilizing wave
    transmission networks for telephone systems or devices, not particularly
    subclasses 175.3+ under subclass 175 for testing long telephone lines and
    associated apparatus.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 39+ provide for modulated carrier
    wave systems of general application; subclasses 91+ provide for
    transmitters employing wave transmission lines, wave guides and networks
    for coupling the transmitter to an antenna; subclasses 130+ for radio
    receiver coupling and selecting networks, see particularly subclasses 132+,
    3.1+ and 272+ for plural channel systems; subclasses 280+ for means for
    coupling antennas to radio receivers; subclasses 150+ for frequency
    selection networks; subclass 307 for filter means for noise elimination;
    and subclasses 338+ for miscellaneous coupling means.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 150+ for high temperature (Tc  30 K) superconducting devices,
    and particularly subclasses 210+ for transmission line and networks,
    electrical energy storage devices, magnetic coils, wires, cable, etc.



    XII.    INDEX TO CLASSES REFERRED TO IN PREVIOUS SECTIONS:

                                    Section No.

    84,     Music
    subs.   1.01+, electrical
    musical instruments     XI

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits
    wave guides     VII, X

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors
    and Insulators conductors
    and conduits    VII, X
    subs. 27 and 113, parallel
    and twisted conductors  VII
    subs. 28+ and 102+,
    coaxial and shielded    VII
    subs. 32+, anti-inductive       VII
    subs. 37+, underground
    conductor structure     VII
    subs. 38, 43, 49, 71+,
    branched conductors     VII
    subs. 40+, overhead
    conductors      VII
    subs. 137+, insulators  VII

    178,    Telegraphy
    sub. 43, space induction        XI
    sub. 45, loaded lines   VIII, XI
    sub. 46, loading coils  X
    sub. 47, harmonic or reed
    multiplex               XI
    sub. 49, composite tele-
    graph systems   XI
    sub. 63, cable telegraphy       XI
    sub. 64, induction coil
    telegraphy      XI
    subs. 66+, A. C. tele-
    graphy          VI
    sub. 68, pulsating current
    telegraphy      XI
    subs. 69+, anti-inductive       VIII, XI

    181,    Acoustics
    sub. .5, speech wave
    analysis                IX

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission
    to Vehicles
    subs. 2+, transmitting power
    to moving object        XI
    sub. 10, transmitting power
    by space induction      VI

    200,    Electricity: Circuit
    Makers and Breakers
    electric switches       VII, X

    219,    Electric Heating
    subs. 50+, for metal
    heating         XI
    subs. 108+, for metal
    heating         XI
    subs. 130.1+, for metal
    heating         XI
    subs. 482+, electric
    heating systems XI
    subs. 600+, for inductive heating       XI      subs. 678+, for microwave
    heating       XI      subs. 764+, for capacitive dielectric heating     XI

    246,    Railway Switches
    and Signals
    sub. 7, train telegraphy
    or telephony    XI
    sub. 30, block signaling        XI
    sub. 61, block signaling        XI
    sub. 63, cab signal or
    train control   XI
    sub. 72, cab signal or
    train control   XI
    sub. 81, block signaling        XI

    250,    Radiant Energy
    sub. 250 frequency meter        IX

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g.,
    Transistors, Solid-State Diodes)        X.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or
    Interconnection Systems
    miscellaneous systems   VII, XI
    subs. 1+, superimposed
    current systems XI
    subs. 11+, plural load
    systems         XI
    subs. 400 and 401+
    transistor or
    electret                XI
    subs. 43+, plural input
    circuit         XI
    subs. 89+, anti-inductive       VII, XI
    subs. 92+, safety systems       XI
    subs. 98+, impedance and
    switch systems  XI
    sub. 103, line drop com-
    pensation               XI
    sub. 104, inductive systems     XI
    sub. 105, harmonic
    neutralizing    XI
    subs. 106+, systems with
    long line elements      VII, XI
    subs. 112+, switching
    systems         XI
    sub. 147, conductor
    arrangements    X,XI
    subs. 149+, miscellaneous
    systems         XI

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge
    Devices:  Systems
    subs. 4+, combined cathode
    ray tube and long line
    element         XI
    sub. 39, combined elec-
    tronic tube and long
    line                    XI
    sub. 40, electronic tube
    with inductor electrode XI

    323,    Electricity:  Power
    Supply or Regulation
    Systems
    subs. 1+, current or voltage
    regulation      VII
    subs. 44+, transformer
    systems         VII,X
    subs. 63+, impedance
    systems         VII,X
    subs. 101+, phase regu-
    lation          VII

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring
    and     Testing
    subs. 600+, impedance
    measuring       IX
    subs. 612+, measuring   IX, XI
    sub. 72, measuring      IX, XI
    subs. 76.12+, frequency
    measuring       IX
    subs. 76.12+, wave analysis     IX
    subs. 76.39+, wave length
    measuring       IX
    subs. 76.52+, frequency
    measuring       Xl
    subs. 76.77+, phase
    measuring       IX, XI
    sub. 95, measuring      IX, XI
    subs. 140+, measuring   IX, XI

    327,    Miscellaneous Active
    Electrical Nonlinear
    Devices, Circuits,
    and Systems     X,XI

    329,    Demodulators,
    subs. 322  and 354+, with
    distributed electrical
    parameters      XI

    330,    Amplifiers,
    subs. 53+, with distributed
    parameter coupling
    means           XI
    sub. 116, with balanced-to-
    unbalanced coupling     XI
    sub. 117, with unbalanced-
    to-balanced coupling    XI
    subs. 120+, interstage
    coupling for push pull
    amplifiers              XI
    sub. 122, input and output
    coupling for push pull
    amplifiers              XI
    subs. 157+, interstage
    coupling                XI
    subs. 185+, input networks      XI
    subs. 192+, output networks     XI

    331,    Oscillators
    subs. 5, 6+, 9, 79+, 86+,
    93, 94+, oscillators
    with distributed para-
    meter elements  XI
    subs. 73, 116, 139, 154+,
    oscillators with
    electromechanical
    resonator               XI
    subs. 74+, oscillator with
    particular output
    coupling network        XI
    subs. 86+, 115, 126+,
    132+,  oscillators with
    negative resistance
    elements                XI
    subs. 110 and 138+,
    oscillators with bridge
    networks                XI
    subs. 135+, oscillators
    with phase shift
    networks                XI

    332,    Modulators
    sub. 5, magnetron type
    modulator       XI
    sub. 7, Klystron type
    modulator       XI
    sub. 26, frequency modu-
    lator with electro-
    mechanical elements     XI
    sub. 28, phase or frequency
    modulators using
    reactance tubes XI

    334,    Tuners          VIII,X,XI

    336,    Inductor Devices,
    inductors and transformers      VII, X

    338,    Electrical Resistors    VII, X

    340,    Communications:  Electrical
    sub. 148, sound responsive                  XI
    subs. 150+, selective
    telemetering    XI
    subs. 825.37+, party
    line type               XI
    subs. 825.57+, pulse
    responsive selective    XI
    subs. 167+, pulse type
    selective               XI
    subs. 825.70+, phase
    responsive selective    XI
    subs. 825.71+, frequency
    responsive selective    XI
    subs. 825.77+, amplitude
    responsive selective    XI
    subs. 870.01+, tele-
    metering                XI
    subs. 286+, miscellaneous
    signaling systems       XI
    sub. 310, composite signal-
    ing systems     XI

    343,    Communications:
    Radio Wave
    subs. 5+, radar XI
    subs. 350+, directive
    radio           XI
    subs. 700+, antennas    XI

    361,    Electricity: Electrical
    Systems and Devices
    subs. 107+, for surge
    suppressing     XI
    subs. 117+, for lightning
    arresters               XI
    subs. 271+, for capacitors      X
    subs. 600+, for supports
    for plural circuit
    elements                X
    subs. 503+, for electro-
    lytic capacitors        X

    363,    Electric Power
    Conversion Systems
    subs. 2+, 9+ and 36,
    phase conversion
    combined                XI
    subs. 39+, converter
    with filter              XI
    subs. 148+, phase con-
    version         XI

    364,    Electrical Computers and
    Data Processing Systems,
    sub. 802, simulation of
    electrical phenomenon   XI
    sub. 824, delay lines   XI
    sub. 825, analog filtering      XI

    370,    Multiplex Communications,
    appropriate subclasses
    for multiplex systems   XI

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal
    Processing,Systems, and
    Devices
    subs. 2+, composite tele-
    phony           XI
    subs. 36+ and 41+ speech
    wave analysis   IX
    subs. 78+, anti-inductive
    telephone system        VIII,XI
    sub. 79, anti-inductive
    telephone systems       XI
    sub. 80, anti-inductive
    telephone system        XI
    sub. 81, telephone sub-
    station circuits        XI
    sub. 82, space induction
    telephony               XI
    subs. 170+, two way
    repeaters               XI
    subs. 172+, induction
    coils                   X, XI
    sub. 174, telephone anti-
    induction               XI
    sub. 175, telephone line
    testing         XI
    sub. 175.3, testing tele-
    phone lines     IX, XI

    439,    Electrical Connectors
    electrical connectors   X

    455,    Telecommunications
    subs. 130+ radio receiver
    coupling and selecting
    networks                XI
    subs. 132+, 3.1+, and 272+
    plural channel systems  XI
    subs. 280+, antenna
    coupling networks       XI
    subs. 150+, frequency
    selection networks      XI
    subs. 307, filter means
    for noise elimination   XI
    subs. 388+, miscellaneous
    coupling means  XI
    subs. 334+, miscellaneous
    radio apparatus X

    505,    Superconductor Technology:      VII,VIII,
    Apparatus, Material, Process     X, XI



CLS 333/1
TXT Systems under the class definition comprising (a) two or more wave
    transmission lines or networks, each line or network being operable to
    separately propagate wave energy or (b) means for effecting an interchange
    of wave energy from one transmission line to two or more transmission lines
    or vice versa, or having a coupling network for effecting an interchange of
    wave energy from a single input to plural outputs or vice versa, together
    with means for controlling or facilitating the interchange of energy.

    (1)     Note.  The term "network" as used above denotes any of the systems
    defined in section II of the class definition.

    (2)     Note.  Included in (a) above are systems having two distinct
    transmission lines, each line being operable to transmit wave energy
    electrically distinct from that propagated by another of the transmission
    lines, and also lines which are distinct but not necessarily simultaneously
    usable to transmit electrical wave energy (e.g. one line may be used to
    substitute for another as in subclass 3).  The two or more transmission
    lines may have a common conductor, see especially subclasses 4+ where a
    balanced circuit is involved.

    (3)     Note.  Included are lines which transmit energy from a first point
    to a second spaced point and provided with means to transmit a portion of
    the energy to a second line (e.g. a tapped line).

    (4)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses do not provide for systems
    where a signal is divided among two transmission lines or networks and then
    recombined on a single line or to provide a single output.  Such systems
    and networks are found in subclasses 12 et seq.  If the system claimed does
    not extend to the recombining part of the line or network, the patent is
    classified in this or the indented subclasses.

    (5)     Note.  A system having a single transmission line and pilot line to
    sense only ambient conditions (temperature, humidity) is not classified as
    a plural channel system. See subclass 15 for this subject matter.  A system
    with a single communication transmission line and also a pilot line which
    is a long line within the class definition and which transmits wave energy
    is classified in this or indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     see (5) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, appropriate subclasses for
    electrical conductor structure adapted for use in plural channel systems
    other than loaded lines or transmission lines defined as having long line
    characteristics.

    178,    Telegraphy, appropriate subclasses for plural channel systems
    involving telegraphy, note subclass 45 for plural channel systems using a
    loaded line.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, particularly
    subclasses 11+, 43+, 113+, and 147+ for miscellaneous electrical
    distribution systems involving plural channels.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 295 for plural channel transistor amplifiers,
    subclass 69 for sum and difference amplifiers, subclasses 73 and 74 for
    series arranged amplifiers with plural outputs and plural inputs,
    respectively, subclass 84 for plural channel amplifiers having feedback,
    subclasses 124+ for plural channel amplifiers generally, subclasses 147 and
    148 for amplifiers having plural inputs and plural outputs, respectively.
    See especially, subclasses 54 and 286+ for "distributed amplifiers".

    334,    Tuners, appropriate subclasses for tuners, per se.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, particularly subclasses 775+, 865+, 869+,
    874+, 877+, 883, and 884+ for  various types of electrical connections and
    terminals.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, appropriate subclasses for
    miscellaneous electrical communications, including signalling systems,
    involving plural channels. Note particularly subclasses 870.11+, and
    870.41, and 870.27 for continuously variable indication communication
    systems involving plural transmitters, plural receivers, and plural
    circuits respectively.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave, particularly subclass 771 for plural
    slot type antennas with wave guide coupling; subclasses 814 and 816 for
    plural balanced doublet type antennas with a coupling network; subclass 852
    for antennas with a plural path coupling network with impedance matching;
    subclasses 853+ for plural antennas with a coupling network; and subclass
    858 for antennas coupled to plural leadins.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclass 200 for a phantom circuit, and
    subclass 308 for a resonant transfer technique used in the multiplex
    system.


    379,    Telephonic Communications, appropriate subclasses for plural
    channel systems involving telephony, see subclasses 338+ for circuits
    having a two-way repeater (amplifiers) therein.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 39+ for plural channel modulated
    carrier wave systems; subclasses 91+ for transmitters; subclasses 130+ for
    plural channel systems in radio receivers; see particularly subclasses 132+
    for plural separate receivers; subclasses 3.1+ for distribution systems;
    and subclasses 272+ for plural separate collecting means.


CLS 333/1.1
TXT Systems under subclass 1 which include gyromagnetic elements for effecting
    a nonreciprocal interchange of electrical energy among the transmission
    lines or through the coupling network.

    (1)     Note.  The term "gyromagnetic" as applied to material designates
    magnetically polarized material (e.g., ferrites, garnets, ionized gases)
    having unpaired spin systems which exhibit significant precessional motion
    in an orthogonal R.F. field.  The term "nonreciprocal" designates a
    particular interchange of electrical energy that does not satisfy the
    reciprocity theorem.  For example, a nonreciprocal interchange exists when
    the electrical output at a first set of terminals of a network produced by
    an input at a second set of terminals of the network does not equal the
    output at the second set of terminals produced by the same input applied at
    the first set of terminals.  The term "circulator" (to which most of the
    patents in this subclass pertain) designates a device with at least three
    terminals wherein power entering at terminal 1 exists at terminal 2 only,
    power entering at terminal 2 exists at terminal 3 only, and power entering
    at terminal 3 exists at terminal 1 only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24.1,   24.2 and 24.3, for single channel coupling networks including
    gyromagnetic material for effecting a nonreciprocal transfer of electrical
    energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 4, 4.8 and 63 for amplifiers using
    gyromagnetic elements.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 318+, for mixers using gyromagnetic
    elements.


CLS 333/2
TXT Plural channel systems under subclass 1 having means to sense a condition
    in the system and to control the operation of the system in accordance with
    the condition so sensed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17+,    and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto for single
    channel automatically controlled systems and networks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, particularly
    subclasses 39, 86+, 116+, and 326+ for miscellaneous plural channel
    electrical transmission or interconnection systems which involve automatic
    control.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    234-303 for condition sensing regulators.


CLS 333/3
TXT Systems under subclass 2 comprising at least one normally operative wave
    transmission line and a spare transmission line, and automatically operable
    means associated with the transmission lines for using the spare
    transmission line in place of the normally operative transmission line upon
    failure of the normally operative line.

    (1)     Note.  Systems for automatically substituting a particular device
    or system for a normally operative device or system are in general
    classified with the particular device or system. For example, systems for
    substituting repeaters in a two way repeater system are classified in Class
    379, Telephonic Communications, subclasses 338+ and systems for
    substituting for defective amplifier system or a part of an amplifier
    system (such as a vacuum tube) are classified with the amplifier systems in
    Class 330, Amplifiers, subclasses 84 and 124+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for resonator type breakdown discharge systems which control the
    transmission over a line.

    100+,   for branched circuits with nonautomatic transmission line switching.

    262+,   for transmission line elements, which may include switching devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, particularly
    subclasses 23, 39, 64+, and 80+ for miscellaneous electrical systems of
    distribution which involve automatic substitution of electrical load
    circuits or supply circuits.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 49 for plural oscillator systems wherein one
    oscillator may be substituted for another.


CLS 333/4
TXT Systems under subclass 1 wherein at least one of the transmission lines is
    a balanced line, or having a network under subclass 1 which is especially
    designed for connection to at least one balanced circuit.

    (1)     Note.  A balanced line or circuit is a line or circuit having its
    conductors electrically symmetrical with respect to a reference potential
    plane (e.g. ground).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for transmission line inductive or radiation interference reduction
    systems, involving a balanced transmission circuit.

    25+,    for coupling networks for coupling a single channel balanced
    circuit to an unbalanced circuit.

    236+,   for single transmission lines of the long line type, which may be
    balanced.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, particularly subclasses
    32+, 37+, 40+, and 68.1+ for electrical conductor structure of the
    electrically balanced type other than loaded lines or transmission lines
    defined as having long line characteristics.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, particularly
    subclasses 12+, 42 or 147+ for miscellaneous electrical transmission or
    interconnecting systems which include balanced circuits.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave, subclasses 814 and 816 for plural
    balanced doublet antennas with coupling networks; and subclass 865 for a
    balanced antenna with a balanced coupling network.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, particularly subclasses 2+, 9+,
    36, and 148+ for balanced phase conversion systems for converting
    electrical energy from one number of phases to a different number of phases
    (e.g., single phase to polyphase).

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 202 for
    complementing or balancing signals used in a read/write circuit.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclass 200 for a phantom circuit used
    in the multiplex system, and subclasses 278 and 282+ for a duplex system
    which may include a balance circuit.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, for telephone systems which involve
    balanced transmission lines.


CLS 333/5
TXT Systems under subclass 4 having a plurality of balanced transmission lines
    or having a network which is designed for connection to a plurality of
    balanced circuits.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25+,    for coupling networks for coupling a single channel balanced
    circuit to an unbalanced circuit.


CLS 333/12
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including a transmission line
    producing inductive or radiation interference or subject to such
    interference from an external source and means such as one or more filters,
    screens or compensating circuits, disposed along an appreciable length of
    the line for substantially reducing this interference.

    (1)     Note.  Subclass 12 does not include mere echo or anti-singing
    systems. Such systems in a single channel system where classified in this
    class are classified with the first occurring (lowest numbered) subclass
    providing for any of the components used in the system.  For
    echo-suppressing and/or anti-singing systems in plural channel systems, see
    subclasses 406+ of Class 379, Telephonic Communications.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for plural channel systems, which are balanced to prevent undesired
    radiation effects.

    24+,    for networks which may be used to reduce undesired currents in a
    transmission line, and particularly subclasses 138+ for balanced circuits
    coupled to unbalanced circuits and subclasses 165+ for wave filters and for
    transmission lines connected to filters which block such undesired currents.

    236+,   for long line transmission line structure which inherently reduce
    interference radiation effects and which involve no shielding structure or
    means in addition to the conductor arrangement or structure (e.g. co-axial
    lines), see especially subclasses 243+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 32+ and the
    subclasses specified in the notes thereto for structure and conductor
    arrangements for preventing or reducing the detrimental effects due to
    either self-inductance of a single conductor or mutual inductance between
    plural conductors, other than loaded lines or transmission lines defined as
    having long line characteristics.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 45 for loaded lines with inductive or
    radiation reduction means, subclass 63, for cable or long line telegraph
    systems having means for eliminating "tailings" or having static
    compensation; and subclass 69 for telegraph line clearing and circuit
    maintenance systems having means for preventing the detrimental effects
    produced by induction from external or internal causes.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 89+
    for miscellaneous electrical systems having anti-induction means or means
    to prevent undesired coupling to other systems.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 67 for oscillator systems provided with an
    electromagnetic or electrostatic shield.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave, subclass 841+ for antennas with an
    electrical shield; subclass 851 for antennas with a coupling network having
    a radiation suppressor; and subclass 905 for antennas combined with
    shielded transmission lines.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    transmission lines with means to protect the connected lines from the
    effects of lightning and other high potential, and for networks for use in
    surge suppression circuits, see especially subclass 50 for systems with
    means to adjust for varying leakage currents; subclasses 82 and 84+ for
    systems for protecting balanced electrical systems (e.g., polyphase) for
    balanced current flowing therein; subclasses 88+ for voltage responsive
    systems; subclass 111 for transient responsive systems; and subclasses 177+
    for high voltage dissipation systems (e.g., lightning arresters).

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 198 for
    transmission lines used for reading and writing information.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclass 398, for telephone systems
    having means for preventing the detrimental effects occasioned by induction
    from external or internal causes.


CLS 333/13
TXT Systems under the class definition which include a resonant device and a
    space discharge structure positioned at a point of high potential on said
    resonant device, the space discharge structure breaking down in response to
    energy above a predetermined level in a transmission line connected to the
    resonant device to modify the effective electrical characteristics of the
    resonant device so as to block substantially the flow of any energy over
    the transmission line, free passage of energy occurring over the line when
    the energy fails to attain this predetermined level.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for plural channel systems which include a resonator type breakdown
    discharge system for substantially blocking a channel where the discharge
    device is made conductive by a high energy level in the transmission line,
    and subclasses 100+ where the discharge device is made conductive by energy
    other than the energy in the transmission line.

    2+,     14, 15, 16, 17+, and 81, for other systems within the class
    definition which reduce the amplitude of the wave energy but which do not
    involve the use of a resonator type breakdown discharge device.

    262,    for transmission line elements and components which perform a
    switching or blocking function, other than resonator type breakdown
    discharge systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 567+ for
    miscellaneous gaseous discharge device structure, including lightning
    arresters, and subclasses 324 and 325 for lightning arresters of the spark
    or arc type which operate in the open air.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 32 through
    371 for miscellaneous gaseous discharge systems and particularly subclass
    39 for the structural combination of a discharge device and a resonant
    device, i.e., combined in an integral or nonseparable manner.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    304-317 for self-regulating systems.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 365+ for miscellaneous gating circuits which utilize
    electron tubes.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    miscellaneous systems for protecting electrical apparatus by opening a
    circuit or making a shunt or short circuit when the current exceeds a
    predetermined value, see especially subclass 112 where the system includes
    electronic tubes, and subclasses 117+ for lightning arrester systems which
    include an arc discharge device.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 78+ for T-R or R-T radio systems.


CLS 333/14
TXT Networks under the class definition including a non-linear device for
    decreasing the amplitude range of the signal applied to the device, and a
    nonlinear device connected to receive the wave having the decreased
    amplitude range for increasing or restoring the amplitude range of the
    signal, and long line transmission lines in combination with such networks.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for amplitude compression and
    expansion systems even though the system includes an active element such as
    a vacuum tube type amplifier.  See (3) Note below.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not include devices which merely shift
    the amplitude level up or down merely to control the peak amplitude without
    controlling the amplitude range. Neither does this subclass include the
    combination of a limiter or clipper and an amplifier which cuts off the
    higher amplitudes and then amplifies the remaining portion of the wave
    energy so that the output wave does not contain any variations in wave form
    above a certain amplitude level, and is not therefore a function of the
    input wave energy.

    (3)     Note.  In the compressor portion of the compander, the input waves
    of smaller amplitudes may be increased in amplitude while the input waves
    of larger amplitude may be increased by a smaller ratio or decreased.  All
    amplitudes of the wave may be decreased, the larger amplitudes being
    decreased to a smaller extent.  The expander portion may operate in a
    similar manner except to increase the amplitude range.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for miscellaneous passive type wave shaping networks which modify
    the amplitude time characteristic of the signal transmitted therethrough.

    81,     for the attenuator network in this class which reduces the energy
    of the signal passing therethrough.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 45, for loaded lines in combination with a
    compander.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 309+ for a miscellaneous limiter with an amplifying
    circuit.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 96, 123 and 129+ for amplitude range
    compressors or expanders of the amplifier type where the input signal is
    applied to a control grid of an amplifier tube whose bias is controlled in
    accordance with the signal intensity to produce the necessary compression
    or expansion, and wherein the output signal is abstracted from the plate of
    the amplifier tube.  Subclasses 143 and 144+ for compressors or expanders
    where a variable impedance element is included in the signal path and the
    variable impedance is controlled in accordance with the signal intensity.
    The combination of an amplitude compressor and expander (i.e., a compander)
    one or both being of the amplifier type is classified in this class, (333)
    subclass 14.  However, where such combinations involve correction only of
    an amplifier condition and not a condition of the transmission line,
    classification is with amplifiers Class 330.  Combinations of an amplifier
    and a limiter where the output more substantially conforms to the input
    wave form are classified in Class 330. See Class 250, subclass 27, above.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 133 for
    phonograph recording and reproducing systems involving amplitude range
    compression and expansion.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclass 202 for a multiplex system which
    includes an amplitude compression or expansion means.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing  Systems and Devices, subclass
    106 for one-way audio signal  transmittion having amplitude
    compression/expansion.

    704,    Data Processing:  Speech Signal Processing, Linguistics, Language
    Translation, and Audio Compression/Decompression, subclasses 500+ for
    systems changing the frequency range of a band of audio signal frequencies,
    transmitting the energy at the changed range, and restoring the transmitted
    audio signal to its original frequency range.


CLS 333/15
TXT Systems under the class definition including an auxiliary line so
    structurally related to a transmission line that a change in the
    transmission line characteristics caused by a change in an ambient
    condition, such as temperature or humidity, will be accompanied by a change
    in a parameter of the auxiliary line, and means controlled by this change
    in parameter to compensate for the change in transmission line
    characteristics.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for plural channel systems including a pilot line.

    16,     for systems utilizing a pilot current for purposes of control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regula- tion Systems, subclass 294
    for impedance systems in general which are automatically controlled in
    response to a thermal condition.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 52, for amplifier systems having control
    means, wherein the control is exercised by a pilot signal.  See the Class
    Definitions of Class 330.  Section XIV for the line between this class
    (333) and Class 330 where pilot signals are involved.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 338+ for repeater systems
    (e.g. two way amplifier system) which utilize a pilot line to compensate
    for changes in the transmission characteristics of the main line.


CLS 333/16
TXT Systems under the class definition including means for compensating for
    changes in the signal energy passing over a transmission line caused by
    changes in the line characteristics, wherein a control signal distinct from
    and in addition to the signal energy is also passed over the line to be
    influenced by the changes in line characteristics, the control signal being
    used to control the compensating means.

    (1)     Note.  Systems for automatically compensating for changes in the
    characteristics of a transmission line where the carrier current of the
    transmitted energy is used to control the compensating means are classified
    in subclasses 17+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for plural channel systems utilizing a pilot frequency.

    15,     for systems utilizing for a pilot line for control purposes.

    17.1+,  see (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 52 for amplifier systems having pilot signal
    control means.  See Class 330, Class Definitions, section XIV for the line
    between the two classes where such subject matter is involved.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 338+ for repeater systems
    (e.g., two way amplifier system) which may utilize a pilot current to
    compensate for changes in the transmission characteristics of the main line.


CLS 333/17.1
TXT AUTOMATICALLY CONTROLLED SYSTEMS:

    Subject matter under the class definition having means to sense a condition
    in the system and to modify a wave propagation characteristic of the system
    in accordance with the condition so sensed.

    (1)     Note.  The automatic control must be of the wave propagation
    characteristic of a transmission line, system or network which would be
    classified in this class.  Where the system or network includes a component
    or device which, per se, is not classified in the class, combined with a
    transmission line, system or network which causes classification of the
    subject matter in this class, and the automatic control is only with
    respect to such component or device which is classified, per se, in another
    class.  Then the patent is not classified in this or the indented subclass,
    but is classified in subclass providing for the subject matter claimed.
    For example, a wave filter combined with an automatically operated current
    or voltage magnitude control means does not effect the wave propagation
    characteristic of the filter are classified in subclasses 165+ below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for plural channel systems including automatic control.

    13,     for resonator type breakdown discharge systems which are
    automatically controlled.

    14,     for amplitude compression and expansion systems including automatic
    control.

    15,     for pilot line controlled systems involving automatic operation.

    16,     for pilot current controlled systems including automatic operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, appropriate
    subclasses, especially subclasses 92+, 97, 99, and 116 for miscellaneous
    electrical distribution systems with automatic control means.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    234-303 for condition sensing regulators.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 509+ and 518+ for miscellaneous externally effected or
    control circuits.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 1+ for oscillator systems utilizing a phase
    or frequency sensing means for automatically stabilizing the oscillator
    frequency subclass 183 for oscillator systems having means for
    automatically controlling or stabilizing the amplitude of the generated
    oscillations and subclass 186 for oscillator systems with a particular
    source of power or bias voltage of the automatically regulated type.

    336,    Inductor Devices, particularly subclasses 30+ for inductor devices
    automatically adjustable in response to a condition.


CLS 333/17.2
TXT Limiting of Amplitude:

    Subject matter under subclass 17.1 including means to limit the amplitude
    to a predetermined level.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     for systems and networks that selectively lower the input signal
    level to a desired amount.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 264
    and 540+ for limiting the amplitude of pulses in nonlinear solid state
    circuits.


CLS 333/17.3
TXT Impedance Matching:

    Subject matter under subclass 17.1 in which the condition sensed is
    utilized to control circuitry that performs an impedance matching function
    in the system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32+,    for impedance matching circuits of the nonautomatically controlled
    type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 120+ for frequency tuning a
    transmitter to an antenna.


CLS 333/18
TXT Systems and networks under subclass 17 provided with automatically operated
    means to control an equalizer and delay network.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes systems including an equalizer and/or
    a delay network which is automatically controlled in response to some
    condition in the system and also equalizers and/or delay networks which are
    provided with other automatic control means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for automatic equalization and/or delay control networks utilized
    for preventing, suppressing or eliminating interference.

    15,     for automatic equalization and/or delay control networks controlled
    by the signal derived from a pilot line.

    16,     for automatic equalization and or delay control networks involving
    a pilot current control.

    28,     for nonautomatic equalizers.

    138+,   for nonautomatic delay networks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    212-219 for automatic phase control systems involving a single frequency.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 2+, 9+ and 36 for
    plural conversion systems involving phase conversion; subclasses 148+ for
    phase conversion systems, per se; particularly subclass 149 for phase
    conversion systems involving automatic voltage magnitude or phase angle
    control.


CLS 333/19
TXT Passive networks under the class definition for producing an output wave
    which is the time derivative or time integral of the input wave.

    (1)     Note.  See the internal and external search notes under subclass 20
    of this class for wave shaping systems which may involve differentiating
    and/or integrating networks.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for passive networks for shaping the output wave to other than the
    time derivative or time integral of the input wave.  Also see (1) Note
    above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 609+ and 611+,
    particularly subclasses 621+ for position servomechanisms which include
    stabilizing control features such as integrating and differentiating
    networks; subclasses 141+ for generator fed motor systems having generator
    control including  anti-hunt or rate of change response; subclass 702 for
    synchronous motor systems having anti-hunt or anti-damping control;
    subclass 448, for open loop automatic motor control systems involving
    anti-hunt control; and subclasses 456+ for systems responsive to the rate
    of change of a condition.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 19 for systems for
    automatically controlling the rate of change or hunting of a generator or
    its driving means.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    212-219 for miscellaneous phase control networks which involve
    differentiating or integrating networks.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 335 for miscellaneous differentiating circuits and
    subclasses 336+ for miscellaneous integrating circuits.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, appropriate
    subclasses, particularly subclasses 828 and 829+ for calculators performing
    computations involving differentiation and integration, respectively.


CLS 333/20
TXT Passive networks under the class definition for modifying an electrical
    wave passing therethrough so that the amplitude time characteristic of the
    output wave is different from that of the input wave and which have no
    function classified in other classes, and long line wave transmission
    systems in combination with a passive wave shaping network.

    (1)     Note.  The networks are usually designed to modify or shape a
    single pulse and usually involve a delay network or equivalent delay means.

    (2)     Note.  Included are long transmission lines in combination with a
    wave shaping network which is designed to restore the wave shape to a wave
    which has been distorted by transmission over the transmission line.

    (3)     Note.  Excluded are mere limiter networks which shape the wave
    merely by cutting off the wave above a predetermined amplitude.

    (4)     Note.  Many systems and networks inherently function to wave shape.
    Most of these systems are excluded as they include active elements, such as
    oscillation generators, amplifiers, detectors, etc.  Where the network is
    primarily designed for a purpose other than wave shaping, such as
    controlling the magnitude of current in the circuit, the network is
    excluded even though the control of the current magnitude is effected by a
    means which also effects the wave shape of the element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for systems combining wave energy from different channels and/or
    separating wave energy into different channels.

    14,     for amplitude range compression and expansion systems.

    19,     for wave shaping networks producing a time derivative or time
    integral of the applied wave energy (i.e. differentiating or integrating
    networks).

    28,     for networks modifying the attenuation or attenuation and phase
    characteristic with respect to frequency of the energy passing therethrough
    (i.e. equalizers).

    81,     for attenuator networks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, subclasses 622+, 626+, 659+, 671 - 677 and 692 - 711  for
    systems for the electrical production of complex waves in musical
    instruments.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 2+, and particularly subclasses 63, 69 and
    69.1 for telegraph systems involving combining and/or separating and/or
    shaping of electric waves.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 106+
    for waveform or wave shape determinative or pulse producing systems which
    are class appropriate.  The networks and systems in Class 307 may involve
    long line elements, but ordinarily include also a specific source of wave
    energy or pulse producing means, such as a DC source and switching means.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 76.12+ for
    electrical systems for the analysis of complex waves, and subclasses 76.39+
    for electrical frequency measuring systems which involve wave analysis.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 100+ for miscellaneous converting, shaping, or
    generating circuits such as miscellaneous limiters and clock or pulse
    production circuits.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 53+ for amplifier systems combined with a
    long line element, where the amplifiers may correct for the distortions
    caused by the long line.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 75+ for oscillator systems combined with an
    output circuit including a space discharge or unilaterally conductive
    device, which device may provide a wave distorting or shaping function.

    332,    Modulators appropriate subclasses for modulator systems which
    involve wave shaping.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.77+ for selective
    electrical communication systems wherein the selective means is responsive
    to the amplitude of the signal.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    conversion systems which involve wave shaping, see subclasses 34+ for
    systems for converting A.C. to D.C. and then connecting the D.C. to A.C.,
    subclasses 39+ for conversion systems with means to introduce or eliminate
    frequency components, and subclasses 157+ for frequency conversion systems.
     The systems in Class 363 usually involve the use of alternating current
    which is repetitive and do not involve the shaping of a single pulse.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, appropriate subclasses for telephone
    systems involving combining and/or separating and/or shaping of electric
    waves.


CLS 333/21
TXT Wave transmission systems under the class definition comprising means for
    changing guided waves having one field configuration to a different field
    configuration, the original and changed waves each having a longitudinal
    electric or magnetic field component.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes means for changing a rectangular TE
    wave pattern to a circular TE wave pattern, e.g. for changing a plane
    polarized guided wave to a circularly polarized guided wave, or from one
    type of polarized wave to another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248+,   for mode filters or suppressors, and for wave guide junctions (e.g.
    rotary joints involving mode conversion and reconversion).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave, subclass 756 for antennas with a
    polarization converter; and subclasses 909+ for radio wave polarizers, per
    se.


CLS 333/22
TXT Networks under the class definition specialized for use with and designed
    for connection to the end of a long line transmission line and including a
    resistive component for dissipating the wave energy propagated along the
    line and presenting an essentially resistive impedance to the line, and the
    combination of long transmission lines with energy dissipating terminations.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the impedance presented by the network is equal to
    the characteristic impedance of the line for which it is designed.

    (2)     Note.  The termination classified here is usually more than a mere
    resistance element such as is classified in Class 338, Electrical
    Resistors.  The termination includes some structure, such as a long line
    element or component, so that the device is not of general utility, but is
    limited to use with a transmission line.  Long lines with mere resistance
    elements which would, per se, be classified in Class 338, are included in
    this subclass (22) when the resistance element is designed for use as a
    long line dissipating termination.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for networks simulating transmission lines (i.e. artificial lines)
    whose function is not essentially dissipating terminal energy.

    32+,    for impedance matching networks whose function is coupling as
    opposed to termination.

    81,     for attenuators, which dissipate only a portion of the wave energy
    applied thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave, subclass 18 for radio wave absorption
    devices; subclasses 731+ for traveling wave type antennas which may involve
    a dissipating termination; and subclasses 739+ for antennas with a
    terminating resistance at open end.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 117+ for
    surge dissipators and lightning arresters.


CLS 333/23
TXT Networks under the class definition for simulating impedance
    characteristics of a smooth or loaded electrically long transmission line
    over a frequency range.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for dissipating terminations for long lines which usually have an
    impedance characteristic equal to the characteristic impedance of the line.

    28,     for equalizing networks having impedance characteristics usually
    the inverse of electrically long transmission lines.

    81,     for attenuators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 57, for amplifiers utilizing artificial lines.
    (This also includes the "distributed amplifiers").


CLS 333/24
TXT (1) Networks under the class definition including significant
    reactive structure for effecting the transfer of oscillator energy from one
    circuit to another circuit and having attenuation and/or delay
    characteristics over a frequency range for attenuating and/or delaying in a
    predetermined manner, wave energy passing therethrough, and/or providing an
    impedance match between the network and at least one of the circuits; (2)
    smoothing type wave filters having shunt capacitance, or series inductance,
    or both usually designed to pass direct current and to reduce the effect of
    any undesired alternating or pulsating current, or to pass direct current
    and low frequency alternating current or pulsating current and to reduce
    the effect of any undesired higher frequency alternating or pulsating
    current, and (3) systems within the class definition including one or more
    of the networks defined in (1) or (2) above.

    (1)     Note.  The coupling networks under the above definition usually
    include a shunt impedance common to the input and output circuits.

    (2)     Note.  The systems included are single channel systems having
    coupling networks, and include for example echo suppression on a single
    channel where the echo would be due to an impedance mismatch, or the
    elimination of echo in a single channel system by using a delay line.  Such
    systems are classified in the first indented subclass which provides for
    the network used in the system.  See section IV of the Class Definition.

    (3)     Note.  Class 323, Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems,
    is the miscellaneous class for systems for coupling a single source to a
    single load circuit using only transformers and/or impedances.  Also, see
    (4) Note below.

    (4)     Note.  Coupling networks using an electronic tube as a part of the
    network are not included in this or the indented subclass, but are
    classified in the appropriate class providing for the system.  For example,
    an amplifier system with means to couple a balanced line to an unbalanced
    line is classified in subclass 116 of Class 330, Amplifiers, a delay system
    using tubes is classified in subclass 261+ of Class 327, a filter using
    tubes is classified in subclasses 552+ in Class 327, a phase shifter using
    tubes where the input energy is applied to an input electrode (e.g., grid)
    of the tube to control a local source of energy (e.g., anode supply)
    connected to the output electrode of the tube is classified in subclass 231
    of Class 327, a coupling network using tubes to control the current and/or
    voltage magnitude and/or for phase control where there is a single input
    and output and at least a part of the input energy appears in the output
    circuit is classified in Class 323.

    (5)     Note.  See (11) Note under Class 343, subclass 700, for the
    classification lines between coupling networks and antennas combined with
    such coupling networks.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for plural channel systems involving coupling networks.

    17+,    for automatically controlled systems involving coupling networks.

    81,     for attenuators of the resistive type. 245+, for transmission line
    joints within the class definition which do not modify the characteristics
    of the wave propagated therethrough or do not effect an impedance match
    between dissimilar impedance lines or networks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, appropriate subclasses for coupling networks in
    combination with code signaling systems or apparatus other than telephony.
    See subclass 64 for such systems for transmitting messages by induced
    currents utilizing an induction coil or transformer, and for such systems
    having an induction coil or transformer between sections of the main line.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection  Systems, particularly
    subclasses 1+ for miscellaneous superimposed current systems involving
    coupling networks, and subclasses 11+ and 43+ for miscellaneous plural load
    or plural supply systems which include coupling networks.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems.  See (3) Note,
    above.  Class 323 provides for the miscellaneous transformer and impedance
    systems and includes structural combinations of different impedances which
    are electrically connected together.

    330,    Amplifiers, appropriate subclasses for various types of coupling
    networks involved in amplifier systems.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 74+ for oscillation generators combined
    with a particular output coupling network.

    334,    Tuners, for tuners, per se.  See also (4) Note above for tuners
    combined with other systems.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for the structure of
    transformers and inductances of the passive type.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave, subclass 743 for high frequency loop
    type antennas with feed coupling at spaced points on the loop; subclass 771
    for slot type antennas with wave guide coupling; subclasses 814, 816 and
    820+ for balanced doublet type antennas with a coupling network, subclasses
    850+ for antennas in general with a coupling network or impedance in the
    leadin.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 600+ for
    miscellaneous combinations of different impedances which are not in circuit
    relationship (e.g., a variable condenser combined with a resistance with no
    electrical connection between them).

    379,    Telephonic Communications, appropriate subclasses for telephone
    systems having coupling networks.  If the system is limited to use with
    speech (other than by mere name), such as including a microphone or
    reproducer (e.g., loudspeaker) the system is classified in Class 381, see
    subclasses 338+ for repeaters utilizing hybrid coil systems.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 91+ for radio transmitters involving
    coupling networks and subclasses 130+ (particularly subclasses 338+) for
    radio receivers involving coupling networks.


CLS 333/24.1
TXT Networks under subclass 24 which include gyromagnetic elements for
    effecting a nonreciprocal transfer of oscillatory energy from one circuit
    to another circuit.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note under subclass 1.1 above for a definition of
    the terms "gyromagnetic" and "nonreciprocal". Many of the patents in this
    generic subclass 24.1 are directional phase shifters, and relate to
    networks that shift the phase of energy passing through by different
    amounts depending on the direction of passage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.1,    for plural channel nonreciprocal gyromagnetic systems.  See also
    (1) Note above.

    138+,   for delay networks generally.

    202+,   for waveguide filters generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 300+ for nuclear or
    electronic induction measuring or testing devices.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 4, 4.8 and 63 for amplifiers using
    gyromagnetic elements.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 323 for mixers using gyromagnetic
    elements.


CLS 333/24.2
TXT Networks under subclass 24.1 wherein the attenuation in one direction of
    propagation through the network is substantially greater than in the
    opposite direction.

    (1)     Note.  The attenuation in one direction may be substantially zero.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     for attenuators generally.


CLS 333/24.3
TXT Networks under subclass 24.1 wherein the polarization of the electric
    vector of the wave energy propagated through the network is rotated in the
    same absolute sense for both directions of propagation.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are the so-called anti-reciprocal
    or Faraday rotators.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248+,   for rotators generally.


CLS 333/25
TXT Networks under subclass 24 including four terminals, the impedance across
    one pair of terminals being symmetrical and the impedance across another
    pair of these terminals being unsymmetrical with respect to a given
    potential plane (e.g., ground), these impedances being effective to convert
    symmetrical potential applied at the symmetrical pair of terminals to
    unsymmetrical potential at the other pair of terminals or to convert
    unsymmetrical potential applied at the unsymmetrical pair of terminals to
    symmetrical potential at the other pair of terminals, and systems under the
    class definition including a balanced to unbalanced circuit coupling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for plural channel systems, which involve coupling a balanced
    circuit to an unbalanced circuit or vice versa.

    12,     for systems for reducing inductive or radiation interference and
    which include coupling between balanced and unbalanced circuits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    212-219 for phase control systems with means to introduce delay into a part
    of the system, and including such systems using reactive impedances and
    transformer systems to obtain a phase shift (e.g., a 1805 shift) and which
    are designed for use at a single frequency.

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses for demodulators having inputs
    or outputs which are balanced or unbalanced.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 275 and 301 for transistor amplifiers with
    balanced-to-unbalanced coupling and vice versa, subclass 116 for amplifier
    systems having balanced-to-balanced coupling, and subclass 117 for
    amplifier systems having unbalanced-to-balanced coupling.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave, subclass 821 for balanced doublet type
    antennas with a balanced to unbalanced coupling network; and subclass 859
    for antennas in general with a balanced to unbalanced coupling network.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 2+, 9+, 36, and 148+
    for systems converting energy from one number of phases to a different
    number of phases.


CLS 333/26
TXT Balanced to unbalanced circuit coupling networks and systems under subclass
    25 where the coupling network includes a long line element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236+,   for long lines.

    245+,   for long line elements.


CLS 333/27
TXT Coupling systems under subclass 24 having a long line with a coupling
    network at each opposed ends of the long line.

    (1)     Note.  Where the long line is merely a part of a coupling network,
    and does not link two different coupling networks together, classification
    is not in this subclass.  See subclasses 156+ for this type of delay
    network, subclasses 50+ for this type of impedance matching network, 202+
    for this type of wave filter.

    (2)     Note.  In this subclass are systems having two coupling networks
    with a long transmission line connected to transmit energy from one network
    to the other.  These systems approach a complete system.  For example, a 70
    ohm source connected by a network to a 300 ohm line which is coupled by a
    network to a 150 ohm receiver.  At each point of connection there would be
    a coupling network.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50+,    see (1) Note above.

    156+,   see (1) Note above.

    202+,   see (1) Note above.

    236+,   for long lines, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, appropriate subclasses where the system is limited to
    code signaling other than telephony.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 53+ for amplifier systems combined with long
    lines or long line elements wherein such means furnish a coupling means for
    the amplifier.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 90+ for composite telephone
    systems (e.g., combined power and telephone circuit) and subclasses 338+
    for two telephone lines with two-way repeaters at spaced points along the
    line.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing  Systems and Devices, subclasses
    82+ for public address and similar systems (e.g., a microphone and a line,
    or a line and a reproducer such as a loudspeaker or a microphone, a line
    and a reproducer).


CLS 333/28
TXT Networks under subclass 24 with attenuation or attenuation and phase
    distortion characteristics which vary over a frequency range for use in a
    wave transmission system for modifying the attenuation or attenuation and
    phase characteristics of the wave energy as a function of frequency, and
    systems within the class definition which include such networks.

    (1)     Note.  Equalizer networks are used to reduce the attenuation or
    attenuation and phase distortion characteristics which the wave energy in a
    long line transmission system would have in the absence of the network.
    The network may be used for predistorting so that the distorting effect of
    the long line will be corrected.

    (2)     Note.  A filter is distinguished from an equalizer in that a filter
    is intended and designed to transmit a frequency or one or more bands of
    frequencies without modification while undesired frequencies are attenuated
    to a low value so that the desired frequency or frequencies are transmitted
    by the filter and the undesired frequencies are substantially blocked,
    while the equalizer has the function of changing the relative amplitudes of
    the waves of different frequency over the range of frequencies transmitted
    by the equalizer.

    (3)     Note.  Included are tone control networks which involve only
    passive elements and which vary the attenuation or attenuation and phase
    distortion characteristics over a range of frequencies.  Included are such
    networks as are used for "bass boosters", "treble boosters", "treble cut
    systems", etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for this subject matter where the equalizer is provided with
    automatic control means.

    20,     for wave shaping systems.

    81,     for attenuator networks within the class definition composed
    entirely of resistive elements.

    138+,   for phase control or delay networks, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for miscellaneous impedance and transformer systems, and for
    phase control systems.

    330,    Amplifiers, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 109,
    120, 122, 154, 157+, 185+, 192+, and 304, for amplifier systems combined
    with an equalizer network.

    332,    Modulators, subclass 107 for distortion control in pulse
    modulators, subclasses 123+ for distortion control in frequency modulators,
    subclasses 144+ for distortion control in phase modulators, and subclasses
    159+ for distortion control in amplitude modulators.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing  Systems and Devices, subclasses
    98+ for audio signal processing devices and systems having frequency
    control.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 267 for radio receivers with tone
    control networks.


CLS 333/32
TXT Coupling networks under subclass 24 which include one or more impedance
    elements constructed or proportioned to substantially eliminate the
    reflected wave energy between the network and at least one of the connected
    circuits caused by impedance differences; impedance matching networks, per
    se; and systems within the class definition which include such networks.

    (1)     Note.  The particular construction or proportioning producing the
    impedance match should be claimed for classification in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The impedance need only to be matched to pass the energy or
     frequency band of energy desired.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8+,     for branched plural channel systems having impedance matching.

    17+,    for systems wherein the impedance match is automatically controlled.

    22,     for line terminations involving impedance matching.

    81,     for attenuators having means for compensating for changes in
    terminal impedance caused by adjustment of the attenuator so as to match
    the impedances of the attenuator to the connected input and/or output
    circuit.

    236+,   for long lines wherein reflected wave energy arising from the line
    structure is compensated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing subclasses 600+, especially
    subclasses 612+ for the miscellaneous measurement and testing of impedance
    mismatch between circuits, and subclass 140+, for systems and apparatus for
    the measurement of voltage, current or power ratios which are indicative of
    impedance mismatch.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave, subclass 822 for balanced doublet type
    antennas with an impedance matching coupling network; and subclasses 860+
    for antennas in general with an impedance matching coupling network.


CLS 333/33
TXT Impedance matching networks and systems under subclass 32 including a long
    line element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236+,   for long lines.

    245+,   for long line elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave, subclass 862 for antennas with an
    impedance matching coupling network including a long line element.


CLS 333/34
TXT Impedance matching networks and systems under subclass 33 wherein the long
    line element lies along the path of wave propagation through the network
    and has a physical dimension progressively increasing or decreasing along
    the path of propagation to result in a corresponding change in electrical
    parameters of the long line element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave, subclass 863 for antennas with an
    impedance matching coupling network including a tapered long line element.


CLS 333/35
TXT Impedance matching networks and systems under subclass 33 wherein the
    component having distributed electrical parameters lies along the path of
    wave propagation through the network and is an odd integral number of
    quarter-wave lengths long.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave, subclass 864 for antennas with an
    impedance matching coupling network including a long line element of the
    quarter-wave transformer type.


CLS 333/81
TXT Devices and networks under the class definition consisting of one or more
    elements which exhibit only a positive resistance effect and which reduce
    the intensity of the energy passing through the device by dissipation, (1)
    the elements being proportioned to permit a change in their value to
    control the energy loss while maintaining substantially constant input
    and/or output impedance of the device, and/or (2) the elements being
    proportioned to permit the device to be inserted in the circuit to provide
    an energy loss without introducing any reflections in the circuit, and/or
    (3) the elements being combined with a long line or long line element,
    and/or (4) the device or network having an impedance equal to the impedance
    of a specified long line and/or (5) the device or network is claimed as
    being particularly modified for use over a frequency band so that its
    characteristics are particularly related to frequency, and (6) systems
    within the class definition including such devices or networks.

    (1)     Note.  The networks and devices of part 5 of the definitions may
    include means such as capacitors to compensate for deviations in
    attenuation caused by changes in frequency of the applied energy, so that
    the device or network acts as a pure resistance.  The network or device may
    be modified to obtain uniform attenuation over a band of frequencies.

    (2)     Note.  Included are T, H, pad, and ladder or lattice type networks
    as well as transmission line sections.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass embraces devices wherein one or more of the
    elements include reactance to compensate for any inherent reactance of the
    element or elements, see (1) Note.

    (4)     Note.  If the device or network does not maintain a constant input
    and/or output impedance, or if it would introduce reflections into the
    transmission line, it is excluded from this class and will be found in
    Class 323 Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for resonator type breakdown discharge systems, which include
    attenuation networks.

    14,     for amplitude compression and expansion systems which include
    attenuation networks.

    15      and 16, for pilot controlled systems which include attenuation
    networks.

    17+,    for automatically controlled systems which may include attenuation
    networks.

    22,     for transmission line terminations which dissipate the applied
    energy.

    24+,    for adjustable reactive type coupling networks in general, see
    especially subclass 28 for equalizer networks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, appropriate subclasses, for devices for attenuating
    sound, see subclass 206 for mufflers.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, see (4) Note
    above.

    330,    Amplifiers, appropriate subclasses under 157+, 185+ and 192+ for
    amplifiers having significant coupling which may include attenuators.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, appropriate subclasses, for electrical
    resistors, per se; and subclasses 68+ for mechanically variable resistors
    including potentiometers and rheostats.


CLS 333/99
TXT Subject matter under the class definition which is not provided for in any
    of the preceding subclasses in this class.


CLS 333/100
TXT Having branched circuits:
    Systems under subclass 1 including means for effecting an interchange of
    wave energy from one transmission line to two or more transmission lines,
    or vice versa, or having a coupling network for effecting an interchange of
    wave energy from a single input to plural outputs, or vice versa, of energy
    together with means for controlling or facilitating this interchange of
    energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for plural channel branched circuit systems having automatic
    controlled means to control the system.

    4+,     for plural channel systems and coupling networks wherein at least
    one of the transmission lines is a balanced line or where the network is
    especially   designed for coupling to at least one balanced line.

    13,     for resonator type breakdown discharge circuits which include a
    space discharge device designed to breakdown in response to high level
    energy (e.g., from the transmitting section of the system) to block
    substantially the flow of high level energy, and to pass low level energy
    along the transmission line (e.g., to a receiver).  The devices in subclass
    13 include T-R and R-T systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, particularly subclasses
    38, 43, 49, and 71+ for branched electrical conductor structures other than
    loaded lines and conductors defined as having long line characteristics.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, particularly
    subclasses 11+, 43+, and 147+ for miscellaneous electrical distribution
    systems which include branched circuits.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 407+ for miscellaneous circuits for use in coupling
    plural channels to a single channel.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 60+ for an electrical oscillation generator
    provided with plural output circuits.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 771 for plural
    slot-type antennas with wave guide coupling; subclasses 776+ for plural
    waveguide type antennas with coupling; subclasses 814 and 816 for plural
    balanced doublet type antennas with a coupling network; subclasses 853+ for
    plural antennas generally with a coupling network; subclass 858 for
    antennas coupled to plural lead-ins.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 268+, 353 for duplex
    systems having an antenna coupling network coupling a transmitter and a
    receiver to an antenna.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 150+ and 242 for multiple
    connector structure; subclasses 241+ for line tapper connector structure
    such as alligator clips and test probes.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 132+ for antenna coupling networks
    for plural receivers where the coupling network includes an active element
    and/or significant receiver structure; and subclasses 103+ for similar
    subject matter for transmitters.


CLS 333/101
TXT Including switching means:
    Systems under subclass 100 with means for abruptly connecting and
    disconnecting two or more transmission lines to or from another
    transmission line.

    (1)     Note.  The systems in this subclass usually having means to reduce
    reflected waves resulting from impedance discontinuities or irregularities
    caused by the presence or operation of the connecting and disconnecting
    means.

    (2)     Note.  Plural circuit switches restricted to use in a particular
    art are sometimes classified with the art, for example, switches in
    telegraph systems are classified in Class 178, Telegraphy, and switches in
    telephone systems are classified in Class 379, Telephonic Communications,
    see especially subclasses 242+.

    (3)     Note.  Variable power dividers which are classified below normally
    have a continuously variable transfer of power which is not abrupt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for similar systems having automatically controlled means.

    3,      for automatically controlled line substitution systems.

    13,     for single channel resonator type break-down discharge systems
    where the resonator-discharge device is used to effectively short circuit
    or open circuit the line (e.g., R-T or T-R systems).

    258     and 262, for transmission line elements for single channels which
    may be used to perform a switching or blocking function.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, particularly subclasses
    1+ and 19+ for plural circuit switches of general utility and not limited
    by claimed structure to use with long lines.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, particularly
    subclasses 23, 38+, 64+, 80+, 85+, 98+, and 112+ for miscellaneous
    electrical distribution systems which include switching.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 49 for plural oscillator systems provided
    with means for selectively connecting one or more of two or more
    oscillators to a common output circuit.


CLS 333/102
TXT Having gyromagnetic operating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 whereby a gyromagnetic element, e.g.,
    fettile, is used as the switching element.


CLS 333/103
TXT Having semiconductor operating means:
    Subject matter under subclass 101 whereby the switching means is a
    semiconductive element (e.g., diode).


CLS 333/104
TXT Using TEM lines:

    Subject matter under subclass 103 whereby the dominant mode in the
    transmission lines is of the type having only transverse electromagnetic
    components.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of such lines are coaxial lines, striplines, and
    microstrip lines.


CLS 333/105
TXT Having mechanical switching means:

    Systems under subclass 101 wherein the means for abruptly connecting and
    disconnecting two or more transmission lines to or from another
    transmission line is a mechanical element.

    (1)     Note.  The systems in this subclass usually have means to reduce
    reflected waves resulting from impedance discontinuities or irregularities
    caused by the presence or operation of the connecting and disconnecting
    means.

    (2)     Note.  Plural circuit switches restricted to use in a particular
    art are sometimes classified with the art, for example, switches in
    telegraph systems are classified in Class 178, Telegraphy, and switches in
    telephone systems are classified in Class 379, Telephonic Communications,
    see especially subclasses 242+.

    (3)     Note.  Variable power dividers normally have a continuously
    variable transfer of power which is not abrupt.

    (4)     Note.  Examples of the types of mechanical elements used are
    movable shorting pins, rotating assemblies, and movable transmission lines.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for similar systems having automatically controlled means.

    3,      for automatically controlled line substitution systems.

    13,     for single channel resonator type breakdown discharge systems,
    where the resonator discharge device is used to effectively short circuit
    or open circuit the line (e.g., R-T or T-R systems).

    262,    for connection and disconnection of long lines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, particularly subclasses
    1+ and 19+ for plural circuit switches of general utility and not limited
    by claimed structure to use with long lines.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, particularly
    subclasses 23, 38+, 64+, 80+, 85+, 98+, and 112+ for miscellaneous
    electrical distribution systems which include switching.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 49 for plural oscillator systems provided
    with means for selectively connecting one or more of two or more
    oscillators to a common output circuit.


CLS 333/106
TXT Using rotary switching means:

    Subject matter under subclass 105 wherein the mechanical element rotates
    about an axis through the switch device.


CLS 333/107
TXT For TEM lines:

    Subject matter under subclass 106 whereby the dominant mode in the
    transmission lines is of the type having only transverse electromagnetic
    components.


CLS 333/108
TXT For waveguide:

    Subject matter under subclass 105 whereby the transmission device
    propagates electrical waves having and electric or magnetic field component
    extending in the direction of propagation.


CLS 333/109
TXT Using directional coupler:

    Wave transmission systems under subclass 100 including two transmission
    lines having an intervening coupling which propagates a portion of the
    energy passing in one direction along the first line in the second line in
    only one direction from the coupling, and which propagates a portion of the
    energy which may pass in the other direction along the first line in the
    second line in the opposite direction only from the coupling.

    (1)     Note.  The second line may include a means, such as a dissipative
    termination, so that the energy from one direction only will be propagated
    to a distance in the second line.  For example,



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for a plurality of lines connected to a line by means of a hybrid
    coil.


CLS 333/110
TXT For providing frequency separation:

    Subject matter under subclass 109 wherein the interchange of energy results
    in the separation or combination of a plurality of frequencies or frequency
    bands.


CLS 333/111
TXT For providing adjustable coupling:

    Subject matter under subclass 109 wherein the amount of electromagnetic
    energy transferred between the first and second transmission lines can be
    changed to provided a different coupling ratio.


CLS 333/112
TXT Having lumped parameters or impedances:
    Subject matter under subclass 109 wherein an impedance element is included
    which may be considered as concentrated at one point.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition for the definition of "lumped
    parameters" or impedances.


CLS 333/113
TXT Having parallel-guide waveguide:

    Subject matter under subclass 109 wherein the first and second transmission
    lines are waveguides; the direction of energy propagation in the first and
    second lines being parallel in the coupling region.


CLS 333/114
TXT Having crossed-guide waveguide:

    Subject matter under subclass 109 wherein the first and second transmission
    lines are waveguides; the direction of propagation in the first and second
    lines being transverse to each other in the coupling region.


CLS 333/115
TXT Having TEM lines:

    Subject matter under subclass 109 wherein the first and second transmission
    lines are the type having only transverse electromagnetic components and no
    longitudinal electromagnetic components as their primary mode of operation.


CLS 333/116
TXT Using stripline:

    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein each of the first and second
    transmission lines have a planar center conductor and a planar ground plate.


CLS 333/117
TXT Including hybrid-type network:

    Systems under subclass 100 including coupling one wave transmission line to
    two or more wave transmission lines in such manner that there is a
    conjugate relation between at least two of these coupled transmission lines
    to prevent any interchange of energy between the conjugately related lines.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for transmission line terminations for hybrid-type networks.

    23,     for artificial lines adapted for use in hybrid systems.

    24+,    for single channel coupling networks. 109, for branched circuits
    including a directional coupler so that wave energy passing in one
    direction along a first line will be propagated in the second line in only
    one direction from the coupling, and wave energy passing in the other
    direction along the first line will be propagated only in the opposite
    direction from the coupling.

    169     and 170+, for bridge-type filter networks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 365 for
    bridge-type impedance systems.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for the structure of
    transformers per se.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclasses 276+ for a duplex system, subclass 308 for a resonant transfer
    system, and subclasses 498+ for combining or distributing information via
    time channels which may include a hybrid circuit.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 338+ for repeater systems
    including hybrid-type networks; and subclasses 402+ for telephone
    substation circuits including hybrid-type networks.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 7+ for radio repeaters including
    hybrid networks.


CLS 333/118
TXT Having lumped parameters or impedances:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 having impedance elements which may be
    considered as concentrated at one point.


CLS 333/119
TXT Using transformer coil:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein the impedance element consists of
    mutually coupled windings.


CLS 333/120
TXT Having hybrid ring junction:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 wherein the hybrid transmission line
    forms a closed loop, there being a plurality of ports connected to the loop.


CLS 333/121
TXT Having hybrid-T (e.g., magic-T):

    Subject matter under subclass 117 wherein the hybrid has four ports; energy
    being interchanged between the first port and two other ports, with no
    energy propagation from the fourth port, and the first and fourth ports
    being decoupled.


CLS 333/122
TXT Using waveguide:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the transmission line is of the
    type having an electric or magnetic field extending in the direction of
    propagation.


CLS 333/123
TXT Having coaxial element:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 wherein the transmission is of the TEM
    type having an elongated center conductor and a surrounding outer conductor.


CLS 333/124
TXT With impedance matching:

    Systems under subclass 100 wherein the interconnected or branched
    transmission lines present impedances at their junction to substantially
    eliminate the reflected wave energy caused by the junction or wherein one
    or more impedance elements are provided which are constructed or
    proportioned to substantially eliminate the reflected wave energy caused by
    the branched circuit coupling means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for branched circuit impedance matching which is automatically
    controlled.

    22,     for single channel transmission line terminations involving
    impedance matching.

    32+,    for single channel impedance matching coupling networks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 600+ especially
    subclasses 612+ for the miscellaneous measurement and testing of impedance
    mismatch between circuits; and subclasses 140+ for systems and apparatus
    for the measurement of voltage, current, or power ratios which are
    indicative of impedance mismatch.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 852 for antennas
    with a plural path coupling network with impedance matching.


CLS 333/125
TXT Including long line element:

    Subject matter under subclass 124 wherein a circuit element having
    distributed parameters is used.


CLS 333/126
TXT For providing frequency separation:

    Subject matter under subclass 125 wherein the impedance matched branching
    network provides a different frequency or band of frequencies in each of
    the two or more transmission lines or in the plural outputs.


CLS 333/127
TXT Using TEM lines:

    Subject matter under subclass 125 wherein the transmission lines are the
    type having only transverse electromagnetic components as their primary
    mode of operation.


CLS 333/128
TXT Stripline:

    Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein the TEM lines are of the type
    having a planar center conductor and a planar ground plate.


CLS 333/129
TXT For providing frequency separation:

    Subject matter under subclass 124 wherein the branched transmission lines
    provide a different frequency or band of frequencies in each of the two or
    more transmission lines.


CLS 333/130
TXT Using resistors only:

    Subject matter under subclass 124 wherein the impedance matching elements
    consist solely of resistors.


CLS 333/131
TXT Using coupled windings:

    Subject matter under subclass 124 wherein the impedance matching elements
    comprise inductively coupled coils (i.e., transformers and auto
    transformers).


CLS 333/132
TXT For providing frequency separation:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the interchange of wave energy
    provides a different frequency or band of frequencies in each of the two or
    more transmission lines or in the plural outputs.


CLS 333/133
TXT Utilizing electromechanical transducer:
    Subject matter under subclass 132 wherein an electrical wave driven
    mechanical vibrator determines the frequency characteristic of the branched
    circuit.


CLS 333/134
TXT Utilizing long line element:

    Subject matter under subclass 132 wherein the transmission lines or
    coupling networks include an element having distributed parameters.

    (1)     Note.  LONG LINE ELEMENT:
    A circuit element having distributed parameters, such as a resonator, or a
    waveguide.  A long line element may be a part of a long line wave
    transmission device or used in a network with other circuit elements of the
    lumped parameter type, for example, as in the case of delay networks,
    impedance matching networks, and wave filters.


CLS 333/135
TXT Including waveguide element:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 wherein the long line element is of the
    type having a magnetic or electrical component extending in the direction
    of propagation.

    (1)     Note.  WAVEGUIDE:
    A transmission device designed to propagate electrical waves having an
    electric or magnetic field component extending in the direction of
    propagation.  The wave-guide may be a hollow dielectric or metal tube or a
    solid dielectric rod, the wave energy being propagated along the interior
    of the tube or rod and confined by the walls of the tube or rod.


CLS 333/136
TXT Including long line element:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the branched circuit includes a
    circuit element having distributed parameters.


CLS 333/137
TXT Using waveguide:

    Subject matter under subclass 136 wherein the long line element is of the
    waveguide type.


CLS 333/138
TXT Delay lines including a lumped parameter: Subject matter under subclass 24
    for retarding wave energy a predetermined time over a range of frequencies
    and systems within the class definition which include such networks and
    wherein one of the network parameters may be considered as concentrated at
    one point.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition for the definition of "lumped
    parameters".

    (2)     Note.  The time period may be constant over the range of
    frequencies or proportional to the frequency (e.g., the time of delay may
    be greater for the higher frequency).

    (3)     Note.  This subclass does not contain pulse delay systems utilizing
    active elements.  See Class 327, Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear
    Devices, Circuits, and Systems, subclasses 261+ for miscellaneous circuits
    which may include an electron discharge device or transistor and provide
    specific delay in producing an output waveform and Class 330, Amplifiers,
    appropriate subclasses for amplifiers combined with phase shifting networks
    and for phase inverter systems involving active elements having an
    amplifier function.

    (4)     Note.  Devices for adjusting or maintaining the phase angle between
    the current and the voltage of an electric wave of a single frequency, or
    the phase angle between the current or voltage of a single frequency with
    respect to a standard or with respect to the current or voltage of another
    circuit are classified in Class 323, Electricity:  Power Supply or
    Regulation Systems, subclasses 212-219 wherein there is a single input
    source and a single output load and wherein the phase shift is produced by
    the device acting on the original electrical energy and not due to any
    interposed signal controlled transducer.  Class 307, Electrical
    Transmission or Interconnection Systems, appropriate subclasses also
    provides for the miscellaneous phase control systems similar to these in
    Class 323 but having plural source circuits and/or plural load circuits.

    (5)     Note.  Class 363, Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 2,
    9, 148, and indented subclasses provides for systems for transforming
    electrical energy having one number of phases to electrical energy having
    another number of phases.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for automatically controlled delay networks.

    19,     for differentiating or integrating systems involving delay networks.

    20,     for wave synthesis and shaping systems involving delay networks.

    28,     for combined attenuation and phase control networks, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, particularly subclass 17.5 for transmitter for storing
    or delaying messages or code signals; subclasses 45+ for wave transmission
    lines with inductive loading means to effect changes in the delay
    characteristics of the transmission lines; subclass 63 for phase or delay
    control means applied to high capacity transmission line systems; and
    subclass 69 for line-clearing and circuit maintenance systems which include
    distortion and phase correction means.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, see (4) Note
    above.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    212-219, see (4) Note above.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 76.77+ for phase
    indicators.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, see (3) Note above.

    329,    Demodulators, subclasses 315+ for frequency demodulators and
    subclasses 345+ for phase demodulators.

    330,    Amplifiers, appropriate subclasses for phase compensation in
    amplifier systems, also see (3) Note above.

    331,    Oscillators, appropriate subclasses for oscillation generators
    utilizing time delay networks, particularly subclass 82 for beam tube
    oscillators of the traveling wave type; and subclasses 135+ for phase shift
    oscillators, indented subclass 137 providing for such oscillators with a
    phase shift network of the RC ladder type.

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 144+ for phase modulation systems.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for the structure of
    inductive reactors.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 744 for high
    frequency loop-type antennas with series reactance in the loop; subclasses
    749+ for antennas with lumped reactance for loading the antenna; and
    subclass 778 for plural waveguide-type antennas with phasing.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 271+ for
    capacitor structure.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 398 and 415 for phase
    modifying means applied to anti-inductive systems.


CLS 333/139
TXT Variable parameter:

    Subject matter under subclass 138 including at least one variable parameter
    for delay adjustment.


CLS 333/140
TXT Physical structure:

    Delay lines subject matter under subclass 138 wherein the geometry of
    individual parameters or the physical distribution of elements is critical
    to obtaining the desired delay.

    (1)     Note.  Included here would be inductive parameters having a
    specific core structure and/or winding geometry.


CLS 333/141
TXT Delay lines including elastic bulk wave propagation means:

    Subject matter under subclass 24 for retarding wave energy a predetermined
    time over a range of frequencies and systems within the class definition
    which include such networks wherein structure is provided for converting
    electrical wave energy to bulk wave mechanical energy, and for transmitting
    the bulk wave mechanical energy for reconversion to electrical wave energy.

    (1)     Note.  The time period may be constant over the range of
    frequencies or proportional to the frequency (e.g., the time of delay may
    be greater for the higher frequency).

    (2)     Note.  The delay is due to the lower propagation velocity of waves
    in the mechanical wave transmission path.

    (3)     Note.  Included as mechanical wave transmission devices in this
    subclass are such devices as fluid columns, bars, rods, and plates.

    (4)     Note.  By elastic bulk wave propagation is meant energy transmitted
    through the interior of an elastic wave propagation medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186+,   for electromechanical filters employing bulk mode resonators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses, especially
    subclass 1 for mechanical systems of linkages to shift the phase of a wave.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 313 for
    piezoelectric surface acoustic wave devices; subclasses 334+ for various
    acoustic wave devices which use piezoelectric effects; and subclass 26 for
    miscellaneous magnetostrictive devices, per se.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 116 for piezoelectric
    motors; and subclass 118 for magnetostrictive motors.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 3 for
    magnetostrictive generator systems.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 5+ for radar and
    other reflected wave radio systems used to measure distance and which use
    delay networks, see especially subclasses 9, 10+, and 12+.

    367,    Communications, Electrical: Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclass 141 for underwater vibration transducers.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    150+ for telephone transmitters and receivers using magnetostrictive or
    piezoelectric effects.


CLS 333/142
TXT Multipath propagation:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the initial direction of
    mechanical wave energy is changed.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes devices wherein changes in
    propagation direction result from reflection, diffraction, refraction, or
    mode conversion.


CLS 333/143
TXT Spurious signal reduction:

    Subject matter under subclass 142 including means to reduce undesired
    signal generation.

    (1)     Note.  Spurious signals may be generated by reflection,
    diffraction, refraction, or multiple mode generation.


CLS 333/144
TXT Variable delay:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the effective length of the
    structure for transmitting mechanical waves may be varied to provide a
    variable delay.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are devices wherein the
    propagation velocity within the structure for transmitting is a function of
    externally applied magnetic or electric fields, control voltages,
    radiation, or mechanical forces.


CLS 333/145
TXT Nonuniform propagation path:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 in which the structure for transmitting
    mechanical waves is tapered, stepped, or includes a hollow, composite,
    anisotropic, or nonhomogeneous propagation path.


CLS 333/146
TXT Helical propagation path:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the structure for transmitting
    mechanical waves includes a helical propagation path.


CLS 333/147
TXT Propagation path has significant chemical or physical properties:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the material of the structure for
    transmitting mechanical waves significantly affects the delay
    characteristic.

    (1)     Note.  The material, as a result if it is crystalline structure or
    of its composition, may provide low losses, low scattering, low dispersion,
    controlled dispersion, increased power handling capabilities, or
    temperature stability.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass are devices wherein the structure
    for transmitting mechanical waves is polarized, semiconductive,
    gyromagnetic, ferroelectric, superconductive, magnetoelastic, or is capable
    of magnetostatic wave propagation.


CLS 333/148
TXT Including magnetostrictive transducers:
    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the conversion of electrical to
    mechanical energy or the conversion of mechanical to electrical energy is
    dependent on the magnetostrictive effect.

    (1)     Note.  Magnetostrictive effect may be defined as the change in
    dimensions of a body when subjected to a magnetic field.


CLS 333/149
TXT Significant transducer structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 not classifiable in other subclasses
    indented thereunder where the transducers used for electromechanical
    conversion are structured or dimensioned to provide high efficiency
    conversion, impedance matching, mode conversion, shock resistance, or
    nonreflective properties.


CLS 333/150
TXT Delay lines including elastic surface wave propagation means:

    Subject matter under subclass 24 wherein structure is provided for
    converting electric waves to surface acoustic waves, transmitting the
    surface acoustic waves to a means for reconverting the acoustic waves to
    electrical waves.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is limited to devices where significant
    acoustic wave transmission is along the free surface of the transmission
    media.

    (2)     Note.  The delay is due to the lower velocity of the waves along
    the free surface of the transmission means.  No significant wave
    transmission is realized through the interior of the transmission.

    (3)     Note.  The transmission media may comprise either flat or curved
    surfaces of a piezoelectric medium or a nonpiezoelectric medium having a
    surface coating of piezoelectric material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193+,   for filters employing surface acoustic waves.


CLS 333/151
TXT Spurious signal or mode cancellation means: Subject matter under subclass
    150 including structure to reduce the effects of spurious mechanical or
    electric wave signals or modes on the output signal of the delay line.

    (1)     Note.  Spurious modes or signals may result from reflections of
    elastic surface waves, undesired conversion of surface wave modes to bulk
    wave modes, nonlinearity of the means for transmitting surface waves, or
    from undesired capacitive coupling.

    (2)     Note.  The mode cancellation means may include acoustic absorbers,
    shielding electrodes, obstacles in the surface acoustic wave path, or
    surface wave propagation substrates having anisotropic propagation
    properties.


CLS 333/152
TXT Variable delay:

    Subject matter under subclass 150 including means for varying the delay.

    (1)     Note.  Delay variation may be achieved by mechanical translation of
    the input and output transducers used for electromechanical conversion or
    by including surface wave propagation substrates whose delay properties are
    altered by incident radiation, electron bombardment, or by the application
    of external field, forces, or control voltages.

    (2)     Note.  The substrate material may include materials or coatings
    which are both semiconductive and piezoelectric, are both photosensitive
    and piezoelectric, or undergo significant dimensional changes or
    deformation as a function of externally applied heat or mechanical stress.


CLS 333/153
TXT Including discontinuities within propagation means:

    Subject matter under subclass 150 wherein abrupt modifications are included
    in the elastic surface wave path so as to alter the delay or transmission
    characteristics of the path.

    (1)     Note.  Such discontinuities may serve as reflectors, deflectors,
    diffractors, phase modifiers, or mode converters.

    (2)     Note.  Transducers distributed along the wave transmission path to
    provide signal tapping functions (rather than wave perturbation) are not
    included here.


CLS 333/154
TXT Significant transmitting or receiving transducer structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 150 wherein the transducers required for
    electromechanical wave conversion have structural attributes, relative
    orientation, spacing, or other structural organization critical with
    respect to contributing to desired wave delay or wave transmission
    characteristics.

    (1)     Note.  Delay lines of the elastic surface wave type which include
    transducer structures providing spurious signal or mode cancellation
    functions are not classified here but are classified in subclass 151.


CLS 333/155
TXT Temperature stabilization compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 150 wherein the materials or structural
    elements included in the delay lines reduce the delay time variations
    caused by ambient temperature change.


CLS 333/156
TXT Delay lines including long line elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 24 having distributed parameters and
    including significant structure for retarding wave energy a predetermined
    period of time over a range of frequencies and systems within the class
    definition which include such networks.

    (1)     Note.  The time period may be constant over the range of
    frequencies or proportional to the frequency (e.g., the time of delay may
    be greater for the higher frequency).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    for delay structures wherein the wave energy to be retarded
    propagates along line elements which include both distributed and lumped
    elements.

    202+,   for wave filters including long line elements.

    236+,   for long lines.

    245+,   for long line elements and components.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    343,    Communications:  Radio Waves Antennas, subclass 778 for plural
    waveguide-type antennas with phasing.


CLS 333/157
TXT Waveguide:

    Subject matter under subclass 156 wherein the structure for retarding
    energy propagates electrical waves having an electric or magnetic field
    component extending in the direction of propagation.

    (1)     Note.  The waveguide may be a hollow dielectric or metal tube or a
    solid dielectric rod, the wave energy being propagated along the interior
    of the tube or rod and confined or bounded by the tube or rod.


CLS 333/158
TXT Including ferrite means:

    Subject matter under subclass 157 including ferrite within the waveguide.

    (1)     Note.  The ferrite is usually biased by a fixed or variable
    external magnetic field so as to determine the magnitude of wave
    retardation.


CLS 333/159
TXT Having mechanically movable delay control means:

    Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the magnitude of wave retardation
    is adjusted by a movable dielectric or conductive member within or
    proximate to the waveguide.


CLS 333/160
TXT Coaxial line:

    Subject matter under subclass 156 wherein the structure for retarding wave
    energy is a transmission line in which one conductor surrounds the other,
    the two having a common longitudinal axis.


CLS 333/161
TXT Planar line structure (e.g., stripline):
    Subject matter under subclass 156 wherein the structure for retarding wave
    energy is a transmission line including two or more spaced planar
    conductors.

    (1)     Note.  The planar line structure for classification here may be of
    the stripline type, the microstrip type, or the slot line type.


CLS 333/162
TXT Helical line structures and lines developed from a helical structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 156 wherein the structure for retarding wave
    energy is a transmission line including at least one conductor having a
    helical configuration or a configuration developed from a helix.


CLS 333/163
TXT Having plural concentric helices:

    Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein the structure for retarding wave
    energy is a transmission line including two or more concentric helical
    conductors.


CLS 333/164
TXT Control of delay with semiconductive means: Subject matter under subclass
    156 wherein the conductivity state of a semiconductive means associated
    with the delay line controls the magnitude of wave retardation.

    (1)     Note.  The semiconductive means may include switching diodes,
    varactor diodes, or bulk effect semiconductors.


CLS 333/165
TXT Frequency or time domain filters and delay lines utilizing charge transfer
    devices:Subject matter under subclass 24 for filtering or delaying wave
    energy wherein components of signals to be filtered or delayed are sensed,
    charge samples corresponding to the magnitude and/or phase of the signals
    are developed, the charges are sequentially transferred at a predetermined
    rate, and the charges are eventually sampled or sensed to develop filtered
    and/or delayed output signals.


CLS 333/166
TXT Time domain filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 24 for filtering wave energy utilizing a
    tapped delay line wherein a required impulse response is synthesized by
    weighting and/or summing signals derived at the tap points.


CLS 333/167
TXT Frequency domain filters utilizing only lumped parameters:

    Subject matter under subclass 24 having only parameters which may be
    considered as concentrated at one point and permitting free transmission of
    electric waves of a single frequency or band of frequencies (which may
    include zero frequency) while attenuating substantially electric waves
    having other frequencies, or attenuating substantially electric waves of a
    single frequency or band of frequencies (which may include zero frequency)
    while permitting free transmission of electric waves having other
    frequencies, and systems within the class definition which include such
    networks.

    (1)     Note.  Tuners, which are closely analogous to the wave filters in
    this class, are classified in Class 334, Tuners.  The tuners usually found
    in Class 334 consist of a lumped inductance and capacitance element
    together with structure means to vary either or both elements in order to
    change the mean resonant frequency of the tuner.  The tuners in Class 334
    may include one or more long line elements in addition to a lumped
    inductance or capacitance element, or the tuner may consist of a
    distributed parameter type tuning unit which is adjusted in discrete,
    distinct steps.  Two or more distributed parameter type tuner units which
    are of the continuously variable type and which are ganged together
    mechanically and/or electrically so as to have their mean resonant
    frequency adjusted in unison are properly classified in Class 334.  Where
    only the bandwidth of the filter is varied without varying the mean
    resonant frequency, classification is in this class (333).

    (2)     Note.  Filters combined with circuits having other functions
    classified in other classes are excluded and will be bound in other
    classes.  See the classes referred to under "Search Class" below.  Note the
    exception in the case of a mere current and or voltage control network
    combined with a filter in (4) Note.

    (3)     Note.  Filters which include an active element are excluded.  See
    Class 327, particularly subclasses 552+ where the active element is an
    electron tube or a transistor. Note that Class 327 includes some
    transversal filters.

    (4)     Note.  Filters in combination with means merely to control the
    magnitude of the current and/or voltage in the network are included in this
    and the indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for plural channel systems which include filters and for filters
    with plural input and/or output terminals.

    19,     for differentiating or integrating networks which are analogous to
    wave filters.

    20,     for wave shaping networks which are analogous to wave filters and
    which may include wave filters.

    28,     for equalizing networks which are analogous to wave filters.

    100+,   where the filter includes branching means (e.g., a single input
    with plural outputs).

    124+,   for resonant filter networks for matching the impedance in branched
    circuits, and branched circuits with line sections analogous to wave
    filters for impedance matching purposes.

    157+,   for delay networks which are analogous to wave filters.

    202+,   for long lines having frequency discriminating properties.

    219+,   for resonators including those with tuning means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 1 for mechanical wave
    filters for transmitting mechanical waves of a particular frequency or band
    of frequencies.

    84,     Music, subclasses 1.19+, 621, 622, 699+ or  736  for electrical
    systems used in musical instruments to produce musical tones which include
    wave filters or tuners.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 2+ for telegraph systems involving wave
    filters; and particularly subclass 47 and indented subclasses for harmonic
    or reed type selective systems; subclass 49 for superposed current systems
    with frequency selection means.

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 175+ for sound filters.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, particularly
    subclass 105 for electrical distribution systems including wave filters and
    subclass 132 for circuit interrupting systems having filters to eliminate
    the higher frequency components.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 58 for generator
    controls with means for suppressing or minimizing undesired frequencies.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems.  Note that Class
    323 provides for "filters" which control only the voltage and/or current
    magnitude. If the circuit which performs the filtering action is arranged
    only to "buck out" or balance the undesired components, classification is
    in Class 323.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, particularly subclasses 552+ for unwanted signal suppression by an
    active filter which may utilize a transistor or an electron tube.

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses for a demodulator which
    includes tuning or filtering.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 302+ for transistor amplifiers with
    frequency responsive means; subclass 86 for amplifiers having an
    automatically variable impedance in the feedback path; subclass 94 for
    amplifiers having a frequency responsive means in a cathode feedback path;
    subclass 109 for amplifiers with frequency responsive means in the feedback
    path; subclass 143 for amplifiers with a thermal impedance in the signal
    path which may be automatically variable; subclasses 144+ for amplifiers
    having an automatically variable impedance in the signal path including
    such subject matter involving a variable reactance for automatically
    tunable or selective circuits; subclass 154 for cascaded amplifiers
    including a resonant circuit; subclass 155 for amplifier circuits including
    means for unicontrol of the coupling circuits; and subclasses 157+ and 192+
    for amplifier systems with significant interstage, input and output
    coupling which may include wave filters.

    331,    Oscillators, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 43,
    76, 77, 110, and 138+ for oscillators utilizing a wave filter as an element
    thereof.

    332,    Modulators, appropriate subclasses for modulators involving wave
    filters.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.71+ for selective
    communication systems which are frequency responsive.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 722 for antennas
    with a lumped reactance filter in the active antenna; and subclasses 745+
    for antennas with a variable reactance for tuning the antenna.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 39+ for conversion
    systems in combination with a filter.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclasses 488 and 497 for a multiplex system which includes connecting
    filters.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, appropriate subclasses for telephone
    systems involving wave filters; and particularly subclass 2 and indented
    subclasses for composite systems utilizing wave filters; and subclasses 78,
    79, 80, and 174 for anti-inductive systems and devices with wave
    discriminating properties.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing  Systems and Devices, subclasses
    98+ for audio signal processing devices and systems having frequency
    control.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 91+ for transmitters involving wave
    filters; and subclasses 150.1+ and 296+ (especially subclass 307) for radio
    receivers with filters or tuners.


CLS 333/168
TXT Including recurrent sections:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 wherein similar or equivalent elements or
    groups of elements are cascaded.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of filters classified here are ladder network or
    reiterations of "T" or "pi" networks whose formats are topographically
    similar but whose


            parameters may not be equal in every reiteration.  Examples of such
    filters included are:



CLS 333/169
TXT Wheatstone or lattice type:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 having four impedance branches connected
    in series to form a closed circuit, two nonadjacent junction points serving
    as input terminals while the remaining two junction points serve as output
    terminals.

    (1)     Note.  Two of the impedance branches may be formed by a transformer
    winding having a mid-tap, the mid-tap forming one of the input or output
    terminals, and the other winding of the transformer forming the output or
    input connecting means.  See Fig. 4 below.

    (2)     Note.  Included are for example:



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117+,   for hybrid-type networks used in branched circuits.

    133+,   for similar networks which include electromechanical transducer
    elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 69+, 74,
    78, and 91 for temperature regulating systems which include impedance
    bridge networks as the control means.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 294 for motor
    reversing systems wherein the armature current reversal means includes an
    impedance bridge network; and subclass 535 for motor field circuit control
    systems which include an impedance bridge network; and subclasses 663+ for
    position servomechanisms which may include a bridge in the error detector
    circuit.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 77 for single
    generator systems where the generator field circuit is controlled by means
    of an impedance bridge network.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 365 for
    voltage magnitude control systems involving Wheatstone bridge arrangements.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 98+ and 101+ for electric measuring and testing
    systems using impedance bridge arrangements.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 146 for amplifier systems having an amplifier
    in one arm of a bridge; and subclass 175 for amplifier systems having a
    lattice or Wheatstone bridge network in the signal coupling means.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 110 and 138+ for bridge type oscillation
    generation systems in general.

    332,    Modulators, subclass 172 for amplitude modulating systems of the
    bridge type having conjugate input and output.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 148+ for phase
    conversions arranged as a bridge.


CLS 333/170
TXT Bridge type:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 having an impedance path containing a
    plurality of filter impedance units connected in series relation between an
    input and an output terminal, the filter also having a shunt connection
    containing an impedance connected to the junction of the series filter
    impedance units and to the other side of the line between the input and
    output terminals, an impedance path being connected to different ones of
    the series impedance units at points other than the junction between the
    units.

    (1)     Note.  The last named impedance path is therefore in parallel with
    at least a portion of the series connected filter impedance units in the
    input circuit and the output circuit.  The last named impedance path may
    include an inductive coupling.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of filter networks included and excluded are:



    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 142 in particular for bridge-type oscillators
    utilizing a double T bridge of the RC or RL element type.


CLS 333/171
TXT With variable response:

    Subject matter under subclass 170 wherein at least one of the filter
    impedance units is made adjustable in order to vary the response of the
    filter.


CLS 333/172
TXT RC or RL type:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 wherein the filter parameters are limited
    to combinations of resistance and capacitance or to combinations of
    resistance and inductance.


CLS 333/173
TXT Synchronous filters:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 wherein the parameters of the filter are
    cyclically connected or disconnected.

    (1)     Note.  The response (e.g., bandwidth, center frequency, harmonic
    rejection, etc.) is determined both by the magnitude of the filter
    parameters and by the rate at which the connections or disconnections are
    made.


CLS 333/174
TXT With variable response:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 wherein at least one of the filter
    parameters is made adjustable in order to vary the response of the filter.


CLS 333/175
TXT Resonant, discrete frequency selective type:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 which include resonant series and/or
    parallel inductance and capacity networks which offer a low impedance path
    to energy of a particular frequency or of a plurality of separate discrete
    frequencies and/or offer a high impedance path to energy of a particular
    frequency or of a plurality of discrete frequencies.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes filters under its definition in which
    means are incorporated for sharpening the tuning of the resonant circuits
    as by compensating for the resistance in such circuits.

    (2)     Note.  The filters in this subclass are especially designed to pass
    only a single discrete frequency or a plurality of discrete frequencies but
    not a continuous band, or to eliminate one or more discrete frequencies
    from a band of frequencies.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    197+,   for similar filters utilizing electromechanical transducers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 302+ for transistor amplifiers with
    frequency responsive coupling; subclasses 94 and 109 for amplifiers with
    frequency responsive feedback means; subclass 154 for cascaded amplifiers
    having a resonant means in an interstage coupling circuit; subclasses 157+,
    185+, and 192+, particularly subclasses 167, 189, and 196 for coupling
    circuits with resonant circuit means.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 76 for oscillators, combined with an output
    coupling network including a harmonic selecting filter.

    334,    Tuners, appropriate subclasses for tuners adapted to be used in
    wave energy apparatus, also see the reference note to Class 334 in the
    search notes of subclass 167.


CLS 333/176
TXT Including specific frequency rejection means:

    Subject matter under subclass 175 which include circuitry, provided for
    rejecting harmonics or for providing discrete transmission zeroes or
    attenuation poles within, at the edge of, or outside of, a prescribed
    filter pass band.


CLS 333/177
TXT Transformer coupled:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 which include a mutual inductance link of
    the lumped type between the input and output of the filter.

    (1)     Note.  The filters in this subclass are usually of the band-pass
    type, wherein the band-pass effect is due to the coupling between resonant
    circuits (e.g., intermediate frequency transformer systems with more than
    critical coupling between tuned primary and secondary circuits).  The
    mutual inductance link need not be between the resonant circuits of the
    filter but may constitute the input or output coupling, the coupling
    between the resonant circuits being capacitive.

    (2)     Note.  Wave filters wherein the mutual inductance link is of the
    long line type are not in this subclass but will be found in subclasses
    125+ for branched circuit impedance matching networks; subclass 26 for
    balanced to unbalanced circuit conversion; subclasses 33+ for impedance
    matching networks; and subclasses 202+ for wave filters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    197+,   for electromechanical transducer-type filters involving transformer
    coupling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 247,
    301, 305, 328, and 355 for current and/or voltage magnitude control systems
    including transformers, and for miscellaneous transformer systems.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 154, 165+, 188+, and 195+ for amplifiers
    having transformer coupling.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for transformers which are
    not designed to be frequency responsive.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 443+ for induction coils
    combined with the structure of telephone instruments.


CLS 333/178
TXT Including bandwidth adjusting, shaping or stabilization means:

    Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein means are provided for adjusting
    the bandwidth or for maintaining constant bandwidth when circuit parameters
    are intentionally varied or when circuit parameters vary as a result of
    fluctuations in ambient conditions.


CLS 333/179
TXT With permeability tuning means:

    Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein means are provided for varying
    the permeability of the mutual inductance link.


CLS 333/180
TXT With variable coupling means:

    Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein means are provided to adjust the
    degree of coupling between circuit elements or groupings of circuit
    elements.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes means to vary either inductive
    coupling, capacitive coupling, resistive coupling, or any combinations of
    such coupling.


CLS 333/181
TXT Smoothing type (e.g., direct current power supply filters or decoupling
    filters):

    Subject matter under subclass 167 having shunt capacitance or series
    inductance, or both, usually designed to pass direct current and to reduce
    the effect of any undesired alternating or pulsating current superimposed
    on the direct current or to pass direct current and low frequency
    alternating current or pulsating current and to reduce the effect of an
    undesired higher frequency alternating or pulsating current.

    (1)     Note.  Such filters usually have no resonant relationship between
    the inductance and capacitance over the range of applied frequencies.

    (2)     Note.  These filters are usually of the "brute force" type,
    utilizing an excess inductance and/or capacitance.  They are generally low
    pass, being adapted to pass direct current and to reduce the effect of any
    undesired alternating current superimposed on the direct current.

    (3)     Note.  Included are systems with a smoothing-type filter combined
    with a passive network means to regulate the current or voltage applied to
    or abstracted from the filter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems.  If the circuit
    which performs the smoothing action does so only by "bucking out" or
    balancing the undesired components, classification is in Class 323.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 141 for amplifiers having smoothing circuits
    in the bias control path; subclass 142 for amplifiers including
    self-biasing circuits; and subclasses 199+ for amplifiers having
    significant power or bias supply means which may include significant
    details of smoothing filters.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 39+ for conversion
    systems, (i.e., rectification or decertification) in combination with
    smoothing-type filters.


CLS 333/182
TXT Feedthrough type:

    Subject matter under subclass 181 structured so as to include a central
    conductor concentrically surrounded by a capacitive or inductive element or
    by combinations of such elements.

    (1)     Note.  These filter structures are usually adapted to be mounted in
    a partition, wall, or bulkhead, or to be mounted within a connector
    assembly.


CLS 333/183
TXT Resiliently mounted components:

    Subject matter under subclass 182 wherein the central conductor or the
    inductive or capacitive elements are engaged to each other by resilient
    mounting structures.

    (1)     Note.  The resilient mounting structures may include conductive or
    nonconductive elements providing for relative ease in assembling or
    disassembling of filter components and/or for providing relative ease in
    assembling filter components within a connector structure.


CLS 333/184
TXT Monolithic structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 181 wherein inductive or capacitive elements
    are integrated on or within a common substrate or support.


CLS 333/185
TXT Having significant physical structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 wherein the geometry of individual
    parameters or the physical distribution of such parameters is critical to
    obtaining the desired delay.

    (1)     Note.  Included here would be inductive parameters having a
    specific core structure and/or winding geometry (i.e., low capacity
    windings).


CLS 333/186
TXT Electromechanical filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 24 including at least one electrical wave
    driven mechanical vibrator as a frequency determining element, providing
    free transmission of electric waves of a single frequency or band of
    frequencies (which may include zero frequency) while attenuating
    substantially electric waves having other frequencies, or attenuating
    substantially electric waves of a single frequency or band of frequencies
    (which may include zero frequency) while permitting free transmission of
    electric waves having other frequencies, and systems within the class
    definition which include such networks.

    (1)     Note.  In many of the devices in this and the indented subclass,
    the electrical wave energy is converted into mechanical energy which is
    transmitted to a means for reconverting the mechanical energy to electrical
    wave energy.  The mechanical energy transmitting means may be a bar, rod,
    fluid, etc.  The mechanical transmission member determines the frequency of
    the energy transmitted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148+,   for delay networks of the electromechanical transducer type which
    are analogous to wave filters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 49 for telegraph systems utilizing vibrating
    elements for transmitting undulating currents.

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 207+ for mufflers and sound filters, see
    subclass 207 for rods designed to transmit mechanical vibrations and to
    damp out other mechanical vibrations and designed to act as mechanical
    filters.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 311+ for
    piezoelectric devices; and subclass 26 for the miscellaneous
    magnetostrictive devices.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 118 for
    magnetostrictive motors; and subclass 116 for piezoelectric motors.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, in the appropriate
    subclasses for electromechanical transducers of the motor generator type.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    201-204 for dynamoelectric systems.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 174 for amplifier systems having an
    electromechanical transducer coupling element; magnetostrictive means in an
    amplifier system are classified in subclass 60.

    331,    Oscillators, appropriate subclasses particularly subclasses 73,
    116, 139, and 154+ for oscillators employing an electromechanical resonator
    or transducer as an element thereof.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 20 for inductors having magnetostrictive
    structure.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclass 141 for underwater vibration transducers.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    153+ for telephone transmitters and receivers with mechanical sound
    amplifying means (e.g.,  harmonic vibrators); and subclasses 168+ and 190
    for telephone transmitters and receivers using magnetostrictive effects.


CLS 333/187
TXT Using bulk mode piezoelectric vibrator:

    Subject matter under subclass 186 wherein the wave driven mechanical
    resonator is a piezoelectric body subject to changes in its transverse
    and/or longitudinal dimension(s) under the influence of an external
    electric field.

    (1)     Note.  The dimensional deformations of the piezoelectric vibrator
    are accompanied by mechanical bulk wave mode resonances, such resonances
    may be of the transverse, longitudinal, sheer, radial, or plate mode type.

    (2)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are surface acoustic wave
    filters wherein mechanical deformation is realized substantially only along
    the free surface of a piezoelectric body and no significant bulk mode
    resonance effects are realized.


CLS 333/188
TXT With means for varying response:

    Subject matter under subclass 187 wherein the filter bandwidth, center
    frequency, or phasing may be adjusted by mechanically or electrically
    variable parameters.


CLS 333/189
TXT Plural coupled vibrators:

    Subject matter under subclass 187 wherein a plurality of vibrators are
    electrically or mechanically intercoupled so as to provide a composite
    response dependent on the contribution of each vibrator.


CLS 333/190
TXT Lattice structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 189 having four circuit element branches
    connected in series to form a closed circuit, two nonadjacent junction
    points serving as input terminals while the remaining two junctions serve
    as output terminals.

    (1)     Note.  At least two of the circuit element branches include a
    piezoelectric vibrator.

    (2)     Note.  Two of the circuit branches may be formed by a transformer
    winding having a mid-tap, the mid-tap forming one of the input or output
    terminals, and the other winding of the transformer forming the output or
    input connecting means.  See Fig. 4 below.

    (3)     Note.  Included are for example:



CLS 333/191
TXT Monolithic structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 189 wherein a plurality of coupled vibrators
    are formed on a common piezoelectric body.


CLS 333/192
TXT With electrical coupling:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the vibrators include electrical
    intercoupling.

    (1)     Note.  The vibrators may also include mechanical coupling.


CLS 333/193
TXT Using surface acoustic waves:

    Subject matter under subclass 186 wherein mechanical wave energy within a
    desired frequency band is transmitted in the form of acoustic waves
    propagating principally along a free surface or a guiding substrate.

    (1)     Note.  The substrate is usually piezoelectric or comprises a
    surface coated with material having piezoelectric properties.

    (2)     Note.  The surface waves are excited by transducers having a
    desired frequency selectively.


CLS 333/194
TXT Including spurious signal prevention or reduction means:

    Subject matter under subclass 193 including structure for minimizing
    undesired electrical or mechanical mode coupling.


CLS 333/195
TXT With wave-modifying means (e.g., reflectors, resonators, diffractors,
    multistrip couplers, etc):

    Subject matter under subclass 193 including structure for modifying the
    amplitude, phase velocity, or propagation path of surface acoustic wave
    energy along the wave propagation path.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are structures to establish surface acoustic
    wave resonance on selected portions of the propagation path.


CLS 333/196
TXT With response weighting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 193 including significant structure for
    adjusting the amplitude and/or phase versus frequency transmission
    characteristics of the filters.


CLS 333/197
TXT Plural mechanically coupled bar, plate or rod type resonating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 186 wherein plural mechanical vibrators
    structured in the form of bars, rods, or plates are mechanically
    intercoupled.

    (1)     Note.  The individual vibrators may have the same or different
    periods of vibration.


CLS 333/198
TXT Plural interresonator coupling paths:

    Subject matter under subclass 197 wherein some of the vibrators are coupled
    to each other along a plurality of mechanical wave coupling paths.

    (1)     Note.  As an example, two rods or plates are intercoupled at more
    than one point (i.e., two end points of one vibrator are mechanically
    coupled to two end points of a second vibrator).


CLS 333/199
TXT Plural mechanically coupled disk resonators:

    Subject matter under subclass 197 wherein plural disk-shaped vibrators are
    mechanically intercoupled.


CLS 333/200
TXT Reed or fork-type resonators:

    Subject matter under subclass 186 wherein the vibrators are either
    elongated planar flexural mode structures having a relatively large ratio
    of length to width and thickness or are structured so as to resemble the
    tines of a fork.


CLS 333/201
TXT Magnetostrictive wave transmission path:

    Subject matter under subclass 186 wherein mechanical wave energy is
    transmitted by a vibrator comprised of magnetostrictive material.


CLS 333/202
TXT Wave filters including long line elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 24 including elements having distributed
    parameters and permitting free transmission of electric waves of a single
    frequency or band of frequencies (which may include zero frequency) while
    attenuating substantially electric waves having other frequencies, or
    attenuating substantially electric waves of a single frequency or band of
    frequencies (which may include zero frequency) while permitting free
    transmission of electric waves having other frequencies, and systems within
    the class definition which include such networks.

    (1)     Note.  Tuners, which are closely analogous to the wave filters in
    the class, are classified in Class 334, Tuners.  The tuners in Class 334
    may include one or more long line elements in addition to a lumped
    inductance or capacitance element, or the tuner may consist of a
    distributed parameter type tuning unit which is adjusted in discrete,
    distinct steps.  Two or more distributed parameter type tuner units which
    are of the continuously variable type and which are ganged together
    mechanically and/or electrically so as to have their mean resonant
    frequency adjusted in unison are properly classified in Class 334.  Where
    only the bandwidth of the filter is varied without varying the means
    resonant frequency, classification is in this class (333).

    (2)     Note.  Filters combined with circuits having other functions
    classified in other classes are excluded and will be found in other
    classes.  See the classes referred to under "Search Class" below.  Note the
    exception in the case of a mere current and/or voltage control network
    combined with a filter in (4) Note.

    (3)     Note.  Filters which include an active element are excluded.  See
    Class 327, particularly subclasses 552+ where the active element is an
    electron tube or a transistor. Note that Class 327 includes some
    transversal filters.

    (4)     Note.  Filters in combination with means merely to control the
    magnitude of the current and/or voltage in the network are included in this
    and the indented subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for plural channel systems which include filters and for filters
    with plural input and/or output terminals.

    19,     for differentiating or integrating networks which are analogous to
    wave filters.

    20,     for wave shaping networks which are analogous to wave filters and
    which may include wave filters.

    28,     for equalizing networks which are analogous to wave filters.

    100+,   where the filter includes branching means (e.g., a single input
    with plural outputs).

    126,    for resonant filter networks for matching the impedance in branched
    circuits, and branched circuits with line sections analogous to wave
    filters for impedance matching purposes.

    132+,   for branched circuits which include filters.

    156+,   for delay networks having long line elements analogous to wave
    filters.

    219+,   for resonators.

    236+,   for long lines.

    245+,   for long line elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, particularly subclasses 552+ for unwanted signal suppression by an
    active filter which may utilize a transistor or an electron tube.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 53+ for amplifier systems with long line
    element coupling means.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 96+ which include distributed parameters.


CLS 333/203
TXT Digital structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 202 wherein the filter structure includes a
    plurality of electromagnetically coupled bar-or strip-type resonator
    sections aligned perpendicularly to the direction of wave propagation.


CLS 333/204
TXT Stripline or microstrip:

    Subject matter under subclass 202 wherein the filter structure includes a
    long line of the type having planar conductors.

    (1)     Note. Examples of such lines are strip-lines, wherein a flat
    conductor is included between two ground planes, or microstrip lines,
    wherein a flat conductor coacts with a single ground plane.


CLS 333/205
TXT Tunable:

    Subject matter under subclass 204 wherein the filter structure includes
    electrically or mechanically variable parameters to provide an adjustable
    amplitude versus frequency characteristic.


CLS 333/206
TXT Coaxial:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 including a line structure comprising a
    conductor coaxially aligned with an outer cylindrical conductive sheath.


CLS 333/207
TXT Tunable:

    Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein the filter structure includes
    electrically or mechanically variable parameters to provide an adjustable
    amplitude versus frequency characteristic.


CLS 333/208
TXT Waveguide:

    Subject matter under subclass 202 wherein the filter structure includes a
    hollow dielectric tube, a hollow metal tube, or a solid dielectric designed
    to propagate electrical waves having an electric or magnetic field
    component extending in the direction of propagation and wherein the outer
    surfaces of the tube or solid dielectric serve as boundaries for the
    electromagnetic fields.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass would be filters employing
    dielectric rods or dielectric clad conductors wherein the propagation of
    energy is substantially confined to the immediate neighborhood of the rod
    or dielectric clad conductor.


CLS 333/209
TXT Tunable:

    Subject matter under subclass 208 wherein the filter structure includes
    electrically or mechanically variable parameters to provide an adjustable
    amplitude versus frequency characteristic.


CLS 333/210
TXT Including evanescent guide sections:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein a waveguide section has reduced
    or negligible transmission due to the waveguide section being operated
    below its frequency cutoff point.


CLS 333/211
TXT Including frequency selective absorbing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 208 wherein means are provided to dissipate
    or absorb wave energy of a given frequency or band of frequencies.


CLS 333/212
TXT Including directly coupled resonant sections:

    Subject matter under subclass 208 wherein the filter structure includes
    resonant cavities directly coupled by slots or irises.


CLS 333/213
TXT NEGATIVE RESISTANCE OR REACTANCE NETWORKS OF THE ACTIVE TYPE:

    Systems under the class definition including active elements for producing,
    across at least two of the system terminals, a negative resistance and/or
    an inductance or capacitance which may be positive or negative.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include dynamoelectric machine
    systems which are used as a reactance element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 401+
    for nonlinear reactance systems which may exhibit negative resistance
    characteristics.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    212-219 for phase shift systems.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous circuits utilizing
    negative resistance devices.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 75+ for feedback amplifiers of the vacuum,
    tube type, particularly subclasses 82, 93, 101, 104, and 112 for positive
    feedback amplifiers; and subclasses 291+ for transistor feedback amplifiers.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 86+ for magnetron-type oscillators which
    may utilize negative resistance effects; subclass 115 for transistor
    oscillators of the negative resistance type; subclasses 126+ for
    oscillators utilizing the negative resistance characteristic of a gaseous
    space discharge; and subclasses 132+ for negative resistance or negative
    transconductance oscillators in general.  Subclasses 1+ of Class 331
    provide for automatic frequency stabilized oscillators many of which
    utilize adjustable reactance tubes, indented subclass 36 provides for
    particular frequency control means (e.g., reactance tubes, saturable
    inductors, etc.); and subclass 180 provides for oscillators in general
    including frequency adjusting means of the reactance tube type.

    332,    Modulators,  particularly subclasses 140 and 142+ for reactance
    tubes in frequency modulators, subclasses 147+ for reactance tubes in phase
    modulators, and subclass 175 for reactance tubes in amplitude modulators.

    334,    Tuners, subclasses 14+ for tuners utilizing reactance tube networks.


CLS 333/214
TXT Simulating specific type of reactance:

    Subject matter under subclass 213 wherein a positive-valued inductance or
    capacitance is produced.


CLS 333/215
TXT Using gyrator:

    Subject matter under subclass 214 employing a nonreciprocal circuit of the
    type that produces at one point the positive inversion of the impedance at
    a second point (i.e., a positive impedance inverter).

    (1)     Note.  GYRATOR:
    A gyrator is a four-terminal, two-port nonreciprocal network which may be
    defined as follows:



            wherein R1 and R2 are transfer impedances whose product determines
    the gyration constant K.


CLS 333/216
TXT Having negative impedance:

    Subject matter under subclass 213 wherein a negative-valued impedance is
    produced across two of the system terminals.


CLS 333/217
TXT Providing negative resistance:

    Subject matter under subclass 216 wherein the negative impedance is a
    negative resistance.


CLS 333/218
TXT FREQUENCY MULTIPLIERS:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the device has a single
    input and single output and the frequency of the output wave is normally a
    whole number multiple of the input frequency.

    (1)     Note.  The device must be a long line element and use a nonlinear
    solid-state device for multiplying.


CLS 333/219
TXT RESONATORS (DISTRIBUTED PARAMETER TYPE):

    Devices under the class definition comprising conductive enclosures,
    cavities, or wave transmission line sections of the two terminal types and
    having distributed inductance and capacitance, the line sections being
    terminated in other than the characteristic impedance of the line sections,
    the devices presenting resonant characteristics to the exciting source of
    wave energy, and systems within the class definition which include such
    devices.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes resonators even if they are provided
    with tuning means and designated as tuners.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    245+,   for long line elements which are terminated in other than their
    characteristic impedance and which are nonresonant, i.e., transmission line
    elements which are effectively inductances or capacitances, such as being
    1/8 of a wave-length long.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 4+ for
    cathode-ray tubes which have structurally combined therewith a resonant
    structure; subclasses 39+ for electronic tubes having structurally combined
    therewith a resonant transmission line; and subclasses 39.51+ and 40 for
    other electronic tubes which include resonant structures.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 53+ for amplifiers having distributed
    parameter coupling which may be resonant; subclass 45 for electron beam
    type amplifiers having cavity resonator coupling means; subclass 49 for
    amplifiers wherein the active element is a tube having distributed
    parameter characteristics which may be resonant.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 5, 6+, 9, 79+, 86+, 93, and 96+ for
    oscillator systems utilizing distributed parameter resonators as an element
    thereof.

    332,    Modulators, particularly subclasses 129+ for resonators in
    frequency modulators and subclasses 163+ for resonators in amplitude
    modulators.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 723 for single
    adjustable length electrically long linear antennas; subclasses 745+ for
    antennas with a variable reactance for tuning the antenna; subclasses 746
    and 767+ for slot-type antennas which may include resonator structure;
    subclasses 790+ for sleeve-type antennas; subclasses 793+ for balanced
    doublet-type antennas which may have resonant characteristics; subclasses
    825+ for fractional, multiple, or full wavelength-type antennas; and
    subclass 843 for antennas having an appreciable wave-length dimension.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 130+ for radio receivers using
    resonators, see particularly subclasses 325+ for frequency conversion means
    with distributed parameter elements which may be resonant.


CLS 333/219.1
TXT Dielectric type:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 where the resonator device is a
    dielectric material body in which field configurations excited by the
    source of wave energy are substantially confined therein.


CLS 333/219.2
TXT Magnetic type:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 where the resonator device possesses
    magnetic properties responsive to the exciting source of wave energy.


CLS 333/220
TXT Open wire or lecher line:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 wherein the line section is of the
    parallel wire type normally an integral number of half-wavelengths long so
    as to set up standing waves on the section.


CLS 333/221
TXT With tuning:

    Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein the resonator has means which can
    be adjusted to resonate or operate at a specified frequency.


CLS 333/222
TXT Coaxial or shielded:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 wherein the resonator is of the two
    conductor type having a central conductor concentric with the resonator
    outer conductor.


CLS 333/223
TXT With tuning:

    Subject matter under subclass 222 wherein the resonator has means which can
    be adjusted to resonate or operate at a specified frequency.


CLS 333/224
TXT Having movable element:

    Subject matter under subclass 223 wherein the frequency is adjusted by a
    movable element.


CLS 333/225
TXT Using movable shorting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 224 wherein short-circuiting means is
    included with the coaxial or shielded transmission line.


CLS 333/226
TXT Using plunger, rod, or piston:

    Subject matter under subclass 224 wherein the movable element is a plunger,
    rod, or piston.


CLS 333/227
TXT Cavity resonator:

    Devices and systems under subclass 219 where the resonator device is an
    enclosure or cavity so constructed that the field configuration excited
    within the boundaries of the device includes longitudinal as well as
    transverse field components.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 5+ for
    cathode-ray tubes which have structurally combined therewith a hollow
    resonant structure (e.g., waveguide hollow resonator); subclasses 39+ for
    electronic tubes structurally combined with a waveguide section; and
    subclasses 39.51+ and 40 for other electronic tubes structurally combined
    with resonator structure (e.g., magnetrons).

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 45 for electron beam tube amplifiers coupled
    to a cavity resonator; and subclass 56 for amplifiers, generally having a
    resonator of the waveguide, cavity, or concentric line type.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 5, 6+, 81+, 86+, 93, and 96 for oscillator
    systems utilizing distributed parameter resonators, which resonators may be
    of the cavity or hollow waveguide type.

    332,    Modulators, particularly subclasses 129+ for resonators in
    frequency modulators and subclasses 163+ for resonators in amplitude
    modulators.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 762 and 772+ for
    waveguide-type antennas; and subclass 771 for plural slot-type antennas
    with waveguide coupling.


CLS 333/228
TXT With mode suppressor:

    Subject matter under subclass 227 wherein means are provided to minimize or
    substantially eliminate extraneous modes of oscillation in cavity
    resonators.


CLS 333/229
TXT With temperature compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 227 wherein the cavity resonator has thermal
    compensation means to substantially reduce the effects of temperature
    variations on the operating frequency.


CLS 333/230
TXT With coupling:

    Subject matter under subclass 227 wherein significant structure is included
    for effecting the transfer of oscillatory energy between the cavity
    resonator and another circuit.


CLS 333/231
TXT With tuning:

    Subject matter under subclass 227 wherein the cavity has means whereby the
    cavity can be adjusted to resonate or operate at a specified frequency.


CLS 333/232
TXT Having movable element:

    Subject matter under subclass 231 wherein the frequency is adjusted by a
    movable element.


CLS 333/233
TXT Using movable wall:

    Subject matter under subclass 232 wherein the movable element is a wall
    that moves or is flexible.


CLS 333/234
TXT Temperature compensated:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 wherein the resonator has thermal
    compensation means to substantially reduce the effects of temperature
    variations on the operating frequency.


CLS 333/235
TXT With tuning:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 wherein the cavity of the resonator has
    means which can be adjusted to resonate or operate at a specific frequency.


CLS 333/236
TXT LONG LINES:

    Structure under the class definition providing a single channel of
    indefinite length for conveying and guiding wave energy, and having
    distributed electrical parameters so related or proportioned as to
    determine the wave propagating characteristics of the channel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for long lines with means to eliminate interference currents
    therein or with means to minimize radiation therefrom.

    22,     for dissipative terminations for transmission lines.

    23,     for artificial lines simulating a transmission line.

    26,     for coupling networks for connecting balanced to unbalanced
    circuits or vice versa which include a long line element.

    27,     for transmission lines with coupling networks at the opposed ends.

    33+,    for impedance matching networks which include a long line element.

    202+,   for filters which include a long line element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, appropriate subclasses for
    conductor structure other than loaded lines and lines defined as having
    long line characteristics; see subclasses 27 and 113+ for parallel or
    twisted conductor structures; subclasses 28 and 102+ for coaxial and
    shielded cable structure; subclasses 32+ for anti-inductive conductor
    structures; subclasses 37+ for underground conductor structures; and
    subclasses 40+ for overhead conductor structures.

    178,    Telegraphy, for telegraph transmission line systems; and
    particularly subclasses 45+ for loaded circuits; subclass 63 for long cable
    systems; and subclass 69 for line-clearing and circuit-maintenance systems.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, appropriate
    subclasses, particularly subclasses 146 and 147+ for miscellaneous systems
    of distribution with transmission lines usually of the electrically short
    type.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 3.5+ and
    4+ for transmission line sections structurally combined with cathode-ray
    tubes; and subclasses 39+ for electronic tubes which are structurally
    combined with a transmission line of the distributed parameter type.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 51+, 54, 66+, 95,
    and  600+  for arrangements to determine the electrical characteristics of
    transmission lines.

    329,    Demodulators, subclass 322 for a frequency demodulator including
    distributed parameter structure and subclass 354 for an amplitude
    demodulator including distributed parameter structure.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 53+ for amplifiers coupled to a long line.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, for miscellaneous electrical signaling
    systems which include a long line. Note subclasses 310.01+ for such systems
    where the signal is transmitted over a power line; and subclass 320 for
    signaling using a fluid conduit to transmit the signal.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 700+ for antennas
    which may involve long lines.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, for telephone transmission line systems;
    particularly subclasses 90.01+ for composite systems (e.g., telegraph and
    telephone); subclass 398 for anti-inductive systems; and subclasses 1+ for
    long line testing device.


CLS 333/237
TXT Leaky lines:

    Subject matter under subclass 236 wherein the long line carries a
    travelling wave which is lightly coupled to a series of leakage apertures
    to create a concentrated, uniform, radiation field in the immediate
    vicinity of the aperture.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the patents in this subclass are directed towards
    radiating energy from a coaxial cable in a building, tunnel, or mine and/or
    for vehicle communication.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 700+ for the
    structural details of the radiating aperture used in conjunction with the
    long line, e.g., subclasses 767+ for slots.


CLS 333/238
TXT Strip type:

    Subject matter under subclass 236 wherein the long line is of the type
    having planar conductors.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of such lines are stripline, microstrip, slot line,
    and coplanar waveguide.


CLS 333/239
TXT Waveguide type:

    Subject matter under subclass 236 particularly adapted for propagating
    electric waves having an electric or magnetic field component extending in
    the direction of propagation.

    (1)     Note.  The waveguide may be a hollow dielectric or metal tube or
    solid dielectric rod, the wave energy being propagated along the interior
    of the tube or rod and confined by the walls of the tube or rod.


CLS 333/240
TXT Surface wave:

    Subject matter under subclass 239 for propagating, without substantial
    radiation, electromagnetic energy along the interface between two media
    having different physical properties (e.g., different permittivities).

    (1)     Note.  While the electromagnetic field extends to infinity in a
    direction transverse to the guide, the energy density decreases with
    distance so that most of the energy propagation is in the immediate
    neighborhood of the interface.

    (2)     Note.  Surface wave guiding structures may comprise dielectric clad
    conductive cylinders, conductive planes with parallel grooves or conductive
    cylinders with radial grooves, or a dielectric rod clad with a dielectric
    media of a different permittivity.


CLS 333/241
TXT Flexible:

    Subject matter under subclass 239 wherein the waveguide is articulated,
    segmented, or otherwise structured so as to permit desired bending without
    appreciable wave mode distortion and/or without appreciable characteristic
    impedance variation.


CLS 333/242
TXT Circular or helical structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 239 wherein the guide structure is a hollow
    conductive cylinder, a helical conductor, or a helical conductor located
    within a conductive screen.


CLS 333/243
TXT Shielded type:

    Subject matter under subclass 236 wherein the long line comprises at least
    one electrical conductor surrounded by an electrically conducting screen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, coaxial cable-type
    conductors and other transmission lines having one or more conductors
    surrounded by an outer metal sheath which is designed for use as a
    conductor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for interference suppression and/or elimination systems which may
    include electrical screens or shields, and for conductor arrangements which
    involve shielding means or structure in addition to the conductor
    arrangement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, particularly subclasses
    28+ for the structure of coaxial or concentric-type cables having a fluid
    or vacuum; subclass 36 for electrically shielded or screened conductors;
    and subclasses 102+ for cables or conductor structure having a conductive
    armor or sheath.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 4+ for
    cathode-ray tubes which have structurally combined therewith a coaxial
    cable section; and subclasses 39+ for other electronic tubes which have
    structurally combined therewith a coaxial cable section.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 841+ for antennas
    with an electrical shield; subclass 851 for antennas with a coupling
    network including a radiation suppressor; and subclass 905 for antennas
    combined with a transmission line which may include a shield for the
    transmission line.


CLS 333/244
TXT Including spaced, electrically compensated, internal support means:

    Subject matter under subclass 243 having spaced apart support means for an
    internal conductor, wherein the support means and/or ancillary reactance
    means function to reduce the effects of impedance discontinuities normally
    resulting from the use of a discontinuous support structure.


CLS 333/245
TXT LONG LINE ELEMENTS AND COMPONENTS:

    Components and elements under the class definition not constituting a
    complete network which are limited by claimed structure to use in long
    lines and which are not otherwise classified, and also long line elements.

    (1)     Note. Included in this subclass are structures and devices for
    modifying the characteristics of a transmission line at a particular
    location, for example, line short-circuiting switches, line-shorting plugs,
    impedance elements, and long line elements which are terminated in other
    than their characteristic impedance and are nonresonant (e.g., a
    short-circuited line 1/8 of a wavelength long).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for resonator type breakdown discharge device networks for short
    circuiting a long line.

    22,     for dissipating terminations for long lines.

    101+,   for branched circuits having switching means.

    219+,   for resonators.

    236+,   for long lines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, appropriate subclasses for
    conductors, housing insulators, conductor joints, and end structure where
    no significant wave propagation characteristic limiting the structures to
    use with long lines is claimed.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses
    for switching structure in general.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, appropriate subclasses for couplings for
    coaxial lines or for waveguides where no significant electrical features
    are claimed.

    329,    Demodulators, subclass 322 for a frequency demodulator including
    distributed parameter structure and subclass 354 for an amplitude
    demodulator including distributed parameter structure.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 53+ for amplifiers with distributed
    parameter coupling means including subject matter involving structural
    details of such means.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave, subclasses 907+ for antenna components.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, for transmission line electrical connectors
    where no significant wave propagation characteristic are claimed which
    limit the structure to use with long lines.


CLS 333/246
TXT Strip type:

    Subject matter under subclass 245 wherein the long line is of the type
    having planar conductors.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of such lines are stripline (two ground planes),
    microstrip (one ground plane), slot lines, or coplanar waveguides.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238,    for strip-type lines, per se.


CLS 333/247
TXT Semiconductor mounts:

    Subject matter under subclass 246 wherein a strip-type board is used to
    hold or support a solid-state device such as a transistor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 662-664.


CLS 333/248
TXT Waveguide elements and components:

    Components and elements under subclass 245 which are limited to use with
    waveguides, and also waveguide elements.

    (1)     Note.  A waveguide may be a hollow dielectric or metal tube or a
    solid dielectric rod, the wave energy being propagated along the interior
    of the tube or rod and confined by the walls of the tube or rod.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for directional couplers having parallel-guide waveguides.

    114,    for directional couplers having crossed-guide waveguides.

    122,    for hybrid-type networks using waveguide.

    135,    for frequency separation utilizing long line elements including
    waveguide elements.

    157+,   for delay lines including long line waveguide elements.

    239+,   for types of waveguide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 100-178 for waveguide
    structures and accessories which are not limited to electrical use.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, appropriate subclasses for
    conduits and transmission line structure limited to electrical use but not
    having long line characteristics.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, appropriate subclasses for pipe couplings
    not limited to electrical use.

    329,    Demodulators, subclass 322 for a frequency demodulator including
    distributed parameter structure and subclass 354 for an amplitude
    demodulator including distributed parameter structure.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 783 for
    waveguide-type antennas with internal wave refraction means; and subclass
    785 for waveguide-type antennas which are of the dielectric type.


CLS 333/249
TXT Bend:

    Subject matter under subclass 248 wherein the longitudinal axis of the
    waveguide element changes direction.


CLS 333/250
TXT Active element mounting:

    Subject matter under subclass 248 wherein the waveguide element is designed
    to support an active element (e.g., diode, tube) in the waveguide.


CLS 333/251
TXT Mode suppressor:

    Subject matter under subclass 248 wherein the waveguide is designed to pass
    a desired electromagnetic mode or modes and block or filter out any
    undesired electromagnetic mode or modes.


CLS 333/252
TXT Window:

    Subject matter under subclass 248 wherein the waveguide element contains an
    electromagnetic wave-permeable solid plate lying transverse to the
    direction of wave propagation.


CLS 333/253
TXT Including variable impedance:

    Subject matter under subclass 248 wherein structure is provided in the
    waveguide to adjust the impedance (normally the reactive portion) of the
    line at selected terminal planes.

    (1)     Note.  Movable shorting stubs and movable irises are classified
    here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33+,    for impedance matching between networks.


CLS 333/254
TXT Connectors and interconnections:

    Subject matter under subclass 248 having means for joining separate
    waveguide sections.


CLS 333/255
TXT Quick disconnect:

    Subject matter under subclass 254 wherein the joined waveguides are
    provided with means to rapidly connect and disconnect the waveguides.


CLS 333/256
TXT Movable:

    Subject matter under subclass 254 including structure which allows relative
    movement between the joined waveguides during normal operation.


CLS 333/257
TXT In line:

    Subject matter under subclass 256 wherein the axes of the joined waveguide
    sections are aligned.


CLS 333/258
TXT Switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 248 wherein wave energy is selectively passed
    along the waveguide by a means which abruptly connects and disconnects a
    single waveguide input from a single waveguide output.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101+,   for switches in branched circuits.


CLS 333/259
TXT Mechanically movable:

    Subject matter under subclass 258 wherein the connecting and disconnecting
    is accomplished using mechanically actuated means.

    (1)     Note.  The mechanically actuated means may be a movable vane or
    movable shorting pins.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105+,   for mechanical switches in branched circuits.


CLS 333/260
TXT Connectors and interconnections:

    Subject matter under subclass 245 having means for joining separate long
    line sections.


CLS 333/261
TXT Rotary coupling:

    Subject matter under subclass 260 having means to provide relative rotation
    between two intercoupled long line sections.


CLS 333/262
TXT Switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 245 wherein energy is selectively passed
    along the long line by abruptly connecting and disconnecting a single line
    input from a single line output.


CLS 333/263
TXT Including variable impedance:

    Subject matter under subclass 245 wherein means are connected to the long
    line to adjust the impedance (normally the reactive portion) of the line at
    selected terminal planes.

    (1)     Note.  Movable short circuits and variable reactances are
    classified here.


CLS 334/
TTL TUNERS

CLS 334/
TXT INDEX TO CLASS DEFINITION AND NOTES



    I.      DEFINITIONS OF TERMS USED

    II.     GENERAL STATEMENT OF THE CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    III.    TUNERS CLASSIFIED ELSEWHERE

    IV.     TUNERS COMBINED WITH OR INCORPORATED IN OTHER DEVICES

    V.      TUNER COMPONENTS AND SUBCOMBINATIONS

    VI.     DEVICES SIMULATING TUNERS

    VII.    MEASURING OR TESTING TUNERS

    VIII. SEARCH CLASS

    IX.     INDEX TO CLASSES REFERRED TO IN THE PREVIOUS SECTIONS

    I.      DEFINITIONS OF TERMS USED:

    INDUCTOR

    An impedance device comprising a coil means, with or without core means,
    for introducing inductance into an electric circuit.  Both transformers and
    inductive reactors are included within the meaning of "inductor".

    VARIABLE INDUCTOR

    A passive inductor wherein the inductor device includes a movable element
    which may be adjusted to different positions or adjusted to vary its
    physical dimensions to change the effective inductance from one value to
    another.

    Examples of such movable elements are: a tap changing switch, a distortable
    coil or core, or movable coupled coils.

    Inductor devices designed to change inductance (1) as a function of the
    current and/or voltage flowing through the inductor winding, or (2) in
    accordance with a magnetic field or bias applied to the core or coil of the
    device, or (3) as a function of the ambient temperature or some external
    condition applied to the device, and wherein no physical element of the
    inductor is moved to effect such change in inductance, are not considered
    adjustable under the above definition.

    Such variable inductors will be found in subclass 4 of this class for
    magnetic field responsive tuners, subclasses 5+ of this class for condition
    responsive tuners, subclasses 12+ of this class for saturable core type
    tuners.

    INDUCTANCE

    That property of an electrical circuit, or of two or more neighboring
    circuits, by which a varying current produces or induces an electromotive
    force in the circuit or neighboring circuits.  If an electromotive force is
    induced in the neighboring circuit or circuits, the term mutual inductance
    is used.

    CAPACITOR

    That property of a system of conductors and dielectrics used to secure an
    appreciable capacitance by allowing the storage of electricity when a
    potential difference exists between the conductors.  There must be at least
    two or more conductors separated by a dielectric.

    CAPACITANCE

    The property of a capacitor to store and hold an electric charge and which
    is equivalent to the ratio of the equivalent charge stored in the capacitor
    to the resultant change of potential.

    FREQUENCY

    The number of complete alternations or cycles made by an alternating signal
    per unit of time. The frequency unit most used is cycles per second.

    FREQUENCY BAND

    A plurality of different frequency channels which are grouped together into
    a particular bunch or group of channels all designated or used for the same
    purpose.  An example of this is the broadcast band which consists of a
    plurality of frequency channels whose center frequencies are separated by a
    specified amount, each frequency being used for the same purpose, namely
    the transmission of speech.  A second example of a band of frequencies is
    the use of certain channels of frequencies for the transmission of
    television.  Here the common purpose of the plural channels of frequencies
    making up the band is the transmission of a video signal plus an audio
    signal.

    ELECTROMAGNETIC OPERATOR

    A machine or device which is capable of exerting a force upon the control
    or actuator of an element or circuit to thus move or control the element or
    circuit, the machine or device being operated by the interaction of the
    magnetic effect of an electrical current and/or magnetic field.  An
    example, of this type of machine or device is a relay, solenoid or electric
    motor connected to the shaft of a variable capacitor, the machines or
    devices responding to a flow of current and/or voltage through them to thus
    drive or move the shaft of the variable capacitor.

    INDICATOR

    An element or device which is particularly adapted to point out or show,
    usually visually, the position and/or condition to which a given element or
    elements are adjusted as, for example, a scale and pointer, one of which is
    held stationary while the other is connected to a rotatable or movable
    shaft such as the shaft of a variable capacitor.  A second example would be
    the use of a meter to indicate the amount of current and/or voltage flowing
    in a given circuit.

    RESONANCE

    The point in the adjustment of a tuned circuit to a particular channel or
    signal frequency at which the inductive reactance equals the capacitive
    reactance.  The resonance frequency may also be described as the point
    where the oscillation or vibration present in the circuit may be maintained
    with the least amount of external excitation with the excitation producing
    a relatively large amplitude of oscillation or vibration.

    TUNER

    A device for tuning which consists of an inductor and capacitor or an
    inductor, capacitor and resistor so connected and resistor so connected as
    to form a resonance circuit, the mean frequency or channel to which the
    tuner is resonant being variable.  The resistance may be in the form of the
    inherent resistance of the circuit or a lumped resistance element connected
    in the circuit.  For a lumped resistor element connected in a tuned
    circuit, see subclass 40 of this class.

    TUNING

    The step or steps by which a tuner is adjusted in relation to a signal
    frequency or channel in order to obtain optimum or maximum resonance of the
    tuner circuit or system at some selected operating point or signal
    frequency.

    II.     GENERAL STATEMENT OF THE CLASS SUBJECT MATTER:

    A.      This class includes tuners as above defined.  In function the tuner
    serves to select and pass or reject a particular frequency from a signal
    presented to the tuned circuit while attenuating or suppressing the passage
    or rejection of any other frequency that may be present in the signal.
    Generally the tuner consists of an inductor and capacitor, one or both of
    which may be variable, connected together in such a manner as to form a
    resonant circuit.  For classification here, some means must be present in
    the tuner to vary the mean resonant frequency of the tuner from one
    frequency to another.  The means present in the tuner should be something
    more than just the incidental showing of a generalized variable impedance
    element, but should be some means which is included in the circuit for the
    express purpose of making the resonant circuit variable over a range of
    frequencies.  This means usually is in the form of a specific variable
    impedance device, such as an inductor or capacitor, the variation of which
    changes the electrical parameters of the circuit thus causing a shift in
    resonance of the circuit.  The means may, however, consist of two or more
    impedances of fixed value which are adapted to be switched or substituted
    into or out of the resonant circuit. Excluded are wave filters which are
    closely analogous in that they are designed to pass or reject a single
    frequency or band of frequencies.  Wave filters, generally, have no
    provisions or means which are particularly designed for and meant to vary
    the mean frequency of the filter during operation of the filter unit in a
    radio circuit.  The wave filter may have "trimmer" means which is designed
    to "peak" the response of the filter, but these trimmers are not meant to
    be used in varying the resonance frequency of the filter during the
    operation of the filter in an electrical circuit such as, for example, a
    radio receiver.  A wave filter having trimmer means is usually adjusted
    prior to the installing of the filter in an electrical circuit.  The filter
    once adjusted is rarely, if ever, adjusted again unless the resonance
    characteristic of the filter requires some additional peaking.  A circuit
    which has means to merely broaden or narrow the band which is being passed
    without varying or changing the means or center frequency to which the
    circuit is tuned does not amount to tuning but is considered a filter for
    Class 333, Wave Transmission Lines and Networks.  However, a circuit which
    broadens or narrows the pass band and which also varies the mean or center
    frequency of a filter is considered a tuner.

    B.      Included also are tuners with perfecting structure, such as a
    remote control circuit, a resonance indicator, tuner units with an
    electromagnetic operator, or tuners with automatic frequency centering
    circuits which are not otherwise classifiable.

    C.      Also included are tuners combined with or incorporated in other
    structure and not elsewhere classifiable, such as a tuner combined with a
    tube socket or a special punched chassis.  Also included are tuners
    combined with or incorporated in diverse nonelectrical devices and which
    combination is not classifiable elsewhere.

    D.      Included also are tuners constructed as by the type of actuator
    used or from selected material so that the impedance values of the tuner
    changes particularly well in response to a particular condition or change
    in a particular condition such as current and/or voltage as, for example; a
    tuner using a saturable core type inductor; a tuner using a voltage
    responsive capacitor; or a tuner responsive to a magnetic field.  Also
    included are tuners usually of the mechanically variable type together with
    a condition sensing actuator which changes the mechanical adjustment of the
    tuner in response to a condition or a change in condition.  An example, of
    such a tuner is one having a heat sensitive actuator, or a tuner that is
    deformable as by compression by a weight or force.

    E.      Subcombinations and components of tuners not otherwise
    classifiable, such as a resonance indicator, are classified in this class.

    III.    TUNERS CLASSIFIED ELSEWHERE:

    Certain circuits or devices which may be considered tuners are not
    classified here.  Class 333, Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, provides
    in subclasses 167+ for tuned resonance type wave filters which may be
    referred to as a tuner.  Also found in these subclasses of Class 333 are
    the resistor-capacitor circuits such as bridged-T, double-T or Weir Bridge
    networks, for example, which are sometimes referred to as tuners.  Also see
    subclasses 219+ of Class 333 for tunable resonators of the distributed
    parameter type in which there are no lumped impedance elements present and
    where only a single resonator is used.  The inclusion of a lumped impedance
    element in the resonant circuit or the coupling of two or more distributed
    parameter type units together to form a single tuner will result in
    classification in this class.

    IV.     TUNERS COMBINED WITH OR INCORPORATED IN OTHER DEVICES:

    As stated in section II. C. above, this class includes tuners combined with
    or incorporated in other structure not elsewhere classified.  See subclass
    39 of this class for tuners combined with various other devices and
    subclass 85 for tuners combined with or having shielding or housing means.
    The combination of a tuner with or in other structure or circuits is very
    common.  A partial list of the classes and subclasses including this
    combination is given below:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 10+ for tuners by name
    only combined with shaft operators for radio tuners.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 600+ for inductive heating, note
    subclass 750 for microwave heating with tuned circuits, and subclasses 764+
    for capacitive dielectric heating.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 250 for wave meters utilizing tuners as an
    element thereof.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 5.46+ for
    a cathode-ray tube circuit which has plural hollow indicator or distributed
    parameter type inductive structure; subclasses 5.53+ for cathode ray tube
    circuits with tunable distributed parameter type inductive structure, and
    subclasses 39.55+ for combined load device or load device temperature
    modifying means and electrical magnetron circuit device structure of the
    variable tuned distributed parameter resonator type.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 16 for a motor control
    system controlled by space transmitted electromagnetic or electrostatic
    energy, and subclass 510 for electrical motive power systems having an
    impedance controlled armature or primary circuit which comprises diverse
    impedances including an inductor and capacitor.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 78 for generator
    control systems which have a tuned or resonant circuit in the excitation
    winding or control circuit.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 76.41+ for circuits
    which measure, test or sense electricity, per se, by frequency comparison.
    The frequency comparison circuit usually has at least one or more tuned
    circuits.  See also, subclass 76.51 of Class 324 for frequency testing
    systems in general utilizing tuning.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 3+ for miscellaneous phase comparing circuits and
    subclasses 40+ for miscellaneous frequency comparing circuits, either of
    which may utilize a tuned circuit.

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses for demodulators with tuned
    input.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 154, for cascaded amplifier stages having a
    transformer or resonant circuit in the interstage coup- ling, subclasses
    157+ for interstage coupling networks which may include resonant circuits,
    subclasses 185+ for input coupling networks and subclasses 192+ for output
    coupling networks which may include resonant circuits.

    331,    Oscillators, appropriate subclasses, for oscillator circuits which
    contain a frequency or period determining element such as a resonator or
    tuning means. See subclasses 1+ for automatic frequency controlled
    oscillators, subclasses 167+ for oscillators having an L-C type tuned
    circuit, and subclasses 177+ for frequency adjusting means combined with
    the oscillator circuit.

    332,    Modulators, appropriate subclasses for modulators using tuned
    circuits and particularly subclass 175 for a variable tuned circuit in an
    amplitude modulator.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 167+ for wave filters in general having fixed center
    frequencies, particularly indented subclass 175 for resonant type wave
    filters, and see subclasses 219+ for tuners of the distributed parameter
    resonator type.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.69 and 825.72 for
    systems having a control signal used for control purposes.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, appropriate subclasses for
    radio wave energy systems utilizing tuned circuits, subclass 745 for
    antennae with variable reactance means for tuning the antenna.

    346,    Recorders, subclass 37 for recording means which is responsive to
    the tuning of a radio receiver.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 113 for
    electrical equipment having safety or protection equipment which employs a
    tuned circuit, and subclasses 161 and 147 for frequency responsive circuits
    for relays and electromagnets in which the frequency responsive circuit
    usually has one or more tuned circuits.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclasses 343+ for combining or distributing information via frequency
    channels in communication over free space, and subclasses 480+ for
    combining or distributing information via frequency channels in
    communication over wire.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 100+ for a transmitter having a
    tuner; and subclasses 150.1+ for a receiver having a tuner.

    V.      TUNER COMPONENTS AND SUBCOMBINATIONS:

    Included below is the classification of the most common subject matter
    which may constitute a part or subcombination of a tuner:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, appropriate subclasses for means
    to indicate the position or band to which a tuner is positioned.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 10+ for shaft operators
    which are particularly adapted for mechanically rotating one or more shafts
    of electronic tuning devices into desired angular positions, and subclasses
    527+ for detents which are used in connection with fixed and movable
    members such as a tuner housing and shaft and which are especially adapted
    to check or arrest the motion of the movable element.  Such detents are
    commonly used to properly position the tuner to some particular frequency
    or band of frequencies.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses
    for circuit makers and breakers of the switch type which may be used in
    combination with several inductors and/or capacitors to form a switch type
    tuner.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclass for a
    motor system which may be used to drive and control a tuner.  Note
    especially subclasses 445+ for motor control systems which automatically
    start and/or stop at a particular point such as might be used with a
    remotely controlled television type tuner.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 213+ for positive
    or negative reactance networks of the active element type and subclass 235
    for resonators of the distributed parameter type which may be mechanically
    and/or electrically connected together to form a tuner.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for inductor devices of
    the type which are adapted to be combined with some capacitor means to form
    a tuned circuit.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, appropriate subclasses for resistor elements
    which may be used in combination with an inductor and capacitor means to
    form a tuned circuit.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 271+ for
    capacitors, per se, which are used in combination with an inductance means
    to form a tuner.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 150.1+ for apparatus such as a
    housing that may be used with a tuner.




    VI.     DEVICES SIMULATING TUNERS:

    Class 333, Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 167+ for wave
    filters, and subclasses 219+ for resonators of the distributed parameter
    type.

    VII.    MEASURING OR TESTING TUNERS:

    This class does not provide for either methods of or apparatus for
    measuring and testing tuners. If the measuring or testing is of a
    mechanical nature or not otherwise classified, classification is in Class
    73, Measuring and Testing.  See also the Search Notes in Class 73 for a
    more detailed field of search to measuring and testing devices and systems.
     If the measuring or testing involves determining the frequency or
    electrical properties of the tuner, classification is in Class 324,
    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 600+.

    VIII.   SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, for means for displaying
    information, the information that is displayed may be the position or
    channel to which a tuner is adjusted.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, for measuring and testing devices generally.
     See section VII above.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 10+ for machine elements
    and mechanisms particularly adapted for mechanically rotating one or more
    shafts of electronic tuning devices into desired angular positions.

    84,     Music, appropriate subclasses for musical devices that may use
    tuned circuits, especially subclasses 671 - 746 for electrical tone
    generation by the use of tuned sound generators or resonators.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 241+, for indicators attached to
    or associated with some movable or adjustable radio tuning devices to
    indicate the movement, adjustment or position of such devices.  Usually the
    indicator is of the movable-pointer and scale type.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 35+ for shields
    and screens, per se, and subclasses 50+ for electrical boxes and housings,
    per se.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses
    for electrical make and break switch, per se, which may be used in a switch
    type tuner.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 750 for microwave heating with tuned
    circuits.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 105
    for electrical transmission or interconnection systems with harmonic
    filters which may be adjustable.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 5.46+ for
    cathode- ray tube circuits in which the cathode ray passes through plural
    hollow distributed parameter devices that are tunable; subclasses 5.53+ for
    circuits in which the cathode ray passes through a tunable hollow
    distributed parameter device, and subclasses 39.55+ for distributed
    parameter resonator type magnetrons having variable tuning means.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 16 for electrical
    motor power systems which are controlled from a distance by space
    transmitted electromagnetic or electrostatic energy and which are closely
    analogous to some remote controlled tuner circuits; subclass 460 for
    electrical motor power systems which have automatic and/or time-delay means
    which are responsive to sound, supersonic vibration or mechanical
    vibration, and subclass 480 for systems responsive to radiant energy.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 78 for generator
    control systems which have plural impedances in the excitation circuit, the
    impedances forming a tuned circuit.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 76.41+ for
    measuring, testing or sensing electricity, per se, by frequency comparison,
    and subclass 76.51 for measuring, testing or sensing electricity, per se,
    by a tuning step.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 3+ for miscellaneous phase comparing circuits and
    subclasses 40+ for miscellaneous frequency comparing circuits, either of
    which may utilize a tuned circuit.

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses for demodulators with tuned
    input or indicator.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 65 for structure of various amplifier elements
    such as a tuned circuit; subclasses 144+ for amplifier stages having a
    variable impedance element which is controlled by a separate control means;
    subclass 154 for cascaded amplifiers having a resonant circuit used in the
    interstage coupling network; subclasses 165+ for interstage coupling of the
    transformer type; subclasses 188+ for transformer coupled input circuits
    and subclasses 195+ for amplifiers having transformer coupling in the
    output circuit.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 1+ for oscillators having automatic
    frequency stabilization means using a phase or frequency sensing means;
    subclasses 96+ for oscillators with distributed parameter resonators;
    subclasses 117, 128, and 167+ for inductor-capacitor type oscillators, and
    subclasses 177+ for oscillators having frequency adjusting means.

    332,    Modulators,  subclasses 140 and 142+ for variable reactance tubes
    in a frequency modulator and subclass 175 for a variable tuned circuit in
    an amplitude modulator.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, appropriate subclasses for
    wave transmission lines and networks which may be resonant at one or more
    frequencies, especially subclasses 167+ for wave filter coupling networks;
    subclasses 235+ for variable resonators of the distributed parameter type,
    and subclasses 245+ for long line elements.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 209+ for magnets and electromagnets.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for inductors, per se,
    which may have a fixed or variable inductance value.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, appropriate subclasses for resistors, per se,
    which may be closely analogous to certain types of tuners.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825+ for selective remote
    control system; and subclasses 825.69 and 825.72 for systems having a
    control signal utilized to control a remotely located system or device.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 745+ for an
    antenna having variable reactance for tuning, and subclasses 850+ for
    antennas with a coupling network or impedance in the lead-in.

    346,    Recorders, subclass 37 for a recorder device combined with and
    responsive to the tuning means of a radio receiver.

    348,    Television, subclasses 731+ for tuners associated with television
    receiver circuitry including search tuners and tuners combined with
    indicator, subclass 734 for remote control of a tuner in a television
    receiver, and subclass 735 for automatic frequency control circuits.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 113 for
    electrical safety protection systems and devices having a tune circuit;
    subclass 270 for transformer or inductors combined with a capacitor; and
    subclasses 271+ for capacitors, per se.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclasses 343+ for combining or distributing information via frequency
    channels in communication over free space, and subclasses 480+ for
    combining or distributing information via frequency channels in
    communication over wire.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 138+ for
    electrical induction type furnaces involving a charge supported by an
    adequate furnace structure and placed in electromagnetic relationship with
    an inducing winding, the charge forming the secondary of the coil winding.
    The coil winding may be resonant with a capacitor.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 120+ for radio transmitters with
    tuners; and subclasses 150.1+ for receivers with tuners.



    IX.     INDEX TO CLASSES REFERRED TO IN THE PREVIOUS SECTIONS:

                                    Section No.

    13,     Electric Furnaces       VIII

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting       V, VIII

    73,     Measuring and Testing   VII, VIII

    74,     Machine Element or
    Mechanism       IV, V, VIII

    84,     Music           VIII

    116,    Signals and Indicators  VIII

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and
    Insulators              VIII

    178,    Telegraphs      IV, VIII

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers
    and Breakers    V, VIII

    219,    Electric Heating        VIII

    307,    Electrical Transmission or
    Interconnection Systems VIII

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge
    Devices:  Systems       IV, VIII

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power
    Systems         IV, V, VIII

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator
    System          IV, VIII

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and
    Testing         IV,VII,VIII

    327,    Miscellaneous Active
    Electrical Nonlinear
    Devices, Circuits,
    and Systems     IV, VIII

    329,    Demodulators,   IV, VIII

    330,    Amplifiers      IV, VIII

    331,    Oscillators     IV, VIII

    332,    Modulators      IV, VIII

    333,    Wave Transmission       III, IV, V,

            Lines and Networks      VI, VIII

    336,    Inductor Devices        V, VIII

    338,    Electrical Resistors    V, VIII

    340,    Communications:  Electrical     VIII

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave
    Antennas                 IV, VIII

    346,    Recorders       IV, VIII

    348,    Television      VIII

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems
    and Devices     IV, V, VIII

    370,    Multiplex Communications        IV, VIII

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating
    Furnaces                VIII

    455,    Telecommunications      IV, V, VIII


CLS 334/1
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the tuning unit consists
    of two or more tuners of different types connected together either
    mechanically and/or electrically to form a single unitary tuner.

    (1)     Note.  One tuner usually covers a lower frequency while the second
    tuner cover a higher frequency as, for example, a VHF-UHF tuner.  Gang
    operated or combined tuners which cover only one frequency range, such as
    for example an intermediate frequency tuning strip, is not considered a
    combined tuner for this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 10.45 for operators used on
    plural shafts.

    455,    Telecommunications, appropriate subclasses for radio receivers
    which may use a plurality of tuning means.


CLS 334/2
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the combined tuners comprise at
    least two different disk type or two different cylinder type tuners.

    (1)     Note.  For a definition of a disk type tuner see subclass 49 below
    and for a definition of a cylinder type tuner see subclass 50 below.

    (2)     Note.  The combination of a disk or cylinder type tuner combined
    with another type tuner such as, for example, a wafer switch or resonant
    line tuner are not properly classified in this subclass.  This subclass is
    restricted to tuning units in which only at least two species of disk or
    two species of cylinder type tuners are combined to form the tuning unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for disk type tuners, per se.

    50,     for cylinder type tuners, per se.


CLS 334/3
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a plurality of tuning units are
    mechanically and/or electrically built together, each of the tuning units
    mutually sharing a common tuning element with the tuning units being so
    constructed that they are operated in sequence one after the other by
    adjusting the common tuning element.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter usually found in this subclass consists of a
    cavity or resonator type tuner mechanically and/or electrically combined
    with an inductor-capacitor type tuning unit, the plunger or contact used to
    tune the cavity or resonator also being used to tune the inductor-capacitor
    type tuning unit.  Thus the tuning element is mutually common to both type
    tuners.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41+,    for tuners of the resonant line or distributed parameter type.

    65+,    for tuners in which both the inductor and capacitor are variable
    and especially subclasses 66+ for tuners with a mutual inductor and
    capacitor varying element.


CLS 334/4
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the tuned circuit is
    responsive to and varied by an external magnetic field applied to the tuned
    circuit or some element thereof.  For example, the magnetic field is
    produced by a specially movable permanent magnet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for tuners having a capacitor which is responsive to voltage or
    current variations.

    12+,    for tuners having a saturable core type inductor which is
    responsive to voltage or current variations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 250,
    330, and 362 for miscellaneous inductive reactance systems where the
    reactor includes a permanent magnet as a part thereof.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 110 for inductors which are provided
    with a permanent magnet to modify the magnetic flux distribution.


CLS 334/5
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including a tuner, which has at
    least one variable element that is mechanically variable, linked with
    actuating structure which senses and responds significantly well to a
    particular stimulus or condition which is external of the electrical
    circuit or a change in such external stimulus or condition to thereby cause
    the variable element to change, adjust or correct the resonant frequency of
    the tuned circuit; or including a tuner which has at least one variable
    element which is nonmechanically variable and which has the property, as by
    chemical composition, of changing its reactance value in response to a
    particular stimulus or condition which is external of the electrical
    circuit or a change in such external stimulus or condition to thereby cause
    a change, adjustment or correction in the resonant frequency of the tuned
    circuit.

    (1)     Note.  For classification here the actuator must be something more
    than merely adapted to have a force applied thereto for the actuation of
    the mechanical variable or adjustable tuner, as a knob, pedal or handle.
    The actuator must sense the condition or change in condition, and respond
    in some manner as by moving or deforming.

    (2)     Note.  The tuner element that is affected by the particular
    external stimulus does not necessarily have to detune the tuner from a
    particular resonant frequency upon sensing the external stimulus but may
    adjust or correct the tuned circuit to prevent undesired drifting or change
    in the resonant frequency of the tuned circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for tuners which are responsive to and varied by a magnetic field
    applied to the tuned circuit or some element thereof.

    11,     for tuners having a capacitor which is responsive to voltage or
    current variations within the electrical circuit.

    12+,    for tuners having a saturable core type inductor which is
    responsive to voltage or current variations within the electrical circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 175+ for oscillators combined with
    frequency stabilizing means.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 30 for inductors with condition
    responsive adjustment means.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 13+ for resistors that are
    responsive to a condition.


CLS 334/6
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5 wherein the tuner includes an inductor
    and/or capacitor which is responsive to some external stimulus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 65+ for oscillators which have a device
    responsive to an external physical condition, and subclass 176 for
    temperature or current responsive means in the oscillator circuit.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 30 for inductors with condition
    responsive adjustment means.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 280+ for
    capacitors, per se, which are responsive to a condition.


CLS 334/7
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the tuner unit is adapted
    to be operated by a series of manually movable push buttons and/or levers
    with each button or lever being adapted to selectively move the tuning
    element through a mechanical mechanism to a different preselected position
    or frequency when manual power is exerted on a particular button or lever.

    (1)     Note.  Push buttons and/or levers which energize a motor circuit
    with the motor furnishing the power to move the tuner to the preselected
    circuit are not classified in this subclass but in subclasses 17+ below
    (note especially subclass 29).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     for tuners combined with electromagnetic drive means which tunes to
    a predetermined station and which may be energized by a push button or
    lever type switch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 10.1+ for shaft operators
    of the radio type which are adapted to turn to or stop on a predetermined
    position, and subclasses 469+ for control lever and linkage systems, per se.

    84,     Music, subclasses 423+ for keyboard operated musical devices, the
    keys serving to select the tuned circuit which is to be placed into circuit
    with an electrical tone generator.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 170.1+ for radio receivers utilizing
    push button and/or lever operated tuners.


CLS 334/8
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which the operation of the
    tuner is controlled from a relatively distant point removed from the tuner
    by an extended or remote control device or circuit.

    (1)     Note.  Remote control devices as found in this subclass may include
    a tuner having a separate extended control shaft connected to an original
    shaft of the variable tuner element, thus extending the distance from the
    tuner to the point where a control knob or operator may be located; or the
    remote control device may consist of circuit means responsive to space
    transmitted electromagnetic, electrostatic or radiant energy.

    (2)     Note.  To be properly classified in this subclass, some significant
    details of the tuner must be claimed.  A tuner broadly recited with details
    to the control system or device is classified with the control system or
    device.  The control of a tuner plus some other radio circuit, such as, for
    example, an on-off switch is classified with the radio circuit controlled,
    such as, for example, radio receivers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 10+ for positioning or
    rotating means for one or more shafts of an electronic tuning device such
    as a radio tuner.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 140
    for remote control switching systems.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 16 for motors which
    are controlled or supplied by space transmitted electromagnetic or
    electrostatic energy; subclass 460 for sound or vibration responsive
    systems, and subclass 480 for radiant energy responsive systems.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825+ for selective remote
    control systems.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 745+ for antennae
    with a variable reactance for tuning the antenna.

    348,    Television, subclass 734 for television receiver circuitry having
    remote control means associated therewith.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 173+ for
    photosensitive circuits for relays and electromagnets.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 151.1+ and 352+ for radio receivers
    with remote control.


CLS 334/9
TXT Subject matter under subclass 8 in which the remote controlled tuner has an
    electromagnetic operator, such as an electric motor, solenoid, or the like.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17+,    for tuning units with electromagnetic operators which are not
    remotely controlled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 16 for motors which
    are controlled or supplied by space transmitted electromagnetic or
    electrostatic energy; subclasses 560+, for electric motor position
    servomechanism; subclasses 460+ for sound or vibration responsive systems,
    and subclass 480 for radiant energy responsive motor systems.

    455,    Telecommunications, appropriate subclasses.


CLS 334/10
TXT Subject matter under subclass 9 in which the electromagnetic operator is a
    solenoid and/or relay device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for band scanning or selector circuit driven by a solenoid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 14, 24+, 30+,
    and 34+ for solenoid motor structure, per se, and subclass 49 for
    step-by-step magnetic motor structure.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 37 and 119+ for reciprocating or oscillating motor
    systems and subclasses 38 and 138 for linear movement electric motor
    systems.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ for
    electric circuits for relays and electromagnets.


CLS 334/11
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the tuned circuit
    includes a reactance element or elements which are directly responsive to a
    change in voltage and/or current which is applied across or through the
    reactance element or elements, with the variation in the voltage and/or
    current causing the reactance value of the element or elements to vary or
    change and thereby tune or adjust the resonance of the tuned circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for tuners which are responsive to an external magnetic field,
    e.g., the magnetic field is that of a spacially movable permanent magnet.

    5+,     for tuners which are responsive to an external nonelectrical
    stimulus or condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses for active solid-state devices, per se.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 401+
    for miscellaneous nonlinear reactor systems.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 145 for amplifiers having variable impedance
    elements which are directly responsive to voltage or current variations.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 277+ for
    variable capacitors, per se.

    455,    Telecommunications, appropriate subclasses.


CLS 334/12
TXT Subject matter under subclass 11 wherein the inductor element is variable
    in response to current flow through the inductor winding or in response to
    a magnetic field or bias applied to the core element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 206,
    214, 249, 302, 310, and 329 for saturable core inductor systems in general.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 181 for oscillators having frequency
    adjusting means which may be of the saturable core inductor type.

    332,    Modulators, appropriate subclasses and particularly subclass 173
    for modulators having variable circuit parameters which may be a saturable
    core device.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 177+ for
    transformer coupled wave filters having a magnetic core which may be
    saturable.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 155 for inductor devices, per se, which
    are responsive to current flow therethrough.  See also the Search Notes for
    a complete field of search as to current responsive inductance devices.


CLS 334/13
TXT Subject matter under subclass 12 wherein the change in the reactance value
    of the saturable core type inductance element is controlled by circuit
    means which is responsive to an undesired change in frequency occurring in
    the tuned circuit, the circuit means thereby varying the resonant frequency
    of the tuned circuit a sufficient amount to compensate for the undesired
    frequency shift.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for automatic frequency controlled tuner circuits having a
    reactance tuning means.

    26+,    for automatic frequency centering circuits which have an
    electromagnetic operator driving the tuning element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclass 36, for
    automatic frequency controlled oscillators which may utilize a saturable
    inductor.


CLS 334/14
TXT Subject matter under subclass 11 in which an active element is operated in
    such a manner that it presents the characteristics of a variable reactance
    to the rest of the tuned circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 180 for oscillators in which the variable
    frequency determining element consists of an active element type reactance
    tube.

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 140 and 142+ for reactance tubes in
    frequency modulators and 147+ for reactance tubes in phase modulators.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 213+ for reactance
    tube systems, per se.


CLS 334/15
TXT Subject matter under subclass 14 in which the active element is a
    semiconductor device.


CLS 334/16
TXT Subject matter under subclass 14 in which the variable reactance tuner is
    provided with control means for automatically tuning the resonant circuit
    to its optimum operating point and to maintain the circuit at that point by
    regulating the adjustment of the variable reactance tuner to compensate for
    variations in the tuned circuit or in the frequency of the signal wave to
    which the circuit is tuned.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for automatic frequency controlled saturable core type inductor
    tuning elements.

     26+,   for automatic frequency centering circuits having an
    electromagnetic operator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 36 for oscillators with frequency control
    means which may be a reactance tube.

    455,    Telecommunications, appropriate subclasses.


CLS 334/17
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which the tuned circuit
    consists of at least one variable reactance tuning unit which is adapted to
    have its reactance adjusted so as to vary the resonance of the tuner, the
    adjustable reactance tuning unit being driven by an electromagnetic
    operator which is mechanically connected to the variable tuning unit.

    (1)     Note.  The reactance tuning may be driven directly or indirectly by
    the electromagnetic operator.  An example of an indirectly driven reactance
    tuning unit is where the electromagnetic operator is energized periodically
    and during these periods loads or winds an energy storage device such as a
    spring so that during the period when the electromagnetic operator is not
    energized, the energy storage device will furnish power to drive the
    variable reactance tuning unit.

    (2)     Note.  To be properly classified in this subclass significant
    details of the tuner must be disclosed and claimed.  The mere recitation of
    a tuner broadly with details to the electromagnetic operator or control
    system for the operator will be classified with the operator or system.

    (3)     Note.  Switch type tuners are considered as variable reactance
    tuning units for classification in this and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9+,     for electromagnetic operated tuners which are remotely controlled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, appropriate subclasses for
    electrical generator or motor structure, per se.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    electromagnetic operators with control systems, per se.

    455,    Telecommunications, appropriate subclasses.


CLS 334/18
TXT Subject matter under subclass 17 in which the electromagnetic operator is
    provided with a control system and/or means which causes the operator to
    drive the variable tuning unit in such a manner as to scan a frequency or
    band of frequencies with the control system and/or means acting upon the
    electromagnetic operator or its associated circuit to stop the scanning of
    the tuner unit when the tuner is properly adjusted to receive a given
    signal or signals.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter found in this subclass and the indented
    subclasses usually consists of a tuning system with a driving means which
    causes the tuner to scan the frequency band and when a radio signal is
    tuned in, a control voltage is applied to the means to deenergize the
    driving means and the tuner is stopped on the frequency of the radio
    signal.  Tuners where the operator is connected to and energized by a
    switch which represents a particular frequency, the operation of the switch
    causing the operator to drive the tuner to and stop on the selected
    frequency, is not classified in this subclass but in subclass 29 below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 445+ for
    electromagnetic operator with control systems for automatically starting
    and/or stopping.


CLS 334/19
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 wherein the electromagnetic operator which
    furnishes the drive for the variable tuning unit is a solenoid and/or relay
    device.

    (1)     Note.  The solenoid may periodically act to load an energy storage
    device such as, for example, a spring with the energy storage device then
    acting to drive the variable tuning element.  In these cases, the solenoid
    is considered to have furnished the drive for the variable tuner and the
    subject matter is properly classifiable in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10+,    for tuners which are remotely controlled and use a solenoid as a
    driver means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 14, 23+, 30,
    and 34+ for solenoid motor structure, per se.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 220+ for magneto-mechanical motive devices.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ for
    electric circuits for relays and electromagnets.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 170.1+ for receivers with frequency
    selective means (i.e., tuners) with solenoid or relay means.


CLS 334/20
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 wherein the electromagnetic operator is a
    motor of the rotating armature type.

    (1)     Note.  Motors of the reciprocating or oscillating type are
    classified in subclass 18 above if they are driving a band scanning or
    selector circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for remote controlled tuners which may use an electric motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclass for motor
    control systems, per se.


CLS 334/21
TXT Subject matter under subclass 20 wherein the electromagnetic operator is
    provided with a control system and/or means to select and tune the variable
    tuning unit to a predetermined position thereby adjusting the tuner to
    resonate at a particular mean frequency.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for push button and/or lever operated tuners which are mechanically
    adjusted by the pressure exerted upon the button and/or lever to select or
    position a tuning element in a particular position.

    9+,     for remote controlled electromagnetic operators which may stop on a
    predetermined frequency such as, for example, a remotely controlled
    television tuner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclasses 466+ for motors having control systems that stop
    the motor at a particular position.


CLS 334/22
TXT Subject matter under subclass 20 wherein the motor is connected to means
    for reversing the direction in which the motor is driving the tuner element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclasses 65 and 280+ for motor systems connected to a
    motor-reversing circuit.


CLS 334/23
TXT Subject matter under subclass 20 wherein the motor is connected to the
    variable tuning unit through a clutch device which is operated by the motor
    control circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, appropriate subclasses for
    clutches and power-stop controls, per se, and especially subclass .02 for
    interrelated electric motor and clutch controls.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 92+ for
    electrical controlled torque-transmitting clutches or brakes.


CLS 334/24
TXT Subject matter under subclass 20 wherein the motor is controlled by a relay
    device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ for
    electric circuits for relays and electromagnets.


CLS 334/25
TXT Subject matter under subclass 24 in which plural relays are used to control
    the motor circuit.


CLS 334/26
TXT Subject matter under subclass 17 in which the electromagnetic operator is
    provided with a linkage device for connecting the operator to a variable
    tuning unit of a resonant circuit and a control means for automatically
    operating the electromagnetic operator so as to tune the resonant circuit
    to its optimum operating point and to maintain the circuit at that point by
    regulating the adjustment of the variable tuning unit to compensate for
    variations in the tuned circuit or in the frequency of the signal wave to
    which the circuit is tuned.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for automatic frequency controlled saturable core type tuning
    elements.

    16,     for automatic frequency centering circuits of the reactance tube
    type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 445+ for automatic
    motor starting and/or stopping means.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 32 for
    dynamoelectric generator systems with frequency responsive devices or
    networks for automatically maintaining the frequency of the generator wave
    constant.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 1+ for oscillators having automatic
    frequency stabilization using a phase or frequency sensing means.

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 123+ for controlling an average condition in
    a frequency modulator and subclasses 155+ and 159+ for controlling an
    average condition in an amplitude modulator.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 125 for radio transmitters which may
    utilize a.f.c. circuits and subclasses 257+ for receivers with a.f.c.
    circuits.


CLS 334/27
TXT Subject matter under subclass 26 in which the linkage device between the
    electromagnetic operator and variable tuning unit is a mechanical coupling
    element or tool which is adapted to be connected to or disconnected from
    the tuning element.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter usually found in this subclass consists of
    motor circuits which drive alignment tools such as, for example, a
    screwdriver which may be connected to the tuner element of a tuned circuit,
    the motor circuit then adjusts the resonance of the circuit to some preset
    value.  Such tool driven aligning apparatus find particular use in
    production line tuning of a large number of tuned circuits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 600+ for measuring
    and testing impedance, admittance and related quantities.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 2 for amplifiers with condition indicating or
    testing means.


CLS 334/28
TXT Subject matter under subclass 26 in which the electromagnetic operator
    control circuit is responsive to or requires two or more signal sources in
    order to properly center the resonant circuit.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter usually found in this subclass consists of
    circuits which have an information and test signal both applied to the
    electromagnetic operator control circuit so that the tuned circuit is
    properly adjusted to the desired resonant frequency.


CLS 334/29
TXT Subject matter under subclass 17 wherein the electromagnetic operator is
    connected to or controlled by a position or sensing means which acts to
    position the variable reactance tuning unit in a predetermined position
    upon being actuated.

    (1)     Note.  The motor control circuit is usually energized by a
    plurality of push button switches with each of the switches representing a
    preselected frequency (i.e., a television tuner driven by a motor).  The
    motor once energized drives the tuner element to the proper position to
    tune in the desired frequency and then the motor is automatically turned
    off.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for push button and/or lever operated tuners of the mechanical type
    which may tune in predetermined frequencies.

    21,     for motor operated band scanning or selector circuits which selects
    a predetermined frequency such as, for example, the strongest signal found
    within the band scanned.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 466+ for motor
    systems with movement, position or limit-of-travel sensing means.  Also see
    subclasses 560+, for position servomechanisms.


CLS 334/30
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the tuner is combined
    with some form of electrical indicator which operates in such a manner as
    to give an indication of whether or not the tuned circuit is tuned for
    maximum output signal strength or peak resonance.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter found in this and the indented subclasses
    properly includes a frequency or phase demodulator with or without some
    detail tuning structure together with detailed tuning indicating structure
    provided the output from the frequency or phase demodulator is applied only
    to the indicating means.  Details of a frequency or phase demodulator which
    have an output applied to other circuitry than the indicating means or
    where the indicating means is only claimed broadly in combination with a
    demodulator, classification is in Class 329, Demodulators and Detectors,
    subclass 111.  See also (2) Note under Class 329, subclass 111.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86+,    for tuners including a device for conveying information as to the
    particular band or position within a band of frequencies to which the tuner
    circuit is adjusted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 39 for wave meters.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 76.39+ for
    measurement of the frequency of electrical energy.

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses for demodulators which may
    include some form of electrical indicator.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 2 for amplifiers with condition indicating or
    testing means.

    331,    Oscillators, for oscillators with indicator, signal or alarm.

    332,    Modulators, subclass 118 for indicating or measuring in a frequency
    modulator and subclass 150 for indicating or measuring in an amplitude
    modulator

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, for electrical signaling generally,
    especially subclass 870.08 for radio dial indicators in telemetering
    systems and subclasses 657+ for current characteristic controlled electric
    signals or alarms.

    348,    Television, subclasses 569+ for television receiver tuners having a
    tuning indicator associated therewith.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 154.1+ for receivers with tuning or
    resonance indicators.


CLS 334/31
TXT Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein the resonance indicator is a
    meter, such as, for example, a galvanometer.


CLS 334/32
TXT Subject matter under subclass 31 wherein the meter is combined with an
    optical and/or shading device.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the optical and/or shading device is connected
    directly to the meter movement in such a manner as to cause a beam of light
    or a shadow to be cast upon a fixed scale thus giving an indication of the
    tuning of the resonant circuit.


CLS 334/33
TXT Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein the resonance indicator is of the
    cathode ray tube.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 364+, for
    cathode-ray tubes.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 1+ for
    cathode- ray tube systems in general.

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, subclasses 121+ for
    electrostatic recorder using electron beam with an air tight envelope to
    create a charged pattern, and subclasses 226+ for radiation marking using
    cathode- ray tube.

    348,    Television, subclasses 569+ for television receiver tuners having a
    tuning indicator, wherein a cathode-ray tube including the picture display
    tube may be utilized to indicate tuning.


CLS 334/34
TXT Subject matter under subclass 33 wherein the cathode-ray tube has an
    annular anode coated with fluorescent material surrounding an emissive
    center cathode and a control electrode for varying the width of the
    discharge between the cathode and anode so that as the potential of the
    control electrode varies the width of the nonluminous portion of the anode
    varies.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 107.5 for magic eye
    indicating tubes, per se.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 121 for electrical
    measuring, testing or sensing circuits, per se, in which a magic eye tube
    is used.


CLS 334/35
TXT Subject matter under subclass 34 wherein plural nonluminous portions are
    produced on the fluorescent anode material.


CLS 334/36
TXT Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein the resonance indicator is an
    electric lamp.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclass for
    electric lamp and discharge devices, per se.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 654+ for electrical
    condition responsive pilot light indicator systems in general.


CLS 334/37
TXT Subject matter under subclass 36 wherein the resonance indicator lamp is of
    the gaseous glow discharge tube type, such as, for example, a neon lamp.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 567+ for electric
    lamp and discharge devices which include an envelope and an atmosphere of
    gas or vapor within the envelope.  See also the Search Notes under this
    subclass for an additional field of search relating to gaseous discharge
    tubes and circuits.


CLS 334/38
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which a reactance element or
    elements of a tuned circuit is wound on a core and is adapted to be unwound
    therefrom, as on a second core, to change the reactance values of the tuned
    circuit.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of subject matter classified here include an
    inductor whose element is wound from an insulating core to a conducting
    core, the conducting core short-circuiting the portion of the inductor
    element wound thereon; or a capacitor which is varied by winding or
    unwinding one plate of the capacitor over a second insulated plate shaped
    in the form of a cylinder or core.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, subclasses 12.2+ for an
    electric current supply conductor and reel means upon which the conductor
    may be wound.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, appropriate subclasses for
    winding, tensioning, or guiding in general use.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 15 for variable inductors whose
    effective length is changed by winding or unwinding the conductor forming
    the inductor.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 79, for mechanically variable
    resistors which are varied by winding or unwinding the resistance element
    from a core or form.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 877, for antennae
    having a reel upon which the antenna may be wound.


CLS 334/39
TXT Tuning devices under the class definition in which the tuner is combined
    with structure other than tuner structure or some change in tuning
    structure and/or design which improves the operation of the tuner and which
    is not otherwise classified.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, appropriate subclasses for musical devices that may use
    tuned circuits, especially subclasses 671 - 746 for electrical tone
    generation by the use of tuned sound generators or resonators.  Also
    subclasses 423+ for keyboard operated musical devices, the keys serving to
    select the tuned circuit which is to be placed into circuit with an
    electrical tone generator.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 750 for microwave heating with tuned
    circuits.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 78 for generator
    control systems which have plural impedances in the excitation circuit, the
    impedances forming a tuned circuit.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 600+ for tuners
    combined with means to measure the impedance, admittance and related
    quantities of the tuner.

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses for demodulators with tuning
    or indicating structure.

    331,    Oscillators, appropriate subclass for oscillators having a tuned
    circuit, especially subclasses 177+ for oscillators with frequency
    adjusting means.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 105+ for inductors combined with some
    other structure such as, for example, a connector.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 350+, 850+ and
    866+ for tuners combined with detailed antenna structure.

    348,    Television, subclass 731 for tuners combined with television
    receiver circuitry.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 113 for a
    safety and protective system or device combined with a tuned circuit;
    subclasses 268+ for a transformer or inductor combined with a switch,
    capacitor or lock; and subclasses 275.1+ for a capacitor combined with some
    other structure such as, for example, an electrical socket.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for multiplex
    systems which are tunable by an inductor or capacitor.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 138+ for induction
    type electrical furnaces which may use a tuned circuit.

    455,    Telecommunications, appropriate subclasses.


CLS 334/40
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein some resistance value is
    built into or adapted to be inserted into or removed from a tuned circuit
    to thereby vary the "Q" or damping of the circuit.

    (1)     Note.  The sharpness of the resonance or sensitivity of a tuned
    circuit is determined by the ratio of energy stored to energy dissipated,
    hence is directly proportional to the reactance in the circuit and
    inversely proportional to the resistance.  This ratio of stored energy to
    dissipated energy is called the "Q" of the circuit.

    (2)     Note.  The resistance of the tuned circuit does not have to be of
    the variable type but may be a fixed type resistance.  The resistance must,
    however, be more than the inherent load resistance presented across the
    circuit when the circuit is connected to a load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 173 for wave filter
    networks that may utilize ohmic resistance elements for controlling the
    selectivity or frequency band width of the network.


CLS 334/41
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the inductance and
    capacitance of the tuned circuit is of the distributed parameter type and
    is adapted to have the mean resonant frequency of the circuit adjusted in
    discrete, distinct steps; or where a plurality of tuned circuits are ganged
    together either mechanically and/or electrically so as to have their means
    resonant frequency adjusted in unison.

    (1)     Note.  Resonators, which are closely analogous to tuners found in
    this subclass, are classified in Class 333, Wave Transmission Lines and
    Networks, especially subclasses 219+.  The resonators found in Class 333,
    subclasses 219+ comprise conductive enclosures,


            cavities, or wave transmission line sections of the two terminal
    type and have both distributed inductance and capacitance.  Even though a
    resonator may be provided with tuning means and designated as a tuner, if
    the resonator is a single circuit having both inductance and capacitance of
    the distributed parameter type with the adjustment of the resonant
    frequency being of a continuous, unbroken type, classification is in Class
    333, Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 219+.  Single
    circuits in which only the inductance and capacitance is of the distributed
    type are classified in this subclass and the indented subclasses
    thereunder.  See also the notes under Class 333, subclasses 167 and 219.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     especially subclass 3 for a resonator type tuner combined with some
    other type tuner such as, for example, a lumped inductor-capacitor circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 750 for microwave heating with tuned
    circuits.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 5.46+ for
    cathode-ray tube circuits in which the cathode ray passes through plural
    hollow distributed parameter devices that are tunable; subclasses 5.53+ for
    circuits in which the cathode ray passes through a tunable hollow
    distributed parameter device, and subclasses 39.55+ for distributed
    parameter resonator type magnetrons having variable tuning means.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 45 for a linear amplifier having an electron
    beam vacuum tube coupled to a cavity resonator; subclass 49 for a linear
    amplifier having a vacuum tube amplifying device which has distributed
    parameter characteristics which may involve a resonator, and subclass 56
    for linear amplifiers involving wave guide, cavity, or concentric line
    resonator coupling generally.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 5, 6+, 9, 79+, 86+, 93, and 96+ for
    oscillators which have a distributed parameter resonator.

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 129+ for resonators in a frequency modulator
    and subclasses 163+ for resonators in an amplitude modulator.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 219+ for
    resonators of the distributed parameter type, per se.  See (1) Note above.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 723 for single
    adjustable length electrically long linear antennae; subclasses 745+ for
    antennae with a variable reactance for tuning the antenna; subclasses 746
    and 767+ for slot type antennae which may involve resonator structure;
    subclasses 790+ for sleeve type antennae; subclasses 793+ for balanced
    doublet type antennae which may have resonant characteristics, and
    subclasses 825+ and 843 for antennae having appreciable wave length
    dimensions.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 120+ for transmitters involving wave
    filters, subclasses 150.1+ for receivers with filters or tuners and
    subclasses 78+ for wave meters using tuners or filters.


CLS 334/42
TXT Subject matter under subclass 41 wherein two or more distributed parameter
    type tuners are electrically and/or mechanically interlinked so as to be
    simultaneously adjusted over a given frequency range.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for combined diverse type tuners.


CLS 334/43
TXT Subject matter under subclass 42 wherein the distributed parameter type
    tuners are adjusted by a shaft operator.

    (1)     Note.  Plural distributed parameter type tuners which are
    simultaneously adjusted by a cam or screw driven by a shaft are not
    classified in this subclass but in subclass 42 above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 10+ for shaft operators,
    per se, which are particularly adapted to drive or rotate a radio tuning
    shaft.


CLS 334/44
TXT Subject matter under subclass 41 wherein the inductance and/or capacitance
    having the distributed reactance is adapted to be deformed, as by bending,
    twisting or collapsing, so that the distributed reactance is varied thus
    varying the frequency of the tuned circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for tuners which have a lumped reactance element which is varied by
    compression or deformation.


CLS 334/45
TXT Subject matter under subclass 41 in which at least a portion of the
    capacitance necessary to tune the resonant circuit is furnished by a lumped
    capacitor.

    (1)     Note.  The lumped capacitor is usually variable and is used to tune
    the resonant circuit, however, the capacitor may be fixed in value.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78+,    for tuners which are tuned by a variable capacitor.


CLS 334/46
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein a tuned circuit includes
    a lumped deformable type tuning element or elements together with the
    necessary mechanical structure for modifying the shape of the tuning
    element, as by changing the physical shape of the tuning element or
    elements to thereby change the reactance of the tuned circuit.

    (1)     Note.  The compressing together of a plurality of capacitor plates
    to thereby vary the capacitance of the unit is not considered as deforming
    the element and, thus, is not properly classified in this subclass but in
    subclass 80 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for tuned circuits having distributed parameter type inductance
    and/or capacitance which is adapted to be deformed to vary the tuning of
    the circuit.

    80,     for capacitors which have plates which are movable so as to vary
    the spacing between the plates as for example, by compressing the plates
    together.  See (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 20 for tuners with deformable or
    distortable coil and/or core.  See also the Search Notes for a detailed
    field of search as to deformable inductor type devices.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 114 for resistor elements which are
    of the deformable type.


CLS 334/47
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein an element or elements of
    at least one tuned circuit is modified or substituted by a switching
    operation to thereby effectively change the resonant frequency to which the
    circuit is tuned.

    (1)     Note.  The switching operation may be performed by a make and break
    mechanical switch or by an electrical switch such as a tube or
    semiconductor device.  Plug in type tuned circuits are also properly
    classified in the subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The modifying or substituting of the tuning circuit may be
    accomplished by shorting a portion of one or more of the tuned circuit
    elements, thus varying the frequency of the circuit, or by substituting
    elements in the tuned circuit or by switching one complete tuned circuit
    for another such as generally found in television tuners.  Fine tuning of
    the tuned circuit may be accomplished by using an adjustable inductor
    and/or capacitor in addition to the switching means.

    (3)     Note.  The mere operation of a switch which does not effect the
    tuning of the tuned circuit is not classified in this subclass but in
    subclass 39 above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for push button and/or lever mechanically operated tuners which may
    be of the switch type.

    86+,    for tuners having an indicator to show the position or frequency to
    which the variable tuning element or elements are adjusted or switched.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 10+ for mechanical
    mechanism for rotating a shaft including such mechanism designed for use
    with a switching means.  See also the Search Notes to subclass 10 for
    additional fields of search for moving mechanism.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses
    for the construction of make and break type switching elements, per se.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 255
    and 340 for tap changers.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 137+ for the structure of inductors
    having means to change the length or connection of the inductor.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 748 for loop type
    antennae with a variable reactance for tuning the antenna, and subclass 868
    for loop type antennae having means for adjusting the coil length.


CLS 334/48
TXT Subject matter under subclass 47 wherein the switch type tuner is
    constructed so as to have a contact terminal or plate which is adapted to
    contact or approach a second terminal or plate held on a stationary portion
    of the tuner unit, the contact terminals or plates of the tuner being
    constructed so as to allow a rocking movement between the movable and
    stationary contacts, thus varying the resonant frequency of the tuned
    circuit without breaking electrical contact between the stationary and
    movable contacts.


CLS 334/49
TXT Subject matter under subclass 47 wherein the element or elements of the
    tuner are carried upon a flat circular plate or disk type support with the
    plate or disk support revolving about its center axis and thereby switching
    the element or elements into or out of a circuit in a predetermined order.

    (1)     Note.  A turret tuner of the disk type, such as found in this
    subclass, or of the drum type, such as found in subclasses 51+ below, are
    basically of the switching type in which the movable turret portion carries
    tuning elements and contact members which are moved with respect to a group
    of stationary contacts.  A switch type unit having stationary tuning
    elements connected to stationary contact elements with the stationary
    contacts being swept or switched into or out of circuit by a rotating
    contact are not classified in this subclass nor in subclasses 51+ below but
    are found in the appropriate subclasses under subclasses 47+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 10+ for mechanical
    mechanism for rotating a shaft including such mechanism designed for use in
    a disk type turret tuner.  See also the Search Notes to subclass 10 for
    additional fields of search for moving mechanism.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 1+ for
    multiple control circuit switches, and subclasses 23+ for circuit makers
    and breakers which operate periodically to control multiple circuits.


CLS 334/50
TXT Subject matter under subclass 47 wherein the switching unit consists of a
    rotatable drum or cylinder having a plurality of individual components or
    tuning elements secured in position about the periphery of the drum or
    cylinder, the components or tuning elements being connected to contact
    elements which are also carried on the periphery of the drum or cylinder,
    and rotating means to move the drum or cylinder about its longitudinal axis
    to thereby bring the contacts located on the drum or cylinder into contact
    with stationary contacts located on a support member adjacent a portion of
    the surface of the drum or cylinder.

    (1)     Note.  For the difference between subject matter found in this
    subclass and the other subclasses under 47+, see (1) Note under subclass 49
    above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for a plurality of diverse disk or diverse turret tuners combined
    together either mechanically or electrically.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 10+ and the subclasses
    specified in the notes thereto for mechanical mechanism for rotating a
    shaft including such mechanism designed for use with a switching means.
    See also the Search Notes to subclass 10 for additional fields of search
    for moving mechanism.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 1+ for
    multiple control circuit switches, and subclasses 23+ for circuit makers
    and breakers which operate periodically to control multiple circuits.


CLS 334/51
TXT Subject matter under subclass 50 in which the tuner has means associated
    therewith to give fine tuning or adjustment to the tuned circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for tuners wherein fine tuning is achieved by rocking the tuner
    switch.

    57+,    for vernier tuning means combined with a tuner which is adjusted by
    modifying or substituting the inductor element by switching.

    71+,    for tuned circuits in which the resonant frequency is varied by a
    continuously variable inductor.

    78+,    for tuned circuits in which the resonant frequency is varied by a
    continuously variable capacitor.

    86+,    for tuners having an indicator to show the position or frequency to
    which the variable tuning element or elements are adjusted.


CLS 334/52
TXT Subject matter under subclass 47 in which the switching means used to vary
    or change the frequency setting or band of frequencies to which the tuner
    is resonant is operated by the adjustment or movement of a variable tuning
    means such as a variable capacitor.

    (1)     Note.  An example of the type of tuner found in this subclass is
    one in which a variable capacitor, adapted to rotate through 3600, is used
    to fine tune or spread a given frequency to which the tuner is resonant
    with special switching means being associated with the capacitor to thereby
    switch into the tuned circuit various other tuning elements each time the
    capacitor is rotated through one complete revolution and thus change the
    band of frequencies to which the tuner is resonant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65+,    for tuners in general wherein both inductor and capacitor are
    variable.


CLS 334/53
TXT Subject matter under subclass 52 in which the switch is of the
    rectilinearly movable or reciprocating contact type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for tuners which are varied by switching various elements into or
    out of the tune circuit where the switch is rectilinearly operated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 16 for
    reciprocating type switches used to control multiple circuits; subclasses
    449+ for reciprocating switches having a snap action, and subclasses 554+
    for mechanically operated switches having a knife blade or plug which moves
    in a reciprocating manner.


CLS 334/54
TXT Subject matter under subclass 47 in which the switch is of the
    rectilinearly movable or reciprocating contact type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for tuners having a rectilinearly operated switch which is operated
    by a variable tuning means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 16 for
    reciprocating type switches used to control multiple circuits; subclasses
    449+ for reciprocating switches having a snap action, and subclasses 554+
    for mechanically operated switches having a knife blade or plug which moves
    in a reciprocating manner.


CLS 334/55
TXT Subject matter under subclass 47 in which the element or elements
    substituted by the switching operation consists of a plurality of
    capacitors.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter usually found in this subclass consists of an
    inductor element which is mechanically fixed in the tuned circuit and is
    connected to a switch which substitutes various capacitors into or out of
    the circuit to thus vary the resonant frequency of the tuner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for push button and/or lever operated tuners which may be of the
    type which substitutes one capacitor for another within the tuned circuit.

    78+,    for tuner units which are tuned by a continuous variable capacitor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    subclasses 166+ for charging or discharging a capacitor, per se.


CLS 334/56
TXT Subject matter under subclass 47 in which the element or elements
    substituted by the switching operation consists of a plurality of inductors.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter usually found in this subclass consists of a
    capacitor element which is mechanically fixed in the tuned circuit and is
    connected to a switch which substitutes various inductors into or out of
    the circuit to thus vary the resonant frequency of the tuner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for push button and/or lever operated tuners which may be of the
    type which substitutes one inductor for another within the tuned circuit.

    71+,    for tuner units which are tuned by a continuous variable inductor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 137+ for inductors having means to
    change the length or connections of the inductor. See Search Notes under
    subclass 137 for additional fields of search as to variable inductance
    devices.


CLS 334/57
TXT Subject matter under subclass 56 in which the tuner has means associated
    therewith to give fine tuning or adjustment to the tuned circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for vernier tuning means combined with a drum or cylinder type
    turret tuner.

    71+,    for tuned circuits in which the resonant frequency is varied by a
    continuously variable inductor.


CLS 334/58
TXT Subject matter under subclass 57 wherein the vernier tuning means is a
    variable capacitor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78+,    for tuned circuits in which the resonant frequency is varied by a
    continuously varied capacitor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 271+ for
    capacitors, per se.  See also the Search Notes under this subclass for a
    complete field of search as to capacitors.


CLS 334/59
TXT Subject matter under subclass 47 in which a selector switch is operated in
    such a manner as to introduce into a selector circuit an independent set of
    frequency determining parameters consisting of a tuned transformer circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61+,    for tuners having mutual inductance variable means which may be a
    tuned transformer circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, appropriate
    subclasses, especially subclass 83 for plural transformer systems in
    general.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 247,
    301, 305, and 328 for transformer systems in voltage magnitude control
    systems.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 154 for cascaded amplifiers with different
    coupling between the stages, one of which is a transformer, and subclasses
    165+ for transformers used as interstage coupling between amplifier stages.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 177+ for wave
    transmission transformer coupled circuits of the passive type, generally.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclass for transformer structure.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 268+ for
    transformers with integral switch, condenser or lock means.


CLS 334/60
TXT Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the tuned circuit or a portion
    thereof is short circuited by a switching device to thus vary the frequency
    or band of frequencies at which the circuit will resonate.


CLS 334/61
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein a variable tuned circuit
    or circuits consists of at least two or more windings which are so
    constructed or located that the windings are mutually coupled together by
    the magnetic field or the electric and magnetic fields created by and
    existing between the windings, with means being present in the circuit or
    circuits to vary the electrical and/or magnetic coupling existing between
    the windings so as to cause or effect a change in the mean resonant
    frequency and thus vary the tuning of the circuit or circuits.

    (1)     Note.  The two or more mutual inductance coupled windings may be in
    effect two coils connected in series or a single winding folded upon itself
    as, for example, a variometer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59+,    for tuned transformer substitution circuits.

    65+,    for tuners in which both the inductor and capacitor are variable.

    71+,    for tuners which are tuned by a variable inductor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 247,
    301, 305, 328, and 355 for transformer systems.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 154, 165+, 188+, and 195+ for amplifiers
    having transformer coupling.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 167+ for coupling
    networks of the wave filter type which are adapted to pass or reject only a
    single frequency or band of frequencies particularly indented subclasses
    177+ for transformer coupled filters.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclass for transformers which are
    not designed to be frequency responsive.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 850+ for antennae
    with coupling network or impedance in the lead-in.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices subclasses 268+ for
    transformers or inductors combined with a switch, condenser or lock.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclass 443 for induction coils
    combined with the structure of telephone instruments.


CLS 334/62
TXT Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein the variable mutual inductance
    device consists of two coils connected in series and so mounted that one
    coil can be rotated within the magnetic field or the electric and magnetic
    field of the other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 216,
    264, and 347 for transformer systems with movable structure or windings.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 24+ for coupling
    networks, including filters, equalizers and delay networks having
    relatively movable coils, and especially subclasses 177+ for transformer
    coupled wave filters.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 115+ for inductor structures having
    relatively movable coils.


CLS 334/63
TXT Subject matter under subclass 61 in which a plurality of coils or windings
    are so arranged as to have a core common to all the coils or winding with
    the core, when moved, causing the inductance of each of the plural coils or
    windings to vary simultaneously.

    (1)     Note.  A single winding of wire having a plurality of tap
    connections, each of which is adapted to be connected to different
    circuits, is considered formed by a plurality of coils connected together
    to form a single winding or coil and is properly classified in this
    subclass if the coils have a common core for adjusting the inductance value
    of the coils.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 118 and 130+ for inductor device
    structures having relatively movable core and coils.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 748 for loop type
    antennae with a variable reactance for tuning the antenna.


CLS 334/64
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the inductor and
    capacitor are electrically connected in series so as to form a tuner of the
    series resonant type, the impedance of the resulting two terminal series
    network being a minimum at resonance.


CLS 334/65
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which at least an inductor and
    capacitor are electrically connected together to form a parallel tuned
    circuit, both the inductor and capacitor being of the continuously variable
    type.

    (1)     Note.  A variable capacitor connected to an inductor which is
    varied by switching the inductor or a portion thereof, into or out of a
    circuit is not classified in this subclass but is found in subclasses 47+
    above.  Also, a variable inductor connected to fixed capacitors which are
    switched into or out of a circuit is found in subclasses 47+ above.  Note
    particularly subclasses 55 and 56+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for series tuned circuits which may have both a variable inductor
    and capacitor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 10+ for drive means for a
    tuner which may be operating a variable inductor and/or capacitor.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for inductor structure,
    per se.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 271+ for
    capacitor structure, per se.  See also the Search Notes to this subclass
    for a complete field of search as to capacitors.


CLS 334/66
TXT Subject matter under subclass 65 wherein the inductor and capacitor of the
    tuned circuit have a common mutually variable inductance and capacitance
    structure, the adjustment of which effects both the inductance and
    capacitance value of the tuned circuit simultaneously.

    (1)     Note.  A mutually variable adjustment element is limited to an
    element in common with both the inductor and capacitor that causes
    simultaneous variations in the respective reactance characteristics of both
    the inductor and capacitor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69+,    for tuners in which the inductor and capacitor are simultaneously
    varied, but wherein the inductor and capacitor have no reactance structure
    in common.


CLS 334/67
TXT Subject matter under subclass 66 wherein the tuner includes a tuning unit
    having a variable capacitor type configuration with the self inductance of
    the mechanical structure of the capacitor and the capacitance of the
    capacitor forming a tuned circuit, the rotational displacement of the rotor
    of the variable capacitor simultaneously varying both the capacitance and
    the inductance of the unit.

    (1)     Note.  Butterfly tuners generally consists of a pair of capacitor
    stators of generally quadrantal shape, a complete annular band surrounding
    and supporting the stators and forming parallel inductive paths between the
    capacitor stators, and a rotor having elements in capacitative relation to
    the stator and in inductive relation to the band and movable to vary both
    the capacitance and the inductance of the unit.

    (2)     Note.  Semibutterfly and coaxial butterfly tuners are properly
    classified in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 95 for oscillators having a butterfly
    resonator circuit.


CLS 334/68
TXT Subject matter under subclass 66 wherein the tuning element which is
    mutually common to both the inductor and capacitor portion of the parallel
    tuned circuit is movable rectilinearly in respect to the inductor and
    capacitor.


CLS 334/69
TXT Subject matter under subclass 65 wherein the inductor and capacitor are so
    constructed or mechanically connected together that simultaneous variation
    of the inductance and capacitance values occurs when the tuner is adjusted
    or tuned.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41+,    for tuners in which the inductance and capacitance is of the
    distributed parameter type and in which the inductance and capacitance may
    be varied simultaneously in discrete increments.

    66+,    for tuners with variable inductor and capacitor structure in common.


CLS 334/70
TXT Subject matter under subclass 69 wherein the variable inductor element is
    of the adjustable core type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74+,    for tuners in which the capacitor is fixed and the inductor is of
    the adjustable core type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 117+ and 130+ for the structure of
    inductors having a relatively movable core.


CLS 334/71
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein a parallel tuned circuit
    consists of a capacitor of fixed capacitance value and a variable inductor,
    the inductance value of which may be varied over a given range in order to
    tune the the circuit over a range or band of frequencies.

    (1)     Note.  To be properly classified in this subclass, the inductor
    must be of a variable type.  If fixed inductors are switched into or out of
    a tuned circuit to thereby vary the frequency, classification is not in
    this subclass but in subclasses 56+ above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for tuners having an inductor which may be varied by an external
    magnetic field.

    12+,    for tuning units having a saturable core type inductor which are
    directly responsive to voltage and/or current variation.

    38,     for tuners having an inductance which is varied by winding or
    unwinding the inductor coil.

    56+,    for tuned circuits using fixed inductors which are switched into or
    out of circuit to thus vary the resonance frequency of the circuit.

    61+,    for tuners having mutual inductance variable means.

    65+,    for tuners where both the inductor and capacitor are variable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 602.1 for methods of making helical or
    wound inductance devices involving metal working and assembly.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 66 and 135+ for a method of or
    apparatus for coiling metal.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 10+ for drive means for a
    shaft operated radio tuner which may be operating a variable inductor.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 138 for
    insulators, per se, upon which an inductor may be wound.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 600+ for induction heating devices.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 430+ for a process or
    apparatus for forming an article (e.g., an inductor, capacitor, or
    resistor) by winding material onto a core and subclasses 118+,159+, and
    600+ for a spool for receiving wound material.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 255
    and 340 for adjustable or variable inductor device systems.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 167+ for L-C type oscillators generally and
    subclass 181 for variable inductance tuned oscillators.  See also the
    Search Notes under these subclasses.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclass for the structure of
    inductor devices, per se.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 283+ for zigzag or sinuous
    resistance elements and subclasses 296+ for helical or wound resistance
    elements.


CLS 334/72
TXT Subject matter under subclass 71 wherein a movable contact is adjustable
    along the length of the inductor element to thereby vary the effective
    inductance of the inductor and thus tune the circuit over a range or band
    of frequency.

    (1)     Note.  The contact does not necessarily have to make physical
    contact with the inductance winding but may be capacitively coupled
    thereto.  If capacitor type contacts are present classification is indented
    subclass 73 below.

    (2)     Note.  When the contact is stationary and the inductor element
    movable, classification is not in this subclass but in subclass 71 above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 139+ for variable inductor devices
    having a contact which follows a helical conductor, and subclass 149 for
    inductors having a contact slidable on the coil winding.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 118+ for a variable resistor
    having a contact which moves along the length of a resistance element.


CLS 334/73
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72 in which the movable contact element does
    not come into direct electrical contact with the inductor coil but is
    capacitively coupled thereto.

    (1)     Note.  Usually there is an insulative coating between the movable
    contact and the coil windings thus preventing the contact from making
    direct electrical contact with the coil.  The contact surface usually
    serves as one plate of a capacitor with the coil of the inductor serving as
    the second capacitor plate.  Electrical energy is transferred between these
    capacitor plates.


CLS 334/74
TXT Subject matter under subclass 71 wherein the frequency of the tuned circuit
    is varied by moving a core of material in the magnetic or the electric and
    magnetic field of an inductor element.

    (1)     Note.  The core of material used to tune the tuned circuit is not
    restricted to any particular shape but may be of any desired configuration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for core tuned inductors in which both the capacitance and
    inductance of the tuned circuit are simultaneously varied.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 169 for amplifiers having transformer coupling
    including means for adjusting inductive coupling of transformer.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 117+ and 130+ for inductors having a
    relatively movable core and coil.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 748 for loop type
    antennae with a variable reactance (e.g., adjustable core) for tuning the
    antenna.


CLS 334/75
TXT Subject matter under subclass 74 wherein the inductor is formed and/or
    wound in an irregular or varying configuration as, for example, a tapered
    winding.

    (1)     Note.  Inductors formed by coating a strip of conductive material
    upon a coil form in an irregular or varying configuration are properly
    classified in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 602.1 for methods of making helical or
    wound inductance devices involving metal working and assembly.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 138 for
    insulators, per se, upon which an inductor may be wound.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 430+ for a process or
    apparatus for forming an article (e.g., an inductor, capacitor, or
    resistor) by winding material onto a core and subclasses 118+, 159+, and
    600+ for a spool for receiving wound material.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 200 for printed circuit type coils and
    subclasses 225+ for the structure of inductor coils of special
    configuration.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 283+ for zigzag or sinuous
    resistance elements and subclasses 296+ for helical or wound resistance
    elements.


CLS 334/76
TXT Subject matter under subclass 74 wherein the core is of a particular shape
    and/or constructed out of a particular type material or materials.

    (1)     Note.  Cores having particular physical dimensions are properly
    classified in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 233+ for cores used in inductance
    devices.  Also see Search Notes under this subclass for a complete field of
    search on core structure and materials.


CLS 334/77
TXT Subject matter under subclass 74 wherein a plurality of variable inductor
    tuners of the adjustable core type are so constructed and/or mechanically
    interlinked as to move in unison thereby adjusting together the respective
    tuning cores of each tuned circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 24+ for coupling
    networks including plural coils and plural cores, and particularly indented
    subclasses 177+ for transformer coupling wave filters with magnetic core
    inductance.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 131+ for plural coils having plural
    movable cores which may be adjusted in unison.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 130+ for ganged resistor elements.


CLS 334/78
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein a parallel tuned circuit
    consists of an inductor of fixed inductance value and a tuning capacitor,
    the capacitance value of which may be varied over a given range in order to
    tune the circuit over a range or band of frequencies.

    (1)     Note.  To be properly classified in this subclass, the capacitor
    must be of a variable type.  If fixed capacitors are switched into and out
    of a tuned circuit to thereby vary the frequency, classification is not in
    this subclass but in subclass 55 above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11+,    for voltage and/or current responsive tuning elements which may be
    capacitors.

    45,     for distributed parameter type tuners which use a lumped capacitor
    which may be variable.

    51,     for turret tuners of the switching drum type having vernier tuning
    means which may be a variable capacitor.

    55,     for tuned circuits using fixed capacitors switched in or out of the
    circuit.

    58,     for switched inductor structures provided with vernier variable
    capacitor means.

    64,     for series tuned circuits which may use a variable capacitor.

    65+,    for tuners where both the inductor and capacitor are variable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 10+ for drive means for a
    shaft operated radio tuner which may be operating a variable capacitor.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 167+ for L-C type oscillators generally.
    See also the Search Notes under this subclass for L-C type oscillator
    circuits generally.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 268+ for a
    transformer or inductor combined with a capacitor, and subclasses 271+ for
    capacitors, per se, particularly indented subclasses 277+ for variable
    capacitors.  See also the Search Notes under this subclass for a complete
    field of search as to capacitors.


CLS 334/79
TXT Subject matter under subclass 78 comprising a tuner having a variable
    capacitor which is so constructed and/or driven by an adjusting means that
    if the frequency variation or change produced in the tuner by the
    adjustment of the variable capacitor is plotted along the abscissa and the
    movement or variation of the variable capacitor is plotted along the
    ordinate of a graph, the line produced would be linear.

    (1)     Note.  Straight line frequency variation as found in this subclass
    may be obtained by proper design of the profile or cross section of the
    plates of the condenser, or of the cam or other equivalent driving devices,
    or by proper combinations of variable and fixed capacitors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     for tuners wherein the capacitor plates are arranged in a
    particular manner or have a particular shape.


CLS 334/80
TXT Subject matter under subclass 78 in which the variable capacitor is so
    constructed that the spacing between the plates of the capacitor may be
    varied to thus change the capacitance of the capacitor as, for example, by
    placing a series of resiliently biased stacked plates under a variable
    pressure.


CLS 334/81
TXT Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein the variable capacitor is of the
    sliding plate type which variably interleaves in a rectilinear manner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73,     for variable inductor tuners which have a capacitor type contact
    which usually moves rectilinearly along a coil winding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 296 for
    capacitors of the rectilinearly slidable plate type.


CLS 334/82
TXT Subject matter under subclass 78 in which the variable capacitor plates are
    shaped and/or arranged in a particular or special manner to give a special
    tuning operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     for variable capacitors which are designed to give a linear
    frequency versus capacitor setting tuning curve and which may be of a
    special shape and/or arrangement.


CLS 334/83
TXT Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein two or more variable capacitors
    are mechanically interlinked to move in unison.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 130 for plural mechanically variable
    resistors which are gang operated, the means of interlinking variable
    resistors being analogous to that used in connecting together plural
    capacitors.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 299.1+ for
    plural variable capacitors of the rotary plate type which may be ganged
    together.


CLS 334/84
TXT Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein the variable capacitor has a
    significant operating or driving means such as, for example, a gear train
    or cam operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17+,    for tuning units which may use a variable capacitor which is driven
    or adjusted by an electromagnetic operator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 10+ for assemblies
    particularly adapted for mechanically rotating one or more shafts of
    electronic tuning devices into desired angular positions.  See also the
    Search Notes under this subclass for a complete field of search on driving
    assemblies.


CLS 334/85
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the tuner device is
    substantially completely covered or surrounded by an enclosure and/or a
    barrier or screen is present for shielding at least a part of the tuner
    device from external electrical, magnetic or electromagnetic fields, or for
    protecting part of the tuner device from such fields originating in another
    part of the circuit, or for preventing the tuner device from emanating such
    fields or waves containing such fields.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 35+ for
    electrically shielded electrical conductors and insulators; or electrical
    shields or screens not classifiable in other subclasses of this class, and
    subclasses 50+ for electrical boxes and houses, per se. Also see the Search
    Notes under these subclasses for an additional field of search.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 84+ for inductor devices with electric
    and/or magnetic shielding means, and subclasses 90+ for housings for
    inductors.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 64+ for resistors having
    electrical shield, and subclasses 226+ for incased, embedded or housed
    resistor devices. See also the Search Notes under subclass 226 for a
    complete field of search on housings.

    455,    Telecommunications, appropriate subclasses.


CLS 334/86
TXT Mechanisms under the class definition which include a device for conveying
    information as the particular band or position within a band of frequencies
    to which a tuned circuit is adjusted.  Usually the indicator is pointer and
    scale type which is attached to the movable shaft of an adjustable tuner
    unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30+,    for circuits which indicate when a tuner is properly adjusted to
    resonance as, for example, the tuning in of a particular radio signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, appropriate subclasses, for
    card, picture or sign exhibits, either stationary or which may be made to
    appear at windows or apertures.  This class provides for means used for
    displaying information.  The information that is displayed may be the
    position or band of frequencies to which a tuner is adjusted.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 10+ for assemblies
    particularly adapted to rotate one or more shafts of an electronic tuning
    device and which may also include mechanical dial operators.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 241+ for position indicating
    means of the visual type.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 250 for wave meters.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 45 for transformers and inductive
    reactors having a movable element and a position or extent of motion
    indicator.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, appropriate subclasses, for
    electrically actuated or controlled signals and indicators, especially
    subclasses 870.01+ for telemetric systems.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 300 for a
    capacitor having an indicating means.

    362,    Illumination, appropriate subclasses for light combined with other
    structure, and especially subclasses 23+ for dial illumination.


CLS 334/87
TXT Subject matter under subclass 86 in which the indicator is adapted to
    indicate in which band of frequencies a tuner is operating where the tuner
    is of the type which is adapted to cover a plurality of such bands.

    (1)     Note.  An example of the type of indicator found in this class is a
    television channel indicator.


CLS 334/88
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which means, such as a detent
    or electrical braking circuit, is provided to check or arrest the motion of
    the tuner adjusting shaft or device at a preset position or at a given time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17+,    for tuners driven by an electromagnetic operator and so constructed
    as to scan a band of frequencies and stop on a given signal within that
    band of frequencies.  A signal seeking tuner is an example of the type of
    unit found in this group of subclasses.

    30+,    for circuits which indicate when a tuner is properly adjusted to
    resonance as, for example, the tuning in of a particular radio signal.

    86+,    for tuners having an indicator or dial to show the position or
    degree of movement of the tuner drive means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 10.41 for shaft operated
    preselected position devices having detent or clicker means, and subclasses
    527+ for detents, per se.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 116.5+ for mechanisms
    for stopping a machine when a preset condition occurs.


CLS 334/89
TXT Subject matter under the class definition which is not provided for in any
    of the preceding subclasses in this class and which is not otherwise
    classified.


CLS 335/
TTL ELECTRICITY:  MAGNETICALLY  OPERATED SWITCHES, MAGNETS, AND ELECTROMAGNETS

CLS 335/
TXT

    I.      This class is restricted to the structure of electric current
    switching devices or relays of general application for closing or opening
    electrical circuits which devices are magnetically operated or to magnet
    structure, per se, either electromagnets or permanent magnets, adapted for
    use as a source of magnetic flux for performing external work.

    II.     The devices classified in this class are for the most part of the
    electromagnetic type utilizing magnetic cores and armatures.  However,
    included also are devices of the electrodynamic type wherein mutually
    coupled conductors are caused to move relative to each other by the
    interaction of the magnetic fields produced by the flow of electric
    currents in the conductors.

    III.    Combinations of magnetically actuated circuit makers and breakers
    or work magnets and electromagnets with electrical connector plugs, sockets
    or other special type housings or casings are in this class.

    IV.     Electrical systems or circuits which include the magnetically
    controlled switches or relays or work magnet and electromagnet structures
    comprising the subject matter of this class, are excluded from this class.
    These systems or circuits are classified in the various electrical or art
    classes depending upon the type of electrical system or apparatus
    controlled.

    V.      This class also includes subcombinations of magnetically actuated
    switches and relays classified in this class and which are either claimed
    as used in a magnetically actuated switch or relay or which are by
    disclosure peculiar to such use.

    VI.     SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 602.1+ for methods of manufacturing
    transformers and inductances, and residual methods of manufacturing magnets
    and electromagnets which do not fall into Classes 148, 252 or 361.  For the
    lines between these classes see the extensive notes to Class 29, subclass
    602.1 and Class 148, Metal Treatment, subclass 100.

    140,    Wireworking, subclasses 71+ for wireworking apparatus, some of
    which can be used to manufacture electromagnets.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 100 through 122 for processes of
    improving the magnetic properties of material having at least one component
    which is a free metal or alloy, other than by mere magnetization, and
    subclasses 31.55 and 31.57 for stock resulting from such processes.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, for miscellaneous
    conductors and insulator structure, some of which is applicable in the
    electromagnet.

    178,    Telegraphy, appropriate subclasses for magnets and electromagnets
    utilized in telegraph communication systems.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 381, 439 and 619 for magnetic
    type conveyors.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 155+ for
    processes for producing chemical changes by the use of magnetic devices and
    subclass 193 for corresponding apparatus.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 222+ for such subject
    matter having magnetic means to effect the purification or separation.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 600+ for inductive heating, subclasses
    678+ for microwave heating, and subclasses 764+ for capacitive dielectric
    heating.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses and see especially
    subclass 212 for magnetic article holding discharge assistants and the
    controls therefor.

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), appropriate subclasses, and
    particularly subclasses 59+ for a pattern-controlled selective cutting
    machine wherein the pattern senser may involve electrical
    circuit-controllers.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 430+ for winding of
    motor cores, inductances, and resistances.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, appropriate subclasses for electric
    railway signaling systems utilizing magnets and electromagnets.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 281+ for ionic separation or analysis
    methods and apparatus which use magnets or electromagnets, subclasses 396
        + for electron or ion beam deflection or focusing systems utilizing
    magnets or electromagnets.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 62.51+ for processes of making magnetic
    compositions and the resulting product when it is claimed as stock or bulk
    material, and subclasses 500+ for electrically conductive compositions and
    devices defined solely in terms of the composition of which they are
    composed.  Included are contacts and switches defined solely in terms of
    their composition or stock.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclass 251.5 for magnetic closure fasteners.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 65.5 and 88
    for magnetic lifting and grappling devices.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, particularly
    subclasses 38, 55+, 96+, 100, 326+ for switching systems and subclass 101
    for the control or removal of residual or remnant magnetism.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 10+ for
    electric motor and generator structure utilizing magnets or electromagnets.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 153+ for space
    discharge devices and lamps utilizing magnets or electromagnets.  Class 313
    is the generic class for the structure of space discharge devices.  See
    subclasses 146+ for Class 313 for discharge devices which are provided with
    a movable electrode.  Some discharge devices are closely analogous in
    structure to some types of circuit makers and breakers.  See section XXII
    of the class definition of Class 313 for the distinction between a space
    discharge device and a circuit maker and breaker.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    appropriate subclasses for arc lamps having magnets and electromagnets for
    controlling the feed of arc electrodes.  Note particularly subclasses 113+.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for electric lamp and space discharge device systems having
    electromagnets and magnets.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    electric motor control systems utilizing magnets, electromagnets or relays,
    particularly subclasses 789+ for induction motor systems operating from a
    single phase source with start winding removal under the control of an
    electromagnetic switch; and subclasses 821+ for induction motor systems
    having the impedance of the secondary circuit under the control of an
    electromagnetic switch.

    320,    Electricity:  Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclasses for battery and condenser charging and discharging
    systems utilizing magnets and electromagnets or relays.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    generator systems utilizing magnets, electromagnets or relays.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for voltage control or phase control systems utilizing magnets,
    electromagnets or relays.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 415+ for contact,
    relays and switch testing, subclass 200 for magnetic testing devices
    utilizing magnets and electromagnets or inductors, and subclasses 76.11+
    for electric meters utilizing magnets and electromagnets.

    332,    Modulators, appropriate subclasses for modulators utilizing magnets
    and electromagnets.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, appropriate subclass for wave
    transmission lines and networks utilizing magnets, electromagnets or
    relays, subclasses 101+ for plural channel systems including branched
    circuits with switching, subclass 13 for resonator type breakdown discharge
    system, e.g., T-R or R-T systems, and 245+ subclasses for long line
    elements and components which may perform a switching or blocking function,
    e.g., long line short circuiting switches and long line shorting plugs.

    334,    Tuners, appropriate subclasses for a variable tuner comprising an
    inductor and a capacitor, with the inductor and/or capacitor being
    variable, subclasses 47+ for tuners which are varied or adjusted by a
    switching operation which usually involves a make and break type switch of
    the electromagnetically actuated type.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for the structure of
    transformers and inductive reactors of general utility.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, appropriate subclasses for
    miscellaneous electrical communication systems utilizing magnets,
    electromagnets or electromagnetically actuated switches.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, for radio wave energy systems
    such as radar and directive systems, which have an antenna, some of which
    systems utilize magnets, electromagnets or relays and for antennas which
    may utilize electromagnetically actuated switches, note particularly
    subclass 768 for slot type antennas with periodic control of the slot or
    coupling; subclass 777 for plural wave guide type antennas with control of
    the individual antenna; subclass 876 for antennas with switching between
    the antennas and lines; and subclass 904 for antennas which may be combined
    with a switch.

    346,    Recorders, appropriate subclasses for recording devices utilizing
    magnets, electromagnets or relays.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 245+ for
    polarity reversing systems; subclasses 2+ for safely systems involving
    circuit interruption; subclasses 139+ for relay and electromagnetic
    switching systems; and subclasses 600+, especially subclass 376 for
    arrangements of circuit-closer structures on a mounting or combinations of
    circuit-closers with conductors or busbars, including enclosed or housed
    switchboards.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 398 for electric illumination device having
    magnetic supporting means.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    conversion systems utilizing electromagnets, magnets, or relays.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, particularly subclasses 138+
    for heating inductors combined with electric furnace structure.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 186.01+ for apparatus for producing
    chemical changes in electromagnetic fields.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 58+ for coating processes, per se,
    wherein the product in useful as an electrical product.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 375+ for coated
    electrical conductors which may include contacts and switches, but which
    are merely recited as a base with a particular coating thereon.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclass 12 for electrical connectors having
    magnetic holding means.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 352+ for remotely controlled radio
    receivers which may use electromagnets; and subclasses 170.1+ for radio
    receivers for tuning or wave selection using electromagnets.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 150+ for high temperature (Tc > 30 K) superconducting devices,
    and particularly subclasses 211+ for electrical energy storage devices,
    magnetic coils, wires, cable, etc.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 9+ for permanent magnets or electromagnets
    utilized in surgery and diagnostics.


CLS 335/1
TXT Devices under the class definition including at least one contact actuating
    switch means of the type classifiable in this class in combination with a
    diverse type switching means of a type classifiable elsewhere in another
    art class.  The two or more switching means may be physically located in
    the same housing or casing and may have cooperative features as long as
    each one is operative independently of the other.  Some examples of diverse
    type switches are the mechanical, thermal and thermal current actuated type.

    (1)     Note.  In order to be classifiable in this subclass the claimed
    subject matter must include means whereby at least one set of main contacts
    are opened or closed entirely under the influence of magnetic means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141+,   for single switch devices having a principal actuating means which
    is magnetically controlled in combination with thermal current responsive
    means.

    159+,   for patents claiming a plurality of independent switch devices
    under the class definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 5 for devices,
    other than magnetically actuating, comprising a plurality of switches, each
    being separately operated whereby a plurality of contacts are actuating to
    control at least two or more circuits; subclasses 175+ for nonmagnetically
    controlled telephone type switches, not restricted to the telephone art by
    claimed subject matter, wherein a plurality of contacts are automatically
    selected; subclass 50 for a plurality of nonmagnetically operated switches
    adapted to be operated in a predetermined sequence; subclass 51.04 for
    plural switches selectively controlling multiple circuits and combined with
    or actuated by connector coupling; subclass 81.4 for devices comprising a
    plurality of fluid pressure actuated switches.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, particularly
    subclasses 29, 38, 113+, and 326+ for switching systems which may include
    plural switches.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclasses 2+ for electrothermal or thermally actuated circuit makers and
    breakers.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ for
    electric circuits for relays and electromagnets which may include a
    plurality of switches.


CLS 335/2
TXT Devices under the class definition including operating or actuating means
    for opening or closing the switch contacts and in which at least one of
    such operating or actuating means is an electromagnet.  For purposes of
    classification in this subclass an electrical circuit is considered to be
    the equivalent to a single continuous conductor joining a source to a load
    through a device capable of interrupting or completing the continuity of
    the conductor.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter to be found in this and the indented
    subclasses includes devices known as "electromagnetic switches", "circuit
    breakers", "relays" and "electromagnetic interrupters".

    (2)     Note.  Devices commonly known as "relays" and which, by enclosure,
    contain all the essential structure to make a switch, but in which the
    claimed subject matter does not include actual contact structure are in
    this class in subclasses 209+ below.

    (3)     Note.  For electromagnetically actuated switches forming an element
    of an electrical control circuit for a particular art device search should
    be extended to the art class relating to the particular art device to be
    controlled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209+,   below, for subject matter relating to electromagnet with armature
    and for electromagnet or magnet structure, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, appropriate subclasses for electromagnetically operated
    switching devices and keying devices or other code transmitters especially
    adapted for the telegraph art.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 12 for pivoted
    contact dial type switches with electromagnetic release, subclasses 402+
    for double snap switches utilizing magnetic means to improve the snap
    action, subclass 83 for diaphragm type, fluid pressure actuated switches
    with a magnet.

    218,    High-Voltage Switches With Arc Preventing and Extinguishing
    Devices, subclasses 22+ for electromagnetic or permanent magnetic blow out
    means for extinguishing an arc.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, appropriate subclasses, especially
    subclasses 218+ for electrically actuated electromagnetic switch and signal
    devices peculiar to the railway art.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 112+
    for switching systems in which the individual switches may be wholly or in
    part electromagnetically controlled.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 10+ for
    dynamo-electric machine structure, particularly subclasses 31+ for
    reciprocating devices with self-actuated interrupter, and subclasses 40+
    for rotary machines, which may include switching devices in the form of
    commutators.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    motor control systems which may include electromagnetic control switch
    means, see especially subclasses 445+.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 415+ for contact,
    relay and switch testing.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, appropriate subclasses for
    electromagnetic switches utilized in electrical signaling or communication
    systems in general.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    electromagnetic switches used in safety and protection systems, subclasses
    139+ for control circuits for electromagnetic devices, and subclasses 247+
    for igniting system using magnets or electromagnetic control means.


CLS 335/3
TXT Devices under subclass 2 including at least one element of the contact
    actuating or control means which consists of ferromagnetic material whose
    physical dimensions are subject to change in the presence of a magnetic
    field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215+,   for magnetostrictive device actuator structure, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, especially subclass 26 for
    the structure of magnetostrictive type, reciprocating, dynamoelectric
    machines.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, especially subclass 118 for
    magnetostrictive motor with control system therefor.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ for
    control circuits for electromagnetic devices.


CLS 335/4
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2 in which the device includes structure
    which peculiarly adapts or restricts its use to radio-frequency or
    microwave frequency conductive circuitry.

    (1)     Note.  The switching devices found in this and indented subclass 5
    below comprise contact means whereby a continuous physical path is
    established in one or more conductors of the circuit to be controlled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, for high frequency wave
    transmission line and network switching systems, particularly subclasses 2+
    for automatically controlled plural channel systems, subclasses 101+ for
    branched circuit switching, subclass 13 for resonator breakdown systems
    (e.g., TR or RT systems), subclass 15 for pilot line controlled systems;
    subclass 16 for pilot current controlled systems, subclasses 17.1+ for
    automatically controlled systems and subclasses 245+ for wave transmission
    components that may include switches.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 777 for plural wave
    guide antennas with lobe switching and subclasses 876 and 904 for antennas
    with switch.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 78+ for so-called T. R. switches
    connecting first the transmitter and then the receiver selectively to an
    antenna.


CLS 335/5
TXT Subject matter under subclass 4 wherein the device includes structure which
    peculiarly adapts it for use in the completion or disconnection of
    circuitry consisting of coaxial conductors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 1+, for
    multiple circuit control devices in which a plurality of contacts; which
    are not electromagnetically actuated, are arranged to switch two or more
    circuits.


CLS 335/6
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the device comprises means whereby
    normally closed contacts are automatically interrupted upon the occurrence
    of an abnormal circuit condition in a circuit with which the device is
    designed to be used.  The circuit interrupting device may be, by way of
    example, of any one of the types known as "air circuit breakers" or "oil
    circuit breakers", which circuit breakers may be of the "single-throw",
    "double-throw" or "multiple circuit breaker" type; provided, that at least
    one electromagnet is utilized as a means for operating the contacts to an
    open position upon the occurrence of an abnormal condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    218,    High-Voltage Switches With Arc Preventing and Extinguishing
    Devices, subclasses 1+ and 22+, for circuit interrupting devices with
    nonmagnetic control means combined with magnetic blow out.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, particularly
    subclasses 39, 86, 97, 116+, and 328 for condition responsive switching
    systems.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass for a circuit making or breaking device responsive to
    a predetermined condition in a battery charging or discharging circuit or a
    battery itself.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    appropriate subclasses for similar devices electrothermally or thermally
    controlled.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    devices similar to those to be found in Class 335 utilized in circuit
    safety or protective systems, particularly subclasses 93+ which includes
    specific circuit breaker or relay structure.


CLS 335/7
TXT Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the automatic circuit interrupting
    device comprises means responsive to plural diverse abnormal circuit
    conditions such as overload under voltage, etc.  Usually the actuating
    means comprises separate devices each of which responds to a given
    predetermined condition and is operative either independently or in
    cooperation with another means.  Some examples; (1) plural electromagnets
    one of which is voltage responsive and one of which is current responsive
    or (2) overload and underload coils.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35+,    for significant trip structure of a combined nature such as
    magnetic and thermal, for instance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 116
    for condition responsive switching systems which may or may not be
    responsive to a plurality of conditions.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ and
    appropriate subclasses, for safety and protection systems and devices which
    may be responsive to a plurality of conditions in the systems.


CLS 335/8
TXT Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the circuit interrupting device
    comprises a plurality of individual conductors with contact pairs
    associated with each conductor a contact pair actuating means for each
    contact pair, each contact pair completing a circuit through one conductor
    of a polyphase or plural conductor transmission line.  Devices which are
    known as bipole or double pole and which complete the circuit in each
    conductor of a direct current circuit will also be found here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for polyphase switches designed to be actuated by alternating or
    fluctuating current and having a plurality of contacts whereby one
    polyphase input is connected to a similar polyphase output.

    106,    for devices of the multiple contact type wherein a plurality of
    external circuits may be completed or opened either selectively or
    simultaneously by a magnetically actuated switch means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 13+
    for polyphase systems in general which may include phase switches and
    subclasses 112+ for plural phase switching systems, especially subclass 127
    for phase sequence responsive type.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    similar switching or circuit interrupting devices combined with safety and
    protective systems, particularly subclass 76 for such systems with phase
    sequence analyzer means.


CLS 335/9
TXT Subject matter under subclass 8 wherein the device comprises individual
    latching or tripping means associated with each separate phase or leg
    contact pair thereof.  The individual latch or trip means may operate
    individually on its corresponding contact pair of the circuit, or, may upon
    operation, actuate a tripping bar whereby the remaining contact pairs are
    opened.


CLS 335/10
TXT Subject matter under subclass 8 wherein the interrupting device comprises a
    single latch or trip means whereby the plurality of phase or leg contacts
    pairs are simultaneously maintained in a first position until released
    whereupon the plurality of contact pairs are allowed to open simultaneously.


CLS 335/11
TXT Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the automatic circuit interrupting
    means consists of two or more separate and distinct devices adapted to
    jointly or separately interrupt the continuity of a circuit to be
    controlled.  The devices may be connected in series, tandem or any other
    desired arrangement provided there is single continuous circuit from a
    source to a load through the switch means.  For example, each switch may be
    in one leg of a two conductor circuit.

    (1)     Note.  The devices to found here differ from the multiple or
    polyphase devices in subclasses 8+ above, in that the subject matter
    relates to devices for interrupting a single polyphase circuit by a single
    switch means having at least one pair of contacts for each phase.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8+,     for multiple or polyphase switches.  See (1) Note above.

    88+,    for plural periodic switches.

    152,    for plural vacuum or hermetically sealed switches.

    159+,   for plural electromagnetically actuated switches not specifically
    recited as automatic circuit interrupter devices and each being operative
    independently of the other.

    206,    for plural permanent magnet actuated switches.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 5 for multiple
    circuit control devices constituting a plurality of switches.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 113+
    for switching systems comprising plural switches.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    safety and protection systems and devices which may include a plurality of
    interrupter devices and subclasses 139+ for electric circuits for relays
    and electromagnets particularly subclasses 160+ for plural relays and
    electromagnets.


CLS 335/12
TXT Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the interrupting device structure
    includes auxiliary contacts or other significant means whereby an
    electrical shunt circuit is established to bypass either the main circuit
    contacts or the operating coil of the device, prior to the opening or
    closing of the main contacts, thereby preventing arcing and damage to
    either the main contacts or the operating coil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156,    for electromagnetically actuated switches combined with protective
    means.

    201,    for magnetic switches with arc prevention means.

    236+,   for electromagnetic relays with a shunt path for the magnetic flux.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    218,    High-Voltage Switches With Arc Preventing and Extinguishing
    Devices, subclasses 1+ for nonmagnetically controlled switches with arc
    prevention means.


    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses
    134+, for switching systems with arc prevention or other switch contact
    operation facilitating means.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclasses 15+ for electrothermally actuated shunt circuit completion
    devices.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    protective devices with arc prevention, subclasses 54+ and 58 for
    electromagnetic device protection circuits with shunting or impedance
    insertion means.


CLS 335/13
TXT Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the interrupting device structure
    includes at least one auxiliary switch means operative independently of the
    main circuit contacts whereby a circuit is completed through the
    electromagnetic operating coil of the contact actuating means or through
    some other operative element of the device such as a holding or tripping
    coil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for similar structure wherein the auxiliary switch comprises
    shunting contacts.

    157,    for electromagnetically actuated switches with holding magnets
    which may be actuated by a circuit extending through holding contacts.


CLS 335/14
TXT Devices under subclass 6 wherein the circuit interrupting means is directly
    connected to the movable contact or contacts and operable by the effect of
    a magnetic field through a movable armature, or other mechanical means
    responsive to the magnetic field of a flux source.  That is the devices
    found in this subclass do not utilize a motion converting mechanism between
    the movable armature or core and the contacts.  The devices classified here
    are, for the most part, of the class or apparatus generally shown as "cut
    outs".

    (1)     Note.  To complete the search the various classes listed in the
    search notes under Class 317, subclass 9 should be consulted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68+,    for devices in which the contacts are motor operated.

    78+,    for polarity responsive devices where at least one of the contacts
    may be directly carried by the armature.

    87+,    for periodic switches where at least one movable contact is carried
    by a flexible armature.

    147+,   for electrodynamically operated switches which cause the contacts
    to open directly.

    203,    for armature structure significant to switches, in which the
    armature may comprise a contact bridging means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    safety and protection systems which may in general include cutouts.


CLS 335/15
TXT Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the interrupting device comprises
    significant structure whereby the movable contact or contacts are biased
    either open or closed, the pressure between the contacts is controlled or
    regulated or by which the contacts are held in the operative condition and
    which structure is separate and distinct from the conventional latching
    devices customarily in use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157+,   for switching devices, not restricted to the automatic circuit
    opening function, having significant locking or holding structure.

    188,    for snap action contact actuating means.

    192,    for contact carrying on actuating structure with biasing means.

    193,    for contact actuators with vibration, bounce or chatter prevention
    means.

    194+,   for contact pressure maintaining or adjustment means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Maker and Breakers, appropriate subclasses
    for similar contact biasing or holding means for nonmagnetically actuated
    switches, especially subclass 170 for contact pressure adjustment switches.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 142
    for miscellaneous switches having locking, holding or breaking means for
    the switch.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 170+ for
    relay systems having relays with contact pressure increasing means, and
    subclass 194 for relay systems having relays with holding means such as a
    locking contact.


CLS 335/16
TXT Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein the significant biasing, holding
    or pressure control means consists of either a magnet or other device which
    depends for its operation on the reaction between current in one part of an
    electric circuit and the current in another part, such as a current loop
    for creating electrodynamic forces tending to separate or close the
    relatively movable contacts.


CLS 335/17
TXT Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the circuit interrupting device
    includes signalling, indicating or alarm structure whereby the condition of
    the switch, whether open or closed, physically inoperative, etc., is
    automatically communicated to an operator or other interested observer by
    visual or audible means.  In order to be classifiable in this subclass the
    signalling or indicating means must include structure in addition to an
    operating lever or other operating means whose position is dependent upon
    whether the contacts are open or closed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156,    for electromagnetically operated switches with significant
    protective means for the switch itself or its contacts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 167 for
    switches in general with indicators.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    appropriate subclasses for various types of electrothermal and thermally
    actuated switches with indicators.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 480+ for
    electromagnetically operated mechanical traffic or vehicle signals,
    subclass 523 for signalling devices responsive to the sequence of operation
    of plural circuit breakers, subclass 644 for a switch or relay condition
    signalling device without significant switch or relay structure, and
    subclasses 652 and 366+ for visual signals electromagnetically actuated.


CLS 335/18
TXT Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the structure includes means
    automatically responsive specifically to predetermined current values in
    the circuit to be controlled or to some abnormal current condition in the
    circuit, such as current reversal, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155,    for switching devices, which are not specifically claimed as
    automatic circuit interrupting devices, and having operative means
    responsive to predetermined current or voltage value.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, appropriate
    subclasses, particularly subclasses 125+ for miscellaneous switching
    systems responsive to electrical conditions.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    motor control switches which may be responsive to predetermined condition
    or abnormal current or voltage value in a motor circuit.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    appropriate subclasses for electrothermal and thermally actuated switches,
    which may be set to operate at a predetermined current value.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 635+ for signals and alarms
    responsive to a predetermined condition of electrical apparatus.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    safety and protection systems and devices responsive to predetermined
    condition such as voltage or reverse current.


CLS 335/19
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 wherein the automatically responsive means
    is designed to be actuated when the current in the circuit to be controlled
    falls to a zero value.


CLS 335/20
TXT Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the structure includes means
    automatically responsive specifically to predetermined values, or some
    abnormal condition, of the voltage existing in the circuit to be
    controlled, such as, for example, over-voltage under-voltage or no voltage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155,    for electromagnetic switches, not specifically claimed as automatic
    circuit interrupters, having means responsive to a predetermined voltage
    value.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, appropriate
    subclasses, particularly subclass 130 for switching systems which are
    voltage responsive.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 88+ for
    voltage responsive safety or protection systems, and subclasses 139+ for
    relay systems which may be responsive to predetermined voltage levels.


CLS 335/21
TXT Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the structure includes significant
    details of operating means whereby the contacts may be restrained in a
    closed condition by a latch or detent which may be tripped by the action of
    a magnet or other means.  The contacts are usually held in circuit closing
    position and tripped to open position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167+,   for significant latch devices.

    172+,   for tripping devices peculiarly adapted for use with
    electromagnetic switches but not restricted to automatic interrupters.

    253+,   for electromagnet and armature in general with armature latch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, for automatically controlled
    mechanisms.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 12+ for dial
    type switches with electromagnetic release, subclasses 39+ for clock train
    operated switch with retarded latch trip, subclasses 411+, 415+, 470, 471,
    and 424 for snap switches with latch trip.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclasses 70+ for bimetallically controlled electrothermal switches with
    thermally controlled latch or trip means, 150+ for fusible element
    controlled switches with latch or trip means, 174 for fusible cut out
    devices with latch or trip means and 356 for thermally controlled switches
    with latch or trip means.


CLS 335/22
TXT Subject matter under subclass 21 wherein the significant latching or
    tripping structure comprises two or more separate means, whereby the
    contacts are maintained in a closed position until released or whereby the
    latching means is released and the contacts allowed to open, and each
    acting independently of the other.

    Devices in which the latching means comprises a main latch under the
    control of an auxiliary latch and in which the actuation of the main latch
    depends upon the condition of the auxiliary latch will not be found here
    but in the generic subclass 21 above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169,    for details of plural or combined latch means adapted for use with
    electromagnetic switches.

    173,    for details of plural tripping means adapted for use with
    electromagnetic switches.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 39+ for
    nonmagnetically activated retarded switches with latch trip means,
    subclasses 70+ for double snap switches with latch trip, subclass 470, 471
    for single snap with latch trip, subclass 78 for reciprocating contact snap
    switches with latch trip, and subclass 169 for latch structure.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclasses 71 and 175 for electrothermally actuated switches with combined
    latching or tripping means.


CLS 335/23
TXT Subject matter under subclass 22 wherein the latching or tripping means
    consists of a plurality of means, each of which is operable upon a
    different principle, as for instance, one may be magnetic and the other
    mechanical, or one thermal and the other manual.


CLS 335/24
TXT Subject matter under subclass 21 wherein the device comprises, other than
    in name only, significant details of structure which is operative, upon the
    occurance of abnormal condition in the controlled circuit, to prevent the
    main contacts from remaining closed or the latch from functioning
    regardless of the operation of a closing means, or wherein the main
    contacts are automatically opened upon the occurrence of an abnormal
    circuit condition independently of the position of a manual or other
    contact closing means.  One example of a device to be found here consists
    of a manually closed switch in which a mechanical latch is operated by a
    handle to maintain the contacts in closed condition, the latch being
    operated or tripped automatically by some overload condition even though
    the closing lever remains in the actuated condition.

    (1)     Note.  Where the claim recites that the device is "trip-free",
    without any specific details of such a feature and then recites specific
    details of structure which would cause the patent to be placed in a more
    restricted subclass below, the original patent will be placed in the more
    restricted subclass and officially cross-referenced back in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    safety and protection systems may employ circuit interrupters which are
    nonreclosable.


CLS 335/25
TXT Subject matter under subclass 24 wherein the device includes significant
    structure whereby the operative connection between the main contact
    actuating means and the means for maintaining the contacts in a closed
    condition (latch) is disabled.  The disabling means may include manual,
    gravity actuated, lost motion or magnetic devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157+,   for switches with lock open structure for preventing the contacts
    from being actuated.


CLS 335/26
TXT Subject matter under subclass 21 wherein the structure includes significant
    means whereby after an automatic disconnection of the main contacts, upon
    the occurrence of a fault or surge in the circuit, the contacts are
    automatically reclosed to restore service in the event that the fault has
    been removed; or means whereby the latching mechanism is reset to an
    operative condition whereby the contact actuating means will be rigidly
    held in an operated condition upon the contacts being reclosed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166,    for electromagnetically actuated switches in general with latch or
    trip resetting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 71+ for
    safety and protective systems with means for subsequent automatic
    restoration of the system to a normal operative condition.


CLS 335/27
TXT Subject matter under subclass 26 wherein the structure includes significant
    means whereby the tripping operation is accomplished automatically and the
    reclosing or resetting operation is accomplished by manual means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164,    for manual or gravity actuated latch with electromagnetic trip.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 114 for
    protective systems including means for manual and automatic opening of a
    breaker with manual reclosing means.


CLS 335/28
TXT Subject matter under subclass 26 wherein the reclosing or resetting
    structure is automatically operated and is combined with significant means
    whereby one or both operations take place after a time interval longer than
    the normal operating interval or after a fixed or predetermined interval
    which may be shorter than the normal interval.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39+,    for magnetic latch or trip means with time delay means.

    59+,    for electromagnetically actuated switches of the retarded or
    delayed type.

    139,    for step-by-step switches with timing or index means.

    218,    for temperature responsive magnets and electromagnets with time
    delay means.

    239+,   for electromagnet with armature time delay movement control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 33+ for
    nonmagnetically actuated switches of the retarded type.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 14+
    for switching systems with time delay or retardation means.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, and subclasses 445+ for
    automatic stopping and/or starting means with time delay.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    safety and protective systems with time delay means and subclasses 195+ for
    relay systems with time delay features.

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, art collection 921 for motor
    control systems including time delay means.


CLS 335/29
TXT Subject matter under subclass 28 wherein the significant timing or delay
    means is fluid controlled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for electromagnetically operated switches in general with pneumatic
    delay means.

    62,     for electromagnetically operated switches in general with hydraulic
    delay means.

    240,    for electromagnet with an armature movement control by the dashpot.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 266+, for a fluid-resistance brake or shock
    absorber of general utility.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 34 for
    nonmagnetically actuated switches with dashpot retarding means and
    subclasses 81+ for fluid pressure actuated switches.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 116 for
    systems utilizing pneumatically operated breakers.


CLS 335/30
TXT Subject matter under subclass 28 wherein the delay structure includes means
    whereby the time interval between the opening of the contacts and the
    reclosing thereof, the resetting of the latch, or the permanent opening
    (lockout) of the main contacts is controlled by a mechanical motor means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64+,    for electromagnetically actuated switches of the retarded or
    delayed type utilizing a motor or motor controlled means.

    139,    for step-by-step switch clock mechanism timing means.

    239+,   for electromagnets with time delay armature movement control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 76 for retarded circuit closers peculiar to
    telegraph circuits.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 35+ for
    nonelectromagnetically operated switches of the  retarded type and
    utilizing clocks, clock trains or similar gearing as a retarding means.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 141+
    for a switching system including a time delay or retardation means for
    controlling a switch actuation and which may include motor means.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclasses 51, 81, 88, 127, 163, and 301 for electrothermal or thermally
    controlled switches with timing means which may be time controlled.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 71+ for
    systems including circuit breakers with time delay means including clock
    work.


CLS 335/31
TXT Subject matter under subclass 28 wherein the timing or delay structure
    includes means whereby the time interval between the opening of the
    contacts and the reclosing thereof, resetting of the latch or permanent
    opening (lockout) of the main contacts is controlled either wholly or in
    part by thermal means, such as a bimetallic element, for example.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39+,    for circuit interrupters with magnetic latch or trip means which
    may include thermal time delay means.

    66,     below for switches of the retarded or delayed type including
    thermally responsive delay means.

    217+,   for electromagnet and armature with temperature responsive type
    delay means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclass 301 for time controlled thermally responsive switches.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 99 for
    safety protective systems utilizing combined thermal-electromagnetic
    devices.


CLS 335/32
TXT Subject matter under subclass 28 wherein the timing or delay structure
    includes counting or integrating means whereby the time interval between
    the initial opening and the final reclosing operation or final opening
    (lockout) of the main contacts comprises a cycle of opening and reclosing
    operations or whereby the circuit completing contacts are normally latched
    in closed condition and released by a counting mechanism adapted to respond
    to successive fault current impulses until a predetermined number of such
    pulses after which the latch is released allowing the contacts to open.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 71+ for
    safety protective systems utilizing subsequent automatic restoring means.


CLS 335/33
TXT Subject matter under subclass 32 wherein the timing or delay means includes
    significant structure whereby at least two of the cycles between the
    initial opening of the main contacts and the final opening or, lockout
    thereof, are of different duration.  For example, the initial opening may
    be instantaneous while the succeeding cycles may be of longer duration or
    the initial opening may be delayed while the succeeding cycles may be of
    short duration.


CLS 335/34
TXT Subject matter under subclass 32 wherein the timing or delay means
    comprises significant structure whereby the main contacts are positively
    restrained from being reclosed after a given sequence of opening and
    reclosing operations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for motor operated switches with significant locking means.

    113,    for automatically actuated plural contact switches with locking or
    latching means.

    157+,   for other electromagnetically actuated switches with lockout (open)
    means.


CLS 335/35
TXT Subject matter under subclass 21 wherein the trip structure contains
    significant details of more than a single tripping device each one of which
    is responsive to a different condition or in which each is actuated by
    means operating upon a different principle.  Also devices in which the
    current in the winding of a magnetic trip device is controlled by a
    bimetal, or other thermal means, which may be heated in response to current
    flow are also classified here.

    (1)     Note.  Generally the combination of a magnetic trip with a
    bimetallic means results in an instantaneous tripping action upon a large
    surge of current and a time delayed tripping action following a sustained
    overload.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173,    for other electromagnetically actuated switches with plural
    significant diverse tripping means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    miscellaneous circuit breaker systems, and subclass 114 for safety and
    protective systems utilizing manual and automatic opening of a breaker.


CLS 335/36
TXT Subject matter under subclass 35 wherein the combined trip structure
    includes at least one element of structure common to or forming an integral
    part of each one of the plural separate tripping means.


CLS 335/37
TXT Subject matter under subclass 35 wherein the trip structure includes at
    least one thermal element, which element acts as a winding or flux source
    for a magnetic device.  Usually, in the patents classified here, the
    thermal element acts as a delayed tripping device while the magnetic device
    operates instantly upon excessive current in the thermal device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141+,   for other electromagnetically operated switches with additional
    thermal current responsive means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 3 for multiple
    circuit control switches with thermal current responsive means.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 99 for
    safety and protective systems including devices with combined thermal
    electromagnetic relay means, one of which may act instantaneously.


CLS 335/38
TXT Subject matter under subclass 21 wherein the trip structure consists wholly
    or exclusively of magnetically operated means. The trip means may consist
    of plural magnets acting conjointly, single magnet means with a plurality
    of armatures or any other magnetic structure so long as the operating means
    consists of magnetic means only.

    (1)     Note.  For magnetic trip structure in general which performs the
    additional function of arc suppression or blow-out, the search should be
    extended to subclass 201 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174,    for electromagnetically actuated switches in general with
    significant magnetically actuated tripping means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 12+ for dial
    type multiple circuit controllers with electromagnetic release, subclass
    404 for double snap switches with magnetic latch trip, subclass 404 for
    single switches with magnetic latch trip.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 519 for automatically operated current
    connection or disconnection means for heating devices comprising
    electromagnetic relay means.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ and
    appropriate subclasses for safety and protective systems employing
    electromagnetic protective devices.


CLS 335/39
TXT Subject matter under subclass 38 wherein the trip structure includes
    significant means whereby the tripping operation is delayed for a
    predetermined interval of time after the occurrence of the circuit
    condition tending to cause such a tripping action.  The significant time
    delay means may consist of a thermal or other restraining means, provided
    that, it acts directly upon the magnetically operated tripping means to
    thereby prevent the said magnetic means from performing a tripping
    operation during the period of restraint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35+,    for plural trips or combined operating means for a single trip.


CLS 335/40
TXT Subject matter under subclass 39 wherein the significant time delay
    structure includes means responsive to the degree of overload occurring in
    the controlled circuit.  For instance, the device may contain a first
    magnetic winding or armature actuated instantaneously upon a short circuit
    occurring and another winding or armature responsive to a continuous
    overload.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 94+ for
    safety and protective systems employing a device having time delay
    actuating means combined with instantaneous control (e.g., responsive to
    the extent of the fault).


CLS 335/41
TXT Subject matter under subclass 38 wherein the magnetic flux producing
    winging of the magnetic trip structure either comprises a section of a
    conductor, which is directly in the controlled circuit or is connected in
    series with the main contacts.


CLS 335/42
TXT Subject matter under subclass 38 wherein the magnetic tripping means
    includes significant structure whereby the trip operating characteristics
    thereof may be adjusted or calibrated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for electromagnetic switch with adjustment or calibrating means for
    thermally actuated latch or trip means.

    176,    for other electromagnetically actuated switches with adjustable
    magnetic tripping means.


CLS 335/43
TXT Subject matter under subclass 21 wherein the trip structure consists wholly
    or exclusively of thermally actuated means. The thermal member or members
    in the device may be inductively heated or directly heated by current in
    the controlled circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35+,    for trip actuating means comprising thermal means plus some
    additional means such as magnetic, mechanical or manual, operating means.

    141+,   for other electromagnetically actuated switches combined with
    thermal current responsive means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 3 for multiple
    circuit control switches with thermal current combined actuating means.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 494+ for automatically regulated or
    controlled power supply systems for electric heaters with thermally
    responsive control means and subclasses 510+ for thermally responsive
    automatic current connection or disconnection means for heating devices.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    appropriate subclasses for thermal current actuated switches with latch
    trip means.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    safety and protective systems with thermal control means and subclasses
    161+ for electric circuits for relays and electromagnets utilizing
    thermally actuated means.


CLS 335/44
TXT Subject matter under subclass 43 wherein the significant tripping structure
    includes means whereby the thermal actuating means is compensated for
    changes in ambient temperature to prevent unwanted change in the operating
    characteristics thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 140 for
    electric circuits for relays and electromagnets including means for
    compensating for thermal changes.


CLS 335/45
TXT Subject matter under subclass 43 wherein the trip structure includes means
    whereby the current value necessary to cause a response of the control
    device, of the trip means, or the electromagnetic force necessary to permit
    the actuation of the contacts to open or closed condition, may be
    regulated, readily adjusted or calibrated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for electromagnetic circuit interrupters with adjustment or
    calibration of magnetic latch or trip actuating means.

    176,    for electromagnetic switches in general with adjustable
    magnetically operated trip means.


CLS 335/46
TXT Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the interrupting device includes
    significant structure whereby (1) rebound of the contacts upon opening or
    closing (2) any undesirable actuation of the contacts from one condition to
    another, either in response to abnormal circuit conditions or by jar or
    shock, is prevented, or (3) whereby the operating mechanism may be
    positively locked against undesirable circuit opening and/or closing
    movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157+,   for other electromagnetically actuated switches with locking or
    holding means.

    193,    for significant contact actuating structure with vibration, bounce
    or chatter prevention means.

    271,    for electromagnet with armature mounting means with bounce or
    vibration preventing means.

    277,    for electromagnet with armature with shock absorption, vibration or
    bounce preventing means in general.


CLS 335/47
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the structure includes means
    whereby at least one electrical circuit is completed through a conductive
    liquid, usually mercury.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of classification a conductive fluid comprising
    a fluid dielectric with copper or other electrical conductive particles in
    suspension therein is considered as a conductive liquid classifiable in
    this or the indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 32 for periodic
    switches of the liquid contact type; subclass 81.6 for fluid pressure
    operated switches of the liquid contact type; and subclass 152 for
    nonelectromagnetically controlled switches in general utilizing liquid
    contacts.

            Note.  Class 200, subclass 152 is the generic place for liquid
    contact (mercury) switches.  To complete the search for this subject matter
    the search notes under that subclass definition should be consulted.



    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 92+ for devices for
    measuring, testing or sensing electricity, per se, and utilizing fluid
    conductors.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclasses 21, 114+, 306+, particularly subclasses 331 and 373 for
    electrothermal or thermally controlled switches utilizing liquid contacts.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 500+ for
    electrolytic current interrupting systems and devices.


CLS 335/48
TXT Subject matter under subclass 47 wherein the structure includes a plurality
    of three or more electrodes through which a current may enter or leave the
    liquid or other contact means whereby at least two or more external
    electrical circuits may be completed through the device.

    (1)     Note.  Devices which, in fact constitute a plurality of separate
    mercury switches supported in a single group and which, may or may not
    depend upon a single magnet for actuation, are considered to come within
    the above subclass definition as special mercury switches.  Devices of this
    type will have the original placed here and an official cross-reference
    placed in subclasses 159+ below.

    (2)     Note.  Normally patents having the original classified here or in
    any other of the special type groups below will not be crossed down into
    the general multiple contact subclasses 106+ below, unless the disclosed
    subject matter discloses contact structure which may be of general utility
    in switches other than the special type with which it is disclosed or
    claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8+,     for automatic circuit interrupters of the polyphase or multiple
    type.

    11,     for automatic circuit interrupters of the plural switch type.

    60,     for retarded or delayed type electromagnetically actuated switches
    which complete plural circuits alternately, consecutively or selectively.

    72,     for switches with plural contacts.

    88+,    for periodically operative switches with means for completing
    plural circuits.

    106+,   for multiple type switching devices not restricted to the specific
    types listed above.

    152,    for plural vacuum or sealed switches.

    159+,   for plural switches.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 1+, for
    multiple circuit switches in general, subclasses 23+ for periodic switches
    of the multiple contact type, and subclass 32 for periodic switches with
    liquid contact.


CLS 335/49
TXT Subject matter under subclass 47 wherein the structure includes means
    whereby an electrical circuit, or circuits, is completed when the
    conductive liquid is displaced from a first position in which the
    continuity of a conductive path between two or more electrodes is
    interrupted to a second position in which the path is completed through the
    liquid, the condition of the controlled circuit at all times being
    dependent upon the position of the liquid.  The displacement means is
    generally of the magnetically controlled plunger type but may consist of
    means for tilting the chamber holding the liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 32 for periodic
    switches with liquid contacts, subclass 80 for centrifugal switches which
    may use a displaceable liquid conductor for performing circuit controlling
    operations, and subclass 152 for nonelectromagnetically operated mercury
    switches in general.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclass 21 for electrothermal switches utilizing physical changes in a
    conductive fluid.


CLS 335/50
TXT Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein the structure includes at least
    two separate wells or containers each of which is adapted to hold at least
    a portion of the conductive fluid and in which the condition of the
    external circuit depends upon the presence of, or the amount of, liquid in
    one or the other or both containers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 80+ for liquid resistor devices,
    especially subclass 81 wherein an electrode is separable from the liquid
    for switching and subclass 94 for devices for varying a resistance by means
    of a device having contacts adapted to be closed by a liquid.


CLS 335/51
TXT Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein the liquid displacement structure
    includes magnetic flux generating means acting either directly upon the
    liquid or upon other means such as a piston or plunger which in turn acts
    to displace the liquid.


CLS 335/52
TXT Subject matter under subclass 51 wherein the magnetically actuated liquid
    displacement means comprises a plunger or piston acting upon the liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for conductive liquid activities utilizing an armature structure
    comprising a freely floating slug or mass.


CLS 335/53
TXT Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein the structure includes a means in
    addition to the plunger whereby the circuit to be controlled may be
    maintained open or closed for predetermined interval of time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28+,    for automatic circuit interrupters with latch or trip with timing
    means for reclosing or resetting.

    39+,    for automatic circuit interrupters with magnetic latch or trip
    control of the time delay type.

    59+,    for other electromagnetically actuated switches with time delay
    means.

    139,    for step-by-step switches with timing or indexing means.

    218,    for magnets or electromagnets of the temperature responsive type
    with time delay means.

    239+,   for electromagnet with time delay armature movement control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 33+ for
    nonmagnetically actuated switches with time delay.


CLS 335/54
TXT Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein the liquid displacement means
    includes structure whereby liquid displacement is accomplished by tilting
    or rotating a chamber containing the liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 17 for
    operating devices for plural circuit control switches which may utilize
    tiltable mercury tube means, subclass 32 for periodic switches (flashers)
    utilizing tiltable liquid conductor tube means, subclass 84 for float type
    switches having tiltable switches which may be of the liquid contact type,
    actuated by the motion of the float and subclass 152 for liquid contact
    switches which may be tiltable.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 119+ for oscillating
    motors which may be controlled by a tiltable mercury switch.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 331 for flashers which may
    utilize tiltable mercury switches.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 160+ for
    thermal switches which may utilize tiltable mercury devices and forming an
    element of electrical circuits for relays or electromagnets.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 230+ for selective control mechanism
    for radio receivers which may utilize tiltable mercury switch means.


CLS 335/55
TXT Subject matter under subclass 47 wherein the device includes significant
    armature structure, not comprised of the liquid itself, and whereby at
    least one movable contact is caused to complete an electrical circuit
    through the medium of a conductive liquid.  The liquid may comprise the
    fixed contacts or electrodes or may be retained in a reservoir from which
    the fixed contacts are wetted by capillary or other action.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 150 for space
    discharge devices with at least one movable contact cooperating with a
    liquid electrode and subclasses 163+ for liquid electrode discharge devices.


CLS 335/56
TXT Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein the armature structure comprises a
    globule, a metallic slug or other mass of material movable in a fluid and
    responsive to a magnetic field and freely movable within the magnetic field
    in such a manner as to complete or open an electric circuit between
    contacts and entirely free of any mechanical securing means.  The fluid may
    be air, nonconductive liquid or the conductive liquid itself.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49+,    for liquid displacement type conductive liquid switches, especially
    subclasses 52+ wherein magnetically moved piston or plungers are utilized.

    82,     for polarity responsive electromagnetic switches with floating
    armature (i.e., no fixed pivot).

    280,    for armature structure comprising balls, filings or granular
    material.


CLS 335/57
TXT Subject matter under subclass 47 wherein the device includes significant
    contact or electrode structural details.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83,     for polarized switches with significant contact structure.

    97,     for periodic switches with significant contact structure.

    133+,   for multiple contact type switches with significant contact
    structure.

    154,    for vacuum (reed) switches with significant contact or contact
    actuating means.

    196+,   for significant contact structure not peculiar to any of the
    specialized types above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 166 for switch
    contact details.


CLS 335/58
TXT Subject matter under subclass 57 wherein the significant contact or
    electrode structure includes a mercury pool or a metallic member wetted
    with liquid mercury.


CLS 335/59
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the device includes significant
    structure whereby the timing of the opening or closing of the switch
    contacts of the device takes place at an appreciable interval or intervals
    of time after an actuating force is applied to the contact actuating means
    or the timing is effected by varying the energizing current applied to the
    magnetic winding of the device.

    (1)     Note.  For devices which automatically interrupt an electrical
    circuit upon the occurrence of an abnormal condition arising in the circuit
    to be controlled and having timing or delay means, see subclasses 6+ above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28+,    for automatic circuit interrupters with latch or trip means with
    timing means for reclosing or resetting.

    39+,    for automatic circuit interrupters with magnetic latch or trip
    control of the time delay type.

    139,    for step-by-step switches with timing or indexing means.

    218,    for magnets or electromagnets of the temperature responsive type
    with time delay means.

    239+,   for electromagnet with time delay armature movement control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 33+ for
    nonmagnetically actuated switches with time delay means.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 492+ for automatic regulating or
    control systems for heating devices utilizing timing or cycling means.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 141+
    for switch actuation means with time delay or retardation means.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 360 for time
    controlled electric lamp and discharge device systems.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 141, 283+, 484+,
    700+, and 727+ for various motor control switching systems with time delay
    means.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    subclasses 155+ for a battery charging circuit with time control.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 18 for automatic
    control of generator or driving means having time delay in response.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclasses 301+ for thermally actuated switches with time control means.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 815.30 for visual signalling
    devices with means for self cancelling after a fixed time interval.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    safety and protective systems with time delay means, and subclasses 160+
    for electric circuits for relays and electromagnets with time delay.

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, art collection 921 for motor
    control systems including time delay means.


CLS 335/60
TXT Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the device comprises means whereby
    a plurality of two or more electric circuits are adapted to be energized
    alternately, consecutively or selectively.

    (1)     Note.  For multiple contact switches in general, such as automatic
    telephone switches, but not involving time delay, search subclasses 107+
    below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8+,     for automatic circuit interrupters of the multipole or polyphase
    type.

    11,     for automatic circuit interrupters of the plural switch type.

    48,     for conductive liquid switches with three or more contacts.

    72,     for motor actuated switches with three or more contacts.

    88+,    for periodic or vibratory switches with plural pairs of contacts.

    107+,   for multiple contact switches in general of the selectively
    sequentially, alternatively or intermittently actuated type.  See (1) Note
    above.

    152,    for vacuum or hermetically sealed type plural switches.

    159+,   for plural independently operative switches in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 37 for multiple
    contact rotary retarded switches.


CLS 335/61
TXT Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the delay structure comprises
    pneumatic means such as a dashpot, bellows, suction cup, etc., utilizing
    air or other gaseous fluids.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     for automatic circuit interrupters with latch or trip reclosing or
    resetting means utilizing fluid delay means.

    62,     for retarded or delayed switches utilizing hydraulic delay means.

    240,    for electromagnet with associated dashpot delayed armature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 266+, for a fluid-resistance brake or dashpot of
    general utility.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 34 for
    nonmagnetically actuated switches with dashpot retarding means.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, and subclass 485 for automatic
    motor control means with dashpot control.

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, art collection 921 for motor
    control systems including time delay means.


CLS 335/62
TXT Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the delay structure comprises
    means, operable under the influence of a liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     for automatic circuit interrupters with latch or trip reclosing or
    resetting means utilizing fluid delay means.

    61,     for retarded switches utilizing pneumatic delay means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 81+ for fluid
    pressure operated switches.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 118
    for switching systems with fluid condition responsive means and subclass
    144 for  fluid pressure switch actuating means.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, and subclass 485 for other
    automatic motor control means with dashpot or other mechanical delay means.

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, art collection 921 for motor
    control systems including time delay means.


CLS 335/63
TXT Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the delay structure comprises
    magnetic means, per se, or mechanical elements which are magnetically
    controlled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38+,    above, for automatic circuit interrupter devices with magnetic trip
    means with time delay.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, and subclass 487 for automatic
    motor control switches with electromagnetic time delay means.

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, art collection 921 for motor
    control systems including time delay means.


CLS 335/64
TXT Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the delay structure comprises
    mechanical or inertia means or a mechanical movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 33+ for
    mechanically retarded switches in general.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    electromagnetic safety and protection systems with mechanical time delay
    means and subclasses 160+ for electric circuits for relays and
    electromagnets with mechanical time delay means.


CLS 335/65
TXT Subject matter under subclass 64 wherein the mechanical delay means
    comprises separate and independent motor means.  The motor may be either
    electric or spring driven.

    (1)     Note.  Delay devices which are operated by an induction vane driven
    by the contact actuating magnet, or other magnet means forming a component
    of the switch, are classified in subclass 63 above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for automatic circuit interrupters with trip reclosing or resetting
    means utilizing mechanical motor delay control.

    68+,    below, for switches wherein the actuation of the main contacts is
    under the control of an electric motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, or Animal Powered, appropriate subclasses
    for mechanical motors, per se, of the weight or spring actuated type.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 35+ for
    switches of the retarded type with motor driven clock train means.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, and subclass 486 for automatic
    stopping or starting switches with pilot or servo-motor time delay means.

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, art collection 921 for motor
    control systems including time delay means.


CLS 335/66
TXT Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the delay structure comprises
    means whereby the desired time interval transpiring between the application
    of a control signal and the contact actuation is determined by the heating
    of a thermal element, such as a bimetallic element for example, by an
    electric current.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter to be found here is directed to the delay
    means for electromagnetically actuated switches. Where the switch actuator
    is thermal, classification of the thermal current actuated switches is in
    Class 200, subclasses 113+ and of the thermal actuated switches, is in
    Class 337, appropriate subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for automatic circuit interrupters with latch or trip reclosing or
    resetting means utilizing thermal delay means.

    35+,    above, for combined trip structure, for circuit interrupting
    devices, with one means being thermal.

    39+,    for magnetic trip structure with thermal delay means.

    43+,    for thermal trip structure.

    141+,   for electromagnetic switch control means combined with thermal
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 117
    for condition responsive switching systems responsive to light, heat,
    vibratory or radiant energy.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 33 for automatic
    control means for a generator or driving means which is responsive to
    thermal conditions.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    appropriate subclasses.  See (1) Note above.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 23+ for
    thermal protective devices, subclass 99 for safety and protection devices
    with combined thermal and electromagnetic relay delay means, and subclasses
    160+ for thermal control means in electric circuits for relays and
    electromagnets.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 187+ for expanding solid
    type and subclasses 201+ for expanding fluid thermometric devices in
    general.


CLS 335/67
TXT Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the delay structure includes
    adjusting or regulating means whereby the time delay interval transpiring
    before the opening and or closing operation may be varied or controlled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for automatic circuit interrupters with latch or trip means
    utilizing adjustable thermal actuators.


CLS 335/68
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the electromagnetic switch
    operating mechanism comprises or includes an electric motor or the
    combination of electromagnetic means with at least one rotating motor
    means, in addition to the electromagnetic means, whereby the main contacts
    are caused to be operated to either the open or closed position.  The
    additional motor means may consist of a spring motor operatively connected
    with an electromagnet.

    (1)     Note.  The electric motor structure to be found in this and the
    indented subclasses may be either of the direct current or alternating
    current variety. No effort has been made to distinguish between A.C. and
    D.C. in this subclass, the motor being merely the significant means for
    driving a particular class of switch. For alternating current switches of
    general utility without motor means the search will be in subclasses 99+
    below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for automatic circuit breakers with mechanical motor controlled
    trip or latch.

    65,     for switches with motor controlled delay means.

    118,    for automatically actuated multiple contact switches of the
    telephone type which are motor driven.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, or Animal Powered, for mechanical motors,
    per se, of the weight or spring actuated type.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 17+ for
    nonmagnetically operated multiple circuit control devices with motor
    operating means, subclasses 21+, 24 and 28+ for rotary periodic switches,
    subclass 48 for significant structure comprising motor and related
    mechanisms rotatable to operate high potential electric switches, subclass
    80 for centrifugal switches which may be motor driven and subclass 155 for
    rotating mechanical switches.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclass 99 for automatic railway
    block signalling systems which are clock work controlled, subclasses 221+
    for electric motor systems for signal switch actuation, e.g., see also
    subclasses 102, 103 and 263 for mechanical motor systems.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, appropriate for specific
    electric motor structures.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for specific electric motor control systems.


CLS 335/69
TXT Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein the motor structure is reversible
    in direction or oscillates cyclically about a center position first in one
    direction and then the other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    motor reversing systems.  For example, see subclass 10 for particular motor
    driven load devices with reversible drive mechanism, subclasses 119+ for
    reciprocating or oscillating motor control systems and subclasses 280+ for
    motive power systems with motor reversing means.


CLS 335/70
TXT Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein the motor structure is either
    responsive to a predetermined frequency of the signalling or actuating
    current or operates at a speed corresponding to the frequency of the
    actuating current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94,     for periodic switches with vibratory reeds tuned or resonant at a
    particular frequency.

    101,    below, for alternating current responsive switches which are
    synchronous frequency responsive.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses, for
    electric motors having means for varying or adjusting frequency of the
    current applied thereto usually for speed control.  See subclass 503 and
    the search notes thereunder for the general field of search for motors with
    armature current frequency or pulsation control.

    334,    Tuners, subclasses 20+ for motor operated tuners, particularly
    subclass 21 for predetermined frequency selector tuners.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 113 for
    safety and protective systems which are frequency responsive and subclasses
    182+ for relay systems which are frequency responsive.


CLS 335/71
TXT Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein the device includes significant
    structure operated by the motor whereby the main contacts are actuated to
    or from an opened or closed condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for plural contact telephone type switches with automatic rotary
    contact selecting means.

    118,    for motor driven automatic selector means.

    121+,   for significant means for actuating a plurality of contacts
    selectively, cyclically, alternately or intermittently.

    185+,   for other significant contact actuating structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses
    for rotary type contact actuating mechanisms, particularly subclasses 178+
    for automatic telephone type switches with rotary contact selecting or
    actuating means.


CLS 335/72
TXT Subject matter under subclass 71 wherein the significant contact actuating
    structure comprises means whereby a plurality of external electrical
    circuits may be selectively completed by the device or in which a plurality
    of fixed contacts are selectively connected to one or more movable contacts
    by motor driven means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118,    for multiple contact telephone type selector switch devices which
    are motor driven.

    121+,   for plural contact type electromagnetically operated switches with
    other significant contact actuating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 4 and 6+ for
    multiple circuit pivoted contact switches; subclasses 24+ for
    nonmagnetically actuated periodic switches with plural contacts; subclass
    37 for clock train actuated rotary switches of the multiple contact type
    and subclasses 178+ for telephone type selector switches having a plurality
    of contacts adapted to be actuated by a motor driven selector means.


CLS 335/73
TXT Subject matter under subclass 71 wherein the contact actuating structure
    includes eccentric or cam means whereby at least one movable contact is
    actuated directly.

    (1)     Note.  For devices in which the movable contact or contacts are
    actuated by a spring or other energy storage means after the spring has
    been wound or cocked by means of a motor driven cam the search is in
    subclass 76 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    190,    below, for other significant contact actuating structure comprising
    cam, roller or eccentric means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 21+ for
    combined rotary and cam operated periodic switches, subclass 27 for cam
    operated multiple contact periodic switches, subclasses 30+ for cam
    operated periodic switches, subclass 38 for clock train, cam actuated
    retarded switches.


CLS 335/74
TXT Subject matter under subclass 71 wherein the contact actuating structure
    includes braking, clutch or detent means between the driving motor and the
    driven movable contact or contacts whereby the speed of the opening or
    closing operation, the interval during which the driving and the driven
    means are connected or the degree of contact pressure may be controlled or
    whereby the device may be independently manually controlled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, appropriate subclasses for mechanical brake structures and
    operating means therefor.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, appropriate subclasses for
    clutches, motor and clutch control and power stop controls.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 180 for
    telephone type selector switches with clutch controlled rotary motion.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 142
    for switching systems including switch actuating structure with braking
    means.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 92+ for torque
    transmitting clutches or brakes.


CLS 335/75
TXT Subject matter under subclass 74 wherein the brake, clutch or detent means
    is magnetically operated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 103+ for torque
    transmitting clutches or brakes of the magnetic field type.


CLS 335/76
TXT Subject matter under subclass 71 wherein the contact actuating structure
    includes, mechanical energy storage means whereby the movable contact or
    contacts are actuated to or from the closed position, the energy storage
    taking place through the agency of a motor wound spring or other kinetic
    energy device.  The energy storage means may actuate the contacts through
    mechanical gearing which comprises in itself all the elements of a spring
    motor;  for example, a clock movement actuated switch is considered a motor
    driven switch for classification here provided the spring is recharged by
    electric motor means.  The storage means may also consist of inertia means
    released by a motor and transmitting energy via the force of gravity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for automatic circuit interrupting devices which may utilize a core
    armature moving under the influence of the force fo gravity.

    30,     for automatic circuit interrupters with mechanical motor controlled
    latch or trip reclosing or resetting means.

    65,     for motor controlled (e.g., clockwork) switch actuation delay means.

    116,    for multiple contact telephone type switches with gravity actuated
    selector restoring means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, or Animal Powered, subclasses 4+ for
    plural weight actuated motors, subclasses 9+ for plural spring actuated
    motors, subclasses 27+ for weight actuated motors, per se, and subclasses
    37+ for spring motors, per se.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 17+ for
    plural circuit control switches with significant operating means,
    subclasses 35+ for clock train actuated retarded switches, subclasses 85+
    for weight actuated switches and subclasses 502+ for mechanical switch
    actuating means.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclasses 221+ for motor systems for
    railway electric switch and signal actuation which may employ energy
    storage means.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 139+
    for switching systems having switches with particular actuation means which
    may include energy storage means.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 445+ especially
    subclasses 457 and 462, for automatic motor control switches with energy
    storage means.


CLS 335/77
TXT Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein the structure includes significant
    means whereby the contacts or the contact actuating means may be positively
    locked or latched to prevent any desired movement during the existence of a
    predetermined condition of the switch, such as open or closed.  The locking
    or latching means will generally be provided with tripping structure to
    allow the latch to be released upon the termination of the predetermined
    condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21+,    above, for automatic circuit interrupters with significant latch or
    trip means.

    113,    for multiple contact switches with holding, locking or latching
    means.

    157+,   for significant locking or holding structure.

    167+,   for other electromagnetically actuated switches with significant
    latch means.

    172+,   for switches with tripping means.

    253+,   for electromagnet and armature with armature latch means.


CLS 335/78
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the structure comprises circuit
    connection devices in which the movement of an armature depends upon the
    direction of the voltage or current flowing in the circuit controlling the
    armature.  Usually the devices comprise an operating magnet associated with
    a permanent magnet or a constantly-energized electromagnet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179,    for electromagnetic actuated switches employing a permanent magnet
    in addition to an electromagnet.

    222,    for relatively movable coil and permanent magnet.

    229+,   for magnets and electromagnets with armature utilizing permanent
    magnets, especially subclasses 230+ for the polarized type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 93 for polarized code receivers and subclasses
    101+ for telegraph keys involving a polarized relay.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 152+ for the
    structure of rotary dynamo-electric machines with permanent magnets.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 555+ for three or
    more position motor controlled systems which may be electromagnetically
    actuated and may employ polarized relays.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 76 for
    protective systems with phase sequence analyzer; subclass 77 for protective
    systems responsive to reverse phase; subclasses 78+ for protective systems
    of the reverse energy or reverse current type; and subclass 208 for
    electrical control circuits for polarized relays and electromagnets.


CLS 335/79
TXT Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein the switch comprises within itself
    or forms an essential component of, a device into which information, in the
    form of an electric signal, can be introduced for extraction at a latter
    time, the switch being transferred to one or the other of its conditions
    depending upon the polarity of the energization current and remains in that
    condition subsequent to deenergization until reset.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter to be found here relates only to devices
    which essentially comprise a switching means whereby an interval of time
    occurs between the application of an input signal and the eventual
    completion of a circuit between input and output terminals or wherein the
    contacts are closed upon the application of a pulse of one polarity and
    held closed until the subsequent application of a pulse of another polarity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157+,   for other electromagnetically actuated switches with locking or
    holding means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 401+
    for magnetic storage devices.

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, appropriate subclasses for a
    transistorized logic circuit.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 185+ for a miscellaneous stable state circuit such as a
    bistable circuit.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclass for
    read/write storage systems comprising magnetic storage elements.


CLS 335/80
TXT Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein the device includes significant
    armature structure specifically adapted for use in a polarity responsive
    device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95+,    for armature structure for periodic switches.

    203,    for significant armature structure for electromagnetically actuated
    switches.

    232+,   234 and 235, for significant armature structure in polarized
    electromagnet with armature.

    279+,   for armature shape, structure and material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 208 for
    electric circuits for a polarized relay which relay may have significant
    armature structure.


CLS 335/81
TXT Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the significant armature structure
    includes means whereby the armature is supported in such a manner as to be
    freely movable within an axial cavity of a coil or within the flux field
    set up between pole faces. The motion may be rotary around an axis or may
    be generally parallel with the axis of the coil or in a plane in the
    direction of the axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270+,   for relays with significant armature mounting means.


CLS 335/82
TXT Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the armature is not permanently
    attached at a fixed point, therefore, being free to move in each of several
    directions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for conductive liquid switches having armature comprising a freely
    movable floating slug or mass.

    280,    for significant armature structure comprising a ball, granular
    material or magnetic filings.


CLS 335/83
TXT Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein the device includes significant
    contact structure or composition particularly adapted for use in a
    polarized type switch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56+,    for switches utilizing conductive liquid with particular contact or
    electrode structure.

    94,     for periodic switches with particular contact arrangement or
    composition.

    133+,   for multiple contact switches with particular contact structure or
    arrangement.

    196+,   for other significant contact structure not peculiarly adapted to a
    particular type switch.


CLS 335/84
TXT Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein the device includes significant
    magnetic structural elements or materials of construction and which are
    particularly applicable to polarized systems.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227,    for saturable electromagnet with armature.

    230+,   for permanent magnet polarized electromagnet with armature.

    296+,   for significant magnetic structure or compositions and not
    peculiarly adapted for a specific type switch or relay.


CLS 335/85
TXT Subject matter under subclass 84 wherein the significant magnetic structure
    recited comprises particular pole structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281,    below, for other significant magnetic pole structure.


CLS 335/86
TXT Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein the structure includes means
    whereby some feature of the device, such as the air gap, pole pieces,
    contacts, value of the actuating current or armature neutral position, may
    be adjusted or regulated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212,    for electronic and ionic beam deflecting magnets or electromagnets
    with adjustable magnetic element.

    298,    for magnet core structure in general with movable or adjustable
    core.


CLS 335/87
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the device comprises means whereby
    a circuit is completed and broken intermittently or cyclically at
    constantly recurring intervals under the influence of a magnetic flux field.

    (1)     Note.  The switches found here and in the indented subclasses below
    are analogous to the converters (choppers) utilized in Class 363,
    subclasses 106+ and subclass 124 where the circuit interrupter forming a
    component of a Class 363 system is defined as a "periodic switch".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107+,   below, for multiple contact type switches having plural contacts
    which are selectively, cyclically, alternately or intermittently actuated.

    151+,   for hermetically sealed reed switches which may be cyclically
    actuated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 19+ for
    periodic circuit breakers generally.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 132
    for repetitive make and break switching systems.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 15+ for
    reciprocating or vibrating electric motors comprising a magnet, an armature
    and a contact arrangement causing vibration or periodic motion of the
    armature when the magnet circuit is closed.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 209+ for
    systems having a periodic switch in the supply circuit of a load or loads.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 37 for plural
    reciprocating or oscillating electric motor systems and subclasses 119+ for
    single reciprocating or oscillating motor systems, especially indented
    subclass 134 for motor systems with circuit making or breaking devices in
    the energizing circuit.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    circuit interrupting systems, subclasses 139+ for periodic circuits for
    relays and electromagnets, and subclasses 245+ for automatic pole changers.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclass 110 for an inverter
    system comprising a vibrator means.


CLS 335/88
TXT Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein the structure includes a plurality
    of devices falling under the definition of subclass 87 but forming a single
    assembly or single entity under the class definition or a single device
    having a plurality of pairs of contacts whereby two or more separate and
    distinct electrical circuits may be completed through the device.  This
    subclass does not include those devices which comprise a single movable
    contact which alternately contacts each of two fixed contacts thereby
    varying the direction of current in the two conductors of a single circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107+,   for plural contact alternating current operated type switches under
    the class definition for actuating a plurality of external circuits
    cyclically or successively.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 23+ for
    periodic switches in general and having plural contacts.


CLS 335/89
TXT Subject matter under subclass 88 wherein the structure includes means
    whereby the plurality of contacts are actuated in such a manner as to
    complete each one of a plurality of circuits selectively, alternately or
    consecutively.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 209+,
    especially subclass 217, for plural load device systems having a periodic
    switch in the supply circuit.


CLS 335/90
TXT Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein the structure includes means
    whereby the amplitude of the vibrator or periodic motion, the natural
    resonant frequency of the vibratory element, or equalization of the periods
    between the engagement of the movable contact and each one of fixed
    contacts is controlled or set.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for automatic circuit interrupters with contact rebound prevention
    means.

    104,    for alternating current operated type switches with chatter, bounce
    or vibration prevention means.

    193,    for contact vibration, bounce or chatter prevention means in
    general.

    271,    for armature bounce or vibration preventing means in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 22, 25, 29,
    and 31 for other periodic switches with adjusting means.


CLS 335/91
TXT Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein the structure comprises
    significant magnetic structure or material peculiarly adapted for use in a
    periodic or cyclic switch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205+,   for switch structure, not restricted to a specialized subclass,
    utilizing a permanent magnet or magnets.

    296,    significant magnet structure not specifically restricted to use in
    electromagnetic switches.


CLS 335/92
TXT Subject matter under subclass 91 wherein the magnetic structure includes at
    least two or more distinct magnetic means which may or may not be of
    diverse type and each of which performs its particular function
    independently of the other.  For example, one magnetic means may consist of
    fluctuating magnetic field generating means for actuating an armature or
    reed while the other consists of a permanent magnet providing a biasing
    means for the armature or reed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177+,   below, for other electromagnetic switches utilizing plural magnets.

    266+,   for magnets or electromagnets and armatures with plural coils or
    magnets.

    306,    for the structure of plural permanent magnets, per se.


CLS 335/93
TXT Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein the structure includes significant
    vibratory reed or other periodically actuated means whereby a movable
    contact or contacts is periodically caused to engage one or more fixed
    contacts.  The vibratory reed or other actuating structure may be unitary
    with or comprise the armature of the magnet means and still be classified
    here as long as the motion of the movable contact is directly responsive to
    or proportional to the movement of the armature.

    (1)     Note.  Armature structure peculiar to the subclass 87 special type
    switch and separate from the contact actuating reed, or other means, is
    classified in subclasses 95+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154,    for reed switches with significant contact actuating structure
    where the reed may also act as an armature.

    185+,   for other electromagnetic switches with significant contact
    actuating means.

    235,    for polarized electromagnet with vibrating reed or spring bar
    armature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, subclass 409 for tuning forks, per se.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 47+ for telegraph transmitters or receivers
    utilizing vibrating reeds.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 25 for reed type
    reciprocating motor structures and subclasses 32+ for self actuated
    interrupter devices utilizing flat spring armatures.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 76.49 for frequency
    meters utilizing tuned reeds.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 156 for oscillators with vibrating reed or
    string type electromechanical resonators.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 186+ for
    electromechanical transducer type (tuning fork) electric wave filters.


CLS 335/94
TXT Subject matter under subclass 93 wherein the vibratory reed or other
    contact actuating means is pretuned or inherently resonant at a particular
    predetermined frequency or band of frequencies.

    (1)     Note.  Tuned mechanical resonators such as reed or piezo crystal
    devices when used as means for measuring the frequency of a cyclic current
    will be found in Class 324, especially subclass 76.49, and electrical wave
    filters of the electro mechanical transducer type will be found in Class
    333, subclasses 186+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    below, the alternating current responsive switches which are
    responsive to a predetermined or synchronous frequency.


CLS 335/95
TXT Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein the structure includes significant
    and specific details of the armature element or material of construction
    distinct from the vibratory reed or contact actuating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55+,    for conductive fluid type switches with particular armature
    structure.

    80+,    for polarity responsive switches with particular armature structure.

    93,     for significant vibratory reed structure.

    124,    for multiple contact switches with particular armature structure.

    154,    below, for armature structure for plural vacuum switches of the
    reed type.

    203,    below, for armature details, per se.

    249,    for alternating current electromagnet with special armature
    construction or mounting means.

    261,    for electromagnet with plunger type armature of particular
    structure or material.

    279,    for armature shape, structure or material in general.


CLS 335/96
TXT Subject matter under subclass 95 wherein the structure includes means
    whereby some operating characteristic, physical dimension or element of the
    armature is adjustably variable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144,    for electromagnetic switch combined with an electrothermal actuator
    and having means to position or adjust the armature.

    258,    for electromagnet and plunger armature with stroke adjustment for
    the armature.

    273,    for electromagnet and armature with armature biasing means or bias
    adjustment means.


CLS 335/97
TXT Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein the structure includes significant
    and specific details of the contact structure or material of construction
    thereof.  For purposes of classification in this subclass, contact
    supporting, holding and adjusting means are considered contact structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57+,    for conductive liquid switches with particular contact or electrode
    structure.

    83,     for polarity responsive switches with particular contact structure
    or composition.

    133+,   for multiple contact switches with particular contact structure or
    arrangement.

    154,    for reed switches with significant contact structure.

    196+,   for contact structure applicable to electromagnetic switches in
    general.


CLS 335/98
TXT Subject matter under subclass 97 wherein the contact structure includes
    adjustment means whereby some operating characteristic, physical mounting
    or element may be adjustably varied.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194+,   for contact actuating means with contact pressure maintaining or
    adjusting means.

    197,    below, for adjustable contact structure which is not peculiarly
    adapted for use with any particular type switch means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 166 for details
    of contact structure for nonmagnetically actuated switches.


CLS 335/99
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the device is specifically adapted
    for operation by an alternating, pulsating or fluctuating current.  The
    actuating current may be a periodic current, the average value of which
    over a given period is zero and which varies according to a sinusoidal
    function, a bi-directional current which has both positive and negative
    values, or a periodic current which is the sum of a direct current and an
    alternating current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68+,    for switch actuating means comprising an induction motor whose
    armature comprises a vane making at least one complete revolution about its
    axis.

    231,    for polarized electromagnet responsive to the varying amplitude of
    an alternating current.

    243+,   for electromagnets and armature of the alternating current type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ and
    appropriate subclasses, for safety and protective systems which may be AC
    responsive and subclasses 139+ for alternating current circuits for relays
    and electromagnets.


CLS 335/100
TXT Subject matter under subclass 99 wherein the contact actuating means
    comprises, or is responsive to, a device which derives its operative torque
    by magnetic induction from a winding or windings carrying alternating
    current, by the magnetic reaction between a current flowing in a rotor and
    an external flux path or by the magnetic repulsive force between magnetic
    flux sources.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68+,    especially indented subclass 70, for induction or synchronous type
    switch contact operators of the continuously rotating motor type (e.g.,
    induction or synchronous motor).

    224+,   for magneto-mechanical motive device of dynamometer type utilizing
    an induced current movable conductor (e.g., eddy current number).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 105+ for torque
    transmitting clutches or brakes with induced or eddy current magnetic field
    and subclasses 166+ for the structure of induction type dynamo-electric
    machines in general.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 727+ for induction
    motor control systems in general.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 137+ for eddy
    current rotor meters (e.g., AC integrating watt hour meter type
    instruments).


CLS 335/101
TXT Subject matter under subclass 99 wherein the device is adapted to
    selectively operate at a predetermined frequency of the alternating
    operating current or wherein resonant vibration of a tuned reed armature
    will only occur when the cyclic period of the alternating current is the
    same as the resonant frequency of the tuned reed.

    (1)     Note.  A large number of the patents found here are analogous to
    those to be found in subclass 94 above, the difference residing in the fact
    that in this subclass the vibrating member is comprised of the armature
    itself while in the vibrator group above the armature is generally separate
    from the vibratory contact actuating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for frequency responsive or synchronous motor switch actuating
    means.

    78,     for polarized relays which may utilize in alternating current
    source for the magnetic coil.

    93+,    for switches of the vibratory type which may or may not be
    restricted to alternating current operation.

    243+,   for alternating current responsive electromagnets with vibrating
    armature structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 47+, for harmonic or vibrating reed type
    telegraph transmitter or receiver means.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, particularly
    subclass 87 for frequency responsive connecting and disconnecting plural
    supply systems and subclass 129 for frequency responsive switching systems
    in general.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 25, for tuned
    reed type motors or generators and subclasses 162+, for synchronous motor
    or generator structures.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 700+ for synchronous
    motor control systems.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 160+ for
    frequency responsive relay systems, particularly subclasses 171+ for code
    responsive electric circuits for relays, and subclass 183 for plural relays
    that are frequency responsive.


CLS 335/102
TXT Subject matter under subclass 99 wherein the device is specifically adapted
    to operate in response to the currents in the respective phases of a
    multiphase or polyphase system, whereby one polyphase network is connected
    to another similar polyphase network through the device or wherein the
    device consists of a plurality of magnetic windings and having supplied to
    each winding an operating current at a phase angle different from that
    applied to each of the others.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8+,     for polyphase automatic circuit interrupter devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses
    for nonmagnetically operated switches of the multiphase type.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 13+
    for polyphase systems in general that may include phase switches.  An
    subclasses 112+ for plural phase switches especially indented subclass 127
    for phase sequence responsive type.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    safety and protection systems which may utilize plural phase type devices.


CLS 335/103
TXT Subject matter under subclass 99 wherein the electromagnetic operating
    means includes a plurality of magnetic flux sources.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8+,     for automatic circuit interrupters of the multipole or polyphase
    type.

    92,     for vibratory type switches with plural magnets.

    136,    for multiple contact type switches with plural magnet or coil means.

    149,    for electrodynamic type switch operators utilizing plural
    relatively movable coils.

    177+,   for electromagnetically operated switches generally employing
    plural magnets.

    207,    for permanent magnet actuated switches utilizing plural permanent
    magnets.

    222,    for relatively movable coil and permanent magnet.

    223+,   for plural relatively movable coil devices (e.g., dynamometer type).

    230+,   for permanent magnet polarized electromagnet and armature.

    246,    for alternating current type electromagnetic motive devices with
    plural windings.


CLS 335/104
TXT Subject matter under subclass 99 wherein the structure includes means
    whereby the contacts of the device are prevented from chattering due to
    counter electromotive forces in the circuit or other causes, rebounding
    upon closing or whereby the armature is prevented from rocking or vibrating
    due to the pulsating force in the operating coil when energized by
    alternating current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for automatic circuit interrupting devices with rebound or chatter
    prevention means.

    193,    for significant contact actuating structure including vibration,
    bounce or chatter prevention means.

    247+,   for alternating current electromagnet and armature, per se, with
    chatter or noise preventing means.

    271,    for electromagnet and armature mount in general with armature
    bounce or vibration preventing means.

    277,    for magnetomechanical motive device in general with shock
    absorption, vibration or bounce preventing means.


CLS 335/105
TXT Subject matter under subclass 99 wherein the structure includes means
    whereby at least one element of the device, or some operating
    characteristic is adjustable either at will or permanently, the extent of
    movement of either the armature or the movable contact is adjusted or
    regulated, or whereby the speed of such movement is controlled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     for retarded or delayed type switches with adjustable or
    regulatable features.

    86,     for polarity responsive switches with regulating means.

    90,     for periodic switch with adjustable vibrating element.

    132,    for multiple contact type with adjustable or replaceable structure.

    144,    for electromagnetically combined with electrothermal actuator and
    having means to position or adjust the armature.

    197,    for adjustable or readily detachable contact structure.

    212,    250, 273, 287, 295, and 298, for various electromechanical motive
    devices or holding magnets with adjustable features.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 170 for
    nonmagnetically actuated switches with contact pressure adjusting means.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 206 for
    relay systems having relays with contact pressure increasing means.


CLS 335/106
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the switch structure includes a
    plurality of fixed contacts each one of which, either singly or in a common
    group, is adapted to be connected to a separate independent external
    electrical circuit in such a manner that upon being contacted by a movable
    contact, or contacts, operated by the magnetic control means, a separate
    distinct electrical circuit is completed therethrough.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of classification in this or the indented
    subclasses auxiliary contacts, whose purpose is to control some function of
    the switch itself, in addition to main circuit controlling contacts, are
    not considered as comprising plural contacts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8+,     for automatic circuit interrupters of the multiple or polyphase
    type.

    11,     for plural switch structures of the automatic circuit interrupter
    type.

    48,     for liquid contact switches with three or more contacts.

    60,     for retarded switches with plural sets of contacts.

    72,     for motor actuated switches of the plural contact type.

    88,     for periodic switches with plural pairs of contacts.

    102,    for alternating current switches of the polyphase type.

    152,    for the combination of plural of vacuum or sealed type switches.

    206,    for the combination of plural permanent magnet actuated switches.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, particularly subclass 102 for multiple contact devices
    peculiarly adapted for telegraph keying.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 1+ for
    multiple circuit control devices generally.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for plural circuit switching systems in general, particularly
    subclasses 33+ for selectively connected load circuits, subclasses 85+ for
    selectively connected electric sources, and subclasses 112+ for
    miscellaneous switching systems, indented subclasses 113+ for providing for
    plural switches.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 2 for current shifting switches.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 211+ for a
    periodic switch in the supply circuit of a plurality of load devices.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 92+ for a multipart resistor with
    switch means whereby portions of the resistive material may be short
    circuited.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ for
    systems for selectively controlling a plurality of relays or electromagnets.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 304+ for multiplexing systems
    which include rotary distributor switches, and subclass 531 for
    multiplexing systems which include magnetic core switching.


CLS 335/107
TXT Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein the structure includes
    significant means whereby individual contacts connected to external
    circuits may be actuated in such a manner that a plurality of individually
    controlled circuits are completed through the device selectively,
    sequentially, or alternately.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for delayed operation switches with plural sets of contacts
    alternately or selectively opened or closed.

    89,     for periodic switch devices with plural pairs of selectively or
    alternately actuatable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 23+ for
    nonmagnetically actuated periodic switches with multiple contacts.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, especially
    subclass 29 for plural source systems with selectively connected loads of
    sources, subclass 37 for serially connected load circuits with selective
    series parallel connections, subclasses 38+ for selectively connected load
    circuits and indented subclass 41 for sequential or alternating connected
    load circuits, and subclasses 80+ for selectively connected sources.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 226 for a
    periodic multiple contact switch in the supply circuit of an electric lamp
    or other discharge device.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 806+, for systems wherein a
    plurality of contacts are selectively actuated, to control energization of
    a display system.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 22+ for a selective
    switch array controlling a pulse code transmitter.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 166+ for
    selectively or sequentially actuated relays.


CLS 335/108
TXT Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein the contact actuating structure
    comprises self-acting means, operating by its own self-contained mechanism
    when actuated by some impersonal influence, as for example, a change in
    current strength or a signalling current or voltage transmitted from a
    distance, which is not manual and requiring personal intervention, i.e.,
    not requiring the presence of an operator.  The art to be found in this and
    the indented subclasses is analogous to the automatic telephone type
    switching arrangements to be found in Class 379, subclasses 16+; but which
    is of general application and not restricted to any one art device
    specifically otherwise classifiable.  The devices classified here may
    utilize mechanical structure for the actuation of the main contacts which
    are to be controlled, provided that the primary instigating means comprises
    electromagnetic or other magnetic means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 175+ for
    multiple contact switches analogous to those found here and in the indented
    subclasses but not claimed as electromagnetically actuated.


CLS 335/109
TXT Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein the contact actuating structure
    comprises a movable contact or wiper means movable in more than a single
    direction whereby the contacts are selectively chosen.  The movement may
    comprise any combination of vertical, rotary, radial or other motions. The
    two or more directional movements are usually accomplished by means of
    separate magnet devices each operating separately in response to a given
    condition in the device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 176+ for
    similar switching devices not specifically claimed as electromagnetically
    controlled.


CLS 335/110
TXT Subject matter under subclass 109 wherein the device includes means, in
    addition to the directional driving mechanism, whereby motion in a first
    direction is converted to a motion in a second direction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses for mechanical
    motion conversion means, per se.


CLS 335/111
TXT Subject matter under subclass 109 wherein the structure includes details of
    at least one device which, in response to the appropriate control signals,
    connects one input path to one of a number of output paths, or
    alternatively, one of a number of input paths to one output path.

    (1)     Note.  To complete the search for this subject matter consult the
    search notes for subclass 109, above.


CLS 335/112
TXT Subject matter under subclass 111 wherein the structure includes a device
    having a plurality of contacts arranged in a vertical path, a plurality of
    contacts arranged in a plurality of horizontal paths and an
    electromagnetically operated means for interconnecting any one or any group
    of the vertically arranged contacts with any one or any group of the
    horizontally arranged contacts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.79+ for selective
    signalling systems utilizing matrix type (e.g., crossed gratings) switching
    devices.


CLS 335/113
TXT Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein the device includes holding,
    latching or locking means whereby a selected set of movable contacts or a
    brush is caused to lock onto a particular bank of contacts or a single
    contact in a given bank when moved to an operated condition and remain in
    the operated condition until released by some external actuating means or
    signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21+,    for automatic circuit interrupters with latch or trip means.

    77,     for motor actuated switches with locking latch or tripping
    structure.

    164,    for switches having manually or force of gravity operated latch
    with electromagnetic trip.

    166,    for switches with reset means for latch or trip.

    167+,   for switches with latching means.

    172+,   for switches with tripping means.

    253+,   for electromagnet and armature with latch means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 175+ for
    similar switching devices not peculiarly adapted for telephone systems and
    not claimed as being electromagnetically actuated.


CLS 335/114
TXT Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein the structure includes
    significant means whereby contact selection is accomplished by movement of
    a selector mechanism movable in a rotary manner in a single plane, as for
    example, circular movement in a horizontal plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for motor driven switches of the plural contact type.

    122,    for plural contact selective switches with contact actuator of the
    rotary type.

    130,    for simultaneously actuated plural contact switches with movable
    contacts on a circular card or comb structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 1+ for
    similar switches not utilizing electromagnetic control means and periodic
    switches having plural contacts with rotary selector means.


CLS 335/115
TXT Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein the structure includes means
    whereby one or more carriers for the contact selecting means is caused to
    move or reciprocate in a single plane.  The motion is usually in a vertical
    plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126,    for multiple contact switches in general wherein the contact
    actuator reciprocates or slides.

    129,    for switches comprising simultaneously actuated movable contacts on
    a slidable card or comb.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 16 for multiple
    circuit control switching, device with reciprocating contact means.


CLS 335/116
TXT Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein the structure includes positive
    acting means whereby, after the completion of a contact selection
    operation, the selector is automatically returned to an initial position in
    readiness for a further selection operation.


CLS 335/117
TXT Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein the structure comprises means
    whereby the wiper or contact selector is caused to be advanced in steps of
    different lengths or intervals covering variable numbers of terminals or
    contacts.  The structure included here includes devices having a single
    operating mechanism for moving a brush set in one direction in steps of one
    length and in another direction in steps of another different length.


CLS 335/118
TXT Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein the structure includes
    significant electric motor means whereby the selector actuating means is
    driven in response to an input signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68+,    for electric motor driven switches, especially subclass 72 for
    switches including plural contacts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 17 for multiple
    control switches with significant operating means which may comprise an
    electric motor.


CLS 335/119
TXT Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein the contact control operation is
    accomplished through the actuation of a plurality of armatures either
    acting conjointly to operate a single contact actuating means or each
    individually operating a separate contact actuating means.  The structure
    found in this subclass may include a plurality of magnetic coils each
    operating one of the plurality of armatures or a single coil driving two or
    more armatures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177+,   for switches utilizing plural coils or flux sources or armatures.

    232+,   for polarized electromagnet with plural armatures.

    242,    for electromagnet having plural armatures with means to selectively
    retard them.

    259,    for electromagnet with plural plunger armatures.

    265,    for electromagnets having plural armatures actuated by a single
    coil.

    267,    for electromagnets having plural coils driving plural armatures.


CLS 335/120
TXT Subject matter under subclass 119 wherein the structure includes
    interlocking or mechanical means whereby the armatures are caused to be
    operated in unison or whereby one or both are adapted to exercise control
    over the other thereby causing the completion of selected electrical
    circuits through the device in the proper sequence.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160+,   for plural independently operative switches with interlocking means.

    233,    for polarized electromagnet with plural armatures having armature
    locking means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 160+ for
    relays or electromagnets with plural armatures having interlocking means,
    particularly subclasses 191+.


CLS 335/121
TXT Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein the structure includes
    significant means, operatively connected to or combined with an armature,
    whereby the plurality of contacts are actuated from a first to a second or
    subsequent condition thereby completing selected circuits through the
    device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71+,    for motor operated switches with significant contact actuating
    means.

    138+,   for step-by-step switches with significant contact actuating means.

    185+,   for significant contact actuating means not specifically adapted
    for use in any particular type switch.


CLS 335/122
TXT Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the significant contact actuating
    means comprises at least one member which is moved in a circular arc by a
    rotating member or a plurality of members which collectively transpose a
    motion of a first type to a second motion of another type; as for example,
    a reciprocating motion is converted to a rotary motion, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for automatic telephone type switches with rotary selector motion.

    130,    for plural contact switches with movable contacts on a circular
    card or comb structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses for various
    compound mechanical movements.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 4 for multiple
    circuit control switches utilizing combined pivoted and reciprocating
    contacts and subclasses 175+ for automatic multiple contact selective
    switches utilizing combined or compound motions.


CLS 335/123
TXT Subject matter under subclass 122 wherein the contact actuating means
    comprises significant structural details of a pawl and ratchet device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140,    for switches of the step-by-step type utilizing pawl and ratchet
    mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 575 for pawl and ratchet
    devices of general utility.


CLS 335/124
TXT Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the contact actuating structure
    is combined with armature structure which within itself comprises
    significant means whereby the actuating means is controlled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    187,    below for significant contact actuating means not specifically
    utilized in any special type switch and combined with an armature.


CLS 335/125
TXT Subject matter under subclass 124 wherein the armature structure comprises
    an armature pivoted or otherwise supported at a point in such a manner as
    to be alternately attracted by different poles of a magnet structure for
    producing motion in a rotary or oscillatory manner whereby the contacts are
    caused to be selectively opened or closed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for plural contacts actuated by rotary electric motor.

    181,    for plural magnets actuating a single pivoted armature.

    272,    for rotary disc or cylinder armatures. 276, for pivoted armature
    structure for electromagnets.


CLS 335/126
TXT Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the contact actuating means
    consists of a device which is linearly slidable or reciprocable in
    alternate reverse directions along a single fixed axis or in a single
    plane, e.g., sliding bar or comb.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    for automatic telephone type switches of the cross bar type.

    115,    for automatic telephone type switches with reciprocating sliding
    motion.

    129,    for multiple contact switches with movable contacts on slidable
    card, bar or comb.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 86 for telegraph code transmitter with
    reciprocating contacts.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 4 for combined
    pivoting and reciprocating contact switches and subclass 16 for multiple
    circuit switch structures with reciprocating contact.


CLS 335/127
TXT Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein the structure includes at least
    one group of contacts adapted to operate as a unit, and means whereby all
    of the contacts of at least one group are actuated in a manner such that
    all of the plurality of external circuits connected to the contacts of the
    group are completed or opened simultaneously.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8+,     for automatic circuit interrupting multipole or polyphase switches.

    88,     above, for cyclic or periodical switches with plural contacts which
    may or may not be operated simultaneously.


CLS 335/128
TXT Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein the structure includes at least
    one armature; rockable about an axis coinciding with the coil axis or
    otherwise pivoted for rotation about a fixed axis and combined with means,
    depending upon the attraction or nonattraction of the armature, whereby at
    least a group of the plurality of contacts are actuated as a group.


CLS 335/129
TXT Subject matter under subclass 128 wherein the structure includes at least
    one slidable card, bar or comb means actuatable by the armature and adapted
    to embrace a plurality of movable contacts simultaneously.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    for automatic telephone type multiple contact switches with sliding
    selector motion.

    126,    for selective multiple contact switches with linear sliding contact
    actuation means.


CLS 335/130
TXT Subject matter under subclass 128 wherein the structure includes at least
    one circular plate, comb or other means whereby either first plurality of
    contacts, a second such plurality, or both are caused to be moved in a
    circular path having a common axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for automatic telephone switches with rotary selector motion.

    122,    for selective multiple contact switches with rotary motion contact
    actuator.


CLS 335/131
TXT Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein the structure includes a sliding
    core armature reciprocal in a linear manner, along the axis of, or in a
    plane parallel with the axis of the controlling magnet coil.  The contact
    actuating means may be directly attached to the core armature or may be
    otherwise attached by mechanical structure which is actuatable by the
    motion of the armature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for automatic circuit interrupting devices which have a movable
    contact, or contacts, directly operable by a sliding core armature.

    251,    for alternating current magnets or electromagnets with plunger type
    armature.

    255+,   for magnets or electromagnets with plunger type armatures.


CLS 335/132
TXT Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein the structure includes at least
    one structural unit which is specifically described as adapted to be
    adjusted, interchangeable, removable or replaceable without effecting the
    operativeness of the device as a whole or whereby some operative
    characteristic of the device may be varied.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42      and 45, for automatic circuit interrupting devices with adjustable
    trip structure.

    67,     for retarded or delayed action type switches with adjustable delay
    means.

    86,     for adjustable polarized switches.

    96      and 98, respectively, for armature or contact adjusting means in
    vibrator type switches.

    176,    for magnetically actuated tripping means not specifically claimed
    in an automatic circuit interrupter.

    197+,   for adjustable contact structure.

    212,    237, 258, 287, 295, and 298, respectively for magnets or
    electromagnets with various adjustable features.


CLS 335/133
TXT Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein the structure includes
    significant details of the contact arrangement or structure; for example, a
    matrix or cross bar arrangement, which particularly adapts the contact
    assembly to operate in a predetermined manner or sequence.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    for automatic circuit interrupters with contact biasing, holding or
    pressure control means.

    57+,    for contact or electrode structure for conductive liquid type
    switches.

    83,     for polarity responsive switch contact structure or composition.

    97+,    for periodic switch contact arrangement or composition.

    196+,   for significant contact composition or structure not specifically
    adapted for use in any particular special type switch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 166+ for
    significant contact details.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.79+ for matrix type
    crossed gratings with selectively energized conductors and

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 822 for wire
    bank assemblies.


CLS 335/134
TXT Subject matter under subclass 133 wherein the contacts are arranged in
    coordinate rows in planes which are at an angle to each other (usually a
    right angle) or in a grid arrangement, whereby contact is made by
    displacing one contact perpendicularly to another.

            The switches found here are for the most part those known as
    crossbar or coordinate types, similar to those found in Class 379, subclass
    25, but not limited by the claim language to use in a telephone system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.79+ for matrix type
    contact arrangements in selective signalling systems.


CLS 335/135
TXT Subject matter under subclass 133 wherein the contacts are specifically
    arranged in a pile or stack.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 166+ for
    miscellaneous contact structure.


CLS 335/136
TXT Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein the structure includes a
    plurality of magnet or coil means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8+,     for automatic circuit interrupters for the polyphase or multipole
    type having plural electromagnets.

    92,     for periodic switches with plural magnets.

    102,    for alternating current switches of the polyphase type.

    103,    for alternating current switches with plural magnetic actuators.

    149,    for electrodynamically operated switches of the moving coil type
    with plural coils.

    177+,   for electromagnetically controlled switches in general utilizing
    plural magnets or other flux sources.

    207,    for permanent magnet actuated switches with plural magnets.

    223+,   for magnetomechanical motive devices of the relatively moving
    conductor type.

    246,    for alternating current magnetomotive device with plural windings.

    266+,   for electromagnet structure comprising plural coils or magnets.


CLS 335/137
TXT Subject matter under subclass 136 wherein the plural magnets are of diverse
    magnetic characteristics, as for example, electromagnet and permanent
    magnet or comprise diverse type windings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159+,   for plural independent switches each of which may utilize one or
    more windings.

    179,    for magnetic switches in general utilizing plural diverse type
    magnets.

    229+,   for magnetomotive devices having permanent magnet and electromagnet
    structure.


CLS 335/138
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the device comprises means whereby
    plural successive energizations of a control magnet by pulses of control
    signal current produce a sequential or step-by-step operation of a contact
    actuation means whereby a single set of main contacts are opened or closed
    at the end of the sequence of pulsations sequence of actuating pulses may
    comprise any number of pulses from two or more.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter to be found in this and the indented
    subclasses should be distinguished from that classified in subclasses 107+,
    above, wherein a plurality of contacts are actuated in sequence in such a
    manner as to complete a plurality of circuits sequentially through the
    devices. While the contact actuating means in the above group may be
    similar to those found here the fundamental distinction between the two
    groups is that in the subclasses 107+ group there are a plurality of
    circuits controlled while in this group only a single set of main contacts
    is utilized.


CLS 335/139
TXT Subject matter under subclass 138 wherein the structure includes means
    whereby the successive steps take place at definite intervals, after a
    predetermined time or in a given order or whereby it is possible to
    determine the interval during which the contacts are held in the make or
    break condition after arrival in that condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for automatic circuit interrupters with mechanical motor controlled
    (e.g., clock movement) latch or trip setting delay means.

    64+,    for retarded or delayed type switches wherein the contact actuation
    takes place after a predetermined interval governed by a motor of clock
    work mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 410 for
    rotating contact type snap switches operating in a  step-by-step manner
    whereby the movable contact member is rotated by a series of pulses.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 76 for
    control and regulating systems utilizing step-by-step actuation of an
    electric motor.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 141
    for switch actuation means with time delay which may employ step-by-step
    switch actuation means.


CLS 335/140
TXT Subject matter under subclass 138 wherein the structure includes ratchet
    and pawl type mechanical operating means under the control of an armature
    or armatures whereby the contacts are actuated to and from a closed
    condition in a step-by-step manner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123,    for devices in which a plurality of sets of contacts are actuated
    selectively or sequentially operated by ratchet and pawl means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclasses 575+, for specific machine elements and mechanisms of the pawl
    and ratchet type.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 61.69 for a
    circuit maker or breaker whose cycle of operation corresponds to more than
    one opening and closing of a closure means.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.65+ for remote
    controlled signalling devices with pulse counting means, subclasses 309.1+
    for systems which are timer controlled.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 160+ for
    electric circuits for relays or electromagnets utilizing a time delayed
    operating switch.


CLS 335/141
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the subject matter includes the
    combination of magnetic responsive control means combined with
    terminal-current responsive means, such as fuses, cut-outs, latching or
    other means effecting the operation of the device as a result of heating by
    current flow. Usually, both diversely responsive devices operate upon the
    same contact actuation or control means.  The heating current may comprise
    the entire current flowing in the controlled circuit or a proportionate
    part thereof flowing in a shunt circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for thermal controlled latch or trip delay means in automatic
    circuit interrupters.

    35+,    for automatic circuit interrupting devices with combined magnetic
    and thermal current trip means.

    39+,    for automatic circuit interrupter with magnetic latch or trip
    including thermal delay means.

    43+,    for automatic circuit interrupters with thermally actuated latch or
    trip means.

    66,     for retarded or delayed type switches with thermal delay means.

    156,    for switches with protective means responsive to heat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 3 for multiple
    circuit control devices with thermal current control means.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 110 for resistance heating systems with
    current supply responsive to current voltage or temperature and subclasses
    510+ for heating systems including automatically controlled switches with
    thermally responsive means.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 68 for
    systems with relay structure combined with auxiliary heater means.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 117
    for switching systems responsive to heat.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 471+ for electric
    motor systems including automatic control switches with thermal control
    means for the switch.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclass 14 for nonmagnetically actuated switches which are responsive to
    heat generated by the current in a protected circuit and subclass 298 for
    switches which are responsive to heat from an external source.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 99 for
    safety and protective systems including combined thermal-electromagnetic
    relays in a time delay means, and subclasses 160+ for electric circuits for
    relays and electromagnets with thermal control means.


CLS 335/142
TXT Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the thermal current responsive
    means is specifically recited as consisting of at least one fusible element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclass 142 for fusible element actuated electrothermally controlled
    switches and 401+ for thermal switches employing fusible, combustible or
    explosive means.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    thermally actuated safety and protective devices, especially subclasses 23+
    and 103+.


CLS 335/143
TXT Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the structure includes
    significant details of both the magnetic and thermal devices, and in which
    each is operative to close or interrupt an electrical circuit independently
    of the other.


CLS 335/144
TXT Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the structure includes means
    whereby the physical position of the armature relative to magnetic pole
    pieces or within an air gap at any given time is responsive to or depends
    upon the influence of the thermal means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     for periodic switches with armature adjustment.

    217+,   for electromagnet and armature of the temperature responsive type
    which include means for adjusting the armature by thermally responsive
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 104 for
    systems comprising means for supplying delayed discharge potential to the
    cathode circuit of discharge devices and including thermostatic delay means.


CLS 335/145
TXT Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the thermal current responsive
    means is specifically recited as consisting of at least one bimetallic
    element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43+,    for thermal trip structure with a circuit breaker environment and
    utilizing a bimetallic element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 514 for electric heaters including
    automatic circuit opening or closing means comprising thermally responsive
    means.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 96 and
    especially subclasses 101+ for thermostatic control systems including
    expanding solids.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclasses 333+ for thermally controlled switches employing bimetallic
    elements.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 205+ for expanding solid
    bimetallic temperature sensing elements.


CLS 335/146
TXT Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the electrothermal current
    responsive actuating means consists of a material whose magnetic
    characteristics vary with temperature.  The magnetic means and thermal
    current responsive means may be one and the same or may be separate means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208,    for permanent magnet actuated switches of the thermomagnetic type.

    217,    for magnets or electromagnets of the temperature responsive type.

    296+,   for significant magnetic structure which may be thermomagnetic.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 62.5 for special magnetic compositions.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 306 for thermal
    or pyromagnetic motor or generator structure.


CLS 335/147
TXT Devices under subclass 2 in which the subject matter includes contact
    actuating means utilizing the force of repulsion between two circuits when
    a current is supplied to one and thereby induces a current in the other
    causing a deflection dependent upon the interaction of magnetic fields
    produced by the currents, means comprising plural magnets whose effect,
    upon energization of one by an electric current is a repulsion effect or
    devices in which an electrodynamic force which is the effect of currents
    flowing in opposite directions in two or more branches of a current
    carrying conductor is utilized for the opening or closing of at least one
    pair of contacts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for automatic circuit breaking devices utilizing the force of
    attraction or repulsion between electrical conductors for the purpose of
    assisting the opening or closing of the main contacts.

    78+,    for polarity responsive switch devices which may utilize magnetic
    repulsion forces in part.

    100,    for alternating current operated switches utilizing induction or
    eddy currents.

    195,    for switches in which the main contact pressure is controlled by
    magnetic or electrodynamic force.

    223+,   for electrodynamically operated magnetomotive devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, subclass 3 for devices whereby a
    projectile is propelled by electromagnetic impulses applied thereto during
    the progress through a barrel.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 147, for
    devices in which a coil is arranged adjacent the contacts which generates a
    magnetic field when a circuit is broken, which field repels and breaks the
    arc.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 10+ for
    dynamoelectric devices utilizing the repulsive forces between electrical
    conductors.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 725+ for repulsion
    motors and subclasses 727+ for induction motors.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 74 for the
    calibration of watt hour meters using induction repulsion and subclasses
    137+ for measuring devices utilizing eddy currents.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 75+ for closed coil movable with
    respect to another coil, subclasses 115+ for various inductor devices with
    relatively movable coils and subclasses 130+ for relatively movable core
    and coil.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices subclasses 1+ for
    safety and protective systems which may include electrodynamically actuated
    means.


CLS 335/148
TXT Subject matter under subclass 147 wherein the device includes structure by
    which the mechanical forces necessary to actuate the movable contact, or
    contacts, are developed by the interaction of the field set up in a moving
    coil or closed conductive loop and the polarizing field surrounding it.
    The fixed magnet is usually of the permanent type but may be an
    electromagnet.

    (1)     Note.  The moving coil devices to be found here operate either on
    the D'Arsonval or dynamometer principle and the search to be complete
    should include Class 324, subclasses 76.11+, especially indented subclasses
    144+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222,    for relatively movable coil and permanent magnet.

    224+,   below, for induced current relatively movable coil devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 654+, for position
    servomechanisms utilizing synchro transformer networks, subclass 661, for
    similar systems using synchro resolvers, and subclass 692, for
    self-synchronous motor controls utilizing "Selsyn" type transmitter-motor
    systems.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply, or Regulation Systems, subclasses 255
    and 340 for impedance systems utilizing reactor devices with relatively
    movable windings.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 75+ and 115+ for inductor devices with
    relatively movable coils.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses  870.31+ for telemetering
    systems employing inductive transmitters.


CLS 335/149
TXT Subject matter under subclass 148 wherein the moving coil conductor
    structure includes at least two such coils and in which the relative motion
    of the circuit controlling contacts depends upon the position of the coils
    relative to each other or the relative motion of the coils within a flux
    field.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 115+ for inductor devices having a
    plurality of relatively movable coils.


CLS 335/150
TXT Subject matter under subclass 148 wherein the structure includes means
    whereby the contacts may be restored to an unactuated condition by
    returning the contact arm to the zero or neutral setting of the device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 154+ for measuring
    devices utilizing inductive rotor means with zero reset.


CLS 335/151
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2 and wherein at least the contacts, of an
    electromagnetic switch operate in at least a partial vacuum or wherein the
    contacts are housed in a space hermetically sealed and containing a
    significant gas.  The switches found here are for the most part those
    commonly referred to as "reed switches".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47+,    for conductive liquid switches wherein the contacting members may
    be in a sealed enclosure.

    93+,    for vibratory switches with reed type contacts which may or may not
    be tuned to a particular frequency.

    235,    for polarized electromagnet with vibrating reed or spring bar type
    armature.

    292,    for lifting or attracting type electromagnet of the hermetically
    sealed type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 47+ for vibrating reed type telegraphy
    apparatus.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 152 for liquid
    contact switches in sealed containers.


CLS 335/152
TXT Subject matter under subclass 151 wherein the structure includes at least
    two or more separate and distinct devices under the subclass 151
    definition.  The devices are usually mounted in a group or cluster all
    being under the influence of a single magnetic flux source and may act
    cooperatively or individually.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for structure of plural switches of the automatic circuit
    interrupting type.

    88+,    for plural switches of the periodic or vibrator type.

    159+,   for subject matter comprehending plural independently operative
    switches where the switches are disclosed as vacuum switches but in which
    no significant details of the switches are claimed except in name only.

    206,    for plural switches of the permanent magnet actuated type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.79+ for matrix type
    selective signalling systems utilizing reed switches.


CLS 335/153
TXT Subject matter under subclass 151 wherein the structure includes at least
    one permanent magnet means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84+,    for polarity responsive devices with significant magnetic structure.

    91+,    for vibratory type with significant magnet structure.

    177+,   for switch devices utilizing plural magnets.

    230+,   for electromagnets utilizing permanent magnets.

    302,    for significant permanent magnet structure, per se, applicable to
    switches or relays.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.62+ for
    closure actuated devices which may utilize reed switches with particular
    magnet means.


CLS 335/154
TXT Subject matter under subclass 151 wherein the structure includes specific
    mechanical details of armature, contact actuating or contact structure
    which is significantly peculiar to reed or other sealed switches.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80+,    for polarity responsive switches with significant armature
    structure.

    83,     for polarity responsive switches with significant contact structure.

    93+,    95+ and 97+, respectively for vibrator type switches with
    significant contact actuating armature or contact means.

    185+,   for significant contact actuating means not peculiar to any
    specific type switch.

    196+,   for significant contact composition or structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 874+ for processes of manufacture of
    electrical contacts and terminals.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 42+ for processes for the assembly
    of reed switch contacts with an envelope.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 144 for vacuum
    switches with arc prevention and subclasses 166+ for contact details.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 25 for
    reciprocating motors of the vibrating reed type.


CLS 335/155
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the structure includes means
    whereby the contact opening or closing operation takes place only at a
    predetermined voltage or upon the passage of an operating current, of a
    predetermined value or range of values between predetermined limits,
    through the control coil or coils of the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18+,    for automatic circuit interrupters responsive to predetermined
    current direction condition or value.

    20,     for automatic circuit interrupters which are voltage responsive.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 56 for switches
    combined with indicating instruments.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 125+
    for miscellaneous switching systems which may be responsive to various
    electrical conditions.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclasses 14+ for thermal current responsive switches.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    automatic safety and protection systems, and subclasses 170+ for relay and
    electromagnetic switching circuits responsive to various conditions,
    including voltage or current.


CLS 335/156
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the structure includes at least one
    means whereby the device is protected from physical or electrical damage;
    such as, burnout, contact burning or pitting, physical breakage or damage
    due to jar, overheating, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157+,   for switches with locking or holding structure to prevent or
    inhibit unwanted operation of the contacts from a first condition to a
    second condition.

    193,    for significant contact activating means with means for preventing
    vibration bounce or chatter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 166+ for
    nonmagnetic switches with protective means.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 134+
    for electrical switching systems with operation facilitating or
    self-protective features.


CLS 335/157
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the structure includes positive
    locking or holding means whereby the main contacts are inhibited or
    restrained from movement by external sources of influence; for instance
    against shock or accidental motion.  The locking devices to be found here
    generally comprise either mechanical or magnet devices which are either
    manually or automatically operated independently of any latching means
    which may be present; for example, holding coil means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21+,    for automatic circuit breakers with latching means.

    77,     for motor actuated switches with lock, latch or trip.

    113,    for multiple contact automatic telephone switches with holding,
    locking or latching means.

    167+,   especially 168, for latching means with unwanted contact actuation
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 6+ for
    pivoted contact switches with holding coil means and subclasses 44+ for
    switches with unauthorized use prevention devices comprising locks.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 142
    for switch actuating means with locking, holding or breaking means.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 194 for
    electric circuits for relays and electromagnets and including holding means.


CLS 335/158
TXT Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the structure includes
    significant means whereby the contacts are retained in an open or
    unoperated condition.


CLS 335/159
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the structure comprises all of the
    essential elements (as defined in the definition of subclass 2 above, and
    not merely by name only) of two or more separate and distinct switch
    devices, which may or may not employ common electromagnetic operating
    means; and which if detached or removed from each of the other devices, is
    capable of opening or closing an electrical circuit by means within the
    device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for plural automatic circuit breakers.

    52,     for plural vacuum or hermetically sealed switches.

    88+,    for plural periodic switches.

    206,    for plural switches of the permanent  magnet actuated type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 5 for multiple
    circuit control means comprising multiple switches.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, with plural
    supply circuits or sources and having a switch in each supply source, and
    subclass 113 for switching systems comprising plural switches.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    safety and protective systems involving three wire lines with switch in
    each line and subclasses 139+ for electric circuits for plural relays or
    electromagnets.


CLS 335/160
TXT Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein the structure includes means
    whereby the plural devices are caused to operate alternately, successively
    or selectively, depending upon conditions either in the circuits which are
    to be controlled, at the will of an operator, or according to a
    predetermined cycle or schedule.  This subclass also contains those patents
    relating to means whereby one device is prevented from operating while
    another is in operating position as by an interlocking device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for multiple contact switches with plural armatures with
    interlocking or mechanical connection.

    233,    for polarized electromagnet with plural armatures having armature
    locking means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 483 for interlocking linkage
    systems.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 1 for multiple
    circuit control devices, particularly indented subclass 5 for plural
    switches which may be interlocked, indented subclass 18 for plural switch
    operating means mechanically connected, and subclass 50 for plural
    interlocked switches.

    235,    Registers, subclass 431 for data comparing calculators including
    plural coordinated switches.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclasses 131+ for interlocking
    signalling systems with electric switch actuating means.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 191+ for
    electric circuits for relays and electromagnets comprising interlocking
    means.


CLS 335/161
TXT Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein the structure includes
    significant actuating means which acts cooperatively or through the
    interlocking means to control the operation of at least two separate
    circuit controlling devices.


CLS 335/162
TXT Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein the structure includes means
    whereby at least one or more separate devices are housed or supported in
    common as a unit or whereby each shares a common magnetic flux path.  The
    common flux path may be excited by a plurality of windings or other flux
    sources.  The common support means may consist of a base only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202,    for significant housing or support structure not restricted to use
    with any particular type of switch set out above in the schedule.

    292,    for lifting or attracting type electromagnet of the hermetically
    sealed type.

    294,    for lifting or attracting type electromagnets with outer casing or
    housing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 168 for
    significant details of casing and bases for nonmagnetically actuated
    switches in general.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 600+ for
    distribution boards and analogous devices such as switch boards and
    housings.


CLS 335/163
TXT Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein the structure includes
    significant means whereby the plurality of devices are actuated through the
    medium of a unitary or common magnetic flux source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    for plural vacuum or reed switches which may share a common flux
    source.

    180+,   for switches comprising plural windings utilizing a common magnetic
    core.

    265,    for magnetomotive devices comprising plural armatures actuated by a
    single electromagnetic coil.


CLS 335/164
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the subject matter relates to
    structure comprising a manual or gravity operated latching means combined
    with at least one electromagnetically operated trip means whereby the latch
    means is forcibly tripped upon the operation of the electromagnet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21+,    above, for automatic circuit interrupting devices with latching or
    tripping means, especially indented subclass 27 for automatic combined with
    manual resetting or reclosing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 2+ for automatic trip or
    mechanical latch mechanisms in general.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 169 for
    significant latch structure for nonelectromagnetically actuated switches.


CLS 335/165
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the structure includes actuating
    means for at least one set of contacts whose operation to open or closed
    position is directly dependent upon the operation or position of a latching
    or tripping device and in which the latching or tripping device utilizes
    mechanical structural elements in common with a toggle or other contact
    actuating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    187,    for contacting actuating means unitary with armature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 39+ for clock
    train retarded switches with latch trip, subclasses 70+ and 78 for snap
    action switches with latch trip, subclass 318 for mechanical switches
    comprising combined latch or trip means with contact operating means and
    subclass 169 for latch trip for switches in general.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    miscellaneous circuit breaker systems, comprising latch or trip structure.


CLS 335/166
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the structure includes means
    whereby either the latch or the latch tripping device may be reset to its
    operative condition after having completed the transition to an unoperative
    condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26+,    for automatic circuit interrupting devices with resetting or
    reclosing means.

    150,    for moving coil type switch operators with reset or restoring means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 169 for
    nonmagnetically operated switch devices with specific latch details.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 71+ for
    safety protection devices with subsequent automatic restoration means.


CLS 335/167
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the structure includes specific
    details of operating means whereby at least one set of contacts may be
    restrained in one of two normal conditions (open or closed).  The latching
    means usually consists of structure adapted for mechanically maintaining a
    contact actuating means, such as a toggle arrangement, armature or other
    carrier, in a given position independently of the magnetic control means so
    that once the contacts are closed, or opened, the magnetizing current may
    be cut off and the contacts remain in their opened or closed condition
    until a tripping action takes place.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21+,    for automatic circuit interrupting devices with latch or trip means.

    77,     for motor actuated switches with latch or trip means.

    113,    for automatic telephone type multiple contact switches with
    latching means.

    164,    for manual or gravity operated latch with electromagnetic trip.

    165,    for contact actuating means unitary with latch or trip.

    166,    for switches with latch or trip reset means.

    253+,   for electromagnet and armature with armature latch means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 2+ for automatic latch or
    trip mechanisms and subclasses 527+ for mechanical latching or detent
    devices in general.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 83 for fluid
    pressure switches of the diaphragm type with latching means and subclass
    169 for latch details.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ for
    electric circuits for relays and electromagnets with latch mechanisms.


CLS 335/168
TXT Subject matter under subclass 167 wherein the structure includes means
    whereby the latching mechanism is positively locked or prevented from
    actuation from a first condition to a second condition while the locking
    means is operative.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for automatic circuit interrupter with lockout.

    77,     for motor actuated switch with locking means.

    113,    for multiple contact automatic telephone type switches with holding
    or locking means.

    157,    for significant locking structure peculiarly adapted for preventing
    the operation of the main contacts inadvertently be external means.

    233,    for polarized electromagnet and plural armatures with locking means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 44+ for
    switches with locking means to prevent unauthorized use.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 142
    for electromagnetic switch actuators with locking, holding or braking means.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 78+ for
    safety and protective devices with voltage responsive restraining means.


CLS 335/169
TXT Subject matter under subclass 167 wherein the latch structure comprises at
    least two separate cooperative latching devices each under the influence of
    a separate actuating means.  One of the latching devices may constitute the
    principle latch while at least one other constitutes an auxiliary latch
    whose function is to restrain the principle latch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22+,    for automatic circuit interrupting devices which include plural
    latch means or plural operating means for a single latch.


CLS 335/170
TXT Subject matter under subclass 167 wherein the latching structure includes
    independent magnetic means; such as a holding coil and armature, for
    instance, whereby the latch is operated into, or held in holding
    relationship with contact actuating means. Also included in this subclass
    are devices where no mechanical latch is used and which depend entirely
    upon magnetic means for directly holding the contact arm or arms in closed
    position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21+,    especially subclasses 38+ for automatic circuit interrupting
    devices including magnetically controlled latching means.

    254,    for electromagnet and armature with armature latch control winding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 169 for
    magnetically controlled latches in general.

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants, subclasses 7+, especially subclasses 37
    and 38, for electric control apparatus for electric engine starting motors
    which may include electromagnetic switches with magnetic latching means.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclass 71 for electrothermally actuated switches with plural latch or
    latch release means one of which may be magnetic.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 67+ for
    safety and protection devices which may include magnetic latching means.


CLS 335/171
TXT Subject matter under subclass 167 wherein the latching structure includes
    spring or other energy storing means whereby the latch is biased to either
    operative or inoperative condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    for automatic circuit interrupting devices including contact
    biasing means which may be a component of the latching means.

    192,    for contact actuating structure with biasing means to either the
    open or closed position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 170 for
    significant contact pressure adjustment means which may comprise spring
    means.


CLS 335/172
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the structure includes significant
    details of at least one means whereby a latch is released or tripped from a
    first operative condition to a second nonoperative condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21+,    for automatic circuit interrupting devices with significant trip
    structure.

    77,     for motor actuated switches with trip structure.

    165,    for unitary contact actuating and latch or trip means.

    166,    for switch with latch or trip reset means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 2+ for mechanical trip
    structure, per se.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 39+ for
    retarded switch structure including trip means, subclasses 411+; 415+ for
    double snap switches with trip means, subclass 470; 471 for single snap
    switches with trip means, and subclasses 424+ for reciprocating snap
    switches with trip means.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclasses 47+, 70+, 128+, 150+, and 174+ for electrothermally actuated
    switches which include trip releases and subclasses 356+ and 411 for
    thermally actuated switches including trip releases.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 115+ for
    specific circuit breaker or relay structure which may include tripping
    means.


CLS 335/173
TXT Subject matter under subclass 172 wherein the tripping structure includes
    significant details of at least two or more separate and distinct tripping
    means of diverse type; as for example, manual and magnetic, each of which
    is operative independently of the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35+,    above, for automatic circuit interrupting devices with plural or
    combined trip structure.


CLS 335/174
TXT Subject matter under subclass 172 wherein the tripping means includes
    significant magnetic structure whereby the tripping means is actuated.  The
    magnetic flux for operating the trip device may be derived from the main
    magnetic circuit or from an independent magnetic source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38+,    for automatic circuit interrupting devices with significant
    magnetic trip structure.

    164,    for manually or gravity operated latch with electromagnetic trip.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 102 for
    safety and protective devices, comprising breakers operative by the removal
    of tripping coil shunt means.


CLS 335/175
TXT Subject matter under subclass 174 wherein the magnetic trip actuating
    structure includes impact means whereby the latch is tripped by the
    delivery of a sharp hammer blow to some part thereof.  The impact means
    usually consists of a reciprocating member (armature) actuated by a coil
    but may be an inertia means released by action of an armature.


CLS 335/176
TXT Subject matter under subclass 174 wherein the claimed trip structure
    includes adjusting or regulating means whereby some operative
    characteristic of the tripping device, such as the current value required
    for actuation, may be predetermined or automatically adjusted or regulated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     above, for automatic circuit interrupting devices with adjustable
    or regulatable magnetic tripping means, subclass 45 for similar thermal
    tripping means with regulating means and subclasses 258 and 273 for
    electromagnets and armatures with adjusting means.


CLS 335/177
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the structure includes at least two
    or more magnetic flux sources adapted to cooperate in the operation of the
    same main circuit control contacts.  Generally one magnet operates to close
    the circuit and the other operates to open the circuit or several magnets
    may operate simultaneously on an armature system.  One or more of the
    magnets may be a permanent magnet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8+,     for multipole or polyphase circuit interrupting devices with plural
    flux sources.

    11,     for plural automatic circuit interrupters each with magnet.

    92,     for periodic type switches with plural magnets.

    102     and 103, for alternating current actuated switches with plural
    magnets.

    136,    for multiple contact type with plural magnet or coil means.

    159+,   for plural independently operated switches.

    206,    for plural switches of the permanent magnet operated type.

    207,    for switches utilizing plural permanent magnets.

    223+,   for magnetomotive device of the relatively movable conductor type
    (e.g., dynamometer type).

    246,    for alternating current electromagnets with plural windings.

    266+,   for other electromagnets with plural coils.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 74+ for telegraph circuits with
    electromagnetic switching means utilizing plural magnets.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclasses 218+ (especially
    subclasses 227 and 231+) for electrically actuated railway signal devices
    utilizing plural magnets.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 160+ for
    electric circuits for relays and electromagnets with plural coils.


CLS 335/178
TXT Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein the magnets are specifically
    described as having diverse electrical characteristics, for example one may
    be voltage responsive while another is current responsive.  Also included
    here are systems in which one magnet winding is described as in series with
    a source of current while another is shunt connected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137,    above, for multiple contact type switching devices utilizing plural
    diverse type magnets or flux sources of diverse types.


CLS 335/179
TXT Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein the magnets are specifically
    described as having diverse magnetic characteristics. For example, one or
    more may be a permanent magnet while another may be an electromagnet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78+,    for polarized switches utilizing a plurality of magnetic means
    consisting of electromagnet plus permanent magnet.

    153,    for vacuum or hermetically sealed type switches with electromagnet
    and permanent magnet structure.

    222,    for magnetomotive device with relatively movable coil and permanent
    magnet.

    229+,   below, for electromagnets with armature including permanent magnet
    devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 208 for
    electric circuits for electromagnets and relays employing polarized relay
    means utilizing electromagnets plus at least one permanent magnet.


CLS 335/180
TXT Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein the structure includes a single
    core or armature common to at least two of the magnet means.  The armature
    structure may comprise a single plunger reciprocally related to a plurality
    of coils or may be of the hinged or pivoted type actuated by the coils in
    common.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92,     for periodic switches employing a common armature, usually pivoted
    for alternate attraction and repulsion in two directions.

    163,    for plural switches with common magnet flux source.

    256,    for plural coil actuated plunger armature.

    266,    for electromagnetic devices employing plural coils controlling a
    single armature.


CLS 335/181
TXT Subject matter under subclass 180 wherein the single armature is
    specifically a pivoted armature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68+,    for rotary motor actuated switches.

    125,    for multiple contact switches with rotary armature.

    128+,   for simultaneously actuated multiple contact switch with pivoted
    armature.

    266,    for electromagnets consisting of plural coils actuating a single
    pivoted armature.

    272,    for electromagnet with rotating disk or cylindrical armature.

    275,    for electromagnet with armature having a hinge joint.

    276,    for electromagnet with armature having a pivot support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 16 for telegraph systems employing plural
    windings and a single armature for current reversing.


CLS 335/182
TXT Subject matter under subclass 180 wherein the plurality of magnetic coils
    or other flux sources are wound upon a common core in such a manner or
    otherwise arranged so that their magnetic flux fields are opposing and
    whereby the armature or armatures are acted upon by a resultant flux field
    which may be zero or the difference between two or more fields.  The
    devices classified here are of the type commonly known as differential
    type.  The two or more windings are so connected that when energized
    together their magnetic effects neutralize each other and no effective flux
    is produced.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclasses 227+ for railroad
    signaling switches with opposed magnets and subclasses 231+ for
    reciprocating actuators with opposed magnets.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 870.31+, especially
    subclasses 870.35+, for inductor transmitters which may employ
    differentially wound coils with magnetic fields opposing.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 160+ for
    electric circuits for relays and electromagnets which may utilize
    differentially wound coils.


CLS 335/183
TXT Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein the torque generated by at least
    two magnetic flux sources act in opposition to each other or in opposite
    directions.  The plurality of flux sources may be energized simultaneously
    or alternately whereby a contact actuating means may be operated first
    toward one position and then toward a second position as from open to
    closed and vice versa.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266,    for electromagnetic relays comprising plural coils adapted to be
    separately or selectively energized.


CLS 335/184
TXT Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein at least two or more magnetic
    coils are provided with reciprocating core armatures which operate in
    alignment along a common axis and which may or may not be rigidly
    mechanically connected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259,    for magneto-mechanical devices utilizing plural plunger type
    armatures.

    267,    for magneto-mechanical devices employing both plural coils and
    plural armatures.


CLS 335/185
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the significant structure comprises
    apparatus in addition to, but actuated by, an armature or armatures whereby
    at least one movable contact is caused to be actuated from a first position
    to a second position in relation to a fixed contact resulting in an
    electrical circuit being completed or broken.

    (1)     Note.  For devices in which the movable contact is pivotably
    connected upon or relatively movably attached to the armature the search is
    in subclass 200.

    (2)     Note.  When the specific contact actuating structure is shown or
    disclosed in a device falling in a specific type classifiable elsewhere in
    the class, and the claims do not recite elements of the more comprehensive
    structure; search must be extended to the more specific subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71+,    for motor operated switches with contact actuating structure.

    93+,    for periodic switches with vibratory reed or other periodic contact
    actuator.

    121+,   for multiple contact switches with significant contact actuating
    means.

    154,    for vacuum or hermetically sealed type switches with particular
    contact actuating means.


CLS 335/186
TXT Subject matter under subclass 185 wherein the significant contact actuating
    means includes at least one manual means such as a push button or operating
    lever, whereby the movable contact or contacts are actuated from a first to
    a second position. The electromagnetic means may act to maintain the
    contacts closed after actuation by the manual means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for motor actuated switches with particular plural contact
    actuating means.

    121+,   for multiple contact type switches with significant contact
    actuating means.

    140,    for step-by-step type with significant multiple contact actuating
    means.

    164,    for switches having manual contact operating means with latch or
    electromagnetic trip means.

    238,    for electromagnet with armature with auxiliary armature movement
    control means (e.g., manual).


CLS 335/187
TXT Subject matter under subclass 185 wherein at least one significant contact
    actuating means is structurally combined with armature in such a manner as
    to form a physical entity therewith and in which both are claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165,    for contact actuating means unitary with latch or trip.

    200,    for devices including significant armature structure having at
    least one movable contact pivoted thereon and adapted to be relatively
    movable thereto.


CLS 335/188
TXT Subject matter under subclass 185 wherein the significant actuating
    structure includes means whereby the contact motion is caused to take place
    abruptly and is not dependent on the rate of movement of the armature.  The
    contact movement is usually accomplished by a spring connection between the
    operator and the  contact in such a manner that the initial movement of the
    armature or other actuating means places the spring under tension until
    released whereupon the movable contact is snapped to open or closed
    position by the energy stored in the spring.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 97 and 100 for mechanical
    snap actions.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses
    405 under "SNAP" for various snap actions for nonmagnetically operated
    switch devices.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 157+ for
    electric circuits for relays or electromagnets which may be of the snap
    switch type.


CLS 335/189
TXT Subject matter under subclass 185 wherein the significant contact actuating
    structure comprises mechanical linkage operative between an armature and at
    least one movable contact whereby motion of the armature is transmitted to
    the movable contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110+,   for multiple contact automatic telephone type switches with
    multidirectional motion converting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 469+ for mechanical
    linkage systems, per se.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 17 for multiple
    circuit control devices with significant operating means and subclasses
    502+ for miscellaneous switch actuating mechanism details.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems,  subclasses
    139+ for switching systems utilizing significant switch actuating means.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 115+ for
    specific circuit breaker or relay structure.


CLS 335/190
TXT Subject matter under subclass 189 wherein the mechanical linkage comprises
    at least one cam, roller or eccentric device whereby the force applied to
    open or close a movable contact may be varied during the opening or closing
    operation, or the armature may be held in a predetermined position upon
    actuation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73,     above, for motor driven switches employing eccentric or cam means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses, especially
    subclasses 9, 10.29+, 10.6, 53, 54, 55+, 567+, 570+, 835, and 838+ for
    mechanical elements including cams and/or eccentric devices.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 21+, 27 and
    30+, for periodic switches, subclass 38 for clock train retarded and
    subclasses 431 for snap action switches, all utilizing cams.


CLS 335/191
TXT Subject matter under subclass 189 wherein the mechanical linkage comprises
    structure whereby the force applied to a moving contact is the result of a
    motion in a first direction converted to a motion in a second direction;
    for example, a linear first motion may be converted to a rotary motion
    about a fixed origin or pivot as by a toggle linkage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for automatically controlled multiple contact automatic telephone
    type switching devices utilizing motion conversion means.

    122+,   for multiple contact switches with compound motion contact actuator.

    140,    for step-by-step switch with ratchet and pawl type actuator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 520+ for mechanical toggle
    elements, per se.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers.


CLS 335/192
TXT Subject matter under subclass 185 wherein the significant contact actuating
    structure includes spring biasing means whereby the movable contact or
    contacts are positively biased toward one of two positions independently of
    the armature means.  The biasing may be toward either the open or closed
    position and is operative to assist an armature or other actuating means in
    the opening or closing operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    for automatic circuit interrupting devices including biasing or
    pressure control means.

    157+,   for switches with operation inhibiting means.

    193,    for contact bounce, chatter or vibration preventing means.

    194+,   for contact pressure maintaining or adjusting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 142
    for miscellaneous switches with locking, holding or breaking means.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 194 for
    relay systems having relays with contact holding or locking means.


CLS 335/193
TXT Subject matter under subclass 185 wherein the contact actuating structure
    includes means whereby the contacts are prevented from vibrating,
    rebounding or chattering when in the closed position or during the closing
    operation.  The apparatus generally comprises compression means, inertia
    weights or other similar structure for absorbing the kinetic energy of the
    moving parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for automatic circuits interrupting devices with rebound prevention
    means.

    104,    for alternating current actuated switches with chatter, bounce or
    vibration prevention means.

    247+,   for alternating current type switches with chatter or noise
    preventing means.

    271,    for electromagnet and armature with armature bounce or vibration
    preventing means.


CLS 335/194
TXT Subject matter under subclass 185 wherein the contact actuating structure
    includes additional means whereby a predetermined or constant pressure is
    applied to the contacts while in the circuit closing position or whereby
    such contact pressure may be adjusted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    above, for automatic circuit interrupting devices with pressure
    control means.

    192,    above, for devices having spring biasing means for assisting in the
    opening or closing of the contacts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 8 for switches
    in which contact pressure between fixed and movable contacts is exerted in
    a line radial to the arc of movement of a pivoted contact and subclass 170
    for contact pressure adjustment means generally.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 157+ for
    electric circuits for relays and electromagnets including contact pressure
    increasing means.


CLS 335/195
TXT Subject matter under subclass 194 wherein the pressure maintaining or
    adjusting means comprises magnetic means or structure whereby an
    electrodynamic force established between two current carrying conductors is
    utilized to establish a pressure tending to maintain the contacts closed.

    (1)     Note.  For devices wherein an electrodynamic force is utilized to
    actuate or to assist in the opening or closing of circuit closing contacts
    see subclass 147.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for automatic circuit interrupting devices with magnetic blowon or
    blowoff; i.e., magnetic biasing.


CLS 335/196
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the structure includes significant
    details of the composition of matter or mechanical structure of the contact
    assembly, its support on or attachment to the magnetic device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57+,    for liquid contact switches.

    83,     for polarity responsive switches with particular contact structure.

    97+,    for periodic switches with particular contact structure.

    133+,   for particular contact structure or arrangement in a multiple
    contact switch.

    154,    for vacuum switches with particular contact structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 874+ for process of manufacture of
    electrical contacts.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 79+ for telegraph transmitters with
    particular contacts and subclasses 101+ for telegraph keys with significant
    contact means.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 166 for contact
    structural details.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 500+ for electricity conductive
    compositions.


CLS 335/197
TXT Subject matter under subclass 196 wherein the contact structure comprises
    significant means whereby the contact or contacts are readily detachable or
    adjustable relative to the magnetic structure, the armature or each contact
    relative to the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98,     above, for periodic switches with adjustable contacts.


CLS 335/198
TXT Subject matter under subclass 197 wherein the subject matter relates to
    means whereby the device may be adapted to operate as a normally open or
    closed contact switch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    for alternating of fluctuating current type switches which are
    adjustable.


CLS 335/199
TXT Subject matter under subclass 196 wherein the contact structure, or at
    least a part thereof, is of the preformed surface type, which is usually
    formed by depositing a metallic conducting material upon an insulating
    surface, by etching away part of a metal coated insulating surface, or by
    printing on a conductive layer, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for making preformed circuits by surface bonding or
    especially subclasses 2+ for making a conductor attached to a sheet-like
    body for an etching operation.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 250+ for other
    printed circuits.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclasses for
    processes for electrochemically producing preformed articles or circuit
    structure, such as switches, contacts, etc.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 748+ for
    structure of impedances and circuit components of the printed circuit type
    and subclasses 823+ for switch boards and analogous devices with printed
    terminals.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 58+ for processes of coating, per se,
    wherein the product has utility as an electrical product.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclass 17 for preformed panels with
    printed circuitry which include detachable connectors.


CLS 335/200
TXT Subject matter under subclass 196 wherein the structure includes at least
    one movable contact device which is pivotally or otherwise attached to an
    armature in such a manner as to be movable relative thereto and
    independently thereof.  The connection usually consists of a spring biased
    pivotal means but may comprise any lost motion connection providing for
    relative movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189+,   for significant contact actuating means comprising mechanical
    linkage between the armature and at least one fixed contact.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 106 for telegraph keys with shifting contact
    point.


CLS 335/201
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the significant structural details
    include means for preventing the formation of electric arcs when a circuit
    is broken or smothering an arc once it forms.  The circuit may be broken at
    a plurality of points as by the provision of auxiliary arcing contacts
    shunting the main contacts or by means of a magnetic coil arranged adjacent
    the contacts wherein a magnetic field is generated which tends to repel and
    extinguish the arc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 10 for
    nonmagnetically actuated switches with arc preventing or extinguishing
    means.

    218,    High-Voltage Switches With Arc Preventing and Extinguishing
    Devices, subclasses 1+ for nonmagnetically actuated switches with arc
    preventing or extinguishing means.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclasses 110 and 273+ for electrothermally actuated switches with arc
    prevention means.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 2+ for
    safety and protection devices with arc suppression means and subclasses
    117+ for high voltage dissipators, per se, especially subclasses 133+ for
    magnetic means.


CLS 335/202
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the significant structural details
    include means for housing, enclosing or supporting an electromagnetic
    switch device.  The housing or support means may include magnetic or
    electric shielding means or other details of construction whereby the
    casing or support contributes to the operation of the switch.  One example
    of the devices to be found here are the so-called "lamp socket" switches.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162,    for plural switches with unitary housing or support means.

    278,    for magneto-mechanical motive device with casing or enclosure.

    292,    for hermetically sealed work or lifting electromagnet.

    294,    for outer casing or housing for work or lifting type electromagnet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 17+ for fluid
    filled or evacuated type housings, or boxes for electrical devices,
    subclasses 32+ for anti-inductive structures and subclasses 50+ for boxes
    and housings for electrical devices in general.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 51+ for
    switches combined with electrical connectors and subclass 168 for casing
    and bases for switches in general.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 3.2+ for outlet or junction box type
    receptacles which may house electric switches.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 600+ for
    switchboards or the structural combination miscellaneous electrical
    components, housing structure in general, and particularly subclasses 627+
    for switches that may include housings.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 394 for light sockets with special switch
    operators.


CLS 335/203
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the structure includes significant
    details of armature structure or composition of matter with other switch
    structure in conventional language, as by name only, but which is
    sufficient to restrict the device to this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55+,    for liquid contact switches with significant armature structure.

    80+,    for polarity responsive switches with significant armature
    structure.

    95+,    for periodic switches at significant armature structure.

    124+,   for multiple contact type with significant armature.

    154,    for vacuum or reed switches with significant armature.

    180+,   for switches utilizing plural magnetic sources with a single
    armature.

    232+,   for polarized electromagnet with plural armatures.

    235,    for polarized electromagnet with vibrating reed or spring bar type
    armature.

    249,    for alternating current electromagnet with chatter prevent armature
    construction.

    255,    for electromagnets having plunger type armatures.

    267,    for electromagnets with plural armatures.

    270,    for electromagnets with special armature mounting means.

    279,    for electromagnets with armatures of particular shape, structure or
    material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 77, 117+ and 130+ for inductors with
    relatively movable core and coil structure.


CLS 335/204
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein at least a portion of the magnetic
    actuating structure of the switch device, usually the flux source or
    winding, consists of a portion of a bus bar or other conductor which
    comprises an integral part of the external circuit which is to be
    controlled. For example; the switch device may be directly attached to a
    bus bar in such a manner as to utilize the magnetic flux field surrounding
    the bus bar upon the passage of current therethrough to control an armature
    or other contact actuating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 127 for electricity
    measuring devices employing a split core transformer surrounding a line
    conductor.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 174 for inductor coil surrounding a
    linear conductor and subclasses 175+ for induction devices consisting of a
    core surrounding a linear conductor.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 650+ for electrical
    condition responsive apparatus for electric line fault indicators means
    attached to a through conductor.


CLS 335/205
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the structure includes
    switch means whereby the actuation of the main contacts from an operative
    to an inoperative position or vice versa is entirely accomplished by means
    of permanent magnets.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84+,    for magnetic structure of polarity responsive switches.

    137,    for multiple contact switches with plural diverse magnets (e.g.,
    electromagnet and permanent magnet).

    153,    for vacuum or hermetically sealed type switches with permanent
    magnet.

    179,    for switches utilizing electromagnet and permanent magnet.

    222,    for relatively movable coil and permanent magnet.

    229+,   below, for magneto-mechanical devices utilizing permanent magnets.

    302+,   for permanent magnet structure, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 52+ for
    special application switches which may utilize permanent magnets, and other
    indented subclasses such as 61.41 for switches in special environment
    utilizing permanent magnets, subclass 80 for centrifugal switches, with
    permanent magnets, subclass 81.8 for fluid pressure actuated switches with
    permanent magnets, subclass 84 for float type switches utilizing permanent
    magnets, and subclass 404 for mechanical switches with permanent magnets.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 103+ for
    magnetic field type torque transmitting clutches or brakes.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 110 for inductor devices with permanent
    magnets.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclass 2, for electrothermal or thermal actuated switches combined with
    other art switches which may be permanent magnet actuated, subclasses 54,
    90, 134, and 344 for particular type thermal switches utilizing permanent
    magnets.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 12 for devices wherein a resistance
    is variably actuated by a movable magnet, and subclass 32 for Hall effect
    type resistors.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.79+ for matrices
    utilizing permanent magnets

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 208 for
    circuits utilizing polarized relays.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclass for
    magnetic storage systems particularly subclasses 62 and 98 which may
    include permanent magnets.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclass 12 for connectors with magnet or
    suction cup.


CLS 335/206
TXT Subject matter under subclass 205 wherein the claimed structure comprises
    all the essential elements of two or more separate and distinct switch
    devices which may or may not employ common permanent magnet operation means
    and which if detached or removed from each of the other devices is capable
    of opening or closing an electrical circuit by means within the device.

    (1)     Note.  Consult the search notes under subclass 159.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232+,   for polarized electromagnet with plural armatures.

    306,    for plural permanent magnets, per se.


CLS 335/207
TXT Subject matter under subclass 205 wherein the permanent magnet means
    comprises a plurality of at least two or more such magnets.

    (1)     Note.  To complete the search for this subject matter consult the
    search notes under subclasses 177+ above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229+,   for electromagnet and armature which may be combined with plural
    permanent magnets.

    306,    for the structure of plural permanent magnets, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclass 249 for car actuated circuit
    controllers utilizing plural permanent magnets.


CLS 335/208
TXT Subject matter under subclass 205 wherein the magnetic structure is
    specifically recited as consisting of material whose magnetic properties
    are responsive to temperature conditions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146,    for switch including thermomagnetic actuating means.

    217+,   for temperatures responsive magnets or electromagnets.


CLS 335/209
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising magnets, which may be
    permanent magnets, electromagnets or a combination of the two types, or
    electromagnets with armatures, designed or arranged to perform external
    mechanical work.

    (1)     Note.  Coils, or coils with core whose proximate and sole purpose
    is to introduce inductance in an electrical circuit and which are not
    designed to perform external work are classified in Class 336, Inductor
    Devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1       through 208, for magnets or electromagnets used in magnetically
    operated switches.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 602.1+ for methods of manufacturing
    transformers and inductances, and residual methods of manufacturing magnets
    and electromagnets which do not fall into Classes 148, 252 or 361.  For the
    lines between these classes see the extensive notes to Class 29, subclass
    602.1 and Class 148, Metal Treatment, subclass 100.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 100 through 122 for processes of
    improving the magnetic properties of material having at least one component
    which is a free metal or alloy, other than by mere magnetization, and
    subclasses 31.55 and 31.57 for stock resulting from such processes.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 381, 439 and 619 for magnetic
    type conveyors.

    209,    Classifying, Separating and Assorting Solids, subclasses 38, 39,
    40, 212, 213+, and 478 for magnetic sorting or separation of solids.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 222+ for such subject
    matter having magnetic means to effect the purification or separation.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses and see especially
    subclass 212 for magnetic article holding discharge assistants and the
    controls therefor.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 430+ for a process or
    apparatus for forming an article (e.g., a motor core, inductor, capacitor,
    or resistor) by winding material onto a core.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 281+ for ionic separation or analysis
    methods and apparatus which use magnets or electromagnets.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 62.51+ for processes of making magnetic
    compositions, and the resulting product when it is claimed as stock or bulk
    material.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 200 for magnetic
    testing devices utilizing magnets and electromagnets or inductors, and
    subclasses 76.11+ for electric meters utilizing magnets and electromagnets.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for the structure of
    transformers and inductive reactors of general utility.  See (1) Note above.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 9+ for electromagnets utilized in surgery and
    diagnostics.


CLS 335/210
TXT Subject matter under subclass 209 relating to electronic or ionic beam
    deflecting magnets.

    (1)     Note.  The electromagnets and permanent magnets in this and the
    indented subclasses are adapted for use with electron or ion beam
    deflecting devices of Classes 250, Radiant Energy and 313, Electric Lamp
    and Discharge Devices. The electromagnet, for example, may be a beam
    sweeping magnet and the permanent magnet may be a positive ion deflecting
    magnet.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass and indented subclasses, provide for the
    permanent magnet or electromagnet, per se, adapted for use with electron
    beam tubes but does not provide for the beam deflecting magnet in
    combination with significant details of the electron beam tube or the
    control circuit for the magnets or the electron beam tube. For such
    combinations, see the search notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201,    for electromagnetically actuated switches with arc suppression or
    extinguishing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 10 for multiple
    circuit pivoted contact switches.

    218,    High-Voltage Switches With Arc Preventing and Extinguishing
    Devices, subclasses 1+ for switches in general with arc preventing and
    extinguishing magnets.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 281+ for ionic separation or analysis
    methods or apparatus which use magnets or electromagnets and subclasses
    396+ for electron or ion beam deflection or focussing systems which use
    magnets or electromagnets.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 153+ and 364+, in
    particular 421+ for space discharge devices having electronic and ionic
    beam deflecting means.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 364+ for
    cathode ray tube systems having beam deflecting means.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclass 281 for fusible element type switches with magnetic blowout means.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 134+ for
    lightning arresters having arc blowout magnets.


CLS 335/211
TXT Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein the electronic or ionic beam
    deflecting magnet includes a magnetic shunt path for the magnetic flux
    produced by the deflecting magnet.  The shunt magnetic path is an auxiliary
    magnetic path in addition to the main magnetic path.

    (1)     Note.  The magnetic shunt path may or may not be adjustable to vary
    the degree of magnetic shunt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236,    for magnets or electromagnets including a magnetic shunt path.


CLS 335/212
TXT Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein the magnetic elements of the
    electronic or ionic beam deflecting magnets are adjustable with respect to
    each other and/or with respect to the tube to vary the position of the
    electronic or ionic beam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237,    for electromagnets with adjustable shunt means.

    273,    for electromagnets with armature adjusting means.


CLS 335/213
TXT Subject matter under subclass 210 including significant structural details
    of a coil of the magnetic deflecting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282,    for electromagnet with armature having particular coil shape,
    structure or material.

    299+,   for electromagnet coil structure or material in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 399+ for
    cathode- ray tube systems, subclasses 368.25+ for mechanical structure of a
    coil in a color covergence circuit; and in general with electromagnetically
    controlled sweeping of the cathode ray.


CLS 335/214
TXT Subject matter under subclass 213 including electric or magnetic shielding
    means in combination with the coil structure for shielding at least part of
    the beam deflecting means from external electric or magnetic fields, or for
    preventing the coil of the deflecting means from emanating undesired
    electric or magnetic fields.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202,    for electromagnetic switch with electric or magnetic shielding
    means.

    301,    for shielding means in combination with magnets or electromagnetic
    relays not particularly related to electron or ionic beam deflection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 35 for shields or
    screens, per se, of general utility.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 84 for inductor devices provided with
    shield means.


CLS 335/215
TXT Subject matter under subclass 209 wherein a portion of the magnet or
    electromagnet includes material having magnetostriction properties.

    (1)     Note.  Magnetostriction is the property, exhibited by some
    materials, by which their dimensions change when placed in a magnetic field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      above for electromagnetically actuated switches with
    magnetostrictive elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 26 for
    dynamoelectric devices with magnetostrictive material.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power System, subclass 118 for
    magnetostrictive electric motor system.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 20 for inductor devices with deformable
    cores of magnetostrictive material.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 206+ for
    electric circuit for magnetostrictive relay or electromagnet.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclass 168 for this subject matter utilized in underwater transducers
    such as used, for example, in sonar systems.


CLS 335/216
TXT Subject matter under subclass 209 wherein the magnet or electromagnet has a
    superconductive element included therein as an active element of the magnet.

    (1)     Note.  Superconductivity is the property exhibited by some metals,
    alloys and compounds wherein the reduction of the temperature of the
    material to within a few degrees of absolute zero causes a steady fall in
    the resistance of the material until a critical temperature (transition
    temperature) is reached, and then the resistance falls suddenly to zero or
    practically to zero.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass provides for magnets or electromagnets with
    superconductors included therein as an active portion of the magnet or
    electromagnet, but does not provide for superconductors, per se.
    Superconductors are found in various classes, depending upon the type of
    device which the superconductor is used.  See the search notes below for
    other superconductors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217,    for temperature responsive type magnets or electromagnets that do
    not involve super-conductivity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 15.4+ and 125.1
    for superconductor structure.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 155 for super-conductive inductive
    devices with no relatively moving parts.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ for
    electric circuits for electromagnets including super-conductors.


CLS 335/217
TXT Subject matter under subclass 209 wherein the magnet or electromagnet is
    designed or constructed to change its operating characteristics responsive
    to variation in temperature, or includes temperature responsive elements to
    effect such a change.

    (1)     Note.  The temperature responsive element may be, for example, a
    temperature sensitive biasing means or a portion of the magnet such as, for
    example, a shunt means or the core may include temperature sensitive
    material.

    (2)     Note.  The temperature sensitive means may be responsive to ambient
    temperature or responsive to the temperature change due to current flow in
    the magnet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for switches with plural automatic trips including a thermal
    magnetic element.

    43+,    for electromagnetically actuated switches with thermal trips.

    146+,   for multiple contact type switches with thermal current responsive
    means.

    208,    for permanent magnet actuated switches of the thermomagnetic type.

    216,    for superconductive type magnet or electromagnet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 161+ for
    temperature responsive electromagnet with circuit.


CLS 335/218
TXT Subject matter under subclass 217 including means to produce a
    predetermined time interval between the energizing instant and the time of
    operation of the magnet or electromagnet.

    (1)     Note.  The time interval may be determined by a thermal element, a
    dashpot or any other time delay device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28+,    for automatic reclosing or resetting switches with time delay
    means, especially subclass 31 for thermally actuated delay means.

    39+,    for switches with magnetic latch means with time delay means.

    59+,    for retarded or delayed switches in general, particularly subclass
    66 for electrothermal delay means.

    239+,   for nontemperature responsive magnets or electromagnets with time
    delay means.


CLS 335/219
TXT Subject matter under subclass 209 wherein the magnet or electromagnet is
    combined with devices or structures of other art classes, the art device
    being claimed so broadly as to form no basis for classification in the art
    device class.


CLS 335/220
TXT Subject matter under subclass 209 including one or more armatures operated
    by one or more electromagnets.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and the indented subclasses include the
    electromagnet and armature combinations, per se.  For the combination of
    electromagnet with armature and diverse type art device, see subclass 219.

    (2)     Note.  The combination of an electromagnet with armature and
    contacts is excluded from this subclass and is classified above as an
    electromagnetically actuated switch.


CLS 335/221
TXT Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein the armature is actuated when the
    electromagnet is excited with a supply signal of a predetermined frequency
    or range of frequencies.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes electromagnets with armature in which
    the armature is actuated in response to a predetermined change or shift in
    frequency.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4+,     for radio frequency switches such as the T/R type.

    70,     for frequency responsive or synchronous motor operated switches.

    94,     for frequency responsive vibratory reed type switches.

    101,    for alternating current switches responsive to preselected or
    synchronous frequency.

    243,    for alternating current actuated electromagnets with armature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 129
    for frequency responsive transmission or interconnection electrical
    switching systems.

    318,    Electricity:  subclass 147 for electrical circuit for frequency
    responsive relay or electromagnet.


CLS 335/222
TXT Subject matter under subclass 220 including a permanent magnet and a coil
    suspended or positioned within the magnetic field of the permanent magnet
    for relative movement with respect to the permanent magnet; the relative
    movement being caused by interaction of a magnetic field produced in the
    coil and the magnetic field of the permanent magnet.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes the electromagnetic portion of the
    D'Arsonval type galvanometer but does not provide for the complete
    galvanometer which is located in Class 324, Electricity:  Measuring and
    Testing, subclasses 144+, especially subclass 146.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148+,   for electrodynamically actuated switches with moving coils.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 10+ for
    electric generators or motor structure which include subject matter as
    provided for in this subclass.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 76.11+ for
    apparatus for measuring, testing or sensing devices with a moving coil
    especially subclass 146 (see (1) Note above).


CLS 335/223
TXT Subject matter under subclass 220 including plural conductors mounted such
    that at least one conductor is movable relative to the other.

    (1)     Note.  The plural conductors may be plural coils, one of which is
    fixed and the other is movable as in electrodynamometer, wherein the
    movement between the two coils is produced by the interaction of the
    magnetic field of the coils.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass also includes electromagnets wherein the coil
    or core of the electromagnet is movable toward the armature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68+,    for electric motor actuated switches.

    148+,   for electrodynamically actuated switches with moving coils.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 10+ for
    electric generators or motor structure which include subject matter as
    provided for in this subclass.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 76.11+ for
    apparatus for measuring, testing or sensing electricity, per se, using
    relatively movable conductors, see especially subclasses 144+.


CLS 335/224
TXT Subject matter under subclass 223 wherein one of the relatively movable
    conductors induces a current by electromagnetic induction into at least one
    of the other conductors.

    (1)     Note.  The said other conductor may be, for example, an eddy
    current member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 10+ for
    electric generators or motor structure which include subject matter as
    provided for in this subclass.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 76.11+ for
    apparatus for measuring, testing or sensing electricity using relatively
    movable conductors, see especially subclasses 137+.


CLS 335/225
TXT Subject matter under subclass 224 wherein one movable conductor is a
    rotating disk.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272,    for electromagnets with rotating armature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 166+ for
    induction generator or motor structure which may include rotating disk type
    moving conductor and subclass 268 for disc armature structure, per se.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 137+ for electrical
    meters using rotating disk type moving conductors.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ for
    electric circuits for relays and electromagnets having rotating disk type
    movable conductor, especially subclasses 143+.


CLS 335/226
TXT Subject matter under subclass 224 in which one of the conductors is a short
    circuited coil or winding.

    (1)     Note.  The short circuited winding may be of the type which is
    known as a shading coil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    for electromagnetically actuated switches with short circuited
    winding or closed loop.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 172 for motor or
    generator structure with short circuited winding.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, particularly subclasses 750 and
    781+ for motor control systems for shaded pole induction motors.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 137+ for electrical
    meters using short circuited winding.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 76 for the structure of inductive
    devices having a short circuited coil or single conductive member (e.g.,
    rings, bands, discs, etc., of conductive material).


CLS 335/227
TXT Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein the core or armature is designed
    to magnetically saturate within the normal current operating range of the
    device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84+,    for polarity responsive switch with magnetic structure that may be
    saturable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 155+ for the structure of inductive
    regulators of the saturable type.


CLS 335/228
TXT Subject matter under subclass 220 including means to convert the motion of
    the armature into an effective motion of a different type.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes means, such as cams, screws, gears or
    other mechanical movement means to   convert, for example, a reciprocal
    motion of a plunger type armature to a useful rotary motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73,     for motor actuated contacts utilizing eccentric or cam actuator.

    110     and 122+, for multiple contact type electromagnetically actuated
    switches with motion conversion means.

    140,    for step-by-step switch with ratchet and pawl actuator.

    189+,   for switch contact actuator utilizing mechanical linkage.

    261,    for plunger type armature structure or material.

    272,    for rotating armature type electromagnet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclass for various
    motion conversion means, see especially subclasses 99+ for reciprocating to
    or from oscillating motion and subclasses 112+ for rotary to intermittent
    unidirectional motion.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 20+ for
    reciprocating dynamoelectric devices with motion conversion means and
    subclasses 80+ for rotary dynamoelectric machines with motion conversion
    mechanism.


CLS 335/229
TXT Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein the magnetomechanical motive
    device includes a permanent magnet in combination with the electromagnet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137,    for multiple contact electromagnetically actuated switches
    including a permanent magnet.

    153,    for vacuum or hermetically sealed switches with permanent magnet.

    179,    for electromagnetically actuated switches with plural magnets of
    diverse magnetic characteristics, including permanent magnet.

    205+,   for permanent magnet actuated switches.

    222,    for relatively movable coil and permanent magnet such as D'Arsonval
    type devices.

    302+,   for permanent magnet structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, especially subclass 110 for inductor device with
    permanent magnet.


CLS 335/230
TXT Subject matter under subclass 229 wherein the permanent magnet is combined
    with the electromagnet such that the movement of the armature is responsive
    to the direction of current flow in the armature controlling circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78+,    for polarity responsive electromagnetically actuated switches.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 208 for
    electric circuit for polarized relays and electromagnets.


CLS 335/231
TXT Subject matter under subclass 230 wherein the armature or mechanical means
    which is adapted to be moved by the polarized electromagnet, is of a type
    movable to varying positions between two extreme positions, responsive to
    the intensity of the alternating current energizing signal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes polarized electromagnets having
    armatures of the type that are used for loudspeakers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99+,    for alternating current type switches.

    222,    for relatively movable coil and permanent magnet.

    243+,   for alternating current type electromagnets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 143+ for
    electric circuit for alternating current relay or electromagnet.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 147 for similar
    subject matter utilized in phonograph disc recording tone arms.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    177 and 194+.


CLS 335/232
TXT Subject matter under subclass 230 wherein the polarized electromagnet
    actuates plural armatures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119+,   for multiple contact switches utilizing plural armatures.

    184,    for switches with plural magnets and plural reciprocating armatures
    aligned or rigidly connected.

    242,    for electromagnet with time delay means wherein plural armatures
    are selectively retarded.

    259,    for plural plunger type armatures. 265, for nonpolarized type
    plural armatures actuated by single electromagnetic coil.

    267,    for plural electromagnets with plural armatures.


CLS 335/233
TXT Subject matter under subclass 232 including means to lock at least one of
    the armatures of the polarized electromagnet in either the open or closed
    position, responsive to the energization of the electromagnet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21+,    for automatic circuit interrupting type switches with latch means.

    77,     for switches combined with motors, the switch having locking means.

    120,    for multiple contact switches with interlocking plural armatures.

    164,    for switches with manually or gravity operated latch means.

    167+,   for switches with latching means.

    253+,   for electromagnets with armature latch means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 192+ and
    194 for electric circuit for magnets or relays with interlocking or holding
    means.


CLS 335/234
TXT Subject matter under subclass 230 wherein the electromagnet is energized by
    direct current signal, the polarity of which determines the direction of
    flux flow and consequently the movement of the armature.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for polarized electromagnets wherein
    a permanent magnet holds the armature in one position until the
    electromagnet is energized with a direct current signal of the proper
    polarity to produce a flux flow to overcome the attraction of the permanent
    magnet.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass also provides for polarized electromagnets
    wherein the armature normally is in a balanced state and is moved in one
    direction or the other responsive to the polarity of the direct current
    signal applied to the electromagnet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78+,    for polarity responsive electromagnetically actuated switches.

    231,    for polarized electromagnets responsive to varying alternating
    current amplitude.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, for polarity
    responsive switching systems.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 77 for
    reverse phase responsive protective systems, subclasses 78+ for reverse
    energy or current, and subclass 208 for polarized electromagnets with
    circuits.


CLS 335/235
TXT Subject matter under subclass 230 wherein the armature of the polarized
    electromagnet is a vibrating reed or spring bar type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93+,    for switches with vibratory reed type armature.

    203,    for switch armature structure.

    231,    for varying alternating current amplitude responsive polarized
    electromagnets.

    252,    for alternating current type electromagnets with vibrating armature.

    266,    for plural coils with vibrating armatures.


CLS 335/236
TXT Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein the electromagnet includes at
    least two magnetic flux paths, one of which is a secondary or shunt flux
    path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for automatic circuit interrupting switches with shunting contacts.

    211,    for electron or ion beam deflecting magnet with magnetic shunt.

    295,    for permanent magnets with hold strength control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 190 and 191 for
    similar subject matter in dynamoelectric machines.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 50 for electric
    generator having a magnetic shunt.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 133 for inductive devices with plural
    part cores having an adjustable magnetic shunt, and subclasses 160+ for the
    structure of inductive regulators with magnetic shunts.


CLS 335/237
TXT Subject matter under subclass 236 wherein the reluctance of the shunt path
    is adjustable to vary the magnetic flux flow therethrough.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 190 for field
    winding with adjustable shunt and subclass 191 for adjustable magnetic
    field structure.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 133 for inductive devices with plural
    part cores, having an adjustable magnetic shunt.


CLS 335/238
TXT Subject matter under subclass 220 including auxiliary means to move the
    armature, in addition to the electromagnetic means.

    (1)     Note.  The auxiliary means may be, for example, a manual means to
    move the armature into position to be held by the electromagnetic means, or
    an auxiliary means for actuating the armature in case of power failure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for automatic interrupter with automatic combined with manual
    reclosing means.

    164,    for electromagnetic switch with manually operated latch and
    electromagnetic trip.

    186,    for electromagnetic switch combined with manual actuator.


CLS 335/239
TXT Subject matter under subclass 220 including means to produce a
    predetermined time interval between the energizing instant and the time of
    operation of the electromagnet.

    (1)     Note.  The time interval may be determined, for example, by
    reluctance control means or dashpot means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28+,    for automatic reclosing or resetting switches combined with timing
    or delay means.

    39+,    for automatic switches with magnetic latch means having time delay.

    59+,    for retarded or delayed type switches.

    139,    for step-by-step type switches with timing or indexing means.

    218,    for temperature responsive type magnet and electromagnets with time
    delay means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 1.5 for miscellaneous
    escapements.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 141+
    for switching actuation systems with time delay or retardation means.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 195+ for
    electric circuits for relays and electromagnets with time delay.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 124+ for
    escapement mechanisms used in horology.


CLS 335/240
TXT Subject matter under subclass 239 wherein a dashpot means is used to
    provide the time delay.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     for reclosing or resetting latch or trip means for automatic
    circuit interrupter with fluid controlled delay.

    61,     for switches with pneumatic delay means such as dashpot, for
    example.

    62,     for switches with hydraulic delay means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 266+, for a fluid-resistance brake or shock
    absorber of general utility.


CLS 335/241
TXT Subject matter under subclass 239 wherein an auxiliary control coil or
    magnet is used to provide the time delay.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     for switches with magnetic or electromagnetically actuated delay
    means.


CLS 335/242
TXT Subject matter under subclass 239 including plural armatures with time
    delay means for delaying different armatures at different time intervals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for switches with plural sets of contacts selectively or
    differently delayed.

    232+,   for polarized electromagnets with plural armatures.

    259,    for plural plunger type armatures.


CLS 335/243
TXT Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein the electromagnet and armature is
    particularly adapted for operation by alternating current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99+,    for alternating or fluctuating current type switches.

    204,    for through conductor type switch.

    223+,   for relatively movable conductor (dynamometer) type devices.

    231,    for polarized electromagnet responsive to varying alternating
    current amplitude.

    236,    for alternating current type electromagnet with shunt flux path.

    239+,   for alternating current type electromagnet with time delay.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 143+ for
    electric circuit for alternating current relays and electromagnets.


CLS 335/244
TXT Subject matter under subclass 243 including means to cause a phase shift
    between the magnetic flux produced in plural windings or in separate
    portions of the electromagnet.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for electromagnets having plural
    windings and means to apply current of different phase to at least two of
    the plural windings.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass provides for the combination of a two winding
    electromagnet with a dephasing circuit for converting single phase current
    into plural phase current.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass provides for electromagnets wherein the
    electromagnet has sections thereof made of different materials to cause a
    phase of one section to be delayed with respect to the phase of another
    section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247,    for alternating current type electromagnets with chatter or noise
    preventing means which may include phase displacement means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 781+ for induction
    motor system utilizing phase conversion.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 148+ for phase
    conversion circuits.


CLS 335/245
TXT Subject matter under subclass 244 wherein the flux phase displacement is
    obtained by the use of a shading coil.

    (1)     Note.  A shading coil is a short-circuited coil in which the
    circulating current lags behind the flux which induces the current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for switches with chatter or noise preventing means which may
    include shading coils.

    247,    for electromagnets with chatter or noise preventing means including
    shading coils.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 172 for
    alternating current dynamoelectric devices with shading means.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ for
    electric circuits for alternating current electromagnets with shading coils.


CLS 335/246
TXT Subject matter under subclass 244 having plural windings in the
    electromagnet and having means to apply current of different phase to the
    different windings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for polyphase type automatic circuit interrupters.

    102,    for alternating current switches of the polyphase type.


CLS 335/247
TXT Subject matter under subclass 243 including means to prevent or decrease
    chatter or hum noise of the armature.

    (1)     Note.  The chatter or hum noise of the armature is caused by
    vibration of the armature relative to the stop means. One cause of this
    type of vibration is alternating current relays in the alternations of the
    current when the relay is energized.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for automatic circuit interrupting switches with vibration
    preventing means.

    90,     for periodic switches with vibrating damping means.

    104,    for alternating current switches with chatter or bounce preventing
    means.

    157+,   for switches with operation inhibiting means.

    193,    for contact actuator with vibration, bounce or vibration prevention
    means.

    244+,   for alternating current magnets with flux phase displacement means
    which may also prevent vibration or chatter.

    271,    for armature mounting means with vibration preventing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 560+ for resilient supports.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 100 for inductor devices (e.g.,
    transformers and inductive reactors) having vibration control.


CLS 335/248
TXT Subject matter under subclass 247 wherein the chatter or noise preventing
    means include spring or cushion type vibration absorbers.


CLS 335/249
TXT Subject matter under subclass 247 wherein the armature is specially
    constructed or mounted to prevent vibration noise.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257,    for plunger type armatures with vibration preventing means.

    271,    for armature mounting means with vibrating preventing means.

    277,    for electromagnets specially mounted or enclosed to prevent shock
    or vibration.


CLS 335/250
TXT Subject matter under subclass 243 including significant details of the
    alternating current coil construction or coil mounting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282,    for coil structure or material for electromagnet and armature not
    specially constructed for operation by alternating current.

    299+,   for coil structure or material in general.


CLS 335/251
TXT Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein the armature is in the form of a
    solenoid core or plunger.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52+,    for conductive liquid fluid type switches with piston or plunger.

    131,    for multiple contact switch with reciprocating armature.

    255+,   for nonalternating current type electromagnets with plunger type
    armature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 160+ for
    electric circuits for plunger type alternating current electromagnets.


CLS 335/252
TXT Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein the armature of the alternating
    current electromagnet is mounted to have a back and forth or vibration
    movement responsive to the alternation of the alternating current.

    (1)     Note.  The armature may vibrate because the electromagnet is
    supplied with alternating current, or the armature may vibrate because the
    alternating current is periodically interrupted as, for example, by an
    interrupter switch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87+,    for periodic (e.g., vibrator) switches particularly subclasses 93+
    and 95+ for vibrating armature structures.

    215,    for magnetostrictive type electromagnets with vibrating armature.


CLS 335/253
TXT Subject matter under subclass 220 including armature latch means responsive
    to movement of an armature to latch or hold said armature or another
    armature in a particular position.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for electromagnets with plural
    armatures wherein the movement of one armature actuates a latch means to
    prevent the operation of another armature.

    (2)     Note.  The armatures of this subclass may be locked in the open or
    closed position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21+,    for automatic circuit interrupters with latch or trip means.

    77,     for motor actuated switches with latch.

    113,    for multiple contact automatic telephone type switch with latch.

    160+,   for interlocking switches.

    167+,   for switches with latching means.

    233,    for polarized electromagnet with latching means.

    274,    for magnetic armature holding or locking means such as magnetic
    biasing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 483 for mechanical locking
    or interlocking means for machine elements and subclasses 527+ for detent
    type locking means.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 50 for
    interlocking switches.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 194 for
    control circuits for electromagnetic devices including a holding means.


CLS 335/254
TXT Subject matter under subclass 253 wherein the armature latch means is
    positioned in the latch or unlatch position by the attractive or repulsive
    force of an energized coil winding.

    (1)     Note.  The latch control winding is usually an auxiliary winding
    which does not control the operation of the armature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170,    for switches with magnetically operated latch means.

    274,    for magnetic armature holding or locking means such as a magnetic
    biasing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 194 for
    control circuits for electromagnetic devices including a holding means.


CLS 335/255
TXT Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein the armature is in the form of a
    core or plunger mounted for movement within the coil or solenoid of the
    electromagnet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52+,    for conductive liquid type switches with magnetic plunger or piston.

    217,    for temperature responsive electromagnets with plunger type
    armature.

    239,    for time delay electromagnet with plunger type armature.

    251,    for alternating current electromagnet with plunger type armature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, subclass 3 for electromagnetic
    solenoid means for linearly moving a magnetic projectile through the barrel
    of a projecting device.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 14 for linear
    motor of the solenoid and core type, subclasses 23+, 30 and 34+ for
    dynamoelectric device with reciprocating plungers.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 130+ for inductor with relatively
    movable core and coil, particularly subclass 136 for inductor with
    telescoping core and coil.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ for
    control circuit for plunger type relays or electromagnets.


CLS 335/256
TXT Subject matter under subclass 255 wherein the electromagnet has plural
    coils that control a single plunger type armature.

    (1)     Note.  The plural coils may be separately energized or may be
    simultaneously energized.

    (2)     Note.  The plural coils may be arranged so that the armature is
    moved in one direction or the other, depending upon which coil is energized.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266+,   for nonplunger type armature controlled by plural coils.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 34+ for
    dynamoelectric devices with plunger controlled by plural coils.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 210 for
    control circuits for relays and electromagnets with plural coils.


CLS 335/257
TXT Subject matter under subclass 255 including means to absorb the shock of
    the armature when coming to rest against an armature stop, thereby
    preventing vibration of the armature.

    (1)     Note.  The shock absorber means may be a spring means or other
    resilient material serving as a cushion to stop the armature movement with
    minimum of armature vibration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for automatic circuit interrupters with undesirable motion
    prevention means.

    104,    for alternating current switches with vibration preventing means.

    193,    for switches with vibration or bounce preventing means.

    247,    for alternating current electromagnet with chatter or noise
    preventing means.

    271,    for electromagnet armature mounting means with armature bounce or
    vibration preventing means.

    277,    for electromagnet mounting arrangement with shock absorption.


CLS 335/258
TXT Subject matter under subclass 255 including means to adjust the distance of
    the armature movement when the electromagnet is energized.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes adjustable armature stop means or
    adjustable biasing means for determining the distance the plunger type
    armature moves into the solenoid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273,    for adjusting means for nonplunger type armature.

    274,    for electromagnet armature biasing means or bias adjustment means.


CLS 335/259
TXT Subject matter under subclass 255 including plural plunger type armatures.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes plural plunger type armatures
    operated by a single electromagnetic coil.

    (2)     Note.  Also included in this subclass are plural electromagnetic
    coils each operating one or more plunger type armatures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    267,    for electromagnets having plural coils and plural armatures that
    are not plunger type armatures.


CLS 335/260
TXT Subject matter under subclass 255 wherein the plunger type armature of the
    electromagnet is enclosed in a sealed moisture or dust proof enclosure.

    (1)     Note.  The sealed moisture-proof case may enclose the armature only
    or it may enclose the entire electromagnet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52+,    for plunger operated conductive liquid switches.

    151,    for vacuum or hermetically sealed switches.

    202,    for switches with housing means.

    278,    for electromagnets with casing or enclosure.


CLS 335/261
TXT Subject matter under subclass 255 including details of the structure of the
    plunger type armature, details of the material of which the armature is
    made, or details of both the structure and the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203,    for switches with significant armature structure.

    251,    for alternating current electromagnet with plunger type armature
    construction or mounting means.

    279+,   for electromagnets with significant armature structure, of types
    other than plunger type armatures.


CLS 335/262
TXT Subject matter under subclass 261 including means to center or align the
    plunger type armature in the solenoid coil or means to guide the plunger
    during its movement relative to the coil when the coil is energized.


CLS 335/263
TXT Subject matter under subclass 261 including means in combination with the
    plunger type armature to prevent rotation of the armature relative to the
    solenoid coil or casing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262,    for electromagnets with plunger type armature having centering,
    aligning or guide means which may also serve to prevent rotation of the
    armature relative to the solenoid coil or casing.


CLS 335/264
TXT Subject matter under subclass 261 wherein the plunger type armature
    includes a plurality of sections, at least one of said sections being
    movable relative to another section.


CLS 335/265
TXT Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein plural armatures are located with
    respect to a coil such that each armature is operated when the coil is
    energized.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119+,   for multiple contact switches with plural armatures.

    232+,   for polarized electromagnets with plural armatures.

    242,    for electromagnet with plural armatures selectively retarded.

    259,    for plural plunger type armatures which may be operated by a single
    coil winding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ and
    appropriate subclasses for control circuits for electromagnetic devices
    having plural armatures.


CLS 335/266
TXT Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein the electromagnets includes
    plural coils or magnets arranged to operate at least one armature.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this subclass and the indented
    subclasses, the movement of at least one armature is controlled by the
    magnetic flux produced by two or more coils or magnets.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8+,     for multipole or polyphase automatic circuit breakers.

    92,     for periodic switches with plural actuating magnets.

    102,    for polyphase alternating current type switches.

    103,    for alternating current switches with plural flux sources.

    136+,   for multiple contact switches with plural magnet or coil means.

    149,    for electrodynamically actuated switches with plural coils.

    177+,   for switches with plural magnets or flux sources.

    207,    for switches with plural permanent magnets.

    229+,   for electromagnet and permanent magnet with armature.

    246,    for alternating current electromagnet with plural flux displacement
    windings.

    256,    for electromagnets with plural plunger type armatures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 210 for
    control circuits for relays and electromagnets with plural coils.


CLS 335/267
TXT Subject matter under subclass 266 including plural armatures.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this subclass, at least one of the
    plural armatures is responsive to the magnetic flux of two or more of the
    magnetic coils or magnets.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119+,   for automatic telephone type switches with plural armatures.

    184,    for plural magnet switches with plural integral reciprocating
    armatures.

    232+,   for polarized electromagnets with plural armatures.

    259,    for electromagnets with plural plunger type armatures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ and
    appropriate subclasses for control circuits for electromagnetic devices
    with plural armatures.


CLS 335/268
TXT Subject matter under subclass 266 wherein the plural coils of the
    electromagnet can be energized independently of each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107+,   for multiple contact switches with the contacts being selectively
    actuated.

    256,    for electromagnets with plural coils and single plunger type
    armature.


CLS 335/269
TXT Subject matter under subclass 220 including:  armature mounting means;
    means forming part of the armature; means operating with the armature or a
    combination of these means to balance the armature so that it is
    insensitive to acceleration or deceleration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for automatic circuit interrupter with contact rebound or other
    undesirable motion prevention means.

    157+,   for switches with shock resistant means.

    193,    for switches with contact vibration, bounce or chatter prevention
    means.

    257,    for plunger type armatures with shock absorbing means.

    271,    for armature mounting means with vibration preventing means.

    277,    for electromagnets constructed or mounted to prevent shock,
    vibration or bounce.


CLS 335/270
TXT Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein the subject matter includes
    details of the armature mounting means.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes armature that are statically balanced
    by placing the pivot of the armature at the center of gravity of the
    armature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249,    for armature mounting to prevent chatter or noise.

    251,    for alternating current electromagnet with plunger type armature.

    255,    for direct current electromagnet with plunger type armature.

    279+,   for armature shape, structure or material in general.


CLS 335/271
TXT Subject matter under subclass 270 including means to prevent vibration of
    the armature when it contacts an armature stop.

    (1)     Note.  The means to prevent vibration of the armature may include,
    for example, fluid type rebound damping means, elastic or resilient
    material or weight on the armature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for automatic circuit interrupting switches with contact rebound or
    other undesirable motion preventing means.

    90,     for periodic switches with vibration damping means.

    104,    for alternating current switches with chatter, bounce or vibration
    preventing means.

    157+,   for switches with operation inhibiting means (shock resistant).

    193,    for switches with contact actuating means with vibration bounce or
    chatter prevention means.

    247,    for alternating current electromagnets with chatter or vibration
    preventing means.

    257,    for plunger type armature with shock absorbing means.

    277,    for electromagnets mounted to prevent or absorb shock.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 560+ for resilient supports.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 100 for inductor devices (such as
    transformers and inductive reactors) with vibration control means.


CLS 335/272
TXT Subject matter under subclass 270 wherein the armature is in the form of a
    disk or a cylindrical member and is mounted so that when the electromagnet
    is energized, the armature revolves on its support or about its center,
    within a plane perpendicular to the support means.

    (1)     Note.  The rotation of the armature may be a complete revolution or
    a partial revolution.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for armatures mounted for
    pivotal movement such that the movement of the armature is not confined to
    a plane perpendicular to the support means, as in subclass 276, below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68+,    for rotary electric motor actuated switches.

    100,    for alternating current switch with rotating induction or eddy
    current member.

    125,    for multiple contact switches with rotary armature.

    225,    for electromagnets with relatively movable conductors including a
    rotating disk type armature member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, appropriate subclasses for
    rotary electric dynamoelectric machine structure, especially subclasses
    261+ for rotor structures.


CLS 335/273
TXT Subject matter under subclass 270 including means to adjust the position of
    the armature relative to the core or armature stop means.

    (1)     Note.  The distance between the armature and the core element may
    be adjusted by changing the position of the armature or by changing the
    position of the core element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     for periodic switch with adjustable armature.

    144,    for switch with electrothermal actuator with armature positioning
    or adjusting means.

    258,    for plunger type armature with stroke adjustment means.

    274,    for armature biasing or bias adjustment means.


CLS 335/274
TXT Subject matter under subclass 270 including significant details of the
    armature biasing means or including significant means for adjusting the
    armature biasing means.

    (1)     Note.  Bias as used in this class refers to unidirectional force
    applied by a spring, a permanent magnet or an electromagnet acting on an
    armature, which tends to hold the armature in a given position.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes magnetically biased armatures,
    wherein a permanent magnet or an electromagnet is used to apply biasing
    force to the armature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    for automatic circuit interrupting devices with contact biasing.

    192,    for switches with contact biasing means.

    253+,   for electromagnets with armature latch means.

    269,    for electromagnets biased to be dynamically balanced.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 142
    for switching systems with switch locking, holding or braking means.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 194 for
    control circuits for electromagnetic devices including a holding means.


CLS 335/275
TXT Subject matter under subclass 270 wherein the armature is attached to its
    support means by a hinge type mounting arrangement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    276,    for pivot support type armature mounting means.


CLS 335/276
TXT Subject matter under subclass 270 wherein the armature is mounted upon a
    support such that it has a pivotal movement toward or away from the
    magnetic core or stop means when energized.

    (1)     Note.  Pivotal movement as used here refers to armatures, usually
    elongated members supported at a point intermediate its ends to provide an
    up and down or back and forth movement of the armature, such as seesaw
    fashion; or the elongated armature member is supported at one end such as
    with a pivotal pin and the movement of the armature is perpendicular to the
    axis of the pivot means.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass provides for elongated center pivot type
    armature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128+,   multiple contact switches with pivotal armature.

    181,    for switches with plural magnets with pivoted armature.

    272,    for electromagnets with rotating disk or cylindrical armature.

    275,    for hinge type armature support.


CLS 335/277
TXT Subject matter under subclass 220 including means to prevent vibration or
    shock in the electromagnet.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes means for mounting the electromagnet
    or the electromagnet casing with resilient or cushion means to prevent
    vibration from reaching the electromagnet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157+,   for switches with operation inhibiting means (shock resistant).

    271,    for electromagnet armature bounce or vibration preventing means.

    278,    for electromagnet casing or enclosure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 560+ for resilient supports.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 100 for inductor devices (such as
    transformers and inductive reactors) with vibration control means.


CLS 335/278
TXT Subject matter under subclass 220 including structure of a casing or
    enclosure for the electromagnet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151+,   for vacuum or hermetically sealed switches.

    162,    for plural switches with unitary housing, support or flux path.

    202,    for switches with significant housing or support means.

    260,    for plunger type electromagnets with sealed enclosure or casing.

    292,    for hermetically sealed or moisture proofed lifting or attracting
    electromagnet.

    294,    for lifting or attracting electromagnet with outer casing or
    housing.

    299,    for particular magnetic coil structure with casing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 17+ for boxes
    and housings with fluid or vacuum and subclasses 50+ for housings in
    general for electrical apparatus.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 90 for inductors with outer casing or
    housing.


CLS 335/279
TXT Subject matter under subclass 220 including significant details of the
    armature shape, structure or material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55+,    for conductive liquid type switches with significant armature
    structure.

    80+,    for polarity responsive switches with armature structure.

    95+,    for periodic switch armature structure.

    124,    for multiple contact switches with significant armature structure.

    203,    for switches with significant armature structure.

    249,    for armature structure to prevent chatter or noise.

    261+,   for electromagnets with plunger type armature structure.


CLS 335/280
TXT Subject matter under subclass 279 wherein the significant armature
    structure comprises spherical balls or elements, metallic filings or fine
    granular material.


CLS 335/281
TXT Subject matter under subclass 220 including significant magnetic core or
    pole shape, structure or material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84+,    for magnetic structure in polarity responsive switches.

    91,     for actuating magnet structure or material in periodic switches.

    153,    for permanent magnet structure in vacuum or hermetically sealed
    switches.

    296+,   for magnet structure or material.

    297+,   for core structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses, especially subclass 83
    for structure of core forms or casing for various inductor devices;
    subclass 212 for structure and assembly of plural cores for inductor
    devices, and subclasses 233+ for core structure and composition in general.


CLS 335/282
TXT Subject matter under subclass 220 including significant details relating to
    the shape or structure of the coil or to the material of the coil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213+,   for the structure of electron or ion beam deflecting magnets.

    250,    for alternating current switch with particular coil structure.

    255+,   for electromagnets with plunger type armature with particular coil
    structure or material.

    299+,   for coil structure or material in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for inductor device coil
    structure.


CLS 335/283
TXT Subject matter under subclass 209 including magnetic means for maintaining
    a blade such as a knife or razor blade in a sharp, burr free condition.

    (1)     Note.  Generally the cutting edge of the blade is held flat against
    the face of a magnet or in the field of the magnet for the purpose of
    straightening out the microscopic burrs on the cutting edge of the blade.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 35+ for razors having means to facilitate the
    sharpening of their blades (Note especially subclass 36) and subclasses
    138+ for other cutting tools combined with a sharpening means.

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclasses 81 through 89.2 for
    tool sharpeners.

    132,    Toilet, subclass 292 for toilet kits having as part thereof magnet
    sharpening means.

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, appropriate subclasses for blade and tool
    handles having magnetic holding means.

    451,    Abrading, subclass 45 for a process of sharpening a cutting blade
    by abrading means.


CLS 335/284
TXT Subject matter under subclass 209 including means for magnetizing or
    demagnetizing magnets or electromagnets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 607+ for methods of making permanent
    magnets not elsewhere classified.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 101
    for control or removal of residual or permanent magnetism.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 200 for magnetic
    testing and measuring.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 143+ for
    control circuits for electromagnetic devices including magnetizing or
    demagnetizing the magnetic field, and subclass 267 for demagnetizing
    systems and processes.


CLS 335/285
TXT Subject matter under subclass 209 including magnetic means for holding a
    device, which is separate from the magnetic means, in a desired position.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes holding type magnets with means to
    remove the object from the magnet, such as a lever element to lift the
    object away from the holding magnet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 57 and 58 for cleaning devices that utilize magnets
    and electromagnets.

    248,    Supports, subclass 206 for specially mounted brackets utilizing
    magnets.

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclass 8 for
    magnetic work holders.  Class 269 is the residual locus for patents to a
    device for clamping, support and/or holding an article in position to be
    operated on or treated.

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, appropriate subclasses for chucks or sockets
    actuated by electromagnetic means.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 65.5 and 88
    for magnetic material handing devices.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclass 12 for electrical connectors with
    magnet or suction cup.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 246+ for a magnetic rotary work holding device.


CLS 335/286
TXT Subject matter under subclass 285 including means adapted to be placed
    between the magnet and the workpiece or the object being held by the magnet.

    (1)     Note.  The adaptor may be made of a nonmagnetic material and be
    used merely to prevent, for example, the workpiece from rocking, or it may
    be of magnetic material and be used to bridge the flux from the magnet into
    the workpiece.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass also includes magnetic chucks that are angular
    in shape to facilitate holding the workpiece.


CLS 335/287
TXT Subject matter under subclass 286 wherein the holding magnet chuck is
    adjustable to various angles so that the workpiece can be held at various
    elevations.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes adjustable magnetic chucks that are
    angular in shape to facilitate holding the workpiece in various angular
    positions.


CLS 335/288
TXT Subject matter under subclass 285 wherein the holding magnet is a magnetic
    chuck or work-holding type which can be rotated while holding the workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  The rotary type magnetic chuck may include permanent magnets
    or electromagnets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ for
    electric circuit for rotary type electromagnetic chucks.


CLS 335/289
TXT Subject matter under subclass 285 wherein the holding magnet is an
    electromagnet.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes electromagnetic chuck type magnets
    for holding workpiece in a desired position while performing a work
    operation upon the workpiece such as, for example, grinding or cutting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286,    for holding magnet with workpiece to magnet adapter using
    electromagnets.

    288,    for rotary type holding magnet using electromagnets.


CLS 335/290
TXT Subject matter under subclass 289 wherein the electromagnet type work
    holder includes means to control the magnetic flux of the electromagnet
    such as, for example, shunt means or circuit controlling switch means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237,    for magneto-mechanical motive device type electromagnet with
    adjustable shunt path.

    295,    for permanent magnet type work holding device with magnetic hold
    control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ for
    control circuits for an electromagnetic chuck.


CLS 335/291
TXT Subject matter under subclass 289 including electromagnets which are
    utilized for lifting articles such as pig-iron or for pulling articles such
    as hair pins from the hair.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290,    for lifting type electromagnets with control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 328 for drilling bit or
    bit element which is magnetized or with magnet element.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 38
    through 40 and 212 through 232 for magnetic assorting of solid materials.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 606 for an elevator or hoist
    and loading or unloading means therefor and wherein a magnet (e.g., an
    electromagnet) lifts an object of magnetically-attractive material for
    seizure by a grapple; and subclass 737 for a vertically swinging load
    support provided with a load-grasping member which may be in the nature of
    a magnet (e.g., an electromagnet).

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 9+ for magnetic energy applied to the body for
    therapeutic purposes, especially subclass 11 for probes for removing
    magnetic particles from the body.


CLS 335/292
TXT Subject matter under subclass 291 wherein the lifting or pulling type
    electromagnet is hermetically sealed to keep moisture, dust or other
    foreign particles from the magnet elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151+,   for vacuum or hermetically sealed type switches.

    162,    for plural switches with unitary housing.

    202,    for switches with housing or support means.

    260,    for hermetically sealed electromagnet with plunger type armature.

    278,    for electromagnet with sealed casing or enclosure.

    294,    for lifting or holding electromagnet with outer casing or housing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 17+ for boxes
    and housings with fluid or vacuum and subclasses 50.5+ for hermetic sealed
    envelope type boxes and housings for electrical devices.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 90+, for inductor with outer casing or
    housing.


CLS 335/293
TXT Subject matter under subclass 291 wherein the lifting or pulling magnet is
    enclosed within a casing such that it can be held by hand when it is in use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 66 for inductor device supported by a
    handle.


CLS 335/294
TXT Subject matter under subclass 291 wherein the lifting or pulling
    electromagnet is enclosed in a special housing or casing.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes lifting type magnets enclosed in
    sweeper type housing for rolling along the floor to pick up hairpins or
    other metallic particles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151+,   for vacuum or hermetically sealed switches.

    162,    for plural independent switches with unitary housing, support or
    flux path.

    202,    for switches with significant housing or support means.

    278,    for casing or housing for electromagnet with armature.

    292,    for hermetically sealed lifting type electromagnet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 17+ for boxes
    and housing with fluid or vacuum and subclasses 50+ for boxes and houses in
    general for electrical devices.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 90+ for inductor with outer casing or
    housing.


CLS 335/295
TXT Subject matter under subclass 285 including means to control or vary the
    holding strength of the magnet.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes permanent magnets with means to
    divert or shunt the magnetic flux away from the workpiece being held, to
    thereby magnetically release the workpiece for removal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for automatic circuit interrupting switches with shunting contacts.

    211,    for electron or ion beam deflecting magnets with magnet shunt.

    236+,   for electromagnets with shunt means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 190 for
    dynamoelectric machine winding or core structure with magnetic shunt.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 133 and 160+ for inductive devices
    with adjustable magnetic shunts and inductive regulators with magnetic
    shunts, respectively.


CLS 335/296
TXT Subject matter under subclass 209 including magnets or electromagnets, per
    se, with significant details of magnet structure, shape or configuration,
    or with details of the type of material of the magnet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 602.1+ for process of making
    electromagnets.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 122.1+ for magnetic alloys, and subclasses 228+ for
    consolidated metal powder compositions which may be magnetic.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 100+ for treatment of magnetic material.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 62.51+ for magnetic material compositions.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 218 for core structure with magnetic
    orientation of magnetic core material; and subclass 225 for coils of
    special configuration.

    428,    Stock Material to Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 611 for metallic
    stock having its magnetic properties coordinated with its shape, and
    subclass 928 for a collection of magnetic metallic stock materials.


CLS 335/297
TXT Subject matter under subclass 296 including significant details of the
    magnetic core structure or material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84+,    for magnetic structure of polarity responsive switches.

    91+,    for actuating magnet structure of periodic switches.

    103,    for alternating current switch with plural magnetic actuating
    structures.

    177+,   for switches utilizing plural magnets or flux sources.

    211,    for electron or ion beam deflecting magnets with magnetic shunt
    structure.

    236+,   for electromagnet with magnet shunt structure.

    281,    for electromagnet with armature having details of the core
    structure or material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 83 for structure of core forms or casing
    for various inductor devices, subclass 212 for structure and assembly of
    plural cores for inductor devices, and subclasses 233+ for core structure
    and composition in general.


CLS 335/298
TXT Subject matter under subclass 297 including means to adjust the position of
    the magnetic core element to vary the airgap spacing.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also includes electromagnets with means for
    adjusting the position of the connecting back strap relative to the
    magnetic cores to vary the reluctance of the electromagnet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86,     for polarity responsive switches with adjusting means.

    212,    for electron or ion beam deflecting magnets with adjustable
    magnetic element.

    237,    for electromagnet and armature with adjustable shunt path.

    273,    for electromagnets with means to adjust the position of the
    armature with respect to the core element.

    287,    for work holding magnet with angularly adjustable fixture.

    295,    for work holding magnet with magnetic hold control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for inductors with
    adjustable cores, especially subclasses 132+ for inductors with relatively
    movable core parts.


CLS 335/299
TXT Subject matter under subclass 296 including significant details of the
    magnetic coil structure or material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213+,   for electron or ion beam deflecting type coil structures.

    250,    for alternating current electromagnet and armature with particular
    coil construction or mounting means.

    282,    for electromagnets with significant magnetic coil structure or
    material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for coils of various
    structural shape or configuration or coils made of various types of
    materials.


CLS 335/300
TXT Subject matter under subclass 299 including, means to cool the coil of the
    electromagnet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 15.1 for fluid or
    vacuum cooling means for electrical apparatus.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 55+ for inductor devices with
    temperature modifier means.


CLS 335/301
TXT Subject matter under subclass 296 including electric or magnetic shielding
    means in combination with the magnet structure for shielding at least part
    of the magnet from electric or magnetic fields, or for preventing the coil
    of the magnet from emanating undesired electric or magnetic fields.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202,    for electromagnetic switch with electric or magnetic shielding
    means.

    214,    for electron or ion beam deflecting type electromagnet with
    shielding means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 35+ for
    electric or magnetic shields or screens, per se, or general utility.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 84 for inductor devices provided with
    electric or magnetic shield means.


CLS 335/302
TXT Subject matter under subclass 296 wherein the particular magnet structure
    relates to permanent magnets.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153,    for vacuum or hermetically sealed type switch with permanent magnet
    structure.

    179,    for switch with electromagnet and permanent magnet structure.

    222,    for relatively movable coil and permanent magnet structure.

    229+,   for magneto-mechanical motive device with permanent magnets.

    283,    for blade sharpening or conditioning type permanent magnets.

    295,    for work or object holding permanent magnet with magnet hold
    control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 607+, for processes of mechanical
    manufacture of permanent magnets.

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 355+, for magnetic compasses.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, appropriate subclasses for ferrous alloys useful in permanent
    magnets.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 65 for permanent magnet valve
    actuator devices.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structures, especially subclasses
    152+ for the structure of permanent magnets utilized in dynamoelectric
    machines and subclass 181 for field winding comprising electromagnet and
    permanent magnet structure.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 48 for testing
    permanent magnets.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 110 for inductor including permanent
    magnet structure.


CLS 335/303
TXT Subject matter under subclass 302 wherein the permanent magnetic material
    is enclosed or embedded within a flexible plastic, cloth or tape.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes permanent magnets wherein the
    magnetic particles are enclosed between layers of cloth, plastic or tape or
    is embedded within the cloth, plastic or tape.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 116+ for insulated handles with
    permanent magnets embedded or enclosed therein.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 107+ for magnetic
    weather seal for convertible automobile tops.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 131+,
    for record carriers which may include magnetic particles coated on or
    embedded in a flexible plastic base.


CLS 335/304
TXT Subject matter under subclass 302 wherein permanent magnets are mounted or
    arranged to prevent or substantially reduce stray leakage flux across the
    airgap.


CLS 335/305
TXT Subject matter under subclass 302 wherein the permanent magnet is in the
    form of a plug adapted to be threaded or otherwise inserted into a liquid
    containing vessel, such as a crankcase, for collecting metallic particles
    suspended in the liquid for removal from the crankcase or container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 212 and
    213+ for magnetic classifying, separating or assorting means.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 222+ for magnetic
    purification or separation means.

    600,    Surgery, subclass 11 for magnetic probes used to remove magnetic
    particles from the body.


CLS 335/306
TXT Subject matter under subclass 302 including plural permanent magnets.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207,    for permanent magnet actuated switches with plural permanent
    magnets.


CLS 336/
TTL INDUCTOR DEVICES

CLS 336/
TXT

    I.      DEFINITION OF TERMS USED:

    CONDUCTOR

    A body designed to have an electric current flowing therein.  For the
    purpose of classification, a magnetic core is distinguished from a
    conductor.  A conductor is designed to be connected to a source of
    electromotive force, or to have induced therein a voltage by inductive
    coupling from a current carrying conductor.  A conductor, when used as a
    coil, and connected either directly or by mutual inductance to a source of
    electromotive force, creates a magnetic field due to the flow of current in
    the conductor.  See the definition of core.

    COIL

    A conductor which creates a magnetic field due to the flow of current
    therein.  It may be formed into one or more convolutions or turns, or have
    only a partial turn, or be straight.

    CLOSED COIL

    is a coil which is not designed to be connected to an external source or to
    a circuit, but which has the ends of the coil connected together so that a
    magnetic field can induce current therein which current flows in the closed
    path formed by the closed coil and generates a magnetic field in opposition
    to the current inducing field.

    COIL AXIS

    That path along which a unit magnetic pole would experience a maximum force
    when a current is caused to flow in the coil conductor.  For example, in a
    long, uniform, single layer cylindrical coil, the coil axis corresponds to
    the geometrical axis of the coil.

    WINDING

    A coil or plurality of coils which are interconnected, or designed to be
    interconnected, having terminal means adapted to be connected to an
    external source of current, to an output or load circuit, or to some other
    circuit.

    INDUCTIVE COUPLING

    The coupling between separate coils or windings due to the electromagnetic
    induction between the coils or windings.

    CORE

    A magnetic or magnetizable body having a magnetic permeability greater than
    one.  The proximate purpose of a core is to increase the inductance of an
    associated coil by increasing the number of magnetic flux interlinkages of
    the coil.  Although the material of the core is electrically conductive
    such electrical conductivity is usually minimized by using magnetic
    material of high resistivity in the form of bundles of fine wires, stacks
    of thin laminations insulated from each other or a suspension of iron
    powder in an electrically insulating binder.

    MAGNETIC BODY

    Same as "CORE" above.

    INDUCTOR

    An impedance device comprising a coil means with or without core means for
    introducing inductance into an electric circuit and wherein the inherent
    capacitive reactance thereof does not resonate with the inductance of the
    coil within the frequency range of the electric current adapted to flow
    therethrough.  Both transformers and inductive reactors are included within
    the meaning of "inductor".  Excluded are inductor devices that are designed
    to do more than introduce inductance into a circuit.  Examples are:
    inductor devices particularly designed to produce a magnetic field which
    radiates energy which is not returned to the device, or devices designed to
    produce external mechanical work by electromagnetic action.

    ADJUSTABLE INDUCTOR

    A passive inductor wherein the inductor device includes a movable element
    which may be adjusted to different positions or adjusted to vary its
    physical dimensions to change the effective inductance from one value to
    another.

    Examples of such movable elements are:  a tap changing switch, a
    distortable coil or core, coil length varying means, a movable core and
    movable coupled coils.

    Inductor devices designed to change inductance (1) as a function of the
    current flowing through the inductor winding, or (2) in accordance with a
    magnetic bias applied to the core of the device, or (3) as a function of
    the ambient temperature of the device, and wherein no physical elements of
    the inductor are moved to effect such change in inductance, are not
    considered adjustable under the above definition.  Such variable inductors
    will be found in subclasses 155+ of this class for magnetically saturable
    or high leakage reactance type devices and subclass 179 of this class for
    devices responsive to changes in ambient temperature.

    TRANSFORMER

    An inductor having a plurality of coils or windings in mutually inductive
    relation.

    PASSIVE INDUCTOR

    An inductor device which contains no source or sink of energy (i.e., an
    active element).  A "sink of energy" as used in this definition is an
    element or network which is designed to absorb energy, by converting
    electrical energy into another form of energy.  Excluded, therefore, are
    variable or adjustable inductance devices in which the change in inductance
    is effected, at least in part, by an active element such as, by way of
    example, continuously rotating machinery (i.e., synchronous or asynchronous
    phase modifier or phase advancer machines) or reactance tube systems having
    space discharge devices with electrode biasing potential sources.

    II.     GENERAL STATEMENT OF THE CLASS SUBJECT MATTER:

    This is the generic class for the structure of inductor devices of the
    passive type.

    III.    INDUCTOR DEVICES HAVING CAPACITANCE OR RESISTANCE:

    A.      WITH CAPACITANCE:  As pointed out above, this class provides for
    inductor devices wherein the inherent capacitive reactance of the inductor
    does not resonate with the inductance of the inductor within the frequency
    range of the electric current adapted to flow therethrough.  Where the
    inductance of the inductor resonates with its inherent capacitive
    reactance, the device is excluded from this class and will be found in
    Class 333, Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 24+, as a
    coupling network, (e.g., filter, delay networks, equalizers, coupling
    transformers), or in Class 334, Tuners, appropriate subclasses as a tuner.

    B.      WITH RESISTANCE:  This class provides for all inductor devices
    having appreciable inductive reactance regardless of the value of the
    inherent resistance of the device within the frequency range of the
    electric current adapted to flow therethrough.  This class does not provide
    for resistors which may have an incidental or undesired inherent inductive
    reactance and which are designed to be used only as resistive impedances.
    For such excluded resistors, see Class 338, Electrical Resistors,
    especially subclasses 61+ for resistors with inductance reducing means.

    C.      INDUCTOR DEVICES IN COMBINATION WITH SEPARATE CAPACITORS OR
    RESISTORS:  This class does not provide for the combination of inductor
    devices and separate capacitors and/or resistors irrespective of whether
    such combined devices are in mere structural arrangement or in circuit
    arrangement with each other.  For the excluded subject matter, see Class
    361, Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 268+,
    especially subclass 270 for the combination of a transformer and capacitor,
    subclasses 331+ for the structure of switchboards and analogous devices
    including the structural combination of plural diverse impedance elements,
    e.g., inductors and capacitors, inductors and resistors, capacitors and
    resistors or any combination of two or more of such elements for which
    provision has not been made elsewhere.  See also the search notes below for
    other classes providing for inductor, inductor and capacitor or resistor
    combinations.

    IV.     INDUCTOR DEVICE STRUCTURE CLASSIFIED ELSEWHERE:

    A.      STATIONARY INDUCTOR DEVICES:  Inductor device coil and core
    structure will be found in Class 361, Electricity:  Electrical Systems and
    Devices, subclasses 268+ for induction or spark coils with capacitors
    and/or circuit makers and breakers of the periodically operated type,
    subclasses 331+, see III, C, above.

    B.      TRANSMISSION LINE SECTIONS WITH DISTRIBUTED PARAMETERS:
    Transmission line sections where the line has distributed inductance and
    capacity with or without effective distributed resistance are classified in
    Class 333, Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 219+ and 245+.
    Note that in subclasses 245+ are resonant long line sections (i.e., with
    distributed inductance and capacity) which are designed to be operated at
    other than resonant frequency for producing the effect of an inductance.
    For example, a short-circuited quarter-wave length line operated at less
    than resonant frequency or an open-circuited line greater than a
    quarter-wave length but less than a half wave length of wave energy acts as
    an inductance.  Also note that subclasses 24+ of Class 333 contains some
    patents relating to adjustable inductor devices which have an appreciable
    inherent capacity.  See section III, A, above.

    C.      ELECTROMAGNETS WITH ARMATURES: Electromagnets of the tractive type
    which include an armature for converting electrical energy into mechanical
    work through the agency of electromagnetic induction are classified in
    Class 335, Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 220+ for electromagnets with armatures.  Note
    that also, Class 335, Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches,
    Magnets, and Electromagnets, subclasses 2+ provides for electromagnetically
    actuated electric switches.

    D.      LOADING COILS:  Class 178, Telegraphy, subclass 46, provides for
    inductor coil structure designed for use in long electric wave transmission
    lines to modify the electric wave propagation characteristics of the lines.

    E.      TELEPHONE INDUCTOR COILS:  Class 379, Telephonic Communications,
    subclasses 443+ and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto provide
    for inductor coils combined with the structure of telephone instruments.
    Also see section IV, I below.

    F.      LOOP ANTENNAS:  Class 343, Communications:  Radio Wave, subclasses
    700+, and especially subclasses 726, 728, 741+, 748, 764, 788, 842, 855,
    and 866+, provides for the structure of inductor coil devices for radiating
    or intercepting radio wave energy in free space.

    G.      DYNAMO ELECTRIC MACHINES:  Class 310, Electrical Generator or Motor
    Structure, appropriate subclasses for the structure of electric motors and
    generators including synchronous condensers, synchronous motors, induction
    motors, dynamotors, rotary converters, metadynes, balancer sets and the
    like.

    H.      ELECTROMAGNETIC ELECTRO-ACOUSTICAL WAVE TRANSDUCERS AND SOUND
    PICK-UPS: Devices which include an electromagnetic device for converting
    electrical energy to sound energy, or vice versa, or which are used in
    electrically recording and/or reproducing sound records or which are used
    to convert the vibrations of a musical instrument into modified electric
    currents, are classified as follows:

    Music instrument transducers, Class 84, Music, subclasses 725 to 729.

    Audible electrical signal producers such as bells, whistles, etc., Class
    340, Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 384+.

    Magnetic recording or reproducing devices, Class 360, Dynamic Magnetic
    Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 110+.

    Electro-mechanical sound recording and/or reproducing devices having a
    stylus for actuating, or actuated by, the electromagnetic device, Class
    369, Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 146+.

    Telephone transmitters and/or receivers, Class 379, Telephonic
    Communications, subclasses 102.07, 110.01, 112, and 114+.

    I.      SIGNAL TRANSMITTERS USING VARIABLE INDUCTOR DEVICES:  For devices
    designed to be selectively actuated to transmit an undulating current for
    signaling purpose and which include means, such as a pendulum, reed, or
    similar vibrating member to vary the inductance of a variable inductor
    device, see Classes:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 47+ for such devices used in telegraph
    multiplex systems and for the multiplex systems.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 825 for selective signaling
    systems, some of which (note particularly Classes 825.70-825.78) may
    utilize variable inductor devices as transmitters, and subclasses 870.31+
    for telemetering systems which utilize variable inductor devices.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 251+ and 352+ for such
    devices designed for use as calling devices for telephone systems.



    K.      GONIOMETERS:  See Class 343, subclasses 431 and 441 for goniometer
    devices for use in direction finding radio systems.  A goniometer is an
    inductor device with three windings, two of which are fixed, and one of
    which is movable, so that the two fixed coils may induce a current into the
    movable coil.  See this Class, 336, subclasses 115+ for similar devices
    used as induction regulators.

    L.      INDUCTOR DEVICES WITH ROTATABLE ELEMENT RECITED BY NAME ONLY IN
    COMBINATION WITH POSITIONING MEANS:  Class 74, subclasses 10+ and the
    subclasses specified in the notes thereto provides for the combination of a
    transformer or inductive reactor having an element (e.g., coil or core)
    designed to be angularly movable in combination with specific mechanical
    means for rotating a shaft for positioning the movable element, where no
    significant structure of the transformer or reactor other than that it has
    an angularly movable part is recited in the claim.  Where the means for
    moving the shaft is not solely mechanical see the search notes to subclass
    10 of Class 74 for the other classes which provide for the combination.
    Where significant reactor or transformer structure is claimed,
    classification is in this class (336).

    M.      INDUCTOR DEVICES OR SYSTEMS UTILIZING HIGH TEMPERATURE
    SUPERCONDUCTING MATERIAL:   Class 505, Superconductor Technology:
    Apparatus, Material, Process, subclasses 150+ for devices or systems
    utilizing high temperature (Tc > 30 K) superconducting material,
    particularly subclasses 211+ for inductors using high temperature
    superconducting material.

    V.      PATTERN CONTROLLED VARIABLE INDUCTOR DEVICES AND PATTERN TRACING
    DEVICES WHICH ACTUATE VARIABLE INDUCTOR DEVICES:  In many of the arts,
    especially in the machine tool arts, there are machines and apparatus
    designed to be controlled in accordance with a pattern.  The control
    pattern may be facsimile of the article to be made or may be a code-type
    pattern or other type of record.  Many of these apparatuses and machines
    disclose that the pattern actuates a variable inductor device to modify the
    electric current in the control system.  A substantially complete listing
    of all the arts which involve pattern control may be found in the search
    notes to Class 178, Telegraphy, subclass 3.  Also see section IV, H, with
    reference to variable inductor devices designed for use in reproducing
    sound records (e.g., phonograph pick-ups). The following classes and
    subclasses are considered to be most likely to include pattern controlled
    variable inductors:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 7 for a metal shaping machine controlled
    by a pattern-actuated senser means, and subclass 81 for a direct pattern
    controlled sheet metal spinning machine.

    82,     Turning, subclasses 11.1+, for pattern controlled turning apparatus
    (e.g., lathes).

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 211+ and 323 for pattern controlled
    coating apparatus.

    142,    Wood Turning, the subclasses indented under the title "copying" and
    subclasses 21, 22, 24, 27+, 30, 37, 38+, 41, and 43+ for pattern controlled
    wood-turning machines.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 144.1+ and 145.1+ for a pattern controlled
    wood working machine.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 58+ for pattern controlled
    metal cutting torches (e.g., oxy-acetylene torches).

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 2+ for a pattern
    controlled gear cutting machine; subclasses 79+ for a pattern controlled
    milling machine; subclasses 125+ for a templet or tracer adapted to be used
    with a milling machine; and subclasses 289+ for a pattern controlled
    planing machine.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 237 for a pattern controlled, rotary type of
    abrading machine.



    VI.     VARIABLE INDUCTOR DEVICES OPERATED BY A CONDITION SENSITIVE MEANS:
    This class provides for adjustable inductor devices where the movement of
    the inductance varying means is operated by a device which responds to a
    condition, such as pressure responsive inductor devices, temperature
    responsive inductor devices, etc., in subclasses 30+.

    There are many classes which provide for such condition responsive devices
    in combination with the electrical system. See section IV, H, above for the
    classification of adjustable inductor devices which have their inductance
    varied in response to sound waves or which are designed for use in
    reproducing sound from a sound record, or which are designed to convert the
    vibrations of a musical instrument to modified electric current. Also see
    section V above for a reference to pattern controlled variable inductor
    devices.

    Other classes which should be searched for condition responsive inductor
    device systems are:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses, for miscellaneous
    apparatus and systems for making nonelectrical, nonchemical and nonoptical
    measurements and tests. In Class 73, the sensing or measuring means may
    actuate an electrical device, as a resistance or inductor device.  In Class
    73, the apparatus and systems are classified on the basis of the
    measurement or test made rather than upon the basis that electrical means
    are used.  See subclasses 763+ for stress or strain measuring apparatus
    wherein the value of an electric current is modified (such as by varying an
    adjustable inductor), particularly subclass 779 for such apparatus with
    specified inductive sensor structure, subclass 301 for liquid level or
    depth gauges of the hydrostatic pressure type having an electrical means
    (such as a variable inductor) actuated by the pressure, subclass 308 for
    float type liquid level or depth gauges which actuate an electro-responsive
    device, subclass 313 for other type liquid level or depth gauges which
    actuate an electro responsive device, subclasses 722 and 728 for fluid
    pressure gauges which include pressure responsive means for actuating a
    variable inductor device.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 5.6 for gyroscopes with
    means (including electrical devices) controlled by the gyroscope for
    sensing the position of the gyroscope and/or its gimbals.

    83,     Cutting, subclass 71, for cutting machine control devices which are
    responsive to tape or card-carried indicia.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, appropriate subclasses for firing
    devices for explosive devices which are actuated by the effect of a
    magnetic field, see subclasses 390+ for marine type drop bombs with such
    ignition means, subclasses 416+ for marine mines with such firing devices,
    subclass 427 for other mines with such firing devices and subclasses 209
    and 211 for the miscellaneous explosive devices with such firing devices.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 212, 213+
    for apparatus for separating solid materials and assorting or segregating
    them according to their diamagnetic or magnetic properties, see subclass
    212 for the apparatus designed to operate due to the diamagnetic properties
    and subclasses 213+ for the apparatus designed to operate due to the
    magnetic properties.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 1+ for electrically
    operated ore detectors (e.g., explosive mine detectors)  which use an
    inductor device as the sensing means (e.g., the inductance is varied by the
    presence of a magnetic body), and subclasses 34+ and 59 for miscellaneous
    electrical testing apparatus using a variable inductor device as the
    sensing element (e.g., the material to be tested varies the inductance of
    the inductor device and magnetic field strength testing).

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 195+ for telemetering
    systems utilizing variable inductor devices (e.g., flux valve) as condition
    sensing or transmitter means, and subclasses 500+ for signaling systems
    (e.g., alarms) automatically responsive to a condition.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 184 for a thermometer
    having a reactive sensing element, and subclass 188 for thermometer with a
    mechanical sensor varying an electrical signal.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 67.1+ for measuring a testing
    devices used for testing the operating conditions of the systems; and
    subclass 226 for measuring or testing devices for particular use with radio
    receivers.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 407+ for electric diagnostic instruments for
    use with humans and which include an inductor device designed to have its
    inductance varied by a condition.

    VII.    ELECTROMAGNETS AND PERMANENT MAGNETS: Electromagnets and permanent
    magnets of general application and electromagnet coils and cores, per se,
    are classified in Class 335, Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches,
    Magnets, and Electromagnets, subclasses 209+ for general application of
    magnets and electromagnets, electromagnetic coils and cores, per se,
    subclasses 285+ for lifting and holding electro and permanent magnets
    (e.g., magnetic chucks).  See 414, Material or Article Handling, subclasses
    606 and 737 for the provision of a load-engaging magnet on certain types of
    load raising or lowering devices, and Class 294, Handling:  Hand and
    Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 65.5 for hand and hoist-line implements
    having a magnetic means for holding or attaching the material to be lifted
    to the lifting handle or hoist-line.

    Electromagnetic devices for heating (e.g., by induction heating) are
    classified in Class 373, Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses
    138+ when combined with furnace structure, and Class 219, Electric Heating,
    subclasses 600+ for inductive heating, subclasses 678+ for microwave
    heating, and subclasses 764+ for capacitive dielectric heating.

    Class 128, Surgery, subclasses 1.3+ provides for electromagnetic devices
    for surgical purposes, including magnetic probes and such magnetic devices
    as are designed to induce electric currents in the human body.

    VIII.   INDUCTOR DEVICE SYSTEMS:

    A.      CURRENT, VOLTAGE AND/OR PHASE CONTROL SYSTEMS:  This class does not
    provide for systems which include an inductive regulator device as a part
    thereof. Class 323, Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, is
    the generic class for systems for controlling the voltage and/or current in
    the system and/or for systems for controlling the phase angle between the
    voltage or current in the system.  See the search notes to the class
    definition of Class 323 for the other classes which provide for electrical
    regulating systems and for systems which include as a part thereof a
    regulating device.

    B.      MISCELLANEOUS TRANSFORMER AND INDUCTOR DEVICE SYSTEMS:  Class 323
    is the generic class for transformer and impedance systems.  See subclass
    355 and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto for the miscellaneous
    inductive reactor device systems.

    C.      INDUCTIVE LOADED TRANSMISSION LINES: Class 178, Telegraphy,
    subclass 45 is the miscellaneous subclass for inductivity loaded
    transmission line systems of the type used signaling systems, and Class
    379, Telephonic Communications, subclasses 414+ provide for inductively
    loaded telephone lines.

    D.      INDUCTIVELY COUPLED SIGNALING SYSTEMS: Signaling systems provided
    with means for transmitting the signaling energy through space by
    electromagnetic induction (e.g., using transformer coils) are classified as
    follows:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 43 for telegraph systems.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclasses 8, 63, 194, for railway
    switch and signal systems having inductive means for transmitting the
    signals to or from moving trains.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 55.1 for telephone systems.



    E.      TRANSMITTING POWER TO VEHICLES: Class 191, Electricity:
    Transmission to Vehicles, subclass 10 for induction systems for
    transmitting electric power to a vehicle.

    IX.     ANTI-INDUCTIVE DEVICES AND SYSTEMS: Class 174, Electricity:
    Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 32+ provides for conductor systems
    having means for reducing or preventing the detrimental effects due to
    either the self inductance of a single conductor or mutual inductance
    between plural conductors.  See the search notes to these subclasses for
    related fields of search.

    Class 178, Telegraphy, subclass 69 provides for telegraph systems with
    means, such as an inductor device, to prevent or reduce inductive effects.

    Class 379, Telephonic Communications, subclasses 398 and 415 provide for
    telephone systems having means, such as an inductor device, to prevent or
    reduce inductive effects.

    Class 307, Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses
    89+ for systems having means for preventing induction or coupling with
    other electrical systems.

    X.      SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 213+ for reactance
    networks, which may be inductive, of the active element type.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 544+ for stock
    materials, e.g., of indefinite length, which are all metal or have adjacent
    metal components, particularly subclasses 592 for stock material in the
    form of a helix or having a helical component.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 129+ for a toy which involves
    magnetic phenonmena in its operation.



    XI.     INDEX TO CLASSES REFERRED TO IN THE PREVIOUS SECTIONS:

    Section No.

    33,     Geometrical Instruments,
    sub. 18, pattern tracing using
    inductor devices        V
    subs. 123, 125+, 174+, 204+, 222+,
    geometrical instruments having means
    to control variable inductor
    devices                                               VI

    72,     Metal Deforming, subs. 7 and 81 for
    pattern-controlled metal shaping        V

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subs. 88.5,
    301, 308, 313, 398, measuring and
    testing apparatus with variable
    inductor as part of the sensing
    means           VI

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism,
    sub. 5.6, gyroscope with variable
    inductor sensing means  VI

            sub. 10, inductor with means to
    rotate a part of the device     IV, L

    82,     Turning, sub. 14, pattern controlled
    lathes          V

    84,     Music, subs. 725 - 729, electro-
    magnetic pick-ups for music
    instruments     IV, H

            sub. 62, pattern tracers        V

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives,
    subs. 7, 18, 19.2, 70.2,
    magnetically controlled ignitors
    for explosives  VI

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subs. 211+ and
    323, pattern controlled coating
    apparatus               V

    142,    Wood Turning, pattern controlled wood turning           V

    144,    Woodworking, subs. 144.1+, 145.1+,
    pattern controlled wood working V

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and
    Insulators, subs. 32+, anti-
    inductive conductors    IX

    178,    Telegraphy, subs. 3+, notes to
    pattern controlled devices
    and systems     V

            sub. 43, space induction telegraphy     VIII,

            D sub. 45, inductive load transmis-
    sion lines              VIII,

            C sub. 46, loading coils for
    transmission lines      IV, D

            sub. 47, variable inductors in
    multiplex telegraphy    IV,I

            sub. 69, anti-inductive telegraph
    systems         IX

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to
    Vehicles, sub. 10, space induction
    power systems   VIII, E

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and
    Breakers, subs. 87+,
    electromagnetic switches        IV, C

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting
    Solids, subs. 211, 212+, assorting or
    separating solid materials by diamagnetic or magnetic means     VI

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 600+ for inductive heating, subclasses
    678+ for microwave heating, and subclasses 764+ for capacitive dielectric
    heating       VII

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subs.
    8, 63, 194, space induction type
    railway switch and signal systems   VIII, D

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, sub. 23,
    pattern controlled metal cutting
    torches         V

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line
    Implements, sub. 65.5, hand and
    hoist line devices with magnets VII

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Inter-
    connection Systems, subclasses
    89+,anti-induction systems      IX

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor
    Structure, motor and generator
    structure               IV, G

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or   VIII, A
    Regulation Systems and B

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and
    Testing, subs. 1+, geophysical
    pick-up coils   VI

            subs. 34+ and 59, pick-up coils,        VI.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and
    Networks, subs. 24+, inductors
    with capacity   III, A

            subs. 213+, inductive networks
    of the active element type      X

            subs. 219+ and 245+, transmission
    line sections with distributed
    parameters      IV, B

    334,    Tuners          III, A

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass
    61, resistor with inductance
    reducing                III, B

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subs.
    825+, especially 825.70 and 825.78,
    selective systems with variable
    inductor device IV, I

            subs. 195+, telemetering with
    variable inductor device as
    transmitter     IV, I

            subs. 195+, telemetering with
    variable inductor device as
    condition sensing element       VI

            subs. 500+, automatically
    responsive alarm using a variable
    inductance      VI

            subs. 384.1+, audible signal
    utilizing a variable inductance
    device          IV, H

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave
    Antennas, subs. 431 and  441    IV, K

            Goniometers subs. 700+,
    especially 726, 728, 741+,
    748, 764, 788, 842, 855, and 866+,
    loop type antennas      IV, F

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information
    Storage or Retrieval, subclasses
    110+, magnetic heads for magnetic
    recording or reproducing.

    361,    Electricity: Electrical
    Systems and Devices, subs. 268+
    spark coil with condenser
    or switch               III, C:IV,

            subs. 600+ switchboards A and
    analogous devices, including
    structural combinations of
    diverse impedance elements, such
    as inductor and capacitor or
    inductor and resistor   III, C

    367,    Communications, Electrical:
    Acoustic Wave System and Devices,
    subs. 87+, electro-acoustic echo
    system with transducer  IV,H

            subs. 141+, submarine
    acoustic wave generator IV,H

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or
    Retrieval, subclasses 146+, electro-
    magnetic stylus sound heads     IV,4

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing,
    subclasses 184 and 188 for
    thermometer with sensing or sensor
    controlled inductor.

    379,    Telephonic Communications,
    subs. 398 and 415, anti-inductive
    telephone systems       IX
    subs. 414+ inductive loaded
    telephone lines VIII, C

            sub. 55.1, space induction
    telephone systems       VIII, D

            subs. 251+ and 352+, variable
    inductors used as telephone
    class transmitters      IV, I

            subs. 443+, induction coils for
    telephone instruments   IV, E

    414,    Material or Article Handling,
    subs. 606 and 737 for load-engaging
    magnets on load raising or lowering
    devices                 VII

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys,
    sub. 45, magnetic toys  X

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 237+
    pattern controlled abrading
    machines                V

    455,    Telecommunications, subs. 67.1+,
    measuring and/or testing apparatus      VI

            sub. 363, measuring, testing, or
    calibrating apparatus   VI

    600,    Surgery
    subclasses 9+ electromagnetic
    surgical devices        VII

            sub. 2.1, diagnostic instruments
    with variable inductor  VI


CLS 336/5
TXT Inductor devices under the class definition comprising plural inductor
    means arranged structurally and/or by internal connection for use in a two
    or more phase electrical system.

    (1)     Note.  The claims must limit the device to use in a polyphase
    system by including some structure or electrical connection which is not of
    general utility but is specifically for use in a polyphase system to be
    classified herein.

    (2)     Note.  The search should extend to the appropriate subclasses below
    for inductor structure which may be used with polyphase current but which
    is of generally utility (e.g., multiple coil reactors and transformers with
    plural primary and secondary windings).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 13+
    for plural load systems of the polyphase type.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, appropriate subclasses
    under subclass 10 for dynamoelectric machine structure of the polyphase
    type.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for systems in which a single source of supply is connected to a
    single output circuit and the system includes means for controlling only
    the magnitude of the current, the voltage and/or the phase angle between
    the current or voltage in the system.  The single source of supply may be a
    polyphase source.  Also see subclasses 44+ for miscellaneous polyphase
    transformer systems, and subclasses 63+ for the miscellaneous polyphase
    impedance (including inductive impedance) systems.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 45 for polyphase output oscillator systems
    utilizing polyphase inductor structure.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, especially subclasses 152+ for
    induction type (e.g., transformer) phase conversion systems.


CLS 336/10
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5 wherein the inductor has means for
    adjusting its inductance.

    (1)     Note.  The claims must limit the device to use in a polyphase
    system by including some structure or electrical connection which is not of
    general utility but is specifically for use in a polyphase system to be
    classified herein.

    (2)     Note.  The search should extend to the appropriate subclasses below
    for adjustable inductor structure which may be used with polyphase current
    but which is of general utility (e.g., multiple coil reactors and
    transformers with plural primary and secondary windings).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 104
    for systems having means for controlling the same under highly inductive
    conditions.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, appropriate
    subclasses, for systems in which a single source of supply is connected to
    a single output circuit and the system includes means for controlling only
    the magnitude of the current, the voltage and/or the phase angle between
    the current or voltage in the system.  The single source of supply may be a
    polyphase source.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 220+ for structure of polyphase induction
    devices without inductance varying means.


CLS 336/12
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5 wherein the claimed subject matter sets
    forth specific electrical connections between plural inductor devices which
    devices comprise a structural unit, so that the devices may be incorporated
    in a plural phase system as an operating unit.


CLS 336/15
TXT Adjustable inductor devices under the class definition in which the number
    of effective turns of a coil is changed by winding or unwinding the
    conductor forming the coil.

    (1)     Note.  The following is an illustrative example:



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for adjustable inductor devices wherein the inductance change is
    effected by distorting or misshaping a coil conductor and/or core of the
    regulator.

    116     and 137+, for other adjustable inductor devices wherein the
    inductive change is effected by altering the effective length of the coil
    conductor by means other than winding and/or unwinding the conductor.

    184,    for inductor devices with coils having different axis or on
    different core legs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 10+ and the subclasses
    specified in the notes thereto for mechanical mechanism for rotating a
    shaft including such mechanism designed for use with an adjustable inductor
    device.  Also see the search notes to subclass 10 of Class 74 for the
    classification of other rotary shaft moving mechanism and for the line
    between Class 336 and Class 74.

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, subclasses 12.2+ for an
    electric current supply conductor and reel means upon which the conductor
    may be wound.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 370+ for a reeling
    device of general use.

    334,    Tuners, subclass 38 for tuners having a reactor element which is
    adapted to be wound or unwound upon a core or form.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 79 for mechanically variable
    electric resistors in which the resistance value is varied by winding the
    resistance element from one core to another.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 700+ for radio
    antennae in which the effective length of the antenna is changed by winding
    the radiating element of the antenna in or out.


CLS 336/20
TXT Adjustable inductor devices under the class definition wherein the
    inductance variation is attained by changing the physical shape of either
    the coil or core or both, usually by physically displacing portions of the
    coil or core relative to other portions of the coil or core respectively,
    by bending, twisting or stretching.

    (1)     Note.  The following are illustrative examples:

    (a)     The core is deformed:



    (b)     The coil is deformed:



    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes variable inductor devices having a
    core or core part formed of magnetostrictive material which material
    exhibits a change in volume and in magnetizing properties when placed under
    mechanical stress.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for adjustable inductor devices wherein the deformation or
    distortion of the coil conductor is that caused by winding and/or unwinding
    the conductor.

    115+,   for inductor devices having two or more coils which are movable
    relative to each other.

    130,    for inductor devices having a relatively movable magnetic core and
    coil.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 157 for oscillator systems having a frequency
    determining element comprising electromechanical resonator of the
    magnetostrictive type.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave, subclass 868 for loop type antennas
    with an adjustable configuration, area, or coil length.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclass 168 for magnetostrictive electro-acoustic or electro-vibrational
    transducers.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 146+ for
    magnetostrictive transducers for electromechanical recording or reproducing.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    150+ for electro-acoustical transducers of the magnetostrictive type for
    use in telephony.  Subclasses 150+ includes transmitters and receivers.


CLS 336/30
TXT Adjustable inductor devices under the class definition where the change in
    inductance is effected by adjusting or varying the inductance changing
    elements of the device in response to a condition by condition sensing
    means external to the device.

    (1)     Note.  The inductance varying element may be a thermally responsive
    element (including those for temperature compensations; however, where
    compensation is effected by the internal structure of the device,
    classification is not herein but in subclass 179), a fluid pressure
    diaphragm (e.g., a barometer), a centrifugal device, or any other device or
    means responsive to a condition.

    (2)     Note.  The following are illustrative examples:



    (3)     Note.  See section VI of the class definition for a listing of
    other classes which have condition response variable inductor devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179,    and see (1) Note, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, appropriate
    subclasses, for automatically controlled systems of general application
    involving two or more sources or input circuits and/or two or more output
    or load circuits.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, for single load
    regulation systems in which the regulation is controlled by a condition.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 65+ for oscillator systems combined with a
    device responsive to an external physical condition and wherein a frequency
    determining element (inductor or capacitor) of the oscillator is varied by
    the condition sensing device.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 2+ and 17.1+ for
    wave transmission lines and networks including an adjustable inductor with
    automatic control, and subclasses 15 and 16 for pilot line and pilot
    current control systems respectively which may include an adjustable
    inductor with automatic control.

    334,    Tuners, subclass 4 for magnetic responsive tuners; subclasses 5+
    for tuners responsive to an external condition; subclass 13 for tuners
    having a saturable core type element and means to automatically center the
    frequency of the circuit; subclass 16 for a tuner utilizing a reactance
    tube tuner combined with automatic frequency centering circuit means, and
    subclasses 26+ for a tuner having an electromagnetic operator with
    automatic frequency centering means.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 257 for receivers with automatic
    frequency control and subclasses 150.1+ for particular frequency selection
    means in radio receivers.


CLS 336/40
TXT Adjustable inductor devices under the class definition in which the
    inductance varying element is adjusted in response to the magnetic force
    existing between the magnetic elements (e.g., between the core and coil or
    between coils) of the inductor device.

    (1)     Note.  Illustrative examples are:



    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes inductor devices such as are used in
    constant current systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 305 for
    single source to single load type constant current regulation systems.


CLS 336/41
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 in which the weight of one of the elements
    which is moved by the magnetic force is counterbalanced at least in part by
    a counterbalanced weight so that the magnetic force needed to move the
    movable element is either less than or more than the weight of the movable
    element.

    (1)     Note.  Where the inductor has a plurality of movable inductance
    changing elements (e.g., a movable coil and a movable core) one of the
    movable elements may be used as a counterbalance for the others and vice
    versa.

    (2)     Note.  An illustrative example is:



    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses for counterbalanced movable
    supports of general application.  Note subclass 364 of Class 248 and also
    see the Index to the Manual of Classification of Patents under the titles
    "Weights" and "Counterweights" for counterbalance weights.


CLS 336/45
TXT Adjustable inductor devices under the class definition in which means are
    provided for showing the displacement of an inductance changing element of
    the inductor device relative to some fixed part of the device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 241+, for miscellaneous position
    indicators other than the electrically actuated or controlled type.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 64 for oscillators having means for
    indicating the position or setting of an adjustable frequency determining
    element of the oscillator, such as a variable inductor or capacitor.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, appropriate subclasses for
    electrically actuated or controlled signals and indicators, especially
    subclasses 870.31+ for telemetric systems.


CLS 336/55
TXT Inductor devices under the class definition wherein means are provided for
    modifying or for controlling the temperature of the inductor device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179,    for inductor devices whose inherent construction is such as to
    maintain their inductance at a constant value, or which permits their
    inductance to vary in a predetermined manner with changes in temperature of
    the device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous
    refrigeration apparatus, particularly subclasses 259.1+ for refrigeration
    means installed in structures having other functions.

    165,    Heat  Exchange, appropriate subclasses for heat exchange apparatus
    combined with a device to be cooled or heated thereby, if no structure of
    such device is included other than that necessary for cooperation with the
    heat exchange device.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 15.1+ for a
    mere housing, casing or envelope for an electrical device where no
    significant structure of the device is claimed with means for modifying the
    temperature of the device.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 16 and 52+ for
    reciprocating and rotary dynamoelectric machines, respectively, with
    cooling or temperature modification means.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, particularly subclass
    50 for combined structure of a space discharge device and impedance means,
    which means may be an inductor, and which means is constructed to modify
    the temperature of the load device.

    331,    Oscillates, subclasses 69 and 70 for oscillator systems with means
    for modifying or controlling the temperature of the oscillator or an
    element, such as a tank circuit inductor, of the oscillator.

    454,    Ventilation, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous ventilating
    apparatus.


CLS 336/57
TXT Subject matter under subclass 55 in which the inductor device has a
    circumambient liquid or gaseous insulating medium in contact with its coil
    or core and wherein means, such as a pump or fan, is included to force the
    medium to circulate for the purpose of effecting a heat exchange between
    the medium and the inductor device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, particularly subclasses 304+ for material cooling
    means including a gas-liquid contactor, subclasses 373+ for a cooler in
    which a liquid contacts a discrete commodity, and subclasses 403+ for a
    system for cooling a gas and controlling or directing it, e.g., with an air
    pump.

    165,    Heat  Exchange, subclasses 104.22+ for a heat exchange device in
    which mechanically impelled fluent material picks up heat at one point in a
    circuit and discharges it at another.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 15.1 for fluid
    feeding, circulating or distributing for cooling electrical equipment
    generally and indented subclass 16.1 for such having ventilation and/or gas
    circulation.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 58+ for cooling
    or fluid contact means for rotary dynamo electric machinery which includes
    means to circulate a coolant.


CLS 336/58
TXT Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein the inductor device is immersed in
    a heat exchanging medium comprising an insulating liquid.

    (1)     Note.  If the insulating liquid in which the inductor is immersed
    is not specifically disclosed or claimed as a heat exchange medium for the
    device classification is not herein but rather in subclass 94 below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclass 14 for an
    insulating oil comprising only mineral oil components.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 570+ for fluent dielectric compositions
    containing a nonhydrocarbon material.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclasses 6.3+ for an
    all-hydrocarbon insulating oil containing more than mineral oil fractions.


CLS 336/59
TXT Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein the inductor has a housing or
    casing which is provided with apertures (usually open to the atmosphere) to
    allow circulation of air over selected surfaces of the contained inductor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 128+ for a heat exchange structure having
    a thermosyphonic flue.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 16.1 for a mere
    housing or casing for an electrical device, where no significant structure
    of the device is claimed, with means to provide for ventilation of the
    interior of the casing.

    454,    Ventilation, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous ventilating
    structure such as cowls, hoods and louvers.


CLS 336/60
TXT Subject matter under subclass 55 comprising passages between or through
    various components of the inductor structure so that a cooling fluid may
    circulate therethrough.

    (1)     Note.  The passageways may be formed by coil or winding and/or core
    part spacers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185,    for windings formed of multiple coils with spacers therebetween.

    196+,   for spacing means between coil and core.

    199+,   for spacing means between coils or coil turns.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 65 for rotary
    dynamo-electric machine structure wherein spacers are provided between
    motor core laminations or coils to effect a heat exchange between a fluid
    medium and the core or coils.


CLS 336/61
TXT Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein a heat exchanging surface is
    structurally combined with the coil or winding or the core of the inductor,
    or the coil or winding or the core is especially adapted by its structure
    to have a heat exchanging surface.

    (1)     Note.  The heat exchanging surface is not limited to heat radiating
    surfaces but the heat exchange may take place by conduction or convection
    or a combination of the various types of heat transfer, the essential
    element required for this subclass being a surface, adapted for heat
    transfer in intimate relationship with the coil or winding or the core of
    the inductor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 185 for a heat transmitter, per se.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 64+ for heat
    exchanging surfaces in rotary dynamoelectric machines.


CLS 336/62
TXT Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein at least one coil of the inductor
    device is formed of a tubular conductor which is designed to convey a
    temperature modifying fluid therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223,    for windings having conductors of a particular shape including
    tubular.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, appropriate subclasses for
    miscellaneous pipe and tubular conduit structure.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 28+ for
    co-axial type conductors with fluid or vacuum insulation, subclass 102 for
    conductors formed as tubular sheaths for other conductors, and subclasses
    126.1+, and especially indented subclasses 130 and 131 for hollow electric
    conductors of the stranded type.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 600+ for inductive heating, note
    subclasses 628+ for an inductor structure having a fluid flow; subclasses
    678+ for microwave heating; and subclasses 764+ for capacitive dielectric
    heating.


CLS 336/65
TXT Inductor devices under the class definition having exterior means to
    support the entire inductor structure.

    (1)     Note.  A support is defined as a device or means which carries the
    weight of the inductor device or otherwise hold or steady it against the
    pull of gravity.

    (2)     Note.  Means for supporting parts or elements of the inductor
    device with respect to each other are not considered support or mounting
    means for classification in this subclass. For such subject matter, see
    particularly subclass 185 for supports or spacers for the coils of a
    winding; subclass 195 for one coil supported by another coil; subclasses
    196+ for supporting or spacing means between coil and core; subclasses 199+
    for coil or coil turn supports; subclass 210 for core clamps, wedges or
    fasteners.

    (3)     Note.  A mere casing or housing for the inductor device is not
    considered to be a supporting means within the definition of this subclass.
     However, if the casing or housing is provided with means for supporting
    the casing or housing such as being mounted on supporting legs or wheels or
    has legs extending from the casing so that casing can be mounted on a panel
    or wall, the structure is considered to be supporting structure for this
    subclass. See subclass 92 for inductor devices provided with means to
    support the inductor device within the casing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92,     and see (3) Note above.

    185,    and see (2) Note above.

    195,    and see (2) Note above.

    196+,   and see (2) Note above.

    199+,   and see (2) Note above.

    210+,   and see (2) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 37 for
    underground supports for electrical devices; subclass 40 for overhead
    supports for electrical devices; subclasses 48 for means for mounting
    miscellaneous casings or housings for electrical devices on or within a
    wall of a building structure; subclasses 50+, particularly subclasses 58
    and 63, for means to mount or support a casing or housing for an electrical
    device.

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous supports.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 91 for
    dynamoelectric machines combined with supporting means therefor.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 869 for loop type
    antennas with a rotatable support.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 600+ for
    mounting means for switchboards or plural diverse.


CLS 336/66
TXT Subject matter under subclass 65 provided with means to manually hold or
    support the inductor device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 110+ for handles in general.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 46 for handles
    restricted by structure to use with electrical apparatus in general.  The
    Notes listed under subclass 46 of Class 174 indicate other fields of search
    for devices with handles.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 50 for rotary
    dynamoelectric machines of the portable or hand tool type.


CLS 336/67
TXT Subject matter under subclass 65 provided with means to rigidly attach and
    support the inductor on or to a supporting surface. Usually the support is
    adapted to be fastened to a wall and projects therefrom to support the
    inductor in cantilever fashion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, particularly subclasses
    48+ for wall mounted conduits or housings.

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses for object supporting brackets of
    general application, see particularly subclasses 200+.


CLS 336/68
TXT Subject matter under subclass 65 provided with mechanical coupling means by
    means of which the inductor may be hung from an overhead position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses for object supporting suspension
    type supports, see particularly subclasses 317+.


CLS 336/69
TXT Inductor devices under the class definition comprising means to modify the
    inherent capacitive effects between (1) adjacent turns of a winding, or (2)
    between adjacent windings, or (3) between windings or turns and adjacent
    structure such as a core or casing therefor.

    (1)     Note.  The modification of the capacitive effects may be
    accomplished, for example, by the provision of appropriately placed shield
    members, or open-circuited auxiliary coils, or by use of a dielectric of
    graded thickness or composition.

    (2)     Note.  The capacitive effect modifying means may be, for example,
    to eliminate undesired coupling between windings, or to protect the
    inductor from breakdown of the insulation on the occurrence of high
    amplitude transient potentials at the inductor terminals (see indented
    subclass 70 for such transient control).

    (3)     Note.  Mere arrangement of the conductor winding pattern to prevent
    undesired coupling between coils is not subject matter for this subclass.
    Such subject matter may be found in the appropriate subclass for the
    structure involved.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, appropriate subclasses for telegraph systems with
    inductors and capacity balancing means, especially subclass 45 for loading
    coils, and subclasses 63 and 69 for cable or line capacity correction.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 89+
    for anti-inductive systems in general.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, appropriate subclasses for
    wave transmission lines and networks having inductor elements including
    means to balance the capacitance of the elements with respect to a
    particular potential plane, see particularly subclasses 4+, 117+ and 25+.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 270 for
    structural combinations of an inductor and a capacitor.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, appropriate subclasses for telephone
    systems with inductors and capacity balancing means, especially subclasses
    398 and 415 for anti-inductive telephone devices.


CLS 336/70
TXT Subject matter under subclass 69 wherein the inherent inductor capacitance
    relationships are modified by additional means which change the potential
    gradient distribution through at least part of the inductor, and which may
    include, in addition, connections to various fixed or other potential
    points in the inductor, or a rearrangement of coils or terminals to attain
    a potential gradient distribution which will minimize the deleterious
    effect of surge or transient electrical pulses or waves to which the
    inductor may be subjected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     for inductors with electric or magnetic shielding means for
    shielding the inductor from stray fields or for preventing radiation of
    undesired electric or magnetic field energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 127 for conductor
    structure which prevents corona discharge, including such structure which
    performs this function by preventing high electrostatic stress at any
    point; and subclasses 140+ for insulators, including those combined with
    conductive means which function together to control the voltage gradient,
    particularly subclass 143 for bushing type insulators with alternating
    rings or cylinders of conductive and insulating material which exert a
    modifying effect on the capacitance between inner and outer conductors of
    the bushing, particularly for voltage stress distribution.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 327
    for protective systems for surge, transient or parasitic current
    suppression in general.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 196 for
    dynamoelectric machine armature or primary winding structure including
    corona discharge prevention means.


CLS 336/73
TXT Inductor devices under the class definition which include a coil and a
    member which has at least a portion of the member formed of nonmagnetic
    electrically conductive material, the member being shaped so that it
    provides a closed electrical circuit for current induced therein.

    (1)     Note.  The conductive member may be a closed coil, a plate, bar or
    slug, and need not be formed wholly of nonmagnetic material (see indented
    subclass 77 for relatively movable members of such construction).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84+,    for electric and/or magnetic shields which may be disclosed as
    closed conductive members.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 182+ and 197
    for short-circuited windings or conductors in field or armature windings,
    respectively, for rotary dynamoelectric machines.


CLS 336/75
TXT Subject matter under subclass 73 wherein the coil and the conductive member
    are relatively movable with respect to each other.

    (2)     Note.  Illustrative examples are:



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138     and 144, for adjustable inductor devices which have closed coils or
    short-circuited turns which are fixed in position relative to the coil or
    coils of the inductor device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 181 for oscillator systems with a variable
    inductance frequency determining means, which variable inductance may be of
    the angularly adjustable vane type.


CLS 336/77
TXT Devices under subclass 75 in which a portion of the member is formed of
    magnetic material.

    (1)     Note.  An illustrative example is:



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117+,   for inductor devices having relatively movable coils and a core, at
    least one of the coils and the core being relatively movable, see indented
    subclass 119 where a coil and the core are movable as a unit with respect
    to another coil.

    130+,   for inductor devices having one or more coils and a core, the core
    and a coil being relatively movable with respect to each other.

    221,    for inductor devices comprising miscellaneous core and coil
    combinations.


CLS 336/79
TXT Devices under subclass 75 in which the member is movable about an axis of
    rotation.

    (1)     Note.  An illustrative example is:



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120+,   for inductor devices having relatively movable coils and a core, a
    coil and a core being relatively movable as a unit about an axis of
    rotation.

    122+,   and the subclasses specified in the Notes thereto for inductor
    devices having relatively movable coils, one of the coils being movable
    about an axis of rotation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 10+ and the subclasses
    specified in the Notes thereto for mechanical mechanism for rotating a
    shaft including such mechanism designed for use with an adjustable inductor
    device.  Also see the search notes to subclass 10 of Class 74 for the
    classification of other rotary shaft moving mechanism and for the line
    between Class 336 and Class 74.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 105+ for
    induced or eddy current magnetic field type of torque transmitting clutch
    or brake which have a rotating short-circuited or conducting disc member,
    and subclasses 210+ for dynamoelectric machines with secondary windings or
    conductors which may include such of the short-circuited coil or disc
    conductor type.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 137+ for meters
    with eddy current rotors.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 225 for magneto-mechanical motive devices with
    relatively, movable members of the induced current type, (e.g., rotary
    disk); and subclass 226 specifically for such with short-circuited coils.


CLS 336/82
TXT Inductor devices under the class definition wherein a coil or winding of
    the inductor consists of a solid, unitary preformed casing which
    substantially completely encloses the rest of the inductor structure.  A
    wound coil such as a toroidal or spherical coil which completely encloses
    another coil and/or core is excluded from this subclass and may be found in
    the appropriate structural subclasses below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 222+ for high
    frequency resonators of the distributed parameter type which may include a
    rigid external conductive casing.

    334,    Tuners, subclasses 41+ for resonant line tuning units wherein the
    tuning capacitor may be enclosed in a rigid conductive casing comprising
    the tuner inductor, and subclass 85 for a tuner having shielding or housing
    means which may be a rigid conductive casing which serves as an inductance
    element.


CLS 336/83
TXT Inductor devices under the class definition wherein the coils or windings
    are substantially completely enclosed by the core structure except for such
    apertures in the core structure necessary to allow passage of the coil or
    winding leads.

    (1)     Note.  If a casing or housing having an inductor therein serves as
    a portion of the magnetic path of the inductor classification is herein
    rather than in subclasses 90+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    214+,   for inductors with cores wherein multiple separate magnetic paths
    are provided in the core structure.


CLS 336/84
TXT Inductor devices under the class definition provided with means for
    shielding at least part of the inductor device from external electric or
    magnetic fields, or with means to protect parts of the device from
    undesired electric or magnetic fields originating in another part of the
    device, or with means to prevent the inductor device from emanating
    undesired electric or magnetic fields.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69+,    for inductive devices having coil capacitance modifying means and
    in which electrostatic shields are associated with the coil means to shield
    coils from each other, or in special arrangements for balancing coil
    capacitances, or to modify the coil surge potential gradient.

    73+,    for inductive devices having a closed or short-circuited coil which
    is often in the form of a conductive screen or plate of the electrostatic
    shield type, and indented subclasses 75+ for inductor devices having a
    movable nonmagnetic conductive screen or shield which is used to vary the
    effective inductance of the inductor device.

    82,     for inductive devices wherein a coil, formed as a solid, unitary
    structure of conductive material, forms the casing of the inductive device
    and may function in part like an electrostatic shield.

    83,     for inductive devices wherein the coil or winding thereof is
    totally enclosed by a magnetic core (so-called "ironclad" cores) which
    structure tends to confine the electromagnetic field within the bounds of
    the inductor.

    90+,    for inductor devices with casings or housings not limited by
    claimed subject matter to electric or magnetic shielding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 32+ for
    miscellaneous anti-inductive structures, see particularly subclasses 35+
    for miscellaneous electrical shields and screen structures not elsewhere
    classifiable.  The search notes to subclasses 32+ indicate further fields
    of search for anti-inductive and shielding structure.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 39+
    for anti-inductive means to prevent or modify the coupling between
    electrical systems, particularly subclass 91 for "shielding means".

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 256 for stray
    field flux loss prevention by shielding means in rotary dynamoelectric
    machines.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 68 for amplifiers combined with significant
    details of shielding structure, generally, subclass 170 for amplifiers
    having transformer coupling including shielding means involved in such
    transformer coupling.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 67 for oscillator systems provided with an
    electromagnetic or electrostatic shield.  The shield may be for an element
    (such as an inductor) of the oscillator system.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 12 for transmission
    line inductive or radiation interference reduction systems which include
    shielding means for the purpose.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 842 for loop type
    antennas with an electrical shield.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 268+ for
    inductors with integral switch or capacitor means, particularly subclass
    270 for those inductive devices structurally combined with a capacitor.


CLS 336/87
TXT Subject matter under subclass 84 wherein means for adjustment of the
    inductance of the inductor device are included.


CLS 336/90
TXT Inductor devices under the class definition provided with a casing or
    housing to enclose the inductor device.

    (1)     Note.  The casing or housing surrounding the inductor device in the
    patents of this and indented subclasses is disclosed primarily as a
    mechanical protection for, or to contain an insulating medium around, the
    inductor.

    (2)     Note.  If the casing or housing is claimed as an electric or
    magnetic shield the patent is excluded and classified in subclasses 84+.

    (3)     Note.  For classification in this or indented subclasses some
    detail of the inductor device such as a winding must be claimed.  If the
    recitation in the claim of an inductor device is by name only, the patent
    is not classified herein but rather in the appropriate subclasses in Class
    174.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55+,    for inductor devices having casings combined with means to modify
    the temperature of the inductor.  See especially subclass 59 for vented
    casings.

    65+,    for inductor devices having casings with external mounting means.

    82,     for inductor devices wherein a unitary preformed coil or winding
    forms the casing.

    83,     for inductor devices wherein the core forms a casing for the
    windings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, for miscellaneous casings
    and housings for electrical devices including such casings and housings, in
    combination with an electrical device recited by name only, particularly
    subclasses 8+ for such devices intended to be used with a fluid or vacuum;
    subclasses 37+ for underground vaults for electrical devices; and
    subclasses 50+ for such devices of general utility.

    220,    Receptacles, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous box, housing
    or casing structure of general utility.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 156 for casings for
    electrical measuring instruments.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 600+ for
    housings and mounting assemblies with plural diverse electrical components.


CLS 336/92
TXT Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein means are provided within the
    casing to maintain the inductor device in a predetermined relation to the
    casing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65+,    for the combination of an inductor with means to support it with
    respect to its environment.  Housed inductor devices with means external of
    the housing for supporting the device are in subclasses 65+.


CLS 336/94
TXT Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein the housing or casing containing
    the inductor contains an insulating fluid in which the inductor is immersed.

    (1)     Note.  If means are provided for circulating the insulating fluid,
    for cooling purposes, the patent is not classified herein but rather in
    subclass 57.

    (2)     Note.  If the insulating fluid comprises a liquid and is provided
    for a cooling effect, classification is not herein but rather in subclass
    58.

    (3)     Note.  For the locus of patents to insulating fluids, per se, see
    the search notes in subclass 58.


CLS 336/96
TXT Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein the space between the casing or
    housing and the inductor and its interstices is occupied by a semisolid or
    solidified mass of insulating material such as sand or asphalt (or other
    plastic material).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58      and 94, for inductors immersed in an insulating medium which is in
    a fluid state.


CLS 336/98
TXT Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein a portion of the inductor core
    protrudes from the casing or housing, e.g., a transformer with "end bells"
    covering only the windings and a portion of the core.


CLS 336/100
TXT Inductor devices under the class definition which are especially designed
    or provided with some structure to inhibit or reduce the vibration, to
    prevent failure from the vibration or to eliminate or reduce the effects
    upon the device of the vibration caused by the fluctuations in magnetic
    flux.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 574, for flywheels and
    rotors with vibration damping means.

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 371+ for braking devices which use plastic
    deformation or breakage of a retarder element to dissipate motion;
    subclasses 378+ for braking devices which use the inertia of a damping
    mass; subclasses 266+ for internal resistance type braking devices or
    vibration damping means; and subclass 381 for vibration dampers which use
    friction between damper elements.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 560+ for resilient supports.

    267,    Spring Devices, appropriate subclasses, for miscellaneous spring
    structures.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 51 for
    miscellaneous vibration suppression means utilized in rotary dynamoelectric
    machinery, subclass 93 for electrodynamic brakes utilized to damp out
    vibrations.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, subclasses 127 and 180 for shaft couplings and shafting
    having vibration dampening characteristics.


CLS 336/105
TXT Inductor devices under the class definition combined with structure other
    than the coil structure or the core structure or the supporting and spacing
    structure for mounting the coils and/or cores with respect to each other,
    or the structure or means for electrically insulating the coil and core
    structure, and which are not classified in any of the subclasses in this
    class preceding this subclass.

    (1)     Note.  If the other structure is a switch for varying the
    inductance of the device, as a tap changing switch, the patent is excluded
    from this subclass, and will be found in subclass 150 of this class or one
    of the subclasses specified in the Notes to that subclass.  If the switch
    interrupts or completes the line circuit to the inductor, the patent is
    excluded and may be found in Class 361, Electricity: Electrical Systems and
    Devices subclass 157.6.

    (2)     Note.  An illustrative example is:



CLS 336/107
TXT Subject matter under subclass 105 combined with means to complete an
    external electrical circuit connection to the inductor, said means
    comprising readily-detachable, interengaging friction or screw held, or
    pressure-exerting, coupling elements.

    (1)     Note.  Inductor devices with terminals adapted to make permanent or
    semi-permanent connections with an external electrical circuit (e.g.,
    solder lugs) are not classified herein but rather in subclass 192.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 870 for loop type
    antennas with a connector or terminals.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for an electrical
    connector, per se, generally.


CLS 336/110
TXT Inductor devices under the class definitions which are provided with a
    permanent magnet to modify the magnetic flux distribution.

    (1)     Note.  An illustrative example is:



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155+,   for inductor devices having a winding adapted to be energized by
    direct current to modify the magnetic flux distribution of the device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 250,
    330, and 362 for miscellaneous inductive reactor systems where the reactor
    includes a permanent magnet as a part thereof.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave, subclass 788 for loop type antennas
    with magnetic material.


CLS 336/115
TXT Inductor devices under the class definition having two coils which are
    relatively movable with respect to each other.

    (1)     Note.  Illustrative examples are:



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75+,    for inductor devices having a coil and a closed coil which are
    relatively movable with respect to each other.

    170+,   180+, 188, and 220, for inductor devices having plural,
    nonrelatively movable coils or windings.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 216,
    264, and 347 for inductor systems with movable structure or windings.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 65+ for amplifiers combined with significant
    structural detail of any of the circuit elements which may include inductor
    structure; subclasses 171, 190, and 197 for amplifiers having transformer
    coupling including significant details of the transformer structure,
    subclass 169 for amplifiers having transformer coupling including means for
    adjusting such inductive coupling.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 24+ for coupling
    networks, including filters, equalizers, and delay networks, having
    relatively movable coils, and especially subclasses 177+ for transformer
    coupled wave filters.

    334,    Tuners, subclasses 59+ for tuners having tuned transformer circuits
    which are substituted by switching in which the primary may remain
    stationary while the secondary is moved relative to the primary, and
    subclasses 61+ for tuners having mutual inductance variable means which may
    be relatively displaceable coils.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 591 for metallic
    stock having parts which are relatively movable with respect to each other.


CLS 336/116
TXT Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein one of the coils is provided with
    means (1) to change the physical length of the coil which is effective as
    an inductive component, (2) to add or cut out turns or coils or to
    substitute a coil section or component of different characteristics or
    position for a coil or (3) to change the direction of current flow through
    at least a portion of the coil conductor.

    (1)     Note.  Illustrative examples are:



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for adjustable inductor devices having means for varying the number
    of turns of the coil by winding or unwinding the coil.

    137+,   for other inductor devices wherein the inductance change is
    effected by changing the effective coil length and/or coil connections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 255
    and 340 for transformer systems with tapped windings.


CLS 336/117
TXT Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein one of the coils is provided with
    a core.

    (1)     Note.  The core may extend through the fixed and movable coil
    (e.g., the movable coil may slide along the core), or one coil may be
    provided with a core fixed in relation thereto and the other coil may be
    relatively movable with respect to the fixed coil and core, or each coil
    may be mounted on respective complementary portions of a two part core.

    (2)     Note.  Illustrative examples are:



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40+,    for adjustable inductor devices having relatively movable coils and
    a core where the movement of the movable core is effected by the change in
    magnetic force between the two coils (e.g., constant current devices).

    130+,   where the inductor device has a core movable with respect to one or
    more coils.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 177+ for
    transformer coupled wave filters with magnetic core inductances.


CLS 336/118
TXT Subject matter under subclass 117, wherein the core is relatively movable
    with respect to the two coils which are movable with respect to each other.

    (1)     Note.  Illustrative examples are:



CLS 336/119
TXT Subject matter under subclass 117 wherein a core and a coil which are fixed
    with respect to each other are movable as a unit relative to another coil.

    (1)     Note.  An illustrative example is:



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for adjustable inductor devices having a coil and a closed coil
    (e.g., short circuit coil) or conductive member which are relatively
    movable with respect to each other, the closed coil or conductive member
    having a portion formed of magnetic material.

    212,    for inductor devices having core comprising plural parts formed of
    unitary assemblages.


CLS 336/120
TXT Subject matter under subclass 119 wherein the fixed core and coil unit is
    movable about an axis of rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122+,   for adjustable inductor devices having relatively movable coils,
    the movable coil being movable about an axis of rotation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 10+ and the subclasses
    specified in the Notes thereto for mechanical mechanism for rotating a
    shaft including such mechanism designed for use with an adjustable inductor
    device.  Also see the search notes to subclass 10 of Class 74 for the
    classification of other rotary shaft moving mechanism and for the line
    between Class 336 and Class 74.


CLS 336/121
TXT Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein a coil is movable about an axis
    of rotation and is also movable in a linear path or wherein one coil is
    movable about an axis of rotation and another coil is movable in a linear
    path.

    (1)     Note.  Illustrative examples are:



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    for relatively movable coil inductor devices where one coil is
    movable only in a linear path which is not parallel to the coil axis of the
    other coil.

    122,    for relatively movable coil inductor devices where a coil is
    movable only about an axis of rotation.

    129,    for relatively movable coil inductor devices where one coil is
    movable only in a linear path which is parallel to and usually coincident
    with the coil axis of another coil.


CLS 336/122
TXT Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein a coil is movable about an axis
    of rotation.

    (1)     Note.  Illustrative examples are:



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     for inductor devices which include a short-circuited coil which is
    movable about an axis of rotation.

    120,    where the inductor device is provided with a core for a movable
    coil, the core and coil being angularly movable as a unit with respect to
    another coil.

    121,    where the coil is movable about an axis of rotation and is also
    linearly movable or where a coil is movable about an axis of rotation and
    another coil is linearly movable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 10+ and the subclasses
    specified in the Notes thereto for mechanical mechanism for rotating a
    shaft including such mechanism designed for use with an adjustable inductor
    device.  Also see the search notes to subclass 10 of Class 74 for the
    classification of other rotary shaft moving mechanism and for the line
    between Class 336 and Class 74.


CLS 336/123
TXT Subject matter under subclass 122 wherein the axis of rotation of the
    movable coil is coincident with or parallel to the axis of the other coil.

    (1)     Note.  An illustrative example is:



CLS 336/124
TXT Subject matter under subclass 122 wherein the movable coil is movable about
    an axis of rotation which is offset with respect to center of coil, the
    axis of rotation of the movable coil being inclined at an angle with
    respect to the axis of the other coil.

    (1)     Note.  Illustrative examples are:



CLS 336/125
TXT Subject matter under subclass 122 wherein the movable coil is movable about
    an axis of rotation which passes through the center of the coil and which
    is perpendicular to the axis of the other coil.

    (1)     Note.  An illustrative example is:



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    where the movable coil is movable about an axis of rotation which
    passes through the center of the coil, the axis of rotation being
    transverse to, but not normal to, the axis of the other coil.


CLS 336/126
TXT Subject matter under subclass 125 having three or more coils, at least two
    of the coils being angularly movable with respect to each other and with
    respect to another coil.

    (1)     Note.  The plural movable coils may be angularly movable about the
    same or different axis of rotation.

    (2)     Note.  Illustrative examples are:



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170+,   for inductors having three or more nonmovable windings.


CLS 336/127
TXT Subject matter under subclass 125 wherein the coils are similar and have a
    spherical shape.

    (1)     Note.  The coil winding need not form a complete sphere, but may
    only be a portion of a sphere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230,    for the structure of spherical coils.


CLS 336/128
TXT Subject matter under subclass 125 wherein the stationary coil has a tubular
    shape.

    (1)     Note.  A tubular coil is a coil having a rectilinear coil axis and
    having its windings extending along the coil axis for a distance usually
    greater than the cross-sectional dimensions (e.g., the diameter in the case
    of round tubular coils) of the coil.  The cross-sectional shape or area
    usually is uniform along the coil axis.  The cross-sectional shape may be
    circular, oval, square, polygonal or the like.  Coils of spherical,
    toroidal, or pancake form, for example, are not considered to be tubular
    coils for this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  An illustrative example is:



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199+,   for the structure of coils on a form and especially subclass 208
    for coil forms.

    225+,   for the structure of coils having a special configuration.


CLS 336/129
TXT Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein the coil is movable along a
    linear axis which is either coincident with or parallel to the coil axis of
    the other coil.

    (1)     Note.  An illustrative example is:



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    for inductor devices having relatively movable coils, the movable
    coil being provided with a core, the core and coil being movable as a unit
    along an axis coincident with or parallel to the axis of the other coil.

    121,    for inductor devices having relatively movable coils wherein a coil
    is movable about an axis of rotation and is also movable in a linear path
    or wherein one coil is movable about an axis of rotation and another coil
    is movable in a linear path.


CLS 336/130
TXT Adjustable inductor devices under the class definition having a core and a
    coil which are relatively movable with respect to each other so that the
    effective inductance of the device may be varied.

    (1)     Note.  Illustrative examples are:



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     where the inductor device has a deformable or distortable coil or
    core.

    40,     where the movement between the coil and core is due to the magnetic
    force existing between the coil and core.

    77,     where the core is a portion of a short-circuited conductor or
    conductive member which is movable with respect to the coil.

    117+,   where the inductor device includes two coils which are movable
    relative to each other, the core being movable relative to at least one of
    the coils.

    221,    for the structure of coil and core not elsewhere provided for.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 10+ and the subclasses
    specified in the Notes thereto for mechanical mechanism for rotating a
    shaft including such mechanism designed for use with an adjustable inductor
    device.  Also see the search notes to subclass 10 of Class 74 for the
    classification of other rotary shaft moving mechanism and for the line
    between Class 336 and Class 74.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 216,
    264, and 347 for miscellaneous inductive reactor systems where the reactor
    includes a relatively movable core and coil.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 169 for amplifiers having transformer coupling
    including means for adjusting inductive coupling of the transformer.

    334,    Tuners, appropriate subclasses for tuned networks for use in wave
    energy apparatus and comprising inductance and capacitance elements in
    circuit arrangement to form a resonant circuit and in which structure is
    provided for adjusting one or both of these elements for changing the mean
    resonant frequency of the circuit.  The adjustable inductance is usually of
    the movable core type.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 748 for loop type
    antennas with a variable reactance for tuning the antenna.


CLS 336/131
TXT Subject matter under subclass 130 which includes a plurality of coils, each
    of the coils being provided with a core which is relatively movable with
    respect to the coil with which it is associated.

    (1)     Note.  The several coils may or may not be in inductive relation to
    each other.

    (2)     Note.  Illustrative examples are:



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170+,   182+, 188, and 220, for the structure of nonadjustable inductive
    devices having plural windings (e.g., transformers).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 24+ for coupling
    networks including plural coils with plural cores, and particularly
    subclasses 177+ for transformer coupled wave filters with magnetic core
    inductance.

    334,    Tuners, subclass 77 for tuners having variable inductors which are
    gang operated.


CLS 336/132
TXT Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein the core is formed of a plurality
    of separate parts, one of the parts being movable relative to the other
    part.

    (1)     Note.  The core part which is movable with respect to the other
    core part may be movable with respect to the coil, or the other core part
    may be movable with respect to the coil.

    (2)     Note.  Illustrative examples are:




    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221,    for inductive devices with plural part cores in general.


CLS 336/133
TXT Subject matter under subclass 132 wherein the inductor device is provided
    with at least two coils, one of the core portions forming a continuous flux
    path inductively coupling the two coils, the movable magnetic core portion
    being arranged between the two coils so as to provide an adjustable shunt
    for shunting some of the magnetic flux from the core portion forming the
    continuous flux path so that one of the coils may be linked by a different
    amount of magnetic flux than that which links the other coil.

    (1)     Note.  An illustrative example is:





    MOVABLE CORE SHUNTS FLUX GENERATED BY ONE COIL FROM OTHER COIL.





    (2)     Note.  The following illustrated types of inductor devices are not
    included in this subclass:





            For the above excluded types of inductor devices, see subclasses
    134+ where there is an adjustable air gap and subclass 132 for such devices
    without an adjustable air gap.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160,    for inductive regulators, without relatively movable parts, having
    a magnetic shunt.


CLS 336/134
TXT Subject matter under subclass 132 wherein the movable core portion in at
    least one of the positions to which it may be moved provides an air gap
    between itself and the other core portion.

    (1)     Note.  The movable core portion may provide an air gap between
    itself and the other core portion in all of the positions to which it may
    be moved.

    (2)     Note.  Illustrative examples are:



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155+,   for inductive regulators, with no relatively moving parts having an
    air gap.

    178,    for inductive devices with a closed core interrupted by an air gap,
    generally.


CLS 336/135
TXT Subject matter under subclass 134 wherein the movable core portion is
    movable about an axis of rotation.

    (1)     Note.  An illustrative example is:





    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for inductor devices having a core and coil which are movable as a
    unit about an axis of rotation to effect movement between the core and coil
    unit and another coil.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 10+ and the subclasses
    specified in the notes thereto for mechanical mechanism for rotating a
    shaft including such mechanism designed for use with an adjustable inductor
    device.  Also see the search notes to subclass 10 of Class 74 for the
    classification of other rotary shaft moving mechanism and for the line
    between Class 336 and Class 74.


CLS 336/136
TXT Subject matter under subclass 130 in which the core and a coil are
    relatively movable in the direction of the axis of the coil and in variable
    amount of overlapping relation.

    (1)     Note.  In the devices in this subclass, the core may be
    "telescoped" within the coil, or the coil may be telescoped within the core.

    (2)     Note.  An illustrative example is:



CLS 336/137
TXT Inductor devices under the class definition wherein a coil is provided with
    means (1) to change the physical length of the coil which is effective as
    an inductive component, or (2) to add or cut out turns or coils or to
    substitute a coil section or component of different characteristics or
    position for a coil or (3) to change the direction of current flow through
    at least a portion of the coil conductor.

    (1)     Note.  Illustrative examples are:



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     where the effective number of turns of the coil is varied by
    winding or unwinding the coil conductor.

    116,    where one of the coils is also movable with respect to another of
    the coils.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 10+ and the subclasses
    specified in the notes thereto for mechanical mechanism for rotating a
    shaft including such mechanism designed for use with an adjustable inductor
    device.  Also see the search notes to subclass 10 of Class 74 for the
    classification of other rotary shaft moving mechanism and for the line
    between Class 336 and Class 74.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 255
    and 340 for transformer systems with tapped windings.

    334,    Tuners, subclasses 47+ for tuners of the switch type and especially
    subclasses 56+ for a switch type tuner in which the inductor only is
    modified or substituted by switching.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 748 for loop type
    antennas with a variable reactance for tuning the antenna; and subclass 868
    for loop type antennas having means for adjusting the coil length.


CLS 336/138
TXT Subject matter under subclass 137 comprising conductors (which may be
    coils) lying in side by side relation, or having a common axis, and bridged
    by a conducting member, which member is movable along the conductors to
    include equivalent portions of both conductors in each of its various
    positions.

    (1)     Note.  Illustrative examples are:



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184,    for nonadjustable plural coil winding inductive devices where coils
    have different axes or are mounted on different core legs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 219+ for
    resonators of the distributed electrical parameter type, which structurally
    may be parallel transmission lines joined by a movable shorting bar, and
    subclasses 245+ for similar distributed electrical parameter lines which
    are operated at other than their resonant frequency thereby effecting an
    inductive or capacitive reactance at the terminals thereof.


CLS 336/139
TXT Subject matter under subclass 137 wherein the coil is formed of a helically
    or spirally wound conductor, a movable contactor being provided to make
    contact with the coil, the conductor contact being movable along the length
    of the helical or spiral conductor and maintaining a continuous contact
    with the conductor during such movement so that the conductor contact of
    the contactor travels in the helical or spiral path defined by the
    conductor and so that in the range of adjustment of the contactor the
    change in effective impedance is continuously changing (as distinguished
    from a step-by-step change).

    (1)     Note.  If the device is also provided with means so that the
    contact can be moved out of contact with the conductor to make a large
    discontinuous change in inductance, this will not exclude the patent from
    this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  An illustrative example is:



    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 10+ and the subclasses
    specified in the Notes thereto for mechanical mechanism for rotating a
    shaft including such mechanism designed for use with an adjustable inductor
    device.  Also see the search notes to subclass 10 of Class 74 for the
    classification of other rotary shaft moving mechanism and for the line
    between Class 336 and Class 74.

    334,    Tuners, subclasses 72+ for tuners having a variable inductor of the
    type in which a movable contact is adjusted over the length of the inductor.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 143+ for mechanically variable
    electrical resistors in which the contact terminal moves along the turns of
    the helical resistance element.


CLS 336/140
TXT Subject matter under subclass 139 having a plurality of contactors for
    contacting the helical or spiral conductor of the coil, or having a
    plurality of spiral or helical coils with a contactor, which follows and
    makes continuous contact with the conductor for each coil, the plural
    contactors being capable of being moved separately or differentially with
    respect to one another.

    (1)     Note.  Illustrative examples are:



CLS 336/141
TXT Subject matter under subclass 139 having the movable contactor movably
    mounted on and/or guided by an elongated bar or track member, the bar or
    track member extending parallel to or being co-incident with the coil axis.

    (1)     Note.  an illustrative example is:



CLS 336/142
TXT Subject matter under subclass 137 wherein the inductor device includes a
    plurality of coils with separate electrical contacts or a coil having
    contact means (e.g., taps) for making contact with the coil at different
    places and a supporting structure for the coils or coil, the supporting
    structure being provided with electrical contacts for making contact with
    less than all of the coils or with means for making contact at different
    places on the coil, the plurality of coils or the tapped coil being movably
    supported with respect to the supporting structure, and the coils or coil
    and supporting structure being designed so that as the coils or coil is
    moved, different coils or coil contacts can be moved into circuit making
    relation with the contacts in the supporting structure.

    (1)     Note.  In the devices in this and the indented subclass, the
    structure is designed for changing coils in the circuit or for varying the
    amount of coil conductor in the circuit.  The distinguishing feature is
    that the coil change or conductor length is changed by moving the coils or
    coil, rather than by having the coils or coil stationary and moving a
    contactor (e.g., switch into contact with the coil terminals or along the
    coil.

    (2)     Note.  Where the device has a plurality of coils, the coils must be
    arranged so as not to be movable with respect to each other when in circuit
    making relation with the contacts so as to vary the effective inductance of
    the device.  If the effective inductance of the device can be changed by
    moving the coils relative to each other, see subclasses 115+ above.

    (3)     Note.  An illustrative example is:



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for inductor devices where the length of the coil conductor is
    changed by winding or unwinding the conductor on the coil.

    115+,   for inductor devices which are provided with relatively movable
    coils for changing the effective inductance of the device.

    149,    for inductor devices where the effective length of the coil
    conductor is changed by sliding a contactor along the coil winding.

    150,    for inductor devices wherein the inductor is provided with taps and
    a tap changing switch is provided.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 255,
    340, and 354 for miscellaneous impedance systems where-in a plurality of
    impedances (e.g., inductor devices) are provided and means are provided for
    selecting the impedance which may be included in the circuit.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 179 for oscillator systems wherein the
    generated oscillation frequency may be changed in discrete steps by
    inductance coil substitution.

    334,    Tuners, subclasses 47+ for switch type tuners.


CLS 336/143
TXT Subject matter under subclass 137 wherein the inductor device is provided
    with a plurality of coil sections or a coil having means (e.g., taps) for
    making contact with the coil conductor at different places, the inductor
    device including means (e.g., a switch) to reverse the inductive effect of
    one coil section or part with respect to another coil section or part, and
    to thereby change the effective inductance of the inductor device.

    (1)     Note.  An illustrative example is:



CLS 336/144
TXT Subject matter under subclass 137 having adjustable means to selectively
    form a closed circuit with one or more turns of the coil.

    (1)     Note.  An illustrative example is:



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for inductor devices in which the number of effective turns of a
    coil is changed by winding or unwinding the coil conductors upon a short
    circuiting member.

    73+,    for inductor devices with closed coil, particularly indented
    subclasses 75+ where the closed coil (e.g., the short circuited turns) is
    movable relative to the coil.

    138,    for similar adjustable inductor devices having a plurality of
    parallel spaced coil members, a bridging member being movable along the
    coils to short circuit equivalent portions of both coils.


CLS 336/145
TXT Subject matter under subclass 137 wherein the inductor device is provided
    with a plurality of coils in mutually inductive relation.

    (1)     Note.  See the Notes to the class definition for the other classes
    which provide for plural coil inductive reactors and transformers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    where the coils are also movable relative to each other.

    138,    where the coils are spaced in parallel relationship and a movable
    contactor contacts both coils to include an equivalent portion of both
    coils in circuit.

    170+,   182+, 188, and 220, for the structure of nonadjustable inductive
    devices having plural windings (e.g., transformers).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 169 for amplifiers having transformer coupling
    including means to adjust the inductive coupling.


CLS 336/146
TXT Subject matter under subclass 145 having means for changing the coil length
    and/or connections of a plurality of the coils.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    where the coils are spaced in parallel relationship and a movable
    contactor contacts both coils to include an equivalent portion of both
    coils in circuit.

    143,    where one of the coils is provided with connection reversing means.

    144,    where one of the coils is provided with means to vary the number of
    short- circuited turns.


CLS 336/147
TXT Subject matter under subclass 145 in which there are a plurality of coils
    or coil portions which are connected in parallel relation with respect to
    each other, means being provided to change the coil length or connections
    of the parallel connected coils or coil portions.

    (1)     Note.  The change may be to change the coils or coil portions from
    parallel relation to series relation.

    (2)     Note.  The device may also include coils or coil portions connected
    in series with the parallel connected coils or coil portions.

    (3)     Note.  Illustrative examples are:



    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 346 for
    miscellaneous transformer systems where the transformer is provided with
    windings  which may be selectively connected wither in series or parallel.


CLS 336/148
TXT Subject matter under subclass 145 in which a coil portion forms at least a
    part of a plurality of coils.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are auto-transformers.

    (2)     Note.  An illustrative example is:



CLS 336/149
TXT Subject matter under subclass 137 comprising a coil and a contactor which
    travels on and across the successive conductor turns of the coil, making
    direct contact with the coil conductor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    for inductor devices having a plurality of parallel spaced coils, a
    movable contractor being provided to contact both coils to include an
    equivalent portion of both coils in circuit.

    139,    where the coil is a helical coil or spiral and the contactor
    follows the conductor so as to make continuous contact with the coil
    conductor.

    150,    for inductor devices with a tap changing switch.


CLS 336/150
TXT Subject matter under subclass 137 wherein the inductor coil is provided
    with a plurality of contact means so that the change in inductance can be
    effected by adding or subtracting turns or coil portions in series to the
    portion of the coil connected in the circuit.

    (1)     Note.  An illustrative example is:



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139,    where the coil is a helical coil or spiral, and the contactor
    follows the conductor so as to make continuous-contact with the coil
    conductor.

    142,    where the connections to the coil are changed by moving the coil
    (i.e., movable coil and fixed contacts).

    149,    where a contactor slides along the coil conductor, making direct
    contact with the coil conductor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 50 for
    tap changing means associated with a multi-cell battery which floats across
    another source of electrical energy.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 189 for tapped
    field or excitation windings of dynamoelectric machines, and subclass 200
    for tapped armature or primary windings of dynamoelectric machines.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 255
    and 340 for transformer systems with tapped windings.


CLS 336/155
TXT Inductor devices under the class definition comprising an inductor with no
    relatively movable parts wherein (1) the inductance thereof is variable in
    response to current flow therethrough or (2) a magnetic shunt or air gap is
    provided to cause a high leakage reactance between at least two
    magnetically coupled windings, or (3) the core saturation of the device is
    controlled by an auxiliary bias means such as a D.C. control winding.

    (1)     Note.  A disclosure in the specification of any of the above
    enumerated subject matter is sufficient to cause classification in this or
    indented subclasses of any patent that would otherwise be classified in the
    succeeding subclasses of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for inductor devices having a magnetic bias produced by a permanent
    magnet.

    178,    for closed type cores with their magnetic path interrupted by an
    air gap.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclasses 179+ for analogous generator or motor structure,
    and especially indented subclass 193 for generator or motor structure
    having nonmagnetic inserts or air gaps.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, particularly subclass
    282 for discharge device with a regulating transformer in the supply
    circuit.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 513 for electric motor
    armature circuit control systems utilizing a saturable reactor.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, particularly subclass 57
    for dynamoelectric generators with means to saturate a portion of the
    generator magnetic structure.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 56 for
    current and/or voltage magnitude control systems where the control means is
    a saturable transformer, and subclass 89 where the control means is a
    saturable reactor.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 8 for magnetic amplifiers (having a saturable
    reactor active element).

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 181 for oscillator systems having an
    oscillation frequency determining element comprising a variable inductance,
    which inductance may be of the saturable core type.

    332,    Modulators, particularly subclass 173 for amplitude modulators
    which may  utilize saturable inductors.


CLS 336/160
TXT Subject matter under subclass 155 comprising two or more magnetically
    coupled windings or coils mounted on a core having at least one auxiliary
    magnetic path which serves to divert a portion of the flux emanating from
    one or more of the windings or coils so as to prevent the said flux portion
    from linking one or more of the other windings or coils.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, particularly subclass 190
    for rotary dynamoelectric machine field structure having magnetic shunts
    for shifting the field flux.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, particularly subclass 50
    for dynamoelectric generator control means including a magnetic shunt for
    the field flux.


CLS 336/165
TXT Subject matter under subclass 160 having an air gap in the auxiliary
    magnetic path.

    (1)     Note.  The air gap may interrupt the auxiliary magnetic path
    partially or completely, and may constitute a nonmagnetic spacer or filler
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134+,   for relatively movable core and coil inductor apparatus having an
    adjustable air gap.

    178,    for closed type cores interrupted by an air gap wherein the purpose
    of the air gap is not disclosed as subject matter for subclasses 155+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 192 for generator
    or motor winding and core structure having nonmagnetic inserts or gaps.


CLS 336/170
TXT Inductor devices under the class definition comprising three or more
    windings, not elsewhere provided for.

    (1)     Note.  Inductors with polyphase windings which may have three or
    more windings are not classified in this subclass but such subject matter
    is classified above in subclasses 5+ of this class.

    (2)     Note.  Inductors which may have two or more windings and in
    addition a closed or short circuited coil or winding are not classified in
    this subclass but such subject matter is classified above in subclasses 73+
    of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5+,     and see (1) Note above.

    73,     and see (2) Note above.

    115+,   for inductive devices with relatively movable coils which may have
    three or more windings.

    130+,   for inductive devices having relatively movable core and coil,
    which may have three or more windings. See particularly indented subclass
    131 for inductors including plural cores and plural coils or windings.

    137+,   for inductive devices with means to change coil lengths or
    connections which may have three or more windings. See particularly
    indented subclasses 145+ for transformers with plural windings or coils.

    155+,   for inductive regulators which have plural windings.

    182+,   for inductor devices with two windings at least one of which is a
    plural coil winding.

    188,    for inductor devices having two windings with mutually crossed
    turns.

    214+,   for inductive devices having multiple magnetic paths which includes
    subject matter where such multiple magnetic paths have or are adapted to
    have three or more windings distributed thereon.

    220,    for inductive devices having two windings, not elsewhere provided
    for.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 184+ and 198+
    for plural field windings and plural armature or primary windings,
    respectively, for rotary dynamoelectric machines.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply Regulation Systems,  particularly
    subclasses 48+ for transformer systems with plural primary and/or secondary
    windings, and subclasses 83+ for inductor systems in general having plural
    windings.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 165+, 188+, and 195+ for amplifier systems
    having transformer coupling, particularly subclasses 171, 190, and 197
    where transformer structure is involved.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 291 for electromagnets of the lifting, traction
    and related types.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 867 for plural loop
    type antennas.


CLS 336/171
TXT Subject matter under subclass 170 wherein the inductor device and its
    windings are so constructed, positioned, arranged, and/or connected that at
    least one of the windings is electromagnetically decoupled with respect to
    the other windings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184,    for inductor devices having a winding with plural coils, so
    constructed or arranged that the axis of at least one coil is not
    coincident with the axes of the other coils.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, for wave transmission systems
    utilizing hybrid or three winding transformers wherein at least one winding
    is magnetically decoupled from the other windings.


CLS 336/172
TXT Inductor devices under the class definition wherein the inductor comprises
    a coil or winding having a turn or series of full turns which embrace the
    full transverse section of the core and which includes, in addition, one or
    more shorter turns which embrace only a portion of the transverse section
    of the core.  The core flux path may be a single solid or laminated core
    leg with a small piece thereof cut out to permit the "partial turns" to
    enclose a smaller cross-section of the core flux path than is enclosed by
    the full turns; or the core flux path may consist of two or more parallel
    core legs of a single core or of two independently constructed cores with
    the full turns enclosing the core legs in cross-section, and the "partial
    turns" enclosing in like manner fewer core legs than those enclosed by the
    full turns.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73,     for closed or short-circuited turns enclosing less cross-section of
    a flux path than those enclosed by full turns of the inductor.

    133     and 160+, for inductor devices of the adjustable or regulating type
    having core structures including a separate and distinct shunt magnetic
    path structure.


CLS 336/173
TXT Inductor devices under the class definition in which two or more coils or
    windings of the device, as defined by the limiting or boundary surfaces of
    their turns, cross each other so as to be interlinking.

    (1)     Note.  Inductors in which the individual turns of two or more coils
    or windings mutually cross each other are not classified under this or
    indented subclass, but will be found in subclass 188 below; inductors with
    plural coil windings where single turns of different coils may cross at one
    or more points are classified under subclasses 180+; coils, formed of
    plural parallel conductors which are transposed, are under subclass 187;
    and single coils with crossed turns are classified under subclasses 189+.

    (2)     Note.  Closed or short-circuited coils which may interlink with
    another coil or winding are not classified herein, but will be found in
    subclasses 73+ of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73+,    and see (2) Note, above.

    82,     for inductors where a coil forms the casing thereof and which may
    involve interlinked coils.

    175+,   for a core surrounding a linear conductor.

    180+,   and see (1) Note, above.

    187,    and see (1) Note, above.

    188,    and see (1) Note, above.

    189,    and see (1) Note, above.

    195,    for inductors where one coil has a conductor which receives another
    coil in a groove, recess, or hollow space of such conductor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 179+ for
    winding and core structures for rotary dynamoelectric machines, appropriate
    subclasses of which may have interlinking coils.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 127 for means for
    measuring, testing, or sensing electricity, per se, having a transformer
    coupling which may be of the type having interlinking coils or windings
    (e.g., current or potential instrument transformers).


CLS 336/174
TXT Subject matter under subclass 173 wherein one of the interlinking coils is
    a linear conductor and is surrounded by another coil.

    (1)     Note.  The linear conductor referred to above is regarded as a
    segment of a circular coil of infinite radius thereby bringing such subject
    matter within the definition of subclass 173 under which this subclass is
    indented.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175+,   for linear conductors surrounded by magnetic cores.


CLS 336/175
TXT Inductor devices under the class definition in which a linear conductor
    comprising the inductor winding or coil is surrounded by a magnetic core.

    (1)     Note.  Where both a coil and core surround a linear conductor the
    subject matter is classified above in subclass 174 of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173+,   for inductors with interlinked coils or windings (e.g., current
    transformers).

    221,    for the combination of a core and coil in general and not elsewhere
    classified.

    233,    for magnetic core structure in general not elsewhere classified.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 127 for means for
    measuring, testing, or sensing electricity, per se, having transformer
    coupling means, some of which are current transformers having a winding or
    coil comprised of a linear conductor.


CLS 336/176
TXT Subject matter under subclass 175 in which the magnetic core surrounding
    the linear conductor comprises plural parts which are hinged at some point,
    usually to facilitate placing the core about the conductor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132+,   for inductors with relatively movable core parts for varying the
    inductance of the inductor.

    210,    for inductors with core clamps, wedges or fasteners.

    212,    for inductor cores formed of plural parts.

    216+,   for joint structure of cores.


CLS 336/177
TXT Inductor devices under the class definition wherein the conductor of a coil
    of the device is constructed in whole or in part of magnetic material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213,    for cores formed of wound strip or filamentary material.

    222+,   for windings of inductors generally, including windings whose
    conductors are constructed of a special material.

    233+,   for magnetic cores of inductors generally, particularly for cores
    of special materials.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 62.51+ for the compositions of magnetic
    materials generally.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 544+ for stock
    material or intermediate articles which are all metal or have adjacent
    metal components, particularly subclasses 615+ for metallic composites
    defined in terms of the composition of their components, and subclass 928
    for metallic stock having magnetic properties.


CLS 336/178
TXT Inductor devices under the class definition comprising a structure having a
    closed core which is partially or completely interrupted at one or more
    points by nonmagnetic separators or air gaps.

    (1)     Note.  If the purpose of the nonmagnetic separator or gap is for
    the purpose of causing a leakage reactance which is usually a function of
    the load current of the device, the patent is not classified herein but
    rather in subclasses 155+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 192 for electric
    generator or motor winding and core structure having nonmagnetic inserts or
    air gaps.


CLS 336/179
TXT Inductor devices under the class definition wherein the coil or winding
    and/or supporting structure thereof is so constructed as to maintain the
    inductance of the device constant over a predetermined range of ambient
    temperature, or wherein the device is designed to follow a predetermined
    law of variation of inductance with ambient temperature.

    (1)     Note.  The inductance of the device may be maintained constant by
    (1) utilizing structural components having equal compensatory temperature
    coefficients, or (2) utilizing winding and/or supporting structure members
    having constant temperature coefficients.

    (2)     Note.  Inductor devices controlled by an external temperature
    sensitive element are not herein included.  For such subject matter see
    subclass 30.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 70 for compositions having specific
    temperature response characteristics.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 105+ for electric
    meters with thermal compensation means.

    334,    Tuners, subclasses 5+ for condition responsive tuners which may
    involve coils with temperature compensating means.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 140 for
    electromagnet circuits having means for compensating for thermal changes,
    and subclasses 158 and 161+ for electromagnet systems that are thermally
    responsive.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 616+ for a
    metallic composite which is arcuately deflectable by a temperature change.


CLS 336/180
TXT Inductor devices under the class definition wherein the device is comprised
    of at least one winding having a plurality of coils which are connected or
    are specifically designed to be connected together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for inductors of the polyphase type which may include windings with
    plural coils.

    73+     and 115+, for relatively movable coils which may include windings
    with plural coils.

    131,    for relatively movable core and coil which may include windings
    with plural coils.

    137,    for inductors with means to change coil length or connections which
    may include windings with plural coils.

    155+,   for inductive regulators which may have windings with plural coils.

    170+,   for inductors with three or more windings wherein at least one of
    said windings may be comprised of plural coils.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 179+ for
    winding and core structure for dynamoelectric machines, appropriate
    subclasses of which may include windings having plural coils.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 44+
    for transformer systems, and subclasses 82+ for reactors appropriate
    subclasses of which may include windings with plural coils.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 291+ for structure of lifting, holding and
    similar magnets, appropriate subclasses of which may include windings with
    plural coils.


CLS 336/181
TXT Subject matter under subclass 180 in which the coils of the winding are so
    positioned, constructed and connected that the resultant external magnetic
    field set up, when current is caused to flow in each of the coils, is
    substantially reduced or cancelled (i.e., so-called "fieldless" coils).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83,     for inductors completely enclosed by a core.

    84,     for inductors with electric and/or magnetic shielding means.

    189+,   for coils with crossed turns, which may be wound to reduce external
    fields.

    225+,   for coils of special configuration some of whose shapes may be of
    significance in reducing external fields, particularly subclass 229,
    toroidal coils, indented thereunder which are known to reduce external
    fields.


CLS 336/182
TXT Subject matter under subclass 180 in which the inductor includes two
    windings, at least one of which is formed of plural coils.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5+,     for inductors with two or more windings adapted for polyphase use.

    170+,   for inductors with three or more windings.

    220,    for inductors having two windings wherein each winding consists of
    a single coil.  Note particularly the subclasses of this class and the
    outside classes specified in the Notes to subclass 220 as to other fields
    of search for plural winding inductors wherein at least one of the windings
    may include plural coils.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 165+, 188+, and 195+ for amplifier systems
    having transformer coupling, particularly subclasses 171, 190, and 197
    where transformer structure is involved.


CLS 336/183
TXT Subject matter under subclass 182 in which at least one coil of one winding
    is positioned between separate coils of another winding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69+,    for inductors with coil balancing means which may also have plural
    coil windings with interposed coils.


CLS 336/184
TXT Subject matter under subclass 180 wherein the coils of an inductor winding
    are distributed on different legs of the inductor core means, or wherein at
    least two coils of an inductor winding are so positioned that their axes do
    not coincide.

    (1)     Note.  For relevant material in other classes see the search notes
    to other classes under subclasses 180 and 182 of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for adjustable inductors wherein a coil conductor is wound from one
    coil supporting form to another having a different axis.

    69+,    for inductors with coil capacitance balancing means which also may
    have a winding with plural coils distributed on different axes or different
    core legs.

    115+,   for relatively movable coils particularly subclasses 121 and 122+
    which may have plural windings distributed on different axes or core legs.

    131,    for relatively movable core and coil with plural coils and plural
    cores which may have a winding with plural coils distributed on different
    axes of core legs.

    137+,   for inductors with means to change coil length or connections which
    may have windings with plural coils distributed on different axes or core
    legs.

    155+,   for inductive regulators with no movable parts which may have
    plural coils of a winding distributed on different core legs or wherein the
    axes of the coils of a winding do not coincide.

    170+,   for inductors with three or more windings of which one may be
    plural coil with the coils distributed on different axes or core legs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, particularly subclasses
    184+ for rotary dynamo-electric machine field structures having plural
    field coils on separate poles and which may be connected to form a single
    winding.


CLS 336/185
TXT Subject matter under subclass 180 comprising preformed supporting, holding
    or spacing means which supports, holds or maintains in spaced apart
    relationship a plurality of coils of a winding.

    (1)     Note.  Supports for the closely similar organization of plural
    windings not involving a plural coil winding, are excluded from this
    subclass and are classified in subclasses 199+ of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for inductors with ventilating passages, particularly for structure
    establishing such passages by spacing apart coils of a plural coil winding
    or wherein such passages are a part of the coil supporting structure.

    65+,    for supports for inductors in general designed to support the
    inductor with respect to its environment.

    92,     for supports for inductors with casing where the support is
    specifically adapted to maintain the inductor fixed relative to the casing.

    195,    for inductors wherein one coil having a grooved, hollow or recessed
    conductor portion supports another coil within said portion.

    196+,   for supporting or spacing means between coil and core of an
    inductor, particularly subclass 198 indented thereunder for preformed
    insulation between coil and core.

    199+,   and see (1) Note above.

    209,    for inductor coils with outer windings or binders.


CLS 336/186
TXT Inductor devices under the class definition comprising a coil having
    convolutions or turns formed of plural strand or multiple type conductors,
    which strands or conductors are electrically connected in parallel.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass is distinguished from
    that of subclass 180 of this class in that, of the parallel connected
    plural coils which may be found therein, each coil is a separate entity, as
    established in the definition of coil immediately under the class
    definition, whereas in this subclass (186) each of the plural conductors is
    not constructed to function as a separate inductor coil, but all the
    parallel connected conductors together are constructed and arranged to
    function as a single coil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    for inductors with parallel spaced conductors or coils bridged by a
    movable connector.

    147,    for inductors having plural coils or windings connected in parallel
    or series and parallel.

    180,    and see (1) Note, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, particularly subclasses
    24+, and 68.1+ for plural conductor cables or conductors, especially
    subclasses 113+ indented under subclass 68.1 for multiple conductors
    wherein the individual conductors are insulated from each other, and
    subclasses 128+ indented under subclass 68 for plural strand conductors
    wherein the individual strands are uninsulated.


CLS 336/187
TXT Subject matter under subclass 186 in which the plural conductors comprising
    the coil are transposed in positional relationship to each other at a
    plurality of points.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188,    for plural windings with mutually crossed turns.

    189+,   for a coil with crossed turns.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, particularly subclass 34
    for multiple conductor or cable structure wherein the conductors are
    transposed in relative position, usually for the purpose of reducing the
    effect of mutual inductance between the conductors.


CLS 336/188
TXT Inductor devices under the class definition wherein the device comprises
    two windings whose respective turns are mutually crossed at a plurality of
    points.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75+     and 115+, for inductors with relatively movable coils whose
    respective conductors may cross at different positional adjustments of the
    coils.

    173+,   for interlinking coils.  The coils do not have mutually crossed
    turns but the coils as a whole are interlinking.  Subclass 174 indented
    under 173 has a linear conductor as one coil.

    182+,   for plural windings with plural coils.

    189+,   for coils wherein the coil conductor crosses at a plurality of
    points in successive convolutions of the coil conductor.


CLS 336/189
TXT Inductor devices under the class definition comprising inductor coils in
    which the conductor thereof is in crossed relationship with itself at a
    plurality of points in its length.

    (1)     Note.  Transposed parallel connected conductors and plural windings
    with mutually crossed turns are classified in subclasses 187 and 188,
    respectively, of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172,    for inductors wherein the winding or coil has at least one turn of
    reduced length which links only a portion of the flux path and which turn
    may cross the remaining full turns of the winding or coil.

    173,    for inductors with interlinked coils.

    187,    and see (1) Note, above.

    188,    and see (1) Note, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, appropriate subclasses
    under 179+, which include coils and windings with crossed turns
    particularly subclasses 206 and 207 for lap and wave windings.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 291+ for magnets and electromagnets structure of
    the lifting, holding or tractive type which may include coils of the
    bank-wound or other cross-wound types.  See subclass 210 for electronic and
    ionic beam deflecting coils which are usually of the scramble-wound type.


CLS 336/190
TXT Subject matter under subclass 189 wherein the inductor comprises a coil of
    more than one layer of conductor (e.g., honeycomb and random or scramble
    wound coils).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75      and 115+, for inductors with relatively movable coils and wherein
    the conductors of the coil conductors may mutually cross.

    188,    for inductors with plural windings having mutually crossed turns.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 593 for
    metallic stock material of honeycomb configuration.


CLS 336/191
TXT Subject matter under subclass 189 wherein the inductor comprises a single
    layer coil of the basket weave type.  This subclass includes basket weave
    coils where the layer is concentric to the coil axis and spider web coils
    where the layer lies in a surface normal to the coil axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232,    for disc type coils.


CLS 336/192
TXT Inductor devices under the class definition comprising inductors with
    means, such as terminal lugs, for effecting external electrical connection
    to the inductor coil conductor ends, or wherein means are provided to
    effect electrical connection intermediate the coil conductor ends (e.g.,
    tap connections), and/or wherein means are provided to fasten or tie in the
    end turn or turns of the coil conductor to prevent loosening or unravelling
    thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The terminal connectors of the quick detachable type (e.g.,
    plug and socket type) when combined with an inductor device are excluded
    from the above subclass and will be found in subclass 107, above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for coil end holding means associated with coil winding or
    unwinding.

    107,    and see (1) Note above.

    185,    for coil supports and spacers for plural coil windings,
    particularly for coil end or connecting means between coils having such
    supports or spacers.

    199+,   for coil turn supports or spacers, particularly indented subclass
    200 for coated conductive means used as a terminal or tap, indented
    subclass 205 for coil terminals, taps or end means embedded in plastic
    material, and indented subclass 206 for flexible filaments, strip or sheet
    insulation used to anchor coil terminal ends.

    223,    for inductor windings with coil conductor of particular shape.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 115+ for cord and rope
    holders particularly indented subclasses 122.3 and 122.6 for holders for
    sheathed strand and plural-strand cord or rope (which includes similarly
    constructed electrical conductors where no electrical features are claimed.)

    29,     Metal Working, appropriate subclasses for methods of manufacture
    and special apparatus for assembly and disassembly of metal articles and
    the like, generally particularly subclasses 874+ for methods of manufacture
    of contacts and terminals, subclasses 602.1+ methods of manufacture of
    electromagnets, transformers, and inductances, especially subclass 605 with
    winding and coiling which includes the anchoring of coil ends.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    47+ for methods of making electrical conductors of indefinite length,
    noting subclass 49, indented thereunder, which is specific to splicing.
    See also appropriate subclasses in this class (156) for apparatus and
    methods involving winding and wrapping.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, appropriate subclasses for
    electrical conductor and insulator structure in general, particularly,
    subclasses 19+ for conduit or cable end structure with fluid or vacuum and
    subclasses 21+ for conduit or cable joint structure with fluid or vacuum,
    subclasses 68.1+ for conduit, cable and conductor structure in general,
    especially indented subclasses 71+ for branched structures, indented
    subclass 73 for joint and end structure and subclasses 84+ for joint
    structure.

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, particularly subclasses
    12.2+ for flexible electrical conductors having an end secured to a reel
    structure and adapted to be wound thereon.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 379+ and 125+ for means
    to connect an end of an elongated material to a spool or core.

    248,    Supports, for supports of general application, particularly
    subclasses 49+ for pipe or cable supports, and subclasses 329+ for cord
    supported reels.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, particularly subclasses
    40+ for rotary dynamoelectric machines, especially subclass 71 of such
    machines combined with connectors, terminals or lead-ins, subclass 234 for
    commutators having winding connectors, subclass 260 for stator structure
    with end turn supports and subclass 270 for rotor structure with end turn
    supports.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 867 for loop type
    antennas with plural taps or tapped coils.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for electrical
    connectors, generally. Search especially subclasses 1+ for a pair of
    relatively movable electrical connectors; subclasses 445+ for an
    electrical connectors with a pivoted guard for the line cord;  subclasses
    449+ for an electrical connectors with a stress relieving means; and
    subclasses 877+ for a metallic connector or contact also having securing
    part adapted to be crimped, deformed or bent onto a conductor.


CLS 336/195
TXT Inductor devices under the class definition wherein one coil conductor
    supports another coil conductor in specifically provided channels, grooves,
    recesses, or hollow spaces within such supporting coil conductor.

    (1)     Note.  Where one coil merely supports another without especially
    designed spaces within the coil conductor for receiving the supported coil,
    such subject matter is not in this subclass, but will be found in subclass
    185 where plural coil windings are involved or in subclass 208 of this
    class where one coil forms a preformed support for another.

    (2)     Note.  Where a supporting coil completely encloses the supported
    coil such subject matter is not in this subclass but will be found in
    subclass 82 of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for inductors with hollow conductors adapted for passage of cooling
    fluid there-through.

    65+,    for inductors with means to support them relative to their
    environment.

    82,     for inductors where coil forms casing. See (2) Note above.

    92,     for inductors with means to support them relative to an enclosing
    casing.

    185,    for inductor coil supports or spacers for plural coil windings.
    See also (1) Note, above.

    199+,   for inductor coil or coil turn supports.

    220,    for inductors with plural windings generally not elsewhere provided
    for.

    223,    for windings having a coil conductor of particular shape.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, particularly subclasses
    28+ for co-axial or concentric conductors, subclasses 102+ for conductors
    with conductive armor or sheath, subclasses 113+ for electrical conductor
    structure, per se.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 544+ for stock
    materials, e.g., of indefinite length which are all metal or have adjacent
    metal components.


CLS 336/196
TXT Inductor devices under the class definition comprising the combination of
    coil and core with means to hold the coil and core in fixed relative
    relation to each other or wherein electrical insulating material is
    interposed between the core and coil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     30+, 60, 77, 83, 100, 110, 117+, 130+, 155+, 175+, 178, 184, and
    185 for combinations of coil and core which may include electrical
    insulating material between coil and core or which may have means to
    support or space the coil relative to the core.  See also the comprehensive
    list of search notes appended to subclass 221 of this class as to other
    fields of search for the combination of coil and core which may include
    structure falling within the definition of this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 179+ for
    windings and core structure for rotary dynamoelectric machines,
    particularly subclass 215 for core slot liners for insulating winding
    conductors from the core.


CLS 336/197
TXT Subject matter under subclass 196 wherein the means for holding the coil
    relative to the core includes a clamping or wedging means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210,    for inductors having means to clamp, wedge, or otherwise fasten
    elements of the core, such as magnetic laminations, together.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 499 for tie downs and subclasses 500+ for
    holddowns of general application.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, especially subclass 214
    for coil retainers or slot closers for holding dynamoelectric machine
    windings fixed relative to their associated core means.


CLS 336/198
TXT Subject matter under subclass 196 wherein there is a structure of
    predetermined shape (e.g., a spool) of electrically insulating material
    interposed between coil and core.

    (1)     Note.  Ordinary stock material which is not preformed especially to
    adapt it to its separating and insulating function in the particular coil
    and core combination involved is not in this subclass but in subclass 196
    above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for preformed spacing means to establish ventilating passages
    inside an inductor for cooling.

    185,    for preformed coil spacing and support means in plural coil
    windings.

    199+,   for coil or coil turn support spacers, particularly indented
    subclass 208 for coils on preformed supports or mounts.

    209,    for inductors with outer coil wrappers or binders.

    219,    for core insulation between laminations or core parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, particularly subclasses
    194 for dynamoelectric machine field or excitation coil supports or spools,
    usually of preformed insulating material, and subclass 215 for core slot
    liners of preformed insulating material for insulating the core from the
    coil.


CLS 336/199
TXT Inductor devices under the class definition comprising supports or forms
    for coils, coil conductors or coil conductor turns, or means to space coil
    conductors, coil conductor turns, or spacers and supports for more than one
    coil (each said one coil constituting a separate independent winding) and
    which support or spacing means is not provided for in any of the preceding
    subclasses.

    (1)     Note.  Spacers between separate coils of a plural coil winding and
    supports for plural coil windings are in subclass 185.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for ventilated inductors with spacing means to provide passageways
    between coils or windings for cooling fluids.

    65+,    for coils and means to support them relative to their environment.

    82,     for coils which form a casing for the inductor.

    92,     for coil supports where the inductor is specifically supported
    within and relative to a casing.

    107,    for coil support features included in or in combination with
    terminals of the quick detachable type.

    179,    for coil supports including temperature compensation means (e.g.,
    coils on temperature invariant coil forms).

    185,    and see (1) Note above.

    192,    for such coil support features associated with coil and anchoring
    means, terminals or taps.

    195,    for coils supported in a grooved or hollow conductor.

    196+,   for coil turn supports or spacer means associated with support or
    spacing between coil and core.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, particularly subclasses 602.1+ for processes of
    manufacture of inductor devices in general, and note especially the
    comprehensive list of classes referred to under "SEARCH CLASS" of this
    subclass as to other product, manufacturing or process classes which may
    include processes for making inductors having particular coil supports,
    coil spacers or coil conductor turn spacers, or the resulting product.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, particularly subclasses
    179+ for windings and core structure for rotary dynamoelectric machines,
    especially indented subclass 194 for field winding supports and spools, and
    indented subclass 209 for armature coil structure, per se.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 291+ for the structure including coil, coil
    conductor supports or spacers, for electromagnets of the lifting, holding
    or tractive type.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 866+ for loop type
    antennas with coil or coil turn supports or spacers.


CLS 336/200
TXT Subject matter under subclass 199 wherein the inductor coil structure
    comprises a conductive coating material on a base.  For example, such as
    produced by a printing, painting, spraying, electro-deposition or similar
    coating method, or by the removal of adherent conducting material from an
    insulating base by etching, grinding, or the like.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, especially subclasses 602.1+ for processes of
    manufacture of inductor devices in general.  See the comprehensive list of
    classes referred to under "SEARCH CLASS," of subclasses 602.1+ of Class 29,
    as to other classes which may include processes for making printed circuit
    type electrical devices or the resulting products.

    101,    Printing, appropriate subclasses for apparatus and processes for
    producing characters or designs on surfaces by impression of type or dies
    or by applying coating material to a surface through openings in a pattern
    sheet (e.g., stenciling).

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    2+ for etching processes of producing surface effects, subclass 154 for
    abrading or grinding of a laminated product and subclass 155 for removal or
    destruction of transitory material by dissolving or melting, etc.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus and processes utilizing electrical energy or wave energy, either
    electromagnetic or mechanical, for forming particular shapes or coating
    surfaces, such as printed circuit type configurations.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 748+ for
    structural combinations of diverse impedance elements such as inductors,
    capacitors or resistors not elsewhere classifiable and which may be of the
    printed circuit type.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, especially subclasses 55+ for an electrical
    connector combined with a preformed panel circuit arrangement (e.g.,
    printed circuit board).

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 28+ for a process for producing a surface
    effect by abrading.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 334+ for components restricted to
    use in radio apparatus and which may be of the printed circuit type.


CLS 336/205
TXT Subject matter under subclass 199 wherein the conductor forming the coil is
    wholly or partially embedded in plastic supporting or adhesive electrically
    insulating material, which material holds or supports the adjacent coil
    conductor portions in spaced apart relation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     for potted-type inductors wherein the preformed inductor is
    embedded in plastic, electrically insulating material.

    189+,   for coil structures with crossed turns, including bank wound and
    basket weave coils, wherein the coil conductor turns may be held in
    position by plastic or adhesive material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, especially subclasses 602.1+ for the process of
    manufacture of inductor devices, not elsewhere classifiable, and which may
    include the step of adhering coil conductor turns to a base member or the
    step of molding plastic material about coil conductor turns to hold them in
    fixed relation to each other.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    52+ for covering of electrical conductors of indefinite length with
    preformed material.  See other appropriate subclasses in this class for
    methods and apparatus for manufacture of laminated materials and analogous
    structures not provided for elsewhere.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, particularly subclass 96
    for plural conduit-ducts or conductors or subclass 98 for conduit-duct or
    conductors that are embedded in material which may be plastic.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses, for processes within the class definition, for
    molding or shaping plastic materials. See particularly subclasses 272.11+
    which pertain particularly to electrical component encapsulating.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 226+ for electrical resistors
    embedded, incased or housed, and especially subclasses 262+ and 275 wherein
    the casing is formed as a coating on or molded on the resistance element.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 110+ for a molding apparatus combined with means to feed or
    support a preform in a molding cavity for encapsulation thereof, see
    especially subclasses 123+ for such apparatus including means to support
    plural preforms.


CLS 336/206
TXT Subject matter under subclass 199 wherein flexible filament, strip, or
    sheet insulation holds, supports or maintains in spaced apart relation
    adjacent coil conductor portions, coil layers, or coils.

    (1)     Note.  For separate coils separated by insulation, which coils form
    part of a single winding, see subclass 185 above.

    (2)     Note.  Coils wherein the flexible insulating material forms only
    the outer wrapper or binder for the coil are not in this subclass but will
    be found in subclass 209, below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185,    and see (1) Note above.

    191,    for basket weave type coils wherein flexible filament or strip
    material is interwoven with the coil conductor.

    205,    for similar coil structures wherein the coil conductors or coils
    are cemented to or embedded in the flexible filament, strip or sheet
    insulation.

    209,    and see (2) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, particularly subclasses 602.1+ for processes of
    manufacture assembly or disassembly of inductor devices including the
    utilization of flexible insulating material in the manufacture thereof.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for methods and apparatus for manufacture of
    laminated materials and analogous structures not provided for elsewhere,
    e.g., by winding.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, particularly subclasses
    120+ and 124, for conductors covered with flexible sheet insulating
    material, and subclass 143 for condenser type bushings utilizing flexible
    sheet insulating material.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 430+ for a process or
    apparatus for forming an article by winding material (e.g., wire and tape)
    onto a core, subclasses 444.1+ for simultaneously winding electrically
    conductive and nonconductive strips on a core to form an article, usually a
    capacitor, and subclasses 602+ for a spool having structure to maintain
    coil convolutions or layers in spaced apart relationship.


CLS 336/207
TXT Subject matter under subclass 199 wherein means are provided for
    maintaining coil turns or adjacent portions of the coil conductor in spaced
    apart relation.  The means, by way of example, may be individual spacers or
    coil conductor holding grooves of a coil supporting form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for coil turn or coil spacing means which forms spacers for passage
    of ventilating or cooling fluids.

    62,     for spacers to separate or support the turns of hollow conductors
    (adapted for flow of cooling fluid through the conductor).

    135,    for coil turn spacing or coil spacing means or support means for
    plural coil windings.

    136+,   for coil spacing means or supports associated with parallel
    connected conductors.

    138,    for plural windings with mutually crossed turns including coil
    conductor spacing means.

    139+,   for coils with crossed turns which include coil conductor spacing
    means or wherein the crossed turns inherently act as spacers.

    179,    for coil turn spacing means associated with means for compensating
    for inductance changes caused by temperature changes.

    195,    for coils with grooved or hollow conductors for supporting and
    spacing a conductor of another coil.

    196+,   for the combination of coil and core having spacing or supporting
    means between coil and core.

    200,    for printed circuit type coils.

    205,    for coils wherein the coil turns are cemented to a support or are
    embedded in a plastic material.

    206,    for coils or coil conductor turns separated by flexible filament
    strip or sheet insulation.


CLS 336/208
TXT Subject matter under subclass 199 comprising coil supports having a
    definite shape and which are not provided for in any of the preceding
    subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173+,   for interlinked coils having preformed supporting means.

    179,    for coils having supports or forms adapted to remain invariant in
    dimensions or which compensate for changes in ambient temperature of the
    device.

    185,    for preformed supports for plural coil windings.

    195,    for coils with grooved or hollow conductors for supporting the
    conductor of another coil.

    196+,   particularly indented subclass 198 for preformed electrical
    insulation between a coil and associated core.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles,  particularly subclasses
    12.2+ for flexible electrical conductors and combined take up reels.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 600+ and 118+ for spool
    construction of general use.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, particularly subclass 194
    for field coil supports and spools for rotary type dynamoelectric machines.


CLS 336/209
TXT Inductor devices under the class definition comprising coils or windings
    externally wrapped or bound with flexible insulating sheet or tape and not
    previously provided for in any of the subclasses above.

    (1)     Note.  See preceding subclass 206 of this class for coil structures
    wherein flexible filament, strip, or sheet insulation is employed to hold,
    support, or separate adjacent coil conductor portions, coil layers or
    coils.  Where the coils separated by insulation form part of a single
    winding, see subclass 185 of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90,     for inductors with casings or housings.

    185,    and see (1) Note above.

    192,    for windings with terminals, taps or coil end anchoring means which
    may utilize flexible sheet or strip insulation.

    206,    and see (1) Note above.  See also the search notes appended to
    subclass 206 as to further fields of search for subject matter similar to
    that provided for in subclass 209.


CLS 336/210
TXT Inductor devices under the class definition comprising inductor core
    structure with means for fastening plural parts of the core or the core
    laminations into a single integral core.

    (1)     Note.  Cores wherein the core parts are held together by
    interfitting or interlocking portions of the core parts or by adhesive
    material, such as cement, are excluded from this subclass.  For such
    subject matter search the subclasses below, particularly subclasses 212,
    216+, 219, and 233+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for inductors with means to deform or distort the core to adjust
    its inductance.

    65+,    for inductors having means for supporting the inductor relative to
    its environment.

    92,     for inductor with casing or housing means with means to support the
    inductor with respect to such casing or housing.

    96,     for inductor with casing or housing means wherein the inductor is
    embedded in plastic material.

    98,     for inductors with casings and wherein the core is clamped between
    portions of the casing so that a portion of the core is exposed.

    100,    for inductors with means, in addition to the core part fastening
    means, for inhibiting or damping core vibrations.

    132+,   for adjustable inductor structures with relatively movable core
    parts and having means for holding the plural parts of the core with
    respect to each other.

    176,    for inductors having a core with a pivot or hinge between elements
    thereof.

    196+,   for supporting and spacing means between coil and core.

    212,    for inductors wherein the core is comprised of plural parts which
    have interlocking or interfitting portions.

    214+,   for multiple magnetic path cores.

    216+,   for inductors having cores with particular joint structure.

    219,    for inductors with core insulation (e.g., between laminations).

    233,    for core structure generally, especially indented subclass 234 for
    laminated core structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., appropriate subclasses for various
    types of fastening means in general (e.g., clasps, bale and package ties,
    strap fasteners and the like).

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses for article supports in general,
    particularly subclass 361 for holddowns.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, particularly subclass 217
    for core structures for rotary type dynamoelectric machines with means for
    securing core laminations, and subclass 218 for pole assembly and securing
    means.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 291+ for lifting,  holding or traction magnets
    which may include means for fastening core parts together.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for joints of
    general utility.


CLS 336/211
TXT Inductor devices under the class definition comprising inductor core
    structure formed of concentric, nested, or telescoped core elements of
    magnetic material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83,     for inductors where the core forms the casing of the device.

    84+,    for inductors having magnetic shielding means which may be of the
    concentric type.

    177,    for inductors having coils with coil conductors of magnetic
    material.

    213,    for wound cores.

    233+,   for general core structure not elsewhere provided for, particularly
    subclass 234 indented thereunder for laminated cores.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 10+ for
    dynamoelectric machine structure, particularly indented subclasses 14, 23+,
    30, and 34+, for nonrotary type machines having concentric element core
    structures wherein one of the elements is a plunger armature, and
    subclasses 40+, appropriate subclasses, for rotary type machines with
    concentric type relatively rotatable core elements.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 256+ for concentric core structure for plunger
    type armatures and subclasses 291+ for lifting, holding or tractive type
    magnets with diverse core elements wherein one of the elements is a plunger
    armature.


CLS 336/212
TXT Inductor devices under the class definition comprising a core of preformed
    parts, each part of which may be a single integral structure of magnetic
    material or wherein each part may be built up of separate sheets or wires
    of magnetic material (e.g., and assemblage of preformed laminated magnetic
    leg or yoke members).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     20, 40+, 60, 61, 77, 83, 84+, 98, 100, 110, 117+, 130+, 155+, 172,
    175+, 177, 178, 184, 196+, 210, and 211, for combinations of coil and core
    wherein the core may be of the plural part type. See particularly subclass
    176, above, for plural part cores which are hinged for relative angular
    movement to permit insertion of a coil or coil conductor, and see also,
    subclass 210 above for plural part cores combined with means such as a
    clamp or wedging means, to hold the core parts together.

    233,    for core structure in general and note especially the search notes
    listed thereunder as to other fields of search for core structure including
    plural part core structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, particularly subclasses
    216+ for dynamoelectric machine core features, including plural part cores,
    subclasses 254+ for stator core structures, and subclasses 261+ for rotor
    core structures.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 296+ for various core structures wherein one
    section may be an operator for an electric circuit breaker.


CLS 336/213
TXT Inductor devices under the class definition comprising inductor core
    structure formed of a continuous, wound strip or filament of magnetic
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177,    for inductors wherein the coil conductor is of magnetic material.

    211,    for inductor cores formed of separate concentric or nested core
    elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, particularly subclass 605 for inductor assembly
    including winding or coiling of core material and subclass 609 for
    laminating core material, including winding and coiling, in general.

    72,     Metal Deforming,  subclasses 66, 135+ and 146+ for a method of or a
    means for bending metal into helical or spiral coil form.

    140,    Wireworking, appropriate subclasses for methods and apparatus for
    winding and for shaping wire of magnetic material to form cores.

    148,    Metal Treatment, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses
    100+ for working, including winding and coiling, and heat treatment of
    magnetic core materials.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for processes and apparatus for making laminated
    products not provided for elsewhere, e.g., by assembling, winding,
    wrapping, folding, etc., of filaments, sheets or webs.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 430+ for a process or
    apparatus for forming an article by winding material onto a core.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet not elsewhere provided for, and especially subclasses 364+ for a
    structurally defined or coated rod, strand, fiber or filament, which may be
    of a magnetic material.


CLS 336/214
TXT Inductor devices under the class definition comprising inductor core
    structure with more than one independent and distinct closed loop of
    magnetic material, the loops forming closed magnetic circuits adapted to
    thread through and about the coil means of the inductor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5+,     for similar structures limited by claimed subject matter to
    polyphase inductor structure.

    83,     for inductors wherein the coil means is totally enclosed within the
    core means, except for openings for the coil leads.

    155+,   particularly 160+, for inductors of the saturable or high leakage
    reactance type having cores with multiple magnetic paths.

    184,    for inductors with plural coil windings wherein the coils may be on
    different core legs.

    211,    for inductors with concentric or nested core elements which may
    form separate magnetic loops.

    212,    for inductors having plural part cores, e.g., separate preformed
    leg and yoke members forming separate magnetic loops.

    213,    for inductors having a core comprising separate loops each formed
    of wound magnetic material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, particularly subclasses
    179+, 254+ and 261+ for rotary type dynamoelectric machine core structure
    involving plural magnetic paths.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 289+ for lifting, holding and tractive
    electromagnets in general which may have plural separate magnetic paths.


CLS 336/215
TXT Subject matter under subclass 214 wherein the number of independent and
    distinct closed loops of magnetic material is three or more.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5+,     for similar structures limited by claimed subject matter to
    polyphase inductor structure which may have three or more separate magnetic
    paths relative to a particular coil.


CLS 336/216
TXT Inductor device under the class definition comprising the particular core
    structure at the point of juncture of magnetic elements or parts of the
    core.  The elements or parts are usually the leg and yoke members of the
    core.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132+,   for inductors having plural joined core parts with means to permit
    relative movement therebetween for adjusting the inductance of the device.

    165     and 178, for inductor cores having a high reluctance gap in the
    magnetic circuit, which gap may be bridged by nonmagnetic material to
    effect a joint between the two opposed parts of the core.

    173,    for inductors having a core with a joint comprising hinged parts to
    permit clamping of the core about a conductor or coil means.

    210,    for inductor core joint structure with means, in addition to the
    core elements themselves, to clamp, wedge or otherwise hold the core
    elements together.

    212,    for inductor cores comprising an assemblage of preformed core parts
    (such as leg sections and yoke sections) which include significant joint
    structure between the parts.

    213,    for inductor cores having joints between core elements of coiled or
    wound magnetic material.

    214+,   for inductor cores with core elements providing multiple magnetic
    paths and having significant joint structure between the elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 602.1+ for processes of manufacture
    assembly of inductor devices, especially indented subclass 606 for assembly
    of coil and core, and subclasses 607+ for core assembly. Apparatus for
    assembling an electrical inductor device may be found in subclasses 729+,
    and a device for securing parts together by a hollow rivet, when not
    elsewhere classifiable, may be found in subclass 243.52.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 101+ for a process of
    metallurgically bonding an electrical connection and especially subclasses
    179+ for a process of a metallurgically bonding plural joints of electrical
    devices.  See the search notes in Class 228 for other classes and
    subclasses providing for making electrical joint structure.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 10+ for
    dynamoelectric machine structure, indented subclasses 40+ for rotary
    machines particularly subclasses 179+ for winding and core structure of
    rotary machines, subclasses 216+ indented under subclass 179, providing for
    core features including joint structure, subclasses 254+ providing for
    stator structure in general, while subclasses 261+ provides for rotor
    structure in general, which structures may include joint structure.

    403,    Joint and Connections, appropriate subclasses for joints of general
    utility.


CLS 336/217
TXT Subject matter under subclass 216 wherein the elements or parts comprising
    the core joint consists of groups of plates or laminations of magnetic
    material, which are interleaved at the core joint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210,    for inductor cores, usually of the laminated type, with clamps,
    wedges or fasteners to hold the laminations together at the core joint.

    211,    for inductor cores comprising concentric or nested core elements
    with joint structure between elements.

    213,    for inductor cores comprising wound magnetic material with joint
    structure between core elements.

    214+,   for inductor cores with core elements, usually of the laminated
    type, providing multiple magnetic paths, the laminations of different core
    elements being interleaved to form joints.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, particularly subclass 609 for the process of
    manufacture assembly or disassembly of inductor cores of the laminated type
    including the interleaving of core laminations to form core joints.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 216+,
    particularly indented subclass 217 for core structure for rotary
    dynamoelectric machines involving the securing of laminae to provide core
    joints.  See also the reference to other subclasses in Class 310 (which may
    include laminated core joints of the interleaved type) under "SEARCH
    CLASS", appended to subclass 216 above.


CLS 336/218
TXT Inductor devices under the class definition wherein the core is built up of
    elements of directionally prestressed material so arranged as to exhibit
    desired directional magnetic and/or electric properties. Usually the
    desired directional property is produced by taking advantage of the
    anisotropy of the crystal structure of the magnetic material by rolling and
    then heating to orient the grain structure, the permeability of the
    resultant product being a maximum in the direction of rolling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for inductors wherein a change in inductance is effected by
    physically distorting the core.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, especially subclasses 607+ for the process of
    manufacture, assembly or disassembly of inductor cores in general, and
    indented subclass 609 for laminated cores in particular, which cores may
    include grain oriented magnet material.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 100+ for processes of altering the
    internal structure of metalliferous materials to influence their magnetic
    properties, particularly subclass 104 relating to the production of dust
    cores, and subclasses 300+ for magnetic stock resulting from such processes.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 554+ for stock
    material or intermediate articles which are all metal or have adjacent
    metal components, particularly subclasses 615+ for metallic composites
    defined in terms of the composition of their components, and subclass 928
    for metallic stock having magnetic properties.


CLS 336/219
TXT Inductor devices under the class definition comprising a core built up of
    elements of magnetic material separated from each other by elements of
    electrically insulating material.  Laminated cores with electrical
    insulation between the magnetic laminations of the core are in this
    subclass.

    (1)     Note.  For other classes providing for processes of forming
    laminations, laminating, or to the resulting products, see classes listed
    under "SEARCH CLASS", of subclass 234 of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for core structure having insulating spacers between core parts to
    provide ventilating passages for the core.

    61,     for core structure having heat exchanging surfaces between core
    parts and insulated therefrom.

    100,    for inductors wherein the core parts may be separated by resilient
    insulating material to damp out electro-mechanical vibrations produced by
    the inductor.

    134+,   for inductors with an adjustable air gap between relatively movable
    core parts.

    165,    for inductors of the high leakage reactance type wherein the core
    has a shunt path with an air gap.

    177,    for inductors with a coil formed of an electrically insulated
    conductor of magnetic material.

    178,    for inductors with a closed type core having an air gap.

    198,    for inductors with preformed electrical insulation between coil and
    core.

    211,    for inductors with a core comprising concentric or nested magnetic
    elements with electrical insulation between elements.

    212,    for inductors with plural part cores (e.g., an assemblage of
    preformed leg and yoke portions) with electrical insulation between core
    parts.

    213,    for inductors with a core formed of a continuous, wound strip of
    magnetic material with electrical insulation between turns.

    216+,   for inductors having core joint structure wherein electrical
    insulation may be disposed between the core parts of the joint.

    234,    for the structure of laminated cores in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 602.1+ for processes of manufacture,
    assembly or disassembly of electromagnets, transformers and inductances,
    particularly indented subclass 609 for laminated core manufacture.


CLS 336/220
TXT Inductor devices under the class definition comprising an inductor having
    two windings, each winding constituting a coil adapted to be connected to
    an external circuit and not provided for in any of the preceding subclasses.

    (1)     Note.  Plural coils adapted to be connected in series and/or
    parallel are not considered to constitute plural windings for
    classification in this subclass, but are considered a single winding formed
    of plural coils and are classifiable, in particular in subclasses 145+,
    especially indented subclass 147, for such combinations with coil length or
    connection changing means, and subclasses 180+ for such combinations where
    no inductance adjusting means is claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5+,     for inductors having polyphase windings.

    73+,    115+, for inductors having two or more relatively movable coils,
    each coil acting as a separate winding.

    130+,   for inductors having relatively movable core and coil means,
    wherein the coil means may be two or more windings.  In particular,
    indented subclass 131 provides for plural coils (or windings) with plural
    cores.

    137+,   for inductors with means to change coil length or connections and
    wherein two or more coils constituting separate windings may be included
    (see (1) Note, above).

    155+,   for saturable core or high leakage reactance type inductors,
    especially subclasses 160+ for transformers with primary and secondary
    windings with a magnetic shunt therebetween.

    170+,   for inductors with three or more windings.

    173+,   for inductors with at least two coils or windings which are
    physically interlinked.

    180+,   for inductors with at least one winding formed of plural coils,
    particularly subclasses 182+, for plural windings at least one of which is
    formed of plural coils.  See also the reference to subclasses 180+ in (1)
    Note above.

    188,    for inductors having plural windings with mutually crossed turns.

    195,    for inductors wherein a coil or winding is supported within the
    grooved or hollow conductor of another coil or winding.

    199+,   for inductors having particular coil turn or coil or winding
    supports or spacers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 43 for systems utilizing plural windings for
    transmitting and receiving telegraph signals through appreciable space by
    means of an inductive field, subclass 49 for transformers or reactors
    utilized for superposed current signaling and subclass 64 for coil
    transformers employed in telegraph systems.

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, subclass 10 for inductively
    coupled means comprising a winding mounted on one body and another winding
    mounted on another body, the bodies being relatively movable, electric
    power being transmitted from one winding to the other wholly through the
    induction field.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 50+, especially subclass 116, for
    metal heating systems utilizing plural winding transformers.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclasses 8 and 29 for railway
    signaling systems utilizing transmitting and receiving windings mutually
    coupled through appreciable space by means of the induction field.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for miscellaneous electrical systems using plural winding
    inductors, note particularly subclasses 7, 17, and 83 for systems utilizing
    transformers.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 10+ for
    dynamoelectric machine structure, especially subclasses 179+ for winding
    and core structure, indented subclasses 184+ being directed to plural field
    windings and indented subclasses 198+ to plural armature or primary
    windings.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, particularly subclasses 62,
    and 153+, 413, 421+, 442 for coil structures which may involve plural
    windings, combined with electric lamps and space discharge devices.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for lamp and space discharge device systems utilizing inductors
    which may have plural windings, particularly subclasses 4+, 27, 39, 40,
    41+, 50, 54, 70, 141+, 177, 206, 212+, 219+, 239, 254+, 262, 266, 274,
    276+, 354, 368.28, and 382.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    electric motors and control systems therefor including plural windings
    inductors.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    single electrical generators and control systems therefor including plural
    winding inductors.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 206,
    214, 215+, 232, 247+, 301+, and 328+ for systems employing transformers or
    other plural winding inductors.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 55 for transformer
    testing systems, subclass 59 for inductance measuring systems and subclass
    127 for measuring systems with coupling transformers.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, particularly subclasses 100+
    and 24+ for electric wave coupling systems including plural winding
    inductors, note especially subclasses 177+ for transformer coupled wave
    filters.

    334,    Tuners, appropriate subclasses for tuners which may employ
    inductors with plural windings.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 289+ for structure of electromagnets of the
    holding, lifting or tractive type.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, especially subclasses 870.31+ for
    plural winding inductors employed in telemetering systems.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 855 for plural loop
    type antennas with a coupling network; and subclass 867 for plural loop
    type antennas including plural or tapped coils.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 35+ for
    transformer protection circuits, subclasses 139+ for electric circuits for
    relays or electromagnets which may be of the plural winding type.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    current, frequency, or phase conversion systems utilizing plural winding
    inductors, particularly subclasses 5, 64, 152+, and 170+ for systems with
    transformers.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, particularly subclass 443 for induction
    coils combined with telephones, subclass 55.1 for separate windings
    inductively coupled through appreciable space to transmit and receive
    telephone signals, and appropriate subclasses for induction coils
    restricted to use in telephone systems.


CLS 336/221
TXT Inductor devices under the class definition comprising the combination of
    coil and core in general and which is not provided for in any of the
    preceding subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for the combination of coil and core where the coil and/or core are
    distortable to effect an inductance change.

    30+,    for an inductor comprising coil and core means wherein the
    inductance thereof is changed by physically displacing parts of the
    inductor relative to each other in response to some condition.

    60,     for inductor structure with ventilating passages therethrough
    (e.g., by coil section or core part spacers).

    61,     for inductor structure with heat exchanging surfaces associated
    with the coil and/or core thereof.

    77,     for relatively movable coil and closed coil or conductor member
    wherein a portion of the closed coil or conductor member is formed of
    magnetic material.

    83,     for inductor structure wherein the core forms a casing for the coil
    (e.g., iron clad coil).

    98,     for incased inductor structure with exposed core portions.

    100,    for inductor structures with means to prevent vibration or
    shattering of core parts caused by varying currents in the coil conductor.

    110,    for inductor structure including a permanent magnet.

    117+,   for inductor structure involving relatively movable coils and
    associated core.

    130+,   for inductor structures comprising relatively movable coil and core.

    155+,   for inductive regulator structure of the saturable core or high
    leakage reactance type.

    172,    for coil and core wherein at least one coil turn is shorter than
    the other turns and links only part of the core cross section.

    175+,   for inductor structure comprising a linear conductor surrounded by
    a core.

    177,    for inductor structure having a coil conductor of magnetic material.

    178,    for coil with a substantially closed core having an air gap.

    184,    for winding formed of plural coils disposed on different core legs.

    196+,   for inductor structure with supporting and spacing means between
    coil and core.

    210,    for coil with core having core clamps, wedges of fasteners.

    211,    for coil with concentric core elements.

    212,    for coil with plural part core.

    213,    for coil with wound core.

    214+,   for coil with core having multiple magnetic paths.

    216+,   for coil with core having novel joint structure.

    218,    for coil with core of directionally prestressed material (i.e.,
    grain oriented).

    219,    for coil with core having insulation between core parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 602.1+ for the process of manufacture,
    assembly and disassembly of electromagnets and inductors in general
    particularly subclass 606 for assembling coil and core.  See, also, the
    comprehensive search notes appended to subclasses 602.1+ of Class 29 as to
    other classes providing for inductors and inductor manufacture.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 46 for the coil and core combinations designed
    to electrically load electrically long telegraph lines and subclass 64 for
    telegraph systems utilizing coil transformers.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 50+, especially indented subclass 116,
    for metal heating systems utilizing transformers; subclasses 600+ for
    inductive heating, note subclasses 672+ for a specific heating inductor
    configuration; subclasses 678+ for microwave heating; and subclasses 764+
    for capacitive dielectric heating, note subclass 780 for a specific heating
    electrode configuration.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, appropriate
    subclasses, for miscellaneous electrical systems utilizing transformers or
    other inductor devices.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 10+ for
    dynamoelectric machine structure, especially subclasses 179+ for windings
    and core structure.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, particularly subclasses 62,
    and 153+, 413, 421+, 442 for coil and core structures combined with
    electric lamps or space discharge devices.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    particularly subclass 20 for consumable electrode devices with
    electromagnetic discharge influencing means.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, particularly
    subclasses 4+, 27, 39, 40, 41, and 382 for inductor means associated with
    lamps and space discharge device in structural and system relationship.

    318,    Electricity: Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    inductor structure utilized in controlling electric motors.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, particularly subclasses 75+
    and 95+ for impedance systems including inductors, for controlling single
    electrical generators.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems subclasses 206,
    214, 215, 247+, 301, 305+, and 328+ for power supply or regulation systems
    utilizing inductors classifiable in class 336.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, particularly 200+, 253+
    subclasses for electromagnetic and magnetic testing systems, subclass 55
    for transformer testing, subclasses 57+ (especially indented subclass 59)
    for measuring inductive reactance, and subclasses 76.51, 87, 117, 126+, and
    144+ for electrical measuring or testing systems or devices utilizing
    inductor means.

    332,    Modulators, particularly subclasses 132, 133, 141+, 172, 173, and
    175 for modulators employing inductor means.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, particularly subclasses 24+
    for coupling networks for transmitting electric wave energy, especially
    indented subclasses 148 and 186+ for coupling systems utilizing
    electro-mechanical transducers, and indented subclasses 177+ for
    transformer coupled filters (indented subclasses 177+ providing for such
    transformers with magnetic core).

    334,    Tuners, appropriate subclasses for coil and core structure used in
    tuner circuits.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 1+ for combined diverse switches, and subclasses
    291+ for structure of lifting, holding or tractive magnets.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 870.31+ for inductor type
    telemetering transmitters, and subclasses 384.1+ for electromagnetically
    operated audible signal generators.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, particularly subclasses 431
    and 441 for the structure of goniometers used in direction finding
    receivers, subclass 748 for loop type antennas with variable reactance for
    tuning; and subclass 788 for loop type antennas including magnetic material.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 110+,
    for inductive heads used in magnetic recording or reproducing.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    electromagnetic devices with protective means, especially indented
    subclasses 38+ for structurally combined transformers and protective
    devices; subclasses 117+ for high voltage dissipators, especially indented
    subclass 118 for surge preventing choke coils and indented subclasses 133+
    for such dissipators with magnetic means (e.g., electromagnet); subclasses
    139+ for electric circuits for relays and electromagnets; subclasses 268+
    for subject matter of Class 336 combined with integral switch, capacitor or
    lock means; and subclasses 331+ for plural different components such as
    inductors and capacitors, or inductors and resistors structurally related
    with each other and not classified elsewhere.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, particularly subclasses 5, 26,
    75, 82, 90, 140, 152+, and 170+ for inductors employed in current, phase,
    or frequency conversion systems.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclass for
    electromagnetic storage systems, subclasses 185.01+ for floating gate
    memory storage (e.g., flash memory).

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclass 168 for magnetostrictive acoustic wave transducers.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 138+ for induction
    furnaces wherein the furnace charge may be of magnetic material.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 414+ for loaded telephone
    lines, subclass 443 for telephones combined with induction coils, and
    appropriate subclasses for induction coils adapted for use in telephone
    systems.

    381,    Electric Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    150+ for audio transducers.


CLS 336/222
TXT Inductor devices under the class definition comprising an inductor winding
    structure not provided for in any of the preceding subclasses.  For
    example, windings having coil conductors made of a particular composition,
    other than magnetic material, are in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5+,     for polyphase winding structures.

    15,     for the structure of coils whose conductors may be wound or unwound
    to change the coil inductance.

    20,     for the structure of coils adapted to be distorted to change the
    coil inductance.

    69+,    for coil structure having means to modify its capacitance with
    respect to a given potential plane.

    73+,    for inductors with closed coil or conductor member.

    107,    for coil structure combined with quick detachable coil terminal
    connector means.

    115+,   for relatively movable coils.

    130+,   for relatively movable coil and core.

    137+,   for coil structures with means to change the effective coil length
    or connections.

    155+,   for high leakage reactance type inductors.

    170+,   for inductors with three or more windings.

    172,    for coils having one or more full turns and including at least one
    short turn linking a part of the total coil flux.

    173,    for interlinked coils.

    175,    for an inductor comprising a straight conductor surrounded by a
    core.

    177,    for inductors wherein the coil conductor is of magnetic material.

    179,    for coils with means to compensate for changes in inductance with
    temperature.

    180+,   for windings formed of plural coils.

    186+,   for coil formed of parallel connected conductors.

    188,    for plural windings with mutually crossed winding turns.

    189+,   for coils with crossed turns.

    192,    for windings with terminals, taps or coil conductor and anchoring
    means.

    196+,   for coil and core and supporting and spacing means therebetween.

    199+,   for coil or coil turn supports or spacers.

    209,    for coils with specific wrapper or binder.

    220,    for plural windings in general.

    221,    for the combination of coil and core in general.

    225+,   for coils of special configuration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 602.1+ for processes of manufacture of
    electromagnets, transformers and inductances, particularly subclass 605 for
    winding or coiling.  See the comprehensive list under "SEARCH CLASS,"
    subclasses 602.1+ of Class 29, as to other classes providing for coils and
    coil making.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 46 for the structure of inductors specifically
    designed to be inserted at predetermined points along an electric wave
    transmitting line (i.e., for loading the line to change its impedance
    characteristics).

    219,    Electric Heating, particularly subclasses 663+ for the structure of
    indicational heating coils.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 10+ for the
    structure of dynamoelectric machines in general, especially subclasses 179+
    for windings or coil structure.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 62 for cyclotron
    structures having particular coil means for influencing the path of charged
    particles within the device, subclasses 413, 421+, and 442 for magnetic
    field producing coils combined with cathode-ray tube structure, and
    subclasses 153+ for lamp or space discharge mean in general having an
    inductor coil means structurally associated therewith.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 4+ for
    systems including cathode-ray tubes combined with inductor or resonator
    means, subclass 27 for cathode-ray tube systems wherein coils are used to
    deflect the cathode ray, subclass 40 for space discharge devices having an
    inductive electrode, and subclass 41 for such devices with an inductor
    connected between electrodes.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for systems utilizing transformers or inductors in general
    particularly subclasses 215, 247+, 301+, 305+, and 328+ for transformer
    systems and 206, 214, 249+, and 329+ for systems involving inductive
    reactors.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for
    coils used in electrical measuring and testing systems, especially
    subclasses 256+ for coils used in magnetic testing, and subclass 55 for
    testing transformers, and subclass 59 for determining inductive reactance
    of coils.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, appropriate subclasses for
    wave transmission lines and networks utilizing inductor coils as elements
    thereof.

    334,    Tuners, appropriate subclass for a coil utilized as an element of a
    tuned circuit.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 299+ for structure of coils for electromagnetic
    devices.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, especially subclasses 267+ for electrical
    resistors having structure analogous to inductors.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 726, 728, 748,
    764, 788, 842, and 866+ for the structure of inductors designed for the
    radiation or reception of radio waves.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 152+ and 160 for
    electric furnaces including the structure of windings for inductively
    heating a furnace charge.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    150+ for an electro-acoustic transducer involving magnetism.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 9+ for coil structures designed to subject the
    human or lower animal body to a magnetic field for therapeutic purposes.


CLS 336/223
TXT Subject matter under subclass 222 wherein the coil is formed of a conductor
    having cross-sectional dimensions of different values along the length of
    the conductor and/or wherein the cross-sectional configuration of the
    conductor is other than circular.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for coils formed of conductors having heat exchanging surfaces
    incorporated therein.

    62,     for coils formed of conductors which are hollow to permit the flow
    of cooling fluid therethrough.

    82,     for coil structure which forms the casing for the inductor device.

    195,    for coils formed of grooved or hollow conductors and wherein
    another coil conductor is supported within the grooved or hollow portion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, appropriate subclasses for
    the structure of electric cables and conductors, per se, particularly
    subclass 114 for insulated multi-conductor cables with split conductors,
    subclass 115 wherein the conductors are of different size, shape,
    insulation or other characteristic, subclass 117 for conductor assemblies
    of noncircular section, subclasses 126.1+ for conductor structure, per se,
    especially subclass 133 for conductor strands of noncircular cross section.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 600+ for inductive heating, subclasses
    678+ for microwave heating, and subclasses 764+ for capacitive dielectric
    heating.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 4+ for
    cathode- ray tubes having structurally combined inductive impedance or
    resonator means of particular shape, and subclass 40 for space discharge
    devices having electrodes of particular shape formed as an inductive
    impedance.

    332,    Modulators, particularly subclass 133 for frequency modulators
    utilizing inductive or resonator elements of particular shape (e.g.,
    Klystron).

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, appropriate subclasses for
    wave transmission elements having inductive elements of particular shape,
    particularly subclass 13 for resonator type breakdown discharge systems,
    subclass 34 for impedance matching coupling networks utilizing tapered
    conductors, and subclasses 219+ for resonators of the distributed parameter
    type.


CLS 336/224
TXT Subject matter under subclass 222 wherein the distance between adjacent
    turns of the coil conductor changes along the coil winding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for coils wherein the distance between adjacent turns is adjusted
    by distorting the coil.

    70,     for coils wherein the spacing between end turns of the coil may be
    different than that of the body of the coil (in combination with other
    structure) for the purpose of modifying the surge potential gradient of the
    coil.

    172,    for a coil wherein at least one turn is shorter in length than the
    rest of the turns.

    185,    for a winding of plural coils which coils may be unequally spaced
    by support or spacer structure.

    199+,   for coil or coil turn supports or spacers in general, particularly
    indented subclass 207 for coils with coil turn spacers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, particularly subclass 34 for
    impedance matching networks having a transmission line element which may be
    coiled with unequal spacing between successive turns.


CLS 336/225
TXT Inductor devices under the class definition wherein the coils forming the
    winding or the coil, per se, has a distinctive external contour or shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for coil structures which are adapted to be deformed to change the
    inductance thereof.

    60,     for coils having ventilating passages therethrough.

    61,     for coils having their external surface modified by additional heat
    exchanging surfaces.

    82,     for inductors having a coil forming the external casing of the
    inductor.

    127,    for relatively movable spherically shaped coils.

    128,    for relatively movable coils one of which is tubular.

    195,    for grooved or hollow coil conductors for supporting another coil
    conductor therein.

    199+,   for coil turn supports, particularly subclass 208 for preformed
    coil supports or mounts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 600+ for inductive heating, note
    subclasses 672+ for a specific heating inductor configuration and
    subclasses 635+ for a heater adapted to heat articles of specific shape;
    subclasses 678+ for microwave heating; and subclasses 764+ for capacitive
    dielectric heating.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, especially subclasses 179+
    for dynamoelectric machine windings of particular shape.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 413, especially
    subclass 433, for electromagnetic coils of particular shape for deflecting
    and electron beam, subclass 442 for beam, and subclasses 153+ for windings
    of distinctive shape structurally associated with a space discharge device.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 4+ for
    inductor structure of particular shape combined structurally with a cathode
    ray tube, and subclass 40 for a space discharge device having an electrode
    formed of an inductive impedance of distinctive shape.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, particularly subclasses 13,
    21, 22, 26, 33+, 109+, 117+, 125+, 156+, 202+, 219+, and 245+ for wave
    transmission networks having resonant line sections of distinctive shape.

    334,    Tuners, subclass 75 for a variable inductor tuner in which the
    inductor is wound in a particular shape.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 291+ for lifting, holding or tractive
    electromagnetic structure and specifically subclass 213 for electronic and
    ionic beam deflecting coil structure.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 866+ for loop type
    antennas which may have a special shape.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 544+ for stock
    materials, e.g., of indefinite length, which are all metal or have adjacent
    metal components, particularly subclasses 557+ for an intermediate metallic
    article, and 592 for stock which is helical or has a helical component.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 13+ for magnet coils of specific configuration
    adapted to therapeutic uses.

    D13,    Equipment for Production, Distribution or Transformation of
    Electricity, subclass 117 for design patents relating to coil shapes.


CLS 336/226
TXT Subject matter under subclass 225 wherein the coil conductor has a "figure
    8" shape in a plane transverse to the coil axis.


CLS 336/227
TXT Subject matter under subclass 225 wherein the coil conductor has a
    polygonal shape in a plane transverse to the coil axis.


CLS 336/228
TXT Subject matter under subclass 225 wherein the coil conductor has a "D"
    shape in a plane transverse to the coil axis.


CLS 336/229
TXT Subject matter under subclass 225 wherein the coil axis describes a closed
    curve (e.g., a circle).


CLS 336/230
TXT Subject matter under subclass 225 wherein the coil has an external surface
    similar to that generated by a circle rotated about a diameter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for relatively movable spherical coils.


CLS 336/231
TXT Subject matter under subclass 225 wherein the coil has an external surface
    similar to that generated by a right triangle rotated about a side.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 34 for impedance
    matching networks utilizing tapered or conically shaped inductive elements.


CLS 336/232
TXT Subject matter under subclass 225 wherein the coil turns lie substantially
    in a plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191,    for basket weave coils of the spider web type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 430+ for a process or
    apparatus for forming an article by winding material onto a core.


CLS 336/233
TXT Inductor devices under the class definition comprising the structure of the
    magnetic body of the inductor device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for deformable or distortable core structure.

    31,     for counterbalanced core adjustable in response to a condition.

    77,     for relatively movable coil and closed coil or conductor member
    having a magnetic portion.

    83,     for core structure entirely enclosing the inductor winding.

    84,     for structure for magnetically shielding the inductor device.

    98,     for encased inductors leaving a portion of the core exposed.

    100,    for core structures having means to inhibit or damp core vibrations
    caused by fluctuations in magnetic flux therein.

    110,    for core structures which comprise or include a permanent magnet.

    117+,   for inductors with relatively movable coils having a core portion.

    130+,   for relatively movable coil and core.

    155+,   for inductors of the high leakage reactance type having saturable
    cores or cores with magnetic shunts.

    172,    for core structures provided with a portion linked by a partial or
    shorter length coil turn.

    175+,   for inductor comprising a core surrounding a linear conductor.

    177,    for inductor with coil conductor formed of magnetic material.

    178,    for closed type core with an air gap.

    184,    for conductor coils disposed on different core legs.

    196,    for inductor structures having supporting and/or spacing means
    between coil and core.

    210,    for cores with clamps, wedges or fasteners.

    211,    for concentric or nested core elements.

    212,    for plural part cores.

    213,    for wound cores.

    214+,   for cores with multiple magnetic paths.

    216+,   for cores with specific joint structure.

    218,    for cores whose magnetic properties are determined at least in
    part, by oriented magnetic particles or grain structure of the core
    material.

    219,    for cores having electrical insulation between core parts (e.g.,
    between laminations).

    221,    for the combination of coil and core in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 602.1+ for processes of manufacture,
    assembly and disassembly of electromagnets, transformers and inductances.
    See particularly subclass 606 for the process of assembling coil and core,
    and subclasses 607+ for the process of manufacture of permanent magnets and
    cores.  Note under subclasses 602.1+ under "SEARCH CLASS", as to other
    fields of search and the line between Class 29 and other classes.

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 355+, for magnetic compasses.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses for
    mixtures of powdered materials such as magnetic particles, plus a binder
    material.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 100+ for processes of altering the
    internal structure of metalliferous materials to influence their magnetic
    properties, particularly subclass 104 relating to the production of dust
    cores.  Subclasses 300+ for magnetic stock material made by a subclasses
    100+ process or claimed in terms of significant magnetic properties.

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 194+ for
    electrolytic apparatus, in general.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, appropriate subclasses for electrolytic
    processes, in general.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 62.51+ for the composition of magnetic
    materials not classified elsewhere.  See the search notes to this subclass
    as to the line between Class 252 and Classes 29, 75, 106, 148, 260, and 317.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 10+ for the
    structure of magnetic cores especially adapted for use in dynamoelectric
    machines.  Subclasses 216+ provides for core features, while subclasses
    254+ and subclasses 261+, respectively, provide for stator and rotor
    structure.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 244+ for apparatus
    or methods for determining the characteristics of magnetic fields or the
    magnetic properties of materials.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 285+ for structure of holding, lifting magnets
    and electromagnets.  Note particularly subclasses 302+ for permanent
    magnets in general.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 267 for
    process or apparatus for demagnetizing magnetized bodies.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclass
    177 for structure of a magnet in an acoustic microphone; subclasses 192+
    for the structure of a magnet in an acoustic reproducer, such as an
    earphone or loudspeaker.

    419,    Power Metallurgy Processes, appropriate subclasses for processes of
    producing articles, which may be magnetic bodies, form particulate
    materials including sintering.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, appropriate subclasses for alloys
    which are broadly as "magnetic", "magnetized" or "permanent magnet" or
    alloys defined only in terms of their composition which are inherently
    magnetic.  See the definition to Class 148 subclasses 300+ for the line
    between magnetic alloys classifiable in Class 420 and magnetic stock proper
    for Class 148.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 544+ for stock
    materials, e.g., of indefinite length, which are all metal or have adjacent
    metal components, particularly subclasses 546+ for such stock distinguished
    by a magnetic feature.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, particularly Classes 523 and
    524 for a composition containing a resin or natural rubber and a
    nonmagnetic metal or alloy.


CLS 336/234
TXT Inductor devices under subclass 233 having a core or magnetic body
    comprising superimposed bundles or layers of magnetic material in the form
    of sheets, rods, or wires.  Single sheets, punchings, rods or wires which
    have such configuration that they are of no utility except in building up a
    core for use in an inductor device falling within the class definition are
    classified in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for laminated core structures having spaces between groups of
    laminations to provide ventilating passages for cooling the core and/or
    coil structure.

    61,     for laminated core structures having heat exchanging surfaces
    interleaved between laminations for the purpose of conducting heat energy
    away from the core.

    84,     for core structure including electric or magnetic shields between
    laminations.

    177,    for inductors having a coil conductor of magnetic material.

    210,    for laminated core structures wherein clamps, wedges or other
    fasteners are utilized to hold the laminations together.

    211,    for cores consisting of concentric or nested elements.

    212,    for plural part core (e.g., an assemblage of preformed leg and yoke
    portions).

    213,    for inductor cores comprising a continuous strip of magnetic
    material wound to form a core.

    217,    for inductor cores of the laminated type wherein the core joints
    comprise alternately overlapping laminations.

    218,    for laminated inductor core structures wherein the material of the
    core laminations has been treated to orient its crystalline grain structure
    to modify its magnetic characteristics.

    219,    for inductor core structures with electrical insulation between
    core parts, particularly between core laminations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 602.1+, particularly subclass 605, for
    inductor assembly including winding or coiling of core material, and
    subclass 609 for the assembly of laminated cores in general. See the
    comprehensive search notes listed under "SEARCH CLASS," of subclasses
    602.1+ of Class 29, relative to other product, manufacturing or process
    classes for electromagnets and transformers.


    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 66, 135+ and 146+, for a method of or
    an apparatus for bending metal into a helical or spiral coil form.

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses for processes and apparatus for
    cutting or punching blanks for forming laminated cores, particularly
    subclass 32 which provides for cutting interdigitating produces, and
    subclass 40 which provides for plural steps of blanking and cutting.

    140,    Wireworking, appropriate subclasses, for methods and apparatus for
    winding and for shaping wire of magnetic material to form cores.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for processes and apparatus for making laminated
    products, e.g., by assembling winding, wrapping, folding, etc., of
    filaments, sheets or webs.

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, especially subclasses 76+ for the product and
    process for making sheets, webs, wires or filaments electrolytically, and
    subclasses 138+ and 152 for electrolytically coating sheets, webs, wires
    and filaments constituting an electrically conducting base.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 430+ for a process or
    apparatus for forming an article by winding material onto a core.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 10+,
    appropriate indented subclasses, for the structure of laminated cores for
    dynamo electric machines.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for a metallic or nonmetallic stock material product in the form of a
    single or plural layer web or sheet not elsewhere provided for, and
    especially subclasses 364+ for a structurally defined or coated rod,
    strand, fiber or filament, which may be of a magnetic material, and
    subclass 621 for metallic composite stock comprising plural adjacent metal
    layers and an additional nonmetal layer; subclasses 577+ for metal blanks
    of definite shape; subclasses 548+ for metal particle containing composite
    material (i.e., plural metallic layers); and subclasses 615+ for composite
    metal materials in general..


CLS 337/
TTL ELECTRICITY:    ELECTROTHERMALLY  OR THERMALLY ACTUATED SWITCHES

CLS 337/
TXT
    I.      This class is restricted to the structure of electric current
    switching devices of general application for closing or opening electrical
    circuits which devices depend upon the heating effect of a current or of
    the ambient temperature of the surrounding medium for their operation.

    II.     This class also includes miscellaneous elements, or subcombinations
    of elements, restricted for use in and with the class type switches and
    which have not reached the status of separate classification elsewhere.

            This class also includes implements or handling devices
    specifically adapted for use with the class type switches and not provided
    for elsewhere in a separate class.

    III.    Electrical systems or circuits which include electrothermally or
    thermally operated switches, comprising the subject matter of this class,
    are excluded from this class.  These systems or circuits are classified in
    the various electrical or art classes depending upon the type of system or
    apparatus controlled.

    IV.     SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 232 for combined
    building and fuse.

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 513, 523 and 528 for expansion and
    contraction type thermoelectric motors.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 132+ for automatic controls utilizing
    thermostatic devices.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses for mechanical
    operators of general application particularly subclasses 519+ for toggle
    arrangements and 527+ for detents and related mechanism.

    81,     Tools, subclass 3.8 for special tools adapted as fuse pullers.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 324+ for cooking
    apparatus with thermostatic control.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, appropriate subclasses for detonators in
    general.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 101+ for thermal alarms and
    subclasses 216+ for thermal indicators, such as fuses.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 451.1+ for thermally
    controlled automatic feeders and subclass 504.1 for fused safety devices
    for liquid heaters and vaporizers.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 457 for valves with thermostatic cut off.

    140,    Wireworking, subclass 71.5 for wireworking apparatus for
    manufacturing space discharge device electrodes.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, appropriate
    subclasses for explosive fusible material compositions.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 200+ for temperature or pressure actuated
    automatic control devices for heating and cooling.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, subclass 23 for alarm or signal devices
    combined with extinguishing systems and subclass 42 for fusible elements,
    per se, and subclass 61 for systems having condition responsive electrical
    controls.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 52.1+ for boxes
    and housings with electric device or mounting means for housings or casings
    with fuse receptacles.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 81+ for fluid
    pressure responsive mechanical switches where the operating means is
    responsive to the flow of a fluid as distinguished from those which are
    responsive to the static pressure of the fluid and those in which the
    pressure is generated by expansion of the fluid by heat.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 509+ for electric heating devices
    automatically controlled by thermally responsive switching means.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 79-87,
    especially 86 and 87 for thermostatic fluid operating motors utilizing
    expanding fluid and expanding solids and subclasses 91-104 for thermostatic
    controls generally.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 70 for thermostatic compositions.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 117+
    for heat responsive switching systems.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses, and
    314, Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Consumable Electrodes,
    appropriate subclasses for electric space discharge devices designed to
    pass an electric current (e.g., spark, arc, etc.,) between two electrodes
    spaced apart in a vacuum or a gas or vapor atmosphere (including in
    atmospheric air).



            See Class 314 where the discharge device is provided with an
    electrode which is consumed during the operation and has means to feed the
    electrodes together to compensate for the consumption of the electrode.
    Class 313 is the generic class for space discharge devices.  See subclasses
    146+ of Class 313 for discharge devices which are provided with a movable
    electrode.  Some discharge devices are closely analogous in structure to
    some types of circuit makers and breakers. See section XXII of the class
    definition of Class 313 for the distinction between a space discharge
    device and circuit maker and breaker.



    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes, see the
    reference to Class 313, above.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 56+ and
    the subclasses specified in the notes to the definitions of those
    subclasses, for other electric space discharge devices which have
    structurally combined therewith a circuit maker and breaker.

            See the reference to Class 200, Electricity:  Circuit Makers and
    Breakers, in the class definition of Class 315, particularly the reference
    to subclass 113.5 for the line between Class 315 and Class 337.



    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 117 for
    thermo-electric motors comprising a member which undergoes substantial
    changes in shape, position and/or dimensions when heated, and means for
    electrically heating the member, subclasses 471+ for thermally controlled
    automatic starting or stopping of a motor.

    320,    Electricity:  Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    subclasses 166+ for charging or discharging a capacitor, per se.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclasses 33+ for
    thermally responsive systems for automatic control of the generator or
    driving means.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 106 for testing
    devices (meters) having means whose temperature is varied in accordance
    with the electricity being measured.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 1 for combined diverse switches where the diverse
    switch may be of the thermal or thermal current type, subclass 23 for
    automatic circuit breakers with combined magnetic and thermally actuated
    latch or trip means, subclass 31 for latching means with thermally actuated
    resetting or reclosing means, subclass 39 for magnetic tripping means with
    thermally actuated time delay, subclasses 43+ for thermally actuated
    tripping or latching means, subclass 66 for electromagnetically controlled
    switches, with electrothermal delay means and subclasses 141+ for combined
    electromagnetic and electrothermal actuating means.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, appropriate subclasses for electrical
    resistors, particularly subclasses 7+ for resistors whose resistance value
    is temperature compensated and 25+ for resistors whose resistance value is
    ambient temperature responsive.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 593+ for a thermal alarm
    circuit having a switch-type sensor.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 161+ for
    electric circuits for relays with thermal control.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 102+ and 136 for
    electric furnaces with thermal control means.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 187+ and 201+ for
    temperature measuring devices utilizing expanding solid or expanding fluid
    elements respectively.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 375+ for
    coated electrical conductors which may include contacts and switches, but
    which are recited solely as a base with a particular coating thereon, and
    subclasses 616+ for composite metallic thermostat material having
    heat-deflectable characteristics.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for an electrical
    connector, generally; including a connector for use with an
    electrothermally or thermally actuated switch.



            A switch of this class (Class 337) is distinguished from a
    connector of Class 439 in that, a switch is a "permanent" assembly of
    component parts fixed together so that each time a contact is brought into
    mating engagement with a cooperating contact, it moves along the same
    predetermined path; whereas, an electrical connector is a member that mates
    with a distinct mating part from which it is physically removed each time
    the connection is broken.


CLS 337/1
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein an electrothermal or
    thermally actuated switch is combined with another device having an added
    purpose or utility independent of the switch and in which the utility of
    the other art device is not destroyed by the removal of or deactivation of
    the switching device and which claimed combination does not include
    sufficient specific structure of the other art device as to be classified
    either with the other art device, per se, or elsewhere.



    SEARCH CLASS:

    See the appropriate other art class in the Manual of Classification for
    specific other art devices which may be combined with switching means.


CLS 337/2
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the structure includes at
    least two independent separate and distinct switches, one or more of which
    is of the type classifiable in this class combined with at least one
    diverse art type switch classifiable in another art class.



    Example (1) Fuses connected or associated with automatic circuit breakers
    of the mechanical type.  The fused means being adapted to open an electric
    circuit breaker means opens or closes the same circuit independently of the
    fuses under certain other conditions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for specific art type electrothermal device combined with other art
    type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 4, for refrigerator devices utilizing
    combined expansible fluid actuated switches with other art types.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 471+ for control lever and
    linkage systems controlling multiple elements and utilizing multiple
    switches.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 198 for control devices
    utilizing combined electrothermal and magnetic switches.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 3 for
    mechanical multiple circuit control devices with thermal current means.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 482+ for power supply and voltage or
    current regulatory systems for electric heaters which may utilize plural
    diverse switches.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, appropriate
    subclasses particularly subclasses 2+ for electric heaters of different art
    types combined with an operative in an incubator and subclasses 91+ for
    various thermostatic controls which may combine two or more types.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 1 for magnetically actuated switches combined with
    electrothermal or thermally actuated switch, subclasses 141+ for
    magnetically actuated switches with additional electrothermal means.


CLS 337/3
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the art type switch comprises or
    utilizes at least one thermally responsive element consisting of a
    composite of two dissimilar metals which expand different amounts under the
    influence of heat and whereby associated circuit contacts are opened or
    closed as a result of the bending of the element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for thermally actuated switches utilizing a bimetallic element
    combined with other diverse actuating means such as a magnet.

    16,     for shunt circuit completion devices with bimetallic elements.

    35,     for plural bimetallic actuating means in a single switch.

    36,     for electrothermal switches in general using bimetallic elements.


CLS 337/4
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the art type switch comprises or
    utilizes a device capable of melting and thereby causing the interruption
    of an electric circuit when abnormally heated by the current in the
    electrical circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142+,   for electrothermal switches of the fusible type.

    299,    for thermally actuated fuses combined with diverse similar art type
    devices.

    401+,   for thermal switches utilizing fuses for the principal operating
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    218,    High-Voltage Switches With Arc Preventing and Extinguishing
    Devices, subclasses 22+ for mechanical magnetic blowout switches which may
    employ fusible elements.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 142 for magnetically operated switches with fuses.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, appropriate
    subclasses for safety and protection devices which may utilize fuses
    combined with mechanical means.


CLS 337/5
TXT Subject matter under subclass 4 including structure whereby the operative
    condition of the other art switching device is directly controlled by the
    condition of the fusible element.



    Example:  A spring controlled mechanical circuit closing device the
    operation of which takes place upon the rupture of a fusible device which
    normally completes the circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143,    for electrothermal switches having a fuse controlling mechanical
    contact control means.

    402,    for thermally actuated fuses controlling mechanical contact control
    means.


CLS 337/6
TXT Subject matter under subclass 4 wherein the other art switching device
    comprises means whereby normally closed contacts are automatically opened
    upon the occurrence of an abnormal circuit condition.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also includes patents where the fusible
    element device is claimed in detail and the other art type switch is
    specifically described as a circuit breaker, providing plural distinctive
    switches are in fact claimed and the combination is not classifiable in
    another art.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 103+ for
    automatic circuit breakers, and subclasses 161+ for thermal controls for
    relays.


CLS 337/7
TXT Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the other art switching device is
    further described as comprising a plurality of individual conductors which
    comprise the conductors of a polyphase or plural conductor transmission
    line.




    See the note to the definition of subclass 6 above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45+,    for bimetallic element operated electrothermal switches of the
    multipole or polyphase type with manual control.

    146,    for fusible element actuated electrothermal switches of the
    multipole or polyphase type.


CLS 337/8
TXT Subject matter under subclass 4 wherein the other art switch device is
    recited as comprising a manually operated circuit controller.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143+,   for electrothermally actuated fuses combined with and controlling
    manual or other mechanical contact operating means.

    402+,   for thermally actuated fuses controlling manually operated contact
    control means.


CLS 337/9
TXT Subject matter under subclass 8 wherein the manually operable other art
    device is specifically recited as a knife or blade switch wherein the
    movable element, a hinged blade, enters or embraces the contact clips.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 554+ for
    mechanical knife switches which may be protected by fuses.


CLS 337/10
TXT Subject matter under subclass 8 wherein the manually operated other art
    device is specifically recited as comprising rotary or reciprocating
    mechanical contact actuating structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for bimetallic element electrothermal switch with reciprocating
    spring actuated actuating device.

    111     and 149, respectively, for reciprocating or rotary mechanical
    actuators for fusible element type electrothermal switches.

    200+    and 410, respectively, for reciprocating or rotary mechanical
    actuators of thermal switches of the fusible, combustible or explosive
    material type.

    238,    for bimetallic element electrothermal switch with rotary or
    oscillatory motion spring actuated operator.

    347+    and 348, respectively, for rotary or reciprocating mechanical
    actuators for bimetallic element thermally operated switches.

    398+    and 401, respectively, for reciprocating or rotary mechanical
    actuators for expansible or vaporizable fluid actuated thermal switches.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 465+ for
    mechanical switches with rotating contact control means which may be
    protected by fuses.


CLS 337/11
TXT Subject matter under subclass 4 wherein the other art device is
    specifically described as a device in which a plurality of contacts are
    arranged to control two or more independent electrical circuits.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter in this subclass should not be confused
    with the other art type devices in subclass 7 above in which a plurality of
    conductors comprise a single circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59+,    for electrothermal bimetallic element switch with multiple contacts
    and mechanical actuator.

    145,    for electrothermal fuse means controlling multiple contact or
    plural circuit control means.

    337+,   for thermal bimetallic element switches of the multiple contact
    type and with mechanical actuator.

    406,    for thermally actuated fuses controlling multiple contacts or
    plural circuit control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 1+ for
    mechanical multiple circuit control devices which may be protected by fuses.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ and
    114+ for mechanical safety and protective devices which may control a
    multiplicity of circuits.


CLS 337/12
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including at least one contact
    actuating means of the type classifiable in this class in combination with
    a diverse type actuating means of a type classifiable elsewhere in another
    art class and each one acting singly or conjointly to control the same
    single set of switch contacts.  The two or more actuating means may be
    physically located in the same housing or casing and may have cooperative
    features as long as each one is operative independent of the other.  Some
    examples of diverse type switch actuating means are the mechanical special
    application switches in Class 200.

    (1)     Note.  For similar subject matter including the combination of
    electromagnetic or magnetic control means combined with thermal-current
    responsive means, search will be in Class 335, Electricity: Magnetically
    Operated Switches, Magnets, and Electromagnets, subclasses 141+ and in the
    classes and subclasses referred to in the search notes under the subclass
    definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54      and 90, for electrothermally actuated bimetallic switches which
    operate with a snap action and have additional magnetic flux sources to act
    as holding or biasing means.

    134,    for longitudinally expansible element devices with magnetic biasing
    or holding means.

    344     and 366, for thermally actuated bimetallic switch devices with
    magnetic holding or biasing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclass for
    special application switches which may also include electrothermal or
    thermal actuating means.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 491 for heating devices with combined
    regulating or control means.

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 141+ for electromagnetically actuated switches
    which include additional electrothermal or thermal actuating means.


CLS 337/13
TXT Subject matter under subclass 12 wherein one of the claimed thermally
    responsive elements is specifically recited as being a bimetallic element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      above for a bimetallic element actuated switch combined with a
    diverse art type switch (e.g., fluid actuated).


CLS 337/14
TXT Devices under the class definition relating to structure operative to open
    or close an electric circuit or circuits and the combination of those
    devices; the operating means whereby the opening or closing function is
    accomplished by a thermal device directly inserted in the circuit and
    traversed by the controlling current.  The circuit generally is the circuit
    which is to be controlled.

    (1)     Note.  The electrothermal actuated switches of subclasses 14+ are
    distinguished from the thermally actuated switches in subclasses 298+ in
    that in the latter group the devices are principally responsive to heat
    from an external source, for instance the heat in a surrounding medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for electrothermal switches combined with diverse art type switches.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 324+ for cooking
    apparatus with electrothermal control.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 482+ for electrothermally controlled
    heating devices and subclasses 507+ for heating devices.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 11+ for discharge devices with temperature modifying
    means.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclasses 89+ for glow discharge devices with thermostatic operator means.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for discharge device systems with electrothermal control means
    combined with a discharge device load.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, and subclasses 471+ for
    thermally controlled automatic starting and/or stopping systems.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    subclasses 166+ for charging or discharging a capacitor, per se.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclasses 33+ for
    thermally responsive automatic control means for a single generator.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 23 for circuit breakers with combined magnets and
    thermal latch or trip means and subclasses 141+ for electromagnetically
    actuated switches combined with electrothermal actuating means.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 584+ for alarms and signal
    systems which are temperature controlled.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 161+ for
    thermal controls for relays, subclasses 247+ for ignition systems with a
    spark gap igniter, and subclasses 627+ for distribution boards with fuse
    means.

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, art collections 934 for motor
    control systems responsive to a thermal condition.


CLS 337/15
TXT Subject matter under subclass 14 including means whereby upon the failure
    of any selected portion of an electrical circuit or a device within the
    selected portion, an electrical conducting shunt circuit is automatically
    established around the device or the selected portion of the circuit.

    (1)     Note.  The devices found here are especially adapted for use in
    closing a shunt circuit around a translating device or a loop circuit when
    such translating device becomes inoperative or the loop circuit is broken.
    These devices are generally used in series lighting circuits so that in
    case a lamp breaks or burns out a shunt circuit is completed around the
    lamp in order to keep the main circuit closed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    for electrothermal switch with longitudinally expansible element
    type with electrical shunting means.

    221,    for electrothermal switch of the fusible element type with
    electrical shunt circuit means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, for shunt circuit
    closing devices for multiple control (loop), subclass 51.5 for short
    circuit closing devices actuated by the separation of coupling members and
    subclass 51.11 for shunt circuit closing devices wherein the switch is in
    parallel with the coupling contacts.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 74+ and
    119+ for electric lamp and electric space discharge device systems,
    provided with automatic shunt circuit closing means.


CLS 337/16
TXT Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein the shunt circuit completing means
    comprises at least one bimetallic device, i.e., an element consisting of at
    least two solid strips or bars formed of materials having different
    coefficients of expansion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants, subclass 38 for electrical starting
    motors which may have bimetallic means shunting the starting resistance.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses, especially subclasses 74 and 83 for load devices with
    electrical circuits and temperature modifying means utilizing bimetallic
    shunting means.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 105+ for electrical
    measuring devices with bimetallic shunting means.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 12 for automatic circuit interrupting devices with
    shunting contacts and subclasses 35+ for plural means for operating
    automatic trip means one of which may be a shunt contact operated by
    bimetallic means.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 31 for resistors with mechanical
    variation means which is thermally responsive and subclass 215 for a
    resistance with a switch, i.e., shunt.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ for
    electric circuits for relays and electromagnets, especially subclasses 163+
    for bimetallic elements shunting a resistance.


CLS 337/17
TXT Subject matter under subclass 15 relating to a device wherein during normal
    conditions of a circuit at least two contacts or electrodes are separated
    by an insulating gap which is bypassed by a fuse and upon the occurrence of
    abnormal conditions in the circuit causing failure of the fuse current is
    allowed to pass directly between the contacts or electrodes.  The thermo
    responsive fusible means usually comprises latching or holding means
    releasable, when subject to overheating, to allow the main contacts to
    close.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for fusible structure combined with a spark gap or lighting
    arrester means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 215 for fusible elements shunting a
    resistance.


CLS 337/18
TXT Subject matter under subclass 17 wherein the insulating gap is an air gap.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 115+,
    especially subclasses 124+ for lightning arresters with fusible links.


CLS 337/19
TXT Subject matter under subclass 15 including contacts or electrodes separated
    from one another by a film of dielectric material which is adapted to break
    down upon the impression thereof of an abnormal voltage thereby allowing
    the setting up of a conductive arc.


CLS 337/20
TXT Subject matter under subclass 15 relating to a device under the definition
    of subclass 15 with significant details of a housing or casing structure
    peculiarly adapted for the claimed device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for electrothermal switches of the space discharge type with
    housing or casing.

    112+,   for electrothermal switches of the bimetallic type with housing or
    casing.

    121,    for electrothermal switches of the expansible fluid actuated type
    with housing or casing.

    186+,   for electrothermal switches of the fusible element actuated type
    with housing or casing.

    327+,   for thermally actuated switches of the expansible fluid type with
    housing or casing.

    380+,   for thermally actuated switches of the bimetallic type with housing
    or casing.

    398,    for thermally actuated switches of the longitudinally expansible
    solid element type with housing or casing.

    414+,   for thermally actuated switches of the fusible element type with
    housing or casing.


CLS 337/21
TXT Subject matter under subclass 14 wherein the continuity of an electrical
    circuit is normally maintained through a conductive liquid.  Upon the
    occurrence of an excessive current in the circuit the liquid is vaporized
    or otherwise dispersed or displaced whereupon the circuit is interrupted.
    In this subclass the conductive liquid comprises the electrothermal element
    which is directly in the circuit to be controlled which circuit is
    completely opened when the liquid is in its operated state.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     for electrothermally responsive bimetallically actuated switches
    with mercury or other conductive liquid contact means.

    331,    for thermally responsive expansible or vaporizable fluid actuated
    switches with a conductive liquid comprising the contact material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 61.47, 81.6, and 182+ for mechanical switches with
    mercury or other liquid contacts.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 510+ for automatically operated
    heating device current supply means with thermally responsive means.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses, especially subclass 362 for a discharge device with a mercury
    switch in the circuit.


CLS 337/22
TXT Subject matter under subclass 14 relating to structure whereby the voltage
    or current applied to a fluorescent lamp device is controlled in such a
    manner as to establish a discharge through the lamp device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 94+,
    especially subclass 100 for discharge devices with a thermostatic switch in
    the cathode heater supply circuit.


CLS 337/23
TXT Subject matter under subclass 22 including at least one metallic resistance
    or other heating means whereby a thermostatic contact actuating means is
    heated by the current passing through the resistor or other heating means.

    (1)     Note.  For other heating means employed in the devices of this
    class, see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS in
    subclasses 103+.


CLS 337/24
TXT Subject matter under subclass 23 including significant structure whereby an
    electrical shunt circuit is established around the heating means or whereby
    the heater contacts may be short circuited.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    for electrothermal switches with electrical shunt or short circuit
    completion devices.

    125,    for electrothermal switches of the longitudinally expansible solid
    element type with electrical shunting means.

    221,    for electrothermal switches of the fusible element type with
    electrical shunting means.


CLS 337/25
TXT Subject matter under subclass 22 including at least two switch contacts
    designed to contact with each other to open and/or close an electrical
    circuit, one of the switch contacts being mounted so as to be moved by a
    thermostatic element, the contacts, their supports, or lead-in means being
    electron emissive so that an electric space discharge can be established
    between the electron emissive substance and the cooperating contact, when
    the switch contacts are in open circuit position, to heat the thermostatic
    element thereby actuating the movable contact or contacts.

    (1)     Note.  In some of the patents in this subclass the switch contacts
    are normally separated when no current is being supplied to the circuit
    which includes the switch contacts.  The electric space discharge being
    established when the current is supplied to the circuit, the space
    discharge then heating the thermostatic element so that the switch contacts
    are moved to circuit closing position to establish a conductive path
    through the electrodes and thereby short circuiting the electric space
    discharge.  This subclass also includes patents where the switch includes
    means other than the glow discharge, such as electric heating means, the
    glow discharge being used in conjunction with the other heating means to
    cause the switch contacts to be moved into open or closed circuit condition.

    (2)     Note.  The circuit makers and breakers in this subclass are often
    used with glow discharge lamps which require preheating of the filamentary
    electrodes before an electric space discharge can be established between
    such filamentary electrodes.

    (3)     Note.  The circuit makers and breakers in this subclass are
    somewhat analogous in structure to electric space discharge devices of the
    arc drawing type having two electrodes, at least one of which is electron
    emissive, which are normally in contact when the supply circuit is open and
    which are separated by any suitable means, such as thermostatic means, to
    establish the space discharge when potential is applied to the discharge
    device.  For such discharge devices, Search Classes 313 and 314 in the
    appropriate subclasses.


CLS 337/26
TXT Subject matter under subclass 22 including specific details of contact
    arrangement, structure or composition of material.

    (1)     Note.  Contact structure or composition will also be found in the
    following subclasses of this class:



    109,    electrothermally actuated switches of the bimetallic type.

    122,    electrothermal switches of the expansible fluid type.

    137,    electrothermally actuated switches of the longitudinally expansible
    solid type.

    251+,   electrothermally actuated switches of the fusible element cartridge
    or tube type.

    268+,   electrothermally actuated switches of the fusible element plug type.

    273+,   thermally actuated switches of the bimetallic type.

    329+,   thermally actuated switches of the expansible fluid type.

    399+,   thermally actuated switches of the longitudinally expansible solid
    type.

    413,    thermally actuated switches of the fusible element type.


CLS 337/27
TXT Subject matter under subclass 26 wherein the contact structure includes at
    least one bimetallic element whereby an electrical path through the switch
    is controlled by the heating and/or cooling of the bimetallic element
    functioning directly as one of the current carrying contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85+,    for electrothermally actuated switches of general application
    wherein the movable contact, or contacts, is directly attached to the
    bimetallic element.


CLS 337/28
TXT Subject matter under subclass 14 relating to the structure of an
    electrothermal current device under the class definition combined with
    further protective means comprising a normally open gap whereby a discharge
    may take place between the line contacts when open or between one of the
    line contacts and ground.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses for
    electric space discharge devices in general.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 56+ for
    discharge devices acting as a load and combined with an impedance and
    subclasses 119+ for discharge devices with a cut out.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 117+ for
    lightning arresters generally.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclass 182 for a lamp or electron tube
    socket including arc suppressing means, which means may comprise a
    protective air gap type discharge device; subclasses 621+ for an electrical
    connector combined with a named fuse or comprising a casing, housing, or
    holder for receiving and fully enclosing a fuse.


CLS 337/29
TXT Subject matter under subclass 28 including at least two or more
    electrothermal switching devices combined with at least one protective gap
    or at least two or more protective gaps combined with a single art type
    switching device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42+,    for electrothermally actuated plural switches of the bimetallic
    type.

    338+,   for thermally actuated plural switches of the bimetallic type.


CLS 337/30
TXT Subject matter under subclass 28 including structure comprising an arc gap
    in combination with an explosive charge whereby should the arc gap fail to
    interrupt the current flow the explosive charge will be detonated.  The
    subject matter to be found here may include (a) arresters with an explosive
    or (b) an arrester in combination with any art type circuit interrupter
    such as fuses, bimetallic means, etc., with the further addition of an
    explosive charge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243,    for electrothermally fusible link actuated switches with chemical
    (e.g., explosive) indicating means.

    401+,   for thermally actuated switches of the fusible combustible or
    explosive material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 111.01+
    for discharge device load with fluent material supply to the discharge
    space.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 124+ for
    lightning arrester with electrothermal fusible or explosive material.


CLS 337/31
TXT Subject matter under subclass 28 relating to significant spark gap
    structure in combination with fusible cut out means or a fusible material
    controlled switch means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4+,     for fusible element device and diverse art type switching device.

    17+,    for electrothermal switch having fusible material combined with gap.

    142+,   for electrothermal switches of the fusible element actuated type in
    general.

    401+,   for thermally actuated switches in general of the fusible,
    combustible or explosive material type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 124+ for
    lightning arrester with fusible means.


CLS 337/32
TXT Subject matter under subclass 31 including a plate or other grounding
    terminal means, whereby, upon the occurrence of an abnormal voltage, a
    current discharge takes place to ground with the gap resuming a
    nonconducting condition when the voltage returns to normal value.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199,    for electrothermal, fusible element actuated switch having a
    housing, casing or support with electrical ground, shield or barrier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, appropriate
    subclasses, particularly subclasses 38+, 117+ 124+, and 131+ for protective
    devices of the discharge gap type with grounding means in addition to a
    fused cut out.


CLS 337/33
TXT Subject matter under subclass 31 including structural elements forming an
    integral part of or common to both the fusible element cut out means or
    fusible element controlled switch and the space discharge device.  For
    example; the spark gap structure may provide a mounting or support for the
    fuse or one fuse cap may also be an electrode in the spark gap circuit.


CLS 337/34
TXT Subject matter under subclass 28 including significant structural details
    of housing, casing, mounting or support means peculiarly adapted for use
    with the subclass 28 type switch or switches.

    (1)     Note.  Housings, casings or supports for devices of this class are
    provided for in many subclasses herein.  For the list of such subclasses,
    see subclass 20 under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS.


CLS 337/35
TXT Subject matter under subclass 14 including significant details of two or
    more thermal current responsive devices cooperatively acting to control a
    single switch whereby an electrical circuit is opened or closed as a result
    of existing conditions in both or all of the thermal current responsive
    devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38+,    for plural electrothermal bimetallic elements combined with a
    single mechanical contact operating means.

    144,    for plural electrothermal fuses in a single switch.

    335+,   for plural thermal actuated bimetallic devices in a single switch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 516+ for expansion and contraction type
    power plants with plural diverse electrothermal switches in the control
    circuit.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 81+ for fluid pressure control switches with plural
    operators.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 510+ for electrical heating devices
    with plural electrothermal operated switches in the supply circuit.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 91+ for
    thermostatic control or regulating means with plural thermally operated
    elements.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 584+ for alarm systems with
    diverse temperature sensors.


CLS 337/36
TXT Subject matter under subclass 14 including at least one electrothermal
    temperature responsive composite element consisting of two different
    metals, bonded together, and having different coefficients of expansion
    such that when heated by a thermal current a bending motion of the
    composite element results.  The resultant motion is utilized either
    directly or through an intermediate mechanical means to control the opening
    and/or closing of an electrical circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for electrothermal responsive switching means combined with a
    diverse art switching means.

    13,     for an electrothermal element combined with a diverse art control
    means cooperatively operating the same set of contacts.

    35,     for plural diverse similar art type electrothermal operating means
    in a single switch.

    333+,   for thermally actuated bimetallic actuated switches.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 494 for heaters with current control
    means including bimetallic elements and subclass 510 for electric heaters
    with bimetallic element actuated switch means.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 145 for electromagnetically actuated switches with
    bimetallic elements.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+,
    especially subclasses 23+ for electrical safety and protective systems
    including bimetallic switch means, and subclasses 161+ for electric
    circuits for relays and electromagnets including bimetallic switches.


CLS 337/37
TXT Subject matter under subclass 36 comprising manual or other mechanical
    means acting conjointly or cooperatively with at least one bimetallic
    device, or which acts as an intermediary between an electrothermal
    responsive bimetallic element and at least one movable contact thereby
    opening or closing an electrical circuit.  The manual means may be a handle
    or push button actuated means, for instance, or the other mechanical means
    may be a motor, for example.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334+,   for thermally responsive bimetallic actuating means combined with
    manual or other contact control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 491 for electric heaters with combined
    bimetallic and electro-mechanical automatic control means.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 23 for magnetically actuated circuit breakers
    having combined bimetallic latch trip means, and subclass 43 for bimetallic
    latching or tripping means combined with mechanical contact actuating means.


CLS 337/38
TXT Subject matter under subclass 37 including at least two or more
    electrothermal current responsive bimetallic elements, combined with a
    further single mechanical contact controlling means.  The bimetallic
    elements may operate jointly or individually to control the movable contact
    or contacts through the agency of the mechanical means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    335,    for plural thermally actuated bimetallic elements in a single
    switch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses for cooking apparatus
    of the electric heater type having electrothermal control or switch means.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 3, for multiple
    circuit control devices with plural electrothermal means, and subclasses
    81+ for fluid pressure actuated switched with plural operators of which two
    or more may be temperature responsive.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 62+, 71+,
    88+, and 103+ for electrical protective devices with plural operators which
    may be bimetallic.


CLS 337/39
TXT Subject matter under subclass 38 wherein each of the electrothermal current
    responsive elements is adapted to operate independently of each of the
    others in a manner to cause the operation of the movable contact or
    contacts.


CLS 337/40
TXT Subject matter under subclass 38 wherein each of the electrothermal current
    responsive elements is responsive to diverse environmental conditions; such
    as, thermal current and atmospheric conditions, or of diverse operating
    characteristics whereby the opening or closing of an electrical circuit is
    a resultant of the operative condition of all the elements.


CLS 337/41
TXT Subject matter under subclass 37 including a plurality (three or more) of
    contacts associated with a single continuous electric circuit to be
    controlled or includes means whereby two or more continuous electric
    circuits are controlled by the contact controlling means.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes subject matter under subclass 37
    wherein the structure includes a plurality of devices falling under the
    definition of subclass 37 but forming a single assembly or single entity
    under the class definition or a single device having a plurality of pairs
    of contacts whereby two or more separate and distinct electrical circuits
    may be completed through the device.  This subclass does not include those
    devices which comprise a single movable contact which alternately contacts
    with each of two fixed contacts whereby varying the direction of current in
    the two conductors of a single circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for fusible element switching device with multiple circuit
    connector and diverse art type switch.

    145,    for electrothermal fusible element multiple contact switches.

    338+,   for thermally actuated switches of a similar construction.

    406,    for thermally actuated fusible, combustible or explosive material
    switches with multiple contacts.


CLS 337/42
TXT Subject matter under subclass 41 comprising at least two or more separate
    distinct and independently operative switch devices whereby two or more
    separate and distinct electrical circuits may be controlled.

    (1)     Note.  For devices wherein one set of contacts or one electrical
    circuit controls a heater means for one or more electrothermal current
    responsive actuating means.  See subclasses 102+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     for plural electrothermal switches with space discharge devices.

    144,    for electrothermal fuses with single mechanical control means.

    338,    for similar devices actuated by thermally responsive bimetallic
    elements.


CLS 337/43
TXT Subject matter under subclass 42 including means whereby the plural
    switching devices are rendered interdependent, one or the other, thereby
    being caused to operate alternately, successively, or selectively, the
    operation of each depending upon conditions in at least one other.  For
    example, one device is prevented from operation while another is in an
    operated position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    339,    for similar devices with thermally responsive bimetallic means.


CLS 337/44
TXT Subject matter under subclass 41 including significant means whereby each
    of a plurality of contact pairs may be actuated selectively, alternately or
    sequentially. The movable contact may be a single contact common to each
    pair, i.e., may constitute the movable contact for each pair selectively.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    340,    for switches of similar type with thermally responsive bimetallic
    element actuator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 325+ for cooking
    apparatus with automatic control utilizing thermoelectric means controlling
    a plurality of circuits.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 35+ for
    mechanical clock train operated switches with plural contacts and
    bimetallic latching or holding means.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 510+ for electric heating devices with
    thermally controlled switching means having plural contacts.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses
    112+, especially subclasses 116+, for electrical switching systems having
    heat responsive means which may be bimetallic.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 106+ for magnetically actuated switches of the
    plural contact type.


CLS 337/45
TXT Subject matter under subclass 41 comprising a plurality of individual
    conductors with contact pairs associated with each conductor, a contact
    actuating means for each contact actuating means for each contact pair,
    each contact pair completing a circuit through one branch of a polyphase or
    plural conductor electrical circuit. Devices which are known as bipole or
    double pole and which complete the circuit in each conductor of a direct
    current circuit will also be found here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for diverse art type switch and multipole circuit breaker with
    bimetallic device.

    146,    for similar electrothermal multipole or polyphase switches of the
    fusible element actuated type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 3 for multiple
    circuit control devices of the mechanical type with bimetallic elements,
    subclasses 411+, 415, and 424 for snap type circuit breakers with thermally
    actuated latch trip means.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 117
    for switching systems with electrothermally actuated means.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    automatic electric motor control devices operating from three phase sources
    and including electrothermal elements.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 8+ for electromagnetically circuit breakers with
    thermally actuated latch or trip means subclasses 35+ for plural latch or
    trip means including thermally actuated means.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    protective systems and devices of special types which may be combined with
    the bimetallic elements.


CLS 337/46
TXT Subject matter under subclass 45 including a single means whereby the
    plurality of phase or leg contact pairs are simultaneously actuated to or
    from a closed circuit condition or maintained in a first position until
    released whereupon the plurality of contact pairs are allowed to move to
    another condition simultaneously.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for electrothermal snap action bimetallic element switches with
    latch.

    70,     for electrothermal bimetallic element switch with latch.

    128+,   for electrothermal switches of the longitudinally expansible
    element type with latching or tripping means.

    150+,   for electrothermal switches of the fusible element type with latch,
    trip or holding means.

    174+,   for electrothermal switches of the fusible element type with cut
    out or drop out having latch, trip or holding means.

    356+,   for thermally actuated bimetallic element switches with latch.

    385,    for thermally actuated expansible element switches with latch.

    411,    for thermally actuated fusible, combustible or explosive material
    actuated switches with latch, trip or holding means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclass 401, for polyphase mechanical circuit breakers with a
    common operating means.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 6+ for electromagnetically actuated polyphase
    circuit breakers with a common control means.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 23+ and
    103+ for circuit breakers systems in general which may be combined with
    electrothermal means.


CLS 337/47
TXT Subject matter under subclass 45 including individual latching or tripping
    means associated with each separate phase or leg contact pairs thereof.
    Each individual latch or trip means may operate individually on its
    corresponding contact pair or may upon operation actuate a tripping bar
    whereby the remaining contact pairs are permitted to move to another
    position.

    (1)     Note.  Latches, trips or holding means therefore for devices of
    this class are provided for in many subclasses herein. See under SEARCH
    THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS of subclass 46 for a list of such subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 9 for electromagnetically controlled circuit
    breakers with individual separate latch or trip means in each phase.


CLS 337/48
TXT Subject matter under subclass 47 including a single bar or other device
    operatively connected to each of the individual latching or tripping means
    whereby upon actuation of any one of the means all of the contact pairs are
    allowed to move to another position.


CLS 337/49
TXT Subject matter under subclass 48 wherein the tripping structure comprises a
    bar means operable in a slidable or reciprocal manner in a fixed path
    common with the longitudinal axis of the bar.


CLS 337/50
TXT Subject matter under subclass 48 wherein the tripping structure comprises a
    means whose primary motion is a circular or rotating motion about a fixed
    axis.


CLS 337/51
TXT Subject matter under subclass 37 including significant details of means
    whereby a circuit is intermittently or cyclically opened and closed at
    constantly recurring intervals under the influence of a thermal current
    responsive bimetallic device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92+,    for electrothermally actuated bimetallic elements directly
    actuating the movable contact of a switch in a cyclic or periodic manner.

    369,    for thermally actuated bimetallic, cyclic or periodic type switch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 19+ for
    periodic switches which may include electrothermal elements.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 490+ for heating devices with
    automatic timing or cycling control means.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 46 for
    automatic temperature control devices with timing means and subclasses 91+
    for thermostatic controls which may be cyclic or periodically operative.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 132
    for electrical switching systems with repetitive operation and subclass 141
    for switch operating means with time delay.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 209+ for
    systems comprising a lamp or discharge device with a periodic switch in the
    supply circuit.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 87+ for electromagnetically actuated periodic
    switches, for instance vibrators.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 914+ for time cycling
    traffic systems, subclasses 81+ for flashing signal light systems.


CLS 337/52
TXT Subject matter under subclass 37 including spring or other potential energy
    storage means whereby a major portion of the force exerted in actuating the
    contacts of the switch from one condition to another is derived.  The
    actuating force is usually transmitted to the movable contact structure
    through mechanical means upon the spring being released from its energy
    storage position.  Devices in which the spring means acts only as a biasing
    means or a source of contact pressure will not be classified here but in
    subclass 67 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239+,   for electrothermal fuse with spring tensioned fuse link.

    317+,   for thermal expansible fluid switch with spring means.

    342+,   for similar type switches with thermally responsive bimetallic
    actuating means.

    388+,   for thermal expansible element switch with spring means.

    407,    for thermal fusible element switch with spring means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 402+ for
    mechanical snap action switches with spring means.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 6+ for electromagnetically operated automatic
    circuit breakers utilizing a tensioned spring in the contact actuating
    means and subclass 188 for specifically claimed snap acting contact control
    structure.


CLS 337/53
TXT Subject matter under subclass 52 comprising means whereby a movable contact
    or contacts, may be operated from a first position to a second position
    quickly, as by a snap action, the contacts motion being independent of the
    rate of movement of the operator.  This is usually accomplished by a spring
    connection between the operator and the contact carrier so arranged that
    the initial movement of the operator places the spring under tension
    whereby upon release of a holding means the contact is snapped from one
    position to another by action of the spring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89+,    for electrothermal bimetallic element switch with snap action.

    131+,   for electrothermal longitudinally expansible element switch with
    snap action means.

    147,    for electrothermal fusible element switch with snap action means.

    318,    for thermally actuated expansible fluid snap action switch.

    343,    for similar devices with thermally responsive bimetallic actuating
    means.

    365+,   for thermally actuated bimetallic element snap action switches.

    390+,   for thermally actuated longitudinally expanding element snap action
    switch.


CLS 337/54
TXT Subject matter under subclass 53 including means for setting up a field of
    magnetic flux whereby the actuation of the movable contact, or contacts, is
    at least in part influenced by magnetic force operative within the flux
    field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90,     for electrothermal, bimetallic element snap action switch with
    magnetic armature.

    134,    for electrothermal, longitudinally expansible element snap action
    switch with magnetic biasing or holding means.

    344,    for similar devices with thermally actuated bimetallic elements.

    366,    for thermally actuated bimetallic snap action switch with magnetic
    flux source.


CLS 337/55
TXT Subject matter under subclass 53 including means whereby at least one set
    of contacts may be restrained in one of the two normal conditions (open or
    closed).  The latching or holding means usually consists of a thermal
    current responsive bimetallic element adopted for mechanically maintaining
    a snap acting contact actuating means, such as a toggle arrangement, in a
    given position independently of other control means so that once the
    contacts are opened closed they will be constrained to remain in this
    position until the occurrence of an abnormal condition causes the actuating
    means to be released.

    (1)     Note.  Latches or trips for devices of this class are provided for
    in many subclasses herein.  See under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS of
    subclass 46 for a list of such subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    343+,   for similar devices utilizing thermally responsive bimetallic
    devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 167+ for latching means for electromagnetically
    operated switches.


CLS 337/56
TXT Subject matter under subclass 53 including significant means whereby after
    the movable contact, or contacts, of the device has been actuated from one
    original condition to another operated condition, due to an abnormal
    thermal current condition in the device, or by manual manipulation, the
    contacts may be returned to the original condition either automatically or
    manually, or means whereby a latching or holding mechanism is reset to an
    operative condition wherein the contact control means will be rigidly held
    in the original condition until released by operation of the thermal
    current responsive device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     for electrothermal bimetallic element snap action switch with reset
    means.

    348,    for similar art devices utilizing thermally responsive bimetallic
    devices.

    367,    for thermally actuated bimetallic snap action switch with reset
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 26+ for electromagnetically operated circuit
    breakers with reclosable or resetting means.


CLS 337/57
TXT Subject matter under subclass 53 including means whereby some operative
    characteristic of the specific snap acting contact controlling structure or
    the thermal current responsive element may be adjusted at will or
    calibrated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    319,    for thermal, expansible fluid, snap action switch with adjusting,
    calibrating or compensating means.

    347,    for similar devices utilizing thermally responsive bimetallic
    elements.

    368,    for thermally actuated bimetallic element snap action switch with
    adjustment or calibration means.


CLS 337/58
TXT Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein the mechanical contact controlling
    means consists of structure comprising a mechanical linkage whereby the
    movement of a movable contact or contacts results from a force applied
    thereto as a final result of a conversion of a force applied in a first
    direction to a force applied in a second direction; for example, a linear
    first motion may be converted to a rotary motion about a fixed origin or
    pivot as by a toggle linkage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    313,    for thermal expansible fluid actuated switch with compound motion
    linkage.

    350,    for similar devices utilizing thermally responsive bimetallic
    elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 191 for compound motion contact actuating means
    for electromagnetic switches.


CLS 337/59
TXT Subject matter under subclass 58 relating specifically to toggle mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for snap acting switches which may employ toggle mechanisms.

    132,    for longitudinally expansible element actuated snap switches with
    toggle spring.

    345,    for thermally responsive, bimetallic element switch actuating means
    operating a toggle linkage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 520+ for mechanical
    movements comprising toggle structure.


CLS 337/60
TXT Subject under subclass 58 wherein at least one structural element,
    comprising the mechanical contact controlling means, consists of a lever of
    the first, second or third class with no fixed pivot, that is, when forces
    are applied at two points motion takes place about a third point, the third
    point being movable in space, the torque about the third point being
    variably related to its position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 519+ for mechanical
    movements comprising lever structure.


CLS 337/61
TXT Subject matter under subclass 52 including means whereby contact opening or
    closing is accomplished by operation of a mechanical device moving in a
    rotary or oscillatory manner in a single plane; for example, circular
    movement in a horizontal or vertical plane with a reversal of direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for electrothermal or thermal switch of this class with diverse art
    type switch including rotary mechanism.

    149,    for electrothermal fusible element switch with rotary actuator.

    316,    for thermal expansible fluid operated switch with rotary or
    oscillatory device.

    351,    for similar devices utilizing thermally responsive bimetallic
    elements.

    410,    for thermal switches of the fusible element type with rotatable
    contact actuator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, or Animal Powered, subclasses 37+ for
    spring motors, per se.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 19+ for
    periodic mechanical switches utilizing a rotary motion, particularly
    subclasses 28+ and subclasses 465+ for mechanical rotary switches.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 76 for electromagnetically operated switches with
    spring motor means.


CLS 337/62
TXT Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein the mechanical actuating means
    comprises structure whereby contact opening or closing results from a
    sliding or reciprocating motion in a single plane by the contact carrier.
    The contact carrier or actuating means is generally spring biased to open
    position and held closed by a latch under the influence of a bimetallic
    element, which upon heating releases the latch and allows the contact
    control means to move the contacts to open position under the influence of
    the spring means.

    (1)     Note.  Reciprocating or slidable motion mechanisms of this class
    are provided for in many subclasses herein.  See under SEARCH THIS CLASS,
    SUBCLASS of subclass 10 for a list of such subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    335,    below, for similar devices utilizing thermally responsive
    bimetallic elements.


CLS 337/63
TXT Subject matter under subclass 62 wherein the mechanical contact controlling
    structure includes significant details of means whereby upon application of
    force to a driver element a certain interval of time elapses, or a certain
    amount of motion of the driver takes place, before the driving force
    becomes effective to actuate the movable contact means.


CLS 337/64
TXT Subject matter under subclass 62 wherein the mechanical contact controlling
    structure includes camming or wedging means whereby a force is transmitted
    from a driver element to a driven element through the principle of friction
    in such a manner that the contacts are positioned from a first or operated
    condition to a second nonoperated condition as a direct result of the
    frictional force generated.


CLS 337/65
TXT Subject matter under subclass 62 wherein the mechanical contact controlling
    structure includes guiding means whereby the movable contact carrier is
    restricted to a fixed reciprocatory path.


CLS 337/66
TXT Subject matter under subclass 62 wherein the manual or other mechanical
    contact controlling means is specifically recited as comprising manual push
    button means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 520+ for
    mechanical push button switches.


CLS 337/67
TXT Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein the contact controlling structure
    includes significant details of means whereby a predetermined or constant
    pressure is applied to the contacts while in the circuit closing position
    or whereby such contact pressure may be adjusted at will.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    349,    for similar devices utilizing thermally responsive bimetallic
    devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 194+ for contact pressure maintaining or
    adjusting means for electromagnetically operated switches.


CLS 337/68
TXT Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein the manual or other mechanical
    contact controlling means includes plunger or other means whereby the
    electrical circuit is completed or interrupted by the insertion between or
    withdrawal of an intermediate member directly between the contacts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148,    for electrothermally actuated switches with fusible elements
    combined with a plunger or striker pin for separating the contacts.


CLS 337/69
TXT Subject matter under subclass 37 including significant structure of both
    bimetallic and either manual or other contact actuating or controlling
    means, the different means being operative separately and distinctly to
    open and close the contacts, independently each of the other.

    (1)     Note.  Subclass 74 provides for mechanisms of the so called trip
    free type where the mechanical means actuates the contacts into open or
    closed position and the bimetallic means controls the mechanical means via
    latching or tripping means.  In that type of device the actual control of
    the contacts is by mechanical means the relationship being such that the
    contacts cannot be independently manually reclosed as in the device set
    forth in subclass 69 while an overload condition exists.

    (2)     Note.  The mechanical operating means to be actuated by the
    bimetallic element may comprise means released by the bimetallic means
    acting as a latch whereby the contacts are mechanically operated or closed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    355,    for similar devices with thermally responsive bimetallic actuating
    means.


CLS 337/70
TXT Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein the mechanical structure includes
    significant details of operating means whereby the contacts may be retained
    in a first condition by a latch or detent adapted to be released by the
    operation of an electrothermal current actuated device. The contacts are
    usually held latch in a circuit closing position and tripped to open
    position.

    (1)     Note.  Latches or trips for devices of this class are provided for
    in many subclasses herein.  See under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS of
    subclass 46 for a list of such subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128+,   for similar devices with longitudinally expansible electrothermal
    responsive actuating elements.

    356+,   for similar devices with thermally responsive bimetallic elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 3, 81, and 318+, for mechanical switch operators with
    thermally responsive latch trip means.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 510+ for electrical heaters with
    electrothermally actuated switches in the supply circuit utilizing
    mechanical operating means with a latch.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, appropriate
    subclasses, especially subclasses 3+, 32, 41+, 46, and 91+, for automatic
    temperature control circuits utilizing thermostatic latch or trip means.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 21+, 141+, 167+, and 172+ for electrothermally
    responsive bimetallic latch or trip means for operation with
    electromagnetic switches.


CLS 337/71
TXT Subject matter under subclass 70 wherein the latching or latch releasing
    structure includes significant details of a bimetallic device cooperatively
    combined with another art or a similar art device or wherein the device is
    responsive to more than a single actuating condition.  For example; the
    latch means may be actuated by or released by a thermal current responsive
    device assisted by a mechanical impact member, or by a magnetic field means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, appropriate subclasses for electromagnetically actuated
    latch or trip means combined with electrothermal elements in a magnetic
    circuit breaker.


CLS 337/72
TXT Subject matter under subclass 70 including significant details of means
    whereby the claimed latch or latch tripping device may be returned to its
    normal operative condition after having completed the transition to an
    unoperative condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, appropriate subclasses for similar devices combined with or
    adapted for use with an electromagnetic switch.


CLS 337/73
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the reclosing or reset structure
    includes significant details of means whereby the reclosing or resetting
    action takes place automatically.


CLS 337/74
TXT Subject matter under subclass 70 wherein the latch or latch release
    structure includes significant details of means which is operative, upon
    the occurrence of an abnormal condition in the controlled circuit, to
    prevent the main contacts from remaining closed or the latch from
    functioning regardless of the operation of a contact closing means, or
    wherein the main contacts are automatically opened upon the occurrence of
    an abnormal circuit condition independently of the position of a manual or
    other contact closing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 24+ for similar devices combined with or
    particularly adapted for use in electromagnetic circuit breakers.


CLS 337/75
TXT Subject matter under subclass 70 wherein the latch structure comprises at
    least one bimetallic element which directly constitutes the latching means
    by which the main switch contacts are prevented from moving from one
    condition to another.  The actual detent means may be rigidly attached to
    the bimetallic element in such a manner as to form a continuation thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359,    for similar devices utilizing thermally actuated bimetallic
    elements.


CLS 337/76
TXT Subject matter under subclass 70 wherein the bimetallic element is
    specifically described as performing another function other than the
    primary or latching function.  For example, the element may constitute a
    contact bridging means or even one of the main switch contacts.

    (1)     Note.  The line between the apparatus found in this subclass and
    that to be found in the subclasses 85+ and 362+ is:  in this subclass the
    latch and/or trip comprises a part of a mechanical operating means
    interposed between the bimetallic actuating means and the main contacts
    while in the subclasses 85+ and 362+ the bimetallic element actuates at
    least one movable contact directly without the intervention of any
    mechanical means.


CLS 337/77
TXT Subject matter under subclass 70 including auxiliary heating means whereby
    the bimetallic element is heated from an external source in addition to the
    current passing directly therethrough.

    (1)     Note.  For other heating means employed in devices of this class,
    see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS in subclasses
    103+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102+,   for bimetallic elements in general used as actuating elements and
    having auxiliary heating means.


CLS 337/78
TXT Subject matter under subclass 70 wherein the latch or latch release
    structure includes significant details of at least two or more bimetallic
    elements acting conjointly on a single latch or trip device.

    (1)     Note.  Subclass 101 provides for those devices where the second
    bimetallic element serves only as an ambient temperature compensating
    device for the first.


CLS 337/79
TXT Subject matter under subclass 37 including significant details of audible
    or visual means whereby the operative condition, i.e., opened or closed, of
    the switch is readily ascertainable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206,    for electrothermal fusible element switch with operational
    condition indicator.

    241+,   for electrothermal cartridge or tubular fuses with indicating or
    inspecting means.

    265+,   for electrothermal plug fuses with indicator.

    332,    for thermal expansible fluid actuated switch with signal, alarm, or
    visual indicator.

    376,    for thermal bimetallic element switch with signal or indicator.

    417,    for indicators in general specifically adapted for use with
    electrothermal and thermally actuated switches.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 308+ for
    indicators peculiar to circuit makers and breakers of the mechanical type.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 635+ for signals and
    indicators which are automatically responsive to the condition of
    electrical apparatus.


CLS 337/80
TXT Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein the mechanical contact controlling
    structure includes significant details of means whereby at least one
    electrical circuit is completed by means of a conductive liquid such as
    mercury.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for electrothermal actuated switches in in which the electrothermal
    element itself comprises a conductive fluid.

    331,    for thermal expansible fluid actuated switch utilizing conductive
    liquid (e.g. mercury) contact means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 182+ for
    mercury switches in general.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 163+ for electric
    discharge devices which have a liquid electrode.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 47+ for electromagnetic switches with liquid
    contacts.


CLS 337/81
TXT Subject matter under subclass 37 including significant details of means
    whereby the act of opening or closing of the main switch contacts takes
    place at an appreciable interval or intervals of time after an actuating
    force is applied to the contact actuating means or the operative interval
    is controlled by varying the energizing current applied to the thermal
    current responsive device; i.e., bimetallic element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for electrothermal bimetallic element switch with operation
    retarding or delaying means.

    127,    for electrothermal longitudinally expansible element switch with
    delayed action or timing means.

    163+,   for electrothermal fusible element switch of the delayed action
    type.

    301+,   for thermal switches with mechanical timing means.

    341,    for thermal bimetallic element switch with time delay.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 33+ for
    retarded or delayed acting mechanical switches.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 59+ for retarded or delayed type electromagnetic
    switches.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 89 and 94+
    for safety systems and devices of the time delay type of actuators, and
    subclasses 195+ for electric circuits for relays and electromagnets with
    time delay means.


CLS 337/82
TXT Subject matter under subclass 37 including significant details of means
    whereby the operative current value, or range of values, sufficient or
    necessary to actuate the main contact control means and thereby produce an
    opening or closing thereof action is predeterminedly fixed, varied at will
    or calibrated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for thermal longitudinally expansible element switch with operating
    range calibration or adjusting means.

    57,     for snap acting contact operating means with adjusting or
    calibration means.

    94,     for similar devices where the contacts are directly operated by a
    thermal current responsive bimetallic element.

    129,    for electrothermal longitudinally expansible element switch with
    latch or trip calibration means.

    319,    for thermal expansible fluid element snap action switch with
    adjusting or calibrating means.

    323,    for thermal expansible fluid actuated switch with operating
    calibration or adjustment means.

    347,    for thermal bimetallic element snap action switch with adjusting or
    calibration means.

    360+,   for similar devices with thermally responsive bimetallic elements.

    368,    for thermal bimetallic element snap switch with adjustment or
    calibration means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 515 for electric heaters with adjustable
    thermally responsive operative means in the current supply circuit.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 45 for electromagnetic tripping means having
    regulating, adjusting or calibrating means.


CLS 337/83
TXT Subject matter under subclass 82 wherein the calibration or adjustment
    means whereby an electrical shunt circuit is established in parallel with
    the current path through the bimetallic element or whereby the
    electrothermal controlling means is short circuited, thereby determining
    the amount of operative current necessary to actuate the main circuit
    contacts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    for electrothermal switches with shunt or short circuit completion
    devices.


CLS 337/84
TXT Subject matter under subclass 82 wherein the calibration or adjustment
    means comprises mechanically adjustable elements of structure adapted to be
    adjusted at will.


CLS 337/85
TXT Subject matter under subclass 38 wherein the bimetallic element operated
    switch consists of at least one bimetallic element with direct connection
    to a movable contact; which contact makes or breaks an electrical circuit
    under the influence of, or as a result of, the thermal current through the
    element.  Generally, both the bimetallic element and the fixed contact are
    series connected in the controlled circuit when in a closed circuit
    condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    362+,   for similar devices with thermally actuated bimetallic elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 510+ for electric heaters with
    thermally responsive automatic switch means in the supply circuit which may
    comprise a bimetallic element directly controlling a movable contact.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 117
    for heat responsive switching systems utilizing bimetallic elements
    directly operating a movable contact.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 23+, 26,
    99, 103+, and 161+ for protection systems and devices or electric circuits
    for relays and electromagnets which utilize bimetallic elements directly
    controlling at least one movable contact.


CLS 337/86
TXT Subject matter under subclass 85 including significant details of at least
    three or more contacts operative in such a manner that at least two or more
    separate and distinct electrical circuits may be controlled by the
    bimetallic contact actuating means.  One of the plurality of contacts may
    be common to more than a single contact pair.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for electrothermally responsive bimetallic means combined with
    mechanical means for actuating a plurality of contacts or controlling a
    plurality of circuits.

    362,    for similar devices utilizing thermally responsive bimetallic
    elements.


CLS 337/87
TXT Subject matter under subclass 86 including significant details of means
    whereby individual contact pairs connected to external circuits may be
    actuated in such a manner that a plurality of individually controlled
    circuits are completed through the switching device selectively,
    sequentially or alternately.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for similar devices utilizing an electrothermally actuated
    bimetallic device combined with mechanical contact control means.

    364,    for similar devices utilizing thermally responsive bimetallic
    actuating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 3 for
    mechanical multiple circuit control with thermal current actuated means and
    subclasses 175+ for telephone type automatic multiple contact selection
    means which may include electrothermally operated means.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 154 for
    plural load devices selectively controlled by radiant energy (heat)
    responsive devices.


CLS 337/88
TXT Subject matter under subclass 85 including means whereby the opening or
    closing, of the switch contacts takes place at an appreciable interval of
    time after an actuating force (overcurrent) is applied to the bimetallic
    contact actuating means or the timing of the contact open or contact closed
    interval is effected by varying the energizing current applied to the
    devices.

    (1)     Note.  For other retarding or delaying means employed in devices of
    this class, see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS in
    subclass 81.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, appropriate subclasses
    particularly subclass 325 for cooking apparatus with thermally actuated
    automatic control means with timing or time delay means.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, particularly subclasses
    33+ for mechanically actuated switches with time delay means.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 329 for electric water heaters with
    bimetallic switch control means including time delay means, subclass 334,
    for water heaters with automatic power supply or current control means
    including timing means and subclasses 492+ for automatic power supply or
    control means for electric heaters in general with timing or cycling means.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses, especially subclass 77 for electric discharge device systems
    with thermostatically operated time delay means.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 66 for electromagnetically operated switches with
    electrothermal time delay means.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, appropriate
    subclasses, especially subclasses 89, 94+ and subclasses 161+ for thermally
    actuated control devices with timing or delay means.


CLS 337/89
TXT Subject matter under subclass 85 including means whereby the movable
    contact, or contacts, may be operated from a first position to a second
    position quickly, as by a snap action, with the contact motion being
    independent of the rate of movement of the operator.  This may be
    accomplished by means of a spring, by a permanent magnet or other
    appropriate means such as an inherent characteristic or structure of the
    bimetallic element itself.

    (1)     Note.  The structure to be found here is distinguished from that in
    subclasses 53+ as follows:  In the snap actions provided for in subclasses
    53+ the contacts are operated by some manual or mechanical means in
    addition to being operated by the bimetallic element, the contacts not
    being directly attached to the bimetallic elements in this and the indented
    subclasses, that is to say the circuit is either open or closed depending
    entirely on the operative condition of the element.

    (2)     Note.  For other snap action mechanisms employed in devices of this
    class, see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS in
    subclass 53.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    365,    for similar devices utilizing thermally responsive bimetallic
    elements.


CLS 337/90
TXT Subject matter under subclass 89 including means for establishing a field
    of magnetic flux whereby the actuation of the movable contact, or contacts,
    is at least in part influenced by magnetic force operative within the flux
    field.  The magnetic flux source is usually a permanent magnet.

    (1)     Note.  For other snap action mechanisms with magnetic control or
    holding means employed in devices of this class, see the subclasses listed
    under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS in subclass 54.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    344,    for similar devices utilizing thermally actuated bimetallic
    elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 402+ for
    mechanical snap switches with holding means.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, appropriate
    subclasses, especially subclasses 1, 9, 46, 68, and 91+ for automatic
    temperature control systems employing bimetallic actuating means with
    holding means.

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants, subclass 38 for electric starting motors
    employing snap switches with holding means.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 153+ for electric discharge devices with
    electrothermal snap switches in the control circuit which employ magnetic
    means.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 141+ for electromagnetically operated switches
    having electrothermal means which may comprise bimetallic snap switches.


CLS 337/91
TXT Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the claimed structure includes
    significant means whereby; after the movable contact, or contacts, has been
    actuated from one condition to another condition, the contacts may be
    returned to the original condition either automatically or manually.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     above for similar devices employing electrothermal bimetallic
    actuating means combined with mechanical snap acting means.

    368,    below for similar devices employing thermally actuated bimetallic
    means.


CLS 337/92
TXT Subject matter under subclass 85 including significant details,
    specifically recited, of means whereby the contacts of at least one
    electrical circuit control device are intermittently or cyclically (at
    regular intervals) opened and closed directly under the influence of a
    bimetallic actuating element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for similar devices utilizing thermally responsive bimetallic
    actuating means.

    116,    for electrothermal expansible fluid actuated switch of the
    cyclically or periodically operated type.

    138,    for electrothermal expansible solid element switch of the
    cyclically or periodically operated type.

    302+,   for thermal switch with mechanical timing means of the periodic or
    cyclic type.

    369,    for similar devices utilizing thermally responsive bimetallic
    actuating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 19+ for
    periodically actuated mechanical switches, subclasses 61.27+ for turn
    indicator type switches with flashing means and subclasses 402+ for
    cyclically operated snap switches.

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses
    492+, for electric heaters with automatic regulating or control means
    employing cyclically operative switches.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 132
    for repetitive make and break switches.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 72 for
    discharge device loads combined with a periodic electric switch.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 468+ for vehicle signal
    light systems including those with cyclic light flasher switches.


CLS 337/93
TXT Subject matter under subclass 92 including significant details of means
    whereby the period of the complete operational cycle of the switch device
    may be predetermined or adjusted at will by an operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    303,    for thermal switch with mechanical timing means of the periodic or
    cyclic type with means for adjusting the period or timing of the cycle of
    operation.


CLS 337/94
TXT Subject matter under subclass 85 including significant details of means
    whereby the operative current value, or range of values, sufficient or
    necessary to operate the main contacts from a first (open) to a second
    (closed) position, predetermined, varied at will or calibrated.

    (1)     Note.  For other calibration or range adjusting means employed in
    devices of this class, see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS,
    SUBCLASS in subclass 82.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     for similar devices employing electrothermal responsive bimetallic
    elements combined with mechanical contact operating means.  See (1) Note
    above.

    360,    for similar devices employing thermally responsive bimetallic
    elements.


CLS 337/95
TXT Subject matter under subclass 85 including significant details of at least
    two or more separate and distinct bimetallic elements acting conjointly or
    cooperatively to control a set of electrical contacts from a first
    condition to a second condition.

    (1)     Note.  Subclass 101 provides for plural bimetallic element switches
    in which one or more bimetallic elements act simply as a means for
    compensation for ambient temperature, or for other external conditions to
    which the switch is subjected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38+,    above for plural electrothermally responsive bimetallic elements
    controlling a single switch through mechanical contact operating means.

    335+,   for similar devices utilizing plural thermally responsive
    bimetallic elements combined with mechanical contact control means.

    370+,   for similar devices having the contacts directly controlled by a
    plurality of thermally responsive bimetallic elements.


CLS 337/96
TXT Subject matter under subclass 95 wherein at least two of the claimed
    electrothermal responsive bimetallic elements are described as responsive
    to diverse environmental conditions, such as operating temperature (e.g.,
    thermal circuit) and atmospheric conditions, or as being of diverse
    operating characteristics whereby the opening or closing of an electrical
    circuit takes place as a result of the operating condition of all the
    elements, acting as a whole.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    336,    for plural bimetallic elements thermal switches wherein the
    elements are individually responsive to diverse conditions.


CLS 337/97
TXT Subject matter under subclass 36 including significant details of means
    whereby the switch device is protected from electrical or physical damage;
    such as contact welding, burning or pitting, physical breakage or damage
    due to jar, overheating, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222+,   for electrothermal fusible element switches with switch protective
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 134+
    for electrical switching systems with self protective features.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 156+ for electromagnetically operated switches
    with protective means for the switch or contacts and subclass 193 for
    significant contact actuating with means for preventing vibration, bounce
    or chatter.


CLS 337/98
TXT Subject matter under subclass 36 including significant details of positive
    locking or holding means whereby the main contacts are inhibited or
    restrained from movement by external sources or influence; for instance
    shock, or accidental motion.  The locking devices to be found here
    generally comprise either mechanical or magnetic devices which may be
    either manually or automatically operated independent of any latching means
    which may be present in the device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 6+ for
    pivoted contact switches with holding coil means and subclasses 43.01+ for
    switches with unauthorized use prevention devices comprising locks.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 142
    for switch actuating means with locking, holding or breaking features.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 77 for motor actuated switches with lock, latch or
    trip means, subclass 113 for multiple contact automatic telephone switches
    with holding, locking or latching means, subclasses 157+ for
    electromagnetic switches with operation inhibiting means and    subclasses
    167+ for latching means with unwanted contact actuation prevention means.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 194 for
    electric circuits for relays and electromagnets and including holding means.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclass 195 for automatic telephone
    switching systems with lockout.


CLS 337/99
TXT Subject matter under subclass 36 including significant details of means
    whereby any tendencies toward variation of the operative characteristics of
    a switch device; due to changes in voltage applied to or in external
    condition, such as the temperature of the surrounding atmosphere, are
    prevented.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124,    for electrothermal, longitudinally expansible solid element switch
    with voltage or ambient temperature compensation means.

    378,    for similar devices utilizing thermally responsive bimetallic
    elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 44 for thermally controlled latch or trip means
    with ambient temperature compensation means.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 140 and
    164 for electric circuits for relays and electromagnets including means for
    compensating for thermal changes.


CLS 337/100
TXT Subject matter under subclass 99 wherein the compensating structure
    includes at least one auxiliary heating means whereby the operating
    characteristics of the switch are prevented from changing due to variations
    in the ambient medium.

    (1)     Note.  For other heating means employed in devices of this class,
    see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS in subclasses
    102+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102+,   for electrothermally operated switches employing bimetallic
    elements and including further external or auxiliary heating means in
    addition to the thermal current whereby the operative characteristics of
    the switch are controlled.

    377,    for similar devices utilizing thermally responsive bimetallic
    elements.


CLS 337/101
TXT Subject matter under subclass 99 wherein the compensating structure
    includes at least one bimetallic element which is wholly responsive to the
    ambient surroundings.


CLS 337/102
TXT Subject matter under subclass 38 including significant details of structure
    comprising heat generating or concentrating means; such as heating coils or
    high resistance elements, serving to augment the heating effect of the
    thermal current traversing the switch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23+,    for fluorescent lamp starting device with heating means.

    77,     for electrothermal bimetallic switch with latch means having an
    auxiliary heater.

    100,    for electrothermal bimetallic switch with voltage or temperature
    compensation means.

    120,    for electrothermal expansible fluid actuated switch with external
    heating means.

    182+,   for electrothermal fusible element switch with auxiliary or
    external heating means.

    324,    for thermal expansible fluid actuated switch with auxiliary heater.

    377,    for similar devices utilizing thermally responsive bimetallic
    elements and including electrical heating means which augments the heat
    derived from the ambient space surrounding the bimetallic element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 529 for the combination of a bimetallic
    thermostatic bar with electric heating means, per se.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 4 for refrigerator control systems
    utilizing a bimetallic thermal element with electric heater means.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 324+ for cooking
    apparatus with automatic control systems utilizing bimetallic elements with
    heaters.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 146.5 for bimetallic sparking
    devices with electric heaters.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 3 and 52+ for mechanical switches utilizing thermal
    current responsive bimetallic elements with heater means.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 511 for automatically operated switching
    devices for electric heaters, utilizing bimetallic elements with heaters.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, appropriate
    subclasses, particularly subclasses 1, 46, and 68 for automatic temperature
    control systems utilizing bimetallic elements with external heating means.

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants, subclass 38 for electric starting motors
    with bimetallic switches with external heaters.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 145 for electromagnetically operated switches,
    with bimetallic actuating means and having an external heater.


CLS 337/103
TXT Subject matter under subclass 102 wherein the heating means includes
    significantly recited structure whereby the operating characteristics of
    the heater may be varied as by adjusting, shunting or short circuiting
    means.


CLS 337/104
TXT Subject matter under subclass 102 wherein the heating means consists of at
    least two or more separate and distinct heating devices capable of acting
    individually or coordinately to influence the action of at least one
    bimetallic element.


CLS 337/105
TXT Subject matter under subclass 102 wherein the heater structure includes
    means whereby the current traversing the heating device is maintained at a
    value between predetermined limits, is caused to flow at predetermined
    intervals of time or is caused to flow or to be cut off when certain
    predetermined conditions occur in the switch device.


CLS 337/106
TXT Subject matter under subclass 105 wherein the power supply or current
    control means comprises an inductive current source.  The inductive current
    source may comprise inductor windings whose excitation current is derived
    from the current traversing the bimetallic element.


CLS 337/107
TXT Subject matter under subclass 102 wherein the heating structure includes
    significant details of a basic heating unit adapted to form an element or a
    subcombination of a more comprehensive combination and adapted for use in a
    thermal current switch under the class definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 610.1+ for processes of mechanical
    manufacture of electrical resistors, per se.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, appropriate subclasses for electrical
    resistors, per se.


CLS 337/108
TXT Subject matter under subclass 107 including means whereby the bimetallic
    element is heated by the arc or discharge current occurring between two
    electrodes separated by an open gap.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 118+ for spark plug type discharge devices.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 117+ for
    high voltage dissipating gaps to the lightning arrester type, and
    subclasses 253+ for electric spark gap igniters.


CLS 337/109
TXT Subject matter under subclass 36 including significant details of contact
    structure, composition of material or arrangement peculiarly adapted to be
    operated through the agency of at least one bimetallic electrothermal
    current responsive element. The structure usually includes adjustment screw
    or other means whereby the relative position of the contacts may be varied
    automatically or at the will of an operator.

    (1)     Note.  For other contact structure or contacts of particular
    composition employed in devices of this class, see the subclasses listed
    under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS in subclass 26.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    373+,   for significant contact structure particularly adapted for use in
    switches utilizing thermally responsive bimetallic devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 874+ for processes of mechanical
    manufacture of electrical contacts.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 79+ for telegraph transmitters with
    particular contacts and subclasses 101+ for telegraph keys with significant
    contact means.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 275+ for
    contact structural details.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 500+ for electrically conductive
    compositions.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 57+ for electromagnetic switches with liquid
    contacts, subclass 83 for polarity responsive switches with particular
    contact structure, subclasses 97+ for periodic switches with particular
    contact structure, subclasses 133+ for particular contact structure or
    arrangement in multiple contact switches, subclass 154 for vacuum switches
    with particular contact structure and subclasses 196+ for significant
    details of the composition of matter or mechanical structure of contact
    assemblies peculiarly adapted for use in electromagnetic switches.


CLS 337/110
TXT Subject matter under subclass 36 including significant details of means for
    preventing the formation of an electric arc when a circuit is broken or
    smothering such an arc once it forms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273+,   for electrothermally responsive fusible element actuating switches
    with arc suppression or extinguishing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    218,    High-Voltage Switches With Arc Preventing and Extinguishing
    Devices, subclasses 1+ for mechanical switches with arc preventing and
    extinguishing means.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 201 for electrothermally controlled switches with
    arc suppression or extinguishing means.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 2+ for
    protective devices with arc-suppression, and subclasses 117+ for high
    voltage dissipator, per se.


CLS 337/111
TXT Subject matter under subclass 36 relating specifically to the physical
    structure of or the composition of matter utilized in the bimetallic
    element or elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    379,    for particular bimetallic structure or composition of material for
    thermally responsive switches.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 577+ for an
    intermediate metallic article or blank, and subclasses 615+ for plural
    layered metallic stock defined in terms of the composition of its layers.


CLS 337/112
TXT Subject matter under subclass 36 including significant details of housing,
    casing or support structure, peculiarly adapted for use with electrothermal
    bimetallic actuated switches.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for electrothermal shunt or short circuit switches with housing or
    casing.

    34,     for electrothermal switch and space discharge device with housing
    or casing.

    121,    for expansible or vaporizable fluid actuated switches with
    significant housing, casing or support structure.

    186+,   for fusible element actuated switches with housing, casing or
    support means.

    327+,   for thermal, expansible fluid actuated switch with housing or
    casing.

    380+,   for similar type switches with significant housing, casing or
    support means.

    398,    for thermally responsive longitudinally expansible solid actuated
    switches with housing, casing or support.

    414+,   for thermally actuated fuses with housing, casing or support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 17, 18, and 50+ for electrical boxes and housings not
    limited to use with switches.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 293+ for
    mechanical switches with particular casings or bases.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 151+ for vacuum or hermetically sealed
    electromagnetic switches.


CLS 337/113
TXT Subject matter under subclass 112 including significant means associated
    with the housing or casing whereby an external electrical circuit; which is
    to be protected, is completely through the switch via housing or casing.
    As an example the housing may be similar in construction to a fuse
    cartridge or plug.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    187+,   for housing, casing or support means for electrothermally actuated
    fusible switches with significant external circuit connection means.

    381,    for thermally responsive bimetallically operated switches with
    housing, casing or support with external circuit connector means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 112+
    for switching systems comprising a switch with terminals.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for a detachable
    electrical connector.


CLS 337/114
TXT Subject matter under subclass 14 wherein the electrothermal responsive
    circuit opening or closing means consists of at least one element which
    utilizes a fluid medium capable of expanding or vaporizing upon the
    application of a voltage, potential or heating current thereto, the
    operation of the contact controlling means being accomplished either
    directly or through additional means, thereby opening or closing a circuit
    to be controlled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306+,   below for similar devices with thermally responsive means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 632+ for one shot explosion actuated
    expansible chamber type motors.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclasses for an
    expansible chamber device, per se.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 325 for cooking apparatus
    with automatic control actuated by an expansible fluid.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 81+, for
    switches in which the operating means is responsive to pressure of a
    liquid, gas or vapor, the pressure being caused by a confined fluid or
    fluid flow.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 490+ (particularly subclass 496) for
    electric heating devices with current regulation or current control means
    which may include pressure responsive devices and subclass 513 for electric
    heaters with automatic switching means comprising temperature responsive
    expansible fluid actuated devices.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 79+ for
    fluid operated motor means for automatic regulation systems.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 118
    for fluid pressure actuated switching systems and subclass 144 for fluid
    pressure switch actuator, per se.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 481 for automatic
    motor control systems which are responsive to pressure in a fluid.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 35 for automatic
    generator control devices which are responsive to a fluid pressure.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 592 for automatic alarm
    systems with an expanding fluid sensor.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 201+ for expanding fluid
    type thermometers.


CLS 337/115
TXT Subject matter under subclass 114 including at least one electrothermally
    responsive device combined with further manual or other mechanical contact
    actuating means, both said device and means controlling the same contacts.
    Usually the contacts are directly controlled by the manual or mechanical
    means which is in turn under the control of the electrothermally responsive
    device.  However, devices in which the contacts may be opened or closed by
    the separate means independently are also classified here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37+,    for electrothermal bimetallic element switches having manual or
    mechanical contact controlling means.

    126+,   for electrothermal, longitudinally expansible element switch with
    manual or mechanical contact actuating means.

    143+,   for electrothermal, fusible element switches with manual or
    mechanical contact control means.

    312+,   below for similar type devices with thermally responsive actuating
    means.

    334+,   for thermal, bimetallic element switches with manual or other
    mechanical contact control means.

    384+,   for thermal, longitudinally expansible solid element switch with
    manual or other mechanical contact control means.

    402+,   for thermal, fusible, combustible or explosive material actuated
    switch with manual gravity actuated, or other mechanical contact control
    means.


CLS 337/116
TXT Subject matter under subclass 115 including significant details of means
    whereby a circuit is intermittently or cyclically opened and closed at
    constantly recurring intervals under the influence of an electrothermally
    responsive vaporizable or expansible fluid device.

    (1)     Note.  For other intermittently or cyclically controlled means
    employed in devices of this class, see the subclasses listed under SEARCH
    THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS in subclass 92.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 19+ for
    periodic mechanical switches and subclasses 81+ for fluid pressure
    responsive switches which may be periodically operated.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 492 for automatic regulating and control
    means for electric heaters with timing or cycling means.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 99+ for
    thermostatic controls utilizing expanding fluid and which may be
    periodically operative.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 132
    for repetitive make and break switches.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 72 for a
    load device with periodic electric switch.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 87+ for periodically operated electromagnetic
    switches.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 468+ for vehicle signal
    light systems including those with cyclic light flasher switches.


CLS 337/117
TXT Subject matter under subclass 115 including specific details of at least
    one expansible bellows or diaphragm device whereby a thrust force is
    transmitted to a contact control means upon a change of state or dimension
    of the actuating fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    320+,   for similar devices utilizing thermally actuated fluid means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 715+, especially subclass 729,
    for fluid pressure gauges utilizing diaphragm or bellows structure.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 17.8 for devices for the
    transfer of motion through a flexible seal or diaphragm and subclasses 18+
    for devices where the motion transfer takes place through a moving rod or
    casing.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclasses for
    expansible chamber motors with diaphragm or bellows.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclasses, especially
    subclasses 34+ for bellows structure.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 83 for fluid
    pressure actuated switches with diaphragm.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    168+ for telephone type transmitters with diaphragm and subclasses 176,
    186, and 202+ for diaphragm structure, per se.


CLS 337/118
TXT Subject matter under subclass 115 including significant details of means
    whereby a continuous electrical connection through the switch device may be
    re-established either automatically or at the will of an operator, after
    having been broken through the action of the switch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for electrothermal, bimetallic element switch with mechanical snap
    action having reclosing or reset means.

    72,     for electrothermal, bimetallic element switch with latch means
    having reclosing or reset means.

    91,     for electrothermal, bimetallic element switch having snap action
    with reset means.

    130,    for longitudinally expansible solid element switch having latch or
    trip with reset means.

    155,    for electrothermal, fusible element switch with mechanical
    reclosing or resetting means.

    348,    for thermal, bimetallic element switch having snap action means
    with reclosing or reset means.

    367,    for thermal, bimetallic unitary contact type switch having snap
    action means with reset means.


CLS 337/119
TXT Subject matter under subclass 114 including significant details of a
    capillary tube or bore at least partially filled by a vaporizable liquid
    conductor the bore being of such caliber that the liquid is either caused
    to vaporize at a predetermined current value or to shift its position
    within the bore thereby disconnecting the contacts of the device.
    Generally the devices act in a similar manner to a conventional fuse,
    acting to open a circuit between contacts upon the vaporization of the
    liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    321,    for similar devices utilizing thermally responsive liquid actuating
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 510+, especially subclass 511, for
    automatic thermally responsive fluid actuated switches for electric heaters
    utilizing capillary tube means.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 95 and
    99+ for thermally responsive expanding fluid actuated temperature
    regulating systems utilizing capillary tubes.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 161+ for a
    mercury column type thermostat in an electrical circuit for relays and
    electromagnets.


CLS 337/120
TXT Subject matter under subclass 114 including heat concentrating or
    generating means, such as heating coils or high resistance elements,
    responsive to the current in a circuit to be controlled, and whereby the
    change in condition of the contact controlling fluid is brought about.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324,    for similar devices utilizing thermally responsive fluid actuating
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 516+ for expansion and contraction power
    plants with expansible fluid heated by external means.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 200+, especially subclasses 223+ and 257,
    for anticipating type thermostatic controls with auxiliary heater.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 81+ for fluid
    pressure switch which may have auxiliary heating means.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 511 for thermally responsive expansible
    fluid actuated switches for electric heaters and having auxiliary heating
    means.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 86 for
    thermostatic expanding operated motor type temperature regulators which may
    have auxiliary heaters.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 161+ for
    thermoelectric switch in the control circuit of a relay or electromagnet
    and having external heater means.


CLS 337/121
TXT Subject matter under subclass 114 including significant structural details
    of housing, casing, mounting or support means peculiarly adapted for use
    with the subclass 114 type switch or switches.

    (1)     Note.  For other housings or casings employed in devices of this
    class, see the subclasses listed, under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS in
    subclass 20.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327+,   for similar devices utilizing thermally responsive fluid actuating
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 293+ for
    details of casing or bases for mechanical switches.


CLS 337/122
TXT Subject matter under subclass 114 including significant details of the
    mechanical structure, or material of construction, of the contact assembly,
    or its attachment to or support on the thermally responsive switch device.

    (1)     Note.  For other contact structures, or contact composition,
    employed in devices of this class, see subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS
    CLASS, SUBCLASS in subclass 26.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329,    for similar contact structure utilized with thermal responsive
    liquid actuated switches.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 874+ for the process of manufacturing of
    electrical contacts and terminals.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 238+ for
    details of contact construction for mechanical switches.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 133+ for contact structure for use in multiple
    contact switches of the electromagnetic type and subclasses 196+ for
    contact composition of structure in general for use in electromagnetic
    switches.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, especially subclasses 884+ for a contact of
    particular configuration.


CLS 337/123
TXT Subject matter under subclass 14 wherein the electrothermally actuated
    switching device comprises at least one monometallic longitudinally
    expansible solid element whose coefficient of expansion along its major
    axis is utilized to cause the opening or closing of an electrical circuit
    as a result of the change in dimension of the element.  The element may be
    fixedly secured at both ends, around its circumference or at one end,
    according to the design of the switch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    382+,   below for similar devices utilizing thermally responsive solid
    elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 527+ for expansion and contraction type
    power plants with solid elements.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 512 for automatic switching arrangements
    in the circuit of an electric heater and utilizing linearly expansible
    metal.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 141 for electromagnetically operated switches with
    thermally responsive expandable solid.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 187+ for expanding solid
    thermometers.


CLS 337/124
TXT Subject matter under subclass 123 including means whereby the operational
    mode of the deformable solid actuating means is controlled or modified by
    the temperature of the surrounding medium (atmosphere) or the value of the
    voltage drip across the terminals of the switching device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99+,    for electrothermal, bimetallic actuated switch with voltage or
    ambient temperature compensation means.

    378,    for thermal, bimetallic actuated switch with compensation means
    (e.g., ambient temperature).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 161+ for
    electric circuits for relays or electromagnets including thermally actuated
    longitudinally expansible solid elements.


CLS 337/125
TXT Subject matter under subclass 123 including a normally open electrical
    circuit in series across the input and output terminals of the device and
    adapted when closed to complete an electrical circuit in parallel
    relationship with the thermal contact actuating means.  For instance; the
    shunting or short circuiting means may comprise a switch arm operative by a
    relay armature operative when the potential applied across the relay
    winding exceeds a preselected value.  The type of switching devices found
    here are most commonly used as Flashers.

    (1)     Note.  Where the shunting or short circuiting device is for the
    purpose of voltage compensation the patent will be placed in subclass 124
    above and officially cross referenced in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    for electrothermal actuated switches with shunt or short circuit
    completion devices.

    221,    for electrothermal fusible element switches with electrical shunt
    circuit means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmissions or Interconnection Systems, appropriate
    subclasses, especially subclasses 117, 131, 132, and 141.4 for switching
    systems in which the actuating means may be shunted or short circuited.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 74+ for a
    combined discharge device load device and an automatic shunt circuit
    closing means.


CLS 337/126
TXT Subject matter under subclass 123 including at least one electrothermally
    responsive device, combined with further manual or other mechanical contact
    actuating means, both said device and means cooperatively acting to control
    the switch contacts. Usually the contacts are directly controlled by the
    manual or mechanical means which is in turn under the control of the
    temperature responsive device. However, devices in which the contacts may
    be opened or closed by the separate means independently are also classified
    here.

    (1)     Note.  For other manual or mechanical switch control means employed
    in devices of this class, see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS
    CLASS, SUBCLASS in subclass 115.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    384,    for similar devices utilizing thermally responsive elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 3 for
    mechanical switches with thermally responsive cut outs or fuses.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 512 for automatic switches for electric
    heaters utilizing linearly expansive metal elements combined with
    mechanical means.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 101+ for
    automatic temperature control apparatus comprising an expanding solid
    element with mechanical contact control means.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses
    116+, especially subclasses 117 and 139+ for switching systems in general
    utilizing mechanical means.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 141+ for electromagnetic switches with combined
    electrothermal actuating means.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical subclasses 584+ for temperature
    responsive signal systems, particularly subclasses 593+ for a switch sensor
    therein.


CLS 337/127
TXT Subject matter under subclass 126 including means whereby the opening, or
    the closing, of the switch contacts takes place at an appreciable interval
    of time after an actuating force is applied to the contact actuating means
    or the timing of the contact open or contact closed interval is effected by
    varying the energizing current applied to the device.

    (1)     Note.  For other delayed action or timing means employed in devices
    of this class, see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS
    in subclass 81.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     for similar devices utilizing electrothermally responsive
    bimetallic elements.  See (1) Note above.

    163+,   for similar devices utilizing fusible elements.

    341,    for similar devices utilizing thermally responsive bimetallic
    elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 562+ for
    drying apparatus with automatic control of the timing cycle.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 22+, 101+, and 216+ for periodic
    mechanical signals and indicators with thermal control means.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 232; 238+; 262; 267+ for heat exchange
    systems with timing or programming means.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 19+ for
    nonthermal periodic switches and subclasses 33+ for nonthermal time
    switches and subclasses 33+ for nonthermal time switches.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 141+
    for switch actuators in general with time delay or retardation means.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 59+ for electromagnetic switches with time delay
    means.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 309.1+ for electric
    signalling systems with timer control.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 195+ for
    control circuits for electromagnetic devices with time delay means.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 111+ and 190+ for telephone
    type switches or registers with time control.


CLS 337/128
TXT Subject matter under subclass 126 including significant details of means
    whereby the switch contacts may be restrained in an open or closed
    condition by a latch or detent which may be tripped by the action of the
    electrothermally responsive expansible device.  The contacts are usually
    held in circuit closing position and tripped to open position when the
    tripping means is operated.

    (1)     Note.  For other latch or trip means used in devices of this class,
    see subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS in subclass 46.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    385,    for similar devices utilizing thermally responsive elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 2+ for automatic latch or
    trip mechanisms and subclasses 527+ for mechanical latching or detent
    devices in general.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 411+, 415,
    424+, 470, and 471 for mechanical snap switches with latch and/or trip
    means, subclass 83 for fluid pressure switches of the diaphragm type with
    latching means.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, appropriate subclasses; particularly subclasses 21+, 77,
    113, 164, 165, 166, 167+, and 172+ for electromagnetically operated
    switches with latching or tripping means.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ for
    control circuits for electromagnetic devices with latch mechanisms.


CLS 337/129
TXT Subject matter under subclass 128 wherein the latching or trip structure
    includes significant means whereby the current value necessary to cause the
    operation of the actuating device, may be regulated, readily adjusted or
    calibrated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    357,    for thermally responsive bimetallic actuated switches with
    adjusting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 42, 45, and
    176 for circuit control means of the electromagnetic type adjustable latch
    or tripping means.


CLS 337/130
TXT Subject matter under subclass 128 including significant details of means
    whereby after an automatic or manual disconnection of the main switch
    contacts the contacts are reclosed, or means whereby the latching mechanism
    is reset to an operative condition in which the contacts will be rigidly
    held in the normal operating condition of the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72+,    for electrothermal, bimetallic element switch having latch means
    with reset means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 318+ for
    mechanical switch devices with specific latch details.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 26+ for automatic circuit interrupting devices
    with resetting or reclosing means, subclass 150 for moving coil type switch
    operators with reset or restoring means and subclass 166 for latch or trip
    reset means for electromagnetically actuated switches in general.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 59+ for
    safety and protective devices with subsequent automatic restoration means.


CLS 337/131
TXT Subject matter under subclass 126 including significant details of means
    whereby the opening or closing contact motion is caused to take place
    abruptly and is not dependent on the rate of movement of the electrothermal
    actuating means.  The contact movement is usually accomplished by a spring
    connection between the operator and the movable contact in such a manner
    that the initial movement of the thermal element or other actuating means
    places the spring under tension until released whereupon the movable
    contact is snapped to open or closed position by the energy stored in the
    spring.

    (1)     Note.  For snap action means utilized in the devices of this class,
    see the list of subclasses under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS in subclass 53.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    390,    for similar snap action devices utilizing thermally responsive
    expansible elements.  See (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 97.1 and 100.1 for
    mechanical snap actions.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses
    402+ under "SNAP" for various mechanical switches of the snap type.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 188 for snap action contact actuating means in
    electromagnetic switches.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 152+ for
    control circuits for electromagnetic devices which may be of the snap type.


CLS 337/132
TXT Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the snap action structure
    comprises means comprising a toggle point influenced by a tensioned spring
    whereby when force is applied to a knee of the joint the energy of the
    spring is applied to open or close an electric circuit through a moveable
    contact.  The spring in itself by its connection to a rigid element may
    form the only toggle joint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59,     for electrothermally responsive bimetallic element actuated
    switches with toggle.

    345,    for similar devices utilizing thermally responsive bimetallic means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 520+ for toggle linkages,
    per se.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 401 for quick
    make and break switches that may utilize toggles.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 191 for electromagnetic switch actuating mechanism
    comprising toggle means.


CLS 337/133
TXT Subject matter under subclass 131 including significant means whereby the
    range of movement of the actuation means or the movable contact is
    restricted to particular limits.  The stop means may be permanently fixed
    in position or its position adjustable.


CLS 337/134
TXT Subject matter under subclass 131 including means whereby a field of
    magnetic flux is set up in the vicinity of the main contacts.  The force
    exerted by the magnetic flux field is utilized either to detract from or
    add to the force exerted by a mechanical actuating means resulting in a
    rapid movement of the contacts upon the magnetic force or the spring force
    being overcome one by the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54      and 90, for electrothermally responsive bimetallic element actuated
    snap switches with magnetic means.

    344,    for thermal, bimetallic element snap action switch with magnetic
    flux source.

    366,    for similar devices with thermally responsive actuation means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 153 for reed type vacuum enclosed switches with
    permanent magnet structure.


CLS 337/135
TXT Subject matter under subclass 131 including significant details of a
    flexible vane or plate means whereby the snapping action of the contacts is
    caused to take place.  The vane or plate may control the action of a
    movable contact, or contacts, by its inherent tendency to change curvature
    when heated or it may be under the influence of a further temperature
    responsive element such as a wire or ribbon which exerts a deforming force
    on the vane or plate upon the passage of a heating current therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    391,    for similar devices with thermally responsive means.

    396,    for diaphragm, strip or ribbon structure, per se, which is
    expansible with heat.


CLS 337/136
TXT Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein the vane or plate is specifically
    formed with a predistorted portion or portions in such a manner that it is
    movable with a snap action in response to thermal extension of an actuating
    means.  The actuating means is usually an expansible wire or ribbon having
    a different coefficient of expansion than the vane or plate.


CLS 337/137
TXT Subject matter under subclass 123 including significant details of contact
    structure, composition of material or arrangement peculiarly adapted to be
    or specifically recited as, operative through the agency of at least one
    longitudinally expansive electrothermal current responsive element. The
    structure usually comprises adjustment screw or other means whereby the
    relative position of the contacts may be varied automatically or at the
    will of an operator.

    (1)     Note.  For contact structure or contact composition of material
    used in devices of this class, see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS
    CLASS, SUBCLASS in subclass 26.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109,    for particular contact structure in electrothermally responsive
    bimetallic element actuated switches.

    399+,   for significant contact structure for use in similar devices
    utilizing thermally responsive solids.  See (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    Consult the classes and subclasses listed under the search notes to
    subclass 109, above, for a complete listing of the classes containing
    similar subject matter.


CLS 337/138
TXT Subject matter under subclass 123 wherein the structure is specifically
    recited as consisting of a device comprising means whereby an electrical
    circuit is completed and broken intermittently or cyclically at constantly
    recurring intervals under the influence of an electrothermally responsive
    deformable solid element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for electrothermally responsive bimetallic element actuated
    switches, cyclically operative by mechanical means.

    92+,    for similar devices actuated by a bimetallic element directly.

    116,    for similar devices actuated by expansible or vaporizable fluid
    actuating means.

    302,    for thermally actuated switches periodically or cyclically
    operative by mechanical timing means.

    369,    for switches significantly recited as actuated by a thermally
    responsive bimetallic element directly.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    Consult the search notes to subclass 51, above, for a list of classes
    containing similar subject matter.


CLS 337/139
TXT Subject matter under subclass 123 relating specifically to the physical
    structure or the composition of matter utilized in the longitudinally
    deformable thermal responsive element or elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    393+,   for similar subject matter in thermally actuated switches.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 516+ for thermal motors with expansion and
    contraction devices.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 306 for
    nondynamo-electric thermal motors.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 161+ for
    thermo-electric devices in control circuits for electromagnets.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 187+ for a thermometer
    having an expanding solid sensor.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 616+ for
    composite metallic stock having heat-deflectable characteristics.


CLS 337/140
TXT Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein the electrothermally responsive
    longitudinally  deformable element is specifically recited as comprising a
    wire or other stranded element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    395,    for similar subject matter in thermally actuated switches.


CLS 337/141
TXT Subject matter under subclass 123 including significant heat concentrating
    or generating means, such as heating coils or high resistance elements, to
    increase or augment the heating effect of the thermal current primary
    heating source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102+,   for similar devices utilizing electrothermally responsive
    bimetallic elements.

    120,    for expansible or vaporizable fluid actuated switches with heater
    means.

    182,    for fusible element actuated switches with heater means.

    324,    for thermally responsive expansible or vaporizable fluid actuated
    switches with heater.

    377,    for thermally responsive bimetallic element actuated switches.


CLS 337/142
TXT Subject matter under subclass 14 wherein the electrothermal current
    responsive element, or elements, consists of a material (usually a wire or
    strip) which melts or otherwise disintegrates under the influence of heat
    due to excess current, thereby interrupting the electric circuit carrying
    the current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4+,     for fusible element switch combined with other art device switch.

    17+,    for electrothermal, fusible element and gap, shunting or short
    circuit completion devices.

    30,     for electrothermal, space discharge, explosive or combustible
    material type switches.

    31+,    for electrothermal, fusible element switch device with space
    discharge device means.

    401+,   for similar devices utilizing thermally responsive fuse elements
    (e.g. susceptible to the temperature of the surrounding medium, such as air
    or liquid).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 232 for static
    structure combined with fusible material.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 1.42+ for instrument calibrating
    means with fusible timing apparatus.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives subclasses 262, 416+, and 424+ for
    explosive material fuses.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 106 for fused alarms.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 507+ for liquid heaters
    with fusible control safety devices.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 287.5 for dampers with fusible
    release.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 67+ for fluid handling systems with
    destructible or deformable element control means.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, subclass 42 for fire extinguishers with fusible
    connections.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 6, 61.08, 61.48, 81, 82, and 83 for mechanical
    switches with fuses.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 517 for electric heaters with fusible
    link controlled switch.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 142 for electromagnetic switches with fuses.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 590+ for a temperature
    alarm with a fusible sensor.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    safety and protective systems and devices with fusible elements.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 269+ for manufacture of a fuse tube.


CLS 337/143
TXT Subject matter under subclass 142 comprising manual or other mechanical
    means acting conjointly or cooperatively with, at least one fusible
    element, or which acts as an intermediary between the fusible element and
    at least one movable contact thereby opening or closing an electrical
    circuit. The manual or mechanical means may act independently of the fuse
    device as long as they are each in the same circuit and the circuit is
    completed when both are in the circuit closing position.  For example the
    combination may include a blade switch in series with a cartridge fuse.

    (1)     Note.  For other manual or mechanical switch control means used in
    devices of this class, see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS,
    SUBCLASS in subclass 115.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402,    for similar devices with thermally responsive fuses.  See (1) Note
    above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 142 for electromagnetically operative switches
    with fuses.


CLS 337/144
TXT Subject matter under subclass 143 including at least two or more fusible
    devices combined with a further single manual or other mechanical contact
    controlling means. The fusible elements may operate jointly or individually
    to control the movable contact or contacts through the agency of the
    further means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    412,    for similar devices utilizing a plurality of thermally responsive
    fuses.


CLS 337/145
TXT Subject matter under subclass 143 including a plurality of (three or more)
    contacts associated with a single continuous electric circuit to be
    controlled, or includes means whereby at least two or more continuous
    electric circuit are controlled by the contact controlling means.

    (1)     Note.  Consult the (1) Note under subclass 41 above for a more
    comprehensive description of multiple circuit control means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    406,    for similar devices utilizing thermally responsive fuses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 3 for
    mechanical multiple circuit control means with fusible elements.


CLS 337/146
TXT Subject matter under subclass 145 comprising a plurality of individual
    conductors with contact pairs associated with each conductor, a contact
    actuating means for each pair of contacts, each contact pair completing a
    circuit through one branch of a polyphase or plural conductor electrical
    circuit.

    Devices which are known as bipole or double pole and which complete the
    circuit in each conductor of a direct current circuit will also be found
    here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for multiphase or polyphase automatic circuit interrupters of the
    fusible element type combined with diverse art type switches.

    45+,    for electrothermal, bimetallic element actuated multipole or
    polyphase type switch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 1+ for
    mechanical multipole or polyphase circuit control devices.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 8+ for electromagnetically actuated multipole
    switches.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 627+ and
    641+ for mechanical switching systems, per se, which may be multipole or
    polyphase.


CLS 337/147
TXT Subject matter under subclass 143 wherein the mechanical contact control
    structure comprises means whereby a movable contact, or contacts, may be
    operated from a first position to a second position quickly by a snap
    action.  This is usually accomplished by a spring connection between an
    operator and a contact carrier so arranged that the initial movement of the
    operator places the spring under tension whereby upon release of a holding
    means the movable contact is snapped from one position to another.

    (1)     Note.  For other snap action means used in devices of this class,
    see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS in subclass 53.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 402+ and
    below under "SNAP" for mechanical snap switches in general for quick break
    mechanical switches.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 188 for snap action contact control means for use
    with electromagnetic switch.


CLS 337/148
TXT Subject matter under subclass 143 including mechanical means whereby the
    contact opening or closing operation results from a rectilinear sliding or
    reciprocating motion of the operating means.  The contact actuating means
    is generally spring biased to open position and held closed by a latch
    means which is under the influence of a fusible element which when heated
    to the melting point allows the contact control means to move the contacts
    to open position under the influence of the spring.

    (1)     Note.  For other reciprocal or rectilinear motion actuators used
    devices of this class, see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS,
    SUBCLASS in subclass 10.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    408+,   for similar devices utilizing thermally responsive fusible devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 16 for
    mechanical switches with reciprocating contacts.


CLS 337/149
TXT Subject matter under subclass 143 including significant means whereby
    contact opening or closing is accomplished by means of a mechanical device
    moving in a rotary manner in a single plane, for example, circular or
    oscillatory motion in a horizontal or vertical plane.  The structure
    usually consists of a rotary means supported by a shaft which shaft is
    supported in a bearing or bearings and prevented from moving by a thin film
    of fusible material until released by heat.

    (1)     Note.  For other rotary or reciprocatory actuators used in devices
    of this class, see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS
    in subclass 10.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 6+ for
    mechanical switches with rotary or oscillatory contact operation means.


CLS 337/150
TXT Subject matter under subclass 143 wherein the mechanical structure includes
    significant details of operating means whereby the contacts may be retained
    in a first condition by a latch or detent capable of being tripped by a
    thermal current responsive fuse element.  The contacts are generally held
    latched in a circuit closing position and tripped to open position upon
    operation of the fuse element.

    (1)     Note.  For other latch or trip means used in devices of this class,
    see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS in subclass 46.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70+,    for latch or latch release means actuated by electrothermally
    responsive bimetallic elements.

    128,    for similar latch or latch release means actuated by longitudinally
    expansible elements.

    356,    for similar devices with thermally responsive bimetallic elements.


CLS 337/151
TXT Subject matter under subclass 150 wherein the latching or holding structure
    comprises significant details relating to ratcher and pawl means whereby
    the contacts are released upon the release of the ratchet wheel for
    rotation about its axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 595+ for pawl and ratchet
    mechanisms, per se.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 81+ for fluid
    operated switches with ratchet and pawl type thermally released latching
    means.


CLS 337/152
TXT Subject matter under subclass 150 wherein the holding means is specifically
    recited as consisting of self-soldering or resoldering material rigidly
    connecting two relatively movable members when cold.


CLS 337/153
TXT Subject matter under subclass 150 including significant details of heating
    means cooperating with but distinct from the fusible material whereby the
    fusible material is additionally heated by a thermal current traversing the
    heating means independently of the heat derived from the current directly
    traversing the fusible material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for electrothermal, bimetallic element latch controlled switch with
    external or auxiliary heater for the latch.


CLS 337/154
TXT Subject matter under subclass 150 relating specifically to tripping or
    release means operative directly by fusible means under the influence of a
    thermal heating current. The mechanical latching or holding means is
    generally recited broadly with the tripping or release means recited in
    specific terms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 39+ for
    retarded action switches with latch trip and subclasses 411+, 470, 424+ for
    mechanical snap switches with latch trip.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 172+ for latch tripping structure, per se,
    adapted for use in electromagnetic switches.


CLS 337/155
TXT Subject matter under subclass 143 including in addition to the fuse
    structure significant means whereby; after the movable contact, or
    contacts, of the device has been actuated from one original condition to
    another operated condition as a result of an abnormal thermal current
    condition (or manual manipulation) the contacts may be returned to the
    original condition either automatically or manually, or means whereby a
    latching or holding mechanism is returned to an operative condition wherein
    the contact control means will be rigidly held in the original condition
    upon the actuation of the contacts to the original condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72+,    for electrothermally actuated bimetallic element controlled latch
    or trip means with reclosing or reset means.

    130,    for longitudinally expansible element actuated latch or trip means
    with reset.

    358,    below for thermally responsive bimetallic element actuated latch or
    trip means with reset means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 26+ for electromagnetically operated circuit
    breakers with reclosing or resetting and subclass 166 for latch or trip
    with reset means.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 59+ for
    automatic safety devices with automatic restoration.


CLS 337/156
TXT Subject matter under subclass 143 wherein the mechanical contact control
    means consists of means independent of the fuse structure which is adapted
    to be manually manipulated at will to (1) complete a shunt circuit around
    the fusible element, (2) isolated the circuit or apparatus protected by a
    fuse after the current has been interrupted by the fuse or (3) cause the
    circuit to be opened through the fusible device without actually blowing
    the fusible element. The patents found here generally include the open cut
    out or disconnect type fuse devices combined with means whereby an operator
    from a distance, by means of a switch stick, may insert a mechanical
    circuit completion conductive device between the main contacts or may
    directly break the circuit through the fuse.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    218,    High-Voltage Switches With Arc Preventing and Extinguishing
    Devices, subclasses 8+ for auxiliary type switches and subclasses 43+ for
    air-current blowout type switches.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, especially subclasses 507+ for an electrical
    connector comprising a jumper.


CLS 337/157
TXT Subject matter under subclass 156 including means whereby the fuse link may
    be physically broken or otherwise ruptured by mechanical means entirely
    independent of any melting action due to current passing therethrough and
    without causing the displacement of the fuse contacts relative to the main
    line contacts.


CLS 337/158
TXT Subject matter under subclass 142 including a fusible device with the
    ability to limit a short circuit current to an initial peak magnitude well
    below the peak magnitude of the current which the protected circuit would
    be capable of developing under like conditions if a link of negligible
    resistance and sufficient capacity to survive at least a half cycle of
    current without melting, were employed in the place of the current limiting
    fuse device used. The instantaneous value of the current causing the fuse
    to blow is usually determined by a physical resistor of the desired
    characteristic or by the use of a particular filler material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 103+ for
    safety devices utilizing thermal (e.g., fuses) means with granular means
    for the cooling of vapors resulting from the arc of rupture.


CLS 337/159
TXT Subject matter under subclass 158 wherein the current limiting structure is
    specifically recited as consisting of a fuse link, or links, of a
    particular physical structure or arrangement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229,    for cartridge fuses with a plurality of fusible elements.

    280,    for fuses with means for extinguishing an arc by cooling,
    condensing or absorbing means.

    290,    for particular fusible element of particular construction.


CLS 337/160
TXT Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein the fuse link is specifically
    described as having at least one point of reduced cross sectional area with
    a link destroying low fusing point material deposited on the link in the
    vicinity of the reduced cross sectional area or a fuse link of a first
    material adapted to alloy with the first material upon the application of
    excessive heat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    295,    for fusible elements of particular geometrical shape.

    296,    for fuse links of composite material (i.e., with overlay).


CLS 337/161
TXT Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein the significantly recited fuse
    link structure includes at least two or more separate links, each providing
    a current carrying path through the fuse device.  The fuse links are
    usually parallel connected, but may be series connected with each being
    capable of opening the protected circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    292,    for particular fuse link construction comprising a plurality of
    series connected elements.

    293,    for a plurality of parallel connected elements.


CLS 337/162
TXT Subject matter under subclass 161 wherein the plurality of fuse links or
    elements are recited as of diverse characteristics, such as different
    composition of material, melting points, physical characteristics,
    dimensions or electrical resistivity.


CLS 337/163
TXT Subject matter under subclass 142 including fuses with delayed blowing
    action, the blowing taking place only if an overload current persists a
    predetermined period of time, depending upon the magnitude of the overload.

    (1)     Note.  For other retarding or delay means used in the devices of
    this class, see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS in
    subclass 81.


CLS 337/164
TXT Subject matter under subclass 163 including at least two or more separate
    fuse links or fusible elements.  Usually the device comprises a first slow
    acting element; adapted to fuse or melt upon the passage of a moderate
    overload current for an extended length of time, and a fast acting element
    adapted to blow instantaneously upon the passage of a fault or short
    circuit current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    292,    for fusible link structure including plural elements connected in
    series.

    293,    for plural elements connected in parallel.


CLS 337/165
TXT Subject matter under subclass 163 including significant details of metallic
    contact means normally completing an electric circuit through the fusible
    element device with means whereby, the metallic contacts are physically
    forced to an open position upon failure of the fusible element due to the
    passage of a heating current therethrough.


CLS 337/166
TXT Subject matter under subclass 163 including significant details of means
    whereby the delay function of the device is accomplished, at least in part,
    by the absorption or storage of heat generated in the fusible element or
    elements.


CLS 337/167
TXT Subject matter under subclass 142 including means whereby the mode of
    operation of the switch device may be changed at will by an operator.  The
    switch may be changed from a fused to a nonfused device, from a fused cut
    out to a disconnect device or from a drop out operating mode to a nondrop
    out mode, etc.


CLS 337/168
TXT Subject matter under subclass 142 wherein the structure relates to a device
    adapted to interrupt the flow of current through any particular apparatus
    or instrument, either automatically or manually, and consisting of a fuse
    support and a fuse holder with a fuse link.  The fuse holder (generally a
    cartridge) has conducting contacts, connected by a fusible link, adapted to
    be electrically connected to the terminals of a distribution line and to
    separate therefrom either mechanically or automatically upon the rupture of
    the fuse link as a result of an excessive load current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403+,   for automatic cut out devices utilizing thermally responsive
    fusible elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    218,    High-Voltage Switches With Arc Preventing and Extinguishing
    Devices, subclasses 89+ for high potential type switches adapted for use as
    pole switches.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 517 for automatic switches for
    electrical heating devices utilizing fusible elements.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 125+
    for switching devices responsive to electrical conditions such as power,
    voltage or current.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclasses 10+ for electric lamp or discharge device with cut out.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 74+ and
    119+ for electric discharge device systems with cut out.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    safety and protection systems and devices with cutout, especially
    subclasses 103+.


CLS 337/169
TXT Subject matter under subclass 168 including specifically recited mechanism
    whereby the fuse contacts are forcibly and automatically separated from at
    least one line terminal upon rupture of the fuse link.  The kick out means
    may be operated by gas pressure, mechanical spring means, magnetically or
    otherwise.


CLS 337/170
TXT Subject matter under subclass 169 wherein the kick out structure is recited
    as being operatively controlled in response to the blowing or separating of
    the fusible element.  For instance, the kick out device may form an
    operative part of a spring biased link extraction means which in turn is
    operatively responsive to the condition of the fuse link.


CLS 337/171
TXT Subject matter under subclass 168 including means whereby the fuse carrier
    (tube) structure changes its position upon the rupture of a fuse link in
    such a manner as to present an air gap between at least one fuse contact
    and the corresponding line terminal.  The motion of the fuse assembly may
    be along its axial direction (sliding) or in a plane about a perpendicular
    to the tube axis (rotary).  The drop out action is usually gravity actuated
    upon the rupture of a fuse link and the resulting freeing of some latching
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217+,   for so-called expulsion type fuse devices which are fuse devices
    wherein the remains of the fuse link, after failure takes place, are
    forcibly removed from the tube by some means such as gaseous pressure or
    mechanical means.


CLS 337/172
TXT Subject matter under subclass 171 including specifically recited structure
    by means of which the fuse assembly is caused to assume its final or
    dropped out position as a result of a combination of mechanical motions;
    for example, pivotal motion followed by longitudinal sliding movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59+,    for electrothermal, bimetallic element switch with compound motion
    actuating mechanism.

    313,    for thermal, expansible fluid actuated switch with compound motion
    mechanism.

    350,    for thermal, bimetallic element switch with compound motion means.


CLS 337/173
TXT Subject matter under subclass 171 including specifically recited structure
    by means of which the fuse assembly is caused to assume its final or drop
    out position as a result of a single longitudinal sliding motion.

    (1)     Note.  For other reciprocating or sliding mechanisms used in
    devices of this class, see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS,
    SUBCLASS in subclass 10.


CLS 337/174
TXT Subject matter under subclass 171 including significant details of means
    whereby the fuse contacts are operatively retained in electrical conductive
    relationship with the line terminals by latch, detent or other holding
    means until released as a result of excessive electrothermal current,
    manually at the will of an operator, or a combination of both.  The
    latching or holding means is usually maintained in an operative position by
    the tension of a fuse link but may be operated by any appropriate thermal
    current responsive means; for instance, a bimetallic element or even an
    auxiliary fuse device.

    (1)     Note.  For other latching or holding mechanisms used in the devices
    of this class, see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS
    in subclass 46.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 318+ for
    details of latch structure in general.


CLS 337/175
TXT Subject matter under subclass 174 wherein the holding, latching or tripping
    structure includes means whereby at least two modes of releasing operation
    are accomplished or at least two or more separate means whereby the fuse
    contacts are maintained in the controlled electric circuit.  For instance,
    the release means may be either manually or automatically operated or the
    latching means may be dually controlled by means of fuse tension and a
    bimetallic element, etc.


CLS 337/176
TXT Subject matter under subclass 174 wherein the holding, latching or tripping
    structure is specifically described as comprising a means held in operative
    position solely by the tension in a fuse link or element and which is
    automatically released upon the rupture of the fuse element.


CLS 337/177
TXT Subject matter under subclass 176 wherein the holding, latch or tripping
    means includes structure whereby the remaining portion of the fuse link is
    physically extracted from the tube upon actuation of the latch release
    means following rupture of the fusible element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217,    for significant fuse extraction means, not a part or connected with
    latching or latch releasing means, and applicable to fusible element
    actuated switches in general.


CLS 337/178
TXT Subject matter under subclass 176 including spring biasing means whereby
    the operation of the latch or the fuse link extracting device is positively
    influenced toward an operated condition.


CLS 337/179
TXT Subject matter under subclass 176 including significant means whereby the
    movement of the fuse tube is delayed for a predetermined time interval
    after the melting or blowing of the fuse element. The time interval is
    generally designed to be sufficiently long for the expelled gases from the
    tube to become adequately dispelled and/or deionized to an extent where
    they are no longer conducting.


CLS 337/180
TXT Subject matter under subclass 168 including structural details of a cut out
    or disconnect type switch with significant emphasis on means comprising
    line terminals or contacts which are particularly adapted to complete the
    circuit through or support such a switch.

    (1)     Note.  The terminal structure in this subclass is confined to cut
    out or disconnect devices utilizing fusible elements.  In subclasses 187+
    the housing or casing is not restricted to use with a particular type fuse
    device, but is adapted to support fuse devices in general and having means
    whereby the protected electrical circuit is connected to the contacts of
    the fuse device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 59+ for boxes
    and housings with connectors.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 238+ for
    contact structures in general utilizable with mechanical switch devices.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for an electrical
    connector, generally.


CLS 337/181
TXT Subject matter under subclass 180 including terminals or contacts adapted
    to complete and maintain closed an electrical circuit directly through
    contact with a fusible means.  The fusible means acts as a holding means
    for the terminals or contacts until ruptured or destroyed by an excess
    current. When the fuse is ruptured the contacts are allowed to separate
    under the influence of spring or other biasing means thereby opening the
    circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    190,    for a combination of a fuse with a housing casing or support where
    the support includes fusible element tensioning means, which means may be
    released when the fusible element is ruptured.


CLS 337/182
TXT Subject matter under subclass 142 including significant details of heat
    concentrating or generating means external of and separate from the fuse
    element adapted to increase or augment the electrothermal heating effect of
    the current traversing the fusible element.

    (1)     Note.  For other external or auxiliary heating means used in
    devices of this class, see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS,
    SUBCLASS in subclass 102.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 504+ for fusible
    controlled safety devices for liquid heating devices which have external
    heating means.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 51 for thermally controlled switching
    means for an electrical heater and having auxiliary heating means and
    subclass 517 when the thermally controlled device is a fusible link.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 142 for electromagnetically operated switch with
    electrothermal fuse which may be heated by the current in the coil winding.


CLS 337/183
TXT Subject matter under subclass 182 wherein the heating structure comprises
    resistor means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102+,   for electrothermally actuated switches utilizing bimetallic
    elements with external heating means which may be a resistor.


CLS 337/184
TXT Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein the resistor means is recited as
    being directly in series with or completing the controlled electric circuit.


CLS 337/185
TXT Subject matter under subclass 182 wherein the heating means consists at
    least in part of a heat absorbing or storage material whereby upon reaching
    a predetermined temperature heat is transmitted to a fuse or fuses thereby
    causing an electrical circuit to be opened or closed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166,    for time lag fuses having heat absorption or storage means.


CLS 337/186
TXT Subject matter under subclass 142 wherein the fusible electrothermally
    responsive circuit opening or closing means is specifically described as
    combined with significant protective housing, casing or support means.  The
    subject matter to be found here comprises an entire switch assembly in
    combination with unique protective or support means especially adapted for
    the protection or support of fuse type switching or circuit interrupting
    devices under the subclass 142 definition. The housing, casing or support
    means found here form no part of the fuse structure, per se, but are
    adapted to interchangeably receive fuse devices and operatively maintain
    them in position until bodily removed.

    (1)     Note.  For other housing, casing or support means for devices of
    this class, see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS in
    subclass 20.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, subclass 39 for devices
    wherein the support means for the fusible device comprises an overhead
    trolley wire or insulator.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 293+ for
    casings and bases, per se, for mechanical switches.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 68+ for fusible
    switching devices incorporated in or supported by a dynamoelectric machine.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 567+ for fusible switches combined with electric
    discharge devices.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 74 for a
    load device combined with fusible cut out means.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 202 for housing or support structure for
    electromagnetic switches.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 103+ for
    safety and protection systems with a fuse in combination with the device to
    be protected, subclasses 275.1+ for fuses combined with capacitors, and
    subclasses 600+ for switchboards with fusible components.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 162+ for fuses in portable safety lanterns.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 50+ for current
    conversion systems with fusible protective means.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 621+ for an electrical connector
    combined with a named fuse or comprising a casing, housing, or holder for
    receiving and fully enclosing a fuse; subclass 698 for an electrical
    connector specially adapted to receive and support an elongated fuselike
    device (e.g., a cartridge type fuse) having end contacts.


CLS 337/187
TXT Subject matter under subclass 186 including terminal or connector means
    whereby a continuous electrical circuit may be completed from an input
    terminal through at least one fuse device and out to an output or load
    terminal when the fusible element is intact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for electrothermally responsive bimetallic element actuated
    switches with housings including external circuit connection means.

    121,    for similar subject matter utilizing expansible or vaporizable
    fluid.

    381,    for thermally responsive switches with external circuit connector
    means.


CLS 337/188
TXT Subject matter under subclass 187 including means whereby a plurality of
    conductors may be connected to both the input and output terminals of the
    housing or whereby a single pair of input terminals may be connected to a
    plurality of output terminals through the fuse device contained in the
    housing.  For instance, a plurality of single conductors comprising a two
    wire or three wire electrical circuit may each pass through an individual
    fuse or a single input circuit may be connected to a plurality of
    individual output circuits either through a single fuse or a plurality of
    fuses individual to the output circuits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 627+ for
    switchboards with switch and fuse, subclasses 823+ for switchboards with
    terminals, and subclasses 833+ for switchboards with fuses.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for an electrical
    connector, generally.


CLS 337/189
TXT Subject matter under subclass 188 wherein the circuit connector structure
    is so arranged that the current or power input form a single source may be
    distributed to a plurality of loads by means of a plurality of output
    terminals.  Each of the output or load circuits may be individually fused
    or may be connected to the input terminals through a single fuse device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 11+
    for distribution systems with plural load circuits which may be supplied
    from a single source and subclasses 43+ for systems having plural supply
    sources.


CLS 337/190
TXT Subject matter under subclass 187 wherein the external circuit connector
    structure comprises two or more line terminals having means specifically
    recited, whereby a fuse link or element is either held in the operative
    position or is maintained under tension by means of the terminal structure.
    The devices found usually comprise insulator structure combined with or
    forming a support for flexible contact members conductively maintained
    intension by the ends of a conductive fuse link which, upon rupture of the
    fuse, is released from the flexible contacts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 145 for
    insulators combined with connector means.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 38+ for
    combined transformer and fusible protective means.


CLS 337/191
TXT Subject matter under subclass 187 wherein the connector means includes
    significantly recited structure whereby the device is peculiarly adapted
    for connection in a circuit consisting of bus bar or cable type conductors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    415,    for thermally responsive fusible switches incorporated in a
    flexible cable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 50+ especially
    subclasses 59+ for boxes and housings for electrical devices with
    connectors.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 293+ for
    casings and bases for mechanical switches with connector means.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, appropriate subclasses, especially subclass
    197 for a resistor with support, subclass 199 for a resistor with housing,
    subclasses 200+ for a resistor with switch, subclass 215 for a resistor
    with switch having cable connections and subclass 216 for a heater in a
    coaxial line or wave guide and subclasses 226+ for a resistance which is
    encased, embedded or housed.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 627+ and
    830+ for fusible switch housings adapted for connection to cables or panel
    board assemblies.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for an electrical
    connector, per se.


CLS 337/192
TXT Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the connector means is
    specifically recited as comprising socket or thimble means whereby circuit
    connections are made to the bare ends of cable conductors.


CLS 337/193
TXT Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the circuit connector means
    comprises line tap, hook or clamp structure whereby the device as a whole
    may be suspended from a bare conductor, such as a trolley or other overhead
    power line, thereby permitting current to be taken from the line through a
    fusible device within the housing or casing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for an electrical
    connector, per se; especially subclasses 477+ for a temporary connector
    adapted to be utilized with an overhead line by means of a handle or other
    manipulating means.


CLS 337/194
TXT Subject matter under subclass 187 wherein the connector structure comprises
    relatively movable, slidable or otherwise cooperative elements whereby an
    electrical circuit may be completed from an input terminal to an output
    terminal through at least one fuse device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses, especially
    subclasses 775+ for an electrical connector in general having a movable or
    resilient securing part.


CLS 337/195
TXT Subject matter under subclass 194 wherein the connector structure includes
    spring or other resilient biasing means whereby contact pressure is
    maintained between the relatively movable elements when in the circuit
    closing position.  An example of the structure to be found here includes
    fixed spring clips attached to input and output circuit terminals and
    adapted to engage knife blade type fuse contacts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 621+ for an electrical connector
    combined with a named fuse or comprising a casing, housing, or holder for
    receiving and fully enclosing a fuse; subclass 698 for an electrical
    connector specially adapted and support an elongated fuselike device having
    end contacts; and subclasses 830+ for a metallic connector having a
    resilient securing part designed specifically to receive the end contact of
    an elongated fuse.


CLS 337/196
TXT Subject matter under subclass 194 wherein the connector structure includes
    means whereby the circuit open or closed condition through the fusible
    device is governed by, and directly responsive to the manipulation of a
    door or closure means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212,    for a housing with door supported fuse carrier means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclass 56 for mechanical switches with means for insuring a
    predetermined sequence of operation of a switch and a casing cover, and
    subclasses 293+ for casings and bases generally.


CLS 337/197
TXT Subject matter under subclass 187 wherein the connector structure includes
    both male and female elements whereby external connections may be made
    through a fusible device.  The subject matter to be found here relates, for
    the most part, to devices of the type generally known as "utility outlets",
    wherein at least one fuse is housed in the casing and having spring clip
    contact means, in addition to fixed contacts, whereby the male prongs of a
    service cord may be inserted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 621+ for an electrical connector
    combined with a fuse or comprising a casing, housing, or holder for
    receiving and fully enclosing a fuse.


CLS 337/198
TXT Subject matter under subclass 187 wherein the connector structure includes
    a housing of the attachment plug type having means whereby a fuse is
    fixedly connected at one end to a conductor by a binding post, screw or
    other means and at the other end to a prong or prongs whereby electrical
    connection is made to the female elements of a receptacle.  For example,
    the device may consist of a fused service cord connector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 586+ for an electrical coupling
    part including flexing insulation; and subclasses 621+ for an electrical
    connector combined with a fuse or comprising a casing, housing, or holder
    for receiving and fully enclosing a fuse.


CLS 337/199
TXT Subject matter under subclass 186 wherein the housing, casing or support
    structure comprises means; (1) whereby a conductive connection is
    established between the support and ground or other conducting body serving
    as ground, (2) a dielectric structure whereby any discharge between
    conducting surfaces within the structure is prevented, or (3) a metallic
    covering or screen whereby any electrical leakage fields outside the casing
    are prevented. For example, a corona shield.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for fusible element with grounding means combined with space
    discharge device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 5 for conductors
    and insulators with shock hazard protective means, subclasses 6+ for
    grounding devices, subclasses 50+ for boxes and housings hermetically
    sealed, or with grounding means.

    218,    High-Voltage Switches With Arc Preventing and Extinguishing
    Devices, subclasses 1+ for arc preventing and extinguishing devices.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 64+ for resistors with electrical
    shield.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 816+, 825
    and 829+ for switchboards and analogous devices having shielding or
    grounding means.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 92+ for an electrical connector
    with safety grounding provision; subclasses 607+ for an electrical
    connector having or providing an inductive or capacitive shield.


CLS 337/200
TXT Subject matter under subclass 186 including means whereby the housing may
    be attached to an overhead structure, such as a ceiling, and whereby a
    connection is provided from an enclosed fuse structure to a drop light or
    other load fixture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclass 537 for an electrical connector
    including a suspension housing for an electric lamp.


CLS 337/201
TXT Subject matter under subclass 186 wherein the structure is recited as
    comprising plural sections which are formed in such a manner as to interfit
    or interlock with each other to constitute a complete housing or casing
    structure when assembled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 601+ for
    sectional housings.


CLS 337/202
TXT Subject matter under subclass 186 wherein the structure comprises bushing
    or insulator means.  The bushing or insulator structure generally serves a
    dual purpose such as the support for a high voltage terminal or terminals,
    seal for oil switch tanks, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 17+ for
    conductor housings with bushings, terminal or lead in structure and
    subclasses 137+ for insulator or bushing structure, per se.


CLS 337/203
TXT Subject matter under subclass 186 including means whereby any gas
    originating within the housing or casing as a result of the operation of
    the fusible device is either slowly vented or rapidly expelled.


CLS 337/204
TXT Subject matter under subclass 186 including housing means with a filler of
    oil or other liquid.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter classified here is very similar to that
    in subclass 277.  In this subclass the oil or other liquid is claimed in
    combination with housing, casing or other support structure as a cooling or
    other protective means such as insulation.  In the devices to be found in
    subclass 277, the liquid is specifically recited as an arc quenching medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277,    for fusible element actuated switches using liquid dielectric as an
    arc extinguishing medium.  See (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 38+ for
    oil enclosed transformer having a fusible protective means.


CLS 337/205
TXT Subject matter under subclass 186 wherein the housing, casing or support
    structure includes means whereby the housing or casing, (1) may be locked
    against accidental or unauthorized opening, (2) sealed against the entrance
    of air or moisture or the escape therefrom of gases or vapors, (3) the
    contents of the housing are protected from damage from the elements or (4)
    the device is provided with means to prevent physical contact with live
    parts by personnel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 5 for electrical
    shock hazard preventive devices, subclasses 37+ for underground conductor
    housings, subclasses 50+ for hermetically sealed boxes and housings,
    subclasses 66+ for cover or face plate structure and subclasses 68.1+ for
    conductors in ducts or conduits.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 43.01+ for
    unauthorized use preventive means, subclasses 50.02+ for a switch and an
    associated element such as a casing cover and subclass 168 for casing or
    base structure, per se.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 2.1+ for envelopes for electric lamps or
    similar devices and subclasses 200+ for metallic receptacle closures.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 110 for meter control
    or fraud preventing devices.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 202 for electromagnetic switches with housing,
    casing or support means.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 600+ for
    housings and mounting assemblies with plural diverse electrical components
    and including protective or anti-tampering means, subclass 268 for
    transformers with integral switch, and subclass 269 for transformers with
    locking means.


CLS 337/206
TXT Subject matter under subclass 186 including means attached to or comprising
    a part of the housing, casing or support whereby the condition of the
    fusible element or elements or other electrical apparatus within the
    housing may be readily determined visually or audibly.  The indicating
    means may be a light, a bell, buzzer, semiphore, or any appropriate means.

    (1)     Note.  For other signal or indicating means used in the devices of
    this class, see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS: in
    subclass

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 308+ for
    indicators in general for mechanical switches.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 45 for position indicating means for
    movable inductor elements.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 635+ for signals and alarms
    which are electrical apparatus condition responsive, particularly
    subclasses 638+ for fuse or circuit breaker indication.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 488+ for an electrical connector
    with indicating or identifying means.


CLS 337/207
TXT Subject matter under subclass 186 wherein the housing, casing or support
    structure includes significantly recited details of means whereby the
    housing or casing is adapted to be attached to or supported from an
    external surface or object.  For example, the housing may be attached to a
    cross-arm, a rail, an electrical conductor, etc.

    (1)     Note.  In subclasses 187+ the electrical circuit to be protected is
    completed through the components within the housing.  The connector means
    may serve also as an attaching means as in indented subclass 193, for
    example. The attaching means in subclass 207 is merely a means of
    supporting the housing and is independent of any electrical connector
    structure.


CLS 337/208
TXT Subject matter under subclass 186 wherein the housing, casing or support
    structure includes means for attaching the carrier, such as a cartridge or
    plug, to the support.



    The attaching means may or may not be unitary with the electrical contact
    means; for instance, spring contacts.


CLS 337/209
TXT Subject matter under subclass 208 wherein the attachment structure
    comprises adaptor means whereby fusible devices of different physical
    structure or dimensions may be interchangeably inserted into or supported
    on a common attachment device or whereby fuses of diverse current voltage
    rating may be interchangeably attached to a single support means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226,    for fuse adaptors which provide for fuses designed for use with a
    particular circuit, excluding all other fuses.


CLS 337/210
TXT Subject matter under subclass 208 including details of means whereby, (1)
    upon the insertion of a fuse carrier in any position except the correct
    one, completion of the protected electric circuit is prevented, or (2)
    includes elements within the housing adapted to cooperate with elements of
    the fuse carrier to prevent completion of the electrical circuit when the
    fuse carrier is inserted into the housing.


CLS 337/211
TXT Subject matter under subclass 208 including mechanical means connected to
    the fuse carrier, or the housing, in such a manner as to cause the bodily
    removal of the fuse carrier from the attachment means when actuated and
    thereby breaking continuity of an electrical circuit between external
    circuit connector means.  The pull out means usually consists of a handle
    or bail structure while the ejector means may be a mechanism automatically
    operable upon the opening of a door or closure for removing the fuse
    contacts from the support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 775+ for a metallic electrical
    connector having a movable or resilient securing part.


CLS 337/212
TXT Subject matter under subclass 208 wherein the housing or casing structure
    includes a door or cover having attached thereto or unitary therewith means
    whereby a fuse carrier is supported by the door and movable as a unit
    therewith into and out of operating position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196,    for connector means for fusible element means placed in an open or
    closed circuit condition by movement of an associated door or closure means.


CLS 337/213
TXT Subject matter under subclass 208 including means peculiarly adapted for
    the securing of a cartridge type fuse, or fuses, to the housing, casing or
    support device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 830+ for a metallic electrical
    connector for receiving and resiliently gripping the end contact of an
    elongated fuselike component.


CLS 337/214
TXT Subject matter under subclass 213 including latch or other attachment means
    adapted to prevent the fuse carrier from separating from its support means
    until such time as the latch, or other attachment device is either
    automatically or manually released.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclass 832 for a resilient fuse clip with
    a movably attached user manipulated locking, contact retaining, or spring
    spreading means.


CLS 337/215
TXT Subject matter under subclass 214 wherein the clamping or latching means
    consists of a spring clip.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 830+ for a metallic electrical
    connector for receiving and resiliently gripping the end contact of an
    elongated fuselike component.


CLS 337/216
TXT Subject matter under subclass 208 comprising means specifically adapted for
    the attachment of a plug type fuse carrier in the housing, casing or
    support.

            These devices are usually referred to as fuse blocks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 621+ for an electrical connector
    combined with a named fuse or comprising a casing, housing, or holder for
    receiving and fully enclosing a fuse; subclass 698 for an electrical
    connector specially adapted to receive and support an elongated fuselike
    device (e.g., a cartridge type fuse) having end contacts.


CLS 337/217
TXT Subject matter under subclass 142 comprising means whereby the unfused
    portion of a fuse link is automatically withdrawn from the fuse carrier
    upon the severing of the fusible element, or the remaining ends of the
    fusible element are separated upon failure or burning of the fusible
    section.

    (1)     Note.  The fuse element generally constitutes one component of the
    fuse link, the fuse link embraces all the components from a first contact
    to the second contact such as contact, attaching means, conductor, fusible
    element, conductor, second contact, while the fusible element is restricted
    to that material which is meltable upon the application of excess heat.


CLS 337/218
TXT Subject matter under subclass 217 wherein the fuse link extraction means is
    specifically described as cooperatively combined with or forming an
    integral part of at least one contact means which acts to complete the
    electrical circuit when the fuse is in the unblown condition.

    (1)     Note.  In the fuse tensioning means in subclass 190, the flexible
    main live contact members act when engaged with the fuse to maintain the
    fuse link in a state of tension, but no means is provided for withdrawing
    the fuse link except the effect of gravity.  In the devices in subclass 218
    a further positive means, for physically withdrawing the fuse link, is
    combined with the movable contact and performs its function independently
    of the circuit opening operation.


CLS 337/219
TXT Subject matter under subclass 217 wherein the extraction or expulsion means
    comprises, at least in part, a spring biasing means whereby a force is
    exerted to eject the remains of a fuse link after rupture of the fusible
    portion takes place.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    275,    below, for arc extinguishing means wherein rod type contacts
    directly attached to the fusible elements are bodily forced apart when the
    fuse is blown under the influence of a tensioned spring means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    safety and protection of systems and devices, subclasses 15+, 38+, and
    275.1+ for fusible elements combined with particular devices to be
    protected.


CLS 337/220
TXT Subject matter under subclass 217 including means whereby the fuse link is
    expelled under the influence of gaseous pressure generated upon rupture of
    the element or by explosive or expansible material heated by current
    traversing the fuse.

    (1)     Note.  For devices utilizing deionizing gas or vapor generating
    material for the purpose of blowing out an arc and in which expulsion of
    the fuse link occurs in the process of or incidental to the blowing out of
    the arc, search subclasses 273+ particularly indented subclass 281.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    218,    High-Voltage Switches With Arc Preventing and Extinguishing
    Devices, subclasses 43+ for arc extinguishing means utilizing an air
    current and in which fuse extraction may accompany the blow out function.


CLS 337/221
TXT Subject matter under subclass 142 including significant details of means
    whereby a shunt circuit is provided in parallel with the fusible element
    thereby increasing the maximum fusing current of the device.  The devices
    to be found here are generally of the high voltage type.

    (1)     Note.  When the sole purpose of the shunting circuit is to conduct
    current through a light or other indicating means, classification will be
    in subclass 241 as an indicating device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158+,   for fuses claimed as "high voltage" or "current limiting" and
    employing a resistance in parallel with the fusible element or elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    218,    High-Voltage Switches With Arc Preventing and Extinguishing
    Devices, subclasses 8+ for arc prevention means comprising an auxiliary
    shunt circuit combined with fuse means.


CLS 337/222
TXT Subject matter under subclass 142 comprising means whereby the fusible
    element actuated switch as a whole, or some elements thereof, is protected
    from electrical or physical damage due to either electrical or outside
    conditions; for example, against shock, recoil, excessive heat or corona
    effects.

    (1)     Note.  The protective means in this subclass excludes housing or
    casing structure, such as classified in subclasses 186+, comprising
    structure apart or separate from a mere housing, whereby damage to the
    switch is prevented.  Note that even the shunt circuit means in subclass
    221 may furnish some measure of protection against overload.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97,     for electrothermal, bimetallic element switch with switch structure
    protective means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 156 for electromagnetically actuated switches with
    protective means.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 190+ for an electrical connector
    having a retainer or passageway for fluent material; subclasses 382+ for an
    electrical connector including vibration cushioning or absorbing means;
    subclasses 449+ for an electrical connector with stress relieving means;
    subclasses 485+ for an electrical connector with provision to dissipate,
    remove, or block the flow of heat; subclasses 519+ for an electrical
    connector with provision the restrict environmental effects; and subclasses
    607+ for a connector having or providing an inductive or capacitive shield.


CLS 337/223
TXT Subject matter under subclass 222 wherein the protective means is
    specifically recited as adapted to prevent damage resulting from shock,
    vibration or recoil.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 193 for electromagnetic switches with contact
    vibration, bounce or chatter prevention means.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 382+ for an electrical connector
    including vibration cushioning or absorbing means.


CLS 337/224
TXT Subject matter under subclass 222 comprising means whereby the fusible
    element actuated switch device is protected against damage due to the
    ionization of the surrounding atmosphere, caused by a voltage gradient
    above a critical value.

            These devices, for the most part, comprise corona shields.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199,    for fusible element switch having a housing, casing, or support
    with electrical ground, shield or barrier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 127 for conductor
    structure with corona prevention.


CLS 337/225
TXT Subject matter under subclass 142 including (1) means specifically adapted
    for limiting the capacity of the fuse which can be used in the device, (2)
    means for limiting a fuse carrier to use only with a particular fuse
    element designed for use therewith, (3) means to prevent the unauthorized
    removal or tampering with a fuse once it has been inserted into a holder or
    means to prevent the substitution of a metallic nonfusible device in a fuse
    holder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 43.01+ for
    mechanical switches with means for preventing unauthorized use.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 627+ and
    644+ for panel boards with selective means which prevents
    interchangeability of circuit control devices.


CLS 337/226
TXT Subject matter under subclass 225 including adaptor or rejector means which
    will, when inserted or incorporated in a housing, casing or socket, will
    operate to exclude the use of all fuses except those designed for use in
    the particular electric circuit which is to be protected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209,    for fuse adaptors designed to permit ready interchange of diverse
    types of fuses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 627+ and
    644+ for panel board structure designed to prevent interchangeable
    insertion of diverse circuit breaking devices.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses; especially
    subclasses 133+ for an electrical connector with unauthorized connection
    preventer, e.g., key or combination lock; subclasses 304+ for means to
    retain a coupling part in engagement, including a "key" or combination lock
    to prevent separation from a mating part; and subclass 831 for a resilient
    spring clip adapted to receive the end contact of an elongated, fuselike
    component, which spring clip is combined with a contact rejection feature
    or an adapter.


CLS 337/227
TXT Subject matter under subclass 142 wherein the structure specifically
    relates to a subcombination of elements consisting of at least one fusible
    link combined with enclosing or holding means, which enclosing means is
    adapted to provide a continuous electrical circuit between clips or other
    terminal means through the fuse links.  The holder is generally of two
    types:  (1) a tube of insulating material, or (2) a plug of insulating
    material adapted to screw into a conductor socket.  However, the holder may
    take other forms such as a wafer or grasshopper type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 623 for the assembly and manufacture of
    electrical devices including fuse cartridges.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 271+ for
    electrical capacitor structure with housing or tube structure similar to
    that used with fuses.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 269+ for manufacture of a fuse tube.


CLS 337/228
TXT Subject matter under subclass 227 wherein the carrier or holder means is
    specifically recited as comprising a cartridge or tube.


CLS 337/229
TXT Subject matter under subclass 228 wherein the claimed structure includes at
    least two or more fusible elements or links in combination with a cartridge
    or tube and each being adapted to be inserted in an electrical circuit to
    be protected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144,    for plural electrothermally responsive fuses combined with a single
    mechanical contact control means.

    412,    for a plurality of thermally actuated fuse elements combined with a
    single circuit completion means.


CLS 337/230
TXT Subject matter under subclass 229 including means whereby individual ones
    of the plurality of fusible elements may be selectively or successively
    inserted between the terminals of a common electric circuit which is to be
    protected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284+,   for plural independent complete fuses which may be selectively or
    sequentially inserted in the same protected circuit.


CLS 337/231
TXT Subject matter under subclass 228 including significantly recited means
    whereby at least one fusible link or element is securely attached to or
    supported within a cartridge.  The securing means generally comprises
    cooperative elements whereby a continuous electrical circuit is completed
    between the securing means through the fusible element.


CLS 337/232
TXT Subject matter under subclass 231 wherein the attaching or securing means
    is specifically recited as consisting of a soldered or brazed joint.


CLS 337/233
TXT Subject matter under subclass 231 wherein the attaching or securing means
    is specifically recited as including a rigid bar member upon which a
    fusible element is supported in a manner to prevent undue stress in the
    element.  The bar usually consists of a rigid member of insulating material
    supporting at each end one end of a low tensile strength fuse element.


CLS 337/234
TXT Subject matter under subclass 231 wherein the attaching or securing means
    includes significant details of cooperative interfitting elements combined
    with or attachable to the fuse element and the cartridge whereby when a
    fusible link or element is inserted therebetween and the cooperating
    elements are drawn together (as by screw threads, for example) the fusible
    element is caused to be locked or clamped in operative position.


CLS 337/235
TXT Subject matter under subclass 231 wherein the attaching or securing means
    includes significant details of at least one threaded screw or stud device
    whereby the fusible element is rigidly attached to a contact or other
    current conductive element upon assembly of the device.


CLS 337/236
TXT Subject matter under subclass 231 wherein the attaching or securing means
    includes significant details of means whereby the fusible link or element
    is secured by wedging or camming action between the associated parts of the
    device.


CLS 337/237
TXT Subject matter under subclass 231 wherein the attaching or securing means
    includes significant details of means whereby the fuse link or element may
    be readily detached, replaced or interchanged at the will of an operator.


CLS 337/238
TXT Subject matter under subclass 228 including significant details of means
    associated with the tube or cartridge whereby the fuse link or element is
    maintained in the tube under the tension when in the unfused condition.
    The fuse tensioning means may and generally does act to separate the ends
    of the fusible element when melting takes place.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217+,   for fuse structure with extraction or explusion means whose primary
    function is to remove the unblown remnants of the fuse element after
    rupture, but which may incidently serve as fuse element tensioning means.


CLS 337/239
TXT Subject matter under subclass 238 wherein the tensioning means is
    specifically recited as consisting of or comprising spring or other energy
    storage means.


CLS 337/240
TXT Subject matter under subclass 239 including a flexible fusible element, as
    one component of the fuse link, in combination with a wire or other strain
    member.  The strain member is designed to take the full force of the spring
    tensioning means as long as the fuse is conducting thereby protecting the
    fuse from any tensile stress.  Usually, as soon as the fuse ruptures and
    becomes nonconducting, the strain wire becomes heated and in turn is
    ruptured thereby allowing the ends of the fusible element to be separated.


CLS 337/241
TXT Subject matter under subclass 228 wherein the cartridge or tube structure
    is recited as including means whereby the physical condition of the fusible
    element may be readily ascertained, as by visual or audible perception.

    (1)     Note.  For other signals or indicators used in devices of this
    class, see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS in
    subclass 79.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    265+,   for plug type fuse carriers with indicating means.  See (1) Note
    above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 638+ for electrical signals
    and/or alarms responsive to the condition of a fuse.


CLS 337/242
TXT Subject matter under subclass 241 wherein the indicating means is
    specifically recited as being a glow lamp.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266,    for plug type fuse carriers with glow lamp indicating means.


CLS 337/243
TXT Subject matter under subclass 241 wherein the indicating means is
    specifically recited as consisting of a chemical composition which is
    capable of changing state or color upon the application of heat due to
    rupture of the fusible element, as, for example, pyrotechnic compositions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, subclasses 37+ for
    pyrotechnic compositions, per se, useful as indicating means.


CLS 337/244
TXT Subject matter under subclass 241 wherein the indicating or inspection
    means comprises a mechanical device capable of changing its position in
    response to a blown condition of the fusible element. For example, the
    indicating means may consist of a slidable plunger or semaphore.

    (1)     Note.  In several of the patents classified herein, the plunger
    type indicator comprises a striker pin device which may or may not perform
    another function such as an actuator for some external device.  These are
    classified here on the assumption that the primary function of the striker
    pin is as an indicator of the condition of the fuse element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    267,    for plug type fuse carriers with plunger or semaphore type
    indicators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 216+ for fusible thermal
    indicators.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 308+ for
    indicator structure for mechanical switches.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 638+ for automatic signals
    and/or indicators which are responsive to the blown condition of a fuse and
    employ plunger means.


CLS 337/245
TXT Subject matter under subclass 228 wherein the cartridge or tube structure
    includes a handle or other manual manipulating device rigidly attached to
    or united therewith, whereby the cartridge or tube may be manipulated at
    the will of an operator.


CLS 337/246
TXT Subject matter under subclass 228 wherein the cartridge or tube is
    specifically recited as comprising particular structural elements or
    consisting of a particular composition of matter; as, for instance, a
    ceramic mixture or synthetic resin compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273,    especially indented subclass 279, for arc suppression or
    extinguishing means comprising a tubular structure containing gas or vapor
    generating material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 269+ for making a paper fuse tube.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, appropriate subclasses for ceramic
    materials which are used as electric insulators, especially subclasses 127+
    and 134+ for clay containing compositions; and subclasses 141+ for
    titanates and similar material containing compositions.


CLS 337/247
TXT Subject matter under subclass 246 wherein the cartridge or tube structure
    is recited as comprising at least two separate tubular elements interfitted
    one with the other. The tubes may be fixedly related or relatively movable.
     They may be of diverse electrical or material characteristics, as for
    example, a frangible tube within a metallic or other reinforcing tube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273+,   for devices having a liner consisting of gas evolving material
    whose sole purpose in the combination is for the prevention of or
    smothering of an arc.


CLS 337/248
TXT Subject matter under subclass 228 wherein the cartridge or tube structure
    includes significantly recited ferrule, cap or seal means in cooperative
    relationship with the cartridge or tube.  For example, (1) the sealing
    means may be a means for hermetically sealing a dielectric tube or
    cartridge, (2) the cap means may be frangible and adapted to rupture upon
    the destruction of the fuse element, (3) a cap and seal combination may
    serve to prevent the escape of gases upon the rupture of the fuse.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251+,   for cartridge type fuse structure consisting of metallic ferrules
    or caps serving as a means for completing an electrical circuit through the
    fuse device.


CLS 337/249
TXT Subject matter under subclass 228 wherein the cartridge or tube structure
    includes significant details of means adapted for the expulsion of any gas
    from the cartridge or tube resulting from the rupture or destruction of the
    fusible element, thereby facilitating the breaking of a protected circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203,    for apparatus consisting of a electrothermally responsive fuse
    combined with a housing structure with means for expulsion or venting of
    gases from the housing.

    281,    for gaseous blowout means for arc suppression.


CLS 337/250
TXT Subject matter under subclass 249 wherein the gas expulsion structure
    includes significant details of means comprising an opening or passage to
    the outside atmosphere thereby relieving pressure inside the tube, means
    for cooling the gas (as by an expansion chamber) or deionizing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    279,    for arc suppression or extinguishing means utilizing deionizing gas
    generating material.

    280,    for cooling means for the arc.


CLS 337/251
TXT Subject matter under subclass 228 wherein the cartridge or tube structure
    includes significantly recited metallic cap, ferrule or other conducting
    means normally attached to the tube and serving to complete an electrical
    circuit from one line terminal to another through the fuse element.

    (1)     Note.  For other contact or terminal structures used in devices of
    this class, see the subclasses listed under subclass 26.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248,    for similar subject matter where the primary function of the
    ferrule or cap is to act as a seal.

    413,    for thermally responsive fuse devices with significant contact
    structure or composition of material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 874+ for processes of manufacture for
    contacts and terminals and subclass 756 for manufacturing apparatus for
    assembling electrical apparatus which may be a cartridge fuse.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 275+ for
    details of switch structure in general including contact structure.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for electrical
    terminal or contact structure.


CLS 337/252
TXT Subject matter under subclass 251 including significantly recited means
    comprising cooperative elements on the tube or cartridge and on the contact
    or terminal means whereby the contact or terminal structure is rigidly
    affixed to the tube or cartridge.


CLS 337/253
TXT Subject matter under subclass 252 wherein the attaching or securing means
    includes locking, clamp or wedge means, such as a bayonet connection for
    instance.


CLS 337/254
TXT Subject matter under subclass 253 including knife blade type contacts
    cooperatively associated with slotted desk elements.


CLS 337/255
TXT Subject matter under subclass 227 wherein the structure is significantly
    recited as consisting of a plug type container adapted to be screwed or
    slidably connected in an electric circuit.


    The subject matter classified herein usually consists of a plug combined
    with at least one fusible element and adapted to be screwed or otherwise
    inserted into a matching socket carrying electrical contacts adapted to
    cooperate with the plug in such a manner as to complete an electrical
    circuit through the fusible element when the plug is fully inserted in the
    socket.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 660+ for an electrical connector
    of the plural contact plug or receptacle type.


CLS 337/256
TXT Subject matter under subclass 255 including at least two or more separate
    fusible elements combined with a single plug type carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    283+,   for plural independent fuses independently operative.

    290+,   for fuse link structure, per se, consisting of plural elements.

    412,    for thermally responsive fuse actuated devices having a plurality
    of independent fuse elements with a single circuit completion means.


CLS 337/257
TXT Subject matter under subclass 256 including significantly recited means
    whereby the individual fusible elements may be selectively or successively
    inserted into a common electric circuit.  The selection means may be either
    automatic or manually operated.


CLS 337/258
TXT Subject matter under subclass 257 comprising means peculiarly adapted to
    perform the selection operation whereby the separate fusible elements are
    inserted into the electric circuit.


CLS 337/259
TXT Subject matter under subclass 258 wherein the selection means comprises
    relatively movable, rotatable, mechanical elements as, for example, a
    rotatable spider rotating about a fixed axis or pivot.


CLS 337/260
TXT Subject matter under subclass 255 comprising significantly recited means
    whereby at least one fusible element is attached to or secured within the
    plug type carrier in fixed engagement with contact means thereby completing
    a conductive circuit therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231+,   for similar structure combined with a cartridge or tube.


CLS 337/261
TXT Subject matter under subclass 260 wherein the attachment or securing means
    is recited as comprising resilient spring or other biasing means whereby
    the fusible element may be retained in an operative position under tension
    until ruptured.


CLS 337/262
TXT Subject matter under subclass 260 including significantly recited selective
    means consisting of complementary or cooperative mechanical features on the
    plug and fuse element whereby the use of any fusible element except one
    specifically adapted for that particular plug type carrier is prohibited;
    for example, the device may be constructed to take only a ribbon fuse of a
    certain width or other dimension.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225,    for similar subject matter with overfusing or tamper prevention
    means, and consult the "SEARCH CLASS" notes thereunder for a field of
    search in other classes.


CLS 337/263
TXT Subject matter under subclass 262 including significant details of means
    whereby the plug type carrier is adapted to accommodate only a fusible
    element which is sealed or enclosed in a further cartridge or capsule type
    container.


CLS 337/264
TXT Subject matter under subclass 260 wherein the attachment or securing means
    includes mechanical structure whereby a fuse element may be readily
    detached or replaced.  The devices to be classified herein are of the type
    known as "renewable fuses".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237,    for similar subject matter relating to cartridge fuses.


CLS 337/265
TXT Subject matter under subclass 255 including significant details of means
    associated with or forming an integral part of the structure of the plug
    type fuse carrier, whereby the physical condition of the fusible element
    may be readily ascertained as by visual or audible perception.

    (1)     Note.  For other signals or indicators used in devices of this
    class, see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS in
    subclass 79.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241+,   above the cartridge fuse devices with indicating or inspection
    means.  See (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 106 for fusible controlled thermal
    alarms and subclasses 216+ for visual indicators operable by changes of
    temperature.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 308+ for
    indicators for switches in general.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 638+ for automatic alarms
    responsive to the condition of a fuse.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 106 and 160 for
    indicative devices wherein a fusible element constitutes an indicator.


CLS 337/266
TXT Subject matter under subclass 265 wherein the indicating means is
    specifically recited as being a glow lamp or other incandescent means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242,    for similar subject matter in a cartridge type fuse.


CLS 337/267
TXT Subject matter under subclass 265 wherein the indicating means includes
    significantly recited details of a mechanical plunger or semiphore device
    whose position visually indicates the condition of a fusible element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244,    for similar subject matter in a cartridge type fuse device.


CLS 337/268
TXT Subject matter under subclass 255 wherein the carrier structure includes
    significant details of contact or terminal structure whereby an electrical
    circuit is normally completed through the fuse link or element when the
    plug is inserted into a socket.

    (1)     Note.  For other contact or terminal structure used with devices of
    this class, see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS in
    subclass 26.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186+,   for the combination of a fuse plug in combination with a socket or
    connector and in which the housing has blade or prong type contacts adapted
    to be inserted into a service outlet and the socket or connector is
    intended only as a means for connecting the plug fuse into a circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 660+ for an electrical connector
    comprising a plural contact plug or receptacle.


CLS 337/269
TXT Subject matter under subclass 268 including significant details of a
    combination of contacts or terminals (male and female) whereby the fuse
    plug may be utilized in the manner of a plug-in receptacle or a connector
    between an electrical outlet and an appliance cord.  Note that the
    structure classified here usually has a double function with the main
    function being as a fuse carrier, the fuse being directly attached to or
    housed within the plug.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    197,    for housed, fusible element switches with plural diverse connectors
    (e.g., male and female).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 621+ for an electrical connector
    combined with a named fuse or comprising a casing, housing, or holder for
    receiving and fully enclosing a fuse.


CLS 337/270
TXT Subject matter under subclass 255 relating to significant features of
    construction of or composition of material in a plug type fuse carrier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 686 for a
    metallic composite having adjacent components, each of which is claimed in
    terms of its function, e.g., low melting.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, appropriate subclasses for ceramic material
    which are used as electric insulating compositions, especially subclasses
    127+ and 134+ for clay containing compositions; and subclasses 141+ for
    titanates and similar material containing compositions.


CLS 337/271
TXT Subject matter under subclass 270 wherein the plug structure is
    significantly recited as comprising structural features whereby the plug is
    restricted to use only with a particularly designed socket having
    cooperative or complementary parts adapted for mating connection with the
    plug.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 660+ for an electrical connector
    comprising a plural-contact plug or receptacle.


CLS 337/272
TXT Subject matter under subclass 270 including significant details of means
    whereby any gases generated within the plug, upon the operation of the
    fusible element, may be expelled through venting passages open to the
    atmosphere.


CLS 337/273
TXT Subject matter under subclass 142 including significantly recited means
    whereby an electric arc or discharge which is established or tends to be
    established, between the ends of a fusible element when ruptured, or
    between contacts controlled by the fusible element, is either prevented
    from starting or is smothered or otherwise suppressed after starting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    218,    High-Voltage Switches With Arc Preventing and Extinguishing
    Devices, subclasses 1+ for arc preventing and extinguishing devices for
    mechanical switches.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 201 for electromagnetically actuated switches with
    arc suppression means.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 2+ for
    safety and protective devices with contact arc suppression means.


CLS 337/274
TXT Subject matter under subclass 273 wherein the arc suppression of quenching
    structure includes at least two or more means adapted to act conjointly or
    independently to suppress or smother the arc.  For example, the separate
    means may comprise gas evolving material acting conjointly with magnetic
    means, etc., or may include the so-called "multibreak" devices in which a
    series of arcs are generated, thereby providing arc extinguishing gas
    blasts at each point of break or rupture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    218,    High-Voltage Switches With Arc Preventing and Extinguishing
    Devices, subclasses 2+ for multiple break arc preventing and extinguishing
    means for mechanical switches.


CLS 337/275
TXT Subject matter under subclass 274 wherein at least one of the suppression
    or extinguishing means consists of a draw out rod.  The draw out rod
    devices usually consist of a relatively massive metallic rod functioning as
    a movable contact normally connected in the circuit by a fuse and being
    withdrawn instantly, upon the blowing of the fuse, through a chamber or
    passage wherein the arc is extinguished by one or more means.


CLS 337/276
TXT Subject matter under subclass 273 wherein the suppression or extinguishing
    means includes or consists of a dielectric material surrounding the fusible
    element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclasses 163.01+ for arc extinguishing materials containing
    a cellulose or derivative.


CLS 337/277
TXT Subject matter under subclass 276 wherein the specifically recited
    dielectric material comprises a liquid.  The liquid generally is of a
    hydrocarbon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204,    for housed, fusible element switches immersed in arc insulating
    liquid, usually for cooling purposes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclass 14 for an
    insulating oil comprising only mineral oil components.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 570+ for fluent dielectric compositions
    containing a nonhydrocarbon material.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclasses 6.3+ for an
    all-hydrocarbon insulating oil containing more than mineral oil fractions.


CLS 337/278
TXT Subject matter under subclass 276 including a dielectric material forming a
    gap or barrier between the two extremities of the arc when the fuse is
    blown thereby acting to snuff the arc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    218,    High-Voltage Switches With Arc Preventing and Extinguishing
    Devices, subclasses 89+ for arc preventing or extinguishing means
    comprising a non-conductive barrier.


CLS 337/279
TXT Subject matter under subclass 273 wherein the suppression or extinction
    means consists of a material capable of generating a deionizing gas or
    vapor when heated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 102+ for armored conductors with arc extinguishing
    vapor generating filler material.

    218,    High-Voltage Switches With Arc Preventing and Extinguishing
    Devices, subclasses 1+ and 89+ for vapor generating nonconducting material.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 2+, especially subclass 8 for fire or arc
    extinguishing materials charged with volatile liquid or gas.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 117+ for
    protective devices utilizing a gas generating arc quenching material.


CLS 337/280
TXT Subject matter under subclass 273 wherein the suppression or extinguishing
    means comprises means whereby the heated gases resulting from and sustained
    by the arc are cooled, condensed or completely absorbed.


CLS 337/281
TXT Subject matter under subclass 273 wherein the suppression or extinguishing
    means comprises means whereby a blast of air is directed across an arc to
    extinguish it or whereby a magnetic field is generated when the circuit is
    broken, the field acting to repel and break the arc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    218,    High-Voltage Switches With Arc Preventing and Extinguishing
    Devices, subclasses 22+ for magnetic blow out devices for arc blow out in
    mechanical switches.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 201 for electromagnetically operated switches with
    magnetic blow out means.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 133+ for
    safety and protection systems and devices with magnetic means for snuffing
    an arc.


CLS 337/282
TXT Subject matter under subclass 273 including significant details of chamber
    or passage structure wherein the arcing is confined or caused to take place
    or into which it is drawn for purposes of extinction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    275,    for structure including an arc draw out rod operating in an arcing
    chamber, usually a cylindrical cavity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    218,    High-Voltage Switches With Arc Preventing and Extinguishing
    Devices, subclasses 1+ for similar structure in a mechanical circuit
    breaker device.


CLS 337/283
TXT Subject matter under subclass 142 including details of at least two or more
    separate and distinct fuses operative independently to break an electrical
    circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    292     and 293, for single fuse structure having a plurality of fusible
    elements connected in series or parallel arrangement, respectively.


CLS 337/284
TXT Subject matter under subclass 283 including details of means whereby each
    of the individual fuses may be separately inserted in a single electric
    circuit in sequence or selectively at the will of an operator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission and Interconnection Systems, subclass 141.8
    for series connected switches with time delay means which may comprise
    fusible elements.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 103+ for
    thermally actuated protective devices comprising plural fuse means in
    parallel.


CLS 337/285
TXT Subject matter under subclass 284 wherein the selection means is
    specifically recited as automatically operative.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 142 for an electromagnetically operated switch
    with a plurality of automatically selective fuses.


CLS 337/286
TXT Subject matter under subclass 285 wherein the automatic selective means
    includes structure whereby a pre-selected interval of time is caused to
    elapse between the blowing of a first fuse and its replacement by a second.


CLS 337/287
TXT Subject matter under subclass 286 wherein the time delayed selection
    apparatus consists of hydraulic or pneumatic means.


CLS 337/288
TXT Subject matter under subclass 285 wherein the selective structure includes
    significant details of means whereby the insertion of any one fuse in a
    circuit is dependent upon the condition of at least one other fuse or
    whereby the insertion of a second fuse is prevented for as long as one
    other previously inserted fuse is in operative condition.


CLS 337/289
TXT Subject matter under subclass 284 wherein the selector structure includes
    means whereby a plurality of fuses are mounted in such a way that they may
    be rotated around a common axis to successively or selectively connect the
    fixed contacts of an electrical circuit.


    The structure to be found here also includes devices where a plurality of
    fuses are fixedly mounted in such a way that at least one movable contact
    may be rotated into conductive relationship with each of the fuses
    selectively or sequentially at the will of an operator.


CLS 337/290
TXT Subject matter under subclass 142 including significant details of fuse
    link or fuse element structure or material of construction. The subject
    matter to be found here relates to the structure, including a fusible
    element, which serves to complete a conductive path from an input terminal
    of a fuse to the output terminal and which structure does not form a
    subcombination of a more comprehensive combination classifiable elsewhere
    in the class or in another art class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 623 for processes for manufacture of
    electrical devices including fusible elements.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosive Devices, subclass 262 for explosive
    devices comprising fuses and igniting devices.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, appropriate
    subclasses for thermic compositions.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, subclass 42 for fusible connections.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 500+ for electrically conductive or
    emissive compositions.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, for alloys suitable for fusible
    elements.


CLS 337/291
TXT Subject matter under subclass 290 including at least one element of
    appreciable tensile strength parallelly connected to a fusible element of
    comparative weak tensile strength.  The strain relief member is utilized to
    protect the fusible element against tensile stresses which tend to rupture
    it under normal conditions of usage.  The strain element is usually of
    conducting material capable of carrying a certain amount of current both
    before and after the fusible element has been ruptured.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240,    for cartridge fuses with tensioning means including a strain relief
    member.


CLS 337/292
TXT Subject matter under subclass 290 wherein the fuse link structure comprises
    at least two or more conductive segments, series connected, at least one or
    more being of a readily fusible material.  The devices classified herein
    usually comprise high melting point elements connected at their inner ends
    by low melting point material such as solder or other alloy.


CLS 337/293
TXT Subject matter under subclass 290 including at least two or more fusible
    elements parallelly connected between the fuse contacts and forming
    parallel current paths.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161+,   for high voltage current limiting fuse devices utilizing plural
    fusible elements.


CLS 337/294
TXT Subject matter under subclass 290 wherein the fusible element consists of a
    continuous strand or wire adapted for successive insertion of undamaged
    portions thereof between the contacts of an electrical circuit to be
    protected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    416,    for similar structure in thermally actuated fuse controlled
    switches.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclass 6 for a combined light and structure
    utilizing a continuous strand of volatilizable material as a source of
    light flashes.


CLS 337/295
TXT Subject matter under subclass 290 wherein the fusible element is described
    as being of particular geometrical shape or configuration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159,    for current limiting fuse devices utilizing fuse elements of
    significant shape.


CLS 337/296
TXT Subject matter under subclass 290 wherein the fusible element is described
    as comprising a composite structure made up of at least two or more
    conductive materials, as, for example, a fusible ribbon with an overlay of
    a more readily meltable mass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160,    for similar structure in a current limiting device.

    163+,   for similar structure in a delayed action fuse.


CLS 337/297
TXT Subject matter under subclass 290 wherein the fuse link structure includes
    significant details of at least one fusible link which is coated upon or
    otherwise attached to a non conducting core.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 620 for processes for the manufacture of
    resistors by coating resistive material on a base.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 250 for printed
    electrical circuits, per se.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 308 for an electrical resistance
    element printed on a base.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 55+ for an electrical connector
    combined with a preformed panel circuit arrangement (e.g., a printed
    circuit board).


CLS 337/298
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising circuit controlling
    means which is wholly, or for the major part, responsive to heat from the
    surrounding atmosphere or material (i.e., thermally actuated).

    (1)     Note.  See the definition of subclass 14 of this class for the
    distinction between electrothermally actuated switches and this group of
    thermally actuated switches.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14+,    for switching devices responsive to heat derived, to a major
    degree, from an electrical current traversing the device.  See (1) Note
    above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 325+ for automatic
    control means for cooking apparatus, the means being thermally responsive.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 494+ for thermally responsive means
    for automatically controlling the power supply or controlling the current
    in electric heater devices and subclasses 510+ for thermally responsive
    automatically operated switching means for electric heaters.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 91-104
    for thermostatic control means for automatic temperature and humidity
    regulation devices.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 117
    for electrical switching systems responsive to light, heat, etc.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    subclasses 166+ for charging or discharging a capacitor, per se.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 103+ for
    protective circuits with thermally responsive actuating means, and
    subclasses 161+ for control circuits for electromagnetic devices with
    thermal control means.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 100+ for thermometers,
    per se.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclass 161 for an electrical connector
    having an element responsive to temperature to effect varying pressure on
    the contact surfaces.


CLS 337/299
TXT Subject matter under subclass 298 including at least two or more thermally
    responsive devices of diverse type cooperatively combined in a single
    switch device for controlling a common set of contacts.  For example, the
    device may have an expansible fluid bellows structure combined with an
    expansible rod member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     above for similar subject matter in electrothermally actuates
    switches.


CLS 337/300
TXT Subject matter under subclass 298 wherein the thermally responsive
    structure is significantly described as being responsive to plural external
    conditions.  For example, to both temperature and humidity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, appropriate
    subclasses especially subclasses 4, 5, 18, 19, 32, 33, 40, and 91-104 for
    plural condition responsive thermostatic controls.


CLS 337/301
TXT Subject matter under subclass 298 including mechanical means, such as a
    clock or motor whereby the contacts of a controlled circuit are maintained
    closed for a definite period of time, are opened and/or closed at regular
    cyclic intervals, the operating range of a thermostatic device (i.e. the
    minimum and maximum operative temperature at which it operates) is varied
    at predetermined intervals of time, or whereby the thermostatic device may
    be prevented from functioning during certain hours.  The motor structure
    for operating the timing means may be electric, magnetic, or spring wound.

    (1)     Note.  For other delaying or timing means used in the devices of
    this class, see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS in
    subclass 81.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, particularly subclasses
    19+, for periodically operated circuit breakers, per se.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 68+ for electromagnetic switches with motor
    operator.


CLS 337/302
TXT Subject matter under subclass 301 comprising means whereby a circuit is
    completed and broken intermittently or cyclically at constantly recurring
    intervals.

    (1)     Note.  For other cyclic or periodic actuators used in devices of
    this class, see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS in
    subclass 92.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for similar subject matter utilizing electrothermally responsive
    bimetallic means.

    116,    for similar subject matter in expansible or vaporizable fluid
    actuated switches.

    138,    for cyclically operated longitudinally expansible element actuated
    switches.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 19+ for
    periodic circuit breakers generally.

    307,    Electrical Transmissions or Interconnection Systems, subclass 132
    for repetitive make and break switching systems.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 209+ for
    systems having a periodic switch in the supply circuit of a load or loads.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 87+ for periodically operated electromagnetic
    switches (e.g. vibrators).

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclass 110 for an inverter
    system comprising a vibrator.


CLS 337/303
TXT Subject matter under subclass 302 including means whereby the interval of
    time during which the thermally responsive device is active or inactive, to
    control the contacts of a circuit, may be predeterminedly fixed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93,     for cyclically controlled electrothermal, bimetallic element
    switches with means to adjust cyclical period.


CLS 337/304
TXT Subject matter under subclass 301 including significant details of means
    whereby the range of temperature values which determined the operational
    characteristics of the device may be predeterminedly fixed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     for electrothermally responsive bimetallic means combined with
    manual or mechanical contact control means and whose operative range is
    adjustable.

    94,     for similar subject matter in a device in which the contacts are
    directly actuated by the metallic device.


CLS 337/305
TXT Subject matter under subclass 304 wherein the operative temperature range
    determining means includes rotatable cam or eccentric means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 515 for adjustable, automatic thermally
    responsive switch means for an electric heater.


CLS 337/306
TXT Subject matter under subclass 298 wherein the circuit controlling means
    comprises a device utilizing an expansible or vaporizable fluid whereby the
    change of volume or the pressure generated thereby transmits an actuating
    force to a movable contact or contacts.

    (1)     Note.  For devices in which an expansible liquid in a container,
    the container acting to complete a circuit or to prevent the completion of
    a circuit, as by propping the contacts open, is caused to explode the
    container to control the circuit, search will be in this class in subclass
    416 even though the device is not in fact explosive or combustible as
    defined in that subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114+,   for similar subject matter in an electrothermally actuated switch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 516+ for power plants utilizing expansible
    or vaporizable fluid.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 700+ for fluid pressure gauges
    with motion transmitting means actuated by expansible fluids.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 513 for automatically operative switches
    for electric heaters utilizing thermally responsive expansible liquid.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 4, 18,
    32, 42, 56+, 64+, 86, and 99 for automatic temperature regulating devices
    utilizing thermally expansive fluid.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 118
    for switching systems responsive to pressure in a fluid and subclass 144
    for fluid pressure actuator, per se.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 592 for automatic alarms with
    fluid pressure sensitive thermo-mechanical sensing means.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 201+ for a thermometer
    utilizing an expanding fluid.


CLS 337/307
TXT Subject matter under subclass 306 including at least two or more expansible
    or vaporizable fluid actuated devices acting either separately or
    conjointly to control a common set of contacts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38+,    for plural electrothermally actuated bimetallic elements combined
    with a single mechanical contact control device.

    144,    for devices comprising a plurality of electrothermally actuated
    fuses combined with a single contact operating means.

    335+,   for plural thermally responsive bimetallic elements with a single
    contact control means.


CLS 337/308
TXT Subject matter under subclass 307 including at least two or more expansible
    elements, each of which is significantly described as responsive to diverse
    environmental conditions, such as immediate ambient temperature and
    external temperature for example, or of diverse operating characteristics
    whereby the opening and/or closing of an electrical circuit is a resultant
    of the operative condition of all the elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for similar subject matter in devices utilizing a plurality of
    electrothermally responsive bimetallic elements.

    336,    for similar devices utilizing a plurality of thermally actuated
    bimetallic elements.


CLS 337/309
TXT Subject matter under subclass 306 including a plurality (three or more) of
    contacts associated with a single continuous electric circuit to be
    controlled or includes means whereby two or more continuous electric
    circuits are controlled by the contact controlling means.  See (1) Note
    under the definition of subclass 41, above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86+,    for similar subject matter in devices utilizing electrothermally
    responsive bimetallic elements directly controlling a plurality of contacts.

    145+,   for similar subject matter utilizing electrothermally responsive
    fusible elements.

    337+,   for thermally responsive bimetallic elements controlling plural
    contacts.


CLS 337/310
TXT Subject matter under subclass 309 including at least two or more separate
    distinct and independently operative switch devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42+,    for similar subject matter utilizing electrothermally responsive
    bimetallic elements.

    338+,   for similar subject matter utilizing thermally responsive
    bimetallic elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 4 and
    235.1 for refrigeration devices utilizing plural expansible fluid type
    switches.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 81.4 for plural
    fluid pressure type switches.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 113+
    for electrical switching systems utilizing plural switches.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 320+ for
    discharge device systems having plural discharge device loads with plural
    switches.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 203 for bellows type
    thermometers with multiple distinct elements.


CLS 337/311
TXT Subject matter under subclass 309 including significant means whereby each
    of a plurality of contact pairs may be actuated selectively, alternately,
    or sequentially. The movable contact may be a single contact common to each
    pair, i.e., may constitute the movable contact of each pair selectively.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for similar subject matter in switches utilizing electrothermally
    responsive bimetallic elements.

    87,     for similar subject matter in electrothermally actuated switches in
    which a bimetallic element directly actuates the contacts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 156 for automatic control of refrigerators
    by thermal means utilizing a plurality of contacts.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 16 for multiple
    circuit control means with pressure actuated reciprocating contacts.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, appropriate
    subclasses, especially subclasses 99+ for expanding fluid control devices
    with plural selectively actuated contacts.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 188+.


CLS 337/312
TXT Subject matter under subclass 306 including significant details of manual
    or other mechanical means which acts conjointly with or as an intermediary
    between at least one expansible fluid actuated device and at least one
    movable contact, thereby opening and/or closing an electric circuit.

    (1)     Note.  For other manual or mechanical control means used in devices
    of this class, see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS
    in subclass 115.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115+,   for similar subject matter utilized in an electrothermally actuated
    switch.  See (1) Note above.


CLS 337/313
TXT Subject matter under subclass 312 including a mechanical linkage whereby
    the movement of a movable contact, or contacts, results from a force
    applied thereto as a result of a motion in a first direction converted to a
    motion in a second direction; for example, a linear first motion may be
    converted to a rotary motion about a fixed origin or pivot as by a toggle
    linkage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58+,    for similar subject matter in an electrothermally operated switch
    utilizing bimetallic elements.

    350,    for similar subject matter in thermally operated switches utilizing
    bimetallic elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 191 for electromagnetic switches employing
    compound motion mechanical contact control means.


CLS 337/314
TXT Subject matter under subclass 312 wherein the contact control means
    includes structure whereby the opening and/or closing of an electric
    circuit is complete as a result of sliding or reciprocating motion by the
    mechanical means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62+,    for similar subject matter utilized in electrothermally responsive
    bimetallic element actuated switches.

    148,    for similar subject matter in electrothermally responsive fusible
    element actuated switches.

    354,    for similar subject matter in thermally responsive bimetallic
    element actuated switches.

    408+,   for similar subject matter in thermally responsive, fusible,
    combustible or explosive material element type switches.


CLS 337/315
TXT Subject matter under subclass 314 wherein the reciprocating member is
    specifically recited as comprising a piston or plunger.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    409,    for thermally responsive, fusible, combustible or explosive
    material element switches with reciprocating plunger or piston.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 100 for
    expanding fluid thermostatic actuating means for temperature regulators
    utilizing a float or piston.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 202 for expanding fluid
    type thermometers with float or piston.


CLS 337/316
TXT Subject matter under subclass 312 wherein the mechanical contact control
    means is specifically recited as comprising structure whereby contact
    opening and/or closing is accomplished as a result or rotary or oscillatory
    motion of the mechanical elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for similar subject matter in an electrothermally actuated switch
    utilizing bimetallic elements.

    149,    for similar subject matter in electrothermally actuated switches
    utilizing fusible elements.

    351+,   for similar subject matter in thermally actuated switches utilizing
    bimetallic elements.

    410,    for thermally responsive, fusible, combustible or explosive
    material element switches with rotatable actuator.


CLS 337/317
TXT Subject matter under subclass 312 wherein the contact control structure
    includes spring or other potential energy storage means whereby a major
    portion of the force used in actuating the contacts of the device.  The
    actuating force is usually transmitted to the movable contact structure
    through mechanical means upon the spring being released from its energy
    storage position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52+,    for similar subject matter in electrothermally actuated switches
    actuated switches utilizing bimetallic elements.

    342+,   for similar subject matter in thermally actuated switches utilizing
    bimetallic elements.

    388+,   for thermal, longitudinally expansible element type switch with
    spring or other energy storage means.

    407+,   for thermal, fusible, combustible or explosive material type switch
    with spring or other energy storage means.


CLS 337/318
TXT Subject matter under subclass 317 wherein the contact control means is
    specifically recited as comprising a snap action device.

    (1)     Note.  For other snap action mechanisms used in devices of this
    class see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS  in
    subclass 53.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 4, 5,
    156, and 235.1 for refrigerator control devices utilizing a snap action
    switch of the bellows type.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 402+ for snap
    switches, per se, and subclass 83 for fluid pressure switches with
    diaphragm controlled snap action.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 188 for electromagnetic switches with snap action
    contact actuating means.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclass 180 for an electrical connector
    with provision for the contact thereof to move with respect to the rest of
    the device and away from the mating contact quickly, i.e., by snap or
    quick-break action.


CLS 337/319
TXT Subject matter under subclass 318 wherein the snap action structure
    includes means whereby some operative characteristic of the device or the
    thermally responsive control element by which it is actuated, may be
    readily adjusted, calibrated or compensated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57      and 347, for similar subject matter in other art type switches.

    368,    for thermal, bimetallic snap action switch with adjustment or
    calibration means.


CLS 337/320
TXT Subject matter under subclass 306 wherein the thermally responsive element
    is specifically recited as comprising a pressure responsive diaphragm or
    bellows structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for similar subject matter in an electrothermally actuated switch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 5, 7,
    and 235.1 for refrigerator controls utilizing diaphragm or bellows type
    expansible liquid means.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, especially subclass 83
    for diaphragm controlled fluid pressure switches.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, appropriate
    subclasses especially subclasses 9, 20, 49.1, 68, and 75 for automatic
    temperature control apparatus utilizing similar subject matter.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 68 for electric
    motor structure for expansible fluid overload switches.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 592 for automatic alarms with
    fluid pressure sensors utilizing a diaphragm or bellows.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 203 for bellows type
    expanding fluid thermometers.


CLS 337/321
TXT Subject matter under subclass 320 including specifically recited details of
    a capillary tube or bore for the expansible fluid whereby a change of
    volume results from a change in ambient temperature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    for similar subject matter in electrothermally actuated switches.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, appropriate
    subclasses, especially subclasses 9, 21, 32, and 99 for automatic
    temperature control devices utilizing capillary tube pressure transmittal
    means.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 68 for motor
    structure with electric safety devices utilizing capillary tube means.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, appropriate subclasses, especially
    subclass 592 for automatic alarms responsive to temperature which may
    include capillary tube pressure transmitting means.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 202 for expanding fluid
    thermometers utilizing capillary tube pressure transmitting means.


CLS 337/322
TXT Subject matter under subclass 306 wherein the temperature responsive
    actuating means is specifically recited as including a Bourdon tube device.
     The Bourdon tube is a tubular structure, usually of stainless steel or
    other similar material with a large coefficient of expansion and bent upon
    itself in the shape of a sector of a torus and when subjected to heat of
    pressure tends to straighten out, thereby actuating a movable contact
    structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114+,   for similar subject matter in an electrothermally actuated switch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 732+ for Bourdon tube type fluid
    pressure gauges.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 81.6 for
    Bourdon tube type pressure actuated switches.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 30 and 57
    for automatic temperature regulating devices utilizing Bourdon tubes.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 203 for a thermometer
    having a fluid filled Bourdon tube.


CLS 337/323
TXT Subject matter under subclass 306 including significantly recited details
    of means whereby the operative current value, or range of values,
    sufficient or necessary to actuate the main contact control means and
    thereby produce an opening or closing action thereof is predetermined,
    varied at will or calibrated.

    (1)     Note.  For other range adjustment or calibration means used in
    devices of this class, see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS,
    SUBCLASS in subclass 82.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82+     and 94, for similar subject matter in electrothermally responsive
    bimetallic element actuated switches.  See (1) Note above.

    360+,   below for similar subject matter in thermally actuated switches
    with bimetallic elements.


CLS 337/324
TXT Subject matter under subclass 306 including significant details of
    structure comprising heat generating or concentrating means, such as
    heating coils or high resistance elements, serving to augment the heating
    effect of the heating medium normally surrounding or influencing the
    expansible fluid actuating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for similar subject matter in electrothermally responsive
    expansible fluid actuated switches.


CLS 337/325
TXT Subject matter under subclass 306 comprising significant means whereby (1)
    the contact control means of the temperature responsive means may be
    prevented from movement when the operative temperature is either below or
    above certain limits, (2) the contact control means may be locked in either
    the circuit closed or circuit open position, irrespective of a change in a
    temperature condition, or (3) the contacts are prevented from accidental
    movement from a predetermined condition.

    (1)     Note.  For other latching or holding means used in devices of this
    class, see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS in
    subclass 46.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 157+ for similar subject matter in
    electromagnetically operated switches.


CLS 337/326
TXT Devices under subclass 306 relating specifically to a particular
    temperature responsive fluid or fluid generating means whereby pressure is
    generated sufficient to actuate contact control means upon the application
    of heat to the device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 159 for a thermometer
    having a fluid undergoing a change of state (e.g., volatile), or having a
    temperature responsive sorption effect; and subclasses 201+ for other
    expanding fluid thermometers.


CLS 337/327
TXT Subject matter under subclass 306 relating specifically to significant
    details of housing, casing or support means peculiarly adapted for use with
    expansible or vaporizable fluid actuated switches.

    (1)     Note.  For other housing or casing structures used in devices of
    this class, see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS in
    subclass 20.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121,    for similar subject matter in electrothermally actuated switches.


CLS 337/328
TXT Subject matter under subclass 327 including specifically recited means for
    relieving excess pressure generated within the housing or the fluid
    container, as by venting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 738 for fluid pressure gauges of
    the Bourdon type having pressure relief means.


CLS 337/329
TXT Subject matter under subclass 306 including significant details of contact
    structure, arrangement or composition of matter.

    (1)     Note.  For other contact structures or compositions used in devices
    of this class, see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS
    in subclass 26.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     109, 137, 273, and 399, for particular contact structure in other
    types of electrothermally and thermally actuated switches.  See (1) Note
    above.

    122,    for similar subject matter in electrothermally responsive
    expansible fluid actuated switches.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 874+ for processes for the manufacture of
    electrical contacts.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 238+ for
    switch contact details in general.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 500+ for electrically conductive
    compositions.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 196+ for contact composition or structure in
    electromagnetic switches.


CLS 337/330
TXT Subject matter under subclass 329 wherein the contact structure includes
    details of means whereby the relative position of the contacts when in the
    nonoperative position may be adjusted at will by an operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323,    for devices wherein the operative temperature or range of
    temperatures is adjusted by varying the relative position of the contacts
    (i.e. the movable contact).

    374+,   for similar subject matter in thermally responsive, bimetallic
    element actuated switches.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 197+ for similar subject matter in
    electromagnetically operated switches.


CLS 337/331
TXT Subject matter under subclass 329 wherein at least one of the contacts is
    specifically recited as comprising a conductive liquid, such as mercury.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for conductive fluid switches of the electrothermally actuated type.

    80,     for bimetallically actuated electrothermal switches with mercury
    contacts.

    273,    for similar subject matter in thermally responsive bimetallic
    element actuated switches.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 182+ for
    liquid contact mechanical switches.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 47+ for electromagnetically operated mercury
    switches.


CLS 337/332
TXT Subject matter under subclass 306 including significant details of signal,
    alarm or other indicating means whereby the operative condition of the
    switch or some abnormal occurrence within the switch structure may be
    readily ascertained visually, audibly or by a combination of both.

    (1)     Note.  For other signals or indicators used in devices of this
    class, see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS in
    subclass 79.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 102+ for thermally expansible
    fluid actuated alarms and subclasses 216+ for thermally actuated indicators
    of the mechanical type.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 81+ for fluid
    pressure actuated switches in general with indicator means and subclasses
    308+ for indicators, per se.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 17 for electromagnetically actuated circuit
    breakers with indicating means.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 584+ and 664 for automatic
    alarms responsive to a condition such as heat or electrical current.


CLS 337/333
TXT Subject matter under subclass 298 including at least one thermal responsive
    composite element consisting of two different metals, bonded together, and
    having different coefficients of expansion, such that when heated, a
    bending motion of the composite element results.  The resultant motion is
    utilized either directly or through an intermediate mechanical means to
    control the opening and/or closing of an electrical circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36+,    for corresponding subject matter utilizing electrothermally
    responsive bimetallic elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 325+ for automatic
    control of food cooking utensils with bimetallic thermostatic control.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 457 and 468 for thermostatically
    controlled values.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 494 and 510+ for automatic control,
    regulating or switch means for electric heaters utilizing bimetallic
    thermostats.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 5, 19,
    33, 43, 59, and 96 for automatic temperature regulators utilizing
    bimetallic thermostats.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 70 for thermostatic compositions.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclasses 89+ for thermostatic operators for consumable electrodes.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 72 for
    flashers utilizing a bimetallic periodic switch.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 471+ for automatic
    motor control devices with thermostatic means.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    subclasses 166+ for charging or discharging a capacitor, per se.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclasses 33+ for
    automatic controls responsive to thermal conditions.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 145 for electromagnetic switches with bimetallic
    element.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 593+ for automatic alarms
    responsive to temperature and utilizing thermostats.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 103+ and
    124+ for thermally actuated safety and protective devices comprising
    bimetallic elements.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 205+ for expanding solid
    type thermometers utilizing bimetallic elements.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 616+ for
    composite metallic stock having heat-deflectable characteristics.


CLS 337/334
TXT Subject matter under subclass 333 comprising manual or other mechanical
    means acting conjointly or cooperatively with at least one bimetallic
    device, or which acts as an intermediary between the thermally responsive
    bimetallic element and at least one movable contact, thereby opening or
    closing an electrical circuit.  The manual means may be a handle or push
    button actuated means, for instance or the other mechanical means may be
    any combination of mechanical elements, as a toggle for instance.

    (1)     Note.  For other manual or mechanical controls used in this class,
    see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS in subclass 115.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37+,    for similar subject matter in an electrothermally actuated switch.
    See (1) Note above.


CLS 337/335
TXT Subject matter under subclass 334 including at least two or more thermal
    responsive bimetallic elements, combined with a further single mechanical
    contact controlling means.  The bimetallic elements may operate jointly or
    individually to control the movable contact or contacts through the agency
    of the mechanical means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38+,    for similar subject matter in an electrothermally actuated switch.


CLS 337/336
TXT Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein each of the thermal responsive
    elements is significantly described as responsive to different
    environmental conditions such as, to a local heating medium and atmospheric
    conditions, or of diverse operating characteristics whereby the opening or
    closing of an electrical circuit is a resultant of the operative condition
    of all the elements, i.e., differential.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for similar subject matter in an electrothermally actuated switch.


CLS 337/337
TXT Subject matter under subclass 334 including a plurality (three or more) of
    contacts associated with a single continuous electrical circuit, or
    includes means whereby two or more continuous electric circuits are
    controlled by the contact control means.

    (1)     Note.  Under the definition of subclass 41 should be consulted in
    determining the scope of the subject matter contained in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for fusible element switch with multiple circuit contact means
    combined with diverse art switch.

    41+,    for similar subject matter in an electrothermally actuated switch.

    145+,   for fusible element actuated switch with multiple circuit contact
    means.


CLS 337/338
TXT Subject matter under subclass 337 comprising at least two or more separate
    distinct and independently operative switch devices whereby two or more
    separate and distinct electrical circuits may be controlled.  See (1) Note
    under the definition of subclass 42 above to determine the scope of the
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42+,    for similar subject matter in an electrothermally actuated switch.


CLS 337/339
TXT Subject matter under subclass 338 including means whereby the plural
    switching devices are rendered interdependent, one on the other, thereby
    being caused to operate alternately, successively, or selectively; the
    operation of each one depending upon conditions in at least one other; for
    example, one device is prevented from operating while another is in an
    operated position, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for similar subject matter in an electrothermally actuated switch.


CLS 337/340
TXT Subject matter under subclass 337 wherein the structure, whereby each of a
    plurality of contact pairs is controlled, may be actuated selectively,
    alternately, or sequentially.  The movable contact may be a single contact
    common to each pair, i.e., may constitute the movable contact for each pair
    selectively.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for similar subject matter in an electrothermally actuated switch.


CLS 337/341
TXT Subject matter under subclass 334 including significant details of means
    whereby the act of opening or closing of the main switch contacts takes
    place at an appreciable interval of time after an actuating force is
    applied to the contact actuating means, or the operative interval of the
    switch is controlled by varying the amount of heat or the rate of heating
    applied to the thermal responsive means.

    (1)     Note.  For other delay or timing means used in devices of this
    class, see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS in
    subclass 81.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     for similar subject matter in an electrothermally actuated switch.
    See (1) Note above.


CLS 337/342
TXT Subject matter under subclass 334 wherein the structure includes spring or
    other potential energy storage means whereby a major portion of the force
    exerted in actuating the contacts of the switch from one condition to
    another is derived.  The actuating force is usually transmitted to the
    movable contact structure through mechanical means upon the spring being
    released from its energy storage position.

    (1)     Note.  For other spring or energy storage means used in devices of
    this class, see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS in
    subclass 317.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52+,    for corresponding subject matter in an electrothermally actuated
    switch.  See (1) Note above.

    349,    for contact biasing, pressure control or adjusting means.


CLS 337/343
TXT Subject matter under subclass 342 wherein the mechanical structure
    comprises means whereby a movable contact, or contacts, may be operated
    from a first position to a second position, quickly as by a snap action,
    the contact motion being independent of the rate of movement of the
    operator.  This is usually accomplished by a spring connection between the
    operator and the contact carrier so arranged that the initial movement of
    an operator places a spring under tension whereby, upon release of a
    holding means, the contact is snapped from one position to another.

    (1)     Note.  For other snap action mechanisms used in devices of this
    class, see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS in
    subclass 53.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for corresponding subject matter in an electrothermal actuated
    switch.  See (1) Note above.


CLS 337/344
TXT Subject matter under subclass 343 including means for setting up a field of
    magnetic flux whereby the actuation of the movable contact, or contacts, is
    at least in part influenced by magnetic force operative within the flux
    field.

    (1)     Note.  For other magnetic assist structures used in devices of this
    class, see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS in
    subclass 54.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for similar subject matter in an electrothermally actuated switch.
    See (1) Note above.


CLS 337/345
TXT Subject matter under subclass 343 including significant details of a device
    consisting of two elements joined together end to end at a knee joint and
    normally not in a common plane whereby upon the application of force to the
    knee tending to straighten the arrangement the parts which are abutting or
    joined will receive an endwise pressure thrust thereby operating the parts
    from a first overcenter (nonaligned) position to a second over center
    position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59,     for similar subject matter in an electrothermally actuated switch.


CLS 337/346
TXT Subject matter under subclass 343 wherein the contact control structure
    includes frictional clutch connecting means or other elements connected in
    such a manner as to provide a significant time lag between the application
    of a force to the control means by the thermal responsive device and the
    transmittal of the applied force directly to the movable contact or
    contacts.


CLS 337/347
TXT Subject matter under subclass 343 including means whereby some operative
    characteristic of the snap acting contact controlling structure or the
    thermal responsive element may be adjusted at will or calibrated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for similar subject matter in an electrothermally actuated switch.

    319,    for thermal, expansible fluid actuated snap action switch with
    adjusting or calibration means for the snap action means.

    368,    for thermal, bimetallic element snap action switch with adjusting
    or calibration means for the snap action means.


CLS 337/348
TXT Subject matter under subclass 343 including significant means whereby after
    the movable contact or contacts have been actuated from one original
    condition to another operated condition, due to heating of the thermal
    responsive device, or by manual manipulation, the contacts may be returned
    to the original condition either automatically or manually, or means
    whereby a latching or holding mechanism is reset to an operative condition
    wherein the contact control means will be rigidly held in the original
    condition until released by operation of the thermal responsive device.

    (1)     Note.  For other snap action reset or reclosing means used in
    devices of this class, see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS,
    SUBCLASS in subclass 118.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for similar structure in an electrothermally actuated switch.  See
    (1) Note, above.


CLS 337/349
TXT Subject matter under subclass 334 including significant details of means
    whereby a predetermined or constant pressure is applied to the contacts
    when in the circuit closing position or whereby such contact pressure may
    be adjusted at will.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     for similar subject matter in electrothermally actuated switches
    having bimetallic means combined with manual or mechanical contact control
    means.

    342+,   for structure whereby the movable contact is biased toward open or
    closed condition by tension or compression of a spring, which spring acts
    as an agent for assisting in the reversal of contact positions, when such
    reversal takes place.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 515 for thermally responsive switches in
    electric heater circuits and having adjusting means.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 194 for similar subject matter in
    electromagnetically operated switches.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 141+ and 205+ for
    bimetallic thermometers combined with contact pressure control means.


CLS 337/350
TXT Subject matter under subclass 334 wherein the contact control means
    consists of structure comprising a mechanical linkage whereby the movement
    of a movable contact, or contacts, results from a force applied thereto as
    a final result of the conversion of a force applied in a first direction to
    a force applied in a second direction; for example, a linear first motion
    may be converted to a rotary motion about a fixed origin or pivot as by a
    toggle linkage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58+,    above for similar subject matter in electrothermally actuated
    switches utilizing bimetallic elements.

    313,    for thermal, expansible fluid actuated switch with compound motion
    linkage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 19+ for
    periodic switches with combined motion operating means.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 191 for electromagnetic switches, with compound
    motion operating means.


CLS 337/351
TXT Subject matter under subclass 334 including significant details of means
    whereby contact opening or closing is accomplished by the operation of a
    mechanical device moving in a rotary or oscillatory manner in a single
    plane for example, circulatory motion in a horizontal plane with a reversal
    of direction.

    (1)     Note.  For other rotary or oscillatory mechanisms used in devices
    in this class, see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS
    in subclass 10.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for similar subject matter in electrothermally actuated switches
    utilizing bimetallic elements.

    149,    for similar subject matter in electrothermally actuated switches
    utilizing fusible elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 179 for
    automatic telephone type switches with rotary contact selection means,
    subclasses 21+, 24+, and 28+ for rotary periodic switches, subclasses 36+
    for rotary controls in a retarded switch, subclasses 410+; for snap
    switches with rotary contacts and 564+ for rotating mechanical switches.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 71+ for electromagnetic switches with motor
    actuated contact control structure and subclass 114 for automatic telephone
    type switches with rotary selector means.


CLS 337/352
TXT Subject matter under subclass 351 wherein the mechanical control means
    includes at least one clutch or other frictional coupling means whereby the
    rotary torque generated by a thermal responsive device is transmitted to
    the contact control means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    387,    for similar subject matter in a thermally actuated switch utilizing
    longitudinally expansible solid elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 180 for
    automatic telephone type switches with clutch means in the rotary selector
    structure.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 74+ for motor operated electromagnetic switches
    with a brake or clutch in the contact operating means.


CLS 337/353
TXT Subject matter under subclass 351 including significant details of cam and
    follower mechanism whereby the torque generated by the thermal responsive
    device is transferred to the contact carrier or control means.  For
    purposes of classification, a device comprising a pin and slot combination
    or a geneva wheel type movement are considered as cam and follower devices
    and are classified here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 567+ for cam structure,
    per se.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers subclasses 21+ for
    periodic switches with combined rotary and cam structure in the contact
    control means, subclass 27 for multiple contact periodic switches with cam
    and subclass 30 for periodic switches, per se, with cam, subclass 38 for
    retarded switches with cam operator.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 73 for motor driven electromagnetic switches with
    eccentric or cam means in the contact control means and subclass 190 for
    contact actuating means, per se, utilizing cam, roller or eccentric means.


CLS 337/354
TXT Subject matter under subclass 334 wherein the mechanical control means
    comprises structure whereby contact opening or closing results from a
    sliding or reciprocating motion (in a single plane) by the contact carrier.
     The contact carrier or actuating means is generally spring biased to open
    position and held closed by a latch under the influence of a bimetallic
    element, which upon heating, releases the latch and allows the contact
    control means to move the contacts to open position under the influence of
    the spring means.

    (1)     Note.  For other reciprocating or sliding motion means used in
    devices of this class, see the subclasses listed subclass 10.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for similar subject matter in an electrothermally actuated switch
    utilizing bimetallic elements.

    148,    for similar subject matter in a fusible element actuated switch of
    the electrothermally actuated type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 16 for multiple
    circuit control means utilizing reciprocating contacts, subclass 176 for
    automatic telephone type switches utilizing reciprocating selective means
    and subclass 449 for snap switches with reciprocating contacts.


CLS 337/355
TXT Subject matter under subclass 334 including significant details of means
    whereby the movable contact or contacts may be operated directly by either
    the manual means or by the other mechanical means independently of the
    operative condition of the thermal responsive device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for similar subject matter in electrothermally actuated switches
    utilizing bimetallic elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 3 for
    mechanical multiple circuit control means combined with thermal current
    actuated means.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 143 for electromagnetic switches having
    independently operative electrothermal actuating means.


CLS 337/356
TXT Subject matter under subclass 334 wherein the mechanical structure includes
    significant details of operating means whereby the contacts may be retained
    in a first condition by a latch or detent capable of being tripped by a
    thermal responsive device.  The contacts are usually held latched in a
    circuit closing condition and tripped to open position.

    (1)     Note.  For other latch mechanisms used in devices of this class,
    see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS in subclass 46.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70+,    for similar subject matter in an electrothermally actuated switch
    utilizing bimetallic elements.

    128,    for similar subject matter in electrothermally actuated switches
    utilizing longitudinally expansible elements.

    150,    for latching or tripping structure in fusible element actuated
    electrothermal switches.

    385,    for similar subject matter in thermally actuated switches utilizing
    longitudinally expansive elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 39+, 318+,
    411+, 415, 424+, 470, and 471 for latch or trip structure in various
    mechanical switches.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 21+ for magnetic circuit breakers with latch or
    trip structure, subclasses 167+ for latching means in general in
    electromagnetic switches and subclasses 172+ for tripping means in general.


CLS 337/357
TXT Subject matter under subclass 356 wherein the latch or latch release
    structure is recited as adjustable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129,    for similar subject matter in an electrothermally actuated switch
    utilizing a longitudinally expansible element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 176 for a magnetically control latch tripping
    means with adjusting features.


CLS 337/358
TXT Subject matter under subclass 356 including significant details of means
    whereby the claimed latch, or latch release device, may be returned to its
    normal operative condition after having completed the transition to an
    unoperative condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72+,    for similar reclosing or resetting structure in an electrothermally
    actuated switch utilizing bimetallic elements.

    130,    for similar subject matter in electrothermally actuated switches
    with longitudinally expansible elements.

    155,    for fusible element actuated electrothermal switches with reclosing
    or reset means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 26+ for electromagnetic circuit breakers with
    reclosing or resetting structure and 166 for latch or trip reset means in
    general.


CLS 337/359
TXT Subject matter under subclass 356 wherein a bimetallic element is the latch
    or forms part of or is unitary with the latch or latch release means.


CLS 337/360
TXT Subject matter under subclass 333 including significant details of means
    whereby the operating temperature or range of temperatures sufficient or
    necessary to actuate the main contact control means, and thereby produce an
    opening or closing action thereof, is predeterminedly fixed, varied at will
    or calibrated.

    (1)     Note.  For other operating range or calibration means used in the
    devices of this class, see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS,
    SUBCLASS in subclass 82.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82+,    for similar subject matter in electrotherthermally actuated
    switches utilizing bimetallic elements.  See (1) Note above.

    323,    for similar subject matter in thermally responsive expansible or
    vaporizable liquid controlled switches.

    392,    for similar subject matter in thermally responsive longitudinally
    expansible solid actuated switches.


CLS 337/361
TXT Subject matter under subclass 360 wherein the calibration or adjustment
    means is specifically recited as comprising cam and follower or roller
    structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305,    for thermally actuated switches with mechanical timing means and
    having cam or eccentric means for predetermining the operative temperature
    range.

    323,    for similar subject matter in thermally actuated switches utilizing
    expansive fluid elements.

    392,    for similar subject matter in thermally responsive longitudinally
    expansible solid element actuated switches.


CLS 337/362
TXT Subject matter under subclass 333 including at least one bimetallic element
    having a movable contact, unitary with or directly connected thereto, which
    movable contact is operative to open and/or close an electric circuit as a
    result of a movement of the bimetallic element when heated or cooled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85+,    for similar subject matter in electrothermally actuated switches.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 68+ for
    electric circuit making or breaking devices in combination with a
    motorwinding and comprising a bimetallically actuated contact means.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 72 for a
    flasher in the circuit of a discharge device, the flasher constituting a
    bimetallic element and subclasses 209+ for discharge device systems with
    bimetallic periodic switches.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 594 for temperature responsive
    automatic alarm systems having bimetallic means.


CLS 337/363
TXT Subject matter under subclass 362 including significant details of at least
    two or more contact pairs operative in such a manner that at least two or
    more separate and distinct electrical circuits may be controlled by the
    bimetallic contact actuating means.  One of the plurality of contacts may
    be common to more than a single contact pair.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41+,    for electrothermally actuated switches having bimetallic elements
    combined with mechanical contact operating means.

    86+,    for electrothermally actuated switches having a plurality of
    contacts directly driven by the bimetallic element or elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 3 for circuit
    makers and breakers for multiple circuit control with thermal current
    devices.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 483+ for power supply, voltage or
    current regulating means for plural electrical heating units, especially
    subclass 494, subclasses 508 for plural heaters with switching means and
    510+ for plural heaters automatically controlled by thermal means.

    307,    Electrical Transmission of Interconnection Systems, subclass 115
    for switching systems with plural switches selectively actuated.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 217 for
    plural electric discharge devices selectively connected to a supply circuit.


CLS 337/364
TXT Subject matter under subclass 363 including significant details of means
    whereby individual contact pairs connected to external circuits may be
    actuated in such a manner that a plurality of individually controlled
    circuits are completed through the switching device selectively,
    sequentially, or alternately.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87,     for similar subject matter in electrothermally actuated switches.


CLS 337/365
TXT Subject matter under subclass 362 wherein the claimed structure includes
    means whereby the movable contact, or contacts, may be operated from a
    first position to a second position quickly, as by a snap action with the
    contact motion being independent of the rate of movement of the operator.
    This may be accomplished by means of a spring, a permanent magnet, or other
    appropriate means, such as for example; an inherent characteristic or
    structure of the bimetallic element itself.

    (1)     Note.  For other snap action means used in devices in this class,
    see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS in subclass 53.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89+,    above for similar subject matter in electrothermally actuated
    switches. See (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 4 for refrigerator defrosting apparatus
    utilizing bimetallic thermostatic elements operative with a snap action.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 402+ for
    mechanical snap switches.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 48 for
    automatic temperature control devices with snap action.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 188 for electromagnetically actuated switches with
    snap action.


CLS 337/366
TXT Subject matter under subclass 365 including means for establishing a field
    of magnetic flux whereby the actuation of the movable contact, or contacts,
    in at least in part influenced by magnetic force operative within the flux
    field.  The magnetic flux source is generally a permanent magnet.

    (1)     Note.  For other magnetic assist means used in devices of this
    class, see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS in
    subclass 54.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90,     for similar subject matter in electrothermally actuated switches.
    See (1) Note, above.


CLS 337/367
TXT Subject matter under subclass 365 including significant means whereby,
    after the movable contact (or contacts) has been actuated from one
    condition to another condition, the contacts may be returned to the
    original condition either automatically or manually.

    (1)     Note.  For other snap action reset means used in the devices of
    this class, see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS in
    subclass 118.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     for similar subject matter in an electrothermally actuated switch.
    See (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 471+ for automatic
    motor control devices responsive to thermal conditions, especially subclass
    473.


CLS 337/368
TXT Subject matter under subclass 365 including means whereby some operative
    characteristic of the specifically recited snap acting contact controlling
    structure or the thermal responsive bimetallic element may be adjusted at
    will or calibrated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for electrothermally actuated switches utilizing mechanical snap
    acting contact control means with calibration or adjustment means.

    319,    for expansible fluid, thermally actuated switch with adjustable
    snap action means.

    347,    for thermally actuated switches utilizing mechanical snap action
    contact actuation means having adjusting or calibrating means.


CLS 337/369
TXT Subject matter under subclass 362 including significant details,
    specifically recited, of means whereby the contacts (of at least one
    electrical circuit) are intermittently or cyclically opened or closed
    directly under the influence of a thermal responsive bimetallic element.

    (1)     Note.  For other cyclical or intermittent actuators used in devices
    of this class, see the subclass listed subclass 92.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92+,    for similar subject matter in an electrothermally actuated switch.
    See (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 19+ for
    mechanical periodic switches.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 132
    for repetitive make and break switches.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 72 for a
    load device combined with a periodic switch, and subclass 209 for discharge
    device systems with a periodic switch in the supply circuit of a discharge
    device or devices.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 117 for periodic
    thermoelectric motor systems.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 87+ for electromagnetically operated vibrators.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 593+ for automatic alarm
    systems with thermally responsive vibrators.


CLS 337/370
TXT Subject matter under subclass 362 including significantly recited details
    of at least two or more separate and distinct bimetallic elements acting
    conjointly or cooperatively to control a set of electrical contacts from a
    first condition to a second position.  Each of the separate elements may
    carry one of the contacts or the elements may be connected to one another
    with one element carrying at least one movable contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95+,    for similar subject matter in electrothermally actuated switches.

    378,    for bimetallic element thermal switches in which one or more
    bimetallic elements acts simply as a compensation means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 204 for bimetallic element
    thermometers with plural elements.


CLS 337/371
TXT Subject matter under subclass 370 wherein at least two of the bimetallic
    elements are described as responsive to diverse environmental conditions,
    such as ambient temperatures of as being of diverse operating
    characteristics whereby the opening or closing of an electrical circuit
    takes place as a result of the operating condition of all the elements
    acting as a whole.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     for similar subject matter in an electrothermally actuated switch.


CLS 337/372
TXT Subject matter under subclass 362 including significant details of the
    means by which at least one contact bearing thermal responsive bimetallic
    element is mounted on or attached to a housing or support.


CLS 337/373
TXT Subject matter under subclass 333 including significant details of contact
    structure, composition of material or arrangement peculiarly adapted for
    operation through the agency of at least one thermal responsive bimetallic
    element.

    (1)     Note.  For other contact compositions or structures used in devices
    of this class, see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS
    in subclass 26.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109,    for similar subject matter in electrothermally responsive switches.
    See (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 874+ for processes of mechanical
    manufacture of electrical contacts.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 238+ for
    details of contacts, per se.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 196+ for contact composition or structure in
    electromagnetically actuated switches.


CLS 337/374
TXT Subject matter under subclass 373 wherein the contact structure includes
    means whereby the relative position of the contacts, when in the
    nonoperated or open position, may be adjusted by an operator at will.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    360+,   for thermal bimetallic element switch with means to adjust
    operating temperature range of the switch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 197 for adjustable contact structure in
    electromagnetically actuated switches.


CLS 337/375
TXT Subject matter under subclass 374 wherein the adjustment means comprises a
    direct thrust element, such as a bearing or stud, adapted to adjustably
    contact a leaf spring acting as a contact carrier or support.


CLS 337/376
TXT Subject matter under subclass 333 including significant details of signal,
    alarm or other indicating means whereby the operative condition of the
    switch, or some abnormal condition within the switch structure, may be
    ascertained either visually, or audibly or by a combination of both.

    (1)     Note.  For other signal or indicator means used in devices of this
    class, see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS in
    subclass 79.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     for electrothermally actuated switches utilizing bimetallic
    elements combined with mechanical contact actuating means, and having
    signal or indicating means.  See (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 308+ for
    indicator details of mechanical switches.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 506 for automatic regulating and control
    means for electric heaters with signal and indicating means.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 94 for
    thermostatically operated automatic temperature regulator means with
    indicator or alarm means.


CLS 337/377
TXT Subject matter under subclass 333 including significant details of
    structure comprising heat generating, radiating, or concentrating means,
    such as heating coils, high resistance elements, heat sinks or solar ray
    reflectors, which serve to augment the heating effect of the ambient
    material from which the device derives its main source of heat.

    (1)     Note.  For other auxiliary heating means used in devices of this
    class, see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS in
    subclass 102.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102+,   for similar subject matter in electrothermally actuated switches
    with bimetallic elements.  See (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 511 for thermally responsive
    automatically operated switch means for an electric heater and having
    auxiliary heating means for the thermal element.


CLS 337/378
TXT Subject matter under subclass 333 including significant details of means
    whereby any tendency toward variation of the operative characteristics of a
    switch device due to external conditions such as physical distortion due to
    ambient temperature, changes in external temperature, thermal current, etc.
    are compensated for.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99+,    for similar subject matter in electrothermally actuated switches.

    124,    for longitudinally expansible solid element switch with voltage or
    ambient temperature compensating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 197 for a mechanical
    thermometer with compensation, and subclasses 198+ for an adjustable
    mechanical thermometer.


CLS 337/379
TXT Subject matter under subclass 333 relating to specific details of the
    physical structure or the composition of matter utilized in the
    construction of a bimetallic element or elements significantly adapted for
    use in a thermally actuated switch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111,    for similar subject matter in a thermoelectrically actuated switch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 400.1+
    for methods of manufacture.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 577+ for
    metallic intermediate articles and blanks, and subclasses 616+ for plural
    layered metallic stock which is deflectable by a temperature change and
    defined in terms of its composition.


CLS 337/380
TXT Subject matter under subclass 333 including significant details of housing,
    casing, or support structure peculiarly adapted for use with thermally
    actuated switches.

    (1)     Note.  For other housing, casing, or support structures used in
    devices of this class, see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS,
    SUBCLASS in subclass 20.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112+,   above for similar subject matter in electrothermally actuated
    switches. See (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 293+ for
    details of housings or bases for mechanical switches in general.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 202 for electromagnetically actuated switches with
    housings.


CLS 337/381
TXT Subject matter under subclass 380 wherein the housing, casing, or support
    structure includes means whereby an electrical circuit may be completed
    through the switch enclosed therein or supported thereby.  The housing may
    comprise a flexible cord connector plug, for instance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    above for similar subject matter in electrothermally actuated
    switches.

    187+,   for fusible element switches with housing, casing or support having
    external circuit connection means.


CLS 337/382
TXT Subject matter under subclass 298 wherein the thermally responsive
    switching device comprises at least one monometallic solid element whose
    coefficient of expansion along its major axis is utilized to cause the
    opening or closing of an electrical circuit as a result of the change in
    dimension of the element.  The element may be fixedly secured at both ends,
    around its circumference, or at one end only, according to the design of
    the switch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123+,   above for similar subject matter in an electrothermally actuated
    switch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 512 for automatically operated switching
    means for an electric heater utilizing linearly expansible metal.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 5, 19,
    33, 43, 59+, 66, 96, and 101+ for automatic temperature control devices
    utilizing expansible solid thermostats.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclass 8 for heating systems with automatic
    control with expansible metal.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 187+ for expansible solid
    type thermometers.


CLS 337/383
TXT Subject matter under subclass 382 including significant details of at least
    two or more contact pairs operative in such a manner that at least two or
    more separate and distinct electrical circuits may be controlled by the
    longitudinally expansible element.  One of the plurality of contacts may be
    common to more than a single contact pail.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41+,    for similar subject matter in electrothermally responsive
    bimetallic element actuated switches.

    145+,   for similar subject matter in fusible element actuated
    electrothermally responsive expansible fluid actuated switches.

    309+,   for similar subject matter in thermally responsive expansible fluid
    actuated switches.

    337+,   for similar subject matter in thermally responsive bimetallic
    element actuated switches.

    406,    for fusible, combustible or explosive material element switches
    with multiple contacts or plural circuit control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 3 for multiple
    circuit control devices combined with thermal current responsive devices.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 39 for
    systems comprising plural load circuits selectively controlled by
    temperature responsive means, and subclass 117 for switching systems with
    heat responsive control means.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 106+ for multiple contact type electromagnetic
    switches.


CLS 337/384
TXT Subject matter under subclass 382 including manual or other mechanical
    means acting conjointly or cooperatively with at least one longitudinally
    expansible element or which acts as an intermediary between the thermally
    responsive expansible element and at least one movable contact thereby
    opening or closing an electrical circuit.

    (1)     Note.  For other manual or mechanical control means used in the
    devices of this class, see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS,
    SUBCLASS in subclass 115.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126+,   for similar subject matter in an electrothermally actuated switch.
    See (1) Note above.


CLS 337/385
TXT Subject matter under subclass 384 including significant details of means
    whereby the switch contacts may be restrained in an open or closed
    condition by a latch or detent which may be tripped by the action of the
    thermally deformable device.  The contacts are usually held in circuit
    closing position and tripped to open position by release of the latching
    means.

    (1)     Note.  For other latches or trips used in devices of this class,
    see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS in subclass 46.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128+,   for similar subject matter in an electrothermally actuated switch.
    See (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 43+ for thermally actuated latch or trip means
    in automatic circuit interrupters of the electromagnetic type.


CLS 337/386
TXT Subject matter under subclass 384 wherein the mechanical contact control
    structure includes means whereby the force applied to the intervening
    control structure by the operation of the thermal responsive element is
    multiplied or amplified when applied to the movable contact or contacts.


CLS 337/387
TXT Subject matter under subclass 384 wherein the contact control structure
    includes frictional clutch connecting means or other elements connected in
    such a manner as to provide a significant time lag between the application
    of a force to the control means, by the thermal responsive device, and the
    transmittal of the applied force directly to the movable contact or
    contacts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    352,    for thermally actuated bimetallic element switches with frictional
    clutch in the drive means for a rotating oscillatory mechanism for the
    switch actuator.


CLS 337/388
TXT Subject matter under subclass 384 including spring or other potential
    energy storage means; whereby a major portion of the force used in
    actuating the contacts of the switch from one condition to another is
    derived independently of the thermal responsive device.  Generally the
    movement of the movable contact in one direction is directly responsive to
    action by the thermal responsive element and in the other direction
    directly responsive to the tendency of the spring to resume its unstressed
    condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52+,    for similar subject matter in electrothermally responsive
    bimetallic element actuated switches.

    317+,   for thermal, expansible fluid switch with operating mechanism
    having spring or other energy storage means.

    342+,   for similar subject matter in thermally responsive bimetallic
    element actuated switches.

    407+,   for fusible material element switch with operating mechanism having
    spring or other energy storage means.


CLS 337/389
TXT Subject matter under subclass 388 wherein the spring means consists of a
    resilient leaf, either carrying the movable contact directly, or directly
    acting upon a separate movable contact carrying leaf member.


CLS 337/390
TXT Subject matter under subclass 388 including significant details of means
    whereby the opening or closing contact motion is caused to take place
    abruptly and is not dependent on the rate of movement of the thermally
    responsive element.  The contact movement is usually accomplished by a
    spring connection between the operator and the movable contact in such a
    manner that the initial movement of the thermally responsive element or
    other actuating means places the spring under tension, as by a toggle,
    until released whereupon the movable contact is snapped to open or closed
    position by the energy stored in the spring.

    (1)     Note.  For other snap action means used in devices of this class,
    see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS in subclass 53.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131+,   above for similar subject matter in an electrothermally actuated
    switch with a longitudinally expansible element.  See (1) Note above.


CLS 337/391
TXT Subject matter under subclass 390 including significant details of a
    flexible vane or plate means whereby the snapping action of the contacts is
    caused to take place.  The vane or plate may control the action of a
    movable contact, or contacts, by its inherent tendency to change curvature
    when heated or it may be under the influence of a further temperature
    responsive element such as a wire or ribbon which exerts a deforming force
    on the vane or plate when cold and releases the force when expanded by heat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135+,   for similar subject matter in electrothermally actuated switches
    with longitudinally expansible elements.


CLS 337/392
TXT Subject matter under subclass 382 including significant details of means
    whereby the operative temperature or range of temperature sufficient or
    necessary to actuate the main contact control means and thereby produce an
    opening or closing action thereof is predetermined, varied at will or
    calibrated.

    (1)     Note.  For other adjusting or calibrating means used in the devices
    of this class, see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS
    in subclass 82.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94,     for similar subject matter in an electrothermally actuated switch
    having a bimetallic element directly actuating a movable contact.

    323,    for thermally actuated switches utilizing expansive or vaporizable
    fluid.

    360+,   for thermally actuated switches utilizing bimetallic elements.  See
    (1) Note above.


CLS 337/393
TXT Subject matter under subclass 382 relating specifically to the physical
    structure or the composition of matter utilized in the longitudinally
    deformable thermal responsive element or elements.



    One example of the structure to be found here includes "thermic couples",
    consisting of two solid elements having the same or different coefficients
    of expansion and being rigidly attached at one or more points.  When
    heated, one of the two elements moves relative to the other thereby
    providing an actuating force.

    (1)     Note.  For a further filed of search in other classes consult the
    SEARCH CLASS notes under the subclass definition of subclasses 139+, above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139+,   for similar structure in an electrothermally responsive device.


CLS 337/394
TXT Subject matter under subclass 393 wherein the expansible solid structure
    consists of a rod, tube or cylinder device.


CLS 337/395
TXT Subject matter under subclass 393 wherein the expansible solid structure
    consists of wire or other stranded material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140,    for similar subject matter in an electrothermally actuated switch.


CLS 337/396
TXT Subject matter under subclass 393 wherein the expansible solid structure
    consists of a diaphragm, strip, or ribbon device.


CLS 337/397
TXT Subject matter under subclass 382 including at least two or more thermally
    responsive expansible solid elements acting either singly, conjointly, or
    cooperatively in such a manner as to control the contact opening and/or
    closing operation in a single switch device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38+,    for electrothermally actuated switches utilizing a plurality of
    bimetallic elements combined with a single contact operating means.

    95+,    for electrothermally actuated switches utilizing plural bimetallic
    elements directly actuating movable contacts.

    307+,   for thermally actuated switches utilizing plural expansible or
    vaporizable fluid devices.

    335+,   for thermally actuated switches utilizing plural bimetallic
    elements combined with a single mechanical means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 204 for thermometers
    utilizing plural expanding solid elements.


CLS 337/398
TXT Subject matter under subclass 382 wherein the claimed structure includes
    significant details of housing, casing, or support structure peculiarly
    adapted for use with switches of the thermal, expansible solid element type.

    (1)     Note.  For other housing, casing, or support means for devices of
    this class, see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS in
    subclass 20.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 52.1+ for
    housings with electric device and 145 for insulator structure combined with
    connector means.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 293 for casing
    or base structure for mechanical switches.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 202 for electromagnetic switches with particular
    housing or support means.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 621+ for an electrical connector
    combined with a named fuse or comprising a casing, housing, or holder for
    receiving and fully enclosing a fuse.


CLS 337/399
TXT Subject matter under subclass 382 including significant details of the
    mechanical structure of composition of matter of the contact assembly, or
    its means of attachment either to the thermally responsive element or other
    supporting means.

    (1)     Note.  For other contact structures or compositions used in the
    devices of this class, see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS,
    SUBCLASS in subclass 26.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109,    for similar subject matter in electrothermally actuated switches
    with bimetallic elements.

    122,    for details of contact structure in expansible fluid actuated
    electrothermally responsive switches.

    137,    for details of contact structure in electrothermally actuated
    switches utilizing longitudinally expansible elements.  See (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 238+ for
    details of contacts for mechanical switches.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 57, 83, 97,
    133+, and 196+ for details of contact structure.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for an electrical
    connector, generally.


CLS 337/400
TXT Subject matter under subclass 399 wherein the contact structure includes
    significant details of means whereby the relative position of the contacts
    when at rest may be varied or adjusted at will.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    374+,   for similar subject matter in thermally actuated switches utilizing
    bimetallic elements.


CLS 337/401
TXT Subject matter under subclass 298 wherein the thermal responsive element,
    or elements, consists of material, usually a wire or strip, which melts or
    otherwise disintegrates under the influence of heat generated in its
    immediate surroundings, thereby causing the opening or closing of an
    electric circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for electrothermal switch combined with space discharge device and
    including an explosive or combustible material control means.

    142+,   for similar subject matter in electrothermally actuated switches.

    243,    for cartridge fuse with a signal or indicator comprising explosive
    material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 232 for building
    structures combined with a fuse.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 1.42+ for timing apparatus for
    measuring and testing and containing a fuse.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 106 for fusible controlled signals
    and indicators.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 504.1 and 504.3 for
    fusible controlled safety devices in liquid heaters and vaporizers.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 287.5 for dampers with fusible
    release.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, subclass 42 for fire extinguishers with fusible
    connections.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 517 for thermally responsive automatic
    connection or disconnection devices for electric heaters with fusible
    element control.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 142 for electromagnetic switches with fuse means.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 638+ for fuse with
    automatic alarm responsive to the condition of the fuse.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 269+ for fuse tube manufacturing.


CLS 337/402
TXT Subject matter under subclass 401 including manual, gravity actuated or
    other mechanical means acting cooperatively or conjointly with at least one
    fusible element, or which acts as an intermediary between the fusible
    element and at least one movable contact thereby opening or closing an
    electrical circuit.

    (1)     Note.  For other manual or mechanical contact control means used in
    devices of this class, see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS,
    SUBCLASS in subclass 115.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143+,   for similar subject matter in electrothermally actuated fuses.  See
    (1) Note above.


CLS 337/403
TXT Subject matter under subclass 402 wherein the mechanical contact control
    means is adapted to interrupt a controlled electrical circuit automatically
    upon the melting or otherwise destruction of the fusible element or
    elements.



    The separating means usually consists of spring or other energy storage
    structure held under compression or tension until release by the melting of
    the fuse, whereupon the contacts are forcibly opened.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168+,   for similar subject matter in electrothermally actuated switches.


CLS 337/404
TXT Subject matter under subclass 403 wherein the fusible element is directly
    interposed between the main circuit contacts, maintaining the contact
    control means immobile until melted or otherwise destroyed.


CLS 337/405
TXT Subject matter under subclass 403 wherein the fusible material comprises an
    integral part of an electrical circuit which is opened upon the melting or
    disintegration of the fuse element.


CLS 337/406
TXT Subject matter under subclass 402 including at least two or more contact
    pairs associated with a single continuous electric circuit, to be
    controlled, or includes means whereby at least two or more continuous
    electric circuits are controlled by the contact controlling means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145+,   for similar subject matter in electrothermally actuated switches.


CLS 337/407
TXT Subject matter under subclass 402 wherein the contact control means
    includes spring or other potential energy storage means whereby a major
    portion of the force exerted in actuating the switch contacts from one
    condition to another is derived.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52+,    for similar subject matter in electrothermally actuated switches
    utilizing bimetallic elements.

    317+,   for thermally responsive expansible fluid actuated switches with
    spring actuated contact control means.

    342+,   for similar subject matter in thermally actuated switches utilizing
    bimetallic elements.

    388,    for thermal expansible solid element switch with mechanical means
    having spring or other energy storage means.


CLS 337/408
TXT Subject matter under subclass 407 wherein the contact control structure
    includes mechanical means whereby contact opening or closing results from a
    rectilinear sliding or reciprocating motion of the operating means under
    the influence of the spring means.

    (1)     Note.  For other reciprocating or rectilinear sliding means used in
    devices of this class, see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS,
    SUBCLASS in subclass 10.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148,    for similar subject matter in electrothermally actuated switches
    with fusible elements.  See (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 61.48 for
    switches of special application with oscillating control means which is
    fusibly held.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 816+ for a metallic connector
    having a spring actuated or resilient securing part.


CLS 337/409
TXT Subject matter under subclass 408 wherein the sliding or reciprocating
    structure is specifically recited as consisting of a spring biased plunger
    or piston device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for similar subject matter in thermoelectrically actuated switches.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 2 for automatically
    controlled trip structure utilizing a fusibly held piston actuator means.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 72+ especially subclass 75, for heat
    destructible or fusible control means with spring biased plunger.


CLS 337/410
TXT Subject matter under subclass 407 wherein the spring driven control means
    comprises elements rotating about a fixed axis and in a single plane.

    (1)     Note.  For other rotatable or oscillatable means used in devices of
    this class, see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS in
    subclass 10.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149,    for similar subject matter in electrothermally actuated switches
    utilizing fusible elements.  See (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 410 for
    mechanical snap switches with rotating contacts and subclass 465 for
    mechanical switches with rotating contacts.


CLS 337/411
TXT Subject matter under subclass 402 including significant details of means
    whereby the main switch contacts are latched, positively held or otherwise
    retained either in an operative or inoperative position.  The latching
    means usually consists of mechanical means capable of being tripped or
    released upon operation of the thermal fuse.

    (1)     Note.  For other latch, trip, or holding means used in devices of
    this class, see the subclasses listed under subclass 46.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150+,   for similar subject matter in electrothermally actuated switches.
    See (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 318+ for
    latch structure in mechanical switches.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 43+ for thermally actuated latch structure in
    electromagnetically actuated automatic circuit breakers and subclasses 167+
    for latch structure in general in electromagnetically actuated switches.


CLS 337/412
TXT Subject matter under subclass 401 including at least two or more fusible
    elements acting independently, conjointly, or cooperatively to control the
    opening and/or closing of a single electrical circuit.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter to be found here generally relates to
    fire alarm type systems wherein a plurality of fusible devices are
    distributed over an area to be protected with the failure of any one or
    group of fuses completing or otherwise actuating an electrical circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144,    for similar subject matter in an electrothermally actuated switch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 106 for fusible controlled alarms
    in general.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 590+ for thermal condition
    responsive alarms with fusible sensors.


CLS 337/413
TXT Subject matter under subclass 401 relating to significant details of the
    mechanical structure, or composition of matter, of the contact elements or
    assembly of the switch.

    (1)     Note.  For other contact structure or composition used in devices
    of this class, see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS
    in subclass 26.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251+,   for cartridge fuses with significant contact or terminal structure.

    268+,   for plug fuses with significant contact or terminal structure.

    329+,   for contact structure in thermally actuated switches utilizing
    expansible fluid elements.

    373+,   for thermally actuated switches utilizing bimetallic elements.

    399+,   for thermally actuated switches utilizing longitudinally expansible
    solid means.  See (1) Note above.


CLS 337/414
TXT Subject matter under subclass 401 including significant details of housing,
    casing, or support structure whereby the switch structure is protectively
    housed or enclosed or support means whereby the switch device may be
    mounted or supported in a fixed manner.

    (1)     Note.  For other housing, casing, or support means used in devices
    of this class, see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS
    in subclass 20.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186+,   for similar subject matter in an electrothermally actuated switch
    utilizing fusible elements.  See (1) Note above.


CLS 337/415
TXT Subject matter under subclass 414 wherein the housing structure comprises
    flexible or resilient means of the cable type wherein the thermal
    responsive means and the associated circuit conductors are housed. The
    conductors are normally insulated and are bridged by the action of the
    fusible material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 70+ for cable
    conductor in general combined with other structure which may comprise
    fusible or meltable insulation.


CLS 337/416
TXT Subject matter under subclass 401 relating specifically to significant
    details of the physical structure, or composition of material, of the
    fusible link or element.

    (1)     Note.  For a complete field of search in other classes consult the
    notes under SEARCH CLASS in the subclasses 290+ search notes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290+,   for similar subject matter in electrothermally responsive fusible
    element actuated switches.


CLS 337/417
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the subject matter
    relates to miscellaneous structures or details, peculiarly adapted for or
    intended for use in electrothermally or thermally actuated switches, and
    not forming a subcombination of a more complete or comprehensive
    combination to be found elsewhere in the class.


CLS 338/
TTL ELECTRICAL RESISTORS

CLS 338/
TXT

    I.      DEFINITION OF TERMS USED:

    RESISTANCE

    The property of a mass of material to impede the flow of a steady or
    fluctuating current passing through the mass by conversion of electrical
    energy into heat.

    RESISTOR

    An apparatus or device exhibiting only and significantly a resistance
    characteristic as above defined to the current flowing therethrough, the
    inductive or capacitive effects being negligible.  A resistor includes
    essentially a resistance element and spaced terminals.

    RESISTANCE ELEMENT

    The part of the resistor which actually possesses the resistance
    characteristic, and which may be a homogeneous mass of material having a
    resistance characteristic.

    ELEMENT

    Resistance element unless otherwise indicated.

    RESISTANCE TERMINAL

    Ordinarily one of the spaced conductors in physical contact with the
    resistance element, and being appreciably more conductive (less resistive)
    than the resistance element. The terminals are for the purpose of
    connecting the resistance element in an external electric circuit.  Since
    all resistors must include terminals in the sense that some structure is
    necessary to permit energization of the resistance element, the term
    "terminal" is sufficiently broad to include one of the free ends of the
    resistance element.

    TERMINAL

    One of the resistance terminals unless otherwise indicated.

    BASE

    Unless otherwise indicated an element along which the resistance element
    extends to impart a rigidity or reinforcement to the resistance element not
    otherwise present.

    CONDUCTOR

    A body which is essentially a carrier of electric current with a minimum of
    loss as by heating.

    INSULATOR

    A body of such low conductivity that the flow of current therethrough can
    usually be neglected.

    SEMICONDUCTOR

    A body of solid material whose conductivity is considerably more than
    insulators, yet considerably less than metals.

    NEGATIVE RESISTOR

    A resistor wherein the derivative of the voltage across the resistor with
    respect to the current passing through is negative over a portion of the
    current range.

    II.     GENERAL STATEMENT OF THE CLASS SUBJECT MATTER:

    A.      This class includes electrical resistors as above defined with
    solid, granular, or liquid resistance elements.  These resistors may be
    either fixed or variable in resistance value, examples of the latter being
    rheostats and potentiometers. Semiconductors are included if limited by
    claimed subject matter to resistance properties, such as exists in
    photoconductive and thermistor type resistors.  Excluded are conductors and
    insulators, which while including a resistive characteristic have other
    predominating characteristics.

    B.      Included also are resistors with perfecting structure not elsewhere
    classified such as resistors whose resistance value is temperature
    compensated, or resistors mounted on wheels or on a vehicle, resistors with
    heat dissipating projections, or with cooling gas or liquid circulation, or
    with heat storing, or with inductance or capacity reducing, or with
    electrical shields, or with a cleaner or a setting indicator in a
    mechanically variable resistor, or with a casing or housing, or with
    protecting structure spaced from the element, or with mounting or
    supporting means.

    C.      Included also are resistors combined with or incorporated in other
    structure not elsewhere classifiable, such as resistors with certain
    diverse nonelectrical devices, for example, mechanical or chemical; or
    resistors in, on, or with certain electrical devices such as a lamp socket
    or lamp base, or an electric switch, or a coaxial line or wave guide, or a
    detachable electrical connector.

    D.      Included also are resistors constructed as by shape or from
    material to change their resistance value particularly well in response to
    a particular condition or change in a particular condition such as current
    and/or voltage, as for example nonlinear and negative resistors; or ambient
    temperature; or a magnetic field; or gas, vapor, or moisture; or resistors
    of the strain gauge or photoconductive type.  Included also are resistors
    usually of the mechanically variable type together with a condition sensing
    actuator which changes the mechanical adjustment of the resistor in
    response to a condition or a change in condition.  Examples of such
    actuators are a magnetic compass, a float, a piston, a Bourdon tube, a
    bellows or capsule, a diaphragm, a gravity stabilized or inertia type
    actuator, or a force sensing actuator.

    E.      Subcombinations and components of resistors not otherwise
    classifiable, such as resistance element cores and frames, resistance
    elements of particular shape or dimensions, and movable contact structures
    for variable resistors.

    III.    RESISTORS CLASSIFIED ELSEWHERE:

    Certain devices, at least quasi-resistive in character, are not classified
    here. Electric space discharge devices which may exhibit a resistance
    characteristic between terminals are classified in Class 313, Electric Lamp
    and Discharge Devices. Numerous different types of active solid-state
    devices, e.g., semiconductor, devices or components whose electrical
    resistance varies nonlinearly due to the movement of charge carriers -
    electrons or holes - which undergo energy level changes within the material
    (as contrasted with the passive or pure resistors found in Class 338) are
    classified in Class 257, Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors,
    Solid-State Diodes).  Negative resistors of the active element type are
    classified in Class 333, Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 80.
     Resistors specific to telephone use, including those of the microphone,
    its electrodes, and granules are classified in Class 381, Electrical Audio
    Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses 179+.

    IV.     PLURAL RESISTORS AS DEFINED IN SECTION II:

    Two or more mechanically or electrically related resistors are classified
    here as a residual home.  See subclass 17 for plural photoconductive
    resistors; subclass 48 for plural separate diverse resistors; subclasses 76
    and 128+ for plural mechanically adjustable resistors; subclasses 235, 239
    and 260+ for plural incased, embedded, or housed resistors; and subclasses
    319 and 320 for plural supported resistors.  Class 323, Electricity:  Power
    Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 293+, 352+ and 365+ for regulation
    systems including a plurality of resistors.

    V.      RESISTORS COMBINED WITH OR INCORPORATED IN OTHER DEVICES:

    As stated in section II. E above, this class includes resistors combined
    with or incorporated in other structure when not elsewhere classifiable.
    See subclass 11 for resistors with a restricted type of heat reflector;
    subclass 67 for a resistor with a diverse nonelectrical device, e.g.,
    mechanical or chemical; subclasses 70+ and 219, for resistors in or on a
    lamp socket or base; subclasses 200+ and 215, for a resistor with a switch;
    subclass 216, for a resistor in a coaxial line or wave guide; and subclass
    220, for a resistor in a detachable electrical connector.

    The combination of the resistor with or in other structure is very common.
    A partial list of the classes and subclasses including this combination is
    given below:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, especially subclasses 125+ and 174+ for
    distance measuring devices and gauges which may include a resistor.  See
    subclasses 13+ of this class (338) for subcombinations of such devices and
    gauges, no indicator being claimed; but only claiming the resistor
    responsive to a condition or with a condition sensing actuator.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, especially subclasses 29, 73+, 301, 304,
    308, 313, 336.5, 453, 719, 725, 734, 746, 750, 763+, and 862.391, for
    measuring and and testing devices such as stress and strain measuring
    devices, dynamometers, liquid level or depth gauges, hygrometers, and fluid
    pressure gauges, all of which may include an electrical resistor.  See
    subclasses 2+ and 13+ in this class (338) for subcombinations of such
    devices, no indicator or circuit arrangement being claimed; but only
    claiming the resistor responsive to a condition or with a condition sensing
    actuator.

    178,    Telegraphy, appropriate subclasses, for telegraph systems including
    resistors.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 144 for arc
    preventing or extinguishing switches including resistors.

    250,    Radiant Energy, appropriate subclasses, for ray energy systems
    including resistors.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, appropriate
    subclasses, for electrical transmission or interconnection systems not
    elsewhere classified including resistors.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses, for
    electric lamps and discharge devices including resistance heating or heated
    filaments.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, especially subclasses
    3-3.6 and 8-31, for cathode-ray tube circuits including resistors; and
    subclasses 32+ for a discharge device load with a resistor.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses, for
    electric motor control systems including an electric motor controlled by a
    resistor.  See subclass 116 of this class (338) for a mechanically variable
    resistor actuated by an electric motor.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, especially subclasses 80+
    and 97+, for single electric generator systems including resistance control.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 293+,
    352+ and 365+ for regulation systems including resistors.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses, for
    electrical measuring and testing devices including resistors.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous circuits which may
    utilize a resistor or resistor network.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, appropriate subclasses, for
    wave transmission lines and networks including resistors.  This class also
    provides for the combination of resistors and inductors and/or capacitors
    in such wave transmission lines and networks.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, appropriate subclasses, for electrical
    signaling and alarm systems including resistors.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, appropriate subclasses, for
    radiant energy communication systems including antennas combined with or
    including resistors.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 627+ and
    641+ for distribution panel board, control panel board, or electric service
    distribution box,  including resistors.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, appropriate subclasses, for
    electrical conversion systems including resistors.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 109+ for
    resistance furnaces.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 163+ for a thermometer
    with an electrical sensor, particularly subclass 185 which includes
    detailed features of a resistive sensor in such a thermometer.

    455,    Telecommunications, appropriate subclasses for radio equipment
    having resistors.



    VI.     RESISTANCE COMPONENTS AND SUBCOMBINATIONS:

    As stated in section II, E above, this class includes subcombinations and
    components of resistors not otherwise classifiable.  See subclass 202, for
    contact structure adapted to move along the length of a resistance element
    in a mechanically variable resistor and making an electrical connection
    with the element; subclass 321, for resistance element cores and frames;
    subclass 215, for resistance elements and bases of particular configuration
    and/or dimension.  Included below is the classification of the more common
    subject matter which may constitute a part or subcombination or a resistor:

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclass 425 for fabrics including resistive
    metal.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 74+ for
    conduits, cables, or conductors together with the end structure at one end
    of the conduit, cable, or conductor, no significant resistor structure
    being claimed; subclasses 102+, 110+ and 126.1+ for cables and conductors
    whose conducting part may be claimed as resistive; and subclass 138 for
    insulators of special application such as those around or through which
    resistance wire may be led, the wire not being claimed.  The combination of
    the end structure at both ends of the conduit cable or conductor when the
    conduit cable or cable is even claimed broadly as a resistor or resistive
    is not classified in Class 174, but in Class 338.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 62.2 for electrolytes for electrical
    devices; subclasses 500+ for resistive compositions.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 58+ for coating processes, per se,
    wherein an electrical product is produced.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, for a plural layer stock
    material product, note subclass 411 for a plural layer material, one layer
    being of resistive material, or one layer being resistive and one or more
    layers being conductive, so as to constitute one or more terminals; see
    especially subclasses 457+.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses, for resistance
    terminals, or the combination of a terminal and nominally recited
    resistance element. The combination of a resistance element broadly recited
    together with terminals at each end is classified in Class 338, especially
    subclasses 322+.

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 59+ for a coated or impregnated fabric.



    VII.    DEVICES SIMULATING RESISTORS:

    Class 333, Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, provides in subclass 22,
    for dissipating terminations for long lines; subclass 23, for artificial
    lines; subclass 80, for negative resistance networks of the active element
    type; and subclasses 82+, for resonators of the distributed parameter type.

    VIII.   METHODS OF AND APPARATUS FOR MAKING RESISTORS:

    This class does not provide for methods of making resistors.  This subject
    matter is classified in Class 29, Metal Working, subclasses 610.1+, (A)
    when involving a metal working process; or (B) when involving a metal
    working process combined with a nonmetal working process, if not otherwise
    classifiable; or (C) when the process is not otherwise classifiable.  See
    the search notes under this subclass for a field of search for methods of
    making resistors. Apparatus for assembling electrical resistors are
    classified in Class 29, subclasses 729+.  Methods and apparatus for making
    a resistor coil which is a composite of a core and a winding thereabout are
    classified in Class 242, Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 430+.

    IX.     MEASURING AND TESTING RESISTORS:

    This class does not provide for either methods of or apparatus for
    measuring and testing resistors.  If the measuring or testing involves
    determining the resistance or conductivity of the resistor, classification
    is in Class 324, Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 62+.  If
    the measuring or testing is of a mechanical nature or not otherwise
    classified, classification is in Class 73, Measuring and Testing.  See also
    the search notes in this Class 73 for a field of search for measuring and
    testing.

    X.      ELECTRICAL RESISTANCE HEATERS:

    Resistors classified in Class 338 in performing their current impeding
    function produce heat, as do the resistance heaters classified in Class
    219, Electric Heating.  In the resistors classified in Class 338 the heat
    produced is incidental or undesired; or is utilized internally only to
    modify in some manner, as in a thermistor, the temperature of the resistor
    to in turn modify the current impeding characteristic of the resistor. In
    the resistance heaters classified in Class 219 the heat produced is put to
    some external use as opposed to mere dissipation or internal heating of the
    resistance element.  Thus, in general, the resistance heaters in Class 219
    include significant structure, shape or arrangement to produce and convert
    the heat to a useful purpose, as to direct or distribute the heat in a
    particular manner.  The following paragraphs cover the more common
    situations arising between these two classes.

    A.      The mere designation of the claimed structure as a heater or heater
    element, such a toaster or a blanket, or the broad recitation in the claim
    of intended use or adaption for heating purposes or for use with structure
    to be heated is not sufficient for classification in Class 219.

    B.      The recitation of the device to be heated in combination with the
    heating resistor is classified in Class 219 rather than in Class 338.
    Likewise classification is in Class 219 when the resistor is shaped or
    otherwise adapted to conform to the structure to be heated to facilitate
    the transfer of heat to this structure, such shape or adaption not having
    general utility.

    C.      The combination of a resistor and a casing of good heat conducting
    material is classified in Class 338.  For classification in Class 219 as
    indicated above the heating resistor with its casing must be adapted as by
    shape to transfer, distribute, or direct the heat in a particular manner or
    pattern.

    D.      Resistors whose elements are formed as fabrics or pads are
    classified in Class 338.  However, if the fabric or pad is shaped or
    dimensioned to constitute a particular heating device, such as an article
    of clothing or a blanket classification is in Class 219.  See Class 139,
    Textiles:  Weaving, subclass 425, for mere fabrics including metal of
    resistance material, as when the resistance terminals are not claimed.

    E.      The combination of a resistor and structure to facilitate the
    external heating effect of the resistor, such as a reflector, is classified
    in Class 219.  Likewise Class 219 includes those resistors which are shaped
    to produce a desired heating effect or distribution. See subclass 11 of
    Class 338, for resistors including reflectors which direct heat on the
    resistance element.

    F.      A few structures such as liquid resistance heaters and liquid
    cooled resistors, may be considered either resistance heaters for Class 219
    or resistors for Class 338.  These structures are classified in accordance
    with the recited use and background.

    XI.     RESISTANCE FURNACES:

    Class 373, Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 109+ for
    electric furnaces combined with the heating resistors, as a resistor with
    the furnace wall; or includes resistors which are formed to constitute at
    least part of a furnace, as being hollow to form a muffle or being recessed
    to form a crucible; or includes resistors which are peculiar to an electric
    furnace, as having the shape of the furnace, such shape having no
    significance elsewhere.

    XII.    RESISTORS FORMED BY COATING OR LAMINATING:

    Processes of forming electrical products are classified in Class 427,
    Coating Processes, subclasses 58+ when formed by a coating process, per se,
    and in Class 156, Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses when formed by a laminating step, per se.  A
    plurality of layers of laminated or coated material, one layer being a
    resistance element and the other layer or layers being terminals, no
    particular structure being recited, but usually only particular materials,
    are classified in the appropriate subclasses of Class 428, Stock Material
    or Miscellaneous Articles, even though the terminals and resistance
    elements are claimed by such names.  See this class (338) subclasses 308+,
    for a resistor whose element is coated on a base; and subclasses 309 and
    327, for resistors with terminals coated on, together with significant
    resistance structure such as a particular shape.

    XIII.   CONDUITS, CABLES, AND CONDUCTORS WITH RESISTIVE MATERIAL:

    Class 174, Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, provides for conduits,
    cables, and conductors where the conducting part is a resistor or a helical
    resistor.  Such claimed terms as resistance, resistance  element, helical
    resistance, coil resistance, or a terminal at one end of a sheathed
    resistor do not preclude classification in Class 174.  However, when the
    conducting element in such conduits, cables, or conductors is recited as
    being of a material which is essentially resistive such as iron,
    classification is in Class 338.  Likewise when significant resistance
    structure or configuration such as the resistor having a zigzag pattern, or
    being wound on a core is recited, classification is in Class 338.  See
    Class 174, subclasses 74+, for conduits, cables or conductors with a
    nominally resistive or helically resistive element together with end
    structure; and subclasses 102+, 110+ and 126.1+, for cables whose
    conducting elements are nominally resistive or helically resistive.  The
    claimed combination of a resistor broadly with end structure or terminals
    at each end is classified in Class 338, especially subclasses 322+.

    XIV.    ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS WITH RESISTIVE CONDUCTORS:

    The combination of an electrical connector and lead conductor, the lead
    conductor being nominally claimed as being resistive, is classified in
    Class 439, Electrical Connectors, especially subclasses 241+, 275 and 276.
    If the lead conductor is recited as being of significant resistor structure
    or material, such as a zigzag shape or of iron material, classification is
    in Class 338.  The combination of a nominally recited resistive conductor
    with an electrical connector at each end is classified in this class (338)
    subclasses 322+.  The inclusion of additional connectors cooperable with
    the connector or connectors on the resistance element does not preclude
    classification in Class 338.

    XV.     SEMICONDUCTORS:

    Semiconductors are classified in Class 338 if possessing only resistance
    characteristics.  Such semiconductors may be photoconductive and classified
    in subclasses 15+; or may be of the thermistor type and classified in
    subclasses 22+. However, if the semiconductor has other more comprehensive
    characteristics, classification is elsewhere.  Numerous different types of
    active solid-state devices, e.g., semiconductor, devices or components
    whose electrical resistance varies nonlinearly due to the movement of
    charge carriers - electrons or holes - which undergo energy level changes
    within the material (as contrasted with the passive or pure resistors found
    in Class 338) are classified in Class 257, Active Solid-State Devices
    (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes).

    XVI.    MEASURING AND TESTING DEVICES WITH VARIABLE RESISTORS:

    This Class 338 in subclasses 2+ and 13+ provides generally for resistors
    which are shaped or chemically constituted to change their resistance value
    in response to a condition or change in condition, or for mechanically
    variable resistors combined with a condition sensing actuator. However,
    when additional structure is claimed for indicating the change in
    resistance value as a meter for measuring the current passing through the
    resistance element, or a Wheatstone bridge arrangement including the
    resistance element as one of the arms, the combination is classified as a
    measuring or testing device.  Class 33, Geometrical Instruments, especially
    subclasses 125+ and 174+, provides for distance measuring devices and
    gauges including this combination, namely, a condition responsive resistor
    and an indicating device or circuit; Class 73, Measuring and Testing,
    especially subclasses 29, 73+, 100, 304, 308, 313, 336.5, 453, 720, 726,
    763+, 862+, and 862.38+, provides for moisture content and stress and
    strain measuring devices, dynamometers, liquid level or depth gauges,
    hygrometers, and fluid pressure gauges including this combination; 374,
    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 183+ provide for a thermometer
    including this combination and Class 324, Electricity:  Measuring and
    Testing, subclasses 160+, provides for time and/or speed measuring devices
    including this combination.  See also the reference to Class 338 in (3)
    NOTE C. ELECTRICAL in the Class Definitions of Class 73.

    XVII. RESISTANCE COMPONENTS AND SUBCOMBINATIONS:

    This class provides for resistance components and subcombinations which are
    not otherwise classifiable.  Subclass 321 below includes resistance cores
    or frames including a base usually of insulating material on which a
    resistance element may be wound or otherwise strung.  As between this
    subclass 321 and the insulators of special application in subclass 138 of
    Class 174, Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 321 includes
    insulators which are constituent parts of the resistor as to have a
    resistance element wound or strung thereon.  However, an insulator for
    supporting a resistance wire at one point thereon, this wire being strung
    in space in the manner of an aerial conductor is not classified here, but
    in Class 174, subclass 138.  See also the Search Notes under this subclass
    (138). Class 248, supports, subclasses 49+, provides for resistive cable
    supports; and subclasses 200+, for brackets.

    Class 174, subclasses 17+ and 50+, provides for boxes and housings which
    may constitute resistor housings which are limited by claimed structure to
    electrical use and not otherwise classifiable.

    XVIII.  SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 610.1+ for processes of mechanical
    manufacture of an electrical resistor in which a metal working step is
    involved, or for processes of making electrical resistors not otherwise
    classifiable, and subclasses 729+, for apparatus for assembling electrical
    resistors.  See also section VIII above, and the Search Notes under
    subclass 610.1.

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, for geometri-cal instruments which may use
    an electrical resistor, especially subclasses 125+, for distance
    determining devices; subclasses 174+, for limit gauges; and subclasses
    204+, for direction indicators.  See also section XVI above.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, for measuring and testing devices generally,
    especially subclass 29, for moisture content or vapor pressure gas
    analysis; subclasses 308 and 453, for float actuated electrical indicators;
    subclasses 763+ for an electrical stress or strain measuring system;
    subclasses 862.38+, for push or pull measuring dynamometers; subclass 301,
    for hydrostatic pressure electrically controlled indicators; subclass 304,
    for liquid level or depth gauge of the immersible electrode type; subclass
    313, for a float actuated electrical controlled indicator; subclass 336.5,
    for hygrometers with electrical circuits; and subclasses 717+, 723+, and
    753+, for fluid pressure gauges of the current generating or modifying
    type. See also sections IX and XVI above.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 10+ for shaft operators of
    the radio tuner type analogous to variable electrical resistors of the
    shaft operated type.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 61 for electric railway cars
    including a controlling resistor.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 148 for high tension ignition
    circuits for internal combustion engines which may include a resistor.

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclass 89 for
    primary batteries of the photoelectric type.

    137,    Fluid Handling, especially subclasses 227+ for tire stem inflation
    means with a gauge or indicator; and subclasses 786 and 793+ for expansible
    chamber fluid handling devices of the bellows or capsule type.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclass 425 for woven fabrics including metal
    which may be resistive.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    47+ for making and/or joining of electrical conductors of indefinite length.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 60 and 61 for electrical heaters located and used
    in wells.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 3.2+ for
    anti-inductive electrical conductors; subclasses 17+ and 50+ for boxes and
    housings limited by claimed structure to electrical use and not otherwise
    classifiable; subclasses 68.1+ for conduits, cables and conductors
    generally; and subclass 138 for insulators which may be used with
    resistors.  See also section XIII above.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 77, for motor vehicles including electric
    controlling devices which may be resistors.

    188,    Brakes, subclass 86 for fluid and mechanical internal resistance
    brakes including dashpots.

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, subclasses 45+ for
    electrical collectors carried by a vehicle or other moving body, and
    subclasses 53, 56 and 63+ for trolley collectors involving rolling
    contractors.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, especially subclasses
    52+ for switches of special application; subclasses 81+ for fluid pressure
    operated switches; subclasses 113+ for thermal current operated type
    switches; and subclass 144 for arc preventing and extinguishing switches
    which may use a resistor.  See also section V above.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, appropriate subclasses, for supports for a
    plurality of resistors.

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, subclass 16 for the manufacturing
    of a resistive element using etching.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 50+ for metal heating with a resistor
    and subclasses 19+ for electrical heaters. See section X above for the
    lines between Class 219 and 338.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 2.1+ for envelopes used with electric lamps
    or similar devices; subclasses 3.2+ for outlet or junction box type
    enclosures; and subclasses 24+ for metallic closures generally.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, appropriate
    subclasses, for automatic temperature controls which may include resistors,
    especially the subclasses found under THERMOSTATIC.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 600+ and 118+ for a
    spool upon which a resistor may be wound, usually for temporary storage,
    and subclasses 430+ for the method and apparatus, respectively, of winding
    a resistor coil to form a composite article.

    245,    Wire Fabrics and Structure, subclasses 2+ for wire fabrics which
    may be of resistance material.

    248,    Supports, especially subclasses 49+ and 200+, for supports and
    brackets which may be used with resistors, or for the combination of a
    nominal resistor with support details.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for photo-cell circuits and
    apparatus.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 500+ for electrically conductive or
    emissive compositions, which may be resistive; subclass 567 for a web or
    sheet impregnated with a fluent dielectric; and subclasses 570+ for a
    fluent dielectric composition, per se.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 89+
    for anti-inductive means to prevent or reduce the coupling between
    electrical systems; and subclasses 112+ for switching systems which may
    include a resistor and switch combination.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 219+ for rotor
    type current collectors for dynamoelectric devices.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, for electric lamp and
    discharge devices utilizing an envelope enclosing a vacuum or gaseous
    space; especially subclass 14 for pyro-electric temperature modifier type
    devices; and subclasses 341+ for filaments or resistance heated electrodes.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, for electric lamp and
    discharge device systems which may include a resistor as an element of the
    system; and especially subclasses 3-3.6 and 8-31, for cathode ray tube
    circuits including resistors; and subclasses 32+ for a discharge device
    load with a resistor.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses, for
    electrical motive power systems including the combination of a electric
    motor controlled by a resistor.  See subclass 116 of Class 338 for a
    mechanically variable resistor actuated by an electric motor.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclasses 80+ for single
    generators with a resistance control.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 293+
    for regulation systems including resistors. This class also provides for
    the combinations of resistors and inductors and/or condensers in voltage
    regulation systems.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, for electrical testing and
    measuring devices including resistors.  Subclasses 62+ provides for the
    measurement of resistance or conductivity.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous circuits which may
    utilize a resistor or resistor network.

    329,    Demodulators, subclass 371 for coherer type amplitude demodulator.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 61 for carbon microphone type amplifiers.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, for wave transmission lines
    and networks including resistors.  This class also provides for the
    combination of resistors and inductors and/or capacitors in such wave
    transmission lines and networks.  See subclass 22 for dissipating
    terminations for long lines; subclass 80 for negative resistance networks
    of the active element type; and subclass 81 for attenuators.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses, for inductor devices.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, for electrical communication systems;
    and especially subclasses 500+ for communication systems automatically
    responsive to a condition.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    safety and protection systems; subclasses 117+ for high voltage dissipators
    such as lightning arrestors systems, per se, and 271+ for capacitors.

    362,    Illumination, appropriate subclasses for illuminating devices which
    may include a resistor as an element thereof together with illumination
    structure.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, for electricity conversion
    systems; especially subclass 15+ for systems converting electricity to heat
    to electricity; and subclasses 140+ for impedance type current converters.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 152 for a
    resistive phonograph pickup.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 109+ for
    resistance furnace, subclasses 128+ for resistance elements and mountings
    for the same when peculiar to or combined with electric furnaces structure
    or controls for electric furnace.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 183+ for thermometers
    having a current modifying sensor.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 58+ for coating processes, per se,
    wherein an electrical product is produced.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet, which may embody a layer of material resistant to the flow of
    electrical current, and especially subclasses 416, 418, 432+, 444, 450, and
    457+ for a nonstructural composite web or sheet embodying a layer of metal
    next to a layer of nonmetal material.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, especially subclasses 241, 275 and 276, for
    electrical connectors and leads thereto, which leads may be nominally
    resistive.  See also section XIV for the lines between Classes 338 and 439.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 28+ for an abrading process which may be
    involved in making an electrical resistor.

    454,    Ventilation, appropriate subclasses, for ventilating structure such
    as cowls, hoods and louvers which may be used to ventilate a resistor.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 120+ and 150.1+ for radio
    transmitter and receiver tuners wherein the tuning element may be somewhat
    analogous to resistors.



    XIX.    INDEX TO CLASSES REFERRED TO IN
            PREVIOUS SECTIONS:

    CLASS                           SECTION NO.

    29,     Metal Working   VI,VIII,XVIII

    33,     Geometrical Instruments V, XVI, XVIII

    73,     Measuring and
    Testing         V, IX, XVI, XVIII

    74,     Machine Element or
    Mechanism       XVIII

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock   XVIII

    123,    Internal-Combustion
    Engines         XVIII

    136,    Batteries: Thermoelectric
    and Photoelectric       XVIII

    137,    Fluid Handling  XVIII

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving      VI, X, XVIII

    156,    Adhesive Bonding
    and Miscellaneous
    Chemical Manufacture    XII

    166,    Wells           XVIII

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors
    and,                    VI,XIII,XVII
    Insulators              XVIII

    178,    Telegraphy      V

    180,    Motor Vehicles  XVIII

    188,    Brakes          XVIII

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to
    Vehicles                VIII

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers
    and Breakers    V, XVIII

    211,    Supports:  Racks        XVIII

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes,        XVIII

    219,    Electric Heating        V,X,XVIII

    220,    Receptacles     XVIII

    236,    Automatic Temperature and
    Humidity regulation     XVIII

    242,    Winding, Tensioning,
    or Guiding      VIII, XVIII

    245,    Wire Fabrics and Structure      XVIII

    248,    Supports                VII, XVIII

    250,    Radiant Energy  V, VII, XVIII

    252,    Compositions    VI, XVIII

    307,    Electrical Transmission or
    Interconnection Systems V, XVIII

    310,    Electrical Generator or
    Motor Structure XVIII

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge
    Devices         III, V, XVIII

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge
    Devices:  Systems       V, XVIII

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power
    Systems         V, XVIII

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator
    Systems         V, XVIII

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or
    Regulation Systems      IV, V, XVIII

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and
    Testing         V, IX, XVI, XVIII

    327,    Miscellaneous Active
    Electrical Nonlinear
    Devices, Circuits,
    and Systems     V,XVII

    329,    Demodulators,   XVIII

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines
    and Networks    III,V,VII, XVIII

    336,    Inductor Devices        XVIII

    340,    Communications:  Electrical     V, XVIII

    343,    Communications:
    Radio Wave      V

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems
    and Devices     III, V, XV, XVIII

    362,    Illumination    XVIII

    363,    Electricity Power Conversion
    Systems         V, XVIII

    373,    Industrial Electric
    Heating Furnaces        V, XI, XVIII

    374,    Thermal Measuring
    and Testing     V, XVI, XVIII

    427,    Coating Processes       VI, XII,

    428,    Stock Material or       X VIII
    Miscellaneous   VI, XII

            Articles                XVIII

    439,    Electrical Connectors   VI, XIV, XVIII

    451,    Abrading                 XVIII

    454,    Ventilation     XVIII


CLS 338/1
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the resistance element
    has the property of decreasing its resistance value upon the passage of a
    high frequency current therethrough; or together with structure which
    enables the resistor to return to its original resistance value upon
    termination of the high frequency current or to decohere.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the exciting high frequency current is a received
    high frequency wave, and the coherer is used as a radio detector.  The
    resistance element is usually granular in nature; and the decohering is
    effected or facilitated as by particular chemical material, or by shock,
    stirring, agitating, or tapping.  Where significant detector circuitry such
    as a resonant circuit is claimed with coherer, classification is in Class
    329, Demodulators and Detectors, subclass 100.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20+,    for resistors whose resistance value is changed by an electric
    current and/or voltage.

    32,     for resistors whose resistance value is changed by a magnetic field.

    68+,    for mechanically variable resistors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclass 43 for active solid-state type coherers.

    329,    Demodulators, subclasses 315+ for frequency demodulators and
    subclasses 345+ for phase demodulators.


CLS 338/2
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein a flexible or deformable
    solid mass of resistance material is formed as a wire, strip, or other
    elongated mass, the resistance value of the mass between points along its
    length changing with deformation between the points, as a change in length
    or cross-sectional area; the wire, strip, or other elongated mass being
    shaped or configured to be applied to a device which is subject to
    deformation in a direction along the length of the elongated mass, the mass
    being adapted to deform with the device; or wherein the wire, strip, or
    other elongated mass includes structure, such as adhesive material on a
    flexible base, for facilitating application to the device which is subject
    to deformation; or wherein the wire, strip, or other elongated mass is
    combined with and deformable with a device which is subject to deformation
    or other change in dimension and not otherwise classifiable.

    (1)     Note.  As between this subclass and Class 73, Measuring and
    Testing, when the meter, Wheatstone bridge connection, or other current
    measuring device in series with the resistor is claimed, classification is
    in Class 73.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13+,    for variable resistors generally actuated by a condition sensing
    device.

    114,    for deformable resistors generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 125+ for distance determining
    devices; subclasses 174+ for limit gauges; and subclasses 204+ for
    direction indicators.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 763+ for an electrical stress or
    strain measuring system; and subclasses 862+ for dynamometers.  See also
    (1) Note above.


CLS 338/3
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2 including resistance structure in series
    with the strain gauge resistor, whose resistance value increases or
    decreases significantly with the temperature change, for the purpose of
    offsetting at least partly the effect of temperature change on the strain
    gauge resistor or furnishing a reference for comparison purposes as in the
    Wheatstone bridge network in which the strain gauge resistor may be
    connected.

    (1)     Note.  The temperature coefficient of the resistance structure may
    have the same or opposite sign (positive or negative) as the temperature
    coefficient of the strain gauge resistor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7+,     for resistors having resistance value temperature compensation.


CLS 338/4
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the strain gauge is secured to or
    otherwise mechanically linked with a diaphragm, bellows, piston, or other
    device which is adapted to move or deform by a compresses fluid or gas
    acting thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36+,    for mechanically variable resistors generally with a fluid or gas
    pressure sensing actuator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 720 and 726 for fluid pressure
    gauges of the current generating or modifying type.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 106+ for electrical
    time and speed measuring.


CLS 338/5
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the device to which the strain
    gauge is attached is responsive to a force applied thereto, the portion of
    the device to which the strain gauge is attached being deformed by this
    force to deform the strain gauge.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass, the device converts the applied force to
    strain or deformation.

    (2)     Note.  When the resistor strain gage is disclosed for making a
    quantative measurement, proper classification is in Class 73, subclasses
    862+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 862+ for dynamometer measuring
    devices.

    177,    Weighing Scales, for weighing scales.


CLS 338/6
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the strain gauge includes
    structure, such as pins, for engaging two spaced points for sensing any
    changes in the spacing of these two points, and for transmitting this
    sensed spacing change to the strain gauge to cause deformation thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 125+ for distance measuring
    instruments generally.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 763+ for an electrical stress or
    strain measuring system and involving current generation or modification.


CLS 338/7
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the resistance element is
    formed of materials whose resistance value changes a relatively small
    amount with a change in the temperature of the element; or wherein one
    resistance material is combined with another resistance material in the
    same or different resistance elements, the change of resistance value of
    one material with the temperature of the material being such as to offset
    at least partly the change of resistance value of the other material with
    the temperature of this material, the materials being always at the same
    temperature, e.g., one material has a positive temperature coefficient and
    the other material has a correspondingly negative temperature coefficient;
    or wherein the support or actuator for the resistor includes material or
    structure which offsets at least partly the effect of or resists
    dimensional changes due to temperature change in the support or actuator,
    which otherwise would result in a change in resistance value.

    (1)     Note.  Only compensation structure is classified here which at
    least partly controls or modifies the resistance value of the resistor.
    Resistors with temperature compensated supports which merely maintain the
    position of the resistor unchanged with temperature change, for example,
    are classified in subclass 316 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for strain gauge type resistors with temperature compensation.

    14,     for resistors whose resistance value is responsive to a plurality
    of conditions.

    25+,    for resistors whose resistance value is responsive to ambient
    temperature.

    316,    for supports which compensate for expansion or contraction with
    temperature.  See also (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 140 for
    electric circuits for relays and electromagnets having means compensating
    for thermal changes.


CLS 338/8
TXT Subject matter under subclass 7, including structure or material which is
    directly operative on the actuator to offset the effect of or reduce or
    prevent a change in dimension of the actuator due to temperature change.


CLS 338/9
TXT Subject matter under subclass 7 including an additional resistor or
    resistance element, whose temperature coefficient is of opposite sign
    (positive or negative) from the temperature coefficient of the original
    resistor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for strain gauge type resistors including a temperature
    compensating resistor.

    48,     for plural separate diverse resistors.

    322,    for plural resistance elements in parallel between terminals.


CLS 338/10
TXT Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein both the resistance elements or the
    resistance elements of both resistors are elongated in shape, as wires or
    filaments.


CLS 338/11
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including structure which is
    spaced from and positioned with respect to the resistance element to
    redirect any heat impinging on the structure from an external source onto
    the resistance element, or to redirect any heat produced by the resistance
    element and impinging on the structure back on the resistance element.

    (1)     Note.  The heat reflectors in this subclass are restricted to
    directing heat toward the resistance element or to redirecting the heat
    produced by the element back to the element.  Where the heat produced by
    the element is directed by reflectors for heating some object other than
    the element itself classification is in Class 219, Electric Heating,
    especially subclass 34.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226+,   for a resistor with a heat insulating housing, which may even
    protect the resistor from external heat by reflection, i.e., prevent the
    external heat going to the resistance element; and especially subclasses
    234+ for a resistor with a gaseous or vacuum layer between the element and
    the casing or housing.

    334,    for a resistor with a heat protecting shield other than a casing,
    and not classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 540 for electric heating radiators.  See
    also (1) Note above.

    432,    Heating, subclass 50 for shielding devices in connection with
    heating furnaces or other hot objects acting as a screen or baffle to heat.


CLS 338/12
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including a mechanically variable
    resistor together with a partition, wall, or housing; and a movable magnet,
    usually permanent, which when moved is effective by its field through the
    partition, wall, or housing to change the mechanical setting of the
    variable resistor and thus change the resistance value of the variable
    resistor.

    (1)     Note.  Usually a second magnet is disposed on the opposite side of
    the partition, wall, or housing from the movable magnet, the second magnet
    being mechanically linked with the variable resistor and being adapted to
    be moved by the field of the first movable magnet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for coherer type resistors.

    32,     for resistors generally whose resistance value is responsive to a
    magnetic field or compass.

    103+    and 116, for mechanically variable resistors with an
    electromagnetic operator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 103 for magnetic
    field type clutches or brakes.


CLS 338/13
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including a resistor usually
    mechanically variable to change its resistance value, linked with actuating
    structure which senses and responds significantly well to a particular
    stimulus or condition or change in such stimulus or condition; or including
    a resistor, usually nonmechanically variable, having the property as by
    shape or chemical composition of changing its resistance value
    significantly well in response to a particular stimulus or condition or
    change in such stimulus or condition; and usually together with structure
    as part of the resistor or in addition to the resistor for applying or
    facilitating the application of this stimulus or condition to the resistor.

    (1)     Note.  For classification here the actuator must be something more
    than merely adapted to have a force applied thereto for the actuation of
    the mechanical variable or adjustable resistor, as a knob, pedal, or
    handle. The actuator must sense the condition or change in condition, and
    respond in some manner as by moving or deforming. When a meter Wheatstone
    bridge connection or other indicating device for indicating the current
    passing through a resistor together with the resistor and condition sensing
    device are recited, classification is not here, but in such Classes as 33,
    Geometrical Instruments and 73, Measuring and Testing.  374, Thermal
    Measuring and Testing, Microphones are classified in Class 381, Electrical
    Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, even when the output circuitry
    is not recited.  Similarly, resistive phonograph pickups are classified in
    Class 369, Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 152.  However
    a mere variable resistor adapted to be actuated by a stylus (unclaimed) is
    classified in this subclasses 13+.  A mere statement of use as a resistor
    whose value changes in response to a sensed condition is not sufficient for
    classification here.  The structure or chemical composition which at least
    contributes to this result must be recited in the claims.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for a strain gauge resistor with a particular condition sensing
    actuator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, appropriate subclasses, for geometrical
    instruments.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses, for measuring and
    testing devices.

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclass 211 for a weighing scale including an
    electrical strain gauge.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 52+ for
    electric circuit makers and breakers of special application.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 445+ for systems of
    automatic motor control.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 293+
    for automatic impedance systems.

    334,    Tuners, subclasses 5+ for tuners which are responsive to a
    condition.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, especially subclasses 177+ and 500+,
    for electrical systems for telemetering or indicating electrically a sensed
    condition.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 152 for
    resistive phonograph pickups.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for measuring
    and testing of thermal quantities.


CLS 338/14
TXT Subject matter under subclass 13 including two or more actuating structures
    together with a variable resistor each responsive to an independent
    stimulus or condition, which may be of the same or different type; or
    including a resistor whose element has the property of changing its
    resistance value particularly well in response to two or more independent
    conditions or stimuli applied thereto; or including a variable resistor
    whose element is responsive directly to a condition together with an
    actuator responsive to an independent condition.


CLS 338/15
TXT Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein the resistor is formed of a
    material whose resistance value changes materially upon the application of
    light, infrared radiation, or ultraviolet radiation to the resistor, or
    upon a change in the intensity of this radiation applied to the resistor
    together with any structure which facilitates the application of light or
    ultra violet or infrared radiation to the resistor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclass 89 for
    primary photoelectric batteries.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for photocell circuits and
    apparatus.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 501 for light sensitive conductive
    compositions.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 121+ for radiation type
    thermometers.


CLS 338/16
TXT Subject matter under subclass 15 including structure for eliminating or
    reducing vibration or offsetting the effect thereof, as a shock absorbing
    support for the resistance element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98,     for mechanically adjustable or variable resistors with motion
    damping and/or vibration control means.

    171,    for a variable resistor with a contact slidable on the resistance
    element, the contact having plural element engaging portions which may
    reduce the effect of vibration.

    315+,   for resistors generally with mounting or supporting means, which
    may include anti-vibration structure.


CLS 338/17
TXT Subject matter under subclass 15 including two or more resistors as there
    defined or a single resistor having two or more elements.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the resistors or elements are arranged in a planar
    pattern as a mosaic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    320,    for plural supported or mounted resistors.

    322,    for resistors having a plurality of elements between terminals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 58+ for coating processes, per se,
    wherein the product has utility as electrical article.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for a plural layer stock material product, one layer being of resistance
    material and another layer being conductive, note especially subclasses
    195+ for a discontinuous or differential coating, impregnation or bond.


CLS 338/18
TXT Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein the material of which the resistor
    is formed changes its resistance value materially upon the application of
    infra red radiation thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25+,    for resistors whose resistance value changes with ambient
    temperature.


CLS 338/19
TXT Subject matter under subclass 15 including a casing or covering such as a
    glass or quartz envelope containing the photoconductive element, at least a
    portion of the casing or covering freely passing the radiant energy which
    impinges on the photoconductive element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184     and 199, for mechanically variable resistors with housings.

    226+,   for incased, embedded, or housed resistors generally; and
    especially subclasses 234+, for such resistors with gaseous or vacuum
    spacing between the element and the casing or housing.


CLS 338/20
TXT Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein the resistor is chemically
    constituted or otherwise formed to change its resistance value in response
    to an electric current passing through or a voltage impressed across the
    resistor, or wherein the resistor includes structure or composition which
    enables the resistor to change its resistance value in response to a
    current or voltage applied to a circuit other than to the resistor itself;
    as to an electric heater with a heat conducting path to the resistor.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the current increases the temperature of the
    resistor either directly or indirectly, and the resistor has an appreciable
    resistor temperature coefficient to cause the resistance value to change.
    In the case of the so-called voltage responsive resistors, a voltage change
    often produces a current change which in turn changes the resistance value
    as through the heating effect of the current.  However, some resistors here
    classified do change value directly with the voltage gradient existing
    therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25+,    for resistors whose resistance value changes with ambient
    temperature.

    103+    and 116, for mechanically adjustable or variable resistors with an
    electromagnetic operator, such as an electric motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 341+ for electric
    lamp and discharge device filaments.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 293+
    for impedance systems automatically responsive to voltage and/or current.


CLS 338/21
TXT Subject matter under subclass 20 wherein the resistance element is formed
    of material whose resistance value changes sharply and often
    discontinuously upon a change in terminal voltage from a low to a
    relatively high value or upon a rise in the terminal voltage above a
    threshold value.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices subclasses 1+ for
    safety and protection systems and subclasses 117+ for high voltage
    dissipators such as lightning arrester systems.


CLS 338/22
TXT Subject matter under subclass 20 wherein the resistance element is formed
    of a semi-conductor material and has a relatively high temperature
    coefficient, which is usually negative.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25+,    for thermistors whose resistance values are changed by ambient
    temperature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 53, 108, and 467-470 for active solid-state type temperature
    responsive devices.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 294 and
    subclasses 364+ for impedance systems responsive to a thermal condition.


CLS 338/23
TXT Subject matter under subclass 22 wherein a resistance heater for the
    thermistor is provided other than the thermistor resistance and in a
    current circuit distinct from the current circuit through the thermistor.

    (1)     Note.  The heater circuit may be in series or shunt with the
    thermistor, or be in another electrical system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for resistors generally whose resistance value changes in response
    to a current which indirectly heats the resistance element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 50+ for electrical resistance heaters.


CLS 338/24
TXT Subject matter under subclass 20 wherein a resistance heater for the
    resistor is provided other than the resistance element and in a current
    circuit distinct from the current circuit through the element.

    (1)     Note.  The heater circuit may be in series or shunt with the
    resistance element or be in another electrical system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for thermistor type resistors whose resistance value changes in
    response to a current which indirectly heats the resistance element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 50+ for electrical resistance heaters.


CLS 338/25
TXT Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein the resistance element includes
    material which effects a significant change, such as sharp, rapid, or
    pronounced, in the resistance value of the element with a change in the
    surrounding temperature, or together with structure which facilitates this
    change in resistance value with the surrounding temperature; or including a
    mechanically adjustable or variable resistor together with structure whose
    shape, configuration or any other dimension changes with a change in
    surrounding temperature, the structure being linked with the adjustable or
    variable resistor to change in resistance value with the change in shape,
    configuration or other dimension occurring in the temperature sensing
    structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7+,     for resistors with compensation for a change in resistance value
    due to temperature change.

    20+,    for resistors whose resistance value changes in response to a
    current or voltage, which may involve a change in the ambient temperature
    of the resistor.

    51,     for resistors with heat dissipating projections.

    53+,    for resistors with cooling gas or liquid circulation.

    59,     for resistors with heat storing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, appropriate
    subclasses, for automatic temperature controls, especially the subclasses
    found under THERMOSTATIC.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 14 for temperature
    modified pyroelectric type devices.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 294 and
    subclass 364+ for thermally responsive impedance systems.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 584+ and 577+ for
    electrical systems generally responsive to temperature and flame,
    respectively.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 183+ for current
    modifying type thermometers.


CLS 338/26
TXT Subject matter under subclass 25 wherein the resistor is flexible or
    deformable and has an elongated shape with substantially uniform external
    size over its length, the resistance element extending between the ends of
    the resistor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212,    for tape type resistors generally.

    214,    for cable type resistors generally.


CLS 338/27
TXT Subject matter under subclass 25 wherein the resistance element or contact
    is a liquid, the liquid sensing the change in the surrounding temperature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80+     and 222, for mechanically variable and fixed resistors respectively
    having liquid resistance elements.

    94,     151 and 156, for mechanically variable resistors having a liquid
    contact.


CLS 338/28
TXT Subject matter under subclass 25 wherein the resistor is formed as an
    elongated rigid unit, one end being free and the other end including the
    resistor terminal or the portions of the terminals connecting the external
    circuitry, as well as any structure for manipulating the unit, such as a
    handle, or for securing the unit to supporting structure.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the resistance element is enclosed in an elongated
    casing which forms the exterior of the probe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229,    for probe type incased, embeded or housed resistors generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 149 for electricity
    measuring devices including a probe.


CLS 338/29
TXT Subject matter under subclass 28 including a mechanically adjustable or
    variable resistor as defined in subclass 68 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68+,    for mechanically adjustable or variable resistors generally.


CLS 338/30
TXT Subject matter under subclass 28 wherein one or both of the terminals form
    a substantial part of the probe casing or housing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    271,    for resistors generally one of whose terminal forms a casing or
    housing.


CLS 338/31
TXT Subject matter under subclass 25 including a mechanically adjustable or
    variable resistor as defined in subclass 68 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68+,    for mechanically adjustable or variable resistors generally.


CLS 338/32
TXT Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein the resistance element includes
    material whose resistance value is dependent on a magnetic field applied
    directly thereto, or together with means for applying or facilitating the
    application of a magnetic field to this material of the resistance element;
    or wherein a resistor is mechanically linked with the magnet of a magnetic
    compass to be actuated by this magnet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for resistors responsive to inertia devices, such as a gyro compass.

    103+,   for a compressible type resistor with an electromagnetic operator.

    116,    for mechanically variable resistors generally with an
    electromagnetic operator such as an electric motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses, including subclasses 108, 414, and 421-427 for
    devices responsive to magnetic field.

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses for magnetic demodulators
    using, for example, the Hall effect.


CLS 338/33
TXT Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein an adjustable resistor is combined
    with a float, which is mechanically linked with the resistor actuator to
    vary the resistance value in accordance with the position of the float.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter in this subclass is usually a
    subcombination of a liquid level or depth gauge as classified in Class 73,
    Measuring and Testing, subclasses 305+.  Where the indicator is recited as
    an added element, classification is in subclasses 305+ of Class 73.  The
    mere recitation of the tank broadly does not preclude classification in
    this class (338).  Where details of the tank are recited, classification is
    elsewhere such as Class 137, Fluid Handling, subclass 560 for a tank with
    an out- flow pipe together with a float operated rheostat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34+,    for resistors whose resistance value is dependent on the gas,
    vapor, or moisture absorbed or collected.

    36+,    for mechanically variable resistors with structure responsive to
    fluid pressure.

    68+,    for mechanically adjustable or variable resistors, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 305+ for liquid level or depth
    gauges including a float operated rheostat; and subclasses 451+ for
    specific gravity or density measurement of a liquid including a float
    operated rheostat. See also (1) Note above.

    137,    Fluid Handling, appropriate subclasses, for fluid handling systems.
    See also (1) Note above.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 177+ for float operated
    telemetric systems.


CLS 338/34
TXT Subject matter under subclass 13 including material or structure which
    readily absorbs or collects or facilitates the absorption or collection of
    fluent material such as liquids, gases, vapors, or humidity to which the
    resistor may be exposed, and usually which relinquishes all or part of the
    fluent material so absorbed or collected upon reduction in the intensity or
    termination of the exposure thereto, the material so collected or absorbed
    usually providing the electrical resistance, the value of the resistance
    depending on the amount of material absorbed.

    (1)     Note.  The fluent material may be collected on the surface or
    absorbed within other material of the resistor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80+,    for mechanically adjustable or variable liquid resistors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, subclasses 230+ and 253+ for
    analytical and analytical control methods and apparatus respectively.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 73+ for measuring the moisture
    content or absorption characteristics of materials.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.04+ for
    circuit making or breaking devices responsive to liquid or moisture.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 483 for motor control
    systems automatically operative in response to moisture content or wetness.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 602, for electrical
    communications systems automatically responsive to moisture or humidity;
    and subclasses 628+ and 632+ for such systems responsive to smoke and gas;
    respectively.


CLS 338/35
TXT Subject matter under subclass 34 wherein the resistor is peculiarly adopted
    to collect or absorb moisture from the air.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 335+ for hygrometers.


CLS 338/36
TXT Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein the condition sensed is fluid or
    gas pressure and the resistor actuator engages this fluid or gas and is
    mechanically moved or deformed by the pressure of this fluid or gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for strain gauge resistors which are fluid or gas actuated.

    33,     for float actuated resistors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 290+ for liquid depth gauges; and
    subclasses 700+ for fluid pressure gauges.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 603+ for fluent material
    operated alarms.


CLS 338/37
TXT Subject matter under subclass 36 wherein the condition sensed is the air
    pressure in the tire of a vehicle, and including structure for sensing this
    pressure and not otherwise classifiable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     for resistors mounted on wheels or vehicles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 146.3+ for direct pressure
    reading of tire inflation.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 227+ for tire stem inflation means with
    a gauge or indicator.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.22+ for
    pneumatic tire inflation responsive switches.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 58 for electrical systems
    automatically responsive to tire deflation.


CLS 338/38
TXT Subject matter under subclass 36 wherein a liquid resistance element or
    contact is arranged to rise and fall over contact or resistance structure
    to give a variable resistance according to the condition sensed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80+,    for mechanically variable resistors having liquid resistance
    elements.

    94,     for a mechanically adjustable resistor having a liquid short
    circuiting contact.

    151,    for a mechanically variable resistor having a liquid contact in
    which the resistance element moves.

    156,    for a mechanically variable resistor with a liquid contact.

    222,    for a fixed resistor having a liquid element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 750 for liquid column fluid
    pressure gauges such as manometers.


CLS 338/39
TXT Subject matter under subclass 36 wherein the resistor actuator is a piston
    or plunger.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for a resistor actuated by a float.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 746 for fluid pressure gauges
    having a piston as the pressure responsive element.


CLS 338/40
TXT Subject matter under subclass 36 wherein the resistor actuator is a Bourdon
    tube.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 734 for fluid pressure gauges
    having a Bourdon tube for their pressure responsive element.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 81.8 for
    Bourdon tube operated switches.


CLS 338/41
TXT Subject matter under subclass 36 wherein a cylindrical or cup shaped
    expansible chamber has side walls comprising sections of alternately larger
    and smaller cross-sections which make up a single fluid or gas chamber
    having a zigzag or pleated wall, or wherein an expansible chamber device
    includes a plurality of movable walls, two or more of which are of the
    flexible sheet material or diaphragm type whereby vertical collapse or
    expansion of the chamber is facilitated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 786 and 793+ for expansible chamber
    fluid handling devices of the bellows or capsule type.


CLS 338/42
TXT Subject matter under subclass 36 wherein the resistor actuator is a
    diaphragm, or a flexible or deformable wall or casing structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 262+ for volume or rate of flow
    meters with a diaphragm or collapsible wall; subclasses 278 and 279+ for
    diaphragm mountings and diaphragms for such meters; and subclasses 719 and
    725 for fluid pressure gauges including a diaphragm.


CLS 338/43
TXT Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein the actuator or reference for the
    actuator is a mass which is at least partly free to operate under the
    effect of its inertia, or under the effect of its weight to seek a lower
    level and thus maintain a vertical stabilization as for reference purposes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 652+ for vibration testing with
    an inertia sensing element.


CLS 338/44
TXT Subject matter under subclass 43 wherein the resistance element or its
    contact is a liquid, and the actuator is this liquid element or contact,
    which is operated by its inertia or level seeking characteristic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80+     and 222, for a mechanically variable and fixed resistor
    respectively having a liquid resistance element.

    94,     151 and 156, for mechanically variable resistors having liquid
    contacts; especially subclass 151, for such resistors whose elements move
    and whose liquid contact is fixed at the lowest level by gravity.


CLS 338/45
TXT Subject matter under subclass 43 wherein the actuator is subject to
    rotation to thus develop a centrifugal force to control the variable
    resistor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 15+ for centrifugal speed responsive devices.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 325 for electric
    motors having a centrifugally operated speed control


CLS 338/46
TXT Subject matter under subclass 43 wherein the actuator for the variable
    resistor is a pendulum.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 215+ for pendulum type
    direction indicators.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 862.381+ for pendulum type
    dynamometers.


CLS 338/47
TXT Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein the actuator is constructed to
    facilitate the application of a force thereto, and to mechanically move or
    deform in response to this force to provide a mechanical movement for the
    operation of the variable resistor, the force being substantially greater
    than necessary to operate the resistor.

    (1)     Note.  Since force is the commonest method of operating
    mechanically variable resistors, a mere knob, pedal or handle as an
    actuator is not sufficient for classification here. The force sensing
    mechanism must be able to respond directly to forces substantially greater
    than or bearing little relationship to the force necessary to adjust the
    variable resistor or to overcome any spring loading of the variable
    resistor for classification in this subclass. Pushing, pulling and torque
    are examples of the forces sensed by the subject matter of this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  When the resistor strain gage is disclosed for making a
    quantative measurement, proper classification is in Class 73, subclasses
    862+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for dynamometer type strain gauge resistors.

    36+,    for a variable resistor with a condition sensing actuator producing
    a force by a fluid or gas pressure.

    68+,    for mechanically adjustable or variable resistors; especially
    subclasses 99+ for such resistors of the compressible type; and subclass
    167, for such resistors with spring loaded angularly slidable contacts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 133+ for dynamometers.

    177,    Weighing Scales, appropriate subclasses, for weighing scales.


CLS 338/48
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein a first resistor is
    combined with a physically distinct second resistor which is significantly
    structurally different from the first resistor.

    (1)     Note.  For classification here the two resistors must be claimed
    together with the distinction of one resistor over the other.  A mere
    claimed difference in dimensions or resistance values as one resistor being
    coarse and the other fine is not a sufficient distinction for
    classification herein.  The claimed distinctions for classification here
    must be in the structure or shape of the resistor or the resistor combined
    with perfecting subject matter, as for example when each resistor is a
    different species and is classified in different subclasses in this
    schedule.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for a resistor with an additional temperature compensating resistor.

    23      and 24, for indirectly heated current and/or voltage responsive
    resistors.

    49,     for shunt type resistors which may have diverse terminals.

    67,     for resistors combined with diverse nonelectrical devices.

    122,    for mechanically variable resistors with contacts movable over
    coarse and fine resistance elements.

    286,    for resistors having both a helical and a zigzag configuration.

    324,    for single resistors having diverse terminals.


CLS 338/49
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the resistor is
    peculiarly adapted for shunting a metering instrument, the resistor
    terminals usually being of large mass and having a plurality of sets of
    connectors, one smaller set for the instrument and the other larger set for
    the main current leads, the resistance element extending therebetween and
    usually being flat or formed with ventilating means such as fine or vented
    passages, or with a plurality of separate current paths to present a large
    cooling surface to maintain uniform temperature and prevent change in the
    resistance value or the resistor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for resistors with heat dissipating projections, e.g., vanes.

    322,    for plural resistance elements in parallel between terminals.

    324,    for fixed resistors having diverse terminals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 126 for measuring or
    testing instruments having coupling means, e.g., shunts.


CLS 338/50
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the resistor is provided
    with wheels for increasing the mobility of the vehicle, or wherein the
    resistor is mounted on a vehicle especially adapted for carrying only the
    resistor together with its operating structure or a plurality of such
    resistors.

    (1)     Note.  Where the vehicle is adapted for other purposes then merely
    carrying the resistor and its operating structure, classification is not
    here, but in subclass 67, if not otherwise classifiable.  See also the
    Search Notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     for resistors with diverse nonelectrical devices.  See also (1)
    Note above.

    197,    for mechanically variable resistors with supports.

    315+,   for resistors generally with mounting or supporting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 61 for electric railway cars
    including a controlling resistor.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 65 for electric vehicles generally; and
    subclasses 77+ for such vehicles including electric motor controlling
    devices, which may be resistors.


CLS 338/51
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein a surface of the
    resistance element, casing, terminal, or other resistance structure is
    enlarged or increased in area over what is otherwise necessary by a
    projecting portion integral therewith or attached thereto, such as vanes,
    fins, or corrugations, to increase the heat radiated, dissipated, or
    otherwise transferred from the surface structure of the resistor to the
    surrounding or adjacent medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for shunt type resistors.

    53+,    for resistors with cooling gas or liquid circulation.

    159,    for a mechanically adjustable or variable resistor with a heat
    conducting or distributing path.

    226+,   for resistors generally with heat conducting casings or housings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 185 for a fin or heat transmitter, per se.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 34 for heating radiators.


CLS 338/52
TXT Subject matter under subclass 51 wherein the resistance element is granular
    or powdered in form or is formed as a plurality of layers or other distinct
    masses stacked or piled transversely to the direction of current flow
    through the resistance element; i.e., so that the current flowing through
    the resistance element will flow from mass to mass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for resistors with cooling gas or liquid circulation, and having
    granular powdered or transversely stacked elements.

    99+,    for mechanically variable resistors including surfaces pressed
    together for adjustment purposes, e.g., compressible type; and subclass 115
    for such resistors generally whose elements are in piled or stacked layers.

    204+,   for resistors generally whose elements are piled or stacked between
    terminals.

    223+,   for resistors having granular or powdered elements.


CLS 338/53
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the resistor includes
    structure which conveys a cooling gas or liquid to, from or through the
    resistor, or which permits a cooling gas or liquid to move to or from the
    resistor for the purpose of cooling the resistor by conveying away the heat
    produced by the resistor.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter in this subclass is very similar to subject
    matter in Class 219, Electric Heating, subclasses 50+, since cooling a
    resistor by gas or liquid is analogous to heating gas or liquid with a
    resistor.  In the resistors in this subclass (53) the heat produced is
    usually incidental and undesired, and the fluid or gas dissipates this
    heat.  In the heating resistors of Class 219 the resistor is adapted for
    heating purposes as opposed to impedance purposes, and the heat produced is
    distributed or directed for such heating purposes as opposed to mere
    dissipation.  However, a mere resistor with heating or cooling fluid or gas
    circulation, even though designated as a heater, is classified in this
    subclasses (53+).  For classification in Class 219, structure must be
    claimed which adapts the resistor, or the fluid gas circulating structure
    for heating purposes.  See also the Notes under the Class Definition for
    the general lines between this class (338) and Class 219.

    (2)     Note.  A resistor with a liquid gas or vacuum enclosing casing is
    not classified here even though the liquid or gas is of heat conducting
    material, but in such subclasses as 231 and 234+ below.  For classification
    in this subclasses (53+) the liquid or gas must circulate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7+,     for resistors with temperature compensation.

    231,    for resistors generally whose elements are incased in a liquid.
    See also (2) Note above.

    234+,   for resistors generally with a gaseous or vacuum spacing between
    the element and the casing or housing. See also (2) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclasses, for refrigeration devices.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclass for heat transferring devices
    generally.

    219,    Electric Heating, especially subclasses 50+, and 280+ for electric
    resistance air and liquid heaters.  See also (1) Note above.


CLS 338/54
TXT Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein the resistance element is granular
    or powdered in form or is formed as a plurality of layers or other distinct
    masses stacked or piled transversely to the direction of current flow
    through the resistance element, i.e., so that the current flowing through
    the resistance element will flow from mass to mass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     for resistors with heat dissipating projections, and having
    granular powdered or transversely stacked elements.

    99+,    for mechanically variable resistors including surfaces pressed
    together for adjustment purposes, e.g., compressible type; and subclass 115
    for such resistors generally whose elements are in piled or stacked layers.

    204+,   for resistors generally whose elements are piled or stacked between
    terminals.

    223+,   for resistors having granular or powdered elements.


CLS 338/55
TXT Subject matter under subclass 53 including means for conveying or
    facilitating the conveyance of liquid to or from the resistance element or
    terminals, or to structure in heat conducting relation to the element to
    carry away at least part of the heat produced by the element or terminals
    by motion of the liquid.

    (1)     Note.  A mere heat conducting liquid without motion or circulation
    of the liquid is not classified here, but in subclass 231 below.  Where
    structure is claimed for controlling or directing the heat to the liquid,
    or controlling or utilizing the heated liquid for heating purposes as
    opposed to mere dissipation of the heat, classification is in Class 219,
    Electric Heating, especially subclasses 280+.  See also (1) Note under
    subclass 53 above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for resistors with vented or ventilating casing or housings.

    231,    for resistors generally incased in a liquid.  See also (1) Note
    above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 104.19+ for a residual system exchanging
    heat through a recycling fluid.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 280+ for electric fluid heaters.  See
    also (1) Note above.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 22 for dissipating
    terminations for long lines involving a liquid coolant.


CLS 338/56
TXT Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein the circulating or moving liquid
    is also the resistance element, and by such circulation or motion the
    element is cooled or cools itself.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222,    for resistors generally with liquid elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 284+ for electric fluid heaters,
    wherein the fluid is heated by the passage of electric current directly
    therethrough.


CLS 338/57
TXT Subject matter under subclass 53 including a casing or housing of solid
    material which substantially entirely encloses the resistance element, the
    casing or housing having openings therein joining the resistance element
    with the surrounding medium to permit circulation of air or other gases to
    and from the resistance element.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter here is restricted to casings with vents
    or other openings transmitting air or other gases.  Subclasses 55+ provides
    for resistors with casings and liquid cooling.  Further the air or gas must
    be free to circulate for classification here.  Subclasses 234+ provides for
    an incased, embedded or housed resistor with a gaseous or vacuum spacing
    between the element and casing or housing without the ventilation or
    cooling.  The ventilation may be forced as by a fan as well as naturally
    for classification here.  Subclasses 226+ below provides for resistors
    generally with casings or housings which transmit heat through the material
    to the casing or housing.  A mere open ended sleeve surrounding the
    resistance element is not sufficient to constitute a vented casing for
    classification here, but rather is classified in subclass 53 above, if air
    circulation is present.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51+,    for resistors with heat dissipating projections, e.g., vanes.

    53+,    for resistors with ventilating passages or spaces generally.  See
    also (1) Note above.

    55+,    for incased resistors with a liquid cooling medium.  See also (1)
    Note above.

    234+,   for incased, embedded or housed resistors generally with a gaseous
    or vacuum spacing between the element and the casing or housing.  See also
    (1) Note above.

    277,    for resistors with protecting structure such as guards, screens,
    and mechanical shields.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 16.1 for a mere
    housing or casing for an electrical device with means to provide for
    ventilation of the interior of the casing.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 280+ for fluid resistance heaters.
    See also (1) Note under subclass 53 above.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 213 for enclosures with
    ventilated openings not otherwise classifiable.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 59 for inductors with vented casings.

    454,    Ventilation, appropriate subclasses, for ventilating structure such
    as cowls, hoods and louvers.


CLS 338/58
TXT Subject matter under subclass 53 wherein the resistor is of zigzag or
    helical type as defined in subclasses 283 and 296 respectively below,
    together with structure which transmits or facilitates the transmission of
    air or other gases to and into contact with the resistance element for
    cooling purposes.

    (1)     Note.  The ventilating structure may be air passages or a
    particular spacing of the resistance element or parts thereof to facilitate
    air cooling.  For classification here, the resistance element must be
    directly ventilated.  A mere passage in a core or support for cooling
    purposes and not leading directly to the element, is not classified here,
    but in such subclasses as 53 and 55+, above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for resistors with ventilating passages or spaces generally.  See
    also (1) Note above.

    57,     for a zigzag or helical resistor with a ventilating casing or
    housing, the zigzag or helical resistor also being ventilated.

    283+,   for resistors with zigzag or sinuous resistance elements generally.

    296,    for resistors with helical or wound resistance elements generally.


CLS 338/59
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the resistor includes or
    is combined with a mass of material which is adapted to absorb and retain
    significantly well the heat produced by the resistance element, or the heat
    existing in the medium surrounding the resistor, or structure which is
    peculiarly adapted to support such a mass in or on the resistor.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of subject matter here are resistors having a
    surrounding iron mass for storing the resistor heat, or resistors having
    containers for storing ice.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for a resistor with a circulating gas cooling medium.

    55+,    for a resistor with a circulating liquid cooling medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 400 for heat accumulators.


CLS 338/60
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the resistor includes
    distinct structure or arrangement of parts which reduce or eliminate the
    resistor capacity or the effect of the resistor capacity in the resistor.

    (1)     Note.  For classification here the definite structure or
    arrangement of parts must be for reducing or eliminating the inherent
    capacity of the resistor as opposed to some type of electric shielding to
    reduce the effect of external capacity (e.g., hand capacity) on the
    resistor.  Resistors having shielding to reduce or eliminate external
    capacity effects are classified in 64+ below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for resistors having structure to reduce or eliminate inductance or
    the effect of inductance on the resistance.

    64+,    for resistors having electrical shielding.  See also (1) Note above.

    334,    for resistors electrically connected to other electric devices, and
    not elsewhere classified.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 271+ for
    capacitors combined with some other type of subject matter.


CLS 338/61
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the resistor includes
    distinct structure or arrangement of parts which reduce or eliminate the
    resistor inductance or the effect of the resistor inductance in the
    resistor.

    (1)     Note.  For classification here definite structure or arrangement of
    parts must be present to reduce or eliminate the inductance.  A resistor
    with a coated, granular, or straight rod resistance element, for example,
    which inherently has a relatively low inductance, is not classified here,
    but in such subclasses as 223+, 308 and 322+, respectively. Further the
    structure or arrangement must be for reducing or eliminating the inherent
    inductance in the resistor as opposed to some type of electric shielding to
    reduce the effect of some external inductance.  Subclasses 64+ below
    provides for resistors with electrical shields.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for resistors with capacity reducing means.

    64,     for resistors with electrical shields.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 32+ for
    electrical conductors with anti-inductive structure; and especially
    subclasses 33+ for conductor transposition.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 89+
    for anti-inductive means to prevent or modify the coupling between
    electrical systems.

    336,    Inductor Devices, for inductor devices of the passive type.


CLS 338/62
TXT Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein the resistor includes an elongated
    resistance element formed as two or more continuous closed coils or loops
    as a spiral, helix, or toroidal winding as defined in subclass 296 below,
    together with additional structure or arrangement of the coils or loops for
    reducing or eliminating the inductance or the effect thereof of the coils
    or loops.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    296+,   for resistors generally with helical or wound resistance elements.


CLS 338/63
TXT Subject matter under subclass 62, wherein the helical or wound resistance
    element is doubled on itself, the bight being at one end of the winding and
    the doubled portions of the resistance element being disposed side by side
    in parallel and extending towards the other end in a helical or wound
    pattern.


CLS 338/64
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including a barrier or screen for
    shielding at least a part of the resistor device from external electrical,
    magnetic, or electro-magnetic fields, or for protecting parts of the device
    from such fields originating in another part of the device, of for
    preventing the resistor device from emanating such fields or waves
    containing such fields.

    (1)     Note.  A fixed resistor with a casing or housing claimed as an
    electrical shield or equivalent terminology is classified here, and not in
    subclasses 226+ below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for resistors having means to reduce or eliminate capacity of the
    effect thereof within the resistor.

    61+,    for resistors having means to reduce or eliminate inductance or the
    effect thereof within the resistor.

    266+,   for resistors generally with casings or housings not limited by
    claimed subject matter to electric shielding.  See also (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 35+ for
    electrically shielded electrical conductors and insulators; or electrical
    shields or screens not classifiable in other main classes.  See also the
    Search Notes under this subclass.

    334,    Tuners, subclass 85 for tuners with electric and/or magnetic
    shielding or housing means.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 84+ for inductor devices with electric
    and/or magnetic shielding means.


CLS 338/65
TXT Subject matter under subclass 64 wherein the resistor is of the
    mechanically variable type as defined in subclass 68 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68+,    for mechanically variable resistors generally.

    184,    for mechanically variable resistors whose contact slides along in
    contact with the element together with a casing or housing, and not limited
    by claimed subject matter to electrical shielding.

    199,    for a mechanically variable resistor generally, with a casing or
    housing not limited by claimed subject matter to electrical shielding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 87 for adjustable inductive devices with
    electric and/or magnetic shielding means.


CLS 338/66
TXT Resistors under the class definition which when inserted in an ignition
    circuit are particularly well adapted for the suppression of undesired
    currents in the circuits, which would otherwise produce electrical
    disturbances, and are characterized by having usually a heavy ceramic
    insulation casing, a heavy granular bonded mixture as the material for the
    resistance element incased in the insulating casing, and diverse quick
    detachable terminals as one being the plug type and the other being of the
    socket type.

    (1)     Note.  For classification here the background or use must be an
    ignition circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64+,    for resistors with electrical shields.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 148 for high tension ignition
    circuits for internal combustion engines.


CLS 338/67
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the resistor is combined
    with some other nonelectrical device or structure, for example, of a
    mechanical or chemical type, having an added purpose or independent utility
    other than to perfect the resistor, and not otherwise classifiable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for strain gauge type resistors together with the structure or
    device broadly wherein the strain is to be determined.

    13+,    for resistors with a condition sensing actuator; especially
    subclass 32 for a resistor actuated by a compass; subclass 33 for a
    resistor actuated by a float; and subclass 37 for a resistor actuated by
    vehicle tire inflation pressure.

    50,     for a resistor mounted on wheels or vehicles.

    277,    for a resistor with protecting structure spaced from the element or
    terminal.

    315+,   for a resistor with mounting or supporting means.

    334,    for resistors electrically connected to other electrical devices,
    and not otherwise classifiable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 50+ for electrical resistance heaters.


CLS 338/68
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including a resistance element
    together with structure for changing a dimension of the resistance element
    or the effective portion of the resistance element between terminals, as a
    change in the cross-sectional area or an increase in length of the portion
    of the resistance element between the terminals; and/or wherein the
    resistance element is readily adapted or at least adapted for such change
    in a dimension; or including structure permitting a ready change in the
    position or point of electrical connection of one or more of the terminals
    on the resistance element to cause a different portion of the element to be
    in electrical circuit between the terminals; or including conducting
    structure which adjustably short-circuits a portion of the resistance
    element between terminals; or including switching structure which alters
    the resistance portion of the resistance element in electrical circuit
    between terminals or which changes the circuit relationship of the
    resistance element and other resistance elements or which permits the
    resistance elements to be changed in or removed from the circuit; the
    result in any of the above being a change in the resistance value between
    the resistance terminals or the terminals in the circuit including the
    resistance element; or wherein the resistance element is adapted for or
    combined with structure for mechanically changing in some manner the
    resistance element or the combination including the resistance element; or
    including any other means or adaption of the resistance element or elements
    for mechanically changing an arrangement of or effecting a mechanical
    change in the resistance element or elements to achieve the above mentioned
    result.

    (1)     Note.  The change in resistance value as stated above is the result
    of or involves some mechanical change or adjustment on or in the resistance
    element or terminals, which includes switching of the terminals.  The
    resistance value may be changed otherwise as by change in temperature,
    electric current therethrough, or voltage applied thereof.  This subject
    matter is classified above, a field of search for such subject matter being
    given below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for coherer type resistors.

    2+,     for strain gauge type resistors.

    7+,     for resistors whose resistance value is temperature compensated.

    12,     for resistors which are actuated by a magnet through a housing or
    partition.

    13+,    for mechanically adjustable resistors which are combined with
    structure which senses a change in a condition and converts this change
    into a mechanical adjustment which is applied to the mechanically
    adjustable resistor to effect a mechanical adjustment therein with a
    resulting change in resistance value; or for resistors which have the
    property of changing their resistance value in response to changes in
    associated conditions to which the resistors are subjected, such as
    subclasses 15+, for photoconductive resistors; subclasses 20+, for current
    and/or voltage responsive resistors; subclasses 25+, for resistors
    responsive to ambient temperature; subclass 32, for resistors responsive to
    a magnetic field or compass; subclass 33, for resistors with a float
    actuator; subclasses 34+ for resistors with gas, vapor, or moisture
    absorbing or collecting; subclasses 36+ for fluid or gas pressure actuated
    resistors; subclasses 43+ for resistors gravity stabilized or with an
    inertia actuator; and subclass 47 for force actuated resistors.

    60,     for resistors with capacitance reducing means.

    61+,    for resistors with inductance reducing means.

    64+,    for resistors with electrical shielding.

    66,     for ignition interference suppressor type resistors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, for electrical circuit
    makers and breakers, per se.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 293+
    and subclasses 364+ for regulation systems including a resistor and
    subclasses 340+ for regulation systems including tap changing.

    329,    Demodulators, subclass 371 for a coherer type amplitude modulation
    demodulator.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 81 for attenuators,
    which may be variable.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses, for adjustable inductor
    devices.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 277+ for
    variable capacitors.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses, for electrical
    connectors.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 120+ and 150.1+ for radio
    transmitter and receiver tuners.


CLS 338/69
TXT Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein a musical instrument playing key
    (usually an organ key) is linked with the mechanically adjustable or
    variable part of the resistor to change the resistance value in accordance
    with the depression of the key.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153,    for mechanically variable resistors operated by a pedal or treadle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, subclasses 1.01+ for electrical tone generation and music
    instruments with electric translating devices.


CLS 338/70
TXT Subject matter under subclass 68 including a lamp socket together with a
    resistor as defined in subclass 68 positioned within the socket, or
    directly on and in engagement with the surface of the socket, and in
    circuit with the terminal or terminals of the socket.

    (1)     Note.  The lamp socket to receive the lamp is usually of the type
    classifiable as such in Class 439, Electrical Connectors.  Usually when
    structure in addition to that classified in Class 439 is recited, as
    relating to Class 240, Illumination, or to Class 340, Communications:
    Electrical, classification is not in this subclass (70) or in Class 439,
    but in the more comprehensive subclass. See the Search Notes under Classes
    313 and 439 for a statement of the classification lines between Class 439
    and other classes relating to lamp bases and sockets.  The resistor must be
    intimate relationship with the socket as being contained therein or in a
    surface recess for classification in this subclass (70).  A mere electrical
    connection between the resistor and the socket or a remote mounting of the
    resistor on the socket is not sufficient for classification here.
    Subclasses 315+, provides for resistors with mounting or supporting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184     and 199, for mechanically variable resistors in housings generally.

    215,    for resistors generally with a switch.

    219,    for resistors generally mounted in or on a lamp socket.  See also
    the Search Notes under this subclass for a more extended field of search
    for this subject matter.

    220,    for resistors generally in a detachable electrical connector.


CLS 338/71
TXT Subject matter under subclass 70 wherein the resistor includes (1) two or
    more separate and distinct masses, including grains, of resistance
    material, or (2) a distinct and separate mass of resistance material and a
    mass of conductive material are in exterior surface engagement with one
    another, together with means for varying the surface engagement pressure to
    vary the contact resistance between the engaging surfaces, i.e., the
    resistor is of the type defined in subclass 99 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99+,    for mechanically variable resistors whose surfaces are pressed
    together generally.  See also the Search Notes under this subclass for
    field of search for this subject matter.


CLS 338/72
TXT Subject matter under subclass 70 wherein the resistor, a plurality of
    otherwise electrically separate conducting structures, are each
    electrically connected to an elongated resistance element along its length,
    and a terminal movable among the conducting structures to constitute a
    contact on such structures as defined in subclass 185 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185+,   for mechanically variable resistors generally with an intervening
    connector between the contact and element, e.g., taps.  See also the Search
    Notes under this subclass for a field of search for resistors of this type.


CLS 338/73
TXT Subject matter under subclass 70 wherein the resistor, a movable contact,
    pivots about an axis to slide in a circular path along a resistance element
    as defined in subclasses 162+ below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162+,   for mechanically variable resistors where the contact is angularly
    slidable on a resistance element.  See also the Search Notes under this
    subclass for a field of search for resistors of this type.


CLS 338/74
TXT Subject matter under subclass 70 wherein in the resistor, the contact
    terminal, moves in a straight path over or along a resistance element, the
    contact terminal remaining in contact with the element as it slides along
    as defined in subclass 176 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176,    for mechanically variable resistors wherein the contact is
    rectilinearly slidable over the resistance element. See also the Search
    Notes under this subclass for a field of search for resistors of this type.


CLS 338/75
TXT Subject matter under subclass 68 including structure, such as a wiper, for
    removing dirt or other material from the resistor, as from the contacting
    surfaces of the resistance element or the contact movable thereon.


CLS 338/76
TXT Subject matter under subclass 68 including two or more physically similar
    resistors of different resistance values together with means effecting or
    permitting a change or substitution of one resistor for the other in an
    associated electrical circuit, i.e., both terminals of one resistor are
    separable from the electrical circuit and the terminals of the other
    resistor are connected in the electrical circuit in a corresponding
    position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for plug boxes.

    185+,   for mechanically variable resistors of the tap type.

    200+,   for mechanically variable resistors   generally including a switch
    for effecting a change in the resistance value.


CLS 338/77
TXT Subject matter under subclass 68 including a base or panel having a single
    resistor or a plurality of resistors mounted thereon or in a box or
    housing, the panel constituting a cover therefor, together with terminals
    mounted on the panel and electrically connected along the length of a
    single resistor or to the ends of the plurality of resistors, the terminals
    having openings therein or providing openings; and including also terminal
    plugs adapted to be removably inserted in the openings to short-circuit
    respective resistors or portions thereof, or to connect the resistors in
    series or parallel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92+,    for mechanically variable resistors including means adjustably
    short-circuiting the resistance element.

    185+,   for tap type mechanically variable resistors.

    200+,   for a mechanically adjustable resistor combined with a switch.

    215,    for resistors generally combined with switches.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 50+ for boxes
    and housings generally for electrical devices.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 627+ for
    distribution or control panel board.


CLS 338/78
TXT Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein a resistor or plurality of
    resistors as there defined is combined with or includes an electric switch
    in a common electric circuit, the switch being effective to reverse the
    electric current at the output terminals of the resistor with respect to
    the current applied at the input terminals.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the resistor and switch have a common actuator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   for mechanically adjustable or variable resistors combined with
    switches in general.  See the Search Notes under this subclass for a more
    extended field of search for a variable resistor combined with a switch.

    215,    for a fixed resistor combined with a switch.  See also the Search
    Notes under this subclass for a more extended field of search for this
    combination.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 293+ and 300 for
    motor reversing systems which involve reversal of the armature or field
    current.


CLS 338/79
TXT Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein the resistance element is wound on
    a core, and is adapted to be unwound therefrom as on a second core to
    change the value of the resistance between terminals.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of subject matter here include a resistor whose
    element is wound from an insulating core to a conducting core, the
    conducting core short-circuiting the portion of the resistance element
    wound thereon; and a resistor whose element is wound between two cores with
    a contact slidably engaging the portion of the element between cores.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150+,   for variable resistors in which the resistance element moves.

    296+,   for helical or wound resistors generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 370+ for a general use
    reeling device which unwinds and rewinds the same material.

    334,    Tuners, subclass 38 for a tuner having a reactance element which is
    adapted to be wound or unwound from a core or support.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 15 for inductor devices with coil
    winding and/or unwinding.


CLS 338/80
TXT Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein the resistance element is a
    liquid, the resistance value of the resistor being changed as by modifying
    the dimensions of the element or the spacing between terminals or
    electrodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for a resistor with a liquid element whose resistance value is
    responsive to ambient temperature; subclass 38 for such resistors whose
    resistance value is responsive to fluid or gas pressure; and subclass 44
    for such resistors which are gravity stabilized or with an inertia actuator.

    56,     for a resistor whose element constitutes a circulating cooling
    medium.

    88,     for penetrating type resistors with a powdered resistance element.

    100,    for compressible type resistors with a granular resistance element.

    114+,   for deformable variable resistors. 156, for variable resistors
    having a liquid contact movable over the resistance element.

    222,    for a resistor generally with a liquid element.

    223,    for a resistor generally with a granular or powdered element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 296
    for regulation systems having a liquid resistor.

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses for demodulator with liquid
    element.


CLS 338/81
TXT Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein one of the terminals or electrodes
    is removable from the liquid resistance element, as by raising the
    electrode from the liquid element or by lowering the level of the liquid
    element from the electrode, thus to make and break the circuit between the
    liquid element and the electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173,    for a resistor whose contact is angularly slidable on the
    resistance element and separable from the element; and subclass 178 for
    such resistors whose contacts are rectilinearly slidable.

    198,    for a mechanically variable resistor with a switch actuated by the
    resistor actuator.


CLS 338/82
TXT Subject matter under subclass 80 including an insulating barrier or curtain
    which is positioned transversely to the current path through the liquid
    element between the electrodes, the barrier or curtain being adjustable in
    and out of this current path to change the effective length of the current
    path between the electrodes and/or the effective cross-sectional area of
    the path between the electrodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for deformable resistors generally.


CLS 338/83
TXT Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein one of the terminals or electrodes
    in the liquid element is movable with respect to another electrode or
    terminal in the element to effect a change in the distance between the
    electrodes to change the resistance value between the terminals.

    (1)     Note.  For classification here there must be a change in the
    physical spacing of the electrodes.  A mere change in the effective spacing
    of the electrodes in the resistance element as by adjusting the submersion
    of tapered electrodes in the liquid resistor is not classified here, but in
    subclass 86 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86,     for a liquid resistor whose liquid level is adjustable on the
    electrodes. See also (1) Note above.

    87+,    for a mechanically variable resistor whose contact is adjustably
    inserted into a nonliquid resistance element.

    137,    for resistors wherein a plurality of contacts are movable over a
    single resistance element.


CLS 338/84
TXT Subject matter under subclass 83 wherein a plurality of resistors as there
    defined have an electrode of one mechanically linked with a corresponding
    electrode of another so that the two electrodes move in unison through the
    liquid element of the respective resistors; or wherein a single resistor as
    there defined includes a plurality of electrodes which are mechanically
    linked together to move in unison through the liquid element of the
    resistor toward and away from another electrode of the resistor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130+,   plural ganged resistors of the type where a contact moves over the
    length of the resistance element.


CLS 338/85
TXT Subject matter under subclass 83 wherein at least one of the electrodes is
    rotatable to effect the change in distance through the liquid element to
    another electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for a resistor whose value changes in response to a magnetic field.


CLS 338/86
TXT Subject matter under subclass 80 including structure for raising or
    lowering the level of the liquid resistance element with respect to the
    electrodes inserted in the liquid element; or including structure for
    moving or permitting movement of the electrodes up and down in the liquid
    element.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes resistors whose effective electrical
    length between electrodes is varied by adjusting the submersion of
    electrodes in a liquid.  See (1) Note under subclass 83 above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for float actuated resistors.

    55+,    for resistors with cooling liquid circulation.

    83+,    for resistors whose electrodes are relatively movable in the liquid
    element to change the distance between the electrodes through the element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 296 for
    regulation systems having a liquid resistor.


CLS 338/87
TXT Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein a contact extends into the
    resistance element and is movable therein to vary the spacing through this
    resistance element between this contact and another contact, thus to vary
    the resistance value between the contacts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80+,    for mechanically variable liquid resistors.

    92+,    for mechanically variable resistors whose resistance elements are
    adjustably short-circuited.

    322,    for resistors with a driven or pressed terminal.

    331,    for resistors generally whose element surrounds one of the terminal.


CLS 338/88
TXT Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein the resistance element is granular
    or powdered, the contact usually being formed as a pin or other elongated
    object to penetrate into the powdered or granular element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    for compressible type granular resistors.

    223+,   for resistors generally with granular or powdered elements.


CLS 338/89
TXT Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein, in the variable resistor, a
    definite mathematical relationship exists between movement of the resistor
    actuating means and the value of the resistance appearing across the
    resistor terminals.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of the relationship appearing in this subclass are
    sinusoidal and logarithmic.  A mere tapered variable resistor is not
    classified here, but in subclasses 138+ below, unless the definite
    mathematic relationship that the taper produces is recited in the
    specification or claims.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135,    for mechanically variable resistors with zero setting or phasing.

    138+,   for mechanically variable resistors having a tapered element.  See
    also (1) Note, above.

    217+,   for tapered resistors generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 61+ for resistors having a mathematical
    characteristic in a calculator.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 298
    and 354 for periodically varied impedance systems.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 81 for attenuators.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 224 for inductors having nonuniformly
    spaced turns.  See also the Search Notes thereunder for a more extensive
    search for this subject matter.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 800+
    for resistors having a mathematical characteristic in an electrical
    calculator.


CLS 338/90
TXT Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the resistance element is formed
    as a surface having significant width as well as length, together with a
    contactor relatively movable not only lengthwise but crosswise over the
    surface of the element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    for electric motor driven resistors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclass 140 for impedance type
    converters.


CLS 338/91
TXT Subject matter under subclass 89 including a mechanical linkage in or an
    arrangement of the resistor actuator producing some peculiar operating
    characteristic to contribute to the mathematical relationship.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of subject matter present here include a cam and
    follower linkage or an eccentric mounted contact movable over an annular
    resistance element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    for electric motor driven resistors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclass 140 for impedance type
    converters.


CLS 338/92
TXT Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein the resistor includes an elongated
    element together with conductive structure connected at spaced points being
    adjustable along the length of the element; or wherein the resistance
    element is bent upon itself so that two points along the length of the
    element adjustably contact electrically to effectively eliminate
    electrically the portion between the two points from the electric path
    through the resistor, i.e., a variable portion of the resistance element is
    shunted; or wherein a conducting mass such as a liquid is adjustably
    connected along the length of the element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for adjustable resistors of the plug box type.

    79,     for mechanically variable resistors with element winding and/or
    unwinding.

    87+,    for adjustable resistors wherein a contact adjustably penetrates
    into the element.

    118+,   for mechanically variable resistors wherein a contact moves over
    the length of the resistance element; and especially subclass 120, for such
    resistors whose element is adjustably shunted by an additional resistor;
    and subclasses 122+, for such resistors with coarse and fine resistance
    elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 353, for
    regulation systems.


CLS 338/93
TXT Subject matter under subclass 92 in which the resistance element is formed
    as a compressible spring (usually helical), the convolutions of the spring
    coming into contact upon compression to short-circuit at least a portion of
    the length of the resistance element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99+,    for compressible type variable resistors generally.

    114+,   for mechanically variable resistors whose elements are deformable.


CLS 338/94
TXT Subject matter under subclass 92 including a conducting liquid as the
    resistance element short circuiting means, a portion of the elongated
    resistance element being adjustably inserted in the conducting liquid to
    short-circuit the portion of the element so inserted, or the conducting
    liquid being adjustable along any intervening structure, if present, such
    as taps.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     for a mechanically variable resistor whose element is a liquid.

    151,    for a mechanically variable resistor whose element moves with
    reference to a liquid contact.

    156,    for a mechanically variable resistor having a liquid contact
    adjustable along the length of the resistance element.

    222,    for liquid resistors generally.


CLS 338/95
TXT Subject matter under subclass 92 wherein a plurality of otherwise
    electrically separate conducting structures are each electrically connected
    to the resistance element along its length, the short circuiting structure
    being adjustably connected between these conducting structures.

    (1)     Note.  The separate conducting structures themselves may be pressed
    into contact with one another to form in themselves the short circuiting
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94,     for a tap type resistor whose element is adjustably short-circuited
    by a conducting liquid.

    185,    for variable resistors of the tap type.

    198     and 200+, for variable resistors with switches.


CLS 338/96
TXT Subject matter under subclass 92 wherein a flexible elongated conductor has
    an end electrically connected to a terminal of the resistance element or to
    the element itself at a point along its length, the conductor being adapted
    to be pressed into engagement with and along the length of the elongated
    conductor, the engaging portion extending from the connection to the
    resistance element and progressively increasing as the strip is pressed
    into contact with the element, whereby an adjustable length of the element
    is shunted by the conductor.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the flexible contact or the element has a curved
    surface to space adjacent portions of the contact and element until pressed
    into engagement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95,     for a tap type resistor wherein a flexible short circuiting contact
    strip progressively engages along the taps of a resistance element.

    154,    for a mechanically variable resistor where a flexible conductive
    strip separates the resistance element and the contact movable along the
    element.

    155,    for a variable resistor with a contact which rocks along the
    resistance element.

    157,    for a variable resistor with a contact which rolls along the
    element.


CLS 338/97
TXT Subject matter under subclass 92 wherein the resistance element has
    portions extending in parallel spaced relationship and a conducting bridge
    extending between the parallel portions being movable lengthwise therealong.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the bridging element shorts a single
    resistance element, while in subclasses 125+ a plurality of resistance
    elements are connected by a unitary movable bridge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125+,   for variable resistors wherein a plurality of resistance elements
    are bridged by a unitary movable contact. See also (1) Note above.


CLS 338/98
TXT Subject matter under subclass 68 including structure associated with the
    mechanically adjustable portion of the resistor for retarding the
    adjustment of the resistor over at least a portion of the adjustment range,
    or for eliminating or reducing vibration.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of motion damping means are fans, speed responsive
    brakes, or damping liquids.  The subject matter of this subclass includes
    structure for slowing down the desired mechanical adjustments of the
    resistor as to prevent hunting of the resistor. Structure for eliminating
    or offsetting or otherwise controlling the effect of vibration in
    photo-conductive resistors is in subclass 16 above, while subclasses 315+
    provides for resistors generally with anti-vibration supports.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for photo-conductive resistors with vibration control.  See also
    (1) Note above.

    43+,    for resistors responsive to a gravity stabilized or inertia device.

    80+,    for mechanically variable resistors with a liquid element.

    171,    for variable resistors with a contact slidable on the resistance
    element, the contact having plural element engaging portions, which may
    reduce the effect of vibration.

    315+,   for resistors generally with anti-vibration supports.  See also (1)
    Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclass 86 for fluid and mechanical internal resistance
    brakes including dashpots.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 34 for
    electrical switches with dashpots.


CLS 338/99
TXT Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein (1) two or more separate and
    distinct masses, including grains, of resistance material or (2) a distinct
    and separate mass of resistance material and a mass of conductive material
    are in exterior surface engagement with one another, together with means
    for varying the surface engagement pressure to vary the contact resistance
    between the engaging surfaces.

    (1)     Note.  The masses may be layers of solids, or granular, or fibrous
    such as steel wool, or coated materials.  The conducting mass may be a
    terminal.

    (2)     Note.  In this subclass the resistance value is varied by the
    change in contact pressure between the two masses.  While in subclasses 2+
    and 114+ the cross section area or length of the element itself may be
    changed by compression to vary the resistance value.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for coherer type resistors.

    47+,    for force actuated resistors.

    51+,    for resistors with heat dissipating projections, such as vanes.

    70+,    for a lamp socket having a compressible type resistor therein or
    thereon.

    93,     for a compressible spring type variable resistor whose element is
    adjustably short-circuited.

    114+,   for a mechanically variable resistor whose element is deformable to
    vary the resistance value.  See also (2) Note above.

    204+,   for fixed resistance elements formed of layers piled or stacked
    between terminals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 295 for
    regulation systems including a pressure variable resistor.


CLS 338/100
TXT Subject matter under subclass 99 wherein at least one of the resistance
    masses is granular or powdered in form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for coherer type resistors.

    88,     for penetrating type resistors having granular resistance elements.

    199,    for a mechanically adjustable resistor generally with a casing or
    housing.

    223+,   for granular or powdered resistors generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 61 for carbon microphone type amplifiers.


CLS 338/101
TXT Subject matter under subclass 99 wherein two or more masses of resistance
    material are formed as wafers or discs and are disposed on top of one
    another to form a pile, the engagement pressure being applied axially along
    the pile.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    for a mechanically variable resistor generally whose resistance
    element is formed as a pile.


CLS 338/102
TXT Subject matter under subclass 101 together with a contact which is
    adjustable along the length of the pile to permit a varying portion of the
    pile to be connected in the circuit associated with the contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for plural separate diverse resistors.

    118+,   for a mechanically variable resistor generally having a contact
    electrically adjustable over the length of the resistance element.


CLS 338/103
TXT Subject matter under subclass 101 including an electromechanical transducer
    such as an electric motor or a magnetic relay, the moving part such as the
    armature of the transducer being mechanically linked with the piles to
    compress or to release the pressure on the piles upon application of
    electric energy to the transducer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    for mechanically variable resistors generally operated by an
    electric motor or relay.


CLS 338/104
TXT Subject matter under subclass 103 including two electromagnetic operators
    each applying a positive compressive or releasing force to a respective end
    of the pile, or a linkage connected with a single electromagnetic operator
    for applying a positive compressive or releasing force to both ends of the
    pile.

    (1)     Note.  For classification here an actual force must be applied to
    both ends of the pile.  A mere abutment at one end which exerts a holding
    force in opposition to the force applied at the other end by the relay or
    motor is not sufficient for classification here, but elsewhere under
    subclass 103.


CLS 338/105
TXT Subject matter under subclass 103 including a biasing spring usually disc
    shaped coaxially disposed at an end of the pile between the pile and the
    electromagnetic operator for exerting a compressive or releasing force on
    the pile in opposition to the force applied by the electromagnetic operator.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter here usually includes a relay whose
    armature acts to compress or release the pile, the diaphragm spring being
    coaxially disposed between the armature and the pile with its center acting
    on the pile and supported entirely around the periphery or at, at least
    three peripheral points.


CLS 338/106
TXT Subject matter under subclass 103 including structure such as a screw for
    applying a compressive force on the pile in addition to that applied by the
    electromagnetic operator, or on the spring, if any, which exerts a pressure
    releasing force on the pile in opposition to that exerted by the
    electromagnetic operator, the structure being adjustable as to compensate
    for surface wear in the piles during use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109,    for compressible pile type resistors generally with an initial
    pressure adjustment.


CLS 338/107
TXT Subject matter under subclass 101 including a retaining or positioning
    magnet for locking or holding the pressure controlling means in a
    predetermined position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12+,    for resistors wherein a movable magnet actuates the resistor
    through a housing or partition.

    103+,   for compressible pile type resistors whose pressure controlling
    means are actuated by an electromagnet.

    189,    for tap type variable resistors including a magnetic holder for the
    controller arm.


CLS 338/108
TXT Subject matter under subclass 101 including structure mechanically linked
    with the means for varying the engagement pressure of the contact surfaces,
    and peculiarly adapted for operation by the foot or knee, as by being
    operable by a push, and including structure such as a spring for returning
    to the initial position upon removal of the pushing force, and including a
    portion shaped to facilitate engagement with the foot as by being shaped
    like the sole of the foot or having a substantially flat foot engaging
    surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153,    for resistors having a contact movable along an elongated resistor,
    and operated by a pedal or treadle.

    215,    for a fixed resistor and switch combination which may be operated
    by a pedal or treadle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 512+ for foot operated
    linkage systems; subclass 515 for knee operated linkage systems; and
    subclasses 560+ for pedal type levers.


CLS 338/109
TXT Subject matter under subclass 101 including structure such as a screw for
    applying a compressive force to the pile in addition to that applied by the
    structure normally varying the resistance value of the pile as by
    compression, the first mentioned structure being adjustable as to
    compensate for surface wear in the piles during use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    for pile type resistors with an electromagnetic operator and
    including an initial pressure adjustment.


CLS 338/110
TXT Subject matter under subclass 101 including a switch, which is operatively
    linked with the means for varying the engagement pressure of the engaging
    surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198,    for variable resistors generally and a switch actuated by the
    resistor actuator.

    200+,   for variable resistors combined with switches generally.


CLS 338/111
TXT Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein a layer or coating of conducting
    material is provided between two adjacent wafers of the pile.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205,    for a resistor whose element is piled or stacked in layers between
    terminals with an intervening conducting layer.


CLS 338/112
TXT Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein normally only a portion of the
    facing surfaces of the pile discs are in actual physical contact, the discs
    being flexible or resilient, the means for varying the engagement pressure
    and when actuated increasing and/or decreasing the portion of the facing
    surfaces in actual physical contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     for a mechanically variable resistor having a contact strip
    progressively pressed along the resistance element.

    114+,   for mechanically variable resistors whose elements are deformable.


CLS 338/113
TXT Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein the means for varying the contact
    pressure includes a resilient spring in the linkage which transmits the
    pressure to the pile or on the end of the pile opposite to that where the
    compressive force is applied, the spring serving to progressively apply the
    contact pressure to the pile.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for pile type compressible resistors which are operated by a pedal
    or treadle, and which include a resilient spring in the pressure applying
    linkage.


CLS 338/114
TXT Subject matter under subclass 68 including a flexible or deformable unitary
    mass of resistance material together with structure for modifying the shape
    of the mass, as by increasing the length or reducing the cross sectional
    area of the mass between terminals, to change the resistance value between
    the terminals.

    (1)     Note.  The mass may be granular. However, where the resistance
    value is changed by changing the surface pressure between the grains
    classification is in subclass 100 above.  In this subclass (114) the shape
    of the resistance element itself is changed to modify the resistance value
    between the terminals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for strain gauge type resistors.

    99+,    for variable resistors whose surfaces are presses together,
    variation in the pressure changing the resistance value between terminals.


CLS 338/115
TXT Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein the element is formed of a
    plurality of layers of resistance material which layers are piled or
    stacked transversely to the direction of current flow through the
    resistance element, i.e., so that the current flowing through the
    resistance element will flow from pile to pile.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the resistance element is formed of a plurality of
    plates or disks of resistance material which are connected together
    directly or through other plates or disks of conductive material.  The
    plates or disks are piled transversely along the length of the element, as
    between the resistance terminals or transversely to the path of movement of
    a contact moving along the resistance element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7+,     for a pile type resistor whose resistance value is temperature
    compensated.

    52,     for a pile type resistor with heat dissipating projections.

    101+,   for pile type compressible resistors.

    204+,   for fixed resistors whose elements are formed in layers piled or
    stacked between terminals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 117+ for
    high voltage dissipators, per se, wherein the discharge path may be
    resistive disks or buttons.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for a plural layer stock material product, note subclass 411 for a plural
    layer material, one layer being of resistive material and one or more
    layers being conductive, so as to constitute one or more terminals; see
    especially subclasses 457+.

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, Etc.),
    subclass 117 for a coated or impregnated fabric which is electrical
    insulating or conductivity reducing.


CLS 338/116
TXT Subject matter under subclass 68 including an electromechanical transducer
    such as a electric motor or a magnetic relay, the moving part such as the
    armature of the transducer being mechanically linked with a mechanically
    moving operating part of the resistor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12+,    for a resistor actuated by a movable magnet through a housing or
    partition.

    32,     for a resistor whose resistance value is responsive to a magnetic
    field.

    36+,    for resistors which are fluid or gas pressure actuated, and
    including variable resistors operated by fluid motors.

    98,     for a mechanically variable resistor with a motion dampening means
    such as a dashpot.

    103+,   for a pile type compressible resistor with an electromagnetic
    operator; and subclass 107 for such resistors with an electromagnetic
    holder.

    189,    for a mechanically variable resistor of the tap type including a
    magnetic holder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, appropriate subclasses,
    for electric motor structure.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses, for
    motor control systems including variable resistors.

    334,    Tuners, subclasses 17+ for tuner units with an electromagnetic
    operator.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 209+ for magnets and electromagnets.


CLS 338/117
TXT Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein a resistor whose element is
    usually a cylindrical helix presents a cylindrical helical contact portion
    of one turn or less on the surface of the element or a cylindrical helical
    row of taps of one turn or less electrically connected to the resistance
    element to a linear contacting member or linear row of taps extending
    alongside and coextensive with the helical contact portion or row of taps,
    the helical contact portion or row of taps being rotatable to move the
    point of contact along the length of the helical contact portion or helical
    row of taps and along the length of the linear contacting member or linear
    row of taps; or wherein a resistor whose element is usually a cylindrical
    helix presents a linear contact portion on its surface or a linear row of
    taps electrically connected with the resistance element to a cylindrical
    helical contacting member of one turn or less or to a cylindrical helical
    row of taps of one turn or less or to an elongated flat twisted contacting
    member, the twist being through 1805  or less, the contacting member or
    helical row of taps extending alongside and coextensive with the linear
    contact portion or linear row of taps, and being rotatable to move the
    point of contact along the length of the linear contact portion or linear
    row of taps and along the length of the helical or twisted contacting
    member or along the length of the helical row of taps.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the point of contact moves along the length
    of both contacting members upon rotation of one of the members, while in
    subclasses 143+ below the point of contact moves along one of the members,
    namely the helical resistance element and remains fixed on the other
    member, namely the contact upon rotation of the helical resistance or the
    contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143+,   for a variable resistor whose contact moves along the turns of a
    helical resistance element.  See also (1) Note above.


CLS 338/118
TXT Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein the resistance element has an
    elongated shape, or a plurality of resistance elements are connected in a
    series, which shape or series may be straight or curved, together with at
    least two conducting terminals, electrically connected to the element by
    direct connection or through one of a plurality of intervening connecting
    structures each electrically connected to the element or series of elements
    along the length, one of the terminals forming a contact for the element
    and being movable along the length of the element or selectively among the
    plurality of intervening connecting structures to constitute a contact or
    contacts for the element or intervening portion to enable an adjustable
    portion of the length of the element or elements to be electrically
    connected between the terminals, the resistance value of the portion thus
    depending on the position or setting of the movable terminal or terminals.

    (1)     Note.  The path of motion of the terminals need not be fixed for
    classification here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70+,    for a mechanically variable resistor in or on a lamp socket.

    117,    for mechanically variable resistors having slidable helical and
    linear contacts.

    200+,   for a variable resistor including a switch.

    202,    for movable contact structure for variable resistors and not
    otherwise classifiable.

    215,    for a fixed resistor together with a switch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, especially subclasses 4,
    6+ and 16 for multiple circuit control switches with movable contacts.


CLS 338/119
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 including a light which is turned on and
    off in accordance with the adjustment of the movable contact, or whose
    intensity of illumination is dependent on the adjustment of the movable
    contact.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the subject matter here includes a switching
    rheostat, the light indicating whether the switch is open or closed; or a
    rheostat wherein the illumination of the light varies with the setting of
    the rheostat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196,    for mechanically variable resistors generally with a resistor
    actuator position indicator or with a resistor setting indicator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 252 for pilot lights
    responsive to the condition of electrical apparatus; and subclasses 366+
    for visual electric signaling generally.


CLS 338/120
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein an additional resistor is
    connected in parallel with a portion (less than the entire length of the
    resistance element), at least one of the connections to the resistance
    element being adjustable along the length of the element and/or the
    resistor being adjustable in resistance value.

    (1)     Note.  The purpose of this shunting resistor is to modify the
    resistance value along the length of the element to secure particular
    relationships (linear or nonlinear) between the movement of the contact and
    the resistance value appearing across the resistor terminals.  See
    subclasses 89+ for adjustable resistors where a definite mathematical
    relationship exists between the resistance value across the resistor
    terminals and movement of the contact, and subclass 121 for adjustable
    resistors of the movable contact type with structure for securing a linear
    relationship between the resistance value across the resistor terminals and
    movement of the contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89+,    see (1) Note above.

    121,    see (1) Note above.


CLS 338/121
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 including structure which insures the
    same change in resistance value across the terminals with a given change or
    movement of the resistor actuator throughout the full operating range of
    the resistor, i.e., a straight line relationship exists between the value
    of the resistance across the terminals and the movement of the resistor
    actuator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89+,    for mechanically variable resistors wherein a definite mathematical
    relationship exists between the value of the resistance across the
    terminals and movement of the resistor actuator.

    120,    for a resistor with a contact electrically adjustable over the
    length of theelement, together with an additional resistor which shunts the
    element at adjustably spaced points, which may connect for nonlinearities.

    135,    for a variable resistor of the movable contact type having a zero
    setting or phasing means.

    138+,   for tapered resistors of the mechanically variable type.

    195,    for resistors varied by removing or adding material which may give
    a linear effect.

    202,    for movable contact structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 224 for inductors having nonuniform
    spaced turns which may give a linear effect.


CLS 338/122
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 including two electrically connected
    resistance elements or a single element having relatively small and large
    resistance values per unit length along the element or elements, so that
    greater adjustment of a contact over one of the elements or portions
    thereof will be necessary to effect a given change in resistance value
    across the resistor terminals.

    (1)     Note.  Vernier actuating structure for the movable contact is not
    classified here, but in subclasses 181 and 202 below.

    (2)     Note.  The contact may move over one or both resistance elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131,    for ganged mechanically adjustable resistors with resistance
    elements individually adjustable.

    181,    for a variable resistor with a contact rectilinearly slidable, the
    contact being operated by a screw as a fine adjustment.  See also (1) Note
    above.

    202,    for movable contact structure for variable resistors, the structure
    including a vernier mechanism.  See also (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 10+ for radio tuner type
    shaft operators.


CLS 338/123
TXT Subject matter under subclass 122 wherein the two resistance elements have
    each a contact movable thereon, the contacts being electrically connected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    for plural resistors individually operated by concentric shafts.


CLS 338/124
TXT Subject matter under subclass 123 wherein some mechanical interlinking
    exists between the movable contacts, as for example to cause the contacts
    to move together yet permitting a limited independent vernier adjustment of
    the fine contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131,    for plural mechanically variable resistors whose contacts are
    ganged, and with additional structure for adjusting individually the
    resistance values of the respective elements of the resistors.


CLS 338/125
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein a movable contact structure
    contacts a plurality of resistance elements or a plurality of series of
    taps or other contact structure electrically connected with the respective
    resistance elements, to provide a conducting bridge between the elements
    where contact is made.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter here is usually a single contact bar slidable
    over the surface of two resistance elements to change the resistance value
    between terminals at the ends of the respective elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92+,    for a variable resistor with an element short circuiting means.

    130+,   for plural resistors having ganged resistor actuators.


CLS 338/126
TXT Subject matter under subclass 125 wherein the elements or the series of
    taps or other structure connected to the elements are arranged in parallel,
    i.e., the spacing therebetween is uniform.

    (1)     Note.  Two circular arrangements of the elements or taps with
    uniform spacing are considered parallel for classification here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97,     for a mechanically variable resistor wherein portions of the
    resistance element are in parallel and a unitary short circuiting bridge
    movable thereon. See also (1) Note under subclass 97.


CLS 338/127
TXT Subject matter under subclass 125 wherein the resistance elements or series
    of taps or other structure connected to the elements have a circular shape
    or arrangement, and lie in a common circle with the bridging contact
    extending across the circle and rotating about the center.


CLS 338/128
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 including two or more resistors, each
    being of the type defined in subclass 118.

    (1)     Note.  For classification here each resistor must include at least
    an element and movable contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for a resistor whose resistance value is responsive to a plurality
    of conditions.

    48,     for plural diverse resistors there defined.

    76,     for plural interchangeable resistors of different resistance value.

    84,     for plural ganged liquid resistors.

    122+,   for resistors with coarse and fine resistance elements.

    137+,   for a variable resistor with a single element and a plurality of
    contacts.

    320,    for plural resistors generally with a support.  See also the Search
    Notes under this subclass for a more extensive field of search for plural
    resistors.


CLS 338/129
TXT Subject matter under subclass 128 including structure which prevents
    operation of one resistor until a second resistor has completed a definite
    cycle of operation, i.e., the first resistor is operated after the
    operating cycle of the second resistor or is placed in condition to be
    operated after the opening cycle of the second resistor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    for resistors with coarse and fine elements such as vernier.

    130+,   for ganged mechanically adjustable resistors.


CLS 338/130
TXT Subject matter under subclass 128 wherein the contact structures, or the
    resistance elements if movable, of the respective resistors are
    mechanically interlinked to move in unison to adjust together the
    respective contacts over the length of the resistance elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     for plural ganged liquid resistors.

    198,    for a variable resistor and a switch  actuated by the resistor
    actuator.


CLS 338/131
TXT Subject matter under subclass 130, wherein the ganged resistors include
    structure for changing the value of the resistance presented across the
    individual resistor terminals in addition to the change in resistance value
    resulting from operation of the ganged structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135,    for a mechanically variable resistor with zero setting or phasing.


CLS 338/132
TXT Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein the resistors are of the
    angularly adjustable contact type, and are disposed behind one another with
    the contact or element rotation occurring about a common axis; together
    with an actuating shaft extending along this axis, or with the operating
    shafts of the respective resistors extending along this axis and including
    coupling structure to enable these shafts to rotate in unison.


CLS 338/133
TXT Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein the contact, or the element if
    movable, of each resistor moves in a substantially straight line, each
    resistor usually being secured to or actuated by a linearly moving rod or
    shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158,    for a mechanically adjustable resistor including a contact which
    rolls rectilinearly over the resistance element or taps.

    176+,   for a mechanically adjustable resistor including a contact slidable
    rectilinearly over the resistance element.

    194,    for a mechanically adjustable resistor of the tap type whose
    contact is rectilinearly movable.


CLS 338/134
TXT Subject matter under subclass 128 wherein the resistors are arranged in
    tandem and including shafts which operate the respective resistors, the
    shafts having a common axis and being at least partly coextensive to
    surround one another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123+,   for a resistor having coarse and fine elements, and plural contacts
    indivi-dually operated by concentric shafts.


CLS 338/135
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 including structure which permits movement
    or adjustment of the contact relative to the resistance element in addition
    to the movement or adjustment by the normal adjusting mechanism, to
    establish a desired preliminary setting of the contact relative to the
    resistance element, the structure maintaining the selected positioning or
    adjustment during operation of the normal contact moving mechanism; or
    including an adjustable stop or abutment for setting the relative position
    of the contact on the resistance element to provide zero resistance value
    between the contact and the end of the element.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass usually includes structure which permits
    adjustment of the resistance element relative to its support, or adjustment
    of the contact with respect of its operating mechanism to establish a
    desired preliminary setting between the contact and the resistance element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for a resistor with a contact adjustable over the length of the
    resistance element, wherein an additional resistor adjustably shunts part
    of the resistance element; subclass 121 for movable contact resistors with
    a nonlinearity correction; and subclass 131 for a ganged plurality of
    movable contact resistors which are individually adjustable.


CLS 338/136
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein the resistor element has
    adjustable movable contact taps or terminals which are adapted to be moved
    along the resistance element and clamped as by a screw in direct contact
    therewith so that any value of the element resistance may be obtained.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter generally found in this subclass consists of
    a fixed resistor with tap contacts that embrace the resistor and are screw
    clamped in position.  For classification here the contact must be clamped
    directly to the element.  Structure generally for setting the resistance
    element is classified elsewhere under subclass 118, such as subclass 182,
    for rectilinearly slidable resistance contacts with a lock.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for variable resistors of the plug box type.

    92+,    for variable resistors having adjustable short circuit means.

    182,    for variable resistors with a rectilinearly slidable contact
    including a lock.  See also (1) Note above.

    323,    for resistors having terminals tapped along the element.

    325,    for resistors with three or more terminals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 150 for inductors having taps for
    varying the effective inductance.


CLS 338/137
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 including a plurality of electrically
    separate contacts movable over the same resistance element or movable over
    a series of taps or other intervening structure connected to the same
    resistance element, or connected to different series of taps or other
    intervening structures which are connected to the same resistance element.

    (1)     Note.  For classification here the contacts must be connected to
    separate terminals or through a circuit other than a mere conductor, such
    as another resistor.  Subclasses 92+ provides for plural contacts which
    short-circuit a portion of a resistance element, and subclass 171 below
    provides for a resistor with an angularly movable contact having plural
    contact portions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92+,    for a mechanically variable resistor with a resistance element
    short circuiting means.  See also (1) Note above.

    120,    for a variable resistor part of whose element is adjustably shunted
    by a resistor.

    128+,   for plural mechanically variable resistors, each resistor including
    a contact movable over a resistance element.

    136,    for a variable resistor whose contact is clamped on the resistance
    element.

    171,    for a resistor having a contact with plural contact portions
    angularly movable over the resistance element. See also (1) Note above.


CLS 338/138
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein a physical dimension or
    characteristic of the resistance element changes in one direction gradually
    or in a plurality of discrete progressive steps along the element as
    recited in subclass 217 below.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the purpose of this tapered characteristic in a
    variable resistor is to provide a nonlinear relationship between the change
    in value of the resistance and movement of the contact arm.  Subclasses 89+
    above provides for such structure where a definite mathematical
    relationship exists.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89+,    for variable resistors wherein a definite mathematical relationship
    exists between the value of the resistance across the terminals and
    movement of the resistor actuator.  See also (1) Note above.

    217+,   for tapered resistors generally.


CLS 338/139
TXT Subject matter under subclass 138 wherein conductive material is disposed
    along or over, and in direct engagement with the resistance element to
    reduce the resistance of the element over a portion of its length to
    produce a tapered effect along the length of the element.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of subject matter found here are helical resistors
    with certain of the element turns or portions of the turns short-circuited
    to produce a tapered effect, or resistance elements having conducting
    strips extending along their lengths.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92+,    for a resistor having a short circuiting means, which is adjustable
    to vary the resistance value.


CLS 338/140
TXT Subject matter under subclass 138 wherein a plurality of electrically
    separate conducting structures are each connected to the tapered resistance
    element along its length together with a terminal movable along or over the
    conducting structures to constitute a contact on such structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for a mechanically tap type variable resistor in or on a lamp
    socket.

    154,    for a variable resistor having an intermediate conductive strip
    between the resistance element and the movable member, usually to reduce
    wear.

    185+,   for variable resistors of the tap type.

    323,    for a fixed resistor having a terminal tapped along the resistance
    element.

    325,    for a resistor with three or more terminals.


CLS 338/141
TXT Subject matter under subclass 138 wherein the tapered element is formed as
    two or more continuous closed coils or loops as a spiral, helix, or
    toroidal winding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218,    for resistors with helical or wound tapered resistance elements.

    263+,   for resistors having a helical wound element with a casing or
    housing coated on.

    267+,   for incased, embedded or housed helical or wound resistors
    generally.

    296+,   for helical or wound resistors generally.


CLS 338/142
TXT Subject matter under subclass 138 wherein the tapered resistance element is
    coated on a base.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    292,    for a resistor with a fixed zigzag or sinuous resistance element
    formed as a coating.

    300,    for a resistor with a fixed helical resistance element formed as a
    coating.

    308+,   for a resistor whose element is coated on a base.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 58+ for coating processes, per se,
    wherein the product has utility as an electrical article.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 156+ for a
    plural layer stock material in which one layer comprises a layer which
    varies in thickness, and which may involve resistance materials.


CLS 338/143
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein the resistance element is formed
    as a helix, the contact being mounted to move around and remain in contact
    with each convolution of the helix.

    (1)     Note.  In this type of resistor the contact must be rotated
    relative to the helix through substantially more than 3600 to move the
    contact from one end to the other of the helical element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     for mechanically variable resistors with element winding and/or
    unwinding.

    162+,   for variable resistors with contacts that are angularly slidable
    over the resistance element.

    190+,   for variable resistors of the tap type which have an angularly
    movable contact.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 139+ for inductors having a contactor
    following a helical conductor.


CLS 338/144
TXT Subject matter under subclass 143 wherein the helical resistance element is
    wound on a core or reel and is adapted to have the portion adjacent the
    contact raised slightly from the surface of the core, as by having the
    contact disposed between adjacent portions of the core and the element, the
    portion of the element which is raised changing with changes in the
    position of the contact to remain adjacent the contact.


CLS 338/145
TXT Subject matter under subclass 143 wherein the helical resistance element is
    mounted for linear or rotational movement with respect to the structure
    mounting the contact, so that the position of the contact along the helix
    may be changed, or the helix may be moved to provide for an adjustment of
    the contact along the length of the helix.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are helices which rotate to permit an
    adjustment of an angularly fixed contact along their length, or helices
    which are moved linearly to permit adjustment of a linearly fixed contact
    along their length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     44 and 46, for resistors responsive to change of inclination in
    which the resistance element may move.

    79,     for mechanically variable resistors with element winding and/or
    unwinding.

    80+,    for variable resistors of the liquid element type, especially
    subclass 86.

    150+,   for resistors whose element moves with respect to a fixed contact.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 115+ for relatively movable inductor
    coils, especially subclasses 117+.


CLS 338/146
TXT Subject matter under subclass 143 wherein a helical collector or return is
    positioned concentric with the helical resistor element but spaced
    therefrom so that the contactor bridges across or between the resistor
    element and collector ring to establish an electrical circuit therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125+,   for a resistor having a contact bridged across plural resistance
    elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 138 for inductors having plural
    conductors, which may be helical, bridged by a conducting member.


CLS 338/147
TXT Subject matter under subclass 143 wherein a relatively long resistance
    element is arranged in a flat spiral configuration, the contactor track or
    path being in a plane parallel with the spiral element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207,    for a fixed resistor in which the element and base are rolled
    together.

    297,    for a helical or wound resistance element formed as a flat spiral.


CLS 338/148
TXT Subject matter under subclass 143 wherein a threaded shaft or screw having
    a contactor linked therewith is so located in relation to the helical
    resistor element that rotation of the threaded shaft causes linear travel
    of the contact as the contact is rotated along the turns of the helical
    wound resistance element.

    (1)     Note.  The helical screw is structure separate from and in addition
    to the helical resistance element, although the screw may be a track
    parallel to the helical element.  Where the contactor is moved linearly by
    engagement with the helical turns of the resistance element, classification
    is in the generic subclass 143 above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180+,   for a mechanically variable resistor having a screw operated
    rectilinearly slidable contact.

    202,    for movable contact structure, per se.


CLS 338/149
TXT Subject matter under subclass 143 wherein significant stopping means is
    provided to positively limit or apply a positive stop to the movement of
    the contactor over the helical resistance element before reaching an end of
    the element so that the contact will remain in engagement with the element.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter generally found in this subclass consists of
    a nut, or projection located on the operating mechanism or housing of the
    resistance element, so that the contact upon reaching a predetermined point
    or points, such as the ends of the helical element, is prevented from any
    further movement.


CLS 338/150
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein the resistance element is movably
    mounted in a frame, housing, or other structure supporting the element and
    contact to permit the adjustment of the contact over the length of the
    resistance element.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are resistors whose contact is fixed and whose
    resistance element is rotated or moved linearly to effect adjustment of the
    contact over the length of the element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43+,    for resistors responsive to change of inclination in which the
    resistance element may move.

    79,     for variable resistors with element winding and/or unwinding.

    80+,    for variable resistors of the liquid element type, especially
    subclass 86.

    92+,    for resistors having an element section short circuiting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 81 for attenuators
    which may have movable resistance structure.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 115+ for relatively movable inductor
    coils.


CLS 338/151
TXT Subject matter under subclass 150 wherein the contact is a liquid disposed
    in structure such as a tank or trough for restraining its flow; the
    resistance element having a portion in the liquid or engaging the surface
    of the liquid, the portion being changed with movement of the element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for resistors responsive to change in inclination, and which have a
    liquid contact.

    94,     for resistors whose element is adjustably short-circuited, and
    including a liquid contact.

    156,    for resistors having a liquid contact.


CLS 338/152
TXT Subject matter under subclass 150 including a knob, the resistance element
    being disposed within the knob or directly on the surface of the knob, and
    being rotatable with the knob to move along the contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163,    for a resistor having an angularly slidable contact in which the
    knob forms the casing or covering.

    184,    for a resistor whose contact slides along the resistance element
    with a housing.

    199,    for mechanically variable resistors with housings.


CLS 338/153
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 including structure mechanically linked
    with the movable contact of the resistor or the element where movable, and
    peculiarly adapted for operation by the foot or knee, as by being operable
    by a push, and including structure such as a spring for returning to the
    initial position upon removal of the pushing force, and including a portion
    shaped to facilitate engagement with the foot as by being shaped like the
    sole of the foot or having a substantially flat foot engaging surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for resistors whose value is responsive to a force as there defined.

    108,    for variable compressible resistors operated by a pedal or treadle.

    215,    for a fixed resistor and switch combination which may be operated
    by a pedal or treadle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 512+ for foot operated
    linkage systems; subclass 515 for knee operated linkage systems; and
    subclasses 560+ for pedal type levers.


CLS 338/154
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein a flexible conductive strip is
    disposed over the contact or tap path of the resistance element and
    normally spaced from the element or taps, the movable contact bending the
    portion of the strip overlying the contact into electrical engagement with
    the resistance element or taps; the portion of the strip engaging the
    resistance element or taps depending on the position of the contact.

    (1)     Note.  The purpose of this conductive strip is usually to reduce
    the wear on the resistance element or taps due to movement of the contact
    over the element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92+,    for variable resistors having adjustable short circuiting means,
    especially subclass 93.


CLS 338/155
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein the contact rocks over or along
    the resistance element, or the intervening structure between the element
    and contact such as the element taps.

    (1)     Note.  For classification here the contact must rotate over in the
    element or taps in a small arc, in any event less than 3600.  Usually the
    contacting surface of the contact has a length comparable to the length of
    the element of tap path, and the contacting surface does not extend
    completely around the contactor.  Where the contact rotates at least one
    revolution in passing over the length of the element or tap path
    classifications is in subclasses 157+ below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     for a mechanically variable resistor with an element short
    circuiting spring which may be progressively pressed over the element.

    157+,   for a mechanically variable resistor with a contact which rolls
    over the element or tap path.  See also (1) Note above.


CLS 338/156
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein the contact or the portion of the
    contact which directly engages the resistor element and through which the
    electrical connection is made is a conducting liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for a resistor whose resistance value is responsive to ambient
    temperature and having a liquid contact.

    34+,    for a resistor responsive to liquid or moisture in which the liquid
    may be the contact.

    38,     for a fluid or gas pressure actuated resistor with a liquid contact.

    80+,    for a mechanically variable resistor whose resistance element is a
    liquid.

    94,     for a resistor whose element is adjustably short-circuited, and
    including a liquid contact.

    151,    for a variable resistor wherein the resistance element moves along
    a liquid contact held stationary as by gravity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 152 for circuit
    breakers having a contact of conducting liquid.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 296, for
    impedance systems having a resistor with a liquid contact.


CLS 338/157
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein the movable contact has a rolling
    surface which rolls along, or over, and in direct contact with the
    resistance element or with the intervening structure between the element
    and contact, such as the element taps.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter generally found in this subclass includes a
    contact having a rolling or revolving surface that rolls along or over and
    remains in direct contact with the resistance element or taps as opposed to
    the type of contact which slides or rubs along or over the resistance
    element as classified in subclasses 160+ below. As between this subclass
    (157) and subclass 155 above, the contact must make at least a complete
    revolution in its adjustment over the length of the element for
    classification in this subclass (157).  See also (1) Note under subclass
    155.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79+,    for reel type resistors which may include a rolling contact.

    143+,   for mechanically variable resistors involving a contact which rolls
    along a helical resistance element.

    155,    for mechanically variable resistors whose contact rocks along the
    element. See also (1) Note, above.

    202,    for movable contact structure such as contacts, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, especially subclasses 53,
    56 and 63+, for trolley collectors involving rolling contractors.


CLS 338/158
TXT Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the rolling contact terminal
    rolls in a straight path over or along the resistance element or taps.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for a mechanically variable resistor having a rectilinearly
    slidable contact, the resistor being mounted in or on a lamp socket.

    117,    for a variable resistor having slidable helical and linear contacts.

    133,    for a ganged rectilinearly operated variable resistor.

    176+,   for variable resistors whose contact slides rectilinearly over the
    element.

    194,    for a variable resistor having taps contacted by a rectilinearly
    movable contact.


CLS 338/159
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein a mass of heat conducting
    material usually metallic is disposed in the vicinity of the resistance
    element to provide a medium for transmission of the heat from the element
    along a desired and limited path.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter classified here provides a distinct and
    limited path for the heat passage for cooling purposes as opposed to a heat
    conductive casing which dissipates the heat in all directions from the
    element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25+,    for resistors whose resistance value changes with ambient
    temperature.

    51+,    for resistors with heat dissipating projections, e.g., vanes.

    226+,   for resistors generally with a heat conductive casing or housing.
    See also (1) Note, above.


CLS 338/160
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein the movable contact terminal
    slides or rubs along and remains in direct contact with the resistor
    element while sliding or rubbing along to enable a portion of the length of
    the element to be placed in the electrical circuit.

    (1)     Note.  The contact may be removed from the element as by being
    moved off an end of the element, or raised from the element, as for
    switching purposes as provided in indented subclass 173.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86,     for variable liquid resistors wherein the level of the liquid is
    adjustable.

    117,    for a variable resistor having slidable helical and linear contacts.

    137+,   for a variable resistor having plural moving contacts.

    138+,   for variable resistors having tapered elements.

    143+,   for a variable resistor whose contactor moves along a helical
    resistance element.

    150+,   for variable resistors whose element moves in relation to a fixed
    contact.

    154,    for a resistor with an intermediate contactor between the
    resistance element and the contact member.

    185+,   for a variable resistor having intervening connectors between the
    contact and element, e.g., taps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 137+ for inductors with means for
    varying the effective coil length.


CLS 338/161
TXT Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein the resistance element is
    substantially entirely encased or enclosed by a casing or covering with no
    intervening space therebetween (i.e., the inner surface of the casing or
    covering is in contact with the outer surface of the resistance element),
    except for an open space in the casing directly over the portion of the
    resistance element where the contact slides.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    192+,   for variable tap type resistors with angularly movable contacts,
    whose resistance element is enclosed.

    226+,   for incased, embedded or housed fixed resistors.

    331,    for resistors whose element is mounted in a groove in the base.


CLS 338/162
TXT Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein the movable contact structure
    pivots about an axis for the resistance element contacting portion to slide
    in a circular path along the resistance element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73,     for lamp socket type adjustable resistors including an angularly
    slidable contact.

    117,    for mechanically adjustable resistors including slidable helical
    and linear contacts.

    143+,   for mechanically adjustable resistors wherein the contact slides on
    a helical resistance element.

    190+,   for mechanically variable resistors whose contact is angularly
    movable over a plurality of taps.


CLS 338/163
TXT Subject matter under subclass 162 including a housing for the resistance
    element and contact structure, the housing or a portion thereof being
    linked with the movable contact structure and providing a knob actuating
    means for this structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    for mechanically variable resistors including a knob enclosing a
    movable resistance element.

    164,    184 and 199, for mechanically variable resistors with housings.


CLS 338/164
TXT Subject matter under subclass 162 including a casing with the necessary
    seals to prevent passage of air, dust, or moisture to the resistor
    structure contained therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184     and 199, for variable resistors with housings not necessarily
    hermetically sealed.

    226+,   for incased, embedded or housed fixed resistors.


CLS 338/165
TXT Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein the resistance element is
    straight and elongated, as a straight rod or cylindrical helix.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the element is not curved to correspond to
    the arcuate swing of the contact, as is usual under subclass 162.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for pile type compressible resistors with a contactor movable along
    the pile.


CLS 338/166
TXT Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein the contact actuating means or a
    portion thereof is readily separable from the resistor, such as a key or
    readily removable knob or shaft, as to prevent unauthorized adjustment of
    the resistor; or wherein structure is provided to permit ready adjustment
    by some actuator not ordinarily considered a part of the resistor such as a
    slot for the blade of a screw driver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 42+ for
    switches having means for preventing unauthorized use.


CLS 338/167
TXT Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein a spring or similar structure is
    connected between the rotatable and the fixed structure of the resistor to
    bias the contact to a fixed predetermined point in its arc of movement,
    while permitting adjustment from this point against its biasing effect.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99+,    for especially subclass 105, for compressible resistors involving a
    biasing effect and subclass 108, for compressible resistors which are pedal
    or treadle operated.

    116+,   for resistors adjustable by an electric motor.

    153,    for pedal or treadle operated variable resistors of the movable
    contact type having a contact biased along the resistance element.

    168,    for an adjustable resistor having an angularly slidable contact,
    and a spring between the fixed and movable parts for conducting electric
    energy to the contact.


CLS 338/168
TXT Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein a flexible or resilient conductor
    is provided between the movable contact and a terminal fixed on stationary
    resistor structure, the ends of the conductor being secured to the movable
    and stationary structure, respectively.

    (1)     Note.  The flexible conductor may be a spring, whose respective
    ends are secured to the terminal and contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    for variable resistors with angularly slidable spring loaded
    contacts.


CLS 338/169
TXT Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein structure is provided which
    permits a selective variation in the pressure exerted by the contact on the
    resistance element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 170 for means
    of maintaining or adjusting pressure between the contacts of a switch.


CLS 338/170
TXT Subject matter under subclass 162 including a spring mounted on and in
    addition to the contact carrier, guide, or arm, and biasing the contact
    against the resistance element.

    (1)     Note.  A mere resilient contact arm which performs the dual
    function of supporting the contact portion, and also biasing it against the
    resistance element is not sufficient for classification here, but elsewhere
    under subclass 162.  For classification here the biasing spring must be
    structure in addition to the contact arm or carrier.


CLS 338/171
TXT Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein the contact is composed of two or
    more separated portions, each portion engaging the resistance element, all
    portions being slidable as a unit along the resistance element.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the purpose of the plural contact portions is to
    maintain a more uniform electrical conduction path between the contact arm
    and the resistance element as the contact slides along the element, as to
    reduce circuit noise.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for photoconductive resistors with vibration control.

    98,     for mechanically variable resistors with motion or vibration
    damping means.

    202,    for movable contacts structure generally.


CLS 338/172
TXT Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein the mechanically variable
    resistor with a contact angularly slidable on a resistance element is
    combined with a separate switch or includes switching structure as an
    inherent part of the resistor.

    (1)     Note.  The switch and resistor may control the same or a different
    electric circuit.  The resistor and switch are usually actuated by motion
    of the same shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179,    for variable resistors having a rectilinearly slidable contact
    together with a series switch.

    191,    for variable resistors of the tap type with angularly movable
    contacts together with a switch.

    198,    for variable resistors generally together with a switch actuated by
    the resistor actuator.

    200+,   for variable resistors generally combined with a switch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses,
    for electric switches, per se.


CLS 338/173
TXT Subject matter under subclass 172 wherein the contact slidable on the
    resistance element is separable from the element by being rotated beyond
    the end of the element or by being lifted from the element (usually by
    rotational or axial movement of the shaft) to break the electric circuit
    through the resistance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185+,   for variable tap type resistors in which the movable contact may be
    disconnected from the taps of the resistor element during operation of the
    resistor.

    198,    for variable resistors generally with a switch actuated by the
    resistor actuator.


CLS 338/174
TXT Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein a conducting ring or arcuate
    portion of a ring is provided which is electrically connected to or
    constitutes one terminal of the resistor, the contact or its arm or
    conducting structure movable with the contact slidably engaging the ring to
    convey the electrical energy from the terminal to the contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146,    for a helical resistor with a following contact and a helical
    collector bar parallel to the helical resistance element.

    188,    for mechanically adjustable resistors having an intervening
    connector such as a tap between the contact and element and including a
    collector bar or ring.


CLS 338/175
TXT Subject matter under subclass 174 wherein the ring constitutes a bearing
    which directly engages the shaft, the shaft being of conductive material.

    (1)     Note.  The ring may be a cylindrical bearing surrounding the shaft
    and engaging the cylindrical surface of the shaft, or may be a thrust
    bearing engaging a groove or flange on the shaft to prevent axial movement
    of the shaft.  The ring for classification here must directly engage the
    conducting shaft, and not merely connect with some other structure movable
    with the shaft.


CLS 338/176
TXT Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein the movable contact terminal
    moves in a straight path over or along a resistance element, the contact
    terminal remaining in contact with the element as it slides along.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter found in this subclass usually consists of a
    resistor element having an elongated shape with at least two terminals
    connected to the element, at least one of the terminals being rectilinearly
    slidable along or over, and in direct contact with the resistance element
    so that the effective resistance of the circuit may be changed by sliding
    the terminal with respect to the resistance element.

    (2)     Note.  The contact terminal may be removed from the element at any
    point in the sliding path or at an end for switching purposes.  See
    subclass 178 below for such subject matter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for a variable resistor having a rectilinearly slidable contact,
    and mounted in or on a lamp socket.

    117,    for a variable resistor having slidable helical and linear contacts.

    133,    for ganged rectilinearly operated variable resistors.

    194,    for a variable resistor having taps and a rectilinearly movable
    contact.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 4 and 16 for
    multiple circuit control switches with reciprocating contacts; and
    subclasses 76+ for snap switches having reciprocating contacts.


CLS 338/177
TXT Subject matter under subclass 176 wherein the rectilinearly slidable
    contact completely surrounds or embraces the resistance element, and
    contacting the element around the entire periphery of the element.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter generally found in this subclass consists of
    an elongated resistance element having a rectilinearly movable conducting
    band or ring completely encircling the element to form a contact having
    ringed engagement entirely around the resistance element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92+,    for variable resistors having a short circuiting means which may
    include a conducting contact completely surrounding the resistance element.

    272,    for incased resistors whose terminals or leads surrounds and are
    secured to the casing or housing.

    313,    for resistors with elements extending along a base, the terminals
    surrounding the base.

    332,    for resistors with terminals embracing or surrounding a resistance
    element.


CLS 338/178
TXT Subject matter under subclass 176 wherein the rectilinearly slidable
    contact is adapted to separate from the resistance element for switching.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter generally found in this subclass includes a
    resistance element engaged by a rectilinearly movable contact with the
    contact being adapted to separate or leave the resistance element to open
    the electrical circuit formed therethrough as by lifting from or sliding
    out of engagement with the resistance element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for a resistor having a rectilinearly slidable contact in or on a
    lamp socket and which may include switching.

    172+,   for a variable resistor having an angularly slidable contact
    together with switching.

    179,    for a variable resistor having a rectilinearly movable contact
    together with a series switch.

    191,    for a tap type resistor having angularly movable contact together
    with a switch.

    200+,   for variable resistors generally with switches.

    215,    for a fixed resistor combined with a switch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 76+ for
    switches operated by a reciprocating contact.


CLS 338/179
TXT Subject matter under subclass 176 wherein the resistor is combined with a
    switch in series with the resistor.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter in this subclass includes a rectilinearly
    movable contact which may carry an operating means which opens or closes an
    electrical circuit through the resistance element upon movement of the
    contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172+,   for a variable resistor having an angularly slidable contact
    together with a switch.

    178,    for a variable resistor having a rectilinearly slidable contact
    separable from the resistance element for switching.

    191,    for a tap type resistor having an angularly movable contact
    together with a switch.

    200+,   for variable resistors generally with switches.

    215,    for a fixed resistor combined with a switch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 2+ for electromagnetically activated switches.


CLS 338/180
TXT Subject matter under subclass 176 including a helical screw and nut as the
    actuator or a part of the actuator for the rectilinearly slidable contact.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter in this subclass usually includes a screw
    threaded shaft having a slider located thereon with the slider carrying a
    contact brush engaging a resistance element.  Upon rotation of the shaft
    the slider and contact brush are moved rectilinearly over the resistance
    element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87+,    for a variable resistor of the penetrating type which may be screw
    operated.

    117,    for a variable resistor with slidable helical and linear contacts
    which may be screw operated.

    125,    for resistors with plural elements bridged by a movable contact
    which may be screw operated.

    148,    for a resistor whose contact follows the helical turns of the
    resistance element with the contact being screw operated.


CLS 338/181
TXT Subject matter under subclass 180 including structure which permits sliding
    the contact along the resistance element by direct application of linear
    force on the contact for a coarse adjustment of the contact, the screw
    providing a fine or vernier adjustment.

    (1)     Note.  Usually here the screw and nut threads are readily
    separable, or the threads have a large pitch to permit direct adjustment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122+,   for mechanically variable resistors with coarse and fine resistance
    elements.


CLS 338/182
TXT Subject matter under subclass 176 including means for securing the contact
    at some definite point on the resistance element to prevent motion of the
    contact in both directions along the element.

    (1)     Note.  A mere stop which prevents motion of the contact in one
    direction is not classified here, but in the generic subclass 176 above.
    Subject matter generally found in this subclass includes a rectilinearly
    movable contact having some means, usually a nut or screw, to secure the
    contact to some point on the resistance element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131,    for ganged plural variable resistors, the resistors being
    individually adjustable.

    135,    for variable resistors with zero setting or phasing means.

    136,    for a resistor with a contact clamped on the resistance element.


CLS 338/183
TXT Subject matter under subclass 176 including a conducting bar extending
    parallel to the resistance element and constituting one terminal of the
    resistor, the rectilinearly slidable contact electrically bridging and
    sliding along both the resistance element and the conducting bar.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174+,   for a mechanically variable resistor with an angularly slidable
    contact and a collector ring.

    188,    for a mechanically variable resistor of the tap type having a
    collector bar or ring.


CLS 338/184
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 including a casing or housing which
    substantially encloses the resistance element and movable contact elements,
    leaving only the necessary operating means by which the contact element is
    moved exposed or extending outside of the housing to permit external
    adjustment of the resistor.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter generally found in this subclass consists of
    a variable resistor of the type defined in subclass 118 above having the
    resistance and movable contact element both completely enclosed within a
    box like casing or housing, with only some operating means such as a shaft
    or lever extending externally through an opening or slit to permit external
    adjustment of the resistance value without removal of the casing or housing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for photoconductive resistors with a transparent housing.

    70+,    for mechanically variable resistors housed in or on a lamp socket.

    77,     for plug box type resistors.

    80+,    for liquid element resistors.

    192+,   for tap type resistors whose resistance element is incased.

    199,    for variable resistors generally having a housing or casing.

    226+,   for incased, embedded, or housed resistors generally.  See also the
    Search Notes under this subclass for a more extensive field of search for
    incased or housed resistors.


CLS 338/185
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein a plurality of otherwise
    electrically separate conducting structures are each electrically connected
    to the elongated element along its length, and a terminal being movable
    among the conducting structures to constitute a contact on such structures.

    (1)     Note.  The most common subject matter in this subclass is a
    resistor whose element is tapped together with a contact movable along the
    taps, i.e., a tap changing resistor.  The path of motion of the terminal
    need not be fixed for classification here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for a tap type mechanically variable resistor in or on a lamp
    socket.

    126,    for a variable resistor with a plurality of tapped elements and a
    movable contact bridge.

    140,    for a variable tapered resistor of the tap type.

    154,    for a variable resistor having an intermediate conductive strip
    between the resistor element and the movable member usually to reduce wear.

    323,    for a resistor having terminals tapped along the resistance element.

    325,    for a resistor with three or more terminals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, especially subclasses 4,
    6+ and 16, for multiple circuit control switches with movable contacts
    which may engage taps.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 255+,
    for tap changing regulation systems.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 150 for adjustable tap changing
    inductors.


CLS 338/186
TXT Subject matter under a subclass 185 wherein the connector is formed as a
    plurality of helical turns which are severed along the length of the helix
    to provide a plurality of physically and electrically separate taps or
    contacts, each severed turn engaging the resistance element, as by
    surrounding or being embedded therein, or wherein the connector is formed
    as a plurality of comb teeth, the base of the comb being removed to leave
    the severed teeth physically and electrically separate to provide taps or
    contacts, the teeth engaging the resistance element, as by being embedded
    therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 621 for methods of applying terminals to
    resistors involving metal working or assembly and not otherwise
    classifiable.


CLS 338/187
TXT Subject matter under subclass 185 including structure or arrangement to
    reduce or eliminate arcing between the movable contactor and the conducting
    structures, such as taps engaged by this contactor as the contact moves off
    a conducting structure or from one conducting structure to the next.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    218,    High-Voltage Switches With Arc Preventing and Extinguishing
    Devices, subclasses 1+ for electrical switches involving arc preventing and
    extinguishing.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 2+
    electrical safety and protection systems for contact-arc suppression.


CLS 338/188
TXT Subject matter under subclass 185 together with a conducting bar or ring,
    along which the movable contact slides or along which a contact movable
    with and electrically connected to the first movable contact slides.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146,    for a helical resistor with a following contact and a helical
    collector bar parallel to the helical resistance element.

    174,    for a resistor whose contact slides along and remains in contact
    with the resistance element together with a collector bar or ring.


CLS 338/189
TXT Subject matter under subclass 185 including a retaining or positioning
    magnet for locking or holding the movable contact in a predetermined
    position.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter classified in this subclass usually consists
    of a series of resistance-coils or other resistances adapted to be
    gradually cut into circuit by movement of a spring biased contact lever or
    arm from one tap to another in a predetermined order.  When the final
    position is reached, the electromagnet holds the lever or arm in position
    against the stress of the biasing spring, which has a tendency to move the
    contact to its original or starting position.  When the electrical circuit
    is broken in the magnet, the contact is returned to its starting position
    by the stress of the biasing spring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for resistors magnetically operated through a housing or partition.

    32,     for resistors whose resistance value is responsive to a magnetic
    field.

    64+,    for resistors having electrical shielding.

    103+,   for compressible resistors of the pile type operated by an
    electromagnet.

    107,    for compressible resistors of the pile type which have an
    electromagnetic holder for the operator.

    116,    for mechanically variable resistors generally with electromagnetic
    operators.

    182,    for resistors with rectilinearly movable contacts and a contact
    locking means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 2+ for electromagnetically activated switches.


CLS 338/190
TXT Subject matter under subclass 185 wherein the contact moves angularly over
    the conducting structures connected to the resistance element i.e., the
    contact moves about a pivot point.

    (1)     Note.  To be properly classified in this subclass the tapped
    resistance element need not have an angular shape nor do the taps need to
    be in an arcuate or circular configuration.  The contact however must move
    about a pivot point in such a manner as to strike an arc of a circle when
    moved across the taps.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162+,   for resistors having an angularly slidable contactor which slides
    along and remains in contact with the resistor element.

    194,    for a variable tap type resistor having a slidable contactor which
    moves in a straight line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 4 and 6, for
    multiple circuit control switches with pivoted contacts.


CLS 338/191
TXT Subject matter under subclass 190 wherein an electric switch is included in
    the electrical circuit to allow the electrical resistor to be cut into or
    out of electrical circuit.

    (1)     Note.  The switch may or may not be operated by the angularly
    movable contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172+,   for a variable resistor having an angularly slidable contact
    together with a switch.

    178,    for a variable resistor having a rectilinearly slidable contact
    separable form the resistance element for switching.

    179,    for a variable resistor having a rectilinearly slidable contact and
    a series switch.

    198,    for a variable resistor and a switch actuated by the resistor
    actuator.

    215,    for a single fixed resistor and switch combined.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 112+
    for miscellaneous switching systems.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 2+ for electromagnetically activated switches.


CLS 338/192
TXT Subject matter under subclass 190 wherein the resistance element is
    enclosed or housed as defined in subclass 226 below.

    (1)     Note.  Usually in this subclass the taps from the resistance
    element and the movable contact structure are located outside of the
    housing or enclosure surrounding the resistor element.  For substantially
    completely housed tap type resistors whose contact arms are also enclosed
    or housed see subclass 184 above and 199 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64+,    for resistors with electrical shielding.

    70+,    for mechanically variable resistors housed in a lamp socket.

    80+,    for mechanically variable liquid resistors.

    161,    for an incased variable resistance element with the casing partly
    removed to form a track for a movable contact.

    184,    for variable movable contact type resistors having a housing.

    199,    for variable resistors generally with a housing.

    219,    for fixed resistors housed in a lamp socket or base.

    226+,   for fixed resistors which are incased, embedded, or housed.


CLS 338/193
TXT Subject matter under subclass 192 wherein the enclosure surrounding the
    resistor element is formed on and hardened on the element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    275,    for a fixed resistor having a casing or housing formed on and
    hardened on the resistance element.


CLS 338/194
TXT Subject matter under subclass 185 wherein the contact moves in a straight
    line over the conducting structures connected to the resistance element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for a mechanically variable resistor having a rectilinearly
    slidable contact in or on a lamp socket.

    133,    for ganged plural resistors operated rectilinearly.

    176+,   for mechanically adjustable resistors including a contact
    rectilinearly slidable on a resistance element.

    190+,   for resistor with an intervening connector between the contact and
    element, the contact being angularly movable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 4 and 16, for
    multiple circuit control switches with a reciprocating contact; and
    subclasses 76+ for snap switches having a reciprocating contact.


CLS 338/195
TXT Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein a finished or completely
    manufactured resistor includes structure for removing or adding resistance
    material to or from the resistance element to change the resistance value
    of the resistor; or wherein the resistance element is peculiarly adapted
    for such removal on addition of material; or wherein the resistance element
    includes resistance or conducting material which may be removed or slit to
    alter the resistance value of the element.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter in this subclass includes finished or
    completed resistors, as opposed to those resistors to which material is
    added or subtracted in or as part of the manufacturing of the resistor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for a variable resistor with a cleaner.

    203,    for resistors readily severable into independent resistors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 610.1+ for methods of making electrical
    resistors involving metal working.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 58+ for coating processes, per se,
    wherein the product has utility as an electrical article.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 195+ for a
    plural layer stock material product in which one layer comprises a
    discontinuous or differential coating, impregnation or bond and the product
    may involve resistance materials.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 28+ for an abrading process in general.


CLS 338/196
TXT Subject matter under subclass 68 including structure such as a pointer,
    gauge, or scale for showing the displacement of the resistor actuator or
    the mechanical adjustment of the resistor with respect to some fixed
    object, and thus furnish an indication of the resistance value for which
    the resistor is set.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13+,    for variable resistors responsive to a condition, and including
    indicating structure, when not otherwise classifiable.

    119,    for a resistor whose contact moves along the resistance element
    together with a light to indicate the displacement of the contact or the
    setting of a switch associated with the resistor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 124+ for miscellaneous position
    indicators other than the electrically actuated or controlled type.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 56 for a
    pointer and circuit-breaker having a common operator.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 45 for inductor devices with a movable
    element position indicator.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, appropriate subclasses, for
    electrically actuated or controlled signals and indicators.


CLS 338/197
TXT Subject matter under subclass 68 including a variable resistor as defined
    in subclass 68 together with structure that establishes and/or maintains
    the resistor position or path of movement with reference to some other
    object.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass usually involves a
    variable resistor mounted on a panel.  For classification purposes the
    panel or the structure securing the variable resistor to the panel or other
    object may be considered a support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for strain gauge type resistors adapted to be supported on the test
    specimen.

    50,     for resistors mounted on wheels or vehicles.

    70+,    for mechanically variable resistors mounted in or on a lamp socket.

    315+,   for fixed resistors with supports. See also the Search Notes under
    this subclass for a more extensive field of search for resistors and
    supports.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 428+ for resistor bearing supports.


CLS 338/198
TXT Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein a variable resistor as there
    defined is combined with a switch, there being a linkage between the
    resistor and switch so that variation of the variable resistor over some
    portion of its resistance range causes operation of the switch to make
    and/or break an electrical circuit, or so that operation of the switch to
    make and/or break an electric circuit causes variation of the variable
    resistor over some portion of its resistance range.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the subject matter of this subclass includes a
    variable resistor of no particular type together with a switch, the
    resistor operating the switch or vice versa.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     for a mechanically variable resistor combined with a current
    reversing switch.

    110,    for a compressible type resistor together with a switch actuated by
    the resistor actuator.

    129,    for plural mechanically variable resistors sequentially operated.

    130+,   for ganged mechanically variable resistors.

    172+,   for a mechanically variable resistor with an angularly slidable
    contact together with a switch.

    179,    for a mechanically variable resistor with a linearly slidable
    contact together with a series switch.

    191,    for a mechanically variable resistor with an intervening connector
    between the contact and element together with a switch.

    200+,   for a variable resistor including a switch to change the resistance
    value of the variable resistor.

    215,    for fixed resistors combined with switches.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 112+
    for miscellaneous switching systems.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 2+ for electromagnetically activated switches.


CLS 338/199
TXT Subject matter under subclass 68 including a housing or casing which
    substantially entirely encloses the mechanically adjustable or variable
    resistor, with only the necessary resistor operating mechanism extending
    outside the casing to permit external adjustment of the resistor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for photoconductive resistors with transparent housings.

    70+,    for a variable resistor housed in a lamp socket.

    77,     for plug box type resistors.

    80+,    for liquid element resistors.

    163,    for mechanically adjustable resistors with an angularly slidable
    contact and a knob forming a casing or covering; and subclass 164 for such
    resistors with hermetically sealed housings.

    184,    for resistors with a movable contact electrically adjustable over
    the length of the element, the resistors being housed.

    192+,   for a tap type resistor whose element is enclosed.

    226+,   for incased, embedded, or housed resistors generally.  See also the
    Search Notes under this subclass for a more extensive field of search for
    such resistors.


CLS 338/200
TXT Subject matter under subclass 68 including one or more resistance elements
    together with one or more switches, which connect the elements in at least
    two circuit configurations to present two different resistance values
    across a set of terminals.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is residual for resistors whose elements are
    usually of fixed resistance value, which may be switched to present
    different resistance values across the terminals. Resistors with a tapped
    element and a contact movable along the taps for varying the resistance
    across the resistor terminals are classified in subclasses 185+ above.
    Subclass 215 provides for the combination of a resistor of fixed resistance
    value together with a switch in series or parallel with the resistance
    element. In subclass 215 only one ohmic resistance value together with an
    open or short circuit appears across the terminals regardless of the
    switching positions.  Where two resistance values appear across the
    terminals due to switching, classification is in this subclass (200) as a
    residual place.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     for a mechanically variable resistor combined with a current
    reversing switch.

    172+,   for a variable resistor having an angularly slidable contact, and
    including a switching means.

    178,    for a variable resistor having a rectilinearly slidable contact
    separable from the element for switching.

    179,    for a variable resistor having a rectilinearly slidable contact
    together with a series switch.

    185+,   for tap type variable resistors. 191, for a tap type variable
    resistor with an angularly movable contact and combined with a switch.

    198,    for a mechanically variable resistor and switch actuated by the
    resistor actuator.

    215,    for a combined single fixed resistor and switch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses,
    for switches, per se.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 112+
    for miscellaneous switching systems.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 209+
    for systems of a voltage source and a load with a resistance network
    therebetween whose resistive value may be changed as by switching.


CLS 338/201
TXT Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the switch or switches connects a
    plurality of resistance elements in or out of a parallel circuit
    arrangement.


CLS 338/202
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including an electrode or
    terminal, which may include the adjacent supporting structure such as the
    contact arm, the electrode or terminal being adapted to connect movably and
    electrically along or into a resistance element as by sliding along or into
    the element, the electrode or terminal as such not being otherwise
    classifiable.

    (1)     Note.  For classification here the claims must be limited to the
    contact and arm, the resistance element being excluded.  Subclasses 68+,
    and especially subclasses 118+, provides for the combination of the
    resistance element and contact movable thereon. Contacts which operate with
    taps electrically connected to a resistance element are classified in Class
    200, Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, especially subclass 166,
    the resistance element not being claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for a mechanically variable resistor having a rectilinearly
    slidable contactor and being incased in a lamp socket.

    118+,   for mechanically variable resistors including a contact movable
    over a resistance element.  See also (1) Note above.

    153,    for a variable resistor with a movable contact operated by a pedal
    or treadle.

    155,    for a variable resistor with a contact that rocks along the
    resistance element.

    156,    for a variable resistor with a liquid contact movable over the
    resistance element.

    157+,   for a variable resistor with a contact that rolls along the
    resistance element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, subclasses 45+ for
    collectors carried by a vehicle or other movable body.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, especially subclass 166
    for switch contacts.  See (1) Note above.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 219+ for slip
    rings, commutators and other current collectors for dynamo-electric devices.


CLS 338/203
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein a plurality of resistor
    units are formed or constructed as a unitary structure with a groove,
    notch, mark, fragile or frangible part, as well as with an overall shape to
    facilitate separation into a plurality of individual resistor units as by
    breaking.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the resistor units while in a unitary
    structure before severing or breaking into individual units are capable of
    functioning as a resistor or a plurality of resistors, and the individual
    units formed after the breaking step are also capable of functioning as a
    complete resistor.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass only provides for resistors units readily
    separable into individual resistor units.  The independent resistors formed
    from such units are classified according to their own characteristics.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    260+,   for plural incased resistors.

    295,    for plural resistors connected by a jumper or spacer.

    319     and 320, for plural resistors with a  mounting or supporting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 610.1+ for methods of making electrical
    resistors involving severing; and subclasses 412+ for processes of
    mechanical manufacture generally involving obtaining plural pieces from a
    unitary piece.


CLS 338/204
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the resistance element is
    formed of a plurality of layers of resistance material such as discs or
    buttons, piled or stacked between the terminals, the layers being
    electrically connected in series together and in series with the terminals.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter found in this subclass consists essentially
    of a plurality of plates or disks of resistance material piled or stacked
    such that the surfaces are in electrical contact or electrically connected.
     The plates or disks used to construct a resistor under this subclass need
    not be of the same resistance material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     for pile type resistors with heat dissipating projections.

    71,     for a mechanically variable pile type resistor in or on a lamp
    socket.

    101+,   for a pile type resistor whose resistance value is varied by
    compression.

    115,    for mechanically variable pile type resistors in general.

    223+,   for a resistor having a granular or powdered element.

    260+,   for plural incased, embedded, or housed resistors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 117+ for
    high voltage dissipators, per se, wherein the discharge path may be
    resistive disks or buttons.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a plural layer stock material which may involve resistance materials,
    note subclasses 411+ in which the layers are recited in terms of their
    compositions.

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 59+, 181+, and 304+ for a woven or knit fabric which may involve
    resistance materials.


CLS 338/205
TXT Subject matter under subclass 204 wherein the layers of resistance material
    are separated by layers of relatively high conducting material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    288,    for a compound or multiple zigzag resistance element which includes
    conductive jumpers or spacers between elements.

    289,    for a zigzag or sinuous resistor including a conductive jumper or
    spacer.

    295,    for plural resistance elements connected by a jumper or spacer.


CLS 338/206
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the resistance element is
    formed of expanded metal as defined in (1) Note below.

    (1)     Note.  Expanded metal type resistance elements are those formed
    from a metal resistance strip by cutting or otherwise forming closely
    spaced transverse slots in the strip so as to establish a grid or tortuous
    current path between terminals.  The slots formed are generally as near
    zero in width as possible and the metal on either side of each slot is bent
    out of the general plane of the original sheet to separate the sides of the
    slots. The separating of neighboring sides of the transverse slots may also
    be obtained by stretching the strip longitudinally.  Generally the spacing
    obtained between the sides of slots is greatest at the center and tapers
    together at either end.

    (2)     Note.  This subject matter is distinguished from zigzag or sinuous
    resistors in that the transverse slots are closed at both ends and
    therefore provide more than one path for the current to flow, as opposed to
    the single conductance path generally provided by a zigzag or sinuous
    resistor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208,    for mesh, woven, or braided resistors.

    283+,   for resistors with zigzag or sinuous  resistance elements.  See
    also (2) Note above.

    322,    for resistors with plural elements in parallel between terminals.

    333,    for a resistor of a particular configuration and/or dimension.


CLS 338/207
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the resistance element
    and base are folded or rolled together in final form as to form, for
    example, a zigzag or helical resistor.

    (1)     Note.  A mere insulation coated resistance element coiled or folded
    upon itself is not properly classified here, but in such subclasses as 262+
    and 263+ below.  Usually the resistors here classified are formed with the
    element and base in flat overlying layers, which are then folded or rolled
    together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     for mechanically variable resistors with element winding and/or
    unwinding.

    210+,   for resistors which are flexible or folding.

    278,    for a resistor whose element is an edgewise coiled helical strip.

    279+,   for a resistor with a ribbon element bent or curved on its flat
    side.

    296+,   for helical or wound resistors generally.


CLS 338/208
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the resistance element
    includes elongated filaments, strands, or fibres of resistive material
    which are woven, braided, or knitted together or with other filaments,
    strands, or fibres of nonresistive material (conductive or insulating) to
    form the element as a mesh, weave, or braid.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this subclass the resistive filaments,
    strands, or fibres must be part of the weave, mesh, or braid.  A mere
    resistive filament, strand, or fibre secured to or interlaced through a
    fabric is not classified here, but in subclasses 306+ and 310 below.

    (2)     Note.  A mere plurality of twisted strands, filaments, or fibres
    are not classified here, but is in subclasses 214 and 299 below.

    (3)     Note.  A fabric with metal in the texture is classified in Class
    139, Textiles: Weaving, subclass 425, even though the metal be resistive
    and/or will produce heat upon passage of an electric current therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for deformable strain gauge type resistors whose element is a mesh,
    weave, or braid.

    114,    for mechanically variable deformable resistors whose resistance
    value is changed by deformation.

    206,    for expanded metal type resistors.

    210+,   for flexible or folding resistors; and especially subclass 212, for
    such resistors formed as a tape or sheet, and subclass 214, for such
    resistors of the cable type.

    259,    for resistors having a wound, braided, or woven casing or housing.

    283+,   for zigzag or sinuous resistors.

    310,    for a resistor whose element extends  through the base.  See also
    (2) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclasses 190+ for knitted fabrics
    incorporating unknitted materials.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclass 425 for woven fabrics including metal.
     See also (3) Note above.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 128.1+ for
    plural strand conductor structure.

    245,    Wire Fabrics and Structure, subclasses 2+ for wire fabrics.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 897 for mesh, woven,
    braided, or multiple strip antennas.


CLS 338/209
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the resistor unit is
    constructed to allow appreciable expansion and/or contraction between the
    terminals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for mechanically deformable variable resistors whose resistance
    value is changed by deformation.

    206,    for expanded metal type resistors.

    208,    for mesh woven or braided resistors.

    210+,   for flexible or folding resistors.

    316,    for resistors with mounting or supporting structure which
    compensates for or permits resistance expansion and/or contraction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 421+ for extensible or elastic woven
    fabrics.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 69 for axially
    extensible conduits, cables and connectors.

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, subclasses 12+ for flexible
    electrical extensions for transmitting electrical energy to vehicles.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 46 for flexible electric heaters.


CLS 338/210
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the resistors unit is
    inherently flexible or foldable, and can be looped upon itself or collapsed
    into various forms without permanent deformation.

    (1)     Note.  For classification here the resistor unit as a whole must be
    flexible or folding.  The flexible or folding characteristic may be present
    in either the element or the supporting base.  A mere flexible element on a
    rigid supporting base, such as a flexible element wound on a rigid core, is
    not classified here, but in subclass 302 below in the case of the example
    given.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for deformable variable resistors, whose resistance value is
    changed by deforming.

    206,    for expanded metal type resistors.

    207,    for resistors whose element and base are permanently folded or
    rolled.

    208,    for mesh, woven or braided resistors.

    315+,   for resistors with mounting or supporting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclass 425 for woven fabrics having metal
    woven therein.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 68+ for
    conduits, cables and conductors, which may be flexible.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 549 for flexible electric heaters.


CLS 338/211
TXT Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein the resistance element is
    impregnated or coated on a flexible base or support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142,    for a mechanically variable resistor whose element is formed as a
    tapered coating.

    262+,   for a resistor having a casing or housing formed as a coating.

    292,    for a zigzag or sinuous resistor whose element is formed as a
    coating.

    307,    for resistors whose element and/or terminals are printed or marked
    on a base.

    308+,   for a resistor whose element is coated on a base.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 58+ for coating processes, per se,
    wherein the product has utility as an electrical article.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for a plural layer stock material in which one of the layers is a coating
    on a base or substrate, see especially subclasses 411+ for a plural layer
    product defined merely by the compositions of the layers.


CLS 338/212
TXT Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein the resistor unit has a
    substantially flat overall shape as in a tape or sheet.

    (1)     Note.  The element and/or base may be flattened to provide the
    overall flattened shape of the unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for variable tape type resistors sensitive to changes in ambient
    temperature.

    207,    for a resistor whose element and base are permanently folded or
    rolled.

    208,    for a mesh, woven, braided resistor.

    297,    for a flattened helical or wound resistor.

    314,    for a resistor whose element and base are formed in layers.


CLS 338/213
TXT Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein an elongated flexible or folding
    resistance element is surrounded or incased by insulative buttons or beads,
    the resistance element extending through the buttons or beads.

    (1)     Note.  To be properly classified here the beads or buttons need not
    be the external layer or surface; but may be only an insulative spacer to
    prevent the element from curving into contact with a flexible external
    housing, such as a flexible metallic sheath.  The faces of the beads or
    buttons are usually rounded or beveled to afford facility in forming or
    bending the unit into the required shapes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    317,    for a resistor whose element projects through a support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 111 for insulated
    conduits, cables and conductors with beads or discs.


CLS 338/214
TXT Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein the resistor has an elongated
    shape and is of substantially uniform external size over its length, the
    resistance element extending between the ends of the resistor.

    (1)     Note.  A plural conductor cable is classified here if the conductor
    has distinctive resistance characteristics.

    (2)     Note.  Subject matter found in this subclass usually consists of a
    resistance wire, often twisted around a core, and inclosed by insulation on
    the exterior, with the whole assembly forming a waterproof and insulated
    resistive conductor.  Electric resistors having only a single element, yet
    having cable characteristics, are also classified in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for cables or tapes responsive to ambient temperature, e.g., fire
    detecting type.

    208,    for mesh, woven, or braided resistors.

    238+,   for an incased, embedded or housed resistor whose element is in
    powdered insulation with an outer metallic sheath.

    243+,   for an incased, embedded, or housed resistor whose element is in
    insulation with an outer metallic sheath.

    260+,   for plural incased resistors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    47+ for making and/or joining of electrical conductors of indefinite length.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 68.1+ for
    conduits, cables and conductors.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 46 for flexible electrical heaters.


CLS 338/215
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein a switch is connected in
    series or parallel with the resistor for effectively connecting or
    disconnecting the resistor from the circuit; and not otherwise classifiable.

    (1)     Note.  As between this class and Class 200, Electricity:  Circuit
    Makers and Breakers, the combination of a switch and a resistor which does
    not perfect the switching is classified here.  The combination of a switch
    and a plurality of resistance elements or portions of an element, the
    switch alternately connecting and disconnecting the respective source or
    electrical energy, or connecting the elements or portions in different
    combinations of series and parallel arrangements to a source as to produce
    a high or low heating effect or different heat distribution patterns, is
    classified in Class 219, Electric Heating, especially subclasses 482+. This
    subclass (215) is usually limited to the structural combination of a single
    resistor and switch, the switch effectively connecting and disconnecting
    the resistor and source of electrical energy.  The general combination of a
    plurality of resistance elements and one or more switches to produce a
    variable resistance value is classified in subclasses 172, 179, 185+, and
    200+ above.  See (1) Note under subclass 200.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172+,   for mechanically variable resistors whose contact slides angularly
    along the element together with switching; and subclass 179 for such
    resistors with a rectilinearly slidable contact and a series switch.  See
    also (1) Note above.

    185+,   for mechanically variable resistors of the tap type involving a
    switch. See also (1) Note above.

    200+,   for mechanically variable resistors generally with a switch.  See
    also (1) Note above.

    334,    for resistors connected electrically to other electrical devices,
    and not otherwise classifiable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 148 for high tension ignition
    systems, including a combined distributor and resistor.

    218,    High-Voltage Switches With Arc Preventing and Extinguishing
    Devices, subclasses 1+ for switches with shunt resistors for contact arc
    preventing or extinguishing.

    219,    Electric Heating, especially subclasses 482 for heating systems
    involving the combination of a switch and resistors.  See also (1) Note
    above.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 112+
    for miscellaneous switching systems which may include a resistor and a
    switch.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 58 for
    safety and protection systems which may include a resistor and a switch.


CLS 338/216
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including a wave guide or coaxial
    transmission line, the resistor or element thereof lying within the outer
    sheath of the wave guide or coaxial line.

    (1)     Note.  Where the line or wave guide is limited to electrical use as
    by recitation of electrical dimensions, or where impedance matching
    structure is included as a quarter wave stub or a particular shape of the
    resistor for impedance matching purposes as tapered ends, classification is
    in Class 333, Wave Transmission Lines and Networks. For classification in
    this subclass (216), only a nominal wave guide or coaxial line, or
    mechanical limitations which do not restrict the line or wave guide to
    electrical use, need be recited.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20+,    for resistors whose value is responsive to electrical current
    and/or voltage, and incased in a wave guide or coaxial line.

    64+,    for resistors with electrical shielding.

    138+    and 217+, for tapered resistors.

    220+,   for a resistor in a detachable electrical connector.

    226+,   for incased, embedded or housed resistors generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 95 for electrical
    measuring devices including a resistor in a wave guide or long line, as for
    example devices for measuring radio frequency power by measuring the change
    in value of a resistor due to this power.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 22 for dissipating
    terminations for long lines, some electrical limitation of the line or
    coupling being recited, as a tapered resistance for impedance matching
    purposes; subclasses 32+ for coupling devices with impedance matching;
    subclass 81 for attenuators; subclasses 84+ for electrically long lines;
    and subclasses 97+ for long line elements and components.  See also (1)
    Note above.


CLS 338/217
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein a physical dimension or
    characteristic of the element changes in one direction gradually or in a
    plurality of discrete progressive steps along the element from one terminal
    towards the other.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the change in physical dimension or characteristic
    is for modifying the resistance value along the element between terminals,
    or to maintain this value uniform along the element between terminals to
    compensate for some other effect.  The change must occur progressively in
    one direction, and as a minimum must occur in two distinct steps.

    (2)     Note.  Class 219, Electric Heating, especially subclasses 538+,
    provides for resistors having a shape, configuration, or arrangement to
    produce a particular pattern of heat distribution.  However, as between
    this class (338) and Class 219, the mere recitation of the term "tapering"
    or the equivalent as a characteristic of the resistance element does not
    preclude classification in this class (338).  For classification in Class
    219 a more detailed recitation of the shape of the resistance element is
    necessary as having a plurality of tapers one at each end of the element,
    or a plurality of elements arranged with a tapered spacing, and resulting
    in a particular heating pattern.

    (3)     Note.  Examples of the subject matter of this subclass are
    resistors whose elements are formed as a coating with the coating thickness
    progressively increasing or decreasing, resistors wherein the chemical
    composition of the element gradually changes over its length, and resistors
    whose element has a gradually changing physical dimension.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89+,    for mechanically variable resistors wherein some significant
    mathematical relationship lies between the mechanical adjustment or
    variation and the resistance value.

    138+,   for tapered mechanically variable resistors.

    216,    for resistors in a coaxial transmission line or wave guide, which
    resistors may be tapered.

    333,    for resistors of a particular configuration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, especially subclasses 538+ for resistors having a
    shape or arrangement to produce a particular heating pattern.  See also (2)
    Note above.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 9 and 34, for
    impedance matching coupling networks which may include a tapered resistor.


CLS 338/218
TXT Subject matter under subclass 217 wherein the resistance element is of the
    helical or wound type as defined in subclass 296 below.

    (1)     Note.  The diameter of the turns of the helix or winding or the
    spacing between the turns may change to produce the taper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141,    for mechanically variable resistors whose resistance element is of
    the helical or wound type and tapered.

    296+,   for resistors of the helical or wound type generally.


CLS 338/219
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including a lamp socket or lamp
    base together with a resistor positioned within the socket or base or
    mounted directly on and in engagement with the surface of the socket or
    base and in circuit with the terminal or terminals of the socket or base,
    and not otherwise classifiable.

    (1)     Note.  The lamp base or socket to receive the lamp is usually of
    the type classifiable as such in Class 439, Electrical Connectors.  Usually
    when structure in addition to that classified in Class 439 is recited, as
    relating to Class 362, Illumination, or Class 340, Communications:
    Electrical, classification is not in this subclass (219) or in Class 439,
    but in the more comprehensive subclass.  See the Search Notes under Classes
    313 and 439 for a statement of the classification lines between Class 439
    and other classes relating to lamp bases and sockets. The resistor must be
    in intimate relationship with the socket or base as being contained therein
    or in a surface recess for classification in this subclass (219).  A mere
    electrical connection between the resistor and the socket or base or a
    remote mounting of the resistor on the socket or base is not sufficient for
    classification here. Subclasses 315+ provides for resistors with mounting
    or supporting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70+,    for mechanically variable resistors in or on a lamp socket.

    216,    for resistors in a coaxial transmission line or wave guide.

    220,    for resistors in a detachable electrical connector.

    221,    for detachable plug type resistor units.

    226+,   for incased, embedded, or housed resistors.

    315+,   for resistors with mounting or supporting means.  See also (1) Note
    above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses, for
    electric lamp and discharge devices.  See also (1) Note above.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses, for electric lamp and discharge device systems, which may
    include a resistor as an element of the system.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, especially subclasses 84+ and 366+,
    for communication systems which may include a resistance and lamp socket or
    base together with other communication structure.  See also (1) Note above.

    362,    Illumination, appropriate subclasses, for illuminating devices
    which may include a resistor as an element thereof with illumination
    structure. See also (1) Note above.


CLS 338/220
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including a detachable electrical
    connector, and a resistor or element thereof being disposed within the
    connector and in circuit with the terminal or terminals of the connector.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the resistor or element thereof is disposed within
    an insulating housing or casing of the connector.  The resistor or element
    for classification here must be disposed within some connector structure.
    Where the resistor is merely mounted externally on the connector or
    electrically connected thereto, classification is not here.  Subclasses
    315+ provides for resistors with mounting or supporting means.  As between
    Class 439, Electrical Connectors, and this subclass (220) the claimed
    recitation of a resistor enclosed in a detachable electrical connector is
    sufficient for classification in this subclass (220). However, for
    classification here the complete resistor (element and terminals) must
    either be claimed, or it must be evident from the context that such a
    complete resistor be intended in the claim, in addition to the detachable
    electrical connector. In short this subclass provides for the combination
    of a distinct detachable electrical connector and a distinct resistance
    therein.  A mere resistance element and its terminals is classified in
    subclasses 322+ below.  The combination of a resistance element nominally
    recited and a single detachable connector as a terminal of this element is
    classified in Class 439, Electrical Connectors; or Class 174, Electricity:
    Conductors and Insulators, if the element be a conduit or cable and no
    detachable connector is present, but rather a more permanent connection
    such as a joint.  See also (1) Note under subclass 226 and (2) Note under
    subclass 238.

    (2)     Note.  The term electrical connector as here used denotes a device
    which makes an electrical connection between two electrical circuits
    external thereto, as opposed to a mere plug-in resistor unit as classified
    in subclass 221 below which merely makes an electrical connection with the
    resistance element which is a part of the unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219,    for resistors in or on a lamp socket or base.

    221,    for detachable plug-in type resistor units.  See (2) Note above.

    226+,   for incased, embedded or housed resistors.

    315+,   for resistors with mounting or supporting-means.  See also (1) Note
    above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, especially subclasses 74+
    and 84, for conduits and cables with end structure or joints, the conduit
    or cable being nominally resistive.  See also (1) Note above.


CLS 338/221
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the resistor has terminal
    structure which is readily detachable from the associated terminals, and
    which terminal structure constitutes the resistor mounting means, the
    resistor being readily separable as a unit from the associated terminals.

    (1)     Note.  As all resistors must have some type terminal or connector
    in order to be connected in a circuit for use, it is necessary that the
    terminal structure be significant, as by being included in the patent
    claim. Usually the terminal structure constitutes parallel prongs or a
    screw plug.  See also (2) Note under subclass 220 above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76,     for interchangeable resistors of different resistance values.

    77,     for plug box type resistance units.

    220,    for a detachable electrical connector having a resistor therein.
    See also (2) Note under subclass 220.

    322,    for resistors whose terminals have detachable connectors other than
    the connections to the resistance element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, especially subclass 542+ for electric heaters
    having detachable resistor units.


CLS 338/222
TXT Resistors under the class definition wherein the resistance element is a
    liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for resistors whose element is a liquid responsive in resistance
    value to ambient temperature; subclass 38 for such resistors actuated by
    fluid or gas pressure; and subclass 44 for such resistors gravity
    stabilized or inertia actuated.

    56,     for a liquid resistance element which is cooled by circulation.

    80+,    for variable liquid resistors.

    156,    for a mechanically variable resistor  with a liquid contact
    adjustable over the length of the resistance element.

    231,    for a resistor whose element is incased, embedded or housed in a
    liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 9 for liquid
    conductors.


CLS 338/223
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the resistance element is
    granular or powdered in final form.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter wherein an inert, granular grain base
    material is impregnated or coated with a resistive layer such that a
    resistive film or coating is formed on the individual granular base grains,
    is properly classified in this subclass, unless otherwise provided for
    above.

    (2)     Note.  When the element is formed as a compacted mass of powdered
    or granular material classification is in this subclass, if some retaining
    means such as a casing is required to maintain the mass in its formed
    shape, i.e., the compacted mass crumbles to a powder or to grains when the
    retaining structure is removed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for coherer type resistors whose element is granular or powdered.

    54,     for resistors with granular or powdered elements and with cooling
    gas or liquid circulation.

    88,     for penetrating type mechanically variable resistors having
    powdered elements.

    100,    for a compressible type variable resistor whose element is granular
    or powdered.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 228+ for a consolidated metal powder composition.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 117 for alternating or pulsating current
    telegraphy systems using a coherer.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 552 for electric heaters including
    granular or powdered resistors.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 126+ for
    high voltage dissipators which may include a granular or powdered resistor.


CLS 338/224
TXT Subject matter under subclass 223 wherein the granular or powdered element
    consists of a mixture of two or more different materials, each material
    being granular or powdered in the final state.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter in this subclass (224) usually consists of a
    conductive powdered material mixed with one or more powdered insulative
    materials. However, a mixture of two or more resistive materials in a
    powdered form is properly classified here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7+,     for a resistor using diverse material to compensate for temperature
    change.


CLS 338/225
TXT Subject matter under subclass 223 wherein the granular or powdered material
    constituting the resistor element is substantially pure carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Where the granular material is a carbon compound,
    classification is not here, but in the generic subclass 223 above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for a coherer type resistor with granular carbon particles.


CLS 338/226
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the resistance element is
    substantially completely covered or surrounded with a solid, liquid, or
    gaseous substance or a vacuum layer to provide a barrier or separation
    between the element and the outside, or together with any structure
    maintaining such substances or layer around the resistor.

    (1)     Note.  A resistive wire, coiled resistive wire, wire of resistive
    metal, or wire of no significant resistive composition is classified in
    Class 174, Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, especially subclasses
    110+.  Where the covered wire includes structure other than a mere coil,
    which is peculiar to resistance or heating, such as a zigzag shape, or
    where the wire is of a nonmetallic composition such as carbon, or of a
    significantly resistive composition such as iron, classification is in this
    class (338), especially subclasses 314+.  Electrically conductive or
    resistive wire with an insulating coating is classified in Class 428, Stock
    Material or Miscellaneous, Articles, subclasses 375+, even if no structural
    limitations are recited.  Metal coated conductive or resistive metal bases
    as compound metal stock are classified in Class 29, Metal Working,
    subclasses 194+.  See also (2) Note under subclass 238 below.

    (2)     Note.  Resistors claiming heat insulating or heat conducting
    casings or housings are classified here.  The combination of a resistance
    used for heating purposes surrounded or incased by the structure to be
    heated or for distributing, directing, or concentrating the heating by the
    resistance is classified in Class 219, Electric Heating, especially
    subclasses 19+.  See also section X of the Class Definition.

    (3)     Note.  A resistor with a casing or housing claimed as an electrical
    shield or equivalent terminology is classified in subclasses 64+ above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for a resistor actuated by a movable magnet through a housing or
    partition.

    19,     for photoconductive resistors with a transparent housing.

    53+,    for resistors with cooling gas or liquid circulation.

    57,     for resistors in a ventilating or vented casing.

    64+,    for resistors with electrical shielding.  See also (3) Note above.

    66+,    for ignition interference suppression type resistors.

    77,     for plug boxes.

    161,    for a mechanically variable resistor whose element is incased, the
    casing being partly removed to form a track for the contact.

    163,    164, 184, and 199, for mechanically variable resistors with
    housings.

    210+,   for flexible or folding resistors; and especially subclass 211 for
    impregnated flexible resistors; subclass 212 for tape or sheet resistors;
    and subclass 214 for cable type resistors.

    216,    for a resistor in a coaxial transmission line or wave guide.

    220,    for a resistor in a detachable electrical connector.

    223+,   for granular or powdered resistors.

    310,    for resistors whose element extends through a base.

    332,    for a resistor whose terminal embraces or surrounds the resistance
    element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclass 60 for electric heaters situated below ground level.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 17+ and 50+,
    for boxes and housings limited by claimed structure to electrical use and
    not otherwise classifiable; and subclasses 68+ for conduits, cables, and
    conductors which may be embedded, incased or housed.  See also (1) Note
    above.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 535+ for heating resistors incased in
    structure to be heated.  See also (2) Note above.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 2.1+ for envelopes for electric lamps or
    similar devices; and subclasses 3.2+ for outlet or junction box type
    receptacles.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 90+ for an inductor device with an
    outer casing or housing.


CLS 338/227
TXT Subject matter under subclass 226 including marks, tags, colors, or other
    structure or configuration, usually on the exterior of the casing or
    housing to provide a visual indication of the resistance value of the
    resistance element within the housing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    for variable resistors having a contact position indicating lamp.

    196,    for variable resistors having a resistor actuator position
    indicator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, appropriate subclasses, for
    information displaying structure generally.


CLS 338/228
TXT Subject matter under subclass 226 wherein a casing or housing, which is
    usually elongated and cylindrical, extends through a plate, wall, or
    similar structure whose thickness is less than the length of the casing or
    housing, the casing or housing being secured to the plate or wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28+,    for probe type resistors whose resistance value is responsive to
    ambient temperature.

    229,    for resistors in a probe or line connector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 18 and 50+ for
    boxes and housings within which a conduit or cable may extend; subclasses
    48+ for wall mounted conduits; and subclasses 151+ for insulators extending
    through a wall or plate.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 189+ for a pipe joined to a
    plate.


CLS 338/229
TXT Subject matter under subclass 226 wherein the casing or housing is formed
    as a single thin elongated member, such as a tube, one end being closed
    over the resistance element, with flexible leads externally connected or
    joined to terminals or with leads extending into the other end of the
    member for connection to the resistance element, together with structure or
    configuration, such as a handle or a particular shape of the member, which
    permits or facilitates free movement of the elongated member with the
    resistance element therein.

    (1)     Note.  Most of the patens in this subclass are subcombinations of
    instruments adapted to perform particular functions such as thermometers,
    immersion heaters, and soldering irons, no significant structure being
    claimed relating to the performance of these functions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28+,    for probe type resistors whose resistance value is responsive to
    ambient temperature.  See also (1) Note above.

    228,    for probe type resistors extending through and secured to a wall or
    plate.

    315+,   for resistors with supporting handles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 538+ for electric heaters formed as
    probes, especially subclasses 850+ for soldering irons; and subclass 437
    for immersion fluid heaters.  See also (1) Note above.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 149 for electrical
    testing or measuring devices with probes or prods.


CLS 338/230
TXT Subject matter under subclass 226 wherein the casing or housing or one
    layer of the casing or housing is formed of metal which is cast in situ
    around the resistance element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248     and 250, for resistors whose element is in insulation with an outer
    metallic sheath, the insulation being formed and hardened in situ, as by
    molding.

    253,    for resistors whose element is embedded or enclosed in a groove or
    recess with a filling hardened in situ.

    269     and 275, for incased, embedded, or housed resistors generally whose
    casing or housing is formed on and hardened on the resistor, such as by
    molding.


CLS 338/231
TXT Subject matter under subclass 226 wherein the resistance element is incased
    or enclosed in a liquid.

    (1)     Note.  The liquid need not directly engage the element for
    classification here, but may be separated from the element by a solid
    housing layer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for a resistor which is cooled by a circulating liquid medium.

    80+,    for mechanically variable resistors whose element is a liquid.

    222,    for resistors generally whose element is a liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 280+ for fluid heaters.


CLS 338/232
TXT Subject matter under subclass 226 wherein the casing or housing is in two
    or more parts which are readily openable or separable as to provide access
    to or to permit removal of the resistance element, and/or wherein the
    casing or housing together with the element includes structure or has a
    configuration to permit removal or separation of the element from the
    casing or housing.

    (1)     Note.  For classification here the casing may be formed in two
    parts as a box and cover.  The parts may be secured together by screw
    threads, snaps, or by gravity with the resistor positioned for gravity to
    maintain a closing effect on the two parts.  The element and casing may
    also include this structure to permit ready separation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 3.8 for outlet or junction box type
    receptacles with closures; and subclass 24 for closures.


CLS 338/233
TXT Subject matter under subclass 232 wherein the casing or housing is formed
    as an elongated tube with an open end, and includes a plug, disc, or cap,
    which is readily separable from the remainder of the casing or housing,
    closing the otherwise open end.

    (1)     Note.  The resistance element or terminal may form this plug, disc,
    or cap.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331,    for incased, embedded, or housed resistors, wherein the terminal or
    lead extends into the end of an elongated casing or housing, and including
    a sealing plug, disc, or cap.


CLS 338/234
TXT Subject matter under subclass 226 wherein a vacuum or gaseous spacing
    exists between the outer surface of the resistance element and the inner
    surface of the external casing or housing.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this subclass, the gaseous or vacuum
    spacing must extend over substantially the entire adjacent surfaces of the
    external casing or housing and element. There must be no direct contact
    between the element and casing or housing. However, the intervening space
    need not be entirely gaseous or vacuum.  Spacing elements may be inserted
    between the element and casing or housing to maintain the spaced relation,
    provided only a relatively small portion of the vacuum or gaseous space is
    devoted to this purpose.  Where the casing is extended through the interior
    of the resistance element, the element may directly engage the portion
    extending therethrough, as being wound thereon, and yet be classified in
    this subclass. Air spacing is considered to be gaseous spacing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for resistors whose value is responsive to gas, vapor, or moisture.

    36+,    for resistors whose value is responsive to a fluid or gas pressure.

    53+,    for resistors in a gas cooling medium or with ventilated passages.

    57,     for resistors with a vented or ventilating casing or housing.

    231,    for resistors whose element is embedded, incased, or housed in
    liquid.

    238+,   for resistors whose element is embedded in powdered insulating
    material with an outer metallic sheath.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 17+ for boxes
    and housing with a fluid or vacuum and limited to electrical use; and
    subclasses 50.5+ for hermetically sealed envelope type boxes and housings.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 366+ for electric heaters utilizing
    gaseous or vacuum spaces, as to control the direction of the heat.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, for electric lamp and
    discharge devices utilizing an envelope enclosing a vacuum or gaseous space.


CLS 338/235
TXT Subject matter under subclass 234, wherein a plurality of resistors or
    elements for resistors are enclosed in a casing or housing with a vacuum or
    gaseous spacing between the outer surface of each of the resistors or
    elements and the inner surface of the external casing or housing.

    (1)     Note.  The gaseous or vacuum spacing need not extend between the
    individual resistors or elements for classification in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    260+,   for plural incased, embedded or housed resistors generally.

    320,    for plural supported resistors generally.  See also the Search
    Notes under this subclass for a more complete field of search for plural
    resistors.


CLS 338/236
TXT Subject matter under subclass 234 wherein the gaseous or vacuum spacing is
    of uniform thickness over the length of the resistance element.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass usually involves a
    cylindrical or flat resistance element as formed by a rod-like resistance
    mass or a cylindrical or flattened cylindrical helix, with the uniform
    spacing extending between the outer surface of the element and the inner
    surface of the casing or housing.  The spacing need not be uniform around
    the periphery of the resistance element, as when a flat resistance element
    is inclosed in a casing or housing whose inner surface is circularly
    cylindrical, for classification in this subclass.


CLS 338/237
TXT Subject matter under subclass 236 wherein the gaseous or vacuum spacing is
    completely sealed from the exterior of the resistor, as to prevent the
    passage of any gas or moisture.

    (1)     Note.  The sealing for classification in this subclass must be
    something more than a mere tight fit between surfaces of the element,
    terminals, and/or casing, as by a plug.  The subject matter classified here
    usually involves some bonding between the surfaces, as produced by
    cementing, soldering, or fusing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164,    for mechanically variable resistors with an angularly slidable
    contact and a hermetically sealed housing.

    248,    250, 269, and 275, for resistors at least part of the casing or
    housing thereof being formed and hardened on the resistor, e.g., molded.

    257     and 262+, for resistors at least part of the casing or housing
    thereof being formed as a coating.

    274,    for resistors whose terminal extends into an end of an elongated
    casing or housing with a sealing plug, disc, or cap.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 17+ and 50.5+
    for hermetically sealed boxes and housings limited by claim to electrical
    use.


CLS 338/238
TXT Subject matter under subclass 226 wherein the casing or housing constitutes
    a metallic sheath with powdered insulation therein, the resistance element
    being embedded in the powdered insulation and insulated from the metallic
    sheath.

    (1)     Note.  The insulation must be in powdered form in the finished
    resistor, as opposed to being added in powdered form and hardened as by
    molding, the latter subject matter being in subclasses 243+ below.  However
    a compacted mass of powder is still considered powder for classification
    here, if the mass breaks done into powder upon removal of any restraining
    structure.

    (2)     Note.  Class 174, Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators,
    subclasses 102+ includes cables with a conductor, metallic sheath, and
    powdered insulation therebetween; and also includes in subclass 75, cables
    of this type with end structure and joint, and in subclass 77 cables of
    this type with end structure and seal.  The mere recitation of such terms
    as resistance, resistance element, helical resistance, coil resistance, or
    a terminal at one end of the sheathed resistor does not preclude
    classification in these subclasses as opposed to this subclasses (238+).
    For classification in subclasses 238+ significant resistance structure or
    configuration must be recited, as the resistor having a zigzag pattern, or
    wound on a core. The recited combination of a resistor broadly with a
    terminal at each end is classified in subclasses 238+ as opposed to Class
    174.  However, where a resistor is disclosed, but is only claimed as
    conductor, or wire, or in similar nomenclature, together with one or more
    terminals classification is in Class 174, especially subclasses 70+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     88, 100, and 223+, for resistors with granular or powdered elements.

    64+,    for resistors with electrical shielding.

    214,    for cable type resistors. 243+, for resistors generally whose
    element is embedded in insulation with a metallic sheath.

    256+,   for incased, embedded, or housed resistors, the casing or housing
    being in plural layers.

    277+,   for resistors with mechanical protecting structure such as a guard,
    screen, or shield.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses  614+ for methods of making and assembly
    of resistors involving enveloping by filling with powdered insulation; and
    subclasses 616+ for such methods involving the powdering insulation.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    47+ for making and/or joining of electrical conductors of indefinite length.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, especially subclasses 74+
    for conduits, cables and conductors with end structure; subclass 98 with
    embedded conduit-duct or conductor; and subclasses 102+ for conduits,
    cables, or conductors with conductive armor or sheath.  See also (2) Note
    above.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 200+ and especially subclass 546+ for
    electric heaters with a metallic sheath over powdered insulation.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 63.2 for powdered dielectric or electrically
    insulating compositions.


CLS 338/239
TXT Subject matter under subclass 238 wherein two or more physically separate
    and distinct resistance elements are embedded in powdered insulation in a
    common metallic sheath, or including two or more resistors each being as
    defined in subclass 238 above, i.e., each resistor includes a distinct
    metallic sheath containing a resistance element embedded in powdered
    insulation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    260+,   for plural incased, embedded, or housed resistors generally.

    320,    for plural resistors with mounting or supporting means.  See also
    the Search Notes under this subclass for a more complete field of search
    for plural resistors.

    322,    for plural resistance elements in parallel between terminals.


CLS 338/240
TXT Subject matter under subclass 238 wherein structure is provided to position
    the resistance terminals or leads so that the spacing therebetween is small
    relative to the overall resistor dimensions.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of the subject matter in this and the indented
    subclass are where the terminals are side by side or coaxial at one end of
    a resistor, as where the resistance element is looped, or where a
    connection between the terminal extends through a helical resistor, all
    being embedded in powdered insulation with a metallic sheath.  For
    classification here definite structure must be provided to maintain the
    terminals adjacent, such as insulation joining the terminals or structure
    joining the ends of the metallic sheath.  An elongated resistor with
    terminals at its ends and bent to position the terminals adjacent is not
    classified in this subclass, but in subclass 238 above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238,    for resistors whose element is embedded in powdered material with a
    metallic sheath, the resistor being elongated and the terminals being at
    opposite ends of the sheath.  See also (1) Note above.

    265,    for resistors whose casing or housing is formed as a coating, the
    element being coiled on a core with the terminals or leads at one end of
    the core.

    271,    for resistors whose terminal forms a casing or housing.

    326,    for resistors generally whose terminals are adjacent.


CLS 338/241
TXT Subject matter under subclass 240 wherein the metallic sheath surrounds or
    closes around the loop formed by the resistance element and/or leads
    without extending into the space between the ends of the loop or into the
    bight of the loop, i.e., the sheath surrounds the loop as a unit, as
    opposed to a sheathed elongated resistance element with the sheath and
    element being together bent into a loop.


CLS 338/242
TXT Subject matter under subclass 238 wherein the metallic sheath has a
    significant cross-sectional or overall shape.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of a significant shape for classification in this
    subclass are sheaths of triangular or polygonal cross section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333,    for resistors of particular configuration generally.


CLS 338/243
TXT Subject matter under subclass 226 wherein the resistance element is
    substantially entirely enclosed in an insulating layer, which is either a
    solid mass of insulating material or a noninsulating material coated or
    otherwise covered with insulation to present an insulated surface, and a
    metallic layer substantially entirely surrounding or enclosing the
    insulating layer to provide a sheath.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64+,    for resistors with electrical shielding.

    216,    for a resistor in a coaxial transmission line or wave guide.

    238+,   for resistors whose element is embedded in powdered insulation with
    a metallic sheath.

    256+,   for resistors generally whose casing or housing is in plural layers
    external to the element.

    277,    for resistors with mechanically protecting structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 35+ for
    anti-inductive shields or screens not otherwise classified.  See also the
    Search Notes under this subclass.


CLS 338/244
TXT Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein the insulation constitutes a
    conductive liner, as of metal, within the metallic sheath and between the
    sheath and the resistance element, the liner being coated with insulating
    material to present an insulated surface to the sheath and resistance
    element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    245,    for resistors enclosed in insulation with a metallic sheath, the
    entire insulation and/or entire metallic sheath being formed as a coating.


CLS 338/245
TXT Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein the entire insulation and/or the
    entire sheath constitutes a coating or coatings.

    (1)     Note.  The insulation may be coated on the resistance element or on
    the interior of the sheath, or the sheath may be coated on the exterior
    surface of the insulation.  The insulation or sheath may be formed as a
    plurality of coatings.  However, where in addition the insulation or sheath
    includes a noncoating layer as well as a coated layer, classification is
    not in this subclass but elsewhere under subclass 243.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244,    for resistors whose element is in insulation with an outer metallic
    sheath, the insulation being coated on a metallic liner.

    248     and 250, for resistors whose element is in insulation with an outer
    metallic sheath, the insulation being formed and hardened in the metallic
    sheath and/or on the element, as by molding.

    262+,   for a resistor whose casing or housing is formed as a coating.


CLS 338/246
TXT Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein the resistance element has an
    opening therethrough, as by having a tubular or annular shape, the
    insulation and sheath extending through the opening to cover the inner
    surface of the resistance element, as well as extending over and covering
    the outer surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for resistors with ventilating passages.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclass 61 for wells with heating resistors surrounding
    production tubes through which a liquid flows.


CLS 338/247
TXT Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein the metallic sheath is formed in
    two or more parts secured together.

    (1)     Note.  Usually in this subclass the parts are permanently secured
    together, as by welding, bending, or riveting. Examples of the subject
    matter in this subclass are a capped tubular sheath, a two part sheath with
    one or both parts being channel shaped, or a two part sheath with one part
    recessed and the other part constituting a cover for the recess.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232+,   for incased, embedded, or housed resistors whose casing or housing
    is readily openable or separable from the element.

    252+,   for resistors whose element is embedded or enclosed in a groove or
    recess.

    256+,   for resistors with a plural layer casing.

    274,    for incased, embedded, or housed elongated resistors with a sealing
    plug disc or cap, the leads or terminals extending into the ends of the
    casing or housing.


CLS 338/248
TXT Subject matter under subclass 247 wherein the insulation is formed between
    the resistance element and metallic sheath and hardened in this position;
    or wherein the insulation is formed on and hardened on the resistance
    element or in the metallic sheath, the other of the resistance element and
    metallic sheath being later placed on the formed insulation.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the insulation is usually molded or
    vitrified in position.  Where the insulation is hardened in a preformed
    mass and then applied to the sheath and element, classification is not in
    this subclass, but in the generic Class 247, above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244     and 245, for resistors whose element is in insulation with a
    metallic sheath, the insulation constituting a coating.

    250,    for resistors generally whose element is in insulation with a
    metallic sheath, the insulation being formed or hardened in situ.

    269     and 275, for incased, embedded, or housed resistors not classified
    above, the casing or housing being formed on and hardened on the resistor,
    e.g., molded.


CLS 338/249
TXT Subject matter under subclass 247 wherein the metallic sheath is formed as
    two substantially flat sheets secured together with the resistance element
    and insulation disposed between the sheets.

    (1)     Note.  Usually in this subclass the insulation is also composed of
    flat sheets with a flattened resistance element disposed between the
    sheets.  A slight bending of the sheets to close the spaces adjacent the
    edges of the sheets is still considered substantially flat for
    classification in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212,    for flexible or folding resistors of the sheet type.

    251,    for resistors whose element is in insulation with an outer metallic
    sheath, the metallic sheath being in one piece and bent or folded over the
    insulation to form a flat surface on each side of the insulation.

    254+,   for a flattened resistor whose element is disposed between flat
    layers.


CLS 338/250
TXT Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein the insulation is formed between
    the resistance and the metallic sheath and hardened in this position; or
    wherein the insulation is formed on and hardened on the resistance element
    or in the metallic sheath, the other of the resistance element and metallic
    sheath being placed on the formed insulation.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the insulation is usually molded or
    vitrified in position.  Where the insulation is hardened in a preformed
    mass and then applied to the sheath and element, classification is not in
    this subclass, but in the generic subclass 243 above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244     and 245, for resistors whose element is in insulation with a
    metallic sheath, the insulation constituting a coating.

    248,    for a resistor whose element is in insulation with a plural part
    metallic sheath, the insulation being formed or hardened in situ.

    269     and 275, for incased, embedded, or housed resistors not classified
    above, the casing or housing being formed on and hardened on the resistor,
    e.g., molded.


CLS 338/251
TXT Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein the metallic sheath is formed as
    a sheet and surrounds the solid insulation, the two opposite sides of the
    sheet either substantially meeting or overlapping.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the metallic sheath is usually formed as a
    C, the ends of the C substantially meeting or overlapping around the solid
    insulation; or the metallic sheath is formed a bendable sheet, and is
    wrapped around the solid insulation with some overlapping.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259,    for incased, embedded, or housed resistors, the casing or housing
    being wound over the resistance element.


CLS 338/252
TXT Subject matter under subclass 226 wherein the resistance element is
    disposed in a groove, slot, or recess, or in a channel shaped container.

    (1)     Note.  The walls of the recess or groove when open on one side do
    not completely enclose the resistance element; and such subject matter
    above is not classifiable here, but in subclasses 285, 303, and 311 below.
    Some other structure is necessary in addition such as a sheath on the
    element, or a cover on the open face of the recess or groove for
    classification here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161,    for a mechanically variable incased resistor whose casing is partly
    removed to form a track for the contact.

    232,    for incased, embedded, or housed resistors whose casing or housing
    are readily openable and/or separable from the resistance element.

    247,    for embedded or enclosed resistors having a metallic sheath formed
    in separate parts, one part being recessed or channeled.

    285,    for a zigzag or sinuous resistor whose element extends along a
    groove in a base.

    303,    for a helical or wound resistor whose element is coiled in a groove
    on a core.

    311,    for a resistor generally whose element is mounted in a groove in a
    base.


CLS 338/253
TXT Subject matter under subclass 252 wherein the groove or recess contains a
    filling which is molded or otherwise hardened in place and which fills the
    space between the resistance element and the wall of the groove or recess
    and/or which closes the open side of the groove or recess.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248,    for embedded or enclosed resistors having a metallic sheath formed
    in separate parts, one part being recessed or channeled with solid
    insulation hardened or molded in the recess channel.

    269     and 275, for incased, embedded, or housed resistors, whose casings
    or housings are formed on and hardened on the element, such as being molded.


CLS 338/254
TXT Subject matter under subclass 226 wherein the resistance element is flat in
    shape, as in a planar zigzag resistance element or a helical resistance
    element wound on a flat ribbon, and wherein the casing or housing is formed
    as two flat preformed layers, the resistance element being disposed between
    and substantially enclosed by the layers.

    (1)     Note.  Usually additional structure is provided as bolts, screws,
    or clamps for securing the layers together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212,    for flexible or folding resistors formed as tapes or sheets.

    249,    for a resistor which is embedded in insulative material surrounded
    by a plural part metallic sheath formed of flat sheets.

    268,    for a helical or wound resistor whose element is coiled on a core,
    with a preformed sleeve surrounding the element.


CLS 338/255
TXT Subject matter under subclass 254 wherein the layers are fastened to one
    another as by fusing, vulcanizing or other intimate bonding of all or part
    of the layer surfaces.

    (1)     Note.  Where the layers are merely secured together by an adhesive
    such as glue, classification is not in this subclass, but in the generic
    subclass 254 above.  Where the two layers are intimately bonded together to
    be integral, the structure of the casing or housing in this subclass may
    resemble the corresponding structure in subclass 275 below.  In this
    subclass 255 the layers are preformed and applied to the resistance element
    as layers to be then fastened together. While in subclass 275 below the
    casing or housing is usually applied as a plastic mass and then hardened in
    place.  Usually in subclass 275 due to the nature of the molding or
    hardening process the casing or housing is intimately associated with or
    adheres to the surface of the resistance structure which it surrounds,
    while in this subclass 255 this is unnecessary.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212,    for flexible or folding sheet or tape resistors whose casing layers
    are fused or coalesced together.

    269     and 275, for a resistor whose casing or housing is formed on and
    hardened on as by molding.  See also (1) Note above.


CLS 338/256
TXT Subject matter under subclass 226 wherein the casing or housing is formed
    as a plurality of layers, each layer in itself substantially completely
    surrounding the resistance element.

    (1)     Note.  The inner layer adjacent the resistance element may extend
    within the resistance element, as when the inner layer is molded to a
    helical resistance element whose coils are spaced, and yet be classified in
    this subclass.  It is only necessary that two covering layers be provided,
    and that the layers be positioned between the exterior of the resistance
    element and the exterior surface of the resistor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231,    for resistors incased, embedded or housed in plural layer casings
    or housing where one of the layers is a liquid.

    234+,   for resistors incased, embedded, or housed in plural layer casings
    or housing where one of the layers is a gaseous or vacuum space.

    238+,   for resistors embedded or enclosed in powdered material with a
    metallic sheath.

    243+,   for resistors embedded or enclosed in solid material with a
    metallic sheath.


CLS 338/257
TXT Subject matter under subclass 256 wherein one or more of the layers
    constitute a coating.

    (1)     Note.  The coating layer may be coated on one of the other casing
    or housing layers or on the resistance element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262+,   for resistors generally whose casings or housings are formed as a
    coating.


CLS 338/258
TXT Subject matter under subclass 226, wherein the resistance element is formed
    as a coating on the interior surface of the casing or housing.

    (1)     Note.  Usually in this subclass the casing or housing is formed as
    a hollow insulating tube with the resistance element coated on the inside.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for a resistor whose element is coated on the interior of the
    casing with liquid circulating through the resistance.

    262+,   for a resistor whose casing is formed as a coating.

    308+,   for a resistor whose element is coated on a base.


CLS 338/259
TXT Subject matter under subclass 226, wherein the casing or housing is formed
    of a braided, wound or woven material; or wherein the casing is braided,
    wound, or woven on the inner resistance structure.

    (1)     Note.  Where the wound, woven, or braided material is impregnated
    with other material, classification is in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208,    for a resistor whose element is formed as a mesh, weave, or braid.

    209,    extensible resistors.

    210+,   for flexible or folding resistors.


CLS 338/260
TXT Subject matter under subclass 226, including a plurality of resistors (each
    having separate and distinct resistance element and terminals) as defined
    in subclass 226 above which are supported or otherwise related to form a
    unitary structure; or a plurality of resistors (each having separate and
    distinct resistance elements and terminals) which are embedded, incased or
    housed in a common casing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for plural separate diverse resistors.

    203,    for structure readily severable into a plurality of independent
    resistors.

    235,    for plural incased, embedded, or housed resistors or elements with
    a gaseous or vacuum spacing between the elements and the casing or housing.

    239,    for plural resistors or elements of the type where the element is
    in powdered insulation with an outer metallic sheath.

    320,    for plural resistors with a mounting or supporting means.  See also
    the Search Notes under this subclass for a more complete field of search
    involving plural resistors.


CLS 338/261
TXT Subject matter under subclass 260 wherein at least one of the resistors is
    of the helical or wound type as defined in subclass 296 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263+    and 267+, for single incased, embedded, or housed helical or wound
    resistors.

    296+,   for helical or wound resistors generally.  See also the Search
    Notes under this subclass for a more complete field of search for helical
    or wound resistors.


CLS 338/262
TXT Subject matter under subclass 226 wherein the casing or housing is formed
    as a coating.

    (1)     Note.  A casing or housing formed as a coating in this subclass is
    usually a thin layer or uniform thickness, the external shape of the
    coating being similar to the shape of the surface covered.  While a casing
    or housing formed and hardened on the resistor such as molded, in subclass
    275 below, usually involves a relatively thick covering, whose external
    surface has a shape distinct from the resistance covered, as produced by a
    mold.  In this subclass impregnating is considered to constitute a coating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244,    for resistors whose element is in insulation with an outer metallic
    sheath, the insulation being coated on a conducting liner.

    257,    for a incased, embedded or housed resistor, whose casing or housing
    is formed in plural layers external to the resistance element, one layer
    being formed as a coating.

    269     and 275, for a resistor, with a casing or housing formed and
    hardened on the resistance element, such as molded. See also (1) Note above.

    308+,   for resistors generally whose elements are coated on a base.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 613+ for methods of enveloping or housing
    resistors including metal working or assembly steps not otherwise
    classifiable together with a coating step; and subclasses 194+ for stock
    material of metal with a metallic coating.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a plural layer product comprising a coating or a base or substrate, and
    involving resistance material, note especially subclasses 411+ for a
    nonstructural plural layer product in which only compositions of the layers
    are claimed.


CLS 338/263
TXT Subject matter under subclass 262 including an elongated resistance element
    formed as two or more continuous closed coils or loops as a spiral, helix,
    or toroidal winding as defined in subclass 296.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254,    for a helical or wound flattened resistance element embedded
    between flat layers fastened together.

    261,    for helical or wound plural resistors.

    268,    for a helical or wound resistor including a sleeve engaging over
    the resistance element.

    296+,   for helical or wound resistors generally.


CLS 338/264
TXT Subject matter under subclass 263 wherein the resistance element is wound
    or coiled on a core, the surface of the core engaging the helix or winding
    over substantially the entire periphery of the core and over the entire
    axial length of the helix or winding as for example to reinforce or shape
    the helix or winding over its length.

    (1)     Note.  The manner of assembly of the element on the core is
    immaterial for classification in this subclass.  Often the coating acts as
    an adhesive to secure the resistance element to the core.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270,    for incased, embedded, or housed helical or wound resistors
    generally whose elements are coiled on a core.

    301,    for resistors generally whose elements are coiled on a flat or
    ribbon base.

    302+,   for resistors generally whose elements are coiled on a cylindrical
    or prismatic core.


CLS 338/265
TXT Subject matter under subclass 264, wherein the resistance terminals are
    located at one end of the core, or wherein the resistor includes structure
    or is shaped to enable the leads to extend from the resistor at one end
    only of the core.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     for resistors with bifilar windings for reducing the inductance of
    the windings.

    229,    for incased, embedded, or housed resistors of the probe type.

    240+,   for resistors whose elements are in powdered insulation with an
    outer metallic sheath, the resistance terminals or leads being adjacent.

    296,    for helical or wound resistors whose elements are of a particular
    shape.

    326,    for resistors generally whose terminals are adjacent.


CLS 338/266
TXT Subject matter under subclass 264 wherein at least one of the resistance
    terminals surrounds the resistance element and/or the core, as a cap or an
    enclosing ring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for a resistor which is temperature responsive, whose terminal
    forms a casing or housing.

    271,    for a resistor whose terminal forms a casing or housing.

    272,    for a resistor whose terminal or lead surrounds and is secured to
    the casing or housing.

    313,    for resistors in general whose terminals embrace the base.


CLS 338/267
TXT Subject matter under subclass 226, wherein the resistance element is
    elongated and formed as two or more continuous closed coils or loops as a
    spiral, helix, or toroidal winding as defined in subclass 296 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261,    for plural resistors at least one being helical or wound.

    263+,   for a resistor which is helical or wound, and whose casing or
    housing is formed as a coating.

    278,    282, 286, and 296+, for resistors generally involving a helical
    element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 90+ for inductors with an outer casing
    or housing.


CLS 338/268
TXT Subject matter under subclass 267 wherein the casing or housing constitutes
    a preformed sleeve which is disposed over the cylindrical helix or winding,
    the inner surface of the sleeve engaging the outer cylindrical surface of
    the helix or winding over the entire periphery, i.e., the bore of the
    sleeve is fitted to the helix or winding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229,    for probe type, incased, embedded, or housed resistors.

    256+,   for a resistor whose element is surrounded by a plurality of
    layers, one or more of which may be a sleeve.


CLS 338/269
TXT Subject matter under subclass 267 wherein the casing or housing surrounding
    the helical or wound element has been applied in a plastic formable state
    with substantially no intervening spaces between the casing or housing and
    the internal resistance structure, the casing or housing being hardened on
    the internal resistance structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210+,   for flexible or folding resistors.

    248     and 250, for resistors whose element is in insulation with an outer
    metallic sheath, the insulation being formed and hardened in situ, e.g.,
    molded.

    275,    for incased or housed resistors generally whose casing is formed
    and hardened on the resistor as by molding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 96 for potted induction devices.


CLS 338/270
TXT Subject matter under subclass 267 wherein the resistance element is wound
    or coiled on a core, the surface of the core engaging the helix or winding
    over substantially the entire periphery of the core and over the entire
    axial length of the helix or winding as, for example, to reinforce or shape
    the helix or winding over its length.

    (1)     Note.  The manner of assembly of the element on the core is
    immaterial for classification in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264+,   for a resistor whose element is coiled on a core, and with a casing
    or housing formed as a coating.

    301,    for resistors generally whose element is coiled on a flat or ribbon
    base.

    302+,   for resistors generally whose elements are coiled on a cylindrical
    or prismatic core.


CLS 338/271
TXT Subject matter under subclass 226 wherein one or both of the resistance
    terminals constitute a casing or housing for the resistance element.

    (1)     Note.  Usually in this subclass one of the terminals is formed as a
    sleeve which surrounds the resistance element, the other terminal making
    contact with the element within the sleeve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for a probe thermometer type resistor one of whose terminals forms
    a casing.

    272,    for a resistor whose terminals or leads surround and are secure to
    the casing or housing.

    332,    for a resistor whose terminal embraces or surrounds the resistance
    element.


CLS 338/272
TXT Subject matter under subclass 226 wherein one or more of the resistance
    terminals or conductors connecting the resistance element or terminal to an
    external circuit surround the housing or casing and are also secured to the
    casing or housing.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the subject matter of this subclass includes an
    elongated tubular casing with an elongated resistance element therein, the
    resistance terminals being formed as caps on the ends of the casing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266,    for helical or wound resistors whose casing is formed as a coating,
    the terminal surrounding the element and/or core.

    313,    for a resistor with a base extending along the resistance element,
    and with a terminal embracing the base.

    332,    for a resistor having a terminal embracing or surrounding the
    resistance element.


CLS 338/273
TXT Subject matter under subclass 226 wherein the casing or housing has an
    elongated shape, and the resistance terminal or the conductor connecting
    the resistance element or terminal with an external circuit extends into an
    end of the casing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    276,    for a resistor having a terminal or lead extending through the
    casing or housing wall.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 74+ for conduit
    cables, and conductors with end structure.


CLS 338/274
TXT Subject matter under subclass 273 wherein distinct structure such as a
    disc, seal, or cap is provided between the casing and the terminal or lead
    conductor to seal any space existing therebetween.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this subclass distinct sealing
    structure is necessary, as opposed to a mere tight fit or adhesion between
    the casing and the terminal or lead, which subject matter is classified in
    the generic subclass 273.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233,    for a resistor whose casing or housing is elongated in shape and
    has a plug disc or cap at the end for ready opening of the casing and/or
    separation from the resistance element.

    237,    for resistors whose elements are hermetically sealed in spaced
    relation from their casings or housings.

    269     and 275, for resistors with molded or fused casings and housings
    which may be directly sealed to the terminals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 77 for conduit,
    cable, and conductor with sealing end structure.


CLS 338/275
TXT Subject matter under subclass 226 wherein the casing or housing has been
    applied to all or part of the remaining resistance structure in a plastic
    and formable state with substantially no intervening space between the
    casing or housing and the resistance structure, and then hardened in
    position.

    (1)     Note.  Usually there is some bonding or adhesion between the casing
    or housing and the resistance structure which the casing covers.  The most
    common examples of the subject matter of this class are plastic or ceramic
    casings molded on the resistor, or glass fused to the resistor.  The
    hardening need not be sufficient to render the casing entirely rigid for
    classification in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193,    for mechanically variable resistors with an angularly movable
    contact, with an enclosure formed on and hardened on the resistance element.

    210+,   for flexible or folded resistors.

    230,    for resistors having a metal casing or housing cast around the
    element.

    250     and 333, for resistors whose element is in insulation with an outer
    metallic sheath, the insulation being formed and hardened in situ, e.g.,
    molded.

    252,    for resistors embedded or enclosed in a groove or recess with a
    filling hardened in situ.

    262+,   for resistors whose casing or housing is formed as a coating.  See
    also (1) Note under subclass 262 for the distinction between a coating and
    the subject matter of this subclass (275).

    269,    for helical or wound resistors whose casing is formed on and
    hardened on the resistor, e.g., molded.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 98 for embedded
    conduit-ducts or conductors, and subclasses 110+ for insulated cables.


CLS 338/276
TXT Subject matter under subclass 226 wherein at least one resistance terminal
    or conductor connecting the resistance element or terminal to an external
    circuit extends through a wall of the casing to permit an electrical
    connection to be made externally to the resistance element.

    (1)     Note.  For classification here the terminal must extend through the
    casing wall.  Where the resistance element extends through the wall
    classification is not in this subclass, but in the generic Class 226.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273+,   for a resistor whose terminals extend into an end of the sheath.

    312,    for a resistor with a base, the terminal extending through the base.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 18 and 65 for
    boxes and housings with openings for passing conduit or cable, and
    subclasses 151+ for insulators for insulating a conductor extending through
    a wall or plate.


CLS 338/277
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the resistor includes
    mechanical protecting structure such as a guard, screen, or mechanical
    shield which is secured to the remaining resistor structure and is spaced
    from the resistance elements and/or terminals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for resistors with vented or ventilating casings or housings.

    64+,    for resistors with electrical shields.

    226+,   for incased, embedded, or housed resistors, the casing or housing
    forming a protecting structure.

    311,    for a resistor whose element is mounted in a groove in the base.

    334,    for resistors with heat shielding structure, not otherwise
    classifiable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 5 for
    miscellaneous electric shock hazard protecting devices.  See also the Notes
    under this subclass for an extended field of search for this subject matter.


CLS 338/278
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein a flat ribbon or
    strip-like resistance element is coiled or otherwise formed as a flat or
    cylindrical helix with the narrow edges of the resistance element forming
    the outer and inner boundary surfaces of the helix, the wider flat surfaces
    of the resistance elements extending transverse to the helix.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass is most commonly a
    cylindrical core with helically disposed grooves therein, and a ribbon
    resistance element having an edge extending in the groove.  In this
    subclass the resistance element in a strip with ribbon-like
    characteristics.  However, the element is bent or curved edgewise as
    opposed to the common flatwise bend occurring in the subject matter of
    subclasses 279+ below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for a resistor including a ventilated helical element.

    261,    263 and 267+, for incased, embedded or housed helical or wound
    resistors.

    282,    for a resistor whose element is a helix formed from a bent ribbon.
    See also (1) Note above.

    296+,   for helical or wound resistors, generally.

    333,    for resistors of a particular configuration not otherwise
    classified.


CLS 338/279
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the resistance element
    constitutes an elongated continuous flat ribbon, strip, or tape of uniform
    cross-sectional dimensions and integral over its length between terminals,
    the element being bent or curved along its flat sides between terminals
    into a particular configuration while retaining the ribbon-like
    characteristic.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the flat portion of the ribbon is bent or
    curved.  The bend on the flat sides may be transverse or oblique to the
    length of ribbon.  An edgewise bend or curve as may occur in an edgewise
    wound helix in a zigzag grid resistance element is not classified here, but
    in such subclasses as 278 and 283+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208,    for mesh, woven, or braided resistors.

    212,    for flexible or folding tape resistors.

    278,    for a resistor whose element is helical and formed as an edgewise
    coiled strip.  See also (1) Note above and under subclass 278.

    297,    for a resistor whose element is a flat helix or winding.

    301,    for a resistor whose element is coiled on a flat or ribbon base.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 133 for
    noncircular strand section conductor structure.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 223 for inductor winding of a
    noncircular section.


CLS 338/280
TXT Subject matter under subclass  279 wherein the flat ribbon or strip
    resistance element is bent or curved into a zigzag or sinusoid.

    (1)     Note.  See the definition of subclass 283 for the definition of a
    zigzag or sinuous resistance element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for ventilated zigzag type resistors.

    283+,   for zigzag or sinuous resistors generally.


CLS 338/281
TXT Subject matter under subclass 280 wherein the ribbon or strip resistance
    element includes integral structure, which may be a particular shape such
    as a rib or channel, to reduce any tendency of the ribbon or strip to bend.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284,    for a zigzag or sinuous resistor whose element includes integral
    stiffening structure.

    291,    for such a resistor which includes a transverse element stiffening
    or reinforcing rod or strip.

    333,    for resistors of a particular configuration not classified above.


CLS 338/282
TXT Subject matter under subclass 279 wherein the flat ribbon or strip
    resistance element is bent or curved into a helical or spiral configuration.

    (1)     Note.  See the definition of subclasses 296+ for the definition of
    a helical or spiral element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for ventilated helical resistors.

    62+,    for noninductively wound resistance elements.

    68+,    and particularly subclasses 117, 141 and 143+, for mechanically
    adjustable or variable resistors including a helical ribbon resistance
    element.

    207,    for a resistor whose element and base are folded or rolled.

    218,    for wire wound tapered resistors.

    261,    263 and 267+, for an incased, embedded or housed resistor whose
    element is helical or wound.

    296+,   for helical or wound resistors generally.


CLS 338/283
TXT Subject matter under the class definition where the resistance element is
    composed of at least three elongated portions extending side by side and/or
    coextensive and electrically separate, the alternate adjacent ends being
    electrically connected by being in contact or integral, or by resistive or
    conductive material to provide a series path through the elongated portions.

    (1)     Note.  The elongated portions need not be straight, but may be
    curved or zigzag.  Further, if straight, the portions need not extend in
    parallel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for a resistor with a heat radiation type resistance element formed
    as a zigzag.

    58,     for ventilated zigzag type resistors.

    114+,   for a deformable variable resistor whose element has a zigzag shape.

    226+,   for incased, embedded, or housed zigzag or sinuous resistors.

    280+,   for zigzag or sinuous bent ribbon resistors.

    295,    for plural resistance elements generally connected by a jumper.

    296+,   for helical or wound resistors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 200+ for electric heaters of zigzag or
    sinuous shape, and subclass 540 for radiating plate heaters whose
    resistance elements may have a zigzag or sinuous shape.


CLS 338/284
TXT Subject matter under subclass 283 wherein the elongated portions of the
    zigzag or sinusoidal element include integral structure, which includes a
    particular shape, such as a rib or channel, to reduce any tendency of the
    elongated portion to bend.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281,    for zigzag resistors formed as a continuous bent ribbon of uniform
    cross-section and including a stiffening bend.

    291,    for a zigzag or sinuous resistor with a transverse element
    stiffening or reinforcing rod or strip.


CLS 338/285
TXT Subject matter under subclass 283 wherein the zigzag or sinuous element
    lies substantially over its entire length in a groove in a base forming a
    supporting structure.

    (1)     Note.  The resistance element may be coated on the walls of a
    zigzag or sinusoidal shaped groove.

    (2)     Note.  For classification in this subclass the zigzag or sinuous
    element must be disposed in the groove over substantially its entire
    length, as where the walls of the groove, i.e., the base, provide rigidity
    for the element.  In subclass 290 below the element merely projects in or
    through an opening, which may be a groove, over a small portion of its
    length, as for supporting the element or suspending the element between
    spaced portions on a frame or other support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252+,   for an incased resistor whose element is embedded in a groove in
    the casing.

    290,    for a zigzag or sinuous resistor whose element projects in or
    through an opening or slot in a supporting frame. See also (2) Note above.

    303,    for a helical or wound resistor whose element is disposed in a
    helical groove on the core.

    311,    for resistors generally having an element mounted in a groove in
    the base.

    317,    for resistors generally having an element projecting or threading
    through a support.


CLS 338/286
TXT Subject matter under subclass 283 wherein the resistor includes in the same
    part a helical pattern as well as the zigzag or sinuous pattern.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass usually includes a
    resistor whose element is a helical wire which is shaped into a larger
    overall zigzag or sinusoid, or whose element is a zigzag or sinusoidal wire
    which is shaped into a larger overall helix.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for plural separate diverse resistors.

    296+,   for helical or wound type resistors.

    333,    for resistors generally of a particular configuration.


CLS 338/287
TXT Subject matter under subclass 283 wherein the resistance element is shaped
    to provide two distinct zigzag patterns in the same portion of the
    resistance element.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the compound resistance element is formed by a
    series of zigzag grids disposed in parallel with alternate adjacent ends
    connected to form a second zigzag pattern, or a zigzag resistance element
    is bent to form a second zigzag pattern.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286,    for a resistor whose element is shaped to include in the same
    portion a helical and a zigzag or sinuous pattern.

    298,    for compound helical or wound resistors.


CLS 338/288
TXT Subject matter under subclass 287 wherein the resistance element includes
    three or more resistive strips substantially parallel or lying in
    substantially parallel planes, alternate adjacent ends of the strips being
    electrically connected in series by conductive material usually formed as a
    connecting wire, strip, or block, thus forming the strips into a zigzag or
    sinuous pattern.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this subclass the jumper or spacer
    must be conductive at least to the extent of having a substantially lower
    resistivity than the resistive strips. Further, the jumpers or spacers must
    be distinct from the strips.  Where the jumpers or spacers are integral
    with the strips or of the same material or resistivity as the strips,
    classification is in the generic subclass 287.  Further, when no jumper or
    spacer is present, the strips directly contacting each other at their
    respective ends, classification is in subclass 287 above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    289,    for zigzag or sinuous resistors generally whose elements are
    connected by conductive jumpers or spacers.

    295,    for plural resistance elements gener-ally connected by a jumper or
    spacer.


CLS 338/289
TXT Subject matter under subclass 283 wherein the resistive element includes
    three or more elongated resistive portions which are substantially
    parallel, alternate adjacent ends of the portions being electrically
    connected in series by conductive material usually formed as a connecting
    wire strip or block, thus forming a zigzag or sinuous pattern.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this subclass the jumper or spacer
    must be conductive, at least to the extent of having a substantially lower
    resistivity than the resistive portions.  Further, the jumpers or spacers
    must be distinct from the resistive portions.  Where the jumpers or spacers
    are integral with the resistive portions or of the same material or
    resistivity, classification is in the generic subclasses 283+.  Further,
    when no jumper or spacer is present, the strips directly contacting each
    other at their respective ends classification is in subclasses 283+ above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    288,    for compound or multiple zigzag resistors one of whose zigzag
    patterns is formed by jumpers or spacers connecting elongated resistance
    elements, which are parallel or in parallel planes.

    295,    for plural resistors generally which form a unitary structure and
    are connected in series by conductive jumpers or spacers.


CLS 338/290
TXT Subject matter under subclass 283 wherein the resistance element is
    disposed for a part (substantially less than all) of its length in a slot,
    notch, or other opening in the frame or support, the frame or support
    directly engaging the element over a portion of its length, usually for the
    purpose of positioning the element on the frame or support.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the element is disposed in a notch or slot
    for a small part of its length where it passes through the frame or support
    for supporting purposes.  While in subclass 284 above the element lies in a
    groove in a base over substantially its entire length, usually for the
    purpose of imparting rigidity to the element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for ventilated zigzag type resistors.

    252,    for a resistor whose element is embedded in a groove in the casing.

    285,    for a zigzag or sinuous type resistor whose element extends along a
    groove for substantially the entire length of the element.  See also (1)
    Note above.

    303,    for a helical or wound resistor whose element is disposed in an
    opening or groove in a frame or support.

    310,    for resistors generally whose elements extend through a base.

    317,    for resistors generally whose elements extend through a support.


CLS 338/291
TXT Subject matter under subclass 283 wherein a rod or strip extends
    transversely to the elongated portions of the zigzag or sinusoidal element
    and engages these portions to prevent the portions bending with respect to
    one another thus providing a reinforcement or stiffening to the zigzag or
    sinusoidal element as a whole, the rod or strip being of insulating
    material or being insulated from the elongated portions to avoid short
    circuiting between the portions.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass includes structure which
    merely insulatingly connects the elongated portions to prevent relative
    motion.  Where the zigzag or sinusoidal element or parts thereof are
    supported with respect to other objects classification is in subclass 283
    and other indented subclasses thereunder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208,    for mesh, woven, or braided resistors.

    226,    for incased, embedded, or housed zigzag or sinuous resistors.

    281,    for a zigzag or sinuous resistor formed as a continuous bent ribbon
    with a stiffening bend.

    284,    for a sinuous or zigzag resistor whose element includes integral
    stiffening structure.

    285,    for a sinuous or zigzag resistor whose element lies in a groove in
    a base.

    287+,   for compound or multiple zigzag resistors whose elements are joined
    by structure such as rods or strips which may stiffen or reinforce as well
    as support the elements.

    290,    for a zigzag or sinuous resistor whose element extends through an
    opening or slot in a support or frame, the supporting or frame structure
    around the opening or slot providing a possible stiffening or reinforcement
    for the element as well as a support.

    306,    for resistors generally having a base extending along the
    resistance element.


CLS 338/292
TXT Subject matter under subclass 283 wherein the resistance element is formed
    as a coating on a base.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300,    for a helical resistor whose element forms a coating.

    308+,   for a resistance whose element is coated on a base.  See also the
    Search Notes under this subclass.


CLS 338/293
TXT Subject matter under subclass 283 wherein the resistance element is flat in
    one dimension to lie substantially in one plane.

    (1)     Note.  A resistance element having a flat surface is not
    necessarily classified in the subclass.  For classification here the
    overall shape must be flat or planar.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212,    for flexible or folding resistors formed as a sheet.

    254,    for a resistor whose flattened element is embedded between flat
    layers.

    279+,   for resistors formed as bent ribbons.

    287+,   for a compound or multiple zigzag type resistor whose element has a
    planar shape.

    293,    for zigzag or sinuous resistors whose elements extend through
    openings or slots in a support or frame and are planar.

    314,    for a resistor whose element and base are formed in layers.

    333,    for resistors of a particular configuration not classified above.


CLS 338/294
TXT Subject matter under subclass 283 wherein the zigzag or sinuous resistance
    element lies in or is formed as a cylindrical surface of revolution.

    (1)     Note.  The elongated potions of the resistance element may form
    elements of a cylinder or be circular to lie in the cylindrical surface of
    revolution.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162+    and 190+, for mechanically variable resistors with an angularly
    movable contact arm whose resistance element is formed as a cylindrical
    zigzag or sinusoid.

    207,    for a resistor whose element and base are folded or rolled.

    286,    for a compound or multiple zigzag resistor including a helical
    pattern.

    287+,   for compound or multiple zigzag resistors generally.

    296+,   for helical or wound resistors generally.


CLS 338/295
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein a plurality of resistors
    as there defined have their elements connected at one of the respective
    ends, by a separate and distinct conductor, the resistance elements being
    close together and physically supported to form a unitary resistance
    structure.

    (1)     Note.  The conductor must be of appreciable length.  Two resistors
    whose elements are in physical contact to produce a galvanic connection
    therebetween are not classified here, but in subclasses 319 or 320, if
    supported to form a unitary structure. The connection should have a
    conductivity appreciably greater than the resistance element.  A mere
    plurality of resistors connected electrically in some circuit arrangement
    is not classified here, but in such Classes as 323, Electricity: Power
    Supply or Regulation Systems, and 333, Wave Transmission Lines and
    Networks.  The plurality of resistors should in themselves be closely
    arranged to form a resistive unitary structure for classification here.

    (2)     Note.  Where three or more elongated resistance elements are
    arranged side by side in parallel with alternate ends connected by a
    conducting spacer or jumper to form a zigzag resistor classification is in
    subclass 289, or in subclass 288, if the zigzag so formed is one zigzag of
    a compound or multiple zigzag resistor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for plural separate diverse resistors which may be connected by a
    jumper.

    128+,   for plural mechanically variable resistors which may be connected
    by a jumper.

    279+,   for resistors whose elements are formed as a bent ribbon.

    288,    for compound or multiple zigzag or sinuous shaped resistors whose
    elements are connected by a conductive jumper or spacer.  See also (2) Note
    above.

    289,    for zigzag or sinuous shaped resistors generally whose elements are
    connected by a conductive jumper or spacer.  See also (2) Note above.

    319     and 320, for plural resistors which are supported to form a unitary
    structure. See also (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 218
    and 297 for phase control and output control respectively, which include a
    plurality of impedances, which may be resistors, connected together.  See
    also (1) Note above.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 81 for attenuators.
    See also (1) Note above.


CLS 338/296
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein an elongated resistance
    element is formed as two or more continuous closed coils or loops as a
    spiral, helix, or toroidal winding.

    (1)     Note.  In the subject matter of this and the indented subclasses
    the coils are substantially closed, any opening being for continuing the
    resistance element to the next turn.  In zigzag or sinuous resistors in
    subclasses 283+ above, the loops are open at one end, and may in addition
    include sharp changes in the direction of the elongated resistance
    elements.  While the helical or wound resistors in this subclass may be
    flattened, there is an appreciable thickness, as opposed to the zigzag or
    sinuous type in subclasses 283+ above, where the element may lie
    substantially in one plane or all portions of the element substantially
    coincide along the longitudinal axis of zigzag or sinusoid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for ventilated helical resistors.

    62+,    for resistors with helical or wound  elements with inductance
    reducing means.

    68+,    for mechanically variable resistors which may include a helical
    winding.

    207,    for a resistor whose element and/or base is permanently folded or
    rolled.

    208+,   for mesh, woven, or braided resistors.

    214,    for cable type resistors which may include a helical resistance
    element.

    218,    for helical or wound tapered resistors.

    263+    and 267+, for helical or wound resistors which are embedded,
    incased, or housed.

    278,    for resistors with edgewise coiled helical strip resistance
    elements.

    282,    for helical or wound resistors formed as a bent ribbon.

    283+,   for zigzag or sinuous shaped resistors; and especially subclass 286
    for such resistors including a helical winding pattern.  See also (1) Note
    above.

    321,    for cores and frames for helical or wound resistors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 610.1+ for methods of making helical or
    wound resistors involving metal working and assembly, and subclass 618 for
    such methods with winding together with enveloping or housing.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 138 for
    insulators, per se, upon which a resistor may be wound.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 430+ for a process or
    apparatus for forming an article by winding material onto a core.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for inductor devices which
    may be helical or wound.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 592 for metallic
    stock either in the form of a helix or having a helical component.


CLS 338/297
TXT Subject matter under subclass 296 wherein the resistance element is formed
    as a flat spiral lying in one plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147,    for contact following helical resistors, whose elements are formed
    as a flat spiral.

    293+,   for zigzag or sinuous resistors whose elements lie in one plane.

    301,    for helical or wound resistors whose elements are coiled on a flat
    or ribbon base.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 540 for radiating plate electric heaters.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 232 for planar type inductance coils.


CLS 338/298
TXT Subject matter under subclass 296 wherein the resistance element is formed
    in two or more distinct helical or winding patterns, as a coiled wire
    resistance element being, in turn, helically wound on a cylindrical form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    287+,   for compound or multiple zigzag resistors, and especially subclass
    286, where one of the winding patterns is helical.

    297,    for compound helically wound resistors, where one of the winding
    patterns is flattened.

    299,    for resistors formed with plural supported helices or windings.


CLS 338/299
TXT Subject matter under subclass 296 including a plurality of helical or wound
    distinct resistance elements together with the necessary supporting
    structure to establish a fixed physical relationship between the elements
    as opposed to a mere electrical connection.

    (1)     Note.  Two distinct windings electrically connected and on a common
    core are classifiable in this subclass. However, a mere plurality of
    electrically connected layers, one layer being wound on the layer beneath;
    or two electrically connected windings whose wires parallel one another; or
    a bifilar winding are not sufficient to constitute plural windings for
    classification in this subclass.  See subclass 296 and other indented
    subclasses thereunder for this subject matter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for plural resistance helices or windings related to reduce or
    eliminate any inductance existing in the helices or windings.

    68+,    for mechanically variable resistors which may include a plurality
    of helical or wound resistance elements.

    208+,   for mesh, woven, or braided resistors.

    218,    for wire wound tapered resistors.

    261,    for plural embedded, incased, or housed helical or wound resistors.

    295,    for plural resistors connected by a jumper.

    298,    for compound helical or wound resistors.

    319     and 320, for plural resistors generally with a mounting or
    supporting means. See also the Search Notes under subclass 315 for a field
    of search for resistors with mounting or supporting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 430+ for a process or
    apparatus for forming an article by winding material onto a core;
    particularly subclasses 439.5+, 440.1, 444+, and 445.1 for applying plural
    windings upon a core sequentially or simultaneously (e.g., to make a
    resistance element).

    336,    Inductor Devices, especially subclasses 65+, 115+, 170+, and 180+
    for plural inductor coils.


CLS 338/300
TXT Subject matter under subclass 296 wherein the helical resistance element
    constitutes a helical coating on an insulating base or support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195,    for resistors which may be varied or adjusted by removing and/or
    adding material, the resistance element being formed as a coating.

    292,    for zigzag or sinuous shaped resistors whose elements form coatings.

    308+,   for resistors generally whose elements are formed as a coating on a
    base.  See also the Search Notes under subclass 308.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 200 for inductor coil structure
    comprising a printed conductive coating on a base.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 195+ for a
    plural layer product having a nonuniform coating, impregnation or bond
    which may be helical in pattern and subclass 222 for a plural component
    product in which one of the components may be helical, and in which the
    products above may involve resistance materials.


CLS 338/301
TXT Subject matter under subclass 296 wherein the resistance element is wound
    or coiled around a base which is flat or ribbon shaped, the coils of the
    winding engaging the flat surfaces as well as the edge surfaces of the base
    over the entire length of the coil to result in a flattened winding having
    a shape similar to the cross-sectional shape of the base.

    (1)     Note.  For classification here the winding must be around the base
    and be flattened to the base.  Where the helical element passes through
    openings in the base to result in the base surrounding the element and/or
    where the element is separated from the sides of the base to retain a
    circular cross section, classification is in subclasses 304+ below.
    Likewise a flattened winding on a base other than flat or ribbon like, as
    being wound on two spaced parallel struts, is not classified here, but in
    subclasses 304+ below.

    (2)     Note.  The manner of applying the element to the base is immaterial
    for classification in this subclass.  The element may be preformed as a
    coil and applied to the base.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212,    for flexible or folding tape resistors.

    279+,   for a resistor whose element is formed as a bent ribbon.

    296,    for helical or wound resistors generally of a particular shape.

    297,    for planar helical or winding type resistors.


CLS 338/302
TXT Subject matter under subclass 296 wherein the resistance element is wound
    or coiled on a cylindrical or prismatic core, the surface of the core
    engaging the helix over substantially the entire periphery of the core and
    over the entire axial length of the helix or winding as, for example, to
    reinforce or shape the helix over its length.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this subclass, the winding must be in
    contact with the cylindrical or prismatic core over substantially the
    entire length of the winding as opposed to mere engagement at points or
    elements of the core, in which latter case classification is in subclasses
    304+ below.

    (2)     Note.  The manner of assembly of the element on the core is
    immaterial for classification in this subclass.  The element may be
    preformed as a coil, and applied to the core.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    214,    for a cable type resistor whose element may be helical.

    218,    for a tapered resistor as where the element is wound on a tapered
    core.

    261,    264+ and 270, for incased, embedded, or housed resistance elements
    coiled on a core.

    298,    for a resistor whose element is wound on a core, the element being
    formed as a compound helix.

    299,    for resistors whose elements are formed as a plurality of distinct
    helices or windings on a core.

    300,    for a resistor whose element is formed as a coated helix on a core.

    301,    for a resistor where the core is formed as a flat base or ribbon.

    304+,   for a resistor whose element is wound or otherwise disposed on a
    frame or support, there being only an engagement between the element and
    the frame or support over a portion of the length of the element.  See also
    (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, particularly subclasses 543 and 546+ for
    electrical heaters, wherein the heating element is wound on a core.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 430+ for a process or
    apparatus for forming an article (e.g., a resistor) by winding material
    onto a core.

    336,    Inductor Devices, especially subclasses 130+, 172, 196+, and 221,
    for inductor devices involving a coil wound on a core.


CLS 338/303
TXT Subject matter under subclass 302 wherein the core is provided with a
    helical groove in its surface, the resistance element being disposed in the
    groove with the convolutions of the element lying along the helical path of
    the groove.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252,    for an incased, embedded, or housed resistor whose element is
    embedded in a groove in the casing.

    285,    for a zigzag or sinuous shaped resistor whose element lies in a
    groove in the base.

    305,    for a helical or wound resistor whose element extends in or through
    a groove or opening in a frame or support.

    311,    for resistors in general whose elements are mounted in grooves in
    the base.


CLS 338/304
TXT Subject matter under subclass 296 wherein the helical resistance element is
    wound or otherwise disposed on a frame or support, the frame or support
    directly engaging the winding over a portion or portions of its length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for ventilated helical resistors.

    197,    for a mechanically variable resistor  whose element may be helical,
    and with a support.

    299,    for plural supported helices or windings.

    302,    for a resistor whose element is wound or otherwise disposed on a
    cylindrical or prismatic core.  See also (1) Note above.

    306+,   for a resistor whose base extends along the resistance element.

    314+,   for resistors generally with a supporting or mounting means.


CLS 338/305
TXT Subject matter under subclass 304 wherein the resistance element is wound
    or otherwise disposed in a notch, groove or other opening in the frame or
    support, usually for the purpose of positioning the element on the frame or
    support.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter in this subclass usually involves a
    resistance element wound in notches on the surface of a supporting frame,
    or a helical resistance element extending through an opening in each of a
    series of supporting portions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252,    for an incased, embedded, or housed resistor whose element is
    embedded in a groove in the casing.

    290,    for a zigzag or sinuous type resistor whose element extends through
    openings or slots in a supporting frame.

    303,    for a helical or wound resistor whose element is wound in a groove
    on a cylindrical or prismatic core.

    310,    for resistors generally whose elements extend through a base.

    317,    for resistors generally whose elements thread or project through
    supports.


CLS 338/306
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including a resistance element,
    and a non-resistive element in close physical relationship therewith to
    impart a rigidity or reinforcing to the resistance element not otherwise
    present.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the resistance element is thin or flexible and
    extends along and in contact with the side of a base of insulating
    material, the base supplying the necessary rigidity.  In the combination of
    an element and mounting means or a support as defined in subclasses 315+,
    the mounting means or support maintains the element as a whole, positioned
    with respect to other structure, as opposed to providing mere rigidity as
    in this subclasses (306+).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207,    for a resistor whose element and base are permanently folded or
    rolled.

    210+,   for flexible or folding resistors.

    226,    for incased, embedded, or housed resistors which may include a
    base.


    279+,   for a resistor formed as a bent ribbon which may include a base.


    283+,   for a zigzag or sinuous shaped resistor which may include a base.


    296+,   for helical or wound resistors with a form for the helix or winding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a plural layer product which may involve a layer of resistance material
    and a layer of nonresistance material, see especially subclasses 457+ in
    which one of the layers is a metal.


CLS 338/307
TXT Subject matter under subclass 306 wherein the resistance and/or terminal is
    coated on the base in a particular pattern or mark as by stenciling,
    printing, stamping or drawing.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass only a portion of the base is covered as by
    the pattern or line.  While in coatings as defined in subclasses 308+ below
    the coating covers the base or a distinct part of the base without any
    particular shape or configuration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for strain gauges of the deformable type whose resistance elements
    are formed as coatings having particular patterns or marks.

    15+,    for photoconductive resistors whose elements are formed as coatings
    having particular patterns or marks.

    292,    for a zigzag or sinuous shaped resistor whose element is coated on
    a base.

    300,    for a helical resistor whose element is coated on a base.

    308,    for resistors generally whose elements are coated on a base, and
    subclass 309 for such resistors where the terminal is also coated on the
    base.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 200 for printed-circuit-type inductor
    coils.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical, Systems and Devices, 748+ for printed
    circuit board having diverse electrical components.


CLS 338/308
TXT Subject matter under subclass 306 wherein the resistance element is coated
    on the base, and covers the base or a distinct part of the base.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this subclass, the resistor element
    must be recited as having special structure, e.g., details of the shape of
    the element and/or base, details of the terminal, or a relationship between
    the terminal and or base, etc.  For a mere product, not having such
    structure, but exhibiting resistance properties, see search note to Class
    428, below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142,    for mechanically adjustable resistors with coated tapered resistor
    elements and subclass 217 for coated tapered fixed resistors.

    211,    for a flexible resistor wherein the resistance material is coated
    on or impregnated in flexible material, such as a fabric.

    258,    for a resistor whose element is coated on the interior of a casing.

    262+,   for resistors whose casing or housing forms a coating.

    283,    for a zigzag or sinuous shaped resistance whose element constitutes
    a coating.

    300,    for a helical resistor whose element constitutes a coating.

    307,    for a resistor whose element is printed or marked on a base.

    327,    for a resistor whose terminals are coated on the element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 522 for windows including transparent
    material with a resistance coating thereon for heating the window.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 58+ for coating processes, per se,
    wherein the product has utility as an electrical article.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for a plural layer product which may involve a layer of resistive material
    and a layer of nonresistive material and especially subclasses 195+ for a
    nonuniform coating on a base.  See also (1) Note above.


CLS 338/309
TXT Subject matter under subclass 308 wherein at least one of the terminals is
    coated on the resistance element and/or on the base.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327,    for a resistor at least one of whose terminals is coated on the
    element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for a plural layer product which may involve a layer of resistance material
    and a layer of nonresistance material and especially subclasses 195+ for a
    nonuniform coating on a base.  See also (1) Note in subclass 308, above.


CLS 338/310
TXT Subject matter under subclass 306 wherein the resistance element extends
    through the base.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass only a portion of the element is surrounded
    by the base, i.e., the portion of the element that extends through the
    base.  While for classification in subclasses 226+ as an embedded incased
    or housed resistance the element is substantially enclosed by the base.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226+,   for resistors generally which are embedded, incased, or housed.
    See also (1) Note above.

    228,    for resistors which thread or project through a support.

    252,    285, 303, and 311, for a resistor whose element is disposed in a
    groove in the base or casing.

    312,    for resistors whose terminals extend through the base.


CLS 338/311
TXT Subject matter under subclass 306 wherein the resistance element is
    positioned in a groove in the base.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226+,   for resistors which are incased, embedded, or housed; and
    particularly subclass 252, for resistors whose element is embedded in a
    groove in the casing.

    285,    for a zigzag or sinuous shaped resistor, whose element is disposed
    in a groove in the base.

    303,    for a helical or wound resistor, whose element is disposed in a
    groove in the base.

    308+,   for a resistor whose element is coated on the interior of a groove
    in the base.

    310,    for a resistor whose element extends through the base.


CLS 338/312
TXT Subject matter under subclass 306 wherein the resistance terminal extends
    in or through the base.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310,    for a resistor whose resistance element extends through the base.

    322     and 331, for a resistor whose terminals extend within the
    resistance element.


CLS 338/313
TXT Subject matter under subclass 306 wherein the terminal extends
    substantially around an external surface of the base, as a cap or
    encircling ring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310,    for a resistor whose element extends through the base.

    312,    for resistors whose terminals extend in or through the base, the
    base thus embracing the terminals.

    331,    for a resistor whose element surrounds a terminal.

    332,    for a resistor whose terminals surround the element.


CLS 338/314
TXT Subject matter under subclass 306 wherein the resistance element and base
    are formed in flat layers or as plates and piled on one another to form a
    lamination.

    (1)     Note.  The layers may or may not be bonded together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101     and 115, for a mechanically variable resistor whose element is
    formed as a pile.

    204+,   for solid pile resistance elements.

    254,    for resistance elements embedded between layers.

    307,    for a resistor whose element is printed or marked on the base.

    308+,   for a resistor whose element is coated on the base.

    328,    for a resistor whose terminals and elements are disposed in flat
    layers.


CLS 338/315
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the resistor is combined
    with structure that establishes and/or maintains its position or path of
    movement with reference to some other object, and not classified above or
    elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  For classification here some significant details of the
    resistance must be claimed.  Classes 211 and 248 below, provide for
    supports for resistances or for the nominal combination of a resistor with
    support details.  Class 174, especially subclass 138, provides for
    insulators, which may also perform a supporting function.  The subclasses
    above in this schedule include resistors combined with particular types of
    supports, not otherwise classifiable.  See the subclasses under SEARCH THIS
    CLASS below, for such subject matter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for photoconductive resistors with vibration control.

    50,     for a resistor mounted on wheels or on a vehicle.

    64,     for resistors with electric and/or magnetic shielding.

    67,     for a resistor mounted on a diverse nonelectrical device.

    98,     for a mechanically variable resistor with vibration damping means;
    subclasses 164, 184 and 199 for such a resistor with a housing; and
    subclass 197 for such a resistor with a support.

    219,    for a resistor on a lamp socket or base 221, for detachable plug-in
    type resistors.

    226+,   for incased, embedded, or housed resistors.

    290,    for sinuous or zigzag resistors whose elements project through a
    slot or opening in a support or frame.

    299,    for a helical or wound resistor with a plurality of supported
    helices or windings; subclass 301 for such a resistor whose elements are
    wound on a flat or ribbon base; subclasses 302+ for such a resistor wound
    on a cylindrical or prismatic base; and subclasses 304+ for such a resistor
    on a frame or support generally.

    306+,   for a resistor whose element extends along a base.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, especially subclass 138
    for insulators which may perform a supporting function.  See also (1) Note
    above.

    211,    Supports: Racks, appropriate subclasses, for plural article
    supports.  See also (1) Note above.

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses, for single article supports.  See
    also (1) Note above.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical, Systems and Devices, subclasses 627+ for
    distribution or control panel board having resistances.


CLS 338/316
TXT Subject matter under subclass 315 wherein the support includes structure,
    such as a spring, which offsets the effect of expansion or contraction of
    the resistance element due, for example, to temperature change, and/or
    which permits the resistance element to freely expand or contract.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7+,     for resistors whose value varies to compensate for temperature
    variations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 274.1+ for adjustable brackets.


CLS 338/317
TXT Subject matter under subclass 315 wherein the resistance element passes
    through the support, the support substantially surrounding the resistance
    element and there being an appreciable portion of the resistance element on
    either side of the support.

    (1)     Note.  The most common subject matter here is a resistor threading
    through apertures or notches in a series of supporting rings.

    (2)     Note.  In this subclass the resistance element is disposed on both
    sides of the support.  While for classification in subclass 318, it is only
    necessary that the resistance element be disposed on one side as when
    suspended between the supports.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210+,   for flexible resistors.

    318+,   for resistors suspended between supports.  See also (2) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 40 for conductors
    with overhead supporting structure, and subclass 167 for an insulator with
    a conductor receiving aperture or an insulator of the bushing type.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 49+ for pipe or cable supports, subclasses
    200+ for brackets, and subclasses 317+ for suspended supports.


CLS 338/318
TXT Subject matter under subclass 315 including at least two supporting
    portions with a resistance element suspended between and supported by these
    two supporting portions.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the resistance element is rigid and elongated in
    shape with terminals at the ends with metallic supports receiving the
    resistor by snap action, or the resistance element is strung between the
    supports.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209,    for extensible resistors.

    210+,   for flexible resistors which may be suspended between supports.

    290,    for a zigzag or sinuous shaped resistor whose element extends
    through a slot or opening in a supporting frame.

    305,    for a helical or wound resistor, whose element extends through an
    opening or groove in a supporting frame.

    316,    for resistance supports with structure which compensates for or
    permits resistance expansion and/or contraction.

    317,    for resistances which thread or project through a support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 40+ for
    overhead conductor structure, and subclasses 168+ for insulators with
    conductor holding means.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 119.01+ for clothesline type supports.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 58+ for suspended pipe or cable supports.


CLS 338/319
TXT Subject matter under subclass 318 wherein a plurality of resistors are
    suspended between the supporting portions either side by side or end to
    end, or wherein a plurality of resistors are suspended between a plurality
    of pairs of supporting portions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    320,    for plural resistors generally with a support.

    322,    for plural resistance elements in parallel between terminals.


CLS 338/320
TXT Subject matter under subclass 315 wherein a plurality of resistors are
    combined with structure that establishes and/or maintains their position or
    path of movement with reference to some other object or to one another.

    (1)     Note.  This is the residual subclass for plural resistors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for a resistor whose value is responsive to a plurality of
    conditions.

    48,     for plural separate diverse resistors.

    76,     120, 122+, and 128+, for mechanically  variable resistors which may
    involve a plurality of resistors with a support.

    203,    for structure readily separable into a plurality of resistors.

    235,    239 and 260, for plural resistors which are embedded, incased, or
    housed.

    287,    for a compound or multiple zigzag or sinuous resistor with a
    support.

    295,    for plural resistance elements connected by a jumper.

    299,    for a plural helix or winding type resistor with a support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, appropriate subclasses, for plural article
    supports.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 627+ for
    distribution or control panel board having resistors.


CLS 338/321
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including a base claimed, per se,
    usually of insulating material on which the resistance element may be wound
    or otherwise strung, and peculiarly adapted for this purpose and not
    classified elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  For classification here the claimed subject matter must be
    limited to the base core or frame, and exclude the resistance element.  The
    combination of the resistance element together with the base, core, or
    frame is classified in the pertinent subclasses above, a few of the more
    pertinent subclasses being given in the Search Notes below.  As between
    this subclass 321, and the insulators of special application in subclass
    138 of Class 174, this subclass (321) includes insulators which are
    constituent parts of the resistor, as to have a resistance element wound or
    strung thereon.  However, an insulator for supporting a resistance wire at
    one point thereon, this wire being strung in space in the manner of an
    aerial electrical conductor is not classified here; but in Class 174,
    subclass 138. See also the Search Notes under subclass 138 of Class 174.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    283+,   for resistors whose elements are strung on a base in zigzag or
    sinuous fashion.

    296+,   for resistors whose elements are wound or otherwise helically
    disposed on a core.

    306+,   for resistors whose element extends along a base.

    315+,   for resistors whose element is combined with a mounting or
    supporting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, especially subclass 138,
    for insulators of special application. See also (1) Note above.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 600+ and 118+ for a
    spool upon which a resistor may be wound, usually for temporary storage.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 49+ for cable supports, and subclasses 200+
    for brackets.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 117+ for
    resistance elements and mountings for the same when peculiar to or combined
    with electric furnace structure or control for electric furnaces.


CLS 338/322
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including a resistance element
    and one or more terminals in physical and electrical contact with the
    element for connecting the resistance element in an electric circuit.

    (1)     Note.  Since all resistors must include terminals in the sense that
    some structure is necessary to permit energization of the resistance
    element, the term "terminals" is sufficiently broad to include the free
    ends of the resistance element.  Thus the terminal and resistance element
    may be integral with no sharp line of demarcation therebetween.  Usually,
    however, the terminal is an appreciably better electrical conductor than
    the element. The patents in this subclass usually include those where a
    significant relationship exists between the resistance element and its
    terminals; or the combination of detailed resistance element structure and
    terminals not classified with any of the particular types of resistors
    above.  The combination of a resistance element broadly together with
    detailed terminal structure where the terminal is for a separable
    connection with the associated circuit is classified in Class 439, or in
    Class 174, where the terminal is for a permanent connection with the
    associated circuit.  See the reference to Class 174 under section 6 of the
    Class Definition of Class 439. Since all resistors as stated above include
    terminals, the Search Notes below are directed only to where significant
    terminal structure or relationship may be found.

    (2)     Note.  The combination of a resistance element by name only
    together with two terminals is classified here as a residual home.  As
    between Classes 174 and 439 and this class (338) the combination of a
    resistance element broadly recited and a plurality of spaced terminals is
    classified in this class (338).  As stated in (1) Note above, the
    combination of a resistance element broadly recited and a single terminal
    is classified in Classes 174 or 439.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68+,    for mechanically variable resistors with terminals, especially
    subclasses 118+, for such resistors with a movable contact electrically
    adjustable over the length of the resistance element.

    220,    for a resistor in a detachable electrical connector.

    221,    for resistors of the detachable plug type which may include
    particular terminal structure.

    229,    for a resistor in a probe.

    271,    for incased resistors whose terminals form the casing.

    273+,   for incased resistors whose terminals extend into the end of the
    casing.

    276,    for incased resistors whose terminals extend through the casing
    wall.

    307+,   for a resistor whose terminals are printed or marked on the base.

    309,    for resistors whose terminals are coated on the base.

    312,    for resistors whose terminals extend in or through the base.

    313,    for resistors whose terminals embrace  the base.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, particularly subclasses
    19+, 74+ and 84+, for electrical terminations of the permanent connection
    type which may be applied to resistance structure.  See also (1) Note above.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 58+ for coating processes, per se,
    wherein the product has utility as an electrical article.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for a plural layer product comprising one layer which may be a resistance
    element and at least one other layer which may be considered terminals, but
    without other structure limiting the product to use as an electric resistor.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses, for terminals of the
    separable type which may be applied to resistance structure.  See also (1)
    Note above.


CLS 338/323
TXT Subject matter under subclass 322 wherein the resistance element is
    elongated in shape with a terminal connected to the element intermediate
    the ends of the element, and/or wherein a third terminal is connected to
    the resistance element physically or electrically between the connection of
    two other terminals.

    (1)     Note.  The elongated element may be coiled or curved, the essential
    characteristic being a stretched out length appreciably greater than the
    thickness.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185+,   for tap type mechanically adjustable or variable resistors, and
    subclass 72 for such resistors in or on a lamp socket.

    325,    for resistors generally with three or more terminals.


CLS 338/324
TXT Subject matter under subclass 322 wherein the resistor terminals are
    significantly different, as by each terminal with the associated resistance
    element being classifiable in different subclasses under subclass 322.

    (1)     Note.  The different must be in the terminal structure itself or in
    the relationship between the terminal and the resistance element.  A
    significant difference in the detachable connections on respective
    terminals, each with the necessary resistance structure being classifiable
    in subclass 322 below, is sufficient for classification in this subclass
    324, the detachable connector being a part of the terminal.  A significant
    difference exists when included in the claims.  The inclusion of two
    significantly different detachable connectors on one terminal is not
    sufficient for classification in this subclass (324).  For classification
    here the significantly different connectors must be on different resistance
    terminals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for plural separate diverse resistors.

    66,     for ignition interference suppression type resistors having diverse
    terminals.


CLS 338/325
TXT Subject matter under subclass 322 wherein the resistance element has at
    least three distinct terminals connected thereto.

    (1)     Note.  The terminals must be connected to the resistance element at
    spaced points to provide a resistance path between the terminals for
    classification in this subclass.  A mere plurality of detachable connectors
    on a terminal is not classifiable here, but in subclass 322 above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323,    for resistors having three or more terminals one of which is tapped
    along the resistance element.


CLS 338/326
TXT Subject matter under subclass 322 wherein the terminals are positioned
    relatively close to one another, i.e., the spacing between the terminals is
    small as compared to the length of the current path through the resistor
    element, as by forming the resistor as a loop.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240,    for resistors whose elements are embedded in powdered insulation
    with an outer metallic sheath, the terminals being adjacent.


CLS 338/327
TXT Subject matter under subclass 322, wherein one of the terminals constitutes
    at least in part a coating on the resistance element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244,    245, 257, and 262+, for resistors whose casings include a coating.

    309,    for a resistor including a base wherein the terminal and resistance
    element are coated on the base.

    328,    for resistors whose terminals and resistance elements are disposed
    in flat layers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 58+ for coating processes, per se,
    wherein the product has utility as an electrical article.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for a plural layer product comprising one layer which may be a resistance
    element and at least one other layer which may constitute a terminal, but
    without other structure limiting the product for use as an electrical
    resistor.


CLS 338/328
TXT Subject matter under subclass 322, wherein the terminals and resistance
    elements are formed in flat layers or as plates and piled on one another to
    form a lamination.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for shunt type resistors.

    101     and 115, for a mechanically adjustable or variable resistor whose
    resistance element is formed as a pile.

    204+,   for resistors generally whose elements are piled or stacked between
    terminals.

    314,    for a resistor whose element and base are formed in layers.

    327,    for resistors whose terminals are coated on the resistance element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for a plural layer product, one layer of which may be resistive and another
    layer of which may be conductive, see especially subclasses 457+ in which
    one layer maybe metal.


CLS 338/329
TXT Subject matter under subclass 322 wherein at least one of the terminals is
    secured to the resistance element by welding or soldering.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    330,    for resistors whose terminals are integral with the element as by
    sintering or impregnating.


CLS 338/330
TXT Subject matter under subclass 322 wherein the resistance element and
    terminal are formed as an integral unit.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of this subject matter other than welded, which are
    classified in subclass 329 above, are:  when terminals and resistor unit
    are formed of the same material, but the terminals having a larger cross
    sectional area than the element; when the terminals are formed by
    impregnating the ends of the resistance element; and when the terminals are
    secured to the resistance unit by sintering.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327,    for resistors whose terminals are coated on the element.

    329,    for resistors whose terminals are soldered or welded to the element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclass 237 for a consolidated metal powder composition
    containing carbide and another nonmetal.


CLS 338/331
TXT Subject matter under subclass 322 wherein the resistance element surrounds
    at least part of one of the terminals, as by the terminal being embedded in
    the resistance element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87+,    for mechanically variable resistors wherein the penetration of the
    terminal within the resistance element may be adjusted.

    332,    for resistors whose terminals embrace or surround the resistance
    element.


CLS 338/332
TXT Subject matter under subclass 322 wherein the terminal extends around an
    appreciable portion of the resistance element, as by a ring shaped terminal
    surrounding an end of the resistance element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    271,    for resistors at least one of whose terminals forms a casing.

    313,    for resistors whose terminals embrace the base.

    327,    for resistors whose terminals are coated around the resistance
    element.


CLS 338/333
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the resistance element or
    base has a significant shape and/or physical dimension.

    (1)     Note.  The significant shape may be cross-sectional, such as in a
    tubular resistance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68+,    for mechanically variable resistors whose resistance value may
    depend on shape, or wherein the variation is effected by a change in a
    dimension; especially subclass 71, for lamp socket type carbon compressible
    resistors;  subclasses 99+, for compressible type resistors generally;
    subclasses 114+, for deformable resistors; subclasses 118+, for resistors
    whose effective length may be varied; and subclasses 138+, for adjustable
    tapered resistors.

    208,    for mesh, woven, or braided resistors.

    209,    for extensible resistors.

    210+,   for flexible or folding resistors.

    217+,   for tapered fixed resistors.

    279+,   for a resistor whose element is formed as a ribbon bent or curved
    on its flat side.

    283+,   for zigzag or sinuous shaped resistors.

    296+,   for helical or wound resistors.

    308+,   for resistors with coated elements of significant thickness.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 193+ for strips, rods, bars, or wires of
    significant shape.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 138 for
    insulators of special application which may have a significant shape.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclass 134 for resistance
    furnaces wherein the resistance unit may have a particular shape.


CLS 338/334
TXT Subject matter under the class definition which is not provided for in any
    of the preceding subclasses in this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 610.1+ for processes of assembling
    electrical resistors not otherwise classifiable.


CLS 340/
TTL COMMUNICATIONS:  ELECTRICAL

CLS 340/
TXT This is the residual home for subject matter, not elsewhere classified,
    relating to communication by means which are in part or in whole electrical.

    Communications is defined, for the purpose of this definition, as being the
    handling of information or intelligence and is not restricted to the
    conveying of said information or intelligence between geographically spaced
    points.  (Thus, a traffic obstruction light which merely marks a safety
    island is a means for communicating information or intelligence, viz., the
    fact of the presence of the traffic island).

    Information or intelligence is defined, for the purpose of this definition,
    as being the subject matter which is handled by signaling systems or
    signaling devices (such as telegraph systems) or by that portion of
    nonsignaling systems or nonsignaling devices (such as power supply systems)
    which is designated in the arts as having a control function (such as the
    supervisory circuits which control the circuit breakers of an electric
    power network).

    Handling, as used above, is defined as being the active coaction between
    the tangible communication system or device and the intangible information
    or intelligence, and such coaction may assume various forms, such as
    transmission, storage, exhibiting, etc.

    NOTES

    (1)     Note.  Since Class 340 takes, under the class definition, only
    those electrical communication systems which are not elsewhere classified,
    the search, in order to be complete, must, in appropriate instances, extend
    to Classes 178,  246, 250, 332, 343, 346, 348, and 379.  See the references
    to these classes below under SEARCH CLASS.

    (2)     Note.  The combination of the subject matter of this class (340)
    and art environment is generally classified with the art environment where
    that environment is significant, either by virtue of a significant
    disclosed relationship or by virtue of a claimed relationship.  Where the
    art environment is recited by name only, the combination may be classified,
    in some instances, with the art environment, and in others, in this class
    (340). For a list of some of the other classes which contain pertinent
    subject matter, see the classes referred to under SEARCH CLASS.

    (3)     Note.  This classification was produced in 1952 by making official
    the unofficial digests which had been established by the Examiners of
    Division 42 during the period from about 1910 to about 1942.  A caveat is
    given:  While it is believed that the titles and definitions are reasonably
    correct, no assurance can be given that all of the patents, issued prior to
    the date of reclassification, are in the proper subclass, since the
    individual patents were not read during the reclassification project.
    Consequently, in making a thorough search in this class, it is advisable to
    investigate every subclass which may possibly be pertinent and not, in
    order to shorten the search, to rely on the principle of superiority of
    subclass subject matter because of position in schedule, since the
    principle is applicable only in classes where each patent has been analyzed
    and placed in the schedule in accordance with that portion of the disclosed
    subject matter which is claimed.

    (4)     Note.  The following conventions will apply to the definition of
    subclasses 901-996.

    (a)     A signal is an information-carrying wave.

    (b)     A indicator is a device which makes information concerning a
    condition available.

    (c)     An alarm is an indicator which makes information available only
    upon the occurrence of a preselected state of the condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 339 for
    brushing, scrubbing and general cleaning machines having a signal or
    indicator to indicate the condition of the machine or work.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 89 for
    apparatus of that class combined with indicating or signaling means.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 463+ for electrically
    actuated changeable exhibitors, such as the advertising display type and
    subclasses 541+ for illuminated signs having significant sign structure in
    addition to electric illumination. Advertising display elements arranged in
    matrix are in class (345) subclasses 55+.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 16, 17, and 58
    for the subject matter of that class combined with signals and indicators.

    70,     Locks, subclass 434 for locks combined with electric recorders for
    indicating the previous condition of the lock, and other appropriate
    subclasses for locks combined with electric signals.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for testing devices
    which make a test of the Class 73 type (usually nonelectrical and
    nonchemical) and signal the result of said test by electrical means.  Note
    particularly subclasses 23.2+, 301, 304, 308, 313, 717+, 723+, 733+, and
    753+.

    81,     Tools, subclass 479 for torque-responsive wrenches or screwdrivers
    having electrical means to indicate when a selected torque is exerted.

    84,     Music, subclass 405 for xylophones with electric action, subclass
    407 for bell sets (carillons) with electric action and subclass 462 for
    electric devices responsive to playing of a musical instrument for
    recording the action of said instrument.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 285 for beverage infusers
    having signal means and subclasses 342+ for cookers having signal means.

    100,    Presses, subclass 99 for presses having electrical means to
    indicate the condition of the press or the material being pressed.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclasses 38+ for
    safes and analogous structures having alarm devices for signaling loss of
    integrity.

    114,    Ships, subclass 246 for indicators for locating the position of a
    towed vessel with respect to the towing vessel.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, see paragraphs V and VI of the class
    definition for the line between the electrical signals in Class 340 and the
    mechanical signals in Class 116.  Search appropriate subclasses of Class
    116 for mechanical signals and indicators analogous to the electrical
    signals and indicators of Class 340.  Search subclass 20 for heliographic
    signaling along a light ray.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 712+ for coating apparatus having a
    signal or indicator.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 14.14+ for milkers having a signal or
    indicator.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclass 113 for cleaning
    or wetting devices having signals or indicators.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 551+ for fluid handling equipment having
    signal or indicating means.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclass 10 for
    the subject matter of that class having signals or indicators.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, subclasses 19+ for fire extinguishing systems
    having automatically opened valves and subclass 23 for fire extinguishing
    systems having alarms which indicate some abnormal condition of the fire
    extinguishing system.  The nominal combination of a fire extinguishing
    system, recited nonsignificantly, as by name only, and a significantly
    recited electric signaling system is classified in appropriate subclasses
    of Class 340, especially subclasses 289 and 320.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 11 for
    fluid-insulated conductors having means to indicate the condition of the
    fluid.

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclasses 45+ for a weigher having an alarm or
    signal.

    178,    Telegraphy, appropriate subclasses for telegraphic signaling.  See
    the class definition of Class 178 for the line between Classes 178 and 340.
     The combination of a Class 340 system and a Class 178 system is classified
    in Class 340 in appropriate subclasses, such as subclasses 533, 538, 288,
    and 310.

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 101+ for mechanical compressional wave
    devices and systems, such as those used in seismic prospecting, subclasses
    123+, for mechanical sound echo systems, and subclass 125 for mechanical
    sound location apparatus and methods.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclass 18 for a fire escape,
    ladder, or scaffold having an indicator, signal or alarm.

    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, or Animal Powered, subclasses 14, 36, and
    44 for spring and weight motors having indicators to show the extent to
    which they are wound up or run down.

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    appropriate subclasses for signalling means in combination or limited to
    use with elevator structure.

    188,    Brakes, appropriate subclasses for significantly claimed brakes or
    brake systems combined with signals.

    194,    Check-Actuated Control Mechanisms, subclasses 302+ for coin
    controlled mechanisms having a signal to indicate the condition (e.g.,
    counterfeit coin) of the mechanism.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 40 for conveyors having
    signaling means.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 308 for
    switches having indicators to indicate the position or condition of the
    switch.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 365+ for receptacles having indicating
    means and subclasses 201+, 227, and 230 for closures having indicating
    means.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 2+ for article dispensers not
    otherwise classified having indicators or signals.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 23+ for fluent material dispensing means
    having indicators or signals.

    232,    Deposit and Collection Receptacles, subclasses 34 to 37 for letter
    boxes having signals or indicators.

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), subclasses 4+ for a
    typographical punching machine provided with means to indicate approach to
    and entry into the justification zone; subclasses 13+ and 22+, for a
    selective cutting machine with automatic control usually initiated by an
    indicator or detector of a given operating condition; subclasses 59+, for a
    pattern-controlled selective cutting machine which may be electrically
    operated.

    235,    Registers, subclass 61 for mechanical calculators, subclasses 400+
    for ordnance control data calculators, subclasses 419+ for
    electromechanical or mechanical record controlled calculators, subclasses
    435+ for coded record sensors, and subclasses 487+ for coded records
    adapted to be read by machine.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 101.01 for
    the subject matter of that class having signals and indicators.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 36+, 49+, 357, 534+,
    563+, and 912 for a  detector, signal, or indicator associated with winding
    or unwinding an elongated material.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, for railway signaling and control
    systems. See the class definition of Class 246 for the line between Classes
    246 and 340.

    250,    Radiant Energy, for signaling systems of the radiant energy type.
    Such signaling systems are coextensively classified in Class 343, and the
    class definitions of these two classes should be consulted for the line
    between Classes 250 and 343, and the class definition of Class 343 for the
    line between Classes 343 and 116.  Note that Class 340 provides in subclass
    870.28 for telemetering along a radiant energy beam and, in subclasses 902
    and 578 for signaling systems having a radiant energy responsive detector.
    Also search Class 250, Radiant Energy, subclasses 306+ for methods and
    apparatus for inspecting solids or liquids by charged particles, subclasses
    330+ for the detection of infrared patterns and the conversion of the
    pattern into a light image, subclasses 336.1+ for methods and apparatus to
    detect and indicate the intensity or frequency of invisible radiation or
    the testing of materials by detecting and indicating the change in
    invisible radiation caused by the material, and subclasses 200 to 239 for
    photocell light-responsive circuits and apparatus.

    258,    Railway Mail Delivery, subclass 2 for the subject matter of that
    class (which includes delivery to and from airborne vehicles) having
    signaling features.

    276,    Typesetting, subclass 11 for typesetting machines having means for
    indicating the length of the line set.

    291,    Track Sanders, subclass 17 for track and vehicle sanding machines
    provided with alarms to indicate the operation thereof.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for the subject matter of that class having signals and
    indicators.  Note that many of the systems of this class, while not having
    signals and indicators, have automatic controls which are analogous to
    signals.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 234+ for cabinets having
    indicators.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 10 for electric space
    discharge devices, such as vacuum tubes, or electric lamps having
    temperature indicators.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 9 for electric arc lamps having a signal or indicator.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclasses 129+ for
    electric gas discharge device systems or electric lamp systems having
    signals, indicators or alarms and subclasses 364+ for space discharge
    devices testing or lamp testing equipment having signals or indicators.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 490 for electric motor
    systems having signals or indicators.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass for a battery or capacitor charging or discharging
    circuit combined with an indicator.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 99 for electric
    generator systems having signals or indicators.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for
    testing systems for making tests of electric properties having means to
    indicate the result of the test.  Note subclasses 323+ for testing systems
    for locating ore bodies having means to indicate the result of the test,
    and subclasses 76.11+ for meters for measuring a property of an electric
    current or voltage or combination thereof (e.g., power factor, watt-hours,
    phase angle frequency).  Telemetering systems which utilize a meter as a
    portion thereof are in Class 340 subclasses 870.02+, but the meter
    subcombination, per se, is classified with the meters of Class 324.
    Telemetering systems which, by significantly claimed structure or circuit,
    indicate the result of an electrical test at a point remote from the point
    of measurement are classified with the test in Class 324, as such
    telemetering systems are not of general utility, but are restricted to use
    in Class 324 measurements.

    329,    Demodulators, for demodulators of modulated intelligence including
    continuous waves (CW), and which furnish something more than the mere
    indication of the initiation of the signal.

    331,    Oscillators, appropriate subclasses, for electric oscillation
    generators of utility in the communication systems of Class 340.  Class
    331, subclass 64 for oscillator systems provided with an indicator, signal
    or alarm.

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 118 and 150 for modulators having signals
    and indicators.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, for wave transmission systems
    wherein electromagnetic wave energy is guided or constrained by a
    propagation medium of appreciable electrical length as compared to the
    wavelength of the propagated energy.  This class includes numerous networks
    and components useful in communications.  Note particularly subclass 20 for
    wave-shaping networks of the passive type, subclasses 24+ for coupling
    networks including delay networks and filters, and subclasses 236+ for long
    lines having distributed electrical parameters, and subclasses 1+ for
    plural channel systems of these lines and networks.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 45 for inductors having movable parts
    and means to indicate the position of the movable part.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 13+ and 68+ for variable resistors
    including rheostats and potentiometers.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, appropriate subclasses for
    code conversion, transmission or generation.

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation) appropriate subclasses for signaling systems of
    the radio wave energy type.  See the reference to Class 250, supra, for the
    lines between Classes 250, 340, and 343.  See class (343) subclass 760 for
    antennas with a signal, indicator, or alarm which is responsive to the
    scan, sweep, or orientation of the antenna; and subclass 894 for antennas
    with a signal, indicator, or alarm responsive to some other condition of
    the antenna. See (4) Note, C, 3, under subclass 700 of class (343) for
    certain classification lines involving antennas and signals, indicators,
    and alarms.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 1+ for plural display systems.

    346,    Recorders, appropriate subclasses for signals or indicators which
    record, and subclasses 16 and 17+ for recorders combined with signals and
    indicators.

    348,    Television, appropriate subclasses for television communication
    systems.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, for visible light type testing and
    examination instruments particularly for light radar devices in subclasses
    3+, subclasses 43+ for optical pyrometers, subclasses 372+ for menstruation
    devices, subclass 388 for configuration comparison devices, subclass 402
    for shade or color test devices, subclasses 213+ for photometers, and
    subclasses 237+ for flaw and imperfection devices.

    358,    Facsimile, appropriate subclasses for facsimile communication
    systems.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, appropriate
    subclass for read/write dynamic storage systems.

    362,    Illumination, appropriate subclasses for illuminating means which
    may serve as signalling means.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 130+
    for generic data processing control systems; subclass 147 for programming
    methods or procedures; subclasses 400+ for particular application of data
    processing systems or calculating computers; subclasses 550+ for data
    processing systems or calculating computers utilized to effect a measuring,
    testing, or monitoring operation of an external device or quantity;
    subclasses 600+ for hybrid computers; subclasses 700+ for digital
    calculating computers; subclasses 800+ for analog computers.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclass for
    read/write static storage systems, subclasses 185.01+ for floating gate
    memory storage (e.g., flash memory).

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices, for
    electrical communication systems in which the intelligence communicated is
    transmitted in part as acoustic wave energy.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 46+ for
    electric systems which indicate time and for electric clocks.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for multiplexing
    systems.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery,
    appropriate subclass for apparatus and corresponding processes relating to
    generic error detection and/or correction, or fault detection and/or
    recovery.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 163+ for a thermometer
    with an electrical heat sensor and a quantitative signalling arrangement.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclasses 112+ for electrical counters with display
    or indication.

    380,    Cryptography, appropriate subclasses for electrical cryptographic
    communication systems.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing and Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for one-way audio signal transmission and audio signal
    processing systems.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 1+ for
    artificial intelligence, subclasses 101+ for static presentation
    processing, subclasses 118+ for computer graphics processing, subclasses
    180+ for reliability and availability, fault recovery, locating, and
    avoidance in digital data processing systems, and subclasses 200.3+ for
    data transfer among multiple computer systems.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 429+ for a camera combined with diverse art
    devices.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, appropriate subclasses for typewriters having
    signals to indicate the condition or operation of the machine.  Note
    particularly subclasses 70+.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 9+ for
    nonelectric roadway structure designed to direct traffic.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclasses 34+ for conveyors having
    signals or indicators.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 50+ or 105+ for chemical apparatus
    having means to electrically signal a condition of said apparatus or the
    result of a chemical test.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process, subclasses 90+ for battery having measuring, testing, or
    indicating means.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 327+ for educational
    appliances which have a question and hidden answer, some of which signal a
    correct answer and subclasses 112+ for machines by which a blind person can
    read printed material, said machine furnishing signals which are a coded
    representation of the printed material.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclasses 6+ for floating buoys
    utilized for marine navigation.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, appropriate subclasses for various
    electric and magnetic toys which utilize electric signals, particularly
    subclasses 142, 242, 454, and 484+.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 150+ for high temperature (Tc > 30 K) superconducting devices,
    and particularly subclasses 182+ for light responsive system or subclass
    202 for electric communication system.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 300+ for electric diagnostic devices having
    signals or indicators.


CLS 340/146.2
TXT Subject matter under the class definition having means for comparing
    signals or information in digital form to determine which is the greater,
    the lesser, or whether they are numerically equal.

    (1)     Note.  The digital signals are not limited to any particular radix,
    and may be, for example, binary, decimal, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    825.3+, for comparator systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 568+ for a photocell and a coded record
    wherein the coded information consists of discrete identical indicia and is
    represented by the relative positional locations of the indicia on the
    record.


CLS 340/286.01
TXT SYSTEMS:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to a system including
    transmitter and receiver for signaling and/or indicating.

    (1)     Note.  This is the miscellaneous subclass for systems of signaling
    and/or indicating and their subcombinations, not elsewhere provided for.

    (2)     Note.  The terms signaling and indicating each denote production of
    a humanly perceptible signal.

    (3)     Note.  Consult the search notes to the class definitions for some
    of the numerous other classes which contain signaling or indicating systems.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500+,   for condition responsible alarm signaling.

    815.4+, for a visual indicator for signaling.

    825+,   for selective signaling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, for signaling with a selective display.


CLS 340/286.02
TXT Network signaling:

    Subject matter under subclass 286.01 consisting of an organization of
    stations with a capability for intercommunication although not necessarily
    on the same channel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    825.52, for this subject matter further including station addressing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for network of
    stations including multiplexed communications therebetween.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, appropriate subclasses for signaling
    specific to a telephone systems.


CLS 340/286.03
TXT Speaking tube including circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 286.02 in which a tube-shaped device
    mechanically transmits and/or  amplifies sound in combination with a
    diverse electrical circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclass .5 for a speaking tube, per se; e.g., without
    diverse circuitry.


CLS 340/286.04
TXT Manual alarm telegraph; e.g., other than signal box type:

    Subject matter under subclass 286.01 wherein the system employs
    interruptions and/or polarity changes of direct current for the
    transmission of alarm signals that have been keyed.

    (1)     Note.  This is the residual subclass for manual alarm telegraphs
    systems not elsewhere classified.

    (2)     Note.  Manual alarm telegraphs are also called alarm telegraph
    systems.

    (3)     Note.  The term "Telegraph system" should be distinguished from the
    subject matter of Class 178, Telegraphy, which subject matter permits
    signaling of a message of arbitrary content.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    287+,   for this subject matter when the transmitter is of the signal box
    type.

    500+,   for condition responsive alarm devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 2+ for Telegraph systems including
    information signal of arbitrary contents.


CLS 340/286.05
TXT Fire:

    Subject matter under subclass 286.04 in which the alarm is actuated to
    indicate the occurrence of a fire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    287+,   for a signal box type fire alarm.

    577+,   for a flame actuated fire alarm.

    628+,   for a smoke actuated fire alarm.


CLS 340/286.06
TXT Call station:

    Subject matter under subclass 286.01 in which a transceiver connects rooms
    or other places from which a signal or call is sent and/or received to the
    central or main location.


CLS 340/286.07
TXT Hospital:

    Subject matter under subclass 286.06 located at an institution where the
    sick or injured are given medical care.


CLS 340/286.08
TXT Hotel:

    Subject matter under subclass 286.06 located at an establishment that
    provides lodging.


CLS 340/286.09
TXT Restaurant:

    Subject matter under subclass 286.06 located at a public eating place.


CLS 340/286.11
TXT Annunciator:

    Subject matter under subclass 286.01 in which an electrically controlled
    signal board or indicator indicates the condition that exists or has
    existed in an associated circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    815.47, for switchboard or panel type visual indicator for signaling and
    subclasses 815.01+ for group drop annunciators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclasses for nonelectric
    signaling.


CLS 340/286.12
TXT Drop annunciator:

    Subject matter under subclass 286.11 in which the annunciator consists of a
    number of pilot lights or drops, each one indicating an associated circuit
    condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    815.47+, for switchboard or panel type visual indicator for signaling.

    815.79+, for pointer annunciator.

    815.81+, for group drop annunciators.

    815.85, for self restoring type annunciator.

    815.9+, for electromagnet releases latch.


CLS 340/286.13
TXT Mimic:

    Subject matter under subclass 286.01 in which the signaling or indicating
    copies or imitates by a spatial distribution that which is being indicated
    upon a single indicating surface.

    (1)     Note.  This surface is usually a display.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    525,    for this subject matter in a condition responsive signaling system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 168+ for this subject matter
    in a selective display system.


CLS 340/286.14
TXT Mapping:

    Subject matter under subclass 286.13 in which the signaling or indicating
    forms representation of the whole or a part of an area.


CLS 340/287
TXT Subject matter under subclass 286 in which the transmitter is of the signal
    box type.

    (1)     Note.  The signal box may be of the type which is used in fire
    alarms, police, district telegraph, messenger box or the like systems.  The
    transmitter usually is a code transmitter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    534+,   for code transmitter systems which are automatically responsive to
    a condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 20+ and 173+ for a
    pulse code transmitter.


CLS 340/288
TXT Subject matter under subclass 287 combined with some other type of subject
    matter.

    (1)     Note.  The signaling system, for example, may be combined with an
    electric light system whose conductors are used as the transmission medium
    for the signaling system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 49 for telegraph systems combined with other
    types of electric systems.


CLS 340/289
TXT Subject matter under subclass 288 combined with a fire extinguisher.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclass
    23 for combinations of extinguishers as sprinkling systems with mere
    electric alarms other than code signals of the signal box transmission type.


CLS 340/290
TXT Subject matter under subclass 288 in which the signaling system is combined
    with means to control apparatus at the fire station.

    (1)     Note.  The system may, for example, automatically open a door at
    the engine house when the fire alarm rings.


CLS 340/291
TXT Subject matter under subclass 287 having means for repeating signals one or
    more times or for repeating signals from one line or station to another
    line or station.

    (1)     Note.  The signal may be repeated, for example, from the call box
    circuit into several circuits extending to separate fire houses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 70+ for repeaters utilized in telegraphy.


CLS 340/292
TXT Subject matter under subclass 287 provided with means for maintaining the
    circuit in operable condition so as to permit sending signals at all times
    in spite of one or more breaks in the wires and signal box systems provided
    with means for giving an alarm when an abnormal condition in a circuit,
    which would prevent normal use, develops.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 69 for line clearance and circuit maintenance
    systems utilized in telegraphy.


CLS 340/293
TXT Subject matter under subclass 287 provided with means at the signal box for
    transmitting one or more of a variety of signals under the control of the
    operator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 20+ and 173+ for a
    pulse code transmitter..


CLS 340/294
TXT Subject matter under subclass 293 provided with a dial selector for
    selecting the variable signal desired.


CLS 340/295
TXT Subject matter under subclass 287 provided with means for preventing the
    transmission of signals from any other box or other signals from the same
    box while any signal is being transmitted therefrom and until such signal
    is completed.


CLS 340/296
TXT Subject matter under subclass 295 provided with means to obstruct the
    entrance of the key which is used to operate the signal box, said means
    operating to prevent insertion of the key only during the transmission of a
    signal sequence.


CLS 340/297
TXT Subject matter under subclass 287 provided with means to exhibit
    indications at the signal box from which the signals are transmitted, so
    that said box also acts as a receiver.

    (1)     Note.  The signal box, when operated, for example, may produce a
    preliminary signal of the audible type at the box to discourage would be
    pranksters from turning in a false alarm.


CLS 340/298
TXT Subject matter under subclass 297 having means to send an answer-back
    signal to notify the operator that the transmitted signal has been received.


CLS 340/299
TXT Subject matter under subclass 297 in which the signal at the box is
    operated simultaneously by the transmitted signal.


CLS 340/300
TXT Subject matter under subclass 297 in which the signal at the box is a lamp.

    (1)     Note.  The lamp may, for example, be used to notify a policeman on
    his beat to call in.


CLS 340/301
TXT Subject matter under subclass 287 in which the signal box in actuated by a
    movable key.

    (1)     Note.  The key may, for example, be attached to the box by means of
    a chain, or the key may be in the custody of the person who turns in the
    alarm, who must surrender the key to box mechanism before he can turn the
    alarm in, so that his identity may be made known.


CLS 340/302
TXT Subject matter under subclass 301 in which the key is normally housed by a
    frangible closure, which must be broken in order to obtain the key for
    operation of the box.


CLS 340/303
TXT Subject matter under subclass 287 provided with a frangible closure which
    must be broken in order to send a signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302,    for this subject matter where the frangible closure encloses a
    movable key, which key is used to transmit the signal.


CLS 340/304
TXT Subject matter under subclass 287 provided with means for combating false
    alarms.

    (1)     Note.  The signal box may, for example, be provided with means for
    detaining, as by hand-cuffing means, the person who sends in an alarm.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301,    for signal box systems where the person turning in the alarm must
    surrender an individual key to the signal box mechanism before he can send
    the alarm.


CLS 340/305
TXT Subject matter under subclass 287 in which the signal box is actuated by a
    local circuit separate from the main circuit.


CLS 340/306
TXT Subject matter under subclass 305 in which the signal box is provided with
    a local circuit for use by watchmen.


CLS 340/307
TXT Subject matter under subclass 287 consisting of a transmitter utilized in
    signal box systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 20+ and 173+ for a
    pulse code transmitter.


CLS 340/308
TXT Subject matter under subclass 307 in which the signal is sent automatically
    when the door of the signal box is opened.


CLS 340/309
TXT Subject matter under subclass 307 having a rotary make and break wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 16 and 17 for a
    pulse code transmitter having a rotary make and break wheel.


CLS 340/309.15
TXT Timer controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 286.01 in which the system includes means
    whereby the communication is brought about after a predetermined time lapse
    or is continued for a predetermined time following initiation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 19+ for a
    mechanical clock with an electric alarm and subclasses 108+ for an electric
    alarm clock.


CLS 340/309.2
TXT Subject matter under subclass 309.15 combined with means other than
    partially or wholly electrical means for conveying information or
    intelligence.


CLS 340/309.3
TXT Subject matter under subclass 309.15 including an additional means, not
    under the control of the timer, for conveying information or intelligence.


CLS 340/309.4
TXT Subject matter under subclass 309.15 including a plurality of indicators
    selectively or sequentially controlled by the timer.


CLS 340/309.5
TXT Subject matter under subclass 309.4 including a manually actuated means
    which has no utility in the operation involving the timer but may be
    utilized for controlling one or more of the indicators independently of the
    timer.


CLS 340/309.6
TXT Subject matter under subclass 309.15 in which the communication system
    includes two circuit maker-breakers in series, both of which must be closed
    in order for the information or intelligence to be transmitted, and both of
    the circuit maker-breakers being under the control of the timer.


CLS 340/310.01
TXT Signal over power line:

    Subject matter under subclass 286.01 wherein communication signals are sent
    from one point to another in a system by means of an existing power line in
    the system.

    (1)     Note.  The system may be an electric light system over whose
    conducters the signals are sent.

    (2)     Note.  The information signal may be an address or a code signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    288+,   for this subject matter where the signal system is a signal box
    system.

    320,    for signaling systems in which the electric signal is sent along a
    fluid conduit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 3.3 for a radio communication system
    combined with a power distribution network, and subclass 270 for a radio
    receiver using a power line as a wave collector.


CLS 340/310.02
TXT Modulation technique:

    Subject matter under subclass 310.01 including details of technique for
    impressing a signal onto a carrier waveform for transmission over a power
    line.

    (1)     Note.  The carrier can be a direct current or an alternating
    current.


CLS 340/310.03
TXT Noise reduction (e.g., filtering):

    Subject matter under subclass 310.01 wherein a circuit is provided to
    compensate for signal defects.


CLS 340/310.04
TXT Zero crossing:

    Subject matter under subclass 310.03 including means to extract information
    from its carrier wave at a region close to the zero crossing point of the
    carrier wave.


CLS 340/310.05
TXT Impedance matching (e.g., Y-match or delta match):

    Subject matter under subclass 310.01 wherein a circuit is provided to make
    the impedance of a line terminal equal to the impedance of a circuit to
    which it is connected in order to achieve optimum signal transfer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 17.3, 32+, and
    124+ for impedance matching without communication.


CLS 340/310.06
TXT Bidirectional (e.g., with transceiver):

    Subject matter under subclass 310.01 including at least two communicating
    terminals which can both transmit and receive signals.


CLS 340/310.07
TXT With inductive coupling (e.g., transformer or torroid):

    Subject matter under subclass 310.01 wherein information on the power line
    is transferred to or from a terminal through a mutual or common inductance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 24+ for coupling
    networks which may include inductive coupling.


CLS 340/310.08
TXT With coupling plug:

    Subject matter under subclass 310.01 wherein information on the power line
    is transferred to or from a terminal through a connector.


CLS 340/311.1
TXT Paging:

    Subject matter under subclass 286.01 wherein there is a humanly perceptible
    signal which is used to summon an individual.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass is limited to
    nonselective paging.  For selective paging see this class, subclasses
    825.44+.


CLS 340/313
TXT Subject matter under subclass 286.02 having means to send an interrogation
    from one station to another and having means to send the answer to said
    interrogation back from said second station to said first station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    825.54+, for selective systems for automatically and selectively answering
    interrogations.


CLS 340/314
TXT Subject matter under subclass 313 having means to sound an alarm if the
    answer to the interrogation is improper.


CLS 340/315
TXT Subject matter under subclass 286.01 having selsyn-type transmitters and
    receivers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    870.34, for this subject matter in telemetering systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 690+ for
    self-synchronous electric motor systems.


CLS 340/316
TXT Subject matter under subclass 286.02 in which the receiver is provided with
    means which are unbalanced by the transmitter signal and is provided with
    means for rebalancing said means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 638+ for electric
    motor systems controlled by a self-balancing network.


CLS 340/317
TXT Subject matter under subclass 316 in which the unbalanced means at the
    receiver is automatically rebalanced.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    870.43, for similar subject matter utilized in telemetering systems.


CLS 340/318
TXT Subject matter under subclass 286 having synchronous distributers at both
    the transmitter and receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    870.13+, for similar subject matter utilized in telemetering systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 304+ for multiplexing systems
    which include a synchronous distributor at both the transmitter and
    receiver.


CLS 340/319
TXT Subject matter under subclass 286.01 in which the receiver has plural
    electromagnets or plural motors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    870.05, for similar subject matter utilized in telemetering systems.


CLS 340/320
TXT Subject matter under subclass 286.01 in which the electric signal is
    transmitted along a fluid conduit.

    (1)     Note.  The fluid conduit may, for example, be a fire hose, so that
    the firemen may be able to communicate back from the nozzle to the engine
    pumper.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 8+ and 47 for
    fluid conduits combined with electrical conductors.


CLS 340/321
TXT Subject matter under subclass 286.01 which is portable and self-contained.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, movie ushers'
    flashlights which have means for signaling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 157+ for battery flashlights of general
    utility.


CLS 340/322
TXT Subject matter under subclass 286.01 in which the system has means to
    cancel any indications after a fixed time.


CLS 340/323
TXT Subject matter under subclass 286.01 for reporting the status of a game.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 222+ for mechanical game
    reporting devices.

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, appropriate subclasses for games in
    combination with game reporting devices.

    473,    Amusement Devices:  Games, and its incorporated class (273,
    Amusement Devices, Games), for a game device or apparatus with a game
    reporting device.


CLS 340/326
TXT Subject matter under subclass 286.01 in which a single variation indication
    is given at plural points or in plural manners.

    (1)     Note.  The indication may, for example, be given by an electric
    light signal and also by an electric bell signal, so that the bell rings
    when the light flashes.


CLS 340/327
TXT Subject matter under subclass 326 provided with means to cut off a sound
    signal.

    (1)     Note.  The sound signal, for example, may be cut off while the
    light signal continues to flash, or one sound signal may be cut off while
    the second one continues to sound.


CLS 340/328
TXT Subject matter under subclass 286.01 having an audible signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    384+,   for audible signals, per se.


CLS 340/329
TXT Subject matter under subclass 328 in which the audible signal operates
    intermittently.


CLS 340/330
TXT Subject matter under subclass 286.01 for signaling whether a person is "in"
    or  "out".

    (1)     Note.  A door bell button may, for example, cause an "out" sign to
    flash instead of causing the bell to ring.


CLS 340/331
TXT Subject matter under subclass 286.01 having a periodic or flashing signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329,    for this subject matter where the signal indicator is audible.


CLS 340/332
TXT Subject matter under subclass 286.01 having signal lights.


CLS 340/333
TXT Subject matter under subclass 286.01 having significantly recited or
    significant power supply systems.

    (1)     Note.  The system, for example, may be provided with means to
    substitute an auxiliary source of power if the regular source fails.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 64+
    for emergency power systems of general application.


CLS 340/384.1
TXT AUDIBLE INDICATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising signalling means for
    producing an acoustic wave as a signalling indication.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclasses for nonelectrical
    audible indicators.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 99.1 for private sounders (e.g., acoustically
    shielded).

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 3 for article dispensing with audible
    recorder, register, indicator, signal, or exhibitor.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 39 for dispensing with audible recorder,
    register, indicator, signal, or exhibitor.

    367,    Communication, Electrical: Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 140+ for acoustic signalling devices for use in electro-acoustic
    communication.

    368,    Horology: Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 243+ for
    signalling means.

    704,    Data Processing:  Speech Signal Processing, Linguistics, Language
    Translation, and Audio Compression/Decompression, subclasses 231+ for
    speech analysis (e.g., phoneme recognition) and subclasses 258+ for speech
    synthesis.


CLS 340/384.2
TXT Ultrasonic pest control:

    Subject matter under subclass 384.1 wherein the audible signalling means
    includes a source for generating electrical signals within an ultrasonic
    frequency range and a transducer means for converting the electrical
    signals into an acoustic wave to repel unwanted animals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, appropriate subclasses
    for similar subject matter wherein the animal is destroyed or at least
    injured.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 22 for nonelectrical animal
    frightening device.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems or Devices,
    subclass 139 for animal control.


CLS 340/384.3
TXT Simulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 384.1 wherein the produced audible sounds are
    imitative sounds.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass, includes, for example, audible signalling
    means for producing an imitative representation of sounds emitted by
    animals, engines, ship propellers, vehicles, children's toys,  etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 397+ for sounding amusement
    devices.


CLS 340/384.4
TXT Electronic siren (e.g., wail tone or yelp tone warning device):

    Subject matter under subclass 384.1 wherein the audible  signalling means
    includes a source for generating audio frequency electrical signals having
    a rising and falling pitch and a transducer for converting the signals into
    the produced audible sounds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404.1,  for pneumatic siren sound producer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 147 for nonelectrical siren.


CLS 340/384.5
TXT With computer element:

    Subject matter under subclass 384.1 wherein the audible signalling means
    comprises a keyboard, memory means, or computer means connected to a
    transducer means for inputting, storing, or processing information
    representing or relating to the produced sounds outputted by the transducer
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, subclasses 602+ for electrical musical tone generator
    instrument with digital memory circuit.


CLS 340/384.6
TXT Piezoelectric:

    Subject matter under subclass 384.1 wherein the audible signalling means is
    provided with a vibrator device for converting energized electrical signals
    into audible sounds in such a manner that the operation of the device
    depends on the interaction between electric charge of the energized
    electrical signals and the deformation or mechanical stress property of a
    crystal or ceramic element incorporated into the device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, subclass 730 for electrical musical tone generator
    instrument with piezoelectric transducer.

    367,    Communications, Electrical: Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclass 180 for piezoelectric receivers and subclass 155 for underwater
    type piezoelectric transducer array.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclass
    190 for electrostrictive, magnetostrictive, or piezoelectric
    electro-acoustic audio transducer.


CLS 340/384.7
TXT Electronic:

    Subject matter under 384.1 having circuitry comprising at least a signal
    generator for generating an audio frequency electrical signal and a
    transducer means for converting the signal into audible sounds.

    (1)     Note.  The circuitry may include other devices or components such
    as an amplifier, filter, switching means, feedback for affecting the
    generation of the electrical signals or the outputted sounds.


CLS 340/384.71
TXT Timing:

    Subject matter under subclass 384.7 comprising a clock or timing means for
    producing the audible sounds at a repetitive rate or for controlling the
    start or the duration or the effect of the produced sounds.


CLS 340/384.72
TXT Plural generators:

    Subject matter under subclass 384.7 comprising a plurality of oscillators
    for generating audio frequency signals at different operating frequencies
    or means for producing multi-tone audible sounds.


CLS 340/384.73
TXT With sound transducer details:

    Subject matter under subclass 384.7 including at least a structural element
    of the sound transducer.

    (1)     Note.  The structural element includes, for example, coil, core,
    diaphragm, etc. or supports therefor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices,  subclasses
    150+ for nonindicating Electro Acoustic Audio Transducer.


CLS 340/385.1
TXT Explosive:

    Subject matter under subclass 384.1 having means to produce a sharp, loud
    sound by a violent and sudden  release of confined energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 84 for explosive
    traps.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, appropriate subclasses for explosive
    devices in general.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 105 for nonelectrical ignition
    control explosive alarm.


CLS 340/387.1
TXT Weatherproofing:

    Subject matter under subclass 384.1 provided with means for inclosing the
    audible signalling device to protect it from moisture, insects, or other
    unwanted substances.

    (1)     Note.  Watertight housing, sealed casing, etc., are  included in
    this subclass.


CLS 340/388.1
TXT Diaphragm (e.g., horn or buzzer):

    Subject matter under subclass 384.1 wherein the audible sounds are produced
    by the vibration of an actuated flexible membrane.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 142+ for nonelectrical diaphragm
    horns, and subclass 59 for vehicle-energy actuated diaphragm horns.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Device, subclasses
    112+ and subclasses 168+ for speaker, per se.


CLS 340/388.2
TXT Alternating current:

    Subject matter under subclass 388.1 wherein the vibration of the diaphragm
    is caused by a current that changes the polarity with time in such a manner
    that the current reaches maximum in one direction, decreases to zero,
    reverses itself, and reaches minimum in the opposite direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401.1,  for alternating current used in percussion type sound producers.


CLS 340/388.3
TXT With auxiliary flexible membrane:

    Subject matter under subclass 388.1 wherein the sounds are produced by the
    vibration of at least two diaphragms or by the vibration of a diaphragm and
    a resonator disc or plate secured to the diaphragm.

    (1)     Note.  The two diaphragms are arranged in  closely spaced parallel
    planes or in orthogonal planes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 145 for nonelectrical parallel
    diaphragms.


CLS 340/388.4
TXT With resonance chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 388.1 provided with an air space or volume
    adapted to vibrate at a specific tuned frequency to amplify the produced
    sounds.


CLS 340/388.5
TXT Armature support:

    Subject matter under subclass 388.1 including means for  pivotally mounting
    or holding a movable part operated by an electromagnet to transmit its
    movement to the diaphragm for producing sounds.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, the bridge the plate, the frame, and
    the arm by which the armature is secured or supported.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    397.1,  for armature support of percussion type sound producers.


CLS 340/388.6
TXT Having spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 388.5 wherein the means for  pivotally
    mounting or holding a movable part comprises  a resilient member for
    supporting the armature or for restoring the armature to a normal position.


CLS 340/388.7
TXT Interrupter:

    Subject matter under subclass 388.1 including means for controlling the
    flow of current into an electromagnet thereby operating a movable part to
    vibrate the diaphragm.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    397.3,  for interrupter of percussion-type sound producers.


CLS 340/388.8
TXT Having spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 388.7 wherein the interrupter comprises a
    resilient contact member or is supported by a resilient member.


CLS 340/390.1
TXT Rotary actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 388.1 comprising a driving  mechanism
    operated by an electric motor to move in a circular motion for mechanically
    agitating the diaphragm.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 143+ for nonelectrical rotary
    striker diaphragm horns.


CLS 340/390.2
TXT Having spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 390.1 wherein the driving mechanism comprises
    a resilient member for holding a driving shaft in a desired position by
    exerting a thrust force upon the shaft or for retracting the means for
    agitating the diaphragm.


CLS 340/391.1
TXT Housing or mounting:

    Subject matter under subclass 388.1 comprising means for supporting or
    enclosing the audible signalling device.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes supports for the diaphragm.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    396.1,  for housing or mounting of percussion type sound producers.


CLS 340/392.1
TXT Percussion-type sound producer (e.g., signal chimes or bells):

    Subject matter under subclass 384.1 having means to strike one element
    against another in order to produce the audible sounds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    388.1,  for this subject matter in which one of the elements is a diaphragm.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, subclasses 402+ and 411+ for similar subject matter utilized
    in music.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 60 for vehicle-energy actuated
    bells, subclasses 148+ for nonelectrical bells, and subclass 25 for
    nonelectrical periodic bells.


CLS 340/392.2
TXT Rotary actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 392.1 comprising a driving  mechanism
    operated by an electric motor to move in a circular motion to actuate the
    striking means.


CLS 340/392.3
TXT Volume control:

    Subject matter under subclass 392.1 comprises means for regulating the
    loudness of the produced audible sounds.


CLS 340/392.4
TXT Tubular sound producer (e.g., signal chimes):

    Subject matter under subclass 392.1 wherein the striking means hits a
    cylindrical body for producing the audible sounds.


CLS 340/392.5
TXT Resonator (e.g., signal chimes):

    Subject matter under subclass 392.1 wherein the striking means hits a
    vibrating member associated with a tuned air chamber to emit a desired tone.


CLS 340/393.1
TXT Plural armatures:

    Subject matter under subclass 392.1 comprising at least two movable
    elements attracted by one or more electromagnets for actuating the striking
    means for generating the audible sounds.


CLS 340/393.2
TXT Battery operated:

    Subject matter under subclass 392.1 comprising a battery for energizing the
    striking means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 157+ for flashlights having an unitary
    battery.


CLS 340/393.3
TXT Pushbutton:

    Subject matter under subclass 392.1 in which a manually actuated device
    must be depressed to operate the striking  means for generating the audible
    sounds.


CLS 340/393.4
TXT Including timer:

    Subject matter under subclass 392.1 including a timing mechanism for
    controlling the timing of the strokes produced by the striking means.


CLS 340/395.1
TXT Suspended (e.g., locomotive bell):

    Subject matter under subclass 392.1 including means for hanging the sound
    producer.


CLS 340/396.1
TXT Housing or mounting:

    Subject matter under subclass 392.1 comprising means for enclosing or
    supporting the sound producing device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    391.1,  for housing or mounting of diaphragm sound producers.


CLS 340/397.1
TXT Armature support:

    Subject matter under subclass 392.1 comprising means for pivotally holding
    or mounting a movable part which oscillates when the coils of the audible
    signalling means are energized by a current to reciprocate the striking
    means.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, the bridge, the plate,
    the frame, the arm, or the yoke by which the armature is secured or
    supported.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    388.5,  for armature support of diaphragm sound producers.


CLS 340/397.2
TXT Having spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 397.1 comprising a resilient member for
    carrying the armature, for restoring the armature to a normal position or
    for supplementing the effect of the current to move the armature.


CLS 340/397.3
TXT Interrupter:

    Subject matter under subclass 392.1 including means for controlling the
    flow of current into an electromagnet to cause one element to strike
    against the other repeatedly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    388.8,  for interrupter of diaphragm sound producers.


CLS 340/397.4
TXT Having spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 397.3 wherein means for controlling the flow
    of current includes a resilient contact member or is supported by a
    resilient member.


CLS 340/397.5
TXT Polarized:

    Subject matter under subclass 392.1 wherein the striking  means is
    electromagnetically operated and comprises a permanent magnet operatively
    causing the reciprocating of the armature.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, a permanent magnet for
    magnetizing the armature, thereby creating permanent magnetic flux in the
    air gaps between the ends of the armature and the cores; current sent
    through the coils, produces a flux which adds to or subtracts from the
    permanent magnetic flux in the air gaps causing the armature to attract or
    repulse from two poles of the coils thereby causing the movement of the
    armature to reciprocate the striking mechanism; successive reversal of
    current in the coil terminal changes the direction of magnetism in the air
    gaps and thereby causing the armature to move up and down.


CLS 340/398.1
TXT Nonelectrical driving means (e.g., spring or weight):

    Subject matter under subclass 392.1 wherein the striking means is driven by
    gravitational or stored mechanical energy.


CLS 340/398.2
TXT With electromagnetic control:

    Subject matter under subclass 398.1 having an armature operated by an
    electromagnet to restrict or release the striking means.


CLS 340/398.3
TXT Including circuit breaker:

    Subject matter under subclass 398.2 comprising an electric circuit having
    switch means for controlling the energization of the electromagnet.


CLS 340/401.1
TXT Alternating current:

    Subject matter under subclass 392.1 in which striking means is operated by
    a current that changes polarity with time in such a manner that the current
    reaches maximum in one direction, decreases to zero, reverses itself, and
    reaches minimum in the opposite direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    388.2,  for alternating current used in diaphragm sound producers.


CLS 340/404.1
TXT Pneumatic-type sound producer (e.g., whistle or siren):

    Subject matter under subclass 384.1 wherein the signalling means is
    operated by the flowing of air or other gaseous stream to produce the
    audible sounds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    815.72, for diverse indications having a pneumatic-type indication.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 129.01+ for electrically
    actuated valve.


CLS 340/404.2
TXT Rotary actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 404.1 comprising an electric motor for
    actuating a driving mechanism in a circular motion to produce the audible
    sounds.


CLS 340/404.3
TXT With valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 404.1 comprising means for regulating the
    flow of air or other gaseous stream thereby controlling the effect of the
    produced sounds.


CLS 340/407.1
TXT TACTUAL INDICATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising means for producing an
    indication signal perceptible by the sense of touch.

    (1)     Note.  The sense of touch is of human or animal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 205 for nonelectrical indicators
    by touch.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 173+ for touch panel used as
    input device of selective display systems.

    901,    Robots, subclass 32 for tactile sensor.


CLS 340/407.2
TXT With input means (e.g., keyboard):

    Subject matter under subclass 407.1 combined with a  manually actuated
    device to enter control or information data.

    (1)     Note. The manually actuated device includes, for example, a
    keyboard which may not, however, be the means for producing the indication
    itself.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 22+ for electronic
    keyboard or keypad, per se.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 168+ for keyboard as input
    device for providing selective electrical control in selective display
    systems.


CLS 340/425.1
TXT REPEATER IN UNSPECIFIED TYPE COMMUNICATIONS LINE OR CHANNEL (E.G., RELAY
    STATION):

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a generically recited
    transmission path (e.g., telecommunications or communications line) having
    signal retransmitting or amplifying equipment in the path.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is directed to such subject matter in which
    the line is not identifiable as a particular communication line  (e.g.,
    telephone, telegraph).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 70+ for a telegraph repeater.

    330,    Amplifiers, appropriate subclasses for an amplifier.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 274, 279, 293, 315+, 492, and
    501+ for repeaters used in multiplex communications.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 211+ for a pulse or
    digital signal repeater.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 338+ for a telephone repeater.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 7+ for a carrier wave repeater.


CLS 340/425.2
TXT Power control:

    Subject matter under subclass 425.1 comprising means for controlling power
    supplied to the repeater.


CLS 340/425.5
TXT LAND VEHICLE ALARMS OR INDICATORS:

    Subject matter under the class definition including systems or devices with
    an alarming or indicating function mounted on, or carried within, a land
    vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500+,   for systems having generic condition responsive alarms or
    indicators.

    901+,   for vehicle mounted alarms or indicators which respond to a
    condition or stimulus external to the vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 28+ for similar devices which
    are nonelectrically actuated.


CLS 340/426
TXT Of burglary or unauthorized use:

    Subject matter under subclass 425.5 in which an alarm or indicator is
    activated in response to an attempt at unauthorized entry or use of the
    vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  Classification here requires significant combination of
    burglar alarm with vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500+,   especially 541+ and 568+, for burglar alarms, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 287+ for antitheft systems which prevent
    unauthorized use by controlling one or more systems during attempted
    operation of the vehicle, as by:  (1) application of the brakes, (2)
    stoppage of the fuel supply, or (3) opening of the ignition circuit in
    response to a timer.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses
    10.2+ for antitheft systems which prevent activation of the ignition or
    starter systems of the vehicle.


CLS 340/427
TXT Of motorcycles or bicycles:

    Subject matter under subclass 426 wherein the vehicle is a two-wheeled type
    either motorized or manually propelled.


CLS 340/428
TXT Responsive to change in voltage or current in a vehicle electrical system:

    Subject matter under subclass 426 including alarms which are actuated by
    direct sensing of changes in current or voltage within any existing
    electrical circuit (e.g., domelight or starter) of the vehicle.


CLS 340/429
TXT Responsive to inertia, vibration, or tilt:

    Subject matter under subclass 426 in which the alarm is sensitive to
    vibrations or other motions of a vehicle caused by an intruder's actions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    566,    for vibration sensitive intrusion alarms, per se.


CLS 340/430
TXT With entrance/exit time delay:

    Subject matter under subclass 426 wherein actuation of the alarm is delayed
    for a predetermined time interval to allow a legitimate user of the vehicle
    to enter or exit the vehicle without sounding the alarm.


CLS 340/431
TXT For trailer:

    Subject matter under subclass 425.5 wherein the vehicle is a trailer or a
    motor vehicle combined with a trailer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    687,    for condition responsive indicators which respond to the connection
    or disconnection of circuits of general utility.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 10.8
    for trailer lighting circuits with significant recitation of the means for
    coupling with the circuits of a towing vehicle.


CLS 340/432
TXT For bicycle:

    Subject matter under subclass 425.5 wherein the vehicle is a bicycle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 78 for
    generator powered vehicle lighting systems, per se.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 72 for bicycle signal light systems in
    combination with illuminating systems.


CLS 340/433
TXT For school bus:

    Subject matter under subclass 425.5 wherein the vehicle is a school bus.


CLS 340/434
TXT For taxi:

    Subject matter under subclass 425.5 wherein the vehicle is a taxicab.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 288 for a motor vehicle provided with a
    safety-promoting means which is responsive to the failure of a taxicab
    operator to activate the vehicle's fare meter upon the boarding of a
    passenger.


CLS 340/435
TXT Of relative distance from an obstacle:

    Subject matter under subclass 425.5 including indicators which enable a
    driver to estimate the relative distance to an obstacle such as another
    vehicle.


CLS 340/436
TXT Of collision or contact with external object:

    Subject matter under subclass 425.5 including systems which indicate
    contact between the vehicle and an external object.

    (1)     Note.  Systems classified here must have significant alarm or
    indication function.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 271+ for systems with a control function
    or other nonalarm response to contact with an external object.


CLS 340/437
TXT Curb:

    Subject matter under subclass 436 in which the external object is a curb.


CLS 340/438
TXT Internal alarm or indicator responsive to a condition of the vehicle:

    Subject matter under subclass 425.5 wherein the alarm or indicator is
    actuated in response to a specific condition of the vehicle and the alarm
    or indicator communicates with an occupant of the vehicle (e.g., the
    driver).

    (1)     Note.  Included in this and the indented subclasses are:  (a) fully
    automatic alarms and indicators (e.g., fluid level indicators) and (b)
    indicators which automatically respond to a manual actuation of a system
    (e.g., gear position indicators.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286.01+, for automatic or manual alarms and indicators having only nominal
    vehicle structure.

    901+,   for vehicle mounted alarms or indicators which respond to a
    condition or stimulus external to the vehicle.


CLS 340/439
TXT Operation efficiency (e.g., engine performance, driver habits):

    Subject matter under subclass 438 wherein the degree of efficiency in the
    operation of the vehicle is indicated.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are devices which indicate:  (1) relative fuel
    economy, (2) erratic driving behavior, or (3) other factors related to
    improper operation of the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    575     and 576, for devices which determine driver capability or alertness.


CLS 340/440
TXT Tilt, imbalance, or overload:

    Subject matter under subclass 438 including systems which inform the
    operator of an unsafe load or weight distribution on the vehicle.


CLS 340/441
TXT Speed of vehicle, engine, or power train:

    Subject matter under subclass 438 including alarms or indicators which
    respond to the speed of the vehicle or of a component of its power train.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    466,    for speed responsive alarms or indicators which communicate with
    persons outside the vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 170+ for systems in which the speed
    responsive signal performs a direct control function in one or more of the
    vehicle's systems.


CLS 340/442
TXT Tire deflation or inflation:

    Subject matter under subclass 438 wherein the specific condition is a
    deviation from the proper inflation of a pneumatic tire.

    (1)     Note.  This is the repository for on-board electric alarms or
    indicators of under inflation in vehicle mounted pneumatic tires and of
    unbalanced inflation in vehicle mounted paired (dual) tires.

    (2)     Note.  The alarm or indicator here is triggered by the inflation
    pressure falling below a preset limit.  Indicators which directly report a
    quantitative measurement of the tire pressure are classified in Class 73.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 146+ for quantitative measurement
    of pneumatic tire pressure.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 34+ for nonelectric tire
    deflation alarms or indicators.

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclasses 415+ and 418+ for systems
    which maintain tire air pressure by means of an on-board air supply.


CLS 340/443
TXT By indirect detection means (e.g., height measurement):

    Subject matter under subclass 442 wherein the deviation from proper
    inflation pressure is determined from a measurement of a parameter other
    than air pressure.


CLS 340/444
TXT Relative wheel speed:

    Subject matter under subclass 443 wherein the measured parameter is the
    relative rotational speed of two or more wheels of the vehicle.


CLS 340/445
TXT With particular telemetric coupling:

    Subject matter under subclass 442 including systems in which a signal,
    generated by a sensor on the rotating wheel, is transmitted to an alarm or
    indicator on a nonrotating portion of the vehicle by means other than
    direct conduction of electricity.


CLS 340/446
TXT Acoustic wave:

    Subject matter under subclass 445 in which the signal is carried by sound
    waves generated by a device mounted on the rotating wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 13, 117, and 137+ for generic acoustic wave transmission systems.


CLS 340/447
TXT Radio wave:

    Subject matter under subclass 445 in which the signal is carried by
    electromagnetic waves of radio frequency generated by a transmitter mounted
    on the rotating wheel.


CLS 340/448
TXT Inductive:

    Subject matter under subclass 445 wherein a coil or permanent magnet is
    mounted on the wheel in spaced relationship with a coil mounted on a
    nonrotating portion of the vehicle.


CLS 340/449
TXT Temperature:

    Subject matter under subclass 438 wherein the specific condition is the
    temperature of a particular component of the vehicle.


CLS 340/450
TXT Fluid level:

    Subject matter under subclass 438 wherein the specific condition is the
    depth of a fluid in a reservoir.


CLS 340/450.1
TXT Of hydraulic brake fluid:

    Subject matter under subclass 450 wherein the fluid is hydraulic brake
    fluid.


CLS 340/450.2
TXT Of fuel:

    Subject matter under subclass 450 wherein the fluid is a fuel.


CLS 340/450.3
TXT Of lubricant (e.g., engine oil):

    Subject matter under subclass 450 wherein the fluid is a lubricant.


CLS 340/451
TXT Fluid pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 438 wherein the specific condition is the
    pressure in a contained fluid.


CLS 340/452
TXT Of brake fluid:

    Subject matter under subclass 451 wherein the fluid is hydraulic brake
    fluid.


CLS 340/453
TXT Brake or clutch condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 438 wherein the specific condition is a
    physical property of the vehicle brake, or clutch, system.


CLS 340/454
TXT Wear:

    Subject matter under subclass 453 wherein the physical property of the
    brake or clutch system is the degree of wear of the linings or pads.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 30 for nonelectric clutch
    wear indicators.


CLS 340/455
TXT Battery charging system condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 438 wherein the specific condition is the
    degree of charge in a battery or the current drawn from, or supplied to, a
    battery.


CLS 340/456
TXT Gear position:

    Subject matter under subclass 438 wherein the indicator informs the driver
    as to which one of several selectable gear combinations available in a
    manual or automatic transmission is engaged.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 28.1 for mechanical gear position
    indicators.


CLS 340/457
TXT Reminder:

    Subject matter under subclass 438 wherein the alarm or indicator informs
    the operator that a vehicle system requires an action on his part.


CLS 340/457.1
TXT Of seat belt application:

    Subject matter under subclass 457 wherein the required action is the
    application of a seat belt.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 268+ for systems in which the seat belt
    mechanism deactivates the ignition circuit or performs some other control
    function.


CLS 340/457.2
TXT Of headlight energization:

    Subject matter under subclass 457 wherein the required action is the
    activation or deactivation of a headlight circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 83 for
    indicators of high or low beam headlamp circuit activation.


CLS 340/457.3
TXT Of parking brake application:

    Subject matter under subclass 457 wherein the required action is the
    application, or release, of a parking brake.


CLS 340/457.4
TXT Of service interval expiration:

    Subject matter under subclass 457 wherein the required action is the
    performance of a periodic maintenance function.


CLS 340/458
TXT Lamp or lamp circuit condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 438 in which fault conditions within a
    vehicle illumination or signal light system are indicated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 82+ for
    vehicle headlamp systems which may include fault indicators.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 61+ for vehicle mounted illumination
    devices which may include fault, or position (e.g., aiming) indicators.


CLS 340/459
TXT Plural conditions:

    Subject matter under subclass 438 including systems or devices which
    combine two or more automatic alarms or indicators, or in which a single
    alarm or indicator serves two or more diverse functions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    439+,   for alarms or indicators which respond to a combination of two or
    more related conditions which measure engine efficiency.


CLS 340/460
TXT With voice warning:

    Subject matter under subclass 459 in which the alarm or indicator includes
    a recorded or synthesized voice signal.


CLS 340/461
TXT With particular display means:

    Subject matter under subclass 459 wherein plural diverse indicators share a
    common housing or mounting.


CLS 340/462
TXT Digital:

    Subject matter under subclass 461 wherein one or more of the indicators is
    a digital display.


CLS 340/463
TXT External alarm or indicator of movement:

    Subject matter under subclass 425.5 including external signalling systems
    which automatically respond to a state of motion (e.g., turning,
    acceleration, deceleration, backing) of the vehicle and which communicate
    with persons outside the vehicle (e.g., other drivers, pedestrians).

    (1)     Note.  The state of motion may be sensed directly, as by an
    accelerometer, or it may be sensed by devices responsive to the activation
    of a system which causes the movement (e.g., the steering linkage or the
    transmission gear selector).


CLS 340/464
TXT Plural indications (e.g., go, slow, stop):

    Subject matter under subclass 463 in which two or more diverse motion
    indicators are combined.


CLS 340/465
TXT Turning or steering:

    Subject matter under subclass 463 in which the external signal indicates
    that the vehicle is executing a turning movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    475+,   for systems which are manually set to indicate the operator's
    intention to initiate a turning movement and may be automatically cancelled
    upon completion of the turn.


CLS 340/466
TXT Speed:

    Subject matter under subclass 463 in which the external signal indicates
    the speed of the vehicle or warns of a condition of overspeed or underspeed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    441,    for speed responsive alarms or indicators which communicate with
    occupants of the signalling vehicle.


CLS 340/467
TXT Acceleration or deceleration:

    Subject matter under subclass 463 in which the external signal indicates a
    change in the speed of the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  External signal lights which are actuated by:  (a) an
    inertial sensor, (b) a switch associated with the accelerator pedal, or (c)
    a device which senses changes in engine vacuum are classified here.  Brake
    lights, which are actuated by a switch associated with the brake pedal, are
    provided for in this class (340), subclass 479.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 282+ for systems or devices which
    directly control a vehicle subsystem (e.g., an ignition circuit) in
    response to an acceleration or deceleration.


CLS 340/468
TXT External signal light system:

    Subject matter under subclass 425.5 wherein the alarm or indicator is a
    manually actuated signal light system which communicates with persons
    outside the vehicle (e.g., other drivers, pedestrians).

    (1)     Note.  Systems must be manually actuated but may be automatically
    deactuated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for signal light systems of general utility.


CLS 340/469
TXT With two or more intensity levels (e.g., day or night):

    Subject matter under subclass 468 wherein the signal light system can
    operate at two or more brightness levels.

    (1)     Note.  The selection of brightness level may be made either
    manually or automatically.


CLS 340/470
TXT Pass - no pass:

    Subject matter under subclass 468 in which the signal is used to indicate
    to the driver of an overtaking vehicle whether or not it is safe to pass
    the signalling vehicle.


CLS 340/471
TXT Hazard warning or distress signalling:

    Subject matter under subclass 468 including systems designed to indicate to
    other drives that the signalling vehicle is inoperative, or is being
    operated in an unusual manner and itself constitutes a hazard to other
    vehicles.


CLS 340/472
TXT Auxiliary signal permanently attached to vehicle:

    Subject matter under subclass 471 including alarms or indicators which are
    attached to a vehicle (e.g., police car light bar), but which are not
    "standard" vehicle signalling systems.


CLS 340/473
TXT Portable signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 471 including alarms or indicators which may
    be carried in a vehicle, and displayed on or off the vehicle, and which are
    not normally attached to the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    908,    for similar portable hazard warning signals placed on a highway to
    warn of hazards, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 63+ for similar signals without
    electrical components.


CLS 340/474
TXT With audible signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 468 wherein the signal light system is
    combined with an audible signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    326+,   for systems of general utility combined with audible signals.


CLS 340/475
TXT Turn signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 468 wherein an external signal is manually
    actuated to indicate the driver's intention to execute a turning movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    465,    for external signals which automatically indicate a turning motion
    in response to actuation of the vehicle steering system.


CLS 340/476
TXT With automatic cancelling:

    Subject matter under subclass 475 wherein the external signal is
    automatically deactivated after the turn is completed.


CLS 340/477
TXT By predetermined time interval or distance:

    Subject matter under subclass 476 wherein deactivation of the signal occurs
    after a specified time interval has elapsed or after a specified distance
    has been travelled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    815.3,  for visual signals of general utility which automatically cancel
    after a predetermined elapsed time interval.


CLS 340/478
TXT With plural bulbs sequentially flashed:

    Subject matter under subclass 475 wherein the external signal consists of a
    timed sequence of multiple flashing lights.


CLS 340/479
TXT Brake light:

    Subject matter under subclass 468 wherein the signal light is actuated by a
    switch associated with the brake system of the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    453+,   for systems which automatically respond to a physical condition of
    the brake system other than its activation.


CLS 340/480
TXT Electromagnetically actuated mechanical signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 425.5 in which the indicator is a mechanical
    device which is caused to move from an inactive position to a display
    position by means of a solenoid or motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 28+ for similar devices which
    are actuated manually or pneumatically.


CLS 340/481
TXT Wigwag type:

    Subject matter under subclass 480 including devices which oscillate during
    display.


CLS 340/482
TXT Normally encased:

    Subject matter under subclass 480 including devices which are contained in
    a protective housing at least while in the inactive (undisplayed) position.


CLS 340/483
TXT Plural concurrent indicators:

    Subject matter under subclass 482 including two or more individually
    actuated signal members which are capable of simultaneous display.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    488,    for similar devices which are not normally encased nor
    simultaneously displayable.


CLS 340/484
TXT Sliding sign or shutter:

    Subject matter under subclass 482 wherein the device is a plane sheet which
    is brought into display position by a rectilinear motion.


CLS 340/485
TXT Window exhibited sign or shutter:

    Subject matter under subclass 482 wherein the indicator remains in the
    protective housing both during display and during inactive storage and is
    displayed through a transparent window when activated.

    (1)     Note.  The electromagnetic actuation may be applied to:  (1) the
    indicator member, (2) the window, or (3) a shutter which covers the window.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 42+ for similar devices which
    are manually or pneumatically actuated.


CLS 340/486
TXT Drum:

    Subject matter under subclass 485 wherein the indicator is a cylinder or
    drum.


CLS 340/487
TXT Pivoting:

    Subject matter under subclass 480 wherein the indicator is brought into
    display position by rotation about an axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 51+ for pivoted signals or
    indicators which are manually or pneumatically actuated.


CLS 340/488
TXT Multiple indicators:

    Subject matter under subclass 487 wherein more than one indicator may be
    brought into display position by rotation about an axis.


CLS 340/489
TXT Three or more positions:

    Subject matter under subclass 487 wherein a single indicator may be
    displayed in more than two positions.


CLS 340/490
TXT Vertical axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 489 wherein the axis of rotation of the
    indicator is perpendicular to the earth's surface.


CLS 340/500
TXT CONDITION RESPONSIVE INDICATING SYSTEM:

    Subject matter under the class definition where an electrical means
    provides a humanly perceptible signal in response to the attainment of a
    predetermined condition.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, alarm circuits or
    signals which are automatically responsive to some condition, such as
    excessive temperature.  Alarm devices which are manually activated are
    classified in Class 340, subclasses 286.04+.

    (2)     Note.  Condition responsive indicators in combination with
    structural details of a particular art device are classified with the art
    device; e.g., telemetering systems, data processing systems, chemical
    apparatus, tools, or vehicles.

    (3)     Note.  The combination of a condition responsive indicator and a
    switching system is classified herein; however, if the indicator means is
    merely an ancillary element, classification is elsewhere; e.g. Class 307 or
    361.

    (4)     Note.  Particular quantitative testing or measuring means in
    combination with an electrical condition responsive indicator are
    classified with the appropriate testing and measuring class, except if the
    quantitative measurement is peculiar to an alarm device; e.g., a smoke
    detector alarm system with a meter indication of its power supply.

    (5)     Note.  If a qualitative testing, measuring, or monitoring means is
    claimed to be permanently associated with the environment being tested,
    such as a machine monitoring device, classification is in Class 340, while
    if it is temporarily associated, as in a portable test set, classification
    is in the appropriate testing and measuring class.

    (6)     Note.  The class definition of this class, under "SEARCH CLASS",
    refers to the many other classes which contain alarms and indicators.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    438+    and 463+, for vehicle condition responsive alarms or indicators.

    825.32, for an authorization control system having an alarm or indication
    of improper access.

    825.36+, for a selective communication system with an indication or alarm.

    870.09, for telemetering systems which have added alarms.

    910+    and 917+, for traffic control indicators which are responsive to
    vehicle detectors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclasses, especially
    subclasses 67 and 200+ for nonelectrical alarms and indicators which are
    automatically responsive to a condition.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses
    under subclass 52 for circuit makers and breakers whose controllers are
    responsive to a condition.

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), subclasses 22+ for a selective
    cutting device having means responsive to a given operating condition (or
    malfunction) to impose an auxiliary control thereon.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 86+,
    97, 99, 116+, and 152 for electrical transmission or switching systems
    which are responsive to a condition.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 129 for
    electric lamp or discharge systems with a signal, indicator, or alarm.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 187 for a stable state circuit which is externally
    effected and subclasses 509+ for miscellaneous circuits which are
    externally effected.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 65+ for electric oscillation generators
    combined with means responsive to an external physical condition.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 30 for inductors with condition
    responsive adjusting means.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 13+ for resistors whose resistance
    value is responsive to a condition.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    safety and protection systems which may be condition responsive; subclasses
    139+ for electrical relay systems; and subclasses 271+ for capacitors which
    are automatically responsive or nonresponsive to a condition.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 93+ and 136 for acoustic wave-type intruder detectors.


CLS 340/501
TXT With particular system function (e.g., temperature compensation,
    calibration):

    Subject matter under subclass 500 with significant functional relationship
    between the condition sensing means and indicating means, additional to the
    basic condition responsive actuating function.

    (1)     Note.  Typical additional functions are special processes, priority
    of urgency, adjustment, temperature compensation, and calibration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 1.01+ for calibration of a
    measuring device.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 1+ for calibration of a
    thermally responsive device.


CLS 340/502
TXT Acknowledgement:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 together with means to effect a change in
    the indication to further indicate that the condition has been noted.

    (1)     Note.  Acknowledgement exists when a remote office sends an alert
    signal in response to the sensed condition to a central office where the
    signal is indicated; and the central office then responds with an
    acknowledgement signal (which may or may not return to the remote office),
    which causes a change in the indication at the central office. This should
    be distinguished from interrogation which occurs when the controller at the
    central office sends an interrogating signal such as pulse or code to the
    remote office, and the remote office returns a signal indicative of the
    original signal and any intervening disturbances.  This should also be
    distinguished from "answer-back" which occurs when the remote office sends
    an alarm signal to the central office, and the central office returns a
    signal indicative of the successful completion of the alarm function.


CLS 340/503
TXT With ringback:

    Subject matter under subclass 502 where an additional indication is
    provided after acknowledgement, indicating that the sensed condition is
    further changes (e.g., corrected, removed, or worsened).

    (1)     Note.  The additional indication may be caused by an additional
    signal, or a return of the original signal to normal. However, for
    classification here, more than a mere inherent return of the indication to
    normal is necessary.  Usually means is provided to reset the system to
    normal indication.


CLS 340/504
TXT Answer-back:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 where a signal indicative of receipt of
    the indication is returned to the location originating the alarm.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 502 Note for distinction between answer-back
    and acknowledgement systems.


CLS 340/505
TXT Interrogator-responder:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 where the indication is only given upon
    receipt of an initiating signal.

    (1)     Note.  The response signal may be indicative of the original
    interrogating signal and any intervening disturbances. However, the
    condition is indicated only in response to the interrogation.  See subclass
    502 for acknowledgement systems, and the Note thereunder for the
    distinction between interrogation and acknowledgement systems.


CLS 340/506
TXT Alarm system supervision:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 where there is continuous monitoring of
    the operativeness of the alarm circuits in the system.

    (1)     Note.  The system having its operativeness monitored is referred to
    as the "primary system" in the definitions of of the subclasses indented
    hereunder.

    (2)     Note.  Supervision should be distinguished from automatic testing
    of the system as in subclass 516 below, in that, supervision implies
    continuous surveillance of the system while automatic testing is periodic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    635+,   for monitoring of a system in which the combination to form a
    condition responsive primary alarm system is not recited.


CLS 340/507
TXT Fail-safe:

    Subject matter under subclass 506 having the primary alarm circuit itself
    organized so as to give alarm upon its failure.


CLS 340/508
TXT Redundant (e.g., added circuit or loop):

    Subject matter under subclass 506 having either duplicate primary alarm
    circuits, an added circuit, or double loops in the primary alarm circuit,
    to monitor at least an element of the primary circuit.


CLS 340/509
TXT Plural or diverse current sources:

    Subject matter under subclass 506 having plural, or diverse current
    sources, with the supervisory current typically being imposed on the
    primary alarm circuit.

    (1)     Note.  Systems using polarity reversal are not classified herein,
    but are usually classified in subclass 513.


CLS 340/510
TXT Bridge or potential divider:

    Subject matter under subclass 506 having the primary alarm circuit arranged
    with at least one potential divider from which supervisory currents are
    derived.


CLS 340/511
TXT Threshold or window (e.g., of analog electrical level):

    Subject matter under subclass 506 wherein the supervisory circuit is
    coupled to the primary alarm circuit and is responsive to the signal
    therein attaining a predetermined level or range of levels.


CLS 340/512
TXT Pulse:

    Subject matter under subclass 506 having electrical pulses, either from an
    energizing pulse source, or from some circuit means forming pulses related
    to an electrical alarm signal, in either the primary or supervisory circuit.


CLS 340/513
TXT Diode:

    Subject matter under subclass 506 having a diode added to the primary alarm
    circuit by which a supervisory current may be effective.


CLS 340/514
TXT Testing:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 where the operativeness of the system is
    determined at discrete times.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    501,    for alarm system calibration.


CLS 340/515
TXT Simulation of condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 514 where the test is performed by imitation
    of a condition.

    (1)     Note.  The test is normally performed at the sensor to imitate the
    condition being monitored.


CLS 340/516
TXT Automatic (e.g., periodic, start-up):

    Subject matter under subclass 514 where the test is invariably performed at
    periodic intervals, or as a function of the energization or deenergization
    of the primary alarm system.


CLS 340/517
TXT Selection from a plurality of sensed conditions:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 including more than one sensing means and
    having a particular relationship therebetween.

    (1)     Note.  Mere duplication of sensing means is insufficient for
    classification herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    825+,   for selective communication systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 116+
    for condition responsive electrical switching systems.


CLS 340/518
TXT Scanning:

    Subject matter under subclass 517 where the sensor means are monitored one
    at a time in a predetermined order.


CLS 340/519
TXT Worst condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 517 where the system responds to the sensor
    means reporting the condition that deviates the most from a predetermined
    setting.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of the worst conditions are the greatest unbalance,
    the greatest difference from a standard, or the most extreme variation in a
    given direction.


CLS 340/520
TXT First sensed exclusively indicated:

    Subject matter under subclass 517 where the first condition to become
    abnormal is selected for indication.

    (1)     Note.  Subsequent alarm indications may be locked out, or may be
    displayed to show order of sensing.


CLS 340/521
TXT Plural diverse conditions:

    Subject matter under subclass 517 responsive to at least two disparate
    conditions (e.g., intrusion and flame).


CLS 340/522
TXT Combined for response:

    Subject matter under subclass 521 where the system responds to a specified
    combination of the sensed conditions.


CLS 340/523
TXT Particular sequence of conditions:

    Subject matter under subclass 517 responsive to a given series of events.


CLS 340/524
TXT Condition position indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 517 wherein the indication imparts
    information as to the location, in addition to the attainment, of the
    condition being monitored.


CLS 340/525
TXT Display board:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 wherein the means providing indication
    include a plurality of visual indicators, each of which is actuated by one
    of the sensors, located upon a surface at a single location.

    (1)     Note.  The display may mimic the sensor array.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286.13+, for a manually operated alarm with a mapping or mimicking
    indicator.


CLS 340/526
TXT Predetermined rate of occurrence:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 in which a specified number of events
    (one or more) must occur within a specified time period in order to cause
    or prevent the actuation of the humanly perceptible signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    609,    for a fluent particle counting flow rate alarm system.


CLS 340/527
TXT Time delay:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 having a circuit which delays the
    transmission of a signal, or the output of a transducer, for a desired
    length of time.

    (1)     Note.  Time delay introduced by means other than circuitry, e.g., a
    transducer structure providing such a delay, is not classified herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclasses 267+ for time interval controlled lock operating
    mechanisms.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 261+ for miscellaneous time delay circuits.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 195 for
    time-delay systems.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 10+ for
    clocks combined with alarm or signal.


CLS 340/528
TXT Entrance/exit:

    Subject matter under subclass 527 where the time delay allows an authorized
    person to either disarm the alarm or exit a protected area before the
    humanly perceptible signal is actuated.


CLS 340/529
TXT Condition persistence:

    Subject matter under subclass 527 where there is a lapse of time between
    the sensing of the condition and the giving of the indication, where the
    indication is given only if the condition persists for the duration of the
    time lapse.


CLS 340/530
TXT Capacitor:

    Subject matter under subclass 529 where the time-delay circuit is
    controlled by the charging or discharging of a capacitor.


CLS 340/531
TXT With particular coupling link:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 having specific connecting means between
    the sensing and indicating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    870.28+, for continuously variable indication via a radiant energy beam.


CLS 340/532
TXT Having particular safety function:

    Subject matter under subclass 531 wherein the particular communication link
    has a specific limitation to enable safe operation in a particular
    environment (e.g., in the presence of explosive vapor).

    (1)     Note.  "Intrinsic safety" systems are classified herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    electrical safety systems, generally.


CLS 340/533
TXT Wired:

    Subject matter under subclass 531 with a transmitting means connected to
    indicating means by an arrangement of conductors.

    (1)     Note.  To complete the search for this subject matter, the search
    should extend into the appropriate fields of classification of wired
    coupling means, such as Class 178, for Telegraphy; Class 379 for Telephonic
    Communications.


CLS 340/534
TXT Coded message:

    Subject matter under subclass 533 with a pulse code source in the
    transmitting means.

    (1)     Note.  The message may relate to location or to the condition
    sensed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 20+ and 173+ for
    pulse code transmitter.


CLS 340/535
TXT Mechanical code means (e.g., coded disc):

    Subject matter under subclass 534 having a switching device actuated by a
    mechanical actuator (e.g., cam or disc) upon an occurrence of the alarm
    condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    287+,   for manually actuated signal box-type fire alarm boxes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 2 and 79 for code transmitters in telegraph
    systems.


CLS 340/536
TXT Noninterfering:

    Subject matter under subclass 533 provided with means for preventing the
    transmission of other signals while a first signal is being transmitted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    295,    for this subject matter when not automatically responsive to a
    condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 17+ for telegraphy systems having
    noninterfering transmitters.


CLS 340/537
TXT With impedance level coding:

    Subject matter under subclass 533 where the sensor or transmitter output is
    encoded by selection of specifically related impedance.

    (1)     Note.  Graded or binary coded decimal coding for analog signals are
    found in Class 340, subclass 870.27 for telemetering systems.


CLS 340/538
TXT Combined with power line:

    Subject matter under subclass 533 where the wired communication link is a
    wired electrical power transmission system.

    (1)     Note.  The system need not be the power source of the indicating
    system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310.01+, for transmitting a manually initiated alarm signal over a power
    line.


CLS 340/539
TXT Radio:

    Subject matter under subclass 531 where the communication link is by radio
    waves (i.e., other than light, X, or gamma rays, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, appropriate subclasses for
    radio wave communication systems in general.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 200-294 for the radio
    link, per se.


CLS 340/540
TXT Specific condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 distinguished by the particular detected
    condition in response to which the signal is produced.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, alarms which are
    automatically operated in response to some condition, such as excessive
    temperature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, subclass 1.01 for firearms with miscellaneous indicators.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 1 with signal or
    indicator.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 5 with signal or indicator.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclasses, especially
    subclasses 67+ and 200+ for nonelectrical alarms and indicators which are
    automatically responsive to a condition.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses
    under subclass 52 for circuit makers and breakers whose controllers are
    responsive to a condition.

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching, subclasses 22+ for a selective
    cutting device having means responsive to a given operating condition (or
    malfunction) to impose an auxiliary control thereon.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 86+,
    97, 99, 116+, and 152 for electrical transmission and switching systems
    which are responsive to a condition.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 129+ for
    electric lamp or discharge systems with a signal, indicator, or alarm.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 65+ for electric oscillation generators
    combined with means responsive to an external physical Condition.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 30 for inductors with condition
    responsive adjusting means.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 13+ for resistors whose resistance
    value is responsive to a condition.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    safety and protection systems which may be condition responsive; subclasses
    170+ for electrical relay systems; and subclass 280 for capacitors which
    are automatically responsive or nonresponsive to a condition.


CLS 340/541
TXT Intrusion detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 540 where the entry or attempted entry by a
    living being (intruder) into a protected area is detected.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 59 for burglar
    traps.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclasses 21, 31, and
    38 for alarms, signals, or indicators.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 75+ for mechanical burglar
    alarms.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclass 18 with indicator,
    signal, or alarm.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 61.93 for
    anti-intrusion type switch.


CLS 340/542
TXT Lock:

    Subject matter under subclass 541 wherein unauthorized or improper
    operation of a latching device operated by a key, dial, etc., is detected.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclasses 432+ for locks with condition indicators;
    subclasses 262+ for systems, and subclasses 266+ for operating mechanism.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 5 for locks with a signal or
    indicator.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Markers and Breakers, subclasses 61.64+ for
    lock, bolt, or keeper actuated switches.


CLS 340/543
TXT Permutation:

    Subject matter under subclass 542 where the lock is combination lock (dial,
    push-button, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclasses 286+ for combination locks, per se, and
    subclasses 432+ for locks with condition indicators.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and devices, subclasses 171+ for
    code responsive relay systems.


CLS 340/544
TXT Disturbance of fluid pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 541 wherein the intrusion is detected by a
    pressure sensing device responsive to confined fluid under superatmosphere,
    subatmosphere, or time-varying pressure.

    (1)     Note.  The confined fluid may be within a barrier bounding the
    protected area or within the entire area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    626,    for pressure responsive indication of more general utility.


CLS 340/545
TXT Door or window movement:

    Subject matter under subclass 541 responsive to movement of a temporary
    room closure.

    (1)     Note.  For example, the walls or a building are permanent barriers,
    but the doors thereof are only temporary barriers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclass 13 and 14 for closure
    condition signal or indicator.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 75 for mechanical burglar alarms.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclass 10 with
    signal or indicator.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.62+ for
    closure, closure operator, or accessory switches; and subclass 61.93 for
    intrusion responsive switches.

    232,    Deposit and Collection Receptacles, subclasses 35, 36, and 37 for
    door operated signals and indicators.


CLS 340/546
TXT Portable:

    Subject matter under subclass 545 where the alarm means is not permanently
    attached to the door or window, is self-contained in a single housing, and
    is of such size and weight to be transportable by a person.


CLS 340/547
TXT Magnetic sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 545 in which movement is detected by a device
    containing or responsive to, a magnet or electromagnet.


CLS 340/548
TXT Plug or cord tension sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 545 in which the movement is sensed by the
    tension in a cord or wire or plug and socket.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 61.93 for
    anti-intrusion switches.


CLS 340/549
TXT Rotatable sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 545 in which the movement is sensed by a
    pivotally mounted feeler-type sensor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 61.93 for such
    switches, per se.


CLS 340/550
TXT Partition penetration:

    Subject matter under subclass 541 responsive to the condition of a barrier
    member of a structure.

    (1)     Note.  Barrier members of a structure may be permanent, e.g.,
    building walls, or temporary, e.g., doors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    545,    for subject matter responsive to movement of a door or window.

    652,    for "break-wired" systems, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 783.1+ for window
    panes, per se; and subclass 105 for static structures with indicia.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 61.08 for
    frangible switches.


CLS 340/551
TXT Disturbance of magnetic field:

    Subject matter under subclass 541 responsive to the change of a magnetic
    field caused by the presence or motion of an intruder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 200+ for magnetic
    field testing or measurement.


CLS 340/552
TXT Disturbance of electromagnetic waves:

    Subject matter under subclass 541 responsive to the intruder disturbing
    electromagnetic waves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar Radio Navigation), subclasses 27+ for reflective wave presence
    detection.


CLS 340/553
TXT Standing waves:

    Subject matter under subclass 552 wherein the electromagnetic waves are
    stationary (i.e., have maxima and minima at fixed positions).


CLS 340/554
TXT Doppler effect:

    Subject matter under subclass 552 responsive to the frequency change of a
    reflected electromagnetic wave caused by motion of a reflecting object.


CLS 340/555
TXT Light:

    Subject matter under subclass 552 wherein the electromagnetic waves are in
    the visible range (4,000-7,000A).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 221+ for photocell systems responsive to
    animate or inanimate objects.


CLS 340/556
TXT Beam:

    Subject matter under subclass 555 wherein the light is gathered and
    directed into substantially parallel rays.

    (1)     Note.  The light is generally gathered into one or more groupings,
    each having a relatively small cross-sectional area with respect to the
    dimensions of the protected area.


CLS 340/557
TXT Laser:

    Subject matter under subclass 556 wherein the light beam source is of the
    coherent, stimulated emission type.


CLS 340/561
TXT Disturbance of electric field:

    Subject matter under subclass 541 responsive to the disturbance of an
    electric field (e.g., capacitance).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 116+
    for a proximity responsive switching system.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 179+ for
    proximity responsive relay systems.


CLS 340/562
TXT Capacitance:

    Subject matter under subclass 561 wherein the electric field disturbance is
    detected by a change of capacitance in the sensing system.


CLS 340/563
TXT With bridge:

    Subject matter under subclass 562 wherein the capacitance change sensing
    system is a bridge circuit.


CLS 340/564
TXT Fence:

    Subject matter under subclass 562 where the capacitance sensor surrounds
    the protected area.


CLS 340/565
TXT Responsive to intruder energy:

    Subject matter under subclass 541 responsive to the energy generated by the
    intrusion, or of the intruder's body.

    (1)     Note.  The systems herein are generally passive.  The term
    "generated" should be distinguished from the term "disturbance" used in
    subclasses 551-561 which implies a pre-existing energy field which is
    modified by the intrusion.


CLS 340/566
TXT Vibration:

    Subject matter under subclass 565 responsive to mechanical disturbance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclass 136 for intruder responsive acoustic wave systems.


CLS 340/567
TXT Electromagnetic energy:

    Subject matter under subclass 565 responsive to electromagnetic energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    552+,   for disturbance of electromagnetic waves.


CLS 340/568
TXT Article placement or removal:

    Subject matter under subclass 540 responsive to the removal from, or
    placement in, a protected area, of an object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    541+,   for intrusion detection.

    573+,   for human or animal condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclass 507 with alarms, signals, or indicators.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, subclass 23 for alarms with extinguishing
    systems.

    232,    Deposit and Collection Receptacles, subclasses 34+ for mailbox
    having signals and indicators.


CLS 340/569
TXT Mailbox:

    Subject matter under subclass 568 wherein the protected area is a
    receptacle for mail.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    232,    Deposit and Collection Receptacles, subclass 34 through 37 for
    similar subject matter claimed in combination with significant mailbox
    structure.


CLS 340/570
TXT Drawer:

    Subject matter under subclass 568 where the protected area is a drawer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 61.61 for
    drawer operated switches.


CLS 340/571
TXT Alarm on protected article:

    Subject matter under subclass 568 where the entire system is attached to
    the protected object (e.g., in handbag).


CLS 340/572
TXT Detectable device on protected article:

    Subject matter under subclass 568 where there is a device (e.g., a magnet)
    on the protected article to which the system is responsive.

    (1)     Note.  A loop of a sensing circuit may be contained in the power
    connection of an electric appliance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclass 57.1 for means for attaching a named antitheft
    signaling device onto a protected article.


CLS 340/573
TXT Human or animal:

    Subject matter under subclass 540 responsive to the condition of a human
    being or an animal.

    (1)     Note.  The location of a living being, or a force incidental
    thereto is not a condition of the living being for purposes of this
    classification.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    541,    for intrusion detection.

    666,    for detection of the location of a living being by the weight
    thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    27,     Undertaking, subclass 31 for life signals which indicate that a
    supposedly dead person is alive.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 300+ for diagnostic instruments.


CLS 340/574
TXT Holdup:

    Subject matter under subclass 573 responsive to the raising of a person's
    arms above the level of his head.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 59 for burglar
    traps.


CLS 340/575
TXT Sleep:

    Subject matter under subclass 573 responsive to sleep.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, sleep inhibiting alarms
    which wake a person up every time he has a tendency to drowse, and
    antisnore alarms.


CLS 340/576
TXT Drive capability:

    Subject matter under subclass 573 responsive to the capability of a person
    to operate a vehicle; e.g., intoxication.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 272 for safety devices responsive to
    incapacitated operator.


CLS 340/577
TXT Flame:

    Subject matter under subclass 540 wherein the detected condition is the
    presence or absence of a flame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 65 for a combustion failure fluid safety
    cutoff.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 13 for combustion with indicator.


CLS 340/578
TXT By radiant energy:

    Subject matter under subclass 577 wherein the presence of a flame is
    detected by radiation emitted therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 554 for prephotocell systems with a flame
    light source.


CLS 340/579
TXT By ionization or conductivity:

    Subject matter under subclass 577 wherein the flame is detected by passage
    of current therethrough due to its ionizing properties.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    629,    for ionization-type smoke detectors.


CLS 340/580
TXT Ice formation:

    Subject matter under subclass 540 wherein the condition is a solidification
    of a liquid or gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    962+,   for ice formation detectors on aircraft.


CLS 340/581
TXT Thermal:

    Subject matter under subclass 580 wherein the ice formation is detected by
    its temperature or its heat transfer properties, or other properties (e.g.,
    conductivity) when the sensed area is heated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 125+ with indicator or signal.


CLS 340/582
TXT Vibratory:

    Subject matter under subclass 580 wherein the ice formation is detected by
    modification of vibratory energy; e.g., mechanically loading a vibrating
    sensor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    615,    for similar subject matter sensing the level of fluent material.


CLS 340/583
TXT Photoelectric:

    Subject matter under subclass 580 wherein the ice formation is detected by
    modification of light incident on an electrical photo responsive device.


CLS 340/584
TXT Thermal:

    Subject matter under subclass 540 wherein the condition is a predetermined
    level of heat or temperature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    581,    for the thermal detection of ice formation.

    606,    for flow rate detection by a heat responsive sensor.

    622,    for heat responsive detection of liquid level.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 101 and 216+ for mechanical
    thermal alarms and indicators.

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses for thermal change type
    demodulators.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 66 for electric oscillation generators
    combined with condition sensing means responsive to temperature changes,
    and wherein some characteristic (e.g., wave amplitude or frequency) of the
    generator is varied by the condition sensing means.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 43+ for optical
    pyrometers.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 161+ for
    thermally responsive relay control circuit.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 4 through 28 and 43
    through 57 for thermal testing, subclasses 29+ for heat flux measurement,
    subclasses 31+ for a calorimeter; and subclasses 100+ for a thermometer
    with quantitative indication, particularly subclasses 121+ for a radiation
    thermometer.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 13+ for a burner having a signal or
    indicator; and subclasses 75+ for a burner controlled by a combustion zone
    sensor.


CLS 340/585
TXT Refrigerated storage:

    Subject matter under subclass 584 wherein the monitored thermal condition
    is located interiorly of a refrigerated enclosure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 129+ for a refrigeration system condition
    responsive indicator.


CLS 340/586
TXT Portable:

    Subject matter under subclass 584 wherein the entire device including power
    supply is self-contained in a single housing, and of such size and weight
    to be transportable by a person.


CLS 340/587
TXT False alarm resistant:

    Subject matter under subclass 584 wherein the device has provision to
    prevent an indication due to extraneous causes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    529,    for alarm systems having a time delay to permit indication only of
    a persistent condition.


CLS 340/588
TXT Time-temperature relationship (e.g., overtemperature exceeds predetermined
    interval or time-temperature integral):

    Subject matter under subclass 584 where-in some time-temperature
    relationship (e.g., interval of overtemperature or time-temperature
    integral) exceeds or falls below a predetermined value.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    588+,   for an alarm having a time-delay circuit to indicate a persistent
    condition.


CLS 340/589
TXT Rate of temperature change:

    Subject matter under subclass 588 wherein the time-temperature relationship
    is the time rate of change of the temperature.


CLS 340/590
TXT Fusible, frangible, or destructible sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 584 wherein the temperature or heat condition
    causes the fusing or destruction of at least a portion of the temperature
    sensor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    577,    for a flame detecting device having a portion destroyed by flame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclasses 401+ for a thermally actuated switch with fusible, combustible,
    or explosive material.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 106 and 160 for fusible
    thermometers.


CLS 340/591
TXT Containing pressurized fluid:

    Subject matter under subclass 590 wherein the sensor contains fluid under a
    pressure higher than that of the ambient so as to produce a pressure drop
    upon destruction of the sensor element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    626,    for a pressure responsive indicator, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, subclasses 56+ having various fusible and
    frangible condition responsive controls.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 71 for
    sprinkling systems with indicators.


CLS 340/592
TXT Expanding fluid sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 584 wherein the thermal condition is sensed
    by the expansion of a given mass of fluid.

    (1)     Note.  The expansion may be sensed by an increase in either
    pressure or volume.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclasses 306+ for an expanding fluid actuated thermally responsive switch.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 201+ for an expanding
    fluid thermometer.


CLS 340/593
TXT Switch sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 584 wherein the sensor includes a mechanical
    element movable in response to the thermal condition and which element
    makes or breaks an electric circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclasses 382+ for a thermally actuated switch with a longitudinally
    expansible solid element.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 187+ for an expanding
    solid actuated thermometer.


CLS 340/594
TXT With bimetallic element:

    Subject matter under subclass 593 wherein the mechanical element is, or is
    moved by, an element formed of two joined materials having different
    coefficients of thermal expansion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclasses 333+ for a thermally actuated switch with a bimetallic element.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 205+ for a thermometer
    having a bimetallic element.


CLS 340/595
TXT Current modifier or generator:

    Subject matter under subclass 584 wherein the thermal condition is detected
    by a sensor effecting a thermally responsive modification or generation of
    electric current in a circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclasses 200+ for
    thermoelectric elements, per se.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 25+ for temperature-responsive
    resistors, per se.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 282 for
    thermally variable capacitors, per se.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 163+ for a thermometer
    with an electric sensor, particularly subclasses 179+ for a thermoelectric
    sensor thermometer, and subclasses 183+ for a current modifying sensor
    thermometer.


CLS 340/596
TXT Cable or elongated probe:

    Subject matter under subclass 595 wherein the sensor is in the form of a
    current carrying cable or a probe sensing the thermal condition over its
    length which is large compared to its other dimensions.

    (1)     Note.  Cable-type sensors are frequently utilized to determine the
    presence of an overtemperature condition in any of a plurality of zones
    monitored thereby.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    517+,   for a system with plural sensors in plural zones with a particular
    relationship therebetween.


CLS 340/597
TXT Curie point sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 595 wherein the sensor has a spontaneous
    ferroelectric or ferromagnetic polarization at some temperature, and
    detects thermal conditions by the change or disappearance of such
    polarization due to said conditions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 176+ for a thermometer
    with a sensor having spontaneous polarization (e.g., ferroelectric,
    ferromagnetic).


CLS 340/598
TXT Barrier-layer sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 595 wherein the sensor is composed of
    semiconductor material and has a barrier layer therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 53 through 56, 108, 414, and 467  through 470 for such devices
    used as temperature sensors.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 178 for a thermometer
    having a semiconductor junction device sensing element.


CLS 340/599
TXT Bridge circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 595 wherein the sensor is part of a bridge
    circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 365 for
    a Wheatstone bridge.


CLS 340/600
TXT Radiant energy:

    Subject matter under subclass 540 wherein the condition is a predetermined
    level of radiation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    578,    for flame detection using radiant energy.

    584+,   for detecting heat levels by thermally emitted radiant energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 336.1+ for invisible radiant energy
    responsive electric signalling; and subclasses 200+ for photocell circuitry.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 219+ for photoelectric
    photometers.


CLS 340/601
TXT Meteorological condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 540 wherein the condition is an atmospheric
    phenomenon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    584,    for a similar device monitoring temperature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 170.16+ for measurement of
    meteorological conditions.


CLS 340/602
TXT Moisture or humidity (e.g., rain):

    Subject matter under subclass 601 wherein the meteorological condition is
    the presence of a predetermined amount of water or water vapor.

    (1)     Note.  Dew point alarm systems are classified herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 170.17 for a rain gauge; and
    subclasses 335.08+ for a humidity measuring device.


CLS 340/603
TXT Fluent material:

    Subject matter under subclass 540 wherein the monitored condition is a
    condition or characteristic of flowable material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 551+ for this subject matter combined
    with specific fluid handling structure.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 71+ for such
    subject matter particularly described and combined with a signal or
    indicator.


CLS 340/604
TXT Wetness:

    Subject matter under subclass 603 responsive to the presence of water or
    water vapor.

    (1)     Note.  The water or vapor may be entrained in a solid, flowable
    material, or another liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    602,    for such water detection as, or as related to, a meteorological
    condition.

    603,    for an alarm system responsive to a liquid contaminant other than
    water.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 73+ for measurement of the
    moisture content of material.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 664+ and 694+ for
    moisture content measurement by capacitance and resistance, respectively.


CLS 340/605
TXT Leakage:

    Subject matter under subclass 603 wherein the monitored condition of the
    fluent material is the escape thereof from a specified containing device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 40+ for testing for leakage with
    fluid pressure.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 4+ for making a thermal
    test for leakage.


CLS 340/606
TXT Flow rate:

    Subject matter under subclass 603 wherein the monitored condition is the
    amount of material flowing past a point in a given time interval.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 112 and 264+ for mechanical
    fluid flow alarms and indicators, respectively.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 551+ for similar devices combined with
    significant fluid handling structure.


CLS 340/607
TXT Filter clogging:

    Subject matter under subclass 606 wherein the flow is monitored to indicate
    blockage of a filter in the flow path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    608,    for flow stoppage indication in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 85+ for matter of
    that class combined with alarm or signal means.


CLS 340/608
TXT Stoppage:

    Subject matter under subclass 606 wherein the predetermined condition
    indicated is the cessation of the monitored flow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 551+ for indicator or alarm in a fluid
    handling system.


CLS 340/609
TXT Counting:

    Subject matter under subclass 606 wherein the flow rate is determined by
    counting individual units of the fluent material (i.e., bubbles, drops, and
    particles).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 21 for fluid parameter counters with
    indicators.


CLS 340/610
TXT Vane in flow path:

    Subject matter under subclass 606 wherein the flow is sensed by the
    deflection of a solid element which extends transversely through the flow
    path.


CLS 340/611
TXT Pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 606 wherein the flow rate is detected by
    monitoring a pressure related thereto.

    (1)     Note.  The monitored pressure may be a pressure difference.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    626,    for monitoring pressure in general.


CLS 340/612
TXT Material level:

    Subject matter under subclass 603 wherein the monitored conditions is the
    height of the material with respect to a reference position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 290+ for measurement of liquid or
    dry fluent material level.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 155.2+ for a metal casting apparatus
    including control means responsive to material level.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.2+ for
    level responsive switch, per se.


CLS 340/613
TXT Weight in container:

    Subject matter under subclass 612 wherein the material level is sensed by a
    force sensor responsive to the weight of material in a container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    666+,   for weight responsive alarm systems, in general.


CLS 340/614
TXT Pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 612 wherein the level is sensed by the
    pressure exerted by a fluid on a sensor, and includes differential pressure
    sensed by plural sensors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    626,    for pressure monitoring of general utility.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 299+ for liquid level measurement
    by pressure head measurement.


CLS 340/615
TXT Moving sensor (e.g., impeller):

    Subject matter under subclass 612 wherein the presence or absence of
    material at the sensor is detected by the affect (e.g., damping) of the
    material on the motion of the sensor.

    (1)     Note.  The term "motion" used above is also intended to encompass
    vibration of low amplitude.

    (2)     Note.  The sensor is often an impeller.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    582,    for a vibratory ice condition sensor.


CLS 340/616
TXT Overflow:

    Subject matter under subclass 612 wherein the level is detected by
    overflowing of a full container, or of flow in an overflow discharge form a
    container.

    (1)     Note.  The mere use of the term "overflow" does not automatically
    result in classification herein.


CLS 340/617
TXT Pulverant material (e.g., bin):

    Subject matter under subclass 612 wherein the fluent material is a granular
    or powdered solid.

    (1)     Note.  The solid material is often in a bin or similar receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 290+ for pulverant material
    measurement, as set forth in (3) Note.


CLS 340/618
TXT Liquid:

    Subject matter under subclass 612 wherein the fluent material is a liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 290+ for liquid level measurement.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 392 for a liquid level responsive system
    sensing an electrical characteristic.


CLS 340/619
TXT Optical sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 618 wherein the liquid level is detected by a
    device responsive to or conducting light rays.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 564+ and 577 for a prephotocell or
    optical system responsive to liquid level, but not including a claimed
    indicating means.


CLS 340/620
TXT Electrode probe:

    Subject matter under subclass 618 having a sensor containing one or more
    conductive elements for passing current through the liquid.

    (1)     Note.  Such current includes displacement current of a capacitive
    arrangement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 304 for similar sensors in liquid
    level measuring circuits.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 38 for resistive level sensors, per
    se.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 284 for
    capacitive level sensors, per se.


CLS 340/621
TXT Having sonic sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 618 wherein the liquid level is detected by a
    vibration responsive element, which may include a vibration transmitting
    element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 290 for vibratory type liquid level
    measuring devices.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 311+ for
    piezoelectric vibration transducers, per se.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 99+ for liquid level measuring means.


CLS 340/622
TXT Having heat sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 618 wherein the liquid level is detected by a
    thermally responsive sensor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 504.2 for boiler alarm or
    indicator thermally responsive to steam when water level falls below a
    certain limit.


CLS 340/623
TXT Float sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 618 wherein the liquid level is sensed by the
    position of a buoyant object floating on the liquid surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 308 for the combination of a
    float-type liquid level measuring device and an electrical signal or alarm.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breaker, subclass 84 for float
    actuated switches.


CLS 340/624
TXT Vertically reciprocable:

    Subject matter under subclass 623 wherein the float has no horizontal
    component of motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 319 for a vertically reciprocable
    float operated liquid level measuring device.


CLS 340/625
TXT Pivoted arm:

    Subject matter under subclass 623 wherein the float is rigidly attached to
    an arm connected to a pivot so as to restrict the motion of the float to an
    arcuate path centered at the pivot.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 317+ for a pivoted float arm
    operated liquid level measuring device.


CLS 340/626
TXT Pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 603 wherein the monitored condition is the
    pressure of the fluent material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 700+ for fluid pressure gauges.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 81+ for
    pressure responsive switches.


CLS 340/627
TXT Particle suspension in fluid:

    Subject matter under subclass 603 wherein the fluent material has
    particulate matter entrained therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 23.33 for gas analysis for solid
    matter; and subclasses 53.01+ for measuring particles in a liquid
    suspension.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 441+ for an optical
    transmission or absorption liquid particle suspension measuring device.


CLS 340/628
TXT Smoke:

    Subject matter under subclass 627 wherein particle suspension is in a gas,
    and is generally the result of combustion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    577,    for the detection of a flame.

    584,    for the detection of smoke by the thermal properties thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 61.03 for a
    smoke operated switch.


CLS 340/629
TXT Ionization:

    Subject matter under subclass 628 wherein the smoke detector responds to
    ionization of the smoke caused by an applied electric field or a
    radioactive source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 381 for ionization-type signalling
    circuits, per se.


CLS 340/630
TXT Photoelectric:

    Subject matter under subclass 628 wherein the sensor is a photodetector
    responsive to the optical properties of smoke.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 573+ for photocell actuated, fluent
    material detecting circuit.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 438+ for an optical
    transmission or absorption smoke measuring device.


CLS 340/631
TXT Lubricant:

    Subject matter under subclass 627 wherein the particle suspension is in, or
    of, a lubricating liquid for a mechanical device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    682,    for bearing condition in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 53.05 for lubricant testing.


CLS 340/632
TXT Gas:

    Subject matter under subclass 603 wherein the fluent material is a gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 23.2+ for gas analysis.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 61.03 for a gas
    operated switch.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 213+ and 300+ for
    spectroscopy and photometers respectively.


CLS 340/633
TXT Catalytic detector:

    Subject matter under subclass 632 wherein the gas sensor includes a
    catalyst to induce a chemical reaction producing a parameter to which the
    sensor is responsive (e.g., heat).

    (1)     Note.  The sensor is often coated with the catalyst and is
    thermally responsive.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 83+ for gas analysis apparatus
    utilizing a chemical reaction.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 68+
    for gas analysis utilizing a chemical reaction.


CLS 340/634
TXT Semiconductor detector:

    Subject matter under subclass 632 wherein the detector is composed of
    material having an electrical conductivity between that of metals and that
    of insulators, and which conductivity increases in the presence of a sensed
    gas.

    (1)     Note.  The sensor may include a heating element to raise its
    temperature to the appropriate operating range.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 34 for a gas responsive resistor.


CLS 340/635
TXT Condition of electrical apparatus:

    Subject matter under subclass 540 wherein the monitored condition is an
    electrical property of a specific electrical device or circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    506+,   for an electrical alarm circuit or element, the integrity of which
    is monitored.

    584+,   for monitoring the thermal characteristics of electrical devices.

    657+,   for characteristics of electricity, per se,  not representative of
    the condition of a particular device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 403+ for testing of
    electric lamp or discharge devices; and subclasses 415+ for the testing of
    electromechanical switching devices.


CLS 340/636
TXT Battery:

    Subject matter under subclass 635 where the device is a battery.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass for a battery or capacitor charging or discharging
    circuit combined with an indicator.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process, subclasses 90+ for testing and indicating where specific battery
    structure is claimed.


CLS 340/637
TXT Watt-hour meter:

    Subject matter under subclass 635 where the monitored device is a watt-hour
    meter.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass pertains to a meter condition, not power
    consumption, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 74 for testing
    watt-hour meters.


CLS 340/638
TXT Fuse or circuit breaker:

    Subject matter under subclass 635 where the device is current level
    responsive circuit interrupting device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 424+ for the
    testing of circuit breakers.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 17 for electromagnetic circuit breakers with
    integral signalling, indicating, or alarm means.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclass 206 for fusible element actuated switches with integral indicator;
    subclass 241 for cartridge fuses with integral indicators; and subclass 265
    for plug fuses with integral indicators.


CLS 340/639
TXT Plural:

    Subject matter under subclass 638 where plural fuses or circuit breakers
    are monitored.


CLS 340/640
TXT Heater element:

    Subject matter under subclass 635 where the monitored device is an electric
    heating element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    584+,   for monitoring the thermal condition of an electric heater.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 248, 453, and 487 for electrical
    heating devices having indicators.


CLS 340/641
TXT Signalling light element:

    Subject matter under subclass 635 wherein the monitored device is an
    electric signalling light.

    (1)     Note.  Any claimed signalling function is sufficient for
    classification herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    458,    for a light monitoring system in a specified vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 88+ for
    automatic filament substitution; subclass 120 for a nonsignalling lamp
    system having an indicator and an automatic shunt or cut-out; and
    subclasses 129+ for a nonsignalling; e.g., illuminating, lamp system with
    indicators.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 403 for lamp testing.


CLS 340/642
TXT Plural bulbs or filaments:

    Subject matter under subclass 641 where plural lights are monitored.


CLS 340/643
TXT Thermal or magnetic current sensors:

    Subject matter under subclass 641 where the condition of the light is
    sensed by means responsive to the thermal or magnetic effects of current
    flow through a conductor connected to the light being monitored.


CLS 340/644
TXT Switch or relay:

    Subject matter under subclass 635 wherein the monitored device is a circuit
    interrupter, and may be manually or automatically actuated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286.04+, for a manually actuated switch con-trolled alarm system.

    540+,   for switch-type sensors actuated in response to a specified
    condition and placed in an alarm or indicator circuit.

    638+,   for monitoring a circuit breaker.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 312 for
    significant switch structure combined with an indicator for its condition.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 116+
    for condition responsive switching systems.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 415+ for contact,
    relay, and switch testing.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous signal systems.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 17 for significant relay structure combined with
    indicator for its condition.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ for a
    relay control circuit.


CLS 340/645
TXT Rectifier:

    Subject matter under subclass 635 wherein the monitored device is a
    rectifier or a plurality of rectifiers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous circuits which may
    include a rectifier.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, appropriate subclasses for the
    details of rectification systems.


CLS 340/646
TXT Transformer:

    Subject matter under subclass 635 where the monitored device is a
    transformer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    584+,   for alarms responsive to thermal condition of a transformer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 726 for transformer
    testing.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 35+ for
    transformer safety systems.


CLS 340/647
TXT Insulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 635 where the monitored device is electrical
    insulation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 541 for insulation
    testing.


CLS 340/648
TXT Motor:

    Subject matter under subclass 635 where the monitored device is an electric
    motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 490 for similar
    subject matter combined with motor control systems.


CLS 340/649
TXT Condition of intentional grounding circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 635 where the monitored device is an
    intentional grounding circuit, (i.e., a protective ground).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 500+ for circuit
    fault testing.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 42+ for
    ground fault protection systems.


CLS 340/650
TXT Undesired circuit ground or short:

    Subject matter under subclass 635 where the condition monitored is an
    unwanted grounding or short circuiting of a power or signal conductor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 509+ for circuit
    grounding detectors that are used for occasional testing as distinguished
    from continuously monitoring for an alarm condition.


CLS 340/651
TXT For plural circuit conductors:

    Subject matter under subclass 650 where plural conductors are monitored.


CLS 340/652
TXT Breaking of circuit continuity:

    Subject matter under subclass 635 where the condition monitored is the
    integrity of a circuit; e.g., power or communication lines.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    506,    for monitoring alarm circuit continuity.

    649,    for ground circuit continuity alarm.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 539+ for circuit
    continuity testing as distinguished from continuously monitoring for an
    alarm condition.


CLS 340/653
TXT Electronic circuit or component:

    Subject matter under subclass 635 where the device is an active electronic
    circuit or component; e.g., amplifier, vacuum tube, or transistor.

    (1)     Note.  Significant art structure with indicating device will
    classify claimed subject matter with art structure as pointed out in (2)
    Note of the general class definitions of this class (340).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    654,    for monitoring of energization of a component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 2 for amplifiers with indicating means.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 64 for oscillators with alarms.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclasses 112+ for electrically operated registers
    with indicators.


CLS 340/654
TXT Circuit energization:

    Subject matter under subclass 635 where the condition monitored is the
    state of power energization of a circuit (e.g., off or on).

    (1)     Note.  Nominal recitation of a pilot light in an art device will
    not be classified herein.


CLS 340/655
TXT Heating circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 654 where the monitored circuit includes an
    electric heater.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    640,    for monitoring the condition of a heater element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 248, 453, and 487 for electric heating
    devices with indicators.


CLS 340/656
TXT Electrical socket:

    Subject matter under subclass 654 where the circuit is monitored at an
    electrical socket and the condition may be whether the socket or load
    plugged into the socket is energized.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    687,    for indication of mechanical connection of electrical connectors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 133 for testing
    devices for polarity and hot-line indication.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 488+ for an electrical connector
    combined with an indicating or identifying means.


CLS 340/657
TXT Electrical characteristic:

    Subject matter under subclass 540 where the condition monitored is a
    characteristic of electricity, per se, (i.e., power delivered, electric
    charge), rather than of a particular circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 125+
    for switching systems that are responsive to electrical conditions.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 76.11+ for
    measuring, testing, or sensing electricity, per se.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 1+ for miscellaneous discriminating circuits.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 182+ for
    relay systems that are electrical characteristic responsive.


CLS 340/658
TXT Phase or frequency:

    Subject matter under subclass 657 where the monitored characteristic is
    electrical phase or frequency.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 76.39+ and 76.77+
    for frequency and phase measurement, respectively.


CLS 340/659
TXT Pulse or surge:

    Subject matter under subclass 657 where the monitored characteristic is the
    occurrence of an electrical pulse or surge (i.e., pulse occurrence or
    absence, width, lightning stroke).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 72+ for testing
    potential in a specific environment (e.g., lightning stroke).


CLS 340/660
TXT Voltage:

    Subject matter under subclass 657 where the monitored characteristic is the
    electrical potential at a point in a current carrying circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 72.5 for a voltage
    probe in a specific environment; subclasses 76.11+ for voltage measurement
    absent a significant tangible environment, and particularly subclass 133
    for a test with a nonquantitative indication.


CLS 340/661
TXT Comparison:

    Subject matter under subclass 660 where the voltage is monitored by
    comparison with another voltage or a reference.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 50+ for miscellaneous specific amplitude discriminating
    circuits.


CLS 340/662
TXT Overvoltage:

    Subject matter under subclass 660 where the voltage exceeds a specified
    level.


CLS 340/663
TXT Undervoltage:

    Subject matter under subclass 660 where the voltage falls below a specified
    level.


CLS 340/664
TXT Current:

    Subject matter under subclass 657 where the sensed characteristic is the
    rate of flow of electrical charge with respect to time.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 76.11+ for current
    measurement and testing absent a significant tangible environment, and
    particularly subclass 133 for a nonquantitative indication.


CLS 340/665
TXT Force or stress:

    Subject matter under subclass 540 where the condition is a mechanical force
    or stress.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 760+ for stress measurement; and
    subclasses 862.381+ for force measurement.


CLS 340/666
TXT Weight:

    Subject matter under subclass 665 where the force is gravitationally
    induced.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclasses 45+ for alarms on scales.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 85+ for
    weight sensing switches.


CLS 340/667
TXT On seat:

    Subject matter under subclass 666 wherein the sensor responds to weight
    upon the weight bearing surface of a seat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    438     and 457.1, for this subject matter in a vehicle.


CLS 340/668
TXT Tension:

    Subject matter under subclass 665 where the force exists in tension.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 17 for
    indicating tension as the result of a fish being hooked on a fishing line.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 761 for fastener stress.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 36+, 49+, 357, 534+,
    563+, and 912 for a  detector, signal, or indicator associated with winding
    or unwinding an elongated material, which material is frequently under a
    tension control, and subclasses 410+ for regulating tension in a running
    length of elongated material.


CLS 340/669
TXT Acceleration:

    Subject matter under subclass 540 wherein the sensed condition is a change
    in velocity with respect to time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    429,    436 and 463, for acceleration responsive signalling systems in
    vehicles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 488 for measurement of acceleration.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.45+ for
    acceleration responsive switches.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 162 for acceleration
    measuring means combined with electrical speed measurement.


CLS 340/670
TXT Velocity:

    Subject matter under 540 wherein the sensed condition is the change in
    position of a specified object with respect to time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    441     and 463+, for a speed signalling system in a vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 488+ for speed measurement.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 160+ for electrical
    speed measurement.


CLS 340/671
TXT Angular:

    Subject matter under subclass 670 where the velocity is angular.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclass 168.1 for wheel slip
    indicators for rail locomotives.


CLS 340/672
TXT Direction of shaft rotation:

    Subject matter under subclass 671 wherein the monitored angular velocity is
    characterized by direction of rotation of a shaft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 200+ for a mechanical shaft
    rotation indicator.


CLS 340/673
TXT Article transport:

    Subject matter under subclass 540 where the condition is of an object
    moving along a constrained path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    933+,   for traffic detection and signalling systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 340 for signalling means at a
    station along a conveyor path; and subclass 502.01 for a conveyor or load
    alarm or indicator.


CLS 340/674
TXT Discrete articles:

    Subject matter under subclass 673 where the object has discrete boundaries
    which pass the point at which the condition is observed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 222.1 for photocell circuits for detecting
    article passage.


CLS 340/675
TXT Web, film, or strip:

    Subject matter under subclass 673 where the moving object is a continuous
    web, film, or strip.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 157 for film sprocket hole testing;
    and subclasses 159+ for sheet, woven fabric, or fiber testing.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 36+, 49+, 357, 534+,
    and 563+ for a  detector or stop associated with winding or unwinding an
    elongated material.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 548 and 559.01+ for photocell circuits
    for detecting a web, strip, or sheet.


CLS 340/676
TXT Conveyor belt:

    Subject matter under subclass 675 where the web is a conveyor belt.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates to the condition of the conveyor belt,
    not to the articles thereupon.


CLS 340/677
TXT Strand:

    Subject matter under subclass 673 where the object is a continuous strand
    (e.g., thread, rope, wire).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclass 81 for
    stopping and starting control.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclass 163 for strand stop control.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 548 and 559.01+ for photocell circuits
    responsive to a web, strand, strip, or sheet.


CLS 340/678
TXT Of geometrical gauge:

    Subject matter under subclass 540 where the condition is determined by
    monitoring the size or shape of an object.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, appropriate subclasses for measuring or
    gauging means with electrical indicators.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 104 for surface or cutting edge
    testing.


CLS 340/679
TXT Machine condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 540 wherein the monitored condition is that
    of a particular mechanical device or component thereof.


CLS 340/680
TXT Machine tool:

    Subject matter under subclass 679 where the machine component monitored is
    a tool (e.g., drill bit or cutting tool).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 20+ for a tool driving device
    with indicating or signalling means.


CLS 340/681
TXT Synchronization:

    Subject matter under subclass 679 where the condition is synchronization
    between mechanisms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 87 for
    connecting plural supply circuits or sources at correct phase relationship.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 85 for synchronizing
    motors.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 378+ for ignition
    timing.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclass 106 for synchronizers.


CLS 340/682
TXT Bearing:

    Subject matter under subclass 679 where the machine component is a bearing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    584     and 600, for temperature monitoring of bearings.

    631,    for bearing particles in oil.


CLS 340/683
TXT Vibration:

    Subject matter under subclass 679 where the condition is a vibration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    566,    for intrusion vibration responsive systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 570+ for vibration measurement
    and testing.


CLS 340/684
TXT Agricultural:

    Subject matter under subclass 679 where the machine is an agricultural
    machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters; 111, Planting; and 460, Crop Threshing or Separating,
    appropriate subclasses for detailed structure thereof.


CLS 340/685
TXT Cranes:

    Subject matter under subclass 679 where the machine is a crane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    668,    for cable tension in cranes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclasses 276+ for automatic stop control for
    cranes, and other condition sensors which regulates an indicator, alarm, or
    controller.  Class 212 takes condition responsive indicator systems claimed
    in combination with any structural details of a crane.


CLS 340/686
TXT Position responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 540 responsive to the position of one object
    relative to another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188,    for telemetric indications of relative position by incremental
    steps.


CLS 340/687
TXT Connected or disconnected:

    Subject matter under subclass 686 responsive to the mechanical connection
    of two or more objects.

    (1)     Note.  The system may, for example, be responsive to the mechanical
    connection of electrical connectors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    431,    for trailer signal light systems and hitch alignment devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 51+ for
    connector actuated switches.

    307,    Electrical Transmission and Interconnection Systems, subclass 9.1
    for  vehicle-to-trailer electrical interconnection systems which may
    include an alarm or indicator of connection or disconnection.


CLS 340/688
TXT Meter dial:

    Subject matter under subclass 686 responsive to the position of a pointer
    on a scale.

    (1)     Note.  If the pointer is automatically responsive to a specified
    condition, the system will be found with measurement of the condition.


CLS 340/689
TXT Tilt:

    Subject matter under subclass 686 responsive to the angular orientation of
    an object with respect of a predetermined reference orientation thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    429     and 440, for vehicle alarms or indicators responsive to tilt of the
    vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 366 for measuring levels with
    electrical indicators.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 52 for tilting
    vehicle operated switches; and subclasses 61.45+ for tilt operated switches.


CLS 340/690
TXT Geophysical (e.g., fault slip):

    Subject matter under subclass 686 responsive to the position of parts of
    the earth relative to other parts of the earth.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, position of mine roofs,
    earthquake faults, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    855.3,  for signaling in a wellbore telemetering system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 784 for earth stress measurement.

    166,    Wells, subclass 64 for a well with time or distance measuring or
    temperature responsive or counting means; and subclass 66 for a well with
    electrical indicating means.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating The Earth, subclasses 40+ for such subject
    matter which is particularly described and combined with signalling or
    indicating means.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 323+ for
    determining an electrical characteristic of the subsurface of the earth, in
    situ.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclass 81 for wellbore alarm systems.


CLS 340/691
TXT Specified indicator structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein the means translating electrical
    signals into humanly perceptible signals are particularly described.

    (1)     Note.  Mere inclusion by name only is insufficient for
    classification herein; detailed structure or circuitry is necessary.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes specific circuitry to provide desired
    effects (e.g., pulsed or steady indication, bright or dim) as well as
    structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    384,    407 and 815.01+, for visual, audible, and tactual indicators,
    respectively.


CLS 340/692
TXT Sound reproducer:

    Subject matter under subclass 691 wherein the translating means is a
    loudspeaker.

    (1)     Note.  The structure may also include means actuating the
    loudspeaker (e.g., tape recorder, tone generator).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    384.1+, for audible signaling means comprising transducer means for
    converting audio frequency electrical signals into audible sounds, and
    particularly subclass 384.73 for sound transducer details.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, subclasses 644+ for an electrical tone generator and
    loudspeaker as a musical instrument.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 1 and
    5 for sound reproduction from a magnetic storage system.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 19+ for
    external condition responsive phonograph control.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing and Systems, appropriate
    subclass for loudspeakers.


CLS 340/693
TXT Specified power supply or housing:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein either some portion of the
    structure of the housing or of the energizing supply, or a function of the
    energizing supply additional to energization is particularly described.

    (1)     Note.  Power supplies included by name only are not classified
    herein.

    (2)     Note.  The additional function referred to above is generally to
    cope with a particular problem; e.g., switching to an alternate power
    supply upon failure of the main power supply.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for a
    power supply with a safety feature; and subclasses 600+ for a housing
    having diverse electrical components.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, for power supplies, generally.


CLS 340/815.4
TXT VISUAL INDICATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a means for producing
    a visually perceptible indication of the presence, absence, or occurrence
    of an electrical signal.

    (1)     Note.  Indicators for quantitative characteristic of the electrical
    signal (e.g., voltage) per se, are excluded from this subclass and are
    classified in Class 324.

    (2)     Note.  The presence, absence, or occurrence of the electrical
    signal and the resulting visual indication is often intended to indicate
    some other condition or state or to convey some message (e.g., servant
    "call" annunciators).

    (3)     Note.  Display of printed or painted objects that does not contain
    electrical communication is classified in Class 40 Card, Picture, or Sign
    Exhibiting.

    (4)     Note.  Mechanical, as distinguished from electrical, devices for
    giving signals of the nature of either alarms or indicators are classified
    in Class 116, Signals and Indicators.

    (5)     Note. Radiant energy actuated visual indicators, (i.e., all methods
    and apparatus for using, generating, controlling, or detecting radiant
    energy) that do not contain electrical communications are found in Class
    250, Radiant Energy.

    (6)     Note. An optical element or an optical element system that includes
    a liquid crystal display is classified in Class 349,  Liquid Crystal Cells,
    Elements and Systems, appropriate  subclasses for utilizing a liquid
    crystal device in general.

    (7)     Note.  A light source structure to cast light in at least one
    direction to render objects in that direction visible and/or the
    combination of a source of visible radiant energy and means to modify the
    distribution or composition of the radiant energy emanating from the
    source, or methods for utilizing said combination are found in Class 362,
    Illumination.

    (8)     Note.  Display systems having selective electrical control are
    classified in Class 345, Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface
    Processing, and Selective Visual Display Systems.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286.01+, for a signalling system having a visual indicator.

    435+,   for visual indicators used with vehicles.

    500+,   for a condition responsive indicating system, particularly subclass
    600 for condition responsive radiant energy used in electrical
    communication.

    907+,   for visual indicators used to control vehicle or pedestrian traffic.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, appropriate subclasses for
    indicators void of electrical communications.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 200 for mechanical indicators.

    250,    Radiant Energy, appropriate subclasses for radiant energy
    responsive signalling.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 513 for character
    display with particular mask or electrode shape.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 169.1 for a
    visual indicator used in the shifting of a register, counter, or display.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 1+ for selective electrical
    control display systems.

    349,    Liquid Crystal Cells, Elements and Systems, appropriate  subclasses
    for utilizing a liquid crystal device in general.

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    265+ for a nonselective electrochronic display element.

    362,    Illumination, appropriate subclasses for electric lights and
    associated apparatus used for illumination.

    368,    Horology: Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 223+ for
    displays or display devices details.

    482,    Exercise Devices, subclass 3 for pace setting indicator and
    subclass 84 for striking exercise devices having indicators.

    902,    Electronic Funds Transfer, subclass 21 for ATM (Automatic Teller
    Machine) with specific data output means or indicator.


CLS 340/815.41
TXT False signal prevention (anti-sunlight):

    Subject matter under subclass 815.4 having means for preventing an improper
    indication.


CLS 340/815.42
TXT Having light piping:

    Subject matter under subclass 815.4 including a light conducting material
    characterized by an extended longitudinal dimension along which it guides
    light from a light admitting end connected to a light source to a light
    emitting end configured to display the visually perceptible indication.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 547 for fiber optic
    illuminated sign.

    250,    Radiant Energy, appropriate subclasses for light piping used in
    radiant energy.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 26 for edge illuminated modifier or light
    rod/pipe.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, appropriate subclasses for fiber optics,
    particularly subclasses 116+ for fiber optical imaging including shaping,
    enhancing, and correcting coherent fiber structure, per se.


CLS 340/815.43
TXT With specified colors:

    Subject matter under subclass 815.42 having means for selecting the
    displayed colors of the visually perceptible indication.

    (1)     Note.  Means for selecting the displayed colors comprises, for
    example, color filter, color wheel, or a plurality of light sources.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 150+ for selectable color
    attributes display systems having selective electrical control.


CLS 340/815.44
TXT Seven-segment indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 815.4 in which the visually  perceptible
    indication consists of segments of a seven-segment character.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 450 for bar segment
    (e.g., figure eight).

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 510 for luminescent
    solid or liquid material with character display (e.g., digits or letters)
    and subclass 581 for three or more electrode discharge devices.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 129+ for
    signal, indicator, or alarm.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclass 34 for seven-segment display in
    selective display systems.


CLS 340/815.45
TXT Using light emitting diodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 815.4 in which the signal indicating device
    is a light emitting semiconductor device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 214 for light amplifiers and subclasses
    552+ for solid state light source, including matrices and array, per se.

    257,    Active Solid-StateDevices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 13, 79 through 103, and 918 for incoherent light emitting
    injection luminescent devices.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 39, 47, and 82+ for light
    emitting diode display in selective display systems.


CLS 340/815.46
TXT Audio responsive lamp:

    Subject matter under subclass 815.4 comprising an electric light controlled
    or powered by electrical signals representative of sound waves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    367,    Communications, Electrical: Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 197+ for acoustic responsive selective system in general.


CLS 340/815.47
TXT Switchboard or panel type (e.g., bullseye):

    Subject matter under subclass 815.4 comprising electric light means
    associated with a plurality of circuit breakers to indicate the status
    (opened or closed) of the circuit breakers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 308+ for switching apparatus,
    per se.


CLS 340/815.48
TXT Pushbutton:

    Subject matter under subclass 815.47 in which a manual actuator must be
    depressed to operate the circuit breakers.


CLS 340/815.49
TXT Housing:

    Subject matter under subclass 815.47 wherein the indicating means is
    enclosed in a protective covering.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    815.73, for lamp enclosed in transparent housing.


CLS 340/815.5
TXT Including optical means:

    Subject matter under subclass 815.49 comprising a lens covering part of the
    signal indicating device for affecting the light emitted therefrom.


CLS 340/815.51
TXT Including spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 815.49 comprising a resilient member.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, a resilient member for
    controlling the energization of the indicating means, or for holding,
    supporting, or retaining the indicating means in its position.


CLS 340/815.52
TXT With details of energizing circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 815.47 comprising at least  an electrical
    component for controlling the energization of the indicating device.

    (1)     Note.  The component includes, for example, a resistor, transistor,
    contact, or circuit breaker.


CLS 340/815.53
TXT Lighted alphanumeric or character indicator matrix:

    Subject matter under subclass 815.4 comprising means for illuminating or
    emitting light to form  alphanumeric or character indicative elements
    arranged in rows and/or columns.

    (1)     Note.  Means for illuminating includes, for example, an ambient
    and/or an artificial light source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 447+ for alphanumeric
    devices and subclasses 541+ for illuminated sign.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 510 for luminescent
    solid or liquid material with character display (e.g., digits or letter).

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 25+ for cathode-ray tube with
    alphanumeric display and subclasses 141+ for character display in a generic
    selective display system.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 23+ for illuminated scale or dial.


CLS 340/815.54
TXT Having optical means in viewing path:

    Subject matter under subclass 815.53 having a light modifying means between
    the light source and the matrix for affecting the presentation of the
    indicative elements.

    (1)     Note.  The optical means includes, for example, a lens, mask,
    grating, mirror, light guides, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclass 32 for optical means interposed
    in viewing path (e.g., filters, lens) in a generic selective display system.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    602+ for glare or unwanted light reduction with mirror, subclasses 515+ for
    signal reflector, and subclasses 642+ for lens, per se.


CLS 340/815.55
TXT Transparent or translucent indicator with means for blocking light:

    Subject matter under subclass 815.4 wherein the perceptible indication is
    formed by a light source, a transparent or a translucent panel, and a
    screen or mask to permit selected parts of the light to pass therethrough.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 541+ for illuminated
    sign.

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    608 for translucent or semi-transmitting panel positioned in front of an
    adjustable anti-glare mirror.


CLS 340/815.56
TXT Color:

    Subject matter under subclass 815.55 including means to display the
    perceptible indication in selected color.


CLS 340/815.57
TXT Having optical device:

    Subject matter under subclass 815.55 comprising a lens or  a lens system
    for directing the rays of light from the light source to affect the
    formation of the perceptible indication.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclass 32 for optical means interposed
    in viewing path (e.g., filters, lens) in a generic selective display system.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    515+ for signal reflector and subclasses 642+ for lens.


CLS 340/815.58
TXT Step by step positioner:

    Subject matter under subclass 815.4 comprising pawl means  engaging a
    toothed member for intermittently moving it by a distance of one or a
    series of teeth at a time to present the visually perceptible indication.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclass 144 for pawl and notch.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 108+ for plural mechanically
    movable display elements with selective electrical control in selective
    display systems.


CLS 340/815.59
TXT Having resetting device:

    Subject matter under subclass 815.58 comprising means for restoring the
    positioner or the visually perceptible indication to normal position.


CLS 340/815.6
TXT Remote controller:

    Subject matter under subclass 815.58 wherein the operation of a distant
    step by step positioner is controlled over a wire or wireless communication
    channel by circuitry at a transmitting station.


CLS 340/815.61
TXT Drum indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 815.58 wherein the intermittently moved
    toothed member causes a rotation of a cylindrical mechanical element
    bearing alphanumeric or character indicative elements on its periphery
    thereby presenting the visually perceptible indication.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    815.64, for indicator wheel operated by electromagnetic rotator.


CLS 340/815.62
TXT Electromagnetic actuator for indicator matrix:

    Subject matter under subclass 815.4 comprising an  electromagnet capable of
    producing a force to change the positions of indicative elements arranged
    in an array thereby presenting the perceptible indication.


CLS 340/815.63
TXT Binary indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 815.4 in which the signal indicating device
    moves between first and second limit positions to indicate either one of
    two predetermined states in an operational system.

    (1)     Note.  The two predetermined states may be, for example, set and
    reset, on and off, normal or fault, etc.


CLS 340/815.64
TXT Electromagnetic rotator for indicator wheel:

    Subject matter under subclass 815.4 comprising an electromagnet capable of
    producing a force to rotate a wheel having indicative elements arranged on
    its face or around its periphery thereby presenting the perceptible
    indication.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    815.61, for drum indicator that rotates intermittently by a distance of one
    or a series of teeth at a time.


CLS 340/815.65
TXT Multiple colors:

    Subject matter under subclass 815.4 which produces the visually perceptible
    indication in at least two different colors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 150+ for selectable color
    attributes display systems having selective electrical control.


CLS 340/815.66
TXT By light signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 815.65 in which the indication is produced by
    light rays emitted from a light source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 581 for a colored light
    illuminated sign and subclass 444 for selective or intermittent
    illumination with colored light.


CLS 340/815.67
TXT Plural:

    Subject matter under subclass 815.66 having a plurality of light sources.


CLS 340/815.68
TXT With movable optical means:

    Subject matter under subclass 815.66 comprising means for selectively
    moving a light modifier located between the light source and the indication
    to produce different colors.

    (1)     Note.  The optical means comprises, for example, a color filter,
    lens, colored shutter, or screen.


CLS 340/815.69
TXT Diverse indications:

    Subject matter under subclass 815.4 for giving different types of
    indications.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 2+ for nonelectrical combined
    function and subclass 280 for nonelectrical diverse indicators.


CLS 340/815.7
TXT Having percussion type indication (e.g., electric bells, chimes):

    Subject matter under subclass 815.69 in which one of the indications is an
    audible sound produced by means having a striking mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    392.1,  for percussion type sound producer (e.g., signal chimes or bells).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, subclass 404 for rigid vibrating instrument with striker and
    subclass 407 for bells with electric action.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclass 376 for signal reception at
    substation with  visual indication of incoming call.


CLS 340/815.71
TXT Electromagnetic:

    Subject matter under subclass 815.7 comprising an electromagnet for
    operating the striking mechanism.


CLS 340/815.72
TXT Having pneumatic type indication:

    Subject matter under subclass 815.69 in which one of the indications is an
    audible sound produced by the flow of air or other gaseous substances.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404.1,  for pneumatic type sound producer (e.g., whistle or siren).


CLS 340/815.73
TXT With lamp enclosed in transparent housing:

    Subject matter under subclass 815.4 having an electric lamp or discharge
    device inside a light transmissive enclosure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    815.49, for housing of switch board or panel type indicator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclass 362 for lamp enclosed in housing.


CLS 340/815.74
TXT Combined:

    Subject matter under subclass 815.73 combined with diverse art subject
    matter.


CLS 340/815.75
TXT Light source modifier:

    Subject matter under subclass 815.73 having means to control the duration
    or intensity or direction of the light emanating from the lamp.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclass 147 for intensity control in
    generic selective electrical display systems.


CLS 340/815.76
TXT Lens type:

    Subject matter under subclass 815.75 in which the transmissive enclosure
    comprising an optical device for focussing, converging, or diverging the
    light emitted from the lamp or the discharge device to obtain a desired
    light emitting characteristic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22+,    for signal lens used as traffic lenses or vehicle indication.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    642+ for lenses, per se.


CLS 340/815.77
TXT Relatively movable light source:

    Subject matter under subclass 815.73 having means for moving the lamp
    within the enclosure.


CLS 340/815.78
TXT Pointer indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 815.4 comprising a movable needle positioned
    to indicate the visually perceptible indication.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    815.86, for rotary indicator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 284+ for nonelectrical rotary
    indicator having pointers.


CLS 340/815.79
TXT Annunciator:

    Subject matter under subclass 815.78 wherein the needle is raised or
    dropped from an inoperative position to an operative position to indicate
    the visually perceptible indication.


CLS 340/815.8
TXT Having electromagnetically releasable latch:

    Subject matter under subclass 815.79 in which the needle is released for
    movement by the operation of an electromagnetically releasable latch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    815.9,  for indicator having electromagnetically releasable latch.


CLS 340/815.81
TXT Grouped drop annunciators:

    Subject matter under subclass 815.4 having a multi unit indicator
    comprising a device operable to move a plurality of visually perceptible
    members (i.e., targets) individually or simultaneously from a nonsignalling
    position to a signalling position.


CLS 340/815.82
TXT Support:

    Subject matter under subclass 815.81 comprising a framework for mounting
    the drops or targets.


CLS 340/815.83
TXT Movable:

    Subject matter under subclass 815.4 wherein the indicating device (i.e.,
    target) signals by a change of position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 108+ for plural mechanically
    movable display elements with selective electrical control in selective
    display systems.


CLS 340/815.84
TXT Semaphore:

    Subject matter under subclass 815.83 wherein the signalling indicating
    device comprises one or more movable arms positioned to produce the
    visually perceptible indication.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for semaphore used in traffic and vehicle signalling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 319 for an arm that is a rotary
    indicator.


CLS 340/815.85
TXT Self restoring type annunciator:

    Subject matter under subclass 815.83 comprising a target raised into an
    operative position by an energized electromagnet and dropped back to an
    inoperative position by gravitational force.


CLS 340/815.86
TXT Rotary:

    Subject matter under subclass 815.83 wherein the visual indicator moves
    with a rotary motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    815.58, for step by step positioner.

    815.63, for indicator that rotates between two positions to indicate either
    one of two predetermined operational states.

    815.64, for indicator wheel operated by an electromagnetic rotator.

    815.78, for pointer indicator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 284 for nonelectrical rotary
    indicator with actuating means.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclass 126 for rotation of images on a
    generic selective display system.


CLS 340/815.87
TXT Rotor driven:

    Subject matter under subclass 815.86 in which the rotary  motion is
    generated by an electromagnetic rotor mounted on a shaft.


CLS 340/815.88
TXT Vane indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 815.86 comprising a hinged indicator swinging
    between positions to produce the visually perceptible indication.


CLS 340/815.89
TXT Circuit closing type:

    Subject matter under subclass 815.83 having means to close a switching or a
    contacting device of a normally open circuit when the signalling device
    moves.


CLS 340/815.9
TXT By electromagnetically releasable latch:

    Subject matter under subclass 815.83 wherein the target is released for
    movement by the operation of an electromagnetically releasable latch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    815.8,  for pointer annunciator having an electromagnetically releasable
    latch.


CLS 340/815.91
TXT Having restoring means:

    Subject matter under subclass 815.9 comprising means for resetting the
    released target to a normal position.


CLS 340/815.92
TXT Gravity operated drop annunciator:

    Subject matter under subclass 815.9 in which the target is moved into an
    annunciation or a set position by gravitational force.


CLS 340/825
TXT SELECTIVE:

    Subject matter under the class definition for controlling one or more
    devices to obtain a plurality of results by transmission of a designated
    one of plural distinctive control signals over a smaller number of
    communication lines or channels than the total number of possible distinct
    results.

    (1)     Note.  As used hereinafter, the term transmitter refers to the
    source of signals, and the term receiver refers to circuitry responsive to
    such signals.

    (2)     Note.  This subject matter differs from simple switching in
    providing more than one result per channel in accordance with the signal
    content, as, for example, addressing one of a plurality of devices over a
    single channel.

    (3)     Note.  Systems containing receivers, receivers and receiver
    subsystems, are classified in this and indented subclasses.  Transmitter,
    per se, are classified in this class, subclass 345.

    (4)     Note.  Transmission of signals providing for messages of arbitrary
    content is not classified herein.

    (5)     Note.  Combinations with a specific art end element are usually
    classified therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286.01+, for manually actuated alarm systems.

    438+,   for alarms or indicators associated with the selective control
    devices of a vehicle, especially subclass 456 for transmission gear
    selectors, subclasses 457+ for "reminder" indicators of various selectable
    functions, and subclasses 475+ for turn signals.

    500+,   for condition responsive indication.

    517+,   for selective indication of one of a plurality of sensed conditions.

    853.3+, for selective control in a wellbore communications system.

    870.01+,for telemetry which may be combined with or have selectivity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous
    manufacturing processes.

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 700 through 710 and 719 for control of
    power plants.

    82,     Turning, subclass 48 for triggered severing or cutoff control.

    114,    Ships, subclasses 365+ for life craft handling.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 695 and 696 for selective control of
    coating apparatus.

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclass 14 for selectively preset cycle flow
    terminators.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 33+ for telegraph selectors.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 6.2+, 167+, and 204 for selective
    control of motor vehicles.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 1+ for
    multiple circuit control.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 639 for electrical control of dispensing.

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), appropriate subclasses.

    235,    Registers, subclasses 375+ for selective control by means of
    data-bearing records.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 3.1+ for missile trajector control; and
    subclasses 175+ for electric aircraft control.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, appropriate subclasses for selective
    systems in railway signalling.

    273,    Amusement Devices, subclasses 237+ for electrical board games.

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants, subclasses 7+ for electric control of
    prime-mover dynamo plants.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 29,
    37, and 38+ for control of individual loads in an electric power
    distribution system; subclass 115 for a power-switching system having
    selective actuation; and subclasses 401+ for magnetic reactor systems.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 34+ for diverse
    plural controlled electric motors.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    control of electrical generating systems.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 518+ for miscellaneous control circuits and subclasses
    365+ for miscellaneous gating circuits.

    334,    Tuners, subclasses 8+ for remotely controlled tuners.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 107+ and 138+ for a selectively controlled
    switch.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclasses 10 and 44 for a selectively controlled switch.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 1+ for plural display
    communication systems.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    142+ for optical remote control.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ and
    211 for selective control relays; and subclass 160 for relay control
    systems.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclasses
    for static memory devices which may be selectively operated, or which may
    be in the form of a matrix.

    367,    Communication, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    appropriate subclasses for selective systems having an acoustic
    communications link.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 24+ for
    selective remote control; especially subclasses 30+ for selective
    addressing of storage medium or portion thereof (e.g., programmed access,
    "jukebox").

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for multiplex
    communications in general.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, appropriate subclasses for pulse
    communications in general.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 200.3+ for
    data transferring among multiple computer systems; subclass 280 for system
    intraconnecting for access regulating and arbitration within a digital data
    processing system; subclasses 287+ for bus access regulating; subclasses
    726 through 732 for generalized locking, polling, access arbitrating,
    subclasses 733 through 742 for interrupt processing; and subclasses 821
    through 894 for transferring data from one or more peripherals to one or
    more computers for the latter to process, store, or further transfer or for
    transferring data from the computers to the peripherals (i.e., input/output
    processing).

    377,    Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:  Circuits and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for electrically operated registers which
    may have selective operation.

    455,    Telecommunications, appropriate subclasses for analog
    communications in general.

    477,    Interrelated Power Delivery Controls, Including Engine Control, for
    interrelated control between a motor and a transmission, clutch, or brake.

    704,    Data Processing:  Speech Signal Processing, Linguistics, Language
    Translation, and Audio Compression/Decompression, subclasses 200+ for
    special signal processing.

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclasses 200+ for generalized address forming.


CLS 340/825.01
TXT Spare channel:

    Subject matter under subclass 825 having one or more communication channels
    additional to those in normal use, which additional channels are used
    solely in the event of a fault in, or failure of, a normally used
    communication channel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclass
    8.2 for replacement with a spare in response to a fault; and subclass 68.2
    for plural parallel communication channels.


CLS 340/825.02
TXT Tree or cascade:

    Subject matter under subclass 825 having alternatively operable circuitry
    branches which are selectively operable, each of said branches further
    exercising selective control upon succeeding circuitry, and there being no
    connection between the separate branch circuits.


CLS 340/825.03
TXT Channel selection:

    Subject matter under subclass 825 having a plurality of alternative
    communication lines and selection of less than the total number of lines
    for signal transmission.

    (1)     Note.  Alternative communication lines include input or output
    channels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 280+ for
    system intraconnecting, and subclasses 311 through 312 for path selection
    and switching (e.g., crossbar switching) in a digital data processing
    system.


CLS 340/825.04
TXT Code or pulse responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.03 wherein the channel selection is
    performed in response to a specified pulse or pulse pattern.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    825.57+, for pulse-responsive selective systems, in general.


CLS 340/825.05
TXT Loop:

    Subject matter under subclass 825 having a plurality of controlled devices
    connected by a communication line in a closed series configuration.


CLS 340/825.06
TXT Monitoring and control (e.g., supervisory):

    Subject matter under subclass 825 wherein a signal representative of the
    actual status of the controlled device, with respect to an intended
    controlled function, is transmitted back to the selective signal source.

    (1)     Note.  The representative signal is generally used for an
    indication or control function at the selective signal source.


CLS 340/825.07
TXT With addressing:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.06 with a plurality of controlled
    devices, each of which is responsive to a unique signal so as to permit
    individual control.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    825.52+, for addressing absent a representative signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclasses 200+ for generalized address forming in a digital data
    processing system.


CLS 340/825.08
TXT Polling or roll call:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.07 wherein all of the controlled devices
    are caused to transmit a representative signal in response to a particular
    signal.

    (1)     Note.  The transmission of the representative signals may be done
    in succession.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 293 through
    298 for centralized bus prioritizing, subclasses 299 through 305 for
    decentralized bus prioritizing, and subclass 727 for generalized access
    polling in a digital data processing system.


CLS 340/825.09
TXT Quiescent:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.06 wherein the representative signal is
    transmitted solely in response to a change in condition.


CLS 340/825.1
TXT Scanning:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.06 having plural controlled devices with
    successive transmission of representative signals from each of the
    controlled devices.


CLS 340/825.11
TXT Continuous:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.10 wherein the scanning is automatically
    restarted at its conclusion.


CLS 340/825.12
TXT Interrupted:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.10 having structure to interrupt the
    normal scanning sequence.

    (1)     Note.  Such interruption may be for the purpose of obtaining an
    indication of a particular controlled device.


CLS 340/825.13
TXT Automatic:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.12 wherein the interruption is in
    response to a predetermined representative signal.


CLS 340/825.14
TXT Synchronization:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.06 including a reference timing function
    for operating plural system components.

    (1)     Note.  The reference timing function often includes a clock-pulse
    generator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    825.2+, for such subject matter absent monitoring and control.


CLS 340/825.15
TXT With storage or recording:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.06 combined with the production of a
    permanent or semipermanent record of a control or representative signal.

    (1)     Note.  The term "record" is not limited to a tangible object, but
    includes a stored pattern in a static storage device (e.g., magnetic core
    matrix).


CLS 340/825.16
TXT Fault condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.06 which produces a representative signal
    in response to a malfunction of the selective device.

    (1)     Note.  The term "malfunction" is intended to include disagreement
    between intended and actual controlled function.


CLS 340/825.17
TXT With indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.06 having an element which produces a
    humanly perceptible signal.


CLS 340/825.18
TXT Relay:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.06 having an electromagnetic relay.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 160+ for a
    relay control system.


CLS 340/825.19
TXT Communication or control for the handicapped:

    Subject matter under subclass 825 which performs a function normally
    performed directly by an individual and particularly adapted for control by
    physically impaired individual.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    704,    Data Processing:  Speech Signal Processing, Linguistics, Language
    Translation, and Audio Compression/Decompression, subclasses 258+ for a
    speech synthesizer using sequential sounds.


CLS 340/825.2
TXT Synchronizing:

    Subject matter under subclass 825 including a reference timing function
    with respect to which different control functions are performed.


CLS 340/825.21
TXT With addressing:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.2 having plural controlled devices, each
    one of which is actuated by a signal having a unique characteristic
    corresponding to the respective one of the controlled devices.

    (1)     Note.  The term "unique characteristics" refers to a parameter, the
    content, or the relative time of occurrence of the signal.


CLS 340/825.22
TXT Program control:

    Subject matter under subclass 825 producing each of a plurality of
    different results in a time sequential manner.

    (1)     Note.  The term "time sequential manner" is intended to denote
    control of the order in which the different results are performed.


CLS 340/825.23
TXT Machine tool:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.22 for control of a work-contacting
    element which causes a physical alteration in the work (e.g., chipping,
    boring).

    (1)     Note.  Systems having significantly claimed motor structure are
    classified in Class 118.

    (2)     Note.  For search notes to machine tools, see subclass 825.


CLS 340/825.24
TXT Of audio systems:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.22 in which the results are intended to
    control various aspects of an audible signal producing system.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are selection of distinct audio messages.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    825.25, for nonprogram audio system control.


CLS 340/825.25
TXT Audio system (e.g., by pulse signal):

    Subject matter under subclass 825 wherein the controlled device is a
    nominally recited, audible signal reproducing system.

    (1)     Note.  A selectively controlled audio system with details thereof
    is classified with such an audio system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    825.24, for such subject matter with program control thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses
    77.01+ for selection of a track on a magnetic record carrier.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 33 for
    phonographs having selective control circuitry.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 31.1+, 88, 92, 151.1, or 352+, as
    appropriate, for remote control of a modulated wave communication system or
    subsystem.


CLS 340/825.26
TXT Stock quotation:

    Subject matter under subclass 825 wherein the controlled device is
    particularly designed for display of stock prices and is geographically
    separated from the information source of such prices.

    (1)     Note.  The device may include control circuitry for inquiring about
    a designated stock.


CLS 340/825.27
TXT With information storage:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.26 having an arrangement to store the
    stock price information.

    (1)     Note.  Detailed structure of the storage arrangement is classified
    in an appropriate information storage class.


CLS 340/825.28
TXT Space allocation (e.g., vehicle seat, hotel reservation):

    Subject matter under subclass 825 including a display for indicating the
    availability of spaces which may be reserved, and a control for modifying
    such availability by making or cancelling reservations for the spaces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    705,    Data Processing: Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/Price Determination, subclass 5  for subject matter combined with a
    data processing feature.


CLS 340/825.29
TXT Remote terminal:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.28 having an information storage device
    in which the space availability is stored at a geographically spaced
    location from the display and control.


CLS 340/825.3
TXT Intelligence comparison:

    Subject matter under subclass 825 which compares an information bearing
    item or signal with an information reference, and performing a control
    function in accordance with the comparison.

    (1)     Note.  Control by a data bearing record (e.g., credit card) is
    classified in Class 235, subclasses 375+ rather than in this or its
    intended subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 375+ for systems controlled by data bearing
    records; subclasses 435+ for coded record sensors; and subclasses 487+ for
    data bearing records, per se.


CLS 340/825.31
TXT Authorization control (e.g., entry into an area):

    Subject matter under subclass 825.30 wherein the comparison determines the
    operation of a controlled device to permit an individual to perform some
    action.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclass 382 for similar subject matter where entry is
    controlled by a data bearing record.


CLS 340/825.32
TXT With alarm or indication of improper access:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.31 which additionally produces a humanly
    perceptible signal indicative of an access attempt by other than the
    correct signal.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are alarms for unsuccessful comparison and
    tamper indication.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    541+,   for an intrusion responsive indicator or alarm.


CLS 340/825.33
TXT Credit:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.31 wherein a comparison is made with the
    balance in an individual's account so as to permit or deny immediate
    receipt of a desired value of goods or money for future payment.

    (1)     Note.  Credit card operated registers having significant card
    reading structure are classified in Class 235, subclasses 380+.


CLS 340/825.34
TXT Authentication (e.g., identity):

    Subject matter under subclass 825.30 which compares characteristics or data
    to determine if an object or document is valid, or the identify of an
    individual.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    825.31+, for similar subject matter in authorization systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclass 380 for identification card systems where the
    card is a data bearing record.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 71 for optical document
    verification.


CLS 340/825.35
TXT Commodity (e.g., vending):

    Subject matter under subclass 825.3 providing for the receipt, dispensing,
    or counting of an item.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclass 381 for vending controlled by a data bearing
    record.


CLS 340/825.36
TXT Having indication or alarm (e.g., location indication):

    Subject matter under subclass 825 controlling an element which provides a
    humanly perceptible indication of the selective system operation or of an
    operator initiated condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500+,   for similar subject matter responsive to an external condition.

    825.32, for similar subject matter indicating improper access.


CLS 340/825.37
TXT Additional to other selective control:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.36 wherein another control function is
    performed in addition to the alarm or indication.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    825.32, when the other control function is an access control function
    operated alternatively to the indication.


CLS 340/825.38
TXT Party line:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.36 intended for a telephone or telegraph
    system, where an indicator at a particular telephone or telegraph
    instrument is selectively actuated.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter including handling of an information signal
    is classified in Class 178, as appropriate.


CLS 340/825.39
TXT Selection by means of frequency:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.38 where the indicator is actuated by
    means of a cyclic current of a frequency peculiar to the selected indicator.


CLS 340/825.4
TXT Selector or indicator, per se:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.38 limited, in extent, to the station
    selector or indicating mechanism for a party line system.


CLS 340/825.41
TXT Step by step impulse:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.38 where the selected indicator is
    actuated in accordance with the number of transmitted impulse.


CLS 340/825.42
TXT Polarity controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.41 where selection is based on whether
    the pulses are of positive or negative amplitude with respect to ground.


CLS 340/825.43
TXT Amplitude or polarity controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.38 where the indicator is selected by
    means of the amplitude or polarity of a current.


CLS 340/825.44
TXT Code responsive (e.g., paging):

    Subject matter under subclass 825.36 wherein the indication is controlled
    or actuated in accordance with a predetermined control signal.

    (1)     Note.  The indication may be a call notification signal; i.e.,
    paging, which, combined with a message communication system or subsystem,
    will be classified with such a system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, appropriate subclasses for a
    paging device combined with a digital communication system.

    455,    Telecommunications, particularly subclasses 31.1+ and 228 for a
    radio system or receiver combined with a paging device.


CLS 340/825.45
TXT Distress signal alarm:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.44 responsive to the receipt of signals
    having standardized characteristics from any transmitter.

    (1)     Note.  The signals are often indications of nautical vessels in
    distress, such as the "SOS" or standard international distress signal.


CLS 340/825.46
TXT Vibratory (tactual) alarm:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.44 wherein the indicating element
    produces a shaking vibration which is felt rather than heard.

    (1)     Note.  The vibration is generally in the subaudible range.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    407,    for tactual signals, per se.


CLS 340/825.47
TXT Group call:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.44 including plural indicating devices
    each actuated by a signal unique thereto, and each also responsive to a
    signal actuating a plurality of such indicating devices.

    (1)     Note.  The group call signal may actuate all indicating devices or
    a subgroup thereof, in the system.


CLS 340/825.48
TXT Tone code:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.44 wherein the control signal is a
    predetermined pattern of successive audio frequency modulated signals.

    (1)     Note.  The successive signals may include one or more frequencies,
    but a single modulated signal is not classified herein.


CLS 340/825.49
TXT Location indication:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.36 which produces a signal indicative of
    the location of a signal transmitting or receiving station.


CLS 340/825.5
TXT Lockout or priority (programmed or variable):

    Subject matter under subclass 825 having an arrangement to permit
    transmission from only one of plural transmitters from which a control
    signal may originate.

    (1)     Note.  The permitted transmission may be from the first actuated
    transmitter, or from a transmitter given priority in accordance with a
    program, a condition, or time.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 431+ which may include an
    assignment of communication channel by priority.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 293 through
    298 for centralized bus prioritizing, subclasses 299 through 305 for
    decentralized bus prioritizing, subclass 726 for generalized access
    locking, and subclass 727 for generalized access polling in a digital data
    processing system.


CLS 340/825.51
TXT Designated priority:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.5 wherein the transmitter permitted to
    transmit is determined by a preset priority.


CLS 340/825.52
TXT Addressing:

    Subject matter under subclass 825 having plural controlled devices at
    distinct locations, each one of the devices being controlled by one or more
    unique signals whereby the individual devices may be controlled over a
    common communication channel.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes control of groups of devices by a
    group control signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    825.07+, for addressing in a monitoring and control (e.g., supervisory)
    system.

    825.21, for synchronizing with addressing.

    825.44+, for addressing of a paging device

    SEARCH CLASS:

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems:  Memory,
    subclasses 1+ for addressing combined with specific memory configurations
    (e.g., extended, expanded, dynamic, etc.), subclasses 100+ for generalized
    storage accessing and control in a digital data processing system, and
    subclasses 200+ for generalized address forming.


CLS 340/825.53
TXT Plural part (e.g., digit) or repetitions:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.52 wherein the unique actuating signal
    either (a) has plural successively transmitted components, or (b) is
    repetitively transmitted for comparison of the repeated transmissions.


CLS 340/825.54
TXT Interrogation response:

    Subject matter under subclass 825 having an information-containing device,
    an information source control device for interrogating the
    information-containing device, and a device for presenting the perceptible
    form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    825.26+, for such subject matter for interrogation and display of stock
    prices.

    825.28+, for such subject matter for interrogation and display of space
    allocation information.


CLS 340/825.55
TXT Printout (e.g., logging) or display:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.54 wherein the information presenting
    device includes a printing device forming a permanent or semipermanent
    record of the information.


CLS 340/825.56
TXT With multidigit encoder:

    Subject matter under subclass 825 including an encoder to produce a control
    signal which includes plural signals, each corresponding to a digit.

    (1)     Note.  Examples are encoders producing plural dial pulses or tone
    code signals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    825.53, for similar subject matter for addressing one of plural-controlled
    devices.

    825.62+, for control by a digital signal, in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 20+ for a keyboard
    controlled code transmitter.


CLS 340/825.57
TXT Pulse responsive actuation:

    Subject matter under subclass 825 wherein the control signal is an abrupt
    variation in a voltage or current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    825.56, for such subject matter including a plurality of pulse sequences.


CLS 340/825.58
TXT Phase or frequency shift keying:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.57 wherein the control signal variation
    is a shift in the instantaneous frequency thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    825.71+, for control by a signal frequency variation, in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 272+ for frequency
    shift keying in communication systems for messages of arbitrary content.


CLS 340/825.59
TXT Polarity:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.57 wherein the variation is either one of
    plural potentials separated by a reference potential, or a change in
    direction of current flow.


CLS 340/825.6
TXT Pulse pairs:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.57 wherein the signal is transmitted by
    pairs of pulses, a composite or differential parameter of which performs
    the control function.

    (1)     Note.  The term "composite or differential parameter" denotes a
    parameter involving both pulses; e.g., time or amplitude difference.


CLS 340/825.61
TXT Having delay line:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.57 including an element which retards the
    progress of a pulse.


CLS 340/825.62
TXT Serial:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.57 wherein the control signal includes a
    group of consecutive or successive distinct pulses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    825.53, for similar subject matter for addressing one of plural-controlled
    devices.

    825.56, for similar subject matter combined with a multidigit encoder.


CLS 340/825.63
TXT Pulse width:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.62 wherein the control is performed in
    accordance with the duration of the pulse.


CLS 340/825.64
TXT Pulse spacing (e.g., pulse repetition rate):

    Subject matter under subclass 825.62 wherein the control is performed in
    accordance with the interval between pulses.


CLS 340/825.65
TXT Counting:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.62 wherein the control is performed in
    accordance with the number of pulses in the group.


CLS 340/825.66
TXT Relay:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.65 where a series of relays are used to
    count the number of pulses in a group.


CLS 340/825.67
TXT Counting chain:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.65 having plural successively connected
    counting stages.


CLS 340/825.68
TXT Shift register:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.62 having a storage register with a
    series of stages in which the stored information may be shifted by pulses.


CLS 340/825.69
TXT Radio link:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.62 in which the communication line
    includes transmission and reception of an electromagnetic wave.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclass 176 for a remote
    control radio transmitter.


CLS 340/825.7
TXT Phase responsive actuation:

    Subject matter under subclass 825 wherein the control signal includes a
    phase variation in an alternating current.


CLS 340/825.71
TXT Frequency responsive actuation:

    Subject matter under subclass 825 wherein the control signal is a frequency
    variation in an alternating current.


CLS 340/825.72
TXT Wireless link:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.71 wherein the communication line
    includes transmission and receipt of a radio wave or near field.

    (1)     Note.  The term "near field" refers to capacitive or inductive
    coupling, rather than an electromagnetic wave. For a detailed definition,
    see Class 455, subclass 41.


CLS 340/825.73
TXT Plural frequencies:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.71 transmitting plural control signals,
    each having a different frequency.


CLS 340/825.74
TXT Simultaneous:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.73 wherein several of the control signals
    are transmitted at the same time.


CLS 340/825.75
TXT Permutation:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.73 wherein control is performed in
    accordance with the sequence of control signal frequencies transmitted.


CLS 340/825.76
TXT Corresponding to distinct functions:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.73 wherein each of the different control
    signal frequencies causes a different operation of the controlled device.


CLS 340/825.77
TXT Amplitude responsive actuation:

    Subject matter under subclass 825 wherein the control signal includes an
    amplitude variation in an electric current.


CLS 340/825.78
TXT Divided resistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.77 including a connection between plural
    resistance elements connected across a potential source.

    (1)     Note.  The plural resistance elements may be portions of a variable
    resistor.


CLS 340/825.79
TXT Matrix:

    Subject matter under subclass 825 drawn to a two or more dimensional array
    of electrical elements in a receiver for distinguishing different control
    signals, and not elsewhere classifiable.

    (1)     Note.  Switching systems including nonlinear saturable reactor
    (e.g., magnetic core) switching are classified in Class 307, subclasses
    401+.

    (2)     Note.  Information storage systems including nonlinear saturable
    reactors (e.g., magnetic cores) are classified in Class 365, subclasses
    129+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclass 55 for a selectively actuated
    display matrix.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 21+ for
    neural networks; subclasses 280+ for system intraconnecting in a digital
    data processing system; subclasses 311 through 312 for path selecting and
    switching (e.g., crossbar switching) in a digital data processing system.

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclasses 200+ for generalized address forming.


CLS 340/825.8
TXT Plural stage:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.79 wherein each element of the matrix is
    itself a matrix.


CLS 340/825.81
TXT Electroluminescent elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.79 wherein each element of the matrix
    includes an element which emits light when excited by electrical energy.


CLS 340/825.82
TXT Light-emitting diode:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.81 wherein a light-emitting element is a
    semiconductor device having a barrier layer and two terminals.


CLS 340/825.83
TXT Programmable:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.79 wherein the array or an element
    thereof has a settable signal response in accordance with a programmed or
    other setting by an operator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclass for
    electromagnetic storage systems, and subclasses 185.01+ for floating gate
    memory storage (e.g., flash memory).


CLS 340/825.84
TXT Having fusible element:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.83 wherein a matrix element of link
    thereto has current fusible conductor which modifies the characteristics of
    the array when fused.


CLS 340/825.85
TXT Semiconductor crosspoint:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.79 wherein a matrix element has an
    electrical conductivity intermediate, that of conductors and that of
    insulators.


CLS 340/825.86
TXT Integrated circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.85 wherein a matrix element includes
    plural circuit elements inseparably mounted upon a continuous substrate.


CLS 340/825.87
TXT Logic:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.85 wherein the matrix processes the
    control signal to form a nonarithmetic digital output.


CLS 340/825.88
TXT Bistable:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.85 wherein the semiconductor element has,
    or is part of a circuit having, two stable operating states, one of which
    is set by a control signal.


CLS 340/825.89
TXT Switching element:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.85 wherein the semiconductor changes
    between two distinct conductive states in accordance with the value of an
    applied signal.

    (1)     Note.  The signal-causing switching may be applied across a
    normally conductive path, or may be applied at an auxiliary electrode.

    (2)     Note.  The two states are often conducting and nonconducting.


CLS 340/825.9
TXT Transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.85 wherein the semiconductor element has
    three or more electrodes and a potential barrier in or on the semiconductor
    material.


CLS 340/825.91
TXT Field effect transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.9 wherein the resistance between two
    terminals of the transistor is controlled by the field produced by the
    voltage applied to a third terminal.


CLS 340/825.92
TXT Four or more elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.9 wherein the transistor has more than
    three electrodes contacting the semiconductor material.


CLS 340/825.93
TXT Plural:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.9 wherein a semiconductor matrix element
    includes a circuit having two or more transistors.

    (1)     Note.  At least a one-matrix element must include plural
    transistors; a plurality of single transistor matrix elements is not
    classified herein.


CLS 340/825.94
TXT Diodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.85 wherein the semiconductor element has
    a potential barrier and two electrodes.

    (1)     Note.  The term "potential barrier" is intended to include
    electrode point contacts as well as p-n junctions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    825.79, for similar subject matter having a discharge tube device.


CLS 340/825.95
TXT Charge storage:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.94 wherein a diode is, or is connected
    to, an element which stores electrostatic energy.


CLS 340/825.96
TXT Plural diodes at crosspoint:

    Subject matter under subclass 825.94 wherein a semiconductor matrix element
    includes more than one diode.

    (1)     Note.  The plural diodes are often connected together so as to form
    an element having a characteristic which is a composite of the several
    diodes.


CLS 340/825.97
TXT Having electron beam device:

    Subject matter under subclass 825 including an element within which a
    narrow stream of electrons is moved in the same direction by an electric or
    magnetic field.

    (1)     Note.  The electron beam is generally used as an electric current
    connection.


CLS 340/825.98
TXT System having rectifier:

    Subject matter under subclass 825 including an asymmetrically conducting
    element.


CLS 340/826
TXT Plural stage matrix system (e.g., path finding):

    Subject matter under subclass 825.03 having plural serial switch arrays.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are switching arrangements for establishing
    a path between a specified input and output line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    825.8,  for a plural matrix stage selective device, other than for channel
    selection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 272+ for similar subject
    matter in common control telephone switching system.


CLS 340/827
TXT Alternate routing:

    Subject matter under subclass 826 wherein the path through the plural stage
    matrix system may be modified upon failure of connection between the
    desired input and output line.


CLS 340/850
TXT UNDERWATER:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which a significant portion of
    the communication takes place under water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230,    for electric signalling systems in which the signal is transmitted
    along a fluid conduit but not through the fluid therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 27 for this subject matter when
    nonelectrical.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclass 131 for underwater electrical communication employing acoustic
    wave.


CLS 340/851
TXT Ship guidance system:

    Subject matter under subclass 850 for providing navigational signals to a
    vehicle.


CLS 340/852
TXT Electrodes and electrode systems:

    Subject matter under subclass 850 wherein the signal is communicated in the
    form of electric current passing to or from conductors immersed in water.


CLS 340/853.1
TXT WELLBORE TELEMETERING OR CONTROL (E.G., SUBSURFACE TOOL GUIDANCE, DATA
    TRANSFER, ETC.):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein an information or control
    signal is transmitted to or from equipment located in an opening into the
    earth, for a well or wellbore, over an information transmission link.

    (1)     Note.  One of either the downhole equipment or transmission link
    must be described as to electrically conduct or process an information or
    control signal so as to meet the class definition.

    (2)     Note.  The telemetering  may be of either a pre-existing or a
    concurrently produced wellbore.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    870.01+,        for telemetering equipment other
       than in a subsurface device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 152.01+ for borehole or drilling
    testing, per se, not involving a purely electrical test or a purely
    magnetic test.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 250.01+ for well processes including signalling
    equipment; and subclass 66 for well apparatus including electrical
    signalling.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 81+ for electrical wellbore telemetering systems in which the
    signal is transmitted in  the form of an acoustic wave.


CLS 340/853.2
TXT Diagnostic monitoring or detecting operation of communications equipment or
    signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 853.1 including a determination of the
    operation or other condition of the communication equipment or signal.

    (1)     Note.  The term "communication equipment" is intended to exclude
    determination of ambient or diverse equipment condition monitoring, which
    are classified in the subclasses below, or in the appropriate diverse
    subject matter class.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    870.04, for calibration of a telemetry system not used in a wellbore.

    SEARCH  CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 168 for a measurement or test of a
    pump or hydraulic equipment and subclasses 152.61+ for the testing of a
    pump in a borehole wherein the test is neither purely electrical nor purely
    magnetic.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclasses
    20.1+ for diagnostic testing of a transmission facility of general utility.


CLS 340/853.3
TXT Selective control of subsurface equipment:

    Subject matter under subclass 853.1 having a communication link for
    controlling one or more devices in the underground equipment to obtain a
    plurality of results by transmission of a designated one of plural
    distinctive control signals over a smaller number of communication lines or
    channels than the total number of possible distinct results and which
    controls the underground equipment in accordance with the signal content.

    (1)     Note.  For further elaboration of selective communications, see the
    definition and notes of subclass 825 in this class.

    (2)     Note.  Recitation of a detail of diverse art underground equipment
    is classified with such equipment.

    (3)     Note.  Included in this and its indented subclasses are systems not
    limited to wellbore telemetering.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    825+,   for selective control of remote equipment, other than a subsurface
    device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 24+ automatic control
    of drilling by other than an electrical communications system. Automatic
    control of drilling by other than an electrical communications system.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for electrical
    connector structure, of general utility.


CLS 340/853.4
TXT In horizontal or inclined drilling or passage:

    Subject matter under subclass 853.3 wherein the opening in the earth is in
    other than a substantially vertical direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    856.1,  for this subject matter absent selective control of subsurface
    equipment.


CLS 340/853.5
TXT Control of drilling apparatus using magnetic field:

    Subject matter under subclass 853.4 having a drilling device and a magnetic
    field detector for control of the drilling device.

    (1)     Note.  The sensed magnetic field may be either the earth's magnetic
    field or an applied magnetic field.


CLS 340/853.6
TXT Control of drill bit or apparatus (e.g., steering, speed, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 853.3 including a drilling equipment
    controlled by an electrical communications system.


CLS 340/853.7
TXT Repeater in subsurface link (e.g., cable, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 853.1 having a device which receives and
    retransmits the signals at an intermediate position between the subsurface
    equipment and cooperating surface communications equipment, and which is
    separated from both the surface and subsurface equipment by a significant
    portion of the subsurface transmission link.

    (1)     Note.  The term "significant portion" excludes devices with a
    repeater or amplifier on the surface or attached to the sonde housing.

    (2)     Note.  The retransmission is usually to strengthen or modify the
    signal being transmitted.

    (3)     Note.  Although systems including relays are in this subclass, the
    term relay is also used to designate a passive inductive or transformer
    device which is classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    425.1+, for a repeater in an unspecified-type communications system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 274, 279, 293, 315+, 492, and
    501+ for a multiplex repeater of a specific type.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 211+ for a pulse or
    repeater in a digital communications device not limited to wellbore
    telemetering.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 7+ for a modulated carrier signal
    repeater.


CLS 340/853.8
TXT With orientation sensing of subsurface telemetering equipment (other than
    drilling equipment):

    Subject matter under subclass 853.1 combined with a determination of the
    angular direction of the subsurface communications equipment with respect
    to a vertical axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

     853.4  and 856.1, for subsurface communications in a horizontal or
    inclined opening in the earth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 302 and 304+ for wellbore
    configuration determination.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 40 for determination of
    inclination of a drilling tool position or direction.


CLS 340/853.9
TXT Including detail of subsurface signal storage (e.g., memory, recorder,
    register, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 853.1 including a particularly described
    feature or arrangement of electrical storage of signal values for
    subsequent retrieval.

    (1)     Note.  Named or nominal inclusion of signal storage equipment is
    not considered particularly described as required for classification in
    this subclass; however,a particular arrangement of plural named storage
    devices is classified in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  An arrangement for storing and subsequently combining
    sequential signals to form a composite signal for transmission is
    classified in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, appropriate
    subclasses for dynamic magnetic information storage not limited to wellbore
    telemetering.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclasses
    for static information storage not limited to wellbore telemetering.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, appropriate subclasses
    for dynamic information storage not limited to wellbore telemetering.


CLS 340/854.1
TXT With position or depth recording (e.g., line payout, equipment locater,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 853.1 wherein the depth or location in the
    wellbore of specified equipment in the wellbore is recorded or utilized to
    control a system operation.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes location of a sonde or other wellbore
    related equipment.


CLS 340/854.2
TXT Location of collar or stuck tool:

    Subject matter under subclass 854.1 including equipment to ascertain the
    identity of a collar or the presence of a stuck tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 302 and 304+ for wellbore
    configuration determination.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 152.56 for a process or an
    apparatus for determining a free point or a stuck point of a casing in a
    borehole, per se, not involving a purely electronic test or a purely
    electrical test.

    235,    Registers, subclasses 375+ for  a system controlled by a data
    bearing coded record; and subclass 435, for a coded record sensor.


CLS 340/854.3
TXT Using a specific transmission medium (e.g., conductive fluid, annular
    spacing, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 853.1 including a particularly described
    feature of the structure or composition of a material or medium through
    which the information or control signals are transmitted.

    (1)     Note.  The material is usually an electrical conductor.

    (2)     Note.  Named or nominal inclusion of a conductor is not considered
    particularly described as required for classification  in this or its
    indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 37+ for an
    underground conductor.


CLS 340/854.4
TXT Drill string or tubing support signal conduction:

    Subject matter under subclass 854.3 wherein a  casing, or sleeve, of a
    series of drill connectors is used to conduct the signal to or from the
    underground equipment.


CLS 340/854.5
TXT Wellbore casing or ground:

    Subject matter under subclass 854.3 including conduction or passage of the
    signal through a well casing or the surrounding earth.


CLS 340/854.6
TXT Electromagnetic energy (e.g., radio frequency, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 853.1 wherein the signal is transmitted in
    the form of a presence or variation in an electromagnetic field.

    (1)     Note.  The term electromagnetic field is intended to include an
    electrical or magnetic field, as well as electromagnetic radiation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    870.01+, for a radio sonde telemetering system, of general utility.

    SEARCH  CLASS:

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 81+ for an electrical wellbore telemetering system in which the
    signal is transmitted in the form of an acoustic wave.


CLS 340/854.7
TXT Optical link (e.g. waveguide, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 854.6 wherein the signal is transmitted over
    a communications link which includes an element which transmits
    electromagnetic energy having a frequency in or near the visible range.

    (1)     Note.  The term near is to indicate that a system with an element
    which optically modifies IR or UV radiation is included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    870.28+,        for telemetering equipment having an optical link other
    than in a  subsurface device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    385,    Optical Waveguides, appropriate subclasses for  an  optical energy
    conducting element.


CLS 340/854.8
TXT Near field coupling (e.g., inductive, capacitive, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 854.6 wherein the electromagnetic energy has
    a variation other than the inverse square of distance.

    (1)     Note.  The term near field is intended to include nonradiative
    coupling such as by an inductive or capacitive field.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclass 55.1 for a near field telephone
    device.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclass 79
    for a for a near field audio system.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 41 for a modulated near field
    communication system.


CLS 340/854.9
TXT Cable or wire (e.g., conductor as support, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 854.3 wherein an electrical information or
    control signal is transmitted over an electrical conductor forming an
    elongate element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 37+ for an
    underground conductor, per se.


CLS 340/855.1
TXT Coupling connection structural feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 854.9 including a detail of structure forming
    an electrical connection to a cable or wire or a section thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclass 624 for a seismic-type cable.


CLS 340/855.2
TXT Single conductor cable or wire:

    Subject matter under subclass 854.9 wherein the signal conductor is
    composed of a single piece of solid material.


CLS 340/855.3
TXT Multiplexed signals:

    Subject matter under subclass 853.1 wherein signals from different sources
    or to different receivers are transmitted over a single channel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    870.12+,        for frequency division multiplex telemetering equipment
    other than in a subsurface device.

    870.13+,        for time division multiplex telemetering equipment other
    than in a subsurface device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for a multiplex
    communications device not limited to wellbore telemetering.


CLS 340/855.4
TXT Pulse or digital signal transmission:

    Subject matter under subclass 853.1 wherein the information is transmitted
    in the form of an abrupt variation in an electrical signal or a pattern
    thereof.


CLS 340/855.5
TXT Digital signal processing in subsurface transmitter:

    Subject matter under subclass 855.4 wherein the subsurface signal
    processing includes a particularly described feature of digital signal
    handling.

    (1)     Note.  Named or nominal inclusion of a digital device is not
    classified in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    870.19+,        for pulse signal telemetering equipment other than in a
    subsurface device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 173+ for a digital
    or pulse code generator of general utility.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 295+ for a pulse
    transmitter of general utility.


CLS 340/855.6
TXT Having acoustic sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 855.5 having a subsurface vibratory
    transducer connected to the digital signal processing apparatus or the
    electrical communications link.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    856.4,  for this subject matter absent subsurface digital circuitry.


CLS 340/855.7
TXT Modification of signal bandwidth, frequency, or circuit impedance at
    subsurface location:

    Subject matter under subclass 853.1 wherein the information to be
    transmitted is modulated on a signal and either the signal or circuit
    frequency characteristics are subsequently modified to optimize
    transmission between the surface and subsurface communications equipment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    853.7,  for a signal-modifying repeater in a wellbore cable or other
    subsurface link.


CLS 340/855.8
TXT Including specified power transmission feature or source (e.g., battery,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 853.1 having a particularly described feature
    of circuitry providing electric power to the subsurface communications
    equipment.

    (1)     Note.  A named or nominal inclusion of a power transmission device
    is not classified in this or its indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes circuitry for separating an
    information carrying signal and an electrical power signal.


CLS 340/855.9
TXT Specified alternating current (A.C.) circuit feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 855.8 wherein the feature providing for the
    energization of the subsurface station is described as having a feature
    varying as the frequency of an alternating current.


CLS 340/856.1
TXT In horizontal or inclined passage arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 853.1 wherein the opening in the earth is in
    other than a substantially vertical direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    853.4,  for this subject matter having selective control of subsurface
    equipment.


CLS 340/856.2
TXT With expandable or inflatable sensor element or mounting:

    Subject matter under subclass 853.1 having an electrical sensor mounted on
    or including an element movable by expansion of an inflatable or
    mechanically movable device.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are sensors which mechanically contact and
    electrically respond to the position of a wellbore interior.


CLS 340/856.3
TXT Including particular sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 853.1 having a particularly described feature
    of an underground condition-responsive sensor which provides information
    signals.

    (1)     Note.  A named or nominal inclusion of a sensor is not considered
    particularly described as required for classification in this or its
    indented subclasses.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 152.01+ for borehole or drilling
    testing, per se, not involving a purely electrical test or a purely
    magnetic test, and subclass 866.5 for a measuring probe, per se, not
    specifically provided for elsewhere.


CLS 340/856.4
TXT Acoustic or vibratory (e.g., sonic, fluidic, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 856.3 in which the sensor includes an element
    a portion of which either generates or is responsive to mechanical
    vibration.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    855.6,  for this subject matter combined with subsurface digital processing
    circuitry.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 101+ for acoustic geophysical or subsurface
    exploration not restricted to an electrical device.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and  Devices,
    subclasses 81+ for an electrical wellbore telemetering system in which the
    signal is transmitted in the form of an acoustic wave.


CLS 340/870.01
TXT CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE INDICATING (E.G., TELEMETERING):

    Subject matter under the class definition for giving an indication, at a
    receiving station, which is substantially continuous from a lower value to
    an upper value, said indication being under the control of a transmitter,
    said control being exercised over an electric circuit.

    (1)     Note.  The word "continuous", as used in the above definition,
    refers to the characteristic under which the valve indicated is
    quantitative rather than qualitative; thus, for example, a system which
    nominally indicates a temperature in degrees is classified in this and
    indented subclasses, but a system which indicates temperature merely by
    designations such as "hot", "medium", and "cold" is not classified here,
    but in Class 340, subclass 584. Thus, the intelligence or variable
    indicated is basically an analog, human sensible value input.

    (2)     Note.  The quantity whose value is telemetered may be measured in a
    testing operation.  This subclass, however, takes only those telemetering
    systems not limited to testing or which are not provided for in the testing
    classes.  See the subclasses referred to below under "SEARCH CLASS".

    (3)     Note.  This subclass includes, in addition to automatically
    responsive telemetering systems, those in which the quantity to be
    telemetered is determined by a manual operation; for example, the desired
    as well as the actual temperature of an auditorium may be telemetered from
    the auditorium to the heat control room.

    (4)     Note.  This is the generic subclass for electrical telemetry
    signaling means useful in transmitting a sensed quantity and not provided
    for in other classes.

    (5)     Note.  For the purposes of this subclass definition, a telemetry
    system provides the equipment necessary to sense such conditions as
    pressure and temperature and to transmit their electrical equivalents via a
    particular channel or means, but often via a radio link to another location
    for display and/or recording.

    (6)     Note.  Telemetry, also called telemetering or remote metering, is
    measurement which through intermediate means, can be interpreted at a
    distance from a primary detector.  A receiving instrument converts the
    transmitted electrical signals into units of data which can then be
    translated by data reduction into appropriate units.

    (7)     Note.  Class 73 takes telemetric signaling means in combination
    with a particular measuring means of the type provided for in Class 73.

    (8)     Note.  Class 324 takes telemetric signaling means in combination
    with a particular measuring means of the type provided for in Class 324.

    (9)     Note.  Class 356 takes telemetric signaling means in combination
    with a particular measuring means of the type provided for in Class 356.

    (10)    Note.  Class 374 takes a telemetric signaling arrangement in
    combination with a structurally detailed measuring arrangement provided for
    by Class 374.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    853.1+, for nonacoustic wave wellbore telemetering.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 267 for straightline light ray
    type with telemetric means; subclass 312 for indicator of direction of
    force-traversing material media with borehole direction or inclination
    using electrical telemetering to read-out; subclass 317 for gyromagnetic
    compass with electrical telemetering; and subclasses 363+ for magnetic
    field responsive with electrical telemetering.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for systems limited
    to mechanical testing in combination with telemetering systems to indicate
    the result of the test.

    128,    Surgery, subclass 903 for radio telemetry; and subclass 904 for
    telephone telemetry.

    177,    Weighing Scales, Digest 10 for telemetric systems indicating weight.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for
    systems limited to electrical testing combined with telemetering systems to
    indicate the result of the test.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 1+ for plural
    channel wave transmission lines and networks.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for systems
    limited to optical testing combined with telemetering systems to indicate
    the result of the test.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for electrical computers and data processing systems combined
    with telemetering systems.

    367,    Communications, Electrical Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclass 76 for seismic prospecting land-reflection type, using telemetry;
    and subclasses 81+ for wellbore telemetry.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for combining or
    distributing information via frequency or via time channels, for
    multiplexing systems not restricted to telemetry.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery,
    appropriate subclasses for error detection/correction and fault
    detection/recovery combined with telemetering.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for systems
    limited to a thermal test combined with telemetering systems to indicate
    the result of the test.


CLS 340/870.02
TXT With meter reading:

    Subject matter under subclass 870.01 wherein telemetering means develops a
    composite signal representative of the indications of one or more meters
    and transmits the developed signal for reproduction at a remote point.

    (1)     Note.  Indicators, per se, are not classified herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    870.4,  for particular indicators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for
    systems limited to measurement of electrical values, regardless of
    telemetering system between meter and indication.


CLS 340/870.03
TXT Having plural transmitters:

    Subject matter under subclass 870.02 wherein the meter-reading means
    includes more than one sensing point or input to the telemetering system.

    (1)     Note.  A transmitter for the purpose of this definition is
    analogous to a transducer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    870.06, for plural transmitters in combination with calculation.

    870.11, for plural transmitter, per se.


CLS 340/870.04
TXT With calibration:

    Subject matter under subclass 870.01 wherein the telemetering system has
    means to ascertain, by measurement or comparison with a standard, any
    variation of the indication from an expected value.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 571.01
    for calibration correction or compensating in computers and/or data
    processors.


CLS 340/870.05
TXT With calculation:

    Subject matter under subclass 870.01 combined with means for performing
    some mathematical operation.

    (1)     Note.  The system, for example, may be provided with means to
    furnish an indication on a logarithmic basis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclass 419 for record-controlled calculators which are
    mechanical or electrical.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 700+
    for electrical calculators.


CLS 340/870.06
TXT Plural transmitters (e.g., ratio):

    Subject matter under subclass 870.05 having plural sensing points or inputs
    to the telemetering system.

    (1)     Note.  The system, for example, may be provided with means to
    indicate the sum of a plurality of inputs or the ratio between the two
    inputs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    870.03, for plural transmitters in combination with meter reading.

    870.11, for plural transmitters not in combination with calculation.


CLS 340/870.07
TXT Combined (TM system with other system):

    Subject matter under subclass 870.01 in which the telemetering system is
    combined with some other type of diverse system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for systems limited
    to mechanical testing in combination with telemetering systems to indicate
    the result of the test.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for
    systems limited to electrical testing combined with telemetering systems to
    indicate the result of the test.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for systems
    limited to optical testing combined with telemetering systems to indicate
    the result of the test.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 76+ for seismic prospecting land- reflection type, using
    telemetry; and subclasses 81+ for wellbore telemetry.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for systems
    limited to a thermal test combined with telemetering systems to indicate
    the result of the test.


CLS 340/870.08
TXT Radio dial:

    Subject matter under subclass 870.07 in which the telemetering system is
    responsive to the position of a radio operation indicator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 124.1+ for radio dial, per se.

    334,    Tuners, subclass 86 for radio dial combinations limited to tuning
    structure.

    346,    Recorders, subclass 37 for recorders for recording the position of
    radio dials.


CLS 340/870.09
TXT With alarm or annunciator (concurrent with TM):

    Subject matter under subclass 870.07 in which the telemetering systems is
    combined with a binary indicator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500+,   for condition-responsive systems.


CLS 340/870.1
TXT For radio sonde:

    Subject matter under subclass 870.01 wherein the telemetering is used in a
    balloon-borne instrument for simultaneous measurement and transmission of
    meteorological data.


CLS 340/870.11
TXT Plural transmitters:

    Subject matter under subclass 870.01 having plural sensing points or inputs.

    (1)     Note.  A transmitter for the purpose of this definition is
    analogous to a transducer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    870.03, where the plural transmitters are combined with meter reading.

    870.06, where the final output of the telemetering systems provides an
    indication which is a mathematical representation of some input.


CLS 340/870.12
TXT Frequency division multiplex:

    Subject matter under subclass 870.11 whereby the transmission of data
    involving two or more quantities on a common transmission medium is
    accomplished by modulation of carriers of different frequencies.

    (1)     Note.  Differing segments need not be associated on a one-to-one
    basis with the information channels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    825+,   for plural band selective systems in general.

    855.3,  for signal multiplexing in a wellbore telemetering system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for combining or
    distributing information via frequency channels in multiplex communications
    in general.


CLS 340/870.13
TXT Time division multiplex:

    Subject matter under subclass 870.11 whereby the transmission of data
    involving two or more quantities on a common channel is accomplished by
    dividing the available time among the quantities to form a composite pulse
    train.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    825+,   for selective systems in general.

    825.57+, for pulse responsive systems.

    855.3,  for signal multiplexing in a wellbore telemetering system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for combining or
    distributing information via time channels in multiplex communications in
    general.


CLS 340/870.14
TXT Using particular sync:

    Subject matter under subclass 870.13 wherein the time division multiplex
    system includes means to synchronize the transmitter with the receiver.

    (1)     Note.  The synchronization means of this subclass type must be more
    than inferred or nominally recited in the claims for classification in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclass 324 for synchronization in
    satellite multiplex communications, subclass 350 for synchronization in
    multiplex communications over free space, and subclasses 503+ for
    synchronization in multiplex communications over wire in general.


CLS 340/870.15
TXT With plural receiver:

    Subject matter under subclass 870.11 having more than one indicator.

    (1)     Note.  An indicator provides a humanly perceptible signal.

    (2)     Note.  A receiver in analogous to an indicator for the purpose of
    this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    870.41, for plural receivers in a subcombination that have a particular
    receiver indication.


CLS 340/870.16
TXT Condition responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 870.01 having electrical means to provide a
    humanly perceptible signal in response to the attainment of a predetermined
    value of a specific variable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500+,   for alarms which are automatically responsive to a condition.


CLS 340/870.17
TXT Temperature:

    Subject matter under subclass 870.16 wherein the condition is a
    predetermined degree of heat.


CLS 340/870.18
TXT Using a particular modulation (e.g., phase, frequency, or amplitude):

    Subject matter under subclass 870.01 wherein the characteristic of a wave
    (carrier) is modified so that it varies with the instantaneous value of the
    quantity telemetered (modulating wave).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    870.25, for phase variation without specific modulation.

    870.26, for frequency variation without specific modulation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for systems in electrical transmission or interconnection that
    use modulation.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for systems in electricity, voltage magnitude, and phase control
    that use modulation.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 100+ for miscellaneous circuits that modify input
    signal parameters such as frequency, phase, and amplitude.

    332,    Modulators, appropriate subclasses for modulation, per se, unless
    particularly adapted to telemetering.


CLS 340/870.19
TXT Pulse:

    Subject matter under subclass 870.18 wherein the wave characteristic of a
    series of modulated pulses is used to convey information.

    (1)     Note.  A pulse is a variation of a voltage or current normally
    having a constant value; this variation is characterized by a rise and a
    decay approaching infinitesimal duration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 106+ for pulse modulators, per se.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, appropriate subclasses for generic
    communications which include modulated pulse signals.


CLS 340/870.2
TXT Pulse repetition:

    Subject matter under subclass 870.19 wherein the number of pulses per unit
    of time is varied in accord with analog physical input.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 701 for
    pulse repetition rate in electric digital calculation computer.


CLS 340/870.21
TXT Analog-to-digital function convertor:

    Subject matter under subclass 870.19 wherein an analog-to-digital convertor
    is used in a pulse modulation system.

    (1)     Note.  Digital is of, or pertaining to, the class of devices or
    circuits in which the output varies in discrete steps (i.e., pulses or
    "on-off" operation).

    (2)     Note.  Analog is of, or pertaining to, the general class of devices
    or circuits in which the output varies as a continuous function of the
    input.

    (3)     Note.  Specific structure of an analog to digital function
    converter is necessary for classification herein, nominal recitation is not
    sufficient.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 155+ for an analog
    to digital converter.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for analog to digital function converters used in electrical
    computers and data processing systems.


CLS 340/870.22
TXT Permutation code:

    Subject matter under subclass 870.19 in which the pulse modulation is a
    code for use in the systematic construction of code groups from a fixed
    size pulse set.


CLS 340/870.23
TXT Increase pulses plus decrease pulses:

    Subject matter under subclass 870.19 in which the pulse modulation consists
    of two types of pulses, one type to signify increase of quantity
    telemetered and the other type to signify a decrease of quantity
    telemetered.

    (1)     Note.  The pulses may differ, for example, by being of different
    polarity or they may be sent over two different channels and be of the same
    polarity.


CLS 340/870.24
TXT Pulse duration (e.g., pulse train):

    Subject matter under subclass 870.19 wherein the time interval between the
    points at which the instantaneous value on the leading and trailing edges
    of the pulse bears a specified relationship to the analog physical input.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for pulse duration
    used in multiplexing of information.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclass 239 for pulse duration
    used in pulse or digital communications, per se.


CLS 340/870.25
TXT Phase variation:

    Subject matter under subclass 870.01 in which the intelligence is
    transmitted over the telemetered system by means of phase shift.

    (1)     Note.  Representation of the analog value telemetered by phase
    control will be found in the claim language.

    (2)     Note.  Phase shift is the difference between corresponding points
    on input and output signal wave shapes expressed as degrees lead or lag.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    870.18, for particular phase modulation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 212+
    for phase variation in phase control.

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 144+ for phase modulation, per se.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclass 215 for phase modulation in
    multiplex communications.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 110+ for angle modulation in
    telecommunication.


CLS 340/870.26
TXT Frequency variation:

    Subject matter under subclass 870.01 in which the intelligence is
    transmitted over the telemetry system by means of frequency change.

    (1)     Note.  Frequency change or conversion is the process of converting
    a signal to some other frequency by combining it with another frequency.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    870.18, for particular frequency modulation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for frequency variation in voltage magnitude and phase control
    systems.

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 117+ for frequency modulation, per se.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 110 for angle modulation in
    telecommunications.


CLS 340/870.27
TXT Plural circuits, each for particular magnitude:

    Subject matter under subclass 870.01 having plural circuits between the
    transmitter and the receiver, each circuit being used to designate a
    particular quantity.

    (1)     Note.  To be classifiable as a telemetering system, the subject
    matter must have a sufficient number of indications so as to be
    substantially continuous.  Thus, for example, a system which has three
    indications to indicate, for example, "plenty", "little", and "in between",
    would not be classified as a telemetering system, but as a signaling
    system, for classification in subclasses 286+ of this class.


CLS 340/870.28
TXT Via radiant energy beam (via particular energy):

    Subject matter under subclass 870.01 in which the intelligence is
    transmitted from the transmitter to the receiver by radiant energy.

    (1)     Note.  The radiant energy means, for example, may be an infrared
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for photocell systems; and
    subclasses 338 for infrared and other radiant energy systems.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    109+ for light ray communication systems such as subclasses 113+ for duplex
    optical communication and subclasses 115+ for multiplex optical
    communication.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 41 for induction or near field systems
    limited of radio telephony.


CLS 340/870.29
TXT Photoelectric cell pickup:

    Subject matter under subclass 870.28 in which the radiant energy beam is
    sensed by a photoelectric cell.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for photocell systems; and
    subclasses 388.1+ for infrared and other radiant energy systems.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    113+ for duplex optical communication and subclasses 115+ for multiplex
    optical communication.


CLS 340/870.3
TXT With particular transmitter (e.g., piezoelectric, dynamo):

    Subject matter under subclass 870.01 wherein the transmitter is of the
    piezoelectric, dynamo, or other types of transmitters which are, per se,
    provided for elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  A transmitter is analogous to a transducer for the purpose
    of this definition.


CLS 340/870.31
TXT Inductive transmitter:

    Subject matter under subclass 870.3 wherein changes in inductance convey
    the information to be transmitted.

    (1)     Note.  Inductance is the property which opposes any change in an
    existing current in a circuit.  Inductance is present only when the current
    is changing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for inductor devices, per
    se.


CLS 340/870.32
TXT Mutual inductance:

    Subject matter under subclass 870.31 in which voltage is produced in one
    circuit by the magnetic field change in current in a neighboring circuit.


CLS 340/870.33
TXT Flux valve type (e.g., with movable saturating magnet):

    Subject matter under subclass 870.32 in which the mutual inductance is
    controlled by variably saturating a magnetic field.

    (1)     Note.  The saturation may be produced, for example, by a movable
    saturating magnet or by the earth's magnetic field.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 317 for systems limited to the
    earth's magnetic field.


CLS 340/870.34
TXT Self-synchronous type:

    Subject matter under subclass 870.32 in which the mutual inductance has a
    stator and a rotor which tend to line up magnetically.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass, for example, contains the familiar selsyn
    systems.

    (2)     Note.  A stator is a nonrotating part of a magnetic structure in an
    induction motor.

    (3)     Note.  A rotor is a rotating part of a magnetic structure in an
    induction motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 690 for selsyn-type
    electric motor systems; and subclasses 654 and 661 for electric motor
    systems controlled by a selsyn system.


CLS 340/870.35
TXT Differential type:

    Subject matter under subclass 870.32 in which the mutual inductance
    contains two parts, and in which the magnetic field in the two parts flows
    through a common portion in a differential relationship.


CLS 340/870.36
TXT Linear variable differential transformer (LVDT):

    Subject matter under subclass 870.35 comprising means to convert mechanical
    displacements to proportional electrical voltages.


CLS 340/870.37
TXT Capacitive transmitter:

    Subject matter under subclass 870.3 in which a transducer is a variable
    capacitor.

    (1)     Note.  A capacitor is a device consisting essentially of two
    conducting surfaces separated by an insulating material of dielectric.

    (2)     Note.  A transmitter is analogous to a transducer for the purpose
    of this definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 271 for
    variable capacitors.


CLS 340/870.38
TXT Resistive transmitter:

    Subject matter under subclass 870.3 in which a transducer is a variable
    resistor.

    (1)     Note.  A transmitter is analogous to a transducer for the purpose
    of this definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, appropriate subclasses for electrical
    resistor, per se.


CLS 340/870.39
TXT With supply voltage regulation or compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 870.01 having means to regulate the
    energizing supply or to compensate for changes in supply.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for means for regulating voltage and/or current, per se.


CLS 340/870.4
TXT With particular receiver (e.g., ratiometer):

    Subject matter under subclass 870.01 comprising a receiver including
    recited indicating means or significant structure.

    (1)     Note.  A ratiometer is an instrument which measures electrically
    the quotient of two quantities.

    (2)     Note.  A receiver is analogous to an indicator for the purpose of
    this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    870.02, for meter reading.


CLS 340/870.41
TXT Plural receivers:

    Subject matter under subclass 870.4 in which the telemetering system has
    plural receivers.

    (1)     Note.  A receiver is analogous to an indicator for the purpose of
    this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    870.15, for plural transmitters with plural receivers with transmitters.


CLS 340/870.42
TXT With feedback (e.g., reflex along line):

    Subject matter under subclass 870.4 having means to feedback a signal from
    the receiver to the transmitter.

    (1)     Note.  The feedback, for example, may be negative feedback used to
    improve the stability of the system.

    (2)     Note.  The feedback may be in any form of energy.


CLS 340/870.43
TXT Followup (e.g., circuit rebalanced when upset):

    Subject matter under subclass 870.42 having means responsive to the
    feedback to reduce the amount of feedback.

    (1)     Note.  The followup means may, for example, rebalance the system so
    as to reduce the feedback to zero.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 600+ for electric
    motor rebalancing systems.


CLS 340/870.44
TXT With discharge device (e.g., CRT):

    Subject matter under subclass 870.4 having a device which is intended to
    have an electrical current flow between two spaced electrodes, at least
    part of the path followed by the flow being constituted by a gas vapor or
    vacuum.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses for
    space discharge devices, per se.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for cathode ray and gas tube circuits, per se.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous electron discharge device
    circuits.


CLS 340/901
TXT EXTERNAL CONDITION VEHICLE-MOUNTED INDICATOR OR ALARM:

    Subject matter under the class definition having an indicator or alarm in
    the vehicle actuated in response to a condition or input signal remote from
    the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    425.5+, for alarm systems automatically responsive to a condition of a
    vehicle, especially subclasses 426+ for burglar alarms, subclasses 438+ for
    internal alarms, and subclasses 463+ for external alarms.

    500+,   for condition responsive indicating systems not associated with the
    vehicle.


CLS 340/902
TXT Transmitter in another vehicle (e.g., emergency vehicle):

    Subject matter under subclass 901 having the alarm actuated in response to
    the receipt of a signal generated by another vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  The signal could be received from an emergency vehicle
    (e.g., police, fire) warning of its presence.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 99 for transmitter with vehicle,
    subclass 345 for receiver with vehicle.


CLS 340/903
TXT Relative distance between vehicles (e.g., collision alert):

    Subject matter under subclass 902 wherein the alarm indicates the
    separation between vehicles.

    (1)     Note.  Potential collision alerting systems are included here when
    the vehicles are not aircraft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    961,    for potential collision alerting systems when used on aircraft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 29+, 41, and 455 for collision
    avoidance apparatus using radio wave communications.


CLS 340/904
TXT Transmitter in one vehicle only:

    Subject matter under subclass 901 including a signal generating source
    located in the vehicle carrying the indicator or alarm.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 99 for transmitter with vehicle.


CLS 340/905
TXT Highway information (e.g., weather, speed limits, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 901 including an indicator responsive to
    signals communicating the travel conditions along the highway.

    (1)     Note.  Included, for example, are indications of the speed limit of
    the road, the vehicle position with respect to the lane, signals on the
    vehicle indicating wrong way travel, etc.


CLS 340/906
TXT OVERRIDE OF TRAFFIC CONTROL INDICATOR BY COMMAND TRANSMITTER:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the normal cycling of a
    traffic control indicator is interrupted by a remote transmitter not
    normally connected to the traffic indicator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    909,    for the control of a traffic indicator by a remote station normally
    controlling the indicator.


CLS 340/907
TXT TRAFFIC CONTROL INDICATOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition having means to develop and/or
    display right of way indications to vehicular traffic.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 63+ for mechanical indicators
    for street traffic.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, for related subclasses relating for
    railway signals.


CLS 340/908
TXT Portable:

    Subject matter under subclass 907 wherein the indicator can be moved from
    one place to another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 63 for portable traffic indicators
    of mechanical design.


CLS 340/908.1
TXT Barricade marker:

    Subject matter under subclass 908 wherein the indicator is mounted on, or
    combined with, a portable structure used as a barrier or as a hazard marker.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    473,    for similar devices which are intended to be carried in or on a
    vehicle and used to indicate that the vehicle itself is a hazard while
    parked or inoperative.


CLS 340/909
TXT Plural intersections under common central station control:

    Subject matter under subclass 907 having plural highways with at least two
    crossings with a traffic control indicator at each crossing and each under
    the control of the same central station.

    (1)     Note.  Mere continuous supply of power is not considered control
    means.


CLS 340/910
TXT Central station responsive to traffic detectors:

    Subject matter under subclass 909 including means responsive to vehicular
    presence, said means transmitting a presence signal to the central station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    933,    for vehicle detectors, per se.


CLS 340/911
TXT Central station controls offset (time between beginning of same phase at
    adjacent intersections):

    Subject matter under subclass 910 wherein the central station controls the
    time between the beginning of the same indicator phase at adjacent
    intersections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    913,    for offset control absent traffic detectors.


CLS 340/912
TXT Standby cycling implemented if invalid transmission received or loss of
    transmission occurs:

    Subject matter under subclass 909 wherein a local controller at an
    intersection assumes control of the traffic indicators of that intersection
    if an improper instruction is received from the central station.


CLS 340/913
TXT Offset control:

    Subject matter under subclass 909 wherein the central station controls the
    time between the beginning of the same indicator phase at adjacent
    intersections.

    (1)     Note.  The local controller may make offset adjustments but the
    basic control comes from the central station.

    (2)     Note.  Systems resynchronizing the indicators from the central
    station are classified here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    911,    for offset control with traffic detectors.


CLS 340/914
TXT Split control:

    Subject matter under subclass 909 wherein the central station controls the
    percentage of a complete cycle at each intersection allowed for a
    particular indicator phase.

    (1)     Note.  The local controller may make split adjustments but the
    basic control comes from the central station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    910,    for split control with traffic detectors.


CLS 340/915
TXT Central station includes display of status of indicators:

    Subject matter under subclass 909 including at the central station a visual
    representation of the traffic indicators then energized at any particular
    intersection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclass 2 for plural display systems
    remotely located.


CLS 340/916
TXT Intersection normally under local controller:

    Subject matter under subclass 907 including means at each intersection
    which acts as the main control for determining the traffic indicator
    energization.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    909,    for intersection normally under common central station control.


CLS 340/917
TXT Controller responsive to traffic detectors:

    Subject matter under subclass 916 wherein the local controller is
    responsive to means detecting vehicular presence.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    933,    for traffic detectors, per se.


CLS 340/918
TXT Controller, when changing right of way, alters or skips normal "go" cycle
    of street having no traffic detected:

    Subject matter under subclass 917 including means not allowing a normal
    right of way or "go" indicator period when no traffic is detected.


CLS 340/919
TXT Plural cross highways at intersection each have traffic detectors:

    Subject matter under subclass 917 including plural vehicular presence
    detector means each located at a different cross highway in the
    intersection.


CLS 340/920
TXT Density determines split:

    Subject matter under subclass 919 wherein the number of vehicles detected
    per unit time or area determines the percentage of a complete cycle allowed
    for a particular indicator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 9 for counting of vehicles, per se.

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclass 118 for computation of traffic analysis with determination of
    traffic density.


CLS 340/921
TXT Extension of time:

    Subject matter under subclass 920 wherein the energization period for an
    indicator phase may be increased beyond its normal time period.


CLS 340/922
TXT Density determines split:

    Subject matter under subclass 917 wherein the number of vehicles detected
    per unit time or area determines the percentage of a complete cycle allowed
    for a particular indicator phase.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclass 118 for computation of traffic analysis with determination of
    traffic density.


CLS 340/923
TXT Extension of time:

    Subject matter under subclass 917 wherein the energization period for an
    indicator phase may be increased beyond its normal time period.


CLS 340/924
TXT Local controller can be superceded by central station controller:

    Subject matter under subclass 916 wherein the traffic indicator control may
    be taken over by the central station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    909,    when plural intersections are normally under common central station
    control.


CLS 340/925
TXT Pedestrian control:

    Subject matter under subclass 916 wherein a pedestrian gains control of the
    traffic control indicator.


CLS 340/926
TXT Manual setting of cycle length and split times:

    Subject matter under subclass 916 including details of a controller having
    means to set the cycle length and split times by hand.


CLS 340/927
TXT Rotating cam structure (specific structure required):

    Subject matter under subclass 916 including specific details of
    electromechanical controller structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 63+ for mechanical indicators
    for street traffic.


CLS 340/928
TXT Combined (e.g., toll systems, one-way):

    Subject matter under subclass 907 wherein a diverse art device is combined
    with a traffic control indicator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    932.2,  for systems specific to parking lots.


CLS 340/929
TXT Indication of time remaining before change of phase:

    Subject matter under subclass 907 having a means auxiliary to the traffic
    control indicator indicating when the upcoming change in the state of the
    traffic control indicator will occur.


CLS 340/930
TXT Electromechanical movable auxiliary indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 929 wherein the auxiliary indicator changes
    position thereby indicating the upcoming change in traffic control
    indicator phase.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    929,    where the auxiliary indicator is different lights actuated in
    sequence.


CLS 340/931
TXT Traffic control or local controller failure indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 907 having means to detect failure of one of
    the traffic control indicators or the presence of an improper output from
    the local controller.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    641+,   for generic alarms responsive to the condition of an indicator
    light element.


CLS 340/932
TXT Pacing (e.g., vehicle keeps pace with sequentially activated lights):

    Subject matter under subclass 907 having means, distinct from the
    conventional intersection traffic control indicator, for supplying an
    indication for maintaining flow of traffic at a specific pace.


CLS 340/932.1
TXT Pivoted:

    Subject matter under subclass 907 wherein the right-of-way indicating
    devices rotate or pivot in whole or in part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    487+,   for electromagnetically actuated pivoted indicating devices mounted
    on a vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 46+ and 51+ for manually
    actuated pivoted indicating devices mounted on a vehicle.


CLS 340/932.2
TXT VEHICLE PARKING INDICATORS:

    Subject matter under the class definition including electrical signalling
    systems or devices which:  (a) indicate the availability of parking, (b)
    direct a driver to available parking spaces, or (c) assist a driver in
    parking his vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are systems and devices which control traffic
    within a parking lot or garage as well as those which assist a driver in
    properly placing his vehicle within a parking space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    436+,   for vehicle mounted devices which may assist a driver in parking
    his vehicle by indicating contact with external objects such as curbs,
    walls, or other vehicles.


CLS 340/933
TXT VEHICLE DETECTORS:

    Subject matter under the class definition for sensing the presence or
    motion of traffic.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclasses 122+ for train position
    indication and subclasses 246+ for car actuated circuit controllers.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 9 for vehicle counters, per se.


CLS 340/934
TXT Density:

    Subject matter under subclass 933 including means for detecting and
    indicating the number of vehicles per unit time or area.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclass 118 for computation of traffic analysis with determination of
    traffic density.


CLS 340/935
TXT Discriminates vehicle direction:

    Subject matter under subclass 933 having means to distinguish between
    particular directions of travel.


CLS 340/936
TXT Speed and overspeed:

    Subject matter under subclass 933 having means for detecting the velocity
    of the vehicle, said means being external to the vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, subclass 33 for vehicle speed recorders.

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclass 119 for computation of traffic analysis with determination of
    traffic speed.


CLS 340/937
TXT With camera:

    Subject matter under subclass 933 including means to pictorially record the
    passage of a vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, subclass 107.2 for optical recorders including camera
    for recording phenomenal information.


CLS 340/938
TXT Compensation for vehicle remaining at sensor position:

    Subject matter under subclass 933 including means for inhibiting a "vehicle
    detected" output when the vehicle detector is constantly sensing the same
    vehicle.


CLS 340/939
TXT Environmental or drift compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 933 including means for recalibrating the
    vehicle detector circuitry to compensate for nonvehicle outside influences.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of outside influences are temperature, humidity,
    aging of circuitry components.


CLS 340/940
TXT With pneumatic:

    Subject matter under subclass 933 wherein the vehicle detector includes a
    means operated by the pressure or exhaustion of air.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, for mechanical indicators.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 81+ for fluid
    pressure switches, per se, and subclasses 85+ for weight switches, per se.


CLS 340/941
TXT Inductive:

    Subject matter under subclass 933 wherein the vehicle detector comprises
    measuring electromotive for which will be generated as a result of a given
    rate of change of current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclass 249 for magnetic responsive
    car actuated circuit controllers.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 200+ for generic
    magnetic measuring and testing devices.


CLS 340/942
TXT Photoelectric:

    Subject matter under subclass 933 wherein the vehicle detector comprises a
    light source and sensor means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for photocells; circuits and
    apparatus.


CLS 340/943
TXT Sonic or ultrasonic:

    Subject matter under subclass 933 wherein the vehicle detector comprises a
    means for sensing vibrations in the air whether audible or a higher
    frequency.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 93 and 94 for presence or movement detection.


CLS 340/944
TXT PEDESTRIAN GUIDANCE:

    Subject matter under the class definition having means to develop and/or
    display right of way indications to pedestrian traffic.


CLS 340/945
TXT AIRCRAFT ALARM OR INDICATING SYSTEMS:

    Subject matter under the class definition having alarm devices or
    indicators in or used with aircraft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500+,   for a system having only nominal aircraft structure and significant
    alarm structure.  Significant limitations to the aircraft would necessitate
    classification in subclass 945.


CLS 340/946
TXT Nonairplane (e.g., balloon or helicopter):

    Subject matter under subclass 945 including aircraft whose lift is provided
    by other than functionally stationary airfoils.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 178 for helicopter navigation.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 17.11+ for helicopters, per se, and
    subclasses 31+ for balloons, per se.


CLS 340/947
TXT Land-based landing guidance:

    Subject matter under subclass 945 having means in the immediate vacinity of
    a landing field to guide the aircraft in its descent to the landing field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    985,    for similar systems when used to guide watercraft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 114 for landing field arrangements of
    nonelectrical design.


CLS 340/948
TXT Aircraft actuation of land-based landing guides:

    Subject matter under subclass 947 wherein the landing guides are normally
    in a standby condition and are activated by the aircraft.


CLS 340/949
TXT Wind direction:

    Subject matter under subclass 947 including means indicating the direction
    of the air currents at the landing field.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 170.11 for meteorology with fluid
    flow velocity determination.


CLS 340/950
TXT Movable (e.g., rotatable) guides:

    Subject matter under subclass 947 having guides that are changeable in
    position.


CLS 340/951
TXT Phased landing guidance (e.g., runway approach, landing, touchdown):

    Subject matter under subclass 947 wherein landing guides are clustered at
    different locations for different parts of the landing path for supplying
    different guidance indications.


CLS 340/952
TXT Particular energy guide source (e.g., sound, electric field, radio):

    Subject matter under subclass 947 including the use of a specific type of
    energy in the guide source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 385+ for directive beacons.


CLS 340/953
TXT Visual source:

    Subject matter under subclass 952 wherein the guide source can be seen by
    the pilot.


CLS 340/954
TXT Alignment of plural sources:

    Subject matter under subclass 953 wherein plural sources when seen in a
    particular alignment indicate the correct landing path.


CLS 340/955
TXT Plural colors:

    Subject matter under subclass 953 including plural sources of different
    visible light wavelengths or colors.


CLS 340/956
TXT Modulated light source:

    Subject matter under subclass 953 having means to vary the amplitude or
    frequency or phase of flashing of the light other than a mere change in
    color.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    953     through 955, for flashing of lights in merely an on/off nature
    without unique communications.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    109+ for optical communication.


CLS 340/957
TXT Magnetic field guide:

    Subject matter under subclass 952 wherein the guide source is a conductor
    or coil carrying a current within which moving electric charges will be
    acted upon by a magnetic force.


CLS 340/958
TXT Docking guidance:

    Subject matter under subclass 945 including means to guide the pilot to a
    particular airport bay.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    932.2,  for parking systems.


CLS 340/959
TXT Takeoff indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 945 having indicator means operable during
    the lift off phase of flight.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 178 for takeoff navigation monitors.

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclass 15 for computation including indication or control of takeoff.


CLS 340/960
TXT Landing gear indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 945 having indicator means responsive to the
    condition or location (e.g., up or down) of the landing wheel structure.


CLS 340/961
TXT Potential collision with other aircraft:

    Subject matter under subclass 945 including an alarm indicating a possible
    upcoming crash with another aircraft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    903,    for potential collision alerting alarms when receiving a
    transmitted signal from another vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 29+, 41 and 455 for collision
    avoidance apparatus using radio wave communications.


CLS 340/962
TXT Icing indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 945 including means combined with particular
    structure unique to aircraft for indicating deposits of frozen water on
    critical aircraft structures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    580+,   for alarms responsive to ice conditions not aircraft related.


CLS 340/963
TXT Flight alarm:

    Subject matter under subclass 945 having alarms on-board the aircraft
    actuatable upon a particular flight condition.

    (1)     Note.  Any indication which could be considered both an alarm and a
    nonalarm type indication is classified as an alarm.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    971,    for nonalarm flight condition indicators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 178 for related navigation systems.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 175+ for related aircraft control systems.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 580+ for vehicle
    guidance systems with single axis control.

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclasses 1+ for vehicles and vehicles indication, operation, or guidance.


CLS 340/964
TXT Phased warnings for same flight condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 963 having plural alerting alarms for
    different deviations from the standard for a particular flight parameter.


CLS 340/965
TXT Tactile:

    Subject matter under subclass 963 having an alarm means which can be
    perceived by touch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    407.1+, for tactile alarms, per se.


CLS 340/966
TXT Stall:

    Subject matter under subclass 963 having an alarm which activates when the
    aircraft loses the air speed necessary for support and control.


CLS 340/967
TXT Attitude (including yaw, angle of attack, roll, pitch, glide slope):

    Subject matter under subclass 963 having an alarm responsive to the
    position of the airborne vehicle by the inclination of its axes to some
    frame of reference.

    (1)     Note.  If not otherwise specified, this frame of reference is fixed
    to the earth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 328 for attitude indicators.


CLS 340/968
TXT Wind shear:

    Subject matter under subclass 963 having an alarm when the vertical
    gradient of the horizontal wind exceeds flight limits for a particular
    altitude or airspeed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 178 for navigation landing monitors.


CLS 340/969
TXT Speed:

    Subject matter under subclass 963 having an alarm responsive to the
    velocity of the aircraft relative to air.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclass 121 for speed control of aircraft.


CLS 340/970
TXT Altitude:

    Subject matter under subclass 963 having an alarm responsive to the
    distance from the aircraft to ground or sea level.


CLS 340/971
TXT Nonalarm flight indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 945 having means on-board the aircraft to
    indicate to the pilot information concerning a flight condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    963,    for similar systems with a flight condition alarm.


CLS 340/972
TXT Runway presentation:

    Subject matter under subclass 971 having an indicator on board the aircraft
    indicating to the pilot a representation of the landing field and the
    position of the aircraft with respect to it.

    (1)     Note.  Indicators showing the position of the aircraft with respect
    to the desired flight path position and not having a runway representation
    are in subclasses 973-979 below.


CLS 340/973
TXT Indicator of at least four flight parameters (altitude, speed, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 971 having combined in a single indicator
    element means to indicate the value of at least four different flight
    parameters.


CLS 340/974
TXT Attitude:

    Subject matter under subclass 971 having a changeable indicator responsive
    to the position of the aircraft by the inclination of its axes to a frame
    of reference.

    (1)     Note.  If not otherwise specified, this frame of reference is fixed
    to the earth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 328 for attitude indicators.


CLS 340/975
TXT Roll or pitch:

    Subject matter under subclass 974 having the indicator representing the
    angle between the longitudinal axis of the aircraft and the relative wind
    or the angle the aircraft must be rotated about its longitudinal axis in
    order to bring its lateral axis into a horizontal plane.


CLS 340/976
TXT Glide slope or path:

    Subject matter under subclass 974 having the indicator representing the
    summation of the angle between the chord of the airfoil and its direction
    of motion relative to the air and the angle of pitch.


CLS 340/977
TXT Altitude:

    Subject matter under subclass 971 having an indicator representing the
    distance from the aircraft to ground or sea level.


CLS 340/978
TXT Speed:

    Subject matter under subclass 971 having an indicator representing the
    velocity of the aircraft relative to the surrounding air or to ground.


CLS 340/979
TXT Heading (includes deviation from desired course):

    Subject matter under subclass 971 having an indicator representing the
    position or direction of the aircraft with respect to a desired course or
    course direction.


CLS 340/980
TXT Indicator visible in pilot's line-of-sight through windscreen:

    Subject matter under subclass 971 wherein the pilot can observe the
    indicator while his line-of-sight is through the windscreen or windshield.


CLS 340/981
TXT Aircraft beacons:

    Subject matter under subclass 945 having beacons on-board the aircraft
    perceptible by an observer remote from the aircraft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclass 62 for aircraft light structure.


CLS 340/982
TXT Lights communicate (e.g., direction, altitude, reference position to
    observer):

    Subject matter under subclass 981 wherein the beacons are visual signals
    which indicate to the observer information concerning the flight path or
    position of the aircraft.

    (1)     Note.  For example, this information may be the direction,
    altitude, reference position etc., of the aircraft to the observer.


CLS 340/983
TXT Obstruction beacon:

    Subject matter under subclass 945 having a beacon at the location of an
    object to warn aircraft of the presence of that object.


CLS 340/984
TXT WATERCRAFT ALARM OR INDICATING SYSTEMS:

    Subject matter under the class definition having alarms or indicators
    particular to boats or other aquatic type vehicles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, for related subject matter.


CLS 340/985
TXT Navigation guides (e.g., channel lights):

    Subject matter under subclass 984 having means to direct a watercraft to a
    particular location.

    (1)     Note.  Included are channel or harbor lights when used for guidance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    947,    for similar systems when used to guide aircraft.


CLS 340/986
TXT Anchor movement:

    Subject matter under subclass 984 having an alarm actuated upon movement of
    a device which holds the watercraft in place.


CLS 340/987
TXT Rudder position indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 984 having an indicator showing the position
    of the movable element hinged at the stern of the boat and used for
    steering.


CLS 340/988
TXT VEHICLE POSITION INDICATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition having means to indicate the
    position or location of a vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    901,    for electrical condition vehicle-mounted indicator or alarm.

    933,    for vehicle detectors.


CLS 340/989
TXT At remote location:

    Subject matter under subclass 988 wherein the indication is developed at a
    location remote from the vehicle.


CLS 340/990
TXT With map display:

    Subject matter under subclass 989 wherein the remote location includes a
    map with the location of the vehicle indicated on the map.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286.01, for nonvehicle map display.

    995,    for map located on the vehicle.


CLS 340/991
TXT Position indications transmitted by vehicle after receipt of information
    from local station:

    Subject matter under subclass 989 wherein the vehicle receives its location
    indication from a local station in its vicinity, then transmits that
    location indication to a remote station.


CLS 340/992
TXT Position indication transmitted at periodic intervals (e.g., distance
    travelled):

    Subject matter under subclass 989 wherein the position indication is
    transmitted to the remote station periodically (e.g., the distance
    travelled by the vehicle defining the periodic interval).


CLS 340/993
TXT Position indication transmitted by local station to remote location:

    Subject matter under subclass 989 wherein a local station in the vicinity
    of the vehicle detects the vehicle and transmits the position indication of
    the vehicle to a remote station.


CLS 340/994
TXT Vehicle's arrival or expected arrival at remote location along route
    indicated at that remote location (e.g., bus arrival systems):

    Subject matter under subclass 989 wherein an indicator at a remote location
    indicates when a vehicle is expected to arrive at that remote location.


CLS 340/995
TXT Map display:

    Subject matter under subclass 988 including a map with the location of the
    vehicle indicated on the map.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    990,    for the map located at a remote location.


CLS 340/996
TXT Prerecorded message describes position:

    Subject matter under subclass 988 wherein the indication includes a
    prerecorded message describing the position of the vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 12 for
    magnetic recording or reproducing for automatic announcing.


CLS 341/
TTL CODED DATA GENERATION OR  CONVERSION

CLS 341/
TXT

    I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF THE CLASS SUBJECT MATTER:

    A.      This is the generic class for (a) originating or emitting a coded
    set of descrete signals or (b) translating one code into another code
    wherein the information signal content remains the same but the formats may
    differ.  For classification herein, at least one of the codes must be a set
    of pulses or digits and electrical in nature.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this class is analog to analog conversion
    which may be classified in classes such as 307, 327, 455 for example.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this class (341) is subject matter relating to
    codes, per se, such as morse codes, grey codes.  Excluded from this class
    are coded records and coded record readers which may be classified in Class
    235, subclasses 487+ and 435+, respectively.

    (3)     Class 250, Radiant Energy, subclass 231 provides for combinations
    of an optically encoded shaft wheel and a photocell absent any signal
    processing circuitry.

    (4)     Note.  Code converters which may be utilized in pulse or digital
    communication systems, Class 375, are classified in Class 341.



    B.      The combination of the subject matter of this class (341) and
    another art environment is generally classified with the art device where
    the environment is significant by virtue of the claimed relationship.  For
    example:

    Coding and decoding for cryptography, Class 380.

    Coding and decoding for error detection or correction, Class 371.

    Code transmitters specific to telemetry, Class 340, subclasses 870.01+

    Data compression and expansion, Classes 358, 375, 381 or 455.

    Microwave devices, Class 250.

    Radiowave beacons, Class 342, subclasses 385+.

    Radar generation, conversion or systems, Class 342.

    C.      Pulse generation or conversion which is not unique to
    communications are classified in the appropriate classes.  For example:

    Pulse demodulation, per se, Class 329, subclasses 104+.

    Pulse generation, Class 327, subclasses 291+.

    Pulse modulation, per se, Class 332, subclasses 9+.

    Pulse wave conversion systems; i.e., sine wave to pulse wave, Class 327,
    subclasses 100+.

    II.     THIS CLASS IS STRUCTURED INTO FOURTEEN MAIN DIVISIONS:

    1.      Digital Pattern Reading Type Converters or generators:  subclasses
    1+.

    2.      Bodily Actuated Code Generator:  subclasses 20+.

    3.      Digital Code to Digital Code Converters:  subclasses 50+.

    4.      Reversible Analog to Digital Converter:  subclass 108.

    5.      Stochastic Techniques:  subclass 109.

    6.      Analog to Digital Conversion Followed by Digital to Analog
    Conversion:  subclass 110.

    7.      Phase or Time of Phase Reversal:  subclasses 111+.

    8.      Converter Compensation:  subclasses 118+.

    9.      Converter Calibration or Testing:   subclasses 120+.

    10.     Sample and Hold:  subclasses 122+

    11.     Analog to or From Digital Conversion:  subclasses 126+.

    12.     Code Generator or Transmitter:  subclasses 173+.

    13.     Quantizers:  subclass 200.

    14.     Miscellaneous:  subclass 899.

    III.    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 2 for telegraphic code changers, subclass 26.1
    for telegraph printing page translators, and subclass 71 for code
    transformers in automatic telegraph repeaters.

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), subclasses 69+ for a pattern
    controlled selective punching device embodying code conversion means.

    235,    Registers, subclass 429 for electromechanical means to translate
    the code sensed from a coded record into a different code.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 231 for optical or photocell systems
    having a light valve which is actuated by a shaft encoder or angle
    indicator absent any signal processing circuitry, subclass 271 for
    invisible radiant energy coded record readers, subclasses 555+ for coded
    record controlled photocell circuits and subclasses 566+ for coded record
    reading optical or pre-photocell systems.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 50+ for signal discriminating or comparing by
    amplitude, subclasses 100+ for miscellaneous signal conversion or
    generation, and subclasses 1+ for signal discriminating by various
    parameters.

    329,    Demodulators, subclasses 104+ for pulse demodulators or detectors.

    332,    Modulators, subclass 183 for modulation converters.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 825.3 for intelligence
    comparison, subclass 825.56 for selective systems with encoding of data,
    subclasses 870.01+ for telemetring code transmitters, and subclass 870.21
    for telemetry with analog to digital conversion.

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclass 185 for scan conversion in a radar
    system.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 156+ for visual display
    systems with selective electrical control including specified input means.

    348,    Television, subclasses 441+ for television signal format
    conversion, subclasses 469+ for television signal formatting, and
    subclasses 384+ for television bandwidth compression or expansion.

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 426 for facsimile bandwidth compression or
    expansion.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 32 for
    analog to or from digital conversion combined with magnetic dynamic
    recording or reproduction, and subclasses 40+ for dynamic magnetic
    recording of digital signals in specified codes or formats.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems And Devices, subclasses 171+ for
    electrical relay systems of the code responsive type.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    electrical power conversion as opposed to data conversion.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 188+
    and 709 for input means for data processors or computers and subclasses
    600+ for hybrid computer systems having analog to digital or digital to
    analog conversion.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclass 66 for analog and digital compatible acoustic wave systems and
    subclass 74 for format conversion in an acoustic wave system.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 465+ for adaptive multiplex
    communications systems, and 477 for bandwidth compression or expansion.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclasses
    37.01 - 46 for conversion of digital data  into error detecting or
    correcting codes, subclass 56 for error/fault detection techniques for a
    multilevel code and subclass 70 for error detection by transmission of data
    and its compliment.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 242+ for pulse code
    modulation of an input analog signal.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 42 for analog to digital or digital to
    analog conversion of the input or output of such systems.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclass 281 for conversion between dial
    pulse and tone signals in a telephone switching system, subclass 289 for a
    translator in a telephone switching system, subclass 339 for signal
    conversion in telephone repeaters and subclass 353 for conversion of signal
    form in telephony.

    380,    Cryptography, appropriate subclasses for electrical cryptographic
    devices, particularly encoding or decoding for cryptographic purposes,
    which is excluded from this class (341).

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    29 - 35 for time or bandwidth compression or expansion of an audio signal
    which may involve analog to or from digital conversion and subclasses 36 -
    53 for speech analysis and/or synthesis which may involve analog to or from
    digital conversion.

    382,    Image Analysis, subclass 276 for image transformations and subclass
    232 for dat compression or image coding.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 1 through 99
    for artificial intelligence including neural nets, and robot control,
    subclasses 100 through 166 for data presentation/computer graphics
    processing, subclasses 180+ for reliability and availability in a digital
    data processing system, and subclasses 200.3+ for data transferring among a
    plurality of spatially distributed computers or digital data processing
    systems.

    463,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 1+, particularly subclasses
    36+, for a code generator or conversion device either combined with a game
    or particularly adapted to serve as an input device for an electronic game.


    704,    Data Processing:  Speech Signal Processing, Linguistics, Language
    Translation, and Audio Compression/Decompression, subclasses 500+ for
    differential encoding of audio signals.


CLS 341/1
TXT DIGITAL PATTERN READING TYPE CONVERTER:

    Subject matter under the class definition having a spatial variation of a
    parameter on an object to form a digital pattern carrier (e.g., movable
    code disk), and a pattern reading device providing a digital output.

    (1)     Note.  Data conversion combined with structural detail of another
    art device is classifiable with the art device.

    (2)     Note.  A record reader reads a selected one of plural recorded
    patterns, while a digital pattern reader can only read one pattern.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 435 to 495 for coded records and readers.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 271 for invisible radiant energy coded
    record readers.

    382,    Image Analysis, subclasses 181+ for alphanumeric character
    recognition.


CLS 341/2
TXT Plural denominationally related carriers (e.g., coarse/fine geared discs):

    Subject matter under subclass 1 having a plurality of digital pattern
    carriers each producing an output signal portion representing a different
    integral power of the base or radix (denominational order) of the digital
    representation or an element of a combination code.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are plural code disks with gearing to cause
    different motion from a common motive power source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for a denominational pattern on a single pattern carrier.

    113,    for coarse and fine conversions in a synchro or resolver to or from
     digital  conversion.

    145,    for coarse and fine conversions in a digital to analog conversion.

    156,    for coarse and fine conversions in an analog to digital conversion.


CLS 341/3
TXT Plural types of codes on single carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including a digital pattern carrier having
    two or more disparate code patterns thereon.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are carriers with different codes on
    different surfaces.


CLS 341/4
TXT According to nonlinear function:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the pattern is characterized by a
    mathematical function such that an encoded signal does not vary in direct
    proportion to the input being encoded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for digital nonlinear code conversion.

    138+,   for nonlinear analog to or from digital conversion.


CLS 341/5
TXT For X or Y coordinate determination (e.g., stylus-pad):

    Subject matter under subclass 1 having structure to produce a signal in
    accordance with the position of an object on a predetermined surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 18+ for systems where the positional
    information is transmitted telegraphically; and subclass 87 for a stylus
    pad telegraph code transmitter.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 190 for
    a positional input to a data processing control system, and subclass 709
    for a positional input to a digital calculating computer.


CLS 341/6
TXT With directional discrimination:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 in which the digital pattern carrier and
    the pattern reading device have bidirectional motion therebetween, and
    includes circuitry or structure to distinguish the direction of such
    movement.


CLS 341/7
TXT Antiambiguity feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 having structure or circuitry to positively
    ascertain which one of two adjacent pattern portions is being read when
    close to a boundary between two pattern portions.


CLS 341/8
TXT Real and complementary patterns:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 where the digital pattern carrier has two
    patterns, one of which is the complement of the other.


CLS 341/9
TXT Having combined (e.g., denominational, combination code) coding pattern:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 where the digital pattern has a plurality
    of separate tracks such that the digital output signal obtained is composed
    of several signal parts usually each representing a denominational order of
    the digital representation or an element of a combination code.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for digital pattern reading converters with plural denominationally
    related carriers.


CLS 341/10
TXT Constant distance code:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein successive portions of the digital
    pattern differ only in one bit or element.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are reflected binary codes and grey codes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96+,    for digital constant distance code conversion.


CLS 341/11
TXT Incremental:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 where the digital pattern is such that it
    produces a signal (pulse) on a single terminal for each predetermined
    incremental change of an input.


CLS 341/12
TXT Cathode ray:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 where a beam of electrons is moved relative
    to a pattern in order to convert an analog signal to a digital signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137,    where a cathode ray tube is used as a flying spot optical scanner
    or as an optical display in an analog to or from digital converter.


CLS 341/13
TXT Optical:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 where the digital pattern carrier is read
    by an optical device.

    (1)     Note.  For optical shaft encoders in combination with a photocell
    absent any signal processing circuitry, search Class 250, subclass 231.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137,    for analog to or from digital conversion using optical devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 231 for a photocell shaft encoder,
    subclass 271 for invisible radiant energy coded record readers, subclasses
    555+ for coded record controlled photocell circuits and subclasses 566+ for
    coded record reading optical or prephotocell systems absent any signal
    processing circuitry.

    346,    Recorders, subclasses 225 and 246 through 264 for recording of a
    code disc by scanning of light.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 100+ for
    information retrieval from an optical information carrier.


CLS 341/14
TXT Having optical waveguide:

    Subject matter under subclass 13 which includes an elongated optically
    transparent structure to carry light between the pattern carrier and a
    pattern reading device or light source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    385,    Optical Waveguides, appropriate subclasses for optical fibers or
    waveguides, per se.


CLS 341/15
TXT Magnetic, inductive or capacitive:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 where the digital pattern on the carrier is
    a spatial variation of a magnetic, or electrostatic field, or permeability
    thereof to such a field, and the pattern reading device includes a device
    responsive to such a field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149,    for a digital to analog converter using magnetic components.

    150,    for a digital to analog converter using capacitors.

    171,    for an analog to digital converter using magnetic components.

    172,    for  an analog to digital converter using capacitors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 499+ for magnetic coded record sensors.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 60+ for measurement
    of capacitance.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 39+
    for magnetic recording or reproduction of a digital signal.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 271+ for
    electrostatic capacitor structure.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 59 for
    capacitive recording or reproduction of a digital signal.


CLS 341/16
TXT Brush and contacts or conductive pattern:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 where the indicia on a movable code member
    are formed by conductive elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses
    for switch structure.

    235,    Registers, subclasses 444+, 452 and 453 for electromechanical,
    mechanical and pneumatic coded record sensors respectively.


CLS 341/17
TXT Actuated by physical projection:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 having a code member with projections for
    actuating a force operated switch according to a code to be generated.


CLS 341/20
TXT Bodily actuated code generator:

    Subject matter under the class definition having a control element which an
    operator physically contacts to control the transmission or generation of a
    coded set of pulses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 79+ for a telegraph transmitter; subclasses
    101+ for a telegraph key.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, for a switch or switch
    actuator, absent circuitry.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 231 for an optical mouse.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, appropriate subclasses for a variable
    resistance input controller.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 825.56 for selective
    communications system having a multidigit encoder.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 156+ for input devices used in
    conjunction with a display device.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 709.12
    for a keyboard input for a digital calculator.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 353+, particularly subclasses
    368 and 369 for a manually actuated telephone signalling device (e.g.,
    keypad or dial).

    380,    Cryptography, subclass 52 for a cryptographic transmitter having
    specified keyboard structure.

    463,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 1+, particularly subclasses
    36+, for a code generator or conversion device either combined with a game
    or particularly adapted to serve as an input device for an electronic game.


CLS 341/21
TXT For handicapped user:

    Subject matter under subclass 20 particularly designed for use by a
    physically impaired individual.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 825.19 for selective
    communications or remote control equipment for a handicapped user, and
    subclass 407 for an electrical tactile signalling device.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclass 52 for telephone equipment
    specifically designed for a handicapped user.


CLS 341/22
TXT Including keyboard or keypad:

    Subject matter under subclass 20 including an array of manually actuated
    control elements, each of which is indicative of a code value (i.e.,
    digits).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, appropriate subclasses for a musical instrument having a
    keyboard.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 1+ for a
    multiple circuit control arrangement, such as a keyboard, absent circuitry
    to generate or transmit a code.

    235,    Registers, subclasses 7+ for a cash register having a keyboard;
    subclasses 54, 55 for a voting machine, having a keyboard; subclasses 59-61
    for a mechanical register, having a keyboard; subclass 145 for a mechanical
    keyboard; subclasses 430+ for a record controlled device, having a keyboard.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 825.56 for selective
    communications system having a multidigit encoder.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 168+ for a keyboard actuated
    display.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 709.12
    for a keyboard input for a digital calculator.

    380,    Cryptography, subclass 52 for a cryptographic transmitter having
    specified keyboard structure.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 472+ for typewriter keyboard
    structure.


CLS 341/23
TXT Variable key legends:

    Subject matter under subclass 22 wherein each control element may represent
    a plurality of code values and includes structure to provide an indication
    of the code value of each element.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are overlays and movable legend exhibitors,
    and electrical legend indicators.

    (2)     Note.  A plural legend which is always on a key such as a shifted
    character indication which legend does not change is not in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 173+ for selective displays
    with overlying touch panels wherein the selective display may define a
    keyboard.


CLS 341/24
TXT With error prevention means (e.g., debounce, antichatter):

    Subject matter under subclass 22 including compensation for improper system
    operation or operator actuation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 385+ for the elimination of contact bounce noise
    signals, per se.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery,
    appropriate subclasses for error detection or correction in an electrical
    device of general utility.


CLS 341/25
TXT With rollover feature (i.e., antidouble strike):

    Subject matter under subclass 24 which compensates for simultaneous
    actuation of plural control elements.


CLS 341/26
TXT With particular key scanning feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 22 having a detail of a device which
    sequentially senses the state of the plural control elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825+ for a selective
    scanning device.


CLS 341/27
TXT With audible or tactile indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 22 which gives an indication of key operation
    which may be heard or felt by the operator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 815+ for a visual
    indicator; subclasses 384.1+ for an audible signal; subclasses 407.1+ for
    an electrical tactile indicator.


CLS 341/28
TXT For pictorial or ideographic characters (e.g., design, chinese or japanese
    characters):

    Subject matter under subclass 22 wherein the keys are specifically adapted
    for generating a code corresponding to a design or a pictorial language
    symbol representative of an idea or object rather than a word or sound.

    (1)     Note.  Such a symbol code is often produced by operation of a key
    combination rather than single key.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclass 110 for an oriental language
    typewriter.


CLS 341/29
TXT With variable pulse spacing or grouping:

    Subject matter under subclass 22 in which the duration of or between
    pulses, or the order of diverse types of pulses, is varied.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes pulse permutation devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    178,    for this subject matter not controlled by a keyboard or keypad.


CLS 341/30
TXT For numerical pulse type transmission:

    Subject matter under subclass 22 in which the meaning of the pulse code is
    determined solely by the number of pulses transmitted.

    (1)     Note.  The type of code found in this subclass is known in the art
    as the numerical pulse type.

    (2)     Note.  The pulses may, but need not, be identical.


CLS 341/31
TXT Photoelectric actuation:

    Subject matter under subclass 22 in which the operation of a control
    element is sensed by an electrical light sensor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, appropriate subclasses for a photoelectric switch.


CLS 341/32
TXT Magnetic or inductive actuation:

    Subject matter under subclass 22 in which the operation of a control
    element is sensed by a magnetic field responsive sensor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 205+ for a magnetically operated switch, per se.


CLS 341/33
TXT Capacitive actuation:

    Subject matter under subclass 22 in which the operation of a control
    element is sensed by a capacitive sensor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 600 for a
    capacitive switch, absent circuitry.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 112+
    for a capacitive device controlled switching circuit.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 287+ for a
    mechanically variable capacitor.


CLS 341/34
TXT Pressure sensitive actuation:

    Subject matter under subclass 22 in which the operation of a control
    element is sensed by a sensor responsive to an applied mechanical force.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses
    for a force or pressure actuated switch, per se.


CLS 341/35
TXT With rotary dial:

    Subject matter under subclass 20 including a control element adapted for
    rotational motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 353+, particularly subclasses
    362-368 for a telephone dial, or a dial mounting on a telephone set.


CLS 341/50
TXT DIGITAL CODE TO DIGITAL CODE CONVERTERS:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising means whereby a system
    of digital signals representing information is changed to a different
    system of digital signals representing the same information.


CLS 341/51
TXT Adaptive coding:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 for converting digital signals to or from
    other digital signals wherein the coding is automatically modified during
    the coding process.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 261.2 for adaptive or predictive run length
    encoding of a facsimile signal.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 148+
    for adaptive control systems.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 465+ for adaptive multiplex
    communications systems.


CLS 341/52
TXT To or from particular bit symbol:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 for converting digital signals, where
    certain types of wave forms are used to represent zeros and ones, to other
    digital signals where different wave forms are used to represent zeros and
    ones.


CLS 341/53
TXT Bit represented by pulse width:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 where specific pulse widths are used to
    represent the signal states of the digital signals.


CLS 341/54
TXT Bit represented by discrete frequency:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 where different specific frequencies are
    used to represent the signal states of the digital signals.


CLS 341/55
TXT Substituting specified bit combinations for other prescribed bit
    combinations:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 for converting digitally encoded signals
    to other digitally encoded signals by substituting one combination of bits
    for another combination of bits.


CLS 341/56
TXT To or from multilevel codes:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 for converting to or from digital signals
    in which each bit of one of the digital signals can be one of three or more
    signal states.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is not intended to include subject matter
    where one of the states of the digital signals is used only for framing or
    synchronizing purposes.


CLS 341/57
TXT Binary to or from ternary:

    Subject matter under subclass 56 for converting digital signals where each
    bit may have one of two stable states to or from digital signals where each
    bit may have one of three stable states.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is not intended to include subject matter
    where the third state of the digital signals is used only for framing or
    synchronizing purposes.


CLS 341/58
TXT To or from minimum d.c level codes:

    Subject matter subclass 50 for converting digital signals to or from other
    digital signals wherein the coding is arranged to minimize the direct
    current component present in the converted signal.


CLS 341/59
TXT To or from run length limited codes:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 for converting to or from codes where the
    number of successive ones or zeros occurring in the code is constrained not
    to exceed a predetermined limit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     for conversion to or from bit count codes.


CLS 341/60
TXT To or from packed format:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 for converting to or from codes comprising
    more than one shorter data words so that they can be handled by a machine
    component designed for longer data words.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95,     for digital code converters where the byte length is changed.


CLS 341/61
TXT Data rate conversion:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 for changing the number of bits per unit
    of time during which the bits comprising a digital signal are presented.


CLS 341/62
TXT BCD (binary-coded-decimal) to or from decimal:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 for converting between digital signals
    where each digit of a number expressed in a system having a base of ten is
    individually coded as a number having a base of two, and digital signals
    where each digit of a decimal number is represented by a "one" in an
    appropriate one of ten bit positions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84      and 85, for binary coded decimal conversion to or from binary.


CLS 341/63
TXT To or from bit count codes:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 for converting digital signals to or from
    other digital signals by counting the number of zeros and or ones in the
    signal and substituting a digital indication of that count in place of the
    actual bits (e.g., run length codes).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59,     for converting to or from run length limited codes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 261.1 for run length encoding in a facimile
    system.


CLS 341/64
TXT To or from number of pulses:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 for converting digital signals to or from
    other digital signals wherein the number of discrete pulses is
    representative of the coded information.


CLS 341/65
TXT To or from huffman codes:

    Subject matter under subclass 64 for converting coded digital signals to or
    from other coded digital signals representing the same information, where
    the various code words are generated based on the probability of character
    or symbol occurrence.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for conversion to or from codes based on probability in general.


CLS 341/66
TXT To or from morse code:

    Subject matter under subclass 64 where each character is represented by one
    or more bits which may have two different lengths, the particular code
    assigned to each character being in accordance with the coding system known
     as Morse code.


CLS 341/67
TXT To or from variable length codes:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 for converting digital signals to or from
    other digital signals wherein the words are not all of the same bit length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59,     for converting to or from run length limited codes.


CLS 341/68
TXT To or from nrz (nonreturn-to-zero) codes:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 for converting digital signals to or from
    a digital signal waveform wherein the signal levels do not return to zero
    between successive bit periods.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 41 for
    processing of a NRZ signal in a dynamic magnetic recording or retrieval
    system.


CLS 341/69
TXT Return-to-zero to or from nrz (nonreturn-to-zero) codes:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 for converting digital signals encoded so
    that the signal returns to zero between successive bits to digital signals
    wherein the signal does not return to zero between successive bits or vice
    versa.


CLS 341/70
TXT To or from bi-phase level code (e.g., split phase code, manchester code):

    Subject matter under subclass 68 for converting digital signals to or from
    other digital signals wherein a one is encoded as a transition from a high
    to a low level during the middle of a bit cella nd a zero is encoded as a
    transition from a low to a high level during the middle of a bit cell or
    where a zero is encoded as a transition from a high to a low level during
    the middle of a bit cell and a one is encoded as a transition from a low to
    a high level during the middle of a bit cell.


CLS 341/71
TXT To or from bi-phase space or mark codes (e.g., double frequency code, fm
    code):

    Subject matter  under subclass 68 for converting digital signals to or from
    other digital signals wherein there is a transition at the beginning of
    every bit cell and (a) a one is no second transition and a zero is a second
    transition half a bit period later, or (b) a one is a second transition
    half a bit period later and a zero is no second transition.


CLS 341/72
TXT To or from delay modulation code (e.g., miller code, three frequency code,
    mfm code):

    Subject matter under subclass 68 for converting digital signals to or from
    other digital signals wherein a one is encoded as a transition in the
    middle of a bit cell and a zero is encoded as a transition at the start of
    the bit cell except there is no transition after a one.


CLS 341/73
TXT To or from coded mark inversion:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 where data is represented by a code where
    zerosare represented by a 01 during each bit cell and ones are represented
    by 11 or 00 alternately during each bit cell, Also called binary coded
    alternate mark inversion.

    (1)     Note.  See U.S. Patent No. 4,325,053 for an example.


CLS 341/74
TXT To or from double density code:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 for converting digital signals to or from
    other digital signals where a one is a transition at the end of a bit
    period and a zero is a transition at the center of a bit period, except
    when a zero follows a one, in which case there is no transition in the bit
    period.


CLS 341/75
TXT To or from nonlinear codes:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 for converting digital signals to or from
    other digital signals such that the information represented by the latter
    digital signals are a nonlinear function of the information represented by
    the former digital signals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for nonlinear pattern reading conversion.

    108,    for nonlinear reversible analog to digital conversion.

    138+,   for nonlinear analog to or from digital conversion.


CLS 341/76
TXT To or from differential codes:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 for converting digital signals to or from
    other digital signals wherein each signal is determined as the result of a
    difference or comparison between the current value of the signal and prior
    values of the signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143,    for analog to or from digital differential encoding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 244+ for communication
    systems using differential codes.

    704,    Data Processing:  Speech Signal Processing, Linguistics, Language
    Translation, and Audio Compression/Decompression, subclasses 500+ for
    differential encoding of audio signals.


CLS 341/77
TXT To or from delta modulation codes:

    Subject matter under subclass 76 where the output signal is a series of one
    bit words representing the difference between the current input signal and
    the integral value of all prior input signals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 247+ for communication
    systems using delta modulation codes.


CLS 341/78
TXT Programmable structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 where the code converter contains
    apparatus which is operator changeable to modify the conversion process.


CLS 341/79
TXT Tree structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 where interconnections of switches have a
    divergent branching arrangement with each preceding switch output connected
    to a plurality of succeeding switches or vice versa.



    For example:



    (1)     Note.  The switches may comprise any type of switch which is
    suitable for switching electric current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148,    for a digital to analog converter with a switching tree.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 68 for tree
    structure in a static storage and retrieval system.


CLS 341/80
TXT To or from fibonacci codes:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 for converting to or from codes wherein
    the relative weighing assigned to each bit of the code word is equal to the
    sum of the weights of the adjacent two bits of lesser significance.


CLS 341/81
TXT To or from interleaved format:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 for converting to or from a data format
    wherein each data word as presented contains bits from more than one code
    word.


CLS 341/82
TXT To or from mixed code formats:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 for converting digital signals to or from
    other digital signals wherein single words are encoded using two or more
    different codes.


CLS 341/83
TXT To or from mixed base codes:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 for converting digital signals to or from
    other digital signals where the coding involves two or more different bases.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for binary coded decimal to or from decimal conversion.


CLS 341/84
TXT Binary to bcd (binary-coded-decimal):

    Subject matter under subclass 83 for converting from digital signals
    representing numbers coded in a system having a base of two to digital
    signals where each digit of these numbers is individually coded in a system
    having a base of two.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for binary coded decimal to or from decimal conversion.

    104,    for binary to decimal conversion.


CLS 341/85
TXT BCD (binary coded decimal) to binary:

    Subject matter under subclass 83 for converting from digital signals where
    each digit of a number having a base of ten is encoded using a base of two
    to digital signals where the number as a whole is coded in a system having
    a base of two.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for binary coded decimal to or from decimal conversion.

    105,    for decimal to binary conversion.


CLS 341/86
TXT Generator runs until new code is generated:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 where the conversion is accomplished by a
    code generator which is allowed to operate until it generates the new code
    equivalent of the old code word sought to be converted.


CLS 341/87
TXT Unnecessary data suppression:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 for converting digital signals to a form
    wherein signals representing data which are not essential to the desired
    information are eliminated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclasses
    37.01-46 for redundant error detecting or correcting encoding or decoding.


CLS 341/88
TXT Multiple conversions using same converter:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 where, in the same code converter, more
    than one code conversion takes place.


CLS 341/89
TXT Reversible converters:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 comprising converters which convert
    digital signals in one code to digital signals in another code and also
    convert the latter digital signals back to the first digital signals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for reversible analog to digital converters.


CLS 341/90
TXT To or from alphanumeric code formats:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 for converting digital signals to or from
    other digital signals which are encoded so that numerals as well as letters
    of the alphabet and special symbols may be represented.


CLS 341/91
TXT To or from baudot code:

    Subject matter under subclass 90 for converting digital signals to or from
    other digital signals which are coded in Baudot code.

    (1)     Note.  Baudot code is a code having five bit positions.  Two of the
    thirty-two possible codes are reserved for a "LETTERS" and "FIGURES" shift
    command.  If the "LETTERS" shift command is actuated the remaining thirty
    codes are  used to indicate letters and machine commands.  If the "FIGURES"
    shift command is actuated the same thirty codes are used to indicate
    numbers, punctuation marks and machine commands.


CLS 341/92
TXT To or from hollerith code:

    Subject matter under subclass 90 for converting digital signals to or from
    other digital signals which are coded in Hollerith code.

    (1)     Note.  Hollerith code is used on IBM punched cards where each
    character on the card is represented by holes in a vertical column.  There
    are eighty vertical columns each having twelve possible hole positions.  In
    accordance with the Hollerith code characters are represented one, two, or
    three holes in particular positions in the vertical columns.


CLS 341/93
TXT Complementers:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 for converting digital signals to or from
    other digital signals which are derivable from a specified number by
    subtracting it from a second specified number.


CLS 341/94
TXT With error detection or correction:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 with means inherent in the converter for
    sensing when the converter is producing an incorrect result and/or
    correcting the result.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery,
    appropriate subclasses for error detection and correction  in general.


CLS 341/95
TXT Byte length changed:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 for converting digital signals of one set
    word length to signals of another set word length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for conversion to or from a pack format.


CLS 341/96
TXT To or from constant distance codes:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 for converting digital signals to or from
    other digital signals encoded in a format so that in going from any
    particular numerical value to an immediately adjacent numerical value a
    constant number of bit positions change state.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for digital pattern reading type converters for constant distance
    codes.


CLS 341/97
TXT Gray to binary:

    Subject matter under subclass 96 for converting from a unit distance code
    as shown in the chart below to a code where numbers are expressed in a
    system having a base of two.

    Binary  Gray code



    0000    0000

    0001    0001

    0010    0011

    0011    0010

    0100    0110

    0101    0111

    0110    0101

    0111    0100

    1000    1100

    1001    1101

    1010    1111

    1011    1110

    1100    1010

    1101    1011

    1110    1001

    1111    1000

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98,     for binary to Gray code conversion.


CLS 341/98
TXT Binary to gray:

    Subject matter under subclass 96 for converting from a code where numbers
    are expressed in a system having a base of two to a unit distance code
    where decimal values are assigned as shown in the chart below for the first
    15 words.

    Binary  Gray code



    0000    0000

    0001    0001

    0010    0011

    0011    0010

    0100    0110

    0101    0111

    0110    0101

    0111    0100

    1000    1100

    1001    1101

    1010    1111

    1011    1110

    1100    1010

    1101    1011

    1110    1001

    1111    1000

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97,     for Gray to binary code conversion.


CLS 341/99
TXT To or from display device codes:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 for converting digital signals to or from
    other digital signals which are arranged in codes designed to activate
    particular devices for displaying the value of the coded signal.


CLS 341/100
TXT Serial to parallel:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 for converting digital signals wherein the
    bits of each word are presented one bit at a time in sequence to digital
    signals where all bits of a word are presented simultaneously.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    for parallel to serial conversion.


CLS 341/101
TXT Parallel to serial:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 for converting digital signals where all
    bits of a word are presented simultaneously to digital signals wherein the
    bits of each word are presented one bit at a time in sequence.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    for serial to parallel conversion.


CLS 341/102
TXT To or from "N" out of "M" codes:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 for converting digital signals to or from
    other digital signals which have a given number of bit positions (M) and
    where, in each of the code words, the same number of bit positions (N)
    contain a one.


CLS 341/103
TXT "N" out of  "M" to "X" out of  "Y":

    Subject matter under subclass 102 for converting digital signals from one
    "N" out of  "M" code to another "N" out of  "M" code where the values of N
    and/or M are different.


CLS 341/104
TXT Binary to decimal:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 for converting digital signals which
    represent a number in a system having a base of two to signals where each
    digit of a number expressed in a system having a base ten is represented by
    a "one" in an appropriate one of the ten bit positions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for binary to or from ternary conversion.

    62,     for decimal to or from binary coded decimal conversion.

    84      and 85, for binary to or from binary coded decimal conversion.

    105,    for decimal to binary conversion.


CLS 341/105
TXT Decimal to binary:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 for converting digital signals, where each
    digit of a number expressed in a system having a base of ten is represented
    by a "one" in an appropriate one of the ten bit positions, to digital
    signals which represent the number in a system having a base two.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for binary to or from ternary conversion.

    62,     for decimal to or from binary coded decimal conversion.

    84      and 85, for binary to or from binary coded decimal coded decimal
    conversion.

    104,    for binary to decimal conversion.


CLS 341/106
TXT Coding by table look-up techniques:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 for converting words coded according to a
    first system to words coded according to a second system by selecting from
    storage the word in the second system corresponding to the word in the
    first system.


CLS 341/107
TXT To or from code based on probability:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 for converting coded digital signals
    representing letters to or from other coded digital signals representing
    the same letters where, the various code words are generated based on the
    statistical likelihood of character or symbol occurrence.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109,    for conversions based on stochastic techniques.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 554 for
    computations related to random data.


CLS 341/108
TXT REVERSIBLE ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTERS:

    Subject matter under the class definition where the converter is capable of
    operating either as an analog to digital converter or as a digital to
    analog converter.

    (1)     Note.  The analog to digital and digital to analog conversions can
    occur sequentially or simultaneously.

    (2)     Note.  Reversible converters are typically nonlinear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89,     for reversible digital code converters.


CLS 341/109
TXT STOCHASTIC TECHNIQUES:

    Subject matter under the class definition where the code conversion is
    based on random generation of signals or codes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for digital conversion to or from a code based on probability.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 554 for
    computations related to random data.


CLS 341/110
TXT ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERSION FOLLOWED BY DIGITAL TO ANALOG CONVERSION:

    Subject matter under the class definition where an analog to digital
    conversion is followed by a digital to analog conversion.

    (1)     Note.  There usually is a signal processing such that the output
    analog signal differs from the input signal in some parameter (e.g., delay,
    bandwidth).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for multiple digital code conversions using the same converter.

    89,     for reversible digital code converters.

    108,    for reversible analog to digital converters.


CLS 341/111
TXT PHASE OR TIME OF PHASE CHANGE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the analog quantity
    converted is the phase or the time of phase change of a signal.


CLS 341/112
TXT Synchro or resolver signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 111 including a motorlike device having a
    stator and a rotor which transforms an angular-position input into variable
    phase output or vice versa, or a simulation thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 10+ for
    dynamoelectric motors or generators.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    synchro or resolver systems.


CLS 341/113
TXT Coarse and fine:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 comprising two or more distinct and
    related conversions one of which has an output comprising the more
    significant bits of the digital signal and the other of which has an output
    comprising the less significant bits of the digital signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for coarse and fine conversion in a pattern reading type converter.

    145,    for coarse and fine conversions in a digital to analog conversion.

    156,    for coarse and fine conversions in an analog to digital conversion.


CLS 341/114
TXT Control system:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 where there is a comparison between the
    desired position of an object and its actual position as measured and there
    is a control means which responds to the difference in these positions and
    attempts to minimize this difference.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142,    for an analog to or from digital converter as part of a control
    system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 518+ for miscellaneous control systems.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825+ for selective control
    systems.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 130+
    for control systems using computers.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 2 for counters used in control systems.


CLS 341/115
TXT Converter compensation:

    Subject matter under the subclass 112 comprising means, inherent in the
    converter, for automatically correcting for undesired changes in the
    parameters controlling converter operation and means for determining or
    manually correcting or setting the operating conditions of the converter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94,     for digital code conversion with error detection or correction.

    118,    for converter compensation in general.

    120,    for conversion with calibration or testing.


CLS 341/116
TXT Analog resolver or synchro signal to digital signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 for converting from an angular position
    of a resolver or synchro rotor relative to a reference position to a
    digital signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for a digital to synchro signal converter.


CLS 341/117
TXT Digital signal to analog resolver or synchro signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 for converting from a digital input to
    analog values which represent the angular position of a resolver or synchro
    rotor relative to a reference position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    for a resolver or synchro to digital converter.


CLS 341/118
TXT CONVERTER COMPENSATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising means, inherent in a
    converter, for automatically correcting for undesired changes in the
    parameters controlling converter operation or means for determining and
    manually correcting or setting the operating conditions of the converter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94,     for digital code conversion with error detection or correction.

    115,    for compensation in a synchro/resolver to or from digital converter.

    120,    for conversion with calibration or testing.


CLS 341/119
TXT Temperature compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 comprising means for compensating for
    drift due to the effects of heat.


CLS 341/120
TXT CONVERTER CALIBRATION OR TESTING:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising means for evaluation
    of a converter's output for known input values, followed by adjustments for
    obtaining a desired input-output relation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94,     for digital code conversion with error detection or correction.

    115,    for converter compensation in a synchro or resolver converter.

    118,    for data conversion with compensation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for
    electrical testing in general.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery,
    appropriate subclasses for diagnostic testing in general.


CLS 341/121
TXT Trimming control circuits:

    Subject matter under subclass 120 wherein auxiliary circuits are provided
    by means of which the converter is altered to be within specifications.


CLS 341/122
TXT SAMPLE AND HOLD:

    Subject matter under the class definition where the value of the input to
    the converter is determined only at discrete time intervals and the value
    so determined is kept constant during the conversion.

    (1)     Note.  The sample and hold operation is often intermediate to a
    conversion to a time interval.


CLS 341/123
TXT Having variable sampling rate:

    Subject matter under subclass 122 where the time intervals between the
    determinations of the value of the input to the converter are not constant.


CLS 341/124
TXT Sampled and held input signal with linear return to datum:

    Subject matter under subclass 122 where the sampled and held signal is
    returned linearly to a reference level.


CLS 341/125
TXT Sampled and held input signal with nonlinear return to datum:

    Subject matter under subclass 122 where the sampled and held signal is
    returned nonlinearly to a reference level.


CLS 341/126
TXT ANALOG TO OR FROM DIGITAL CONVERSION:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein analog information
    represented by the amplitude of an electrical signal, which signal can have
    an infinite number of values within a given range is converted to or from a
    coded digital signal representing the same information.


CLS 341/127
TXT Bipolar:

    Subject matter under subclass 126 where the analog signal has appreciable
    amplitude in both directions from a reference level.


CLS 341/128
TXT Dual slope analog to digital converter:

    Subject matter under subclass 127 where the input analog signal is
    integrated for a fixed time interval following which there is a linear
    return of the integrated signal to a reference level by means of an applied
    signal; the order of application of the two  signals may be reversed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    for a nonbipolar dual slope analog to digital converter.


CLS 341/129
TXT Plural slope analog to digital converter:

    Subject matter under subclass 127 where the input analog signal is
    integrated for a fixed time interval following which there is a nonlinear
    return of the integrated signal to a reference level by means of applied
    plural signals or by changing the frequency of a clock signal which is
    being counted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168,    for a nonbipolar plural slope analog to digital converter.


CLS 341/130
TXT Difunction code as output:

    Subject matter under subclass 126 where each of two signal levels is
    assigned a specific numerical value and any analog value between these two
    levels is represented by the relative number of occurrences of pulses at
    each of the two levels.


CLS 341/131
TXT Increasing converter resolution (e.g., dithering):

    Subject matter under subclass 126 where, from a system having a quantizing
    interval corresponding to a nominally n-bit system, one obtains a system
    having an n+1 or greater bit system due to the application of an
    oscillating or periodic signal to the input signal.


CLS 341/132
TXT Detecting analog signal peak:

    Subject matter under subclass 126 including means whereby the maximum or
    minimum point of the analog signal waveform is detected.


CLS 341/133
TXT With particular solid state devices (e.g., gunn effect device, josephson
    device, drift transistor, using solid state active devices as impedances):

    Subject matter under subclass 126 wherein there are used special
    transistors other than ordinary transistors or wherein solid state devices
    are used to perform special functions they do not commonly perform.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses for active solid-state devices, per se.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous solid-state device
    circuits and systems.


CLS 341/134
TXT Integrated injection logic:

    Subject matter under subclass 133 having a complementary transistor pair
    merged on the same substrate as an integrated circuit device, incorporating
    a vertical, inverse mode NPN (PNP) transistor, which can have isolated
    multicollector regions, and a PNP (NPN) lateral transistor, which serves as
    a current injector to inject charge current directly into the NPN (PNP)
    transistor base.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses, including subclasses 555, 556, and 574-576 for
    integrated injection logic devices.

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 70 and 100 for IIL
    digital logic circuits.


CLS 341/135
TXT Current mirror:

    Subject matter under subclass 133 having a circuit with parallel elements
    wherein the current flowing through one element exactly reflects that
    flowing in the other element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 257 and 288 for current mirror amplifiers.


CLS 341/136
TXT Field effect transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 133 using a semiconductor device in which the
    resistance between two terminals, the source and the drain, is switched by
    a voltage applied to the third terminal, the gate, and the said resistance
    is determined by device geometry.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses, including subclasses 213-413 for field effect
    devices.

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, appropriate subclasses for FET
    logic circuits.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous FET circuits.


CLS 341/137
TXT Using optical device, (e.g., fiber optics, cathode ray tubes):

    Subject matter under subclass 126 wherein the analog to or from digital
    conversion is achieved using devices which generate, detect or transmit
    light (e.g., photoelectric cells, photomultipliers, Kerr cells, light
    relays, electroluminescent devices, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13+,    for a digital pattern reading type converter using optical devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 555+ for coded record controlled
    photocell circuits and subclasses 566+ for coded record reading optical or
    prephotocell systems absent any signal processing circuitry.


CLS 341/138
TXT Nonlinear:

    Subject matter under subclass 126 where the output does not vary in direct
    proportion to the input.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for a nonlinear digital pattern reading type converter.

    75,     for a digital to digital code converter for converting to or from
    nonlinear codes.

    108,    for a nonlinear reversible analog to digital converter.


CLS 341/139
TXT Automatic control for increasing converter range (e.g., gain ranging,
    automatic gain control):

    Subject matter under subclass 138 comprising automatic means particularly
    adapted for increasing the range of signal amplitudes which can be handled
    by the converter.


CLS 341/140
TXT Linearization (e.g., nonlinear transfer characteristic compensates for
    nonlinear transducer):

    Subject matter under subclass 138 wherein nonlinear code conversion is used
    to provide an output which varies in direct proportion to the input.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 171 for linearization in
    temperature measuring.


CLS 341/141
TXT Multiplex:

    Subject matter under subclass 126 where a single converter is used to
    convert signals received on different inputs representing distinct data in
    time division multiplex or where a converter produces a plurality of
    different distinct simultaneous outputs representing differing independent
    data.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for multiplex
    communications in general.


CLS 341/142
TXT Converter is part of control loop:

    Subject matter under subclass 126 where there is a comparison between the
    desired position of an object and its actual position and there is a
    control means which responds to the difference in these positions and
    attempts to minimize this difference.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for synchro or resolver signal coersion to or from digital signal
    in control systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 518+ for miscellaneous control systems.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825+ for selective control
    systems.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 130+
    for control systems using computers.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 2 for counters used in control systems.


CLS 341/143
TXT Differential encoder and/or decoder (e.g., delta modulation, differential
    pulse code modulation):

    Subject matter under subclass 126 wherein the analog signal which is to be
    encoded or decoded depends on the difference between a given analog signal
    and the analog signal previously encoded or decoded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76,     for digital to digital code converters where one of the codes is a
    differential code.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 244+ for communication
    systems using differential codes.

    704, Data Processing:  Speech Signal Processing, Linguistics, Language
    Translation, and Audio Compression/Decompression, subclasses 500+ for
    differential encoding of audio signals.


CLS 341/144
TXT Digital to analog conversion:

    Subject matter under subclass 126 wherein information represented by a
    coded digital signal is converted to a form wherein the information is
    contained in the amplitude of an electrical signal.


CLS 341/145
TXT Coarse and fine conversions:

    Subject matter under subclass 144 comprising two or more distinct but
    related conversions one of which responds to the more significant bits of
    the digital signal and the other of which responds to the less significant
    bits of the digital signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for  coarse and fine conversion in a pattern reading type converter.

    113,    for coarse and fine conversions in a synchro or resolver to or from
    digital converter.

    156,    for analog to digital coarse and fine conversion.


CLS 341/146
TXT Serial conversion:

    Subject matter under subclass 144 where the conversion occurs as a series
    of sequential conversions made in serially connected stages the output of a
    given stage being dependent on the results of the preceding stage.


CLS 341/147
TXT Function generator:

    Subject matter under subclass 144 wherein a series of digital signals is
    converted to a series of discrete analog values, these values being a
    particular mathematical function of the input digital signals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 607+,
    718.01+, and 851+ for function generators in computing.


CLS 341/148
TXT Tree structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 144 where interconnections of switches have a
    divergent branching arrangement with each preceding switch output connected
    to a plurality of succeeding switches or vice versa.

    For example:



    (1)     Note.  The switches may comprise any type of switch which is
    suitable for switching electric current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     for a digital to digital code converter having a switching tree.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 68 for tree
    structure in a static storage and retrieval system.


CLS 341/149
TXT Using  magnetic or cryogenic components:

    Subject matter under subclass 144 wherein particular magnetic components or
    components used at very low temperatures near absolute zero form an
    essential part of a digital to analog conversion.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are ordinary transformers used
    in power supplies or for signal coupling or inductances use for filtering
    or decoupling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for a digital pattern reading type converter having a magnetically
    read pattern.

    171,    for an analog to digital or analog to digital combined with a
    digital to analog converter having magnetic or cryogenic components.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 499+ for magnetic coded record sensors.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 401+
    for nonlinear saturable reactor systems.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 39+
    for magnetic recording or reproduction of a digital signal.


CLS 341/150
TXT Using charge coupled devices or switched capacitances:

    Subject matter under subclass 144 where there is a digital to analog
    converter using devices or circuits through which there is a sequential
    transfer of electric charges.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for a digital pattern reading converter having a capacitive pattern.

    172,    for an analog to digital converter using charged coupled devices or
    switched capacitances.


CLS 341/151
TXT Analog output represents a displacement or force:

    Subject matter under subclass 144 where the analog output of the converter
    represents a change in position of an object or a force applied to an
    object.


CLS 341/152
TXT With intermediate conversion of digital value to time interval:

    Subject matter under subclass 144 wherein the input digital signal is
    converted to intermediate signals which are a measure of a time interval or
    a series of intervals representative of the input digital signals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166,    for analog to digital converters with intermediate conversion of an
    input analog signal to a time interval.


CLS 341/153
TXT Using weighted impedances:

    Subject matter under subclass 144 where the conversion utilizes a network
    comprising a series of impedances each of which has a value such that the
    current through it is representative of the value of a particular bit
    position of the digital input signal and a summing circuit for adding the
    currents flowing through the impedances to develop a signal representative
    of the digital input signal.


CLS 341/154
TXT Using ladder network:

    Subject matter under subclass 144 where the conversion utilizes an
    impedance network (typically an R\2R ladder network) having a number of
    nodes equal to the number of bits in the digital signal, each node being
    selectively fed with equal currents in response to the digital signals and
    thereby outputting an electrical signal representative of the digital input
    signal.


CLS 341/155
TXT Analog to digital conversion:

    Subject matter under the subclass 126 wherein analog information
    represented by a parameter of an electrical signal, which signal can have
    an infinite number of values within a given range, is converted to a coded
    digital signal representing the same information.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of a parameter of a signal are amplitude or
    frequency.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for pattern reading type analog to digital conversion.

    111+,   for conversion of the phase or time of phase change of a signal to
    a coded digital signal.

    118+,   for compensation of an analog to digital converter.

    120+,   for testing or calibrating an analog to digital converter.

    122+,   for analog to digital converters where an input analog signal is
    sampled and held.

    143,    for analog to or from differential code conversion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 870.21 for analog to digital
    function conversion in telemetry.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 242+ for pulse code
    modulation communication systems.

    704,    Data Processing:  Speech Signal Processing, Linguistics, Language
    Translation, and Audio Compression/Decompression, subclasses 200+, 500+,
    and 503+ for audio and speech-to-digital conversion.


CLS 341/156
TXT Coarse and fine conversions:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 comprising two or more distinct but
    related conversions one of which produces the more significant bits of the
    digital signal and the other of which produces the less significant bits of
    the digital signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for coarse and fine conversion in a pattern reading type converter.

    113,    for coarse and fine conversions in a synchro or resolver to or from
    digital converter.

    145,    for coarse and fine conversions in a digital to analog converter.


CLS 341/157
TXT Intermediate conversion to frequency or number of pulses:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 wherein the input analog signal is
    converted to a signal the frequency of which is proportional to the value
    of the input signal or is converted to a pulse signal the number of pulses
    of which is proportional to the value of the input signal.


CLS 341/158
TXT Analog input compared with static reference:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 in which the analog input signal is
    compared with one or more nonvarying analog reference values.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 146.2 for digital comparitors
    in general.


CLS 341/159
TXT Parallel type:

    Subject matter under subclass 158 where an analog value is simultaneously
    compared with a number of different reference values.


CLS 341/160
TXT Including priority encoder:

    Subject matter under subclass 159 where an encoder, in which an input
    analog signal is compared with a plurality of reference values, has an
    output which depends on the largest reference value which the input signal
    is greater than.


CLS 341/161
TXT Acting sequentially:

    Subject matter under subclass 158 where the conversion occurs as a result
    of sequential comparisons made in serially connected stages and during
    which the particular analog value being converted is not changed.


CLS 341/162
TXT Serial conversions with change in signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 158 where the conversion occurs as a result
    of sequential comparisons made in serially connected stages and during
    which the particular analog value being converted is changed.


CLS 341/163
TXT Recirculating:

    Subject matter under subclass 158 wherein the analog signal is compared
    with a fixed reference signal and, depending on their relative magnitudes,
    either the analog signal itself or the difference between the analog signal
    and the reference signal is amplified and fed back for comparison with the
    same reference value.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, appropriate subclasses for recirculating registers.


CLS 341/164
TXT Single comparator and counter:

    Subject matter under subclass 158 having one comparator and a counter.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass will include many successive approximation
    types of analog to digital converters as well as tracking types of analog
    to digital converters employing reversible counters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, appropriate subclasses for electrical counters.


CLS 341/165
TXT Single comparator and digital storage:

    Subject matter under subclass 158 having one comparator and means for
    storing a digital signal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass will include many successive approximation
    types of analog to digital converters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclasses
    for digital signal storage.


CLS 341/166
TXT Intermediate conversion to time interval:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 where the analog input signal is
    converted to a signal where the analog value is represented by some time
    interval and the latter signal is digitized or coded by counting during
    said interval.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    for a digital to analog converter with an intermediate conversion
    of the digital signal to a time interval.


CLS 341/167
TXT Dual slope:

    Subject matter under subclass 166 wherein the input analog signal is
    integrated for a fixed time interval following which there is a linear
    return of the integrated signal to the datum level by means of an applied
    reference signal; the order of application of the two signals may be
    reversed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128,    for  bipolar dual slope conversion.


CLS 341/168
TXT Plural slope:

    Subject matter under subclass 166 wherein the input analog signal is
    integrated for a fixed time interval following which there is a nonlinear
    return to the datum level by means of applied plural reference signals or
    by changing the frequency of a clock signal which is being counted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129,    for bipolar plural slope conversion.


CLS 341/169
TXT Input signal compared with linear ramp:

    Subject matter under subclass 166 where the input analog signal is compared
    with a linearly increasing signal.

    (1)     Note.  The latter includes a stepped waveform produced by a digital
    to analog converter responsive to a counter driven to produce sawtooth or
    triangular waveforms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170,    for conversion with an input signal compared with a nonlinear ramp.


CLS 341/170
TXT Input signal compared with nonlinear ramp:

    Subject matter under subclass 166 where the input analog signal is compared
    with a signal increasing in a nonlinear manner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169,    for conversion where an input signal is compared with a linear ramp.


CLS 341/171
TXT Using magnetic or cryogenic components:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 wherein particular magnetic components or
    components used at very low temperatures near absolute zero form an
    essential part of an analog to digital conversion.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are ordinary transformers used
    in power supplies or for signal coupling or inductances used for filtering
    or decoupling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for a digital pattern reading type converter having a magnetically
    read pattern.

    149,    for a digital to analog or an analog to digital combined with a
    digital to analog converter having magnetic or cryogenic components.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 499+ for magnetic coded record sensors.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 401+
    for nonlinear saturable reactor systems.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 39+
    for magnetic recording or reproduction of a digital signal.


CLS 341/172
TXT Using charge transfer devices (e.g., charge coupled devices, charge
    transfer by switched capacitances):

    Subject matter under subclass 155 where there is an analog to digital
    converter using devices or circuits through which there is a sequential
    transfer of electric charges.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for a digital pattern reading converter having a capacitive pattern.

    150,    for digital to analog converters using charge transfer devices.


CLS 341/173
TXT Code generator or transmitter:

    Subject matter under the class definition for originating or emitting a
    coded set of pulses.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this and indented subclasses are wireless
    transmitters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 79+ for a telegraph transmitter; subclasses
    101+ for a telegraph key.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, for a switch or switch
    actuator, absent circuitry.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825+ for a selective code
    transmitter and receiver combined, or a selective code receiver.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 295+ for transmission
    of a digital signal having arbitrary message content.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 353+, particularly subclasses
    368 and 369 for a manually actuated telephone signalling device (e.g.,
    keypad or dial).

    380,    Cryptography, appropriate subclasses for a cryptographic code
    transmitter, particularly subclasses 21 and 44+, respectively, for
    transmission, and generation, of a cryptographic key code.


CLS 341/174
TXT Plural transmitters:

    Subject matter under subclass 173 including multiple pulse transmitters for
    sending output along a common channel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for plural
    transmitters with outputs multiplexed along a common channel.


CLS 341/175
TXT With code display at transmitter:

    Subject matter under subclass 173 including a visual indication of the
    contents of the pulse code at the point of code origination.


CLS 341/176
TXT Transmitter for remote control signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 173 in which the transmitter produces a
    signal specifically described for control of a remotely located device.

    (1)     Note.  Some remote control aspect of the transmitter must be
    mentioned.

    (2)     Note.  A remote control transmitter specific to a particular art
    device is classifed with the art device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20+,    for a remote control transmitter including a body contact actuating
    element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825+ for a remote control
    system or receiver.

    348,    Television, subclasses 731+ and 734 for remote control transmitter
    for a television receiver.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclass 454 for remote control of a
    wheeled toy.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 151.1+ and 352+ for a remote control
    transmitter for a radio receiver.


CLS 341/177
TXT Producing different pulse frequencies:

    Subject matter under subclass 173 which generates coded pulses of different
    frequencies and in which the code is represented by the pulse frequency.


CLS 341/178
TXT With variable pulse spacing and grouping:

    Subject matter under subclass 173 in which the duration of or between
    pulses, or the order of diverse types of pulses, is varied.

    (1)     Note.  Pulse permutation devices are classified in this and
    indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     for this subject matter controlled by a keyboard or keypad.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 237+ for a pulse code
    modulating message transmitter.


CLS 341/179
TXT Plural pulse shapes:

    Subject matter under subclass 178 in which pulses of different shapes are
    utilized.


CLS 341/180
TXT Plural channels:

    Subject matter under subclass 178 having more than one channel leading away
    from the transmitter.

    (1)     Note.  For example, there may be an individual channel, for each
    individual pulse of the code.


CLS 341/181
TXT Carrier frequency variation:

    Subject matter under subclass 178 in which the frequency of the carrier
    upon which the pulses are modulated is varied.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 303+ for transmission
    of a digital signal having arbitrary message content by frequency shift
    keying.


CLS 341/182
TXT With variable pulse length:

    Subject matter under subclass 178 in which the duration of the pulses is
    varied.


CLS 341/183
TXT Pulse presence or absence in equal length code:

    Subject matter under subclass 178 in which the code consists of a set of a
    fixed number of pulses and in which the meaning of the pulse code is
    determined by the presence or absence of a pulse.

    (1)     Note.  The well-known Baudot code is an example of the codes in
    this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery,
    appropriate subclasses for error detection or correction in an electrical
    device of general utility.


CLS 341/184
TXT Numerical pulse type:

    Subject matter under subclass 173 in which the meaning of the pulse code is
    determined solely by the number of pulses transmitted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery,
    appropriate subclasses for a parity bit generator.


CLS 341/185
TXT Multistage:

    Subject matter under subclass 184 having plural pulse code generating
    stages cooperating to produce components of a pulse code output.

    (1)     Note.  Such devices often include a pulse generating source for
    each component of a combined or denominational code output.


CLS 341/186
TXT With gaseous or space discharge device:

    Subject matter under subclass 184 wherein a portion of a signal current
    conducting path includes an ion or electron beam path through a gas, vapor
    or vacuum.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for a discharge device circuit with plural load circuits.


CLS 341/187
TXT Having counter or register:

    Subject matter under subclass 184 including a device to store or accumulate
    pulses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclasses 82+ for an electromechanical register, per
    se.


CLS 341/188
TXT Serial pulse number actuation:

    Subject matter under subclass 184 wherein different pulse codes are
    actuated by serially connected code generators in which an actuated code
    generator further actuates successively connected generators for a
    composite output.


CLS 341/189
TXT Pulse gating:

    Subject matter under subclass 184 in which a pulse code controlling device
    permits passage of pulses from a pulse source to generate a pulse code
    output.


CLS 341/190
TXT Mechanical switch feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 184 including a structural detail of a
    circuit path modifying device.


CLS 341/191
TXT With gaseous or space discharge device feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 173 including a detail of a signal current
    conducting device having a current conducting path which includes an
    electron or ion path through a gas, vapor or vacuum.


CLS 341/192
TXT With rotary distributor:

    Subject matter under subclass 173 including a multiposition switch with a
    rotary wiper arm.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 353+, particularly subclasses
    362-368 for a telephone dial, or a dial mounting on a telephone set.


CLS 341/200
TXT QUANTIZER:

    Subject matter under the class definition for converting the instantaneous
    amplitude of an input signal to the nearest of a fixed number of discreet
    amplitude levels.


CLS 341/899
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition which does not meet the
    definition of, any other subclass in this class.


CLS 342/
TTL COMMUNICATIONS:  DIRECTIVE   RADIO WAVE SYSTEMS AND  DEVICES (E.G., RADAR,
    RADIO  NAVIGATION)

CLS 342/
TXT

    I.      DEFINITION OF TERMS:

    ACTIVE ANTENNA

    Part of the antenna which is directly coupled to free space and radiates
    electromagnetic energy into, or collects electromagnetic energy from, free
    space and is also directly coupled to a transmitter or receiver.

    COMMUNICATION

    The conveying or transferring or information; specifically a system, as a
    radio, television, telephone for conveying or transferring information.

    DISTANCE

    The space between two points, which may be immediately juxtaposed or widely
    spaced.

    ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVE POLARIZATION CONVERTER

    Structure which acts directly on the electromagnetic wave energy to modify
    the polarization pattern of the wave, for example, to change a plane
    polarized wave into a circularly polarized wave.

    FAR FIELD

    The space beyond the near field of an antenna in which radiation is
    essentially confined to a fixed pattern falls off inversely with the square
    of the distance.

    FREE SPACE

    Space where the movement of energy in any direction is substantially
    unimpeded, such as the atmosphere, the ocean or the earth.

    MESSAGE

    A signal used to convey intelligence, such as telephone signals (e.g.,
    speech).

    "Message" is used in a more limited sense than "signal" for the purpose of
    classification in this class, in that "signal" includes the transmission of
    control impulses for operating mechanisms other than mere signal
    reproducers.

    NEAR FIELD

    The electromagnetic field within a distance of 1 wavelength from a
    transmitting antenna.

    ORIENTING

    Changing the beam direction of an antenna with respect to some reference
    point.

    RADAR

    Acronym for radio detecting and ranging. A system that measures distance
    (and usually the direction) to an object by determining the amount of time
    required by electromagnetic energy to travel to and return from an object.
    Called primary radar when signals are returned by reflection.  Called
    secondary radar when the incident signal triggers a responder beacon and
    causes it to transmit a second signal.

    RADIANT ENERGY

    The energy (partially kinetic, partially potential) associated with waves
    produced in free space by a source of energy, such as light wave,
    electromagnetic radiation (including radio waves), or neutron and similar
    radiation, subsonic, supersonic and sonic waves.

    RADIATION

    The emanation of energy into free space.

    RADIATION FIELD

    An electromagnetic wave whose frequency spectrum extends over a range from
    somewhat above the frequency of audible sound waves to somewhat below the
    frequency of heat and light waves.  Values of 10 kilocycles and 30,000
    megacycles have been given as the lower the upper limits of the range for
    radio waves, although values exist beyond these limits. Radio waves as
    defined here exclude compressional waves, light waves, heat waves, infrared
    waves, ultraviolet waves, X-ray, cathode rays, gamma rays, and ion beams.
    The radio waves are produced by oscillations of electric change in an
    antenna.

    SIGNAL

    Control impulse, wave energy, intelligence or message, such as sing, or a
    noise indication agreed upon, under stood and used to convey information at
    a distance.

    TELEGRAPHY

    The transmission to a distance of signals, unlimited with respect to the
    extent of the message communicated, by the utilization of energy, the
    elements of the message being selected or composed at will according to a
    prearranged code.

    TELEPHONY

    The conversion of spoken or sound waves into energy which is transmitted a
    distance and reconverted into sound waves for reproduction of the speech or
    sounds.

    TELEDYNAMICS

    The transmission of signal energy for the control of apparatus or
    mechanisms, at a distance.

    II.     STATEMENT OF THE CLASS SUBJECT MATTER:

    (1)     Systems and processes for transmission or reception of radio wave
    energy for obtaining or utilizing information (using radio wave
    transmitters or receivers), as to an object, or as to the directional
    characteristics of the radio wave energy, per se.

    (2)     This class includes radar systems wherein radio wave energy from a
    transmitter is reflected or otherwise returned from an object to a receiver
    which may be at the same location as the transmitter.

    (3)     This class includes subsystems, components, and related processes
    which are limited to use in connection with the above and not provided for
    elsewhere.

    (4)     This class is limited to electromagnetic radio frequency waves in
    the radiation field.  Radiation waves produces by lasing (coherent
    addition) action and induction field electromagnetic waves are excluded
    from this class, even though they may operate at radio frequencies.  See
    "radio wave" definition above for other type exclusions.

    III.    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 570+ for miscellaneous apparatus
    for testing devices by means of vibratory forces (e.g., certain types of
    compressional waves), see indented subclasses 584+ where sound waves are
    used.  Class 73 provides for measuring and testing methods and apparatus
    which involve a radiant energy test and a nonelectrical test.  Class 73 is
    the generic class for measuring and testing methods and apparatus,  Search
    notes to the class definition of Class 73 should be consulted for other
    classes which provide for measuring and testing processes and apparatus.

    89,     Ordnance, subclasses 1.1+ and 41 for apparatus designed to control
    or move a gun for aiming it towards a target, including such apparatus
    where radiant energy is utilized and subclasses 1.51+ for radiant energy
    actuated or controlled devices for releasing bombs, flares, etc., from
    aircraft.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclass 384 for drop bombs with
    direction controlling means, including those controlled by radiant energy;
    subclasses 416+ and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto for
    explosive mines adapted to be fixed automatically, the firing device of the
    mine being actuated by electrical, magnetic, wave or radiant energy and the
    igniting, per se, for such mines; and subclass 214 for fuses, primers and
    igniting devices for explosives which involve the utilization of
    electrical, magnetic, wave or radiant energy in their operation.

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclasses 200+ for
    thermoelectric generators, particularly subclasses 213+ for radiation
    (e.g., infrared) pyrometers.

    137,    Fluid Handling, appropriate subclasses for fluid flow control
    systems including radiant energy systems for valve actuation.

    178,    Telegraphy, appropriate subclasses with respect to inductive
    coupling where the sole disclosure is of a radiant energy telegraph system,
    but the claimed subject matter is not limited to radiant energy
    transmission of the signals.  See especially subclass 19 for handwriting
    and drawing systems, subclass 43 for space induction systems, subclasses
    66.1+ for miscellaneous systems using alternating current (including high
    frequency current) to transmit the signal (note that many of the patents in
    subclasses 66.1+ of Class 178 are analogous to the patents of Class 178 are
    analogous to the patents of Class 375, subclasses 259+ for miscellaneous
    telegraph apparatus useful in either radio or wire telegraphy, for example,
    subclasses 371+ for receivers and subclasses 348+ for keys.

    181,    Acoustics, is the generic class for inventions in sound wave
    radiation, transmission or reception and instruments specific thereto.

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, subclass 10 for systems for
    transferring energy from a roadway or other place to a movable vehicle by
    means of electromagnetic induction.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 3.1 for control means for missiles and
    subclass 77 for systems for automatically controlling aircraft by means of
    electrical apparatus and radiant energy controlled steering and for a
    statement as to the lines between the classes.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200 - 239 for light sensitive systems
    and subclass 336.1 for methods and apparatus utilizing invisible ray energy
    for measuring and detecting purposes; subclass 492.1 for methods and
    apparatus utilizing invisible ray energy such as X-rays, ultraviolet
    infrared rays. Class 250 is the generic class of radiant energy. It and
    other classes specified in the search class notes to it should be searched
    for the patents relating to radiant energy apparatus, processes and
    devices, especially for processes and apparatus for subjecting materials to
    radiant energy.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 16 for electric motor
    systems where the motor is controlled or supplied by space transmitted
    electromagnetic or electrostatic energy (including radio energy), subclass
    460 for electric motor systems controlled by sound or supersonic
    vibrations, subclass 480 for electric motor systems controlled by radiant
    energy (e.g., light).

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, is the generic class for
    methods and apparatus for testing to determine electrical properties by
    electrical means;  subclasses 323+ and 344+ provide for ore detection
    determination by electrical means, including the use of radio waves, except
    such methods and apparatus which involve the use of reflected or otherwise
    returned radio waves, the excepted matter being in this class (342).  Class
    324 provides for electrical testing methods and apparatus which include a
    test by means of radio waves and another electrical test.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, appropriate subclasses for
    wave transmission lines or networks which may be used for communication
    purposes wherein the wave energy is guided or constrained by a wave
    propagating medium of appreciable electrical length with respect to the
    wave length of the propagated energy.  For example, subclasses 1+ provides
    for plural channel systems and subclasses 236+ provides for single channel
    long lines having distributed electrical parameters, such as parallel
    conductors, wave guides and shielded lines.  This class also contains
    systems and networks useful in communication with radiant energy.  See
    particularly subclasses 109+ for directional couplers, subclass 117 for
    hybrid type networks, subclass 13 for resonator type breakdown discharge
    systems, e.g., T-R or R-T systems, subclass 23 for dissipating terminations
    for long lines, subclasses 24+ for coupling networks including filters,
    equalizers, dealt networks and impedance matching networks and subclass 81
    for attenuators.

    334,    Tuners, appropriate subclasses for tuner networks adapted for use
    in radiant energy systems.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, appropriate subclass for
    structural apparatus for the transmission or reception of radio waves.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 418+ for computer graphic
    processing and subclasses 326+ for computer operator interface processing.

    348,    Television, appropriate subclasses for television systems whether
    the signals are transmitted by radiant energy or otherwise.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for devices
    which utilize visible light and optical principles for the measurement of
    angles, distances, chromatic effects and the intensity of light, flaw
    analysis and fiducial instruments not provided for elsewhere.

    358,    Facsimile, appropriate subclasses for facsimile systems whether the
    signals are transmitted by radiant energy or otherwise.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    109+ for light wave communication.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 130+
    for generic data processing control systems;  subclass 300 for programming
    methods of procedures; subclasses 400+ for particular applications of
    digital data processing systems or calculating computers; subclasses 550+
    for data processing systems or calculating computers utilized to effect a
    measuring, testing or monitoring operation of an external device or
    quantity, particularly subclasses 570+ for specific operation performed,
    e.g., noise reduction, filtering; subclasses 600+ for hybrid computers;
    subclasses 700+ for digital calculating computers; subclasses 800+ for
    analog computers, and FOR 514+ for foreign art collections of
    computer-based communication engineering which may include object detection
    or tracking.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    appropriate subclass for apparatus for detecting objects or determining
    their distance or direction which are provided with means to transmit and
    receive sonic or supersonic waves, the sonic or supersonic waves being
    either generated or received by electrical means.  See subclasses 87+ for
    echo systems, subclasses 131+ for underwater systems and subclasses 115+
    for distance or direction finding.  Note that Class 181, Acoustics,
    subclass .5 has similar apparatus.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 6+ for
    combined radio and phonography systems.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communication, appropriate subclass for pulse
    communication via radio waves.

    380,    Cryptography, appropriate subclasses, for cryptographic
    communications equipment.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 1+ for
    artificial intelligence, subclasses 101+ for static presentation
    processing, subclasses 118+ for computer graphics processing, subclasses
    326+ for a computer operator interface, subclasses 180+ for digital data
    processing, and subclasses 200.3+ for data transferring among a plurality
    of spatially distributed computers or digital data processing systems.

    455,    Telecommunications, appropriate subclass for analog modulated
    carrier wave.  Class 455 includes transmitters and receivers of signals
    having arbitrary information content, whereas Class 342 is limited to
    transmitter beacons, directional receivers and radar transponders of
    regular, periodic and in general nonvarying signals having fixed
    information content relating to locating or identifying a target.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 150+ for high temperature (Tc  30 K) superconducting devices,
    and particularly subclasses 202+ for electrical communication systems.

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclasses 200+ and 300+ for computer applications in the area of
    navigation and determining the relative location between two points.


CLS 342/1
TXT RADIO WAVE ABSORBER:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a material or device
    takes up and dissipates far field radar or radio wave signals.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a device used a radar absorber is an anechoic
    chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 81 for waveguide
    attenuators or subclass 22 for sidewall absorption.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 700+ for radio
    wave antenna absorbers, per se.


CLS 342/2
TXT For aircraft or missile:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including use with air vehicles or
    projectiles.


CLS 342/3
TXT For camouflage:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including means to disguises an object by
    radar absorption.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13+,    for radar electronic warfare.


CLS 342/4
TXT With particular geometric configuration:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the absorber has significant
    topological structural details.


CLS 342/5
TXT RADAR REFLECTOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein there are means primarily
    intended to echo or return far field radar signals.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass excludes antenna reflectors
    which are part of a radar antenna with nominal radar recitation.

    (2)     Note.  Nominal radar recitation for use with radar reflectors is
    included in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 700+ for antenna
    reflectors, per se.


CLS 342/6
TXT With modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 5 including means to vary the amplitude,
    frequency of phase of a far field radar signal as it is being reflected.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass excludes passive
    transponders.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for passive transponders.

    187,    for augmenters, per se.


CLS 342/7
TXT Corner:

    Subject matter under subclass 5 wherein the reflecting surfaces are
    arranged to intersect so as to provided a retrodirective reflection.


CLS 342/8
TXT Inflatable or collapsible:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein the corner reflector has the
    capability of being:  (1) distended by gas (e.g., air); or (2) deflated of
    gas; or (3) folded together so as to occupy a smaller volume of space.


CLS 342/9
TXT Decoy or tow target:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein the corner reflectors is (1) either
    part of a vehicle or part of a device pulled by a vehicle which provides
    reflected signals which disguise the true location of the vehicle or (2)
    used to move the primary point of reflection.


CLS 342/10
TXT Inflatable or collapsible:

    Subject matter under subclass 5 wherein the reflector has the capability of
    being:  (1) distended by gas (e.g., air); or (2) deflated of gas; or (3)
    folded together so as to occupy a smaller volume of space.


CLS 342/11
TXT With spherical lens(e.g., Luneberg lens):

    Subject matter under subclass 5 wherein the reflector includes a
    spherically shaped structure transparent to radio waves having a relative
    dielectric constant different from unity.

    (1)     Note.  A Luneberg lens is a lens with a circular cross section
    having an index of refraction varying only in the radial direction such
    that a feed located on or near a surface or edge of the leans produce a
    major lobe diametrically opposite the feed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 911 for an antenna
    with a Luneberg lens.


CLS 342/12
TXT Chaff:

    Subject matter under subclass 5 wherein the reflector including thin,
    narrow, metallic strips of various length and frequency responses.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass excludes chaff dispensing
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, appropriate subclasses for explosive
    type chaff dispensers.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for chaff dispensers,
    per se.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for chaff dispensing processes
    or systems.


CLS 342/13
TXT RADAR EW (ELECTRONIC WARFARE):

    Subject matter under the class definition including means for intentionally
    interfering with systems or devices within the class, for avoiding such
    interference or for use in support of such means.


CLS 342/14
TXT ECM (electronic countermeasures, i.e., jamming):

    Subject matter under subclass 13 including means for intentionally
    interfering with the transmission or reception of signals of systems or
    devices with the this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for decoy corner reflectors.

    12,     for chaff.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 1 for jamming of telecommunication
    signals, per se.


CLS 342/15
TXT With repeater:

    Subject matter under subclass 14 including means to provide a false target
    replica of a received radar signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    187,    for radar augmenter circuitry, per se.

    353,    for retransmissions of directive radio wave energy be an object in
    orbit about the earth.


CLS 342/16
TXT ECCM (electronic counter-/countermeasures, i.e., anti-jamming):

    Subject matter under subclass 13 including means to avoid interferences
    with the transmission or reception of signals by systems or devices within
    this class.


CLS 342/17
TXT Radar reacts to jamming:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 wherein a radar system being interfered
    with changes its mode of operation in response to the interference.


CLS 342/18
TXT By changing frequency:

    Subject matter under subclass 17 wherein the radar system changes its
    operating frequency in response to being jammed.


CLS 342/19
TXT By varying gain or blocking receiver:

    Subject matter under subclass 17 wherein the receiver gain is reduced or
    the receiver is gated off in response to being jammed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94+,    for returned signal control of radar systems by gating the radar
    receiver.


CLS 342/20
TXT Detection of surveillance:

    Subject matter under subclass 13 including means to indicate only the
    presence of systematic radio signal observation means.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes devices commonly called  "Fuzzbuster".


CLS 342/21
TXT BASE BAND SYSTEM:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a radar signal extends
    over a broad band of frequencies rather than being at a single carrier
    frequency.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclass 256 for pulse
    transmission via radiated base band.


CLS 342/22
TXT TRANSMISSION THROUGH MEDIA OTHER THAN AIR OR FREE SPACE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a radar signal is sent
    through a substance other than air or free space.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 323+ for electrical
    wave subsurface geophysical exploration.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 40 for transmission of modulated
    carrier wave signals through the medium of earth or water, per se.


CLS 342/23
TXT BERTHING OR DOCKING:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a radar system is used to
    assist in bringing a vehicle to a space allowed for its safety or
    convenience between other vehicles, piers, wharves or portals.


CLS 342/24
TXT BLIND AID:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a radar system generates
    the effect of a long antenna by signal processing means rather than by the
    actual use of a long physical antenna.


CLS 342/25
TXT SYNTHETIC APERTURE RADAR:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a radar system generates
    the effect of a long antenna by signal processing means rather than by the
    actual use of a long physical antenna.

    (1)     Note.  The long antenna is synthesized through the motion of a
    small antenna relative to the target with either the antenna or the target
    or both moving. The signal received by the antenna is processed coherently
    over an integration time.  The synthesized antenna length is given by the
    trajectory traversed by the small antenna relative to the target during the
    coherent integration time.  Because of the two-way phase shift in forming
    the effective radiation pattern, the effective half-power beam-width must
    be computed considering twice the synthesized antenna length.


CLS 342/26
TXT WEATHER RADAR:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a radar systems is used
    to evaluate meteorological conditions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    460,    for storm position indicating using radio wave directive devices.


CLS 342/27
TXT PRESENCE DETECTION ONLY:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a radar system senses the
    existence of a target without quantifying any of its characteristics.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 541+ for intrusion
    detection alarm systems.


CLS 342/28
TXT By motion detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 wherein the presence of a target is
    detected by sensing target movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104+,   for determining velocity by radar sensing of target motion.

    106+,   for moving target indicators (MTI), per se, where the signals from
    nonmoving targets are eliminated.


CLS 342/29
TXT AIRCRAFT COLLISION AVOIDANCE SYSTEM (CAS):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a radar signal is used to
    assist in preventing aircrafts from flying into one another, or other
    obstacles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    455,    for collision avoidance position indicating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 903 and 961 for potential
    collision alerting systems.

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclass 17 for computerized radar for vehicle indication or guidance;
    subclass 223 for computerized radar ground scanners; and subclass 301 for
    computer avoidance collision systems.


CLS 342/30
TXT With transponder:

    Subject matter under subclass 29 including a radio signal
    receiver-transmitter to convey the radar signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42+,    for radar transponder systems, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 870.31+ for inductively
    coupled signal transmitter used in continuously variable indicating systems.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 211+ for pulse or
    digital signal repeaters.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 7+ for carrier wave repeaters.


CLS 342/31
TXT Including synchronized clock:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 including means to operate plural
    transponders on separate aircraft or on the ground, on a common time base.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclass 47 for
    wireless synchronization of timepieces, per se.


CLS 342/32
TXT Included in secondary surveillance radar (SSR or air traffic control radio
    beacon system (ATCRBS):

    Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein the transponder means are part of
    a secondary surveillance radar (SSR) or an air traffic control radio beacon
    system (ATCRBS).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37+,    for air traffic control system including SSR or ATCRBS, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclasses 120+ for aircraft traffic control by computers.


CLS 342/33
TXT AIRCRAFT LANDING SYSTEM:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a radar signal is used by
    an airborne vehicle to enable the vehicle to land safely on the ground.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37+,    for air traffic control system including SSR OR ATCRBS, per se.

    410+,   for directive signal glide slope transmitters or receivers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclass 17 for computerized radar guidance of vehicle landing.


CLS 342/34
TXT Ground control approach (GCA):

    Subject matter under subclass 33 including a ground radar system providing
    information by which aircraft approaches to landing may be directed via
    radio communications.


CLS 342/35
TXT Microwave landing system (MLS):

    Subject matter under subclass 33 including an airfield approach microwave
    radar generating a guideline for landing.


CLS 342/36
TXT AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a radar signal is used to
    maintain cognizance or to regulate the movement of aircraft in relation to
    each other or to other objects.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    454+,   for directive position signaling for plurality of vehicles.


CLS 342/37
TXT Secondary surveillance radar (SSR) or air traffic control radar beacon
    system (ATCRBS):

    Subject matter under subclass 36 including a radar beacon-transponder means
    to maintain cognizance or to regulate the paths of selected vehicles within
    a selected area such as an airport terminal area or air route.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for aircraft collision avoidance systems having SSR or ATCRBS.


CLS 342/38
TXT With altitude information:

    Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein the transponder signal includes
    information about the vertical distance of an aircraft or other object
    above a given reference plane such as the ground or sea.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118+,   for radar distance determination, per se.


CLS 342/39
TXT With side lobe suppression:

    Subject matter under subclass 37 including circuitry means to exclude or
    greatly attenuate a portion of the beam for an antenna, other than the main
    lobe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    379+,   for directive radio wave communications utilizing correlation
    techniques to eliminate side lobes.


CLS 342/40
TXT With defruiting or degarbling:

    Subject matter under subclass 37 including means to eliminate random
    nonsynchronous unintentional return signals in a beacon system or to decode
    multiple overlapping signal transmission interference.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159+,   for clutter elimination, per se.


CLS 342/41
TXT SHIP COLLISION AVOIDANCE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a radar signal is used to
    assist in preventing naval craft from running into one another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclass 301 for computer navigation systems having collision avoidance
    means.


CLS 342/42
TXT RADAR TRANSPONDER SYSTEM:

    Subject matter under the class definition having means wherein the radar
    signal is received from an originating station, has information coded
    thereon or added and is retransmitted to the originating station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for repeater jammers which add false information to the radar
    signal.

    30+,    for transponder used in aircraft collision avoidance systems.

    187,    for radar augmenter circuitry, per se.


CLS 342/43
TXT Combined with primary radar system:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 wherein the transponder system is combined
    with a system in which the retransmitted (reply) signal is a reflection of
    the transmitted energy from the surface of the target.


CLS 342/44
TXT Unique identity:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 wherein the coded radar retransmitted
    (reply) signal contains information used to distinguish the transponder
    station from all others.


CLS 342/45
TXT IFF or SIF:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 including means to transmit radio signals
    between two stations located on ships, aircraft, or the ground, for
    automatic identification of particular station characteristics, such as
    station type (e.g., ally or enemy, bomber or fighter, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  IFF is an acronym for Identification - Friend or Foe.

    (2)     Note.  SIF is an acronym for Selective Identification Feature.


CLS 342/46
TXT Navigational:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 wherein the transponder system is used to
    direct a vehicle to an intended destination.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclasses 200+ for computer navigation systems, per se.


CLS 342/47
TXT Distance measuring equipment (DME):

    Subject matter under subclass 46 including means to provide distance
    information by measuring total round-trip time of transmission from an
    interrogator to a transponder and return, with internationally recognized
    signals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    for distance determining system having an augmenter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclasses 201+ for computer navigation systems.


CLS 342/48
TXT With automatic lock-on:

    Subject matter under subclass 47 wherein the interrogator station includes
    circuit means which is self-activating to lock-on the reply signal.


CLS 342/49
TXT With VOR/TACAN:

    Subject matter under subclass 47 including means operating at VHF and
    providing radial lines of positioning any direction as determined by
    bearing selection within the receiving equipment, or means operating at UHF
    using pulse techniques to provide a polar coordinate (rho-theta) system of
    navigation.

    (1)     Note.  The VOR means emits a (variable) modulation whose phase
    relative to a reference modulation is different for each bearing of the
    receiving point from the interrogator station.

    (2)     Note.  For TACAN the distance, (rho), function operates as DME and
    the bearing function is derived by rotating the ground transponder antenna
    so as to obtain a rotating multilobe pattern for coarse and fine
    information.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    399,    for directive radio communication beacon systems including TACAN
    equipment and subclasses 401+ and 404+ for systems which include VOR
    equipment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclass 218 for computer navigation systems utilizing TACAN equipment.


CLS 342/50
TXT With telemetry:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 wherein the coded transponder signal
    contains telemetry information.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 807.1+ for generic
    telemetering.

    455,    Telecommunications, appropriate subclass for telecommunications
    subject matter, per se.


CLS 342/51
TXT Transponder only:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 including the transponder means, per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30+,    for transponders in aircraft collision avoidance systems.

    37+,    for transponders is SSR or ATCRBS systems.


CLS 342/52
TXT COMBINED WITH DIVERSE TYPE RADIANT ENERGY SYSTEM:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a radar system operates
    in conjunction with a different type of far field radiant energy system.


CLS 342/53
TXT With infrared device:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 including a device which operates using
    radiant energy within the wavelength range 780 to 105 nanometers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 338+ for infrared responsive electric
    signaling apparatus.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 51 for infrared optical
    measuring and testing systems.

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, subclass 4 for infrared coherent, light
    generators, per se.


CLS 342/54
TXT With laser:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 including a device which provides an
    intense, coherent, directional beam of light by stimulating electronic,
    ionic or molecular transitions to lower energy levels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    for testing or calibrating radar apparatus with laser means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for laser
    radar, per se.

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, for laser apparatus, per se.


CLS 342/55
TXT With television:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 including the electronic transmission and
    reception of transient visual images.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142+,   for distance and direction determination with pulse modulation and
    CRT display.

    176+,   for radar display circuitry, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, appropriate subclass for television systems, per se.


CLS 342/56
TXT With direction finding:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 including a device used to determine the
    direction of arrival of remotely transmitted radio signals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107+    and 113, for radar device or systems which determine velocity and
    direction.

    133,    139+ and 146, for radar devices or systems which determine distance
    and direction.

    147+,   for radar direction finding, per se.

    350+,   for radio wave direction finding devices or system other than radar
    devices or systems.


CLS 342/57
TXT With radio voice communication:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 including the transmission and reception
    of human voice communication by radio wave.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, for generic radio wave voice communications.


CLS 342/58
TXT With transmission to a remote station:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 including radiant energy means to send a
    received radar signal to a distant location.


CLS 342/59
TXT PLURAL RADAR:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein there are two or more
    radar systems.


CLS 342/60
TXT TRANSMITTING INTELLIGENCE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the radar signal beam is
    used as a carrier for transmitting information in addition to radar
    information.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, appropriate subclass for communication systems
    operating at radar frequencies.


CLS 342/61
TXT RETURN SIGNAL CONTROLS EXTERNAL DEVICE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the reflected radar
    signal is used to regulate a device separate from the radar system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73+,    for return signal control of the radar system.


CLS 342/62
TXT Missile or spacecraft guidance:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 including control of a projectile or a
    space vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 3.1+ and 158+ for control of missile or
    spacecraft, per se.


CLS 342/63
TXT Aircraft guidance:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 including means to control an air-borne
    vehicle's flight path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 175+ for aircraft guidance control, per se.


CLS 342/64
TXT With map matching:

    Subject matter under subclass 63 including means to compare radar data with
    previously stored location information to derive guidance signals.


CLS 342/65
TXT With terrain avoidance or alarm:

    Subject matter under subclass 63 including means either (1) to
    automatically control the aircraft to follow ground contour or to prevent
    the aircraft from hitting ground based obstacles or (2) to develop signals
    to alert the aircraft operator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 945 for aircraft alarm or
    indicating systems, per se.


CLS 342/66
TXT Camera:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 including means to control the operation
    of a photographic device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    396,    Photography, subclasses 89+ for automatic range and focus control
    for photographic devices.


CLS 342/67
TXT Gun (e.g., fire control):

    Subject matter under subclass 61 including means to control the operation
    of a firearm.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, appropriate subclass for firearms and firearm operation,
    per se.

    89,     Ordnance, subclasses 125+ for automatic gun control, per se.

    235,    Registers, subclasses 400+ for ordnance or weapons system
    computers, per se.


CLS 342/68
TXT Proximity fuze:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 including means to control the operation
    of a fuze device as it approaches its target.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166,    for testing or radar apparatus which includes means to control the
    operation of a fuze device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 211+ for proximity fuze, per
    se.


CLS 342/69
TXT Device actuated by presence of land vehicle:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 including means controlled by a return
    signal indicative of the presence of a land vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27+,    for radar presence detection, per se.


CLS 342/70
TXT Radar mounted on and controls land vehicle:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 including radar means attached to a land
    vehicle and the return signal is used to control the operation of the land
    vehicle.


CLS 342/71
TXT With control of brakes or steering:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 including regulation of the land vehicle's
    stopping means or its direction control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 167+ for motor vehicle control means
    responsive to electromagnetic radiation including radio waves reflected
    from a surface located apart from the vehicle.


CLS 342/72
TXT With control of safety device (e.g., air bags):

    Subject matter under subclass 70 including regulation of the operation of
    occupant protective means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 735 for land vehicle air bag inflation
    sensors, per se.


CLS 342/73
TXT RETURN SIGNAL CONTROLS RADAR SYSTEM:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the reflected radar
    signal is used to regulate the operation of the radar system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61+,    for return signal control of external devices.

    422+,   for self-orienting antenna pattern directional receivers.


CLS 342/74
TXT Antenna control:

    Subject matter under subclass 73 including control by the returned signal
    of the radar system antenna.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 757+ for control
    means for moving directive antennas.


CLS 342/75
TXT Physical orientation:

    Subject matter under subclass 74 including control of which way the antenna
    is pointing or its bearing.


CLS 342/76
TXT With ground tracking:

    Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein the returned signal is used to
    align the antenna in an aircraft with the actual path of the aircraft along
    the ground.


CLS 342/77
TXT With signal error correction:

    Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein circuitry is provided to correct
    for errors in the returned signal.

    (1)     Note.  Other than boresight errors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189,    for radar signal correlation circuitry, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery,
    appropriate subclasses for signal error detection and correction, per se.


CLS 342/78
TXT Conical scan:

    Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein the rotation of the beam of the
    radar system describes a cone, the axis of which coincides with that of the
    antenna boresight.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158,    for radar direction determination by scanning.


CLS 342/79
TXT Lobe switching:

    Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein the antenna's maximum reception
    orientation is periodically switched to each of two or more direction in
    turn.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155,    for radar direction determination by lobe switching.


CLS 342/80
TXT Monopulse:

    Subject matter under subclass 75 including the use of a technique in which
    information concerning the angular location of a source or target is
    derivable from each pulse or signal detection by comparison of signals
    received simultaneously in two or more antenna beams.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149+,   for radar direction determination with monopulse techniques.

    427,    for self-orienting antenna pattern monopulse directional receivers.


CLS 342/81
TXT Beam direction by phase or frequency control:

    Subject matter under subclass 74 including control of which way the signal
    emanating from the antenna is directed by varying the phase or frequency of
    the signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83+,    for control of the radar transmitter signal phase or frequency
    other than pulse repetition frequency (PRF).

    154,    for radar direction determination combined with beam steering.

    157,    for radar direction determination with frequency or phase steering.


CLS 342/82
TXT Transmitter:

    Subject matter under subclass 73 including control by the returned signal
    of the means used to transmit the radar signal.


CLS 342/83
TXT Signal phase or frequency other than pulse repetition frequency (PRF):

    Subject matter under subclass 82 including control of the radar signal
    phase or frequency other than pulse repetition frequency.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     for return signal control of antenna beam direction by frequency
    control.


CLS 342/84
TXT Function of doppler frequency:

    Subject matter under subclass 83 wherein the radar transmitter frequency
    shift component of the returned signal which is due to the target velocity
    as it approaches toward or recedes from the radar.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99,     for doppler frequency tracking by returned signal control of radar
    receiver means.

    104+,   for velocity determination be radar using doppler techniques.

    171,    for testing radar apparatus with simulated doppler signals.


CLS 342/85
TXT Function of distance:

    Subject matter under subclass 83 wherein the radar transmitter frequency is
    varied as function of target distance.


CLS 342/86
TXT With constant phase:

    Subject matter under subclass 85 wherein a constant phase relationship is
    maintained between the transmitted and returned signals.


CLS 342/87
TXT With constant beat frequency:

    Subject matter under subclass 85 wherein a constant beat frequency is
    maintained between the transmitted and received signals.


CLS 342/88
TXT Transmission Timing (e.g., Ring Around):

    Subject matter under subclass 82 including control of the transmitter
    signal timing.

    (1)     Note.  Ring Around is the triggering of a radar transmitter by its
    own returned signal.


CLS 342/89
TXT Receiver:

    Subject matter under subclass 73 including control of the means used to
    receive the radar signal.


CLS 342/90
TXT Automatic target detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 including self-acting means to distinguish
    between the presence of a return signal from a source having predetermined
    characteristics versus noise or clutter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27+,    for presence detection only radar systems.


CLS 342/91
TXT Gain or threshold:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 including control of the receiver signal
    strength or sensitivity.


CLS 342/92
TXT Automatic gain control (AGC):

    Subject matter under subclass 91 including self-acting circuit means to
    adjust the receiver gain.


CLS 342/93
TXT Constant false alarm rate (CFAR):

    Subject matter under subclass 91 including means specially designed to
    regulate false alarm caused by noise, or clutter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for electronic counter-countermeasures (ECCM), per se.

    159+,   for clutter elimination, per se.


CLS 342/94
TXT Gating:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 including control of a device having the
    ability to permit or inhibit the passage of a signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for electronic counter-countermeasures by varying  the gain of or
    blocking the radar receiver.


CLS 342/95
TXT Automatic range tracking:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 including self-acting circuit means to
    control the timing of a gate in relation to the range of the target.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47+,    for navigational radar transponder systems having distance
    measuring equipment (DME).


CLS 342/96
TXT Automatic track while scan (ATWS):

    Subject matter under subclass 95 including self-acting circuit means to
    control a gate to keep a receiver locked on a target while continuing to
    receive return signals from various elements in a given region.


CLS 342/97
TXT With automatic lock-on:

    Subject matter under subclass 95 including self-acting circuit means to
    continuously track a target.


CLS 342/98
TXT Frequency:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 including control of the receiver
    frequency.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     for return signal control of antenna beam direction by frequency
    control.


CLS 342/99
TXT Doppler frequency tracking:

    Subject matter under subclass 98 wherein circuitry is provided to follow
    variations in the doppler component of the returned signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     for radar transmitter control by returned signal control as a
    function of doppler frequency.

    104+,   for velocity determination by radar using doppler techniques.

    171,    for testing radar apparatus with simulated doppler signals.


CLS 342/100
TXT With local oscillator control:

    Subject matter under subclass 98 wherein the returned signal is used to
    regulate the frequency of the receiver local oscillator.


CLS 342/101
TXT With filter control:

    Subject matter under subclass 98 wherein the returned signal is used to
    vary the center frequency or the bandwidth of a receiver filter circuit.


CLS 342/102
TXT Phase:

    Subject matter under subclass 98 including control of the receiver phase.


CLS 342/103
TXT Phase locked loop:

    Subject matter under subclass 102 including circuit means to compare the
    phases of an output signal and the return signal of a target, with any
    phase differences converted into a correction voltage that causes the phase
    of the output signal to change so that it tracks the return signal.


CLS 342/104
TXT DETERMINING VELOCITY:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a returned radar signal
    is used to measure the speed of an object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 160+ for electrical
    speed measuring, per se.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 565 for
    computerized speed determination, per se.


CLS 342/105
TXT Other than doppler (e.g., range rate):

    Subject matter under subclass 104 including velocity determination other
    than by measuring the doppler shift of the radar signal.

    (1)     Note.  For example, the velocity may be obtained by measuring the
    rate of change of the range (i.e., range rate) of an object.


CLS 342/106
TXT Combined with determining acceleration:

    Subject matter under subclass 104 including measurement of the rate of
    change in the velocity of the object.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 566 for
    computerized acceleration determination, per se.


CLS 342/107
TXT Combined with determining distance and direction:

    Subject matter under subclass 104 including the radar measurement of the
    distance and direction of the object from a given point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109+,   for velocity and distance determination only.

    113,    for velocity and direction determination only.


CLS 342/108
TXT With correlation:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 including a measurement of a relationship
    between the transmitted and the received radar signals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145,    for radar distance determination with correlation.

    189,    for radar correlation circuitry, per se.

    378+,   for directive radio communication utilizing correlation techniques.


CLS 342/109
TXT Combined with determining distance:

    Subject matter under subclass 104 including the radar measurement of the
    distance of an object from a given point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107+,   for velocity, distance and direction determination.

    118+,   for radar distance determination, per se.


CLS 342/110
TXT With plural fixed range gates:

    Subject matter under subclass 109 wherein the returned signal corresponding
    to the respective transmitted radar pulses is applied to plural processing
    channels which are sequentially activated for short predetermined periods
    of time to represent range increments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136,    for distance determination using pulse modulation with digital
    processing and plural fixed range gates.


CLS 342/111
TXT With plural receiver frequency band separation:

    Subject matter under subclass 109 including the use of more than one
    frequency separation filter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    for velocity determination with plural received frequency band
    separation.


CLS 342/112
TXT With plural frequencies transmission:

    Subject matter under subclass 109 including transmitting two or more
    discrete frequencies and determining distance from changes in each of the
    received frequencies.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    for velocity determination with plural received frequency band
    separation.


CLS 342/113
TXT Combined with determining direction (i.e., bearing):

    Subject matter under subclass 104 including the radar gauging of direction
    of an object from a given point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107+,   for velocity, distance and direction determination by radar systems
    or device.

    133,    139+ and 146, for radar distance and direction determination
    without velocity determination.

    350+,   for direction finding with radio wave signals other than radar
    systems or devices.


CLS 342/114
TXT Combined with determining sense of motion (i.e., approaching or receding):

    Subject matter under subclass 104 including detection of whether an object
    is moving toward or from a given point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for presence detection only with motion detection.


CLS 342/115
TXT Digital:

    Subject matter under subclass 104 including digital processing of the
    returned radar signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195+,   for radar signal digital processing, per se.


CLS 342/116
TXT With plural received frequency band separation:

    Subject matter under subclass 104 including the use of more than one
    frequency separation filter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111,    for determining velocity combined with plural receiver frequency
    band separation.


CLS 342/117
TXT With plural beams (e.g.,  "Janus"):

    Subject matter under subclass 104 including the use of two or more radar
    beams in making the velocity determination.

    (1)     Note.  The "Janus"-type systems comprise two  "back-to-back"
    antennas, respectively facing forward and rearward with nonoverlapping
    radiation patterns, each antenna serving to provide transmitting and
    receiving functions.  The respective backscatter signal portions received
    by the antennas are added and subtracted to derive sum and difference
    signals from which the Doppler speed is determined.


CLS 342/118
TXT DETERMINING DISTANCE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a returned radar signal
    is used to measure the range of an object from a reference point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    458,    for directive radio wave communication distance determination
    apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 3+ for range finding
    using visible radiation signals.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 561+
    for computerized distance determination, per se.


CLS 342/119
TXT Miss distance indicator (MDI):

    Subject matter under subclass 118 including measuring the distance to an
    object at the closest point of approach to a reference point.


CLS 342/120
TXT Altimeter:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 including determining the distance an
    aircraft to the earth's surface from the aircraft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for air traffic control systems with altitude information.


CLS 342/121
TXT With additional indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 120 including means to display information in
    addition to altitude.


CLS 342/122
TXT FM type:

    Subject matter under subclass 120 wherein the radar altimeter carrier
    signal is frequency modified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128+,   for radar distance determination with frequency modulation
    circuitry, per se.

    200+,   for frequency modulation radar circuitry, per se.


CLS 342/123
TXT Height finder:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 including determining the distance from
    the earth's surface to an aircraft from the ground.

    (1)     Note.  Earth curvature correction (ECC) circuits are included in
    this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for air traffic control system with altitude information.


CLS 342/124
TXT Material level within container:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 including determining the height of a
    substance in a vessel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 290+ for liquid level
    measurement, per se.


CLS 342/125
TXT With remote cooperating station:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 including determining the distance
    between the radar station and a station detached from the radar station
    using means on the detached station to interact cooperatively with the
    radar station's radar signal.


CLS 342/126
TXT Triangulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 including distance determination be radar
    derived procedures of finding the location of a third point by taking
    bearings from two fixed points a known distance apart from each other or
    the third point; or by determining the distance from a third point to two
    known points.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    450+,   for position determining using triangulation by the transmission or
    reception of signals from two or more points from or to another point.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 3.01+ for triangulation
    by light beam.


CLS 342/127
TXT Phase comparison:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 including determining distance by
    comparing the phase of the transmitted radar with the returned radar
    carried signal.


CLS 342/128
TXT With frequency modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 including determining distance by using a
    frequency modified radar carrier signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    for radar altitude determination with FM type altimeters.

    200+,   for frequency modulation radar circuitry, per se.


CLS 342/129
TXT Plural frequency transmitted:

    Subject matter under subclass 128 including the transmission of two or more
    discrete frequency modulated radar carrier signals.


CLS 342/130
TXT Plural modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 128 wherein the radar carrier signal is
    modified by more than one modifying signal.


CLS 342/131
TXT Combined with pulse modulation (e.g., frequency agile):

    Subject matter under subclass 130 including the use of pulse modified radar
    carrier signals in making the distance determination.

    (1)     Note.  Frequency agile radar is a pulse radar in which the
    transmitter carrier frequency is changed between pulses in a random or
    pseudo-random way be an amount comparable to the reciprocal of the pulse
    width, or multiple thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134+,   for distance determination using pulse modulation radar.

    201,    for radar frequency modulation combined with pulse modulation
    circuitry, per se.

    202+,   for radar pulse modulation circuitry, per se.


CLS 342/132
TXT Within pulse modulation (e.g.,  "CHIRP"):

    Subject matter under subclass 131 including modulation of the frequency
    within the duration of the pulse modulation.

    (1)     Note.  "CHIRP" is a technique for pulse compression which uses
    linear frequency modulation during the pulse.


CLS 342/133
TXT Combined with determining direction:

    Subject matter under subclass 128 including determining the direction of
    the object from the radar source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139,    for distance and direction determination with pulse modulated radar
    signals.

    146,    for distance and direction determination with radar signals, per se.


CLS 342/134
TXT With pulse modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 including the use of pulse modified radar
    carrier signals in making the distance determination.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131+,   for distance determination by using frequency modulation combined
    with pulse modulation radar.

    201,    for radar frequency modulation combined with pulse modulation
    circuitry, per se.

    202+,   for radar pulse modulation circuitry, per se.


CLS 342/135
TXT Digital (e.g., with counter):

    Subject matter under subclass 134 including digitally processing the
    returned radar signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195+,   for radar signal digital processing, per se.


CLS 342/136
TXT With plural fixed range gates:

    Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein the returned signal corresponding
    to respective transmitted radar pulses is applied to plural processing
    channels which are sequentially activated for short predetermined periods
    of time to represent range increments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for velocity determination combined with distance determination
    using plural fixed range gates.


CLS 342/137
TXT With variable pulse repetition frequency (PRF) or pulse width:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 including changing the rate of the pulse
    transmission or the width of the pulse transmissions from the radar source.


CLS 342/138
TXT With type  "A" or  "J" range scope:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 including cathode ray tube display of the
    returned radar signal as ordinates vs. time as abscissas (Type  "A") or
    with the time base as a circle and the returned signal appearing as a
    radial deflection from it (Type  "J").

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for radar systems combined with television.

    142+,   for radar distance and direction determination with CRT display.

    176+,   for radar display circuitry, per se.


CLS 342/139
TXT Combined with determining direction:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 including determining the direction of
    the object from the radar source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    for distance and direction determination with frequency modulation
    radar signals.

    146,    for distance and direction determination with radar signal, per se.


CLS 342/140
TXT With azimuth and elevation determination:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 including the object's angular
    measurement in a horizontal plane and in a clockwise direction and its
    angular position tangent to the earth's surface.


CLS 342/141
TXT Off boresight:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 including means for measuring the angle
    between the antenna boresight and the line of sight to the target.


CLS 342/142
TXT With CRT display:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 including cathode ray tube (CRT) display
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for radar system combined with television.

    138,    for radar distance determination with pulse modulation and with a
    type  "A" or  "J" range scope (CRT) display.

    176+,   for radar display circuitry, per se.


CLS 342/143
TXT Plural:

    Subject matter under subclass 142 including more than one CRT.


CLS 342/144
TXT PPI type:

    Subject matter under subclass 142 wherein the display represents the signal
    as a bright spot, with range indicated by the distance of the spot from the
    center of the screen and the bearing by the radial angle of the spot.


CLS 342/145
TXT With correlation:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 including a measurement of relationship
    between the transmitted and the received radar signals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for velocity, distance and direction determination with radar
    signal correlation.

    189,    for radar correlation circuitry, per se.

    378+,   for directive radio communication utilizing correlation techniques.


CLS 342/146
TXT Combined with determining direction:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 including determining the direction of
    the object from the radar source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    for distance and direction determination with frequency modulated
    radar signals.

    139+,   for distance and direction determination with pulse modulated radar
    signals.


CLS 342/147
TXT DETERMINING DIRECTION:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a returned radar signal
    is used to indicate the direction of an object from a reference point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107     and 113, for radar velocity and direction determination.

    133,    139 and 146, for radar distance and direction determination.


CLS 342/148
TXT Low angle processing:

    Subject matter under subclass 147 including direction determination of an
    object at a low angle elevation with respect to the radar signal source.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains circuitry to eliminate indirect radar
    signal returns due to reflection off the ground.


CLS 342/149
TXT Monopulse:

    Subject matter under subclass 147 including the use of a radar technique in
    which the angular location information of a source or target object is
    derivable from each pulse or signals received simultaneously in two or more
    antenna beams, i.e., sum and difference channels in the receiver compare
    the amplitudes or phases of the antenna outputs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     for antenna physical orientation control by return signal monopulse
    techniques.

    427,    for self-orienting antenna pattern monopulse directional receivers.


CLS 342/150
TXT With common if channel:

    Subject matter under subclass 149 wherein the signals for comparison share
    an IF channel.


CLS 342/151
TXT With channel equalization:

    Subject matter under subclass 149 including means to balance the signal
    processing in each of the channels.


CLS 342/152
TXT With quadrature difference processing:

    Subject matter under subclass 149 wherein the  "in phase" sum signal is
    combined with the  "quadrature" phase difference signals.

    (1)     Note.   "In phase" signals have the same frequency and pass through
    their maximum and minimum vales of like polarity at the same instant.

    (2)     Note.   "Quadrature" signals exist when the phase difference
    between them and the  "in phase" signals is one-fourth of a period of 90
    degrees.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194,    for complex signal circuitry having means to separate returned
    radar signals into  "in phase" and  "quadrature" components.


CLS 342/153
TXT With particular antenna or waveguide:

    Subject matter under subclass 149 including a significant antenna apparatus
    or wave guide structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, appropriate subclasses for
    wave guides, per se.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, appropriate subclass for
    structural apparatus for the transmission or reception of radio waves.


CLS 342/154
TXT Combined with beam steering:

    Subject matter under subclass 149 including control of which direction the
    signal is emanating from the antenna by varying the phase or frequency of
    the signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     for beam direction by returned signal phase or frequency control.


CLS 342/155
TXT Lobe switching:

    Subject matter under subclass 147 including periodically and discretely
    shifting a directive radiation pattern in position so as to produce a
    variation of the signal at the target.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     for return signal control of the physical orientation of the radar
    antenna by lobe switching.


CLS 342/156
TXT Interferometer:

    Subject matter under subclass 147 including a receiving antenna system
    which determines the angle of arrival of the radar signal by phase
    comparison in the signals at several points on the antenna system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    424,    for self-orienting antenna pattern plural antenna tracking
    interferometers.


CLS 342/157
TXT With frequency or phase steering:

    Subject matter under subclass 147 including means to adjust by radar signal
    over the elements of a given region.


CLS 342/158
TXT Scanning:

    Subject matter under subclass 147 including directing the radar signal over
    the elements of a given region.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     for conical scan radar, per se.


CLS 342/159
TXT CLUTTER ELIMINATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein unwanted echoes are
    cancelled from the returned radar signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for elimination of unwanted transponder replies in air traffic
    control systems.


CLS 342/160
TXT MTI (moving target indicator):

    Subject matter under subclass 159 including means to eliminate stationary
    targets from the returned radar signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for presence detection by motion detection.

    104+,   for determining velocity by radar sensing of target motion.


CLS 342/161
TXT With vehicle movement compensation (e.g., AMTI (airborne MTI):

    Subject matter under subclass 160 including means to adjust for the
    movement of the craft in which the MTI radar is located.


CLS 342/162
TXT Digital:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 including means to process the returned
    radar signal as information in the form of one of a discrete number of
    codes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195+,   for radar digital signal processing, per se.


CLS 342/163
TXT With blind speed elimination:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein circuitry is provided to
    compensate for targets having radial velocities such that the returned
    signals cancel each other to produce a false indication of a stationary
    target.


CLS 342/164
TXT With storage tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 including a CRT that stores images on a
    separate screen behind the viewing screen to distinguish between target
    return signals having variations indicative of motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176+    for radar display circuitry, per se.


CLS 342/165
TXT TESTING OR CALIBRATING OF RADAR SYSTEMS:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein either: (1) a
    determination is made how the radar apparatus is functioning, including the
    existence, type and location of any trouble; or (2) a comparison or
    measurement is made of the radar apparatus with a standard in order to:
    (a) determine its accuracy; (b) devise a corrected scale; (c) determine the
    performance level of the equipment with regard to technical order
    specification; or (d) generate a correction or compensation signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 224+ for measuring or
    testing pulse communication.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 115 for measuring, testing or
    monitoring radio wave transmitters, per se, and subclasses 226.1+ for
    measuring or testing radio wave receivers, per se.


CLS 342/166
TXT Proximity fuze:

    Subject matter under subclass 165 wherein the radar apparatus under test
    includes means to control the operation of a fuze device as it approaches
    its target.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for radar return signal control of proximity fuzes.


CLS 342/167
TXT With laser:

    Subject matter under subclass 165 wherein the radar test apparatus includes
    a device for transforming incoherent light of various frequencies of
    vibration into a very narrow, intense beam of coherent light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for radar apparatus combined with laser means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for laser
    radar, per se, and measuring and testing with visible light.


CLS 342/168
TXT With noise generation:

    Subject matter under subclass 165 including means in the test apparatus to
    produce random electrical disturbances or spurious signals.


CLS 342/169
TXT By simulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 165 wherein the test apparatus includes means
    to apply signals representative of radar return signals (e.g., simulating a
    radar target object) to the radar apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  Systems for generating a simulated radar return signal for
    testing a radar apparatus are classified here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    434,    Education and Demonstration.


CLS 342/170
TXT Microwave:

    Subject matter under subclass 169 wherein the radar testing apparatus
    utilizes radio waves in the frequency range of 1 gigahertz and upward.


CLS 342/171
TXT Doppler:

    Subject matter under subclass 169 wherein the radar apparatus under test
    utilizes the change of frequency of its transmitted signals caused by the
    time rate of change of the effective distance travelled by the signals
    between the source of signal transmission and the point of observation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     99 and 104+, for radar systems or devices using doppler techniques.


CLS 342/172
TXT With delay:

    Subject matter under subclass 169 including circuit means in the simulator
    to retard the passage of signals from one part of the apparatus under test
    to another.


CLS 342/173
TXT By monitoring:

    Subject matter under subclass 165 including means to observe the
    performance characteristics of the radar apparatus under test.


CLS 342/174
TXT Calibrating:

    Subject matter under subclass 173 including means to adjust the radar
    apparatus utilizing a correction or compensation signal as determined by
    monitoring, or in order to devise an accurate scale.


CLS 342/175
TXT WITH PARTICULAR CIRCUIT:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a circuit associated with
    the radar system is significant.


CLS 342/176
TXT Display:

    Subject matter under subclass 175 including means to present for viewing,
    the radar information.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for radar systems combined with television.

    138,    for radar distance determination pulse modulation and with a type
    "A" or  "J" range scope (CRT) display.

    142+,   for radar distance and direction determination with CRT display.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electrical Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclasses 1+ for
    CRT circuits, per se.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 1+ for visual display systems
    with selective electrical control.


CLS 342/177
TXT Plural:

    Subject matter under subclass 176 including more than one display.


CLS 342/178
TXT Projection type:

    Subject matter under subclass 176 wherein the display of the radar
    information is provided by optical means causing the information to be
    represented on a surface or screen.


CLS 342/179
TXT Image production:

    Subject matter under subclass 176 including means to provide a likeness of
    the radar target for display.


CLS 342/180
TXT Stereoscopies or tridimensional:

    Subject matter under subclass 176 including means to produce a
    three-dimensional view or to indicate distance, azimuth and elevation on a
    single display surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 42+ for stereoscopies applied in television.


CLS 342/181
TXT Color:

    Subject matter under subclass 176 including means to produce the display in
    color.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, appropriate subclasses for color or pseudo-color
    television circuitry, per se.


CLS 342/182
TXT Electronic marker generation:

    Subject matter under subclass 176 including means to electronically
    generate symbols representative of radar target information.

    (1)     Note.  The marker may take the form of alphanumeric characters or
    special symbols other than the usual radar video display.


CLS 342/183
TXT Cursor:

    Subject matter under subclass 182 including the generation of a reference
    marking (e.g., a line) which moves back and forth over the display surface
    to enable accurate readings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 145+ and 157+ for visual
    display systems with selective electrical control involving a cursor.


CLS 342/184
TXT With stabilization (e.g., true motion, true north):

    Subject matter under subclass 176 including means to control the
    orientation of the display, or to compensate for movement to the display or
    target indicia on display.


CLS 342/185
TXT Scan conversion:

    Subject matter under subclass 176 including means to transform one display
    format or rate into another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 441+ for television format conversion means.


CLS 342/186
TXT With sweep expansion:

    Subject matter under subclass 176 including means to enlarge part of all of
    the display sweep.


CLS 342/187
TXT Augmenter:

    Subject matter under subclass 175 wherein an active repeater is provided
    for returning the radar signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for radar electronic countermeasures with a repeater.

    30+,    for radar transponders used in aircraft collision avoidance systems.

    51,     for radar transponders, per se.

    125,    for radar distance determination including an augmenter.


CLS 342/188
TXT With polarization:

    Subject matter under subclass 175 including means to polarize the radar
    signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    361,    for directive polarized radio wave signal means.


CLS 342/189
TXT For correlation:

    Subject matter under subclass 175 including circuitry for the measurement
    of the relationship between the transmitted and the received signals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for velocity, distance and direction determination with radar
    signal correction.

    145,    for radar distance determination with correlation.

    378+,   for signal correlation of directive radio signals.


CLS 342/190
TXT With recording:

    Subject matter under subclass 175 including circuit means for making and
    storing a copy of the returned radar signal.


CLS 342/191
TXT Mapping:

    Subject matter including means to make a graphic representation of radar
    information received in the returned signal.


CLS 342/192
TXT Spectrum analysis:

    Subject matter under subclass 175 including means to study the energy
    distribution of the returned radar signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 76.12+ for complex
    wave analysis of electrical signals, per se.


CLS 342/193
TXT Harmonic:

    Subject matter under subclass 192 including means to identify and evaluate
    harmonics that make up the returned radar signal.


CLS 342/194
TXT Complex signal (in phase and quadrature):

    Subject matter under subclass 175 including receiver circuit means to
    separate returned radar signals into  "in phase" and quadrature" components.

    (1)     Note.  "In phase" signals have the same frequency and pass through
    their maximum and minimum values of like polarity at the same instant.

    (2)     Note.   "Quadrature" signals exist when the phase difference
    between them and the  "in phase" signals is one-fourth of a period or 90
    degrees.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    for monopulse radar with quadrature processing.


CLS 342/195
TXT Digital processing:

    Subject matter under subclass 175 including receiver circuit means to
    process the returned radar signal by transforming the information contained
    therein into data carrying signals wherein the information is in the form
    of one of a discrete number of codes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    for radar velocity determination with digital processing of the
    returned signal.

    135+,   for radar distance determination with digital processing of the
    returned signal.

    162,    for clutter elimination in an MTI radar system with digital
    processing of the returned signal.


CLS 342/196
TXT Fast fourier transform (FFT):

    Subject matter under subclass 195 including means to perform a fast fourier
    transform.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses
    726.01+ for digital computing of fourier transforms and subclass 827 for
    analog computing of fourier transforms.


CLS 342/197
TXT With video quantizer:

    Subject matter under subclass 195 including means to digitize the radar
    video signal.


CLS 342/198
TXT For receiver protection:

    Subject matter under subclass 175 wherein circuitry such as duplexes, T-R
    device, or blanking circuit is provided to prevent the transmitter signal
    from entering the receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for electronic counter-countermeasures by varying the gain or
    blocking the receiver.


CLS 342/199
TXT Automatic frequency control (AFC):

    Subject matter under subclass 175 wherein the circuitry is provided to
    maintain the frequency of the radar at a constant value or in a fixed
    relation with respect to some other section of the radar.


CLS 342/200
TXT For frequency modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 175 wherein the frequency or phase of the
    transmitted radar signal is variably controlled as a function of time or
    other factor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83,     for control of the radar transmitter signal phase or frequency
    other than pulse repetition frequency (PRF).

    122,    for radar FM type altimeters.

    128+,   for radar distance determination with frequency modulation.


CLS 342/201
TXT Combined with pulse modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 including control of the transmitted
    radar signal to form discrete pulses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131+,   for radar distance determination with frequency modulation combined
    with pulse modulation used in making the determination.

    134+,   for distance determination using pulse modulation radar.

    202+,   for radar pulse modulation circuitry, per se.


CLS 342/202
TXT For pulse modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 175 including control of the transmitted
    radar signal to form discrete pulses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131+    and 134+, for radar distance determination with pulse modulation.

    201,    for radar frequency modulation combined with pulse modulation
    circuitry, per se.


CLS 342/203
TXT With noise reduction:

    Subject matter under subclass 202 including circuitry to distinguish
    between target echoes and noise pulses.


CLS 342/204
TXT With pulse shaping:

    Subject matter under subclass 202 including circuitry for altering the
    radar pulse shape, bandwidth or spectrum.


CLS 342/205
TXT Sensitivity time control (STC):

    Subject matter under subclass 175 including means to vary the gain
    (sensitivity) of the radar receiver as a function of time within each pulse
    repetition interval or observation time in order to prevent overloading of
    the receiver by strong echoes from targets or clutter at close ranges.


CLS 342/350
TXT DIRECTIVE:

    Devices and processes under the class definition for sending or receiving
    radio wave energy which is characterized by some quality that varies
    according to the relative direction or position of the sender or receiver.

    (1)     Note.  The received wave is not the reflected or returned
    transmitted wave.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1       through 205+, for similar systems which involve  "echo" or
    reflected wave reception (radar systems) including directive systems of the
    reflected wave type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 22+ for traffic and vehicle
    direction or position indicators using electrical communication apparatus.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 700+ for directive
    antenna and antenna array structures.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for nondirective
    type systems or devices involving the transmission or reception of
    multiplexed signals, per se.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, appropriate subclasses for
    nondirective type systems or devices involving the transmission or
    reception of pulse or digital signals, per se.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 1+ and 29+ for devices for
    instructing or training in the characteristics or operation of navigational
    apparatus including radio beacons, blind landing systems, radio direction
    finders, etc.

    455,    Telecommunications, appropriate subclasses for nondirective signal
    transmission or reception systems, per se.

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclasses 200+ for computer navigation systems using electrical computers
    or data processors.


CLS 342/351
TXT Including a radiometer:

    Subject matter under subclass 350 including means to measure the signal
    strength of the radio wave energy.


CLS 342/352
TXT Including a satellite:

    Subject matter under subclass 350 wherein the radio wave energy is
    transmitted or received by an object in space, in orbit about the earth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclass 324 for synchronization in time
    division multiple access satellite communications.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 12.1+ for roulette space satellites.


CLS 342/353
TXT Having a signal repeater:

    Subject matter under subclass 352 wherein the satellite retransmits the
    directive signal to a remote receiver.


CLS 342/354
TXT With beam steering:

    Subject matter under subclass 352 wherein the position of satellite antenna
    beam is changed by electrical means.


CLS 342/355
TXT With control of satellite attitude:

    Subject matter under subclass 352 wherein the attitude of the satellite is
    controlled by a signal from a remote transmitter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    358,    for correction of satellite transmission signals by a signal from a
    remote transmitter.


CLS 342/356
TXT Synchronous satellite:

    Subject matter under subclass 352 wherein the satellite speed in orbit is
    matched to the speed of rotation of the earth on its axis.


CLS 342/357
TXT With position indicating:

    Subject matter under subclass 352 wherein the satellite is used to locate
    the position of an object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    450+,   for position indicating apparatus using radio wave energy, per se.


CLS 342/358
TXT With satellite signal correction:

    Subject matter under subclass 352 wherein the signal sent by the satellite
    is corrected by a signal sent from a remote transmitter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    355,    for correction of satellite attitude by a signal from a remote
    transmitter.


CLS 342/359
TXT Including antenna orientation:

    Subject matter under subclass 350 including means to orient an antenna to a
    predetermined position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    422,    for self-orienting antennas.


CLS 342/360
TXT Including antenna pattern plotting:

    Subject matter under subclass 350 including apparatus for providing a
    graphical representation of the radiation properties of an antenna as a
    function of space coordinates.

    (1)     Note.  Radiation properties include power flux density, field
    strength, phase and polarization.


CLS 342/361
TXT Including polarized signal communication transmitter or receiver:

    Subject matter under subclass 350 including a transmitter/receiver
    apparatus which utilizes radio wave energy have a quality that varies
    according to the polarization of the signal.

    (1)     Note.  Since all radio systems have a transmitted wave which is
    polarized, this and indented subclasses include only those systems whose
    operation depends on, or is specially designed to produce, a particular
    mode of polarization.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 21 for polarization
    converters (waveguide).

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 756 for antennas
    with polarization converter or filter.


CLS 342/362
TXT Receiver only:

    Subject matter under subclass 361 including polarized signal receiving
    apparatus only.


CLS 342/363
TXT Circular:

    Subject matter under subclass 362 including the simultaneous transmission
    of vertically and horizontally polarized radio waves, such that a vector
    representing the waves has a constant magnitude and varies continuously
    about a point.


CLS 342/364
TXT Elliptical:

    Subject matter under subclass 362 including the polarization of the signal
    such that the wave vector for the signal rotates in an elliptical orbit
    about a point.


CLS 342/365
TXT Circular:

    Subject matter under subclass 361 including the simultaneous transmission
    of vertically and horizontally polarized radio waves, such that a vector
    representing the waves has a constant magnitude and varies continuously
    about a point.


CLS 342/366
TXT Elliptical:

    Subject matter under subclass 361 including the polarization of the signal
    such that the wave vector for the signal rotates in an elliptical orbit
    about a point.


CLS 342/367
TXT Including directive communication system:

    Subject matter under subclass 350 including a system for sending or
    receiving information for some purpose other than direction finding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for nondirective
    type systems including the transmission of multiplexed information signals.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, appropriate subclasses for
    nondirective type systems including the transmission or pulse or digital
    information signals, per se.

    455,    Telecommunications, appropriate subclasses for nondirective signal
    transmission/reception systems, per se.


CLS 342/368
TXT Including a steerable array:

    Subject matter under subclass 350 wherein an antenna array directional beam
    is adjusted by electrical means.


CLS 342/369
TXT Injection radiation type:

    Subject matter under subclass 368 wherein a receiving station includes
    means for emitting signals of such character as to facilitate the alignment
    of the directional pattern of the receiver with the direction of travel of
    the received signal.

    (1)     Note.  Usually, the emitted signal is received by different antenna
    elements of an array along with the received signal with which it combines
    to accentuate the difference in phase or some other characteristic of the
    signal as received in the different antenna elements.


CLS 342/370
TXT Retrodirective:

    Subject matter under subclass 368 wherein a beam pattern is steered in the
    exact reverse direction of the direction of a received wave.


CLS 342/371
TXT With electronic scanning:

    Subject matter under subclass 368 wherein a beam of radio-frequency energy
    is directed successively over the antenna array elements of a given region
    of the corresponding process in reception.

    (1)     Note.  For example, the phase of the transmitted/received signals
    are shifted in a particular manner.


CLS 342/372
TXT Controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 371 including means to regulate the scanning
    angle of the array antennas.

    (1)     Note.  For example, the input to or the output from the antenna
    array is used to produce various antenna scan angle control signals.


CLS 342/373
TXT With a matrix:

    Subject matter under subclass 368 including an orderly two-dimensional
    array of circuit elements.


CLS 342/374
TXT With a switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 368 including a connect/disconnect or circuit
    selector means in the interface between the steerable array and the
    electrical steering circuitry.


CLS 342/375
TXT With a delay line (e.g., serpentine transmission line, frequency scanning):

    Subject matter under subclass 368 including a transmission line or
    equivalent device designed to retard a signal or wave for a predetermined
    length of time.


CLS 342/376
TXT Including a remote energy source:

    Subject matter under subclass 368 including a separate transmitter of radio
    wave energy which is located apart from the steerable antenna array, and
    which drives the array.


CLS 342/377
TXT Including a computer:

    Subject matter under subclass 368 including a device capable of accepting
    electronic signal information and performing arithmetic and logical
    operations with the information to supply a signal to the steerable antenna
    array circuitry.


CLS 342/378
TXT Utilizing correlation techniques:

    Subject matter under subclass 350 wherein the directive communication
    includes circuitry which provides a relationship between the signals from
    two or more antennas.

    (1)     Note.  Generally, this subclass does not provide for correlation
    between transmitted and received signals of the radar or sonar type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1       through 205+, for radar devices using correlation techniques.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 728 for
    correlation techniques involving the use of an electrical digital computer.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave System And Devices,
    appropriate subclass for sonar devices using correlation techniques.


CLS 342/379
TXT Side lobe elimination:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 wherein a receiving apparatus utilizing
    correlation techniques suppresses at least one portion of the beam from an
    antenna other than the main lobe.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 283+ for undesired signal or noise
    control in telecommunication systems.


CLS 342/380
TXT Sum of each antenna channel signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 379 wherein the receiving apparatus contains
    at least two antenna channels (main and auxiliary) which are connected to a
    summing circuit.


CLS 342/381
TXT Difference of each antenna channel signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 379 wherein the receiving apparatus contain
    at least two antenna channels (main and auxiliary) which are connected to a
    subtraction circuit.


CLS 342/382
TXT Mixing each antenna channel signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 379 wherein the receiving apparatus contains
    at least two antenna channels (main and auxiliary) which are connected to a
    mixing circuit.


CLS 342/383
TXT Sum of each antenna channel signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 wherein the receiving apparatus contains
    at least two antenna channels (main and auxiliary) which are connected to a
    summing circuit.


CLS 342/384
TXT Difference of each antenna channel signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 wherein the receiving apparatus contains
    at least two antenna channels (main and auxiliary) which are connected to a
    subtraction circuit.


CLS 342/385
TXT Beacon or receiver:

    Subject matter under subclass 350 including means for sending or receiving
    distinctive directive signals.

    (1)     Note.  By "directive" signals is meant signals which denote course,
    direction, or orientation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    450+,   for position indicating involving the use of signals which have no
    distinctive bearing or position determinative characteristics.


CLS 342/386
TXT With transmission of bearing or position determinative signals:

    Subject matter under subclass 385 including one or more radiating stations
    whose radiated energy when received, allows a determination of the location
    of the receiving station in one or more lines or planes having known fixed
    locations relative to the radiating stations.

    (1)     Note.  Frequently two or more bearing determinations are used to
    fix the position of the receiving station by intersection of bearing lines
    or planes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    450+,   for position indicating involving the use of signals which have no
    distinctive bearing or position determination characteristics.


CLS 342/387
TXT Iso-chronic type:

    Subject matter under subclass 386 wherein a distinctive signal or pulse,
    emitted by one radiating station, and a similar signal or pulse, emitted by
    a second remote radiating station and bearing a fixed time relationship to
    the first signal or pulse, are received by a navigation receiver and
    compared as to their time relationship.

    (1)     Note.  The time difference in the signals is a measure of the
    difference in distances between the receiving station and each of the
    radiating stations thereby enabling the fixing of the position of the
    receiving station along a hyperbola or hyperboloid which are the loci of
    all points in space having a constant difference in distance to the
    radiating stations.  These loci are known as  "iso-chromes".


CLS 342/388
TXT Loran:

    Subject matter under subclass 387 wherein the radiating stations comprise a
    master and two or more slave stations.

    (1)     Note.  Usually they are installed along a coastline to serve
    vehicles on or over the ocean.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclass 219 for computerized navigation apparatus using Loran equipment.


CLS 342/389
TXT Loran-C:

    Subject matter under subclass 388 wherein the loran system provides a
    coarse measurement of time-difference through the matching of pulse
    envelopes, and a fine measurement by the comparing of phase between the
    carrier wave.

    (1)     Note.  Loran-C is generally useful to distance of 1,000 to 1,500
    nautical miles (1,850 to 2,800 kilometers) over water; it uses a baseline
    of about 500 nautical miles and operates at approximately 100 kilohertz.

    (2)     Note.  A typical example of Loran-C system would include a master
    station nine at a repetition rate of 10 to 25 groups per second with a
    spacing of 1,000 micro sec between the pulses of a group; a slave station
    which after a delay of at least the one-way time from master to slave, plus
    and additional 2,000 micro sec transmits an eight pulse group, also spaced
    1,000 micro sec and later still another slave station which transmits a
    similar group, and wherein the apparatus receiving these pulses conducts
    the following operations.

    (1)     Searching for the master signal;

    (2)     Identifying it by repetition rate and phase code;

    (3)     Locking a local reference oscillator onto the master signals;

    (4)     Locking onto the two or more slave signals; and

    (5)     Determining their time difference from the master (commonly these
    differences are manually translated to hyperbolic lines on a chart).


CLS 342/390
TXT With cycle selection:

    Subject matter under subclass 389 providing cycle tracking of received
    master an slave transmissions on a predetermined cycle identified from a
    predetermined Loran pulse envelope point.


CLS 342/391
TXT Loran-A:

    Subject matter under subclass 389 wherein the Loran system provides
    time-difference measurement by matching the leading edges of the pulses
    (usually with an oscilloscope).

    (1)     Note.  Loran-A is generally useful to distances of 500 to 1,500
    nautical miles (900 to 2,800 kilometers) over water and it uses a baseline
    of about 300 nautical miles 550 kilometers) while operating at
    approximately 2 megahertz.

    (2)     Note.  A typical example of a Loran-A system would include a master
    station transmission of pulses which are received and rebroadcast by the
    slave stations to be ultimately received by the vehicular receiver which
    measures the differential delay between reception of the master pulses and
    slave pulse (usually by oscilloscope observation of the time difference),
    and for each such differential time, there is a hyperbolic line of position
    with master and slave as foci, wherein the intersection of two such lines,
    one from each slave, provides a fix (commonly the oscilloscope readout is
    manually translated to a chart on which the hyperbolic lines are already
    printed).

    (3)     Note.  Various chains or Loran-A systems are distinguished from
    each other by using three carrier frequencies and twenty four sets of pulse
    repetition rates.


CLS 342/392
TXT With automatic gain control:

    Subject matter under subclass 387 including means to regulate by
    automatically equalizing or otherwise compensating for differences in the
    received signal strength in the navigation receiver.


CLS 342/393
TXT Iso-frequency type:

    Subject matter under subclass 386 in which similar frequency modulated
    signals or pulses, simultaneously emitted by two or more remote radiating
    stations, are received and compared as to their instantaneous frequencies.

    (1)     Note.  The difference in frequencies between the two received
    signals is a measure of the difference in the times required for the
    radiations to travel to the receiving station and so is a function of the
    difference in distance between each radiating station and the receiving
    station, thereby enabling the fixing of the position of the receiving
    station along a known hyperbola or hyperboloid which are the loci of all
    points in space having a constant difference in distances to the radiating
    stations.


CLS 342/394
TXT Iso-phase type:

    Subject matter under subclass 386 wherein a distinctive signal or pulse in
    emitted by one radiating station and a similar signal or pulse (bearing a
    know, fixed phase relationship to the first signal or pulse) is emitted by
    a second remote radiating station, and wherein both are received and
    compared as to their phase relationship by a receiving station to provide a
    measure of the difference in distance between each radiating station and
    the receiving station, thereby enabling the fixing of the receiving station
    position along a known hyperbola or hyperboloid which are the loci of all
    points in space having a constant difference in distances to the radiating
    stations.


CLS 342/395
TXT With hetrodyne synchronization:

    Subject matter under subclass 394 including spaced transmitting stations
    which are not phase synchronized.

    (1)     Note.  The transmitted signals are received by a fixed reference or
    link station and hetrodyned.  The resulting beat frequency is transmitted
    to the mobile craft for phase comparison with a beat frequency developed in
    the craft from direct reception of the signals from the spaced transmitting
    stations.


CLS 342/396
TXT Omega:

    Subject matter under subclass 394 wherein hyperbolic lines of position are
    determined by measuring the changes in distances from the transmitters by
    counting radio-frequency wavelengths in space or lanes (iso-phase lines) as
    a vehicle moves from a known position, the lanes being counted by phase
    comparison with a stable oscillator aboard the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  Omega is a very-long-distance navigation system which
    operates at approximately 10 kilohertz usually transmitting signals in long
    bursts of continuous waves every 10 seconds.


CLS 342/397
TXT Decca:

    Subject matter under subclass 394 wherein sets of hyperbolic lines of
    position are determined by comparison of the phase of (1) one reference
    continuous wave signal from a centrally located master transmitter with (2)
    each of several continuous wave signals from plural slave transmitter
    located in a star pattern, each about 70 nautical miles (130 kilometers)
    from the  master.

    (1)     Note.  Decca is a radio navigation system which transmits on
    several frequencies near 100 kilohertz and is generally useful to about 200
    nautical miles (370 kilometers).

    (2)     Note.  A typical decca transmitting chain comprises a master
    station which is referred to by the  "color" of the phase meter associated
    with each at the receiver.  Each station transmits a stable continuous-wave
    frequency that bears a fixed relationship to the frequencies of other three
    stations, and therefore phase comparison produces a family of hyperbolic
    lines of position where the phases are equal (the spaces between the lines
    are called lanes).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclass 219 for computerized navigation apparatus using decca equipment.


CLS 342/398
TXT Rotating beacon signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 386 wherein the direction of the beacon
    radiation is continuously changing.


CLS 342/399
TXT TACAN:

    Subject matter under subclass 398 including a complete ultra-high-frequency
    polar coordinate (RHO-THETA) navigation system using pulse techniques,
    wherein the distance (RHO) function operates as distance measuring
    equipment (DME) and the bearing function is derived by rotating the ground
    transmitter antenna so as to obtain a rotating multiple pattern for coarse
    and fine bearing information.

    (1)     Note.  A typical TACAN system is comprised of the following:

    (a)     a parasitic antenna element rotating at 900 RPM, generating an
    amplitude-modulated pattern at 15HZ, with phase proportional to the bearing
    of the receiver,

    (b)     nine other parasitic elements, also rotating at 900 RPM, generating
    a multilobe pattern at 135 HZ, to improve the bearing accuracy; and

    (c)     Reference pulses at 15 and 135 HZ to which the above variable phase
    signals are compared in the receiver to establish its bearing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclass 218 forcomputer navigation apparatus using TACAN equipment.


CLS 342/400
TXT Receiver only:

    Subject matter under subclass 398 comprising apparatus used in the
    reception of the rotating beacon signal.


CLS 342/401
TXT VOR:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 including receiver means operating at VHF
    and providing radial lines of position in any direction as determined by
    comparing the phase of the beacon signal, which is a variable modulated
    signal, with that of a nondirectional reference modulated signal, within
    the receiver.

    (1)     Note.  The variable signal has a phase relative to the reference
    signal which is different for each bearing point of the receiver from the
    beacon station.

    (2)     Note.  A typical VOR system operates in the following manner:

    (a)     The ground station (beacon) radiates a cardioid pattern that
    rotates at 30 CPS, generating a 30 Hz sine wave at the output of any
    airborne receiver;

    (b)     The ground station also radiates and omni directional signal,
    modulated with a fixed 30 Hz reference tone;

    (c)     The phase between the two 30 Hz tones varies directly with the
    bearing of the aircraft.

    (3)     Note.  VOR us as abbreviation for VHF or omnirange.


CLS 342/402
TXT Doppler:

    Subject  matter under subclass 401 wherein the variable signal has been
    developed by sequentially feeding a radio-frequency signal to a
    multiplicity of antennas and detecting the subsequent  "Shift in the signal
    frequency" by the receiver.

    (1)     Note.  The operation of feeding the signal sequentially to the
    antennas simulates the rotation of a single antenna.

    (2)     Note.  Doppler effect is the observed change of the frequency of a
    wave caused by a time rate of change of the effective distance travelled by
    the wave between the source and the point of observation.


CLS 342/403
TXT With circular array of antennas:

    Subject matter under subclass 402 wherein the antennas are arranged in a
    ring shaped pattern.


CLS 342/404
TXT VOR:

    Subject matter under subclass 398 including means operating at VHF and
    providing radial lines of position in any direction as determined by
    comparing within the receiving equipment the phase of variably modulated
    beacon signal with that of a modulated nondirectional reference signal.

    (1)     Note.  The variable signal has a phase relative to the reference
    signal which is different for watch bearing point of the receiver from the
    beacon station.


CLS 342/405
TXT Doppler:

    Subject matter under subclass 404 wherein the variable signal has been
    developed by sequentially feeding a radio-frequency signal to a
    multiplicity of antennas and detecting the subsequent  "Shift in the signal
    frequency" by the receiver.

    (1)     Note.  The operation of feeding the signal sequentially to the
    antennas simulates the rotation of a single antenna.

    (2)     Note.  Doppler effect is the observed change of the frequency of a
    wave caused by a time rate of change of the effective distance travelled by
    the wave between the source and the point of observation.


CLS 342/406
TXT With circular array of antennas:

    Subject matter under subclass 405 wherein the antennas are arrayed in a
    ring shaped pattern.


CLS 342/407
TXT Fixed course of bearing indicating:

    Subject matter under subclass 386 wherein signals transmitted from one or
    more beacons are so modulated or directed that a characteristic signal or
    lack of signal is received so long as the receiver is maintained within a
    fixed bearing line or plane.

    (1)     Note.  Usually a plurality of directional radiators are so arranged
    that they have overlapping directional patterns, the signal received in the
    overlap region determining the bearing or course.


CLS 342/408
TXT Moving beam:

    Subject matter under subclass 407 wherein the transmitted signal changes
    direction.


CLS 342/409
TXT With superimposed images:

    Subject matter under subclass 407 wherein superposition of two or more
    visual images is presented within the field of view of an aircraft pilot as
    an aid to landing or navigation.

    (1)     Note.  Included are systems which superimpose either a facsimile
    image of a landing area, or flight path marked images, upon a screen so as
    to be viewed simultaneously with the  "real world" by the aircraft pilot.


CLS 342/410
TXT Glide slope transmitter or receiver:

    Subject matter under subclass 407 including means to transmit or receive
    bearing line or plane informating including the landing or take-off path of
    an aircraft where the glide slope is the vertical guidance portion of the
    path.

    (1)     Note.  The glide slope antenna establishes a radiation pattern is
    space from which a signal is derived proportional to the vertical
    displacement from the glide path.

    (2)     Note.  For example a modulated carrier signal by 90 and 150 Hz in a
    spatial pattern that allows the 90 Hz modulation to be detected above the
    glide path at an amplitude proportional to angular displacement from the
    path.  Below the glide path, the 90 Hz signals radiated by the antenna are
    1805 out of phase and subtract leaving the 150 Hz signal to be detected.
    Predominance of the 150 Hz signal causes a  "fly up" indication in the
    cross-pointer meter off light direction;  predominance of the 90 Hz signal
    causes a  "fly down" signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 945+ for airport traffic
    control systems including landing guidance observable electrical signal
    indicators.


CLS 342/411
TXT Receiver only:

    Subject matter under subclass 410 including only the apparatus to receive
    the beacon signal.


CLS 342/412
TXT Transmitter only:

    Subject matter under subclass 410 including only apparatus to transmit a
    glide slope signal.


CLS 342/413
TXT Localizer transmitter or receiver:

    Subject matter under subclass 407 including transmission or reception of
    signals for the lateral guidance of aircraft with respect to the center
    line of a runway.

    (1)     Note.  The localizer course is aligned with the projected runway
    center line.  The carrier is modulated at 90 and 150 Hz in a spatial
    pattern that makes the 90 Hz modulation predominate when the aircraft is to
    the left of the course, with a difference in depth modulation proportional
    to the angular displacement from the course.  The left-right cross-pointer
    meter or flight director show "fly right" when it receivers 90 Hz signals.
    To the right of the course the 90 Hz signals subtract, leaving the
    predominant 150 Hz signal proportional to the displacement from the course.


CLS 342/414
TXT Distinctive frequencies equi-signal type:

    Subject matter under subclass 407 in which a beacon is caused to radiate
    along two fixed, angularly disposed, directional patterns with radiations
    in each pattern being given a modulation which is a distinctive frequency.

    (1)     Note.  The different frequencies when received in equal or
    proportional strengths, given an indication that the receiver is located on
    course, while predominance of one frequency over the other indicates the
    sense of the deviation from course.


CLS 342/415
TXT Coded equi-signal (e.g., A and N type):

    Subject matter under subclass 414 in which a beacon is caused to
    alternately radiate in accordance with either one of two fixed angularly
    disposed directional patterns with the alternations being so timed that the
    radiation is each pattern is interrupted in accordance with a code which is
    distinctive with that pattern.

    (1)     Note.  Classified here are patents on range beacons of the  "A and
    N" type in which one pattern radiates a dot and a dash (A) and the other
    radiates a dash and a dot (N) which when received in equal strength by a
    single receiver combine to produce an uninterrupted signal indicative of
    the fact that the receiver is on course, while predominance of either the
    "A" or the  "N" over the other indicates the sense of the deviation from
    course.


CLS 342/416
TXT Sequentially effective reflectors:

    Subject matter under subclass 414 in which the alteration of the
    directional patterns is produced by alternating the effectiveness of two
    reflecting units.


CLS 342/417
TXT Direction-finding receiver only:

    Subject matter under subclass 385 including a receiver station which is
    capable of determining the time of travel or bearing of the received
    signals with respect to the station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147+,   for reflected (radar) or otherwise returned radio wave systems
    which include a direction finding receiver.

    386+,   for systems under subclass 350 which include a directional
    transmitting station and a receiving station so that the location of the
    receiving station in a line or plane with respect to the transmitting
    station may be determined.

    407+,   for receivers especially designed to receive a characteristic
    signal or lack of signals transmitted from one or more beacons, so long as
    the receiver is maintained within a fixed bearing line or plane.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses for demodulators of modulated
    wave energy.


CLS 342/418
TXT Doppler:

    Subject matter under subclass 417 wherein the received signals have an
    apparent change in frequency due to the doppler effect.

    (1)     Note.  Doppler effect is the observed change of the frequency of a
    wave caused by a time rate of change of the effective distance travelled by
    the wave between the source and the point of observation.


CLS 342/419
TXT Portable:

    Subject matter under subclass 417 wherein the direction finding receiver is
    capable of being carried or conveyed.


CLS 342/420
TXT With error or deviation compensator or eliminator:

    Subject matter under subclass 417 including means which apply to the
    direction indication, a correction for known errors of the indication or
    for a desired deviation from the indication, or which are provided with
    means to eliminate or reduce the effects of unwanted signals or for
    deviations in the signal wave caused by disturbing influences.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains patents for systems in which means
    are provided to compensate for or to eliminate the errors caused by
    metallic masses.  Many of the systems in this subclass are designed for use
    on ships and airplanes where large metallic masses and other disturbing
    devices are located near the receiver.  Included are systems where a screen
    is applied between the mass and the receiving antenna, and systems which
    include means so that the reading obtained is corrected for known errors.
    In the indented subclass are systems where the wave transmitted is in the
    form of pulses, the system being provided with means to eliminate or
    compensate for unwanted signal pulses, such as reflected sky waves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    358,    for satellite signal correction means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery,
    appropriate subclasses for electrical signal error correction/compensation,
    per se.


CLS 342/421
TXT Pulse-type noise elimination or compensation (e.g., sky waves):

    Subject matter under subclass 420 wherein the signal is in the form of
    pulses.

    (1)     Note.  The systems in this subclass are usually provided with means
    to eliminate or compensate for unwanted signal pulses, such as reflected
    sky waves.


CLS 342/422
TXT With self-orienting antenna pattern:

    Subject matter under subclass 417 wherein the receiver automatically alters
    its directional characteristic to coincide with the line of travel of
    selected radio waves.


CLS 342/423
TXT Plural antennas:

    Subject matter under subclass 422 wherein the receiver apparatus includes
    more than one antenna.


CLS 342/424
TXT Tracking interferometer:

    Subject matter under subclass 423 wherein means for the combined reception
    pattern of the antennas is automatically adjusted to direction of and in
    response to, an incoming signal.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the signals received by the antenna are compared in
    a phase discriminator.


CLS 342/425
TXT Conical scan antenna type:

    Subject matter under subclass 422 wherein the antenna of the receiver is
    operated in a conical pattern about a pointing axis of the tracking system.


CLS 342/426
TXT Step track antenna type:

    Subject matter under subclass 422 wherein the antenna of the receiver is
    aimed at a signal source through rotation in discrete angular steps about
    an axis.

    (1)     Note.  The direction of the antenna rotation is controlled usually
    by signals developed from incoming signal strength comparison.


CLS 342/427
TXT Monopulse or pseudo monopulse tracking antenna type:

    Subject matter under subclass 422 wherein tracking of the signal source is
    accomplished by comparing overlapping pattern or lobe signals received by
    the receiver antenna to determine any discrepancy between the direction of
    the signal source, and any discrepancy is reduced to pointing error signals
    used for correcting the pointing direction of the antenna.


CLS 342/428
TXT With continuously movable antenna pattern:

    Subject matter under subclass 417 wherein means are provided for constantly
    altering a direction characteristic of the receiver.

    (1)     Note.  The alteration of the directional characteristic is
    frequently by rotation of a directional antenna for the receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    398+,   rotating transmitting beacons.


CLS 342/429
TXT Including a stationery antenna:

    Subject matter under subclass 428 including a separate antenna that has an
    antenna pattern which does not move.


CLS 342/430
TXT Including plural moving antennas:

    Subject matter under subclass 428 including more than one antenna that
    changes position, usually rotating about an axis.


CLS 342/431
TXT Including a goniometer:

    Subject matter under subclass 428 wherein means receiving energy from two
    or more antennas having fixed angularly disposed directional
    characteristics, sets up, adjacent an orientable pick up device, singularly
    disposed fields whose resultant field bears a fixed angular relation to the
    direction of the received energy.


CLS 342/432
TXT With plural fixed antenna pattern comparing:

    Subject matter under subclass 417 wherein the receiving station provides
    for comparison of the energy received by a plurality of fixed directional
    antennas or by two antennas having dissimilar or received directional
    characteristics.


CLS 342/433
TXT Successively commutated:

    Subject matter under subclass 432 wherein the receiver is periodically
    connected to the various antennas in sequence.


CLS 342/434
TXT Including more than antennas:

    Subject matter under subclass 433 wherein more than two antennas are
    connected in sequence.


CLS 342/435
TXT By diode switching:

    Subject matter under subclass 433 wherein the receiver is periodically
    connected to the various antennas by diode switching means.


CLS 342/436
TXT By modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 433 wherein commutation is effected by
    varying the amplitude, frequency, or phase of a wave by impressing one wave
    on another wave of constant properties.


CLS 342/437
TXT Including more than two antennas:

    Subject matter under subclass 432 including more than two fixed directional
    antennas.


CLS 342/438
TXT Including separate indicators:

    Subject matter under subclass 432 wherein the comparison is made by use of
    two or more distinct indicating devices.


CLS 342/439
TXT Including combined effect indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 432 wherein comparison is made by a single
    indicating device which is responsive to at least two of the quantities to
    be compared.


CLS 342/440
TXT Including a goniometer:

    Subject matter under subclass 432 wherein means receiving energy from two
    or more antennas having fixed angularly disposed directional
    characteristics, sets up, adjacent an orientable pick up device, singularly
    disposed fields whose resultant field bears a fix angular relation to the
    direction of the received energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 115+ and the subclasses specified in
    the Notes thereto for the structure of transformers with relatively movable
    coils.


CLS 342/441
TXT Having a goniometer:

    Subject matter under subclass 417 wherein means receiving energy from two
    or more antennas having fixed angularly disposed directional
    characteristics, sets up, adjacent an orientable pick up device, singularly
    disposed fields whose resultant field bears a fixed angular relation to the
    direction of the received energy.


CLS 342/442
TXT Having a phase detector:

    Subject matter under subclass 417 wherein the received signals are coupled
    to a phase detector to provide resultant bearing signal.


CLS 342/443
TXT Having a direction indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 417 wherein the receiver includes a direction
    indicating device.


CLS 342/444
TXT Having plural receivers:

    Subject matter under subclass 417 wherein each received signal is connected
    to a separate receiver.


CLS 342/445
TXT Having more than two antennas:

    Subject matter under subclass 417 wherein the direction finding receiver is
    coupled to more than two antennas.


CLS 342/446
TXT Unequal distance between at least three antennas:

    Subject matter under subclass 445 wherein the distance from the first
    receiving antenna to the second receiving receiving antenna is different
    than the distance from the second receiving antenna to the third receiving
    antenna.


CLS 342/447
TXT Having a spiral antenna:

    Subject matter under subclass 417 wherein the direction finding receiver is
    coupled to an antenna which has the form of a helix.


CLS 342/448
TXT Having a coil or loop type antenna:

    Subject matter under subclass 417 wherein the direction finding receiver is
    coupled to an antenna which consists of one or more loops of wire.


CLS 342/449
TXT Having a moving antenna:

    Subject matter under subclass 417 wherein the direction finding receiver is
    coupled to an antenna which changes position, usually around an axis and is
    not classified elsewhere.


CLS 342/450
TXT Position indicating (e.g., triangulation):

    Subject matter under subclass 350 including apparatus for determining the
    position in space of an object, vehicle or atmospheric condition by the
    reception of signals not having distinctive bearing or position
    determinative characteristics.

    (1)     Note.  Usually position is fixed by triangulation using two or more
    bearing determinations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    357,    for position indicating means including a satellite.

    358+,   for beacons or receivers having means for sending or receiving
    distinctive directive signals which may be used to determine the position
    of an object.


CLS 342/451
TXT By computers:

    Subject matter under subclass 450 including the use of a device capable of
    accepting the signal information and applying prescribed computational
    processes to this form of the information for the determination of the
    position indication.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter classified in this subclass must include
    significant details of the structure of the directional device or apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclass 301 for computerized collision avoidance equipment.


CLS 342/452
TXT By plotting table:

    Subject matter under subclass 450 including apparatus for indicating the
    position on a map.


CLS 342/453
TXT By reflected or repeated signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 450 wherein the receiver signals have been
    deflected by an object or a surface or have been retransmitted by a
    repeater station.

    (1)     Note.  The receiver is at a remote location from the transmitter.


CLS 342/454
TXT Traffic:
    Subject matter under subclass 450 wherein the positions of a plurality of
    vehicles or objects are continuously monitored either with respect to each
    other or to a common reference point of both.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 22+ for traffic and vehicle
    systems having position indicators.

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclasses 1+ for computerized vehicle collision systems.


CLS 342/455
TXT Having collision avoidance:

    Subject matter under subclass 454 including means to enable vehicles to
    steer clear of each other or other obstacles.

    (1)     Note.  Airborne collision avoidance equipment may perform, for
    example, one or more of the following functions:

    (a)     Detecting all potentially dangerous aircraft in the surrounding
    airspace;

    (b)     Evaluating the actual occurrance or miss distance of a collision
    hazard;

    (c)     Determining the precise maneuver needed, if any, to avoid a
    collision;

    (d)     Specifying when the maneuver should be initiated in order to ensure
    safe clearance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclass 301 for computerized collision avoidance systems.


CLS 342/456
TXT Having traffic control:

    Subject matter under subclass 454 including means to regulate the positions
    of the vehicles or objects.

    (1)     Note.  For example, air-traffic control would provide for the safe,
    orderly and expeditious flow of aircraft to an from the airspace around an
    airport.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 22+ for traffic and vehicle
    control systems having an indicator.

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclasses 1+ for computerized systems to control vehicles.


CLS 342/457
TXT Land vehicle location (e.g., bus police car):

    Subject matter under subclass 450 wherein the position of a means of
    conveyance over dry terrain is determined.


CLS 342/458
TXT Distance:

    Subject matter under subclass 450 including means to determine the extent
    of a space between two points.


CLS 342/459
TXT Underground object location:

    Subject matter under subclass 450 wherein the position of an atmosphere
    disturbance or nuclear detonation is determined.


CLS 342/460
TXT Storm or atomic explosion location:

    Subject matter under subclass 450 wherein the position of an atmospheric
    disturbance or nuclear detonation is determined.


CLS 342/461
TXT With speed determination:

    Subject matter under subclass 450 including means to determine the velocity
    of an object.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 160+ for speed
    measurement using electrical means, per se.


CLS 342/462
TXT With altitude determination:

    Subject matter under subclass 450 including means to determine the height
    above sea level of air object.


CLS 342/463
TXT Having plural transmitters or receivers:

    Subject matter under subclass 450 wherein the position indicating device
    includes more than one transmitter or receiver.


CLS 342/464
TXT Plural transmitters only:

    Subject matter under subclass 463 including more than one transmitter.


CLS 342/465
TXT Plural receivers only:

    Subject matter under subclass 463 including more than one receiver.


CLS 343/
TTL COMMUNICATIONS:  RADIO WAVE  ANTENNAS

CLS 343/
TXT

    I.      DEFINITION OF TERMS

    ACTIVE ELEMENT

    An element or network whose energy output is modified due to the presence
    of a source of energy in the element or network (other than the mere signal
    energy which passes through the network) or an element or network in which
    the energy output from a source of energy is controlled by the signal input.

    ANTENNA ARRAY

    A plurality of active antennas coupled to a common source or load to
    produce a directive radiation pattern.  Usually the spatial relationship
    also contributes to the directivity of the antenna.

    ANTENNA COMPONENT

    A portion of the antenna performing a distinct function and limited for use
    in an antenna, as for example, a reflector, director or active antenna.

    ANTENNA COUNTERPOISE

    Structure of conductive material most closely associated with ground but
    insulated from or capacitively coupled to the natural ground, and aiding in
    the function of the natural ground, particularly where variations or
    limitations of the characteristics of the natural ground interfere with its
    proper function, and such structure being connected to the terminal of the
    signal receiver or source opposing the active antenna terminal.

    ANTENNA COUPLING NETWORK

    A passive network (which may be resistive, inductive or capacitive or any
    combination thereof) for transmitting the signal energy between the active
    antenna and a source or receiver of such signal energy.

    ANTENNA GROUNDING STRUCTURE

    Ground, or structure most closely associated with or simulating ground
    which is connected to the terminal of the signal receiver or source
    opposing the active antenna terminal, (i.e., the signal receiver or source
    is interposed between the active antenna and this structure), for
    establishing a reference potential level for operating the active antenna.

    ANTENNA INHERENT REACTANCE

    This includes not only the distributed reactance of the active antenna but
    also the natural reactance due to its location and surroundings, as for
    example, the capacity relation inherent in the position of the active
    antenna relative to ground.

    ANTENNA LEAD-IN

    A conductive means (transmission line, feed line) for conveying the signal
    energy between the active antenna and the signal source or receiver, and
    extending directly from the active antenna towards the source or receiver.

    ANTENNA SHIELD

    A conductive or low reluctance structure, such as a wire, plate or grid
    which is adapted to be placed in the vicinity of an active antenna to
    reduce, as by dissipation through a resistance or by conduction to ground,
    undesired electromagnetic radiation, or electric or magnetic fields, which
    are directed toward the active antenna from an external source or which
    emanate from the active antenna.

    ANTENNA TUNING

    Adjusting an inductance or capacity combined with the active antenna but
    distinct and separate therefrom, the inductance or capacity providing a
    reactance which combines with the inherent reactance of the active antenna
    to establish a resonance in a circuit including the active antenna, this
    resonance being at a frequency other than the natural electrical resonant
    frequency of the active antenna, adjustment of the inductance or capacity
    changing this resonance; or adjusting the length of an electrically long
    linear antenna to alter the electrical resonance of the antenna.

    COMMUNICATION

    The conveying or transferring of information; specifically a system, as
    radio, telephone, telegragh for conveying or transferring information. For
    a general statement of the classes which include communication devices,
    apparatus and systems,see section V below.

    DIRECTOR

    A conductive (usually metallic) structure (e.g., a rod) which reradiates
    into free space impinging electromagnetic radiation (waves) coming from or
    going to the active antenna, the velocity of the reradiated wave having a
    component in the direction of velocity of the impinging wave, thereby to
    modify the radiation pattern of the active antenna, there being no
    significant potential relationship between the active antenna and the
    conductive structure.

    DISTANCE

    The space between two points, which may be immediately juxtaposed or widely
    spaced.

    ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVE POLARIZATION FILTER

    Structure which acts directly on the electromagnetic wave to filter out
    wave energy of an undesired polarization and to pass wave energy of a
    desired polarization.

    ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVE REFRACTOR

    Structure which is shaped or positioned to delay or accelerate transmitted
    electromagnetic waves, passing through such structure, an amount which
    varies over the wave front, to alter the direction of propagation of the
    waves emitted from the structure with respect to the waves impinging on the
    structure, or to bring the wave to a focus, or to alter the wave front
    (such as to convert a spherical wave front to a planar wave front or vice
    versa).

    FREE SPACE

    Space where the movement of energy in any direction is substantially
    unimpeded, such as interplanetary space, the atmosphere, the ocean and
    other large bodies of water or the earth.

    LOADED ANTENNA

    An active antenna having an elongated portion of appreciable electrical
    length and having additional inductance or capacity directly in series or
    shunt with the elongated portion so as to modify the standing wave pattern
    existing along the portion or to change the effective electrical length of
    the portion.

    MESSAGE

    A signal used to convey intelligence, such  as telegragh signals or
    telephone signals (e.g., speech). Message is used in more limited sense
    than signal for the purpose of classification in this class in that signal
    includes the transmission of control impulses for operation mechanism other
    than mere signal reproducers.

    ORIENTING

    Changing the direction of the antenna beam.

    PARASITIC ELEMENT

    A conductive (usually metallic) structure (e.g., rod) which reradiates into
    free space impinging electromagnetic radiation (waves) coming from or going
    to the active antenna, the velocity of the reradiated wave having a
    component which is in the same direction (director) as, or in the opposite
    direction (reflector) to, that of the velocity of the impinging wave.

    RADIANT ENERGY

    The energy (partially kinetic, partially potential) associated with waves
    produced in free space by a space by a source of energy, as light waves,
    electromagnetic radiations (including radio wave), neutron and similar
    radiation, subsonic, aupersonic and sonic waves.

    RADIATE

    The emanation of energy into free space.

    RADIO OR HERTZ WAVE

    An electromagnetic wave whose frequency spectrum extends over a range from
    somewhat above the frequency of audible sound waves to somewhat below the
    frequency of heat and light waves.  Values of 10 kilocyles and 30,000
    megacyles have been given as the lower an upper limits of the range for
    radio waves, although values exist beyond these limits. Radio waves as here
    defined exclude compressional waves, light waves, heat waves, infrared
    waves, ultraviolet waves, X-rays, cathode rays, gamma rays, and ion beams.
    The radio waves are produced by oscillations of electric change in an
    antenna.

    REFLECTOR

    A conductive structure, usually metallic (e.g., screen, rod or plate) which
    reradiates back into free space impinging electromagnetic radiation (waves)
    coming from or going to the active antenna, the velocity of the returned
    wave having a component in a direction opposite to the direction of
    velocity of the impinging wave, thereby to modify the radiation of the
    active antenna, there being no significant potential relationship between
    the active antenna and the conductive structure.

    RESTRICTED SPACE

    A space or medium which tends to confine the energy within specified
    boundaries along a predetermined path, as wave guides, hollow resonators,
    conductive wires.

    SCANNING

    Repeatedly moving the antenna beam over an area in space.

    SIGNAL

    Control impulse, wave energy, intelligence or message conveyed, such as a
    sign, noise indication agreed upon, understood and used to convey
    intelligence at a distance.

    SWEEPING

    Moving the antenna beam repeatedly along a single line (which may be
    straight or curved) in space.

    TELEGRAPHY

    The transmission to a distance of signals, unlimited with respect to the
    extent of the message communicated, by the utilization of energy, the
    elements of the message being selected or composed at will according to a
    prearranged code.

    TELEPHONY

    The conversion of  spoken or sound waves into energy which is transmitted a
    distance and reconverted into sound waves for reproduction of the speech or
    sounds.

    II.     STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBCLASS MATTER:

    A.      This is the generic class for antennas for the transmission of
    radio wave energy through the natural media (i.e., air, earth, water, etc.)
    for point-to-point communication or for the reception of such transmitted
    radio wave energy.

    B.      In this class are apparatus and systems which constitute part of an
    antenna transmission or reception apparatus or system and which are limited
    to use in connection with the transmission and reception of radio wave
    energy, e.g., electromagnetic horns and arrays.

    C.      Exclusions:

    1.      This class excludes noncommunication applications involving radio
    waves, such as resiation by radio waves for therapeutic purposes or for
    measuring and testing a physical parameter where no communications or
    signaling is involved.

    2.      Also excluded from this class are systems, such as detector and
    receiver systems, oscillation generator systems, modulator systems,
    amplifier systems, which are used as component parts of radio wave energy
    transmission or reception systems but which are of more general utility.

    3.      This class also excludes communication by electromagnetic waves
    other than radio waves (e.g., by partial rays, compressional waves, etc.).
    Communication restricted to rays or visible light, heat, infrared,
    ultraviolet, X-rays, cathode rays, ions, gamma rays, and beta rays, as well
    as inductive coupling are excluded from this class.

    III.    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, appropriate subclasses for the generic transmission
    or reception of energy propagated in the form of electromagnetic waves of
    subatomic, atomic or molecular particles.

    342,    Communications:  Radio Waves Systems and Devices (e.g., Radar,
    Radio Navigation), appropriate subclasses for whole radio wave systems and
    devices, or radio wave system or device components other than antennas. See
    the "SEARCH CLASS" references in Class 342 for the lines between radio wave
    communication and the subject matter of other classes.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    appropriate subclass for means to transmit and receive sonic or supersonic
    waves.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, appropriate subclass for apparatus
    for the transmission or reception of pulses into or from free space, per se.



    IV.     TELEDYNAMICS OTHER THAN SIGNALING:

    See section II, C above for the radio wave energy systems for controlling
    apparatus and mechanism other than indicating or measuring instruments
    which are included in this class.  See subclass 7 of this class and the
    search notes thereto for the miscellaneous systems for controlling
    apparatus other than indicating and measuring instruments which are
    classified in this class.  See the classes specified under "SEARCH CLASS"
    below for a reference to some of the other classes which provide for
    radiant energy controlled devices and apparatus.

    V.      COMMUNICATIONS:

    Many classes provide for devices, apparatus and systems useful in
    communicating information.  For example, Class 40, Card, Picture, or Sign
    Exhibiting, provides for means for displaying information by printed or
    painted cards, calendars, pictures, labels, tags and signs, Class 346,
    Recorders, provides for recording systems and recorders, etc.  Class 343 is
    primarily concerned with the information conveyed by means of radio wave
    energy signals and with radio wave energy teledynamics.

    For the relationship of Class 343 to the signaling classes, see section VI
    below.

    VI.     SIGNALING:

    Class 116, Signals and Indicators, is the generic class of mechanical
    (nonelectrical) signaling.  The signal in Class 116 may be of any type that
    appeals to any one or more of the senses, such as a bell, horn, whistle,
    semaphore, light shutter, explosive device or flag.  The classes specified
    in the class definition of class 116 should be searched for other
    nonelectrical signaling systems.  See the notes to Class 116 for the
    distinction between Class 116 and the electrical classes.  Class 116
    includes in subclasses 18+, code signaling, including heliographic
    signaling.  Subclass 27 of Class 116 provides for apparatus for the
    mechanical production and reception of sound vibrations transmitter through
    bodies of water (submarine signaling).  Class 178, Telegraphy, Class 178
    also includes in many of the subclasses patents where the sole disclosure
    is of a radiant energy telegraph system, but the claims are not limited to
    radiant energy transmission of the signals.  See especially subclass 19 for
    handwriting and drawing transmission systems, subclass 22 for secrecy
    systems, subclass 43 for space induction systems, subclasses 50+ for
    multiplex systems, and subclasses 58+ for duplex systems, subclasses 66.1+
    for miscellaneous systems using alternating current (including high
    frequency current) to transmit the signal (note that many of the patents in
    subclass 66.1 of Class 178 are closely analogous to the patents in Class
    375, subclasses 259+), and subclasses 371+ for miscellaneous telegraph
    receivers.

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 18-22, for speaking tubes, subclasses 126+,
    for anatomic or prosthetic relation, and subclasses 177+, for megaphones.
    See the notes to Class 116 for other acoustical signaling systems.



    Class 194, Check-Controlled Apparatus, appropriate subclasses, provides for
    coin controlled radios.

    Class 246, Railway Switches and Signals, subclasses 7 and 8, provides for
    train dispatching systems combined with train telegraphy or telephony
    systems which utilize radiant or inductive energy, and subclasses 29+,
    provides for automatic railway block signaling systems of the radiant
    energy type, see subclass 30 for radio type systems.

    Class 250, Radiant Energy, contains patents for signaling by means of
    radiant energy,  See section II above in regards to the art in Class 250.

    Class 315, Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 34,
    provides for radio tubes and other electronic tubes which have an antennae
    within the envelope of the tube or otherwise structurally combined with the
    tube.

    Class 332, Modulators, appropriate subclasses, for modulators, per se.

    Class 333, Wave Transmission Lines and Networks relates to wave
    transmission systems, which are adapted for signaling purposes, wherein the
    electromagnetic wave energy is guided or constrained by a wave propagation
    medium of appreciable electrical length as compared with the wave length of
    the propagated energy.  For example, subclasses 1+ provides for plural
    channel systems, and subclasses 236+ provides for single channel long lines
    having distributed electrical parameters, such as parallel conductors, wave
    guides and shield lines.

    Class 340, Communications:  Electrical, is the generic class for electric
    signaling.

    Class 348, Television, and Class 358, Facsimile, appropriate subclasses for
    television and facsimile systems whether the signals are transmitted by
    radiant energy or otherwise.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices, is
    the residual class for electroacoustic wave signalling devices.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 6+ for a
    combined radio and phonography systems.

    VII.    MEASURING AND TESTING:

    This class includes some patents for measuring, detecting, and/or utilizing
    radio wave energy.  The detection of objects, or the use of radio wave
    energy to measure distance, direction, and/or velocity of an object is
    included in this class when the only measurement is of the amplitude of the
    radio wave energy, or of the direction in which the energy is transmitted
    or the direction from which the energy is received, or where the duration
    of time the energy is being propagated is measured, or where only the
    detection of radio wave energy is involved.  This class also includes the
    measurement of the amplitude or intensity of the radiated radio wave energy
    where the measurement is performed by detecting and measuring the energy.
    Antennas combined with structure for measuring the magnitude of the signal
    energy flowing in, to, or from the antenna, a significant relationship
    existing between the antenna and the measuring structure, are classified in
    subclass 703 of this class.

    For other measuring and testing, Search Classes;

    Class 73, Measuring and Testing, is the generic class for measuring and
    testing methods and apparatus.  The search notes to the class definition of
    Class 73 should be consulted for other classes which provide for measuring
    and testing processes and apparatus.  Subclasses 570+ for miscellaneous
    apparatus for testing devices by means of vibratory forces (e.g., certain
    types of compressional waves), see indented subclasses 584+ where sound
    waves are used. Class 73 provides for measuring and testing methods and
    apparatus which involve a radiant energy test and a nonelectrical test.
    Class 136, Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclasses 200+
    for thermoelectric generators, particularly subclasses 213+ for radiation
    (e.g., infrared) promoters.

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 101+, for mechanical means for geophysical
    exploration, subclasses 123+, for mechanical sound echo systems and
    subclass 125 for mechanical sound locating devices for determining the
    direction from which a sound proceeds.

    Class 250, Radiant Energy, subclasses 200-239 are the generic subclasses
    for photosensitive systems which are responsive to visible light and for
    apparatus used with photocells, subclass 250 provides for radio and
    microwave wavemeters for measuring the length or frequency of radio or
    microwaves, subclasses 281+ provides for methods and apparatus for the
    ionic separation and or analysis of material on the basic of the mass to
    electric change of ionic particles of the material being separated or
    analyzed, subclasses 306+ provides for methods and apparatus of inspecting
    solid or liquid material by charge particles, and subclasses 336.1+
    provides for generic methods and apparatus for utilizing invisible ray
    energy, such as, cathode rays, ultraviolet rays, the radiations and
    emanations or radio-active substances, for measuring and detecting purposes.

    Class 324, Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, is the generic class for
    methods and apparatus for testing to determine electrical properties by
    electrical means; subclasses 323+, especially subclasses 332+ and 344+
    provide for ore detection determination by electrical means, including the
    use of radio waves, except such methods and apparatus which involve the use
    of reflected or otherwise returned radio waves, the excepted subject matter
    being in this class (343), subclasses 5+. Class 324 provides for electrical
    testing methods and apparatus which include a test by means of radio waves
    and another electrical test.

    Class 356, Optics:  Measuring and Testing, provides for measuring
    instruments and processes involving reflection, refraction, chromatic
    effects and other optical properties of light and materials. Subclasses 3+
    provides for range and height finders which utilize visible light,
    subclasses 27+ for velocity or velocity and height measuring apparatus,
    subclass 29 for the measurement of relative velocity of a remote object by
    means of apparatus having an optical element or a reticle, and subclasses
    138+ for the measuring of angles or axial alignment by means of visible
    light.  See subclasses 372+ and 388+ for the mensuration or configuration
    analysis of areas, volumes or linear measurements of articles or indefinite
    length materials or the measurement of distance traveled by a scale or
    optical grid displaced relative to a remote fiducial mark.  Search
    subclasses 43+ optical pyrometers for the determination of the temperature
    of bodies or the temperature of light radiation for photographic purposes
    by means of relative intensity of radiation, color, or incandescence
    comparison and subclasses 213+ for apparatus to measure the intensity of
    light generally.

    Class 378, X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 44, 51, and 70
    for X-ray systems used for testing.

    Class 367, Communications, Electrical: Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    provides for apparatus for detecting objects and/or determining their
    distance and/or direction which are provided with means to transmit and
    receive sonic or supersonic waves, the sonic or supersonic waves being
    either generated or received by electrical means. See subclass 87+ for echo
    systems, subclasses 118+ for distance or direction finding, and subclasses
    131+ for underwater systems.  Note that Class 181, Acoustics, subclass .5
    has similar apparatus.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 122 is drawn to determining
    the temperature of a body by use of a microwave arrangement to measure the
    thermal radiation emitted by the body.  378, X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or
    Devices, 44+, 51+, and 70+.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 44+, 51+, and 70+
    for X-ray systems used for testing.

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclasses 200+ for the application of a computer in the area of
    navigation, particularly subclasses 207+ for position determining
    equipment, and subclasses 300+ for determining the relative location
    between two points.



    VIII.   SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, see section V, above.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 1.3 for methods and apparatus for culture
    of plants by means of electricity, including radiating electrical energy.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, see section VII, above.

    89,     Ordnance, subclasses 1 and 41 for apparatus designed to control
    and/or move a gun for aiming it towards a target, including such apparatus
    where radiant energy is utilized and subclass 1.5 for radiant energy
    actuated or controlled devices for releasing bombs, flares, etc., from
    aircraft.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclasses for
    expansible chamber motors controlled by radiant energy.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclass 384 for drop bombs with
    direction controlling means, including those controlled by radiant energy,
    subclasses 416+ and the subclasses specified in the notes thereto for
    explosive mines adapted to be fixed automatically, for firing device of the
    mine being actuated by electrical, magnetic, wave or radiant energy, and
    the ignitors, per se, for such mines; and subclass 214 for fuses, primers
    and igniting devices for explosives which involve the utilization of
    electrical, magnetic, wave, or radiant energy in their operation.

    116,    Signals and Indicators.  See the section VI above for the signaling
    in Class 116.  Subclass 137 of Class 116 is the generic subclass for
    mechanical sonic and supersonic generators for wave transmission.

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, see section VII,
    above.

    137,    Fluid Handling, appropriate subclasses for fluid flow control
    systems including radiant energy systems for valve actuation.

    178,    Telegraphy, see section VI, above, for the radiant energy signaling
    in Class 178.  Note that subclass 66.1 of Class 178 contains patents for
    transmitter systems which are analogous to some of the systems in
    subclasses 259+ of Class 375.  Also see the appropriate subclasses in Class
    178 for telegraph apparatus useful either in radio or wire telegraphy, for
    example, subclasses 118+, for receivers and subclasses 101+ for keys.

    181,    Acoustics, is the generic class for inventions in sound wave
    radiation, transmission or reception and instruments specific thereto.  See
    sections VI, VII above for a reference to class 181.

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, subclass 10, for systems
    for transferring energy from a roadway or other place to a movable vehicle
    by means of electromagnetic induction.

    194,    Check-Controlled Apparatus, see section VI, above.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 553 provides for infrared ray generating
    apparatus.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 3.1 for control means for missiles and
    subclass 77 for systems for automatically controlling aircraft by means of
    electrical apparatus and radiant energy.  Subclass 77 is the generic
    subclass for the automatic control of the steering of mobile craft in two
    or three dimensions where electrical means are utilized. See the search
    notes to subclass 77 in Class 244 for the other classes which provide for
    radiant energy controlled steering and for a statement as to the lines
    between the classes.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, see section VI, above.  Note that
    class 246 contains a number of subclasses relating to "inductive" control
    or actuation, i.e., where an inductive connection rather than a physical
    contact being made.  Subclass 8 provides for inductive telegraphy or
    telephony in train dispatching systems, subclass 63 for block signal
    systems having cab signal or train of the inductive type, subclass 194 for
    train control of the inductive type for controlling the train mechanism.
    Subclass 4, for train dispatching systems having a train carried signal or
    train control mechanism, the system including radiant energy control,
    subclasses 29+ for block signaling systems in which traffic control devices
    are controlled by radiant energy, see indented subclass 30 where radio
    energy is used, and subclass 189 for radiant energy control systems for
    controlling the engineer's brake valve on a train.

    250,    Radiant Energy, see section II, III, VI, VII, above, subclasses
    200-239 are the generic place for light sensitive systems and subclass
    336.1 is the generic subclass for methods and apparatus utilizing invisible
    ray energy for measuring and detecting purposes and subclasses 492.1+ is
    the generic place for methods and apparatus utilizing invisible ray energy,
    such as ultraviolet and infrared rays.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 129+, for electrical valve
    actuation.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 117
    for switching systems controlled by radiant energy.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses,
    provides for the structure of electronic tubes.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 63 for arc lamps and other similar consumable electrode discharge
    devices where the feeding of the electrode is controlled by radiant energy,
    usually light or radiant heat.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, see section VI,
    above.  Class 315 provides in subclasses 1+ for circuits for energizing
    cathode-ray tubes, subclass 10 for radiant energy controlled cathode-ray
    tube circuits, subclasses 32+, for electronic tubes which have a circuit
    element, such as a switch, inductance, etc., built into and structurally
    combined with the electronic tube structure, and in subclasses 32 to 363
    for systems where a gas or vapor tube or an electric lamp is energized by
    or controlled by radiant energy, including radio waves, see subclasses 149+
    for radiant energy controlled electric lamp and gas or vapor type electric
    space discharge device systems.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 16 for electric motor
    systems where the motor is controlled or supplied by space transmitted
    electromagnetic or electrostatic energy (including radio energy), subclass
    460 for electric motor systems controlled by sound or supersonic
    vibrations, subclass 480 for electric motor systems controlled by radiant
    energy (e.g., light).

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses.  See
    section VII, above, for electrical testing.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous circuits supplying
    current or potential to active devices such as an electron tube or circuits
    controlling the current or potential utilizing an active device such as an
    electron tube.

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses, for various types of
    demodulators for extracting the intelligence modulated on a high frequency
    wave.

    330,    Amplifiers, appropriate subclasses, for the various types of
    amplifier systems.

    331,    Oscillators, appropriate subclasses, for electric oscillation
    generators having utility in the radiant energy communication systems of
    Class 343.

    332,    Modulators, appropriate subclasses for modulators, per se.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, provides for wave
    transmission lines or networks, which may be used for communication
    purposes wherein the wave energy is guided or constrained by a wave
    propagating medium of appreciable electrical length with respect to the
    wave length of the propagated energy. For example, subclasses 1+ provides
    for plural channel systems and subclasses 236+ provides for single channel
    long lines having distributed electrical parameters, such as parallel
    conductors, wave guides, and shielded lines.  This class also contains
    systems and networks useful in communication with radiant energy.  See
    particularly subclasses 101+ for branched circuits with switching,
    subclasses 109+ for directional couplers, subclasses 117+ for hybrid type
    networks, subclass 13 for resonator type breakdown discharge systems, e.g.,
    T-R or R-T systems, subclass 22 for dissipating terminations for long
    lines, subclasses 24+ for coupling networks including filters, equalizers,
    delay networks, and impedance matching networks, and subclass 81 for
    attenuators.

    334,    Tuners, appropriate subclasses for tuner networks adapted for use
    in radiant energy systems.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, see sections VI above.  See subclasses
    384.1+ for electrically operated audible signals such as bells and whistles.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 418+ for computer graphic
    processing and subclasses 326+ for computer operator interface processing.

    346,    Recorders, see section V, above.

    348,    Television, see section VI above.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, for devices which utilize visible
    light and optical principles for the measurement of angles, distances,
    chromatic effects and the intensity of light, flaw analysis, and fiducial
    instruments not provided for elsewhere.  See section VII above.

    358,    Facsimile, see section VI above.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 173+ for
    photocell controlled relay and electromagnet circuits.

    362,    Illumination, appropriate subclasses for radiant energy controlled
    illuminating devices, see especially subclass 276.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 130+
    for generic data processing control systems; subclass 300 for programming
    methods or procedures; subclasses 400+ for particular application of data
    processing systems or calculating computers; subclasses 550+ for data
    processing systems or calculating computers utilized to effect a measuring,
    testing, or monitoring operation of an external device or quantity,
    particularly subclasses 570+ for specific operations performed (e.g., noise
    reduction, filtering); subclasses 600+ for hybrid computers; subclasses
    700+ for digital calculating computers; and subclass 800 for analog
    computers.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices, see
    sections VI and VII above.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, see section VII, above.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, for pulse communications via radio
    waves.

    382,    Image Analysis, appropriate subclass for pattern recognition or
    image processing.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 1+ for
    artificial intelligence, subclasses 101+ for static presentation
    processing, and subclasses 180+ for digital data processing.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 79 for a fuel burner controlled by a
    photoelectric type sensor.

    434,    Education, Demonstration, and Cryptography, subclasses 239+ for
    devices for instructing or training in the characteristics or operation of
    navigational aids, such as radio beacons, blind landing systems, direction
    finders, etc; subclasses 1+ for devices for instructing or training in
    characteristics or operation of object detecting systems, such as radar or
    sonar systems; and subclass 222 for patents relating to instruction in the
    art of signaling, including instruction in the operation of radio
    transmitters and receivers.

    455,    Telecommunications, for analog modulated carrier wave and light
    wave communications.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 150+ for high temperature (Tc > 30 K) superconducting devices,
    and particularly subclass 201 for antennas.

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclasses 200+ and 300+ for the computer application in the area of
    navigation and determining the relative location between two points.


CLS 343/700
TXT Subject matter under the class definition and limited by claimed subject
    matter to coupling electrical energy between free space and restricted
    space, i.e., the radiation or collection of such energy together with its
    transmission to or from a transmitter or receiver, and not otherwise
    classifiable.

    (1)     Note.  The free space may be interplanetary space, atmospheric
    space, the earth, or large bodies of water, and the electrical energy
    therein is radio wave energy covering the range between long and extremely
    short waves.  Excluded are visible light, infrared and ultra violet
    radiation, X-rays, and gamma rays, as well as compression wave energy,
    either sonic or supersonic.  The restricted space may be either a wire
    transmission line or a wave guide type line, and the electrical energy
    flowing therein is pulsating at the frequency of the corresponding free
    space energy, which is established by or establishes the energy flowing in
    the wire transmission line or wave guide.

    (2)     Note.  Since any conducting mass may function as a radiator or
    collector of radio wave energy, the subject matter classified here is
    specialized for use as an antenna.  The antennas as here classified are
    formed as a passive conducting mass, which may be in the form of a metallic
    current conductor, wave guide, or space discharge.  This mass in use is in
    direct engagement with free space to emit or collect radio wave energy to
    or from free space, and is coupled or connected to a source of energy or to
    a load.   To act as an antenna the mass usually has a particular shape of
    dimension, or may have electrical circuit elements, namely, resistance
    inductance, or capacity, associated therewith. Included herein are devices
    designed to operate as an antenna, but involving no particular structure
    and claimed in combination with other electrical means, when no other class
    provides for the claimed subject matter.  See the Notes to this subclass,
    below.

    (3)     Note.  Combinations of an antenna and additional nonperfecting
    structure, i.e., structure having an added purpose or independent utility
    other than to perfect the antenna, are classified as follows:

    A.      Combinations of an antenna and a diverse type art device (i.e.,
    nonradio device), such as an aircraft, water-borne device, vehicle, or
    lamp, for example, wherein the antenna is claimed by name only in
    combination with details of the device, there being no significant
    relationship between the nominal antenna and the diverse type art device,
    are generally not classified in this or indented subclasses but in the
    appropriate class taking such device.

    B.      Combinations of an antenna and a diverse type (i.e., nonradio
    device) art device including significant antenna structure or wherein a
    significant relationship exists between the antenna and the diverse type
    art device are classified in this and the indented subclasses, where the
    only structure of the diverse type device recited is structure which
    permits the antenna to function as such (e.g., supports the antenna, forms
    a ground plane or reflector for the antenna, or makes a specific type
    antenna necessary for use with the device).  For example, the combination
    of an antenna with a radio cabinet, aircraft, watercraft, or vehicle, there
    being a significant relationship between the antenna and the associated
    structure, is classified in indented subclasses 702, 705+, 709+, and 711+,
    while subclasses 720+ is the residual subclass for this subject matter.
    Where the other device is recited merely in broad terms for such purposes
    as background for the antenna or supporting the antenna, classification is
    in the appropriate indented subclasses, such as in subclasses 878+ where
    the other device is a support.

    C.      Generally, where the antenna itself is designed to function also as
    another device and significant antenna structure is recited, as for
    example, a venetian blind or water sprinkler, classification is in this and
    the indented subclasses, subclasses 708, 710, 712, and 720+ being
    especially pertinent.  Where the antenna is broadly claimed, and the other
    device is significantly claimed, classification is with the other device.
    For example, a rubber mounted vehicle bumper which may operate as an
    antenna is classified in Class 293, Vehicle Fenders, subclass 88.

    D.      Combinations of an antenna and additional electronic structure or
    system are generally classified with the combination.  For example, an
    antenna and a cabinet containing some radio structure other than the
    antenna would be classified in Class 455, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 269+. However, where detailed antenna structure is
    combined with additional electronic structure, nominally recited,
    classification is in this and the indented subclasses.  For example, such
    terms as transmitter, receiver, signal source, and load are considered
    nominal recitation of the other structure.  A plurality of antennas
    combined with additional electronic structure nominally recited is
    considered as detailed antenna structure with a nominal electronic
    structure, and is classified in this and the indented subclasses.  A
    plurality of such nominal elements, such as a plurality of transmitters, a
    plurality of receivers, or a transmitter and receiver, are generally
    considered nominal structure, which when combined with detailed antenna
    structure are classified in this and the indented subclasses.  When the
    antenna is combined with a nominal transmitter and receiver forming a
    duplex system, classification is in Class 370, Multiplex Communications,
    subclasses 276+ as a duplex system.

            The combination of an antenna and electric space discharge device
    may be in this class (343) where the combination performs the functions
    there defined.  Where the antenna includes an electric discharge device,
    the discharge serving as a portion of the antenna coupling, and wherein the
    combination performs no function classified elsewhere, classification is in
    this class (343) subclass 701.  See Class 315, subclass 34 for a space
    discharge device having an antenna within or integral therewith and Class
    325, especially subclass 384 for means for coupling antennas to radio
    receivers by means of electron tubes.

    (4)     Note.

    A.      Combinations of an antenna within the class definition and
    additional structure for the purpose of improving or perfecting the antenna
    in the performance of its primary function, which is the radiation or
    collection of radio wave energy together with the transmission of such
    energy to or from the transmitter or receiver, are classified in this and
    the indented subclasses where the structure claimed includes significant
    antenna structure or is more than is provided for in other classes.
    Examples of such subject matter are found in indented subclasses 704, 872,
    878, and 904; subclass 904 being the residuary home for such subject matter.

    B.      Combinations of an antenna with no significant antenna structure
    with perfecting structure, such as a support, connector or leadin, the
    combination not being peculiar to antennas (i.e., the combination has more
    general application) are classified in a more general class if such exists.
     For example, the structure of a metallic antenna rod, whether insulated or
    not, unlimited by modifications for radiating purposes, together with a
    support is classified in Class 52, Static Structures (e.g., Buildings),
    subclasses 108, 109, 110, 111+, 632, 633+, and 720+.  Where the antenna is
    in the form of a generalized conductor, whether insulated or not, combined
    with lead-in or connector means, classification is in Class 174,
    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators.  Where a nominal antenna is formed
    as a helical extensible spring, classification is in Class 267, Spring
    Devices, subclass 74.  Where a nominal antenna is formed as a rod of
    adjustable length with a joint for permitting such adjustment,
    classification is in Class 287, Rod Joints or Couplings, subclass 58.

    C.      Combinations of a nominal antenna or a nominal reflector together
    with significant structure used with the antenna for supporting, moving,
    signaling some condition of the antenna, etc., are not classified in this
    or the indented subclasses where some other class provides for the claimed
    subject matter (e.g., the support class provides for the significant
    support structure and will also take the thing supported by name only),
    even though the combination improves or perfects the operation of the
    antenna or reflector.  Such subject matter is found in the classes which
    provide for the significant structure used with the nominal antenna or
    reflector. Situations of this nature are as follows (for an exception, see
    (11) Note, below):
    1.      The combination of a nominal antenna or reflector together with
    significant
    mechanism for moving the antenna or reflector, is classified in Class 74,
    Machine Element or Mechanism, especially subclass 1, where the mechanism is
    for scanning, sweeping or orienting the antenna.  The broad recitation of a
    motor for driving the mechanism in this combination does not preclude
    classification in this class (74).
    2.      The combination of a nominal antenna or reflector together with an
    electric
    motor and motor control means for moving the antenna or reflector, is
    classified in Class 318, Electricity:  Motive Power Systems.  See also
    section I.E., of the class definition of Class 318.
    3.      Combinations of a nominal antenna or reflector together with
    significant
    structure for providing a signal, indication or alarm indicative of some
    condition of the antenna or reflector, are classified in Class 116, Signals
    and Indicators, where the signaling structure is mechanical in nature, and
    in Class 340, Communications:  Electrical, where the signaling structure is
    electrical in nature.  This reference to Classes 116 and 340 does not
    include signals, indicators or alarms actuated by the radio wave energy
    collected or transmitted by the antenna.  For example, Class 340 includes
    electrical signaling means for indicating the direction in which the
    antenna is oriented, but Class 343, subclasses 100+, includes direction
    finding radio systems.
    4.      Combinations of a nominal antenna together with significant
    structure for
    transmitting electrical energy, which may be signal energy, thereto and
    permitting movement of the antenna are classified in the appropriate
    subclass of Class 191, Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles. Where a
    flexible extension for transmitting electrical energy between relatively
    moving parts is combined with a reel, classification is in subclasses 12.2+
    of Class 191.  The addition of a drag to any of the combinations involving
    Class 191 as here set forth is sufficient to exclude such subject matter
    from Class 191. For classification of such combinations, see paragraph 6
    under this section, subclass 707 below, and also the reference to Class
    244, Aeronautics, under "SEARCH CLASS", below.
    5.      Combinations of nominal antennas together with a support are
    classified in
    Class 211, Supports:  Racks, where the support involves frame structures or
    a plurality of supports, or supports a plurality of antennas; and in Class
    248, Supports, where the support is a single support or supports a single
    antenna.
    6.      Combinations of a nominal antenna together with a reel are
    classified in
    Class 242, Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding.
    7.      Combinations of a nominal antenna together with aircraft structure
    along
    with such elements as a fair lead, a drag on the free end of the antenna,
    and a reel or other extending and retracting structure are classified in
    Class 244, Aeronautics, subclass 1.
    8.      Combinations of a nominal antenna together with significant
    electrical
    connector or terminal structure are classified in Class 439, Electrical
    Connectors.

    (5)     Note.  Subcombinations of an antenna which are not otherwise
    classified and are specialized for use in an antenna are classified in this
    and indented subclasses.  Examples of such subject matter are antenna
    components, such as reflectors and directors.  Radio wave lenses,
    refractors and polarizing converters, which are usually associated with an
    antenna or a wave guide, are also classified here.

    (6)     Note.  Subcombinations merely amenable to use in an antenna are
    classified with the subcombination.  For example, stock materials and other
    fabricated materials which may be used in making an antenna are classified
    in such classes as 28, Textiles:  Manufacturing, 29, Metal Working, 138,
    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, and 139, Textiles:  Weaving and 245, Wire
    Fabrics and Structure. See the Search Notes under subclasses 897, 900 and
    907 below for a field of search for such materials.

    (7)     Note.  The electrical energy coupled by the antennas of this and
    the indented subclasses is ordinarily signaling energy for such purposes as
    communication and telemetering.  Also included are antennas and reflectors
    which are analogous in structure to those used in communication and
    telemetering.  Many other classes provide for apparatus for treating
    persons or materials with radiated electromagnetic waves and include
    antennas and reflectors which are specialized for such use.  See, for
    example, Class 422, Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting,
    Deodorizing, Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 221+ for processes and
    apparatus for preserving, disinfecting and sterilizing, which may involve
    electromagnetic waves; Class 99, Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass
    451, for apparatus for treating foods with electromagnetic waves.  Class
    128, Surgery, particularly subclasses 404+, for electrical applicators for
    treating the human body; Class 134, Cleaning and Liquid Contact With
    Solids, subclass 1, for cleaning and liquid contact with solids involving a
    electromagnetic wave energy; Class 204, Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave
    Energy, subclasses 154+, for chemical processes involving electromagnetic
    wave energy; Class 219, Electric Heating, subclass 10.55, for structure for
    heating a device or material by subjecting it to a field of electromagnetic
    wave radiation; Class 250, Radiant Energy, subclasses 493+, for structure
    generating and applying ray energy; and Class 426, Food or Edible Material:
     Processes, Compositions, and Products, subclasses 234, 235, 236, and 237+,
    for processes involving the application of electromagnetic waves in the
    treatment of edible material.

    (8)     Note.  There are other classes which provide for structures which
    project or extract to or from space, earth, or water signaling energy which
    is wave energy and may be in the form of electromagnetic wave energy (other
    than radio waves); and such subject matter is not classified in this and
    the indented subclasses.  For example, this subject matter may be found in
    the following classes and subclasses:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 18+ for visual or audible code
    signaling, subclass 27 for submarine sound signaling, and subclasses 137+
    for horns, whistles and compressional wave generators for signaling.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 43 for space induction telegraph systems.

    181,    Acoustics, appropriate subclasses for acoustical signaling systems
    and subclass 175, for sound modifying means.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.01 and
    61.02 for electric circuit makers and breakers responsive to sound and
    light respectively.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclasses 8, 63 and 194 for
    inductive type railway signaling systems.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses, for the structure of
    inductor devices, per se, which may be used in inductive type signaling
    systems.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 4+ for under water
    compressional wave signaling systems, and especially subclasses 8+ for
    compressional wave transducers; subclasses 15.5+ for earth propagated
    compressional wave signaling systems; subclasses 366+ for visual electrical
    signaling; and subclass 384.1 for audible electrical signaling.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    109+ for light wave communications.

    (9)     Note.  Communication or signaling systems including an antenna as
    an element or subcombination are classified with the system.  Such
    communication systems which may include an antenna as an element or
    subcombination thereof are classified in Class 246, Railway Switches and
    Signals, subclass 30 for railway block-signal systems involving Hertzian
    waves (See also the reference to Class 246 under section VIII of the class
    definition, above); Class 250, Radiant Energy, for radiant energy systems
    which may include an antenna (See also the references to Class 250 under
    sections II, III, VI, VII and VIII of the class definition of this class
    (343), and under the Notes to this subclass (700); Class 318, Electricity:
    Motive Power Systems, subclasses 16 and 480 for motor control systems
    involving radiant energy; Class 340, Communications:  Electrical,
    subclasses 189+ and 224 for signaling systems involving radiant energy; and
    this class (343) subclasses 5+ for reflected and/or otherwise returned wave
    systems, subclasses 100+ for directive systems; Class 370, Multiplex
    Communications, for duplex and multiplex systems.

    (10)    Note.  Antennas withing the subclass definition combined with a
    lightning arrester are classified in subclass 904 of this class.  Lightning
    arresters generally are classified in Class 361, Electricity:  Electrical
    Systems and Devices, subclass 40 for lightning arresters.  Lightning
    arresters where the only structure is an arc or spark gap are classified in
    Class 313, Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices.  Lightning arresters
    combined with thermal switches are classified in Class 200, Electricity:
    Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 115.

    (11)    Note.  As between Class 333, Wave Transmission Lines and Networks,
    and this and indented subclasses, the combination of an antenna and its
    coupling network, whether single or plural channel, where the antenna is
    only nominally recited, is classified in this and the indented subclasses.

    (12)    Note.  As between loop antennas and the inductor devices of Class
    336, Inductor Devices, the claiming of an antenna by name only or structure
    peculiar to antennas together with inductor structure would classify the
    patent in this class (343), subclasses 700+, and particularly subclasses
    866+.  If the disclosure is a loop antenna, but the claims recite merely an
    inductor device, classification is in Class 336.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 600+, for a method of making an antenna
    or other wave-energy "plumbing" device not elsewhere classified.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclass for a
    residual elongated or openwork structure which may be disclosed or merely
    defined as an antenna, particularly subclass 40 for a shaft or tower with
    an article support, 108 for a strip-like unit which is reversibly flexible
    and rigid, 110 for an elongated member attached to a vehicle shell, 111+
    for a mechanism operated or relatively movable assembly, 632 for an axially
    extensible shaft or openwork, 633+ for a residual openwork    structure,
    e.g., tower, mast, grating, etc., and 720+ for a residual rigid elongated
    structure.

    60,     Power Plants, appropriate subclasses for fluid actuated devices
    which may be used for extending or retracting an antenna to its operative
    or inoperative position.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, for mechanisms for controlling the
    position of an antenna, and particularly subclass 1 for mechanisms for
    imparting scanning, sweeping or orienting motion to an antenna.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 451, for apparatus for
    treating foods with electromagnetic waves.

    114,    Ships, subclass 311 for drags or sea anchors.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, for mechanical signaling or indicating
    structure which may be used with an antenna.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclass 1 for cleaning
    processes including application of electrical, radiant or wave energy to
    the work.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclass 425 for fabric materials including
    metal which may be used as an antenna.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 3 for lightning
    rod conductor structure, subclasses 6+ for earth grounds in general which
    may be used with antennas, subclasses 35+ for anti-inductive structures
    involving a shield or screen, subclass 45 for towers, poles or posts for
    supporting overhead conductors, subclasses 68.1+ for cables and conductors
    which may be used in antennas, and subclasses 137+ for antenna insulators,
    and particularly subclasses 151+ for antenna insulators through a wall or
    plate.

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 378+ for vibration dampers which use the inertia
    of a damping mass to dissipate motion; and subclass 381 for dampers using
    friction between damper elements to dissipate motion.

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, for means for transmitting
    electrical energy between relatively moving parts, one of which may be a
    movable antenna, and particularly subclasses 12.2+ where a reel is
    involved, and subclasses 22+ where a conductor presenting a substantially
    continuous exposed surface along the path of movement for contact with a
    collector is involved.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, for structure adapted
    for switching signal energy to or from an antenna.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, for electrical or wave
    energy processes and apparatus.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, appropriate subclasses for electrolytic
    processes and selected electrolytic products.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, for frame structure supporting means which
    usually involve a plurality of supports or a support for a plurality of
    articles which may be antennas.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 600+ for inductive heating, subclasses
    678+ for microwave heating, and subclasses 764+ for capacitive dielectric
    heating.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 370+, particularly
    subclasses 390.2, 390.3, and 917 for a reeling device on which a flexible
    antenna may wound.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 1 for miscellaneous aircraft structure
    including fairlead structure, in combination with a wire or cable, which
    may be a trailing antenna, and which may include a drag at the free end of
    the wire or cable.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclasses 8, 63, and 194 for
    inductive signaling systems which may involve inductive coupling devices
    similar to loop antennas; and subclass 30 for Hertzian wave systems
    involving antennas.  See also the reference to Class 246 under section VIII
    of the class definition of this class (343).

    248,    Supports, for supporting structure usually involving single
    supports or supporting a single article which may be an antenna.

    293,    Vehicle Fenders, subclass 136 for vehicle bumpers with rubber
    mounting means, which may be used as antennas.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, for
    miscellaneous electrical transmission or interconnection systems not
    otherwise classified.  See particularly subclasses 11+ for plural load
    systems, subclasses 43+ for plural supply systems, subclasses 89+ for
    anti-induction systems, and subclasses 112+ for switching systems.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 7.1 for radio type cabinets.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 34 for the
    structural combination of an electric discharge device and an antenna,
    integrally united.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, for motor control systems which
    may be used for controlling the position of antennas, particularly for such
    purposes as scanning, sweeping, or orienting.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, see section VII of the class
    definition of Class 343.

    332,    Modulators, subclass 174 for absorption type amplitude modulators
    which may include a directive antenna.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 1+ for plural
    channel wave transmission systems which may be used for coupling antennas
    to their transmitters or receivers, which may involve impedance matching,
    directional couplers, hybrid type networks and switching in addition;
    subclass 22 for dissipating terminations for long lines which may simulate
    the power absorbing characteristics of antennas; subclass 23 for artificial
    lines which may simulate the impedance characteristics of an antenna over a
    frequency range; subclasses 24+ for coupling networks for coupling an
    antenna to its source or load, which may involve balanced to unbalanced
    coupling networks, delay networks, impedance matching, equalizers, and wave
    filters; subclasses 219+ for resonators of the distributed parameter type;
    and subclasses 236+ for long lines.  See (11) Note immediately above.  See
    also the reference to Class 333 under section VIII of the class (343)
    definition.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses, for inductor structure,
    per se, including coils and coil structure which may be used as loop
    antennas or in the coupling systems of antennas. See (12) Note, above.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 853.1+ for telemetering via
    a radiant energy beam.  See also (4) Note, C, 3 and (8) Note above, and
    sections VI and VII and the reference to Class 340 in section VIII of the
    class definition of Class 343.

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 1-205 for reflected or otherwise
    returned radio wave energy systems which are characterized by some quality
    that varies according to the relative direction, position or plane of
    polarization of the sender and receiver, which may include and antenna.
    See Class 455 for transmitter and receiver, which may include and antenna.
    See Class 455 for transmitter and receiver systems where such directive
    properties are not present.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    483+ for optical polarizers, subclasses 642+ for optical lenses, subclasses
    838+ for optical reflectors and subclasses 350+ and 885+ for optical
    filters.

    362,    Illumination, for illuminating devices which often are structurally
    similar to antennas; particularly subclass 19 for illuminating means with a
    polarizer; subclass 327 for combined reflectors and refractors; subclasses
    341+ for reflectors and subclasses 326+ for refractors.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, for pulse communication apparatus
    having an antenna.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for a joint or
    coupling which may be used in an antenna.  See especially subclasses 52+
    for articulated connections.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 234, 235, 236, and 237+, for processes involving the application
    of electromagnetic waves in the treatment of foods.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, for electrical connector or terminal
    structure which may be used in antennas.  See also (4) Note, C, 8, above.

    455,    Telecommunication, particularly subclasses 6, 19, 25, 82, 83, 107,
    121+, 129, 131, 193, and 269+ for analog modulated carrier wave
    communication systems with antenna structure.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses
    115+ for electrical applicators for treating the human body.


CLS 343/701
TXT Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein the antenna includes an electric
    discharge device, the space discharge of this device serving as a portion
    of the antenna or the antenna coupling.

    (1)     Note.  When the combination of the antenna and discharge device
    performs some function in addition to the antenna function, and structure
    performing such additional function is classified elsewhere, classification
    is with such structure.  For example, the combination of antenna and
    discharge device is Classified in Class 455, Telecommunications, subclasses
    129 and 269+, if the tube operates as an oscillator or detector, the
    combination being a transmitter or receiver respectively, or in this class
    (343), subclasses 350+ if in addition the combination is directive.

    (2)     Note.  For the space discharge to serve as the antenna coupling as
    defined above, the discharge must actually convey the signal energy.  The
    mere control of the discharge by the signal device as in the conventional
    amplifier triode is not sufficient for classification here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 34 for the
    structural combination of an antenna integral with a space discharge device.

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave System and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 350+ for directive transmitting and
    receiving systems, which may include electric space discharge devices
    combined with antennas. See also (1) Note above.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 291 for means for coupling antennas to
    radio receivers by means of electron tube means.


CLS 343/702
TXT Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein the antenna is combined with the
    cabinet which encloses the receiving or transmitting structure in such
    manner that a significant relationship exists between the antenna and
    cabinet.

    (1)     Note.  A significant relationship may exist between the antenna and
    the cabinet when the antenna and cabinet have a common portion, when the
    antenna retracts into the hollow cabinet, when the antenna is shaped to
    correspond to the cabinet shape, or when the antenna is contained within
    the cabinet. However, when the cabinet is a mere support for the antenna
    mounted externally thereon, classification is not in this subclass, but in
    subclasses 878+, below.

    (2)     Note.  Antennas combined with a housing or protective covering for
    the antenna alone are not classified in this subclass but in subclass 872,
    below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    872+,   for antennas with a housing or protective covering.  See (2) Note,
    above.

    878+,   for antennas with a support.  See (1) Note, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 7.1 for radio type cabinets.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 269+ for radio cabinets combined
    with antenna positioning or support means.


CLS 343/703
TXT Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein the antenna is combined with
    structure which tells the magnitude of the signal energy flowing to, in, or
    from the antenna, and wherein a significant relationship exists between the
    antenna and this measuring structure.

    (1)     Note.  Patents within the general subclass definition involving
    testing are classified in this subclass, if the testing involves measuring
    as herein defined.

    (2)     Note.  Antennas combined with a signal, indicator, or alarm which
    indicates some condition of the antenna are classified in subclasses 760
    and 894 below.  Also, patents within the general definition involving
    testing are classified in subclass 894 below, if the testing involves
    indicating as there specified without measuring.

    (3)     Note.  See (1) and (2) Notes above for statements concerning
    testing.

    (4)     Note.  A significant relationship may exist when the measuring
    structure and active antenna share a common detail, or when the measuring
    device is coupled to the antenna where the voltage or current is critical,
    such as a standing wave node or anti-node, or when details peculiar to an
    antenna are necessary for the operation of measuring structure.  See also
    section VII under the class definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, particularly subclasses 76.11+
    for measuring electrical energy generally.

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 417+ for direction finding receivers
    which involve, in addition to the measuring structure responsive to the
    magnitude of the signal energy, structure for showing the location of a
    remote signal source.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 67.1+ and 226.1 for means for
    testing and calibrating radio systems and/or receivers.


CLS 343/704
TXT Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein the antenna includes means which
    prevents or reduces ice, snow or sleet accumulation, such as heating
    apparatus or material having a low freezing point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    904,    for antennas combined with structure for perfecting the antenna not
    otherwise classified.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 80, 140, 151, 234, and 272+ for
    refrigeration processes and apparatus involving defrosting, and subclasses
    73 and 349+ for congealed product making with thawing.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 32+ for pipes and tubular
    conduits with thawing and freeze prevention.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 47+ for a structurally installed heat
    exchanger.

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, subclass 62 for structure
    transmitting electricity to vehicles with ice preventers or clearers.

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclasses for electric heating means.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 134 for aircraft structure with ice
    prevention.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 70 for compositions including those for
    frost prevention and ice thawing.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 55+ for inductor devices with
    temperature modifying means.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 387.1+ for audible
    electrical weatherproofing signaling means which may be combined with
    devicers.


CLS 343/705
TXT Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein the active antenna is combined
    with, or has at least a part in common with at least a part of, a device
    peculiarity adapted to travel or be suspended in the air such as an
    airplane, balloon, projectile, or guided missile, and wherein a significant
    relationship exists between the device and the active antenna.

    (1)     Note.  A significant relationship exists when the details of the
    active antenna cooperate with details of the aircraft device, as when the
    antenna is shaped in accordance with the shape of the device.

    (2)     Note.  Where the device with which the antenna is combined is a
    watercraft or vehicle, not peculiarly adapted or limited to travel or to be
    suspended in the air, classification is not here but in subclasses 709+ and
    711+ below, as qualified by (3) Note.

    (3)     Note.  Combinations of an antenna and aircraft when the aircraft is
    a mere support, and the antenna could be supported as well on some other
    object, are not classified in this subclass, but in subclasses 878+ below.

    (4)     Note.  Combinations of specific aircraft structure and a nominal
    antenna are not classified in this subclass, but in Class 244, Aeronautics.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    709+,   for antennas combined with watercraft.

    711+,   for antennas combined with a vehicle.

    877,    for antennas with a reel.

    878+,   for antennas with a support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, particularly subclasses 335+ and 405,
    for aerial type mines and pyrotechnics which travel through the air,
    respectively.

    244,    Aeronautics, for aircraft structure in general.  See also (1) Note,
    above.


CLS 343/706
TXT Subject matter under subclass 705 wherein at least a portion of the active
    antenna is maintained in an elevated position by a lighter-than-air device,
    e.g., balloon.

    (1)     Note.  The antenna may be mounted on the device to move about
    freely therewith, or one end may be secured to the ground and the other end
    maintained by the device in an elevated position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 348 and 354 for pyrotechnics
    combined with balloons.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 30 and 31+ for lighter-than-air airships
    and balloons, respectively.


CLS 343/707
TXT Subject matter under subclass 705 wherein the active antenna is an
    elongated flexible mass suspended from the aircraft, or the active antenna
    is suspended from the aircraft by an elongated flexible support so that the
    antenna will trail from the aircraft as by the relative motion between the
    aircraft and the surrounding air.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    709,    for water-borne trailing antennas.

    877,    for antennas with reels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclass 311 for drags or sea anchors.

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 378+ for vibration dampers which use the inertia
    of a damping mass to dissipate motion; and subclass 381 for dampers using
    friction between damper elements to dissipate motion.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 1 for aircraft with trailing structure, which
    may be a nominal antenna.


CLS 343/708
TXT Subject matter under subclass 705 wherein the active antenna and the device
    have a common portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    710,    for antennas with watercraft wherein the watercraft have a part in
    common with the active antenna.

    712,    for antennas with a vehicle wherein the vehicle or part thereof is
    a part of the active antenna.

    720,    for antennas with a diverse type art device wherein the device and
    antenna have a common portion.


CLS 343/709
TXT Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein the active antenna is combined
    with, or has at least a part in common with at least a part of a device
    peculiarly adapted for travel or to be suspended in water, such as a
    surface ship, submarine, torpedo, buoy or other floating structure and
    wherein a significant relationship exists between the device and the active
    antenna.

    (1)     Note.  A significant relationship exists when the details of the
    active antenna cooperate with details of the watercraft device, as when the
    antenna is shaped in accordance with the shape of the device.

    (2)     Note.  Where the device with which the antenna is combined is a
    vehicle not peculiarly adapted or limited to travel or be suspended in the
    water, classification is not here but in subclasses 711+ below, as
    qualified by (3) Note immediately following.

    (3)     Note.  Combinations of an antenna and watercraft when the
    watercraft is a mere support, and the antenna could be supported as well on
    some other object, are not classified in this subclass, but in subclasses
    878+ below.

    (4)     Note.  Water buoyant antennas are classified here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    705+,   for antennas combined with an aircraft.

    707,    for aircraft with a trailing or drag type antenna.

    711+,   for antennas combined with a vehicle.

    719,    for antennas buried underground or submerged under water.

    878+,   for antennas with a support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, for ships and watercraft in general, and particularly
    subclass 311 for drags and sea anchors.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclasses 1+ for buoys.


CLS 343/710
TXT Subject matter under subclass 709 wherein the active antenna and the device
    have a common portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    708,    for antennas with aircraft, wherein the aircraft is part of the
    active antenna.

    712,    for antennas with a vehicle wherein the vehicle is a part of the
    active antenna.

    720,    for antennas with diverse type art devices which may have a common
    portion.


CLS 343/711
TXT Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein the active antenna is combined
    with, or has at least a part in common with at least a part of, vehicle
    structure or accessories peculiarly adapted for use with a vehicle, and
    wherein a significant relationship exists between the antenna and vehicle
    or accessory structure.

    (1)     Note.  A significant relationship exists when the details of the
    active antenna cooperate with details of the vehicle, as when the antenna
    is shaped in accordance with the vehicle shape.

    (2)     Note.  Where the combined vehicle structure is part of a ship,
    submarine, aircraft or any similar vehicle having structure limiting it to
    use in air or water, classification is not here but in subclasses 705+ or
    709+.

    (3)     Note. Combinations of an antenna and vehicle when the vehicle is
    merely a support for the antenna, and the antenna could be supported as
    well on some other object, are not classified here but in subclasses 878+,
    below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    705+,   for antennas combined with vehicles or devices which travel or are
    suspended in air.  See (2) Note, above.

    709+,   for antennas combined with watercraft.  See (2) Note, above.

    878+,   for antennas with supports.  See (3) Note, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, particularly subclasses 8 and 30 for
    railway signaling devices and systems.

    280,    Land Vehicles, for vehicles and related subject matter.  See also
    the general notes therein.


CLS 343/712
TXT Subject matter under subclass 711 wherein the active antenna and vehicle
    structure or accessory have a common portion.

    (1)     Note.  The active antenna or portion thereof may constitute an
    element of the vehicle, or conversely the vehicle or portion thereof may
    constitute an element of the active antenna.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    708     and 710, for antennas having a portion in common with a device
    traveling or suspended in air or water, respectively.

    720+,   for antennas combined with a diverse type art device.

    729+,   for plural diverse type antennas using the same active element.

    846+,   for grounding structure having a portion in common with a vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    293,    Vehicle Fenders, particularly subclass 136 for vehicle bumpers with
    mounting means which may be of rubber or other insulating material, wherein
    the bumper may be used as an antenna.


CLS 343/713
TXT Subject matter under subclass 711 wherein the body of the vehicle serves as
    a support or supporting base for the antenna.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this subclass the antenna must be
    combined with the vehicle shell or body, which in the case of an automobile
    is mounted on the running gear (chassis).  The body includes the top, hood,
    fenders, doors, windshield, cowl, etc., as opposed to accessories such as
    bumper, spare tire, mirror, turn indicator, etc., which latter group when
    combined with an antenna, may be classified in subclass 711, above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    718,    for antennas which are adapted to be attached to or carried by the
    human body.

    720+,   for antennas combined with a diverse type art device.

    878+,   for antennas with supports.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, appropriate subclasses, for railway rolling
    stock body structure.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 89+ for motor vehicle bodies.

    293,    Vehicle Fenders, subclass 136 for vehicle fenders with rubber
    mounting means or the like.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, for land vehicles bodies and tops.


CLS 343/714
TXT Subject matter under subclass 713 wherein the active antenna or a portion
    thereof is movably supported on the vehicle body together with structure
    controlled within the body for moving the antenna for such purposes as
    adjusting the operative position of the antenna or moving the antenna from
    an operative to an inoperative position, e.g., extending or retracting a
    rod antenna.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    723,    for single linear antennas adjustable in length which have an
    appreciable wave length dimension.

    757+,   for antennas combined with means for moving such antennas for
    scanning, sweeping or orienting.

    823,    for centered balanced doublet antennas adjustable in length.

    869,    for loop antennas with a rotatable support.

    877,    for antennas with a reel for winding such antennas.  See also the
    search notes thereunder.

    880+    and 889, for antennas with an adjustable or collapsible support,
    and for rod type antennas retractible into a support, respectively.

    901+,   for telescoping rod type antennas.


CLS 343/715
TXT Subject matter under subclass 713 wherein the active antenna is of the rod
    type as defined in subclass 900, below.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note under subclass 900 below for the lines between
    rod type antennas and rod structure as found in classes such as 52, Static
    Structures (e.g., Building), and 174, Electricity:  Conductors and
    Insulators.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    714,    for a combined vehicle and rod type antenna whose position is
    changed or which may be extended or retracted by control means situated
    inside the vehicle.

    900,    and the search notes thereunder, for rod type antennas in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 720+ for a residual
    rigid elongated unit not defining an electrical feature for Class 343.


CLS 343/716
TXT Subject matter under subclass 713 wherein the portion of the body
    supporting the antenna is the running board.


CLS 343/717
TXT Subject matter under subclass 711 wherein the antenna, when in operative
    position, is supported under the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    713+,   for antennas supported by the body of a vehicle, as distinguished
    from the subject matter in this subclass (717), where the antennas are
    supported from other parts of the vehicle than the body, generally the
    chassis.  See (1) Note under subclass 713, above.

    716,    for antennas supported under the running board of a vehicle.

    878+,   for antennas with a support.


CLS 343/718
TXT Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein the antenna is shaped to fit the
    body or to be supported by body, or including structure whereby the antenna
    is secured to the body to be freely portable by the body under operative
    conditions, or structure which enables the body to operate as an antenna.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    878,    for antennas with a support.

    906,    for antennas with an electrical connector.

    908,    for antenna elements of a particular shape.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclasses 5+ for body or belt
    attached package and article carriers.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 351 for portable radio receivers.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses
    149+ for body attaching electrodes.


CLS 343/719
TXT Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein the active portion of the antenna
    is claimed to be at least partially buried under the ground or submerged in
    water under operative conditions.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this subclass, the active antenna must
    be at least partially buried under the ground or submerged in water
    generally. Antennas having a liquid-filled housing and liquid column
    antennas placed above ground are not classified her, but in subclasses 700
    and 872+  respectively.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    709+,   for water-borne antennas.

    829+,   for fractional, multiple, or full wave linear type antennas with
    grounding structure.

    841+,   for antennas with electrical shields which may be used underground
    or under water.

    845,    for antennas with a ground connection spaced from the feed line
    connection.

    846+,   for antennas with grounding structure, including counterpoises.

    872+,   for antennas with a housing or protective covering which may be
    used underground or underwater.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 6+ for earth
    grounds for electrical apparatus generally, and subclasses 37+ for
    underground conductors.


CLS 343/720
TXT Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein the antenna is combined with
    other devices or structures having an added purpose or independent utility
    other than to perfect the antenna, i.e., the other devices or structures
    are not directly related to the primary function of the antenna, which is
    the emission or collection of electromagnetic wave energy together with the
    conveying of such energy to or from the transmitter or receiver leadin.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass receives subject matter such as an antenna
    combined with a lamp, building structure, umbrella, etc., if more than a
    mere support. Antenna perfections or improvements are classified elsewhere
    in the antenna subclasses, subclasses 904+ being the residual home for such
    perfections or improvements.

    (2)     Note.  Combinations of antennas and other devices or structures
    wherein such other devices or structures are claimed in broad terms merely
    for such purposes as background for the antenna or supporting the antenna
    are not classified here, but in the appropriate antenna perfecting
    subclass.  For example, classification is in subclasses 878+ if the other
    device is a support.

    (3)     Note.  Generally where the antenna, within the subclass definition,
    itself is designed to function also as another device, as for example, a
    venetian blind or water sprinkler, classification is in this subclass.

    (4)     Note.  Generally where antenna details are claimed together with
    other device or structure broadly or specifically, classification is here,
    especially where the other device is mechanical in nature as opposed to
    electrical.  When such device or structure is an element or component radio
    apparatus, classification may be in the appropriate subclass in Class 455.
    For example, subject matter involving an antenna and a loud speaker or an
    antenna and a power supply for a radio apparatus would be classified in
    Class 455.

    (5)     Note.  Generally where the antenna is claimed broadly and the other
    device or structure is claimed specifically, classification is with such
    other device or structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    705+,   for antennas combined with a device traveling or suspended in the
    air.

    709,    for water-borne antennas.

    711+,   for antennas combined with vehicle structure.

    904+,   for antennas combined with perfecting structure, not classified
    elsewhere. See also (1) Note, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 34 for
    electric lamp and discharge devices and systems combined with antennas.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 344+ for radio receivers combined
    with diverse type art device.


CLS 343/721
TXT Subject matter under subclass 720 wherein the diverse type art device is a
    light.

    (1)     Note.  Where the light is a signal or  indicator to provide an
    indication of the condition of the antenna such as direction,
    classification is in subclass 760 or 894, below.

    (2)     Note.  Antenna subject matter together with structure energizing a
    light is classified herein even though the light itself is not claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    760,    for antennas with means for moving the antenna for sweeping,
    scanning or orienting including signals, indicators or alarms.  See also
    (1) Note, above.

    894,    for antennas in general with a signal, indicator or alarm.  See
    also (1) Note, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 28 for obstruction lights to
    warn aircraft, and subclasses 907+ and 468+ for traffic and vehicle signal
    light systems and signal lights, respectively.

    362,    Illumination, appropriate subclasses for illuminating devices.


CLS 343/722
TXT Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein an active antenna includes an
    elongated portion having lumped inductance and capacity in series or shunt
    with the active portion remote from the lead-in terminals to pass a
    particular frequency or band of frequencies and to block another frequency
    or band of frequencies.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the lumped inductance and capacity usually
    act as an impedance in effect terminating the active antenna at its point
    of connection for a particular frequency, or they may cause the active
    antenna to resonate at a plurality of different frequencies.

    (2)     Note.  For Classification in this subclass, the inductance and
    capacity must be lumped.  Antennas having distributed inductance and
    capacity in series or shunt with the active portion remote from the lead-in
    connection to pass a particular frequency or band of frequencies and to
    block another frequency or band of frequencies are not classified in this
    subclass, but in subclasses 802 and 828 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    723,    for single adjustable length electrically long linear antennas.

    729+,   for plural diverse type antennas using the same active element.

    744,    for high frequency loop type antennas with series reactance in the
    loop.

    745+,   for antennas with variable reactance for tuning the antenna.

    749+,   for antennas with lumped reactance for loading the antenna.

    802,    for balanced doublet antennas with distributed reactance added to
    the arms.

    828,    for fractional, multiple or full wave length linear type antennas
    with a non-uniformity in the antenna.

    850+,   for antennas in general with a coupling network or impedance in the
    leadin which may include filters in the coupling network.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission lines and Networks, subclasses 167+ for wave
    filters, per se.


CLS 343/723
TXT Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein the antenna is a single end fed
    elongated linear mass of appreciable electrical length, and is physically
    adjustable in its length, usually for tuning the antenna.

    (1)     Note.  A lattice type tower may be classified here, if it is the
    electrical equivalent of a single end fed elongated linear mass, and the
    other limitations of the definition are met.

    (2)     Note.  For classification herein the resonant length of the linear
    antenna or some indication of appreciable electrical length together with
    adjustability must be claimed, as for example "adjustable in length for
    tuning" (see subclasses 825+ where a particular wave length is claimed but
    the adjustable feature is not claimed). Subject matter involving adjustable
    length linear antennas which are not of appreciable wave length, is not
    classified herein.  For example, adjustable length rod type antennas are
    classified in subclasses 900+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    745+,   for antennas with a variable reactance separate and distinct from
    the antenna for tuning.

    750,    for antennas for appreciable electrical length with adjustable
    reactance for loading.

    823,    for balance doublet antennas with adjustable length.

    825+,   for fractional, multiple or full wave length linear type antennas.

    874+,   for mast or tower type antennas.

    900+,   for rod type antennas which may be adjustable in length.


CLS 343/724
TXT Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein the active antenna is constructed
    so that it may be changed into a different species of active antenna as,
    for example, by switching means connecting the active portion or portions
    in a different arrangement to the source or load or by adding to or
    removing part of the radiating or collecting element.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this subclass the converting structure
    must produce a different active antenna having significantly different
    physical or electrical characteristics as opposed, for example, to adding
    sections to or adjusting the antenna to change its physical or electrical
    length, or adding or removing auxiliary structure (e.g., reflector).

    (2)     Note.  In this subject matter the different antennas are not in
    physical existence at the same time, but exist alternately, as opposed to
    the subject matter of subclasses 729+ wherein plural diverse antenna exist
    simultaneously.  Yet here, as in subclasses 729+, the different antennas
    employ a common active portion.

    (3)     Note.  For classification here, the change may be from one type of
    active antenna to another such as from a center-fed balanced doublet to a
    capacity type antenna or from a loop to a trailing wire antenna; or the
    change may be from one species of antenna to another within a type, such as
    from a folded dipole to a simple rod dipole.

    (4)     Note.  The rules recited under subclass 725 for determining when
    antennas are of different type are not applicable here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    725+,   for plural separate diverse type antennas.  See (4) Note, above.

    729+,   for plural diverse type active antennas using the same active
    element. See also (2) Note, above.

    794,    for diverse type balanced center-fed doublet antennas.

    832,    for an active antenna which is also a reflector.

    850+,   for active antennas with a coupling network or impedance in the
    leadin, and particularly subclass 859 for balanced to unbalanced coupling.

    876,    for antennas with switching means between the antennas and lines.

    904,    for antennas with a switch.


CLS 343/725
TXT Subject matter under subclass 700 including two antennas each of different
    type, whose active radio wave radiating or collecting elements are
    physically separate and distinct.

    (1)     Note.  When the antennas are, per se, classifiable in different
    coordinate subclasses directly indented under subclass 700, which provide
    for different types of antennas such as subclasses 767, 772, and 793, the
    antennas are deemed "of different type" as used in the above definition.
    If the antennas are, per se, classifiable in different indented subclasses
    of one of these coordinate subclasses as here established, they are not
    classified in this subclass (725), but in the coordinate subclass or the
    appropriate indented subclass thereunder.  For example, a plurality of
    diverse type doublets would be classified in subclass 794, and a plurality
    of diverse wave guide type antennas, neither being of the bi-conical horn
    type, would be classified in subclasses 776+.  Antennas falling in
    different coordinate subclasses directly indented under subclass 700 which
    subclasses are directed to combinations, are not necessarily of different
    types.  The different types of antennas as the term is here used are
    established by distinctions in the active portions of the antennas, as
    opposed to distinctions arising from combining the active antennas with
    auxiliary structure, such as reflectors, coupling networks, and supports.

    (2)     Note.  The term "physically separate and distinct" requires that
    the radiating or collecting elements of each antenna be a complete entity,
    and not share in whole or in part a common radiating or collecting portion.
     Such subject matter where the collecting or radiating portions are so
    shared are classified in subclasses 729+, below. However, the sharing of a
    common support or coupling, or the utilization by one antenna as a coupling
    element or support for the radiating or collecting element of the other
    antennas does not preclude classification in this subclasses (725+).

    (3)     Note.  For classification in this subclass, there must be a
    plurality of antennas.  A single antenna composed of structurally different
    active parts is not here classified.  For example, a sleeve type antenna
    with a rod coaxial with the sleeve the rod and sleeve being connected to
    opposite terminals of the same line, does not constitute a plurality of
    antennas, and is classified in subclass 791, below.  If each of a plurality
    of active elements is able to function independently without any of the
    remaining elements, a plurality of antennas by be present. Separate
    terminals or lead-in lines particularly with the transmission of a
    plurality of signals, is also indicative of a plurality of antennas. It may
    be noted that the utilization of one antenna by another as its feed does
    not preclude the antennas being considered plural.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    720,    for an antenna combined with a diverse type art device.

    724,    for an antenna convertible to an antenna of a different type.

    729+,   for plural diverse type active antennas having a common radiating
    or collecting portion.  See (2) Note, above.

    758,    for plural antennas relatively movable for scanning, sweeping or
    orienting.

    770+,   for plural slot type antennas.

    776+,   for plural wave guide type antennas.

    794,    for diverse type balanced doublet antennas.

    796,    797+, 799+, and 810+, for plural balanced doublets.

    824,    for a planar array of linear antennas.

    826+,   for plural, fractional, multiple or full wave linear type antennas.

    835,    for plural active antennas with a reflector.

    844,    for plural antennas spaced a fractional or full wave length apart.

    852,    for plural antennas with impedance matching.

    853,    for plural antennas with a coupling network or impedance in the
    leadin.

    867,    for plural loop type antennas.

    879,    for plural separate antennas with supports.

    893,    and the Search Notes thereunder for plural antennas in general.

    904+,   for antennas combined with other perfecting structure not elsewhere
    provided for.


CLS 343/726
TXT Subject matter under subclass 725 wherein one of the diverse type antennas
    is of the loop type and one other of the diverse type antennas is of the
    center-fed balanced doublet type, as defined in subclasses 741, 793, and
    866, below.

    (1)     Note.  For the field of search relating to this subject matter see
    the search notes under subclasses 727 and 728 immediately below.


CLS 343/727
TXT Subject matter under subclass 725 wherein one of the diverse type antennas
    is of the center-fed balanced doublet type as defined in subclass 793,
    below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    793+,   for center-fed balanced doublet type antennas in general, and
    arrays of such doublet antennas.


CLS 343/728
TXT Subject matter under subclass 725 wherein one of the diverse type antennas
    is of the loop type as defined in subclasses 741 and 866 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    732,    for circular loop type traveling wave antennas.

    741+,   for high frequency loop type antennas.

    764,    for loop type antennas with means for scanning, sweeping or
    orienting.

    788,    for loop type antennas including magnetic material.

    842,    for loop type antennas with electrical shielding.

    855,    for plural loop type antennas with coupling.

    866+,   for loop type antennas in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, for inductor devices.

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 350+ and particularly subclasses 417+
    for directive resistant energy communication systems which may include
    diverse type antenna one of which may be a loop type antenna.


CLS 343/729
TXT Subject matter under subclass 700 including two antennas each of different
    type, whose active radio wave radiating or collecting elements are at least
    partly in common.

    (1)     Note.  For a construction of the term "of different type" see (1)
    Note under subclass 725 above.

    (2)     Note.  The term "active radio wave radiating or collecting
    elements" does not include reflector structure, coupling structure, or
    support structure.  When such structures are involved, classification is in
    subclasses 725+ above, if the antennas are of different type.

    (3)     Note.  For classification in this subclass, there must be a
    plurality of antennas.  A single antenna composed of structurally different
    active parts is not here classified.  For example, a sleeve type antenna
    with a rod coaxial with the sleeve, the rod and sleeve being connected to
    opposite terminals of the same line, does not constitute a plurality of
    antennas, and is classified in subclass 791, below.  If each of a plurality
    of active elements with the common portion is able to function
    independently in its usual manner without the other a plurality of antennas
    may be present.  Separate terminals or lead-in lines particularly with the
    transmission of a plurality of signals, is also indicative of a plurality
    of antennas.  It may be noted that the utilization of one antenna by
    another as its feed does not preclude classification here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    725+,   and the search notes thereunder, for plural separate diverse type
    antennas and for subject matter pertinent to plural diverse type antennas,
    respectively.

    791,    for a single antenna composed of a sleeve and a rod.  See also (3)
    Note, above.


CLS 343/730
TXT Subject matter under subclass 729 wherein one of the antennas is of the
    balanced doublet type as classified in subclass 793, below.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the patents in this subclass involve a dipole with a
    balanced coupling to a source or load together with an unbalanced coupling
    which connects this same dipole structure as a T antenna or a rod type
    antenna to the same or different source or load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    794,    for plural diverse type balanced doublets.  See (1) Note under
    subclass 729.

    816,    for plural balanced doublets with coupling.

    853,    for plural antennas with coupling networks.

    859,    for antennas with balanced to unbalanced coupling.

    865,    for balanced antennas with a balanced coupling network.


CLS 343/731
TXT Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein an elongated conducting mass of
    appreciable electrical length with respect to the wave length of the signal
    energy (usually greater than a half-wave length) is coupled to free space
    continuously along its length to transmit signal energy between the mass
    and free space along its length; the mass being inherently adapted to, or
    being arranged to, or including structure to give the mass a delay or
    acceleration characteristic in the direction of propagation of the radio
    wave in space to which the mass is coupled so that the wave of electric
    energy conducted along the mass remains in phase with the associated radio
    wave moving in space.

    (1)     Note.  In receiving, the interaction between the wave propagated
    along the elongated conductive mass and the wave in space coupled to the
    mass results in a traveling wave progressively increasing in magnitude
    along the length of the path of the propagated wave, due to the reinforcing
    of the in-phase space wave collected along the antenna as the collected
    wave travels towards the receiving means.  The mere conduction of wave
    energy along its length as in a wave guide type antenna of subclass 772 is
    not sufficient for classification here.  The wave energy must progress in
    phase with the space wave to secure the reinforcing of the wave energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    739,    for antennas having resistance electrically remote from the
    coupling to a source or load for such purposes as the prevention of
    reflected waves.

    811,    for fishbone type arrays of center-fed balanced doublet type
    antennas.

    845,    for antennas with a ground connection spaced from the feed line
    connection.


CLS 343/732
TXT Subject matter under subclass 731 wherein the elongated conducting mass
    forms substantially a circle in a single plane.

    (1)     Note.  Helical traveling wave type antennas are not classified in
    this subclass since any single loop turn does not lie in a single plane,
    but are classified in subclass 731 above.  A plurality of traveling wave
    type antennas whose respective active portions are arranged end to end to
    form a circle are not classified herein but in subclass 737, below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    741+,   for high frequency type loops which do not operate on the traveling
    wave principle.

    866+,   for loop type antennas in general which do not operate on the
    traveling wave principle.


CLS 343/733
TXT Subject matter under subclass 731 wherein the elongated conducting mass is
    formed in two co-extensive portions, each portion being connected at the
    corresponding end to a lead-in terminal, the portions diverging and then
    converging to form a diamond or rhombus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    734,    for rhombic type traveling wave antennas with feedback.

    735,    for balanced V type traveling wave antennas having the
    configuration of part of a rhombic wave antenna.

    736,    for inverted V type traveling wave antennas having the
    configuration of part of a rhombic wave antenna.

    741,    for high frequency type loops.

    806,    for zigzag type balanced doublets.

    866,    for loop type antennas in general.


CLS 343/734
TXT Subject matter under subclass 733 including a circuit extending from the
    end of the conducting mass opposite the lead-in terminals around the mass
    to the antenna leadin or to associated circuitry for conveying, for
    example, the nonradicated energy back to the antenna input.


CLS 343/735
TXT Subject matter under subclass 731 wherein the conducting mass is composed
    of two diverging portions, each portion connected at the apex to a
    transmitter or receiver in a balanced manner.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass resembles in structure
    doublets with the arms nonlinearly arranged as classified in subclass 809,
    below.  However, in this subclass (735) the standing waves are suppressed,
    as opposed to the utilization of such waves in subclass 809, below.

    (2)     Note.  In this subclass the antenna is fed in a balanced manner at
    the apex of the V, while in subclass 736 the antenna is fed in an
    unbalanced manner at the free end of the V.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    733,    for rhombic type wave antennas which may include a V type wave
    antenna as a part thereof.

    736,    for inverted V type traveling wave antennas.  See also (2) Note,
    above.

    805,    808 and 809, for center-fed balanced doublets involving a V
    configuration. See also (1) Note, above.


CLS 343/736
TXT Subject matter under subclass 731 wherein the conducting mass is formed as
    a V, and lying usually in a substantially vertical plane with the apex of
    the V uppermost, and one end of the mass being connected to an unbalanced
    lead-in terminal.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the antenna is fed in unbalanced manner at
    the free end of the V, while in subclass 735 above the antenna is fed in a
    balanced manner at the apex of the V.

    (2)     Note.  The antennas of this subclass may include a tilt-type
    antenna as an element thereof.  Such tilt-type antennas are classified in
    subclass 731 above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    733,    for rhombic traveling wave type antennas.

    735,    for balanced V traveling wave type antennas.  See (1) Note, above.

    806,    for zigzag type balanced doublet antennas.

    824,    for planar arrays of linear antennas. 826, for plural fractional,
    multiple or full wave linear type antennas. 859, for antennas with balanced
    to unbalanced coupling networks in the leadin.


CLS 343/737
TXT At least two antennas, each as defined in subclass 731 above, which are
    independently operable.

    (1)     Note.  Two wires with a reflection transformer at the end remote
    from the coupling are not deemed plural within the definition, since each
    wire requires the cooperation of the other for the antenna to operate in
    its intended manner.  Such subject matter is classified in subclass 738
    below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    844,    for plural antennas spaced a fractional or full wave length apart.

    853+,   for plural antennas in general with a coupling network or impedance
    in the leadin.

    893,    for plural antennas in general.  See also the search notes
    thereunder for a field of search for plural antennas generally.


CLS 343/738
TXT Subject matter under subclass 731 wherein the conducting mass is composed
    of two adjacent coextensive wires with a termination at the end opposite
    the coupling end, a signal wave which is picked up by the wires and which
    is conducted along the wires to the termination being returned over the
    wires in phase opposition in the respective wires, i.e., the wires are
    effective as a balanced line for this returned energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    737,    for plural traveling wave type antennas in general which may
    include one or more two-wire antennas with reflection transformers of the
    type defined above.


CLS 343/739
TXT Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein the active antenna is combined
    with a resistance at the end electrically remote from the lead-in terminal
    to the transmitter or receiver, the resistance being connected to form a
    closed electric loop across the transmitter or receiver.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the essential purpose is usually to render
    the antenna a periodic.  The resistance in this subclass (739) is usually
    equal to the characteristic impedance of the active antenna.  The antennas
    of this subclass may involve traveling waves, but these waves are usually
    combined only to be effective as standing waves. The antennas in this
    subclass are generally of the "broadside" type (i.e., the resulting
    radiation pattern lies in a generally perpendicular axis to that of the
    active antenna element) whereas the traveling wave type antennas of
    subclass 731 are generally of the "end-fire" type, i.e., the radiation
    pattern established by the active antenna element lies along the same axis
    as the active antenna element.

    (2)     Note.  The loop may be formed through ground.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    731+,   for traveling wave type antennas terminated at the end remote from
    the antenna leadin in a resistance.  See also (1) Note, above.

    845,    for antennas with a ground connection spaced from feedline
    connection.


CLS 343/740
TXT Subject matter under subclass 739 wherein the active antenna includes the
    return circuit as an active portion thereof, thus forming two similar
    active portions, which are connected respectively to balanced lead-in
    terminals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    733,    for rhombic type traveling wave antennas.

    735,    for balanced V type traveling wave antennas.

    741,    for high frequency type loops.

    792,    for sleeve type antennas arranged as doublets.

    793+,   for balanced doublets, and particularly subclass 803 for folded
    dipoles.

    842,    for loop type antennas with shields.

    850+,   and particularly subclasses 859 and 865, for coupling networks
    involving balanced circuits.

    866,    for loop type antennas in general.


CLS 343/741
TXT Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein a current path of appreciable
    electrical length is arranged as a substantially closed active loop having
    an appreciable electrical dimension between all opposing points on the loop
    together with structure or proportions to maintain a desired current
    distribution around the loop.

    (1)     Note.  The desired current distribution usually involves a
    particular position of the standing wave pattern along the current path, or
    the instantaneous current effectively flowing in one direction along the
    current path.  The purpose of this is usually to maintain an
    omnidirectional pattern in one plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    726     and 728, for plural separate diverse type antennas including a loop
    type antenna.

    732     and 733+, for circular loop and rhombic traveling wave antennas
    respectively.

    748,    for loop type antennas with variable reactance for tuning.

    764,    for loop type antennas with means for moving the loop for scanning,
    sweeping or orienting.

    788,    for loop type antennas including magnetic material.

    842,    for loop type antennas with electrical shields.

    855,    for plural loop type antennas with a coupling network or impedance
    in the leadin.

    866+,   for loop type antennas in general.


CLS 343/742
TXT Subject matter under subclass 741 including two or more loops, each as
    defined in subclass 741 above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    800,    for plural groups of circumferentially arranged doublets.

    855,    for plural loop type antennas with a coupling network or impedance
    in the leadin.

    867,    for plural loops in general.


CLS 343/743
TXT Subject matter under subclass 741 wherein the antenna feed line is
    connected at two or more spaced points along the perimeter of the closed
    loop.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    732,    for traveling wave type antennas of circular loop configuration
    which may be coupled at spaced points.

    799,    for plural center-fed balanced doublet type antennas
    circumferentially arranged.

    857,    for antennas with the coupling at spaced points.


CLS 343/744
TXT Subject matter under subclass 741 wherein the closed loop includes
    inductance or capacity in series around the current path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    722,    for antennas with lumped reactance filters therein.

    732,    for traveling wave type antennas arranged in a circular loop which
    may have inductance or capacity in the active antenna.

    743,    wherein the series inductance or capacity is included in the
    current path, and the feed coupling is at spaced points on the loop.

    748,    for loop type antennas with variable reactance for tuning the
    antenna.

    749+,   for antennas with lumped reactance for loading.

    788,    for loop type antennas including magnetic material.

    842,    for loop type antennas with electrical shields.


CLS 343/745
TXT Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein the active antenna is combined
    with an adjustable inductance or capacity, distinct and separate from the
    active antenna, the inductance or capacity providing a reactance which
    combines with the inherent reactance of the active antenna to establish a
    resonance in a circuit including the antenna, this resonance being at a
    frequency other than the natural electrical resonant frequency of the
    antenna, adjustment of the inductance or capacity changing this resonance.

    (1)     Note.  The inherent reactance includes not only the distributed
    reactance of the active antenna but also the natural reactance of the
    antenna due to its location and surroundings, as for example, the capacity
    relation inherent in the position of the active antenna relative to ground.

    (2)     Note.  Loading under subclass 749 is always combined with an active
    antenna of an appreciable electrical length, while such an appreciable
    length is not necessary for classification in this subclass (745).  The
    reactance combined with the active antenna under loading (subclass 749)
    must be located within the active antenna, at its free end, or immediately
    contiguous the end of the active antenna closest to the leadin, whereas the
    adjustable reactance under this subclass (745) is located outside or
    external to the active antenna.

    (3)     Note.  Adjustable reactance networks which do not tune the inherent
    reactance of the antenna are not classified here, but will be found in
    subclasses 850+, especially subclass 861 where adjustable impedance
    matching networks are involved.

    (4)     Note.  Antennas combined with tuning networks are classified
    herein, except where in addition significant transmitter or receiver
    structure is claimed.  For classification of such latter combinations, see
    Class 455, appropriate subclasses.

    (5)     Note.  Where an adjustable reactance is combined with an active
    antenna but the combination is for changing the width of the resonant band,
    classification is not herein but in subclasses 850+ below.  For
    classification herein adjustment of the reactance in such combinations must
    be for tuning, that is, changing the resonant frequency of the active
    antenna circuit.

    (6)     Note.  The variable reactance may be located at the coupling end of
    the antenna, or at the end remote from the coupling end to connect the
    antenna to ground.  In the latter case, if the reactance is not adjustable,
    classification is in subclass 845.  See also subclass 750 below for
    antennas having adjustable reactance intermediate its ends for loading.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    722,    for antenna having lumped reactance electrical filters between
    sections of the active antenna.

    723,    for single electrically long end-fed antennas which are adjustable
    in length for tuning.

    731+,   for traveling wave type antennas which may have phasing reactances
    within the active antenna.

    739+,   for active antennas having a terminating resistance at the open end.

    744,    for high frequency type loops having series reactance in the loop.

    749+,   for antennas having lumped reactance for loading.  See also (2)
    Note above.

    850+,   for antennas in general with a coupling network or impedance in the
    leadin which may include adjustable reactances, and particularly subclass
    861 for such antennas having an adjustable impedance matching network. See
    also (3) Note, above.

    913,    for reflectors or directors combined with an impedance which may
    have an adjustable reactance for tuning the reflector or director.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, particularly subclasses 167+
    for wave filters, and subclasses 219+ for resonators of the distributed
    parameter type.

    334,    Tuners, appropriate subclasses for tuned networks for use in
    radiant energy apparatus and comprising inductance and capacitance elements
    in circuit arrangement to form a resonant circuit and in which structure is
    provided for adjusting one or both of these elements for changing the mean
    resonant frequency of the circuit.

    336,    Inductor Devices, particularly subclasses 130+ and 137+ for
    variable inductor devices which may be used in adjustable reactance
    circuits for tuning active antennas.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 287+ for
    variable capacitors which may be used in tuning circuits.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 150.1+ for receivers which may
    involve tuning.


CLS 343/746
TXT Subject matter under subclass 745 wherein the active antenna is of the slot
    type as defined in subclass 767 below.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this subclass the slot type antennas
    must have an adjustable reactance separate and distinct from the slot
    itself. Slot type antennas having a slidable short-circuiting bar across
    the slot remote from the feed line connection, for example, which defines
    the length of the slot and whereby the length of the slot may be adjusted
    for tuning are not classified in this subclass, but in subclasses 767+,
    below.


CLS 343/747
TXT Subject matter under subclass 745 wherein the active antenna is of the
    center-fed balanced doublet type as defined in subclass 793 below.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this subclass the variable reactance
    for tuning must be separate and distinct from the balanced doublet antenna.
     For example, balanced doublet antennas having an adjustable length whereby
    the inherent reactance of the antennas may be varied for tuning are
    classified in subclass 823, below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    814,    816 and 820+, for balanced doublet type antennas with coupling
    networks which may include adjustable reactance elements.

    823,    for balanced doublet type antennas whose length is for tuning.  See
    also (1) Note, above.


CLS 343/748
TXT Subject matter under subclass 745 wherein the active antenna is of the loop
    type as defined in subclass 866, below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    732,    for traveling wave type circular loop antennas which may have
    phasing reactance within the loop.

    744,    for high frequency type loop antennas having series reactance
    within the loop.

    855,    for plural loop antennas with a coupling network or impedance in
    the leadin which may include variable reactance.

    866+,   for loop type antennas in general.


CLS 343/749
TXT Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein a resonant active antenna
    includes an elongated portion of appreciable electrical length having
    lumped inductance or capacity directly in series or shunt with the
    elongated portion (to modify the standing wave pattern existing along the
    portion, or to change the effective electrical length of the portion).

    (1)     Note.  The lumped inductance or capacity must be intermediate the
    ends, at a free end or immediately at the leadin end of the active antenna
    for classification herein.  Combinations of an active antenna with such
    inductances or capacitances located in a position remote or separate from
    the antenna are classified below in subclasses 850+, or where adjustable
    for tuning the antenna in subclasses 745+, above.  In the special case
    where an adjustable lumped inductance or capacity is located immediately at
    the leadin end of the active antenna and tunes as well as loads the
    antenna, classification is in subclass 745 and the subject matter is
    cross-referenced herein.

    (2)     Note.  For classification herein the inductance or capacitance must
    be of the lumped type.  Where there is included a nonuniformity or other
    distributed parameter inductance or capacitance, such as a capacity hat
    classification is not herein, but in subclass 802 for center-fed balance
    doublets with distributed reactance added to the arms, or in subclass 828
    for fractional multiple or full wave type antennas with a nonuniformity for
    reactive effect, or in subclass 899 for antennas with area increasing means
    generally.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    722,    for antennas having a lumped reactance electrical filter located
    between active sections thereof.

    723,    for single electrically long linear type antennas adjustable in
    length for tuning.

    731+    and 739+, for traveling wave type antennas and antennas combined
    with terminating resistances at the remote ends thereof respectively, which
    may have lumped inductances or capacitances in the active portions thereof.

    741+,   for high frequency loop type antennas which may have lumped
    inductance or capacitance in the active portions thereof.

    745+,   for antennas with variable reactance for tuning.

    802,    for center-fed balanced doublet antennas with distributed reactance
    added to the arms thereof.  See also (2) Note, above.

    806,    for center-fed balanced doublet type antennas with bent arms which
    may modify the inherent inductance or capacitance otherwise present with
    consequent loading.

    807,    for center-fed balanced doublet antennas with tapered, thick or
    enlarged arms which modify the inherent capacities of the antennas.

    823,    for center-fed balanced doublet type antennas whose length is
    adjustable.

    828,    for fractional, multiple, or full wave linear type antennas with a
    nonuniformity for reactive effect such as a capacity top.  See also (2)
    Note, above.

    850+,   for antennas with coupling in general.  See also the search notes
    thereunder for special types of antennas with coupling.

    899,    for antennas having area increasing means, such as spiniferous or
    with a metal ball on top of the antennas.  See also (2) Note, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 45+ for loaded transmission lines.


CLS 343/750
TXT Subject matter under subclass 749 wherein the lumped inductance or capacity
    is adjustable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    745+,   for antennas with variable reactance for tuning the antennas.


CLS 343/751
TXT Subject matter under subclass 749 including at least two antennas as
    defined therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    893,    and the search notes thereunder for plural antennas in general.


CLS 343/752
TXT Subject matter under subclass 749 wherein the lumped inductance or capacity
    is connected at the free end of the active antenna.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    802,    for center-fed balanced doublets with distributed reactance added
    to the arms and which may be at the free ends.

    828,    for fractional, multiple or full wave linear type antennas with a
    nonuniformity therein, which may be at the free end of the antenna.

    899,    for antennas with area increasing means generally which may be at
    the free end.


CLS 343/753
TXT Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein the active antenna is combined
    with structure spaced from or external to the active antenna which
    transmits waves going to or from the active antenna, and is shaped or
    positioned to delay or accelerate transmitted waves an amount which varies
    over the wave front, to alter the direction or propagation of the waves
    emitted from the structure with respect to the waves impinging on the
    structure, or to bring the wave to a focus, or to alter the wave front
    (such as to convert a spherical wave front to a planar wave front or vice
    versa).

    (1)     Note.  The structure referred to above may be contiguous to a
    reflecting plate or may form with the surrounding fluid (as air) a
    reflecting surface (by reason of the different dielectric constants of the
    structure material and air) so that the impinging waves pass through the
    wave modifying structure twice, once on the way to the reflecting surface
    and then returning therefrom, in going to or from the active antenna, thus
    forming a reflecting lens.  This subject matter is classified in indented
    subclass 755.

    (2)     Note.  In the case of directors which are constructed of somewhat
    smaller dimensions than the resonant active antenna with which they have a
    parasitic relationship, so that the phase retardation at the ends or edges
    of the director sharpens the beam resulting in a type of "focusing" action,
    the impinging electromagnetic wave cannot be said actually to pass
    therethrough; and antennas with such directors are therefore not classified
    herein but in subclasses 815, 817, 819, and 833.

    (3)     Note.  When the active antenna is a wave type guide horn, the term
    "spaced" means physically removed externally from the mouth of the horn.  A
    lens at the mouth of the horn and forming a closure for this mouth is not
    deemed "spaced" as here used, but is classified in subclass 783 below.  The
    term "external" means on the outside of the active antenna.

    (4)     Note.  An active antenna with a so-called diffractor, which
    produces an interference pattern is classified here, if the diffractor
    transmits electromagnetic wave energy.  If the diffractor is opaque to such
    energy, classification is on other characteristics, such as in subclass 833
    if the director function is performed and in subclasses 834+ if the
    reflector function is performed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    756,    for antennas with polarization filters or converters.

    783,    for wave guide type antennas having internal wave refraction means.

    784,    for wave guide type antennas with closures.

    785,    for wave guide type antennas composed of dielectric rods, e.g.,
    polystyrene rods.

    872+,   for antennas having a housing or protective covering which may be
    of material having refracting properties.

    909+,   for refracting means and radiant energy filters, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, particularly subclasses 245+
    for transmission line elements and components which may be refractors in a
    transmission line.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    642+ for optical lenses.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 326+ for illumination type refractors.


CLS 343/754
TXT Subject matter under subclass 753 wherein structure is included which
    permits or effects scanning, sweeping, or orienting of the antenna beam.

    (1)     Note.  See (4) Note under subclass 757 for the significance of the
    terms "scanning", "sweeping" or "orienting".

    (2)     Note.  Usually the scanning, sweeping or orienting is obtained by
    relative motion between the active antenna and the refractor, or by
    controlling the coupling of the active antennas associated with the
    refractor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5+      and 100+, for reflected and/or otherwise returned wave systems and
    directive radiant energy systems, respectively, which may involve a spaced
    external wave refractor and means for scanning, sweeping or orienting.

    757,    for antennas having means for moving the antennas for scanning,
    sweeping or orienting.

    768,    for slot type antennas with periodic control of the slot or
    coupling which may involve scanning, sweeping or orienting.

    777,    for plural wave guide type antennas with control of the individual
    antenna.

    780,    for pillbox type antennas which may be adapted for scanning,
    sweeping or orienting.

    839,    for antennas wherein the reflector and active antenna are
    relatively movable.

    854,    for antennas in general with an adjustable coupling network.


CLS 343/755
TXT Subject matter under subclass 753 including a reflector, or wherein the
    refractor is also adapted to perform a reflecting function.

    (1)     Note.  For definitions of a reflector per se and associated with an
    active antenna, see subclasses 912 and 834, respectively.

    (2)     Note.  The reflector may be spaced from the refractor or may be
    contiguous with the refractor to form a backer for the refractor.  Further,
    the refractor may inherently reflect the impinging radio waves at a surface
    opposite to that where the waves impinge, due to differences which may
    exist in the refractor material and that of the contiguous or surrounding
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    775,    779, 780, and 781+, for wave guide type antennas with reflectors.

    815,    817 and 818+, for center-fed balanced doublets with reflectors.

    832,    for an active antenna as a reflector.

    834+,   for antennas in general with parasitic reflectors.

    909+,   for refracting means, per se, together with a reflector.

    912+,   for reflectors, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 327+ for combined illumination reflectors
    and refractors.


CLS 343/756
TXT Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein the active antenna is combined
    with structure which acts directly on the radio wave to filter out wave
    energy of an undesired polarization or to modify the polarization pattern
    of the wave.

    (1)     Note.  The polarizing structure is usually a series of parallel
    rods (polarization grating) through which the waves pass or from which
    impinging waves are reflected.  The polarizing structure may be spaced from
    or within the antenna, such as, in the latter case, within a wave guide
    horn or within a dielectric rod antenna.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    753+,   for active antennas with spaced electromagnetic refractors which
    may also include polarization modifying means.

    909+,   for refracting means and radio wave filters, per se, including
    polarization modifying means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 21 for wave mode
    converters.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    483+ for optical polarizers.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 19 for illuminating means combined with
    polarization means.


CLS 343/757
TXT Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein the complete antenna is movably
    (e.g., pivoted or rotatably) supported for motion as a unit or wherein the
    reflector and antenna are supported to be relatively movable, together with
    structure that effects or is peculiarly adapted to effect motion of the
    antenna or relative motion between the antenna and reflector in such
    fashion that the radiation pattern is scanned, swept or oriented.

    (1)     Note.  An adjustable support for an antenna or reflector which
    permits an antenna beam to be scanned, swept or oriented is classified in
    subclasses 880+ below.  For classification in this subclasses (757+), there
    must be some structure which positively acts, or may be actuated to produce
    this beam scanning, sweeping or orienting. Examples of such structure are a
    motor, crank or handle, or a mechanism connecting such motor, crank, or
    handle to an antenna or reflector.

    (2)     Note.  For classification in this subclass the entire antenna must
    move on its support or there must be relative motion between the antenna
    and reflector on their support or supports. Mere motion of a part of the
    antenna, such as a mechanical change in the relative position of antenna
    parts in the coupling path for such purposes as switching or changing the
    electrical characteristic of the radiated energy, is not sufficient for
    classification here, but would involve such subclasses as 854 and 876,
    below.

    (3)     Note.  An adjustable support together with means for effecting
    positive adjustment of the antenna for purposes other than scanning,
    sweeping or orienting, such as raising or lowering the antenna is not
    classified here, but in subclasses 880+ below.

    (4)     Note.  Sweeping an antenna beam usually involves moving the antenna
    beam repeatedly along a single line (which may be straight or curved) in
    space. Scanning such a beam usually involves repeatedly moving the beam
    over an area in space.  Orienting usually involves mere change of the
    direction of the antenna beam.

    (5)     Note.  Where in addition to directional modification of the beam
    means are claimed whereby a distinctive signal or signals associated with
    the received radio wave energy and indicating or denoting direction are
    involved, classification is not in this subclass but in Class 342,
    subclasses 350+, above.

    (6)     Note.  For classification in this and indented subclass, there must
    be recited in the claims antenna details relating to the signal energy
    path, for example, details of the active antenna or reflector such as
    dipole antenna, parabolic reflector.  The recitation of both an antenna and
    reflector by name only in a claim is considered a recitation of details of
    the radiant energy structure for classification in this subclass.
    Recitation of an antenna by name only or a reflector by name only in
    combination with means for moving the antenna or reflector is not
    sufficient for classification in this subclass but is classified in the
    appropriate class taking the means for moving, such as Class 74, Machine
    Element or Mechanism, for mechanical motions, Class 318, Electricity:
    Motive Power Systems, for motor controls, Classes 211, Supports:  Racks,
    and 248, Supports, for adjustable supports.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    754,    for antennas with spaced or external radio wave refractor, e.g.,
    lens, with means for scanning, sweeping or orienting.

    768,    for slot type antennas with periodic control of the slot or
    coupling which may involve scanning, sweeping or orienting.

    777,    for plural wave guide type antennas with control of the individual
    antennas which may involve scanning, sweeping or orienting.

    816,    for plural balanced doublets with a coupling network wherein the
    coupling network may be controlled for scanning, sweeping or orienting.

    839,    for antennas wherein the reflector and active antenna are
    relatively movable.

    854,    for plural antennas with adjustable coupling networks which may
    involve scanning, sweeping or orienting.

    869,    for loop type antennas with rotatable supports.

    876,    for antennas with switching between the antennas and lines which
    may involve scanning, sweeping or orienting.

    882,    for antenna with pivoted or rotatable supports.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, particularly subclass 1 for
    mechanical movements for antennas.  See also (6) Note, above.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 86 for conduits,
    cables and conductors with angularly movable or adjustable joints.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, and 248, Supports, for supports which permit
    movement of the article supported.  See also (6) Note, above.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, for motor controls.  See also
    (6) Note, above.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 245+ for long line
    elements and components which may include rotatable couplings.

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar Radio Navigation), subclasses 1-205 and subclasses 350+ for reflected
    or otherwise returned wave system and directly radio wave energy systems,
    respectively, which may involve means for moving a directive antenna.

    362,    Illumination, for illuminating means, particularly subclasses 37+
    for dirigible light supports.


CLS 343/758
TXT Subject matter under subclass 757 combined with another relatively movable
    antenna, together with structure that effects relative motion between the
    complete antennas or between the active antenna portions or the reflectors.

    (1)     Note.  The plurality of antennas may have individual reflectors or
    a common reflector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    879,    for plural antennas with a support therefor.

    893,    for plural antennas in general.  See also the Search Notes
    thereunder for a field of search pertinent to plural antennas.


CLS 343/759
TXT Subject matter under subclass 757 wherein the directive antenna is
    supported for movement of the axis of its beam over a spiral path and
    wherein the means for moving includes structure which causes the antenna to
    move its beam axis cyclically over a spiral path.

    (1)     Note.  If the means for moving is such that it only may be
    manipulated to move the axis of the antenna over a spiral path, as for
    example, an antenna mounted for azimuthal rotation and nod together with a
    handle, classification is not here, but in such subclasses as 761 or 765
    below.  For classification in this subclass, the moving means must be
    effective to maintain the antenna continuously repeating the same spiral
    scanning movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 1 for complex mechanical
    movements for moving an article, which may be an antenna, for scanning or
    sweeping.


CLS 343/760
TXT Subject matter under subclass 757 together with signal, alarm, or indicator
    structure which is responsive to the scan, sweep or orientation of the
    antenna, independent in its operation from the collected or radiated signal.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this subclass the signal, indicator or
    alarm structure must be claimed in combination with the means for moving
    the directive antenna for scanning, sweeping or orienting to indicate some
    function or result of such motion of the antenna, as for example, direction
    of the antenna or angle swept through by the antenna; as opposed to
    subclass 894 where general signal indicator or alarm structure combined
    with an antenna for indicating some condition of the antenna is classified.

    (2)     Note.  Where an indicator is claimed broadly in combination with an
    antenna and means for moving such antenna, although such indicator is
    disclosed as not only showing a condition of the antenna, as the position
    of its sweep or scan from point to point but also as showing some condition
    in response to a received signal (as in a cathode-ray tube, the location of
    a remote signal), such subject matter is not classified in this subclass
    but as a direction finding receiver under this Class 342, subclasses 417+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    703,    for measuring the antenna signal energy.

    894,    for antennas with indicator, signal or alarm structure in general.
    See also (1) Note, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, for mechanical signal, alarms and
    indicators in general.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, for electrical signaling devices in
    general.

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 1-205 and subclasses 350+ for
    reflected wave and directive, which may involve antenna indicators.  See
    also (2) Note above.


CLS 343/761
TXT Subject matter under subclass 757 wherein the reflector and active antenna
    are supported to be relatively movable, together with structure that
    effects or is peculiarly adapted to effect relative motion between the
    antenna and reflector element.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the patents in this subclass involve a parabolic
    reflector and active antenna in an unsymmetrical relationship, which upon
    rotation produce conical scanning.

    (2)     Note.  The term reflector as used in this subclass includes any
    parasitic element such as a director.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    759,    for active antennas and reflectors which may be relatively movable
    to produce a spiral scan.

    839,    for antennas with reflectors which are relatively movable for
    purposes other than scanning sweeping or orienting, such as focusing or
    changing the beam pattern; or where no means is claimed for moving the
    antenna and reflector relatively for scanning, sweeping or orienting.


CLS 343/762
TXT Subject matter under subclass 757 wherein the active antenna is of the wave
    guide type as defined in subclass 772 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    759,    for antennas of the wave guide type together with means for moving
    the antenna or the reflector in a spiral path.

    761,    for antennas of the wave guide type having a reflector together
    with means for moving the reflector and antenna relative to each other.

    772+,   for wave guide type antennas, per se.


CLS 343/763
TXT Subject matter under subclass 757 wherein the antenna is rotatably
    supported together with structure for imparting continuous or oscillating
    angular motion to the complete antenna as a unit relative to its support.

    (1)     Note.  When means for rotating the antenna is a hand operated
    control level or linkage system and the antenna is claimed by name only
    classification is in the appropriate subclass under Class 74, Machine
    Element or Mechanism; otherwise (when antenna details are claimed),
    classification is herein.

    (2)     Note.  For classification in this or indented subclasses the
    claimed combination of the antenna and the means to impart rotary motion
    thereto must include detailed antenna structure as opposed to the mere
    recitation of an antenna or reflector by name only.  In the latter case
    classification is with the type of combination claimed for imparting
    motion, as for example, in Class 192, Clutches and Power-Stop Control, for
    combinations embracing clutches and power-stop controls, in Class 74,
    Machine Element or Mechanism, for machine elements and mechanisms
    generally, and in Class 318, Electricity: Motive Power Systems, for motor
    control means or systems.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    761,    for antennas with means for moving the reflector and antenna
    relative to each other.

    869,    for loop type antennas with a rotatable support.

    882,    for antennas with a pivoted or rotatable support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, particularly subclasses 1 and 491,
    for hand operated control lever and linkage systems.  See (2) Note, above.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, for clutches and power stop
    controls.  See (2) Note, above.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, for motor control systems
    wherein the motor may move an antenna.


CLS 343/764
TXT Subject matter under subclass 763 wherein the rotatable antenna is of the
    loop type as defined in subclass 866, below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    866+,   and the search notes thereunder for loop type antennas, per se, and
    particularly subclass 869 for such antennas with rotatable supports.


CLS 343/765
TXT Subject matter under subclass 763 wherein the antenna is supported for
    rotation in different planes (i.e., rotatable about two or more angularly
    disposed axes) together with structure for imparting continuous or
    oscillating angular motion to the antenna as a unit in these planes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    759,    wherein the antenna may be rotated in different planes to cover a
    spiral path.


CLS 343/766
TXT Subject matter under subclass 763 wherein the means imparting motion to the
    antenna is a motor.

    (1)     Note.  The term motor as used above contemplates all devices other
    than manual for imparting motion to the antenna.  The motor is usually
    electrical, but may be of another type such as fluid.  To be classified
    herein the motor must be claimed as such, or as a means to rotate the
    antenna, or some similar recitation.  Subject matter involving manual means
    to impart motion when combined with a rotatable antenna for scanning,
    sweeping or orienting is not classified herein but in subclass 763, above.
    As distinct from a motor drive, a manual drive is usually structure such as
    a handle, affording means to apply the manual force.  In this latter case
    where the antenna is claimed by name only and involves, for example, a
    handle and mechanical motion transmitting means, classification is in Class
    74 and not herein.

    (2)     Note.  For classification in this subclass the claimed combination
    of the motor and antennas must include detailed antenna structure as
    opposed to the mere recitation of the antenna or reflector by name only.
    In the latter case, classification is with the motor if the motor is
    claimed in detail.  For example, subject matter involving a combination of
    an electric motor for rotating an antenna for scanning, sweeping or
    orienting, motor control, and antenna, where the antenna is claimed by name
    only, is not classified herein but in the appropriate subclass under Class
    318, Electricity:  Motive Power Systems.  The following is a list of the
    classes involving motors: 60, Power Plants; 91, Motors:  Expansible Chamber
    Type; 123, Internal-Combustion Engines; 170, Motors, Fluid Current; 185,
    Motors:  Spring, Weight, or Animal Powered; 253, Motors, Fluid; 290,
    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants; 310, Electrical Generator or Motor Structure;
    and Class 318, Electricity:  Motive Power Systems.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    765,    where one or more motors may be used to effect rotary motion of the
    antenna in different planes.


CLS 343/767
TXT Subject matter under subclass 700 including a conducting surface, such as a
    metallic sheet which may be flat or curved, and an aperture in the surface,
    which may be completely surrounded by the surface or extended inwardly from
    an edge of the surface, together with coupling means which establishes a
    potential difference at spaced points along the aperture or extracts
    received energy from these points, these points usually being across the
    aperture, the surface furnishing a conductive path between these spaced
    points to permit current to flow therebetween.

    (1)     Note.  In the event the gap completely separates the surface into
    two parts with the spaced points being across the gap, an electrical short
    circuit must be provided across the gap as by a galvanic connection or a
    resonant short circuiting line.

    (2)     Note.  The slot is usually resonant (e.g., a half wave length long,
    or a perimeter of one wave length) to present a high slot impedance across
    the coupling thereto.

    (3)     Note.  Antennas having an aperture in a conductive surface, wherein
    the aperture is used merely for coupling the energy to an antenna are not
    classified here but in the appropriate subclass below, for example,
    subclasses 772+ for wave guide type antennas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    741+,   for high frequency loops, wherein the loop may be formed of a
    conductive sheet having a slot-like space between the adjacent ends.

    772+,   for wave guide type antennas. See (3) Note, above.

    789,    for antennas within a conductive apertured wall.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, particularly subclasses 208+,
    239+ and 248+ for resonant slots in wave guides.


CLS 343/768
TXT Subject matter under subclass 767 wherein structure is provided for
    modifying the transmission characteristic of a slot or its coupling, the
    structure being normally operated in a cyclical or repetitive manner.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of the subject matter of this subclass are variable
    width wave guide coupling, or variable length wave guide coupling, or a
    movable shutter in front of or behind the slot or in the wave guide
    coupling.  The purpose of this modification of the transmission
    characteristic is usually for scanning, sweeping or orienting the antenna
    pattern.

    (2)     Note.  In the subject matter of this subclass physical motion of
    parts of the antenna may occur for control of the transmission
    characteristic for scanning, sweeping or orienting the pattern.  However,
    where the antenna and/or its reflector moves as a unit or where relative
    motion occurs between the active antenna and its reflector for scanning,
    sweeping or orienting the antenna pattern, classification is in subclasses
    757+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    757+,   for directive antennas with means for moving the antenna for
    scanning, sweeping or orienting.  See also (2) Note, above.

    777,    for plural wave guide type antennas with control of the individual
    antennas.

    854,    for antennas with adjustable coupling.

    876,    for antennas with switching between  the antennas and the
    associated lines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar Radio Navigation), subclasses 422+ and subclasses 428+ for direction
    finding receivers with effectively moveable directional patterns.


CLS 343/769
TXT Subject matter under subclass 767 wherein the aperture is shaped as a
    narrow annulus on a flat conducting surface or a band removed from the wall
    of a conducting cylinder.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the opposing walls of the aperture are electrically
    connected at a point remote from the coupling.


CLS 343/770
TXT Subject matter under subclass 767 including two or more apertures in a
    surface, or two or more surfaces each having at least one aperture, all as
    defined in subclass 767, above.

    (1)     Note.  A single physically continuous slot composed of a plurality
    of discrete and separately identifiable sections is classified in this
    subclass, if each section operates separately and independently as a slot
    antenna.  For example, a zigzag slot where each straight section is in
    itself a separate resonant slot is classified in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    768,    for plural slot type antenna with periodic control of the slot or
    its coupling.

    774,    for stacked bi-conical horn antennas.

    776+,   for plural wave guide type antennas in general.

    893,    and the Search Notes thereunder, for plural antennas in general.


CLS 343/771
TXT Subject matter under subclass 770 wherein at least one of the apertures is
    combined with a wave guide (or resonant cavity) for energizing the aperture
    or conducting energy therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  The wave guide must perform the coupling function.  Plural
    slot antennas wherein the apertures are directly fed by a transmission line
    connected to the opposite edges of the slot, and having a resonant cavity
    in back of the aperture as a reflecting means for confining the energy in
    one direction but not performing the coupling function, are not classified
    in this subclass but in subclass 770, above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    762,    for moving wave guide type antennas with means for moving,
    scanning, sweeping or orienting.

    772+,   for wave guide type antennas.

    853+,   for plural antennas with a coupling network.

    844,    for plural antennas in general spaced  a fractional or full wave
    length apart.


CLS 343/772
TXT Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein a wave guide is provided between
    free space and a generator or receiver of radio wave energy, or between
    free space and a nonwave guide coupling or connecting structure which
    establishes in or collects from the wave guide radio wave energy, the wave
    guide constraining this energy in its passage to or from free space, and
    being directly connected with free space without any intervening nonwave
    guide coupling (such as a probe and dipole).

    (1)     Note.  The guide may be a cavity resonator, or a horn.

    (2)     Note.  The wave guide must guide the wave energy between free space
    and the nonwave guide coupling, oscillator or receiver for classification
    in this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  Usually the wave guide has a configuration or structure
    which substantially matches the impedance to that of free space, such as a
    horn.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    762,    for wave guide type antennas with means for moving the antennas for
    scanning, sweeping or orienting.

    767+,   for slot type antennas which may involve wave guide structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, for mechanical acoustical devices which collect or emit
    sound waves to or from an unconfined space containing a sound conducting
    medium.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 678+ for microwave heating.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, particularly subclasses 1+,
    227 and 239, for wave transmission lines and networks involving wave guides
    and cavity resonators.


CLS 343/773
TXT Subject matter under subclass 772 wherein the wave guide has its opposing
    surfaces formed as conical or flared surfaces of revolution on a common
    axis, the spacing between the surfaces increasing from the apices towards
    the peripheries, the coupling to the source or collector extending from the
    apices, as by a coaxial line or wave guide, through one of the surfaces of
    revolution, the surfaces guiding the wave energy between the apices and the
    peripheries.

    (1)     Note.  The patents of this subclass resemble somewhat in structure
    the sleeve and ground plane antennas of subclasses 790+ and 829+.  However,
    in this subclass (773) the opposing surfaces act merely as a wave guide;
    while in the other two subclasses this wave guide action is not present,
    but one or both of the surfaces acts directly as a radiator or collector of
    radio wave energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    786,    for wave guide type antennas with horns.

    790+,   for sleeve type antennas.  See also (1) Note, above.

    807,    for tapered balanced doublet antennas.

    809,    for fractional, multiple or full wave type antennas including
    grounding structures.  See also (1) Note, above.


CLS 343/774
TXT Subject matter under subclass 773 wherein a plurality of bi-conical horn
    type antennas as defined in subclass 773 above are spaced along a common
    axis, their respective axes coinciding with the common axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    776+,   for plural wave guide antennas in general.

    884,    for antennas with a transmission line or wave guide as a support.


CLS 343/775
TXT Subject matter under subclass 773 wherein the bi-conical horn type antenna
    as therein defined is combined with external conductive structure which
    reradiates into free space impinging radio waves coming from or going to
    the antenna.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    755,    for antennas with spaced radio wave lenses or diffractors and
    reflectors.

    779,    for plural wave guide type antennas generally with a reflector.

    780,    for "pillbox" type antennas.

    781+,   for single wave guide type antennas with a reflector.

    834+,   and the Search Notes thereunder, for antennas with reflectors in
    general.

    912+,   for reflectors, per se.


CLS 343/776
TXT Subject matter under subclass 772 wherein two or more wave guides are
    provided at the connection to free space to result in two or more wave
    guide paths each directly coupled to free space.

    (1)     Note.  The wave guides may be formed as branches from a common
    guide remote from the free space coupling end, or may be separate and
    distinct guides independently coupled by non-wave guide structure to their
    transmitter and/or receiver, or may be merely a divided guide such as a
    baffled horn with separate wave guide paths existing on each side of the
    baffle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    773+,   for bi-conical horn type antennas.

    844,    for plural antennas spaced a fractional or full wave length apart.

    853+,   for coupling networks for plural antennas.

    879,    for supports for plural separate antennas.

    893,    and the Search Notes thereunder, for plural antennas in general.


CLS 343/777
TXT Subject matter under subclass 776 wherein at least one antenna has in its
    wave guide path or its coupling to the transmitter or receiver, structure
    such as a switch or adjustable impedance, which alters the amplitude or
    phase of the energy passing through the path or coupling to modify the
    radiation or polarization pattern of the antenna.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are plural wave guide antennas having switches
    in the coupling paths for lobbing the antenna beam, or having variable
    impedance in the coupling paths for steering the composite beam from the
    antennas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    757+,   for antennas having means for moving the antennas for scanning,
    sweeping or orienting.

    768,    for slot type antennas with control of the slot or coupling.

    854,    for antennas in general with adjustable coupling networks.

    876,    for antennas with switching between the antennas and the associated
    lines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 2+ for plural
    channel wave transmission systems with automatic control, and subclasses
    101+ for branched wave transmission lines with switching.

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar Radio Navigation), subclasses 385+ wherein a distinctive signal is
    sent or received denoting course, direction, or orientation.


CLS 343/778
TXT Subject matter under subclass 776 wherein the wave guide or coupling path
    of the respective antennas have significant phase characteristics in the
    transmission of energy therethrough, to modify the relative phase
    relationship of the transmitted radio wave energy of the respective
    antennas at their coupling to space, or to modify the relative phase
    relationship of the received radio wave energy in passing through the
    antennas and/or coupling paths.

    (1)     Note.  The different phase characteristic is usually secured by a
    delay network in the coupling path of one of the antennas or a dielectric
    delaying mass in the wave guide path of one of the antennas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    844,    for plural antennas spaced a fractional or full wave length apart.

    853+,   for plural antennas with coupling in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 100+ for branched
    wave transmission lines and networks which may involve phasing.


CLS 343/779
TXT Subject matter under subclass 776 wherein the plural wave guides as defined
    therein are combined with external conductive structure (usually metallic)
    which reradiates into free space impinging radio waves coming from or going
    to the wave guides.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    775,    for bi-conical horn type antennas with a reflector.

    780,    for "pillbox" type antennas.

    781,    for single wave guide type antennas with an external reflector or
    director.

    834+,   and the Search Notes thereunder, for antennas with parasitic
    reflectors in general.


CLS 343/780
TXT Subject matter under subclass 772 wherein the wave guide includes two
    parallel plates which are closed along a portion of their perimeter by a
    reflector, the spacing between the plates being small compared to their
    surface dimensions, the plates being electrically open to free space over a
    relatively large portion of their perimeter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    781+,   for wave guide type antennas with a reflector or director.

    834+,   and Search Notes thereunder, for antennas with parasitic reflectors
    in general.

    912+,   for reflectors or directors, per se.


CLS 343/781
TXT Subject matter under subclass 772 wherein the wave guide antenna as defined
    therein is combined with external conductive structure (usually metallic)
    which reradiates into free space impinging radio waves coming from or going
    to the antenna.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    755,    for antennas with spaced radio wave lenses or diffractors and
    reflectors.

    775,    for bi-conical horn type antennas with a reflector.

    779,    for plural wave guide type antennas with a reflector.

    780,    for "pillbox" type antennas.

    833,    for antennas with directors in general.

    834+,   and the Search Notes thereunder, for antennas with reflectors in
    general.

    912+,   for reflectors or directors, per se.


CLS 343/782
TXT Subject matter under subclass 781 wherein structure or arrangement is
    provided to reduce reflection or the effect or reflection of the
    transmitted wave energy from the reflector back into the active
    transmitting antenna.

    (1)     Note.  This effect is sometimes referred to as matching the
    reflector to the active antenna.  The effect is obtained, for example, by
    means of a second compensating reflector or tilting the antenna with
    respect to the reflector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    762,    for wave guide type antennas with means for moving the antenna for
    scanning, sweeping or orienting.

    837+,   for antennas with plural reflectors, particularly subclass 838,
    where one of the reflectors is a screening reflector.

    841,    for antennas with electrical shields.

    862+,   for antennas with coupling networks for impedance matching of an
    antenna to its coupling means, which include long line elements.

    912+,   for reflectors, per se.


CLS 343/783
TXT Subject matter under subclass 772 wherein the wave guide contains a mass
    (usually dielectric) which freely passes radio waves, and which is shaped
    or positioned to delay or accelerate waves passing therethrough an amount
    which varies over the wave front for such purposes as focusing, changing
    direction, or changing the wave front as from circular to planar.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    753+,   for antennas having spaced radio wave lenses or diffractors
    associated therewith.

    756,    for antennas having polarization filters associated therewith.

    785,    for dielectric wave guide type antennas.

    909+,   for refracting means and radiant energy filters (e.g., lenses and
    polarizers), per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, particularly subclasses 239+
    and 248+, for wave guides having lenses or refracting means.


CLS 343/784
TXT Subject matter under subclass 772 wherein the wave guide has a mass
    extending across the wave guide adjacent the end coupling the wave guide to
    free space, the mass being of material which freely passes electromagnetic
    wave energy.

    (1)     Note.  The purpose of this mass is usually protection against
    weather, sealing the interior of the guide, or matching the guide to free
    space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    789,    for antennas within an apertured wall, which may have a closure.

    872+,   for antennas with housings or protective coverings.


CLS 343/785
TXT Subject matter under subclass 772 wherein the wave guide is formed of an
    elongated dielectric mass, which may be hollow, the source or receiver of
    energy being adjacent one end of the mass and the coupling for radiation to
    or from free space occurring along the sides or at the other end.

    (1)     Note.  By dielectric is meant a material having a dielectric
    constant materially greater than air.

    (2)     Note.  The mass may be a solid, or confined gas or liquid.  This
    dielectric mass should be the essential conductor of the electromagnetic
    waves between the source or receiver of the energy and free space.  A
    dielectric mass in a wave guide antenna which merely modifies the
    characteristic of the energy passing through the guide, the guide itself
    being the essential conductor, is not classified in this subclass but in
    subclass 783.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    753+,   for antennas with spaced radio wave lenses or diffractors which may
    be of dielectric material.

    776+,   for plural wave guide antennas which may be of the dielectric type.

    783,    for wave guide antennas with internal dielectric refracting means.
    See also (2) Note, above.

    907+,   particularly subclasses 909+, for antenna components which may be
    constructed of dielectric materials.


CLS 343/786
TXT Subject matter under subclass 772 wherein the wave guide diverges, or
    flares, in at least one dimension towards free space.

    (1)     Note.  While in a horn a reflecting function may be performed, the
    general purpose of the confining walls between the emitter or collector and
    the mouth of the horn is for guiding the energy to or from the emitter or
    collector and the mouth, while reflectors as in subclasses 834+, etc., do
    not perform this guiding function but merely reradiate the impinging energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    762,    for horn type antennas with means for moving the antenna for
    scanning, sweeping or orienting.

    773+,   for biconical type horns.

    776+,   for plural horns, or sectionalized horns, having two or more wave
    guide paths.

    784,    for horns with closures.

    834+    and 912+, for antennas with reflectors, and reflectors, per se,
    respectively.  See (1) Note, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 177+, for megaphones.


CLS 343/787
TXT Subject matter under subclass 700 including magnetic material which
    modifies the inductance of the active portion of the antenna.

    (1)     Note.  The magnetic material may be in the path of the radio waves
    to or from the active portion of the antenna, or in a permanent magnet or
    energized magnet which increases the magnetic field around the active
    portion of the antenna.

    (2)     Note.  Magnetic material in the coupling circuit, such as a
    magnetic core coupling transformer, is not sufficient for classification
    here. Such subject matter with an antenna in general is found in subclasses
    850+, below.

    (3)     Note.  See (2) Note under subclass 866 below for the line between
    loop antennas and the inductor devices classified in Class 336, Inductor
    Devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    745+,   for antennas with reactance for tuning the antenna.

    850+,   for antennas having a coupling network or impedance in the leadin
    which may involve inductors having magnetic material such as iron cores.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for inductors involving
    magnetic material, and subclass 110 where the inductor is combined with a
    permanent magnet.


CLS 343/788
TXT Subject matter under subclass 787 wherein the active antenna comprises a
    coil of one or more turns adapted to be connected at its ends to a pair of
    leadin terminals.

    (1)     Note.  For a field of search pertinent to loop antennas see the
    Notes under subclass 866, below.


CLS 343/789
TXT Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein a definite space is provided
    beneath an aperture in a conducting surface, and at least one antenna is
    mounted in the space with its active portion at least partially beneath the
    surface to transmit or receive radio wave energy when so mounted.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter in this subclass usually involves an
    antenna mounted in a recess below the skin of an airplane to avoid the air
    currents. The recess may be covered, as by an insulating cover which passes
    radio wave energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    702,    for antennas with significantly related cabinet structure.

    705+    and 709+, for antennas with significantly related aircraft or
    watercraft structure, respectively.

    767+,   for slot type antennas.

    872+,   for antennas with housings in general.

    889,    for rod type antennas retractible into a support.


CLS 343/790
TXT Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein an active antenna element, which
    may be a complete antenna or a portion of one (such as an arm of a dipole),
    is formed as a cylinder, prisms, or frustum of a cone or prism, or defines
    such a surface (such as series of circularly arranged parallel wires), is
    combined with a feed line which supplies radiating energy to or from this
    antenna element or to or from another antenna element; and which enters the
    cylinder at one end and extends within the cylinder at least a portion of
    the distance to the other end; and where the feed line is electrically
    coupled to this cylinder the coupling is remote from the entrance end,
    there being a substantial insulating space between the inner surface of the
    sleeve and the portion of the feed line extending within the cylinder.

    (1)     Note.  The feed line may be the feed to the sleeve element, or to
    another active element, or to both.  The feed line may also be a support
    for the sleeve element or for other antenna elements.  The feed line may be
    the ground return, such as the connection to the outer conductor of a
    coaxial line where the inner conductor is connected to any portion of the
    active element.

    (2)     Note.  In this subclass the feed line is spaced along its length
    from the inner surface of the sleeve, as opposed to the case of telescoping
    parts as in subclasses 823 and 901+, wherein the parts are in substantial
    engagement over their telescoping length. Further, in these last mentioned
    subclasses, the feeding portion usually surrounds the free end portion.

    (3)     Note.  The sleeves forming active antennas of this subclass are
    distinguished from superficially similar sleeves as found in subclass 830
    in that the latter sleeves form ground planes performing no active function
    as collectors or emitters of radiation (though they usually have reflecting
    properties); whereas the sleeves of this subclass are active radiators or
    collectors of radiation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    773,    for bi-conical horn wave guide type antennas.

    807,    for doublets whose active elements are thick or enlarged to form a
    sleeve.

    823,    for doublet type antennas having telescoping arms.  See (2) Note,
    above.

    830,    for fractional, multiple or full wave linear antenna with grounding
    structure, and having coaxial feed line.  See (3) Note, above.

    884,    for antennas where a plural wire transmission line or wave guide is
    the support.

    901+,   for rod type telescoping antennas. See (2) Note, above.


CLS 343/791
TXT Subject matter under subclass 790 wherein an active rod, which may be
    hollow, forms an extension of and is electrically connected to the feed
    line and is coaxial with the active sleeve.

    (1)     Note.  The active rod and sleeve are often in electrical effect a
    doublet as defined in subclass 793 below; but are structurally different in
    that the rod and sleeve are not similar.  The rod is usually of a smaller
    diameter than the sleeve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    725,    for plural separate diverse type antennas.  See also (3) Note,
    under subclass 725.

    801,    for doublet antennas formed of three or more collinear elements.

    823,    for doublet antennas with telescopically arranged respective arms.
    See (3) Note under subclass 790, above.

    827,    with collinear arranged fractional, multiple or full wave length
    linear type antennas.

    830,    for linear type antennas with ground planes fed by coaxial lines.
    See (3) Note under subclass 790, above.


CLS 343/792
TXT Subject matter under subclass 790 wherein the sleeve is combined with a
    mass having a substantially similar external shape, and wherein the sleeve
    and mass are fed in balanced relation, at least one of the feed lines
    extending from one end within the sleeve at least a portion of the distance
    to the other end.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    791,    for sleeve type antennas having in addition a rod type radiator.

    793+,   for balanced doublet type antennas in general, particularly
    subclass 802 for such antennas with distributed reactance, subclass 807 for
    such antennas thick or enlarged, and subclass 823 for such antennas having
    telescoping arms.


CLS 343/792.5
TXT Subject matter under subclass 700 including a series of electrically
    coupled radiating masses spaced along an axis of the antenna, the spacing
    of the masses from a fixed point on the axis and a dimension of
    corresponding masses progressively increasing along the axis in a manner
    approximating a geometrical or logarithmic progression.

    (1)     Note.  The ratios of the spacing and dimension of respective
    radiating masses are usually substantially equal. The radiating masses are
    usually dipoles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    807,    for dipoles with tapered arms.

    811,    for fish bone type dipole antennas.


CLS 343/793
TXT Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein two active conducting masses,
    which are substantially alike, are physically symmetrically disposed on
    opposite sides of electrically balanced, antenna lead-in terminals, each of
    the masses being connected to a respective terminal.

    (1)     Note.  The term "active conducting masses" above is construed to
    exclude antenna components such as counterpoises.

    (2)     Note.  The radiating masses are deemed substantially alike, if one
    mass has a nonradiating attachment such as a support to constitute a
    nonrymmetrical structure.  It is only necessary that the radiating portions
    be substantially alike to meet this requirement in the definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    726     and 727, for plural separate diverse type antennas which include
    balanced doublets.

    730,    for plural diverse type antennas using the same active element
    including balanced doublets.

    731+,   for traveling wave type antennas which may include balanced
    portions.

    740,    for antennas of the balanced type with a terminating resistance at
    the open end.

    741+,   for high frequency loop type antennas which may be composed of a
    plurality of doublet type antennas.

    747,    for antennas of the balanced doublet type with variable reactance
    for tuning.

    749+,   for antennas with lumped reactance for loading which may include a
    balanced doublet.

    792,    for doublet type antennas including an active sleeve which
    surrounds the feed line.

    824,    for planar arrays of linear antennas.

    825+,   for fractional, multiple, or full wave length linear type antennas.

    865,    for balanced antennas in general with a balanced coupling network.


CLS 343/794
TXT Subject matter under subclass 793 including two doublets as defined
    respectively in two of the subsequent subclasses 795, 801, 802, 803, 804,
    805, 806, 808, 809, 811, and 823, or wherein two doublets each within the
    scope of subclass 793 above, have structurally different radiating masses
    to present significantly different electrical properties or radiation
    properties.

    (1)     Note.  A mere difference in size with changed electrical or
    radiation properties normally following from such difference in size is not
    sufficient to constitute diverse type doublets within the definition.

    (2)     Note.  Two groups of doublets, which doublets are in themselves not
    diverse in type but which groups have significantly different arrangements
    such as plural crossed or plural circumferentially arranged, are not
    classified in this subclass, but in the pertinent plural subclasses of
    doublets, below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    724,    for antennas convertible to different types of antennas, which may
    include conversion of one type of doublet to another type of doublet or
    from a doublet to another type of antenna.

    726     and 727, for plural separate diverse type antennas which include a
    doublet type antenna.

    730,    for plural separate diverse type antennas using the same active
    element including a doublet type antenna.


CLS 343/795
TXT Subject matter under subclass 793 wherein the conductive masses are each
    formed as a sheet, or each formed as a closed portion (e.g., closed loop)
    defining a sheet-like surface.

    (1)     Note.  The sheet may have openings therein, such as exist in a
    screen or grid.  The closed portion may be formed by a conductor or series
    of conductors defining a closed path.  Grid conductors may extend from
    spaced points on the closed portion, and lie in the plane of the closed
    portion. These antennas include types designated as fan, wing, sheet, grid
    or screen.  A mere plurality of rods free at one end and joined at the
    other end is not classified here, but in such subclasses as 808 and 811,
    below.  For classification here the rods must form a closed path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    803+,   for folded doublets.

    806,    for doublets having bent arms.

    808,    for doublets with a plural-rod arm forming a V.  See also (1) Note,
    above.

    811,    for fishbone type arrays.

    824,    for planar arrays of linear antennas.

    897,    for mesh, woven, braided or multiple strip type antennas.


CLS 343/796
TXT Subject matter under subclass 793 including a plurality of doublets spaced
    along an axis, an adjacent two of these doublets being similar and
    angularly spaced with respect to each other around the same axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    742,    for stacked high frequency loop type antennas.

    776+,   for plural wave guide type antennas.

    798,    for plural groups of crossed doublet antennas (e.g., turnstile).

    800,    for plural groups of circumferentially arranged doublet antennas.

    878+,   for supports for antennas, particularly subclasses 879 for supports
    for plural separate antennas, 884 where a wave guide or plural transmission
    line forms the support, 890 for antennas mounted on a post, standard or
    tower, and 892 for bracket supports for antennas.


CLS 343/797
TXT Subject matter under subclass 793 including at least two like doublets, the
    conductive masses of each doublet being elongated in shape and collinearly
    arranged, the doublets crossing one another at their midpoints.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    799+,   for plural circumferentially arranged doublets, and see also the
    search notes thereunder.

    808,    for single doublets, wherein each arm is formed as V.


CLS 343/798
TXT Subject matter under subclass 797 wherein a plurality of doublets as
    therein defined is combined with a second distinct plurality of doublets as
    therein defined.

    (1)     Note.  Usually this subject matter involves two or more distinct
    radially arranged (crossed over doublets) stacked along a support.  The
    arrangements of the respective pluralities of doublets of the array may be
    the same or different within the scope of subclass 797.  See subclass 794
    above for combinations of single doublets of diverse type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    774,    for stacked bi-conical horn type antennas.

    796,    for helically or angularly staggered plural dipoles.

    800,    for plural groups of plural circumferentially arranged antennas.

    884,    for antennas with plural wire transmission lines or wave guides as
    a support for the antenna.


CLS 343/799
TXT Subject matter under subclass 793 wherein at least three doublets have
    their midpoints arranged on the circumference of a circle and equally
    spaced around this circumference; or wherein three doublets so arranged are
    disclosed in the specifications, and it is claimed that a plurality of
    doublets have a circumferential arrangement, or are in circular array, or
    are in cylindrical formation, or equivalent terminology; or wherein at
    least two doublets are so arranged and have their arms so curved that all
    the arms lie in a circle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    741+,   for high frequency type loops.

    796,    for helically or angularly staggered plural dipoles.

    797+,   for plural crossed doublets.

    810+,   for plural doublets.

    824,    for planar arrays of linear antennas.

    826+,   for plural multiple, fractional or full wave linear type antennas.

    835+,   for plural active antennas with parasitic reflectors.

    844,    for plural antennas spaced a fractional or full wave length apart.

    853+,   for plural antennas with a coupling network or impedance in the
    leadin.

    879,    for supports for plural separate antennas.

    893,    for plural antennas in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 385+ for beacons which may involve
    circumferentially arranged doublets.


CLS 343/800
TXT Subject matter under subclass 799 wherein a plurality of doublets as herein
    defined is combined with a second distinct plurality of doublets as therein
    defined.

    (1)     Note.  Usually this subject matter involves two or more distinct
    circularly arranged arrays stacked along a support.  The arrangements of
    the respective pluralities of doublets may be the same or different within
    the scope of subclass 799.  See subclass 794 above for combinations of
    single doublets of diverse type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    742,    for high frequency loop type antennas which may be in diverse
    planes and stacked.

    774,    for biconical horn type antennas which may be stacked.

    796,    for helically or angularly staggered plural doublets.

    798,    for plural groups of plural radially arranged doublets.

    835+,   for plural active antennas with reflectors.

    884,    for antennas with plural wire transmission lines or wave guides as
    a support for the antenna.


CLS 343/801
TXT Subject matter under subclass 793 wherein the active conductive masses are
    of elongated shape and are longitudinally divided into at least three
    discrete portions which are substantially aligned along their longitudinal
    axes.

    (1)     Note.  The break at the antenna terminals may constitute one of the
    longitudinal divisions.  The divisions (between discrete collinear
    portions) usually include some phasing means (e.g., a long line) to shift
    the phase between the separate portions.

    (2)     Note.  Subject matter involving plural collinear doublets each as
    herein defined wherein the respective portions are cross-connected, instead
    of the respective doublets having their respective portions connected in
    series, is classified herein.

    (3)     Note.  Subject matter wherein collinear doublets as herein defined
    have lumped reactance means between portions as for loading is classified
    in subclasses 749+, above; while where distributed reactance is included
    between portions, such subject matter is classified herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    722,    for antennas with lumped reactance filters between antenna portions.

    749+,   for antennas with lumped reactance for loading.  See (3) Note,
    above.

    802,    for doublet antennas with distributed reactance added to the arms.

    813,    for doublet antenna arrays in a parallel and collinear arrangement.

    824,    for planar arrays of linear antennas.

    827,    for fractional, multiple and full wave type antennas in collinear
    arrangement.


CLS 343/802
TXT Subject matter under subclass 793 wherein each conducting mass includes in
    addition to its own inherent reactance a distributed reactance in series or
    in shunt with the mass, at least a part of the distributed reactance being
    spaced on the radiating mass from the antenna lead-in terminals, i.e., the
    distributed reactance is not physically and electrically entirely disposed
    between the conducting mass and the antenna lead-in terminals.

    (1)     Note.  This distributed reactance may result from an abrupt change
    in shape of the conducting mass, or from a portion extending from the main
    body of the mass such as a branch.

    (2)     Note.  Subject matter wherein the arms of a doublet are merely
    adjustable in length without any nonuniformity or without any abrupt change
    in shape with its consequent loading effect is not classified herein, but
    in subclass 823 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    744,    for high frequency loop type antennas with series reactance in the
    loop path.

    749+,   for antennas with lumped reactance for loading.

    801,    wherein three or more collinear units form a doublet.  See also the
    Notes under subclass 801.

    806,    for balanced doublets having bent arms.

    828,    for fractional, multiple, or full wave linear type antennas having
    a non-uniformity therein for reactive effect.

    843,    for antennas having an appreciable wave length dimension.

    895,    for spiral and helical type antennas.

    899,    for antennas with area increasing means (e.g., spiniferous).


CLS 343/803
TXT Subject matter under subclass 793 wherein the two active conductive masses
    include elongated conductors which extend outwardly from the antenna lead
    in terminals together with an additional elongated conductor or conductors
    extending along the length of and close to the first conductors to form a
    transmission line therewith, the first and second conductors being joined
    at the outer ends as by bending to present a substantially increased
    radiation resistance at the antenna lead in terminals.

    (1)     Note.  While folded dipoles may form a closed circuit as do the
    high frequency loops in subclass 741 above, the conductors of the folded
    dipole are close together to form a transmission line, whereas the
    conductors of the high frequency loop are spaced further apart so that the
    closed circuit encloses a relatively larger area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    741,    for high frequency type loops.  See also (1) Note, above.


CLS 343/804
TXT Subject matter under subclass 803 wherein the second conductors comprise a
    plurality of conductors in parallel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    795,    for wing type doublet antennas.

    896,    for antennas having rods or wire forming a cage or a hollow post.


CLS 343/805
TXT Subject matter under subclass 793 wherein the two active conductive masses
    are elongated and are supported adjacent the lead-in terminals by structure
    permitting relative angular movement with respect to one another, as by a
    pivot or hinge, for such purposes as folding or electrically adjusting the
    antenna.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    880+,   for antennas in general with adjustable or collapsible supports.

    915,    for collapsible, foldable or adjustable reflectors or directors.


CLS 343/806
TXT Subject matter under subclass 793 wherein each of the separate conductive
    masses constitutes a rod having a bend or curve therein remote from the
    lead-in terminal to constitute a change in direction of the rod, and all
    portions on both sides of the bend being radiators or collectors of radio
    wave energy.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter involving a mere loop in the conductive mass
    where the direction of the active radiating or collecting member resumes
    its original direction in a straight line and where such loop is itself not
    an active part of the radiating member, but serves, for example, merely as
    a phasing or loading means is not classified in this subclass but in such
    subclasses as 801 and 802.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    733     and 736, for traveling wave type antennas in the form of a rhombus
    and inverted V, respectively.

    803+,   for folded doublet type antennas.

    899,    for antennas with area increasing means such as spiniferous.


CLS 343/807
TXT Subject matter under subclass 793 wherein each mass constitutes an
    elongated portion which is tapered, or significantly thickened or enlarged
    over at least a portion of its length, such as a thick elongated rod,
    cylinder, or cone, for impedance matching, broadbanding, or presenting a
    larger area for wave energy radiation or collection.

    (1)     Note.  The elongated portion may be a single rod, or a plurality of
    rods or wires forming substantially a single conductive mass and enclosing
    a volume, as opposed to the sheet or screen type mass of subclass 795,
    which defines a plane.  Such wires or rods for classification in subclass
    807, would have the ends remote from the feed points electrically
    connected, as by a conductive loop, or being joined at a common point, as
    opposed to subclass 808 wherein the diverging rods are electrically free at
    their outer ends.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    790+,   for sleeve type antennas.

    795,    for sheet or screen type doublet antennas.  See also (1) Note,
    above.

    808,    for doublets wherein the plural rods form a V.  See also (1) Note,
    above.

    831,    for stub type fractional, full wave, or multiple wave linear type
    antennas.

    874+,   for mast or tower type antennas.

    895,    for spiral or helical type antennas.

    896+,   for antennas wherein rods or wires form a cage or hollow post.

    897,    for mesh, woven, braided or multiple strip type antennas.

    898,    for hollow metallic body type antennas.

    899,    for antennas having area increasing means, e.g., spiniferous or
    metal ball on top.


CLS 343/808
TXT Subject matter under subclass 793 wherein each conductive mass is composed
    of a plurality of straight linear rods which diverge from and are
    electrically connected at a common point.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the diverging rods of each conductive mass
    are electrically free at their outer ends, as distinguished from subclass
    795 above wherein the diverging rods are electrically connected together at
    their ends.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    794,    for antennas wherein the plural rod arms form a V and the sides of
    each V are significantly different.

    795,    for sheet or wing type doublet antennas.

    797+,   for plural doublets which cross at their mid-points.

    807,    for doublet antennas having tapered, thick, or enlarged arms.


CLS 343/809
TXT Subject matter under subclass 793 wherein the conductive masses are
    straight and linear, and which are angularly disposed to form a V.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    735,    for balanced V traveling wave type antennas.

    805,    for doublet antennas whose arms are angularly adjustable.

    808,    for doublet antennas wherein each doublet arm has plural rods
    formed as a V.


CLS 343/810
TXT Subject matter under subclass 793 including two or more separate and
    independent doublets as therein defined.

    (1)     Note.  For classification herein the doublets must have their
    respective arms physically distinct and separate. A two arm doublet even
    when connected to two sources or loads at different frequencies, and which
    radiates at both frequencies efficiently is not sufficient for
    classification herein, but would normally be classified as a single doublet
    in such subclasses as 818+, 820+ and 823+, below.  Further the doublets
    must have their respective arms independently connected to the source or
    load.  When the arms of one doublet are connected to the source or load
    through the arms of the other doublet as a current conducting medium,
    classification is not here but in subclass 801, where the three or more
    arms of the respective doublets are collinear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    726     and 727, for plural separate diverse type antennas including a
    balanced doublet.

    730,    for plural diverse antennas using the same element including a
    balanced doublet.

    741,    for high frequency type loops formed by a plurality of balanced
    doublets.

    794,    for diverse type doublets.

    796,    for helically or angularly staggered plural dipoles.

    797+,   for plural crossed balanced doublets.

    799+,   for plural circumferentially arranged doublets.

    801,    for doublets formed by three or more collinear units.

    824,    for planar arrays of linear antennas.

    826+,   for plural linear type antennas having an appreciable wave length
    dimension.

    844,    for plural antennas spaced a fractional or full wave length apart.

    879,    for supports for plural separate antennas.

    893,    and the Search Notes thereunder, for plural antennas in general.


CLS 343/811
TXT Subject matter under subclass 810 wherein the respective arms of the
    doublets are connected by two straight parallel closely spaced nonradiating
    or noncollecting feed lines, the signal source or load being connected at
    one end of these lines together with structure substantially eliminating
    standing waves on these lines, as by terminating the end of the lines
    opposite the signal source or load in a resistance equal to the
    characteristic impedance of the lines.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    731+,   for traveling wave type antennas generally.

    739,    for antennas with a terminating resistance at the open end.

    770,    for plural slot type antennas.

    826+,   for plural fractional, multiple or full wave linear type antennas.

    899,    for antennas with area increasing means, which may be spiniferous.


CLS 343/812
TXT Subject matter under subclass 810 wherein each arm of one doublet is
    physically parallel to each arm of another doublet, the arms of these
    doublets being substantially straight and linear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    799+,   for circumferentially arranged doublets which may have parallel arms

    811,    for fishbone type arrays.


CLS 343/813
TXT Subject matter under subclass 812 wherein in addition to the parallel
    arranged doublets, a further doublet is provided, whose two arms together
    with the two arms of one of the parallel arranged doublets lie along a
    single straight line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    790+,   for sleeve type antennas wherein a plurality of radiating sleeves
    may surround a feed line.

    801,    for single doublets formed of three or more collinear units.

    827,    for plural collinearly arranged fractional, multiple or full wave
    linear type antennas.


CLS 343/814
TXT Subject matter under subclass 812 including a passive network (which may be
    resistive, inductive or capacitive or any combination thereof) for
    transmitting signal energy between the doublets and a source or a receiver
    of such signal energy.

    (1)     Note.  For an explanation of the terms used in the above definition
    and distinctions between coupling and tuning subclasses, see (1) to (4)
    Notes under subclass 850, below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    811,    for fishbone type arrays of doublet antennas.

    813,    for parallelly and collinearly arranged doublet antennas with
    coupling networks.

    816,    for plural doublet antennas generally with coupling networks.

    820+,   for single doublet antennas with coupling networks.

    852,    for plural antennas in general with impedance matching networks.

    853+,   for plural antennas in general with coupling networks.


CLS 343/815
TXT Subject matter under subclass 812 wherein the doublets are combined with
    conductive structure (usually metallic, e.g., rod) which reradiates into
    free space impinging radio waves coming from or going to the antennas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    813,    for parallelly and collinearly arranged antennas with a parasitic
    element.

    818+,   for single doublets with parasitic elements.  See also the Search
    Notes, thereunder.


CLS 343/816
TXT Subject matter under subclass 810 including a passive network (which may be
    resistive, inductive, or capacitive or any combination thereof) for
    transmitting signal energy between the doublets and a source or a receiver
    of such signal energy.

    (1)     Note.  For an explanation of the terms used in the above definition
    and distinctions between coupling and tuning subclasses, see (1) to (4)
    Notes under subclass 850, below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    726,    727 and 730, for plural diverse type antennas including a balanced
    doublet, which may include a coupling network.

    814,    for plural parallel balanced doublets  with a coupling network.

    820+,   for single doublet antennas with coupling networks.

    852,    for plural antennas in general with impedance matching networks.

    853,    for plural antennas in general with coupling networks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 100+ for branched
    circuits involved in wave transmission networks.


CLS 343/817
TXT Subject matter under subclass 810 wherein the plural antennas are combined
    with conductive structure which reradiates into free space impinging radio
    waves coming from or going to the active antennas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    813     and 815, for plural parallel balanced  doublets with a parasitic
    element.

    818+,   for single balanced doublets with a parasitic element.


CLS 343/818
TXT Subject matter under subclass 793 wherein the two active conductive masses
    are combined with conductive (usually metallic) structure (e.g., a rod)
    which reradiates into free space impinging radio waves coming from or going
    to the antenna, the velocity of the reradiated wave having a component
    which is in the same direction (director) as, or in the opposite direction
    (reflector) to, that of the velocity of the impinging wave.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    761,    for reflector and antenna relatively movable, together with means
    for effecting such motion for scanning, sweeping or orienting.

    813     and 815, for plural parallel balanced doublets with parasitic
    elements.

    817,    for plural balanced doublets generally with parasitic elements.

    832,    for subject matter including an active antenna which also acts as a
    reflector.

    833,    for antennas in general with parasitic directors.

    834+,   and the Search Notes thereunder, for antennas in general with
    parasitic reflectors.

    878+,   for reflectors or directors generally with supports therefor.

    912+,   for reflectors or directors, per se.


CLS 343/819
TXT Subject matter under subclass 818 including both a director and reflector
    as defined in the above subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    833,    for antennas in general having parasitic directors and reflectors.


CLS 343/820
TXT Subject matter under subclass 793 wherein the doublet antenna is combined
    with a passive network (which may be resistive, inductive or capacitive or
    any combination thereof) for transmitting signal energy between the doublet
    and a source or receiver of such signal energy.

    (1)     Note.  For an explanation of the terms used in the above definition
    and distinctions between coupling and tuning subclasses, see (1) to (4)
    Notes under subclass 850 below.  For more comprehensive search notes to
    other classes see those under subclass 850, below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    722,    for antennas having lumped reactance filters between active antenna
    sections.

    730,    for plural diverse type antennas one of which is a doublet having a
    common active radiating or collecting portion with the other being usually
    coupling having both balanced and unbalanced sections to pass high and low
    frequency currents according to the operation in question of the antenna as
    a doublet or other antenna respectively.

    745+,   for antennas with variable reactance for tuning.

    749+,   for antennas having lumped reactance for loading.

    814     and 816, for plural doublets with coupling networks.

    850+,   for antennas with coupling networks in general.  See also (1) Note,
    above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, particularly subclasses 1+
    and 24+, for wave transmission coupling networks in general.


CLS 343/821
TXT Subject matter under subclass 820 wherein the passive coupling network
    includes four terminals, one pair of which are connected to the balanced
    doublet and the other pair being for connection to a source or receiver of
    signal energy or a circuit network leading thereto; the impedance across
    the pair of terminals connected to the balanced doublet being symmetrical
    and the network impedance across the other pair of terminals being
    asymmetrical with respect to a given potential plane (e.g., ground), this
    latter impedance being effective to convert symmetrical potential applied
    at the symmetrical pair of terminals (for connection to the balanced
    doublet) to asymmetrical potential applied at the other pair of terminals
    or vice versa.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    859,    for antennas generally with balanced to unbalanced coupling
    networks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 25+ for wave
    transmission lines and networks with balanced to unbalanced circuits.


CLS 343/822
TXT Subject matter under subclass 820 wherein the passive coupling network
    includes one or more impedance elements constructed or proportioned to
    substantially eliminate the reflected wave energy between the doublet
    antenna and the receiver or signal energy source, caused by impedance
    differences.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    731+,   739+ and 811, for antennas with means to eliminate reflection
    therein or in the coupling circuits.

    821,    for impedance matching coupling circuits combined with balanced to
    unbalanced circuits and balanced doublets.

    852     and 860+, for antennas in general combined with impedance matching
    networks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 32+ and 124+ for
    wave transmission lines and networks involving impedance matching or
    impedance matching networks.


CLS 343/823
TXT Subject matter under subclass 793 wherein the overall physical length of
    the two active conducting masses is adjustable, as by the length of at
    least one of the masses being adjustable or by the relative spacing of the
    masses being adjustable, for such purposes as tuning or collapsing the
    doublet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    723,    for single resonant end-fed linear type antennas adjustable in
    length for tuning.

    880+,   for antennas with adjustable or collapsible supports.

    889,    for rod-like antennas retractible into a support.

    901+,   and the Search Notes thereunder, for telescoping rod type antennas.


CLS 343/824
TXT Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein a plurality of physically
    separate straight linear radiating type conductors lie in a planar unique
    surface; or the claims recite that the linear conductors are arranged in a
    plane, or equivalent subject matter.

    (1)     Note.  The linear conductors are considered separate when they are
    isolated in space or nonradiating or noncollecting means couple the linear
    portions.

    (2)     Note.  Two parallel linear conductors are not sufficient for
    classification here, but rather in subclasses 826+, 844 and 893 below since
    other surfaces such as a cylinder may be passed through these conductors.
    At least three parallel linear conductors are necessary for classification
    here, or else the claims must recite that the antennas lie in a plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    797+,   799+ and 810, for balanced doublet type antennas which may lie in a
    plane.

    826+,   for plural fractional, multiple, or full wave linear type antennas.

    835+,   for plural active antennas with a reflector.

    844,    for plural antennas spaced a fractional or full wave length apart.

    853+,   for plural antennas with a coupling network or impedance in the
    leadin.

    893,    and the Search Notes thereunder, for plural antennas in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation),  subclasses 1-205 for directive communication
    systems which may include an antenna array.


CLS 343/825
TXT Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein the antenna is a straight linear
    conductor such as a rod, wire or stub and wherein the claims recite a
    particular length, series of length, range of length, or limit of length of
    this conductor in terms of its operating wave length, or the claims recite
    a physical length in numerical terms (e.g., number of feet) and in the
    latter case the context of the disclosure establishes that such terms are
    an appreciable part of the operating wave length.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses are limited to straight
    linear antennas or to a plurality of such antennas dimensioned as recited
    in the definition above.  Antennas in general (i.e., having a shape other
    than straight linear) having an appreciable wave length dimension are
    classified in subclass 843, below.

    (2)     Note.  A lattice type mast of appreciable electrical length which
    functions as a single elongated conductor, is classified here. Otherwise
    classification is in subclasses 874+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    723,    for single electrically long antennas whose length is adjustable
    for tuning.

    731+,   for traveling wave type antennas.

    741+,   for high frequency type loops.

    745+,   for antennas with variable reactance for tuning, this reactance
    being in addition to any inherent distributed reactance of the antennas.

    749+,   for antennas with lumped reactance for loading.

    767+,   for slot type antennas.

    790+,   for sleeve type antennas.

    793+,   for balanced doublet type antennas.

    824,    for planar type high frequency arrays.

    843,    for antennas in general having an appreciable wave length
    dimension.  See also (1) Note, above.

    874+,   for mast or tower type antennas.  See also (2) Note, above.

    900+,   for rod type antennas of no appreciable wave length.


CLS 343/826
TXT Subject matter under subclass 825 including a plurality of physically
    separate linear, radiating type conductors, at least one of the conductors
    having a length as recited in subclass 825.

    (1)     Note.  A first linear conductor with a second such conductor
    extending therefrom as a branch is not within the above definition, since
    the conductors are not separate as the definition requires.  See subclass
    843 for such subject matter if an appreciable wave length dimension is
    recited.

    (2)     Note.  The linear conductors are considered separate when they are
    isolated in space, or when nonradiating means or noncollecting means couple
    the linear conductors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    731+,   and particularly subclass 737 for traveling wave type antennas
    involving a plurality of linear antennas of an appreciable electrical
    length.

    739+,   for antennas with a terminating resistance, which may involve a
    plurality of linear sections of appreciable wave length dimensions.

    741+,   for high frequency loop type antennas, which may involve a
    plurality of linear type sections of appreciable wave length dimensions.

    790+,   for sleeve type antennas, which may involve a plurality of linear
    sections.

    793+,   for center-fed doublet type antennas.

    824,    for planar type high frequency arrays.

    843,    for antennas in general having an appreciable wave length dimension.

    844,    for plural antennas spaced a fractional or full wave length apart.

    893,    and the Search Notes thereunder, for plural antennas in general.


CLS 343/827
TXT Subject matter under subclass 826 wherein the linear conductors have their
    longitudinal axes lying substantially on a common straight line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    749+,   for antennas with lumped reactance for loading, wherein the
    reactance may separate collinearly arranged active sections.

    790+,   for sleeve type antennas, wherein a plurality of active sleeves may
    be arranged collinearly along a feed line.

    801,    for balanced doublets formed by three or more collinear units.

    813,    for parallel and collinear separate doublets.

    828,    for linear antennas with a nonuniformity therein generally.

    875,    for sectional mast or tower type antennas.


CLS 343/828
TXT Subject matter under subclass 825 wherein the linear antenna has an abrupt
    change in its cross-sectional dimension or has a substantially nonradiating
    branch.

    (1)     Note.  Usually such changes in dimensions or branches have a
    reactive effect which effects a change in the loading of the antenna.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    749+,   for antennas having lumped reactance for loading.

    790+,   for sleeve type antennas.

    802,    for balanced doublets with distributed reactance added to the
    doublet arms.

    827,    for plural section antennas collinearly arranged in which the
    sections are separated by nonuniformities, which may be in the form of
    nonradiating or noncollecting reactive loops in the antenna conductor.

    843,    for antennas in general having an appreciable wave length
    dimension, which may include branches or abrupt changes in cross-sectional
    dimension.

    899+,   for antennas having area increasing means (e.g., changes in antenna
    dimensions or branches).


CLS 343/829
TXT Subject matter under subclass 825 together with structure including ground
    or structure most closely associated with or simulating ground, and such
    structure being connected to the terminal of the signal receiver or source
    opposing the active antenna terminal (i.e., having the signal receiver or
    source interposed between the active antenna and this structure), for
    establishing a reference potential level for operating the active antenna.

    (1)     Note.  Antennas designated as ground plane, steering wheel,
    drooping ground plane, skirt or cone, and flat circular ground plane
    antennas are typical of the patents classified in this and the indented
    subclass, it being understood that the length of the active antenna must be
    set forth as specified in the definition of subclass 825, above. Sometimes
    structure identical with grounding structure defined in this subclass is
    designated merely as a shield decoupling the antenna from its transmission
    line, and is classified herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    834+,   for antennas with parasitic reflectors.

    841+,   for antennas with electrical shields.

    846+,   for antennas in general with grounding structure including
    counterpoises.

    905,    for antennas combined with a transmission line including shields.


CLS 343/830
TXT Subject matter under subclass 829 including a coaxial feed line, the active
    antenna being connected to the inner conductor at the end of this line and
    the grounding structure being connected to the outer conductor at the end
    of this line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    790+,   for antennas wherein an active sleeve surrounds the feed line.


CLS 343/831
TXT Subject matter under subclass 825 wherein the linear conductor is thickened
    or enlarged in cross section to produce such shapes as cylindrical,
    conical, diamond, double diamond, and spheroidal.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the antennas are a quarter wave length long; and the
    thickening or enlarging is for the purpose of obtaining a wide band
    characteristic over a frequency range, any resulting physical strengthening
    or streamlining of the antennas being incidental.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    790,    for sleeve type antennas.

    807,    for dipoles having a stub configuration.

    826+,   for plural stub type antennas.

    829+,   for stub antennas with grounding structure, including counterpoises.


CLS 343/832
TXT Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein the claimed subject matter
    includes an active antenna designated as a reflector, or includes an
    energized or active reflector (i.e., coupled to a signal source or to a
    receiver).

    (1)     Note.  The patents classified in this subclass usually include a
    plurality of active antennas which are connected to a single transmitter or
    receiver, and have a significant wave length spacing. The subject matter
    appears very similar to so-called "end fire arrays". However, in this
    subclass the rear active antenna (i.e., in the direction opposed to the
    direction of radiation of the array) is designated in the claim as being a
    reflector.


CLS 343/833
TXT Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein the active antenna is combined
    with conductive (usually metallic) structure, (e.g., a rod) which
    reradiates into free space impinging radio waves coming from or going to
    the active antenna, the velocity of the reradiated wave having a component
    in the direction of velocity of the impinging wave, thereby to modify the
    radiation pattern of the active antenna, there being no significant
    potential relationship between the active antenna and the conductive
    structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    781+,   for wave guide type antennas with external directors.

    815,    817 and 818, for dipole antennas with parasitic elements which may
    be directors; and subclass 819 for dipole antennas having both reflectors
    and directors.

    834+,   for antennas with reflectors.

    912+,   for reflectors and directors, per se.


CLS 343/834
TXT Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein an active antenna is combined
    with conductive structure (usually metallic, e.g., screen rod or plate)
    which returns or reradiates back into free space impinging radio waves
    coming from or going to the active antenna, the velocity of the returned
    wave having a component in a direction opposite to the direction of
    velocity of the impinging wave, thereby to modify the radiation pattern of
    the active antenna, there being no significant potential relationship
    between the active antenna and the conductive structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    755,    for antennas with spaced radio wave lens or diffractor with a
    reflector; for waveguide-type antennas with reflectors.

    757+,   for directive antennas with means for moving the antennas for
    scanning, sweeping or orienting, which may include reflectors; and
    particularly indented subclass 761 for a reflector and antenna relatively
    movable.

    779,    780, and 781+, for waveguide-type antennas with reflectors.

    815,    817 and 818+, for balanced doublet antennas with reflectors.

    829+,   for fractional, multiple, or full wave linear type antennas with
    grounding structure.

    832,    where the reflector is also an active  antenna.

    833,    for antennas with a director.

    841+,   for antennas with electrical shields.

    846+,   for antennas with grounding structure including counterpoises.

    878+,   for antenna and/or reflector with supports.

    912+,   for reflectors or directors, per se, and see also the search notes
    under subclass 912.


CLS 343/835
TXT Subject matter under subclass 834 including two or more active antennas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    779,    for plural wave guide antennas with a reflector.

    815     and 817, for plural balanced doublets with a reflector.

    832,    for antenna systems wherein an active antenna acts as a reflector.

    893,    and Search Notes thereunder, for plural antennas.


CLS 343/836
TXT Subject matter under subclass 835 including two or more reflectors as
    defined in subclass 834.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    837+,   for plural reflectors with a single active antenna.


CLS 343/837
TXT Subject matter under subclass 834 including two or more reflectors as
    defined in subclass 834 above.

    (1)     Note.  When a plurality of reflectors are physically combined to
    constitute a unitary reflector, such as the grid type, such a reflector is
    considered a single reflector.  Plural reflectors usually occur when
    successive reflection occurs, or when reflectors of different type are
    combined.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    836,    for plural reflectors with plural active antennas.


CLS 343/838
TXT Subject matter under subclass 837 wherein a first reflector is positioned
    behind an active antenna and a second reflector (screen reflector) is
    positioned in front of the antenna, the second reflector redirecting
    diverging rays emanating from the active antenna in transmission, and
    shielding the active antenna in reception from undesired energy when coming
    from a direction other than that of the desired received energy.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the subject matter in this subclass includes a
    parabolic reflector with a transmitting active antenna at its focus and a
    screening reflector on the side of the transmitting antennas opposite from
    the parabolic reflector.  The screening reflector directs the diverging
    energy radiated from the source towards the parabolic reflector, which
    redirects this energy in a parallel path.

    (2)     Note.  The second reflector (screen reflector) referred to in the
    definition above is not a director. See subclass 833 above for antennas
    with directors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    840,    for active antennas with parabolic reflectors.

    841+,   for antennas with shields.


CLS 343/839
TXT Subject matter under subclass 834 wherein means are provided permitting
    relative movement or adjustment between the reflector or a part thereof and
    the active antenna or a part thereof under operative conditions.

    (1)     Note.  Where means is provided for moving the active antenna and
    reflector relative to each other, as a handle, motor, gearing or other
    means for transmitting motion, to change the directive pattern of the
    antenna for scanning, sweeping or orienting in  addition to the means
    permitting such motion, classification is not here but in subclass 761,
    above.  However, where means are provided for moving the active antenna
    relative to the reflector, in addition to mere means permitting such
    motion, for purposes other than those recited in subclass 761,
    classification is in this subclass (839) as opposed to subclass 761.

    (2)     Note.  Where an antenna and reflector are claimed with means to
    fold or collapse either or both when not in operation, classification is
    not herein but in subclass 834, above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    361,    for directive antennas having a reflector together with means for
    moving the active antenna and reflector relative to one another for
    scanning, sweeping or orienting.  See also (1) Note, above.

    880+,   for antennas or reflectors with adjustable or collapsible supports,
    and particularly subclass 882 for antennas or reflectors with a pivoted or
    rotatable support for the antenna or reflector.

    915,    for reflectors, per se, which are collapsible, foldable or
    adjustable.


CLS 343/840
TXT Subject matter under subclass 834 wherein the reflector presents a
    reflecting surface having a parabolic contour in at least one plane, and
    the active antenna is positioned at the focus of the parabola.

    (1)     Note.  The reflector may be a sheet, screen, or group of rods,
    provided the parabolic contour is present.  It may include reflecting
    portions which are not parabolic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    775,    779 and 781+, for wave guide type antennas with a reflector in
    which the reflector may be of the parabolic type.

    815,    817 and 818+, for center-fed balanced doublet type antennas with a
    reflector in which the reflector may be of the parabolic type.


CLS 343/841
TXT Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein a conductive or low reluctance
    structure, such as a wire, plate, or grid, is combined with the antenna to
    reduce, as by dissipation through a resistance or by conduction to ground,
    undesired radiation, or electric or magnetic fields, which are directed
    toward the antenna from an external source, or which emanate from the
    antenna.

    (1)     Note.  While a shield may modify the radiation of an antenna as
    does the reflector, in the case of the shield the energy is essentially
    absorbed rather than returned to space. Likewise in the case of the ground,
    as in subclass 846 below, the reflecting function may also be performed.

    (2)     Note.  For classification in this subclass, the shield must
    cooperate with the antenna in its operative position.  A mere sheath for an
    antenna when not in use is not classified in this subclass, but in
    subclasses 872 and 889.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    702,    for antennas combined with radio cabinets which may include
    shielding.

    705+,   709+ and 711+, for antennas with aircraft, watercraft and vehicle
    structure respectively, where the antennas may be shielded by such
    structure.

    719,    for antennas buried underground or submerged under water.

    829,    for fractional, multiple or full wave linear type antennas with a
    decoupling shield.

    851,    for antennas with a coupling network or impedance in the leadin,
    together with a shield for such network or impedance.

    872,    for antennas with a housing or protective covering.

    905,    for antennas combined with shielded transmission lines.

    906,    for antennas combined with shielded electrical connectors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 35+ for
    shielded or screened electrical conductors and insulators.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 91 for
    electrical transmission systems with shielding means, generally.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 271 and 283+ for radiation
    prevention and noise elimination in the antenna circuits of radio receivers.


CLS 343/842
TXT Subject matter under subclass 841 wherein the antenna is of the loop type
    as defined in subclass 866, below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    741+,   for high frequency type loop antennas which may involve shields.

    866+,   for loop type antennas, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, particularly subclasses 84+ and the search notes
    thereunder for shielded electrical inductor devices.


CLS 343/843
TXT Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein the claims recite the active
    antenna or portion, section, or part thereof as having a dimension which is
    a fractional part or multiple (including unity) of the operating wave
    length of the antenna.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter involving spiral, helical and sinuous types
    of antennas, where such antennas are claimed to have a particular operating
    wave length dimension, are classified herein.  An example of such subject
    matter is a helix having a pitch or circumference which is an appreciable
    portion of a wave length.  This is the residual subclass for antennas
    having a particular wave length dimension. Special types of antennas, which
    may also involve a particular operating wave length for the active antenna,
    are classified with their particular type of antenna, as for example,
    subclasses 772+ for wave guide type antennas, subclasses 793+ for balanced
    doublets, and subclasses 825+ for linear type antennas of a particular
    electrical length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    723,    for single linear antennas having an adjustable length for tuning.

    741+,   for high frequency loops having an appreciable wave length
    dimension.

    749+,   for antennas of a particular wave length dimension with lumped
    reactance for loading.

    772+,   for wave guide type antennas which may have an appreciable wave
    length dimension.

    793+,   for balanced doublets having an appreciable wave length dimension.

    825+,   for fractional, multiple or full wave linear type antennas.


CLS 343/844
TXT Subject matter under subclass 700 including a plurality of antennas spaced
    a physical distance apart, which distance is an appreciable part of a wave
    length or number of wave lengths at the operating frequency of the
    antennas; or including a plurality of antennas combined with structure
    which of necessity results in the antennas being spaced a physical distance
    apart, which distance is an appreciable part of a wave length or number of
    wave lengths at the operating frequency of the antennas.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this subclass the claims must either
    recite the antennas being spaced a particular part of a wave length or
    number of wave lengths at the operating frequency; or spaced a particular
    distance, which from the specification would establish the spacing of the
    antennas as a particular part of a wave length or number of wave lengths at
    the operating frequency; or the antennas being connected, supported or
    separated by structure which establishes a particular wave length spacing
    of the antennas.

    (2)     Note.  Patents claiming a plurality of antennas connected by
    fractional or multiple wave length transmission lines or other structures
    which would constitute electrical coupling are not classified in this
    subclass unless they also claim the physical spacing of the antennas, but
    are found in subclasses 852 and 853+.

    (3)     Note.  A mere recitation of the relationship between the spacings
    of respective antennas of an array (e.g., increasing distances or unequal
    distances between antennas) is not sufficient for classification in this
    subclass.  For classification here, the particular spacing in operating
    wave length between two antennas is necessary.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    725+,   for plural separate diverse type antennas, which may be spaced a
    particular wave length apart.

    770+,   for plural slot type antennas, whose slots may be spaced a
    particular wave length apart.

    776+,   for plural wave guide type antennas, which may be spaced a
    particular wave length apart.

    794,    796, 797+, 799+, and 810+, for balanced doublet antennas which may
    be spaced a particular wave length apart.

    824,    for planar type high frequency arrays.

    826+,   for plural fractional, multiple, or full wave linear antennas,
    which may be spaced a particular wave length apart.

    835,    for plural active antennas with reflectors.

    852     and 853+, for plural antennas with a coupling network or impedance
    in the leadin.  See also (2) Note, above.

    867     for plural loop antennas.

    879,    for plural separate antennas with a support.

    893,    for plural antennas, including those of no particular type, and
    having no particular spacing or coupling. Antennas in particular patterns
    or arrangements are classified here.  See also the Search Notes to this
    subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 1-205 for directive signaling systems
    which may involve plural antennas spaced a particular wavelength apart.


CLS 343/845
TXT Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein the antenna has a connection to
    ground at some point on the antenna physically or electrically spaced on
    the antenna from the point of connection of the transmitter or receiver
    leadin to the antenna.

    (1)     Note.  This ground connection is in addition to any ground or
    reference potential which the transmitter or receiver leadin may provide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    731+,   for antennas with energy absorbing means remote from the feed line
    coupling, which means may be connected to ground.

    739,    for antennas connected to ground through a resistance at the end
    electrically remote from the lead-in terminals.

    846+,   for antennas with grounding structure in general.


CLS 343/846
TXT Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein the active antenna is combined
    with structure including ground or structure most closely associated with
    or simulating ground, and such structure being connected to the terminal of
    the signal receiver or source opposing the active antenna terminal (i.e.,
    having the signal receiver or source interposed between the active antenna
    and this structure), for establishing a reference potential level for
    operating the active antenna.

    (1)     Note.  For classification herein significant details of the ground
    structure must be claimed.  The mere recitation of a ground or ground
    terminal or of a switch to connect to ground is not sufficient to bring
    such subject matter within this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The ground structures may radiate signal energy by
    reflection, as for example, where such a structure functions as an image
    antenna.  But as distinct from reflectors in subclasses 834+ and 912+ the
    ground structure bears a significant potential relationship with the
    antenna, while a reflector has no such significant potential relationship.

    (3)     Note.  This grounding structure is usually used with unbalanced or
    capacity antennas, as opposed to balanced antennas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    705+,   709+ and 711+, for antennas with aircraft, watercraft and vehicles,
    respectively, wherein these latter structures may constitute a ground or
    counterpoise.

    719,    for underground or underwater antennas.

    829+,   for fractional, multiple or full wave linear antennas with
    grounding structure, including counterpoises.

    834+    and 912+, for antennas with reflectors and reflectors, per se.  See
    also (2) Note, above.

    841+,   for antennas with an electrical shield.

    845,    for antennas with a ground connection spaced from the feed line
    connection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 6+ for earth
    grounds for conductors.


CLS 343/847
TXT Subject matter under subclass 846 wherein the structure most closely
    associated with ground is insulated from or capacitively coupled to the
    natural ground to aid in the function of the natural ground, particularly
    where variations or limitations of the characteristics of the natural
    ground interfere with its proper function.

    (1)     Note.  Antenna counterpoises, which are insulated or capacitively
    coupled to ground, are classified herein.


CLS 343/848
TXT Subject matter under subclass 846 wherein the grounding structure for the
    antenna includes conductive structure used in place of the earth and which
    grounding structure is distinct from the earth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    705+    and 709+, for antennas combined with devices suspended in air or
    water, respectively, in which the device may serve in whole or in part as
    an artificial ground.

    711+,   for antennas combined with vehicles wherein the vehicle may form or
    is part of an artificial ground.

    829+,   for multiple, fractional, or full wave linear type antennas with a
    ground plane.


CLS 343/849
TXT Subject matter under subclass 846 wherein the natural earth ground is
    modified by the addition of structure or material in direct contact with or
    within the earth to modify or maintain the radiation reflecting or
    absorbing characteristics or electrical conducting properties of the
    natural ground.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    719,    for underground or underwater type antennas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 6+ for earth
    grounds for conductors.


CLS 343/850
TXT Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein an active antenna is combined
    with a passive network (which may be resistive, inductive, or capacitive or
    any combination thereof) for transmitting the signal energy between the
    active antenna and a source or receiver of such signal energy.

    (1)     Note.  Where the impedance network is located at the junction of
    the leadin and the antenna and the function of such impedance is loading or
    tuning the natural frequency of the antenna, classification is in
    subclasses 745+ or 749+.  However, where the network is so located and the
    function is coupling, and there is no loading or tuning of the natural
    resonant frequency of the antenna classification is in this subclasses
    (850+ ) as opposed to subclasses 745+ or 749+.  See subclasses 745+ and
    749+ and the Notes thereto for definitions of antennas with tuning and
    loading, respectively.

    (2)     Note.  Mere recitation of a transmission line or lead-in wire
    joining the antenna to its signal source or load without any significant
    electrical characteristics is not sufficient for classification here. Such
    subject matter, including structural characteristics of the transmission
    line, is classified in subclass 905, below.

    (3)     Note.  The combination of a coupling network as defined above with
    an antenna network recited by name only is sufficient for classification in
    this subclass as opposed to Class 333, Wave Transmission Lines and
    Networks, where coupling networks, per se, as there defined are classified.

    (4)     Note.  Combinations of an antenna, coupling network, and a receiver
    or transmitter are classified in this and indented subclasses, unless an
    active element or network, or significant structure of a transmitter or
    receiver is claimed.  For definitions of active element or significant
    structure see (3) Note under subclass 858, below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    722,    for antennas having filters in the active antenna.

    731+    and 739+, for antennas having energy absorbing means remote from
    the feed line coupling or having feed back coupling.

    745+,   for antennas with variable reactance for tuning.  See also (1)
    Note, above.

    749+,   for antennas having lumped inductance or capacity for loading.  See
    also (1) Note, above.

    771,    for plural slot type antennas with wave guide coupling.

    814,    816 and 820, for balanced doublets having a coupling network or
    impedance in the leadin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, pertinent
    subclasses, for miscellaneous electrical transmission or interconnection
    systems.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, pertinent
    subclasses, for voltage magnitude and phase control systems.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 1+ for plural
    channel systems involving coupling networks, and subclasses 24+ for
    coupling networks, per se.


CLS 343/851
TXT Subject matter under subclass 850 wherein the coupling network, or the
    leadin associated with the coupling network includes structure or is
    arranged for minimizing undesired radiation effects to or from the coupling
    network or the leadin.

    (1)     Note.  Where the corrective, radiation suppression means includes
    significant elements of a transmitter or receiver, or involves circuit
    connections to such elements other than the antenna and coupling and/or the
    transmission line thereto, classification is in Class 455, subclasses 114,
    271 and 283+ for the transmitter and receiver respectively.

    (2)     Note.  Where shielding is directly associated with the active
    antenna to modify its radiation or reception classification is not here,
    but in subclass 841.  Where the shielding or other radiation suppressing
    means is associated with a transmission line or electrical connector,
    classification is in subclasses 905 and 906, respectively.

    (3)     Note.  A mere filter in the coupling network which discriminates
    against the passage of electrical energy through the coupling network,
    although such energy causes or may be caused by undesired radiation, is not
    classified in this subclass, but in subclass 850 and other indented
    subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    782,    for wave guide type antennas with means reducing reradiaton into
    the active antenna.

    789,    for antennas located within conductive apertured housings or walls.

    790+,   for antennas wherein an active sleeve surrounds the feed line.

    829+,   for antennas of significant electrical length with decoupling
    shields.

    841,    for antennas with shields for such antennas.  See (2) Note, above.

    905,    for antennas combined with transmission lines which may involve the
    suppression of radiation interference to or from such lines. See (2) Note,
    above.

    906,    for antennas combined with electrical connectors which may involve
    the suppression of radiation interference to or from such electrical
    connectors. See (2) Note, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 32+ and 50+ for
    anti-inductive structures including shielding means.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 89+
    for miscellaneous electrical systems having anti-induction means or means
    to prevent undesired coupling to other systems.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 85 for
    electric lamp and discharge device systems with electromagnetic wave
    radiation preventing or shielding means.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 12 for wave
    transmission systems having transmission line inductive or radiation
    interference reduction means.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 84+ for inductor devices with electric
    and/or magnetic shielding means.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 271, for coupling of an antenna to a
    detector, mixer, or amplifier in a radio receiver for minimizing radiation
    effects.


CLS 343/852
TXT Subject matter under subclass 850 including a plurality of interrelated
    signal paths of which the passive coupling network is at least a part, and
    wherein the circuit elements of this arrangement are positioned and
    proportioned to reduce wave reflections arising from the interrelation of
    the signal paths.

    (1)     Note.  Most of the patents in this subclass disclose a branched
    coupling network and an antenna joined by the coupling network to a
    plurality of transmitters or receivers, or a branched coupling network and
    a plurality of antennas joined to a transmitter or receiver.  The branched
    coupling networks present impedances at the junction to substantially
    eliminate the reflected wave energy caused by the junction, or one or more
    impedance elements are provided which are constructed or proportioned to
    substantially eliminate the reflected wave energy caused by the branched
    circuit coupling network.  See (1) Note under subclass 858 for
    classification of radiant energy systems involving duplexing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    776+,   for wave guide type antennas with branched feed guide or line which
    may involve impedance matching.

    814     and 816, for plural balanced doublet antennas with coupling which
    may involve impedance matching.

    822,    for balanced doublet antennas with impedance matching.

    860+,   for antennas coupled by a single path to a source or load involving
    impedance matching.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 1+, and
    particularly subclasses 124+, for plural channel wave transmission systems
    involving impedance matching; and subclasses 32+ for single channel
    coupling networks involving impedance matching.


CLS 343/853
TXT Subject matter under subclass 850 including a plurality of antennas and a
    passive coupling network or a combination of such networks, the antennas
    being directly connected to such network or networks.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100+,   for directive, radiant energy signaling systems, which may involve
    plural antennas with coupling.

    776+,   for plural wave guide type antennas which may involve coupling.

    814     and 816, for plural doublet type antennas with coupling.

    852,    for plural antennas with coupling networks, which also involve
    impedance matching.

    893,    and the Search Notes thereunder for plural antennas generally which
    may involve coupling networks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 1+ for plural
    channel wave transmission systems which may be coupled to plural antennas.
    See also the search notes thereunder.


CLS 343/855
TXT Subject matter under subclass 853 wherein the antennas are of the loop type
    as defined in subclass 866, below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    726     and 728, for plural diverse type antennas involving a loop antenna.

    742,    for plural high frequency loop type antennas which may involve
    coupling.

    867,    for plural loop type antennas.


CLS 343/856
TXT Subject matter under subclass 850 wherein the active antenna forms the
    secondary or primary winding of a transformer magnetically coupled from a
    primary or to a secondary winding for connecting from or to a signal source
    or receiver, respectively.

    (1)     Note.  A mere transformer winding in series with the antenna is not
    sufficient for such subject matter to be classified herein.  The portion of
    the antenna which directly radiates or receives the radiant signal energy
    itself must form a substantial portion of the primary or secondary winding
    involved in the coupling to or from a signal receiver or source to be
    classified herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    857,    for antennas having coupling to spaced points thereon wherein such
    coupling may be by transformer means.

    866+,   for loop type antennas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, pertinent subclasses for transformer structure.


CLS 343/857
TXT Subject matter under subclass 850 wherein the coupling network includes a
    plurality of electrical paths, which may include a balanced path, connected
    to physically spaced points on the active portion of the antenna.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    731+    and 739+, for antennas with energy absorbing means remote from the
    feed line coupling or with feedback coupling which may be coupled to plural
    points of the active portion of the antenna.

    743,    for high frequency loop type antennas which involves coupling to
    spaced points on the loop.

    793+,   for dipole antennas which may involve connections to spaced points
    on the active portion of the dipole.

    858,    for antennas having a coupling network including plural paths
    coupled respectively to more than one termination.


CLS 343/858
TXT Subject matter under subclass 850 wherein the passive network has one
    termination to which an antenna is connected, and has in addition a
    plurality of distinct terminations, adapted to be connected to a plurality
    of transmitters and/or receivers; the coupling network providing a branched
    electrical path from the antenna termination to the other terminations.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter involving the combination of an antenna,
    transmitter and receiver, even in the event the transmitter and receiver
    are claimed by name only, are not classified in the subclass but will be
    found in Class 370, subclasses 276+ where the systems are duplexing systems
    (e.g., adapted for simultaneous transmission and reception of messages):
    otherwise, classification is in Class 455, Telecommunications, appropriate
    subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  Combinations of an antenna, coupling network and a plurality
    of receivers or transmitters are classified in this subclass unless an
    active element or network, or significant structure of a transmitter or
    receiver is claimed.  For definitions of active element or network, or
    significant structure, see (3) Note below.  In such cases, where in
    addition the combination is adapted for simultaneous transmission or
    reception of plural messages (e.g., multiplexing) classification is in this
    class (370), appropriate subclasses, otherwise, classification falls with
    transmitters in Class 455, subclasses 91+ or with receivers subclasses 30+.

    (3)     Note.  An active element or network is defined for purposes of
    classification as an element or network whose energy output is modified due
    to the presence of a source of energy in the element or network (other than
    the mere signal energy which passes through the network), or an element or
    network in which the energy output from a source of energy is controlled by
    the signal input.  For purposes of classification, those portions of the
    receiver or transmitter connected in immediate consecutive relationship
    with what may be termed the coupling network proper are not considered to
    be significant receiver or transmitter structure unless they contain an
    active element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175+    and 200+, for duplexing and multiplexing radiant energy
    communication systems, respectively. See also (1) Note and (2) Note, above.

    852,    for a single antenna with a plural path coupling network, which
    also has impedance matching.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, particularly subclasses 1+
    for plural channel wave transmission systems.  See also the Search Notes
    under subclass 1 of Class 333.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 132+ for radio receivers which may
    involve antennas with coupling to plural receivers.


CLS 343/859
TXT Subject matter under subclass 850 wherein the passive coupling network
    includes four terminals, one pair of which are for connection to the
    antenna and the other pair for connection to a source or receiver of signal
    energy; the network impedance across one pair of terminals being
    symmetrical and the network impedance across the other pair of terminals
    being unsymmetrical with respect to a given potential plane (e.g., ground),
    these impedances being effective to convert symmetrical potential applied
    at the symmetrical pair of terminals to unsymmetrical potential at the
    other pair of terminals or vice versa.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    814     and 816, for plural balanced doublets which may be connected to an
    unbalanced source or load.

    821,    for balanced doublets connected to an  unbalanced source or load.

    865,    for balanced antennas with coupling for a balanced source or load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 25 for balanced to
    unbalanced coupling networks, per se.


CLS 343/860
TXT Subject matter under subclass 850 wherein the passive coupling network
    includes one or more impedance elements constructed or proportioned to
    substantially eliminate the reflected wave energy between the antenna and
    the receiver or signal energy source, caused by impedance differences.

    (1)     Note.  Only networks matching a single antenna to a single
    frequency, source or load are classified in this subclass.  Subject matter
    involving plural antennas matched to a single source or load is classified
    in subclasses 853+ above, and subject matter involving a single antenna
    matched to a plural source or load is classified in subclass 858 above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    745+,   for antennas with variable reactance for tuning such antennas which
    may involve impedance matching.

    822,    for balanced doublets with an impedance matching coupling network.

    852,    for plural path antennas with coupling circuits with impedance
    matching.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 32+ and 124+ for
    wave transmission lines and networks involving impedance matching or
    impedance matching networks, per se.


CLS 343/861
TXT Subject matter under subclass 860 wherein at least one of the impedance
    elements has an adjustable electrical characteristic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    723,    for single adjustable length electrically long linear antennas.

    745+,   for antennas with variable reactance for tuning.

    750,    for antennas with adjustable reactance for loading.

    823,    for adjustable length balanced doublets.

    854,    for plural antennas with an adjustable coupling network.

    868,    for loop type antennas of adjustable configuration.


CLS 343/862
TXT Subject matter under the definition of subclass 860 in which at least one
    of the elements of the impedance matching network has distributed
    electrical parameters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    782,    for wave guide antennas with means reducing reradiation into the
    active antenna.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 33+ for impedance
    matching coupling networks having long line elements.


CLS 343/863
TXT Subject matter under subclass 862 wherein the distributed parameter
    electrical element of the impedance matching network lies along the path of
    wave propagation through the network and has a physical dimension
    progressively increasing or decreasing along the path of propagation to
    result in a corresponding change in electrical parameters of the
    distributed parameter element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 34 for impedance
    matching networks in general with a tapered long line element.


CLS 343/864
TXT Subject matter under subclass 862 wherein the impedance matching network
    element having distributed electrical parameters lies along the path of
    wave propagation through the network and is an odd integral number
    (including unity) of quarter-wave lengths long.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 35 for impedance
    matching networks in general having a quarter-wave transformer.


CLS 343/865
TXT Subject matter under subclass 850 wherein the coupling network and antenna
    are electrically balanced.

    (1)     Note.  In the balanced doublets of subclasses 793+, the masses are
    not only electrically balanced; but also are substantially alike and are
    symmetrically disposed on opposite sides of the lead-in terminals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    731+,   especially subclasses 733 and 735, for traveling wave type antennas
    which may be balanced.

    740,    for balanced antennas with a terminating resistance at the open end.

    741+,   for high frequency loop type antennas which may be balanced.

    745+,   especially subclasses 747 and 748, for antennas with variable
    reactance for tuning.

    791     and 792, for sleeve type antennas which may be balanced.

    814,    816 and 820, for balanced doublets with coupling networks.  See (1)
    Note above.

    829+,   for fractional, multiple, or full wave linear type antennas with
    grounding structure, including counterpoises.

    859,    for antennas with balanced to unbalanced coupling networks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 4+ and 25+, for
    wave transmission networks involving balanced circuits.


CLS 343/866
TXT Subject matter under subclass 700 including a coil of one or more turns
    adapted to be connected at its ends to a pair of lead-in terminals, and
    further adapted to establish in or receive from space radio wave energy
    together with a frame for establishing a particular shape or pattern of
    shapes for the coil, or the coil has sufficient rigidity to establish a
    shape without the frame.

    (1)     Note.  The loops in this and the indented subclasses form with the
    source or load circuitry connected thereto a series circuit, as opposed to
    the antennas of subclass 895 in which a single terminal feeds to or from
    the antennas to leave an end electrically free.

    (2)     Note.  As between loop antennas and the inductor devices of Class
    336, the claiming of an antenna by name only or the recitation of structure
    peculiar to antennas would classify the patents in this subclasses (866+).
    If the disclosure is a loop antenna, but the claims merely recite an
    inductor device, classification is in Class 336.

    (3)     Note.  Loop antennas wherein the coil has a particular shape or
    configuration are classified in this subclass (866).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    726     and 728, for plural separate diverse type antennas including a loop
    antenna.

    732,    for loop antennas having energy absorbing means remote from the
    feed line coupling.

    741+,   for high frequency type loops.

    748,    for loop type antennas with variable reactance for tuning.

    764,    for loop antennas having means for scanning, sweeping or orienting
    the antennas in rotary or oscillatory motion.

    767+,   for slot type antennas.

    788,    for loop antennas including magnetic material.

    803+,   for folded dipoles.

    842,    for loop type antennas with an electrical shield.

    855,    for plural loop antennas with a coupling network or impedance in
    the leadin.

    895,    for spiral or helical type antennas. See also (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclass 8 for inductive type railway
    signaling.

    267,    Spring Devices, particularly subclass 69 for coil spring devices.

    336,    Inductor Devices, see (2) Note, above.

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave System and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 1-205 for directive radio wave energy
    system which may include a loop antenna as an element thereof.


CLS 343/867
TXT Subject matter under subclass 866 including a plurality of distinct coils
    or windings, or including one or more taps on a coil or winding to vary the
    effective number of coil or winding turns; or including a plurality of loop
    type antennas as defined in subclass 866 above.

    (1)     Note.  A coil or winding is composed of one or more turns of an
    electrical conductor.  In a plurality of such coils or windings there is
    also one or more turns of an electrical conductor, but there is a
    discontinuity in the turns to establish discrete groups or sets of turns.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    726     and 728, for plural separate diverse type antennas including a loop
    antenna.

    729,    for plural diverse active antennas using the same element which may
    involve a loop antenna.

    742,    for plural high frequency type loops.

    855,    for plural loop antennas with a coupling network or impedance in
    the leadin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, especially subclasses 75+, 115+, 137+, 170+, 172,
    173+, 180+, 188, 192, 195, and 220, for plural or tapped inductor coils or
    windings.


CLS 343/868
TXT Subject matter under subclass 866 wherein a coil or winding and/or the
    frame of a single loop type antenna is formed of flexible or relatively
    movable parts to permit change in the shape, area, or length of the coil or
    winding.

    (1)     Note.  The change in shape, etc., must be within a single loop
    antenna for classification in this subclass.  If a plurality of loop
    antennas are relatively movable to provide a change in overall shape, etc.,
    classification is in subclass 867, above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    867,    for loop antennas whose effective coil length is adjusted by taps.
    See also (1) Note, above.

    871,    for loop antennas with collapsible or foldable frames.

    880+,   for antennas with an adjustable or collapsible support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 15, 20 and 137+ for inductor devices
    adjustable in shape or length.


CLS 343/869
TXT Subject matter under subclass 866 wherein a support for the loop antenna is
    provided, which permits the antenna to be rotated about at least one axis.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this subclass the combination of
    rotatable support and loop antenna must include significant loop antenna
    structure. Mere designation of the antenna as a loop antenna or the like is
    not sufficient for classification here, but rather in Class 248.  Class 248
    would also receive subject matter where the support structure which is
    claimed is of general utility.

    (2)     Note.  Where a combination is claimed as in the (1) Note above, but
    the support has insulating or electrical connector structure associated
    therewith, classification would be in Class 174.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    702,    for loop antennas which may be rotatably mounted on radio cabinets.

    764,    for loop antennas which may be rotatably supported for scanning,
    sweeping or orienting.

    882,    for antennas in general with rotatable supports.  See also the
    Search Notes under this subclass (882).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, see (1) Notes above.  See also the external search notes
    under subclass 882 of Class 343 for supporting structure which is
    applicable also to loop antennas.


CLS 343/870
TXT Subject matter under subclass 866 wherein the loop type antenna is combined
    with an electrical connector or terminals whereby the winding of the loop
    may be connected or coupled to other apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this subclass the combination of the
    loop type antenna and connector or terminal must include significant loop
    antenna structure.  Designation of the antenna only broadly as a loop
    antenna or the like is not sufficient for classification here, but rather
    classification would be in Class 174, or Class 439.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    876,    for switching between antennas and lines which include connector or
    terminal structure.

    867,    for loop antennas with a tapped winding.

    906,    for antennas in general combined with an electrical connector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, pertinent subclasses for
    conductor and insulating structure which may be used for connecting loop
    antennas with associated apparatus. See also (1) Note, above.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, pertinent subclasses for electrical
    connectors, which may be used for connecting loop antennas with associated
    apparatus. See also (1) Note, above.


CLS 343/871
TXT Subject matter under subclass 866 wherein the frame is composed of
    relatively movable parts or is of flexible material so that the loop may be
    folded or collapsed to occupy less space as when it is not in use.

    (1)     Note.  Loop frames which may be readily disassembled are classified
    in subclass 866 above.  For classification in this subclass (871) the loop
    frame must remain substantially in one piece when folded or collapsed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    868,    for loop antennas having frames of relatively movable parts to
    adjust the loop coil configuration.

    880+,   for antennas having adjustable or collapsible supports, and
    particularly subclass 881 for foldable supports.

    915,    for reflectors or directors which are collapsible, foldable or
    adjustable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, particularly subclasses 104+, 118 and 195+ for
    foldable or collapsible article supports and racks.

    248,    Supports, particularly subclasses 121 for stands and brackets and
    subclasses 200+ for brackets which may involve collapsible or foldable
    frames.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 196+, and particularly subclass 208,
    for inductor coils which may involve collapsible or foldable frames for
    such coils.


CLS 343/872
TXT Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein a unitary covering or housing is
    provided which substantially surrounds the antenna in operation, and which
    freely passes radio waves so as not to interfere materially with the
    transmission or reception of the antenna.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    702,    for antennas combined with a radio cabinet.

    719,    for underground or underwater type antennas, which may have a
    casing or covering.

    784,    for closures in wave guide type antennas or horns.

    789,    for antennas located within a conductive apertured wall.

    841,    for antenna shields.

    889,    for rod type antennas retractible into a support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 431 for instrument casings.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, particularly subclasses
    17+ and 50+ for boxes and housings peculiarly adapted for electrical
    devices.

    220,    Receptacles, particularly subclasses 2.1+ for receptacles for
    electrical devices in general, where no specific electrical features are
    claimed.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, particularly subclass 7, for radio
    type cabinets which may be used to house antennas.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 34 for
    integral structural combinations of antennas and discharge devices.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 156 for casings for
    electrical measuring instruments.

    336,    Inductor Devices, particularly subclasses 90+ for casings and
    housings for inductor devices.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 605+ and
    641+ for housings for the structure of electrical switchboards or plural
    electrical components.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet which may embody a material that inherently freely passes
    electromagnetic waves.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 280+ for radio receivers which
    include antennas and housings for such radio receivers and antennas.

    D14,    Recording, Communication, or Information Retrieval Equipment,
    particularly subclasses 188+ which includes radio receivers, tuners, etc.
    generally and subclasses 230+ which includes antennas and components
    thereof.


CLS 343/873
TXT Subject matter under subclass 872 wherein the antenna is embedded or potted
    in, or coated by a protective cover or support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, pertinent subclasses for coating
    or plastic compositions in general.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, particularly subclasses
    24+, 50+ and 110+ for insulated conductors and conductor housings.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 96 and 205, for inductor devices
    having potted and embedded windings, respectively.


CLS 343/874
TXT Subject matter under subclass 700 including a tower or mast which transmits
    or receives radio waves; the tower or mast having structure which
    facilitates this transmission or reception of radio waves, or the tower or
    mast serving, in addition, as a support for other radio wave radiating or
    receiving structure.

    (1)     Note.  A tower antenna herein comprises a metallic elongated
    structure of substantial height, generally of lattice type and constructed
    of component metallic elements such as I beams or girders, and is adapted
    to radiate or receive radiations of radio wave energy.

    (2)     Note.  A mast antenna is usually a substantially solid, hollow, or
    built up pole-like element of metallic composition capable of radiation;
    and is distinguished from the rod type antennas of subclass 900 which are
    normally of negligible mass and relatively short, in that the masts of this
    subclass have appreciable weight and height and are adapted structurally to
    support such weight.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    715,    for rod type antennas supported by a vehicle body.

    723,    for single adjustable length electrically long linear antennas.

    825+    and 843, for mast or tower type antennas of appreciable electrical
    length or dimension, respectively.

    890,    for antenna supports of the post, standard or tower type.

    896,    for cage or hollow post type antennas.

    900+,   for rod type antennas, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 720+ for a residual
    rigid elongated unit not defining an electrical detail for Class 343.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, particularly subclass 45
    for towers, poles or posts for supporting overhead conductors.


CLS 343/875
TXT Subject matter under subclass 874 wherein the antenna mast or tower is
    composed of multiple discrete vertical sections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 720+ for residual
    rigid elongated structure not defining any electrical feature for Class 343.


CLS 343/876
TXT Subject matter under subclass 700 including an antenna and a switch for
    electrically connecting the antenna selectively to two or more lines, or
    including two or more antennas and a switch for connecting a line
    selectively to these antennas, or including a plurality of antennas and a
    switch for making selective connections among these antennas and a
    plurality of lines.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    768,    for slot type antennas with periodic control of the slot or
    coupling.

    777,    for plural wave guide type antennas with control of the individual
    antenna.

    778,    for plural wave guide type antennas with phasing means.

    814,    for plural doublets with coupling networks.

    854,    for plural antennas with coupling means having periodically varied
    control.

    858,    for a single antenna coupled to plural leadins.

    904,    for antennas combined with switches.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, particularly subclasses
    1+, 19+, 51.02+, 51.05+ for plural circuit switches.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, particularly
    subclasses 23, 38+, 64+, 80+, 85+, 98+, and 112+ for miscellaneous
    electrical distribution systems which include switching.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 101+ for wave
    transmission branch systems having switching between branches.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 106+ for switches of the electromagnetic type
    adapted to complete a plurality of circuits.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, particularly subclasses 825+ for
    miscellaneous electrical communication systems which may involve switching.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, particularly subclass 18 for electrical
    connectors which may connect and disconnect multiple circuits.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 132 and 277.1+ for radio receiver
    diversity systems which may include this type of switching.


CLS 343/877
TXT Antennas under subclass 700 together with a reel on which the antenna may
    be wound.

    (1)     Note.  The combination of an antenna, recited by name only, or the
    recitation of structure which adapts the antenna to winding such as the
    term "flexible wire", and a reel is not classified in this subclass but in
    Class 242, Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding,  If to this combination is
    added terminal or connecting means permitting transmission of electrical
    energy to or from the antenna, classification is in Class 191, Electricity:
     Transmission to Vehicles, subclasses 12.2+.  If structure is recited to
    indicate the length of wire unwound from the reel classification is in
    Class 33, Geometrical Instruments, especially subclasses 732+, provided no
    significant antenna structure is recited.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    707,    for aircraft combined with trailing type antennas.

    903,    for telescoping rod type antennas actuated by a flexible rod, which
    may be wound on a reel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, particularly subclasses 732+ for means to
    indicate and measure the length of antenna unwound.  See also (1) Note,
    above.

    114,    Ships, subclass 311 for drags and sea anchors.

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 378+ for vibration dampers which use the inertia
    of a damping mass to dissipate motion; and subclass 381 for dampers using
    friction between elements to dissipate motion.

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, especially subclasses 12.2+
    for reels on which flexible conductors wound for transmitting electrical
    energy.  See also (1) Note, above.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 370+, particularly
    subclasses 390.2, 390.3, and 917.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 1 for nominal trailing antennas.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 266+ for apparatus for hauling or hoisting a load including a
    driven drum for pulling on a cable attached to the load.


CLS 343/878
TXT Antennas under subclass 700 including structure for maintaining the
    antennas or parts thereof in a fixed position or path of movement
    (adjustable) with respect to some other body or the earth.

    (1)     Note.  For classification of the combination of an antenna and a
    support in this and the indented subclasses, there must be recited some
    significant antenna structure, i.e., structure that contributes
    electrically to the transmission of the signal between the receiver or
    transmitter and space through the antenna.  The combination of an antenna
    claimed by name only and a support therefor claimed in detail is classified
    in Class 248.  If in addition insulating features are recited
    classification is in Class 174, even though the signal leadin, or terminal
    is recited.  See also (2) Note under subclass 888, below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    707,    for antennas of the trailing or drag type.

    713+    and 717, for antennas supported by a vehicle.

    718,    for antennas with body attaching means.

    866+,   for frames for loop antennas.

    874+,   for mast or tower type antennas.

    877,    for antennas wound on reels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 40 for a shaft or
    tower with an article or article support wherein no electrical feature for
    Class 343 is defined.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, particularly subclasses
    40+, 84+, 138, 151+, and 158+, conductors and insulators in general
    involving supports.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, particularly subclasses 119.01+ for rack type
    supports in general.

    248,    Supports, for supports in general.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, for pipe joints which may involve
    supports.

    362,    Illumination, particularly subclasses 382+, for supports for
    illuminating devices.


CLS 343/879
TXT Subject matter under subclass 878 wherein the support is peculiarly adapted
    to support two or more separate and distinct antennas.

    (1)     Note.  A mere plurality of antennas with their separate supports
    does not fall within this subclass.  To be classified herein the support
    must be unitary in nature, the parts or sections thereof cooperating to
    support two or more separate antennas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    742,    for plural high frequency type loops involving supports.

    770,    for plural slot type antennas which involve supports.

    774     and 776+, for plural wave guide type antennas involving supports.

    796,    797+, 799+, and 810+, for plural dipoles involving supports.

    824,    for planar type high frequency arrays involving supports.

    835+,   for plural antennas combined with reflectors involving supports.

    844,    for plural antennas spaced a fractional or full wave length apart
    involving supports.

    867,    for plural loop type antennas involving supports.


CLS 343/880
TXT Subject matter under subclass 878 wherein the support is composed of
    multiple parts which are relatively movable or adapted to receive the
    antenna to permit adjustment, collapse, or knock-down of the support and/or
    the antenna.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    713+,   for antennas supported by a vehicle body which may be adjustable.

    757+,   for antennas combined with means for moving directive antennas for
    scanning, sweeping or orienting.

    805,    for dipoles having the arms angularly adjustable.

    823,    for adjustable length dipoles.

    839,    for reflectors and antennas which are relatively movable.

    868,    for loop antennas having adjustable configuration, area or coil
    length.

    869,    for loop antennas with a rotatable support.

    871,    for loop type antenna and frame which may be collapsible or
    foldable.

    889,    for rod antennas which are retractible into their supports.

    901+,   for telescoping type rod antennas.

    915,    for collapsible and adjustable reflectors and directors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 161 for
    adjustable or movably mounted insulator supports.

    248,    Supports, particularly subclasses 48, 59, 70, 122, 161+, 165, 178+,
    274.1+, 323+, and 354+, for adjustable and collapsible supports in general.

    362,    Illumination, particularly subclasses 418+, for adjustable or
    collapsible illuminating devices.


CLS 343/881
TXT Subject matter under subclass 880 wherein the  support is composed of
    multiple parts which are so joined together that the parts have different
    relative positions in use and non-use to permit the antenna to be folded
    into a more compact space when not in use.

    (1)     Note.  Antennas with supports which may be completely disassembled
    when not in use, i.e., the "knock-down" type, are classified in subclass
    880, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 85, 104+, 118, 167, 186+, and 195+,
    for subject matter including special types of foldable supports and racks.

    248,    Supports, particularly subclasses 46+, 136, 150, 166+, 190, 240,
    and 308 for foldable supports.


CLS 343/882
TXT Subject matter under subclass 880 wherein the support has parts relatively
    pivoted or rotatable to permit the antenna mounted on one of the parts to
    be pivoted or rotated, or the support receives the antenna in pivoted or
    rotatable relation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    711+,   for antennas supported from a vehicle body which may include
    pivoted or rotatable features in the support.

    757+,   for antennas with means for moving a directive antenna combined
    with means for rotatably supporting the antenna.

    805,    for dipole antennas having the arms angularly adjustable.

    839,    for reflectors and antennas relatively movable.

    869,    for loop antennas with rotatable supports.

    900,    for rod type antennas having flexible joints.

    915,    for foldable, collapsible, or adjustable reflectors and directors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 137+, and
    particularly subclasses 138, 151+ and 161, for pivoted or rotatable
    insulating means.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 38+ and particularly subclasses 43, 44 and 45,
    for pivoted or rotatable-staff stands, bases or brackets; subclass 81 for
    pivoted standards for a hose or nozzle; subclass 128 for stands for movable
    receptacles; subclass 160 for flexible standard-type stands; subclasses
    178+ for adjustable head article-support stands; subclasses 274.1+ for
    adjustable brackets; subclasses 324+ for suspended supports having
    adjustable, pivoted parts; and subclass 349.1 for rotatable supporting
    bases.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclass 51 for insulated ball and socket
    joints, subclasses 136.1+ for a pipe or rod-to-pipe-to-plate joint system,
    especially subclass 138.1, subclasses 261+ for a ball and socket pipe
    joint, and subclasses 305+ for a pipe coupling having catch means holding
    the coupled members together.  See the Search Notes thereunder.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 52+ for articulated connections
    in general.


CLS 343/883
TXT Subject matter under subclass 880 wherein the support is constructed of
    multiple sections capable of sliding motion within each other to be
    extensible or retractible.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    823,    for dipoles with telescoping arms.

    871,    for loop antennas with collapsible loop frames which may have
    telescopic features.

    889,    for rod antennas retractible into their supports.

    901,    for telescopic rod antennas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), for a residual rigid elongated
    structure, particularly subclasses 632 and 726.1 for axially extensible or
    end-to-end connected shaft sections wherein no electrical feature for Class
    343 is defined.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 69 for extensible
    conductors.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 298+ for adjustable length
    pipe joints or couplings.  See the Search Notes thereunder.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 52+ for articulated connections
    in general.


CLS 343/884
TXT Subject matter under subclass 878 wherein the support for the antenna also
    constitutes a transmission line, such as a coaxial line or wave guide, for
    feeding the signal energy to or from the antenna.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    767+,   for slot type antennas wherein the slot feed constitutes a support.

    772+,   for wave guide type antennas wherein the antenna feed constitutes a
    support.

    790+,   for sleeve type antenna, whose feed constitutes a support.

    825+,   for fractional, multiple, or full wave length linear type antennas,
    whose feed constitutes a support.


CLS 343/885
TXT Subject matter under subclass 878 combined with means to modify the
    electrical characteristics of the support.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter includes, for example, conductor means
    to prevent concentration of electrical stress, conductor or insulator means
    to modify the voltage gradient, and means for electrically grading sections
    of the support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 140+ for
    insulators combined with conductive arcing or stress distributing means.
    Note particularly the notes thereunder.


CLS 343/886
TXT Subject matter under subclass 878 wherein the support includes two or more
    spaced apart poles, standards, or other upright members which maintain an
    antenna or antenna component therebetween in a substantially horizontal and
    elevated position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 40+ for
    supports and other details for overhead cables, conduits, and conductors.

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, subclasses 40+ for supports
    for trolley conductor wires.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 119.01+ for isolated supports with
    flexible article supporting strand or strands joining the supports.


CLS 343/887
TXT Subject matter under subclass 878 where the support for the antenna or
    reflector has a stream-line configuration to permit an unbroken flow of
    fluid past the support free from turbulence and with the least resistance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    872+,   for protective supports or covers for antennas which may have a
    stream-line shape.

    908,    for active antenna components having a distinctive contour.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, particularly subclass 130, for aircraft structure
    details for reducing aerodynamic resistance.

    D14,    Recording, Communication, or Information Retrieval Equipment,
    particularly, subclasses 140+ for design patents for telephone and
    telegraph instruments which may include antenna support designs.


CLS 343/888
TXT Subject matter under subclass 878 wherein the supported antenna has a
    rod-like end portion, and the support is peculiarly adapted to engage this
    rod-like end portion.

    (1)     Note.  The antennas in this subclass are usually rods supported at
    an end.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    715,    for rod type antenna supported from a vehicle body.

    872+,   for protective supports or covers for antennas.

    874+,   for mast or tower type antennas.

    882,    for pivoted supports which may be combined with a rod-like antenna.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses for
    poles or posts of more general application even though such structure be
    merely defined as an antenna or antenna support, particularly subclasses
    110 for a rod attached to a vehicle body, 111+ for a mechanism operated or
    relatively movable shaft assembly, 651.01+ for elongated three-dimensional
    openwork, and 720+ for miscellaneous shaft structures.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, appropriate subclasses for
    an antenna rod claimed by name only together with an insulating support and
    an electrical connector or terminal structure for connecting the rod to its
    energy source or load, particularly subclasses 84+ for conduits, cables and
    conductors combined with joints which may involve rod-like conductors;
    subclasses 138+ for insulators of special application; subclasses 151+ for
    insulators extending through a wall or plate; subclasses 158+ for insulator
    supporting or attaching means which may be used to support rods.

    248,    Supports, for an antenna rod defined by name only with a detailed
    support structure for that class, particularly subclasses 38+ for supports
    for staff type objects.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, pertinent subclasses, for pipe joints or
    couplings which may be used in supports for rod-like antennas which are
    supported at an end.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for a rod joint of
    general application.


CLS 343/889
TXT Subject matter under subclass 888 wherein the rod type antenna is
    retractible into the end supporting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    714     and 715, for extensible and retractible antennas supported by
    vehicle bodies.

    789,    for antennas within a conductive apertured wall.

    823,    for dipole antennas having telescoping arms.

    872+,   for antennas having a protective support or cover in which the
    antenna may be retracted.

    901+,   for telescoping rod type antennas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 145.1+ for telescopic ball and
    socket pipe joints and couplings, and subclasses 298+ for adjustable length
    pipe joints and couplings.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 52+ for articulated connections
    in general.


CLS 343/890
TXT Subject matter under subclass 878 wherein the support includes a post,
    standard or tower extending vertically to maintain the antenna or component
    thereof in an elevated position.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the post, standard or tower merely supports
    the antenna, as distinguished from subclass 874 wherein the mast or tower
    constitutes in itself at least part of the active antenna.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    742,    774, 796, 798, and 800, for particular types of antennas which may
    be stacked on a pole, post or standard.

    790,    for sleeve type antennas surrounding a support.

    874+,   see (1) Note, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclass for a
    residual elongated rigid structure and see the reference thereto in
    subclass 700 of Class 343.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 45 for towers,
    poles or posts supporting overhead conductors.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 48+ for a fire escape
    tower.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 80+, 97+, 105, 109, 116, 117.2+, 126, 127,
    469+, 519+, and 676 for stand-type supports in general or for supporting
    particular objects.


CLS 343/891
TXT Subject matter under subclass 890 wherein the post, standard or tower has
    an antenna wire extending along its length, and constitutes the sole
    support for the wire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    799+,   for vertically arranged dipoles, which may extend along a post.

    874+,   for mast or tower type antennas which may have vertically extending
    wires forming a uniform electrical cross-section.


CLS 343/892
TXT Subject matter under subclass 878 wherein the support is an overhanging
    structure attached to and projecting from some body such as a wall or post
    and engages the antenna or a component thereof outside the body, and is
    laterally offset from or suspended from the body to maintain the antenna or
    component in a fixed position or path of movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    717,    for antennas supported underneath a vehicle.

    888,    for brackets supporting the rod-like end portion of an antenna.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 48.2, 65+, 103+, 115, 121+, 126, 200+, 332,
    475+, 519+, and 674+ for brackets in general.


CLS 343/893
TXT Combinations of two or more antennas under subclass 700 and not specially
    provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  Antennas of no particular type and with no significant
    spacing or coupling, but arranged in particular patterns, are classified
    here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    725+,   for plural separate diverse type antennas.

    729+,   for plural diverse type antennas using the same active element.

    737,    for plural traveling wave type antennas.

    742,    for plural high frequency type loops.

    751,    for plural antennas having lumped reactance for loading.

    758,    for plural relatively movable directive antennas with means for
    moving, for scanning, sweeping or orienting.

    770+,   for plural slot type antennas.

    774,    for stacked biconical horn type antennas.

    776,    for plural wave guide type antennas.

    794,    796, 797+, 799+, and 810+, for plural center-fed doublet antennas.

    824,    for planar type high frequency arrays.

    826+,   for plural linear type antennas of fractional, multiple or full
    wave length.

    835+,   for plural active antennas with a reflector.

    844,    for plural antennas spaced a fractional or full wave length apart.

    852,    for plural antennas with impedance matching coupling.

    853+,   for plural antennas with coupling networks.

    867,    for plural loop type antennas.

    876,    for antennas with switching between the antennas and line.

    879,    for plural separate antennas with a  support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave System and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 1-205 for radio wave energy
    communications systems, which may have a plurality of antennas.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 272+ for receivers which may have a
    plurality of antennas.


CLS 343/894
TXT Antennas under subclass 700 having a signal, indicator or alarm responsive
    to a condition of the antenna or its components.

    (1)     Note.  Patents within the subclass definition involving testing are
    classified in this subclass if the testing involves indicating as herein
    defined.

    (2)     Note.  Patents within the subclass definition which involve
    measuring of the signal energy in addition to indicating are not classified
    here but in subclass 703, above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    703,    for antennas having means for measuring and testing a condition of
    the antenna.

    721,    for antennas with lights which do not indicate a condition of the
    antenna.

    760,    for antennas having means for scanning, sweeping, or orienting
    together with a signal, indicator or alarm for such scanning, sweeping or
    orienting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, pertinent subclasses, for gauges or other
    means which may be used in the indication of length, etc., for extensible
    antennas.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, for measuring and testing processes and
    apparatus in general.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, for mechanical signals, alarms and
    indicators in general.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, for electrical measuring and
    testing.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, for electrical signaling devices in
    general.


CLS 343/895
TXT Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein the antenna includes a wound
    conductor, and the winding advances in a single plane (spiral), or over a
    surface of a solid such as cylinder (helix) or sphere.

    (1)     Note.  Antennas in this subclass and in subclasses 866+ (loops)
    form continuous electrical circuits, but in this subclass (895) there is a
    single terminal feed to or from the antenna; while in subclasses 866+ both
    ends of the continuous antenna are connected to the separate lead-in
    terminals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    843,    for antennas having an appreciable wave length dimension which may
    be spiral or helical.

    866+,   for loop type antennas.  See also (1) Note, above.

    896,    for cage type antennas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, particularly subclasses 73+ for coil springs which
    may be used as antennas.

    336,    Inductor Devices, particularly subclasses 225+ for inductor devices.


CLS 343/896
TXT Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein the antenna is formed of
    conductive rods, wires or mesh screens enclosing a space and wherein such
    rods, wires or screens are connected together galvanically to form a single
    electrical mass.

    (1)     Note.  Antennas in this subclass and in subclasses 866+ may form
    continuous electrical circuits, but in this subclass (896) there is a
    single terminal feed to or from the antenna; while in subclasses 866+ both
    ends of the continuous antenna are connected to the separate lead-in
    terminals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    804,    for multiple conductor type folded dipoles.

    808,    for doublet antennas whose plural-rod arms form a V.

    843,    for antennas having an appreciable wave length dimension which may
    involve cage-like structure.

    866+,   for loop type antennas.  See also (1) Note, above.

    874+,   for mast or tower type antennas which may involve cage-like
    structure.

    895,    for spiral or helical type antennas.


CLS 343/897
TXT Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein the antenna is formed of
    conductive strips or strands in mesh, braided, or woven form, or interwoven
    with non-conductor strips or strands, or wherein the antenna is formed of
    multiple conductive strips in sheet or planar form not provided for
    elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  A mere fabric of insulating material with metallic
    conductors interwoven therewith or a metal fabric which may be used as an
    antenna is not classified here, but in such classes as 66, Textiles:
    Knitting, subclass 202, 87, Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making,
    subclasses 1-13, or 139, Textiles:  Weaving, subclass 425.  See the Search
    Notes below for a more detailed fabric search.  For classification in this
    subclass there must be claimed some limitation which peculiarly adapts the
    fabric structure to antenna operation, such as the antenna leadin.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    907+,   for antenna components, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 200+ for
    strand structure.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclass 202, for a knitted fabric of or
    including metal strands.

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, subclass 1 for
    products of braiding and netting processes.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclass 425 for fabric materials including
    metals.  See (1) Note, above.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 121, 122 and
    124, for conduits, cables or conductors in fibrous or fabric insulation.

    245,    Wire Fabrics and Structure, subclasses 2+ for wire fabrics.

    428,    Stocks Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 175, 190,
    193, and 196+ for a stock material product in the form of a single or
    plural layer web or sheet embodying a layer of mechanically interengaged
    strands or strand-portions (e.g., woven, knit, etc.).

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 181+ for a woven fabric, subclasses 304+ for a knit fabric, and
    subclasses 327+ for a nonwoven fabric.


CLS 343/898
TXT Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein a substantial portion of the
    active antenna is hollow and of metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    767+,   for slot type antennas which may involve hollow metallic bodies.

    772+,   for wave guide type antennas.

    790+,   for sleeve type antennas.

    807,    for balanced doublets having thick or enlarged arms which may be
    hollow.

    831,    for stub type multiple or full wave antennas which may be hollow.

    896,    for cage or hollow post antennas formed of rods or wire.


CLS 343/899
TXT Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein the antenna is so formed as to
    present a larger surface to the radio wave transmitting medium; or wherein
    additional elements are combined with the antenna for increasing the
    surface presented to the radio wave propagating medium; or wherein elements
    are provided which are adapted to be electrically connected to the antenna
    to increase the surface presented to the radio wave propagating medium.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of this area increasing structure are a spiniferous
    shaped antenna and a metal mass such as a ball on the free end of a rod
    type antenna.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    749+,   for antennas with lumped inductance or capacity for loading.

    795     and 807, for sheet or wing type doublets, and tapered, thick, or
    enlarged doublets, respectively.

    802,    for balanced center-fed doublet antennas with distributed reactance
    added to the doublet arms.

    811,    for fish-bone type arrays of balanced center-fed doublet antennas.

    828,    for antennas of significant electrical length having a
    nonuniformity therein.

    831,    for stub type antennas of significant electrical length.

    896,    for cage type antennas formed of rods or wires.

    898,    for hollow metallic body type antennas.

    908,    for antenna components having a distinctive contour or shape.


CLS 343/900
TXT Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein the antenna is of substantially
    fixed or stiff elongated form of no claimed significant electrical length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    715,    for rod type antennas significantly related to vehicle structure.

    825+,   for rod type antennas of a significant electrical length.

    874+,   for mast or tower type antennas.

    888+,   for rod type antennas with a support  therefor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses for
    supported poles or posts of more general application and having no features
    for antenna use, particularly subclasses 110 for a shaft supported on a
    vehicle body, 111+ for a mechanism operated or relatively movable shaft,
    and 292+ for a pole or post footing.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 140-178 for metal pipe of
    the type which may be used in antennas.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, appropriate subclasses for
    an electrically insulated or connected rod which may be merely defined as
    an antenna with no mechanical or electrical structure specialized making it
    an antenna, particularly subclasses 68.1+ for miscellaneous conduits,
    cables or conductors, and 137+ for electrical insulators.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, appropriate subclasses for such joints
    having no claimed electrical limitation for antenna.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for rod joints of
    general application.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 544+ for stock
    materials, e.g., or indefinite length, which are all metal or have adjacent
    metal components which may be used in rod-like antennas.


CLS 343/901
TXT Subject matter under subclass 900 wherein the elongated antenna is composed
    of multiple sections capable of sliding motion within each other to be
    extensible or retractible.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    823,    for dipoles with telescoping arms for adjusting the length.

    871,    for collapsible loop frames.

    883,    for antennas with a telescoping support.

    889,    for rod antennas retractible into a support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 121 for a shaft of
    more general application which is longitudinally extensible by a flexible
    drive or hoist.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 69 for conductors
    which are extensible.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Coupling, subclasses 298+ for adjustable length pipe
    joints or couplings.


CLS 343/902
TXT Subject matter under subclass 901 including structure which provides
    adjustment of the telescoping position of the antenna sections in response
    to change in the pressure of a fluid.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this subclass there must be some
    claimed electrical limitation as opposed to a mere recitation of a fluid
    motor or expansible chamber device structure. The mere recitation that the
    device or a mounting therefor is formed of insulating or conducting
    material, if the claim is otherwise directed to a fluid motor or an
    expansible chamber device, will not preclude classification in a fluid
    motor or expansible chamber device class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 325+, for a fluid pressure means which may
    be used for extending or retracting antennas.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclasses for
    expansible chamber motors, per se.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclasses for an
    expansible chamber device in which the piston or cylinder is disclosed as
    an antenna.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, appropriate subclasses for fluid
    pressure means of the internal combustion (or explosive) type confined to a
    cylinder.


CLS 343/903
TXT Subject matter under subclass 901 including a flexible rod for adjusting
    the telescoping position of the antenna sections in response to movement of
    the rod.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the rod extends within the antenna.  Often the rod
    is wound on a reel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    714,    for adjustable antennas significantly related to vehicle structure
    which may be operated by a rod.

    877,    for antennas combined with a reel on which the antenna is wound.

    889,    for rod type antennas retractible into a support which may be
    actuated by a rod.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses for mechanical
    movements for extending or retracting telescopic antennas, particularly
    subclass 95 for flexible connector type movements, and subclass 424.8 for
    screw and nut gearing devices adapted to move telescopic sectional elements.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 370+, particularly
    subclasses 390.2, 390.3, and 917 for unwinding and rewinding a flexible
    material which may include an antenna.


CLS 343/904
TXT Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein the antenna is combined with
    other structure which perfects it, and which combinations are not provided
    for above.

    (1)     Note.  See pertinent subclasses above for particular combinations
    of antennas within the class definition, such as antennas combined with
    vehicle structure (subclasses 711+), with means for moving directive
    antennas for scanning, sweeping or orienting (subclasses 757+) and with
    diverse type art device (subclasses 720+).

    (2)     Note.  For classification herein, the other structure must be for
    the purpose of perfecting or improving the antenna in the performance of
    its primary function, which is the radiation or collection of radio wave
    energy together with the transmission of such energy to or from the
    transmitter or receiver, as opposed to subclasses 720+ above which is
    limited to antennas combined with devices or structures having an added
    purpose or independent utility other than to perfect the antenna.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, for the structure of
    electric switches, per se.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 24+ for wave
    guides having an antenna coupled within the guide.

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigations), subclasses 1-205 and 350+ for detailed radio
    wave energy communication structure combined with an antenna.

    455,    Telecommunications, appropriate subclasses for radio receivers
    and/or transmitters including an antenna.


CLS 343/905
TXT Subject matter under subclass 904 wherein the other structure includes a
    transmission line.

    (1)     Note.  The transmission line may be shielded, e.g., coaxial line,
    or be associated with other structure, or have a configuration or
    arrangement to suppress radiation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    850+,   for antennas combined with a coupling network or an impedance in
    the leadin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, particularly subclasses
    68.1+ for conduits, cables, and conductors.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 100+ for branched
    circuits in plural channel systems which may be adapted for connection to
    an antenna, and subclasses 236+ for long lines, per se.


CLS 343/906
TXT Subject matter under subclass 904 combined with electrical connector
    structure for connecting an antenna to transmission or feed lines or other
    apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  The electrical connector may have a shield or other
    structure associated therewith for suppressing radiation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    850+,   for antennas with a coupling network or an impedance in the leadin.

    870,    for loop antennas with a connector or terminals.

    876,    for switching between plural antennas and line or between plural
    lines and antenna.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, for electrical connectors in general.


CLS 343/907
TXT Components and elements under subclass 700 not constituting a complete
    antenna which are limited to use in antennas and which are not provided for
    in any preceding subclass or in any other class.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes antenna conductors under the class
    definition which involve the material or composition of the conductor and
    which conductors are not classifiable in any other class.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for the antenna conductor
    defined only as being formed of a particular composition or material, or
    only as a base with a coating or lamination thereon.  For the excluded
    subject matter, see SEARCH CLASS below.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for antenna conductors which
    are defined only as a wire or electric conductor.  For the excluded subject
    matter, see SEARCH CLASS below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    707,    for aircraft with trailing type antennas.

    731+,   for traveling wave type antennas which may be combined with energy
    absorbing means.

    741+,   for high frequency type loops.

    767+,   for slot type antennas.

    773+,   for biconical horn wave guide type antennas.

    780,    for "pillbox" type antennas.

    785,    for wave guide antennas of solid liquid or gaseous dielectric type.

    786,    for horn type wave guide antennas, per se.

    787+,   for antennas having a magnetic core or auxiliary magnet.

    790+,   for sleeve type antennas.

    793+,   for balanced center-fed doublets in general, and pertinent
    subclasses included therein for special types of doublets and doublets with
    reflectors or directors.

    825+    and 843, for antennas of a particular electrical dimension.

    832,    for an active antenna used as a reflector.

    833,    for antennas with a parasitic director.

    834+,   for antennas with a parasitic reflector.

    841+,   for antennas with an electrical shield.

    846+,   for antennas having counterpoises, ground planes or grounding means.

    866+,   for loop type antennas.

    872+,   for antennas having protective covers or supports.

    874,    for mast or tower type antennas.

    896,    for cage type antennas.

    897,    for mesh, woven, braided or multiple  strip type antennas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), pertinent subclasses for a
    structural combination of rods and tubes of more general utility.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 210+ for
    strand structure of wire-rope; and subclass 235 for web materials which may
    be used in antennas.

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, subclasses 8+ for
    braided strands or fabrics which may be used in antennas.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 100-178 for hollow stock
    material such as pipes or tubes which may be used in antennas.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclass 425 for woven textile structures
    including metal.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 400+ for metal stock which has been
    treated by a Class 148 process, e.g., heat treated, etc.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, particularly subclasses
    126.1+ for conductor structure.

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, subclasses 22+ for
    conductors for transmission of electricity to moving vehicles.

    245,    Wire Fabrics and Structure, pertinent subclasses for wire fabrics
    and structure.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 490 for electrical resistance compositions.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, particularly subclasses 236+
    and 245+ for long lines and long line elements and components.

    336,    Inductor Devices, particularly subclasses 117 and 222+ for inductor
    devices with a core of magnetic material and for winding structure
    including the composition of the windings, respectively.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, for single metals or alloys which
    may be used in antennas.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet which may inherently possess desirable properties of an antenna,
    subclasses 544+ for stock materials, e.g., of indefinite length, which are
    all metal or have adjacent metal components which may be used in rod-like
    antennas.


CLS 343/908
TXT Subject matter under subclass 907 wherein the conductor or other component
    of the active antenna has a distinctive contour or shape.

    (1)     Note.  This does not include cables of particular cross section,
    which may be used as antennas.  See Class 174 for such subject matter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    767,    for radiating slot type antennas.

    795,    for sheet or wing type balanced doublets.

    802,    for balanced doublets with distributed reactance added to the arms.

    806,    for balanced doublets with bent arms.

    807,    for balanced doublets with tapered, thick or enlarged arms.

    828,    for linear antenna having a particular electrical length with a
    non-uniformity therein.

    831,    for stub shaped antennas having a particular electrical length.

    868,    for loop antennas of adjustable configuration.

    874+,   for mast or tower type antennas.

    895,    for spiral or helical shaped antennas.

    896,    for cage type antennas.

    897,    for mesh, woven, braided or multiple strip antennas.

    898,    for antennas including a hollow metallic body.

    899+,   for antennas with area increasing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 223 and 225+ for coils having
    distinctive conductor shape and distinctive coil configuration,
    respectively.


CLS 343/909
TXT Subject matter under subclass 907 including components which transmit
    therethrough a radio wave which impinges thereon from space and returns the
    wave to space after it has passed through and which modify the wave in
    transmission therethrough usually by delaying or accelerating some portions
    of the wave more than others, as follows:
    1.      Alters the direction of propagation of the wave, as by refraction.
    2.      Brings the wave front to a focus or converts a plane wave front to a
    spherical wave front or vice versa.
    3.      Changes the type of polarization, e.g., converts a plane polarized
    wave to
    a circularly polarized wave, or rotates the plane of polarization.
    4.      Filters one or more polarization components.
    5.      Filters one or more frequency components.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter need not be closely associated with an
    antenna, but may be applied to a radio beam remote from any antenna, or in
    a wave guide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    753+,   for antennas with spaced electromagnetic lenses or diffractors.

    756,    for antennas with a polarization filter.

    783,    for wave guide type antennas having an internal wave refraction
    means.

    912+,   for reflectors or directors, per se, which do not transmit the
    electromagnetic wave therethrough.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, especially subclasses 505+ for electromagnetic wave
    polarizers, filters, screens, lenses or refractors, per se, exclusive of
    infrared, visible light and ultraviolet electromagnetic radiation
    controlling elements.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, particularly subclasses 21,
    24+, and 248+ for wave transmission systems which may include
    electromagnetic lenses or refractors; and subclasses 167+ for wave filters.

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 1-205 and 350+ for radio energy
    communication systems, such as reflected wave systems and beacons, which
    may include radio wave lenses or refractors.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    483+ for optical polarizers, subclasses 642+ for optical lenses, and
    subclasses 350+ 885+ and  for optical filters.


CLS 343/910
TXT Subject matter under subclass 909 wherein the component presents to the
    wave front a propagating medium whose surface offers abrupt changes in
    propagating characteristic.

    (1)     Note.  These changes may result from changes in propagating
    material, or in length of propagating path such as a stepped formation.  A
    mere series of parallel metal strips in an air dielectric would not be
    classified here, but in subclass 909, above.


CLS 343/911
TXT Subject matter under subclass 909 wherein the component includes in the
    propagating path a material having a significant dielectric characteristic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    785,    for solid, liquid, or gaseous dielectric wave guide type antennas.


CLS 343/912
TXT Subject matter under subclass 907 wherein the component constitutes a
    conductive structure (usually metallic) which is adapted to return or to
    reradiate into free space a substantial portion of the impinging radio wave
    energy coming from or going to an associated active antenna.

    (1)     Note.  The reflectors or directors of this subclass are adapted for
    use with an active antenna associated therewith, and facilitate
    transmission or reception of this antenna in a desired direction.  See this
    Class 342, particularly subclasses 1-20 for reflectors which have no active
    antenna directly associated therewith, but which render their presence
    known by reflecting energy from and to a remote antenna.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    780,    for pilox type antennas.

    832,    for an active antenna as a reflector.

    833,    and the search notes thereunder, for the combination of a director
    and active antenna.

    834+,   and the search notes thereunder, for the combination of a reflector
    and active antenna.

    878+,   for reflectors or directors with supports therefor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 248+ for
    reflectors in wave guides.

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 1-20 see (1) Note above.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    838+ for optical mirrors and reflectors.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 341+ for illumination reflectors.


CLS 343/913
TXT Subject matter under subclass 912 wherein the reflector or director is
    combined with an impedance connected or coupled to the reflector or
    director.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    722,    731+, 745+, 749+, 814, 816, 820+, and 850+, for an impedance
    associated with an active antenna element.

    841+,   for antennas with an electrical shield, which may include
    resistance.


CLS 343/914
TXT Subject matter under subclass 912 wherein different portions of the
    reflector or director surface have different curvatures, e.g.,
    paraboloidal, plane, spherical or cylindrical.


CLS 343/915
TXT Subject matter under subclass 912 wherein the reflector or director is
    composed of relatively movable parts for collapsing, folding or adjusting
    the reflector or director; so that it may occupy a smaller space or the
    curvature of its surface may be changed, or its electrical characteristics
    may be varied.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    723,    for single adjustable length electrically long linear antennas.

    823,    for adjustable length balanced doublet antennas.

    868     and 871, for loop antennas of adjustable configuration and having
    collapsible frames, respectively.

    880+,   for antennas with adjustable or collapsible supports.

    901+,   for telescoping rod type antennas.


CLS 343/916
TXT Subject matter under subclass 912 wherein the reflector or director is
    composed of parts which may readily be assembled or disassembled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    880,    for antennas with a knockdown support.

    915,    for collapsible, foldable or adjustable reflectors or directors.


CLS 345/
TTL COMPUTER GRAPHICS PROCESSING, OPERATOR INTERFACE PROCESSING, AND SELECTIVE
    VISUAL DISPLAY SYSTEMS

CLS 345/
TXT
    I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF THE CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    This class provides for processes and apparatus for selective electrical
    control of two or more light-generating or light-controlling display
    elements* in accordance with a received or stored image data signal. The
    image data includes character, graphical information or display attribute
    data. The image data may include, for example, information data from a
    peripheral input device, from the reception of a television signal, from
    the recognition of image data, or from the generation or creation of image
    data by a computer.

    This class also provides for digital data processing systems or methods for
    data processing for visual presentation, wherein the processing of data
    includes the creation or manipulation of graphic objects (e.g., artificial
    images), text or use of an operator interface by a digital data processing
    system prior to use by or within a specific display system.

    II.     SCOPE OF THE CLASS

    (1)     Note.  This class includes a display controller* for accessing
    image data. The display control includes, for example, control between a
    display memory and the display elements*. The display control may be
    performed by a processor, wherein enhancements for a previously created and
    stored image are provided. Examples of such display control include display
    memory addressing, display screen energizing, and received image data
    control in response to input signals applied to the display control to
    provide an enhanced image for display. A specific display system* in
    combination with a data processor or computer is classified herein.

    (2)     Note.  The display elements* of this class include, for example,
    (1) a CRT display wherein visual elements* of the image or message
    originate at the light-emitting screen of a cathode-ray tube, (2) a flat
    panel display (non-CRT display system*) wherein visual elements* of image
    or message are the result of light producers or light controllers arranged
    in a tangible mechanical grouping or array, (3) any matrix arrangement of
    light-generating or light-controlling display elements* with selective
    electrical display control, or (4) any plural arrangement of segmented
    light-generating or light-controlling display elements* with selective
    electrical display control.

    (3)     Note.  Claimed subject matter directed to a display function
    (waveform) generator combined with a display is classified herein unless
    there is claimed structure relating to the manner in which the waveform is
    detected or measured.

    (4)     Note.  Significantly claimed structure external to this class,
    claimed in combination with subject matter under the class definition
    above, which displays or produces an image or message related to such
    external structure or its function, is classified in the class appropriate
    to the external structure; however, nominally claimed structure external to
    this class, claimed in combination with subject matter under this class
    definition, is classified in this class unless provided for in the
    appropriate external class.

    (5)     Note.  This class provides for peripheral input devices which
    include a manually actuatable selective means (e.g., keyboards, light pens,
    joysticks, mice, and touch tablets etc.) to selectively input the
    information data to the selective display control which translates the
    selective input into a message symbol or image, (e.g., a character or
    graphic object) on the display to an observer.

    (6)     Note.  User or operator interfaces having an interactive process
    being performed in relation to a display are classified herein.
    Significantly claimed structure external to a recited operator interface,
    claimed in combination with operator interface subject matter under this
    class definition, which displays or produces an image or message related to
    such external structure or its function, is classified in the class
    appropriate to the external structure. However, nominally claimed structure
    external to the operator interface subject matter, claimed in combination
    with operator interface subject matter under this class definition, is
    classified in this class unless provided for in the appropriate external
    class.

    (7)     Note.  This class also provides for display storage devices such as
    display memory with more than nominal recitation of their organization and
    structure claimed for storing the previously created or generated data to
    be displayed on the display.

    (8)     Note.  Graphic objects of this class are defined by their
    coordinates, shape, size, and attributes. Such graphic objects define a
    portion of a displayed image and may be a combination of computer generated
    objects and real life images.

    (9)     Note.  Information processing for creating a visual image which
    includes more than a nominal recitation of information processing is
    classified herein.

    (10)    Note.  The use of a memory system for processing in conjunction
    with a data presentation/computer graphics system (e.g., for manipulating
    the addressing or contents of image or text data stored in a memory) is
    classified herein.


    (11)    Note.  Font generation for display and font processing to form the
    character patterns is classified herein.

    (12)    Note.  Windowing techniques which can include interactive processes
    are classified herein.

    (13)    Note.  Color information processing wherein the color in the image
    is calculated, is classified herein (e.g., shading, interpolating color
    values in a polygon).

    (14)    Note.  Generation or manipulation of three dimensional or
    perspective display information or objects, generation or control of a
    mapping pattern, or animation are classified in this class.

    (15)    Note.  Systems which display a change of appearance, where the
    change is computer generated (e.g., creation or modification of hairstyles
    or clothing to be overlaid with a video image or a model), are classified
    in this class.

    III.    GLOSSARY

            The following terms have been defined for purposes of
    classification in this class. In the class and subclass definition of this
    class, terms used in a sense defined below are indicated by an asterisk(*).

            When these terms are not indicated by an asterisk(*) in the
    definitions, the meaning is not restricted to the glossary definitions
    below.

    ALPHA - NUMERIC

    Any symbol found in the ASCII character set.

    DISPLAY DEVICE

    A communication device which converts image data* into a visual image*.

    DISPLAY ELEMENT

    Means for producing a visual effect in a display device* comprised of a
    plurality (e.g., matrix) of such means.

    DISPLAY TERMINAL

    A unit which comprises at least one display device* and user interface
    control means (e.g., mouse).

    DISPLAY SYSTEM

    A system which comprises one or more display terminals* or one or more
    display devices*.

    DISPLAY CONTROLLER

    An electrical circuit which actuates a display device* in accordance with
    received image data*.

    VISUAL IMAGE

    The resultant image shown by the display device*.

    IMAGE DATA

    The information provided to form the visual image*.

    VISUAL ELEMENT

    The smallest constituent part of a composite visual image*. A visual
    element* may be the visual effect produced by a display element*.

    BUS

    A conductor used for transferring data, signals, or power.

    COMPUTER

    A machine that inputs data, processes data, stores data, and outputs data.

    DATA

    Representation of information in a coded manner suitable for communication,
    interpretation, or processing. Address data-Data that represent or identify
    a source or destination. Instruction data-Data that represent an operation
    and identify its operands, if any. Status data-Data that represent
    conditions of data, digital data processing systems, computers,
    peripherals, memory, etc. User data-Data other than address data,
    instruction data, or status data.

    DATA PROCESSING

    See PROCESSING, below.

    DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING SYSTEM

    An arrangement of processor(s) in combination with either memory or
    peripherals, or both, performing data processing.

    INFORMATION

    Meaning that a human being assigns to data by means of the conventions
    applied to that data.

    MEMORY

    A functional unit to which data can be stored and from which data can be
    retrieved.


    PERIPHERAL

    A functional unit that transmits data to or receives data from a computer
    to which it is coupled.

    PROCESSING

    Methods or apparatus performing systematic operations upon data or
    information exemplified by functions such as data or information
    transferring, merging, sorting, and computing (i.e., arithmetic operations
    or logical operations).


    (1)     Note.  In this class, the glossary term data is used to modify
    processing in the term data processing; whereas the term digital data
    processing system refers to a machine performing data processing.

    (2)     Note.  In an effort to avoid redundant constructions, in this
    class, where appropriate, the term address data processing is used in place
    of address data data processing.

    PROCESSOR

    A functional unit that interprets and executes instruction data.

    IV.     SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, particularly subclass 406 for
    display device with gas or liquid movement.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, particularly subclass 471 for control
    elements which move in two planes.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, particularly subclasses 200+ for various
    indicators.

    178,    Telegraphy, especially subclasses 18-20 for input digitizing
    writing tablets.

    200,    Electricity: Circuit Makers and Breakers, particularly subclasses
    5+ for multiple switch control.

    235,    Registers, especially subclasses 375+ for systems controlled by
    data bearing records which may include selective display; various
    subclasses for basic machines and associated indicating mechanisms for
    ascertaining the number of movements of various devices and machines, plus
    machines made from these basic machines alone (e.g., cash registers, voting
    machines), and in combination with various perfecting features, such as
    printers and recording means.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for light detection using photocell
    circuitry. For light source array or matrix, see subclass 553.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses for single, plural, and integrated element
    solid-state light source.

    273,    Amusement Devices: Games, appropriate subclasses for TV games using
    display device.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, for some light sources, per
    se. Note subclasses 498+ for solid-state type device and subclasses 484+
    for gaseous discharge display panel.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for structure of cathode-ray tube energizing circuits and
    subclasses 169.1+ for structure of panel display devices (e.g.,
    electroluminescent and gas display).

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclass 121 for measuring and
    testing electricity using a CRT.

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, appropriate subclasses for
    electronic digital logic circuits; and appropriate subclasses for generic
    digital logic devices, circuity, and subcombinations thereof, wherein
    nonarithmetical operations are performed upon discrete electrical signals
    representing a value normally described by numerical digits.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 108+ for miscellaneous current driving circuits.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 825+ for controlling one or
    more devices to obtain a plurality of results by transmission of a
    designated one of plural distinctive control signals over a smaller number
    of communication lines or channels, particularly subclass 825.02 for tree
    or cascade selective communication, subclasses 825.03+ for channel
    selection, subclass 825.05 for a plurality of controlled devices connected
    by a communication line in a closed series configuration, subclasses
    825.06+ for communication systems where status of a controlled device is
    communicated, subclasses 825.2+ for synchronizing selective communication
    systems, subclasses 825.5+ for lockout or priority in selective
    communication systems, subclasses 825.52+ for addressing, and subclasses
    825.57+ for pulse responsive actuation.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 22+ for bodily
    actuated code generation relating to a keyboard; and various subclasses for
    electrical pulse and digit code converters (e.g., systems for originating
    or emitting a coded set of discrete signals or translating one code into
    another code wherein the meaning of the data remains the same but the
    formats may differ).

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclass 142 for radar display systems using a
    CRT display.


    348,    Television, appropriate subclasses for systems and subsystems for
    display of television (real time scanned produced) signals.

    349,    Liquid Crystal Cells, Elements and Systems, appropriate subclasses
    for the details of a liquid crystal cell structure.

    352,    Optics: Motion Pictures, subclass 87 where motion picture animation
    will be found.

    353,    Optics: Image Projectors, appropriate subclasses for specifics of
    optics involved with an image projector.

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    237+ for structure relating to an optical modulator and subclasses 443+ for
    projection screens.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, which is an
    integral part of Class 369 following subclass 18, for record carriers and
    systems wherein information is stored and retrieved by interaction with a
    medium and there is relative motion between a medium and a transducer, for
    example, magnetic disk drive devices and control thereof, per se.

    362,    Illumination, appropriate subclasses for a specific illumination
    device and particularly subclasses 227+ for plural light sources for
    general lighting uses.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 144,
    146, and 188+ for data processing control system with operator control
    interface and display, subclasses 474.22+ for CAD/CAM product manufacturing
    having user interface, subclasses 718+ for mathematical function generation
    and subclass 855 for specialized function generation including a CRT
    dispaly.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 106+ and 120+
    for storage systems using visible light for the retrieval of stored
    information instead of for the display of a selected image (message or
    data); and various subclasses for addressable static singular storage
    elements or plural singular storage elements of the same type (i.e., the
    internal elements of memory, per se).

    368,    Horology: Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 223+ for
    displays of time (i.e., watches).

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, particularly subclasses
    99+ for information handling in conjunction with a dynamic store; and
    various subclasses for record carriers and systems wherein information is
    stored and retrieved by interaction with a medium and there is relative
    motion between a medium and a transducer.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, various
    subclasses for generic electrical pulse or pulse coded data error detection
    and correction.


    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclasses 112+ for display control with registers;
    and various subclasses for generic circuits for pulse counting.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclass 96 for displaying digital
    information on a terminal.

    380,    Cryptography, subclasses 3+ for stored information access or copy
    prevention (e.g., software program protection or computer virus detection)
    in combination with data encryption, and subclasses 22 through 25 and 50
    for electric signal modification and other appropriate subclasses.

    382,    Image Analysis, for previously scanned image data and for image
    recognition, processing and nominal display relating to such recognition;
    and various subclasses for operations performed on image data with the aim
    of measuring a characteristic of an image, detecting variations, detecting
    structures, or transforming the image data, and for procedures for
    analyzing and categorizing patterns present in image data.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, particularly subclasses 83+ for typewriting
    machines including a display.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 1+ for system performing
    distant object energy sensing wherein said systems include a display,
    subclasses 307+ and 323+ for educational system including a CRT.

    463,    Amusement Devices: Games, appropriate subclasses for video games.

    705,    Data Processing - Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/Price Determination, appropriate subclasses for user interface
    specific to business practice.

    707,    Data Processing - Database and File Management, Data Structure or
    Document Processing, subclasses 1+ for database specific user interface and
    subclasses 500+ for document processing specific user interface.


CLS 345/1
TXT PLURAL DISPLAY SYSTEMS:

    Subject matter under the class definition including more than one visual
    display system*.

    (1)     Note.  The use of adjacent CRTs to display a large image is typical
    of this type of plural display system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for a single display system having plural display devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 200.01+ for
    transmission of information among multiple computer systems, subclasses
    821+ for input/output data processing, and subclasses 280+ for intrasystem
    connection in a digital data processing system.


CLS 345/2
TXT Remotely located:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the more than one visual display
    system* includes plural display terminals* which are positioned at separate
    locations where they cannot be viewed simultaneously.

    (1)     Note.  Display terminals in different offices of a work environment
    are typical of this type of plural display system.


CLS 345/3
TXT Diverse systems (e.g., CRT/LCD interface):

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the plural display systems* are
    different types.

    (1)     Note.  Different types of display systems include CRTs, LEDs, LCDs,
    plasma, etc.


CLS 345/4
TXT SINGLE DISPLAY SYSTEM HAVING STACKED SUPERIMPOSED DISPLAY DEVICES (E.G.,
    TANDEM):

    Subject matter under the class definition in which one transparent display
    device* is positioned above another display device*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for a single display device having a superimposed overlay.


CLS 345/5
TXT Diverse display devices:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 wherein the stacked display devices* are
    different types of display devices* (e.g., EL and LCD).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for diverse plural display systems.


CLS 345/6
TXT Three-dimensional arrays:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 wherein the images from the stacked
    superimposed display devices* together provide a resultant display with
    perspective.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139,    for a graphics display with perspective provided by a single
    display device.

    419,    for three-dimensional presentation processing.


CLS 345/7
TXT IMAGE SUPERPOSITION BY OPTICAL MEANS (E.G., HEADS-UP DISPLAY):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a single visual image*
    from a display device* is superimposed with an external world scene by some
    light-affecting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communication: Electrical, subclasses 901+ for external condition
    vehicle-mounted indicators.

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    630+ for specific optical components of heads-up arrangement.


CLS 345/8
TXT Operator body-mounted heads-up display (e.g., helmet mounted display):


    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein the display device* for providing
    the single visual image* is assembled on a helmet worn on the operator's
    head or is carried on the operator's body.


CLS 345/9
TXT Plural image superposition:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein at least two visual images* from at
    least two display devices*, respectively, are superimposed by some
    light-affecting means.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of light-affecting means include lenses, mirrors,
    reflectors, etc.


CLS 345/10
TXT DATA RESPONSIVE CRT DISPLAY CONTROL:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means for controlling a
    cathode-ray tube to display visual image data*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180,    for light pen for CRT display.

    418+,   for significant structure of a data processor or computer
    architecture wherein elements of computation or data processing techniques
    are used in connection with a CRT creation or manipulation of graphic
    objects or text performed by a computer or processor in connection with a
    CRT.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 364+ for structure
    of the cathode-ray tube.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 8.51+ and
    169.1+ for a CRT system and a CRT signal control means with no selective
    data control of display elements.

    348,    Television, appropriate subclasses for a display of television or
    of video, with receiver related electronic generation and control of an
    image of the channel to which the receiver is tuned.


CLS 345/11
TXT CRT provides display control:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein the control means includes a CRT
    for driving a second CRT, the second CRT providing the visual image data*
    to be displayed.

    (1)     Note.  Display systems which include a first CRT, used as part of a
    driving circuit and not providing the resultant display, for driving a
    second CRT providing the resultant display is found herein.


CLS 345/12
TXT Data responsive deflection and intensity control:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein the control means controls both
    the electron beam's deflection and its intensity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13+,    for data responsive deflection control for a CRT.

    20+,    for data responsive intensity control for a CRT.

    147+,   for intensity control for a generic display device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 364+ and
    383+ for CRT deflection circuits and intensity control wherein no selective
    data control of display elements is provided.


CLS 345/13
TXT Data responsive deflection control:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 in which the control means is responsive
    to input data or an input message and affects the images by controlling
    electron beam's deflection in the CRT.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 364+ for
    CRT deflection circuits.


CLS 345/14
TXT X and Y axis deflection control:

    Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein the electron beam's deflection is
    controlled in both horizontal and vertical directions in the CRT.


CLS 345/15
TXT Curvilinear deflection control (e.g., lissajous):

    Subject matter under subclass 13 in which the control means generates a
    complex waveform which includes some frequency and its harmonics with
    varying phases whereby the image may be built up by a circular or
    curvilinear deflection.


CLS 345/16
TXT Stroke or vector:

    Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein the image includes a straight line
    produced from an input data which may represent terminal points or a point
    with magnitude and direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135,    for vector display on a generic display device.


CLS 345/17
TXT Strokes for forming characters:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 wherein the strokes formed on the CRT
    result in the generation of alphanumeric* data.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for a character generator used with a CRT.

    141,    for a character display on a generic display device.

    194,    for a character generator used with a generic display device.


CLS 345/18
TXT Up/down counter:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 including a means for determining the
    points of the stroke or vector in incremental steps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, appropriate subclasses for counters in general.


CLS 345/19
TXT Impedance array:

    Subject matter under subclass 13 in which the control means includes an
    arrangement of impedances for controlling the electron beam's deflection.


CLS 345/20
TXT Data responsive intensity control:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 in which the control means is responsive
    to input data or an input message and controls the brilliance of an image
    on the CRT.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     for fluid light-emitter matrix-type display device with intensity
    control.


    77,     for electroluminescent matrix-type display device with intensity
    control.


    147,    for intensity control for a generic display device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 383+ for
    CRT intensity control wherein no selective data control of display elements
    is provided.


CLS 345/21
TXT Magnetic element array:

    Subject matter under subclass 20 including a plurality of magnetic element
    means providing the brilliance information to the CRT.


CLS 345/22
TXT Color display:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein the visual image* contains more
    than two colors to be displayed on the CRT.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for fluid light-emitter matrix color display.

    83,     for solid body light-emitter color display.

    88,     for liquid crystal color display.

    150+,   for selectable color attributes relating to a visual image to be
    displayed by a generic display device.

    431,    for color surface detail/characteristic to be displayed by a
    generic display device.


CLS 345/23
TXT Graphic and alphanumeric display:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein the control means selectably
    provides an image representative of an object (e.g., a plane, boat, etc.)
    and of a font of alphanumeric* characters on the CRT.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for a graphic CRT display.

    25,     for an alphanumeric CRT display.

    116,    for a character and graphical display on a generic display device.


CLS 345/24
TXT Graphic display:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein the control means selectably
    provides an image representative of an object (e.g., a plane, boat, etc.)
    on the CRT.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131,    for graphical image size control.

    133,    for a graphical display on a generic display device.


CLS 345/25
TXT Alphanumeric display:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein the control means selectably
    provides an image of a font of alphanumeric* characters on the CRT.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124,    for alphanumeric image scrolling.

    128,    for alphanumeric image size controlling.

    141,    for a character display on a generic display device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 815.53+ for lighted
    alphanumeric visual indicator.


CLS 345/26
TXT Character generator:

    Subject matter under subclass 25 wherein the control means includes a
    storage means used as a source of the alphanumeric* characters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141+,   for a character display on a generic display device.

    194,    for a character generator used with a generic display device.


CLS 345/27
TXT Combined with storage means:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein the control means includes a means
    to retain or to store data elements being applied to the CRT.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    507+,   for a memory system in connection with computer display processing
    hardware.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclasses
    for static storage systems using visible light for the retrieval of stored
    information instead of for the display of a selected image.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, appropriate subclasses
    for dynamic storage systems using visible light for the retrieval of stored
    information instead of for the display of a selected image.

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems - Memory,
    appropriate subclasses for memory addressing, accessing and controlling.


CLS 345/28
TXT Addressing:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 including a means for assigning storage
    locations to the data elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     for optical addressing of an electroluminescent display.

    188,    for addressing with priority a multi-plane color memory which
    stores image data for a computer graphics processing system.

    193,    for addressing a character memory which stores image data for a
    computer graphics processing system.

    515,    for addressing a bit map or graphic memory which stores image data
    for a computer graphics processing system.

    516,    for addressing circuitry in combination with a display store to be
    used in conjunction with a computer graphics processing system.


CLS 345/29
TXT Delay line:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein the control means has a delay
    means for synchronizing operations of circuits in the control means.

    (1)     Note.  The delay line may have selective parallel inputs and a
    serial output.


CLS 345/30
TXT PLURAL PHYSICAL DISPLAY ELEMENT CONTROL SYSTEM (E.G., NON-CRT):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the light-generating or
    light-controlling display elements* are provided as an arrangement of
    plural segmented and matrix display elements* or as a flat panel array with
    selective electrical control.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, appropriate subclasses for
    mechanical indicia carrying changeable displays.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclasses for mechanical
    indicators.


    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 484+ for gaseous
    discharge mediums with no selective electrical driving control circuitry,
    subclasses 498+ for solid-state type discharge mediums with no selective
    electrical driving control circuitry.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for gaseous and solid-state type discharge mediums having
    circuits without selective electrical control as to which of the display
    elements are to be energized.

    340,    Communication: Electrical, subclasses 815.4+ for visual indicators
    of some condition or state with nonselective electrical display control;
    subclasses 901+ for external condition vehicle-mounted indicators;
    subclasses 907+ for traffic control indicators; subclasses 945+ for
    aircraft and watercraft indicating systems; subclasses 988+ for indicators
    relating to vehicle position; subclasses 425.5+ for land vehicle
    indicators; subclasses 500+ for condition responsive indicating systems.

    349,    Liquid Crystal Cells, Elements And Systems, appropriate subclasses
    for liquid crystal cell structure in general.

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    237 for optical modulators with no selective electrical control circuitry.

    362,    Illumination, appropriate subclasses for subject matter directed to
    illumination systems which render objects to be visible.


CLS 345/31
TXT Physically movable array:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 in which an image is formed by moving the
    array of display elements* or a subset of the array of display elements* on
    a display device*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for three-dimensional arrays formed from stacked display devices.


CLS 345/32
TXT Optical means interposed in viewing path (e.g., filters, lens, etc.):


    Subject matter under subclass 30 having an optical means interposed in the
    viewing path of the display element* array.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 815.73+ for visual
    alphanumeric indicator having optical means.

    353,    Optics: Image Projectors, appropriate subclasses for all projected
    pluralities of images, superimposed or in a mosaic.

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, appropriate
    subclasses for designated optical means.


CLS 345/33
TXT Segmented display elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 in which the light-generating or
    light-controlling display elements* are provided as an arrangement of
    segmented display elements* with selective electrical control.


CLS 345/34
TXT Seven segment display:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 wherein the arrangement of segmented
    display consists of seven bars so that each digit from 0 to 9 can be
    displayed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 815.44 for visual indicator
    having seven segments.


CLS 345/35
TXT Bar graph:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 wherein the light-generating or
    light-controlling display elements* are aligned in a variable length line
    arrangement to show the condition of a given parameter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140,    for bar graph shown on a generic display device.


CLS 345/36
TXT Electroluminescent display elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 35 wherein the bar graph includes
    electroluminescent display elements* or segmented display elements* having
    a luminescent phosphor which emits light with the application of the
    selective electrical control.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76+,    for matrix electroluminescent display.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 169.3 for
    electroluminescent devices and circuitry without selective electrical
    control as to which of the display elements are to be energized.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 825.81 for matrix
    electroluminescent elements not used as a display.


CLS 345/37
TXT Gas discharge display segments (e.g., plasma):

    Subject matter under subclass 35 wherein the bar graph includes segmented
    display elements* which generate light due to the presence of a gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60+,    for matrix fluid light-emitting display.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 169.4 for
    energizing or bias supplies for a gas panel display device.


CLS 345/38
TXT Liquid crystal display segments:

    Subject matter under subclass 35 wherein the bar graph includes liquid
    crystal display elements* or a liquid with crystalline properties.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87+,    for matrix liquid crystal display devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    349,    Liquid Crystal Cells, Elements And Systems, subclass 142 for
    segmented or fixed pattern liquid crystal cell structure.


CLS 345/39
TXT Light-emitting diode segments (LEDs):

    Subject matter under subclass 35 wherein the bar graph includes
    light-emitting diodes or diodes that emit light when biased in a forward
    direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82+,    for matrix light-emitting diode display.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses for LED structure.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 815.45 for visual indicator
    using light-emitting diodes (LEDs) and subclass 825.82 for LED matrix which
    is not used as a display.


CLS 345/40
TXT Plural (e.g., stacked, adjacent):

    Subject matter under subclass 35 wherein a plurality of the variable length
    line arrangements are provided to show the conditions of a plurality of
    parameters.


CLS 345/41
TXT Fluid light-emitting display elements (e.g., gas, plasma):

    Subject matter under subclass 33 in which the segmented display elements*
    generate light due to a fluid medium in the display elements*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60+,    for matrix fluid light-emitting display.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 169.4 for
    energizing or bias supplies for a gas panel display device.


CLS 345/42
TXT Controlling circuitry:

    Subject matter under subclass 41 wherein the segmented display elements*
    are selectively controlled by a specified electrical control device (e.g.,
    counters, logic circuits, shift registers, etc.).


CLS 345/43
TXT Mask or electrode shape:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 in which the segmented electrode display
    elements* have a significant contour or in which an opaque material with a
    significantly shaped opening is provided with the segmented display
    elements*.


CLS 345/44
TXT Solid light-emitting display elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 in which the segmented display elements*
    are composed of solid light-generating material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82+,    for matrix solid body light-emitting display.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 552 for solid-state light source systems.


CLS 345/45
TXT Electroluminescent:

    Subject matter under subclass 44 in which the segmented display elements*
    include EL display elements* or wherein the segmented display elements*
    include a luminescent phosphor which emits light with the application of
    the selective electrical control.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76+,    for matrix electroluminescent display.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 169.3 for
    electroluminescent devices and circuitry without selective electrical
    control as to which of the display elements are to be energized.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 825.81 for matrix
    electroluminescent elements not used as a display.


CLS 345/46
TXT Light-emitting diodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 44 in which the segmented display elements*
    include light-emitting diodes or diodes that emit light when biased in a
    forward direction.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82+,    for matrix light-emitting diode display.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses for LED structure.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 815.45 for visual indictor
    using light-emitting diodes (LEDs) and subclass 825.82 for LED matrix which
    is not used as a display.


CLS 345/47
TXT Fluorescent elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 wherein the segmented display elements*
    include fluorescent light-emitting elements or cathodoluminescent display
    elements* wherein electrons strike a phosphor material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for vacuum fluorescent matrix displays.


CLS 345/48
TXT Light-controlling display elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 comprising means to control the amount or
    distribution of light which is reflected from or transmitted to the
    segmented display elements*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     for light-controlling display elements formed in a matrix.


CLS 345/49
TXT Electrochromic elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 48 in which the segmented display elements*
    include electrochromic display elements*, or elements made from a material
    with light absorption properties such that the material takes on a color
    upon the application of an electric field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    for matrix electrochromic displays.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    265 for electrochromic light valve arrays without selective electrical
    control.


CLS 345/50
TXT Liquid crystal elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 48 in which the segmented display elements*
    include liquid crystal display elements* or liquid with crystalline
    properties.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87+,    for matrix liquid crystal display devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    349,    Liquid Crystal Cells, Elements and Systems, subclass 142 for
    segmented or fixed pattern liquid crystal cell structure.


CLS 345/51
TXT Display element selection circuitry:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 in which the selective electrical control
    includes details of circuitry for selecting the segmented display elements*
    to be displayed.


CLS 345/52
TXT Power supply generating circuitry:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 in which the selective electrical control
    includes means for selectively supplying drive voltages to the display
    elements.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity: Power Supply or Regulation Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for specifics of a power supply.


CLS 345/53
TXT Specific waveform (e.g., square waveforms, sinusoidal):

    Subject matter under subclass 50 in which the selective electrical control
    includes means for selectively supplying particular waveforms to the
    display elements*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94+,    for waveform generation for a matrix liquid crystal display.

    208+,   for a waveform generator coupled to a generic display device.


CLS 345/54
TXT Field period polarity reversal:

    Subject matter under subclass 53 in which the waveforms applied to the
    display elements* are alternatively supplied in a positive and negative
    manner.


CLS 345/55
TXT Display elements arranged in matrix (e.g., rows and columns):

    Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein the light-generating or
    light-controlling display elements* are provided as a matrix arrangement of
    display elements* with selective electrical control.


CLS 345/56
TXT Image shifting means (i.e., traveling message):

    Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein the selective electrical control
    includes means for moving image or a message on the display matrix.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for fluid light-emitter with shifting means.


CLS 345/57
TXT Having endless belt or tape reader:

    Subject matter under subclass 56 wherein the image is formed on a moving
    belt (i.e., image bearing web) or the movement of the image on the display
    matrix is in response to reading of binary code data on a tape.


CLS 345/58
TXT Crosstalk elimination:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein the selective electrical control
    includes means for removal of spurious (i.e., undesirable noise) signals
    from the matrix.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscelaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    systems, subclasses 551+ for unwanted signal suppression in general.


CLS 345/59
TXT Matrix for conveying alphanumeric data:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein the matrix arrangement of display
    elements* displays character information.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for alphanumeric CRT display.

    141+,   for a character display on a generic display device.


CLS 345/60
TXT Fluid light emitter (e.g., gas, liquid, or plasma):

    Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein the display element* includes a
    light-generating fluid medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37      and 41+, for segmented fluid light-emitting display devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 169.4 for
    energizing or bias supplies for a gas panel display device.


CLS 345/61
TXT Shifting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 wherein the fluid is moved to adjacent
    display elements* in order to increase the brightness of the display.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for image shifting means for a matrix display device.


CLS 345/62
TXT Specified plasma coupling path:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 in which the shifting means constitutes a
    connecting path arrangement for a plasma discharge.


CLS 345/63
TXT Intensity control:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 in which the selective electrical control
    includes means for controlling the brightness characteristics of the fluid
    light emitter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    432,    for intensity changes in a graphical image processing.


CLS 345/64
TXT Liquid light emitter:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 in which the display element* includes a
    light-generating liquid medium.


CLS 345/65
TXT Phosphor excited by fluid response:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 wherein the display elements* include a
    phosphor compound within the fluid medium for emission of light.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 458.1+ and 483.1+ for luminescent
    devices utilizing phosphor.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 103+ for channel
    electron multiplier devices.


CLS 345/66
TXT Particular discharge path:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 in which the display elements* include a
    gas, plasma, or liquid medium having a specific shape or contour for the
    generation of the light.


CLS 345/67
TXT More than two electrodes per element:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 in which a display element* of the fluid
    medium has three or more electrodes.


CLS 345/68
TXT Means for combining selective and sustain signals:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 in which the selective electrical control
    includes circuit means for applying a select signal and a sustain signal in
    concert to appropriate selected electrodes of the matrix for energization
    of the fluid medium.


CLS 345/69
TXT Resistor-diode arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 in which the circuit combining means
    includes an arrangement of resistors and diodes for applying the selective
    and sustain signals to the electrodes of the matrix.


CLS 345/70
TXT Including transformer:

    Subject matter under subclass 69 in which the resistor-diode arrangement
    utilizes a transformer for providing the necessary voltage to the
    electrodes of the matrix.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for transformers, per se.


CLS 345/71
TXT Electrode insulated from fluid medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 in which the display elements* of the
    matrix have at least one electrode with an insulating or dielectric layer
    between the electrode and the fluid medium of the matrix.


CLS 345/72
TXT Color:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 in which the display elements* emit a
    specific color light due to the fluid material itself or due to a colored
    phosphor layer.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150+,   for selectable color attributes relating to a visual image to be
    displayed by a generic display device.


CLS 345/73
TXT Incandescent:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein the display elements* generate
    light due to electron flow through a filament of resistive material,
    wherein the filament is heated to a level for providing the emission of
    light.

    (1)     Note.  An array of incandescent light bulbs are found herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, appropriate subclasses for incandescent illumination
    in general.


CLS 345/74
TXT Cathodoluminescent type:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein the display elements* generate
    light due to the application of electrical control through an anode or
    cathode to emit an electron beam at each display element* to strike a
    phosphor layer.


CLS 345/75
TXT Vacuum fluorescent:

    Subject matter under subclass 74 wherein the cathodoluminescent display
    elements* include a vacuum for electrons to travel through so as to excite
    a phosphor material to emit light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for segmented fluorescent element display.


CLS 345/76
TXT Electroluminescent:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 in which the light-generating display
    elements* emit light when an electric current is passed through dielectric
    and phosphor materials.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36      and 45, for segmented electroluminescent element displays.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 169.3 for
    electroluminescent devices and circuitry without selective electrical
    control as to which of the display elements are to be energized.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 825.81 for matrix
    electroluminescent elements not used as a display.


CLS 345/77
TXT Brightness or intensity control:

    Subject matter under subclass 76 in which the selective electrical control
    includes means for generating selected light output levels for each display
    element*.

    (1)     Note.  Intensity control for color output is included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for data responsive CRT intensity control.

    63,     for matrix fluid light-emitting display intensity control.

    147,    for intensity control for a generic display device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 383+ for
    CRT intensity control wherein no selective data control of display elements
    is provided.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 815.4+ for intensity control
    with a visual indicator.


CLS 345/78
TXT Having compensating pulse:

    Subject matter under subclass 76 in which the selective electrical control
    includes means for generating an additional voltage pulse in conjunction
    with a normal drive waveform for altering the electrical characteristics at
    the electroluminescent display elements* (e.g., enhanced contrast, latent
    image, flicker, or noise elimination, etc.).


CLS 345/79
TXT Field period polarity reversal:

    Subject matter under subclass 76 in which the selective electrical control
    provides waveforms to the electroluminescent display elements* in an
    alternating positive and negative manner.


CLS 345/80
TXT Driving means integral to substrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 76 in which a selective electrical control
    device and the display elements* are formed as a unit.


CLS 345/81
TXT Optical addressing (e.g., photodetection):

    Subject matter under subclass 76 in which the selective electrical control
    in response to detection of an applied external light source controls the
    selective energization of the electroluminescent display elements*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for addressing of CRT with storage means.


CLS 345/82
TXT Solid body light emitter (e.g., LED):

    Subject matter under subclass 55 in which the light-generating display
    elements* are composed of solid body material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39      and 44+, for segmented solid light-emitting display elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 552 for solid-state light source systems.


    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses for LED structure.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 815.45 for visual indicators
    with light-emitting diodes (LEDs) and subclass 825.82 for an LED matrix
    which is not used as a display.


CLS 345/83
TXT Color:

    Subject matter under subclass 82 in which the selective electrical control
    controls the color of the light generated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150,    for selectable color attributes relating to a visual image to be
    displayed by a generic display device.


CLS 345/84
TXT Light-controlling display elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 in which the matrix display elements*
    control the amount or distribution of light which is applied to the display
    elements*.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48+,    for segmented light-controlling display elements.


CLS 345/85
TXT Electroscopic (e.g., movable electrodes or electrostatic elements):


    Subject matter under subclass 84 in which each display element* includes a
    movable flap or shutter which is controlled electrostatically by the
    selective electrical control.


CLS 345/86
TXT Magneto-optic:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 in which each display element* includes a
    magneto-optic chip and a polarizer for controlling the passage of light.


CLS 345/87
TXT Liquid crystal display elements (LCD):

    Subject matter under subclass 84 in which the matrix light-controlled
    display elements* include liquid crystal display elements* or liquid with
    crystalline properties.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38      and 50, for segmented liquid crystal display elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    349,    Liquid Crystal Cells, Elements and Systems, appropriate subclasses
    for liquid crystal cell structure.


CLS 345/88
TXT Color:

    Subject matter under subclass 87 in which the display elements* control the
    passage of light which results in the display of one or more specific
    colors.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150,    for selectable color attributes relating to a visual image to be
    displayed by a generic display device.


CLS 345/89
TXT Gray scale capability (e.g., halftone):

    Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein the selective electrical control
    provides control of the brightness or light intensity level (i.e., shades)
    of the image data* to be displayed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147,    for intensity control for a generic display device.


CLS 345/90
TXT Control means at each display element:

    Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein the selective electrical control
    includes a switching means for controlling the state of each display
    element* individually.


CLS 345/91
TXT Diode or varistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein the switching means includes a
    diode or varistor connected to a display element* for controlling light
    passage.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses for diode structure.


CLS 345/92
TXT Thin film transistor (TFT):

    Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein the switching means includes a
    transistor made by using thin film techniques for controlling each display
    element*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g.,Transistors, Solid-State Diodes)
    appropriate subclasses for thin film transistor structure.

    349,    Liquid Crystal Cells, Elements, and Systems, subclasses 42+ for use
    of transistors in LCD structure.


CLS 345/93
TXT Redundancy (e.g., plural control elements or electrodes):

    Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein the switching means includes extra
    elements (e.g., electrodes) to reduce the chances of failure in the
    display.


CLS 345/94
TXT Waveform generation:

    Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein the selective electrical control
    includes a source for applying specific waveforms or particular voltages to
    the display elements*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for waveform generation for a segmented liquid crystal display.

    208+,   for waveform generator coupled to a generic display device.


CLS 345/95
TXT Three or more voltages:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 in which the waveforms include pulses with
    at least three different values in driving the display elements*.


CLS 345/96
TXT Field period polarity reversal:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 wherein the waveforms applied to the
    display elements* are alternately supplied in a positive and negative
    manner in a field period.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for field period polarity reversal for a segmented liquid crystal
    display.


    209,    for field period polarity reversal for a generic display device.


CLS 345/97
TXT Ferroelectric or smectic liquid crystal elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 wherein the display elements* are
    comprised of a ferroelectric or smectic liquid crystal material.


CLS 345/98
TXT Specific display element control means (e.g., latches, memories, logic):


    Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein the selective electrical control
    provides a specific means (e.g., latches, memories, or logic, etc.) for
    controlling the state of the display elements*.


CLS 345/99
TXT Particular timing circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 98 having specific data control means which
    provide specific clock or timing control signals to the display elements*.


CLS 345/100
TXT Particular row or column control (e.g., shift register):

    Subject matter under subclass 98 having a row or column scanner for
    selecting a particular display element*.

    (1)     Note.  The display element* control means may include shift
    registers for performing the selection of the display element*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclasses 64+ for shift registers, per se.


CLS 345/101
TXT Data signal compensation in response to temperature:

    Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein the selective electrical control
    includes means for generating compensation signals for the liquid crystal
    display elements* in response to temperature variations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    349,    Liquid Crystal Cells, Elements and Systems, subclass 72 for
    detection of liquid crystal temperature.


CLS 345/102
TXT Backlight control:

    Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein a source of light is located in
    the back of the liquid crystal display elements* for providing light to the
    liquid crystal display elements*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    349,    Liquid Crystal Cells, Elements and Systems, subclasses 61+ for
    particular illumination of liquid crystal material.


CLS 345/103
TXT Grouped electrodes (e.g., matrix partitioned into sections):

    Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein the liquid crystal display
    elements* are divided into plural groups which are driven separately so as
    to scan the entire display matrix at a faster speed.


CLS 345/104
TXT Input/output liquid crystal display panel:

    Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein the liquid crystal display
    elements* are used for both inputting and outputting display information.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173,    for touch panels used with a generic display device.


CLS 345/105
TXT Electrochromic elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 wherein the color of the display elements*
    is changed by application of an externally applied electric field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for segmented electrochromic display devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    265 for electrochromic light valve arrays without selective electrical
    control.


CLS 345/106
TXT Thermochromic elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 wherein the color of the display elements*
    is changed based on temperature variation of the display elements*.


CLS 345/107
TXT Particle suspension (e.g., electrophoretic):

    Subject matter under subclass 84 wherein charge pigment particles are
    suspended by an applied electromotive force in a fluid medium in order to
    change the color of the light-controlling display elements*.

    SEARCH CLASS;

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    296+ for  changing the position or orientation of suspended particles in an
    optical modulator.


CLS 345/108
TXT Plural mechanically movable display elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 in which the display elements* are flags,
    flaps, or other singular devices which may be moved or rotated selectively
    so as to be viewed or not viewed thereby altering the visual elements*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, appropriate subclasses for
    mechanical indicia carrying changeable displays.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclasses for mechanical
    indicators.


    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 815.4+ for visual indicators
    of some condition or state with nonselective electrical display control.


CLS 345/109
TXT Having shutters:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein the display elements* include a
    hinged cover or screen for selectively covering or uncovering the display
    elements*.


CLS 345/110
TXT With motor or rotor driver means:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein the display elements* are driven
    by a motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity: Motive Power Systems, approptiate subclasses for
    motors in general.


CLS 345/111
TXT With permanent magnet placed on movable display elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein the display elements* include a
    permanent magnet material which is influenced by application of a magnetic
    field so as to selectively move or rotate the display elements*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, appropriate subclasses for permanent magnet, per se.


CLS 345/112
TXT DISPLAY ATTRIBUTE CONTROLLER:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a desired display effect
    is achieved by a display controller*.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of the classifiable subject matter included herein
    are: (1) causing certain image data* to be displayed in a specified manner,
    (2) providing rotation of a previously generated image, (3) providing
    scrolling of received image data, (4) providing magnification (i.e., size
    change) of a previously generated image, (5) displaying the image data* at
    a specified resolution, and (6) providing brightness control and/or
    selectable colors for the image data* to be displayed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10+,    for display control relating specifically to a CRT.

    30+,    for display control relating to a specific display device, such as
    a gas discharge display panel, an electroluminescent display panel, a
    light-emitting diode display array or a liquid crystal panel.

    418+,   for the combination of data processing (data creation or
    manipulation of graphic objects or text performed by a computer or
    processor) and associated display.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, appropriate subclasses for systems and subsystems for
    display of television (real time scanned produced) signals.

    382,    Image Analysis, appropriate subclasses for previously scanned image
    data and for image recognition, processing, and nominal display relating to
    such recognition.


CLS 345/113
TXT Particular overlay (e.g., superimposing feature):

    Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein the selective electrical control
    includes a display in which first image data* is conveyed in front of
    second image data*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4+,     for stacked superimposed display devices.

    435+,   for object merge/overlay involving significant data processing.


CLS 345/114
TXT Foreground and background:

    Subject matter under subclass 113 wherein the first image data* is
    foreground information and the second image data* is background
    information.


CLS 345/115
TXT Simultaneous diverse images:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein a plurality of distinct image
    data* are displayed at the same time on a display device*.

    (1)     Note.  Displays with distinct and predefined display regions are
    included here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302,    for synchronization of diverse media.


CLS 345/116
TXT Character and graphical display:

    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein the plurality of distinct image
    data* includes alphanumeric* and non-alphanumeric* data to be displayed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for graphic and alphanumeric CRT display.


CLS 345/117
TXT Specified image of abnormal condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein the display elements* convey
    image data* which indicate an unusual status (e.g., an alarm indication via
    an icon or a change in color based on an unusual condition, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    347,    for pop-up control for message or dialog boxes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 901+ for external condition
    vehicle-mounted indicators or alarms; subclasses 945+ for aircraft alarm or
    indicating systems; subclasses 984+ for watercraft alarm or indicating
    systems; subclasses 425.5+ for land vehicle alarms or indicators;
    subclasses 500+ for condition responsive indicating systems with alarms;
    subclass 825.32 for alarms related to improper access; subclasses 825.36+
    for selective systems having an alarm; and subclasses 825.45+ for alarms
    relating to a paging system.

    368,    Horology: Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 12+ for
    displays of time (i.e., watches) having an external alarm.


CLS 345/118
TXT Having image confined to designated region (e.g., image clipping):


    Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein the image data* is contained
    within a designated area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    434,    for object clipping involving significant data processing.


CLS 345/121
TXT Image movement or position control (e.g., panning):

    Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein the selective electrical control
    makes the displayed image move.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    438,    for object translation involving significant data processing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    382,    Image Analysis, subclass 295 for image translation or positioning
    with nominal display control.


CLS 345/123
TXT Scrolling:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the desired image movement
    includes linear incremental movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    341,    for window scrolled to needed portion.


CLS 345/124
TXT Alphanumeric:

    Subject matter under subclass 123 wherein the incremental movement includes
    displacement of a text message to be displayed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for alphanumeric CRT display.


CLS 345/125
TXT Graphical:

    Subject matter under subclass 123 wherein the incremental movement includes
    displacement of a graphical object to be displayed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for graphical CRT display.


CLS 345/126
TXT Rotation:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the image movement is an angular
    displacement of the image data*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    437,    for object rotation involving significant data processing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 815.86+ for rotary visual
    indicator.


    382,    Image Analysis, subclasses 296+ for image rotation undertaken to
    correct geometric distortion or misregistration.


CLS 345/127
TXT Image size control:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein the selective electrical control
    varies the size of the displayed image.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS :

    439,    for object scaling involving significant data processing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    382,    Image Analysis, subclass 298 for changing the size of an image
    undertaken to correct geometric distortion or misregistration.


CLS 345/128
TXT Alphanumeric:

    Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein the display elements* convey a
    character message of different size.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for alphanumeric CRT display.


CLS 345/129
TXT Reduction:

    Subject matter under subclass 128 includes means for compressing the size
    of the displayed character message.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    439,    for changing the size of a graphical object.


CLS 345/130
TXT Enlargement:

    Subject matter under subclass 128 includes means for expanding the size of
    the displayed character message.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    439,    for changing the size of a graphical object.


CLS 345/131
TXT Graphical:

    Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein the display elements* convey
    graphical entities of different size.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for graphical CRT display.


CLS 345/132
TXT Defined resolution (e.g., EGA, VGA):

    Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein the selective electrical control
    provides the image data* for a designated number of display elements*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    428,    for adjustment of level of detail of image to be generated.


CLS 345/133
TXT Graphic display:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein the display elements* convey
    graphical entities (e.g., geometric shapes, drawings, graphs of analog
    curves, bar graphs, or histograms).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for graphical CRT display.


CLS 345/134
TXT Waveform display (e.g., oscilloscope type):

    Subject matter under subclass 133 wherein the display elements* convey
    waveforms or graphs of analog curves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    440,    for generating graph.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclass 121 for measuring and
    testing electricity using a CRT.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, particularly appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous
    discriminating or selecting circuits.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 855 for
    specialized function generation including a CRT.


CLS 345/135
TXT Vector display:

    Subject matter under subclass 133 wherein the display elements* convey a
    straight line from an input data which may represent terminal points or a
    point with magnitude and direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16+,    for stroke or vector data responsive deflection control for a CRT.


    443,    for line generating involving significant data processing.


CLS 345/136
TXT With image smoothing control (e.g., anti-aliasing):

    Subject matter under subclass 133 wherein the selective electrical control
    removes stair-step effects or jagged edges from the displayed graphical
    entities.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    382,    Image Analysis, subclass 269 for image enhancement with nominal
    display control.


CLS 345/137
TXT Convolving technique:

    Subject matter under subclass 136 wherein a displayed output value is
    derived by obtaining an average from a number of input values, or wherein a
    displayed output value is based on convolving a corresponding input value
    and neighboring input values, so that the output values provide a display
    wherein stair-step effects or jagged edges are removed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    for similar averaging technique.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses
    728.01+ and 819+ for the use of similar convolution techniques for
    calculation in digital or analog computers.


CLS 345/138
TXT Averaging technique:

    Subject matter under subclass 133 wherein a displayed output value is
    derived by obtaining an average from a number of input values, or wherein a
    displayed output value is based on a corresponding input value and
    neighboring input values.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137,    for similar averaging technique.

    428,    for adjusting level of detail involving significant data
    processing.


CLS 345/139
TXT Perspective:

    Subject matter under subclass 133 wherein the selective electrical control
    modifies the image data* to produce either a perspective or a shadow effect
    (e.g., providing a 3D effect on a two-dimensional display).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    419,    for three-dimensional presentation involving significant data
    processing.


CLS 345/140
TXT Bar graph:

    Subject matter under subclass 133 wherein the display elements* convey a
    variable length-line arrangement to show the condition of a given
    parameter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35+,    for segmented bar graph displays.

    440,    for generating graph involving segment data processing.


CLS 345/141
TXT Character display:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein the display elements* convey
    numeric symbols or symbols of a certain language.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25+,    for alphanumeric CRT display.

    194,    for character generator used with computer graphics processing
    systems.

    467+    for generating or altering character pattern.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 815.53+ for lighted
    alphanumeric or character visual indicator.


CLS 345/142
TXT Calligraphic:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the symbols of a certain language
    include pictograms; e.g., Katakana, Chinese, Korean, hieroglyphics.


CLS 345/144
TXT Character border:

    Subject matter under subclass 467 wherein the character data element is
    generated based on an outline or an edge of a character to be displayed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUCLASS:

    470,    for generating character fill data from outline data involving
    significant data processing.


CLS 345/145
TXT CURSOR MANIPULATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the selective electrical
    control provides a control of a movable operator-controlled display entity
    or cursor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157+,   for cursor mark position control devices.


CLS 345/146
TXT Menu selection:

    Subject matter under subclass 145 wherein the cursor is used to select from
    a number of displayed items.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    352+,   for operator interface having menus involving significant data
    processing.


CLS 345/147
TXT Intensity control (e.g., gray scale):

    Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein the selective electrical control
    provides control of the brightness or light intensity level of the image
    data* to be displayed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12      and 20, for CRT data responsive intensity control.

    63,     for matrix fluid light-emitter intensity control.

    77,     for matrix electroluminescent display with intensity control.

    89,     for matrix liquid crystal display with gray scale capability.

    426,    for lighting or shading effects on a 3-D graphic object.

    432,    for adjusting the intensity level of the surface of a graphical
    object.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 815.55+ for intensity
    control for a visual indicator.


CLS 345/148
TXT Temporal processing (e.g., pulse width variation over time):

    Subject matter under subclass 147 wherein the brightness or light intensity
    level is controlled by using different time periods in conveying the image
    data*.


CLS 345/149
TXT Spatial processing (e.g., patterns or subpixel configurations):

    Subject matter under subclass 147 wherein the brightness or light intensity
    level is controlled by using different areas in conveying the image data*.


CLS 345/150
TXT Selectable color attributes:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein the display elements* are capable
    of conveying two or more colors or wherein the image data* includes
    information pertaining to two or more colors to be displayed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for CRT color display.

    72,     for matrix fluid light-emitter color display.

    83,     for matrix solid body light-emitter color display.

    88,     for matrix liquid crystal color display.

    431,    for changing or calculating the color of a graphical object.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 815.65+ for multiple colors
    for a visual indicator.


CLS 345/151
TXT Including optical means:

    Subject matter under subclass 150 wherein color is visualized by means of
    an external optical element (e.g., polarizers or lens) although produced by
    selective operation of the display, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, appropriate
    subclasses for the use of different optical devices.


CLS 345/152
TXT Designated subpixel arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 150 wherein the colors associated with the
    display elements* are arranged in a designated manner.


CLS 345/153
TXT Color bit data modification or conversion:

    Subject matter under subclass 150 wherein the selective electrical control
    transforms or modifies the image data* including color information to be
    displayed.


CLS 345/154
TXT Format change (e.g., NTSC to RGB, RGB to composite, or XYZ to RGB):


    Subject matter under subclass 153 wherein the transformation of the color
    information includes a conversion from one form to another in order to
    provide a desired output signal.


CLS 345/155
TXT Change in number of bits for a designated color (e.g., 4 bits to 8 bits, 8
    bits to 4 bits):

    Subject matter under subclass 153 wherein the transformation of the color
    information includes a conversion in the quantity of bits in describing a
    certain color.


CLS 345/156
TXT DISPLAY PERIPHERAL INTERFACE INPUT DEVICE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the selective electrical
    control includes means which permits an operator to selectively control a
    display device*.

    (1)     Note.  The peripheral input devices are used for interfacing with a
    display device* for controlling the display device* in some manner, such as
    positioning a cursor or other indicia of the point of specific control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 821 through
    894 for transferring data from one or more peripherals to one or more
    computers for the latter to process, store, or further transfer or for
    transferring data from the computers to the peripherals.


CLS 345/157
TXT Cursor mark position control device:

    Subject matter under subclass 156 wherein the peripheral input device
    positions a marker on the screen of the display device*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145+,   for cursor manipulation.


CLS 345/158
TXT Including orientation sensor (e.g., infrared, ultrasonic, remotely
    controlled):

    Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the peripheral input device is
    provided with a sensing means for determining the position of the cursor
    mark.


CLS 345/159
TXT Having variable cursor speed:

    Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the cursor mark can be moved at
    different rates.


CLS 345/160
TXT Cursor key:

    Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein keys are used for controlling the
    position of the cursor mark.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145+,   for cursor manipulation.


CLS 345/161
TXT Joystick:

    Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein a control handle pivoted for
    motion in all directions controls the position of the cursor mark.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 471+ for mechanical
    structure directed to a joystick control not relating to a display.

    200,    Electricity: Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 5+ for
    electrical multiple switch control such as a joystick, per se.

    273,    Amusement Devices: Games, subclasses 148+ for joystick control
    specific to a video game.


CLS 345/162
TXT Positional storage means:

    Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the cursor mark position control
    device is provided with a storage device for storing X and Y positional
    information.


CLS 345/163
TXT Mouse:

    Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the cursor mark position device
    is movable on a fixed surface (e.g., desk top) for controlling the position
    of cursor mark.


CLS 345/164
TXT Rotatable ball detector:

    Subject matter under subclass 163 wherein the mouse includes a rotatable
    ball for detecting movement of the mouse.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    for using a trackball for moving the cursor position.


CLS 345/165
TXT Photosensor encoder:

    Subject matter under subclass 164 wherein photosensors are used for
    encoding the rotation of the rotatable ball.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, appropriate subclasses for photosensor encoder, per
    se.


CLS 345/166
TXT Optical detector:

    Subject matter under subclass 163 wherein the mouse includes photosensors
    for detecting movement of the mouse.


CLS 345/167
TXT Trackball:

    Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the cursor mark position control
    device is a rotatable ball rotated by the operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164,    for a rotatable ball detector in a mouse.


CLS 345/168
TXT Including keyboard:

    Subject matter under subclass 156 wherein the operator uses plural keys for
    selectively inputting information data to control the display device*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160,    for cursor control by keyboard.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 407.1+ for keyboard based in
    tactual indicator.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 22+ for bodily
    actuated code generation relating to a keyboard and not a display.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 709.12
    for electric digital calculating computers with specialized input including
    keyboard data entry.


CLS 345/169
TXT Portable (i.e., handheld, calculator, remote controller):

    Subject matter under subclass 168 wherein the keyboard is compact and can
    be held within the palm of an user.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 700+
    for handheld calculators with keyboard.


CLS 345/170
TXT Light source associated with each key:

    Subject matter under subclass 168 wherein each key of the keyboard is
    associated with a light-emitting element (e.g., LED, lamp, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclass 31 for photoelectric
    actuation.


CLS 345/171
TXT Having foreign language capability (e.g., Japanese, Chinese):

    Subject matter under subclass 168 wherein the keyboard is capable of
    inputting non-English alphabets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    704,    Data Processing:  Speech Signal Processing, Linguistics, Language
    Translation, and Audio Compression/Decompression, subclasses 1+ for foreign
    language processing or translation.


CLS 345/172
TXT Having programmable function key:

    Subject matter under subclass 168 wherein the keyboard includes a specific
    key for performing specific functions assigned by a program.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 709.14
    for a user definable key in a calculator.


CLS 345/173
TXT Touch panel:

    Subject matter under subclass 156 wherein the peripheral input device
    includes a planar touch sensor which determines the position of a touch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 18+ for structure directed to an input
    digitizing writing tablet and not to a display.

    200,    Electricity: Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 512+ for
    membrane-type solid contact relating to a switch of a touchpad.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 407.1+ for tactual
    indicator.


CLS 345/174
TXT Including impedance detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 173 wherein the touch panel includes
    impedance sensors (e.g., resistance, capacitance, inductance, etc.) for
    determining the position of the touch.


CLS 345/175
TXT Including optical detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 173 wherein the touch panel utilizes optical
    sensors (e.g., photodiodes, phototransistors) for determining the position
    of the touch.


CLS 345/176
TXT Transparent substrate having light entrapment capability (i.e., waveguide):


    Subject matter under subclass 173 wherein the touch panel includes a
    transparent material mounted on the display device* for entrapping the
    light within the substrate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    385,    Optical Waveguides, appropriate subclasses for optical waveguides
    in general.


CLS 345/177
TXT Including surface acoustic detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 173 wherein the touch panel includes surface
    acoustical transducers for determining the position of a touch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    367,    Communications, Electrical: Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    appropriate subclasses for acoustical transducers in general.


CLS 345/178
TXT With alignment or calibration capability (i.e., parallax problem):


    Subject matter under subclass 173 wherein the input device compensates for
    any misalignment of a touch location and its corresponding energized
    display element*.


CLS 345/179
TXT Stylus:

    Subject matter under subclass 156 wherein the operator uses a handheld
    pointer to input positional information data to the display device*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180,    for a light pen for a CRT.


CLS 345/180
TXT Light pen for CRT display:

    Subject matter under subclass 156 wherein the operator uses a handheld
    light pen to input positional information data to the cathode-ray tube
    display device*.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179,    for using stylus to input to a display device.


CLS 345/181
TXT CRT having tracking capability:

    Subject matter under subclass 180 wherein the electron beam of the CRT
    traces the movement of the light pen on a surface of the CRT.


CLS 345/182
TXT Light pen for fluid matrix display panel:

    Subject matter under subclass 156 wherein the operator uses a handheld
    light pen to input positional information data to a fluid matrix display
    panel.


CLS 345/183
TXT Light pen for controlling plural light-emitting display elements (e.g.,
    LEDs, lamps):

    Subject matter under subclass 156 wherein the operator uses a handheld
    light pen to control the on or off state of the light-emitting display
    elements* (e.g., LED or lamp, etc.) on the display device*.


CLS 345/184
TXT Mechanical control (e.g., rotatable knob, slider):

    Subject matter under subclass 156 wherein the operator uses a rotatable
    knob or interconnected mechanical arms to input data or to control the
    position of a cursor.


CLS 345/186
TXT Color memory:

    Subject matter under subclass 507 wherein the store means stores color
    image data*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199,    for color look-up-table.


CLS 345/188
TXT Addressing with priority:

    Subject matter under subclass 510 including means for assigning storage
    locations to the multiple planes based on priority access.


CLS 345/191
TXT Mask data operation:

    Subject matter under subclass 509 wherein the store means stores
    information which covers previously stored information.


CLS 345/192
TXT Character memory:

    Subject matter under subclass 507 wherein the store means retains codes
    which represent an alphanumeric* symbol.


CLS 345/193
TXT Addressing:

    Subject matter under 192 includes means for assigning storage location to
    the codes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems - Memory,
    subclasses 1-5 for addressing combined with specific memory configuration
    (e.g., extended, expanded, dynamic, etc.) and subclasses 200+ for
    generalized address forming in a digital data processing system.


CLS 345/194
TXT Character generator:

    Subject matter under subclass 192 wherein the character memory includes a
    store for retaining a character pattern.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for character generator used with a CRT.

    141,    for character display on a generic display device.

    467+    for generating or altering a character pattern.


CLS 345/195
TXT Multiple fonts:

    Subject matter under subclass 194 wherein the character memory includes a
    plurality of the character generators or provides for a plurality of
    character pattern styles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 805 for
    document processing font selection.


CLS 345/196
TXT Row buffer (e.g., line memory):

    Subject matter under subclass 507 wherein the store means includes a
    register for retaining a line of the image data*.


CLS 345/197
TXT Shift register:

    Subject matter under subclass 513 in which the store means retains a number
    of bits in a sequential manner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclasses 64+ for shift registers, per se.


CLS 345/198
TXT With routing logic:

    Subject matter under subclass 197 including a logic means cooperating with
    the shift register for establishing read or write operation.


CLS 345/199
TXT Color look-up-table (e.g., palette):

    Subject matter under subclass 507 wherein the store means includes a
    palette for retaining color data.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for CRT color display.

    72,     for matrix fluid light-emitter color display.

    83,     for matrix solid body light-emitter color display.

    88,     for matrix liquid crystal color display.

    150+,   for selectable color attributes relating to a visual image to be
    displayed by a generic display device.

    186,    for display color memory.

    431,    for graphical color data processing.


CLS 345/202
TXT Data compression or compaction:

    Subject matter under subclass 507 wherein the quantity of the image data*
    is reduced prior to storage in the store means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    382,    Image Analysis, subclasses 232+ for image data compression not
    related to a display storage device.


CLS 345/203
TXT Significant data assignment in storage device:

    Subject matter under subclass 507 wherein the image data* is stored in the
    store means in accordance with a certain arrangement and format.


CLS 345/204
TXT DISPLAY DRIVING CONTROL CIRCUITRY:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the selective electrical
    control is provided by a collection of one or more specified electrical
    control devices.


CLS 345/205
TXT Physically integral with display elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 204 in which the control devices and the
    display elements* share some structural element, (e.g., to share an
    electrode of a capacitor in a control device with an electrode of a display
    element*).


CLS 345/206
TXT Having common base or substrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 205 wherein the structural element is a base
    or substrate for both the control devices and the display elements*.


CLS 345/207
TXT Light detection means (e.g., with photodetector):

    Subject matter under subclass 204 wherein the control devices include an
    element which senses light for driving the display elements*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166,    for optical detector for detecting movement of a mouse.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for light detection using photocell
    circuitry and subclass 553 for light source array or matrix.


CLS 345/208
TXT Waveform generator coupled to display elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 204 in which the control devices include a
    source or generator of specific waveforms which is responsive to input data
    to selectively apply the waveforms to the display elements*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for waveform generation for a segmented liquid crystal display.

    94+,    for waveform generation for a matrix liquid crystal display.


CLS 345/209
TXT Field period polarity reversal:

    Subject matter under subclass 208 in which the waveforms applied to the
    display elements* are alternatively supplied in a positive and negative
    manner.


CLS 345/210
TXT Having three or more voltage levels:

    Subject matter under subclass 208 in which the waveform includes pulses
    with at least three different voltage values in driving the display
    elements*.


CLS 345/211
TXT Display power source:

    Subject matter under subclass 204 wherein the display elements* have a
    specified electrical power source and the power source includes means for
    controlling power supplied relative to a display element* characteristic;
    e.g., varied current for varied size of element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 169.1+ for
    combination of display and an energizing source not limited to selective
    electrical control of the resultant image.

    323,    Electricity: Power Supply or Regulation Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for specifics of a power supply.

    349,    Liquid Crystal Cells, Elements and Systems, subclasses 19+ for a
    particular energizing source for a liquid crystal cell structure.

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    245+ for electro-optic displays and an energizing source not limited to
    selective electrical control of the resultant image; subclasses 265+ for
    electrochromic displays and an energizing source not limited to selective
    electrical control of the resultant image.


CLS 345/212
TXT Regulating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 211 wherein the controlling means limits the
    power supplied to the display elements* in some manner (e.g., establishing
    a maximum voltage to be applied to the display elements* or establishing a
    certain time period for the driving voltage to be applied).


CLS 345/213
TXT Synchronizing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 211 wherein the power source includes a clock
    means for providing timing signals to the display elements* to display the
    image data* at a certain time.


CLS 345/214
TXT Controlling the condition of display elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 204 includes means to maintain the
    operational properties of the display elements*(e.g., to maintain the
    display elements* within a certain operational range).


CLS 345/215
TXT Including priming means:

    Subject matter under subclass 214 including means for controlling the
    readiness of the display elements* to be activated (e.g., by initially
    charging the display elements*).


CLS 345/302
TXT Synchronization of diverse media:

    Subject matter under subclass 418 wherein a presentation includes elements
    having more than one data type where the elements are presented in a
    predetermined order and timing relationship.

    (1)     Note.  Authoring, playing, or recording a presentation which
    includes synchronization of different media is classified herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    for display attribute controllers for simultaneous diverse images.


CLS 345/326
TXT OPERATOR INTERFACE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a user's interaction with
    a computer system is used to control the presentation of display data. Such
    interaction is interpreted and used by a data processor or computer
    architecture wherein system level elements of computation or data
    processing techniques are used prior to use with or in a specific display
    system.

    (1)     Note.  Significantly claimed structure external to the user
    interface methods or apparatuses, claimed in combination with subject
    matter under this operator interface subclass, which displays or produces
    an image or sensory message related to such external structure or its
    function, is classified in the class appropriate to the external structure;
    however, nominally claimed structure external to this subclass, claimed in
    combination with subject matter under this subclass definition (i.e.,
    creation or manipulation of icons, menus, windows, and user interactive
    functions), is classified in these subclasses unless provided for in the
    appropriate external subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Processing of interactive data for presentation with at most
    a nominal recitation of the input device (i.e., where the user's input is
    used to control the presentation of display data) is classified herein.

    (3)     Note.  Windowing techniques which can include interactive processes
    are classified herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for claims which recite specific display systems which include
    display memory organization and structure for storing an image and
    manipulating image data between the display memory and the display system.

    156+,   for details of a user input interface device with a specific
    display system, per se, both physical (e.g., mouse, joystick, keyboard,
    light pen, touch screen) and logical (e.g., cursor-pick, select,-choice).

    418+,   for a specific hardware for performing graphical data processing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    705,    Data Processing-Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/Price Determination, subclasses 1+ for use of operator interface in
    electronic financial or business management systems, particularly
    subclasses 26+ for electronic shopping systems utilizing operator interface.


CLS 345/327
TXT Interaction in a television environment:

    Subject matter under 326 wherein the user is given control over operations
    involving broadcast, real-time, or live-action video signals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, appropriate subclasses for details of video signal
    processing external to the operator interface.


CLS 345/328
TXT For video segment editing or sequencing:

    Subject matter under 327 wherein the operations include arranging portions
    of acquired video material into a different order than that in which it was
    originally obtained.


CLS 345/329
TXT For plural users or sites:

    Subject matter under 326 wherein concurrently established related or
    collaborative interfaces are provided to multiple displays.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 200.01+ for
    details of the transfer of data among a plurality of computers or digital
    data processing systems.


CLS 345/330
TXT Computer conferencing:

    Subject matter under 329 wherein data from participants at the display
    sites is distributed to other participants at other collaborative sites.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 200.04 for
    details of data transfer to achieve computer conferencing.


CLS 345/331
TXT Computer supported cooperative work:

    Subject matter under 329 wherein users at the multiple displays join in
    completing a given task as a group.


CLS 345/332
TXT Group window:

    Subject matter under 331 wherein a display representing the group's work
    appears at the sites in a constrained screen region.


CLS 345/333
TXT Interface customization or edition:

    Subject matter under 326 wherein an aspect of the operator interface is
    modified or established.


CLS 345/334
TXT Graphical appearance:

    Subject matter under 333 wherein a visual attribute of an element in the
    operator interface is modified.


CLS 345/335
TXT Link between object and task or function (e.g., client/server):

    Subject matter under 333 wherein the aspect is a relationship between
    interface feature and routine performed.


CLS 345/336
TXT Having on-line help:

    Subject matter under 326 wherein a user can access assistance or
    information regarding an application or operation interactively.


CLS 345/337
TXT Adaptive to user skill level:

    Subject matter under 336 wherein the assistance or information provided is
    adjusted according to a determined user proficiency.


CLS 345/338
TXT Context sensitive:

    Subject matter under 336 wherein the assistance or information provided is
    determined by current conditions or a desired operation.


CLS 345/339
TXT On-screen workspace or object:

    Subject matter under 326 providing a specific element in an interface with
    which a user can interact.


CLS 345/340
TXT Window:

    Subject matter under 339 wherein all interactions are constrained to one or
    more portions or regions of the display, which may display all or part of
    their related information.


CLS 345/341
TXT Window scrolled to needed portion:

    Subject matter under 340 wherein, when a window displays only part of its
    related information, the user can selectively control which portion is
    displayed.


CLS 345/342
TXT Layout modification (e.g., move or resize):

    Subject matter under 340 wherein the placement, location, or size of
    windows relative to the display may be modified.


CLS 345/343
TXT Window differentiation:

    Subject matter under 340 wherein windows have attributes which distinguish
    them from other windows.


CLS 345/344
TXT Priority:

    Subject matter under 343 wherein the attribute is priority, which is used
    to determine which window of a plurality is in the foreground when windows
    overlap.


CLS 345/345
TXT Viewing lower priority window:

    Subject matter under 344 wherein the priority attributes are changed when
    the user needs to operate within a lower priority window.


CLS 345/346
TXT Interwindow link or communication:

    Subject matter under 340 wherein windows have established relationships to
    other windows, allowing communication between windows, grouping of related
    windows into sets, or allowing operations to be applied in common to groups
    of windows.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 680+ for
    details of inter-program communication used with interrelated windows
    containing respective program interfaces.


CLS 345/347
TXT Pop-up control (e.g., message or dialog box):

    Subject matter under 339 wherein an interface element not previously
    displayed appears on the screen in response to user interaction or when
    user interaction is required.


CLS 345/348
TXT Icon:

    Subject matter under 339 wherein an interface element is a graphical
    representation of a function or system resource which is accessed when the
    graphical representation is selected by user interaction.


CLS 345/349
TXT Metaphoric icon object:

    Subject matter under 348 wherein an icon graphically suggests a real-world
    item which performs a function analogous to a function invoked by selection
    of the icon.


CLS 345/350
TXT Indexed book or notebook:

    Subject matter under 349 wherein the metaphoric object suggests a
    multi-page text- or document-based item, and wherein user interaction with
    an associated sub-element causes a corresponding page to be displayed or
    selected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    473,    for details of the animation procedure used to indicate progression
    to various book pages.


CLS 345/351
TXT Office layout (e.g., filing cabinet, desk):

    Subject matter under 349 wherein the metaphoric object or objects suggest a
    business environment, enabling access to various items commonly found in a
    real-world workspace.


CLS 345/352
TXT Menu:

    Subject matter under 339 wherein the interface element is a list of items
    from which the user may choose.


CLS 345/353
TXT Sub-menu structure:

    Subject matter under 352 wherein the user may traverse a number of related
    and linked menu lists, based upon successive choices.


CLS 345/354
TXT Using button array:

    Subject matter under 352 wherein the menu is composed of an arrangement of
    symbolic graphical selection indicia (e.g., pick region).


CLS 345/355
TXT Interface represented by 3D space:

    Subject matter under 339 wherein the user appears to move within a 3D space
    of interface elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    419+,   for details of particular three-dimensional graphics manipulation,
    rendering, or presentation techniques used to generate the interface.


CLS 345/356
TXT Hierarchy or network structure:

    Subject matter under 339 wherein interface elements are organized into a
    tree structure type or a linked node grouping.


CLS 345/357
TXT Navigation within structure:

    Subject matter under 356 wherein the user can navigate through the
    interface by following the links from one node to another.


CLS 345/358
TXT Gesture-based:

    Subject matter under 326 wherein a path or shape described by user input is
    indicative of a desired operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156+,   for the details of user input devices used to accomplish such
    input.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    382,    Image Analysis, appropriate subclasses for details of the detection
    of the identity of a desired operation on the basis of an image defined by
    the path or shape.


CLS 345/418
TXT COMPUTER GRAPHICS PROCESSING:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein data is displayed to a
    user for visual viewing (e.g., control of the form of the data on a CRT,
    monitor, screen, display device, or any generic visual output device).

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass may include means or steps
    for interaction between a user and the display.

    (2)     Note.  Processing of interactive data for presentation with at most
    a nominal recitation of the input device (i.e., where the user's input is
    used to control the presentation of display data) is classified herein.

    (3)     Note.  Means or steps for creating or manipulating graphics objects
    or text is classified herein or a further subclass thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1       through 111, for details of specific display systems. See note (3)
    above.

    112     through 144, for display attribute control. See note (3) above.

    156+,   for user input interface with a specific display system (e.g.,
    mouse, light pen, touch tablet). See note (2) above.


CLS 345/419
TXT Three-dimension:

    Subject matter under subclass 418 wherein objects are pictured to show them
    as they appear to the eye with reference to relative distance or depth from
    an imaginary viewpoint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139,    for the selective control to modify the image data to produce
    either a perspective or a shadow effect.


CLS 345/420
TXT Solid modelling:

    Subject matter under subclass 419 wherein complex objects are represented
    as a combination of simpler shapes or primitives and the relationships
    between them.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    423,    for the process of dividing a surface or 3D graphic object into
    smaller surfaces.


CLS 345/421
TXT Hidden line/surface determining:

    Subject matter under subclass 419 wherein it is determined whether a
    portion of an object is hidden or covered by another object and, if so, not
    displaying (removing) that portion of the object which is hidden.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    435,    for merging or overlapping graphic objects.


CLS 345/422
TXT Z buffer (depth buffer):

    Subject matter under subclass 421 wherein a memory having locations
    corresponding to display locations stores distance information* which is
    used to determine which objects or portions of objects are hidden.


CLS 345/423
TXT Tessellation:

    Subject matter under subclass 419 which includes the process of dividing a
    surface or 3D graphic object into smaller surfaces or 3D graphic objects.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    420,    for solid modeling of complex objects.


CLS 345/424
TXT Voxel:

    Subject matter under subclass 419 wherein a volume element represents a
    value at a point in three-dimensional space (similar to a pixel in
    two-dimensional space).


CLS 345/425
TXT Mapping image onto surface of 3D object:

    Subject matter under subclass 419 wherein a 2D image is transformed to
    appear as if on a surface of a 3D object.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    382,    Image Analysis, subclass 285 for similar mapping of 2-D image onto
    a 3-D surface.


CLS 345/426
TXT Lighting/shading:

    Subject matter under subclass 419 which determines intensity or color on a
    surface of the object taking into consideration light sources, surface
    characteristics and object orientation.


CLS 345/427
TXT Space transformation:

    Subject matter under subclass 419 wherein a 3D coordinate data set
    representing a 3D model is manipulated to create a 2D coordinate data set
    representing a proper perspective view of an object from an imaginary
    viewpoint.


CLS 345/428
TXT Adjusting level of detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 418 wherein a change is made in the
    resolution of a graphic object.

    (1)     Note.  In three-dimensional systems resolution is used to account
    for distance or atmospheric conditions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132,    for systems which convert the resolution of a display screen from
    one standard to another (e.g., VGA, EGA).


CLS 345/429
TXT Surface detail/characteristic:

    Subject matter under subclass 418 wherein the information is processed
    which relates to the attributes of an object or portion of an image.


CLS 345/430
TXT Texture:

    Subject matter under subclass 429 wherein the attributes include
    distribution of color and intensity on a surface to give an appearance of
    texture, such as smooth, rough, shiny, dull.


CLS 345/431
TXT Color:

    Subject matter under subclass 429 wherein the attribute includes color.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150,    for displaying selectable color attributes.


CLS 345/432
TXT Intensity:

    Subject matter under subclass 429 wherein the attribute is brightness.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147,    for selectively controlling the light intensity level of image data
    to be displayed.


CLS 345/433
TXT Object processing:

    Subject matter under subclass 418 wherein the data representing a graphic
    object is manipulated.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for generating and processing data
    representing a graphic object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    441,    for generating graphic objects without manipulation.


CLS 345/434
TXT Clipping:

    Subject matter under subclass 433 wherein the graphic object is restricted
    to a particular region in the presentation space, with those portions not
    in the space being removed.


CLS 345/435
TXT Merge/overlay:

    Subject matter under subclass 433 including two or more overlapping graphic
    objects.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    421,    for determining whether a portion of an object is hiden or covered
    by another object.


CLS 345/436
TXT Affine:

    Subject matter under subclass 433 wherein the graphic object is at least
    rotated (pivoted about its centerpoint) and translated, rotated and scaled,
    or translated and scaled.

    (1)     Note.  The graphic object can also be rotated, scaled, and
    translated.


CLS 345/437
TXT Rotation:

    Subject matter under subclass 433 wherein the graphic object is pivoted
    about its centerpoint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126,    for the selective rotation of image data.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    382,    Image Analysis, subclasses 296+ for similar processes for rotating
    an image.


CLS 345/438
TXT Translation:

    Subject matter under subclass 433 wherein the graphic object is moved to
    another position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    382,    Image Analysis, subclasses 295 for similar processes for
    positioning or translating an image.


CLS 345/439
TXT Scaling:

    Subject matter under subclass 433 wherein the size of the graphic object is
    changed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for controlling the size of an image.

    472,    for scaling the size of a stored font.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    382,    Image Analysis, for similar processes for changing the size of an
    image.


CLS 345/440
TXT Graph generating:

    Subject matter under subclass 418 wherein a set of display points define a
    graph showing a relationship between two or more variables.


CLS 345/441
TXT Shape generating:

    Subject matter under subclass 418 wherein a set of display points define a
    two-dimensional representation of a graphic object.


CLS 345/442
TXT Curve:

    Subject matter under subclass 441 wherein the graphic object defined is a
    curved line, e.g., arc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    443,    for defining the graphical object as a straight line.


CLS 345/443
TXT Straight line:

    Subject matter under subclass 441 wherein the graphic object defined is a
    straight line, e.g., using Bresenham's algorithm.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    442,    for defining the graphical object as a curve line.


CLS 345/467
TXT Font generating:

    Subject matter under subclass 418 wherein a character data element is
    generated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25      through 26, for data responsive CRT display control for
    alphanumeric display.

    141     through 142, for display attribute controllers for character
    display.

    192     through 195, for character memory display storage device.


CLS 345/468
TXT Character geometry processing:

    Subject matter under subclass 467 wherein the character data element is
    generated based on a geometric attribute.


CLS 345/469
TXT Character generation using control points or hints:

    Subject matter under subclass 468 wherein the character data element is
    generated based on intersecting and nonintersecting control points or
    additional processing instructions that are coded to the font contours.


CLS 345/470
TXT Generating character fill data from outline data:

    Subject matter under subclass 467 wherein formation of display data within
    the confines of outer and inner perimeters of textual characters is
    performed.


CLS 345/471
TXT Alteration of stored font:

    Subject matter under subclass 467 wherein the existing font parameter is
    modified to create a different appearance.


CLS 345/472
TXT Scaling:

    Subject matter under subclass 471 wherein a size of displayed font is
    modified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    439,    for changing the size of a graphical object.


CLS 345/473
TXT Animation:

    Subject matter under subclass 418 wherein a sequence of individual display
    images are generated for presentation as a sequence to simulate motion
    (e.g., cartoons).


CLS 345/474
TXT Motion planning or control:

    Subject matter under subclass 473 wherein locations traversed by animation
    are planned or controlled, particularly where a path is to be maintained or
    objects on a path are to be avoided.


CLS 345/475
TXT Temporal interpolation or processing:

    Subject matter under subclass 473 wherein movement using a series of
    computed intermediate positioned displays is displayed.


CLS 345/501
TXT COMPUTER GRAPHIC PROCESSING SYSTEM:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising apparatus or method
    for processing or manipulating data for presentation by a computer prior to
    use with or in a specific display system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27      through 28 and 507+, for subject matter including display memory
    organization and structure for storing an image and manipulating image data
    between the display memory and the display system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, appropriate subclasses for TV video signal processing.

    382,    Image Analysis, appropriate subclasses for image data analysis
    systems.

    711,    Electrical Computers And Digital Processing Systems - Memory,
    appropriate subclasses for memory addressing, accessing, and controlling.


CLS 345/502
TXT Plural graphics processors:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein more than one graphics processor
    is used.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 800 for
    arrangements of processors for perfoming data processing in general.


CLS 345/503
TXT Coprocessor (e.g., graphic accelerator):

    Subject matter under subclass 502 wherein two or more graphics processors
    operate concurrently with the different processors performing different
    types of operations to increase the system performance.


CLS 345/504
TXT Master-slave processors:

    Subject matter under subclass 502 wherein one graphics processor (master)
    supervises or controls the operations of one or more other graphics
    processors (slaves).


CLS 345/505
TXT Parallel processors (e.g., identical processors):

    Subject matter under subclass 502 wherein the plurality of processors
    operate simultaneously.


CLS 345/506
TXT Pipeline processors:

    Subject matter under subclass 502 wherein the plural processors are
    operated sequentially.


CLS 345/507
TXT DISPLAY STORAGE DEVICE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the computer graphics
    processing system includes a store means manipulating the memory addressing
    or contents of the memory.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    422,    for memory used as depth buffer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 13.11 for
    CRT having plural ray-type storage tubes and subclass 84.51 for pulse
    storing systems of the gaseous discharge tube type.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclasses
    for static storage systems using visible light for the retrieval of stored
    information, instead of for the display of a selected image.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, appropriate subclasses
    for dynamic storage systems using visible light for the retrieval of stored
    information instead of for the display of a selectedimage.

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems - Memory,
    appropriate subclasses for memory addressing, accessing and controlling.


CLS 345/508
TXT Plural storage devices:

    Subject matter under subclass 507 wherein the store means includes a number
    of distinct memories.


CLS 345/509
TXT Bit map or graphic memory:

    Subject matter under subclass 507 wherein the store means retains on or off
    (0 or 1) bits to represent one-to-one correspondense between the stored
    image data and the pixel data of a displayed image data.


CLS 345/510
TXT Multiple planes:

    Subject matter under subclass 186 wherein the store means include a
    plurality of bit maps for storing color image data*.


CLS 345/511
TXT Data transfer between memories:

    Subject matter under subclass 508 wherein data is transferred from one
    location to another location in the same memory or between memories.


CLS 345/512
TXT Shared memory:

    Subject matter under subclass 507 wherein the memory is shared by more than
    one graphics processor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems - Memory,
    subclasses 147+ for shared memory storage accessing and controlling.


CLS 345/513
TXT Register:

    Subject matter under subclass 507 wherein the graphic processing system
    includes a temporary storage device, and the contents of the register are
    data elements or memory location addresses.


CLS 345/514
TXT Condition code, flag, or status:

    Subject matter under subclass 507 wherein the contents of the storage
    device are codes which represent the current state or condition of the
    graphics processor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems - Memory,
    subclass 156 for storing codes which represent the status of the storage
    device.


CLS 345/515
TXT Addressing:

    Subject matter under subclass 509 including means for assigning storage
    locations to the picture data.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems - Memory,
    subclasses 1-5 for addressing combined with specific memory
    configuration(e.g., extended, expanded, dynamic, etc.) and subclasses 200+
    for generalized address forming in a digital data processing system.


CLS 345/516
TXT Addressing circuitry:

    Subject matter under subclass 507 wherein the computer graphics processing
    system includes means for assigning storage locations to the store means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 230.01+ for
    addressing addressable, static, single storage elements.

    711,    Electrical Computers And Digital Processing Systems - Memory,
    subclasses 1-5 for addressing combined with specific memory configuration
    (e.g., extended, expanded, dynamic, etc.) and subclasses 200+ for
    generalized address forming in a digital data processing system.


CLS 345/517
TXT Memory addresses arranged in matrix (e.g., row and column addresses):

    Subject matter under subclass 516 wherein storage locations are arranged to
    form rows and columns of data accessible by a single row or column address.


CLS 345/518
TXT Multiple port access:

    Subject matter under subclass 507 wherein the memory is configured such
    that there is more than one access port to and from memory, also including
    read/write operations.


CLS 345/519
TXT Integrated circuit (e.g., single chip semiconductor device):

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein one or more of the components of
    a graphic processing systems are composed on an single semiconductor chip.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclasses,
    in particular subclasses 189.01+ and 230.01+ for read/write and addressing
    circuitry for a semiconductor structure device.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 800 for
    microprocessor architecture formed on one chip.


CLS 345/520
TXT Interface (e.g., controller):

    Subject matter under subclass 501 including a means for communicating or
    controlling between one of graphic processing component and another graphic
    processing component.


CLS 345/521
TXT Memory:

    Subject matter under subclass 520 wherein the interfacing means is between
    a graphics processor and a storage device.


CLS 345/522
TXT Graphic command processing:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein a CPU or a host computer issues a
    command to a graphic processing system to perform an operation.

    (1)     Note.  Claims which recite processing commands specifically for a
    graphics system are classified herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 376+ for
    general instruction processing, such as, instruction prefetching, fetching,
    execution, etc.


CLS 345/523
TXT Data manipulation (e.g., masking, interpolation):

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein a graphics processor defines
    operations for processing and manipulating the data.


CLS 345/524
TXT Logical operation:

    Subject matter under subclass 523 wherein logical expression is used by the
    arithmetic and logic unit (ALU) to manipulate the data.


CLS 345/525
TXT Bit block transfer:

    Subject matter under subclass 523 wherein a rectangular group of pixels
    (blocks of bits describing the pixels) move from one location (source) to
    another location (destination).


CLS 345/526
TXT Data transfer between graphic system components:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein data is transferred between
    graphic system components (e.g., a graphic processor and a memory).

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 345/901
TXT ELECTRONIC BOOK WITH DISPLAY:

    Collection of art under the class definition wherein the display elements*
    only convey information from a publication.

    (1)     Note.  Typically the image data* is stored by some form of
    removable memory, and often the display device* is portable.


CLS 345/902
TXT MENU DISPLAY:

    Collection of art under the class definition wherein the image data*
    includes a listing of items wherein an item may be selected as part of the
    selective electrical control.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    352,    for menu data processing.


CLS 345/903
TXT MODULAR DISPLAY:

    Collection of art under the class definition wherein the display elements*
    are easily combinable to form a larger display device*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for plural display systems.


CLS 345/904
TXT DISPLAY WITH FAIL/SAFE TESTING FEATURE:

    Collection of art under the class definition wherein the selective
    electrical control provides for checking the accuracy of the display
    device*.


CLS 345/905
TXT DISPLAY DEVICE WITH HOUSING STRUCTURE:

    Collection of art under the class definition wherein the periphery of the
    display elements* includes a significant casing.


CLS 345/947
TXT FONT CHARACTER EDGE PROCESSING:

    Collection of art under the class definition for generation of character
    data elements wherein the perimeters of textual characters are formed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    468+,   for character font data processing.


CLS 345/948
TXT ALTERATION OF STORED FONTS TO MAINTAIN FEATURE CONSISTENCY THROUGHOUT
    SCALED FONT:

    Collection of art under the class definition for modification of existing
    font parameters to create a different appearance wherein specific visual or
    measurable attributes are retained while modifying the font data.


CLS 345/949
TXT ANIMATION PROCESSING METHOD:

    Collection of art under the class definition wherein a sequence of
    individual display images are generated for presentation as a sequence to
    simulate motion with special processing steps that are not provided for
    elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    473,    for animation data processing in general.


CLS 345/950
TXT Sprite processing:

    Collection of art under subclass 949 wherein discrete geometric graphic
    elements are manipulated.

    (1)     Note.  The processing of graphic elements prior to frame buffer is
    classified herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBLCLASS:

    121+,   for image movement and position control.


CLS 345/951
TXT Key frame processing:

    Collection of art under subclass 950 wherein key frames portraying extreme
    or standard positions from which intermediate positions may be inferred are
    presented in animated sequence with appropriate interpolation.


CLS 345/952
TXT Simulation:

    Collection of art under subclass 949 wherein animated display is created in
    response to a process modelling another process.


CLS 345/953
TXT Geometric processing:

    Collection of art under subclass 949 wherein animated display is created by
    iterative displays of mathematically derived images.


CLS 345/954
TXT Quaternions:

    Collection of art under subclass 953 wherein animated display is created
    using a set of all possible rotations.


CLS 345/955
TXT Morphing:

    Collection of art under subclass 949 wherein animated display modifies an
    image into a different image by a succession of interpolated
    transformations blended to appear as a continuous metamorphosis.


CLS 345/956
TXT Language driven animation:

    Collection of art under subclass 949 wherein animated display is created in
    response to a set of commands provided by an operator.


CLS 345/957
TXT Actor:

    Collection of art under subclass 956 wherein animated display is created in
    response to a defined motion process explicitly placed in the motion
    sequence.


CLS 345/958
TXT Collision avoidance:

    Collection of art under subclass 949 wherein animated display recognize and
    reacts to a foreseeable intersection of motion paths among multiple images.


CLS 345/959
TXT Object path adherence:

    Collection of art under subclass 949 wherein animated display controls
    movement to constrain path traversal within predefined criteria.


CLS 345/960
TXT Iterative display of preconfigured images:

    Collection of art under subclass 949 wherein animation is created by
    simulating movement by interactive display of a succesion of images each
    presenting and advance in movement from the prior image.

    (1)     Note. The creation of images for subsequent iterative display is
    classified herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    473,    for paging schemes of iterative display of images.


CLS 345/961
TXT OPERATOR INTERFACE WITH VISUAL STRUCTURE OR FUNCTION DICTATED BY INTENDED
    USE:

    Collection of art under the class definition wherein a user interactive
    arrangement is designed around and specific to a given task.

    (1)     Note.  This cross-reference art collection is intended to include
    subject matter relating to more than nominal details of operator interfaces
    which are characteristic of the given task. It is not intended to include
    subject matter directed to details of the task itself.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    326+,   for specific details of the visual structure of an operator
    interface.


CLS 345/962
TXT Operator interface for marketing or sales:

    Collection of art under subclass 961 wherein the given task is a commercial
    function involving user response.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    705,    Data Processing - Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/Price Determination, appropriate subcalsses when the recitation of
    user interface is nominal and secondary to the commercial function itself,
    as may appear in an automated financial, business practice, or management
    system.


CLS 345/963
TXT Calendar or scheduling:

    Collection of art under subclass 961 wherein the given task is designating
    the time or date of one or more events.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    705,    Data Processing - Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/Price Determination, subclasses 8+ for automated scheduling related to
    operations research in a business environment.


CLS 345/964
TXT CAD or CAM (e.g., interactive design tools):

    Collection of art under subclass 961 wherein the given task is a part of
    computer aided design or computer aided manufacturing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    419+,   for specific three-dimensional object processing used with such an
    interface.

    433+,   for specific object manipulation techniques related to presentation
    of the graphics display with which a user interacts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses
    468.01+ for use of operator interface in CAD or CAM product manufacturing.


CLS 345/965
TXT For process control and configuration:

    Collection of art under subclass 961 wherein the given task is specifying
    or modeling system functions or connections.

    (1)     Note.  This cross-reference art collection is intended to include
    operator interface having only nominal details of the structure of
    associated system components.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 188+
    for the particular details of control systems including a device or
    apparatus controlled thereby in which an operator control interface is used
    to communicate with the control system.


CLS 345/966
TXT Computer process (e.g., operation of computer):

    Collection of art under subclass 965 wherein the system is a data
    processing system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of such an operator interface are those in which a
    data processing system is controlled or configured in a supervisory manner.
    This cross-reference art collection is not intended to include operator
    interfaces whose display content is determined by an arbitrary function of
    the data processing system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    326+,   for general use of operator interfaces for display.


CLS 345/967
TXT Visual or iconic programming:

    Collection of art under subclass 966 wherein the functions or connections
    are graphically and symbolically designated, represented and edited.

    (1)     Note.  This cross-reference art collection is intended to include
    subject matter directly relating to operator interface details involved in
    the manipulation of computer system functions or connections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 701+ for
    details of software program development.


CLS 345/968
TXT Interface for database querying and retrieval:

    Collection of art under subclass 966 wherein the function of the data
    processing system is accessing stored information on the basis of user
    specification.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    707,    Data Processing - Database and File Management, Data Structure Or
    Document Processing, appropriate subclasses for details of database
    accessing methods.


CLS 345/969
TXT Network layout and operation interface:

    Collection of art under subclass 965 wherein connections are designated
    which establish associative links between a plurality of system components
    or nodes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 200.11 for
    means or steps for detecting or observing characteristics or conditions of
    the network.


CLS 345/970
TXT Instrumentation and component modelling (e.g., interactive control panel):

    Collection of art under subclass 965 wherein graphical representations of
    system elements are used to display variable information relating to
    operating state and/or acquired parameter values.


CLS 345/971
TXT COOPERATIVE DECISION SUPPORT SYSTEMS FOR GROUPS OF USERS:

    Collection of art under the class definition wherein a group of users at
    plural display interface sites join in the collaborative effort required to
    effect a single desired choice related to a common task.


CLS 345/972
TXT INSERTED REAL-TIME VIDEO IN OPERATOR INTERFACE:

    Collection of art under the class definition wherein a computer graphics
    display is capable of supporting, within its interactive screen region, the
    depiction of a live-action sequence or a captured still image from such a
    sequence.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, appropriate subclasses for details of video signal
    processing external to the interactive display.


CLS 345/973
TXT SCROLL TOOL (E.G, WINDOW SCROLL BARS):

    Collection of art under the class definition wherein operator interface
    display elements may be used to select a portion to be displayed in a
    constrained region by interaction with on-screen tools which graphically
    represent the location of the selected portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123,    display control scrolling in general.


CLS 345/974
TXT SLIDER CONTROLS AS ON-SCREEN OBJECTS IN OPERATOR INTERFACE:

    Collection of art under the class definition wherein an interactive user
    controls the setting of a value or condition within a computer system by
    the motion of one sub-portion of an interface element with respect to
    others.


CLS 345/975
TXT POP-UP DIALOG BOX FOR ENTRY:

    Collection of art under the class definition wherein a display region
    appears for an interactive user where it had not been previously for the
    purpose of obtaining input or information indications from the user.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    347,    for pop-up dialog boxes in general.


CLS 345/976
TXT 3-D ICON:

    Collection of art under the class definition wherein a symbolic
    representation of a function or system resource in an interactive user
    display appears with a perspective appearance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    348,    for icon data processing in general.

    419+,   for computer graphics methods or apparatus for generating the
    perspective display.


CLS 345/977
TXT DYNAMIC ICON (E.G., ANIMATED OR LIVE ACTION):

    Collection of art under the class definition wherein a symbolic
    representation of a function or system resource in an interactive user
    display appears with an attribute of real-time motion within the display
    screen space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    473+,   for details of animation processing used to create the attribute of
    real-time motion.


CLS 345/978
TXT AUDIO INTERACTION AS PART OF AN OPERATOR INTERFACE:

    Collection of art under the class definition wherein sounds are used as
    input to or output from an operator interface.

    (1)     Note.  This collection is intended to include interface
    arrangements which, in addition to graphical features, provide the user
    with auditory control or feedback to enhance the graphical effect.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    704,    Data Processing - Speech Signal Processing, Linguistics, Language
    Translation, and Audio Compression/Decompression, subclasses 200+ for
    speech signal processing.


CLS 346/
TTL RECORDERS

CLS 346/
TXT This is generic class for apparatus and corresponding processes for:



    (1)     Making a record of the movements of machines or instruments whose
    movements are desired to be recorded and at least temporarily preserved.

    (2)     Making a record of any phenomenon capable of being detected either
    quantitatively or qualitatively and recorded for at least temporary
    preservation:

    The preceding in general require (a) the means to make the record, (b) the
    means to detect qualitatively or quantitatively the movement or other
    phenomenon, and (c) the means actuated in accordance with the movement or
    other phenomenon to cause the record making means to function.



    (3)     The record making means and its immediate actuating means as a
    subcombination of (1) and (2).

    (4)     Watchmen's and workmen's time-recorders and time stamps.

    This class also includes in subclass 27 compartmented boxes adapted to
    receiving checks, means being provided either for manual operation or for
    clock work to shift a part so that a check will be received in a selected
    compartment.

    NOTES

    (1)     Note.  Organized apparatus significantly claimed combined with a
    recording means which records some quality or quantity related to such
    apparatus or its function, are for the most part classified in the class
    appropriate to the type of organized apparatus, see the following notes.

    (2)     Note.  Record making means in other classes:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, particularly subclasses 445+ for dye printing.

    101,    Printing.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, will take  organized systems including
    recording, only as relates to the transfer of a developed record-image by a
    Class 118 coating means.  Means to develop a latent image by a Class 118
    coating device will not exclude placement in Class 346.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 551+ for fluid handling apparatus
    combined with a recorder.

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 52+ for electrolytic marking.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 2+.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 315.3 for invisible radiation xerography;
    and subclasses 580+ for photography using invisible radiation.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, for motion picture recording apparatus.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, for devices which utilize visible
    light or test visible light to measure optical properties of light or
    substances, distance, velocity, direction, angles, areas or volumes and
    which may use a recorder to make a permanent record of the test.  See
    subclasses 300+ of Class 356 for the line between Classes 346 and 356.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, for making a record of
    information which requires dynamic reproduction to recover the stored
    information.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 4+ and 21+ for
    X-ray tomography; subclasses 28+ for X-ray xeroradiography; subclasses 167+
    for photographic detector supports; and subclasses 189+ for nonphotographic
    detector supports.

    396,    Photography, appropriate subclasses for a photographic camera or
    photographic fluid treating apparatus.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics, subclasses 38+
    for controls, subclasses 130+ for image formation, subclasses 168+ for
    charging, subclasses 177+ for exposure, subclasses 222+ for development,
    subclasses 297+ for transfer, subclasses 320+ for fixing, subclasses 343+
    for cleaning, and subclasses 361+ for document handling.

    400,    Typewriting Machines.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 411.1+ for a
    composite, nonstructural web or sheet characterized solely by the
    compositions of the layers, and which may be useful as carbon or transfer
    paper, and especially subclasses 488.1, 537.1, and subclass 914 (a
    cross-reference art collection) for a transfer sheet.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof.

    (3)     Note.  Additional notes and index to preceding notes:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, see (2) Note.

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 18.1+ for scribers, subclasses
    304+ for borehole direction or inclination indicators with recorders,
    subclass 331 for other direction sensing and indicating devices with
    recorders.

    70,     Locks, subclasses 433+ for locks with recorders.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, for recording means broad or specific
    combined with significant measuring or testing structure, and see
    subclasses:

    181+, for recording ships' logs.

    312,    for recording, float type, liquid level gauges.

    335.06, for a recording hygrometer.

    489,    for recording means combined with a speed or acceleration
    responsive device.

    570+, for apparatus having a recorder, for testing by vibrating the
    specimen.

    712,    for recording fluid pressure gauges.

    862.27, for recording dynamometers.

    84,     Music, subclasses 461+ for devices for recording the movement of
    keys of a keyboard.

    101,    Printing, see (2) Note.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, for  nonrecording signals and indicators.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, see (2) Note.

    137,    Fluid Handling, see (2) Note.

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclasses 2+ for a recording weigher.

    178,    Telegraphy, for telegraph systems and receivers having a recorder,
    particularly subclasses:

    4+,     for automatic printing systems.

    18+,    for writing systems.

    23+,    for nonautomatic printing systems.

    36+,    for printing receivers.

    62,     for chemical recording.

    89+,    for code recorders.

    181,    Acoustics, subclass 122 for mechanical seismographs.

    194,    Check-Actuated Control Mechanisms, for combinations of recorder
    with significant check-controlled apparatus.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, see (2) Note.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 23+ particularly subclass 30 for dispensers
    combined with recorders.

    232,    Deposit and Collection Receptacles, subclass 18 for letter boxes
    having recorders.

    235,    Registers, subclasses:

    2+,     for cash registers having a recorder.

    4+,     for cash recorders.

    50,     for recording voting machines.

    58+,    for calculators having means to record either or both the factor
    entered or the result.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, for significant
    systems of this type combined with a recorder.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclass:

    107,    for block signal systems having recorders.

    123,    for systems for recording the time at which a train passes a given
    point.

    185,    for means for actuating either signals or controls upon a train in
    combination with means to record the signal or control information.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 250+ for the detection of invisible
    radiation or the testing of material by invisible radiation and the
    recording of the results of the detection or the test.  See also the (2)
    Note to the Class definition of this class.

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 138.1+ for recording chance
    devices.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 567+ for program or
    pattern controlled electric motive power systems, even though making the
    record is also claimed.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for
    electrical testing systems having a recorder combined therewith where no
    significant recording structure is involved. This Class (346) should be
    searched for the combination of electrical testing systems and a
    significant recorder.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 44 for electric oscillators wherein means are
    provided for calibrating the tuning position indicator or dial of the
    oscillator by marking the indicator or dial in accordance with the results
    of the comparison of the generated frequency with the known frequency
    settings of a source of standard frequencies.

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 296+ for facsimile systems having a recording
    apparatus.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, see (2) Note.

    367,    Communications, Electrical: Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 14+ for electrical seismographs and appropriate subclasses for
    recording signaling systems.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, see (2) Note.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 186 for a thermometer
    combined with a detailed recording arrangement.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, see (2) Note, and see subclasses:

       114+,        for recorders for counting or charging telephone calls or
    connections combined with telephone systems or equipment.

       245+,        for telephone calling number  recorders.

    386,    Television Signal Processing for Dynamic Recording or Reproducing,
    subclasses 1+ and 46+ for television camera combined with video apparatus
    for recording or reproducing processed television signal.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, see (2) Note.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 50+ for chemical analytical and
    analytical-control apparatus involving recording means.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 411.1+ for a
    composite, nonstructural web or sheet characterized solely by the
    compositions of the layers, and which may be useful as carbon or transfer
    paper, and especially subclasses 488.1, 537.1, and subclass 914 (a
    cross-reference art collection) for a transfer sheet.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclass 47 for aircraft trainers
    combined with recorders.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 1+ for
    chemical analytical and analytical-control processes involving recording
    steps.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 150+ for high temperature (Tc > 30 K) superconducting devices,
    and particularly subclasses 170+ for information storage or retrieval
    systems, or recording.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 523+, 544+, and 900 for recorders associated
    with medical diagnostic apparatus.


CLS 346/2
TXT Recorders forming part of a sextant, theodolite or other optical angle
    measuring device to  record the observed angle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 138+ for angle measuring
    devices.


CLS 346/3
TXT Recorders which exhibit the performance of a steam, gasoline or other
    expansible gas engine in terms of multiple parts of the engine or of a part
    operative in synchronism with the engine, i.e., one function of the engine
    (e.g., spark) should be plotted against another function of the engine
    (e.g., shaft rotation).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45+,    for other plural function recorders.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 115 for apparatus for testing
    engine performance or efficiency having means to record.


CLS 346/4
TXT Recorders of the type specified in subclass 3 in which one element of the
    recorder is responsive to pressure existing within the engine cylinder.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the indicators in this subclass use a long traveling
    paper web, upon which a time graph is drawn as paper is reeled past
    recording stylus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for recorders having a marker responsive to the expansion of a
    chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 700+ for fluid pressure gauges,
    particularly subclass 712 for recording type.


CLS 346/5
TXT Recorders of the type specified in subclass 4 in which the record is made
    on a rotatable or oscillatable cylinder about which is wrapped a web
    sufficiently long to be wrapped but once therearound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    and see the notes thereto for other recorders having drum type
    receivers.


CLS 346/6
TXT Recorders of the type specified in subclass 5 in which a Bourdon tube is
    utilized to drive the marker element of the recorder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 741+ for Bourdon fluid pressure
    gauges.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclasses for an
    expansible chamber device, per se.


CLS 346/7
TXT Recorders having a record tracer portion operative upon a record receiver,
    said tracer portion being responsive to the motion of a tine of a tuning
    fork, or to the change in inclination of a body carrying a pendulous mass
    or to the displacement of a mass due to shocks or accelerations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 308+ for pendulum directed
    recorders utilized in indicating borehole inclination and subclass 331 for
    direction sensing and indicating devices utilizing a recorder.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 570+ for a test of vibration, or
    involving vibration of the test specimen; subclass 489 for an accelerometer
    with recording means; and subclasses 514+ for an accelerometer, per se.

    84,     Music, subclass 457 for tuning forks.

    181,    Acoustics, subclass 122 for mechanical seismographs.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 162 for electrical
    accelerometers.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 14+ for electrical seismographs.


CLS 346/8
TXT Recorders responsive to the direction assumed by a translating member to
    record either the direction assumed by that member or the rectangular
    components of direction assumed by that member.  These recorders are
    usually mounted on a transporting member and are responsive to extent of
    motion of that member as well as to direction assumed by that member and
    the recorder may be associated with sundry other devices such as compasses,
    signals and time stamps.  Included are devices that record deviation (i.e.,
    left or right) from a set course, rudder position, steering wheel position,
    etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 775+ for means for measuring
    distance by means of a rolling contact.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 482+ for means for
    automatically moving a sign or map in accordance with the rotation of an
    axle.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 178+ for navigating instruments
    particularly 181+ for recording ships' logs.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclass 47 for aircraft trainers
    combined with recorders or for such recorders, per se, when particularly
    adapted for making a record of the operation of such trainers.


CLS 346/9
TXT Recorders of the printing or perforating type having a part positioned in
    response to the position of a weighing member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for recorders operated by the weight of an individual or object
    thereon or passing thereover.

    78+,    and see the notes thereto for other print, dotting or punching
    markers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclasses 2+ for a recording weigher.


CLS 346/10
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 9 in which the part positioned
    in response to the position of the weighing member is geared to the load
    bearing member and is a part of the recording means.


CLS 346/11
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 9 in which a recorder
    controlling element is movable independently of the weight responsive
    member and in which the weight responsive member exercises a control over
    the recorder control element or the recording mechanism associated
    therewith to cause proportional motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for recorder elements which are merely positioned manually opposite
    a weight responsive indicator and in which no control is exercised by the
    indicator, or parts movable therewith.

    31,     for recorders with follow ups.


CLS 346/12
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 11 in which the recorder
    controlling element moves about the same axis as the weight responsive
    member or co-linearly therewith.


CLS 346/13
TXT Recorders combined with means, other than the necessary elements to make a
    record, to integrate two or more quantities, the result of the integration
    being indicated but not recorded.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, for integrators, per se.


CLS 346/14
TXT Recorders combined with means, other than the necessary elements to make a
    record, to register the number of occurrences of a phenomenon.  Included
    herein are combinations of recorders with electric meters and the like.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 2+ for combined cash registers and recorders,
    subclasses 4+ for cash recorders subclass 50 for recording voting machines
    and subclasses 58+ for calculators having means to record either or both
    the factors entered or the result, and other appropriate subclasses for
    nonrecording registers.


CLS 346/15
TXT Marking recorders combined with fare or passenger registers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97,     for fare or passenger register character recording by dotting,
    printing or punching.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclass 33 for fare registers, per se.


CLS 346/16
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 15 combined with a nonrecording
    indicator or alarm mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for nonrecording indicator or alarm in other combinations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, appropriate subclasses for
    miscellaneous electrical signaling systems and signals.


CLS 346/17
TXT Recorders combined with a nonrecording indicator or alarm not already
    provided for in subclass 16.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for nonrecording indicator or alarm combined with a nonrecording
    fare register.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, appropriate subclasses for
    miscellaneous electric signaling systems or signals.


CLS 346/18
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 17 in which the nonrecording
    indicator or alarm is speed responsive.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150.1,  for centrifugal governor responsive markers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 489 for recorders with a speed or
    acceleration indicator.  See (3) Note in the class definition of Class 346
    for the line with Class 73.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 12 for means to take off
    power from a main power line to operate speedometers.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 37+, 57, 62.1+, and 74 for
    signals and alarms that are speed actuated.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 160+ for electrical
    speed measuring and indicating.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 670+ for electric signaling
    or alarm systems automatically responsive to speed.


CLS 346/19
TXT Recorders combined with other means whereby a second record may be made on
    a record receiver by means of a freely movable implement, which implement
    is a unit normally independent of the recorder and which implement is
    solely under control of an operator, except that the recorder is provided
    with an opening over the record receiver to delimit the area in which said
    second record may be made.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for autograph as sole record.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    281,    Books, Strips, and Leaves.

    462,    Books, Strips, and Leaves for Manifolding.


CLS 346/20
TXT Recorders combined with clock mechanism in which there are time scale and
    indicator means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for time driven recorder elements with autograph as sole record.

    30,     for time driven recorder elements also driven by a second factor.

    53,     for time recording, where a second function is also recorded on the
    same record receiver by a second marker, the markers being under control of
    an element normally unconnected with the apparatus (e.g., a key), a marker
    being of the dotting, printing or punching type.

    55,     for time driven record receiving element, where two or more
    functions are recorded thereon by markers under control of an element
    normally unconnected with the apparatus (e.g., a key), a marker being of
    the dotting, printing or punching type.

    57,     for time driven record receiving element, where two or more
    functions are recorded thereon, where an element normally disconnected from
    the apparatus is used to make a printing, dotting or punching mark on the
    receiving element.

    58,     for time recording, where second function is recorded by second
    marker on same receiver, where an element normally disconnected from the
    apparatus is used to make a dotting, printing or punching mark on the
    receiver.

    59+,    for time recording, where a second function is recorded on the same
    receiver, dotting, printing, or punching markers being used.

    64,     for time driven record receiver, where a single marker records two
    or more functions, the marker being controlled by an element normally
    unconnected with the apparatus.

    80+,    for time recording utilizing a dotting, printing or punching marker.

    86,     for time controlled mechanism, used to shift a holder for a
    separate record receiver card so that when the card is inserted in the
    machine at different times, superimposed dotting, printing or punching
    records are avoided.

    114+,   for time driven record receiving web, there being a "writer" type
    marker.

    115,    for time driven "writer" type marker, with time driven record
    receiving web.

    121+,   for time driven record receiving disc, there being a "writer" type
    marker.

    127+,   for time driven record receiving drum, there being a "writer" type
    marker.

    142,    for hand time stamps.


CLS 346/21
TXT Recorders provided with means to delete the record.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, subclass 174 for
    compositions for removing ink or writing fluid markings, such as ink
    eradicators.


CLS 346/22
TXT Recorders provided either with deposit receptacles to receive individual
    units of a record or units on which records are made or with a chute
    through which the record receiver passes from mouth to exit opening, a
    record being made in the interim.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for selective compartments to receive checks.

    48,     for plural record receivers in a magazine, with mechanism for
    moving one to a position to receive a record.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    232,    Deposit and Collection Receptacles.


CLS 346/23
TXT Recorders combined with means to make a reference line on the record
    receiver.


CLS 346/24
TXT Recorders combined with means to sever or facilitate severing of the
    completed record from the supply of record receiving material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses for the severing subcombination.

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, appropriate subclasses for the
    record tearing subcombination.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 522+ for cutting
    elongated material and subsequent convolute winding.


CLS 346/25
TXT Recorders combined with nonrecording devices other than those provided for
    in preceding subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33+,    for recorders combined with means the functioning of which is to be
    recorded.


CLS 346/26
TXT Recorders wherein there is a record receiver utilizing a time driven
    element to receive a mark, or wherein a time driven element is utilized to
    control the application of a mark to the record receiver, with which
    receiver is adapted to cooperate an implement, normally independent of the
    recorder, and which implement is solely under control of an operator except
    that the recorder is provided with an opening over the record receiver to
    delimit the area in which a record may be made.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for autograph recording combined with other recording.

    20,     and see the notes thereto for timing subclasses in this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    281,    Books, Strips, and Leaves.

    462,    Books, Strips, and Leaves for Manifolding.


CLS 346/27
TXT Compartmented boxes adapted to receive checks, means being provided either
    by manual operation or by clockwork to shift a part so that checks will be
    received in successive compartments.

    (1)     Note.  For the most part there is a recorder as part of the
    combination.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for record receiver deposit receptacles.

    48,     for record receiver magazine and means for moving a receiver to a
    position to receive a mark.


CLS 346/28
TXT Recorders wherein the sole means for obtaining the record of a function is
    determined by the length of a web advanced at a rate proportioned to the
    function. The web may have preprinted indicia thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136,    and see the notes thereto for other web subclasses.


CLS 346/29
TXT Recorders wherein one of the recording elements is responsive, concurrently
    to two or more functions, such as amperes and volts or kva, or kw. or fuel
    consumption and quantity of steam produced, or two pressures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3+,     for recording plural functions of steam and gas engines.

    45+,    for making records of two or more functions, which records may be
    distinguished from each other, particularly subclasses 62+, where a single
    marker and single record receiver are involved.


CLS 346/30
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 29 wherein one of the functions
    is time. There may be more than two functions controlling the motion of the
    recording element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     and see the notes thereto for timing subclasses in this class.


CLS 346/31
TXT Recorder mechanisms in which there is a function responsive element, a
    recorder controlling element, and a recorder element controlled thereby,
    said controlling element being movable by means independent of the means
    employed for controlling the function responsive element, and in which the
    controlling element assumes a position determined by the condition of the
    function responsive element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for weight responsive members with mechanism to control a movable
    recorder element to cause proportional motion.

    32,     for rebalancing systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 388 for follow-up gearing.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 358+ for expansible
    chamber motors having working member position feedback control.

    114,    Ships, subclass 144 for follow-up ship steering.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 74+ for
    regulating systems having electrical follow-ups.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 76+ for follow-up aircraft steering.

    303,    Fluid-Pressure and Analogous  Brake System, subclass 54 for
    follow-up fluid pressure brake valves.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 560+ for electric
    motor servomechanisms.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 870.43 for telemetric systems
    having follow up.


CLS 346/32
TXT Recorder mechanism embodying a function responsive element which moves in
    either of two opposite directions from a normal or balanced position in
    accordance with the change in the function and which controls the movement
    of a mechanism to restore or rebalance the element to its normal position,
    the mechanism in its restoring operation effecting the shifting of a
    recorder element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for follow-up systems and see the notes thereto.


CLS 346/33
TXT Recorders combined with the means the functioning of which is recorded.
    Where a functioning means is claimed broadly as operating a specific
    recorder, the patents are classified in an appropriate subclass in this
    class and which subclass includes the structure of the specific recorder.
    Where both the functioning means and the recorder are claimed broadly or
    where modifications of the functioning means are claimed to adapt it to its
    recording operation or where specific interconnecting structure between the
    functioning means and the recorder are claimed, the patents are classified
    in this and in indented subclasses.

    (1)     Note.  For the most part, art devices significantly claimed
    combined with means to record one or more aspects of the operation thereof,
    are classified with the art device, see the notes to the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     and preceding subclasses for recorders combined with nonrecording
    devices.

    72,     for float or expansible chamber operated recorders.

    73,     for centrifugal governor operated recorders.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 152.02+ for a process or an
    apparatus for borehole formation logging wherein the logging is not a
    purely electrical or a purely magnetic test and subclass 152.62 for a
    combination of a recorder and an apparatus for testing a pump for use in a
    borehole test or a drilling test wherein the test is not a purely
    electrical or a purely magnetic test.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 186 for recording
    thermometers having significantly claimed measuring and recording features.


CLS 346/34
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 33 wherein a record may be made
    by the same recording means from more than one independently operating
    operator. The recording couple may include a member with changeable marker.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     for single recorder elements driven by two or more factors.

    44,     for plural recorders.

    45+,    for recording two or more functions, the records being
    distinguishable from each other.


CLS 346/35
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 33 wherein a record of a single
    function is made, whether of magnitude or position, and wherein a series of
    markers operative on a surface is involved, one or more of these markers
    being selected in accordance with the magnitude of the function or the
    position of the part.


CLS 346/36
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 33 wherein the record is one of
    valve operation and is produced by or upon movement of the valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 553+ particularly subclass 556 for
    valves and other fluid handling apparatus combined with a recorder.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, appropriate subclasses for valves not
    otherwise provided for.


CLS 346/37
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 33 wherein the functioning
    means is a tuning member of a radio receiver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 10+ for mechanical tuners
    (dial shaft operators).

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 241+ for radio dials.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 138 for limit of travel
    stop dial setters.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, for systems of electric motor
    control usable to tune radios.

    334,    Tuners, appropriate subclasses for tuners involving circuit
    resonance varying elements.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 287+ for
    variable condensers.


CLS 346/38
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 33 wherein the functioning
    means is a gun, fuse, torpedo or other mechanism relating to ordnance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms.

    89,     Ordnance.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives.

    114,    Ships, subclasses 20.1+ for marine,  self propelled torpedoes.


CLS 346/40
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 33 wherein the functioning
    means is a member depressible by the weight of an individual or article on
    the member or passing thereover.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9+,     for printing or perforating recorders having a part positioned in
    response to a weighing member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclasses 2+ for a recording weigher.

    235,    Registers, subclass 99 for those having a seat, platform or the
    like operated by the weight of a person or article.


CLS 346/41
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 33 wherein the functioning
    means is a part connected with the operation of the opening of a cover of a
    box or instrument so as to make a record of the movement of a part
    associated with the act of opening the cover.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144,    for the key or box used by a workman or watchman in the course of
    making a record.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclasses 433+ for locks with recorders.


CLS 346/42
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 33 wherein the functioning
    means is a gate, door or turnstile.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclass 93 for  those that are gate or turnstile
    operated.


CLS 346/43
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 33 wherein the functioning
    means is a part which is utilized to cause a dispensing of fluid by a pump.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 30 for dispensers with recorders.


CLS 346/44
TXT Plural recorders including recorder mechanisms wherein there is provided a
    recorder comprising a record producing marker or equivalent instrumentality
    and a record receiving medium together with another recorder mechanism
    comprising still another record producing marker or equivalent
    instrumentality and another record receiving medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45+,    for plural function recorders, and see the notes thereto.


CLS 346/45
TXT Recorders for making records of two or more functions which records may be
    distinguished from each other.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and indented subclasses are predicated on the
    assumption that a preliminarily hand set day or advertising printer, punch,
    or the like is not a recorder within the means of this group of subclasses.
     Thus a patent disclosing a stamp with hand preset type representing month,
    day, and year operating in conjunction with a printing register which
    changes automatically in accordance with the number of passengers in a car
    is not regarded as for a plural function recorder.  However, if in this
    combination, the date stamp were operated by clockwork, the patent would be
    classified in an indented subclass. The record of a conductor's
    identification key utilized with a recording register is regarded as a
    plural function record within the meaning of an indented subclass.  So too
    is the record of times of arrival and departure of a plurality of workmen
    and where extra distinctions are made of late arrival in addition to time
    indication the record is regarded as for two functions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3+,     for recording plural functions of steam and gas engines.

    29+,    where one recorder element is driven by two or more factors.

    34,     for two or more external operating means for a recorder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 296+ for facsimile recorders that may have
    multiple recording styli.


CLS 346/46
TXT Recorder mechanism for making plural function records wherein the records
    are distinguishable from one another by different colors.


CLS 346/47
TXT Recorder mechanism of the type set forth in subclass 46 wherein the two
    color records are of workmen's time, as early and late arrival; normal
    working time and overtime; arrival in one color and departure in another.


CLS 346/48
TXT Mechanism of the type set forth in subclass 45 wherein a magazine is
    provided for retaining individual record receivers and further mechanism is
    provided for bringing one of the record receivers to position for receiving
    a record or records.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for combinations of a deposit receptacle to which the record
    receiver is delivered.

    27,     for selective compartments to receive checks.


CLS 346/49
TXT Plural record mechanism wherein there is provided a single record receiver
    with a plural number of markers for making records on the record receiver,
    each marker recording a function different from another marker.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     for recorders where a single record is made, there being plural
    markers operated by a single external means.


CLS 346/50
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 49 wherein at least one of the
    markers is a printer, dotter, or punch, i.e., the marker has solely a
    rectilinear motion toward and from the plane of the record receiver to make
    the mark.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78+,    and see the notes thereto for other recorders using dotting,
    printing, or punching.


CLS 346/51
TXT Plural function recorders involving the use of printing, dotting, or
    punching markers and a single record receiving element wherein there is a
    number of selectable levers, push buttons, or equivalent devices mounted on
    the recorder or mechanically, not electrically connected thereto, any one
    of which may be selected to control the printing, dotting or punching on
    the record receiving element.  The selection may be effected by shifting a
    manually operated member common to a group of levers or buttons to
    cooperate with a selected one of the group.


CLS 346/52
TXT Plural records involving the use of printing, dotting, or punching markers
    and a single record receiving element, wherein the markers are under
    selective control of an element normally unconnected with a recording
    apparatus, e.g., a key usually carried in one's pocket.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56+     and 63+, for other discrete element control.

    82+     and 95+, for discrete record receiving cards.


CLS 346/53
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 52 wherein one of the
    recordings is that of clock time where such clock time is designated by
    digits or by index and clock dial.  This subclass also includes clock
    driven dating recorders.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     and see the notes thereto for timing subclasses in this class.


CLS 346/54
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 52 wherein one of the
    recordings is that of the characters from a register.  An elapsed time
    register, i.e., one that does not read true time, is regarded as a register
    and not as a clock.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     61 and 94+, for other register character recorders.


CLS 346/55
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 52 wherein the record receiving
    element is driven in accordance with time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     and see the notes thereto for timing subclasses in this class.


CLS 346/56
TXT Plural record recorders involving the use of a plural number of printing,
    punching, or dotting markers and a single record receiving element wherein
    an element normally disconnected from the apparatus is utilized as a marker
    to make a printing, dotting or punching mark on said record receiving
    element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52+     and 63+, for other discrete element control.

    82+     and 95+, for discrete record receiving cards.


CLS 346/57
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 56 wherein the record receiver
    is time driven.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     and see the notes thereto for timing subclasses in this class.


CLS 346/58
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 56 wherein there is also
    involved a recording of clock time, which clock time must be indicated
    either by the use of digits or by indicator and clock dial.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     and see the notes thereto for timing subclasses in this class.


CLS 346/59
TXT Plural record markers involving the use of a plural number of printing,
    dotting or punching markers and a single record receiving element wherein
    one of the recordings is of clock time, said recording being in the form of
    digits or indicator and clock dial.  A marker making a "late" record
    indication on a card is regarded as one of the markers within the
    definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     and see the notes thereto for timing subclasses of this class.


CLS 346/60
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 59 wherein a further recording
    is made of the characters from a register.  The register may step up in
    response to signals from a watchman's or other transmitter to identify the
    particular transmitter, or in response to the increase in a magnitude.  A
    pointer which oscillates back and forth in accordance with a variation in
    magnitude is not a register.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     61 and 94+, for other register character recorder.


CLS 346/61
TXT Plural record markers involving the use of printing, dotting or punching
    markers and a single record receiving element wherein one of the records is
    that of the characters from a register.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     60 and 94+, for other register character recorders.


CLS 346/62
TXT Plural function recorders wherein the record is effected by the use of a
    single marker and single record receiver.  The plural functions may be
    denoted, for example, by differences in direction of the record or by
    differences in the position of the record relative to the record receiver
    or by differences in angular position of the mark on the record receiver,
    e.g., a scriber may make a mark in one direction for one function, and in
    another direction for another function.  A workman may shift a time
    operated functioned printing wheel to his workman position on a sheet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29+,    where one recorder element is driven by two or more factors.


CLS 346/63
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 62 wherein the marker is
    displaced with reference to the record receiving surface in accordance with
    the conformation of a discrete element (i.e., an element normally
    unconnected with the recorder) inserted into the recorder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52+     and 56+, for other discrete element control.

    82+     and 95+, for discrete record receiving cards.


CLS 346/64
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 63 wherein the record receiver
    is time driven.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     and see the notes thereto for timing subclasses of this class.


CLS 346/65
TXT Single function recorders with record receiving means having a single set
    of scalar lines on which individual record points are interpretable as
    having different values, said recorder also having record making means to
    designate the interpretation to be given to a particular record point.


CLS 346/66
TXT Single function recorders wherein there is provided either a plural number
    of record receivers to wherein there is provided a single receiver which
    may be subsequently divided into a plural number of pieces and which
    recorders make simultaneous records which are either in duplicate or in
    some proportion relative to one another.  Where the record receiver is a
    single element and intended to be severed, each piece will contain a
    complete record.  This subclass also includes recorders providing for a
    plurality of simultaneous records of the same function made in different
    manner as by printing and punching or as by writing and printing.


CLS 346/67
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 66 wherein but a single marker
    is employed. Usually the records are carbons of one another, or are records
    made by a stylus piercing a number of superposed record receivers.


CLS 346/68
TXT Recorders wherein the marker is automatically displaced from record making
    position when the record receiving element is removed from its record
    receiving position.


CLS 346/69
TXT Means to vibrate the whole recorder or a record effecting portion thereof
    to prevent sticking together of the marker and receiver.


CLS 346/70
TXT Recorders with automatic means to shift the marker to change its zero
    position as the paper zero position shifts, as due to change in size of
    paper as the humidity changes.


CLS 346/71
TXT Recorders wherein a marker makes an undulating record of constant amplitude.


CLS 346/72
TXT Recorders wherein a marker is responsive to the movement of a float or the
    expansion of a chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4+,     for recording plural functions of gas or steam engines, where one
    element of the recorder is responsive to pressure in the engine cylinder.

    33+,    for recorders having external operating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 312 for recording, float type,
    liquid level gauges; subclass 322.5 for floats, per se, and subclass 712
    for recording fluid pressure gauges.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclasses for an
    expansible chamber device, per se.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 557 for fluid handling apparatus combined
    with fluid pressure responsive recorders, subclass 558 for liquid level
    responsive recorders.


CLS 346/73
TXT Recorders wherein a marker is responsive to a speed responsive device of
    the centrifugal governor type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for recorders combined with nonrecording speed indicator or alarm,
    and see the notes thereto.

    33+,    for recorders having external operating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 535+ for a speed responsive
    device of the centrifugal weight type, per se.

    399,    Electrophotography, for electrostatic photocopying.


CLS 346/74.2
TXT MAGNETOGRAPHIC:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a magnetic field pattern
    in pictorial or graphic form is recorded on a magnetic medium for visible
    display, as by development, by toning, or other techniques.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 296 for the subject matter of this subclass in
    combination with a facsimile.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, appropriate
    subclass for magnetic recording not intended to be rendered directly
    visible.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 193+ for
    magnetizing or controlling magnetic fields.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics, subclasses 38+
    for controls, subclasses 130+ for image formation, subclasses 168+ for
    charging, subclasses 177+ for exposure, subclasses 222+ for development,
    subclasses 297+ for transfer, subclasses 320+ for fixing, subclasses 343+
    for cleaning, and subclasses 361+ for document handling.


CLS 346/74.3
TXT Physical reorientation of magnetic particles:

    Subject matter under subclass 74.2 including physically rearranging
    particulate magnetic material within a record by application of a magnetic
    field thereto, thereby altering the reflective nature of the medium to
    produce the visible image.


CLS 346/74.4
TXT Radiation sensitive:

    Subject matter under subclass 74.2 wherein light or other radiation,
    including heat, forms the image by magnetizing or demagnetizing a surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76.1,   for thermal recording apparatus or method for recording phenomenon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclass for thermal recording
    heating elements.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    290+ for light-controlled surface or interface.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 59 for
    thermomagnetic recorders and recording of nondirectly visible image.


CLS 346/74.5
TXT Magnetographic head:

    Subject matter under subclass 74.2 wherein the specifics to the writing
    implement head are recited.


CLS 346/74.6
TXT Magnetochemical or physical chemistry:

    Subject matter under subclass 74.2 wherein the image is produced in a
    latent form by the interaction of the magnetic field with other physical or
    chemical effects other than ferromagnetization.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:   Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, appropriate subclass for the product defined in terms of a
    composition.


CLS 346/74.7
TXT Multiple color:

    Subject matter under subclass 74.2 wherein an image is produced in a
    plurality of colors.


CLS 346/76.1
TXT THERMAL RECORDING:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a phenomenon is recorded
    on a record receiver by a heated recording head or by a recording head
    through which an electrical heating current is transmitted to a conductive
    record receiver or transfer material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107.1+, for similar subject matter wherein the recording means is a laser.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 94 for pyrographic telegraph code recorders.

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, subclasses 171+ for
    thermal marking apparatus and processes.


CLS 346/77
TXT Records employing mechanisms for deforming a record receiver, as for
    example by slitting, tearing, bending, scratching, or embossing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78+,    and see the notes thereto for printing, dotting, or punching
    markers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 127+ for embossing type.


CLS 346/78
TXT Recorders wherein the means for effecting the making of a record comprises
    a record receiver and an instrumentality cooperating therewith to print
    thereon, form dots thereon, or punch holes therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for weight recorders using dotting, printing, or punching.

    50,     for plural function recorders using dotting, printing, or punching.

    77,     for making the record by deforming the receiver as by slitting,
    tearing, bending, scratching or embossing.

    141+,   for printing, dotting, or punching markers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses for means to cut or perforate.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 92 for telegraphic code indenting or
    perforating recorders.

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), appropriate subclasses for
    selective means to cut or perforate.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 127+ for embossing or penetrating
    type.


CLS 346/79
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 78 wherein an interconnection
    exists between the advancing mechanism for the record receiver and the
    means for moving the marker so that one moves concomitantly with the other
    either by reason of a common drive for the two or by reason of a drive
    connection between the two.


CLS 346/80
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 78 wherein the
    instrumentalities make indications of clock time or indicate against a time
    scale the occurrence of an event.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     and see the notes thereto for timing subclasses of this class.

    94+,    for elapsed time recorders.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 377 and 378 for systems wherein a time record
    is sensed and the amount of time that has elapsed and a corresponding cost
    is determined.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices.


CLS 346/81
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 80 wherein the recording marker
    prints or punches time either by utilization of a time driven marker
    cooperative with a time dial scale or by utilization of characters
    themselves indicative of time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94+,    for recorders which record total time elapsed rather than actual
    time.


CLS 346/82
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 81 wherein the record is made
    on a card or equivalent receiver which card is normally an element entirely
    free of the machine but is used in conjunction therewith for the purpose of
    time recording thereon, the recorder having a record receiver opening
    particularly shaped to snugly receive the card.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95+,    for other discrete record receiving cards.

    134,    and see the notes thereto for other card receivers.


CLS 346/83
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 82 wherein means are provided
    to locate the card in different positions to receive nonsuperposed time
    records.


CLS 346/84
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 83 wherein the locating means
    are a plurality of guides each guide determining a different position for
    the localization of the record.


CLS 346/85
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 83 wherein the variable
    positioning means consists of means to modify a card as by notching thereof
    or punching holes therethrough, said notches or holes being adapted to
    cooperate with parts to control the new position of the card.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     for other card modifiers.


CLS 346/86
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 83 wherein time controlled
    mechanism is employed to shift the card holder.  This time controlled
    mechanism may be in addition to other manually operated card positioning
    mechanisms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     and see the notes thereto for other timing subclasses in this class.


CLS 346/87
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 81 wherein the record receiver
    is movable toward the time markers to effect recording.


CLS 346/88
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 87 wherein the time markers are
    either dials with time markers on them or indexes oriented with respect to
    time and intended to make marks on a scaled element.


CLS 346/89
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 81 wherein the time marking
    characters are movable toward the record receiving mechanism to effect the
    making of the record.


CLS 346/90
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 81 wherein the time marking
    characters are movable toward the record receiving medium to effect the
    making of the record and wherein time markers consist of dials with
    pointers or merely time driven pointers or dial markers.


CLS 346/91
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 81 with special means to drive,
    align, or reset time character wheels.


CLS 346/92
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 91, with means to drive, align,
    or reset a time character marking pointer or marking dial.


CLS 346/93
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 80 wherein the record receiver
    is a web.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136,    and see the notes thereto for other web subclasses.


CLS 346/94
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 78 wherein the recording marker
    has register characters on it, or a pointer cooperating with a scale, and
    prints or punches the record receiving medium to record the value of the
    register reading. A register which is driven by clockwork and shows the
    total time elapsed rather than actual time is classified herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     60 and 61, for other register character recorders.

    81+,    for recording actual rather than elapsed time.


CLS 346/95
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 94 wherein the record receiving
    medium is a card, sheet or the like normally entirely free of the machine
    from the machine and is inserted into the machine at the time of making the
    record.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82+,    for other discrete record receiving cards.

    134,    and see the notes thereto for other card receivers.


CLS 346/96
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 95 wherein means forming part
    of the machine are provided to so modify the discrete record receiving
    element so that upon the next insertion of the element it will be
    impossible to obtain a record superposed on a previous record.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85,     for other card modifiers.


CLS 346/97
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 94 which register the number of
    fares collected and the number of passengers in a public conveyance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    for recorder combined with nonrecording fare register.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 33+ for nonrecording fare registers.


CLS 346/98
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 94 wherein special means are
    provided either to drive the printing or punching register, or parts
    thereof, or to reset the register.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 47+ and 144 for register zero setting.


CLS 346/99
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 98 wherein modifications in or
    on the card, control the setting of the register mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    and see the notes thereto for other card receivers.


CLS 346/100
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 78 wherein the markings are
    punched and are made by a serrated or toothed rotating member.


CLS 346/101
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 78 wherein a record is effected
    by the application to the record receiver of a recording element in the
    form of a helix any point of which may operate upon the record receiver.


CLS 346/102
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 78 wherein the record is made
    upon a rotatable disc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137,    and see the notes thereto for other disc receivers.


CLS 346/103
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 78 wherein the record is made
    upon a rotatable drum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    and see the notes thereto for other drum receivers.


CLS 346/104
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 78 wherein the record is made
    upon a stationary planar record receiving element of any configuration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    and see the notes thereto for other card receivers.


CLS 346/105
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 78 wherein means are provided
    in the form of a sheet or ribbon to carry a pigment such as ink which may
    be transferred to the record receiver and means are provided to support or
    move said sheet or ribbon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclass 336 for ribbon inkers for printing apparatus.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 91+ for ribbon mechanism.

    462,    Books, Strips, and Leaves for Manifolding, subclasses 69+.


CLS 346/106
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 105 wherein means are provided
    to coordinate the movement of the ink transfer support or moving means with
    the movement to effect marking.


CLS 346/107.1
TXT LIGHT OR BEAM RECORDING:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a phenomenon is recorded
    on a photosensitive or a heat sensitive medium by a light or stream of
    electrons.

    (1)     Note.  The light can be generated by an ambient or an artificial
    light source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for magnetographic recorders.

    76.1,   for thermal recording apparatus and processes.

    150.1+, for electric recording apparatus and processes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 15 for photographic recorders for automatic
    systems. Subclass 90 for miscellaneous photographic telegraph recorders.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 580+ for a recording detector responsive
    to invisible radiation generally.

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, subclasses 224+ for
    radiation marking apparatus and processes.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, for motion picture recording apparatus
    employing photosensitive recording material.

    355,    Photocopying, appropriate subclasses for photocopying film strip or
    sheets where no other recording apparatus is involved.

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 302  for facsimile photographic recorders.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, appropriate subclasses
    particularly subclasses 167+ for X-ray devices using photographic detectors.

    396,    Photography, for photographic apparatus for recording images.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics, subclasses 38+
    for controls, subclasses 130+ for image formation, subclasses 168+ for
    charging, subclasses 177+ for exposure, subclasses 222+ for development,
    subclasses 297+ for transfer, subclasses 320+ for fixing, subclasses 343+
    for cleaning, and subclasses 361+ for document handling.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, appropriate subclasses for radiation imagery process and material.


CLS 346/107.2
TXT Including camera:

    Subject matter under subclass 107.2 including a light proof box fitted with
    a lens through an aperture of which the phenomenon is recorded on the
    medium.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is distinguished from Class 396, Photography,
    because of a lack of a singular image plane or screen associated with
    individual photograph.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    396,    Photography, for photographic apparatus for recording images.


CLS 346/107.3
TXT Mirror galvanometer:

    Subject matter under subclass 107.1 comprising electrical light deflecting
    means responsive to variations of the phenomenon for causing fluctuations
    in position of a beam of light to record the variations on the medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 97 for mirror
    galvanometers.

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, subclasses 243, 259,
    and 260+ for a deflector used in a plural or singular beam scan recorder.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    196 for deflection using a moving element, subclass 223 for moving a
    reflective element.


CLS 346/107.4
TXT Plural:

    Subject matter under subclass 107.3 comprising at least two mirror
    galvanometers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    201 for plural moving scanning elements.


CLS 346/107.5
TXT Having optical means interposed between the mirror galvanometer and the
    record receiver:

    Subject matter under subclass 107.3 comprising light modifying device
    located between the mirror galvanometer and the medium to affect the
    formation of the record.

    (1)     Note.  The light modifying device includes, for example, mirror,
    lens, filter, light pipe, or masking means, etc.


CLS 346/107.6
TXT Including record receiver or handling means therefor:

    Subject matter under subclass 107.1 comprising details of the medium or
    means for feeding or transporting the medium.


CLS 346/111
TXT Recorders wherein the record making instrumentality or marker writes a
    record by the application of pigment to the record receiver which
    instrumentality, while the changes in the phenomenon take place, is in
    direct continuous contact with the receiver.

    (1)     Note.  Where the marker only is movable during recording
    classification is in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 18.1+ for scribers.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 18+ for telautographs.


CLS 346/112
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 111 wherein both the receiver
    and marker are movable during the making of the record.


CLS 346/113
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 112 wherein the marker movement
    and record receiver movement are interconnected.


CLS 346/114
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 112 wherein there is provided a
    time driven web on which the record is made.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     and see the notes thereto for other timing subclasses in this class.

    136,    and see the notes thereto for other web subclasses.


CLS 346/115
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 114 wherein the marker is time
    driven and makes a mark of variable length proportional to elapsed time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     and see the notes thereto for other timing subclasses in this class.


CLS 346/116
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 112 wherein there is a time
    driven web record receiver and the marker is pivoted on an axis to make a
    mark on the web, the marker not being capable of moving rectilinearly along
    the web.  The marker itself may have a pivotal movement about one axis to
    move the plane of the web or may have a pivotal movement to move both to
    and in the plane of the web.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    123 and 128, for other combinations in which the marker has pivotal
    motion only.


CLS 346/117
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 116 wherein the marker is
    pivoted so as to enable the marker element to move only in the plane of the
    web to make a record.


CLS 346/118
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 112 in which a web record
    receiver is driven from and proportional to the speed of a part of a
    machine under investigation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124,    for work driven record receiving discs.

    136,    and see the notes thereto for other web subclasses.


CLS 346/119
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 118 wherein the marker is moved
    pivotally to make a record.  Includes markers responsive to phenomenon to
    move toward and from the web as well as in the plane of the web.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    123 and 128, for other combinations in which the marker has pivotal
    motion only.


CLS 346/120
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 119 wherein the movement of the
    marker is in the plane of the web only.


CLS 346/121
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 112 in which the record
    receiving member is a time driven rotatable disc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     and see the notes thereto for other timing subclasses in this class.

    137,    and see the notes thereto for other disc receivers.


CLS 346/122
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 121 wherein the disc is bodily
    displaceable as well as rotatable on an axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126,    for rotatable drums which are also bodily displaceable.


CLS 346/123
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 121 in which a marker which is
    a pivotal movement only, makes the record on the disc.  The pivotal
    movement may be about two axes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    119 and 128, for other combinations in which the marker has pivotal
    motion only.


CLS 346/124
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 112 in which the record
    receiving member is a work driven rotatable disc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118+,   for work driven record receiving webs.

    137,    and see the notes thereto for other disc receivers.


CLS 346/125
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 112 wherein the record receiver
    is on a drum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    and see the notes thereto for other drum receivers.


CLS 346/126
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 125 in which the record
    receiving member is a drum capable of rotation on its axis and translation
    during the making of a record.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    for rotatable discs which are also bodily translatable.


CLS 346/127
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 125 in which the record
    receiver is a time driven drum rotating on its axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     and see the notes thereto for other timing subclasses in this class.


CLS 346/128
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 127 in which the marker has a
    pivotal motion, only, in order to make the record. The pivoting may be
    about an axis parallel to or at an angle to the plane of the record
    material on the drum or the pivoting may be about a plurality of axes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    119 and 123, for other combinations in which the marker has pivotal
    motion only.


CLS 346/129
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 112 wherein the record receiver
    is a card, usually, though not always carried by a plane surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    and see the notes thereto for other card receivers.


CLS 346/130
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 111 in which the record
    receiver, only, is movable during recording, the stylus being either fixed
    in position or adjusted to writing position or recording.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114+    and 118+, for writers where both the web and marker move during the
    making of the record.

    136,    and see the notes thereto for other web subclasses.


CLS 346/131
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 130 in which the record
    receiver is in the form of a rotatable disc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137,    and see the notes thereto for other disc receivers.


CLS 346/132
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 130 in which the receiver is in
    the form of a rotatable drum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    and see the notes thereto for other drum receivers.


CLS 346/133
TXT Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 130 in which the record
    receiver is a card usually though not necessarily mounted on a plane
    surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    and see the notes thereto for other card receivers.


CLS 346/134
TXT The material on which the record is made and/or the driving means for the
    same.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82+,    95+, 99, 104, 129, and 133, for various combinations classified on
    the basis of the use of a card receiver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclass 415.1 for means, per se, for securing flexible
    sheets to a base for holding and stretching the same even though disclosed
    for use with a recorder, and see the notes for related art.


CLS 346/135.1
TXT Laminated, impregnated, or coated bases:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 wherein the record receiving has a base
    with a lamination thereon, or which is impregnated or coated with record
    receiving material.

    (1)     Note.  The material may have chart graduations or the like.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 146+ for coating processes, per se,
    wherein the product has utility as a transfer or copy sheet.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a plural layer web, sheet, or
    strand of general use, including a coated or impregnated stock material
    product, not elsewhere provided for, and especially subclasses 411.1+ for a
    nonstructural plural layer product; see also the reference to Class 346 in
    the definition of Class 428, section VI.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or Product,
    Thereof, subclasses 270.11+ for nonstructural layered product having a
    radiation sensitive composition layer claimed or solely disclosed as
    optically recordable and optically machine readable (e.g., optical
    recording media, etc.


CLS 346/136
TXT Record receivers as defined in subclass 134, the receiver being in the form
    of a web.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     93, 114+, 118+, and 130, for various combinations classified on
    basis of use of a web form receiver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.

     242,   Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 324+ for unwinding and
    rewinding a machine convertible information carrier such as a magnetic tape
    or image film.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web of
    general utility, and see the reference to Class 346 in the definition of
    Class 428, section VI.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 296+ for a machine using an abrasive endless
    band and subclasses 526+ for abrasive endless band structure, per se.


CLS 346/137
TXT Record receivers as defined in subclass 134, the receiver being in the form
    of a disc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    121+, 124, and 131, for various combinations classified on basis of
    use of a web form receiver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 64.1+ for
    single or plural layer sheet in the form of a disc or circular sheet of
    general utility and see the reference to Class 346 in the definition of
    Class 428, section VI.


CLS 346/138
TXT Record receivers as defined in subclass 134, the receiver being in the form
    of a drum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5+,     103, 125+, and 132, for various combinations classified on the
    basis of use of a drum type receiver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 496+ and 504+ for a rotary cylinder type of
    abrader having sheet holding means.


CLS 346/139
TXT The structure of the marker and or the driving means therefor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 328+ for indicating pointer
    structure.


CLS 346/140.1
TXT With ink supply to marker

    Markers as defined in subclass 139 with means to supply ink thereto for
    subsequent application to the record strip.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclasses 335+ for printing apparatus inkers,
    particularly subclasses 364+ for fountains.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 96 for telegraphic code recorders having ink
    devices.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, appropriate subclasses for
    a hand-manipulated fountain pen.


CLS 346/141
TXT Markers as defined in subclass 139 wherein the marker is of the printing,
    punching, or dotting type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78+,    and see the notes thereto for recorders using dotting, printing, or
    punching markers.


CLS 346/142
TXT Markers as set forth in subclass 141 in which the marker is in the form of
    a hand time stamp adapted to cooperate with a record receiver, said record
    receiver being an element not connected with the time stamp.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     and see the notes thereto for timing, subclasses of this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclasses 72+ for hand numbering stamps and other
    appropriate subclasses for hand printers.


CLS 346/143
TXT Markers as set forth in subclass 139 which are hand driven.


CLS 346/144
TXT The key or box used by a watchman or workman in the course of making a
    record.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     56 and 63, for recorders operated or controlled by an element
    normally disconnected from the recorder.


CLS 346/145
TXT The support for the recorder or a portion of a recorder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 431 for instrument casings.

    248,    Supports, for miscellaneous supports, per se.


CLS 346/146
TXT Miscellaneous recorders not otherwise classifiable.


CLS 346/150.1
TXT ELECTRIC RECORDING:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein electricity is applied to
    the medium for recording a phenomenon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74+,    for magnetographic recorders.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses
    620+ for a coating device including means to apply electrical and/or
    radiant energy to work material or coating material, and see (2) Note of
    the class definition.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 62 for chemical and electrolytic telegraph
    recorders.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 384 for perforating by electric spark.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 210+ for winding and
    unwinding devices for apparatus for processing web material to bear
    machine-utilizable information representations.

    330,    Amplifiers, appropriate subclasses for the various types of
    amplifiers and amplifier systems, subclass 308 for transistor amplifiers
    having an atomic particles or radiant energy impinging on a semiconductor,
    and subclass 59 for amplifier systems having light controlled or activated
    device.

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, subclasses 111+ for
    electric marking apparatus and processes.

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 906 through 908 for recorders combined with
    facsimile systems.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, for the magnetic
    recording of nonvisible information; e.g., audio, video, digital
    information.

    386,    Television Signal Processing for Dynamic Recording or Reproducing,
    subclasses 1+ and 46+ for color and black and white television signal
    recording.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics, subclasses 38+
    for controls, subclasses 130+ for image formation, subclasses 168+ for
    charging, subclasses 177+ for exposure, subclasses 222+ for development,
    subclasses 297+ for transfer, subclasses 320+ for fixing, subclasses 343+
    for cleaning, and subclasses 361+ for document handling.

    427,    Coating Processes, for methods of development of the latent image.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 25+ for the chemical process and material of
    electroimagery and magnetoimagery.


CLS 346/150.2
TXT By electrical discharge (e.g., spark or electroerosion):

    Subject matter under subclass 150.1 wherein the  phenomenon is recorded by
    dielectric breakdown.

    (1)     Note.  The dielectric breakdown may cause an electrical discharge
    from a stylus onto a medium by direct contact or through an air gap.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, subclasses 159+ for
    electrical discharge marking apparatus and processes.


CLS 346/150.3
TXT Electrochemical:

    Subject matter under subclass 150.1 wherein the phenomenon is recorded by
    reaction of a chemical (e.g., electrolyte) to the applied electricity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, subclasses 163+ for
    electrochemical marking apparatus and processes.


CLS 347/
TTL INCREMENTAL PRINTING OF  SYMBOLIC INFORMATION

CLS 347/
TXT
    I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF THE SUBCLASS SUBJECT MATTER

            This class provides for processes and apparatus for conveying
    information by selectively creating on a medium a visibly distinguishable
    symbol* or mark* composed of a plurality of portions*. The symbol* or mark*
    is created portion* by portion* as, for example, by pixels or dots. The
    symbol* or mark* may be an alphanumeric character or an image.

    II.     LONG-RANGE PLAN FOR CLASS 347

            This class provides for ``stand-alone" incremental printers such as
    ink jet, laser, thermal, dot-matrix, or electrostatic printers. These
    devices, for the most part, are now classified in Class 346, Recorders, and
    Class 400, Typewriting Machines. Other types of informational marking* are
    found in Class 355, Photocopying; Class 101, Printing; Class 358,
    Facsimile, subclasses 400+ for black and white facsimile and subclasses
    500+ for natural color facsimile; and Class 395, Information Processing
    System Organization. Subcombinations of this subject matter can be found in
    various areas. For example, media and media handling means are found in
    Class 271, Sheet Feeding or Delivering; Class 226, Advancing Material of
    Indeterminate Length; Class 242, Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding; and Class
    428, Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles. The art in this class (Class
    347) is generally found in subclass B41J of the International Patent
    Classification (IPC). As these arts are reclassified, appropriate subject
    matter will be transferred to this class (Class 347).

    III.    SCOPE OF THE CLASS

    (1)     Note.  The symbol* or mark* is created portion* by portion*. A
    symbol* or mark* which is not created portion* by portion* is found
    elsewhere. For example, printing type (Class 101), typewriters (Class 400),
    stencils (Class 101), and hand stamps (Class 101) create a whole mark*
    rather than a mark* portion* by portion*.

    (2)     Note.  The symbol or mark which is created using a character
    supporting electrode stylus by which an electrostatic charge is deposited
    onto or discharged from a medium is, however, classified in this class
    (Class 347).

    (3)     Note.  The symbol* or mark* conveys information. Information is the
    communication of knowledge or intelligence. For example, an alphanumeric
    character and an image are marks* which convey information. A code (e.g., a
    bar code) is a mark* which conveys information.

    (4)     Note.  A visibly distinguishable mark* created portion* by portion*
    for a purpose other than conveying information is found elsewhere. For
    example, a coating formed in this manner is found in Class 427.

    (5)     Note.  Some portion* by portion* marks* in a specific situation are
    found elsewhere. For example, a portion* by portion* mark in the production
    of a printing plate is found in Class 101.

    (6)     Note.  The marking* can be combined* for a special purpose. Special
    purpose devices are found elsewhere. For example, special purpose devices
    can be found in Class 358 (facsimile devices), Class 355
    (electrophotographic copiers), Class 156 (labelers), and Class 346
    (recorders).

    (7)     Note.  The marking* device is made up of several portions*: a
    combined* portion, a controller portion, a head* portion, a marking*
    portion, a medium portion, and a housing portion. The combined* portion is
    the combination of a marking* device and an external means which functions
    as a special information marking* system. The controller portion contains
    the means to direct the operation of the marking* device or any of its
    component parts. The head* portion contains the means which provides the
    marking*. The marking* portion contains the specifics of the marking*
    (e.g., the fluid, the impact, the heat, the electricity, and the
    radiation). The mechanism portion contains the medium, its handling, and
    its processing. The housing portion* contains an outer enclosure for the
    marking* device.

    IV.     GLOSSARY

            The following terms have been defined for purposes of
    classification in this class. In the class and subclass definition of this
    class, terms used in a sense defined below are indicated by an asterisk(*).

    COMBINED
    Means connected with the marking* device for adapting the device to a
    particular marking* purpose.

    CONTROL
    Means to regulate the operation of the head*, the medium, and the other
    parts of the marking* device so that the device will operate in the
    intended manner.

    EJECTOR
    The mechanism which projects the fluid* onto the medium*.

    FLUID
    The flowable substance which is projected from the ejector* mechanism or
    which is used to enhance the transport or generation of charged particles.

    HEAD (Marker)
    The section of the marking device which produces the visibly
    distinguishable or latent symbol or mark on the medium in accordance with
    an information signal.

    MARK
    A discrete area on the medium which contains the plurality of portions*.
    Unless otherwise indicated, ``mark" and ``symbol" are used synonymously in
    the subclass definitions of this class.

    MARKING
    The specific manner by which the mark* is formed; e.g., ink jet, impact,
    thermal, electric (e.g., toner applied to a latent image), or radiation.

    MEDIUM
    A substrate on which the visibly distinguishable or latent symbol or mark
    is formed.

    PORTIONS
    Elemental sections of a symbol* or mark*.  An elemental section is not,
    itself, a symbol* or mark* as, for example, is an alphanumeric typeface
    used to create a picture or an image.

    SYMBOL
    A mark* which conveys intelligent information. Unless otherwise indicated,
    ``mark" and ``symbol" are used synonymously in the subclass definitions of
    this class.

    TRANSDUCER
    The part of the head* which converts an input signal into the force for
    producing the mark*.

    V.      SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, appropriate subclasses for means adopted to produce
    characters or designs on a surface by impression of types or die or by
    applying coating matter thereto through openings of previous portions* of a
    pattern sheet, as in stenciling, or by impression from planographic or
    intaglio surfaces.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for devices for applying
    or obtaining a surface coating on a base and/or impregnating base materials.

    216,    Etching a Substrate: Processes, especially subclass 27 for methods
    of making a thermal ink jet device.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for processes or apparatus for moving, sensing, threading, and constraining
    indeterminate material.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, appropriate subclasses for winding
    or unwinding flexible material from a reel.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, appropriate subclasses for means for
    removing individual sheets from a stock or for positioning individual
    sheets with respect to some mechanism for operating on them or for placing
    them after they have been operated upon.

    346,    Recorders, appropriate subclasses for apparatus and corresponding
    processes for making a record of the movement of machines or instruments or
    of any phenomenon capable of being detected.

    355,    Photocopying, appropriate subclasses for photographically copying
    information from an original or carrier.

    358,    Facsimile, especially subclasses 500+ for natural color facsimile
    and subclasses 400+ for black and white facsimile.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclasses
    for apparatus or processes for static storage and retrieval of information.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, appropriate subclasses
    for processes of and apparatus for the storage or retrieval of arbitrary
    variable information.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 101+ for
    static presentations processing (e.g., for printers).

    396,    Photography, appropriate subclasses for devices for
    photographically recording an image of an object upon actuation.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics, subclasses 38+
    for controls, subclasses 130+ for image formation, subclasses 168+ for
    charging, subclasses 177+ for exposure, subclasses 222+ for development,
    subclasses 297+ for transfer, subclasses 320+ for fixing, subclasses 343+
    for cleaning, and subclasses 361+ for document handling.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, appropriate subclasses for devices causing an
    intelligible character to be imprinted on a record medium by a type member.

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclasses for applying or obtaining
    a coating on a surface.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for stock material composites in general; for a transfer medium (e.g., ink
    ribbon) per se, see subclasses 195+ and 984+; for a record receiver, per
    se, see subclasses 195+.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, appropriate subclasses for forming the likeness of an object, or
    an instrumented or discernable phenomenon, in a chemically defined receiver
    or in a receiver wherein radiation produces a chemical reaction, by use of
    radiation.

    503,    Record Receiver Having Plural Leaves or a Colorless Color Former,
    Method of Use, or Developer Therefor, subclasses 200 through 226 for
    imaging with colorless color formers and developers therefor; subclass 227
    for nontextile sublimation thermal dye transfer medium or record receiver,
    per se, or for processes of transfer wherein the medium or the receiver is
    substantial to the transfer.


CLS 347/1
TXT INK JET:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the symbol* or mark* is
    created by a projection of fluid onto a medium in a controlled manner. The
    fluid is projected by an ejector which does not contact the medium.

    (1)     Note.  An ink jet generally includes a fluid*, an ejector*,  a
    medium* for receiving the projected fluid*, and a controller.  The
    projected fluid* on the medium* forms the marking* which represents a
    visualization of the information.

    (2)     Note.  The fluid* can be any substance that flows. Generally, it is
    an ink, but it can be other substances such as powder, gas, etc., or a
    combination of these substances.

            Generally, the fluid*, per se, is classified with the fluid* except
    where a specific interconnection with the ink jet is claimed.  For example,
    an ink for use in an ink jet would still be classified in Class 106,
    subclass 31.13.  When other factors such as printing density or droplet
    volume are recited, classification in subclasses 84+ of this class (Class
    347) could be appropriate.

            Ink jet fluids* are classified in subclasses 95+ of this class
    (Class 347).  Ink with a nominal recitation of ink jet is classified in
    Class 106, 31.13+, especially subclass 31.51 with ink jet composition or
    process. Also, see Classes 523 and 524 for ink compositions containing
    synthetic resins.

            Fluid* handling is classified in subclasses 84+ of this class
    (Class 347).  Fluid* handling details such as pumps (Class 417), valves
    (Class 251), and filters (Class 210) with a nominal recitation of ink jet
    are classified in the classes appropriate to the details.

    (3)     Note. The medium* can be any substrate which accepts fluids*.

            Mediums are a stock material which is classified in Class 428.
    When specifics such as ink compositions and medium handling are recited
    especially adapting the medium to the ink jet, classification could be
    appropriate in this class (Class 347), especially subclass 105.

            A distinction within this class (Class 347) is made between an
    object and a medium. An object is a specialized medium. For example, wire,
    containers, envelopes, and checks are considered objects. The ink jet
    informational marking* of objects is classified in subclasses 2+ of this
    class (Class 347).

            Means especially adapted to handle and/or process ink jet mediums
    can be found in subclasses 104+ of this class (Class 347).

            Medium handling means, in general, are classified in Class 226,
    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length; Class 242, Winding, Tensioning,
    or Guiding; and Class 271, Sheet Feeding or Delivering.

    (4)     Note.  Ink jet marking* is considered to be the visualization of
    information. Other terms such as printing, recording, and imaging can also
    be used to describe this marking*.

            The use of ink jet techniques for other purposes, such as particle
    sorting, is not considered marking* and therefor not appropriately
    classified in this class.

            The projection of fluid* which is not ink jet is provided in other
    classes such as Classes 118 (Coating Apparatus) and 427 (Coating
    Processes), Class 222 (Dispensing), and Class 239 (Fluid Sprinkling,
    Spraying, and Diffusing).


            The contact projection of fluid* onto a medium* for informational
    marking* is classified in Class 346, subclass 140.1; Class 101; and Class
    401, Coating Implements With Material Supply.

    (5)     Note.  Ink jet combined* with a nominal recitation of some other
    apparatus is classified in subclasses 2+ of this class (Class 347).
    Nominal ink jet combined* with a significant apparatus is classified with
    that apparatus and cross-referenced into subclasses 2+ of this class (Class
    347).

    (6)     Note.  The control* is an element which regulates all or some part
    of the ink jet.  For example, a central processing unit (CPU) in the ink
    jet would be a  control*, not a combined*.

    (7)     Note.  A computer which regulates all or some part of the ink jet
    would be classified in this class (Class 347), subclasses 5+.  A computer,
    per se, would be appropriate in other classes such as Class 364.  An
    interface unit for an ink jet would be appropriate for Class 395,
    subclasses 101+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, particularly subclass 890.1 for making some types of
    ink jet devices.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for processes and
    apparatus for making a measurement or test, especially subclasses 861+ for
    liquid volume or rate of flow, subclasses 290+ for liquid level, and
    subclass 700 for fluid* pressure measurements.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses for inks
    to be used for producing characters by means of writing, printing, or
    marking*, especially subclass 20 for ink jet compositions.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for
    applying a surface coating on a base, especially subclasses 663+ for
    controls and subclasses 300+ for projection or spray types.

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, subclass 27 for methods of making
    a thermal ink jet device involving a step of chemical etching a substrate.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, especially subclass 75 for electroforming
    orifices.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, especially subclasses 348+ for
    filters.

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, subclass 27 for methods of making
    a thermal ink jet device involving a step of chemical etching a substrate.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for processes and apparatus for
    dispensing material.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for processes or apparatus for advancing material to or from a reel.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, appropriate subclasses for winding
    or unwinding flexible material from holders.

    250,    Radiant Energy, appropriate subclasses for methods and apparatus
    for using, generating, controlling, or directing radiant energy, especially
    subclasses 200+ for photocells and their circuits.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, appropriate subclasses for regulating
    the flow of a fluid through a passage either by closing the passage or
    restricting it.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses for active solid-state electronic devices such as
    diodes, transistors, thyristors, etc.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for
    measuring, testing, or sensing electric properties in general.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, for resistor structure, appropriate
    subclasses for electrical resistors in general.

    346,    Recorders, especially subclasses 134+ for mediums, subclass 140.1
    for recording pens, and subclass 145 for housings.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for optical
    measuring and testing devices.

    358,    Facsimile, especially subclasses 500+ for natural color facsimile,
    subclasses 400+ for facsimile, and subclasses 296+ for recording apparatus
    in facsimile.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for a computer as a controller.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, especially subclasses 141+ for
    combined* with other devices.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 101+ for
    data generated by a host computer.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, especially subclasses 56+ for printing plane
    spacing, subclasses 283+ for carriage details, subclasses 578+ for media
    handling, and subclasses 691+ for housings.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 221+ for
    handheld pens.

    417,    Pumps, appropriate subclasses for devices for pumping fluids*.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 411.1+ for
    nonstructural laminate materials.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, subclass 21 for
    methods of making an electrical device controlled printhead utilizing a
    semiconductor substrate.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for interconnection
    of electrical connectors.

    523,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses for ink
    compositions containing synthetic resins.

    524,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses for ink
    compositions containing synthetic resins.

    D18,    Printing and Office Machinery, especially subclass 55 for housings
    and subclass 56 for ink cartridges.


CLS 347/2
TXT Combined:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the ink jet is combined* with an
    external means which will enable the ink jet to function as a specialized
    information marking* system.  For example, the ink jet may function to
    mark* an object such as wire or a container.  For example, a specialized
    system would be a copier or a facsimile device.

    (1)     Note.  Nominal ink jet combined* with a significant external means
    is classified with such means.


CLS 347/3
TXT Reproduction (e.g., facsimile, copier, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the external means enables the ink
    jet to copy an image, and the combination functions as a copier, facsimile,
    or other reproduction device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 400+ (black and white) and 500+ (color) for
    facsimile circuits for an ink jet, and subclasses 296+ for facsimile
    recording apparatus.

    399,    Electrophotography, for electrostatic photocopying.


CLS 347/4
TXT With conveyed object:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the external means includes a
    conveyor for moving an object such as  an envelope, container, article, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses for power-driven
    conveyors.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 3.3 for
    marking* items for classifying, separating, and  assorting solids.


CLS 347/5
TXT Controller:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein means or steps are provided to
    direct the operation of the ink jet or any of its component parts or
    functions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for electrical computers and data processing systems, especially
    subclass 930.41 for an ink jet.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 101+ for
    presentation processing of dots generated by a computer.


CLS 347/6
TXT Of fluid (e.g., ink flow rate, viscosity, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 5 in which the component or element under
    control* is the fluid* (e.g., ink) which is jetted onto the medium*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for fluid measuring
    and testing, especially subclasses 861+ for volume or rate of flow
    measurement, subclasses 700+ for fluid pressure measurement, and subclass
    290 for liquid level measurement.


CLS 347/7
TXT Fluid content (e.g., moisture or solvent content, ink refilling, liquid
    level):

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the control* means contains means
    to alter the content of the fluid* (e.g., its moisture content or solvent
    content).


CLS 347/8
TXT Of spacing between fluid ejector and receiving medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 5 wherein the control* means contains means
    to alter the spacing between the means (ejector*) to jet fluid* onto the
    receiving medium* and the receiving medium* itself.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 55+ for adjustment of the printing
    plane in a typewriter.


CLS 347/9
TXT Of ejector:

    Subject matter under subclass 5 wherein the means under control* is the
    mechanism which projects the fluid* onto the medium*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for ejector* mechanism, per se.


CLS 347/10
TXT Drive waveform:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein the control* is an electrical
    signal in the form of a specific waveform for operating the  ejector*.


CLS 347/11
TXT Plural pulses:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein the waveform contains a plural
    pulse sequence.


CLS 347/12
TXT Array:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein the ejector* means contains a
    plurality of ejectors* generally termed an array.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40+,    for ejector* arrays, per se.


CLS 347/13
TXT Full-line array:

    Subject matter under subclass 12 wherein the plurality of ejectors* are
    fixedly arranged widthwise of the record medium* and generally termed
    full-line or page-width.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for full-line ejector* arrays, per se.


CLS 347/14
TXT Responsive to condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein the control* of the ejector* is in
    response to a specific condition such as temperature, pressure, type of
    medium*, etc.


CLS 347/15
TXT Creating plural tones:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein the ejector* means is controlled to
    perform a graduated density of marking*.

    (1)     Note.  Other terms used to describe this type of control* include
    gray scale, halftone, density control*, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 298 for creating half-tones in facsimile
    recording.


CLS 347/16
TXT Of medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 5 wherein the control* means includes means
    to control* some parameter such as speed, position, moisture content, etc.,
    of the medium* on which fluid* is to be jetted.


CLS 347/17
TXT Of temperature or pressure of device or component thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 5 wherein the control* means includes means
    to control* the temperature of the ink jet or a component thereof.


CLS 347/18
TXT With particular cooling means:

    Subject matter under subclass 17 wherein the control* means includes a
    means for cooling the ink jet (i.e., fan, heat sink, etc.).


CLS 347/19
TXT Measuring and testing (e.g., diagnostics):

    Subject matter under subclass 5 wherein means are provided for diagnosing,
    calibrating, testing, and measuring elements or parameters of, or
    affecting, the ink jet or its elements.

    (1)     Note.  Control* systems, above, inherently include measuring and
    testing.  The subject matter in this subclass concerns situations where the
    control* means of the above subclasses are not involved.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78+,    for correction systems for continuous ink jet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for mechanical
    measuring and testing.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for
    electrical measuring and testing.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for optical
    measuring and testing.


CLS 347/20
TXT Ejector mechanism (i.e., print head):

    Subject matter under the subclass 1 wherein means are provided to eject or
    project a fluid* from a fluid* supply means to a receiving medium*.

    (1)     Note.  This means generally includes a transducer* which converts
    the input signal into a force for aiding the ejection of the fluid*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for control* of the ejector*.


CLS 347/21
TXT With additional fluid:

    Subject matter under subclass 20 including means to provide another fluid*
    in addition to the marking* fluid* to assist the marking* process; for
    example, to direct the marking* fluid to a particular spot on the medium*.


CLS 347/22
TXT With cleaning or protector:

    Subject matter under subclass 20 wherein means are provided to keep the
    ejector* mechanism clean.

    (1)     Note.  This may involve means to purge clogged nozzles or means to
    keep an ejector* element from becoming clogged or coated with dried ink,
    etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, appropriate subclasses
    for brushing, scrubbing, and general cleaning.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclass 701 for typeface cleaning in a
    typewriter.


CLS 347/23
TXT Responsive to condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 22 wherein the cleaning means is responsive
    to a condition such as temperature, time, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for ejectors* responsive to condition.


CLS 347/24
TXT For color:

    Subject matter under subclass 22 wherein the cleaning means is specifically
    adapted to handle plural color fluids*.


CLS 347/25
TXT Gas:

    Subject matter under subclass 22 wherein the cleaning means is a gas such
    as air.


CLS 347/26
TXT Heat:

    Subject matter under subclass 22 wherein the cleaning means removes clogs
    or debris by thermal action.


CLS 347/27
TXT Vibration:

    Subject matter under subclass 22 wherein the cleaning means removes clogs
    or debris by vibration.


CLS 347/28
TXT Solvent:

    Subject matter under subclass 22 wherein the cleaning means removes clogs
    or debris by the dissolving action of another fluid.


CLS 347/29
TXT Nozzle cap, cover, or protection:

    Subject matter under subclass 22 wherein the cleaning means is in the form
    of a cap, cover, or other protection which engages the ejector* face.


CLS 347/30
TXT Suction:

    Subject matter under subclass 29 wherein the cap, cover, or other
    protective means is provided with suction to remove fluid* from the
    ejector*.


CLS 347/31
TXT Absorber:

    Subject matter under subclass 29 wherein the cap, cover, or other
    protective means contains an absorber for containing or absorbing the
    fluid* used in the cleaning process.


CLS 347/32
TXT Movement:

    Subject matter under subclass 29 wherein means are provided to move the
    cap, cover, or other protection into and out of engagement with the
    ejector* means.


CLS 347/33
TXT Wiping:

    Subject matter under subclass 22 wherein a means is provided to wipe the
    ejector* mechanism to remove fluids.


CLS 347/34
TXT Mist or dust removal:

    Subject matter under subclass 22 wherein a means is provided to remove a
    mist or dust of ejected particles which would otherwise stain the record
    medium*.


CLS 347/35
TXT Purging without a cap:

    Subject matter under subclass 22 wherein the ejector* is cleaned by an
    ejection of fluid* in a non-marking* location.

    (1)     Note.  A cap is not used during the ejection of fluid*.


CLS 347/36
TXT Waste storage:

    Subject matter under subclass 22 wherein a container is provided for the
    storage of the waste from cleaning.


CLS 347/37
TXT With means to scan fluid ejector relative to the receiving medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 20 including means to change the relative
    positions of the ejector* mechanism and the medium*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 283+ for a carriage moving
    mechanism in a typewriter.


CLS 347/38
TXT With rotary motion:

    Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein the scan is a rotary motion.


CLS 347/39
TXT With oscillatory motion:

    Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein the scan is a rhythmic repetitive
    motion.


CLS 347/40
TXT Array of ejectors:

    Subject matter under subclass 20 wherein the ejector* mechanism includes a
    plurality of individual ejector* elements with a predetermined spacing
    extending along one or more directions.


CLS 347/41
TXT Interlace:

    Subject matter under subclass 40 wherein the ejector* elements are arrayed
    or driven so that drops forming adjacent dots or lines are not deposited
    during the same scan.


CLS 347/42
TXT Full-line type:

    Subject matter under subclass 40 wherein the plurality of ejector* elements
    are fixedly arranged to extend across the width of the recording medium*.

    (1)     Note. Another term used to describe full-line-type devices is
    page-width.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for control* of a full-line head*.


CLS 347/43
TXT Color type:

    Subject matter under subclass 40 wherein the ejector* elements are
    structured or arranged to form a chromatic marking* on a receiving medium*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, subclasses 46 and 159 for color in recording devices.

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 500+ for natural color facsimile.

    399,    Electrophotography, for color electrostatic photocopying.


CLS 347/44
TXT Discharge means:

    Subject matter under subclass 20 including means specific for the ejection
    of the fluid* from the ejector* mechanism.


CLS 347/45
TXT Surface treated:

    Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein the discharge means has a coated
    surface to enhance its operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for applying or obtaining
    a surface coating on a base and/or impregnating base materials.

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclasses for applying or obtaining
    a coating on a surface.


CLS 347/46
TXT Free surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein the fluid* is discharged from the
    surface of a fluid* pool.

    (1)     Note.  This type of discharge means is also termed nozzleless or
    acoustic.


CLS 347/47
TXT Nozzles:

    Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein the discharge means includes a
    structural element through which the fluid* passes to form the ejected
    fluid*(e.g., orifice, nozzle, aperture).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, appropriate subclasses for glass nozzles.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclass 75 for electroforming perforated
    articles.

    216,    Etching a Substrate: Processes, especially subclass 27 for methods
    of making a thermal ink jet device.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 121.7 and 121.71 for hole punching by
    a laser.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusion, subclass 601 for orifice
    shapes in sprinkling, spraying, and diffusing devices.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 154+ for making a hole or aperture in a plastic article.


CLS 347/48
TXT With plural transducers:

    Subject matter under subclass 20 wherein each ejector* element has more
    than one transducer* to eject the fluid*.


CLS 347/49
TXT Modular:

    Subject matter under subclass 20 wherein the ejector* mechanism or its
    components are assembled for replacement.


CLS 347/50
TXT Electrical connector means:

    Subject matter under subclass 20 further including means for
    interconnecting an ejector* mechanism to a signal means or to interconnect
    ejector* elements or components (e.g., transducers*) to a signal source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for electrical
    connectors in general.


CLS 347/51
TXT Optical energy acting on fluid:

    Subject matter under subclass 20 wherein the ejector* mechanism includes a
    transducer* which enables optical energy to interact with a marking* fluid*
    in the ejection process.


CLS 347/52
TXT Electron beam acting on fluid:

    Subject matter under subclass 20 wherein  the ejector* mechanism includes a
    transducer* which enables a beam of electrons to interact with the fluid*
    in the ejection process.


CLS 347/53
TXT Magnetic:

    Subject matter under subclass 20 wherein the ejector* mechanism includes a
    transducer* which enables a magnetic field to interact with a magnetic
    fluid* in the ejection process.


CLS 347/54
TXT Drop-on-demand:

    Subject matter under subclass 20 wherein the ejection mechanism is
    intermittently energized to eject the fluid* onto a receiving medium* on a
    noncontinuous basis.


CLS 347/55
TXT With applied electric field ejection (applied to fluid):

    Subject matter under subclass 54 wherein the source of intermittent
    energization is an electric field.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the electric field is applied to the
    fluid*. The fluid* may contain ions or electrons. For application of an
    electric field to an ion or electron beam, see Class 346, subclasses 159 or
    158 respectively. The simultaneous development of a modulated ion or
    electron beam formation is found in Class 346, subclasses 159 or 158.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    399,    Electrophotography, subclass 135 for modulation of ions or charged
    particles.


CLS 347/56
TXT With thermal force ejection:

    Subject matter under subclass 54 wherein the source of intermittent
    energization is thermal energy (e.g., heat).

    (1)     Note.  Bubble ink jets are included in this subclass.


CLS 347/57
TXT Drive signal application:

    Subject matter under subclass 56 wherein at least a drive signal to the
    ejector* means and/or its application are specified.


CLS 347/58
TXT Wiring:

    Subject matter under subclass 57 wherein the drive signal is supplied to
    the transducer* by wiring.


CLS 347/59
TXT Integrated:

    Subject matter under subclass 58 wherein the wiring is mounted on a single
    substrate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses for active electric components which are solid,
    especially subclasses 734+ combined* with an electrical contact or lead.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, subclass 21 for
    methods of making an electrical device controlled printhead utilizing a
    semiconductor substrate.


CLS 347/60
TXT Preheat:

    Subject matter under subclass 56 wherein the ejector* is heated prior to
    discharge.


CLS 347/61
TXT Thermal force generators:

    Subject matter under subclass 56 wherein the thermal force is created by a
    particular thermal generator.


CLS 347/62
TXT Resistor specifics:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein the thermal force generator is a
    resistive means, and details (e.g. form, composition, etc.) of the
    resistive means are specified.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 610.1+ for resistor making.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, appropriate subclasses for electrical
    resistors, especially subclasses 306+ for resistors on a base and subclass
    333 for resistor configurations and/or dimensions.


CLS 347/63
TXT Composite ejector:

    Subject matter under subclass 56 wherein the ejector* mechanism is formed
    by a plurality of layers.


CLS 347/64
TXT Protective:

    Subject matter under subclass 63 wherein one of the layers is provided as a
    protection against the corrosive nature of the fluid*.


CLS 347/65
TXT Flow path:

    Subject matter under subclass 63 wherein one of the layers is provided to
    define a passage for the fluid*.


CLS 347/66
TXT Head separate from fluid supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 56 wherein the fluid* supply means is
    distinct from the ejector* mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     for fluid* recirculation by means of a carrier.


CLS 347/67
TXT With additional feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 56 wherein the ejector* mechanism is provided
    with a supplementary feature such as a sensor.


CLS 347/68
TXT With piezoelectric force ejection:

    Subject matter under subclass 54 wherein the source of intermittent
    energization is a piezoelectric element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 311+ for
    piezoelectric elements and devices.


CLS 347/69
TXT Shear mode:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 in which the piezoelectric element is
    displaced or deformed to change the volume of ink chamber to eject ink due
    to shearing strains.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 333 for
    shear-mode-type piezoelectric elements.


CLS 347/70
TXT With vibratory plate:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein the piezoelectric element
    contracts to deform a vibration plate attached directly to the
    piezoelectric element to expel ink droplets.


CLS 347/71
TXT Layers, plates:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein the ejector* mechanism is an
    assembly which comprises a plurality of plates.


CLS 347/72
TXT Plural piezoelectric laminate:

    Subject matter under subclass 71 wherein a plurality of piezoelectric
    ceramic layers and a plurality of electrode layers are alternately
    laminated on each other to form the piezoelectric element.


CLS 347/73
TXT Continuous stream (includes dispersion):

    Subject matter under subclass 20 wherein the ejector* mechanism
    continuously ejects the fluid* (i.e., in the form of a stream).


CLS 347/74
TXT With individual drop generation and/or control:

    Subject matter under subclass 73 further including means to form drops from
    the continuously ejected fluid* stream and direct their movement relative
    to the record medium*.


CLS 347/75
TXT Drop generation means:

    Subject matter under subclass 74 wherein the drop formation means includes
    a specific structure for creating or controlling drop formation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 4 and 102.1
    for vibratory discharge of fluid*.


CLS 347/76
TXT Drop charge means:

    Subject matter under subclass 74 wherein the drop formation or direction
    means includes means for providing an electric charge on a drop.


CLS 347/77
TXT Drop deflection means:

    Subject matter under subclass 74 wherein the means to direct the drop
    movement includes means to change the direction of a drop relative to the
    stream.


CLS 347/78
TXT Drop correction:

    Subject matter under subclass 74 wherein means are provided for corrective
    action on the drop formation and/or direction process.


CLS 347/79
TXT Charge compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein the corrective action is in the
    drop charging process.


CLS 347/80
TXT Synchronization of drop separation and charge time:

    Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein the corrective action is in drop
    separation-charge timing relationship.


CLS 347/81
TXT Drop sensors:

    Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein specific detection means are
    provided for the corrective action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for other fluid* sensors.


CLS 347/82
TXT With stream deflection:

    Subject matter under subclass 73 further including means to change the
    direction of the continuously ejected fluid*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for drop deflection means.


CLS 347/83
TXT With aerosol formation:

    Subject matter under subclass 73 wherein the continuous ejected fluid* is a
    colloidal dispersion of fluid* drops in ambient atmosphere or a supplied
    gas.


CLS 347/84
TXT Fluid or fluid source handling means:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein means are provided for controlling,
    treating, supplying, or otherwise manipulating the ejection fluid*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 300+ for projection or spray type
    coating apparatus.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for fluid* handling in
    dispensing material.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, appropriate subclasses for fluid valves
    in general.

    417,    Pumps, appropriate subclasses for fluid* pumps in general.


CLS 347/85
TXT Fluid supply system:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 including means to supply the fluid* to or
    from the ejector* mechanism.


CLS 347/86
TXT Cartridge:

    Subject matter under subclass 85 wherein all or part of the fluid* supply
    means is a removable assembly.


CLS 347/87
TXT With integral ejector:

    Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein the removable assembly includes an
    ejector* housing.


CLS 347/88
TXT For hot-melt fluid (e.g., phase-change):

    Subject matter under subclass 85 wherein the fluid* source is in a solid
    form and is changed to a liquid form  prior to  or during ejection.


CLS 347/89
TXT With recirculation:

    Subject matter under subclass 85 including means to supply the fluid* to
    the ejector* mechanism and return fluid* back to the fluid* supply means
    (e.g., reservoir).


CLS 347/90
TXT Collector's or catcher's specifics:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the recirculation means includes
    means to collect or catch the ejected fluid* which is not used in the
    marking* process.


CLS 347/91
TXT With carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the recirculation is performed by
    a means such as an endless band or drum to carry the fluid* from the source
    to the  ejector* and back.


CLS 347/92
TXT With means to remove and/or accommodate bubbles in the fluid:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 including means to remove or otherwise
    handle gas bubbles in the fluid*.


CLS 347/93
TXT With fluid treatment (e.g., filtering):

    Subject matter under subclass 84 including means to treat the fluid* (e.g.,
    by filtering impurities from it).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 348+ for filters for
    liquid purification or separation.


CLS 347/94
TXT With means to reduce vibrations in the fluid (damping):

    Subject matter under subclass 84 including means to lessen or modify
    vibrations in the fluid*.


CLS 347/95
TXT Fluid (e.g., fluid specifics):

    Subject matter under subclass 84 wherein the ejected fluid* has specified
    characteristics.

    (1)     Note.  The fluid* can be a liquid, powder, gas, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, subclass 158 for a modulated flow of electrons and
    subclass 159 for a modulated flow of ions.


CLS 347/96
TXT Reactive:

    Subject matter under subclass 95 wherein the ejected fluid* characteristic
    is an ability to chemically react.

    (1)     Note.  For example, a reaction could be formed by a component in
    the fluid* with another component in the medium*.


CLS 347/97
TXT Gas:

    Subject matter under subclass 95 wherein the ejected fluid* is a gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, subclass 76 for a heated gas which marks* a medium.


CLS 347/98
TXT Colorless:

    Subject matter under subclass 95 wherein the ejected fluid* characteristic
    is that it is achromatic (colorless).


CLS 347/99
TXT Hot-melt (e.g., phase-change):

    Subject matter under subclass 95 wherein the ejected fluid* is one which
    changes its physical state within the ink jet.


CLS 347/100
TXT Ink:

    Subject matter under subclass 95 wherein the ejected fluid* has a substance
    such as a dye or pigment for visualizing the marking*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses for inks
    with natural resins and subclass 31.13 for ink jet compositions.

    523,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses for ink
    composition with synthetic resins.

    524,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses for ink
    composition with synthetic resins.


CLS 347/101
TXT Medium and processing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including means specific to the medium* and
    its processing.


CLS 347/102
TXT Drying or curing:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 including means for drying or otherwise
    heat treating a receiving medium*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses
    for drying in general.

    101,    Printing, subclass 488 for printing with heating or cooling of the
    print medium*.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 216 for heating devices in printing or
    reproduction devices.

    346,    Recorders, subclass 25 for a recorder combined* with a dryer.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 320+ for heat fixation in
    electrophotography.


CLS 347/103
TXT Transfer of fluid* to another record medium*:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 including means to transfer fluid* from
    one receiving medium* to another.


CLS 347/104
TXT Physical handling:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 including means to physically handle
    (e.g., feed, sort, cut, align, collect, or stack) a receiving medium*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for advancing material of indeterminate length.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, appropriate subclasses for winding
    and reeling.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, appropriate subclasses for sheet
    feeding or delivering.

    346,    Recorders, subclasses 134+ for driving for a record receiver in a
    recorder.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 361+ for document handling in
    electrophotography.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 578+ for sheet or web feeding in a
    typewriter.


CLS 347/105
TXT Receiving medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein the receiving medium* has a
    special characteristic such as fluid* receiving layer. Included herein are
    medium* type detectors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, subclass 135.1 for lamented, impregnated, or coated base
    record receivers.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for stock material in general.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, appropriate subclasses for receivers subject to radiation imagery.


CLS 347/106
TXT Physical characteristics:

    Subject matter under subclass 105 wherein the special property is a
    physical characteristic (such as a size or shape).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for conveyed object.


CLS 347/107
TXT With unique pattern:

    Subject matter under subclass 101  wherein the ejected drop forms a special
    pattern on the receiving medium*. For example, the pattern could be a coded
    record such as a bar code.


CLS 347/108
TXT Housing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein an outer enclosure  is provided for
    the ink jet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, subclass 145 for instrument support in a recorder.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 691+ for frame casing or support
    in a typewriter.


CLS 347/109
TXT Hand-held:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein the enclosure is sized and
    structured to be held in or manipulated by a human hand.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, subclass 143 for hand-driven recorders.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclass 88 for pocket typewriters.


CLS 347/110
TXT MARKING DEVICES:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a marking* device is
    provided to produce the portion* by portion* symbol* or mark* in a
    particular manner.


CLS 347/111
TXT ELECTRIC MARKING APPARATUS OR PROCESSES:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising means for applying
    electricity to a medium for recording an image.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, subclasses 150.1+ for phenomenal electric recording.


CLS 347/112
TXT Electrostatic:

    Subject matter under subclass 111 wherein an electrostatic charge is
    deposited onto, or discharged from, the medium to directly or indirectly
    form  a visible image thereon in accordance with an electrical information
    signal representing the image.

    (1)     Note.  The medium includes an intermediate substrate (belt or drum)
    for receiving a latent or a visible image; or a permanent substrate for
    receiving a transferred visible image.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159,    for an electric recorder wherein an image is formed by an
    electrical discharge from a head onto the medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, especially subclasses 620+ for a coating device
    including means to apply electrical or radiant energy to work material or
    coating material.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 324 for corona discharging of objects in
    general.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 327 for electrostatic
    measuring and testing.

    346,    Recorders, subclasses 74.2+ for the creation of visible images by
    magnetic means and methods.

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 906 through 908 for recorder combined with a
    televsion system, and subclasses 400+ for a facsimile apparatus.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, for the magnetic
    recording of nonvisible information; e.g., audio, video, and digital
    information.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, for the recording of
    nonvisible information; e.g., audio, video, and digital information.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics, subclasses 38+
    for controls, subclasses 130+ for image formation, subclasses 168+ for
    charging, subclasses 177+ for exposure, subclasses 222+ for development,
    subclasses 297+ for transfer, subclasses 320+ for fixing, subclasses 343+
    for cleaning, and subclasses 361+ for document handling.

    427,    Coating Processes, especially subclasses 457+ for methods of
    development of the latent image.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a layered dielectric recording sheet.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 31+ and 900+ for the chemical process and material
    (e.g., layered photoconductive recording sheet) of electroimagery and
    magnetoimagery.


CLS 347/113
TXT Thermoplastic:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein the latent image is made visible
    by applying heat to cause plastic deformation of a charged medium.

    (1)     Note.  Electrostatic recorders using a thermal marker merely to
    charge or discharge the medium is classified in subclass 114.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, subclass 77 for a nonelectrostatic recorder which uses
    heat to cause a plastic deformation of the medium.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 47 for
    thermoplastic analog storage and retrieval systems, and subclass 126 for
    information masking systems which use a thermoplastic material.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 100+ for
    recording on an optical medium to create a nonvisible deformation on the
    medium.


CLS 347/114
TXT Electrothermographic:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein a thermal marker is used to
    either charge, or discharge, the medium in imagewise configuration in
    accordance with the information signal representing the image.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is distinguished from subclasses 171+ due to
    an electrostatic latent image formed by the marker.

    (2)     Note.  The use of heat to create visible image by plastic
    deformation of a charged medium is classified in  subclass 113.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   for details of a thermal head used in thermal marking apparatus.


CLS 347/115
TXT Multicolor:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 comprising means for forming a composite
    image having different colors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172+,   for multicolor thermal marking.

    232+,   for multicolor radiation marking.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, subclass 74.7 for multicolor magnetic recording.

    355,    Photocopying, subclass 88 for multicolor photographic copies.

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 500+ for a color facsimile apparatus.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclass 28 for analyzing a malfunction or
    potential malfunction of color reproduction, subclasses 39+ for balance
    control of color, subclass 54 for color selection control, subclass 112 for
    modular or displaceable color process cartridge unit, subclasses 178+ for
    formation of color separation images, subclass 184 for color image editing
    a selectable area, subclasses 223+ for development (e.g., applicators) of a
    color image, subclasses 298+ for transfer of a color image, subclass 326
    for fixing or fusing of a color image, and subclass 321 for cleaning an
    imaging surface with color.


CLS 347/116
TXT Registration:

    Subject matter under subclass 115 comprising means for aligning multiple
    subimages of different colors on the medium with respect to each other when
    forming the composite color image.


CLS 347/117
TXT Plural heads:

    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein means for forming the composite
    image includes two or more markers.

    (1)     Note.  The markers are used to either charge or discharge the
    medium to form the latent image.


CLS 347/118
TXT Using light as exposure means:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 wherein the markers are light emitting
    devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121+,   for an electrostatic recorder using a CRT as an exposure means.

    129+,   for photoscanning electrostatic recording.


CLS 347/119
TXT Single head using light as exposure means:

    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein the means for forming the
    composite image includes a light emitting device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121+,   for an electrostatic recorder using a CRT as an exposure means.

    129+,   for photoscanning electrostatic recording.


CLS 347/120
TXT By information carrying flow of invisible charged particles:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein a flow of nonvisible charged
    particles (e.g., ions, electrons) is modulated to place the electrostatic
    charge on the medium in imagewise form in accordance with the information
    signal to form the image.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is distinguished from ink jets, subclass 55 by
     the lack of direct modulation of the visible charged  particles.  Only the
    nonvisible charged particles are being directly modulated in imagewise form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for an ink jet printer that modulates a flow of visible particles
    (e.g., ink droplets, toner particles, etc.) by electric or    magnetic
    fields to place a visible image directly on a recording medium.

    124,    for the subject matter of this subclass including simultaneous
    development wherein an unmodulated flow of toner is directly  applied to,
    or attracted to, the recording medium by the modulated flow of nonvisible
    charged particles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses for a
    general ion source.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 168+ for charging, particularly
    subclasses 170+ for corona.


CLS 347/121
TXT Electron beam generator with air tight envelope:

    Subject matter under subclass 120 comprising means for modulating a beam of
    electrons in a vacuum (e.g., CRT) onto a faceplate, or the medium, to
    either directly, or indirectly, charge, or discharge, the medium in an
    imagewise manner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226+,   for a radiation marking apparatus using a CRT.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 364+ for a CRT, per
    se.


CLS 347/122
TXT Including latent image generation using luminescent material:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 comprising means for converting the
    electrons to photons wherein the photons produce the latent image by
    charging, or discharging, the medium.


CLS 347/123
TXT Specific ionographic head:

    Subject matter under subclass 120 including details of a marker for
    modulating a uniform flow of the nonvisible charged particles.


CLS 347/124
TXT Including simultaneous development:

    Subject matter under subclass 123 wherein the modulated flow of nonvisible
    charged particles either attracts, or applies, visible toner or ink to the
    medium.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes the modulated flow of nonvisible
    charged particles being passed through an ink mist toner cloud to cause
    development of the medium.


CLS 347/125
TXT Fluid assisted charged particle flow or generation:

    Subject matter under subclass 123 wherein a liquid or pressurized gas
    enhances the transport or generation of the charged particles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 231.01+ for fluent
    material supplied to a general ion source.


CLS 347/126
TXT Modified or specific fluid (e.g., heated, dehumidified,specified gas):

    Subject matter under subclass 125 wherein the liquid or the gas is treated,
    or a fluid with specified properties is used (e.g., heated, dehumidified,
    electronegative gas, etc.).


CLS 347/127
TXT Laminated head including charged particle generation layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 123 wherein the means for modulating the
    uniform flow of nonvisible charged particles is a multilayered structure
    including one or more electrode layers which produces the charged particles.


CLS 347/128
TXT Including driving circuitry:

    Subject matter under subclass 120 comprising electrical means, for
    operating a charged particle modulator, or an ion generator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclass 111.81 for
    an electrical system for a general ion source.


CLS 347/129
TXT Photo scanning:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein at least one writing beam is
    progressed line by line or point by point (e.g., LEDs) to either charge, or
    discharge, the medium in imagewise configuration in accordance with the
    information signal representing the image.

    (1)     Note. This subclass is distinguished from Class 399,
    Electrophotography, due to the electrical information signal modulating the
    writing beam (i.e., exposure).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121+,   for an electrostatic recorder using a CRT as an exposure means for
    the photoconductor.

    225+,   for a general radiation marking apparatus using light to scan a
    record receiver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics, subclasses 38+
    for controls, subclasses 130+ for image formation, subclasses 168+ for
    charging, subclasses 177+ for exposure, subclasses 222+ for development,
    subclasses 297+ for transfer, subclasses 320+ for fixing, subclasses 343+
    for cleaning, and subclasses 361+ for document handling.


CLS 347/130
TXT Light emitting diodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein the writing beam is emitted from
    a light-emitting semiconductor device.


CLS 347/131
TXT Dot density or dot size control (e.g., halftone):

    Subject matter under subclass 129 comprising means for selecting recording
    resolution or grey level.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188+,   for density control in a thermal marking apparatus.

    240+,   for tone marking in a plural beam recorder.

    251+,   for tone marking in a singular beam recorder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    358,    Facsimile, appropriate subclasses for related subject matter.


CLS 347/132
TXT Beam generator driving means:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 comprising operating means for
    controlling an activation of a light beam generator to emit the writing
    beam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247,    for driving circuitry in a singular beam recorder.

    237,    for driving circuitry in a plural beam recorder.


CLS 347/133
TXT Having feedback or environmental control:

    Subject matter under subclass 132 wherein either an output of the writing
    beam or an ambient condition signal is detected and converted to an
    electrical signal which controls the activation of the light beam generator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235,    for scan synchronization in a plural beam recorder.

    236,    for feedback of light for intensity control in a plural beam
    recorder.

    246,    for feedback of light for intensity control in a singular   beam
    recorder.

    250,    for scan synchronization in a singular beam recorder.


CLS 347/134
TXT Optical elements interposed between record receiver and beam generator:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 comprising light beam modifying means
    located between the medium and a light beam generator for affecting the
    formation of the image.

    (1)     Note.  The light beam modifying means includes, for example, light
    guides, lens, light modulator, deformable mirror device, rotating polygon,
    mirrors, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241+,   for optical elements in a plural beam recorder.

    256+,   for optical elements in a singular beam recorder.


CLS 347/135
TXT Light intensity modulation means:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 wherein a recording energy of at least
    one writing beam is varied by an electrically variable optically
    transmission element, located between the medium and the light beam
    generator, in accordance with the information signal thereby creating at
    least one modulated writing beam.

    (1)     Note.  The electrically variable optically transmission element may
    be acousto-optic, electro-optic, Bragg-cell, light valve, spatial light
    modulator, TIR device (total internal reflection device), or magneto-optic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239,    for a specific light modular in a plural beam recorder.

    255,    for a specific light modular in a singular beam recorder.


CLS 347/136
TXT Shutter device:

    Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein the electrically variable
    optically transmission element either passes or blocks the light beam in a
    binary manner.


CLS 347/137
TXT Lens:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 wherein the light beam modifying means
    includes a transparent optical device for converging, or diverging, the
    writing beam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244,    for a specific lens in a plural beam recorder.

    258,    for a specific lens in a singular beam recorder.


CLS 347/138
TXT Housing or mounting:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 comprising means for enclosing or
    supporting the recording apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    for housing or mounting in a generic electrostatic recorder.

    170,    for housing or mounting in an electrolytic recorder.

    222,    for housing or mounting in a thermal recorder.

    245,    for housing or mounting in a plural beam recorder.

    263,    for housing or mounting in a singular beam recorder.


CLS 347/139
TXT Record receiver or conveyor means therefor:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 comprising:  (a) a recording medium onto
    which a permanent image is formed, or (b) means for feeding, or
    transporting, the recording medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262,    for record handling in a scanning beam optical recorder.

    264,    for record handling in a generic optical recorder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, appropriate subclasses for related
    subject matter.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 297+ for transfer, subclasses 320+
    for fixing, and subclasses 361+ for document handling.


CLS 347/140
TXT Developer or charger mechanism:

    Subject matter under 129 including means for delivering, containing, or
    affecting distribution of the charge or visible particles to develop the
    latent images (i.e., toner).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158,    for a developer means in a generic electrostatic apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics, subclasses 38+
    for controls, subclasses 130+ for image formation, subclasses 168+ for
    charging, subclasses 177+ for exposure, subclasses 222+ for development,
    subclasses 297+ for transfer, subclasses 320+ for fixing, subclasses 343+
    for cleaning, and subclasses 361+ for document handling.


CLS 347/141
TXT Specific electrostatic head:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 comprising details of a marker having
    electrode styli by which the electrostatic charge is deposited onto, or
    discharged from, the medium.


CLS 347/142
TXT Signal switching:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 comprising a circuit interrupter for
    selectively energizing a plurality of electrodes in accordance with the
    image signal.


CLS 347/143
TXT Amplitude modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 142 wherein at least the intensity of the
    energized pulses is changed.


CLS 347/144
TXT Time based modulation (e.g., pulse width, duty cycle, rise time):

    Subject matter under subclass 142 comprising means for changing a duration
    or a transition time of energized pulses (e.g., pulse width, duty cycle,
    rise time).


CLS 347/145
TXT Block driving:

    Subject matter under subclass 142 wherein the electrodes are divided into
    groups capable of being selectively energized.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180+,   for block driving in a thermal recorder.


CLS 347/146
TXT Character wheel:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein at least one electrode stylus is
    a character-supporting movable member (e.g., a disc or cylinder with
    characters formed on its periphery).

    (1)     Note.  Electrostatic recorders having characters raised on an
    electrode surface are classified herein and not in Class 101 since in these
    devices a mere electrostatic latent image is produced, not yielding a
    visible impression or coating as required by the Class 101 definition.


CLS 347/147
TXT Specific head tip:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 comprising details of the writing end of
    the marker.


CLS 347/148
TXT Printed circuit or wiring:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 including fabercated or etched conductive
    stripes, or details of connections for the electrodes on the marker.


CLS 347/149
TXT Spacing or pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 including means for controlling contact,
    or distance between, the marker and the  medium.


CLS 347/150
TXT Composition:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 including a specified material that makes
    up the marker.


CLS 347/151
TXT Using recording head to selectively charge toner:

    Subject matter subclass 141 wherein an electrostatic stylus is used to
    selectively charge a previously applied uniform coating of unmodulated
    visible particles on the medium in imagewise form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for an Ink jet printer that modulates a flow of visible particles
    (e.g., ink droplets, toner particles, etc.) by electric or magnetic fields
    to place a visible image directly on a recording medium.

    124,    when an ionographic head is used for attracting or depositing toner
    onto a recording medium.

    141+,   for specific details of an electrostatic head.


CLS 347/152
TXT Housing or mounting:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 comprising means for enclosing or
    supporting the marking device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    for housing or mounting in a photo scanning electrostatic recorder.

    170,    for housing or mounting in an electrolytic recorder.

    222,    for housing or mounting in a thermal recorder.

    245,    for housing or mounting in a plural beam recorder.

    263,    for housing or mounting in a singular beam recorder.


CLS 347/153
TXT With medium for receiving an image or feeding means therefor:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 comprising a recording medium for
    receiving an image, or a means for driving the recording medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164,    for record handling in an electrochemical recorder.

    218,    for record handling in a thermal recorder.

    262,    for record handling in a scanning beam recorder.

    264,    for record handling in a generic radiation recorder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, appropriate subclasses for related
    subject matter.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics, subclasses 38+
    for controls, subclasses 130+ for image formation, subclasses 168+ for
    charging, subclasses 177+ for exposure, subclasses 222+ for development,
    subclasses 297+ for transfer, subclasses 320+ for fixing, subclasses 343+
    for cleaning, and subclasses 361+ for document handling.


CLS 347/154
TXT Endless web or belt for the latent image:

    Subject matter under subclass 153 wherein the medium comprises a movable
    loop having a photoconductive, or dielectric, receiving surface onto which
    the electrostatic charge is deposited.


CLS 347/155
TXT Pre or post treatment:

    Subject matter under subclass 153 comprising means for applying a
    substance, energy, or pressure upon a permanent record receiver before, or
    after, the image is formed thereon to enhance the quality of the image.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212,    for pre or post image recording treatment in a thermal recorder.


CLS 347/156
TXT Fixing or fusing:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 comprising means for applying the
    substance, energy, or pressure upon the permanent record receiver after the
    image is formed thereon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics, subclasses 38+
    for controls, subclasses 320+ for fixing, subclasses 343+ for cleaning, and
    subclasses 361+ for document handling.


CLS 347/157
TXT Including cutter means:

    Subject matter under subclass 153 comprising means for severing the
    recording medium into segments.


CLS 347/158
TXT Including toner delivery means:

    Subject matter under 153 comprising means for depositing onto the recording
    medium, or delivering to the recording medium, visible particles to develop
    the latent image.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140,    for a developer means in a scanning apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics, subclasses 38+
    for controls, and subclasses 222+ for development.


CLS 347/159
TXT By electrical discharge (e.g., spark):

    Subject matter under subclass 111 wherein an image is formed by dielectric
    breakdown.

    (1)     Note.  The dielectric breakdown may cause an electrical discharge
    from a head onto a medium by direct contact or across an airgap.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for a generic spark recorder combined with an external means for
    recording the functioning of the external means.

    112,    for an electrostatic recorder wherein an image is formed on a
    medium by electrostatic charge deposited onto or discharged from the medium.

    199,    for thermal marking devices having resistive layer formed on the
    transfer material or the recording material to conduct and generate heat
    for marking purposes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 384 for perforating by an electric spark.

    346,    Recorders, subclass 150.2 for phenomenal electrical discharge
    recording.


CLS 347/160
TXT Rotary head support:

    Subject matter under subclass 159 including a rotating means for engaging,
    or holding, a recording head.


CLS 347/161
TXT Electrical discharge burning (e.g., oxidation or electroerosion):

    Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein the medium is  oxidized or eroded
    by the dielectric breakdown.


CLS 347/162
TXT Including driving circuitry:

    Subject matter under subclass 159 including means for controlling a current
    applied to the recording head or marker.


CLS 347/163
TXT By electrochemical:

    Subject matter under subclass 111 wherein an image is produced by reaction
    of a chemical (e.g., electrolyte) to an electrical potential applied by a
    head.

    (1)     Note. This subclass is distinguished from subclasses 171+ by the
    lack of heat transfer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171+,   for  thermal recording apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 62 for chemical and electrolytic telegraphic
    recorders.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, appropriate subclasses for related subject
    subject matter.

    346,    Recorders, subclass 150.3 for phenomenal electrochemical recording.


CLS 347/164
TXT With record receiver or handling means therefor:

    Subject matter under subclass 163 comprising a medium onto which the
    produced image is recorded, or driving or supporting means therefor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164,    for record handling in a generic electrostatic recorder.

    218,    for record handling in a thermal recorder.

    262,    for record handling in a scanning beam recorder.

    264,    for record handling in a generic radiation recorder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, appropriate subclasses for related
    subject matter.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics, subclasses 38+
    for controls, subclasses 130+ for image formation, subclasses 168+ for
    charging, subclasses 177+ for exposure, subclasses 222+ for development,
    subclasses 297+ for transfer, subclasses 320+ for fixing, subclasses 343+
    for cleaning, and subclasses 361+ for document handling.


CLS 347/165
TXT Including treating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 164 comprising means for depositing onto the
    medium, or immersing the medium into, a liquid substance.


CLS 347/166
TXT Specific head:

    Subject matter under subclass 163 comprising details of a maker.


CLS 347/167
TXT Including motor for driving head:

    Subject matter under subclass 166 comprising means for converting
    electrical energy to mechanical energy for effecting motion of the marker.


CLS 347/168
TXT Including driving circuitry:

    Subject matter under subclass 166 comprising electrical means for applying
    the potential to the marker in accordance with an information signal.


CLS 347/169
TXT Helix drum:

    Subject matter under subclass 166 wherein a raised conductor on a rotatable
    drum in the form of a spiral is used as a backing electrode to effect
    scanning of the recording medium when the drum is rotated.


CLS 347/170
TXT Housing or mounting:

    Subject matter under subclass 163 comprising means for enclosing, or
    supporting, the marking device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    for housing or mounting in a photo scanning electrostatic recorder.

    170,    for housing or mounting in a generic electrostatic recorder.

    222,    for housing or mounting in a thermal recorder.

    245,    for housing or mounting in a plural beam recorder.

    263,    for housing or mounting in a singular beam recorder.


CLS 347/171
TXT THERMAL MARKING APPARATUS OR PROCESSES:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a recording means  (e.g.,
    thermal head) is heated or transmits an electrical heating current to a
    conductive record receiver or transfer material to produce a symbol or mark
    upon a record receiver  by the reason of the receiver becoming scorched,
    burned, marked, or otherwise thermochemically changed.

    (1)     Note.  The use of an optical radiation energy beam to record on a
    heat sensitive or photosensitive paper is excluded from this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Thermal print head having heating elements used as heaters
    for printing incremental information is classified in this class,
    subclasses 200+; and not in Class 219, Electric Heating, subclasses 120 and
    543.  Class 219 is provided for generic electric heaters, per se, or for
    significant structural details of a generic electric heater in combination
    with a printing or reproducing device.

    (3)     Note.  Related subject matter involved the use of heat for causing
    an intelligible character to be imprinted on a record medium by a
    type-member is classified in Class 400, Typewriting Machines.

    (4)     Note.  The record may be produced by bringing the heated recording
    means in contact with the record receiver either directly or indirectly
    through an ink transfer medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for an electrostatic recorder wherein heat is applied to a charged
    medium to cause plastic deformation of the medium.

    163,    for electrochemical recording.

    224+,   for the use of  a radiation energy beam to record on a
    heatsensitive or photosensitive medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, appropriate subclasses for related subject matter,
    particularly subclass 288 for web and  subclasses 483+ for processes.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for applying a coating
    surface on a base.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 216 for printing or reproduction device.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, appropriate subclasses for generic
    sheet feeding or delivering apparatus.

    346,    Recorders, subclass 76.1 for phenomenal thermal recorders.

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 296+ for recording apparatus in facsimile.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics, subclasses 38+
    for controls, subclass 130+ for image formation, subclasses 168+ for
    charging, subclasses 177+ for exposure, subclasses 222+ for development,
    subclasses 297+ for transfer, subclasses 320+ for fixing, subclasses 343+
    for cleaning, and subclasses 361+ for document handling.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclass
    120.01 for thermal or hot-stamp typing.

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclasses coating a base.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for web or sheet, per se.


CLS 347/172
TXT Multicolor:

    Subject matter under subclass 171  wherein the symbol or mark is produced
    in a plurality of colors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74.7,   for multiple color magnetographic recording.

    115+,   for multicolor electrostatic recording.

    232+,   for multicolor recording by light beam scanning across record
    medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 75+ for natural color facsimile and 298 for
    half tone recording apparatus in facsimile.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 120.01+ for multicolor typing.


CLS 347/173
TXT Single pass:

    Subject matter under subclass 172 wherein the multicolor symbol or mark is
    produced by a marking apparatus comprising at least two thermal heads and a
    record receiver passed through the heads in one direction.


CLS 347/174
TXT Single-head type (e.g., multipass):

    Subject matter under subclass 172 wherein the multicolor symbol or mark is
    produced by a marking apparatus comprising a transfer material and a single
    thermal head operatively connected to transfer ink colors at different
    energy levels or to perform consecutive cycles of printing operations.


CLS 347/175
TXT Having multilayers colored transfer material:

    Subject matter under subclass 174 wherein the transfer material is a
    longitudinal strip having overlap layers of different ink colors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 237+ for ribbon, per se.


CLS 347/176
TXT Having single-layer colored transfer material:

    Subject matter under subclass 174 wherein the transfer material  is a
    single layer strip having sections of different ink colors arranged thereon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses  237+ and 240+ for ribbon, per se,
    and ribbon having differently pigmented fields.


CLS 347/177
TXT Including sensor means:

    Subject matter under subclass 176 comprising a device responsive to a
    physical stimulus (e.g., light, motion) for producing a signal indicating
    status of the record receiver or the transfer material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses  247+ for ribbon sensors.


CLS 347/178
TXT For detecting color:

    Subject matter  under subclass 177 wherein the signal indicates ink color
    on the transfer material.


CLS 347/179
TXT With correction or erasing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 171 comprising means for repairing an
    erroneous recorded symbol or mark or for removing at least a portion of
    thermal fusible material left on a used transfer material.

    (1)     Note.  Means for repairing includes, for example, means for
    applying a correction ink onto the erroneous recorded symbol or mark or
    means for lifting of the erroneous recorded image data composed of thermal
    fusible material from the record receiver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 695+ for typewriting machines
    including means for correcting typing errors.


CLS 347/180
TXT Block driving:

    Subject matter under subclass 171 wherein the recording means comprises
    recording elements grouped into sections capable of being selectively
    energized.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145,    for block driving in an electrostatic recorder.


CLS 347/181
TXT Simultaneously:

    Subject matter under subclass 180 in which at least two  of the sections
    are energized at the same time.


CLS 347/182
TXT Sequentially:

    Subject matter under subclass 180 in which at least two of the sections are
    energized alternately.


CLS 347/183
TXT Gradational recording:

    Subject matter under subclass 171 wherein brightness of the produced symbol
    or mark varies from a very light color to a very dark color.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131,    for halftone recording in an electrostatic recorder.

    240,    for tone marking using a plurality of scanning beams.

    251+,   for tone marking using a single scanning beam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 298 for half tone recording in facsimile.


CLS 347/184
TXT Look up table:

    Subject matter of subclass 183 comprising a storage means for storing data
    related to the brightness of the produced symbol or mark.


CLS 347/185
TXT Preheating:

    Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 171 wherein a warming up
    process is performed  before marking is commenced.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 216 for printing or reproducing devices.


CLS 347/186
TXT Recording means:

    Subject matter under subclass 185 in which the recording means is being
    preheated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for prehearing of an ejector in an ink jet recorder.


CLS 347/187
TXT Transfer material or recording medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 185 in which the record receiver or an ink
    carrier strip for transferring ink onto the record receiver is being
    preheated.


CLS 347/188
TXT Density control:

    Subject matter under subclass 171 comprising a regulating means for
    controlling amount of heating energy supplied to the recording means to
    maintain a uniform output on the produced symbol or mark.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131,    for dot density or dot size control in an electrostatic recorder
    using scanning light beam.

    251+,   for tone marking using singular scanning light beam.


CLS 347/189
TXT In accordance with ambient temperature:

    Subject matter under subclass 188 wherein the regulating means responds to
    variations in  temperature surrounding the apparatus for controlling the
    amount of heating energy.


CLS 347/190
TXT By  number of heated recording elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 188 wherein the regulating means controls the
    amount of heating energy supplied to selected recording elements of the
    recording means based on a number of recording elements being
    simultaneously energized.


CLS 347/191
TXT In accordance with thermal output characteristic of the recording means:

    Subject matter under subclass 188 wherein regulating means responds to
    variations in resistance values of heat radiating resistor elements
    constituting recording elements of the recording means for controlling the
    amount of heating energy.


CLS 347/192
TXT By variation in power supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 188 wherein the regulating means responds to
    changes in  magnitude of the voltage supplied to the recording means for
    controlling the amount of heating energy.


CLS 347/193
TXT By  transfer material or record receiver:

    Subject matter under subclass 188 wherein the regulating means controls the
    amount of heating energy in according with the type of transfer material or
    record receiver being used or in response to a status associated with the
    transfer material or record receiver.

    (1)     Note.  A status associated with the transfer material or record
    receiver includes, for example, size of paper, distance traveled by paper
    or ribbon, length of ribbon to record data, pressure of ribbon cassette,
    etc.


CLS 347/194
TXT In accordance with temperature of the recording means:

    Subject matter under subclass 188 wherein the regulating means responds to
    variations in temperature of the recording means for controlling the amount
    of heating energy.


CLS 347/195
TXT By history of recording elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 188 wherein the regulating means controls the
    amount of heating energy supplied to a particular recording element of the
    recording means based on data reflecting  quantity of energy supplied to
    the particular recording element or to its adjacent recording elements
    during  previous, present, or future recording cycles.


CLS 347/196
TXT Using pulse width modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 195 wherein the amount of heating energy
    supplied to the particular recording element is controlled by varying time
    duration of activated pulses.


CLS 347/197
TXT Recording means engaging or holding means:

    Subject matter under subclass 171 comprising a mechanism for supporting or
    moving  the recording means from an operative position in which the
    recording means is pressed against the record receiver to an inoperative
    position in which the recording means is released from pressing engagement
    with the record receiver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 120.01+ for thermal or hot-stamp
    typing, subclass 175 for detachable type head, subclasses 319+ for
    carriage-feed mechanism.


CLS 347/198
TXT Adjustable:

    Subject matter under subclass 197 comprising means for varying the force
    for pressing the recording means against the record receiver.


CLS 347/199
TXT Electro-conductive recording means:

    Subject matter under subclass 171 wherein a recording means (e.g., thermal
    head)  conducts current through a resistive layer of the record receiver or
    an ink carrier for generating heat to produce a mark or symbol upon the
    record receiver by the reason of the receiver becoming scorched, burned,
    marked, or otherwise thermochemically changed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159+,   for electrical discharge recording (e.g., spark).

    163+,   for electrochemical recording.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, subclasses 150.1 and 150.2 for phenomenal electrical
    discharge recording and phenomenal electrochemical recording respectively.


CLS 347/200
TXT Specific resistance recording element type:

    Subject matter under subclass 171 comprising details of the recording means
    having a head substrate and a plurality of overlap layers in which one of
    the layers generates heat to produce the symbol or mark on the record
    receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20+,    for print head in an ink jet recorder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, subclass 139 for markers in phenomenal recorders.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:   Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, appropriate subclasses for chemical composition in thermographic
    process.


CLS 347/201
TXT Edge or end face type:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the heat generating layer
    consists of at least a resistive heating element disposed on the border of
    a top surface or on a side surface of the head substrate.


CLS 347/202
TXT Glazed layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 comprising chemical composition or
    configuration details of a layer disposed between the head substrate  and
    the heat generating layer for accumulating the generated heat.


CLS 347/203
TXT Protective layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 comprising chemical composition or
    configuration details of a wear proof layer disposed above the heat
    generating layer for preventing oxidation or wear of resistive heating
    elements constituting the heat generating layer.


CLS 347/204
TXT Heat resistance layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 comprising chemical composition of the
    heat generating layer.


CLS 347/205
TXT Head substrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 comprising chemical composition or
    configuration details of a base layer.


CLS 347/206
TXT Heating resistive elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 comprising at least a structural
    limitation of resistive heating elements constituting the heat generating
    layer.

    (1)     Note.  The at least mechanical structural limitation includes, for
    example, thickness, size, shape, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204,    for chemical composition of the resistive heating elements.


CLS 347/207
TXT Having auxiliary means for conducting heat:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 comprising a layer for affecting heat
    transfer from the heat generating layer to the record receiver.


CLS 347/208
TXT Specific conductor means (e.g., electrode, conducting pattern, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 200 comprising means for establishing a
    current path (e.g., electrode, conducting pattern, etc.) through resistive
    heating elements constituting the recording means.


CLS 347/209
TXT With means for driving or supplying current to the resistive heating
    elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 208 comprising a power supply or a means for
    selectively energizing or controlling electrical energy  delivered to the
    resistive heating elements.


CLS 347/210
TXT Including switching means:

    Subject matter under subclass 209 comprising an electrical interrupter.


CLS 347/211
TXT Having driving circuitry for recording means:

    Subject matter under subclass 171 comprising  circuitry for generating
    driving signals to operate the recording means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9+,     for print head controller in an ink jet recorder.


CLS 347/212
TXT Pre or post image recording treatment:

    Subject matter under subclass 171 comprising a fixing or fusing means for
    applying a substance or energy or pressure upon the record receiver before
    or after the symbol or mark is formed thereon.

      (1)   Note.  Preheating of the record receiver is excluded from this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155,    for pre or post treatment in an electrostatic recorder.

    185+,   for preheating of transfer material or recording medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 349 and 350 for heat applied before and after imaging.


CLS 347/213
TXT Having an intermediate medium for transferring ink:

    Subject matter under subclass 171 wherein the symbol or mark is transferred
    from a transfer medium to an intermediate transfer medium before it is
    recorded on the record receiver.


CLS 347/214
TXT Ink cassette or cartridge:

    Subject matter under subclass 171 comprising a case having at least a
    mechanism contained therein or mounted thereon for containing transfer
    material.

    (1)     Note.  The mechanism contained therein or mounted thereon includes,
    for example, supplying or taking up means (e.g., spools or reels), rollers,
    cores, or winding members, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 207+ for ribbon cartridge in a
    typewriter.


CLS 347/215
TXT Record receiver and transfer medium feeding or driving means:

    Subject matter under subclass 171 comprising means for sending or
    transporting the record receiver and an ink carrier  sheet in a direction
    toward the recording means for producing the symbol or mark.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 223+ for ribbon-feeding mechanism;
    subclasses 578+ for record receiver feeding mechanism.


CLS 347/216
TXT Including separating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 215 comprising means for setting  the record
    receiver apart the ink sheet after a thermal transfer marking process is
    performed.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclass 248 for ribbon guides which
    control/adjust separation.


CLS 347/217
TXT With transfer medium or driving means therefor:

    Subject matter under subclass 171 comprising a sheet or ribbon for carrying
    a pigment such as ink which may be transferred to the record receiver or
    mechanism for sending or transporting the sheet or ribbon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclass 225 for electrically powered drive
    means for feeding ribbon, subclasses 241+ for particular ribbon material.


CLS 347/218
TXT Record receiver driving means:

    Subject matter under subclass 171 comprising a mechanism for sending or
    transporting the record receiver in a direction toward the recording means
    for producing the symbol or mark.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 578+ for record receiver feeding
    means.


CLS 347/219
TXT Including tensioning means:

    Subject matter under subclass 218 comprising means for eliminating sagging
    of the record receiver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclass 618 for tensioning a record receiver
    in a typewriter.


CLS 347/220
TXT Platen or engaging means therefor:

    Subject matter under subclass 171 comprising a body for supporting the
    record receiver or an ink carrier, or means adapted to bring the body into
    contact with the recording means with at least the record receiver or the
    ink carrier interposing therebetween.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 648+ for platens and platen
    movement.


CLS 347/221
TXT With recording medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 171 comprising a composition or
    characteristic of the record receiver.


CLS 347/222
TXT Housing or mounting:

    Subject matter under subclass 171 comprising means for enclosing or
    supporting the marking device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, subclass 145 for support of instrument or part of
    instrument.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 691+ for housing.


CLS 347/223
TXT Including cooling device:

    Recorders of the type set forth in subclass 171 comprising means for
    reducing temperature of the apparatus.


CLS 347/224
TXT LIGHT OR BEAM MARKING APPARATUS OR PROCESSES:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the record receiver is
    marked by the action of light or a stream of electrons representing an
    electrical information signal.

    (1)     Note.  The light can be generated by an ambient or an artificial
    light source.

    (2)     Note. This subclass is distinguished from Class 399,
    Electrophotography, due to the electrical information signal modulating the
    writing beam (i.e., exposure).

    (3)     Note.  This subclass includes recording which may occur from heat
    generated by the light or beam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112+,   where the record is made by selectively depositing or removing
    electrostatic charge from a medium.

    171+,   where the record is made by a thermal head brought in contact with
    a medium under a heated or conducted condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, appropriate subclasses using radiant energy.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 15 for photographic recorders for automatic
    systems and subclass 90 for miscellaneous photographic telegraph records.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 580+ for a recording detector generally
    responsive to invisible radiation.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, for motion picture recording apparatus
    employing photosensitive recording material.

    358,    Facsimile, for television photographic recorder.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, for
    optical elements used in recorders.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 167+ for X-ray
    devices using photographic detectors.

    396,    Photography, for photographic apparatus for recording images,
    particularly subclasses 429+ for photographic apparatus combined with
    diverse subject matter, subclasses 540+ for phototype composing, and
    subclasses 549+ for electric photography.


    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics, subclasses 38+
    for controls, subclass 130+ for image formation, subclasses 168+ for
    charging, subclasses 177+ for exposure, subclasses 222+ for development,
    subclasses 297+ for transfer, subclasses 320+ for fixing, subclasses 343+
    for cleaning, and subclasses 361+ for document handling.

    430,    Radiation Imagery, Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclass 19 for erasable imaging, subclasses 31+ and 48+ for
    electrophotography, subclass 292 for visible image formation, subclasses
    333 and 346+ for visible imaging using radiation.


CLS 347/225
TXT Scan of light:

    Subject matter under subclass 224 wherein at least one writing beam  (e.g.,
    light, electrons) whose energy varies in magnitude, or duration, or
    frequency in accordance with the electrical information signal, is
    progressed point by point or line by line (e.g., LEDs) across the record
    receiver to produce scan lines constituting a record of the signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129+    for photo scanning in an electrostatic recorder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 296+ and 400+ for facsimile recording.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    197+ for periodically moving an element which scans a beam by optically
    reflecting, refracting, or deffracting at least a portion of a beam.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 177+ for exposure, particularly
    subclasses 206+ for slit exposure.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclass 363 for laser exposure for color imaging.


CLS 347/226
TXT Cathode ray device:

    Subject matter under subclass 225 wherein the writing beam is formed by a
    stream of electrons emitted from a cathode of an evacuated envelope.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121+    for cathode-ray tube used in an electrostatic recorder

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 364+ for cathode
    ray tube, per se.

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 244+ for means to photograph the CRT image
    and subclass 485 for CRT image generation.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 145+ for beam
    control.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 546+ for exposing multicolor cathode-ray
    tube targets.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclass 296 for electron beam imaging.


CLS 347/227
TXT With record receiver in an evacuated enclosure:

    Subject matter under subclass 226 wherein the record receiver travels
    within an vacuum environment.


CLS 347/228
TXT Having developing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 226 including means for converting a latent
    image into a visible record.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, conductive backed
    record receiver or circuitry for supplying current to the conductive record
    receiver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics, subclasses 38+
    for controls, and subclasses 222+ for development.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 97+ for post image processing.


CLS 347/229
TXT Synchronization of light with record receiver:

    Subject matter under subclass 226 wherein movement of the writing beam  is
    coordinated with the record receiver.


CLS 347/230
TXT Having optical means interposed between the screen of the cathode ray
    device and the record receiver:

    Subject matter under subclass 226 comprising light modifying means located
    between the record receiver and the faceplate of a cathode ray device for
    focusing or projecting an image on the screen of the cathode ray device
    onto the record receiver.

    (1)     Note.  The light modifying means includes, for example, lens,
    mirror, etc.


CLS 347/231
TXT Having deflecting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 226 means for directing the writing beam to
    adjust image position on the faceplate of the cathode ray device.


CLS 347/232
TXT Multicolor:

    Subject matter under  subclass 225 wherein the at least one writing beam
    varies in frequency to produce image having different colors on the record
    receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115+,   for multicolor electrostatic recording.

    172+,   for multicolor thermal recording.


CLS 347/233
TXT Plural beam scan:

    Subject matter under subclass 225 wherein more than one writing beams are
    progressed line by line or point by point across the record receiver.

    (1)     Note.  The more than one writing beams may incident the record
    receiver as separate beams or as a composite beam made of several
    separately controlled beams.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 408 for facsimile plural beam scanning,
    subclass 200 for multiple scanning elements.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    201 for plural moving scanning elements.


CLS 347/234
TXT Synchronization of light with medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 233 wherein relative movement between the
    record receiver and at least one writing beam is controlled such that the
    beam is incident on the record receiver at desired location.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248,    for synchronization of light with photosensitive medium in a
    singular beam scanner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 409 for synchronization, subclass 411 for
    facsimile carrier as synchronization signal.


CLS 347/235
TXT Scan synchronization (e.g., start-of-scan, end-of-scan):

    Subject matter under subclass 233 wherein scan lines produced by movement
    of at least one writing beam as it is incident on the record receiver are
    coordinated with each other using  a discrete reference point (e.g.,
    start-of-scan, end-of-scan, diffraction grating).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250,    for scan synchronization in a singular beam scanner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 409+ for synchronization.


CLS 347/236
TXT Feed back of light for intensity control:

    Subject matter under subclass 233 having a photo detector for detecting
    quantity of light of at least one writing beam emitted  from a light source
    to control intensity of the light source.


CLS 347/237
TXT Driving circuitry:

    Subject matter under subclass 233 comprising circuitry for generating a
    drive signal to control the energization or activation of at least one
    light source for emission of the plurality of light beams.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 474+ for picture signal generation for a
    scanner.


CLS 347/238
TXT Specific light source (e.g., LEDs assembly):

    Subject matter under subclass 233 comprising structural details of a means
    for emitting the writing beams.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, appropriate subclasses for radiant energy sources.

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, appropriate subclass for coherent light
    sources.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, subclasses 22+ for
    methods of making a light emissive semiconductor device.


CLS 347/239
TXT Specific light modulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 233 wherein individual recording energy of
    the writing beams is varied due to an actuation of a transducer in
    accordance with the electrical information signal thereby creating
    modulated writing beams.

    (1)     Note.  The transducer may be acousto-optic, electro-optic,
    Bragg-cell, light valve, spatial light modulator, TIR device (total
    internal reflection device), magneto-optic, deformable mirror.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    237+ for particular optical modulator structure.


CLS 347/240
TXT Tone marking:

    Subject  matter under subclass 233 comprising means for producing a
    halftone or grey scale image on the record receiver by controlling the
    amount of light irradiating a given location on the record receiver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 298 and 455+ for grey level and halftone
    processing.


CLS 347/241
TXT Specific optical structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 233 comprising light modifying means for
    converging, diverging, filtering, masking the writing beams or for guiding
    direction or path thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The light modifying means includes, for example, lens,
    filter, mirror, prism, optical fibers, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements,
    appropriate subclasses for individual optical elements.


CLS 347/242
TXT Having mounting or supporting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 241 including means for holding or mounting
    the light modifying means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139,    for general mounting structure related to a driven recording head.


    257,    for optical structure supporting means in a singular beam recorder.


CLS 347/243
TXT Including deflector:

    Subject matter under subclass 241 wherein the light modifying means
    includes a reflective element which is periodically moved thereby
    progressing the writing beams across the record receiver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    17+ for holographic deflectors, subclasses 196+ for moving element
    deflectors.


CLS 347/244
TXT Specific lens:

    Subject matter under subclass 241 comprising details of a lens or lens
    system.

    (1)     Note. This subclass includes, for example, position, arrangement,
    characteristic or type of lens or lens system (e.g., refractive index,
    dimension).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    642+ for lens structure and appropriate subclasses for other optical
    elements.


CLS 347/245
TXT Housing or mounting:

    Subject matter under subclass 233 comprising means for enclosing or
    supporting at least a component of the marking device.

    (1)     Note.  The at least a component includes, for example, LED array,
    record receiver, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139,    for general mounting structure related to a driven recording head.

    242,    for supports of optical components in plural beam recorder.

    257,    for supports of optical components in singular beam recorder.

    263,    for housing or mounting of singular beam recorder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, appropriate
    subclasses for housing structure which includes electrical components.


CLS 347/246
TXT Feedback of light for intensity control:

    Subject matter under subclass 225 having a photo detector for detecting
    quantity of light of  writing beam emitted from a light source to control
    the intensity of the light source.


CLS 347/247
TXT Driving circuitry:

    Subject matter under subclass 225 comprising circuitry for generating a
    drive signal to control the energization or activation of a light source
    for emission of the writing beam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for specific power supply elements.


CLS 347/248
TXT Synchronization of light with  medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 225 wherein relative movement between the
    record receiver and the at least one writing beam is controlled such that
    the beam is incident on the record receiver at desired location.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 409+ for synchronization of scanning.


CLS 347/249
TXT By clock deviation:

    Subject matter under subclass 248 wherein the relative movement between the
    record receiver and at least one writing beam is controlled by altering or
    changing the timing of a control clock.


CLS 347/250
TXT Scan synchronization (e.g., start-of-scan, end-of-scan):

    Subject matter under subclass 225 wherein scan lines produced by movement
    of the at  least one writing beam as it is incident on the record receiver
    are coordinated with each other using  a discrete reference point (e.g.,
    start-of-scan, end-of-scan, diffraction grating).


CLS 347/251
TXT Tone marking:

    Subject  matter under subclass 225 comprising means for producing a
    halftone or grey scale image on the record receiver by controlling the
    amount of light irradiating a given location on the record receiver.


CLS 347/252
TXT By adjusting pulse width of light beam:

    Subject matter under subclass 251 wherein means for producing a halftone or
    grey scale image includes means for adjusting time duration of activated
    light pulses.


CLS 347/253
TXT By varying intensity of light beam:

    Subject matter under subclass 251 wherein means for providing a halftone or
    grey scale image includes means for modulating power level of the writing
    beam.


CLS 347/254
TXT By varying dotting density:

    Subject matter under subclass 251 wherein means for providing a halftone or
    grey scale image includes means for changing number of pixels per unit
    length in the image to be formed on the record receiver.


CLS 347/255
TXT Specific light modulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 225 wherein the recording energy of at least
    one writing beam is varied due to an actuation of a transducer in
    accordance with the electrical information signal thereby creating
    modulated writing beam.

    (1)     Note. The transducer may be acousto-optic, electro-optic,
    Bragg-cell, light valve, spatial light modulator, TIR device (total
    internal reflection device), magneto-optic, deformable mirror.


CLS 347/256
TXT Specific optical structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 225 comprising light modifying means for
    converging, diverging, filtering, masking at least one writing beam or for
    guiding direction or path thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The light modifying means includes, for example, lens,
    filter, mirror, prism, optical fibers, etc.


CLS 347/257
TXT Having mounting or supporting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 256 including means for holding or mounting
    the specific optical structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242,    for optical structure supporting means in a plural beam recorder.


CLS 347/258
TXT Having lens:

    Subject matter under subclass 256 comprising details of a lens or lens
    system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, position, arrangement,
    characteristic or type of lens or lens system (e.g., refractive index,
    dimension).


CLS 347/259
TXT Including deflector:

    Subject matter under subclass 258 including a reflective element which is
    periodically moved thereby progressing at least one writing beam across the
    record receiver.


CLS 347/260
TXT Having deflector:

    Subject matter under subclass 256 wherein the light modifying means
    includes a reflective element which is periodically moved thereby
    progressing at least one writing beam across the record receiver.


CLS 347/261
TXT Polygon:

    Subject matter under subclass 260 wherein the reflective element has three
    or more reflective surfaces arranged symmetrically about an axis and is
    periodically rotated about the axis thereby progressing the writing beam
    across the record receiver.


CLS 347/262
TXT With record receiver or handling means therefor:

    Subject matter under subclass 225 comprising characteristic of the record
    receiver or means for feeding or transporting the record receiver along a
    predetermined path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264,    for record handling in a generic optical recorder.


CLS 347/263
TXT Housing or mounting:

    Subject matter under subclass 225 comprising means for enclosing or
    supporting at least a component of the marking device.

    (1)     Note.  The component includes at least, for example, light source,
    record receiver, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242,    for supports of optical components in plural beam recorder.

    245,    for housing or mounting of plural beam recorder.

    257,    for supports of optical components in singular beam recorder.


CLS 347/264
TXT With record receiver or handling means therefor:

    Subject matter under subclass 224 comprising characteristic of the record
    receiver or means for feeding or transporting the record receiver along a
    predetermined path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262,    for record handling in a scan of light  recorder type.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTION


CLS 347/900
TXT DATA PROCESSING FOR ELECTROSTATIC RECORDING:

    Cross-reference art collection under subclasses 112+ comprising computing
    means for manipulating data used in the electrostatic marking apparatus or
    processes.


CLS 348/
TTL TELEVISION

CLS 348/
TXT
    I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF THE CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    A.      This class deals with generating, processing, transmitting or
    transiently displaying a sequence of images, either locally or remotely, in
    which the local light variations composing the images may change with time
    (e.g., natural "live" scenes) by methods involving the following steps:

    Step 1  The scanning of an object or a scene by partitioning the object or
    scene into subareas of image information (e.g., pels or pixels) and
    generating therefrom an electrical signal representative of an image.

    Step 2  The transient display of an object or a scene image by converting
    an electrical signal representative of the object image (i.e., video
    signal) into a visible image of the object.

    B.      In this class, the sequence of images is intended to portray motion
    with exception of special television type systems that produce a sequence
    of still images from a conventional television system (e.g., videophone,
    slow scan, film retrieval, and security systems).  These special television
    systems normally select an image from a sequence of images of a
    conventional television system and normally use a transient display (e.g.,
    CRT or liquid crystal).

    C.      In Class 358, Facsimile, facsimile images are normally of a fixed
    scene (e.g., document) that do not form a sequence, cannot portray motion,
    and normally the display is fixed (e.g., hard copy).  In television
    recording, the sequence of images are dynamically recorded for later
    reproduction.

    II.     SUBCOMBINATIONS OF TELEVISION SYSTEMS

    A.      This class includes circuits specially designed for dealing with a
    peculiar component of the television signal (e.g., sync or chrominance), as
    distinct from merely signals of a particular frequency range.

    B.      Electrical circuits that are not specific to television which may
    constitute subcombinations of such apparatus are classified in the
    appropriate class for such circuits.

    C.      A video camera or television receiver having a static storage
    device as subcombination is classified in this class, see subclasses 231+
    and 714+.

    III.    COMBINATIONS OF OTHER APPARATUS WHICH INCLUDE APPARATUS OF THIS
    CLASS

    This class does not include the following subject matter:

    1.      Systems in which legible alphanumeric or like character forms are
    analyzed according to step 1 above to derive an electric signal from which
    the  character is recognized by comparison with stored information are
    classified in Class 382, Image Analysis.

    2.      Systems for the direct photographic copying of an original picture
    in which an electric signal representative of a characteristic of the
    picture is derived and employed to modify the operation of the system are
    classified in Class 355, subclass 38.

    3.      Systems for the reproduction, according to step 2, of images
    comprising alphanumeric or computer generated graphics and systems for the
    conversion of a computer generated signal into a television signal are
    classified in Class 345.

    4.      Systems for the dynamic recording, or reproducing, of black and
    white television using a nonmagnetic medium, systems for the dynamic
    recording or reproducing of color television, and systems for photographing
    displayed images are classified in Class 386.

    5.      Systems for the dynamic recording or reproducing of black and white
    images from magnetic media (e.g., magnetic tape) is classified in Class 360.

    IV.     GLOSSARY

    BASIC RECEIVER
    A receiver for converting incoming electric signals into television
    pictures and the associated sound.

    BURST
    Also called reference burst, the portion of the composite or noncomposite
    color-picture signal, comprising a few cycles of a sine wave of chrominance
    subcarrier frequency, that is used to establish a reference for
    demodulating the chrominance signal.

    COMPOSITE COLOR SIGNAL
    A color picture signal with all blanking and synchronizing signals.
    Including luminance and chrominance components; vertical- and
    horizontal-sync pulses; vertical- and horizontal-blanking pulses; and the
    color burst signal, with or without accompanying audio.

    COMPOSITE VIDEO SIGNAL
    A signal in television that conveys all of the intelligence present in the
    image together with the synchronizing information (e.g., vertical and
    horizontal pulses) with or without audio information.

    CONVENTIONAL CHANNEL
    A portion of the spectrum assigned for the standard operation of a specific
    carrier and the minimum number of sidebands necessary to convey
    intelligence.


    FORMAT
    The particular method for combining the time variable video signal with a
    synchronizing signal to allow reconstruction of an image from the
    originating video signal.

    FREQUENCY DOMAIN
    A way of looking at the frequency of waveform components.

    IMAGE SENSOR
    A generic name for both cathode-ray tube and solid-state imaging devices
    which converts an optical image of an object into an electrical signal
    representative of the object image.

    KEYSTONING
    A distorted scanning pattern, with a top wider than the bottom or vice
    versa, produced when the electron beam in the television camera tube is at
    angle with the principal axis of the tube.

    PICKUP TUBE
    A television camera tube consists of a cathode-ray tube which includes
    vidicon, orthocon, iconoscope, or plumbicon (i.e., vidicon with lead-oxide
    target, trademark of N. V. Philips of Holland).

    PIXEL OR ELEMENT RATE
    The smallest distinguishable and resolvable area in an image.

    SCANNING
    The successive analyzing or synthesizing, according to a predetermined
    method, the light values or equivalent characteristics of elements
    constituting a picture area.

    SOLID-STATE IMAGING DEVICE
    A device that uses a mosaic of tiny light-sensitive semiconductors
    (photo-transistors) to produce individual outputs which are then converted
    into a coherent video signal.

    SPATIAL CONTENT, DOMAIN
    The content of a single video image.

    TEMPORAL CONTENT
    The content of the image is changed with respect to time.

    VIDEO SIGNAL
    A signal in television derived from optical image (e.g., active video)

    V.      RELATED ELEMENTS OR SYSTEMS FOUND IN OTHER CLASSES

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 596+ for measuring and testing an
    apparatus including acoustic imaging.

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 4+ for endoscopes in general.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ and 216+ for photocells, circuits
    and  optics therefor, and subclasses 330+ and 338+ for devices responsive
    to invisible radiation.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 7.2 for television cabinets.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 364+ for
    cathode-ray tubes.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclasses 1+ for
    cathode-ray tube circuits.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 41 and 85 for
    synchronization circuitry.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 76.12 for analysis of
    complex waves.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous nonlinear active device
    circuits.

    329,    Demodulators, subclasses 311+, 315+, 345+, and 347+ for pulse
    frequency, phase, or amplitude demodulators, respectively.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 11 for DC reinsertion circuit, subclasses 127+
    for control of power supply, and subclass 149 for noise compensation.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 20 and 172 for television type oscillator
    synchronization.

    332,    Modulators, various subclasses for modulators.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 14 and 24+ for
    companders and coupling networks.

    334,    Tuners, various subclasses for tuners, per se.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, appropriate subclasses for A/D
    or D/A conversion.

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses  1-205 for radar systems.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, appropriate subclasses.

    346,    Recorders, subclasses 150.1+ for electric recording of phenomenon,
    particularly subclasses 150.2 for electric discharge and 150.3 for
    electrochemical, subclass 134 for particular record receivers, subclasses
    139+ for scanning devices for markers, and subclasses 107.1+ for light or
    beam recording of phenomenon.

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, subclasses 112+ for
    electrostatic marking, particularly subclasses 129+ for photo scanning,
    subclasses 224+ for light beam marking.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 3+ for range or distance
    measurement, subclasses 241 for borescopes, subclasses 426+ and 237+ for
    inspection devices, and subclasses 402+ for shade or color measuring.

    358,    Facsimile, appropriate subclasses for transmitting, processing, or
    reproducing a permanent picture, and particularly subclass 479 wherein the
    image signal is generated by a television type camera.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, various
    subclasses for optical devices, especially subclasses 1+ for holography;
    subclasses 109+ for optical communication; and  subclasses 196+ and 887 for
    light beam deflectors and sequentially additive filters.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 9.1+,
    14.1+, 19.1, and 33.1+ for dynamic magnetic recorders peculiar to non-color
    television signal processing.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 243 for
    synchronization of shafts and subclasses 173+ and 211 for a photosensitive
    device in circuits for electromagnets.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 400+
    for the application of a computer in various combinations that may include
    use of television equipment, as in, for example, subclasses 469+,  product
    manufacturing, subclasses 550+, measuring and testing, and FOR 514+ for
    foreign art collections of computer-based communication engineering which
    may include object detection or tracking.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclasses.
    The  storage of information, which includes video signal processing, is
    excluded from this class.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, appropriate subclasses
    for recording or reproducing information absent any feature peculiar to
    video processing.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for multiplex
    systems in general.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, for
    digital data error in general.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, for communication using pulse or
    digital signals which do not include video signals.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 98.2+ for systems
    which deal with television signals.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, for communication by telephone which do
    not include videophone.

    380,    Cryptography, especially subclasses 5, 7, and 10+ for cryptographic
    video equipment and techniques.

    382,    Image Analysis, appropriate subclass for pattern recognition or
    alphanumeric character sensing.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 1 through 99
    for artificial intelligence including neural nets, subclasses 101+ for
    static presentation processing, subclasses 118+ for computer graphics
    processing, and subclasses 200.3+ for data transferring among a plurality
    of spatially distributed computers or digital data processing systems.

    396,    Photography, appropriate subclasses for a camera which when
    actuated uses light to record a chemically developable image or
    subcombinations thereof.  See Section III. of the class definition therein
    for the line with Class 348.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 2+, 79+, 245+, and
    289+ for a pattern controlled device including scanning.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, appropriate subclasses for process, composition, and product
    involving radiation imagery chemistry.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclass 307 for teaching devices
    including television combinations.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, for electrical connectors, per se.

    455,    Telecommunications, various subclasses for radio transmission or
    reception.

    704,    Data Processing:  Speech Signal Processing, Linguistics, Language
    Translation, and Audio Compression/Decompression, subclasses 200+ for
    speech signal processing.


CLS 348/1
TXT USE SURVEY AND ACCOUNTING:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means for indicating,
    metering, or recording the number of receivers using a particular
    television presentation, the length of time that a presentation is being
    received, or which of concurrent presentations is being received.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    380,    Cryptography, appropriate subclasses for cryptographic prevention
    of unauthorized signal use.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 2+ for modulated carrier wave
    systems with monitoring or survey means.


CLS 348/2
TXT Monitoring of physical reaction of viewer:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including a device to sense the presence or
    movement of a viewer.

    (1)     Note.  For example, the device detects the presence or absence of a
    viewer in a room, or determine whether or not the viewer eyes are watching
    a television program, etc.


CLS 348/3
TXT With billing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein remote means are used to compute,
    indicate, or receive a television subscriber payment.


CLS 348/4
TXT Monitoring of synchronization or blanking pulse (e.g., horizontal or
    vertical pulse signal):

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including means for indicating which
    program is being viewed based upon  timing information peculiar to a
    particular video signal source.

    (1)     Note.  Different television stations have different relative phases
    for synchronizing pulses which enables remote detection of electromagnetic
    radiation from the receiver indicative of the station being received.


CLS 348/5
TXT With video cassette recorder (VCR):

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein visual images and sound of the
    survey is recorded on a cartridge mounted magnetic tape.


CLS 348/5.5
TXT USE OR ACCESS BLOCKING (E.G., LOCKING SWITCH):

    Subject matter under the class definition which blocks access of a video
    signal source or otherwise limits usage of a television device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    194,    Check-Actuated Control Mechanisms, appropriate subclasses for coin
    controlled device of general utility.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 60 for
    preventing recording or erasing an earlier recording on a record carrier.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 143+ for telephone paystation
    check operated control, and subclasses 188+ for call or terminal access
    alarm or control.

    380,    Cryptography, subclass 7 and subclasses 10+ for concealing
    intelligible information in a video signal.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 26.1 for use or access blocking of a
    modulated carrier wave communication in general and subclass 411 for
    radiotelephone with privacy or lockout.


CLS 348/6
TXT WIRED BROADCAST (E.G., CABLE):

    Subject matter under the class definition including a closed circuit
    network to distribute signals to a plurality of receivers or display
    devices.

    (1)     Note.  For example, this subclass and indented subclasses include
    CATV (Community Antenna Television) and hotel wired distribution networks.

    (2)     Note.  In a closed circuit network, a program source, audio or
    video that is not broadcast for general consumption, is fed to remote
    monitored units by wire.  This network communication system is entirely
    self-contained and does not exchange intelligence with other facilities and
    systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclass 339 for multiplexing systems
    which utilize plural transmitters/receivers operating off a common antenna.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 257+ for digital cable
    distribution system.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 3.1+ for modulated carrier wave
    receiver distribution systems.


CLS 348/7
TXT Broadcast on demand:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein provision is made for a user to
    select a program or other information to be supplied to the distribution
    system from a plurality of such programs or information.


CLS 348/8
TXT Local distribution (e.g., hotel, hospital, vehicle, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the distribution system is confined
    to a single building or vehicle or closely related group of buildings or
    vehicles (e.g., in a parking or a camp ground) under common ownership or
    management.


CLS 348/9
TXT Controlled signal substitution (e.g., emergency warning, local preemption,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein provision is made for program or
    information substitution which is beyond the control of a viewer.

    (1)     Note.  For example, emergency warning is substituted for a regular
    channel program or a local program is substituted for an out of town
    channel selected by the viewer.


CLS 348/10
TXT With subscriber terminal details:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein a receiving site has specific means
    connected to the wired distribution network for converting a transmitted
    signal to a signal proper to be used by an ordinary receiver.


CLS 348/11
TXT For frequency conversion:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein a converter shifts a carrier
    frequency (e.g., shift to channel 3 or 4).


CLS 348/12
TXT Two-way:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 including means for establishing
    communication to and from the receiving site.


CLS 348/13
TXT TWO-WAY (E.G., INTERACTIVE):

    Subject matter under the class definition including means for establishing
    a bi-directional communication of information wherein at least one
    television signal is involved.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for two-way communication including wired broadcast.


CLS 348/14
TXT With voice capability (e.g., videophone):

    Subject matter under subclass 13 comprising bi-directional communication of
    both video signal and accompanying voice signal.


CLS 348/15
TXT Conferencing:

    Subject matter under subclass 14 wherein three or more terminals
    intercommunicate.


CLS 348/16
TXT Switching:

    Subject matter under subclass 14 including a structure for selectively
    connecting a conversational video call to a receiving station.


CLS 348/17
TXT Transmission scheme:

    Subject matter under subclass 14 including particular details for
    formatting, modulating, or combining voice and video signals which may
    include control or synchronization signals for transmission between
    stations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    469,    for formatting a video signal in general.


CLS 348/18
TXT Still frame (i.e., freeze frame):

    Subject matter under subclass 17 wherein video displayed is a single image
    or a sequence of non-moving images.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for slow scanning transmission.


CLS 348/19
TXT Field or frame difference (e.g., moving frame):

    Subject matter under subclass 17 wherein transmitted image information
    represents only changes from a previous image.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    412+    and 415, for digital bandwidth reduction involving difference
    transmission which may include a field or frame difference.


CLS 348/20
TXT User positioning (e.g., parallax):

    Subject matter under subclass 14 including a structure to ensure that the
    user is positioned properly in front of a television camera.


CLS 348/21
TXT PLURAL TRANSMITTER SYSTEM CONSIDERATIONS (E.G., INTERFERENCE REDUCTION):

    Subject matter under the class definition including two or more
    transmitters with means or method for reducing interference between the
    transmitters.

    (1)     Note.  Such methods include frequency offsets and special formats.


CLS 348/22
TXT SLOW SCANNING TRANSMISSION (E.G., STILL FRAME):

    Subject matter under the class definition involving a periodic or selective
    transmission of single video frames during a period greater than the period
    required for a portrayed motion.

    (1)     Note.  A portrayed motion requires at least 8 frames per second. In
    a television system, 25 or 30 frames per second are mostly used.

    (2)     Note.  A system included herein is normally intended for use with a
    telephone system, but the telephone system is not claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for two way conversational television systems which may use a slow
    scanning transmission technique, and see particularly subclass 18 for a
    still frame transmission.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 500+ for color facsimile scanning and
    subclass 479 for facsimile video scanning,.


CLS 348/23
TXT Color TV:

    Subject matter under subclass 22 wherein the transmitted video signal
    includes portions indicating the existing color of an original object or
    scene.


CLS 348/24
TXT PLURAL STILL IMAGES OVER CONVENTIONAL CHANNEL:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a system which forms a
    series of unrelated images at convention frame rates and a receiver which
    selectively grabs one frame for display.

    (1)     Note. The frame selected is selected as the viewer watches a
    program. The systems classified herein often are selected when the frame
    code matches a viewer selected code.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    473,    for formats and systems that add an unrelated image to a
    conventional video program.

    559,    for frame grabbing, in general.


CLS 348/25
TXT IMAGE FALSIFICATION TO IMPROVE VIEWER PERCEPTION OF SELECTIVE OBJECT (E.G.,
    MOVING OBJECT OR TARGET):

    Subject matter under the class definition involving a system wherein a
    picture is presented or processed in such a manner as to enable a viewer to
    quickly perceive selected information in the picture.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are systems that subtract two images to
    present the difference, such as motion, or subtract a polarized image from
    a nonpolarized image to present objects that polarize light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    578,    for special effect devices that modify an image to please a viewer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    382,    Image Analysis, subclasses 254+ for image enhancement or
    restoration.


CLS 348/26
TXT Contour generator:

    Subject matter under subclass 25 wherein a display is produced in the form
    of a line drawing, a line being generated as a result of the
    interconnection of points exhibiting substantial changes between adjacent
    pixels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 558 for stereoplotters.

    356,    Optics: Measuring and Testing, subclass 2 for contour plotters in
    which the contour is recorded from stereoscopic images.


CLS 348/27
TXT Quantizer:

    Subject matter under subclass 25 wherein a picture signal is separated into
    discrete amplitudes to expand the difference between selected information
    and background.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    405,    for bandwidth reduction involving transform coding adaptive
    quantizer.

    418,    for bandwidth reduction involving difference transmission with
    vector quantization.

    422,    for bandwidth reduction involving vector quantization.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    382,    Image Analysis, subclasses 270+ for image transformation or
    pre-recognition using adaptive quantization or variable thresholding.


CLS 348/28
TXT Selective contrast expander:

    Subject matter under subclass 25 wherein a picture signal has (a) a
    selected geometrical area with a gray scale which is extended generally to
    a full range or (b) a selected range of gray scale which is extended
    generally to a full range to enable a viewer to perceive a selected object
    from a similar background.


CLS 348/29
TXT False color:

    Subject matter under subclass 25 including a color display with a
    presentation or processing that uses differences in color to accentuate
    different information in an image.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a system found herein is a movement detection
    system that presents one field in green and the other in magenta (blue and
    red) such that stationary objects are in black and white and moving objects
    are outlined in color.

    (2)     Note.  A system that maps different gray levels to arbitrary colors
    is found in subclass 34 (pseudo color including intensity to color
    conversion) regardless of the statement of intent to provide a colored
    display or to present data for easier presentation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for pseudo color including intensity to color conversion.


CLS 348/30
TXT Hue expander:

    Subject matter under subclass 29 including means for mapping a narrow area
    of the hue circle into a larger area of the hue circle.

    (1)     Note.  For example, if the center of the narrow area is red after
    hue expanding, red input will be displayed as red, purple input will be
    displayed as blue, and orange input will be displayed as yellow.


CLS 348/31
TXT BACK SCATTER REDUCTION:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means to minimize an
    adverse effect on a reproduced picture due to the presence of an imperfect
    optical medium between an object being viewed and a camera.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of imperfect optical medium are turbid water or
    atmospheric fog which may scatter light transmitted between the camera and
    the object, the reduction of backscattered light may be obtained by gating
    a camera during a period corresponding to the round trip transit time of
    light from the light source to the object and back to the camera.


CLS 348/32
TXT PSEUDO COLOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition including generating,
    transmitting, recording, reproducing, or displaying a picture
    representative signal which includes portions indicating arbitrarily
    assigned color.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclass 100 for color
    television display of X-ray density.


CLS 348/33
TXT Multispectral to color conversion (e.g., infrared and visible, infrared
    bands, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 32 including more than one picture signal
    each represented by a distinct frequency band which is arbitrarily assigned
    a color.

    (1)     Note.  For example, more than one camera is pointing to a sole
    object, each camera is responsive to a different specific band of
    wavelengths.


CLS 348/34
TXT Including intensity to color conversion (e.g., colorizer, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 32 wherein a color is arbitrarily assigned in
    relation to an amplitude of the picture signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29+,    for false color.


CLS 348/35
TXT PSEUDO BLACK AND WHITE:

    Subject matter under the class definition including generating,
    transmitting, recording, reproducing, or displaying a picture
    representative signal which includes portions indicating arbitrarily
    assigned gray level representative of color.


CLS 348/36
TXT PANORAMIC:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means for generating
    television information for a wide-angle field of view.

    (1)     Note.  The wide-angle field of view should be greater than the
    television wide aspect ratio (e.g., 16:9).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    432,    for bit-rate reduction with added video information in standard
    channel format.

    903,    for side panel information in single channel.

    904,    for separation or joining of side and center panels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 69+ for panoramic motion
    picture apparatus.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    725 for panoramic lenses.

    396,    Photography, subclass 436 for panoramic cameras.


CLS 348/37
TXT With continuously rotating element:

    Subject matter under subclass 36 wherein a continuously rotating element is
    used to generate images of successive portions of the scene.


CLS 348/38
TXT Multiple channels:

    Subject matter under subclass 36 wherein more than one transmission path is
    used to provide simultaneously plural portions of the scene.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    388,    for a multiple channel bandwidth reduction system.


CLS 348/39
TXT With observer selected field of view:

    Subject matter under subclass 36 having provision for a user to select a
    portion of the whole scene to be displayed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    445,    for format conversion between aspect ratios.

    556,    for receiver with additional function to receive signals of
    different aspect ratio.


CLS 348/40
TXT HOLOGRAPHIC:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the picture signal
    includes information derived from an object wave formed by the resulting
    interference pattern of two mutually coherent component light beams.

    (1)     Note. In the holographic process a coherent beam is first split
    into two component beams, one of which irradiates a recording medium.  The
    diffraction or scattering of the first component beam by the object forms
    the object wave which proceeds to, and interferes with, the second
    component beam or reference wave at the medium.  The resulting pattern is a
    three-dimensional record (hologram) of the object wave.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    1+ for optical holographic system or element, per se.


CLS 348/41
TXT Color TV:

    Subject matter under subclass 40 wherein the picture signal is displayed in
    a hue as contrasted with black, white, or gray.


CLS 348/42
TXT STEREOSCOPIC:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which the picture signal also
    includes portions indicating the three-dimensional nature of the original
    object or scene.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 86 for motion picture apparatus
    wherein an illusion of depth is presented.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    462+ for optical elements to give a three-dimensional effect.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 324+ for stereoscopic photography.


CLS 348/43
TXT Signal formatting:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 including an arrangement for combining
    video signals representing different viewing positions for transmission.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    469+,   for television signal formatting, per se.


CLS 348/44
TXT Pseudo:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 wherein an image signal is modified to
    simulate a three-dimensional image.


CLS 348/45
TXT Endoscope:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 wherein a stereoscopic picture signal
    generator is combined with an instrument which is used for the medical
    inspection of the interior of a human body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65+,    for non-stereoscopic endoscope.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing,  subclass 241 for borescope.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, subclasses 117+ for imaging optical fiber
    bundle for use in endoscope.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 101+ for endoscopes in general.


CLS 348/46
TXT Picture signal generator:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 including means for scanning an object or
    scene and deriving in response thereto a stereoscopic picture signal.


CLS 348/47
TXT Multiple cameras:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 comprising at least two picture signal
    generators.


CLS 348/48
TXT More than two cameras:

    Subject matter under subclass 47 comprising at least three picture signal
    generators.


CLS 348/49
TXT Single camera with optical path division:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 including an arrangement for optically
    combining different views for presentation to a single scanning device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    343,    for camera optical multiplexing.

    344,    for camera optical path switching.


CLS 348/50
TXT Single camera from multiple positions:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 wherein the camera is either continuously
    or intermittently moved between left and right viewing positions.


CLS 348/51
TXT Stereoscopic display device:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 including means for converting an image
    representative electrical signal (i.e., video signal) of an object or scene
    into a visible image.


CLS 348/52
TXT More than two display devices:

    Subject matter under subclass 51 comprising more than two display devices.


CLS 348/53
TXT Viewer attached:

    Subject matter under subclass 51 wherein the display device is mounted on a
    support adapted to be worn by a user at the level of his field of view.


CLS 348/54
TXT Single display with optical path division:

    Subject matter under subclass 51 includes an arrangement for optically
    presenting different views from a single display device to the right and
    left eye of a viewer.


CLS 348/55
TXT Separation by time division:

    Subject matter under subclass 54 wherein the different views are presented
    to respective eyes of the viewer during alternating time periods.


CLS 348/56
TXT With alternating shutters:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein the different views are presented
    to respective eyes of the viewer by the use of shutters alternately opening
    and closing.


CLS 348/57
TXT With alternating polarization:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein the different views are presented
    to respective eyes of the viewer by the use of at least one polarizing
    filter whose axis of polarization is alternately changed.


CLS 348/58
TXT Separation by polarization:

    Subject matter under subclass 54 wherein the different views are presented
    to respective eyes of the viewer by the use of at least one optical device
    which vibrates a light ray passed therethrough in accordance with a
    particular orientation pattern.


CLS 348/59
TXT Separation by lenticular screen:

    Subject matter under subclass 54 wherein the different views are presented
    to respective eyes of the viewer by the use of a screen comprising multiple
    lens elements.


CLS 348/60
TXT Separation by color (i.e., anaglyphic):

    Subject matter under subclass 54 wherein the different views are presented
    to respective eyes of the viewer by the use of contrasting color filters on
    each eye, usually red on one eye and blue or green on the other.


CLS 348/61
TXT SPECIAL APPLICATIONS:

    Subject matter under the class definition including modification of or
    addition to an ordinary television system to adapt that system to a
    specific use.


CLS 348/62
TXT Aid for the blind:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein a particular representation is
    generated in a form (a) which is to be principally interpreted by a sense
    other than the sense of sight or (b) which is easy to perceive by an
    individual having partial loss of sight.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of nonvisible displays are a matrix of mechanical
    or electrical elements which selectively apply pressure or voltage to
    portions of a person and electrodes which may be implanted into appropriate
    areas of the brain.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 112+ for reading devices
    for the blind.

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, appropriate subclasses for artificial body
    members, including seeing aids for the blind.


CLS 348/63
TXT Image magnifying:

    Subject matter under subclass 62 wherein the reproduced picture of a viewed
    object is greater in dimension than the viewed object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    561,    for receiver processing circuitry for magnification of part of
    image.

    581,    for special effect, geometric transformation of size.


CLS 348/64
TXT Combined electronic sensing and photographic film cameras:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein a picture signal generator is
    combined with a photographic still or motion picture camera to provide a
    visible indication of the scene being photographed (e.g., remote viewing by
    an operator or a director).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 131 for motion picture cameras
    combined with a diverse type device.


CLS 348/65
TXT With endoscope:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein a picture signal generator is
    combined with an instrument which is used for the medical inspection of the
    interior of a human body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for stereoscopic endoscope.

    82+,    for television systems for use in inaccessible locations such as
    pipeline or borehole.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 4+ for endoscopes in general.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing,  subclass 241 for borescope.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, subclasses 117+ for imaging optical fiber
    bundle for use in endoscope.


CLS 348/66
TXT Dental:

    Subject matter under subclass 65 wherein the picture signal generator is
    combined with the endoscope for the examination of teeth or gum.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 29+ for apparatus having means to emit
    radiation or facilitate viewing of the work.


CLS 348/67
TXT Laser:

    Subject matter under subclass 65 wherein an endoscopic light source is
    provided by an optical resonator which utilizes the natural oscillations of
    atoms or molecules between energy levels to transform an incoherent light
    into a very narrow, intense beam of coherent electromagnetic radiation in
    the ultraviolet, visible, or infrared regions of the spectrum.

    (1)     Note.  Laser is an acronym for "Light Amplification by Stimulated
    Emission of Radiation."

    SEARCH CLASS:

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, for laser, per se.

    606,    Surgery, subclasses 2+ for light application instruments.


CLS 348/68
TXT Illumination:

    Subject matter under subclass 65 wherein an optical arrangement is used to
    direct a light source or to control the intensity of a light source
    projected on the inspected surface of a human body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370+,   for television camera with object or scene illumination.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 203.2 for photocell control illumination
    of a target by artificial light source and subclasses 227.29, 227.3,
    227.31, and 227.32 for light conductor with particular illumination.

    362,    Illumination, appropriate subclasses for illumination structure
    details.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 101+ for endoscope illumination for use in
    surgery.


CLS 348/69
TXT Controlled by video signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein the generated picture signal is
    fed back to the light source to regulate the intensity of light projected
    on the inspected surface of the human body.


CLS 348/70
TXT Color sequential illumination:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein the picture signal is displayed in
    a hue as a result of a sequential illumination of an object by different
    wavelengths (e.g., red, green, blue, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    269,    for camera with color sequential illumination.


CLS 348/71
TXT Color TV:

    Subject matter under subclass 65 wherein the picture signal is displayed in
    a hue as contrasted with black, white, or gray.


CLS 348/72
TXT Plural endoscopes interchangeable:

    Subject matter under subclass 65 having more than one endoscope which
    permits mutual substitution.


CLS 348/73
TXT External camera:

    Subject matter under subclass 65 wherein the picture signal generator is
    placed outside of the endoscope.


CLS 348/74
TXT With additional adjunct (e.g., recorder control, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 65 wherein the endoscope is combined with
    another system to improve the television system.


CLS 348/75
TXT Adaptor or connector:

    Subject matter under subclass 65 including an auxiliary structure for
    coupling the endoscope to the picture signal generator or to another
    apparatus or system.


CLS 348/76
TXT Physical structure of circuit element:

    Subject matter under subclass 65 comprising a configuration detail of an
    endoscope optical arrangement or its solid-state integrated circuit layout.


CLS 348/77
TXT Human body observation:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein the television system is
    specifically used for examining a person in total or part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    396,    Photography, subclasses 14+ for eye, mouth, or body photography.


CLS 348/78
TXT Eye:

    Subject matter under subclass 77 wherein the human body being observed is
    an organ of sight.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclasses
    206+ for eye examining or testing including eye photography.


CLS 348/79
TXT Microscope:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein the television system is combined
    with an optical instrument which generates enlarged images of minute
    objects.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    368+ for microscope, per se.


CLS 348/80
TXT Electronic:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 wherein the microscope utilizes an
    electron beam for the observation and recording of submicroscopic samples.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 311 for electron microscope, per se.


CLS 348/81
TXT Underwater:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein a picture signal generator is
    mounted on or enclosed within an apparatus permitting placement of the
    generator in an environment below the surface of the water.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 66.2 for an
    underwater television camera, nominally claimed, in combination with
    underwater handling equipment.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    141 for underwater optical communication.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 25+ for underwater-type photographic
    cameras.


CLS 348/82
TXT Hazardous or inaccessible:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein a picture signal generator is
    enclosed in or provided with structure to permit its use in environments of
    extreme heat or radiation or where access is not possible by humans or an
    ordinary television system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65+,    for picture signal generators employed in endoscopes.

    81,     for picture signal generators used in underwater environments.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 97 for apparatus to locate and
    repair cracks in pipes that may utilize television.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 241 for bore inspection
    utilizing optical elements.


CLS 348/83
TXT Furnace (e.g., nuclear reactor, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 82 wherein the hazardous environment is an
    enclosed structure in which relatively intense heat is produced.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    976,    Nuclear Technology, digest 235 for monitoring, testing, or
    maintaining a structural combination of reactor core or a moderator
    structure with viewing means which may be a television camera.


CLS 348/84
TXT Pipeline:

    Subject matter under subclass 82 wherein the inaccessible environment is a
    tubular conduit.


CLS 348/85
TXT Borehole:

    Subject matter under subclass 82 wherein the inaccessible environment is a
    hole drilled in the earth (e.g., an exploratory well).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 302 and 304+ for borehole
    directions indications.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 152.01+ for instruments for
    borehole studies.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 64 and 66 for well apparatus including measuring,
    testing, or indicating means and subclasses 250.01+ for well processes
    including measuring, testing, or indicating.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 40+ for a process +or
    means of measuring or testing combined with an earth boring process or
    apparatus.

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 102+ for well exploration by use of seismic
    prospecting systems which do not involve the handling of electric signals
    that contain geophysical information.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 256+ for ray energy detection or
    measurement (including detection or measurement of radioactive materials)
    applied to a borehole or drilling study.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 323+ for electrical
    testing of boreholes.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 853.1+ for telemetering in
    wells.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 25+ for seismic well logging using acoustic wave responsive
    electrical means.


CLS 348/86
TXT Manufacturing:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein a picture signal generator (i.e.,
    television camera) is utilized for monitoring a manufacturing operation.

    (1)     Note.  Patents included in this subclass contain detailed structure
    of the television system and nominal or no specific recitation of machine
    or tool structure.  Patents with detailed structure of the tool or machine
    are classified according to the tool or machine structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    382,    Image Analysis, subclasses 141+ for manufacturing using image
    analysis.


CLS 348/87
TXT Electronic circuit chip or board (e.g., positioning):

    Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein the manufacturing object includes
    a semiconductor substrate or a board on which multiple semiconductor
    devices are integrated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 833 for methods of assembling an electronic
    component to an insulative base by utilizing an optical sighting device
    wherein the assembly is performed at least in part by using means which aid
    or enhance visual location or determination of the position of the
    component relative to the base.


CLS 348/88
TXT Web, sheet or filament:

    Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein an object being manufactured is a
    thin sheet, plate or strip, or a thin flexible threadlike object.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 571 for photocell operated devices for
    detecting web, strand, strip, or sheet.


CLS 348/89
TXT Agricultural or food production:

    Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein an object being manufactured is a
    produced crop or a livestock or a preparation of these products.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 341 for cooking with
    observation means.


CLS 348/90
TXT Welding:

    Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein the manufacturing includes joining
    metallic parts by heating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 121.83 for electric heating with
    monitoring.


CLS 348/91
TXT Sorting, distributing or classifying:

    Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein the picture signal generator is
    used to separate manufactured objects in different categories by structure
    or destination.


CLS 348/92
TXT Quality inspection:

    Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein the picture signal generator is
    used to determine acceptability of a manufactured object.


CLS 348/93
TXT Color TV:

    Subject matter under subclass 92 wherein the control involves a distinction
    of different aspect of an object or a light source in terms of hue.


CLS 348/94
TXT Position detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein the television system is used to
    determine a point or a place where an object is located.


CLS 348/95
TXT Alignment or positioning:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 wherein the television system is used in
    manufacturing to help adjust an apparatus or place an object to an
    appropriate position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 138+ for angle measuring
    or axial alignment and subclasses 399+ for alignment in lateral direction.


CLS 348/96
TXT Film, disc or card scanning:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 including an apparatus to position a
    picture signal generator or the record whereby the record can be viewed by
    the picture signal generator and displayed on a display device.

    (1)     Note.  The picture signal generator and display may also be
    utilized as an aid in locating a given record.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 9.1+,
    14.1+, 19.1, and 33.1+ for magnetic storage or retrieval of non-color
    television signals.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclasses
    for storage and retrieval of electrical signals.


CLS 348/97
TXT Motion picture film scanner:

    Subject matter under subclass 96 including means for scanning a motion
    picture film (e.g., telecin) and synchronously advancing or stepping the
    film past the scanning apparatus.


CLS 348/98
TXT Mechanical optical scanning:

    Subject matter under subclass 97 wherein the scanning is performed by a
    mechanical moving device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195,    for mechanical optical scanning which is not applied to motion
    picture film.

    474+,   for facsimile systems utilizing mechanical-optical elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 234+ for photocell combined with moving
    optical systems.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, appropriate subclasses for mechanical
    film advancing devices.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    196+ and 298+ for optical scanning devices.


CLS 348/99
TXT Flying spot scanner:

    Subject matter under subclass 98 wherein the mechanical optical scanning
    means provides a small beam of light which moves over a film and translates
    the highlights and shadows into electrical signals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209+,   for generic camera flying spot scanner, per se.


CLS 348/100
TXT Flying spot scanner:

    Subject matter under subclass 97 wherein the scanning means provides a
    small beam of light which moves over a film and translates the highlights
    and shadows into electrical signals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209,    for camera flying spot scanner, per se.


CLS 348/101
TXT Color TV:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the picture signal generated
    having portion indicating the existing color of an object or scene in the
    film.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210,    for color camera flying spot scanner, per se.


CLS 348/102
TXT Intermittent film movement:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the film is advanced past the
    scanner in a periodically stopping and moving manner.


CLS 348/103
TXT With modification of scanner sweep:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 including apparatus to modify the
    scanning motion of the scanning means to properly coordinate the scanning
    motion with the film position.


CLS 348/104
TXT Color TV:

    Subject matter under subclass 97 wherein the picture signal generated
    having portion indicating the existing color of an object or scene in the
    film.


CLS 348/105
TXT Intermittent film movement:

    Subject matter under subclass 97 wherein the film is advanced past the
    scanner in a periodically stopping and moving manner.


CLS 348/106
TXT With modification of scanner sweep:

    Subject matter under subclass 97 including apparatus to modify the scanning
    motion of the scanning means to properly coordinate the scanning motion
    with the film position.


CLS 348/107
TXT With record location:

    Subject matter under subclass 96 including an apparatus to select a
    particular information containing record.


CLS 348/108
TXT Flying spot scanner:

    Subject matter under subclass 96 wherein the scanning means provides a
    small beam of light which moves over a film and translates the highlights
    and shadows into electrical signals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209,    for camera flying spot scanner, per se.


CLS 348/109
TXT Color TV:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein the picture signal generated
    having portion indicating the existing color of an object or scene in the
    film.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210,    for color camera flying spot scanner, per se.


CLS 348/110
TXT Slide:

    Subject matter under subclass 96 including a photographic transparency or
    film individually mounted on a frame adapted to be moved to a scanning area.


CLS 348/111
TXT Color TV:

    Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein the picture signal generated
    having portion indicating the existing color of an object or scene in the
    slide.


CLS 348/112
TXT Microfilm:

    Subject matter under subclass 96 including a film bearing a photographic
    record on a reduced scale.


CLS 348/113
TXT Navigation:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein a picture signal generator or
    reproducer is used with a steerable vehicle to permit control of the
    vehicle from a remote location or to provide an indication in the vehicle
    of its position as an aid in the guidance of the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a significant television processing system
    and nominal recitation of the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143+,   for television surveillance systems wherein a selected area is
    viewed from a remote location for other than navigational purposes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 3.11+ for remote control of a missile
    trajectory.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 945+ for electrical
    aircraft alarm or indication systems, subclasses 984+ for electrical
    watercraft alarm or indication systems, subclasses 988+ for electrical
    vehicle position indication systems, and subclasses 425.5+ for electrical
    land vehicle alarm or indication systems.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 111, 186, and 239+ for
    apparatus to instruct in navigation of various vehicles.

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclasses 200+ for navigation using computer systems.


CLS 348/114
TXT Remote control:

    Subject matter under subclass 113 wherein a picture signal generator or
    reproducer is used with a steerable vehicle to permit control of the
    vehicle from a distant location.


CLS 348/115
TXT Head-up display:

    Subject matter under subclass 113 wherein a television image is optically
    superimposed upon a real live scene within a field of view of an observer.

    (1)     Note.   The superimposition is typically performed by a partially
    silvered mirror.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 980 for aircraft alarm or
    indicating systems which may include a head-up display.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 7+ for head-up display having
    electrical features.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    13 for holographic head-up display.


CLS 348/116
TXT Direction finding or location determination:

    Subject matter under subclass 113 including an apparatus for assistance in
    pointing out a proper route or determining coordinates of an unknown place
    in reference to a known place.


CLS 348/117
TXT Aircraft or spacecraft:

    Subject matter under subclass 113 wherein the vehicle is a load-carrying
    structure for navigation in the air or in space.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, appropriate subclasses for spacecraft of aircraft, per
    se.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 945+ for electrical
    aircraft alarm or indication systems.


CLS 348/118
TXT Land vehicle:

    Subject matter under subclass 113 including a steerable machine for
    transportation on a solid surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 988+ for electrical vehicle
    position indication systems and subclasses 425.5+ for electrical land
    vehicle alarm or indication systems.


CLS 348/119
TXT Program control (e.g., path guidance, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein certain functions of the vehicle
    can be set in advance by previously stored instructions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    901,    Robots (cross-reference art collection), subclass 1 for mobile
    robot.

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclasses 23+ for vehicle automatic route guidance system.


CLS 348/120
TXT Farm vehicle:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein the vehicle being navigated is
    devoted to agriculture purposes.


CLS 348/121
TXT Simulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 including television means to recreate
    some aspects of the displayed environment (e.g., land, air, or sea).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 384 for apparatus for
    producing audible sounds as signaling indications such as sound which
    simulates the noise in an airplane for use in training programs.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 111, 186, and 239+ for
    apparatus to instruct in the navigation of various vehicles; subclasses 43
    and 69 for apparatus to instruct in the use of various vehicles; and
    subclasses 11+ for apparatus to portray various operations in war.


CLS 348/122
TXT Visibility (e.g., fog, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the particular environment to be
    simulated is a condition that affects the quality or state of being visible.


CLS 348/123
TXT Aircraft or spacecraft:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the particular environment to be
    simulated is a load-carrying structure for navigation in the air or in
    space.


CLS 348/124
TXT Ship:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the particular environment to be
    simulated is a vessel that navigates in water.


CLS 348/125
TXT Flaw detector:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein a picture signal generator is
    utilized to view an object and the signals so generated produce a display
    whereby imperfections in the object may be visually observed, or wherein
    the signals generated are compared with signals representative of a
    standard to provide an indication of whether imperfections exist in the
    object.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 600 for flaw detection by measuring
    velocity or propagation time of beamed mechanical waves.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 562+ and 572 for photocell operated
    devices for evaluating and detecting defects in a sheet.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 200+ for flaw
    testing using magnetic effect.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 426+ for optical
    inspection of an article with agitation or rotation; subclasses 429+ for
    inspection of moving webs or thread; and subclasses 237+ for optical
    systems for detecting flaws or imperfections.

    382,    Image Analysis, appropriate subclasses for flaw detection by image
    analysis.


CLS 348/126
TXT Of electronic circuit chip or board:

    Subject matter under subclass 125 wherein the object to be inspected is a
    semiconductor substrate or a board on which multiple semiconductor devices
    are integrated.


CLS 348/127
TXT Of transparent container or content (e.g., bottle, jar, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 125 wherein the object to be observed for
    imperfection detection is a clear receptacle or a clear flexible covering
    or its content.


CLS 348/128
TXT Of surface (e.g., texture or smoothness, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 125 wherein the television system aids in
    inspecting the appearance of an surface for its polish (smoothness) or its
    pattern structure regularity (texture).


CLS 348/129
TXT By comparison with reference object:

    Subject matter under subclass 125 wherein the picture signals of a viewed
    object is compared with signals representative of a standard to provide an
    indication of whether imperfections exist in the object.


CLS 348/130
TXT With stored representation of reference object:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein a device is used to hold picture
    signals of reference objects, which will be retrieved latter to compare
    with picture signals of the inspected object.


CLS 348/131
TXT With specific illumination detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 125 wherein a particular optical arrangement
    or material is used for directing a light source or varying its brightness
    on the surface of an inspected object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370,    for camera with object or scene illumination.


CLS 348/132
TXT With strobe illumination:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein a flashtube is used to emit a
    high intensity flash of light into an examination region.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    371,    for camera with flash or strobe illumination.


CLS 348/133
TXT With circuit detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 125 wherein a structural detail of a video
    circuit for flaw detection is being presented.


CLS 348/134
TXT Including line to line comparison:

    Subject matter under subclass 133 wherein a video signal of one scan line
    is being compared to a video signal of a preceding line.


CLS 348/135
TXT Object or scene measurement:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 including apparatus for utilizing the
    signal developed by a picture signal generator viewing an object or scene
    to provide quantitative information about the object or scene.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 3+ for range or remote
    distance finding utilizing optical elements in combination with a photocell.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 556+
    for basic measurements may broadly disclose a television camera.


CLS 348/136
TXT Projected scale on object:

    Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein a known geometry light source
    (i.e., optical pattern) is projected onto the surface of an object for
    measuring purpose.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, subclass 28 for projected image combined
    with real object and subclasses 40+ for scale or scale indicator projector.


CLS 348/137
TXT Scale on camera target:

    Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein an image of a series of marks at
    known intervals (i.e., scale) is superposed on an image of an object on a
    picture pickup device for measuring purpose.


CLS 348/138
TXT Pulse or clock counting:

    Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein a counting of digital signals is
    performed for measuring purposes.


CLS 348/139
TXT Multiple cameras on baseline (e.g., range finder, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein several cameras are placed on a
    line of known position and are aimed at a target to determine the position
    or orientation of the target.


CLS 348/140
TXT Distance by apparent target size (e.g., stadia, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 135 including an instrument for determining a
    distance to an object based on the  known dimension of the object.


CLS 348/141
TXT By cursor coordinate location:

    Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein the picture signal of an object
    is displayed with a superposed identifying marker (cursor) used to
    determine the dimension of the object.


CLS 348/142
TXT With camera and object moved relative to each other:

    Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein the camera or object position
    change is considered as a factor for determining a dimension.


CLS 348/143
TXT Observation of or from a specific location (e.g., surveillance):

    Subject matter under subclass 61 including apparatus to view a scene at a
    specified location remote from the reproducer for the purpose of monitoring
    a specific location, function, or event not provided for in the above
    subclasses.


CLS 348/144
TXT Aerial viewing:

    Subject matter under subclass 143 wherein the specific location, function,
    or event is viewed from an aircraft or satellite.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    396,    Photography, subclasses 7+ for aerial cameras.


CLS 348/145
TXT With linear array:

    Subject matter under subclass 144 having a plurality of photosensitive
    elements arranged in one row to perform a line scanning.


CLS 348/146
TXT With rotating reflector:

    Subject matter under subclass 144 having a mirror type apparatus rotating
    about an axis to accomplish one scanning dimension.


CLS 348/147
TXT With transformation or rectification:

    Subject matter under subclass 144 having an image processing apparatus
    which corrects any distortion produced in the picture image when the
    position of the observed point is moved with respect to the picture image
    pickup.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    580+,   for geometric transformation special effects.


CLS 348/148
TXT Vehicular:

    Subject matter under subclass 143 wherein the surveillance system includes
    a steerable machine for carrying or transporting a load on or below land or
    water surface.


CLS 348/149
TXT Traffic monitoring:

    Subject matter under subclass 148 wherein the movement of vehicles through
    an area or along a route is being regulated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 907+ for electrical traffic
    control indicator.

    346,    Recorders, subclass 107 for vehicle photographing.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 5 for
    recording for selective retention of a special occurrence (e.g., vehicle
    crash recorder, etc.).


CLS 348/150
TXT Point of sale or banking:

    Subject matter under subclass 143 wherein the location to be surveyed is a
    place where currency is being exchanged.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    902,    Electronic Funds Transfer, subclass 6 for electronic means
    providing security using image processor (e.g., video camera).


CLS 348/151
TXT Camera concealment:

    Subject matter under subclass 143 wherein the picture pickup apparatus is
    intended to be out of normal view.


CLS 348/152
TXT Intrusion detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 143 including a camera for discovering the
    presence of a person or an object to which entrance is not welcomed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 541+ for systems to detect
    approach of object or persons.


CLS 348/153
TXT Using plural cameras:

    Subject matter under subclass 152 wherein several cameras are used for
    intrusion detection.


CLS 348/154
TXT Motion detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 153 including apparatus for utilizing a
    television picture signal to develop signals indicative of whether movement
    has taken place in a selected scene or area over a given period of time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    700,    for signal processing circuitry involving motion dependent key
    signal generation or scene change detection.


CLS 348/155
TXT Motion detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 152 including apparatus for utilizing a
    television picture signal to develop signals indicative of whether movement
    has taken place in a selected scene or area over a given period of time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    700,    for signal processing circuitry involving motion dependent key
    signal generation or scene change detection.


CLS 348/156
TXT Access control:

    Subject matter under subclass 143 wherein a camera is used to permit
    entrance or exit of an authorized person or vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.31+ for authorization
    control (e.g., entry into an area).

    382,    Image Analysis, subclasses 115+ for personnel identification using
    image analysis.


CLS 348/157
TXT Sporting event:

    Subject matter under subclass 143 wherein the camera is used for remote
    monitoring of an athletic endeavor.


CLS 348/158
TXT Portable:

    Subject matter under subclass 143 wherein the surveillance system is made
    to be easily carried along with a user.


CLS 348/159
TXT Plural cameras:

    Subject matter under subclass 143 wherein several cameras are used.


CLS 348/160
TXT Reading meter or data printer:

    Subject matter under subclass 143 wherein the television system is used for
    remote reading of data on a measuring instrument or a printer.


CLS 348/161
TXT Object comparison (e.g., remote verification of  signature, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein the video signal of an object is
    sent to a viewer at a remote site for a characteristic or quality
    examination with respect to a reference in order to discover resemblances
    or differences.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.3+ for intelligence
    comparison in general.

    382,    Image Analysis, subclasses 2+ for personnel verification by
    checking signature or fingerprint, etc., using systematic analysis of image
    data.


CLS 348/162
TXT RESPONSIVE TO NONVISIBLE ENERGY:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a picture signal
    generator that is responsive to energy other than visible light for
    conversion into electrical signals representative of the scene or object
    viewed and providing a visible display.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 336.1+ for invisible radiant energy
    responsive systems and non-scanning process.


CLS 348/163
TXT Sonic or ultrasonic:

    Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein the energy is sonic or ultrasonic
    waves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 596+ for similar apparatus
    utilizing acoustic wave energy to produce an image corresponding to the
    acoustic properties (e.g., absorption, reflection) of a viewed object.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 850+ for compressional wave
    systems in an underwater environment.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 7+ for acoustic image conversion.


CLS 348/164
TXT Infrared:

    Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein energy is infrared radiation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 330+ for infrared to visible imaging and
    subclasses 338.1+ for infrared responsive devices.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 124 for similar subject
    matter for providing the spatial distribution of temperature by measuring
    thermally emitted radiant energy.


CLS 348/165
TXT Pyroelectric:

    Subject matter under subclass 164 wherein an image is generated in response
    to a change of temperature of incremental pixel areas.


CLS 348/166
TXT With linear array:

    Subject matter under subclass 164 including a multiplicity of sensor
    elements which are arranged in a one-dimensional matrix.


CLS 348/167
TXT With rotating reflector:

    Subject matter under subclass 166 wherein the sensor includes multifaceted
    polygon reflecting elements for scanning sweep in the primary (fast)
    direction.

    (1)     Note. The fast direction may be a horizontal or vertical scan.


CLS 348/168
TXT With rotating reflector:

    Subject matter under subclass 164 wherein a sensor includes multifaceted
    polygon reflecting elements for scanning sweep in the primary (fast)
    direction.


CLS 348/169
TXT OBJECT TRACKING:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein signals representative of
    the position of a moving object projected onto a picture signal generator
    viewing surface are utilized to control the generator (optically,
    electrically, or by reorientation) to maintain the object in the field of
    view of the generator.

    (1)     Note.  Electrical control of the generator involves control of the
    sweep system as an example.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208,    for image stabilization.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 411+ for means to determine the position of
    an object in ordnance control systems and not employing a particular
    sighting means.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 203.1+ for systems utilizing a photocell
    to follow a point.

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 75+ wherein the position of the object
    determines antenna orientation.


CLS 348/170
TXT Using tracking gate:

    Subject matter under subclass 169 wherein the object is maintained within
    the field of view by gating signals derived from a small area of the
    picture signal generator viewing surface and maintaining the signals
    representative of the object in that gated area.


CLS 348/171
TXT Centroidal tracking:

    Subject matter under subclass 170 wherein a center of optical mass of the
    object is employed for location designation.


CLS 348/172
TXT Centroidal tracking:

    Subject matter under subclass 169 wherein a center of optical mass of the
    object is employed for location designation.


CLS 348/173
TXT CATHODE-RAY TUBE BURN-IN PREVENTION:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a device to prevent
    damage to a cathode-ray tube phosphor screen or target due to a steady
    non-moving image or due to a sweep cessation.

    (1)     Note.  For example, superimposed on a regular horizontal and
    vertical deflection of the scanning beam is an imperceptably slow
    horizontal and/or vertical movement of the display image.


CLS 348/174
TXT Camera:

    Subject matter under subclass 173 wherein the device is applied to prevent
    burn-in of the target of an image pickup tube.


CLS 348/175
TXT CAMERA WITH BUILT-IN TEST SIGNAL GENERATOR, TEST PATTERN, OR ADJUSTING
    ADJUNCT:

    Subject matter under the class definition including the integral
    combination of a camera and a further means which aids in correctly
    adjusting the operation of the camera when the further means is used.

    (1)     Note.  The further means is normally selected by the operator.

    (2)     Note.  Self-regulating devices such as automatic white balance,
    automatic black level, or automatic gain control which often use a "test
    signal" are excluded from this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207+,   for camera with self-regulating control.


CLS 348/176
TXT Setup:

    Subject matter under subclass 175 wherein the adjusting adjunct includes
    means for disabling a normal circuit function.


CLS 348/177
TXT DISPLAY OR RECEIVER WITH BUILT-IN TEST SIGNAL GENERATOR, TEST PATTERN, OR
    ADJUSTING ADJUNCT:

    Subject matter under the class definition including the integral
    combination of a display and means to aid in adjusting the display.

    (1)     Note.  Self-regulating devices such as automatic white balance,
    automatic black level, or automatic gain control which often use a "test
    pulse" or "test signal" are excluded from this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    657     and 658, for a display with a self-regulation white balance.

    678+,   for a receiver with automatic gain control.

    691+,   for a receiver with automatic black level control.


CLS 348/178
TXT Setup:

    Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein the adjusting adjunct includes
    means for disabling a normal circuit function.


CLS 348/179
TXT Color match comparator:

    Subject matter under subclass 177 including a means for comparing a picture
    signal with a reference picture signal to permit an accurate adjustment for
    the color reception.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    657     and 658, for color match comparator built-in to the receiver.


CLS 348/180
TXT MONITORING, TESTING, OR MEASURING:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means separate from the
    television system or components for monitoring, testing, or measuring
    parameters of the television system or components being tested, measured,
    or monitored.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 504 for color facsimile testing and measuring.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 67.1+ for modulated carrier wave
    systems including monitoring, measuring, or testing means.


CLS 348/181
TXT Test signal generator:

    Subject matter under subclass 180 including a means for generating a video
    test signal.


CLS 348/182
TXT Chroma or color bar:

    Subject matter under subclass 181 wherein the test signal represents the
    quality of light which includes color and its purity or a color bar signal
    which consists of six colors (yellow, cyan, green, magenta, red, and blue).


CLS 348/183
TXT VITS or ILTS:

    Subject matter under subclass 181 wherein the test signal is a vertical
    interval test signal (VITS), interjected during the vertical blanking
    interval, or is an in-line test signal (ILTS), injected during the portion
    of the visible or image interval.


CLS 348/184
TXT Monitor:

    Subject matter under subclass 180 including a means for displaying to a
    human observer information concerning the video signal being measured.


CLS 348/185
TXT Combined plural functions (e.g., picture and waveform monitor):

    Subject matter under subclass 184 wherein the monitor includes plural modes
    for selectively displaying incompatible signals.


CLS 348/186
TXT Vectorscope:

    Subject matter under subclass 184 including an instrument for displaying in
    two dimensions the phase relationships of two signals or signal components.

    (1)     Note.  The signal is normally a chrominance signal with one
    component controlling the x-direction and the other component controlling
    the y-direction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring, and Testing, subclass 88 for phase
    measurement.


CLS 348/187
TXT Testing of camera:

    Subject matter under subclass 180 including a means for testing an image
    signal generator.


CLS 348/188
TXT Using test chart:

    Subject matter under subclass 187 wherein the means includes an optical
    pattern containing a group of lines and circles for testing the performance
    of the TV camera.


CLS 348/189
TXT Testing of image reproducer:

    Subject matter under subclass 180 including a means for testing a device
    that converts a scene-representative electrical signal into a visible image.


CLS 348/190
TXT Alignment-manufacturing:

    Subject matter under subclass 189 including a means for an initial
    adjustment of the television receiver during a manufacturing process.


CLS 348/191
TXT Display photometry:

    Subject matter under subclass 189 including a means for measuring and
    displaying the properties of light generated by the receiver or monitor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 213+ for photometry, per
    se.


CLS 348/192
TXT Transmission path testing:

    Subject matter under subclass 180 including a means for testing a quality
    of a TV transmission channel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclasses
    8.2, 11.2, and 20.1+ for error testing of a transmission channel.


CLS 348/193
TXT Signal to noise ratio:

    Subject matter under subclass 192 wherein the testing includes a signal to
    noise ratio.


CLS 348/194
TXT Synchronization (e.g., H-sync to subcarrier):

    Subject matter under subclass 180 including a means for measuring the time
    or phase relationships between components of a TV synchronizing signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186,    for phase measurement.


CLS 348/195
TXT MECHANICAL OPTICAL SCANNING:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a mechanical moving
    device is used for scanning an object or a scene (i.e., partitioning it
    into elemental imaging areas to generate image representative electrical
    signals) or scanning imaging areas by a modulated light beam to reproduce
    the object or scene visible image.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98,     for mechanical-optical scanning systems in motion picture film
    scanning.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 234+ for photocell combined with moving
    optical systems.

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 474+ for facsimile systems utilizing
    mechanical-optical elements.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    196+ for deflection using a moving element or medium and subclasses 227+
    for light control by opaque element or medium movable in or through light
    path.


CLS 348/196
TXT Color TV:

    Subject matter under subclass 195 wherein the image signal generated or
    reproduced is in color.


CLS 348/197
TXT With fiber optics:

    Subject matter under subclass 195 including an optical waveguide which
    confines a transmitted radiation therewithin by means of the principle of
    total internal reflection.

    (1)     Note.  Optical fibers are usually comprised of a central light
    transmitting core of relatively high refractive index, surrounded by a
    concentric cladding of relatively low refractive index.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 227.11+ for photocell with fiber optic
    elements.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, appropriate subclasses.


CLS 348/198
TXT By acoustic wave:

    Subject matter under subclass 195 wherein the scanning is effected by using
    an elastic or sound wave for displacing or deforming portions of an
    optically transmitting medium surface or interface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    285+ and 305+ for acousto-optic modulation.


CLS 348/199
TXT Moving aperture:

    Subject matter under subclass 195 wherein the scanning is accomplished by a
    moving device which has one or multiple openings that will pass light,
    electrons, or other forms of radiation (e.g., Nipkow disk).


CLS 348/200
TXT Drum or belt:

    Subject matter under subclass 199 wherein the moving device is a cylinder
    or a continuous band of flexible material.


CLS 348/201
TXT Multiple scanning elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 199 in which the apertures are included on
    more than one scanning element.


CLS 348/202
TXT Moving lens or refractor:

    Subject matter under subclass 195 wherein the scanning is performed by a
    lens or refracting element that is given a prescribed motion.


CLS 348/203
TXT Moving reflector:

    Subject matter under subclass 195 wherein the scanning is performed by an
    element that is given a prescribed motion and that has a property of
    returning incident light or sound wave.


CLS 348/204
TXT Helical element:

    Subject matter under subclass 203 in which the reflecting element is of a
    spiral configuration.


CLS 348/205
TXT Vibrating or oscillating:

    Subject matter under subclass 203 wherein the prescribed motion consists of
    periodic movements in alternately opposite directions from a position of
    equilibrium.


CLS 348/206
TXT SPECIAL SCANNING (E.G., SPIRAL, RANDOM, ZIGZAG):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a pattern of scanning is
    not generally horizontal from one side to the other with a quick blanked
    retrace to start all lines from the same side (e.g., spiral scanning,
    scanning without retrace, vertical scanning).

    (1)     Note.  For systems using spotwobble which is generally horizontal
    with a small undulating vertical component, see subclass 428.


CLS 348/207
TXT CAMERA, SYSTEM AND DETAIL:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a system or device for
    scanning image of the object or scene (i.e., partitioning the scene into
    sub-areas of image information and generating therefrom an image
    representative electrical signal) or the above combined with circuitry for
    processing the image signal, and subcombinations specific to the camera.

    (1)     Note.  The sub-area is usually an elemental area or pixel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 479 for a video camera scanning document or
    other static image.


CLS 348/208
TXT Camera image stabilization:

    Subject matter under subclass 207 including a device to compensate for
    unwanted movement of a camera to prevent blurring or distortion of
    resulting television pictures.


CLS 348/209
TXT With flying spot scanner:

    Subject matter under subclass 207 wherein the scanning device provides a
    small beam of light which moves over a scene and translates highlights and
    shadows of the scene into electrical signals.

    (1)     Note.  Light spot is usually generated by a cathode-ray tube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99,     100+ and 108+, for motion or still picture film scanning.

    195,    for mechanical optical scanner which may use flying spot technic.


CLS 348/210
TXT For color scanning:

    Subject matter under subclass 209 wherein a plurality of color detecting
    elements (e.g., red, green, and blue) are used to provide color component
    signals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    for color flying spot motion picture film scanner.

    109,    for color flying spot film, disc, card scanning.


CLS 348/211
TXT Remote control:

    Subject matter under subclass 207 wherein the scanning system or device is
    operated by a control signal sent by a controller from a remote location.


CLS 348/212
TXT By multiplexed control signals (e.g., duplexing, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 211 wherein two or more control signals from
    a remote station are transmitted simultaneously over a common transmission
    medium in such a manner that information in the control signals is able to
    be discretely recovered.

    (1)     Note.  In a duplex transmission, multiplexed control signals and a
    video signal at the opposite direction are transmitted simultaneously over
    the same transmission medium.


CLS 348/213
TXT Preprogrammed or stored control instructions:

    Subject matter under subclass 211 wherein control information is previously
    stored in a memory device, in such manner as to be retrieved at appropriate
    time to remotely operate the camera.


CLS 348/214
TXT Body movement actuation:

    Subject matter under subclass 211 wherein the camera operation is
    responsive to a movement of a whole or part of a living body.


CLS 348/215
TXT With streak device:

    Subject matter under subclass 207 wherein the camera comprises a device
    which converts time information from a luminous event into spatial
    information, such conversion enable the measurement of high speed
    variations in intensity distribution of a light emission.


CLS 348/216
TXT Low light level:

    Subject matter under subclass 207 including means suitable for detecting a
    weak or faint input image applied to the camera.


CLS 348/217
TXT With image intensifier:

    Subject matter under subclass 216 including means for amplifying the light
    level of an image applied to the camera.


CLS 348/218
TXT Unitary image formed by compiling sub-areas of same scene (e.g., array of
    cameras):

    Subject matter under subclass 207 wherein images of separate parts of a
    single scene are scanned by separate image sensors for subsequent
    combination into a single complete-image signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262,    for plural image sensors and each sensor scans the complete image
    of a scene.


CLS 348/219
TXT Swing driven:

    Subject matter under subclass 207 wherein the image sensor is mechanically
    vibrated or oscillated to produce the effect of an increased resolution.


CLS 348/220
TXT Still and motion modes of operation:

    Subject matter under subclass 207 wherein the operation of the camera is
    altered for single-frame (still) and multiple-frame (motion) photography.


CLS 348/221
TXT Exposure control:

    Subject matter under subclass 220 having a device for regulating the total
    illumination (e.g., duration or intensity) admitted to an imaging device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229,    for exposure control combined with image signal automatic gain
    control.

    362,    for general exposure control.


CLS 348/222
TXT Combined image signal generator and general image signal processing:

    Subject matter under subclass 207 including at least one image sensor or
    pickup device and in combination therewith related circuitry for
    correcting, adjusting, or otherwise altering the image signal output from
    the image sensor or pickup device.

    (1)     Note.  The signal processing herein is limited to normal television
    signals, such as red, green and blue, or luminance and chrominance.

    (2)     Note.  The image signal processing which depends upon structure of
    a sensor is not classified in this subclass, but is with the sensor, per
    se.  For example, a single solid-state image sensor which converts the dot
    interlace output representing for example cyan, magenta, and yellow (i.e.,
    not normal television signal) to red, green, and blue is found in subclass
    280, solid-state color image sensor with filter based on three colors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    571+,   for general image signal processing not with the image generator
    (i.e., not in the camera).


CLS 348/223
TXT Color balance (e.g., white balance):

    Subject matter under subclass 222 wherein the processing of the video
    output signal includes adjustment of relative amplitudes of plural color
    signals which are output from the camera.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    655,    for color balance not combined with the camera.


CLS 348/224
TXT Dependent upon operation or characteristic of iris, flash, lens, or filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 223 wherein the relative amplitudes of the
    plural color signals are adjusted in response to a parameter, a function,
    or the presence or absence of a camera peripheral which includes diaphragm,
    stop, illuminator, zoom or focus device, or a device altering the incident
    light on the sensor.


CLS 348/225
TXT With means for preventing colored object from effecting color balance:

    Subject matter under subclass 223 including means for preventing a colored
    object from effecting the color balance.


CLS 348/226
TXT Including flicker detection (e.g., fluorescent):

    Subject matter under subclass 223 wherein means are provided for detecting
    the characteristic spectrum or periodic nature of an electric discharge
    lamp.


CLS 348/227
TXT With ambient light sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 223 including an optical sensor separated
    from the image sensor for sensing the characteristics of the ambient light.


CLS 348/228
TXT Responsive to output signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 223 wherein the adjustment of the relative
    amplitudes is derived by feedback from the output of the image sensor.


CLS 348/229
TXT Combined automatic gain control and exposure control (i.e., sensitivity
    control):

    Subject matter under subclass 222 including a control unit which controls
    both the exposure to the image sensor and the amplitude of the sensor
    output signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    345,    for generic focus control camera optics.

    363,    for exposure control camera optics by automatic control of an iris,
    stop, or diaphragm.

    678,    for general automatic gain control.


CLS 348/230
TXT Readout of solid-state image sensor considered or altered:

    Subject matter under subclass 229 wherein the camera comprises a
    solid-state image scanning device and wherein the accumulation time and
    readout process thereof is altered in coordination with the operation of a
    shutter, iris or diaphragm, or vice versa.


CLS 348/231
TXT With details of static memory for output image (e.g., for a still camera):

    Subject matter under subclass 222 wherein the camera includes a non-dynamic
    memory device for storing one or more frames of final image information.

    (1)     Note.  Dynamic memory requires relative motion between the storage
    medium and the playback or recorder head.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, appropriate
    subclasses for television signal storage system.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclasses
    for details of static information storage  structure which may be used for
    the storage of an image signal.

    386,    Television Signal Processing for Dynamic Recording or Reproducing,
    subclasses 1+ and 46+ for dynamic recording or reproducing a television
    signal.


CLS 348/232
TXT With storage of additional, non-image information (e.g., audio, time, date):

    Subject matter under subclass 231 wherein the camera output memory stores,
    in addition to the picture information, information other than that of the
    picture.

    (1)     Note.  Information other than the picture information may be audio
    or character type information (e.g., time, date, etc.), or information
    relating to a camera or image sensor aspect ratio.


CLS 348/233
TXT Detachable:

    Subject matter under subclass 231 wherein the camera output memory can be
    removed from the camera system.


CLS 348/234
TXT Details of luminance signal formation in color camera:

    Subject matter under subclass 222 including specific circuitry for forming
    a brightness component of a television color signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    659,    for general formation of luminance and color difference signal from
    red, green, and blue or vice versa.


CLS 348/235
TXT With means for providing high band and low band luminance signals:

    Subject matter under subclass 234 having an arrangement in which the image
    signal is channeled through appropriate filters for producing low frequency
    and high frequency brightness signals.


CLS 348/236
TXT Using distinct luminance image sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 235 wherein part of the image signal is
    supplied by a separate sensor for producing a luminance signal only.

    (1)     Note.  The distinct luminance sensor may be either black and white
    or monocolor (e.g., green).


CLS 348/237
TXT For single sensor type camera supplying plural color signals:

    Subject matter under subclass 235 wherein the plural luminance signals are
    derived from signals output of one multicolor image scanning device.


CLS 348/238
TXT Using distinct luminance image sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 234 wherein part of the image signal is
    supplied by a separate sensor for producing a luminance signal only.


CLS 348/239
TXT Camera and video special effects (e.g., subtitling, fading, or merging):

    Subject matter under subclass 222 including means for modifying the image
    signal by selectively inserting, deleting, or replacing signal portions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    578+,   for general special effects not combined with camera.


CLS 348/240
TXT Electronic zoom:

    Subject matter under subclass 239 including a solid-state sensor which
    operates to produce an effect of variable magnification.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    581,    for general size change of an image signal.


CLS 348/241
TXT Including noise or undesired signal reduction:

    Subject matter under subclass 222 wherein a circuit is provided to
    compensate for signal defects.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    607+,   for noise reduction in general.


CLS 348/242
TXT Color TV:

    Subject matter under subclass 241 wherein the correction is related to
    color image signals.

    (1)     Note.  An example is false color due to smear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    607+    and 624, for general noise reduction of a color TV signal.


CLS 348/243
TXT Dark current:

    Subject matter under subclass 241 including control circuitry which
    compensates for an output current generated by the image sensor in the
    absence of an incident light.


CLS 348/244
TXT With control of sensor temperature:

    Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein the control circuitry compensates
    the dark current by heating or cooling the image sensor.


CLS 348/245
TXT Using dummy pixels:

    Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein the image sensor is provided with
    non-imaging (i.e., blank) elements which are used to generate a dark
    current correction signal.


CLS 348/246
TXT Defective pixel (e.g., signal replacement):

    Subject matter under subclass 241 wherein a circuit is provided to
    compensate for effects of an inoperable image analyzing element or area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    616,    for dropout compensator normally associated with tape or dynamic
    recording.


CLS 348/247
TXT With memory of defective pixels:

    Subject matter under subclass 246 wherein the location or nature of the
    inoperable image analyzing element is stored for repeated correction.


CLS 348/248
TXT Smear:

    Subject matter under subclass 241 including circuitry which reduces signal
    defects due to crosstalk or leakage between pixels.


CLS 348/249
TXT In charge coupled type sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 248 wherein the image sensor is of the type
    which comprises an array of photosensitive shift registers, photoelectric
    charges therefrom being shifted out in a predetermined order to produce an
    image signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250,    for general noise or undesired signal reduction in charge coupled
    type image sensor.

    282,    for charge coupled type color image sensor combined with color
    filter.

    298,    for charge coupled type image sensor with accumulation or
    integration time responsive to light or signal intensity.

    311,    for charge coupled image sensor architecture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous circuits utilizing a
    charge coupled device.


CLS 348/250
TXT In charge coupled type sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 241 wherein the image sensor is of the type
    which comprises an array of photosensitive shift registers, photoelectric
    charges therefrom being shifted out in a predetermined order to produce an
    image signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249,    for smear reduction in charge coupled type image sensor.

    282,    for charge coupled type color image sensor combined with color
    filter.

    298,    for charge coupled type image sensor with accumulation or
    integration time responsive to light or signal intensity.

    311,    for charge coupled image sensor architecture.


CLS 348/251
TXT Shading or black spot correction:

    Subject matter under subclass 241 including an apparatus to compensate for
    brightness level variations in different areas of a given reproduced
    picture due to unequal characteristics of, or imperfections in, the image
    signal generator.


CLS 348/252
TXT With transition or edge sharpening (e.g., aperture correction):

    Subject matter under subclass 222 including means for reducing the time of
    an amplitude transition or for increasing the size of an amplitude
    transition.


CLS 348/253
TXT Color TV:

    Subject matter under subclass 252 wherein the image signal being processed
    has a portion representing a hue as contrasted with black, white, or gray.


CLS 348/254
TXT Gray scale transformation (e.g., gamma correction):

    Subject matter under subclass 222 including circuitry which modifies the
    range of values contained in a TV signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    671,    for general gray scale transformation not combined with the camera.


CLS 348/255
TXT Amplitude control (e.g., automatic gain control):

    Subject matter under subclass 254 including means to control the amplitude
    of an input signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300,    for amplifier integrated in solid-state image sensor without
    controlling the amplitude.

    678,    for general automatic gain control not combined with the camera.


CLS 348/256
TXT Color TV (e.g., saturation):

    Subject matter under subclass 255 wherein the image signal being processed
    has a portion representing brightness (i.e., black and white), hue (i.e.,
    wavelength), and saturation (i.e., purity from white) as contrasted with
    black, white, or gray.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of saturation are:  Both red and pink have the same
    wavelength, but red is saturated and pink is desaturated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    645,    for chrominance signal amplitude control not combined with the
    camera.


CLS 348/257
TXT With DC level control:

    Subject matter under subclass 222 including means for modifying the DC bias
    of the output signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    691,    for general DC insertion.


CLS 348/258
TXT With bias illumination:

    Subject matter under subclass 257 wherein a uniform auxiliary light of low
    luminosity is used to illuminate the light receiving surface of the camera
    image sensor.

    (1)     Note.  Bias illumination is usually used to eliminate a blurred
    image or a trailing on an image caused by the motion of a scanned object.


CLS 348/259
TXT Combined with color separating optical system:

    Subject matter under subclass 258 including, associated with the bias
    illumination, an optical structure which resolves a light beam from a
    scanned object into two or more beams of different wavelengths
    corresponding to different color components of the object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    336+,   for general color separating optics.


CLS 348/260
TXT For single scanning device color camera:

    Subject matter under subclass 258 wherein the bias illumination is used
    with a single image sensor device supplying plural color signals.


CLS 348/261
TXT Plural bias illuminators:

    Subject matter under subclass 260 including more than one bias illuminator.


CLS 348/262
TXT With plural image scanning devices:

    Subject matter under subclass 207 wherein the camera comprises more than
    one image sensor and each image sensor scans the complete image of a scene.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218,    for plural image scanning devices whereby each device scans a
    sub-area of the complete image.


CLS 348/263
TXT Color imagery registration:

    Subject matter under subclass 262 including apparatus to ensure at any
    instant that the signal from one device corresponds to the same analyzed
    point on a picture as the signals from another device.


CLS 348/264
TXT Scanning devices offset in the image plane:

    Subject matter under subclass 262 wherein the image sensors are displaced
    with respect to each other (e.g., by a half-pixel) in a direction
    orthogonal to the incident optical axis of the image.


CLS 348/265
TXT Each supplying only one color signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 262 wherein each image sensor generates one
    distinct color signal.


CLS 348/266
TXT With single image scanning device supplying plural color signals:

    Subject matter under subclass 207 wherein a single photosensitive element
    of the camera is used for supplying more than one color signal.


CLS 348/267
TXT Separate complete images on face of pickup device:

    Subject matter under subclass 266 wherein plural images of the same object
    or scene are focused onto separate areas of a single pickup device target.


CLS 348/268
TXT Color sequential:

    Subject matter under subclass 266 including a device to decompose colors of
    an object or scene into components which are imparted in sequence to an
    image pickup device.


CLS 348/269
TXT With color sequential illumination:

    Subject matter under subclass 268 wherein a light source, additional to
    ambient light, is provided in different wavelengths (e.g., red, green,
    blue, etc.) during successive intervals for producing color signals using a
    monochrome camera.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for color illumination endoscope which may use color sequential
    technique.

    371,    for flashing or strobing illumination, per se.


CLS 348/270
TXT With moving color filters:

    Subject matter under subclass 268 wherein colors are decomposed by a device
    having a plurality of color transmitting or absorbing elements which move
    in and out of the camera's optical path.

    (1)     Note.  Both continuous moving and oscillating filters are
    classified herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    743,    for image reproducer combined with moving color filters.


CLS 348/271
TXT Four or more color types:

    Subject matter under subclass 270 wherein the camera generates four signals
    of different wavelengths which correspond to four or more distinct color
    signals, or three or more distinct color signals and a luminance signal.


CLS 348/272
TXT Solid-state multicolor image sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 266 wherein the photosensitive scanning
    device, which supplies more than one color signal, is an electronic device
    which operates by virtue of the movement of electrons within a solid
    material.


CLS 348/273
TXT With color filter or operation according to color filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 272 having a color absorbing or transmitting
    device applied to each resolution element of the sensor.


CLS 348/274
TXT Having overlapping elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 273 comprising two or more color absorbing or
    transmitting filters which are partially superimposed.


CLS 348/275
TXT Staggered or irregular elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 273 which includes filter elements that are
    arranged on a surface in any of various zigzags or alternations; or
    comprises filter elements that are nonuniform in shape.


CLS 348/276
TXT Including transparent elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 273 wherein the filter has a mosaic pattern
    made up of individual filter elements, some having a luminance transparency
    and some a chrominance transparency characteristic.


CLS 348/277
TXT With three or more colors:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 wherein at least three chrominance
    components are applied to selected resolution elements.


CLS 348/278
TXT Based on more than four colors:

    Subject matter under subclass 273 comprising more than four types of filter
    elements, each element passing a different wavelength.


CLS 348/279
TXT Based on four colors:

    Subject matter under subclass 273 comprising exactly four types of filter
    elements, each element passing a different wavelength.


CLS 348/280
TXT Based on three colors:

    Subject matter under subclass 273 comprising exactly three types of filter
    elements, each element passing a different wavelength.


CLS 348/281
TXT X-Y architecture:

    Subject matter under subclass 273 wherein the image sensor comprises a
    two-dimensional matrix of photoelectric conversion elements, each element
    being individually selected by external scanning circuitry.


CLS 348/282
TXT Charge coupled architecture:

    Subject matter under subclass 273 wherein the image sensor is of the type
    which comprises an array of photosensitive shift registers, photoelectric
    charges therefrom being shifted out in a predetermined order to produce an
    image signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249,    for smear reduction in charge coupled type image sensor.

    250,    for general noise or undesired signal reduction in charge coupled
    type image sensor.

    298,    for charge coupled type image sensor with accumulation or
    integration time responsive to light or signal intensity.

    311,    for charge coupled image sensor architecture.


CLS 348/283
TXT With multiple output registers:

    Subject matter under subclass 282 wherein the charges are shifted into at
    least two orthogonal shift registers for providing plural outputs.


CLS 348/284
TXT Cathode-ray tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 266 including a camera tube in which an
    optical image of an object is converted to a charge on a photosensitive
    target surface and then scanned by an electron beam to convert the charge
    image to an electrical signal.

    (1)     Note.  Common cathode-ray tubes include iconoscope, orthicon, and
    vidicon.


CLS 348/285
TXT Phase separable signals:

    Subject matter under subclass 284 wherein at least two color components of
    an image of a scene are spatially modulated (e.g., by optical striped
    filters) and the resulting modulated color signals are demodulated by
    utilizing electrical phase detectors for generating color signal components.


CLS 348/286
TXT With indexing:

    Subject matter under subclass 285 including means for generating a position
    signal for indicating the instantaneous position of the scanning electron
    beam.


CLS 348/287
TXT Conductive grid at target:

    Subject matter under subclass 286 wherein the indexing signal is produced
    by one or more conductive elements at the target location.


CLS 348/288
TXT Index elements outside of image area:

    Subject matter under subclass 286 wherein the indexing signal is produced
    by one or more conductive elements located outside of the image area of the
    target.


CLS 348/289
TXT Frequency separable signals:

    Subject matter under subclass 284 wherein at least two color components of
    an image of a scene are spatially modulated (e.g., by optical striped
    filters) and the resulting modulated color signals are demodulated by
    utilizing electrical bandpass filters for generating color signal
    components.


CLS 348/290
TXT Specified optical filter arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 289 having specific detail of an optical
    filter arrangement.


CLS 348/291
TXT Combined with grating, lens array, or refractor:

    Subject matter under subclass 290 wherein the optical filter arrangement
    includes a diffraction grating, a single or a multiple element refractor.


CLS 348/292
TXT Having diagonally arranged stripes:

    Subject matter under subclass 290 wherein at least one array of color
    stripes is oriented non-orthogonally to the scanning direction.


CLS 348/293
TXT Interdigital signal electrodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 289 wherein the cathode-ray tube includes a
    target structure comprising a plurality of interleaved sets of conducting
    strips for deriving respective component color signals.

    (1)     Note.  For example, a target structure comprises red, green, and
    blue striped color filters in front of corresponding transparent electrodes.


CLS 348/294
TXT Solid-state image sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 207 including an electronic device which
    operates by virtue of the movement of electrons within a solid material
    (e.g., semiconductor) for producing electrical signals in response to light
    incident on elemental resolution elements thereon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for photocell circuits and
    apparatus.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses for solid-state devices responsive to light.

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 482+ for image sensors relating to facsimile
    apparatus.


CLS 348/295
TXT Time delay and integration mode (TDI):

    Subject matter under subclass 294 wherein a plurality of photosites or
    photosensitive devices are provided for each resolution element, and
    charges produced by each photosite or photosensitive device are summed to
    provide a signal corresponding to the resolution element.

    (1)     Note.  There is a time delay of the charges sensed prior to the
    charge sensed by the last of the plurality of photosites before summation
    of the charges.


CLS 348/296
TXT Electronic shuttering:

    Subject matter under subclass 294 wherein charges in the solid-state sensor
    are periodically cleared to emulate the effect of a mechanical shutter.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes a large number of electronic still
    cameras wherein the image signal is read-out inhibited when the shutter is
    opened and read-out is enabled when the shutter is closed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229,    for a mechanical aperture control structure as a final control
    element for an exposure determination.


CLS 348/297
TXT Accumulation or integration time responsive to light or signal intensity:

    Subject matter under subclass 294 wherein the photo conversion period
    (i.e., accumulation time or integration time) of the sensor is controlled
    in accordance with the intensity of light or of the picture signal.


CLS 348/298
TXT In charge coupled type image sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 297 wherein the image sensor is of the type
    which comprises an array of photosensitive shift registers, photoelectric
    charges therefrom being shifted out in a predetermined order to produce an
    image signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249,    for smear reduction in charge coupled type image sensor.

    250,    for general noise or undesired signal reduction in charge coupled
    type image sensor.

    282,    for charge coupled type color image sensor combined with color
    filter.

    311,    for charge coupled image sensor architecture.


CLS 348/299
TXT With overflow gate or drain:

    Subject matter under subclass 298 wherein the charge coupled type image
    sensor device includes a structure to eliminate excess charges within the
    device.


CLS 348/300
TXT With amplifier:

    Subject matter under subclass 294 includes a device for increasing the
    magnitude of a sensor intermediate or immediate output signal.


CLS 348/301
TXT Pixel amplifiers:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein an amplifier is provided for
    every imaging element.


CLS 348/302
TXT X - Y architecture:

    Subject matter under subclass 294 wherein the image sensor comprises a
    matrix of rows and columns of photoelectric conversion elements, each
    element representing one image or picture resolution element of the entire
    image and each element being individually selected by external scanning
    circuitry.


CLS 348/303
TXT With charge transfer type output register:

    Subject matter under subclass 302 wherein charge signals from the rows or
    columns of the image sensing elements are collected in parallel and
    serially output by a charge transfer type shift register.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, appropriate subclasses for charge transfer shift
    register, per se.


CLS 348/304
TXT With charge transfer type selecting register:

    Subject matter under subclass 302 wherein external scanning signals for
    addressing row or column sensing elements are provided by a sequential
    charge transfer type shift register.


CLS 348/305
TXT With interlacing:

    Subject matter under subclass 302 includes scanning means whereby odd- and
    even-numbered lines of a picture are outputted consecutively as two
    separate fields.


CLS 348/306
TXT Charge injection device (CID):

    Subject matter under subclass 302 wherein the solid-state image sensor is
    composed of a two-dimensional array of coupled MOS charge-storage
    capacitors and is designed to convert near infrared energy to electrical
    signals, providing broad gray shade or tonal rendition.


CLS 348/307
TXT Photosensitive switching transistors or "static induction" transistors:

    Subject matter under subclass 302 wherein the image resolution elements
    comprise light sensitive switching transistors.


CLS 348/308
TXT Including switching transistor and photocell at each pixel site (e.g.,
    "MOS-type" image sensor):

    Subject matter under subclass 302 wherein each image resolution element
    comprises at least one photosensitive element coupled to a switching
    transistor.


CLS 348/309
TXT Exclusively passive light responsive elements in the matrix:

    Subject matter under subclass 302 wherein each element of the image
    resolution array is composed only by a passive device (i.e., excluding
    transistor).


CLS 348/310
TXT With diode in series with photocell:

    Subject matter under subclass 309 wherein a two-electrode bipolar
    solid-state device is connected in sequence with a photosensitive element.


CLS 348/311
TXT Charge-coupled architecture:

    Subject matter under subclass 294 wherein the image sensor is of the type
    which comprises an array of photosensitive shift registers, photoelectric
    charges therefrom being shifted out in a predetermined order to produce an
    image signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249,    for smear reduction in charge coupled type image sensor.

    250,    for general noise or undesired signal reduction in charge coupled
    type image sensor.

    282,    for charge coupled type color image sensor combined with color
    filter.

    298+,   for accumulation or integration time responsive to light or signal
    intensity in charge coupled image sensor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclasses 63 for charge-coupled device shift
    register.


CLS 348/312
TXT With timing pulse generator:

    Subject matter under subclass 311 including a device for producing
    precisely timed, repetitive voltage pulses to actuate the transfer of
    charges.


CLS 348/313
TXT With bias charge injection:

    Subject matter under subclass 311 wherein photosensitive resolution
    elements associated with potential wells formed under charge transfer are
    supplied with uniform charges in order to raise the operating point of the
    shift register, thereby increasing transfer speed.


CLS 348/314
TXT With excess charge removal (e.g., overflow drain):

    Subject matter under subclass 311 having means to remove unwanted electric
    charges from the charge coupled type image sensing device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    299,    for charge coupled type image sensor accumulation or integration
    time responsive to light with overflow gate or drain.


CLS 348/315
TXT With staggered or irregular photosites or specified channel configuration:

    Subject matter under subclass 311 wherein the solid-state image sensor
    comprises sensor elements that are arranged on a surface of a substrate in
    any of various zigzags,  or overlappings of position, or comprises sensor
    elements that are nonuniform in shape.


CLS 348/316
TXT Charges transferred to opposed registers:

    Subject matter under subclass 311 wherein alternate rows or columns of
    charges are shifted to separate storage or transfer registers located at
    opposite sides of the charge coupled photosensitive area.

    (1)     Note.  This technique is often used to produce odd and even fields.


CLS 348/317
TXT Field or frame transfer type:

    Subject matter under subclass 311 wherein charges of an entire image area
    are shifted in parallel from an exposure area to a storage area of the
    charge coupled image sensing device prior to a readout.


CLS 348/318
TXT With recirculation of charge:

    Subject matter under subclass 317 including provision for recycling the
    output from an output register to an input register or storage register.


CLS 348/319
TXT Charges alternately switched from vertical registers into separate storage
    registers;  or having vertical transfer gates:

    Subject matter under subclass 317 wherein charges from columns of
    photosensitive shift registers are transferred to storage registers other
    than those directly below respective columns;  or subject matter wherein
    charges from the photosites are transferred horizontally into vertical
    shift registers which are separate from the photosensitive area.


CLS 348/320
TXT Interline readout:

    Subject matter under subclass 317 wherein image charges of every other
    column are shifted in parallel from an exposure area to a readout area of
    the charge coupled device prior to a sequential readout.

    (1)     Note.  The term "interline" comes from the word "interlace-line".


CLS 348/321
TXT Using multiple output registers:

    Subject matter under subclass 320 wherein the readout area comprises more
    than one horizontal register.


CLS 348/322
TXT Interline readout:

    Subject matter under subclass 311 wherein image charges of every other
    column are shifted in parallel from an exposure area to a readout area of
    the charge coupled image sensing device prior to a sequential readout from
    the readout area.


CLS 348/323
TXT Using multiple output registers:

    Subject matter under subclass 322 wherein the readout area comprises more
    than one horizontal register.


CLS 348/324
TXT Line transfer type:

    Subject matter under subclass 311 wherein charges of an image line are
    shifted in parallel from an exposure area to a readout area of the charge
    coupled image sensing device prior to a readout.


CLS 348/325
TXT Cathode-ray tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 207 including a camera tube in which an
    optical image of an object is converted to a charge on a photosensitive
    target surface and then scanned by an electron beam to convert the charge
    image to an electrical signal.

    (1)     Note.  Common cathode-ray tubes include iconoscope, orthicon, and
    vidicon.


CLS 348/326
TXT Automatic beam focusing or alignment:

    Subject matter under subclass 325 including means to automatically ensure
    that the beam scanning the target of the tube remains converged essentially
    to a point at the target face.


CLS 348/327
TXT Automatic beam current control:

    Subject matter under subclass 325 including means to regulate the beam
    current of the tube such that it is held at a constant value, or to
    increase, decrease, or maintain the beam current such that the signal
    output has a fixed relationship to the light energy input.


CLS 348/328
TXT Remanent image erasure:

    Subject matter under subclass 325 including means to remove charges still
    remaining on the tube target after it has been scanned by an electron beam.


CLS 348/329
TXT With emissive target or photocathode (e.g., orthicon):

    Subject matter under subclass 325 wherein the cathode-ray tube includes a
    target surface which releases electrons when exposed to light or other
    radiation.


CLS 348/330
TXT Dissector tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 329 in which an electron image emitted from
    the photocathode is scanned across an aperture, behind which aperture an
    electron detector is disposed.


CLS 348/331
TXT With photoconductive target (e.g., vidicon):

    Subject matter under subclass 325 wherein the cathode-ray tube includes a
    target which changes its electrical conductivity when exposed to varying
    amounts of light incident thereon.


CLS 348/332
TXT Array of photocells (i.e., nonsolid-state array):

    Subject matter under subclass 207 wherein the scanning is performed by a
    plurality of elements sensitive to light, each corresponding to a discrete,
    elemental area of the image.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for photocells, circuits, and
    apparatus.


CLS 348/333
TXT With electronic viewfinder or display monitor:

    Subject matter under subclass 207 including an electronic display which is
    a fixed or removable part of the camera for permitting an operator to see
    an image produced from the camera output signal or from an auxiliary signal.


CLS 348/334
TXT With indicium:

    Subject matter under subclass 333 wherein the display shows additional
    information indicative of an external or internal condition of the camera
    or camera related apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  For example the display shows a signal indicative of a lens
    setting, a field of view, or a level of tilt of the camera.


CLS 348/335
TXT Optics:

    Subject matter under subclass 207 wherein the camera includes an optical
    structure which changes a property of an incident light beam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements,
    appropriate subclasses for optical devices, per se.


CLS 348/336
TXT Color separating optics:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 having an optical arrangement for
    resolving a multi-wavelength image into its component color signals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    618+ for optical beam splitting or combining.


CLS 348/337
TXT Prism arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 336 including a multi-sectional refractive
    optical element or a group of refractive optical elements for
    color-separating the incident image.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    831+ for prism, per se.


CLS 348/338
TXT With dichroic layer or air gap between prism sections:

    Subject matter under subclass 337 wherein the color separation is obtained
    at the intersection between refractive optical elements by the optical
    effect of an air gap or a layer of material having a property of passing
    different colors by selectively reflecting or transmitting particular
    wavelengths of a light beam incident thereon.


CLS 348/339
TXT Exclusively dichroic elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 336 wherein the separation of color
    components of an image signal is performed solely by elements having a
    property of passing different colors by selectively reflecting or
    transmitting particular wavelengths of a light beam incident thereon.


CLS 348/340
TXT With optics peculiar to solid-state sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 including a significant optical structure
    for solid-state image sensor.


CLS 348/341
TXT Optical viewfinder:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 including an apparatus permitting an
    operator to see the image that is focused on the sensor.


CLS 348/342
TXT With frequency selective filter (e.g., IR cut, optical LPF, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 335 including an optical device for
    selectively absorbing or transmitting a specific frequency band of the
    spectral response of the camera.


CLS 348/343
TXT Optical multiplexing:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 including optical elements in the optical
    path to the picture signal generator permitting the light output of a
    plurality of diverse light sources to enter the path of the picture signal
    generator.

    (1)     Note.  The light sources may include motion picture and slide
    projectors, for example.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    618+ for optical elements to permit the light from plural channels to enter
    a single channel.


CLS 348/344
TXT Optical path switching:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 including a device for selecting diverse
    optical input or output paths.


CLS 348/345
TXT Focus control:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 including a structure to adjust a
    camera's optical arrangement so that the optical image is maximally
    resolved on the sensor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229,    for depth of focus or field in the interrelated camera peripheral
    operation using an iris, a stop, or a diaphragm.


CLS 348/346
TXT With display of focusing condition or alarm:

    Subject matter under subclass 345 including a device to visually or audibly
    indicate to an operator the state of the focused image.


CLS 348/347
TXT With zoom position detection or interrelated iris control:

    Subject matter under subclass 345 including a device to detect a relative
    position of a variable focal length lens element or a relative position of
    an aperture with respect to a reference position or a reference optical
    element position.


CLS 348/348
TXT Using active ranging:

    Subject matter under subclass 345 including a device, usually acoustical or
    optical, emitting energy and detecting the reflected emitted energy for the
    determination of the distance of a subject from a camera.


CLS 348/349
TXT Using image signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 345 including a device for detecting a
    characteristic of the video output of the camera sensor for determining a
    focus condition.


CLS 348/350
TXT With auxiliary sensor or separate area on imager:

    Subject matter under subclass 349 wherein a second photosensitive detector
    or an area outside an active imaging area of a primary photosensitive
    detector is used to determine the focus condition.


CLS 348/351
TXT With oscillation of lens or sensor to optimize error signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 349 wherein a periodic relative movement of
    the lens or the sensor is used to determine the proper focus condition.


CLS 348/352
TXT With motion detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 349 including a device to detect the movement
    of an object within a scene to control or disable the automatic focusing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    700+,   for image processing circuitry which may deal with scene change
    detection.


CLS 348/353
TXT By detecting contrast:

    Subject matter under subclass 349 including a device for detecting
    brightness differences of video signal components for determining the focus
    condition.


CLS 348/354
TXT By analyzing high frequency component:

    Subject matter under subclass 349 including a device for evaluating
    characteristics of a video signal upper frequency component for determining
    the focus condition.


CLS 348/355
TXT Plural high frequencies:

    Subject matter under subclass 354 wherein more than one high frequency
    component is analyzed.


CLS 348/356
TXT Detection of peak or slope of image signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 354 including a device to detect upper
    amplitudes or rate of change of the high frequency component for
    determining the focus condition.


CLS 348/357
TXT Servo unit structure or mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 345 including details of an electromechanical
    device for achieving the focus condition.


CLS 348/358
TXT Variable magnification (i.e., zoom):

    Subject matter under subclass 335 including a device for varying the
    apparent size of an object or scene focused on the sensor.


CLS 348/359
TXT Fiber optics:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 including the use of an optical waveguide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    804,    for video display system using fiber optics.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 901.1 for fiber optics cross-reference art
    collection.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, subclass 116 for optical imaging fiber bundles.


CLS 348/360
TXT Lens or filter substitution:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein one or more of a plurality of
    wavelength refractive or absorptive optical elements (e.g., lens or filter)
    are selectively positioned in the optical path of the camera.


CLS 348/361
TXT Automatic:

    Subject matter under subclass 360 wherein the selective positioning of a
    lens or a filter is performed responsive to a predetermined condition
    without intervention of a human operator.


CLS 348/362
TXT Exposure control:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 including a device for regulating the
    total illumination (e.g., duration or intensity) admitted to an imaging
    device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221,    for exposure control in a still and motion camera system.

    229,    for exposure control combined with image signal automatic gain
    control.


CLS 348/363
TXT Automatic control of iris, stop, or diaphragm:

    Subject matter under subclass 362 wherein the exposure is controlled by
    opening or closing an aperture responsive to a predetermined condition
    without intervention of a human operator.


CLS 348/364
TXT Based on image signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 363 including a device for analyzing the
    video output of the camera for determining an exposure condition.


CLS 348/365
TXT Contrast:

    Subject matter under subclass 364 including a device for detecting
    brightness differences of video signal components for determining the
    exposure condition.


CLS 348/366
TXT Based on ambient light:

    Subject matter under subclass 363 wherein the exposure control is based on
    an environmental illumination.


CLS 348/367
TXT Periodic shuttering:

    Subject matter under subclass 362 including an element for alternately
    blocking and passing light to the image sensor at every field or frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    296,    for electronic shuttering.


CLS 348/368
TXT Rotary:

    Subject matter under subclass 367 wherein a rotating mechanical blade or
    apertured device is used to accomplish shuttering.


CLS 348/369
TXT Changing viewing angle via optics:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 including an optical structure for
    bringing image illumination from a certain position not on the principle
    optical axis of the camera to a position within a field of view of the
    camera.


CLS 348/370
TXT With object or scene illumination:

    Subject matter under subclass 207 wherein a scanned object or scene is
    supplied with light or radiation in addition to ambient light or radiation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258+,   for bias illumination of the camera surface.


CLS 348/371
TXT Flash or strobe:

    Subject matter under subclass 370 wherein periodic or transient impulses of
    light are applied to the scanned object or scene.


CLS 348/372
TXT Power supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 207 including a detail of energy supply
    necessary for the functioning of the camera.


CLS 348/373
TXT Support or housing:

    Subject matter under subclass 207 including a detail of a mounting or
    casing structure for the picture signal generator.


CLS 348/374
TXT For internal camera components:

    Subject matter under subclass 373 including a mounting for elements within
    the camera housing.


CLS 348/375
TXT For specified accessory:

    Subject matter under subclass 373 wherein the support or housing is
    associated with an auxiliary camera component (e.g., flash).


CLS 348/376
TXT Portable or hand-held:

    Subject matter under subclass 373 wherein the casing for the camera is
    readily carried or grasped by the user.


CLS 348/377
TXT CATHODE-RAY TUBE DISPLAY EXCESSIVE VOLTAGE CONTROL:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a device to prevent the
    occurrence of high electrical potential which may damage the cathode-ray
    tube.


CLS 348/378
TXT With disabling:

    Subject matter under subclass 377 including a device, responsive to a
    detected overvoltage, to inhibit the function of one or more display
    circuits.


CLS 348/379
TXT CATHODE-RAY TUBE DISPLAY AUTOMATIC BLACK LEVEL BIAS CONTROL:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a device to regulate
    the cut-off potential of the cathode-ray tube.


CLS 348/380
TXT CATHODE-RAY TUBE DISPLAY BEAM CURRENT CONTROL:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a device to regulate or
    limit the brightness of the displayed image.


CLS 348/381
TXT With beam energy determining color:

    Subject matter under subclass 380 including an apparatus for imparting
    color to the picture by controlling the energy supplied to the beam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 473 for tubes with
    screens of the plural layer type.


CLS 348/382
TXT Variable depth of penetration of electron beam into the luminescent layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 381 wherein the depth of penetration of the
    beam into the luminescent layer determines the color.


CLS 348/383
TXT MODULAR IMAGE DISPLAY SYSTEM:

    Subject matter under the class definition which includes a display system
    comprising more than one display device, each displaying an image of part
    of the scene being televised.


CLS 348/384
TXT BANDWIDTH REDUCTION SYSTEM:

    Subject matter under the class definition including apparatus to compress
    the frequency range of the signal produced by a picture signal generator
    prior to transmission to accommodate the bandwidth limitation of the
    transmission medium or means at the receiver to utilize the signal to
    reconstruct an image.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 50+ for code
    converters wherein the signal may be encoded to reduce bandwidth.

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 426+ for bandwidth reduction systems peculiar
    to facsimile.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 240+ for bandwidth
    reduction or expansion.

    704,    Data Processing:  Speech Signal Processing, Linguistics, Language
    Translation, and Audio Compression/Decompression, subclasses 500 through
    504 for bandwidth, or time compression, or expansion of audio signals.


CLS 348/385
TXT Plural video programs in single channel:

    Subject matter under subclass 384 wherein two or more video signals are
    processed to reduce their bandwidth and combined such that the combined
    signal bandwidth is less than or equal to the bandwidth of one of the video
    signals to allow use of a channel normally used by a single video signal.

    (1)     Note.  Examples are time compressing and frequency limiting with
    frequency.


CLS 348/386
TXT Color television:

    Subject matter under subclass 385 wherein color video signals are specified.

    (1)     Note.  The color signals maybe composite (chrominance modulated on
    a subcarrier) or component (e.g., luminance and chrominance or red, green,
    and blue).

    (2)     Note.  Nominal recitations are insufficient to be classified here.


CLS 348/387
TXT Bit-rate reduction:

    Subject matter under subclass 385 wherein the compression utilizes digital
    techniques to reduce the number of bits in a sampled and quantized image.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    385+,   for digital type processing.

    390,    for bit-rate reduction.


CLS 348/388
TXT Multiple channel (e.g., plural carrier):

    Subject matter under subclass 384 wherein the signal is split and fed into
    plural channels each of which has less bandwidth than the original signal.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are the systems where the combined
    bandwidth, of the plural channels, equals the bandwidth of the input
    signal.


CLS 348/389
TXT Including one conventional or compatible channel (e.g., two channel NTSC
    systems):

    Subject matter under subclass 388 wherein one channel can be received and
    utilized by a normal receiver to provide a normal display.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of signals included in the augmentation channels
    are:  Side panels to expand the aspect ratio of the high definition
    display; high frequency information, both horizontal and vertical; and
    extra audio information.

    (2)     Note.  The second or additional channels are often referred to as
    augmentation channels and normally can not provide a display by themselves.
     Reception of all channels allows a high definition display.


CLS 348/390
TXT Bit-rate reduction:

    Subject matter under subclass 384 wherein the signal is processed to reduce
    the number of bits in a sampled and quantized image.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclass 67 for data rate
    conversion.


CLS 348/391
TXT Specified color signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 390 wherein the signals compressed are the
    components of a natural color video signal (e.g., luminance and chrominance
    or red, green, and blue).

    (1)     Note.  A composite signal that is separated into chrominance and
    luminance or red, green, and blue is classified herein.


CLS 348/392
TXT Sub-Nyquist sampling:

    Subject matter under subclass 391 wherein the bandwidth reduction is
    performed by folding the higher frequencies down to fit inside a reduced
    frequency spectrum by sampling at a rate less than twice the highest
    frequency, causing the alias and baseband spectrums to overlap.

    (1)     Note.  The Nyquist criteria states that the sampling rate should be
    at least twice the baseband.  In sub-Nyquist systems, the sampling rate is
    less than the required Nyquist sampling rate.

    (2)     Note.  The alias components, which are generated by sampling and
    centered on the sampling frequency, are normally placed in teeth or gaps of
    the video spectrum to allow recovery of the original full band signal.

    (3)     Note.  These systems often use comb filters (2 or 3 dimensional
    filters using line, field, or frame delays) to remove any signal in the
    gaps.


CLS 348/393
TXT Direct coding of color composite signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 391 wherein the video signal that is band
    reduced is a video signal having a color subcarrier in the same band as the
    luminance signal or black and white signal.

    (1)     Note.  Examples are NTSC, PAL, or SECAM.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    391,    for systems that receive a color composite signal, separates it
    into luminance and chrominance components, and reduces the band of the
    separated components.


CLS 348/394
TXT Predictive coding:

    Subject matter under subclass 393 including a means for coding the
    difference between the actual signal and an estimated signal.


CLS 348/395
TXT Transform coding:

    Subject matter under subclass 393 wherein a remapping of image values
    (e.g., between spatial and frequency domains) is involved.

    (1)     Note.  The video signals and frequency domain can have one, two, or
    three dimensions (horizontal, vertical, and temporal).


CLS 348/396
TXT Including luminance signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 391 wherein one of the components is a
    brightness or luminance signal.


CLS 348/397
TXT Using separate coders for different picture features (e.g., highs, lows):

    Subject matter under subclass 390 wherein individual discrete systems of
    characters or rules are used for representing information related to
    diverse image portions.


CLS 348/398
TXT Sub-band encoding (e.g., low horizontal/low vertical frequency, low
    horizontal/high vertical frequency):

    Subject matter under subclass 397 wherein the signal is divided into a
    plurality of frequency bands.


CLS 348/399
TXT Picture feature dependent sampling rate or sample selection:

    Subject matter under subclass 390 wherein an instantaneous value of a
    signal is obtained at irregular intervals determined by image spatial
    content.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclass 61 for data rate
    conversion.


CLS 348/400
TXT Involving hybrid transform and difference coding:

    Subject matter under subclass 390 wherein a remapping of image values
    (i.e., between spatial and frequency domains) occurs in combination with a
    diminution of signal quantity by comparison with a (temporally or spatial)
    preceding signal.


CLS 348/401
TXT With prior difference coding:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein the comparison with the preceding
    signal occurs prior to the remapping.


CLS 348/402
TXT Including motion vector:

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein the comparison is used to produce
    a signal indicative of the magnitude and direction of spatial change during
    the stated temporal interval.


CLS 348/403
TXT Involving transform coding:

    Subject matter under subclass 390 involving a remapping of image values
    (i.e., between spatial and frequency domains).


CLS 348/404
TXT Adaptive:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 wherein an operation or parameter of the
    encoder is varied based upon the output signal.


CLS 348/405
TXT Quantizer:

    Subject matter under subclass 404 wherein the operation or varied parameter
    is the number of discrete signal amplitudes.


CLS 348/406
TXT Normalizer:

    Subject matter under subclass 404 wherein the operation or varied parameter
    is the gain of the encoder.


CLS 348/407
TXT Motion:

    Subject matter under subclass 404 wherein the operation or parameter is
    varied as a result of spatial change during a temporal interval.


CLS 348/408
TXT Transformed sample selection (e.g., hierarchical sample selection):

    Subject matter under subclass 403 wherein the remapped values are chosen
    for further processing or transmission based upon content.


CLS 348/409
TXT Involving difference transmission (e.g., predictive):

    Subject matter under subclass 390 wherein an output signal represents the
    difference between the input signal and a predicted value.

    (1)     Note.  The predicted signal may be the preceding signal.


CLS 348/410
TXT Involving both PCM and DPCM encoding:

    Subject matter under subclass 409 wherein the signal is sampled
    periodically and each sample is quantized and transmitted as a digital
    binary code with additional difference information transmitted as a digital
    binary code.


CLS 348/411
TXT Plural predictors:

    Subject matter under subclass 409 wherein more than a single predicted
    value is used for comparison.


CLS 348/412
TXT Including temporal predictor (e.g., frame difference):

    Subject matter under subclass 411 wherein at least one comparison signal
    represents a prior image in time.


CLS 348/413
TXT Including motion vector:

    Subject matter under subclass 412 wherein at least one comparison is used
    to produce a signal indicative of the magnitude and direction of spatial
    change during the stated temporal interval.


CLS 348/414
TXT Involving vector quantization:

    Subject matter under subclass 411 wherein at least one comparison is with a
    codebook of stored reference image or sub-image portions.


CLS 348/415
TXT Including temporal prediction (e.g., frame difference):

    Subject matter under subclass 409 wherein the comparison signal represents
    a prior image in time.


CLS 348/416
TXT Including motion vector:

    Subject matter under subclass 415 wherein a signal is produced which is
    indicative of the magnitude and direction of spatial change during the
    stated temporal interval.


CLS 348/417
TXT Involving vector quantization:

    Subject matter under subclass 415 wherein a comparison is made with a
    codebook of stored reference image or sub-image portions.


CLS 348/418
TXT Involving vector quantization:

    Subject matter under subclass 409 wherein the resulting signal is further
    compared with a codebook of stored reference image or sub-image portions.


CLS 348/419
TXT Coding element controlled by buffer fullness (e.g., adaptive quantizer):

    Subject matter under subclass 409 wherein the resolution of the comparison
    is determined by the amount of the remaining capacity of a temporary
    storage device.


CLS 348/420
TXT Involving block coding:

    Subject matter under subclass 390 wherein the sampled and quantized image
    matrix is processed by the use of plural submatrices of reduced area.


CLS 348/421
TXT PCM represents minimum, maximum, or average of block:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 wherein a digital binary code is
    representative of the lowest value of the block or the greatest value of
    the block or the sum of the values of a two-dimensional spatial array of
    values divided by the number of elements in the array.


CLS 348/422
TXT Involving vector quantization:

    Subject matter under subclass 390 wherein the sampled and quantized image
    representation matrix is compared with a codebook of stored reference image
    or sub-image portions.


CLS 348/423
TXT Arrangements for multiplexing one video signal, one or more audio signals,
    and a synchronizing signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 390 wherein concurrent transmission of the
    sampled and quantized image signal, at least one related sound channel
    signal and a signal to ensure receiver scanning align with the picture
    signal generator.


CLS 348/424
TXT Sub-Nyquist sampling:

    Subject matter under subclass 390 wherein the sampling rate is less than
    twice the highest frequency component.


CLS 348/425
TXT Adaptive:

    Subject matter under subclass 424 wherein the sampling rate is determined
    by image signal content.


CLS 348/426
TXT Format type (e.g., HDTV or EDTV):

    Subject matter under subclass 384 including systems that produce a narrow
    band signal, which resembles a conventional TV signal, from a broadband
    source and allow reconstruction of a broadband display.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are systems in which additional video
    information is transmitted by using a subcarrier, sampling, additional
    modulation of the picture carrier (e.g., quadrature), undulatory scanning,
    line number conversion, or placing an extra video in normal blanking areas.



CLS 348/427
TXT Including frequency folding (e.g., subsampling):

    Subject matter under subclass 426 wherein  additional information is
    embedded in the video signal by causing the alias components centered about
    the sampling frequency to extend into the normal baseband signal.

    (1)     Note.  Systems that use a subcarrier to achieve the same effect are
    classified herein.

    (2)     Note.  Recitation and recognition of frequency folding is not
    required for classification herein.

    (3)     Note.  The lower sideband of the alias components has the F or
    Fs-Fv, with Fs being the sampling frequency, and Fv being the video
    frequency the higher Fv (the lower the alias Fs-Fv) the frequency folding
    occurs around Fs/2.


CLS 348/428
TXT Spotwobble (e.g., pixels from plural lines form single transmitted line):

    Subject matter under subclass 427 wherein at least some pixels on the same
    transmitted line are vertically displaced from each other in addition to
    the normal horizontal displacement between pixels.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are systems that have vertically aligned
    samples as long as the scan is generally horizontal.

    (2)     Note.  Systems that scan vertically are classified in special
    scanning subclass 206.

    (3)     Note.  The source and display either have more lines than the
    transmitted signal or undulate the scan.


CLS 348/429
TXT Including video related information (e.g., digitally assisted television):

    Subject matter under subclass 427 including signals, in addition to the
    video signals, used in the receiver to reconstruct a broadband signal
    resembling the original broadband signal.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of video related information are motion vectors or
    motion indicators.


CLS 348/430
TXT Using two or more frames:

    Subject matter under subclass 427 wherein the same pixel is sampled at
    least every other frame.

    (1)     Note.  Such systems are often referred to as dot interlaced.

    (2)     Note.  Such systems require several frames to build up the
    broadband display.


CLS 348/431
TXT Motion adaptive:

    Subject matter under subclass 430 wherein different operating modes are
    used depending upon frame-to-frame differences.


CLS 348/432
TXT Added video information in standard channel format (e.g., compatible EDTV):

    Subject matter under subclass 426 wherein the narrow band signal is a
    conventional TV signal such as NTSC, PAL, or SECAM, and the broadband
    display is reconstructed using the conventional signal and at least one
    other signal is transmitted with the conventional signal.

    (1)     Note. The conventional signal is usable by itself to produce a
    narrow band display.  Chrominance information is not considered additional
    video information.


CLS 348/433
TXT Including additional modulation of picture carrier (e.g., quadrature):

    Subject matter under subclass 432 wherein the other video information
    modulates the picture carrier in a manner different than the normal signal.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are quadrature modulation, phase modulation,
    and frequency modulation involving modulation of a carrier of the same
    frequency as the picture carrier and differing in phase by 90 degrees.


CLS 348/434
TXT Including information in sync, blanking, or overscan:

    Subject matter under subclass 432 wherein the added video information
    occupies a time interval not occupied by the normal display video.

    (1)     Note.  Overscan is active video which is normally hidden by the
    face plate.


CLS 348/435
TXT During vertical blanking interval:

    Subject matter under subclass 434 wherein the added video information is
    inserted between the active interval of successive frames.


CLS 348/436
TXT Including the use of a subcarrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 432 wherein the additional signal is
    modulated on a carrier having a frequency other than the picture carrier,
    but located in the bandwidth of the video signal.


CLS 348/437
TXT Individual processing of different parts of image frequency band (e.g., sum
    and difference, high band/low band):

    Subject matter under subclass 426 having at least two frequency bands, such
    as a low frequency and a high frequency which are treated differently.


CLS 348/438
TXT Individual processing of different parts of image frequency band (e.g., sum
    and difference, high band/low band):

    Subject matter under subclass 384 having at least two frequency bands such
    as a low frequency and a high frequency which are treated differently.


CLS 348/439
TXT Frame field or line dropping followed by time expansion and time
    compression:

    Subject matter under subclass 384 wherein the original signal is
    band-reduced by decimating frames, fields, or lines and time expanding the
    signal to occupy the time base of the original signal.

    (1)     Note.  The process is reversed at the receiver to produce a signal
    having at least the same frame, field, and line rate as the original signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    438,    for similar systems that also produce a different signal for the
    missing line field or frame which is band limited.


CLS 348/440
TXT Scan rate variation:

    Subject matter under subclass 384 wherein the frequency range is reduced by
    lowering the speed of the scanning at the time significant transitions in
    the image occur and resume higher scanning speed when little or no
    transition occurs.


CLS 348/441
TXT FORMAT CONVERSION:

    Subject matter under the class definition including particular methods or
    apparatus for converting one format into another format.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of converters found herein are NTSC to PAL or
    SECAM, High Vision to NTSC, or field sequential color to simultaneous color
    signal (e.g., NTSC).


CLS 348/442
TXT Involving polar to Cartesian or vice versa:

    Subject matter under subclass 441 including a means for converting a radial
    scanned pattern to a rectangular scanned pattern or vice versa.

    (1)     Note.  Examples herein are radar to TV or vice versa.


CLS 348/443
TXT Involving both line number and field rate conversion (e.g., PAL to NTSC):

    Subject matter under subclass 441 wherein the conversion from the first
    signal to second signal changes both the number of lines per field and the
    number of fields per second.


CLS 348/444
TXT Specified chrominance signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 443 including structure or process for
    converting a first chrominance signal into a second chrominance signal
    (e.g., converting from the quadrature modulated NTSC chrominance to either
    the line reversing PAL quadrature signal or the line alternating frequency
    modulated SECAM chrominance).


CLS 348/445
TXT Conversion between standards with different aspect ratios:

    Subject matter under subclass 441 wherein input and output signals have
    different width to height ratios and the conversion adjusts the ratios.

    (1)     Note.  Examples herein are systems that select the standard 4:3
    aspect ratio of a wide aspect ratio signal or systems that fill in the top
    and bottom of a 4:3 aspect ratio (e.g., letter box) to display a wide
    aspect ratio signal.


CLS 348/446
TXT Progressive to interlace:

    Subject matter under subclass 441 wherein an input signal has all the lines
    scanned during one vertical period and an output signal requires at least
    two vertical periods to scan all the lines.

    (1)     Note.  In the input signal the spatially adjacent lines are
    temporally adjacent while in the output signal the spatially adjacent lines
    are not temporally adjacent and the temporally adjacent lines are not
    spatially adjacent.

    (2)     Note.  Often the conversion also changes the frame rate, but such
    frame rate conversion is not required for classification herein.


CLS 348/447
TXT Field rate type flicker compensating:

    Subject matter under subclass 441 comprising means to decrease the period
    of the output signal below 1/60th of a second to reduce large area flicker
    in a display.

    (1)     Note.  Rate change between formats such as NTSC and PAL are
    classified in subclass 459 or subclass 441.

    (2)     Note. These systems can include line number doubling or halving.


CLS 348/448
TXT Line doublers type (e.g., interlace to progressive IDTV type):

    Subject matter under subclass 441 wherein an input signal has N lines per
    vertical period and an output signal contains at least 2N lines per
    vertical period.

    (1)     Note. Most systems use a progressive scan where vertical periods
    (field) are in the same position on the display as compared with an
    interlaced system where lines in adjacent fields are offset. Classified
    herein are systems that double the number of the lines and produce an
    interlace display (e.g., conversion from 525 2:1 to either 525 1:1 or 1050
    2:1).


CLS 348/449
TXT Including nonstandard signal detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 448 including a means for determining whether
    the signal has a fixed line period (broadcast) or a variable line period
    (tape machine).

    (1)     Note.  These systems normally switch operating modes using the
    previous field for standard signal and line interpolation for nonstandard
    signals.


CLS 348/450
TXT Specified chrominance processing (e.g., Y/C separation):

    Subject matter under subclass 448 including a means for processing a
    composite color signal (a signal with a color subcarrier in the luminance
    band like NTSC, PAL, or SECAM).

    (1)     Note.  The processing is normally chrominance luminance separation
    wherein the normal field delay used in line doubling is also used as a
    delay for chrominance luminance separation.


CLS 348/451
TXT Motion adaptive:

    Subject matter under subclass 450 including a detector which senses field
    to field or frame to frame differences and which processing has at least
    two modes (e.g., still, moving, slow motion, or fast motion) with the
    difference signal selecting the mode.

    (1)     Note.  The two modes maybe either the line doubling selecting
    between the previous field or interpolation or some other two modes
    processing like Y/C separation or noise reduction.


CLS 348/452
TXT Motion adaptive:

    Subject matter under subclass 448 including a detector which senses field
    to field or frame to frame differences and which has at least two modes of
    line doubling (e.g., still, moving, slow motion, or fast motion) with the
    difference signal selecting the mode.


CLS 348/453
TXT Specified chrominance processing:

    Subject matter under subclass 441 wherein an input color signal and an
    output color signal differ in the method in which the color information is
    assembled and wherein the system changes from the first method of assembly
    to the second method of assembly.


CLS 348/454
TXT PAL to NTSC or vice versa:

    Subject matter under subclass 453 wherein a chrominance signal having the
    phase of one of the quadrature components inverted in alternating lines is
    converted into a quadrature modulated chrominance signal without phase
    inversion or vice versa.


CLS 348/455
TXT In which simultaneous signals are converted into sequential signals or vice
    versa:

    Subject matter under subclass 453 wherein one of the signals has
    information for all three colors, red (R), green (G), and blue (B) all the
    time and the other has information for no more than two colors at any one
    time with at least two signals being time division multiplexed.

    (1)     Note.  Systems that alternate signals at the pixel rate (dot
    sequential) are considered simultaneous.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein are systems that convert from SECAM to PAL
    or NTSC or vice versa.


CLS 348/456
TXT Field or frame sequential to simultaneous:

    Subject matter under subclass 455 wherein the sequential signals alternate
    at field or frame rate.

    (1)     Note.  The signal are normally R, G, and B.


CLS 348/457
TXT Frequency change of subcarrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 453 including a means for changing the
    frequency of the subcarrier.


CLS 348/458
TXT Changing number of lines for standard conversion:

    Subject matter under subclass 441 including a means for converting numbers
    of line per field of an input signal to different numbers of lines per
    field of output signals.

    (1)     Note.  Details of how output lines are formed from the input lines
    are classified herein.


CLS 348/459
TXT Changing number of fields for standard conversion:

    Subject matter under subclass 441 including an apparatus or method for
    changing an input signal having a vertical period to an output signal
    having a different vertical period.


CLS 348/460
TXT DIVERSE DEVICE CONTROLLED BY INFORMATION EMBEDDED IN VIDEO SIGNAL:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a device other than the
    normal video processing circuits of a receiver which is controlled by a
    signal added to a normal TV signal.


CLS 348/461
TXT NONPICTORIAL DATA PACKET IN TELEVISION FORMAT:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein lines of a TV signal are
    used to carry coded character data.


CLS 348/462
TXT Audio:

    Subject matter under subclass 461 wherein the coded character data
    represent audio information.


CLS 348/463
TXT Full field:

    Subject matter under subclass 461 wherein all the lines of the TV signal
    are utilized.


CLS 348/464
TXT Sync:

    Subject matter under subclass 461 including details of synchronizing a
    coded character transmitted with a coded character receiver.


CLS 348/465
TXT Data separation or detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 461 including circuitry for separating or
    identifying the character codes from the video signal.


CLS 348/466
TXT Error correction or prevention:

    Subject matter under subclass 461 including circuitry for detecting or
    correcting invalid data within the character codes.


CLS 348/467
TXT Data format:

    Subject matter under subclass 461 wherein details of the character code
    format are specified.


CLS 348/468
TXT Including teletext decoder or display:

    Subject matter under subclass 461 including circuitry for processing
    extracted coded character information for display.


CLS 348/469
TXT FORMAT:

    Subject matter under the class definition including particular methods or
    apparatus for combining the time variable video signal with a synchronizing
    signal to allow reconstruction of the image from which the video signal
    originated.


CLS 348/470
TXT Adapted to reduce noise or for frequency modulation (e.g., variable gain):

    Subject matter under subclass 469 including particular methods or apparatus
    for reducing the effects of noise or for optimizing the signal for FM
    transmission.

    (1)     Note.  Time division multiplexing of chrominance and luminance
    components is classified in subclass 488.


CLS 348/471
TXT Including pulse modulation of video signal (e.g., pulse width, PAM):

    Subject matter under subclass 469 wherein the video signal is encoded using
    short duration amplitude spikes.


CLS 348/472
TXT Pulse code modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 471 wherein the video is quantized into
    plural bits and the amplitude spikes represent either a one or zero with
    the absence of a pulse representing the other.


CLS 348/473
TXT Including additional information:

    Subject matter under subclass 469 including a signal component other than
    the video and sync components.

    (1)     Note.  Additional information includes sound signal which may or
    may not be related to the image carried by the video signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    426+,   for similar systems wherein the added signal is an additional part
    of the image such as a side panel, a high frequency component, or a
    vertical high frequency component.


CLS 348/474
TXT For controlling video processing (e.g., digitally assisted video):

    Subject matter under subclass 473 wherein the additional signal component
    is derived from video and controls the receiver processing of the signals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    429,    for similar subject matter where the video signal has been
    frequency folded.


CLS 348/475
TXT Additional modulation of picture carrier (e.g., quadrature):

    Subject matter under subclass 473 wherein the additional signal directly
    modulates a carrier of the same frequency as the picture carrier.

    (1)     Note.  Most often the addition modulation is amplitude modulation
    of a carrier at 90 degrees to the picture carrier which is called
    quadrature modulation.  However, both phase and frequency modulation of the
    carrier before or after amplitude modulation of the carrier by the video
    are classified herein.


CLS 348/476
TXT During sync, blanking, or overscan:

    Subject matter under subclass 473 wherein the signal component occupies a
    time interval not occupied by the normal display video.


CLS 348/477
TXT During both vertical and horizontal blanking:

    Subject matter under subclass 476 wherein the time interval is a time
    period of vertical and horizontal retrace.


CLS 348/478
TXT During vertical blanking:

    Subject matter under subclass 476 wherein the time interval is a time
    period of the vertical retrace.


CLS 348/479
TXT During horizontal blanking:

    Subject matter under subclass 476 wherein the time interval is a time
    period of the horizontal retrace.


CLS 348/480
TXT Sound signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 479 wherein the additional information is an
    audio signal.


CLS 348/481
TXT Plural (e.g., stereo or SAP):

    Subject matter under subclass 480 including more than one audio signal.

    (1)     Note.  The audio signals may be related such as stereo or unrelated
    such as a second language.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    1+ for binaural and stereophonic, per se.


CLS 348/482
TXT Sound signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 476 wherein the additional information is an
    audio signal.


CLS 348/483
TXT Plural (e.g., stereo or SAP):

    Subject matter under subclass 482 including more than one audio signal.

    (1)     Note.  The audio signals may be related such as stereo or unrelated
    such as a second language.


CLS 348/484
TXT Sound signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 473 wherein the additional information is an
    audio signal.


CLS 348/485
TXT Plural (e.g., stereo or SAP):

    Subject matter under subclass 484 including more than one audio signal.

    (1)     Note.  The audio signals may be related such as stereo or unrelated
    such as a second language.


CLS 348/486
TXT Including the use of a subcarrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 473 wherein the additional information
    modulates a carrier located within the bandwidth of the picture carrier.


CLS 348/487
TXT Broadband (e.g., occupying two adjacent channels or parts thereof):

    Subject matter under subclass 469 wherein the signal occupies a continuous
    frequency band greater than a conventional channel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    389,    for systems that occupy two nonadjacent channels.


CLS 348/488
TXT Specified color signal format:

    Subject matter under subclass 469 including particular methods or apparatus
    for combining individual color signals together with a sync signal for
    transmission.


CLS 348/489
TXT Time division multiplexing of luminance and chrominance (e.g., MAC):

    Subject matter under subclass 488 wherein a signal representing the
    brightness or the black and white information and signals representing the
    color content are sequentially transmitted at a rate substantially less
    than the pixel or element rate.


CLS 348/490
TXT Field or frame sequential systems:

    Subject matter under subclass 488 wherein signals are transmitted
    sequentially with a duration of at least one vertical period.

    (1)     Note.  Dot sequential systems which select one color or luminance
    pixel followed by another color pixel etc., are classified in subclass 492.


CLS 348/491
TXT Simultaneous and sequential (e.g., SECAM):

    Subject matter under subclass 488 wherein a single color or luminance
    signal is transmitted continuously while at least two additional color
    signals are transmitted alternately at a rate substantially less than the
    pixel or elemental rate.


CLS 348/492
TXT Simultaneous signals:

    Subject matter under subclass 488 wherein a plurality of color signals or
    luminance and color signals are transmitted simultaneously.


CLS 348/493
TXT Luminance plus dual-phase modulated color carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 492 in which one signal conveys brightness or
    black and white information and a second carrier signal conveys two
    distinct quantities of color information at either two distinct phases or
    phase and amplitude.


CLS 348/494
TXT Dot sequential:

    Subject matter under subclass 492 wherein the components are time division
    multiplexed at the pixel or element rate.


CLS 348/495
TXT Of sync signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 469 wherein the format includes details of
    sync information for transmission.


CLS 348/496
TXT Color:

    Subject matter under subclass 495 wherein the sync information is for a
    color TV signal.


CLS 348/497
TXT FLUTTER OR JITTER CORRECTION (E.G., DYNAMIC REPRODUCTION):

    Subject matter under the class definition including circuitry for
    correcting a timebase error of a video signal which may vary with respect
    to time.


CLS 348/498
TXT Specified color:

    Subject matter under subclass 497 wherein the video signal is a specified
    color.


CLS 348/499
TXT Using frequency shifting (e.g., heterodyne):

    Subject matter under subclass 498 wherein the chrominance signal is
    corrected by mixing another frequency.


CLS 348/500
TXT SYNCHRONIZATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition including particular techniques
    or apparatus for utilizing synchronizing signal components to maintain
    proper time or phase correspondence between scanning components of the
    television system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 141+ for miscellaneous synchronizing circuits.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 20, 21, 145, 149, 153, and 172 for TV sync
    type oscillators and oscillators with sync circuits.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 243+ for
    electrical systems including synchronization of shafts.


CLS 348/501
TXT Reprocessing:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 including means for extracting,
    processing, or reinserting the sync signal of a video signal.


CLS 348/502
TXT Specified color:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein the video signal is a specified
    color.


CLS 348/503
TXT For sequential color components:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 including apparatus for synchronizing the
    color components of a sequential system.


CLS 348/504
TXT With line rate switch (e.g., SECAM):

    Subject matter under subclass 503 wherein the sync is used to cause a
    switch to change state at a horizontal line rate.


CLS 348/505
TXT Phase locking regenerated subcarrier to color burst:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 including circuitry for generating
    continuous color subcarrier from the burst of a video signal.


CLS 348/506
TXT Burst gate:

    Subject matter under subclass 505 including specific circuitry for
    separating the burst from other components of a composite color signal.


CLS 348/507
TXT Including demodulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 505 including means for demodulating the
    color components.


CLS 348/508
TXT Digital:

    Subject matter under subclass 507 wherein the demodulator is implemented
    using digital circuitry.


CLS 348/509
TXT With line rate switch (e.g., PAL):

    Subject matter under subclass 507 wherein the sync is used to cause a
    switch to change state at a horizontal line rate.


CLS 348/510
TXT Locking of computer to video timebase:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 including means for controlling a
    programmable processor so as to operate in time or phase of a TV signal.


CLS 348/511
TXT Control of picture position:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 including means for directly changing the
    phase or time relationship between a video signal and its sync signal
    components in order to produce picture translation upon display.


CLS 348/512
TXT Locking of video or audio to reference timebase:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 including means for changing the time or
    phase of video or audio signals so as to correspond to a reference time or
    phase.


CLS 348/513
TXT Frame or field synchronizers:

    Subject matter under subclass 512 in which the audio or video data is
    written into a frame or field memory according to its own time or phase and
    read out according to the reference time or phase.


CLS 348/514
TXT Color television:

    Subject matter under subclass 513 wherein the video signals are natural
    color video signals.


CLS 348/515
TXT Audio to video:

    Subject matter under subclass 512 including means for changing the time or
    phase of one of a video or audio signal so as to be in time or phase with
    the other one of the audio or video signals.


CLS 348/516
TXT By controlling video or sync generator:

    Subject matter under subclass 512 wherein the time or phase is changed by
    control of video or sync generation.


CLS 348/517
TXT Color television:

    Subject matter under subclass 516 wherein the video signals are natural
    color video signals.


CLS 348/518
TXT Including compensation for transmission delays:

    Subject matter under subclass 512 wherein the change in time or phase take
    into account the time or phase shifts caused during transmission through a
    channel.


CLS 348/519
TXT Color television:

    Subject matter under subclass 518 wherein the video signals are natural
    color video signals.


CLS 348/520
TXT Color:

    Subject matter under subclass 512 wherein the sync signal components are
    for natural color signals.


CLS 348/521
TXT Sync generation:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 including methods and apparatus for the
    generation of the synchronizing signal components necessary for the proper
    synchronization between components of the television system.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is apparatus for the generation of
    synchronizing signal components to achieve interlace scanning.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 141+ for miscellaneous synchronizing circuits.


CLS 348/522
TXT Means on video signal generator:

    Subject matter under subclass 521 including means integral with the picture
    signal generator for producing the synchronizing signal components (e.g.,
    separate aperture on a Nipkow disc for sync pulse generation conductive
    strip at raster edge on vidicon for sync signal generation).


CLS 348/523
TXT With addressable memory:

    Subject matter under subclass 521 including a memory from which the sync
    signal components are read.


CLS 348/524
TXT With counter or frequency divider:

    Subject matter under subclass 521 including means for counting or dividing
    a reference signal to generate the sync signal components.


CLS 348/525
TXT Sync separation:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 including apparatus for separating the
    synchronizing signal components or a synchronizing signal component from
    other portions of a television signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 1+ for miscellaneous pulse selecting and separating
    circuits.


CLS 348/526
TXT Field or frame identification:

    Subject matter under subclass 525 wherein the apparatus detects a field or
    a frame type.


CLS 348/527
TXT Color:

    Subject matter under subclass 526 wherein the TV signals are natural color
    signals.


CLS 348/528
TXT Including automatic gain control (AGC):

    Subject matter under subclass 525 wherein the separating circuitry includes
    an output providing a control signal for automatic gain control (AGC).


CLS 348/529
TXT To produce distinct vertical output:

    Subject matter under subclass 525 wherein the separating circuitry includes
    an output providing only a vertical rate sync signal.


CLS 348/530
TXT With distinct horizontal output:

    Subject matter under subclass 529 wherein the separating circuitry includes
    an additional output providing only a horizontal rate sync signal.


CLS 348/531
TXT To produce distinct horizontal output:

    Subject matter under subclass 525 wherein the separating circuitry includes
    an output providing only a horizontal rate sync signal.


CLS 348/532
TXT By amplitude:

    Subject matter under subclass 525 wherein the sync signal components are
    separated based on amplitude.


CLS 348/533
TXT Noise reduction:

    Subject matter under subclass 525 including apparatus for reducing the
    deleterious effects of noise on the utilization of the synchronizing signal
    components.


CLS 348/534
TXT Amplitude limiting:

    Subject matter under subclass 533 including apparatus to amplitude limit
    the synchronizing signal components to reduce the effects of noise on the
    utilization of such components.


CLS 348/535
TXT Noise inversion:

    Subject matter under subclass 533 including apparatus for inverting the
    polarity of noise components associated with the synchronizing signal
    components and algebraically adding such inverted noise components to the
    synchronizing signal components to reduce the effects of noise on the
    utilization of the synchronizing signal components.


CLS 348/536
TXT Automatic phase or frequency control:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 including a means for automatically
    controlling the time or phase of an oscillating signal in response to sync
    signal components.


CLS 348/537
TXT Of sampling or clock:

    Subject matter under subclass 536 wherein the oscillating signal is used to
    control the sampling or clocking of video data.


CLS 348/538
TXT With data interpolation:

    Subject matter under subclass 537 including means for creating data at a
    desired phase from two or more original data samples.


CLS 348/539
TXT Color:

    Subject matter under subclass 537 wherein the sync signal components are
    for natural color signals.


CLS 348/540
TXT Horizontal sync component:

    Subject matter under subclass 536 wherein the sync signal components are
    horizontal sync.


CLS 348/541
TXT Cascaded phase or frequency adjusting:

    Subject matter under subclass 540 wherein the means includes plural
    serially connected time or phase control circuits.


CLS 348/542
TXT Plural distinct operating modes:

    Subject matter under subclass 540 wherein the horizontal phase or frequency
    control means includes a plurality of distinct operating states.


CLS 348/543
TXT Line rates:

    Subject matter under subclass 542 wherein the distinct modes correspond to
    different line rates.


CLS 348/544
TXT Locking rates:

    Subject matter under subclass 542 wherein the distinct modes correspond to
    different locking rates.


CLS 348/545
TXT Different mode during vertical blanking:

    Subject matter under subclass 544 wherein the locking rate is changed
    during the vertical blanking intervals.


CLS 348/546
TXT Countdown:

    Subject matter under subclass 540 including a resetting divider for
    controlling the phase or time of the oscillating signal in response to the
    horizontal sync.


CLS 348/547
TXT Vertical sync component:

    Subject matter under subclass 536 wherein the sync signal components are
    the vertical sync.


CLS 348/548
TXT Countdown:

    Subject matter under subclass 547 including a resetting divider for
    controlling the phase or time of the oscillating signal in response to the
    vertical sync.


CLS 348/549
TXT Using color subcarrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 536 wherein the sync signal component is a
    component of a color subcarrier.


CLS 348/550
TXT To achieve interlaced scanning:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 including apparatus for utilizing
    synchronizing signal components to achieve a scanning process in which the
    distance from center to center of a successively scanned line is two or
    more times the nominal line width, and in which the adjacent lines belong
    to different fields.


CLS 348/551
TXT Of mechanical scan:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein the scanning is performed by
    mechanical means.


CLS 348/552
TXT COMBINED WITH DIVERSE ART DEVICE (E.G., COMPUTER, TELEPHONE):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the receiver is combined
    with a device that has utility other than a TV receiver.


CLS 348/553
TXT BASIC RECEIVER WITH ADDITIONAL FUNCTION:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a specific circuitry
    that adds additional functions to a basic receiver.


CLS 348/554
TXT Multimode (e.g., composite, Y, C; baseband RF):

    Subject matter under subclass 553 wherein the signal processing of the
    receiver is changed depending upon the format, modulation, or the nature of
    the signal inputs such as R, G, B, or composite (e.g., antenna signal).


CLS 348/555
TXT For receiving more than one format at will (e.g., NTSC/PAL):

    Subject matter under subclass 554 including a specific circuitry that
    enables the receiver to receive and display two or more signal formats.

    (1)     Note.  A conventional receiver receives and displays only on signal
    standard.  A standard is limited to the number of lines, frame rate, and
    aspect ratio.  Signals which have the same number of lines, frame rate, and
    aspect ratio wherein the only difference is the stage of signal
    development, such as R, G, B, or composite or SVHSs luminance and
    chrominance components are classified in subclass 554.


CLS 348/556
TXT For format with different aspect ratio:

    Subject matter under subclass 555 including a specific circuitry to allow
    display of signals having different width to height ratios.

    (1)     Note.  The receiver is normally designed to display one aspect
    ratio, the aspect ratio of the display, and circuitry is provided to change
    the second signal standard to make it displayable on the display.  Examples
    of such signal changing include selecting a narrow aspect ratio section
    from a wide aspect ratio signal for display on a narrow aspect ratio
    display or time compressing a narrow aspect ratio signal for display on a
    wide aspect ratio display.


CLS 348/557
TXT Color processing:

    Subject matter under subclass 555 including a specific circuitry for
    processing color signals.


CLS 348/558
TXT Format detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 554 including a specific circuitry for
    detecting the number of lines or the frame rate of the signal.


CLS 348/559
TXT Instant replay or freeze frame:

    Subject matter under subclass 553 including a specific circuitry for
    storing at least one frame for display.


CLS 348/560
TXT Color television processing:

    Subject matter under subclass 559 including a specific circuitry for
    processing a color signal.


CLS 348/561
TXT For magnification of part of image:

    Subject matter under subclass 553 including a specific circuitry for
    expanding a portion of the video signal to display an enlarged portion.


CLS 348/562
TXT Color television:

    Subject matter under subclass 561 including a specific circuitry for
    processing a color signal.


CLS 348/563
TXT For display of additional information:

    Subject matter under subclass 553 including a specific circuitry to display
    information in addition to the video image.


CLS 348/564
TXT Simultaneously and on same screen (e.g., multiscreen):

    Subject matter under subclass 563 including a specific circuitry for
    inserting the additional information into or next to the normal image.


CLS 348/565
TXT Picture in picture:

    Subject matter under subclass 564 including a specific circuitry for
    processing a second image signal and for inserting the second image into
    the normal image.


CLS 348/566
TXT Color television:

    Subject matter under subclass 565 including a specific circuitry for
    processing color image signals.


CLS 348/567
TXT Memory:

    Subject matter under subclass 565 including a specific circuitry for
    storing at least the second image signal before it is inserted or combined
    with the primary image signal.


CLS 348/568
TXT Compression:

    Subject matter under subclass 565 including a specific circuitry for
    shrinking the size of the second image before insertion into the primary
    image.


CLS 348/569
TXT Receiver indicator (e.g., on screen display):

    Subject matter under subclass 563 including a circuitry to display an
    operating parameter of the receiver.


CLS 348/570
TXT Tuning indication:

    Subject matter under subclass 569 including a specific circuitry for
    indicating the tuning status of a TV receiver.


CLS 348/571
TXT IMAGE SIGNAL PROCESSING CIRCUITRY SPECIFIC TO TELEVISION:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a specific circuitry
    peculiar to processing image information of a television signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    725,    for demodulator, per se, and other receiver circuitry in which no
    processing, per se, of the image information occurs.


CLS 348/572
TXT A/D converters:

    Subject matter under subclass 571 including details of circuitry for
    converting an analog video signal into digital data.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 126+ for analog to
    or from digital conversion, per se.


CLS 348/573
TXT Analog to binary:

    Subject matter under subclass 572 wherein the digital data comprises data
    having two quantization levels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 126+ for analog to
    or from digital conversion, per se.


CLS 348/574
TXT Including dither:

    Subject matter under subclass 572 including circuitry for adding a signal
    to the video signal whose amplitude changes randomly or pseudo randomly.


CLS 348/575
TXT Video reprocessing:

    Subject matter under subclass 571 including circuitry for receiving a
    degraded video signal and for reforming the signal.


CLS 348/576
TXT Selective image modification (e.g., touch up):

    Subject matter under subclass 571 including circuitry for altering the
    image in areas chosen for change without altering the image in areas not
    chosen.


CLS 348/577
TXT Color change type:

    Subject matter under subclass 576 including a means for changing the hue of
    one color without changing the hue of other colors.


CLS 348/578
TXT Special effects:

    Subject matter under subclass 571 including an apparatus for modifying the
    signal by the selective insertion or deletion of signal portions or
    replacement by further signals.

    (1)     Note. Fading and chroma keying are examples of effects produced by
    devices classified herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 700+ for selective visual
    display communication systems.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 85 for special effects in motion
    picture photography.


CLS 348/579
TXT Strobe (e.g., ball tracker):

    Subject matter under subclass 578 including a specific circuitry for
    combining a plurality of images into a single image which shows the
    different positions of an object in motion.


CLS 348/580
TXT Geometric transformation:

    Subject matter under subclass 578 including a specific circuitry for
    changing the size, orientation, shape, or any other geometric attribute of
    an image.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    704,    for sweep expansion or reduction.


CLS 348/581
TXT Size change:

    Subject matter under subclass 580 including a specific circuitry for
    changing the size of the image.


CLS 348/582
TXT Color signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 581 including a circuitry peculiar to color
    signals.


CLS 348/583
TXT Rotation:

    Subject matter under subclass 580 including a specific circuitry for
    causing the image to appear to rotate.


CLS 348/584
TXT Combining plural sources:

    Subject matter under subclass 578 including a specific circuitry for
    forming a single signal from more than one source.


CLS 348/585
TXT Including priority key:

    Subject matter under subclass 584 wherein each source has an associated
    priority key and the sources are combined depending upon a comparison of
    the priority keys.


CLS 348/586
TXT Foreground/background insertion:

    Subject matter under subclass 584 including a circuitry for selecting a
    part of one signal (called the foreground) and placing it in the second or
    background signal.

    (1)     Note.  The foreground video often is used to generate a key signal
    which controls selection and insertion.


CLS 348/587
TXT Including hue detection (e.g., chroma key):

    Subject matter under subclass 586 including a circuit which detects a hue
    in the foreground signal to control the mixing of the foreground and
    background videos.


CLS 348/588
TXT Multiple distinct images (e.g., splitscreen):

    Subject matter under subclass 584 including a specific circuitry for
    combining two or more images without losing any significant information.

    (1)     Note.  For receivers that insert a reduced image into a full size
    main image, see subclass 565.  The information in the main image where the
    reduced image is inserted is lost. The image details lost in compression
    are not considered significant.


CLS 348/589
TXT Including insertion of characters or graphics (e.g., titles):

    Subject matter under subclass 584 including a specific circuitry for
    combining an image signal with a graphics or character signal.


CLS 348/590
TXT Specified details of key signal generation or processing:

    Subject matter under subclass 584 including a circuitry for producing a
    signal which controls combining two or more image signals.


CLS 348/591
TXT Self keyers (e.g., key generated from video being mixed):

    Subject matter under subclass 590 including a circuitry for generating the
    combining control signal from one of the image signals.


CLS 348/592
TXT Chroma key (e.g., hue detector)

    Subject matter under subclass 591 including a circuitry for recognizing a
    color and generating the key signal.


CLS 348/593
TXT Artificial key generation

    Subject matter under subclass 590 including a circuitry for generating the
    mixing control signal without using one of the image signals which is
    combined.


CLS 348/594
TXT Wipes signal generator:

    Subject matter under subclass 593 including a circuit for causing one image
    to start in a small area and increase in size until the image is completed.


CLS 348/595
TXT Fades signal generator:

    Subject matter under subclass 593 including a circuitry for increasing the
    amplitude of an image signal until full image is achieved or vice versa.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes "cross-fading" wherein one image is
    faded in while another is faded out.


CLS 348/596
TXT Window signal generator (e.g., rectangle):

    Subject matter under subclass 593 including a circuitry for defining an
    area in the image.


CLS 348/597
TXT For generation of soft edge (e.g., blending):

    Subject matter under subclass 590 including a circuitry for increasing the
    amplitude of one image signal while reducing the other image signal where
    the two images meet.


CLS 348/598
TXT Specified details of signal combining:

    Subject matter under subclass 584 including a circuitry for forming a
    single signal from two or more input signals.


CLS 348/599
TXT Color signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 598 including a specific circuitry peculiar
    to a color television.


CLS 348/600
TXT Graphic or character insertion type:

    Subject matter under subclass 598 including a specific circuitry peculiar
    to combining an image signal with a character signal.


CLS 348/601
TXT Marker or pointer generator:

    Subject matter under subclass 584 including a circuitry for generating a
    point or line like image signal.


CLS 348/602
TXT Display controlled by ambient light:

    Subject matter under subclass 571 including a circuitry for adjusting some
    operational characteristics of a display in accordance with the ambient
    lighting of the environment.


CLS 348/603
TXT Specified color (e.g., saturation and contrast control):

    Subject matter under subclass 602 wherein the operational characteristic
    includes control of some color attribute such as amplitude.


CLS 348/604
TXT Including nonstandard signal detection controlling processing:

    Subject matter under subclass 571 including a circuitry for detecting if
    the signal does not meet broadcast standards and for processing the
    broadcast standard and nonbroadcast standard signals differently.

    (1)     Note.  The nonstandard signal is generally from a video tape player.


CLS 348/605
TXT Including vertical interval reference (e.g., VIR):

    Subject matter under subclass 571 including a circuitry to use a
    predetermined signal located during the period that the electron beam
    returns from the bottom of a CRT to the top of a CRT to control processing
    of the image signal.


CLS 348/606
TXT Combined noise reduction and transition sharpening:

    Subject matter under subclass 571 including a specific circuitry for
    elimination of unwanted signals generated in the system or by the
    transmission medium while either reducing the rise time or increasing the
    amplitude of wanted signal changes.


CLS 348/607
TXT Noise or undesired signal reduction:

    Subject matter under subclass 571 including specific circuitry for the
    elimination of unwanted signals generated in the system, or by the
    transmission medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 22+ for a logic
    circuit having input noise margin enhancement.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 165+ for rectangular waveform regeneration; subclass
    317 for distortion compensation in limiting, clipping, or clamping;
    subclasses 379+ for gating circuit spurious noise override; and subclasses
    551+ for miscellaneous unwanted signal suppression.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 149 for hum or noise bucking.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 63, 233.1, 296, and 501 for noise
    elimination in various type systems.


CLS 348/608
TXT Processing at encoder or transmitter (e.g., pre-correction):

    Subject matter under subclass 607 including a specific circuitry at the
    originator of the signal which reduces the unwanted signal in comparison to
    systems without the circuitry.


CLS 348/609
TXT Reduction of chrominance luminance cross-talk (e.g., precomb):

    Subject matter under subclass 608 wherein the unwanted signal being reduced
    is a portion of the luminance signal in the chrominance signal or a portion
    of the chrominance signal in the luminance signal.


CLS 348/610
TXT Adaptive:

    Subject matter under subclass 609 wherein the processing varies depending
    upon signal content.


CLS 348/611
TXT To suppress echo:

    Subject matter under subclass 608 including apparatus for materially
    reducing or eliminating the effects of reflected or time delayed versions
    of the same signal on the displayed image.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 259+ for pulse
    communications with interference prevention.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 63+ for interference prevention in
    radio systems.


CLS 348/612
TXT Color signals:

    Subject matter under subclass 608 including a color television circuitry.


CLS 348/613
TXT Complementary system (e.g., preemphasis - deemphasis):

    Subject matter under subclass 608 wherein the undesired signal reduction
    requires circuitry at both the transmitter and receiver with the functions
    being generally opposite.

    (1)     Note.  In general the circuit at the transmitter increases
    amplitude while the circuit at the receiver decreases amplitude.


CLS 348/614
TXT Ghost elimination (e.g., multipath):

    Subject matter under subclass 607 including apparatus for materially
    reducing or eliminating the effects of reflected or time delayed versions
    of the same signal on the displayed image.


CLS 348/615
TXT Blackspot or shading correction (e.g., corrects for fixed pattern defects):

    Subject matter under subclass 607 including apparatus to compensate for the
    variations in brightness level over different areas of a given reproduced
    picture due to unequal characteristics of, or imperfections in, an image
    signal generator.


CLS 348/616
TXT Dropout compensator (e.g., replacement type):

    Subject matter under subclass 607 including a circuitry for generating a
    substitute signal and for inserting the substitute when the signal is
    defective or missing.


CLS 348/617
TXT For color television:

    Subject matter under subclass 616 wherein the circuitry is peculiar to a
    natural color television.


CLS 348/618
TXT For removal of low amplitude random noise (e.g., variable bandwidth):

    Subject matter under subclass 607 including a specific circuitry for
    reducing small amplitude differences between pixels without, in general,
    significantly altering large amplitude differences.


CLS 348/619
TXT Averaging type:

    Subject matter under subclass 618 wherein the pixels amplitude is replaced
    by an amplitude which is an average of itself and at least one other
    adjacent pixel.


CLS 348/620
TXT Using frame or field delays (e.g., motion adaptive):

    Subject matter under subclass 619 wherein the pixels that are being
    averaged are separated by at least about the period of a vertical scan.


CLS 348/621
TXT For color television:

    Subject matter under subclass 619 including a circuitry peculiar to color
    television signals.


CLS 348/622
TXT Noise component generator, limiter, subtractor type:

    Subject matter under subclass 618 including a circuitry for generating a
    difference signal between pixels, limiting the amplitude of the difference
    signal to a small level, and for subtracting the limited difference signal
    from the original pixel signal.


CLS 348/623
TXT Coring type:

    Subject matter under subclass 618 including a circuit element (e.g., diode)
    which removes small amplitude signal components without significantly
    altering large amplitude signal components.


CLS 348/624
TXT For color television:

    Subject matter under subclass 607 including a circuitry peculiar to color
    television signals.


CLS 348/625
TXT Transition or edge sharpeners:

    Subject matter under subclass 571 including a specific circuitry for
    reducing the time of the amplitude transitions or for increasing the size
    of the amplitude transition.

    (1)     Note.  Most systems only sharpen transition over some given
    amplitude.

    (2)     Note.  Search 606 for the systems that sharpen over the given
    amplitude but which systems also reduce transition under the given
    amplitude.


CLS 348/626
TXT Scanning velocity modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 625 including a device to reduce the
    deflection speed of a cathode ray scanning beam during transitions to make
    the transition appear to occur more quickly.


CLS 348/627
TXT Including processing to prevent the addition of noise (e.g., coring
    enhancement signal, noise responsive peaking control):

    Subject matter under subclass 625 including a specific circuitry to prevent
    the edge sharpener from adding noise to the original signal.

    (1)     Note.  The noise reduction found in this subclass differs from the
    noise reduction found in subclass 606 in that the noise reduction in this
    subclass reduces the noise of a signal added to the original signal while
    subclass 606 systems reduce noise in the original itself.


CLS 348/628
TXT Vertical transition:

    Subject matter under subclass 625 wherein the transition is between pixels
    separated by line periods.


CLS 348/629
TXT Including horizontal transition:

    Subject matter under subclass 628 including additional circuitry for
    sharpening transitions between pixels on the same scan line.


CLS 348/630
TXT Color television processing:

    Subject matter under subclass 625 including a circuitry peculiar to color
    television signals.


CLS 348/631
TXT Luminance transition controls chrominance transition:

    Subject matter under subclass 630 including a specific circuitry that
    sharpens the chrominance signal when there are transitions in both the
    luminance and chrominance signals.


CLS 348/632
TXT Sound muting:

    Subject matter under subclass 571 including an apparatus for suppressing
    the sound portion of the television signal at selected times.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 194.1 for silent tuning.


CLS 348/633
TXT Including picture blanking:

    Subject matter under subclass 632 including an apparatus for cutting off
    the electron beam during selected portions of the television signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclass 384 for
    cathode-ray tube deflection circuits with ray blanking.


CLS 348/634
TXT Picture blanking:

    Subject matter under subclass 571 including an apparatus for cutting off
    the electron beam during selected portions of the television signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclass 384 for
    cathode-ray tube deflection circuits with ray blanking.


CLS 348/635
TXT For color television:

    Subject matter under subclass 634 including a circuitry peculiar to a color
    television signal.


CLS 348/636
TXT At transmitter:

    Subject matter under subclass 634 wherein the blanking is preformed at the
    signal source.


CLS 348/637
TXT Retrace type:

    Subject matter under subclass 634 wherein the blanking is preformed during
    the short time period when the electron beam moves from right or bottom of
    a CRT to the left or top to start a new scan.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclass 384 for
    cathode-ray tube deflection circuits with ray blanking.


CLS 348/638
TXT Chrominance signal demodulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 571 including a means particularly adapted
    for deriving color difference or chrominance signal from a subcarrier
    component of a color television signal.


CLS 348/639
TXT Digital:

    Subject matter under subclass 638 wherein the subcarrier has been sampled
    and quantized and the component is derived from the sampled and quantized
    signal.


CLS 348/640
TXT PAL signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 638 for demodulating a carrier whose phase is
    alternated at the line rate.


CLS 348/641
TXT For quadrature signal (e.g., NTSC):

    Subject matter under subclass 638 for demodulating a carrier which has been
    modulated by two components at two distinct phases.


CLS 348/642
TXT Color encoder or chrominance signal modulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 571 including a means particularly adapted
    for modulating a subcarrier of a color television signal or which may
    include other circuits to add the brightness signal to the modulated
    chrominance signal.


CLS 348/643
TXT Color killer:

    Subject matter under subclass 571 including apparatus which disables the
    chrominance channel upon occurrence of a noncolor signal or a chrominance
    signal with insufficient amplitude or phase coherence.


CLS 348/644
TXT Including chrominance signal amplitude control:

    Subject matter under subclass 643 including an apparatus for controlling
    the amplitude of a chrominance signal.


CLS 348/645
TXT Chrominance signal amplitude control (e.g, saturation):

    Subject matter under subclass 571 including an apparatus for controlling
    the amplitude of a chrominance signal.


CLS 348/646
TXT Digital:

    Subject matter under subclass 645 including an apparatus particularly
    adapted to controlling the level of a sampled and quantized chrominance
    signal.


CLS 348/647
TXT Automatic:

    Subject matter under subclass 645 without requiring manual adjustment for
    variable signals.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are burst responsive systems which are known
    as automatic chrominance controls (ACC).


CLS 348/648
TXT Picture responsive (e.g., overload):

    Subject matter under subclass 647 wherein the control is dependent upon the
    image signal.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are systems known as overload protection
    systems.


CLS 348/649
TXT Hue control:

    Subject matter under subclass 571 including apparatus for causing the hue
    of the displayed signal to change.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 141+ for miscellaneous synchronizing circuits and
    subclasses 231+ for miscellaneous phase shift circuits.


CLS 348/650
TXT Scene by scene color correction:

    Subject matter under subclass 649 peculiar to film-to-video (telecine)
    conversion where scenes shot under different lighting require different
    color modification.


CLS 348/651
TXT Digital:

    Subject matter under subclass 649 including a means particularly adapted to
    control the hue of a sampled and quantized chrominance signal.


CLS 348/652
TXT Fleshtone corrector (e.g., fixed):

    Subject matter under subclass 649 including a means to change hues closer
    to skin color.

    (1)     Note.  Fleshtone is the same as I phase in NTSC.


CLS 348/653
TXT By phase change of chrominance signal or subcarrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 652 wherein the hue change is caused by
    changing the phase of either the chrominance signal or the reference
    subcarrier.


CLS 348/654
TXT By phase change of chrominance signal or subcarrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 649 including apparatus for changing the
    phase of the chrominance signal and/or reference signal to adjust the hue
    of the displayed signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 141+ for miscellaneous synchronizing circuits and
    subclasses 231+ for miscellaneous phase shift circuits.


CLS 348/655
TXT Color balance or temperature (e.g., white balance):

    Subject matter under subclass 571 including apparatus for maintaining
    proper relative amplitude levels between plural color signals or adjusting
    the relative amplitude levels to achieve proper color temperature.


CLS 348/656
TXT Receiver type:

    Subject matter under subclass 655 particularly adapted for use in image
    displays.


CLS 348/657
TXT Including feedback control:

    Subject matter under subclass 656 including a sensor to detect the
    operation of the display and a control to control the display depending
    upon the detected operation.


CLS 348/658
TXT Including optical sensor to observe display (e.g., CRT):

    Subject matter under subclass 657 wherein the sensor detects the light
    output of the display.


CLS 348/659
TXT Matrixing or mixing:

    Subject matter under subclass 571 including specific circuitry for
    combining plural signals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, particularly subclasses 105+ for miscellaneous synthesizing
    circuits and subclass 361 for miscellaneous mathematical summing of two
    input signals.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 69 for sum and difference amplifiers.


CLS 348/660
TXT Digital:

    Subject matter under subclass 659 including a means for processing sampled
    and quantized signals.


CLS 348/661
TXT Masking (e.g., R, G, B to R', G', B'):

    Subject matter under subclass 659 including a means to compensate for
    defects in the input signals.


CLS 348/662
TXT Chrominance phase adjuster (e.g., inverter):

    Subject matter under subclass 571 including a means for changing the phase
    of a color subcarrier.


CLS 348/663
TXT Chrominance-luminance signal separation:

    Subject matter under subclass 571 including specific circuitry for
    separating chrominance and luminance signals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 167+ for wave
    filters.


CLS 348/664
TXT Logic circuit type:

    Subject matter under subclass 663 wherein the separation is preformed by
    logically combining signals such as using max, min, and/or coincident
    circuits.

    (1)     Note.  Logic circuits used to select output or remove artifacts are
    classified in subclasses 665+.


CLS 348/665
TXT Including comb filter (e.g., using line, field, frame delays):

    Subject matter under subclass 663 wherein the separation is preformed by
    adding and/or subtracting at least two signals which are on different
    lines, fields, or frames.


CLS 348/666
TXT Including adaptive artifacts removal (e.g., switchable trap or LPF in luma
    channel):

    Subject matter under subclass 665 including an apparatus for altering the
    output of the comb filter when the comb filter is incapable of cleanly
    separating the signals.

    (1)     Note. For a comb filter to cleanly separate Y and C, the composite
    signals must be correlated (e.g., Y1+C1 and Y2-C2 will produce Y by adding
    and produce C by subtracting only if Y1=Y2 and C1=C2).


CLS 348/667
TXT Adaptive comb filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 665 including specific circuitry for changing
    the output of the comb filter responsive to picture signal content.


CLS 348/668
TXT Selects or blends two or more separated signals to derive output:

    Subject matter under subclass 667 including at least two distinct
    separation systems with the output either being one of the outputs or a
    combination of outputs.


CLS 348/669
TXT Including frame or field delays (e.g., motion adaptive):

    Subject matter under subclass 668 wherein one of the outputs is generated
    by combining signals which are one or more vertical scan periods apart.


CLS 348/670
TXT Including frame or field delays:

    Subject matter under subclass 665 wherein signals are combined in different
    vertical scan periods.


CLS 348/671
TXT Gray scale transformation:

    Subject matter under subclass 571 including circuitry which modifies the
    range of values contained in a TV signal.


CLS 348/672
TXT Using histogram:

    Subject matter under subclass 671 including circuitry which accumulates
    data representing past characteristics of the TV signal being processed.


CLS 348/673
TXT Combined contrast control and brightness or DC level control:

    Subject matter under subclass 671 including circuitry in which both the
    gain and DC or gain and average brightness level can be controlled by a
    manually adjustable setting.


CLS 348/674
TXT Nonlinear amplitude modification (e.g., gamma):

    Subject matter under subclass 671 including means for modifying the
    magnitude of a TV signal based on a nonlinear gain function.


CLS 348/675
TXT Color television:

    Subject matter under subclass 674 wherein the TV signal is a color signal.


CLS 348/676
TXT By adding outputs from parallel channels:

    Subject matter under subclass 674 including circuitry in which the TV
    signal is processed in a plurality of parallel signal paths and in which an
    output is provided by summing the output of the paths.


CLS 348/677
TXT With specified DC level control:

    Subject matter under subclass 674 including circuitry for modifying the DC
    bias of the TV signal.


CLS 348/678
TXT Automatic range control (e.g., AGC, automatic contrast control):

    Subject matter under subclass 671 including apparatus to develop a control
    signal in response to input signal variations to maintain the output signal
    level constant in various parts of the circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 234.1+ for automatic gain control
    devices.


CLS 348/679
TXT Color television:

    Subject matter under subclass 678 wherein the TV signal is a color signal.


CLS 348/680
TXT At transmitter:

    Subject matter under subclass 678 wherein the gain control is provided
    prior to transmission.


CLS 348/681
TXT Carrier envelope:

    Subject matter under subclass 678 wherein the variations in the output
    signal are determined from the variations in the level of the carrier wave
    with the modulating signal removed.


CLS 348/682
TXT Sync or blanking:

    Subject matter under subclass 678 wherein the variations in the input
    signal are determined by the sync or blanking levels in the video signal.


CLS 348/683
TXT Noise reduction or elimination:

    Subject matter under subclass 682 including an apparatus to reduce or
    eliminate spurious pulses or the false response of the apparatus to
    spurious pulses.


CLS 348/684
TXT Keyed:

    Subject matter under subclass 682 wherein the range control is made
    operative by a control signal during the horizontal sync interval.


CLS 348/685
TXT Delayed AGC:

    Subject matter under subclass 678 wherein the control signal is prevented
    from being effective until the input signal exceeds a certain value.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 138 for amplifiers with biased gain control.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 242.1+ for delayed action of AGC.


CLS 348/686
TXT Manual contrast control (e.g., linear):

    Subject matter under subclass 671 in which the magnitude of a TV signal is
    modified by some manually adjustable setting.


CLS 348/687
TXT Brightness control:

    Subject matter under subclass 571 including circuitry for changing the DC
    bias of a TV signal based on some manually set criterion.


CLS 348/688
TXT By subtracting averaged active video portion (e.g., flare):

    Subject matter under subclass 687 including circuitry for detecting an
    average level of the active TV signal and subtracting the detected level
    therefrom.


CLS 348/689
TXT With DC clamping:

    Subject matter under subclass 687 including means to set the black level of
    a TV signal to a reference value.


CLS 348/690
TXT White limiter:

    Subject matter under subclass 571 including apparatus for limiting the
    excursion of the image signal in the "white" direction to a prescribed
    level.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 309+ for miscellaneous limiting circuits.


CLS 348/691
TXT DC insertion:

    Subject matter under subclass 571 including apparatus for setting,
    maintaining, or reestablishing the direct current voltage level in an image
    signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 309+ for miscellaneous limiting, clipping, and clamping
    circuits.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 11 for amplifiers with DC reinsertion circuits.


CLS 348/692
TXT Color television:

    Subject matter under subclass 691 wherein the image signal is a natural
    color signal.


CLS 348/693
TXT At transmitter:

    Subject matter under subclass 691 in which the level is set prior to
    transmission of the TV signal.


CLS 348/694
TXT For plural signals or signal components:

    Subject matter under subclass 691 wherein the respective DC bias of a
    plurality of different signals is controlled.


CLS 348/695
TXT Level inserted during keying signals (e.g., keyed clamp):

    Subject matter under subclass 691 including circuitry for adding or setting
    the DC bias of a TV signal at selected times by a control signal.


CLS 348/696
TXT Insertion level derived by key signals:

    Subject matter under subclass 691 including circuitry in which the bias to
    be added is derived at selected times using a control signal.


CLS 348/697
TXT Level derived within feedback path:

    Subject matter under subclass 696 wherein the bias to be added is
    established using feedback.


CLS 348/698
TXT Diode:

    Subject matter under subclass 691 wherein the apparatus includes a means
    for permitting current flow in only one direction.


CLS 348/699
TXT Motion vector generation:

    Subject matter under subclass 571 including a specific circuitry for
    determining the direction and magnitude of displacement of elements in the
    image.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    382,    Image Analysis, subclasses 197+ for directional codes and vectors.


CLS 348/700
TXT Motion dependent key signal generation or scene change detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 571 including a specific circuitry to produce
    a signal which indicates which areas of a frame are changed from one frame
    to another or to indicate that a frame is unrelated to a previous frame.

    (1)     Note.  Most systems use frame or field differences.

    (2)     Note.  The signals generated herein are used to control processing
    of the video signal, such as line doubling, noise reduction, or Y/C
    separation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    451     or 452, for motion adaptive line doublers.

    620,    for noise reduction using frame or field delays which are mostly
    motion adapted.

    669,    for Y/C separation using a frame comb filter which are mostly
    motion adapted selecting either frame or line comb outputs depending on the
    motion signal.


CLS 348/701
TXT Specified processing of frame or field difference signal (e.g., noise
    reduction, key signal spreading):

    Subject matter under subclass 700 including specific circuitry to generate
    a frame or field difference signal and to further process the difference
    signal before the motion key signal is generated.


CLS 348/702
TXT Composite color signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 including circuitry peculiar to a video
    signal having a chrominance subcarrier.


CLS 348/703
TXT Hue or saturation detector:

    Subject matter under subclass 571 including a specific circuitry to select
    an area of a predetermined color in a TV signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 402+ for testing the
    color parameters of the light sample.


CLS 348/704
TXT Sweep expansion or reduction:

    Subject matter under subclass 571 including an apparatus to enlarge or
    reduce the size of the picture or a portion thereof by modifying the
    deflection voltages.


CLS 348/705
TXT Switching:

    Subject matter under subclass 571 wherein the output of a plurality of
    picture signal generators is selected by a switching means.


CLS 348/706
TXT Receiver type:

    Subject matter under subclass 705 particularly adapted for use in a
    receiver or combined with a receiver.


CLS 348/707
TXT Amplifiers:

    Subject matter under subclass 571 including amplifier circuitry in
    combination with another structure or circuitry peculiar to television
    systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, appropriate subclasses for amplifiers, per se.


CLS 348/708
TXT Color television signal processing:

    Subject matter under subclass 571 including specific circuitry peculiar to
    natural color television, but not restricted in usability to any single
    system, signal generator, or display device specifically provided for
    elsewhere in this class.


CLS 348/709
TXT Signal modification for one gun color tube (e.g., dot sequential):

    Subject matter under subclass 708 particularly adapted to modify a signal
    for application to a CRT having a single source of electrons which is
    sequentially modulated by color signals.


CLS 348/710
TXT Differential phase or amplitude responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 708 including specific circuitry for
    correcting distortions resulting from the system, wherein the distortion
    occurs when the rate of change of phase or amplitude at a particular
    frequency is not constant over the frequency range required for
    transmission.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 28 for equalizers.


CLS 348/711
TXT Frequency response modification:

    Subject matter under subclass 708 including specific circuitry for changing
    the bandwidth or relative amplitude characteristics of a system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of devices classified herein are sound traps, black
    and white bandwidth extension circuitries, and band limiting filters.


CLS 348/712
TXT Luminance channel circuitry:

    Subject matter under subclass 708 including specific circuitry of
    particular utility in the luminance section of a color television device.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of devices classified herein are luminance delay
    lines, brightness controls, and contrast controls.


CLS 348/713
TXT Chrominance channel circuitry:

    Subject matter under subclass 708 including specific circuitry of a
    particular utility in the chrominance section of a color television device.


CLS 348/714
TXT With details of static storage device:

    Subject matter under subclass 571 including details of storing video data
    in a static memory.


CLS 348/715
TXT For storing a sequence of frames or fields:

    Subject matter under subclass 714 wherein the video data represent a
    plurality of video frames or fields.


CLS 348/716
TXT Specified data formatting (e.g., memory mapping):

    Subject matter under subclass 714 wherein the format of the video data
    being stored in the memory is specified.


CLS 348/717
TXT Of color signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 716 wherein the video data represent a color
    signal.


CLS 348/718
TXT Accessing circuitry:

    Subject matter under subclass 714 including circuitry for controlling the
    storage and retrieval of the video data from the memory.


CLS 348/719
TXT Including processor interface (e.g., CPU):

    Subject matter under subclass 718 including a circuitry for allowing the
    stored data to be accessed.


CLS 348/720
TXT Digital:

    Subject matter under subclass 571 including circuitry for processing a
    sampled and quantized video signal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is intended to collect patents which are not
    classifiable in any processing circuitry subclasses or any digital
    processing circuitry claimed.


CLS 348/721
TXT Plural processing units:

    Subject matter under subclass 720 including two or more digital processors.


CLS 348/722
TXT STUDIO EQUIPMENT:

    Subject matter under the class definition including apparatus or structure
    necessary for the production of a scene to be televised and not provided
    for elsewhere in this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 4 for studio equipment for
    motion pictures.


CLS 348/723
TXT TELEVISION TRANSMITTER CIRCUITRY:

    Subject matter under the class definition including specific circuitry
    designed for dealing with television signals at the transmitter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, appropriate subclasses for carrier wave oscillator
    systems, per se.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 91+ for modulated carrier wave
    transmitter circuits.


CLS 348/724
TXT Modulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 723 including means for modulating TV signals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    642,    for color encoder or chrominance signal modulator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    332,    Modulators, appropriate subclasses for carrier wave modulators, per
    se.


CLS 348/725
TXT RECEIVER CIRCUITRY:

    Subject matter under the class definition including specific circuitry
    specially designed for dealing with television signals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclasses 1+ for
    cathode-ray tube circuits.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous nonlinear active device
    circuits.

    331,    Oscillators, appropriate subclasses for oscillator systems, in
    general, usable in a television receiver.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 130+ for modulated carrier wave
    receiver circuits.


CLS 348/726
TXT Demodulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 725 including means for recovering a video
    signal from a radio frequency modulated signal.

    (1)     Note.  The demodulator is peculiar to a TV signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses for demodulators, in general.


CLS 348/727
TXT Color television:

    Subject matter under subclass 726 wherein the video signal is a color
    television signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    638,    for chrominance signal demodulator.


CLS 348/728
TXT Color television:

    Subject matter under subclass 725 including a circuitry peculiar to color
    television signals.


CLS 348/729
TXT Television receiver adapted to receive radio broadcast or in combination
    with radio receiver:

    Subject matter under subclass 725 including apparatus which enables a
    television receiver to recover and utilize a standard radio broadcast
    signal, or television receivers in combination with a radio receiver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 142+ for modulated carrier wave
    receivers of the convertible type.


CLS 348/730
TXT Power supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 725 including power supplies specially
    designed for use in a television receiver.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are filament supplies, power supply
    regulation circuits and power supplies providing "instant-on" receiver
    operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclass 411 for
    cathode ray deflection circuits with power supply from deflection circuit
    source.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 530+ for miscellaneous circuits with a specific source
    of supply or bias voltage.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 127+ for amplifiers with control of power
    supply.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 185 for oscillators with a particular source
    of power.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 127 and 343 for modulated carrier
    wave transmitter and receiver power supplies.


CLS 348/731
TXT Tuning:

    Subject matter under subclass 725 including apparatus for adjusting the
    receiver to operate at a specified frequency.

    (1)     Note.  Both manual and electronic television tuners are found
    herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    334,    Tuners, appropriate subclasses for tuners, per se, with channel or
    station selection means.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 77+ for analog modulated carrier
    wave transceivers with tuning and subclasses 150.1+ for analog modulated
    carrier wave receivers with signal selection by tuning a desired carrier
    frequency.


CLS 348/732
TXT Search tuning:

    Subject matter under subclass 731 including apparatus to cause the tuner to
    cycle through a plurality of possibly active channels or stations and cease
    such cycling upon reception of a usable signal.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is apparatus associated with television
    search tuners to assure proper tuning of the received signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 77 for transceivers with automatic
    tuning and subclasses 161.1+ for analog modulated carrier wave receivers
    with signal selection by frequency scan tuning.


CLS 348/733
TXT Tuning voltage:

    Subject matter under subclass 731 wherein the apparatus to select the
    specified frequency is responsive to voltage.


CLS 348/734
TXT Remote control:

    Subject matter under subclass 725 including apparatus for controlling an
    operating condition of the receiver from a point outside the receiver.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes both apparatus where the control
    function is performed electrically from a distance over intervening wired
    or radio circuits and apparatus where the control function is performed
    mechanically such as by a flexible shaft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    334,    Tuners, subclass 8 for remotely controlled tuners.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 151.1+ for analog modulated carrier
    wave receivers with remote control of receiver tuning.


CLS 348/735
TXT Automatic frequency control:

    Subject matter under subclass 725 including a local oscillator combined
    with apparatus to adjust the generated frequency thereof in response to
    deviation of the generated frequency from a desired value.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 1+ for oscillators, per se, with automatic
    frequency control.

    334,    Tuners, subclasses 13, 16, and 26 for tuning apparatus combined
    with automatic frequency control.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 255+ for analog modulated carrier
    wave receivers with automatic frequency control; subclass 71 for analog
    modulated carrier wave systems with automatic frequency control; subclass
    75 for analog modulated carrier wave transceivers with automatic frequency
    control; and subclasses 173.1, 164.1, 182.2, and 192.2 for analog modulated
    carrier wave receivers having various apparatuses to provide signal
    selection (e.g., tuning) and further including automatic frequency control.


CLS 348/736
TXT Sound traps:

    Subject matter under subclass 725 including apparatus at the receiver for
    substantially or totally eliminating frequencies at the frequency position
    of the sound signal.


CLS 348/737
TXT Intercarrier circuits:

    Subject matter under subclass 725 including apparatus at the receiver to
    produce a frequency modulated signal whose center frequency is equal to the
    difference between the carrier frequency of an amplitude modulated carrier
    and a frequency modulated carrier.


CLS 348/738
TXT Sound circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 725 including apparatus at the receiver
    specially designed to separate from the image signal component, detect or
    otherwise process the sound signal component of a received composite
    television signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    329,    Demodulators, subclasses 315+ for frequency demodulators and
    subclasses 345+ for phase demodulators.


CLS 348/739
TXT VIDEO DISPLAY:

    Subject matter under the class definition including an apparatus for
    converting an image-representative electrical signal (i.e., video signal)
    of an object or a scene into a visible image of the object or scene.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, appropriate subclasses.


CLS 348/740
TXT Array of shutters:

    Subject matter under subclass 739 wherein the image reproduction is
    achieved by a group of similar movable optical blocking elements, each
    corresponding to an image resolution element.


CLS 348/741
TXT Red-white phenomena:

    Subject matter under subclass 739 wherein the effect of color in the
    displayed image is attained by using two unorthodox primaries.


CLS 348/742
TXT Color sequential:

    Subject matter under subclass 739 including a device to reconstitute a
    color image by imparting in sequence color components of the image to a
    display device.


CLS 348/743
TXT With moving color filters:

    Subject matter under subclass 742 wherein color is imparted by the periodic
    movement of more than one color transmitting or absorbing device.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes both rotating and oscillating filters.


CLS 348/744
TXT Projection device:

    Subject matter under subclass 739 including a viewing surface (e.g., screen
    or wall) which receives light from a light source type display (e.g., CRT
    or LED), or including an electro-optical device which imparts image
    information based on a video signal to a beam of source illumination
    wherein the resulting image is coextensively projected onto a screen.


CLS 348/745
TXT With alignment, registration or focus:

    Subject matter under subclass 744 wherein an apparatus is provided for
    causing the images emanating from each of plural projection devices to be
    in coincidence (i.e., registered) on the screen or for causing one or more
    projected images to be in high resolution (i.e., focused).


CLS 348/746
TXT Raster shape distortion:

    Subject matter under subclass 745 wherein a raster scan pattern of at least
    one projection device is modified to cancel out a distortion due to an
    angular placement of the tube in relation to the optical projection axis or
    due to the use of non-planar optical elements.

    (1)     Note.  Raster scanning is scanning by means of a line-by-line sweep
    across the entire display surface to generate a complete display image.

    (2)     Note.  Example of distortions are keystoning which refers to a
    trapezoidal distortion and pincushion distortion which emulates a square
    having curved sides.


CLS 348/747
TXT Raster size or position compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 745 wherein a raster scan pattern on at least
    one projection device is altered in size relative to those of another
    projection device whereby each of the projected images has the same
    relative size; or wherein the raster is shifted up or down or side to side
    in order that the projected images are in registration on the screen.


CLS 348/748
TXT With cooling device:

    Subject matter under subclass 744 wherein the projector includes a device
    to reduce heat produced by intensive light rays from the source illuminator.


CLS 348/749
TXT Liquid:

    Subject matter under subclass 748 wherein the projector is cooled down by a
    liquid.


CLS 348/750
TXT Plural parallel light modulators:

    Subject matter under subclass 744 including two or more optically parallel
    devices, each device imparting image information based on a video signal to
    a beam of source illumination, wherein the resulting images are
    coextensively projected onto a screen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements,
    subclasses 237+ for generic optical modulator.


CLS 348/751
TXT Liquid crystal:

    Subject matter under subclass 750 wherein the modulator comprises a medium
    consisting of a material which flows like a liquid and exhibits, under the
    influence of an electrical signal, variable anisotropic optical properties
    characteristic of a crystal.

    (1)     Note.  An anisotropic substance exhibits different magnetic,
    electrical, optical, and other physical properties when measured along axes
    in different directions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for stereoscopic display device which may use a liquid crystal
    material.

    761,    766 and 790, for projection type display devices wherein a liquid
    crystal material is used to modulate the light beam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    349,    Liquid Crystal Cells, Elements and Systems, appropriate subclasses
    for utilizing a liquid crystal display structure in general.


CLS 348/752
TXT Using birefringent or polarizing medium (e.g., Kerr cell, Pockel's cell,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 750 wherein the modulators comprise a medium
    which, under the influence of a video signal, alters a polarization plane
    of the source illumination in order to impart image information.

    (1)     Note.  Kerr and Pockel cells exhibit electro-optic effects of a
    particular material (e.g., nitrobenzene in Kerr and piezoelectric in
    Pockel) which are capable of advancing or retarding the phase of an induced
    ordinary light ray relative to an extraordinary light ray when an electric
    current is applied.  The effect is quadratic nonlinear in the Kerr cell and
    linear in the Pockel cell.  Because the two polarized components of an
    incident light beam have different phase velocities in the medium, these
    devices can rotate the plane of polarization.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    762     and 767, for projection type image reproducers having a single
    light modulator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements,
    subclasses 245+ and 315+ for generic optical modulator using
    electro-optical techniques for light wave temporal or directional
    modulation.


CLS 348/753
TXT Electron beam addressed:

    Subject matter under subclass 752 wherein a scanning electron beam
    sequentially controls predetermined areas of the light modulating medium to
    vary an optical property of the modulator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    763     and 768, for projection type image reproducer having a single light
    modulator.


CLS 348/754
TXT Acousto-optic (e.g., Bragg cell, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 750 wherein the modulator comprises media,
    the optical property of which is varied by a high frequency mechanical
    vibration (e.g., ultrasonic or sound wave, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Bragg cell is an example of a device that changes the
    intensity of a light beam by the interaction between sound waves and the
    light in a solid medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    769,    for projection type image reproducer using acousto-optical technic
    to modulate light beam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements,
    subclasses 285+ and 305+ for generic optical modulator using
    acousto-optical technic for light wave temporal or directional modulation.


CLS 348/755
TXT Deformable medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 750 wherein the modulator comprises an
    elastic medium which is physically distorted under the influence of a video
    signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    764     and 770+, for projection type image reproducer having a single
    light modulator.


CLS 348/756
TXT With optical element:

    Subject matter under subclass 750 including a structure which performs a
    basic optical function (i.e., the structure when exposed to or placed in
    the path of a group of light rays will cause a deviation, a blocking of the
    rays, or a modification in the character or properties of the light).


CLS 348/757
TXT Beam combining:

    Subject matter under subclass 756 comprising an optical structure which
    forms, from a plurality of light rays having different optical axes, a
    single beam for the purpose of forming one channel containing the combined
    information of the plurality of groups of light rays.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    618+ for optical structure which may combine light beams.


CLS 348/758
TXT Plural serial light modulators:

    Subject matter under subclass 744 including two or more devices placed in
    sequence, each device imparting image information based on a video signal
    to a beam of source illumination, wherein the resulting images are
    coextensively projected onto a screen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements,
    subclasses 237+ for generic optical modulators.


CLS 348/759
TXT Single light modulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 744 including only one device to impart image
    information based on a video signal to a beam of source illumination,
    wherein the resulting image is projected onto a screen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    237+ for generic optical modulators.


CLS 348/760
TXT Color TV:

    Subject matter under subclass 759 wherein the image information signal is
    displayed in a hue as contrasted with black, white, or gray.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    808+,   for color image reproducer cathode-ray tubes.


CLS 348/761
TXT Liquid crystal:

    Subject matter under subclass 760 wherein the modulator comprises a medium
    consisting of a material which flows like a liquid and exhibits, under the
    influence of an electrical signal, variable anisotropic optical properties
    characteristic of a crystal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for stereoscopic display device which may use a liquid crystal
    material.

    751,    766 and 790, for projection type display devices wherein a liquid
    crystal material is used to modulate a light beam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    349,    Liquid Crystal Cells, Elements and Systems, appropriate subclasses
    for utilizing a liquid crystal display structure in general.


CLS 348/762
TXT Using birefringent or polarizing medium (e.g., Kerr cell, Pockel's cell,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 760 wherein the modulator comprises a medium
    which, under the influence of a video signal, alters a polarization plane
    of the source illumination in order to impart the image information.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    752,    for projection type image reproducer having plural parallel light
    modulators and subclass 767 for projection type black and white image
    reproducer having a single light modulator.


CLS 348/763
TXT Electron beam addressed:

    Subject matter under subclass 762 wherein a scanning electron beam
    sequentially controls predetermined areas of the light modulating medium to
    vary an optical property of the modulator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    753,    for projection type image reproducer having plural parallel light
    modulators and subclass 768 for projection type black and white image
    reproducer having a single light modulator.


CLS 348/764
TXT Deformable medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 760 wherein the modulator comprises an
    elastic medium which is physically distorted under the influence of a video
    signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    755,    for projection type image reproducer having plural parallel light
    modulators and subclasses 770+ for projection type black and white image
    reproducer having a single light modulator.


CLS 348/765
TXT Fluid:

    Subject matter under subclass 764 wherein the deformable media is a liquid
    or gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    773,    for fluid medium modulator in black and white image reproducers.


CLS 348/766
TXT Liquid crystal:

    Subject matter under subclass 759 wherein the modulator comprises a medium
    consisting of a material which flows like a liquid and exhibits, under the
    influence of an electrical signal, variable anisotropic optical properties
    characteristic of a crystal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for stereoscopic display device which may use a liquid crystal
    material.

    751,    761 and 790, for projection type display devices wherein a liquid
    crystal material is used to modulate a light beam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    349,    Liquid Crystal Cells, Elements and Systems, appropriate subclasses
    for utilizing a liquid crystal display structure in general.


CLS 348/767
TXT Using birefringent or polarizing medium (e.g., Kerr cell, Pockel's cell,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 759 wherein the modulator comprises a medium
    which, under the influence of a video signal, alters a polarization plane
    of the source illumination in order to impart the image information.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    752,    for projection type image reproducer having plural parallel light
    modulators and subclass 762 for projection type color image reproducer
    having a single light modulator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements,
    subclasses 245+ and 315+ for generic optical modulator using an
    electro-optical technique for light wave, temporal or directional
    modulation.


CLS 348/768
TXT Electron beam addressed:

    Subject matter under subclass 767 wherein a scanning electron beam
    sequentially controls predetermined areas of the light modulator to vary an
    optical property of the modulator media.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    753,    for projection type image reproducer having plural parallel light
    modulators and subclass 763 for projection type color image reproducer
    having a single light modulator.


CLS 348/769
TXT Acousto-optic:

    Subject matter under subclass 759 wherein the modulator comprises media,
    the optical property of which being varied by a high frequency mechanical
    vibration (e.g., ultrasonic or sound wave, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    754,    for projection type image reproducer having plural parallel light
    modulators, one of which acousto-optically modulates light beam.


CLS 348/770
TXT Deformable medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 759 wherein the modulator comprises an
    elastic medium which is physically distorted under the influence of a video
    signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    755,    for projection type image reproducer having plural parallel light
    modulators and 764+ for projection type color image reproducer having a
    single light modulator.


CLS 348/771
TXT Including solid-state deflection elements (e.g., deformable mirror device
    (DMD)):

    Subject matter under subclass 770 including an array of reflective
    electrodes to which a varying charge pattern is applied in response to a
    video signal, the charge pattern causing deformation of the electrodes to
    obtain an image pattern.


CLS 348/772
TXT Medium in tape, ribbon, or membrane form:

    Subject matter under subclass 770 wherein the deformable medium having a
    form of a narrow flexible strip or band, or a thin soft sheet or layer.


CLS 348/773
TXT Fluid medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 770 wherein the deformable media is a liquid
    or gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    765,    for fluid medium modulator in color image reproducer.


CLS 348/774
TXT Deformed into diffraction grating (e.g., using electron beam):

    Subject matter under subclass 773 wherein the fluid medium is deformed into
    a system of close equidistant and parallel lines whereby the light ray is
    diffracted to produce fringes of parallel light and dark or colored bands.

    (1)     Note.  For example, the fluid medium is deformed by bombarding with
    a beam consisting of elementary particles of negative electric charge.


CLS 348/775
TXT Having significant chemical composition:

    Subject matter under subclass 770 wherein the deformable medium has a
    specified chemical composition.


CLS 348/776
TXT Cathode-ray tube image source:

    Subject matter under subclass 744 wherein the image focused on the
    projection device display surface is derived from a cathode-ray tube.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclasses 10+ for a
    cathode-ray tube circuit.


CLS 348/777
TXT With intensifier:

    Subject matter under subclass 776 wherein the image from the cathode-ray
    tube is subjected to a device which increases the brightness thereof.

    (1)     Note.  For example, a fluorescent screen is placed next to a
    photocathode screen to increase the effect of radiation on the photocathode
    screen.


CLS 348/778
TXT Plural CRTs:

    Subject matter under subclass 776 wherein more than one cathode-ray tube
    provides the displayed image.


CLS 348/779
TXT With optical element:

    Subject matter under subclass 778 including a structure which performs a
    basic optical function (i.e., the structure when exposed to or placed in
    the path of a group of light rays will cause a deviation, a blocking of the
    rays, or a modification in the character or properties of the light).


CLS 348/780
TXT Beam combining:

    Subject matter under subclass 779 comprising an optical structure which
    forms, from a plurality of groups of light rays having different optical
    axes, a single group of light ray for the purpose of forming one channel
    containing the combined information of the plurality of groups of light
    rays.


CLS 348/781
TXT With optical element:

    Subject matter under subclass 776 including a structure which performs a
    basic optical function (i.e., the structure when exposed to or placed in
    the path of a group of light rays will cause a deviation, a blocking of the
    rays, or a modification in a character or a property of the light).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements,
    appropriate subclasses for a specific optical element.


CLS 348/782
TXT Mirror arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 781 wherein the optical function is derived
    from an optical reflecting structure.


CLS 348/783
TXT Concave mirror:

    Subject matter under subclass 782 wherein the mirror surface is curved
    inward with respect to the image source.


CLS 348/784
TXT With correcting plate:

    Subject matter under subclass 783 includes an optical plate to correct each
    zone of the reflector for spherical aberration.


CLS 348/785
TXT Adjustable:

    Subject matter under subclass 781 comprising a structure for changing the
    spacing between optical components.


CLS 348/786
TXT With screen or absorption filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 781 wherein the optical structure has an
    element which limits the passage of light or blocks a particular wavelength.


CLS 348/787
TXT Cabinet or chassis:

    Subject matter under subclass 776 including structural details of a housing
    or a frame to support the image reproducer or its components.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    789,    for generic projection type image reproducer cabinet or chassis.

    794,    for cabinet or chassis of a liquid crystal image reproducer.

    836+,   for generic image reproducer cabinet or chassis.


CLS 348/788
TXT Folding:

    Subject matter under subclass 787 wherein the cabinet or chassis can be
    reduced in size or length by bending or pivoting a part to be placed over
    another part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    838,    for portable image reproducer housing which may have folding parts.


CLS 348/789
TXT Cabinet or chassis:

    Subject matter under subclass 744 including a structural detail of a
    projection type image reproducer housing which may or may not combine with
    a television component support structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    787,    for cabinet or chassis of a projection type cathode-ray tube image
    reproducer.

    794,    for cabinet or chassis of a liquid crystal image reproducer.

    836+,   for generic image reproducer cabinet or chassis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 7.2 cabinet for radio with
    television adjunct wherein radio and television are only nominal.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 600+ for
    generic electrical component housing.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 347+ for radio cabinet, housing, or
    chassis.


CLS 348/790
TXT Liquid crystal:

    Subject matter under subclass 739 wherein the image is reproduced by means
    of an externally scanned device having intersecting electrode sets between
    which an active liquid medium having electrically varying optical
    properties is disposed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for stereoscopic display devices which may use a liquid crystal
    material.

    751,    761 and 766, for projection type display devices wherein a liquid
    crystal material is used to modulate a light beam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    349,    Liquid Crystal Cells, Elements and Systems, appropriate subclasses
    for utilizing a liquid crystal display structure in general.


CLS 348/791
TXT Color TV:

    Subject matter under subclass 790 wherein the image signal is displayed in
    a hue as contrasted with black, white, or gray.


CLS 348/792
TXT Scanning circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 790 wherein the liquid crystal display device
    comprises a circuit for successively addressing the electrodes.


CLS 348/793
TXT Interlacing:

    Subject matter under subclass 792 wherein odd- and even-numbered lines of
    an image information containing area are transmitted consecutively as two
    separate fields, these fields make-up a complete picture at the receiver.


CLS 348/794
TXT With cabinet or housing structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 790 includes a case or enclosure for
    supporting the liquid crystal display.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    787     and 789, for cabinet or chassis of a projection type reproducer.

    836+,   for generic image reproducer cabinet or chassis.


CLS 348/795
TXT Direct viewed light valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 739 wherein a light modulator is interposed
    between a light source and a viewer, whereby the viewer of the display
    observes the images directly from the modulator.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of direct viewed light valves are surface acoustic
    wave display and magnetic bubble display wherein light is modulated
    acoustically or magnetically.


CLS 348/796
TXT Vacuum panel:

    Subject matter under subclass 739 wherein the display device consists of an
    evacuated envelope containing an array of cathodes sequentially producing
    electrons which cause corresponding fluorescent target areas to emit light.


CLS 348/797
TXT Gas discharge:

    Subject matter under subclass 739 wherein the display device comprises a
    gas filled tube or cell that gives off light when a high voltage is applied
    to ionize the gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclass 169.4 for a
    gas display panel device.


CLS 348/798
TXT Array of lamps:

    Subject matter under subclass 739 wherein the display surface includes a
    group of similar illuminators, each illuminator representing a single
    resolution element.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are incandescent or discharge
    lamps, as well as any non-integral device employed as a bilevel illuminator.


CLS 348/799
TXT Color TV:

    Subject matter under subclass 798 wherein the image signal is displayed in
    a hue as contrasted with black, white, or gray.


CLS 348/800
TXT Electroluminescent (e.g., scanned matrix, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 739 wherein the display device comprises an
    array of segments or elements consisting of transparent conductive
    electrodes separated by a dielectric material which emits light when a
    voltage is applied to the electrodes.

    (1)     Note.  Dielectric material may be a luminescent substance which
    includes both fluorescent and phosphorescent substances.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclasses 169.1+
    and particularly subclass 169.3 for an electroluminescent illuminative
    device.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 30+ for plural physical
    display element control system which may include electroluminescent display
    elements.


CLS 348/801
TXT Light emitting diode:

    Subject matter under subclass 800 wherein the electroluminescent element is
    a two-electrode (PN) semiconductor device which emits light when forward
    biased.


CLS 348/802
TXT Color TV:

    Subject matter under subclass 802 wherein the image signal is displayed in
    a hue as contrasted with black, white, or gray.


CLS 348/803
TXT Color TV:

    Subject matter under subclass 800 wherein the image signal is displayed in
    a hue as contrasted with black, white, or gray.


CLS 348/804
TXT With optical fiber device:

    Subject matter under subclass 739 wherein the optical element includes one
    or more optical waveguides.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359,    for camera system using fiber optics.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    385,    Optical Waveguides, subclass 116 for optical imaging fiber bundles.


CLS 348/805
TXT Cathode-ray tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 739 including a device in which a focused
    beam of electrons is employed to impart visual information.

    (1)     Note.  A cathode-ray tube in general is a vacuum tube in which its
    electron beam is focused to a small cross section on a luminescent screen
    and is varied in position and intensity to produce a visible pattern.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclasses 10+ for
    cathode-ray tube circuits.


CLS 348/806
TXT With distortion, alignment or focus:

    Subject matter under subclass 805 wherein circuitry is provided to regulate
    electron beam size, electron beam or picture position, or picture
    irregularities related to electron beam characteristics.


CLS 348/807
TXT Color convergence correction:

    Subject matter under subclass 806 including at least two electron beam
    deflection elements connected in a circuit which generates a time varying
    signal to permit the focusing and scanning of plural electron beams in the
    envelope of a cathode-ray tube in one of two directions at each and every
    point of a screen of the cathode-ray tube.


CLS 348/808
TXT Color TV:

    Subject matter under subclass 805 wherein the image signal is displayed in
    a hue as contrasted with black, white, or gray.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    760,    for projection type color image reproducer.


CLS 348/809
TXT Separate electron beams in single tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 808 including a single tube having a
    plurality of electron beams, each reproducing a separate color.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 409+ for plural
    beam cath- ode-ray tubes.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 13.1 for
    plural ray type tube circuits.


CLS 348/810
TXT One electron beam supplying more than one color:

    Subject matter under subclass 808 wherein at least one electron beam is
    utilized to reproduce more than one color.


CLS 348/811
TXT Beam position indicating:

    Subject matter under subclass 810 including an apparatus associated with
    the tube for indicating the instantaneous position of the electron beam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 471 for cathode-ray
    tube beam indexing elements.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclasses 10+ for
    beam indexing circuits.


CLS 348/812
TXT Horizontal stripes:

    Subject matter under subclass 811 wherein the indicating means is in the
    form of stripes parallel to the horizontal raster scan.


CLS 348/813
TXT Photoelectric sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 811 including a photoelectric device
    positioned to detect the light output produced by the beam.


CLS 348/814
TXT Secondary emission sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 811 including an apparatus for detecting
    varying quantities of a secondary emission produced by beam impact.


CLS 348/815
TXT With electron-optical color selection:

    Subject matter under subclass 810 including an apparatus internal or
    external to the tube for selectively controlling the position of the beam
    with respect to plural color phosphors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 429+ for tubes with
    post deflection elements.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclass 376 for
    post deflection control circuits.


CLS 348/816
TXT With color specific optical device:

    Subject matter under subclass 808 including a device to modify an optical
    spectral characteristic of a color cathode-ray tube display.

    (1)     Note.  For example, a color correcting filter is placed in front of
    the cathode-ray tube to improve the color balance.


CLS 348/817
TXT Electrochromic device:

    Subject matter under subclass 816 wherein the cathode-ray tube display
    surface is supplied with a device that changes color when positively or
    negatively charged.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 49 and 105 having
    electrochromic light-controlling display elements.

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    265 for optical modulator using electrochromic element.


CLS 348/818
TXT Protective device:

    Subject matter under subclass 805 including a structure to protect the tube
    or a television observer from physical damage.

    (1)     Note.  Structure for supporting the cathode-ray tube that is
    integral with the protective device is included here or in indented
    subclasses.


CLS 348/819
TXT Radiation protection for user:

    Subject matter under subclass 818 wherein the protective structure is
    intended to suppress an unwanted radiation emitted from the cathode-ray
    tube which may be harmful to a user.


CLS 348/820
TXT External electric or magnetic effect:

    Subject matter under subclass 818 wherein the protective device is intended
    to eliminate influence from a spurious magnetic field, or a stray current
    or voltage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclass 8 for
    cathode-ray tube circuits to compensate for stray deflecting fields.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 150 for
    television degaussing.


CLS 348/821
TXT Implosion protection:

    Subject matter under subclass 818 wherein the protective structure is
    intended to prevent viewer injury from an inward bursting of the
    cathode-ray tube.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 2.1 and 2.3 for a tube envelope intended to
    be used for a television tube.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 477 for cathode-ray
    tube envelope.


CLS 348/822
TXT Tensioned band:

    Subject matter under subclass 821 wherein the implosion protective
    structure includes a stretched narrow strip or cord surrounding the bulbous
    portion of the tube.


CLS 348/823
TXT Protective glass or panel:

    Subject matter under subclass 821 wherein the protective structure is a
    transparent planar element placed in front of the tube.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 478 for cathode-ray
    tube envelope with external optical element which may be a glass or a
    transparent panel.


CLS 348/824
TXT Bonded to CRT faceplate:

    Subject matter under subclass 823 wherein the glass or panel is permanently
    adhered or coated to the cathode-ray tube front surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 479 for cathode-ray
    tube with coating or shielding envelope.


CLS 348/825
TXT Support:

    Subject matter under subclass 805 including a structure for mounting the
    cathode-ray tube or its associated deflecting elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    836,    for cabinet or chassis wherein the type of display device is not
    claimed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 309.1+ for CRT supporting bracket means, per
    se, which do not include a CRT structure.


CLS 348/826
TXT CRT having only support at front portion:

    Subject matter under subclass 825 wherein the cathode-ray tube is held by
    only a supporting force applied at its face plate area.


CLS 348/827
TXT CRT position adjustable by user:

    Subject matter under subclass 825 wherein the cathode-ray tube is movable
    by a user to facilitate viewing.


CLS 348/828
TXT Deflection element support:

    Subject matter under subclass 825 including a mounting structure for an
    element which is placed on a cathode-ray tube to change the direction of an
    electron beam toward a screen of the cathode-ray tube.


CLS 348/829
TXT Yoke:

    Subject matter under subclass 828 wherein the deflection element is a set
    of coils placed on a magnetically deflected cathode-ray tube to deflect the
    electron beam horizontally and vertically when suitable currents are passed
    through them.


CLS 348/830
TXT Supported by CRT neck:

    Subject matter under subclass 829 wherein the yoke is supported only by the
    neck of the cathode-ray tube.


CLS 348/831
TXT Adjustable:

    Subject matter under subclass 830 includes a mounting arrangement to
    variably position the yoke.


CLS 348/832
TXT With optical element:

    Subject matter under subclass 805 including an optical device cooperating
    with and performing various operations on the image displayed on the
    cathode-ray tube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    756,    for projection type image reproducer combined with an optical
    structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements,
    appropriate subclass for particular optical elements.


CLS 348/833
TXT For line elimination:

    Subject matter under subclass 832 wherein the optical device eliminates the
    visible line structure present in the cathode-ray tube scanned raster.


CLS 348/834
TXT Glare reduction:

    Subject matter under subclass 832 wherein the optical device reduces the
    intensity or changes the direction of light reflected from the face of the
    cathode-ray tube.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    601+ for glare reducing elements.


CLS 348/835
TXT Filters:

    Subject matter under subclass 832 wherein the optical device includes a
    specific light wavelength absorption device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    885+ for optical filters, per se.


CLS 348/836
TXT Cabinet or chassis:

    Subject matter under subclass 739 including a structural detail of a video
    display housing which may be combined with a television component support
    structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    787     and 789, for projection type image reproducer cabinet or chassis.

    794,    for cabinet or chassis of a liquid crystal image reproducer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 7.2 for TV cabinet, per se.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 600+ for
    generic electrical component housing.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 347+ for radio cabinet, housing, or
    chassis.


CLS 348/837
TXT With vehicle:

    Subject matter under subclass 836 wherein the cabinet or chassis is adapted
    to mount on or within a passenger vehicle.


CLS 348/838
TXT Portable:

    Subject matter under subclass 836 wherein the cabinet is designed to be
    readily moved by a user.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    788,    for projection type image reproducer having foldable cabinet or
    chassis.


CLS 348/839
TXT Modular:

    Subject matter under subclass 836 including an assembly with connectors
    adapted for easy interchanging or servicing electrical components of the
    television receiver.


CLS 348/840
TXT Multiple screens:

    Subject matter under subclass 836 comprises a housing for supporting one or
    more display devices and having more than one opening, each opening
    allowing the viewing of at least a screen portion of a display device.


CLS 348/841
TXT Masking:

    Subject matter under subclass 836 including a structure attached to the
    cabinet to cover a portion of the display area.


CLS 348/842
TXT Light shielding:

    Subject matter under subclass 836 including a structure attached to the
    cabinet, or integral with it, to limit the amount of light striking the
    face of a cathode-ray tube picture reproducer.


CLS 348/843
TXT Cabinet back:

    Subject matter under subclass 836 including a structural detail of a
    portion of the cabinet which covers the rear portion of the television
    receiver.


CLS 348/844
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition not provided for above.


CLS 348/845
TXT Associated signal processing:

    Subject matter under subclass 390 wherein the signal is further processed
    by circuitry unique to the bit-rate reduction encoding/decoding process.


CLS 348/845.1
TXT Involving error dectection or correction:

    Subject matter under subclass 845 wherein the further circuitry detects or
    corrects invalid data within a character code.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    466,    for error correction or prevention in nonpictorial data packet in
    television format.


CLS 348/845.2
TXT Involving signal formatting:

    Subject matter under subclass 845 wherein the further circuitry combines
    the time variable video signal with a synchronizing signal to allow
    reconstruction of an image and converts the resultant signal into a format
    suitable for storage or transmission.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    441+,   appropriate subclasses for format conversion circuitry, per se, in
    television.

    469+    appropriate subclasses for format circuitry, per se, in television.


CLS 348/845.3
TXT Involving synchronization:

    Subject matter under subclass 845 wherein further circuitry utilizes a
    synchronizing signal component to maintain a proper time or phase
    correspondence between components of the bit-rate reduction
    encoding/decoding process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500+,   appropriate subclasses for synchonization in television.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 348/901
TXT HIGH SPEED TELEVISION SYSTEM:

    Art collection of television systems having frame rates which are
    relatively high with respect to a regular television frame rate of 25 to 30
    frames per second (e.g., 100 frames per second, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Systems in this collection are mostly used to view high
    speed motion (e.g., a bullet or an air plane in motion, etc.).


CLS 348/902
TXT PHOTOCHROMIC:

    Art collection of television-type system or component utilizing an optical
    device which transmits light in a reverse proportion to the surrounding
    brightness level; or which exhibits a reversible change in its absorption
    spectrum upon irradiation with given wavelengths of light.


CLS 348/903
TXT INCLUDING SIDE PANEL INFORMATION IN SINGLE CHANNEL:

    Art collection of television systems that add information (e.g., 5:3 or
    16:9) display on a widescreen receiver in a conventional (e.g., NTSC, PAL,
    or SECAM) television signal that allows conventional receivers to receive
    and display the conventional picture.


CLS 348/904
TXT SEPARATION OR JOINING OF SIDE AND CENTER PANELS:

    Art collection of circuits that either receive a single wide aspect ration
    picture signal and produces at least two narrower picture signals or
    receive at least two narrow aspect ratio picture signals and produces one
    wider aspect ratio picture signal.


CLS 348/905
TXT REPRODUCTION OF A COLOR FIELD OR FRAME:

    Art collection of television systems that receive only a single field or
    frame of a TV signal and creates the sequence of fields required for
    display on a conventional TV.

    (1)     Note.  Conventional television systems like PAL and NSTC have a
    sequence of fields which have different subcarriers; these systems modify
    the subcarrier phase to match the normal sequence.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of systems found here are still reproductions from
    a tape or disc or freeze frame feature.


CLS 348/906
TXT TELEVISION SCHEDULE:

    Art collection of television receivers which are capable of displaying
    television schedules and systems which can transmit television schedule
    information for display.


CLS 348/907
TXT COMMERCIAL VERIFICATION:

    Art collection of television systems which monitor the broadcast of
    television signals to confirm the proper transmission of programs.

    (1)     Note.  The program is usually a commercial which is usually
    identified (e.g., in the vertical blanking interval) to allow automated
    monitoring.


CLS 348/908
TXT CONVERTIBLE CIRCUITS (E.G., Y/C SEPARATION OR NOISE REDUCTION):

    Art collection of television circuits which include elements that can cause
    the circuit to take on at least two different configurations that perform
    different functions.

    (1)     Note.  Systems in this collection are mostly used in video
    recorders where the circuit performs one function like Y/C separation in
    the record mode and a different function like noise reduction in play mode.


CLS 348/909
TXT NOISE RESPONSIVE SIGNAL PROCESSING:

    Art collection of television circuits that include a noise measuring or
    signal strength measuring circuit that controls a television signal
    processing circuit.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a circuit found here is a transition
    sharpening circuit (e.g., peaking circuit) that reduces the amount of
    sharpening or peaking (e.g., making the picture softer) in a noisy
    environment.


CLS 348/910
TXT FLICKER REDUCTION:

    Art collection of television signal processing circuits that are designed
    to reduce flicker when the signal is displayed on a conventional receiver.

    (1)     Note.  For displays that double the number of lines and/or double
    the number of fields, both of which reduce flicker compared to a
    conventional display,  see subclass 447 for field rate doubling and
    subclasses 448+ for line doubling.


CLS 348/911
TXT LINE DOUBLER ADAPTED FOR REPRODUCING PROGRAM ORIGINALLY FROM FILM (E.G., 24
    FRAME PER SECOND):

    Art collection of television receivers that convert the normal interlaced
    signal (e.g., NTSC) into a progressive signal for display and, which have
    at least two modes for so converting the received signal; one mode for
    regular TV signals and a different mode for converting signals that
    originally were on film.

     (1)    Note.  When movies are broadcast on TV, the different frame rates
    must be compensated for this is usually done using a so called 3:2 pull
    down scheme where one frame of film is used to produce two fields of TV and
    the next frame of film is used to produce two fields of TV; many or the
    converters herein are designed to use two fields of the received TV signal
    to make one of the progressively scanned display frames making sure that
    the two fields used are from the same frame of film.


CLS 348/912
TXT DIFFERENTIAL AMPLITUDE CONSIDERATION (E.G., AMPLITUDE VS. FREQUENCY):

    Art collection of television circuits correcting for distortions resulting
    from the system, wherein the distortion occurs when the amplitude at
    different frequencies over the frequency range required for transmission is
    not constant.

    (1)     Note.  Normally the higher frequencies have a lower amplitude than
    the lower frequencies which is often referred to as roll-off;  these
    circuits normally give greater amplification to the higher frequencies to
    compensate for the "roll-off" caused by the system.


CLS 348/913
TXT LETTERBOX (E.G., DISPLAY 16:9 ASPECT RATIO IMAGE ON 4:3 SCREEN):

    Art collection of television systems having means for displaying a complete
    wide aspect ratio image on a narrow aspect ratio screen using the entire
    screen width and a portion of the screen height.


CLS 348/914
TXT DELAY FOR EQUALIZATION:

    Art collection of television systems having means for optimizing delay
    period for parallel processing.


CLS 349/
TTL LIQUID CRYSTAL CELLS, ELEMENTS AND SYSTEMS

CLS 349/
TXT I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF THE CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    This is the generic class for cells, elements, and systems which include
    molecules of a material having both liquid and crystalline properties.
    Elements or systems included in this class are those which have a
    significant liquid crystal cell detail or liquid crystal response or
    properties, and in which the liquid crystal controls or changes the optical
    properties of electromagnetic radiation such as direction, phase,
    amplitude, frequency, or polarization state.   This class also provides for
    nominal manufacturing methods for producing significant liquid crystal cell
    structure.

    II.     SCOPE OF THE CLASS

    (1)     Note.  If the liquid crystal cell is an insignificant part of a
    system, or if there is no detail of the liquid crystal cell in the system,
    the apparatus should not be classified here.

    (2)     Note.  Liquid crystal compositions with no more than nominal cell
    structure are excluded from this class; instead see Class 252, subclasses
    299.01+.  In this case, nominal cell structure refers to a broad recitation
    of substrates, electrodes (or conductive plates or electrical excitation
    means), alignment layers, a seal, spacers, and polarizers.

    (3)     Note.  Driving waveforms and external driving circuitry for the
    liquid crystal are excluded from this class, proper classification is in
    Class 345.  When the driving is in the context of a television, proper
    classification is in Class 348.

    (4)     Note.  Electrooptic devices using materials other than liquid
    crystals and optical elements separate from liquid crystal devices are
    excluded from this class; instead see Class 359.

    (5)     Note. Nominal liquid crystal display cell structure with specific
    chemical composition of nonconducting layers other than the liquid crystal
    are excluded from this class; instead see Class 428, subclass 1.

    (6)     Note. Nominal manufacturing processes for producing significant
    liquid crystal cell structure, or nominally described "providing processes"
    that can only be classified by liquid crystal device structure are proper
    for Class 349. Processes having significant manufacturing steps for
    producing liquid crystal devices are provided in various manufacturing
    classes, depending on the steps or combination of steps involved in the
    process. While plural nominal manufacturing steps are considered
    significant manufacturing--placing the original in other manufacturing
    classes, a mandatory cross to this class is required if significant liquid
    crystal structure is present. See the SEARCH CLASS notes for some examples
    of  manufacturing classes that provide for manufacture of liquid crystal
    devices.

    III.    GLOSSARY:

    EXCITATION*

    For the purpose of this class, excitation is a force or energy which
    selects the state of the liquid crystal material.

    LAYER*

    For the purpose of this class, a layer is a periodic discontinuous material
    or materials within a single plane having a single function, or a
    continuous material having one or more functions.

    CELL*

    For the purpose of this class, a cell is the minimum combination of
    elements necessary to physically contain an entire liquid crystal layer
    given a stimulus or excitation. In a matrix addressed liquid crystal
    device, a single pixel is not a cell.

    SUBSTRATE*

    For the purpose of this class, substrate is a flexible or rigid member
    which provides structural support in a cell.

    IV.     SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, appropriate subclasses for processes having combined
    operations involving metal working, machining, metal fusion bonding, or
    casting class and treating not provided for in the metal working,
    machining, welding, or casting classes. Class 29 is also a generic
    mechanical assembly class.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, for processes of, or apparatus for
    glassworking and/or treating.

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes for growing therein-defined
    single-crystal of all types of materials and by all techniques, including
    epitaxy.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, as the
    generic class for the adhesive joining of parts and as the generic class
    for manufacturing processes involving a chemical reaction.

    174,    Electricity: Conductors and Insulators, appropriate subclasses for
    the use of conductors and insulators in general.

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 155+ for a
    process of coating involving chemical preparation of a compound or element
    by application to a base of electrical or wave energy in a magnetic field
    (but without involving electrolysis as provided for in Class 205 ), where
    said base supplies a part or all of the coating (e.g., by conversion at the
    surface, etc.); subclasses 164+ for a process of coating involving chemical
    preparation of a compound or element by application of an electrostatic
    field or electrical discharge to a base which supplies a part or all of the
    coating; subclasses 471+ for a process of coating by electrophoresis or
    electro-osmosis; and subclasses 192.12+ for coating by glow discharge
    deposition (e.g., cathode sputtering, etc.).

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 80+ for electrolytic coating
    processes and subclasses 183+, 188+, 191+, and 198+ for processes involving
    plural coating steps, at least one but not all of which is electrolytic.

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, for etching processes not
    otherwise provided for in which one of the manufacturing steps includes a
    chemical etching or physical solvation especially subclass 23 for making an
    article containing a liquid crystal material.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, appropriate subclasses for processes of metal
    fusion bonding or welding of metal.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses for the use of a transistor in general.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes, for
    a process of manufacturing nonmetallic articles by shaping or treating.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses for use
    of a particular illumination device in general.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for use of a particular illumination system in general.

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclass 770  for testing a
    liquid crystal device for a fault in an individual circuit component.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclass 89 for producing a greyscale
    effect in a liquid crystal device; subclasses 90+ for using switching
    devices in a liquid crystal device; subclass 91 for using diodes or
    varistor in a liquid crystal device; subclass 93 for the use of a
    redundancy in liquid crystal device; subclass 97 for use of ferroelectric
    liquid crystal display elements; subclass 101 for generation of data
    compensation in response to the temperature of the liquid crystal material;
    and subclasses 104 and 173+ for use of liquid crystal touch pads.

    353,    Optics: Image Projectors, appropriate subclasses for projectors in
    general.

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    107 for optical computing without diffraction;  subclass 462 for
    stereoscopic systems;  subclass 561 for convolution, cross-correlation, or
    correlation using a diffraction grating;  subclasses 619+ for microlenses
    with no liquid crystal; and subclasses 630+ for general heads-up display
    devices.

    361,    Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 681 for
    housing for electronic systems or devices with display support, and
    subclasses 789+ for the use of flexible circuits.

    362,    Illumination, appropriate subclasses for illuminating devices in
    general.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 713,
    822, and 837 for optical data processing systems.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 108 for a memory
    for a liquid crystal using a light beam.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 25 for optical
    systems performing neural network type algorithms.

    427,    Coating Processes, for general coating processes, including vapor
    deposition, etc.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 1 for liquid
    crystal alignment layers having a particular chemical composition.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, for process of making radiation images involving chemistry.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, especially subclasses
    27+ for methods of packaging a semiconductor electronic device having an
    additional optical component and subclass 30 for methods of making a
    semiconductor electronic device including a liquid crystal optical
    component.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    particularly see subclass 24, Note (1) for a liquid crystal display device.


CLS 349/1
TXT LIQUID CRYSTAL SYSTEM:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the liquid crystal is a
    significant component of a larger system.

    (1)     Note. Systems such as watches, computers, calculators, etc., in
    which the liquid crystal cell is merely used in the system, with no detail
    of the function or structure of the cell are excluded from this subclass.
    For such excluded subject matter, see the appropriate class for such
    external systems.


CLS 349/2
TXT Liquid crystal for recording or imaging on photosensitive medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a liquid crystal cell is used as an
    image defining shutter for projecting light onto a medium sensitive to the
    action of radiant energy.

    (1)     Note. Included here are liquid crystal image forming devices for
    cameras or motion picture films.


CLS 349/3
TXT Printer or print bar:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the recording or image forming
    takes place in a device used for printing or a print bar.

    (1)     Note. To be classified here there must be actual recitation of a
    printer or a print bar claimed or the preferred embodiment of the
    disclosure must be directed to a printer or a print bar.


CLS 349/4
TXT Exposure device for lithography:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the liquid crystal cell is used as
    an automatic or adjustable mask in forming high definition exposures on
    very small areas.

    (1)     Note. The liquid crystal cell forms the mask, not simply a shutter.


CLS 349/5
TXT Projector including liquid crystal cell(s):

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein one or more liquid crystal cells
    modulate light for producing an image on a screen by a lens system.

    (1)     Note. Excluded from this subclass are projectors with no liquid
    crystal cell or projectors including a liquid crystal cell with no detail
    of the liquid crystal material, its function, or the liquid crystal cell
    structure. For such excluded subject matter, see SEARCH CLASS below:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    353,    Optics: Image Projectors, appropriate subclasses for projectors in
    general.


CLS 349/6
TXT Overhead projector:

    Subject matter under subclass 5 wherein the direction of the light passing
    through the liquid crystal cell (or cells) is in the vertical direction and
    the projection of the light is in a direction substantially perpendicular
    thereto.

    (1)     Note. Included here are projectors where the liquid crystal cell
    acts as an electrically driven transparency.


CLS 349/7
TXT Video/motion picture projector:

    Subject matter under subclass 5 wherein images are sequentially projected
    to give the appearance of movement.

    (1)     Note. Included here are recitations of sequential projections of
    red, green, and blue images.


CLS 349/8
TXT Plural light path projectors:

    Subject matter under subclass 5 wherein incoming light begins as or is
    broken into separate paths according to a characteristic of the light and
    is combined or recombined before or after modulation by the one or more
    liquid crystal cells.

    (1)     Note. "Characteristic" here includes polarization and wavelength,
    but excludes direction.


CLS 349/9
TXT Having light separated into S and P polarization:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 wherein a characteristic determining the
    separation of light paths is the polarization of the light, such that the S
    polarization travels along one path and the P polarization travels along a
    different path.


CLS 349/10
TXT Wherein liquid crystal cells include microencapsulated or polymer dispersed
    liquid crystal:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 wherein the liquid crystal cells are formed
    of small regions of a liquid crystal material embedded in a material of
    diverse composition.


CLS 349/11
TXT Heads-up display:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a liquid crystal cell is utilized
    to combine a real world view and a generated information image or a liquid
    crystal cell is used for generating information to be displayed in a
    heads-up display device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    630+ for general heads-up display devices.


CLS 349/12
TXT Liquid crystal writing tablet:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the system includes a stylus whose
    position is sensed and the liquid crystal is excited according to the
    sensed position.


CLS 349/13
TXT Liquid crystal eyewear (glasses, goggles, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a liquid crystal cell is utilized
    as an electronically controlled lens, shutter, or display for covering an
    eye.


CLS 349/14
TXT For protection:

    Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein the liquid crystal cells operate
    to shield eyes from light/ electromagnetic radiation.

    (1)     Note. Included here are welding helmets, sunglasses, and laser eye
    protection devices.


CLS 349/15
TXT Stereoscopic:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein two liquid crystal cells form two
    images to be superimposed on each other or wherein two images to be
    superimposed on each other are formed separately from the liquid crystal
    cell, but wherein the liquid crystal cell is integrally involved in the
    image forming process.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    353,    Optics: Image Projectors, subclass 7  for stereoscopic projectors
    not specific to liquid crystals.

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    462 for stereoscopic systems not specific to liquid crystals.


CLS 349/16
TXT Liquid crystal window:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a liquid crystal cell acts as an
    electrically excited shade for a window, by blocking light and/or reducing
    glare.

    (1)     Note. Included here are car, house, and building windows.


CLS 349/17
TXT Computational system employing liquid crystal element (neural network,
    correlation device, optical computer):

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein liquid crystal cells are utilized
    to optically perform basic or more complex mathematical processes such as
    comparing, adding, subtracting, correlating, adaptive algorithms or neural
    network type algorithms.

    (1)     Note. Excluded from this subclass are liquid crystal elements
    merely employed as memory storage for a computer and the mathematics
    inherent to any optical process. For such excluded subject matter, see
    SEARCH CLASS below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    107 for optical computing without diffraction and subclass 561 for
    convolution, cross-correlation, or correlation using a diffraction grating.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 713,
    822,  and 837 for optical data processing systems.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 25 for optical
    systems performing neural network type algorithms.


CLS 349/18
TXT Variable or rotatable retarder used with other retarders to produce
    filtering effects (Solc, Lyot, Partial):

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a liquid crystal element forms a
    variable or rotatable retarder which is combined with other retarders to
    form a tunable filter, such that the relative orientations of the retarders
    produce a precise output.


CLS 349/19
TXT PARTICULAR EXCITATION OF LIQUID CRYSTAL:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a change in a liquid
    crystal optical property is exhibited in response to the active application
    of an external stimulus.


CLS 349/20
TXT Thermal excitation:

    Subject matter under subclass 19 wherein a change in a liquid crystal
    optical property is exhibited in response to the application of heat energy.

    (1)     Note. Structure merely maintaining the liquid crystal material at a
    particular temperature is excluded from this subclass. For such excluded
    subject matter, see SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72      and 161,  for using particular devices for keeping the liquid
    crystal material at a particular temperature.


CLS 349/21
TXT By heating electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 20 wherein the liquid crystal material
    exhibits an optical property change in response to thermal energy from a
    heating electrode adjacent to the liquid crystal.

    (1)     Note. Included here are thermal heads and electrodes using
    resistance heating.


CLS 349/22
TXT By light beam heating(e.g., IR, laser, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 20 wherein the liquid crystal material
    exhibits an optical property change in response to thermal energy derived
    from incident light rays.

    (1)     Note. Included here are infrared light and laser beams which
    directly change the state of the liquid crystal.

    (2)     Note. Excluded from this subclass is light used for optically
    exciting the liquid crystal. For such excluded subject matter see SEARCH
    THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for optical excitation of a liquid crystal cell.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 108 for a memory
    for liquid crystal using a light beam.


CLS 349/23
TXT Magnetic or pressure excitation:

    Subject matter under subclass 19 wherein the liquid crystal material is
    responsive to either applied magnetic lines of force or mechanical stress.

    (1)     Note. Included here is excitation produced by an acoustic wave.


CLS 349/24
TXT Optical excitation:

    Subject matter under subclass 19 wherein the liquid crystal material
    exhibits an optical property change across the liquid crystal in response
    to the nonthermal application of light to corresponding areas of the liquid
    crystal.

    (1)     Note. Included here are light activated switches.

    (2)     Note. Excluded from this subclass is light used to excite the
    liquid crystal by heating. For such excluded subject matter, see SEARCH
    THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for changing the optical property of liquid crystal material in
    response to thermal application of incident light.


CLS 349/25
TXT With photoconductive layer (e.g., spatial light modulator (SLMs)):

    Subject matter under subclass 24 wherein the liquid crystal material
    exhibits an optical property change when an electrical field is produced
    across the liquid crystal in response to the application of light to
    corresponding areas of a photosensitive layer.

    (1)     Note. Included here are photoconductors and photodiodes.


CLS 349/26
TXT Of an alloy of S, Se, or Te:

    Subject matter under subclass 25 wherein the photoconductive layer is
    formed of an alloy of S, Se, or Te.


CLS 349/27
TXT With silicon photoconductive layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 25 wherein the photoconductive layer is
    formed of silicon.


CLS 349/28
TXT With silicon photodiode, N-I-N photoconductor structure, or P-I-P
    photoconductor structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 wherein the silicon photoconductive layer
    has the structure of a photodiode, an N-I-N photoconductor, or a P-I-P
    photoconductor.


CLS 349/29
TXT With particular light blocking layer for separating  read and write lights:

    Subject matter under subclass 25 wherein a light preventing layer with a
    particular composition or structure is included for separating read and
    write lights.


CLS 349/30
TXT With particular dielectric mirror for spatial light modulator (i.e., SLM):

    Subject matter under subclass 25 including a reflector formed of a
    multilayer nonconductive material having a particular composition or
    structure.


CLS 349/31
TXT Electron beam excitation:

    Subject matter under subclass 19 wherein an optical property of the liquid
    crystal material is changed by the application of a ray of electrons.

    (1)     Note. Included here are apparatus having an electron gun or field
    emission device.


CLS 349/32
TXT Plasma excitation:

    Subject matter under subclass 19 wherein an optical property of the liquid
    crystal material is changed by application of a plasma charge.


CLS 349/33
TXT Electrical excitation of liquid crystal (i.e., particular voltage pulses,
    AC vs. DC, threshold voltages, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 19 wherein an optical property of the liquid
    crystal material is changed by the application of an electric potential or
    current to the liquid crystal material.

    (1)     Note. Nominal driving subject matter which depends on details of
    liquid crystal cell structure is classified in this subclass. Excluded from
    this subclass is driving of a liquid crystal device with a nominal liquid
    crystal cell structure. For such excluded subject matter, see SEARCH CLASS
    below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 38+ and 87+ for driving of a
    liquid crystal device.


CLS 349/34
TXT With application of holding or bias voltage (i.e.,      voltage which does
    not change the optical state of the liquid crystal):

    Subject matter under subclass 33 wherein a voltage applied to the liquid
    crystal does not change the optical state of the liquid crystal.


CLS 349/35
TXT For driving Grandjean  to focal conic or dynamic scattering type liquid
    crystal:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 wherein the electrical excitation is
    applied to a liquid crystal material to switch it from a Grandjean to a
    focal conic state or to exhibit dynamic scattering.


CLS 349/36
TXT Including diverse driving frequencies:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 wherein the applied voltage has two or
    more frequencies.

    (1)     Note. Included herein are different frequencies for changing the
    sign of the dielectric anisotropy of the liquid crystal material.


CLS 349/37
TXT Polarity based driving:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 wherein the liquid crystal state is
    determined by the polarity of the voltage applied to the liquid crystal.


CLS 349/38
TXT With supplemental capacitor:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 wherein a capacitor is in parallel to the
    liquid crystal such that the relaxation time (or the RC time constant) of
    the liquid crystal is increased.


CLS 349/39
TXT In active matrix with separate dedicated capacitor line:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 wherein the supplemental capacitor is part
    of an active matrix and is formed from an electrical line different from
    the matrix lines and dedicated specifically to the capacitor.


CLS 349/40
TXT With antistatic elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 including structure to distribute,
    eliminate, or block static electrical charges.


CLS 349/41
TXT With particular switching device:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 including an electrical device which
    receives voltages from electrode drivers and toggles a portion of the
    liquid crystal on and off.

    (1)     Note. Included here are micromechanical switches used to switch a
    portion of the liquid crystal on and off.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses  for the use of a transistor in general.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 90+ for using switching
    devices in a liquid crystal device.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, especially subclasses
    27+ for methods of packaging a semiconductor electronic device having an
    additional optical component and subclass 30 for methods of making a
    semiconductor electronic device including a liquid crystal optical
    component.


CLS 349/42
TXT Transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 41 wherein the switching device comprises a
    three-terminal semiconductor device.


CLS 349/43
TXT Structure of transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 wherein the particular layering of the
    transistor is specified.

    (1)     Note. Included here are connective electrodes to buses, pixels, etc.


CLS 349/44
TXT With light block conductively connected to transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 43 including an opaque structure covering a
    portion of the transistor and conductively connected thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for an opaque mask not associated with and electrically connected
    to a transistor.


CLS 349/45
TXT Transferred transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 43 wherein the transistor is fabricated on a
    film and then transferred to one of the substrates which forms the liquid
    crystal cell.

    (1)     Note. An adhesive layer which attaches the transistor to the
    substrate is indicative of a transferred transistor.

    (2)     Note. Transferred transistors typically result in a structure in
    which the layers at the side of the transistor adjacent to the liquid
    crystal material are more level than those at the side adjacent the cell
    substrate.


CLS 349/46
TXT With particular gate electrode structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 43 wherein the material, location, or other
    detail of the gate electrode of the transistor is specified.

    (1)     Note. Included here are thinned electrodes for easy disconnection.


CLS 349/47
TXT With gate electrode between liquid crystal and  semiconductor layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 wherein the gate electrode is located
    between the liquid crystal layer and the semiconductor layer.


CLS 349/48
TXT Plural nonredundant transistors per pixel:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 wherein each pixel includes two or more
    transistors for purposes other than redundancy.

    (1)     Note. Included here are a pair of N and P transistors for each
    pixel or a pair of transistors connected to different address lines for
    each pixel.

    (2)     Note. Excluded from this subclass is the use of transistors for
    redundancy purposes. For such excluded subject matter, see SEARCH THIS
    CLASS, SUBCLASS below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for the use of transistors for redundancy purposes.


CLS 349/49
TXT Two terminal nonlinear switching device (e.g., N-I-N, S-I-S, Ferroelectric,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 41 wherein the switching device comprises a
    two-terminal element.


CLS 349/50
TXT Diode:

    Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein the switching device has a
    rectifying function.

    (1)     Note. Excluded from this subclass are photodiodes used for
    optically exciting the liquid crystal. For such excluded subject matter,
    see SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25      and 28, for using photodiodes for optically exciting a liquid
    crystal cell.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclass 91 for using diodes in a liquid
    crystal device.


CLS 349/51
TXT Metal-insulator-metal (i.e., MIM):

    Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein the switching device is a
    bidirectional tunneling device with a metal-insulator-metal structure.


CLS 349/52
TXT With particular insulating layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 51 wherein the MIM has an insulating layer of
    a particular composition between the two metal layers.


CLS 349/53
TXT Varistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein the switching device has a
    two-electrode semiconductor device with a voltage-dependent nonlinear
    resistance that drops markedly as the applied voltage is increased.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclass 91 for using varistor in a
    liquid crystal device.


CLS 349/54
TXT Matrix including additional element(s) which correct or compensate for
    electrical fault:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 including a structure or arrangement of
    additional buses, switching elements, or circuit elements for correcting
    and preventing electrical defects such as open or short circuits.

    (1)     Note. The defect correction structure included in this subclass is
    that which is incorporated in the liquid crystal device when the device is
    manufactured. Excluded from this subclass are defect correction after the
    device has been made. For such excluded subject matter, see SEARCH THIS
    CLASS, SUBCLASS below.

    (2)     Note. Included here are double buslines, double switches, and
    bypass lines.  Also included are pixels connected directly to the busline
    to reduce defects.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    192,    for defect correction after the liquid crystal device has been made.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclass 93 for the use of redundancy in
    a liquid crystal device.


CLS 349/55
TXT Laser links:

    Subject matter under subclass 54 wherein the correction or compensation of
    the fault is accomplished by using a laser to conductively connect two
    conductors which were isolated from each other.


CLS 349/56
TXT PARTICULAR STRUCTURE:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a specific aspect of
    the structure of the liquid crystal device and not involving the
    application of electrical energy to the liquid crystal.

    (1)     Note. The structure here includes the parts of the whole device.
    For example, light source, frame, liquid crystal cell, etc.


CLS 349/57
TXT Lens or prism separate from projection system (i.e., it is not integral
    part of illumination system):

    Subject matter under subclass 56 wherein the liquid crystal device includes
    a specific lens or prism near or adjacent to the liquid crystal cell,
    wherein the lens or prism is not an integral part of a projection system
    nor a light guide of the liquid crystal illumination system.

    (1)     Note. Included here are collimating lenses and prisms for
    redirecting light entering or leaving the liquid crystal cell.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5+,     for using lens or prisms in a projection device.

    62+,    for illumination systems having integral lens or prism.


CLS 349/58
TXT Holder, support, frame, or housing:

    Subject matter under subclass 56 wherein the device includes structure
    which holds elements of the device including the liquid crystal cell
    together or which facilitates the mounting of the liquid crystal cell.

    (1)     Note. Excluded from this subclass are eyeglass frames, windows, and
    other frames or holders for the liquid crystal which define a system
    environment for the liquid crystal cell. For such excluded subject matter,
    see SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1       through 18, for utilizing frames or holders in a liquid crystal
    cell.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 681 for
    housings for electronic systems or devices with display supports.


CLS 349/59
TXT Including electromagnetic shielding:

    Subject matter under subclass 58 wherein the structure includes a means of
    preventing the transmission of electromagnetic fields or waves into or out
    of the cell.


CLS 349/60
TXT Including resilient support member:

    Subject matter under subclass 58 wherein the structure includes an elastic
    means used as support.

    (1)     Note. Included here are elastomeric connectors used as support
    which also function as electrical connection and buffers.


CLS 349/61
TXT Particular illumination:

    Subject matter under subclass 56 including specific structure for providing
    light to the liquid crystal device.

    (1)     Note. This structure may use a special light source for the liquid
    crystal device or be structurally designed for use with ambient light.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses for use
    of a particular illumination device in general.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for use of a particular illumination system in general.

    362,    Illumination, appropriate subclasses for illuminating devices in
    general.


CLS 349/62
TXT With integral optical element for guiding or distributing light from the
    light source:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 including an optical means for directing
    or dividing the light into different paths therefrom.


CLS 349/63
TXT Specifically for guiding light in a front-lit device:

    Subject matter under subclass 62 wherein the optical means guides or
    distributes light entering the liquid crystal device from a viewer's side.


CLS 349/64
TXT Diffuser between light source and liquid crystal:

    Subject matter under subclass 62 wherein the optical means scatters or
    disperses light before it enters the liquid crystal device.

    (1)     Note. Excluded from this subclass are diffusing elements behind the
    liquid crystal. Also excluded are diffusing elements between the liquid
    crystal device and the viewer. For such excluded subject matter, see SEARCH
    THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    for the use of diffusing elements behind the liquid crystal or
    between the liquid crystal device and a viewer.


CLS 349/65
TXT Edge lit type light guide behind liquid crystal:

    Subject matter under subclass 62 wherein the optical means is a
    substantially flat or tapered sheet behind the liquid crystal with the
    light source at an edge of the sheet.

    (1)     Note. Included here are details of reflector, bulb, etc., that are
    part of rear edge-lit light guide.


CLS 349/66
TXT Louvres:

    Subject matter under subclass 62 wherein the optical means is formed of
    thin parallel slats or strips which reflect or refract light rays toward or
    away from the liquid crystal cell.


CLS 349/67
TXT Reflector having particular shape behind light source:

    Subject matter under subclass 62 wherein the optical means is a reflecting
    element behind the light source for redirecting rays from the light source
    back toward the liquid crystal cell, and the reflecting element has a
    specific form such as specific curved shape.

    (1)     Note. Excluded from this subclass are reflectors merely specified
    as curved.

    (2)     Note. Reflectors behind the liquid crystal cell for making the
    liquid crystal device reflective (i.e., not part of the light source
    itself) are excluded from this subclass. For such excluded subject matter,
    see SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for the use of reflectors.


CLS 349/68
TXT With plural diverse light sources (e.g., for day and night):

    Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein two or more different types of
    lights are used to illuminate the liquid crystal device.

    (1)     Note. Included here are differently colored light sources.


CLS 349/69
TXT Electroluminescent light source:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein the liquid crystal device is lit
    by a layer which emits fluorescent light when electrically driven by
    electrodes.

    (1)     Note. Excluded from this subclass are fluorescent bulbs and layers
    which emit fluorescent light when illuminated with a light source, rather
    than when driven by electrodes. For such excluded subject matter, see
    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS below.

    (2)     Note. Included here are CRTs for lighting and not for exciting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for using fluorescent bulbs and layers as a light source in a
    liquid crystal cell.


CLS 349/70
TXT Fluorescent light source:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein the liquid crystal device is lit
    by a tube containing mercury vapor, lined with phosphor which emits light
    in response to passage of a current, or a phosphorescent layer not driven
    by electrodes.

    (1)     Note. Included herein are apparatus having fluorescent bulbs and
    layers which emit fluorescent light when illuminated with a light source.

    (2)     Note. Excluded from this subclass are fluorescent layers which are
    driven by electrodes, or electroluminescent light sources. For such
    excluded subject matter, see SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for the use of fluorescent layers which are driven by electrodes or
    electroluminescent light sources in a liquid crystal device.


CLS 349/71
TXT Formed of planar phosphor or fluorescent layer separate from illumination
    source:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 including a continuous layer or a layer of
    individual elements separate from an illumination source wherein the layer
    emits light when excited by radiant energy.


CLS 349/72
TXT Detector of liquid crystal temperature:

    Subject matter under subclass 56 wherein the device includes a sensor of
    the temperature of the liquid crystal material itself; e.g., for
    maintaining a constant liquid crystal temperature or characteristic.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclass 101 for generation of data
    compensation in response to the temperature of the liquid crystal material.


CLS 349/73
TXT Interconnection of plural cells in parallel (e.g., edge to edge):

    Subject matter under subclass 56 wherein two or more liquid crystal cells
    are positioned side by side.

    (1)     Note. Each liquid crystal cell is formed from a separate enclosure
    around a liquid crystal material and a liquid crystal cell is not a single
    pixel or display element.  Thus, excluded from this subclass is merely a
    matrix of liquid crystal pixels.

    (2)     Note. Excluded from this subclass are plural liquid crystal cells
    which substantially overlap each other. For such excluded subject matter,
    see  SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for plural overlapping liquid crystal cell.


CLS 349/74
TXT Interconnection of plural cells in series:

    Subject matter under subclass 56 wherein two or more liquid crystal cells
    substantially overlap each other.

    (1)     Note. Excluded from this subclass are multiple cholesteric layers
    in series wherein each layer selectively reflects a different particular
    wavelength of light. For such excluded subject matter, see SEARCH THIS
    CLASS, SUBCLASS below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    176 and 193, for the use of multiple cholesteric layers in series
    in a liquid crystal device.


CLS 349/75
TXT For compensation of birefringence effects:

    Subject matter under subclass 74 wherein one or more of the plural cells
    compensates for the double refraction of another liquid crystal cell.


CLS 349/76
TXT Of twisted (or chiral) nematic or supertwisted nematic liquid crystal:

    Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein the cell having birefringence and
    needing compensation contains nematic liquid crystal having a nonzero twist
    angle.


CLS 349/77
TXT With particular cooperation between cells (e.g., alternating selection or
    simultaneous selection of cells):

    Subject matter under subclass 74 wherein all of the cells are driven either
    simultaneously or in a particular sequence for a particular display effect.


CLS 349/78
TXT Cell cooperation providing multicolor display:

    Subject matter under subclass 77 wherein the color of the display depends
    on which cell or cells are activated such that the cooperation between the
    plural cells provides a multicolor display.

    (1)     Note. Excluded from this subclass are displays including plural
    cells with solely a single layer of multicolor filters for color across a
    surface of one of the cells. For such excluded subject matter, see SEARCH
    THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    for use of color filter.


CLS 349/79
TXT With color formed by different dye in each cell:

    Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein each cell includes a dye of a
    different color from that in each other cell.


CLS 349/80
TXT With color formed by different color polarizer or color filter associated
    with each cell:

    Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein each cell includes or is adjacent
    to a polarizer or color filter of a different color from that associated
    with each other cell.


CLS 349/81
TXT With cells being substantially identical and driven simultaneously,
    providing improved contrast:

    Subject matter under subclass 77 wherein the plural cells are substantially
    the same as each other, with corresponding elements overlapping each other
    and driven simultaneously to prevent light leakage that occurs in a dark
    state when a single cell is used.


CLS 349/82
TXT With projection of electrodes in one cell substantially nonoverlapping that
    of another cell (i.e., for improving resolution):

    Subject matter under subclass 77 wherein the plural cells overlap each
    other, but the electrodes in each cell do not substantially overlap the
    electrodes in the other cells, such that resolution of the display is
    improved.

    (1)     Note. Included herein are displays in which the electrodes of one
    cell overlap the spaces between the electrodes of another cell or in which
    the electrodes of one cell cover a different display area from those of
    each other cell.


CLS 349/83
TXT With each cell displaying a different pattern:

    Subject matter under subclass 77 wherein the electrodes of one cell form a
    different pattern from those of each other cell such that two or more
    different patterns (such as an analog and a digital display) can be
    displayed simultaneously with one superimposed on the others or can be
    displayed in sequence.


CLS 349/84
TXT Having significant detail of cell structure only:

    Subject matter under subclass 56 including a specific aspect of the
    structure which surrounds the liquid crystal material.

    (1)     Note. Included here is structure involving the liquid crystal
    material, structure immediately adjacent to the liquid crystal material,
    and structure attached to the structure adjacent to the liquid crystal
    material.


CLS 349/85
TXT Producing a greyscale effect:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 including particular structure which
    produces gradation.

    (1)     Note. Included here are varied subpixel thicknesses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144,    for greyscale resultant from split pixels.

    173,    for greyscale resultant from a liquid crystal property or from
    uniform boundary conditions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclass 89 for producing a greyscale
    effect in a liquid crystal device.


CLS 349/86
TXT Microencapsulated or polymer dispersed liquid crystal:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 wherein small regions of liquid crystal
    material are embedded in a medium of diverse composition.


CLS 349/87
TXT For variable polarizer:

    Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein the encapsulated or dispersed
    liquid crystal has a polarizing effect without the use of a separate
    polarizing element and which is controllable by excitation applied to the
    liquid crystal cell.

    (1)     Note. Included here are stretched polymer dispersed liquid crystal
    films. For excluded subject matter see, SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86,     for microencapsulated or polymer dispersed liquid crystal.


CLS 349/88
TXT Polymer network liquid crystal:

    Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein the liquid crystal forms a
    continuous phase throughout a polymer layer, such that the polymer forms a
    network structure filled with liquid crystal material.

    (1)     Note. Excluded from here are discrete capsules of liquid crystal
    material embedded in the polymer layer.


CLS 349/89
TXT With particular encapsulating medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein details of the medium are
    specified.


CLS 349/90
TXT With second material between liquid crystal and encapsulating medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein a second material of a composition
    different from both the liquid crystal and the medium exists between the
    liquid crystal and the medium.

    (1)     Note. Included here are walls formed around individual capsules of
    liquid crystal material and surfactants surrounding the liquid crystal
    material.


CLS 349/91
TXT With nonpolymer encapsulating medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the encapsulating medium is formed
    of a material which is not a polymer.

    (1)     Note. Included here are encapsulating mediums such as glass.


CLS 349/92
TXT Formed by particular technique:

    Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein the particular microencapsulated
    or polymer dispersed liquid crystal has been formed by a particular
    technique.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 4+ for a process of encapsulating liquid material.


CLS 349/93
TXT Having UV polymerized element:

    Subject matter under subclass 92 wherein the liquid crystal has been
    microencapsulated or dispersed in an ultra violet polymerized material.


CLS 349/94
TXT Formed with particular alignment technique:

    Subject matter under subclass 92 wherein the liquid crystal alignment has
    been formed by a particular technique.


CLS 349/95
TXT Microlenses:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 wherein the cell structure includes a
    surface configured to form a regular array of optical elements for focusing
    light by refraction.

    (1)     Note. Included here are arrays of lenses which have one or more
    lenses per pixel for focusing light onto the pixels or for collimating
    light entering or exiting the pixels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    619+ for microlenses with no liquid crystal.


CLS 349/96
TXT Polarizer:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 wherein the cell structure includes a
    means for making light or other radiation vibrate perpendicular to the ray
    with a particular composition, pattern, or orientation.


CLS 349/97
TXT Color:

    Subject matter under subclass 96 wherein the polarizer has the additional
    property that it only passes a particular frequency of polarized light
    along a particular polarization axis.

    (1)     Note. Color polarizers are sometimes termed selective polarizers.


CLS 349/98
TXT Circular:

    Subject matter under subclass 96 wherein the cell structure provides
    circular polarization to light entering or exiting the cell.


CLS 349/99
TXT With particular non-zero angle between polarization axis and orientation
    direction:

    Subject matter under subclass 96 wherein transmission or absorption axis of
    one polarizer of the cell is at an angle to the direction of orientation of
    liquid crystal molecules near one of the substrates holding the liquid
    crystal therebetween.


CLS 349/100
TXT For ferroelectric liquid crystal:

    Subject matter under subclass 99 wherein the liquid crystal material used
    with the polarizer is ferroelectric liquid crystal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclass 97 for use of ferroelectric
    liquid crystal display elements.


CLS 349/101
TXT For supertwisted nematic liquid crystal:

    Subject matter under subclass 99 wherein the liquid crystal material used
    with the polarizer is nematic liquid crystal with a twist angle greater
    than 90_.


CLS 349/102
TXT With particular non-zero angle between polarization axis and compensator
    optical axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 96 wherein the transmission or absorption
    axis of one polarizer of the cell is at an angle to the optical axis of a
    compensator for the liquid crystal material.


CLS 349/103
TXT With particular non-zero and non-90_ angle between opposite polarization
    axes:

    Subject matter under subclass 96 wherein the transmission or absorption
    axis of one polarizer of the cell is at an angle other than 90_ to the
    transmission or absorption axis of another polarizer of the cell.


CLS 349/104
TXT Filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 including a particular light absorbing
    device to attenuate particular wavelengths or frequencies while passing
    others on with relatively no change.

    (1)     Note. Included here are infrared and ultraviolet filters.


CLS 349/105
TXT Interference filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 104 wherein two light waves, as a result of
    their relative phases, interact to produce a cancellation or reinforcement
    of wave energy.


CLS 349/106
TXT Color filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 104 wherein only a portion of the frequency
    band of incident light is passed, giving a colored appearance.

    (1)     Note. Typically triads of filters passing red, green, and blue
    light are used.


CLS 349/107
TXT With different liquid crystal thickness for each color of filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein each of the color filters has a
    different thickness of liquid crystal material.


CLS 349/108
TXT With plural colors for each display element (i.e., each pixel or segment):

    Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein each display electrode overlaps
    filters passing two or more different colors.


CLS 349/109
TXT With unequal areas for different colors or with         fractional shift
    between one line of colors and the next:

    Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein at least one color passed by the
    color filter passes through a different sized area than all other colors or
    each line of color filter element is shifted from an adjacent line by a
    fractional number of pixel elements.


CLS 349/110
TXT Opaque mask or black mask:

    Subject matter under subclass 104 wherein a structure covering certain
    portions of the liquid crystal cell totally or substantially blocks all of
    the light incident thereon.


CLS 349/111
TXT Conductive mask:

    Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein the opaque mask or black mask is
    formed of a conductive material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for light blocking elements conductively connected to a transistor.


CLS 349/112
TXT Diffuser (on viewer side of liquid crystal):

    Subject matter under subclass 84 including a particular light scattering or
    dispersing device which is not part of the illumination system.

    (1)     Note. Excluded from this subclass are diffusing elements between
    the light source and the liquid crystal. For such excluded subject matter,
    see SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for the use of diffusing elements between the light source and the
    liquid crystal cell.


CLS 349/113
TXT Reflector:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 having a detail of a means for returning
    light that has passed through the cell back through the cell again.

    (1)     Note. Reflectors in conjunction with the light source are excluded
    from this subclass. For such excluded subject matter, see SEARCH THIS
    CLASS, SUBCLASS below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     for the use of reflectors in conjunction with light source in a
    liquid crystal device.


CLS 349/114
TXT Dielectric mirror (i.e., in devices excited other than by photoconductive
    layer) or transflector:

    Subject matter under subclass 113 wherein the reflector is formed of a
    multilayer nonconductive material or is partially light transmitting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for dielectric mirrors part of a spatial light modulator in a
    liquid crystal device.


CLS 349/115
TXT Cholesteric reflector:

    Subject matter under subclass 113 wherein the reflector is formed of a
    cholesteric liquid crystal material.

    (1)     Note. To be classified here, the cholesteric reflector must be
    additional to another liquid crystal cell.


CLS 349/116
TXT Photoconductive element (i.e., not used for exciting):

    Subject matter under subclass 84 having an element whose electrical
    resistance varies as a function of incident light, but which is not used
    for optically exciting the liquid crystal material.

    (1)     Note. Included here are photodetectors and solar batteries.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for the use of photoconductive layer in a liquid crystal device for
    exciting purposes.


CLS 349/117
TXT Compensator or retarder (i.e., not using liquid crystal cell):

    Subject matter under subclass 84 including an element which modifies
    relative velocity between two light rays.

    (1)     Note. Included here are quarter-wave and half-wave plates and
    birefringent layers.

    (2)     Note. Excluded from this subclass are compensators formed of liquid
    crystal cells. For such excluded subject matter, see SEARCH THIS CLASS,
    SUBCLASS below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75      and 76, for compensators formed of liquid crystal cells.


CLS 349/118
TXT With refractive indices in the x, y, and z directions:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 wherein the compensator or retarder is
    described as having three refractive indices, one in each of the x, y, and
    z directions.


CLS 349/119
TXT Multiple compensators:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 wherein two or more compensators or
    retarders are employed.


CLS 349/120
TXT Including at least one with negative intrinsic birefringence:

    Subject matter under subclass 119 wherein at least one of the plural
    compensators or retarders has a negative refractive index anisotropy.

    (1)     Note. Materials that have a negative intrinsic birefringence
    include polystyrene and styrene copolymers, whereas materials that have a
    positive intrinsic birefringence include polycarbonate.


CLS 349/121
TXT With particular non-zero angle between compensator optical axis and
    orientation direction:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 wherein an angle greater than zero
    degrees is formed between the optical axis of the compensator or retarder
    and the orientation direction of the molecules adjacent one of the
    substrates surrounding the liquid crystal.


CLS 349/122
TXT Particular nonoptical film or layer (e.g., adhesive layer, barrier layer):

    Subject matter under subclass 84 having a specified sheet that possesses no
    inherent light modifying property.


CLS 349/123
TXT Alignment layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 122 wherein the sheet is used for orienting
    the liquid crystal molecules in a particular manner.

    (1)     Note. Examples of an alignment layer are silicon dioxide,
    polyimides, polyamides, organosilanes, and polyvinyl alcohol.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 1 for liquid
    crystal alignment layers having a particular chemical composition.


CLS 349/124
TXT Formed by particular technique (e.g., Langmuir Blodgett, stretching, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 123 wherein the  alignment layer has been
    produced utilizing a specialized technique.


CLS 349/125
TXT Having particular deposited structure (e.g., angled, plural layered)
    produced by vapor deposition:

    Subject matter under subclass 124 wherein the alignment layer has been
    produced by vapor deposition to form a specified structure (e.g.,
    particular angle, plural layered, etc.).


CLS 349/126
TXT Having structure produced by rubbing under particular rubbing conditions
    (e.g., particular direction, rubbing force, by using named rubbing material
    or roller, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 124 wherein the alignment layer has been
    produced utilizing a technique that involves rubbing of the material for
    forming the alignment layer under a specific rubbing condition, such as:
    (a) rubbing in a specific direction relative to elements of the liquid
    crystal display, (b) rubbing with a defined or varying rubbing force, or
    (c) using a specific rubbing material or roller for rubbing the alignment
    layer.


CLS 349/127
TXT Formed of a liquid crystal material:

    Subject matter under subclass 123 wherein the alignment layer is formed of
    a liquid crystal layer different from the liquid crystal layer which is
    oriented by the alignment layer.


CLS 349/128
TXT With different alignments on opposite substrates:

    Subject matter under subclass 123 wherein the alignment direction and/or
    pretilt angle of the alignment layer on one side of the liquid crystal
    material differs from that on the other side of the liquid crystal material.

    (1)     Note. Different alignments can be formed by using different
    compositions for the two alignment layers.


CLS 349/129
TXT With plural alignments on the same substrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 123 wherein the alignment layer on one side
    of the liquid crystal includes two or more alignment directions, and/or two
    or more pretilt angles.

    (1)     Note. Included here are two different alignment layers used one on
    top of the other or alternating side-by-side.  Also included herein are
    alternating alignment directions or pretilt angles; e.g., between pixel and
    nonpixel portions.

    (2)     Note. Different alignments can be formed by using different
    compositions for the two alignment layers.


CLS 349/130
TXT For perpendicular alignment:

    Subject matter under subclass 123 wherein the alignment layer causes the
    liquid crystal molecules to be oriented homeotropically or substantially
    perpendicular to a supporting surface (i.e., substrate).

    (1)     Note. This type of alignment is typically found in conjunction with
    dynamic scattering or variable birefringence type liquid crystal devices.


CLS 349/131
TXT Silanes:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein the alignment layer is formed of
    any one of various silicon hydrides.


CLS 349/132
TXT For parallel alignment:

    Subject matter under subclass 123 wherein the alignment layer causes the
    liquid crystal molecules to be oriented homogeneously or substantially
    parallel to a supporting surface (i.e., substrate).

    (1)     Note. This alignment is sometimes caused by rubbing or otherwise
    forming grooves in the surface of the layer.

    (2)     Note. This type of alignment is typically found in conjunction with
    the twisted nematic field effect type liquid crystal devices.


CLS 349/133
TXT With chiral smectic liquid crystal (includes ferroelectric liquid crystal):

    Subject matter under subclass 132 wherein the alignment layer is employed
    to orient the molecules in a chiral smectic liquid crystal material.


CLS 349/134
TXT With particular pretilt angle from the alignment layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 133 wherein the alignment layer causes the
    chiral smectic liquid crystal molecules near a supporting surface (i.e.,
    substrate) to form a particular angle with the surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136,    for alignment layers causing a particular pretilt angle for liquid
    crystals which are not chiral smectic.


CLS 349/135
TXT With particular polymer composition of the alignment layer (e.g.,
    fluorine-containing aliphatic polyamide):

    Subject matter under subclass 133 wherein the chemical composition of the
    alignment layer is specifically recited (i.e., more than merely reciting
    polyamide, polyvinyl alcohol, silicon dioxide, or organosilane).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Article, subclass 1 for liquid
    crystal alignment layers having a particular chemical composition.


CLS 349/136
TXT With particular pretilt angle (i.e., with liquid crystal other than chiral
    smectic):

    Subject matter under subclass 132 wherein the alignment layer causes the
    liquid crystal molecules near a supporting surface (i.e., substrate) to
    form a particular angle with the surface.


CLS 349/137
TXT Antireflection layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 122 including a layer which reduces unwanted
    surface reflections, thereby reducing glare.


CLS 349/138
TXT Insulating layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 122 wherein a particular nonelectrically
    conducting layer is in the vicinity of the liquid crystal material.

    (1)     Note. When the insulative layer is located between an electrode and
    the liquid crystal material, this insulative layer causes the device to
    block direct current, thereby extending device life.

    (2)     Note. Although alignment layers are typically insulative layers
    adjacent the liquid crystal material, they are excluded from this subclass
    unless an insulating function is specifically recited for the layers. For
    such excluded subject matter, see SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS below.

    (3)     Note. Excluded from here are insulative layers which are soley
    within the structure of switching elements. For such excluded subject
    matter, see SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43      and 52, for the use of insulative layer in a structure of a
    transistor or in a MIM switching device respectively.

    123     and 136, for the use of alignment layer in a liquid crystal device.


CLS 349/139
TXT Electrode or bus detail (i.e., excluding supplemental capacitor and
    transistor electrodes):

    Subject matter under subclass 84 wherein a particular characteristic of an
    electrode or bus line is specified.

    (1)     Note. Included here are details of the pixel electrodes, bus lines,
    common (or counter) electrodes, and segmented electrodes.

    (2)     Note. Excluded from here are details of the electrodes forming
    supplemental capacitors and transistors. For such excluded subject matter,
    see SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38      39, 43, and 47, for details of electrodes forming supplemental
    capacitors and transistors in a liquid crystal device.


CLS 349/140
TXT Formed of semiconductor material:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein the electrodes are made of a
    solid or liquid electronic conductor material with resistivity between that
    of metals and that of insulators.


CLS 349/141
TXT Interdigited electrodes (comb-shaped):

    Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein the electrodes are interlocked
    with each other such that one set of electrodes are located in the gaps
    between another set of electrodes.


CLS 349/142
TXT Segmented or fixed pattern:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein the electrodes which border the
    liquid crystal material form a particular pattern.

    (1)     Note. Examples include an alphanumeric display pattern, an analog
    clock pattern, and a picture to be displayed.

    (2)     Note. Excluded from this subclass is a matrix of electrodes. For
    such excluded subject matter, see SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143,    for the use of a matrix of electrodes in a liquid crystal device.


CLS 349/143
TXT Matrix electrodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein the electrodes are arranged in an
    array of rows and columns  and some detail thereof is specified.

    (1)     Note. Examples include a particular material, width, or spacing for
    the bus lines (or row and column electrodes), a particular shape or size
    for the pixel electrodes, and a particular common electrode.


CLS 349/144
TXT Split pixels:

    Subject matter under subclass 143 wherein at a given intersection between a
    column electrode and a row electrode, two or more portions of a pixel
    electrode are connected thereto, forming two or more subpixels.

    (1)     Note. Included here are subpixels used for greyscale.


CLS 349/145
TXT Nonrectilinear rows and columns:

    Subject matter under subclass 143 wherein the rows and columns of the
    matrix are not merely straight horizontal and vertical lines, respectively.

    (1)     Note. Included here are diagonal lines and zigzag lines.


CLS 349/146
TXT Nonrectangular (odd) shaped pixels:

    Subject matter under subclass 143 wherein the pixel electrodes have a shape
    other than rectangular.

    (1)     Note. Included here are pixels with hexagonal and diamond shapes.


CLS 349/147
TXT Multilayer electrodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 143 wherein bus lines, common electrodes, or
    pixel electrodes include two or more layers of conductive material which
    are substantially coextensive.


CLS 349/148
TXT Resistance reducing electrodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 143 wherein a set of low resistance
    electrodes are included along an edge of the row or column electrodes to
    reduce the resistance thereof.

    (1)     Note. These electrodes are not coextensive with their associated
    row or column lines.  Excluded from this subclass are multilayer electrodes
    which are substantially coextensive. For such excluded subject matter, see
    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS below.

    (2)     Note. These electrodes are particularly common with ferroelectric
    liquid crystals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147,    for the use of multilayer electrodes which are substantially
    coextensive in a liquid crystal device.


CLS 349/149
TXT Having connection detail to external circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 including particular structure for
    joining  a liquid crystal electrode to a driving circuit outside of the
    liquid crystal cell.


CLS 349/150
TXT Featuring flexible circuit (i.e., tape automated bonding, (TAB), etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 149 wherein the connection detail includes a
    flexible circuit such as a tape automated bonding circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity: Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 254+ for
    preformed flexible circuits.

    361,    Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 789+ for
    the use of flexible circuits.


CLS 349/151
TXT With driving circuit having input and output electrodes on liquid crystal
    substrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 149 wherein the driving circuit to which the
    liquid crystal electrode is connected is formed with its input and output
    electrodes on a substrate of the liquid crystal cell.

    (1)     Note. Excluded from this subclass are driving circuits formed on
    separate substrate and bonded to the liquid crystal substrate. For such
    excluded subject matter, see SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33      and 56, for driving circuits formed on separate substrate.


CLS 349/152
TXT With detail of terminals to external circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 149 wherein the connection detail includes
    particular structure for the terminals of the electrodes connected to the
    drive circuit.

    (1)     Note. Included here are terminals having a particular shape,
    material, or spacing.


CLS 349/153
TXT Liquid crystal seal:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 wherein a detail of an environmentally
    impermeable enclosure for the liquid crystal material is specified.

    (1)     Note. Included here are gaskets and adhesives holding the
    substrates together around a periphery of the liquid crystal layer.

    (2)     Note. Excluded from this subclass are particular methods for
    sealing the liquid crystal between the substrates unless a detail of the
    seal itself is specified. For such excluded subject matter, see SEARCH THIS
    CLASS, SUBCLASS below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    190,    for particular methods for sealing the liquid crystal between the
    substrates.


CLS 349/154
TXT With particular injection port or injection plug:

    Subject matter under subclass 153 wherein the seal includes an opening for
    injecting the liquid crystal therethrough, the opening having a particular
    shape or other significant detail or a plug for filling the opening after
    the injection of the liquid crystal material having a particular
    composition, shape, or other significant detail.

    (1)     Note. Excluded from here are particular injection methods unless a
    detail of the injection port or injection plug is recited. For such
    excluded subject matter see, SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189,    for the use of particular injection methods in a liquid crystal
    device.


CLS 349/155
TXT Spacer:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 having a detail of a structure used to
    maintain substrates at a particular uniform distance.

    (1)     Note. Spacers may be dispersed within the liquid crystal material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153,    for a liquid crystal seal which incorporates a spacer.


CLS 349/156
TXT Formed as walls (e.g., between pixels) or integral with  substrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 wherein the spacers are formed integrally
    with substrate or have the shape of elongated walls segmenting portions of
    the liquid crystal.

    (1)     Note. Included here are spacers formed by etching or cutting out
    portions of the substrate and growing spacers on the substrate.


CLS 349/157
TXT Plural types in single liquid crystal cell:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 wherein two or more different types of
    spacers are included in a single liquid crystal layer.

    (1)     Note. Included here are combinations of hard and soft or adhesive
    and nonadhesive spacers.


CLS 349/158
TXT Substrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 wherein the features of a liquid crystal
    supporting surface (i.e., substrate) are specifically identified.


CLS 349/159
TXT Fiberoptic faceplate:

    Subject matter under subclass 158 wherein each surface of the substrate is
    formed from ends of multiple thin transparent fibers of plastic or glass
    waveguides bundled together side-by-side.

    (1)     Note. Excluded from this subclass are fiberoptic plates used as
    part of the illumination system. For such excluded subject matter see,
    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62      and 63,  for the use of fiberoptic plates as part of the
    illumination system in a liquid crystal device.


CLS 349/160
TXT With particular topology (i.e., other than for diffraction and spacers):

    Subject matter under subclass 158 wherein a surface of the substrate is
    nonplanar, but wherein the nonplanar surface is not used for diffraction or
    as a liquid crystal spacer.

    (1)     Note. Included here are curved or roughened surfaces.

    (2)     Note. The nonplanar surface is not used for diffraction or as a
    liquid crystal spacer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156,    for spacers formed integrally with the substrate.

    201,    for a diffraction grating using a liquid crystal.


CLS 349/161
TXT Heating or cooling element other than for exciting:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 wherein a structure is employed for
    maintaining the liquid crystal material at a particular temperature either
    by increasing or decreasing the liquid crystal temperature.

    (1)     Note. Included here are thermal conduction elements.


CLS 349/162
TXT Dual function layer or element:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 wherein two or more elements or layers
    have been combined as a single element or layer having the functions of all
    of the original elements or layers.

    (1)     Note. Included here are polarizers used as substrates, reflectors
    used as electrodes, color filters used as alignment layers, and electrodes
    used as antireflection layers.


CLS 349/163
TXT Nonchiral additive in the liquid crystal
    material:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 wherein a material is added to the liquid
    crystal material other than for promoting a twist of the liquid crystal
    molecules.

    (1)     Note. Included here are additives which selectively absorb light
    under certain conditions and additives which align with electric or
    magnetic fields applied to the liquid crystal.


CLS 349/164
TXT Fluorescent additive:

    Subject matter under subclass 163 wherein the liquid crystal is mixed with
    a substance which fluoresces.


CLS 349/165
TXT Pleochroic dye:

    Subject matter under subclass 163 wherein a pleochroic dye is added to the
    liquid crystal for controlling the absorption of light.

    (1)     Note.  Dichroic dyes are classified here.


CLS 349/166
TXT Nonspacer particles significantly smaller than liquid crystal thickness
    (e.g., scattering centers, ferromagnetic particles, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 163 wherein small particles (with a diameter
    significantly less than the liquid crystal layer thickness) are added to
    the liquid crystal layer.


CLS 349/167
TXT WITH SPECIFIED NONCHEMICAL CHARACTERISTIC OF LIQUID CRYSTAL MATERIAL:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a specific property of
    the enclosed liquid crystal material unrelated to its chemical structure is
    recited.

    (1)     Note. Examples of characteristics classified here include
    resistivity and response time.


CLS 349/168
TXT Utilizing change between diverse phases (e.g., cholesteric to nematic):

    Subject matter under subclass 167 wherein applied excitation to the liquid
    crystal material induces a conversion from one mesophase to another during
    the operation of the device.

    (1)     Note. Smectic, cholesteric, and nematic are all mesophases of
    liquid crystal.

    (2)     Note. Excluded from here is a liquid crystal phase change as a
    nominal manufacturing step.  For such excluded subject matter, see SEARCH
    THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188,    for liquid crystal phase change as a nominal manufacturing step.


CLS 349/169
TXT Utilizing change within liquid crystal phase (e.g., Grandjean to focal
    conic, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 167 wherein a transformation occurs to the
    liquid crystal material while the material is in a particular mesophase.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from here is a transformation in the liquid crystal
    within a particular mesophase, as a nominal manufacturing step. For such
    excluded subject matter, see SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188,    for transformation in the liquid crystal within a particular
    mesophase as a nominal manufacturing step.


CLS 349/170
TXT Utilizing reversal in sign of dielectric
    anisotropy:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 wherein the polarity of the dielectric
    anisotropy changes from positive to negative or vice versa.


CLS 349/171
TXT Within smectic phase:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 wherein the characteristic recited is
    that of a liquid crystal within the smectic mesophase.


CLS 349/172
TXT Within  chiral smectic phase (includes ferroelectric):

    Subject matter under subclass 171 wherein the characteristic recited is
    that of a liquid crystal within the smectic mesophase wherein the liquid
    crystal molecules are twisted from one substrate to the other.


CLS 349/173
TXT Greyscale resulting from liquid crystal property other than solely smectic
    A:

    Subject matter under subclass 172  wherein the liquid crystal molecules
    have more than two positions which can be used to modulate light at
    different intensities.

    (1)     Note. Included here are uniform boundary conditions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclass 89 for greyscale capability in a
    liquid crystal display device.


CLS 349/174
TXT Antiferroelectric:

    Subject matter under subclass 172  wherein the chiral smectic material has
    two hysteresises;  i.e., three stable states.


CLS 349/175
TXT Within cholesteric phase:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 wherein the characteristic recited is
    that of a liquid crystal within the cholesteric mesophase.

    (1)     Note. An example is the pitch of the cholesteric material.


CLS 349/176
TXT Using reflection characteristic:

    Subject matter under subclass 175 wherein the characteristic recited
    relates to the reflection property of the cholesteric liquid crystal
    material.

    (1)     Note. An example is the particular wavelengths for which the
    cholesteric material is reflective.


CLS 349/177
TXT Within nematic phase:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 wherein the characteristic recited is
    that of a liquid crystal within the nematic mesophase.


CLS 349/178
TXT Negative dielectric anisotropy only:

    Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein the nematic liquid crystal
    material aligns perpendicular to an applied electric field.

    (1)     Note. Material which exhibits both positive and negative dielectric
    anisotropy is excluded from this subclass. For such excluded subject
    material, see SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170,    for the use of material which exhibits both positive and negative
    dielectric anisotropy.


CLS 349/179
TXT Twisted (or chiral) nematic or supertwisted nematic:

    Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein the characteristic recited is
    that of a liquid crystal within the nematic mesophase in which the liquid
    crystal molecules exhibit a twist from one substrate to the other.


CLS 349/180
TXT Having particular parameter of twist:

    Subject matter under subclass 179 wherein the characteristic recited is a
    particular angle formed between the molecules near one substrate and the
    molecules near another substrate.

    (1)     Note. Excluded from this subclass is a twist angle of 90_, since
    all regular twisted nematic liquid crystal has a twist angle of 90_.


CLS 349/181
TXT Having particular birefringence or retardation:

    Subject matter under subclass 179 wherein the characteristic recited is a
    particular value for the difference between the ordinary and the
    extraordinary indexes of refraction or that difference multiplied by the
    layer thickness for the twisted or supertwisted nematic material.


CLS 349/182
TXT CELL CONTAINING LIQUID CRYSTAL OF SPECIFIC COMPOSITION:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a liquid crystal material
    of a particular composition is incorporated in a cell.

    (1)     Note. Claims directed only to the liquid crystal chemical
    composition but with disclosure to its inclusion in a cell structure which
    is more than nominal are classified here.


CLS 349/183
TXT Polymer liquid crystal:

    Subject matter under subclass 182 wherein the liquid crystal is specified
    as a material having chemical elements combined in the same proportions by
    weight.

    (1)     Note. In this subclass the terms polymer or polymeric are
    conventionally used for specifying the liquid crystal composition.


CLS 349/184
TXT In smectic phase:

    Subject matter under subclass 182 wherein the liquid crystal has a layered
    structure with a well-defined interlayer spacing and in which the molecular
    long axes in a given layer are parallel.

    (1)     Note. For a given material, the smectic phases always occur at
    temperatures below the nematic mesophase.


CLS 349/185
TXT In cholesteric phase:

    Subject matter under subclass 182 wherein the liquid crystal has parallel
    molecular long axes within a given plane and has the additional
    characteristic that as one moves to successive planes in a direction
    perpendicular to the planes, the molecular axes remain mutually parallel
    but rotate progressively about the direction of travel.


CLS 349/186
TXT In nematic phase:

    Subject matter under subclass 182 wherein the molecular long axes of the
    liquid crystal are substantially parallel throughout the substance with no
    additional structural constraints.


CLS 349/187
TXT NOMINAL MANUFACTURING METHODS OR POST MANUFACTURING PROCESSING OF LIQUID
    CRYSTAL CELL:

    Subject matter under the class definition which relates to nominal
    manufacturing processes for producing significant liquid crystal cell
    structure, or to processes for modifying the liquid crystal cell after
    fabrication.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are (a) methods of making a
    liquid crystal cell which are substantially structures in method format,
    (b) a liquid crystal cell product described in terms of a method of
    manufacturing the same (e.g., product-by-process, etc.). For example,
    recitations like "providing a liquid crystal material" does not qualify as
    a modification of the liquid crystal for this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are processes having significant
    manufacturing steps for producing liquid crystal devices which are provided
    in various manufacturing classes, depending on the steps or combination of
    steps involved in the process. While plural nominal manufacturing steps are
    considered significant manufacturing--placing the original in other
    manufacturing classes, a mandatory cross to this class is required if
    significant liquid crystal structure is present. See "SEARCH CLASS" notes
    under the main class definitions for some examples of  manufacturing
    classes that provide for manufacture of liquid crystal devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclass 770 for testing a
    liquid crystal device for a fault in an individual circuit component.

    430,    Radiation, Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclass 20 for a method of making a liquid crystal device with a
    step of radiation.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, especially subclasses
    27+ for methods of packaging a semiconductor electronic device having an
    additional optical component and subclass 30 for methods of making a
    semiconductor electronic device including a liquid crystal optical
    component.


CLS 349/188
TXT Changing liquid crystal phase:

    Subject matter under subclass 187 wherein the method is limited to applying
    excitation to the liquid crystal to convert the liquid crystal material
    from one mesophase to another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168,    for a change in mesophase during the use of the liquid crystal cell.


CLS 349/189
TXT Injecting liquid crystal:

    Subject matter under subclass 187 wherein the method is limited to a
    particular method of filling the cell with liquid crystal material.


CLS 349/190
TXT Sealing of liquid crystal:

    Subject matter under subclass 187 wherein the method includes enclosing the
    liquid crystal within the cell.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153,    for details of the liquid crystal seal itself.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, as the
    generic class for the adhesive joining of parts and as the generic class
    for manufacturing processes involving a chemical reaction.

    427,    Coating Processes, for general coating processes, including vapor
    deposition, etc.


CLS 349/191
TXT Aligning liquid crystal with means other than alignment layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 187 wherein the methods are limited to the
    alignment of liquid crystal molecules which are oriented in an OFF state
    without the use of an alignment layer.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is the application of electric or magnetic
    field or heat, per se, to orient the liquid crystal molecules.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123     through 136, for alignment layers.


CLS 349/192
TXT Defect correction or compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 187 wherein the liquid crystal cell is
    treated after fabrication to correct or compensate for an imperfection in
    the cell.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are methods of blacking out defective pixels.

    (2)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are structures built into the
    cell to correct or prevent defects which may occur in a matrix addressed
    liquid crystal cell.  For such excluded subject matter, see SEARCH THIS
    CLASS, SUBCLASS below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for structures built into a cell to correct or prevent defects in a
    matrix addressed liquid crystal cell.


CLS 349/193
TXT LIQUID CRYSTAL OPTICAL ELEMENT:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a liquid crystal cell
    when exposed to or placed in the path of a light beam performs optical
    functions such as refraction, diffraction, attenuation, blocking of the
    light or a modification in the character or properties of the light.


CLS 349/194
TXT Passive liquid crystal polarizer:

    Subject matter under subclass 193 wherein liquid crystal material of a
    liquid crystal cell varies the polarization of incident light rays without
    application of excitation.


CLS 349/195
TXT Antidazzle mirror formed from liquid crystal cell:

    Subject matter under subclass 193 wherein a liquid crystal device functions
    as a reflective device.

    (1)     Note. Examples include a liquid crystal automotive rear-view mirror.


CLS 349/196
TXT Beam dividing switch formed from liquid crystal cell:

    Subject matter under subclass 193 wherein the liquid crystal itself forms
    an optical switch which determines the direction in which the light travels.


CLS 349/197
TXT Including passive liquid crystal switch portion:

    Subject matter under subclass 196 wherein at least a portion of the liquid
    crystal cell divides the incident light into two beams without application
    of a voltage.

    (1)     Note. The portion of the liquid crystal cell here includes a
    portion of all the elements making the cell structure.


CLS 349/198
TXT Liquid crystal etalon:

    Subject matter under subclass 193 wherein a liquid crystal material is
    sandwiched between two at least partially reflective surfaces which are
    parallel and opposite to each other and perpendicular to incoming light and
    wherein the liquid crystal state determines whether light constructively or
    destructively interferes.


CLS 349/199
TXT Liquid crystal sensors (e.g., voltmeters, pressure sensors, temperature
    sensors):

    Subject matter under subclass 193 wherein the liquid crystal cell is used
    as a measuring device.

    (1)     Note. Excluded from this subclass are heat excited liquid crystals.
     For such excluded subject matter, see SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS  below.

    (2)     Note. Excluded from this subclass are liquid crystal touch pads.
    For such excluded subject matter, see SEARCH CLASS below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for heat excited liquid crystals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 104 and 173+ for liquid
    crystal touch pads.


CLS 349/200
TXT Liquid crystal lenses other than for eyewear:

    Subject matter under subclass 193 wherein the variable refraction of the
    liquid crystal is used to produce at a focal point an image of an object
    external to the liquid crystal for purposes other than eyewear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for liquid crystal lenses as part of eyewear.


CLS 349/201
TXT Liquid crystal diffraction element:

    Subject matter under subclass 193 wherein changes in the strength of an
    electric field applied to a liquid crystal cell result in changes in the
    spacing of a grating formed in the liquid crystal material (wherein the
    liquid crystal alone forms the diffraction element) or wherein a liquid
    crystal material fills spaces between equidistant parallel lines which form
    a diffraction grating.


CLS 349/202
TXT For beam steering:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the diffraction determines the
    direction of the output beam such that diffraction orders other than 0 are
    in different channels.

    FOREIGN ART COLLECTIONS

    The definitions for FOR 100-FOR 144 below correspond to the definitions of
    the abolished subclasses under Class 349  from which these collections were
    formed.  See the Foreign Art Collection schedule for specific
    correspondences.  [Note: The titles and definitions for indented art
    collections include all the details of the one(s) that are hierarchically
    superior.]


CLS 349/FOR100
TXT With particular illumination:

    Foreign Art Collection  including specific structure for providing light to
    the liquid crystal device.


CLS 349/FOR101
TXT Having optical element (e.g., curved reflector behind light
    source,  etc.):

    Foreign Art Collection wherein the light source includes an optical element
    for altering the light therefrom.


CLS 349/FOR102
TXT Fluorescent light (e.g., FLAD type):

    Foreign Art Collection wherein the liquid crystal device is lit by a
    fluorescent source.


CLS 349/FOR103
TXT Microencapsulated liquid crystal:

    Foreign Art Collection wherein small beads of liquid crystal material are
    embedded in a medium of diverse composition.


CLS 349/FOR104
TXT With particular encapsulating medium:

    Foreign Art Collection wherein details of the medium are specified.


CLS 349/FOR105
TXT Plural contiguous cells:

    Foreign Art Collection wherein the optical element is formed from a
    plurality of adjacent discrete liquid crystal cells.


CLS 349/FOR106
TXT Having electrodes arranged into rows and columns:

    Foreign Art Collection wherein the electrodes which modify a liquid crystal
    property are arranged in a matrix form.


CLS 349/FOR107
TXT With  liquid crystal electrode excitation:

    Foreign Art Collection wherein a circuit is specifically employed to
    control a property unique to the respective liquid crystal material.


CLS 349/FOR108
TXT For ferroelectric liquid crystal:

    Foreign Art Collection wherein the energizing circuit is particularly
    adapted to excite a liquid crystal material having a ferroelectric property.


CLS 349/FOR109
TXT With particular switching device:

    Foreign Art Collection which includes an electrical device which toggles a
    portion of the liquid crystal matrix off and on.


CLS 349/FOR110
TXT With particular switching device:

    Foreign Art Collection including an electrical device which receives
    voltages from electrode drivers and toggles a portion of the liquid crystal
    matrix off and on.


CLS 349/FOR111
TXT Transistor:

    Foreign Art Collection wherein the switching device comprises a
    three-terminal semiconductor device.


CLS 349/FOR112
TXT Diode:

    Foreign Art Collection wherein  the switching device comprises a
    two-terminal semiconductor device.


CLS 349/FOR113
TXT Having particular nonelectrical detail of cell structure enclosing
    or adjacent liquid crystal material:

    Foreign Art Collection  reciting a specific aspect of the structure which
    surrounds the liquid crystal material and which does not involve the
    application of electrical energy thereto.


CLS 349/FOR114
TXT Polarizer:

    Foreign Art Collection wherein the cell structure passes ray energy  which
    vibrates in accordance with a particular orientational pattern.


CLS 349/FOR115
TXT Color:

    Foreign Art Collection wherein the polarizer has the additional property
    that it only passes a particular frequency of polarized light.


CLS 349/FOR116
TXT Circular:

    Foreign Art Collection wherein the cell structure provides circular
    polarization to light entering or exiting the cell.


CLS 349/FOR117
TXT Diffuser:

    Foreign Art Collection  including details of a particular light scattering
    or dispersing device.


CLS 349/FOR118
TXT Dielectric mirror or transflector:

    Foreign Art  Collection  wherein the reflector is formed of a dielectric
    material or is partially light transmitting.


CLS 349/FOR119
TXT Particular nonoptical film or layer (e.g., adhesive layer, barrier
    layer, etc.):

    Foreign Art Collection having a specified structure of uniform negligible
    thickness that possesses no inherent light modifying property.


CLS 349/FOR120
TXT Alignment layer:

    Foreign Art Collection wherein a particular film-like layer in a liquid
    crystal device is used to orient the liquid crystal molecules in a
    particular manner.


CLS 349/FOR121
TXT Formed by particular technique (e.g., vapor deposition,  rubbing, etc.):

    Foreign Art Collection including specific processes for producing the
    alignment layer.


CLS 349/FOR122
TXT For perpendicular alignment:

    Foreign Art Collection wherein the layer causes the liquid crystal
    alignment to be homotropic or substantially perpendicular to its supporting
    surface (i.e., substrate).


CLS 349/FOR123
TXT For parallel alignment:

    Foreign Art Collection wherein the layer causes the liquid crystal
    alignment to be homogeneous or substantially parallel to its supporting
    surface (i.e., substrate).


CLS 349/FOR124
TXT Substrate:

    Foreign Art Collection  wherein the  features of a liquid crystal
    supporting surface (i.e., substrate) are specifically identified.


CLS 349/FOR125
TXT Holder, support or frame:

    Foreign Art Collection wherein the cell includes structure which provides
    strengthening or which facilitates the mounting thereof.


CLS 349/FOR126
TXT With specified electrode excitation characteristic of liquid
    crystal material:

    Foreign Art Collection comprising excitation which is specifically employed
    to control a  property unique to the respective liquid crystal material.


CLS 349/FOR127
TXT Provided by particular circuit:

    Foreign Art Collection wherein the electrode excitation is derived from a
    plurality of interconnected electrical circuit elements.


CLS 349/FOR128
TXT With detector of liquid crystal temperature:

    Foreign Art Collection combined with a sensor of the temperature of the
    liquid crystal material itself.


CLS 349/FOR129
TXT Electrode detail:

    Foreign Art Collection wherein a particular characteristic of an electrode
    is specified.


CLS 349/FOR130
TXT Reversal in sign of dielectric anisotropy:

    Foreign Art Collection wherein the polarity of the dielectric anisotropy
    changes from positive to negative or vice versa.


CLS 349/FOR131
TXT Birefringence effect:

    Foreign Art Collection wherein either the liquid crystal cell or an element
    used with the liquid crystal cell exhibits the refraction of light in two
    slightly different directions to form two rays.


CLS 349/FOR132
TXT Variable index of refraction:

    Foreign Art Collection wherein the ratio of the velocity of light in air to
    the velocity of light in a refractive material for a given wavelength is
    controllable through the liquid crystal device.


CLS 349/FOR133
TXT Variable diffraction:

    Foreign Art Collection wherein changes in the strength of an electric field
    applied to the liquid crystal device result in changes in the spacing of a
    grating formed in the liquid crystal material.


CLS 349/FOR134
TXT Variable absorption of light due to an additive in the liquid
    crystal material:

    Foreign Art Collection wherein the liquid crystal material contains an
    additive which selectively absorbs light under certain conditions.


CLS 349/FOR135
TXT Fluorescent additive:

    Foreign Art Colleection wherein the liquid crystal material is mixed with a
    substance which fluoresces.


CLS 349/FOR136
TXT Pleochroic dye:

    Foreign Art Collection wherein a pleochroic dye is added to the liquid
    crystal for controlling the absorption of light.


CLS 349/FOR137
TXT With specified nonchemical characteristic of liquid crystal material:

    Foreign Art Collection wherein a specific  property of the enclosed liquid
    crystal material unrelated to its chemical structure is recited.


CLS 349/FOR138
TXT Within smectic phase:

    Foreign Art Collection wherein the characteristic recited is that of a
    liquid crystal within the smectic mesophase.


CLS 349/FOR139
TXT Within cholesteric phase:

    Foreign Art Collection wherein the characteristic recited is that of a
    liquid crystal within the cholesteric mesophase.


CLS 349/FOR140
TXT Within nematic phase:

    Foreign Art Collection wherein the characteristic recited is that of a
    liquid crystal within the nematic mesophase.


CLS 349/FOR141
TXT Cell containing liquid crystal of specified composition:

    Foreign Art Collection wherein a liquid crystal material of particular
    chemical structure is incorporated in a cell of more than nominal
    structure.


CLS 349/FOR142
TXT In smectic phase:

    Foreign Art Collection wherein the liquid crystal has a layered structure
    with a well-defined interlayer spacing and in which the molecular long axes
    in a given layer are parallel.


CLS 349/FOR143
TXT In cholesteric phase:

    Foreign Art Collection wherein the enclosed liquid crystal material is in a
    mesophase having parallel molecular long axes within a given plane and
    having the additional characteristic that as one moves to successive planes
    in a direction perpendicular to the planes, the molecular long axes remain
    mutually parallel but rotate progressively about the direction of travel.


CLS 349/FOR144
TXT In nematic phase:

    Foreign Art Collection wherein the molecular long axes of the liquid
    crystal are substantially parallel throughout the substance with no
    additional structural constraints.


CLS 351/
TTL OPTICS:  EYE EXAMINING, VISION  TESTING AND CORRECTING

CLS 351/
TXT

    I.      DEFINITIONS OF TERMS USED:

    ANISEIKONIA

    The inequality in shape and size between the two ocular images seen in
    binocular vision.

    ASTIGMATISM

    Defect of vision caused by unequal curvature of the refracting surfaces of
    the eye.

    BINOCULAR COORDINATION

    Fusion of the sight responses of both eyes, or correct space perception.

    BRACE ARM

    A relatively long and slender temple supporting arm or arc substantially
    identical to the shape of the upper contour edge of a lens.

    BRIDGE

    The connecting part between the lens supporting members of spectacles or
    eyeglasses.

    CATARACT CORRECTION LENS

    A lens, usually with cylindrical correction, to optically compensate for
    diminution of vision or opacity of the lens of the eye.

    CHARTS

    A light reflecting or transmitting panel with symbols or pictures of
    varying size for testing the refraction of the eye.

    CHROMATICITY TEST

    Determination of the visual sensitivity or adaptation to color.

    ELEMENT

    Component part of an optical instrument unless otherwise indicated.

    EYEGLASSES

    Spectacles, pince-nez or other mountings with lenses to correct defects of
    vision of the human eye.

    EYE CONTACT LENSES

    Opthalmic lenses that fit over the cornea of the eye and which float on the
    tear of the eye or are held in place by the eyelids.

    FRAME

    Mechanical parts, not including lenses, which serve to surround or support
    or which serve to interconnect elements of the frame.

    INTERPUPILLARY DISTANCE

    The distance between the centers of rotation of a pair of human eyes.

    LENS

    Ophthalmic lens or transparent material in goggles unless otherwise
    indicated.

    LENS REPAIR DEVICES

    Structure embracing the broken portion of a lens by a metal or plastic
    strip so that the lens can be restored to the mounting.

    LIGHT POLARIZING LENSES

    Lenses comprising a polarizing element which reduces light losses due to
    reflection.

    MOUNTING

    A frame structure completely or partially surrounding a lens or utilizing a
    bridge and nose pads for supporting vision-aids in front of the eyes of a
    user.  This term is broader than "frame", in that it includes the pince-nez
    type.

    MULTIFOCAL LENSES

    Fused or onepiece lenses having areas of different refracting powers,
    usually one area part being intended for distant vision and the other for
    close work.

    MUSCULAR IMBALANCE

    Abnormal eye muscle functioning, tending the eyes to cross or diverge.

    OPTHALMIC LENSES

    Lenses usually mounted in spectacle frames, in eyeglass mountings or in
    trial frames having cylindrical, spherical or prismatic power for testing
    or correcting visual deficiencies of the eye.  These lenses cooperate with
    the refracting medium of the eye to form on the retina a clear image of the
    object viewed, or in strabismus to modify the imbalanced visual axis of the
    eye to make the eye gradually resume normal status to correctly superimpose
    deviated images. The lenses may be spherical (plus or minus) to correct for
    fairly simple defective near or far sightedness, or they may be cylindrical
    to correct for astigmatism, or they may be prismatic to correct for
    strabismus, or they may be any of these in combination.  The magnification
    or minification power of these lenses serves primarily to produce clear
    images on the retina of an eye with poor vision rather than to produce any
    telescopic, microscopic or pictorial effects.

    OPTICS, OPTICAL

    The science of light and vision and the construction of optical instruments.

    OPTICAL PATH

    Imaginary lines passing on the principal and secondary axes from the center
    of the retina to the object viewed.

    OPTOMETRY

    The art of investigating vision defects such as refraction and ocular
    muscle function-defects and correcting or aiding them by optical means such
    as opthalmic lenses, prisms, muscle training and other optical measures.

    PRISMATIC LENS

    A light-deflecting medium which diverges or converges the lightrays
    entering the eyes.

    RIM

    A grooved-optical element made from metal or plastic material for framing
    lenses.

    SPECTACLES

    Instruments for aiding vision consisting of lenses and supports therefor.

    STEREOSCOPIC VISION

    The ability to perceive distance and the three dimensional properties of a
    viewed object.

    TEMPLES

    The parts of a spectacle which are secured to the end of lenses or the
    frame and maintain the glasses on the user's head.

    TRIAL FRAME

    Adjustable lens holding frames for supporting lenses interchangeably during
    vision testing.

    VISION CORRECTING

    Remedying vision defects by means of sight correcting lenses, eye muscle
    training devices, etc.

    II.     GENERAL STATEMENT OF THE CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    A.      This class corresponds generally in subject matter to optometry,
    and includes eye examining and vision testing instruments.  These
    instruments must include some optical structure or they must operate in
    conjunction with the optical or vision path of the eye. Included also are
    these instruments combined with eye exercising and/or training devices.
    Included also are certain accessories such as test charts and/or targets
    which may involve projection, illuminators and supports which are peculiar
    to these instruments.  Included also are methods of operating or using
    these instruments and not generally classifiable.

    B.      Included also are spectacles and eyeglasses, which may include the
    frames or mountings, per se, or the frames or mountings with fitted
    opthalmic lenses.  Included also are spectacles and eyeglasses combined
    with other structural elements when not otherwise classifiable, such as
    spectacles combined with holders for microphotographs, telescopes or face
    protecting masks.

    C.      Included also are perfecting features with these spectacles and
    eyeglasses such as antiglare or light absorption, rear view reflectors,
    decorations moisture prevention or absorption, and supports or holders.
    Included also are parts of spectacles and eyeglasses when not otherwise
    classifiable, such as temples, bridges, connectors, lens linings or rims,
    and nose pads or cushions.

    D.      Included also are opthalmic lenses or blanks, including the
    eye-contact type. Included also are perfecting features in these lenses
    such as with light filtering or with protecting layers. Included also are
    methods of making the spectacles and eyeglasses and the opthalmic lenses.
    Included also are lens repair devices.

    III.    EYE EXAMINING AND TESTING INSTRUMENTS CLASSIFIED ELSEWHERE

    Eye testing instruments and such instruments combined with eye training
    devices are classified here as a residual home.  For eye treatment
    appliances and methods intended to aid in the diagnosis of diseased eyes or
    during surgical operations of the eye see Class 600, Surgery, subclasses
    398+.

    IV.     SPECTACLE AND EYE GLASS MOUNTINGS COMBINED WITH OTHER STRUCTURE

    This class provides for opthalmic lenses combined with the mountings or
    frames; and also provides residually for such mountings or frames, per se,
    even when the sole indicated use is to mount nonopthalmic lenses or other
    structure which may be nonoptical.  Examples of such nonopthalmic lenses
    are in telescopes, microscopes, and general magnifiers; and examples of
    this other structure are eye shades and goggle components (such as cups,
    masks, or shields), artificial body members, and electrical hearing aids.
    However, when these nonopthalmic lenses or other structures are claimed
    either broadly or specifically with the mounting, classification is not
    here, but in the class providing for the particular lens or other
    structure.  Class 359, Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and
    Elements, provides for opera glass holders in subclasses 409+, binocular
    loupes in subclass 481 and monocular loupes in subclass 816.  Class 2,
    Apparel, subclass 13, provides for spectacle attached eye shades,
    subclasses 426+ provides for goggles and their components such as eye cups
    and masks, and subclasses 10, 11, 12, and 15 provide for other eye shields.
    Class 381, Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 68+ provides for electric hearing aids in spectacle-type
    mountings.

    As between this class and Classes 2 and 623 the claiming of opthalmic
    structure in such example terms as "opthalmic lens", "correcting lens" and
    "astigmatic lens" is sufficient for classification in this Class 351
    regardless of any eye shielding or artificial body structure included.
    However, as between this Class 351 and Classes 381 and 359 the inclusion of
    opthalmic structure together with other structure, per se, classifiable in
    Classes 381 and 359 is not sufficient to classify in this Class 351.

    The term "lens" due to its wide use is not sufficient to control
    classification.  The combination of the lens broadly claimed together with
    the spectacle- type frame is classifiable in this Class 351 regardless of
    the indicated use of the lens.

    V.      GOGGLES

    Class 2, Apparel, subclasses 426+ provides for goggles, which may include
    frames similar to the opthalmic lens mountings as classified with
    spectacles, but which in addition, have some structure whose purpose is
    protection of the wearer from mechanical injury such as cups, masks,
    shields, or hoods.  When this goggle structure includes lenses or
    transparent elements with some optical limitation such as vision correcting
    or light intensity modifying opthalmic elements, curved, spherical or
    meniscus lenses, light filters or polarizing lenses, classification is with
    the spectacles in this Class 351.  However the broad recitation of a lens
    or transparent element is not sufficient to remove otherwise goggle
    structure from Class 2 to this Class 351.

    Goggles with no optical limitations but formed as spectacle lens mountings,
    but omitting any body protection structure, are classified in this Class
    351.  Where both the optical and body protecting structure are claimed
    classification is with the spectacles in this Class 351.

    VI.     LENSES

    Single lenses or lens combinations are classified in Class 359, Optics:
    Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses 642+ and are
    primarily used in the category of optical instruments such as cameras,
    binoculars, magnifiers, telescopes, microscopes and oculars, principally
    for the purpose of forming or projecting a real or virtual image or images.

    In contrast to the above lenses used in instruments the opthalmic lenses
    including contact lenses classified in this Class 351 act as vision
    correcting organs and are specially adapted for use in spectacles or
    eyeglasses for the purpose of producing a clear image in conjunction with
    the eye lens on the sensitive screen in the eye known as the retina.  For
    example, if the eye is myopic (near-sightedness) a negative lens is
    necessary to produce a proper image on the retina, and if the eye is
    hyperopic (far-sightedness) a positive lens is added to bring the light
    rays into correct focus on the retina.  If the eye is astigmatic a
    cylindrical lens is added.  These opthalmic lenses are essentially useful
    with the eye lens for aiding and correcting any visual defects of the eye
    lens.

    VII.    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, appropriate subclasses for goggles including eye shields,
    bridges, rims and fasteners as component parts thereof.  See section V
    above for the line between spectacles and goggles.

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 228 for an eyeglass hinge, per se.

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 265 for connectors and
    attaching devices useable between component parts of spectacle frames.

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 20 for machines and processes for making
    spectacle-frames, temples, bridge pieces etc.

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 200 for spectacle gauges such as
    used for measuring pupillary distances.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 36-39 for fusion bonding of lenses
    and reshaping of lens parts during bonding.

    70,     Locks, subclasses 229 and 230 for bolt or screw locking means as
    for preventing the loosening of screws which interconnect various frame
    parts or secure rimless lenses in the frame structure.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 5+ for cases or covers
    for eyeglasses and spectacles which may comprise hinged parts.

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 121+ for
    brackets, stands or uprights which may support ophthalmic test devices and
    which may have provisions to move an ophthalmic device relative to the
    support.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 299.01+ for liquid crystal-containing
    optical filter compositions, and subclasses 582+ for other optical filter
    compositions which change their light and visible solar radiations
    transmittance properties when exposed to emergy and for corresponding
    filters defined solely in terms of their composition with no claimed
    significant filter structure.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 51 and 54 for joints between
    members of ophthalmic mountings wherein the joint comprises a socket type
    or a ball and socket joint.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 291+ for
    illuminating means having electric current and/or voltage regulation.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    465 for light polarizing devices, as used in stereoscopic viewing,
    subclasses 642+ for lenses as used in photography, binoculars and
    telescopes; subclasses 409+ for opera glass holders; subclass 481 for
    binocular loupes; subclass 816 for monocular loupes, subclasses 880+ for
    mirrors mounted before the eye; and subclasses 350+ and 885+ for optical
    filters.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 103+ for spectacles combined with
    illumination means, and subclasses 109+ for ophthalmic instruments
    comprising illuminating devices.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclass
    68.5 for spectacles or ophthalmic mountings combined with electrical
    hearing aid devices.

    403,    Joints and Connections, for joints and connections of general
    application.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, subclasses 378+ for screws and bolts of general
    application; and subclasses 531+ for washers of general application.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 162+ for coating processes, per se,
    wherein the product is an electrical element.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 42+ for an ophthalmic lens abrading process
    and subclasses 57+ for an abrading process for plural distinct areas.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, subclasses 11+ for glass composition;
    especially subclasses 60+ for lead containing glass composition.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, for synthetic resins or
    natural rubbers, per se, or compositions containing same, and see in
    particular Class 523, subclasses 105+ for contact lens compositions and for
    certain other compositions containing a synthetic resin or natural rubbers
    designed to come into contact with living tissue.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 398+ and 558 for surgical devices used in the
    diagnosis of the eye generally and not involving conventional eye testing
    instruments, or for devices counteracting muscular eye imbalances, or for
    devices such as moving targets for exercising eye muscels.  See section III
    above for the line between the eye testing instruments of this Class 351
    and the surgical instruments of Class 128.


CLS 351/41
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including an ophthalmic element
    or elements such as a spherical or cylindrical lens, a filter, polarizing
    element, or prism interposed in the path of vision of one or both eyes for
    correcting vision defects or abnormalities or protecting the eyes from
    undesired rays together with structure for positioning or supporting these
    elements from or on the head of the user in correct operative position.

    (1)     Note.  The lenses of this subclass give usually a particular
    ophthalmic result in cooperation with the eye as opposed to lens systems
    such as used in cameras, microscopes or telescopes which may operate
    independently and without producing a corrective reaction in the eye or its
    element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227,    for trial frames.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 13 for spectacle attached shades, and subclasses
    426+ for goggle-type spectacles.  See the class definition for the line
    between spectacles as classified here and goggles as classified in Class 2.

    359,    Optics:  Systems  (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    465 for light polarizing devices as used in stereoscopic viewing,
    subclasses 466+ for stereoscopic viewers; subclasses 642+ for lenses as
    used in photography, binoculars and telescopes; subclasses 409+ for opera
    glass holders; subclass 481 for binocular loupes; subclass 816 for
    monocular loupes, and subclasses 350+ and 885+ for optical filters.


CLS 351/42
TXT Subject matter under subclass 41 limited to eyeglass repairing devices
    whereby a broken lens of a pair of eyeglasses may be temporarily repaired
    until a new lens is available, as for example a metal member or a
    transparent wafer strongly clamped onto or cemented to the broken lens
    parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177     and 178, for methods of making spectacle lenses and spectacles not
    otherwise classifiable.


CLS 351/43
TXT Subject matter under subclass 41, wherein a light-weight float is removable
    attached to a spectacle frame for recovering glasses accidentally dropped
    into the water, or wherein the spectacles are especially adapted for
    underwater use as to enable the human eye to accommodate for distortionless
    viewing of objects under water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for spectacles with moisture prevention as absorption.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 426+, and particularly 428+ and 440+ for
    goggles which protect the eyes from the water.


CLS 351/44
TXT Subject matter under subclass 41, including light absorbing lenses such as
    polarizing or colored lenses either framed or rimless, to shield the eyes
    of a wearer from the glare of the sun or from other undesirable or harmful
    light rays.

    (1)     Note.  For classification here the lenses need not have diopter
    characteristics, but only general light modifying characteristics such as
    light filtering, polarizing, or absorbing. See Class 359, subclasses 483+
    for polarizers, subclasses 601+ for optical elements and systems for
    reducing glare and subclasses 885+ for optical filters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 10-15 for eye shades and subclasses 426+ for
    goggles.  See section V of the Class Definition for the line between the
    subject matter classified here and in subclasses 426+ of Class 2.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, see (1)
    Note above.


CLS 351/45
TXT Subject matter under subclass 44, wherein antiglare spectacles are provided
    with lenses having combined a clear-glass section and a section or sections
    of different light absorption, the latter covering only a part of the field
    of sight, so that without imparting the general vision the eyes may be
    screened from an undesirable light source by a slight movement of the head.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for eye protection devices utilizing polarizing lenses.


CLS 351/46
TXT Subject matter under subclass 44, wherein antiglare spectacles comprise
    semitransparent or opaque plates having adjustable or fixed perforations or
    slits therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 433 for eye protecting goggles, which may include
    apertured opaque members, having no significant optical characteristics but
    being solely for providing mechanical eye protection.


CLS 351/47
TXT Subject matter under subclass 44, including colored or other antiglare
    filter screens removably or adjustably connected with spectacle frames of
    various styles or sizes.

    (1)     Note.  The filters or shades may be rimmed or rimless and they may
    cover portions of the glasses only or the entire glasses.  The filters or
    screens classified here are usually combined with the spectacles.  Subclass
    13 of Class 2 provides for eye shades, per se, which are attachable to
    spectacles. Semiopague or tinted transparancies which swing selectively
    between the shading and viewing position are classified in this subclasses
    47+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 13 for spectacle attached shades.  See also (1)
    Note above.


CLS 351/48
TXT Subject matter under subclass 47, wherein the filters or screens are
    securely mounted on or readily attached to spectacles by integral or
    bridge-type spring means which hold the light absorbing mediums in
    different operative positions desired by the wearer.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note under subclass 47 above.


CLS 351/49
TXT Subject matter under subclass 44, wherein variable density lenses or
    viewing screens comprise fixed or adjustable superimposed light polarizing
    bodies which may be adjusted to filter any amount of light from a
    predetermined maximum to a predetermined minimum.

    (1)     Note.  The above noted lenses with light polarizing characteristics
    may be rotatably mounted in one frame of the general shape of a
    conventional spectacle frame, or may be in a submounting held detachably
    adjacent and overlying lenses fixed in an ordinary spectacle frame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    465 for polarizing devices used in viewing stereoscopic pictures; and
    subclasses 483+ for polarizing devices generally.


CLS 351/50
TXT Subject matter under subclass 41 including one or more mirrors together
    with structure for supporting or attaching the mirror or mirrors on a part
    of the spectacle to provide rear vision for the spectacle wearer.

    (1)     Note.  For classification here the spectacle must be claimed
    broadly or specifically with the mirror.  For mirrors which are adapted for
    use with spectacles as by being supported thereon, or attached thereto, no
    spectacle structure being positively claimed, see Class 248, subclasses
    466+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 426+, and particularly 438 for goggles which
    may include rear vision mirrors.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 466+ for mirrors generally with supports.


CLS 351/51
TXT Subject matter under subclass 41, wherein a spectacle frame or its
    ophthalmic lens is ornamented with decorative attachments or inserts.

    (1)     Note.  The above noted ornamental attachments may be colored
    stripes, decorated plates, pendant jewels or imitations thereof, and may be
    placed on any selected portion of the spectacle frame or lens.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    for brace arm mountings with detachable brace arm.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    63,     Jewelry, subclasses 1.1 and 2, for combination articles and various
    jewelry articles.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 3 through 32
    for miscellaneous ornamented articles and subclass 67 for a element
    embedded in a substrate (e.g., spectacle frame) and visible.


CLS 351/52
TXT Subject matter under subclass 51, wherein the decorative devices are so
    attached to the various frame or lens parts as to be readily removable
    therefrom.


CLS 351/53
TXT Subject matter under subclass 41 is limited to spectacles peculiarly
    adapted for the aiming of firearms.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are "shooting" spectacles having screens with
    slots or diaphragms, discs with rotatably and movably arranged openings,
    adjustable aiming lenses or stenopaic disc apertures.


CLS 351/54
TXT Subject matter under subclass 41 wherein spectacles with multifocal lenses
    may be inverted or turned upside down as a unit, or in which the lenses,
    per se, may be revolved inside the frame so that bifocal segments may stand
    at the top or bottom of the lenses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    for reversible or axially rotatable temples.


CLS 351/55
TXT Subject matter under subclass 41, wherein the mounting is adjustable to
    permit vertical movement of multifocal lenses to selectively position the
    near and distance vision portions in the line of vision.

    (1)     Note.  The adjustment of the lenses may be made by changing the
    position of the nose pads on their supporting arms or by varying the
    distance between the pads by moving rotatable portions of the bridge to
    adjusted positions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for spectacles whose lenses are inverted by rotation.

    107,    for adjustable brace or mountings.

    137,    for adjustable nose pads or cushions.

    148,    for adjusting or slidable connectors.


CLS 351/56
TXT Subject matter under subclass 41, including an elongated handle attached to
    the frame for holding the glasses in the viewing position, the handle
    constituting the sole support for the glasses in this viewing position.

    (1)     Note.  The eyeglasses of this type are usually folding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63+,    for foldable spectacles and eyeglasses.

    155+,   for eyeglass supports or holders.


CLS 351/57
TXT Subject matter under subclass 41 wherein supplemental lenses or glasses
    without temples are movably attached to permanent reading or farsight main
    spectacles.

    (1)     Note.  The above noted supplemental glasses may comprise U-shape or
    half moon lenses below eye level.  They may be pivotable or magnetically
    attached to normal spectacles.  The subject matter does not include
    supplemental glasses attached to frames without permanent lenses.  See
    subclass 59 for this subject matter.  The lenses may be plain glass as for
    protecting purposes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44+,    for eyeglasses and spectacles with antiglare or shading structure.

    61,     for spectacles with U-shape or half-moon lenses below eye level.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    481 for binocular loupes and subclass 816 for monocular loupes.


CLS 351/58
TXT Subject matter under subclass 57 wherein the supplemental lenses or glasses
    are retained on the main eyeglasses by spring loaded clamping members or by
    circumferentially secured friction clips.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47+,    for clip-on antiglare or shading spectacles.


CLS 351/59
TXT Subject matter under subclass 41 wherein mounted or rimless lenses are
    movably connected to glassless spectacle frames or glassless support rods
    to swing from an operative position in the line of vision to an inoperative
    position above the eyes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57+,    for spectacles including lenses with additional lenses which pivot
    in and out of the optical path.

    60,     for spectacles whose lenses are mounted on or suspended from rods
    or bars, and which may be adjusted along the rod or bar.


CLS 351/60
TXT Subject matter under subclass 41 wherein rimless or rimmed lenses are
    suspended from or mounted on a usually rectilinear rod, or are suspended
    from or mounted on oppositely extending bars embodying nose engaging means.

    (1)     Note.  The lenses in the above structure may be adjustable in
    various spaced relations to each other.  The points of connection of the
    lenses and temples with the bar or rod are generally outside of the range
    of vision.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57+,    for spectacles with auxiliary lenses movable in and out of the
    optical path.

    107,    for brace-arm-type mountings with adjustable lenses.

    133+,   for bridges with connectors or straps.


CLS 351/61
TXT Subject matter under subclass 41 having lenses of narrow vertical dimension
    which lie well below the horizontal line of vision and provide unobstructed
    vision over the top of the lenses.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter is distinct from and does not include
    eyeglasses with conventional full size area or multifocal lenses.  The
    lenses here are of approximately one-half or one-third normal lens area and
    are without lenses at the top.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168+,   for multifocal lenses generally.


CLS 351/62
TXT Subject matter under subclass 41 wherein lens retaining rims are provided
    with moisture reducing and air-ventilating openings, or wherein a sweat or
    moisture absorbing cushion is mounted between the lens rims.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for floating or underwater spectacles.

    154,    for lens linings or rims.


CLS 351/63
TXT Subject matter under subclass 41 in which the frame of the spectacles
    (usually in the central part of the bridge or temple) may be folded or
    otherwise adjusted so that portions of the frame, usually the lens portions
    are superposed to lie one upon the other, but which are in the same plane
    and alignment when unfolded and opened for use.

    (1)     Note.  The temples in the above folding spectacles may each consist
    of two pivotally connected folding portions, or may be made of one short
    piece generally not longer than the spaced lens rims.  However, spectacles
    where the temples fold on their hinges to lie along the remaining frame
    structure is not provided for here but in the particular mounting
    subclasses below.


CLS 351/64
TXT Subject matter under subclass 63 limited to folding eyeglasses of the
    pince-nez-type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65+,    for pince-nez-type glasses generally.


CLS 351/65
TXT Subject matter under subclass 41 limited to eyeglasses which are provided
    with nose gripping means for supporting the lenses before the user's eyes.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter here is distinct from and does not
    include eyeglasses where the support is by temples bearing upon the ears or
    sides of the user's head.  See the indented subclass 66 for pince-nez-type
    glasses with a temple.

    (2)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses provide for bridges, nose
    grips, and nose pads which are intended for use with pince-nez eyeglasses
    as indicted for example by the pince-nez background of the patent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for folding pince-nez-type glasses.

    124+,   for bridges generlly, subclasses 131 and 132 for bridges with nose
    grips or guards; and subclass 132 for bridges with nose pads or cushions.

    136+,   for nose pads or cushions generally.


CLS 351/66
TXT Subject matter under subclass 65 wherein a temple or a chain with a hook is
    attached to the lens or rim, as for steadying the pince-nez in position or
    for preventing the glasses from falling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111+,   for temples generally.

    155+,   for spectacles generally with supports or holders.


CLS 351/67
TXT Subject matter under subclass 65 wherein rimless or rimmed lenses are
    connected by a bridge (usually spring) and by a supplemental bridge.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter here may provide proper adjustment of the
    tension of the spring bridge, may serve for setting the lenses at the
    correct pupillary distance, or may be used for shifting the lenses in a
    vertical plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for a pince-nez having a resiliently extensible bridge.

    124+,   for bridges generally.

    227,    for bridges in trial frames.


CLS 351/68
TXT Subject matter under subclass 65 wherein the lenses are connected by a
    bridge which may be extended in length against the biasing action of a
    spring as where the bridge comprises two arms sliding one beside or within
    the other together with an expandable spiral spring around the arms to
    force the lenses nearer together and the nose grips into contact with each
    side of the nose.

    (1)     Note.  The bridge may extend tangentially along the top edges,
    behind, or in the plane of the lenses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65,     for pince-nez eyeglasses with flexible bridges or bow springs as
    where the bridge itself is made from flexible material.


CLS 351/69
TXT Subject matter under subclass 65 including a resilient bridge or a bridge
    having resilient portions, the lenses being capable of swinging movement so
    that a separating motion of the nose grips is produced.

    (1)     Note.  The above noted spring-bridges may have loops arranged in
    front or in the rear of the lens planes whereby the elasticity of the
    bridge material produces pressure on the nose grip to retain the glasses in
    position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126+,   for flexible bridges generally.


CLS 351/70
TXT Devices under subclass 65 wherein the bridge or bow spring, the lens
    connectors or holders, and the nose guards have a common junction, as by
    being interconnected within a box by a screw or pin.

    (1)     Note.  In the embodiment here a fastener or locking device may be
    inserted or forced into the stud-box to prevent loosening or displacement
    of the frame members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140+,   for connectors generally.


CLS 351/71
TXT Subject matter under subclass 65 wherein the nose grips or guards are
    formed of resilient material or are combined with a spring to bias the
    guards with respect to the bridge to properly engage the nose and retain
    the glasses thereon.

    (1)     Note.  In the modification here the guards may be actuated by
    flexible portions in the bow springs, by coil springs interposed between
    lens mountings and the nose-engaging member, or by moving the lenses
    forwardly against the resiliency of a bridge portion.  However, for
    classification in this subclass the nose guards must be biased with respect
    to at least a portion of the bridge which remains rigid.  A mere bridge of
    resilient material and flexible over its length is not provided for here
    but in the generic subclass 65 above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for continuous rim mountings with adjustable nose guards.


CLS 351/72
TXT Subject matter under subclass 71 wherein the nose grips include two
    finger-engaging lever portions, both being biased as by helical or leaf
    springs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, for spring structures generally.


CLS 351/73
TXT Devices under subclass 72 wherein the grips are supported and/or biased by
    a strip of flat spiral or leaf-type spring.


CLS 351/74
TXT Devices under subclass 72 wherein pivoting nose grips are activated by
    springs mounted on the under side of the bridge.


CLS 351/75
TXT Devices under subclass 72 wherein the nose grips are actuated by springs
    which are retained and covered by a hollow cup or barrel.

    (1)     Note.  In the modification here the pivot and spring that actuate
    the guard lever may be mounted and contained within a recess cut away from
    a portion of the lens rim.


CLS 351/76
TXT Subject matter under subclass 65 wherein the nose grips or pads can be
    adjusted on their supports in one or more directions so as to fit any shape
    of nose.

    (1)     Note.  The subclass provides for adjustable nose grips or pads
    intended for use with pince-nez eyeglasses as indicated for example by the
    general pince-nez background in the patent. The above nose grips or pads
    are usually adjustable laterlly and longitudinally and may be secured in
    the selected position.  The modification here includes also nose grips or
    pads which are rockably connected to the support, or which are made from
    bendable or flexible material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for pince-nez eyeglasses with spring- biased nose guards, whose
    spring permits adjustment.

    88,     for adjustable nose guards incontinuous rim type lens mountings.

    137,    for adjustable or rockable nose pads or cushions generally.


CLS 351/77
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 wherein the nose grips or pads are
    connected with the pince-nez bridge or spring by ball-and-socket joints to
    cause the grips or pads to assume the proper and most suitable position
    relative to the nose.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140+,   for spectacle and eyeglass connectors generally.


CLS 351/78
TXT Subject matter under subclass 65 wherein resilient, soft or padded elements
    are attached to the metallic nose grips or guards which wear on the nose of
    a wearer to support pince-nez- type eyeglasses.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for nose pads or cushions intended
    for use with pince-nez eyeglasses as indicted for example by the general
    pince-nez  background in the patent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132,    for bridges combined with nose pads or cushions.

    136,    for nose pads or cushions generally.


CLS 351/79
TXT Subject matter under subclass 78 in which a supplemental pad or
    supplemental nose engaging portions are provided on the main bearing pad
    for increased gripping action.


CLS 351/80
TXT Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein the nose pads or the supporting
    guards are provided with means whereby the pads may be readily attached or
    detached for removal or replacement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    for detachable nose pads or cushions generally.


CLS 351/81
TXT Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein the exposed faces of the nose pads
    have depressions or grooves, or the pad surfaces are provided with
    serrations or corrugations to firmly secure the eyeglasses to the nose.


CLS 351/82
TXT Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein the nose contacting portion of the
    pad or bridge includes a tube or sac filled with a liquid or a filler of
    nonhardening material, or wherein nose pads or bridges have cups or shells
    to firmly grip the nose by suction.


CLS 351/83
TXT Subject matter under subclass 41 wherein undivided continuous metal or
    plastic lens surrounding rims are connected by a bridge and are provided
    with end pieces and hinges to pivotally connect temples with the rims.

    (1)     Note.  The above continuous lens rims are usually made from plastic
    base materials and are conventionally interconnected by an integral plastic
    bridge.  Included here are nonmetallic lens rims interconnected by a metal
    bridge which may be detachably secured to the rims.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154,    for lens linings and rims.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 426+, and particularly 439 holding rims in
    goggles.


CLS 351/84
TXT Subject matter under subclass 83 wherein multifocal lenses can be rotated
    in the lens rims around an axis perpendicular to the surface of the lenses
    so as to bring any desired power sector into the field of vision.

    (1)     Note.  Each lens may be revolved separately and independently of
    the other or the lenses may be simultaneously rotated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for rotatable mounts for polarized lens elements.


CLS 351/85
TXT Subject matter under subclass 83 wherein grooved lens holder rims are
    formed with slots in their upper portion through which lenses may be
    inserted or removed.

    (1)     Note.  The slots may be closed by pivoted arms after insertion of
    the lenses.  The lenses may be supported in a separate mounting which is
    removably inserted through the rim-slots into the grooves of the lens
    holders.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154,    for lens linings and rims.

    227,    for trial frames.


CLS 351/86
TXT Subject matter under subclass 83 wherein the rims have lens receiving
    grooves provided with means to frictionally engage the peripheral edge of a
    lens, or wherein a member projecting from the groove engages a notch in the
    lens to prevent inadvertent rotation of the lens.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     for lens-locking means in split rim mountings.

    227,    for trial frames.


CLS 351/87
TXT Subject matter under subclass 83 wherein the lens rims are provided with
    integrally connected nose guards or pads.

    (1)     Note.  The guards or pads may have a wire meshed fabric embedded
    therein or they may be slotted to receive the ends of bridge arms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76+     and 78+, for nose pads in pince-nez eyeglasses.

    136+,   for nose pads or cushions.


CLS 351/88
TXT Subject matter under subclass 83 wherein the nose pads are removably
    secured as by clamping action on portions of the rims or where the pads can
    be adjusted into any desired horizontal or longitudinal position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76+     and 80, for adjustable or removable nose pads in pince-nez glasses.

    137     and 138, for nose pads or cushions which are respectively
    adjustable and detachable.


CLS 351/89
TXT Subject matter under subclass 83 wherein symmetrically arranged brace bar
    temple supports follow substantially the upper contour shape of the lens
    rims.

    (1)     Note.  The arms may extend upwardly from the rims or may be set
    into a groove provided in the upper edge of the rims.  The brace arms
    however are distinct from the rims.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93,     for brace arms in split rim mountings.

    103+,   for brace arm or semirimless mountings.

    125,    for brow-bar-type bridges.


CLS 351/90
TXT Subject matter under subclass 41 wherein lens holding rims connected by a
    bridge are divided or separated at one point on their periphery.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the rims are split at their temporal sides and have
    endpieces or lugs which serve to lock the rim members around the lenses and
    also carry temple supporting hinges.  The above rims may be formed from
    metal or plastic material.  The rim-splits may be in line with, above or
    set at an angle to the center of the lenses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65+,    for split lens holding rims in pince-nez eyeglasses.

    154,    for lens linings and rims.


CLS 351/91
TXT Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein divided lens holding rims are
    provided with metallic or plastic top arms or brow pieces which may be
    interchangeably or permanently connected to the rims.

    (1)     Note.  The brow pieces or top arms are either single units fitted
    separately to the upper portion of each rim or may consist of a pair of top
    arms connected to each other at their inner portions by a bridge.  Nose
    pads may be integrally connected with, or may be adhesively secured to the
    top arm.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51+,    for spectacles with ornamentation or decoration.

    125,    for brow-bar-type bridges.

    131,    for nose grips integral with the bridge.


CLS 351/92
TXT Subject matter under subclass 91 wherein the lenses are retained within the
    mounting as by spring tension members, resilient clamping rims, hinged
    clasps or by hinged frame-portions acting as enclosures for the lens
    without the use of rivets, screws or other more conventional fastening
    devices, thereby making the lenses readily removable and interchangeable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     for connectors with clamping arms.

    106,    for screwless lens mountings in brace arm or semirimless spectacles.

    125,    for bridges with brow bars.

    133+,   for bridges with connectors or straps.

    229,    for lens supports in trial frames.


CLS 351/93
TXT Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein brace bars usually resilient are
    secured to and extend laterally along or above the top of divided rims.

    (1)     Note.  The brace bars carry lens rim support and/or temple-hinge
    means, and provide a wide range of adjustment to different facial
    requirements.  In this subclass the lens rims may have split ends at the
    nasal or at the temporal side thereof.  The split ends may be at the
    horizontal center line, or may be above the center line and above the
    useful field of vision.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89,     for brace bars in continuous rim mountings.

    103+,   for brace bar mountings generally.

    125,    for brow-bar-type bridges.


CLS 351/94
TXT Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein an auxiliary bridge member is
    detachably or rigidly attached to the primary bridge.

    (1)     Note.  The auxiliary bridge member may include pivotable or fixedly
    secured nose pad members, and may be made of any suitable material such as
    plastic or metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for auxiliary adjustable bridges.

    67,     for supplemental bridges in pince-nez eyeglasses.

    132,    for bridges with nose grips.


CLS 351/95
TXT Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein the size of the lens receiving
    opening of the rims can be expanded or contracted at the split-ends for
    properly securing different sizes of lenses in the rims.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83+,    for continuous rim mountings where the rim may be expandable and
    contractable.

    154,    for rims, per se.


CLS 351/96
TXT Subject matter under subclass 90 wherin a lens lock positioned between rim
    and lens or between the separable members of a split rim-joint projects
    into a notch or recess formed in the periphery of the lens.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86,     for lens-locking means in continuous rim mountings.

    149,    for connectors with interengaging projections and recesses.


CLS 351/97
TXT Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein the arms projecting from the
    divided protions of lens rims are drawn together by embracing U-type clamps
    or by pivoting toggle levers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    for connectors with clamping arms.


CLS 351/98
TXT Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein the lens rims are divided adjacent
    to the bridge at the nasal side of the rims, the temporal edges of the
    split rims being continuous and without the conventional rim connecting
    arms or studs.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are frames made from plastic material wherein
    the bridge is divided lengthwise to provide split lens rim portions.


CLS 351/99
TXT Subject matter under subclass 95 wherein the divided rims carry aligned end
    piece lugs provided with a lens rim clamping-screw and a temple retaining
    dowel remove from the clamping screw.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121,    for temples with connections.

    140,    for connectors.


CLS 351/100
TXT Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein the opposite end of a divided rim
    terminate in aligned lugs which are drawn together by a single screw which
    tightens the rim around the lens and also affords a pivot for a temple.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121,    for temples with connections.

    140,    for connectors.


CLS 351/101
TXT Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein nonmetallic divided lens rims are
    connected with the bridge on the nasal side and with temple hinge parts on
    the temporal side by short sections of metallic tubing surrounding the rims.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121,    for temples with connections.

    133,    for bridges with connectors or straps.

    154,    for linings and rims.


CLS 351/102
TXT Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein each lens frame is formed by an
    inner metallic rim combined with and covered by an outer nonmetallic rim.

    (1)     Note.  The combined rims are usually split at their temporal sides
    and the metallic rim carries rim locking and temple supporting means.
    However, each lens frame may comprise a split outside metallic rim combined
    with an inside continuous nonmetallic rim or vice versa, for resiliently
    and accurately mounting a lens in the frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154,    for linings and rims.


CLS 351/103
TXT Subject matter under subclass 41 wherein laterally extending and
    symmetrically arranged bars extend from the bridge to the temple connection
    or where such bars are disposed over the lenses to connect with the temples
    to leave a portion of each lens free or rimless.

    (1)     Note.  The brace arms may extend rearwardly or upwardly from the
    lenses and may be associated into one single element which is connected
    with the bridge.  For brace arms extending along the edge of the lens see
    subclass 109. For brace arms which support a lens at two spaced points see
    subclass 108. The brace arms are usually resilient.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89,     for brace arms in continuous rim mountings.

    125,    for brow-bar-type bridges.


CLS 351/104
TXT Subject matter under subclass 103 where the brace arms or semirims are made
    from nonmetallic material or from plastic material reinforced by metal
    embracing the upper contour edges of the lenses, and secure both the lenses
    and the temples rigidly to the rim sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for combined metal and plastic split rim mountings.

    108,    for brace arms supporting a lens at two spaced points.

    117     and 129, for reinforced temples and bridges respectively.


CLS 351/105
TXT Subject matter under subclass 103 wherein the mounting is made up as a unit
    of detachably interconnected members such as the brace arms, bridge and/or
    nose pad supports.

    (1)     Note.  The detachable mounting may comprise a central bridge member
    having brace arms and brackets attached thereto to detachably couple the
    bridge with its brace arms to conventional eyeglasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140+,   for connectors joining parts of spectacles.


CLS 351/106
TXT Subject matter under subclass 103 wherein the lenses are attached to the
    mounting as by channel-like straps clamping the nasal edges of the lenses
    or by small arms which engage the upper surface of the peripery of the
    lenses, but without the use of screws, rivets, or other fasteners extending
    through the lens.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149,    for connectors having a projection which engages a lens recess.

    152,    for connectors with clamping arms.


CLS 351/107
TXT Subject matter under subclass 103 wherein the brace arms may be readily
    adjusted to various positions to conform to the shape of the lenses or
    wherein each lens is individually adjustable relative to the brace arm.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for lenses vertically adjustable during use.

    148,    for strap-type connectors which permit adjustment of the lens.


CLS 351/108
TXT Subject matter under subclass 103 wherein hinged or fixed lens-straps or
    brackets are mounted on the brace arms and secure the lenses at two spaced
    points, or where the brace arms have a longitudinally extending portion
    bearing against the upper contour of the lenses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    for bridges with connectors or straps.

    142+,   for strap-type lens connectors.


CLS 351/109
TXT Subject matter under subclass 103 wherein relatively long and slender brace
    arms extend substantially along the upper contour edges of the lenses only
    and terminate in temple connections.

    (1)     Note.  Where the brace arm actually engages or bears against the
    edge of the lens, classification is not here, but in such subclasses as 89,
    93 and 108 above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    for bridges with brow bars.


CLS 351/110
TXT Subject matter under subclass 41 where the edges of the lens are free of
    any structure such as a rim around substantially all the perimeter.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the sole edge structure is the connections
    to the other frame structure such as bridge and/or temple.  The connections
    may be on opposite edges of the lens at the horizontal center line, or may
    be above the horizontal center line and above the useful field of vision.
    For classification here the complete spectacle combination must be claimed.
    That is the claims must include the bridge, lenses and temples.  For the
    combination of the temple and the lens see subclasses 111+.  For the
    combination of the bridge and one or both lenses see subclasses 124+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65+,    for pince-nez-type spectacles.

    103+,   for brace arm or semirimless mountings.


CLS 351/111
TXT Subject matter under subclass 41 including structure secured to the outer
    ends of the lenses or their frames and bearing upon the ears or sides of
    the user's head for maintaining the spectacle in desired position on the
    user.

    (1)     Note.  The above noted temples are made from metal or from a
    plastic, and may be straight or provided with a hook and bend at their free
    ends.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass provides for the combination of the temple and
    the rim or lens.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51+,    for temples with ornamentation.

    66,     for pince-nez glasses with single temple.

    89      and 93, for rim-type mountings with a brace arm temple support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclass
    68.5 for temple-pieces with concealed hearing-aids.


CLS 351/112
TXT Subject matter under subclass 111 wherein a resilient clip or clasp is
    integral with or otherwise attached to a temple piece for securing
    eyeglasses to an article of wearing apparel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155+,   for spectacles with support or holders generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 455+ for clasps
    generally.


CLS 351/113
TXT Subject matter under subclass 111 wherein the temples are biased by springs
    or by elastic metal members in addition to the usual temple structure
    either to yieldingly resist outward movement of the temple, or to engage
    the head of the wearer with yieldable pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for resilient or flexible temples.

    150+,   for connectors with resilient parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, for spring structures generally.


CLS 351/114
TXT Subject matter under subclass 111 wherein the temples are flexible
    throughout or are provided with flexible portions to yieldingly engage the
    side of the head or the ear of the wearer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for spring biased temples.


CLS 351/115
TXT Subject matter under subclass 111 wherein the temple can selectively be
    used as a right or left member in connection with the frame, or wherein the
    temple may be rotated about its straight portion as an axis, or wherein the
    temple may be swung to opposite sides of the frame.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are temples with pivots permitting the temples
    to swivel on the front frame part so that when folded one of the temples
    lies in front and the other temple behind the lenses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 52+ for articulated joints in
    general.


CLS 351/116
TXT Subject matter under subclass 111 wherein the temple is attached to the
    remaining spectacle structure for ready attachment or removal therefrom as
    by a hook or ring, or by a snapping or pressing action as distinct from the
    usual screw attachment; or wherein the greater part of the temple may be
    readily attached or removed from the remaining part which is more
    permanently attached to the other spectacle structure.


CLS 351/117
TXT Subject matter under subclass 111 wherein the temple is made from plastic
    or composition material and is reinforced by a metallic core extending
    throughout or through the major part of its length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for methods of making temples.

    129,    for reinforced bridges.


CLS 351/118
TXT Subject matter under subclass 111 wherein two telescopically arranged
    temple sections are selectively adjustable together with means for holding
    the sections in relative longitudinally adjusted positions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for spring-biased extensible temples.

    119,    for two part temples generally.

    227,    for adjustable temples in trial frames.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 83+ for articulated connections
    lockable at a fixed position in general, particularly subclass 109 for such
    connections between telescoping members.


CLS 351/119
TXT Subject matter under subclass 111 wherein the temple is composed of two end
    to end interengaging parts securely held against disconnection.

    (1)     Note.  The above noted temples may comprise combine metallic and
    nonmetallic parts or may be formed of plastic material only.  Often one
    part constitutes the ear piece, and the other the straight member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118,    for extensible temples.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing  Systems and Devices, subclasses
    68+ for hearing-aid temple members consisting of a rear portion, a forward
    portion and an extension member.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for joints and
    connections of general application.


CLS 351/120
TXT Subject matter under subclass 111 wherein the temples are inclined with
    respect to the plane of the lenses, thereby positioning the lens frame or
    the lenses at an obtuse angle to the temples when rearwardly extended.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    for reversible or axially rotatable temples.


CLS 351/121
TXT Subject matter under subclass 111 wherein the temple includes a connection
    such as a hinge which connects the temple to the lens or frame.

    (1)     Note.  This connector may comprise spring loaded hinges or
    angularly and lengthwise adjustable hinges. Spectacle hinges are
    classifiable, per se, in Class 16, Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 228,
    and Class 403, Joints and Connections, subclasses 52+, even when the claim
    indicates the hinge is to be used with or in spectacles.  However, the
    recitation of specific temple features in combination with the hinge is
    sufficient for classification in this subclass 121.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89      and 103+, for brace-arm-type temple connections.

    99      and 100, for coincident and spaced rim clamp and pivot temple
    hinges respectively.

    153,    for connectors with hinges.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 448+ for hinges in goggles.

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 228 for related hinge-structure,
    per se.  See (1) Note above.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 52+ for related hinged rod
    joints.  See also (1) Note above.


CLS 351/122
TXT Subject matter under subclass 111 wherein the earpiece of the temple is
    covered with nonmetallic material to prevent irritating the skin of a
    wearer.

    (1)     Note.  The above noted covering may be produced by dipping the
    temple core in an appropriate solution or by providing a flexible
    nonmetallic cover around the earpiece.


CLS 351/123
TXT Subject matter under subclass 111 wherein the temples are provided with
    slidable or fixed attachments which contact the wearer's head or ear to
    hold the spectacles firmly in place.

    (1)     Note.  The above noted temple attachments may comprise cushions,
    pads, springs or suction cups.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    for temples with skin protecting covers.


CLS 351/124
TXT Subject matter under subclass 41 limited to structure which interconnects
    the rimmed or rimless lenses of spectacles and extends across the nose of a
    user.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter here does not include resilient bridges
    as used in pince-nez mountings.  See subclasses 64 and 65+ above for such
    subject matter. This subclass provides for the combination of the bridge
    and the rim or lens, or the bridge with both rims or both lenses unless
    provided for above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65+,    for bridges in pince-nez-type glasses, and especially subclasses 65
    and 67.

    227,    for bridges in trial frames.


CLS 351/125
TXT Subject matter under subclass 124 wherein the bridge is in the shape of a
    cross bar generally extending from the upper edge of one lens holding means
    to the upper edge of the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for spectacles with lens suspension bars.

    68,     for pince-nez glasses with resilient brace-type bridge.

    103+,   for brace-arm type mountings.

    227,    for brow bar bridges in trial frames.


CLS 351/126
TXT Subject matter under subclass 124 wherein the bridge joining the lens
    holding members is made from resilient metal or includes flexible portions.

    (1)     Note.  The above modification includes coil springs interposed
    between the lenses or lens mountings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65,     for pince-nez glasses with flexible bridges.

    156,    for head-band type spectacles.


CLS 351/127
TXT Subject matter under subclass 126 wherein the bridge connecting the lens
    holding rims is formed of a plurality of flexible hollow ball or link-chain
    members.

    (1)     Note.  These bridges may be readily removable from the lens rims,
    and may be adjustable to produce the required distance between the lenses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140+,   for connectors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 445+ for ball or chain type bridges in goggles.


CLS 351/128
TXT Subject matter under subclass 124 wherein the bridge is adjustable as to
    pupillary distance between the lenses, and/or to the facial characteristics
    of the wearer.

    (1)     Note.  The bridges may comprise a tubular member and a second
    member selectively insertable therein, or the bridges may be deformable in
    order to position the lenses properly before the eyes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64      and 65+, for adjustable bridges in pince-nez glasses.

    126+,   for flexible bridges.

    227,    for bridges in trial frames.


CLS 351/129
TXT Subject matter under subclass 124 wherein the bridge has a reinforcing
    metal core embedded inside, or disposed on the inner or outer face of the
    bridge.

    (1)     Note.  The reinforcement may be in the form of a straight piece of
    wire or may be curved to conform to the curve of the bridge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for reinforced temples.


CLS 351/130
TXT Subject matter under subclass 124 wherein the usual bridge is supplemented
    by an auxiliary universally adaptable nose engaging attachment.

    (1)     Note.  The above attachment may be in the form of a brace, a clip
    or an auxiliary nosepiece.


CLS 351/131
TXT Subject matter under subclass 124 wherein the bridge is integrally
    connected with a nose grip or guard.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87,     for continuous rim mountings with nose guards or pads integral with
    the frame.


CLS 351/132
TXT Subject matter under subclass 124 including significant nose grip, nose
    guard, pad or cushion structure with a bridge or wherein a significant
    relationship exists between this structure and the bridge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131,    for nose grips or guards integral with the bridge.

    136+,   for nose pads or cushions.


CLS 351/133
TXT Subject matter under subclass 124 wherein the bridge has lens or lens-rim
    supporting means laterally extending from the ends of the bridge.

    (1)     Note.  In the embodiment here the bridge may be detachable from the
    lens supports, or may be interconnected with supports having ball-sockets,
    segmental attaching plates or spring arms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140+,   for connectors joining a bridge to the lens or rim.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for joints and
    connections generally, especially subclasses 52+ for articulated
    connections.


CLS 351/134
TXT Subject matter under subclass 133 wherein the bridge and lens straps are
    made of an integral piece of metal, or wherein the ends of the bridge and
    the lens straps are soldered or welded together.


CLS 351/135
TXT Subject matter under subclass 133 wherein the bridge has lens clamping
    members which usually secure the lenses without screw fasteners and lens
    perforations.

    (1)     Note.  The above bridge-clamps may use a cementitious medium to
    secure the lens in the clamping member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144,    for lens straps with cementing or fusing.

    149,    for lens straps having projections to engage the lens.

    152,    for lens straps with clamping arms.


CLS 351/136
TXT Subject matter under subclass 41 including pads or cushions which rest
    against the nose of the wearer and thereby prevent contact between the
    pad-supports and the nose.

    (1)     Note.  The above noted pads or cushions may be integral with the
    bridge or lens rims or may be carried on the nose grip arms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78+,    for nose pads in pince-nez-type glasses, or intended for use with
    pince-nez glasses.

    132,    for spectacle bridges including nose pads or cushions.


CLS 351/137
TXT Subject matter under subclass 136 wherein the nose pads or cushions are
    movably mounted to have proper play or rocking movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for continuous rim mountings with adjustable nose pads.

    126+    and 128, for flexible and adjustable bridges respectively.

    148,    for adjustable strap-type connectors.


CLS 351/138
TXT Subject matter under subclass 136 wherein the nose pad may be readily
    attached or detached from its support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     for detachable nose pads in pince-nez glasses.

    88,     for continuous rim mountings with detachable nose pads.


CLS 351/139
TXT Subject matter under subclass 136 wherein the nose pads and/or its support
    has a covering tightly adherent thereto or a coating, which may be
    relatively noncorrosive.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for temples with covered cores or rods.


CLS 351/140
TXT Subject matter under subclass 41 for joining parts of spectacles or
    eyeglasses together such as the bridge to the lens or rim, the nosepiece to
    the rim or lens, or the temple to the rim or lens.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter is restricted to the connector or the
    connector with conventional spectacle parts broadly claimed.  Where details
    of other spectacle parts are recited classification is in the subclasses
    above; however, a lens claimed broadly or in detail together with
    connectors or mountings is classified here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133+,   for bridges with connectors to the nose grips in pince-nez glasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, for pipe couplings generally.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for joints and
    connections in general.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, appropriate subclasses for various fasteners of
    general utility.


CLS 351/141
TXT Subject matter under subclass 140 wherein screw or bolt-locking means are
    provided to prevent loosening of the connecting screw or bolt.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter classified here may comprise conical
    nuts, springs, washers, and fusible or other locking means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121,    for temple with connections or mountings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclasses 229+ for bolt, nut stud, stud-cap, and subclass
    230 for such elements stationary locked.


CLS 351/142
TXT Subject matter under subclass 140 wherein the lens securing device
    comprised a strap with spaced ears or arms for engaging the lens
    therebetween.

    (1)     Note.  The above noted lens-securing devices are usually provided
    in rimless-type spectacles and pince-nez glasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64      and 65+, for pince-nez-type eyeglasses.

    110,    for rimless lens-type mountings.


CLS 351/143
TXT Subject matter under subclass 142 in which the straps are equipped with
    reinforcing braces, supplemental lens gripping ears or rigid pins to
    securely embrace or clamp the lens.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for bridges with nose guards and connectors in pince-nez glasses.


CLS 351/144
TXT Subject matter under subclass 142 wherein the strap and the lens are
    securely locked in assembled relation by the application of cement, solder
    or any other suitable bonding material between lens and strap-members.

    (1)     Note.  The above noted strap and lens connecting means may be used
    to secure the bridge strap or the temple strap to the lenses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65+     and 110, for pince-nez-type mountings and rimless-type spectacles
    respectively.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, especially
    subclasses 60-303 and 349-583.91 for surface bonding generally.


CLS 351/145
TXT Subject matter under subclass 142 wherein resilient cushioning material is
    provided between the strap members and the lens and around the connecting
    screw or bolt.

    (1)     Note.  The cushioning material here may be made of rubber,
    cardboard, fiber or plastic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151,    for strap connectors with springs between the lens and the strap.


CLS 351/146
TXT Subject matter under suclass 145 wherein the cushioning material
    constitutes a preformed bushing or sleeve which is pressed into the
    fastening hole of a lens or into the screw holes in the strap arms to
    prevent any play between the mounting and the lens.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for rimless lens-type mountings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven,  Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, subclasses 531+ for washers of general utility.


CLS 351/147
TXT Subject matter under subclass 142 wherein strap arms and screw heads are
    provided with serrations for interlocking engagement to prevent loosening
    of the interlocked members.


CLS 351/148
TXT Subject matter under subclass 142 wherein the lens strap connectors are
    adjustable to permit changing the position of the lens vertically or
    horizontally with reference to the eye, or to permit insertion of lenses of
    different shape or dimensions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for pince-nez-type mountings in which the lens and nose guard pivot
    on the bridge.

    128,    for adjustable bridges.

    153,    for connectors with particular hinges.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 265 for
    strap-end-attaching devices generally.


CLS 351/149
TXT Subject matter under subclass 142 including a stud or projection on the
    strap or lens engaging in a slot recess or indentation in the other.

    (1)     Note.  Parts of the above noted mounting strap may engage with a
    plurality of slots arranged in the lens at angle to each other, or the
    strap may engage a lens-slot of varying width for securing the lens.


CLS 351/150
TXT Subject matter under subclass 142 including clamps or brackets for
    yieldably attaching lenses to ophthalmic mountings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for bridges with clamping members.

    106,    for screwless-type lens connections in semirimless mountings.


CLS 351/151
TXT Subject matter under subclass 150 wherein resilient metal elements, such as
    leaf springs, are interposed between the strap member and the adjacent edge
    of the lens to maintain the connection between the lens and the strap
    flexibly but firmly in proper relation.

    (1)     Note.  These springs are usually provided in rimless-type
    spectacles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for rimless lens-type mountings.

    145+,   for strap connectors with a cushion around the lens screw or bolt.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, for spring structures generally.


CLS 351/152
TXT Subject matter under subclass 142 wherein strap-type lens connectors
    comprise metal clamps for gripping the surface of a rimless lens without
    employment of the usual fastening screw.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103+,   for semirim-type mountings.

    110,    for rimless lens-type mountings.

    149,    for strap-type connectors with    interengaging projections and
    recesses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 265 for
    strap-end-attaching devices generally.


CLS 351/153
TXT Subject matter under subclass 140 wherein significant hinge details or
    relationships are claimed, such as the connector between a plastic temple
    and eyeglass rim comprising a metallic hinge member anchored in a slot or
    groove of the temple and/or the rim.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121,    for temples with connectors or straps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 228 for eyeglass hinge structure,
    per se.


CLS 351/154
TXT Subject matter under subclass 41 including linings for interposition
    between the edge of a lens and the rim of a frame or for application around
    lenses in rimless spectacles or eyeglasses; also included here are rims
    placed around the periphery of lenses to position the axes of cylindrical
    or prismatic lenses properly.

    (1)     Note.  The above noted linings or rims may be made from rubber
    resilient metal or glass and may be transparent or colored.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51+,    for spectacles with ornamentation.

    86,     for spectacles with lens retaining or locking means.

    102,    for spectacles with combined metal and plastic rims.


CLS 351/155
TXT Subject matter under subclass 41 including structure in addition to the
    spectacle or eyeglass structure for supporting the spectacles or eyeglasses
    during use, or out of vision position.

    (1)     Note.  For classification here the spectacles must be at least
    broadly included in the claim; or the support if claimed alone must be
    peculiarly adapted for holding spectacle or eyeglasses.  Since a basic
    function of the spectacles is to support the lenses on the user, it is
    emphasized that the supports here classified are something in addition to
    the normal spectacle frames as classified above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for floating-type spectacles,

    57,     for spectacles with auxiliary lens attachment.

    66,     for pince-nez glasses with ear chains.

    112,    for temples with a pocket clip or clasp.

    227,    for trial frames.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses .5+ for spectacle cases.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 200+ for brackets generally.


CLS 351/156
TXT Subject matter under subclass 155 wherein spectacles are without the usual
    temples but comprise a strap or chain which embraces the head of a wearer
    to support and retain the glasses without irritating the nose or ears.

    (1)     Note.  The above straps or chains carry usually means for adjusting
    the glasses manually, e.g., up., down, or farther apart for the correct
    pupillar distance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157,    for neck retainers.

    227,    for trial frame structures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 452 for goggles which often include similar
    supporting structure.


CLS 351/157
TXT Subject matter under subclass 155 wherein spectacles have a holder or band
    usually connected to the temples and encircling the head or neck of a
    wearer to retain and support the spectacles when removed from their
    operative position.

    (1)     Note.  The above holders are usually adjustable longitudinally of
    the temples and are removably secured in a selected poisition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclass
    68.7 for supports for hearing aid devices.


CLS 351/158
TXT Subject matter under subclass 41 wherein the spectacles or eyeglasses are
    combined with additional structure, which may or may not be optical, and
    not provided for elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44+,    for spectacles with anti-glare or shading.

    50,     for spectacles with rear-view reflectors.

    51+,    for spectacles with decoration.

    155,    for spectacles with supports or holders.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    409+, 481, and 816 for telescopes and magnifiers with spectacle-type
    mounting.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 103+ for combined light and spectacle
    structure, and for body attached light supports.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclass
    68.5 for eyeglass hearing aid units.

    607,    Surgery: Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses
    139+ for spectacles with structure making electrical applications to the
    head.


CLS 351/159
TXT Subject matter under subclass 41 is limited to lenses with specific optical
    characteristics for use in spectacles or eyeglasses, said lenses having
    surfaces of spherical, cylindrical or toric curvatures for aiding vision or
    for correcting focal errors of the eye.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter here is distinct from and does not
    include multiple component or compound lens systems designed for example
    for taking and exhibiting pictures or for use in binoculars, telescopes,
    and microscopes.  See Class 359, Optics:  Systems (Including Communication)
    and Elements, subclasses 362+ and 642+ for this subject matter generally.

    (2)     Note.  The indented subclass 177 includes processes of making
    ophthalmic lenses as defined above and methods of uniting optical elements
    to form multifocal lenses wherein steps of grinding or finishing subsequent
    to uniting are included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41+,    for spectacles including lenses as above defined.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 426+ for goggles; and subclasses 12+ for eye
    shades.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    362+ for compound lens systems generally.  See also (1) Note above.


CLS 351/160
TXT Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein the lenses are peculiarly adapted
    to be placed directly in contact with the eyeball and to move with the
    eyeball.

    (1)     Note.  The contact lens may comprise ventilating or lubricating
    channels or ducts to obtain free circulation of lacrimal fluid.  The
    subject matter here may be a compound lens system in which one element is a
    contact lens worn on the eye and the other element is mounted in front of
    the eye in the manner of the conventional spectacle lens.  The contact lens
    may comprise a skirt conforming to the conjunctival sac of the eye, said
    skirt carrying a lens disposed in front of but in spaced relation to the
    cornea.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247,    for methods of fitting contact lenses and instruments for such use.


CLS 351/161
TXT Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein the contact lens comprises two
    zones of different focal length, one zone to correct the distance vision
    and another zone to correct the reading vision.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168,    for multifocal lenses generally.


CLS 351/162
TXT Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein the contact lens, or a portion
    thereof is colored to absorb part of the visible spectrum or to change the
    color of the iris in the eye.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163+,   for lenses generally with light filtering means.


CLS 351/163
TXT Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein the lenses have the property of
    absorption of rays in portions of the visible or invisible spectrum, or are
    combined with additional structure having this property.

    (1)     Note.  For classification here an ophthalmic lens must be included
    in the claims specifically or broadly if the disclosure relates to such a
    lens. Light filters, per se, which may be used with spectacle lenses are
    classified in Class 359, Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and
    Elements, subclasses 885+.  These lenses may be polarizing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for spectacles with antiglare or shading.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    483+ for light polarizers and subclasses 885+ for optical filters.  See
    also (1) Note above.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, subclasses 60+ for lead containing glass
    compositions.


CLS 351/164
TXT Subject matter under subclass 163 wherein multifocal lenses absorb certain
    portions of rays in the visible or invisible spectrum, or are combined with
    additional structure having such an absorption property.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168,    for multifocal lenses generally.


CLS 351/165
TXT Subject matter under subclass 163 wherein the lenses have vision areas of
    different light abosorptive qualities which may differ in density and/or in
    frequency (e.g., clear or slightly tinted central glass portions and deeply
    colored surrounding areas).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177,    for methods of superposing a clear glass-disk and a glass-disk
    having its color graduating in strength.


CLS 351/166
TXT Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein one or both surfaces of a lens
    are covered with a layer or layers and impact resisting, transparent and
    hardened material; or wherein the lens comprises a pair of glass elements
    and an intermediate resilient reinforcing adhesive securing these elements
    together.


CLS 351/167
TXT Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein the lens is specially adapted to
    use after the operation for cataract and corrects by being very powerful.

    (1)     Note.  The lens is usually composite comprising a double convex and
    a concavo-convex lens secured together, or the lens may comprise a
    lenticular support or border portion in which a strong vision lens is
    mounted.  The above lens may be unifocal or may comprise lens elements of
    different refractive indices as to provide a long vision and a reading
    section, the diopter range usually being between 10 and 18.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160,    for cateract-correcting combinations of contact lenses and
    spectacle glasses.


CLS 351/168
TXT Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein the ophthalmic lens has at least
    two vision fields of different focal strength.

    (1)     Note.  The different focal strength may be produced by using
    material of different refractive indices or different curvatures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161,    for multifocal eye contact-type lenses.

    164,    for multifocal lenses with light filtering.


CLS 351/169
TXT Subject matter under subclass 168 wherein the multifocal lens has areas
    gradually changing in dioptric power.

    (1)     Note.  The lens may have countersink and a segment with different
    indices of refraction fused therein, or may be formed from one piece or
    material by providing a continuously varying radius of curvature.


CLS 351/170
TXT Subject matter under subclass 168 wherein one of the multifocal lens
    elements has a specific prismatic correction whose prism base is located
    relative to the optical center of the distance and/or intermediate vision
    lens sections to give the desired correction.

    (1)     Note.  The lens section with prismatic correction may be in the
    form of a segment fused into a lens countersink or the prismatic correction
    may be formed by grinding a desired area of a multifocal lens made of one
    piece of material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175,    for prismatic-type ophthalmic lenses generally.


CLS 351/171
TXT Subject matter under subclass 168 wherein multifocal lenses have portions
    of three or more focal powers respectively, for example, for near,
    intermediate and far vision.

    (1)     Note.  The above noted lenses may have countersinks and segments of
    different refractive powers fused therein, or the lenses may be formed of
    one piece of glass and by grinding away the near vision and intermediate
    vision portions.  The countersinks and segments as well as the ground-away
    lens portions in the one piece lenses may be of different dimensions and
    shapes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172,    for multifocal lenses with long vision and reading sections having
    joined lens elements, and 168 for such lenses made from a single piece of
    glass.


CLS 351/172
TXT Subject matter under subclass 168 wherein multiple lens elements of
    different refractive indices have their adjacent surfaces joined together
    to provide a unitary multifocal lens that has, for example, a long vision
    and a reading section.

    (1)     Note.  The modification here comprises for example a major glass
    member having a shallow countersink and a relatively thin segment fused
    therein, a thin reading segment fused to a major glass surface, or the lens
    members may be held in place by usual frame pieces. The countersinks and
    segments may be of different dimensions and shapes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168,    for multifocal lenses may from a single piece of glass; and 171,
    for multiple element lenses with three or more foci.


CLS 351/173
TXT Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein one surface of a lens is shaped
    so as to give a prescribed image-size correction (magnification) without
    refractive power.

    (1)     Note.  The modification here may comprise the addition of
    refractive power by suitably grinding the second surface of the lens.  This
    subclass also provides for two lenses (one for each eye), one or both or
    which may be within the scope of the above definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160,    for combinations of contact lenses and spectacle glasses.


CLS 351/174
TXT Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein the edge of the lens is polished,
    beveled or otherwise modified for protecting or reinforcing the lens for
    example.

    (1)     Note.  The modification here is integral with the lens.  Subclass
    154 above provides for linings and rims separate from the lens.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154,    for lens linings and rims.  See also (1) Note above.

    166,    for lenses with protective layers.


CLS 351/175
TXT Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein the lens is formed with a wedge
    or tapered cross section to deflect, for example, the light path from the
    object to the eye, or to correct strabismus or eye deviation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170,    for multifocal lenses with prismatic  segments.

    203,    for eye exercising and training devices.


CLS 351/176
TXT Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein one of the lens surfaces has a
    spherical curvature providing dioptrics or lens powers for correction of
    focal errors of the eye and/or wherein one lens curvature may be in
    cylindrical or toric form to compensate for astigmatic errors of the eye.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   for eye testing instruments with cylindrical lens systems.


CLS 351/177
TXT Subject matter under subclass 159 including processes of making ophthalmic
    lenses as there defined and not otherwise classifiable.

    (1)     Note.  Class 451 provides for grinding or polishing a lens; Class
    65 provides for fusion bonding of glass lenses; while Class 156 provides
    for adhesive bonding of such lenses.  The patents classified in this
    subclass 177 usually claim combinations of these methods, which are beyond
    the scope of any one of the above classes.  See also the reference to these
    classes below.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes processes for forming contact lenses
    adapted to be in contact with the eyeball, as opposed to the fitting of
    contact lenses to the eye which are classified in subclass 40 above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247,    for contact lens fitting.  See also (2) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 36+ for fusion bonding of glass.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    99+ for optically transparent glass sandwich making.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 162+ for coating processes, per se,
    wherein the product is an electrical element.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 42+ for a lens abrading process and subclass
    57 for such a process involving distinct abrading areas or steps.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, subclasses 11+ for glass composition; and
    especially subclasses 40+ for lead containing glass.


CLS 351/178
TXT Subject matter under subclass 41 including processes of making spectacles
    and eyeglasses, securing an eyeglass lens to its support, or of assembling
    lenses in spectacle frames.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for lens-repair devices.

    177,    for methods of making ophthalmic   lenses.

    246,    for methods of operating or using eye testing instruments.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 20 for machines and processes for making
    spectacle frames, temples and bridges.


CLS 351/200
TXT EYE EXAMINING OR TESTING INSTRUMENT:
    Subject matter under the class definition including ophthalmic instruments,
    optical systems and methods for testing vision, for optical examination and
    diagnosis (and treatment) with respect to disease and irregularities of the
    eye, and for ascertaining lenses for correcting errors of refraction or
    other defects of the eye.

    (1)     Note.  The instruments may comprise supporting bases corneal
    microscopes, slit lamps and other eye illuminating means, adjustable head
    or chin resting devices, and illuminable targets.  The instruments here are
    concerned with for example the measuring and testing of the vision
    characteristics of the eye for the purpose of correcting any determined
    visual defects.  These instruments are associated with the visual path of
    the eye either for viewing the interior of the eye through the visual path
    or by utilizing the visual path during the measurement or test.

            Instruments especially for examining or diagnosing the eye which do
    not involve its visual path are classified here, if they are essentially
    optical.  However, instruments for treating the eye, or for examining the
    eye when not optical and not associated with the visual path are
    classifiable elsewhere.  For example, Class 600, Surgery, subclasses 398+
    for Tonometry, Class 351, subclasses 41+ for spectacles and eyeglasses and
    Class 601, Surgery:  Kinesitherapy subclass 37 for eye exercising devices.
    Multipurpose instruments which measure or test within the scope of this
    subclass, but also perform some nonoptical eye test not associated with the
    visual path or perform some treatment of the eye are classifiable here,
    especially in the indented subclass 203.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41+,    for spectacles and eyeglasses.

    205+,   for objective eye testing (e.g., ophthalmoscope and retinoscopes).

    211+,   for projected target image.

    222+,   for subjective eye testing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    368+ for microscopes, generally.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 300+ for diagnostic instruments generally.

    606,    Surgery, subclass 204.25 for eye exercising devices which make
    physical contact with the eye.  See also (1) Note above.


CLS 351/201
TXT For fusion and space perception testing (e.g., stereoscopic vision):

    Subject matter under subclass 200 including instruments used for testing
    simultaneous binocular vision for determining space perception and
    determining the condition of prismatic imbalance, both vertically and
    laterally, of a pair of eyes.

    (1)     Note.  The above instruments may polarize the light in crossed
    planes coming from the different portions of a target, or may present pairs
    of half stereograms to the respective eyes, or may present a plurality of
    independently movable targets so that the correct optical positions for
    true image convergence or true stereopsis are obtained.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 300+ for diagnostic apparatus.


CLS 351/202
TXT Of abnormal muscular functioning:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 relates to apparatus for detecting the
    state of extrinsic ocular muscles and for determining the amount of
    imbalance or insufficiency thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Spaced apart target means in conjunction with binocular
    polarizing viewers may be utilized in the above apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232,    for subjective eye testing with light polarizing lens.


CLS 351/203
TXT Eye exercising or training type:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 including multipurpose instruments, which
    serve to examine and test the eye to rectify defective vision, and which
    may be used to subject the eyes to a controlled muscle strain period or
    flashed illumintion for training and exercising purposes.

    (1)     Note.  The above instruments may comprise prismatic lenses of
    adjustable power, stereoscopic devices, or movable test objects for
    exercising ocular muscles.


CLS 351/204
TXT For interpupillary distance measuring or lens positioning:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 including instruments for ascertaining
    the accurate distance between the pupils of a patient's eyes so that
    spectacle frames and/or eyeglass lenses will be properly related to the
    pupils.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are instruments to accurately determine the
    best size and vision field placement of multifocal segments.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 200 for spectacle gauges.


CLS 351/205
TXT Objective type:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 including instruments for examining the
    eye of a patient independently of the patient's perceptions of responses,
    for example, by observing a light or image directed onto or into the eye to
    diagnose the eye or to ascertain the power of refraction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    245,    for instrument support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 300+ for diagnostic instruments generally.


CLS 351/206
TXT Including eye photography:

    Subject matter under subclass 205 includes still or motion-picture
    apparatus for photographing the interior of the eye.

    (1)     Note.  The above apparatus may comprise luminous eye fixation
    objects and/or interconnected illumination and shutter-actuating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, for motion- picture apparatus.

    396,    Photography, subclass 18 for an ocular camera.


CLS 351/207
TXT Having spurious reflection blocking:
    Subject matter under subclass 206 including means for blocking undesirable
    reflections from the eye, or from elements in the optical path.


CLS 351/208
TXT Having means to detect proper distance or alignment (i.e., eye to
    instrument): Subject matter under subclass 206 including means for
    indicating when the photographing instrument and the eye are at the proper
    alignment or distance with respect to each other.


CLS 351/209
TXT Including eye movement detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 205 including means for indicating or
    recording eye movement.


CLS 351/210
TXT Using photodetector:

    Subject matter under subclass 209 where the indicating or recording means
    is a photosensitive device.


CLS 351/211
TXT Including projected target image:

    Subject matter under subclass 205 wherein light rays or images of
    illuminated targets or reticules are projected onto a selected plane in the
    eye or a patient during examination.

    (1)     Note.  The above noted targets may be used with monocular or
    binocular testing instruments and the images may be directed into the eye
    by mirrors or prisms which intersect the line of vision.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237,    for projected target in subjective testing.


CLS 351/212
TXT For cornea curvature measurement:

    Subject matter under subclass 211 wherein the projected target image is
    used for measuring the curvature of the cornea.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247,    for methods of contact lens fitting.


CLS 351/213
TXT Including light filter or absorber:

    Subject matter under subclass 205 including a filter or absorber wherein a
    light beam directed into a patient's eye is of a specific color or wave
    length, or wherein the luminous intensity of the light is weakened to a
    desired magnitude by appropriate absorbers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233,    for movable lens or filter selectively insertable in optical path.


CLS 351/214
TXT Including diaphragm of slit:

    Subject matter under subclass 205 in which a movable diaphragm or narrow
    slit is provided through which a strong light is passes into the eye being
    tested.

    (1)     Note.  The above instruments employ usually artificial light, e.g.,
    Neon light, and the diaphragm or slit is adjustable to determine refraction
    deficiencies of the eye.


CLS 351/215
TXT Including light polarizing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 205 including a light polarizer wherein the
    light which is directed into or emerges from the eye of a patient is
    polarized to avoid reflexes and to obtain the greatest possible intensity
    of illumination and image-clarity.

    (1)     Note.  The above light polarizers may comprise two adjustable light
    polarizing foils, or the foils may polarize the light linearly so that
    their planes of oscillation are at right angles to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203,    for eye-exercising devices with light polarizers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    483+ for polarizing devices generally.


CLS 351/216
TXT Including lens selectively insertable in optical path:

    Subject matter under subclass 205 wherein adjustably mounted test lens(es)
    are selectively placed in front of the observed eye for measuring the
    refraction of the eye so as to provide correcting lenses therefor.

    (1)     Note.  The lenses may be spherical, cylindrical or prismatic, and
    may be insertable in monocular or binocular test instruments, which may be
    portable or fixedly mounted in a physicians's office.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    234,    for subjective testing instruments wherein lenses or filters are
    mounted on a rotatable disc.


CLS 351/217
TXT On rotary disc:

    Subject matter under subclass 216 wherein multiple test lenses are
    eccentrically mounted on either a single rotary disc or a pair of rotary
    discs.

    (1)     Note.  The lens discs in this generic subclass are used in
    monocular or binocular test instruments which are usually permanently
    mounted in the office of the oculist.  Plural superimposed discs used in
    the instrument are mounted for rotation about a common axis so as to
    successively align the test lenses with coaxial sight openings in the discs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    234,    for subjective testing instruments with the lenses mounted on
    rotatable disc.


CLS 351/218
TXT Hand held type:

    Subject matter under subclass 217 includes test instruments with rotatable
    multiple lens discs which are portable and held in hand during examination.

    (1)     Note.  The above instruments may comprise an electrical light
    source adjustable mounted inside the handle or battery casing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221,    for illuminators in objective testing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, appropriate subclasses.


CLS 351/219
TXT With contact lens:

    Subject matter under subclass 205 which includes a lens which makes contact
    with the eye.

    (1)     Note.  The contact lens may include fluid which contacts the eye.


CLS 351/220
TXT Including reflectors with off-set surfaces:
    Subject matter under subclass 205 wherein a light deflecting device, such
    as a mirror or reflector has two reflecting surfaces, offset with respect
    to each other, in order to provide a sight opening for the oculist to view
    the eye.

    (1)     Note.  The surfaces of the above deflecting device may be angled
    relative to each other so that the reflected beams cross or overlap each
    other as they enter the eye.


CLS 351/221
TXT Including illuminator:

    Subject matter under subclass 205 relating to devices including a light
    source for internal or external illumination of the eye during examination
    and/or photographing thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are light source devices for controlled
    illumination of vision test charts used in the practice of optometry, slit
    lamps with or without fibre-optical image-transfer devices, and
    illuminators in the form of a contact lens fitting over the scieral area of
    the eye.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237,    for subjective testing with target projection.

    243,    for illuminated charts and targets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, appropriate subclasses for portable and
    self-contained illuminators combined with other instruments in general, for
    battery powered lamps; and for illumination projectors.


CLS 351/222
TXT Subjective type:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 including instruments through which the
    patient views a test object (target) or the test object so viewed, for
    detecting various ocular characteristics or deficiencies of the patient or
    for prescribing necessary corrections for the patient's vision based on the
    patient's perceptions or responses.

    (1)     Note.  The above instruments may be permanent or nonportable
    installations in the office of an examining physician, or may be portable
    and conveniently carried units.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239,    including test chart or target.

    244,    for test instrument supports.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 300+ for diagnostic instruments generally.


CLS 351/223
TXT Self examining type:

    Subject matter under subclass 222 includes eye testing devices which may be
    operated by a person testing his own eyes.

    (1)     Note.  The device is usually inside a cabinet holding a plurality
    of pairs of eyeglasses for displaying, selecting and/or vending such
    glasses. Eyeglasses of varying strength are brought successively into the
    line of vision of the person desiring glasses until the spectacles best
    fitting the person's eyes are determined.


CLS 351/224
TXT Perimeter type:

    Subject matter under subclass 222 including a surface usually illuminated
    from a light source together with test targets movable along the inside
    face of the surface, which targets are viewed by the patient undergoing eye
    examination for determining fiel of vision.

    (1)     Note.  The above instruments may comprise electromagnetical
    recording devices which recieve impulses from a photoeclectric cell.


CLS 351/225
TXT With rotatable arm:

    Subject matter under subclass 224 where the means for producing the test
    targets on the surface is a rotatable arm.


CLS 351/226
TXT With bowl type screen:

    Subject matter under subclass 224 wherein the surface is shaped as a hollow
    hemispherical bowl or cup carrying inside suitable test patterns or targets
    which are viewed by the patient.


CLS 351/227
TXT Including trial frames:

    Subject matter under subclass 222 including frame structure for removably,
    adjustably and selectively supporting test lenses before the patient's eyes
    during examination, the structure being adjustable to the features of the
    patient's head.

    (1)     Note.  The adjustment to the patient's features may include lateral
    and vertical adjustment, angular adjustment between the temples and the
    center part of the frame, and interpupilar distance.  The test-lens support
    may include a ring type holder which may be rotated and may be provided
    with a graduated scale to ascertain the axial line and position of a
    cylindrical or prismatic lens.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216,    including movable lens.


CLS 351/228
TXT With multifocal lens:

    Subject matter under subclass 227 including structure for selecting near
    and far vision portions of multifocal lenses, demonstrating optical
    characteristics of multifocal lens segments, and for properly locating the
    segments relative to the basic lens and the eyes of the patient.


CLS 351/229
TXT With plural lens carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 227 including frame structure for selectively
    supporting a plurality of different test lenses in series in separate
    spaced apart relation, and usually having open-topped ring-type holders.

    (1)     Note.  The above test lens holders may comprise graduated axis
    scales, and may be adjusted for pupiliary distance and other facial
    requirements of different individuals.


CLS 351/230
TXT With individual lens holder:

    Subject matter under subclass 227 including individual lens holders for
    single test lenses which may be temporarily and interchangeably inserted
    into trial or conventional eyeglass frames.

    (1)     Note.  The above lens holders carry usually projecting handles or
    calibrated dials which bear date indentifying each lens as by sphere,
    diopter and axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154,    for lens rims generally.


CLS 351/231
TXT Removably attachable to eyeglass frame:
    Subject matter under subclass 227 where the frame structure is removably
    attachable to an eyeglass frame.


CLS 351/232
TXT With light polarizing lens:

    Subject matter under subclass 222 wherein adjustable light polarizing means
    are positioned in the light beam of a projected test-image and/or before
    each eye of a patient viewing a test target.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for antiglare spectacles with polarizing lenses.

    203,    for eye exercising devices with light polarizers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    483+ for polarizing devices generally.


CLS 351/233
TXT Lens or filter selectively insertable in optical path:

    Subject matter under subclass 222 wherein the instrument includes selective
    lenses or spectacle frames carrying lenses of different power movable into
    and out of eye testing position until errors of refraction are determined,
    proper lenses have been found and/or corrected vision is obtained.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216+,   for movable lens selectively insertable in optical path.

    227+,   for trial frames.


CLS 351/234
TXT Mounted on rotatable disc:

    Subject matter under subclass 233 wherein the person undergoing eye
    examination views a test object through test lenses mounted in a circle on
    one or several rotatable discs, each lens having a different spherical,
    cylindrical or light absorbing power.

    (1)     Note.  The above eye testing instruments may comprise illumination
    means functioning electrically in conjunction with a timing and time
    indicating apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205,    for objective testing instruments having lenses mounted on
    rotatable discs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, for image projectors of general utility.


CLS 351/235
TXT Having plural disc carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 233 wherein two eye testing units, one for
    each eye, are supported on a standard, each of the units comprising a
    plurality of rotatable test lens discs, which are superposed and mounted on
    or in the same housing or baseplate on a common central axis.


CLS 351/236
TXT Movable along optical axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 233 wherein individual trial lenses or
    optical systems comprising plural superimposed adjustable lenses are
    movable along the optical axis before the eyes of a patient in a plane
    vertical to the direction of sight.

    (1)     Note.  The above lenses or optical systems may be in monocular or
    binocular test instruments, and may comprise sets of reflecting prisms
    intersecting the line of sight.


CLS 351/237
TXT Including target image projection:

    Subject matter under subclass 222 wherein a still projector casts one or
    more illuminated chart or target images on a screen for use in vision
    testing.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are two-dimensional and/or stereoscopic
    reading-training projectors which are successively fed sequential frames of
    intelligence on strips or circular discs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211,    for projected targets involved in objective eye testing.

    243,    for illuminated test charts or targets generally.


CLS 351/238
TXT Tachistoscope type:

    Subject matter under suclass 237 wherein written material or other
    target-subject matter us projected onto a screen or shown on a panel for
    controlled short periods of time to test the reading ability or visual
    acuity of an individual's eyes.

    (1)     Note.  Class 434, particularly subclasses 159+, 167+, 185 and 327+
    in some respects are similar to this subclass, these subclasses containing
    targets or reading charts and viewing devices.  In this Class 351 the
    devices are directed as their primary purpose to testing the acuity of
    vision of an individual with short, accurate and selective timing, while in
    Class 434 the devices are dierected to the general purpose of testing
    knowledge or instructing in characteristics of article.


CLS 351/239
TXT Including test chart or target:

    Subject matter under subclass 222 including charts with movable or
    stationary patterns or targets for either direct reading, or in relation
    with an optical instrument for testing or otherwise determining visual
    acuity or errors of refraction of the eye.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211,    for objective eye testing which involves projecting a chart or
    target into the eye.

    237,    for target projection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 300+ for diagnostic instruments.

    606,    Surgery, subclass 204.25 for eye orthopedics.


CLS 351/240
TXT Stereoscopic type:

    Subject matter under subclass 239 comprising stereoscopic or depth
    perception target-charts, such as used for testing muscle-imbalance and or
    depth perception of the eye.


CLS 351/241
TXT Astigmatism type:

    Subject matter under subclass 239 comprising eye test charts having for
    example changeable color lines or colored contour bands, to determine the
    axis and amount of astigmatism and the required cylindrical lens axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 446+ for changeable
    exhibitors, and subclasses 541+ for illuminated signs.


CLS 351/242
TXT Chromaticity type:

    Subject matter under subclass 239 relating to polychromatic charts or
    plates used in color deficiency or color sensitivity test, the plates or
    charts exposing to the viewer graphic representations of different
    particular colors and/or varying intensity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237,    for chart and/or target projection.


CLS 351/243
TXT Illuminated:

    Subject matter under subclass 239 including structure for illuminating the
    chart or target, or for backlighting perforated or translucent symbols.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237,    for target image projection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 541 for illuminated
    signs.

    362,    Illumination, appropriate subclasses for light combined with
    structure generally and for projectors.


CLS 351/244
TXT Having support or cabinet:

    Subject matter under subclass 239 wherein reading charts or test targets
    are supported by and individually exhibited at a display window of a
    cabinet or removably secured to a base board or handle.

    (1)     Note.  The above noted chart supporting cabinets may be foldable
    and portable and may comprise reflecting mirrors or electrical illuminators.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203,    for eye exercising and training devices.

    245,    for eye-testing instrument supports generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 127+, for stands generally.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, for cabinet supports.


CLS 351/245
TXT Support:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 relates to adjustable stands or bases
    which support ophthalmic diagnostic test instruments for test charts.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are instrument supports with or without test
    chart holders comprising adjustable head and chin rests for the patient
    while under eye inspection or treatment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239+,   for test charts or targets with supports.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 121, 127 and 176.1+ for article supporting
    stands and brackets.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 93 for instrument supports with hydraulic or fluid pressure means.


CLS 351/246
TXT Methods of use:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 including the methods of operating or
    utilizing the instruments as defined in this subclass for the purpose of
    examining or testing the eyes.

    (1)     Note.  The subclass does not provide for methods of making lenses
    except where fitting is involved as indicated in the indented subclass.
    Methods of making spectacles or lenses therefor are classified in subclass
    177 unless provided for elsewhere as indicated in the search notes appended
    thereto.  In general the original patents classified here have only method
    claims.  If claims are included to both the testing instrument structure
    and the method of operating the instrument, the classification is with the
    instrument in the subclasses above, with a cross reference to these method
    subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203,    for combined eye testing and exercising instruments.

    223,    for eye testing devices operated by the person himself while
    selecting eyeglasses.


CLS 351/247
TXT For contact lens fitting:

    Subject matter under subclass limited to process for measuring and
    determining the curvature of a patient's eyeball so that the bearing
    surfaces of a contact lens may be made to fit the eyeball accurately.

    (1)     Note.  The above fitting processes may include photographing the
    eye, projecting a silhouette of the contour of a mold or cast, or otherwise
    making accurate eye measurements to fit contact lenses of suitable shape
    and characteristics to the eye.  Included also here are methods for fitting
    contact lenses by taking molds of the eye and forming an eye fitting cast
    of the mold.

    (2)     Note.  When modification of the contact lens such as grinding,
    polishing or otherwise altering the shape of the lens is done concurrently
    with and necessary to the fitting, as opposed to the making of the
    preliminary blank, classification is in this subclass. However, subclass
    177 below provides for methods of making contact lenses with the scope of
    its subclass definition where no fitting of the lens is involved.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160,    for eye contact lenses, per se.

    177,    for methods making contact lenses generally.  (See (2) Note above.)

    178,    for methods of making spectacles and eyeglasses generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, subclass 42 for grinding or polishing lenses.


CLS 352/
TTL OPTICS:  MOTION PICTURES

CLS 352/
TXT

    I.      DEFINITIONS OF TERMS USED

    APERTURE PLATE
    A portion of the gate which confines the recorded image to a single frame
    in a motion picture camera gate or confines the projected light beam to a
    single frame in a motion picture projector.

    CAMERA, MOTION PICTURE
    A device for photographically recording periodically a series of images of
    an object upon a single actuation.

    CARRIER, MOTION PICTURE
    The vehicle for the individual pictures of a motion picture series,
    generally a flexible strip.

    DISSOLVE
    The gradual diminishing of the intensity of an image until it is no longer
    recognizable.

    FRAME
    The space or area on a motion picture carrier normally occupied by one
    picture of a motion picture series.

    GATE
    A portion of a motion picture device which positions the motion picture
    carrier in the plane of focus of the optical system of the motion picture
    device.

    LOOP
    A slack portion of a motion picture film strip useful to isolate
    tensionally derived speed variations.

    MOTION PICTURE
    A pictorial representation of objects which change position with time
    comprising a plurality of pictures in which objects are incrementally
    displaced in successive pictures corresponding to a displacement in time,
    the plurality of pictures being displayed sequentially at such a rate that
    they create, due to the persistence of vision, an illusion of motion to the
    viewer.

    MOTION PICTURE APPARATUS
    Instruments and machines for use in recording or reproducing motion
    pictures, and includes cameras, projectors, and carriers.

    MOTION PICTURE SEQUENCE
    A plurality of individual pictures presented at such a rate as to produce a
    motion picture.

    OPTICAL AXIS
    The path taken by a central ray of a light beam as it passes into the
    motion picture camera or from the motion picture.

    PROJECTOR, MOTION PICTURE
    A device which forms a real optical image of successive elements of a
    motion picture sequence at such a rate that an illusion of motion is
    produced due to the persistence of vision.

    TRANSDUCER
    A device which converts one form of energy to another.  The term generally
    used in this class in the recording or reproducing of sound accompaniment
    and denotes such devices as a magnetic pick up or electro-mechanical
    phonograph pick up.

    TRAVEL GHOST
    A fault of a motion picture projection caused by presentation of the
    individual picture in a motion picture sequence before the picture has come
    to rest.  In projector systems this superfluous image is of a lesser light
    intensity.

    SHUTTER
    An element of a motion picture device which interrupts the light to provide
    the sequential recording or presentation of the motion picture image.

    II.     GENERAL STATEMENT OF THE CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    A.      This class includes structure motion picture cameras, which record
    motion picture cameras, upon a single actuation a series of individual
    photographs which are separated in time.  Generally the recording rate is
    related to the persistence of vision when the photograph series is used to
    accurately portray an action.  However, special types of cameras are
    included which record the picture series at rates differing greatly from
    the normal persistence of vision time so as to produce a series of pictures
    of utility other than the creation of a motion illusion or to create a
    motion illusion with the rate of motion greatly exaggerated.

    B.      Included in this class are exhibitors which display motion pictures
    and the motion picture carriers for use in the exhibitors.  The exhibitors
    may display the motion pictures by either affording the viewer a direct
    view of the pictures with or without the aid of optical magnifiers, or
    optically projecting a real image of the pictures on a surface which is
    visible to the viewers.  The exhibitors display the individual pictures of
    the motion picture series sequentially at such a rate that due to the
    persistence of vision of the viewer an illusion of motion is created.  The
    individual pictures of the motion picture series may be carried on an
    opaque or transparent base, which may be in the form of a strip, a disc, a
    drum or individual plates.

    C.      Motion picture cameras and/or projectors with perfecting structure
    are also included in this class. Examples of this perfecting structure are,
    sound accompaniment, natural color structure, stereoscopic structure,
    panoramic structure, special effect producing structure, special optical
    structure permitting plural fields of view, removable magazines, film
    rewinding structure, focusing structure, automatically controlled
    diaphragms, plural lens selectors, film strip fire prevention and isolation
    structure, loop formers, structure for framing and/or eliminating travel
    ghosts, special housings, and special supports.

    D.      Plural arrangements of motion picture apparatus, and motion picture
    apparatus which is combined with or convertible to other devices are also
    provided for in this class.  Examples of such apparatus specifically
    provided for are sound accompanied motion picture apparatus with
    selectively operable plural records, recorders, or reproducers; motion
    picture apparatus combined with a manned vehicle; and motion picture
    cameras which convert to motion picture projectors or still cameras.

    E.      Subcombinations of motion picture appartus not otherwise provided
    for, such as film gates and motion picture shutters, are included here.

    F.      Included also are certain accessories related to motion picture
    apparatus such as sound stages, prompting devices, attachments and sets for
    the production of special effects, and film treating and working apparatus.

    G.      Methods of recording and exhibiting motion pictures, methods of
    using motion pictures for other than the creation of a motion illusion for
    entertainment such as for the analysis of motion, and methods of carrier
    treating and working are included here.

    III.    MOTION PICTURE APPARATUS CLASSIFIED ELSEWHERE

    Certain devices which are quasi-motion picture in nature are not classified
    here. Certain picture exhibitors in which a portion of the picture is made
    so as to move or to create an illusion of motion but without the sequential
    presentation of individual pictures are classified in Class 40, Card,
    Picture, or Sign Exhibiting especially subclasses 427+.  Cameras which
    convert an optical image to an electrical analog for electrical storage
    (e.g., magnetic tape) and exhibitors which operate from such an analog are
    classified in Class 348, Television, subclasses 207+ and 739+.

    IV.     MOTION PICTURE COMPONENTS AND SUBCOMBINATIONS CLASSIFIED ELSEWHERE

    Intermittent feed mechanism of the type used in motion picture devices are
    classified in Class 226, Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length,
    especially subclasses 52+, if they are of general utility.  Reeling and
    unreeling means of the type employed in motion picture devices are
    classified in Class 242, Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 324+
    for a holder (e.g., spool, cartridge) for a motion picture camera; see,
    too, 67.1+, for winding machines and 68+, for holders and holder-supporters
    of general utility, respectively.

    Stands for motion picture projectors without specific cooperation with the
    projector are classified in Class 248, Supports, subclass 637.  For alarms
    responsive to breakage of motion picture film see Class 340,
    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 675.

    Class 359, Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements,
    provides for lens mounts in motion picture devices where the motion picture
    device is only nominally set forth.

    V.      METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR MAKING MOTION PICTURE APPARATUS

    In general there is not specific place for the methods and apparatus of
    manufacturing motion picture apparatus other than the general manufacturing
    steps for the component parts (e.g., Class 409, Gear Cutting, Milling, or
    Planing, for the manufacture of gears used in motion picture devices or
    Class 451, Abrading, subclasses 42+ for the grinding of lens components
    used in motion picture devices).  However, the chemical developing and
    processing of motion picture film is classified in Class 430, Radiation
    Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product Thereof.

    VI.     STILL PICTURE CAMERAS

    Photographic cameras which use light to record a single picture for each
    actuation are classified in Class 396, Photography.

    VII.    STILL PICTURE EXHIBITORS AND PROJECTORS

    Devices for exhibiting single photographs are provided for in Class 40,
    Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, if the picture is viewed directly or
    with a simple magnifier. Class 353, Optics:  Image Projectors, has devices
    which project a real image on a viewing surface where no positive
    recitation such as "a motion picture projector" or structure definitive of
    a motion picture mechanism is set forth in the claims.

    VIII.   RADIATION, IMAGERY FILM

    Radiation imagery film is classified in Class 430, Radiation Imagery
    Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product Thereof, subclasses 496+.

    IX.     SEARCH CLASS

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 446+ for exhibitors
    which change the displayed picture without motion illusion and subclasses
    427+ for displays with the illusion of motion (See III above).

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 436, for Geneva type gearing.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length for the apparatus and
    processes of advancing material, including motion picture film, of
    indeterminate-length.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 324+ for unwinding and
    rewinding a machine convertible information carrier; e.g., an image bearing
    carrier.

    348,    Television, subclasses 207+ and 739+ for television.  See also
    section III above.

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, for an image projector which projects an
    image with no illusion of motion of the image.

    355,    Photocopying, subclasses 78+ for contact printing apparatus and
    processes.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    642+ for lenses for motion picture cameras.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 257+, for illuminating projectors.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 100+ for
    optical storage or retrieval of an audio signal.

    396,    Photography, for cameras which use light to record a single picture
    for each actuation.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics, subclasses 38+
    for controls, subclasses 130+ for image formation, subclasses 168+ for
    charging, subclasses 177+ for exposure, subclasses 222+ for development,
    subclasses 297+ for transfer, subclasses 320+ for fixing, subclasses 343+
    for cleaning, and subclasses 361+ for document handling.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, for the chemical aspects of radiation imagery, including post
    imaging processing and chemically defined radiation imagery compositions
    and elements.


CLS 352/1
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including sound recording,
    carrying, or reproducing structure and methods for recording or reproducing
    sounds, such as music or speech, which bear a definite relationship to the
    motion picture sequence.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85,     for motion pictures with special effects and especially subclass 85
    for motion pictures with scent accompaniment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, subclasses 15+ for a still picture
    projector with sound accompaniment.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 3 and
    80, for magnetic recorders or reproducers combined with nominal motion
    picture apparatus.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, appropriate subclasses
    for storage or retrieval of an audio signal.


CLS 352/2
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 in which a group of sequentially arranged
    pictures are presented at such a rate to give the visual illusion of a
    motion sequence which reoccurs at regular intervals together with the
    accompaniment of sound from a sound recording.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter includes a series of picture recordings
    on a phonograph record, which produce a motion illusion upon rotation of
    the record in playing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    for motion picture devices which have the picture sequence arranged
    on a drum which is rotated to produce a reoccurring motion picture sequence
    without sound accompaniment.

    102,    for motion picture devices which have the picture sequence arranged
    on a disc which is rotated to produce a reoccurring motion picture sequence
    without sound accompaniment.

    126,    for motion picture devices which have the motion picture sequence
    arranged on an endless film to produce a reoccurring motion picture
    sequence without sound accompaniment.


CLS 352/3
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 including structure providing for
    performing of action to be photographed with sound accompaniment including
    scenery and other stage effects.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88+,    for motion picture sets without provision for recording sound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclasses 57+ for an illusion or
    stage device appropriate therefor and not of a motion picture type.


CLS 352/4
TXT Subject matter under subclass 3 including means to communicate with
    performers being photographed without interrupting the sound motion picture
    photography.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclass 722 for television studio equipment including
    teleprompters.


CLS 352/5
TXT Processes under subclass 1 for recording or reproducing motion picture
    sequences together with recording or reproducing sound bearing a particular
    relationship to the motion picture sequence.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38+,    for motion picture methods not including steps providing sound
    accompaniment.


CLS 352/6
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 which includes a plurality of records,
    recorders and/or reproducers and means to activate in response to a signal
    or at the will of an operator, selected ones of these recorders and
    reproducers or a record selection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123,    for motion projectors without sound accompaniment which reproduce
    selected motion picture sequences.


CLS 352/7
TXT Subject matter under subclass 6 in which the means to selectively actuate
    different reproducers includes interrelated control means for the plurality
    of reproducers, said control means being so related that actuation of the
    selected reproducers will deactivate (inactivate) nonselected reproducers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    for a plurality of motion picture devices which are sequentially
    operated without sound accompaniment.


CLS 352/8
TXT Subject matter under subclass 6 in which means are provided to operatively
    associate a plurality of picture or sound records with a reproducer to
    establish a reproducing relationship between a selected record and the
    reproducer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123,    for motion picture projectors which reproduce without sound
    accompaniment a motion picture film strip selected from a plurality of such
    motion picture strips.


CLS 352/9
TXT Subject matter under subclass 6 including a plurality of sound recorders or
    reproducers used in cooperation with a single picture recorder or
    reproducer and wherein the selective actuating means actuates one of the
    sound recorders or reproducers in conjunction with the deactivation of
    another of the sound recorders or reproducers such that a continuous sound
    record is either recorded or reproduced to accompany the motion picture.


CLS 352/10
TXT Subject matter under subclass 6 which comprises means to selectively
    activate one of a plurality of sound transducers or picture recording or
    reproducing elements of a picture and sound recorder or reproducer.


CLS 352/11
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 including a plurality of sound transducers
    which are positioned in a particular relation to the recorded scene or the
    reproduced picture and wherein a sound record for each transducer is
    recorded or reproduced corresponding to the sounds from that position in
    the original scene.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for motion picture with stereo sound.


CLS 352/12
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 including means to maintain a timed
    relationship between the sound and picture recording or reproducing.


CLS 352/13
TXT Subject matter under subclass 12 in which the timing means includes a
    manually manipulatable control, controlling the relationship between the
    picture and the sound.


CLS 352/14
TXT Subject matter under subclass 12 in which dimensions of a loop in either
    the picture carrier or sound carrier are employed to control speed
    regulation means to maintain the desired time relationship between picture
    and sound carriers.


CLS 352/15
TXT Subject matter under subclass 12 in which the sound recorder or reproducer
    controls the picture recorder or reproducer to maintain the proper time
    relationship between the picture and sound either by means of direct
    coupling or by employing a control signal originating in sound recorder or
    reproducer means.


CLS 352/16
TXT Subject matter under subclass 15 which comprises a control means actuated
    by the sound record to produce a signal which controls the time rate of
    operation of the picture.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter in this generic subclass includes, for
    example, systems which the control is by a physical configuration of the
    sound record such as notches or speed change of the sound record as opposed
    to control by a recorded signal as in the indented subclass 17.


CLS 352/17
TXT Subject matter under subclass 16 in which the control is effected by a
    signal or signal generating element carried by the sound record.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note under the generic subclass 16 for detailed
    distinction between subclasses 16 and 17.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92,     for motion picture devices employing film carried control signals
    without sound accompaniment.

    236,    for carriers with film carried indicia.


CLS 352/18
TXT Subject matter under subclass 15 in which the control is effected by the
    position of a normally moving sound transducer in a separate sound recorder
    or reproducer.


CLS 352/19
TXT Subject matter under subclass 12 in which the picture recorder or
    reproducer controls the sound recorder or reproducer to maintain the proper
    time relationship between the picture and sound.


CLS 352/20
TXT Subject matter under subclass 19 in which the sound recorder or reproducer
    is controlled from a signal or signal generating element carried by the
    picture record.


CLS 352/21
TXT Subject matter under subclass 12 in which the desired time relationship
    between the operation of the picture recorder or reproducer and the sound
    reproducer is obtained by regulation of the speed of operation of the units
    independently of each other.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass may include common or separate picture and
    sound carriers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    for motion picture apparatus where the sound controls the picture.

    19+,    for motion picture apparatus where the picture controls the sound.

    180+,   for camera and/or projection drive mechanism with speed regulation
    or selection.


CLS 352/22
TXT Subject matter under subclass 12 in which provisions are made for starting
    the picture recorder or reproducer and the sound recorder or reproducer in
    a predetermined timed relationship.


CLS 352/23
TXT Subject matter under subclass 12 in which there is provision for indicating
    the time relationship between the sound and picture recording or
    reproducing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170+,   for camera and/or projector drive mechanisms with indicating means.


CLS 352/24
TXT Subject matter under subclass 23 in which the indication is by means of
    signals or marks on the sound and picture record carriers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236,    for picture carrier with film carried indicia.


CLS 352/25
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 including control means for initiating,
    controlling or terminating the operation of picture and sound recorders or
    reproducers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174+,   for camera and/or projector drive mechanisms with starting and/or
    stopping means.


CLS 352/26
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 in which the sound and picture records are
    located on a common carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for motion picture systems where the sound and picture are recorded
    on separate carriers.

    240,    for picture carrier with a particular format.


CLS 352/27
TXT Subject matter under subclass 26 in which the common carrier is a flexible
    strip.


CLS 352/28
TXT Subject matter under subclass 27 in which a single illumination source is
    employed to reproduce both the picture and sound records.


CLS 352/29
TXT Subject matter under subclass 27 in which the picture gate and sound
    transducer are spaced along the strip whereby the strip passes through a
    picture recording or reproducing station and a sound transducer station at
    separate times.


CLS 352/30
TXT Subject matter under subclass 29 which comprises means to reduce variations
    in the speed of strip movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180,    for camera and/or projector drive mechanisms with speed regulation
    or selection.


CLS 352/31
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 in which the picture record and the sound
    record are on separate carriers.


CLS 352/32
TXT Subject matter under subclass 31 in which the picture carrier is a flexible
    strip and the sound carrier is a disc or cylinder with the recorded sound
    being recorded in grooves in the disc or cylinder.


CLS 352/33
TXT Subject matter under subclass 32 having an interconnecting drive between
    the picture recorder or reproducer and the sound recorded or reproducer
    constructed so as to permit the two units to be relatively adjustable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for motion picture systems with picture and sound synchronizing.


CLS 352/34
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 including structure which supports and/or
    substantially encloses sound motion picture apparatus and cooperates with
    significant portions of this apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  See the notes under subclasses 242 and 243 involving
    housings and supports classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242,    for motion picture apparatus generally with housings.

    243,    for motion picture apparatus generally with supports.


CLS 352/35
TXT Subject matter under subclass 34 in which mechanical means are provided to
    prevent the apparatus from recording or reproducing any undesired sound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclass 200 for mufflers and sound filters.


CLS 352/36
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 in which a particular special relationship
    exists between the picture and sound reproducer and a viewing screen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for a system with a plurality of sound transducers located at
    predetermined positions with respect to the screen to allocate the sound to
    a particular portion of the reproduced motion picture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication)  and Elements,  subclass
    444 for projection screens with a sound producer and subclass 445 for
    acoustical screens.


CLS 352/37
TXT Record carriers under subclass 1 particularly adapted by reason of
    construction or specific arrangement of individual records for recording or
    reproducing pictures and related sound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232+,   for motion picture carriers without provision for carrying sound
    record.


CLS 352/38
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including process steps for use
    in the production or application of motion pictures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for motion picture methods employing sound accompaniment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclass 162 for chemically defined radiation imagery product
    having a sound record.


CLS 352/39
TXT Subject matter under subclass 38 including steps which utilize a motion
    picture sequence for purposes other than the creation of an illusion of
    motion such as for example the use of motion pictures to synchronize an
    orchestra with a second motion picture or as a motion analysis instrument.


CLS 352/40
TXT Subject matter under subclass 38 including steps of reproducing the
    recorded motion picture sequence to recreate the illusion of motion.

    (1)     Note.  Methods reciting both recording and exhibiting of motion
    picture sequences are classified herein and in the indented subclasses and
    are crossed into subclass 44 below if the recording steps are more than
    nominally recited.


CLS 352/41
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 including steps to regulate or otherwise
    control the illumination of the motion picture illumination system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    for camera and/or projector drive mechanisms with illumination
    control responsive to drive speed.


CLS 352/42
TXT Subject matter under subclass 41 wherein the regulation and control steps
    comprise a color filtration of the projector light source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66+,    for apparatus for filtering projector light sources to render
    natural color effects.

    213,    for projector shutters with color filter blades.


CLS 352/43
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 including steps for contributing to
    imparting an illusion of three dimensional viewing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57+,    for stereoscopic motion picture cameras and projectors.

    86,     for motion picture depth illusion apparatus.


CLS 352/44
TXT Subject matter under subclass 38 including the steps of recording, usually
    on a photosensitive surface the plurality of images comprising a motion
    picture sequence.

    (1)     Note.  For those processes which recite both the steps of recording
    and reproducing of a motion picture sequence see subclasses 40+ above.


CLS 352/45
TXT Subject matter under subclass 44 including the filtering of the image
    bearing light before reaching the photo sensitive recording surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for methods of controlling the projector involving color filtration.


CLS 352/46
TXT Subject matter under subclass 44 including exposing a single motion picture
    carrier a plurality of times for each frame of the motion picture sequence.


CLS 352/47
TXT Subject matter under subclass 44 including recording a projected image with
    the subject such that each scene of the motion picture sequence contains
    the recorded projected image as well as the image of the subject.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89,     for sets with projected picture components.


CLS 352/48
TXT Subject matter under subclass 44 including steps affecting the subject or
    recorded image to produce a motion picture sequence which does not
    correspond in all details to the actual action sequence being recorded or
    reproduced.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85+,    for motion picture special effect structure.


CLS 352/49
TXT Subject matter under subclass 48 including the step of illuminating the
    subject being photographed in a controlled manner to produce a desired
    motion picture effect.


CLS 352/50
TXT Subject matter under subclass 48 in which a series of drawings illustrating
    an object in different altitudes of motion are photographed to provide an
    illusion of a motion sequence.


CLS 352/51
TXT Subject matter under subclass 50 in which the drawing series is made using
    photographs or photographic images as guides.


CLS 352/52
TXT Subject matter under subclass 50 in which a drawing is moved or manipulated
    to provide for more than a single representation of an attitude of motion.


CLS 352/53
TXT Subject matter under subclass 48 in which the camera is moved during the
    recording of the motion picture sequence.


CLS 352/54
TXT Subject matter under subclass 48 in which a puppet is moved to simulate
    various attitudes of movement of an animated object or person, each
    position or attitude of movement being recorded as an element of movement
    of a motion picture sequence.


CLS 352/55
TXT Subject matter under subclass 44 including the steps of supplying printed
    titles to accompany the motion picture sequence.


CLS 352/56
TXT Subject matter under subclass 38 including processes for treating the
    recorded picture or for performing nonphotographic work or the carrier such
    that the carrier is altered.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130,    for apparatus which performs some work on or otherwise treats the
    film in addition to recording or reproducing this motion picture sequence.


CLS 352/57
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which the picture sequence
    includes pairs of individual picture elements having separate perspectives
    corresponding to the perspective offered by the right and left eyes of the
    viewer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86,     for devices creating an illusion of three dimensional viewing
    without employing separate left-right images.

    129,    for stereoscopic viewing apparatus with the illusion of motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 42+ for  stereoscopic television systems.

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, subclasses 6 and 7 for stereoscopic
    still picture projectors.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    462+ for stereoscopes and stereoscopic systems.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 324+ for stereoscopic still cameras of the
    class type.


CLS 352/58
TXT Subject matter under subclass 57 in which the right eye perspective image
    and the left eye perspective image are recorded upon and reproduced from a
    common picture frame.

    (1)     Note.  The systems classified herein employ images which are broken
    into small incremental areas and coextensively fill the same frame area.
    Systems which record the complete images in smaller frames so that they are
    placed in a standard frame are classified according to other features of
    the system.


CLS 352/59
TXT Subject matter under subclass 57 in which the right eye perspective is
    recorded on or reproduced from a film strip different from the associated
    left eye perspective.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60+,    for the simultaneous recording or reproducing of left-right images
    in stereoscopic motion picture equipment.


CLS 352/60
TXT Subject matter under subclass 57 in which the right and left eye images are
    recorded or reproduced simultaneously.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59,     for stereoscopic motion picture equipment wherein the right and
    left perspectives are recorded on or reproduced from separate film strips.


CLS 352/61
TXT Subject matter under subclass 60 in which the left and right perspective
    images are channeled to the proper eye of the viewer by virtue of the
    physical or optical properties of the projection screen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    443+ for projection screens generally.


CLS 352/62
TXT Subject matter under subclass 57 including means to record or reproduce the
    individual left-right picture elements alternately in a sequence.


CLS 352/63
TXT Subject matter under subclass 62 in which a viewing device driven in
    synchronism with the projector limits the vision of the viewer to the
    appropriate image by permitting by permitting passage of light to each eye
    alternately.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    462+ for stereoscopic systems.


CLS 352/64
TXT Subject matter under subclass 62 in which the film strip guide means moves
    the film strip to cooperate with the objectives imaging the left and right
    perspectives alternately.


CLS 352/65
TXT Subject matter under subclass 62 including a reflecting system mounted in
    front of the objective lens of the device which establishes the left-right
    perspective of the device.


CLS 352/66
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including means for recording a
    plurality of image sets on a photographic film of a monochromatic base, or
    reproducing such image sets, the individual pictures of each set
    representing an intensity image of the scene photographed corresponding to
    a particular color which is different from the color of the other images of
    the set.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213,    for color shutters with light modifying blades.

    234,    for strip type color picture carriers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, subclass 31 for multicolor still picture
    projectors.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 305+ for color still cameras utilizing
    monochrome film.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, appropriate subclasses for natural color process, composition, and
    product.


CLS 352/67
TXT Subject matter under subclass 66 wherein individual filtered light images
    are simultaneously recorded or reproduced.


CLS 352/68
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which one picture of the
    motion picture sequence is recorded or reproduced during the change period
    of the preceding picture so as to effect alternate projection from separate
    carriers or separate areas of a common carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133+,   for alternate projection of motion picture film strips from
    separate projectors.


CLS 352/69
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including means for recording or
    reproducing a single motion picture sequence from a plurality of angularly
    separated view points such that the individual pictures cooperate to
    produce the illusion of a continuous picture of greater angular extent than
    any of the constituent pictures.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is limited to those devices which employ
    angular scanning or plural optical systems to cover the field of view.  For
    extreme wide angle lenses see Class 359, Optics:  Systems (Including
    Communication) and Elements, subclasses 642+, particularly subclasses 668+
    for anamorphic lenses.  Motion picture devices which are useable with this
    type lens in addition to normal optics are classified in this class,
    subclass 79.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57+,    for stereoscopic motion picture cameras and projectors.

    86,     for depth illusion effects in motion picture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    396,    Photography, subclasses 20+ for panoramic cameras.


CLS 352/70
TXT Subject matter under subclass 69 including means to record or reproduce the
    motion picture sequence as a plurality of simultaneously recorded or
    reproduced picture frames containing contiguous segments of the picture
    scene.


CLS 352/71
TXT Subject matter under subclass 70 in which means are provided to control the
    illumination at the edges of the individual picture frames to effect a
    projected motion picture sequence, which frames are projected slightly
    overlapped such that the combined picture is of uniform light intensity.


CLS 352/72
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which the motion device
    employs a film strip housed in a removable enclosure containing both a
    supply and a take-up spool such that the entire enclosure including the
    spool is removable and insertable as a unit.

    (1)     Note.  To be classified herein a patent must have significant
    motion picture structure as the cooperation of two photographic elements
    such as a lens and a gate, or the details of one such element such as a
    gate.  Patents which merely recite such an element broadly as a part of a
    magazine combination are classified in Class 242, Winding, Tensioning, or
    Guiding.  If only the construction details of the magazine are recited the
    patent is classified in Class 220.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242,    for motion picture structure with housings generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 326+ and 335+ for a
    coil of machine convertible information bearing carrier mounted in a
    magazine, termed a ``cartridge" in Class 242.

    396,    Photography, appropriate subclasses for cameras using roll film in
    a removable magazine.


CLS 352/73
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72 in which the motion picture device may
    selectively employ spooled film not contained in an enclosure.


CLS 352/74
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72 including structure to disengage or eject
    the magazine from the remaining motion picture apparatus.


CLS 352/75
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72 including means to close the film strip
    enclosure to light during removal and insertion of the film enclosure unit.


CLS 352/76
TXT Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein the light closure includes
    separate structure to close the normally open light admitting apertures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204+,   for motion picture shutters generally.


CLS 352/77
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72 including means to permit the accurate
    indexing of the film gate in the focal plane of the motion picture device.


CLS 352/78
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72 including details of the film strip
    enclosure.

    (1)     Note.  For classification here the magazine must be claimed with
    other motion picture details.  See the search notes below for magazines,
    per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, especially subclasses 4.01+ and 352+ for details of
    construction of the enclosure for film strip spooling means.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 326.2+, 341+, and 348+
    for particular magazine construction, termed a cartridge in Class 242.


CLS 352/79
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including means to permit the
    recording or reproduction of picture carriers or frames having different
    physical dimensions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226,    for film gates with removable or interchangeable aperture plates.


CLS 352/80
TXT Subject matter under subclass 79 including means to permit the use of a
    plurality of film strips having different edge to edge dimensions.


CLS 352/81
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which the time sequence
    pictures are physically located together in a common frame and are
    optically separated to form the successive motion picture presentations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for composite stereoscopic cameras and/or projectors.

    67,     for color cameras and/or projectors using monochrome film.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 454 for changing
    exhibitor with lenticular lens, and subclasses 427+ for a special effect
    created in a like manner.


CLS 352/82
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which the individual pictures
    of the motion picture sequence are arranged in rows which extend
    transversely across a film strip picture carrier.


CLS 352/83
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which the film strip picture
    carrier has the individual elements of the motion picture sequence arranged
    in sequence in a plurality of longitudinal columns.


CLS 352/84
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including means to record a
    motion picture sequence at a time rate substantially different from the
    normal range of such recording rates such that the motion may be reproduced
    in an altered time relationship by reproducing the sequence at a normal
    projection rate.

    (1)     Note.  As an indication of the order of magnitudes time compression
    recording at framing rates less than 1 frame per second, may be termed time
    lapse cinematography; while time expansion recording at framing rates in
    excess of 100 frames per second, may be termed high speed cinematography.


CLS 352/85
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including means auxiliary to the
    motion picture camera or projector to record or reproduce an illusionary
    effect other than motion, such as special camera motion, the illusion of
    surroundings other than of the filming local, or special accompaniment such
    as scent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for special motion picture effects with sound accompaniment.

    5       and 38+, for methods of producing special effects.

    57+,    for stereoscopic cameras and/or projectors.

    66+,    for color camera and/or projectors using monochrome film.

    69+,    for panoramic type motion pictures.

    217,    for dissolve shutters, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, for
    miscellaneous optical elements and systems.

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclasses 57+ for an illusion or
    stage device appropriate therefor and not of a motion picture type.


CLS 352/86
TXT Subject matter under subclass 85 providing an illusion of relief from a
    single motion picture sequence.

    (1)     Note.  The devices herein classified produce an illusion of relief
    from a picture of a single perspective.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57+,    for motion picture devices employing frames taken from two
    perspectives corresponding to the right and left eye view of the observer,
    i.e., stereoscopic devices.


CLS 352/87
TXT Subject matter under subclass 85 for creating an illusion of motion of
    inanimate objects by facilitating the successive photographing of the
    objects in various positions representing phases of the illusionary motion.


CLS 352/88
TXT Subject matter under subclass 85 including means to simulate a local other
    than the photographing location or to provide for additional scenery in the
    actual local.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 6+ for a building
    with a theater stage.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 1+ for nonmotion picture photography
    studios.


    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclasses 75+ for a stage
    apparatus or setting appropriate therefor and not of a motion picture type.


CLS 352/89
TXT Subject matter under subclass 88 in which a portion of the set is an
    optically projected picture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for recording motion picture methods involving a projected picture
    component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, subclasses 28, 29 and 30 for related
    still picture projectors.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    443+ for projection screens.


CLS 352/90
TXT Subject matter under subclass 85 including means to provide the motion
    picture sequence with indicia to accompany the motion picture sequence such
    as explanatory text.


CLS 352/91
TXT Subject matter under subclass 85 including means to change from one motion
    sequence to another with a blending of picture material of the two
    sequences.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217,    for shutters which progressively alter the exposure to produce
    dissolves.


CLS 352/92
TXT Subject matter under the class definition employing a motion picture film
    strip with control signals in addition to the individual pictures which are
    sensed or recorded to control, or in response to, the operation of the
    motion picture device or other associated device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236,    for motion picture carriers with film carried indicia.


CLS 352/93
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which a motion picture camera
    combines a plurality of fields of view, separated by areas which are not
    photographed, into plural motion picture sequences on common frames.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, subclasses 107.1+ for phenomenal optical recorders with
    plural fields of view.

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, subclasses 224+ for
    radiation marking.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 322+ for plural image recording for
    nonmotion picture cameras which may have plural fields of view.


CLS 352/94
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including an auxiliary optical
    device to cause light from outside the normal field of view of the lens to
    be focused upon the picture carrier.


CLS 352/95
TXT Subject matter under the class definition shaped in the form of a firearm
    usually for the purpose of determining manipulation of the simulated
    firearm by inspection of the motion pictures produced.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243,    for motion picture devices supported on firearms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, subclass 1.01, for dummy firearms.


CLS 352/96
TXT Subject matter under the class definition for exhibiting motion picture
    sequences stored on an opaque motion picture carrier by means of optically
    projecting the motion picture sequence.

    (1)     Note.  Generally, motion picture film is opaque at the time of
    exposure but is processed to a transparent base with pictures in varying
    degrees of opacity or translucency.  The projectors classified here are
    especially equipped to project motion picture sequences from carriers which
    are completely opaque with the pictures formed with varying degrees of
    reflectivity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232,    for opaque motion picture carriers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, subclasses 63 and 65 for still picture
    opaque projectors.


CLS 352/97
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which a plurality of film
    strips are fed through this camera or projector gate in a face-to-face or
    back-to-face relationship.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, subclass 35 for a still picture
    projector with superimposed film strips.


CLS 352/98
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including means to record or
    reproduce a motion picture sequence upon separate plates such that each
    picture element or groups of picture elements are recorded on or reproduced
    from separate carriers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232+,   for motion picture carriers generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, subclass 103 for a still picture
    projector having means to move individual slides.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 360+ for still cameras which employ
    photography on successively changed photographic plates contained in a
    magazine.


CLS 352/99
TXT Subject matter under subclass 98 in which the picture carrier plates are
    attached together or to a common support by one edge and are successively
    brought into recording or viewing position by successively angularly
    indexing the individual carriers, as turning the leaves of a book.

    (1)     Note.  The successive action is generally accomplished by bringing
    a rigid stop against the carrier edge opposite the mounting edge and
    forcing the stop and carriers past one another the natural resiliency of
    the carrier or the mounting providing for the successive indexing of the
    carriers as they are freed from the stop.


CLS 352/100
TXT Subject matter under subclass 98 in which the individual pictures are
    placed along the path of travel of the observer and are successively
    presented to view of the observer as he proceeds along the path of travel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 584+ for individual
    display devices placed along a traveled path.


CLS 352/101
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which the individual picture
    elements are carried on a drum and are successively brought into recording
    or viewing position by manipulation of the drum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for motion pictures with sound accompaniment which are drum carried
    and repeat the motion picture sequence cyclically.


CLS 352/102
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which the individual picture
    elements are carried on a disc carrier which are angularly indexed to
    record or reproduce the motion picture sequence.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for motion pictures with sound accompaniment which are disc carried
    and which repeat the motion picture sequence cyclically.


CLS 352/103
TXT Subject matter under subclass 102 in which the pictures are arranged around
    the rotation axis of the place or disc and the pictures are spaced from the
    axis along either an increasing or decreasing radius such that each picture
    is at a different distance from the center than the preceding picture.


CLS 352/104
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which the motion picture
    projection apparatus is structurally combined with the cooperating
    projection surface and means to exclude the light from the projection path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, subclasses 18, 67, and 74 for cabinet
    type still picture projectors.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    443+ for projection screens.


CLS 352/105
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including a continuously moving
    carrier and optical means to produce a periodic displacement of the optical
    axis of the motion picture camera or projector at a rate which corresponds
    to the carrier movement such that intermittent pictures are recorded on or
    projected from the continuously moving carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166,    for camera and/or projector drive mechanisms for continuous film
    movement.


CLS 352/106
TXT Subject matter under subclass 105 in which the optical means includes both
    moving reflectors and refractors.


CLS 352/107
TXT Subject matter under subclass 105 in which the optical means includes a
    rotating disc of individual reflectors at different angles to the axis of
    rotation, or includes a single reflecting surface which has a varying angle
    of inclination to the rotational axis of the disc.


CLS 352/108
TXT Subject matter under subclass 105 in which the optical means includes a
    plurality of reflectors rotating about a fixed axis parallel to the
    reflectors' surfaces.


CLS 352/109
TXT Subject matter under subclass 105 in which the optical means includes a
    reflector which is angularly displaced about a fixed axis which is parallel
    to the surface of the reflector.


CLS 352/110
TXT Subject matter under subclass 105 in which the optical means includes
    reflector means which follows the path of the continuously moving picture
    carrier for a portion of the carrier's travel.


CLS 352/111
TXT Subject matter under subclass 110 in which the reflecting means includes a
    plurality of individual reflectors.


CLS 352/112
TXT Subject matter under subclass 111 in which the individual reflectors are
    angularly adjusted as they track the film strip.


CLS 352/113
TXT Subject matter under subclass 105 in which the optical means includes a
    refracting means which is cyclically moved to compensate for the relative
    film and image movement.


CLS 352/114
TXT Subject matter under subclass 113 in which the refracting means includes a
    plurality of sequentially operable lenses for recording or projecting the
    motion picture sequence.


CLS 352/115
TXT Subject matter under subclass 114 in which the plural lenses are carried on
    a rotary carrier.


CLS 352/116
TXT Subject matter under subclass 113 in which the refracting means includes a
    plurality of refractor elements which are mounted on a rotary carrier, the
    elements sequentially cooperating with a fixed refractor to form a complete
    lens system for recording or projecting the image.


CLS 352/117
TXT Subject matter under subclass 116 in wherein the plural refractor elements
    comprise a group of lens elements carried on a rotary drum so that the
    optical axes of the lens elements intersect the rotational axis of the drum.


CLS 352/118
TXT Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein the plural refractor elements
    comprise a group of lens elements carried on a rotary disc such that the
    optical axis of the lens elements is parallel to the axis of rotation of
    the disc.


CLS 352/119
TXT Subject matter under subclass 113 in which the refracting means includes a
    rotating prism with plane parallel optical faces.


CLS 352/120
TXT Subject matter under subclass 119 in which the plano-parallel prism has but
    two faces.


CLS 352/121
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including means for recording a
    plurality of exposures at other than a motion picture rate upon a single
    actuation of the camera.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     for motion picture cameras with time compression or expansion.

    175,    for motion picture camera drives taking a motion picture sequence
    of predetermined duration in response to a single actuation.


CLS 352/122
TXT Subject matter under subclass 121 including means to sever or perforate the
    film strip at the conclusion of the series of photographs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, for cutting devices and processes generally.


CLS 352/123
TXT Subject matter under class definition including means for exhibiting a
    motion picture film strip selected from a plurality of film strips stored
    therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for motion picture devices which select one of a plurality of sound
    accompanied motion picture records.


CLS 352/124
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including means to reverse the
    direction of film strip feed such that the film strip is returned to its
    initial spooled condition subsequent to recording or reproducing a motion
    picture sequence.

    (1)     Note.  Rewinding generally takes place with the other parts of the
    motion picture device inoperative except as provided for in the indented
    subclass 125, and is generally a continuous film motion rather than an
    intermittent motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173,    for intermittent film drives which drive the film in two directions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclass 49 for
    selectively reversible material feed generally.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 324+, particularly
    subclasses 325.3 and 333+.


CLS 352/125
TXT Subject matter under subclass 124 in which the rewinding is performed
    simultaneously with the projection of another film strip.


CLS 352/126
TXT Subject matter under the class definition employing a film strip picture
    carrier which is joined end-to-end to form a continuous loop.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for motion pictures with sound accompaniment which are carried on
    an endless carrier and repeats the motion picture sequence cyclically.


CLS 352/127
TXT Subject matter under subclass 126 in which the film strip loop is supported
    on a plurality of guides to provide a film path with a plurality of
    adjacent loops.


CLS 352/128
TXT Subject matter under subclass 126 in which the continuous film strip loop
    is wound into a single coil such that the film strip is wound on the
    outside of the coil as film is played out from the center or vice-versa.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 325+ for means to
    repeatedly utilize an endless strip without rewinding, subclasses 328+ for
    means for avoiding rewinding by unwinding from the center of a supply coil,
    and subclasses 329+ for means for unwinding into the inner convolution of a
    take-up coil.


CLS 352/129
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which the pictures of the
    motion picture sequence are on a film strip, and viewed as motion pictures
    directly or with a simple magnifier.

    (1)     Note.  The viewers here classified permit the picture sequence to
    be viewed with the illusion of motion.  In some the film may be stopped and
    the individual frames examined.  Class 40, Card, Picture, or Sign
    Exhibiting, as indicated in the Search Class Note below provides for film
    viewers without the illusion of motion.  This subclass also provides for
    stereoscopic viewers with the illusion of motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 361 for film strip
    viewers of nonmotion picture film strips.  See (1) Note above.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    462+, for stereoscopic systems and viewers in general.


CLS 352/130
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including means for treating,
    processing, or performing a nonmotion picture type work upon the motion
    picture carrier during the recording or reproduction of the motion picture
    sequence on or from the carrier.

    (1)     Note.  To be classified herein the additional treatment or work
    performed on the picture carrier must alter the carrier or a characteristic
    thereof as for example cleaning, lubricating, or perforating the carrier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 100 for motion
    picture film cleaning devices.

    83,     Cutting, all subclasses for cutting and punching of film stock.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    157 for methods of motion picture film splicing, and subclasses 507+, for
    apparatus for splicing motion picture films.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 31 for film reel containers
    with humidifying or vapor treatment of motion picture film.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 212+ for
    devices to remove static charges from motion picture film.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 625+ for chemical processing motion picture film.


CLS 352/131
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the motion picture device
    is combined with other devices or structures having an added purpose or
    independent utility other than to perfect the motion picture device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    for combined motion picture cameras and projectors.

    243,    for motion picture devices combined with supports.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 97+ for television combined with motion
    picture cameras.


CLS 352/132
TXT Subject matter under subclass 131 in which the motion picture device is
    combined with a mobile carrier to transport persons as well as the motion
    picture equipment.

    (1)     Note.  To be termed a vehicle for purposes of classification herein
    the structure must accommodate a person as well as the motion picture
    apparatus. Thus a camera riding dolly is classified here while mere camera
    dollies are classified in subclass 243 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243,    for mobile camera supports for the camera alone.  (See (1) Note
    above).


CLS 352/133
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including two or more motion
    picture cameras or projectors or one or more motion picture cameras and one
    or more motion picture projectors which cooperate one with the other to
    produce a single motion picture sequence or presentation.

    (1)     Note.  The motion picture devices may operate either sequentially
    or simultaneously to produce a single sequence.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for sound accompanied motion picture devices which are sequentially
    operated.

    136+,   for convertible motion picture equipment.

    201,    for plural projectors one of which projects a picture sequence and
    the other illuminates the screen during the change cycle of the picture
    projector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 112+
    for switching systems to control the transmission of electrical power to
    plural projectors.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 102 for the sequential
    control of electric projection motors.


CLS 352/134
TXT Subject matter under subclass 133 including plural projectors which share a
    common illumination source.


CLS 352/135
TXT Subject matter under subclass 133 including plural projectors whose shutter
    mechanisms are synchronized to alternately project motion picture frames
    from each of the projectors.


CLS 352/136
TXT Subject matter under the class definition which selectively performs two
    dissimilar functions by appropriate rearrangement of parts or use of
    special adaptor structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131+,   for motion picture apparatus combined with a diverse type device.

    133,    for plural motion picture cameras or plural motion picture
    projectors, or combined motion picture cameras and projectors.


CLS 352/137
TXT Subject matter under subclass 136 including structure to permit the camera
    to record a single picture or upon conversion a motion picture sequence.

    (1)     Note.  The cameras classified here require a rearrangement of parts
    or some structural alteration for the conversion from still to motion
    picture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169,    for motion picture cameras which selectively record a single frame
    or a motion picture sequence.


CLS 352/138
TXT Subject matter under subclass 136 in which the device performs the function
    of a camera recording motion pictures or a projector projecting real images
    of a motion picture sequence depending on a selected arrangement of parts.


CLS 352/139
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which the lens or film gate is
    moved to a position remote from its normal operative position to facilitate
    the focusing of the lens.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
     380, 410 and 425+  for focusing systems for compound lens systems such as
    microscopes and telescopes, subclass 506 for focusing mechanisms and
    subclasses 823+ for axial adjustment of a single lens or lens system.


CLS 352/140
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including means to adjust the
    relative displacement between the film gate and the lens to produce the
    desired degree of sharpness in the image.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    380, 410 and 425+ for focusing systems for compound lens systems such as
    microscopes and telescopes, subclass 506 for focusing mechanisms and
    subclasses 823+ for axial adjustment of a single lens or lens systems.


CLS 352/141
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including means to set the
    diaphragm in accordance with the prevailing light conditions to produce the
    desired degree of exposure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 229, for diaphragms and adjusting
    mechanisms in combination with photoelectric detecting devices.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 213+ for photographic diaphragms controlled
    by a photocell.


CLS 352/142
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein one of a plurality of
    lenses may be selectively placed in operative relationship with the
    remaining motion picture mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    396,    Photography, subclasses 73+ for objective focal length control by
    moving lenses in or out of the light path.


CLS 352/143
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including means to prevent
    combustion of the motion picture film or to limit the combustion to a small
    portion of the film strip.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 101+, for thermally responsive
    indicators generally.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, subclasses 19+ and 63 for fire extinguishers
    suitable for motion picture devices.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 584 and 577, for electrical
    indicating systems responsive to temperature or flames; and subclass 628
    for such systems responsive to gas or smoke.


CLS 352/144
TXT Subject matter under subclass 143 including means to extinguish the
    combustion of a film by providing either a passageway for the film of such
    dimensions as to freely pass the motion picture film but to limit the
    amount of air to a level insufficient to support combustions or by
    providing a movable member which moves against the film under combustion
    condition.


CLS 352/145
TXT Subject matter under subclass 144 with means to cut the film strip if
    combustion occurs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 423 for combined sprocket fed material and
    cutting means without motion picture structure.


CLS 352/146
TXT Subject matter under subclass 143 with provision for reducing the
    temperature of the film strip in the projection gate.


CLS 352/147
TXT Subject matter under subclass 146 including means to control the
    temperature of the film said means being actuated by stopping the film
    strip advancing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169,    for projector drive means to advance the film strip an interval of
    one frame.

    174+,   for projector drive means with starting and or stopping means.


CLS 352/148
TXT Subject matter under subclass 146 in which the reduction in temperature is
    brought about by interposing filters which reduce the amount of the light
    of longer wave lengths in the projecting light beam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    350+ for filters which are operated in the infrared range.


CLS 352/149
TXT Subject matter under subclass 143 in which the means to prevent combustion
    of the film strip includes an opaque shutter or screen which is interposed
    between the projection light source and the film strip.


CLS 352/150
TXT Subject matter under subclass 149 including means to actuate the fire
    shutter upon sensing a variation in film tension from the normal tension of
    the film.


CLS 352/151
TXT Subject matter under subclass 150 where the sensing of the film tension
    includes means to detect a variation in size or position of the untensioned
    portion of the film strip.


CLS 352/152
TXT Subject matter under subclass 149 including means to actuate the fire
    shutter in response to the rate of travel of the motion picture film strip.


CLS 352/153
TXT Subject matter under subclass 152 in which the actuation of the fire
    shutter in response to the velocity of the film feed is through a
    frictional coupling driven by the film strip as it is advanced.


CLS 352/154
TXT Subject matter under subclass 152 in which the actuation of the fire
    shutter in response to the velocity of film feed is through a centrifugal
    coupling which is rotated by the film strip as it is advanced.


CLS 352/155
TXT Subject matter under subclass 143 including means which operates an
    electrical switch in the motor or lamp circuit in a motion picture
    projector in response to a malfunction of the drive mechanism or to film
    breakage.


CLS 352/156
TXT Subject matter under the class definition employing a take up reel and a
    supply reel for a film strip carrier located coaxially.

    (1)     Note.  Generally the devices herein classified cause the film to be
    rotated laterally (i.e., twisted) for an odd number of 180_ rotations to
    facilitate winding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 345.1 for coaxial coils
    in a magazine (cartridge), and subclass 356.1 for a particular drive for
    coaxial coils.


CLS 352/157
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including means to facilitate the
    insertion of a film strip in a motion picture device in a normal drive
    position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for sound accompanied motion picture devices with plural sound
    transducers or transcription devices which are selected by threading
    different film paths.

    203,    for projectors with auxiliary light sources to illuminate the drive
    elements during the threading operation.

    229+,   for motion picture gates which are adjustable to an open position
    for film insertion or extraction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 91+ for
    sheet material threading devices generally.


CLS 352/158
TXT Subject matter under subclass 157 including means to cause the film feeding
    mechanism, upon insertion of a free end of the film strip, to place the
    strip in a normal drive position without further manual manipulation.


CLS 352/159
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including means to form a motion
    picture film strip into free standing loops upon actuation or upon loss of
    one of the loops through malfunction.

    (1)     Note.  A loop as included in this subclass constitutes a portion of
    the film strip placed in an untensioned manner between two drive elements
    which are relatively fixed, the portion of the film being longer than the
    straight line between the drive elements.  This loop or buckled length of
    film minimizes drive variations from being transmitted by the film through
    tensional stresses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29+,    for sound motion picture devices employing loops between the
    picture gate and the sound head.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclass 36 for devices
    where the movement of the fed material is regulated by the adjustment or
    formation of a loop.


CLS 352/160
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including means to adjust the
    relative position of a film strip and the projection gate such that a frame
    of the motion picture is in registry with the gate, and/or means adjusting
    the shutter or other projector elements in connection with the adjustment
    of the strip carrier and projection gate for eliminating travel ghosts.

    (1)     Note.  The term travel ghosts refers to the projected picture which
    results from the shutter exposing the frame before the frame has come into
    registry which results in plural images of the frame being projected with a
    vertical displacement.


CLS 352/161
TXT Subject matter under subclass 160 in which the relative adjustment of the
    film carrier is effected by altering the length of the strip carrier
    between the supply source and the drive means such that the film gate is
    positioned adjacent a different portion of the film carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159,    for motion picture apparatus with loop forming means.


CLS 352/162
TXT Subject matter under subclass 160 in which the adjustment of the relative
    position of film strip and the gate is effected by moving the gate and film
    strip driving mechanism relative to one another.


CLS 352/163
TXT Subject matter under subclass 160 including structure to advance or retard
    the rotation of the film driving sprocket.


CLS 352/164
TXT Subject matter under subclass 163 including means to adjust the shutter
    registry simultaneously with the adjustment of the film drive sprocket.


CLS 352/165
TXT Subject matter under subclass 160 including means to effect the correct
    synchronization of the shutter and the film strip carrier by advancing or
    retarding the registry of the rotary shutter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216,    for shutters with adjustable apertures.

    221,    for shutters with an adjustable number of blades.


CLS 352/166
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including a source of motive
    power and/or means to couple the source to the driven elements such as the
    shutter or picture strip in the motion picture device.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter included in this and indented subclasses
    includes the source of motive power (e.g., spring or electric motors) and
    the driving connections to a specific motion picture element (e.g., an
    intermittent motion picture film drive) as well as the motor control
    devices which control the drive mechanism for specific motion picture
    applications. To be classified here there must be a plurality of motion
    picture elements recited with cooperation between the elements or include
    structural details of a single element of specific motion picture
    application (e.g., a film gate).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12+,    for apparatus to start one drive means in a predetermined
    relationship to the stopping of a second drive means used in sound
    accompaniment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 640+ for gearing means to
    transmit motion from motors to a specific load.

    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, or Animal Powered, subclasses 37+ for
    spring motors generally.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, generally for the feed
    of material of indefinite length including motion picture film.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 349+ for a particular
    drive for unwinding and rewinding a machine convertible information
    carrier; e.g., an image film.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 80+ for
    electric motors and associated gearing for motion conversion purposes.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 9+ for electric
    motor control systems and associated gearing driving a particular element.


CLS 352/167
TXT Subject matter under subclass 166 including means to regulate the intensity
    of the projection light source in response to the speed of the film
    transport mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152+,   for auxiliary fire shutters to interrupt the light and being
    responsive to film transport speed.

    198+,   for projector light sources specifically adapted for motion picture
    projectors.


CLS 352/168
TXT Subject matter under subclass 166 having more than one source of motive
    power, either contained within the device or substitutable for one another.


CLS 352/169
TXT Subject matter under subclass 166 constructed to selectively interrupt the
    drive mechanism of the motion picture apparatus after a single cycle of
    operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137,    for motion picture cameras convertible to still camera by suitable
    rearrangement of parts.


CLS 352/170
TXT Subject matter under subclass 166 including means to indicate to the
    operator of the camera or projector information pertaining to the operation
    of the drive mechanism, (e.g., motor spring tension, position of the
    shutter, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for motion picture with sound accompaniment and including a
    synchronizing indicator.


CLS 352/171
TXT Subject matter under subclass 170 wherein the indication appears in the
    view finder of the device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    396,    Photography, subclass 296 for still cameras with a generic camera
    indicator visible in a view finder.


CLS 352/172
TXT Subject matter under subclass 170 wherein the indicating means shows either
    the amount of film fed, or the amount remaining to be fed by the drive
    mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  Signals indicating the exhausting of the film or beginning
    of the photo sensitive area of the film are not considered as footage
    indicators, but are classified in subclass 170 or subclass 171 above.


CLS 352/173
TXT Subject matter under subclass 166 in which means are provided to cause the
    film strip to be advanced in a direction opposite to its normal direction.
    Such that the motion sequence comprises pictures representing time
    intervals with reverse relationship to the actual action sequence.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     for mechanisms to reverse the direction of film movement during the
    production of transitional exposure techniques.

    124,    for mechanisms to rewind the film after projection or exposure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 49+ for the
    devices to reverse selectively the direction of film feed.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 324+, particularly
    subclasses 325.1 and 333+ for a reversible drive for unwinding and
    rewinding a machine convertible information carrier; e.g., an image film.


CLS 352/174
TXT Subject matter under subclass 166 including means to start and stop the
    operation of the drive mechanism as by starting or stopping the motive
    power source, connecting or disconnecting a coupling means, or engaging or
    disengaging a driven element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 324+ for means for
    unwinding and rewinding a machine convertible information carrier,
    particularly subclasses 333+ for a particular automated stop or reversal
    device and subclass 357 for a detector or indicator.


CLS 352/175
TXT Subject matter under subclass 174 which includes means to limit the
    duration of the run of the drive mechanism to advance a predetermined
    amount of film or operate for a predetermined length of time.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 324+ for means for
    unwinding and rewinding a machine convertible information carrier,
    particularly subclasses 333+ for a particular automated stop or reversal
    device and subclass 357 for a detector or indicator.


CLS 352/176
TXT Subject matter under subclass 174 including means to operate the starting
    or stopping means in response to a predetermined condition (e.g., position,
    speed, etc.) of other elements of the camera or projector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143+,   for fire prevention devices which stop the operation of a motion
    picture projector in response to film position or speed to prevent fire.


CLS 352/177
TXT Subject matter under subclass 176 in which the element effecting operation
    of the starting or stopping means is responsive to the shutter.


CLS 352/178
TXT Subject matter under subclass 174 wherein the starting and/or stopping
    means is operated by manual manipulation of a control element.


CLS 352/179
TXT Subject matter under subclass 178 wherein the manual control element is
    located remotely from the motion picture device.


CLS 352/180
TXT Subject matter under subclass 166 including means to prevent variations in
    the speed of operation of the drive mechanism or to regulate to a
    predetermined speed of operation of the mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for motion pictures with sound synchronizing by speed regulation.


CLS 352/181
TXT Subject matter under subclass 180 in which the regulation or selection
    means includes an oscillating mechanical stop means.


CLS 352/182
TXT Subject matter under subclass 180 in which the regulation or selection
    means includes a member frictionally engaging a driven element to slow the
    speed of said driven element.


CLS 352/183
TXT Subject matter under subclass 166 including at least one driven, endless,
    flexible member which engages the film strip to provide for movement of the
    strip.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97,     for motion picture apparatus employing two film strips which are
    fed in superimposed position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 74+ and 117
    for flexible belt moving means of general application.


CLS 352/184
TXT Subject matter under subclass 166 including means to advance the film strip
    continuously together with means to periodically stop the film strip.

    (1)     Note.  Classified here are motion picture mechanisms in which the
    means to stop the film includes a fixed stop means which cooperates with
    the drive in such a manner that a buckle of film is formed between the
    advancing means and the stop, the resilient collapse of the buckle serving
    to advance the film strip.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 39 and 121
    for general purpose feeding apparatus which regulates material by
    contacting the fed material.


CLS 352/185
TXT Subject matter under subclass 166 including an oscillating means to
    periodically engage and lengthen a loop of film strip which is otherwise
    being continuously shortened by other drive means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 113+ for
    plural material moving means generally including a bight former.


CLS 352/186
TXT Subject matter under subclass 166 in which a continuously driven sprocket
    is mounted for reciprocating movement such that the reciprocating motion
    just cancels the driving motion in one direction of reciprocation and adds
    to the sprocket motion in the other direction so as to produce an
    intermittent motion of the driven film.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 76+ for
    material advancing structure generally including a rotating sprocket
    engaging modifications in the material.


CLS 352/187
TXT Subject matter under subclass 166 in which the power source drives the
    motion picture film through an intermittently rotated toothed drum or disc
    which engages perforations in the film strip.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 76+ for
    material advancing structure including a rotating sprocket engaging
    modifications in the material.


CLS 352/188
TXT Subject matter under subclass 187 in which the sprocket is driven by means
    of a rotating element with a groove corresponding to periods of sprocket
    rotation and dwell, and a cooperating following element.


CLS 352/189
TXT Subject matter under subclass 187 in which the sprocket is advanced by
    means of a gear pair including one member with radial slots jointed by
    arcuate portions and a second member including a peg member which
    cooperates with the radial slots to drive the first member intermittently
    upon rotation of the said second member and further comprising a curved
    portion which cooperates with the said arcuate portions of the said first
    member to index said first member against rotation when not engaged by said
    peg member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 436 for Geneva mechanisms,
    per se.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 76+ for
    material advancing sprocket mechanisms of general application.


CLS 352/190
TXT Subject matter under subclass 187 where the driving means includes a
    special gear pair which because of an irregular shape or toothing
    arrangement drives the sprocket in a nonuniform fashion with a uniform
    rotation of one of the gears of said pair.


CLS 352/191
TXT Subject matter under subclass 166 including a reciprocating member, a
    projection on said member to engage longitudinally spaced perforations in a
    motion picture film, and means to withdraw the projection from the film on
    alternate carrier strokes to effect an intermittent advance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 62+ for
    material advancing structure generally involving feed claws which engage
    perforations in the advanced material.


CLS 352/192
TXT Subject matter under subclass 191 where the reciprocating member with the
    film engaging projection is actuated by an eccentric crank pin which is
    journaled in the reciprocating member.

    (1)     Note.  The crank pin drives as classified here have a driving
    connection which is not displaced relative to either the carrier or the
    driving member.  Film engaging claws which are driven with an eccentric
    member with relative displacement between the claw and eccentric member are
    considered cams and are classified in subclasses 194+.


CLS 352/193
TXT Subject matter under subclass 192 including a guide to determine the path
    of reciprocation of the member with the film engaging projection, the guide
    comprising a pivoted link or fixed slot which cooperates with a slot
    engaging follower.


CLS 352/194
TXT Subject matter under subclass 191 in which the driving means for the member
    with the film engaging projection includes a cam and cam follower.


CLS 352/195
TXT Subject matter under subclass 194 in which the claw driving cam has a claw
    controlling cam contour in the form of a groove, generally of uniform
    depth, lying in one side of the cam which is at right angles to the axis of
    rotation of the cam.


CLS 352/196
TXT Subject matter under subclass 194 which includes a single fixed pivot which
    together with the cam determines the path of reciprocation of the film
    engaging projection carrier.


CLS 352/197
TXT Subject matter under subclass 166 including support means as defined in
    subclass 243 below for the motion picture apparatus which cooperates with
    the drive mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34+,    for supports including sound motion picture structure.

    132,    for motion picture apparatus supported by a vehicle as there
    defined.

    243,    for supports generally combined with significant motion picture
    structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, for support structure generally, and especially subclass
    637, for projection machine supports.


CLS 352/198
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including means to provide or
    regulate the illumination in motion picture projectors.

    (1)     Note.  The projection light sources as here classified include a
    light source together with some motion picture structure such as a gate or
    shutter.  Class 362, Illumination, provides for illumination generally.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for sound motion picture apparatus where the same light source is
    employed for the projection of the picture as well as for the sound
    transducer.

    134,    for plural motion picture projectors with a single light source.

    167,    for motion picture projection apparatus with means to effect a
    control of the intensity of the projection light source in response to the
    drive speed.


CLS 352/199
TXT Subject matter under subclass 198 wherein there is a specific relationship
    between the projection light source and the motion picture shutter, such as
    the illuminating source being excited by an electric signal synchronized
    with the rotation of the shutter.


CLS 352/200
TXT Subject matter under subclass 198 in which the light source is cyclically
    extinguished to effect an intermittent projection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, especially subclasses
    209+, for lamps with interrupted power supply.


CLS 352/201
TXT Subject matter under subclass 198 including means to project a light on the
    screen during frame change or to provide a border around the projected
    picture so as to minimize the differences in screen illumination during
    periods of projection and picture change.

    (1)     Note.  The light projected on the screen during frame change by the
    devices herein classified bears no image.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for motion picture projectors which project a picture from a
    separate film during the frame change of the first film.

    134,    for plural projectors with a single light source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclass 61 for special stage
    lighting operated other than by a projector.


CLS 352/202
TXT Subject matter under subclass 198 in which means are provided to cool the
    light source by means of a directed flow of air.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211,    for shutters which serve to cool the film as well as interrupt the
    light.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclass 294, for structure for projector light
    sources with ventilation and cooling where no significant motion picture
    structure is claimed.


CLS 352/203
TXT Subject matter under subclass 198 including an additional light source
    distinct from the projection light source to illuminate the projecting
    apparatus or portions thereof to facilitate, for example, threading the
    film.


CLS 352/204
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including means to cyclically
    interrupt the light from the illuminator in the projector or to the
    sensitized carrier in the camera.

    (1)     Note.  The light interruption is generally timed so as to occur
    during the movement of the picture carrier; although in projectors there
    are frequently light interruptions of integrally higher rate than the
    carrier movement rate to reduce flicker.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76,     for removable magazine type cameras with shutter type light traps.

    149,    for motion picture apparatus with auxiliary fire shutters.

    164,    for framing and/or travel ghost elimination with shutter
    synchronization; and subclass 165, for framing or ghost elimination
    structure involving shutter adjustment.

    177,    for drive mechanisms with shutter operated starting and/or stopping.

    198,    for projection light sources synchronized with the shutter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    227+ and 238+ for light valves generally.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 452+ for camera shutters.


CLS 352/205
TXT Subject matter under subclass 204 including a plurality of light paths and
    wherein the shutter interrupts the light passage along the plurality of
    light paths.


CLS 352/206
TXT Subject matter under subclass 205 in which one of the light paths is
    employed as a view finder.


CLS 352/207
TXT Subject matter under subclass 204 in which the shutter moves in a
    rectilinear direction across the light path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    396,    Photography, subclasses 483+ for sliding shutters used in still
    photography.


CLS 352/208
TXT Subject matter under subclass 204 in which the light interrupting means
    moves in an arcuate direction across the light path about a fixed axis in
    either a continuous or an oscillatory fashion.


CLS 352/209
TXT Subject matter under subclass 208 in which the light transmitting portion
    of the shutter is adjusted in size in accordance with the speed of the
    shutter rotation.

    (1)     Note.  The shutters of this subclass generally are so constructed
    as to vary the shutter aperture to keep the exposure of a light sensitive
    carrier constant despite variations in the drive speed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152+,   for shutters which close or stop in a closed position in response
    to a slow shaft speed for the purpose of fire prevention.

    216,    for shutters with manual adjustment of aperture.


CLS 352/210
TXT Subject matter under subclass 208 in which the light interrupting areas of
    the shutter include openings or blades have particular edge configurations
    which are adapted to interrupt the light in accordance with the particular
    blade construction at a rate different from an opaque sector blade.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212+,   for shutters which intercept the light at a radial shutter rate but
    which modify the light beam as to intensity or some other optical parameter.


CLS 352/211
TXT Subject matter under subclass 208 in which the light interrupting means
    includes means causing a flow of air.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202,    for projection light sources with ventilation and cooling.

    212+,   for ventilation in motion picture apparatus for film cooling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclass 294 for cooling and ventilating systems in
    projectors generally.


CLS 352/212
TXT Subject matter under subclass 208 in which the shutter includes means to
    alter the light rather than, or in addition, to completely block the
    passage of the light.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    355,    Photocopying, subclasses 125+ for vignetters, per se, and adapted
    for use in photographic contact printing.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    885+ for optical filters.

    396,    Photography, subclass 545 for vignetters used with still cameras.


    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics, subclasses 38+
    for controls, and subclasses 177+ for exposure.


CLS 352/213
TXT Subject matter under subclass 212 in which the light modifying blades
    include means to alter the color content of the light.

    (1)     Note.  These shutters are usually used in color cameras or
    projectors using monochrome film.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for exhibiting methods with color filtration.

    66+,    for color cameras and/or projectors using monochrome film.


CLS 352/214
TXT Subject matter under subclass 208 in which the shutter includes a plurality
    of blades normally rotating about, but spaced along a common axis, each
    spaced blade or blade groups having a separate drive.

    (1)     Note.  The shutters classified here have plural blades which
    normally move relative to each other, or due to their optical positioning
    have an effective relative motion.  If such plural blades are clamped
    together contiguously and have no relative motion, they are classified in
    subclasses 208+ above or in subclasses 219+ below.


CLS 352/215
TXT Subject matter under subclass 214 in which the light interrupting blades
    move in opposite directions.


CLS 352/216
TXT Subject matter under subclass 214 which includes means to adjust the
    relative position of the blades while the shutter is in operation so as to
    alter the size of the light passing aperture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141,    for devices which control the shutter aperture in response to
    variations in exposure parameters.

    209,    for rotary shutters whose aperture size is speed adjusted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    396,    Photography, subclasses 213+ for devices which adjust photographic
    shutters in response to variation of exposure parameters.


CLS 352/217
TXT Subject matter under subclass 216 in which the aperture adjustment means is
    controlled by a power driven means operated by the drive of the motion
    picture mechanism so as to effect the adjustment at a predetermined rate
    relative to the position of the motion picture carrier.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the aperture size is varied with time while
    in subclass 209 above the aperture size is varied with the shutter velocity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     for similar exposure or projection effects which are caused by
    apparatus which is auxiliary to the motion picture device.


CLS 352/218
TXT Subject matter under subclass 208 which includes a plurality of blades
    which rotate about separate spaced axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    214,    for a shutter including a plurality of rotating blades spaced along
    the same axis.


CLS 352/219
TXT Subject matter under subclass 208 wherein the blades form a unitary
    structure at right angles to the axis of rotation.

    (1)     Note.  The light interrupting means is considered a unitary
    structure if its component parts are relatively fixed in operation and have
    a common drive. Subclass 214 above provides for axially spaced
    independently driven blade.


CLS 352/220
TXT Subject matter under subclass 219 in which the number of blades may be
    changed, as by adding or removing blades or superimposing blades to
    effectively reduce the number.


CLS 352/221
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including structure in the
    optical path which positions the motion picture carrier, usually a film
    strip, in the focal plane of the optical means, and masks the carrier edges
    such that a single picture area (i.e., a frame) is presented to the optical
    path.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the gate includes an apertured or aperture plate for
    framing which has one surface conjugate to the focal plane and a pressure
    exerting plate usually for positioning the carrier, in relation to said
    surface.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass 221 includes all gates for carriers other than
    the film strips as well as film strip gates not provided for below.  The
    indented subclasses below are limited to gates for film strip picture
    carriers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27+,    for sound accompanied motion picture apparatus with film gates
    which have provisions for sound transducers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, subclasses 23, 24, 95, and 96 for an
    image projector having a film gate.


CLS 352/222
TXT Subject matter under subclass 221 wherein the motion picture film is
    maintained in position against the gate by a liquid or gas.


CLS 352/223
TXT Subject matter under subclass 221 in which the positioning means includes
    rollers which contact the motion picture film strip.


CLS 352/224
TXT Subject matter under subclass 221 including structure cooperating with the
    marginal portions of the motion picture film strip for maintaining the
    strip in proper lateral position in the gate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclass 548.2 for a guide that
    directs an edge of an elongated material during convolute winding and
    subclass 615.3 for a guide that directs running material by confining a
    portion of the moving material.


CLS 352/225
TXT Subject matter under subclass 221 including a pressure plate which is
    cyclically moved in relation to the aperture plate so as to exert an
    intermittent pressure upon the motion picture film.


CLS 352/226
TXT Subject matter under subclass 221 in which the aperture plate is removably
    mounted in the remaining film gate structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79+,    for apparatus employing changeable aperture plates such that
    picture carriers with different size frames may be accommodated.

    130,    for apparatus employing aperture plates replaceable with cleaning
    means to clean the motion picture film.


CLS 352/227
TXT Subject matter under subclass 221 in which means are provided to adjust the
    pressure applied to the motion picture film by the pressure plate.


CLS 352/228
TXT Subject matter under subclass 221 in which the gate includes motion picture
    film positioning structure constraining the film to a curved plane
    corresponding to the curved focal plane of the lens.


CLS 352/229
TXT Subject matter under subclass 221 where structure is provided such as
    handles and/or means for facilitating the movement of the gate from
    operative to or from inoperative position, or wherein structure is provided
    such as a latch for securing the gate in one or both of these positions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    178,    for manual controls for both the gate and the drive mechanism.


CLS 352/230
TXT Subject matter under subclass 229 wherein the gate moving and/or holding
    structure includes an element actuated by the operation of the closure of
    the motion picture camera or projector housing.


CLS 352/231
TXT Subject matter under subclass 221 including a lens mounting in combination
    with the gate;  the gate supporting or being supported by the lens
    mounting, or the gate and lens mounting being integral.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    819+ for lens mountings generally.


CLS 352/232
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including the structure or medium
    on which the series of pictures are recorded in the cooperating apparatus
    (e.g., camera) for later observation or reproduction with cooperating
    apparatus (e.g., projector).

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter here is usually separate and distinct
    from the recording and projecting apparatus, but requires such apparatus
    for the recording and reproducing of the scene. Where the carrier and
    recording and/or reproducing apparatus are inseparable or claimed,
    classification is usually in one of the above subclasses directed to
    particular types of motion picture equipment, e.g., subclasses 98+ and 101.

    (2)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass 232, includes some
    structural limitation adapting the carrier to motion picture cameras and
    projectors, as opposed to mere chemical limitations in such carriers, which
    are classified in Class 430, Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process,
    Composition, or Product Thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for picture and sound carriers.

    56,     for methods of treating or working film strip.

    98+,    for individual picture plate devices. See also (1) Note above.

    130,    for motion picture apparatus with film treating or working
    structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, appropriate subclasses for chemically defined motion picture
    carriers and processes involving same.


CLS 352/233
TXT Subject matter under subclass 232 wherein the carrier is formed as a tape
    or strip with individual elements of a motion picture sequence uniformly
    spaced along the strip.

    (1)     Note.  Usually uniformly spaced apertures are provided for
    cooperating with the sprocket or claw.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for strip type films with a sound record.

    56,     for methods of treating or working film strip.

    59,     for stereoscopic apparatus involving plural film strips.

    166+,   for drive mechanisms for film strips.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, subclass 120 for picture carriers for
    still projectors.


CLS 352/234
TXT Subject matter under subclass 233 wherein the strip carries a series of
    pictures either in color or monochrome, which produce with suitable
    cooperating apparatus a color picture.

    (1)     Note.  For classification here as opposed to Class 430 some
    structural detail is recited in the claims, or the pictures are arranged in
    a particular format, or in motion picture sequence. A film carrying a mere
    series of colored pictures not in motion picture sequence is classified in
    Class 430.  Mere coloring of the film to produce a particular tint is not
    classified here; but in subclass 233 above if structural limitations are
    present or Class 430, if the structural details of the film strip are
    absent.  Where the film is colored for the purposes of combining colors to
    produce noncolored effects such as stereoscopic, classification is not
    here, but in subclass 239 or subclass 240 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40+     and 44+, for methods of color cinematography with monochrome film.

    66+,    for color motion picture apparatus using monochrome film.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, appropriate subclasses for chemical natural color techniques.


CLS 352/235
TXT Subject matter under subclass 233 with a strip of nonpicture bearing
    material on the end of the picture bearing film used in threading the film
    strip through the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129+,   for motion picture apparatus including structure to thread the
    leader through the apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 91+, for
    threading devices of general application.


CLS 352/236
TXT Subject matter under subclass 233 including a marking carried upon the film
    strip other than that pictorially recorded on the film strip and used as
    indicia to convey intelligence.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90,     for tilting devices which place titles on the film strip.

    92,     for motion picture apparatus responsive to film carrier control
    signals.


CLS 352/237
TXT Subject matter under subclass 233 including structure such as thickened
    areas or metallic strips at particular parts of the carrier for
    strengthening the carrier at these parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238,    for abrasion resistant picture carriers.


CLS 352/238
TXT Subject matter under subclass 233 including structure such as an embossing
    or coating to protect the carrier against damage caused by the handling by
    the recording or reproducing apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237,    for reinforced picture carriers.


CLS 352/239
TXT Subject matter under subclass 233 wherein the picture frames have a
    particular shape or arrangement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for picture and sound record carriers.

    234,    for frames having a particular arrangement for color effects.

    240,    for particular picture arrangements within the frame as opposed to
    the arrangement of a plurality of frames as in this subclass 239.


CLS 352/240
TXT Subject matter under subclass 233 including some significant subject matter
    or arrangement of subject matter recorded within the picture frame of the
    carrier (i.e., some subject matter or picture arrangement other than the
    conventional series of pictures), each being slightly changed with respect
    to the next to contribute to the illusion of motion.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of subject matter here classified are stereoscopic
    images; images of different focus, printed titles, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85+,    for apparatus for producing special effects, as opposed to the mere
    carrier of such effects as classified in this subclass 240 which cooperates
    with the other apparatus; and especially subclass 90, for tilting apparatus.

    236,    for film carrier indicators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    283,    Printed Matter, for printed matter not elsewhere classifiable.


CLS 352/241
TXT Subject matter under subclass 233 wherein the apertures or depressions
    cooperating with the advancing means (such as the claw or sprocket) are
    arranged in a particular manner.

    (1)     Note.  For classification here (as opposed to Class 226, Advancing
    Material of Indeterminate Length) the recited apertures or depressions are
    related only to each other or to the film strip, per se; claims to the
    combination drive means plus the film with particular driving apertures are
    classified in Class 226, subclasses 52+.


CLS 352/242
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including structure substantially
    enclosing and cooperating with significant structure of the motion picture
    camera and/or projector.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this motion picture class some details
    of the motion picture apparatus or detailed relationship between the
    apparatus and cabinet must be claimed. Class 312, Supports: Cabinet
    Structure, especially subclass 10.1 provides for motion picture cabinets
    where no details of the motion picture apparatus or relationship between
    the motion picture apparatus and cabinet are claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34+,    for housings with sound motion picture apparatus.

    72+,    for removable film strip magazine type motion picture apparatus.

    104,    for housings including viewing screens for cooperation with the
    housed motion picture apparatus, i.e., cabinet type projectors.

    143+,   for motion picture apparatus housings particularly adapted for the
    prevention of fire damage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 10.1 for cabinets designed
    to house motion picture apparatus but with no specific motion picture
    apparatus cooperating with the housing being recited.  See also (1) Note
    above.


CLS 352/243
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including structure for
    maintaining the motion picture apparatus in the fixed position or fixed
    path of movement (i.e., adjustable) with respect to some other body or the
    earth; or including structure facilitating the grasping of the apparatus
    for hand held transportation or operation.

    (1)     Note.  Class 248, Supports, especially subclasses 183 and 637
    provides for motion picture camera or projector supports where no
    significant motion picture structure is claimed.  The mere positive
    inclusion in the claim of "a motion picture projector," or equivalent
    terminology is not sufficient to preclude classification in Class 248.  As
    between Classes 353, Optics:  Image Projectors and 396, Photography for
    this class the positive recitation in the claim of  "a motion picture
    projector" or "a motion picture camera" or the equivalent terminology is
    sufficient for classification in this motion picture class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34+,    for sound motion picture apparatus together with supports.

    85+,    for apparatus producing special motion picture effects which may
    include a support.

    131+,   for motion picture apparatus supporting or supported by a diverse
    type device.

    176,    for motion picture apparatus wherein the control therefor is
    incorporated in or passes through the support.

    197,    for motion picture apparatus including a support wherein a drive
    means for the motion picture apparatus is incorporated in or transmits its
    energy through the support.

    232+,   for motion picture carriers.

    242+,   for motion picture apparatus with   housings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 358 and 358.1 for a
    particular frame or frame attachment in a machine for unwinding and
    rewinding a machine convertible information carrier and subclass 539 for a
    particular frame in a convolute winding machine.

    248,    Supports, especially subclasses 183.1+ and 637 for motion picture
    apparatus supports.  See also (1) Note above.

    348,    Television, subclasses 373+ for television apparatus which may
    involve cameras with supports.

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, for a still picture projector which may
    have a support.  See (1) Note above.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 419+ for a still camera combined with a
    support.


CLS 352/244
TXT Subject matter under the class definition which is not provided for in any
    of the preceding subclasses of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38+,    for miscellaneous methods of producing or applying motion pictures.


CLS 353/
TTL OPTICS:  IMAGE PROJECTORS

CLS 353/
TXT

    I.      DEFINITIONS OF TERMS USED

    PROJECTOR OR STEREOPTICON

    A device for projecting an image of an object by passing light through or
    around the object or reflecting light from the object on a viewing screen
    for the purpose of more conveniently viewing the image of the object.  The
    image is usually enlarged or reduced in size with reference to the object;
    and the image is also usually in a more convenient position for viewing or
    recording.  Since projection is a common property of lenses and mirrors,
    the projectors in this class involve some structure for facilitating or
    enhancing the projection over what incidentally occurs in these optical
    elements.  A projector generally includes (1) a concentrated light source
    from either an artificially or natural emanation, (2) a light paralleling
    element (e.g., condensing lens), (3) a holding or positioning device for
    the object to be projected, (4) a projection objective or projection lens
    system comprising one or more optical elements for directing the light
    after it passes through or is reflected from the object to form an image,
    and (5) a screen for receiving the image and making the image formed by
    this light available for use.  The projectors in this class utilize natural
    or artificial (usually) light within the visible spectrum.  The object to
    be projected is usually planar in natural with the plane extending
    transverse to the direction of projection, and may be transparent (e.g.,
    slide or transparency) or reflective (e.g., opaque sheet).  The projection
    may be limited to the outline of an opaque object such as a shadow, and in
    this case the object need not be planar.  The term projector as used in
    this class designates the above structure either with or without the
    screen.  In operation the object is positioned outside one focal plane of
    the projection lens system and the image is formed on a viewing surface
    outside the opposite focal plane of the projection lens system.  The closer
    the object is to the one focal plane the farther the image will be from the
    other focal plane, and the bigger the image will be.  In the projector the
    relative positioning of the object is usually obtained by moving the
    projection lens system and adjusting its focal length rather than by
    changing the position of the object. As indicated in section VI the
    projectors including or adapted for use with recording surfaces are
    classified elsewhere.

    CONCENTRATED LIGHT SOURCE

    The source of illumination for the projector.  It may be either a
    projection lamp or a lens and mirror system utilizing sunlight.

    CONDENSING LENS

    A lens which parallels the light from the light source for uniform
    distribution over the object to be projected and makes the light impinge on
    the object at right angles to the plane of the object.

    FILM STRIP

    An indeterminate length of film having a plurality of images thereon.

    IMAGE

    The optical counterpart of an object produced by a lens or other optical
    system.  In an image projection system an image of an object is formed on a
    screen or other viewing surface. A photographic camera forms an image of an
    object on a photosensitive film. After the film is developed, a picture of
    the original object appears on the film.  A picture of this type is
    generally employed as the object in image projectors.

    LIGHT PARALLELING STRUCTURE

    Optical elements for directing the light from the concentrated light source
    so that it impinges on the object perpendicular to the plane of the object
    and uniformly illuminates the object to be projected.

    OBJECT

    The object is the subject, the image of which is to be projected (see
    definition of image).

    OBJECT HOLDER

    Structure for holding the object in the projecting position, as well as for
    moving the object in and out of such position.  Examples are slide transfer
    mechanisms and film holders.

    PROJECTION OBJECTIVE OR PROJECTION LENS SYSTEMS

    Forms an image of the object on the viewing surface, and is located between
    the object and viewing surface.

    SCREEN

    This is a planar (usually) light diffusing surface positioned with its
    plane surface substantially transverse to the projector light for
    presenting the image in viewable form.

    SLIDE

    A piece of transparent film having a single image thereon, and also haivng
    a frame or two glass plates to help keep the piece of film from bending.

    STEREOPTICON

    See projector.

    II.     GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    A.      This class provides for projectors not elsewhere classified.  This
    class includes the projectors for particular types of objects to be
    projected; such as maps and aerial photographs, targets, transparent
    plates, information data, microscopic objects, scales and indicators, and
    stencils or perforated plates.  Various other species and types of
    projectors are also included here such as kaleidoscopic, heliostats,
    steroscopic and relief, pointers, gun type, moving images on screens,
    episcopes and cabinets including screens.

    B.      Various plural and composite types of projectors are included such
    as projectors involving plural projected images including multicolor,
    projectors for images combined with real objects, projectors with manual
    delineation, and plural projection with a single light source.

    C.      Projectors selective at the operators choice are also included as
    where the selection is between a slide and a film strip, between a cabinet
    and a distant screen, and between opaque and transparency projection i.e.,
    epiodiascopes.

    D.      Certain combinations and perfecting features are included such as
    with vehicles, with sound accompaniment, with editing or auxiliary viewing,
    additional illumination of or near screen, temperature control, distortion
    compensation, housings, structurally related projectors and screens, and
    lamp control.  Included also are improvements in particular elements of or
    their relation to the projector, when the elements are claimed in
    combination with other projector structure.  These improvements may be in
    the projector filters, prisms, shutters, gates, reflectors, lens supports,
    condensers, and slide changers.

    E.      Certain subcombinations of projectors are included here, usually
    where they are peculiar to projectors, such as slide changers, housings and
    picture carriers.

    F.      Methods of projection are included here.  This is usually the
    method of operating projection apparatus in a particular manner.

    III.    PROJECTORS CLASSIFIED ELSEWHERE

    Class 434, Education and Demonstration, subclasses 180, 314+, and 324+,
    provides for projectors with some limitation for use with teaching.  Class
    178, Telegraphy, especially subclass 23 for telegraphic printing which may
    involve projection.  These may also be considered as projectors combined
    with telegraphy apparatus.  Class 250, Radiant Energy, subclass 329 has the
    projection of invisible radiant energy images onto a fluorescent or
    phosphorescent screen, subclasses 458.1+ has the irradiation of fluorescent
    and phosphorescent devices and subclasses 483.1+ for fluorescent and
    phosphorescent devices, per se.  Class 359, Optics: Systems (Including
    Communication) and Elements, subclasses 369 and 400 provides for compound
    lens systems with viewing screens.  Class 351, Optics:  Eye Examining,
    Vision Testing and Correcting, subclasses 210+ and 237+, for eye examining
    instruments with chart or target projection.  Class 352, Optics:  Motion
    Pictures, for motion picture projectors.  Class 396, Photography, subclass
    430 for a camera convertible to developed image projectors or viewer.
    Class 355, Photocopying, subclasses 18+ for copying cameras or projecting
    printers involving projection on a photographic film for recording the
    projected image; the copying background in a patent is sufficient for
    classification in Class 355 as opposed to this Class 353. Class 356,
    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 391+ provides for configuration
    comparison involving projection on a viewing screen.  Class 348, subclasses
    744+ for television projection devices.

    IV.     PROJECTORS COMBINED WITH OTHER STRUCTURE AND CLASSIFIED ELSEWHERE

    Class 33, Geometrical Instruments, subclass 1, provides for image
    projectors combined with measuring means; subclasses 20.1+ for image
    projectors in combination with a claimed scribing or tracing means; and
    subclasses 501+, for patents including an image projector and a feeler
    which contacts an article to be tested.  Class 434, Education and
    Demonstration, subclasses 180, 314+, and 324+ provides for an image
    projector having mechanism for uncovering an answer or in combination with
    an educational device which includes means by which a student controls or
    operates the device and subclass 286 for planetarium projectors.  Class 52,
    Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), provides for a projector in
    combination with a stadium or auditorium.  Class 368, Horology:  Time
    Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 41+, 82+, and 239+, for clocks
    including projection of the hands or dial.  Class 116, Signals and
    Indicators, subclasses 246+ for radio tuning indicators with projectors,
    Class 177, Weighing Scales, subclass 178 for projection scales.  Class 178,
    Telegraphy, especially subclasses 23+ for telegraphic printing which may
    include projection.  Class 352, Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 131
    provides for a projector in combination with a motion picture projector and
    Class 355, Photocopying, subclasses 18+ for copying cameras which contain
    projection systems. Class 348, subclasses 744+ for television projection
    devices.

    V.      PROJECTOR SUBCOMBINATION CLASSIFIED ELSEWHERE

    Class 206, Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 456 provides for slide
    magazine, per se, i.e., with no limitation for operation in a projector;
    Class 226, Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, especially
    subclasses 52+ for film advancing mechanisms; Class 242, Winding,
    Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 324+ for a device for unwinding and
    rewinding a machine convertible information bearing carrier which may
    include image film, and subclasses 520+ for a convolute winding process or
    machine in general use; Class 362 Illumination, subclasses 257+, for
    projection lamps which may be used in projectors; Class 248, Supports,
    subclasses 637+ for projection machine supports; Class 359, Optics:
    Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses 443+ for
    projection screens; subclasses 642+ for lenses; subclasses 838+ for
    reflectors; and subclasses 885+ for optical filters.

    VI.     FACSIMILE, TELEVISION AND TELEGRAPHIC PRINTING

    Exhibitors involving conversion from electrical to optical form are in
    Class 348, subclasses 744+ when a television receiver is claimed in
    combination with projection structure (such as lens, filter and reflector
    combinations) to transmit the image from a cathode-ray tube to a viewing
    surface.  Class 359 provides for lenses, filters and reflectors set forth
    as being for use with a television or in a television cabinet. This Class
    353 provides for combinations or subcombinations of projectors which employ
    a concentrated source of light where the source of light is not a
    cathode-ray tube. Since the cathode-ray tube has the image thereon and no
    concentrated light is projected through or reflected from that image, the
    combination of a cathode-ray tube and a lens, for example, is not within
    the Class 353 definition.

    Class 178, subclasses 23+ provides for detailed stock tickers or other
    Class 178 printers in combination with either a detailed or a broadly
    claimed projector. This Class 353, in subclasses 46+ provides for a
    detailed projector in combination with a nominal stock ticker.  Class 178,
    subclass 42 provides for the combination of a nominal printer, a nominal
    projector, and a detailed tape-feeding mechanism, since Class 226 does not
    provide for this combination.  Class 226 does provide for tape-advancing
    means in combination with a projector when only one optical element is
    claimed, or in combination with a nominal printer; but does not provide for
    a combination including a projector and a printer.

    VII.    PROJECTION LIGHTS

    Class 362 in subclasses 257+ provides for light projectors or
    subcombinations of image projectors which merely claim elements such as
    lights, condensing lenses, filters, screens for filtering, masks, or
    reflectors.  However, this Class 353 provides for image projectors which
    include elements such as a slide guideways, filmgates, objective lenses,
    viewing screens, or means to dissolve images.

    A light or shadow spot projector for pointing out part of an image on a
    viewing screen is classified in this Class 353, subclass 42 even though
    other light projectors are in Class 362.

    Class 362 includes patents where the mere image of the light source or its
    filament is obtained.

    VIII. OPTICAL ELEMENTS (e.g., Lenses and screens)

    Class 359 includes projection lens systems, lens mounts, lens supports, and
    optical elements where no other image projector structure such as a slide
    changer shutter, film gate, viewing screen or light source is recited in
    the claims.

    Class 359, subclasses 443+ also provides for projection screens, per se, or
    in combination with lenses.  However, when a projection screen is in
    combination with an image projector having a concentrated source of light,
    classification is in Class 353.

    IX.     MOTION PICTURE PROJECTORS

    Motion picture image projectors which create an illusion of motion by
    employing the persistance of vision of a person are provided for in Class
    352.  If there is a recitation in the claims of "a motion picture
    projector", "animation projector", or equivalent terminology; or if
    structure definitive of motion picture mechanism is made, classification is
    in Class 352. However, the mere motion picture background is not sufficient
    to remove subject matter from Class 353 to Class 352.  Patents which set
    forth the combination of a still and a motion picture projector are
    classified in Class 352, subclass 131; and those patents which claim
    devices convertible from still to motion or from motion to still picture
    projector are classified in Class 352, subclass 131; and those patents
    which claim devices convertible from still to motion or from motion to
    still picture projectors are in Class 352, subclasses 136 and 147.

    Class 352, subclasses 1+ provides for motion picture projectors accompanied
    by sound where the "motion" is either claimed or disclosed.

    X.      SLIDE EXHIBITORS AND SLIDES

    Class 40, subclasses 701+ provides for slides and slide mounts where no
    particular image or optical relationships are recited. However, this Class
    353, subclass 120 includes slides where there is a relationship of the
    images thereon, or where the slide has both a visual and a sound record.

    Slide changers disclosed as being useful with a mere viewer are in Class
    40, while slide changers disclosed for use with image projectors or for
    either viewers or image projectors are in this Class 353.

    XI.     SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 1, for image projectors combined
    with measuring means; subclasses 20.1+ for image projectors in combination
    with a claimed scribing or tracing means; and subclasses 501+, for patents
    including an image projector and a feeler which contacts an article to be
    tested.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), for a projector in combination
    with a stadium or auditorium.

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclass 178, for the combination of a projector
    with a significantly claimed weighing scale.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 42 for a projector, film feeding means and a
    stock ticker in combination.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package subclass 456 for a photo slide
    magazine, per se, where no relationship or means for connecting to a
    projector is claimed.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, especially subclasses
    52+ for film advancing means in a projector where no more than one optical
    element is claimed and where no detailed optics is recited.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 324+ for a device for
    unwinding and rewinding a machine convertible information bearing carrier
    which includes image film, and subclasses 520+ for a convolute winding
    process or machine in general use.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 637+, for projector supports where no optical
    limitations are set forth.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 330+ for methods and apparatus to
    convert infrared radiation into a visible image, subclass 361 for invisible
    radiant-energy- responsive electric signalling devices which include a
    luminescent device responsive to the radiant energy, subclasses 458.1+ for
    methods and apparatus for irradiating fluorescent and phosphorescent
    devices and subclasses 483.1+ for flourescent and phosphorescent devices,
    per se.

    348,    Television, subclasses 744+ for a television means in combination
    with projection means.

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclasses
    210+ and 237+ for chart or target projection devices employed for examining
    and testing eyes.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, for motion picture projectors.

    355,    Photocopying, subclasses 18+ for copying cameras and projection
    printers.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 391+ for measuring and
    testing patents which involve image projection where an article is compared
    to a scale or where an article is compared to a standard by superimposing
    the two or by viewing the two concurrently when they or their images are
    immediately adjacent each other.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 41+, 82+,
    and 239+ for a projector in combination with a clock where more than the
    mere hands and face of the clock is claimed.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 100+ for means
    to optically record or reproduce sound.

    396,    Photography, subclass 430 for a camera convertible to developed
    image projectors or viewer.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics, subclasses 38+
    for controls, subclasses 130+ for image formation, subclasses 168+ for
    charging, subclasses 177+ for exposure, subclasses 222+ for development,
    subclasses 297+ for transfer, subclasses 320+ for fixing, subclasses 343+
    for cleaning, and subclasses 361+ for document handling.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for a stock-material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet, and which may be useful as a projection screen, but with no optical
    limitations; and especially subclasses 143+ for such a stock-material
    product comprising embedded particulate matter (e.g., glass) which acts to
    diffuse or reflect light.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 180, 314+, and 324+ for an
    image projector having mechanism for uncovering an answer or in combination
    with an educational device which includes means by which a student controls
    or operates the device and subclass 286 for planetarium projectors.


CLS 353/1
TXT Subject matter under this class definition including a plurality of
    reflecting surfaces so arranged in the optical path that images of objects
    viewed as multiple images of the objects arranged in a symmetrical pattern
    and relative motion between the objects and the reflecting surfaces or
    between the reflecting surfaces and observer changes the patterns.

    (1)     Note.  The reflecting surfaces are usually elongated and at an
    angle to each other which forms a V-shaped trough when two mirrors are
    employed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    616+ for a kaleidoscope where a pattern is merely viewed.  See (2) Note to
    Class 359, subclass 616.


CLS 353/2
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 including a chamber of loosely assorted
    objects, usually of irregular shapes, transparent and varicolored, which
    may be tumbled over each other by rotation of the chamber or moved in other
    ways to give everchanging visual effects.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    617 for similar kaleidoscope structure where the pattern is viewed without
    use of an image projector.


CLS 353/3
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein solar light is employed
    to project an image and comprising essentially a reflector and mechanism
    for causing it to follow the apparent movement of the sun so as to keep the
    direction of the reflected light constant and appropriate for projecting
    the image.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for subcombinations of a Heliostat
    not provided for elsewhere.


CLS 353/4
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein an object to be projected
    is moved to and from the projection position by covection currents of air
    which usually move a fan which in turn moves the object.


CLS 353/5
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the projection system is
    especially adapted to project an image (usually an aerial photograph of the
    terrain) on a surface for making a map, or to compensate for the
    orientation of the camera which produced the aerial photograph being
    projected, or to align or superimpose parts of such aerial photographs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for projection of a map or projection of a target or spot light on
    a map.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 1 for similar subject matter
    combined with measuring means and subclasses 20.1+ for similar subject
    matter combined with a claimed scribing or tracing means.

    250,    Radiant Energy, for similar subject matter employing photocells.

    348,    Television, subclasses 144+ for television systems in which images
    of maps may be projected to effect a comparison of the maps.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 391+ for projecting
    images of maps to compare them.


CLS 353/6
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5 wherein the projected pictures were taken
    from different points of view and have separate perspectives corresponding
    to the perspective offered by the right and left eyes of a viewer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 42+ for stereoscopic television systems.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 2 for structure responsive
    to two steroscoptic images and furnishing a contour plot of the earth based
    on the distinctions of the images.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    470 for similar subject matter where the pictures are merely viewed and no
    image is projected on a screen.


CLS 353/7
TXT Subject matter under the class definition where the projection system is
    adapted to project pairs of individual picture elements having separate
    perspectives corresponding to the perspective offered by the right and left
    eyes of a viewer.

    (1)     Note.  The individual picture elements are taken from two different
    points of view and each eye of the viewer receives only the information
    obtained from one point of view when viewing the projected images on a
    screen.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass also provides for attachments which convert a
    conventional still projector to a steroscopic projector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for projection systems for creating an illusion of three
    dimensional views without employing separate left-right images.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 57+ for stereoscopic motion
    pictures devices.

    359,    Optics:  Systems  (Including Communication) and  Elements,
    subclasses 462+ for steroscopic viewers.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 41+ for
    stereoscopic X-ray devices.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 324+ for stereoscopic still cameras.


CLS 353/8
TXT Subject matter under subclass 7 including light polarizing material in at
    least one light path for allowing light of a certain polarization to pass
    therethrough and blocking certain other light.


CLS 353/9
TXT Subject matter under subclass 7 including mechanism for moving stereoscopic
    slides into the projection path; or portions of this mechanism such as a
    slide changer which moves slides from a magazine into the projection path
    and back to the magazine or a magazine which moves to position individual
    slides next to the slide changer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103+,   for projector slide transfer mechanism generally.


CLS 353/10
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the projection system is
    adapted to provide an illusion of depth from a single projected image
    obtained from only one point of view.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for stereoscopic projectors employing pictures taken from two
    perspectives corresponding to right and left eye views of the observer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 86 for motion picture devices
    giving relief illusion.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    478+ for viewers which give an illusion of depth.


CLS 353/11
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the projector is
    especially adapted to project an image of a map or navigation chart; an
    image of a target onto a map or chart; or a target which represents a
    vehicle such as an aircraft onto a screen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for a pointer which denotes a certain part of a projected image.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 178, for navigation instruments.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 988+ for electrical means
    in combination with a projector for plotting a vehicle's position.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 44 and 69+ for similar
    structure where training mechanism is claimed which the student controls,
    adjusts or handles to help train him.


CLS 353/12
TXT Subject matter under subclass 11 wherein the projector is in combination
    with a mobile carrier such as a ship, automobile, or airplane; or in which
    the projector is adapted to be employed in a vehicle.


CLS 353/13
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which the projector is in
    combination with a mobile carrier, such as a ship, automobile, or airplane;
    or in which the projector includes structure which significantly adapts the
    projector for operation in a vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  To be termed a vehicle for purposes of classification in
    this subclass 13 the vehicle must be for some purpose other than to merely
    transport the projector such as a cabinet projector on rollers.  Such
    cabinet projectors are in subclasses 30+ below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for a projector for maps or navigation in combination with a
    vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 132 for a motion picture
    projector in combination with a vehicle.


CLS 353/14
TXT Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein the image projected is of the face
    of an instrument which informs the driver about a condition or position of
    the vehicle such as a speedometer or compass.

    (1)     Note.  Where details of the instrument are claimed, classification
    is in the class having the given instrument.


CLS 353/15
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the image projector is
    synchronized or otherwise combined with a means to reproduce sounds, such
    as music or speech, and which sounds bear a relationship to the projected
    pictures.

    (1)     Note.  Class 352, Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 1+ provides
    for motion picture projectors accompanied by sound where the "motion" is
    either claimed or disclosed.  This Class 353 provides for sound accompanied
    slide or still picture projectors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 455+ for a changeable
    exhibitor with sound accompaniment.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 1+ for a sound-accompanied
    motion picture projector.  See (1) Note above.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 1+
    and 80 for magnetic recorders or reproducers combined with nominal
    projector apparatus.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 70 for control
    by a sound-conversion device of a nominally claimed image projector.


CLS 353/16
TXT Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein the sound accompaniment is an
    instrument for reproducing sounds by means of the vibration of a stylus or
    needle following a spiral groove on a revolving circular disc or cylinder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 455 for a changeable
    exhibitor in combination with a phonograph.


CLS 353/17
TXT Subject matter under subclass 16 including a housing having a handle for
    carrying the enclosed projector and phonograph.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72+,    for a common housing from which the projector or viewing screen is
    removable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 34+ for a sound-accompanied
    motion picture housing.


CLS 353/18
TXT Subject matter under subclass 16 including a cabinet which encases the
    projector and part of the viewing screen and usually also encases the
    phonograph; and which excludes outside light from the projection path to
    form a unitary device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     and see the search notes thereunder for cabinet-type projectors
    which do not have sound accompaniment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 34+ for a sound-motion picture
    housing.


CLS 353/19
TXT Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein the picture to be projected and
    the audio record are both on the same film strip or slide or where both are
    mounted in a common frame.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass 19 provides for an image projector and sound
    reproducer in combination which employs a common picture and sound record
    carrier. Subclass 120, below, provides for the common carrier, per se.


CLS 353/20
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including a polarizing element or
    interference filter in the optical path to modify the light in said path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    483+ for polarizers, per se, and subclasses 577+ for interference filters,
    per se.


CLS 353/21
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the projector is
    particularly designed so that the pictures to be projected may be directly
    inspected for faults or arranged in a particular position or sequence; or
    where the projector has auxiliary means so that the pictures may be
    previewed before projection or may be viewed on an auxilary screen during
    projection on the main screen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, appropriate subclasses for similar
    structure employed to edit or preview motion-picture film.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, for testing film for flaws.


CLS 353/22
TXT Subject matter under this class definition including a transparent plate
    having parallel flat surfaces in the optical path through which the
    projecting light beam passes.


CLS 353/23
TXT Subject matter under subclass 22 wherein the transparent plate is an
    essential part of the gate to position a film strip in the focal plane of
    the projector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 221+ for a motion-picture
    projector having a film gate.


CLS 353/24
TXT Subject matter under subclass 23 in combination with means to position a
    lens in the projector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     for a projector having a film gate, which does not have a
    transparent plate, and a lens support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 231 for a motion-picture film
    gate in combination with a lens mount.


CLS 353/25
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein a desired one of a
    plurality of individual units of information may selectively be moved into
    the optical path for projection from a stored or nonprojectable position
    either by positioning the unit in the optical path or by moving the optical
    path to the individual unit.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter here (subclasses 25, 26, 28) involves the
    selection of any one of the units from the group without regard to any
    sequential arrangement of the units as is provided for in the subclasses
    below.

    (2)     Note.  The data or information projected here is a record such as
    an account or real estate register rather than a mere picture to be viewed
    for enjoyment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    355,    Photocopying, subclasses 40+ for selecting the data to be copied by
    a projection printer.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 185.01+ for
    floating gate memory storage (e.g. flash memory), subclass 120 for the
    storage and retrieval of information which has inherent means for reading
    information into and out of the storage system.

    382,    Image Analysis, subclasses 181+ for character-recognition systems.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics, subclasses 38+
    for controls, subclasses 130+ for image formation, subclasses 168+ for
    charging, subclasses 177+ for exposure, subclasses 222+ for development,
    subclasses 297+ for transfer, subclasses 320+ for fixing, subclasses 343+
    for cleaning, and subclasses 361+ for document handling.


CLS 353/26
TXT Subject matter under subclass 25 wherein the data is stored on a strip of
    film of indeterminate length which usually is supported on a pair of reels
    which are rotated to bring selected portions of the data into position for
    projection.


CLS 353/27
TXT Subject matter under subclass 25 wherein the data is stored in numerous
    individual areas which are arranged in a plurality of rows or columns on a
    rectangular sheet of microfilm which is in a flat condition during
    projection; the optical path and microcard usually being relatively movable
    to select the individual area to be projected by alignment with the optical
    path which may include moving a mask to block light from going through the
    undesired data.


CLS 353/28
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the projected image is
    combined with a real object so that the two may be viewed simultaneously.

    (1)     Note.  The real object may be a person or a sign or screen having
    indicia thereon.  However, a mere sign or screen without inherent indicia
    is not considered a real object for the purpose of this definition since it
    would add nothing informative to the viewed scene.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass provides only for apparatus which produces a
    scene including a real object and a projected image; if the real object
    also is projected, classification is in subclasses 30+ below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30+,    for the combination of a plurality of projected images.  See (2)
    Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 48+ for methods involving
    motion pictures and scenery and staging effects, and subclasses 88+ for
    sets.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 391+ for a projected
    image in combination with a real object for the purpose of measuring or
    comparing the two.

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclass 61 for a projected image
    in combination with a stage which includes a real object and subclasses 75+
    for a stage apparatus or setting appropriate therefor.


CLS 353/29
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including a projector for
    projecting an image on a surface and also means to illuminate the periphery
    of that surface to form a lighted border or means to direct additional
    illumination on the surface for the purpose of improved contrast, picture
    definition, brilliancy or tinting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84+,    for a color filter in the optical path which projects the image.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 541+ for illuminated
    signs, especially subclasses 546+ for edge illuminated.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, for a motion picture projector with
    additional means to illuminate the projected image.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    450 for a viewing screen having a lighted border.


CLS 353/30
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including at least one image
    projector to project a plurality of images on a screen in superimposed or
    in mosaic relationship so that the images each contribute a part of the
    composite image.

    (1)     Note.  One of the images may merely be projected on the screen at
    intervals while the other is steadily projected. However, if one image is
    faded in while the other is faded out with no cooperation of the images,
    classification is not here but in one of subclasses 83, 86, 90 or 93, below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for a device to project an image in combination with a real object.

    29,     for means to project an image in combination with means to project
    a mere white or colored light.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 46, 47, 70+, 97, 131+, and
    133+ for motion picture devices for composite pictures or images.

    355,    Photocopying, subclasses 40+ for projection printing a composite
    image.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 391+ for plural
    projected images on a screen for comparison or measuring purposes.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 82+, and
    239+ for means to project a clock face in combination with an advertisement.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics, subclasses 38+
    for controls, subclasses 168+ for charging, and subclasses 177+ for
    exposure.


CLS 353/31
TXT Subject matter under subclass 30 including means to project a composite
    image from a set of pictures, each picture corresponding to a particular
    color which is different from the color of the other pictures of the set.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7+,     for a stereoscopic projector employing a set of pictures, each
    picture having been photographed in a different color.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 66+ for a color motion-picture
    device.


CLS 353/32
TXT Subject matter under subclass 31 wherein the projector is adapted for
    projecting images from lenticular film and usually includes a multizone
    color filter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for a film strip, per se.


CLS 353/33
TXT Subject matter under subclass 31 including a prism, usually for directing
    light to the respective pictures or for combining light which has come
    through the respective pictures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     for a projector having a prism.


CLS 353/34
TXT Subject matter under subclass 30 including a single lamp and two or more
    optical paths and means to simultaneously direct light from the lamp to the
    optical paths.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for plural projection paths and a single light source in a
    projector for moving the image on a viewing screen.

    63+,    for an epidiascopic projector having plural optical paths and a
    single light source.

    82,     for similar structure where the light is usually directed
    alternately to two optical paths.


CLS 353/35
TXT Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein a plurality of slides or film
    strips are aligned in the optical path of the projector so that light
    passes sequentially through more than one of them to form a composite image
    on a viewing screen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 97 for a motion-picture
    projector for superposed film strips.


CLS 353/36
TXT Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein a plurality of numbers or letters
    are individually projected adjacent each other on a viewing screen to form
    a meaningful image or where indicia is projected adjacent or upon a scene
    on the viewing screen, usually for the purpose of advertising.


CLS 353/37
TXT Subject matter under subclass 30 including a mirror or reflecting prism
    positioned between the light source and the viewing screen to direct light
    along the optical path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for a composite projector for multicolor pictures which includes a
    prism.

    67,     for a cabinet-type projector for projecting an image of an opague
    object, wherein the projector includes a reflector.

    72,     for a projector and a screen in a housing which is open during
    projection wherein the housing includes a reflector.

    77,     for a cabinet-type projector having a reflector.

    81,     for a projector with a prism.

    98,     for a projector with a reflector.


CLS 353/38
TXT Subject matter under this class definition including a transparent
    structure having a plurality of discrete surfaces, such as lenticles or
    facets, which extends across the optical path for modifying the light which
    passes therethrough.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass 38 provides for a diffusing element, such as a
    glass plate having a ground-glass surface for softening the projected
    image, in the optical path of the projector.


CLS 353/39
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including a lens system (usually
    of the compound type) which provides great magnification of the projected
    image of microscopical objects.

    (1)     Note.  Said lens system may be in a common microscope which is in
    combination with means to project an image on a viewing screen to form a
    projection microscope or the microscope and projection structure may be
    built as a unit to form a microprojector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 237 for similar structure
    employed to detect flaws in a material or article and subclasses 391+ for
    similar structure where the image is compared to a standard.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    362+ for compound lens systems generally.


CLS 353/40
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including a scale or scale
    indicator together with optical elements arranged to project an image of
    the scale or scale indicator.

    (1)     Note.  The broad recitation of the scale or indicator actuator does
    not preclude classification here.  However, where the scale actuator is
    claimed in detail classification is with the art to which the actuator
    relates. Examples of such are in the Search Notes below.  Where the scale
    is projected in conjunction with the object to be measured, projected or
    not, classification is in Class 356 Optics: Measuring and Testing,
    subclasses 391+.  The combined recitation of the scale and indicator
    broadly does not preclude classification here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for projection of a speedometer or compass face.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 348 for a compass, a level or a
    plumb having an optical viewer associated with the indicator thereof.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 293, for a liquid-level gage in
    combination with a projector.

    81,     Tools; 82, Turning; 83, Cutting and 409 Gear Cutting, Milling, or
    Planing, for scale projection combined with machine tools.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 246+ for a radio-tuning
    indicator and projection means in combination.

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclass 178, for a projector in combination with
    a weighing scale.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, for an electrical-signal device as
    there defined combined with means to project an image of the signal.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, for scale projection combined with
    an optical test as there defined.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    436+ for scale reading with the aid of an optical element or system where
    there is no image projection.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 41+, 82+,
    and 239+ for the combination of a clock and projector.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclass 16, for
    scale projection combined with that type machine tool.


CLS 353/41
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 including more than one scale, such as in
    a vernier or micrometer for making fine or exact measurements.

    (1)     Note.  One of the scales may give the general reading while the
    other gives a finer or decimal reading or the two scales may slide
    side-to-side and the reading be where scale lines from the two respective
    scales intersect.  Only one of the plural scales need be projected.


CLS 353/42
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the projector includes an
    optical or mechanical pointer for indicating to the observer particular
    parts of a projected image on a projection screen, or light-spot pointers,
    per se.

    (1)     Note.  Generally light projectors for mere illumination are
    classified in Class 362.  However, in the case of a light-spot pointer, the
    device, per se, is classified here even though it is not combined with an
    image projector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for means to project a spot of light representing a target such as
    a ship or aircraft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 257+ for mere light projectors.


CLS 353/43
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including a projector housing
    shaped like a pistol, gun or flashlight or such projector or other
    projector which uses a dry-cell battery for a power source.

    (1)     Note.  A conventional flashlight may be attached to other structure
    to make a complete projector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 95 for gun-type motion-picture
    devices.


CLS 353/44
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the projector is
    constructed to permit a person to write or draw simultaneously on a surface
    while an image of that writing or drawing is projected from the surface on
    a viewing screen; or including means such as tracing paper on which an
    image is projected while a person simultaneously makes a record
    corresponding to the image by tracing the image with a pencil or the like.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for simultaneous projecting and pointing out part of the projected
    image.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    447 for a projection screen with means to trace an image.


CLS 353/45
TXT Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein the writing which is projected is
    the score of a game such as bowling.


CLS 353/46
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including a projector adapted to
    project an image which moves on or across the viewing screen.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the object is on a moving tape as in a
    combined-stock ticker tape and projector.

    (2)     Note.  This subclasses 46+ takes a detailed projector in
    combination with a nominal stock ticker.  Class 178, subclasses 23+ takes
    the combination of a detailed stock ticker or other Class 178 printer in
    combination with either a detailed or a broadly claimed projector.  Class
    178, subclass 42 takes the combination of a nominal printer, a nominal
    projector and a detailed tape-feeding means since Class 226 does not
    provide for the combination.  Class 226  provides for tape-advancing means
    in combination with a projector when only one optical element is claimed,
    or in combination with a nominal printer but does not provide for a
    combination including a projector and a printer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for a projector where the image is moved by rising, heated air.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, especially subclass 42 for a stock ticker in
    combination with a projector.  See (2) Note above.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, for means to pull a
    tape where only a single optical element such as a film gate or lens is
    claimed.  See (2) Note above.


CLS 353/47
TXT Subject matter under subclass 46 including a cabinet which encases the
    projector and part of the viewing screen and which excludes outside light
    from the projection path to form a unitary device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     71 and 74, for other cabinet-type projectors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 104 for a cabinet-type
    motion-picture projector.


CLS 353/48
TXT Subject matter under subclass 46 including a plurality of projectors as
    there defined or two or more optical paths for projecting onto separate
    viewing screens or separated areas on a viewing screen.

    (1)     Note.  Subclasses 30+ above has plural projectors for projecting to
    form a composite image on a common viewing screen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30+,    89+ and 94, for plural projectors or projection paths.


CLS 353/49
TXT Subject matter under subclass 48 including only one lamp for the two or
    more optical paths and means to direct light from the lamp to the optical
    paths.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     63+ and 82, for other projectors having a single light source and a
    plurality of optical paths.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, for plural motion-picture projectors
    having a single light source.


CLS 353/50
TXT Subject matter under subclass 46 including a mirror or reflecting prism
    positioned between the light source and the viewing screen to direct light
    along the optical path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     72, 77, 81, and 98, for other projectors having a reflector in the
    optical path.


CLS 353/51
TXT Subject matter under subclass 50 including a plurality of reflectors as
    there defined.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73,     78, 81, and 99, for projectors having plural reflectors in the
    optical path.


CLS 353/52
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including means to heat, cool,
    reduce the rise in temperature, or ventilate all or part of the projection
    system or the picture to be projected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for slide changing by rising heated air.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 143+ and 202 for fire
    preventing, ventilating and cooling a motion-picture projector.

    355,    Photocopying, subclass 30 for a projector printer having
    temperature control.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 293 for such structure having a heat filter
    and subclass 294 for light-projection structure having ventilating and
    cooling means.  See the note to Class 362 below the class definitions to
    this Class 353.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics and subclasses
    38+ for controls.


CLS 353/53
TXT Subject matter under subclass 52 including means to conduct heat or direct
    heated air to a film-slide magazine or to a film strip to heat the film
    before projection to prevent unequal expansion of the film (known as
    "popping") and thus prevent distortion of the projected image.


CLS 353/54
TXT Subject matter under subclass 52 including a liquid, usually water, in or
    near the projection path which absorbs heat energy thus reducing the amount
    of heat transmitted to the film or other object to be projected.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    358 for liquid in an optical element or system which affects infrared
    radiation.


CLS 353/55
TXT Subject matter under subclass 52 including a sheet of material in the
    optical path which at least partially separates the heat or infrared energy
    from the visible-light energy; by absorbing the heat energy, by reflecting
    the heat energy and transmitting the visible light, or by transmitting the
    heat energy while reflecting the visible light toward the object to be
    projected.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 148 for a heat filter in a
    motion-picture projector.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    350+ for heat filters generally.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 293 for a light projector having a heat
    filter.


CLS 353/56
TXT Subject matter under subclass 52 including a low heat-transmitting shield,
    liner, or partition which absorbs or reflects heat and stops heat from
    reaching particular parts of the projector; a mask having an aperture in
    the optical path which blocks part of the heat and light rays; a mask which
    alternately blocks the optical path for the purpose of reducing the heat
    energy reaching the object; or nonheat-conducting material employed in
    constructing the projector to reduce the transfer of heat to particular
    projector parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88+,    for shutters which are not set forth as being for the purpose of
    blocking heat energy but which would in fact do so.


CLS 353/57
TXT Subject matter under subclass 52 including a fan or rotor and means to
    rotate the fan or rotor to move cooler air into the projector and to move
    warmer air out of the projector to cool the parts of the projector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 202 for a motion-picture
    projector light source with ventilating and cooling, and subclasses 146+
    for film cooling.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 294 for a light projector or a
    subcombination of an image projector with no image-projecting structure
    including ventilating or cooling means.  See also, section VII of the Class
    Definitions of this Class 353.


CLS 353/58
TXT Subject matter under subclass 57 wherein the projector includes a plurality
    of fans or rotors which force air through parts of the projector.


CLS 353/59
TXT Subject matter under subclass 57 wherein the motor which rotates the blower
    is operatively connected with the slide-transferring mechansim to provide
    the force which moves the slides.


CLS 353/60
TXT Subject matter under subclass 57 wherein the air is particularly forced
    against and moves substantially perpendicular to the front or back side of
    an object to be projected to hold the object in place during projection or
    to merely cool the object.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 146 for similar structure in a
    motion- picture projector.


CLS 353/61
TXT Subject matter under subclass 57 including special passages or deflectors
    to direct air to certain parts of the projector for cooling thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for means to direct air to a flat side of the object being
    projected.


CLS 353/62
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the projector is
    particularly adapted to project an image of an opaque stencil or opaque
    plate which is perforated so as to form a particular message or design on a
    viewing screen or on a cloud in the sky.

    (1)     Note.  The projectors in this subclass direct light on the far side
    or side of the opaque object opposite the viewing screen or cloud as in
    transparency projector.  In the opaque projectors in subclasses 63+ and 65+
    below light is projected onto and reflected from the near side or side of
    the object nearer the viewing screen.


CLS 353/63
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including a projector which
    selectively projects an image from an opaque object by light reflection
    therefrom or alternatively projects an image from a transparency by
    directing light therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for a projector which projects the image of a stencil or perforated
    object by projecting light from the far side of the object to produce a
    profile or silhouette on a viewing screen.


CLS 353/64
TXT Subject matter under subclass 63 including a plurality of mirrors or
    reflecting prisms positioned between the light source and the viewing
    screen to direct light along or toward the optical path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73,     78 and 99, for a projector with plural reflectors.


CLS 353/65
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including means to project the
    image of an opaque object by reflecting light from the object rather than
    projecting light through a slide or film as in a transparency projector.

    (1)     Note.  The object may be a page of a book, a three-dimensional
    object or other generally-opaque object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for a projector which projects the image of a stencil or perforated
    object by projecting light from the far side of the object to produce a
    profile or silhouette on a viewing screen.

    63+,    for a projector which may selectively be employed to project an
    opaque or transparent object.


CLS 353/66
TXT Subject matter under subclass 65 including a mirror or reflecting prism
    positioned between the light source and the viewing screen to direct light
    along the optical path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98,     for a projector having a reflector.


CLS 353/67
TXT Subject matter under subclass 66 including a cabinet which encases the
    projector and part of the viewing screen and which excludes outside light
    from the projection path to form a unitary device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77+,    for a cabinet-type projector having a reflector.


CLS 353/68
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including a projector which is
    particularly adapted to selectively project an image to a viewing screen
    from a slide or from a film strip.

    (1)     Note.  These devices usually have means to adjust a projection gate
    for either slides or strip film or have two such gates in sequence and
    means to focus on either one or the other.


CLS 353/69
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including a rectifying element in
    the optical path, or means to adjust an element in the optical path to
    offset the undesired effects of abnormalities of the film or slides or
    undesired effects of the screen and projector alignment.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass 69 has means to compensate for warped film or
    for film or slides of different size, thickness or density so that an
    undistorted image of the object on the film will be focused on the viewing
    screen; while indented subclass 70 has means to compensate for the
    projection axis being inclined to the viewing screen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76      and 101, for a projector with focusing means.

    104,    for a slide changer adapted to transfer slides of various
    dimensions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 140 for motion-picture
    projectors with focus control.


CLS 353/70
TXT Subject matter under subclass 69 including means to eliminate the keystone
    effect or other distortion when the projector is above the viewing screen,
    as in most theaters, or when the projection axis is oblique to the screen
    or some other purpose.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 105+ for an optical
    rectifier-type  motion-picture device.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    668+ for an anamorphoser which may be used to correct for distortion.


CLS 353/71
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including a cabinet which encases
    a projector and part of a viewing screen, wherein the projector may be
    employed to project an image on said viewing screen or wherein the
    projector may be employed alternatively to project an image on a distant,
    detached viewing screen.

    (1)     Note.  The screen in the cabinet may be removed and the projector
    focused on the distant screen or a reflector may be moved into or out of
    the optical path so that the projected rays bypass the screen in the
    cabinet and form an image on the distant screen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for a projector or screen removable from a common housing.


CLS 353/72
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including a projector and a
    screen in a common housing wherein the housing is opened and the projector
    or screen is at least partially removed when projecting the image on the
    screen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for similar structure which additionally houses a phonograph.

    71,     for a cabinet projector which may selectively be employed to
    project on a distant detached screen as well as on the cabinet screen.

    74,     for a cabinet-type projector where the projector and one side of
    the screen remain enclosed in the cabinet during use.

    79,     for a projector structurally related to a viewing screen.

    119,    for a housing for a projector only.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 10.1 for a cabinet for a
    projector where an optical part of the device is only nominally claimed.  A
    patent which claims a projector and a screen or a plurality of optical
    elements is in this Class 353.


CLS 353/73
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72 including two or more mirrors or
    reflecting prisms in the optical path between the lamp and the viewing
    screen during use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     for plural reflectors in a cabinet-type projector.

    99,     for a projector having a plurality of reflectors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    850+ for plural mirrors, per se.


CLS 353/74
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including a cabinet which encases
    the projector and part of the viewing screen and which excludes outside
    light from the projection path to form a unitary device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for a cabinet-type projector with sound accompaniment.

    47,     for a cabinet-type projector where the image moves on the screen.

    67,     for a cabinet-type projector for projecting an image of an opaque
    object.

    71,     for a cabinet-type projector which may selectively be employed to
    project on a distant detached screen as well as on the cabinet screen.

    72,     for a projector and a viewing screen in a casing which is opened to
    remove the projector or screen for use.

    79,     for a projector structurally related to a screen.

    119,    for a projector with its housing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 10.1 for a cabinet for a
    projector where an optical part of the device is only nominally claimed.  A
    patent which claims a projector and a screen or a plurality of optical
    elements is in this Class 353.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, for a cabinet-type motion picture
    projector.


CLS 353/75
TXT Subject matter under subclass 74 including opaque or translucent
    light-limiting means such as a diaphragm, hood, curtain, aperture plate,
    framing plate, light baffle or shield.

    (1)     Note.  The light-limiting or controlling means may be positioned
    either in the light path to block a portion of the light from the lamps or
    may be positioned near the light path to reduce undesired light to or from
    the light path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97,     for projectors having opaque or translucent light-limiting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    738+ for a lens in combination with a diaphragm or mask of general utility
    and subclasses 227+ for light control by an opaque element or medium
    movable in or through a light path.


CLS 353/76
TXT Subject matter under subclass 74 including adjustable structure to focus
    the image of the object on the screen or to increase or decrease the size
    of the image relative to the size of the object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for changing focus for warped film or varying size, thickness or
    density of slides or film.

    101,    for lenses which are adjustable for forming or varying the
    magnification.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 140, for motion-picture devices
    with focus control.

    355,    Photocopying, subclasses 55+ for a projection printer having focus
    or magnification control.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    813+, 821, 823+, 827+, and 694+ for adjustable lens supports or mounts.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 89+ for cameras having focusing means.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics, subclasses 38+
    for controls, subclasses 130+ for image formation, subclasses 168+ for
    charging, subclasses 177+ for exposure, and subclasses 222+ for
    development.


CLS 353/77
TXT Subject matter under subclass 74 including a mirror or reflecting prism
    positioned between the light source and the viewing screen to direct light
    along the optical path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     for a cabinet-type projector for projecting an image of an opaque
    object, wherein the projector includes a reflector.

    72,     for a projector and a screen in a housing which is open during
    projection wherein the housing includes a reflector.

    81,     for a projector with a prism.

    98,     for a projector with a reflector.


CLS 353/78
TXT Subject matter under subclass 77 including a plurality of reflectors as
    there defined, which usually direct the light to form a folded light path
    inside the cabinet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73,     for a projector and a screen in a housing which is open during
    projection wherein the housing includes plural reflectors.

    81,     for a projector having a reflecting prism and a mirror.

    99,     for a projector with plural mirrors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    850+ for plural mirrors, per se.


CLS 353/79
TXT Subject matter under the class definition where the projector is connected
    to a viewing screen by physical means such as mechanical linkage to space
    the screen from the projector or electrical wiring to control movement of
    the screen from the position of the projector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for the combination of a projector and viewing screen with a casing
    which opens to expose the projector or screen during use.

    74,     for the combination of a projector and a viewing screen enclosed by
    a cabinet.


CLS 353/80
TXT Subject matter under subclass 79 wherein a shadow image of an article is
    projected on the viewing screen.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the structure relating the projector and
    viewing screen may be parts of a machine tool. However, where specific
    structure of the machine tool is claimed classification is in 81, Tools;
    82, Turning; 83, Cutting; 409 Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, or 408,
    Cutting by Use of Rotating, Axially Moving Tool, depending on the type of
    machine tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for devices which project a shadow image of a stencil or perforated
    plate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools; 82, Turning; 83, Cutting; 409, Gear Cutting, Milling, or
    Planing, and 408, Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclass
    16, for profile projectors in combination with machine tools.  See (1) Note
    above.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, for devices which are used to
    compare a profile with a standard.


CLS 353/81
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including a prism in the optical
    path to reflect or refract the light rays of the path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33      and 36, for a projector for producing a composite image which
    includes a prism, especially subclass 33 for a composite projector for
    multicolor pictures which includes a prism.

    70,     for a prism employed to correct for keystone effects.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    669 for a lens in combination with a prism anomorphoser and subclasses 831+
    for prisms, per se.


CLS 353/82
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including a single lamp and two
    or more optical paths and means to direct light from the lamp to the
    optical paths, usually alternately.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for a projector having plural optical paths and a single light
    source where the two paths are employed simultaneously to obtain a
    composite image.

    49,     for plural projection paths and a single light source in a
    projector for moving the image on a viewing screen.

    63,     for an epidiascopic projector having plural optical paths and a
    single light source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, for plural motion-picture projectors
    having a single light source.


CLS 353/83
TXT Subject matter under subclass 82 including means to fade in a picture in
    one projection path or to fade out the picture in the other projection
    path, usually by means of a shutter or by gradually shifting the lamp from
    one projection path to the other.


CLS 353/84
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including means in the optical
    path to block or absorb particular wavelengths of light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7+,     for stereoscopic projectors having color filters.

    29,     for an image projector plus additional means to direct light, which
    may be colored, on or near the projected image.

    31+,    for multicolor-picture projectors.

    32,     for a projector for lenticular film having a color filter.

    55,     for a projector having a heat filter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 42 for a method of
    motion-picture projecting including employment of a color filter.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    885+ for filters, per se.


CLS 353/85
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including means to switch the
    lamp off and on or to otherwise modify the illumination intensity or means
    to adjustably position the lamp relative to other parts of the projector.

    (1)     Note.  The projection light sources as here classified include a
    light source together with some picture-projector structure such as a slide
    changer or film gate.  Class 362, Illumination, provides for illumination
    generally or where the picture projector is only nominally claimed.

    (2)     Note.  Shutters or screens which merely block the light are
    provided for in subclass 88 below and are not in this subclass 85.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for a battery-operated projector.

    82,     for a projector having a single light source and plural projection
    paths and which projector may have means to control its light source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 541+ for illuminated
    signs, and subclasses 442+ for display devices with selective or
    intermittent illumination.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 198+ for motion-picture
    projection light sources.

    355,    Photocopying, subclasses 67+ for a projection printer having an
    illumination system or illumination details.

    362,    Illumination, especially subclass 295 for light projectors with
    lamp control. See (1) Note above.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics, subclasses 38+
    for controls, subclasses 130+ for image formation, subclasses 168+ for
    charging, and subclasses 177+ for exposure.


CLS 353/86
TXT Subject matter under subclass 85 including means to gradually extinguish
    the lamp to fade out a picture or to gradually increase the illuminating
    power of the lamp to fade in a picture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83,     for a projector having a single light source and plural projection
    paths and means to dissolve a picture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 94 for motion-picture projectors
    having dissolve effects.


CLS 353/87
TXT Subject matter under subclass 85 including means to movably position the
    light source, usually relative to a reflector or lens in the projector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25+,    for a projector where the light source is aligned with a portion of
    a microfilm.

    82,     for a projector having a single light source and plural projection
    paths where the light source may be adjustable.

    86,     for a projector having an adjustable lamp for dissolve effects.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 285+ for a light projector including an
    adjustable light source.


CLS 353/88
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including means to interrupt the
    light from the lamp in the projector, usually during movement or changing
    of the picture carrier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 204+ for motion-picture
    shutters.

    355,    Photocopying, subclass 71 for a projection printer having a
    shutter, diaphragm, polarizer or filter.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    738+ for lenses combined with such shutters or diaphragms and subclasses
    227+ for shutters or diaphragms, per se.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 452+ for camera shutters.


CLS 353/89
TXT Subject matter under subclass 88 including two or more optical paths for
    projection of pictures with either a shutter for each path or a shutter
    which alternately blocks the two paths.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 205+ for a motion-picture
    machine having plural light paths and a shutter.


CLS 353/90
TXT Subject matter under subclass 89 including means to gradually increase the
    intensity of an image (i.e., fade in) or to gradually diminish the
    intensity of an image until it is no longer recognizable (i.e., fade out).

    (1)     Note.  When one picture is being faded in and the other is faded
    out at the same time both pictures are at least partially on the screen at
    the same time.  This is not considered a composite image, however, since
    the various parts must cooperate to form such an image as defined in
    subclass 30 about.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 217 for a motion-picture shutter
    for dissolve.


CLS 353/91
TXT Subject matter under subclass 88 including a periodically-energized
    electromagnet which either directly operates the shutter or which operates
    some other part of the projector which is connected to the shutter.


CLS 353/92
TXT Subject matter under subclass 88 including a slide magazine and mechanism
    to horizontally move the slides individually into the projection path and
    back into the magazine and to advance the magazine all in cooperation with
    movement of the shutter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    below for similar structure without a claimed shutter.


CLS 353/93
TXT Subject matter under subclass 88 including means to gradually increase the
    intensity of an image (i.e., fade in) or to gradually diminish the
    intensity of an image until it is no longer recognizable (i.e., fade out).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for projectors having shutters
    disclosed as being for dissolving views and shutters having multiple
    elements which move into the light path to block the light.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 217 for motion-picture shutters
    for dissolve.


CLS 353/94
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including a plurality of
    projectors as there defined or two or more light sources with their
    respective associated optical paths.

    (1)     Note.  The projectors may be in the same or in different casings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30+,    for plural projectors employed to form a composite image.

    48,     for plural projection paths where the image moves on the viewing
    screen.

    82,     for plural projection paths where only a single lamp is employed.

    89+,    for plural projection paths and a significant shutter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclass 286 for plural celestial- or
    planetarium-type projectors.


CLS 353/95
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including structure in the
    optical path which positions a film strip in the focal plane of the
    projector and masks the film edges so that a single frame or picture area
    is projected.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the gate includes an aperture plate for framing and
    a pressure plate for positioning the film against the aperture plate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for a projector having a film gate which includes a transparent
    plate.

    69,     for a projector with means to compensate for warpage, varying size,
    thickness or density of film or slides.

    84,     for a film gate in combination with a color filter.

    97,     for a projector with an aperture plate or diaphragm.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 221+ for motion-pictures film
    gates.


CLS 353/96
TXT Subject matter under subclass 95 in combination with means to position a
    lens in the projector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for a projector having a transparent plate-type film gate and a
    lens support.

    100,    for a projector having a lens support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 231 for a motion-picture film
    gate in combination with a lens mount.


CLS 353/97
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including opaque or translucent
    light limiting or controlling means such as a diphragm, hood, curtain,
    aperture plate, framing plate, light baffle or shield.

    (1)     Note.  The light-limiting or controlling means may be positioned
    either in the light path to block a portion of the light from the lamp or
    may be positioned near the light path to reduce undesired light to or from
    the light path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for means to eliminate Keystone effects.

    75,     for light shields, etc., in cabinet-type projectors.

    79,     for a hood which may structurally connect the projector and viewing
    screen.

    88,     for a projector having a shutter.

    98,     for specular reflectors in the light path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    738+ for a lens in combination with a diaphragm or mask of general utility
    and subclasses 227+ for light control by an opaque element or medium
    movable in or through a light path.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 118+, for a
    slit aperture in an optical system for recording or reproducing sound.


CLS 353/98
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including a surface, which
    specularly reflects light, positioned behind the light source or anywhere
    in the light path between the light source and the viewing screen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for an episcope having a reflector.

    37,     for a composite projector having a reflector.

    50,     for a projector for moving an image on a viewing screen and having
    a reflector.

    67,     72 and 77, for a cabinet-type projector having a reflector.

    81,     for a projector having a reflecting prism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    355,    Photocopying, subclasses 43, 45, 49, 51, 57, 60, 65, and 66 for a
    projection printer having a reflector between the original and the
    photosensitive paper.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    838+ for reflectors, per se.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 296+, for light projectors having
    reflectors.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics, subclasses 38+
    for controls, subclasses 130+ for image formation, subclasses 168+ for
    charging, subclasses 177+ for exposure, subclasses 222+ for development,
    subclasses 297+ for transfer, subclasses 320+ for fixing, subclasses 343+
    for cleaning, and subclasses 361+ for document handling.


CLS 353/99
TXT Subject matter under subclass 98 including a plurality of reflectors as
    there defined.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for plural reflectors in a projector for moving the image on a
    viewing screen.

    64,     for an epidiascope having plural reflectors.

    73      and 78, for plural reflectors in a cabinet for a projector and a
    viewing screen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    850+ for plural reflectors, per se.

    362,    Illumination, especially subclasses 297+ for light projectors
    having two or more reflectors.


CLS 353/100
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including means to position a
    lens in the projector.

    (1)     Note.  Subclass 119 below has projector housings which may be
    recited as having lens apertures in their walls.  A patent in this subclass
    100 must have structure to support the lens, inside or outside the
    projector, which is more than a mere aperture in the projector casing.

    (2)     Note.  Class 359 has lens mounts for projectors where the projector
    is only nominally claimed.  However, if a lamp, slide changer or other
    projector structure such as details of the housing are claimed the patent
    is in this Class 353.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24      and 96, for a projector having a film gate and a lens support.

    119,    for lens apertures in projector casings.  See (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    811+ and especially subclasses 819+ for lens supports and mounts of general
    utility.  See (2) Note above.


CLS 353/101
TXT Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the support movably positions the
    lens for a purpose such as focusing, varying the magnification or
    facilitating insertion of the film in the projector near the lens.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for changing focus for warped film or varying size, thickness or
    density of slides or film.

    76,     for lens positioning means in cabinet- type projectors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 140, for motion-picture devices
    with focus control.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    813+, 821, 823+, 827+, and 694+ for adjustable lens supports or mounts.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 89+ for cameras having focusing means.


CLS 353/102
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including a lens in the optical
    path between the lamp and the object to form and direct parallel rays along
    the optical axis toward the object or to secure a desired distribution of
    the light over the surface of the object, the lens usually having a
    specific surface, shape, index of refraction, or dimensional relationship
    to the lamp or object whose image is to be projected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for a unitary condenser lens having plural refracting surfaces.

    100+,   for a lens with its support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    642+ for condenser lenses, per se.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 257+ for illuminating projectors having
    condensing lenses.


CLS 353/103
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including mechanism for moving
    slides into the projection path; or portions of this mechanism such as a
    slide changer which moves slides from a magazine into the projection path
    and back to the magazine or a magazine which moves to position individual
    slides next to the slide changer.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass 103 and those indented hereunder provide for
    slide changers disclosed for use with projectors while Class 40 provides
    for slide changers disclosed for use in viewers only.  This class provides
    for slide changers where the indicated use is both for projectors and
    viewers.

    (2)     Note.  The indented subclasses provide for magazines which are to
    be employed with certain kinds of slide changers. Class 206, Special
    Receptacles and Packages, subclass 456 provides for slide magazines, per
    se, where no relationship or means for connecting to a projector is claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for slide changing by rising heated air.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, for slide changers employed in
    slide viewers.  See (1) Note above.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 456 for slide magazines,
    per se.  See (2) Note above.


CLS 353/104
TXT Subject matter under subclass 103 wherein the slide changer or carrier is
    particularly adapted to hold or move slides of different lengths, widths,
    or thicknesses or slides which are distorted or warped.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for means in the optical path to correct for distortion.


CLS 353/105
TXT Subject matter under subclass 103 wherein a magnet, either permanent or
    electromagnetic, is employed to aid in getting the slides into the correct
    position for projection.


CLS 353/106
TXT Subject matter under subclass 105 wherein the magnet is a
    periodically-energized electromagnet for moving a slide or slide carrying
    structure.


CLS 353/107
TXT Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein the slide carrier is the type
    which is rotated, such as a rotary magazine or a disc to which slides are
    fixed, about an axis during the slide moving cycle.


CLS 353/108
TXT Subject matter under subclass 103 wherein the carrier is moved to position
    the slides in the projection path so that the slides remain attached to the
    carrier before, during and after projection as opposed to being moved from
    a magazine before projection and to a magazine after projection.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass most of the patents are to a drum or
    cylindrical carrier having a circular wall to which slides are attached and
    on which the slides remain during the projection cycle.

    The projection lamp is usually mounted inside the drum or cylinder so that
    as the cylinder is rotated the slide between the lamp and the viewing
    screen is projected on the screen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for slide changing by rising, heated air.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 361 for similar
    slide-moving mechanism in viewers.


CLS 353/109
TXT Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein the carrier is a chain or belt to
    which slides are attached or a chain which is formed partially or
    completely by the individual slide holders.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 361+ for viewers with
    similar slide-moving mechanism.


CLS 353/110
TXT Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein the slides are attached to a flat
    disc shaped carrier and are in the plane of the disc which disc is rotated
    in the projection path for removing one slide from and positioning another
    slide in the projection path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 361+ for a viewer
    with similar slide-moving structure.


CLS 353/111
TXT Subject matter under subclass 103 wherein at least some movement of the
    slides to or away from the projection position is caused by the slides own
    weight, the slides either falling or sliding downwardly.


CLS 353/112
TXT Subject matter under subclass 111 including a magazine in which the slides
    are stored before being projected and a receptacle, which may be another
    magazine, to receive the slides after projection.


CLS 353/113
TXT Subject matter under subclass 103 including mechanism to move a slide from
    a first magazine in which slides are stored before projection to a second
    magazine where the slides are stored after projection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    for a gavity operated slide changer having a feeder and a receiver
    magazine.


CLS 353/114
TXT Subject matter under subclass 103 wherein the individual slides are moved
    horizontally into and out of the projection path and are held in a
    substantially vertical path perpendicular to the projection path during
    such movement.


CLS 353/115
TXT Subject matter under subclass 114 including means to move a slide
    vertically in addition to horizontally reciprocating it, usually to raise
    the slide to the projection level before moving it horizontally into the
    light path or to raise the slide slightly after it is moved out of the
    light path so that it can be manually gripped and removed from the slide
    changer.


CLS 353/116
TXT Subject matter under subclass 114 including a magazine which is open on at
    least one side or means to position a magazine so that the slides are
    movable into the projection path and back into the magazine by means of the
    reciprocation mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92,     for a projector having this structure with a claimed shutter.


CLS 353/117
TXT Subject matter under subclass 116 where the magazine is shaped as a drum
    and rotates about the central axis of the drum to position different slides
    for reciprocation to and from the projection path.


CLS 353/118
TXT Subject matter under subclass 103 including a hook which engages a slide,
    or a hook on the slide which engages a complementary part on the changer,
    or mechanism which frictionally grasps the individual slides.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    for magnetic gripping,

    111+,   for devices employing a hook or gripper to elevate slides which
    later drop because of gravity.


CLS 353/119
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including the structure which
    substantially encases or encloses projection structure.

    (1)     Note.  Class 248, Supports, especially subclasses 637+, provides
    for projector supports where no significant projection structure is
    claimed.  The broad recitation of a projector combined with a support does
    not preclude classificiation in Class 248. Class 352 provides in subclass
    243 for motion-picture projectors combined with supports as there defined.
    See (1) Note under said subclass 243.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for a projector and phonograph in a common portable casing.

    42,     for gun- or flashlight-type housings.

    52,     for projector casings which include means to control temperature.

    72,     for a projector or screen removable from a common housing.

    74,     for cabinets including a projection screen.

    97,     for hoods, baffles or light shields.

    100+,   for lens mounts or supports which may  be in a casing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 637+ for projector supports where there are no
    optical limitations.  See also (1) Note above.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 10.1 for a cabinet for a
    projector where the optical parts of the projector are not claimed.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 242 for motion-picture projector
    housings and subclass 243 for supports.


CLS 353/120
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including a film with particular
    relationships of the pictures thereon to each other or to the dimensions of
    a film strip, or with indexing means on the film; or including a film or
    slide frame which has both a picture and a sound record thereon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 700+ for projector
    slides with frames.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 232+ for picture carriers for
    motion pictures.


CLS 353/121
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including process steps for use
    in projecting an image of an object on a viewing screen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 40+ for a method of projecting
    motion pictures.


CLS 353/122
TXT Subject matter under the class definition which is not provided for in any
    of the preceding subclasses of this class.


CLS 355/
TTL PHOTOCOPYING

CLS 355/
TXT

    I.      DEFINITIONS OF TERMS USED

    CARRIER

    (a) The element that contains the original image to be imaged onto a
    receiver.  The carrier is commonly a photographic negative, but may be a
    positive, a document, a book page, etc.; and (b) a substance in
    electrophotographic developer which conveys a toner material to a copy
    substrate but which does not, itself, become a part of the developed copy.

    CONCENTRATED LIGHT SOURCE

    The source of illumination for the copier.  It is usually a projection lamp
    but may be a lens or mirror system utilizing sunlight.

    CONDENSING LENS

    A lens or combination of lenses used to gather light from a source and
    converge (condense) it onto an image plane.

    COPYING CAMERA OR PROJECTION PRINTER

    Apparatus for projecting an image of an original, by passing light through
    or around the original or reflecting light from the original, onto a
    photosensitive recording surface for the purpose of making a copy of the
    original.  The image is usually enlarged or reduced in size with reference
    to the original.  A copying camera or projection printer generally includes
    (1) a concentrated light source from either an artificial or natural
    emanation, (2) a condensing lens or other light paralleling element, (3) a
    holding or positioning device for the original, (4) a projection objective
    or projection lens system for directing light after it passes through or is
    reflected from the original to form an image, (5) a holder for the
    photosensitive medium which receives the image, and (6) opaque structure to
    keep unwanted light from reaching the photosensitive medium. The cameras or
    projectors in this class utilize artificial or natural light within the
    visible spectrum.  The original to be projected is planar in nature with
    the plane extending transverse to the direction of projection, and may be
    transparent or opaque.  The planar original is usually in the form of
    flexible film and may be caused to take a curved form in the original
    holder or film gate.  In operation the original is positioned outside one
    focal plane of the projection lens system and an image is formed on a
    photosensitive medium outside the opposite focal plane of the projection
    lens system.  The closer the original is to one focal plane the farther the
    image will be from the other focal plane, and the bigger the image will be.
     In the camera or projector, the relative positioning of the object is
    usually obtained by moving the projection lens system and adjusting its
    focal length rather than by changing the position of the original.

    FILM STRIP

    An indeterminate length of film having either a plurality of images thereon
    or enough space for a plurality of images.

    IMAGE

    The representation of an object (original or carrier) produced by the
    transmission or reflection of light incident upon the original or carrier.

    IMAGE, LATENT

    The invisible image produced by the action of light alone or with other
    electrostatic charge producing means on, or in, a photoreceptor.  A latent
    image may be made visible by development.

    LIGHT SOURCE

    The source of illumination for the copier. It includes filters, reflectors,
    screens and other light modifiers used to affect the spectral distribution,
    spatial distribution and intensity of the illumination.

    MACHINE

    A complete unit in itself for imaging an original or carrier onto a
    receiver.  It may also include means for developing, transferring and
    fixing the image, as well as means for handling the record carrier on which
    the image is fixed.

    MASTER

    (a) The negative or positive original from which reproductions are made;
    (b) a microform copy which is used for the production of copies; or (c) a
    copy from which additional reproductions are made.

    NEGATIVE

    A visible image on a copy material in which the dark portions of an
    original appear light and the light portions appear dark.

    ORIGINAL

    Any object from which a copy is made by forming an image thereof on a
    photoreceptor.

    PHOTORECEPTOR

    A medium which changes its chemical or mechanical properties when exposed
    to light.  This term includes photosensitive members, etc.

    PLATEN

    A flat or curved piece of rigid material on or against which an original is
    placed for imaging the original onto a photoreceptor.

    PROJECTION OBJECTIVE OR PROJECTION LENS  SYSTEM

    A lens or lens systems used to optically form an image of an original onto
    a sensitized surface, viewing screen, or other image plane with or without
    magnification or reduction of the original in the image plane.

    PROJECTION PRINTER

    See Copying Camera, defined herein.

    RECEIVER

    The light sensitive element onto which the image from the carrier is
    recorded.

    TONER

    A material, e.g., finely divided (usually thermoplastic) powder, or
    pigmented polymer particles, an ink, or magnetic particles, used in
    electrostatic processes to make visible a latent image and which is
    treated, e.g., fused, dried, etc., to render the image permanent. It may
    include or exclude a carrier element.

    II.     GENERAL STATEMENT OF THE CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    A.      This class provides for apparatus and methods for photographically
    copying information from an original or carrier that is not classified
    elsewhere, generally employing a concentrated source of light and an image
    receiving medium with a photosensitive emulsion surface.

    B.      Various plural and composite types of copies are included such as
    those involving plural projected images including multicolor and duplex.

    C.      Copies selective at the operator's choice are also included where
    one original of a group of similar originals may be selected for copying.

    D.      Certain combinations, subcombinations and perfecting features are
    included such as with film developing or severing, with temperature
    control, and with a viewing screen.  Included also are subcombinations
    which are peculiar to copies such as holders for the original or
    photosensitive paper.  The class also contains improvement in particular
    elements of or their relationship to the copies when the elements are
    claimed in combination with other photographic copying structure.  These
    improvements may be in filters, shutters, gates, reflectors, lens mounts,
    condensers, or means to convey the original.

    E.      Methods of copying are also provided for here where all the steps
    are for copying a sheet film strip.

    III.    PHOTOCOPYING APPARATUS CLASSIFIED ELSEWHERE

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 315.3 provides for xerographic copying
    methods and apparatus which utilize invisible radiation, subclass 317.1
    provides for infrared or thermal image document pattern copying methods or
    apparatus, and subclasses 580+ for methods and apparatus to expose by
    invisible radiant energy a recording detector.  Copying structure or
    methods including specific chemical emulsions on the photosensitive paper
    are classified in Class 430, Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process,
    Composition, or Product Thereof.  Class 352, Optics: Motion Pictures,
    provides for copying which includes the use of a motion picture camera or a
    motion picture projector.  However, this class, 355, has means for copying
    motion picture film which does not include such motion picture camera or
    projector.


    IV.     PHOTOCOPYING APPARATUS COMBINED WITH OTHER STRUCTURE AND CLASSIFIED
    ELSEWHERE

    Patents which claim apparatus for photographing plural images such as an
    object and a carrier (e.g., an identification card) are classified in Class
    396, Photography, especially subclasses 322+ or Class 346, Recorders. Class
    386, Television Signal Processing for Dynamic Recording or Reproducing,
    subclasses 30, 42+, and 130 provide for the photocopying which includes
    forming a television image where a detailed cathode-ray tube is claimed;
    where only a nominal cathode-ray tube is set forth.  Class 396, subclasses
    429+ provide for the patent. The combination of a detailed register with a
    broadly or specifically claimed copier is classified in Class 235,
    Registers. See the first paragraph of the Class 235 definitions.

    V.      PHOTOCOPYING SUBCOMBINATIONS CLASSIFIED ELSEWHERE

    Class 226, Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, especially
    subclasses 52+ provides for film advancing mechanisms where no more than a
    nominal optical or photocopying element is claimed. Photographic lights and
    projection lights, per se, are in Class 362, Illumination, subclasses 3 and
    257.  Class 271, Sheet Feeding or Delivering, provides for sheet feeding or
    delivering means where no specific optical or photographic structure is set
    forth.  Class 359, Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements,
    provides for lenses in subclasses 642+, reflectors in subclasses 838+ and
    optical filters in subclasses 885+.

    VI.     SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, especially subclasses
    52+ for film advancing means in a copier where no more than one optical
    element is claimed and where no detailed optics is recited.

    235,    Registers, for a detailed register in combination with a broadly or
    specifically claimed copier.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 324+ for unwinding and
    rewinding a machine convertible information carrier; e.g., an image film,
    with no more than a typical relationship between an optical system and the
    unwinding/rewinding, and subclasses 520+ for convolute winding of an
    elongated material of general use.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 315.3 for methods and apparatus for
    zerographic copying by use of invisible radiation, subclasses 317.1+ for
    document copies relying upon infrared or thermal patterns of the document
    transferred to the copy paper, and subclasses 580+ and apparatus to expose,
    by invisible radiation generally, a recording detector generally.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, for a sheet feeding or delivering
    subcombination where no specific optical or photographic structure is set
    forth.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 467-472 for character font
    generation and subclasses 326+ for operator interface processing.

    346,    Recorders, subclasses 107.1+ for light or beam recording of
    phenomenon.

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, subclasses 112+ for
    electrostatic marking, subclasses 224+ for light or beam marking apparatus
    or processes

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, for photocopying apparatus and methods
    involving a motion picture camera or motion picture projector.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, for lenses
    in subclasses 642+, reflectors in subclasses 838+ and optical filters in
    subclasses 885+.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 3 and 257 for photographic and projection
    light source subcombinations which may include condenser lenses having no
    other photocopying structure.

    386,    Television Signal Processing for Dynamic Recording or Reproducing,
    subclasses 30, 42+, and 128+ for photographic television recording
    apparatus, particularly subclass 130 for such apparatus having cathode-ray
    tube.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 101+ for
    computer graphics and control of data presentation with creation or
    manipulation of graphic objects or text performed by a computer or
    processor.

    396,    Photography, appropriate subclasses and particularly subclasses
    322+ for plural image recording and subclasses 429+ for a nominal or
    broadly recited cathode- ray tube upon which a television image of an
    original is formed and then photographed.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product,
    appropriate subclasses for radiation imagery chemistry, process,
    composition, or product.

    707,    Data Processing - Database And File Management, Data Structures, or
    Document Processing, subclasses 500-542 for document processing performed
    by a computer for presentation.


CLS 355/1
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the coping device
    includes one or more transparent elongated structures (e.g., fibers, rods,
    or pipes) to transmit light rays from one point to another (usually from
    the original to the photosensitive medium) by internal reflections or modal
    transmission.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 197, 359, and 804 for fiber optics utilized
    with television systems.

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 484 and 901.1 for fiber optics or optical
    waveguides utilized with facsimile systems.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, appropriate subclasses for fiber optics
    structure, per se.


CLS 355/2
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the device is adapted to
    produce precision photographic copies of a master hologram, seismogram,
    graph or scale; the master being on a sheet or strip of paper or film.

    (1)     Note. This subclass provides for copying by image projection or
    contact printing. However, where a mechanical means controls structure to
    project a mere spot or line of light on a light sensitive material the
    device is classified in Class 396, Photography, subclass 548. Subclasses
    429+ in Class 396 provide for a camera combined with a diverse art device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, for seismogram, graph or scale copying
    which includes scribing.

    396,    Photography, subclass 548 for means to project a mere spot or line
    of light on a light sensitive material and subclasses 429+ for a camera
    combined with a diverse art device.


CLS 355/18
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including an apparatus or a
    method for projecting an image of an original, by passing light through or
    around the original or reflecting light from the original, on a
    photosensitive recording surface for the purpose of making a copy of the
    original; the image is usually enlarged or reduced in size with respect to
    the original and the apparatus contains a projection lens or lens system
    for forming the image.

    (1)     Note.  See Part I. Definitions of Terms Used in Class Definitions
    for further explanation of how a Copying Camera or Projection Printer
    operates.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for photocopying involving fiber optics.

    2,      for photocopying a halogram, seismogram, graph, or scale.

    133,    for means to photocopy an original where the original and
    photosensitive paper are spaced apart (i.e., not contact printing) but
    where there is no lens between them.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, especially subclasses
    52+ for film advancing means in a copy camera where no more than one
    optical of photocopying element is claimed and where no detailed optical or
    photocopying element is recited.

    235,    Registers, for a detailed register in combination with a broadly or
    specifically claimed copying camera.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 324+ for unwinding and
    rewinding a machine convertible information carrier; e.g., an image film,
    with no more than a typical relationship between an optical system and the
    unwinding/rewinding, and subclasses 520+ for convolute winding of an
    elongated material of general use.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 317.1 for document copies using infrared
    or thermal patterns of the document on a copy paper, and subclasses 580+
    for methods and apparatus to expose a recording detector to invisible
    radiation patterns generally.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, for a sheet feeding or delivering
    subcombination where no specific optical or photographic structure is set
    forth.

    346,    Recorders, subclasses 107.1+ for phenomenal information optical
    recorders, and particularly subclass 107.2 for such apparatus including a
    camera.

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, subclasses 224+ for
    apparatus or processes using light or beam  for printing the information.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, for photocopying, apparatus and methods
    involving a motion picture cameras or a motion picture projector.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, for lenses
    in subclasses 642+, reflectors in subclasses 838+, and optical filters in
    subclasses 885+.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 3 and 257 for photographic and projection
    light source subcombinations, which may include condenser lenses having no
    other projection printing structure.

    386,    Television Signal Processing for Dynamic Recording or Reproducing,
    subclasses  42+ and 130 for a photographic recorder in combination with
    detailed television means for first transmitting an image of the original
    to the surface of a cathode-ray tube and then photographing the image.

    396,    Photography, appropriate subclasses and particularly subclasses
    322+ for plural image recording and subclasses 429+ for a nominal or
    broadly recited cathode-ray tube upon which a television image of an
    original is formed and then photographed.

    399,    Electrophotography, subject matter under subclass 364 for duplex
    copying where an electrophotographic copying apparatus is employed.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, appropriate subclasses for photocopying involving chemical process
    or materials.


CLS 355/19
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 in combination with means to copy film or
    sheets by contact printing or wherein parts are relatively movable or
    interchangeable to convert the projection printer to a contact printer.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for mere subcombinations,
    such as means to control light intensity, which are useful in both
    projection and contact printing.  Patents of this type are classified in
    the appropriate projection printing subclasses below.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for patents which set forth a
    projection and a contact printing species.  Such patents are classified in
    the appropriate projection printing subclass below and cross referenced in
    the appropriate contact printing subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78+,    for contact printing apparatus, per se.


CLS 355/20
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 including a cathode-ray tube for
    illuminating the original to be copied.

    (1)     Note. This subclass provides for a copier with a cathode-ray tube
    for illumination. Class 386, Television Signal Processing for Dynamic
    Recording or Reproducing, subclasses 30, 42+, and 130 provide for
    photographic television recording or reproducing apparatus having
    cathode-ray tube. Class 396, Photography, subclasses 429+ provide for a
    nominal or broadly recited cathode-ray tube upon which a television image
    of an original is formed and then photographed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     for contact printing with scanning for contrast control.

    84,     for contact printer utilizing scanning means.


CLS 355/21
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 wherein the device has a handle or is
    collapsible into a compact unit for carrying by a person.


CLS 355/22
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 wherein the device is adapted to copy
    pairs of individual picture elements having separate perspectives
    corresponding to the perspectives offered by the right and left eyes of a
    viewer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    396,    Photography, subclasses 324+ for a system for stereoscopically
    photographing plural images in general.

    399,    Electrophotography, subject matter under subclasses 177+ for
    electric photographic apparatus utilizing optical scanning.


CLS 355/23
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 wherein the device is particularly adapted
    for copying the obverse side and the reverse side of the original strip,
    page, or sheet.


CLS 355/24
TXT Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein the device includes a plurality of
    optical paths for simultaneously copying the obverse and the reverse sides
    of the original on either one or on a plurality of photosensitive sheets or
    strips.


CLS 355/25
TXT Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein the copier is adapted to copy
    information from the pages of books and usually includes means to hold the
    pages flat during photographing thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     for book page copier of the contact printing type.


CLS 355/26
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 wherein the device is particularly adapted
    to photograph complete pictures on the obverse side and the reverse side of
    photographic paper which is light sensitive on both sides.

    (1)     Note.  The pictures on the two sides must be complete in themselves
    and not cooperate with each other to form a composite picture as may be
    true in some of the patents in subclasses 32+ below.

    (2)     Note.  The picture images may be focused on the two sides of the
    paper either simultaneously or successively and the picture on the reverse
    side may be either the same or different from the picture on the obverse
    side.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23+,    for a device for copying both sides of an original on both sides of
    a photosensitive paper.


CLS 355/27
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 including means to develop the exposed
    photosensitive film, usually by immersing it in a solution which chemically
    reacts therewith to form a visible image of the original on the film.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    for contact printing machines with flat exposure station including
    developing processing means.

    106,    for contact printing machines with curved exposure station
    including developing processing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    399,    Electrophotography, subject matter under subclasses 233+ for
    electric photographic apparatus utilizing liquid development.


CLS 355/28
TXT Subject matter under the subclass 27 including means to perforate, cut,
    crop, punch or notch the film.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     for projection printing and copying cameras with film severing
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    399,    Electrophotography, subject matter under subclasses 385+ for
    electric photography apparatus with cutting means for the image carrier.


CLS 355/29
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 including means to perforate, cut, crop,
    punch, or notch the film.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for a copier with both film severing and developing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, for the subcombination of a paper or film cutting device.

    399,    Electrophotography, subject matter under subclasses 385+ for
    electric photography apparatus with cutting means for the image carrier.


CLS 355/30
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 including means to heat, cool, or
    ventilate any part of the projection or photographing system; or including
    means to prevent moisture, dust or other foreign matter from coming in
    contact with the projection or photographing system or including means to
    remove such foreign matter from the projection or photographing system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     for a copier having means to compensate for dust or scratches on
    the original.


CLS 355/31
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 wherein the copying device is especially
    adapted to copy a sound record which is on an original document or film
    onto photosensitive material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98,     for contract printing machines with sound track printing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 84+ for
    dynamic duplication of a sound track.


CLS 355/32
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 including means to copy a composite
    picture which is made up of a set of pictures wherein the color of each
    picture of the set is different from the color of the other picture of the
    set and wherein each picture of the set is copied on separate portions of a
    film or wherein the pictures are copied on an emulsion having parts which
    are sensitive only to certain wave lengths of light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for devices for copying stereoscopic pictures wherein one picture
    of a stereo pair is a different color than the other picture of the pair.

    88,     for multicolor contact printers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    399,    Electrophotography, subject matter under subclasses 223+ for
    electrophotographic apparatus utilized for multiple color developing.


CLS 355/33
TXT Subject matter under subclass 32 wherein either the original or the
    photosensitive paper is a lenticular film.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, subclass 32 for an image projector for
    projecting images from lenticular film.


CLS 355/34
TXT Subject matter under subclass 33 including detailed structure for limiting
    the size or shape of the aperture of the optical system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for a projection printing or copying camera with diaphragm in the
    illumination system.


CLS 355/35
TXT Subject matter under subclass 32 wherein the intensity of the light
    reaching the light sensitive paper is variable, wherein the time interval
    during which light reaches the photosensitive paper is variable, wherein
    the contrast of relative brightness of a portion of the picture or margin
    is regulated in accordance with other portions, or wherein the relative
    brightness of the various colors (color balance) is controlled.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for copiers having a claimed shutter,
    adjustable diaphragm, diffraction grating, multicolor filter, variable or
    neutral density filter, a filter selectively placed in the light path, and
    means to vary the length of time a filter is in the light path.  The
    subclass does not include a copier having a mere stationary color filter or
    unadjustable diaphragm but is in parent subclass 32 above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83,     for a contact printer with light monitoring exposure control means.

    115,    for contact printer light box structure with exposure timing means.


CLS 355/36
TXT Subject matter under subclass 35 including an intermittently energized
    electromagnet which may be termed a solenoid or electrical relay.

    (1)     Note.  The electromagnet usually is employed to move a shutter into
    and out of the optical path but it may be employed for other purposes in
    the copy device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for a projection copier having means to identify, compose, or
    select which includes an electromagnet.


CLS 355/37
TXT Subject matter under subclass 35 wherein the apparatus includes a plurality
    of light sources for simultaneous or separate use.

    (1)     Note.  One of the light sources may be spaced from the projector or
    copier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for a projection copier illumination means in general utilizing
    plural lamps.


CLS 355/38
TXT Subject matter under subclass 35 including a photocell or photomultiplier
    tube and related electrical circuitry to detect the intensity of light in
    some part of the optical path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for a projection copier in general with identifying, composing, or
    selecting means including a photocell.

    68,     for a projection copier in general with a photocell or phototube
    utilized in the illumination system.


CLS 355/39
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 including means to photographically record
    a title or legend on a sheet, slide, or film strip either simultaneously
    with or at a different time from the recording of the major subject matter.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for a nominally claimed still camera
    in combination with means to record a title or legend on the film in the
    camera.  However, a claimed motion picture camera in combination with
    titling means is provided for in Class 352, Optics:  Motion Pictures,
    subclass 90.  This subclass 39 does provide for apparatus designed to
    record a title on a motion picture film where said apparatus is neither a
    motion picture camera nor projector.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass provides for means to record titles, legends,
    or inscriptions on film.  Subclasses 40+ below has devices for designating
    or identifying film by numbers or codes rather than by using words.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for means to identify film.  See (2) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    396,    Photography, subclasses 419+ for a photographic support which may
    be adjustable.


CLS 355/40
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 including means to make film strip or
    sheets identifiable by photographing codes, numbers, or symbols thereon; or
    including means to photograph a plurality of original parts in superposed
    or in side by side relationship so that each part contributes a composite
    photograph; or including means to select or copy certain data from a group
    of such data.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     for a copier with means to notch, punch, or cut a film for
    identifying it.

    39,     for devices which photograph titles on film strips or sheets.

    72+,    for holders for halftone screens.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 146.2 for selective
    photography devices including means to compare signals.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 127 for reading
    information into and out of a static storage systems.

    386,    Television Signal Processing for Dynamic Recording or Reproducing,
    subclasses 30, 42+, and 128+ for photographic television recording
    apparatus, particularly subclass 130 for such apparatus having cathode-ray
    tube.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 322+ for a camera used to photograph plural
    images on a photosensitive paper and subclasses 549+ for phototypographs
    which include means to select letters to form words and sentences.


CLS 355/41
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 including a photocell and related
    electrical circuits.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for a multicolor projection copier with means to regulate light
    intensity or exposure time utilizing a photocell or phototube.

    68,     for a projection copier in general with photocell or phototube
    means in the illumination system.


CLS 355/42
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 including an intermittently energized
    electromagnet which may be termed a solenoid or electrical relay.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for a multicolor projection copier with light intensity or exposure
    time regulating means including an electromagnet.


CLS 355/43
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 including a mirror or reflecting prism
    positioned between the object to be copied and the photographic paper to
    direct light along the optical path.

    (1)     Note.  For other projection copiers utilizing reflectors in this
    class, see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS in
    subclass 66.


CLS 355/44
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 including a sheet which is adapted to
    render an image of an object which is projected thereon visible for the
    purpose of photographing the image on the sheet, previewing the image on
    the sheet which is identical to one that will be projected on a
    photosensitive paper, or focusing the optical system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, especially subclass 133 for similar
    structure where either a motion picture projector or a motion picture
    camera is employed.

    399,    Electrophotography, subject matter under subclass 158 for
    electrophotographing devices with reproduced image projection or display of
    developed image.


CLS 355/45
TXT Subject matter under subclass 44 including a mirror or reflecting prism
    positioned between the object and the photographic paper or the screen to
    direct light to the screen or to the photosensitive paper.

    (1)     Note.  For other projection copiers utilizing reflectors in this
    class, see the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS in
    subclass 66.


CLS 355/46
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 including a plurality of copiers or a
    plurality of projection paths for projecting images on photosensitive
    surfaces or on different areas of a single photosensitive surface.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes apparatus having a beam splitter or a
    plurality of objective lenses for making plural projection paths from a
    single projection path for projecting images to photosensitive film.
    However, apparatus including a beam splitter for directing some light to a
    photocell are in subclass 68 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for a contact printer in combination with a projection printer or
    copy camera.

    22,     for apparatus employed to copy stereoscopic pictures.

    24,     for copiers which simultaneously copy both sides of a document and
    have plural optical paths.

    26,     for a copier having plural optical paths for photographing on both
    sides of the photosensitive paper.

    40+,    for apparatus having plural optical paths for making a composite
    image by superimposing images or by focusing images adjacent each other.


CLS 355/47
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 wherein the original or the photographic
    paper is in a curved position in the optical path during copying.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the patents in this subclass relate to distortion
    introducing or rectifying.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, subclasses 5+ and 69+ for image
    projectors having distortion compensating or rectifying means, some of
    which projectors are for transferring images to or from a curved surface.


CLS 355/48
TXT Subject matter under subclass 47 wherein the original moves continuously
    while an image is being projected therefrom to the photosensitive paper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50+,    for projection copiers in general wherein the original moves
    continuously.


CLS 355/49
TXT Subject matter under subclass 48 including a mirror or reflecting prism
    positioned between the object to be copied and the photosensitive paper to
    direct light along the optical path to the photosensitive paper.

    (1)     Note.  For other projection copiers utilizing reflector means see
    the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS in subclass 66.


CLS 355/50
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 wherein the original moves continuously
    while an image is being projected therefrom to the photosensitive paper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for a copier for transferring an image to or from a curved surface
    while the original is moving.


CLS 355/51
TXT Subject matter under subclass 50 including a mirror or reflecting prism
    positioned between the object to be copied and the photosensitive paper to
    direct light along the optical path to the photosensitive paper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for structure similar to that in this subclass where the image is
    transferred to or from a curved surface.


CLS 355/52
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 including means to distort the image
    transferred to the photosensitive paper, such as magnifying or reducing the
    image in one direction more than in the other, or including means to
    correct or compensate for distortion present in the original which is to be
    copied, such as when the original was taken from an airplane which was at
    an angle to the earth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for distortion prevention when copying sound recorders.

    47+,    for distortion prevention or imparting when the image is
    transferred to or from a curved surface.

    50+,    for distortion prevention or imparting when the image of a
    continuously moving original is transferred.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, subclasses 5+ and 69+ for image
    projectors having distortion compensation or rectifying means where no
    camera, copier, or photosensitive paper is claimed.


CLS 355/53
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 including means to reposition the
    photosensitive paper relative to the objective lens after each exposure for
    repeated copying of the same original on either different sheets of
    photosensitive paper or on different areas of a photosensitive sheet or
    film.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46+,    for devices having a plurality of projection lens for producing
    plural images on a photosensitive paper.

    86+,    for contact printers of the step and repeat type wherein a
    sensitized printing press plate or cylinder is utilized.

    95+,    for contact printers of the step and repeat type in general.


CLS 355/54
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 including structure, such as a mask having
    a plurality of apertures therein, for making a plurality of images on
    photosensitive film strip or sheets in the form of rows and columns.

    (1)     Note.  One row of picture on a film strip does not constitute rows
    and columns.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46+,    for copiers which include plural optical paths for imaging plural
    rows of pictures on photosensitive material.

    53,     for repeated copying the same original onto a photographic paper in
    rows and columns.

    64+,    for making a single row of pictures on a film strip.


CLS 355/55
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 including means to move the holder for the
    original, the objective lens, and the photosensitive paper holder relative
    to each other for focusing or changing and degree of magnification or
    reduction; or including structure adapted to allow interchanging of
    objective lenses of different focal lengths.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44+,    for a copier including a focusing screen.

    75+,    for means to tilt the original relative to the optical axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    432 and 821  for selective lenses to change the focus or magnification in
    optical systems.


CLS 355/56
TXT Subject matter under subclass 55 including means to automatically move the
    objective lens or lens system relative to the original and photosensitive
    paper for proper focusing when the original and photosensitive paper are
    moved relative to each other to vary the size of the image projected on the
    photosensitive paper.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    672 and 821 for selective lenses to change the focus or magnification in
    optical systems and subclasses 432, 676+, and 823+ for lens systems.


CLS 355/57
TXT Subject matter under subclass 56 including a mirror or reflecting prism
    positioned between the object to be copied and the photosensitive paper to
    direct light along the optical path to the photosensitive paper.


CLS 355/58
TXT Subject matter under subclass 56 including a sliding or rotating piece that
    imparts motion to a pin free to move in a groove on its face or to a roller
    moving against its edge, or including a screw having threads of nonuniform
    pitch; to aid in moving the lens, original, and photosensitive paper
    relative to each other.


CLS 355/59
TXT Subject matter under subclass 58 including a scale or indicator to denote
    the degree of enlargement or reduction or to show when the lens is properly
    focused.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61+,    for projection copiers in general with focus or magnification
    control including indicator or scale means.


CLS 355/60
TXT Subject matter under subclass 55 including a mirror or reflecting prism
    positioned between the object to be copied and the photosensitive paper to
    direct light along the optical path to the photosensitive paper.

    (1)     Note.  For other projection copiers utilizing reflector means see
    the subclasses listed under SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS in subclass 66.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for copiers having a focusing screen and a reflector.


CLS 355/61
TXT Subject matter under subclass 55 including a scale or indicator to denote
    the degree of enlargement or reduction or to show when the lens is properly
    focused.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59,     for automatic or semiautomatic focusing projection copiers with
    indicator or scale.


CLS 355/62
TXT Subject matter under subclass 61 where the optical path between the
    original and the photosensitive paper is vertical.


CLS 355/63
TXT Subject matter under subclass 55 where the optical path between the
    original and the photosensitive paper is vertical.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for similar devices where part of the optical path is vertical and
    part is horizontal with a mirror or prism to change the direction of the
    optical path.

    62,     for similar devices which have a scale for indicating the degree of
    enlargement or if the system is properly focused.


CLS 355/64
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 wherein the original is an individual
    sheet or document and the photosensitive paper is a strip of film having
    indeterminate length and wherein a plurality of sheets or documents are
    copied in sequence on the film strip.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23+,    for devices which copy both sides of an original.

    48+     and 50+, for copying on a strip of film where the original moves
    continuously during the copying operation.

    53,     for devices which make a plurality of copies of the same original.

    54,     for devices for copying sheets wherein both rows and columns of
    pictures are obtained on the film strip.

    75+,    for means to hold the individual document in position for
    projection of the image.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, for sheet feeding or delivering means
    where no specific optical or photographic structure is set forth.


CLS 355/65
TXT Subject matter under subclass 64 including a mirror or reflecting prism
    positioned between the object to be copied and the photosensitive paper to
    direct light along the optical path to the photosensitive paper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49      and 51, for structure similar to that in this subclass 65 where the
    original moves continuously while an image is being projected therefrom.


CLS 355/66
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 including a mirror reflecting prism
    positioned between the object to be copied and the photosensitive paper to
    direct light along the optical path to the photosensitive paper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for a duplex, projection copier having a reflector in the optical
    path.

    43,     for a projection copier which includes means to designate, compose
    or select which has a reflector in the optical path.

    45,     for a projection copier having a reflector and also a viewing or
    focusing screen.

    49,     for a projection copier of the curved surface type for copying a
    continuously moving original and including a reflector.

    51,     for devices for projection copying a continuously moving original
    and including a reflector.

    60,     for a projection copier having means to control the focus or
    magnification and including a reflector in the optical path.

    65,     for a projection copier of the individual document to film strip
    type utilizing a reflector.

    68,     for projection copier having a photocell to control the
    illumination including a reflector to direct light to the photocell.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    399,    Electrophotography, subject matter under subclass 158 for
    electrophotography apparatus with projection means.


CLS 355/67
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 including a plural or particular light
    source, or means such as a reflector, condenser lens or diffusing plate to
    direct light from the source to the original, or means to control the
    intensity or time interval of light reaching the photosensitive paper, or
    means to regulate the contrast or relative brightness of one portion of a
    picture or margin with another portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for a copier including means to cool or ventilate the lamp housing.

    35+,    for illumination system for copying multicolor pictures.

    74,     for adjustable masks over the photosensitive paper.

    113+,   for light bores for contact printers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, appropriate subclasses, especially
    subclasses 198+, for light sources utilized in motion picture apparatus.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 3 for photographic lights where no other
    camera structure is claimed.


CLS 355/68
TXT Subject matter under subclass 67 including a photoelectric cell or
    photomultiplier tube and related electric circuitry to detect the intensity
    of light in some part of the optical path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for a copier including a photocell or phototube for copying
    multicolor pictures.

    41,     for a projection copier with identifying, composing, or selecting
    means including a photocell means.


CLS 355/69
TXT Subject matter under subclass 67 wherein the light flux given off by the
    lamp is controlled by varying the voltage applied to the lamp or wherein
    the time interval during which the lamp is on is variable by interrupting
    the electricity thereto, usually according to the light transmitting or
    reflecting quality of the original; or wherein a light switch is set forth
    to control the electricity to the lamp.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64+,    for a copier which transfers images from individual documents to a
    film strip having light control which usually includes a light switch
    actuated by a document.


CLS 355/70
TXT Subject matter under subclass 67 wherein the apparatus includes a plurality
    of light sources for simultaneous or separate use.

    (1)     Note.  One of the light sources may be spaced from the projector or
    copier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for a copier including a plurality of lamps for copying a
    multicolor picture.


CLS 355/71
TXT Subject matter under subclass 67 including an opaque element which is
    insertable in the optical path to temporarily block the light or a
    diaphragm, polarizer, or filter in the optical path to partially block the
    light.

    (1)     Note.  The diaphragms of this subclass are usually between the
    light source and the original and do not regulate the size of the final
    picture as do the masks in subclass 74 below which are between the original
    and the photosensitive paper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for a copier having a detailed diaphragm for copying lenticular
    film.

    35+,    for a device for copying multicolor pictures including a shutter,
    diaphragm, polarizer, or filter.

    64+,    for a copier which transfers images from individual documents to
    film strips having light control wherein the shutter is usually actuated by
    a document.

    74,     for a holder for the photosensitive paper having an adjustable mask
    over the paper.

    101,    for contact printing machine with shutters.

    116,    for contact printer light box with foot operated shutter.

    121,    for contact printer light box with shutter.

    124,    for contact printer frame with shutter.


CLS 355/72
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 including detailed means to maintain the
    photographic paper in position while the image of the original is being
    focused on its surface.

    (1)     Note. This subclass provides for the subcombination of a holder for
    photosensitive paper disclosed as being for a copying camera. Class 396,
    Photography, has similar subcombinations disclosed as being for a camera in
    general or disclosed as having general utility in the photographic arts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47+,    for a holder which holds the paper in a curved position.

    65,     for strip film holders or film gates.


CLS 355/73
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the photographic paper is held by
    air or atmospheric pressure caused either by forming a partial vacuum on
    one side of the paper or by blowing air against the paper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76,     for vacuum, fluid, or spring pressure meant for holder of original.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 362 and 363 for vacuum holddown devices of
    general utility.


CLS 355/74
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72 including adjustable or selective, opaque
    means for selectively defining the area or size of the photographic paper
    which will receive the light coming from the object by blocking the
    unwanted light at the edges or border of what will be the new photograph.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for masks which are for making a plurality of rows and columns of
    pictures on one photosensitive sheet.

    72,     for simple masks which are not adjustable or selective to determine
    the size of the photograph.


CLS 355/75
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 including detailed structure to maintain
    the object to be copied in position while its image is being focused on the
    photosensitive paper.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for the subcombination of a holder
    for an original which disclosed as being for use with a copying camera or
    projection printer while Class 353 provides for a film gate in a device for
    projecting an image on a viewing screen.

    (2)     Note.  The object to be copied is often designated the original
    copy or negative and the holder is sometimes called a copyboard.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for a reversible holder for copying both sides of a document.

    25,     for an original holder where the original is a book.

    47+,    for a holder which holds the original  in a curved position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, subclasses 23+ and 95+ for an image
    projector having a film gate.


CLS 355/76
TXT Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein the object is held by air or
    atmospheric pressure caused either by forming a partial vacuum on one side
    of the object or by blowing air against the object; or wherein the object
    is held between two members which are being pushed toward each other by a
    coil or leaf spring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for a book holder having spring or suction means.

    73,     for holder for photosensitive medium utilizing vacuum or fluid
    pressure means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 362 and 363 for vacuum holddown devices of
    general utility.


CLS 355/77
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 including process steps for use in
    projecting an image of the subject matter on an original sheet or film
    strip onto a photosensitive paper to make a copy of the original.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132,    for contact printing methods in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, subclass 121 for a method of projecting
    an image on a viewing screen.

    399,    Electrophotography, subject matter under subclass 130+ for methods
    of forming images electrophotographically.


CLS 355/78
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the picture or other
    information on the carrier is transferred to a light sensitive receiver in
    surface engagement over the entire area of the carrier surface at least at
    the time of exposure to produce in the carrier by photographic effect a
    recording of the same dimensions as that of the picture or other
    information on the carrier.

    (1)     Note.  In case where there is an optical system placed between the
    carrier and receiver, the subject matter will appear higher in the schedule
    even though there is no enlargement or reduction of the size of the image.

    (2)     Note.  For the chemical aspects of the photographic contact
    printing art as well as other nonchemical process and article features
    closely related thereto, Class 430, Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process,
    Composition, or Product Thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for projection type copiers combined with or convertible to a
    contact printer.


CLS 355/79
TXT Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein the image from two or more stacked
    carriers are simultaneously transferred to one side of a receiver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 97 for superimposed film strips.


CLS 355/80
TXT Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein the contrast of the receiver is
    changed over the area of the frame or along the length of the continuous
    strip with respect to the contrast of corresponding areas or length of the
    carrier (i.e., the change in contrast over various portions of the receiver
    is different from any change of contrast of corresponding portions of the
    carrier by modifying the light intensity or duration).

    (1)     Note.  In vignetting as classified in subclass 125 below, light is
    usually completely blocked and stray light around the blocking portion
    produces the diffusing effect.  However, in this subclass 80 the contrast
    is modified by altering the light passing directly through or from the
    carrier object to be transferred.


CLS 355/81
TXT Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the contrast on the receiver is
    different from that of the carrier over the frame area, as a result of
    varying the intensity or the duration of the illumination over selected
    portions of the frame area by a scanning motion of the light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for projection printing and copying camera utilizing cathode-ray
    tube illumination.

    84,     for contact printers in general with scanning means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    399,    Electrophotography, subject matter under subclass 177+ for electric
    photographic apparatus utilizing scanning.


CLS 355/82
TXT Subject matter under subclass 78 adapted to produce prints from the pages
    of books with or without reflex printing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for book page copier of the projection printing and copying type.


CLS 355/83
TXT Subject matter under subclass 78 having apparatus that controls the light
    intensity or shutter size during exposure in accordance with light passing
    through or reflected from the carrier as monitored by a light sensitive
    element, commonly a photoelectric cell, which controls the light intensity
    or shutter size.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35+,    for multicolor projection printing and copying cameras with means
    to regulate the light intensity or exposure time.

    115,    for contact printing light boxes with exposure timing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for photoelectric cells and
    circuits and apparatus combined therewith.


CLS 355/84
TXT Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein the light source unit is moved
    over or past the carrier and receiver frame area to transfer frame portions
    sequentially from the carrier to the receiver as opposed to the usual
    simultaneous transfer of the entire frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for projection printing and copying camera utilizing cathode-ray
    tube illumination.

    81,     for cathode-ray tube scanning devices used for contrast control.

    102,    103 and 108+, for transferring the frame image portions
    sequentially by moving the combined carrier and receiver continuously past
    the light source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 15 and 90 for photographic recorder receiver.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    196+ for deflection by a moving element which may be reflective.

    386,    Television Signal Processing for Dynamic Recording or Reproducing,
    subclasses 30, 42+, and 128+ for television systems wherein the light
    source may be scanned across the photosensitive surface.

    399,    Electrophotography, subject matter under subclasses 177+ for
    electrophotographic apparatus utilizing scanning.


CLS 355/85
TXT Subject matter under subclass 78 having apparatus for image transfer to a
    sensitized receiver in the form of a printing press plate or cylinder.

    (1)     Note.  Printing press elements exposed as in photocomposers
    normally require further processing, as by etching, before being useable in
    a printing press.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclasses 368+ for printing members.

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, subclasses 1+ for chemical etching
    combined with additional manufacturing steps, particularly subclass 10 for
    printing roll manufacture.


CLS 355/86
TXT Subject matter under subclass 85 wherein a single carrier or receiver is
    stepped or moved between repeated exposures until the sensitized receiver
    surface is utilized or covered to the desired extent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for projection copiers of the step and repeat type.

    64+,    for projection copiers wherein images are transferred from
    individual documents to film strip.

    95+,    for step and repeat contact printers in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    399,    Electrophotography, subject matter under appropriate subclasses for
    full color electrophotographic apparatus.


CLS 355/87
TXT Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein the step and repeat photocomposers
    utilize fluid pressure for contact or retention of carrier and receiver in
    exposing position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91+,    for machines generally involving fluid pressure contact and
    retention structure.


CLS 355/88
TXT Subject matter under subclass 78 having apparatus adapted to produce color
    prints otherwise than by the mere use of colored printing materials.

    (1)     Note.  Printers utilizing plural color beams, even though combined
    into one beam at the printing station, are included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32+,    for projection printing and copying cameras for multiple color
    reproduction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    399,    Electrophotography, subject matter under appropriate subclasses for
    electrophotographic apparatus for color reproduction.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, appropriate subclasses for chemical natural color techniques.


CLS 355/89
TXT Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein the machine (as defined in
    subclass 97) has a plurality of exposure stations at each of which the
    carrier and receiver are held together and exposed to light, or including a
    plurality of such machines.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter where one of the exposure stations is for
    printing a sound track is included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for light boxes with plural image transfer.

    127,    for frames for transfer of plural images.


CLS 355/90
TXT Subject matter under subclass 89 including structure for moving
    indeterminate lengths of carrier and receiver to, past, and from the
    exposure stations, the second exposure station commonly being for printing
    a sound track on the receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for project on type copier with means to copy a sound record.

    98,     for other sound track printers.

    111,    for continuous running machines with indeterminate length carrier
    and receiver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 1+, with sound accompaniment,
    subclasses 12+, picture and sound synchronizing, subclasses 26+, common
    picture and sound systems, subclasses 221+, for film gates.


CLS 355/91
TXT Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein contact between the carrier and
    receiver during exposure is secured by direct acting fluid pressure.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass a suction is maintained between the
    pressure applying surfaces or a fluid pressure is applied through a
    flexible member. Where the pressure is applied through a mechanical linkage
    actuated by fluid such as a mechanical connected piston, classification is
    elsewhere in the schedule.


CLS 355/92
TXT Subject matter under subclass 91 wherein air inflated cushions are used to
    force the carrier and receiver into secure contact for exposure.


CLS 355/93
TXT Subject matter under subclass 91 wherein the complete frame is pivotal
    after the carrier and receiver are secured together for the exposure
    operation.


CLS 355/94
TXT Subject matter under subclass 91 wherein there is a pump included in the
    disclosed fluid pressure system.


CLS 355/95
TXT Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein the same carrier is moved over the
    receiver or vice versa to discrete and distinct positions, the same image
    being transferred from the carrier to the receiver at each position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for projection copiers of the step and repeat type.

    66+,    for step and repeat photocomposers for printing plates.


CLS 355/96
TXT Subject matter under subclass 95 wherein the receiver is in the form of a
    strip and the successive printing is done longitudinally along the strip.


CLS 355/97
TXT Subject matter under subclass 78 including complete units for transferring
    the image from the carrier to the receiver and including structure for
    moving or transporting either the carrier or receiver to, from, or past the
    exposure station without direct manual engagement during this moving.

    (1)     Note.  The moving structure need not move the carrier or receiver
    through the complete operating cycle for classification here.
    Classification is here when the cycle and machine operation is in sequence.
     The moving structure may operate on only one of the carrier and receiver,
    and classification is here.  A gravity operated slot is classified here.
    The moving structure may be manually or motor operated.

    (2)     Note.  A complete unit would include at least the supporting
    structure for the receiver and carrier and the illuminating structure for
    image transfer.  See subclasses 113+ for light boxes which include
    supporting the illuminating structure but lack the transporting or moving
    structure.  See subclass 123 below for frames which include the carrier
    transporting or moving structure, but which lack the illuminating structure
    the frames being parts merely intended for ready manipulation with respect
    to the illuminating structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89+,    for contact printers of the plural exposure station or plural
    machine type.


CLS 355/98
TXT Subject matter under subclass 97 including apparatus for printing a sound
    track on a receiver or for eliminating extraneous noise on the printed
    sound track of a receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for projection printing and copying cameras with means to copy a
    sound record.

    86,     for sound printer combined with other printing stations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 12+ for picture and sound
    synchronization, 26+ for common picture and sound record carrier, and 221+
    for gates.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 84+ for
    dynamic duplication of a sound track.


CLS 355/99
TXT Subject matter under subclass 97 wherein the receiver is fixed or movably
    positioned on a flat surface during exposure.


CLS 355/100
TXT Subject matter under subclass 99 including apparatus for wet or dry
    developing processing after the printing operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27+,    for projection printing and copying cameras with developing means.

    106+,   for developing processing after exposure at a curved or cylindrical
    exposure station.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    396,    Photography, subclasses 564+ for fluid treatment apparatus used to
    develop photographic material.

    399,    Electrophotography, subject matter under subclasses 233+ for
    electric photographic apparatus utilizing liquid development.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 434+ for chemical developing.


CLS 355/101
TXT Subject matter under subclass 99 including structure for selectively
    blocking and unblocking the light path to expose the light sensitive
    material to photographic light.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 121 below for a field of search for shutters.


CLS 355/102
TXT Subject matter under subclass 99 wherein an image on a carrier is copied on
    a plurality of separate receivers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86+,    for step and repeat copying on printing.

    95+,    for step and repeat copying generally.

    101,    for repeat printers having shutters.

    109,    for repeat printing machine of the cylindrical or curved exposure
    station structure type.


CLS 355/103
TXT Subject matter under subclass 99 wherein the sheets or web which comprise
    the carrier and receiver travels past the exposure station during exposure
    (i.e., they do not stop during exposure).

    (1)     Note.  The light may or may not move with the sheets or webs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for continuously running machines with curved or cylindrical
    exposure stations.


CLS 355/104
TXT Subject matter under subclass 97 wherein the receiver is on a cylindrical
    or curved surface during exposure.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter concerned only with the cylinder, its
    cooling, or the means for imparting motion to it is classifiable here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for light box with cylindrical or curved exposure station.


CLS 355/105
TXT Subject matter under subclass 104 wherein the exposure station comprises a
    vertical cylinder with exposure of the printing materials effected by the
    lowering of a light into the cylinder.

    (1)     Note.  The inventions herein are representative of the older blue
    print machines.


CLS 355/106
TXT Subject matter under subclass 104 including apparatus for wet or dry
    developing processing after the printing operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27+,    for projection printing and copying cameras with developing means.

    100,    for developing processing after exposure at a flat exposure station.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    396,    Photography, subclasses 564+ for fluid treatment apparatus used to
    develop photographic material.

    399,    Electrophotography, subject matter under subclasses 233+ for
    electric photographic apparatus utilizing liquid development.


CLS 355/107
TXT Subject matter under subclass 106 having developing processing wherein the
    image is transferred to an intermediate sheet from which the image is
    subsequently transferred to a receiver.

    (1)     Note.  An intermediate sheet is most commonly used with the wet
    diffusion process.


CLS 355/108
TXT Subject matter under subclass 104 wherein the sheets or web which comprise
    the receiver travel past the exposure station during exposure, and usually
    without stopping.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for continuously running flat printing machines.


CLS 355/109
TXT Subject matter under subclass 108 with repeated printing from one or more
    carriers, i.e., more than one receiver copy is made from a single carrier.

    (1)     Note.  A carrier whose picture, pattern or design completely
    encompasses a cylindrical exposure station and which is used in making
    strips with the picture, pattern or design repeated would be classifiable
    here, e.g., wall paper or textiles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for noncontinuous repeated printing in flat machines.


CLS 355/110
TXT Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein an exposure station cylinder
    rotates as the carrier and receiver pass thereover past the exposure
    station.


CLS 355/111
TXT Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein both the carrier and receiver are
    webs of indeterminate length which may be perforated (e.g., motion picture
    film).


CLS 355/112
TXT Subject matter under subclass 78 including mechanisms for automatically
    marking numbers or indicia on prints and also including devices for
    counting the number of prints made.


CLS 355/113
TXT Subject matter under subclass 78 including structure for shielding or
    shading the light used for printing from the surrounding work area.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the shielding or shading structure is a box
    enclosing the light source or the associated reflectors or lenses which
    light source lenses or reflector may or may not be claimed in the patents
    here classified.  Structure for facilitating the use of natural light such
    as an opening in the box or mirror is classified here where the box is
    claimed.  Structure in the form of a frame and constituting the top of a
    light box is classified in subclasses 122+ below where the box structure is
    not claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67+,    for illumination systems or details utilized in projection type
    copiers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, appropriate subclasses, especially
    subclasses 198+ for projection light sources utilized in motion picture
    apparatus.


CLS 355/114
TXT Subject matter under subclass 113 where the exposure station or stations
    have structure for producing a plurality of positive images usually
    simultaneously and usually from a corresponding number of negative images.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89,     for contact printers having plural exposure stations or comprising
    plural machines.

    110,    for frames for making plural images.


CLS 355/115
TXT Subject matter under subclass 113 including means for controlling the
    period of exposure of the light sensitive material.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the means consists of a mechanism which closes a
    shutter after a predetermined period of time or which opens or closes the
    electrical circuit containing the light source after a predetermined period
    of time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35+,    for multicolor projection printing or copying cameras with means to
    regulate the light intensity or exposure time.

    83,     for contact printers with light monitoring exposure control means.


CLS 355/116
TXT Subject matter under subclass 113 wherein the platen or shutter of the
    light box is foot operated (e.g., with a treadle).

    (1)     Note.  For other shutters see the field of search appended to the
    definition of subclass 121.


CLS 355/117
TXT Subject matter under subclass 113 wherein the exposure station has a
    surface which is cylindrical or curved.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104+,   for printing machines with cylindrical or curved exposure station
    structure.


CLS 355/118
TXT Subject matter under subclass 113 wherein the platen is formed in two or
    more distinct parts which are completely separable or attached together to
    provide movement or flexibility between the attached parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129+,   for divided platens.


CLS 355/119
TXT Subject matter under subclass 113 wherein the exposure station is
    illuminated by indirect light rays.


CLS 355/120
TXT Subject matter under subclass 113 wherein the illumination circuit is
    closed when the platen is manually moved into pressure contact or locked
    into contact position with the receiver and carrier and the circuit is
    broken when the platen is manually unlocked from its contact position or
    manually moved away from pressure contact with the carrier and receiver.


CLS 355/121
TXT Subject matter under subclass 113 including structure for selectively
    blocking and unblocking the light path to expose the light sensitive
    material to the photographic light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for projection type copier with shutter in the illumination system.

    101,    for printing machines with shutters.

    116,    for foot operated shutters.

    121,    for light box with shutters.

    123,    for strip film frames having shutters.

    124,    for frames with shutters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, appropriate subclasses, especially
    subclasses 204+ for shutters utilized in motion picture apparatus.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    227+ for shutters generally; and subclasses 738+ for lenses with shutters.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 452+ for camera shutters.


CLS 355/122
TXT Subject matter under subclass 78 including portable devices as for ready
    manipulation before a source of illumination usually flat and usually
    including a border structure for holding negatives and sensitized surfaces
    in their proper relative positions for printing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123,    for continuous film frames.


CLS 355/123
TXT Subject matter under subclass 122 including structure for moving or
    transporting either the carrier or receiver at least one of which is a film
    strip to, from or past the exposure station in the frame.

    (1)     Note.  All units additionally providing to the moving and
    transporting structure a light source are classified in subclasses 97+
    above.


CLS 355/124
TXT Subject matter under subclass 122 including structure for selectively
    blocking and unblocking the light path to expose the light sensitive
    material to the photographic light.

    (1)     Note.  The shutter need not be completely opaque, but only opaque
    to the photographic light.  A shutter formed as a ruby filter would be
    classified here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for projection type copiers with shutter in the illumination system.

    101,    for printing machines with shutters.

    116,    for fast operated shutters.

    121,    for light box with shutter.

    123,    for strip film frames having shutters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, appropriate subclasses, especially
    subclasses 204+ for shutter utilized in motion picture apparatus.

    359,    Optics:  Systems  (Including Communication) and Elements,
    subclasses 227+, for shutters generally; and subclasses 738+ for lenses
    with shutter.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 452+ for camera shutters.


CLS 355/125
TXT Subject matter under subclass 122 including structure for blocking a
    portion of the transverse area of the light path usually at the border, the
    blocking being either abrupt at the edge or gradual to produce a graduated
    shading effect or including structure to diffuse the light in the light
    path to produce a softening effect.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     for contact printers with localized contrast modification.


CLS 355/126
TXT Subject matter under subclass 125 wherein the blocking structure is movable
    over the transverse area of the light path to change the parameters of the
    opening in the light blocking structure, as for example to change the
    picture dimensions.


CLS 355/127
TXT Subject matter under subclass 122 wherein the frame is adapted to produce a
    plurality of positive images usually simultaneously and usually from a
    corresponding number of negative images.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89+,    for contact printers of the plural station or plural machine type.

    114,    for light box with means to transfer plural images.


CLS 355/128
TXT Subject matter under subclass 122 including a flat plate of rigid material
    distinct from the remaining frame and substantially covering the back of
    structure the receiver for pressing the carrier and receiver together when
    they are disposed in the remaining frame structure.


CLS 355/129
TXT Subject matter under subclass 128 wherein the platen is formed in two or
    more distinct parts which are completely separable or attached together to
    provide movement or flexibility between the attached parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118,    for light box with divided or flexible platen.


CLS 355/130
TXT Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein a spring is provided to maintain
    the platen in the pressure applying position.


CLS 355/131
TXT Subject matter under subclass 128 wherein the platen is permanently movably
    secured to the remaining frame structure as by hinges to permit movement of
    the platen from the pressure applying position to and from a position to
    permit ready insertion of the carrier and receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129+,   for divided platens which are attached to remaining frame structure.


CLS 355/132
TXT Subject matter under subclass 78 comprising methods of contact printing.

    (1)     Note.  Patents within the subclass 78 definition including both
    article and method claims are classified on the basis of the article claims
    in the higher subclasses.  This subclass 132 only provides for patents with
    all method claims.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for projection printing and copying methods in general.

    210+,   for methods of forming images electro-photographically.


CLS 355/133
TXT Subject matter under the class definition which is not provided for in any
    of the preceding subclasses of this class.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes printing apparatus having the
    receiver and carrier spaced apart from one another during the exposure
    operation, as long as the image reproduced on the receiver has not been
    reduced or enlarged.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for the use of fiber optics in the space between the carrier and
    the receiver.


CLS 355/400
TXT USING MICROCAPSULES:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein an image is formed by
    exposing a layer of photosensitive microcapsules containing chromogenic
    material to radiant energy and rupturing the capsule in the presence of a
    developing arrangement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclass 138 for a product, process, or composition using
    microcapsules.


CLS 355/401
TXT Condition responsive control:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein the imaging or developing of  the
    microcapsules is controlled in response to a randomly occurring, sensed
    condition.


CLS 355/402
TXT Exposure:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein a means or method is provided for
    projecting light or radiant energy from an original to a layer of
    microcapsules.


CLS 355/403
TXT Using mask original:

    Subject matter under subclass 402 wherein an imaged transparency is located
    between a source of radiant energy and a layer of microcapsules.


CLS 355/404
TXT Of selected area or border:

    Subject matter under subclass 402 wherein exposure of the microcapsules is
    limited or controlled in extent.


CLS 355/405
TXT Heating (e.g., thermal fixing):

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein a means or method is provided for
    applying heat to an exposed, microcapsule-coated medium before, during, or
    after developing.


CLS 355/406
TXT Pressure developing:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein a force is applied to rupture the
    microcapsules in the presence of a developing arrangement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses for a press.


CLS 355/407
TXT Sheet feeding:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein a means or method is provided for
    handling an original, a medium with the microcapsules, a developing sheet,
    or a copy medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, appropriate subclasses for sheet
    feeding.


CLS 355/408
TXT Having document handling detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 407 wherein a means or method is provided for
    sensing the position or condition of transportable media.


CLS 356/
TTL OPTICS:  MEASURING AND TESTING

CLS 356/
TXT

    I.      DEFINITIONS OF TERMS USED

    DIFFRACTION

    The bending of a light ray in passing the edge formed by contiguous opaque
    and transparent edges.

    DIFFUSE

    Pertaining to the scattering or random deviation of transmitted or
    reflected light.

    ELECTROPHORESIS

    The effect in which charged particles suspended in a liquid are moved under
    the influence of an electrostatic field.

    FIDUCIAL

    A reference direction formed as by a light ray, level, compass, or scale
    from which another direction is measured or compared.

    LIGHT, VISIBLE LIGHT

    Visible light is radiation, which stimulates the optical receptors of the
    eye, and has a wavelength from 3850 to 7600 Angstrom units.  The term light
    in these definitions refers to radiation in the above mentioned range, and
    when qualified by the terms ultraviolet and infrared refers to the
    corresponding radiation ranges adjacent the visible range.

    MEASURING-TESTING

    Measuring usually involves a more precise and quantitative determination of
    the characteristic or property in question.  Testing may be a mere
    indication of the presence or absence of the characteristic or property,
    and may involve only a mere inspection or viewing of the phenomenon or
    specimen.  It should be recognized that the two terms overlap to some
    extent in meaning.

    MENSURATION

    Measurement of lengths, areas, or volumes.

    MONOCHROMATOR

    An instrument for producing a narrow band of the spectrum by dispersing a
    radiation beam into its components or colors, and isolating the narrow band
    desired as by passing the components or colors through a narrow slit.

    OPTICAL ELEMENT

    A structure which performs a basic optical function. See Class 359 for a
    more specific definition.

    OPTICAL SYSTEM

    A combination of two or more similar or diverse optical elements which are
    optically related, or an optical element combined with nonoptical structure
    where the overall function performed is optical in nature.  The optical
    systems in this class are for measuring or testing purposes.

    OPTICS, OPTICAL

    The science of light and vision and the construction of optical instruments.

    REFLECTION

    The return of light striking a surface back into the medium from which it
    came.

    REFRACTION

    The deviation of light which results when a ray of light passes obliquely
    from a medium of one density to a medium of another density.

    SPECTRUM

    The band of colors produced by separating white light into its component
    frequencies.  The term also denotes radiation arrayed over a frequency
    range where the frequency of the radiation continuously increases or
    decreases over the range.

    II.     GENERAL STATEMENT OF THE CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    A.      This class includes methods and apparatus (1) for analyzing light
    to measure or test its characteristics, such as intensity, color and
    polarization;  (2) for determining the optical or nonoptical properties of
    materials or articles by noting, as by inspection, measurement, or test the
    effect produced by the materials or articles on light associated therewith;
    and (3) for measuring the dimensions of structures or the spatial
    relationships such as distances or angle bearings of spaced points by
    comparison of the respective properties (usually direction or spatial
    position) of the light from these points or by comparison of the properties
    of these lights with some scale or standard. The light analyzing includes
    or is for spectroscopy, interference, polarization, beam direction or
    pattern, focal position of a light source, shade or color, and photometers.
     The material or article properties determined are or involve crystal or
    gem examination, material strain analysis, blood analysis, optical
    pyrometers, egg candling, cutting blade sharpness, oil testing, document
    verification, flatness, lens or reflector testing, refraction testing,
    monitoring moving webs or fabrics, light transmission or absorption, light
    reflection, inspection for flaws or imperfections in materials, and thread
    counting.

    The dimensioning and spatial relationship determination includes
    triangulation by a light beam, contour plotting, range or height finders,
    motion stopping, velocity or velocity/height measuring, sighting where the
    optical element or reticle moves with the sighted object, particle size
    determination, particle light scattering, electrophoresis, angle measuring
    or axial alignment, mensuration or configuration comparison, alignment in a
    lateral direction, and fiducial instruments.

    B.      Included also are apparatus and methods to facilitate the viewing
    of structure as for flaws and imperfections.  The structure is usually
    optically significant such as transparent sheets or bottles or
    semi-transparent cloth; or the structure is inaccessible as a bore
    requiring a bore scope.  Included also are methods and structure for
    preparing the sample for an optical test, and optical test standards.

    C.      Included also are apparatus and methods involving a plurality of
    measurements or tests each within the scope of this class; and also
    included are a measurement or test within the scope of this class together
    with a measurement or test or other art structure provided, per se,
    elsewhere, but where no provision for the combination is made elsewhere.

    III.    OPTICAL MEASURING OR TESTING CLASSIFIED ELSEWHERE

    Class 33 provides in subclass 227 for optical measurements of the light ray
    type within the scope of this class.  See section V for the subject matter
    placed in Class 33 and Class 356.  Class 73 includes optical measuring and
    testing within the scope of its subclasses; for example, in subclasses
    23.1, 53.01+, 156, and 290.  See section VI for the line between Class 73
    and Class 356.  Class 116 and Class 340 provide for signal and indicating
    apparatus which may involve optics.  See, for example, temperature, radiant
    energy, smoke, or gas indicators in Class 340, subclasses 584+, 600, 630,
    and 632, respectively.  Class 600, subclasses 300+ provides for surgical
    diagnostic instruments which may involve optical measuring or testing on or
    in the body.  Class 348, Television, subclasses 135+ and 180+ for
    television systems for measuring and testing which may include optical
    elements.  Class 250, subclass 200 provides for photocells and associated
    circuitry together with optical structure which may involve measuring or
    testing.  However, this Class 356, especially subclasses 3+, 28, 139.01+,
    141.1+, 152.1+, 218, and  442 includes optical testing with a photoelectric
    light detector and usually claiming either an indicator or structure to
    support or contain the specimen or sample under test.  Class 324,
    subclasses 403+ includes lamp and discharge device testing.  Class 351,
    subclasses 200+ provides for eye examining and testing instruments which
    may include optical measuring or testing.

    IV.     TESTING AND MEASURING SUBCOMBINATIONS PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE

    Class 359 provides for optical elements which may be used in measuring and
    testing apparatus.  The conventional optical elements such as lenses,
    prisms, and mirrors are there.  Subclasses 436+ relating to scale or
    indicia reading should be particularly noted.  Class 250, subclass 200 for
    photocell circuits and apparatus. Class 313, subclass 94 provides for
    photo-sensitive discharge devices.  Class 33 provides for mechanical scales
    and gauges which may be part of optical measuring systems.  Class 116,
    subclasses 200+ provides for mechanical indicators which may be part of
    optical measuring systems. Classes 324 and 340 provide for electrical
    indicating and measuring devices which may be part of optical measuring
    systems.

    (1)     Note.  Class 340, subclasses 870.01+ take telemetric signaling
    means useful in transmitting a measured quantity, not limited to any
    particular measuring instrument provided for in other classes, while Class
    356 takes such telemetric signaling means in combination with a particular
    measuring means of the type provided for in Class 356.

    V.      GEOMETRICAL INSTRUMENTS IN THIS CLASS AND IN CLASS 33

    This Class 356 provides for measuring devices which are used for
    determining spatial relationships, and which involve the establishment of
    an optical axis between the observer's station and a remote point and which
    include significant optical structure.  This includes certain types of
    range-finders, angle or azimuth measuring instruments and velocity
    measuring devices as qualified below.  In this subject matter the
    recitation of specific optical details such as lens, prism, or mirror
    details is sufficient for classification in this Class 356.  Exceptions
    which remain in Class 33 are bomb sights with specific optical line
    sighting instruments with a telescope or microscope recited even in some
    detail, and as a viewing aid to but not a part of the sighting instrument.
    Also where a plurality of optical functions are recited as, for example,
    plural reflections of a line of sight, classification is in this Class 356.
     Where optic is only recited broadly as, for example, "an optical axis", a
    "telescope", or a "deflection of the line of sight", the subject matter is
    generally classified in Class 33, as opposed to Class 356.

    Also included in this Class 356 are instruments for visual sighting which
    in addition to having a field of view, perform an aiming or alignment
    function or establish a line of sight by means of an artificial reference
    and which include significant optical structure.

    The geometrical instruments of this Class 356 usually either involve the
    determination of the direction of a point remote from an observer with
    respect to some reference direction where the two directions may be viewed
    and compared simultaneously; or the determination of the relative direction
    of two points remote from an observer where the two directions may be
    viewed and compared simultaneously.  Optical structure is usually provided
    to facilitate this simultaneous viewing.  The subject matter of Class 33
    relates more to the direction determination by aiming an instrument on a
    point and later noting the direction of the aimed instrument with respect
    to some reference such as a level, compass, or other point.  A mere single
    deflection of a line of sight as by a mirror or lens to facilitate the
    viewing is not precluded from Class 33.  In the mensuration or figure
    comparison, the patents in this Class 356 include structure to facilitate
    the viewing (usually simultaneously) of the specimens, or configurations to
    be compared with other specimens or configurations or with scales, masters,
    or patterns.

    A single sight line optical instrument such as a transit with structure for
    indicating the direction is classified in Class 33. However where such an
    instrument includes a sighting mark or scale at an optically critical
    position such as in the focal plane classification is in Class 356.

    Comparison instruments which merge the rays from diverse directions for
    common viewing as in a split image range finder are classified in Class
    356.  However plural sighting instruments which merely aim on angularly
    separated points (even simultaneously) with mechanical reading of the
    directions are classified in Class 33. Space measuring instruments whose
    operation is essentially optical such as optical interferometers are
    classified in Class 356 as opposed to Class 33.  Reticles and cross hairs
    generally are classified in Class 33.  However, optical reticles which
    reflect or refract light are classified in Class 356.

    VI.     MEASURING AND TESTING IN THIS CLASS AND CLASS 73

    This Class 356 provides for optical measuring and testing as defined in
    section IIA above.  Class 73 provides for measuring and testing which may
    include optical measuring and testing as defined in section IIA above,
    combined with some nonoptical limitations beyond the scope of this Class
    356 and specifically provided for in Class 73.  Specific provision exists
    in Class 73 when the measurement or test is of the type provided for by the
    subclasses of Class 73 definitions.  For example, Class 73 in subclass 23.1
    provides for gas chromatography involving color determination of the Class
    356 type together with some manipulation of the gas beyond the scope of
    Class 356.  Again Class 73 provides in subclass 116 for engine testing
    involving optical tests of the Class 356  type together with some
    mechanical manipulation of the parts beyond the scope of Class 356.  In
    general Class 73 provides for measuring and testing of the type indicated
    by its subclass titles and definitions which may include optical steps
    together with other mechanical measuring and testing steps beyond the scope
    of Class 356.  There are some patents presently in Class 73 which relate to
    measuring and testing as there provided, but which claim only optical
    subject matter within the scope of Class 356. Combinations of optical
    measuring or testing with other structure or methods is classified in Class
    356 if no provision for such combinations exists elsewhere.

    An exception to the above involves cutting blade sharpness testing where
    subclass 69 of Class 356 provides for the optical type with the remainder
    in subclass 104 of Class 73.  Another exception involves stress analysis
    where subclasses 32+ of Class 356 provide for the optical type absent
    intentional loading of the specimen.   The remainder is classified in Class
    73, subclasses 760+, particularly subclass 800 for optical stress analysis
    with intentional loading of the specimen.

    VII.    NONVISIBLE RADIATION

    This class is restricted to measuring and testing involving visible light.
    However where the measuring or testing involves infrared or ultraviolet
    radiation with apparatus optical in nature and nothing peculiar to such
    infra red and ultra violet radiation, classification is in this class
    especially subclass 51.  For example, optical equipment where the radiation
    was claimed as ultraviolet or infra red would be classified in this class,
    especially subclass 306 for methods and apparatus for the inspection of
    solid or liquids by charged particles and subclass 336 for invisible
    radiation responsive electric signalling methods and apparatus.  See also
    section "X" below.

    VIII. FLUORESCENCE AND PHOSPHORESCENCE TESTING

    The examination of fluorescent and phosphorescent material or organisms to
    determine their fluorescent or phosphorescent properties or the examination
    of invisible energy including ultraviolet light by subjecting fluorescent
    or phosphorescent material to invisible radiation is in Class 250 even
    though the fluorescent or phosphorescent radiation is in the visible light
    range and the intensity and the frequency of the fluorescent or
    phosphorescent light is examined.  See particularly subclass 301 for
    methods of determining oil presence, contamination or concentration,
    subclass 361 for methods and apparatus using luminophor test material or a
    luminophor detector in combination with an electric signalling device
    responsive to the light emitted by the luminophor, subclasses 458.1+ for
    methods and apparatus to irradiate a luminophor and subclasses 453.11+ for
    luminscent devices, per se.

    Fluorescent or phosphorescent apparatus used as a visible light standard
    and claimed as part of a visible light testing apparatus as of a comparator
    type and which is basic subject matter of Class 356 is classified in Class
    356.  The examination of the visible light, per se, emitted by fluorescent
    or phosphorescent materials would be classified in Class 356 when the
    fluorescent or phosphorescent materials or source producing the visible
    light is not included in the claims.

    IX.     LASERS AND RESONANCE RADIATION

    The testing with optical apparatus of a laser beam for the intensity or
    frequency of the visible light, per se, emitted by the laser is in Class
    356, especially subclasses 213 and 402+.  However, see Class 330,
    Amplifiers, subclass 4.3 for lasers and similar devices when they function
    as an amplifier of light in the visible range and laser modulator, per se.
    For optical elements which control light intensity or direction on a
    molecular level, see Class 359, Optics: Systems (Including Communication)
    and Elements, subclasses 246+, 281+, and 301+ for modulation  involving
    polarized light, and subclasses 290+ for light control by altering an
    optical medium or surface.  See Class 372 for coherent light generators,
    per se.

    X.      THERMOCOUPLES AND BOLOMETERS

    Where the intensity or the frequency of invisible radiation is determined
    by means of a thermal detector, classification is in Class 250, Radiant
    Energy.  Where the intensity or the frequency of visible light radiation is
    determined by means of a thermal detector, classification is in this Class
    356.  Where the total energy or power in a beam of radiation is measured by
    a thermal detector classification is in Class 374, Thermal Measuring and
    Testing, subclass 32; and where thermally emitted radiation is measured to
    determine the temperature of the emitting source, classification is in
    Class 374, subclasses 121+, except where the radiation is limited to light,
    where the classification is in Class 356, subclasses 43+.

    XI.     BURNING

    Although the burning of a combustible material is a chemical reaction, the
    combination of the burning of combustible material for visible light
    examination purposes with visible light analyzing structures of this class
    is in this Class 356.  See Class 431, Combustion, subclasses 4, 126 and
    355.  See Class 423, Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, for all combustion
    reactions not provided for elsewhere.  See also Search Class and notes
    under subclass 315 of this Class 356.

    XII.    COUNTING

    Claims to the counting of discrete particles such as blood particles,
    bacteria colonies, or dust particles, one at a time by numerical counting
    apparatus which registers the counts corresponding to the respective
    particles will be found in Class 377, subclass 10.  However, the visual
    counting with a scale or spacer to aid the eye is classified in this Class
    356. Claims to the sizing and counting of particles such as blood
    particles, bacteria colonies, or dust particles, one at a time by numerical
    counting apparatus will be found in Class 377, subclass 10.  The counting
    of undulations by means of visible light or indeterminate length material
    such as a web of fabric or threads, per se, for testing the weave of the
    web for evenness, or the thread for unevenness, or for flaws, or for
    optical properties or physical dimensions where the measurement is affected
    only by the variations of the light caused by the web or thread will be in
    Class 356 rather than in Class 377.  The counting of particles with visible
    light by statistical analysis procedures instead of a one by one numerical
    particle count as in Class 377 will be in Class 356 especially subclasses
    438+ and 441+.  The sizing and counting of particles with visible light by
    statistical analysis procedures instead of a one by one numerical particle
    count as in Class 377 will be in Class 356, especially subclasses 335+.
    The counting or the sizing and counting of particles with visible light by
    statistical methods in Class 356 involves for example, polarized light,
    light scattering, color testing, and reflective diffusion of light.  Where
    a microscope is utilized to count particles, one by one, such as blood
    particles or bacteria colonies, see Class 359.  Where an optical element
    such as a lens for magnification is used in combination with a support for
    counting bacteria colonies, or particles such as dust see Class 359 for one
    by one counting.  Where no optical element is utilized and only a support
    is used see this Class 356.  Where a microscope having a graticule rather
    than a cross hair or a reticle is used to count particles one by one see
    this Class 356.  See subclass 244 of this Class 356 for supports for
    bacteria counters where only a light and a support for the one by one count
    is involved.

    XIII.   READING AND RECORDING

    The combination of an optical test of this class with a qualitative or
    quantitative marker or recorder is in this class.  Class 356 provides for
    the reading visually of the information or data cards where not elsewhere
    provided.

    Class 382 provides for pattern or character recognition of a document or a
    record; where the document analysis or verification is limited to the
    intrinsic properties of the record, classification is in Class 356 subclass
    71, Class 235, subclasses 375+ and 435+ provides for systems controlled by
    a record and code record sensors, respectfully.  Class 73, subclass 156,
    rather than Class 356, will take apparatus to check hole type cards for
    errors in the punching or in the sorting of cards where the error check
    equipment is not part of a business machine.

    XIV.    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 3.1 for
    machines to clean eggs, or machines to clean and assort or screen eggs.

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclass 70 for devices facilitating
    the inspection of cloth.

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 1 for planimeter type calculators
    such as moment of inertia of areas, subclasses 18.1+, for scribers,
    subclass 121, for area integrators, subclass 125, for distance measuring,
    subclasses 501+, for gauges of the fixed or adjustable type, and subclass
    227, for means and methods utilizing nonreflected light rays and direct
    sighting for determining the characteristics and mutual relationships of
    points, lines, angles, etc.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 446+ for changeable
    exhibitors, and subclasses 361+ for transparent film viewers.

    53,     Package Making, subclass 52 for automatic or triggered control of a
    package making machine in response to a test which may be optical, and
    subclasses 507+ for visual inspection means combined with package making
    machines.

    55,     Gas Separation, subclass 270 for sampling or testing apparatus
    which may involve an optical test, subclass 274 for visual viewing
    apparatus.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 377+ for processes of glass making
    with a step of visually, chemically or physically determining a chemical or
    physical property, subclass 38 for the process of forming a lens with a
    fusion bonding step, and subclass 158 for inspection means which may be
    optical.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 37 for metal deforming with use of
    optical or transparent (e.g., viewing) means.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 23.1 for the examination of the
    effluent of a mixture of gases which has contacted a solvent or sorbent
    which separates the mixture into fractional components, subclass 28 for
    analysis of solid matter in gases, subclass 29 for analysis of moisture
    content or vapor pressure by physical means, subclass 30 for density tests
    by physical means, subclass 32 for specific gravity or density testing of
    liquids or solids, subclass 37 for fluid pressure tests, subclasses 53.01+
    for the testing of liquids or a liquid suspension of solids including
    sediment or foreign content, subclass 73 for determining moisture content
    or absorption characteristics of material, subclass 78 for hardness
    testing, subclasses 760+ for stress or strain testing of material
    generally, subclass 104 for surface and cutting edge testing generally,
    subclass 116 for motor and engine testing including engine parts, subclass
    156 for statistical record verifying, subclass 157 for record strip
    sprocket hole testing, subclasses 861+ for volume or rate of flow meters,
    subclass 290 for liquid level or depth gauges, subclass 488 for speed or
    acceleration testing generally, subclasses 700+ for fluid pressures gauges,
    and subclass 421 for samplers and tollers.  See also section VI above.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 20 for mechanical movement
    apparatus, subclass 640 for gearing arrangements, subclass 469 for control
    lever and linkage systems, and subclass 567 for machine elements, per se.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 1 for signals,
    indicators or inspection means including visual inspection devices whereby
    the motor operation or the condition of some part may be ascertained.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 5 for signals, indicators, or
    inspection means whereby the expansible chamber operation or the condition
    of some part of the device may be ascertained.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 1+ for processes of gas
    separation with control responsive to sensed condition which may involve an
    optical test and subclasses 82+ for processes of gas separation using
    chromatography.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 101+ for chromatography type
    apparatus for gas separation.

    100,    Presses, subclass 99 for alarm, signal, indicator, or test means
    which may be of an optical character.

    101,    Printing, subclass 2 for printing devices combined with sorting
    devices which may utilize an optical test.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, for mechanical signals and indicators,
    particularly subclasses 200+ for mechanical indicators and subclass 137 for
    compressional wave generators.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 663+ for automatic control of coating
    apparatus which may include an optical test, subclasses 712+ for testing,
    inspecting or measuring which may involve visual inspection or an optical
    test device, and subclasses 712+ for signals and indicators responsive to a
    condition.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 6.8 for egg candling methods and
    apparatus combined with the treating of fertilized eggs, and subclass 311
    for incubators which include candling operations.

    125,    Stone Working, subclass 30 for working precious stones.

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 280+ for cigar and cigarette making machinery
    which include light testing devices to control the operation of the
    machinery.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclass 113 for such
    apparatus with an alarm, signal, indicating, inspecting, illuminating, or
    display means.

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclasses 243+ for
    photoelectric primary batteries.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 2 for processes of flow control by a
    condition or characteristic of a fluid which may be of an optical nature,
    and subclass 93 for self-proportioning or correlating systems responsive to
    an optical property, and subclass 551 for indicators, registers, recorders,
    alarms, or inspection means including visual inspection means.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 83 for testing or weighing receiver content, and subclass 94 for
    signals, indicators, recorders, inspection means, and exhibitors permitting
    inspection of the material handling means.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    64 for methods with measuring, testing or inspecting, subclass 378 for
    apparatus with testing, measuring alone or in combination with indicating
    means involving the properties, dimensions, or a condition of the work or
    apparatus, and subclass 379 for inspecting with or without illuminating
    means for observing normally nonvisible machine or work parts.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclass 198 for processes
    involving measuring, inspecting alone or in combination with testing or
    visual inspection of the product, and subclass 263 for apparatus to detect
    some condition of the machine or the material including inspection of the
    material undergoing treatment for some chemical or physical characteristic.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 11.1+ for exchange apparatus having an
    alarm, indicator, signal, register, recorder, test or inspection means.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 250.01+ for processes including indicating,
    testing, measuring, locating, or recording a well condition, and subclass
    64 for well apparatus including time, distance, temperature, or counting
    apparatus.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 15 for apparatus
    including separation by size, subclass 18 for apparatus for separating
    buried objects based upon physical differences, and subclass 20 including
    visual inspection of the buried object.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclass 20 for apparatus including
    means to indicate or signal a condition including position or movement of
    the driving or impacting tool.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 11 for electrical
    apparatus including a fluid or vacuum with structure to signal or indicate
    some condition of the fluid or vacuum.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 40 for apparatus with
    signalling, indicating, testing or measuring including invisible radiation
    examination in subclass 41 and visual inspection means in subclass 49.

    177,    Weighing Scales, appropriate subclasses for balances, per se, and
    automatic weighing devices, particularly subclass 45 for apparatus
    including alarms or signals in addition to the weight indicator, and
    subclass 50 for apparatus for performing an additional test including size
    gauging not provided for elsewhere.

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, appropriate subclasses
    for nonpowered type material transporting apparatus including subclass 2
    for chutes and subclass 35 for rollerways.

    194,    Check-Actuated Control Mechanisms, subclass 207 including apparatus
    for the testing of paper currency for genuineness and other anomalous
    checks in automatic dispensing machines and including apparatus in
    subclasses 224 and 304+ for coin in circuit operated switches, subclasses
    219+, 230+, and 239+ for coin operated switches, and subclasses 302+ for
    fraud preventive devices.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 502 for a conveyor having
    signalling or indicating means or means for measuring the conveyed load,
    subclasses 504+ for a conveyor having load weighing means, and appropriate
    subclasses for different types of conveyors or systems of conveyors having
    operation control means using a photo-optics system.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 61.02 for light
    actuated switches.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 450+ and 600+
    for processes and apparatus, respectively, dealing with electrophoresis and
    electro-osmosis; subclasses 400+ for electrolytic analysis and testing
    apparatus; and subclasses 242+ for electrolytic cells, in general.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, particularly
    subclasses 510+ for the combination of a candling operation with a weighing
    operation of the sorting type; subclasses 556+ for diverse condition
    responsive testing means; subclasses 525 and 586 for light-type gauging
    apparatus; subclasses 580+ for apparatus for sorting on the basis of an
    optical property of a material including the color and polarization effects
    of the material; subclasses 512+, 592+, and 645 for automatic weighers; and
    subclasses 702+ and 939 for manual candling and assorting apparatus.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 635 and 656+ for
    processes involving chromatography, and subclass 85 for apparatus including
    alarms, indicators, registers, recorders, signals or inspection means
    including sight glasses.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, appropriate subclasses for supports for plural
    articles particularly subclass 10 for racks to facilitate the sorting of
    articles by hand, and subclass 14 for racks designed to support eggs.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 2 for apparatus including recorders,
    registers, indicators, signals or exhibitors for noting a condition or
    position of a dispenser part, and subclass 155 for apparatus with
    transparent inspecting or viewing means.

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, subclass 41 for manual severing
    devices which have a housing for the work supply with an inspection window
    or transparent panel.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclass 100 for
    apparatus with an alarm, signal, or indicator to sense a condition in the
    movement of indefinite length material.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclass 56.5 for apparatus to note the
    physical state or location of the work, flux, filler, or product.

    235,    Registers, subclasses 419+ for record controlled electromechanical
    calculators, subclass 61 for mechanical digital and analogue calculators.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 71 for
    apparatus having means to indicate a condition, indicate the extent of
    motion or position of a part, or perform a quantity measurement or an
    inspection to determine flow conditions.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 357, 534+, 563+, 28+,
    36+, and 49 for detector or stop for controlling various winding or
    unwinding operations, and subclass 912 for an alarm or indicator.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclass 20 for block signal systems,
    subclass 111 for grade crossing track protection, subclass 120 for the
    detection of defects in the roadway, subclass 122 for train position
    indicating apparatus, subclass 125 for electric automatic highway signal
    apparatus, and subclass 169 for train defect indicating apparatus including
    infrared hot box detectors.

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses for single article supports in
    general.

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 53 for apparatus including static gauges,
    levels, plumbs or scale markings on molding apparatus.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 200 for photoelectric circuits to control
    the illumination falling upon the photocell or to follow a pattern or to
    follow a point, subclass 206 for photoelectric controlled circuits,
    particularly subclass 216 for optical or prephotocell systems which
    includes in subclass 221 for system controlled by articles, persons or
    animals, in subclass 225 polarizing optical system, in subclass 226 optical
    systems including visible light filters, prisms, and diffraction gratings
    and in subclass 229 the control of light by optical shutters and
    attenuators, and subclasses 250 to 422 for methods and apparatus dealing
    with the production of invisible radiant energy, its detection or
    utilization.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 62.3 for barrier layer device compositions,
    subclass 501.1 for light sensitive emissive or conductive compositions,
    subclass 299 for liquid crystal containing optical filter compositions and
    subclasses 582+ for other optical filter compositions, and subclasses
    301.16 through 301.6 for fluorescent or phosphorescent compositions.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 1.1+ for methods for forming articles producing optical effects
    including light polarization, and subclass 40 for methods with measuring,
    testing, or inspecting some variable condition in the shaped article, the
    mold, the molded material or shaping surface.

    269,    Work Holders, subclass 8 for magnetic work holders, subclass 11 for
    holders provided with illuminating means, and subclass 19 for holders
    provided with gage means such as vertical or horizontal position indicators
    for the work or the holder.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 18 for follow-up
    systems of motor control, particularly subclass 28 for self-balancing
    network controls, subclass 480 for apparatus which includes the radiant
    energy control of a motor, and subclass 490 for motor systems with signals,
    meters, recorders and testing devices.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for the
    measurement or the testing of electric properties, particularly subclasses
    300+ for measurements or tests relating to nuclear or electronic induction,
    subclasses 403+ for the testing of lamps, vacuum tubes, and discharge
    devices, subclass 200 for tests which rely on magnetic phenomenon,
    subclasses 600+ for the measurement of impedance, admittance, inductance,
    resistance, conductance, and susceptance, subclasses 76.11+ for measuring
    or testing electricity, per se, including subclass 96 for tests utilizing
    optical principles to determine electrical quantities, and subclass 121 for
    cathode-ray type indicators.

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses for a demodulator of signals
    of less than infrared frequency which may contain an optical device (e.g.,
    an optical isolator).

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 15 for photoconductive resistors
    responsive to infrared, ultraviolet or visible light.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 146.2 for digital comparator
    systems, subclasses 825.30+ for intelligence comparison of information,
    subclasses 870.01+ for quantitative telemetering systems including
    subclasses 870.28+ whereby the telemetering is transmitted by means of
    radiant energy, subclasses 870.16+ wherein the telemetering system is
    responsive to a condition, subclasses 500+ for condition responsive
    indicating systems, particularly subclasses 577+ for a flame indicator;
    subclasses 584+ for a temperature indicator; subclass 600 for a radiant
    energy indicator; subclasses 603+ for a fluent material indicator; subclass
    670 for a velocity indicator; subclass 675 for a web, film, or strip
    indicator; subclass 678 for a geometrical gauge indicator, and subclass 265
    for geometrical gage type responsive systems.

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave, Systems and (e.g., Radar,
    Radio Navigation), subclasses 1 through 205 for radar systems involving
    electromagnetic radiation in the radio wave frequency.

    346,    Recorders, for the generic class of recording the movements of
    machines or making a record of any phenomenon, particularly subclass 33 for
    recorders combined with external recorder operating means, subclasses
    150.1+ for electric recording including spark and electrochemical,
    subclasses 107.1+ for light or beam recording.

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, subclasses 112+ for
    electrostatic marking, particularly subclasses 129+ for photo scanning;
    subclasses 224+ for light or beam marking processes or apparatus.

    348,    Television, subclasses 135+ for television systems utilized to
    effect a measurement and subclasses 180+ for measuring and testing devices
    utilized in television systems which may include optical elements.

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclass 204
    for interpupillary distance measuring and lens positioning examination
    instruments, and subclasses 239+ for test charts and targets for the
    subjective testing of vision for astigmatism and chromaticity.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, appropriate subclasses for methods and
    apparatus dealing with cameras for taking of pictures and projectors which
    show the motion pictures, especially subclass 39 for methods of utilizing
    motion pictures for time and motion studies or for other uses other than
    the creation of the illusion of motion.

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, appropriate subclasses for projection
    apparatus which may be used to facilitate optical measuring and testing.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    350+ for optical elements usable in the infrared or ultraviolet range,
    subclasses 362+ for combpound lens systmes including telescopes,
    microscopes, or periscopes, subclasses 396+ for microscope slides,
    subclasses 436+ for scale or indicia reading, subclasses 483+ for
    polarization type       devices, subclasses 290+ for light control systems
    which after an optical medium surface, or interface, subclasses 566+ for
    diffractions gratings subclasses 557+ for light interference systems,
    subclass 615 for light dispersion systems, subclasses 645+ lenses,
    particularly subclass 801 for lenses combined with illumination and a
    viewed object support, subclasses 227+ for light control systems using an
    opaque element or medium movable in or through the light path, subclasses
    831+ for prioms and their mounts, subclasses 838+ for reflectors, and
    subclasses 885+ for optical filters.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 173+ and
    211 for electric circuits for relays and electromagnets controlled by a
    photosensitive device.

    362,    Illumination, appropriate subclasses for general purpose lighting
    devices, particularly subclasses 3+ for photographic lights, subclasses
    138+ for inspection lamps, and subclass 293 for signal lanterns.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems,  subclasses 400+
    for particular application of data processing systems or calculating
    computers, particularly subclass 525 for the application of a computer in
    the area of physics concerned with the nature and properties of light;
    subclasses 550+ for data processing systems or calculating computers
    utilized to effect a measuring, testing, or monitoring operation of an
    external device or quantity, and wherein the external device or quantity
    being measured is nominally claimed; subclasses 600+ for hybrid computers;
    subclasses 700+ for digital calculating computers; subclasses 800+ for
    analog computers, and FOR 514+ for foreign art collections of
    computer-based communication engineering which may include object detection
    or tracking.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclass for
    static information storage and retrieval systems, per se.  Static storage
    systems which include testing or measuring are excluded from this class,
    see Class 364, subclasses 550+.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 32 for thermal measurement
    of total energy or power radiated from a source; and subclasses 121+ for
    emitted radiation, in general.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclasses 245+ for the testing, sensing, measuring, monitoring or
    detecting of a reactor condition including control of the reactor as a
    result of the testing or sensing.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 6 for article counters of the electrical
    type.

    382,    Image Analysis, appropriate subclasses for the application of image
    analysis or pattern recognition systems.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, appropriate subclasses for fiber optics, per se.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 1+ for
    artificial intelligence, subclasses 101+ for static presentation
    processing,  subclasses 118+ for computer graphics processing, subclasses
    200.01+ for digital data processing, and subclasses 326+ for a computer
    operator interface.

    396,    Photography, subclass 563 for a sensitometer which may produce an
    optical wedge having varying light transmission characteristics by the
    controlled exposure of a photographic medium to light.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics of
    electrophotographic devices.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, appropriate subclasses for the
    generic class of article handling, particularly subclasses 431+ for
    engaging an article between its ends for rotation and advancement, and
    subclass 433 for article rotators, roller type.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 50+ for analytical and
    analytical-control apparatus involving an optical test; subclass 44 for
    viable blood-treating apparatus; and subclass 99 for laboratory apparatus.



            An alternative electronic search of U.S. patents based upon a
    modification of the European Patent Office Classification (ECLA) System for
    certain subject matter in this subclass may also be found in Class 422
    Cross-Reference Art Collections 908-948. (There are no definitions
    associated with these Cross-Reference Art Collections. The most available
    disclosure as to the types of documents contained herein is given in any
    notes associated with the titles.)

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 9.1+
    for compositions and methods of diagnosing a body condition by an in vivo
    test.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 162 for processes of coating, per se,
    wherein the product is an optical element.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet which may possess a critical light transmissive or reflective
    property; and especially subclass 426 for nonstructural composite web or
    sheet embodying a layer of glass.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclass 24 for radiation imagery chemistry process involving
    control feature responsive to a test or measurement.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 13 for gas burners with signal, alarm or
    indicator for controlling the combustion ingredients or any other function
    relating to the burning of the gas, and subclass 355 for laboratory type
    burners including those used in sample excitations dealing with
    spectroscopy and flame photometers of Class 356.

    433,    Dentistry, subclass 6 for the visual comparison of tooth forms with
    the shape or coloring of a person's face or teeth.

    434,    Education, Demonstration, and Cryptography, subclasses 298 and 303
    for apparatus and processes relating to chemistry and physics which could
    include light testing devices, subclasses 98+ for color comparison charts
    which are used for display and instruction purposes, and subclasses 322+
    for examination devices and methods which may include as a part thereof
    reflection and transmission tests similar to those found in Class 356.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 4+ for
    the quantitative or qualitative testing of fermentation processes.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 1+ for
    analytical and analytical control methods which could involve an optical
    test.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    subclasses 4 and 64 for methods and apparatus for adjusting electrodes by
    means of optical operations.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 42+ for a lens grinding process which may
    include optical tests as part of the grinding process and subclass 325 for
    a stationary tool type of lens grinder.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 150+ for high temperature (Tc > 30 K) superconducting devices,
    and particularly subclasses 160+ for measuring or testing system or device.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 20+ for subject matter relating to
    administration or removal of material from the body by means responsive to
    optical diagnostic means.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 310+ for diagnostic equipment and methods which
    may include in vivo light examination of a body process, including
    metabolism, spirometers, and endoscopes.

    606,    Surgery, subclasses 2+ for subject matter relating to surgical
    instruments, or their use, for applying light to the body.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses 1+
    for therapeutic instruments which utilize light.


CLS 356/2
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including structure responsive to
    two stereoscopic images as photographed or otherwise viewed at spaced
    points over a surface (usually of the earth) and furnishing a contour plot
    of the surface based on the distinctions in these images.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass usually involves a
    photodetecting apparatus such as a photocell system which scans or
    otherwise responds to the stereoscopic images or records, together with
    apparatus to compare the photocell outputs to operate some form of
    indicator such as a recorder.  If the indication is by a scriber,
    classification is in Class 33; and if the output is an error signal as for
    alignment purposes classification is in Class 250, especially subclass 558.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    for general alignment inspection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 20.1+ for sight line controlled
    geometrical scribers.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 220 for photocell systems with plural
    photocells responsive to plural related images where the measuring is
    lacking.

    348,    Television, subclasses 26 for television systems including means to
    generate contours based on features in the scene viewed.

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, subclass 5 for projection involving
    mapping or aerial photograph rectifying.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    470 for stereoviewers with compensation for camera positions, as of the
    plotting or mapping type.


CLS 356/3
TXT RANGE OR REMOTE DISTANCE FINDING:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising instruments to measure
    the distance between an observer and a remote point or to measure the
    distance between two points remote from the observer.

    (1)     Note. Height is a distance that may be measured.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    355     through 358, for interferometric dimensional measurement of small
    structures or spaces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclass 414 for means to calculate the range of a
    target and not employing a particular sighting means.

    348,    Television, subclasses 135+ for television systems utilized to
    determine range.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 89+ for range finders which operate in
    conjunction with camera structure.


CLS 356/3.01
TXT Triangulation ranging to a point with one projected beam:

    Subject matter under subclass 3 including the following: (a) the distance
    to any single remote target point is determined in accordance with the
    principles of triangulation; (b) the target may include several points
    requiring more than one beamed measurement; and (c) a light beam or its
    reflection from the target point is oriented and projected to form at least
    one side of a triangle.

    (1)     Note.  Triangulation involves, for example, establishing a triangle
    where one side (i.e., the base) and the angles, which the two other sides
    form with the base, are determined.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not necessarily require the use of a
    photodetector, but requires a projected beam.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, apparatus that utilizes
    together a nonfixed axial source and a nonfixed axial line of sight for the
    sensing that is not found elsewhere, but that still requires only a single
    source for each point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.09,   where scanning is required to achieve angular measurement to a
    single point.

    3.12,   for photodetection remote from at least two source locations that
    are transmitting beams to be received by a photodetector.

    9+,     for triangulation with no projected beam and no photodetection.

    372+,   for distance measurement to define the dimensions of an adjacent,
    as opposed to remote, article that may involve triangulation to any one
    point.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 201.6 for triangulation used to establish
    distance-related focus of the source onto a triangulating photodetector.

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), for the use of similar circuitry not requiring
    the same wavelength or radiation distinctions.

    367,    Communications, Electrical: Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices, for
    the use of similar circuitry not requiring the same wavelength or radiation
    distinctions.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 89+ where triangulation may be employed in
    the focus of a separate photographic camera.


CLS 356/3.02
TXT Using photodetection with a fixed axial line of sight:

    Subject matter under subclass 3.01 that determines an angle of the triangle
    with respect to a known base line by establishing a fixed viewing direction
    and field of view for a photodetector to generate an electrical signal upon
    the coincidence of the target along a photodetector's line of sight.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass would include apparatus that utilizes a moving
    detector with respect to a fixed optical viewing axis to determine the
    direction of light from a targeted source.


CLS 356/3.03
TXT Using a source beam with a fixed axial direction or plane:

    Subject matter under subclass 3.01 that includes a beam or plane of light
    from the target that has a fixed angular orientation with respect to a
    baseline to establish an angle of the triangle.

    (1)     Note.  The use of a photodetector is not required for this
    subclass, but the use of a vidicon-type detector is found here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.05,   for a system that includes a moving optical axis in the receiver
    optics and a fixed detector.


CLS 356/3.04
TXT With a single staring photodetector having one element:

    Subject matter under subclass 3.03 wherein a detector produces an
    electrical signal related to the angular position of the source based on
    the instantaneous output of or differential output across a single
    detecting element that is not subdivided for its operation.

    (1)     Note.  A one-element photodetector may consist of a lateral effect
    or photoresistive element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.03,   for vidicon-type detection.

    3.06+,  for use of detectors that define the position of incidence of
    received light by the difference in the outputs of more than two detector
    elements (e.g., at least three separate photodetectors).


CLS 356/3.05
TXT Having moving receiver optics:

    Subject matter under subclass 3.04 wherein an image of the source is moved
    with respect to the detector's axial line of sight to achieve an effective
    movement of the photodetector's angular field of view across the source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.02,   for systems that may include a moving detector element with respect
    to a fixed optical line of sight.


CLS 356/3.06
TXT With a single photodetector having multiple elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 3.03 wherein a detector produces an
    electrical signal related to the angular position of the source based on
    the output of a particularly positioned one of an array of at least three
    subelements in the focused field of view of a single detector structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.03,   for vidicon-type detection.

    3.07,   for CCD-type multi-element detectors that are electronically
    scanned.

    3.08,   for two separated detectors that are paired.


CLS 356/3.07
TXT Having electronic scanning of the photodetector:

    Subject matter under subclass 3.06 that includes electronic regular
    sampling through time of the elements of the detector array in order to
    determine the position or angle associated with a particular element
    illuminated by the target.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, CCD-type detectors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.03,   for vidicon-type detection.


CLS 356/3.08
TXT With at least one paired set of staring photodetectors:

    Subject matter under subclass 3.03 wherein any two separated detectors
    produce electrical signals related to two angular positions detected from
    the single source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.06,   for a single detector subdivided into at least three subelements.


CLS 356/3.09
TXT Requiring scanning of a source beam:

    Subject matter under subclass 3.01 wherein the source comprises a beam of
    light that is moved at some angular rate that can be detected and
    associated with any one target's angular position.

    (1)     Note.  The target may be at the source position or reflected by the
    source, but scanning is required to generate the angular information.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.02,   for moved but not necessarily spatially scanned sources that define
    a target with respect to a fixed axial line of sight of a photodetector.


CLS 356/3.1
TXT Triangulation ranging to a point with two or more projected beams:

    Subject matter under subclass 3 wherein a target distance is determined in
    accordance with the principles of triangulation, and two light beams,
    separated by a known baseline distance, are oriented and projected to
    define the other two legs of the triangle.

    (1)     Note.  The two beams may be scanned over angularly related time
    across the target or moved at least once to orient their coincidence on the
    target.

    (2)     Note.  Triangulation involves, for example, establishing a triangle
    where one side (i.e., the base) and the angles, which the two other sides
    form with the base, are determined.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass does not necessarily require the use of a
    photodetector, but requires projected beams.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.09,   where scanning is required to achieve angular measurement to a
    single point.

    3.12+,  for photodetection remote from at least two source locations
    transmitting beams to be received by a photodetector.

    9+,     for triangulation with no projected beam and no photodetection.

    372,    for distance measurement to define the dimensions of an adjacent,
    as opposed to remote, article that may involve triangulation to any one
    point.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 201.6 for triangulation used to establish
    distance-related focus of the source onto a triangulating photodetector.

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation) for the use of similar circuitry not requiring the
    same wavelength or radiation distinctions.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices, for
    the use of similar circuitry not requiring the same wavelength or radiation
    distinctions.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 89+ where triangulation may be employed in
    the focus of a separate photographic camera.


CLS 356/3.11
TXT Using photodetection at the source station(s):

    Subject matter under subclass 3.1 wherein an electrical signal is generated
    based on the reflection of the two beams from the target back to the plane,
    platform, or station(s) that supports the beams and the photodetector.


CLS 356/3.12
TXT Using photodetection remote from the source station(s):

    Subject matter under subclass 3.1 wherein an electrical signal is generated
    based on the incidence of the two sources onto a photodetector that is not
    located on the same plane, platform, or station(s) as the two sources.

    (1)     Note.  The detector may be located at the target to receive direct
    unreflected directional beams of illumination from the sources.


CLS 356/3.13
TXT Triangulation ranging with photodetection, but with no projected beam:

    Subject matter under subclass 3 wherein the distance to any single remote
    target point is determined in accordance with the principles of
    triangulation, wherein at least one passive image of a target point (which
    may be formed by arbitrary target point illumination) forms at least one
    side of a triangle.

    (1)     Note.  Triangulation involves, for example, establishing a triangle
    where one side (i.e., the base) and the angles, which the two other sides
    form with the base, are determined.

    (2)     Note.  The target point may be an active omnidirectional beacon
    source or may be actively illuminated where the active beam does not form
    one side of the triangle measured.

    (3)     Note.  Sequential views of a moving target with a known speed may
    comprise the target.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.12,   for photodetection remote from at least two source locations
    transmitting directed beams to be received by a photodetector.

    9+,     for triangulation with no projected beam and no photodetection.

    372+,   for distance measurement to define the dimensions of an adjacent,
    as opposed to remote, article that may involve triangulation to any one
    point.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 201.6 for triangulation used to establish
    distance-related focus of the source onto a triangulating photodetector.

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), for the use of similar circuitry not requiring
    the same wavelength or radiation distinctions.

    367,    Communications, Electrical: Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices, for
    the use of similar circuitry not requiring the same wavelength or radiation
    distinctions.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 89+ where triangulation may be employed in
    the focus of a separate photographic camera.


CLS 356/3.14
TXT Using at least a pair of viewing axes:

    Subject matter under subclass 3.13 which includes two optical axes relating
    to the target directed to at least two photodetectors or detector arrays in
    the generation of a pair of electrical signals related to the triangle that
    defines the distance to the target.

    (1)     Note.  The detector(s) may be mono- or multi-element, and further
    scanned or staring.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes passive image correlation of two
    images from a single target source in establishing two angles to the target.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.08,   for a pair of staring mono- or multi-element detectors used where a
    single source maintains a fixed axial direction.

    3.15,   for image correlation where a photodetector views images of a
    target and where one of the images is established along a fixed line of
    sight.

    4.04,   for split-image separation detection of ``focus" quality where
    there is no baseline separation between the separate image viewing axes as
    here in subclass 3.14.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclass 139 for triangulation of range derived from
    two or more picture images generated and compared based on their baseline
    separation.


CLS 356/3.15
TXT With one viewing axis fixed:

    Subject matter under subclass 3.14 wherein one optical axis that views the
    target is fixed relative to the other one of the pair of viewing axes.


CLS 356/3.16
TXT With moving optical elements in all viewing axes:

    Subject matter under subclass 3.14 that includes movement of each viewing
    axis in order to achieve measurement of the target point.


CLS 356/4.01
TXT With photodetection:

    Subject matter under subclass 3 that includes the generation of an
    electrical signal in response to light associated with the distance being
    measured.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes first any apparatus or method that
    includes a generic capability applicable to any one of pulse, phase, or
    frequency ranging systems.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.01+,  for a system that involves triangulation, even though that term is
    not mentioned, but is evidenced by a baseline or trigonometric technique
    and contains either photodetection and/or the use of a projected light beam.

    9+,     for a system that uses neither a pro- jected beam nor
    photodetection.

    372+,   for distance measurement to define the dimensions of an adjacent,
    as opposed to remote, article that may involve similar ranging techniques
    to any one point.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), for the use of similar circuitry not requiring
    the same wavelength or radiation distinctions.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices, for
    the use of similar circuitry not requiring the same wavelength or radiation
    distinctions.


CLS 356/4.02
TXT Of a simulation or test:

    Subject matter under subclass 4.01 that includes a predefined range path
    for the light used to measure range in order to calibrate or test a range
    finder.

    (1)     Note.  The simulation in this subclass is not considered the same
    as the alternate reference path used in subclasses 5.12 and 5.13 used
    during the regular operation of those range finders.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72+,    for other optical tests not specifically dedicated to range or
    distance finders.


CLS 356/4.03
TXT Of focused image size or dimensions:

    Subject matter under subclass 4.01 that includes a determination of the
    distance of or to an observed object by the relative focused size of the
    object or dimensional spread of reference points on the focal plane of the
    photodetector with respect to a calibrated size and corresponding distance.

    (1)     Note.  The image size must be derived from a focused image as
    opposed to a blur circle size.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.04,   for blur circle size or edge detection.

    21,     for the same, but without photodetection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclass 140 where a picture image signal is analyzed
    for size.


CLS 356/4.04
TXT Of degree of defocus:

    Subject matter under subclass 4.01 that includes a determination of the
    distance of a remote point or observed object by the degree of image focus
    through relative characteristics of in-and-out-of-focus intensity, blur
    circle size, lateral split image displacement, etc., of an image generated
    at some fixed location from focusing optics along its optical axis relative
    to the same characteristic under a focused condition at the same location
    along the optical axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.14,   for split images of a single object directed to two detectors
    separated by a baseline, unlike split-image focus detection here in
    subclass 4.04 where there is no baseline separation.

    4.03,   for a focused image feature measurement(s).

    4.05,   for mechanically searching for the focal point based on the same or
    other characteristics as in subclass 4.04.

    22,     for split images without photodetection.


CLS 356/4.05
TXT Of focal point search:

    Subject matter under subclass 4.01 that includes a way to mechanically, or
    otherwise, sample the ``image" along the optical axis of a fixed focus lens
    or scan the focus of a transmitted beam to determine the point of maximum
    focus of the image or reflection of the source which is proportional to the
    distance to the targeted remote point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.04,   for determining range based on the focus characteristics of an
    image at some fixed point from the focusing lens.


CLS 356/4.06
TXT Of differential amplitude at two source or detector distances:

    Subject matter under subclass 4.01 that includes either two sources at
    different distances from a target alternately illuminating the target at
    the remote point that a fixed detector views or includes two detectors at
    different distances receiving focused images of the target illuminated by a
    single source from which distance is determined based on the relative
    intensities detected.


CLS 356/4.07
TXT Of intensity proportional to distance:

    Subject matter under subclass 4.01 that includes a measure of the relative
    intensity of the received focused target image from which distance may be
    determined by the fact that intensity varies by the inverse square of the
    distance or the like.


CLS 356/4.08
TXT Of height relative to a light plane:

    Subject matter under subclass 4.01 that includes some apparatus between two
    remote points being measured that defines the height between the ground and
    a detector or reflector moved to intersect a light beam or beam plane that
    may be scanned or fanned.

    (1)     Note.  The apparatus may define a path for the light beam to
    traverse from the  mirror  intersecting the plane to the ground.


CLS 356/4.09
TXT Of light interference fringes:

    Subject matter under subclass 4.01 wherein the photodetection is in
    response to an interference pattern formed by the interaction of coherent
    light waves which relate to range by a fringe pattern or fringe count.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5.09,   for a system that detects frequency of modulation to determine
    range where the beat frequency of a mixed or compared beam is not directly
    related to a coherent interference fringe count.

    5.11,   for phase change counting between known frequencies of modulation
    that are unrelated to coherent carrier mixing in the production of fringes.

    5.15,   for a system that demodulates a return beam by coherent or
    incoherent mixing in order to shift the return to a different IF operating
    frequency unrelated to counting of fringes.

    28.5,   for a system where frequency is detected from the mixing of
    coherent waves that produce a moving, interference pattern or just a
    difference frequency, which is related to velocity.


CLS 356/4.1
TXT Having different frequency sources:

    Subject matter under subclass 4.09 that includes at least two light beams
    from the same or different sources, but which have different frequencies.


CLS 356/5.01
TXT Of pulse transit time:

    Subject matter under subclass 4.01 including means for measuring the time
    delay of a discrete light pulse in its time of flight (transit time) from
    an observing station to a remote point and back to the observing station.


CLS 356/5.02
TXT Having return coincide with swept display or detector:

    Subject matter under subclass 5.01 wherein the return pulse's reception
    time is related to transit time by reference to where it appears in time on
    a calibrated sweep of a display screen, detector, or film which begins a
    sweep at the instant of transmission.


CLS 356/5.03
TXT Having one or more return pulse gates or windows:

    Subject matter under subclass 5.01 including means at the receiver for
    accepting return signals to be processed if they occur during specified
    (gate or window) periods after the transmission of a light pulse.


CLS 356/5.04
TXT Including a displayed image:

    Subject matter under subclass 5.03 wherein the return pulse includes image
    data of a reflecting object at the remote point and is displayed as at
    least a two-dimensional image that does not include reflection signals
    outside the gate period.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclass 31 for backscatter reduction of an image that
    may involve range gating, but does not involve range indicating.


CLS 356/5.05
TXT Having pulse transmission trigger significance:

    Subject matter under subclass 5.01 including details of the manner in which
    the transmitted pulse instant is determined for measuring the transit time
    of the light pulse.


CLS 356/5.06
TXT Including optical pick-off of transmission start:

    Subject matter under subclass 5.05 wherein the instant of pulse
    transmission is determined by optically detecting the transmission pulse in
    order to begin measuring the transit time.


CLS 356/5.07
TXT With specific counter type timing of returns:

    Subject matter under subclass 5.06 including an electronic element that
    counts timing pulses associated with travel of the optical pulse to and
    from the target.


CLS 356/5.08
TXT Including specific counter type timing of returns:

    Subject matter under subclass 5.05 including an electronic element that
    counts timing pulses associated with travel of the optical pulse to and
    from the target.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes electrical initiation of the counter
    controlled independently of the optical pulse itself.


CLS 356/5.09
TXT Of frequency difference:

    Subject matter under subclass 4.01 that either sends a defined frequency
    beam or frequency modulates an outgoing pulse or continuous wave optical
    beam in order to compare the detected return frequency to the transmitted
    frequency for determining range calibrated frequency differences.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.09+,  where frequency is detected from the mixing of coherent waves that
    produce an interference pattern, which includes moving or static fringes
    which are counted.

    5.15,   where optical demodulation by heterodyning or homodyning is used to
    reduce the processed signal frequency.

    28.5,   where frequency is detected from the mixing of coherent waves that
    produce a moving interference pattern or just a difference frequency, which
    is related to velocity.


CLS 356/5.1
TXT Of CW phase delay:

    Subject matter under subclass 4.01 that incorporates a continuous wave (CW)
    of modulated or unmodulated optical signal that is transmitted to and
    reflected from a target, such that the relative phase position of the
    returned wave is compared to the phase of the transmitted wave in order to
    determine the distance-proportional transit time to and from the target.

    (1)     Note.  Phase nulling techniques are included in this subclass.


CLS 356/5.11
TXT Having multiple carrier or modulation frequencies:

    Subject matter under subclass 5.1 including more than one frequency of
    modulation or carrier frequency for the transmitted optical signal to
    further define the distance-proportional phases comparison.


CLS 356/5.12
TXT Including an alternating reference path:

    Subject matter under subclass 5.11 that incorporates a path of known
    distance through which the transmitted signal is alternately sent in order
    to phase calibrate the receiver circuity for the received measuring signal
    from the target.


CLS 356/5.13
TXT Having an alternating reference path:

    Subject matter under subclass 5.1 that incorporates a path of known
    distance through which the transmitted signal is alternately sent in order
    to phase calibrate the receiver circuity for the received measuring signal
    from the target.


CLS 356/5.14
TXT Having polarization discrimination:

    Subject matter under subclass 5.1 that incorporates polarized optical
    elements in the optical path.


CLS 356/5.15
TXT Having specific IF mixing of returns:

    Subject matter under subclass 5.1 that incorporates demodulation by
    optically or electrically heterodyning the received signals to an
    intermediate frequency (IF) for further processing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.09+,  for systems that mix the return with another beam to produce a
    fringe pattern to be counted and frequency analyzed as a direct measurement
    of range.

    5.09,   for systems that detect frequency of modulation to determine range
    where the beat frequency of a mixed or compared beam is not directly
    related to a coherent interference fringe count or to CW phase delay.


CLS 356/6
TXT Subject matter under subclass 3 comprising means for testing or indicating
    the condition of the range or height finder with regard to its adjustment,
    alignment, or calibration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124,    for lens or reflective image former testing generally.


CLS 356/7
TXT Subject matter under subclass 3 wherein the instrument has two axis which
    are offset from each other in a direction perpendicular to the base line so
    that the device may function as a periscope.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    540+ for periscopes, per se.


CLS 356/8
TXT Subject matter under subclass 3 wherein the range or height finder is
    combined with a view finder.

    (1)     Note.  Where the operation of the range finder is coordinated with
    the operation of some other element of the camera (usually the objective
    lens) classification is not here but in Class 396, subclasses 148+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    396,    Photography, subclasses 148+ for camera structure combined with a
    rangefinder and viewfinder; see also (1) Note above.


CLS 356/9
TXT Subject matter under subclass 3 wherein the range or height finder includes
    a base line as a part of the instrument with plural lines of sight directed
    from the extremeties of the base line to the point whose range is to be
    measured, at least one of the lines of sight being deviated.


CLS 356/10
TXT Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein filters or light valves are
    employed to aid the eye as in determining coincidence of the right and left
    images.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    227+ for diaphragms and shutters, and subclasses 885+ for filters of the
    color and neutral density type.


CLS 356/11
TXT Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein the range finder is combined with
    means to determine the height of the object whose range has been determined.


CLS 356/12
TXT Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein the observer sees the field of view
    in three dimensions, the range being determined by comparing the depth of
    the object whose range is to be measured with the apparent depth of a mark
    or marks superimposed upon the field of view.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    462+ for stereoscopic systems generally.


CLS 356/13
TXT Subject matter under subclass 12 where the observer sees an image in true
    perspective and also one in reverse perspective.


CLS 356/14
TXT Subject matter under subclass 12 where the measuring mark or marks are
    stationary.


CLS 356/15
TXT Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein the range measurement is made by
    varying the length of the base line.


CLS 356/16
TXT Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein the range measurement is made by
    deviating one of the lines of sight by means of an adjustable refracting
    element.


CLS 356/17
TXT Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein the range measurement is made by
    deviating one of lines of sight by means of the rotation of a reflecting
    element.


CLS 356/18
TXT Subject matter under subclass 9 comprising structural details including
    means for mounting, supporting or adjusting the range finder or its
    components.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for testing the alignment or calibration of the instrument.


CLS 356/19
TXT Subject matter under subclass 9 including prism structure for displacing
    relative to each other the two images of a coincidence type range finder.

    (1)     Note.  Such prism structure is appropriately classified here as a
    pertinent subcombination even though no other range finder structure is
    recited.


CLS 356/20
TXT Subject matter under subclass 3 wherein the complete measurement requires
    the knowledge of some distance or interval external to the measuring
    instrument.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclasses 262, 276, and 284, for similar subject matter with no
    significant optical feature.


CLS 356/21
TXT Subject matter under subclass 20 where there is an interval of known size
    (e.g., height of an object) at a remote point, the distance to which point
    is to be determined; or where the distance to a remote point is known and
    the size of some interval at the remote point is to be determined.


CLS 356/22
TXT Subject matter under subclass 21 where the instrument provides two
    displaced images of the same object for viewing by the observer.


CLS 356/23
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising means whereby the
    relationship between periodic changes in light intensity or direction and
    the motion of a body are utilized in observing the body or performing some
    measurement with regard to the body or some means controlling the light
    source.

    (1)     Note.  Where a specific test is provided for in another class,
    classification is in that class even though the subject matter may include
    a stroboscope.  See Search Class notes below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 1.56 for timing apparatus for
    watches, camera shutters and the like which may utilize stroboscopic
    principles.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for electric lamp and discharge device systems in general.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 75 for calibration of
    electric meters using stroboscopic principles, and subclasses 76.11+ for
    measuring electric properties using stroboscopes.


CLS 356/24
TXT Subject matter under subclass 23 including reflecting or refracting means
    which are moved periodically to vary the direction of a light beam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    197+ for scanning means in general which use a periodically moving
    reflecting or refracting element.


CLS 356/25
TXT Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein the periodic motion of an element
    containing alternate opaque and transparent areas is used to interrupt a
    light source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    227+ for light valves utilzing an opaque element movable through a light
    path.


CLS 356/26
TXT Subject matter under subclass 25 where the opaque element vibrates or
    oscillates.


CLS 356/27
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including means to measure the
    velocity or the velocity to altitude ratio of a vehicle by sighting from
    the vehicle on a remote object, or including means to measure the velocity
    or the velocity to altitude ratio of a moving object remote from an
    observer by sighting on the object.

    (1)     Note.  The vehicle may be a surface vehicle or an aircraft.  The
    term "sighting" includes aiming an optical instrument with a photocell.
    This subject matter includes timing the passage of a sighted object over
    grids.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    350,    for interferometric measurement of angular velocity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclass 413 for means to calculate the velocity of an
    object and not employing a particular sighting means.


CLS 356/28
TXT Subject matter under subclass 27 wherein the measuring system includes
    means responsive to the received light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3+,     for range or height finders with light detectors.

    139.01+, for devices measuring the angle with respect to a remote point
    having specified applications with photodetection.

    141.1+, for devices measuring the apex of an angle at a photodetection
    station with respect to a remote point.

    152.1+, for devices measuring the apex of an angle at a point remote from a
    photodetection station.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    343,    Communication:  Radio Wave, subclass 8 for systems for measuring
    velocity by means of reflected radio wave energy.


CLS 356/28.5
TXT Of light interference (e.g., interferometer):

    Subject matter under subclass 28 wherein the detection means is responsive
    to an interference pattern formed by the interaction of coherent light
    waves.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes heterodyne interferometers which
    measure a doppler-shifted beam reflected from a moving object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.09    and 4.1, for light interference measurement of displacement or
    distance over large distances.

    35.5,   for material strain analysis by light interference measurement.

    345+,   for light interference measuring and testing, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 71.3 for vibration sensing with a
    light beam indicator.


CLS 356/29
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising means whereby a device
    for determining a line of sight relative to a remote point includes an
    optical element or reticle which is moved relative to the device in
    accordance with the relative velocities of the device and remote point.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes in general sighting devices
    containing optical elements which move relative to the device as a whole
    for the purpose of tracking a relatively moving object and also optical
    elements or reticles which are moved in accordance with information
    obtained by tracking the object by means of moving the sighting device as a
    unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for optical devices which actually measure velocity.


CLS 356/30
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including a support for a crystal
    or gem for examination by visible light, a light source passing light
    through or reflecting light from the crystal or gem and usually structure
    to view, mark, or locate the light patterns correlated to some condition of
    the crystal or gem.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are apparatus and method claims
    which include nominal cutting or etching structure or steps to prepare the
    crystal for examination in addition to the claimed test.

    (2)     Note.  The optical testing of piezoelectric and semiconductor
    crystals are included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for sample preparation wherein the novelty is in the preparation of
    the sample for an optical test and not provided for elsewhere.

    72,     for an optical test combined with another are device and not
    provided for elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 25.35 for piezoelectric device making
    methods, which include cutting and etching steps.

    125,    Stone Working, subclasses 12 and 13.01  for apparatus and methods
    for cutting crystals which include the step of first examining optically
    and marking the crystal for axis orientation. Also, see subclass 35 for
    work supports for cutting the crystal.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    625+ for methods including a chemical etching step.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 73+ for methods
    and apparatus for X-ray analysis of crystals which may include a support
    for the crystal.


CLS 356/31
TXT Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein the properties of crystals or gems
    are examined for one of the three principle axis of the crystal, the left
    or right handedness of the crystal, the polarity or the crystal faces, or
    twinning, if present, in the crystal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, for the etching of a crystal or
    gem.


CLS 356/32
TXT Subject matter under the class definition for examining an article or
    material by noting the effect of the strain in the stressed article on
    light associated with the article or material.

    (1)     Note.  The light may be passed through or reflected from the
    article or material, or may be modified by changes in the contour or the
    position of markings thereon.  The modification of the light may be in
    intensity, direction, polarization, color, or interference patterns
    produced thereby.

    (2)     Note.  Class 73, subclasses 760+ and 862+ provides for stress
    strain measuring generally.  However, where the changes in the material
    tested operate to modify the characteristics of the light associated with
    the test, absent intentional loading of the specimen, classification is in
    this Class 356.  See also (2) Note under indented subclass 33.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 125 for extensiometers.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 763+ for testing the stress or
    strain of material, particularly subclass 800 for optical stress analysis
    with intentional loading of the specimen, and subclasses 862+ for
    dynamometers which are not provided for elsewhere and which do not involve
    the modification of the associated light.  See also (2) Note above.


CLS 356/33
TXT Subject matter under subclass 32 wherein the light utilized in the
    examination or analysis is polarized light, or is polarized as a result of
    the examination or analysis.

    (1)     Note.  Class 359, subclasses 240+ and 483 provides for polarizing
    structure generally whose light polarizing properties are modified by
    mechanical stress; while the subject matter of this subclass is restricted
    to the measuring or analyzing of the strain in the stressed article or
    material from the effect of the strain on polarized light or from the
    polarizing effect of light.

    (2)     Note.  This Class 356 provides for stress-strain determinations in
    articles or materials where the light is directly or indirectly associated
    with the article or material stressed as by direct reflection from or
    transmission through the articles or materials, and for transmissions of
    the light through detectors attached to articles or materials which are
    naturally or forced by stress to be light birefringent as a result of the
    strain on the articles or materials; while Class 73, subclasses 760+,
    provides for stress-strain determinations generally.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for crystal or gem examination wherein polarized light testing may
    be involved.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 133 and 763+ for stress-strain
    testing apparatus and dynamometers generally where no polarized light is
    involved. See also (2) Note above.


CLS 356/34
TXT Subject matter under subclass 33 wherein the test apparatus utilized in
    examining articles or materials includes a detector which is naturally
    birefringent or forced by stress to be birefringent, and means to attach
    the detector to the articles or materials so that the strain placed on the
    articles or materials is imparted to the detector so that the modification
    of the light associated with the detector is indicative of the strain in
    the stressed article or material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     where infrared and ultraviolet light is involved in the test.

    364,    for polarized light examination apparatus which produces
    interference patterns created by the interaction of beams of polarized
    light.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    483+ for polarizing structure generally.  See also (1) Note of subclass 33.


CLS 356/35
TXT Subject matter under subclass 33 wherein there is means to support
    transparent sheet material, statically or in motion, which exhibits
    birefringent properties naturally or when under strain, means to direct
    polarized light through the sheet material, and generally polarized light
    analyzing means to examine the sheet material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    429+,   for monitoring of webs for optical properties or flaws.


CLS 356/35.5
TXT By light interference detector (e.g., inter-ferometer):

    Subject matter under subclass 32 including means responsive to an
    interference pattern produced by the interaction of coherent light waves
    with the stressed article or material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.5,    for light interference measurement of displacement or distance over
    large distances.

    28.5,   for light interference measurement of velocity.

    345+,   for light interference measurement, per se.


CLS 356/36
TXT Subject matter under the class definition involving preparation or
    conditioning of an article or substance or a sample of the article or
    substance to facilitate or enable the later optical test and in combination
    with such an optical test, wherein the preparation or conditioning is
    significant and is not provided for in any other class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, particularly subclasses 23 for gas analysis
    and 53.01+ for the testing of liquid or liquid suspension of solids, and
    subclass 421 for samplers and tollers for gases and liquids including
    closed conduit type samplers.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 50+ for analyticalcontrol apparatus
    and apparatus which use sorbents or in which chemical reactions are
    produced.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 1+ for
    processes involving analytical control and use of sorbents or chemical
    reactions.


CLS 356/37
TXT Subject matter under subclass 36 wherein moisture or other liquids are
    deposited on particles to enlarge them or optically modify them (e.g.,
    improve reflection) to facilitate optical study of the particles.

    (1)     Note.  Generally the apparatus includes pump structure to deliver a
    gas sample containing particles, expand the sample under a constant volume
    to obtain a supersaturated condition with respect to the gas, deliver the
    expanded gas sample to a chamber to optically test the gas with moisture
    precipitated as a result of the gas expansion on the particles present in
    the gas, and exhaust the sample from the apparatus.

    (2)     Note.  The particles examined include ionized particles and
    molecular types.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    335+,   for the determining of the size of particles by optical methods.

    337+,   for particle light scattering generally including the concentration
    or number of particles by statistical methods.

    437+,   for transmission tests through gases for the determination of the
    concentration of particles present in the gases generally and visual
    inspection equipment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 28 for the determination of the
    amount of solid matter in the analysis of gases generally, subclass 29 for
    moisture content of gases, and subclass 421 for reciprocating and rotary
    samplers involving gases and liquids.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 227 and 237 for methods and
    apparatus which may involve the detection of condensation nuclei, per se,
    or the use of condensation nuclei to detect the dew point of gases.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 50+ for analytical apparatus having
    a condensation nuclei detector.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 1+,
    for processes involving the testing of condensation nuclei for traces of
    chemical elements wherein a chemical reaction is precedent to an optical
    test to determine the presence or amount of the elements present.


CLS 356/38
TXT Subject matter under subclass 36 wherein the means to prepare or condition
    includes a movable member which serves as a support to receive successively
    samples of particulate material from a gaseous stream or from a pulverent
    supply of material, the member supporting the particulate matter for the
    optical test.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    335,    for the determination of the size of particles by optical
    procedures.

    337+,   for the determination of particle light scattering including
    polarization effects.

    372+,   for the mensuration of substances or articles by light tests
    generally.

    429+,   for the monitoring of webs generally.

    438+,   for light transmission tests of dust  or smoke.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 627+ for the testing of
    fluent or pulverized material in a gas or liquid wherein an electrical
    signal is involved.


CLS 356/39
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein a specimen of blood or
    tissue is tested in vitro (i.e., outside the body) for various conditions
    by means of visible light apparatus, and the blood testing apparatus is not
    elsewhere classified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246,    for fluid specimen containers.

    335+,   for the determination of particle size, or particle size and the
    number of particles for each size when determined by statistical methods.

    337+,   for the determination of the number of particles in a fluid medium
    by light scattering procedures using statistical methods.

    441+,   for the determination of the number of particles in a fluid medium
    by light absorption using statistical methods and the determination of
    turbidity of liquids generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 10 for particle counters with or without the
    sizing of the particles counted by arithmetical methods.

    382,    Image Analysis, subclasses 128+, for an image analyzing system
    designed specifically for, or utilized in microscopic cell analysis or
    other biomedical applications, where there is significant claim recitation
    of an image analyzing system and no claim recitation of significant
    structure to an external art environment.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 44+ for apparatus for testing blood
    externally of a blooded animal

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 2 for
    processes and compositions for the maintenance of blood (cells) in a
    physiologically active state or for the in vitro separation or treatment of
    blood cells; and subclasses 4+ for processes measuring or testing involving
    enzymes or measuring or testing involving enzymes or micro-organisms (e.g.,
    bacteria, protozoa, actinomycetales, cyanobacteria, fungi, animal cells,
    plant cells, or virus); and subclasses 287+ for claimed or solely disclosed
    as a Class 435 process.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, appropriate
    subclasses for processes and compositions for determining qualitatively or
    quantitatively the chemical property or composition of a sample and for in
    vitro antigen-antibody analysis or composition, especially subclasses 66+
    for processes or compositions for testing for hemoglobin, myo-globin, or
    trace blood; subclass 68 for processes or compositions for determining
    gases in the blood, and subclass 70 for processes and compositions for
    determining sedimentaion rate or hematocrit.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 300+ for diagnostic medical apparatus which may
    utilize visible light to test or inspect blood in vivo.


CLS 356/40
TXT Subject matter under subclass 39 which includes visual and photoelectric
    apparatus to examine the specimen for the percentage of hemoglobin.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for infrared or ultraviolet testing of materials generally where
    optical methods are utilized.

    300+,   for spectroscopic apparatus.

    402+,   for colorimetric apparatus of the visual and photoelectric type.

    441+,   for liquid turbidity testing generally.

    445+,   for reflective material testing  generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 53 for testing the settling rate of
    the liquid suspension of solids.


CLS 356/41
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 to determine the percentage of
    oxyhemoglobin in the specimen which includes a transmissive or reflective
    optical tests.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for standards utilized in a comparison test with a blood sample.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 300+ for diagnostic apparatus and methods
    including subcombinations, for in vivo, i.e., directly measuring properties
    of the living body which may include an optical test.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 20+ for subject matter relating to
    administration or removal of material from the body by means responsive to
    optical diagnostic means.


CLS 356/42
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 wherein there is included generally means
    to support a light reflective or transmissive standard or a light emissive
    standard formed as part of the test apparatus whereby the standard is
    compared simultaneously side by side with the specimen either for equality
    of shade of color and light intensity or for intensity of light alone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for light standards, per se.

    243,    for optical standards generally.

    403,    for the merging of colors or patterns generally.

    413,    for colorimeters generally of the Duboscq type.

    414+,   for colorimeters testing colored liquids generally which utilize a
    solid or liquid transmissive standard, and including standard optical
    wedges, Nessler tubes and micro-colorimeters.

    420,    for a colored light source, per se, which may be utilized as
    standards.

    421+,   for reflective colored standards which include discs, drums, tapes
    or plates.

    425,    for the determination of color generally by light intensity
    comparison.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    831+ for prisms which may be used as standards.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses
    50+ for laboratory devices or apparatus of quantitative or qualitative
    analysis involving either a physical or a chemical reaction, not elsewhere
    provided for.


CLS 356/43
TXT Subject matter under the class definition for analyzing the light emitted
    from a body for properties such as intensity or color components as an
    indication of the temperature of the body.

    (1)     Note.  The body may be heated in turn by another mass which may be
    either a gas, liquid, or solid; and the purpose here would be to ultimately
    determine the temperature of such a mass by the determination of its
    heating effect on the body.

    (2)     Note.  Both temperature devices for metallurgical and photographic
    use are included herein when the indication is in a unit of temperature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213,    for photometry devices.

    300+,   for optical test devices which utilize a light dispersing system
    rather than filters to selectively detect various wavelengths of visible
    light.

    402+,   for shade or color optical test devices, and particularly subclass
    404 for such test devices involving photography, and subclasses 416+ for
    such test devices which utilize one or more colored filters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 502 for the control of an electric
    heater by means of a light responsive temperature detector.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 15 for the
    measurement of the temperature of a furnace for the control of the heating
    of the furnace.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 226 for radiant energy detectors utilizing
    filters or dispersing means, and subclass 229 for light modulator detection
    systems.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 78+ and 99+, for metallurgical
    furnaces combined with temperature determination means.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 32 for measuring the total
    energy emitted from a source; and subclasses 121+ for subject matter
    similar to that in this subclass where the emitted radiation is not limited
    to light.


CLS 356/44
TXT Subject matter under subclass 43 wherein there is structure such as a rod
    or tube to contain and contact a heated solid or fluid or to be immersed
    into a heated fluid whereby there is a heat exchange from the heated solid
    or fluid, which causes the structure to emit light or the structure allows
    the light emitted from a heated solid or fluid to be directly transmitted
    to a detector which analyzes this light in terms of temperature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216,    for heat absorbing radiometers of the revolving vane type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 227 for light conducting rods conducting
    light to a photocell.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 126 for a rod or tube with
    a particular radiating surface combined with a radiation thermometer; and
    subclass 131 for a radiation conducting rod or fiber bundle combined with a
    radiation thermometer.


CLS 356/45
TXT Subject matter under subclass 43 which includes means to selectively detect
    at least two different bands of visible radiation simultaneously or
    sequentially from an emission source, and means responsive to the detection
    means to indicate the color temperature of the emissive source.

    (1)     Note.  Where the indication of the test is not stated in the claims
    in terms of temperature, classification is in subclass 404 when photography
    is involved or in subclass 407 when plural colors are simultaneously
    tested, or in subclass 408 for sequential comparison tests of a sample and
    a standard.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    405,    for tristimulus test devices.

    406,    for shade or color tests involving three colors.

    419,    for devices which sequentially utilize plural color filters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 127, for nonoptical
    radiation type pyrometers which may be responsive to purals ranges of
    electromagnetic radiation.


CLS 356/46
TXT Subject matter under subclass 43 including a standard incandescent source
    of radiation together with structure to compare or facilitate the
    comparison of the unknown light radiation from a hot body or other emissive
    source with the visible radiation emitted from the incandescent standard.

    (1)     Note.  Patents claiming electrical circuitry to cause current to
    flow through electric incandescent lamps which are light standards are
    placed here, whether the standard lamp is used for a temperature test or a
    light intensity test.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218+,   for photoelectric photometers.

    230+,   for visual photometers utilizing a light standard.

    243,    for standards generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 271 for support or
    spacing structure for incandescent filaments used for light emission, and
    subclass 315 for incandescent lamps.


CLS 356/47
TXT Subject matter under subclass 46 which includes means to compare and
    control automatically the intensity of the illumination of the incandescent
    standard.

    (1)     Note.  Class 250, Radiant Energy, subclass 204 takes systems
    utilizing radiant energy detectors to balance by means of optical elements
    the detectors controlled by the intensity of light emitted by plural
    sources of light. Subclass 205 has systems where the intensity of a light
    source is adjusted by optical means controlled by a radiant energy detector
    responsive to the light source intensity.  No indicator related to the
    optical properties of the light included in the claims should be classified
    there.

    (2)     Note.  Class 315, Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems,
    subclasses 149+ will take a system utilizing a radiant energy detector to
    control an electrical lamp by electrical means where no significant optical
    structure is in the path between the light source tested and the radiant
    energy detector of the system, and no indication relating to the light
    emitted by the lamp is claimed and the lamp is the ultimate load of the
    system.  See also subclasses 129+ in Class 315.

    (3)     Note.  Class 324, Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses
    403+ will take the testing of lamps, per se, to determine the lamp
    characteristics before actual use, including the intensity of light emitted
    per watt input.  However, where the lamp is utilized in a testing
    environment of use for illumination or where temperature or intensity of
    light of some unknown source or other optical test is involved which
    includes a measurement or a subcombination not elsewhere provided, even
    though the measurement is of current or voltage, classification will be in
    Class 356.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130,    for refractive tests which utilize a servo-controlled device to
    adjust the light intensity of a beam of light used in the test.

    321+,   for plural beam absorption spectro-photometers which have structure
    to adjust the light intensity of one of the beams by automatic means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 204 for the adjustment of the light
    intensity in plural paths by optical and photosensitive means.  See also
    (1) Note above.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 151 for
    radiant energy systems responsive to a lamp to control the intensity of
    light from the lamp by electrical means.  See (2) Note above.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 18+ for follow-up
    systems utilizing radiant energy which have as their ultimate purpose the
    control of an electric motor.


CLS 356/48
TXT Subject matter under subclass 46 wherein the means to compare or facilitate
    the comparison of the standard and unknown radiation includes means to
    modulate mechanically or optically the standard or the unknown radiation.

    (1)     Note.  The modulated unknown or standard radiation may include
    portions of other radiation.

    (2)     Note.  Color discrimination and optical attenuation means may be
    part of the combination claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217,    for modulation type photometers where temperature is not involved.

    418,    for shade or color tests where color and intensity of light is
    included and an incandescent standard may be involved but temperature is
    not involved and modulation of the light takes place.

    425,    for light intensity comparison of shade where temperature is not
    involved but modulation may be involved.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 232+ for optical modulators or
    flickering beam photocell circuits of general usage.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 121+ for radiation
    pyrometers which utilize modulating means.


CLS 356/49
TXT Subject matter under subclass 46 including a telescope for passing unknown
    visible radiation and having an objective and ocular lens system, and means
    to locate, physically or optically, the incandescent standard in the
    optical path of the lens system so that visible radiation of the standard
    and the unknown radiation may be viewed simultaneously.

    (1)     Note.  Herein are those telescopic pyrometers which attenuate the
    intensity of the light or the color of the unknown source or the standard
    by optical means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for calibrated light standard systems, per se, used for comparison
    with unknown visible light for temperature, colorimetry or photometry
    purposes.

    230,    for photometers which visually compare light intensities by means
    of an incandescent standard.

    364+,   for tests which utilize polarized light for examination purposes
    where temperature is not involved.

    404,    for color or shade determination for photographic purposes where
    color temperature is not involved.

    416+,   for shade or color tests involving optical filters where
    temperature is not involved.

    417,    for flame detecting photometers not concerned with temperature
    which utilize color filters rather than dispersing or diffracting elements
    to separate the radiation into discrete colors.

    425,    for color determination by light intensity comparison where color
    temperature is not involved.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    738 for lens systems having light limiting or controlling means.


CLS 356/50
TXT Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein the incandescent standard is an
    electrically heated filament and means are provided to control the current
    through the filament.

    (1)     Note.  These instruments may include optical elements to change the
    color and intensity of the unknown radiation or the standard radiation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for the electrical circuits, per se, which power the electrical
    incandescent standard.

    231,    for photometers which utilize an electrical incandescent lamp which
    includes means to vary filament current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 129+ for
    electrical circuits supplying current to a lamp, which is not an electrical
    test standard, which circuit includes an electrical indicator.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 129 for radiation
    pyrometers which include an electrically variable incandescent standard.


CLS 356/51
TXT Subject matter under the class definition involving nonvisible radiation
    such as infrared and ultraviolet radiation not provided for elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass relates to apparatus and
    methods similar to that provided for in the other subclasses of this class,
    i.e., subject matter of an optical nature as would be operative with
    visible radiation.  However, in this subclass the operation has been
    extended to involve the nonvisible spectrum but in an optical manner, such
    as refraction and reflection in accordance with optical principles, and not
    provided for elsewhere, e.g., Class 374, subclasses 121+ for radiation
    thermometers.  Class 250, especially in subclasses 336.1+ provides for
    apparatus with significant nonvisible radiation structure including
    measuring and testing of invisible radiation. Examples of significant
    nonvisible radiation structure for classification in Class 250 are:  a
    source of invisible radiation such as infrared or ultraviolet, particular
    material operative only in the invisible radiation range, the application
    of the measuring or testing to subject matter or specimens responsive only
    to invisible radiation to carry out the measurement or test.

            It is emphasized that as between this Class 356 and Class 250 the
    general requirements for Class 356 must be also met for classification
    here. For  example, photocell measuring circuits must claim the meter or
    indicator or the specimen holder for classification here.  A lesser
    combination such as a photocell circuit would be classified in Class 250.
    See (1) Note under subclass 218.

    (2)     Note.  Where one claim to measuring and testing uses only visible
    light in the test and another claim to measuring and testing uses only
    invisible radiation, the original classification is in Class 356,
    appropriate subclass and cross-references in Class 250, appropriate
    subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 336.1+ for methods and apparatus
    including an electric signalling device for detecting infraviolet radiation
    and subclasses 472.1+ for nonelectric signalling methods and apparatus
    responsive to infrared or ultraviolet light.  See also the (1) Note to this
    subclass.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 121+ for the detection of
    infrared and visible light energy to determine the temperature of a body
    from which the radiation is thermally emitted.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Systems or Devices, appropriate subclasses for
    measuring and testing using X-rays.


CLS 356/52
TXT Subject matter under the class definition which involves light transmission
    through eggs, which light may be photoelectrically or visually detected to
    determine the fertility, freshness or other conditions of the eggs.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are all hand or bodily held
    devices used for candling eggs.

    (2)     Note.  The combination of candling of eggs and the incubation of
    the eggs is in Class 119, Animal Husbandry.  However the heating of the
    eggs to perfect a candling operation is in Class 356, subclass 36.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    432+,   for tests involving light transmission tests through translucent
    and transparent articles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 3.11 for
    machines to clean and sort eggs or screen out dirt from eggs.

    53,     Package Making, subclass 147 for the group forming of articles and
    the subsequent packaging of the articles in portable receptacles and
    subclass 167 for the combination of a visual test of an article and the
    filling of portable receptacles with the tested articles.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 6.8 for methods and apparatus for
    hatching eggs including the step of candling of eggs, and subclasses 311+
    for incubators.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclass for releasing articles one
    at a time from a supply apparatus.


CLS 356/53
TXT Subject matter under subclass 52 which includes a photosensitive detector
    to receive the light transmitted through the egg, and which may include an
    optical filter in the visual range to restrict the characteristic of the
    light transmitted through the egg.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for sample preparation of the tested egg in addition to the
    candling step.

    51,     for infrared, ultraviolet and visible light transmission through
    the egg.

    407,    for color tests responsive to plural colors simultaneously.

    418,    for color tests including rotating filters.

    419,    for color tests including multicolored filters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 510+ for
    automatic egg candlers and sorters.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 336.1+ for egg candlers utilizing an
    infrared or ultraviolet responsive electric signalling device.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    350+ for optical elements used in the infrared or ultraviolet portion of
    the electromagnetic spectrum, and subclasses 885+ for optical filters.


CLS 356/54
TXT Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein a visual candling apparatus is
    combined with counting, marking or weighing apparatus which is used in
    conjunction with the candling operation, when not provided for in any other
    class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for the general combination of a visual optical test and a diverse
    art device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclass 2 for the combination of printing and sorting,
    subclasses 212+ for rolling contact printing machines and subclass 327 for
    printing members and inkers.

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclasses 50+ for the combination of scale with a
    testing device other than a candling operation and subclass 245 for
    weighing devices combined with a diverse art device.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 510+ for
    the combination of visual candling means with an automatic egg weighing and
    sorting device; and subclass 939 for illuminating means facilitating visual
    inspection.

    235,    Registers, subclass 91 for counting of articles mechanically.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits, and Systems Using Pulse Counters, Pulse Divider Systems, subclass
    6 for counting articles electrically.


CLS 356/55
TXT Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein transporting or conveying means is
    combined with a visual candling device to move eggs in a predetermined or
    random manner from one location into, through, or over the visual candling
    device and beyond the candling device to a second location by the same or a
    second transfer means.

    (1)     Note.  The first location may include dispensing means and the
    second location may include an egg holding container such as a portable
    receptacle where no provision is made for this combination in another class.

    (2)     Note.  Egg supply and/or conveying structure may be included to
    bring eggs to the candling apparatus and receiving apparatus; and
    additional conveying structure may also be claimed with the candling
    apparatus where there is no provision for the combination in another class.

    (3)     Note.  The transfer means may be gravity and motorized conveyors
    including those of the endless belt and disc type.

    (4)     Note.  Subcombinations of a photoelectric candling apparatus will
    be found here when there is no photoelectric circuitry claimed.

    (5)     Note.  Inverting structure which merely inverts an egg or a group
    of eggs is not considered to be a transfer apparatus for this group of
    subclasses unless there is additionally movement of the egg from one
    location to another.  See subclasses 56 and 65 for egg turning or jarring
    structure.


CLS 356/56
TXT Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein structure, which may be hand,
    motor, or gravity actuated, is included with the egg transfer and candling
    apparatus to turn or jar the eggs during the candling operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for egg turning and jarring means combined with a light shading
    candling chamber.

    65,     for egg turning and jarring means combined with a light candling
    box. Also see (5) Note of subclass 55.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 433 for article rotators of
    the roller type, and subclass 431 for the rotation and a simultaneous
    advancement of articles which are concurrently engaged at the ends of the
    articles.


CLS 356/57
TXT Subject matter under subclass 56 wherein there are manually or motor driven
    endless conveyors which include structure which causes eggs placed
    sequentially on the conveyor to turn or somehow move while passing through,
    over, or on the visual candling apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  Automatic structure to place the eggs on the conveyor from a
    supply structure and structure to remove the eggs from the conveyor may be
    included in the claimed combination.  See also the Search Notes under
    subclass 58.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclass 167 for the combination of candling,
    conveying, and the filling of portable receptacles.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 343.1+ and 373+ for an endless
    conveyor having means for turning or orienting the conveyed load as the
    conveyor advances, and subclass 631 for an endless conveyor having means to
    jar the load as the conveyor advances.


CLS 356/58
TXT Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein the transfer means is an endless
    conveyor of the manually or motor driven type and which includes endless
    belt and disc type to sequentially bring eggs singularly or in groups, up
    to, over, or through the candling device; and usually to convey the eggs
    beyond the candling structure to broad receiving means.

    (1)     Note.  Inverting structure may be included in the conveying
    structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 373+, 418+, and 434+ for
    arranging articles on conveyors including the orienting of articles on or
    between conveyors; subclasses 606+ for endless conveyors successively
    conveying a load; subclass 779 for traveling roll type conveyors; and
    subclasses 688+ and 804+ for endless belt conveyors.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 510+ for
    egg sorting apparatus; subclasses 702+ for manual sorting apparatus; and
    subclass 912 for endless feed conveyors having means for holding items
    separately.


CLS 356/59
TXT Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein the transfer means is a hand
    manipulative support which may contain the eggs in a random or
    predetermined manner, and which may function separately as a hand held
    conveyor to move the supported eggs from one location to another and as a
    complete candling unit with the light source.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein with the manual transfer supports are the
    light box candling devices.

    (2)     Note.  Pivoted egg support trays attached to the candling box for
    the purpose of inverting the eggs are not considered conveyors and are
    placed in subclass 64.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for light candling boxes.  See also (2) Note above.


CLS 356/60
TXT Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the candling device is a light
    shading chamber, and the hand manipulated transfer device is inserted
    within the light shading chamber for the candling operation.

    (1)     Note.  The transfer device may be stationary or manually movable
    during the candling operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for light shading chambers generally in candling apparatus.


CLS 356/61
TXT Subject matter under subclass 59 including portable receptacles or hand
    carried trays, per se, which are adapted as by an opening or transparency
    to pass light to or from the egg and which when used with light box and
    light shading chamber structure form visual candling devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244+,   for sample, specimen, or standard holders or supports generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    229,    Paper Receptacles, subclass 29 for folded blank boxes of the
    compartment type with a wrapper to completely cover the cells designed to
    candle or inspect eggs held therein.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 87.12 for
    multiple egg hand transfer devices with lifters or grapples, and subclass
    137 for hand-held article carriers.


CLS 356/62
TXT Subject matter under subclass 52 including an enclosure, adapted to be
    joined to a light box by an aperture which passes the candling illumination
    from the box, to darken the viewing field adjacent the eggs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 223.5 for enclosures having
    illuminating means.


CLS 356/63
TXT Subject matter under subclass 62 wherein the enclosure is a hood which is
    attached externally to the enclosure to aid in the observation of the
    candling light.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 351+ for shades and their supports for
    preventing the further distribution of light.


CLS 356/64
TXT Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein there are enclosures of candling
    illumination (including natural light directors) which have an aperture or
    apertures to support or locate exteriorly on the surface of the enclosures
    an egg or eggs to be candled.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes those enclosures which utilize
    sunlight as the source of candling illumination and which require an
    additional aperture or apertures on the periphery of the enclosure to allow
    the illumination transmitted through the egg or eggs to be visually
    observed exteriorly of the enclosure.

    (2)     Note.  These enclosures include optical elements such as mirrors to
    direct the illumination radiated through the egg or eggs to the outside of
    the enclosure through the additional aperture or apertures so that a visual
    observation can be made.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 564+ for lamp boxes,
    and subclasses 361+ for transparency viewers.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 14+ for plural egg supports generally.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 176+ for article stand type supports where
    only a singular article is supported and subclass 346 for supporting bases.


CLS 356/65
TXT Subject matter under subclass 64 wherein structure is included to move or
    jar the eggs during the candling operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for egg candling with egg transfer including turning or jarring.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 431 for the rotation and
    simultaneous advancement of articles which are concurrently engaged at the
    ends of the articles and subclass 433 for article rotators, roller type.


CLS 356/66
TXT Subject matter under subclass 64 wherein the enclosure internally contains
    significant illumination means or where the illuminating means is
    significantly related to the remaining candling structure.

    (1)     Note.  The illumination means may be of the electrical or
    combustible type which may or may not be of the self contained power type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 453.11+ for an irradiated object and
    subclasses 458.1+ for methods and apparatus for irradiating luminescent
    material generally.


CLS 356/67
TXT Subject matter under subclass 66 including electrical illumination
    controlled by a significant electrical switch or switch operating structure
    to connect the illumination means to a power source, or where the switch
    and the switch operator are significantly related to the remaining candling
    structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 52+ for
    switches of special application, particularly subclasses 61.41 and 61.42
    where the motion or presence of an article actuates a mechanical feeler to
    close an electrical switch and subclass 61.58 for switches actuated
    concurrently with the operation or use of an art device.


CLS 356/68
TXT Subject matter under subclass 52 including structures attachable to
    illuminating lamps to convert the illuminating lamps into candling boxes or
    light shading chambers of the visual type.

    (1)     Note.  Included are devices to convert portable and other type
    light sources into egg candling structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for convertible subject matter not classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 315 for incandescent
    lamps.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, particularly
    subclasses 32+ for incandescent lamps which are structurally combined with
    a circuit element, and for systems for supplying electrical energy to lamps.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 138+ for inspection lamps, subclasses 157+
    for portable electric lamps, and subclasses 257+ for lanterns including
    light projectors not specifically designed for testing purposes.


CLS 356/69
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including a light source for
    shining light on a blade edge together with optical or photoelectric means
    for determining the reflectivity and thus the sharpness of the blade.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    445+,   for reflection testing generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 104+ for testing surfaces and
    cutting edges where not elsewhere classified.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 511,
    524+, 536, and 576+ for testing articles with radiant energy including
    means to sort the articles.


CLS 356/70
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including structure for
    determining the physical properties of liquid oil by the optical response,
    such as produced by visible light transmitted through or reflected from the
    oil.

    (1)     Note.  The optical response may involve the examination of the oil
    for color, polarization effects, or for foreign content such as sediment in
    the oil.  Both visual and photoelectric devices are here, and the test may
    be of oil samples or of oil moving in a closed system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for tests of oil which may involve infrared radiation.

    128+,   for refraction test devices which may be applicable for testing of
    oil.

    364+,   for polarization test devices which may be applicable for the
    testing of oil.

    402+,   for color test devices which may be applicable for the testing of
    oil.

    432+,   for transmission test devices particularly for comparison tests, and

    441+,   for liquid particle suspension tests.

    445+,   for reflection test devices which may be applicable to the testing
    of oil.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 28 for testing for solid matter
    entrained in a gas, subclasses 61.41+ for the testing of a liquid for
    sediment or foreign content where more than a visual or photoelectric test
    of the color or the amount of visible radiation transmitted through or
    scattered from the liquid is involved, and subclasses 53.05+ for lubricant
    testing, subclasses 152.18+ for a fluid analysis in testing a borehole, a
    casing, or a drill rigging wherein the test is not purely electrical or
    purely magnetic, in particular subclass 152.42 for determining the relative
    proportion of fluid constituents by a test which is not purely electrical
    or purely magnetic.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 200+ for visual indicators, per
    se, where no color or other optical comparison test is involved and for
    level indicators of the mechanical type.


CLS 356/71
TXT Subject matter under the class definition for the analysis of intrinsic
    properties of documents which includes a support for the document to be
    tested and means to examine and compare visually or to examine
    photoelectrically the properties of the document by means of visible light
    for the conformance of any given property with a standard or for the
    conformance of the pattern or writing generally with a standard pattern or
    writing as to form or configuration.

    (1)     Note.  A document for this subclass is a sheetlike article and may
    be an information document having writing or printing or containing a
    pattern.  A document is, however, excluded from this subclass when any
    writing, printing, or pattern contained on the document is examined for the
    information it conveys.

    (2)     Note.  The analysis of the intrinsic properties of a document by
    means of radiant energy (nonvisible light), is classified in Class 250,
    Radiant Energy.

    (3)     Note.  The analyzing of coded cards, having perforations, magnetic
    markings and visible markings, one at a time in business machines as well
    as the cards, per se, are in Class 235, Registers.

    (4)     Note.  Termatrix Systems (peekaboos) are found in Class 235,
    Registers, subclass 1; Class 250, Radiant Energy, subclasses 211 and 219.
    Also see Class 355, Photocopying, for projectors involving peekaboo systems.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for contour plotting apparatus involving stereoscopic images of
    topographical maps.

    389,    for mensuration or configuration comparison generally where a
    photograph is taken of the standard or object to be compared.

    391,    for configuration comparison generally of an article with a
    standard where light projection is involved.

    394,    for configuration comparison generally of an article with a desired
    shape.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 156 for statistical record
    verifying of punched or marked cards.

    194,    Check-Actuated Control Mechanisms, subclass 207 for the testing of
    currency for genuineness combined with a check controlled machine.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 576+,
    603, and 659+ for one or more tests involving documents for length, width,
    thickness, color, light transmission tests and pattern analysis where a
    physical    separation of a document from other documents is based upon one
    or more of these tests.

    235,    Registers, subclasses 375+ for systems controlled by a record,
    subclasses 435+ for the analysis or recognition of a coded document which
    does not include reading or sensing of alphanumeric characters or pattern
    recognition.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 556 and 233 for the light detection of
    patterns on documents and the light detection units, per se, which involve
    rotating masks and shutters and subclass 271 for coded record recorders
    responsive to invisible radiation or invisible radiation modified by the
    code.  See also (4) Note above.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 146.2 for the comparison
    electrically of information where not elsewhere classified.

    382,    Image Analysis, subclasses 119+ and 124+ for signature and
    fingerprint analysis which include information contents.


CLS 356/72
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the subject matter of
    this class is combined with the subject matter of another class where not
    elsewhere provided.

    (1)     Note.  Included is convertible subject matter involving subject
    matter of another class not provided for elsewhere which converts an
    optical test apparatus to a test apparatus of another test class or to
    another art device.

    (2)     Note.  Where the subject matter of another class prepares the
    substance tested for an optical test of this class, see subclass 36.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for structures to convert regular lamps to egg candlers.


CLS 356/73
TXT Subject matter under the class definition which includes optical test
    apparatus to perform simultaneously or sequentially at least two different
    optical tests which are both a part of the basic subject matter of this
    class.

    (1)     Note.  Two identical optical tests which are part of the subject
    matter of this class, performed simultaneously or sequentially will be
    classified here providing each test has its own indicator or manner of
    determining its test individually rather than both tests collectively
    operating a single indicator.

    (2)     Note.  Included here is convertible subject matter which would
    permit an optical test device which is part of the basic subject matter to
    be changed into a optical test device which is also the basic subject
    matter of this class.

    (3)     Note.  Light meters which by a change in the galvanometer scale or
    by addition of a color filter to become a pyrometer or a colored light
    meter are not considered to be convertible for this subclass.  See the
    section on pyrometers, spectroscopy, or shade or color for proper
    classification of this subject matter.

    (4)     Note.  Visual inspection simultaneously or sequentially with a
    optical test of the class will be classified here.


CLS 356/73.1
TXT FOR OPTICAL FIBER OR WAVEGUIDE INSPECTION:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein there is means to examine
    one or more transparent elongated structures (e.g., rods, fibers, or pipes)
    which are used to transmit light rays from one point to another within the
    confines of their outer surface, and involving internal reflections or
    modal transmission.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    384+,   for measurement or tests of nonoptical fibers, width or diameter.

    429+,   for optical inspection of nonoptical fibers, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 559.01+ for circuits for evaluating a
    web, strand, or strip; and for detection of defects or flaws in a web,
    strand, or strip.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, appropriate subclasses for optical fibers, per
    se.


CLS 356/121
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including structure to indicate
    or otherwise determine the direction the axis of a light beam from a
    headlight or other light projector; or including structure to determine at
    selected and fixed points the intensity of a light beam projected from a
    headlight or other light projector throughout the space where the light is
    projected, i.e., the contour pattern of the light beam.

    (1)     Note.  This class provides for the direct analysis of the beam
    which is emitted from the light producer, as by determining the direction
    pattern, or focusing of the beam.  Class 33 provides for the  mechanical
    sensing of the direction of a headlight without involving the light beam.
    However, where the mechanical sensing device involves some optical
    measuring, classification is in this Class 356.  Class 362 provides for
    lamps where significant lamp structure is claimed in combination with a
    built-in optical structure.  Class 324 provides for testing the electrical
    operating characteristics of electric lamps alone or in combination with
    light intensity, direction, pattern, or focusing tests of this Class 356.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3+,     for optical range finders in combination with light beam alignment
    or focusing apparatus.

    124+,   for the testing of a lens or reflective image former where
    apparatus similar to that used in these subclasses is utilized to determine
    the quality of the lens or the reflective image former.

    138+,   for determining generally the two dimensional alignment of an axis
    or line with respect to a plane, and particularly subclasses 141.1+ and
    152.1+ for the photoelectric apparatus and subclass 154 for the viewing
    screen type of apparatus.

    213+,   for photometers generally and particularly subclasses 218 for the
    photoelectric type, and 229 for the visual comparison type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclass 264, for lamp alignment device of the light ray type and subclass
    335, for means used in aligning an automobile headlight by establishing its
    relationship to the horizontal or the vertical.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 20+ for the
    combination of optical alignment or focusing test of a lamp with an
    electrical operating characteristic test of the lamp.  See (1) Note above.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    443+ for projection screens generally.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 61+, for significant illumination
    apparatus for vehicle lighting purposes.  Also see (1) Note above.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    subclasses 4 and 64, for methods and apparatus for the positioning of
    filaments by optical projection means during the manufacture of lamps and
    electronic tubes.


CLS 356/122
TXT Subject matter under subclass 121 including structure to indicate the
    proper focus of a light source, or the deviation or extent of deviation
    from proper focus of the light source.

    (1)     Note.  The proper focus usually exists when the light source is
    located at the focus of a parabolic reflector or lens. For classification
    here there must be a distinct disclosure of focusing structure in the
    specification or claims as opposed to a mere inherent focusing function
    which is classified in the generic subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123,    for the focusing of a filament with respect to some optical element
    wherein no light pattern is involved.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 285+ for lamps with a built-in sighting
    device for focusing the filament of the lamp with respect to the optical
    projection elements of the lamp.


CLS 356/123
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including structure to establish
    and determine the proper focal position of a concentrated light source with
    respect to optical elements, such as a parabolic light reflector or a lens;
    or to indicate the coincidence of a concentrated light source at the focal
    point of a lens or parabolic reflector; or the deviation from such
    coincidence.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    for head light focusing with direction or pattern determining.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 285+ for lamps with a built-in sighting
    device for focusing the filament of the lamp with respect to the optical
    light projection elements of the lamp.


CLS 356/124
TXT Subject matter under the class definition for measuring or otherwise
    determining the optical properties of a lens or reflective image former.

    (1)     Note.  Measuring means for establishing lines or points on a lens
    blank for the purpose of grinding or cutting are not included in this
    subclass. However, means for determining the optical center or the cylinder
    axis of a finished lens would be classified here. The former subject matter
    is classified in Class 33, if the measurement is made mechanically; or in
    other subclasses of this class particularly subclasses 138+ and 372+, if
    significant optical features are involved.

    (2)     Note.  Subject matter for visually inspecting a lens for flaws or
    imperfections is excluded from this subclass.  Such subject matter is
    classified in subclass 239.

    (3)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass involves testing lenses
    or reflectors having curved surfaces.  For flatness testing generally see
    subclass 371.

    (4)     Note.  This subclass includes ophthalmic lens testing.  However,
    Class 351 provides for eye testing and examination.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359,    for determining the surface configuration of a lens or reflector by
    means of light interference.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclasses
    200+ for instruments for examining eyes or testing vision.


CLS 356/124.5
TXT For optical transfer function:

    Subject matter under subclass 124 including means to determine the ratio of
    the Fourier spectrum of the lens image to the one of the object.


CLS 356/125
TXT Subject matter under subclass 124 for measuring the focal length of a lens
    or reflector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    383 and 425+ for focusing means for compound lens systems; and subclasses
    676+ and 823+ for lens focusing means.


CLS 356/126
TXT Subject matter under subclass 125 including means for deflecting or
    interrupting the optical path between a target and the observer or detector.


CLS 356/127
TXT Subject matter under subclass 124 comprising means for determining the
    optical center of a lens, the prism or deviation of the optical center from
    the geometrical center of a lens, or the axis of the cylinder of a lens.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note under subclass 124 with reference to related
    subject matter.


CLS 356/128
TXT Subject matter under the class definition for testing the refraction of a
    fluid or solid wherein there is generally means to contain the fluid or
    support the solid statically or in motion; generally means, which may
    include a light source and which may be monochromatic light, to cause a
    diffused or a collimated beam of light to be transmitted through the fluid
    or solid under test or to be transmitted and reflected internally from the
    surface of an optically transmissive member contiguous to the fluid or
    solid under test; and a visual or photoelectric device to note or measure
    the intensity of the light transmitted through the fluid or solid or the
    change in angle, direction, or the displacement of the light traversing the
    fluid or solid as a result of the light being refracted by the fluid or
    solid tested.

    (1)     Note.  Comparison tests are included under this and the indented
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124,    for the testing of optical elements such as lenses and prisms, and
    particularly subclass 127 for prismatic and focal power tests which may
    include refraction testing.

    345+,   for interference tests which may involve the refraction of light.

    357+,   for interference tests for determining the thickness of films which
    may involve refraction test.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    642+ for lenses, and subclasses 831+ for prisms and prism mounts.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, appropriate
    subclasses; see the search class note, section XIV in the class definition
    of this class (356).


CLS 356/129
TXT Subject matter under subclass 128 including means blocking the normal light
    refraction from a fluid or a solid in a fluid, and passing the light bent
    due to localized changes in the refractive index of the fluid or the solid
    in a fluid; or including means causing a light pattern to vary as a result
    of the changes in the refractive index of the fluid or the solid in a fluid.

    (1)     Note. The localized changes in the refraction are caused by
    variations in the density of the fluid caused by the solids in the fluid,
    temperature changes in the fluid, or other forces which affect the fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    344,    for electrophoresis apparatus which detects a Schlieren pattern.

    361+,   for the combination of an interference system with a Schlieren
    arrangement where a refraction test is involved.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 147 for Schlieren apparatus
    combined with the testing of objects in wind tunnels.


CLS 356/130
TXT Subject matter under subclass 128 wherein the support for the testing of
    substances, usually fluids, includes at least two prismatic containers each
    containing a similar fluid and each capable of transmitting a collimated
    beam of light through the container and its contained fluid, the beam of
    light being transmitted serially through both fluids or passed
    simultaneously through both fluids.


CLS 356/131
TXT Subject matter under subclass 130 including an optical member in the path
    of the light beam, and servo-controlled means responsive to the
    photoelectric device to control the optical member in response to the light
    received by the photoelectric device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 2+ and 93 for processes and apparatus
    which may control the flow of the fluids handled by means of a refraction
    test upon the fluid controlled.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 204 for optical elements which are
    adjusted to balance light brightness in plural paths to a photoelectric
    servo-system.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 18+ for motors
    controlled by servo systems not elsewhere provided, and subclass 480 for
    motors controlled by radiant energy.


CLS 356/132
TXT Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the controlled optical member is
    of the reflective type.


CLS 356/133
TXT Subject matter under subclass 128 which includes a solid light transmissive
    member whose periphery touches a fluid under test, which transmits light to
    the detecting and indicating means, the refractive index of the fluid being
    directly related to the amount of light received by the detecting and the
    indicating device.

    (1)     Note.  The type or refraction test classified herein can be found
    in Class 73, Measuring and Testing, in subclasses 73 and 705.  The
    difference is that in Class 73 the quantitive meter will register the
    result of the test in moisture units or pressure units, while in this Class
    356 the registration is in index of refraction measurements.


CLS 356/134
TXT Subject matter under subclass 128 wherein the support or container for the
    fluid specimen to be tested allows the fluid specimen to assume a prismatic
    shape for the purpose of testing the specimen for refractive index.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130,    for serially placed fluid prismatic containers wherein the light is
    serially or simultaneously passed through both fluids.

    246,    for fluid containers, per se.


CLS 356/135
TXT Subject matter under subclass 128 wherein there is a prism and a solid or
    fluid medium to be examined for refractive index and forming an interface
    surface with the prism, this prism being part of the detecting and
    indicating means, whereby the modification of the light    transmitted
    across or reflected at the interface surface due to the refraction of the
    medium is shown in the detecting and indicating device.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are immersion type refractometers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclass 3 for processes of
    distilling fluids which may include a refraction test of the fluid.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication)  and Elements,
    subclasses 831+ for prisms, per se.


CLS 356/136
TXT Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein the visible light used in the
    test is transmitted through and reflected internally of the prism at its
    surface forming the interface with the medium tested, and is then passed to
    the detecting and indicating means.


CLS 356/137
TXT Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein there is a second optical member
    usually a prism associated with the first prism and the fluid or solid
    medium to be examined, and wherein the light is transmitted through the
    second optical member to cause the light to be dispersed before it enters
    the medium and the first prism.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are Abbe type refractometers.


CLS 356/138
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including means to measure an
    angle by determining the direction of related light; or including means for
    determining the alignment of two axes by light rays related as by
    coincidence with such axes.

    (1)     Note.  Where two objects are laterally aligned by displacing one
    relative to another and alignment involves no rotation about an axis
    classification is in subclass 399.

    (2)     Note.  The axes may be imaginary as, for example, an axis along the
    length of a vehicle or normal to a surface. Also different parts of a
    continuous line may be considered as plural axes as, for example, in
    testing the straightness of a rail or a gun barrel.

    (3)     Note.  Alignment occurs when the two axes form a common axis or are
    parallel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    399+,   for alignment in a lateral direction. See also (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, appropriate subclasses for a light ray
    type axial alignment device and subclasses 276+, 281, 282+, and 285, for a
    light ray type angle measuring device, without any significant optical
    feature.


CLS 356/139
TXT Subject matter under subclass 138 including means whereby two different
    angle measuring scales or two different portions of the same angle
    measuring scale are simultaneously observable.


CLS 356/139.01
TXT Star/Sun/Satellite position indication with  photodetection:

    Subject matter under subclass 138 including means responsive to light
    received directly from a star or stars, the sun, or other astronomical
    objects (including manmade satellites) in order to determine and indicate
    at least relative angular position with respect to an optical axis of a
    measuring instrument.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 206.1+ for alternative outputs of
    measured coordinates that are not displayed, per se, and do not include
    tracking of the optics; subclasses 203.1+ for tracking of the
    pre-photodetector system.


CLS 356/139.02
TXT With reticle or slot:

    Subject matter under subclass 139.01 including a reticle or aperture slot
    in an optical path of the photodetector that enables the determination of
    the angle.


CLS 356/139.03
TXT Relative attitude indication along 3 axes with photodetection:

    Subject matter under subclass 138 wherein the measured angles define and
    indicate the yaw, pitch, and roll orientation  or  the like in space of a
    detected object or of a photodetecting instrument relative to an
    arbitrarily chosen axis or axes or to geophysical planes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141.1+, for angle measurement that defines an angle at the detecting
    station with respect to a beam in terms other than 3 axes of orientation.

    152.2+, for angle measurement that defines an angle at the object with
    respect to a beam in terms other than 3 axes of orientation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 171 for attitude sensors that may involve
    optics.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 206.1+ for alternative outputs of
    measured coordinates that are not displayed, per se.


CLS 356/139.04
TXT Automatic following or aligning while indicating measurement:

    Subject matter under subclass 138 including means to maintain an optical
    axis in register with a movable object or movable photodetecting station,
    while indicating relative angular position with respect to the optical axis.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this subclass, there must be claimed
    some means to indicate angle or relative alignment which is effectively
    measured as contrasted with Class 250, subclasses 203.1+ where there is no
    indication required.

    (2)     Note.  The object must be either self-luminous or must reflect
    ambient light; otherwise, it will be found in subclasses 139.07+.

    (3)     Note.  Examples of automatic  following  or aligning found in this
    subclass, and not below, involve remote missile control, robot control, or
    table platform alignment of an imaged object with indication of a
    measurement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139.01+, for techniques that may be used in star        or sun angle
    measurements.

    139.07+, for objects that reflect a unidirectional beam of illumination
    from which beam angle is determined.

    139.09+, for techniques that may be used in wheel alignment with
    photodetection.

    141.1,  for objects that reflect a unidirectional beam of illumination from
    which an apex of an angle at the detecting station is determined, but where
    there is no automatic following or aligning.

    141.2+, for objects that follow or align on a unidirectional beam that is
    not reflected.

    152.2+, for objects that reflect a unidirectional beam of illumination from
    which alignment or the apex of an angle remote from the detecting station
    is determined and there is no automatic following or aligning.

    399+,   for parallel nonangular alignment of a beam to the detecting
    station.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 3.13 and 3.16 for optical angular
    orientation of a viewed missile with respect to an optical axis.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 203.1+ for following a self-luminous or
    remotely illuminated target without any indication of angle or
    misalignment; subclasses 206.1+ for alternative outputs of measured
    coordinates that are not displayed, per se.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 640 for photoelectric
    measuring instrument control of a servo mechanism.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    159 for optical communication alignment that does not technically indicate
    a measurement.


CLS 356/139.05
TXT With optical elements moving relative to fixed housing to follow or align:

    Subject matter under subclass 139.04 including optical elements in a
    housing that reorient the optical axis to follow or align the object
    independently of the housing.

    (1)     Note.  Gimballed optical elements which may be in a subhousing that
    follows or aligns falls within the concept of this subclass.


CLS 356/139.06
TXT With optical housing moving to follow or align:

    Subject matter under subclass 139.04 having a housing that contains all of
    the measuring optics and moves to follow or align the optical axis on the
    object.


CLS 356/139.07
TXT With photodetection of reflected beam angle with respect to a
    unidirectional source beam:

    Subject matter under subclass 139.04 including a source beam directed along
    one axis to the object from which its reflected direction, with respect to
    its projected direction, is indicated and either followed or aligned.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass may include devices where the reflection plane
    or the detector apparatus is servoed to follow or align the reflected beam
    from a fixed source to the detector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141.1,  for measurement of the apex of the angle made at the detecting
    station without means to follow or align the received or transmitted beam
    on the object.


    152.2+, for measurement of a remote apex angle without means to follow or
    align the received or transmitted beam on the object.


CLS 356/139.08
TXT With source beam moving to follow or align:

    Subject matter under 139.07 wherein the unidirectional beam moves to follow
    or align the object.


CLS 356/139.09
TXT Wheel alignment with photodetection:

    Subject matter under subclass 138 including apparatus to attach to a wheel
    or wheels to determine and indicate relative angular direction of their
    planes of rotation by using photodetection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150,    for alignment of a wheel running axis which is transverse to the
    angle of the measuring axis.

    153,    for wheel alignment of subclass 138 without photodetection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 203+ and 288 for wheel
    alignment that does not claim optical detection.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 206.1+ for alternative outputs of
    measured coordinates that are not displayed, per se.


CLS 356/139.1
TXT Photodetection of inclination from level or vertical:

    Subject matter under subclass 138 that includes the use of photodetection
    to measure and indicate the angular orientation of a surface with respect
    to gravity level or vertical reference.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes some reference to gravity level that
    is used to alter light beam position with respect to a detector to
    determine and indicate an angle of at least one axis of a plane with
    respect to level or zenith vertical.

    SEARCH CLASS

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 206.1+ for alternative outputs of
    measured coordinates that are not displayed, per se.


CLS 356/140
TXT Subject matter under subclass 138 comprising means to furnish a measure of
    the angle between two optical axes intersecting at a common point at the
    observing or detecting station and passing through two points remote from
    this station; or between one such axis and a reference line or plane
    passing through the station.

    (1)     Note.  Devices which only determine a level line of sight are
    classified in subclasses 248+ even though, from one point of view, they
    might be considered as measuring an angle of zero degrees.


CLS 356/141.1
TXT With photodetection of reflected beam angle with respect to a
    unidirectional source beam:

    Subject matter under subclass 140 including a source beam directed along
    one axis to an object from which the beam's reflected angular direction
    with respect to its projected direction is measured and where the apex of
    the measured angle is at the detecting station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.01+,  for angle determination during the triangulation of an object's
    distance.

    139.01+,for techniques that may be used in star or sun angle measurements.

    139.09, for techniques that may be used in wheel alignment with
    photodetection.

    152.2+, for instances where the apex of the desired angle being measured is
    not at the detecting station, even though the detecting station apex angle
    may be involved in some way in the determination.

    399+,   for lateral alignment of a beam that does not follow an angular
    path to the detecting station.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 201.6 for angle determination during the
    triangulation of an object; and subclasses 206.1+ for alternative outputs
    of measured coordinates that are not displayed, per se.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 89+ where an angle is determined in the
    triangulation of an object's distance.


CLS 356/141.2
TXT With photodetection:

    Subject matter under subclass 140 that includes  photodetection for
    measuring and indicating the angle to a luminous object (e.g., beacon,
    missile, ambiently illuminated object) not found in subclass 141.1 above.

    (1)     Note.  The luminous radiation from the object is considered to be
    radial.

    (2)     Note.  Shaft angle encoding with or without indication claimed or
    shown is found in Class 250, subclasses 231.13+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.01+,  for angle determination found in the triangulation of an object's
    distance.

    139.01+,for techniques that may be used in star or sun angle measurements.

    139.03, for measuring attitude characteristics along 3 axes.

    139.04+,for the same concepts plus automatic following.

    139.09, for techniques that may be used in wheel alignment with
    photodetection.

    139.1,  for specifically measuring angle of inclination.

    152.1,  for measuring and indicating any angle other than that at the
    detecting station.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 231.13+ for shaft angle encoding with or
    without display; subclass 201.6 for angle determination during the
    triangulation of an object's distance; subclasses 206.1+ for alternative
    outputs that do not include any display, per se; subclass 342 for
    determining the location of an IR (infrared) source that may include angle
    information.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    159 for optical communication alignment that does not technically indicate
    a measurement.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 89+ for the determination of any angle in
    the triangulation of an object's distance.


CLS 356/141.3
TXT With unidirectional or planar source beam directed at the photodetecting
    station:

    Subject matter under subclass 141.2 that includes a unidirectional beam
    source or a directed plane light source that is remotely located with
    respect to the observing or detecting station.

    (1)     Note.  The plane of light may be generated by a scanned beam.


CLS 356/141.4
TXT With optical scanning of light beam or detector:

    Subject matter under subclass 141.2 that includes means for continuously
    optically moving the photodetecting station field of view to enable the
    determination and indication of angle apex at the detecting station.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter in this subclass does not define a scanning
    at the source of light.


CLS 356/141.5
TXT With at least 2-dimensional sensitivity:

    Subject matter under subclass 141.3 that specifically includes means for
    measuring at least two spatial coordinates (e.g., x and y coordinates or
    azimuth and elevation).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139.01, for measuring and indicating angle (e.g., declination and hour
    angle to the sun, stars, or other astronomical objects).

    139.03, for measuring and indicating yaw, pitch, and roll relative to an
    arbitrarily chosen axis or to geophysical planes.


CLS 356/142
TXT Subject matter under subclass 140 including means whereby the angle
    measuring scale and the remote target point are simultaneously observable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139,    for means for simultaneously observing plural scales or different
    portions of the same scale.


CLS 356/143
TXT Subject matter under subclass 142 including, for the purpose of
    establishing a reference line or plane from which the angle can be
    measured, means which tends to maintain its orientation in space
    irrespective of changes in the orientation of the supporting structure for
    this means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148,    for angle measuring means in general combined with artificial
    reference determining means.

    248,    for artificial reference determining means in general combined with
    optical features.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 230, for a gyroscopically
    stabilized bomb sight, subclass 236, for a gyroscopically stabilized gun
    sight, subclass 273, for a sighting device having a magnetic compass and a
    level or plumb, subclass 283, for a vertical angle measurer including a
    level or plumb, subclass 290, for a sighting device with leveling means,
    subclass 295, for a surveyor's rod or target with leveling or plumbing
    means, subclasses 300+, appropriate subclasses for a level or plumb
    instrument and subclasses 316+ and 318+, for a gyroscopically controlled or
    stabilized magnetic compass.


CLS 356/144
TXT Subject matter under subclass 140 including means whereby an observer sees
    plural images of subject matter remote from the observer.

    (1)     Note.  The images can, for example, be displaced images of the same
    subject matter or they can be superimposed images of different subject
    matter such as the horizon and a star.


CLS 356/145
TXT Subject matter under subclass 144 where plural lines of sight are
    adjustable relative to each other with two degrees of freedom.


CLS 356/146
TXT Subject matter under subclass 144 wherein the lines of sight from at least
    two objects are each deflected in the viewing instrument.


CLS 356/147
TXT Subject matter under subclass 140 where angles are measured in two
    different planes.


CLS 356/148
TXT Subject matter under subclass 140 including, for the purpose of
    establishing a reference line or plane from which the angle can be
    measured, means which tends to maintain its orientation in space
    irrespective of changes in the orientation of the supporting structure for
    this means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143,    for similar subject matter where a scale and a remote point are
    simultaneously observable.

    248+,   for artificial reference determining means in general combined with
    optical features.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 230, for a gyroscopically
    stabilized bomb sight, subclass 236, for a gyroscopically stabilized gun
    sight, subclass 273, for a sighting device having a magnetic compass and a
    level or plumb, subclass 283, for a vertical angle measurer including a
    level or plumb, subclass 290, for a sighting device with leveling means,
    subclass 295, for a surveyor's rod or target with leveling or plumbing
    means, subclasses 300+, appropriate subclasses for a level or plumb
    instrument and subclasses 316+ and 318+, for a gyroscopically controlled or
    stabilized magnetic compass.


CLS 356/149
TXT Subject matter under subclass 148 where an optical element or reticle is
    stabilized by a gyroscope or pendulum.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 5+ for gyroscopes, per se.


CLS 356/150
TXT Subject matter under subclass 138 where the axes being aligned or lines
    determining the angle being measured lie in a plane transverse to the
    optical axis of the measuring or aligning device.

    (1)     Note.  One of the lines or axes may be the line generated as the
    result of the relative motion of a vehicle and an object as, for example,
    in a drift meter.


CLS 356/151
TXT Subject matter under subclass 150 including means whereby pulses are
    produced by alternately interrupting and transmitting a light beam.


CLS 356/152.1
TXT With photodetection remote from measured angle:

    Subject matter under subclass 138 including photodetection and indication
    of the apex of an angle or the degree of angular misalignment formed at a
    location other than at a detecting station.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass would include the degree of misalignment or
    measure with respect to a given axis of the remote angle of a remote
    self-luminous source, not found in subclasses 152.2 and 152.3, where the
    angle apex is not at the detecting station and where there is no automatic
    following or alignment.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass may include angles at a detecting station
    which facilitate the measurement of a different remote angle such as in the
    triangulation of beams or look angles converging on a target.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass does not include shaft angle encoding found in
    Class 250, subclasses 231.13+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS

    3.01+,  for angle determination found in the triangulation of an object's
    distance.

    139.01+, for techniques that may be used in star or sun angle measurements.

    139.03, for attitude determination along 3 axes.

    139.09, for techniques that may be used in wheel alignment with
    photodetection.

    139.1,  for angular inclination, per se.

    399+,   for parallel alignment of a beam to the detecting station.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 231.13+ for shaft angle encoding with or
    without display; subclass 201.6 for angle determination during the
    triangulation of an object's distance.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    159 for optical communication alignment that does not technically indicate
    a measurement.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 89+ for the determination of any angle in
    the triangulation of an object's distance.


CLS 356/152.2
TXT With reflection of a unidirectional source beam from a planar or
    nonretroreflective surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.1 including a planar, spherical, etc.,
    reflecting surface at a remote object from which a source beam directed
    along one axis will reflect at different angles to be measured along at
    least one plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139.03, for attitude in yaw, pitch, and roll of either a remote planar
    reflector or the detecting station.

    139.07+, for the same plus automatic following or aligning while indicating
    the angle or misalignment.

    141.1,  for apex of angles strictly at the  detecting station and where
    there is no automatic following or alignment.


CLS 356/152.3
TXT With reflection of a unidirectional source beam from a retroreflector:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.1 including a reflective surface at a
    remote object from which a source beam directed along one axis reflects
    back to a source and photodetecting station colinearly or in parallel with
    respect to the source direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139.03, for attitude in yaw, pitch, and roll of either a remote planar
    reflector or the detecting station.

    139.07+, for the same plus automatic following or aligning while indicating
    the angle or misalignment.

    141.1,  for apex of angle strictly at the detecting station and where there
    is no automatic following or alignment.


CLS 356/153
TXT Subject matter under subclass 138 for aligning or testing the alignment of
    two axes where the axes in their aligned position are coaxial or form
    different parts of a continuous straight line lying in a surface.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, optical means for
    testing the straightness of items such as rails or gun bores and the
    aligning of the optical axis of a lens with the mechanical axis of a tube.


CLS 356/154
TXT Subject matter under subclass 138 including a viewing screen or surface
    upon which an image or spot of light may be projected.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, for projectors generally.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    443+ for projection screens, per se.


CLS 356/155
TXT Subject matter under subclass 154 including means for aligning the wheels
    of a vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  The term "alignment" as used in this subclass denotes the
    determination of the relationship between the axes of rotation of wheels,
    or the relationship between such rotation axes and some vehicle axis.


CLS 356/213
TXT Subject matter under the class definition for determining the intensity or
    quantity of light emanating from a particular location or direction.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses provide for both the
    photocell type and the visual type of photometers, the visual type being
    where the eye makes the detection as opposed to the automatic detection of
    the photocell in this photocell type.  The light whose intensity is to be
    determined may be natural light such as the sun or moon or artificial
    sources such as light bulbs or gas lamps.  This and the indented subclasses
    provide for actinometers, per se, but Class 396, Photography, subclasses
    213+ provide for actinometers with camera structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for optical pyrometers where the intensity of emitted light is
    correlated to temperature of the substance emitting the light.

    51,     for measuring the intensity of invisible radiation involving only
    optical principles and no significant invisible radiation structure.  See
    also (1) Note.

    432+,   for measuring the intensity of the light transmitted through
    substances.

    445+,   for measuring the intensity of the reflected light from substances.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 336.1+ for methods and apparatus
    including electric signalling devices to detect or measure invisible
    radiant energy and subclasses 472.1+ for methods of nonelectric detection
    of radiant energy and invisible radiant energy responsive nonelectric
    signalling devices.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 403+ for measuring
    and testing the electrical operating characteristics of electric lamps with
    or without optical measuring or testing.

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 417+ for direction finding radio
    receivers which detect the intensity and direction of beams of
    electromagnetic radiation.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 32 for thermal measurement
    of the power or energy emitted from a radiation emissive source; and
    subclasses 121+ for radiation type thermometers.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 213+ for actinometers combined with
    cameras.  See (1) Note above.


CLS 356/214
TXT Subject matter under subclass 213 wherein the light to be measured falls on
    the pupil of an observer to control the size of the pupil as by contraction
    or dilation of the iris, together with means to permit the observer to see
    his pupil and to compare or measure the size or tangent of the pupil as the
    light to be measured falls thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    372+,   for structure to measure articles for some type of dimensional size.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, for devices which visually measure by
    means of scales or standards or markings a linear dimensional size.

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclasses
    205+ for objective eye testing instruments.


CLS 356/215
TXT Subject matter under subclass 213 including structure for determining the
    quantity of light as by integrating the intensity of the light against time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236,    for integrating spheres.


CLS 356/216
TXT Subject matter under subclass 213 including a movable mechanical element
    having areas or volumes of different heat absorbing characteristic, the
    element being moved by the infringing radiation producing a temperature
    differential in the respective areas or volumes, as by the gas adjacent the
    warmer area or volume producing greater pressure thereon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 472.1+ for invisible radiation
    responsive nonelectric signalling devices.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 189+ where this phenomenon
    is used to transmit signals such as messages; subclasses 540+ to note
    conditions other than measurement of the intensity of light, particularly
    subclass 592.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 121+ for radiometer type
    devices for measuring the temperature of hot bodies by measuring the heat
    radiation therefrom.


CLS 356/217
TXT Subject matter under subclass 213 including structure for modifying the
    intensity or frequency of the input light or electric current responsive to
    the light, as by interrupting the current or chopping the light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for stroboscopes.

    48,     for incandescent standard type optical pyrometers which use
    modulated light.

    126,    for lens or reflective image testing devices which use light
    modulators in focal length measurements.

    151,    for angle sides or axes alignment transverse to an optical axis
    type device which utilizes light modulators.

    319+,   for plural beam spectrophotometers which interrupt the light
    mechanically, electrically, or electro-optically.

    322,    for flicker beam absorption spectrophotometers.

    323+,   for modulation type spectrophoto meters.

    387,    for width or diameter of threads or web type measuring devices with
    light modulators.

    418,    for light modulating type colorimeters.

    447,    for light reflection from material which involves light modulation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    332,    Modulators, for electrical current modulators.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    227+ for light controlled by an opaque element or medium movable in or
    through the light path.


CLS 356/218
TXT Subject matter subclass 213 including a light responsive device which may
    be photo-resistive or photovoltaic together with an electrical meter or
    other electrical indicating device electrically coupled to the light
    responsive device to indicate quantitatively the change produced by light
    infringing on the light responsive device.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for the combination of the photocell,
    electrical coupling between the photocell and meter, and the meter. Class
    250, Radiant Energy, subclasses 206+ provides for photocells and their
    controlled circuits, and subclasses 216+ for photocells together with
    optical systems.  Class 324, Electricity:  Measuring and Testing,
    especially subclasses 92 through 157 provides for galvanometer type meters
    with or without associated circuitry.  Class 340, Communications:
    Electrical, subclass 600 provides for radiant energy indicators of the
    presence or absence type as opposed to the quantitative values furnished by
    the patents in this subclass 218.  Class 116, Signals and Indicators,
    subclasses 284+ provides for rotary indicators generally, and subclasses
    327+ for pointers and indicator arms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52+,    for photoelectric egg candlers.

    124+,   for optical element or device testing of the photoelectric type.

    139.01+, for devices measuring the angle with respect to a remote point
    having specified  applications with photodetection.

    141.1+, for devices measuring the apex of an angle at a photodetection
    station with respect to a remote point.

    152.1+, for devices measuring the apex of an angle at a  point remote from
    a photodetection station.

    237+,   for photoelectric flaw detection.

    364+,   for polarization testing devices of the photosensitive type.

    372+,   for photoelectric mensuration or configuration comparison devices.

    402+,   for colorimeters of the photoelectric type.

    432+,   for photoelectric devices testing light transmission through
    substances.

    445+,   for photoelectric devices testing light reflection from surfaces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators.  See (1) Note above.

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclasses 243+ for
    photoelectric type primary batteries.

    250,    Radiant Energy.  See (1) Note above.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 94+ for
    photosensitive devices, and subclasses 103+ for photosensitive devices
    having secondary emitters.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 96+ for photometers
    to determine electric quantities.  See (1) Note above.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical.  See (1) Note above.


CLS 356/219
TXT Subject matter under subclass 218 wherein there is structure to provide a
    field of view toward the area whose light intensity is to be determined and
    wherein the indications of the meter are presented in this field of view,
    to permit simultaneous sighting of the view and reading of the meter.

    (1)     Note.  The photometers classified here are essentially view finders
    with the meter scale and indicator in the optical path of the view finder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    396,    Photography, subclasses 213+ for actinometers which include
    viewfinders, and subclasses 373+ for viewfinders.


CLS 356/220
TXT Subject matter under subclass 218 wherein the detector and the meter or
    indicator are placed in separate housings.

    (1)     Note.  The housings may be mechanically or electrically connected
    as by a hinge or separable electrical connector respectively.


CLS 356/221
TXT Subject matter under subclass 218 wherein optical structure is associated
    with the light responsive device to collect light coming from a direction
    other than that reflected from the viewed object.

    (1)     Note.  The optical structure is usually either a hemispherical
    light diffusing member or a reflector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225+,   for photocell type photometers with light modifiers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 216+ for photocell circuits with
    pre-photocell or optical devices.


CLS 356/222
TXT Subject matter under subclass 218 including a plurality of light responsive
    devices.

    (1)     Note.  The detectors may be simultaneously or selectively operable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221,    for photometers having plural detectors responsive to incident or
    diffused back lighting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 208.1+ for photocell circuits which
    include plural photocells, and subclass 578 for optical or pre-photocell
    systems with plural photosensitive elements.


CLS 356/223
TXT Subject matter under subclass 218 wherein the readings of the meter or
    indicator bear a logarithmic relation to the variations of the light sensed
    by the light responsive device.

    (1)     Note.  The logarithmic relationship may be obtained by a
    logarithmic amplification or attenuation of the electrical coupling between
    the detector and indicator, or by a logarithmic variation in the magnetic
    circuit of the galvanometer indicator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224,    for multi-sensitivity range photometers.


CLS 356/224
TXT Subject matter under subclass 218 including an optical element which is
    adjustable or removable to selectively vary the light transmission to the
    light responsive device or including an adjustable resistance in the
    electrical coupling between the device and the meter or indicator to absorb
    a portion of the energy otherwise passing to the meter or indicating device
    to provide selective sensitivity and thus a plurality of operating meter or
    indicator ranges.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226,    for electrical circuitry coupling the detector and indicator.

    228,    for photoelectric type photometers with movable scales.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 115 for electrical
    meters with plural ranges.


CLS 356/225
TXT Subject matter under subclass 218 including an optical element such as a
    lens, shutter, diaphragm, or mirror in the light path to the light
    responsive device to modify the light coming to the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221,    for photoelectric type detectors with optical structure rendering
    the detectors responsive to incident or back lighting.

    224,    for multi-range photometers whose sensitivity is controlled by an
    adjustable optical element in the detector light path.

    233,    for visual type photometers with variable light apertures.

    432+,   for testing the light transmission properties of materials.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 216+ for photocells with pre-photocell
    optical elements.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    483+ for light polarization devices, subclasses 558+ for light diffraction
    elements, subclass 615 for light dispersion elements, subclasses 642+ for
    lenses, subclasses 227+ for light control by opaque elements movable in a
    light path, subclass 831 for prisms, subclasses 838+ for light reflectors,
    subclasses 885+ for light filters, and subclasses 894+ for optical
    apertures and tubes.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, appropriate subclasses for fiber optics, per se.


CLS 356/226
TXT Subject matter under subclass 218 including some details of the electrical
    coupling or connection between the light responsive device and the meter or
    indicating device.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of such coupling or connection are amplifiers,
    attenuators, and electrical connectors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 600 for electrical signalling
    systems, generally, which are responsive to light, such as vision tones to
    aid the blind.


CLS 356/227
TXT Subject matter under subclass 218 including significant indicating device
    structure such as scales and pointers or such indicating structure bearing
    a particular structural relationship with the light responsive device.

    (1)     Note.  The patents here are often directed to placing the light
    responsive device and the meter or indicator in particular related
    positions in the housing as to provide a compact arrangement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 200+, for indicators generally,
    and especially subclasses 284+ for rotary indicators and subclasses 327+
    for pointers and indicator arms.

    235,    Registers, subclass 64.7 for photographic calculators.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 76.11+ for
    galvanometer type meters, and especially subclasses 151+ for such meters
    with permanent magnets.


CLS 356/228
TXT Subject matter under subclass 227 wherein a scale of the meter or
    indicating device is movable or adjustable as for calculating purposes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclass 64.7 for photographic calculators.


CLS 356/229
TXT Subject matter under subclass 213 including two optical paths, there being
    an optical element having known light absorbing properties in one of the
    paths or there being a light source in one of the optical paths having a
    known illumination characteristic (which may be dependent on the position
    of the light source), together with structure to facilitate comparison of
    the light in the two paths.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222,    for photocell type photometers with plural photodetectors involving
    comparison.

    402+,   for comparison type colorimeters.


CLS 356/230
TXT Subject matter under subclass 229 including a source of light which
    constitutes a standard (known intensity) with which the light whose
    intensity is to be determined is compared.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for variable light standards whether the standard is used for
    temperature or light intensity tests.

    243,    for optical testing standards generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 403+ for lamp
    testing as where the efficiency of the electrical to light conversion of
    the lamp is determined.  However, this Class 356 provides for the mere
    measurement of the radiation intensity from the lamp.


CLS 356/231
TXT Subject matter under subclass 230 wherein the light standard is of the
    incandescent type and wherein the incandescence may be varied as by a
    variable resistance in series with the power supply to the filaments of the
    incandescent lamp.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the lamp is usually adjusted to proper
    incandescence and the light intensity determined from a scale reading of
    the variable resistance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46+,    for an optical pyrometer with an electrically variable incandescent
    standard.


CLS 356/232
TXT Subject matter under subclass 230 wherein the light standard is movable
    with reference to the comparison structure which includes a comparison
    partition or screen, or with reference to the sample to modify the
    intensity of the effective illumination from the light standard.

    (1)     Note.  A scale is usually associated with the movable light
    standard to provide a measure of the illumination.


CLS 356/233
TXT Subject matter under subclass 213 including an aperture in the optical path
    whose aperture size may be controlled to vary the illumination passing
    therethrough from a location whose light intensity is to be determined or
    including a plurality of apertures of different sizes one of which may be
    selected to pass a predetermined quantity of light, the purpose in both
    cases being to reduce the visible illumination to render the viewed object
    or indicia markings barely visible.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter classified here may include scales for
    indicating the illumination intensity for general illumination purposes or
    for photographic purposes.  The photometers classified here are of the
    visual type in the sense that the eye itself is the detector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43+,    for optical pyrometers of the visual type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclass 64.7 for photographic calculators.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 139 for visual photometers
    combined with motion picture cameras.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 213+ for visual photometers combined with
    cameras.


CLS 356/234
TXT Subject matter under subclass 213 including an optical light attenuating
    member or members in the optical path which is illuminated from a location
    whose light intensity is to be   determined, the members being adjustable
    or selectively placed in the optical path to control the illumination
    reaching the eye, the purpose being in both cases to reduce the visible
    illumination to render the viewed object or indicia markings barely visible.

    (1)     Note.  See also (1) Note and the Search Notes under subclass 233
    above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    888 for neutral density filters, subclass 889 for filters movable in or out
    of the optical path, subclass 890 for filters superposed in series, and
    subclass 891 for filters in optical parallel.


CLS 356/235
TXT Subject matter under subclass 234 wherein the optical light attenuating
    member has a variable light attenuating characteristic in a physical
    direction along the member to permit variation in the light passing through
    the member by movement of the member through the optical path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    888 for optical wedges.


CLS 356/236
TXT Subject matter under subclass 213 including a hollow body of spherical
    interior and having an interior surface of highly reflecting and also
    diffusing material and having relatively small openings in the shell of the
    body to admit light for the purpose of raising the interior illumination to
    a level which depends only upon the amount of light entering the openings
    and not upon the reflection or diffusion of the incident light flux.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215,    for photometers which integrate the light intensity in general and
    usually with respect to time.

    432+,   for transmission testing devices which may include integrating
    spheres.

    445+,   for reflection testing which may include integrating spheres.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 228 for integrating spheres with
    photocells.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 403+ for electric
    lamp testing including the electric operating characteristics and which may
    include an integrating sphere.


CLS 356/237
TXT Subject matter under the class definition for determining differences in
    the appearance over the surface or over or through internal structure of
    the material (liquid or solid) forming an article or receptacle contents,
    by viewing the surface or interior by light reflected from the surface or
    passing through the interior of the material, such differences representing
    flaws, cracks, imperfections, foreign substances or dirt.

    (1)     Note.  This claimed subject matter of this subclass may include
    conveyors to support and transport the article to pass an inspection
    station with some inspection limitation when not otherwise classifiable.
    The inspection here is usually of the visual type. Class 250, Radiant
    Energy, particularly subclasses 223, 559.45+, 564+, and 573+ provide for
    the counterpart of this subject matter with a photocell detector.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass provided generally for detection of localized
    foreign particles or dirt, while subclasses 432+ provides for testing
    materials where the particles are uniformly distributed through the
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    426+,   for flaw or imperfection inspection with agitation or rotation of
    the inspected material.

    432+,   for determining the light transmission properties of materials. See
    (2) Note above.

    445+,   for determining the specular and diffuse light reflecting
    properties of materials.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, for power conveyors, per se, used in the
    transportation of material or articles past and beyond an optical test
    point of the visual or photosensitive type.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, particularly
    subclasses 702+ which involve the visual inspection of material or articles
    with structure to facilitate a physical separation of the articles or
    materials based upon physical differences of appearance.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 216+ for flaw inspection involving
    photocell detectors.  See also (1) Note above.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 216+ for flaw
    testing involving magnetization, as with magnetized iron filings where the
    arrangement of the filings is viewed optically.

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, for optical viewing with projection.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    385+, for microscopes with viewed object illumination, and subclasses 798+
    for lenses with viewed object or viewed field illumination; the purpose in
    this Class 359 subject matter being merely to view generally rather than to
    inspect for flaws or imperfections.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 138+ for inspection lamps.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 134+ for manually
    controlled selective delivery systems which involve visual inspection of
    articles or sheet type material.


CLS 356/238
TXT Subject matter under subclass 237 wherein the article or material viewed is
    a woven or knitted fabric or an article formed from fabric such as an
    article of clothing, the partial transparency of the fabric being provided
    by the spaces between the fibers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242,    for thread counters.

    432+,   for measuring the light transmission  or absorption of material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclass 70 for inspection and
    examination of cloth.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 159 for fabric testing other than
    mere inspection or visual examination.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 39 for movable supports for garments
    combined with illumination to facilitate the visual inspection of the
    supported garment.


CLS 356/239
TXT Subject matter under subclass 237 involving structure for passing light
    through a transparent or translucent material forming an article.

    (1)     Note.  For classification here the light must pass completely
    through the material and be viewed on the issuing side.  Mere internal
    reflecting within the material is not sufficient for classification here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    432+,   for measuring light transmission through a material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclass 23, for
    illuminated viewing tables.


CLS 356/240
TXT Subject matter under subclass 239 wherein the transparent or translucent
    articles are formed as receptacles, and the receptacles or their liquid
    contents are inspected or examined.

    (1)     Note.  The most common subject matter here is bottle testing
    devices.


CLS 356/241
TXT Subject matter under subclass 237 which includes optical means such as
    prisms, mirrors and the like together with their supports providing a light
    directing means into one end of a bore for facilitating the inspection of
    the interior surface of the bore from the other end; or lighting means
    combined with the supported means onto the interior of the bore and to
    direct the reflected light from the interior surface of the bore to the
    exterior of the bore for inspection purposes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138+,   for optical alignment devices for checking the correlation of the
    bore of a gun with its sighting means.

    154,    for optical testing devices for checking the straightness of a bore.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 358 for instruments which include
    nonvisible radiation sources and filters for checking cracked interior
    surfaces in bores by means of phosphorescent or fluorescent substances.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 220 for borescopes
    used in the testing of ferrous metal pipe which additionally includes means
    to dispense iron filings and magnetic means to magnetize the pipe so that
    the iron pipe filings will adhere magnetically to the pipe in a pattern
    conforming to the condition of the pipe.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    362+ for borescopes which include compound lens systems in the claims.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 101+ and 184+ for endoscopes with or without
    self-contained illuminating means.


CLS 356/242
TXT Subject matter under the class definition for facilitating the visual
    counting of threads in a fabric or registering the count of the variation
    produced by threads on light passing over the threads of a fabric.

    (1)     Note.  See the (3) Note of the general line between and Class 377
    at the beginning of the class definitions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23+,    for stroboscopes utilized to monitor moving webs or threads.

    238,    for cloth inspection for flaws.

    247+,   for fiducial instruments which involves reticles with significant
    optical structure.

    345+,   for testing apparatus involving light interference effects
    generally including diffraction patterns.

    395,    for the measurement of lengths by means of "moire" patterns.

    429,    for the monitoring of webs or threads for optical properties or
    flaws.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 297+, for a reticle for a sight
    line instrument having no significant optical feature.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 10, for numerical counting of individual
    objects one by one.  See also the general note as to the general note as to
    the line between Class 356 and Class 377 at the beginning of the class
    definitions.


CLS 356/243
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including structure forming a
    basis for optical comparison with the specimen or portions thereof under
    test.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for electrical lamp circuits which utilize the lamp as a standard
    for photometry or for optical pyrometry measurements.

    421+,   for color charts.


CLS 356/244
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including holding structure for
    maintaining the article or material (solid, liquid, or gas) to be
    inspected, measured or tested in the desired inspection, measuring or
    testing position; or for maintaining the standard in the desired position.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes means to support the holding
    structure when not otherwise classifiable. Usually the holding structure is
    shaped or otherwise adapted to permit passage of the testing light rays.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    311+,   for sample holders which include heating or burner structure for
    spectroscopic analysis of the sample.

    421,    for color charts or standards.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 501+ for geometrical gauges.

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 59+ for plural
    related horizontal support surfaces generally.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 600+ for
    electrophoretic or electro-osmotic apparatus, including the combination of
    such apparatus with optical measuring or testing means.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 13.1+ for special article supports
    usually of the framework type.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 127+ and 200+ for stands and brackets
    respectively.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 453.11+ for article or object supports
    for ray energy generally.

    269,    Work Holders, for holders for supporting work during a treating
    operation.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    396+ for transparent microscope slides.


CLS 356/245
TXT Subject matter under subclass 244 including a plurality of receptacles
    arranged in a unit for holding cotton standards, together with structure
    for facilitating the comparison of a selected standard with a cotton sample.


CLS 356/246
TXT Subject matter under subclass 244 wherein the holder has side walls for
    restraining the fluid to be tested.

    (1)     Note.  The holder may be completely enclosed as to contain gaseous
    fluids. The holder may be of the flow-through type as by having an input
    and output orifice.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240,    for detections of dirt or foreign bodies in fluids by passing a
    light therethrough.

    427,    for the inspection of container contents in motion.

    441+,   for liquid particle suspension testing, such as turbidity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 61.41+ for strip cups.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, appropriate subclasses for
    receptacles of general use which are not restricted to use in optical
    testing of materials.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 428+ for fluent material containers,
    supports or transfer means for subjecting the material to radiation.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 100 and 102 for laboratory apparatus
    elements which include fluid containers.


CLS 356/247
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein an optical instrument
    establishes an optical axis whereby an observer may precisely orient the
    optical instrument relative to some remote point toward which the optical
    axis is directed, or and usually whereby the observer may orient some
    device such as a gun to which the optical instrument is attached.

    (1)     Note.  Where a reticle is recited in conjunction with a compound
    optical system classification is generally in Class 359, Optics:  Systems
    (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass 428.  However, where the
    reticle or reticle image is adjustable for the purpose of changing the
    observer's line of sight relative to the central optical axis of the
    instrument, classification will be in this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 227+, for similar subject
    matter where no significant optical structure is claimed.


CLS 356/248
TXT Subject matter under subclass 247 including, for the purpose of
    establishing a stabilized optical axis, means which tends to maintain its
    orientation in space irrespective of changes in the orientation of the
    supporting structure for this means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143,    for similar subject matter used in angle measuring means where a
    scale and target are simultaneously observable.

    148,    for similar subject matter used in angle measuring means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 230, for a gyroscopically
    stabilized bomb sight, subclass 236, for a gyroscopically stabilized gun
    sight, subclass 273, for a sighting device having a magnetic compass and a
    level or plumb, subclass 283, for a vertical angle measurer including a
    level or plumb, subclass 290, for a sighting device with leveling means,
    subclass 295, for a surveyor's rod or target with leveling or plumbing
    means, subclasses 300+, appropriate subclasses for a level or plumb
    instrument and subclasses 316+ and 318+, for a gyroscopically controlled or
    stabilized magnetic compass.


CLS 356/249
TXT Subject matter under subclass 248 where the artificial reference is
    determined by the surface of a fluid.


CLS 356/250
TXT Subject matter under subclass 248 where the artificial reference is
    determined by a pendulously suspended optical element or a reticle.


CLS 356/251
TXT Subject matter under subclass 247 where the lines of sight from the target
    and from a reticle converge and are optically combined.


CLS 356/252
TXT Subject matter under subclass 251 wherein a reticle or an optical element
    is movable in order that the image of the reticle may be adjusted
    transversely to the principal optical axis of the instrument.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     for similar subject matter where the reticle or optical element is
    controlled in response to the relative velocity of the observer and a
    remotely sighted point.


CLS 356/253
TXT Subject matter under subclass 247 where the line of sight is deflected.


CLS 356/254
TXT Subject matter under subclass 253 where there are two or more deflections
    of the line of sight.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    402+ for periscopes including a compound optical system, and subclasses
    857+ for systems for viewing a remote object by means of plural reflections.


CLS 356/255
TXT Subject matter under subclass 253 where the line of sight is deflected by
    reflection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    838+ for reflectors in general.


CLS 356/256
TXT Subject matter under the class definition which is not provided for in any
    of the preceding subclasses of this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclasses
    200+ for examining and testing apparatus involving optical testing
    apparatus specifically designed for eye examination.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 244 for miscellaneous apparatus
    dealing with the taking and projection of motion pictures.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    896 for miscellaneous optical systems and elements not provided for
    elsewhere.


CLS 356/300
TXT BY DISPERSED LIGHT SPECTROSCOPY:

    Subject matter under the class definition for the examination of a
    dispersed beam of light or selected portions thereof as by a prism or
    diffraction grating from a narrow beam of light as from a slit, or for
    utilizing a portion of a dispersed beam, such as from a monochromator, for
    examination of substances by transmitting light through or reflecting light
    from the substances or for the examination of the dispersed beam from a
    stimulated light emissive sample.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are spectroscopes.

    (2)     Note.  The line between Class 250, Radiant Energy, and the
    spectroscopic examination found in this class is:

            Claims to a spectroscopic arrangement which include only the
    examination of visible radiation will be found in subclasses 300+.

            Claims to a spectroscopic arrangement which include optical
    limitations which are usable in the infrared, ultraviolet, and visible
    light range will be found in subclass 51 in this class providing no
    significant nonvisible radiation or examining structure is involved in the
    claims.

            Claims to a spectroscopic arrangement including a source of
    invisible radiation such as infrared or ultraviolet, or a particular
    material operative for the purposes of the disclosure only in the invisible
    radiation range, or a detector responsive only to invisible radiation will
    be classified in Class 250.

    (3)     Note.  The line between Class 345, Computer Graphics Processing,
    Operator Interface Processing, and Selective Visual Display Systems, and
    Class 356 with respect to spectroscopy and with respect to the remaining
    portions of Class 356 is:

            Where a Class 356 device is claimed in combination with a recorder
    of the Class 346 type, Class 356 will take combinations including a broad
    optical test for Class 356 combined with a broad Class 346 recorder.
    However, a name only optical test device in combination with a specific
    recorder will be classified in Class 346.  Any details of the optical test
    device whether patentable or not with a specific recorder will be
    classified in Class 356.

    (4)     Note.  Diffraction crystals used to disperse X radiation when used
    with the combination of elements forming a spectrometer or spectropscope
    will not be classified here.  See Class 378, X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or
    Devices, subclass 70.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402+,   for filter photometers which analyze the wave length and the
    intensity of emitted light or the light of specific wave lengths absorbed
    by materials as a result of reflective or transmissive tests, where filters
    rather than dispersing mediums are used to isolate various wave lengths of
    light.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for photocell circuits which do not
    involve the measurement of light or the testing of material by means of
    visible light; subclasses 336.1+ for methods and apparatus involving
    emission or absorption infrared or ultraviolet spectrometers.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    558+ for diffraction gratings and mounts; subclass 615 for light dispersion
    systems which do not involve the analysis of the dispersed light;
    subclasses 831+ for prisms and mountings for the prisms; subclasses 362+
    for compound lens systems; subclasses 811+ for lenses and their supports;
    and subclasses 894+ for optical apertures including slits.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 70+ for X-ray
    diffraction analysis.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics of
    electrophotographic devices, particularly subclasses 31+ for image-forming
    components.


CLS 356/301
TXT With Raman type light scattering:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 which includes a directed beam of light,
    means to support transparent gaseous, liquid, or solid substances for
    transmission of the beam through the substance, and means transverse to the
    direction of the beam for detecting the light reflected or scattered by the
    molecules of the substance, and including the detection of the light caused
    by change of the rotational and vibrational energy of the molecules due to
    the light energy directed through the substance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331+,   for visible light monochromators of the prism and grating type
    which may be utilized in this test.

    337+,   for particle and molecular light scattering tests where no Raman
    spectra is involved.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 336.1+ for methods and apparatus which
    may involve Raman effect and utilize infrared or ultraviolet radiation.


CLS 356/302
TXT For spectrographic (i.e., photographic) investigation:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 which includes an entrance slit, a
    dispersing means, an aperture, and a photographic medium associated with
    the aperture for recording the dispersed spectrum or portions thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 316.1 for infrared or thermal pattern
    recording methods and apparatus; and subclasses 580+ for methods and
    apparatus photographing invisible radiation or materials subjected to
    invisible radiation generally.

    346,    Recorders, subclasses 107.1+ for optical recording of phenomenal
    information.

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, subclasses 224+ for
    apparatus and processes using light or beam to mark the record receiver.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclass 70 for X-ray
    diffraction analysis.

    396,    Photography, for photographic cameras for exposing photographic
    film.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, for process, product, and composition used in radiation imagery.


CLS 356/303
TXT With spectral analysis:

    Subject matter under subclass 302 which includes, additionally, the
    development of the spectrograph and the qualitative and quantitative
    analysis of the developed spectrograph, as by transmissive photometric
    examination.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404,    for the analysis for the various colors of a developed color
    negative in order to correct for the exposure variables in the production
    of colored prints.

    443+,   for the analysis of black and white developed negatives of
    spectrograms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 316.1 for photographic infrared detection
    or analysis of material; and subclasses 580+ for photographic detection of
    invisible radiation or analysis of material where an examination of a
    developed spectrogram may be involved.


CLS 356/304
TXT With sectored disc:

    Subject matter under subclass 302 which includes a stepped or sectored
    opening therein to provide a light masking structure interposed between the
    light to be examined and the entrance slit of the spectrograph.

    (1)     Note.  The light masking means generally includes means to move the
    masking structure and an aperture configuration which is a logarithmic
    configuration along the slit from some fixed point.


CLS 356/305
TXT With diffraction grating:

    Subject matter under subclass 302 which includes a diffraction grating as
    the dispersing element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    566+ for diffraction grating, per se.


CLS 356/306
TXT With internal standard comparison:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 which includes means to detect and
    measure the intensity of a spectral line of a sought for element or
    composition relative to a second spectral line of the same or a second
    element or composition that is present in known amounts.

    (1)     Note.  This second component may be added to the sought for
    constituent or be present as a constituent of the sample tested.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    307,    for similar subject matter wherein the intensity of the total
    emitted radiation is compared against the radiation of a specific
    wavelength inherent in the total radiation.


CLS 356/307
TXT With background radiation comparison:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 which includes means to detect and
    measure the intensity of at least one spectral line present in emitted
    radiation relative to the total emitted radiation present.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306,    for the comparison involving emitted radiation of a known spectral
    line intensity and wavelength of an element with the intensity of the
    spectral line or lines of a tested chemical element, both the known and
    unknown element being present in the same emitted radiation.


CLS 356/308
TXT With synchronized spectrum repetitive scanning (e.g., cathode-ray readout):

    Subject matter under subclass 300 which includes the periodic scanning of a
    dispersed light beam over the optical frequency spectrum, detecting the
    scanned dispersed beam, synchronizing a visual readout with the various
    wavelengths present in the detected dispersed beams, and correlating the
    intensity of the detected readout with each wavelength present in the
    dispersed beam.

    (1)     Note.  The readout is usually a cathode-ray tube.

    (2)     Note.  The synchronization of the scanning of the dispersed beam is
    with the movement of the dispersing means, the optical means associated
    with the dispersing means, or the electronics of the detection and readout
    circuitry.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    319,    for spectrophotometers which use a cathode-ray tube readout where
    no repetitive scanning is involved.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 336.1+ for methods and apparatus having
    an invisible radiant energy responsive electric signalling device and a
    cathode-ray tube responsive to the device.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 1+ for
    cathode-ray tube circuit, generally, including deflection systems for the
    electron beam of the cathode-ray tube.

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 500+ and 400+ for facsimile systems which
    utilize a cathode-ray oscillograph tube which do not involve a spectrum
    analysis of light or the light analysis of a substance reflectively or
    transmissively.


CLS 356/309
TXT Using plural beams:

    Subject matter under subclass 308 wherein there are plural beams of light,
    and there is means to support a sample or a substance to be tested in one
    or more beams.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    319+,   for plural beam spectrophotometers which use a cathode-ray tube
    readout where no repetitive scanning is involved.


CLS 356/310
TXT With aperture mask:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 including means for passing light,
    usually of a selected group of spectral wavelengths, between the light
    dispersing means and the light detection means.


CLS 356/311
TXT With sample excitation (e.g., burning):

    Subject matter under subclass 300 including structure for heating, burning,
    or otherwise stimulating the sample to cause the emission of radiation for
    analysis.

    (1)     Note.  For classification here as opposed to subclasses 244+ some
    portion of the apparatus for heating, burning, or stimulating the samples
    or for analyzing the rays emitted by the specimen should be claimed.

    (2)     Note.  The combination of the heating or combustion of a sample and
    the spectrographic analysis of the heated sample is in this Class 356
    rather than in Class 23.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244+,   for sample holders for materials to be excited for spectrographic
    analysis, which do not include a heating means such as a flame, an arc, or
    spark device for the heating of the sample. See also (1) Note above.

    302,    for sample electrical or flame excitation when combined with a
    spectrographic recorder.

    306,    for sample electrical or flame excitation which additionally
    excites a substance whose wavelength and emission intensity at this
    wavelength are known.

    307,    for electrical or flame sample excitation which utilized the total
    emissive radiation produced as a standard of comparison against the
    intensity of light emitted by the sample at certain wavelengths.

    308,    for electrical or flame excitation of samples whose emitted
    radiation is detected by a repetitive, electro-optical scanning system.

    417,    for filter photometers which analyze certain wavelengths of light
    emitted as a result of electrical or flame excitation of a sample.


CLS 356/312
TXT By electrical resistance heating (e.g., graphite tube):

    Subject matter under subclass 311 wherein the sample is heated to an
    excited state by passing an electrical current through the sample cell or
    support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, 600+ for inductive heating, subclasses 678+ for
    microwave heating, and subclasses 764+ for capacitive dielectric heating;
    subclasses 65 and 162 for apparatus and methods for the electron beam
    heating and disintegration of metals; subclasses 50+ for the methods and
    apparatus for resistive heating of metals; subclasses 260+ for resistive
    igniters of solid material; and subclasses 271+ for electrical resistive
    heater-type vaporizers.


CLS 356/313
TXT By arc or spark:

    Subject matter under subclass 311 wherein the heating structure includes an
    arc or spark.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are the subcombinations including the
    electrical arc or spark excitation unit which includes the support for the
    sample to be analyzed even though optical elements of the spectrophotometer
    are not claimed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 69 for the arc cutting or disintegration
    of metals; subclasses 121.11+ for the heating of metals by electric arc;
    subclasses 271+ for arc-type electric heaters with vaporizers; and
    subclasses 383+ for arc-type nonmetal heating devices.

    313,    Electrical Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 243 for arc-type
    devices of the general usage type; and subclasses 326+ for electrode
    structure not of the consumable electrode type.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes, for
    structure to support and feed electrodes of the consumable electrode type,
    and particularly subclass 60 for consumable electrodes not of the
    electrical welding type.


CLS 356/314
TXT Including sputtering:

    Subject matter under subclass 313 wherein sample material is removed, as
    though by evaporation, from the electrodes of a gas discharge tube.


CLS 356/315
TXT By flame:

    Subject matter under subclass 311 including a flame producer whose flame
    heats or burns the sample to cause the emission of radiation to be analyzed.

    (1)     Note.  Class 431, Combustion, will take all methods of burning of
    fuel not classified elsewhere.  Class 431 will take the combination which
    includes a burner having a nozzle or a pipe outlet means to feed a fuel, a
    combustion supporting fluid to the pipe or nozzle outlet to produce a
    flame, and means to feed a sample fluid into the flame produced by the
    burner so that the heat of the burner will increase the energy of the
    sample to the point whereby the sample will emit radiation.

    (2)     Note.  The combination of a spectral flame burner such as recited
    in Note 1 above with an optical element necessary to inspect the flame such
    as a "chimney" or "means to view the flame" where it is more than
    inspection of the flame and involves the examination of the color intensity
    or wavelength of the light of the flame, is classified in Class 356 rather
    than Class 431.

    (3)     Note.  Class 431, will not take the feeding of powdered material
    entrained in a fluid.  See Class 239, Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and
    Diffusing, particularly subclasses 144 and 422.

    (4)     Note.  Class 362, Illumination, provides for a light source and
    means to modify the light for general illumination purposes.  A light
    source and a chimney, for example, without means to limit the light source
    specifically for examination purposes, such as a monochromator or means to
    hold additionally the material to be examined, would be classifiable in
    Class 362.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    417,    for excitation photometers where filters rather than light
    dispersing structure are used to select the wavelength of the emitted light
    to be examined that is present in the excited sample.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 205 and 604 for devices which utilize a
    separating apparatus to move a liquid or gaseous sample from a supply to
    another location.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 398+ for the
    combining of separately supplied fluids which are emitted from a nozzle.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 554 for flame source combined with a
    photocell where a physical characteristic of the flame is detected.

    362,    Illumination, for general illumination devices which include a
    light source and means to direct the light.  See Note 4.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 50+ for apparatus having means to
    burn the material being analyzed.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 4 and 126 for the methods and apparatus
    pertaining to the burning of a combustible fluid. See Notes 1, 2, and 3 of
    this subclass.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 1+ for
    processes involving the burning of material which involves a chemical
    reaction, or the analysis or treatment of the products of combustion where
    not elsewhere classified.  See also (2) Note of subclass 311.


CLS 356/316
TXT By high frequency field (e.g., plasma discharge):

    Subject matter under subclass 311 wherein the sample is excited by the
    field generated by a high frequency signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 121 for electric heating by a plasma arc
    discharge, per se.


CLS 356/317
TXT By light:

    Subject matter under subclass 311 wherein the sample is excited by
    radiation in the visible spectrum.


CLS 356/318
TXT Monochromatic (e.g., laser):

    Subject matter under subclass 317 wherein the light is of a single
    wavelength.


CLS 356/319
TXT Utilizing a spectrophotometer (i.e., plural beam):

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein there are formed two beams of
    light, one or both beams may be monochromatic, means to support a substance
    in one or both beams to modify one or both beams, means to detect and
    compare the intensities of the two beams as modified by the substance or
    substances simultaneously or sequentially, and means responsive to the
    comparison means to indicate the relative intensities of the two beams.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213+,   for photometers which examine the intensity of visible light by
    visual and photoelectric methods.

    416+    and 425, for colorimeters which utilize filters rather than a
    dispersing arrangement to determine the intensity of light at specific
    wavelengths or the absorption characteristics of substances which modify
    the light transmitted through or reflected from the substances.

    432,    for photometers which examine light transmitted through a substance.

    445+,   for photometers which examine light reflected from the surface of a
    substance.


CLS 356/320
TXT Having plural wavelengths:

    Subject matter under subclass 319 wherein each beam is of a different
    wavelength.


CLS 356/321
TXT Having servo equalization:

    Subject matter under subclass 319 which generally includes in at least one
    of the beams an optical member, such as a wedge, responsive to the
    comparison means to automatically equalize the intensities of both beams,
    or which includes an electrical member responsive to the comparison means
    to electrically create a null condition in the comparison means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    434+,   for similar detection and comparison circuits which control the
    equalization of the light intensity only of plural beams, at least one beam
    being transmitted through a sample.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 204 for photo-electric circuits which
    adjust an optical system to balance light intensity in plural paths; and
    subclasses 336.1+ for methods and apparatus involving similar devices
    responsive to invisible radiation.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 151 and
    158 wherein a radiant energy device controls an electric lamp load device.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 560+ for electric
    motor follow-up systems which include a self-balancing network.


CLS 356/322
TXT With polarized light beams:

    Subject matter under subclass 321 in which two beams of visible radiation
    are polarized and vary in intensity cyclically with time, and the two beams
    are out of phase with each other; and wherein the optical member is of the
    magneto-optical type, a controlled vibrating mirror, a wedge, or an iris.

    (1)     Note.  Integrating spheres are generally part of the combination
    claimed.

    (2)     Note.  Included in the combination claimed is an indicator or
    recorder to note the change necessary to cause equal brightness in each
    path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236,    for integrating spheres, per se.

    323+,   for spectrophotometers with beam modulation, per se.

    367+,   for polarimeters generally which may involve plural beams and servo
    equalization of the light intensities of both beams.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 228 for photo-electric optical or
    prephotocell systems which include integrating spheres.


CLS 356/323
TXT Having beam modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 319 which includes in the light path
    structure for periodically varying or blocking the light path in both beams
    as by a rotating shutter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 232+ for light interrupters combined
    with photocells, and subclasses 336.1+ for methods and apparatus including
    at least an invisible radiant energy responsive electric signalling device
    responsive to plural modulated energy beams, especially subclasses 340 and
    345+.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    227+ for opaque optical members controlling the passage of light.


CLS 356/324
TXT With plural dispersion:

    Subject matter under subclass 323 which includes dispersing means and
    wherein the dispersion takes place in at least two distinct stages, in
    series.


CLS 356/325
TXT Prior to testing:

    Subject matter under subclass 323 where the modulation of the beam occurs
    before the radiation enters the tested specimen.


CLS 356/326
TXT Utilizing a spectrometer:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein the spectroscopic examination is
    performed with an instrument having an entrance slit, a dispersing device,
    and one or more exit slits with which measurements are made at selected
    wavelengths within the spectral range or by scanning over the range.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300,    for spectroscopes.

    331+,   for monochromators.


CLS 356/327
TXT Having light polarizing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 326 including polarizing apparatus to examine
    visible light or to examine articles or material by means of visible
    polarized light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    364+,   for polarized light examination, per se.


CLS 356/328
TXT Having diffraction grating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 326 wherein the dispersive element is a
    diffraction grating.


CLS 356/329
TXT Including servo slit adjustment means:

    Subject matter under subclass 328 wherein there is included a known
    frequency light source which may be part of the test emission source, an
    entrance slit, a dispersing means, a plurality of exit slits, one of which
    is associated with the known frequency dispersed by the dispersing means, a
    photosensitive detector responsive to the known light frequency received
    through its exit slit, and servo control means responsive to the detector
    to adjust the relative position of the dispersing means and the entrance or
    exit slits.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass excludes recording spectrophotometers having a
    movable dispersing element to allow successively different light
    wavelengths to appear at the same exit slit, and having its movement
    mechanically synchronized to move the recorder and adjust the exit slit for
    the various wavelengths.  See subclasses 321+ for this type of mechanically
    synchronized slit adjustment.


CLS 356/330
TXT Having optical gating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 326 wherein the entrance and exit means
    contain areas which alternately transmit or block the passage of light.


CLS 356/331
TXT With monochromator structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 including a light dispersing element such
    as a prism or diffraction grating together with a slit for selecting a
    narrow portion of the dispersed spectrum to provide a light beam which is
    essentially monochromatic or of narrow frequency bandwidth.

    (1)     Note.  Usually an entrance slit is provided between a source of
    light and the dispersing element, or a light source having a narrow beam
    width may be provided.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for monochromators with optical limitations used in the infrared or
    ultraviolet range.

    326+,   for spectroscopes generally as where a viewing device is used for
    examining the light from the dispersing element either directly or through
    a test sample in place of an output slit.  See also (1) Note under subclass
    326.

    420,    for color light standards as where light filters rather than
    dispersing elements are combined with the light source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 510 for invisible radiation monochromators
    exclusive of the infrared and ultraviolet optical types.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 257+ for miscellaneous illuminating lamps;
    and subclasses 318+ for inspection lamps.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 84+ for X-ray
    devices including monochromators.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics of
    electrophotographic devices, particularly subclasses 31+ for image-forming
    components.


CLS 356/332
TXT Having adjustable color or bandwidth:

    Subject matter under subclass 331 including structure to vary the bandwidth
    or to vary the average or median frequency of the band over the range of
    the light emitted from the monochromator.

    (1)     Note.  The variation may be obtained by changing the width of one
    of the slits or by changing the reflection angle of the dispersing element.


CLS 356/333
TXT In a double monochromator:

    Subject matter under subclass 332 wherein a plurality of dispersing
    elements with an intervening slit or equivalent filtering structure are
    provided between the dispersing elements, as for providing a narrower band
    of light.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for two monochromators, generally in
    series, wherein the exit slit of one of the monochromators is also the
    entrance slit of the other monochromator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for double monochromators including optical limitations for use in
    the ultraviolet or infrared range of the electromagnetic spectrum.

    319+,   for plural beam spectrophotometers which include a double
    monochromator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics of
    electrophotographic devices, particularly subclasses 31+ for image-forming
    components.


CLS 356/334
TXT With diffraction grating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 332 wherein the dispersive element is a
    diffraction grating.


CLS 356/335
TXT FOR SIZE OF PARTICLES:

    Subject matter under the class definition for determining in a group of
    discrete particles the size of individual particles or the average size of
    the particles in the group.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39+,    for the size, numbers, or volume of blood particles not provided
    for elsewhere.

    372+,   for the measurement of articles or indefinite length materials by
    means of variation in visible light as affected by the articles or
    indefinite length materials.

    432+,   for light interference tests including diffraction patterns of
    microscopic bodies generally where the size of the discrete bodies is not
    involved.

    439,    for the number of particles in a gaseous suspension.

    441+,   for the number of particles in a liquid suspension.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 865.5 for miscellaneous measurement
    of the size of particles.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 222.1 for the sizing of discrete particles
    by methods involving visible and invisible light.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 10 for the size determination and the number
    of particles present in samples where the particles are numerically
    counted.  See also the general note to the line between Class 377 and this
    class.


CLS 356/336
TXT By particle light scattering:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 to visually or photoelectrically inspect
    or measure the scattering of light by particles or molecules entrained in a
    static or flowing medium.


CLS 356/337
TXT BY PARTICLE LIGHT SCATTERING:

    Subject matter under the class definition to visually or photoelectrically
    inspect or measure the atmospheric scattering of light, or the scattering
    by molecules of a gas or liquid media or by particles entrained in a
    flowing or static medium, which includes support means for the media or
    medium capable of transmitting light into and out of the support means,
    lighting means to direct light into and through a flowing or static gas or
    liquid with or without the entrained particles, and means to visually
    examine and measure or photoelectrically detect and indicate the intensity
    of the light scattered from the medium or from the particles in the medium
    at some angle other than the direction of the inspection light.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass, the scattering is by reflection of light
    from discrete particles within a medium, as opposed to mere diffusion by
    scattering from an irregular surface in subclass 372.

    (2)     Note.  See subclasses 437+ and 441+ where suspended particles are
    not viewed for scattered light reflected from suspended particles, but for
    the reduction in the light intensity, and wherein light and the observation
    point lie in a direct line with the observed fluid between the light source
    and the observation point.

    (3)     Note.  Tyndallometers, nephelometers, and devices to measure the
    Rayleich ratio are included in this section.

    (4)     Note.  The light used in the test may be monochromatic, polarized,
    or white light.

    (5)     Note.  Where particles in a fluid are counted one by one, see Class
    377, subclass 10.  Where the number of particles in a fluid is found by
    sensing the overall radiation reflected by light scattering from the
    particles within the medium, the claims will be classified here in subclass
    337.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301,    for detection of light scattering of the Raman type.

    335+,   for the determination of the size and number of particles in a test
    medium by statistical methods.

    437+,   see (2) Note above.

    441,    see (2) Note above.

    446,    for scattered light tests caused by the reflection of light from a
    surface which causes a diffused light rather than a specular light
    condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, for photocell circuits or preoptical systems, which
    may sense fluent material in the optical path, which is responsive to
    scattered light from the fluent material.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 627+ for signal systems
    responsive to fluent or pulverized material which may respond to scattered
    light reflected from the fluent or pulverized material.


CLS 356/338
TXT With photocell detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 337 which includes photosensitive means
    activated by the scattered light received.


CLS 356/339
TXT At right angles to the light beam (e.g., nephelometer):

    Subject matter under subclass 338 wherein the photosensitive means detects
    light scattered at an angle of substantially 900 to the incident light beam.


CLS 356/340
TXT At variable angle to the light beam:

    Subject matter under subclass 338 wherein the angle between the incident
    light beam and the detected scattered light is variable.


CLS 356/341
TXT For light comparison means:

    Subject matter under subclass 338 wherein the scattered light is compared
    with (a) a standard light, (b) a standard scattered light, (c) the directly
    transmitted light, or (d) with the light prior to its scattering or
    transmission through the medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for testing by means of infrared or ultraviolet energy when the
    subject matter is of an optical nature and is used alone or in combination
    with visible light.

    433+,   for scattered light tests which measure the directed light through
    the fluid rather than the scattered light.

    446,    for devices which compare the light scattering from a surface
    rather than the reflection of light from particles suspended in a fluid, or
    colloids, or the molecules of a gas or liquid.


CLS 356/342
TXT Of back-scattered light:

    Subject matter under subclass 338 wherein light scattered from the incident
    beam is detected at an angle greater than 900 to the direction of the
    incident beam.


CLS 356/343
TXT Using plural photocells:

    Subject matter under subclass 338 wherein more than one photosensitive
    device is used to detect the scattered light.


CLS 356/344
TXT BY ELECTROPHORESIS:

    Subject matter under the class definition which includes an electrophoresis
    cell for containing a fluid to be tested, generally means transmitting
    light through the fluid, and examination means to indicate or note the
    modification of the light due to the movement of particles suspended in the
    test fluid from the refractive index, the interference phenomenon, the
    absorption of light within the various layers of the fluid in the cell, or
    the Schlieren patterns.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128+,   for refraction of light tests of material under examination where
    electrophoresis is not involved.

    129,    for Schlieren test apparatus not involving electrophoresis.

    345+,   for interference apparatus testing the refraction of light not
    involving electrophoresis, per se, in the claims.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 450+ for
    processes and subclasses 600+ for apparatus involving electrophoresis or
    electro-osmosis as defined therein, including the combination of
    electrophoresis or electro-osmosis with optical measuring or testing.
    Also, see the search class note to Class 356 in Class 204, subclass 450.


CLS 356/345
TXT BY LIGHT INTERFERENCE (E.G., INTERFEROMETERS):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein measuring or testing,
    coherent light beams interact to produce a cancellation or reinforcement of
    wave energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.09    and 4.1, for light interference measurement of displacement or
    distance over large distance.

    28.5,   for light interference measurement of velocity.

    35.5,   for material strain analysis by light interference measurement and
    testing.

    242,    for moir# pattern templates for the determination of the number of
    threads in fabrics such as stockings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 700+ for interferometers
    combined with mechanical means for contacting the workpiece.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 71.3 for interferometric vibration
    measuring.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 550 for interference pattern detection.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    370+ for interference microscopes; subclass 498 for interference effects
    with polarized light; and subclasses 577+ for devices in general which
    utilize the phenomena of light interference.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics of
    electrophotographic devices, particularly subclasses 31+ for image-forming
    components.


CLS 356/346
TXT Spectroscopy:

    Subject matter under subclass 345 wherein the interference phenomenon is
    used to analyze the spectral characteristics of light.

    (1)     Note.  See Search Notes under subclasses 300+ above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300+,   for dispersed light spectroscopic measuring and testing.

    402+,   for filter photometers which analyze the wavelength and intensity
    of emitted or absorbed light by materials as a result of reflective or
    transmissive tests, where filters rather than dispersive mediums are used
    to isolate wavelengths of light.


CLS 356/347
TXT Holography:

    Subject matter under subclass 345 wherein at least one of the interference
    light beams is reconstructed from a record of the phase and amplitude
    information of that light beam wavefront.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 71.3 for holograms used in
    vibration testing.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 550 for holographic pattern detection.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    1+ for basic subject matter in the field of holography.


CLS 356/348
TXT For optical configuration:

    Subject matter under subclass 347 including means to determine the relative
    distribution of the parts or elements, or the external form of an object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359+,   for nonholographic, interferometric optical configuration measuring
    and testing.


CLS 356/349
TXT With light beams of different frequency (e.g., heterodyning):

    Subject matter under subclass 345 wherein light beams of different
    frequency are mixed together in the formation of an interference pattern.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, for vibration testing.


CLS 356/350
TXT For rotation rate (e.g., ring laser):

    Subject matter under subclass 349 wherein the beams of differing frequency
    are generated as a result of the rotation of the interferometer.


CLS 356/351
TXT With polarization:

    Subject matter under subclass 345 wherein the interacting light waves of
    the interferometer are polarized.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33+,    for polarized light used in strain analysis.

    364+,   for analyzing polarized light.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 225 for photocells for detecting polarized
    light.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    370+ for polarization microscopes.


CLS 356/352
TXT With partially reflecting plates in series (e.g., Fabry-Perot type):

    Subject matter under subclass 345 wherein the beams to be interfered are
    created by at least two surface in optical alignment, at least one of which
    is partially transmissive.


CLS 356/353
TXT With shearing:

    Subject matter under subclass 345 wherein the beam to be tested is combined
    with itself after the introduction of either a radical or lateral shear.


CLS 356/354
TXT With wavefront division (e.g., by diffraction):

    Subject matter under subclass 345 wherein the beams to be combined are
    obtained by dividing the wavefront of an input beam.

    (1)     Note.  This is in contrast to a division of amplitude at a
    partially reflecting surface.


CLS 356/355
TXT For dimensional measurement (e.g., thickness):

    Subject matter under subclass 354 wherein light interference is examined to
    determine the height, width, depth, or change in position of an object.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass 355 usually is directed
    toward mensuration of tangible substances, or very small specs between
    objects.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3+,     for range or remote distance measurement.

    357+,   for light interference mensuration without wavefront division.

    372+,   for optical mensuration, per se.


CLS 356/356
TXT Of displacement or distance:

    Subject matter under subclass 355 including means for determining small
    changes in position of an article or small length of space between two
    points.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3+,     for range or remote distance measurement.

    358,    for light interference mensuration of displacement or distance
    without wavefront division.

    373+,   for optical mensuration of article displacement, per se.


CLS 356/357
TXT For dimensional measurement (e.g., thickness):

    Subject Matter under subclass 345 wherein the interference pattern is
    indicative of the height, width, depth, or change in position of an object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3+,     for range or remote distance measurement.

    355+,   for light interference mensuration with wave front division.

    372+,   for optical mensuration, per se.


CLS 356/358
TXT Of displacement of distance:

    Subject matter under subclass 357 including means for measuring small
    changes in position of an article or small length of space between two
    points.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.09    and 4.1, for measurement of displacement or distance over large
    distances involving light interference.

    373,    for optical measurement of displacement or distance, per se.


CLS 356/359
TXT For optical configuration:

    Subject matter under subclass 345 wherein one of the light beams is
    reflected from or transmitted through an object, to determine the relative
    disposition of the parts or elements, or the external form of the object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    348,    for holographic, interferometric optical configuration measuring
    and testing.


CLS 356/360
TXT With two light beams (e.g., Twyman-Green):

    Subject matter under subclass 359 including a reference beam in addition to
    the object beam.

    (1)     Note.  Twyman-Green interferometers are classified here.


CLS 356/361
TXT For refractive indexing:

    Subject matter under subclass 345 wherein the beams are phased in
    accordance with a refractive index to be measured.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128+,   for noninterferometric refractometers.


CLS 356/362
TXT With Schlieren effect:

    Subject matter under subclass 361 wherein the interferometric determination
    of refractive index is combined with a Schlieren test.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129,    for Schlieren tests, per se.


CLS 356/363
TXT For orientation and alignment:

    Subject matter under subclass 345 including means for determining the
    alignment or orientation of a surface relative to a reference line or plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138+,   for axial or angular alignment by optical measuring and testing.

    375,    for determination of position with respect to a reference.

    399+,   for alignment in a lateral direction by optical measuring and
    testing.


CLS 356/364
TXT BY POLARIZED LIGHT EXAMINATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition including polarizing apparatus to
    examine visible light or to examine articles or material by means of
    visible polarized light; or including apparatus to compare, when
    polarization is involved, light, per se, or light transmitted through or
    reflected from an article or material with a light standard.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30+,    for crystal or gem examination where polarized light is involved.

    33+,    for stress-strain examination of articles or material.

    351,    for light interference measuring or testing involving polarized
    light.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 204 for photoelectric, servo electric
    systems of the visible light type which utilize polarized light; and
    subclass 225 for preoptical visible light systems of the polarized light
    type where no light or article testing is involved.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    437 for scales or indicia reading which utilize a polarizer element; and
    subclasses 483+ for optical elements of the polarizer type.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 19 which includes polarizers used with
    general illumination devices.


CLS 356/365
TXT With birefringent element:

    Subject matter under subclass 364 including a doubly refractive or
    birefringent element, that is, an element having the property of dividing a
    ray of light into two polarized rays (known as the ordinary and
    extraordinary rays) the directions of polarization being at right angles to
    each other.

    (1)     Note.  A birefringent material which has been treated with a
    dichroic dye to absorb the ordinary or extra-ordinary ray is no longer
    considered to be birefringent within the meaning of this definition.
    However, a birefringent element in the form, for example, of a Nicol prism
    where the unwanted ray is deflected would be classified here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, for
    polarization systems or elements having a birefringent element.


CLS 356/366
TXT With polariscopes:

    Subject matter under subclass 364 providing structure for examining
    articles or material and including a polarizer, a polarized light analyzer,
    a support usually for the article or material for examination between the
    polarizer and analyzer, and a visual viewer or photoelectric detector and
    indicator, the polarized light from the polarizer being transmitted through
    the article or material to the visual viewer or the photoelectric detector
    and indicator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30+,    for polariscopes used in gem examination.

    33+,    for polariscopes used in stress-strain examination.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    501 which includes series polarizers relatively adjustable.


CLS 356/367
TXT Including polarimeters:

    Subject matter under subclass 366 including either a null type or directly
    indicating instrument for determining the amount of polarized light
    rotation caused by the article or material being examined.


CLS 356/368
TXT With electro-optical light rotation:

    Subject matter under subclass 367 including an electrically operated
    rotator of the polarization plane.

    (1)     Note.  Where an electro-optical rotating means is used to vary the
    intensity of the light, rate of the pulsations of light, or change the
    plane of polarization of the light of an article or material being examined
    without indicating the change in the polarization of the light, search
    subclasses 366, 369, and 370.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    246+, 281+, and 484 for electromagnetic and electrostatic type optical
    elements which rotate the plane of polarization of polarized light.


CLS 356/369
TXT Of surface reflection:

    Subject matter under subclass 364 wherein a material or article is examined
    for surface reflection characteristics by means of polarized light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    445+,   for light reflection testing generally.


CLS 356/370
TXT With light attenuation:

    Subject matter under subclass 364 wherein the light to be tested or the
    light transmitted through or reflected from a sample or standard is reduced
    in intensity by means of polarizers and analyzers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213+,   for photometers generally.

    402+,   for shade or color measurements generally.

    432+,   for light absorption measuring generally.


CLS 356/371
TXT FOR FLATNESS:

    Subject matter under the class definition including optical structure to
    indicate the deviations in light rays which are reflected from or
    transmitted through a material, which deviations are in turn due to
    deviations in the flatness of the material.

    (1)     Note.  The flatness deviation may result from surface or thickness
    irregularities in the material, or bends or wrinkles in otherwise flat
    sheet material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124+,   for lens testing or reflective image former testing.

    237+,   for inspection for flaws or interperfection in material generally.

    359+,   for interferometer type flatness testers.

    432+,   for optical transmission testing generally.

    445+,   for optical reflection testing generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 290+ for a level of the light
    ray type.


CLS 356/372
TXT BY MENSURATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means for determining
    quantifiable characteristics of an article, such as a dimension, the area
    of a surface or its precise position with respect to a reference.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and those indented thereunder provide for the
    actual measuring or comparing of articles where an image of the article and
    a scale are viewed.  If only the image of a scale is viewed the patent is
    classified in Class 359, subclasses 436+; or Class 353 if projection is
    involved.  If only the image of the article is viewed the patent is
    classified in Class 359, subclass 373, where a compound lens system is
    employed; or in Class 353 if projection of an image is present.

    (2)     Note.  Class 33, provides for patents on article testing devices
    where a mechanical pickup or feeler engages or contacts the workpiece even
    though significant optical structure is recited in the claims.

    (3)     Note.  Class 250, especially in subclasses 216+, provides in
    general for photocells together with optical structure in the light path.
    For classification in these subclasses 372+ of Class 356, the photocell and
    optical combination must be so related as to or must include structure to
    give an indication of the measurement such as being within or without the
    range of tolerance with the light beam is passed to the profile of the
    master or article under test.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138+,   for angle measurement.

    355+    and 357+, for mensuration involving light interference.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, especially subclasses 501+ for testing
    devices including a feeler which contact the article.  See (2) Note above.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 358 for object measurement involving
    nonvisible radiant energy.  See (3) Note above.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    373 for object comparison compound lens systems; subclasses 436+ for scale
    readers; and subclasses 798+ and 804+ for object viewing structure
    involving lenses generally, i.e., not compound.


CLS 356/373
TXT Of article displacement:

    Subject matter under subclass 372 wherein changes to an article either by
    movement or by replacement are measured.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.09    and 4.1, for light interference measurement of displacement or
    distance over large distances.

    356     and 358, for light interference measurement of small displacement
    or distance.


CLS 356/374
TXT Including moir# fringe generation:

    Subject matter under subclass 373 wherein moir# fringes are created in
    response to interference between regular patterns in or on the article and
    a superimposable grid or light pattern.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    395,    for relatively movable optical grids which determine article
    configuration.


CLS 356/375
TXT Of position:

    Subject matter under subclass 372 including means to measure the distance
    or direction or an object to a reference.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3+,     for range or remote distance measurement.

    138+,   for axial or angular alignment by optical measuring and testing.

    399,    for alignment in a lateral direction by optical measuring and
    testing.


CLS 356/376
TXT Of contour or profile:

    Subject matter under subclass 372 including means to measure the shape of
    an object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for contour plotting.


CLS 356/377
TXT With curve readers:

    Subject matter under subclass 376 wherein the object is a two-dimensional
    curve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 556 for two-dimensional graph readers.


CLS 356/378
TXT Of cavities:

    Subject matter under subclass 372 including means to measure the internal
    dimensional properties of holes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241,    for bore inspection for flaws or imperfections.


CLS 356/379
TXT Of area or volume:

    Subject matter under subclass 372 including means for determining the area
    of a configuration or the volume of a mass.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes also integrating means where this
    involves no more than optically determining the area under a curve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 121+ for mechanical means for
    determining area.

    235,    Registers, subclasses 61+ for similar subject matter which goes
    beyond merely determining an area of a given configuration as for example
    where some particular mathematical computation or function is involved.


CLS 356/380
TXT By scanning:

    Subject matter under subclass 379 where the total area or volume of a
    configuration is determined by sequentially determining elemental areas of
    the configuration and summing them.


CLS 356/381
TXT Of thickness:

    Subject matter under subclass 372 including means for measuring between
    opposite surfaces or depth or in a direction perpendicular to the length
    and breadth of an object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    355+    and 357+, for light interference thickness measurement.


CLS 356/382
TXT Of light permeable material:

    Subject matter under subclass 381 for measuring the thickness of light
    permeable material, the measuring operation depending upon the fact that
    the material is light permeable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 377+ and 159 for methods and
    apparatus for forming a glass product and the test of the glass product by
    optical means for thickness of the product.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 586 for
    radiant energy dimensioning of an article and sorting of an article based
    on the dimensional sensing, and subclass 588 wherein radiant energy
    transmitted through an article is sensed and sorting of an article is based
    on the sensed transmission.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 306+ for methods and apparatus which may
    measure the thickness of articles by charged particles; and subclasses
    336.1+, especially subclasses 357.1+ and 358.1+ for methods and apparatus
    which may detect the thickness of solid or fluent material by an invisible
    radiant energy responsive electric signalling detector.


CLS 356/383
TXT Of length:

    Subject matter under subclass 372 including means for measuring the largest
    dimension of an article, or if the article is moving, the dimension in the
    direction the article is traveling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    355+    and 357+, for light interference length measurement.


CLS 356/384
TXT Of width or diameter:

    Subject matter under subclass 372 including means for measuring the width
    or diameter of an object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    355+    and 357+, for light interference width measurement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 382 and 491 for the assorting of a
    filament based on its width or diameter in addition to the making of the
    filament.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 306+ for methods and apparatus which may
    include the measurement of webs or filaments by charged particles;
    subclasses 336.1+ for methods and apparatus using invisible radiation which
    may measure webs or filaments, especially subclasses 358.1+ which may
    measure webs or filaments.


CLS 356/385
TXT Of moving object:

    Subject matter under subclass 384 wherein the object being measured changes
    position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 586 for the
    measurement of the width or the diameter of a moving web or filament of
    finite or indefinite length and the sorting of the finite lengths or the
    subsequently cut indefinite lengths based upon the differences in diameter
    or width of the lengths measured.


CLS 356/386
TXT By scanning or light interruption:

    Subject matter under subclass 385 including means for sequentially moving a
    light beam across the article, or for periodically interrupting a light
    beam directed toward the article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    387,    for width measurement by scanning or light interruption of
    stationary objects.


CLS 356/387
TXT By scanning or light interruption:

    Subject matter under subclass 384 including means for sequentially moving a
    light beam across the article, or for periodically interrupting a light
    beam directed toward the article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 229+ for photocells with light control
    members of the light interrupting type.

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 199+ and 474+ for optical scanning systems
    including flying spot scanners of the cathode-ray type.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    227+ for light control by opaque members movable in the light path.


CLS 356/388
TXT BY CONFIGURATION COMPARISON:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means for comparing a
    given configuration such as an article, record, or scale with a standard
    either visually or by means of a photocell, both the preceding being
    effected by noting the light from the margins or surfaces of the specimens
    and standards to an observation point.

    (1)     Note.  The standard may be only another article of the same type.

    (2)     Note.  In patents where a visual comparison is made of an article
    with a standard, the two images must be superimposed or adjacent each other
    for simultaneously viewing.  If the images are farther apart so that they
    are viewed alternately, the patent is in Class 359, subclass 373; or in
    Class 353 if projection is claimed.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass and those indented thereunder provide for
    comparing of articles where an image of the article and a scale, or the
    image of two articles being compared are viewed.  If only the image of a
    scale is viewed, the patent is classified in Class 359, subclasses 436+; or
    Class 353 if projection is involved.  If only the image of the article is
    viewed, the patent is classified in Class 359, subclass 373, where a
    compound lens system is employed; or in Class 353 if projection of an image
    is present.

    (4)     Note.  Class 33 provides for patents on article testing devices
    where a mechanical pickup or feeler engages or contacts the workpiece even
    though significant optical structure is recited in the claims.

    (5)     Note.  Class 250, especially in subclasses 216+, provides in
    general for photocells together with optical structure in the light path.
    For classification in Class 356, subclass 388 the photocell and optical
    combination must be so related as to or must include structure to give an
    indication of the comparison, such as being within or without the range of
    tolerance when the light beam is passed to the profile of the master or
    article under test.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, especially subclasses 501+ for testing
    devices including a feeler which contacts the article.  See (4) Note above.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, for devices for
    inspecting and sorting articles.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    373 for object comparison compound lens systems; subclasses 436+ for scale
    readers; and subclasses 798+ and 804+ for object viewing structure
    involving lenses generally, i.e., not compound.

    382,    Image Analysis, subclasses 181+ for pattern recognition, for
    example printed circuit recognition by analysis of the image information.


CLS 356/389
TXT With photosensitive film or plate:

    Subject matter under subclass 388 wherein the image of the configuration or
    the standard is photographically recorded for comparison purposes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    396,    Photography, for photographic recording where the invention lies in
    the manner of recording the subject matter.


CLS 356/390
TXT With two images of single article compared:

    Subject matter under subclass 388 including optical elements to permit the
    simultaneous viewing of two portions of a single configuration, such as
    opposite sides of a threaded screw, or two images of the same portion of a
    configuration one usually being inverted, for comparison thereof.


CLS 356/391
TXT With projection on viewing screen:

    Subject matter under subclass 388 including a viewing screen and means to
    project an image thereon of the configuration or the standard.


CLS 356/392
TXT For comparison with master or desired configuration:

    Subject matter under subclass 391 including means to simultaneously view
    and compare the configuration and a standard configuration of the same
    type, or a pattern showing a desired or standard shape, or another
    configuration of the same type.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass a representation of the master is usually a
    part of or adjacent the viewing screen, and an image of the test
    configuration is projected thereon; while in indented subclass 393 below,
    an image of the master and usually also an image of the test configuration
    are projected on the viewing screw.


CLS 356/393
TXT Having master or desired configuration projection:

    Subject matter under subclass 392 including means to project a master or
    desired shape on the viewing screen in addition to an image of the test
    configuration.

    (1)     Note.  In the case of a contact comparison between an article and
    the gauge or master a beam of light may be projected between the gauge or
    master and the test configuration, and an image of the light between the
    gauge and test configuration then projected on a screen is in this subclass
    393.


CLS 356/394
TXT With comparison to master, desired shape, or reference voltage:

    Subject matter under subclass 388 including optical elements to permit the
    simultaneous viewing and comparison by the eye or by a photocell of the
    configuration and (a) a standard configuration of the same type, or (b) a
    pattern or gauge having a desired or standard shape, (c) another
    configuration of the same type, or (d) a reference voltage generated as an
    electrical analog of a desired configuration.

    (1)     Note.  Light may be projected between an article and a gauge and
    the test made by detecting the amount of that light with a photocell.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    372,    for an article compared indirectly with a master as by testing the
    master first and setting up the results to compare the article to.


CLS 356/395
TXT With relatively movable optical grids:

    Subject matter under subclass 388 comprising plural optical grids which are
    relatively movable.

    (1)     Note.  One or more of the grids may be an image of the actual grid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151,    for similar subject matter utilized in measuring angles.

    374,    for mensuration of article displacement by moire' fringe generation.


CLS 356/396
TXT With scale or optical grid displaced relative to remote fiducial mark:

    Subject matter under subclass 388 wherein a scale or optical grid is
    displaced relative to a remote reference point.

    (1)     Note.  The reference point could be for example, a mark on the
    reticle of an eye piece or a photocell.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150+,   or similar subject matter used in measuring angles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 216+ for miscellaneous photocell
    circuits.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    436+ where the fiducial mark is immediately adjacent to the scale and an
    optical element such as a mirror or lens is used to facilitate reading the
    scale.


CLS 356/397
TXT With object being compared and scale superimposed:

    Subject matter under subclass 388 where a scale and the object measured are
    viewed in a superimposed relationship.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    391,    where the object and/or scale are projected on a viewing screen.

    394,    where the object is compared with a master or desired shape.


CLS 356/398
TXT With object being compared and light beam moved relative to each other
    (e.g., scanning):

    Subject matter under subclass 388 including means to scan or sweep a
    configuration with a light beam, or including means to translate or rotate
    a configuration in a light beam to facilitate determination of the size or
    shape of the configuration, usually by means of at least one photocell.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 577+ for
    optical testing in combination with sorting.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 229+ for photocells with light control
    members of the light interrupting type.

    348,    Television, subclass 142 for object measurement with camera and
    object moved relative to each other, subclasses 195+ for mechanical optical
    scanning, subclasses 209+ for flying spot scanning.

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 474+ for optical scanning systems including
    flying spot scanners of the cathode-ray tube.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    227+ for light control by opaque members movable in the light path.


CLS 356/399
TXT BY ALIGNMENT IN LATERAL DIRECTION:

    Subject matter under the class definition where two objects or an object
    and a light beam are laterally aligned by displacing the objects along an
    axis essentially normal to the line connecting them or displacing the
    object and light beam along an axis essentially normal to the light beam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138+,   where the alignment involves rotation about an axis.

    373,    where the amount of displacement is measured.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for such systems involving
    photocells and an optical system and with control of the optical system by
    the photocells.


CLS 356/400
TXT With light detector (e.g., photocell):

    Subject matter under subclass 399 including means responsive to light.


CLS 356/401
TXT With registration indicia (e.g., scale):

    Subject matter under subclass 399 wherein visual marking are used to
    determine the degree of alignment.


CLS 356/402
TXT BY SHADE OR COLOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein light (emanating directly
    from a light source, or transmitted through or reflected from a substance)
    is analyzed for its frequency content by dividing the light into its
    component frequencies or bands of frequencies (which are usually of as
    predetermined character), or by comparison in frequency or intensity with
    standard lights (emanating directly from a light source, or transmitted
    through or reflected from a substance).

    (1)     Note.  The first mentioned light is the light sample or from the
    sample to be tested while the second mentioned light is the standard or
    from the standard.

    (2)     Note.  Search subclass 51 if either infrared or ultraviolet light
    is utilized in the test.

    (3)     Note.  When complementary colors are utilized to produce a
    gray-type visual response they will be classified in the appropriate
    portion of this color section.

    (4)     Note.  Where lamps including photo responsive detectors, per se,
    such as phototubes are tested for color response as an indication of their
    operating characteristics, see Class 324, especially subclasses 24+ for
    space discharge-type tubes and subclass 158.1 for solid-state-type devices.
    However, this Class 356 provides for color determination of light from a
    lamp where the lamp operating characteristics are not involved.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43+,    for optical pyrometers which correlate the color of a light source
    or a heated light emissive substance with the temperature of the light
    source or the heated light emissive substance.

    300+,   for spectroscopes, spectrometers, and spectrophotometers which
    analyze light or substance for color and light intensity which involve the
    use of a dispersing element, such as a prism or diffracting medium, rather
    than a filter or filters to isolate the different colors present in the
    light or substances being tested.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 23.35 and 53+ for the testing of
    effluents of a mixture of gases or liquids such as chromatography tests
    which have contacted a solvent or sorbent component successively and
    selectively to determine the quantity, quality, or identity of a component
    of the effluent.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 82+ for processes of gas
    separation using chromatography.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 101+ for chromatography type
    apparatus for gas separation.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 580-582
    for assorting articles based upon color sensing of articles.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 226 for photo-electric preoptical systems
    dealing with color.

    346,    Recorders, see (3) Note of subclass 74 for the line between Classes
    356 and 346.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 106 and 162 for
    temperature determination by color, other than by thermally emitted
    radiation.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 50+ for analytical apparatus having
    color change indicating means.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 1+ for
    chemical analytical tests involving color changes.


CLS 356/403
TXT With merging colors or patterns (e.g., Maxwell disc):

    Subject matter under subclass 402 which includes a plurality of different
    colored light sources or reflective standards, and means to optically or
    mechanically rotate the light source or the standards so that the optical
    or mechanical rotation causes the sources or standards of different colors
    to blend together to produce a visual sensation of another color, shade, or
    tint so that the merged color can be visual compared simultaneously with an
    unknown light or color sample.

    (1)     Note.  The mechanically rotating standards known as "Maxwell's
    Discs" are included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243,    for standards not provided for elsewhere in this class.

    420,    for colored light standards which utilize filters.

    421+,   for color charts and standards not of the Maxwell disc type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 98+ for the same subject
    matter used for display or educational purposes rather than for testing.


CLS 356/404
TXT Photography:

    Subject matter under subclass 402 involving color photography such as:  the
    examination of the color properties of negatives as for copying purposes,
    the examination of sensitometric colored strips for the purpose of
    controlling the making of prints, all testing subcombinations dealing with
    color printing not provided for elsewhere, and the examination of the color
    characteristics of the scenes to be photographed in color.

    (1)     Note.  All patents dealing with the testing of colored light which
    involve temperature determination and photography will be found under
    pyrometry in subclasses 43+.

    (2)     Note.  Under this section are visual and photoelectric reflection
    and transmission tests of colored prints or negatives to correct the color
    balance of one or more colors in the negative, and the tests may be
    sequentially or simultaneously performed when more than one test is
    performed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43+,    for optical pyrometers.  See also (1) Note above.

    443+,   for light transmission or absorption of photographic film, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, subclasses 29 and 33 for recorders which are designed
    for use with color negative tests which have no specific optical test
    structure recited in the claim.

    355,    Photocopying, subclasses 32+ for color projection printers which
    include plural color transmission examination of negatives for the purpose
    of color balancing a projection type print of the tested color negative;
    and subclasses 78+ for color printers of the contact type which measure the
    intensity of a plurality of different colors transmitted through a negative
    in addition to the contact printing structure.

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 500+, particularly subclasses 518+ and 527
    for color correction systems as applied to facsimile devices and for
    facsimile type.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    885+ for color filters, per se, which are used for photographic purposes.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 31+ for electrophotographic devices
    using optical measurement and test apparatus for diagnostic testing.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, appropriate subclasses for radiation imagery involving color.


CLS 356/405
TXT Tristimulus examination:

    Subject matter under subclass 402 wherein there are devices which examine
    light, per se, or the light reflected from or transmitted through
    substances, and which include means to examine the light or the light
    modified by reflection or transmission from the substances, simultaneously
    or sequentially for hue, saturation, and intensity as based upon the
    response of the human eye.

    (1)     Note.  The devices may be of the visual or the photosensitive type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300,    for devices which examine a substance for tristimulus values where
    a dispersing element is used rather than color filters to construct the
    tristimulus curves.

    406,    for devices which examine light or substances reflectively or
    transmissively for at least three different colors but not for the
    tristimulus values.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 577+ for
    apparatus which physically separates one substance from another based upon
    the tristimulus factors of light.

    235,    Registers, subclasses 61 and 184 for devices which utilize the
    tristimulus factors obtained in the devices of this subclass 405 to obtain
    mechanically and electrically the analogue computations necessary to
    utilize the integrated responses of the tristimulus values.


CLS 356/406
TXT Trichromatic examination:

    Subject matter under subclass 402 wherein there is apparatus to examine
    sequentially or simultaneously for at least three colors of light either
    directly or when reflected from or transmitted through a substance to be
    tested.

    (1)     Note.  The devices may be of the visual or the photosensitive type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300+,   for apparatus which may examine light emitted from substances or
    the absorption of light by substances or the examination of light, per se,
    by spectroscopes, spectrometers, or spectrophotometer which utilize
    monochromators which permit the entire visual spectrum of light to be used
    to examine substances or to examine light for any or all of the colors
    which may be inherent in the light examined.

    405,    for test structure similar to that used here but differing only in
    the type of filters used to examine the light or the substances.

    407,    for apparatus wherein the light from a substance or light itself is
    examined at the same time for two different colors.

    419,    for similar subject matter where the disclosure or the claims do
    not examine light or substances for at least three distinct colors, but use
    test structure similar to that found here and in subclass 405.


CLS 356/407
TXT With sample responsive to plural colors applied simultaneously:

    Subject matter under subclass 402 which includes means to simultaneously
    transmit or reflect at least two different colored bands or frequencies of
    light, through or from the sample, means to filter the modified light into
    two different bands of light, and detector and indicating means responsive
    to the light modified by the sample and after filtering to note the
    intensity of the different bands of light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for plural color responsive optical pyrometers including
    photographic and metallurgical types.

    300,    for spectroscopic examination of apparatus which uses a dispersing
    means rather than a filter to detect or examine the various bands of light.

    366+,   for devices which use an analyzer and a polarizer in the light path
    of a device testing light or a substance optically.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, particularly
    subclass 582 for the physical separation of articles based on a color test,
    which involves at least two different colors.

    235,    Registers, subclasses 61+ and 150+ for apparatus responsive to a
    color test which performs a mathematical function to indicate a quantity
    correlated to the color test.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 201.1+, 206+, and 226 for plural
    photosensitive color circuits where no support for a sample is included in
    the claims or where no indicator for the light used in the test is included
    in the claims.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    885+ for colored filters.


CLS 356/408
TXT With sequential comparison of sample and standard:

    Subject matter under subclass 402 wherein there is a light source and
    optical means to produce a beam or beams of visible light which may be
    monochromatic; (a) means to hold, move, and position sequentially either at
    least two samples or a sample and a standard into the path of the beam, or
    (b) means to cause the beam or beams to sweep or switch between fixed
    samples and standards; and electrical detecting and indicating means to
    note the light transmitted through or reflected from the samples and
    standards.


CLS 356/409
TXT Fluid color transmission examination:

    Subject matter under subclass 402 wherein a fluid substance, a solute in a
    solvent, or a miscible liquid is examined by a transmissive light test
    (quantitatively or qualitatively) for the purpose of noting color,
    different shades or tints of colors, or the concentration of a solute in a
    solvent.

    (1)     Note.  Patents dealing with chromatography include a mass or masses
    of chemically absorptive material supported in a transparent conduit so
    that a confined flow of liquid or gaseous material through the chemically
    absorptive material may produce a selective colored band or bands held in
    layers by absorptive phenomena.  The layers and their interfaces may be
    examined visually or by radiation sensitive instruments to furnish
    qualitative determinations with respect to the chemical composition of the
    material analyzed.  Those patents with significant claimed subject matter
    involving an optical color test following the absorption of a constituent
    of a liquid or gaseous material are included as originals in this schedule.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 23.35 and 53.01+ for the methods
    and apparatus for examining the band or bands of the chromatography column
    to determine the quantity, quality, or the substances of the band or bands
    in a gas or liquid chromatography test.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 82+ for processes of gas
    separation using chromatography.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 101+ for chromatography type
    apparatus for gas separation.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 50+ for analytical apparatus
    involving chromatography or a colorimeter wherein a reactive reagent is
    used to develop color.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, for processes
    involving the combination of a gas or liquid chromatography test with a
    colorimetry test of the colored band or bands from the chromatography
    column where a chemically reactive reagent is necessary to develop the
    color for the colorimetry test.


CLS 356/410
TXT Of flowing liquids:

    Subject matter under subclass 409 including apparatus which forms part of a
    liquid circulation system which permits constant or intermittent flow of
    the liquid being examined, and a support for the liquid contained, and
    which is constructed to allow light to pass through the contained liquid
    for a visual or photosensitive examination.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are a comparison of a test fluid with a
    light standard or with a standard of the same fluid, or a comparison of a
    voltage which is the result of the detected light transmitted through the
    fluid tested with a voltage level used as a standard as in a bridge circuit
    in null type recording and indicating instruments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for infrared energy or filters utilized in the test circuitry.

    246,    for flow cells, per se.

    319+,   for spectrophotometers which utilize a dispersing element to
    produce the light radiation utilized in the same type of selective
    absorption test.

    436+,   for light transmission of liquids where no monochromatic light is
    involved in the test.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 3 and 93 for methods and apparatus for
    the control of flowing fluids which involve a color test of this Class 356.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 356 and 357 for the detection or
    measurement of invisible radiation used to test fluent material; subclasses
    564+ for fluent material in the optical path and a photocell circuit; and
    subclasses 573+ for the detection of a fluent material in the optical path.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 603+ for electrical
    condition responsive systems responsive to fluent material which utilize an
    electrical signalling device such as a light or bell rather than a meter or
    a recorder.

    346,    Recorders, particularly subclasses 31-33 for recorders operated by
    follow-up or rebalancing systems alone or in combination with a nominal
    optical test where the novelty alone is in the recorder, per se.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 50+ for continuous flowing fluid
    apparatus involving a color test and in which a chemical reaction occurs.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 1+ for
    processes involving continuous flowing fluid systems which include a color
    test wherein a chemical reaction occurs.


CLS 356/411
TXT With plural light detectors (e.g., photocells):

    Subject matter under subclass 410 including more than one photosensitive
    device.


CLS 356/412
TXT With ionic determination:

    Subject matter under subclass 409 including an unknown solution and one or
    more standards (which may be a transmissive liquid or solid or a reflective
    standard or any combination thereof) for the simultaneous comparison of the
    unknown solution with the standard or standards for similar color or slight
    differences in the same color which color standard or standards are
    correlated to ionic conditions existing in the solution examined.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this group are apparatus which involves the
    finding of the pH value of solutions in terms of hydroxyl or hydrogen ion
    concentration, and titration apparatus in which no reagent is recited in
    the claims; and also included are other tests which involve the correlation
    of the tint or shade of a color with respect to the color of the standard
    solution in which the ion content is known.

    (2)     Note.  The disclosure of the tests recited in (1) Note above is
    sufficient for placement in this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  Included are optical tests to determine the concentration of
    solute in solvents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    414,    for filters which include solid and liquid filters and standards of
    the transmissive type where no ionic analysis is involved and no
    concentration of the solute and solvent is involved.

    416+,   for transmissive filters involved in a comparison test of gases or
    solid material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 50+ for chemical apparatus having
    means for performing color tests involving pH and titrations which claim
    the reagents, including the indicators, which chemically react in the tests.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 1+ for
    chemical test processes which include color tests involving pH and
    titrations which claim the reagents, including the indicators, which
    chemically react in these tests.


CLS 356/413
TXT With variable light path length:

    Subject matter under subclass 409 wherein the length of the light path
    through the liquid may be varied, as by inserting a light-transmitting
    member of constant light-transmitting length into the liquid to a desired
    depth and passing light through the liquid and the light-transmitting
    member in series.

    (1)     Note.  Scales correlated with the change in the amount of the
    liquid in the light path are present in the disclosed device but are not
    always included in the claims.

    (2)     Note.  Subcombinations of the devices are classified herein when
    they are not provided for elsewhere.

    (3)     Note.  Included in this subclass are colorimeters of the "Duboscq"
    type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    441+,   for turbidity measurements which may utilize the same structure as
    found in 413.


CLS 356/414
TXT With color transmitting filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 409 including a filter element in the visible
    range positioned in the light transmission path of visual and
    photosensitive testing apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  Included in the group are visual extinction type, sequential
    and simultaneous comparison tests involving at least one known color
    standard and one unknown liquid.  The standard may be a colored light
    source or light source plus a colored light transmissive filter.

    (2)     Note.  An infrared filter for the purpose of transmitting infrared
    or for preventing the heat rays of a light source from entering the liquid
    tested is not a filter under the definition of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for liquid colorimeters which include an infrared filter in the
    test or for the purpose of removing heat radiation from affecting the test
    results.  See (2) Note above.

    416+,   for color-transmitting filters used in measuring shade or color,
    per se.

    432+,   for light transmission tests where no color or concentration of a
    solute in a solvent is involved in the optical test.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 211 for circuitry having photocells with
    inherent color sensitivity; subclass 226 for optical or prephotocell
    systems which include filters within the visible spectrum.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    577+ for interference type filters; and subclasses 885+ for filters
    generally which may be used to produce monochromatic bands of radiation
    within the visible spectrum.


CLS 356/415
TXT Including liquid filter comparison:

    Subject matter under subclass 414 which includes at least two liquid light
    transmissive containers of the same type, the liquid in all of the
    containers differing only in shade or tint from each other, and support
    means for the containers to permit the simultaneous viewing of all the
    contained liquids axially or laterally of the containers.

    (1)     Note.  Here the filters are the contained liquids which are
    standards of varying tint or shade of the unknown color or the filters are
    formed of a standard solution such as distilled water which is used in
    conjunction with colored transmissive solid filters which form various
    colors, tints, or shades.  One of the liquids may be the tested colored
    solution.


CLS 356/416
TXT With color transmitting filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 402 wherein a light filter having a
    particular light transmission characteristic to pass light of a particular
    color is disposed in the light path of the testing device.

    (1)     Note.  The filter may be in the light path between the sample and
    the light source or between the sample and the viewing position path.

    (2)     Note.  Included are visual devices of the extinction type, and of
    the equal intensity comparison type involving colored light, per se, or
    involving colored light reflected from or transmitted through a substance.

    (3)     Note.  Comparison types utilizing colored light standards are
    placed here rather than in subclass 190.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43+,    for optical pyrometers which may utilize colored light filters to
    determine the temperature of a light emissive source.

    213,    for photometers which measure the intensity of light without regard
    to the frequencies of light present in the light tested.

    300+,   for spectroscopes, spectrometers, and spectrophotometers which
    utilize a dispersing element such as a prism or a diffraction grating
    rather than a filter to separate collimated light into bands of the various
    colors present in the light.

    414+,   for color-transmitting filters used in the examination of color
    transmission by fluids.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 226 for prephotocell optical systems which
    may utilize a visible colored light filter in the system where no indicator
    is claimed or disclosed and no support for object tested is included in the
    claims.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    885+ for filters, per se.


CLS 356/417
TXT Included with sample excitation:

    Subject matter under subclass 416 including a flame producer or an
    electrical excitation means wherein a specimen is burned or excited to
    produce visible radiation for analysis by light intensity or illumination
    measurement means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213+,   for photometers, per se.

    315,    for flame spectroscopy.


CLS 356/418
TXT Including rotating sequential filters:

    Subject matter under subclass 416 wherein there are rotating sequential
    filters positioned in the light path to rotate during the test.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217,    for modulating photometers for the examination of the intensity of
    light.

    434,    for light transmission tests of the sequential type which may
    involve mechanical, electrical, or electro-optical modulating means, and
    where only the intensity of the light transmitted through a substance is
    involved.

    447,    for light reflection tests which include modulation of the
    reflected light from a substance where only the intensity of the reflected
    light is involved.


CLS 356/419
TXT Including multicolor filters:

    Subject matter under subclass 416 wherein more than one filter is provided
    for the purpose of additively using more than one filter at the same time
    to produce a desired tint or shade for the purpose of comparing this
    produced tint or shade with an unknown color, or wherein a plurality of
    filters are provided, one of which is available at a time, as for the
    purpose of selecting only one visible band of radiation at a time from the
    light reflected from or transmitted through the sample.

    (1)     Note.  This sub will take wedge-shaped filters which pass different
    wavelengths.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for optical pyrometers which measure the temperature of a light
    emissive object by means of filters.

    51,     for optical tests which use infrared or ultraviolet radiation in
    the claimed test.

    319+,   for absorption spectrophotometers which utilize a dispersing member
    such as a prism or a diffraction grating rather than a filter to produce a
    plurality of narrow bands of visible radiation before or after radiation is
    reflected from or transmitted through a substance.

    404,    for photographic color test devices which may use a plurality of
    filters additively or sequentially for copying purposes such as color
    correction, colored negative examination, and colored light meters.
    However, see the pyrometric subclasses 43+ of this class where the claims
    or disclosure indicate the light reading to be in terms of temperature.

    405,    for tristimulus apparatus which utilize three filters, sequentially
    or simultaneously, corresponding to the stimulus received by the human eye.

    406,    for apparatus using three or more colored filters, sequentially,
    which is capable of trichromatic examination of light or material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 655+ for apparatus which may use a plurality
    of filters to adjust the color balance in color television systems.

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclasses
    216+ and 233+ for filters which are selectively interposed in the line of
    vision.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclass 102 for color comparison
    charts which utilize filters to show the effect of the addition of various
    colors on light.


CLS 356/420
TXT Included with colored light sources:

    Subject matter under subclass 416 including devices to produce colored
    light standards which utilize a filter to provide colored light for test
    purposes as opposed to general illumination purposes.

    (1)     Note.  Light standards which utilize a dispersing device such as a
    prism or a diffraction grating along with a slit to form the various
    monochromatic light source are placed in the monochromator subclass 331.

    (2)     Note.  Where a colored light standard capable of use as a Class 362
    general illumination device is claimed in combination with a support for a
    substance to be examined by this light standard, the original
    classification is in subclass 414.

    (3)     Note.  A colored light or its subcombinations capable of use as a
    test light standard which cannot be distinguished structurally as a colored
    general illumination device is classified in Class 362, rather than in
    Class 356.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    291+ for electron beam devices which vary the angle that the beam hits a
    diffraction surface to produce colored and black and white light producing
    systems.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 98+ for colored light
    projectors and the mixing of colored light when the claims state the
    purpose of these devices is for educational or artistic purposes.


CLS 356/421
TXT With reflective multicolor chart or standard:

    Subject matter under subclass 402 including one or a plurality of surfaces
    which reflect different colors or tints of a color for comparison with the
    color of the samples to be tested.

    (1)     Note.  The surface may be a liquid. The surfaces of the standard
    need not be of the same material as the sample to be tested.

    (2)     Note.  This group of subclasses includes both the chart and
    standards, per se, as defined in the above definition as well as color
    testing devices incorporating such charts or standards and not classifiable
    above.

    (3)     Note.  The standards and the comparative devices of this group are
    the type wherein a comparison of known and unknown is made simultaneously
    and may be of manipulative or hand held visual type; but these subclasses
    also provided for the photoelectric type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43+,    for reflective standards where color is involved to determine the
    temperature of a heated object or emissive source.

    243,    for optical standards generally as where color is not involved.

    244+,   for supports for liquid or solid standards generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 1 for fishing
    implements which utilize color to test for the most effective colored lure
    for the existing water conditions.


CLS 356/422
TXT Plate:

    Subject matter under subclass 421 wherein the surfaces are formed as flat,
    platelike colored structures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229,    for the comparison of light intensities where no color is involved
    and where the unknown light is compared with flat, platelike structures
    forming light reflecting standards.

    243,    for visual standards other than the colored type.

    433+,   for the comparison of light transmitted through an unknown
    substance with light reflective standard plates where color is not involved.

    448,    for the comparison of light reflected from an unknown substance
    with light reflective standard plates where color is not involved.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 61 for analytical apparatus which may
    be in the form of kits which utilize flat, platelike colored standards as a
    basis for a visual or photoelectric comparison with a colored substance
    reactively produced in order to determine the presence of a chemical
    element, anion, or cation.


CLS 356/423
TXT Disk:

    Subject matter under subclass 422 wherein the surfaces are disks or sectors
    which form disks.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243,    for reflective standards which do not involve color testing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 98+ for multicolor charts
    which may be in the form of a disc, which are used for display and
    instruction purposes, and which may also be used as a standard for the
    comparison of an unknown color with the colors and their tints and shades
    formed in or on the disc.


CLS 356/424
TXT Drum or endless tape:

    Subject matter under subclass 421 wherein the surfaces are in the form of a
    endless member such as a tape or a drum.


CLS 356/425
TXT With color determination by light intensity comparison:

    Subject matter under subclass 402 wherein the color comparison of two
    masses is made by comparing the intensity of the light from the two masses
    (either transmitted or reflected).

    (1)     Note.  This type of comparison has been designated in the
    literature as heterochromatic photometry.  It is usually restricted to
    comparing different shades or tints of the same color.  Usually filters are
    not used in color determination of this type.

    (2)     Note.  Subclasses 432+ and 445+ provide for the reflection and
    transmissive testing of materials by noting the intensity of the reflected
    or transmitted light.  The distinction between subclass 425 and subclasses
    432+ and 445+ is that the articles examined in subclass 425 are of the same
    color and differ only in tint or shade from one another, while subclasses
    432+ and 445+ have no color involved at all.

    (3)     Note.  Where a liquid is tested for concentration of a solute in a
    solvent and the comparison is made with a light intensity source and where
    no color is involved at all and where the liquid is claimed, the original
    patent is placed under the appropriate subclasses of 409+ and is
    cross-referenced in 422.

    (4)     Note.  Where a plurality of reflective colored standards are
    claimed in the comparison of a gaseous or solid colored substance and the
    comparison is noted visually or photoelectrically without the inclusion of
    filters, the original is classified under subclass 421 and cross-referenced
    in subclass 425.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    409+,   for analyzing chemical solutions by comparing colors on the basis
    of intensity alone.  See (3) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, particularly
    subclass 581, where articles are physically separated on the basis of color
    by using only a light intensity test.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 214 for circuits responsive to
    photosensitive devices which do not claim a support for articles examined
    for color by a light intensity test or do not claim an indicator.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 251+ for light projectors which include a
    source of illumination together with means to modify the direction of the
    light from the source and structure to house the light arrangement.


CLS 356/426
TXT BY INSPECTION WITH AGITATION OR ROTATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein there is apparatus to
    inspect articles of manufacture, including containers and contained fluids
    for foreign particles such as dirt, and which includes means to support and
    rotate, agitate, or otherwise move the containers or the fluid contents to
    cause motion of the article or of the particles in the fluid contents as
    part of the test procedure and not as a condition of transporting the
    article to and from the test location; and means to illuminate the article
    so that the illumination may be transmitted through the articles,
    containers or contained fluid or reflected from the article or container,
    or transmitted around portions of an article for the purpose of testing for
    defects, blemishes, flaws or any other type of imperfection.

    (1)     Note.  Conveyors may be utilized to bring the articles to and
    beyond the test position and may be part of the test combination claimed
    where no specific class provides for the combination.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237+,   for apparatus which visually inspects materials or articles for
    imperfections.


CLS 356/427
TXT Of container contents:

    Subject matter under subclass 426 wherein the supported and rotated or
    agitated articles are containers holding fluids, and the inspection is
    directed to the fluid itself, the inspection of the container being
    incidental.

    (1)     Note.  Subclasses 337+ deal with fluids which have uniformly
    entrained within them particles which cause scattering when tested by a
    directed beam of light transmitted through the fluid.  Here the particles
    entrained do not create a uniform condition, but a localized undesired
    imperfection within the encapsulated or contained fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 61.41+ for the testing of
    suspensions of solids in liquids for determining the ratio of solid and
    like foreign matters to the liquid.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 564+ for fluent material in the optical
    path and a photocell circuit; and subclasses 573+ for the detection of a
    fluent material in the optical path.


CLS 356/428
TXT Of containers:

    Subject matter under subclass 426 wherein the article is a container or
    receptacle which is tested by means of light transmitted through or
    reflected from the container or receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for the transmission or reflective testing of containers for flaws
    or dirt which uses ultraviolet or infrared radiation in addition to visible
    light.

    237,    for visual and photoelectric examination of containers for flaws or
    dirt wherein no rotation of the container is involved.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 61.41+ for sediment or foreign
    content testing where the ratio or amount of the sediment or the foreign
    content to the liquid would be determined.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 524+ for
    the testing of containers for flaws by the use of visible light and the
    automatic rejection of the flawed containers as a result of this test.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 224 for optical or prephotocell systems
    which include a support for an article to be tested and structure to
    relatively move the light ray and the article during the test; subclasses
    336.1+ for methods and apparatus having an electric signalling device
    responsive to invisible radiation for testing articles; and subclasses
    453.11+ for supports for irradiated objects.


CLS 356/429
TXT BY MONITORING OF WEBS OR THREAD:

    Subject matter under the class definition for inspecting or testing webs or
    threads of material including apparatus to support and transport the web
    under, over, or through an inspection station; a light source with optical
    means (which may include flying spot scanners) to direct the light through,
    around, or reflective from the web or thread; visual and photoelectric
    means (including comparator types) to detect changes in the light intensity
    produced by the light coacting with the web or thread; and with the
    photoelectric alternative an indicator responsive to the photoelectric
    means to not quantitatively or qualitatively variations in optical
    properties or condition.

    (1)     Note.  When an optical test is claimed on a web or thread including
    an indicator, qualitative or quantitative, actuated in response to the
    test, classification is here rather than in Class 250, subclasses 548 and
    559.01+.

    (2)     Note.  When the claims include a light source for the test, a
    support for the material tested, and a photosensitive detector without the
    indicator classification is in this Class 356 as opposed to Class 250.

    (3)     Note.  The claimed terms "reject means", "reject mechanism", or
    "indicator means" do not necessarily qualify as an indication means for
    this class as these terms could be a relay mechanism or other switch
    mechanism which is not a qualitative or quantitative signalling means for
    this class.  A single disclosure to an indicator, qualitative or
    quantitative with the term reject means claimed will be classified in this
    subclass 429 provided its indicator is not part of a more comprehensive
    arrangement classified elsewhere.  For example, see Class 209.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242,    for the counting of threads in woven fabrics where the fabric is
    stationary.

    384+,   for the determination of the width or diameter of a web or filament.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 159+ for the testing or
    inspection of sheet material, including woven fabric materials where no
    optical tests, per se, are performed.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 198 and 252+ for
    process and apparatus wherein an optical test may be utilized to control a
    paper making or fiber liberation process.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 3 and 15+
    for processes and apparatus which utilize optical tests to laterally
    position a moving web.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 439+ for ray energy devices combined
    with a support for an article; subclasses 361+ for testing articles by
    using fluorescent or phosphorescent radiation; subclasses 336+ for the
    testing of articles by invisible radiations; subclasses 548, 559, and 571
    for apparatus to significantly illuminate weblike material and to detect
    the illumination as modified by the weblike material; subclasses 229+ for
    adjustable light masking devices; and subclass 237 where the light masking
    devices are not adjustable. See also (1) and (2) Notes above.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 227+ and 259+ for devices
    which are responsive to visible light tests to denote and indicate, by
    means of an electrically operated bell or light, the condition of a web,
    including motion picture film.

    346,    Recorders, subclass 33 for nominal optical test devices which
    operate a recorder of the Class 346 type where there is novelty in the
    recorder, per se.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 105+ for continuously moving
    films with optical viewers involving a periodic displacement of the optical
    axis for the purpose of inspecting the films, including flaw detection.

    396,    Photography,  subclasses 567+ for fluid-treating apparatus where a
    light test is made to determine the value of light contrast of the exposed
    film to regulate the apparatus.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, process involving exposure of a radiation imagery receiver.


CLS 356/430
TXT For flaws or imperfections:

    Subject matter under subclass 429 wherein the web or thread is tested for
    flaws or imperfections.

    (1)     Note.  The test for flaws or imperfections is usually manifested by
    a local variation in an optical characteristic of the material which stands
    out in contrast with the general or normal optical characteristics. This
    test is in contrast with the testing for the general reflecting or
    transmission properties of the web, and which is provided for in the
    generic subclass 429.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238,    for cloth inspection for flaws where the cloth is stationary.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 548 and 559.01+ for web, strand, or
    records in the optical path where the light responsive element is not
    combined with an indicator; and subclass 237 for diaphragms, masks, or
    gratings combined with a photocell.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    894+ for a light mask, per se, where there is not intentional deviation of
    the light as by refraction or diffraction.


CLS 356/431
TXT Including transverse scanning:

    Subject matter under subclass 430 including means for scanning in a
    direction other than the line of travel of a moving web or thread.


CLS 356/432
TXT FOR LIGHT TRANSMISSION OR ABSORPTION:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein visible radiation is
    passed directly or with internal reflection through solid, liquid, or
    gaseous substances or any mixture thereof including coated solids, and
    detected visually or photoelectrically after it has passed through the
    substance for the purpose of determining the intensity, the change of
    intensity, the extinction of the radiation, or the outline of the radiation
    source or image.

    (1)     Note.  As between this Class 356 and Class 250, the claimed
    combination of a light source, a support for a substance to be tested by a
    transmission test, and a photosensitive detector with or without indicating
    structure is classified in this Class 356 providing there is the disclosure
    of an indicator responsive to the detector not provided for elsewhere.  If
    an indicator of the quantitative type such as a meter is present in the
    claimed combination, classification is in Class 356 regardless of the
    claiming of the support.

    (2)     Note.  The patents claiming a light source with the transmission of
    this light through a substance and detected (usually quantitatively) are in
    subclasses 432+.  If no light source is claimed and only the light
    intensity of a specific location or locations is involved and not the
    amount of light attenuated in the passage of the light through a medium or
    a substance, or only the intensity or a light source is desired without
    regard to the attenuation of the light in its passage through a medium, see
    subclasses 213+ on photometry.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213+,   for photometers.  See also (2) Note above.

    402+,   for colorimetry.

    445+,   for light reflection measuring and testing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 588 for
    automatically assorting articles by light transmission inspection.

    250,    Radiant Energy, especially subclasses 218 and 219 for photocell
    systems with articles or material in the optical path.  See also (1) Note
    above.


CLS 356/433
TXT By comparison:

    Subject matter under subclass 432 wherein light is passed through a
    specimen to be tested and compared in intensity with some other light,
    whose intensity is known or may be determined.

    (1)     Note.  The light may be in beam form and the standard light may
    also be passed through a light-modifying medium.  The specimen and standard
    light may emanate from a common source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46+,    for optical pyrometers with incandescent standards.

    229+,   for visual comparison photometers.

    402+,   for shade or color comparison.

    443+,   for film density determination involving comparison.


CLS 356/434
TXT Photoelectric (e.g., sequential viewing):

    Subject matter under subclass 433 including a photosensitive device which
    is responsive to the light passing through the specimen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218+,   for photoelectric photometers of the comparator type.

    402+,   for colorimeters of the photoelectric comparator type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 216+ for photocell circuits of the
    comparator type with optical or prephotocell systems; and subclasses 204+
    for control of the light used by the system directly or indirectly as by
    controlling the optical elements in the light path to the photocell
    detector.


CLS 356/435
TXT With plural detectors (e.g., simultaneous viewing):

    Subject matter under subclass 434 including a plurality of photodetectors,
    usually one being stimulated by the light from the specimen and the other
    being stimulated by the standard light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222,    for photometers with plural detectors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 208+ for plural photocell controlled
    circuits; and subclass 578 for optical or prephotocell systems containing
    plural photocells.


CLS 356/436
TXT Of fluent material:

    Subject matter under subclass 432 wherein visible radiation is detected
    after passing through a fluid substance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246,    for fluid containers, per se, peculiar to testing.

    335+,   for determining the size of the particles or the size and the
    number of the particles present in a turbid solution.

    337+,   for particle light scattering wherein the light detected is that
    reflected from the particles in the turbid suspension.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 64.41+ for the testing of the
    settling rate of a liquid suspension of solids.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 564+ for circuits for evaluating a
    fluent material; and subclasses 573+ for photocell detection of fluent
    material in an optical path.


CLS 356/437
TXT Gas:

    Subject matter under subclass 436 wherein the fluent material is a gaseous
    substance.


CLS 356/438
TXT Exhaust, dust or smoke:

    Subject matter under subclass 437 wherein there is a gas which includes
    entrained solid particles of dust or smoke.

    (1)     Note.  Both visual and photoelectric detection devices of the
    static and the flowing type are here.

    (2)     Note.  For light transmission tests involving chemical
    concentration of gases which do not contain particulate material, see the
    colorimeters in subclasses 402+ above.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass only provides for testing the transmission
    characteristic of a gas with particles of dust or smoke uniformly
    distributed therethrough.  For testing the transmission characteristic of
    gases, per se, see subclasses 402+ where color is involved, or subclass 437
    above.

    (4)     Note.  Included are the apparatus to determine the particle count
    in gases by means of light transmitted through the particle-containing gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36+,    for the preparation of sample gases which may include entrained
    moisture and/or particles such as "condensation nuclei".

    246,    for fluid containers, per se.

    337+,   for the detection of light scattered by the entrained particles or
    moisture in a flowing or static gas.

    441+,   for liquid particle suspension testing.


CLS 356/439
TXT Contained:

    Subject matter under subclass 438 wherein there is structure to enclose, at
    least partially, a gas which has entrained dust or smoke particles.


CLS 356/440
TXT With significant sample holder or supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 436 including particular structural means to
    constrain, contain, move, or guide fluent material in the light beam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239+,   for the detection of flaws or imperfections in motionless
    containers by passing light therethrough.

    246,    for sample holders for fluids, per se, peculiar to testing.

    428,    for the inspection of containers in motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 864.91 for strip cups.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, appropriate subclasses or
    receptacles of general use which are not restricted to use in optical
    testing of materials.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 428+ for fluent material containers,
    supports, or transfer means for subjecting the material to radiation; and
    subclass 576 for sample holders or supply means of fluent material in an
    optical path.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 99+ for laboratory apparatus
    elements which may include fluid containers.



            An alternative electronic search of U.S. patents based upon a
    modification of the European Patent Office Classification (ECLA) System for
    certain subject matter in this subclass may also be found in Class 422
    Cross-Reference Art Collections 908 - 948. (There are no definitions
    associated with these Cross-Reference Art Collections. The most available
    disclosure as to the types of documents contained herein is given in any
    notes associated with the titles.)


CLS 356/441
TXT Having particles suspended in liquid:

    Subject matter under subclass 436 including in the light path, liquid
    particle suspensions, such as turbid or coloidal suspensions, paint, or
    milk; and including a detector and indicator of the transmitted radiation
    through the liquid which is correlated to the turbidity of the solution or
    the number of the particles causing the turbidity.

    (1)     Note.  Both static and through-flow type test devices are included.

    (2)     Note.  In visual turbidity devices of the static and extinction
    type, scales are associated with the devices to note the depth at which the
    extinction of light occurs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for determining characteristics of blood particles present in a
    sample.

    246,    for fluid containers, per se, peculiar to testing.

    335+,   for determining the size of the particles or the size and the
    number of the particles present in a turbid solution.

    337+,   for particle light scattering wherein the light detected is that
    reflected from the particles in the turbid suspension.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 64.66 for the testing of the
    settling rate of a liquid suspension of solids.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 564+ for circuits for evaluating a
    fluent material; and subclasses 573+ for photocell detection of fluent
    material in an optical path.


CLS 356/442
TXT With light detector:

    Subject matter under subclass 441 including photosensitive means responsive
    to light passing through the fluent material.


CLS 356/443
TXT Of photographic film:

    Subject matter under subclass 432 wherein structure is provided to transmit
    light through a sheet, strip, or other translucent solid medium of a
    photographic nature, with provision to position the medium so that the
    light is transmitted either through all or selected portions of the medium,
    together with means to visually or photoelectrically determine the
    intensity of the transmitted light.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are photoelectric apparatus and
    visual apparatus which permit the visual comparison of the intensity of the
    light transmitted through a photographic negative with brightness standards
    or with light sources whose intensity can be varied in a calibrated manner
    by means of variable apertures or light attenuating mediums or with
    variable light sources.

    (2)     Note.  For photographic enlargers of the light projection type, see
    Class 355, Photocopying.  The apparatus of these subclasses 443+ when
    claimed in combination with the structure of such an enlarger or when
    claimed as controlling the light of such an enlarger is classified in Class
    355, Photocopying, subclasses 67+.

    (3)     Note.  For printers of the contact type, see Class 355,
    Photocopying, subclasses 78+; and for processes of this type which involve
    the exposure of a visible light sensitive medium or use of developed
    negative, see Class 430, Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process,
    Composition, or Product Thereof.  If as claimed the apparatus of subclasses
    443+ is combined with a contact-type printer apparatus, or controls the
    exposing light of a contact printer, classification is in Class 396.  For
    methods which involve the comparison of optical densities of the type found
    in subclasses 443+ in combination with an exposure of a visible light
    sensitive film, see particularly Class 96, subclasses 27+.

    (4)     Note.  The photometers which analyze the spectrographs such as
    formed by the instruments of subclasses 302+ of this class are classified
    in these subclasses 443+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for instruments responsive to infrared or ultraviolet and visible
    radiation being transmitted through a translucent solid medium in
    combination with means to measure the intensity of the light transmitted
    through the medium.

    220,    for photoelectric apparatus to measure logarithmically the
    intensity of light at some specific location.

    243,    for light density standards, per se.

    244,    for specimen or standard supports for passing light through a solid.

    404,    for examination of the color properties of photographic negatives.

    405,    for photographic printing apparatus of the color type which
    includes color correction whereby light of at least three different colors
    is transmitted through a developed negative and the intensities of the
    various colors necessary to make a duplicate of the negative.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    355,    Photocopying, subclasses 67+ for photographic enlargers of the
    projection type with apparatus to measure the minimum and maximum optical
    densities of the developed negative from which copies are to be made.  See
    also (2) Note above and subclasses 78+ for printers of the contact type.
    See (3) Note above.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 213+ for actinometer with camera, and
    subclass 563 for making of optical wedges by exposing photographic material.


CLS 356/444
TXT With scanning, sweeping, or moving detector over film:

    Subject matter under subclass 443 wherein directed light transmitted
    through the sheet, strip, or other translucent solid medium is moved in a
    predetermined manner either by electronic means or by mechanically moving
    optical means; or wherein the sheet, strip, or other solid medium is moved
    past the light source; or wherein the photoelectric means is moved
    selectively about the surface of the film sheet, strip, or medium in order
    to obtain the intensity of the light transmitted at a plurality of
    locations through the film sheet, strip, or other solid medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    386     and 387, for width detection and measurement of indeterminate
    length webs where one or a plurality of detection units are involved, and
    where mechanical or electronic motivated light beams may be transmitted
    through or reflected from a solid medium into the detection units.

    429+,   for apparatus which monitors moving webs of the translucent,
    transparent, or opaque type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 555+ and 566+ for photoelectric
    apparatus to detect records such as photographic film; and subclasses
    336.1+, especially subclasses 359.1 and 360.1, for methods and apparatus to
    inspect relatively moving objects with respect to invisible radiant energy
    with a radiation responsive electric signalling device.

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 474+ and 500+ for optical devices of the
    facsimile type which utilize flying spot scanner light beams for
    transmission through a film or films for the purpose of detecting the
    optical density for reproducing a facsimile type picture.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 567+ for fluid-treating apparatus which
    includes a photocell for performing an optical density check on the film
    being processed, and means for controlling the apparatus.


CLS 356/445
TXT OF LIGHT REFLECTION (E.G., GLASS):

    Subject matter under the class definition which includes either a material
    or a sample designed to be placed next to or upon a material or sample to
    be examined on the basis of reflected light intensity; and which includes
    either light generating and optical means to direct the generated light, or
    optical means to direct natural light onto the material or sample to be
    examined, so that the light is reflected therefrom for examination by
    visual or photosensitive means to indicate or record, when so desired, the
    intensity or differences of intensity of the reflected light.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter is limited to surface reflection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237,    for visual light inspection apparatus which check for local
    variations in the overall light intensity from articles or material as
    caused by imperfections or flaws.

    300+,   for dispersion type test apparatus which reflects light from
    standards or unknown substances at selected frequencies.

    369,    for measuring or testing surface reflection using polarized light.

    372+,   for mensuration devices with which measurement is based upon the
    intensity of light reflected from an article or material.

    402+,   for devices which measure the intensity of light reflected from
    materials or the comparison of colors by means of reflective standards.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 29 for the determination of vapor
    content of a gas by light scattering of a light beam reflected from a test
    surface; subclasses 104+ for surface testing; and subclass 160 for
    measuring the light intensity of a reflected beam of light from a dyed
    thread sample which is indicative of the color of the sample.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 580+ and
    587 for radiant energy devices which separate articles physically on the
    basis of the intensity of reflected radiation which is correlated to the
    surface or the color of the article.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 216+ wherein light reflected from
    articles, material, or animate beings controls a photosensitive detector.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 227, 234, and 235 for
    electrical signalling apparatus which utilize the intensity of reflected
    light to note a change of condition including ice formation, moisture, or
    humidity conditions.


CLS 356/446
TXT With diffusion:

    Subject matter under subclass 445 wherein the light reflected from the
    material or sample is scattered by reason of the surface irregularities of
    the material or sample alone; or wherein the reflected light is a
    combination of the scattered light and specularly reflected light; or
    wherein the reflected light is scattered from particles distributed on the
    surface of the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237,    for inspection of material or articles for flaws which include the
    detection of contaminants such as dirt within a bottled fluid.

    337+,   for light scattering caused by more or less uniformly distributed
    particles internally in a fluid, liquid, or gas which may be moving or
    static.

    427,    for light scattering caused by contaminants, such as dirt or other
    particles, which are entrained in encapsulated or bottled fluids, where
    agitation or rotation is used to cause the unwanted particles to move about
    within the fluid.

    448,    for comparison apparatus of the reflected light type which does not
    involve light diffusion.


CLS 356/447
TXT With modulation (e.g., flicker beam):

    Subject matter under subclass 445 including devices which modify the light
    reflected from the material or article in a repetitive manner, mechanically
    or otherwise.

    (1)     Note.  Comparative reflecting devices of the modulator type are
    classified here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217,    for photometers of the modulating type both visual and
    photoelectric wherein the light intensity at some location alone is desired.

    314+,   for spectrophotometers which utilize mechanical, electrical, or
    optical modulators including the polarized light type to obtain the light
    intensities or the difference in light intensities for one or more
    frequencies of visible light where a dispersing means is used to obtain the
    various frequencies of light.

    418,    for colorimeters which utilize light modulators.


CLS 356/448
TXT By comparison:

    Subject matter under subclass 445 including visual or photoelectric
    apparatus which compares the reflected light in intensity from the sample
    or material with the light from a standard material or article.

    (1)     Note.  The usual comparator type includes regular and
    stereomicroscopes wherein a comparison of the reflected light intensity is
    made with a standard, which may be a photograph, where no dimensional
    length, profile, color plus light intensity, or flaw check is involved.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402+,   for comparison systems of the visual and photoelectric type which
    are based upon the frequency and the intensity of light reflected from at
    least the unknown material or sample.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 208 and 578 for plural light sources and
    photocells which may be used in a comparator of light intensity as
    reflected from a sample or material with a standard light intensity where
    no indicator or test material support is claimed.

    340,    Communication:  Electrical, subclasses 146.3 and 825.30+ which may
    utilize the intensity of light as reflected from documents to note the
    position of identifying marks or items on the documents.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    373 for compound lens systems of the object comparator type.

    382,    Image Analysis, subclass 112 which may utilize the intensity of
    light as reflected from the document to denote the information content.


CLS 358/
TTL FACSIMILE

CLS 358/
TXT I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF THE CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    A.      This class deals with the transmission of a picture or the
    recording or reproducing of a sequence of pictures in which the local light
    variation composing a picture is not subject to the variation of time by
    methods involving the following steps:

    Step (1)        The scanning of a picture, i.e., the analysis of the whole
    of a picture-containing area by resolving it into an area or a plurality of
    areas of which at least one of the two dimensions is elemental,
    simultaneously or in a sequence, and the derivation in response thereto of
    a picture-representative electric signal;

    Step (2)        The reproduction of the whole of a picture-containing area
    by the reproduction in response to a picture-representative electric signal
    of an area or a plurality of areas of which at least one of the two
    dimensions is elemental, simultaneously or in a sequence.


    B.      In this class Pictorial Communication Systems are those systems for
    the transmission and reproduction of arbitrarily composed pictures in which
    the local light variations composing a picture are not subject to variation
    with time, e.g., documents (both written and printed), maps, charts,
    photographs (other than motion picture film).

    II.     SUBCOMBINATIONS OF PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

    A.      This class includes circuits specially designed for dealing with
    pictorial communication signals, as distinct from merely signals of a
    particular frequency range.

    B.      Electrical circuits not specific to pictorial communication which
    may constitute subcombinations of such apparatus are classified in the
    appropriate class for such circuits.

    III.    COMBINATIONS OF OTHER APPARATUS WHICH INCLUDE APPARATUS OF THIS
    CLASS

    A.      This class does not include the following subject matter:

    1.      Systems in which legible alphanumeric or like character forms are
    analyzed according to Step (1) to derive an electric signal from which the
    character is recognized by comparison with stored information, which are
    dealt with in Class 382, Image Analysis.

    2.      Systems for the direct photographic copying of an original picture
    in which an electric signal representative of a characteristic of the
    picture is derived and employed to modify the operation of the system,
    which are dealt with in Class 355, subclass 38.

    3.      Systems for the reproduction according to Step (2) of pictures
    comprising alphanumeric or like character forms but involving the
    production of the equivalent of a signal which would be derived by Step
    (1), e.g., by cams, punched card or tape, coded control signal or other
    means, which are dealt with in Class 345, subclasses 1+.

    IV.     RELATED ELEMENTS OR SYSTEMS FOUND IN OTHER CLASSES

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 596+ for measuring and testing
    apparatus including acoustic imaging.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 52+ for electrolytic marking

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ and 216+ photocells, circuits and
    optics therefor; subclasses 330+ and 338+ for devices responsive to
    invisible radiation.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 7.1+, television cabinets.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 364+, cathode-ray
    tubes.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 1+,
    cathode-ray tube circuits.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 41 and 85
    synchronization circuitry.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 76.12+, analysis of
    complex waves.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, particularly subclasses 1+ for miscellaneous signal discriminating
    or separating and subclasses 100+ for miscellaneous signal production or
    conversion.

    329,    Demodulators. subclasses 311+, 315+, 345+, and 347+, for pulse,
    frequency, phase,  or amplitude demodulators, respectively.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 11, D.C. reinsertion circuit; subclasses 127+,
    control of power supply, and subclass 149, noise compensation.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 20 and 172, television type oscillator
    synchronization.

    332,    Modulators, various subclasses, modulators.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 14 and 24+,
    companders and coupling networks.

    334,    Tuners, various subclasses, tuners.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, appropriate subclasses for
    code converters wherein the signal may be encoded to reduce bandwidth.

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses  1-205 radar systems.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 112+ and 418+ for computer
    graphics processing and subclasses 326+ for a computer operator interface.

    346,    Recorders, subclasses 150.1+ for electric recording of phenomenon,
    particularly subclasses 150.2 for electrical discharge and 150.3  for
    electrochemical; subclass 134, particular record receivers; subclass 139,
    scanning devices for markers, and subclasses 107.1+ for light or beam
    recording of phenomenon.

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, subclasses 112+ for
    electrostatic marking, particularly subclasses 129+ for photo scanning,
    subclasses 224+ for light or beam marking.

    348,    Television, for television camera, video display, transmission or
    general television signal processing  of a sequence of images which can
    portray motion.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 4 and 131, prompters and
    motion picture-television combinations, and subclasses 166+, projector
    drive mechanisms.

    355,    Photocopying, subclasses  20, and 84 for light source and scanning
    light source, respectively.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 3+, range or distance
    measurement; subclasses 426+ and 237+ for inspection devices, and
    subclasses 402+, shade or color measuring.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, various
    subclasses for optical devices, especially subclasses 1+, holography;
    subclasses 196+ and 887, light beam deflectors and sequentially additive
    filters.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 9.1+,
    14.1+, 19.1, 33.1+ for dynamic magnetic recorders peculiar to noncolor
    television signal processing.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 243 for
    synchronization of shafts; and subclasses 173+ and 211 for a photosensitive
    device in circuits for electromagnets.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclass. The
    storage of information, which includes video signal processing, is excluded
    from this class.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, appropriate subclasses
    for recording or reproducing information absent any feature peculiar to
    video processing.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for multiplex
    systems in general.

    380,    Cryptography, especially subclasses 5, 7, and 10+ for cryptographic
    video equipment and techniques.

    382,    Image Analysis, subclasses 181+ for pattern recognition or
    alphanumeric character sensing.

    385,    Optics Waveguides, appropriate subclasses for fiber optics, per se.

    386,    Television Signal Processing for Dynamic Recording or Reproducing,
    subclasses 1+ and 46+ for recording or reproducing of color or black and
    white television signal.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 101+ for
    static presentation processing.

    396,    Photography, various subclasses, pictorial information recording
    devices.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics, subclasses 38+
    for controls, subclasses 130+ for image formation, subclasses 168+ for
    charging, subclasses 177+ for exposure, subclasses 222+ for development,
    subclasses 297+ for transfer, subclasses 320+ for fixing, subclasses 343+
    for cleaning, and subclasses 361+ for document handling.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 2+, 79+, 245+, and
    289+ for a pattern controlled device including scanning.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, appropriate subclasses for process, composition, and product
    involving radiation imagery chemistry.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclass 307, teaching devices
    including television combinations.

    455,    Telecommunications, various subclasses, transmitters and receivers.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 150+ for high temperature (Tc  30 K) superconducting devices,
    particularly subclasses 181+ for photoconductive, light transmissive, light
    emissive, or light responsive devices, or subclasses 202+ for electrical
    communication systems.

    704,    Data Processing:  Speech Signal Processing, Linguistics, Language
    Translation, and Audio Compression/Decompression, subclasses 500  through
    504 for bandwidth, or time compression, or expansion of audio signals.

    707,    Data Processing - Database and File Management, Data Structures, or
    Document Processing, subclasses 500+ for document processing.


CLS 358/261.1
TXT Run length encoding:

    Subject matter under subclass 426 including apparatus for sensing and
    counting the number of consecutive elemental areas in which a given signal
    level exists and transmitting a signal representative of the count or a
    signal that is encoded to represent the count.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 173+ for code
    transmitters, and subclasses 50+ for code converters.


CLS 358/261.2
TXT Predictive or adaptive encoding:

    Subject matter under subclass 261.1 for converting facsimile signals to or
    from digital signals wherein the coding of the current information varies
    depending upon the nature of the previous information.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclass 51 for adaptive
    digital to digital code converters.


CLS 358/261.3
TXT Two dimensional encoding:

    Subject matter under subclass 261.1 where the run length extends over more
    than one scan line.


CLS 358/261.4
TXT Having addressable memory:

    Subject matter under subclass 261.1 including a random access storage
    device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static  Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclasses
    for addressable memories, per se.


CLS 358/262.1
TXT Two level to three level:

    Subject matter under subclass 426 wherein the excursions of the signal
    above its lower level or the average D.C. level of the signal is altered
    such that the signal level periodically alternates above and below a zero
    D.C. level.


CLS 358/296
TXT Recording apparatus:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 including structure to reproduce a
    picture by making a permanent record from the received picture signal on a
    record carrier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, appropriate subclasses for particular recording
    apparatus.


CLS 358/297
TXT Ablative:

    Subject matter under subclass 296 wherein the picture is created by removal
    of portions of the record carrier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, subclass 150.2 for electric recording of phenomenal
    information using electrical discharge (e.g., spark or electroerosion), and
    subclass 76.1 for thermal recorders.

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, subclasses 159+ for
    apparatus and processes using electrical discharge (e.g., spark or
    electroerosion) to mark the record receiver, and subclasses 171+ for
    thermal marking.


CLS 358/298
TXT Halftone:

    Subject matter under subclass 296 including apparatus to create a halftone
    picture.


CLS 358/299
TXT Engraving:

    Subject matter under subclass 298 wherein the halftone picture is created
    by selectively removing material from the record carrier.


CLS 358/300
TXT Electrostatic or electrolytic:

    Subject matter under subclass 296 wherein the picture is created by
    selectively applying a varying charge pattern to the record carrier in
    accordance with the picture signal and permanently affixing charged toner
    particles in amounts dependent on the charge, or by transmitting a current
    through the record carrier to selectively discolor the record.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, subclass 150.3 for electrochemical recording of
    phenomenal information.

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, subclasses 112+ and
    163+ for electrostatic marking and electrochemical marking respectively.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics, subclasses 38+
    for controls, subclasses 130+ for image formation, subclasses 168+ for
    charging, subclasses 177+ for exposure, subclasses 222+ for development,
    subclasses 297+ for transfer, subclasses 320+ for fixing, subclasses 343+
    for cleaning, and subclasses 361+ for document handling.


CLS 358/301
TXT Magnetic:

    Subject matter under subclass 296 wherein the record carrier is magnetized
    in accordance with the picture signal and charged toner particles are
    affixed in amounts dependent on the magnetization of the record carrier.

    (1)     Note.  Only apparatus which produces a visibly readable record is
    included here.  Apparatus for producing a nonvisible record by
    magnetization is in Class 360, Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or
    Retrieval.

    (2)     Note.  The toner particles may be affixed permanently to the
    magnetized record carrier or transferred to a separate record carrier.


CLS 358/302
TXT Photographic:

    Subject matter under subclass 296 wherein the record carrier is a
    photosensitive medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, subclasses 107.1+ for optical recording of phenomenal
    information.

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, subclasses 224+ for
    radiation marking.

    386,    Television Signal Processing for Dynamic Recording or Reproducing,
    subclasses 42+ and 128+ for recording or reproducing color and black and
    white television signal using light or beam.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics, subclasses 38+
    for controls, subclasses 130+ for image formation, subclasses 168+ for
    charging, subclasses 177+ for exposure, subclasses 222+ for development,
    subclasses 297+ for transfer, subclasses 320+ for fixing, subclasses 343+
    for cleaning, and subclasses 361+ for document handling.


CLS 358/303
TXT Pressure (e.g., on carbon paper):

    Subject matter under subclass 296 wherein the picture is created by
    selectively exerting pressure on a medium that transfers toner to a record
    carrier in accordance with the applied pressure.


CLS 358/304
TXT With paper cutter:

    Subject matter under subclass 296 including means to sever from a length of
    record carrier, the portion that contains a reproduced picture.


CLS 358/305
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to systems, transmitters
    or receivers specific to television or facsimile systems and not provided
    for in any of the preceding subclasses of this class.


CLS 358/400
TXT FACSIMILE:

    Subject matter under the class definition including generating and
    transmitting, recording, reproducing, or displaying a scanned image
    representative electrical signal in which the local light variations
    composing the image are not subject to variation with time.

    (1)     Note.  Image includes graphical, text or pictorial matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 37 for secret (i.e., automatic) insertion of
    printing telegraph recorder paper into an envelope.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 467-472 for character font
    generation and subclasses 326+ for operator interface processing.

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, subclasses 224+ for
    radiation marking, particularly subclasses 225+ for marking a medium by
    scanning the medium with a writing beam (e.g., light, electron), and
    subclasses 129+ for generic electric marker where an electrostatic image is
    formed on a medium or discharged from a medium by scanning the  medium with
    a beam of light.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 93+ for digital facsimile and
    subclass 100 for facsimile combined with a telephone or telephone system.

    380,    Cryptography, subclass 18, for encrypted facsimile transmission.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 1 through 99
    for artificial intelligence including neural nets; subclasses 101+ for
    static presentation processing; subclasses 118+ for computer graphics
    processing; subclasses 180+ for reliability, availability, and security;
    subclasses 200.3+ for data transferring among multiple computer systems;
    and subclasses 821 through 894 for transferring data from one or more
    peripherals to one or more computers for the latter to process, store, or
    further transfer or for transferring data from the computers to the
    peripherals.

    399,    Electrophotography, for electrophotographic devices without
    facsimile signal or  without electric signal control of the light used to
    form the electrophotographic image, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics,
    subclasses 38+ for controls, subclasses 130+ for image formation,
    subclasses 168+ for charging, subclasses 177+ for exposure, subclasses 222+
    for development, subclasses 297+ for transfer, subclasses 320+ for fixing,
    subclasses 343+ for cleaning, and subclasses 361+ for document handling.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 31+, for electrophotographic methods without facsimile
    signal production or reception or without electric signal control of the
    light used to form the electrophotographic image.

    704,    Data Processing:  Speech Signal Processing, Linguistics, Language
    Translation, and Audio Compression/Decompression, subclasses 200+ for
    speech signal processing.

    707,    Data Processing - Database And File Management, Data Structures, or
    Document Processing, subclasses 500-542 for document processing performed
    by a computer for presentation.


CLS 358/401
TXT Image reproduction system:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein an image is converted into an
    electrical signal and then converted into another image without
    transmission of the signal to a remote location (e.g., a copier).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    399,    Electrophotography, for electrophotographic devices without
    facsimile signal or  without electric signal control of the light used to
    form the electrophotographic image, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics,
    subclasses 38+ for controls, subclasses 130+ for image formation,
    subclasses 168+ for charging, subclasses 177+ for exposure, subclasses 222+
    for development, subclasses 297+ for transfer, subclasses 320+ for fixing,
    subclasses 343+ for cleaning, and subclasses 361+ for document handling.


CLS 358/402
TXT Electronic mailbox:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein documents are scanned and
    automatically  directed to or transmitted to a designated one of a
    plurality of receivers for reproduction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    440,    for facsimile systems with an auxiliary address signal.

    474+,   for facsimile scanning in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclass 93.24 for an electronic mail at
    a display station, and subclass 100.08 for an electronic mailbox at a
    facsimile system combined with a telephone system. for facsimile combined
    with a telephone or telephone system.


CLS 358/403
TXT Document filing and retrieval system:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein a document is scanned, assigned a
    classification and stored or filed, and then retrieved in accordance with
    the classification.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402,    for electronic mailbox systems.

    474+,   for facsimile scanning in general.


CLS 358/404
TXT Facsimile memory monitoring:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein the status of a memory is
    detected.

    (1)     Note.  Status includes amount of data in a memory, condition of a
    memory, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    406,    for facsimile measuring and testing.


CLS 358/405
TXT Image transmission accuracy verification:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein a transmitted or scanned image is
    compared or verified for accuracy (i.e., image abnormality) after
    transmission.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    406,    for facsimile measuring and testing.

    461+,   for shade correction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 71, document pattern
    analysis or verification, for related subject matter under not involving a
    facsimile system.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery,
    appropriate subclasses for data verification in general.

    382,    Image Analysis, subclasses 309+ for related subject matter in
    general.


CLS 358/406
TXT Facsimile measuring, testing or calibrating:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein a facsimile apparatus is
    monitored, measured, calibrated or tested.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    405,    for image verification.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses, for
    electrical measuring and testing.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery,
    appropriate subclasses for data verification in general.


CLS 358/407
TXT Facsimile relay system:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein image information is received
    form a transmitter, and retransmitted to a receiver without reproduction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 211+ for pulse
    communications relays.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 338+ for telephone relays.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 7+ for radio relays.


CLS 358/408
TXT Plural scanner station:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein more than one scanner is employed
    for image generation at the same station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    474+,   for facsimile scanning in general.


CLS 358/409
TXT Synchronization:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 comprising methods or apparatus for
    maintaining proper time or phase correspondence between a transmitter and a
    receiver of the facsimile system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 500+ for television synchronization.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 243+ for
    electrical systems including synchronization of shafts

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 503+ for time division
    multiplex synchronization.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 354+ for synchronizers
    in pulse communications.


CLS 358/410
TXT Sync or phase pulse generator:

    Subject matter under subclass 409 for the generation or synchronizing or
    phasing pulses necessary for the proper synchronization between components
    of the facsimile system.


CLS 358/411
TXT Facsimile carrier as synchronization signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 409 wherein a video carrier frequency of the
    transmitted facsimile signal is utilized to convey synchronization
    information.


CLS 358/412
TXT Phase or speed regulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 409 for varying the phase or speed of
    components of the facsimile system to achieve proper synchronization
    between such components.


CLS 358/413
TXT Start - stop:

    Subject matter under subclass 412 wherein synchronization between the
    components of the system is achieved by stopping the receiver scanning
    mechanism during each scan cycle and restarting the scan in accordance with
    a received phase or synchronization signal.


CLS 358/414
TXT With particular clutch mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 412 including a particular device connecting
    and disconnecting a driving and a driven part of a facsimile mechanism to
    vary the phase or speed.


CLS 358/415
TXT With pendulum:

    Subject matter under subclass 412 wherein the phase or speed control is
    achieved through the use of a body suspended from a fixed point so as to
    swing freely.


CLS 358/416
TXT With tuning fork:

    Subject matter under subclass 412 wherein the phase or speed control is
    achieved by the use of a 2-pronged implement that vibrates with a fixed
    frequency when struck.


CLS 358/417
TXT With strobe:

    Subject matter under subclass 412 wherein the phase or speed control is
    achieved through the use of a light that flashes at an adjustable rate.


CLS 358/418
TXT With movable phase shifter:

    Subject matter under subclass 412 wherein the phase or speed control is
    achieved through the use of a mechanical phase shifter at the receiver.


CLS 358/419
TXT Receiver motor power transmitted from transmitter:

    Subject matter under subclass 412 wherein the receiver has a motor and
    power for the motor is transmitted from the transmitter to maintain
    synchronization.


CLS 358/420
TXT Receiver motor power source frequency change:

    Subject matter under subclass 412 wherein the phase or speed is regulated
    by changing the frequency of a source of power of a motor in a receiver.


CLS 358/421
TXT Receiver motor power source voltage change:

    Subject matter under subclass 412 wherein the phase or speed is regulated
    by changing the voltage of a power source of a motor in a receiver motor.


CLS 358/422
TXT Receiver motor power source interruption:

    Subject matter under subclass 412 wherein the phase or speed is regulated
    by selectively interrupting the power of a receiver motor.


CLS 358/423
TXT With resistance variable in receiver motor power source:

    Subject matter under subclass 412 including a variable resistance in a
    power source of a motor to effect phase or speed regulation in a receiver.


CLS 358/424
TXT Stylus:

    Subject matter under subclass 412 wherein styli which are scanning paths at
    the transmitter and at the receiver are maintained in proper phase or speed
    relationship.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    478,    for stylus scanning.


CLS 358/425
TXT Multiplex:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 including transmitting plural diverse
    information signals at the same time.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 473+ for multiplex transmission in
    television.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for multiplex
    communications in general.


CLS 358/426
TXT Time or bandwidth compression:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein the frequency range of the
    picture signal is reduced to accommodate bandwidth limitations of a
    transmission medium or wherein the time required to transmit a given amount
    of information through a given fixed bandwidth medium is reduced.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 384+ for bandwidth reduction techniques in
    television systems.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclass 477 for bandwidth compression or
    expansion in multiplex communications.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 240+ for bandwidth
    compression or expansion in pulse communications.

    382,    Image Analysis, subclasses 232+ for data compression in image
    analysis systems.

    704,    Data Processing:  Speech Signal Processing, Linguistics, Language
    Translation, and Audio Compression/Decompression, subclasses 500  through
    504 for bandwidth, or time compression, or expansion of audio signals.


CLS 358/427
TXT Using Huffman code:

    Subject matter under subclass 261.1 wherein bandwidth compression is
    achieved by using various code words which are generated based on the
    probability of character or symbol occurrence.


CLS 358/428
TXT Interpolation:

    Subject matter under subclass 426 including a determination or estimation
    of a value or values of a picture signal between two known values or of a
    trend established between two or more known values of the picture signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 723
    and 853 for interpolation in data processing.


CLS 358/429
TXT Halftone or grey level processing:

    Subject matter under subclass 426 wherein time or bandwidth compression
    involves a signal representing a shade of gray between the darkest and the
    lightest elements of the image.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

     456+,  for halftone signal processing in general.


CLS 358/430
TXT Adaptive or predictive:

    Subject matter under subclass 426 wherein the compression of the current
    information varies depending upon the nature of the previous information.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261.2,  for adaptive or predictive run length encoding of facsimile signals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclass 51 for adaptive
    digital to digital code converters.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 148+
    for adaptive data processing control.


CLS 358/431
TXT Fill bits or dummy signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 426 wherein the picture signal includes a
    unit of information inserted solely for the purposes of fulfilling such
    prescribed conditions as word length or block length without affecting
    operations.


CLS 358/432
TXT Two dimensional or orthogonal:

    Subject matter under subclass 426 wherein time or bandwidth compression is
    based on a value of a picture signal information displaced in two
    dimensions relative to a reference picture signal information.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261.3,  for two dimensional run length encoding.


CLS 358/433
TXT Block:

    Subject matter under subclass 432 wherein the time or bandwidth compression
    is based on a matrix of m x n image elements where m and n are both
    positive integers greater than one but less than the number of image
    elements in a scan line.


CLS 358/434
TXT Auxiliary signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 including apparatus for transmitting a
    signal in either direction between a transmitter and a receiver for the
    purpose of giving instructions to either the transmitter or receiver or to
    convey information, other than pictorial or synchronization, about events
    or conditions at either location.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    409+,   for facsimile synchronization.


CLS 358/435
TXT Transmitter and receiver both supply auxiliary signal(s):

    Subject matter under subclass 434 wherein both the receiver and the
    transmitter send information to each other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 100.01+ for facsimile
    combined with a telephone or telephone system.


CLS 358/436
TXT Auxiliary signal controls apparatus at both transmitter and receiver:


    Subject matter under subclass 435 wherein the auxiliary signal is employed
    by the transmitter to control the facsimile receiver or vice versa.


CLS 358/437
TXT Interruption detection and control:

    Subject matter under subclass 434 wherein the auxiliary signal is
    transmitter upon detection of a break in facsimile operation and is used to
    control the equipment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    406,    for measuring and testing in facsimile.


CLS 358/438
TXT Transmitter supplies auxiliary signal(s):

    Subject matter under subclass 434 wherein the auxiliary signal is generated
    in the facsimile transmitter.


CLS 358/439
TXT Receiver supplies auxiliary signal(s):

    Subject matter under subclass 434 wherein the receiver transmits
    information to the transmitter.


CLS 358/440
TXT Telephone number or address of designator:

    Subject matter under subclass 434 wherein the auxiliary signal carries
    information about the address or telephone number of the sender or
    recipient of the facsimile transmission.

    (1)     Note.  Class 379, Telephonic Communications provides, in subclasses
    100.01+ for facsimile communications combined with a telephone system or
    part thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402,    for facsimile system wherein documents are transmitted to
    designated receivers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.07+ and 825.21 for
    selective communications with addressing.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 72.2
    for magnetic tape recording with recorded addresses.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 312 and 432 for message
    addressed to multiple destinations, subclasses 352 and 389 for switching a
    message which includes an address header, and subclass 475 for address
    transmitted in multiplex communications.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 100.01+ for facsimile
    communications with a telephone device.


CLS 358/441
TXT Facsimile alarm:

    Subject matter under subclass 434 having a humanly perceptible indication
    of an abnormal condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    405,    for image verification.

    406,    for facsimile measuring or testing.


CLS 358/442
TXT Facsimile system interface:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 having provision for enabling a
    transmitter to be compatible with a receiver and vice versa.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    409+,   for synchronization in facsimile.


CLS 358/443
TXT Specific signal processing circuitry:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 including specific circuitry for
    facsimile but not restricted in usability to any single system, signal
    generator or recorder specifically provided elsewhere in this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 607+ for noise elimination in a television
    systems and subclasses 678+ for automatic gain control circuitry used in
    television systems.


CLS 358/444
TXT Memory interface:

    Subject matter under subclass 443 wherein a memory interfaces an input and
    an output of the facsimile systems to cause a significant change in the
    overall function of the system.


CLS 358/445
TXT Signal sampling and conversion:

    Subject matter under subclass 443 wherein a facsimile signal is sampled and
    analog to digital conversion (or vice versa) is performed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    467,    for image classification and coding.

    470,    for conversion of an analog facsimile signal into a coded digital
    signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

     341,   Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 122+ for sampling
    and conversion in general.


CLS 358/446
TXT Signal voltage or gain control:

    Subject matter under subclass 443 wherein the voltage or gain of a
    photocell or amplifier is controlled by specific circuitry responsive to
    specific conditions.


CLS 358/447
TXT Subject enhancing:

    Subject matter under subclass 443 including circuitry for modifying or
    operating on selected portions of the signal to restore or improve detail
    in the reproduced image.


CLS 358/448
TXT Image processing:

    Subject matter under subclass 443 wherein an image signal is processed in
    some manner to either change or improve the image for reproduction.


CLS 358/449
TXT Document size detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 448 wherein a document or image size is
    detected for processing image signals generated therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    451,    for changing facsimile picture size.


CLS 358/450
TXT Plural images combined into a single image:

    Subject matter under subclass 448 where more than one image representing
    signal are combined to form a signal representing one image.


CLS 358/451
TXT Picture size conversion:

    Subject matter under subclass 448 including apparatus permitting the
    reproduced picture to be smaller or larger in size than the original
    picture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    449,    for document size detection.


CLS 358/452
TXT Image editing:

    Subject matter under subclass 448 wherein the image signal is edited by an
    operator before reproduction or transmission.


CLS 358/453
TXT Image portion selection:

    Subject matter under subclass 448 wherein a portion of an entire image is
    selected for specific processing.


CLS 358/454
TXT Moire effect elimination:

    Subject matter under subclass 448 wherein wavy patterns produced by the
    convergence of lines are eliminated.


CLS 358/455
TXT Gray level processing:

    Subject matter under subclass 448 wherein the image signal is processed to
    reproduce various levels of gray.


CLS 358/456
TXT Halftone:

    Subject matter under subclass 455 where shades of gray between the darkest
    and the lightest elements of the image are represented by a pattern of
    "dots" of varying density.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    429,    for halftone processing for bandwidth for time compression.


CLS 358/457
TXT Dither matrix:

    Subject matter under subclass 456 wherein an image signal is thresholded
    with one or more reference levels which are successively varied.


CLS 358/458
TXT Gradation or spatial processing:

    Subject matter under subclass 456 wherein a relationship between the
    optical density of an image and a signal level is controlled or an image is
    processed to provide emphasis in a specific frequency range.


CLS 358/459
TXT Variable halftone dot shape or size:

    Subject matter under subclass 456 where the halftone "dot" has a variable
    shape or size.


CLS 358/460
TXT Addressable storage:

    Subject matter under subclass 456 including a random access memory.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclasses
    for random access memories, per se.


CLS 358/461
TXT Shade correction:

    Subject matter under subclass 455 wherein a reference signal is used to
    determine or correct the proper level of the output signal generated by a
    picture signal generator.


CLS 358/462
TXT Text and image detection and processing:

    Subject matter under subclass 448 including separate processing for
    detected graphic image and text images within a scanned document.


CLS 358/463
TXT Noise elimination:

    Subject matter under subclass 448 wherein noise is limited or eliminated
    during image processing or whereby the signal to noise ratio is improved.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 607+ for noise elimination in a television
    signal.


CLS 358/464
TXT To distinguish intelligence from background:

    Subject matter under subclass 448 including apparatus to generate a signal
    wherein a portion of the signal corresponding to intelligence on a document
    may be readily distinguished from a portion representing a background color
    of the document.


CLS 358/465
TXT Picture signal thresholding:

    Subject matter under subclass 448 wherein the picture signal is thresholded
    by a unique technique for determining the level (black or white) of the
    picture.


CLS 358/466
TXT Variable thresholding technique:

    Subject matter under subclass 465 wherein the type of thresholding
    technique is determined by the image portion being analyzed.


CLS 358/467
TXT Image classification and coding:

    Subject matter under subclass 448 wherein portions of the image are
    detected, classified and processed accordingly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    470,    for facsimile using coded characters.


CLS 358/468
TXT Facsimile control unit:

    Subject matter under subclass 443 wherein specific processing circuitry is
    directed to the control of a facsimile unit.


CLS 358/469
TXT Carrier wave modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 443 including circuitry to modulate a signal
    derived from scanning a picture onto a carrier or including circuitry to
    demodulate the signal to reconstruct the picture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses for demodulators, per se.

    332,    Modulators, appropriate subclasses for modulators, per se.

    348,    Television, subclasses 724 for transmitter circuitry in television
    systems including modulators and subclasses 726+ for receiver circuitry in
    television systems using demodulators.

    455,    Telecommunications, appropriate subclasses for circuitry to
    modulate or demodulate a carrier wave.


CLS 358/470
TXT Coded character:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 including translation of an analog signal
    derived from scanning each elemental area of a picture into a digital coded
    signal.

    (1)     Note. The subject matter in this subclass does not encode the
    signal for time or bandwidth reduction purposes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    445,    for signal sampling and conversion.

    426+,   for encoding the picture signal for time or bandwidth compression
    purposes.

    467,    for image classification and coding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 20+ and 173+ for
    code transmitters, and subclasses 126+ for analog to or from digital
    conversion in general.


CLS 358/471
TXT Picture signal generator:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 including apparatus or circuitry to
    detect or convert elemental light variations composing a picture into an
    electrical signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    382,    Image Analysis, subclasses 312+ for related subject matter in
    general.


CLS 358/472
TXT Combined read and write head:

    Subject matter under subclass 471 having a device which converts local
    light variations of a picture into a picture representative signal and
    converts a picture representative signal into a picture.


CLS 358/473
TXT Hand held reader:

    Subject matter under subclass 471 having a device which is made to be held
    in an operator's hand and which converts local light variations into a
    picture representative signal.


CLS 358/474
TXT Scanning:

    Subject matter under subclass 471 including apparatus to traverse a surface
    to derive information from a image or to reproduce a image.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199+,   for scanning devices employed in television systems and employing
    mechanical optical means.

    408,    for plural scanning stations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 234+, for photocell combined with moving
    optical systems.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    197+, for optical scanning systems, per se.


CLS 358/475
TXT Facsimile illumination control:

    Subject matter under subclass 474 wherein the output of a light source
    employed for scanning is varied in response to specific conditions in the
    system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, appropriate subclass for illumination in general.


CLS 358/476
TXT Transceiver:

    Subject matter under subclass 474 including structure wherein a portion of
    the scanning mechanism utilized in the generation of a picture signal may
    be utilized in the reception of the signal and recording of the picture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

     472,   for a transceiver with a combined read and write head.


CLS 358/477
TXT Nonlight:

    Subject matter under subclass 474 where the scanning is of a detectable
    parameter other than light.


CLS 358/478
TXT Stylus type:

    Subject matter under subclass 477 including a stylus for making contact
    with the picture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    424,    for stylus synchronization.


CLS 358/479
TXT Facsimile video:

    Subject matter under subclass 474 wherein a video camera scans documents or
    other static images.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    909,    for an electronic still camera or scene reproducer.


CLS 358/480
TXT Coherent light:

    Subject matter under subclass 474 having a laser light source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    196+ and 237+, for modulation and scanning systems for laser beams.


CLS 358/481
TXT Including a polygon reflector:

    Subject matter under subclass 480 wherein light is reflected from a
    rotating reflector having a polygonal cross section during scanning.


CLS 358/482
TXT Solid-state:

    Subject matter under subclass 474 having a semiconductor device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 272+ and 294+ for solid-state image sensors
    in television cameras.


CLS 358/483
TXT Charge coupled device:

    Subject matter under subclass 482 including an array of charge storage
    elements on semiconductor base to which a variation in a electric charge
    field is applied to serially transfer charge through successive adjacent
    charge storage elements to an output terminal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 215+ for charge transfer type active semiconductor devices, per
    se.

    348,    Television, subclasses 282+ and 311+ for charge-coupled devices in
    television cameras.


CLS 358/484
TXT Fiber optics or optical waveguides:

    Subject matter under subclass 474 having transparent fibers, each longer
    than its diameter, so that they are capable of guiding light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    901,    for fiber optics in pictorial communications in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

     250,   Radiant Energy, subclass 227 for photocells with optical or
    prephotocell systems including light conducting rods, E. G., optical fibers
    or waveguides.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    151, 173, 179, 188, and 195 for fibers optic communication.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, for optical waveguides, per se.


CLS 358/485
TXT Cathode-ray tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 474 having a vacuum tube which focuses an
    electron beam on a luminescent screen.


CLS 358/486
TXT Scan rate or document movement variation in accordance with data presence:

    Subject matter under subclass 474 wherein the speed with the picture is
    scanned or moved through the  scanning station is related to or dependent
    on the presence of data or the amount of data present.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137,    for scan rate variation systems in television systems.


CLS 358/487
TXT Facsimile transparency image scanning:

    Subject matter under subclass 474 wherein the document is in the form of a
    transparent sheet.


CLS 358/488
TXT Document position detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 474 wherein the position of a document
    relative to a platen or scanning apparatus is detected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    449,    for document size detection.


CLS 358/489
TXT Helical scanning pattern:

    Subject matter under subclass 474 wherein the surface assumes a cylindrical
    shape and the scanning mechanism describes a helical pattern about the
    surface as the scanning proceeds.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, subclass 138 for drum recorders.


CLS 358/490
TXT Transparent drum:

    Subject matter under subclass 489 wherein the cylindrical shaped surface is
    light transmissive.


CLS 358/491
TXT Internal scan:

    Subject matter under subclass 490 wherein the scanning is performed from
    within the cylindrical shaped surface.


CLS 358/492
TXT Specified sheet clamp:

    Subject matter under subclass 489 including apparatus to maintain a scanned
    document in contact with the cylindrical shaped surface.


CLS 358/493
TXT Curved scanning surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 474 wherein the surface assumes as arcuate
    shape and the scanning mechanism follows the arcuate shape.


CLS 358/494
TXT Linear scanning pattern:

    Subject matter under subclass 474 wherein the surface is traversed a series
    of straight lines.

     (1)    Note. Included in this subclass are scanning mechanisms wherein the
    surface may be cylindrical or curved, but the scanning is performed in a
    straight line parallel to the axis the cylinder or curved surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, subclass 139 for marking devices wherein a marker moves
    in a straight line.

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, subclasses 223+ for
    plural beam scanning apparatus and method, particularly subclass 238 for
    marking a scanned medium using light emmiting diodes, and subclasses 129+
    for generic electric markers where an electrostatic image is formed on a
    medium or discharged from a medium by scanning the  medium with beam of
    light emitted from a light source, particularly subclass 130 for such an
    apparatus using light emmiting diodes as the light source.


CLS 358/495
TXT Spiral or helix aperture with linear aperture:

    Subject matter under subclass 494 wherein there are two surfaces between a
    source of light and a light responsive element, one surface having a linear
    aperture and the other surface having a helical aperture where the two
    apertures move relative to each other.


CLS 358/496
TXT Document moves during scanning:

    Subject matter under subclass 494 wherein a document moves while being
    scanned.


CLS 358/497
TXT Scanning element moves relative to a flat stationary document:

    Subject matter under subclass 494 wherein a scanning apparatus moves
    relative to a document being scanned.


CLS 358/498
TXT Document feed:

    Subject matter under subclass 474 having a device to move sheets to be
    scanned to or from the scanner.


CLS 358/500
TXT NATURAL COLOR FACSIMILE:

    Subject matter under the class definition including generating,
    transmitting, recording, reproducing, or displaying a picture
    representative signal which  includes portions indicating the existing
    color of an original object, in which the local light variation composing
    the picture is not subject to variation with time.

    (1)     Note.  An original object may include a scene, an image, or a
    document which does not vary with time.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    380,    Cryptography, subclasses 7 and 18 for secret facsimile equipment.


CLS 358/501
TXT Image reproduction:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein an image is converted to an
    electrical signal and then converted into another image without
    transmission of the signal to a remote location.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401,    for image reproduction system in black and white facsimile.


CLS 358/502
TXT Ink-Jet:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein an image is formed on a recording
    sheet by means of nozzles which eject ink drops onto the sheet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, see subclasses 1+ for
    selective marking by ink jet.


CLS 358/503
TXT Thermal:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein an image is formed on a recording
    sheet by means of a heating element which thermally fixes ink onto the
    sheet.


CLS 358/504
TXT Measuring, testing, and calibrating:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein a color facsimile device is
    monitored, measured, tested, or calibrated.

    (1)     Note.  Examples found herein are:  Densities of  neutral color
    patches and an image signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404,    for black and white facsimile memory monitoring.

    405,    for black and white image transmission accuracy verification.

    406,    for black and white facsimile measuring and testing.


CLS 358/505
TXT Scanning:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 including means traversing a surface to
    derive information from an image or to reproduce an image.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    474+,   for scanning devices in black and white     facsimile.


CLS 358/506
TXT Transparency image scanning:

    Subject matter under subclass 505 wherein the original object to be scanned
    is a film or transparent sheet.


CLS 358/507
TXT Cathode-ray tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 505 wherein an image appearing on a space
    discharge display is scanned and reproduced.


CLS 358/508
TXT Transceiver:

    Subject matter under subclass 505 having both a signal transmitter and a
    signal receiver at a common geographic location for transmission and
    reception of separate signals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 100.01+ for facsimile
    combined with a telephone system.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 73+ for radio transceivers.


CLS 358/509
TXT Illumination:

    Subject matter under subclass 505 including specific characteristics or
    details of a light source used in scanning an original image or object.

    SEARCH  CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 3+ for photographic lighting.


CLS 358/510
TXT Coherent light:

    Subject matter under subclass 509 including a laser light source.


CLS 358/511
TXT With prism:

    Subject matter under subclass 505 wherein a prism is used to separate a
    reflected light into a plurality of colored lights.

    (1)     Note.  A prism may be a birefringent element which is formed into a
    structure bound in part by two plane faces that are not parallel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    831+ for prism, per se.


CLS 358/512
TXT With color filters:

    Subject matter under subclass 505 wherein filters of different colors
    convert a light reflected from an original color into light rays of
    different colors.


CLS 358/513
TXT Solid-state:

    Subject matter under subclass 505 wherein a scanning element is a
    semiconductor device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213.11+, for scanned solid-state devices in television picture signal
    generators.

    482+,   for solid-state in black and white facsimile.


CLS 358/514
TXT With plural sensors:

    Subject matter under subclass 513 wherein the    semiconductor device
    includes a plurality of reading elements for converting an image into color
    image signals.


CLS 358/515
TXT Color separation:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein a color image signal is
    decomposed into a plurality of color signals corresponding to each of a
    plurality of primary colors (e.g., red, blue, and green) before processing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    518,    for color correction in natural color facsimile.


CLS 358/516
TXT White balance correction:

    Subject matter under subclass 515 wherein a gain of the primary color
    signals is adjusted to a proper level by using amplifiers.


CLS 358/517
TXT Color masking:

    Subject matter under subclass 515 wherein selected portions of an original
    color image are covered with a layer of opaque material so as to be
    eliminated from the color separated image.


CLS 358/518
TXT Color correction:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 including means for modifying signals
    representative of various colors in a picture to ultimately reproduce a
    color picture that is a true representation of the original picture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    515,    for color separation in natural color facsimile.


CLS 358/519
TXT Gamma correction:

    Subject matter under subclass 518 for correcting a nonlinear input to
    output characteristics of a color image facsimile system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400+,   for black and white facsimile.


CLS 358/520
TXT Hue, saturation and luminance:

    Subject matter under subclass 518 wherein the color correction is modified
    by (a) changing the dimension of color that refers to a scale of perception
    ranging from red through yellow, green and blue, and circulates back to
    red; (b) a pure color; (i.e., one not mixed with white light;) or (c) a
    photometric quantity of light radiation.


CLS 358/521
TXT Gradation:

    Subject matter under subclass 518 for controlling an optical color density
    of an image.


CLS 358/522
TXT With histogram:

    Subject matter under subclass 518 including means for generating a
    graphical representation of a frequency distribution of color densities.


CLS 358/523
TXT With memory for storage of conversion data:          Subject matter under
    subclass 518 including means for retaining color conversion data to be used
    in processing a color image.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, for static memory
    devices, per se.


CLS 358/524
TXT Intermediate storage:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 including means for storage of signals
    prior to reproduction of the picture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 567+ and classes
    indicated in the search notes under the class definition for program or
    pattern controlled devices.


CLS 358/525
TXT Interpolation:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 including a determination or estimation
    of a value of a picture signal between two known values or of a trend
    established between two or more known values of a picture signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 723
    and 853 for interpolation in data processing.


CLS 358/526
TXT With mark-forming function:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein reference marks are formed at
    predetermined positions of an image  forming medium so as to provide
    alignment of color separated image reproductions.


CLS 358/527
TXT Color photography previewer:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 including means for adjusting a quality
    or characteristics of a displayed picture and providing an indication of
    various parameters necessary to  photographically  reproduce  an  image  of
     the  displayed  picture.


CLS 358/528
TXT Size variation:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 for providing a reproduction of a size
    different from the original object size.


CLS 358/529
TXT Black signal synthesis:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 for deriving a signal obtained from a
    black color of high density in a printout image.


CLS 358/530
TXT Specific image-processing circuitry:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 including details of circuitry for
    processing an image signal in some manner to either change or improve the
    image for reproduction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160+,   for specific processing circuitry of television in general.

    443+,   for specific signal processing circuitry in black and white
    facsimile, in general.


CLS 358/531
TXT Electronic retouch:

    Subject matter under subclass 530 including electronic means for improving
    or changing a color image by adding details to or removing flaws that exist
    in the original object.


CLS 358/532
TXT Sharpness emphasizing:

    Subject matter under subclass 530 including means for enhancing contrast
    edges to improve detail in a color image.


CLS 358/533
TXT Moire reduction:

    Subject matter under subclass 530 including means for reducing the
    occurrence of a convergence of lines in color scanners.


CLS 358/534
TXT Halftone processing:

    Subject matter under subclass 530 wherein shades of various darkness
    between the darkest and lightest elements of the original object are
    represented by a pattern of dots of varying density in the image.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    456+,   for halftone or grey level processing in black and white facsimile.


CLS 358/535
TXT Matrix:

    Subject matter under subclass 534 wherein an image signal has one or more
    reference levels which are successively varied.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for matrixing or mixing in natural color television.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 908 for a print
    matrix.


CLS 358/536
TXT Halftone screening:

    Subject matter under subclass 534 wherein a halftone reproduction of an
    original is reproduced on a recording medium by means of a recording
    element using screens formed of periodically repeated, adjacent screen grid
    elements.


CLS 358/537
TXT Image editing:

    Subject matter under subclass 530 wherein a specific image signal is edited
    by an operator before reproduction or transmission.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    448+,   for image processing in black and white facsimile.


CLS 358/538
TXT Image portion selection:

    Subject matter under subclass 530 wherein a portion of an entire image is
    selected for specific processing.


CLS 358/539
TXT Image coding (encoder/decoder):

    Subject matter under subclass 530 including means for converting image
    analog signals into digital information or vice versa.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    467,    for image classification and coding in black and white facsimile.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, for analog to digital
    conversion, in general.


CLS 358/540
TXT Composite image:

    Subject matter under subclass 530 wherein a plurality of image signals are
    combined to form a signal representing a single image.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS

    The following subclasses are collections of cross-references of published
    disclosures pertaining to various specified aspects of the television art
    which aspects do not form appropriate bases for subclasses in the foregoing
    classification (i.e., subclasses superior hereto in the schedule).  These
    subclasses assist a search based on remote function of the apparatus and
    may be of further assistance to the searcher as a starting point in further
    related fields of search either inside or outside the class.  Thus, there
    is here provided second access for retrieval of a limited number of types
    of disclosures.

    (1)     Note.  Disclosures are placed in these subclasses for their value
    as references and as leads to appropriate main or secondary fields of
    search without regard to their original classification.

    (2)     Note.  The disclosures cross-referenced into the following
    subclasses are examples only of the indicated subject matter, and in no
    instance do they represent the entire extent of the prior art.


CLS 358/901.1
TXT FIBER OPTICS:

    Art collection of fiber optics utilized with or as components of facsimile
    systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 227.11+ for light rods utilized in
    optical or prephotocell systems.

    355,    Photocopying, subclass 1 for fiber optics utilized in photocopying
    devices.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    109+ for optical communication systems which may utilize fiber optics.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, appropriate subclasses for fiber optic in
    general.


CLS 358/906
TXT HANDHELD CAMERA WITH RECORDER IN A SINGLE UNIT:

    Subject matter where there is a portable television camera and a television
    signal recorder combined into a single unit.

    (1)     Note.  The recorder may be mounted on a camera operator's belt and
    attached to the camera by a cable.


CLS 358/907
TXT TRACK SKIPPERS (I.E., "GROOVE SKIPPERS"):

    Subject matter having a record medium on which is recorded a television
    signal in a series of tracks or grooves and a transducer for reading the
    recorded television signal, wherein the transducer is caused to jump over
    or skip one or more recorded grooves or tracks.


CLS 358/908
TXT PAUSE CONTROL (I.E., "COMMERCIAL KILLERS"):

    Subject matter where a recording operation is automatically interrupted in
    response to a detected characteristic of a television signal being recorded.


CLS 358/909.1
TXT ELECTRONIC STILL CAMERA OR SCENE REPRODUCER:

    Art collection of electronic photography subsystem to generate and store,
    or to retrieve and display an electrical signal indicative of a
    substantially instantaneous color or monochromatic image of a scene, or a
    component peculiar thereto.

    (1)     Note.  The storage and retrieval is exclusively dynamic recording
    or reproduction, the static storage is dealt with in Class 348, Television,
    subclasses 231+ and 714+.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this art collection is the reproduction of the
    scene on photographic media or by printing.

    FOREIGN ART COLLECTIONS

    The definitions for FOR 100-FOR 141 below correspond to the definitions of
    the abolished subclasses under Class 358 from which these collections were
    formed. See the Foreign Art Collection schedule for specific
    correspondences. [Note: The titles and definitions for indented art
    collections include all the details of the one(s) that are hierarchically
    superior.]


CLS 358/FOR100
TXT IMAGE REPRODUCING WITH MEANS FOR PHOTOGRAPHING DISPLAYED IMAGE
    (E.G., PHOTOGRAPHING CRT DISPLAY):

    Subject matter under the class definition including means to selectively
    photograph the picture displayed on a picture reproducer face.


CLS 358/FOR101
TXT Photography at different frame rates:

    Subject matter under subclass 350 wherein the number of frames photographed
    in a given period (e.g., 24 frames per second) is unequal to the television
    frame rate (e.g., 30 frames per second) to permit utilization of standard
    image projection equipment.


CLS 358/FOR102
TXT With photographic film moving continuously:

    Subject matter under subclass 350 where the photographic film is moved
    continuously.


CLS 358/FOR103
TXT Color:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 including particular aspects of dynamic
    storage or retrieval of natural color television signals.


CLS 358/FOR104
TXT Editing:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 for deleting from, adding to, or
    rearranging portions of a previously recorded color television signal.


CLS 358/FOR105
TXT Fast, slow or stop reproducing:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 specifically arranged for recording or
    reproducing a signal in such a manner that the signal, as recorded, has
    redundant portions deleted therefrom or, as reproduced, occupies a
    different amount of time or a different band of frequencies than that
    occupied by the original signal.


CLS 358/FOR106
TXT Field, frame or line skipping:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 for deletion of every Hth field, frame or
    line of a color television signal at the time of recording.


CLS 358/FOR107
TXT Drop out detection or correction:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 for the detection of a partial signal
    loss or the correction of that loss by substitution or regeneration.


CLS 358/FOR108
TXT Signal amplitude level control:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 where either the instantaneous amplitude
    level of the color television signal or the level of the signal envelope is
    controlled during recording or reproduction.


CLS 358/FOR109
TXT Color component:

    Subject matter under subclass 315 where a color component of the television
    signal (e.g., color burst) has its amplitude monitored in order to control
    the amplitude of at least part of the television signal, or the amplitude
    of a color component of the television signal is controlled in response to
    the amplitude of at least part of the television signal.


CLS 358/FOR110
TXT Color killer:

    Subject matter under subclass 316 where the amplitude of only the color
    information signal is reduced to zero.


CLS 358/FOR111
TXT Using reference signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 316 where the color signal's amplitude is
    controlled by use of a reference (recorded or external) signal.


CLS 358/FOR112
TXT Synchronization signal modification:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 for the generation of a signal which is
    added to or substituted for a synchronizing signal.


CLS 358/FOR113
TXT Time (e.g., phrase or frequency) control:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 where the phase or frequency of at least
    a component part of the television signal is controlled.


CLS 358/FOR114
TXT Of relative transducer/record medium speed: Subject matter under
    subclass 320 where the time control is effected by controlling the speed of
    the transducer relative to the record medium.


CLS 358/FOR115
TXT Disc:

    Subject matter under subclass 321 where the record medium has a thin
    circular shape.


CLS 358/FOR116
TXT Using recorded references (e.g., pilot signal):

    Subject matter under subclass 320 where time is controlled using a signal
    recorded on the record medium, which signal is not a standard component of
    a television signal.


CLS 358/FOR117
TXT Phase matching of color components to an external reference:

    Subject matter under subclass 320 where a reference signal from an external
    source is compared with the recorded color component, the result of which
    is used to control the phase or frequency of at least one color information
    bearing component of the television signal.


CLS 358/FOR118
TXT Using variable delay:

    Subject matter under subclass 324 having a delay means the delay time of
    which is variable.


CLS 358/FOR119
TXT Color burst:

    Subject matter under subclass 324 where the color burst of the color
    television signal is compared with an external reference signal and the
    result of the comparison is used to control the phase or frequency of the
    entire color television signal.


CLS 358/FOR120
TXT Recorder or reproducer fault condition compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 including correcting a signal for errors
    introduced thereinto during storage or retrieval of the signal.


CLS 358/FOR121
TXT Crosstalk elimination:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 for the reduction or elimination of
    signals recorded on channels other than one being reproduced.


CLS 358/FOR122
TXT omb filtering:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 including a multiple-bandpass filter
    which passes only frequencies within a number of narrow bands.


CLS 358/FOR123
TXT Frequency modulation recording techniques: Subject matter under
    subclass 310 wherein the color television signal is divided into, or has
    separate components (e.g., luminance and chrominance) which occupy
    different frequency bands and are separately processed (including specific
    frequency modulator or demodulator circuitry or techniques) and are then
    recorded on the same track of a record carrier.


CLS 358/FOR124
TXT Using diffraction technique or stripe filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 including the use of a parallel or
    nonparallel line stripe color filter or diffraction grating for encoding
    color information onto a noncolor record carrier.


CLS 358/FOR125
TXT Using photographic record:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 including the use of a photographic
    record carrier.


CLS 358/FOR126
TXT With color signal in nonpictorial form:

    Subject matter under subclass 332 including recording a color signal in the
    form of a modulated track which is visibly unintelligible, or reproducing
    such a signal.


CLS 358/FOR127
TXT Separately recorded primary color signals: Subject matter under
    subclass 310 including maintaining the primary color signals as distinct
    signals throughout the storage or retrieval thereof.


CLS 358/FOR128
TXT RECORDING OR REPRODUCING:

    Subject matter under the class definition including particular apparatus
    for dynamic storage or retrieval of signals having a television or
    television-like format.


CLS 358/FOR129
TXT Noise pulse or dropout detection or correction:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 where unwanted additions to or deletions
    from the recorded or reproduced television signal are detected.


CLS 358/FOR130
TXT Time (e.g., phase or frequency) control:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 where the phase or frequency of at least
    a component of the television signal is controlled.


CLS 358/FOR131
TXT Of relative transducer/record medium speed: Subject matter under
    subclass 337 where the time control is effected by controlling the speed of
    the transducer relative to the record medium.


CLS 358/FOR132
TXT Digital techniques:

    Subject matter under subclass 337 where the television signal is converted
    to or from a signal composed of a series or pattern of identical pulse bits
    characterized solely by their presence or absence.


CLS 358/FOR133
TXT Noise (e.g., crosstalk) reduction:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 having provision for reducing the effects
    of unwanted signals upon the recorded television signal.


CLS 358/FOR134
TXT Separately recorded audio and video:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 where the audio portion and the video
    portion of the television signal are recorded separately such as on
    different tracks or different record carriers.


CLS 358/FOR135
TXT Onto disc:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 where the record medium has a thin
    circular shape.


CLS 358/FOR136
TXT Audio and video multiplexed onto same track:

    Subject matter under subclass 342 where the audio and video portions of the
    television signal are multiplexed into the same track of the record medium.


CLS 358/FOR137
TXT Onto thermoplastic record:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 including the use of a plastic recording
    medium, onto which an electrostatic charge pattern corresponding to the
    television signal to be recorded is placed, then the plastic is heated so
    that it is deformed by electrostatic and surface tension forces in
    proportion to the charge laid down, the plastic is then allowed to cool,
    forming a recording of the television signal.


CLS 358/FOR138
TXT Onto photographic record:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 including the use of a dynamic
    photographic record medium.


CLS 358/FOR139
TXT Recording at different frame rate:

    Subject matter under subclass 345 including structure wherein the number of
    frames recorded in a given time period, e.g., 24 frames per second, is
    unequal to the television frame rate, e.g., 30 frames per second, to permit
    utilization of standard image projection equipment.


CLS 358/FOR140
TXT Using laser or electron beam:

    Subject matter under subclass 345 where the television signal is recorded
    by exposing the photographic record to either a coherent beam of radiation
    or to a beam of electrons.


CLS 358/FOR141
TXT With record moving continuously:

    Subject matter under subclass 345 wherein the record carrier is moved
    continuously.


CLS 359/
TTL OPTICS:  SYSTEMS (INCLUDING

CLS 359/
TXT         COMMUNICATION) AND

            ELEMENTS

    CLASS DEFINITION

    I.      DEFINITIONS OF TERMS USED

    OPTICAL COMMUNICATION
    The conveyance of information from one location to another via at least one
    optical transmitter and one optical receiver.  These are used to transfer
    the information with an optical beam and this beam can be used in various
    communication schemes to enable the most effective or desired method of
    moving the information, including optical multiplexing when plural
    information signals or plural transmitters and receivers are utilized.

    OPTICAL MODULATION
    The change of some characteristic of an optical beam in direct relation to
    a varying signal applied thereto.  The change may be temporal (e.g.,
    amplitude, frequency, or phase) or directional.

    HOLOGRAPHY
    The optical recording of an object wave formed by the resulting
    interference pattern of two (or more) mutually coherent, component light
    beams.  Generally, a coherent beam is first split into two component beams,
    one of which irradiates an object, the second of which irradiates a
    recording medium.  The diffraction or scattering of the first wave by the
    object forms an object wave which proceeds to and interferes with a second
    coherent beam (i.e., reference beam) at the medium.  The resulting pattern
    is a two-dimensional (thin) or three-dimensional (thick) hologram of the
    object wave, depending on the thickness of the recording medium.

    POLARIZATION
    In a beam of polarized electromagnetic radiation, the polarization
    direction is the direction of the electric field vector (with no
    distinction between positive and negative as the field oscillates back and
    forth). The electric field vector is always in the plane which is normal to
    the beam propagation direction. At a given stationary point in space, the
    electric field vector of a beam can vary with time at random (unpolarized
    beam), can remain constant (plane-polarized beam), or can rotate. In the
    latter two cases, the beam is said to be "polarized" and can be thought of
    as the resultant vector of two orthogonal component vectors having equal
    amplitudes. If the phase difference of the two component vectors is 0
    degrees, the light is plane polarized; if 90 degrees, the light is
    circularly polarized; and if it is between 0 and 90 degrees, the light is
    elliptically polarized. Elliptical and plane polarized light can be
    converted into each other by means of birefringent optical systems which
    retard one of the orthogonal component vectors relative to the other.

    ULTRAVIOLET/INFRARED
    Electromagnetic radiation immediately above and below the optical visible
    frequency spectrum is termed ultraviolet and infrared, respectively. This
    entire range of frequencies is encompassed by the term "light".

    OPTICAL ELEMENT
    A structure which performs a basic optical function, i.e., the structure,
    when exposed to or placed in the path of a light beam, will cause
    refraction, diffraction, attenuation, or blocking of the light or a
    modification in the character or properties of the light.  In lenses, the
    complete lens is considered an optical element, while the individual masses
    of a plural element lens are considered as lens elements or lens
    components.

    OPTICAL SYSTEM
    A combination of two or more similar or diverse optical elements which are
    optically related.

    INTERFERENCE
    The interaction of two light waves which, as a result of their relative
    phases, produce a cancellation or reinforcement of wave energy.

    DICHROIC
    As used in one sense, the term dichroic refers to (1) the property of some
    materials to absorb to a greater degree one or the other of the two
    orthogonal component vectors which can be considered as constituting
    ordinary light.  This results in producing light polarized to a degree
    depending upon the relative absorption of the two components.  The term
    dichroic is also used to refer to (2) an optical element which will
    transmit light of one color and reflect other colors with little light
    being absorbed. These elements are usually composed of superimposed strata
    of dielectric materials.

    BIREFRINGENT
    Certain crystalline materials have their outer electrons bound more
    strongly in one direction than another resulting in the material having two
    refractive indices depending on the direction of the oscillation. Such
    materials are termed birefringent and, if an unpolarized light ray enters
    such a material obliquely, it will be refracted into two different linearly
    polarized rays having directions of polarization which are normal to one
    another.

    BINOCULAR
    Pertaining to the use of both eyes in the act of viewing.

    LIGHT, VISIBLE LIGHT
    Visible light is radiation which stimulates the optical receptors of the
    eye and has a wavelength from 3850 to 7600 Angstrom units.  The term light
    is used to refer to wavelengths in the above mentioned range and, often,
    also to refer to the ranges immediately adjacent, i.e., the ultra violet
    and infrared ranges which are nonvisible.

    SPECTRUM
    The band of colors produced by separating a beam of white light into its
    component frequencies.

    REFLECTION
    Light striking a surface and returning back into the medium from which it
    came, at an angle equal but opposite to the angle of incidence.

    RETROREFLECTION
    Light striking a surface and returning back into the medium in the reverse
    direction (i.e., a 180 degree change from its original path).

    REFRACTION
    The deviation of light which results when a ray of light passes obliquely
    from a medium of one refractive index to a medium of another refractive
    index.

    DIFFUSE
    Pertaining to the scattering or random deviation of transmitted or
    reflected light.

    OPTICS, OPTICAL
    The science of light and vision and the construction of optical instruments.

    IMAGE FORMER
    An optical device capable of producing an image from light rays proceeding
    from an object.

    TERMINAL IMAGE
    The last image formed by a compound system.

    DIFFRACTION
    A phenomenon resulting from the wave nature of light, e.g., light passing
    through a slit of decreasing width, forms a narrower and narrower beam
    until the slit width approaches the wavelength of light, after which
    further decreasing of the slit width results in a beam having a larger and
    larger divergence.

    DIFFRACTION PATTERN
    The intensity profile of a light beam after having passed by a diffracting
    aperture or object.

    II.     GENERAL STATEMENT OF THE CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    A.      This is the generic class for optical elements and optical systems
    not elsewhere classified.

    Among the optical elements included in this class are:

    Lenses
    Polarizers
    Diffraction gratings
    Prisms
    Reflectors
    Filters
    Projection screens
    Optical Modulators
    Optical Demodulators
    Optical Transmitters
    Optical Receivers

    B.      Among the optical systems included in this class are:

    Optical Communication
    Compound lens systems
    Light reflecting signalling systems (e.g., retroreflectors) Stereoscopic
    systems Binocular devices Systems of lenticular elementsSystems involving
    light interferenceGlare reducing systems Light dividing and combining
    systemsLight control systems (e.g., light valves) Building illumination
    with natural light Systems for protecting or shielding elements Optical
    systems whose operation depends upon polarizing, diffracting, dispersing,
    reflecting, or refracting light Kaleidoscopes

    C.      Further included are certain apertures, closures, and viewing
    devices of a specialized nature which involve no intentional reflection,
    refraction, or filtering of light rays.

    D.      This class also includes optical elements combined with another
    type of structure(s) to constitute an optical element combined with a
    nonoptical structure or a perfection or improvement in the optical element.
     This includes filters with supports or frames; reflectors with handles,
    vehicles, or controlling motors; and prisms with mountings.  Also, included
    are lenses with supports or mountings, lenses with diverse art tools,
    instruments or machines, lenses with casings and lenses with viewed object
    supports or viewed object or field illumination.  Additionally, included
    are stereo-viewers with view changers, illumination or supporting,
    mounting, enclosing or light shielding structure; lenses with spacing
    structure such as barrels with or without an additional support, handle or
    illumination; and optical elements with moisture or foreign particle
    control.

    E.      Included here also are certain accessories or attachments combined
    with optical elements such as blinds, shields, shades, and caps or covers
    for preventing the accumulation of dust, moisture, or other foreign
    material.

    III.    SUPPORTS OR MOUNTS FOR OPTICAL ELEMENTS AND SYSTEMS

    Included here also are supports, mounts, and frames which are particularly
    adapted for use with optical elements.  The nominal recitation of a mirror
    or filter in combination with such structure is generally not sufficient
    for classification here, if the mirror or filter is treated as a panel or
    lamina of general utility.  Class 52, Static Structures (e.g., Buildings),
    provides for such panels with associated components, such as frames,
    edging, backing, etc., mechanically and permanently assembled thereto.
    Class 248, Supports, subclasses 466+ provides for supports for such panel
    type structures.  However, combinations of a detailed mirror with its
    support are classified in this class (359), subclasses 871+.  In the case
    of other optical elements, such as prisms or lenses, the broad recitation
    of the element in combination with the support or mounting is sufficient
    for classification in this class. Subclasses 811+, 831, and 892 provide for
    lenses, prisms, and filters respectively with supports.

    Stereo-viewer supports and mountings are provided for in subclass 477.

    IV.     NONVISIBLE RADIATION

    Included in this class are not only those elements which operate in the
    visible portion of the spectrum, but also those which operate in the near
    visible portion of the spectrum (i.e., infrared and ultraviolet) in
    accordance with optical principles.  Systems which function in both the
    visible and near visible portions of the spectrum are classified here
    unless a specific structure is claimed as a result of the utilization of
    invisible ray energy. Systems whose operation is restricted to the
    nonvisible portion of the spectrum are classified in Class 250, Radiant
    Energy.

    V.      OPTICAL SYSTEM INCLUDING PHOTOCELL

    Generally, where a photocell is claimed as a part of the optical system,
    the subject matter is excluded from this class.  Such subject matter is
    typically provided for in Class 250, Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ or in
    the measuring and testing subclasses discussed below. However, where a
    modulating signal is recovered from a modulated light wave (as in an
    optical communication receiver or in an optical demodulator),
    classification is in Class 359.

    VI.     OPTICAL WAVEGUIDES

    Optical waveguiding elements, per se, are classified in Class 385. Also,
    combinations of an optical waveguide with an associated mechanical
    connecting device or a device coupling light into or out of the optical
    waveguide are classified in Class 385.

    VII.    OPTICAL MODULATION

    An optical modulator, in general, is classified in this class (359).
    However, optical modulation occuring solely within the confines of an
    optical waveguide is excluded from this class. Such subject matter is
    provided for in Class 385.

    VIII.OPTICAL AMPLIFICATION OR FREQUENCY CONVERSION

    A detailed optical amplifier/frequency converter, per se, or such subject
    matter in combination with an additional waveguide structure is classified
    in this class (359).  However, the nominal recitation of any type of
    optical amplifier/frequency converter together with an additional waveguide
    structure is classified in Class 385 where such combination meets the class
    requirements.

    IX.     MEASURING AND TESTING

    A claimed image forming optical system plus a reticle is classified in this
    class. Sighting instruments for determining geometrical relationships where
    no significant optical system is claimed are classified in Class 33,
    Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 227+. Class 356, Optics:  Measuring and
    Testing, provides generally for measuring and testing systems which
    determine the optical characteristics of light so as to measure materials
    and provides for lens or reflective image former testing in subclasses
    124+. Class 351, Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting,
    subclasses 200+, provides for eye examining and testing instruments.

    X.      LASERS

    Lasers and similar devices, per se, are excluded from this class.  They are
    provided for in Class 372, Coherent Light Generators, appropriate
    subclasses when they function as a generator of coherent electromagnetic
    waves in the optical range.

    XI.     OPTICAL TELEMETRY

    Optical telemetry includes the combination of an optical data link between
    multiple locations together with a specific sensor used in a particular
    environment. Since the overall combination specifies an environment or
    specific sensor, the environment or sensor will control the classification.
    The following are examples of proper art areas for optical telemetry:(1)
    Wellbore telemetry including any type of radiant energy; (i.e., optical,
    radio, etc.) is classified in Class 340, subclasses 853.1+.(2) An optical
    data link in combination with a specific sensor is classified in Class 340,
    subclasses 870.28+, unless there is a place for the specific sensor in
    another class.

    XII.    COMPOSITIONS AND STOCK MATERIAL

    Where there is no shape or structure peculiar to optical elements as in
    compositions or stock material, the subject matter is excluded from this
    class.  The following classes provide for these compositions and stock
    material:

    252,    Compositions, for compositions generally, subclasses 299.01+
    providing for  compositions of liquid crystals and subclasses 582+
    providing for other light transmission modifying compositions.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 59+
    for a sun or radiation screening or sun tanning composition intended for
    topical application to a living body.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 1 for
    miscellaneous liquid crystal articles and appropriate subclasses for a
    metallic or nonmetallic stock material product in the form of a single or
    plural layer web or sheet or a structurally defined or coated rod, strand,
    fiber flake or other element and a nonstructural metallic or nonmetallic
    composite web or sheet defined by the compositions of the layers.  Note
    subclass 910 (a cross-reference art collection) for a product with
    molecular orientation.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 100+ for high temperature (Tc  30 K) superconducting material.



    XIII.OPTICAL ELEMENTS CLASSIFIED ELSEWHERE

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 815.76 for lens type
    indicator.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 909+ for radio
    wave refracting means and filters.

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclasses
    159+ for spectacle lenses.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 396 for measurements
    involving moire patterns caused by plural optical grids relatively movable
    with respect to each other and subclass 242 for moire pattern examination
    of mesh or grid like material including knitted fabrics to determine the
    number of threads, lines or the spacing between the lines.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 341+ and 326+ respectively for reflecting
    and refracting elements to be used with an artificial source of
    illumination.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, appropriate subclasses for light wave
    transmitting devices.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 150+ for high temperature (Tc  30 K) superconducting device, and
    particularly subclasses 181+ for photoconductive, light transmissive, light
    emissive, or light responsive device or component.



    XIV.    OPTICAL ELEMENTS COMBINED WITH DIVERSE TYPE ART DEVICES

    An optical element combined with a diverse type art device where the
    element results in an improvement or perfection of the device is generally
    classified with the device.  See (1) Note under subclass 809 for details of
    this distinction with reference to lenses, and under "SEARCH CLASS" of
    subclass 838 for numerous combinations of a reflector and diverse type art
    device.  Class 313, Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 110+
    provides for the combination of an optical element and an electric
    discharge device. See also section IID above.

    The following are the more common external classifications of systems
    including or combined with optical elements.

     33,    Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 227+ for sighting devices for
    determining geometrical relationships.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for optical systems for controlling
    or controlled by a photocell and subclasses 336.1 to 395 for methods and
    apparatus for the detection of invisible, radiation or the testing of
    material by invisible radiation for the production, transmission, control
    or general utilization of invisible radiant energy, including cathode rays,
    ultra-violet rays and the radiations and emanations of radio-active
    substances and the irradiation of material not limited to particular arts.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 110+ for an
    electron lamp or discharge device having an optical device structurally
    combined therewith.

    348,    Television, subclasses 195+, 335+, 744+, and 832+ for optical
    systems included in television systems.

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, for
    spectacles and instruments for vision testing and eye examining.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, for optical systems used in motion
    picture apparatus.

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, for image projectors.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, for methods and apparatus for
    analyzing light, determining the optical or nonoptical properties of
    materials, measuring optically dimensions, determining optically spatial
    relations and inspecting optically for flaws and imperfections, within the
    scope of this class and not otherwise classifiable.

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 400+ for optical systems included in
    facsimile systems.

    362,    Illumination, appropriate subclasses for light sources combined
    with optical light modifiers, especially subclass 19 for light sources with
    polarizers; subclasses 166+ and 293 for light sources with selected
    wavelength filters; subclass 268 for light sources combined with plural
    serial lens elements; subclasses 296+ for light sources with reflectors;
    subclasses 326+ and 341+ for refractors and reflectors, respectively for
    use with light sources.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 525 for
    the application of a computer in the area of physics concerned with the
    nature and properties of light; subclass 822 for optical correlation or
    convolution and subclass 837 for electro-optical analog integrators.  This
    class will accept optical computers where the resultant mathematical
    operation is in the form of an electrical signal.  For mathematical
    operations performed by optical means, classification is in Class 359.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 64, 106+,
    120+, 215+, and 234+ for systems and circuits utilizing radiant energy.

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, appropriate subclasses for oscillators
    of the quantum electronic type for generating coherent electromagnetic
    waves in the optical range by stimulated emission of radiation (e.g.,
    lasers, irasers).

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 145+ for X-ray
    beam control devices.

    396,    Photography, appropriate subclasses for still cameras.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics, subclasses 38+
    for controls, subclasses 130+ for image formation, subclasses 168+ for
    charging, subclasses 177+ for exposure, subclasses 222+ for development,
    subclasses 297+ for transfer, subclasses 320+ for fixing, subclasses 343+
    for cleaning, and subclasses 361+ for document handling.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 150+ for high temperature (Tc  30 K) superconducting device; and
    particularly subclasses 181+ for photoconductive, light transmissive, light
    emissive, or light responsive device or component.



    XV.     METHODS OF MAKING OPTICAL ELEMENTS CLASSIFIED ELSEWHERE

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 385+ for processes for forming
    optical fibers, waveguides, or preforms; subclass 31 for chemical glass
    etching; subclasses 37+ for glass lens making.

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes and non-coating apparatus for
    growing therein-defined single-crystal of all types of materials, including
    inorganic or organic.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    99+ for optically transparent glass sandwich making.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclass 71 for the electroforming of a mirror
    or reflector and subclass 116 for producing a mirror or reflector by
    electrolytic coating.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 1.1+ for optical article shaping or treating.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 162+ for coating processes, per se,
    wherein the product is an optical element.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 42+ for a lens grinding process and subclasses
    323 and 325 for a machine for grinding an optical lens.


CLS 359/1
TXT HOLOGRAPHIC SYSTEM OR ELEMENT:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein apparatus for forming a
    record of the phase and amplitude information of a wavefront where the
    information can be used to reconstruct the original wavefront; apparatus to
    reconstruct the original wavefront from a record containing the phase and
    amplitude information of this wavefront; or the record itself is recited.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is the generic locus for subject matter
    relating to holography.  However, where particular use or application is
    claimed, classification is in the appropriate use or application class.

    (2)     Note.  Nominally claimed subject matter external to this class in
    combination with holography is classified here.  Significantly claimed
    subject matter external to this class in combination with holography is
    classified in the class appropriate to the external subject matter.

    (3)     Note.  Interferometers are excluded from this subclass and are
    classified in Class 356, subclasses 345+.

    (4)     Note.  Holographic memories including those having a nominal
    recitation of a photodetector or photocell are included in this or the
    indented subclasses.  Static holographic storage and retrieval systems
    having electrical circuitry are classified in Class 365.

    (5)     Note.  Dynamic holographic storage and retreival systems having
    eletrical circuitry are classified in Class 369.

    (6)     Note.  Mere nominal recitation of developing, fixing, bleaching, or
    etching a photographic recording medium does not exclude the subject matter
    from this class.  Holographic systems including significant chemical
    processing steps are classifed in Class 430, Radiation Imagery Chemistry:
    Process, Composition, or Product Thereof.

    (7)     Note.  Systems for making holographic matched filters are included
    in this and the indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    558+,   for correlation systems using holographic matched filters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 603+ and 656 for acoustic
    holographic testing and for holographic interferometry in which an object
    is acted upon during the test, as for example, stressed or vibrated.

    235,    Registers, subclass 457 for holographic coded record sensors with
    particular circuitry to process electrical signals.

    250,    Radiant Energy, appropriate subclasses, for holographic systems
    that use radiation entirely outside of the optical or microwave ranges and
    which is not acoustic, and subclass 550 for photocell circuits and
    apparatus for interference pattern analysis (e.g., holography).

    283,    Printed Matter, appropriate subclasses for holograms in combination
    with credit or identification cards.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 980 for nonalarm flight
    indicator visible in pilot's line-of-sight through windscreen..

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 176+ for head up display combined with
    radar.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 7+ for heads-up displays with
    selective electrical control.

    348,    Television, subclasses 40+ for television systems which use
    holography.

    355,    Photocopying, subclass 2 for photographic copying of holograms by
    nonholographic means.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 347+ for holographic
    interferometry in general.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, for electrical
    computers or data processing systems which may use holography.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 125, 216, and
    235 for holographic storage and retrieval of information systems including
    significant and particular electrical circuitry.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 8+ for acoustic holography in general.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 103 for dynamic
    storage or retrieval using a holographic storage medium.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclass 36 for X-ray
    holography or interferometry.

    380,    Cryptography, subclass 54 for this subject matter used in a device
    for revealing concealed information.

    382,    Image Analysis, subclasses 210+ for spatial filtering (e.g.,
    holography) in a pattern recognition system.

    396,    Photography, for photography in general.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 1+ for holographic systems involving significant
    chemical processing steps, composition, or product.

    600,    Surgery, Subclasses 101+ for endoscopes.


CLS 359/2
TXT Authentication:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a hologram is used to provide proof
    that a document is not counterfeit or to make a document copy-proof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    283,    Printed Matter, for document authentification with nominally
    recited holograms.

    380,    Cryptography, subclass 54 for modifying an optical image in order
    to conceal or reveal a hidden message.


CLS 359/3
TXT Having particular recording medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 in which details of the internal structure
    of a holographic recording medium is defined either physically or
    chemically.

    (1)     Note.  An example of such a physical definition:  "a multilayer
    emulsion, each layer being sensitive to a different color".  A chemical
    defintion: "thermoplastic tape".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclass 1 for holographic processes involving significant
    chemical processing steps composition or product; and appropriate
    subclasses for radiation chemical recording media, per se.


CLS 359/4
TXT Recyclable:

    Subject matter under subclass 3 in which the recording medium is of such a
    nature that the recorded information can be erased to permit further
    record-erase cycles.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are photochromics, thermochromics, dye cells,
    magnetic films, etc.


CLS 359/5
TXT Magnetic material:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 wherein the recording medium is a material
    which is alterable by application of magnetic force.


CLS 359/6
TXT Sandwich having photoconductor:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 in which the recording medium is integral
    with a layer of material which, when illuminated, undergoes a decrease in
    resistance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 10, 11, 21, 53-56, 72, 113-118, 184-189, 225-234, 257, 258,
    290-294, 414, 431-466, and 910 for light responsive active semiconductor
    devices.


CLS 359/7
TXT Cyrstalline material:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 in which the recording material is either a
    single crystal or in polycrystalline form.


CLS 359/8
TXT Having nonplanar recording medium surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 3 in which an illuminated portion of the
    recording medium surface is curved, as into a cylinder, or bent or folded
    during recording or readout.


CLS 359/9
TXT For synthetically generating a hologram:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including means for providing a hologram of
    a single object by other than a single exposure to the interference pattern
    of light from the object as a whole and a reference beam.

    (1)     Note.  Holographic stereograms are considered recordings of
    different images and are excluded from this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Synthetically generated holograms which include only
    algorithms or data processing, per se, are classified in Class 364,
    subclass 525.

    (3)     Note.  Holographic memories are excluded in which an object beam is
    scanned so as to act as a page composer when each bit is intended to be
    separately detected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for holographic stereograms.


CLS 359/10
TXT Using modulated or plural reference beams:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 in which a hologram is formed by
    interfering an object-modulated beam with another beam which is spatially
    or temporally modulated or with a plurality of other beams.

    (1)     Note.  Phase modulation systems to compensate for object motion and
    systems for extending the depth of fluid are included here.


CLS 359/11
TXT Spatial, phase or amplitude modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 in which the reference beam is modulated
    by changing its phase, path length, or amplitude so as to have a nonuniform
    wavefront.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22+,    for spatial multiplexed holograms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 49 for
    associative holographic memories.


CLS 359/12
TXT Copying by holographic means:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 in which an image reconstructed from one
    hologram is used as the object in making a second hologram.

    (1)     Note.  Systems in which a holographic analog to an ordinary optical
    element is used to shape or form a beam used to make a second hologram, but
    which does not by itself provide the object information for the second
    hologram are excluded.  Such systems are classified based on the other
    claimed features in subclass 1 and its indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    355,    Photocopying, appropriate subclasses for photographic copying, in
    general.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclass 118 for optics with particular modular
    or displaceable structure, subclass 137 optical intermediate storage of
    original image, subclasses 196+ for variable magnification during exposure,
    subclass 216 for slit exposure by pivoting mirror, subclass 218 for lens
    used in exposure, and subclass 219 for fiber optics used in exposure.


CLS 359/13
TXT Head up display:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a first image is optically
    superimposed upon a second image within a field of view.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 7+ for heads-up displays with
    selective electrical control.


CLS 359/14
TXT Holograph on curved substrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein a holograph is formed on a medium
    which is not flat.


CLS 359/15
TXT Using a hologram as an optical element:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a holographic equivalent to an
    ordinary optical element is formed or used and wherein the holographic
    equivalent does not itself contain any intelligence or image information
    more significant than a point image.

    (1)     Note.  The optical elements for which the hologram may be
    substituted include lenses, reflectors, diffusers, gratings, polarizers,
    beam splitters or combiners, filters, and phase plates or beam couplers.


CLS 359/16
TXT With aberration correction:

    Subject matter under subclass 15 which compensates for the inability of an
    optical system to provide a point to point correspondence between an object
    and its image.


CLS 359/17
TXT Scanner:

    Subject matter under subclass 15 in which a hologram is used to direct a
    beam of light successively over the elements of a given region.

    (1)     Note.  Systems using a holographic element to convert one scan
    pattern to another are included here.


CLS 359/18
TXT Flat rotating disk:

    Subject matter under subclass 17 where the scanning element is a planar
    surface, containing holographic segments, which is rotated about an axis
    normal to the surface.


CLS 359/19
TXT Lens:

    Subject matter under subclass 15 in which the holographic equivalent is an
    optical device which focuses light.

    (1)     Note.  Holograms which are used to form a single image of an
    extended two- or three-dimensional object are included here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    362+,   for compound lens systems.

    642+,   for lenses.


CLS 359/20
TXT Multiple point hologram (e.g., fly-eye lens, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 19 wherein a hologram, which simulates one
    produced by the interference of two beams with one of the beams consisting
    of a plurality of separate subbeams, is produced which is the analog of a
    plurality of lenses in a plane such as lenticular or fly eye lens array.


CLS 359/21
TXT Having defined page composer:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including the details of the internal
    structure of a changeable modulator, which serves as the principle object
    in a system for making a plurality of holograms, where the internal
    conditions of the modulator represent the intelligence to be recorded in
    the holograms.

    (1)     Note.  Systems in which a page composer is merely nominally recited
    are excluded from this subclass and are classified on the basis of the
    other claimed features in subclass 1 and its indented subclasses.


CLS 359/22
TXT For producing or reconstructing images from multiple holograms (e.g.,
    color, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising systems specifically adapted for
    making a plurality of holograms, simultaneously or sequentially, of
    different intelligence or for reading out images from a plurality of
    holograms.

    (1)     Note.  Holographic stereograms are classified in subclass 23.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for synthetically generating holograms.

    23,     for holographic stereograms.


CLS 359/23
TXT Holographic stereogram:

    Subject matter under subclass 22 including a series of holograms made from
    a series of two-dimensional pictures of a three-dimensional object, each
    picture representing a different parallactic view of the object, and upon
    readout the hologram series represents a three-dimensional view to an
    observer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for synthetically generating a hologram.

    462+,   for nonholographic stereoscopic devices.


CLS 359/24
TXT Superimposed holograms only:

    Subject matter under subclass 22 in which the plurality of holograms are
    fully overlapped on the same recording medium only.

    (1)     Note.  Typical subject matter of this subclass include (a)
    holograms made with multicolor illumination and (b) systems using spatial
    frequency multiplexing or pupil separation.


CLS 359/25
TXT Discrete hologram only:

    Subject matter under subclass 22 in which the plurality of holograms are
    arranged in a side-by-side relationship on only one integral recording
    medium or have an equivalent fixed side-by-side spatial relationship to
    each other such as in a frame having windows containing the holo-grams.

    (1)     Note.  Space division multiplexing systems wherein holograms are
    discretely recorded and interlaced are included here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for holographic stereograms.


CLS 359/26
TXT Sequential frames on moving film:

    Subject matter under subclass 25 in which the plurality of holograms will,
    upon readout, produce images whose spatial location will move as a function
    of the movement of the holograms and in which movement of the holograms is
    used to provide for sequential readout of the individual images at a fixed
    location in space.

    (1)     Note.  Holographic movies or books and holograms of time varying
    electrical signals are typical of the subject matter included here.


CLS 359/27
TXT Having particular laser source:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including a laser as a light source wherein
    the physical or chemical internal structure of the laser is explicity
    defined.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, appropriate subclasses for lasers, per
    se.


CLS 359/28
TXT Having multiple object beam or diffuse object illumination:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 in which a plurality of light beams are
    used to illuminate an object whose image is to be recorded or in which the
    light illuminating the object has been modulated by a diffuser or the
    equivalent.


CLS 359/29
TXT Fourier transform holography:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 where the transmission factor of a hologram
    closely approximates a Fourier integral.

    (1)     Note.  The Fourier Transform, F(w), of a function, f(t), is given
    by


CLS 359/30
TXT Having optical element between object and recording medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising systems for producing holograms
    in which an optical element, such as a lens, grating, mask, or mirror is
    located in the path of the light between the object whose image is to be
    recorded and the holographic recording medium and systems for
    reconstructing an image from such holograms in which an equivalent optical
    element having an equivalent spatial location relative to the holo-gram
    must be used during readout.


CLS 359/31
TXT Focused image holography:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 in which an image of the intelligence to
    be recorded is formed on, in, or very close to the recording medium when
    producing a hologram or in which an image is formed on, in, or very close
    to the hologram during readout.


CLS 359/32
TXT For reconstructing image:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 used for reading out the intelligence
    recorded in a hologram.


CLS 359/33
TXT Real image:

    Subject matter under subclass 32 for recon-structing a hologram made of an
    image formed by light collected at a single  point as opposed to a virtual
    image.


CLS 359/34
TXT With optical waveguide:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including one or more optically transparent
    elongated structures (e.g., rods, fibers, or waveguides) are used to
    transmit light rays from one point to another through modal transmission or
    within the confines of their outer surfaces through internal reflection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    385,    Optical Waveguides, appropriate subclasses for optical waveguides,
    per se.


CLS 359/35
TXT Hardware for producing a hologram:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including physical components (e.g.,
    fittings, tools, or metal equipment of a system, etc.) used in creating a
    holographic image.


CLS 359/107
TXT OPTICAL COMPUTING WITHOUT DIFFRACTION:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein basic and more involved
    mathematical processes of comparing, adding, substracting, multiplying,
    dividing, integrating, etc., are perfomed by  optical elements on an
    optical beam prior to any conversion to another form of energy.

    (1)     Note.  The optical beam itself performs the computing.

    (2)     Note.  The computing of this and the indented subclass optically
    works on a single input optical beam to produce a desired output optical
    beam, but this optical computing is not intended to encompass convolution
    (crosscorrela-tion) or correlation functions performed by a diffration
    grating.

    (3)     Note.  Electrical computing for optical purposes without any
    computation using an optical beam are not classified  in this subclass (See
    Search Class for Class 364, subclass 200).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    560,    for convolution or cross-correlation using a diffraction grating.


    561,    for correlation using a diffraction grating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 200+ for fluid logic.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Pro-cessing Systems, subclass 200 for
    general purpose programmable digital com-puter systems, and subclass 900
    for miscellaneous digital data processing systems.


CLS 359/108
TXT Logic gate:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein the optical beam performs the
    operation known to be performed by an AND, OR, NOR, NOT, etc., gate and the
    optical beam output is the resultant of the relationship of all the input
    optical beams as designed prior to the application of the optical beams.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 200+ for fluid gates.

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, for electrical digital logic
    circuits.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 194 for
    data processing with specific algorithm.


CLS 359/109
TXT OPTICAL COMMUNICATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein an information signal is
    transmitted through a medium between an optical transmitter and optical
    receiver by means of variation in a characteristic of light waves.

    (1)     Note.  "Light" includes infrared and ultraviolet radiation.

    (2)     Note.  The characteristic which is varied may include, e.g.,
    amplitude,frequency, phase, polarity, or color.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass includes subject matter that communicates data
    or information from one location to another via some optical system.

    (4)     Note.  Apparatus having a source of light signal containing
    information to be conveyed to a light source via an optical link are
    classified in this and indented subclasses regardless of the source being
    controlled by a different form of energy (e.g., electrical or
    electromagnetic field) or the optical output of the sensor being converted
    to a different form of energy.

    (5)     Note.  Optical communication to objects only within a predetermined
    location (i.e., direction, etc.) from the source would be classified in
    this or indented subclasses since the prime objective is to communicate
    information and the actual location is only a factor to ensure that the
    message goes there.  The detection of range, direction, etc., of the
    object, without any data communication to that object, would be classified
    in Class 356.

     (6)    Note.  Optical switching, per se, is classified in Class 385,
    Optical Waveguides, but optical switching to perform a specified function
    would be classified with the function.  Optical switching in an optical
    communication system, where data is moved from one location to another, is
    classified in this or indented subclasses.

    (7)     Note.  The optical telemetry of Class 340, subclasses 853.1+ and
    Class 340, subclasses 870.28+ includes the combination of an optical
    communcation system, as in this subclass or the indents thereunder,
    combined with a particular claimed sensor.  The optical communication
    systems of this and indented subclasses transfer optical data from one
    location to another via a data link but no specific sensor is set forth in
    the claims.  For example, wellbore telemetry using any type of energy
    (i.e., radio, acoustic, magnetic, optic, etc.) is classified in the single
    art area, presently located in Class 340, subclasses 553+, since the
    wellbore environment is important for searching.  Telemetry having a
    specified claimed sensor belongs with the type of sensing or in Class 340,
    subclasses 870.28+, if not elsewhere classified.

    (8)     Note.  Optical communication by turning the light on and off
    without any modulation of the transmitted light is classified in Class 116,
    Signals and Indicators, subclass 20.

    (9)     Note.  Optical communication in combination with electrical
    communication (Class 455, Telecommunication or Class 370, Multiplex
    Communications) is classified in this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    for optical multiplex communication with plural signal
    communication.

    152,    for optical transceivers.

    174,    for a repeater or relay which does not alter message content.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclasses (e.g., 20) for
    helliographic signalling wherein signals are given by
    mechanically-controlled intermittant flashes of light, usually reflected
    sunlight.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for electrical circuits whose
    operations are controlled by means of a photocell, electrical circuits for
    supplying current and/or potential to a photocell and photocells in
    combination with optical means for controlling the radiant energy which
    illuminated the photocell, subclasses 336.1+ for systems for detecting the
    presence of or measuring the quantity or quality of invisible radiant
    energy rays, and subclass 551 for an optical signal isolator, per se.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 13, 79-103, and 918 for incoherent light emitting injection
    luminescent devices.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for control systems for controlling the operation of electric
    lamps or discharge devices in which system the lamp or discharge device is
    the endload.

    329,    Demodulators, for demodulation of modulated electrical signals.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 59 for amplifiers having light-controlled or
    activated devices (i.e., not optical signal), and subclass 308 for
    amplifiers having radiant energy impinging on a semiconductor.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 66 for electrical oscillators with a device
    responsive to heat or light.

    332,    Modulators, for modulators of electrical signals.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 853+ for wellbore telemetry
    that could use optical energy, and subclasses 870.28+ for telemetering
    systems employing radiant energy beam (e.g., Infrared) transmission.

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), appropriate subclasses for radio wave range and
    direction finding apparatus (Range and Direction Finding).

    348,    Television, subclasses 335+ for electro-optical means utilized in a
    TV system.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 1+ for motion picture
    apparatus with sound accompaniment.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 3+ includes optics and
    the optical range or remote distance finding apparatus, subclasses 26+
    include optical velocity measuring, and subclasses 139+ include optical
    angle measuring or axial alignment.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 173+ for
    relay or electromagnet circuits utilizing photosensitive devices.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 257+ for light source and subclasses 317+
    for light modifiers.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 108 for liquid
    crystal radiant energy type.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 100+ for sound
    recording or reproduction utilizing electrooptical transducers or
    photographic sound records.

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, for laser amplifiers and oscillators.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 121+ in particular for
    radiation responsive thermometers.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 219+ for transceivers
    operated at radio frequencies.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 56.1+ for a light wave link
    for speech or a paging signal, subclasses 74+ for remote control over a
    telephone line, and subclasses 379+ for an optical link between the line
    and switching system used as a part of the line or loop condition detection.

    380,    Cryptography, subclass 54 for modifying an optical image to appear
    to be something other than what it is, i.e., to change the content to not
    be understandable.

    455,    Telecommunications, for Radio Frequency Telecommunications.


CLS 359/110
TXT Diagnostic testing of optical communication:

    Subject matter under subclass 109 wherein the system as a whole, not just a
    single piece of the system, is evaluated prior to the communication use.

    (1)     Note.  The overall combination of an optical communication system
    having, for example, an optical link between a transceiver and a repeater
    is classified in this class.

    (2)     Note.  If the transceiver, while operating in the total optical
    communication system as classified in this class, is being tested by a
    device using optical signals, the claimed subject matter is classified in
    this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177,    for monitoring an optical regenerative repeater during operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, for optically testing of individual
    pieces of an optical communication system.  Subclass 73.1 for optical fiber
    or waveguide inspection.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclasses
    20.1+ for the electrical testing of a transmission facility.


CLS 359/111
TXT Interference signal transmission or elimination (e.g., jamming or
    antijamming):

    Subject matter under subclass 109 wherein a signal, used to interfere with
    a selected signal so as to prevent the intelligible reception of the
    selected signal, is either transmitted or eliminated.

    (1)     Note.  The jamming signal of this subclass is independent of the
    information signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 13+ for radio wave jamming and
    antijamming.

    380,    Cryptography, subclasses 6+ for concealment of information by
    masking (i.e., coding) of an interference bearing signal.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 1 for in-terference signal
    transmissions (e.g., jamming) that are telecommunication, not optical
    signals.


CLS 359/112
TXT Eavesdropping:

    Subject matter under subclass 109 wherein the information content of an
    optical communication message intended for one receiver is obtained
    surreptitiously by another without the other parties being notified.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclass 35 for listening-in or
    eavesdropping type telephonic service monitoring or observation.


CLS 359/113
TXT Duplex:

    Subject matter under subclass 109 wherein a single optical link between an
    optical transmitter and receiver permits simultaneous transmission and
    reception of plural optical signals in the same or opposite directions.

    (1)     Note.  Full duplex allows the simultaneous transmission in either
    of two directions, but only one direction at a time.

    (2)     Note.  Half duplex allows data transmission in either of two
    directions, but only one direction at a time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    for optical transceivers which transmit a signal in response to the
    received signal.


CLS 359/114
TXT Wavelength division:

    Subject matter under subclass 113 wherein bi-directional transmission over
    a single fiber is permitted by causing two light beams to travel in
    different wavelength bands and different directions within the same medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124,    for wavelength division only in one direction within the same
    medium for multiplexing purposes.


CLS 359/115
TXT Multiplex:

    Subject matter under subclass 109 wherein two or more information signals
    are controlled to be interleaved or simultaneously transmitted in either or
    both directions over a common (same) transmission medium in such a manner
    that the information signals may be directly recovered.

    (1)     Note.  The use of  a waveguide with an optical coupler switch to
    effect the multiplexing would be classified in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Optical Time Slot interchange should not be included in this
    class since all scrambling of any energy type should go to Class 380,
    Cryptography.

    (3)     Note.  Since optical demultiplex communication would often require
    the use of a photocell to convert the optical signal to an electrical
    signal, the demultiplexing is often done electrically, which is not
    classifiable in Class 359.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 870.28+ for telemetering
    via radiant energy beam.

    348,    Television, subclasses 343+ for camera optical multiplexing.

    380,    Cryptography, subclass 36 for time segment interchange wherein slot
    portions of the signal are interchanged prior to transmission in order to
    scramble the signal.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, subclasses 16+for the combination of a
    waveguide and switch not included in an optical communication system.


CLS 359/116
TXT Mode:

    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein each light beam is applied to an
    optical cable at an angle which differs from the other light beams in order
    to be able to distinguish the light beams when they are applied to the
    cable simultaneously.


CLS 359/117
TXT Spatial or switching:

    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein multiple information beams are
    separated by the use of a switch to selectively direct individual
    information portions of a light beam to either separate individual light
    conductive elements or separate directions in space.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter may include a waveguide with a switch as
    a subcombination thereof (see Search Class Note for Class 385).

    (2)     Note.  The optical telemetry  of Class 340, subclasses 853+ and
    Class 340, subclasses 870.28+, include the combination of an optical
    communication system, as in this subclass or the indents thereunder,
    combined with a particular claimed sensor.  The optical communication
    systems of this and indented subclasses transfer optical data from one
    location to another via a data link, but no specific sensor is set forth in
    the claims.  For example, wellbore teleme-try using any type of energy
    (i.e., radio, acoustic, magnetic, optic, etc.) belongs in the single art
    area, presently located in Class 340, subclasses 553+, since the wellbore
    environment is important for searching.  Telemetry having a specified
    claimed sensor belongs with the type of sensing or in Class 340, subclasses
    870.28+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    385,    Optical Waveguides, subclasses 16+ for the combination of a
    waveguide and switch not included in an optical communications system.


CLS 359/118
TXT Optical local area network (LAN):

    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein multiple optical stations are
    interconnected via a network of fiber optics to enable transmission and
    reception between the stations.

    (1)     Note.  Electrical wiring networks are excluded since they are not
    optical waveguides.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for a nonoptical
    bus transmission local area network having token passing, loop or ring, etc.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, appropriate subclasses for the fibers
    themselves without the optical multiplex communication environment.


CLS 359/119
TXT Loop:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein the local area network consists
    of a series of stations connected to each other and the last station is
    connected to the first station.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclasses 222+ for fault recovery of a ring or loop network, subclass 258
    for network configuration determination in a ring system, subclasses 403+
    and 406 for packet switching in a ring network, and 452+ for channel
    assignment by polling on a ring network.


CLS 359/120
TXT Active star:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein an optical data distribution
    system, containing a common node connected to one end of each of three or
    more branches and the other end of the branches are connected to each
    member of a local area network multiplex system, permits optical
    information flow between all of the members; and each member receives its
    power (i.e., active) from the received optical signals.

    (1)     Note.  A collision detection device in a star has its own power
    supply yet the incoming optical signals are not converted to electrical
    energy and this subject matter would be classified in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Incoming optical signals which become the source of power
    within the star for all terminals as a result of conversion into electrical
    signals would be classified in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121,    for passive star local area networks (LAN's).


CLS 359/121
TXT Passive star:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein an optical data distribution
    system, containing a common node connected to one end of each of three or
    more branches and the other end of the branches are connected to each
    member of a local area network multiplex system, permits optical
    information flow between all of the members; and each member has its own
    power supply (i.e., passive) and does not change the power of the optical
    signals it receives from each member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for active star local area networks (LAN's).

    178,    for a star in an optical repeater.


CLS 359/122
TXT Polarization:

    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein the multiple signals are
    distinguished from one another by the particular individual signal
    vibration perpendicular to the ray direction of travel.

    (1)     Note.  The vibrations are straight lines, circles, or ellipses
    which produce, respectively, plane, circular or elliptical polarization.

    (2)     Note.  The light waves are modulated by altering the polarization
    (relative to a reference) in accordance with the information signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246+,   for electro-optical modulation of polarized light.

    281+,   for magneto-optical modulation of polarized light.

    301+,   for light wave directional modulation acting on polarized light.

    483+,   for polarization without modulation.


CLS 359/123
TXT Time and frequency division:

    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein information is transmitted on
    different segments of a transmission medium, which segments are divided
    based upon the frequency spectrum and discrete time intervals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124,    for frequency division multiplexing only.

    135,    for time division multiplexing only.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclasses 330 and 436 for combined time and frequency channels assignments
    in wireless or wired multiplex communications, and subclass 478 for
    combined time and frequency division multiplexing.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, subclasses 31+ for the combination of a
    waveguide and an input/output coupler not included in an optical
    communications system.


CLS 359/124
TXT Wavelength division/frequency division (includes scattering, e.g., Raman,
    Brillouin, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein (1) two or more information
    optical signals simultaneously present on a common optical waveguide are
    differentiated by optical wavelength or (2) the frequency spectrum of the
    optical transmission medium is divided into segments and respective
    information channels are transmitted in differing segments.

    (1)     Note.  Waveguide division multiplexing (fiber optics) are
    identified as WDM.

    (2)     Note.  Differing segments need not be associated on a one-to-one
    basis with the information channels.

    (3)     Note.  This subject matter may include waveguide with an
    input/output coupler as a subcombination thereof (see Search Class Notes
    for Class 385).

    (4)     Note.  Stimulated Raman effect is the amplification, built up
    strongly and generally exhibiting the characteristic of stimulated emission
    of the small portion of light that is scattered in random directions when a
    monochromatic light beam of high intensity is transmitted through matter.
    This small portion of light is equal to the frequencies of the matter.

    (5)     Note.  A Brillouin type nonlinear opitcal device spontaneously
    scatters light in a medium by its interaction with sound waves passing
    through the medium.  If this includes frequency shifted radiation with
    optical multiplexing, it would go into this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for optical transceiver wavelength duplex wherein two optical beams
    having different wavelengths are transmitted in opposite directions in the
    same medium.

    123,    for time and frequency division multi-plex.

    149,    for photophone wherein an audio signal is directly modulated onto a
    light beam.

    327,    for Raman type frequency translators, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclasses 281 and 295 for frequency division in wireless or wired
    nonoptical duplex systems, respectively, and subclasses 343+ and 480+ for
    frequency division in wireless or wired nonoptical multiplex communications
    systems, respectively.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, subclasses 31+ for the combination of a
    waveguide and an input/output coupler not included in an optical
    communications system.


CLS 359/125
TXT Subscriber system:

    Subject matter under subclass 124 comprising plural stations prearranged to
    enable preselected stations to receive identified information at the same
    time it is transmitted.

    (1)     Note.  These systems transmit the data without any coding, but the
    data itself identifies the specific stations that are to receive the
    transmitted data.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communications, appropriate  subclasses for nonoptical
    subscriber checking.

    380,    Cryptography, appropriate subclasses for coding of the information
    signal to prevent unauthorized users from receiving the information.


CLS 359/126
TXT Optical source at only one station:

    Subject matter under subclass 125 wherein the optical beam communicated to
    all of the other stations in the system originates from a single station.

    (1)     Note.  This single station could be considered the master station
    since it is the source of energy for all other stations in the system.


CLS 359/127
TXT By optical coupling:

    Subject matter under subclass 124 wherein the multiplexing is accomplished
    by the optical device itself, which permits the transfer of light from one
    element to another.

    (1)     Note.  The combination of an optical coupler or input/output
    coupler, and wavelength division or frequency division optical
    communication system is classified in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    385,    Optical Waveguides, subclasses 15 (optical coupler) and 31
    (input/output coupler) for couplers not included in an optical
    communication system.


CLS 359/128
TXT Switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein the optical coupler selectively
    determines which output receives the input light beam.


CLS 359/129
TXT Prism:

    Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein a beam is coupled in or out of a
    waveguide to accomplish the desired multiplexing by one or more transparent
    bodies bounded in part by two plane surfaces which are angularly related
    (i.e., not parallel), at least one of these surfaces being internally
    reflecting or refracting to impinging incident light.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter includes the combination of a prism and
    wavelength division or frequency division optical communiction system (see
    Search Class Note for Class 385).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    831+,   for prisms, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    385,    Optical Waveguides, subclass 36 for prism coupling not included in
    an optical communication system.


CLS 359/130
TXT Grating:

    Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein (1) a beam is coupled in or out
    of a waveguide to accomplish the desired multiplexing by narrow parallel
    slits in a plate or (2) narrow parallel reflecting surfaces made by ruling
    grooves on polished metal break up the light waves as they emerge.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter includes the combination of a grating
    and wavelength division or frequency division optical communication system
    (see Search Class Note for Class 385).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    385,    Optical Waveguides, subclass 37 for a grating coupling not included
    in an optical communication sytem.


CLS 359/131
TXT Lens:

    Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein a beam is coupled in or out of a
    waveguide to accomplish the desired multiplexing by a trans-parent optical
    component consisting of one or more pieces of optical glass with the
    surfaces so curved (usually spherical) that they serve to converge or
    diverge the transmited rays.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter includes the combination of a lens and
    wavelength division or frequency division optical communication system (see
    Search Class Note for Class 385).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    385,    Optical Waveguides, subclass 33 for lens coupling not included in
    an optical communication system.


CLS 359/132
TXT Single source, electrically controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 124 wherein a single source of light is
    either wavelength division or frequency division optical multiplexed via an
    external electrical control signal.


CLS 359/133
TXT Different sources:

    Subject matter under subclass 124 wherein each channel of the common
    optical waveguide is supplied with data from separate origins of light.


CLS 359/134
TXT With pump:

    Subject matter under subclass 133 wherein the atoms, in at least one of the
    sources of a medium, are caused to be raised from certain lower to  certain
    higher energy levels to cause population inversion between certain
    intermediate levels in order to ultimately produce photons when the energy
    level moves from higher to lower levels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160,    for pumping in an optical transmitter and receiver system.

    345,    for a particular pumping type in an optical amplifier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, subclasses 69+ for particular pumping
    type which is not used for amplification of a light beam input.


CLS 359/135
TXT Time division:

    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein access to the optical
    transmission medium is divided into discrete time intervals and information
    from respective channels is transmitted in differing time intervals.

    (1)     Note.  Differing time intervals need not be associated on a
    one-to-one basis with the information channels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclasses 280 and 294 for time division in wireless or wired nonoptical
    duplex systems, respectively, and subclasses 345+ and 498+ for time
    division in wireless or wired nonoptical multiplex communications systems,
    respectively.


CLS 359/136
TXT Multiple access (e.g., CSMA, CDMA):

    Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein stations use a protocol to obtain
    access of a channel before sending a packet of information.

    (1)     Note.  Frequently, CSMA networks have a collision detection
    capability in which the transmission is immediatedly terminated when a
    collision of opposing carrier signals is detected.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclasses 319+, 329+, 342, 344, and 347+ for multiple access in wireless
    communications, and 431+ for multiple access in wired communications.


CLS 359/137
TXT Subscriber System:

    Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein the system is developed to
    communicate with prearranged plural time division multiplexed stations,
    thus enabling all preselected stations to receive identified information at
    the same time it is transmitted.

    (1)     Note.  These systems transmit the data without any coding, but the
    data itself identifies the specific stations that are to receive the
    transmitted data.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communications, appropriate subclasses for nonoptical
    subscriber checking.

    380,    Cryptography, appropriate subclasses for coding of the information
    signal to prevent unauthorized users from receiving the information.


CLS 359/138
TXT By specific optical element:

    Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein the time division optical
    multiplexing is produced by specifically identified optical elements.


CLS 359/139
TXT Optical switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 138 wherein the input light beam is optically
    directed to selected outputs in order to accomplish time division optical
    multiplexing.


CLS 359/140
TXT With delay:

    Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein the time division optical
    multiplexing is accomplished by the use of some delay of the input light
    beam.


CLS 359/141
TXT Underwater:

    Subject matter under subclass 109 wherein optical communication is
    performed via a light beam actually travelling through the water.

    (1)     Note.  This communication can be used by underwater divers.

    (2)     Note.  This subject matter can also be used in underwater repeaters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 131+ for underwater acoustic communications systems.


CLS 359/142
TXT Remote control:

    Subject matter under subclass 109 wherein a variable device is used to
    modulate an optical transmitter at a first location in order to control a
    remote electrically operated second device at a second location via an
    optical communication link between the transmitter and an optical receiver
    located at the second location and connected to the second device.

    (1)     Note.  The devices herein specifically exclude devices solely for
    making information or intelligence perceptible to an individual.

    (2)     Note.  Optical signal control devices for particular or broadly
    recited art devices are classified in this subclass unless there is
    provision for this combination in the art devices.

    (3)     Note.  Optical signal control devices for particular art devices
    are classified with the art device if the features thereof are particularly
    recited.

    (4)     Note.  Optical telemetry includes the combination of an optical
    data link between multiple locations together with a specific sensor used
    in a particular environment.  Since the overall combination specifies an
    environment and specific sensor, the environment or sensor will control the
    classification.  The following are examples of proper art areas for optical
    telemetry:

    a)      Wellbore telemetry including any type of radiant energy (i.e.,
    optical, radio, etc.) is classified in Class 340, subclasses 853.1+.

    b)      An optical data link in combination with a specific sensor go to
    Class 340, subclasses 870.28+ unless there is a place for the specific
    sensor in another class, other than Class 359.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 59 for electrical amplifiers combined with a
    nonmodulated light controlled or activated device that is not part of the
    amplifying device.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 74+ for remote control over a
    telephone line.


CLS 359/143
TXT Bidirectional (i.e., monitoring or acknowledge):

    Subject matter under subclass 142 wherein the optical equipment remotely
    controls the second device, which is unrelated to the optical system, and
    either (1) receives a response from the second device indicating that the
    optical control signal was received or (2) monitors the second device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 503 for an electrical ring
    back acknowledgement condition responsive indicating system and subclass
    825.06 for electrical monitoring or control.


CLS 359/144
TXT In industrial environment (e.g., robot  control):

    Subject matter under subclass 142 wherein the second device, which is
    remotely controlled with optical communication, is used in the production
    of some manufactured product.

    (1)     Note.  Although all patents in this subclass should be placed in
    Class 901, subclass 47, as a cross-reference, no orginal classifications
    can be placed in Class 901.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    901,    Robots (Cross-Reference Art Collections), subclass 47 for optical
    sensing device.


CLS 359/145
TXT With radio link:

    Subject matter under subclass 142 wherein multiple remote devices are
    optically controlled via a single optical beam, but the beam is only
    directed at one device and this device relays control to another device via
    radio waves.


CLS 359/146
TXT Wth television or radio system:

    Subject matter under subclasses 142 wherein the optical link remotely
    controls a television or radio.

    (1)     Note.  Optical beam control of a nominally recited T.V. or video is
    classified in this subclass, but specifically recited T.V. or video in
    combination with optical beam control is classified in Class 386,
    subclasses 42+ and 128+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclass 734 for remote control receiver circuitry by
    wired or radio circuits to electrically control or mechanically control
    such as by a flexible shaft.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 151+ for analog modulated carrier
    radio wave receivers with remote control of the receiver tuning.


CLS 359/147
TXT Switching:

    Subject matter under subclass 142 wherein specific connections of the
    remote device are controlled by an optical beam.


CLS 359/148
TXT Plural functions:

    Subject matter under subclass 142 wherein more than one control is
    activated via the optical beam received at the remote device.


CLS 359/149
TXT Photophone:

    Subject matter under subclass 109 wherein an audio signal, as the
    information signal, is directly modulated onto a light beam.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes direct modulation of the light beam
    by a sound responsive mechanical device (e.g., a diaphragm).

    (2)     Note.  The optical telephones of this subclass require the use of
    an optical carrier for communication information.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 56.1+ for a light wave link
    for speech or a paging signal.  These would include optical telephones
    where connection is made through a telephone operator or exchange.


CLS 359/150
TXT Transducer, per se:

    Subject matter under subclass 149 wherein the details of a device are
    specified, which  produces a conversion between an optical beam and
    nonoptical energy (e.g., acoustic, electrical).


CLS 359/151
TXT With optical fiber or waveguide:

    Subject matter under subclass 150 wherein the transducer either contains an
    optical fiber or waveguide or is connected to one.

    (1)     Note.  An optical fiber or waveguide produces total internal
    confinement of an optical beam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    385,    Optical Waveguides, appropriate subclasses for optical fiber or
    waveguides, per se.


CLS 359/152
TXT Optical transceiver:

    Subject matter under subclass 109 wherein an optical transmitter and
    receiver are at a common location for transmission and reception of
    separate signals, and an optical signal is transmitted using some of the
    same equipment used for the reception of another optical signal.

    (1)     Note.  The optical transmitter and receiver are confined to a
    common housing in a transceiver and termed "a station".

    (2)     Note.  The simultaneous separation of a transmitter and receiver is
    a duplex operation and is classified in subclass 113,  Duplex.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for a duplexer which uses a single transmission line to both
    transmit and receive.

    152+,   for optical transceivers in an optical communication system.

    154+,   for an optical transmitter and receiver system in an optical
    communication system.

    164,    for plural stations having the transmitter and receiver in
    different housings and locations.

    174+,   for an optical repeater communication system.

    180+,   for an optical transmitter in an optical communication system.

    189+,   for an optical receiver in an optical communication system.


CLS 359/153
TXT Including compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 152 wherein structure is provided within the
    optical transceiver to eliminate any information errors that the
    transceiver would produce while transmitting a response.

    (1)     Note.  This compensation is to be effective to eliminate noise,
    effects of temperature, or any errors produced on the information signal
    caused by apparatus external or internal to the communication system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161,    for compensation in an optical communication transmitter and
    receiver system.


CLS 359/154
TXT Transmitter and receiver system:

    Subject matter under subclass 109 wherein both the transmitter and receiver
    are located at separate stations for point-to-point communication from the
    transmitter at one location to the receiver at another location, remote
    from the transmitter.

    (1)     Note.  This includes active systems wherein the receiver has its
    own power source for an optical beam activation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152+,   for optical transceivers in an optical communication system.

    174+,   for an optical repeater communication system.

    180+,   for an optical transmitter in an optical communication system.

    189+,   for an optical receiver in an optical communication system.


CLS 359/155
TXT Presence detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 154 wherein an optical transmitter and
    receiver system is used to determine if an object is present within the
    range of the optical beam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 27+ for radio frequency presence
    detection.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 3+ for range or remote
    distance (e.g., height) finding, which is useful in identifying the actual
    location of an object.


CLS 359/156
TXT With polarization:

    Subject matter under subclass 154 wherein the optical beam of the
    transmitter and receiver system vibrates perpendicular to the beam's
    travelling direction.

    (1)     Note.  These vibrations are in straight lines (plane polarization),
    circles (circular polarization), or ellipses (elliptical polarization).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    192,    for polarization in a heterodyne optical receiver.


CLS 359/157
TXT One transmitter, plural receivers:

    Subject matter under subclass 154 wherein optical information received at
    multiple locations is delivered by a single transmitter.


CLS 359/158
TXT With synchronization:

    Subject matter under subclass 154 wherein all transmitters and receivers
    operate in the same time frame and their respective clocks are maintained
    to be at the same time and operating in an identical manner.


CLS 359/159
TXT With alignment between transmitter and receiver:

    Subject matter under subclass 154 wherein the transmitter and receiver are
    always pointed at one another.

    (1)     Note.  The alignment of this subclass is in an optical
    communication system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 138+ for axial alignment
    which requires measuring to determine how to align, but not in an optical
    communication environment; and subclasses 399+ for lateral alignment which
    moves the receiver or transmitter for alignment between the two, but not in
    an optical communication environment.


CLS 359/160
TXT With pumping:

    Subject matter under subclass 154 wherein the atoms of a medium at the
    transmitter are caused to be raised from certain lower to certain higher
    energy levels to cause a population inversion between certain intermediate
    levels in order to ultimately produce photons when the energy level moves
    from higher to lower levels.

    (1)     Note.  This is a form of optical amplification.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    for a pump in at least one of the plural sources to produce
    wavelength division or frequency division multiplex.

    345,    for a particular pumping type in an optical amplifier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, subclasses 69+ for particular pumping
    type which is not used for amplification of a light beam input.


CLS 359/161
TXT With compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 154 wherein structure is provided within the
    optical system to eliminate from the transmitted response any information
    errors that the system would produce.

    (1)     Note.  This compensation is to be effective to eliminate noise,
    effects of temperature, or any errors produced on the information signal as
    the result of apparatus external or internal to the communication system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153,    for compensation in an optical transceiver.


CLS 359/162
TXT With electrical oscillator:

    Subject matter under subclass 154 wherein the transmitter and receiver
    optical communication system uses an electrical device whose output voltage
    or current is a periodic function of time.


CLS 359/163
TXT With optical circuit board:

    Subject matter under subclass 154 wherein a waveguide breadboard is used to
    plug the transmitter and receiver into any desired location along the
    breadboard.

    (1)     Note.  The circuit board is essentially an empty bus with provision
    for plugging an optical transmitter and receiver into it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107+,   for computing by the use of optical beams.


CLS 359/164
TXT Plural stations:

    Subject matter under subclass 154 including at least two spaced apart
    stations each having a transmitter which communicates with a receiver
    located remote from the transmitter.

    (1)     Note.  Since this subclass requires that a transmitter communicate
    with a remote receiver, an adjacent transmitter and receiver (i.e., within
    a single transceiver) do not constitute a spaced apart station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    for optical transceivers where the transmitter and receiver are
    adjacent one another and within a single housing.


CLS 359/165
TXT Address directing connections:

    Subject matter under subclass 164 wherein the optical beam is directed to
    the proper station as a result of the station destination information
    (address) attached to the communication data on the same optical beam.

    (1)     Note.  The address is the optical code which identifies which
    station is to receive the transmitted data.


CLS 359/166
TXT Unidirectional or loopback:

    Subject matter under subclass 164 wherein plural stations, each having both
    a transmitter and receiver, are serially linked by the transmitter of the
    preceding station transmitting to the receiver of the next station and the
    last station of the system transmits to the receiver of the first station
    of the system.

    (1)     Note.  If one of the stations or lines develops a fault; the last
    transmitted signal, which is not received by the next station intended for
    receipt, will be returned (loop back) to the preceding station so this
    station knows that the transmitted signal has not been transmitted through
    the entire system.


CLS 359/167
TXT Central or master station:

    Subject matter under subclass 164 wherein a single central or master
    station, having both an optical transmitter and receiver, transmits to all
    of the stations in the system and also receives responses from all of the
    stations of the system.

    (1)     Note.  The central or master station can broadcast via optical
    signals or use fiber optic cables to link the transmitted and received
    optical signals.

    (2)     Note.  The central or master station can be used in an asynchronous
    system of stations.


CLS 359/168
TXT Passive system:

    Subject matter under subclass 154 wherein the receiver derives its power to
    activate itself from the beam transmitted by the transmitter.

    (1)     Note.  The received light beam is the source for the receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154,    for an active system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 310 for an
    electrical switch together with details of the indicators; Dig. 47 light
    guide for indicators.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 227.11+ for shutter type optical
    switches.


CLS 359/169
TXT Retroreflection:

    Subject matter under subclass 168 wherein the transmitted response to a
    received optical beam is transmitted in the opposite direction of the
    received beam to ensure that the original transmitter receives the response.


CLS 359/170
TXT Retroreflection:

    Subject matter under subclass 154 wherein the transmitted response to a
    received optical beam is transmitted in the opposite direction of the
    received beam to ensure that the original transmitter receives the response.


CLS 359/171
TXT Received signal supplies power distribution to diverse devices:

    Subject matter under subclass 154 wherein the power for operation of
    devices unrelated to the transmitter and receiver system is obtained from
    the received signal.


CLS 359/172
TXT Satellite communications:

    Subject matter under subclass 154 wherein communication is accomplished
    with either (1) a space orbiting satellite or (2) a land satellite.

    (1)     Note.  The satellite communicates light waves through the air
    without the use of any optical conducting device.

    (2)     Note.  The land satellite is usually located within a computer room
    to control multiple computers within that room or multiple rooms without
    the need to physically connect the computers to the satellite via optical
    fibers or waveguides.


CLS 359/173
TXT Including optical waveguide:

    Subject matter under subclass 154 which further includes one or more
    transparent elongated structures (e.g., rods, fibers, or pipes) which are
    used to transmit light waves from one point to another within the confines
    of their outer surface by means of internal reflections or modal
    transmission.

    (1)     Note.  An optical waveguide requires total internal reflection.

    (2)     Note.  This subject matter includes an optical waveguide in
    combination with an optical transmitter and receiver system (see Search
    Class Note for Class 385).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 227.11+ for photocell control that could
    be optical communication type modulator.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 95 for measuring,
    testing, or sensing electricity, per se, with waveguide or long line.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, appropriate subclasses for optical waveguide
    structure, per se.


CLS 359/174
TXT Optical repeater system:

    Subject matter under subclass 109 including apparatus for receiving a light
    wave signal and reradiating the signal at a different carrier frequency and
    usually at a higher energy level or in a desired direction.

    (1)     Note.  Where the transmitted signal has a different information
    content than the received signal, classification is not in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152+,   for optical transceivers in an optical communication system.

    154+,   for an optical transmitter and receiver system in an optical
    communication system.

    180+,   for an optical transmitter in an optical communication system.

    189+,   for an optical receiver in an optical communication system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 70+ for repeaters specific to telegraphy.

    330,    Amplifiers, for amplifier systems in general, particularly subclass
    10 for modulator-demodulator type amplifiers for amplifying direct current
    or slowly varying alternating current signals.

    332,    Modulators, subclass 183 for modulation converters for converting
    one modulated wave to a differently modulated wave (e.g., pulse modulation
    to frequency modulation or frequency modulation to amplitude modulation);
    subclass 108 for plural stage modulation systems wherein each stage is of
    the same or diverse type of modulation, the last stage being of the pulse
    modulation type; subclasses 119+ or 144+ for plural stage modulation
    systems wherein the last stage is of the phase or frequency modulation
    type; and subclasses 151+ for plural stage modulation systems wherein the
    last stage is of the amplitude modulation type.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 117+ for hybrid
    type networks.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 291 for signal box repeaters
    which repeat, for example, signals received at a central station to a
    plurality of fire houses.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 211+ for repeater for a
    pulse or digital signal in the radio frequency range.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 7+ for repeaters for analog signals
    in the radio frequency range.


CLS 359/175
TXT Demodulating:

    Subject matter under subclass 174 wherein the optical repeater extracts the
    information content of the signal it receives prior to reradiating the
    signal at the same or different carrier frequency.

    (1)     Note.  Although there are various reasons for demodulating prior to
    transmission, the following are examples:

    (a)     To enable retransmission with a different modulation than received,
    or

    (b)     The demodulation is necessary to determine the reradiated
    destination for the received signal.


CLS 359/176
TXT Regenerative:

    Subject matter under subclass 174 wherein the repeater samples the incoming
    optical beam without any demodulation and then transmits it with perfect
    timing and no distortion.

    (1)     Note.  This involves positive feedback of the incoming signal.


CLS 359/177
TXT Monitoring:

    Subject matter under subclass 176 wherein the regenerative repeater
    includes apparatus to check the system during operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for diagnostic testing of the optical communication system prior to
    communication use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, for optical testing of individual
    pieces of an optical communication system, e.g., subclass 73.1 for optical
    fiber or waveguide inspection.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclasses
    20.1+ for the electrical testing of the information content of a
    transmission facility.


CLS 359/178
TXT Star:

    Subject matter under subclass 174 wherein an optical data distribution
    system contains a common node connected to one end of each of three or more
    branches and the other end of the branches are connected to appropriate
    elements of an optical repeater.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for an active star LAN.

    121,    for a passive star local area network (LAN).


CLS 359/179
TXT Including optical waveguide:

    Subject matter under subclass 174 which further includes one or more
    transparent elongated structures (e.g., rods, fibers, or pipes) which are
    used to transmit light waves from one point to another within the confines
    of their outer surface by means of internal reflections or modal
    transmission.

    (1)     Note.  This requires total internal reflection.

    (2)     Note.  This subject matter includes an optical waveguide in
    combination with an optical repeater system (see Search Class Notes for
    Class 385).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 227.11+ for photocell control that could
    be optical communication type modulator.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 95 for measuring,
    testing, or sensing electricity, per se, with waveguide or long line.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, appropriate subclasses for optical waveguide
    structure, per se.


CLS 359/180
TXT Transmitter:

    Subject matter under subclass 109 which converts information signals into
    modulated light wave signals suitable for propagation through or along a
    transmission medium.

    (1)     Note.  There are some documents in this subclass that use
    incandescent bulbs for the transmitter.

    (2)     Note.  An optical transmitter contains an optical modulator
    together with the other elements required to communicate the information
    from one location to another via an optical beam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152+,   for optical transceivers in an optical communication system.

    154+,   for an optical transmitter and receiver system in an optical
    communication system.

    174+,   for an optical repeater communication system.

    189+,   for an optical receiver in an optical communication system.

    237+,   for optical modulators, per se.


CLS 359/181
TXT With particular modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 180 wherein apparatus is set forth to include
    the information signal in a specified manner onto a light wave carrier
    entering the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237+,   for optical beam modulation without a transmitter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 493.1+ for radiant energy generation and
    sources.

    348,    Television, for projection TV modulated laser beam which requires
    scanning as distinguished from the optical communication of Class 359.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 104 for a ribbon
    light modulator for radiation beam modification of or by a storage medium.

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, subclass 38 for coherent light
    generators with particular component circuitry.


CLS 359/182
TXT Frequency modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 181 wherein the instantaneous amplitude of
    the information signal (i.e., modulating signal) modulates a carrier so
    that its instantaneous frequency differs from the carrier frequency by an
    amount proportional to the information signal amplitude.

    (1)     Note.  Combinations of phase and frequency modulation are commonly
    referred to as frequency modulation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183,    for an optical transmitter using phase modulation.


CLS 359/183
TXT Phase modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 181 wherein the instantaneous amplitude of
    the information signal (i.e., modulating signal) modulates a sine-wave
    carrier so that its instantaneous angle (i.e., phase) deviates from the
    original (no-signal) angle by an amount proportional to the information
    signal amplitude.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182,    for an optical transmitter using frequency or frequency and phase
    modulation.


CLS 359/184
TXT Pulse modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 181 wherein the carrier signal is transmitted
    in a series of pulses, having a normally constant value with a variation of
    a rise and a decay approaching infinitesimal duration, to convey the
    information contained in the modulating signal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes pulse amplitude, delta, and pulse
    frequency modulation.

    (2)     Note.  Pulse amplitude modulation uses the amplitude of the
    transmitted carrier signal to convey the information contained in the
    modulating signal.

    (3)     Note.  A delta pulse code modulation converts audio signals into
    corresponding trains of digital pulses to provide greater freedom from
    interference during transmission.

    (4)     Note.  Pulse frequency modulation varies the transmitted pulse
    repetition rate as a function of the instantaneous value of the information
    signal (i.e., modulating signal).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186,    for pulse time modulation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 100+ for miscellaneous pulse parameter (e.g.,
    amplitude) control.


    329,    Demodulators, subclasses 311+ for electrical pulse demodulators.

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 106+ for electrical pulse modulators.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclass 533 for
    multiplexers/distributors using pulse amplitude modulation.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclass 353 for electrical pulse
    amplitude modulation.  Subclasses 259+, 301+, and 321+ for pulse or digital
    communications via modulated carrier waves.


CLS 359/185
TXT Pulse-code:

    Subject matter under subclass 184 wherein the information signal is
    periodically sampled and each sample is quantized and transmitted as a
    digital binary code.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186,    for pulse time modulation.


CLS 359/186
TXT Pulse time:

    Subject matter under subclass 184 wherein the values of instantaneous
    samples of the information signal (i.e., modulating signal) are made to
    modulate the occurrence time of some characteristic of a pulse carrier.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes pulse position and pulse width
    modulation.

    (2)     Note.  Pulse position modulation modulates the position in time of
    a transmitted pulse with respect to each sampled instantaneous value of the
    information signal (i.e., modulating signal).

    (3)     Note.  Pulse width, also identified as pulse duration, modulation
    controls the width of the transmitted pulse relative to each sampled
    instantaneous value of the information signal (i.e., modulating signal).


CLS 359/187
TXT With feedback:

    Subject matter under subclass 180 wherein at least a portion of the
    optically transmitted light wave is sampled and used to further control the
    transmitted light beam.

    (1)     Note.  The actual signal feedback that controls the transmitter can
    be either optical or an electrical equivalent of the sampled transmitted
    optical light beam.


CLS 359/188
TXT Including optical waveguide:

    Subject matter under subclass 180 which further includes one or more
    transparent elongated structures (e.g., rods, fibers, or pipes) which are
    used to transmit light waves from one point to another within the confines
    of their outer surface by means of internal reflections or modal
    transmission.

    (1)     Note.  This requires total internal reflection.

    (2)     Note.  This subject matter includes an optical waveguide in
    combination with an optical transmitter (see Search Notes for Class 385).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 227.11+ for photocell control that could
    be optical communication type modulator.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 95 for measuring,
    testing, or sensing electricity with waveguide or long line.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, appropriate subclasses for optical waveguide
    structure, per se.


CLS 359/189
TXT Receiver:

    Subject matter under subclass 109 wherein the information or modulating
    signal which has been transmitted may be derived from the received
    modulated light wave signals and converted into signals corresponding to
    the information transmitted.

    (1)     Note.  This classification is restricted to those devices peculiar
    to light wave communication with information modulated thereon not merely a
    nonmodulated light control signal to control or activate an electrical
    amplifier in Class 330, subclass 59.

    (2)     Note.  An optical receiver contains an optical demodulator together
    with other elements required to communicate information from one location
    to another via an optical beam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152+,   for optical transceivers in an optical communication system.

    154+,   for an optical transmitter and receiver system in an optical
    communication system.

    174+,   for an optical repeater communication system.

    180+,   for an optical transmitter in an optical communcation system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 206+ for photocell controlled circuits
    of general utility, and subclasses 336.1+ for invisible radiant energy
    responsive electric signalling.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 59 for electrical amplifiers combined with a
    nonmodulated light controlled or activated device that is not part of the
    amplifying device.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for the
    measuring or testing of an optical property.


CLS 359/190
TXT Homodyne:

    Subject matter under subclass 189 wherein a locally generated voltage at
    the received carrier frequency will result in a zero beat reception for
    detection of the transmitted information signal.

    (1)     Note.  This is also called a zero-beat demodulator.

    (2)     Note.  Any further processing of the output of the demodulator will
    use electrical signals since the intermediate frequency (IF) output is
    outside the frequency spectrum of optical signals.

    (3)     Note.  An electrical or optical local oscillator used in
    combination with a homodyne optical receiver is classified in this subclass.


CLS 359/191
TXT Heterodyne:

    Subject matter under subclass 189 wherein the received wave is combined
    with a locally generated wave in a nonlinear device to produce sum and
    difference frequencies at the output.

    (1)     Note.  This is also called a beat demodulator.

    (2)     Note.  Any further breakdown of the output of the demodulator will
    use electrical signals since the intermediate frequency (IF) output is
    outside the frequency spectrum of optical signals.

    (3)     Note.  An electrical or optical oscillator used in combination with
    a heterodyne optical receiver is classified in this subclass.


CLS 359/192
TXT With polarization:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the heterodyne optical
    demodulating receiver is used to detect a light wave having vibrations
    perpendicular to the direction of travel of the light beam.

    (1)     Note.  These vibrations are in straight lines (plane polarization),
    circles (circular polarization), or ellipses (elliptical polarization).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156,    for polarization in an optical transmitter and receiver
    communication system.

    190,    for homodyne demodulation.

    246+,   for electro-optic modulation of polarized light.

    281+,   for magneto-optic modulation of polarized light.

    301,    for light wave directional modulation acting on polarized light.

    483+,   for polarization without modulation.


CLS 359/193
TXT With optical element (e.g., lens, mirror, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 189 wherein an optical receiver comprises
    some type of optical device such as a lens, etc., other than an optical
    waveguide.

    (1)     Note.  The optical elements for this subclass are those defined as
    being classified in Class 359, not the optical waveguides of Class 385.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195,    for an optical receiver with an optical waveguide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    385,    Optical Waveguides, appropriate subclasses for optical waveguide
    structure, per se.


CLS 359/194
TXT Automatic gain control:

    Subject matter under subclass 189 wherein the amplitude of an output signal
    amplitude is maintained constant either by an optical or electrical device.

    (1)     Note.  This control must be in the environment of an optical
    receiver.


CLS 359/195
TXT With optical waveguide:

    Subject matter under subclass 189 which further includes one or more
    transparent elongated structures (e.g., rods, fibers, or pipes) which are
    used to transmit light waves from one point to another within the confines
    of their outer surface by means of internal reflections or modal
    transmission.

    (1)     Note.  An optical waveguide requires total internal reflection.

    (2)     Note.  The combination of an optical receiver with an optical
    waveguide as defined in Class 385 is classified in this subclass (see
    Search Class Note for Class 385).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193,    for an optical receiver in combination with an optics element as
    classified in Class 359.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 206 for photocell control that could be an
    optical communication type modulator.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 95 for measuring,
    testing, or sensing electricity, per se, with waveguide or long line.

     385,   Optical Waveguides, appropriate subclasses for optical waveguide
    structure, per se.


CLS 359/196
TXT DEFLECTION USING A MOVING ELEMENT OR MEDIUM (OFFSETTING OR CHANGING AT
    LEAST A PORTION OF THE BEAM):

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising structure for
    offsetting or changing the direction of at least a portion of the incident
    light by moving a light reflecting or transmitting element or medium into
    or out of the light beam or by changing the position of a reflecting or
    transmitting  element or medium in the light beam.

    (1)     Note.  A prism may be employed for refracting or reflecting light.
    Prism reflections are considered to  be internal reflections; that is, the
    light is inside the prism body before and immediately after reflection.
    Light beam deflection by a movable prism is included in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Lenses or curved surface mirrors movable for focusing are
    classified elsewhere in this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    197+,   for light beam deflection by a periodically moving element.

    298+,  for light wave directional modulation.

    577+,   for light control by light interference.

    831+,   for prisms in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 503.1+ for an invisible radiation source
    with a radiation modifying member, in general, and subclasses 505.1+ for
    radiation-controlling elements, per se, exclusive of infrared, visible, and
    ultraviolet types.

    348,    Television, for mechanical-optical scanning by moving a lens or
    refractor.


CLS 359/197
TXT Using a periodically moving element (periodic change of optically
    reflecting, refracting or diffracting element):

    Subject matter under subclass 196 including an optically reflecting,
    refracting, or diffracting element as the scanning element whose
    orientation is changed in a periodic manner.

    (1)     Note.  The motion of reflectors resulting from vehicle vibration,
    the motion of vehicle wheels, the action of wind, etc., is considered to be
    of an irregular nature and not periodic within the meaning of this
    definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227+,   for light interrupting by means of movable elements containing
    alternating transparent and opaque areas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 195+ for mechanical-optical scanning and
    subclasses 474+ for a facsimile scanning signal generator.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 84 for high speed cameras which
    use rotating optical elements and subclasses 105+ for motion picture
    optical rectifiers using rotating or scanning optical elements.

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 474+ for a facsimile scanning signal
    generator.


CLS 359/198
TXT Particular mount or driver for element:

    Subject matter under subclass 197 wherein  details of the structure for
    supporting the moving element or for  moving it are claimed.


CLS 359/199
TXT Particular oscillating driver:

    Subject matter under subclass 198 wherein a specific device imparting back
    and forth motion to the element is recited.


CLS 359/200
TXT Bearing or shaft for rotary driver:

    Subject matter under subclass 198 wherein a specific rod transmitting
    rotational motion from a driver or the supporting device within which the
    rod turns is recited.


CLS 359/201
TXT Plural moving scanning elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 197 wherein  deflection is achieved by
    multiple optical elements which are not stationary.


CLS 359/202
TXT X-Y scanner:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the multiple elements cause a
    deflection of light in two mutually perpendicular directions.


CLS 359/203
TXT Having a common axis of rotation:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the multiple elements revolve
    around the same line.


CLS 359/204
TXT Utilizing plural light beams:

    Subject matter under subclass 197 wherein the periodically moving element
    deflects or scans more than a single light beam simultaneously.


CLS 359/205
TXT Having particular focusing element to receive scanned light:

    Subject matter under subclass 197 wherein  a specific optical element
    gathers light from the actual scanning element.


CLS 359/206
TXT High distortion lens (e.g., fQ lens, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 205 including a lens which forms an image
    which is not in proportion to a respective image source.

    (1)     Note.  An fQ  lens is one in which the image height is equal to the
    product of the lens focal length and the angle at which a beam enters the
    lens.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    662,    for an fQ lens, per se.


CLS 359/207
TXT Anamorphic element:

    Subject matter under subclass 205 including an element (usually a lens) for
    producing magnification in a first plane which differs from that in a plane
    perpendicular thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    668+,   for an anamorphic lens, per se.


CLS 359/208
TXT Concave reflector:

    Subject matter under subclass 205 wherein a mirror-like element indented
    away from incident light receives the scanned light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    838+,   for reflectors, in general.


CLS 359/209
TXT Including transmissive type moving element:

    Subject matter under subclass 197 wherein the medium of the scanning
    element permits the passage of light rays.


CLS 359/210
TXT Having moving lens:

    Subject matter under subclass 209 including opposed shaped and spaced
    refracting surfaces either of a (1) single transparent mass or (2)
    plurality of such masses arranged in series along an optical axis to
    produce a single output image from an object, which are both external to
    the mass or masses, from the object light rays passing therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    642+,   for lenses generally.


CLS 359/211
TXT Having moving prism:

    Subject matter under subclass 209 including one or more transparent bodies
    bounded in part by two plane surfaces which are angularly related (i.e.,
    not parallel), at least one of these surfaces being internally reflecting
    or refracting to impinging incident light.

    (1)     Note.  A prism may be employed for refracting or reflecting light.
    Prism reflections are considered to be internal reflections; that is, the
    light is inside the prism body both before and immediately after the
    reflection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    592+,   for refracting elements employed in natural light directing systems.

    606,    for prismoidal antiglare mirrors.

    618+,   for plural path optical systems which divide or combine the light
    paths.

    831+,   for a prism, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 51+ for optical test
    devices having prisms used in the infrared or ultraviolet range alone or in
    combination with visible light, subclasses 300+ for prism type
    spectroscopic instruments, and subclasses 331+ for prism type
    monochromators.


CLS 359/212
TXT Including reflective type moving element:

    Subject matter under subclass 197 wherein a light wave that strikes the
    medium of the moving element is returned to the original medium with the
    angles of incidence and reflection equal and lying in the same plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    838+,   for reflectors in general.


CLS 359/213
TXT Having oscillating element:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 wherein the reflecting element has
    oscillating or vibrating motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    520+,   for signal reflectors vibrating, oscillating, and rotating.


CLS 359/214
TXT Single plane mirror element:

    Subject matter under subclass 213 wherein the element is unitary, flat and
    reflecting.


CLS 359/215
TXT With imaging lens:

    Subject matter under subclass 214 having a lens typically referred to as an
    imaging lens.


CLS 359/216
TXT Having multifaceted rotating element:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 wherein the reflecting element has plural
    sides or faces.


CLS 359/217
TXT With facets parallel to rotation axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 216 wherein the faces or sides of the
    reflective element are parallel to the axis of rotation.


CLS 359/218
TXT Having six, seven, or eight facets:

    Subject matter under subclass 217 wherein the element has more than five
    facets and less than nine facets.


CLS 359/219
TXT Having five or fewer facets:

    Subject matter under subclass 217 wherein the element has less than six
    facets.


CLS 359/220
TXT Having planar rotating reflector with transverse rotation axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 wherein the faces of the rotating
    reflector are not curved and the faces are tilted with respect to the
    rotation axis.


CLS 359/221
TXT Having planar rotating reflector with rotation axis in its plane:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 wherein the faces of the rotating
    reflector are not curved and the faces are parallel to the axis of rotation.


CLS 359/222
TXT By frustrated total internal reflection:

    Subject matter under subclass 196 wherein a light transparent element has a
    surface adjacent a second element or medium which is movable into and out
    of optical contact with the surface.

    (1)     Note.  A light beam incident on the surface undergoes total
    internal reflection.  By bringing the second element or medium into
    proximity with  the surface of the transparent element, total internal
    reflection becomes frustrated and the light beam is no longer totally
    internally reflected, but instead, is passed into the second element or
    medium.


CLS 359/223
TXT By moving a reflective element:

    Subject matter under subclass 196 wherein the direction of at least a
    portion of an incident light beam is offset or changed by moving a
    light-reflecting element into or out of the light beam or by changing the
    orientation of the reflecting element in the light beam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196,    for light beam deflection by a  movable reflective prism.

    212+,   for light beam deflection by periodically moving reflectors.

    291+,   for light control by deforming or flexing a reflector.

    838+,   for reflectors or reflecting systems in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 230 for reflection-type light valves used
    in photocell systems.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing,  subclass 97 for galvanometers
    of the light beam type.

    348,    Television, subclasses 203+ for mechanical-optical scanning by a
    moving reflector.


CLS 359/224
TXT Reflective element moved by deformable support:

    Subject matter under subclass 223 wherein a support element is extended or
    contracted to modify the position of the reflecting element.


CLS 359/225
TXT Pivoting or moving in circular arc:

    Subject matter under subclass 223 wherein the motion of the moving element
    traces out a portion of a complete revolution.


CLS 359/226
TXT Rotating:

    Subject matter under subclass 223 wherein the reflective element revolves
    completely around an axis.


CLS 359/227
TXT LIGHT CONTROL BY OPAQUE ELEMENT OR MEDIUM MOVABLE IN OR THROUGH LIGHT PATH:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising the control of the
    amount of light transmitted through an area defined by an optical beam via
    an element or material, which is either completely opaque or opaque only in
    certain portions whereas the other portions are transparent, by (1)
    selectively intercepting the light path by the element or (2) changing the
    orientation of the element within the light path.

    (1)     Note.  Where the element is not substantially opaque, but is used
    to reduce the light intensity, the subject matter is not classified here
    but in subclass 889.

    (2)     Note.  Class 359 provides for optical diaphragms and shutters, per
    se, in subclasses 227+ for lenses combined with shutters generally in
    subclasses 738+, and for lenses combined with diaphragms generally in
    subclasses 739+. However, a camera shutter and diaphragm, per se, are
    classifiable in Class 396, Photography, subclasses 452+ and subclasses 505+
    respectively, the indicated use in cameras or camera background being
    sufficient for classification in Class 396 as opposed to Class 359. Class
    396 also provides for lenses broadly or specifically combined with camera
    shutter or diaphragm details, it being emphasized that such combinations
    involving noncamera shutters or diaphragms or plural disclosures of utility
    are classified in subclasses 738+ and 739+ of Class 359 as indicated above.
    The combination of a lens broadly or specifically claimed and a camera
    shutter or diaphragm broadly claimed are classifiable in subclasses 738+
    and 739+ of this class (359).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196+,   for light deflection by a moving element.

    738+,   for light controlling means combined with a lens.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    396,    Photography, particularly subclasses 452+ and 505+ for shutters and
    diaphragms used in cameras and see (2) Note above.


CLS 359/228
TXT Fluid:

    Subject matter under subclass 227 including a liquid or gas.

    (1)     Note.  The fluid itself or an element in the fluid may constitute
    the light controlling element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    296,    for realignment or repositioning of particles (possibly opaque)
    suspended in a fluid in response to an applied field.

    665+,   for a fluid lens.

    886,    for a fluid filter.


CLS 359/229
TXT With glare or flicker elimination:

    Subject matter under subclass 227 comprising structure for equalizing light
    intensity reaching the eye or for reducing glare or flicker.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    601+,   for generic glare reduction.


CLS 359/230
TXT Electro-mechanical:

    Subject matter under subclass 227 wherein electrical energy is used to
    control the movement of the light controlling element.

    (1)     Note.  This includes solenoid and tuning fork structures and
    electrostatic type effects.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228,    for electro-mechanically controlled light control systems using a
    liquid.


CLS 359/231
TXT String or ribbon type:

    Subject matter under subclass 230 wherein electric current is applied
    across a resilient, electrically conducting opaque element which as a
    result of its location in the field of an electromagnet vibrates, thus
    interrupting a light path or a portion thereof in accordance with
    variations in the current or in the strength of the field of the
    electromagnet.


CLS 359/232
TXT Slit type:

    Subject matter under subclass 227 wherein the light controlling structure
    comprises a pair of jaws having opposed parallel edges which can be moved
    toward or away from each other and which can be fixed in a variety of
    intermediate positions between fully open and fully closed.

    (1)     Note. Typically the location of the center of the slit remains
    fixed.


CLS 359/233
TXT With relative motion of two apertured elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 227 where the light control results from the
    relative movement of two opaque elements, each containing openings which
    allow light to pass.


CLS 359/234
TXT With rotating or pivoting element (e.g., scanning discs):

    Subject matter under subclass 227 comprising means wherein the light
    control results from revolving, completely or partially, an opaque element
    or an element containing opaque and transparent portions.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are generic optical shutters or diaphragms,
    per se, which have rotating vanes or blades.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229,    for similar subject matter used in reducing glare.

    233,    for two relative moving apertured elements which may rotate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 201.1+ for scanning elements of this
    type used in photo-cell controlled optical systems and subclass 232 for the
    combination of a light chopper and photocell.


CLS 359/235
TXT Continuously rotating apertured element:

    Subject matter under subclass 234 wherein the light controlling element
    revolves nonstop during the operation of the device.

    (1)     Note.  Apertures as used here encompass slots removed around the
    periphery of an otherwise opaque element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233,    for relative motion of two apertured elements where one may be
    continuously rotating.


CLS 359/236
TXT Element rotates about axis perpendicular to light path:

    Subject matter under subclass 234 wherein the light controlling element is
    revolved about an axis substantially at right angles to the direction of
    the light rays.


CLS 359/237
TXT OPTICAL MODULATOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein an optical element varies
    a characteristic of a traversing optical light beam in direct proportion to
    an applied time-varying signal which may be in any energy form.

    (1)     Note.  Characteristics of a traversing light beam that may be
    varied include its direction or characteristics such as amplitude,
    frequency, phase, or polarization.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109+,   for optical communication systems or devices which may include an
    optical modulator.

    325,    for an optical demodulator, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for photocell circuit and
    subclasses 503.1+ for an invisible radiation source with a radiation
    modifying member, generally.

    332,    Modulators, appropriate subclasses for modulators of an electrical
    wave.

    348,    Television, subclasses 195+ for mechanical-optical scanning.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 84 for high speed cameras which
    use rotating optical elements and subclasses 105+ for motion picture
    optical rectifiers using roatating or scanning optical elements.

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, appropriate subclasses for lasers
    including internal light control apparatus.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, subclasses 1+ and 4+ for light wave modulation
    within an optical waveguide.

    396,    Photography, particularly subclasses 452+ and 505+ for shutters and
    diaphragms used in cameras and see (2) Note. in subclass 227 above.


CLS 359/238
TXT Light wave temporal modulation (e.g., frequency, amplitude, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 237 wherein a device varies a property of
    light which is a function of time only as it traverses the device where
    such variation is in accordance with the applied varying signal which can
    be of any energy form.

    (1)     Note.  Such properties of the traversing light include amplitude,
    frequency, or phase.

    (2)     Note.  Optical modulation occuring exclusively within a waveguide
    is classified in Class 385.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    298+,   for directional modulation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    385,    Optical Waveguides, subclasses 1+ for light temporal modulation
    inside of a waveguide.


CLS 359/239
TXT Modulator output feedback to modulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 238 wherein the light beam output from the
    modulator is fed back into the modulator input.


CLS 359/240
TXT Changing bulk optical parameter:

    Subject matter under the subclass 238 comprising structure for controlling
    a light parameter by changing a bulk optical parameter of an optically
    transmitting medium.

    (1)     Note.  "Bulk optical parameter" refers to those inherent internal
    characteristics of an optical element which can be defined by mathematical
    expressions describing their effect on light radiation (e.g., index of
    refraction, transmissivity, etc.) and which can be changed without
    producing a significant change in the shape, size, or contours of the
    optical element itself.

    (2)     Note.  Included here are devices in which an optical parameter of
    the light control element is changed as a result of an applied electrical
    or magnetic field, an applied acoustic wave, a change in chemical
    structure, or by any other mechanism which primarily alters the bulk
    optical parameters rather than the physical shape, size, or contours of an
    optical medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    577+,   for light control by light  interference.

    738+,   for light controlling structure combined with a lens.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 48+ and 84+ for selective
    electrical control of displays having light-controlling display elements.

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, appropriate subclasses for lasers
    including light control means.


CLS 359/241
TXT By actinic radiation (e.g., photochromic):

    Subject matter under subclass 240 wherein an optical parameter of the light
    control element is changed by or in response to either the light to be
    controlled or a separate external source of optical radiation.


CLS 359/242
TXT Display device:

    Subject matter under subclass 241 wherein the temporal modulation is in an
    information conveying element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 1+ for visual display systems
    with selective electrical control.


CLS 359/243
TXT Bistable device:

    Subject matter under subclass 241 wherein an optical device has two
    distinct, stable output states which toggle between one another by a single
    application of actinic radiation.


CLS 359/244
TXT Opto-optical device:

    Subject matter under subclass 241 wherein the temporal modulation is
    achieved by an externally applied modulating light wave.


CLS 359/245
TXT Electro-optic:

    Subject matter under subclass 240 wherein the optical properties (e.g.,
    index of refraction) of an optical element are changed in response to an
    applied electrical signal.


CLS 359/246
TXT Modulation of polarized light via modulating input signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 245 wherein a property of a polarized optical
    beam, such as amplitude, phase, polarization, frequency, or color are
    varied in a controlled manner by the applied electrical signal.


CLS 359/247
TXT Using reflective or cavity structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 246 wherein the modulation is effected by
    structure which redirects the entire beam or a part of the beam at an angle
    equal to that of incidence, or wherein the medium through which the beam
    passes is confined in a cavity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302,    for reflecting structures used in beam deflection.


CLS 359/248
TXT Semiconductor:

    Subject matter under subclass 247 wherein barrier layer (i.e.,
    semiconducting) material is used in the modulating structure, generally, as
    a variable reflector.


CLS 359/249
TXT Compensation technique:

    Subject matter under subclass 246 wherein unwanted effects due to the
    action of the medium or the field on the beam such as those due to
    temperature, birefringences, or color are eliminated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250,    for plural mediums in the beam path where the plural mediums are
    not for the purpose of compensation.


CLS 359/250
TXT Using plural mediums:

    Subject matter under subclass 246 wherein more than one medium or
    structure, each of which modulates the beam, are provided.

    (1)     Note.  The mediums or structures in the beam path, layered mediums
    transverse to the beam path or parallel paths, each containing a medium
    where the output beam is the result of the combined action of the medium or
    structure.  Not all of the mediums need to be field responsive.

    (2)     Note.  Initial polarizers and final analyzers are not considered
    part of the plural mediums where the only affect is to select a
    polarization. Plural areas formed by a matrix of electrodes whose sole
    function is to act on a portion of the beam are not considered plural
    mediums.  Nonbirefringent lenses are also not considered a medium in the
    sense of the definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249,    for plural mediums where the purpose of the mediums is compensation.

    301+,   for plural mediums used to deflect the beam or a portion of the
    beam.


    497,    for polarization achieved by plural birefringent elements.


CLS 359/251
TXT With particular direction of the field in relation to the medium, beam
    direction or polarization:

    Subject matter under subclass 246 wherein details of the medium are given,
    especially crystal cut or orientation, and the direction of the applied
    field is specified in relation to the medium or in relation to the incident
    beam direction or polarization.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252,    for a particular medium where no field directional particulars, in
    relation to the medium, are specified.


CLS 359/252
TXT With particular medium or state of the medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 246 wherein the details of the medium
    structure, state of the medium, shape of the medium, or treatment of the
    medium are recited.

    (1)     Note.  For classification herein, there should be more than just
    the recitation of the name or abbreviation of the name of the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251,    where details of the medium are combined with a particular field
    direction.

    488,    for a particular medium used for reflectively or refractively
    polarizing light.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, for preparation or treatment of
    nonmetallic elements involving only physical treatments.

    252,    Compositions, for compositions, per se.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes, for
    melt shaping or treatment of nonmetallic materials.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, for nonmetallic elements and for
    processes for producing nonmetallic elements involving a chemical reaction.


CLS 359/253
TXT Liquid medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 252 wherein the medium is in a nongaseous
    fluid state.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36+,    for similar structures using liquid crystals for the medium.


CLS 359/254
TXT With particular electrode structure or arrangement, or medium mounting
    structure or arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 246 wherein the physical structure, geometry
    or arrangement of the electrodes is detailed or there is detailed mounting
    structure for the medium (e.g., to prevent physical distortion).

    (1)     Note.  Included here are structures which perform auxiliary
    functions such as protection or index matching. Also, see subclasses 488
    and 500.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251,    for the arrangement of the electrodes  as related to the medium for
    a particular direction of the field in combination with details of the
    medium.

    253,    for those structures used with a liquid medium where the structure
    is peculiar to the medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 365+ for
    electrode arrangements with respect to a piezoelectric element.


CLS 359/255
TXT With particular field:

    Subject matter under subclass 246 wherein the field which modulates the
    medium is of a specific magnitude, phase, or frequency or is of a specific
    type (e.g., pulse).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251,    for a field direction or polarization specified in relation to the
    medium (e.g., crystal cut).

    484,    for polarization by an applied magnetic field.


CLS 359/256
TXT With birefringent element:

    Subject matter under subclass 246 including an element having the property
    of dividing a ray or beam of energy into two polarized rays or beams (known
    as the ordinary and extraordinary rays), the directions of polarization
    being at right angles to each other.

    (1)     Note.  A birefringent material which has been treated with a
    dichroic dye to absorb the ordinary or extraordinary ray is no longer
    considered to be birefrin-gent within the meaning of this definition.  A
    birefringent element in the form of a Nicol prism, where the unwanted ray
    is deflected, is classified here.


CLS 359/257
TXT Pockel's cell:

    Subject matter under subclass 246 wherein the variation of a polarized
    light characteristic is achieved by an element which advances or retards
    the phase of an induced ordinary wave relative to the extraordinary wave
    when the electrical signal is applied.


CLS 359/258
TXT Kerr cell:

    Subject matter under 246 wherein the variation of a polarized light
    characteristic is achieved by an element including a material (usually
    liquid) whose refractive index change is proportional to the square of the
    field of the applied electrical signal.


CLS 359/259
TXT Plural modulation cells:

    Subject matter under subclass 245 wherein the temporal light modulator
    utilizes multiple elemental units each of which is electro-optically
    controlled.


CLS 359/260
TXT Etalon structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 245 wherein the modulating structure consists
    of two parallel dielectric mirrors separated by an active electro-optic
    material.


CLS 359/261
TXT Multiple reflections within cell:

    Subject matter under subclass 245 wherein the electro-optic temporal
    modulator includes plural internal redirections of the light passing
    therethrough.


CLS 359/262
TXT Excitation by electron beam:

    Subject matter under subclass 245 wherein a collimated ray of electrons
    applied to the modulator is used to vary a temporal characteristic of the
    light passing therethrough.


CLS 359/263
TXT By reflection:

    Subject matter under subclass 245 wherein the electro-optic temporal
    modulator includes a single internal redirection of the light passing
    therethrough.


CLS 359/264
TXT Pulse Modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 245 wherein a parameter of a train of optical
    pulses is varied in accordance with the amplitude of the applied signal.

    (1)     Note.  Pulse modulation may involve changes in pulse amplitude
    (pam), pulse position (ppm), or pulse duration (pdm).

    (2)     Note.  Pulse modulation includes pulse-code modulation wherein the
    light beam is transmitted as a digital binary code.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass will include a combination of pulse modulation
    with amplitude, frequency, or phase modulation.


CLS 359/265
TXT Electrochromic:

    Subject matter under subclass 245 wherein the electrical signal applied to
    the optical control element produces a color change in the element
    resulting in a change in the absorption characteristics of the element at a
    given wavelength of light.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 49 and 105 for selective
    electrical control of displays having electrochromic display elements.

    349,    Liquid Crystal Cells, Elements and Systems, appropriate subclasses
    for liquid crystal light modulators.


CLS 359/266
TXT Particular nonplanar electrode arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 265 wherein solid electrically conductive
    elements within the electrochromic device are not located on a single flat
    surface.


CLS 359/267
TXT Reflection-type (e.g., display device):

    Subject matter under subclass 265 wherein the  modulator utilizes a surface
    upon which light strikes and which is coated with a material that
    simultaneously changes color with the applied electrical signal and
    reflects a significant portion of incident light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    275,    for transmission-type (e.g., windows).


CLS 359/268
TXT Complementary device:

    Subject matter under subclass 267 wherein an oxidizing material operates in
    conjunction with a reducing material.


CLS 359/269
TXT Particular counter electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 267 wherein details are recited of an
    electrode (the counter-electrode) which actually takes part in the
    electrochromic reaction.


CLS 359/270
TXT Particular electrolyte layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 267 which recites details of an electrically
    conductive liquid layer which transports ions between the electrochromic
    material and the counter electrode.


CLS 359/271
TXT Particular planar electrode pattern:

    Subject matter under subclass 267 including an electrically conductive
    solid element having a configuration which is uniformly flat.


CLS 359/272
TXT Liquid cell:

    Subject matter under subclass 267 wherein the device comprises a cell
    containing a substance which is in a state intermediate that of a solid and
    a gas.


CLS 359/273
TXT Particular electrochromic layer structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 267 which specifies details of the form of
    the electrochromic substance.


CLS 359/274
TXT Diverse layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 267 including a specified miscellaneous layer
    within the reflection-type electrochromic device.

    (1)     Note.  This might include, for example, an insulating layer.


CLS 359/275
TXT Transmission-type (e.g., windows):

    Subject matter under subclass 265 wherein the modulator utilizes a surface
    upon which light strikes which is coated with a material that
    simultaneously changes color with the applied electrical signal and
    transmits a significant portion of incident light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    267,    for reflection-type (e.g., display device).


CLS 359/276
TXT Amplitude modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 245 wherein the amplitude of a constant
    frequency optical wave varies in synchronization with the amplitude of the
    applied signal (i.e., modulating signal).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284,    for magneto-optic amplitude modulation.

    286,    for acousto-optic amplitude modulation.

    289,    for thermal-optic amplitude modulation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 48+ and 84+ for selective
    electrical control of displays having light-controlling display elements.


CLS 359/277
TXT Within display element:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 wherein the amplitude modulator is in an
    information conveying element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 1+ for visual display systems
    with selective electrical control.


CLS 359/278
TXT Frequency modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 245 wherein the frequency of a constant
    amplitude optical wave (i.e., carrier wave) varies in synchronization with
    the amplitude of the applied signal (i.e., modulating signal).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    287,    for acousto-optic frequency modulation.


CLS 359/279
TXT Phase modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 245 wherein the normal zero phase of a
    constant amplitude optical wave (i.e., carrier wave) is shifted by an angle
    proportional to the amplitude of the applied signal (i.e., modulating
    signal).

    (1)     Note.  A sinusoidal signal of zero phase will have a zero amplitude
    at the intersection of the x-y axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278,    for electro-optic frequency modulation.

    287,    for acousto-optic frequency modulation.


CLS 359/280
TXT Magneto-optic:

    Subject matter under subclass 240 wherein a bulk optical parameter of an
    optical element is controlled by a magnetic signal applied to the element.


CLS 359/281
TXT Modulation of polarized light via modulating input signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 280 wherein a property of a polarized optical
    beam, such as amplitude, phase, polarization, frequency, or color are
    varied in a controlled manner by the applied varying magnetic signal.


CLS 359/282
TXT Using layered structure or plural mediums:

    Subject matter under subclass 281 wherein the structure through which the
    beam passes or is acted upon consists of more than one contiguous film or
    layer which forms a composite structure which modulates the beam or wherein
    there are plural mediums or structures in the beam path, each of which
    modulates the beam.

    (1)     Note.  The composite structure can be dielectric or reflective
    films or layers for the purposes such as compensation, increased Kerr
    rotation or index (e.g., impedance) matching.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250,    for plural mediums where at least one medium is electric field
    responsive.

    254,    488 and 500, for layered structures where the purpose of the layers
    is for such things as protection or index matching..

    487,    for layered structure or plural mediums formed for polarization or
    beam-splitting purposes.

    490+,   for layered structures formed with at least one layer of dichroic
    material where additional layers may be  provided for purposes such as
    protection or particular bonding and for layered structures formed for
    interference effects.

    497+,   for plural mediums including a birefringent medium which is not
    field responsive.


CLS 359/283
TXT With particular direction of the field in relation to the medium, beam
    direction or polarization:

    Subject matter under subclass 281 wherein details of the medium are given,
    especially crystal cut or orientation, and the direction of the applied
    field is specified in relation to the medium or in relation to the incident
    beam direction or polarization.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281,    for magnetic modulating structures using a  particular medium,
    state of the medium, particular electrode structure or arrangement, medium
    mounting structure or arrangement or with a particular field.


CLS 359/284
TXT Amplitude modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 280 wherein the amplitude of a constant
    frequency optical wave varies in synchronization with the amplitude of the
    applied signal (i.e., modulating signal).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    276,    for electro-optic amplitude modulation.

    286,    for acousto-optic amplitude modulation.

    289,    for thermal-optic amplitude modulation.


CLS 359/285
TXT Acousto-optic:

    Subject matter under subclass 240 wherein an ultrasonic wave generated at
    the surface or within the confines of the light control element sets up
    conditions in the element which produce a change in the optical parameters
    (e.g., refractive index) directly controlling the light.


CLS 359/286
TXT Amplitude modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 285 wherein the amplitude of a constant
    frequency optical wave varies in synchronization with the amplitude of the
    applied signal (i.e., modulating signal).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    276+,   for electro-optic amplitude modulation.

    284,    for magneto-optic amplitude modulation.

    289,    for thermal-optic amplitude modulation.


CLS 359/287
TXT Frequency modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 285 wherein the frequency of a constant
    amplitude optical wave (i.e., carrier wave) varies in synchronization with
    the amplitude of the applied signal (i.e., modulating signal).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278,    for electro-optic frequency modulation.


CLS 359/288
TXT Thermo-optic:

    Subject matter under subclass 240 wherein optical properties (e.g., index
    of refraction) of an optical element are changed by or in response to
    applied heat.


CLS 359/289
TXT Amplitude modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 288 wherein the amplitude of a constant
    frequency optical wave varies in synchronization with the amplitude of the
    applied signal (i.e., modulating signal).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    276+,   for electro-optic amplitude modulation.

    284,    for magneto-optic amplitude modulation.

    286,    for acousto-optic amplitude modulation.


CLS 359/290
TXT By changing physical characteristics (e.g., shape, size or contours) of an
    optical element:

    Subject matter under subclass 238 wherein the light property is controlled
    by a substantial alteration in the optical characteristics of a light
    control surface or interface or by changing the physical shape, position,
    or orientation of a light control surface or interface in response to the
    modulating signal.

    (1)     Note.  Any change in or to the light control surface or interface
    occur wholly within the region of the light path in which control is
    effected.  The control surface or interface is neither totally nor
    partially inserted into nor removed from the  light path.


CLS 359/291
TXT Shape or contour of light control surface altered:

    Subject matter under subclass 290 wherein the light property is controlled
    by means of a light control surface which is temporarily altered or
    modified in some way so as to produce distortions in the surface contours
    which differ significantly from the normal or unmodified surface contours.


CLS 359/292
TXT Light control surface forms image on projected light beam:

    Subject matter under subclass 291 wherein the contours of a light control
    surface are modified in accordance with a control signal so as to impart
    image or picture information to the contour of the control surface which is
    then transferred to a light beam projected on or through the control
    surface.


CLS 359/293
TXT Electron beam causes surface alteration:

    Subject matter under subclass 292 wherein the light control surface is
    changed by a ray of electrons.


CLS 359/294
TXT Using photoconductive layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 291 which utilizes a layer whose electrical
    conductivity varies as a function of light incident thereon.


CLS 359/295
TXT Having multiple electrodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 291 which includes a plurality of solid
    electrically conducting elements.


CLS 359/296
TXT Changing position or orientation of suspended particles:

    Subject matter under subclass 290 wherein the light control surface
    consists of a group of elongated light absorbing or reflecting particles
    suspended in a fluid media, which collectively change their orientation
    within the light path in response to an applied signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228,    for fluid light control elements.


CLS 359/297
TXT Light control surface formed or destroyed:

    Subject matter under subclass 290 wherein a light property is controlled by
    creating or destroying a light absorbing or reflecting surface or interface
    in response to a modulating signal.


CLS 359/298
TXT Light wave directional modulation (e.g., deflection or scanning is
    representative of the modulating signal):

    Subject matter under subclass 237 wherein the relative spatial orientation
    of a light wave exiting a device is changed in accordance with a varying
    signal of any energy form (i.e., modulating signal) applied to the device.

    (1)     Note.  Optical directional modulation occuring exclusively inside
    of a waveguide is classified in Class 385.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238+,   for light wave temporal modulation outside of a waveguide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    385,    Optical Waveguides, subclasses 4+ for optical directional
    modulation within an optical waveguide.


CLS 359/299
TXT Opto-optical device:

    Subject matter under subclass 298 wherein the directional modulation is
    achieved by an externally applied modulating light wave.


CLS 359/300
TXT Phase conjugate:

    Subject matter under subclass 298 including the return of a light beam
    through the media at precisely the same angles, distances, and intensities
    as prior to a reflection.


CLS 359/301
TXT Acting on polarized light:

    Subject matter under subclass 298 wherein the direction of a polarized
    light beam is varied in accordance with a varying input signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    495,    for beam deflection and splitting systems using birefringent
    elements.


CLS 359/302
TXT Using reflecting or cavity structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 301 wherein the deflection is effected by
    structures which redirect the entire beam or a part of the beam at an angle
    equal to that of incidence or where the medium through which the beam
    passes is confined in a cavity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247,    for reflecting structures used in beam temporal modulation.


CLS 359/303
TXT Using more than one polarization (e.g., digital):

    Subject matter under subclass 301 wherein at least two distinct beams,
    corresponding to two different polarizations, are obtained.

    (1)     Note.  The systems use a polarization modulation element to switch
    the polarization of the incoming beam followed by a birefringent
    polarization discriminator whereby two distinct beams are obtained
    corresponding to the ordinary and extraordinary rays.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302,    for reflecting structures where  different polarizations are used.


CLS 359/304
TXT Using single polarization:

    Subject matter under subclass 301 wherein the beam is given an initial
    polarization and then deflected or where only one polarization is allowed
    to be deflected by blocking or removing any other polarization component.


CLS 359/305
TXT Acousto-optic:

    Subject matter under subclass 298 wherein directional modulation is
    achieved by applying a modulating sound wave to a device through which a
    light beam is traversing.


CLS 359/306
TXT Correlation or convolution:

    Subject matter under subclass 305 wherein the correlation or convolution
    integral of two optical waves is formed by an acousto-optical directional
    modulator.


CLS 359/307
TXT Utilizing optical feedback:

    Subject matter under subclass 305 wherein an acousto-optic modulator has a
    portion of the optical output therefrom returned to the input therefor.


CLS 359/308
TXT Filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 305 wherein one frequency band present in an
    incident light beam is suppressed by an acousto-optic deflection technique.


CLS 359/309
TXT Acting on polychromatic light:

    Subject matter under subclass 305 wherein directional modulation of  a
    light wave which is a composite of many frequencies is achieved.


CLS 359/310
TXT Plural cell array:

    Subject matter under subclass 305 wherein directional modulation is
    achieved by multiple acousto-optic devices.


CLS 359/311
TXT Plural transducers on single cell:

    Subject matter under subclass 305 wherein the directional modulator
    consists of a single element having multiple input devices each capable of
    imposing a separate sound wave on the modulator.


CLS 359/312
TXT Single transducer generating composite plural frequency acoustic wave:

    Subject matter under subclass 305 wherein a composite sound wave of diverse
    frequencies is generated and applied to the acousto-optic modulator.


CLS 359/313
TXT Particular cell shape:

    Subject matter under subclass 305 wherein detailed structure of the overall
    configuration of the directional modulator is recited.


CLS 359/314
TXT Particular cell orientation:

    Subject matter under subclass 305 wherein a specific location of the
    modulator relative to an incident light beam is recited.


CLS 359/315
TXT Electro-optic:

    Subject matter under subclass 298 wherein directional modulation is
    achieved by applying a varying electrical signal to an element through
    which a light beam is traversing.


CLS 359/316
TXT Plural modulation cells:

    Subject matter under subclass 315 wherein the directional light modulator
    utilizes multiple elemental units each of which is electro-optically
    controlled.


CLS 359/317
TXT Multiple reflections within cell:

    Subject matter under subclass 315 wherein the electro-optic directional
    modulator includes plural internal redirections of the light passing
    therethrough.


CLS 359/318
TXT By reflection:

    Subject matter under subclass 315 wherein the electro-optic directional
    modulator includes a single internal redirection of the light passing
    therethrough.


CLS 359/319
TXT Focusing:

    Subject matter under subclass 315 wherein light beam focusing is achieved
    by the application of the electrical signal to a device through which the
    beam transits.


CLS 359/320
TXT Switching:

    Subject matter under subclass 315 wherein a discrete change in the path of
    a light beam is achieved by the application of the electrical signal to a
    device through which the beam transits


CLS 359/321
TXT Having particular chemical composition or structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 wherein chemical details of an optical
    modulator are recited.


CLS 359/322
TXT Electro-optic crystal material:

    Subject matter under subclass 321 wherein the material of the modulator is
    particularly responsive to an applied electrical signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    245,    electro-optic light wave temporal modulation for changing bulk
    optical parameter.


CLS 359/323
TXT PLZT material:

    Subject matter under subclass 322 wherein the material is a transparent
    lead-lanthanum zir- conate titanate ceramic with optical qualities that can
    be controlled by applying voltages to thin plates of the material.


CLS 359/324
TXT Magneto-optic crystal material:

    Subject matter under subclass 321 wherein the material of the modulator is
    particularly responsive to an applied magnetic signal.


CLS 359/325
TXT OPTICAL DEMODULATOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein an original modulating
    wave is recovered from a previously modulated light wave.

    (1)     Note.  These devices may include a photodetector as long as a
    modulating wave is isolated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189+,   for optical communication receivers which  include an optical
    demodulator.

    237+,   for an optical modulator, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for photocell circuits and systems
    which convert light wave energy into electricity.

    329,    Demodulators, for electrical demodulators in general.


CLS 359/326
TXT OPTICAL FREQUENCY CONVERTER:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a nonlinear device alters
    the frequency of an applied traversing optical electromagnetic wave.

    (1)     Note.  The frequencies here are quasi-optical (i.e., infrared
    through ultraviolet).

    (2)     Note.  Such optical frequency devices include second harmonic
    generators and other types of frequency conversion devices such as
    downshifters, oscillators, mixers, etc.

    (3)     Note.  A detailed optical frequency converter, per se, or such
    subject matter in combination with additional waveguide structure is
    classified in this class (359). However, the nominal recitation of any type
    of optical frequency converter together with additional waveguide structure
    is classified in Class 385, where such combination meets the class
    requirements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 424
    for a nonoptical parametric frequency converter.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 113+ for miscellaneous frequency control.


CLS 359/327
TXT Raman type:

    Subject matter under subclass 326 wherein the nonlinear optical device
    involves radiation-active materials in which many lines of
    frequency-shifted radiation can be obtained in response to incident
    radiation.

    (1)     Note.  Raman radiation is a radiation produced in response to
    incident radiation by a change in the rotational or vibrational energy of
    scattering molecules. The resultant optical radiation is often referred to
    as Stokes or antiStokes radiation dependent upon its frequency relative to
    that of the incident light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334,    for a Raman optical amplifier.


CLS 359/328
TXT Harmonic generator:

    Subject matter under subclass 326 wherein a nonlinear optical device
    generates a wave having a frequency which is an integral multiple of a
    fundamental input wave frequency.

    (1)     Note.  A wave with twice the frequency of the fundamental is called
    the second harmonic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240,    for light wave temporal modulation via a nonlinear device.

    255,    for electro-optic polarization modulation by a nonlinear device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 424
    for a nonoptical parametric frequency converter.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 113+ for miscellaneous frequency control such as
    electrical wave harmonic generation.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, subclass 122 for optical fiber waveguide with
    cladding having significant nonlinear property.


CLS 359/329
TXT Third harmonic:

    Subject matter under subclass 328 wherein the generated optical wave has a
    frequency that is three times that of the fundamental input optical wave.


CLS 359/330
TXT Parametric oscillator:

    Subject matter under subclass 326 wherein the frequency conversion of
    electromagnetic radiation, in the near and the visible spectrum, is based
    on the nonlinear dependence of polarizability on wave amplitude.

    (1)     Note.  A parametric oscillation is an oscillation in which
    substantial power is applied at a frequency called the pump frequency.
    Signal and idler waves, the sum of whose frequencies equals the pump
    frequency, are generated in an interaction resulting from some nonlinear
    effect in the optical crystal.


CLS 359/331
TXT Optical laser acoustic delay line type:

    Subject matter under subclass 326 wherein the output from a laser is
    mode-locked and passed through an acoustic cell in which a radio frequency
    acoustic wave has been generated; the laser beam is diffracted, and one of
    the frequency shifted diffracted modes is heterodyned at a detector with an
    unshifted mode to produce a time delayed radio frequency output signal
    lower in frequency than the input signal.


CLS 359/332
TXT Dielectric optical waveguide type:

    Subject matter under subclass 326 wherein the depletion layer of a
    semiconductor whose dielectric material exhibits nonlinear susceptibility
    is used as an optical waveguide to achieve frequency translation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 177 for an electrical
    thermometer having a ferroelectric sensor.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, subclasses 129+ for a planar optical waveguide.


CLS 359/333
TXT OPTICAL AMPLIFIER:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the amplifying device
    produces an output light beam which is only changed to increase the
    magnitude of a light beam applied as input.

    (1)     Note.  This amplification can be produced by applying electrical
    energy to the device to first cause excitation to a higher energy level via
    certain molecular, atomic, or nuclear particles of a substance and later
    causing the high energy state to be relaxed to a lower state to produce the
    emission of the particles.

    (2)     Note.  This amplifcation is the optical or quasi-optical wavelength
    range, which is generally in the range from ultra-violet (100 Angstroms) to
    far infrared (10 million Angstroms) of the optical spectrum.  See (1) Note
    of subclass 350 for specific IR and UV wavelength units.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass necessitates light input into a medium prior
    to amplification.  Production of a light beam output without an input light
    beam is classified in Class 372.

    (4)     Note.  This subclass includes details of an optical amplifier
    wherein amplification is produced within the optical fiber by the
    interaction of externally applied energy and a unique property of the fiber
    (e.g., lazing material).  The mere nominal recitation of an optical
    amplifier in combination with an optical waveguide structure is classified
    in Class 385.

    (5)     Note.  Infrared to Ultraviolet light emitting junction is
    classified in Class 357, subclass 17, unless a cavity is set forth for
    Class 372 or amplification is set forth for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109+,   for optical communication.

    237+,   for optical modulators external to an optical fiber.

    326+,   for optical frequency translators.

    341,    for details of an optical amplier wherein amplification is produced
    within the fiber optics, wherein the optical fiber has some unique property
    (i.e., lasing material), to produce the amplification when external energy
    is applied.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 121.6+ for metal heating by arc using
    a laser.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for photocells, circuits and
    apparatus, and subclasses 552+ for solid state light emitting source which
    is detected by a photocell.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 80-85 for incoherent light emitting devices combined with, or
    also constituting a light responsive device.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 371 for a
    cathode-ray tube with optics and subclass 372 for a cathode-ray tube with
    light conducting fiber or rod.

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclass 53 for the combination with an infrared
    device, and subclass 54 for the combination with a laser.

    348,    Television, subclasses 217 and 300 for camera with image
    intensifier or amplifier, subclass 707 for television amplifier circuit and
    subclass 777 for cathode-ray tube image source with intensifier.

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examinating, Vision Testing, and Correcting, subclass
    213 including light filter or absorber, subclass 214 including diaphragm or
    slit, and subclass 215 including light polarizing.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 300+ for dispersed light
    spectroscopy.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 32 for light fibers, rods or pipes, subclass
    259 for laser type light source (or support therefor) and modifier, and
    subclasses 317+ for light modifier.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 108 for liquid
    crystal memory and subclasses 120+ for information masking using
    polarization, Bragg cells, diffraction, holograms electron beams, etc.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 110 where the
    information is stored or retrieved from the medium by polarized radiant
    energy subclass 116 where the information is stored or retrieved from the
    medium by light intensity adjustment or maintenance and subclass 117 where
    the information is stored or retrieved from the medium by a movable shutter
    or light gate.

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, for lasers and optical oscillators
    wherein a light output beam is generated without the application of a light
    input beam.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclass 103 for photon beam (e.g., laser) irradiation nuclear fusion,
    subclass 104 for optics nuclear fusion, and subclass 105 for particle beam
    irradiation (excluding photons) nuclear fusion.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 102 for bistable electro - optical devices.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, subclasses 1+ for temporal optical modulation
    produced within the fiber, and subclasses 4+ for directional modulation
    produced within the fiber.  Class 385 contains patents claiming optical
    modulation within the fiber but optical amplification (333+) or frequency
    translation (326+) within the fiber are specifially excluded from Class
    385, unless the amplifier or frequency translator are only nominally set
    forth.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 163.1+ for processes of coating an
    optical polarizer, windshield, fiber, waveguide, rod, projection screen, or
    retroreflector.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclass 363 for laser or radiation color imaging exposure other
    than visible light and subclass 945 for laser beam cross-reference art
    collection.


CLS 359/334
TXT Raman or Brillouin process:

    Subject matter under subclass 333 wherein the scattered light beam output
    from a medium, resulting from either the Raman or Brillouin effects, is
    amplified relative to the input to the medium.

    (1)     Note.  The Raman effect claimed specifically for the optical
    amplification properties is classified in this subclass, whereas the Raman
    effect claimed for the frequency translation by itself or together with
    optical amplification is classified in subclass 327.

    (2)     Note.  Stimulated Raman effect is the amplification exhibiting the
    characteristic of stimulated emission of the small portion of light that is
    scattered in random directions when a monochromatic light beam of high
    intensity is transmitted through matter.  The characteristic of the small
    portion of light is related to the frequencies of the matter.

    (3)     Note.  The Raman effect results in the re-radiation of light from a
    bombarded molecule, having a longer wavelength than the original bombaring
    beam of coherent light.  Part of the energy of the coherent beam is
    distributed throughout the molecule whereas the remaining energy is
    re-radiated.  This effect may be described as being feeble, instantaneous,
    independent of absorption, independent of the wavelength of the exciting
    radiation; and it results in the re-emission of light generally having a
    wavelength longer than the existing one.  Although there is a difference in
    wavelengths or frequency between the wavelengths of each re-emitted
    spectral line, or Raman line, and the wavelength of the incident or
    exciting radiation; the intensity of Raman increases as the fourth power of
    the incident frequency except in the neighborhood of an absorption band,
    where the scattering intensity increases still more markedly.

    (4)     Note.  Brillouin scattering is the nonlinear optical phenomenon of
    the spontaneous scattering of light in a medium by its interaction with
    sound waves passing through the medium

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327,    for Raman type frequency translators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, subclass 3 for Raman lasers without a
    light input beam.


CLS 359/335
TXT Free electron:

    Subject matter under subclass 333 wherein a beam of "free" and unbound
    electrons of an atom or molecule are passed through an undulator (i.e.,
    "wiggler"), which creates a magnetic field of alternating polarity, to
    cause the electrons to move along a helical path (i.e., "wiggle") for the
    release of a high power light radiation (i.e., amplification of the light
    input beam).

    (1)     Note.  The use of a free-electron laser for light amplificatoin
    belongs in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, subclass 2 for free electron lasers and
    subclass 74 for electron beam pumping without a light input beam.


CLS 359/336
TXT Bistable:

    Subject matter under subclass 333 wherein a two level output is produced
    (i.e., an amplified output or no output at all) dependent upon the specific
    characteristic (e.g., amplitude or frequency) of the input light beam that
    the amplifier is designed to amplify.

    (1)     Note.  The specific type of amplifier (i.e., material type, cavity
    structure, resonant cavity length, leachable material, etc.) determines
    which input signal characteristic will produce an amplified output.  All
    other inputs will result in a zero output.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 102 using bistable electro-optical devices.


CLS 359/337
TXT Correction of deleterious effects:

    Subject matter under subclass 333 wherein an amplifier is corrected to
    overcome actions that prohibit its proper operation.

    (1)     Note.  In order to overcome laser overheating, extraneous gasses
    that prohibit population inversion, laser medium losing energy that would
    deplete energy, an excess of power density, etc., the correction is applied
    to the optical amplifier itself.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, subclass 33 for particular operating
    compensation.


CLS 359/338
TXT Using phase conjugation:

    Subject matter under subclass 337 wherein the light beam returns through
    the medium at precisely the same angles, distances, and intensities it was
    directed prior to the reflection.

    (1)     Note.  The medium causes the light to return to its origin after
    reflection in precisely the same identical path it took to reach the
    reflector.

    (2)     Note.  See the January 1986 Scientific American article on this
    subject matter.

    (3)     Note.  This is often used to clear up poor images.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300,    for phase conjugate light wave directional modulation (e.g.,
    deflection or scanning).


CLS 359/339
TXT Using saturable or spatial filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 337 wherein the correction is accomplished by
    allowing light transmission through the filter of an input light beam only
    after a particular amount of energy is either applied (saturable filter) or
    a specific portion of the light beam is passed (spatial filter).

    (1)     Note.  A saturable filber is opaque to a light beam input until one
    of the atoms of its material is excited to a second energy level as a
    result of striking photons.  Upon reaching this second energy level, the
    filter becomes "saturated" and thus transparent to the input beam due to
    the equalization between the original and second energy levels causing no
    net absorption of additional photons as they strike the filter.

    (2)     Note.  A spatial filter generally consists of either (a) an
    emulsion mask having a clean annular region in an otherwise opaque region
    or (b) a pinhole, placed at a focal plane in a laser expander; to remove
    unwanted radiation generally referred to as amplified spontaneous emission.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, subclass 11 for absorption filter
    Q-Switch and subclass 14 for mechanical spatial filter Q-Switch.


CLS 359/340
TXT Mode locked:

    Subject matter under subclass 333 wherein the energy content of each state
    (i.e., mode) of an oscillating system (e.g., laser) is internally modulated
    in a particular field pattern and is one of the possible resonant
    frequencies of the system to selectively give rise to energy bursts of high
    peak power and short duration which can be in the picosecond domain.

    (1)     Note.  This laser, referred to as a mode-locked laser could also be
    in a continuous wave mode or a pulsed mode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, subclass 18 for mode locking particular
    beam control without a light input beam.


CLS 359/341
TXT Optical fiber:

    Subject matter under subclass 333 wherein amplification is produced within
    the optical fiber by the interaction of externally applied energy and a
    unique property of the fiber (e.g., lasing material).

    (1)     Note.  The details of an optical amplifier within an optical
    waveguide or combination with additional external waveguide structure are
    classified in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Optical waveguides or fibers having the amplification
    performed within the waveguide of fiber are classified in this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  Class 385 contains patents claiming optical modulation
    within the fiber but optical amplification (subclasses 333+) or frequency
    translation (subclasses 326+) within the fiber are specifically excluded
    from Class 385, unless the amplifier or frequency translator are only
    nominally set forth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332,    for optical waveguides which produce frequency translation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    385,    Optical Waveguides, subclasses 1+ for temporal modulation performed
    within the optical waveguides and subclasses 4+ for directional modulation
    performed within the optical waveguide.


CLS 359/342
TXT Particular active medium (e.g., crystal, plasma, fluid, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 333 wherein a specified type of active
    medium, which uniquely causes the amplification of the light input, is used
    to change the number of atoms or atomic system in a set of energy levels as
    a result of the absorption of light incident on the material of the medium.

    (1)     Note.  The examples of crystal, plasma, and fluid define the
    physical state of the active medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    343,    for a glass (amorphous) medium.

    344,    for a semiconductor medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, subclasses 39+ for a particular active
    medium which is not used for amplification of a light beam input.


CLS 359/343
TXT Glass (amorphous):

    Subject matter under subclass 342 wherein the solid active medium does not
    have a definite crystalline structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    342,    for crystal, plasma, fluid, etc., active medium.

    344,    for a semiconductor medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, subclass 40 for an amorphous (e.g.,
    glass) active medium which is not used to amplify a light beam input.


CLS 359/344
TXT Semiconductor:

    Subject matter under subclass 342 wherein the active medium is a solid or
    liquid having a resistivity midway between that of an insulator and a metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    342,    for crystal, plasma, fluid, etc., active medium.

    343,    for a glass (amorphous) medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, subclasses 43+ for a semiconductor
    active medium which is not used for amplification of a light beam input.


CLS 359/345
TXT Particular pumping type (e.g., electrical, optical, nuclear, magnetic,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 333 wherein a specified type of pumping is
    used to change the number of atoms or atomic system in a set of energy
    levels as a result of the absorption of light incident on the material.

    (1)     Note.  This pumping causes the atoms of a medium to be raised from
    certain lower to certain higher energy levels, and it may cause a
    population inversion between certain intermediate levels in order to
    ultimately produce photons when the energy level moves from higher to lower.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, subclasses 69+ for particular pumping
    type which is not used for amplification of a light beam input.


CLS 359/346
TXT Particular resonator cavity (e.g., scanning, confocal or folded mirrors,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 333 wherein the optical beam goes back and
    forth within an optical cavity without any standing waves, similar to an
    oscillating cavity, but resulting in the amplification of the light input
    beam.

    (1)     Note.  This can be a mode-selecting high gain optical structure in
    which  the laser action takes place by the build-up of electromagnetic
    field intensity upon multiple reflections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, subclasses 92+ for laser particular
    resonant cavities which are not used for amplification of a light beam
    input.


CLS 359/347
TXT Multiple pass:

    Subject matter under subclass 333 wherein the laser material does not have
    to be continually pumped since the laser stays in a lasing state for
    multiple traverses of light throughout the lasing medium to produce
    amplified light beams that last longer than the period for the pumping
    itself.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 350 for ring lasers with
    interfering different frequency beams.

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, subclass 94 for ring configuration
    folded resonant cavity.


CLS 359/348
TXT Regenerative:

    Subject matter under subclass 347 wherein the lasing medium is pumped more
    than once to amplify a single input pulse.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, subclasses 69+ for particular pumping.


CLS 359/349
TXT Beam combination or separation:

    Subject matter under subclass 333 wherein a light beam is either combined
    with another light beam or many light beams are created from a single light
    beam in order to produce the desired amplification.


CLS 359/350
TXT HAVING SIGNIFICANT INFRARED OR ULTRAVIOLET PROPERTY:

    Subject matter under the class definition including structure which is
    specifically adapted, as by structure or composition, to function as an
    optical element in the infrared (IR) or ultraviolet (UV) portion of the
    spectrum, or wherein an optical element is constructed or composed to
    extend its operation into the infrared or ultraviolet from the visible
    portion of the spectrum.

    (1)     Note. IR (0.7 micrometers to 1000 micrometers wavelength) according
    to Van Nostrand's Encyclopedia, 7th Edition


    Meters:          7 X 10-7  m     to     .001 m
    Centimeters:   7 X 10-5 cm    to     .1   cm
    Millimeters:    7 X 10-4 mm   to     1   mm
    Micrometers: .7 micrometers  to    1000
        micrometers
    Nanometers:   700 nm           to     106 nm
    Angstroms:     7000 A           to      107 A

    UV (100 Angstroms to 4000 Angstroms wavelength) according to Van Nostrand's
    Encyclopedia, 7th Edition


    Meters:           10-8 m       to          4 X 10-7   m
    Centimeters:   10-6 cm     to         4 X 10-5  cm
    Millimeters:     10-5 mm    to           4 X 10-4  mm
    Micrometers:  .01 micrometers to .4
        micrometers

    Nanometers:  10 nm          to       400 nm
    Angstroms:    100 A           to       4000 A
    Metric Conversion Units:
           Centimeters     =    10-2  meters
           Millimeters      =    10-3  meters
           Micrometers    =    10-6  meters
           Nanometers    =    10-9  meters
           Angstrom       =    10-10 meters

    (2)     Note.  Holographic systems and modulators of Class 359 and fibers
    or waveguides of Class 385 that operate in the IR or UV portion of the
    spectrum are excluded from this and the indented subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass and those indented thereunder are limited to
    elements which operate as optical elements in the infrared and ultraviolet
    portion of the spectrum but a detector to convert IR/UV energy to visible
    light is classified in Class 250.

    (4)     Note.  "Heat Filters" are considered infrared filters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    358,    for IR or UV fluid filter or fluid mirror.

    634,    for wavelength selective beam splitting or combining surface (e.g.,
    dichroic mirror).

    859,    for concave and convex mirrors in series for successive reflections
    in mirrors.

    885+,   for absorption filters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    89,     Ordnance, subclass 41.06 for light reception traning mechanism.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 279+ for temperature or pressure
    automatic control (Thermal-IR).

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 203 for combined vehicle or vehicle
    component windshield or window heating device.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 216 for optical or pre-optical photocell
    system, subclass 226 for color filter or spectroscope optical or
    pre-photocell system, subclasses 330+ for infrared-to-visible imaging,
    subclass 333 image tube type imaging wherein the output screen is used to
    visualize an intensified image or the IR image is converted to electrical
    signals to control the display device,  subclass 336.1 for IR energy
    responsive electric signalling, subclasses 338.1+ for infrared responsive
    invisible radiant energy responsive electric signalling, subclass 351 for
    periodic scanning of an IR beam, subclass 365 for UV light source, subclass
    372 for UV light responsive means, subclass 493.1 for radiant energy
    generation and sources, subclass 504 for ultraviolet or infrared source
    radiation modifying member, and subclasses 505.1+ for radiation controlling
    elements exclusive of infrared, visible and ultraviolet optical elements.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 587 for infrared light transmission
    modifying compositions, and subclasses 588+ for ultraviolet transmission
    modifying compositions.

    283,    Printed Matter, subclass 88 for IR filter with electromagnetic
    radiation having revealable concealed information, fraud preventer or
    detector, use preventer or detector, or identifier, subclass 89 for UV
    filter with electromagnetic radiation having revealable concealed
    information, fraud preventer or detector, use preventer or detector, or
    identifier, and subclass 90 for polarized IR filter with electromagnetic
    radiation having revealable concealed information, fraud preventer or
    detector, use preventer or detector, or identifier.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 112 for polarizer or
    special ray transmission with optical device or special ray transmission
    envelope.

    348,    Television, subclasses 164+ for IR television.

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclasses
    44+ for antiglare or shading spectacles and eyeglasses, and subclass 163
    for light filtering opthalmic lens or blanks.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 202 for projection light sources
    with cooling means.

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, subclass 55 for an image projector
    having a heat filter.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 51 for IR and UV.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 124 for thermally emitted
    radiation with scanning or temperature distribution display.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 59+
    for a sun or radiation screening or suntanning composition intended for
    topical application to a living body.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 160 for a coating with X-ray,
    Ultrasonic, or Infrared properties, subclasses 162+ for coating processes,
    per se, wherein the product is an optical element.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclass 1
    for light, thermal, and electrically applied surgery.


CLS 359/351
TXT Having folded optical path:

    Subject matter under subclass 350 including an element which modifies the
    path of incident light so as to cause the light to repeatedly traverse the
    same or overlapping volumes of space.

    (1)     Note.  The system generally includes plural reflectors to
    sequentially reverse the direction of the optical axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    495,    for birefringent element beam deflection or splitting for
    polarization without modulation or external input.


CLS 359/352
TXT Having polarizing element:

    Subject matter under subclass 350 having an element which restricts the
    direction of vibration of radiant energy.

    (1)     Note.  The restriction may have a time variation.

    (2)     Note.  The polarized radiant energy may be visible light
    accompanying the infrared or ultraviolet radiation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359,    for an IR/UV multilayer filter or multilayer reflector.

    360,    for an IR/UV multilayer filter or multilayer reflector having a
    metal layer.

    372+,   for plural optical axis microscope.

    419+,   for plural optical axis telescope.

    483,    for a visible light polarizer absent any infrared or ultraviolet
    characteristic.

    486,    for light polarization without modulation or external energy by
    grid or dipoles.

    487,    for polarization without modulation by reflection or refraction.

    490+,   for polarization without modulation by dichroic medium, which
    transmits light of one color and reflects light of the complementary color
    with little light absorbed.

    494+,   for polarization without modulation by a birefringent element,
    which divides a ray or beam of energy into two polarized rays or beams
    separated by 90 degrees (known as ordinary and extraordinary).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    283,    Printed Matter, subclass 88 for IR filter with electromagnetic
    radiation having revealable concealed information, fraud preventer or
    detector, use preventer or detector, or identifier.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 112 for polarizer or
    special ray transmission (e.g., filter) with an electric discharge device.



CLS 359/353
TXT Including alternative optical path or optical element (e.g., day-night,
    hi-low magnification):

    Subject matter under subclass 350 which has an element allowing a variable
    radiation path or  which alternatively places an optical element into or
    out of a fixed optical path, thereby producing plural distinct radiation
    processing configurations.

    (1)     Note.  One or more configurations may be limited to visible light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    421,    for telescope compound lens selectable magnification.

    672+,   for lens with selective magnification by exchanging or adding lens
    components.

    708,    for aspherical lens.

    744,    for afocal Galilean telescope lens.


CLS 359/354
TXT Including continuously variable magnification or focal length (zoom lens,
    adjustable lens):

    Subject matter under subclass 350 wherein the focal point or image
    magnification of an imaging device or element is continuously or
    intermittantly changed as desired.

    (1)     Note.  This includes various selected positions of different
    optical elements to fit the user selected application.

    (2)     Note.  This incudes IR/UV variable elements adjacent to or part of
    the zoom lens.

    (3)     Note.  This also includes FLIR (Forward Looking Infrared systems).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    421,    for telescope selectable magnification in a compound lens for the
    visible portion of the spectrum.

    422,    for telescope variable magnification in a compound lens for the
    visible portion of the spectrum.

    676+,   for zoom lens in the visible portion of the spectrum.

    744,    for an afocal lens (e.g., Galilean Telescope).


CLS 359/355
TXT Lens, lens system or component:

    Subject matter under subclass 350 including a refractive imaging element or
    a serially arranged group thereof having a significant property in the
    infrared or ultraviolet area of the electromagnetic spectrum.

    (1)     Note.  Compound lens systems are a plurality of lenses or lens
    groups arranged in series coaxially along an optical axis, such lenses or
    lens groups being so spaced along the axis that the second focal plane of
    the entrant lens of the series lies at or near the first focal plane of the
    next succeeding lens or lens group of the series whereby the light entrant
    lens is capable of producing from light rays passing therethrough from an
    object external to the plurality of lenses an image of that object, which
    image is viewed or relayed by the said succeeding lens or lens group.

    (2)     Note.  Lens systems designate either a single transparent mass of
    refractive material having opposed refracting surfaces or a plurality of
    such masses arranged in series along an optical axis with their opposed
    refracting surfaces disposed transversely of such axis, the said opposed
    surfaces being so shaped and spaced that the mass or plurality of masses
    are capable of producing from light rays passing therethrough from an
    object external to the mass or masses a single image of that object, which
    image is also external to the mass or masses of material.

    (3)     Note.  The term "component" as applied to a lens designates either
    a single transparent mass of refractive material having two opposed
    refracting surfaces or a grouped plurality of such masses arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
    surfaces either in full over-all contact or in spaced parallel relation
    with the spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into
    the lens computations, the two refracting surfaces of the single mass and
    the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of the plurality of masses
    having at least a portion thereof axially air spaced from all other
    adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens.  The axial
    dimension of the air spacing between either the opposed surfaces of the
    single mass or the axially extreme surfaces of the grouped plurality of
    masses and the other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in
    the lens must be of sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens
    computations in order to limit the axial extent of the lens component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    356,    for an infrared lens.

    357,    for an infrared lens having four or more components.

    642+,   for lenses in the visible portion of the spectrum.

    722+,   for lenses which are selective in the visible spectrum by
    transmitting or blocking certain wavelengths.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 160 for a coating having X-ray,
    ultraviolet, or infrared properties.


CLS 359/356
TXT Infrared lens:

    Subject matter under subclass 355 having significant properties in the
    infrared area of the electromagnetic spectrum.


CLS 359/357
TXT Having four or more components:

    Subject matter under subclass 356 which includes four or more components
    which have significant properties in the infrared area of the
    electromagnetic spectrum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    754+,   for multiple component lenses, in general.


CLS 359/358
TXT Fluid filter or fluid mirror:

    Subject matter under subclass 350 including filters or mirrors having a
    liquid or gas which is specially adapted as by composition to transmit or
    absorb infrared or ultraviolet radiation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    665+,   for fluid lenses.

    832,    for fluid filled prisms.

    845,    for fluid cooled mirrors.

    886,    for fluid absorption filters which operate in the visible portion
    of the spectrum.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 226 for color filter or spectroscope
    optical or pre-photocell system.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 582+ for light transmission modifying
    compositions and subclass 588 for those compositions used for ultraviolet
    light transmission modifying.


CLS 359/359
TXT Multilayer filter or multilayer reflector:

    Subject matter under subclass 350 having a substrate and one or more
    superimposed coatings or laminae and which as a whole is designed to have
    significant absorbent or redirective properties in the infrared or
    ultraviolet portion of the spectrum.

    (1)     Note.  Interference filters wherein the multiple reflected beams of
    various different frequencies will automatically interfere with one another
    upon reflection are classified in this subclass if significant IR/UV is
    specified.

    (2)     Note.  Multi-layer absorption would not be interference since waves
    are not produced which interfere with one another.

    (3)     Note.  Multi-layer absorbing elements are classifed in this
    subclass if significant IR/UV is specified.

    (4)     Note.  Semiconductor elements are classifed in this subclass since
    they are not considered metals for  subclass 360.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    580,    for light interference produced by coating or lamina.

    581,    for transmissive coating on interference lens.

    589,    for selective wavelength interference.

    590,    for selective wavelength interference with another filter.

    839,    for mirrors with a transmissive property.

    884,    for mirrors with a selective absorption or transparent overcoating.

    885+,   for absorptive filters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 192.26+ for
    optical or photoactive specified deposition material glow discharge sputter
    deposited coating.


CLS 359/360
TXT Having metal layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 359 wherein at least one coating or lamina or
    the substrate is composed of a metal.

    (1)     Note.  Semiconductor elements are not considered as metal and are
    included under subclass 359.

    (2)     Note.  Only an elemental metal layer  is classified in this
    subclass.  Metal alloys or compositions in a multilayer structure are
    classified in subclass 359.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    722+,   for lenses with selective wavelength transmitting or blocking.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 226 for color filter or spectroscope
    optical or pre-photocell system.

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclass 44
    for sunglasses with antiglare or shading.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclass 95
    for solar cabinets.


CLS 359/361
TXT Having ultraviolet absorbing or shielding property:

    Subject matter under subclass 350 wherein light in the ultraviolet portion
    of the spectrum is blocked or otherwise filtered.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359+,   for a multilayer ultraviolet filter.


CLS 359/362
TXT COMPOUND LENS SYSTEM:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a plurality of image
    formers arranged for forming a series of real images along the optical
    axis, at least one of the real images being formed between two of the image
    formers.

    (1)     Note.  The terminal image former may be an "eyepiece" designed to
    form a real image only in combination with the human eye.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    642+,   for lenses suitable for use in compound lens systems of this
    subclass type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 245+ for compound lens systems
    combined with firearms.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 245+ for optical test
    instruments containing compound lens systems.


CLS 359/363
TXT With image recorder:

    Subject matter under subclass 362 including a device to record an image of
    the object being directly viewed, the compound lens system being primarily
    designed for direct viewing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    372+,   for a microscope with plural optical axes, one axis of which may be
    directed to an image recorder.

    403+,   for a periscope with plural optical axes, one axis of which may be
    directed to an image recorder.

    419+,   for a telescope with plural optical axes, one axis of which may be
    directed to an image recorder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    396,    Photography, subclass 432 for significant camera structure combined
    with a diverse compound lens system.


CLS 359/364
TXT With curved reflective imaging element:

    Subject matter under subclass 362 including a curved reflector which
    contributes to the formation of at least one of the real images.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    727+,   for lenses that employ both refraction and reflection in forming an
    image (catadioptric lenses).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 296+ for reflectors in illumination
    systems.


CLS 359/365
TXT Two or more in a series:

    Subject matter under subclass 364 including a plurality of curved
    reflectors contributing to the formation of one or more of the real images.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    858+,   for image forming reflectors having plural curved surfaces in
    series.


CLS 359/366
TXT Concave, convex combination:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 wherein the plurality of curved
    reflectors include at least one concave and at least one convex reflector.


CLS 359/367
TXT Right angle inspector:

    Subject matter under subclass 362 including a compound lens system with an
    objective deflector to provide viewing at a right angle to the main optical
    axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    434+,   for a relay system which may be used in a compound lens system of
    the structure classified in this subclass (367).


CLS 359/368
TXT Microscope:

    Subject matter under subclass 362 wherein the objective of the compound
    lens system is designed to focus highly divergent light from an object very
    close to the objective.

    (1)     Note.  Also illuminators, stages, slide carriers, and transparent
    slides designed specifically for use with that type of compound lens system
    are classified in subclasses indented under this subclass (368).


CLS 359/369
TXT With viewed screen:

    Subject matter under subclass 368 including structure for displaying a real
    image on a viewed screen.

    (1)     Note.  The screen may be at an intermediate or terminal image plane
    and may, for example, comprise a ground glass screen, a front projection
    screen, a fiber optic output face, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400,    for a telescope with a viewed screen.

    443+,   for a viewing screen.

    505,    for an extended spacing structure for optical elements including a
    screen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 370.08+ for invisible radiant energy
    responsive signalling, including imaging.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 364+ for
    cathode-ray tubes and subclasses 523+ for image intensifier tubes, etc.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 1+ for
    cathode-ray tube circuits, including image intensifiers.

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, subclasses 18, 47, 67, 72+, 74+, and 79+
    for an image projection and viewing screen in combination.


CLS 359/370
TXT Interference:

    Subject matter under subclass 368 wherein light from the object is combined
    with light of different phase or diffraction characteristics either from
    the object or bypassing the object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for interference microscopes having holographic features or for
    making holograms.


CLS 359/371
TXT Using polarized light:

    Subject matter under subclass 370 wherein light with a particular
    polarization characteristic is present.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    386,    for illuminators for microscopes other than interference
    microscopes using polarized light.

    483+,   for optics, systems, and elements for polarization of light or
    using polarized light.


CLS 359/372
TXT With plural optical axes:

    Subject matter under subclass 368 wherein light from an object may follow
    any of a plurality of substantially different optical axes through the
    microscope.

    (1)     Note.  The different optical axes may be partly colinear and may be
    used either simultaneously or alternately.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    363,    for a compound lens system with an image recorder.

    403+,   for a periscope with plural optical axes.

    419+,   for a telescope with plural optical axes.


CLS 359/373
TXT Side-by-side fields:

    Subject matter under subclass 372 wherein at least two of the separate
    paths provide different images which are adjacent in a common field of view.


CLS 359/374
TXT Plural oculars:

    Subject matter under subclass 372 wherein at least two of the separate
    paths terminate in separate eyepieces.


CLS 359/375
TXT Binocular:

    Subject matter under subclass 374 wherein at least two of the plural
    oculars are separated at approximately the interocular distance to provide
    simultaneous viewing by both eyes of one observer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404,    for a binocular periscope.

    407,    for a binocular telescope.

    480+,   for a binocular viewing device in general.


CLS 359/376
TXT Stereoscopic:

    Subject matter under subclass 375 wherein at least two of the binocular
    eyepieces provide stereoscopic viewing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    462+,   for steroscopic viewing systems.


CLS 359/377
TXT With single or parallel objectives:

    Subject matter under subclass 376 including one objective for two
    stereoscopic views or two objectives with parallel optical axes for two
    stereoscopic views.


CLS 359/378
TXT For viewing stereo pairs:

    Subject matter under subclass 377 wherein separate objective channels view
    different object fields, each field being filled by a separate parallax
    object view for viewing.

    (1)     Note.  The devices of this subclass provide for two separate
    fields.  The stereoscopic property is related to the objects being  viewed
    taken from two slightly different directions of a three-dimensional object.
     The views usually comprise a pair of transparencies, each transparency
    being a separate object view.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    466+,   for stereo-viewing devices.


CLS 359/379
TXT Spacing of optical elements axially adjustable:

    Subject matter under subclass 368 including means for varying the axial
    separation of the optical elements, for example, for focusing or varying
    magnification.

    (1)     Note.  Other subclasses in this class indented under subclass 399,
    Telescope, and titled "Separation of optical elements axially adjustable"
    or including the word "focusing" may include subject matter related to
    subject matter in this subclass (379).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    506,    for an adjustable extended spacing structure for optical elements.


CLS 359/380
TXT Variable magnification:

    Subject matter under subclass 379 wherein varying the axial separation
    varies the size of an in focus terminal image while the object distance
    remains constant.

    (1)     Note.  Other subclasses in this class indented under subclass 407,
    Binocular, and titled "Spacing of optical elements axially adjustable" may
    include subject matter related to variable magnification.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    422,    for a telescope with variable magnification.

    432,    for variable magnification in nonmagnifying compound lens systems.

    506,    for adjustable extended spacing structure for optical elements.

    676+,   for a lens having its equivalent focal length variable continuously
    between limits.


CLS 359/381
TXT Imaging elements movable in and out of optical axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 368 wherein an imaging element is selectively
    positionable in or out of the optical axis to change the image distance or
    image size.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    421,    for a telescope with selective magnification.


CLS 359/382
TXT Entire microscope adjustable along optical axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 368 wherein the microscope translates along
    the optical axis to vary the distance to an object plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    392,    for devices wherein the stage or slide carrier translates along the
    optical axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 25+ for a mechanism
    converting rotary motion to or from reciprocating or oscillatory motion.


CLS 359/383
TXT Focus adjustment:

    Subject matter under subclass 382 wherein the adjustment along the optical
    axis effects the focus of the compound optical system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    410,    for binocular telesopes with adjustable focus.

    425+,   for telescopes with focusing.


CLS 359/384
TXT With rotatable adjustment:

    Subject matter under subclass 368 including means for swinging the
    microscope about an axis.


CLS 359/385
TXT Illuminator:

    Subject matter under subclass 368 including (a) structure for illuminating
    an object being viewed in combination with a microscope or (b) object
    illuminating structure designed specifically for use with a microscope.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    798+,   for lenses with viewed object or viewed field illumination.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 257+ and 317+ for an illuminator with a
    modifier or a light modifier.


CLS 359/386
TXT Using polarized light:

    Subject matter under subclass 385 wherein the illuminating structure
    provides polarized light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    371,    for an interference microscope using polarized light.

    483+,   for systems and elements for the polarization of light without
    modulation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclass 19 for an illuminator with a polarizer.


CLS 359/387
TXT With annular lighting structure:

    Subject mattter under subclass 385 including means for providing an annulus
    of light surrounding a dark central portion for illuminating the object.


CLS 359/388
TXT With optical switching means:

    Subject matter under subclass 385 including means for changing optical
    elements in the illuminating beam path to change the type of illumination.

    (1)     Note.  The optical elements may be movable in and out of the
    illuminating beam path or the illuminating beam may be deflected to pass
    through different optical elements.


CLS 359/389
TXT With illuminating and viewing paths coaxial at the image field:

    Subject matter under subclass 385 wherein the illuminating light is
    transmitted through a space occupied by the image field.

    (1)     Note.  A partially transmitting beam splitter is commonly used in
    devices in this subclass (389).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    799,    for a lens with a coaxial illuminating beam.


CLS 359/390
TXT With illuminator support:

    Subject matter under subclass 385 including (a) means for maintaining the
    illuminator in a fixed position or (b) means for limiting the movement of
    the illuminator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 382+ for an illuminator with a support.


CLS 359/391
TXT Stage or slide carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 368 including (a) structure for supporting an
    object to be viewed or tools to be placed in the field of view in
    combination with a microscope or (b) structure for supporting an object or
    tools designed specifically for use with a microscope.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    801     and 804+, for lenses with a viewed object support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, for supports generally.


CLS 359/392
TXT Adjustable along optical axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 391 wherein the stage or slide carrier
    translates along the optical axis to vary its distance from the microscope.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    382+,   for devices wherein the microscope translates along the optical
    axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 25+ for a mechanism
    converting rotary motion to or from reciprocating or oscillatory motion.

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 144.11+ for a
    vertically adjustable platform.


CLS 359/393
TXT With plural transverse movements:

    Subject matter under subclass 391 wherein the stage or slide carrier is
    movable in a plurality of directions perpendicular to the optical axis of
    the microscope.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 471 for X-Y control devices.

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 137+ for a
    horizontally adjustable platform.


CLS 359/394
TXT With turntable:

    Subject matter under subclass 391 wherein the stage or slide carrier is
    rotatable about the optical axis or an axis parallel to the optical axis of
    the microscope.


CLS 359/395
TXT With temperature control:

    Subject matter under subclass 391 including means to vary or keep constant
    the temperature at the location of the stage or slide carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    396,    for devices including a transparent slide which may include
    temperature control means.


CLS 359/396
TXT Transparent slide:

    Subject matter under subclass 368 including (a) a transparent mass, usually
    a glass plate, for supporting an object to be viewed in combination with a
    microscope or (b) a transparent mass, usually a glass plate, designed
    specifically for supporting an object to be viewed by a microscope.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 244+ for sample or
    specimen holders.


CLS 359/397
TXT Reference lines or grids:

    Subject matter under subclass 396 including indicia on the transparent
    slide.


CLS 359/398
TXT Specimen cavity or chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 396 including a container for holding,
    isolating, or limiting the flow of an object.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 246 for fluid sample
    containers.


CLS 359/399
TXT Telescope:

    Subject matter under subclass 362 wherein the compound lens system is
    designed for viewing distant objects.


CLS 359/400
TXT With viewed screen:

    Subject matter under subclass 399 including a semi-transparent or opaque
    structure for displaying one of the series of real images.

    (1)     Note.  The screen may be at an interminate or terminal image plane
    and may, for example, comprise a ground glass screen, a front projection
    screen, a fiber optic output face, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    369,    for a microscope with a viewed screen.

    443+,   for a viewing screen.

    505,    for an extended spacing structure for optical elements including a
    screen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 213 for circuits having image intensifier
    or nonvisible to visible imaging vacuum tubes.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 524 for a telescope
    (or any optical system) combined with an image intensifier.

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, subclasses 18, 47, 67, 72+, 74+, and 79+
    for an image projector and viewing screen in combination.


CLS 359/401
TXT With image anti-rotation:

    Subject matter under subclass 399 wherein the telescope maintains an erect
    terminal image as at least part of the telescope is turned to rotate an
    intermediate image.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    554+,   for an image stabilization system including image anti-rotation.


CLS 359/402
TXT Periscope:

    Subject matter under subclass 399 wherein the entrance optical axis and the
    exit optical axis of the telescope are parallel and offset and
    perpendicular to the main axis of the telescope.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401,    for a periscope with image anti-rotation.


CLS 359/403
TXT With plural optical axes:

    Subject matter under subclass 402 wherein light from an object may follow
    any of a plurality of substantially different optical axes through the
    periscope.

    (1)     Note.  The different optical axes may be partly colinear and may be
    used either simultaneously or alternately.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    372+,   for a microscope with plural optical axes.

    419+,   for a telescope with plural optical axes.


CLS 359/404
TXT Binocular:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 wherein at least two of the substantially
    different axes provide separate views to separate eyepieces for binocular
    viewing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    375+,   for a binocular microscope.

    407+,   for a binocular telescope.

    480+,   for a binocular viewing device in general that does not use a
    compound lens system.


CLS 359/405
TXT With mechanical adjustment:

    Subject matter under subclass 402 wherein all or a portion of the periscope
    relative to another structure is moved.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    429+,   for a telescope with line of sight adjustment.


CLS 359/406
TXT Extensible structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 405 wherein the extension or elevation of the
    periscope is changed, usually by the use of telescoping structures.


CLS 359/407
TXT Binocular:

    Subject matter under subclass 399 wherein at least two exit optical axes
    are spaced at approximately the interocular distance to provide
    simultaneous viewing by both eyes of one observer.

    (1)     Note.  This is the type of device used by fans at a ball game to
    see distant players.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    375+,   for a binocular microscope.

    404,    for a binocular periscope.

    480+,   for a binocular viewing device in general that does not use a
    compound lens system.


CLS 359/408
TXT Foldable or collapsible:

    Subject matter under subclass 407 wherein the binocular telescope is hinged
    or provided with telescoping or bellows sections to provide a more compact
    unit when not in use or prior to assembly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    474,    for a collapsible stereoscope.

    817,    for a lens with a foldable or collapsible support.


CLS 359/409
TXT Body supported or with handle:

    Subject matter under subclass 407 wherein the binocular telescopes are
    combined with (a) an elongated structure for providing a handhold or (b) a
    structure for engaging a portion of the body or apparel for support.


CLS 359/410
TXT With focusing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 409 wherein the supported binocular telescope
    includes means for bringing an object at varying distances into focus.

    (1)     Note.  Other subclasses in this class indented under subclass 412
    with adjustable interocular distance and titled "Spacing of optical
    elements axially adjustable" may include subject matter related to focusing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    379+,   for a microscope with the spacing of optical elements axially
    adjustable.

    425+,   for a telescope with focusing or relatively sliding barrels.

    506,    for an adjustable extended spacing structure for optical elements.


CLS 359/411
TXT With adjustable interocular distance:

    Subject matter under subclass 409 wherein the supported binocular
    telescopes are connected by means which vary and maintain lateral spacing
    of the two binocular optical axes.


CLS 359/412
TXT With adjustable interocular distance:

    Subject matter under subclass 407 wherein the binocular telescopes are
    connected by means which vary and maintain lateral spacing of the two
    binocular optical axes.


CLS 359/413
TXT Oculars swing about central axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 412 wherein the lateral spacing is changed by
    swinging the binocular telescopes about a common axis.


CLS 359/414
TXT Spacing of optical elements axially adjustable:

    Subject matter under subclass 413 wherein the axial separation of optical
    elements, usually lenses, prisms, or mirrors, may be varied, usually for
    focusing or varying magnification.

    (1)     Note.  Other subclasses in this class indented under subclass 362,
    Compound lens system, and titled "Separation of elements axially
    adjustable", "Variable magnification" or including the word "focusing" may
    include subject matter related to subject matter in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    506,    for an adjustable extended spacing structure for optical elements.


CLS 359/415
TXT Oculars rotate about separate axes:

    Subject matter under subclass 412 wherein the lateral spacing is varied by
    rotating the binocular telescopes about different axes displaced from their
    optical axes.


CLS 359/416
TXT Spacing of optical elements axially adjustable:

    Subject matter under subclass 415 wherein the axial separation of optical
    elements, usually lenses, prisms, or mirrors, may be varied, usually for
    focusing or varying magnification.

    (1)     Note.  Other subclasses in this class indented under subclass 362,
    Compound lens system, and titled "Separation of optical elements axially
    adjustable", "Variable magnification" or including the word "focusing" may
    include subject matter related to subject matter in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    506,    for an adjustable extended spacing structure for optical elements.


CLS 359/417
TXT Spacing of optical elements axially adjustable:

    Subject matter under subclass 412 wherein the axial separation of optical
    elements, usually lenses, prisms, or mirrors, may be varied, usually for
    focusing or varying magnification.

    (1)     Note.  Other subclasses in this class indented under subclass 362,
    Compound lens system, and titled "Separation of optical elements axially
    adjustable", "Variable magnification", or including the word "focusing" may
    include subject matter related to subject matter in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    506,    for an adjustable extended spacing structure for optical elements.


CLS 359/418
TXT Spacing of optical elements axially adjustable:

    Subject matter under subclass 407 wherein the axial separation of optical
    elements, usually lenses, prisms, or mirrors, may be varied, usually for
    focusing or varying magnification.

    (1)     Note.  Other subclasses in this class indented under subclass 362,
    Compound lens system, and titled "Separation of optical elements axially
    adjustable", "Variable magnification" or including the word "focusing" may
    include subject matter related to subject matter in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    506,    for an adjustable extended spacing structure for optical elements.


CLS 359/419
TXT With plural optical axes:

    Subject matter under subclass 399 wherein light from an object may follow
    any of a plurality of substantially different paths through the telescope.

    (1)     Note.  The different optical axes may be partly colinear and may be
    used either simultaneously or alternately.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    372,    for a microscope with plural optical axes.

    403,    for a periscope with plural optical axes.


CLS 359/420
TXT Plural magnification in same viewing field:

    Subject matter under subclass 419 wherein telescope images of different
    magnification are simultaneously viewable in a common field of view.


CLS 359/421
TXT Selectable magnification:

    Subject matter under subclass 399 wherein the telescope includes means for
    step variations of the image size while the object distance remains
    constant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    381,    for a microscope with an imaging element movable in and out of the
    optical axis.


CLS 359/422
TXT Variable magnification:

    Subject matter under subclass 399 wherein the telescope continuously varies
    the size of the image while the object distance remains constant.

    (1)     Note.  Other subclasses in this class indented under subclass 407,
    Binocular, and titled "Separation of optical elements axially adjustable"
    may include subject matter related to variable magnification.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    380,    for a microscope with variable magnification.

    432,    for a compound lens system with variable magnification.

    506,    for adjustable extended spacing structure for optical elements.

    676+,   for a lens having its equivalent focal length variable continously
    between limits.


CLS 359/423
TXT With relay:

    Subject matter under subclass 399 wherein the telescope includes at least
    one lens system which forms a real image of a real image.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402+,   for a periscope including a relay.

    422,    for a variable magnification telescope including a relay.

    434,    for a compound lens system with a relay.


CLS 359/424
TXT With reticle:

    Subject matter under subclass 423 wherein a cross-hair or emblem is present
    at a real image plane of the telescope.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    422,    for a variable magnification telescope including a relay and a
    reticle.

    427,    for focusing or relatively sliding barrels with a reticle.

    428,    for a telescope with a reticle.

    505,    for an extended spacing structure for optical elements with a
    reticle.


CLS 359/425
TXT Focusing or relatively sliding barrels:

    Subject matter under subclass 399 wherein the telescope includes (a) a
    device for forming an in focus image of an object of varying distances or
    (b) tubes supporting optical elements movable axially into and out of one
    another.

    (1)     Note.  Other subclasses in this class indented under subclass 362,
    Compound lens system, and titled "Separation of optical elements axially
    adjustable" may include subject matter related to subject matter in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    410,    for a binocular telescope that is body supported or with a handle
    and includes focusing means.

    506,    for an adjustable extended spacing structure for optical elements.


CLS 359/426
TXT Internal focusing:

    Subject matter under subclass 425 wherein the entrance and exit lenses
    remain a fixed distance apart while the telescope is focused.


CLS 359/427
TXT With reticle:

    Subject matter under subclass 425 wherein a cross-hair or emblem is present
    at a real image plane of the telescope.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    422,    for a variable magnification telescope including a relay and a
    reticle.

    424,    for a telescope with a relay and a reticle.

    428,    for a telescope with a reticle.

    505,    for an extended spacing structure for optical elements with a
    reticle.


CLS 359/428
TXT With reticle:

    Subject matter under subclass 399 wherein a cross-hair or emblem is present
    at a real image plane of the telescope.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    422,    for a variable magnification telescope including a relay and a
    reticle.

    424,    for a telescope with a relay and a reticle.

    427,    for a telescope with focusing or relatively sliding barrels and
    with a reticle.

    505,    for an extended spacing structure for optical elements with a
    reticle.


CLS 359/429
TXT With line of sight adjustment:

    Subject matter under subclass 399 wherein the telescope includes adjusting
    the direction of view and maintaining the adjustment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401,    for a telescope with image anti-rotation.

    405,    for a periscope with mechanical adjustment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 127+ for stands in general.


CLS 359/430
TXT Equatorial mount:

    Subject matter under subclass 429 wherein the telescope includes structure
    to establish an axis (polar axis) parallel to the earth's rotational axis
    about which the telescope viewing axis rotates (right ascension) at a
    selected angle (declination) between the polar axis and the viewing axis.


CLS 359/431
TXT With prism or U-shaped optical path:

    Subject matter under subclass 399 wherein the telescope includes two right
    angle deflections in series to reverse the optical path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    413,    for adjustable binoculars including a prism or a U-shaped optical
    path.


CLS 359/432
TXT Variable magnification:

    Subject matter under subclass 362 wherein the compound lens system
    continuously varies the size of a terminal image while the object distance
    remains constant.

    (1)     Note.  Other subclasses in this class indented under subclass 407,
    Binocular, and titled "Spacing of optical elements axially adjustable" may
    include subject matter related to variable magnification.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    380,    for variable magnification in microscopes.

    422,    for variable magnification in telescopes.


CLS 359/433
TXT With tilted lens or tilted image plane:

    Subject matter under subclass 362 wherein the compound lens system includes
    (a) at least one lens whose optical axis is oblique to the optical axis of
    the system or (b) is designed to produce at least one image plane tilted
    with respect to the optical axis of the system.


CLS 359/434
TXT With relay:

    Subject matter under subclass 362 wherein the compound lens system includes
    at least one lens system that forms a real image of a real image.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    423+,   for a telescope with a relay.


CLS 359/435
TXT Repetitious lens structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 434 wherein the compound lens system includes
    (a) a plurality of identical relays in series or side by side or (b) at
    least one relay comprised of identical elements or elements symmetrically
    reversed about a center point.


CLS 359/436
TXT SCALE OR INDICIA READING:

    Subject matter under the class definition including optical structure for
    facilitating the reading of a scale, with or without a pointer or
    indicator, having spaced lines or other indicia thereon; or for
    facilitating reading a vernier type indicator where lines from two
    different scales are matched.

    (1)     Note.  The scale may be on a weighing instrument, slide rule,
    compass or speed indicator, etc.; and classification is here unless
    sufficient scale supporting structure is recited to classify with the
    particular art such as Class 33, Geometrical Instruments; Class 73,
    Measuring and Testing; Class 177, Weighing Scales; and Class 235, Registers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 327+ for signal pointers and
    indicating arms.

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclass 234 for self-positioning scales with
    magnified indication of spring deformation.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 242 for thread counters
    and similar subject matter where a relationship between the counter and the
    fabric is recited such as a viewing aperture or support for the counter on
    the fabric or a fabric support, subclasses 247+ for optical reticles and
    crosshairs and subclasses 373 and 397 for distance measuring devices which
    have a scale or optical grid displaced relative to a remote fiducial mark.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 23+ for dial illuminators.


CLS 359/437
TXT Polarizer:

    Subject matter under subclass 436 including a polarizing element.

    (1)     Note.  A polarizing element causes incident light polarization as
    defined in the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    485+,   for specific polarizing elements.


CLS 359/438
TXT Prism:

    Subject matter under subclass 436 including a prism which may reflect or
    refract light for better viewing the scale or indicia.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 831 for the definition of a prism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    831+,   for specific prism elements.


CLS 359/439
TXT Mirror:

    Subject matter under subclass 436 including a mirror to reflect light from
    the scale or indicia to the viewer.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 838 for the definition of a mirror.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    838+,   for mirrors, per se.


CLS 359/440
TXT Lens:

    Subject matter under subclass 436 including a lens.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 642 for the definition of a lens.

    (2)     Note.  The lens is usually employed to magnify the image of the
    scale markings or indicia.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    806,    for optical reading devices including line markers.

    809+,   for lenses combined with diverse type art devices in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 327 for a reflector or magnifier
    used for sighting in a liquid level or depth gauge.


CLS 359/441
TXT Movable or adjustable:

    Subject matter under subclass 440 including means for adjusting or moving
    the lens with respect to the scale or indicia as for positioning or
    focusing the lens.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    642+,   for lenses, per se.


CLS 359/442
TXT Along scale or indicia:

    Subject matter under subclass 441 including means to guide a lens along the
    reading direction of a linear scale or indicia.

    (1)     Note.  The lens may be movable along a nonlinear (e.g., circular)
    scale as well as a linear scale and the structure must be included which
    constricts or guides the movement of the lens along the scale or indicia.

    (2)     Note.  An actuator, per se, is not classified in this subclass.


CLS 359/443
TXT PROJECTION SCREEN:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a sheet or other
    extending surface or area which is especially adapted to render an image of
    an object which is projected thereon visible to an observer, usually by
    diffusing the projected light.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and those indented thereunder in this class
    (359) include screens where the size, shape, or refractive index of
    embedded particles is claimed or screens with elements having geometric
    curves, with relative refractive indices or parts with claimed patterns,
    with wave plates, acoustical characteristics or other optical criterion.
    Such criterion must be more than mere "light diffusing particles" or a
    "light diffusing surface" to classify a patent in Class 359 as opposed to
    Class 139 or Class 428.  See Class 427, appropriate subclasses for methods
    of making screens by coating.

    (2)     Note.  The screen may be merely tracing paper or a canvas as in
    indented subclass 447.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    350+,   for a viewing screen having infrared or ultraviolet characteristics.

    900,    for miscellaneous methods of making screens not classified in Class
    427, Coating Processes, or Class 156, Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous
    Chemical Manufacture, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 383+ for light diffusing woven
    screens.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, especially
    subclasses 19+ and 371+ for framed screens without optical details other
    than merely "translucent" or something similar.

    248,    Supports, especially subclasses 158+ for screen supports.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 1.1+ for processes directed to forming optical articles capable
    of producing an optical effect other than mere transparency or planar
    reflection.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 21+ for screens supported
    in a cabinet.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 61 for a motion picture
    projector combined with a screen.

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, subclasses 18, 47, 67, 72+, 74+, and 79+
    for cabinet which encloses projector and one side of screen or structurally
    related projector and screen.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 162+ for coating processes, per se,
    wherein the product is an optical element.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, especially subclasses
    143+ for embedded light diffusing particles or for light diffusing stock
    material in the form of a single or plural layer web or stock material
    which may be useful for projection purposes.


CLS 359/444
TXT With sound producer:

    Subject matter under subclass 443 including a loudspeaker or other sound
    producing means combined with the screen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 36 for motion picture devices
    combined with screens and sound producers.

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, subclass 18 for an image projector in
    combination with a sound producer.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    150+ for electrical loudspeakers, per se.


CLS 359/445
TXT Acoustical:

    Subject matter under subclass 443 wherein the screen is especially adapted
    to transmit or damp sound waves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    444,    for acoustical screens combined with means to produce sound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 175+ for mufflers and sound filters.


CLS 359/446
TXT Moving during projection:

    Subject matter under subclass 443 including means to rotate or oscillate
    the screen, usually for the purpose of improving the image seen by viewers
    or for imparting a three dimensional effect.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    520+,   for vibrating, oscillating, or rotating signal reflectors.


CLS 359/447
TXT Tracing (e.g., camera lucida, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 443 wherein the screen upon which an image is
    formed is adapted to have an outline of the image traced or sketched
    thereon.

    (1)     Note.  The instrument, commonly referred to as a camera lucida,
    usually includes a prism or mirrors and sometimes a lens to cause a virtual
    image of an object to appear as if projected upon a plane surface so that
    an outline may be traced.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    369     and 400, for a compound lens system combined with a viewing screen.

    448,    for a lens combined with a viewing screen.

    449,    for a reflector combined with a viewing screen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, subclasses 44 and 45 for an image
    projector having a concentrated source of light to project an image for the
    purpose of tracing it.


CLS 359/448
TXT With lens (e.g., camera obscura, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 443 including a lens combined with the
    screen, the screen usually being positioned in the second principle focal
    plane of the lens.

    (1)     Note.  The device, commonly known as a camera obscura, usually has
    a darkened chamber with a lens at the entrance thereof to permit light from
    external objects to enter and to form an image of the objects on a screen
    in the chamber.

    (2)     Note.  The combinations classified here are often constructed to
    function normally only when the light rays approaching the entrant lens
    from the object are substantially parallel, under which conditions the
    image produced by the device is always greatly reduced relative to the size
    of the object.  The lens and screen combinations classified in Class 353,
    Optics:  Image Projectors, differ from those classified here in that they
    are constructed to operate normally only when the light rays approaching
    the entrant lens from the object are of the widely diverging type, that is,
    when the object is near the first principal focal plane of the entrant
    lens, under which conditions the image produced by the device is enlarged
    relative to the size of the object, a condition that usually necessitates
    the use of intense artifical object illumination to provide an adequately
    illuminated image.  Moreover, the lens and screen combinations of Class
    353, Optics:  Image Projectors, always have their object and screen in the
    conjugate focal planes of the projection lens employed with the screen
    spaced more distant from the lens than the object, while the lens and
    screen combinations of this subclass 448 have their object and screen
    substantially at infinity and at the principal focal plane of the lens
    respectively.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    369     and 400, for a compound lens system combined with a viewing screen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, subclasses 18, 47, 67, 72+, 74+, and 79+
    for an image projector having a light source or means to concentrate solar
    light and including a lens and screen combination.  See (2) Note above.


CLS 359/449
TXT With reflector or additional screen:

    Subject matter under subclass 443 including another screen or a reflector
    which usually is between the first screen and a projector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    447,    for camera lucidas which include reflectors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, subclasses 67, 73, 77, and 78 for an
    image projector having a screen and a reflector.


CLS 359/450
TXT Border, mask, shade, or curtain:

    Subject matter under subclass 443 including means connected to the screen
    to shield or shade the screen or to modify the contrast between the screen
    and the surrounding area.

    (1)     Note.  For the purpose of this subclass, drapes, hoods, and covers
    are considered to be curtains.


CLS 359/451
TXT Curved:

    Subject matter under subclass 443 wherein the surface of the screen is
    articulated rather than flat.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the overall shape or surface of the screen
    is curved but subclasses 455 and 459 have curved individual elements but
    the overall surface of the screen is generally flat.


CLS 359/452
TXT Embedded particles:

    Subject matter under subclass 443 including a mass or sheet of material
    (e.g., resin, etc.) with particles partially or fully embedded therein to
    affect the light transmission or reflection characteristics of the screen,
    the particles having characteristics such as a particular geometric shape,
    size, or refractive index.

    (1)     Note.  The screens in Class 428, Stock Material or Miscellaneous
    Articles, subclasses 143+ may include particles claimed as light diffusing
    or as causing translucency.  However, if the particles are claimed as
    having certain refractive  index, size or shape, or an index or size
    relative to the remainder of the screen material, the patent is classified
    here in subclass 452.  Further, if a geometric configuration is formed by
    the particles in the screen the patent is also classified here in subclass
    452.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 162+ for coating processes, per se,
    wherein the product is an optical element.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 143+ for a
    stock material product containing embedded particles which diffuse light,
    and see (1) Note above.


CLS 359/453
TXT Rear projection screen:

    Subject matter under subclass 452 wherein an image is projected on one side
    of a screen and viewed from the opposite side.


CLS 359/454
TXT Unitary sheet comprising plural refracting areas:

    Subject matter under subclass 443 wherein a plurality of refracting
    elements are each part of a unitary plate or mass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    455,    for a lenticular screen.

    542,    for signal reflectors with plural refracting elements formed as a
    unitary mass.


CLS 359/455
TXT Lenticular:

    Subject matter under subclass 454 wherein at least some of the plurality of
    refracting elements have spherical or cylindrical curvature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    542,    for signal reflectors with plural refracting elements formed as a
    unitary mass.

    619+,   for surfaces composed of lenticular elements.


CLS 359/456
TXT Rear projection screen:

    Subject matter under subclass 455 wherein an image is projected on one side
    of a screen and viewed from the opposite side.


CLS 359/457
TXT With Fresnel lens:

    Subject matter under subclass 456 wherein the lenticulated rear projection
    screen includes a Fresnel lens or a lens resembling a plano-convex or
    plano-concave lens that is cut into narrow rings and flattened out.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 742 for the definition of Fresnel type lens.


CLS 359/458
TXT Stereoscopic imaging or three dimensional imaging:

    Subject matter under subclass 455 wherein a lenticulated refractive screen
    is placed between a picture and a viewer eye to provide an illusion of
    relief or an illusory three dimension picture of a single perspective.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    462+,   for stereoscopic device that may include a nominal recitation of a
    projection screen.

    478,    for relief illusion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 57+ for stereoscopic camera or
    projectors and subclasses 85+ for special effects, particularly subclass 86
    for devices creating an illusion of three dimensional viewing without
    employing separate left and right images.


CLS 359/459
TXT Unitary sheet comprising plural reflecting  areas:

    Subject matter under subclass 443 wherein a plurality of discrete
    reflecting elements are part of a unitary plate or sheet, the reflecting
    elements redirecting the impinging light in different directions.

    (1)     Note.  The discrete elements are usually angularly related or
    curved.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    530,    for a unitary sheet comprising a plurality of cube corner or triple
    reflectors.

    546,    for discrete reflecting elements formed as a unitary mass.

    619+,   for surfaces composed of lenticular elements.


CLS 359/460
TXT Rear projection screen:

    Subject matter under subclass 443 wherein an image is projected on one side
    of a screen and viewed from the opposite side.


CLS 359/461
TXT Roll up screen:

    Subject matter under subclass 443 wherein the screen is flexible and can be
    wound around a roller for easy storage or for portability.


CLS 359/462
TXT STEREOSCOPIC:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising (1) a separate optical
    system for each eye of one person, which are looking at a common object,
    for producing separate visual records containing information from the two
    different points of view relative to that object, or (2) the stereoscopic
    record itself, or (3) the devices for viewing such records.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes optical systems of stereo projectors and
    cameras which are not sufficient to constitute a complete projector or
    camera.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    478,    for devices giving an illusion of relief but where information is
    obtained only from a single point of view.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 1 for measuring stereoscopes and
    subclass 20.4 for plotting stereoscopes combined with a stylus.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 1 for exhibitors in
    general, and subclasses 361+ for nonstereo transparent film viewers.

    348,    Television, subclasses 42+ for stereoscopic television systems.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 57+ for stereoscopic motion
    picture cameras.

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, subclasses 7+ for attachments which
    convert a conventional projector to a stereoscopic image projector.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 12+ for base line type
    range or height finders which include stereoscopic viewers and subclass 390
    for mensuration or configuration comparison devices which may involve
    stereo-viewers.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 41+ for a
    stereoscopic X-ray or gamma ray system.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 324+ for stereoscopic camera.


CLS 359/463
TXT Having record with lenticular surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 462 comprising a record with a plurality of
    reflecting or transmitting elements, each having a curved or figured
    surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    455+,   for lenticular projection screens.

    619+,   for surfaces composed of lenticular elements.

    642+,   for lenses generally.

    727,    for lenses having concave and/or convex reflecting surfaces with
    coatings.


CLS 359/464
TXT With right and left channel discriminator (e.g., polarized or colored
    light):

    Subject matter under subclass 462 associated with stereo systems wherein by
    appropriate viewing devices (e.g., colored or polarizing spectacles), light
    rays representing the right and left stereoscopic channels and having
    different optical properties (e.g., color, direction of polarization), in
    accordance with the channel they represent, will affect only the eye
    appropriate to a given channel.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes for example, (1) apparatus for
    forming superimposed images from light rays having different optical
    properties, (2) the record containing right and left stereo images
    characterized by having different optical properties, or (3) the viewing
    devices for discriminating between the light rays from the right and left
    images.


CLS 359/465
TXT Using polarized light:

    Subject matter under subclass 464 wherein the particles of the light
    vibrate perpendicular to the direction of travel and these vibrations are
    either in straight lines, circles, or ellipses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    483+,   for optics, systems and elements for polarization of light or using
    polarized light.


CLS 359/466
TXT Stereo-viewers:

    Subject matter under subclass 462 comprising either (1) viewing devices
    which are used to aid the observer in fusing adjacently mounted right and
    left stereoscopic pictures or (2) the adjacently mounted right and left
    stereoscopic pictures themselves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    804+,   for nonstereo viewers with a significant lens system.


CLS 359/467
TXT View changers:

    Subject matter under subclass 466 including means to facilitate changing
    from one stereoscopic slide or picture to another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 446+ for changeable
    exhibitors in general.

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, subclasses 92 and 103+ for a slide
    changer for an image projector.


CLS 359/468
TXT Picture moves linearly past viewing aperture:

    Subject matter under subclass 467 wherein the slide or picture being viewed
    moves linearly past the viewing aperture, i.e., each point on the picture
    generates a straight line as it passes the aperture.


CLS 359/469
TXT Using film-strips:

    Subject matter under subclass 468 wherein a carrier is formed as a tape or
    strip with individual elements of a motion picture sequence uniformly
    spaced along the strip.

    (1)     Note.  Film strips may include moving film, film-roll band, ribbon
    of film, film tape, or film spools.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 37 for strip type films with a
    sound record, subclass 56 for methods of working or making a film strip,
    subclass 59 for stereoscopic apparatus involving plural film strips,
    subclasses 166+ for drive mechanisms for film strips, and subclasses 232+
    for motion picture carriers.

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, subclass 120 for picture carriers for
    still projectors.


CLS 359/470
TXT Compensates for camera position (e.g., plotting or mapping type):

    Subject matter under subclass 466 wherein compensation is made for the
    orientation or position of the recording device or devices which produced
    the stereo pictures.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter generally involves stereoscopes for
    plotting, mapping, or measuring where the raw data must be adjusted to
    compensate for such things as parallax, different image size, skew, or
    tilt, etc., caused by a particular camera orientation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 1 for similar subject matter
    combined with measuring means and subclass 20.4 for similar subject matter
    combined with scribing means.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for similar devices employing
    photocells.

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, subclass 6 for an image projector for
    stereoscopic mapping or for rectifying an aerial photograph.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 2 for contour plotting
    devices which may involve stereo-viewers.


CLS 359/471
TXT Reflected line of sight:

    Subject matter under subclass 466 including means for reflecting the line
    of sight of at least one eye of the observer.


CLS 359/472
TXT Pictures offset, transposed, or have respective right or left sides
    adjacent:

    Subject matter under subclass 471 wherein (1) the pictures viewed are
    vertically offset (i.e., the tops and bottoms are not in line), (2) the
    picture to be viewed by the right eye is on the left side of the picture to
    be viewed by the left eye, or (3) the respective right or left sides of the
    stereo pictures are adjacent.


CLS 359/473
TXT Ocular spacing or angle between ocular axes adjustable:

    Subject matter under subclass 466 comprising means for adjusting the
    spacing of the stereoscope oculars or means for adjusting the angular
    relationship of their optical axes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    412+,   for binocular lenses having adjustable interocular spacing.


CLS 359/474
TXT Collapsible:

    Subject matter under subclass 466 wherein the stereoscope after use can be
    folded, collapsed, or dismantled to form a more compact package or wherein
    the stereoscope, prior to use, is folded, collapsed, or dismantled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    817,    for lenses with foldable or collapsible supports.


CLS 359/475
TXT Having Illumination:

    Subject matter under subclass 466 including means to illuminate or improve
    the illumination of the stereo picture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    798+,   for illuminating a viewer including a significant lens system.


CLS 359/476
TXT Ocular to picture distance adjustable:

    Subject matter under subclass 466 including adjustment of the distance
    between the stereoscopic eyepieces and the viewed picture.


CLS 359/477
TXT Supporting, mounting, enclosing, or light shielding structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 466 comprising supporting, mounting,
    enclosing or light shielding structure for stereo viewer or its components.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of this subclass are stereoscopic hoods, cases or
    handles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    407+,   for compound lens binocular with supports or handles.

    811+,   for lenses with supports.


CLS 359/478
TXT RELIEF  ILLUSION:

    Subject matter under the class definition for giving a depth or relief
    effect comprising a visual record which contains information of the object
    viewed obtained from only one point of view.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    462+,   for stereoscopic devices where the visual record contains
    information obtained from two different points of view.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclass 44 for pseudo stereoscopic television.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 86 for a motion picture device
    for depth illusion.


CLS 359/479
TXT Reflected line of sight:

    Subject matter under subclass 478 wherein the line of sight of at least one
    eye of the observer is reflected.


CLS 359/480
TXT BINOCULAR  DEVICES:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising one separate optical
    element, aperture or tube for each eye of the user or comprising a single
    optical element used alternately by each eye.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404,    for telescopic binocular having plural optical axes.

    407+,   for binocular type compound lens system.

    466+,   for stereoscopic viewing devices.

    618+,   for systems including a single optical channel which merges to or
    from a plural optical channel, the plural channel lacking the binocular use.


CLS 359/481
TXT Binocular loupe type:

    Subject matter under subclass 480 including a support shaped to position
    one or more lenses before each eye so that the lenses move with the head of
    the user.

    (1)     Note.  The support may be adapted to be attached directly to either
    the head, e.g., a head band, or spectacle frames.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    407+,   for binocular type compound lens systems.

    815,    for such structure which is body or apparel carried.

    816,    for monocular loupes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 426+ for goggles.

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclasses
    41+ for spectacles and eyeglasses.  See section VI of the 351 Class
    Definition for the distinction between the vision correcting structure of
    Class 351 and the magnifying structure of Class 359.


CLS 359/482
TXT Reflected line of sight:

    Subject matter under subclass 480 wherein the line of sight of at least one
    eye of the observer is reflected.


CLS 359/483
TXT POLARIZATION WITHOUT MODULATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the polarization of an
    incoming light beam is modified in a time invariant fashion as a result of
    passing through some optical device.

    (1)     Note.  Where both a polarizing device and a composition are
    claimed, the patent is classified here and cross-referenced to Class 252,
    subclass 585.

    (2)     Note.  Where a method of making the polarizing device is claimed as
    well as the polarizing device, the patent is classified here and
    cross-referenced to any other class providing for the method.

    (3)     Note.  The nominal recitation of a polarizing area in the form of a
    design, image, etc., is sufficient to include this subject matter in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    for optical multiplex communications, using polarization.

    246+,   for electro-optic modulation of polarized light.

    281+,   for magneto-optic modulation of polarized light.

    301,    for light wave directional control of polarized light.

    371     and 386, for compound lens systems combined with polarizers.

    437,    for polarizers used in a scale or indicia reading.

    465,    for polarizers used in stereoscopic systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, particularly subclass 548 for
    illuminated signs utilizing polarizers.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 225 for a light polarizer and a photocell
    and subclasses 505.1+ for invisible radiation control devices exclusive of
    infrared and ultraviolet devices which may include polarization devices.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 585 for chemical compositions which produce
    polarized light.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 112 for electric
    lamps and electronic tubes combined with a polarizer.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 756 for antennas
    with a polarization converter and subclasses 909+ for radio wave
    polarizations, per se.

    349,    Liquid Crystal Cells, Elements and Systems, subclass 194 for liquid
    crystal polarizer.

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclasses
    49, 215, and 232 for light-polarizing devices used in eye examining vision
    testing and correcting means.

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, subclass 20 for polarizers used with
    image projectors.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 30+ for gem or crystal
    examining using polarized light; subclass 326 for spectrometers which
    utilize polarized light; and subclasses 364+ for polarized light
    examination devices generally.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 121 for
    polarization techniques used in the storage and retrieval of information.

    472,    Amusement Devices, subclasses 57+ for a theatrical stage device
    which may use a polarizer.


CLS 359/484
TXT Time invariant electric, magnetic or electromagnetic field responsive
    (e.g., electro-optical, magneto-optical):

    Subject matter under subclass 483 wherein an electrical, magnetic, or
    electromagnetic field, which is unchanging in time, is applied to the
    device producing the polarization.

    (1)     Note. This would include optical isolators and circulators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 114 for
     magneto-optical storage systems.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 122 for
    information masking using magneto-optical polarization.


CLS 359/485
TXT Light polarization without any external input:

    Subject matter under subclass 483 wherein an optical device causes optical
    energy to vibrate in accordance with a regular pattern that differs from
    the input without the application of any supplemental energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, subclasses 107.1+ for photographic recorder systems
    where a phenomenal record is made of an output signal.

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, subclasses 224+ for
    apparatus or processes for marking record receiver using radiation energy
    (e.g., light or beam), subclasses 129+ for electrostatic marking apparatus
    or processes including photo scanning device.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 368 for polarimeters which
    include electro-optical light rotation.


CLS 359/486
TXT By grid or dipoles:

    Subject matter under subclass 485 wherein electrical conductors in the form
    of a grid (i.e., each grid opening forms a half wavelength of the applied
    light) or half wavelength dipoles embedded in the medium  produce
    polarization of the applied light.


CLS 359/487
TXT By reflection or refraction (e.g., Brewster angle):

    Subject matter under subclass 485 wherein a light beam is polarized as a
    result of either (1) striking a surface and returning into the originating
    medium or (2) redirection as it passes through media of differing optical
    densities.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    486,    for dipole and grid polarizers.


CLS 359/488
TXT With particular medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 487 wherein details of the reflecting or
    refracting medium are recited (e.g., physical composition, structure,
    specific indexes of refraction, or thickness of layers).

    (1)     Note.  Physical shape (other than layered mediums) or arrangement
    of elements or mediums is not considered a particular medium for this
    subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 585 for chemical compositions, per se, which
    produce polarized light.


CLS 359/489
TXT Polarization (direction or magnitude) varies over surface of the medium
    (e.g., vectograph):

    Subject matter under subclass 485 comprising a surface which transmits or
    reflects light and whose ability to polarize light is not uniform across
    the surface.

    (1)     Note.  This variation in polarizing ability may be continuous or
    discontinuous  and may form any type of pattern.  For example, the
    different areas of a surface may form an image or design as in a
    "vectograph".


CLS 359/490
TXT By dichroic medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 485 including an optical element which
    effects the degree of polarization dependent upon the relative absorption
    therein of the two components or vectors of light.

    (1)     Note.  A dichroic element will transmit light of one color and
    reflect light of the complementary color with little light being absorbed.
    These elements are composed of superimposed strata of dielectric material,
    which are classified in subclass 580.

    (2)     Note.  Included here are elements where the medium comprises a
    lamination or a coating on a supporting structure and where the supporting
    structure is significant or the means to form the lamination or coating is
    significant.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for processes of adhesively bonding laminae.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 162+ for coating processes, per se,
    where the product is an optical element.


CLS 359/491
TXT Stain or dye:

    Subject matter under subclass 490 wherein a coloring agent is absorbed by
    the polarization medium to affect the polarization of the applied light
    beam.


CLS 359/492
TXT Oriented particles:

    Subject matter under subclass 490 wherein the polarization of the applied
    light is dependent upon the spatial positioning of microscopic particles
    embedded in the dichroic medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    486,    for embedded dipoles.

    490,    for polarization caused by the molecular orientation of the matrix
    material or of a reaction product.

    491,    for stain or dye molecules acting as oriented particles.


CLS 359/493
TXT Glare prevention by discriminating against polarized light:

    Subject matter under subclass 485 wherein unwanted glare-producing light,
    having a particular polarization, is eliminated by a polarizing structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    501,    for two superimposed relatively adjustable polarizers mounted as a
    unit and used to reduce or control light intensity.

    601+,   for glare reduction not utilizing a polarizer.


CLS 359/494
TXT By birefringent element:

    Subject matter under subclass 485 including an element having the property
    of dividing a ray or beam of energy into two polarized rays or beams (known
    as the ordinary and extraordinary rays), the directions of polarization
    being at right angles to each other.

    (1)     Note.  A birefringent material which has been treated with a
    dichroic dye to absorb the ordinary or extraordinary ray is no longer
    considered to be birefringent within the meaning of this definition.  A
    birefringent element in the form of a Nicol prism where the unwanted ray is
    deflected is classified here.


CLS 359/495
TXT For beam deflection or splitting:

    Subject matter under subclass 494 wherein the entire beam or a portion of
    the beam is caused to change direction for positioning purpose or wherein
    the beam is split into two or more portions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301+,   for polarized beam directional modulation.

    487,    for beam deflection and splitting using nonbirefringent medium.

    496,    for prism structures which could be used for beam splitting.


CLS 359/496
TXT Prisms:

    Subject matter under subclass 494 wherein the birefringent element is
    formed into a structure bound in part by two plane faces that are not
    parallel and combinations of the structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    831+,   for prisms, per se.


CLS 359/497
TXT Using plural elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 494 wherein beam polarization is achieved by
    multiple birefringent elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250,    for plural mediums in electro-optic polarized light modulation.

    301+,   for plural mediums used to deflect the beam where at least one of
    the mediums is field responsive.

    371     and 386, for microscopes using polarized light which may utilize
    birefringent elements.

    455+,   for lenticular projection screens with birefringent elements

    496     and 497+, for prism structures made up of plural elements and for
    plural element polarization.


CLS 359/498
TXT Frequency filter or interference effects:

    Subject matter under subclass 497 wherein plural elements act to pass a
    particular frequency or band of frequencies, or wherein interference
    effects are used to produce effects such as color or an interference
    pattern.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370+,   for interference microscopes which may utilize birefringent
    elements.

    490,    for color effects using dichroic medium.

    634,    for wavelength selective beam splitting systems.

    885+,   for an absorption filter.


CLS 359/499
TXT Using compensation techniques:

    Subject matter under subclass 497 wherein at least one of the elements
    corrects for unwanted effects, such as those due to temperature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249,    for compensating systems in a polarized light electro-optic
    modulator.


CLS 359/500
TXT With particular material or mounting structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 494 wherein details of the birefringent
    material, such as the type, size, shape, crystal cut, or treatment thereof
    or detailed structures for mounting the material are recited.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    496,    for polarization by a prism.


CLS 359/501
TXT By relatively adjustable superimposed or in series polarizers:

    Subject matter under subclass 485 wherein the polarizers are positioned one
    on top of another or arranged in a row and their positions are adjustable.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500,    for mounting structure of superimposed birefringent elements.


CLS 359/502
TXT With color filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 485 where a polarizing structure is combined
    with structure to selectively absorb or transmit specific light
    wavelengths.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    490,    for similar subject matter where the color is produced by a
    dichroic medium. (See (1) Note under subclass 490 for definition of
    dichroic.)

    498,    for similar subject matter where the only color produced is a
    result of interference between the ordinary and extraordinary light rays.


CLS 359/503
TXT EXTENDED SPACING STRUCTURE FOR OPTICAL ELEMENTS:

    Subject matter under the class definition including (a) means for
    maintaining different types of optical elements significantly separated in
    a fixed or adjustable relationship along the optical axis or (b) means for
    maintaining lenses significantly separated as in a Galilean telescope or
    door peep.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    744,    for afocal lenses (e.g., Galilean telescopes).

    894+,   for optical apertures or tubes or transparent closures.

    896,    for miscellaneous optical devices.


CLS 359/504
TXT Wide angle (e.g., door peep):

    Subject matter under subclass 503 wherein an objective element is designed
    to give a wide field of view, usually at least 120 degrees.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    744,    for afocal lenses (e.g., Galilean telescopes).

    819+,   for lens mounts.


CLS 359/505
TXT With screen or reticle in real image plane:

    Subject matter under subclass 503 including a real image display structure
    or a cross-hair or emblem at a real image plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    369,    for a microscope with a screen.

    400,    for a telescope with a screen.

    422,    for a variable magnification telescope including a relay and a
    reticle.

    424,    for a telescope with a relay and reticle.

    427,    for a telescope with focusing or relatively sliding barrels and a
    reticle.

    428,    for a telescope with reticle.


CLS 359/506
TXT Extension of tubular element adjustable:

    Subject matter under subclass 503 including a sliding structure, a bellows,
    or a telescoping structure for adjusting an optical barrel along the
    optical axis relative to another structure.

    (1)     Note.  Other subclasses in this class indented under subclass 362,
    Compound lens system and titled "Separation of optical elements axially
    adjustable", "Variable magnification" or including the word "focusing" may
    include subject matter related to subject matter in this subclass.


CLS 359/507
TXT PROTECTION FROM MOISTURE OR FOREIGN PARTICLE:

    Subject matter under the class definition including structure to stop
    moisture or foreign matter from coming into contact with optical elements
    or means to remove moisture or foreign matter from optical elements.

    (1)     Note.  Storage or container, per se, for an optical element is
    classified in Class 206, Special Receptacle or Package, particularly
    subclasses 5+ for eyeglasses or spectacles and subclasses 316.1+ for other
    optical or photographic devices or elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 300.1+ for
    clean-ing machines involving air blast or suction.

    134,    Cleaing and Liquid Contact With Sol-ids, appropriate subclasses.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 162+ for an optical element produced
    with a coating process.


CLS 359/508
TXT Optical element rotates:

    Subject matter under subclass 507 where an optical element or a shield
    therefor is rotated or otherwise moved to throw off moisture or other
    foreign matter, usually by centrifugal force.

    (1)     Note.  The optical element may be rotated by any motor including
    one operated by air passing over vanes as in an air operated turbine.


CLS 359/509
TXT Fluid directed across optical element:

    Subject matter under subclass 507 with structure to direct a fluid across
    an optical element to blow or wash moisture, or other foreign matter off or
    to pull such matter off by suction created by the moving fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    508,    for apparatus where fluid is directed to vanes, as in a turbine,
    which rotates the optical element or a shield therefor, such as a
    transparent disc in fron of an objective lens.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 300.1+ for
    cleaning machine involving air blast or suction.


CLS 359/510
TXT Microscope drape:

    Subject matter under subclass 507 including a thin flexible structure
    loosely encircling a microscope to isolate the microscope from its
    surroundings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    368+,   for microscope, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 305 and 316.1+ for a
    special container for an optical instrument.


CLS 359/511
TXT Cap or cover:

    Subject matter under subclass 507 wherein a usually flanged or flat member
    covers the end of a barrel of an optical device in order to protect an
    unused lens, located within a barrel, from dust or from damage by impact
    with foreign objects.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    611+,   for a shade to deflect unwanted light from a lens.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 247 for a cover
    or cover holder.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for movable or
    removable nonuse covering means.


CLS 359/512
TXT Humidity or temperature control:

    Subject matter under subclass 507 with means for maintaining a desired
    humidity level or temperature or for increasing or decreasing the humidity
    level or temperature from its ambient value.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    395,    for a stage or slide carrier with temperature control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 219 for an electrically heated mirror.


CLS 359/513
TXT Sealing:

    Subject matter under subclass 507 with means to seal the optical elements
    from the atmosphere so that dust or moisture, etc., does not fall on them.


CLS 359/514
TXT Mirror, prism or signal reflector:

    Subject matter under subclass 513 wherein an element being sealed includes
    a mirror, prism, or signal reflecting structure.


CLS 359/515
TXT SIGNAL REFLECTOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein elements may be specular
    or diffusing to reflect a light to an observer for signalling purposes.

    (1)     Note.  The presence of a reflector usually is the desired
    information com-unicated to an observer, i.e., any light, as from an
    observer's automobile headlights, reflected from the reflector makes the
    presence of the reflector, and thus danger or need for caution, known to
    the observer; however, in indented subclass 527, below, some of the
    reflectors reflect light from a traffic signal light to an observer or
    reflect light from a source to an observer merely to determine if the
    source is operating.

    (2)     Note.  The structure of signs with the nominal recitation of a
    signal reflector are classified in Class 40.  In particular an "indicia"
    design or the conveyance of specific information would be classifiable in
    Class 40.

    (3)     Note.  Most of the patents in these subclasses relate to highway
    traffic in the form of indicating the presence of an approaching curve,
    vehicle, or pedestrian on a roadway.

    (5)     Note.  Since Class 359 is considered superior to Class 116 (Search
    Note VIII), the use of a signal  reflector as a signal source or indicator
    will be clasified in Class 359, unless the details of the signals and
    indicators are specified.

    (6)     Note.  Track reflectors having utility with railroads are
    classified in Class 246.

    (7)     Note.  A nominal recitation, i.e., no optical limitations, of a
    signal reflector combined with the specifics of its support is classified
    in Class 248.

    (8)     Note.  The patents of this and indented subclasses are to use the
    signal reflector to attract attention as opposed to being the source of
    illumination of Class 362.

    (9)     Note.  A lens, as in a plastic tail light of an automobile used to
    identify an automobile's presence to a following automobile, is classified
    in Signal Reflectors (subclasses 515+), rather than Lens (subclasses 642+).

    (10)    Note.  A mirror, located along the side of the road to cause a
    light flash for identification of the edge of the road as an automobile
    approaches, is classified in Signal Reflectors (subclasses 515+), rather
    than Mirror, (subclasses 838+) since a nominal recitation of a mirror
    claimed with other structure is classified with the other structure.

    (11)    Note.  The combination of an article of clothing and a signal
    reflector is classified in this subclass since the combination only is
    classified in Class 2, if not otherwise classifiable.

    (12)    Note.  The combination of an animal collar (i.e., nominal
    recitation of a collar or harness) together with a signal reflector is
    classified with the signal reflector of this and indented sub-classes,
    while a reflector claimed in combination with more than a nominal collar is
    classified in Class 119, subclass 858.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    514,    for signal reflector sealing from mois-ture or foreign particles.

    838+,   for mirrors which reflect a substantial portion of incident light,
    but the re-flected light is not used for signalling purposes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclass 137 for light reflecting or
    illumination at-tached to a shoe.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, sub-class 208 for a license
    plate and reflector, subclasses 219 for translucent mirrors with indicia,
    and subclasses 582+ for illuminated signs which may include reflective
    elements.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 20 for heliographic code signaling
    and subclasses 63+ for mechanical street traffic signalling structure, such
    as a semphore, light shutter, or pointer.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 858 for an animal collar including a
    reflector.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclass 474 for railway track
    reflectors which are disclosed as having special utility with railroads.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 201+ for brackets and subclasses 466+ for
    mirror or picture type supports.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 483.1+ for reflectors including
    luminescent, fluorescent or phosphorescent material.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating Processes,
    subclass 1.9 for reflective type.

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclass 37 for protectors or
    trim members.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 113+ for an
    electric lamp or discharge device with a reflector integral therewith.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, appropri-ate subclasses for traffic
    and vehicle signal lights, subclasses 815.4+ for visual indicator, and
    subclass 815.76 for  lens type indicator.

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Ra-dar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 5+ for radar reflectors, i.e.,
    reflectors of radio frequency waves.

    362,    Illumination, for artificial illumination means, subclasses 61+
    contains illumination with vehicle structure, subclasses 296+ for
    projectors with reflec-tors, and subclasses 341+ for constant reflectors.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 9+ includes
    reflector support structure combined with road structure.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 162+ for optical element produced.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Ar-ticles, subclass 98 for
    structurally de-fined web or sheet.


CLS 359/516
TXT Body carried:

    Subject matter under subclass 515 including apparatus to enable a user
    (human or animal) to carry the reflector.

    (1)     Note.  A reflector carried by the hand or wrist but not worn by the
    user, belongs in this subclass, rather than subclass 517.

    (2)     Note.  The combination of either a flashlight or a cane with an
    attached reflector, which is normally carried by the hand, belongs in this
    subclass.

    (3)     Note.  The combination of an article of clothing and a signal
    reflector belongs in this subclass not with the apparel of Class 2, since
    the combination only belongs in Class 2, if not otherwise classifiable.

    (4)     Note.  The combination of an animal collar (i.e., nominal
    recitation of a collar or harness) together with a signal reflector is
    classified with the signal reflector not the collar of Class 119, subclass
    while a reflector claimed in combination with more than a nominal collar is
    classified in Class 119, subclass 858.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    517,    for a signal reflector that is part of or attached to an article
    worn on the hand or wrist of the user.

    518,    for reflectors that are an integral part of the clothing used as
    apparel.

    519,    for reflectors that are worn over clothing, but not held.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclass 137 for light reflecting or
    illumination attached to a shoe.

    63,     Jewelry.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 35 for motion and direction
    indicators for vehicles.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 858 for an animal collar including a
    reflector.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 321 for portable
    self-contained (e.g., movie usher's signalling flashlight) and subclass 475
    for turn signals.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 103 for wearing apparel or body support,
    subclass 104 for jewelry with wearing apparel or body support.


CLS 359/517
TXT Worn by hand or wrist:

    Subject matter under subclass 516 wherein the reflector is a part of or
    attached to clothing or a device both of which are worn by the wrist or
    hand.

    (1)     Note.  A glove having a reflector is classified in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  A wrist band having a reflector is classified in this
    subclass.

    (3)     Note.  A reflector carried by the hand or wrist, but not worn, is
    classified in subclass 516.

    (4)     Note.  Safety belts, pins, etc., wherein the sole function of the
    apparatus is to mount a signal reflector for safety purposes are classified
    in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    516,    for reflectors that are carried by the body and not worn by the
    user.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 158+ for hand or arm covering.

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclass 71.5 for preformed, externally
    applied, wear-connecting attachments.

    63,     Jewelry, subclasses 3+ for bracelets and subclasses 15+ for finger
    rings.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 104 for jewelry with wearing apparel or body
    support.


CLS 359/518
TXT Permanently fixed to clothing:

    Subject matter under subclass 516 wherein a reflector is attached to an
    article of clothing and remains on the clothing when a person discontinues
    wearing the clothing.

    (1)     Note.  Signal reflectors that are part of the clothing a person
    wears and the clothing serves other purposes than as a mount for a
    reflector are classified in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  A belt, having a reflector, worn through the loops of a pair
    of trousers functions as an article of clothing and is classified and in
    this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  Signal reflectors that are transparent spheres permanently
    fixed to clothing by glue, transparency, etc., are classified in this
    subclass.

    (4)     Note.  A helmet, hat, shoe, or boot is considered clothing for this
    subclass, but Class 36, subclass 137 takes light reflecting or illumination
    attached to a shoe.

    (5)     Note.  A pin with a reflector is not permanently fixed to clothing,
    but is classified in subclass 519.

    (6)     Note.  A signal reflector permanently attached to an animal collar,
    leash, or harness is classifed in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    519,    for safety belts, pins, etc., having a reflector and the sole
    purpose of wearing the article is for safety reasons.  A safety belt is not
    worn through the loops of a pair of trousers.

    538,    for minute transparent reflective spheres mounted on a flexible
    substrate that is not clothing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 158+ for hand or arm covering.

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclass 71.5 for preformed, externally
    applied, wear-connected attachments.

    63,     Jewelry, subclasses 3+ for bracelets and subclasses 15+ for finger
    rings.


CLS 359/519
TXT Worn over clothing:

    Subject matter under subclass 516 wherein the reflector is mounted on
    apparatus that is placed over the apparel of a user.

    (1)     Note.  This would include a safety belt, a safety belt harness, and
    pins that are worn solely for the reflecting properties not as part of the
    normal dress of the person.  A safety belt is not used through the loops of
    a pair of trousers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    516,    for a signal reflector that is held by the user rather than worn.

    518,    for a belt used as an article of clothing for a pair of trousers
    which also has a reflector integral or as part of the belt.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 158+ for hand or arm covering.

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclass 71.5 for preformed, externally
    applied, wear-connecting attachments.

    63,     Jewelry, subclasses 3+ for bracelets and subclasses 15+ for finger
    rings.


CLS 359/520
TXT Moving:

    Subject matter under subclass 515 where the signal reflector is in a
    continuous state of motion to be more easily observed.

    (1)     Note.  The continuous state of motion could be vibration,
    oscillation, or rotation on a specified device whether or not they are
    "claimed" as rotating etc.

    (2)     Note.  The motion of reflectors resulting from vehicle vibration,
    vehicle wheels, wind action, etc., are considered to be an irregular nature
    for this subclass and not periodic.

    (3)     Note.  The beam deflection caused by a nonperiodic moving reflector
    solely to present a clearer observation of the reflector belong in this
    subclass not beam deflection by the reflector to communicate some specific
    information via the modulation produced by the signal reflector beam
    deflection.

    (4)     Note.  Rigidly mounted reflectors such as bicycle reflectors
    mounted on the frame do not belong here but in subclass 550.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212+,   for a periodically moving reflector to produce light beam
    deflection/scanning without modulation.

    508,    for rotating reflector to throw off moisture or foreign particle.

    526,    for reflectors that are wobbly mounted on the support.

    549+,   for reflectors rigidly mounted to a vehicle in order to move
    exactly as the vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 208 for a license plate
    and reflector, subclasses 427+ and 446+ for display devices that simulate
    motion or a changing exhibitor, subclasses 582+ for illuminated signs which
    may include reflective elements.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 28+ for vehicle, subclasses 46+
    for rotatable motion and direction indicators for vehicles, and subclass 56
    for vehicle-energy actuated.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclass 125 for electric automatic
    highway signals, mine doors, and gates.


CLS 359/521
TXT Pedal mounted:

    Subject matter under subclass 520 wherein the reflector is attached to the
    pedal of a vehicle that requires pedal movement for vehicle motion.

    (1)     Note.  These patents are generally bicycle pedals but are not
    limited only to bicycles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    523,    for spoke mounted moving reflectors.

    524,    for tire, valve stem, wheel, hub cap, or axle mounted moving
    reflectors.

    550,    for reflectors rigidly mounted to a bicycle or motorcycle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 560 for pedals and
    subclasses 594.4 for pedals connected to a crank.


CLS 359/522
TXT Rotating:

    Subject matter under subclass 520 wherein the reflector movement is
    rotational about some axis.

    (1)     Note.  This includes reflectors that are rotated by the gases
    expelled from the exhaust pipe of a vehicle.

    (2)     Note.  The structure of signs with the nominal recitation of a
    signal reflector are classified in Class 40.  In particular, an "indicia"
    design or the conveyance of specific information would be classifiable in
    Class 40.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    508,    for optical elements that are rotated for protection from moisture
    or foreign particles.

    520,    for reflectors that appear to move but are stationary and moving
    apertures in front of the reflectors make them appear to be moving.

    525,    for wind driven rotating reflectors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 430+ for rotatable
    displays with special effects.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 28+ for vehicle, subclasses 46+
    for rotatable motion and direction indicators for vehicles, and subclass 56
    for vehicle-energy actuated.


CLS 359/523
TXT Spoke mounted:

    Subject matter under subclass 522 wherein the reflector is attached onto
    one or more spokes that position the rim from the hub.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes bicycle and motorcycle spokes as well
    as any other type of spoked wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    521,    for pedal mounted moving reflectors.

    524,    for tire, valve stem, wheel, hub cap, or axle mounted moving signal
    reflectors.

    550,    for reflectors rigidly mounted on a bicycle or motorcycle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels, and Axles, subclass 37 for wheel covers
    fastened to the spokes of a wheel.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, appropriate subclasses for bicycle
    traffic and vehicle communications.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 72 with a bicycle or motorcycle supporting
    the illumination source.


CLS 359/524
TXT Tire, wheel, valve stem, hub cap, or axle mounted:

    Subject matter under subclass 522 wherein the reflector is attached to
    either a rotating tire, valve stem, wheel, hub cap, or axle of a vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  This also includes reflectors attached to or part of a dust
    cover of a valve stem.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    521,    for pedal mounted moving reflectors.

    523,    for spoke mounted moving reflectors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 587 for tire and wheel
    signs.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 89.4 for inflation stem dust
    covers.

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels, and Axles, subclass 37 for wheel protectors
    or trim members, or wheel covers fastened to the spokes of a wheel, and
    subclass 108 for wheel hub caps.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, appropriate subclasses for bicycle
    traffic and vehicle communications.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 72 with a bicycle or motorcycle supporting
    the illumination source.


CLS 359/525
TXT Wind driven:

    Subject matter under subclass 522 wherein the rotation of the reflector,
    attached to a vehicle, is controlled by wind.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 440 for rotatable fluid
    operated display with special effects and subclass 479 for rotatable fluid
    operated changing exhibitor.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, digest 7 for fluid actuated.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 217+ for fluid driven
    rotatable blade (e.g., pinwheel).


CLS 359/526
TXT Vibration:

    Subject matter under subclass 520 wherein the signal reflector attracts
    attention by its own random movement relative to its support.

    (1)     Note.  This reflector is not driven by any motor or other source of
    energy such as the wheel of a vehicle or the wind.

    (2)     Note.  The reflector is wobbly mounted with respect to its support.

    (3)     Note.  The reflector has additional movement from that created by
    its support (i.e., it is suspended from its support bracket).

    (4)     Note.  Reflectors rigidly mounted to a support via a helical or
    other spring belong in this subclass since they will vibrate.

    (5)     Note.  A reflector attached to a mudflap of a vehicle would be
    classified here since the movement of the mudflap having the reflector
    attracts attention.

    (6)     Note.  Rigidly mounted reflectors such as bicycle reflectors
    mounted on the frame do not belong here but in subclass 550.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    520,    for reflectors that are in a continuous state of motion relative to
    their support.

    549,    for reflectors that are rigidly mounted on a moving vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 613+ for vibratory
    signs.


CLS 359/527
TXT For a signal source remote from observer:

    Subject matter under subclass 515 including structure to reflect light from
    a signal originating from a source remote from the observer, i.e., not
    coming from a light source at the location of the observer.

    (1)     Note.  This structure may be merely a plane mirror mounted on an
    automobile hood to reflect light from an overhead traffic signal to the
    driver or it may be a reflector at a street intersection which reflects
    light from the headlights of one car to the driver of another car
    travelling in a direction approximately 90 degrees different than that of
    the first car.

    (2)     Note.  Road reflectors remote from the vehicle, to reflect all of
    an automobile's headlight beams back to the driver are not classified in
    this subclass since the source of the vehicle headlight beams are at the
    location of the observer.

    (3)     Note.  The reflection of the light beams of one vehicle's
    headlights to another vehicle would be classified in this subclass.

    (4)     Note.  A reflector which reflects a portion of the light output of
    a vehicle's headlight or taillight to be observable by the driver of the
    vehicle is classified in this subclass, rather than Class 362, since the
    reflection is for observation rather than illumination.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    529+,   for 3 corner retroreflectors which return a light beam back to the
    source.

    531,    for unitary retroreflectors mounted on the road surface.

    546+,   for plural reflecting elements for a single sheet or plate such as
    in some road reflectors.

    551,    for reflectors mounted on the roadway that reflect the light from a
    vehicle back to the driver of the vehicle.

    552,    for reflectors mounted adjacent the roadway which reflect the light
    beams from a vehicle's headlights back to the driver of the vehicle.

    838,    for similar mirrors which are not dis-closed as signal mirrors,
    which only have to reflect light, but which are disclosed as reflecting
    images.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 559 for illuminated
    sign external light source if indicia is present.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclass 474 for track reflectors.  A
    railway and switch in combination with a nominally recited signal reflector
    are also classified in this class (246).

    248,    Supports, subclasses 476+ for adjustable mirror or picture position.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclass 97.1 for glare or screen
    body and subclass 97.2 for specific structure or properties for diffusing
    or reflecting light to reduce the glare on the viewer's eyes.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 341+ for a reflector light modifier.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Appara-tus, subclass 16 for reflectors
    used to detect the presence of traffic.


CLS 359/528
TXT Light transmitting from source behind a reflector:

    Subject matter under subclass 515 where the reflector is adapted to
    transmit light from a source which is behind the surface of the reflector
    which is normally viewed, such as in a tail-light reflector which transmits
    light from a light bulb behind the reflector or lens and also reflects a
    large amount of light which is directed to the front surface of the
    reflector by an external source such as the headlights of an approaching
    automobile.

    (1)     Note.  The patents of this subclass use a signal reflector
    combination with a light source behind the reflector in order to attract
    attention of other vehicles, either by the light source itself or
    reflection of the other vehicle's light.

    (2)     Note.  The use of a reflector to change (i.e., concentrate,
    disperse, collimate) the light from a source for illumination purposes
    belong in Class 362 (e.g., the reflector behind the light source of a
    headlight used to direct the outgoing beam in a particular pattern).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    549,    for a taillight that reflects incoming light from a reflector
    behind the light source that transmits away from the vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 61+ for illumination with vehicle
    structure, subclass 83.1 for mirror or reflector with vehicle structure
    (e.g., rear view mirror), subclasses 296+ for a light source and modifier
    including a reflector where the reflector is used to modify the outgoing
    source light beam, and subclasses 341+ for reflector light modifiers.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 31 for vehicle
    body ornament.


CLS 359/529
TXT 3-Corner retroreflective (i.e., cube corner, trihedral, or triple
    reflector type):

    Subject matter under subclass 515 wherein the light is reflected from three
    reflecting surfaces and wherein after the three reflections, it moves in a
    direction opposite to and parallel to its direction before the three
    reflections.

    (1)     Note.  The reflections may be external or internal, i.e., the light
    may be reflected without entering the material from which the reflector is
    made or the light may enter one surface of the reflector, be reflected
    three times internally, and exit through the same sur-face.

    (2)     Note.  Single or plural 3-corner reflectors are classified in this
    subclass but plural reflectors formed into a single substrate are
    classified in subclass 530.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    527,    for a structure which reflects light from a signal source remote
    from an observer.

    530,    for plural 3-corner reflectors in a single substrate.

    831+,   for prisms, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 357+ for a mold with separating or
    clamping.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 379.2+ for deforming sheet metal.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 281 for
    electroforming mold or strips, plates, electrodes apparatus for forming
    electrolytic elements.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 141.1+ for the process of shaping.

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 117 for container type molding device.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 1.9 for reflective composite or multilayer optical article shaping
    or treating.

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 7+ for radio wave cube corner
    reflectors.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping  or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 403 for shaping surfaces, per se, and subclass 808 for lens mold.


CLS 359/530
TXT Unitary plate or sheet comprising plural reflecting elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 529 wherein the reflective elements, such as
    the individual triple reflectors, are part of a single plate or sheet
    comprising a plurality of the 3-corner reflective elements.

    (1)     Note.  The reflective elements are a part of the structure of the
    plate or sheet.

    (2)     Note.  Many of these retroreflectors are used on highways for road
    makers.

    (3)     Note.  Plural reflectors combined into a single substrate are
    classified in this subclass whereas plural reflectors using multiple
    substrates are classified in subclass 529.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 357+ for a mold with separating or
    clamping.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 379.2+ for deforming sheet metal.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 281 for
    electroforming mold or strips, plates, electrodes apparatus for forming
    electrolytic elements.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 141.1+ for the process of shaping.

    249,    Static Molds subclass 117 for container type molding device.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 1.9 for reflective composite or multilayer optical article shaping
    or treating.

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 7+ for radio wave cube corner
    reflectors.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclass 14 for lane marker
    impregnated with reflective material, subclass 16 for vibration inducing
    member including a reflector.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 403 for shaping surfaces, per se, and subclass 808 for lens mold.


CLS 359/531
TXT Mounted on roadway:

    Subject matter under subclass 530 wherein the reflector is positioned onto
    the vehicle road surface in order to enable easier viewing of that portion
    of the roadway.

    (1)     Note.  A reflector sign, having a unitary plate of 3-corner
    reflectors, permanently fastened to a road surface would belong in this
    subclass but the same reflector counterbalanced within a recess in the
    roadway - ordinarily up and visible but capable of retraction into the
    recess when contacted by the vehicle wheel - is classified in Class 404.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    514,    for signal reflector sealing from moisture or foreign particle.

    547,    for a unitary mass of discrete reflecting elements mounted on or
    adjacent the roadway.

    551,    for a broad reflector mounted on the roadway.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 612 for highway or
    street marker.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 168 having controlling apparatus adapted
    to interact with stationary apparatus which describes the course of the
    vehicle's travel.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 9+ for traffic
    director where the reflector is not permanently fixed to the road surface.


CLS 359/532
TXT Mounted adjacent roadway:

    Subject matter under subclass 530 wherein the reflector is positioned off
    of the roadway surface but within viewing distance of the driver of a
    vehicle in order to enable easier viewing of the edge of the roadway.

    (1)     Note.  A reflector sign permanently fastened to a road surface
    would belong in this subclass but the same reflector counterbalanced within
    a recess in the roadway - ordinarily up and visible but capable of
    retraction into the recess when contacted by the vehicle wheel is
    classified in Class 404.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    514,    for signal reflector sealing from moisture or foreign particle.

    547,    for a unitary mass of discrete reflecting elements mounted on or
    adjacent the roadway.

    552,    for a broadly recited reflector mounted adjacent the roadway.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 612 for highway or
    street marker.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 63+ for street traffic where the
    device for giving signals are generally due to some movement of some part
    or element from a normal or nonsignalling or signal-controlled position
    (e.g., a semaphore).

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 168 having controlling apparatus adapted
    to interact with stationary apparatus which describes the course of the
    vehicle's travel.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 9+ for traffic
    director where the reflector is not permanently fixed to the road surface.


CLS 359/533
TXT Mounted on vehicle:

    Subject matter under subclass 530 wherein the reflector is positioned on a
    vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  This vehicle could be an airplane, boat, automobile, train,
    etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    548,    for discrete reflecting elements formed as a unitary mass mounted
    on a vehicle.

    549,    for broadly recited reflectors mounted on a vehicle.


CLS 359/534
TXT Including a curved refracting surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 515 including a surface which is curved and
    which refracts or bends the light before or after it is reflected.

    (1)     Note.  The reflector operates as a separate function and is located
    behind the actual curved refracting surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    546+,   for reflecting elements formed as a unitary piece.

    642+,   for lenses generally, and especially subclasses 727+ for lenses
    including concave or convex reflecting surfaces.


CLS 359/535
TXT Within individual indentations:

    Subject matter under subclass 534 wherein the curved refracting surface is
    positioned either within an indentation of the substrate or within a socket
    created by a plurality of elements to hold it in place.

    (1)     Note.  Multiple minute spheres used to retain a much larger curved
    refracting optical element within a socket for the larger element belong in
    this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  These indentations can be produced by a platen which forces
    refracting beads against a substrate to form indentations, thus producing
    separate indentations for each bead.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    543,    for individual reflector (not microsphere) element mount.


CLS 359/536
TXT Minute transparent spheres:

    Subject matter under subclass 534 where the elements which refract and
    reflect are tiny transparent spheres, commonly called "little glass beads".

    (1)     Note.  The elements may be partially or fully embedded.  The matrix
    may be attached to a surface of any shape such as a spherical or a flat
    surface.

    (2)     Note.  These spheres range in size between 3-6 mils (i.e., 0.003 -
    0.006 inches).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    539,    for a mixture of spheres in a liquid binder (e.g., paint or resin).

    540,    for spheres placed on top of a binder (e.g., resin, asphalt, glue).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, subclass 34 for reflective glass beads.

    523,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 219 for process of
    forming glass void.


CLS 359/537
TXT Directional reflection (e.g., prevent viewing unless critical angle of
    light is used):

    Subject matter under subclass 536 wherein the reflective structure behind
    the spheres is arranged to permit viewing of the image behind the spheres,
    only if the incident light is transmitted to the spheres at the desired
    critical angle.

    (1)     Note.  The directional reflection of this subclass permits viewing
    of the image only by those authorized (i.e., knowing the angle).

    (2)     Note.  The image is not changed by the directional reflection but
    observation is accomplished dependent upon viewing at the proper angle.

    (3)     Note.  A picture that is covered by a substrate containing minute
    glass spheres to permit viewing of the picture via the reflected light only
    if the incident light is at a predetermined angle belongs in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    380,    Cryptography, subclass 54 for modifying optical image (e.g.,
    transmissive overlay) by changing its visible appearance.


CLS 359/538
TXT On flexible substrate (e.g., flexible sheeting, bumper sticker, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 536 wherein the spheres are placed on a
    flexible material by transfer, glue, etc., and this material can be used
    for an reflective purpose.

    (1)     Note.  Spheres embedded in a resin that remains flexible (e.g.,
    elastomeric composition) are classified in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    518,    for signal reflectors (e.g., transparent spheres, etc.) permanently
    fixed to clothing (e.g., by glue, transparency, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, for apparel, per se.


CLS 359/539
TXT Mixture in liquid binder (e.g., paint, resin):

    Subject matter under subclass 536 wherein the spheres are located within
    the mixture of paint or resin and are simultaneously applied to the surface
    as a complete mixture.

    (1)     Note.  This mixture can be painted onto signs, vehicles, or roadway
    surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    540,    for spheres that are placed on top of a binder prior to the
    hardening of the binder.

    551,    for reflective paint that does not have minute spheres.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 228 and 253 for a
    natural resin or derivative containing filler, dye, or pigment.

    523,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 527 for glass DNRM
    nonreactive material mixed with a composition.


CLS 359/540
TXT Placed on top of binder (e.g., resin, asphalt, glue, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 536 wherein the binder is first placed on the
    surface and subsequently, prior to hardening of the binder, the spheres are
    placed thereon to ensure that they are fixed to the surface via the binder.

    (1)     Note.  This includes exposed spheres which are glued to the
    surface, resulting in an exposed glass-sphere surface.

    (2)     Note.  Spheres which are not completely surrounded by the binder
    belong in this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  A monolayer (single) of spheres on a binder belong in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    539,    for spheres which are completely surrounded by the binder.


CLS 359/541
TXT With single transparent coating between spheres and atmosphere:

    Subject matter under subclass 540 wherein a single coating, which is
    transparent to light, surrounds and either (1) completely envelopes the
    normally exposed surface of the sphere, (2) touches only a portion of the
    spheres, or (3) is an interface for the minute spheres where the spheres
    are confined but not touching the exposed surface.

    (1)     Note.  This single coating will cover the sphere relative to the
    environment yet have no optical effect on the light that would impinge on a
    normally exposed surface of the sphere.  If reference is made to protection
    of the reflector from moisture or foreign particle it belongs in subclass
    514.

    (2)     Note.  A transparent coating used simply to hold the spheres onto
    the binder is not considered a sealer as in subclass 514.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    514,    for a sealed signal reflector to protect it from moisture or
    foreign particle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 34 for light
    transmissive sheets with gas space therebetween and edge sealed (e.g.,
    double glazed storm window, etc.).


CLS 359/542
TXT Plural refracting elements formed as a unitary mass:

    Subject matter under subclass 534 including a unitary mass of transparent
    material which comprises a plurality of curved refracting sur-faces.

    (1)     Note.  This unitary mass performs refraction of the incoming light
    prior to reflection by the reflector, and also of the outgoing light after
    reflection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    454+,   for projection screens having a unitary sheet of plural refracting
    areas.

    530,    for plural cube corner reflectors which together make up a unitary
    plate.

    546,    for discrete reflecting elements which comprise a unitary mass.


CLS 359/543
TXT With individual reflector element mount:

    Subject matter under subclass 534 including means for mounting the
    individual optical elements such as small socket-like mounts in which the
    elements are inserted and held or further including means for mounting the
    small socket-like mounts.

    (1)     Note.  Reflector buttons that simply reflect light falling on them,
    autocollimating, without the creation of a single image of an object at a
    focal point are classified in this subclass rather than the lens subclasses
    of this class.

    (2)     Note.  Although reflector buttons are often called "lenses" they
    are not classified in the lens subclasses of this class unless they create
    a single image of an object at a focal point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    535,    for minute transparent spheres within individual indentations.

    546,    for a multifaceted single glass reflector which is considered a
    unitary mass of discrete reflecting elements.

    642+,   for lenses, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 201+ for a license
    plate with a theft-preventive feature.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 9+ for reflector
    support structure combined with road structure.


CLS 359/544
TXT Including a snap, spring clip, or spring retainer:

    Subject matter under subclass 543 wherein either the curved refracting
    surface or the reflecting surface behind the refractor are individually
    mounted on a support by being pushed into a retainer which opens for
    entrance and closes around a portion of the element when it is in the
    settled position or a coil spring holds each element in place.

    (1)     Note.  The snap or spring clip retainer could either clamp onto the
    refractor/reflector or could be used to clamp a retainer to a housing and
    the refractor/reflector force fitted into the retainer.  The combination of
    a refractor/reflector and a retainer that is snapped into a third device
    belong in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  A rubber slot into which the refractor or reflector are
    pushed into for retention in the slot belong in subclass 543.

    (3)     Note.  Although the reflector buttons of this subclass are often
    referred to as lenses, these have not been  crossed into lenses since these
    simply reflect the light falling on them rather than create a single image
    of an object at a focal point.  These buttons are often referred to as auto
    collimating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    545,    for a mount using a threaded member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 27.3 for holding an instrument in a panel by a
    biased clip.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclass 159 for a snap spring and subclasses 166+
    for coil springs.


CLS 359/545
TXT Including a threaded member:

    Subject matter under subclass 543 where the means for mounting includes a
    threaded member for screw attachment and this can be used to mount the
    curved refracting surface that is located in fron of the reflecting surface.

    (1)     Note.  Reflector buttons that simply reflect light falling on them,
    autocollimating, without the creation of a single image of an object at a
    focal point are classified in this subclass rather than the lens subclasses
    of this class.

    (2)     Note.  Although reflector buttons are often called "lenses" they
    are not classified in the lens subclasses of this class unless they create
    a single image of an object at a focal point.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or Lock-Threaded
    Fastener, subclasses 81+ for threaded fastener and means for restricting
    rotation thereof relative to coacting substructure.


CLS 359/546
TXT Discrete reflecting elements formed as a unitary mass:

    Subject matter under subclass 515 wherein a plurality of reflective
    elements are each part of a unitary plate or sheet.

    (1)     Note.  This unitary mass performs the actual reflection of the
    incoming beam.

    (2)     Note.  This includes a single glass reflector having multiple
    facets.

    (3)     Note.  The individual reflectors are arranged to reflect light as
    if it came from one single reflector having a particular characteristic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    459,    for a unitary sheet comprising plural reflecting elements on a
    projection screen.

    527,    for reflectors that reflect headlight beams to the eyes of the
    driver.

    529,    for retroreflective reflectors that reflect the light directly to
    the source of the light.

    530,    for a plurality of triple reflectors which are each part of a
    unitary plate or sheet.

    542,    for a plurality of signal reflectors with a curved reflecting and a
    curved refracting surface which are each part of a unitary plate or sheet.


CLS 359/547
TXT Mounted on or adjacent roadway:

    Subject matter under subclass 546 wherein the unitary mass is positioned
    either on or off of the roadway surface within viewing distance of the
    driver of a vehicle in order to enable an easier view of that portion of
    the roadway or the edge of the roadway.

    (1)     Note.  A reflector sign, having discrete reflecting elements,
    permanently fastened to a road surface would belong in this subclass but
    the same reflector counterbalanced  within a recess in the roadway -
    ordinarily up and visible but capable of retraction into the recess when
    contacted by the vehicle wheel is classified in Class 404.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    514,    for signal reflector sealing from mois-ture or foreign particle.

    531,    for a unitary plate of 3-corner reflectors mounted on the roadway.

    532,    for a unitary plate of 3-corner retrore-flectors mounted adjacent
    the roadway.

    551,    for a broad reflector mounted on the roadway.

    552,    for a broadly recited reflector mounted adjacent the roadway.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 612 for highway or
    street marker.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 63+ for street traffic where the
    device for giving signals are generally due to some movement of some part
    or element from a normal or nonsignalling or signal-controlled position
    (e.g., a semaphore).

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 9+ for traffic
    director where the reflector is not permanently fixed to the road surface.


CLS 359/548
TXT Mounted on vehicle:

    Subject matter under subclass 546 wherein the unitary mass is positioned on
    a vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  This vehicle could be an airplane, boat, automobile, train,
    etc.

    (2)     Note.  This includes a single glass reflector having multiple
    facets.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    533,    for a unitary plate of 3-corner retroreflectors mounted on a
    vehicle.

    549,    for broadly recited reflectors mounted on a vehicle.


CLS 359/549
TXT Rigidly mounted on vehicle:

    Subject matter under subclass 515 wherein the reflector is rigidly attached
    to any type of vehicle used to carry passengers.

    (1)     Note.  This vehicle could be an airplane, boat, automobile, train,
    etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    520,    for reflectors that are in a continuous state of motion relative to
    a vehicle.

    526,    for reflectors that attract attention by the random movement with
    respect to the support.

    533,    for a unitary plate of 3-corner retroreflectors mounted on a
    vehicle.

    548,    for discrete reflecting elements formed as a unitary mass mounted
    on a vehicle.


CLS 359/550
TXT Bicycle or motorcycle:

    Subject matter under subclass 549 wherein the vehicle is a two wheeled
    vehicle in the form of either a bicycle or motorcycle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    521,    for pedal mounted reflectors.

    523,    for spoke mounted reflectors.


CLS 359/551
TXT Mounted on roadway:

    Subject matter under subclass 515 wherein the reflector is attached to the
    road surface itself either in the form of individual reflector units
    fastened to the road surface or reflective paint.

    (1)     Note.  Reflective paint, without minute transparent spheres, for
    highway mark-ing is classified in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  A reflector sign (not having a unitary plate of 3-corner
    reflectors or a unitary mass of discrete reflecting elements) permanently
    fastened to a road surface would belong in this subclass but the same
    reflector counterbalanced within a recess in the roadway - ordinarily up
    and visible, but capable of retraction into the recess when contacted by
    the vehicle wheel - is classified in Class 404.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    531,    for a unitary plate of 3-corner retroreflectors mounted on the
    roadway.

    539,    for paint containing minute transparent spheres.

    547,    for a unitary mass of discrete reflecting elements mounted on or
    adjacent the roadway.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, sub-classes 228 and 253 for a
    natural resin or derivative containing filler, dye, or pigment.

    523,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 527 for glass DNRM
    nonreactive material mixed with a composition.


CLS 359/552
TXT Mounted adjacent roadway:

    Subject matter under subclass 515 wherein the reflector is permanently
    mounted next to the roadway for viewing by the driver of an automobile and
    generally reflecting the beams of automobile headlights.

    (1)     Note.  A reflector sign permanently fastened to a road surface
    would belong in this subclass but the same reflector counterbalanced within
    a recess in the roadway - ordinarily up and visible but capable of
    retraction into the recess when contacted by the vehicle wheel is
    classified in Class 404.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    532,    for a unitary plate of 3-corner retrore-flectors mounted adjacent
    the roadway.

    547,    for a unitary mass of discrete reflecting elements mounted on or
    adjacent the roadway.

    553,    for a reflector which is portable, i.e., temporarily placed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, sub-class 612 for highway or
    street marker.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 63+ for street traffic where the
    device for giving signals are generally due to some movement of some part
    or element from a normal or nonsignalling or signal - controlled position
    (e.g., a semaphore).

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 168 having controlling apparatus adapted
    to interact with stationary apparatus which describes the course of the
    vehicle's travel.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 9+ for traffic
    director where the reflector is not permanently fixed to the road surface.


CLS 359/553
TXT Emergency or temporary reflectors (i.e., portable self standing):

    Subject matter under subclass 515 wherein the reflectors are used as
    temporary barricades placed on or adjacent the roadway, foldable or
    collapsible reflectors for use when a car breaks down or directing traffic.

    (1)     Note.  These reflectors are not rigidily mounted but simply placed
    on the surface (roadway or adjacent areas) to warn oncoming traffic of a
    necessary change in driving conditions along the roadway.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    529+,   for 3-corner retroreflectors.

    532,    for 3-corner retroreflectors which are permanently adjacent the
    roadway.

    534+,   for reflectors having a curved refracting surface.

    546+,   for discrete reflecting elements formed as a unitary mass.

    552,    for reflectors which are permanently adjacent the roadway.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 63 for specific mechanisms for
    folding and expanding a portable street traffic signal and indicator with
    only a nominal recitation of a signal reflector.

    248,    Supports, subclass 472 for a foldable mirror or picture type.


CLS 359/554
TXT IMAGE STABILIZATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein an optical element moves
    or changes its optical characteristic to compensate for vibrations,
    atmospheric turbulence, etc., to maintain a stable image.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    399+,   for telescopes.

    401,    for a telescope with antirotation.

    402+,   for periscopes.

    407+,   for binoculars.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 5.22 for gyroscopes combined
    with other structure.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 201.1 for photocell control that could
    include image stabilization.


CLS 359/555
TXT By movable reflective structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 554 wherein the motion or turbulence
    compensating optical element is a light reflecting device for redirecting a
    light beam and movable such that the combined effects of motion and
    reflection provides the desired compensation.


CLS 359/556
TXT Having plural reflecting surfaces:

    Subject matter under subclass 555 having a movable compensation reflector
    having multiple reflective surfaces.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes reflector binocular devices wherein
    one side is stabilized relative to the other side.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes image stabilization of a reflective
    telescope.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    480+,   for binocular devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 149 for gyroscope or
    pendulum stabilized optical element and subclass 250 for pendulum
    suspension of optical element or reticle fiducial instruments.


CLS 359/557
TXT By movable refractive structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 554 wherein image stabilization is
    accomplished via the movements of a light bending (i.e., refracting)
    optical element.

    (1)     Note.  Gyroscopically supported lenses to compensate for motion
    belong in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Compensation for the bending of periscopes also belongs here
    if the optical elements are movable for the compensation.

    (3)     Note.  The refractive elements are moved individually or as a unit
    to compensate for the instability of the image.

    (4)     Note.  Motion picture cameras (Class 352) would take precedence
    over this class but cross references for motion picture camera lenses that
    are gyroscopically controlled for image stabilization should go in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 268 for celestial straightline
    light ray type.

    89,     Ordnance, subclass 41.09 for gyoscopically or pendulum controlled
    motor operated ordnance training mechanism.

    248,    Supports, subclass 123.1 for counter balanced stand and bracket.

    348,    Television, subclass 208 for camera image stabilization.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 140 for focus control having
    gyroscopically controlled lenses.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 149 for gyroscope or
    pendulum stabilized optical element angle measuring or axial alignment.


CLS 359/558
TXT DIFFRACTION:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a light beam is split and
    caused to interfere with itself, which causes a change in the direction of
    the beam.

    (1)     Note.  Diffraction bands result from interference of one part of a
    beam with another, as when the ray is deflected at the edge of an opaque
    obstacle, passed through a narrow slit, or deflected by an optical element
    such as a prism.

    (2)     Note.  Diffraction usually, but not always, causes a break-up of
    the light into bands or a spectrum.  Additionally, diffraction may also
    form a plurality of images from an object or merely redirect it, as in
    light diffractive scanners.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass includes systems operating on diffraction from
    a straight edge, a circular disk or aperture, a slit or a grating; and also
    includes systems operating on Fraunhofer diffraction (far field wherein the
    incident light rays are parallel and the diffracted rays are brought to a
    focus by a focusing means) or on Fresnel diffraction (near field wherein
    the incident light rays arise from a finite source and no focusing means
    are used for rendering the diffracted rays parallel, or convergent).

    (4)     Note.  Devices for producing moire fringes by shadow casting
    through gra-ting-like elements are excluded from this subclass.

    (5)     Note.  All diffraction has interference but interference does not
    require dif-fraction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    577+,   for interference of light waves.

    831+,   for prisms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 59.1 for the process of bonding and
    subclass 154 for bonding glass to metal.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    81 with melting or gasification of permanently associated solid material in
    situ in airtight cavity.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 192.26 for the
    coating, forming or etching with optical or photoactive deposition material
    by glow discharge sputter deposition.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping and Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 1.1+ for optical article shaping or treating.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 354-356 for diffraction
    light interference, and subclass 374 for moire fringe generation by shadow
    casting through grating-like elements.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 124 for systems
    utilizing diffraction for selected masking of information.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 109 with
    diffraction radiation beam modification.

    382,    Image Analysis, subclasses 210+ for pattern recognition using
    spatial filtering (e.g., holography).

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 164+ for transparent base optical
    element production and subclass 166 for vapor depositing.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 167 for parallel
    ribs or grooves.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Pro-cess, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclass 5 for radiation mask, subclasses 9+ for imaged product,
    subclass 32 for making an optical device, subclass 323 for etching, and
    subclass 325 for elevated pattern.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 41+ for a process of grinding glass or stone.


CLS 359/559
TXT Using Fourier transform spatial filtering:

    Subject matter under subclass 558 wherein an optical Fourier transform is
    taken of a diffracted beam of light and a spatial filter is placed at the
    Fourier transform plane to spatially limit the output optical wave to those
    having Fourier transform coefficients passed by the filter.

    (1)     Note.  A spatial filter is generally an emulsion mask having a
    transparent annular region in an otherwise opaque region used to eliminate
    undesired radiation that diverges from the optical axis beyond the confines
    of the transparent region.

    (2)     Note.  A spatial filter is sometimes referred to as a mask used as
    an aperture to cause diffraction of the light beam passing therethrough.

    (3)     Note.  A Fourier transform of a wave function is the amplitude
    representation of the components of each fre-quency of a given wavefront.

    (4)     Note.  Amplitude and phase information over a discrete spatial area
    of the diffracted energy pattern is obtained by placing a lens at one focal
    length from the aperture to produce a "Fourier Transform", and the aperture
    at the second focal plane of the lens creates a diffraction pattern.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     for Fourier transform holography.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Pro-cessing Systems, subclass 827 for
    Fourier transform computation in electrical analog computers.

    382,    Image Analysis, subclasses 181+ for pattern recognition where an
    image analyzing system possesses the capability of identifying discrete
    patterns, subclasses 210+ for spatial filtering wherein the optical image
    of each pattern to be recognized is transformed into a light amplitude
    distribution that is proportional to the two dimensional Fourier Transform
    of the pattern image, subclasses 276+ for mathematical image transformation
    or pre-recognition processing transformation of an image into another
    representation  to facilitate the acquisition or subsequent recognition of
    imaging patterns, and subclasses 280+ for Fourier, Hadamard, or Walsh
    Transform of an image prior to the recognition processing.


CLS 359/560
TXT For convolution (cross-correlation):

    Subject matter under subclass 559 wherein the optical Fourier transform
    spectrum is mathematically convolved (cross-correlated) with the spectrum
    of the spatial filter at the Fourier transform plane.

    (1)     Note.  As opposed to the perfect match of the correlation function
    in matched filtering systems, the convolution function indicates a partial
    match between the optical Fourier transform spectrums of object and spatial
    filter.

    (2)     Note.  A spatial filter is generally an emulsion mask having a
    transparent annular region in an otherwise opaque region used to eliminate
    undesired radiation that diverges from the optical axis beyond the confines
    of the transparent region.

    (3)     Note.  The cross-correlation function is a measure of the
    similarity between two signals when one is delayed with respect to the
    other.

    (4)     Note.  "Convolution" and "Cross-correlation" are interchangeable
    terms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Pro-cessing Systems, subclass 822 for
    optical correlation and convolution in electrical analog computers.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 106 for radiant
    energy.


CLS 359/561
TXT For correlation:

    Subject matter under subclass 559 wherein the optical Fourier transform
    spectrum is mathematically correlated with the spectrum of the spatial
    filter at the Fourier transform plane.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are the so-called "matched
    filtering systems", wherein the Fourier transform spectrum of an object is
    perfectly matched or correlated to a spectrum presented at the Fourier
    transform plane (usually by means of a previously generated spatial filter).

    (2)     Note.  A spatial filter is generally an emulsion mask having a
    transparent annular region in an otherwise opaque region used to eliminate
    undesired radiation that diverges from the optical axis beyond the confines
    of the trans-parent region.

    (3)     Note.  Correlation is a measure, expressed as a number between
    minus one and plus one between two sets of data, of the similarity of two
    signals.

    (4)     Note.  Correlation is also a relationship between two variables
    where the strength of the linear relationship is indicated by the
    coefficient of correla-tion.


CLS 359/562
TXT For changing zeroth order intensity:

    Subject matter under subclass 559 wherein the spatial filter located at the
    Fourier transform plane is designed to have a positive effect (i.e.,
    blocks, transparent, increase intensity, etc.) on the zeroth order term in
    the Fourier series representative of the light wave input.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    559,    for spatial filtering at the Fourier transform plane.


CLS 359/563
TXT With diffraction grating:

    Subject matter under subclass 559 wherein a series of very fine, closely
    spaced parallel slits, or of very narrow, parallel reflecting surfaces are
    included in the optical system, either before or at the Fourier transform
    plane in order to produce a successsion of spectra when light is incident
    thereon at a specific angle.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a diffraction grating is a glass substrate
    carrying a layer of deposited aluminum that has been pressure-ruled with a
    large number of fine equidistant grooves, using a diamond edge as a tool.

    (2)     Note.  Light falling on a diffraction grating is dispered into a
    series of spectra on both sides of the incident beam, the angular
    dispersion being inversely proportional to the line spacing.

    (3)     Note.  Phase gratings using Fourier transform filtering also
    belongs in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for holograms and holographic systems.

    560,    for systems using a spatial filter placed at the Fourier transform
    plane for convolution (cross-correlation).

    561,    for systems using a spatial filter placed at the Fourier transform
    plane for correlation.


CLS 359/564
TXT With photographic media:

    Subject matter under subclass 559 wherein a photographic negative,
    transparency, plate, etc., is used at or near the Fourier transform plane
    to record the data at that plane.


CLS 359/565
TXT From zone plate:

    Subject matter under subclass 558 comprising a plate of glass, usually a
    photograph, on which there is a central spot surrounded by concentric
    annular zones, alternately opaque and transparent, the radii of the
    boundaries between the zones being proportional to the square roots of the
    natural numbers 1,2,3, etc.  It has the property of forming a real image of
    a point on the axis, as does a lens, but by a process of diffraction
    instead of refraction.

    (1)     Note.  Zone plates are also known as "Fresnel zone plates".

    (2)     Note.  The diffraction occurs from a circular diffraction grating
    of variable spacing having focal properties, and also including means for
    forming such a circular focal grating.

    (3)     Note.  Phase zone plates are also included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    742,    for Fresnel lenses.


CLS 359/566
TXT From grating:

    Subject matter under subclass 558 wherein diffraction occurs at an optical
    element having a series of very close lines or fine slits.

    (1)     Note.  The lines on the grating may be ruled grooves or fine slits
    may be applied by other mechanical, photographic, holographic, or chemical
    pro-cesses.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes both amplitude and phase gratings and
    also includes gratings having mounting means therefor.

    (3)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are acoustic or other
    compression wave diffraction gratings, see Search Class note to subclass
    358.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for holographic production of diffraction gratings.

    285+,   for light control by causing a fluid or deformable medium to act as
    a diffraction grating under the influence of compressional waves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclass 291 for diffraction gratings which are used
    for frequency separation in color television systems ("strip filters").

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 51 for devices which
    utilize diffraction gratings in optical test devices involving infrared or
    ultraviolet application, subclasses 300+ for spectroscopic instruments
    including spectrographic devices in subclasses 305 and 328 which utilize a
    diffraction grating, subclass 334 for monochromators which use diffraction
    gratings, subclass 354 for wavefront division by diffraction in
    interferometers, and subclass 395 for optical test devices employing
    relatively movable diffraction gratings.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, subclass 37 for an input/output optical coupler
    using a grating.


CLS 359/567
TXT For ornamental effect or display:

    Subject matter under subclass 566 wherein the diffraction of light from the
    grating is purely for an aesthetic or ornamental effect or for display
    purposes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 427+ for display
    devices exhibiting special optical effects.


CLS 359/568
TXT For diffractive subtractive filtering:

    Subject matter under subclass 566 wherein diffraction gratings are used to
    diffractively remove unwanted spectral wavelengths from polychromatic
    incident light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    885+,   for optical filters in general and particularly subclass 888 for
    neutral or different density filters.


CLS 359/569
TXT Including particular grating characteristic:

    Subject matter under subclass 566 wherein the diffraction grating has one
    or more particular structural characteristics, such as thickness, shape,
    line spacing, aspect ratio, etc.


CLS 359/570
TXT Nonplanar grating substrate (e.g., concave):

    Subject matter under subclass 569 wherein the diffractive surface of the
    grating is of a shape other than planar, for example, a concave diffraction
    grating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    534+,   for a signal refletor having a curved refracting surface.


CLS 359/571
TXT Echelette or blazed grating:

    Subject matter under subclass 569 wherein the diffraction grating is an
    echelette (sawtooth) type of grating or wherein the grating is designed for
    maximum intensity at a desired region of the diffraction spectrum.

    (1)     Note.  Theoretically, the most efficient groove shape for any
    grating is a right triangle.  The inclination of its hypote-nuse is called
    the blaze angle because it determines the direction in which a diffracted
    beam has its greatest efficiency.  Such gratings are termed blazed.

    (2)     Note.  A blazed diffraction grating is one having properly shaped
    grooves to concentrate most of the energy into a single spectral order.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for blazed holograms.


CLS 359/572
TXT Reflection grating (e.g., retrodirective):

    Subject matter under subclass 569 wherein the grating reflects a desired
    wave while at the same time allowing one or more waves to pass freely.

    (1)     Note.  A reflection grating reflects the desired wave whereas a
    "transmission" grating passes the diffracted light through the grating in
    the same general direction as the incident light.

    (2)     Note.  Aluminizing of a grating will cause it to be a reflecting
    grating.

    (3)     Note.  Reflection back in the opposite direction to the incident
    light would be considered retrodirective.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    529+,   for 3-corner retroreflectors (i.e., cube corner, trihedral or
    triple reflector type).

    838+,   for optical mirrors and other reflecting elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclass 7 for radio frequency corner reflectors
    which are retrodirective.


CLS 359/573
TXT Variable grating:

    Subject matter under subclass 569 wherein the optical characteristics of
    the diffraction grating can be altered by the application of an external
    force.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of variable gratings included in this subclass are
    gratings comprised of electro-optical or magne-to-optical  stripe domains.

    (2)     Note.  A stripe domain is a stripe-shaped region having its own
    proper-ties, such as an ion-shiny electro-optic stripe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95,     for liquid crystal devices exhibiting variable diffraction.

    240,    for temporal modulation of a light beam by changing the bulk
    optical parameter.

    301+,   for polarizer light wave spatial modulation.

    483+,   for polarization without modulation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 122 for
    polarization information masking using magneto-optical devices.


CLS 359/574
TXT With curved or geometrically shaped corruga-tion:

    Subject matter under subclass 569 wherein the grating has at least one
    ridge or groove for the light to impinge and the edges of the ridge or
    groove are either nonlinear or form some geometrical shape by the
    connection of plural lines.

    (1)     Note.  The geometric corrugations are in the form of a circle,
    parallelogram, rhombus, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    575,    for nonuniform corrugation width, spacing, or depth.

    576,    for a laminated or layered grating which usually has parallel
    corrugations.


CLS 359/575
TXT With nonuniform corrugation width, spacing, or depth:

    Subject matter under subclass 569 wherein the grating has at least one
    ridge or groove for the light to impinge and the width, depth, height, or
    spacing of each ridge or groove varies along the corrugation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    574,    for curved or geometrically shaped corrugations of a grating.

    576,    for laminated or layered grating which usually has parallel
    corrugations.


CLS 359/576
TXT Laminated or layered:

    Subject matter under subclass 569 wherein multiple layers of different
    optical materials are formed into a single mass to form the optical grating.

    (1)     Note.  The corrugations of this type of grating are usually
    parallel to one another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    574,    for curved or geometrically shaped corrugations of a grating.

    575,    for nonuniform corrugation width, spacing, or depth.

    586+,   for laminated or layered articles which produce nondiffractive
    interference.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 1.7 for composite or multiple layer optical article shaping or
    treating.


CLS 359/577
TXT LIGHT INTERFERENCE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein two light waves, as a
    result of their relative phases, interact to produce a cancellation or
    reinforcement of wave energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370+,   for interference microscopes.

    498,    for such subject matter where the light is polarized.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 345+ for optical test
    devices whch utilize light interference.


CLS 359/578
TXT Electrically or mechanically variable (e.g., tunable, adjustable):

    Subject matter under subclass 577 including means for producing a change in
    a geometric or optical characteristic of an interfering light wave or beam.


CLS 359/579
TXT By nonmovable driving element (e.g., piezoelectric, magnetostrictive):

    Subject matter under subclass 578 including an element for causing motion
    of an optical interference element without itself moving.

    (1)     Note.  Piezoelectric and magnetostrictive driving elements are
    classified in this subclass.


CLS 359/580
TXT Produced by coating or lamina:

    Subject matter under subclass 577 wherein the light interference occurs by
    applying multiple light beams to either (1) a structure comprising a base
    material impregnated by causing a coating material to extend or penetrate
    into the material or into the interstices of a porous, cellular or
    foraminous material or (2) a product consisting of multiple layers of
    material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 162+ for coating processes, per se,
    wherein the product is an optical element.


CLS 359/581
TXT By transmissive coating on lens:

    Subject matter under subclass 580 wherein a lens is provided with a
    transparent reflection-reducing coating on surface of air-contacting
    refracting portions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    642+,   for lenses generally, and subclass 726 for lenses coated with
    reflecting ele-ment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 30.1+ and 31 for processes of
    applying such a coating or surface to a glass preform.


CLS 359/582
TXT Layer having specified nonoptical property:

    Subject matter under subclass 580 wherein a layer of insulator or spacer is
    placed between optical layers, the changes in thickness of this layer
    control the location of the transmission bands in the spectrum.

    (1)     Note.  A layer of dielectric material placed alternatively between
    reflective or transmissive layers is classified in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The location of the transmissive band is dependent on the
    distance between the reflectors.  As the distance is made larger, the
    transmission bands move toward the higher end of the spectrum, also the
    width of the transmission bands and the distance between adjacent
    transmission bands decrease.


CLS 359/583
TXT Beam splitter or combiner:

    Subject matter under subclass 580 wherein light interference is produced by
    partial-reflected or by partial-transmitted layers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    629+    and 639+, for light dividing or combining by partial reflection or
    refraction at beam splitting or combining surface.


CLS 359/584
TXT Reflector:

    Subject matter under subclass 580 including a reflector or a reflective
    coating layer.


CLS 359/585
TXT Including metal or conductive layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 580 including a metal or an
    electric-conductive layer.

    (1)     Note.  The metal or conductive layer is used for static electric
    elimination, radio frequency shielding, producing space charges of
    electricity, or heating the coated glass to prevent fogging by condensation.


CLS 359/586
TXT Layers having specified index of refraction:

    Subject matter under subclass 580 wherein the refraction index of each
    layer is specified.


CLS 359/587
TXT Plural layer groups lateral in parallel light paths:

    Subject matter under subclass 586 including layers which are parallel with
    the light paths.


CLS 359/588
TXT Filter having four or more layers:

    Subject matter under subclass 586 including light interference filter with
    four or more layers.


CLS 359/589
TXT Selective wavelength transmission or reflection:

    Subject matter under subclass 580 wherein the coated optical medium
    selectively reflects or transmits light.


CLS 359/590
TXT Having another filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 589 having both an interference filter and
    another type of filter (e.g., absorption filter).


CLS 359/591
TXT BUILDING INTERIOR ILLUMINATION WITH REFLECTED, REFRACTED OR PRE-DETERMINED
    ANGLE OF ENTRANCE OF OUTSIDE LIGHT:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means to reflect or
    refract light to the interior of a building from the exterior or to allow
    only light from predetermined angles to enter the building.

    (1)     Note.  The light is usually sun or natural light.  However, light
    from an incident artificial source which is outside for some other purpose,
    such as a street light, may be directed into the building.

    (2)     Note.  For classification here, the direction of the light must be
    changed to facilitate its entry into the building or for controlling the
    direction of light.  A mere window pane which is flat on both sides is not
    here but is in Class 52, Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses
    204+.

    (3)     Note.  A combination of nominal fiber optics structure with
    structure appro-priate to this subclass is classified here.  However,
    similar subject mattter with details to fiber optic structure is
    classi-fied in Class 385, Optical Waveguides.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290+,   for fluids which may be chemically or physically altered to control
    the amount of light passing through a panel.

    483+,   for light control with polarizers.

    601+,   for glare reducing structure.

    885+,   for light filters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 559 for signs using
    external light source.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 204.1+ for windows.
     See (2) Note above.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 561+ for solar heat collector.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 48.2 for solar heating and cooling.

    362,    Illumination, for artificial light directing, especially subclasses
    317+.


CLS 359/592
TXT Unitary light transmitting member comprising plural reflecting or
    refracting elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 591 including a one piece mass of transparent
    material which has a plurality of light reflecting or refracting surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    529+,   534+ and 546, for unitary plates with plural elements used as
    signal reflectors.

    619+,   for surfaces composed of lenticular elements.


CLS 359/593
TXT Plural members in series:

    Subject matter under subclass 592 including a plurality of unitary light
    transmitting members arranged so that light travels sequentially from one
    member to the other, the light being refracted or reflected by the
    respective mem-bers.


CLS 359/594
TXT Elements on two sides of member:

    Subject matter under subclass 592 where there are a plurality of reflecting
    or refracting surfaces on opposing sides of the transparent mass.


CLS 359/595
TXT With internal reflections:

    Subject matter under subclass 592 where light from certain angles is
    internally reflected, i.e., the light is inside the transparent mass
    immediately before and immediately after the reflection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    593     and 594, above which also have patents that disclose internal
    reflection.

    598,    for internal reflection in single optical elements.


CLS 359/596
TXT Slats or strips:

    Subject matter under subclass 591 including a plurality of, usually
    parallel, thin, flat or long narrow members which reflect or refract light
    rays.

    (1)     Note.  The slats or strips may be made of any material, for
    example, metal, glass, or plastic.  They may be adjustable or stationary.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227,    for opaque means insertable on light path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 130+
    for plural slats or strips used as closures which are not specifically
    designed to reflect or refract light.


CLS 359/597
TXT With reflection:

    Subject matter under subclass 591 wherein light is reflected at least once
    from a surface upon entering the building.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    596,    for building interior illumination with reflecting slats or strips.

    609,    for glare reduction in display windows.

    838+,   for mirrors not specifically designed for building interior
    illumination.


CLS 359/598
TXT Internal reflection in single optical element:

    Subject matter under subclass 597 where the reflection is internal, i.e.,
    the light is inside the transparent mass immediately before and immediately
    after the reflection.


CLS 359/599
TXT DIFFUSING OF INCIDENT LIGHT:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein light is scattered into
    many different directions and is not intensely polarized when it
    illuminates surfaces.

    (1)     Note.  With diffused light, a high brightness level may be achieved
    with minimal glare.

    (2)     Note.  Diffusion patents are classified here whether it is
    purposeful, incidental, or undesirable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    577+,   for light interference.

    591,    for building or interior illumination with reflectors, refractors,
    etc.

    601+,   for glare or unwanted light reduction.

    614,    for glare or unwanted light reduction with absorption.

    707,    for a diffusing lens which produces an image having soft or
    indistinct outlines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 116 for light
    diffusing with optical device or special ray transmission envelope.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 355+ for diffusing type translucent or
    transparent (e.g., "shade") light modifier with a light source.


CLS 359/600
TXT BARREL END EYE GUARD (E.G., SHIELD OR CUSHION, ETC.):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein an eye end of a barrel is
    shaped to conform to the engaging portion of a viewer's face for providing
    a cushion to the optical apparatus or for shielding the viewer's eyes from
    undesired radiation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    611,    for a shade which restricts light which is lateral of the optical
    path from striking an objective lens.


CLS 359/601
TXT GLARE OR UNWANTED LIGHT REDUC-TION:

    Subject matter under the class definition including structure to primarily
    reduce the intensity of nonimaging light for an optical means or a viewer's
    eyes.

    (1)     Note.  Such intensity reduction may be performed by blocking,
    absorbing, transmitting away, or reflecting an undesired part of the light.

    (2)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses include angle
    discriminator, glare re-ducing mirror, mirror with glare shield, and
    display window.  For classification here, the claims should include
    struc-ture which reduces glare, as indicated therein or in the
    specification.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229,    for glare elimination by placing an opaque element in an optical
    path.

    290+,   for light control by altering an optical medium.

    493,    for glare prevention by means of polarizers.

    580+,   for light interference coatings which reduce glare.

    591+,   for natural or sun light directing for illumination.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 97.1+ for vehicle glare
    screens, per se.

    348,    Television, subclass 834 for cathode-ray tubes combined with a
    glare reduction filter.

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclasses
    44+ for glare reduction in spectacles.


CLS 359/602
TXT With mirror (e.g., mirror with glare screen, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 601 including an image reflecting mirror
    which inherently reduces the glare otherwise coming from its reflecting
    surface or wherein the image reflecting mirror is combined with or includes
    structure which reduces the glare otherwise coming from its reflecting
    surface or from behind the mirror.

    (1)     Note.  Anti-glare mirrors which modify the light reflected from the
    face of the mirror are in the indented subclasses 603+ below.  This
    subclass (602) has shields which primarilty control light from the sun and
    headlight which comes from behind the mirror and would not strike the
    reflecting face of the mirror.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    507,    for moisture protection shield which could also be a light shield.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 97.1+ for vehicle glare
    screens, per se.


CLS 359/603
TXT Anti-glare mirror:

    Subject matter under subclass 602 with means to control the light going to
    and from the mirror's reflecting face to eliminate or reduce the intensity
    of the light going to a viewer's eyes.

    (1)     Note.  Since any mirror may be adjusted to reflect given rays of
    light away from an observer's eyes, the disclosure must be relied on to
    determine if the purpose of using the mirror is to eliminate glare.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    493,    for glare prevention by means of polarizer.

    602,    for mirror combined with glare screen or shield where the light to
    be controlled is other than that which would be incident on the mirror face.

    884,    for coated mirror used for purposes other than glare reduction.


CLS 359/604
TXT Adjustable:

    Subject matter under subclass 603 including means to adjust part of the
    mirror or associated glare reducing structure to modify the intensity of or
    eliminate the light reaching the viewer's eyes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 466+ for adjustable mirror supports.


CLS 359/605
TXT Plural reflecting surfaces:

    Subject matter under subclass 604 including a plurality of reflecting
    surfaces which may be selectively positioned to reflect light to the viewer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    608,    for a semi-transparent panel placed in front of a mirror to reflect
    some of the light, before it reaches the mirror, away from the observer's
    eyes.


CLS 359/606
TXT Prismoidal:

    Subject matter under subclass 605 including a wedge shaped transparent
    body, usually silvered on the rear surface, which reflects light to a
    viewer from the front surface or from the rear surface through the
    transparent body.

    (1)     Note.  There are reflecting surfaces which are at an angle to each
    other in subclass 605 above, but the reflective surfaces are not on the
    same transpar-ent body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    831+,   for prisms, per se.


CLS 359/607
TXT Reversible:

    Subject matter under subclass 605 including two mirror surfaces mounted
    back to back, one being more highly reflective than the other, with means
    to select the surface to be viewed from a given position.

    (1)     Note.  The less reflective surface of these mirrors is employed
    when the headlights of a following vehicle annoy the driver of a car.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    840,    in general for mirrors which are mounted back to back.


CLS 359/608
TXT Translucent or other semitransmitting panel selectively positioned in front
    of mirror:

    Subject matter under subclass 604 including a translucent or other
    semi-transmitting panel which may be positioned in front of the mirror to
    reduce the amount of light reflected to the viewer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229,    for an opaque panel selectively positioned in front of a mirror to
    eliminate the light reflected from the mirror to a viewer.

    602,    for glare shield positioned near a mirror to reduce glare from
    light coming from behind a mirror which is not incident on the mirror
    reflecting face.

    605+,   for a semi-transparent mirror positioned in front of another mirror.

    884,    for colored mirror or selective absorp-tion means with mirror.

    885+,   for absorption  filter, per se.


CLS 359/609
TXT Display window:

    Subject matter under subclass 601 wherein the amount of glare or unwanted
    light reflected to a viewer's eyes from glass, which is covering an opening
    in a wall or the like for light transmission to enable the viewer to look
    in or out, is reduced.


CLS 359/610
TXT With blind for nonviewing eye:

    Subject matter under subclass 601 wherein light to the nonviewing eye or
    the eye not using the instrument is blocked.


CLS 359/611
TXT Barrel end or lens mount shade:

    Subject matter under subclass 601 including a tubular member which is
    secured to a barrel end, a lens mounting, or a support and which extends
    from a face of a lens, wherein the tubular axis is coaxial with the lens
    axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    511,    for a cap or cover which protects a lens when it is not being used.

    600,    for barrel end eye guard, shield or cushion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 15+ for eyeshields and subclasses 431+ for
    goggles included in a shield for eyes.


CLS 359/612
TXT Collapsible or foldable:

    Subject matter under subclass 611 wherein a shade includes telescoping,
    flexible or hinged portions to permit substantial reduction of the space
    occupied by the shade when not in use.


CLS 359/613
TXT Directional or angular discrimination:

    Subject matter under subclass 601 wherein light from certain angles is
    deflected away from imaging light.


CLS 359/614
TXT With absorption means:

    Subject matter under subclass 601 including a layer of coating material or
    a filter or screen, which absorbs part of the light incident thereon.

    (1)     Note.  The light absorbed may be of particular wavelengths, e.g.,
    color filter, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    603,    for antiglare mirror coated with light absorbing material.

    884,    for mirror coated with light absorbing material.


CLS 359/615
TXT LIGHT DISPERSION:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a body having an index
    of refraction that varies according to the wavelength for separation of the
    spectral components of incident light.

    (1)     Note.  A dispersive monochromator, which separates the spectral
    components of incident light, is classified in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The optical system of a monochromator forms a series, one
    for each wavelength, of its entrance slit in the plane of the exit slit.


CLS 359/616
TXT KALEIDOSCOPE:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a plurality of
    reflecting surfaces so arranged that objects viewed in the reflecting
    surfaces appear as multiple images of the objects arranged in a symmetrical
    pattern, relative motion between the objects and the reflecting surfaces or
    between the reflecting surfaces and observer changing the patterns.

    (1)     Note.  The reflecting surfaces are usually elongated and at an
    angle to each other which forms a V-shaped trough when two mirrors are
    employed.

    (2)     Note.  Kaleidoscopic image projectors which project a real image on
    a viewing screen are classified in Class 353, Optics:  Image Projectors, if
    projection structure such as a projecting lens, projection screen,
    projection light source, or slide holder is claimed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, subclasses 1 and 2 for a kaleiodoscopic
    image projector.  See (2) Note above.


CLS 359/617
TXT Including particles loosely housed for agitation:

    Subject matter under subclass 616 including a chamber of loosely assorted
    objects, usually of irregular shapes, transparent and varicolored, which
    may be tumbled over each other by rotation of the chamber or moved in other
    ways to give ever changing visual effects.


CLS 359/618
TXT SINGLE CHANNEL SIMULTANEOUSLY TO OR FROM PLURAL CHANNELS (E.G., LIGHT
    DIVIDING, COMBINING, OR PLURAL IMAGE FORMING, ETC.):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein either (1) a single light
    ray is used to produce a plurality of groups of different optical axes
    light rays, which may have different directions or be parallel and
    displaced relative to one another, each containing the same information as
    the single light ray or (2) a single light ray is derived from a plurality
    of groups of light rays having different optical axes in order to include
    the same information contained in each of the plurality of groups of light
    rays.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes partially transmitting reflector type
    beam splitters wherein each split channel contains identical information.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes a system comprising a plurality of
    adjacent lenses which form a plurality of similar rather than identical
    images as a result of parallax.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    462+,   particularly subclasses 464+ for somewhat analogous structure used
    in stereoscopic systems.

    480+,   for systems including a single optical channel which merges to or
    from a plural optical channel, where the plural channel is used for
    binocular purposes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 66+ for color cameras and
    projectors.

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, subclasses 30+ for an image projector
    which combines subject matter to form a composite image and which may
    include the combining of light paths.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 305+ for color cameras containing similar
    structure.


CLS 359/619
TXT By surface composed of lenticular elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 618 comprising a body with a surface
    configured so as to form a regular array of reflecting or transmitting
    elements, each having a curved or figured surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    455+,   for lenticular projection screens.

    463,    for stereoscopic record with lenticular surface.

    642+,   for lenses generally.

    727+,   for lenses having concave or convex reflecting surfaces with
    coatings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 30+ and 177+ for an optical element
    in a photocopier projection arrangement.


CLS 359/620
TXT Having particular composition:

    Subject matter under subclass 619 wherein the configured body is composed
    of a specific material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 501.1 for electrically conductive or
    emissive light sensitive composition.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclass 946 for a cross-reference art collection of
    photographically produced lenticular elements.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, subclasses 900+ for an optical glass
    composition.


CLS 359/621
TXT Plural lenticular plates:

    Subject matter under subclass 619 having two or more elements with
    lenticular surfaces.


CLS 359/622
TXT Serially disposed along optic axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 621 in which multiple elements with
    lenticular surfaces are placed along a single light path.


CLS 359/623
TXT Cylindrical lenslets:

    Subject matter under subclass 622 in which the body is formed by an array
    of small cylindrical elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    710,    for cylindrical lenses.


CLS 359/624
TXT Having crossed axes:

    Subject matter under subclass 623 having nonparallel element or array axes.


CLS 359/625
TXT Focusing or defocusing by noncurved surfaces (e.g., prismatic, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 619 wherein the elements of the array are
    planar surface ele-ments.

    (1)     Note.  Prismatic elements are classified in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    831+,   for prism (including mount).


CLS 359/626
TXT Particular focusing or defocusing characteristic:

    Subject matter under subclass 619 in which the elements of the lenticular
    array cooperate to produce an imaging effect upon a light beam incident
    thereon.


CLS 359/627
TXT Reflective:

    Subject matter under subclass 619 wherein the direction of the component of
    incident light normal to the surface of the lenticular body is reversed or
    bent off.


CLS 359/628
TXT Noncircular cross section:

    Subject matter under subclass 619 wherein the lenticular elements have a
    cross section in the plane of the surface which is not a circle.


CLS 359/629
TXT By partial reflection at beam splitting or combining surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 618 including a surface which transmits and
    reflects substantial portions of the incident light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    583,    for a beam splitter which selectively separates the incident light
    by interference in a coating or lamina of an optical element.


CLS 359/630
TXT Superimposing visual information on observer's field of view (e.g., head-up
    arrangement, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 629 which forms a composite image by
    combining visual display information with the light incident on an
    observer's field of view.


CLS 359/631
TXT Including curved reflector:

    Subject matter under subclass 630 including a reflecting element having a
    surface with a smoothly concave or convex configuration  in the optical
    path of the light that produces an image.

    (1)     Note.  The curved configuration may be for focusing or collimating
    reflected light rays.

    (2)     Note.  Helmet mounted partial reflectors and curved windsheild
    light com-bining systems are classified in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    364+,   for compound lens system with curved reflective imaging element.

    726+,   for lenses with reflecting element.

    831+,   for prisms, per se.

    838+,   for mirrors, per se.


CLS 359/632
TXT Rotatable heads-up device or combiner:

    Subject matter under subclass 630 including structure to enable circular
    movement of light combining element.


CLS 359/633
TXT With additional reflector (e.g., serial reflections, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 630 having an image reflecting element
    additional to a partially reflective light combiner or divider.

    (1)     Note.  This additional reflecting element may be another partially
    reflecting element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    850,    for a plural mirror optical system.


CLS 359/634
TXT Wavelength selective (e.g., dichroic mirror, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 629 wherein an optical property of the
    partially reflecting light combining or dividing element for a component of
    incident light is wavelength dependent.

    (1)     Note.  The term "optical property" is intended to include
    transmittance and reflectance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    583,    for a dichroic beam splitter or combiner using layers producing
    light interference.

    838+,   for mirrors, per se.


CLS 359/635
TXT Drawing or plotting aid:

    Subject matter under subclass 629 including forming a composite image on a
    surface on which visual information or other representation is manually
    placed.


CLS 359/636
TXT Including full reflection and transmission of a beam at different portions
    of a beam divider:

    Subject matter under subclass 629 wherein the partially reflective element
    has selected areas of full light reflection interrupted by light
    transmissive areas.


CLS 359/637
TXT With path length or aberration correcting element:

    Subject matter under subclass 629 which includes a device, circuit, or
    circuit component that corrects an undesirable condition which affects a
    light beam.


CLS 359/638
TXT With partial reflection at a surface of a prism:

    Subject matter under subclass 629 wherein the surface at which partial
    reflection takes place is the surface of a prismatic element.


CLS 359/639
TXT By refraction at beam splitting or combining surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 618 including a surface which refracts
    substantial portions of the incident light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    737,    for lens with refracting element.

    837,    for prism with refracting surface.


CLS 359/640
TXT Including prismatic element:

    Subject matter under subclass 639 including a transparent optical element
    having at least two polished plane faces, inclined relative to each other,
    to cause refraction through the faces.

    (1)     Note.  A prism is geometrically constructed of parallel bases or
    ends and congruent polygons and sides that are parallelograms in order to
    either (a) disperse light into a spectrum or (b) reflect rays of light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    831+,   for prisms generally.


CLS 359/641
TXT COLLIMATING OF LIGHT BEAM:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a bundle of light rays
    emanating from a single point are made to be parallel to one another, as
    opposed to converging or diverging rays.

    (1)     Note.   A collimator reticle will produce collimated light wherein
    the light appears to originate from an infinitely distant real or apparent
    source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    642+,   for lenses.

    838+,   for mirrors.


CLS 359/642
TXT LENS:

    Subject matter under the class definition including either a single
    transparent mass of refractive material having opposed refracting surfaces
    or a plurality of such masses arranged along an optical axis with their
    opposed refracting surfaces disposed transversely of such axis, the said
    opposed surfaces being so shaped and spaced that the mass or plurality of
    masses are capable of producing, from light rays passing therethrough from
    an object external to the mass or masses, a single image of that object at
    a focal point.

    (1)     Note.  The plurality of masses of material act upon  light rays
    proceeding from an object in a manner similar to that in which the single
    mass of material acts upon such rays; i.e., no real image is formed between
    the front most and rear most axially spaced refracting surfaces of either
    the single mass or the plurality of masses.

    (2)     Note.  Of the opposed refracting surfaces provided on each lens
    mass, one is usually spherical and the other is usually spherical or
    planar, but there may be deviations from such shapes in which any or all of
    the surfaces depart from the spherical shape or the planar shape.

    (3)     Note.  The lens masses referred to above will be designated
    hereafter as lens "components" or lens "elements" depending on the design
    of the lens.

    (4)     Note.  The term "component" as applied to a lens designates either
    a single transparent mass of refractive material having two opposed
    refracting surfaces or a grouped plurality of such masses arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
    surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with
    the spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into the
    lens computations, the two refracting surfaces of the single mass and the
    two axially extreme refracting surfaces of the plurality of masses having
    at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced from all other adjacent
    refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens.  The axial dimension
    of the air-spacing between either the opposed surfaces of the single mass
    or the axially extreme surfaces of the grouped plural-ity of masses and the
    other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens must be
    of sufficient magni-tude to enter into the lens computations in order to
    limit the axial extent of the lens component.

    (5)     Note.  The term "element" as applied to a lens designates any
    single transparent mass of refractive material having two opposed
    refracting surfaces, which surfaces are disposed transversely of the
    optical axis of the lens and spaced therealong, i.e., any one of the masses
    in the above component definition regardless of its spacing from adjacent
    refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens.

    (6)     Note.  A correcting plate such as that used in the "Schmidt type
    lens" to correct the aberrations of a spherical mirror is considered a lens
    component under this subclass definition.

    (7)     Note.  The optical system of a Galilean telescope is considered a
    lens under this subclass definition, since no image is formed between the
    objective and eyepiece of the telescope.

    (8)     Note.  This subclass also includes, especially in subclasses 726+,
    737, and 738+, combination of a lens or lenses with other than nonlens
    optical elements which reflect, control or deflect light passing through
    the lens and which are not provided for above.

    (9)     Note.  This subclass further includes in subclasses 811+ lens
    supports and mountings for maintaining the various lens components in
    proper alignment and spacing for intended operation of the lens.

    (10)    Note.  Compound lens systems in which one lens is employed to
    examine the image formed by another lens will be found in this class,
    subclasses 362+.

    (11)    Note.  This is the residual subclass for lenses.   See the search
    notes below for classes where lenses peculiar to particular applications
    such as signalling, illu-minating, and ophthalmic may be found.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    355+,   for lenses peculiarly adapted for opera-tion within the nonvisible
    spectrum.

    362+,   for compound lens systems.  See also (11) Note above.

    440+,   for scale-reading systems involving lenses.

    462+,   for plural optical paths including lenses or lenses with plural
    optical paths.

    503+,   for lens-spacing structure.

    591+,   for natural light directing systems.

    611+,   for lens shades.

    619+,   for surfaces composed of lenticular elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclasses
    159+ for ophthalmic lenses or blanks.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 124+ for lens or
    reflective image-former testing devices and subclasses 128+ for refraction
    test devices generally.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 317+ for illuminating refractor lenses.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    appropriate subclasses for a molding apparatus used to shape or reshape a
    nonmetal; see especially subclass 808 for a cross-reference digest of such
    apparatus including a lens mold.


CLS 359/643
TXT Eyepiece:

    Subject matter under subclass 642 wherein the lens creates a magnified
    virtual image of a rear object.

    (1)     Note.  The eyepiece in an optical instrument is the lens or lenses
    nearest the viewer's eye.


CLS 359/644
TXT Having four components:

    Subject matter under subclass 643 wherein the lens comprises four sections
    (i.e., components), each containing two refractive surfaces, arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in
    alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and their
    axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical axis that
    parallel light rays upon entering and passing through all of such
    components are refracted to a focus no more than one time.

    (1)     Note.  The term "component" as applied to a lens designates either
    (1) a single transparent mass of refractive material having two opposed
    refracting surfaces or (2) a grouped plurality of such masses arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
    surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with
    the spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into the
    lens computations.


    (2)     Note.  The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising a
    single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of a "component"
    comprising a plurality of masses have at least a portion thereof axially
    air-spaced from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present
    in the lens.

    (3)     Note.  The axial dimension of the air-spacing between either the
    opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the axially extreme
    surfaces of the "component" grouped plurality of masses, and the other
    adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
    sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in order to limit
    the axial extent of the lens component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    650,    for projection type field curvature shaping lenses having four
    components.

    660,    for microscope objective having four components.

    682,    for variable magnification reverse tele-photo having seven or less
    components.

    715,    for nonspherical lens system having four components.

    734,    for four component multiple compo-nent lenses with a reflecting
    element.

    747,    for a telephoto lens having four components.

    753,    for wide angle lenses having five or less components.

    754,    for multiple component  lens systems generally.

    771,    for multiple component lenses having four components.


CLS 359/645
TXT Having three components:

    Subject matter under subclass 643 wherein the lens comprises three sections
    (i.e., components), each containing two refractive surfaces, arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in
    alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and their
    axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical axis that
    parallel light rays upon entering and passing through all of such
    components are refracted to a focus no more than one time.

    (1)     Note.  The term "component" as applied to a lens designates either
    (1) a single transparent mass of refractive material having two opposed
    refracting surfaces or (2) a grouped plurality of such masses arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
    surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with
    the spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into the
    lens computations.


    (2)     Note.  The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising a
    single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of a "component"
    comprising a plurality of masses have at least a portion thereof axially
    air-spaced from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present
    in the lens.

    (3)     Note.  The axial dimension of the air-spacing between either the
    opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the axially extreme
    surfaces of the "component" grouped plurality of masses, and the other
    adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
    sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in order to limit
    the axial extent of the lens component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    651,    for projection type field curvature shaping lenses having less than
    four components.

    661,    for microscope objective having less than four components.

    682,    for variable magnification reverse tele-photo having seven or less
    components.

    716,    for nonspherical lens system having three components.

    735,    for three component multiple component lenses with a  reflecting
    element.

    748,    for a telephoto lens having less than four components.

    753,    for wide angle lenses having five or less components.

    754,    for multiple component  lens systems generally.

    784,    for multiple component lenses having three components.


CLS 359/646
TXT Having two components:

    Subject matter under subclass 643  wherein the lens comprises two sections
    (i.e., components), each containing two refractive surfaces arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in
    alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and their
    axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical axis that
    parallel light rays upon entering and passing through all of such
    components are refracted to a focus no more than one time.

    (1)     Note.  The term "component" as applied to a lens designates either
    (1) a single transparent mass of refractive material having two opposed
    refracting surfaces or (2) a grouped plurality of such masses arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
    surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with
    the spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into the
    lens computations.


    (2)     Note.  The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising a
    single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of a "component"
    comprising a plurality of masses have at least a portion thereof axially
    air-spaced from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present
    in the lens.

    (3)     Note.  The axial dimension of the air-spacing between either the
    opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the axially extreme
    surfaces of the "component" grouped plurality of masses and the other
    adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
    sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in order to limit
    the axial extent of the lens component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    651,    for projection type field curvature shaping lenses having less than
    four components.

    661,    for microscope objective having less than four components.

    682,    for variable magnification reverse telephoto having seven or less
    components.

    717,    for non spherical lens system having two components.

    736,    for two component multiple component lenses with a reflecting
    element.

    748,    for a telephoto lens having less than four components.

    753,    for wide angle lenses having five or less components.

    754,    for multiple component  lens systems generally.

    793,    for multiple component lenses having two components.


CLS 359/647
TXT Having one component:

    Subject matter under subclass 643 wherein the lens comprises one section
    (i.e., component), containing two refractive surfaces arranged in series
    along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in alignment
    thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and their axially extreme
    refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical axis that parallel light
    rays upon entering and passing through all of such component is refracted
    to a focus no more than one time.

    (1)     Note.  The term "component" as applied to a lens designates either
    (1) a single transparent mass of refractive material having two opposed
    refracting surfaces or (2) a grouped plurality of such masses arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
    surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with
    the spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into the
    lens computations.


    (2)     Note.  The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising a
    single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of a "component"
    comprising a plurality of masses have at least a portion thereof axially
    air-spaced from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present
    in the lens.

    (3)     Note.  The axial dimension of the air-spacing between either the
    opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the axially extreme
    surfaces of the "component" grouped plurality of masses, and the other
    adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
    sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in order to limit
    the axial extent of the lens component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    651,    for projection type field curvature shaping lenses having less than
    four components.

    661,    for microscope objective having less than four components.

    682,    for variable magnification reverse telephoto having seven or less
    components.

    718,    for nonspherical lens system having one component.

    748,    for a telephoto lens having less than four components.

    753,    for wide angle lenses having five or less components.

    796,    for a single component lens with multiple elements.


CLS 359/648
TXT With field curvature shaping:

    Subject matter under subclass 642 wherein the curvature of the refractive
    surface controls the altering of the curvature of the image or the
    production of an image of a curved object field.


CLS 359/649
TXT Projection type:

    Subject matter under subclass 648 wherein an image of an image plane is
    caused to be visible at an object plane.


CLS 359/650
TXT Having four components:

    Subject matter under subclass 649 wherein the lens comprises four sections
    (i.e., components), each containing two refractive surfaces arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in
    alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and their
    axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical axis that
    parallel light rays upon entering and passing through all of such
    components are refracted to a focus no more than one time.

    (1)     Note.  The term "component" as applied to a lens designates either
    (1) a single transparent mass of refractive material having two opposed
    refracting surfaces or (2) a grouped plurality of such masses arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
    surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with
    the spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into the
    lens computations.


    (2)     Note.  The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising a
    single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of a "component"
    comprising a plurality of masses have at least a portion thereof axially
    air-spaced from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present
    in the lens.

    (3)     Note.  The axial dimension of the air-spacing between either the
    opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the axially extreme
    surfaces of the "component" grouped plurality of masses, and the other
    adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
    sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in order to limit
    the axial extent of the lens component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    644,    for eyepieces having four components.

    660,    for microscope objective having four components.

    682,    for variable magnification reverse telephoto having seven or less
    components.

    715,    for nonspherical lens system having four components.

    734,    for four component multiple compo-nent lenses with a reflecting
    element.

    747,    for a telephoto lens having four components.

    753,    for wide angle lenses having five or less components.

    754,    for multiple component  lens systems generally.

    771,    for multiple component lenses having four components.


CLS 359/651
TXT Having less than four components:

    Subject matter under subclass 649 wherein the lens comprises less than four
    sections (i.e., components), each containing two refractive surfaces
    arranged in series along the optical axis of the lens with their optical
    centers in alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and
    their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical axis
    that parallel light rays upon entering and passing through all of such
    components are refracted to a focus no more than one time.

    (1)     Note.  The term "component" as applied to a lens designates either
    (1) a single transparent mass of refractive material having two opposed
    refracting surfaces or (2) a grouped plurality of such masses arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
    surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with
    the spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into the
    lens computations.


    (2)     Note.  The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising a
    single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of a "component"
    comprising a plurality of masses have at least a portion thereof axially
    air-spaced from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present
    in the lens.

    (3)     Note.  The axial dimension of the air-spacing between either the
    opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the axially extreme
    surfaces of the "component" grouped plurality of masses, and the other
    adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
    sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in order to limit
    the axial extent of the lens component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    645+,   for eyepieces having three or less components.

    661,    for microscope objective having less than four components.

    682,    for variable magnification reverse telephoto having seven or less
    components.

    716+,   for nonspherical lens system having three or less components.

    735+,   for three or less component multiple component lenses with a
    reflecting element.

    748,    for a telephoto lens having less than four components.

    753,    for wide angle lenses having five or less components.

    754,    for multiple component  lens systems generally.

    784+,   for multiple component lenses having three or less components.

    796,    for a single component lens with multiple elements.


CLS 359/652
TXT With graded refractive index:

    Subject matter under subclass 642 wherein a lens has an index of refraction
    which varies in space.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    385,    Optical Waveguides, subclass 124 for optical waveguides having a
    graded refractive index.


CLS 359/653
TXT Having an axial gradient:

    Subject matter under subclass 652 wherein the index of refraction varies
    along an optical axis.


CLS 359/654
TXT Having a radial gradient:

    Subject matter under subclass 652 wherein the index of refraction varies in
    a direction at a right angle to an optical axis.


CLS 359/655
TXT In a variable media (e.g., gas, elastomer, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 654 wherein the chemical composition of the
    lens varies in a spatial dimension.


CLS 359/656
TXT Microscope objective:

    Subject matter under subclass 642 wherein the focal length of the lens is
    relatively short and the lens produces a highly magnified real image.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    643+,   for eyepieces which may be used in conjunction with microscope
    objectives.


CLS 359/657
TXT Having seven components:

    Subject matter under subclass 656 wherein the lens comprises seven sections
    (i.e., components), each containing two refractive surfaces arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in
    alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and their
    axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical axis that
    parallel light rays upon entering and passing through all of such
    components are refracted to a focus no more than one time.

    (1)     Note.  The term "component" as applied to a lens designates either
    (1) a single transparent mass of refractive material having two opposed
    refracting surfaces or (2) a grouped plurality of such masses arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
    surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with
    the spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into the
    lens computations.


    (2)     Note.  The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising a
    single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of a "component"
    comprising a plurality of masses have at least a portion thereof axially
    air-spaced from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present
    in the lens.

    (3)     Note.  The axial dimension of the air-spacing between either the
    opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the axially extreme
    surfaces of the "component" grouped plurality of masses, and the other
    adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
    sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in order to limit
    the axial extent of the lens component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    643,    for eyepieces having more than four components.

    648,    for projection type field curvature shaping lenses having more than
    four components.

    682,    for variable magnification reverse telephoto having seven or less
    components.

    708,    for nonspherical surface variable magnification lenses having more
    than six components.

    733,    for more than four multiple component lenses with a reflecting
    element.

    745,    for telephoto lenses having more than five components.

    751,    for wide angle lenses having seven components.

    755,    for multiple component lenses having seven components.


CLS 359/658
TXT Having six components:

    Subject matter under subclass 656 wherein the lens comprises six sections
    (i.e., components), each containing two refractive surfaces arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in
    alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and their
    axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical axis that
    parallel light rays upon entering and passing through all of such
    components are refracted to a focus no more than one time.

    (1)     Note.  The term "component" as applied to a lens designates either
    (1) a single transparent mass of refractive material having two opposed
    refracting surfaces or (2) a grouped plurality of such masses arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
    surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with
    the spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into the
    lens computations.


    (2)     Note.  The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising a
    single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of a "component"
    comprising a plurality of masses have at least a portion thereof axially
    air-spaced from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present
    in the lens.

    (3)     Note.  The axial dimension of the air-spacing between either the
    opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the axially extreme
    surfaces of the "component" grouped plurality of masses, and the other
    adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
    sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in order to limit
    the axial extent of the lens component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    643,    for eyepieces having more than four components.

    649,    for projection type field curvature shaping lenses having more than
    four com-ponents.

    682,    for variable magnification reverse tele-photo having seven or less
    components.

    713,    for nonspherical surface lens system having six components.

    733,    for more than four multiple component lenses with a reflecting
    element.

    745,    for telephoto lenses having more than five components.

    752,    for wide angle lenses having six components.

    754,    for multiple component lens systems generally.

    756,    for multiple component lens having six components.


CLS 359/659
TXT Having five components:

    Subject matter under subclass 656 wherein the lens comprises five sections
    (i.e., components), each containing two refractive surfaces arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in
    alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and their
    axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical axis that
    parallel light rays upon entering and passing through all of such
    components are refracted to a focus no more than one time.

    (1)     Note.  The term "component" as applied to a lens designates either
    (1) a single transparent mass of refractive material having two opposed
    refracting surfaces or (2) a grouped plurality of such masses arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
    surfaces either in full overall contact, or in spaced parallel relation
    with the spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into
    the lens computations.


    (2)     Note.  The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising a
    single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of a "component"
    comprising a plurality of masses have at least a portion thereof axially
    air-spaced from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present
    in the lens.

    (3)     Note.  The axial dimension of the air-spacing between either the
    opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the axially extreme
    surfaces of the "component" grouped plurality of masses, and the other
    adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
    sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in order to limit
    the axial extent of the lens component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    643,    for eyepieces having more than four components.

    648,    for projection type field curvature shaping lenses having more than
    four components.

    682,    for variable magnification reverse telephoto having seven or less
    components.

    714,    for nonspherical surface lens system having five components.

    733,    for more than four multiple component lenses with a reflecting
    element.

    746,    for telephoto lenses having five components.

    753,    for wide angle lenses having five or less components.

    754,    for multiple component lens systems generally.

    763,    for multiple component lenses having five components.


CLS 359/660
TXT Having four components:

    Subject matter under subclass 656 wherein the lens comprises four sections
    (i.e., components), each containing two refractive surfaces arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in
    alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis and their
    axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical axis that
    parallel light rays upon entering and passing through all of such
    components are refracted to a focus no more than one time.

    (1)     Note.  The term "component" as applied to a lens designates either
    (1) a single transparent mass of refractive material having two opposed
    refracting surfaces or (2) a grouped plurality of such masses arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
    surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with
    the spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into the
    lens computations.


    (2)     Note.  The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising a
    single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of a "component"
    comprising a plurality of masses have at least a portion thereof axially
    air-spaced from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present
    in the lens.

    (3)     Note.  The axial dimension of the air-spacing between either the
    opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the axially extreme
    surfaces of the "component" grouped plurality of masses, and the other
    adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
    sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in order to limit
    the axial extent of the lens component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    644,    for eyepieces having four components.

    650,    for projection type field curvature shaping lenses having four
    components.

    682,    for variable magnification reverse tele-photo having seven or less
    components.

    715,    for nonspherical lens system having four components.

    734,    for four component multiple compo-nent lenses with a reflecting
    element.

    747,    for a telephoto lens having four components.

    753,    for wide angle lenses having five or less components.

    754,    for multiple component  lens systems generally.

    771,    for multiple component lenses having four components.


CLS 359/661
TXT Having less than four components:

    Subject matter under subclass 656 wherein the lens comprises less than four
    sections (i.e., components), each containing two refractive surfaces
    arranged in series along the optical axis of the lens with their optical
    centers in alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and
    their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical axis
    that parallel light rays upon entering and passing through all of such
    components are refracted to a focus no more than one time.

    (1)     Note.  The term "component" as applied to a lens designates either
    (1) a single transparent mass of refractive material having two opposed
    refracting surfaces or (2) a grouped plurality of such masses arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
    surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with
    the spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into the
    lens computations.


    (2)     Note.  The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising a
    single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of a "component"
    comprising a plurality of masses have at least a portion thereof axially
    air-spaced from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present
    in the lens.

    (3)     Note.  The axial dimension of the air-spacing between either the
    opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the axially extreme
    surfaces of the "component" grouped plurality of masses, and the other
    adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
    sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in order to limit
    the axial extent of the lens component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    645+,   for eyepieces having three or less components.

    651,    for projection type field curvature shaping lenses having less than
    four components.

    682,    for variable magnification reverse telephoto having seven or less
    components.

    716+,   for nonspherical lens system having three or less components.

    735+,   for three or less component multiple component lenses with a
    reflecting element.

    748,    for a telephoto lens having less than four components.

    753,    for wide angle lenses having five or less components.

    754,    for multiple component  lens systems generally.

    784+,   for multiple component lenses having three or less components.

    796,    for a single component lens with multiple elements.


CLS 359/662
TXT High distortion lens (e.g., fQ, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 642 wherein the image formed by the lens is
    not in proportion to the source of the image.


CLS 359/663
TXT Telecentric system:

    Subject matter under subclass 642 wherein all of the primary rays are
    parallel to the optical axis in either object or image space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    740,    for particular diaphragms employed to produce the telecentric
    result.


CLS 359/664
TXT Spherical:

    Subject matter under subclass 642 wherein one of the lens elements has two
    convex refractive surfaces which are concentric and of equal curvature.


CLS 359/665
TXT Fluid:

    Subject matter under subclass 642 wherein the lens  has at least one
    component or one element which uses a transparent liquid or gas as its
    refractive material.

    (1)     Note.  The lens components or elements under this definition may
    comprise either a mass of fluid supported in a capillary channel which has
    its refracting surfaces freestanding and formed by surface tension or a
    mass of fluid which is enclosed in and shaped by a transparent shell or
    casing.  In the latter form of component or element, the fluid may be
    either a liquid or a gas, and in addition to refraction, may perform other
    functions (e.g., cooling).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    886,    for fluid filters.

    894,    for gas-filled telescope or microscope barrels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclass 159
    for spectacle lenses having a fluid-refractive element.


CLS 359/666
TXT With variable magnification:

    Subject matter under subclass 665 wherein at least one refracting surface
    of the lens is deformable to vary the focal length of the lens.

    (1)     Note.  The refracting surface of the lens may be accomplished by
    either applying mechanical force to the periphery of the lens casing or
    varying the quantity of fluid within the lens casing.  In the type of fluid
    lens which has a freestanding surface tension formed refracting surface,
    the refracting surface may be deformed by impressing an electric potential
    upon the fluid lens.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclass 169
    for spectacle lenses of the fluid type having a variable focal length.


CLS 359/667
TXT With gas:

    Subject matter under subclass 665 wherein the refractive material is a
    transparent gas.


CLS 359/668
TXT Anamorphic:

    Subject matter under subclass 642 wherein the lens has or produces unequal
    magnifications in two planes that are at an angle (usually perpendicular)
    to each other.

    (1)     Note.  These lenses employ at least one element or component having
    one or more cylindrical surfaces thereupon to produce the unequal
    magnifications of the lens.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    710,    for lenses having elements or components with one or more
    cylindrical surfaces thereon.


CLS 359/669
TXT With prism anamorphoser:

    Subject matter under subclass 668 wherein the components that produce the
    unequal magnifications in the lens are symmetrically refracting prisms
    disposed with their refracting surfaces  transversely of the optical axis
    of the lens.

    (1)     Note.  The prism components may be mounted either in a fixed
    relation to the optical axis of the lens or each of these components may be
    mounted to rotate about an axis parallel to its refracting edge, in which
    latter case the difference between the magnifications in the two planes is
    variable.

    (2)     Note.  See subclass 831 for the definition of a prism.


CLS 359/670
TXT Variable magnification anamorphoser:

    Subject matter under subclass 668 wherein the magnification factor of the
    lens is selectively variable.


CLS 359/671
TXT Having four or more components:

    Subject matter under subclass 668 wherein the lens comprises four or more
    sections (i.e., components), each containing two refractive surfaces
    arranged in series along the optical axis of the lens with their optical
    centers in alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis and
    their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical axis
    that parallel light rays upon entering and passing through all of such
    components are refracted to a focus no more than one time.

    (1)     Note.  The term "component" as applied to a lens designates either
    (1) a single transparent mass of refractive material having two opposed
    refracting surfaces or (2) a grouped plurality of such masses arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
    surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with
    the spacing being of such small magnitude that does not enter into the lens
    computations.

    (2)     Note.  The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising a
    single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of a "component"
    comprising a plurality of masses have at least a portion thereof axially
    air-spaced from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present
    in the lens.

    (3)     Note.  The axial dimension of the air-spacing between either the
    opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the axially extreme
    surfaces of the "component" grouped plurality of masses, and the other
    adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
    sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in order to limit
    the axial extent of the lens component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    643+,   for eyepieces having four or more components.

    648+,   for field curvature shaping lenses having four or more components.

    656+,   for microscope objectives having four or more components.

    708+,   for nonspherical surface lens systems having four or more
    components.

    726+,   for lens systems with reflecting elements having four or more
    components.

    745+,   for telephoto lenses having four or more components.

    749+,   for wide angle lenses having four or more components.

    754+,   for multiple component lenses in general which have four or more
    components.


CLS 359/672
TXT Selective magnification by exchanging or adding a lens component:

    Subject matter under subclass 642 wherein one or more components of a basic
    lens are replaceable by one or more other components to produce in
    combination with any remaining components of the basic lens having
    substantially the same image plane as that of the basic lens but having a
    different equivalent focal length from that of the original basic lens.

    (1)     Note.  The number of original components removed from the basic
    lens may not always be the same as the number of components which replace
    such original components, in which case the exchange of components may
    result in the addition of components to the original lens.  This subclass
    includes adding or subtracting lens components, while subclass 819 relates
    to the changing of the entire lens.

    (2)     Note.  The prisms may be moved to vary the length in one plane
    only, while in subclass 678 the prisms are moved to vary the focal length
    in all planes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    676+,   for variable magnification lenses generally.

    678,    for lenses wherein at least one component is formed of
    symmetrically refracting prisms which are rotatable about axes parallel to
    their refracting edges.  See (2) Note above.

    737,    for lenses combined with a nonlens refracting element which is
    usually a wedge-shaped prism.

    744,    for a focal lens attachments to be used with lenses to change the
    equivalent focal lengths of the lenses

    754+,   for multiple component lenses.

    821+,   for plural lenses in a common carrier selectively operable.  See
    (1) Note above.


CLS 359/673
TXT To the front of a basic lens:

    Subject matter under subclass 672 wherein a lens component is exchanged or
    added to the objective side (i.e., front) of a basic lens for selective
    magnification.


CLS 359/674
TXT To the middle of a basic lens:

    Subject matter under subclass 672 wherein a lens component is exchanged or
    added to the center of a basic lens for selective magnification.


CLS 359/675
TXT To the rear of a basic lens:

    Subject matter under subclass 672 wherein a lens component is exchanged or
    added to the image side (i.e., rear) of a basic lens for selective
    magnification.c


CLS 359/676
TXT With variable magnification (e.g., zoom type):

    Subject matter under subclass 642 wherein the equivalent focal length of
    the lens may be continuously varied between predetermined limits.

    (1)     Note.  The variation of the equivalent focal length of the lenses
    of this generic subclass is accomplished by axially shifting certain
    components of the lens relative to other components.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    432,    for variable magnification compound lens systems.

    672+,   for lenses whose focal length may be selected by exchanging,
    adding, or removing lens components.

    694+,   for mechanisms that axially shift the lens components whereby the
    continuous variation of the equivalent focal length is accomplished.

    754+,   for fixed focal length lenses.

    823+,   for mechanisms that axially shift the lens components for the
    purpose of axially adjusting the focal plane of the lens.


CLS 359/677
TXT Optically compensated:

    Subject matter under subclass 676 wherein the lens is physically linked and
    dependently moved to maintain an equivalent focal length.


CLS 359/678
TXT Prism lens type:

    Subject matter under subclass 676 where the lens includes prisms disposed
    along the optical axis which are movable to vary the equivalent focal
    length of the lens.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 831 for the definition of a prism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    669+,   for lenses with prisms which are movable for varying the focal
    length in only one plane.


CLS 359/679
TXT With fixed conjugates:

    Subject matter under subclass 676 wherein an object plane and its
    corresponding (i.e., conjugate) image plane are fixed and are located at
    finite distances from the lens.


CLS 359/680
TXT Reverse telephoto:

    Subject matter under subclass 676 wherein the lens includes a negative
    group on the longer conjugate side and a positive group on the shorter
    conjugate side with the spacing between these groups being varied to vary
    the overall focal length of the combination.

    (1)     Note.  See subclasses 749+ for reverse telephoto lenses that are
    not of variable focal length.


CLS 359/681
TXT Having eight or nine components:

    Subject matter under subclass 680 wherein the reverse telephoto lens
    comprises eight or nine sections (i.e., components), each containing two
    refractive surfaces arranged in series along the optical axis of the lens
    with their optical centers in alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular
    to such axis and their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along
    the optical axis that parallel light rays upon entering and passing through
    all of such components are refracted to a focus no more than one time.

    (1)     Note.  The term  "component" as applied to a lens designates either
    (1) a single transparent mass of refractive material having two opposed
    refracting  surfaces or (2) a grouped plurality of such masses arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
    surfaces either in full overall contact, or in spaced parallel relation
    with the spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into
    the lens computations.

    (2)     Note.  The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising a
    single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of a "component"
    comprising a plurality of masses have at least a portion thereof axially
    air-spaced from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present
    in the lens.

    (3)     Note.  The axial dimension of the air-spacing between either the
    opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the axially extreme
    surfaces of the "component" grouped plurality of masses, and the other
    adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
    sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in order to limit
    the axial extent of the lens component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    643,    for eyepieces having more than four components.

    648,    for projection type field curvature shaping lenses having more than
    four components.

    656,    for microscope objective having more than seven components.

    708,    for nonspherical surface variable magnification lenses having more
    than six components.

    733,    for more than four multiple component lenses with a reflecting
    element.

    745,    for telephoto lenses having more than five components.

    750,    for reverse telephoto lenses with eight components.

    754,    for more than seven multiple component lenses.


CLS 359/682
TXT Having seven or less components:

    Subject matter under subclass 680 wherein the reverse telephoto lens
    comprises seven or less sections (i.e., components), each containing two
    refractive surfaces, arranged in series along the optical axis of the lens
    with their optical centers in alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular
    to such axis and their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along
    the optical axis that parallel light rays upon entering and passing through
    all of such components are refracted to a focus no more than one time.

    (1)     Note.  The term "component" as applied to a lens designates either
    (1) a single transparent mass of refractive material having two opposed
    refracting surfaces or (2) a grouped plurality of such masses arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
    surfaces either in full overall contact, or in spaced parallel relation
    with the spacing being of such small magnitude that it does  not enter into
    the lens computations.

    (2)     Note.  The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising a
    single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of a "component"
    comprising a plurality of masses have at least a portion thereof axially
    air-spaced from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present
    in the lens.

    (3)     Note.  The axial dimension of the air-spacing between either the
    opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the axially extreme
    surfaces of the "component" grouped plurality of masses, and the other
    adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
    sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in order to limit
    the axial extent of the lens component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    643+,   for eyepieces having seven or less components.

    648+,   for projection type field curvature shaping lenses having seven or
    less components.

    657+,   for microscope objectives having seven or less components.

    708+,   for nonspherical surface variable magnification lenses having seven
    or less components.

    733+,   for seven or less multiple component lenses with reflecting element.

    745+,   for telephoto lenses having seven or less components.

    751+,   for wide angle lenses having seven or less components.

    755+,   for multiple component lenses having seven or less components.

    796+,   for a single component with multiple elements.


CLS 359/683
TXT With mechanical compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 676 wherein the lens includes at least a
    first lens group including a variator movable for varying the focal length
    and at least a second lens group including a compensator which moves
    independently of the first group for compensating for image plane deviation
    during focal length variation.

    (1)     Note.  A group is an assembly of one or more components used as a
    single unit to achieve a particular function such as focussing, variating,
    compensating, or relaying.

    (2)     Note.  Focusing is the action of converging light beams to a
    minimum size spot of light.

    (3)     Note.  Relaying is the action of transferring an input light beam
    from a relay to another device without effecting any change between the
    relay input and output light beam.

    (4)     Note.  A component consists of either (1) a single optical piece
    (i.e., element) comprising a single transparent mass of refractive material
    having two opposed refracting surfaces, which surfaces are disposed
    transversely of the optical axis of the lens and spaced therealong or (2) a
    plurality of such masses arranged in series along the optical axis of the
    lens with their adjacent refracting surfaces either in full overall
    contact, or in spaced parallel relation with the spacing being of such
    small magnitude that it does not enter into the lens computations.


CLS 359/684
TXT Other than first group moves for focusing (internal focus type):

    Subject matter under subclass 683 where other than the first assembly of
    components is moved for focusing.


CLS 359/685
TXT Nonlinear variator/compensator movements:

    Subject matter under subclass 683 where the variator/compensator locus of
    movement is not a straight line.


CLS 359/686
TXT Four groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 683 wherein  four groups move independently
    of each other and at least two at the groups function respectively as a
    variator, movable for varing the local length, and a compensator which
    moves independently of the first group for compensating for image plane
    deviation during focal length variation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    689+,   for mechanical compensation with variable magnification having
    three groups.

    691+,   for mechanical compensation with variable magnification having two
    groups.


CLS 359/687
TXT +-++ Arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 686 wherein the plus and minus signs indicate
    convergent and divergent groups, respectively.

    (1)     Note.  The arrangement along the optical axis of the lens is
    identified by the left most sign representing the group at the entrant face
    of the lens, i.e., the direction of the light travelling through the lens
    is the same as the reading arrangement of the subclass title.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    774,    for a +-++ arrangement in general multiple component lens having
    four components.


CLS 359/688
TXT +- -+ Arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 686 wherein the plus and minus signs indicate
    convergent and divergent groups, respectively.

    (1)     Note.  The arrangement along the optical axis of the lens is
    identified by the left most sign representing the group at the entrant face
    of the lens, i.e., the direction of light travelling through the lens is
    the same as the reading arrangement of the subclass title.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    775,    for a +- -+ arrangement in general multiple component lens having
    four components.


CLS 359/689
TXT Three groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 683 wherein three groups move independently
    of each other and at least two of the groups function respectively as (1) a
    variator movable of varying the focal length and (2) a compensator which
    moves independently of the first group for compensating for image plane
    deviation focal length variation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    686+,   for mechanical compensation with variable magnification having four
    groups.

    691+,   for mechanical compensation with variable magnification having two
    groups.


CLS 359/690
TXT +-+ Arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 689 wherein the plus and minus signs indicate
    convergent and divergent groups, respectively.

    (1)     Note.  The arrangement along the optical axis of the lens is
    identified by the left most sign representing the group at the entrant face
    of the lens, i.e., the direction of light  travelling through the lens is
    the same as the reading arrangement of the subclass title.


CLS 359/691
TXT Two groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 683 wherein two groups move independently of
    each other and these groups function respectively as (1) a variator movable
    for varying the focal length and (2) a compensator which moves
    independently of the first group for compensating for image plane deviation
    during focal length variation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    686+,   for mechanical compensation with variable magnification having four
    groups.

    689+,   for mechanical compensation with variable magnification having
    three groups.


CLS 359/692
TXT +- Arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 691 wherein the plus and minus signs indicate
    convergent and divergent lens groups, respectively.

    (1)     Note.  The arrangement along the optical axis of the lens is
    identified by the left most sign representing the group at the entrant face
    of the lens, i.e., the direction of light travelling through the lens is
    the same as the reading arrangement of the subclass title.


CLS 359/693
TXT With macro-type focusing:

    Subject matter under subclass 683 wherein the mechanical compensation
    permits focusing at very close object distances without loss of definition
    and without the need for front or rear attachments.


CLS 359/694
TXT Adjusting mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 676 comprising structure for changing the
    axial spacing between components of the lens.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for the mechanical adjusting
    structure.  Where the optical relationship is set forth in the claims,
    classification is in subclasses 676-693.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    823+,   for mechanisms that axially shift the lens components to axially
    adjust the focal plane of the lens.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    396,    Photography, subclasses 72+ for mechanisms that axially shift the
    components of the lens of a camera to accomplish a variation in the
    equivalent focal length of such lens and camera structure.


CLS 359/695
TXT Three or more movable lens groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 694 wherein the optics to be adjusted
    includes three or more nonstationary combinations of lenses.


CLS 359/696
TXT Motor driven:

    Subject matter under subclass 694 wherein the adjusting mechanism includes
    an engine to power any required adjustment.


CLS 359/697
TXT Condition responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 696 wherein the motor driven adjusting
    mechanism is actuated by a specific situation.


CLS 359/698
TXT Auto focusing:

    Subject matter under subclass 697 wherein the condition that is responded
    to is changing of focal point.


CLS 359/699
TXT Having cam device:

    Subject matter under subclass 694 wherein the adjusting mechanism includes
    a curved surface that causes changes in movement.


CLS 359/700
TXT Cam groove type:

    Subject matter under subclass 699 wherein the cam device is a slot.


CLS 359/701
TXT Cam ring type or zoom ring type:

    Subject matter under subclass 699 wherein the cam device is a circular
    adjustment mechanism.


CLS 359/702
TXT With adjustment lock:

    Subject matter under subclass 694 wherein the adjustment is stopped to
    prevent movement.


CLS 359/703
TXT With specified mount:

    Subject matter under subclass 694 wherein the axial spacing between lens
    components is adjusted and the structure to hold the components in place is
    specified.


CLS 359/704
TXT Having detail of barrel:

    Subject matter under subclass 703 wherein the specified mount includes
    specifies of the cylindrical case which holds the lens components in
    position.


CLS 359/705
TXT With macro type focusing:

    Subject matter under subclass 694 wherein the adjusting mechanism permits
    focusing at very close object distances without loss of definition and
    without the need for front or rear attachments.


CLS 359/706
TXT With specified ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 705 having a specified circular band.


CLS 359/707
TXT Diffusing:

    Subject matter under subclass 642 wherein the lens produces an image having
    soft or indistinct outlines.

    (1)     Note.  The lens diffusion characteristics may be effected by any
    one of the following:  (a) frosting the lens surface, (b) shifting the lens
    components relative to each other, (c) placing aspheric surfaces adjacent
    or on one or more components of the lens, (d) adding a transparent plate or
    additional lens component to the lens, (e) undercorrecting the lens, (f)
    introducing aberration to the lens, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    601+,   for glare-reducing optical systems.


CLS 359/708
TXT Including a nonspherical surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 642 wherein at least one of the refracting
    surfaces of the lens departs from a spherical shape.

    (1)     Note.  One or more of the components of the lens may be formed of
    symmetrically refracting prisms.

    (2)     Note.  The surfaces here are continuous curves and may be aspheric.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    668+,   for anamorphic lenses having cylindrical components which magnify
    more in one plane than in another plane at an angle thereto, particularly
    subclass 669 for such lenses in which at least one of the components is
    formed of prisms whereby the lens has a different magnification in one
    plane from that which it has in a plane at right angles to the first
    mentioned plane.

    678,    for lenses wherein at least one component of the lens is formed of
    symmetrically refracting prisms which are rotatable about axes that are
    parallel to their refracting edges to vary the power of the lens.

    725,    for panoramic lenses.

    728,    for lenses having nonspherical reflecting surfaces.

    742,    for echelon lenses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 37+ for methods of lens making and
    subclass 61 for methods of shaping glass surfaces.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 200+ for toroidal lenses
    combined with fuses, primers, and igniting devices utilizing radiation
    energy.

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclass 168
    for spectacle lenses having refracting surfaces which depart from the
    spherical form.


CLS 359/709
TXT Conical:

    Subject matter under subclass 708 wherein the nonspherical surface has a
    shape bounded by a closed planar base and the surface formed by connecting
    line segments between every point on the perimeter of this base with a
    common point.


CLS 359/710
TXT Cylindrical:

    Subject matter under subclass 708 wherein the nonspherical lens surface has
    a shape bounded by two parallel planes and a surface generated by a line
    tracing a closed curve where the line is parallel to an initial position.


CLS 359/711
TXT Toroidal:

    Subject matter under subclass 708 wherein the nonspherical lens surface has
    a shape generated by the revolution of any closed plane curve  about a
    nonintersecting axis lying in its plane.


CLS 359/712
TXT Paraboloidal:

    Subject matter under subclass 708 wherein the nonspherical lens surface has
    a shape formed by revolving about an axis of symmetry a set of points
    equally distant from a fixed point and a fixed line.


CLS 359/713
TXT Having six components:

    Subject matter under subclass 708 wherein the lens comprises six sections
    (i.e., components), each containing two refractive surfaces arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in
    alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis and their
    axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical axis that
    parallel light rays upon entering and passing through all of such
    components are refracted to a focus no more than one time.

    (1)     Note.  The term "component" as applied to a lens designates either
    (1) a single transparent mass of refractive material having two opposed
    refracting surfaces or (2) a grouped plurality of such masses arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
    surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with
    the spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into the
    lens computations.


    (2)     Note.  The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising a
    single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of a "component"
    comprising a plurality of masses have at least a portion thereof axially
    air-spaced from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present
    in the lens.

    (3)     Note.  The axial dimension of the air-spacing between either the
    opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the axially extreme
    surfaces of the "component" grouped plurality of masses, and the other
    adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
    sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in order to limit
    the axial extent of the lens component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    643,    for eyepieces having more than four components.

    649,    for projection type field curvature shaping lenses having more than
    four components.

    658,    for microscope objectives having six components.

    682,    for variable magnification reverse telephoto having seven or less
    components.

    733,    for more than four multiple component lenses with a reflecting
    element.

    745,    for telephoto lenses having more than five components.

    752,    for wide angle lenses having six components.

    754,    for multiple component lens systems generally.

    756,    for multiple component lens having six components.


CLS 359/714
TXT Having five components:

    Subject matter under subclass 708 wherein the lens comprises five sections
    (i.e., components), each containing two refractive surfaces arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in
    alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and their
    axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical axis that
    parallel light rays upon entering and passing through all of such
    components are refracted to a focus no more than one time.

    (1)     Note.  The term "component" as applied to a lens designates either
    (1) a single transparent mass of refractive material having two opposed
    refracting surfaces or (2) a grouped plurality of such masses arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
    surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with
    the spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into the
    lens computations.


    (2)     Note.  The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising a
    single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of a "component"
    comprising a plurality of masses have at least a portion thereof axially
    air-spaced from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present
    in the lens.

    (3)     Note.  The axial dimension of the air-spacing between either the
    opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the axially extreme
    surfaces of the "component" grouped plurality of masses, and the other
    adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
    sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in order to limit
    the axial extent of the lens component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    643,    for eyepieces having more than four components.

    649,    for projection type field curvature shaping lenses having more than
    four components.

    659,    for microscope objectives having five components.

    682,    for variable magnification reverse telephoto having seven or less
    components.

    733,    for more than four multiple component lenses with a reflecting
    element.

    746,    for telephoto lenses having five components.

    753,    for wide angle lenses having five or less components.

    754,    for multiple component lens systems generally.

    763,    for multiple component lenses having five components.


CLS 359/715
TXT Having four components:

    Subject matter under subclass 708 wherein the lens comprises four sections
    (i.e., components), each containing two refractive surfaces arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in
    alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis and their
    axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical axis that
    parallel light rays upon entering and passing through all of such
    components are refracted to a focus no more than one time.

    (1)     Note.  The term "component" as applied to a lens designates either
    (1) a single transparent mass of refractive material having two opposed
    refracting surfaces or (2) a grouped plurality of such masses arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
    surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with
    the spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into the
    lens computations.


    (2)     Note.  The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising a
    single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of a "component"
    comprising a plurality of masses have at least a portion thereof axially
    air-spaced from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present
    in the lens.

    (3)     Note.  The axial dimension of the air-spacing between either the
    opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the axially extreme
    surfaces of the "component" grouped plurality of masses, and the other
    adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
    sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in order to limit
    the axial extent of the lens component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    644,    for eyepieces having four components.

    650,    for projection type field curvature shaping lenses having four
    components.

    660,    for microscope objective having four components.

    682,    for variable magnification reverse telephoto having seven or less
    components.

    734,    for four component multiple component lenses with a reflecting
    element.

    747,    for a telephoto lens having four components.

    753,    for wide angle lenses having five or less components.

    754,    for multiple component  lens systems generally.

    771,    for multiple component lenses having four components.


CLS 359/716
TXT Having three components:

    Subject matter under subclass 708 wherein the lens comprises three sections
    (i.e., components), each containing two refractive surfaces, arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in
    alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis and their
    axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical axis that
    parallel light rays upon entering and passing through all of such
    components are refracted to a focus no more than one time.

    (1)     Note.  The term "component" as applied to a lens designates either
    (1) a single transparent mass of refractive material having two opposed
    refracting surfaces or (2) a grouped plurality of such masses arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
    surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with
    the spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into the
    lens computations.


    (2)     Note.  The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising a
    single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of a "component"
    comprising a plurality of masses have at least a portion thereof axially
    air-spaced from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present
    in the lens.

    (3)     Note.  The axial dimension of the air-spacing between either the
    opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the axially extreme
    surfaces of the "component" grouped plurality of masses, and the other
    adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
    sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in order to limit
    the axial extent of the lens component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    645,    for eyepieces having three components.

    651,    for projection type field curvature shaping lenses having less than
    four components.

    661,    for microscope objective having less than four components.

    682,    for variable magnification reverse telephoto having seven or less
    components.

    735,    for three component multiple component lenses with a  reflecting
    element.

    748,    for a telephoto lens having less than four components.

    753,    for wide angle lenses having five or less components.

    754,    for multiple component  lens systems generally.

    784,    for multiple component lenses having three components.


CLS 359/717
TXT Having two components:

    Subject matter under subclass 708 wherein the lens comprises two sections
    (i.e., components), each containing two refractive surfaces arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in
    alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and their
    axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical axis that
    parallel light rays upon entering and passing through all of such
    components are refracted to a focus no more than one time.

    (1)     Note.  The term "component" as applied to a lens designates either
    (1) a single transparent mass of refractive material having two opposed
    refracting surfaces or (2) a grouped plurality of such masses arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
    surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with
    the spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into the
    lens computations.


    (2)     Note.  The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising a
    single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of a "component"
    comprising a plurality of masses have at least a portion thereof axially
    air-spaced from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present
    in the lens.

    (3)     Note.  The axial dimension of the air-spacing between either the
    opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the axially extreme
    surfaces of the "component" grouped plurality of masses, and the other
    adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
    sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in order to limit
    the axial extent of the lens component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    646,    for eyepieces having two components.

    651,    for projection type field curvature shaping lenses having less than
    four components.

    661,    for microscope objective having less than four components.

    682,    for variable magnification reverse telephoto having seven or less
    components.

    736,    for two component multiple component lenses with a reflecting
    element.

    748,    for a telephoto lens having less than four components.

    753,    for wide angle lenses having five or less components.

    754,    for multiple component  lens systems generally.

    793,    for multiple component lenses having two components.


CLS 359/718
TXT Having one component:

    Subject matter under subclass 708 wherein the lens comprises one section
    (i.e., component), containing two refractive surfaces arranged in series
    along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in alignment
    thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and their axially extreme
    refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical axis that parallel light
    rays upon entering and passing through all of such component is refracted
    to a focus no more than one time.

    (1)     Note.  The term "component" as applied to a lens designates either
    (1) a single transparent mass of refractive material having two opposed
    refracting surfaces or (2) a grouped plurality of such masses arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
    surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with
    the spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into the
    lens computations.


    (2)     Note.  The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising a
    single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of a "component"
    comprising a plurality of masses have at least a portion thereof axially
    air-spaced from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present
    in the lens.

    (3)     Note.  The axial dimension of the air-spacing between either the
    opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the axially extreme
    surfaces of the "component" grouped plurality of masses, and the other
    adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
    sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in order to limit
    the axial extent of the lens component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    647,    for eyepieces having one component.

    651,    for projection type field curvature shaping lenses having less than
    four components.

    661,    for microscope objective having less than four components.

    682,    for variable magnification reverse telephoto having seven or less
    components.

    726+,   for a single component lens with a reflecting element.

    748,    for a telephoto lens having less than four components.

    753,    for wide angle lenses having five or less components.

    796,    for a single component lens with multiple elements.


CLS 359/719
TXT Objective for laser (e.g., optical disc, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 718 wherein the lens component is used in
    conjunction with a laser.


CLS 359/720
TXT Asymmetric (e.g., prismatic or eccentric, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 642 wherein the center of mass of the lens is
    laterally spaced from the optical axis of the lens.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for both prismatic lenses which have
    at least one component formed with a wedge prism or the equivalent thereof
    between its opposed refracting surfaces, and eccentric lenses in which at
    least one component is formed as a segment of a symmetrical lens.

    (2)     Note.  A substantial portion of the lenses under this definition
    are for mounting on automobile windshields to facilitate viewing of traffic
    lights by the operator of the automobile.


CLS 359/721
TXT Plural focal length:

    Subject matter under subclass 642 wherein the lens has a plurality of light
    transmitting zones or areas of different focal lengths.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter includes the lens plus means to exclude
    light from passing through certain areas or zones while permitting light to
    pass through other zones or areas of the lens whereby a selection of focal
    length is provided.

    (2)     Note.  See subclass 745 - (2) Note for the definition of focal
    length.


CLS 359/722
TXT Selective wavelength transmitting or blocking:

    Subject matter under subclass 642 where the lens or structure combined with
    the lens exhibits spectrally differential transmission.

    (1)     Note.  In the lenses of this and the indented subclass the means
    which gives the lens its particular light-transmitting properties may be
    either an integral part of the lens, i.e., the particular material from
    which the lens and the components are made, or a separate plate having
    opposed parallel plane surface disposed transversely of the optical axis of
    the lens, such plate being formed of a material which favors or hinders
    light transmission in a selected area of the spectrum more than it does in
    any other area of the spectrum.

    (2)     Note.  The term spectrum as employed in this definition refers to
    light having wavelengths between 3850 and 7600 angstrom units, that is,
    visible light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    350+,   for lenses having significant characteristics in the infrared or
    ultraviolet spectrum.

    885+,   for light filters, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correction, subclass 163
    for spectacle lenses with light-filtering means.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 317 for refractors in the form of lenses not
    otherwise classified.


CLS 359/723
TXT With separate filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 722 including a specific differentiating
    structure distinct from the lens elements.


CLS 359/724
TXT Annular zonal correcting:

    Subject matter under subclass 642 wherein the lens comprises one or more
    annular components which are used either to correct aberrations present in
    an annular zone of the lens or of another lens or to increase the depth of
    focus of either lens.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for both the combination of the lens
    being corrected and its annular correcting lens for the annular correcting
    lens, per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    741,    for lenses with multipart elements.


CLS 359/725
TXT Panoramic:

    Subject matter under subclass 642 wherein the lens is capable of receiving
    light rays from the entire horizon simultaneously and producing from such
    rays a single image of the entire horizon.

    (1)     Note.  The lens must be capable of receiving light rays from all
    portions of the entire horizon simultaneously.  See this class, subclass
    726 for lenses combined with a reflecting means for sequentially directing
    rays from fractional portions of the horizon through the lens, but which
    cannot receive rays from the entire horizon simultaneously.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    504,    for lenses maintained in an extended spacing structure to provide a
    wide field of view.

    749     and 754, for lenses having a particularly wide field of view, but
    less than the requirement of the above definition.


CLS 359/726
TXT With reflecting element:

    Subject matter under subclass 642 wherein the lens system includes a
    reflective surface transverse to the light path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    503+,   for extended spacing structure employing diverse refractive and
    reflective elements.


CLS 359/727
TXT Including concave or convex reflecting surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 726 wherein the lens system includes a
    transparent refractive element and a curved reflective surface which coact
    to provide a single lens of both refractive and reflective components,
    i.e., a catadioptric lens.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    364+,   for lenses having both refracting and reflecting components
    combined with an ocular or viewing system.

    838,    for reflectors and reflecting systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 744+ for catadioptric lenses combined with
    cathode-ray tubes.

    396,    Photography, appropriate subclasses for catadioptric lenses
    combined with significant camera structure.


CLS 359/728
TXT With aspheric surface (e.g., Schmidt lens, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 727 in which one of the refracting or
    reflecting surfaces departs from the spherical shape (e.g., a Schmidt type
    lens).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    364+,   for catadioptric lenses combined with an ocular or viewing system.

    708+,   for other aspheric-type lens.


CLS 359/729
TXT With concave and convex reflectors in series:

    Subject matter under subclass 728 where the lens system includes both
    concave and convex reflecting elements consecutively receiving light.


CLS 359/730
TXT Reflectors in series:

    Subject matter under subclass 727 where the lens system includes a second
    reflector receiving light rays reflected by a first reflector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    503+,   for extended spacing structure employing diverse refractive and
    reflective elements.


CLS 359/731
TXT With concave and convex reflectors in series:

    Subject matter under subclass 730 where the lens system includes both
    concave and convex reflecting elements consecutively receiving light.


CLS 359/732
TXT For producing a double pass:

    Subject matter under subclass 726 where a reflective surface mirror
    reflects light which has passed through a lens back through the same lens.


CLS 359/733
TXT Multiple component lenses:

    Subject matter under subclass 726 wherein the lens comprises multiple
    sections (i.e., components), each containing two refractive surfaces
    arranged in series along the optical axis of the lens with their optical
    centers in alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and
    their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical axis
    that parallel light rays upon entering and passing through all of such
    components are refracted to a focus no more than one time.

    (1)     Note.  The term "component" as applied to a lens designates either
    (1) a single transparent mass of refractive material having two opposed
    refracting surfaces or (2) a grouped plurality of such masses arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
    surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with
    the spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into the
    lens computations.


    (2)     Note.  The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising a
    single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of a "component"
    comprising a plurality of masses have at least a portion thereof axially
    air-spaced from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present
    in the lens.

    (3)     Note.  The axial dimension of the air-spacing between either the
    opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the axially extreme
    surfaces of the "component" grouped plurality of masses, and the other
    adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
    sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in order to limit
    the axial extent of the lens component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    643+,   for eyepieces having multiple components.

    648+,   for projection type field curvature shaping lens having multiple
    components.

    656+,   for microscope objective having multiple components.

    680+,   for reverse telephoto lens of variable focal lengths.

    708+,   for a nonspherical lens having multiple components.

    745+,   for telephoto lens having multiple components.

    749+,   for reverse telephoto lens having multiple components.

    754+,   for multiple component lens systems generally.


CLS 359/734
TXT Four components:

    Subject matter under subclass 733 wherein the lens comprises four  sections
    (i.e., components), each containing two refractive surfaces arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in
    alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and their
    axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical axis that
    parallel light rays upon entering and passing through all of such
    components are refracted to a focus no more than one time.

    (1)     Note.  The term "component" as applied to a lens designates either
    (1) a single transparent mass of refractive material having two opposed
    refracting surfaces or (2) a grouped plurality of such masses arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
    surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with
    the spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into the
    lens computations.


    (2)     Note.  The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising a
    single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of a "component"
    comprising a plurality of masses have at least a portion thereof axially
    air-spaced from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present
    in the lens.

    (3)     Note.  The axial dimension of the air-spacing between either the
    opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the axially extreme
    surfaces of the "component" grouped plurality of masses, and the other
    adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
    sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in order to limit
    the axial extent of the lens component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    644,    for eyepieces having four components.

    650,    for projection type field curvature shaping lenses having four
    components.

    660,    for microscope objective having four components.

    682,    for variable magnification reverse telephoto having seven or less
    components.

    715,    for nonspherical lens system having four components.

    747,    for a telephoto lens having four components.

    753,    for wide angle lenses having five or less components.

    754,    for multiple component  lens systems generally.

    771,    for multiple component lenses having four components.


CLS 359/735
TXT Three components:

    Subject matter under subclass 733 wherein the lens comprises  three
    sections (i.e., components), each containing two refractive surfaces
    arranged in series along the optical axis of the lens with their optical
    centers in alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and
    their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical axis
    that parallel light rays upon entering and passing through all of such
    components are refracted to a focus no more than one time.

    (1)     Note.  The term "component" as applied to a lens designates either
    (1) a single transparent mass of refractive material having two opposed
    refracting surfaces or (2) a grouped plurality of such masses arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
    surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with
    the spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into the
    lens computations.


    (2)     Note.  The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising a
    single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of a "component"
    comprising a plurality of masses have at least a portion thereof axially
    air-spaced from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present
    in the lens.

    (3)     Note.  The axial dimension of the air-spacing between either the
    opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the axially extreme
    surfaces of the "component" grouped plurality of masses, and the other
    adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
    sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in order to limit
    the axial extent of the lens component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    645,    for eyepieces having three components.

    651,    for projection type field curvature shaping lenses having less than
    four components.

    661,    for microscope objective having less than four components.

    682,    for variable magnification reverse telephoto having seven or less
    components.

    716,    for nonspherical lens system having three components.

    748,    for a telephoto lens having less than four components.

    753,    for wide angle lenses having five or less components.

    754,    for multiple component  lens systems generally.

    784,    for multiple component lenses having three components.


CLS 359/736
TXT Two components:

    Subject matter under subclass 733 wherein the lens comprises two  sections
    (i.e., components), each containing two refractive surfaces arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in
    alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and their
    axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical axis that
    parallel light rays upon entering and passing through all of such
    components are refracted to a focus no more than one time.

    (1)     Note.  The term "component" as applied to a lens designates either
    (1) a single transparent mass of refractive material having two opposed
    refracting surfaces or (2) a grouped plurality of such masses arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
    surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with
    the spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into the
    lens computations.


    (2)     Note.  The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising a
    single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of a "component"
    comprising a plurality of masses have at least a portion thereof axially
    air-spaced from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present
    in the lens.

    (3)     Note.  The axial dimension of the air-spacing between either the
    opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the axially extreme
    surfaces of the "component" grouped plurality of masses, and the other
    adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
    sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in order to limit
    the axial extent of the lens component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    646,    for eyepieces having two components.

    651,    for projection type field curvature shaping lenses having less than
    four components.

    661,    for microscope objective having less than four components.

    682,    for variable magnification reverse telephoto having seven or less
    components.

    717,    for nonspherical lens system having two components.

    748,    for a telephoto lens having less than four components.

    753,    for wide angle lenses having five or less components.

    754,    for multiple component  lens systems generally.

    793,    for multiple component lenses having two components.


CLS 359/737
TXT With diverse refracting element:

    Subject matter under subclass 642 wherein the lens is combined with a
    nonlens light-refracting element through which element the light must pass
    during the normal operation of the lens.

    (1)     Note.  The refracting element is employed to redirect the optical
    axis of the lens (e.g., prisms).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    503+,   for extended spacing structure employing diverse refractive light
    deflectors.

    669,    for amorphous refracting elements in the form of prisms.


CLS 359/738
TXT With light limiting or controlling means:

    Subject matter under subclass 642 comprising the combination of a lens and
    means associated therewith to limit or control, without regard to
    wavelength, the amount of intensity of the light that passes through the
    lens.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter under this definition includes lamina
    between lens elements, coatings on the faces of elements, and pigment in
    the material of the lens elements themselves, all of which do not favor the
    transmission of any one particular wavelength of light over any other
    wavelength present in the light.

    (2)     Note.  This class (359) provides for optical diaphragms and
    shutters, per se, in subclasses 227+.  Lenses combined with shutters
    generally are provided for in subclass 738 and lens combined with
    diaphragms generally are in indented subclass 739.  However, camera
    shutters and diaphragms, per se, are classified in Class 396, Photography,
    subclasses 452+ and 505+ respectively, the indicated use in cameras or
    camera background being sufficient for classification there as opposed to
    Class 359.  Class 396 also provides for lenses broadly or specifically
    combined with camera shutter or diaphragm details, it being emphasized that
    such combinations involving noncamera shutters or diaphragms are classified
    in subclasses 738+ of this class (359) as indicated above.  The combination
     of a  lens broadly or specifically claimed and a camera shutter or
    diaphragm broadly claimed (as well as shutters or diaphragms generally) are
    classified in this subclass (738).  Projectors with  shutters or diaphragms
    are provided for in Class 353, Optics:  Image Projectors, subclasses 75,
    88+, and 97.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227+,   for means to control the intensity or amount of light that passes
    along a certain path.  See also (2) Note above.

    611,    for barrel end or lens mount shade to prevent glare or to reduce
    unwanted nonimaging light.

    722,    for a lens with means which favors the transmission or blocking of
    particular wavelengths of light.

    888,    for means to control the density of light flow through a
    predetermined area without regard to the wavelength of the light.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, subclasses 88+ for an image projector
    having a shutter.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 452+ for camera shutters, and see (2) Note
    above.


CLS 359/739
TXT Diaphragm:

    Subject matter under subclass 738 in which the light-controlling means is
    in the form of an opaque screen having a variable aperture therein, such
    screen being disposed in the path of the light beam passing through the
    lens in such a position axially of the lens to either restrict the amount
    of light that reaches the lens or restrict the amount of light transmitted
    by the lens.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter under this definition includes opaque
    screens in which the aperture is of annular shape and located either within
    the screen or at the periphery thereof.

    (2)     Note.  Mere recitation of a diaphragm is inadequate for
    classification here.  This subclass and subclass 740 are limited to special
    shapes or locations of diaphragms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, subclasses 75 and 97 for an image
    projector having a diaphragm.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 505+ for camera diaphragms, and see (2)
    Note above.


CLS 359/740
TXT Between lens components:

    Subject matter under subclass 739 wherein the diaphragm is located between
    components of the lens.


CLS 359/741
TXT With multipart element:

    Subject matter under subclass 642 wherein a lens element is formed of a
    plurality of elements arranged side by side, transverse to the optical
    axis, and cooperating to form a single image.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter under this definition differs from the
    subject matter provided for in subclasses 754+ in that the various parts of
    the component or element in subclasses 754+ are in series along the optical
    axis of the component or element, while the various parts of the component
    or element of this subclass are in edge to edge relation, transversely of
    the optical axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    619+    for lenticular lenses where each element forms a spatially separate
    image of a single element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 698 for lenses employed in solar
    heating.


CLS 359/742
TXT Echelon (e.g., Fresnel lens, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 741 wherein at least one of the refracting
    surfaces of the lens is discontinuous, being formed of a plurality of
    stepped refracting surfaces connecting at their adjacent edges by other
    surfaces which extend substantially parallel to the intended direction of
    light travel through the lens, the surfaces being so shaped and arranged
    that they form in conjunction with the opposed refracting surface of the
    lens, a plurality of lenses all of which have a common focus.


CLS 359/743
TXT Having curvilinear lens:

    Subject matter under subclass 742 wherein the general shape of the lens
    surface is concave or convex on either side or on both sides.


CLS 359/744
TXT Afocal (e.g., Galilean telescopes, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 642 wherein the components of the lens are so
    shaped and spaced along the optical axis of the lens that the total
    refracting power of the lens is zero, i.e., parallel light rays,  upon
    entering the lens and passing through all components thereof are so
    refracted that they emerge from the lens as parallel rays.

    (1)     Note.  These lenses may be attachments to be used with other lenses
    to change the equivalent focal lengths of the latter lenses.


CLS 359/745
TXT Telephoto:

    Subject matter under subclass 642 wherein the lens is designed with the
    effective focal length equal to or greater than the distance from the first
    refracting surface to the focal plane.

    (1)     Note.  This lens system is physically shorter than its rated focal
    length.

    (2)     Note.  The focal length is the distance from the principle focus
    (focus of parallel rays of light) to the surface of a mirror or the optical
    center of a lens.

    (3)     Note.  A focal point is the point at which a lens or mirror will
    focus parallel incident radiation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    643+,   for eyepieces.

    648+,   for projection type field curvature shaping lens.

    656+,   for microscope objective.

    672,    for selective magnification.

    676,    for variable magnification.

    680+,   for reverse telephoto lens.

    708+,   for a nonspherical lens.

    733+,   for multiple component lenses having a reflecting element.

    749+,   for reverse telephoto lens.

    754+,   for multiple component lens systems generally.


CLS 359/746
TXT With five components:

    Subject matter under subclass 745 wherein the lens comprises five sections
    (i.e., components), each containing two refractive surfaces arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in
    alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and their
    axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical axis that
    parallel light rays upon entering and passing through all of such
    components are refracted to a focus no more than one time.

    (1)     Note.  The term "component" as applied to a lens designates either
    (1) a single transparent mass of refractive material having two opposed
    refracting surfaces or (2) a grouped plurality of such masses arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
    surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with
    the spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into the
    lens computations.


    (2)     Note.  The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising a
    single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of a "component"
    comprising a plurality of masses have at least a portion thereof axially
    air-spaced from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present
    in the lens.

    (3)     Note.  The axial dimension of the air-spacing between either the
    opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the axially extreme
    surfaces of the "component" grouped plurality of masses, and the other
    adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
    sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in order to limit
    the axial extent of the lens component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    643,    for eyepieces having more than four components.

    648,    for projection type field curvature shaping lenses having more than
    four components.

    659,    for microscope objectives having five components.

    682,    for variable magnification reverse telephoto having seven or less
    components.

    714,    for nonspherical surface lens system having five components.

    733,    for more than four multiple component lenses with a reflecting
    element.

    753,    for wide angle lenses having five or less components.

    754,    for multiple component lens systems generally.

    763,    for multiple component lenses having five components.


CLS 359/747
TXT With four components:

    Subject matter under subclass 745 wherein the lens comprises four sections
    (i.e., components), each containing two refractive surfaces arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in
    alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and their
    axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical axis that
    parallel light rays upon entering and passing through all of such
    components are refracted to a focus no more than one time.

    (1)     Note.  The term "component" as applied to a lens designates either
    (1) a single transparent mass of refractive material having two opposed
    refracting surfaces or (2) a grouped plurality of such masses arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
    surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with
    the spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into the
    lens computations.


    (2)     Note.  The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising a
    single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of a "component"
    comprising a plurality of masses have at least a portion thereof axially
    air-spaced from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present
    in the lens.

    (3)     Note.  The axial dimension of the air-spacing between either the
    opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the axially extreme
    surfaces of the "component" grouped plurality of masses, and the other
    adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
    sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in order to limit
    the axial extent of the lens component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    644,    for eyepieces having four components.

    650,    for projection type field curvature shaping lenses having four
    components.

    660,    for microscope objective having four components.

    682,    for variable magnification reverse telephoto having seven or less
    components.

    715,    for nonspherical lens system having four components.

    734,    for four component multiple compo-nent lenses with a reflecting
    element.

    753,    for wide angle lenses having five or less components.

    754,    for multiple component  lens systems generally.

    771,    for multiple component lenses having four components.


CLS 359/748
TXT With less than four components:

    Subject matter under subclass 745 wherein the lens comprises less than four
    sections (i.e., components), each containing two refractive surfaces
    arranged in series along the optical axis of the lens with their optical
    centers in alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and
    their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical axis
    that parallel light rays upon entering and passing through all of such
    components are refracted to a focus no more than one time.

    (1)     Note.  The term "component" as applied to a lens designates either
    (1) a single transparent mass of refractive material having two opposed
    refracting surfaces or (2) a grouped plurality of such masses arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
    surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with
    the spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into the
    lens computations.


    (2)     Note.  The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising a
    single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of a "component"
    comprising a plurality of masses have at least a portion thereof axially
    air-spaced from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present
    in the lens.

    (3)     Note.  The axial dimension of the air-spacing between either the
    opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the axially extreme
    surfaces of the "component" grouped plurality of masses, and the other
    adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
    sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in order to limit
    the axial extent of the lens component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    645+,   for eyepieces having three or less components.

    651,    for projection type field curvature shaping lenses having less than
    four components.

    661,    for microscope objective having less than four components.

    682,    for variable magnification reverse telephoto having seven or less
    components.

    716+,   for nonspherical lens system having three or less components.

    735+,   for three or less component multiple component lenses with a
    reflecting element.

    753,    for wide angle lenses having five or less components.

    754,    for multiple component  lens systems generally.

    784+,   for multiple component lenses having three or less components.

    796,    for a single component lens with multiple elements.


CLS 359/749
TXT Reverse telephoto:

    Subject matter under subclass 642 wherein the lens is designed with the
    effective focal length equal to or less than the distance from the last
    refracting surface to the focal plane, i.e., the back focal length is equal
    to or greater than the effective focal length.

    (1)     Note.  This is also known as a retrofocus lens and it consists of
    an ordinary objective with a negative component near its focal point, thus
    forming a large back focus relative to its focal length.

    (2)     Note.  The focal length is the distance from the principle focus
    (focus of parallel rays of light) to the surface of a mirror or the optical
    center of a lens.

    (3)     Note.  A focal point is the point at which a lens or mirror will
    focus parallel incident radiation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    643+,   for eyepieces.

    648+,   for projection type field curvature shaping lens.

    656+,   for microscope objective.

    680+,   for reverse telephoto lens of variable focal lengths.

    708+,   for a nonspherical lens.

    733+,   for multiple component lenses having a reflecting element.

    745+,   for telephoto lens.

    754+,   for multiple component lens systems generally.


CLS 359/750
TXT With eight components:

    Subject matter under subclass 749 wherein the lens comprises eight sections
    (i.e., components), each containing two refractive surfaces arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in
    alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and their
    axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical axis that
    parallel light rays upon entering and passing through all of such
    components are refracted to a focus no more than one time.

     (1)    Note.  The term "component" as applied to a lens designates either
    (1) a single transparent mass of refractive material having two opposed
    refracting surfaces or (2) a grouped plurality of such masses arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
    surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with
    the spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into the
    lens computations.


    (2)     Note.  The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising a
    single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of a "component"
    comprising a plurality of masses have at least a portion thereof axially
    air-spaced from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present
    in the lens.

    (3)     Note.  The axial dimension of the air-spacing between either the
    opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the axially extreme
    surfaces of the "component" grouped plurality of masses, and the other
    adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
    sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in order to limit
    the axial extent of the lens component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    643,    for eyepieces having more than four components.

    648,    for projection type field curvature shaping lenses having more than
    four components.

    656,    for microscope objective having more than seven components.

    681,    for variable magnification reverse telephoto having eight
    components.

    708,    for nonspherical surface variable magnification lenses having more
    than six components.

    733,    for more than four multiple component lenses with a reflecting
    element.

    745,    for telephoto lenses having more than five components.

    754,    for more than seven multiple component lenses.


CLS 359/751
TXT With seven components:

    Subject matter under subclass 749 wherein the lens comprises seven sections
    (i.e., components), each containing two refractive surfaces arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in
    alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such, axis and their
    axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical axis that
    parallel light rays upon entering and passing through all of such
    components are refracted to a focus no more than one time.

    (1)     Note.  The term "component" as applied to a lens designates either
    (1) a single transparent mass of refractive material having two opposed
    refracting surfaces or (2) a grouped plurality of such masses arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
    surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with
    the spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into the
    lens computations.


    (2)     Note.  The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising a
    single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of a "component"
    comprising a plurality of masses have at least a portion thereof axially
    air-spaced from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present
    in the lens.

    (3)     Note.  The axial dimension of the air-spacing between either the
    opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the axially extreme
    surfaces of the "component" grouped plurality of masses, and the other
    adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
    sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in order to limit
    the axial extent of the lens component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    643,    for eyepieces having more than four components.

    648,    for projection type field curvature shaping lenses having more than
    four components.

    657,    for microscope objectives having seven components.

    682,    for variable magnification reverse telephoto having seven or less
    components.

    708,    for nonspherical surface variable magnification lenses having more
    than six components.

    733,    for more than four multiple component lenses with a reflecting
    element.

    745,    for telephoto lenses having more than five components.

    755,    for multiple component lenses having seven components.


CLS 359/752
TXT With six components:

    Subject matter under subclass 749 wherein the lens comprises six sections
    (i.e., components), each containing two refractive surfaces arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in
    alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and their
    axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical axis that
    parallel light rays upon entering and passing through all of such
    components are refracted to a focus no more than one time.

    (1)     Note.  The term "component" as applied to a lens designates either
    (1) a single transparent mass of refractive material having two opposed
    refracting surfaces or (2) a grouped plurality of such masses arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
    surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with
    the spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into the
    lens computations.


    (2)     Note.  The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising a
    single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of a "component"
    comprising a plurality of masses have at least a portion thereof axially
    air-spaced from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present
    in the lens.

     (3)    Note.  The axial dimension of the air-spacing between either the
    opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the axially extreme
    surfaces of the "component" grouped plurality of masses, and the other
    adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
    sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in order to limit
    the axial extent of the lens component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    643,    for eyepieces having more than four components.

    648,    for projection type field curvature shaping lenses having more than
    four components.

    658,    for microscope objectives having six components.

    682,    for variable magnification reverse telephoto having seven or less
    components.

    713,    for nonspherical surface lens system having six components.

    733,    for more than four multiple component lenses with a reflecting
    element.

    745,    for telephoto lenses having more than five components.

    754,    for multiple component lens systems generally.

    756,    for multiple component lens having six components.


CLS 359/753
TXT With five or less components:

    Subject matter under subclass 749 wherein the lens comprises five or less
    sections (i.e., components), each containing two refractive surfaces
    arranged in series along the optical axis of the lens with their optical
    centers in alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and
    their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical axis
    that parallel light rays upon entering and passing through all of such
    components are refracted to a focus no more than one time.

    (1)     Note.  The term "component" as applied to a lens designates either
    (1) a single transparent mass of refractive material having two opposed
    refracting surfaces or (2) a grouped plurality of such masses arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
    surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with
    the spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into the
    lens computations.


    (2)     Note.  The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising a
    single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of a "component"
    comprising a plurality of masses have at least a portion thereof axially
    air-spaced from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present
    in the lens.

    (3)     Note.  The axial dimension of the air-spacing between either the
    opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the axially extreme
    surfaces of the "component" grouped plurality of masses, and the other
    adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
    sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in order to limit
    the axial extent of the lens component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    643+,   for eyepieces having five or less components.

    648+,   for projection type field curvature shaping lenses having five or
    less compo-nents.

    659+,   for microscope objectives having five or less components.

    682+,   for variable magnification reverse tele-photo having five or less
    components.

    714+,   for nonspherical surface lens system having five or less components.

    733+,   for five or less multiple component lenses with a reflecting
    element.

    746+,   for telephoto lenses having five or less components.

    753,    for wide angle lenses having five or less components.

    754,    for multiple component lens systems generally.

    763+,   for multiple component lenses having five or less components.

    796,    for a single component lens with multiple elements.


CLS 359/754
TXT Multiple component lenses:

    Subject matter under subclass 642 wherein the lens comprises multiple
    sections (i.e., components), each containing two refractive surfaces
    arranged in series along the optical axis of the lens with their optical
    centers in alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and
    their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical axis
    that parallel light rays upon entering and passing through all of such
    components are refracted to a focus no more than one time.

    (1)     Note.  The term "component" as applied to a lens designates either
    (1) a single transparent mass of refractive material having two opposed
    refracting surfaces or (2) a grouped plurality of such masses arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
    surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with
    the spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into the
    lens computations.


    (2)     Note.  The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising a
    single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of a "component"
    comprising a plurality of masses have at least a portion thereof axially
    air-spaced from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present
    in the lens.

    (3)     Note.  The axial dimension of the air-spacing between either the
    opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the axially extreme
    surfaces of the "component" grouped plurality of masses, and the other
    adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
    sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in order to limit
    the axial extent of the lens component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    643+,   for eyepieces having multiple components.

    648+,   for projection type field curvature shaping lens having multiple
    components.

    656+,   for microscope objective having multi-ple components.

    680+,   for reverse telephoto lens of variable focal length.

    708+,   for a nonspherical lens having multiple components.

    733+,   for multiple component lenses having a reflecting element.

    745+,   for telephoto lens having multiple components.

    749+,   for reverse telephoto lens having multiple components.


CLS 359/755
TXT Seven components:

    Subject matter under subclass 754 wherein the lens comprises seven sections
    (i.e., components), each containing two refractive surfaces arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in
    alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and their
    axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical axis that
    parallel light rays upon entering and passing through all of such
    components are refracted to a focus no more than one time.

    (1)     Note.  The term "component" as applied to a lens designates either
    (1) a single transparent mass of refractive material having two opposed
    refracting surfaces or (2) a grouped plurality of such masses arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
    surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with
    the spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into the
    lens computations.


    (2)     Note.  The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising a
    single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of a "component"
    comprising a plurality of masses have at least a portion thereof axially
    air-spaced from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present
    in the lens.

    (3)     Note.  The axial dimension of the air-spacing between either the
    opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the axially extreme
    surfaces of the "component" grouped plurality of masses, and the other
    adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
    sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in order to limit
    the axial extent of the lens component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    643,    for eyepieces having more than four components.

    648,    for projection type field curvature shaping lenses having more than
    four com-ponents.

    657,    for microscope objectives having seven components.

    682,    for variable magnification reverse tele-photo having seven or less
    components.

    708,    for nonspherical surface variable magnification lenses having more
    than six components.

    733,    for more than four multiple component lenses with a reflecting
    element.

    745,    for telephoto lenses having more than five components.

    751,    for wide angle lenses having seven components.


CLS 359/756
TXT Six components:

    Subject matter under subclass 754 wherein the lens comprises six sections
    (i.e., components), each containing two refractive surfaces arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in
    alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and their
    axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical axis that
    parallel light rays upon entering and passing through all of such
    components are refracted to a focus no more than one time.

    (1)     Note.  The term "component" as applied to a lens designates either
    (1) a single transparent mass of refractive material having two opposed
    refracting surfaces or (2) a grouped plurality of such masses arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
    surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with
    the spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into the
    lens computations.


    (2)     Note.  The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising a
    single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of a "component"
    comprising a plurality of masses have at least a portion thereof axially
    air-spaced from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present
    in the lens.

    (3)     Note.  The axial dimension of the air-spacing between either the
    opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the axially extreme
    surfaces of the "component" grouped plurality of masses, and the other
    adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
    sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in order to limit
    the axial extent of the lens component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    643,    for eyepieces having more than four components.

    648,    for projection type field curvature shaping lenses having more than
    four components.

    658,    for microscope objectives having six components.

    682,    for variable magnification reverse telephoto having seven or less
    components.

    713,    for nonspherical surface lens system having six components.

    733,    for more than four multiple component lenses with a reflecting
    element.

    745,    for telephoto lenses having more than five components.

    752,    for wide angle lenses having six components.

    754,    for multiple component lens systems generally.


CLS 359/757
TXT First component positive:

    Subject matter under subclass 756 wherein the component at the entrant face
    of the lens, i.e., the first component hit by the light as the light begins
    travelling through the lens, is a convergent lens.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    757+,   for a multiple component lens having six components wherein the
    first component is positive (i.e., convergent).

    759+,   for a multiple component lens having six components wherein the
    first two components are positive(i.e., conver-gent).

    764+,   for a multiple component lens having five components wherein the
    first componset is positive (i.e., convergent).

    767+,   for a multiple component lens having five components wherein the
    first two components are positive (i.e., convergent).

    772+,   for a multiple component lens having four components wherein the
    first two components are positive (i.e., conver-gent).


CLS 359/758
TXT + - + + - + Arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 757 wherein the plus and minus signs indicate
    convergent and divergent lens components, respectively.

    (1)     Note.  The arrangement along the optical axis of the lens is
    identified by the left most sign representing the component at the entrant
    face of the lens, i.e., the direction of light travelling through the lens
    is the same as the reading arrangement of the subclass title.


CLS 359/759
TXT First two components positive:

    Subject matter under subclass 757 wherein the first two components at the
    entrant face of the lens, i.e., the first two components hit by the light
    as the light begins travelling through the lens, are convergent lenses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    757+,   for a multiple component lens having six components wherein the
    first com-ponent is positive (i.e., convergent).

    764+,   for a multiple component lens having five components wherein the
    first component is positive (i.e., convergent).

    767+,   for a multiple component lens having five components wherein the
    first two components are positive (i.e., convergent).

    772+,   for a multiple component lens having four components wherein the
    first two components are positive (i.e., convergent).


CLS 359/760
TXT + + - - + + Arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 759 wherein the plus and minus signs indicate
    convergent and divergent lens components, respectively.

    (1)     Note.  The arrangement along the optical axis of the lens is
    identified by the leftmost sign representing the component at the entrant
    face of the lens, i.e., the direction of light travelling through the lens
    is the same as the reading arrangement of the subclass title.


CLS 359/761
TXT First component negative:

    Subject matter under subclass 756 wherein the first component at the
    entrant face of the lens, i.e., the first component hit by the light as the
    light begins travelling through the lens, is divergent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    770,    for a multiple component lens having five components wherein the
    first com-ponent is negative.

    781+,   for a multiple component lens having four components wherein the
    first component is negative.


CLS 359/762
TXT First two components negative:

    Subject matter under subclass 761 wherein the first two components at the
    entrant face of the lens, i.e., the first two components hit by the light
    as the light begins travelling through the lens, are divergent lenses.


CLS 359/763
TXT Five components:

    Subject matter under subclass 754 wherein the lens comprises five sections
    (i.e., components), each containing two refractive surfaces arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in
    alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and their
    axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical axis that
    parallel light rays upon entering and passing through all of such
    components are refracted to a focus no more than one time.

    (1)     Note.  The term "component" as applied to a lens designates either
    (1) a single transparent mass of refractive material having two opposed
    refracting surfaces or (2) a grouped plurality of such masses arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
    surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with
    the spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into the
    lens computations.


    (2)     Note.  The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising a
    single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of a "component"
    comprising a plurality of masses have at least a portion thereof axially
    air-spaced from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present
    in the lens.

    (3)     Note.  The axial dimension of the air-spacing between either the
    opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the axially extreme
    surfaces of the "component" grouped plurality of masses, and the other
    adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
    sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in order to limit
    the axial extent of the lens component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    643,    for eyepieces having more than four components.

    648,    for projection type field curvature shaping lenses having more than
    four components.

    659,    for microscope objectives having five components.

    682,    for variable magnification reverse telephoto having seven or less
    components.

    714,    for nonspherical surface lens system having five components.

    733,    for more than four multiple component lenses with a reflecting
    element.

    746,    for telephoto lenses having five components.

    753,    for wide angle lenses having five or less components.

    754,    for multiple component lens systems generally.


CLS 359/764
TXT First component positive:

    Subject matter under subclass 763 wherein the component at the entrant face
    of the lens, i.e., the first component hit by the light as the light begins
    travelling through the lens, is a convergent lens.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    757+,   for a multiple component lens having six components wherein the
    first com-ponent is positive (i.e., convergent).

    759+,   for a multiple component lens having six components wherein the
    first two components are positive (i.e., conver-gent).

    767+,   for a multiple component lens having five components wherein the
    first two components are positive (i.e., conver-gent).

    772+,   for a multiple component lens having four components wherein the
    first two components are positive (i.e., conver-gent).


CLS 359/765
TXT + - - + +Arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 764 wherein the plus and minus signs indicate
    convergent and divergent lens components, respectively.

    (1)     Note.  The arrangement along the optical axis of the lens is
    identified by the leftmost sign representing the component at the entrant
    face of the lens, i.e., the direction of light travelling through the lens
    is the same as the reading arrangement of the subclass title.


CLS 359/766
TXT + - + - + Arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 764 wherein the plus and minus signs indicate
    convergent and divergent lens components, respectively.

    (1)     Note.  The arrangement along the optical axis of the lens is
    identified by the leftmost sign representing the component at the entrant
    face of the lens, i.e., the direction of light travelling through the lens
    is the same as the reading arrangement of the subclass title.


CLS 359/767
TXT First two components positive:

    Subject matter under subclass 764 wherein the first two components at the
    entrant face of the lens, i.e., the first two components hit by the light
    as the light begins travelling through the lens, are convergent lenses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    757+,   for a multiple component lens having six components wherein the
    first component is positive (i.e., convergent).

    759+,   for a multiple component lens having six components wherein the
    first two components are positive (i.e., conver-gent).

    764+,   for a multiple component lens having five components wherein the
    first component is positive (i.e., convergent).

    772+,   for a multiple component lens having four components wherein the
    first two components are positive (i.e., convergent).


CLS 359/768
TXT + + - - +Arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 767 wherein the plus and minus signs indicate
    convergent and divergent lens components, respectively.

    (1)     Note.  The arrangement along the optical axis of the lens is
    identified by the leftmost sign representing the component at the entrant
    face of the lens, i.e., the direction of light travelling through the lens
    is the same as the reading arrangement of the subclass title.


CLS 359/769
TXT + + - + + Arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 767 wherein the plus and minus signs indicate
    convergent and divergent lens components, respectively.

    (1)     Note.  The arrangement along the optical axis of the lens is
    identified by the leftmost sign representing the component at the entrant
    face of the lens, i.e., the direction of light travelling through the lens
    is the same as the reading arrangement of the subclass title.


CLS 359/770
TXT First component negative:

    Subject matter under subclass 763 wherein the first component at the
    entrant face of the lens, i.e., the first component hit by the light as the
    light begins travelling through the lens, is divergent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    761+,   for a multiple component lens having six components wherein the
    first component is negative.

    781+,   for a multiple component lens having four components wherein the
    first component is negative.


CLS 359/771
TXT Four components:

    Subject matter under subclass 754 wherein the lens comprises four sections
    (i.e., components), each containing two refractive surfaces, arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in
    alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis and their
    axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical axis that
    parallel light rays upon entering and passing through all of such
    components are refracted to a focus no more than one time.

    (1)     Note.  The term "component" as applied to a lens designates either
    (1) a single transparent mass of refractive material having two opposed
    refracting surfaces or (2) a grouped plurality of such masses arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
    surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with
    the spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into the
    lens computations.


    (2)     Note.  The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising a
    single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of a "component"
    comprising a plurality of masses have at least a portion thereof axially
    air-spaced from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present
    in the lens.

    (3)     Note.  The axial dimension of the air-spacing between either the
    opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the axially extreme
    surfaces of the "component" grouped plurality of masses, and the other
    adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
    sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in order to limit
    the axial extent of the lens component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    644,    for eyepieces having four components.

    650,    for projection type field curvature shaping lenses having four
    components.

    660,    for microscope objective having four components.

    682,    for variable magnification reverse telephoto having seven or less
    components.

    715,    for nonspherical lens system having four components.

    734,    for four component multiple component lenses with a reflecting
    element.

    747,    for a telephoto lens having four components.

    753,    for wide angle lenses having five or less components.

    754,    for multiple component  lens systems generally.


CLS 359/772
TXT First component positive:

    Subject matter under subclass 771 wherein the component at the entrant face
    of the lens, i.e., the first component hit by the light as the light begins
    travelling through the lens, is a convergent lens.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    757+,   for a multiple component lens having six components wherein the
    first component is positive (i.e., convergent).

    759+,   for a multiple component lens having six components wherein the
    first two components are positive (i.e., conver-gent).

    764+,   for a multiple component lens having five components wherein the
    first component is positive (i.e., convergent).

    767+,   for a multiple component lens having five components wherein the
    first two components are positive (i.e., conver-gent).


CLS 359/773
TXT + - + - Arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 772  wherein the plus and minus signs
    indicate convergent and divergent lens components, respectively.

    (1)     Note.  The arrangement along the optical axis of the lens is
    identified by the leftmost sign representing the component at  the entrant
    face of  the  lens,  i.e., the direction of light travelling through the
    lens is the same as the reading arrangement of the subclass title.


CLS 359/774
TXT + - + + Arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 772 wherein  the plus and minus signs
    indicate convergent and divergent lens components, respectively.

    (1)     Note.  The arrangement along the optical axis of the lens is
    identified by the leftmost sign representing the component at the entrant
    face of the lens,i.e., the direction of light travelling through the lens
    is the same as the reading arrangement of the subclass title.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    687,    for a + - + + arrangement in a mechanical compensation variable
    magnification lens.


CLS 359/775
TXT + - - + Arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 772  wherein the plus and minus signs
    indicate convergent and divergent lens components, respectively.

    (1)     Note.  The arrangement along the optical axis of the lens is
    identified by the leftmost sign representing the component at the entrant
    face of the lens,i.e., the direction of light travelling through the lens
    is the same as the reading arrangement of the subclass title.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    688,    for a + - - + arrangement in a mechanical compensation variable
    magnification lens.


CLS 359/776
TXT With multiple element component:

    Subject matter under subclass 775 wherein the lens comprises a single
    section (i.e., component) having a plurality of optical pieces (i.e.,
    elements) arranged in laminated series along the light path or optical axis
    of the lens with their adjacent refracting surfaces either in full overall
    contact or so closely spaced that such spacing does not enter into the lens
    computations.

    (1)     Note.  Each "component" contains two refractive surfaces, arranged
    in series along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in
    alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis and their
    axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical axis that
    parallel light rays upon entering and passing through all of such
    components are refracted to a focus no more than one time.

    (2)     Note.  The term "component" as applied to a lens designates either
    (1) a single transparent mass of refractive material having two opposed
    refracting surfaces or (2) a grouped plurality of such masses arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
    surfaces either in full overall contact, or in spaced parallel relation
    with the spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into
    the lens computations.


    (3)     Note.  The "component" two refracting surfaces of the single mass
    or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of the plurality of masses,
    have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced from all other adjacent
    refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens.

    (4)     Note.  The axial dimension of the air-spacing between either the
    opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the axially extreme
    surfaces of the "component" grouped plurality of masses, and the other
    adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
    sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in order to limit
    the axial extent of the lens component.

    (5)     Note.  The term "element" as applied to a lens designates any
    single transparent mass of refractive material having two opposed
    refracting surfaces, which surfaces are disposed transversely of the
    optical axis of the lens and spaced therealong, i.e., any one of the masses
    in the above component definition regardless of its spacing from adjacent
    refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    355,    for lenses constructed of materials that transmit ultraviolet and
    infrared light.

    724,    for lenses with annular zonal correcting elements.

    741,    for lenses with multipart elements or components.

    786,    for a three component multiple compo-nent lens wherein the first
    component contains multiple elements.

    787,    for a three component multiple compo-nent lens wherein the second
    compo-nent contains multiple elements.

    788,    for a three component multiple component lens wherein the third
    component contains multiple elements.

    796,    for a lens having a single component with multiple elements.

    797,    for a lens having a single component with three or more elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 37+ for processes of securing lens
    elements together.

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclass 159
    for opthalmic lenses or blanks.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 415, 417, and
    426+ for a nonstructural stock material product in the form of a composite
    web or sheet embodying a layer of glass or quartz next to another layer of
    material which may also be quartz or glass (subclasses 427 and 428).


CLS 359/777
TXT Infinite radius:

    Subject matter under subclass 776 wherein at least one mass of refractive
    material has at least one flat surface perpendicular to an optical axis.


CLS 359/778
TXT Having a biconvex single element component:

    Subject matter under 776 wherein at least one element consists of a single
    mass of refracting material having a curved or rounded outward surface at
    the entrance and exit ends.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    789,    for a three component lens having a first biconvex component in the
    + - + component arrangement.

    790,    for a three component lens having a third biconvex component in the
    + - + component arrangement.


CLS 359/779
TXT + + - + Arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 772 wherein the plus and minus signs indicate
    convergent and divergent lens components, respectively.

    (1)     Note.  The arrangement along the optical axis of the lens is
    identified by the leftmost sign representing the component at the entrant
    face of the lens, i.e., the direction of light travelling through the lens
    is the same as the reading arrangement of the subclass title.


CLS 359/780
TXT + + + - Arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 772 wherein the plus and minus signs indicate
    convergent and divergent lens components, respectively.

    (1)     Note.  The arrangement along the optical axis of the lens is
    identified by the leftmost sign representing the component at the entrant
    face of the lens, i.e., the direction of light travelling through the lens
    is the same as the reading arrangement of the subclass title.


CLS 359/781
TXT First component negative:

    Subject matter under subclass 771 wherein the first component at the
    entrant face of the lens, i.e., the first component hit by the light as the
    light begins travelling through the lens, is divergent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    761+,   for a multiple component lens having six components wherein the
    first component is negative.

    770,    for a multiple component lens having five components wherein the
    first component is negative.


CLS 359/782
TXT  - + + - Arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 781 wherein the plus and minus signs indicate
    convergent and divergent lens components, respectively.

    (1)     Note.  The arrangement along the optical axis of the lens is
    identified by the leftmost sign representing the component at the entrant
    face of the lens, i.e., the direction of light travelling through the lens
    is the same as the reading arrangement of the subclass title.


CLS 359/783
TXT - + + + Arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 781 wherein  the plus and minus signs
    indicate convergent and divergent lens components, respectively.

    (1)     Note.  The arrangement along the optical axis of the lens is
    identified by the leftmost sign representing the component at the entrant
    face of the lens, i.e., the direction of light travelling through the lens
    is the same as the reading arrangement of the subclass title.


CLS 359/784
TXT Three components:

    Subject matter under subclass 754 wherein the lens comprises three sections
    (i.e., components), each containing two refractive surfaces, arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in
    alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and their
    axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical axis that
    parallel light rays upon entering and passing through all of such
    components are refracted to a focus no more than one time.

    (1)     Note.  The term "component" as applied to a lens designates either
    (1) a single transparent mass of refractive material having two opposed
    refracting surfaces or (2) a grouped plurality of such masses arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
    surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with
    the spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into the
    lens computations.


    (2)     Note.  The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising a
    single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of a "component"
    comprising a plurality of masses have at least a portion thereof axially
    air-spaced from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present
    in the lens.

    (3)     Note.  The axial dimension of the air-spacing between either the
    opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the axially extreme
    surfaces of the "component" grouped plurality of masses, and the other
    adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
    sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in order to limit
    the axial extent of the lens component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    645,    for eyepieces having three components.

    651,    for projection type field curvature shaping lenses having less than
    four components.

    661,    for microscope objective having less than four components.

    682,    for variable magnification reverse tele-photo having seven or less
    components.

    716,    for nonspherical lens system having three components.

    735,    for three component multiple component lenses with a  reflecting
    element.

    748,    for a telephoto lens having less than four components.

    753,    for wide angle lenses having five or less components.

    754,    for multiple component  lens systems generally.


CLS 359/785
TXT +-+ Arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 784 wherein the plus and minus signs indicate
    convergent and divergent lens components, respectively.

    (1)     Note.  The arrangement along the optical axis of the lens is
    identified by the leftmost sign representing the component at the entrant
    face of the lens, i.e., the direction of light travelling through the lens
    is the same as the reading arrangement of the subclass title.


CLS 359/786
TXT With multiple element first component:

    Subject matter under subclass 785 wherein the first convergent component
    contains multiple masses of refractive material; each mass having two
    opposed refracting surfaces disposed transversely of the optical axis of
    the lens and spaced therealong.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    741,    for lenses with multipart elements or components.

    776,    for a four component multiple compo-nent lens wherein the first +
    compo-nent contains multiple elements.

    787,    for a three component multiple component lens wherein the second
    component contains multiple elements.

    788,    for a three component multiple component lens wherein the third
    component contains multiple elements.

    796,    for a lens having a single component with multiple elements.

    797,    for a lens having a single component with three or more elements.


CLS 359/787
TXT With multiple element second component:

    Subject matter under subclass 785 wherein the second divergent component
    contains multiple masses of refractive material; each mass having two
    opposed refracting surfaces disposed transversely of the optical axis of
    the lens and spaced therealong.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    741,    for lenses with multipart elements or components.

    776,    for a four component multiple compo-nent lens wherein the first +
    compo-nent contains multiple elements.

    786,    for a three component multiple component lens wherein the first
    component contains multiple elements.

    788,    for a three component multiple component lens wherein the third
    component contains multiple elements.

    796,    for a lens having a single component with multiple elements.

    797,    for a lens having a single component with three or more elements.


CLS 359/788
TXT With multiple element third component:

    Subject matter under subclass 785 wherein the third convergent component
    contains multiple masses of refractive material; each mass having two
    opposed refracting surfaces disposed transversely of the optical axis of
    the lens and spaced therealong.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    741,    for lenses with multipart elements or components.

    776,    for a four component multiple compo-nent lens wherein the first +
    compo-nent contains multiple elements.

    786,    for a three component multiple component lens wherein the first
    component contains multiple elements.

    787,    for a three component multiple component lens wherein the second
    component contains multiple elements.

    796,    for a lens having a single component with multiple elements.

    797,    for a lens having a single component with three or more elements.


CLS 359/789
TXT With first component biconvex:

    Subject matter under subclass 785 wherein the first convergent component
    has a curved or rounded outward surface at the entrance and exit ends.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    778,    for a four component lens having a single biconvex element in the +
    - - + component arrangement.

    790,    for a three component lens having a third biconvex component in the
    + - + component arrangement.


CLS 359/790
TXT With third component biconvex:

    Subject matter under subclass 785 wherein the third convergent component
    has a curved or rounded outward surface at the entrance and exit ends.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    778,    for a four component lens having a single biconvex element in the +
    - - + component arrangement.

    789,    for a three component lens having a first biconvex component in the
    + - + component arrangement.


CLS 359/791
TXT ++- Arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 784 wherein the plus and minus signs indicate
    convergent and divergent lens components, respectively.

    (1)     Note.  The arrangement along the optical axis of the lens is
    identified by the leftmost sign representing the component at the entrant
    face of the lens, i.e., the direction of light travelling through the lens
    is the same as the reading arrangement of the subclass title.


CLS 359/792
TXT +++ Arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 784 wherein the plus and minus signs indicate
    convergent and divergent lens components, respectively.

    (1)     Note.  The arrangement along the optical axis of the lens is
    identified by the leftmost sign representing the component at the entrant
    face of the lens, i.e., the direction of light travelling through the lens
    is the same as the reading arrangement of the subclass title.


CLS 359/793
TXT Two components:

    Subject matter under subclass 754 wherein the lens comprises two  sections
    (i.e., components), each containing two refractive surfaces, arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in
    alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and their
    axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical axis that
    parallel light rays upon entering and passing through all of such
    components are refracted to a focus no more than one time.

    (1)     Note.  The term "component" as applied to a lens designates either
    (1) a single transparent mass of refractive material having two opposed
    refracting surfaces or (2) a grouped plurality of such masses arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
    surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with
    the spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into the
    lens computations.


    (2)     Note.  The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising a
    single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of a "component"
    comprising a plurality of masses have at least a portion thereof axially
    air-spaced from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present
    in the lens.

    (3)     Note.  The axial dimension of the air-spacing between either the
    opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the axially extreme
    surfaces of the "component" grouped plurality of masses, and the other
    adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
    sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in order to limit
    the axial extent of the lens component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    646,    for eyepieces having two components.

    651,    for projection type field curvature shaping lenses having less than
    four components.

    661,    for microscope objective having less than four components.

    682,    for variable magnification reverse telephoto having seven or less
    components.

    717,    for nonspherical lens system having two components.

    736,    for two component multiple component lenses with a reflecting
    element.

    748,    for a telephoto lens having less than four components.

    753,    for wide angle lenses having five or less components.

    754,    for multiple component  lens systems generally.


CLS 359/794
TXT ++ Arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 793 wherein the plus and minus signs indicate
    convergent and divergent lens components, respectively.

    (1)     Note.  The arrangement along the optical axis of the lens is
    identified by the leftmost sign representing the component at the entrant
    face of the lens, i.e., the direction of light travelling through the lens
    is the same as the reading arrangement of the subclass title.


CLS 359/795
TXT +- Arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 793 wherein the plus and minus signs indicate
    convergent and divergent lens components, respectively.

    (1)     Note.  The arrangement along the optical axis of the lens is
    identified by the leftmost sign representing the component at the entrant
    face of the lens, i.e., the direction of light travelling through the lens
    is the same as the reading arrangement of the subclass title.


CLS 359/796
TXT Single component with multiple elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 642 wherein the lens comprises a single
    section (i.e., component) having a plurality of optical pieces (i.e.,
    elements) arranged in laminated series along the light path or optical axis
    of the lens with their adjacent refracting surfaces either in full overall
    contact or so closely spaced that such spacing does not enter into the lens
    computations.

    (1)     Note.  Each "component" contains two refractive surfaces, arranged
    in series along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in
    alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and their
    axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical axis that
    parallel light rays upon entering and passing through all of such
    components are refracted to a focus no more than one time.

    (2)     Note.  The term "component" as applied to a lens designates either
    (1) a single transparent mass of refractive material having two opposed
    refracting surfaces or (2) a grouped plurality of such masses arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
    surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with
    the spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into the
    lens computations.


    (3)     Note.  The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising a
    single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of a "component"
    comprising a plurality of masses have at least a portion thereof axially
    air-spaced from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present
    in the lens.

    (4)     Note.  The axial dimension of the air-spacing between either the
    opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the axially extreme
    surfaces of the "component" grouped plurality of masses, and the other
    adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
    sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in order to limit
    the axial extent of the lens component.

    (5)     Note.  The term "element" as applied to a lens designates any
    single transparent mass of refractive material having two opposed
    refracting surfaces, which surfaces are disposed transversely of the
    optical axis of the lens and spaced therealong, i.e., any one of the masses
    in the above component definition regardless of its spacing from adjacent
    refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    355,    for lenses constructed of materials that transmit ultraviolet and
    infrared light.

    647,    for eyepieces having one component.

    651,    for projection type field curvature shaping lenses having less than
    four components.

    661,    for microscope objective having less than four components.

    682,    for variable magnification reverse tele-photo having seven or less
    components.

    718,    for nonspherical lens system having one component.

    724,    for lenses with annular zonal correcting elements.

    741,    for lenses with multipart elements or components.

    748,    for a telephoto lens having less than four components.

    753,    for wide angle lenses having five or less components.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 387 for processes of forming an
    optical fiber directly connected to a lens; subclasses 37+ for processes of
    securing glass lens elements together.

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclass 159
    for opthalmic lenses or blanks.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 415, 417, and
    426+ for a nonstructural stock material product in the form of a composite
    web or sheet embodying a layer of glass or quartz next to another layer of
    material which may also be quartz or glass (subclasses 427 and 428).


CLS 359/797
TXT Three or more elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 796 wherein the single component of the lens
    is made up of three or more masses of refractive material; each having two
    opposed refracting surfaces, which surfaces are disposed transversely of
    the optical axis of the lens and spaced therealong.


CLS 359/798
TXT With viewed object or viewed field illumination:

    Subject matter under subclass 642 including a light source for illuminating
    the area viewed through or covered by the lens, or including structure such
    as a reflector or a prism for directing natural or artificial light on the
    area viewed, or wherein the lens is adapted to collect and direct natural
    or artificial light on the area viewed or covered.

    (1)     Note.  A mere transparent or exposed portion is not sufficient for
    classification here.  A light source or light directing or guiding means is
    necessary.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    385+,   for compound lens system spacing means with object illumination.

    591+,   for natural light directing systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 253+ for lights combined with structure
    not otherwise classifiable; and subclasses 257+ and especially subclasses
    268 and 311 for projectors which may include focusing lenses in the light
    path.


CLS 359/799
TXT Illuminating beam coaxial with lens axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 798 wherein the axis of the illuminating beam
    is parallel with the optical axis of the lens over at least a part of these
    axes.

    (1)     Note.  The beam may pass through the lens or the beam may have an
    annular cross section and surround the lens; however, the beam axis and
    lens axis are coincident.  Most of the art in this subclass relates to a
    microscope objective and the illuminating structure for the viewed object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    385+,   for microscope stages with substage illumination, the beam usually
    being coaxial with the barrel.


CLS 359/800
TXT Illumination through lens:

    Subject matter under subclass 798 wherein at least part of the illumination
    passes through at least part of the lens or through at least one component
    of a multiple component lens.


CLS 359/801
TXT With viewed object support:

    Subject matter under subclass 798 wherein an object which is being viewed
    through the lens is supported by a device which is connected to the lens.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    811,    for lenses combined with supports for viewed objects generally.


CLS 359/802
TXT Magnifier:

    Subject matter under subclass 798 wherein the lens makes an enlarged image
    of a viewed object.


CLS 359/803
TXT Hand held:

    Subject matter under subclass 802 wherein the device is held in a human
    hand while in use.


CLS 359/804
TXT With viewed object support:

    Subject matter under subclass 642 including structure for supporting an
    object to be viewed in the optical path of the lens.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    801,    for lenses combined with viewed object supports and including
    illumination of the viewed object.

    811+,   for lens supports generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, appropriate subclasses for
    lenses broadly combined with supports for cards, pictures, or signs.  See
    also (1) Note under subclass 806.


CLS 359/805
TXT On lens supporting handle:

    Subject matter under subclass 804 including a lens supporting handle which
    also functions as a support for the object being viewed or which supports
    structure which in turn supports the object being viewed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    803     and 812, for lenses with handles generally.


CLS 359/806
TXT Relatively movable informatory sheet and lens (e.g., reading machine, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 804 including structure for supporting a
    sheet or tape of printed, pictorial, or other informatory matter together
    with structure for moving or guiding movement of the sheet or tape
    horizontally relative to the lens, or of the lens horizontally relative to
    the sheet or tape for viewing different portions of the sheet or tape.

    (1)     Note.  Class 40, Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, provides for
    the combination of a lens broadly together with structure for supporting a
    card, picture, or sign relative to the lens for viewing therethrough.
    However, where the claims recite any optical limitations such as lens shape
    or forcing (as by an adjustable lens support) together with a sheet or tape
    support as defined above classification is in this subclass (806).  Where
    the supporting structure presents only a portion of a line of printed
    matter or an entire line or limited number of lines together with provision
    for moving additional lines or line portions into lens view, the lens being
    only broadly claimed as in optical reading machines classification is in
    this  subclass (806).  Where the lens broadly claimed is only utilized to
    examine or view a portion of the exhibit, there being relative movement
    between the lens and the exhibit classification is here in this subclass
    (806).  Class 40 provides generally for viewing the entire single exhibit
    (or the entire framed portion of an exhibit which is presented for viewing
    as in map holders) of the card, sign or picture through the lens, with
    provision for changing the entire exhibit as in  subclasses 446+
    thereunder.  Magnifiers adapted for attachment to a sheet for viewing a
    portion thereof are classified under subclass 804 of this class or in this
    subclass (806), if relative motion is provided, regardless whether the lens
    is claimed broadly or specifically.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    466+,   for stereoscopic viewers.

    801,    for lenses relatively movable with respect to sheets and tapes
    together with illumination of the sheet or tape.

    813,    for lenses movable in the lens plane.

    823,    for lens mountings with axial adjustment as for focusing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, especially subclasses 446+ for
    changeable exhibitors.  See also (1) Note above.  See subclasses 341 and
    342+ for a copy holder wherein the copy is movable relative to a viewing
    locus.


CLS 359/807
TXT Flat opaque document or picture:

    Subject matter under subclass 804 wherein the viewed document is flat and
    viewed by reflected light.


CLS 359/808
TXT With lens casing:

    Subject matter under subclass 642 including structure substantially
    surrounding the lens as for protection purposes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    503,    for tubes and barrels for compound lens systems.

    581,    for lenses with coatings for some optical effect.

    809,    for lenses combined with cases which encase devices other than the
    lens.

    811,    for lenses with supports.


CLS 359/809
TXT Combined with diverse art tool, instrument or machine:

    Subject matter under subclass 642 wherein the lens is claimed in
    combination with a tool, instrument or machine, each of which is nonoptical
    in nature, and which combination is not classifiable with the tool,
    instrument, or machine.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this subclass, the tool, instrument,
    or machine must be at least nominally claimed.  However, if the lens
    constitutes a perfecting feature of the tool, instrument or machine, the
    claiming of significant structure of the tool, instrument or machine is
    sufficient to classify the combination with the art to which the tool,
    instruments, or machines relates.  Examples of tools, instruments, or
    machines combined with lenses and classified here are rulers, compasses,
    dividers, tweezers, thermometers, pencils, and sewing machines.  Where the
    lens is claimed in combination with a support which is in turn disclosed as
    being attachable to an unclaimed tool, instrument, or machine,
    classification is with the lens and support in subclasses 811+ below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    440+,   for lenses combined with structure including a scale or indicator.

    448,    581, 726+, 737, and 738, for lenses combined with other optical
    structure such as prisms, mirrors, and light valves.

    798+,   for lenses combined with viewed object illuminating structure.

    811,    for lenses with supports.  See also (1) Note above.


CLS 359/810
TXT Operation viewed through lens:

    Subject matter under subclass 809 wherein the lens is so positioned with
    respect to the tool, instrument, or machine that the operation or
    functioning of the tool, instrument, or machine may be viewed through the
    lens.


CLS 359/811
TXT With support:

    Subject matter under subclass 642 including structure to maintain the lens
    in space or in relation to some other object such as a barrel or tube in
    either a fixed position or in a fixed path of movement or in a limited area
    of movement.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter classifiable here must include the lens at
    least broadly in combination with the support, or a lens support alone
    which is peculiarly adapted to lens mounting without general utility, as in
    the lens mounting subclasses of 819+.  Class 248, Supports, provides for
    supports generally even though disclosed with a lens, but not peculiar
    thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    391+,   for object stages or carriers.

    503+,   for lens spacing structure with supports therefor.

    803,    for lenses with support for the viewed object.

    808,    for lenses with casing or protection means.

    809+,   for lenses claimed with diverse art tools, instruments or machines
    which may also be supports.

    812,    for lenses with handles.

    892,    for optical filters with supports.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 127+ for stands and subclasses 200+ for
    brackets.


CLS 359/812
TXT With additional handle:

    Subject matter under subclass 811 including a support for the lens together
    with an additional handle for moving the lens to and from its support
    position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    409+,   for opera glass handles.

    805,    for lenses with a viewed object support on the lens supporting,
    handle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 110+ for handles generally.


CLS 359/813
TXT Lens movable in its plane:

    Subject matter under subclass 811 wherein the support includes relatively
    movable portions such as a track or slide to permit movement of the lens in
    its plane (which is perpendicular to its lens axis), while restricting
    other movements of the lens.

    (1)     Note.  Other structure separate from the above defined relatively
    movable portions may be included even in the support to provide for
    nonplanar movement and yet not preclude classification here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    441+,   for lens combined with scales, the lens being movable over the
    scale.

    806,    for lenses combined with a relatively movable informatory sheet.


CLS 359/814
TXT Electromagnetic motive power:

    Subject matter under subclass 813 wherein the lens is moved by a source of
    power driven by an electric or magnetic device.


CLS 359/815
TXT Body or apparel attached or carried:

    Subject matter under subclass 811 wherein the support is shaped or
    otherwise adapted to engage portions of the body or apparel thereof to
    position the lens with  respect to the body of the user.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    362+,   for body or apparel carried compound lens spaced means.

    812,    for lenses with handles.


CLS 359/816
TXT Monocular loupe type:

    Subject matter under subclass 815 wherein the support is shaped to position
    the lens before the eye so that the lens moves with the head of the user.

    (1)     Note.  The support may be adapted to engage the head directly or to
    be attached to spectacle frames.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    481,    for binocular type loupes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclass 158
    for loupes combined with eyeglasses and subclasses 159+ for ophthalmic
    lenses and blanks.


CLS 359/817
TXT Foldable or collapsible:

    Subject matter under subclass 811 wherein one part of the supporting
    structure may be folded with respect to another part or wherein the
    supporting structure may be folded with respect to the lens to reduce the
    space occupied by the lens and its support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    406,    for collapsible periscopes.

    408,    for collapsible or foldable binoculars.

    474,    for collapsible stereoscopic viewers.


CLS 359/818
TXT With clamp or grip:

    Subject matter under subclass 811 wherein the support includes opposing
    surfaces for detachably engaging therebetween the supporting object for
    maintaining the support positioned with respect to the object.

    (1)     Note.  The engaging surfaces may be spring or screw actuated.
    These surfaces do not engage the lens as in subclasses 819+ below, but
    rather the structure to which the support may be attached.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    804+,   for lenses including a support for the object being viewed.

    809+,   for lens and their supports attached to diverse art tools,
    instruments, or machines by a clamp or grip.

    819+,   for lens mountings wherein the support engages the lens.


CLS 359/819
TXT Lens mounts:

    Subject matter under subclass 811 including structure engaging the rim
    portion around substantially the entire circumference or rim of the lens or
    its components  to secure the lens to supporting structure or to secure the
    components in proper spaced relation without obstructing the optical axis.

    (1)     Note.  More commonly the structure here classified is a ring
    gripping the periphery of the lens with a thread for screwing into a barrel
    or wall of some optical instrument, such as a telescope, microscope, or
    camera.  A plurality of these rings gripping respective lens components
    together with the ring supporting structure to maintain the components in
    proper spaced relationship is classified here.  The mount must engage the
    lens over substantially the entire rim.  A mere screw or clamp engaging a
    portion of the lens rim is not classified here, but in subclass 811 above.
    The mere inclusion of the telescope, microscope, or camera barrel broadly
    in the claim does not preclude classification here.

    (2)     Note.  Class 396, Photography, appropriate subclasses for a lens
    mounting in combination with significant camera structure.  Examples of
    such significant terms are film track, film plane, film holder, camera
    casing, camera housing, camera body with recess, camera cone, camera
    chamber, shutter, etc.  The mere recitation of a camera wall or mounting
    plate or focal plane is not sufficient to remove lens mounting structure
    from this subclass (819).

    (3)     Note.  Class 362, Illumination, in subclasses 455+ provide for
    illuminating lens mounts.  For classification there, significant
    illuminating structure would be claimed or the indicated use of the mounted
    lens would be for illuminating purposes as opposed to the general optical
    use in this subclass (819).  Class 353, Optics:  Image Projectors, in
    subclasses 24, 96, and 100+ provide for lens mounts in projectors, and for
    classification where significant projector structure is recited such as
    slide holder, illuminating source, or projector housing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    507+,   for lens mounts with moisture or dust sealing.

    892,    for filter mountings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 405+ for flanged pipe joints.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, appropriate subclasses for lens holders
    and supports together with motion picture structure as required by Class
    352.

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, subclasses 24, 96, and 100+ for a lens
    mount in an image projector.  See (3) Note above.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 455+ for illuminating lens holders and
    supports.  See also (3) Note above.

    396,    Photography, appropriate subclasses for camera structure with lens
    mounting structure and see (2) Note above.


CLS 359/820
TXT With temperature compensation or control:

    Subject matter under subclass 819 wherein the mounting includes or is
    combined with structure to offset or minimize the effect of temperature
    change.

    (1)     Note.  The structure classified here may be lens supporting
    material whose dimensions remain unchanged over a range of temperature
    change or heating structure for offsetting temperature changes otherwise
    occurring or for reducing moisture accumulation or heat insulating
    structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    362+,   for compound lens systems with desiccating means.

    507+,   for mirrors with moisture prevention.

    554+,   for mirrors with distortion prevention.

    823,    for lens mountings with axial adjustment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 521 for electrical heaters including a
    support for the material to be heated.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 7+ for aerial cameras.


CLS 359/821
TXT Plural lenses in common carrier selectively operable (e.g., turret type,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 819 including mounting structure for a
    plurality of lenses and which permits any one of the lenses to be moved in
    and out of the optical path, together with structure for moving the lenses
    in and out of the optical path.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the lenses are mounted on a common carrier and
    operated as a unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    381     and 421, for compound lens systems with selective power obtained by
    a common carrier having a plurality of lenses selectively operable.

    672+,   for lenses of selective focal length by exchangeable lens
    components or by the addition of such component.  See also (1) Note under
    this subclass.


CLS 359/822
TXT Adjustable:

    Subject matter under subclass 819 wherein a parameter of the lens (e.g.,
    focal length, etc.) is selectively varied.


CLS 359/823
TXT With axial adjustment (e.g., adjustable focus, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 819 including structure for moving or
    permitting motion of the lens along its optical axis or for moving or
    permitting motion along the optical axis of at least two of the lens
    components relative to one another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    694+,   for adjusting mechanisms for variable focal length lenses.

    813,    for supports for movement of the lens in its plane.

    820,    for lens mountings permitting axial movement of the lens in
    response to temperature change.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    396,    Photography, subclasses 89+ for focusing lens structure in cameras.
     See (2) Note under subclass 819 above for lines between this classs and
    Class 396 relating to camera lens mount.


CLS 359/824
TXT Electromagnetic or piezoelectric drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 823 wherein the structure for moving or
    permitting motion of the lens along its optical axis or for moving or
    permitting motion along the optical axis of at least two of the lens
    components relative to one another includes a source of mechanical motive
    power which is driven by electrical means.


CLS 359/825
TXT Focusing ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 823 wherein there is a circular band for
    adjusting the position of a point at which light rays converge.


CLS 359/826
TXT Sliding barrels:

    Subject matter under subclass 823 wherein there are at least two
    cylindrical tubes, one of which fits and slides in an axial direction
    partially inside other.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are barrels which are threaded.


CLS 359/827
TXT Detachably attached (e.g., plate, barrel, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 819 wherein the mounting or plate or barrel
    to which the mounting is to be secured includes structure such as a snap
    connection, bayonet joint, screw threads, or like interengaging parts which
    permit ready securing and removal of the mounting from the plate or barrel.

    (1)     Note.  The mounting here is often one of several interchangeable
    camera lens mounts while the plate is the camera wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    821,    for plural lenses selectively operable in a common carrier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclass 189 for pipe to side or plate
    joints.


CLS 359/828
TXT Bayonet coupling:

    Subject matter under subclass 827 wherein the mounting is a quick coupling
    device comprising pins on the sides of a male connector portion to engage
    corresponding slots in a socket where connection is accomplished by
    rotating two parts under pressure.


CLS 359/829
TXT With threads:

    Subject matter under subclass 819 having a projecting helical rib.


CLS 359/830
TXT With ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 819 having a circular band for holding,
    connecting, packing, sealing, etc.


CLS 359/831
TXT PRISM (INCLUDING MOUNT):

    Subject matter under the class definition including a transparent optical
    element having at least two plane surfaces inclined relative to each other,
    from which light is reflected or through which light is refracted.

    (1)     Note.  A prism may be employed for refracting or reflecting light.
    Prism reflections are considered to be internal reflections; that is, the
    light is inside the prism body both before and immediately after the
    reflection.

    (2)     Note.  A prism mount structure engaging the prism to secure it to
    other structure such as a barrel without obstructing the optical axis is
    included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290+,   for prisms with means to change the refractive index.

    431,    for compound lens systems with prisms for telescopes.

    592+,   for refracting elements employed in natural light directing systems.

    606,    for prismoidal anti-glare mirrors.

    615,    for prisms which disperse light.

    618+,   for plural path optical systems which divide or combine light paths.

    737,    for lenses with prisms.

    819+,   for lens mountings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 51+ for optical test
    devices having prisms used in the infrared or ultraviolet range alone or in
    combination with visible light.


CLS 359/832
TXT Fluid filled:

    Subject matter under subclass 831 wherein the prism contains a liquid,
    vapor, or gas.


CLS 359/833
TXT With reflecting surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 831 wherein at least one surface reflects
    light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    838+,   for mirrors, per se.


CLS 359/834
TXT Plural reflecting surfaces:

    Subject matter under subclass 833 comprising two or more reflecting
    surfaces.


CLS 359/835
TXT For binocular or porro-prism:

    Subject matter under subclass 834 wherein a prism is made up of two right
    angle prisms placed at right angles to each other that can be used in a
    binocular.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    375,    for a binocular microscope using a compound lens systems.

    407+,   for binocular telescope.

    480+,   for binocular devices.


CLS 359/836
TXT Roof or roof-angle:

    Subject matter under subclass 834 comprising surfaces that revert and
    invert the image and, at the same time, will deviate the line of sight
    through a 90o angle.


CLS 359/837
TXT With refracting surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 831 wherein at least one surface refracts
    light.


CLS 359/838
TXT MIRROR:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a structure which
    reflects a substantial portion of the light incident thereon in a regular
    pattern.

    (1)     Note.  A nominal mirror claimed in combination with other structure
    is classified with the other structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212+,   for reflectors subject to periodic mo-tion.

    223+,   for reflectors specifically designed for changing the direction of
    reflected beams.

    515+,   for light beam reflectors used for                signalling (e.g.,
    retroreflectors).

    603+,   for antiglare means for mirrors.

    629+,   for reflectors used in light dividing or combining systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 502.1 for a flexible mirror
    moving mechanism.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 684+ for working fluid solar
    collectors with concentrating reflectors.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 466+ for mirror type supports or supports
    wherein a mirror is only nominally recited.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 296+ and 317+ for light sources combined
    with reflectors.

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclass 63 for an illusion caused
    by a mirror and see the Search Notes thereunder.


CLS 359/839
TXT With a transmitting property:

    Subject matter under subclass 838 including a mirror area which partially
    transmits and partially reflects light rays or including a plurality of
    light transmitting and light reflecting areas interspersed.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are one-way mirrors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    630+,   for a transparent reflector used for light dividing or combining
    purposes.

    633,    for a transparent reflector with successive reflectors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    472,    Amusement Devices, subclass 58 for a stage or illusion device using
    a transparent reflector.


CLS 359/840
TXT Back to back:

    Subject matter under subclass 838 comprising two immediately adjacent and
    oppositely directed mirrors which are rigidly connected.

    (1)     Note.  This type of mirror is often referred to as a double mirror.


CLS 359/841
TXT Retractable vehicle mirror:

    Subject matter under subclass 838 including a mirror mounted on a vehicle
    and movable from an in-use position to a stored position or to a position
    closely adjacent the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    872+,   for a mirror movable relative to a support, in general.


CLS 359/842
TXT Mounted on vehicle having handlebars (e.g., bicycle, motorcycle, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 838 wherein the mirror is mounted on a
    vehicle which has handlebars for steering and a frame with a seat
    supporting the operator.

    (1)     Note.  The mirror may be mounted on the handlebar or the vehicle
    frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    871+,   for a mirror with support, in general.


CLS 359/843
TXT Automatically adjustable in response to vehicle position, control, or
    indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 838 wherein a mirror mounted on a vehicle
    changes position by movement of the vehicle, or condition of a vehicle or
    indicator control mechanism, or indicator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    872+,   for a mirror movable relative to a support in general.


CLS 359/844
TXT On adjustable diverse vehicle portion or acces-sory:

    Subject matter under subclass 838 comprising a mirror mounted on a vehicle
    attachment which is movable relative to the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  An example of such a vehicular attachment is a sun visor.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    875,    for a mirror controlled by a rigid handle extending to or near the
    mirror pivot.


CLS 359/845
TXT Fluid cooled mirror:

    Subject matter under subclass 838 including a fluid to absorb heat that
    would otherwise cause thermal distortion of the reflective surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for generic thermal energy
    removal by circulating fluid.


CLS 359/846
TXT Including specified control or retention of the shape of a mirror surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 838 including structure for maintaining a
    precise shape of a reflective surface or for reversibly changing the shape
    of a reflective surface.


CLS 359/847
TXT Membrane mirror in mechanical contact only at its edge:

    Subject matter under subclass 846 including a very thin flexible reflective
    structure  that is supported only at its periphery.


CLS 359/848
TXT With structure to minimize internal mirror stress:

    Subject matter under subclass 846 including supporting a mirror so as to
    minimize internal mirror stress which might otherwise distort the shape of
    the reflective surface.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes light weight mirror structures
    designed to minimize sagging stress.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    845,    for thermal mirror stress reduction by circulating fluid.

    883,    for laminated or layered mirror support structure in general.


CLS 359/849
TXT Including a plurality of adjustable mirror supports:

    Subject matter under subclass 846 including  multiple mirror supports
    adjustable to change the shape of a reflective surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    847,    for an adjustable membrane mirror.

    872+,   for a mirror movable relative to a support.


CLS 359/850
TXT Plural mirrors or reflecting surfaces:

    Subject matter under subclass 838 comprising multiple mirrors or mirror
    surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    839,    for plural mirrors in series wherein at least one of the mirrors
    has a transmitting property.


CLS 359/851
TXT Composite or echelon mirrors or light concentrating array:

    Subject matter under subclass 850 comprising a plurality of mirrors or
    mirror surfaces cooperating to form a unified image or to concentrate light
    in a focal area or along a focal line or comprising several substantially
    identical mir-rors for concentrating light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    868+,   for mirrors with one continuous reflecting surface of varied radius.


CLS 359/852
TXT With a line focus:

    Subject matter under subclass 851 including a plurality of mirrors or
    mirror surfaces which concentrate light in a linear pattern.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    867,    for a single mirror providing a line focus.

    869,    for a concave mirror of varied radius.


CLS 359/853
TXT Light concentrating (e.g., heliostat, etc.), con-cave, or paraboloidal
    structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 851 which forms incident radiation into a
    convergent beam, has a concave configuration, or has a cross section
    forming a parabola in at least one direction.


CLS 359/854
TXT Identical side mirrors adjustable with respect to a central mirror:

    Subject matter under subclass 850 including adjustable identical mirrors on
    opposite sides of a central mirror.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    872+,   for a single mirror adjustable relative to a support.


CLS 359/855
TXT Identical adjacent mirrors identically supported:

    Subject matter under subclass 850 including plural identical mirrors
    located close together and having substantially identical support structure.


CLS 359/856
TXT With successive reflections:

    Subject matter under subclass 855 wherein a substantial portion of the
    light is reflected at least two times in series.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a folded optical path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    857+,   for mirrors with reflections in series not involving a transmitting
    property nor identical adjacent mirrors identically supported.


CLS 359/857
TXT With successive reflections:

    Subject matter under subclass 850 wherein a substantial portion of the
    light is reflected at least two times in series.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a folded optical path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    633,    for serial reflections in a head-up type system where visual
    information is superimposed on an observer's field of view.

    856,    for identical adjacent mirrors identically supported with
    reflections in series.


CLS 359/858
TXT Including curved mirror surfaces in series:

    Subject matter under subclass 857 comprising a curved mirror surface which
    receives the light from itself or another curved mirror surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    365+,   for compound lens systems with curved mirrors in series.


CLS 359/859
TXT With concave and convex mirrors in series:

    Subject matter under subclass 858 including a concave mirror and a convex
    mirror cooperating to sequentially reflect the light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    366,    for compound lens systems with concave and convex mirrors in series.

    731,    for a lens with concave and convex reflectors in series.


CLS 359/860
TXT To view observer:

    Subject matter under subclass 857 wherein the plural reflections are
    arranged to provide a view of a portion of the observer.


CLS 359/861
TXT With three or more successive reflections:

    Subject matter under subclass 857 wherein a substantial portion of the
    light is reflected at least three times in series.


CLS 359/862
TXT Including an adjustable mirror:

    Subject matter under subclass 857 including structure for varying the
    position of at least one mirror.


CLS 359/863
TXT Including a curved mirror:

    Subject matter under subclass 862 including a mirror with a smooth
    nonplanar reflective surface.


CLS 359/864
TXT Including adjacent plane and curved mirrors:

    Subject matter under subclass 850 including a flat mirror and a smooth
    nonflat mirror close together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    866,    for segmented mirrors for wide angle coverage.

    868,    for mirror surfaces of varying curvature.


CLS 359/865
TXT Relatively adjustable:

    Subject matter under subclass 850 having structure to vary the position of
    one mirror relative to another mirror.


CLS 359/866
TXT Wide angle segmented mirrors:

    Subject matter under subclass 850 including plural angled mirrors or mirror
    surfaces with the intersection of the surfaces or their extensions forming
    discontinuities to provide a wide field of view.


CLS 359/867
TXT Concave cylindrical or providing a line focus:

    Subject matter under subclass 838 including a cylindrically concave
    reflecting surface or structure for providing a linear focus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    852,    for composite or echelon mirrors providing a line focus.


CLS 359/868
TXT With mirror surface of varied radius:

    Subject matter under subclass 838 including a nonspherical continuously
    curved reflecting surface.

    (1)     Note.  The mirror surface may be parabolically or elliptically
    shaped.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    846+,   for mirror surfaces of varied radii with means for controlling the
    shape of such surfaces.

    857+,   for mirror surfaces of varied radii with successive reflections.

    858+,   for curved mirrors in series, one of which may include a mirror
    surface of varied radius.


CLS 359/869
TXT Concave:

    Subject matter under subclass 868 wherein a nonspherical continuously
    curved reflecting surface includes a smooth surface indented away from the
    direction of an incident light beam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    852,    for composite or echelon mirrors providing a line focus.

    867,    for a concave cylindrical mirror providing a line focus.


CLS 359/870
TXT Fracture resistant (e.g., shatterproof, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 838 including structure to retain mirror
    pieces in position upon breakage.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are mirrors with an adhesive or film
    preventing movement of the broken elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    846+,   for shape retention or control of a mirror surface.


CLS 359/871
TXT With support:

    Subject matter under subclass 838 including structure for supporting a
    mirror.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 466+ for mirror type support structures or
    supports wherein a mirror is only nominally recited.


CLS 359/872
TXT Mirror movable relative to support:

    Subject matter under subclass 871 including structure for moving a mirror
    relative to a support structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    843,    for mirrors automatically adjustable with vehicle position.

    844,    for mirrors on a relatively movable vehicle portion or accessory.

    854,    for identical side mirrors adjustable with respect to a central
    mirror.

    862,    for plural mirrors with successive reflections including an
    adjustable mirror.

    865,    for relative adjustable plural mirrors.


CLS 359/873
TXT With rotary to linear motion converting mirror adjustment:

    Subject matter under subclass 872 including conversion of rotary motion
    into linear motion to thereby move a mirror.


CLS 359/874
TXT With rotation of mirror about perpendicular axes:

    Subject matter under subclass 873 including structure for rotating a mirror
    about axes that are at right angles to each other.

    (1)     Note.  The axes need not be axes of symmetry.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    876,    for mirrors with structure for rotation about perpendicular axes
    not involving rotary to linear motion conversion.


CLS 359/875
TXT With a rigid handle extending to or near a mirror pivot:

    Subject matter under subclass 872 including a rigid handle extending to a
    mirror pivot or to an intermediate pivot with a short linkage extending in
    turn to a mirror to provide short range operation.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes a rigid handle which extends through
    a vehicle wall to provide direct pivotal movement to mirrors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    844,    for mirror controls extending through a vehicle door.


CLS 359/876
TXT With rotation of mirror about perpendicular axes:

    Subject matter under subclass 872 including structure for rotating a mirror
    about axes that are at right angles to each other.

    (1)     Note.  The axes need not be axes of symmetry.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    874,    for mirrors with rotary to linear motion converting mirror
    adjustment for rotation about perpendicular axes.


CLS 359/877
TXT With switch or motor controlling mirror move-ment:

    Subject matter under subclass 872 including a switch or motor which is
    activated to provide power to move a mirror.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    873+    and 876, for mirror supports with rotary to linear mirror adjusting
    structure or structure permitting rotation about perpendicular axes,
    respectively.


CLS 359/878
TXT Fluid pressure actuated:

    Subject matter under subclass 877 including an element applying an
    adjusting force to the mirror which is actuated by a force applying gas or
    liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, appropriate subclasses for generic devices actuated
    by fluid pressure.


CLS 359/879
TXT Body or apparel mirror support:

    Subject matter under subclass 872 which includes structure for supporting
    the mirror on a body portion or the clothing or accessories worn or carried
    by a person.


CLS 359/880
TXT Having support or apparel engaging head or neck:

    Subject matter under subclass 879 including structure to support a mirror
    from the head or neck portion of the body of the operator or clothing
    engaged therewith.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 21+ for surgical diagnostic testing reflectors.

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclass 50
    for eyeglasses combined with a rear-view reflector.


CLS 359/881
TXT With mirror supporting column or sliding adjustment:

    Subject matter under subclass 872 including a supporting shaft or structure
    for providing relative sliding movement between a mirror and support
    structure therefor.


CLS 359/882
TXT With handle:

    Subject matter under subclass 871 including a rigid, solid extension
    connected to the mirror, support, or enclosure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    875,    for a mirror with rigid handle extending to a mirror pivot.


CLS 359/883
TXT Laminated or layered mirror support:

    Subject matter under subclass 871 including a plurality of laminations or
    layers backing the mirror to support the mirror.

    (1)     Note.  Laminated or layered mirror supports specifically designed
    to minimize internal mirror stress are classified in this class, subclass
    848.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Ar-ticles, appropriate subclasses
    for structurally defined laminates in general.


CLS 359/884
TXT With selective absorption or transparent over-coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 838 including a mirror which absorbs
    particular visible wavelengths or includes an overcoating without absorbing
    properties.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    577+,   for interference coatings or lamina.

    839,    for a mirror having a transmitting property.

    885+,   for absorption filters.


CLS 359/885
TXT ABSORPTION FILTER:

    Subject matter under the class definition which absorbs a portion of the
    incident ray energy and transmits the remainder.

    (1)     Note.  For classification here, some structure other than a
    material having filtering properties is required.  For example, a plurality
    of superimposed filtering layers which cooperate to give some desired
    optical effect would be sufficient for classification here.  See Class 252,
    Compositions, subclasses 299.01+ for liquid crystal containing filter
    compositions and subclasses 582+ for other filter compositions and Class
    428, Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, for filter stock material.

    (2)     Note.  Included here are not only those devices which may be
    selective with regard to the visible spectrum (i.e., colored), but also
    those devices which may be nonselective in the absorption of light energy
    (i.e., neutral density type).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    350+,   for filter which operates significantly in the ultraviolet or
    infrared spectrum; particularly, subclass 358 for fluid filter and
    subclasses 359+ for multilayer filter.

    502,    for polarizers combined with color filter means.

    577+,   for dichroic or interference filter, particularly, subclass 588 for
    filter having four or more layers and subclass 590 for combining with
    another filter.

    601,    for glare reducing means which may include filter means.

    722+,   for lens having selective wavelength transmitting or blocking
    properties and subclass 723 for a lens combined with a separate selective
    element.

    884,    for mirrors having selective light reflecting properties or
    combined with elements having such properties.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 12+ for eye shades which may include a filter.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 503.1+ for an invisible radiation
    modifying member generally.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 299.01+ for liquid-crystal compositions
    and subclasses 582+ for other optical filter compositions and for optical
    articles defined only in terms of the composition of which they are
    composed.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 112 for electric
    lamps and electronic tubes which have a light filter structurally combined
    therewith.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 167 for electrical
    filters generally.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 909+ for radio
    wave filters, per se.

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclasses
    44+ for spectacles or spectacle type goggles with filtering lenses, and
    subclasses 163+ for ophthalmic lenses or blanks with light filtering means.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, particularly subclasses 402+ for
    shade or color filter devices which use one or more color filters
    additively or sequentially or at the same time particularly subclasses 234+
    and 416+ for photometers of the light absorbing type for neutral filters of
    the sequentially additive or of the continuously variable type.

    362,    Illumination, for illuminating devices in combination with a
    filter, subclasses 1+ for daylight lamps;  subclasses 3+ for photographic
    safe light lanterns;  subclasses 166+ for signal lanterns with color
    screens and for hand lanterns with color screens;  and subclass 293 for
    light projectors having a colored light screen.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 156+ for X-ray
    filters.

    380,    Cryptography, subclass 54 for this subject matter used in a device
    for revealing concealed information.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 544+ for camera attachments which may
    include a filter.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 59+
    for a sun or radiation screening or sun tanning composition intented for
    topical application to a living body.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 162+ for coating processes, per se,
    wherein the product is an optical element.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a single or plural layer web or sheet which may inherently possess
    light filtering properties due to the material thereof;  coated filters
    comprising plural layers and defined only by the compositions of the layers
    are found in Class 428, subclasses 411.1+ and especially subclasses 426+
    wherein one layer is glass.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 507 and 510+ for filter.


CLS 359/886
TXT Fluid:

    Subject matter under subclass 885 wherein the filtering material is in gas,
    liquid, or vapor form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    665+,   for fluid type lenses.

    832,    for fluid filled prisms.


CLS 359/887
TXT Sequentially additive:

    Subject matter under subclass 885 comprising two or more surfaces of
    different selectivity which are intended to sequentially affect a sensing
    element (which may be the human eye) at such a rate that their effects are
    combined in an optically additive way.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 45 and 66+ for similar subject
    matter used in the motion picture art.

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 41+ and 56+ for similar subject matter
    combined with generators or displays for color television.


CLS 359/888
TXT Neutral or graded density:

    Subject matter under subclass 885 wherein the filter or a portion thereof
    absorbs ray energy independently of wavelength and the corresponding
    transmittance may be uniform or variable.

    (1)     Note.  Where the density differences of various areas are
    incidentally due to the fact that the areas are of different colors, the
    subject matter is not classified here but in some other appropriate filter
    subclass.


CLS 359/889
TXT Movable in or out of optical path:

    Subject matter under subclass 885 wherein one or more filters may be
    selectively moved into and out of an optical path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    887,    for filter movable in and out of an optical path in a predetermined
    pattern resulting in the sequential addition of colors.

    888,    for such subject matter where the filter is of the neutral density
    type or has graded optical densities.


CLS 359/890
TXT Superimposed or series:

    Subject matter under subclass 885 wherein two or more filters are disposed
    so that ray energy may pass through all the filters in series.


CLS 359/891
TXT Filters in optical parallel (e.g., colors side-by-side, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 885 having a plurality of differently colored
    filters arranged in such a fashion that ray energy passing through one
    filter does not pass through any other filter and the resultant filtered
    rays are uniformly equidistant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    618+    for similar subject matter used with light dividing and combining
    systems.

    887,    where colored ray energies are sequentially additive.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 45 and 66+ for similar subject
    matter used in the motion picture art.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 305+ for similar camera color image forming
    using monochrome film.


CLS 359/892
TXT With support or frame:

    Subject matter under subclass 885 comprising means for mounting a filter.

    (1)     Note.  See search class notes below for supports of general
    application, and for frame structure in terms of a panel, closure, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    611+,   for barrel end shades which may have filters therein.

    811+,   for support means for lenses.

    819+,   for lens mounting means.

    831,    for mounting means for prisms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), particularly subclasses 474+,
    633+, and 782+ for rigid panel structure and frames therefore.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 371+
    for frames for flexible panels or closures.

    248,    Supports, for supports of general application.


CLS 359/893
TXT SCREEN (E.G., HALFTONE SCREEN, ETC.):

    Subject matter under the class definition having at least a plate with a
    multiplicity of apertures, opaque dots, patterns, or crossed lines which
    are intended to break up imaging light.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    355,    Photocopying, subclass 80 for light diffusing in localized areas.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 545 for light diffusing and masking
    provided for by that class.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, of Product
    Thereof, subclasses 6+ for chemically defined screens and the process for
    making the same and subclasses 396+ for process of using the same.


CLS 359/894
TXT OPTICAL APERTURE OR TUBE, OR TRANSPARENT CLOSURE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a structure transmits
    light energy where all transmitted rays travel in essentially straight
    lines (i.e., without intentional deviation as, for example,  by reflection,
    refraction or diffraction) and without significant attenuation (i.e.,
    without being filtered).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes certain specialized viewing devices
    which involve no intentional deviation of light rays such as, for example,
    certain underwater viewing devices.  It also includes apertures,
    transparent closures, etc., with no significant optical element
    classifiable in the preceding subclasses, but some optical feature going
    beyond, for example, windshields in Class 296, subclasses 84.1+. This might
    be, for example, means to compensate for the offsetting of ray energy in
    passing through a transparent closure.

    (2)     Note.  This definition does not exclude subject matter where
    certain rays are transmitted and certain other rays are completely blocked.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227+,   for movable apertured plates which control light.

    480+,   for binocular viewing devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    385,    Optical Waveguides, appropriate subclasses for optical wave-guides
    which utilize total internal reflection.


CLS 359/895
TXT Submerged object viewer:

    Subject matter under subclass 894 wherein an optical tube permits clear
    viewing of an under-water article.


CLS 359/896
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition not provided for in any preceding
    subclass.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 359/900
TXT METHODS:

    Cross-reference art collection of optical methods.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    819+,   for lens mountings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 37+ for lens making involving the
    working or treating of glass.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    99+ for optically transparent glass lens sandwich making, which may include
    a grinding step.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 1.1+ for optical article shaping or treating such as molding.

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclass 177
    for methods of making ophthalmic lenses or blanks not otherwise
    classifiable and subclass 178 for methods of securing these lenses in their
    mountings.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 42+ for a lens grinding method.  See the
    reference to Class 156 below.


CLS 359/901
TXT ACOUSTIC HOLOGRAPHY:

    Cross-reference art collection of patents having to do with holographic
    techniques using sound vibrations.


CLS 359/902
TXT HOLOGRAPHIC INTERFEROMETER:

    Cross-reference art collection of patents having to do with using
    holography in instruments that use light interference phenomena for precise
    determinations of wavelength, spectral line structure, very small
    displacements, and indices of refraction.


CLS 359/903
TXT WITH MAGNET:

    Cross-reference art collection of patents wherein the optical element has a
    magnet for temporarily attaching it to any object containing ferrous
    material.

    (1)     Note.  This would include an optical element mounted on a magnet
    for placement on a refrigerator door wherein the sole purpose is for
    ornamental use.


CLS 360/
TTL DYNAMIC MAGNETIC INFORMA- TION STORAGE OR RETRIEVAL

CLS 360/
TXT

    I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF THE CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    A.      This class is an integral part of Class 369, Dynamic Information
    Storage or Retrieval, following subclass 18 and is the specific class for
    apparatus and corresponding processes for the storage and retrieval of
    information based on relative movement between a magnetic record carrier
    and a transducer.

    B.      This class also includes apparatus and corresponding processes for
    making copies or editing of records falling within the above definition.

    C.      A magnetic record carrier within the meaning of this class is an
    element which consists of a magnetizable material or is comprised of a
    coating or impregnation of magnetizable material which is intended for the
    storage of more than a single bit of information.  Storage elements which
    include discrete magnetic areas, inserts, spots, etc. each intended for the
    storage of single bits of information, whether or not relative motion is
    used in transducing that information, are not included in the above
    definition.  See Class 235, Registers, subclasses 449+ and 493 for the use
    of such elements.

    II.     SUBCOMBINATIONS OF DYNAMIC MAGNETIC RECORDERS OR REPRODUCERS

    A.      This class includes elements forming subcombinations specific to
    apparatus within the class definition such as record carriers, transducers,
    etc.

    B.      Electrical circuits not specific to magnetic recording or
    reproducing which may constitute subcombinations of such apparatus are
    classified in the appropriate class for such circuits.

    C.      Mechanisms forming subcombinations of apparatus within the class
    definition are classified in the appropriate mechanical class providing for
    such subject matter unless claimed in significant combination with specific
    recorder structure.

    III.    COMBINATIONS OF OTHER APPARATUS WHICH INCLUDE APPARATUS OF THIS
    CLASS

    A.      Significantly claimed apparatus external to this class, claimed in
    combination with apparatus under the class definition, which records or
    reproduces some quality or quantity related to such external apparatus or
    its function, is classified in the class appropriate to the external
    apparatus.

    B.      Nominally claimed apparatus external to this class, claimed in
    combination with apparatus under the class definition, is classified in
    this class unless provided for in the appropriate external class.

    C.      Because of the placement of Class 360 into the Class 369 schedule,
    this class is no longer exhaustive of dynamic magnetic storage or
    retrieval, as to the art now classified in subclasses 1-18 of Class 369.

    IV.     ORGANIZATION OF THIS CLASS

    A.      Special Purpose Devices: subclasses 1-17 are provided for devices
    where the major significance of the device is in its use or the result
    which it produces.

    B.      Signal Processing subclasses 18-54 are provided for devices which
    are basically electronic in nature and are used to modify, correct or
    insure the efficient storage or retrieval of information signals.

    C.      General Recording or Reproducing subclasses 55-68 are provided for
    methods or devices which are concerned with the physics of recording or
    reproducing or are electronic in nature and not limited to the types of
    signal processing provided for in section B above.

    D.      Automatic Control Systems subclasses 69-80 are provided for devices
    which, without proximate human intervention, will actively control a
    mechanism of this or an external class.

    E.      Transport Systems subclasses 81-101 are provided for mechanical
    devices which produce the relative movement between record carrier and
    transducer required by the class definition.

    F.      Physical Elements subclasses 102-136 are provided for physical
    elements forming subcombinations of apparatus within the class definition
    that are not classifiable elsewhere.

    G.      Miscellaneous subclass 137 is provided for subject matter not found
    above.

    V.      RECORDERS, REPRODUCERS, RELATED ELEMENTS OR METHODS FOUND IN OTHER
    CLASSES

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 603.01+ for, methods of making magnetic
    transducers.

    84,     Music, subclasses 601+, recording or reproducing means in
    combination with musical instruments.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, plastic compositions usable in
    magnetic record carriers.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, apparatus for making coated magnetic record
    carriers.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 300+, magnetic stock material which is
    the result of a Class 148 treatment or which are claimed in terms of
    specific magnetic properties.

    178,    Telegraphy, recording or reproducing means combined with code
    transmitters or receivers.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, switching devices usable
    in magnetic recorders or reproducers.

    206,    Special Receptacles and Packages, subclass 62, receptacles for
    magnetic record carriers.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, means for advancing a
    record carrier past a transducer.

    235,    Registers, subclasses 419+, for record controlled electromechanical
    calculators; subclasses 439+ and 487+, sensing or analyzing mechanism and
    records; subclass 154, data conversion usable in magnetic recording or
    reproducing.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, provides for technology centered
    on refinements of winding or unwinding, tensioning and guiding elongated
    material combined with a nominal work station. Accordingly, Class 242
    provides for inventions in winding and unwinding of magnetic tape, film, or
    wire where an element such as a transducer head or similar recording
    structure is named as a part of the winding or unwinding path.


            Class 360 provides for winding or guiding of a magnetic medium in
    combination with claimed magnetic recording or reproducing apparatus (i.e.,
    transducing head details or closely related structure that impact the
    transducing function unique to this art).

            Class 360 provides for claimed information erasure prevention means
    (other than a nominally recited pin or filler), details of a single
    recording element (e.g., a multitract transducing head), means to extract a
    loop of tape from the cartridge and transfer the loop about a named
    transducer head, a plurality of elements peculiar to a recorder (e.g.,
    alternately engageable record and erase heads), or structure peculiar to a
    recorder completely remote from winding, tensioning, or guiding (e.g.,
    signal volume control).

            Search Class 242 for unwinding/rewinding drives, and subcominations
    such as cartridge/cassette structure and related perfecting feature; e.g.,
    position retainers, brakes, brake release devices, door structures, pinch
    rollers, guide components, cartridge/cassette housing construction and
    material having a specific composition, hardness, thermal property,
    electrical property, antistatic property, etc., particularly subclasses:

            324+    for unwinding and rewinding                             an
    information convertible                 carrier, and 335+ for guiding,
             unwinding, or rewinding a              carrier stored in a
    cartridge/          cassette.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 62.51+, magnetic compositions.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, sheet record handling.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems; subclasses
    112+, class appropriate switching systems which are usable in dynamic
    information storage or retrieval.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 560+, positional
    servo systems; subclasses 567+, program or pattern controlled systems.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 244, magnetic field
    testing means usable in reproducing magnetic records; subclass 112, voltage
    or current storage means including magnetic storage.

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry; appropriate subclasses,
    electronic digital logic circuits usable in dynamic magnetic information
    storage or retrieval.


    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems; subclasses 1+ for miscellaneous signal discriminating or
    selecting; subclasses 100+, miscellaneous signal conversion, shaping or
    generating; subclasses 365+, miscellaneous gating usable in dynamic
    magnetic information storage or retrieval.

    329,    Demodulators, demodulators usable in magnetic reproduction.

    330,    Amplifiers, amplifiers usable in magnetic recording or reproducing.

    331,    Oscillators, oscillators usable in bias or erase circuits.

    332,    Modulators, modulators usable in magnetic recording.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 28, equalizers
    usable in magnetic recording or reproducing.

    336,    Inductor Devices, core and coil structures similar to those of
    magnetic recording or reproducing transducers.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, for code converters usable in
    or using dynamic storage techniques.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 418+ for computer graphics
    processing and subclasses 326+ for a computer operator interface.

    346,    Recorders, recorders usually of the graphic type and record
    carriers therefor.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, motion picture apparatus in combination
    with recorders or reproducers.

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, Projectors combined with recorders or
    reproducers.

    358,    Facsimile, recording or reproducing means combined with facsimile.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    281+ and 484, magneto-optical polarization devices usable in magnetic
    signal reproduction.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 143+, 159
    and 267 for demagnetizing means for records and heads when not in
    combination with recorders or reproducers.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 100+
    for generic data processing control systems; subclasses 400+ for particular
    application of data processing systems or calculating computers; subclasses
    550+ for data processing systems or calculating computers utilized to
    effect a measuring, testing, or monitoring operation of an external device
    or quantity; subclasses 600+ for hybrid computers; subclasses 700+ for
    digital calculating computers; subclasses 800+ for analog computers.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclass for
    magnetic, electric, or optical static storage/retrieval of information.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclasses 351+ for multiplex switching, and subclass 531 for magnetic core
    for switching or storage.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery,
    appropriate subclass for generic error checking systems.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 41, 51 and 67+, recorders or
    reproducers combined with telephones.

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 100+ for fluid bearings usable to space head
    from magnetic record carriers.

    386,    Television Signal Processing for Dynamic Recording or Reproducing,
    for recording or reproducing means combined with television receivers.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 1+ for
    artificial intelligence, subclasses 101+ for static presentation
    processing, and subclasses 200.3+ for multicomputer data transferring.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, appropriate subclasses for machine operators
    using magnetic records.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, appropriate subclasses for alloys
    which are claimed broadly as "magnetic", "magnetized" or "permanent magnet"
    or alloys defined only in terms of their composition which are inherently
    magnetic..

    427,    Coating Processes, methods of making and coating magnetic record
    carriers.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, articles usable as
    magnetic record carriers.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, appropriate subclasses for radiation imagery chemistry process,
    composition, or product used as a storage medium.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, recording or reproducing means
    combined with significant education apparatus.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 150+ for high temperature (Tc > 30 K) superconducting devices,
    particularly subclasses 170+ for dynamic information storage or retrieval.

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclass 4 for addressing dynamic storage devices including address
    formation or manipulation and subclasses 111+ for data accessing and
    control techniques for dynamic storage devices in digital data processing
    systems.


CLS 360/1
TXT Subject matter under the class definition which includes recording on or
    reproducing from an element which has utility in addition to being a
    magnetic record carrier.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of devices classified herein are devices which
    record on or reproduce from razor blades, tire beads, food cans, price
    tags, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Elements used as record carriers in this and indented
    subclasses which are not inherently magnetic may have magnetic strips,
    coatings or other magnetic elements affixed thereto to allow for their use
    as magnetic record carriers.


CLS 360/2
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the element used as a record
    carrier is in a flat geometric form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 449 and 450 for sensing mechanisms utilized
    to sense discrete bits of magnetic material, the discrete bits being coded
    markings on a record.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclass 308 and indented subclasses,
    particularly subclasses 311+ for card shaped elements used in teaching and
    having information recorded thereon.


CLS 360/3
TXT Subject matter under subclasses 1 wherein the element used as a record
    carrier is a motion picture film.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 1+ for sound recording and
    reproducing combined with motion pictures.


CLS 360/4
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including apparatus which is to
    be manually manipulated and it is the manipulation of such apparatus which
    generates the information signal that is to be recorded.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    400,    Typewriting Machines,  appropriate subclasses for machine operators
    including magnetic records.


CLS 360/5
TXT Subject matter under the class definition for automatically sensing the
    occurrence of a condition, retaining information concerning that occurrence
    and deleting or disregarding unwanted information.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of devices classified herein are crash, transient
    and surveillance recorders.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 50 for voice
    controlled relays which operate nonmagnetic sound recorders.


CLS 360/6
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in combination with meters or
    sensors of particular application.

    (1)     Note.  See section III above.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of devices classified herein are recorders
    associated with utility meters, sensors of seismic or other natural
    phenomena and body tissue analyzing devices.

    (3)     Note.  Ordinary sound microphones and video cameras are not
    considered sensors of particular application as defined above.  Recorders
    in combination with such microphones or cameras are classified in
    subclasses provided below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, subclasses 14-18, for non- magnetic recorders combined
    with registers, indicators or alarms.


CLS 360/7
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein a nondigital signal is
    recorded and momentarily reproduced for the specific purpose of introducing
    a delay in the signal.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus classified herein is used for purposes such as
    censoring and generating artificial reverberation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for recirculation or delay of a digital signal.


CLS 360/8
TXT Subject matter under the class definition specifically arranged for
    recording or reproducing a signal in such a manner that the signal, as
    recorded, has redundant portions deleted therefrom or, as reproduced,
    occupies a different amount of time or a different band of frequencies than
    that occupied by the original signal.

    (1)     Note.  Changes in either or both of duration and frequency may be
    produced by the subject matter of this and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    704,    Data Processing:  Speech Signal Processing, Linguistics, Language
    Translation, and Audio Compression/Decompression, subclasses 500 through
    504 for bandwidth, or time compression, or expansion of audio signals.


CLS 360/12
TXT Subject matter under the class definition for recording or reproducing
    information in such a manner that an appropriate announcement may be
    selected or synthesized in response to a sensed condition or predetermined
    command.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of devices classified herein are: Time or
    temperature announcing machines, talking voltmeters and travelogue
    reproducers responsive to location.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 41 and 67+ for subject matter
    of this type in combination with a telephone.


CLS 360/13
TXT Subject matter under the class definition for deleting, adding or
    rearranging portions of a recording.

    (1)     Note.  Both manual cutting and splicing of record carrier portions
    and reproducing from one record carrier and recording onto the same or
    another record carrier are included in this subclass.


CLS 360/15
TXT Subject matter under the class definition for duplicating records.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 84+ for
    duplicating nonmagnetic sound records.


CLS 360/16
TXT Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein a blank record carrier is placed
    in contact with the record carrier to be copied and duplication occurs at
    the point of contact.


CLS 360/17
TXT Subject matter under subclass 16 wherein a magnetic field in addition to
    that of the record carrier to be copied is applied at the point of contact.


CLS 360/18
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein separate information
    signals are recorded in such a manner that they occupy co-extensive or
    overlapping areas on a record carrier and, during reproduction, are again
    separable.

    (1)     Note.  Separable components of single signals such as video and
    synchronizing components of a normal television signal or data and timing
    components of a digital signal are not considered separate information
    signals within the meaning of the above definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33+,    for recording television signals including synchronizing components.

    39+,    for recording digital signals including timing components.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for multiplexing
    systems and techniques.


CLS 360/20
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 wherein the separate signals occupy
    different frequency bands.


CLS 360/21
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 wherein the separate signals are recorded
    using a head or heads with gaps positioned at different angles with respect
    to the record carrier for each of the separate signals.


CLS 360/22
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein a single information
    signal is divided and recorded on plural distinct tracks or reproduced from
    such tracks and recombined into a single signal.

    (1)     Note.  Transverse track portions such as that produced by moving a
    head at an angle to the direction of movement of a tape are not considered
    distinct tracks within the meaning of the above definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for electronically correcting phasing errors between signals which
    may be recorded on plural distinct tracks.

    76,     for physically moving a multi-track head with respect to a record
    for skew correction.


CLS 360/23
TXT Subject matter under subclass 22 wherein the signal is divided into
    increments separate in time and sequential increments are commutated
    between plural distinct tracks.


CLS 360/24
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein a signal is divided, the
    divided portions are  separately processed and are then recorded on the
    same track of a record carrier.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus wherein a single reproduced signal is divided,
    separately processed and recombined is also included in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 407+ for miscellaneous gating of plural inputs to a
    single output.


CLS 360/25
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the characteristics of a
    particular record carrier are determined or a signal to be recorded is
    modified to compensate for the determined characteristics of a particular
    record carrier.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of record carrier characteristics are:
    inhomogeneous magnetic coating, incomplete erasure of a prior recording and
    peculiar hysteresis.

    (2)     Note. Characteristics of magnetic recording or reproducing which
    are dictated by physical law and are not attributable to peculiarities of
    the record carrier are not included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65,     for equalization circuits.


CLS 360/26
TXT Subject matter under the class definition which is electronic in nature
    (e.g., adjustable delay lines, gates, registers) for producing time
    coincidence between plural related information signals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for apparatus which corrects timing errors in a digital signal.

    76,     for apparatus which physically moves multiple track heads to
    produce an effect similar to that of the apparatus of this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclass 1
    for generic skew detection or correction.

    386,    Television Signal Processing for Dynamic Recording or Reproducing,
    subclass 41 for phase control of carrier signal in a recorded color
    television signal.


CLS 360/27
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein, during recording of an
    information signal, a control signal is generated and recorded and is used
    during reproduction to control the electronic circuitry through which the
    information signal is processed.

    (1)     Note.  The control signal used herein is distinct from or in
    addition to the normal clock and synchronizing signals associated with
    digital and video signals, respectively.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13+,    for magnetic record editing where a recorded control signal may be
    used.

    51,     for controlling digital signal reproduction using clock signals.

    69+,    for controlling the recorder mechanism in response to a recorded
    control signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    386,    Television Signal Processing for Dynamic Recording or Reproducing,
    subclass 16 for time correction of a recorded color television signal using
    a recorded reference signal.


CLS 360/28
TXT Subject matter under subclass 27 wherein the control signal is a recorded
    reference carrier which is used to control the demodulation of the
    reproduced information signal.


CLS 360/29
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including specific modulator or
    demodulator circuitry or techniques.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses for demodulators of general
    utility.

    332,    Modulators, appropriate subclasses, for modulators and demodulators
    of general utility.


CLS 360/30
TXT Subject matter under subclass 29 including specific frequency modulation or
    demodulation of a signal.


CLS 360/31
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein, during recording, the
    recorded information signal is reproduced in whole or in part for
    qualitative analysis of the operation of the recorder system or a part
    thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for record carrier characteristic determination and compensation.

    53,     for digital data error checking.


CLS 360/32
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including producing a digital
    equivalent of a nondigital signal for recording, or producing a nondigital
    equivalent of a reproduced digital signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 321+, for analog-digital converters.


CLS 360/39
TXT Subject matter under the class definition of specific utility in treating a
    digital signal for recording or reproducing.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is the residual area for devices and methods
    concerned with processing digital signals in a manner not provided for
    above.  Digital signal processing properly classified above should not, as
    a matter of course, be cross-referenced here.

    (2)     Note.  Although specific mechanical apparatus may be included in
    the subject matter of this and indented subclasses, the subject matter
    herein remains generally  electronic in nature and its utility is in
    distinctive handling of a digital signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55+,    for generally usable recording or reproducing techniques.

    69+,    for automatically controlling recorder or reproducer mechanisms.

    79,     for recorder or reproducer control of an external device

    81+,    88 and 101, for recorder or reproducer mechanisms.

    102+,   104+, 110+, and 131+, for recorder or reproducer elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, appropriate subclasses, particularly 17+ for code
    recorders.

    235,    Registers, subclasses 61+, for calculators combined with recorders.

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, for electronic digital circuits
    operating on a digital signal.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 1+ for pulse discriminating or selecting and subclasses
    100+ for pulse parameter (e.g., amplitude) control.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclass 15 for a magnetic
    pattern reading type analog to digital converter and subclasses 50+ for
    code converters.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 130+
    for general purpose digital control systems (i.e., for example, computer
    arrangements for open and closed loop feedback control), and subclasses
    700+ for digital calculating computers and generic digital arithmetic
    processing circuits and methods.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclass for
    the static storage/retrieval of information.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 180+ for
    reliability and availability in a digital data processing system.

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclasses 1+ for addressing combined with specific memory configurations
    (e.g., extended, expanded, dynamic, etc.) in a digital data processing
    system, subclasses 100+ for generalized address forming, and subclasses
    200+ for generalized storage accessing and control in a digital data
    processing system.


CLS 360/40
TXT Subject matter under subclass 39 including generating a waveform from
    digital data or reproducing such a waveform, the frequency, shape, polarity
    or other characteristic thereof being indicative of the digital data.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, appropriate subclasses for
    code converters.


CLS 360/41
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 wherein a first or opposite polarization
    of the record throughout an entire bit cell is indicative of a first or
    second binary digit and transitions in polarity occur only between unlike
    digits.

    Example:


CLS 360/42
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 wherein a transition in polarity in a
    first direction is indicative of a first binary digit and a transition in
    polarity in an opposite direction is indicative of the second binary digit.

    Example:


CLS 360/43
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 wherein a first binary digit is indicated
    by one full cycle of the waveform per bit cell and the second binary digit
    is indicated by one-half cycle of the waveform per bit cell.

    Example:


CLS 360/44
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 wherein a transition in polarity occurs
    within the boundaries of each bit cell and the position of that transition
    is indicative of the data recorded.

    Example:


CLS 360/45
TXT Subject matter under subclass 39 wherein the fringing effects of high
    density recording are subdued.


CLS 360/46
TXT Subject matter under subclass 39 including circuitry proximate to the
    recording transducer for producing sufficient current in response to an
    input signal to properly polarize the record.


CLS 360/47
TXT Subject matter under subclass 39 wherein the same data is recorded in
    plural tracks in the same or complimentary forms.


CLS 360/48
TXT Subject matter under subclass 39 wherein the data is recorded in words or
    blocks of specific numbers of bits or wherein words or blocks of data are
    arranged in a specific manner on the record.


CLS 360/49
TXT Subject matter under subclass 39 including specific patterns of digits
    which are used to indicate the location of selected blocks of data.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for automatically positioning a par- ticular portion of a record
    carrier at a transducing station.


CLS 360/50
TXT Subject matter under subclass 39 including controlling the spacing between
    blocks of data.


CLS 360/51
TXT Subject matter under subclass 39 including developing or using a timing
    signal for gating digits or data during recording or reproducing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for electronic skew correction using data clocking.


CLS 360/52
TXT Subject matter under subclass 51, including producing an increment of
    movement between record and head for each digit of data transduced.


CLS 360/53
TXT Subject matter under subclass 39 including checking reproduced data for
    errors in content.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery,
    appropriate subclass for error checking system.


CLS 360/54
TXT Subject matter under subclass 39 including recording, reproducing and
    re-recording data in one continuing operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for momentary delay of an analog signal.


CLS 360/55
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including the use of magnetic or
    other physical phenomena, specific techniques or specific circuitry for
    magnetically recording or reproducing information in any signal form.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is the residual area for devices and methods
    concerned with processing of signals in a manner not provided for above.
    Subject matter properly classified above should not, as a matter of course,
    be cross-referenced here.

    (2)     Note.  Documents including general descriptions of the phenomena of
    magnetic recording but are principally concerned with mechanisms or
    elements falling within the class definition should not be classified in
    this subclass.  See mechanism or element subclasses below.


CLS 360/57
TXT Subject matter under subclass 55 including recording information by
    selectively erasing a prerecorded signal.


CLS 360/58
TXT Subject matter under subclass 55 including shifting the boundary between
    oppositely polarized regions of a record carrier in response to an
    information signal.


CLS 360/59
TXT Subject matter under subclass 55 including changing the coercivity of a
    record carrier by applying heat thereto in proportion to an information
    signal or in addition to a magnetic field which is proportional to an
    information signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16+,    for thermo-magnetic record copying.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, subclass 74.2, for thermo- magnetic pictorial recording.


CLS 360/60
TXT Subject matter under subclass 55 including sensing or indicating the
    existence of an earlier recording on a record carrier and preventing
    erasure or double exposure of the carrier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    380,    Cryptography, subclass 4 for modifying a recorded signal to prevent
    rerecording.


CLS 360/61
TXT Subject matter under subclass 55 including specific switching elements or
    techniques within the information signal circuitry.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses,
    for switching devices.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 112+
    for class appropriate switching systems.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 365+ for miscellaneous gating circuits.


CLS 360/62
TXT Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein the switching accomplishes a
    change between recording and reproducing modes of operation.


CLS 360/63
TXT Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein the switching accomplishes the
    selection of one or more of a plurality of stationary transducers.


CLS 360/64
TXT Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein the switching accomplishes the
    selection of that transducer which is in engagement with the record carrier
    from a plurality of transducers which are alternately in engagement with
    the record carrier.


CLS 360/65
TXT Subject matter under subclass 55 including specific circuitry or techniques
    for correcting the inherent nonlinear frequency characteristics of magnetic
    recording or reproducing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for split signal equalizers.

    25,     for compensating for record carrier peculiarities.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 28 and the classes
    indicated in the definition of that subclass for equalizers in general.


CLS 360/66
TXT Subject matter under subclass 55 including specific circuitry or techniques
    for correcting the inherent nonlinear amplitude characteristics of magnetic
    recording or for erasing existing recordings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for modifying information or bias signal to accommodate for record
    carrier characteristics.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, appropriate subclasses, for oscillators usable in
    biasing or erasing.


CLS 360/67
TXT Subject matter under subclass 55 including specific circuitry or techniques
    for amplifying an information signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, appropriate subclasses, for amplifiers usable in
    magnetic recording or reproducing.


CLS 360/68
TXT Subject matter under subclass 67 wherein the amplification is specifically
    adapted for recording.


CLS 360/69
TXT Subject matter under the class definition which, without proximate human
    intervention, will actively control a recorder or reproducer mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus of this and indented subclasses usually require
    the sensing of a control signal from the record carrier to control the
    recorder or reproducer mechanism.  However, devices responsive to signals
    emanating from external devices, or devices responsive to control signals
    which normally accompany or are a part of an information signal to be
    recorded or reproduced, are also included in this and indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  The signal sensed from the record carrier may be a signal
    which was magnetically recorded thereon or an electrical or mechanical
    signal generated by mechanically, electrically or optically sensing an
    attachment to or modification of the record carrier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 10+, for
    material- responsive control means.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 324+ for means for
    unwinding and rewinding a machine convertible information carrier; e.g., a
    magnetic tape, particularly subclasses 333+ for automated stop or reversal
    control for the carrier, subclasses 334+ for a carrier speed or tension
    control, and subclass 357 for a detector or stop.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly 560+, for automatic motor control devices.


CLS 360/70
TXT Subject matter under subclass 69, including controlling the speed or
    position of movement of a head with respect to a moving record carrier or
    vice versa.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes rotating head pressure shoe servos.


CLS 360/71
TXT Subject matter under subclass 69 including controlling record carrier
    movement or position with respect to a transducing position.


CLS 360/72.1
TXT Locating specific areas:

    Subject matter under subclass 71 wherein the record carrier movement is
    controlled to bring selected areas of the record into operative position at
    the recording head to transduce the information recorded thereat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13+,    for editing magnetic records which may involve locating specific
    areas.

    74.1,   for stopping and reversing per se.


CLS 360/72.2
TXT Responsive to recorded address:

    Subject matter under subclass 72.1 wherein the record carrier has address
    signals recorded thereon and these are read to locate the selected area.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    386,    Television Signal Processing for Dynamic Recording or Reproducing,
    subclass 95 for recording of television signal with another signal and
    subclass 79 for locus or track control having a control signal recorded on
    the medium.


CLS 360/72.3
TXT Responsive to tape transport:

    Subject matter under subclass 72.1 wherein the transport mechanism itself
    is monitored to control the location of the selected area (e.g., reel or
    capstan shaft rotation).


CLS 360/73.01
TXT Speed:

    Subject matter under subclass 71 which controls the speed of a record
    carrier past a transducing position.


CLS 360/73.02
TXT Control of relative speed between carriers:

    Subject matter under subclass 73.01 which controls the difference in speed
    between plural record carriers.


CLS 360/73.03
TXT Rotary carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 73.01 including structure to advance the
    record medium in a circular path past the transducing position.


CLS 360/73.04
TXT Linear carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 73.01 in which the motion of the record
    carrier is substantially along a single axis.


CLS 360/73.05
TXT Plural speed transport:

    Subject matter under subclass 73.04 having structure to provide differing
    speeds for the record carrier.


CLS 360/73.06
TXT Automatic change between fixed speeds:

    Subject matter under subclass 73.05 for changing between two predetermined
    speeds in the same direction in response to a sensed condition or signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74.1+,  for stopping and reversing of a magnetic record carrier.


CLS 360/73.07
TXT Automatic selection of carrier or track speed:

    Subject matter under subclass 73.05 for selection of the speed of advance
    of the carrier in response to a record carrier or track parameter.


CLS 360/73.08
TXT Variable speed:

    Subject matter under subclass 73.05 including adjustment or variation of
    the speed of the record carrier.


CLS 360/73.09
TXT Constant speed:

    Subject matter under subclass 73.04 for advancing an elongate record
    carrier past a transducing position at a constant speed.


CLS 360/73.11
TXT By reproduced control signal and transport derived signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 73.09 wherein the speed of the record carrier
    is controlled by a signal reproduced from the record carrier and a signal
    sensed by a condition of the carrier advancing mechanism.


CLS 360/73.12
TXT By reproduced control signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 73.09 wherein a constant speed record carrier
    advancing mechanism is controlled by a signal reproduced from the carrier.


CLS 360/73.13
TXT From separate track:

    Subject matter under subclass 73.12 wherein the control signal is stored on
    a track on the record carrier distinct from other information recorded
    thereon.


CLS 360/73.14
TXT By signal derived from transport:

    Subject matter under subclass 73.09 wherein the speed of the record carrier
    is controlled by a signal sensed by a condition of the carrier advancing
    mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73.11,  for record carrier speed control by a signal derived from the
    record transport combined with a signal reproduced from the record carrier.


CLS 360/74.1
TXT Stopping or reversing:

    Subject matter under subclass 71 wherein stopping or reversing of the
    record carrier's movement is controlled.


CLS 360/74.2
TXT Responsive to real rotation:

    Subject matter under subclass 74.1 where the stopping or reversing is
    controlled by detecting stoppage of reel rotation.


CLS 360/74.3
TXT Responsive to tape tension:

    Subject matter under subclass 74.1 where the stopping or reversing is
    controlled by detecting a predetermined tape tension.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass includes detecting the
    absence of tape.


CLS 360/74.4
TXT Responsive to magnetic recorded signals:

    Subject matter under subclass 74.1 where signals are magnetically recorded
    on the record and the stopping or reversing is controlled by detecting
    these signals.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass includes sensing the
    absence of the magnetic signals.

    (2)     Note.  The magnetic signals are either the information signals or
    separate control signals recorded on the record.


CLS 360/74.5
TXT Responsive to physical property of record:

    Subject matter under subclass 74.1 where the stopping or reversing is
    controlled by detecting a physical property of the record (i.e., notch,
    slot, etc.).


CLS 360/74.6
TXT Photoelectric:

    Subject matter under subclass 74.5 where a portion of the record has a
    light transmitting or reflecting property that differs from the rest of the
    record and photoelectric means are used to detect such to control the
    stopping or reversing.


CLS 360/74.7
TXT Conductive:

    Subject matter under subclass 74.5 where a portion of the record has an
    electrical conductivity that differs from the rest of the record and the
    stopping or reversing is controlled by detecting such.


CLS 360/75
TXT Subject matter under subclass 69 including controlling head position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    386,    Television Signal Processing for Dynamic Recording or Reproducing,
    subclasses 6 through 8 for controlling head position during fast, slow, or
    stop reproduction of a recorded color television signal.


CLS 360/76
TXT Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein the angle between head gap or gaps
    and record track or tracks is controlled.


CLS 360/77.01
TXT Track centering:

    Subject matter under subclass 75 for aligning a transducer head with the
    midpoint of a continuous information containing path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 43+ for a
    transducer tracking servomechanism in a nonmagnetic dynamic recording or
    reproducing device.


CLS 360/77.02
TXT Rotary carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 77.01 which controls a transducer centering
    position relative to a circular revolving medium.


CLS 360/77.03
TXT By nonmagnetic sensing (e.g., optical, capacitive):

    Subject matter under subclass 77.02 responsive to a signal produced in
    response to a property of the record carrier other than a magnetic
    property, or by a nonmagnetic auxiliary element.

    (1)     Note.  Such an auxiliary element may include a potententiometer, or
    an optical grating, mechanically coupled to the transducer element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 14 for
    simultaneous magnetic and nonmagnetic signal reproduction; subclasses 43+
    for servo positioning of a nonmagnetic reproduction transducer; subclasses
    100+ for signal reproduction from an optical track; and subclass 126 for
    signal reproduction from a capacitive track.


CLS 360/77.04
TXT By memory storage of repeatable error or correction:

    Subject matter under subclass 77.02 including a signal storage device which
    is used to generate a transducer head position control signal.


CLS 360/77.05
TXT By servo signal component from carrier surface separate from information
    signal bearing surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 77.02 wherein the record carrier includes two
    surfaces one of which has a continuous path along which an information
    signal is stored and the other has a continuous path along which at least a
    component of a transducer head positioning servo control signal is stored.


CLS 360/77.06
TXT Reproduced data signal used for tracking:

    Subject matter under subclass 77.02 for processing a reproduced information
    signal to control the transducer position.


CLS 360/77.07
TXT By tracking signal recorded on or immediately beneath surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 77.02 for processing a signal reproduced from
    the record carrier for controlling transducer head motion and which signal
    is distinct from a reproduced information signal.


CLS 360/77.08
TXT Distinct servo sector:

    Subject matter under subclass 77.07 wherein a transducer head motor control
    signal is stored in a disk sector distinct from sectors containing
    information signals.


CLS 360/77.11
TXT Continuous servo signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 77.07 wherein the record carrier includes a
    continuous path along which a transducer positioning servo control signal
    is stored.


CLS 360/77.12
TXT Elongate web carrier (i.e., tape):

    Subject matter under subclass 77.01 wherein the transducer head is aligned
    with the midpoint of a track on a record carrier the length of which is
    much greater than its width.


CLS 360/77.13
TXT Transverse scan path:

    Subject matter under subclass 77.12 where the resultant motion of the
    transducer head is at an angle to the forward motion of the record carrier.


CLS 360/77.14
TXT By pilot signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 77.13 wherein the centering of the transducer
    head over the transverse track on the record carrier is controlled by a
    reference signal recorded on the transverse track.


CLS 360/77.15
TXT Plural pilot signals along single transverse path:

    Subject matter under subclass 77.14 wherein multiple reference signals
    recorded along a transverse track on the record carrier are used to control
    the motion of the transducer head.


CLS 360/77.16
TXT Having head deflection drive (e.g., piezoelectric bimorph):

    Subject matter under subclass 77.13 having an electrostatically actuated
    device for moving the transducer head.


CLS 360/77.17
TXT Dithering:

    Subject matter under subclass 77.16 in which a low amplitude A.C. signal is
    applied to the transducer head deflection drive.


CLS 360/78.01
TXT Track changing:

    Subject matter under subclass 75 having structure to change the path of the
    head on the record medium from one continuous information containing path
    to another.


CLS 360/78.02
TXT Tape:

    Subject matter under subclass 78.01 wherein the length of the record
    carrier is much greater than its width.


CLS 360/78.03
TXT Plural tapes:

    Subject matter under subclass 78.02 wherein the transducer head changes
    between tracks on plural magnetic tapes.


CLS 360/78.04
TXT For rotary carrier (e.g., disc):

    Subject matter under subclass 78.01 which causes a change in transducing
    position between tracks on a record carrier moving in circular motion.


CLS 360/78.05
TXT Coarse and fine head drive motors:

    Subject matter under subclass 78.04 in which the transducer head is moved
    over the disk by plural motors having different resolution.


CLS 360/78.06
TXT Specified velocity pattern during access:

    Subject matter under subclass 78.04 having a device for moving the
    transducer head in a particular sequence of velocities to access the
    desired track.


CLS 360/78.07
TXT Controlled by memory device:

    Subject matter under subclass 78.06 having a signal storage device which is
    used to generate a transducer head velocity control signal.


CLS 360/78.08
TXT Specified spatial pattern during access:

    Subject matter under subclass 78.04 wherein the motion of the transducer
    head between tracks has at least one controlled change in direction.


CLS 360/78.09
TXT Including model of servo system or element:

    Subject matter under subclass 78.04 in which the track changing arrangement
    includes a device which simulates the operation of a servo system which
    controls the motion of a transducer head, or a component of such a system.


CLS 360/78.11
TXT Including nonmagnetic position sensing:

    Subject matter under subclass 78.04 having track changing structure
    responsive to a signal produced in response to a property of the record
    carrier other than a magnetic property, or by a nonmagnetic auxiliary
    element.

    (1)     Note.  Such an auxiliary element may include a potententiometer, or
    an optical grating, mechanically coupled to the transducer element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 14 for
    simultaneous magnetic and nonmagnetic signal reproduction; subclasses 30+
    for track selection in a nonmagnetic reproducing arrangement; reproduction
    transducer; subclasses 100+ for signal reproduction from an optical track;
    and subclass 126 for signal reproduction from a capacitive track.


CLS 360/78.12
TXT Including particular head actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 78.04 including a detail of a transducer head
    moving mechanism.


CLS 360/78.13
TXT Stepping motor:

    Subject matter under subclass 78.12 wherein the head is moved by an
    electric motor which produces motion in a series of discrete steps.


CLS 360/78.14
TXT By recorded servo reference or address signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 78.04 wherein the head is controlled by a
    reproduced signal representing the position or address of the transducer
    head on the record carrier disk.


CLS 360/78.15
TXT Drum:

    Subject matter under subclass 78.04 wherein the transducer head moves
    between tracks on the curved surface of a cylindrical record carrier.


CLS 360/79
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein a signal sensed from the
    record carrier is used to control an external device.

    (1)     Note.  The signal sensed from the record carrier may be a signal
    which was magnetically recorded thereon or an electrical or mechanical
    signal generated by mechanically, electrically or optically sensing an
    attachment to or modification of the record carrier.

    (2)     Note.  A device which is extraneous to the normal function of
    recorders such as a printer for printing a label on the record from which
    the control signal is developed, although included within the same housing
    as the recorder, is considered an external device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 567+ and classes
    indicated in the search notes thereunder, for program or pattern controlled
    devices.


CLS 360/80
TXT Subject matter under subclass 79 wherein the external device is a slide or
    movie projector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 15+, for this subject matter
    with significant motion picture structure.

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, subclasses 15+, for this subject matter
    with significant slide projector structure.


CLS 360/81
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including a specific mechanism
    for moving a record carrier past a head which is also moving relative to
    both record carrier and the mechanism base during the recording or
    reproducing process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101     and 107+, for moving head mounting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 97 for storage
    or retrieval by other than magnetic recording or reproduction with
    transverse head motion.


CLS 360/82
TXT Subject matter under subclass 81 wherein the record carrier is in the form
    of a closed loop.


CLS 360/83
TXT Subject matter under subclass 81 wherein the record carrier is in the form
    of an elongated tape.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses,
    for tape drive means.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 324+ for means for
    unwinding and rewinding a machine convertible information carrier; e.g., a
    magnetic tape, particularly subclasses 333+ for automated stop or reversal
    control for the carrier, subclasses 334+ for a carrier speed or tension
    control, and subclass 357 for a detector or stop.


CLS 360/84
TXT Subject matter under subclass 83 wherein the movement of the head is a
    rotational movement.


CLS 360/85
TXT Subject matter under subclass 84 wherein the record carrier is enclosed in
    a removable container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 324.2, 326+, and 335+
    for a cartridge storage for a magnet carrier.


CLS 360/86
TXT Subject matter under subclass 81 wherein the record carrier is in the form
    of a disk.


CLS 360/87
TXT Subject matter under subclass 81 wherein the record carrier is in the form
    of a drum.


CLS 360/88
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including a specific mechanism
    for moving a record carrier past a head which is stationary during the
    recording or reproducing process.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 258+, for
    nonmagnetic devices of this type.


CLS 360/89
TXT Subject matter under subclass 88 wherein the record carrier is in the form
    of a wire.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 324.1+ for a wire-type,
    magnetic, signal carrier.


CLS 360/90
TXT Subject matter under subclass 88 wherein the record carrier is in the form
    of a tape.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for tape drive means.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 324+ for a device for
    unwinding and rewinding a machine convertible information carrier; e.g., a
    magnetic tape or image film.


CLS 360/91
TXT Subject matter under subclass 90 including means for handling a plurality
    of tapes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 6 and 123, for multiple motion
    picture recorders and reproducers.


CLS 360/92
TXT Subject matter under subclass 91 wherein the plural tapes are enclosed in
    single or plural containers.


CLS 360/93
TXT Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein the tape is enclosed in a
    removable container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 324.2, 326+, and 335+
    for a cartridge storage for an information bearing carrier.


CLS 360/94
TXT Subject matter under subclass 93 including means for accommodating or for
    adapting the recorder for use with different types of record containers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclass 336 for an adaptive or
    convertible cartridge or cartridge utilization device adapting a cartridge
    for a magnetic tape or the like to be used with different components.


CLS 360/95
TXT Subject matter under subclass 93 including means for extracting a portion
    of the tape from the container.


CLS 360/96.1
TXT Plural reels:

    Subject matter under subclass 93 wherein the tape is wound on plural reels
    within the container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 335+, particularly
    subclasses 341+ for a cartridge containing separate supply and take-up
    coils.


CLS 360/96.2
TXT With dual capstan drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 96.1 including dual capstan drive for moving
    the tape.


CLS 360/96.3
TXT Reel drive details:

    Subject matter under subclass 96.1 including details of the reel drive
    mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 340 and 349+ for a
    particular coil drive.


CLS 360/96.4
TXT With common capstan drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 96.3 wherein a single motor provides both the
    reel and capstan drive.


CLS 360/96.5
TXT Container mounting details:

    Subject matter under subclass 96.1 including details of the container
    mounting mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and its indents also include container
    mounting structure where there is only a nominal recitation of the
    transport.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 338+ and 339 for
    details of a cartridge mounting.


CLS 360/96.6
TXT With pivotal holder:

    Subject matter under subclass 96.5 wherein the container mounting mechanism
    includes a pivoted container holder which moves in an arc between a
    container loading position and a transducing position.


CLS 360/97.01
TXT Disk record:

    Subject matter under subclass 88 in which the record carrier is a flat
    circular element.

    (1)     Note.  The mechanism for imparting motion for recording and
    reproduction is generally in a drive assembly and rotates the disk about
    its axis of symmetry.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Code Data Generation or Conversion, subclass 15 for a digital
    pattern reading code converter or generator with a magnetic code disk.


CLS 360/97.02
TXT Environmental control (e.g., air filter, temperature control):

    Subject matter under subclass 97.01 wherein an ambient condition of the
    disk drive is controlled.


CLS 360/97.03
TXT Plural disks:

    Subject matter under subclass 97.02 for varying or maintaining an
    environmental condition for a disk drive which has structure for concurrent
    accommodation of multiple disks.


CLS 360/97.04
TXT Flexible disk:

    Subject matter under subclass 97.02 for varying or maintaining an
    environmental condition in a disk drive for a disk record carrier which is
    bendable or pliable without permanent change.


CLS 360/98.01
TXT Plural disks:

    Subject matter under subclass 97.01 including structure for concurrent
    accommodation of multiple disks.


CLS 360/98.02
TXT Axially fixed flexible disks:

    Subject matter under subclass 98.01 having structure for holding multiple
    flexible disks about a common axis.


CLS 360/98.03
TXT With pneumatic partioning of disks:

    Subject matter under subclass 98.02 with separation of a stack of flexible
    disks by use of a flowing stream of air.


CLS 360/98.04
TXT Changer:

    Subject matter under subclass 98.01 for selectively moving a disk to the
    rotating mechanism in the drive.


CLS 360/98.05
TXT Control detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 98.04 including a detail of a changer motion
    controlling mechanism.


CLS 360/98.06
TXT Mechanical detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 98.04 including a detail of disk manipulating
    structure.


CLS 360/98.07
TXT Rotational drive detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 98.01 including a structural detail of the
    disk rotating device in the drive.


CLS 360/98.08
TXT Seating of disks:

    Subject matter under subclass 98.01 including a feature for retaining one
    of the disks in or on a disk rotating device.


CLS 360/99.01
TXT Flexible disk:

    Subject matter under subclass 97.01 wherein the disk record carrier is
    bendable or pliable without permanent change.


CLS 360/99.02
TXT Loading or ejecting mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 99.01 for moving the disk to or from the
    drive location where recording or reproduction is performed.


CLS 360/99.03
TXT Motorized:

    Subject matter under subclass 99.02 wherein the loading or ejecting
    mechanism is operated by an electric motor.


CLS 360/99.04
TXT Rotational drive detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 99.01 including a structural detail of the
    disk rotating device in the drive.


CLS 360/99.05
TXT Disk seating:

    Subject matter under subclass 99.01 for retaining the flexible disk in or
    on a disk rotating device.


CLS 360/99.06
TXT Loading or ejecting mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 97.01 for moving the disk to or from the
    drive location where recording or reproduction is performed.


CLS 360/99.07
TXT Motorized:

    Subject matter under subclass 99.06 wherein the loading or ejecting
    mechanism is operated by an electric motor.


CLS 360/99.08
TXT Rotational drive detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 97.01 including a structural detail of the
    disk rotating device in the drive.


CLS 360/99.09
TXT Movable drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 99.08 for moving the drive to a disk storage
    location.


CLS 360/99.11
TXT Stationary drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 99.08 with structure to move a disk from a
    storage location to the drive.


CLS 360/99.12
TXT Disk seating:

    Subject matter under subclass 97.01 including a feature for retaining the
    disk in or on a disk rotating device.


CLS 360/100.1
TXT Drum record:

    Subject matter under subclass 88 in which the record carrier is the curved
    surface of a cylindrical element.


CLS 360/101
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including a specific mechanism
    for moving a head past a record carrier which is stationary during the
    recording or reproducing process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     for moving-head and moving-record devices.


CLS 360/102
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including the generation of a
    fluid bearing between a record carrier and a head.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99,     for flexible disk devices which usually involve the use of a fluid
    bearing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 100+, for fluid bearings in general.


CLS 360/103
TXT Subject matter under subclass 102, wherein the head is mounted in such
    fashion as to allow it to move into a floating position with respect to the
    record carrier.


CLS 360/104
TXT Subject matter under the class definition, including specific mechanical
    means for holding a head in a proper position with respect to a record
    carrier.


CLS 360/105
TXT Subject matter under subclass 104 wherein the positioning means allows
    selective movement of the head to a position other than the transducing
    position.


CLS 360/106
TXT Subject matter under subclass 104 wherein the positioning means allows
    selective movement of the head between several transducing positions.


CLS 360/107
TXT Subject matter under subclass 104 wherein the positioning means allows for
    or causes movement of the head during the process of recording or
    reproducing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     for moving-head and moving-record devices.

    101,    for moving-head stationary-record devices.


CLS 360/108
TXT Subject matter under subclass 107 including means for communicating a
    signal between the moving head and a stationary part of the recorder.


CLS 360/109
TXT Subject matter under subclass 104 wherein the positioning means allows
    minor repositioning of the head within a transducing position.


CLS 360/110
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including specific structure of a
    transducer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 603, for methods of manufacturing magnetic
    transducers.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate sub- classes, for inductors in
    general.


CLS 360/111
TXT Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein the intensity of the flux
    emanating from a record is determined by applying a carrier wave to the
    head and detecting the modulation of that carrier wave caused by the flux.

    (1)     Note.  Excitation circuitry for flux gate heads is included herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 253+, for
    magnetometers.


CLS 360/112
TXT Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein the intensity of the flux
    emanating from a record is determined by generating an electric field in an
    element exhibiting the Hall effect and detecting the modulation of the
    field caused by the flux.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 251, for Hall effect
    magnetic sensors in general.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 9 for Hall
    effect magnetic bubble devices, subclass 170 for static storage systems
    which use Hall effect devices.


CLS 360/113
TXT Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein the transducer includes an
    element exhibiting a magnetoresistive or magnetostrictive effect and that
    element and its associated effect is used to produce, detect or control
    production or detection of magnetic flux.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 252, for
    magneto-resistive sensing means.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 8 for magnetic
    bubbles which use magnetroresistive devices, subclasses 157 and 158,
    respectively, for static storage systems which use magnetostrictive or
    magnetoresistive type storage elements.


CLS 360/114
TXT Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein the intensity of the flux
    emanating from a record is determined by directing a beam of polarized
    light at the record and detecting the rotation of polarization caused by
    the flux.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    281+ and 484, for magneto-optical polarization.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 122 for
    information masking systems which use magneto-optical polarization.


CLS 360/115
TXT Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein the transducing area of a head is
    of substantially lesser width than that of the head and the transducing
    area is caused to move by applying opposing fluxes to different regions of
    the head.


CLS 360/116
TXT Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein the transducer includes a means
    of generating a cathode ray and the cathode ray is used to produce, detect
    or control production or detection of magnetic flux.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 250, for cathode ray
    magnetic field detectors.


CLS 360/117
TXT Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein the transducer is specifically
    adapted to be held in the hand of the user.


CLS 360/118
TXT Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein the transducer is specifically
    adapted for use in erasing a magnetic record.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 143+, 159
    and 267 for magnetic record erasers not associated with recorders or
    reproducers.


CLS 360/119
TXT Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein the structure of the head gap is
    described in detail.


CLS 360/120
TXT Subject matter under subclass 119 including a specification of the material
    used as the gap spacer.


CLS 360/121
TXT Subject matter under subclass 119 including detailed structure of plural
    gap transducers.


CLS 360/122
TXT Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein the shape, composition or other
    characteristic of that surface of the head which is proximate the record is
    specifically described.


CLS 360/123
TXT Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein the position, size, inductance or
    other characteristic of the head winding is described in detail.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate sub- classes, for inductor windings.


CLS 360/124
TXT Subject matter under subclass 123 including means associated with the head
    winding for reducing induction into the head of a signal from a near-by
    head.

    (1)     Note.  Hum bucking coils are included herein.


CLS 360/125
TXT Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein the structure, material or other
    characteristic of the head core is specifically described.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate sub- classes, for inductor core
    specifics.


CLS 360/126
TXT Subject matter under subclass 125 including cores of laminate structure.


CLS 360/127
TXT Subject matter under subclass 125 including cores of sintered or powdered
    structure or of oxide composition.


CLS 360/128
TXT Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein an element which is intimately
    associated with the head or its surroundings is described in detail.


CLS 360/129
TXT Subject matter under subclass 128 including detailed structure or
    characteristics of the head housing.


CLS 360/130.1
TXT Record separator:

    Subject matter under subclass 128 where the record transducing relationship
    with the head is normally recited and the element selectively moves the
    record out of the transducing position.


CLS 360/130.2
TXT Record guide:

    Subject matter under subclass 128 where the element aligns and/or supports
    the record in its transducing position with respect to the head.

    (1)     Note.  The element must be directly associated with the head.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is limited to details of the record guide
    element with no more than a nominal recitation of the transport; detailed
    recitations of the transport system must be classified or searched in the
    appropriate transport subclass.


CLS 360/130.21
TXT Tape record:

    Subject matter under 130.2 where the record involved is a tape.


CLS 360/130.22
TXT Rotating head:

    Subject matter under subclass 130.21 where the head rotates during
    transducing.


CLS 360/130.23
TXT Helical scan:

    Subject matter under subclass 130.22 where the head rotation involves a
    helical scan of the record


CLS 360/130.24
TXT Head drum details:

    Subject matter under subclass 130.23 where the guide element is mounted on
    or a part of the head drum.


CLS 360/130.3
TXT Pressure element:

    Subject matter under subclass 128 where the element biases the record into
    transducing relationship with the head.


CLS 360/130.31
TXT Tape record:

    Subject matter under subclass 130.3 where the record involved is a tape.


CLS 360/130.32
TXT Element mounting details:

    Subject matter under subclass 130.31 including details of the mounting
    structure for the pressure element.


CLS 360/130.33
TXT Element in tape container:

    Subject matter under subclass 130.31 where the tape is housed in a
    removable container and the pressure element is also mounted in the
    container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 324.2, 326+, and 335+
    for a coil on or within a cartridge.


CLS 360/130.34
TXT Disc record:

    Subject matter under subclass 130.3 where the record involved is a disc.


CLS 360/131
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including specific structure of a
    record carrier.

    (1)     Note.  Magnetic records which are defined only by their composition
    are not classified in this subclass. Magnetic records which include no more
    structure than a base having one or more coatings thereon are also excluded
    from this subclass.  Merely naming the record as a wire, filament, rod,
    ribbon, strand, or record will not be sufficient to classify the patent in
    Class 360. For magnetic records and analogous articles which are defined
    only by their composition or which include no more structure than a base
    having one or more coatings thereon see Classes below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, for strands, filaments and
    records distinguished solely by being made of plastic compositions.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 400+ for metallic stock or strands
    which are the product of a Class 148 process, particularly indented
    subclasses 300+ drawn to magnetic products of a Class 148 process.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 307+ for a container
    under the class definition for removably containing an article which
    includes machine readable information registered thereon.

    235,    Registers, subclass 493 for a record containing discrete bits of
    magnetic material, said bits being coded markings on a record.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 62.51+ for compositions specialized and
    designed for use as magnetic materials, substances peculiar to such
    compositions or processes of making compositions or substances.

    346,    Recorders, subclasses 134+ for non magnetic records.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Picture, subclasses 1+ for sound recording,
    including magnetic sound records, combined with motion picture structure.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, appropriate subclasses for alloy
    stock or strands which are claimed broadly as "magnetic", or "magnetized"
    or "permanent magnet" or are defined only in terms of their composition but
    are inherently magnetic and for metallic stock or strands composed of a
    single metal.


CLS 360/132
TXT Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the record carrier is
    distinguished by the container in which it is housed.


CLS 360/133
TXT Subject matter under subclass 132 wherein the record is in the form of a
    disk.


CLS 360/134
TXT Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the record is in the form of a
    tape.


CLS 360/135
TXT Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the record is in the form of a
    disk.


CLS 360/136
TXT Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the record is in the form of a
    drum.


CLS 360/137
TXT Subject matter under the class definition not provided for above.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 360/900
TXT DISK DRIVE PACKAGING:

    Subject matter comprising a magnetic disk information storage and retrieval
    device and its associated circuitry having miniaturized features.


CLS 360/901
TXT Access time:

    Subject matter under subclass 900 wherein an interval between seeking data
    from a disk drive to an instant of completion of (b) data delivery to an
    output device, or (a) head positioning to transduce the data.


CLS 360/902
TXT Storage density (e.g., bpi, tpi):

    Subject matter under subclass 900 wherein spacing or placement of
    individual data bits are stored per unit length on the disk.


CLS 360/903
TXT Physical parameter (e.g., form factor):

    Subject matter under subclass 900 comprising physical properties such as
    geometrical shape or dimensions of a disk drive.


CLS 360/904
TXT Weight:

    Subject matter under subclass 903 wherein the physical parameter is the
    weight of the disk drive or a component thereof that the magnetic disk
    drive weighs.

    FOREIGN ART COLLECTIONS

    The definitions for FOR 100-FOR 115 below correspond to the definitions of
    the abolished subclasses under Class 360 from which these collections were
    formed. See the Foreign Art Collection schedule for specific
    correspondences. [Note: The titles and definitions for indented art
    collections include all the details of the one(s) that are hierarchically
    superior.]


CLS 360/FOR100
TXT Television signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 for handling of a television signal for
    purposes such as standards conversion.


CLS 360/FOR101
TXT Fast, slow or stop reproducing:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.1 for reproducing a television signal in
    such a manner that its duration is different from that of theoriginal
    signal.


CLS 360/FOR102
TXT Scan locus or tracking control:

    Subject matter under subclass 10.1 where the path that a reproducing
    transducer follows relative to a recorded track is controlled.


CLS 360/FOR103
TXT Tape:

    Subject matter under subclass 10.1 where the magnetic recording medium has
    a definite width and an indefinite length.


CLS 360/FOR104
TXT Field or frame skipping:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.1 for deletion of every Nth field or frame
    of a television signal at the time of recording.


CLS 360/FOR105
TXT Television:

    Subject matter under subclass 13 involving television signal records:


CLS 360/FOR106
TXT Control track:

    Subject matter under subclass 14.1 where the edition is controlled by
    signals recorded in a separate track.


CLS 360/FOR107
TXT Numerical code:

    Subject matter under subclass 14.2 where the signals recorded in a separate
    track represent numbers.


CLS 360/FOR108
TXT Audio and video:

    Subject matter under subclass 18 for recording or reproducing video and
    audio signals on the same area of a record carrier.


CLS 360/FOR109
TXT GENERAL PROCESSING OF A TELEVISION SIGNAL:

    Subject matter under the class definition of specific utility in treating a
    noncolor television signal for dynamic magnetic recording or reproducing.


CLS 360/FOR110
TXT Inverting polarity of alternate periods:

    Subject matter under subclass 33.1 for inverting the polarity of alternate
    dots, lines, fields or frames of a television signal.


CLS 360/FOR111
TXT Signal field or frame recording:

    Subject matter under subclass 33.1 for gating a single field or frame from
    a television signal of indeterminate duration for recording such field or
    frame.


CLS 360/FOR112
TXT Time correction:

    Subject matter under subclass 33.1 for correction of timing errors
    introduced during recording or reproducing.


CLS 360/FOR113
TXT Digital techniques:

    Subject matter under subclass 36.1 where the television signal is converted
    to or from a signal composed of a series or pattern of identical pulse bits
    characterized solely by their presence or absence.


CLS 360/FOR114
TXT Synchronization signal modifying:

    Subject matter under subclass 33.1 for generation of a signal which is
    added to or substituted for a synchronizing signal.


CLS 360/FOR115
TXT Drop-out correcting:

    Subject matter under subclass 33.1 for detection of an unsatisfactory
    signal condition and correction of that condition by substitution,
    regeneration or blanking.


CLS 361/
TTL ELECTRICITY:  ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND DEVICES

CLS 361/
TXT

    I.      STATEMENT OF GENERAL SUBJECT MATTER OF CLASS

    This is the residual class for:

    A.      Systems or devices which provide safety and protection for other
    systems and devices.

    B.      Control circuits for electromagnetic devices.

    C.      Control circuits for nonelectromagnetic-type relays.

    D.      Systems or devices which discharge, or prevent the accumulation of
    electrical charge on or in an object or material.

    E.      Circuits for charging objects or materials.

    F.      Systems for generating or conducting an electric charge.

    G.      Systems which process electrical speed signals.

    H.      Circuits for reversing the polarity of an electric circuit.

    I.      Systems which cause the ignition of a fuel or an explosive charge.

    J.      Systems and processes for demagnetizing a magnetic field.

    K.      Transformers and inductors with integral switch, capacitor or lock.

    L.      Electrostatic capacitors, per se.

    M.      Housings and mounting assemblies with plural diverse electrical
    components.

    N.      Electrolytic systems and devices.

    O.      Miscellaneous electrical systems and devices, which are not generic
    to any other class and are not provided for in any other subclass of this
    class.

    II.     RELATIONSHIP TO OTHER CLASSES

    Many other electrical and mechanical classes provide for systems or
    machines which include the electrical systems and devices provided for in
    this class (361). The combination of the subject matter of this class (361)
    and an art environment is generally classified with the art environment
    where that environment is significant, either by virtue of a significant
    disclosed relationship or by virtue of a claimed relationship.  Where the
    art environment is recited by name only (e.g., motor protective circuit),
    the combination may be classified, in some instances, with the art
    environment, and in others, in this class (361).

    Whereas both Classes, 361 and 257 provide for housings for electronic
    devices and components, Class 361, subclasses 331+, provide for housings
    and mounting assemblies having more than one different type of electrical
    component, the electrical components normally do not recite significant art
    limitations.  These subclasses also provide for combinations of housings
    and mounting assembles with different types of art wherein the combination
    is not provided for where the different art is classified.  Typical
    examples of combinations classified herein are housings and switch gear
    (361/335+), housings and meter structure (361/364+) and housings with
    cooling means (361/381+).

    Class 257 provides for housings wherein (1) the housing is for an active
    solid state device, details of which are positively recited in the claims,
    or (2) where the recited housing is necessary to make a usable active solid
    state device whether or not the active solid state device is recited
    nominally or in detail.

    However, if a housing with nominally recited active solid state devices
    recites different types of (active or passive) devices, then original (OR)
    classification is in Class 361.

    Claims that recite housings with only nominal recitation of active solid
    state devices of only one type should be classified as originals (ORs) in
    neither Class 257 or Class 361, but rather in Class 174.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous methods of
    manufacturing or mounting electrical or magnetic devices.

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, for necessary shoe structure.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 98+ for
    electrocuting-type animal traps, and subclasses 112 for devices for
    electrocuting insects.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 1.3 for the growing of plants as affected
    by electricity, as, for example, to stimulate the growth or to kill the
    plants.

    70,     Locks, for locking means, per se.  Note, especially subclasses 174+
    for locking means for control and machine elements; subclasses 237+ for
    locking means for automobile vehicles.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 304+ for capacitive liquid level
    gauges; subclasses 718 and 724 for capacitive fluid pressure gauge;
    subclasses 488+ for speed or accelerating measuring.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 10+ for the combination of
    a capacitor and a dial shaft operator; subclasses 395+ for systems for
    synchronizing the rotary motion of a plurality of shafts where adjustable
    gearing is utilized to control the rotation of at least one of the shafts.

    84,     Music, subclasses 723+ for electrical musical instruments, such as
    electric organs and conventional musical instruments with electrical
    pick-up, amplifying and reproducing means.

    89,     Ordnance, appropriate subclasses for explosive device projecting or
    dropping means having igniting means as a part thereof.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclasses and
    especially subclass 171 for synchronizing plural expansible chamber motors.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 15+ for electrostatic-type
    precipitators.


    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, appropriate subclasses for explosive
    devices having igniting means as a portion thereof.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 1.05+ for metalizing
    compositions, per se.

    114,    Ships, subclass 240 for degaussing of ships.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 38 for vehicular governors
    indicating speed and direction; subclasses 241+ and 284+ for miscellaneous
    indicators for indicating the position of a variable capacitor.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 621+ for electrostatic spray devices.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 145 for electrified station shields.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 143+ for igniting systems
    utilized with internal combustion engines; subclasses 319+ for speed
    regulators.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, appropriate subclasses for solid fuel burners
    having igniting means.

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, for electrochemical
    and electrothermal sources of electricity.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for a heat exchange structure
    of a general nature.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, for electric conductor and
    insulator structure, including conduits, boxes and housings.

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclasses 210+ for capacitor gauges.

    178,    Telegraphy, for the reproduction of pictures by a scanning
    procedure, as in television, facsimile and photomechanical engraving and
    for telegraphy, as in telautograph and teletypewriting.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, appropriate subclasses and see Class 361, subclass
    51, search notes.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, for switches and circuit
    breakers.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, for the producing of
    chemical change by means of electricity, as in electrosputtering.

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, for the producing of chemical change by means
    of electricity, as in electrolytic coating.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, for electrical
    classifying, separating and assorting of materials and objects.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 41.1+ for frame structure designed to
    support plates or plate-like articles.

    219,    Electric Heating, for miscellaneous electrical heating, including
    welding. Note, subclass 384 for perforating sheet material by means of an
    electric spark.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 143+ for article dispensers having
    electrical igniting means.

    222,    Dispensing, for dispensing devices utilizing electromagnetic
    actuators.

    231,    Whips and Whip Apparatus, subclass 7 for a device consisting of a
    handle and an electrified goad for causing an electric shock to be produced
    in an animal to control the movement or behavior of the animal.

    235,    Registers, subclasses 61+ for calculators having relay-type
    counting chains.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, appropriate
    subclasses for automatic temperature control systems; appropriate
    subclasses for complete heating systems having igniters as a portion
    thereof.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 2.1, 3, and
    690+ respectively, for methods and apparatus for projecting a liquid into
    the air and including a provision for imparting an electrostatic charge to
    the projected liquid.  See the notes to these subclasses for a statement of
    the line.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 1 for aircraft lightning arresters and static
    eliminators.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, appropriate subclasses for electrical
    control of railway switches and signals.

    250,    Radiant Energy, for radio and microwave absorption meters, the
    detection of the nuclear or electromagnetic energy, the testing of
    materials by nuclear or electromagnetic energy, mass spectroscopy,
    fluorescent and phosphorescent applications, electron or ion beam
    deflection or focusing ion generation, supports for fluent material or
    objects, the irradiation of material or objects, nuclear and
    electromagnetic radiation detectors, radiant energy generators and sources,
    radiation controlling means, and radiation source and detector supports.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 512+ for electrically conductive
    metal-containing compositions; subclass 567 for a web or sheet impregnated
    with a defined dielectric liquid; and subclasses 570+ for a fluent
    dielectric, per se.

    256,    Fences, subclass 10 for electric fences.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses for active solid-state semiconductor devices, per se.

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants, for electric generating plants.

    303,    Fluid-Pressure and Analogous  Brake System, subclasses 113.1+ for
    antiskid systems where brakes are operated.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, for systems of
    distributing electricity or interconnection.  The line between Class 307
    and this class (361) can be determined only by consulting the art to be
    found in these two classes.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 90.5 for magnetic
    supports.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 294+ for supports and
    cabinets with movable components.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, for electric lamps, vacuum
    tubes, gas discharge tubes and spark gaps.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes, for arc
    lamps.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, for cathode-ray tube
    circuits, gas tube circuits, electric lamp circuits, and circuits which are
    integral with a discharge device or lamp.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, for electric motor systems,
    including servo-motor systems.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging, for a
    method or apparatus for charging or discharging a battery or capacitor.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, for systems for controlling
    a single generator and its prime mover.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, for systems for
    controlling the voltage of electricity and the phase of alternating
    currents.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, for electrical measuring,
    testing and sensing, such as, for example, the determination of moisture in
    material by measuring its resistivity and the measuring of power in an
    electric circuit.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous active device circuits.

    329,    Demodulators, subclasses 311+ for pulse demodulators which may
    include radiation reduction.

    330,    Amplifiers, appropriate subclasses for amplifier systems.

    331,    Oscillators, appropriate subclasses for self-sustaining electric
    wave generators of the nondynamoelectric type.

    332,    Modulators, for systems for modulating an intelligence upon a
    repetitious wave.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, appropriate subclasses for
    the subject matter of that class.

    334,    Tuners, appropriate subclasses for tuned networks used in wave
    energy apparatus, tuners with shielding means, and switch operated tuners.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, for electromagnets with armatures, switches or magnetic
    chuck structure.

    336,    Inductor Devices, for transformers and inductances.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    appropriate subclasses for thermal-type circuit breakers, per se.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, appropriate subclasses for electrical
    resistors both of the linear and nonlinear types.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, appropriate subclasses for
    miscellaneous electrical signalling.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave, for radar and directive radio systems
    and antennas.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, for motion picture apparatus combined
    with sound recording or reproducing apparatus, including means for
    synchronizing the two.

    362,    Illumination, for electric lights and photographic illumination
    devices including ignition means.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, in which electricity is
    converted from one form to another as from direct current to alternating.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclass 293 for
    antimagnetic devices used in horology.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 72+ for
    storage medium electrostatic charge neutralization; and subclass 126 for
    information storage by dynamic electrostatic charge.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, for pulse communication equipment.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclasses 100+ for processes and devices for electrically and/or
    magnetically confining and controlling a plasma to yield nuclear fusion
    reactions.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, for telephone systems and
    subcombinations.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 155+ for photoflash devices combined with
    camera structure which may include ignition means.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclass 37 for diagnostics of power supplied
    to an electrophotographic device, subclasses 88+ for machine operations
    with power supply, and subclasses 168+ for charging a photoconductive
    member.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), appropriate subclasses
    for centrifugal or impeller rotation speed responsive systems.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, for alloys, per se.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 21, 22+, and 186 for process and
    apparatus provided by the class using electrical energy.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 458+ for processes of coating, per
    se, utilizing an electrostatic charge; subclasses 79+ for processes of
    coating utilized in making capacitors.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 128 for hand manipulatable electric igniters
    for igniting fuel.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, for electrical connectors.

    454,    Ventilation, appropriate subclasses for ventilating devices.

    455,    Telecommunications, for receivers, transmitters and miscellaneous
    apparatus.

    463,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclass 47.3 for a striking type of
    weapon for use on a human being which includes an electric shock feature
    (e.g., an electric prod used by police, etc.).

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 150+ for high temperature (Tc  30 K) superconducting systems or
    devices, and subclasses 800+ for cross-reference art collections on
    superconductive systems or devices.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 9+ for application of a magnetic field to a
    body for therapy.

    602,    Surgery:  Splint, Brace, or Bandage, subclass 2, for a bandage
    including electrical application to a body.

    606,    Surgery, especially subclasses 32+, for electrical application to a
    body for surgical purposes.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses 1+
    for devices for applying electricity to the human body.


CLS 361/1
TXT SAFETY AND PROTECTION OF SYSTEMS AND DEVICES:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to the safety and
    protection of electrical systems and devices which include either fault
    sensing means which activate a protective means to remove a fault condition
    or a protective means which detects and removes the fault condition.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses do not include, as a portion
    thereof, the protection and safety of human beings in the vicinity of
    electrical apparatus.  Generally, the excluded protection and safety
    systems are classified in the subclass which relates to the environment in
    which the protected human being may be found. Thus, for example, electrical
    conductors having grounded guarding means to protect human personnel are
    classified as electric conductors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    600+,   for switchboards and analogous devices, such as housings, some of
    which act as protective means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 2+ for
    lightning protection systems consisting only of conductors and insulators,
    subclass 5 for electric shock hazard protective devices for protecting
    personnel, subclass 6 for earth ground, per se, and subclass 11 for
    electric conductor structure having means automatically responsive to the
    condition of the fluid which is associated with the electric conductors.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 69 for telegraph line clearing and circuit
    maintenance systems.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 326+
    for safety or limit control features.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclasses 10+ for arc lamp systems having an automatic shunt or cutout.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 88+,
    especially subclass 91 for lamp and space discharge device systems having
    means to automatically substitute another lamp, space discharge devices, or
    electrode for the previous one under certain conditions of operation,
    subclasses 119+ for lamp and space discharge systems having an automatic
    shunt or cutout, and subclass 209 for lamp and space discharge device
    systems having periodic switch means in the supply circuit.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 434 for electric motor
    systems where the motor is significantly claimed having means to limit the
    motor load current, torque or force, as for the purpose of limiting an
    overload.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 267 for
    condition sensing regulators with protection.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 110 for electric
    meter protection against electrical hazards and against the hazard of fraud.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 250+ for semiconductor amplifiers.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 62 for oscillators provided with oscillator
    circuit protective means, and subclass 63 for oscillator systems provided
    with protection or safety devices for personnel.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 635+ for electrical
    apparatus condition responsive signalling devices, particularly subclasses
    649, 650, and 652 for grounding circuit, undesired circuit ground, and open
    circuit, condition responsive signalling devices, respectively.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 50+ for conversion
    systems having protective means.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclass 437 for telephone systems
    having protective means.


CLS 361/2
TXT Arc suppression at switching point (i.e., includes solid-state switch):

    Subject matter under subclass 1 for preventing or extinguishing arcs at the
    main switching points of the switching device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159,    for arc suppression in control circuits for electromagnetic devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    218,    High-Voltage Switches With Arc Preventing and Extinguishing
    Devices, subclasses 1+ for switches having arc preventing and extinguishing
    features.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 19 and 20 for
    differentiating, integrating and wave shaping networks, some of which can
    be used to prevent a rapid rise of voltage when a switching contact is
    opened.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 106+ and 177 for
    circuit-interrupter-type conversion systems which are usually provided with
    arc suppression or reducing means.


CLS 361/3
TXT Synchronized or sequential opening or closing:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 with means to open or close the switch at a
    predetermined time or in a predetermined sequence.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 238
    and 321.


CLS 361/4
TXT Counter electromotive force:

    Subject matter under subclass 3 with means for inserting an opposing
    voltage or current across the switching points to effectively cancel the
    arc producing surge.


CLS 361/5
TXT With current sensitive control circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 3 wherein the opening or closing control
    circuit is responsive to the in-line current.  The in-line current is that
    which is switched at the main switching point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31      and 32, for current responsive control circuitry in motor shunting
    circuits.

    57,     for current responsive control circuitry in load shunting circuits.

    63+,    for current responsive control circuitry in feeder distribution
    networks.

    87,     for current responsive control circuitry in quantity comparison
    circuits.

    93+,    for current responsive fault sensors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 131
    for current responsive switching systems.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 664 for current
    characteristic actuated (e.g., line fault).


CLS 361/6
TXT With voltage sensitive control circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 3 wherein the opening or closing control
    circuit is responsive to the line voltage.  The line voltage is that which
    is switched at the main switching points.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for voltage responsive control circuits in generator protective
    systems.

    33+,    for voltage responsive control circuits in motor protective systems.

    56,     for voltage responsive control circuits in load shunting systems.

    86,     for voltage responsive control circuits in quantity comparison
    circuits.

    88+,    for voltage responsive fault sensors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 130
    for voltage responsive switching circuits.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 660+ for voltage responsive
    signalling means.


CLS 361/7
TXT With combined voltage and current sensitive control circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 3 wherein the opening or closing control
    circuit is responsive to both the in-line current and the line voltage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for combined voltage and current sensitive control circuits in
    motor protection circuits.

    65+,    for combined voltage and current sensitive control circuits in
    feeder distribution networks.

    79+,    for combined voltage and current sensitive control circuits in
    quantity comparison circuits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 25 for voltage and
    current responsive means for generator control circuits.


CLS 361/8
TXT Shunt bypass:

    Subject matter under subclass 3 including a circuit in parallel with the
    main line switching points to drain away the arc causing surge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for shunt bypass of main switch with sequentially inserted
    impedance.

    13,     for nonsynchronized shunt bypass.


CLS 361/9
TXT With sequentially inserted impedance:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 which includes means to increase the shunt
    impedance in a predetermined manner.


CLS 361/10
TXT By inserting series impedance:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 with means to place an impedance in-line
    with the main switching points to suppress the arc causing surge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for impedance insertion in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    218,    High-Voltage Switches With Arc Preventing and Extinguishing
    Devices, subclasses 1+ and 143+ for switches having arc preventing and
    extinguishing features with resistance insertion.


CLS 361/11
TXT Nonlinear impedance:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 with means to insert a nonlinear impedance
    (inductors, capacitors, thermistors, etc.) in series with the main
    switching points to suppress the arc causing surge.


CLS 361/12
TXT By arc stretching (e.g., horn gap):

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein the lengthening of the arc
    effectively inserts an increasing amount of impedance in series with the
    switching points.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137+,   for this subject matter in high voltage applications.


CLS 361/13
TXT Shunt bypass of main switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 with a current path around the main line
    switching points to drain away the arc causing surge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for synchronized shunt bypass circuits.

    54+,    for load shunting where the load is not a switch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    218,    High-Voltage Switches With Arc Preventing and Extinguishing
    Devices, subclasses 8+ for arc preventing and extinguishing with auxiliary
    shunt.


CLS 361/14
TXT Arc blowout for main breaker contact (e.g., electromagnet, gas, fluid,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 2 with means to extinguish the arc in a
    dynamic manner effectively increasing the length of the path of the arc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123,    133, 134, 135, and 137+, for this subject matter in high voltage
    applications.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    218,    High-Voltage Switches With Arc Preventing and Extinguishing
    Devices, subclasses 22+ for arc preventing and extinguishing with magnetic
    blowout.


CLS 361/15
TXT Capacitor protection:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 for protecting capacitors from damage
    caused by excess heat and voltage or current surges.

    (1)     Note.  The protective systems and devices included in this subclass
    are external to the capacitor housing and details to the capacitor
    structure are not included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272+,   for capacitors, per se, wherein the protective device is an
    integral part of the capacitor structure and details to the capacitor
    structure are included.


CLS 361/16
TXT Series connected capacitors:

    Subject matter under subclass 15 for preventing damage to in-line
    capacitors.


CLS 361/17
TXT Shunt connected capacitors:

    Subject matter under subclass 15 for  preventing damage to capacitors
    connected in parallel with the source or load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272+,   for electrostatic capacitors with protection or compensating means.


CLS 361/18
TXT Voltage regulator protective circuits:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the fault sensing means for a
    voltage regulator system activates a protective means which interrupts the
    power to the load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 276 for
    voltage regulator systems wherein the current flow to the load is limited
    (not interrupted).


CLS 361/19
TXT Superconductor protective circuits:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising means for electrically
    preventing damage to a superconductor circuit or device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 366+ for superconductor gating circuits and subclasses
    527+ for miscellaneous superconductor circuits.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    particularly subclasses 150+ for high temperature (Tc  30 K)
    superconducting systems or devices, subclass 192 for capacitors having high
    temperature superconducting materials, and cross-reference art collections
    in subclass 850 for protective circuits for electromagnetic devices that
    are superconductive.


CLS 361/20
TXT Generator protective circuits:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising means for electrically
    preventing damage to a generator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, for generator control
    circuits when the generator is significantly claimed.


CLS 361/21
TXT Voltage responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 20 wherein a fault sensor responds to an
    abnormal voltage condition in either the load circuit or the generator
    field circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for voltage responsive control means in arc suppression circuits.

    33,     for voltage responsive control circuits in motor protective systems.

    56,     for voltage responsive control circuits in load shunting systems.

    86,     for voltage responsive control circuits in quantity comparison
    circuits.

    88+,    for voltage responsive fault sensors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 635+ for electrical
    apparatus condition responsive signalling device.


CLS 361/22
TXT Compressor protective circuits:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising means for electrically
    preventing damage to a compressor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, for general control circuits
    when the compressor is significantly claimed.


CLS 361/23
TXT Motor protective condition responsive circuits:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including means to sense an abnormal
    condition or change of condition of a motor or its circuitry and to remove
    the fault condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, for motor control circuits when
    the motor is significantly claimed.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 648 for a motor condition
    responsive signalling device.


CLS 361/24
TXT Current and temperature:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein the sensing means is responsive to
    an abnormal current and temperature condition.


CLS 361/25
TXT Motor temperature:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein the sensing means is located in
    the immediate proximity with the motor and is responsive to an abnormal
    temperature condition of the motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for related subject matter in transformer systems.

    103+,   for general thermal sensing circuits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 471+ for related
    subject matter in motor control systems.


CLS 361/26
TXT With bimetallic sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 25 wherein sensing device is bimetallic.


CLS 361/27
TXT With thermistor sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 25 wherein the sensing device is a resistor
    whose characteristics vary with temperature in a definite manner.


CLS 361/28
TXT With time delay:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein the protective circuit responds to
    a fault condition only after a predetermined time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89,     for time delay circuits combined with voltage responsive sensor.

    94,     for time delay circuits combined with current responsive sensor.

    195+    and 202, for time delay circuits in control systems for relays and
    solenoids.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 141
    for time delay circuits in switching circuits.


CLS 361/29
TXT During energization of motor:

    Subject matter under subclass 28 wherein time delay means are provided for
    maintaining the protective circuit in an off condition during normal
    start-up.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for transient nonresponsive circuits which ignores the surges on a
    transmission line.


CLS 361/30
TXT Current and voltage:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein the sensing means is responsive to
    an abnormal current and voltage condition of the protected motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for current and voltage sensitive control circuits in arc
    suppression circuits.

    65,     for current or voltage sensing means in feeder circuits.

    79+,    for current or voltage sensing means in quantity comparison
    circuits.


CLS 361/31
TXT Current:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein the sensing means is responsive to
    an abnormal current condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for current responsive control circuits in arc suppression circuits.

    57,     for current sensing means in load shunting circuits.

    63+,    for current sensing means in feeder circuits.

    87,     for current sensing means in quantity comparison circuits.

    93+,    for specific current responsive sensors.


CLS 361/32
TXT Bimetallic element:

    Subject matter under subclass 31 wherein the sensing means consist of
    bimetallic material.


CLS 361/33
TXT Voltage:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein the sensing means is responsive to
    an abnormal voltage condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for voltage sensitive control means in arc suppression circuits.

    21,     for voltage sensing means in generator circuits.

    56,     for voltage sensing means in shunt circuits.

    86,     for voltage sensing means in quantity comparison circuits.

    88+,    for specific voltage responsive sensor.


CLS 361/34
TXT Bimetallic element:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 wherein the sensing means consist of
    bimetallic material.


CLS 361/35
TXT Transformer protection:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising means for preventing damage to a
    transformer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 215,
    247, 301, 305, 328, and 355 for transformer systems.

    336,    Inductor Devices, for transformer, per se.

    340,    Communication: Electrical, subclass 646 for transformer condition
    responsive indicating means.


CLS 361/36
TXT With differential sensing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 35 including means which compare the
    electrical quantities entering and leaving the transformer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for differential voltage comparison across the circuit interrupting
    means.

    78,     for specific quantity comparison means.


CLS 361/37
TXT With temperature or pressure sensing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 35 including means responsive to an abnormal
    temperature or pressure caused by a fault condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for temperature sensing means in motor systems.

    103+,   for general circuit interruption by thermal sensing means.


CLS 361/38
TXT Transformer with structurally combined protective device:

    Subject matter under subclass 35 wherein the protective means is an
    integral part of the transformer structure or housing.


CLS 361/39
TXT With lightning arrester and fuse:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 wherein the protecting device includes
    means to shunt voltage surges away from a transformer and means to open the
    circuit to the transformer when the current exceeds the maximum rated value
    of the protected device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117+,   for lightning arrester combined with fuse.


CLS 361/40
TXT With lightning arrester (e.g., spark gap):
    Subject matter under subclass 38 which shunts voltage surges away from a
    transformer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117+,   for high voltage dissipation (lightning arresters), per se.


CLS 361/41
TXT With fuse:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 which opens the circuit to the transformer
    when the current exceeds the maximum rated value of the protected device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for circuit interruption by thermal sensing (fuse).


CLS 361/42
TXT Ground fault protection:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 with means for sensing ground faults and
    for preventing damage to a system or device due to the ground fault.

    (1)     Note.  A ground fault is a defect in a wire circuit due to
    unintentional grounding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107+,   for specific transmission line with ground conductor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 650+ for ground detectors
    with indicator only.


CLS 361/43
TXT Fault suppression (e.g., petersen coil):

    Subject matter under subclass 42 wherein a protective circuit substantially
    reduces the ground leakage current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 326+
    for safety or limit control features.


CLS 361/44
TXT With differential sensing in a polyphase system:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 wherein the current going to and returning
    from the load in a polyphase system is compared by a sensing means and a
    sensed difference activates the protective circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     for specific quantity comparison means.


CLS 361/45
TXT With differential sensing in a single phase system:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 wherein the current going to and returning
    from the load in a single phase system is compared by a sensing means and a
    sensed difference activates the protective circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     for specific quantity comparison means.


CLS 361/46
TXT With more than two wires:

    Subject matter under subclass 45 wherein the current going to and returning
    from the load in a single phase system with more than two wires is compared
    by a sensing means and a sensed difference activates the protective circuit.


CLS 361/47
TXT In a polyphase system:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 wherein the load in a polyphase system is
    protected from an unintentional grounding usually by removing the power
    from the load when a ground fault is detected by a sensing means.


CLS 361/48
TXT With more than three wires:

    Subject matter under subclass 47 wherein the polyphase system comprises
    more than three wires (e.g., a grounded wye-polyphase with a neutral
    conductor).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for related subject matter with specific transmission line.


CLS 361/49
TXT In a single phase system:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 wherein the load in a single phase system
    is protected from an unintentional grounding, usually by removing the power
    from the load, when a ground fault is detected by a sensing means.


CLS 361/50
TXT With more than two wires:

    Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein the load in a single phase system
    with more than two wires is protected from an unintentional grounding,
    usually be removing the power from the load when a ground fault is detected
    by a sensing means.


CLS 361/51
TXT Overspeed responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the load is protected from an
    excessive speed condition by means which detects the abnormal condition and
    activates a protective circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236,    for electrical speed signal processing systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 170+ for a motor vehicle provided with
    means responsive to the speed of the vehicle for maintaining the speed at
    or preventing it from exceeding a particular or value.


CLS 361/52
TXT By regulating source or load (e.g., generator field killed):

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein means are provided to stabilize the
    power to the load.

    (1)     Note.  The generator supplying the voltage may, for example, have
    its field killed when a short circuit develops.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 153
    for miscellaneous generator control systems.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclasses 17+ for
    automatically controlled single generator systems, and subclasses 69+ for
    circuit interruption type of generator control.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 234 for
    miscellaneous systems of load control.


CLS 361/53
TXT Prime mover control:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein the driving means for the source
    is controlled.


CLS 361/54
TXT Load shunting by fault responsive means (e.g., crowbar circuit):

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the load is protected from an
    overload condition by a fault sensing means which senses the overload
    condition and causes the load to be bypassed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for switch shunting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 100
    for shunting or short circuiting systems.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 119+ for
    circuits with automatic shunt or cutout.


CLS 361/55
TXT Disconnect after shunting:

    Subject matter under subclass 54 wherein the circuit to the load is opened
    after the overload condition is shunted from the load.


CLS 361/56
TXT Voltage responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 54 wherein the fault sensing means is
    sensitive to an abnormal voltage condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for voltage sensitive control means in arc suppression circuits.

    21,     for voltage sensing means in generator circuits.

    33+,    for voltage responsive control circuits in motor protective
    circuits.

    86,     for voltage sensing means in quantity comparison circuits.

    88+,    for specific voltage responsive sensor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 635+ for electrical
    apparatus condition responsive.


CLS 361/57
TXT Current responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 54 wherein the fault sensing means is
    sensitive to an abnormal current condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for current responsive control circuits in arc suppression circuits.

    31+,    for current responsive control circuitry in motor protective
    circuits.

    63+,    for current sensing means in feeder circuits.

    87,     for current responsive control circuitry in quantity comparison
    circuits.

    93+,    for current responsive fault sensors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 664 for current
    characteristic actuated circuits in condition responsive systems.


CLS 361/58
TXT Impedance insertion:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein an impedance is placed in series
    with the protected device or system to limit the current thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10+,    for impedance insertion in series with switching points.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 276 for
    limiting current to the load in regulator system.


CLS 361/59
TXT Circuit automatically reconnected only after the fault is cleared:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein fault sensing means activates the
    circuit disconnect means when a fault occurs and the circuit is caused to
    remain open until the fault is removed.  Once the fault is removed the
    circuit is automatically reclosed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86+,    for automatic reclosing, per se.


CLS 361/60
TXT With differential voltage comparison across the circuit interrupting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the voltage across the circuit
    disconnect means is sensed on both sides of the disconnect means and
    compared to determine if the fault has been removed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86,     for voltage quantity comparison circuits.


CLS 361/61
TXT Reclosing of the nonfaulty phases of a polyphase system:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein all phases of a polyphase system
    are opened due to a fault, and the nonfaulty phases are subsequently
    automatically reconnected.


CLS 361/62
TXT Feeder protection in distribution networks: Subject matter under subclass 1
    wherein the system which distributes power from a source (normally a bus)
    to the load is protected from a fault condition by disconnection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 26 for
    plural diverse sources of supply, A.C. and D.C.


CLS 361/63
TXT With current responsive fault sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 62 wherein the protective means senses a
    current fault in the feeder and activates the disconnect means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for current responsive control circuits in arc suppression circuits.

    31,     for current responsive control circuitry in motor protective
    circuits.

    57,     for current responsive control circuitry in load shunting circuits.

    87,     for current responsive control circuitry in quantity comparison
    circuits.

    93+,    for current responsive fault sensors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 650+ for circuit fault
    responsive circuits in condition responsive systems.


CLS 361/64
TXT With communication between feeder disconnect points:

    Subject matter under subclass 63 wherein the current sensing means
    activates a communication means which sends a coded message to adjacent
    feeder disconnect points indicating the location of the fault.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68+,    for communication circuits in series connected sections.

    81,     for communication circuits in distance relay systems.


CLS 361/65
TXT With current and voltage responsive fault sensors:

    Subject matter under subclass 62 wherein the fault sensing means detects
    both current and voltage in the feeder and activates the disconnect means
    when a fault is sensed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for combined voltage and current sensitive control circuits in arc
    suppression systems.

    30,     for combined voltage and current sensitive control circuits in
    motor protection circuits.

    79,     for combined voltage and current sensitive control circuits in
    quantity comparison circuits.


CLS 361/66
TXT With communication between feeder disconnect points:

    Subject matter under subclass 65 wherein the sensing means activates a
    communication means which sends a coded message to adjacent feeder
    disconnect points indicating the location of the fault.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68+,    for communication circuits in series connected sections.

    81,     for communication circuits in distance relay systems.


CLS 361/67
TXT Series connected sections with faulty section disconnect:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the system which distributes power
    (normally a bus network) has series connected sections and is protected
    from a fault condition by disconnecting the faulty section.


CLS 361/68
TXT With communication between disconnect points:

    Subject matter under subclass 67 wherein communications means sends a coded
    message between disconnect points indicating that a fault exists.

    (1)     Note.  Some of the most commonly used communication systems are:
    Current Carrier Systems; Radio Wave Transmitter-Receiver Systems; and Laser
    Transmitter-Receiver Systems.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64      and 66, for communication circuits in feeder networks.

    81,     for communication circuits in quantity comparison systems (distance
    relaying).


CLS 361/69
TXT Pilot wire communication:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein the signal between disconnect
    points is communicated over pilot wire.


CLS 361/70
TXT Constant current system:

    Subject matter under subclass 67 wherein current regulators are used in the
    system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 234 for
    constant current systems.


CLS 361/71
TXT Automatic reclosing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 in which the system is automatically
    restored to normal operation subsequent to a disconnect operation caused by
    a fault condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59+,    for automatic reclosing after clearing of fault.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 6+ for automatic circuit interrupting devices,
    per se.


CLS 361/72
TXT With lockout means:

    Subject matter under subclass 71 wherein the reclosing means (normally a
    circuit breaker) discontinues to reclose after a predetermined number of
    reclosings and remains in the open mode.


CLS 361/73
TXT Including timer reset before lockout:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein timer means is reset if the fault
    dissipates prior to a predetermined number of reclosings.


CLS 361/74
TXT Continuous:

    Subject matter under subclass 71 wherein the system is continuously
    reconnected after each disconnect operation, although the fault has not
    been cleared.


CLS 361/75
TXT With time delay before reclosing:

    Subject matter under subclass 74 wherein the system is restored to normal
    operation after a predetermined time following each disconnect operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for time delay circuits in motor protection systems.

    89,     for time delay circuits in voltage responsive systems.

    94+,    for time delay circuits in current responsive systems.

    195+,   for time delay circuits in relay and solenoid systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 141
    for time delay circuits in switching systems.


CLS 361/76
TXT With phase sequence network analyzer:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 relating to systems which are responsive to
    either one or more of the positive, negative or zero sequence components of
    electricity in a polyphase system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for reverse phase responsive sensing.

    85,     for quantity comparison to determine a phase fault.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 107+ for similar
    subject matter but not protective.


CLS 361/77
TXT Reverse phase responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 relating to systems responsive to a 180o
    change of phase and also systems responsive to an improper phase sequence.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to systems responsive to
    a 180o change of phase and also systems responsive to an improper phase
    sequence, as for example, when Conductors A, B, and C are connected
    respectively to phases I, III, II, rather than phases I, II, III.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76,     for phase sequence sensing.

    85,     for quantity comparison to determine a phase fault.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 127
    for polarity, phase sequence or reverse flow responsive switching systems.


CLS 361/78
TXT With specific quantity comparison means:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a specific electrical quantity
    (voltage, current, etc.) is sensed in the load circuit and compared with
    either a reference quantity of the same type or another specific electrical
    quantity to determine if a fault condition exists.  The protective
    circuitry is activated when a difference in the magnitudes of the compared
    quantities is found to exist.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 661 for a voltage comparison
    condition responsive indicating device.


CLS 361/79
TXT Voltage and current:

    Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein the fault sensor is responsive to
    abnormal voltage and current conditions in the load circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for combined voltage and current sensitive control circuits in
    motor protection systems.

    65,     for combined voltage and current sensitive control circuits in
    feeder distribution networks.


CLS 361/80
TXT Distance relaying:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 wherein the voltages and currents are
    sensed at specific points in a system and computed with each other or with
    reference quantities to determine if a fault condition exists in the
    protected line section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67+,    for distance relaying circuits in series connected sections.


CLS 361/81
TXT With communication means between disconnect points:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein a communication means sends a
    coded message between disconnect points indicating that a fault condition
    exists.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64      and 66, for communication circuits in feeder networks.

    68+,    for communication circuits in series connected sections.


CLS 361/82
TXT Reverse energy responsive (e.g., directional):

    Subject matter under subclass 79 wherein the fault sensing means responds
    to the flow of energy which is reversed with respect to the normal
    direction of flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     for similar subject matter wherein the quantities compared are not
    specifically voltage and current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 127
    for polarity, phase sequence or reverse flow responsive switching systems.


CLS 361/83
TXT With time delay protective means:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 wherein the protective means is activated
    at a predetermined time after a fault is sensed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for time delay circuits in motor protection systems.

    75,     for time delay means in automatic reclosing systems.

    89,     for time delay circuits in voltage responsive systems.

    94,     for time delay circuits in current responsive systems.

    195+,   for time delay circuits in relay and solenoid systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 141
    for time delay circuits in switching circuits.


CLS 361/84
TXT Reverse energy responsive (e.g., directional):

    Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein the fault sensing means responds
    to the flow of energy which is reversed with respect to the normal
    direction of flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     for similar subject matter wherein the quantities compared are
    specifically voltage and current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 127
    for polarity, phase sequence or reverse flow responsive switching systems.


CLS 361/85
TXT Phase:

    Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein the protective circuitry is
    activated by a difference in the phases of the compared electrical
    quantities.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76,     for phase sequence sensing to determine a fault.

    77,     for reverse phase responsive sensing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 76.77+ for phase
    comparison circuits.


CLS 361/86
TXT Voltage:

    Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein the protective circuitry is
    activated by a difference in the compared circuits.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for voltage sensitive control means in arc suppression circuits.

    21,     for voltage responsive control circuits in generator protective
    systems.

    33+,    for voltage responsive control circuits in motor protective systems.

    56,     for voltage responsive control circuits in load shunting systems.

    88+,    for voltage responsive fault sensors.


CLS 361/87
TXT Current:

    Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein the protective circuitry is
    activated by a difference in the compared currents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for current sensing means in arc suppression circuits.

    31+,    for current responsive control circuitry in motor protective
    circuits.

    57,     for current sensing means in load shunting circuits.

    63+,    for current sensing means in feeder circuits.

    93+,    for specific current responsive sensors.


CLS 361/88
TXT With specific voltage responsive fault sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the fault sensor responds to an
    abnormal voltage condition in the load circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for voltage sensitive control means in arc suppression circuits.

    21,     for voltage responsive control circuits in generator protective
    systems.

    32,     for voltage responsive control circuits in motor protective
    circuits.

    56,     for voltage responsive control circuits in load shunting systems.

    86,     for voltage responsive control circuits in quantity comparison
    circuits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 635+ for electrical
    apparatus condition responsive indicating means.


CLS 361/89
TXT With time delay protective means:

    Subject matter under subclass 88 wherein the protective means is activated
    at a predetermined time after the fault is sensed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195+,   for time delay circuits in relay and solenoid systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 141
    for time delay circuits in switching system.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 261+ and 392+ for miscellaneous delay circuits.


CLS 361/90
TXT Overvoltage and undervoltage:

    Subject matter under subclass 88 wherein the fault sensor is responsive to
    a combined overvoltage and undervoltage condition.


CLS 361/91
TXT Overvoltage:

    Subject matter under subclass 88 wherein the fault sensor is responsive to
    an overvoltage condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 662 for overvoltage,
    responsive circuits in condition responsive systems.


CLS 361/92
TXT Undervoltage:

    Subject matter under subclass 88 wherein the fault sensor is responsive to
    an undervoltage condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 663 for undervoltage
    responsive circuits in condition responsive systems.


CLS 361/93
TXT With specific current responsive fault sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the fault sensor responds to an
    abnormal current condition in the load circuit and subsequently activates a
    protective device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for current responsive control circuits in arc suppression circuits.

    31,     for current responsive control circuitry in motor protective
    circuits.

    57,     for current responsive control circuitry in load shunting circuits.

    63+,    for current responsive control circuitry in feeder distribution
    network.

    87,     for current responsive control circuitry in quantity comparison
    circuits.


CLS 361/94
TXT With time delay protective means:

    Subject matter under subclass 93 wherein the protective means is activated
    at a predetermined time after the fault is sensed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195+,   for time delay circuits in relay and solenoid systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 141
    for time delay circuits in switching systems.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 261+ and 392+ for miscellaneous delay circuits.


CLS 361/95
TXT With instantaneous override:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 wherein the protective means is activated
    at a predetermined time after a first level fault is sensed, or immediately
    after a fault of a higher predetermined level is sensed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111,    for general transient responsive circuits (disconnects circuit).


CLS 361/96
TXT With multiple timing characteristics (e.g., short, long):

    Subject matter under subclass 95 wherein the protective means is activated
    after a short, intermediate, long, etc., time delay depending on the
    magnitude of the fault sensed.


CLS 361/97
TXT With multiple timing characteristics:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 wherein the protective means is activated
    after a short, long, intermediate, etc., time delay depending on the
    magnitude of the fault sensed.


CLS 361/98
TXT Transistorized:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 wherein the protective system utilizes
    solid state components.


CLS 361/99
TXT Combined thermal-electromagnetic relay:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 wherein thermal and electromagnetic means
    are combined to perform the timing or circuit interrupt functions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 35+ for electromagnetically operated circuit
    breakers with combined magnetic and thermal trip means, and subclasses 141+
    for switches with combined magnetic and thermal operating means.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    appropriate subclasses for thermal-type circuit breakers, per se.


CLS 361/100
TXT With semiconductor circuit interrupter (e.g., SCR, triac, tunnel diode,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 93 wherein the protective device which causes
    the current to the load to be discontinued is of the semiconductor type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 365+ for semiconductor interrupter, per se.


CLS 361/101
TXT With transistor circuit interrupter:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the protective device which
    causes the current to the load to be discontinued is of the transistor type.


CLS 361/102
TXT With mechanical circuit breaker:

    Subject matter under subclass 93 wherein the protective device which
    disconnects the load from the source is of the mechanical circuit breaker
    type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115+,   for subject matter with specific circuit breaker or circuit breaker
    control structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, for specific mechanical
    circuit breaker.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 2+ for specific electromagnetic circuit breaker.


CLS 361/103
TXT Circuit interruption by thermal sensing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a thermally responsive device
    detects either the excessive heat of the device being protected or the
    excessive heat generated in the thermally responsive device and activates
    the circuit interrupter which disconnects the load from the source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124+,   for thermally responsive high voltage dissipation devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches, for
    similar subject matter.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 584+ for electrical thermal
    alarms and signals.


CLS 361/104
TXT With fuse:

    Subject matter under subclass 103 wherein the thermally responsive device
    is a fuse.


CLS 361/105
TXT With bimetallic element:

    Subject matter under subclass 103 wherein the thermally responsive device
    is a bimetallic element.


CLS 361/106
TXT With thermistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 103 wherein the thermally responsive device
    is a resistor whose characteristics vary with temperature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 25+ for the thermally responsive
    resistor, per se.


CLS 361/107
TXT With specific transmission line (e.g., guarded):

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the transmission line has
    significant mechanical or structural features.

    (1)     Note.  The transmission line, for example, may be provided with
    guarding means, such as ground wires which act as shields.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, for conductors, per se.


CLS 361/108
TXT Plural conductors in single sheath (e.g., compound):

    Subject matter under subclass 107 having plural conductors in a single
    sheath.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to systems using
    "compound" cables.


CLS 361/109
TXT Too large fault makes breaker inoperative: Subject matter under subclass 1
    having means for rendering a circuit breaker inoperative in the presence of
    a fault of such a large size that the circuit breaker cannot handle it.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to circuit breaker
    systems in which a smaller capacity circuit breaker has associated with it
    "back up" protection and in which only the "back up" protection operates on
    very large faults.


CLS 361/110
TXT Transient nonresponsive (e.g., ignores surge on transmission line):

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the protective means does not
    respond to a large transient surge.

    (1)     Note.  During a switching operation a surge is normally induced.
    The subject matter in this subclass is nonresponsive to that surge.


CLS 361/111
TXT Transient responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the protective means responds to a
    transient surge, normally caused by switching.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95,     for instantaneous override in current responsive systems.


CLS 361/112
TXT With space discharge means:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 having space discharge means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses for
    space discharge means, per se.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous space discharge systems
    not otherwise classified.


CLS 361/113
TXT With tuned circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 having a tuned circuit.


CLS 361/114
TXT With manual or automatic opening of breaker and manual reclose:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 which is provided with means to open the
    circuit breaker either manually or automatically and to reclose the breaker
    manually.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to systems having both a
    local manual control and a remote automatic control for a circuit breaker.


CLS 361/115
TXT With specific circuit breaker or control structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the circuit breaker or its control
    means has significant mechanical features.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, appropriate subclasses for the structure of
    electromagnetically operated circuit breakers, per se.


CLS 361/116
TXT Pneumatically operated circuit breaker:

    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein the circuit breaker is operated
    by pneumatic means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 81+ for fluid
    pressure operated circuit breakers, per se.


CLS 361/117
TXT High voltage dissipation (e.g., lightning arrester):

    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising means for reducing the voltage
    of a surge applied to its terminals without disconnecting the load.

    (1)     Note.  The surge normally being applied by lightning.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to lightning arresters
    and surge dissipators, where the line wire or some other structure that
    relates to the conductor is claimed.  When the line wire is not claimed,
    and only the terminals of the dissipator are claimed the dissipator is
    classified in one of the classes referred to under search class below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 2+ for
    lightning protection by means of conductive structure, such as lightning
    rods; also, consult the search notes to this subclass.  Search subclasses
    140+ for insulators combined with conductive arcing or stress distributing
    means.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses for
    lightning arresters of the arc or spark gap type, not having line conductor
    structure. Also consult the search notes in the class definition for
    related art.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclass 28 for lightning arresters combined with thermal current type
    circuit breakers.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 20+ for electric resistors
    responsive to current and/or voltage changes.


CLS 361/118
TXT Surge prevention (e.g., choke coil):

    Subject matter under subclass 117 consisting of means to diminish the
    effect of transient surges of short duration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for surge prevention in transformer circuits.

    111,    for general transient responsive circuits (disconnects circuit).


CLS 361/119
TXT In communication systems:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 specifically for the protection of
    communication systems (e.g., radio, T.V., etc.).


CLS 361/120
TXT Vacuum or gas filled space discharge:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 having a vacuum chamber or a gas filled
    or vapor filled chamber through which electricity passes by means of space
    conduction.


CLS 361/121
TXT Fluid (e.g., mercury, quenching):

    Subject matter under subclass 117 having a fluid filled chamber through
    which electricity passes.


CLS 361/122
TXT Electrolytic:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the fluid utilized is an
    electrolyte.


CLS 361/123
TXT Gas blast:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the fluid may be vaporized by an
    arc therethrough and as a result, creates a blast of vapor which will
    blowout the arc, or the fluid may be compressed air which, upon being
    released, will blowout the arc.


CLS 361/124
TXT Thermal (e.g., fusible, bimetallic):

    Subject matter under subclass 117 wherein the protective device responds to
    an abnormal temperature created by a surge.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to high voltage
    dissipators having fusible links, or having bimetallic elements which move
    when their temperature changes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for protection circuits which utilize thermal sensors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    337,    Electricity: Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclasses 298+ for specific thermal switch.


CLS 361/125
TXT With cutout (e.g., blowout type):

    Subject matter under subclass 124 including a switch containing a material
    which disintegrates or separates to protect the lightning arrester.


CLS 361/126
TXT Current limiting material in discharge path:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 including a current limiting material in
    the discharge path.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to high voltage
    dissipators in which an arc takes place through a porous composition when a
    high voltage must be dissipated to ground.


CLS 361/127
TXT Nonlinear material (e.g., valve type):

    Subject matter under subclass 126 in which the current limiting material is
    a conductive nonlinear material.

    (1)     Note.  The material utilized is usually of a negative coefficient
    type, which allow the initial surge to easily pass to ground and
    effectively blocks the follow current.


CLS 361/128
TXT With plural gaps in discharge path:

    Subject matter under subclass 127 including plural gaps in the discharge
    path which increase the current handling capabilities of the lightning
    arrester.


CLS 361/129
TXT Plural gaps with common electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 including plural gaps in the discharge
    path with a common electrode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 243+ for plural air
    gap discharge devices not having line or conductor structure as part
    thereof.


CLS 361/130
TXT Plural gaps serially connected:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 including plural gaps in the discharge
    path which are serially connected to increase the current handling
    capabilities of the lightning arrester.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 36 for
    subcombination of lightning arrester.


CLS 361/131
TXT Combined (e.g., with disconnect switch):

    Subject matter under subclass 117 combined with some other type of subject
    matter (e.g., disconnect switch).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for high voltage dissipator combined with transformer.


CLS 361/132
TXT With line supporting insulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 in combination with a line supporting
    insulator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, for line supporting
    insulators, per se.


CLS 361/133
TXT With magnetic means (e.g., electromagnet): Subject matter under subclass
    117 including magnetic means associated with the discharge circuit.


CLS 361/134
TXT Arc stretching (e.g., blowout):

    Subject matter under subclass 133 wherein magnetic means are used to
    lengthen the arc thereby isolating the load circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    218,    High-Voltage Switches With Arc Preventing and Extinguishing
    Devices, subclasses 22+ for magnetic blowouts used with switches.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 153+ for
    miscellaneous space discharge devices having magnetic means for influencing
    the space discharge.


CLS 361/135
TXT By separating contacts:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 wherein magnetic means are used for
    separating the contacts across which the arc is stretched.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, appropriate subclasses for electromagnetically operated
    switches in which an electromagnet is used as a source of force to separate
    two or more contacts.


CLS 361/136
TXT For grounding line:

    Subject matter under subclass 133 wherein the magnetic means is used to
    ground the lines.


CLS 361/137
TXT Horn gap:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 consisting of a horn gap.

    (1)     Note.  A horn gap is defined as being an air gap between two
    electrodes which have such a configuration that the arc, which takes place
    between them when the gap breaks down, is located first at a point where
    the electrodes are closely adjacent to each other, and then, under the
    action of the resulting electrical or thermal currents, rises and lengthens
    by shifting to a region where the distance between the electrodes is
    greater.  Eventually, the arc ruptures because of its great length.


CLS 361/138
TXT With resistance insertion:

    Subject matter under subclass 137 wherein resistances are inserted in the
    path of the arc as it lengthens.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for inserting impedance in horn gap in arc suppression systems.


CLS 361/139
TXT CONTROL CIRCUITS FOR ELECTROMAGNETIC DEVICES:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to control circuits for
    relays and other electromagnetic devices.

    (1)     Note.  When the relay controls a particular device, classification
    is not in this subclass but is in the class that provides for the art
    environment.  Note that many electrical and nonelectrical classes have
    disclosures which include, as part thereof, relay and electromagnet control
    circuits.  Therefore, in appropriate instances, the search should extend to
    the class which relates to the environment in which the relay or
    electromagnet circuit might be found.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, appropriate subclasses for television and telegraph
    systems utilizing electromagnets and relays. Note, particularly subclasses
    70+ for telegraph code repeaters.

    222,    Dispensing, for dispensing devices utilizing electromagnetic
    actuators.

    235,    Registers, subclasses 61+ for electric calculators having relay
    type counting chains.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 129.01+ for electromagnetic
    valve operators.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 101
    for miscellaneous remnant and residual magnetism control, subclass 104 for
    miscellaneous electromagnet and highly inductive systems, and subclasses
    112+ for miscellaneous switching systems.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 153+ and 364+ for
    cathode-ray, lamp and space discharge devices having magnetic means.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrode, for arc
    lamps having electromagnet or relay means to control the arc.  Note, for
    example, subclasses 78, 113+ and 135.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 399+ for
    cathode-ray tube deflecting circuits utilizing electromagnets.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    electric motor control systems utilizing electromagnets or relays.  Note
    that any electromagnet is an electrothermal transducer and therefore it is
    an electric motor.  Also, see subclass 492 for electric motor systems
    having means to dissipate the magnetic energy of the electric motor.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 17+ for generator systems having relay control means.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for voltage control and phase control systems having relays and
    electromagnets.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous nonlinear active device
    circuits.

    331,    Oscillators, appropriate subclasses for self-sustained electric
    wave generator systems of the nondynamoelectric type.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, appropriate subclasses for electromagnetic relays, per se.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, appropriate subclasses for telephone
    systems utilizing electromagnets and relays.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 9+.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclass 1.


CLS 361/140
TXT Including compensation for thermal change of electromagnetic  device:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein circuits or devices are included
    which compensate for any thermal changes of the electromagnetic device
    caused by ambient temperature changes or by the heat generated during the
    operation of the device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 105 for electric
    meters having thermal compensating means.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 7+ for electrical resistors whose
    resistance value is temperature compensated.


CLS 361/141
TXT Including superconductivity:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 utilizing electromagnetic devices or
    control circuit conductors which are superconductive.

    (1)     Note.  Superconductivity is a property possessed by some metals,
    alloys, and compounds when their temperature is reduced to within a few
    degrees of absolute zero.  There is a steady fall of resistance with
    temperature in these materials until a critical temperature (transition
    temperature) is reached, and then the resistance falls suddenly to zero or
    practically to zero.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    particularly subclasses 150+ for high temperature (Tc  30 K)
    superconducting systems or devices, subclass 192 for capacitors having high
    temperature superconducting materials, and cross-reference art collections
    in subclass 851 for control circuits for electromagnetic devices that are
    superconductive, or that control superconductive devices.


CLS 361/142
TXT Including housing:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein the control circuit or the
    electromagnetic device or both are housed or enclosed.

    (1)     Note.  The enclosure is specifically designed to protect the
    control circuit or device against damage or heat, or to be a plug-in unit.


CLS 361/143
TXT Systems for magnetizing, demagnetizing or controlling the magnetic field:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 including systems and processes for
    magnetizing, demagnetizing or effecting a magnetic field by means of
    controlled energization or deenergization of an electromagnetic coil.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, processes for
    demagnetizing the hair springs of a watch and systems for supplying energy
    to a demagnetizing coil.

    (2)     Note.  Where the demagnetizing is combined with the specific
    features of the art environment, the search should extend to the class
    which relates to the art environment.


CLS 361/144
TXT For lifting or holding:

    Subject matter under subclass 143 wherein the electromagnet is used for
    lifting, suspending, holding or displacing objects by controlling the field
    of the electromagnet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 90.5 for magnetic
    supports.


CLS 361/145
TXT Magnetic chuck-type:

    Subject matter under subclass 144 wherein the work function is performed by
    a magnetic chuck-type electromagnet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 291 for magnetic chuck structure.


CLS 361/146
TXT Systems for magnetic field stabilization or compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 143 including systems which maintain the
    value of the force of the magnetic field or compensate for the effects of
    external magnetic forces on the electromagnet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 300+ for related
    subject matter involving nuclear induction.


CLS 361/147
TXT With permanent magnet:

    Subject matter under subclass 143 wherein a permanent magnet is combined
    with the electromagnet.


CLS 361/148
TXT Calibration or permanent magnet:

    Subject matter under subclass 147 wherein the strength of the field of the
    permanent magnet is adjusted to a predetermined value.


CLS 361/149
TXT Demagnetizing:

    Subject matter under subclass 143 including systems and processes for
    neutralizing a magnetic field by means of controlled energization or
    deenergization of an electromagnetic coil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    267,    for demagnetizing systems and processes, per se.


CLS 361/150
TXT Television degaussing:

    Subject matter under subclass 149 wherein the demagnetizing system or
    process is peculiar to a television receiver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 8 for
    cathode-ray tube degaussing systems.


CLS 361/151
TXT Magnetic tape:

    Subject matter under subclass 149 wherein the demagnetizing system or
    process is peculiar to neutralizing magnetic tape.


CLS 361/152
TXT Including particular drive circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 143 including a drive circuit specifically
    designed to meet the required operating parameters of an electromagnetic
    device.

    (1)     Note.  The drive circuits included satisfy such operating
    parameters as providing plural distinct operating currents or providing
    pulses to the device to operate it in a specific manner.


CLS 361/153
TXT Pulse initiated:

    Subject matter under subclass 152 wherein a circuit or device which
    responds to a voltage pulse signal is used to initiate the operation of the
    electromagnetic device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186,    for miscellaneous pulse initiated control circuits for relays and
    solenoids.


CLS 361/154
TXT Including means to establish plural distinct current levels (e.g., high,
    low):

    Subject matter under subclass 152 wherein the drive circuit includes means
    to establish plural distinct current levels.

    (1)     Note.  The plural distinct current levels may include, for example,
    a high initial current to quickly operate the relay and subsequent lesser
    current value to "hold" the relay operated.


CLS 361/155
TXT With capacitor charging or discharging through coil:

    Subject matter under subclass 154 wherein the plural current levels are
    obtained by the charging or discharging of a capacitor through the coil of
    the electromagnetic device.


CLS 361/156
TXT With capacitor charging or discharging through coil:

    Subject matter under subclass 152 wherein the drive circuit includes the
    charging or discharging of a capacitor through the coil of the device to
    control the operating current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155,    for plural distinct current levels.


CLS 361/157
TXT Including instrument (e.g., meter-relay):

    Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein an instrument is included in the
    control circuit.

    (1)     Note.  The instrument may itself be the combination of a meter with
    contacts or a relay may be combined with the meter so that the meter
    movement actuates the relay.


CLS 361/158
TXT Temperature indicating instrument:

    Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the instrument of the meter-relay
    combination gives an indication of temperature.


CLS 361/159
TXT Including means for using, or compensating  for the induced EMF of the
    electromagnetic device:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein a circuit or device is included
    which utilizes the induced electromotive force generated by the operation
    of the electromagnetic device.

    (1)     Note.  The system may, for example, store the induced EMF and
    subsequently use this stored EMF to aid in operating the electromagnetic
    device.


CLS 361/160
TXT For relays or solenoids:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein the electromagnetic device is a
    relay or a solenoid.


CLS 361/161
TXT Including thermal device:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein a thermal device is included in
    the control circuit of the relay or solenoid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 25+ for electrical resistors
    responsive to a change in ambient temperature.


CLS 361/162
TXT Thermoelectric:

    Subject matter under subclass 161 wherein the thermal device is of the
    thermo couple type.


CLS 361/163
TXT Bimetallic element:

    Subject matter under subclass 161 wherein the thermal device is a
    bimetallic element.


CLS 361/164
TXT Including heater:

    Subject matter under subclass 163 which includes a heating element to
    control the operation of the bimetallic element.


CLS 361/165
TXT Thermistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 161 wherein the thermal device is a
    thermistor.


CLS 361/166
TXT Plural relays or solenoids sequentially operated:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 having plural relays or solenoids as the
    controlled devices which are operated in a predetermined sequence.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171,    for this subject matter with code responsive control circuit.


CLS 361/167
TXT Alternately operated:

    Subject matter under subclass 166 wherein the plural relays or solenoids
    are operated in an alternate sequence.


CLS 361/168.1
TXT Pulse responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 166 wherein the predetermined sequence of
    operation of the relays or solenoids are controlled by a drive circuit or
    device which responds to a voltage pulse circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186,    for pulse responsive control circuits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    329,    Demodulators, subclasses 311+ for pulse demodulators.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 825.66 for selective circuits
    using relay counting chains.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 65 for shift registers using
    electromechanical relays and subclass 83 for counting chains using relays.


CLS 361/169.1
TXT Including electronic element:

    Subject matter under subclass 168.1 wherein electronic devices are utilized.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172,    for this subject matter in pulse responsive control circuits.


CLS 361/170
TXT Condition responsive (e.g., external circuit condition):

    Subject matter under subclass 160 including circuits or devices which
    respond to external circuit conditions to initiate the operation of the
    relay or solenoid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 116+
    for condition responsive circuits in switching systems.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 509+ for miscellaneous external effect circuits.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+ for condition
    responsive circuits in communication systems.


CLS 361/171
TXT Code responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 170 wherein the external circuit condition
    required to operate the relay or solenoid is the application of the proper
    code pulses to the control circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclass 278 for this subject matter utilized in locks.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825+ for this subject
    matter in miscellaneous selective systems such as remote control systems.


CLS 361/172
TXT Including electronic element:

    Subject matter under subclass 171 wherein electronic devices are utilized.


CLS 361/173
TXT Light:

    Subject matter under subclass 170 wherein a light responsive element is
    used to initiate the operation of the relay or solenoid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for photoelectric cell circuits not
    having a relay or solenoid as the last element controlled.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 117
    for miscellaneous light responsive switching systems.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 149+ for
    electric lamp and discharge devices with radiant energy sensitive control
    means.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 59 for amplifier systems including light
    controlled or activated devices.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 66 for light responsive devices combined with
    oscillators.


CLS 361/174
TXT Light sensor controls its light path:

    Subject matter under subclass 173 wherein the light sensor controls its own
    optical system, by which it is illuminated.


CLS 361/175
TXT Including electronic element:

    Subject matter under subclass 173 wherein electronic devices are utilized.


CLS 361/176
TXT Plural light sensors:

    Subject matter under subclass 175 wherein more than one light sensor is
    included in the control circuit.


CLS 361/177
TXT Plural light sensors:

    Subject matter under subclass 173 wherein more than one light sensor is
    included in the control circuit.


CLS 361/178
TXT Fluid (e.g., liquid level, humidity):

    Subject matter under subclass 170 wherein the initiating device or circuit
    is responsive to the condition of a fluid (liquid or gas).

    (1)     Note.  The system may, for example, respond to precipitation, fluid
    level or flow, humidity of fluid pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 602 for moisture or humidity;
    subclass 604 for wetness; and subclasses 618+ for liquid level alarm
    systems, respectively.


CLS 361/179
TXT Proximity or contact:

    Subject matter under subclass 170 wherein the device or circuit which
    initiates the operation of the relay or solenoid is responsive to an object
    coming very close to or touching the device.


CLS 361/180
TXT Metal presence or absence responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 179 wherein the initiating device or circuit
    responds to the presence or absence of metal in proximity to or contact
    with the device.


CLS 361/181
TXT Capacitance change-type:

    Subject matter under subclass 179 wherein the initiating device or circuit
    responds to a change in capacitance at the detecting electrode.


CLS 361/182
TXT Frequency (e.g., audio, radio):

    Subject matter under subclass 170 wherein circuits or devices which respond
    to audio or radio frequencies are used to initiate the operation of the
    relay or solenoid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 47+ for this subject matter in telegraph
    systems.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825+ for this subject
    matter in miscellaneous communication systems.


CLS 361/183
TXT Plural relays or solenoids as loads:

    Subject matter under subclass 182 wherein two or more relays or solenoids
    are controlled by one or more frequency signals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191+,   for plural relay solenoid loads selectively operated.


CLS 361/184
TXT Specific Frequency Responsive Relay:

    Subject matter under subclass 182 which includes a relay which only
    operates when excited with a supply of a predetermined frequency.


CLS 361/185
TXT Phase:

    Subject matter under subclass 170 wherein a circuit or device which
    responds to a particular phase of a current or voltage signal is used to
    initiate the operation of the relay.


CLS 361/186
TXT Pulse:

    Subject matter under subclass 170 wherein a circuit or device which
    responds to a pulse signal is used to initiate the operation of the relay.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153,    for pulse responsive circuits in drive circuits which are peculiar
    to electromagnetic devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    329,    Demodulators, subclasses 311+ for pulse demodulators.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.57+ for this subject
    matter, especially in miscellaneous communication systems.


CLS 361/187
TXT Voltage or current level discriminators:

    Subject matter under subclass 170 wherein the initiating device or circuit
    responds only to a specific voltage or current level applied to it.


CLS 361/188
TXT Variable impedance:

    Subject matter under subclass 170 wherein the initiating circuit or device
    is responsive to variable impedance values.


CLS 361/189
TXT Plural switches in control circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein more than one switch is included
    in the control circuit, all of which must be operated to initiate the
    operation of the relay.


CLS 361/190
TXT Including electronic switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 189 wherein at least one of the switches in
    the control circuit is of the electronic type.


CLS 361/191
TXT Plural relay or solenoid loads selectively operated:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 including plural relay load circuits
    which are selectively operated.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to selective systems for
    selecting any one of plural relays.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171,    for this subject matter in code responsive control circuits.

    183,    for subject matter wherein two or more relays or solenoids are
    controlled by plural frequency signals.


CLS 361/192
TXT Including interlock:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the relays or solenoids are
    interconnected either electrically or mechanically so that only the
    selected one or ones can be maintained in an actuated condition at any
    given moment.


CLS 361/193
TXT Electronic interlock:

    Subject matter under subclass 192 wherein the interlocking of the relays or
    solenoids is controlled by electronic circuits or devices.


CLS 361/194
TXT Holding means:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 having holding means to hold the relay or
    solenoid in the operated state, despite the lapsing of the original control
    signal.


CLS 361/195
TXT Time delay:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein circuits or devices are included
    which initiate the operation of the relay a predetermined interval of time
    after the initiation of a control function.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 261+ and 392+ for miscellaneous timing and delay
    circuits, per se.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 527+ for a condition
    responsive signalling system having a time delay circuit.


CLS 361/196
TXT Including semiconductor device connected to timing element:

    Subject matter under subclass 195 wherein the control circuit includes a
    semiconductor device connected between the timing circuit and the relay.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses for active solid-state semiconductor devices, per se.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous semiconductor circuits
    and devices.


CLS 361/197
TXT Threshold device (e.g., zener, schockley diode):

    Subject matter under subclass 196 wherein a semiconductor device conducts
    current when the potential applied across it reaches a specific value.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200     and 205, for threshold devices in other control circuits.


CLS 361/198
TXT Including three or more electrodes (e.g., unijunction):

    Subject matter under subclass 197 wherein the semiconductor device has
    three or more electrodes.


CLS 361/199
TXT Including electric discharge device:

    Subject matter under subclass 195 wherein the control circuit includes an
    electric discharge device connected between the timing circuit and the
    relay.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous space discharge tube
    circuits.  Also, consult the main class search notes and the search notes
    to the subclasses for a compilation of other classes having related art.


CLS 361/200
TXT Threshold device (neon tube):

    Subject matter under subclass 199 wherein the electric discharge device
    conducts current when the potential applied across it reaches a specific
    value.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    197     and 205, for threshold devices in other control circuits.


CLS 361/201
TXT Including thyratron:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the threshold device is a
    thyratron.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256     and 354, for other control circuits utilizing a thyratron as a
    threshold device.


CLS 361/202
TXT Electromechanical delay means:

    Subject matter under subclass 195 wherein the predetermined interval of
    time required is controlled by an electromechanical device.

    (1)     Note.  Electromechanical device may be an electric motor or
    solenoid with a cam operated switch, or a mechanical device connected to
    the relay or solenoid to delay operation (e.g., a dashpot, escapement
    mechanism, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 59+ for electro-magnetically operated switches
    with time delay, and subclasses 239+ for electromagnetic relays with time
    delay.


CLS 361/203
TXT With oscillator:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 which includes an oscillator in the
    control circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, appropriate subclass for electric oscillation
    generators, per se.


CLS 361/204
TXT With magnetic amplifier or saturable reactor:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 having a magnetic amplifier or saturable
    reactor in the control circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 401+
    for nonlinear reactor systems.


CLS 361/205
TXT Threshold device (e.g., SCR, thyratron):

    Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein a threshold device, which
    conducts current when the potential applied across it reaches a specific
    value, is connected to the coil of the electromagnetic device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    197+    and 200+, for threshold devices in time delay control circuits.


CLS 361/206
TXT Particular relay or solenoid:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein the electromagnetic device is
    distinctive structurally or in its operation.


CLS 361/207
TXT Electrostatic:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 having electrostatic means.

    (1)     Note.  The electrostatic means may, for example, be a piezoelectric
    crystal which is an integral part of a relay and which is utilized to
    operate the relay contacts or the electrostatic means may be in the circuit
    which actuates the relay or electromagnet as, for example, an electrostatic
    dry clutch which is utilized in a control apparatus in the input circuit to
    the relay electromagnet.


CLS 361/208
TXT Polarized:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 wherein the movement of the armature
    depends upon the direction of the current in the control circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 230+ for polarized electromagnets with
    armatures, per se.


CLS 361/209
TXT Alternating current type:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 wherein the device is responsive to
    alternating current energization.


CLS 361/210
TXT Plural coils:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 wherein more than one coil is required in
    its operation.


CLS 361/211
TXT CONTROL CIRCUITS FOR NONELECTROMAGNETIC TYPE RELAY (E.G., THERMAL RELAYS):

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to control circuits for
    relays which utilize means other than electromechanical means to open or
    close electrical contacts.

    (1)     Note.  For example, a bimetallic device may be used as the relay
    contact making means.


CLS 361/212
TXT DISCHARGING OR PREVENTING ACCUMULATION OF ELECTRIC CHARGE (E.G., STATIC
    ELECTRICITY):

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to the dissipation of
    any residual electric charge present on or in an object or material.

    (1)     Note.  Where the discharge of the static electricity is combined
    with the specific features of the art environment, the search should extend
    to the class which relates to the art environment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117+,   for high voltage dissipation devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 2 for lightning
    protection devices such as lightning rods, subclasses 5+ for electric shock
    hazard protection devices, such as guards, and subclasses 6+ for grounding
    devices.

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, subclass 6 for etching in the
    manufacturing of a capacitor.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    subclasses 127+ for discharging a battery and subclasses 166+ for
    discharging a capacitor, per se.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave, subclass 885 for antennas with a
    support for the antenna, reflector or director and having stress
    distributing or static discharging means for the support.


CLS 361/213
TXT By charged gas irradiation:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 relating to the dissipation of a residual
    electric charge on or in an object or material using a charged gas.

    (1)     Note.  Radioactive type ionization for dissipating a residual
    electric charge is also found in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229,    for this subject matter used in charging an object or material.

    230+,   for ion generators, per se.


CLS 361/214
TXT Of paper or paper handling machine:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 relating to the dissipation of electric
    charge on paper or paper handling machines.


CLS 361/215
TXT Of storage or hazardous area of fluid handling:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 relating to the dissipation of the
    electric charge from storage or hazardous area or fluid handling.

    (1)     Note.  The electric charge may be eliminated from a liquid or gas
    by the provision of a grounding circuit to the liquid or gas carrying
    device.


CLS 361/216
TXT Structurally combined with building or vehicle:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 wherein the dissipating means is attached
    to or an integral part of a building or vehicle.


CLS 361/217
TXT With external structure of vehicle:

    Subject matter under subclass 216 wherein the dissipating means is attached
    to or an integral part of the external structure of a vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220+,   for specific dissipating devices.


CLS 361/218
TXT Aircraft:

    Subject matter under subclass 217 wherein the vehicle is an air travel
    vehicle, e.g., airplanes, rockets, balloons, helicopters, etc.

    (1)     Note.  The typical type of dissipator used is the rod type found in
    subclass 222.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220+,   for specific dissipating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 1 for aircraft lightning arresters and static
    eliminators.


CLS 361/219
TXT Chain-type grounding means:

    Subject matter under subclass 217 wherein the electric charge is discharged
    from the vehicle by a flexible electroconductive chain-type member which is
    connected at one end to the vehicle and at the other end contacts a ground.

    (1)     Note.  "Chain" in this subclass includes such devices as chains,
    cables, flexible rods with attached wheels, etc.


CLS 361/220
TXT Specific conduction means or dissipator:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 relating to the specific device, material
    or circuit means used to effect discharge or prevent the accumulation of
    electric charge.

    (1)     Note.  Devices adapted to be held by, attached to, or touched by a
    human being are classifiable herein or the indents hereunder.


CLS 361/221
TXT Brush or roller-type structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein the electric charge dissipator is
    a brush or roller means.


CLS 361/222
TXT Rod-type structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein the electric charge dissipator is
    an elongated rod-type structure having at least one point type end.


CLS 361/223
TXT Shoe type:

    Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein the electric charge is dissipated
    by an electrical path through the shoes, an attachment to the shoes, or a
    covering over the shoes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, for necessary shoe structure.


CLS 361/224
TXT Integral with shoe:

    Subject matter under subclass 223 wherein the electric charge is dissipated
    by electrically conductive means forming a permanent part of the shoes.


CLS 361/225
TXT ELECTRIC CHARGING OF OBJECTS OR MATERIALS:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a means or method is
    provided for imparting an electrical charge to a material or object.

    (1)     Note.  Where the charging of objects or materials is combined with
    the specific features of an art environment, the search should be made in
    the class which relates to the art environment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, see cross-reference art  collection 900 for a method
    or apparatus for assembly by electrostatic attraction, which may include a
    step or mechanism for imposing an electrostatic charge.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, especially subclasses 164+
    for preparation of a compound or element through a chemical reaction
    brought about by an electrostatic field or electrical discharge.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, appropriate subclasses for this subject matter
    when used in electrolysis.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 324+ for subject matter which provides
    for impacting an object with gas ions resulting from an incomplete
    electrical discharge from an electrode.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass for charging a battery or capacitor.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclasses 106+ for processes and devices for producing plasma utilized in
    thermonuclear reactions.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 21, 22+, and 186 for process and
    apparatus provided by the class using electrical energy.


CLS 361/226
TXT Particulate matter (e.g., liquids with suspended particles):

    Subject matter under subclass 225 relating to imparting an electrical
    charge to minute separate particles of matter.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include gas charging, however,
    included in this subclass is a mixture or solution of powders which are
    suspended or entrained in a gas or liquid.


CLS 361/227
TXT For spray production:

    Subject matter under subclass 226 wherein the electrical charges are
    imparted to a spray material.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter in which a particular recitation of a nozzle
    or spray pattern is emphasized, even though the spray is electrostatically
    charged, is beyond this subclass and should be placed in Class 239,
    subclass 15.

    (2)     Note.  Subject matter wherein a particular relationship exists
    between the spray device and work sprayed upon, particular movement of the
    work with respect to the spray device, or vice versa, are not included in
    this subclass; such subject matter can be found in Class 427, subclasses
    13+ and Class 118, subclasses 621+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 621+ for electrostatic spray devices
    with a specific relationship with respect to the work.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 690+ for
    electrostatically charged spray in a particular nozzle or spray pattern.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 458+ for processes of coating per se
    utilizing an electrostatic charge.


CLS 361/228
TXT Liquid type:

    Subject matter under subclass 227 wherein an electrical charge is imparted
    to a liquid spray material or powder supported in a stream of liquid
    material.


CLS 361/229
TXT By charged gas irradiation:

    Subject matter under subclass 225 relating to imparting an electrical
    charge to a material or object using a charged gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213,    for this subject matter used in discharging a material or object.

    230+,   for ion generators, per se.


CLS 361/230
TXT ELECTRIC CHARGE GENERATING OR CONDUCTING MEANS (E.G., CHARGING OF GASES):

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to corona or ion
    generators which utilize air or other gases as the charge generating medium
    to be placed in contact with the charge generating electrodes or with the
    specific electrodes which project the electric field generated.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also provides for other electric charge
    generating or conducting means not elsewhere provided for.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 423+ for ion generation methods and
    apparatus in which a material is treated or irradiated.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 54, 62, and 359.1+
    for space discharge device per se for production of ionized atomic
    particles.  Also, consult the search notes to these subclasses for related
    subject matter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213,    for discharging of a material or object using a charged gas.

    229,    for charging of a material or object using a charged gas.


CLS 361/231
TXT Modification of environmental electrical charge:

    Subject matter under subclass 230 relating to devices or processes for
    altering or changing the ambient charge in a definable area or atmosphere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 15+ for electrostatic-type
    precipitators.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 2.1 for
    processes of weather control utilizing electric charge generating means.


CLS 361/232
TXT For application to living beings:

    Subject matter under subclass 230 wherein an electric charge or voltage is
    produced on a material or device which will discharge to living beings
    causing an electrical shock to be produced in the living being when it
    comes into contact with or in close proximity with the charged or voltage
    carrying material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 712+, for application of electricity
    to an animal to control it, especially subclasses 822 and 908, and subclass
    859 for a collar having a device to apply electricity to an animal.

    231,    Whips and Whip Apparatus, subclass 7 for an electrified goad for
    controlling the behavior or movement of an animal.

    256,    Fences, subclass 10 for electric fences.

    463,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclass 47.3 for a striking type of
    weapon for use on a human being which includes an electric shock feature
    (e.g., an electric prod used by police, etc.).


CLS 361/233
TXT Use of forces of electric charge or field:

    Subject matter under subclass 230 relating to the utilization of the forces
    of the electric the utilization of the forces of the electric charge, or
    the forces of the electric field generated to perform a mechanical work
    function.


CLS 361/234
TXT Pinning:

    Subject matter under subclass 233 relating to the utilization of the forces
    generated to effect the holding or pinning of an object or material on a
    surface.


CLS 361/235
TXT With specific power supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 230 wherein electrical circuitry and means
    are provided for the production of a current or voltage which is utilized
    specifically for electric charge generation.

    (1)     Note.  To be proper for this subclass, the subject matter claimed
    must recite processes or means which are not provided for in any of the
    above subclasses.  The subject matter must clearly recite circuitry for use
    in generating an electrical charge.


CLS 361/236
TXT ELECTRICAL SPEED SIGNAL PROCESSING SYSTEMS:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein electrical circuitry is
    provided for detection of the speed or acceleration of a member, either
    angular or linear, and means included in the circuitry responsive to a
    change in speed or acceleration to generate a desired speed or acceleration
    control signal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates to, for example, miscellaneous speed
    sensing and speed responsive systems having no output which is specific to
    any particular art.  This subclass relates only to speed controlled
    subcombinations; not speed controlled combinations.

    (2)     Note.  Subject matter in which a combination of speed control
    circuitry and the device being controlled is claimed, proper classification
    is with the device and should not be placed in this or indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for protection of electrical systems against overspeed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 488+ for speed or accelerating
    measuring.

    178,    Telegraphy, appropriate subclasses for telegraph and television
    systems having speed responsive means as a part thereof.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 170+ as explained in the reference
    thereto appearing in Class 361, subclass 51.

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants, subclass 40 for prime-mover dynamo
    plants having means to control the speed of the engine.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    speed controlled electric motor systems. Note particularly subclasses 806
    and 461+.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 160+ for electrical
    speed measuring processes and mechanisms.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 441 for vehicle alarms or
    indicators which are responsive to the speed of the vehicle, and subclasses
    670+ for speed responsive alarms, per se.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 354+ for
    synchronization.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclasses 44+ for an
    impeller having control means responsive to the rotation speed thereof.


CLS 361/237
TXT With centrifugal weight means:

    Subject matter under subclass 236 wherein the electrical circuitry includes
    a centrifugal means for regulation of the speed of acceleration of a member
    under consideration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 38 for vehicular governors
    indication speed and direction.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 319+ for speed regulators
    especially subclasses 350+, 378+, and 402+.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 80+ for
    centrifugally operated speed responsive switches.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 799 and 462 for
    centrifugal type automatic speed or rate-of-movement detectors.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surface (i.e., Impellers), subclasses 31+,
    especially subclass 35 for electrical means comparing or reducing an error
    responsive to centrifugal action.


CLS 361/238
TXT Antislip detection and circuitry:

    Subject matter under subclass 236 wherein the electrical circuit contains
    means for determination of a loss of traction or loss of rotation condition.

    (1)     Note.  The property usually measured is acceleration but is not
    limited thereto.

    (2)     Note.  The acceleration may be a negative or position acceleration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants, subclasses 9+ for electric control
    traction devices.

    303,    Fluid-Pressure and Analogous  Brake System, subclasses 113.1+ for
    antiskid systems where brakes are operated.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 162 for acceleration
    measuring means in an electrical speed measuring device.


CLS 361/239
TXT With speed analog electrical signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 236 wherein the speed change determining
    means includes circuitry for producing an analog signal which has a
    magnitude representative of the speed of the member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 830 and 463+ for
    tachometer type automatic speed or rate-of-movement de-detectors.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 163+ for speed
    measuring means with speed analog electrical signal generators.


CLS 361/240
TXT Including frequency generators:

    Subject matter under subclass 236 wherein the electrical circuit includes
    circuitry in which the frequency of an A.C. current or the frequency of a
    D.C. pulse is representative of the speed of the member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclasses 29+ for
    generator systems which are responsive to the speed or frequency of the
    generator.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 166+ for speed
    related frequency generators used to measure speed.


CLS 361/241
TXT Two position (e.g., on-off):

    Subject matter under subclass 236 wherein the circuitry for generating the
    control signal includes a switch which is either on or off.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242,    for speed control which includes comparison means.


CLS 361/242
TXT With speed comparison:

    Subject matter under subclass 236 wherein the electrical circuit contains
    means for comparing the generated signal with a reference signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 820 for control of the
    speed of a motor or driven device, with respect to a master or reference
    device.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 161 for electrical
    speed measuring with speed comparing means.


CLS 361/243
TXT Synchronization of shafts:

    Subject matter under subclass 236 wherein the speed control means includes
    means for simultaneously controlling the rotation of two or more shafts in
    the same or different mechanisms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242,    for speed comparison means which do not require synchronization
    means but may disclose such.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 395+ for systems for
    synchronizing the rotary motion of a plurality of shafts where adjustable
    gearing is utilized to control the rotation of at least one of the shafts.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclasses, and
    especially subclass 171 for synchronizing plural expansible chamber motors.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 41 for plural electric
    motor systems having electrical synchronizing interconnections for
    maintaining synchronization between the motors, subclasses 68+ for plural
    electric motor systems with means for controlling the running speed of one
    motor relative to the speed of another motor including such systems for
    maintaining the motors in synchronism, and subclass 85 for the
    miscellaneous plural electric motor systems with synchronizing or phasing
    control for the motors.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 681 for a machine
    synchronization responsive indicating device; subclass 318 for
    miscellaneous signalling systems having synchronized distributors at the
    transmitter and receiver.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 12+ for motion picture
    apparatus combined with sound recording or reproducing apparatus and
    including means for synchronizing the two.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 303+ for multiplexing systems
    having a rotary distributor.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 354+ for
    synchronization systems.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclass 34 for plural
    impeller having synchronizing means.


CLS 361/244
TXT Phase comparison:

    Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein the simultaneous rotation of the
    shaft is controlled by a phase measuring and comparing means with one of
    the shafts or a given phase acting as a reference phase.


CLS 361/245
TXT POLARITY REVERSING:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to the reversing of the
    polarity of an electric circuit.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates to, for example, the reversing of
    polarity under the control of an external operator, or the reversing of
    polarity in a continuous pulsating manner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, appropriate subclasses particularly subclass 16 for
    telegraph systems utilizing polarity reversing as an indication of the
    intelligence to be transmitted.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclasses 23+ for electric switches which can be utilized to
    reverse polarity.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclasses 228, 232 and 242 for railway signalling systems utilizing
    polarity reversing as an indication of the intelligence to be transmitted.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 151
    for this subject matter, and subclasses 112+ for miscellaneous switching
    systems, some of which reverse polarity.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 87 for electromagnetically operated switches which
    may be utilized to reverse polarity.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    conversion systems.  Note subclass 109 for conversion systems in which
    direct current is converted into alternating current by the action of a
    switch which reverses the polarity of the output circuit.


CLS 361/246
TXT Automatic:

    Subject matter under subclass 245 in which the polarity is reversed in
    accordance with an automatic control.


CLS 361/247
TXT IGNITING SYSTEMS:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to electrical systems
    which cause the rapid combustion of a fuel or the detonation of an
    explosive charge.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter in this subclass does not include the
    fuel being ignited or the explosive being detonated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 143+ for igniting systems
    utilized with internal-combustion engines.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, appropriate subclasses for solid fuel burners
    having igniting means.

    221,    Article dispensing, subclasses 143+ for article dispensers having
    electrical igniting means.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, appropriate
    subclasses for complete heating systems having igniters as a portion
    thereof.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 258+ for a fuel burner having an electrical
    igniter or heater.


CLS 361/248
TXT For explosive devices:

    Subject matter under subclass 247 for detonating an explosive device.

    (1)     Note.  Explosive devices include, for example, rockets, dynamite
    charges and photoflash devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    89,     Ordnance, appropriate subclasses for explosive device projecting or
    dropping means having igniting means as a part thereof.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, appropriate subclasses for explosive
    devices having igniting means as a portion thereof.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 3+ for photographic illumination devices
    including ignition means.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 155+ for photoflash devices combined with
    camera structure which may include ignition means.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 357+ for photo-flash devices including
    ignition means.


CLS 361/249
TXT With sequential firing by electronic switching:

    Subject matter under subclass 248 wherein plural explosive devices are
    ignited in a particular sequence by electronic switch means.

    (1)     Note.  The electronic switch means includes nonmechanical devices
    such as vacuum tubes, transistors, SCR's, etc.


CLS 361/250
TXT With sequential firing by mechanical switching:

    Subject matter under subclass 248 wherein plural explosive devices are
    ignited in a particular sequence by mechanical switch means.


CLS 361/251
TXT With capacitor discharging into explosive device:

    Subject matter under subclass 248 wherein an explosive device is ignited by
    switching a charge capacitor to discharge into the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256     and 257, for electric spark ignition by capacitor discharge.


CLS 361/252
TXT With electromechanical power source:

    Subject matter under subclass 248 wherein the energy for ignition of the
    explosive device is provided by an electromechanical generator.

    (1)     Note.  The electromechanical generator includes dynamos, magnetos,
    piezoelectric devices, and other devices wherein electric power is produced
    through a mechanical agency.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258,    for particular electromechanical power source combined with
    electrical spark igniter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    a particular electromechanical power source.


CLS 361/253
TXT For electric spark ignition:

    Subject matter under subclass 247 wherein the energy for ignition is
    provided by a system which generates an electric spark.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses for air
    gap discharge devices.  See subclasses 118+ for spark plugs, per se, of the
    type used in internal combustion engines.  See subclass 53 for flame type
    discharge devices in which conduction of electricity takes place through a
    flame.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for lamp and gas discharge device systems. Note, that some of
    these systems can be used to energize electric igniters.


CLS 361/254
TXT With electromagnet control means:

    Subject matter under subclass 253 having electromagnetic means to control
    the igniter.

    (1)     Note.  The electromagnet might also control the flow of gas to the
    igniter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    265,    for electromagnet control with incandescent ignition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 220+ for electromagnets with armatures.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for the structure of
    inductive devices.


CLS 361/255
TXT Including spark-electrode make-break:

    Subject matter under subclass 254 wherein an electromagnet causes the spark
    electrodes to move either together or apart so as to produce a spark.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261,    for particular mechanical arrangements allowing for electrode
    movement.


CLS 361/256
TXT With capacitor discharging into sparking transformer:

    Subject matter under subclass 253 wherein a charged capacitor is switched
    into circuit with and discharges into the primary of a transformer thereby
    inducing a voltage of sufficient magnitude in the secondary of the
    transformer to produce an ignition spark between two spaced electrodes in
    the secondary circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251,    for capacitor discharge firing or explosive devices.

    257,    for capacitor discharge directly into a spark gap to produce an
    ignition spark.


CLS 361/257
TXT With capacitor discharge into spark gap:

    Subject matter under subclass 253 wherein a capacitor is in circuit with
    spark gap electrodes such that when the capacitor is sufficiently charged,
    an ignition spark will be produced between the electrodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251,    for capacitor discharge firing of explosive devices.

    256,    for capacitor discharge into spark transformer to produce an
    ignition spark.


CLS 361/258
TXT With electromechanical generator:

    Subject matter under subclass 253 wherein the energy for electric spark
    ignition is provided by an electromechanical generator which converts
    mechanical energy into electrical energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252,    for electromechanical generator when used to ignite explosive
    devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    particular electromechanical generator.


CLS 361/259
TXT With permanent magnet:

    Subject matter under subclass 258 wherein a magnetic field through a coil
    or transformer due to a permanent magnet is modulated by the action of
    mechanical means so as to induce a sparking voltage across electrodes
    connected to the coil or transformer.


CLS 361/260
TXT With piezoelectric element:

    Subject matter under subclass 258 wherein a piezoelectric crystal is
    mechanically stressed so as to produce a sparking voltage across electrodes
    appropriately connected to the crystal.


CLS 361/261
TXT With mechanical arrangement for spark-electrode make-break:

    Subject matter under subclass 253 including spark electrodes which are part
    of a mechanism which can be mechanically actuated to cause the electrodes
    to move into and out of contact with each other thereby producing a spark.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 146+ for discharge
    devices having moveable electrodes.


CLS 361/262
TXT With one spark electrode which is hand held:

    Subject matter under subclass 253 wherein one of two sparking electrodes is
    arranged to be hand manipulated and manually brought into contact with the
    other electrode to thereby produce a spark.

    (1)     Note.  Included, for example, an energized electrode with an
    insulated handle which can be brought into contact with a grounded gas
    burner to produce a spark igniting the burner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    431,    Combustion, subclass 128 for hand manipulatable electric igniters
    for igniting fuel.


CLS 361/263
TXT With spark coil or transformer:

    Subject matter under subclass 253 wherein the energy for the ignition spark
    is provided by a spark coil or transformer connected to the spark
    electrodes.

    (1)     Note.  "Spark coil" includes induction coils having make-break
    contacts in the primary circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for structure of coil or
    transformer.


CLS 361/264
TXT For incandescent ignition:

    Subject matter under subclass 247 wherein a current is passed through an
    ignition element so as to heat the element to incandescence thereby causing
    ignition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 145+ for an incandescent
    igniter combined with an internal-combustion engine.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 260+ for incandescent igniting
    elements.


CLS 361/265
TXT With electromagnet control means:

    Subject matter under subclass 264 having electromagnetic means to control
    the igniter.

    (1)     Note.  The electromagnet may also control the flow of gas to the
    igniter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254,    for electromagnet control of electric spark ignition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, appropriate subclasses for electromagnet structure.


CLS 361/266
TXT With helical heating element:

    Subject matter under subclass 264 wherein the incandescent igniter is in
    the form of a helix or coil.


CLS 361/267
TXT DEMAGNETIZING SYSTEMS AND PROCESSES:

    Subject matter under the class definition including systems and process for
    neutralizing a magnetic field.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, processes for
    demagnetizing the hair springs of a watch, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Where the demagnetizing is combined with the specific
    features of the art environment, the search should extend to the class
    which relates to the art environment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149+,   for systems and processes for neutralizing the magnetic field by
    means of an electromagnetic coil.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal working, subclasses 602.1+ for processes of making permanent
    magnets consisting of more than merely demagnetizing and processes of
    making electromagnets; also consult the extensive search notes to this
    subclass for a compilation of related subject matter.

    114,    Ships, subclass 240 for degaussing of ships.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 8 for
    demagnetizing as a step preliminary to classifying, separating or assorting.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 101
    for the control of remnant or residual magnetism, and subclass 104 for
    electromagnet and highly inductive systems.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 492 for electric motor
    systems having means to dissipate the magnetic energy of the electric motor.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, appropriate subclasses, especially subclass 284.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclass for
    magnetic storage systems including means to demagnetize the storage medium,
    subclasses 185.01+ for floating gate memory storage  (e.g., flash memory).

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclass 293 for
    antimagnetic devices utilized in horology.


CLS 361/268
TXT TRANSFORMERS AND INDUCTORS WITH INTEGRAL SWITCH, CAPACITOR, OR LOCK (E.G.,
    IGNITION COIL):

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a structural
    combination of a transformer or inductor with a switch, capacitor or a lock.

    (1)     Note.  If the switch is solely for the purpose of tap changing on
    the transformer or inductor device, classification is not herein but rather
    in the appropriate subclass of Class 336.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to ignition coils having
    integral vibrating switches.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35+,    for transformer protection circuits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, subclass 6 for etching in the
    manufacturing of a capacitor.

    334,    Tuners, appropriate subclasses for tuned networks for use in wave
    energy apparatus and comprising an inductor connected to or combined with a
    capacitor, either the inductor or capacitor, or both, being variable. The
    inductor may also be combined with a switch and for such arrangements, not
    especially subclasses 56+.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 105+ and the notes thereto, for
    structural combinations of a transformer or inductive reactor with other
    elements such as a connector; see also (1) Note, above.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 13+ for conversion
    systems which convert direct current into alternating current.  Some of
    these conversion systems are analogous to spark coils.


CLS 361/269
TXT With lock for preventing unauthorized use: Subject matter under subclass
    268 provided with locking means to prevent unauthorized use.

    (1)     Note.  Generally the locking means is part of a conduit or housing
    means in which the electromagnetic device is enclosed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, for locking means, per se. Note, especially subclasses 174+
    for locking means for control and machine elements, and subclasses 237+ for
    locking means for automobile vehicles.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, appropriate subclass,
    particularly subclasses 17+ and 50+ for miscellaneous housings for single
    piece of electrical apparatus, some of which housings may be equipped with
    locking means.


CLS 361/270
TXT With capacitor element:

    Subject matter under subclass 268 comprising a transformer or inductive
    reactor structurally combined with a capacitor.

    (1)     Note.  If the combined capacitor constitutes an electric or
    magnetic shield, classification is not herein but rather in Class 336,
    Inductor Devices, subclasses 87+.

    (2)     Note.  The capacitor may be provided to protect the switch contacts
    of an ignition coil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    271+    and 433+, for capacitors, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 32+ for
    anti-inductive structures utilized with electrical conductors.  Note,
    particularly indented subclasses 35+ for screened or shielded conductors.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, appropriate subclasses for
    electric filter devices comprising the combination of a transformer or
    inductive reactor and a capacitor.

    334,    Tuners, subclasses 59+ for a switch operated tuner which is of the
    tuned transformer type, the transformer usually being combined with a
    lumped capacitor, and subclasses 61+ for tuners having mutual inductance
    variable means which may be a transformer circuit.

    336,    Inductor Devices, and see (1) Note above.


CLS 361/271
TXT ELECTROSTATIC CAPACITORS:

    Subject matter under class definition relating to an electrostatic
    capacitor which is an electrical device having the property that permits
    energy storage as a result of electron displacement, usually consisting of
    at least two conducting surfaces separated by a nonconducting medium (i.e.,
    dielectric) such as a gas, liquid or solid or some combinations thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The term condenser generally used in older patents is an old
    term synonymous with the term capacitor. The same comment applies to
    armature and electrode.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes electrostatic capacitors, per se.
    Electrostatic capacitors combined with another art device or system are
    classified with the particular art device or system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    433+,   for electrolytic capacitors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 25.41+ for miscellaneous methods of
    manufacturing capacitors.  Also consult the extensive search notes to
    subclass 25.41 for a compilation of related art.

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, subclass 6 for etching in the
    manufacturing of a capacitor.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 400
    for electrets, per se, and electret systems.  An electret is a permanently
    polarized dielectric, and therefore related to a capacitor, which has a
    transiently polarized dielectric.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 132 for arc lamps combined with any capacitor.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 3+ and 32+
    for cathode-ray tubes, electric lamps or gas discharge devices combined
    with as an integral part of their structure, a capacitor.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, appropriate subclasses for
    miscellaneous communication type electrical networks having capacitors as
    part thereof.

    334,    Tuners, appropriate subclasses for a variable tuner comprising an
    inductor and a capacitor, with the inductor or capacitor being variable for
    changing the mean resonant frequency of the circuit.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversation, subclass 15 for capacitive
    pattern reading type analog to digital converters.


CLS 361/272
TXT With protection or compensating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 271 having means to safeguard against
    breakdowns or to counteract undesired operating characteristics.

    (1)     Note.  The protective or compensative means is an integral part of
    the capacitor structure and significant details of the capacitor structure
    must be disclosed.

    (2)     Note.  The protective or compensative means must be within or a
    part of the capacitor housing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    for capacitors combined with systems for protecting them, as for
    example, against lightning surges.

    600+,   for miscellaneous housings, switchboards and analogous devices for
    housing or holding two different types of electrical components, one of
    which, for example, may be, an electrical capacitor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 8+ and 50+ for
    miscellaneous electrical housings for a single electrical component, which
    may be, for example, a capacitor, and subclasses 140+ for capacitors
    combined with insulators for the purpose of distributing the electrostatic
    stress uniformly along the insulator.


CLS 361/273
TXT Self-healing:

    Subject matter under subclass 272 having means to automatically restore to
    working order, a malfunctioning capacitor.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, a thin, metal film
    electrode which burns or evaporates away around the point of a puncture
    without damage to the capacitor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304,    for nonself-supporting electrodes (e.g., metallized).


CLS 361/274.1
TXT Temperature:
    Subject matter under subclass 272 including means which shield against or
    make allowance for variations in the internal heat of the capacitor.

    (1)     Note.  These indented subclasses relate, for example, to cooling of
    the capacitor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    676+,   for housings and mounting assemblies with plural diverse electrical
    components for electrical power distribution systems and devices with means
    for cooling the same.

    688+,   for electronic systems and devices with cooling means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for a heat exchange structure
    of a general nature.

    174,    Electricity: Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 15.1+ for
    miscellaneous boxes and housings for a single piece of electrical apparatus
    having means to cool the same.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, appropriate
    subclasses for automatic temperature control systems.

    454,    Ventilation, appropriate subclasses for ventilating devices.


CLS 361/274.2
TXT With fluid cooling means:
    Subject matter under subclass 274.1 including air or liquid to reduce the
    temperature of a capacitor below a specific level.


CLS 361/274.3
TXT With heat sink:
    Subject matter under subclass 274.1 including means for the absorption or
    transfer of heat away from the inner capacitor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    514,    for liquid electrolytic capacitor with heat sink.


CLS 361/275.1
TXT For electrical irregularities:
    Subject matter under subclass 272 wherein the undesired operating
    characteristics are unexpected electrical discharge, corona, or short
    circuiting.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded are capacitors combined with other electronic
    devices unless the sole purpose of the other electronic device is to
    protect the capacitor and the device is an integral part of the capacitor.
    For example, a resistor shunt integral with the capacitor structure is
    found here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    for capacitor protection for preventing current and voltage surges
    that are external to the capacitor housing; details to the capacitor
    structure are not included.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 379-381 and 528-543 for passive components (e.g., capacitor and
    resistor) in integrated chips.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 370 for
    plural impedance control systems; in particular, for capacitor or capacitor
    combined with a resistor or inductor control system.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 167+ for wave
    filters; in particular, for capacitors and resistors for filtering.


CLS 361/275.2
TXT With over-pressure breakaway fuse:
    Subject matter under subclass 275.1 comprising means  composed of an
    electrical current conductor having a rated break point in conjunction with
    a capacitor winding so that the rated break point breaks due to mechanical
    stresses in the conductor caused by over heating of the capacitor.


CLS 361/275.3
TXT With resistance element:
    Subject matter under subclass 275.1 comprising means including an element
    having a property of a conductor which determines the current produced by a
    given difference of potential.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 370 for
    thermistor or resistor with a capacitor.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 296+ for helical or wound
    resistance element.


CLS 361/275.4
TXT With thermal fuse:
    Subject matter under subclass 275.1 comprising a fusible alloy strip which
    melts upon the overheating of the capacitor thus breaking the electrical
    connection between the two ends of the capacitor electrodes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclasses 142+ for fusible element actuated.


CLS 361/276
TXT Cryogenic:

    Subject matter under subclass 271 which is intended to function at
    temperatures near absolute zero.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for superconductive protective circuits.


CLS 361/277
TXT Variable:

    Subject matter under subclass 271 wherein the capacitance of the capacitor
    can be altered.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, subclass 6 for etching in the
    manufacturing of a capacitor.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses for active solid-state semiconductor devices, per
    se, especially subclass 480 for variable capacitance diodes and subclasses
    595-602 for active voltage variable capacitance devices.

    334,    Tuners, subclasses 78+ for tuners having variable capacitors.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 102 and 149+
    for memory storage capacitors.


CLS 361/278
TXT With significant electrode or terminal feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 277 having either a distinctive electrode or
    terminal component.


CLS 361/279
TXT Gas or vacuum dielectric:

    Subject matter under subclass 277 utilizing a gas or a vacuum as the
    dielectric within a sealed housing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    326,    for gas or vacuum fixed capacitors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 8+, especially
    9 and 17+ for miscellaneous boxes and housings for a single electrical
    component in which the housing holds either a vacuum or a gas.


CLS 361/280
TXT Responsive to external condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 277 in which the capacitance varies in
    reaction to an external condition.

    (1)     Note.  The capacitor is designed specifically to be responsive to
    external conditions, for example, a diaphragm plate sensitive to pressure
    changes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    311+,   for particular materials that may be specifically disclosed as
    being responsive to conditions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 116+
    for condition responsive circuits in switching systems.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 658+ for systems
    measuring the capacity of a capacitor, and subclasses 109 and 111+ for
    electric meters having capacitors.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 509+ for miscellaneous external effect circuits.

    332,    Modulators, particularly subclasses 136 and 175 for variable
    capacitors used in a modulator.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+ for condition
    responsive circuits in communication systems.


CLS 361/281
TXT Electrical:

    Subject matter under subclass 280 in which the external condition is
    electrical, as for example, changes in the signal frequency.


CLS 361/282
TXT Thermal:

    Subject matter under subclass 280 in which the external condition is a
    thermic condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 184 for an electric
    thermometer having a capacitive sensor.


CLS 361/283.1
TXT Pressure:
    Subject matter under subclass 280 in which the external condition is a
    force per unit area.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 715, 718, and 724 for capacitive
    fluid pressure gauge.

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclasses 210+ for capacitor gauges.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclass
    174 for capacitive microphone.


CLS 361/283.2
TXT By displacement of stylus or lever:
    Subject matter under subclass 283.1 in which the pressure condition is
    sensed by the change of position of a mechanical element or linkage which
    transmits force to the capacitor.


CLS 361/283.3
TXT By differential capacitor:
    Subject matter under subclass 283.1 in which the pressure condition is
    sensed by two similar sets of fixed plates and one set of movable plates so
    arranged that when the movable plate is moved, the capacitance of one
    section is increased while the capacitance of the other section is
    decreased.


CLS 361/283.4
TXT By diaphragm:
    Subject matter under subclass 283.1 in which the pressure condition is
    sensed by a flexible wall or plate.


CLS 361/284
TXT Liquid level:

    Subject matter under subclass 280 wherein the capacitance varies in
    reaction to the height or level of a liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 304+ for capacitive liquid level
    gauge.


CLS 361/285
TXT Fluid flow:

    Subject matter under subclass 280 in which the exterior condition is the
    flow of a fluid.


CLS 361/286
TXT Humidity:

    Subject matter under subclass 280 in which the exterior condition is the
    moisture content of the surrounding medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 664+ for variable
    capacitors utilizing sensing elements responsive to moisture.


CLS 361/287
TXT Mechanically variable:

    Subject matter under subclass 277 in which the capacitance of the capacitor
    is mechanically variable through the application of tangible physical means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 10+ for the combination of
    a capacitor and a dial shaft operator, such as an operator which can
    quickly set the capacitor into any one of a plurality of preselected
    positions.


CLS 361/288
TXT Push button:

    Subject matter under subclass 287 in which the mechanical movement is
    initiated by depressing a button.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 600 for a
    capacitive switch, absent circuitry.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 116+
    for a capacitive device controlled switching circuit.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclass 33 for a capacitive
    keyboard controlled code transmitter.


CLS 361/289
TXT Motor driven:

    Subject matter under subclass 287 in which the mechanical motion is
    generated by means for converting electromagnetic energy to mechanical
    energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclass 140 for this subject matter utilized in electricity
    conversion systems.


CLS 361/290
TXT By varying distance between electrodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 287 having means to change the interval
    between the electrode plates.


CLS 361/291
TXT Compression type:

    Subject matter under subclass 290 which is varied by means to squeeze at
    least a portion of the electrode plates closer together.


CLS 361/292
TXT By varying effective area of electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 287 having means to change the capacitance of
    the capacitor by changing the effective area of either the electrode plates
    or the dielectric with respect to one another.


CLS 361/293
TXT Disk trimmer:

    Subject matter under subclass 292 having flat, disk or segment shaped,
    adjoining electrode plates.


CLS 361/294
TXT Direct travel piston type:

    Subject matter under subclass 292 having a conductive piston-like electrode
    in a slidable engagement with a dielectric cylinder, said cylinder being
    banded by at least one other electrode.


CLS 361/295
TXT Piston trimmer:

    Subject matter under subclass 292 having a conductive piston-like electrode
    in a rotary screw engagement with a dielectric for capacitance adjustment,
    also said dielectric being banded by at least one other electrode.


CLS 361/296
TXT Sliding plates:

    Subject matter under subclass 292 having electrode plates which variably
    interleaf in a rectilinear manner.


CLS 361/297
TXT Spiral or helical plates:

    Subject matter under subclass 292 in which the electrode plates are made in
    the forms or helixes or spirals which variably interleaf.


CLS 361/298.1
TXT Rotary plates:
    Subject matter under subclass 292 having electrode plates which turn and
    variably interleaf in a circular or orbital path about a fixed axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 658+ for using
    capacitive type measurement.

    334,    Tuners, subclasses 78+ for variable capacitor tuner.


CLS 361/298.2
TXT Details of plate feature:
    Subject matter under subclass 298.1 wherein structural details of an
    electrode plate are included.


CLS 361/298.3
TXT Details of dielectric:
    Subject matter under subclass 298.1 wherein details of the insulating
    medium are included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    311+,   for electrostatic capacitor.

    524,    for solid electrolytic capacitor.


CLS 361/298.4
TXT Details of electrical connecting means (e.g., terminal or lead):Subject
    matter under subclass 298.1 wherein structural details of an electrical
    connector which facilitates connection with another conductor such as a
    terminal or lead are included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    299.2,  for plural capacitor.

    306.1+, for fixed capacitor.

    520,    for liquid electrolytic capacitor.

    538,    for solid electrolytic capacitor.


CLS 361/298.5
TXT With adjustment means:
    Subject matter under subclass 298.1 including means such as a knob or lever
    to vary the effective area of electrodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    299.4,  for rotary plates.


CLS 361/299.1
TXT Plural capacitors:
    Subject matter under subclass 298.1 consisting of more than one capacitor.

    (1)     Note.  The plural capacitors may, for example, be ganged on a
    single shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    328+,   for multiple capacitor.

    522,    for multiple liquid electrolytic capacitor.

    541,    for multiple solid electrolytic capacitor.


CLS 361/299.2
TXT Details of electrical connecting means (e.g., terminal or lead):Subject
    matter under subclass 299.1 wherein structural details of an electrical
    connector which facilitates connection with another conductor such as a
    terminal or lead are included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    298.4,  for rotary plate.

    306.1+, for fixed capacitor.

    520,    for liquid electrolytic capacitor.

    538,    for solid electrolytic capacitor.


CLS 361/299.3
TXT Details of mounting means:
    Subject matter under subclass 299.1 including details of means that serve
    as a support, mount, or setting.


CLS 361/299.4
TXT With adjustment means:
    Subject matter under subclass 299.1 including means such as a knob or lever
    to vary the effective area of electrodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    298.5,  for rotary plate adjustment means.


CLS 361/299.5
TXT Details of insulator feature:
    Subject matter under subclass 299.1 wherein details of a structure made of
    a material of low electrical conductivity designed for supporting a
    conductor, while physically and electrically separating it from another
    conductor, are included.


CLS 361/300
TXT With controlling or indicating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 287 combined with means for regulating or
    visibly registering the changes of capacitance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 10+ for dial shaft
    operators, such as, for example, an operator for setting a capacitor into
    any one of plural preselected positions.

    116,    Signals, and Indicators, subclasses 241+ and 284+ for miscellaneous
    indicators for indicating the position of a variable capacitor.


CLS 361/301.1
TXT Fixed capacitor:
    Subject matter under subclass 271 wherein the capacitor has a fixed value
    of capacitance (i.e., invariable).

    (1)     Note.  While all fixed capacitors may vary to some extent because
    of operating conditions or the ambient atmosphere, they are still fixed
    capacitors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277+,   for variable capacitors.


CLS 361/301.2
TXT Special shape (e.g., "bypass" type):
    Subject matter under subclass 301.1 wherein the physical shape of the
    capacitor is designed to conform to or fit the physical shape of another
    electronic element or device.


CLS 361/301.3
TXT Encapsulated:
    Subject matter under subclass 301.1 wherein the capacitor is embedded,
    potted, or molded in a material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    539,    for potted casing of solid electrolytic capacitor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 52.2 for potted
    or encapsulated housing.


CLS 361/301.4
TXT Stack:
    Subject matter under subclass 301.1 consisting of alternate conducting and
    insulating planar sheets.


CLS 361/301.5
TXT Wound:
    Subject matter under subclass 301.1 wherein the capacitor is a spiral of
    alternate conducting and dielectric sheets.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    321.6,  for tubular capacitor.

    511+,   for liquid electrolytic capacitor.

    530+,   for solid electrolytic capacitor.


CLS 361/302
TXT Feed through:

    Subject matter under subclasses 301.1+ wherein the capacitor is of tube or
    disc type and has a lead through wire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    307,    for lead extending into body of capacitor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 143 for bushing
    condensers combined.

    333,    Waves Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 167+ for filters
    of RC type.


CLS 361/303
TXT Significant electrode feature:

    Subject matter under subclasses 301.1+ with significant details of the
    capacitor electrodes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 79+ for processes of coating
    electrodes, utilized in making capacitors.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, particularly
    subclasses 386+ for methods of making a trench capacitor, subclasses 393+
    for methods of making a planar capacitor, and subclasses 396+ for methods
    of making a stacked capacitor utilizing a semiconductor substrate.


CLS 361/304
TXT Non-self-supporting electrodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 303 wherein the electrode is
    non-self-supporting (e.g., metallized on a base or liquid electrode).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273,    for metallized electrodes in self-healing capacitors.

    305,    for metallized materials.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclass 1.05 for metallizing
    compositions, per se.


CLS 361/305
TXT Material:

    Subject matter under subclass 303 where significant details of the
    electrode materials are involved.

    (1)     Note.  The details of the materials can be alloys, mixtures or
    layers of conductive materials.  The mere inclusion of a single
    conventional electrode material such as aluminum, tin or copper alone is
    not a significant detail.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 122.1+ for alloys, per se.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 512+ for electrically conductive metal
    compositions.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, alloys, per se.


CLS 361/306.1
TXT Details of electrical connection means (e.g., terminal or lead):Subject
    matter under subclass 301.1 wherein structural details of an electrical
    connector which facilitates connection with another conductor such as a
    terminal or lead are included.

    (1)     Note.  In some cases, the words terminal and lead are synonymous
    words meaning the same structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    298.4,  for rotary plates capacitor.

    299.2,  for plural capacitor.

    306.1+, for fixed capacitor.

    520,    for liquid electrolytic capacitor.

    538,    for solid electrolytic capacitor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 50+ for housing
    or box terminals.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 192 for inductor terminals.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 322 for resistor terminals.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 79+ for processes of coating
    electrodes utilized in making capacitors.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for connectors, per
    se, subclasses 607+ for condenser connector having capacitive shield and
    subclass 620 for filter connectors.


CLS 361/306.2
TXT For decoupling type capacitor:
    Subject matter under subclass 306.1 wherein the electrical connection means
    is placed inside the capacitor to prevent unwanted, harmful interference
    from an external source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403,    for printed circuit board mounting pad.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity: Conductors and Insulators, subclass 52.4 for flat
    housing for electronic devices.


CLS 361/306.3
TXT For multilayer capacitor:
    Subject matter under subclass 306.1 wherein the electrical connection means
    is associated with the capacitor consisting of a plurality of laminae with
    each of the laminae including a conductive plate portion and a
    nonconductive sheet portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    321.2,  for multilayer ceramic capacitor.


CLS 361/307
TXT Lead extends into body of capacitor:

    Subject matter under subclasses 306.1+ wherein the lead extends into the
    body of the capacitor (e.g., tab type).

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this subclass, the lead must extend
    into the electrical portion of the capacitor. Extension of the lead into
    the case or housing alone is not structure proper for this subclass.


CLS 361/308.1
TXT Lead attached to edge of capacitor:
    Subject matter under subclasses 306.1+ wherein the lead is physically
    attached to the edge or end portion of the capacitor electrode of an
    extended foil-type capacitor.

    (1)     Note.  An extended foil capacitor is a capacitor where the
    electrodes extend beyond the dielectric for lead connection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310,    for the lead may be wrapped or extended around the edge of the
    capacitor.


CLS 361/308.2
TXT Cap:
    Subject matter under subclass 308.1 wherein the lead comprises a cup-shaped
    element.


CLS 361/308.3
TXT Wire:
    Subject matter under subclass 308.1 wherein the lead comprises a slender,
    stringlike piece or filament of metal.


CLS 361/309
TXT Metallized terminal:

    Subject matter under subclasses 308.1+ wherein the terminal is a layer or
    layers formed by spraying, dipping, etc., conductive material to form the
    terminal.


CLS 361/310
TXT Lead extends around at least a portion of capacitor:

    Subject matter under subclasses 306.1+ wherein the lead is wrapped or
    extends around the capacitor (e.g., the metal case of the capacitor is a
    lead).


CLS 361/311
TXT Solid dielectric:

    Subject matter under subclasses 301.1+ wherein the capacitor has at least
    one solid dielectric.

    (1)     Note.  The inclusion of an impregnant in fluid form combined with
    the solid dielectric is not excluded here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating and Plastic, appropriate subclasses for
    nonresinous electric insulating material.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 567 for a web or sheet impregnated with a
    designated dielectric liquid.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 79+ for processes of coating utilized
    in making capacitors.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, particularly
    subclasses 386+ for methods of making a trench capacitor, subclasses 393+
    for methods of making a planar capacitor, and subclasses 396+ for methods
    of making a stacked capacitor utilizing a semiconductor substrate.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, for a solid dielectric
    composition containing a synthetic resin or natural rubber.


CLS 361/312
TXT Plural dielectrics:

    Subject matter under subclass 311 where the solid dielectric is combined
    with another separate and distinct dielectric either liquid, solid, or gas.

    (1)     Note.  The separate dielectric may be a distinct portion of the
    same dielectric (e.g., plural layers of the same material).


CLS 361/313
TXT Layered:

    Subject matter under subclass 312 wherein the plural dielectrics are
    layered one upon the other.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded are impregnated capacitors even though the
    impregnant is claimed coated on the solid dielectric.  Impregnated
    capacitors are in subclasses 314+.


CLS 361/314
TXT Impregnated:

    Subject matter under subclass 312 wherein the additional dielectric is an
    impregnant.

    (1)     Note.  An impregnant is a gas, liquid, or solid that is placed into
    a capacitor to fill air voids.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327,    for liquid dielectrics.


CLS 361/315
TXT With specific impregnant:

    Subject matter under subclass 314 with a specific named impregnant.


CLS 361/316
TXT Including wax:

    Subject matter under subclass 315 wherein the specific impregnant includes
    a wax.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    317,    for wax containing halogen (e.g.,    halowax).


CLS 361/317
TXT Including halogen (e.g., chlorinated):

    Subject matter under subclass 315 wherein the impregnant is halogen
    containing (e.g., chlorinated diphenyl).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 570 and 581 for halogen containing
    dielectrics.


CLS 361/318
TXT With stabilizer or modifying substance:

    Subject matter under subclass 317 wherein a stabilizer or modifier is added
    to the dielectric to improve operating properties of the capacitor.

    (1)     Note.  A stabilizer is used, for example, to prevent oxidation or
    to scavenge extraneous products produced during operation (e.g., hydrogen
    chloride).

    (2)     Note.  The stabilizer or modifying substance may be added to the
    impregnant or the solid dielectric.


CLS 361/319
TXT With stabilizer or modifying substance:

    Subject matter under subclass 314 wherein a stabilizer or modifier is added
    to the dielectric to improve the operating properties of the capacitor.

    (1)     Note.  The stabilizer or modifier may be, for example, antioxidant
    or scavenger and be added to the impregnant or the solid dielectric.


CLS 361/320
TXT Ceramic and glass:

    Subject matter under subclass 312 wherein the plural dielectric is a
    ceramic and glass.

    (1)     Note.  The ceramic is usually combined in a glass matrix or the
    glass is used as a bonding agent for the ceramic.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, appropriate subclasses for ceramic and
    glass compositions.


CLS 361/321.1
TXT Ceramic, glass, or oxide particles:
    Subject matter under subclass 311 wherein the solid dielectric is made of
    clay, frit, or a compound containing oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  The terms glass, ceramic, or oxide, at times, are used
    synonymously in the art.

    (2)     Note.  Also included are vitreous enamels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, appropriate subclasses for ceramic and
    glass compositions.


CLS 361/321.2
TXT With multilayer ceramic capacitor:
    Subject matter under subclass 321.1 wherein the capacitor has several thin,
    parallel layers of ceramic, glass, or oxide particles each separating an
    opposing pair of electrode surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306.3,  for multilayer capacitor.


CLS 361/321.3
TXT Including metallization coating:
    Subject matter under subclass 321.2 including a thin film pattern of
    conductive material on the dielectric to provide interconnection of the
    capacitor components or to provide conductive contacts for interconnections.


CLS 361/321.4
TXT Composition:
    Subject matter under subclass 321.2 wherein the material of the
    constituents of the dielectric is specified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    321.5,  for ceramic, glass, or oxide particles.


CLS 361/321.5
TXT Composition:
    Subject matter under subclass 321.1 wherein the material of the
    constituents of the dielectric is specified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    321.4,  for multilayer capacitor's ceramic, glass, or oxide particles.


CLS 361/321.6
TXT With tubular capacitor:
    Subject matter under subclass 321.1 wherein the capacitor is shaped like a
    hollow, elongated cylinder.


CLS 361/322
TXT Oxide film:

    Subject matter under subclasses 321.1+ wherein the dielectric is an oxide
    film on the capacitor electrode.

    (1)     Note.  The oxide film may have been formed by oxidizing or
    anodizing the electrode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 80+ for anodized products and
    processes.


CLS 361/323
TXT Plastic:

    Subject matter under subclass 311 wherein the solid dielectric is a
    synthetic polymer (i.e., plastic), (e.g., polyethylene, silicone,
    polypropylene).


CLS 361/324
TXT Fibrous or fabric (e.g., paper, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 311 wherein the solid dielectric is a fibrous
    or fabric material (e.g., cellulose paper).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323,    for papers made of synthetic materials (e.g., plastic).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclass 138 for electrical
    insulating paper.


CLS 361/325
TXT Mica:

    Subject matter under subclass 311 wherein the solid dielectric is mica.

    (1)     Note.  The mica may be a synthetic material.


CLS 361/326
TXT Vacuum or gas dielectric:

    Subject matter under subclasses 301.1+ wherein the dielectric is a vacuum,
    or gas (e.g., compressed air).

    (1)     Note.  Excluded here are gas impregnants which are found in
    subclasses 314+.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is exclusively for fixed capacitors as defined
    in subclasses 301.1+ with gas dielectric.  Usually the gas capacitor is in
    a sealed housing.

    (3)     Note.  Gas by definition includes mixtures of gas including the
    ambient air.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    279,    for variable capacitors with gas or vacuum dielectrics.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, subclass 6 for etching in the
    manufacturing of a capacitor.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 571 for gaseous dielectric compositions, per
    se.


CLS 361/327
TXT Liquid dielectric:

    Subject matter under subclasses 301.1+ wherein the dielectric is a liquid.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded are impregnated capacitors which are found in
    subclass 314.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 570+ for liquid dielectric and insulating
    compositions.


CLS 361/328
TXT Multiple capacitors:

    Subject matter under subclasses 301.1+ wherein there are a plurality of
    capacitors.

    (1)     Note.  The plurality of capacitors may be in a single package
    (e.g., roll).

    (2)     Note.  Details of the capacitor must be included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    271,    for a fixed capacitor combined with a variable capacitor.

    299.1+, for plural rotary capacitor.

    331,    for mounted plural capacitors with no  significant capacitor
    structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 364 for
    plural impedance systems.


CLS 361/329
TXT Distinct physically:

    Subject matter under subclass 328 wherein the capacitors are separate fixed
    capacitors.

    (1)     Note.  The capacitors may be of the same type.


CLS 361/330
TXT Shared Electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 328 wherein the multiple capacitors are
    formed with at least one shared electrode common to two other electrodes.

    (1)     Note.  Also included in this class are float electrodes.  A float
    electrode is an electrode that is not connected to a lead but is common to
    two other electrodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272     and 275.1+, for complete search of float electrodes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 24 for capacitive
    coupling networks.


CLS 361/434
TXT Systems (e.g., plural cells, standby exciting voltage):

    Subject matter under subclasses 500+ comprising an electrolytic system not
    otherwise classified.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, systems of plural cells
    arranged in series or in parallel, or to cells having plural electrodes,
    some of which are connected to a source of standby voltage while others of
    which are connected to the operating voltage.

    (2)     Note.  The search should extend to the class which relates to the
    environment in which the system might be found.


CLS 361/435
TXT Current interruption type (e.g., circuit breaker, D.C.-to-pulse converters):

    Subject matter under subclasses 500+ of the type which is utilized for
    interrupting a circuit.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, for example, to electrolytic cells
    which interrupt the current flow through them when it exceeds a
    predetermined maximum and to electrolytic cells which rapidly chop a
    current that passes through them.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit makers and Breakers, subclasses 196+, 200+,
    and 205+ for fluid type periodic electric switches.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 132
    for repetitive make or break type of switching systems, some of which may
    utilize an electrolytic interrupter.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    conversion systems utilizing electrolytic type interrupters.


CLS 361/436
TXT Rectifiers:

    Subject matter under subclasses 500+ for use as rectifiers.


CLS 361/437
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition which is not provided for in any
    of the preceding subclasses of this class.


CLS 361/500
TXT ELECTROLYTIC SYSTEMS OR DEVICES:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the conduction of
    electricity is accompanied by chemical action.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses include for example,
    electrolytic condensers, interrupters or rectifiers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    for this subject matter when used as a high voltage dissipator or
    lightening arrester.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 25.01+ for the manufacture of the devices
    in this and indented subclasses.  Also, consult the search notes to
    subclasses 25.01+ of Class 29 for a compilation of the classes that have
    related art.

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, appropriate
    subclasses for this subject matter utilized to produce electricity by
    electrochemical action.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 50+ for boxes
    and housings useful to encase the electrolytic devices of this and indented
    subclasses, and subclasses 140+ for this subject matter combined with
    insulators so as to distribute the voltage stress on the insulator.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 194+ for
    electrolytic devices utilized to produce chemical change, (e.g.,
    electroplating cells, etc.) and subclasses 400+ for electrolytic analysis
    and testing devices (e.g., pH cells, etc.).

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, subclass 6 for etching in the
    manufacturing of a capacitor.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 62.2 for electrolytic compositions for
    electrical devices, and subclass 62.3 for barrier layer device compositions.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 132 for arc lamps having electrolytic resistance.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass for charging or discharging an electrolytic capacitor
    or an electrolytic cell.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 79 for the control
    of the generator circuit by the use of electrolytic impedances.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 425+ for
    electrolytic testing systems, (e.g., PH measuring systems).

    329,    Demodulators and Detectors, subclass 347 for electrolytic type
    demodulators or detectors.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 80+ for mechanically variable
    liquid resistors and subclass 222 for fixed value liquid resistors.

    363,    Electricity Power Conversion Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    rectifying systems utilizing electrolytic rectifiers.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process, appropriate subclasses for battery electrolytic compositions.


CLS 361/501
TXT Coulometer (i.e., electrochemical timer):

    Subject matter under subclass 500 including an electrolytic cell for
    measuring a quantity of electricity by the chemical action produced.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 76.11+ for
    electricity meter, particularly subclass 94 for electrolytic device.


CLS 361/502
TXT Double layer electrolytic capacitor:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 including: 1.  a pair of paste
    electrodes, 2.  a separator which functions both as an electronic insulator
    and a conductor, and 3.  an electrolyte disposed within the pores of the
    separator.


CLS 361/503
TXT Liquid electrolytic capacitor:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 including:  1.  an anode, 2.  a cathode,
    3.  a separator or an insulator which separates the anode and the cathode,
    and 4.  a liquid electrolyte.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 25.03 for the method of making
    electrolytic-type device.


CLS 361/504
TXT With significant electrolyte:

    Subject matter under subclass 503 including significant chemical
    compositions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 62.2+ for the composition of electrolytes
    for electrical condensers and rectifiers.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process, subclasses 188+ for battery electrolytes.


CLS 361/505
TXT Salt solute:

    Subject matter under subclass 504 including a salt material which mixes
    with or dissolves in a solvent.


CLS 361/506
TXT Ethylene glycol:

    Subject matter under subclass 504 including an ethylene glycol material
    which mixes with or dissolves in a solvent.


CLS 361/507
TXT With depolarizer:

    Subject matter under subclass 504 including a chemical used to prevent the
    formation of hydrogen bubbles at the positive electrode.

    (1)     Note.  A depolarizer is sued to improve conductivity.


CLS 361/508
TXT Anode type electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 503 including a specific anode type electrode
    structure.

    (1)     Note.  An electrolytic anode type electrode is an electrode at
    which negative ions are discharged, or positive ions are formed, or at
    which other oxidizing reaction occurs.


CLS 361/509
TXT Aluminum or tantalum:

    Subject matter under subclass 508 wherein the anode type electrode is made
    of aluminum or tantalum material.


CLS 361/510
TXT Anode riser:

    Subject matter under subclass 508 wherein significant details of an anode
    electrical connection means (e.g., terminal or lead) are disclosed.


CLS 361/511
TXT Wound:

    Subject matter under subclass 508 wherein the anode type electrode is made
    by winding foils together with dielectric material.

    (1)     Note.  The anode type electrode is generally in flat, rolled, wound
    or tubular shape.


CLS 361/512
TXT With separator:

    Subject matter under subclass 511 including at least one separator or
    spacer between winding foil electrodes.


CLS 361/513
TXT With mounting means (e.g., anchoring means or clamping):

    Subject matter under subclass 511 wherein an anchoring means is used for
    securing the electrical components within the capacitor housing to prevent
    relative movement therebetween.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 50.54+ for
    means for mounting an electrical device to a box or housing.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 238+ for mounting
    the electrodes of a lamp or electric space discharge device.


CLS 361/514
TXT With heat conductor (e.g., heat sink):

    Subject matter under subclass 511 including means to absorb or dissipate
    heat.


CLS 361/515
TXT With common conductor (e.g., stripline):

    Subject matter under subclass 511 wherein the wound anode type electrode
    has a common conductor or stripline.

    (1)     Note.  A stripline is a form of terminal in which the ends of the
    devices winding are brought out to terminal strips mounted integral with
    the device form or assembly.


CLS 361/516
TXT Cathode type electrode (e.g., cathode casing):

    Subject matter under subclass 503 wherein a specific cathode structure is
    disclosed.

    (1)     Note.  An electrolytic cathode is an electrode at which positive
    ions are discharged, or negative ions are formed, or at which other
    reducing reaction occur.

    (2)     Note.  Most of the electrolytic cathodes in this subclass are
    formed as outer casing of the electrolytic capacitor assembly.


CLS 361/517
TXT Casing:

    Subject matter under subclass 503 including specific details of casing
    which contains the liquid electrolytic capacitor components.


CLS 361/518
TXT With hermetic seal:

    Subject matter under subclass 517 wherein the casing of liquid electrolytic
    capacitor components is hermetically sealed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 50+ for
    hermetic sealed envelope type.


CLS 361/519
TXT With header, cover, or endseal:

    Subject matter under subclass 517 wherein an open end of the electrolytic
    capacitor casing is closed by a header, cover, or endseal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 52.5 for header,
    mounting stud.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 43+, 50+, and 200 for closures for
    bottles and jars.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 200+ for closure for receptacles.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses for active solid-state semiconductor devices, per
    se, especially subclasses 678+ for active solid- state device housings, in
    general.


CLS 361/520
TXT Significant electrical connection means (e.g., terminals or leads):

    Subject matter under subclass 519 wherein significant details of electrical
    connection means (e.g., terminals or leads) are disclosed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306.1+, for significant details of electrical terminals or leads.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 50.52+ for
    electrical terminals or leads.


CLS 361/521
TXT With vent means:

    Subject matter under subclass 517 including means to release excess
    pressure occurring within the casing of electrolytic capacitor components.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 307+ for venting bottles and jars.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 367.1+ for venting in closure.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process, subclasses 82+ venting structure for batteries.


CLS 361/522
TXT Multiple capacitors:

    Subject matter under subclass 503 including two or more liquid electrolytic
    capacitors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    271,    for a fixed capacitor combined with a variable capacitor.

    299.1+, for plural rotary capacitor.

    600,    for mounted plural capacitor with no significant capacitor
    structure.


CLS 361/523
TXT Solid electrolytic capacitor (e.g., dry electrolytic capacitor):

    Subject matter under subclass 500 including capacitor in which a dielectric
    is primarily an anodized coating on one electrode, with the remaining space
    between the electrodes filled with a solid semiconductor, or paste or gel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 25.03 for the method of making an
    electrolytic-type device.


CLS 361/524
TXT Dielectric:

    Subject matter under subclass 523 including specific details of the solid
    dielectric material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    311+,   for solid dielectric of fixed capacitor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 25.42 for the method of making a solid
    dielectric condenser.


CLS 361/525
TXT With significant electrolyte or semiconductor:

    Subject matter under subclass 523 including specific details of the solid
    electrolyte or the semiconductor material.


CLS 361/526
TXT Paste or gel:

    Subject matter under subclass 525 including an electrolyte which is a
    colloidal solution of liquid in a solid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 414 for gel
    electrolyte.

    252,    Composition, subclasses 315.01+ for gel composition, per se.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process, subclasses 134 and 190 for gel electrolyte.


CLS 361/527
TXT Organic salt (e.g., TCNQ):

    Subject matter under subclass 525 wherein the solid electrolyte or solid
    semiconductor material includes an organic salt or TCNQ.


CLS 361/528
TXT Anode type electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 523 including a specific anode type electrode
    structure.


CLS 361/529
TXT Aluminum or tantalum:

    Subject matter under subclass 528 wherein the anode type electrode is made
    of aluminum or tantalum material.


CLS 361/530
TXT Wound:

    Subject matter under subclass 528 wherein the anode type electrode is made
    by winding foils together with dielectric material.

    (1)     Note.  The anode type electrode is generally in flat, rolled, wound
    or tubular shape.


CLS 361/531
TXT With lead conductor:

    Subject matter under subclass 530 including a conductor for connecting the
    wound electrode to external conductors.


CLS 361/532
TXT Cathode type electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 523 wherein a specific cathode structure is
    disclosed.


CLS 361/533
TXT With significant lead:

    Subject matter under subclass 532 wherein a specific conductor structure
    for connecting the cathode to an external conductor is disclosed.


CLS 361/534
TXT With protection means:

    Subject matter under subclass 523 including means to safeguard against
    breakdown or short circuiting of the solid electrolytic capacitor.

    (1)     Note.  The protection means is an integral part of the solid
    electrolytic capacitor structure and significant details of the structure
    must be disclosed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272+,   for protection or compensating means for electrostatic capacitor.


CLS 361/535
TXT Casing:

    Subject matter under subclass 523 including specific details of the casing
    which contains the solid electrolytic capacitor components.


CLS 361/536
TXT With hermetic seal:

    Subject matter under subclass 535 wherein the casing is hermetically sealed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 50+ for
    hermetic sealed enveloped type.


CLS 361/537
TXT With header, cover, or endseal:

    Subject matter under subclass 535 wherein an open end of the solid
    electrolytic capacitor casing is closed by a header, cover, or endseal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 52.5 for header,
    mounting stud.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 43+, 50+, and 200 for closures for
    bottles and jars.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 200+ for closure for receptacles.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses for active solid-state semiconductor devices, per
    se, especially subclasses 678+ for active solid- state device housings, in
    general.


CLS 361/538
TXT Significant electrical connection means (e.g., terminals or leads):

    Subject matter under subclass 537 wherein significant details of electrical
    connection means (e.g., terminals or lead) are disclosed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306.1+, for significant details of electrical terminals or leads.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 50.52+ for
    electrical terminals or leads.


CLS 361/539
TXT With potting:

    Subject matter under subclass 537 wherein a space between the casing and
    the electrolytic capacitor components is occupied by a solid or semisolid
    mass of insulating material; or wherein the electrolytic capacitor
    components directly encapsulated in a mass of insulating material in the
    casing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    600+,   for plural components which are potted or encapsulated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 841 and 855+ for process of conductor or
    circuit manufacturing involving encapsulating or potting of electrical
    components.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 52.2 for potting
    of electrical components, per se.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 272.11+ for processes of encapsulating electrical components.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 96 for potted inductor devices wherein
    some significant details of the inductor device is claimed.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 269 and 275 for resistors with
    molded casings or housings.


CLS 361/540
TXT With terminal:

    Subject matter under subclass 523 wherein a specific conductor structure
    for connecting the solid electrolytic capacitor to external conductors is
    disclosed.


CLS 361/541
TXT Multiple capacitors:

    Subject matter under subclass 523 including two or more liquid electrolytic
    capacitors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    271,    for a fixed capacitor combined with a variable capacitor.

    299.1+, for plural rotary capacitor.

    600,    for mounted plural capacitor with no significant capacitor
    structure.


CLS 361/600
TXT HOUSING OR MOUNTING ASSEMBLIES WITH DIVERSE ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS:Subject
    matter under class definition comprising (a) housings, boxes, panels, or
    mounting arrangements with an electrical device, multiple electrical
    devices, or diverse electrical components or (b) housing or mounting
    arrangements with keyboards, CRTs, disk drive units, displays, or computer
    related equipment which inherently have diverse electrical components.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes electrical housing or mounting
    assemblies where the combination is not provided for in any other class or
    in any other subclass in this class.

    (2)     Note.  Nominal recitation of devices in conjunction with housings
    or mounting arrangements, without device structural details, are classified
    in this class.

    (3)     Note.  Housing or mounting assemblies in combination with
    structural details, functional details, or equipment descriptions, of a
    particular art device, are classified with the art device.

    (4)     Note.  Support equipment or housings for computer and computer
    related equipment will be classified in this class, if nominal recitation
    of the computer or computer related equipment is recited with no data
    processing or calculating procedures.

    (5)     Note. The term "computer means" or "data processing means" will be
    understood as nominal recitation whenever claims do not recite details for
    calculating or data processing.

    (6)     Note.  Computer related equipment comprises memory unit or
    equipment, data processors, data input/output controllers, data
    input/output units, and arithmetic units.

    (7)     Note.  Support equipment or housings for disk drives, keyboards,
    display units, and CRTs without particular equipment description or
    functional detail for a disk drive, keyboard, display unit, or CRT, will be
    classified in this class.

    (8)     Note.  Housings with printed circuit and diverse electrical
    components or devices are  classified in this class.

    (9)     Note.  Recitations drawn to integrated circuitry, semiconductor
    device or package, silicon chip, hybrid device, pellet, disk type device,
    flip chip, etc., without structural or functional limitations defining
    topology or details of the semiconductor devices will be treated as diverse
    components and are classified in this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115+,   for specific circuit breaker structure with protection and safety
    system or device.

    142,    for electromagnetic control circuit devices including housing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 568+ for gauge work support
    adjustment, subclass 572 for gauge probe support, and subclass 573 for
    gauge work support.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 756 for fluid pressure gauge
    mounting and connection.

    84,     Music, appropriate subclasses for musical instrument(s) with cases
    or supports.  For instrument supports of general application not claimed in
    combination with musical instruments or structurally limited to use with
    specific musical instruments, see Class 248, Supports, appropriate
    subclasses.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 50+ for boxes
    and housings with insulator or conductor structure, subclasses 250+ for
    printed circuits, per se, and subclass 260 for printed circuit(s) with one
    component or plural same components.  A printed circuit with diverse
    components is classified in Class 361, appropriate subclass.

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 148+ for diaphragm and enclosure, subclasses
    171+ for diaphragm mounting or suspension means, and subclasses 198+ for
    housing or enclosure of mechanical sound-modifying means.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 5+ for
    similar type switches arranged in keyboard manner.  Class 200 is the
    generic class for devices having structural detail of closing or opening
    electrical circuits.  Arrangement of circuit breakers, mounting of circuit
    breakers, or housing of circuit breakers are classified in Class 361,
    subclasses 600+.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 71.01+ for receptacle support type
    racks.

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclasses for heater-unit with
    housing, casing, or support means.

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 3.9 for outlet or junction box type
    receptacle with support.

    235,    Registers, subclass 145 for support equipment and housings for
    keyboards comprising those portions of registers, usually manually
    actuated, including key, shift keys, space  bars, etc., which control and
    initiate the action of the calculating machine to determine what numbers
    shall be introduced and how. Also to control subsidiary operation of the
    machine.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 637+ for machinery support excluding machinery
    structure.  If machinery is recited, supports are classified with the art
    device.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 239 for photocell (circuits and apparatus)
    housings, subclasses 453.1+ for nonsignalling objects of irradiation
    supports and subclass 522.1 for radiation source supports.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 678+ for housing with details to specific materials,
    construction or topology of a semiconductor device, or integrated circuits
    such as barrier layer structure, specific semiconductor contact
    arrangements and P/N junctions, and subclasses 701+ for insulating support
    details in combination with semiconductor device specifics.

            Class 257 also provides for housings wherein (a) the housing is for
    an active solid state device, details of which are positively recited in
    the claims, or (b) wherein the recited housing is necessary to make a
    usable active solid state device whether the active solid state device is
    recited nominally or in detail.

            Otherwise, housing with nominally recited active solid state active
    device will be classified in Class 361.

            Claims that contain only nominal recitations of integrated
    circuitry, semiconductor devices or packages, silicon chips, hybrid
    devices, pellets, disk type devices, flip chip bonds, etc., with no
    significant structural or functional details will be classified in Class
    361.

            If a claim recites significant details of active semiconductor
    devices; e.g., specific materials, topological details, specific contacts,
    junctions, etc., along with a  housing assembly, in general, the claims
    will be properly classified in Class 257.  If significant contact structure
    of an active semiconductor device is recited, it will be classified in
    Class 257.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 9.1+
    for vehicle mounted systems and subclasses 147+ for conductor arrangements
    or structure.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 42 for rotary
    dynamoelectric machinery with assembling, metal casting, or machining
    feature; subclass 89 for housings, windows, or covers of rotary
    dynamoelectric machinery having mechanical shields or protectors; and
    subclasses 348+ for non-dynamoelectric piezoelectric elements and devices
    with mounting or support means.

    312,    Supports: Cabinet Structure, appropriate subclasses for supports or
    cabinet with nonreceptacle feature (e.g., door, shelf, or partition);
    subclasses 7.1+ for enclosures or cabinets without radio and television
    devices, per se; and subclass 20 for picture machine or film type device
    supports.  Radio and television mount including electrical structure are
    classified in Classes 455 and 358, respectively.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 364+ for support
    equipment and housings with CRTs having structural or functional CRT detail.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Consumable Electrodes,
    subclasses 130+ for electric lamp and discharge devices (consumable
    electrodes) frames and electrode supports.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 17 for
    portable-mounted motor and/or portable-mounted electrical motive power
    systems.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 1 for a portable
    mounted single generator system.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 68+ for oscillators with outer casing or
    housing.

    334,    Tuners, subclass 85 for tuners with shielding or housing means.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 65+ for inductor devices with mounting
    or supporting means, subclasses 90+ for inductors with outer casing or
    housing, subclass 195 for coil supported within grooved or hollow coil
    conductor of another coil, and subclasses 199+ for coil or coil turn
    supports.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclass 34 for electrothermally actuated switches with space discharge
    having housings or support means and subclasses 112+ for electrothermally
    actuated switches housing or support means.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 315+ for resistor with mounting or
    support means.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 391 for audible diaphragm
    with supports; subclasses 700+ for (a) support equipment and housings with
    selectable display units having structural display unit detail or (b)
    support equipment and housings with keyboards in conjunction with CRTs or
    selectable display units having structural detail of keyboard, CRT or
    display unit; subclass 814.14 for visual indicator (switchboard or panel
    type housings); and subclasses 815.15+ for visual indicator with lamp
    enclosed in housing.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 20+ for support
    equipment and housings with keyboards having a control element which an
    operator physically contacts to control the transmission or generation of a
    coded set of pulses.

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), appropriate subclass for housing or support of
    directive radio wave system having directive radio wave structural details.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 702 for antenna with
    radio cabinet; subclasses 872+ for antenna with housing or protective
    covering; and subclasses 878+ for antenna with support for antenna,
    reflector or director.

    346,    Recorders, subclass 41 for recorder with case cover, case cover
    key, or keyhole cover; subclass 144 for watchman's or workman's key
    enclosing box; and subclass 145 for recorder with instrument support.

    348,    Television, subclasses 273+ for  a television camera with housing
    or support and subclasses 787+, 789, and 836+ for a television projection
    or display device with cabinet or chassis structure.  Television cabinet
    with no electrical limitation is classifierd in Class 312, subclass 7.2.

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, appropriate
    subclass for rim mounts, semi-rim mounts, rimless mounting supports, and
    eye testing instrument supports.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 34+ for motion pictures
    (having sound accompaniment) with houses and supports, subclass 197 for
    camera and/or projector drive mechanisms with supporting structure,
    subclass 231 for motion picture gates with lens mounting, subclass 242 for
    motion picture with housing, and subclass 243 for motion picture with
    support.

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, appropriate subclass for image
    projectors with case, cabinet, or housing.

    355,    Photocopying, subclasses 122+ for photocopying frames.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 244+ for optical
    measuring and testing holder or support.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements,
    appropriate subclass for optic system or element having supporting,
    mounting, or enclosing. House or support for diverse electrical components
    and optical components will be classified in Class 359, appropriate
    subclass.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 86 for
    support equipment and housing of disk record having record transport with
    head moving during transducing and structural details of disk record,
    subclasses 97.01+ for support equipment and housing of disk record having
    record transport with head stationary during transducing and structural
    details of disk record, subclasses 104+ for recorder head mounting, and
    subclass 129 for recorder head accessory housing.

    362,    Illumination, appropriate subclass for light source with support,
    holder, casing, or housing.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 144+ for current
    conversion system with conductive support mounting and subclass 146 for
    current conversion system encased in lug housing.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 708.1
    for data processing or calculating operations with specialized housing or
    casing.  A housing, mount, or support having nominal recitation of computer
    or computer related equipment, excluding details to data processing or
    calculating procedure, is classified in Class 361.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclass for
    support equipment and houses with static memory having structural details
    of memory.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclass 173 for underwater signal transducer with support and subclass 188
    for signal transducer receiver with casing or housing.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclass 88 for
    chronological device with casing or mount and subclasses 276+ for time
    measuring device with cases.

    369,    Dynamic information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 6 for storage or
    retrieval device having structural details combined with radio, including
    cabinet details, and subclasses 75.1+ for storage or retrieval device
    having storage or retrieval structural details with particular cabinet
    structure.

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, subclass 107 for resonant cavity with
    mirror support.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 128+ for
    resistance furnace device with mount.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 208+ for thermal
    measuring and testing device with housing or support.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 193+ for X-ray or
    gamma ray with source supports.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 325+ for telephonic
    centralized switching system with housing, subclasses 428+ for telephone
    terminal with housing and subclasses 454+ for telephone terminal with
    accessory or auxiliary equipment with support or stand.

    380,    Cryptography, subclasses 52+ for electrical signal modification
    device with support or housing.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    69+ for electrical hearing aids with casing or housing, subclass 169 for
    microphone with mounting or support feature, subclass 188 for
    electro-acoustic audio transducer with mount or support feature, and
    subclass 205 for electro-acoustic transducer with mount.

    396,    Photography, appropriate subclasses for photographic support,
    mount, rest, or housing.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclass 2 for interrelated connectors
    relatively movable during use having antivibration mounting and subclasses
    278+ for connector having resilient housing.  Connector in conjunction with
    diverse electrical components are classified in Class 361.  See Class 439
    Definition, section VI.  Index and Miscellaneous Class Notes for line
    between Class 174 and Class 439.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 90 for transceiver with enclosure or
    support means, subclass 128 for transmitter with casing or housing and
    subclasses 347+ for receiver or frequency converter with cabinet, housing,
    or chassis structure.


CLS 361/601
TXT For electrical power distribution systems and devices:
    Subject matter under subclass 600 comprising a structural mounting
    arrangement for electrical components that divide and deliver electric
    energy among several electrical devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, appropriate subclasses for
    high tension conductor and insulator arrangements.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, appropriate
    subclass for electrical interconnection systems.


CLS 361/602
TXT Distribution station (i.e., substation):
    Subject matter under subclass 601 comprising a building or an outdoor
    location having plural distribution units that transform, convert, or
    control electric energy in a power system.

    (1)     Note.  Outdoor stations may be above or below ground level.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, appropriate subclass for
    high tension conductor and insulator arrangements.


CLS 361/603
TXT Having transformer:
    Subject matter under subclass 602 wherein the distribution station
    (substation) includes an electrical device which changes voltage in direct
    proportion to the number of turns of its primary and secondary windings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    620,    for electrical switchgear housings or mounting assembly with
    transformer.

    623,    for electrical power distribution systems housings and mounting
    assemblies with distribution or control unit combined with a transformer.

    663,    for electrical service meter housing or mounting assembly with
    transformer.

    836,    for electrical housing and mounting assembly with transformer.


CLS 361/604
TXT Gas insulated:
    Subject matter under subclass 602 wherein the distribution  units are
    separated from conducting bodies by means of a fluid that has neither
    independent shape nor volume, but tends to expand indefinitely.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    612,    for electrical power switchgear housings and mounting assemblies
    with gas insulated busbar arrangements.


CLS 361/605
TXT Electrical switchgear:
    Subject matter under subclass 601 comprising an aggregate of switching
    facilities for a power station or transforming station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    828,    for switch or switchboard associated with wire distribution means.

    832,    for switch or switchboard associated with frame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclass for
    circuit breaker structure, per se.

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, appropriate subclass for electromagnetic circuit breakers.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    appropriate subclass for thermally actuated circuit breakers.


CLS 361/606
TXT Truck type:
    Subject matter under subclass 605 wherein the switchgear comprises heavy
    duty draw-out apparatus carried by a carriage with wheels.


CLS 361/607
TXT With interlock:
    Subject matter under subclass 606 wherein a mechanism is provided for (a)
    governing or controlling an operation of a switch or (b) controlling
    insertion or withdrawal of a draw-out carriage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    609,    for interlock means in drawer-type switchgear.

    615,    for interlock in electrical switchgear, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 50.01+ for
    interlocking, per se.


CLS 361/608
TXT Drawer type:
    Subject matter under subclass 605 wherein the switchgear comprises
    components on a sliding box or receptacle that is opened by pulling out and
    closed by pushing in, combined with an enclosure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    725,    for cabinet-type housings with removable chassis.

    730,    for modules in a housing.


CLS 361/609
TXT With interlock:
    Subject matter under subclass 608 wherein a mechanism is provided for (a)
    governing or controlling an operation of switch or (b) controlling
    insertion or withdrawal of the drawer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    607,    for interlock means in truck-type switchgear.

    615,    for interlock in electrical switchgear, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 50.17+ for
    draw-out type switchgear with an interlock means between the cover and the
    switch.


CLS 361/610
TXT Pivoted support means:
    Subject matter under subclass 605 wherein the switchgear components are
    located on support or holding means that contain a shaft or pin which
    allows switchgear components to turn.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclass 261 for connector having coupling
    part with actuating means urging contact to move laterally with respect to
    rest of coupling part and toward mating port combined with pivotable means.


CLS 361/611
TXT Busbar arrangements:
    Subject matter under subclass 605 wherein heavy copper straps or bars are
    used (a) to carry high currents or (b) to make a common connection between
    several circuits having specific structural order or relationship.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    624,    for distribution or control unit housing or mounting assembly with
    busbars.

    637,    for busbar arrangements on panel boards.

    648,    for busbar arrangements on panel boards in distribution boxes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, appropriate subclass for
    busbar arrangements, per se.


CLS 361/612
TXT Gas insulated:
    Subject matter under subclass 611 wherein a composition primarily adapted
    for preventing the flow of electricity through busbars is a fluid that has
    neither independent shape nor volume, but tends to expand indefinitely.


CLS 361/613
TXT Liquid insulated:
    Subject matter under subclass 611 wherein a composition primarily adapted
    for preventing a transfer of electricity through busbars is a fluid
    characterized by free movement of the constituent molecules among
    themselves, but without the tendency to separate.


CLS 361/614
TXT With plural removable control units in housing:
    Subject matter under subclass 611 wherein the busbars are located in an
    enclosure which contains several separable units that divide and deliver
    electric energy among other electrical devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    648,    for busbar arrangements on panel boards in distribution boxes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, appropriate subclass for cabinet
    housings, per se.


CLS 361/615
TXT With interlock:
    Subject matter under subclass 605 wherein the switchgear contains means for
    either preventing operation of a switch or for preventing movement of
    particular switch elements on their associated supports.

    (1)     Note.  As an example, the switch operating handle might be latched
    in the off position until the switch unit is fully inserted on its housing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    607,    for interlock means in truck-type switchgear.

    609,    for interlock means in drawer-type switchgear.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 42.01+ and
    43.01+ for switches with unauthorized use prevention means and subclasses
    50.17+ for switchgear with switch interlock mechanisms.


CLS 361/616
TXT Door or cover type:
    Subject matter under subclass 615 wherein the interlock means is actuated
    or controlled by a swinging or sliding barrier of the switchgear.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 50.17+ for
    draw-out switchgear with cover and switch interlock means.


CLS 361/617
TXT Shutter type:
    Subject matter under subclass 615 wherein the interlock means is in the
    form of a sliding guard or shutter which physically closes off connecting
    apertures to the switchgear contacts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    607,    for draw-out type interlocks which comprise shutters.


CLS 361/618
TXT Gas insulated:
    Subject matter under subclass 605 wherein an electrical switchgear material
    that prevents possible future contact of  adjacent conductors resulting in
    a short circuit is a fluid having neither independent shape nor volume but
    tending to expand indefinitely.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    604,    for distribution station housing or mounting assemblies with gas
    insulated switches.

    619,    for electrical switchgear housing or mounting assembly with gas
    insulated circuit breaker.


CLS 361/619
TXT Having gas circuit breaker:
    Subject matter under subclass 605 wherein the electrical switchgear
    comprises circuit interrupting devices having surfaces separated by a fluid
    having neither independent shape nor volume, but tending to spread out and
    occupy the entire enclosure in which it is placed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    618,    for electrical switchgear housing or mounting assembly with gas
    insulated switchgear.


CLS 361/620
TXT Having transformer:
    Subject matter under subclass 605 wherein the electrical switchgear is
    combined with an electrical device which changes voltage in direct
    proportion to the ratio of the number of turns of its primary and secondary
    windings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    603,    for electrical power distribution station housings having a
    transformer.

    623,    for distribution or control unit housings or mounting assemblies
    with transformer.

    663,    for electrical service meter housing or mounting assembly with
    transformer.

    836,    for electrical housing or mounting assembly with transformer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclass for transformer, per se.


CLS 361/621
TXT Having isolating switch:
    Subject matter under subclass 605 wherein the electrical switchgear
    comprises a device intended to separate an electric circuit from the power
    source with no interrupting rating and intended to be operated only after
    the circuit has been opened by some other means.


CLS 361/622
TXT Distribution or control unit:
    Subject matter under subclass 601 wherein components that divide and
    deliver electric energy among several electrical devices are mounted on or
    in a support unit with an enclosure.


CLS 361/623
TXT Having transformer:
    Subject matter under subclass 622 wherein the distribution or control unit
    is combined with an electrical device which changes voltage in direct
    proportion to the ratio of the number of turns of its primary and secondary
    windings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    603,    for electrical power distribution station housing with transformer.

    620,    for electrical switchgear housings or mounting assembly with
    transformer.

    663,    for electrical service meter housing or mounting assembly with
    transformer.

    836,    for electrical housing or mounting assembly with transformer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclass for transformer.


CLS 361/624
TXT Having busbar arrangement:
    Subject matter under subclass 622 wherein the distribution or control unit
    contains heavy copper straps or bars used (a) to carry high currents or (b)
    to make a common connection between several circuits with specific
    relationship or order.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    611,    for electrical switchgear housings or mounting assemblies with
    busbar arrangements.

    637,    for busbar arrangements on panel boards.

    648,    for busbar arrangements on panel boards in distribution boxes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, appropriate subclass for
    busbar arrangements, per se.


CLS 361/625
TXT Portable:
    Subject matter under subclass 622 wherein the distribution or control unit
    is capable of being easily carried or moved about.


CLS 361/626
TXT Having fuse or relay:
    Subject matter under subclass 622 wherein the distribution  or control unit
    contains a protective device, usually a short piece of wire, but sometimes
    a chemical compound, that melts and breaks the circuit when a current
    exceeds a rated value or an electromechanical device in which contacts are
    opened and/or closed by a variation in condition of one electric circuit
    and thereby affect an operation of other devices in same or other electric
    circuits.


CLS 361/627
TXT Distribution or control panel board:
    Subject matter under subclass 601 comprising a mounting plate of metal or
    insulation for mounting electrical power distribution or control devices
    and having no enclosure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    644+,   for panel boards which are mounted in an electrical service or
    distribution box.

    748+,   for printed circuits with diverse components.


CLS 361/628
TXT With switches and fuses:
    Subject matter under subclass 627 wherein the panel mounted distribution or
    control board comprises (a) mechanical or electrical devices that complete
    or break the path of current or send a current over a different path and
    (b) protective devices, usually short pieces of wire but sometimes chemical
    compounds, that melt and break a circuit when a current exceeds a rated
    value.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    646,    for panel mounted fuses and/or manually operated switches which are
    mounted in an electrical service or distribution box.

    828,    for a switch associated with a wire distribution means.

    832,    for a switch associated with a frame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 237+ for
    switch structure, per se.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclass 4 for fuse structure, per se, and subclasses 8+ for a fusible
    element with a manually operated switching device.


CLS 361/629
TXT Unit block:
    Subject matter under subclass 628 wherein the fuses or switches are
    packaged in separate support sets and the dimension for each support set is
    the same.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    646,    for a panel mounted fuse support means that is mounted in an
    electrical service or distribution box.

    647,    for a panel mounted switch support means that is mounted in an
    electrical service or distribution box.

    833+,   for fuse blocks of unit construction.


CLS 361/630
TXT With fuses:
    Subject matter under subclass 627 wherein the panel mounted distribution or
    control board comprises protective devices, usually short pieces of wire
    but sometimes chemical compounds, that melt and break a circuit when a
    current exceeds a rated value.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    628+,   for panel mounted switches and fuses.

    646,    for panel mounted fuse support means mounted in an electrical
    service or distribution box.

    833+,   for fuse blocks of unit construction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclass 4 for fuse structure, per se.


CLS 361/631
TXT With switches:
    Subject matter under subclass 627 wherein the panel mounted distribution or
    control board comprises manually operated mechanical or electrical devices
    that complete or break a path of current or send it over a different path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    628+,   for panel mounted switches and fuses.

    647,    for panel mounted fuse switch support means mounted in an
    electrical service or distribution box.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 237+ for
    electric switch structure details, per se.


CLS 361/632
TXT With switch actuating arrangements:
    Subject matter under subclass 631 wherein a toggle or spring is provided to
    move the switch.


CLS 361/633
TXT Plugboards:
    Subject matter under subclass 627 wherein the panel board is provided with
    a plurality of conductors or busbars that are connected together by use of
    removable plug-like members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    652,    for circuit breaker arrangements housed in an electrical
    distribution box.

    673,    for circuit breaker supports, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclass 332 for telephone centralized
    switching system including plug and socket.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 43+ for plugboard structure, per
    se.


CLS 361/634
TXT With circuit breaker arrangements:
    Subject matter under subclass 627 comprising a sequence or relationship of
    electromechanical circuit interrupting devices having separable contacts on
    the panel board.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    652+,   for circuit breaker arrangement in a service distribution box.

    673,    for circuit breaker supports, per se.


CLS 361/635
TXT With discriminating means:
    Subject matter under subclass 634 wherein the circuit breaker arrangement
    comprises structure which prevents free-interchange ability of different
    size circuit breakers.

    (1)     Note.  This is commonly done by circuit breaker projections which
    can be inserted only into selected board apertures.


CLS 361/636
TXT Plug-in or removable:
    Subject matter under subclass 634 wherein the circuit breakers can be
    easily installed or removed from support equipment.

    (1)     Note.  Plug-in connections can be completed through pins, plugs,
    jacks, sockets, receptacles, or other ready connectors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    640,    for distribution or control panel board with busbar or conductor
    arrangements and having removable or plug-in connector.

    656,    for electric service distribution box including panel board with
    plug-in circuit breakers.


CLS 361/637
TXT Busbar or conductor arrangements:
    Subject matter under subclass 627 wherein the distribution or control panel
    board comprises specific support structure for heavy copper straps or bars
    used (a) to carry high currents or (b) to make common connections between
    several circuits.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    611,    for busbar arrangements in electrical switchgear.

    624,    for distribution or control unit housing or mounting assembly with
    busbar arrangement.

    648,    for busbar arrangement in a distribution box.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, appropriate subclass for
    busbar supports, per se.


CLS 361/638
TXT U-shaped member:
    Subject matter under subclass 637 wherein the busbar arrangement is (a)
    configured like a letter U or (b) connected to a member configured like a
    letter U or (c) supported by a member configured like a letter U.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    649,    for electric service distribution panel board with busbar
    arrangement and having a U-shaped member.


CLS 361/639
TXT With horizontal busbar:
    Subject matter under subclass 637 wherein a heavy copper strap or bar used
    to carry high currents is parallel to the panel board base structure.


CLS 361/640
TXT With removable or plug-in connection:
    Subject matter under subclass 637 wherein electrical devices can be easily
    installed or removed from support equipment.

    (1)     Note.  Plug-in connections can be completed through pins, plugs,
    jacks, sockets, receptacles, or other ready connectors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    636,    for distribution or control panel board with circuit breaker
    arrangements and having plug-in or removable circuit breakers.

    656,    for electric service distribution box including panel board with
    plug-in circuit-breakers.


CLS 361/641
TXT Electric service distribution box:
    Subject matter under subclass 601 comprising a housing for low voltage
    switching and power regulation.

    (1)     Note.  The housing is usually a rectangular box with a hinged door
    adapted to be mounted on or in a wall.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 52.1+ for
    housing with electric apparatus having no specific art limitations.

    220,    Receptacles, appropriate subclass for metal containers, per se.


CLS 361/642
TXT With fuse:
    Subject matter under subclass 641 wherein the electric service distribution
    box contains a protective device, usually a short piece of wire but
    sometimes a chemical compound, which melts and breaks a circuit when a
    current exceeds a rated value.


CLS 361/643
TXT With switch:
    Subject matter under subclass 641 wherein the housing contains a mechanical
    or electrical device that completes or breaks the path of current or sends
    the current over a different path.


CLS 361/644
TXT Including panel board:
    Subject matter under subclass 641 wherein the housing includes a mounted
    plate of metal or insulation for a control of other parts of electrical
    equipment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    627+,   for distribution or control panel boards.


CLS 361/645
TXT Adjustable panel:
    Subject matter under subclass 644 wherein means are provided to modify a
    position of the panel within the housing.


CLS 361/646
TXT With fuse support means:
    Subject matter under subclass 644 wherein the panel board has structure
    capable of supporting a protective device, usually a short piece of wire
    but sometimes a chemical compound, which melts and breaks a circuit when a
    current exceeds a rated value.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    630,    for panel mounted fuses, per se.

    642,    for electric service distribution boxes with a fuse.


CLS 361/647
TXT With switch support means:
    Subject matter under subclass 644 wherein the panel board has structure
    capable of supporting a mechanical or electrical device that completes or
    breaks a path of current or sends it over a different path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    631,    for panel mounted switches, per se.

    643,    for electric service distribution boxes with switch.


CLS 361/648
TXT Busbar arrangements:
    Subject matter under subclass 644 wherein the panel supports specific
    structure for a heavy copper strap or bar used (a) to carry high currents
    or (b) to make a common connection between several circuits.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    611,    for busbar arrangements in electrical switchgear.

    624,    for enclosed distribution or control unit housing or mounting
    assembly with busbars.

    637,    for panel boards with no enclosure containing busbars.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, appropriate subclass for
    busbar supporting arrangements, per se.


CLS 361/649
TXT U-shaped member:
    Subject matter under subclass 648 wherein the busbar is (a) configured like
    a letter U or (b) connected to a member configured like a letter U or (c)
    supported by a member configured like a letter U.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    638,    for distribution or control panel board with busbar or conductor
    arrangements and having a U-shaped member.


CLS 361/650
TXT Spaced parallel relationship:
    Subject matter under subclass 648 wherein the busbars are arranged
    extending, in the same direction, everywhere equidistant and having space
    separating the busbars.


CLS 361/651
TXT Panel board corner mountings:
    Subject matter under subclass 644 wherein an electrical device is mounted
    adjacent to intersecting edges or sides of a panel board within the housing.


CLS 361/652
TXT Circuit breaker supporting arrangements:
    Subject matter under subclass 644 comprising particular mounting for
    circuit interrupting devices on the electric service distribution panel
    board.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    634,    for circuit breakers supported on distribution or control panel
    board.


CLS 361/653
TXT With discriminating means:
    Subject matter under subclass 652 wherein the circuit breaker arrangement
    comprises structure which prevents free-interchange ability of different
    size circuit breakers.

    (1)     Note.  This is commonly done by circuit breaker projections which
    can be inserted only into selected board apertures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    635,    for circuit breaker arrangements supported on distribution or
    control panel boards having discriminating means.


CLS 361/654
TXT With tamper prevention means:
    Subject matter under subclass 652 wherein a particular support or mechanism
    is provided to prevent unauthorized access to the circuit breakers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 110 for circuitry
    that combats attempts to cause a meter to read inaccurately.


CLS 361/655
TXT Having two row arrangement:
    Subject matter under subclass 652 wherein the circuit breakers are arranged
    in two lines or rows.


CLS 361/656
TXT With plug-in circuit breakers:
    Subject matter under subclass 652 wherein the circuit breakers can be
    easily installed or removed from support equipment.

    (1)     Note.  Plug-in connections can be completed through pins, plugs,
    jacks, sockets, receptacles, or other ready connectors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    636,    for distribution or control panel board with circuit breaker
    arrangements and having plug-in or removable circuit breakers.

    640,    for distribution or control panel board with busbar arrangement and
    having plug-in connector.


CLS 361/657
TXT With removable member:
    Subject matter under subclass 641 wherein the electric service distribution
    box contains a support part that can be taken away or off.


CLS 361/658
TXT With plastic enclosure or support:
    Subject matter under subclass 641 wherein the electric service distribution
    box includes a surrounding or support part whose substance is any of
    numerous organic synthetic or processed materials that are mostly
    thermosetting polymers of high molecular weight and that can be molded,
    cast, extruded, drawn, or laminated into objects, films, or filaments.


CLS 361/659
TXT For electricity service meter:
    Subject matter under subclass 601 comprising boxes, housings or
    miscellaneous structures specifically for mounting or housing an electric
    measuring apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 74+ for electric
    meters having significant electric meter structure.  Note, particularly
    subclass 110 for electric meters having protective and fraud combating
    means, other than casings and housing; subclass 149 for electric meters
    having probes, prods, or terminals; and subclass 156 for electric meter
    with measuring structure having casing.


CLS 361/660
TXT Plural:
    Subject matter under subclass 659 comprising two or more meters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 114 for plural
    electric meters having significant measuring structure.


CLS 361/661
TXT With meter circuit controller:
    Subject matter under subclass 659 comprising means for regulating a current
    through a meter circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses
    for switches, per se.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 115+ for electric
    meters having plural ranges, scales, or registration rates, such as
    multirange instruments, and subclass 149 for electric meter having probes,
    prods, or terminals.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for electrical
    connectors, per se.


CLS 361/662
TXT Bypass arrangement:
    Subject matter under subclass 661 comprising means to close a conducting
    path when the meter is in a disconnected condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 51+ for
    circuit makers and breakers combined with or actuated by connector coupling.


CLS 361/663
TXT With transformer or circuit breaker:
    Subject matter under subclass 661 wherein the meter circuit controller
    comprises (a) an electrical device which changes voltage in direct
    proportion to a number of turns of its primary and secondary windings or
    (b) a device for interrupting a circuit under normal or abnormal conditions
    by means of separable contacts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    603,    for electrical power distribution station housing having a
    transformer.

    620,    for electrical switchgear housing or mounting assembly with a
    transformer.

    623,    for distribution or control unit housings or mounting assemblies
    with a transformer.

    863,    for electrical housing or mounting assembly with a transformer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclass for transformer, per se.


CLS 361/664
TXT Meter mounting arrangements:
    Subject matter under subclass 659 wherein specific structure is provided to
    mount or support the electricity service meter (a) to another structure or
    (b) within a housing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 149 for electric
    meters having probes, prods, or terminals and subclass 156 for electric
    meter having casings.


CLS 361/665
TXT Adaptable meter supports:
    Subject matter under subclass 664 wherein the meter support structure is
    adjustable or adaptable to support meters of different sizes on or in a
    same support.


CLS 361/666
TXT Retractable or detachable meter support:
    Subject matter under subclass 664 wherein (a) the meter support structure
    supports the meter in a position other than in its normally located
    position or (b) the meter support structure has separable or detachable
    parts.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter includes, for example, pivoting means to
    move the meter to more than one position.


CLS 361/667
TXT Removable cover:
    Subject matter under subclass 664 wherein a cover, top, or lid of the meter
    can be easily taken away or off.


CLS 361/668
TXT Meter terminal and connector arrangements:
    Subject matter under subclass 659 wherein an electrical interconnecting
    structure external to the meter has a particular order or relationship.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 149 for electric
    meters having terminals, prods, or connectors.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for electrical
    connectors having housing or terminal enclosures.


CLS 361/669
TXT Terminal block:
    Subject matter under subclass 668 comprising an insulating base or slab
    equipped with one or more electrical connection points for the purpose of
    making electrical connections thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    822,    for terminal blocks with plural components.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 884+ for terminal blocks, per se.


CLS 361/670
TXT Contact blade receiving structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 668 comprising a female receptacle support
    for male meter blades.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclass for blade receiving
    structure, per se.


CLS 361/671
TXT Adjustable or adaptable contacts:
    Subject matter under subclass 668 wherein means are provided to (a) mount
    contacts or electrical junction points in a plurality of positions or (b)
    mount a plurality of separate discrete contacts or electrical junction
    points.

    (1)     Note.  The contacts included are both the meter blade contacts and
    the female receptacle contacts.


CLS 361/672
TXT Tamper resistant:
    Subject matter under subclass 659 comprising a housing or support that
    prevents unauthorized access to the meter or a terminal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 110 for electrical
    circuitry that combats attempts to cause the meter to read inaccurately.


CLS 361/673
TXT Circuit breaker supporting means (i.e., attaching, mounting, etc.):Subject
    matter under subclass 601 comprising structural means for attaching a
    circuit interrupting device having separable contacts to a support or mount.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    634,    for circuit breakers on panel boards.

    652,    for circuit breakers on panel boards within a service distribution
    box.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclass for supports, per se.


CLS 361/674
TXT For ballast elements:
    Subject matter under subclass 601 comprising a housing specifically for
    electrical diverse devices that provide a starting voltage or stabilizing
    current in a circuit with electronic-discharge lamps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses  52.1+ for
    housings having electrical devices including ballast component or plural
    same ballast component.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclasses 56-63 for
    electric discharge type devices.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 96 for potted inductor devices and
    search subclasses 105 and 107 for inductor devices combined with a
    connector.

    362,    Illumination, appropriate subclass for illumination type signal
    devices.


CLS 361/675
TXT Bus duct:
    Subject matter under subclass 601 comprising a protective tube or pipe used
    for supporting busbar structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, appropriate subclass for
    bus duct structure, per se.


CLS 361/676
TXT With cooling means:
    Subject matter under subclass 601 comprising means for dissipating heat
    produced by the power distribution systems or devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    687,    for computer support equipment with cooling means.

    688+,   for cooling means with electronic apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclass for cooling means, per se.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 712+ for solid-state devices having solid-state device
    structural details combined with cooling means.


CLS 361/677
TXT Fluid:
    Subject matter under subclass 676 wherein the cooling means is provided by
    a substance tending to flow or conform to an outline of its container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    689+,   for fluid cooling means in electronic apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, appropriate subclass for
    the fluid cooling of conductors.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 712+ for solid-state devices having solid-state structural
    details combined with cooling means.


CLS 361/678
TXT Air:
    Subject matter under subclass 677 wherein a mixture of an invisible,
    odorless, and tasteless gas (as nitrogen and oxygen that surrounds the
    earth) is the fluid cooling means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    690+,   for air cooling means in electronic apparatus.

    704+,   for thermal conductor which dissipates heat into the air.


CLS 361/679
TXT For electronic systems and devices:
    Subject matter under subclass 600 comprising housings or mounting
    assemblies specifically for electronic systems and devices not provided for
    elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  Support equipment and housings for disk drives, keyboards,
    display units and cathode-ray tubes (CRTs) without structural detail or
    particular equipment description for disk drive, keyboard, display unit, or
    CRT will be classified in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 5+ for
    similar type switches arranged in a keyboard manner.

    235,    Registers, subclass 145 for keyboard support equipment and housings
    comprising those parts of registers, usually manually actuated (including
    keys, shift-keys, and space bars) which control and initiate the action of
    the calculating machine to determine what numbers shall be introduced and
    how; also to control subsidiary operation of the machine.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 364+ for CRT
    support equipment and housings having structural CRT detail.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 700+ for (a) support
    equipment and housing with display units having structural display unit
    detail or (b) support equipment and housings with keyboards in conjunction
    with CRTs and selectable display units having structural detail of
    keyboard, CRT, or selectable display unit.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 20+ for keyboard
    support equipment and housings having a control element which an operator
    physically contacts to control the transmission or generation of a coded
    set of pulses and subclass 27 for keyboard support equipment and housings
    having structural keyboard detail and give an indication of key operation
    which may be heard or felt by the operator.


CLS 361/680
TXT Including keyboard support:
    Subject matter under subclass 679 wherein (a) at least one electronic
    device is a portion of a terminal used to generate a character stream to a
    computer or other communication device combined with housing or mounting
    arrangement or (b) at least one electronic device has key input means
    combined with housing or mounting arrangement.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for only nominal recitation of a
    keyboard.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 17 for automatic transmitter or recorder
    with keyboard.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 5+ for
    similar type switches arranged in keyboard manner.

    235,    Registers, subclasses 145+ for keyboards comprising those parts of
    registers, usually manually actuated, including key, shift-keys, space
    bars, etc., that control and initiate the action of the calculating machine
    to determine what numbers shall be introduced and how; also to control
    subsidiary operation of the machine.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, appropriate subclass for keyboard
    supports or furniture without a keyboard.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 706+ for keyboard in
    conjunction with CRTs or selectable display units having structural details
    of a keyboard, CRT, or selectable display unit.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 22+ for  (a)
    keyboards having a control element which an operator physically contacts to
    control the transmission or generation of a coded set of pulses or (b)
    keyboards with structural detail and give an indication of key operation
    which may be heard or felt by an operator.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 472+ for keyboard or key lever
    actuating mechanism.


CLS 361/681
TXT Including display support:
    Subject matter under subclass 679 wherein at least one electronic device
    presents information in visual form combined with housing or mounting
    arrangement.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for only nominal recitation of a
    display.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, appropriate subclass for display
    information by print or paint on boards, viewers, labels, or tags.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection or a Related Device, subclasses 10+ for
    safety partitions and display partitions.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 15 for automatic photographic recorder.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, appropriate subclass for boxes having
    compartments with displays.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 917+ for video display screen support.

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, appropriate subclass for games with
    display.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, appropriate subclass for bodies
    with advertising and displaying.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 114+ for showcase type
    supports.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses for
    light sources, per se.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 74+ for digital
    meters.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 700+ for support equipment
    and housing for display units having structural or functional display unit
    detail.

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), appropriate subclass for radar display systems.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 467-472 for character font
    generation and subclasses 326+ for operator interface processing.

    346,    Recorders, subclasses 17+ for recorder combined with nonrecording
    indicator.

    348,    Television, subclasses 825+ for functional detail of a cathode-ray
    tube combined with support equipment.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 87 for photographic recording or
    animation.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    330+ for liquid crystal display support having optical liquid crystal
    details.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 227+ for plural light sources in general
    lighting uses.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, appropriate subclass
    for displays of time.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 101+ for
    computer graphics and control of data presentation with creation or
    manipulation of graphic objects or text performed by a computer or
    processor.

    396,    Photography, subclass 550 for photoelectronic type photocomposing
    systems.

    400,    Typewritng Machines, subclasses 83+ for displaying
    typewriter-formed representation of print-line.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 365+ for displaying
    educational material.

    463,    Amusement Devices:  Games, for game apparatus in which a display is
    included.

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, for game apparatus used for a game
    which uses a tangible projectile and in which a display is included.

    707,    Data Processing - Database And File Management, Data Structures, or
    Document Processing, subclasses 500-542 for document processing performed
    by a computer for presentation.


CLS 361/682
TXT CRT support:
    Subject matter under subclass 681 wherein at least one electronic device is
    a vacuum tube in which its electron beam can be focused to a small cross
    section on a luminescent screen and can be varied in position and intensity
    to produce a visible pattern combined with housing or mounting arrangement.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for only nominal recitation of a CRT.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 192.1+ for
    cathode-ray tube coating, forming, or etching by sputtering.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, appropriate subclass for cathode-ray
    tube furniture without cathode-ray tube.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 364+ for
    cathode-ray tube, per se.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Device:  Systems, subclasses 1+ for
    cathode-ray tube circuits, per se.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 121+ for measuring,
    testing, or sensing using a cathode-ray tube.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 720+ for cathode-ray tube
    display system having structural or functional details of display system.

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, subclasses 226+ for
    radiation marking using cathode-ray tube.

    348,    Television, subclasses 825+ for functional detail of a cathode-ray
    tube combined with support equipment.

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 485 for facsimile having cathode-ray tube
    scanning.

    386,    Television Signal Processing for Dynamic Recording or Reproducing,
    subclasses 42+ and 128+ for photographic television recording, particularly
    subclass 130 for cathode-ray tube.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 23+ for process of producing cathode-ray tube.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclass 307 for cathode ray screen
    display and audio means in education and subclass 323 for cathode ray
    screen display included in examining means of question or problem eliciting
    response.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    subclasses 36+ for manufacturing process of cathode-ray tube.


CLS 361/683
TXT Computer related support:
    Subject matter under subclass 679 wherein (a) at least one electronic
    device is a data processor or calculator combined with housing or mounting
    arrangement or (b) at least one electronic device is a component of a data
    processor or calculator combined with housing or mounting arrangement.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for only nominal recitation of
    computer or computer component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, appropriate subclass for computer
    furniture without a computer or computer component.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 708.1
    for computer with housing having data processing means or calculating
    means, and appropriate subclass for computer, per se.


CLS 361/684
TXT Memory unit support:
    Subject matter under subclass 683 wherein at least one electronic device is
    a computer component that stores information combined with housing or
    mounting arrangement.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for only nominal recitation of memory
    unit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, appropriate
    subclass for magnetic information storage, per se.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 1+ for
    magnetic bubbles, per se; subclasses 185.01+ for floating gate memory
    storage (e.g., flash memory); subclasses 45+ for analog storage systems,
    per se; subclasses 49+ for associative memories, per se; and subclasses 94+
    for read only systems, per se.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems and Devices, subclass 111 for
    electrical time device with electronic memory storage.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, appropriate subclass for
    dynamic information storage, per se.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclasses
    21.1+ for diagnostic memory testing.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, appropriate subclass
    for digital data processing, per se.


CLS 361/685
TXT Disk drive support:
    Subject matter under subclass 684 wherein at least one electronic component
    is a device that rotates a storage medium, writes data onto it, and reads
    data from it as instructed by a program combined with housing or mounting
    arrangement.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for only nominal recitation of a disk
    drive unit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses
    97.01+ for floppy disk player, per se.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 100+ for
    optical or compact disk players, per se, and subclasses 275.1+ for optical
    or compact disks, per se.


CLS 361/686
TXT Input/output device support:
    Subject matter under subclass 683 wherein at least one electronic component
    (a) provides a means of communication between the computer and other
    electrical equipment or (b) provides a means of communication between two
    or more computers, combined with housing or mounting arrangement.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for only nominal recitation of an
    input-output device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 130+
    for data processing control systems, methods, or apparatus, per se.


CLS 361/687
TXT With cooling means:
    Subject matter under subclass 683 wherein the computer related support
    equipment includes means for dissipating heat from computer components.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    274.1+, for protecting against or compensating for variations in internal
    temperatures of capacitors.

    676,    for cooling means in power distribution systems and devices.

    688,    for cooling means with electronic apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for heat exchange, per se.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 712+ for solid-state devices with cooling means.


CLS 361/688
TXT With cooling means:
    Subject matter under subclass 679 wherein the electronic system or device
    comprises means for dissipating heat from electronic components.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    274.1+, for protecting against or compensating for variations in internal
    temperatures of capacitors.

    676,    for cooling in power distribution systems and  devices.

    687,    for computer support equipment with cooling means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for heat exchange, per se.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 712+ for solid-state devices having solid-state structural
    details combined with cooling means.


CLS 361/689
TXT Fluid:
    Subject matter under subclass 688 wherein the cooling means is provided by
    a substance tending to flow or conform to an  outline of its container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    677,    for fluid cooling in power distribution systems and devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 252 for the fluid
    cooling of conductors.

    257,    Active Solid-State Diodes (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 712+ for solid-state devices having solid-state structural
    details combined with fluid cooling means.


CLS 361/690
TXT Air:
    Subject matter under subclass 689 wherein a mixture of invisible, odorless,
    and tasteless gas (as nitrogen and oxygen that surround the earth) is the
    fluid cooling means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    678,    for air cooling means in power distribution systems and devices.

    704,    for thermal conductor which dissipates heat into the air.


CLS 361/691
TXT Pressurized or conditioned:
    Subject matter under subclass 690 wherein the air has (a) an applied force
    other than natural forces or (b) humidity and temperature control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 56+ for refrigeration processes, per se.


CLS 361/692
TXT Plural openings:
    Subject matter under subclass 690 wherein the cooling means has two or more
    vents that allow air circulation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    454,    Ventilation, appropriate subclass for ventilation, per se.


CLS 361/693
TXT Circular:
    Subject matter under subclass 692 wherein the plural openings for air
    intake or exhaust are structured in small circular shapes.


CLS 361/694
TXT With air circulating means:
    Subject matter under subclass 690 wherein the cooling means comprises
    specific means for air movement.


CLS 361/695
TXT Fan or blower:
    Subject matter under subclass 694 wherein the cooling means comprises a
    device that consists of a series of vanes radiating from a hub rotated on
    its axle by a motor.


CLS 361/696
TXT With heat exchanger unit:
    Subject matter under subclass 695 wherein the cooling means comprises a
    device that transfers warmth from one fluid to another without allowing
    them to mix.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    701,    for liquid cooling system with heat exchanger unit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for heat exchange, per se.


CLS 361/697
TXT With heat sink or cooling fins:
    Subject matter under subclass 695 wherein the cooling means comprises (a) a
    mass of metal added to a device for an absorption or transfer of heat from
    critical electrical parts or (b) a metal disk or a thin projecting metal
    strip attached to a semiconductor to dissipate heat.


CLS 361/698
TXT And liquid:
    Subject matter under subclass 690 wherein the fluid comprises (a) the air
    and (b) a substance characterized by free movement of constituent molecules
    among themselves but without tendency to separate.


CLS 361/699
TXT Liquid:
    Subject matter under subclass 698 wherein the fluid comprises a substance
    characterized by free movement of constituent molecules among themselves
    but without tendency to separate.


CLS 361/700
TXT Change of physical state:
    Subject matter under subclass 699 wherein the liquid (a) changes to a gas
    (vapor) or (b) changes from a gas (vapor) to liquid.


CLS 361/701
TXT With heat exchange unit:
    Subject matter under subclass 689 wherein the cooling means comprises a
    device that transfers warmth from one fluid to another without allowing
    them to mix.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    696,    for air cooling system with fan or blower having a heat exchanger
    unit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for heat exchange, per se.


CLS 361/702
TXT With cold plate or heat sink:
    Subject matter under subclass 689 wherein the cooling means comprises the
    fluid and (a) a mass of metal that is added to a device for absorption or
    transfer of heat from critical electrical parts or (b) a plate or bar that
    transfers heat from critical electrical parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    709+,   for thermal conduction through support means having heat sinks.

    711,    for thermal conduction through support means having a cooling plate
    or bar.


CLS 361/703
TXT With cooling fins:
    Subject matter under subclass 689 wherein the cooling means comprises the
    fluid and a metal disk or a thin projecting metal strip attached to a
    semiconductor to dissipate heat.


CLS 361/704
TXT Thermal conduction:
    Subject matter under subclass 688 wherein the electronic system or device
    is cooled by transmitting heat through a heat transmitting member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    707,    for thermal conduction through the component support means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, appropriate subclass for
    heat conducting members (heat sinks), per se.


CLS 361/705
TXT By specific coating:
    Subject matter under subclass 704 wherein a particular support surface
    layer dissipates heat from heat producing electrical components.


CLS 361/706
TXT Containing silicon or aluminum:
    Subject matter under subclass 705 wherein the coating contains an earth
    metal and element of atomic number 13 or contains a nonmetallic element of
    a carbon group, atomic number 14.


CLS 361/707
TXT Through support means:
    Subject matter under subclass 704 wherein heat is conducted through the
    means supporting or upholding components of the electronic system or device.


CLS 361/708
TXT Specific chemical compound or element:
    Subject matter under subclass 707 wherein the support means is composed of
    a particular substance.


CLS 361/709
TXT Heat sink:
    Subject matter under subclass 707 wherein the support means is connected to
    a mass of metal that is added to an electrical device for the absorption or
    transfer of warmth from electrical parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    702,    for electronic systems with liquid cooling means and having a heat
    sink.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, appropriate subclass for
    heat conducting members (heat sinks), per se.


CLS 361/710
TXT Details:
    Subject matter under subclass 709 wherein the heat sink is a complex unit
    having specific parts.


CLS 361/711
TXT Cooling plate or bar:
    Subject matter under subclass 709 wherein the heat sink is combined with a
    flat surface or straight piece of metal that conducts heat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    702,    for electronic system with liquid cooling means and having a cold
    plate.


CLS 361/712
TXT Thermally and electrically conductive:
    Subject matter under subclass 707 wherein the support means conduct heat
    and flow of electrons.


CLS 361/713
TXT Electrically insulating thermally conductive:
    Subject matter under subclass 707 wherein the support means conduct heat
    and does not conduct flow of electrons.


CLS 361/714
TXT Through component housing:
    Subject matter under subclass 704 wherein the heat conduction is through
    the housing which supports the electronic components.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    707+,   for thermal conduction through component support means.


CLS 361/715
TXT For module:
    Subject matter under subclass 704 wherein the heat is conducted from
    components separately housed in a container or supported in a unit or
    packaging scheme displaying regularity and separable repetition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    728+,   for module without cooling means.


CLS 361/716
TXT Plural:
    Subject matter under subclass 715 wherein the heat is conducted from
    components separately housed in containers or supported in several units.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    729+,   for plurality of module units that are electrically connected in
    groups without cooling means.


CLS 361/717
TXT For active solid state devices:
    Subject matter under subclass 704 wherein the heat is conducted from
    semiconductive devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    764,    for integrated circuit within printed circuit board with no cooling
    means and having no structural details to an active solid state device.

    783,    for semiconductive device connected to printed circuit board with
    no cooling means and having no structural details to semiconductive device.

    820,    for electronic system or device support/housing and having at least
    one semiconductor device as a component without cooling means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 712+ for cooling of semiconductor device wherein (a) the housing
    is for an active solid-state device, details of which are positively
    recited in the claims or (b) wherein the recited housing is necessary to
    make a usable active solid-state device.


CLS 361/718
TXT For integrated circuit:
    Subject matter under subclass 717 wherein the heat is conducted from an
    electrical network composed of two or more circuit elements inextricably
    bound on a single semiconductor substrate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    764,    for integrated circuit within printed circuit board without cooling
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclass for integrated circuits, per se.


CLS 361/719
TXT Circuit board mounted:
    Subject matter under subclass 718 wherein the integrated circuit is mounted
    on a card, chassis, or plate onto which an electrical circuit or network
    has been printed and has a heat conducting means for cooling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    748+,   for printed circuit with diverse components having no cooling means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 250+ for
    printed circuit board, per se, and subclass 260 for printed circuit board
    having one component.


CLS 361/720
TXT For printed circuit board:
    Subject matter under subclass 704 wherein an insulated card, chassis or
    plate is utilized to support diverse electrical components in an
    interconnected relationship and having heat conducting means for cooling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    719,    for integrated circuit mounted on printed circuit board and having
    heat conducting means for cooling.

    748+,   for printed circuit with diverse components having no cooling means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 250+ for
    printed circuit board, per se, and subclass 260 for printed circuit board
    having one component.


CLS 361/721
TXT Plural:
    Subject matter under subclass 720 wherein two or more printed circuit
    boards are utilized to support diverse electrical components in an
    interconnected relationship and having heat conduction for cooling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    784,    for plural printed circuit boards having no cooling means.


CLS 361/722
TXT For electronic circuit:
    Subject matter under subclass 704 wherein a number of electrical components
    or devices are interconnected in one or more closed path(s) to perform a
    desired electrical or electronic function and having heat conduction for
    cooling.


CLS 361/723
TXT For lead frame:
    Subject matter under subclass 704 wherein a metal skeletal structure is
    utilized to support diverse components and having heat conduction as
    cooling means.

    (1)     Note.  Lead frame in Class 257 is defined as a semiconductor device
    combined with housing wherein the  contact is part of a network of leads
    suspended from a common lead.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    813,    for lead frame utilized to support diverse components and having no
    cooling means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 52.4 for lead
    frame devices with housing means but having no claimed characteristics
    limiting particular characters of electrical equipment classifiable in
    other main classes.


CLS 361/724
TXT Cabinet-type housing:
    Subject matter under subclass 679 comprising a box or housing having
    drawers or doors with structure to support readily accessible electrical
    components.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 50+ for boxes
    and housings limited by claimed structure to electrical, but having no
    characteristic limiting them to a particular electrical equipment.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 678+ for details of active solid-state devices combined with
    housing.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, appropriate subclass for cabinet
    structure, per se.

    348,    Television, subclasses 273+ for a television camera with housing or
    support and subclasses 787+, 789, and 836+ for a television projection or
    display device with cabinet or chassis structure.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 347+ for cabinet, casing, housing
    means, and combinations thereof peculiar to or adapted to house,
    electrically shield or support radio receiver systems or components thereof.


CLS 361/725
TXT With retractable or readily detachable chassis:
    Subject matter under subclass 724 wherein a structure is provided to
    retract, hinge, or detach support means within a cabinet structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, appropriate subclass for supports and racks, per
    se, and subclass 26 for electrical fixture supports.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 294+ for supports and
    cabinets with movable components.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 348 for radio receiver means with
    retractable or readily detachable chassis means.


CLS 361/726
TXT With locking means or device:
    Subject matter under subclass 725 wherein a cabinet component is fastened
    or made secure with a locking or securing device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    732,    for modules with lock or interlock.

    740,    for printed circuit boards contained in a module having locking
    means or device.

    747,    for single module with locking means or device.

    759,    for printed circuit board with housing or chassis and having lock
    or interlock.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclasses 85+ for drawer locks and subclasses 95+ for locks
    on sliding doors.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 215 for a plurality of
    components having individual locks or latches actuated by a single selector
    or by a group of remote operators, subclasses 216+ for a gang-bar type lock
    or latch for plural movable components, and subclass 222 for locks or
    latches for a component.


CLS 361/727
TXT Sliding component or compartment:
    Subject matter under subclass 725 wherein the cabinet contains a part that
    moves smoothly along a surface of the cabinet to permit easy access.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 119 for cabinet with sliding
    compartment, per se.


CLS 361/728
TXT Module:
    Subject matter under subclass 679 wherein the electrical components are
    separately housed in a container or supported in a unit or packaging scheme
    displaying regularity and separable repetition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    715+,   for electronic system with module and having thermal conductive
    cooling means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 50+ for
    electrical boxes and housings of the hermetically sealed envelope type and
    subclasses 250+ for preformed  circuit arrangements, per se.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 55+ for detachable connectors of
    preformed panel circuit arrangements (e.g., printed circuit devices).

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 349 for receiver components housed in
    separate containers or units.


CLS 361/729
TXT Plural:
    Subject matter under subclass 728 wherein two or more module units are
    electrically connected in groups.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    716,    for plural modules having cooling means through component housing.


CLS 361/730
TXT With housing:
    Subject matter under subclass 729 wherein a panel or chassis is provided to
    mount a plurality of modules in an interconnected relationship.


CLS 361/731
TXT Interchangeable:
    Subject matter under subclass 730 wherein one module can be substituted for
    another within the module housing.


CLS 361/732
TXT Having lock or interlock:
    Subject matter under subclass 730 wherein the modules are fastened or made
    secure within the housing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    726,    for cabinet-type housing with retractable or readily detachable
    chassis having locking means or locking device.

    740,    for printed circuit boards contained in a module having locking
    means or device.

    741,    for single module with locking means or device.

    759,    for printed circuit board with housing or chassis and having a lock
    or interlock.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclasses 85+ for drawer locks and subclasses 95+ for locks
    on sliding doors.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 215 for a plurality of
    components having individual locks or latches actuated by a single selector
    or by a group of remote operators, subclasses 216+ for a gang-bar type lock
    or latch for plural movable components, and subclass 222 for locks or
    latches for a component.


CLS 361/733
TXT Selective connections:
    Subject matter under subclass 730 wherein electrical connections are from
    (a) module to module or (b) module to housing and may be chosen from a
    group of possible connections.


CLS 361/734
TXT With coupling or decoupling capacitor:
    Subject matter under subclass 729 wherein an electrical energy storage
    device is used to allow alternating current to pass to a module or an
    electrical energy storage device is used to prevent unwanted current to a
    module.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    268+,   for transformers and inductors with integral switches, capacitors,
    or locks.

    271+,   for electrostatic capacitors, per se.


CLS 361/735
TXT Stacked:
    Subject matter under subclass 729 wherein the modules are arranged one on
    top of another to formulate a pile.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    790,    for stacked printed circuit boards having separable connector or
    socket means.


CLS 361/736
TXT With printed circuits boards:
    Subject matter under subclass 728 wherein the module is constructed
    primarily of insulating panels wherein conductors are applied thereto by
    coating, laminating, or bonding in such a manner that the conductors are
    permanently attached to the panels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    719,    for integrated circuit mounted on a printed circuit board and
    having heat conducting means for cooling.

    748,    for printed circuit not in a module having no cooling means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 250+ for
    printed circuit board, per se, and for printed circuit board having one
    component.


CLS 361/737
TXT IC card or card member:
    Subject matter under subclass 736 wherein the printed circuit board
    supports an electrical network composed of two or more circuit elements
    inextricably bound on a single semiconductor substrate.


CLS 361/738
TXT With resistor and capacitor:
    Subject matter under subclass 736 wherein at least a component that has a
    specified opposition to a flow of electrical current and an electrical
    energy storage device are connected to the printed circuit board.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    271+,   for capacitors, per se.

    763,    for capacitor and resistor within printed circuit board.

    766,    for capacitor and resistor coated on printed board.

    782,    for passive component in conjunction with another electrical
    component on printed circuit board not in a module.

    830,    for plurality of capacitors on a frame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 260 for printed
    circuit with a capacitor or a resistor.


CLS 361/739
TXT With particular material:
    Subject matter under subclass 736 wherein at least a part of the circuit
    board structure is composed of one or more specific substances.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    751,    for a printed circuit not associated with a module and having a
    particular material.

    757,    for printed circuit board housing with a particular material.

    771,    for printed circuit board not contained in a module with a mounting
    pad and having a particular material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 256 for
    particular material of printed circuit board without diverse electrical
    components.


CLS 361/740
TXT With locking means or device:
    Subject matter under subclass 736 wherein the module is fastened or made
    secure to a support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    726,    for cabinet-type housing with locking means or device.

    732,    for plural modules having a lock or interlock.

    747,    for single module with locking means or device.

    759,    for printed circuit board not contained in module with housing or
    chassis and having lock or interlock.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclasses 85+ for drawer locks and subclasses 95+ for locks
    on sliding doors.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 215 for a plurality of
    components having individual locks or latches actuated by a single selector
    or by a group of remote operators, subclasses 216+ for a gang-bar type lock
    or latch for plural movable component, and subclass 222 for locks or
    latches for a component.


CLS 361/741
TXT Guiding means:
    Subject matter under subclass 736 wherein a support for the circuit boards
    contain parts that direct a motion of the circuit board.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    756,    for printed circuits not contained in modules and having guiding
    means.

    802,    for plural printed circuit boards not contained in module with
    housing or chassis and having specific guiding means.


CLS 361/742
TXT With spacer:
    Subject matter under subclass 736 wherein a surface or barrier (used to
    maintain circuit boards a uniform distance from each other) is designed
    specifically for use with the printed circuit boards.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    758,    for spacer with circuit boards not contained in module.

    770,    for spacer with circuit board not contained in module and having a
    mounting pad.

    804,    for spacer details with plural printed circuit boards not contained
    in module.


CLS 361/743
TXT Solder connection:
    Subject matter under subclass 736 wherein at least part of the printed
    circuit board's component(s) is interconnected with a readily meltable
    metal or alloy that produces a bond at a junction of two metal surfaces.


CLS 361/744
TXT Cordwood type:
    Subject matter under subclass 736 wherein diverse discrete components are
    mounted between and perpendicular to two parallel printed circuit boards to
    which their terminals are attached.


CLS 361/745
TXT Welded connection:
    Subject matter under subclass 744 wherein at least one electrical
    component's metal lead is (a) consolidated by an application of heat to
    another electrical component's metal lead or (b) consolidated by an
    application of heat to a metal support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 50+ for electric welding, per se.


CLS 361/746
TXT With specific dielectric material or layer:
    Subject matter under subclass 728 wherein the module  contains a particular
    insulating medium which intervenes between two conductors and permits
    electrostatic attraction and repulsion to take place across the conductors.

    SEARCH THIS, CLASS SUBCLASS:

    301+,   for dielectric capacitors, per se.

    750,    for dielectric material or layer on flexible printed circuit board
    not contained in module.

    762,    for dielectric material or layer with printed circuit board not
    contained in module having housing or chassis.

    795,    for plural contiguous printed circuit boards not contained in
    module having separate layers of dielectric material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, appropriate subclass for fluent dielectric, per se.


CLS 361/747
TXT With locking means or device:
    Subject matter under subclass 728 wherein the module is fastened or made
    secure to a support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    726,    for cabinet-type housing with locking means or device.

    732,    for modules having lock or interlock.

    740,    for printed circuits contained in module with lock or locking
    device.

    759,    for printed circuit board not contained in module with housing or
    chassis and having lock or interlock.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclasses 85+ for drawer locks and subclasses 95+ for locks
    on sliding doors.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 215 for a plurality of
    components having individual locks or latches actuated by a single selector
    or by a group of remote operators, subclasses 216+ for a gang-bar type lock
    or latch for plural movable components, and subclass 222 for locks or
    latches for a component.


CLS 361/748
TXT Printed circuit board:
    Subject matter under subclass 679 comprising an insulating panel wherein
    conductors are applied thereto by coating, laminating, or bonding in such a
    manner that the conductors are permanently attached to the panel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    720+,   for printed circuit board utilized to support diverse electrical
    components in an interconnected relationship and having heat conduction
    cooling means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 250+ for
    printed circuit board, per se, and subclass 260 for printed circuit board
    having one component.


CLS 361/749
TXT Flexible board:
    Subject matter under subclass 748 wherein the printed circuit board is
    constructed of an elastic material.


CLS 361/750
TXT With specific dielectric material or layer:
    Subject matter under subclass 749 wherein the flexible printed circuit
    board contains a particular insulating medium which intervenes between two
    conductors and permits electrostatic attraction and repulsion to take place
    across the conductors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301+,   for dielectric capacitor, per se.

    746,    for dielectric material or layer contained in module.

    762,    for dielectric material or layer with printed circuit board not
    contained in module having housing or chassis.

    795,    for plural contiguous printed circuit boards not contained in
    module having separate layers of dielectric material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, appropriate subclass for fluent dielectric, per se.


CLS 361/751
TXT With particular conductive material or coating:
    Subject matter under subclass 749 wherein at least a part of the flexible
    circuit board structure contains (a) one or more specific electrical
    transmitting substances or (b) one or more specific electrical transmitting
    films or coatings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    739,    for printed circuits in modules with particular material.

    757,    for printed circuit board not contained in module with housing or
    chassis and having a particular material.

    771,    for printed circuit board with a mounting pad and having a
    particular material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 256 for
    particular material of printed circuit board without diverse electrical
    components.


CLS 361/752
TXT With housing or chassis:
    Subject matter under subclass 748 wherein a casing, enclosure, or sheet
    metal box supporting the printed circuit board has structural details of
    casing, enclosure, or sheet metal box.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    736,    for modular housing units which include printed circuit boards
    having structural details of casing, housing, or chassis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 50+ for boxes
    and housings limited by structure to electrical use, but having no
    characteristic limiting them to particular electrical equipment.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 678+ for details of active solid-state devices combined with
    housing.


CLS 361/753
TXT Specific chassis or ground:
    Subject matter under subclass 752 comprising a particular electrical
    connection from the printed circuit board to a metal supporting structure.


CLS 361/754
TXT With ejector means:
    Subject matter under subclass 752 comprising a device or mechanism utilized
    to remove the printed circuit board from the housing or chassis.


CLS 361/755
TXT Rotatable:
    Subject matter under subclass 752 wherein a member of the housing or
    chassis turns about an axis or center.


CLS 361/756
TXT Guiding means:
    Subject matter under subclass 752 wherein the printed circuit board housing
    or chassis contains parts that direct the motion of the printed circuit
    board, away or to the housing or chassis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    741,    for module with printed circuits and having guiding means.

    802,    for plural printed circuit boards with housing or chassis and
    having specific guiding means.


CLS 361/757
TXT With particular material:
    Subject matter under subclass 752 wherein at least a part of the printed
    circuit board housing or chassis is composed of one or more specific
    substances.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    739,    for printed circuits in modules with particular material.

    751,    for flexible printed circuit board not contained in module and
    having a particular material or coating.

    771,    for printed circuit board not contained in a module with a mounting
    pad and having a particular material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 256 for
    particular material of printed circuit board without diverse electrical
    components.


CLS 361/758
TXT With spacer:
    Subject matter under subclass 752 wherein a surface or barrier (that
    maintain circuit boards a uniform distance from each other) is designed
    specifically for use with the printed circuit board.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    742,    for spacer with circuit boards contained in module.

    770,    for spacer with circuit board not contained in module and having a
    mounting pad.

    804,    for spacer details with plural printed circuit boards.


CLS 361/759
TXT With lock or interlock:
    Subject matter under subclass 752 wherein the printed circuit board is
    fastened or made secure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    726,    for cabinet-type housing with locking means or device.

    732,    for modules with lock or interlock.

    740,    for printed circuit boards contained in a module having locking
    means or device.

    747,    for single module with locking means or device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclasses 85+ for drawer locks and subclasses 95+ for locks
    on sliding doors.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 215 for a plurality of
    components having individual locks or latches actuated by a single selector
    or by a group of remote operators, subclasses 216+ for a gang-bar type lock
    or latch for plural movable components, and subclass 222 for locks or
    latches for a component.


CLS 361/760
TXT Connection of components to board:
    Subject matter under subclass 748 wherein a specific structure is provided
    to facilitate interconnecting diverse components to the printed circuit
    board.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    807+,   for structure facilitating connection of components to a support
    other than a printed circuit board.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 832+ for processes including mounting of
    an electrical device to a printed circuit  board.


CLS 361/761
TXT Component within printed circuit board:
    Subject matter under subclass 760 comprising a slot or aperture within the
    printed circuit board for receiving the component.


CLS 361/762
TXT With specific dielectric material or layer:
    Subject matter under subclass 761 wherein the printed circuit board
    contains a particular insulating medium which intervenes between two
    conductors and permits electrostatic attraction and repulsion to take place
    across it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301+,   for dielectric capacitors, per se.

    746,    for dielectric material obtained in module.

    750,    for dielectric material on flexible printed circuit board not
    contained in module.

    795,    for plural contiguous printed circuit boards not contained in
    module having separate layers of dielectric material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, appropriate subclass for fluent dielectric, per se.


CLS 361/763
TXT Capacitor and electrical component:
    Subject matter under subclass 761 comprising an electrical energy storage
    device and a resistor, inductor, diode, or semiconductor device within the
    printed circuit board.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    271+,   for capacitor, per se.

    738,    for resistor and capacitor on printed circuit board with module.

    766,    for capacitor and resistor coated on printed circuit board.

    782,    for passive component in conjunction with another electric
    component on printed circuit board not in module.

    821,    for electronic system or device support/housing having at least one
    capacitor and at least one inductor.

    830,    for plurality of capacitors on a frame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 260 for printed
    circuit with a capacitor or an electrical component.


CLS 361/764
TXT Integrated circuit:
    Subject matter under subclass 761 comprising an electrical network composed
    of two or more circuit elements inextricably bound on a single
    semiconductor substrate within the printed circuit board having no
    structural details to the electrical network.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    718,    for integrated circuit having heat conduction as cooling means with
    no structural details to integrated circuit.

    783,    for semiconductive device connected to printed circuit board with
    no structural details to semiconductive device.

    820,    for electronic system or device support/housing having at least one
    semiconductor device as a component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 678+ for semiconductor device wherein (a) the housing is for an
    active solid-state device, details of which are positively recited in the
    claims, or (b) wherein the recited housing is necessary to make a usable
    active solid-state device.


CLS 361/765
TXT By direct coating of components on board:
    Subject matter under subclass 760 wherein diverse electrical components are
    directly coated, deposited, or screened on the board.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 9+ for components coated on a base wherein the device has a
    layer of a thickness less than two microns in the conduction path or the
    device is specified to be a thin film device.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 567 for devices including a thin layer of conductive or
    semiconductive material of atomic dimensions which act as a nonlinear
    element.


CLS 361/766
TXT Capacitor and resistor:
    Subject matter under subclass 765 comprising (a) at least an electrical
    energy storage device and (b) an electrical component with specified
    opposition to a flow of electrical current are coated on the printed
    circuit board.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    271+,   for capacitor, per se.

    738,    for capacitor and resistor on printed circuit board in a module.

    766,    for capacitor and electrical component on printed circuit board not
    in module.

    782,    for passive component in conjunction with another electrical
    component on printed circuit board not in module.

    821,    for electronic system or device support/housing having at least one
    capacitor and at least one inductor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 260 for printed
    circuit with a capacitor or an electrical component.


CLS 361/767
TXT With mounting pad:
    Subject matter under subclass 752 wherein an intermediate support fixed to
    the printed circuit is utilized as a carrier or pad for electrical
    components to facilitate connection thereof to the printed circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    808,    for mounting pad structure not utilized with a printed circuit
    board.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 52.1+ for
    mounting pad structure, per se.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 158 for mounting
    structure utilized in conjunction with measuring and testing devices having
    details of measuring and testing devices.


CLS 361/768
TXT Having leadless component:
    Subject matter under subclass 767 wherein the mounting pad provides a
    mounting surface for electrical carriers or substrates without connection
    wires.


CLS 361/769
TXT Having spring member:
    Subject matter under subclass 767 wherein (a) an elastic or resilient
    device or mechanism assures good electrical contact with a conductor and a
    component or (b) an elastic or resilient device or mechanism serves as a
    stop for limiting relative movement between separable portions of a
    connector structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    787,    for plural circuit board housing having spring connection member.


CLS 361/770
TXT Having spacer:
    Subject matter under subclass 767 wherein a surface or barrier, that
    maintain printed circuit boards in a uniform distance from each other, is
    designed specifically for use with the printed circuit boards.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    742,    for spacer with circuit boards contained in module.

    758,    for spacer with circuit board not contained in module and having
    housing or chassis.

    804,    for spacer details with plural printed circuit boards.


CLS 361/771
TXT With particular material:
    Subject matter under subclass 767 wherein at least a part of the printed
    circuit board housing is composed of one or more specific substances.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    739,    for printed circuits contained in modules with particular material.

    751,    for flexible printed circuit board not contained in module and
    having a particular material or coating.

    757,    for printed circuit board not contained in module with housing or
    chassis and having a particular material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 256 for
    particular material of printed circuit board without diverse electrical
    components.


CLS 361/772
TXT With specific lead configuration:
    Subject matter under subclass 760 wherein a particular connection wire
    structure is provided for facilitating connection between the components
    and the printed circuit board.


CLS 361/773
TXT Shaped lead on components:
    Subject matter under subclass 772 wherein the connection wire is located on
    the components.


CLS 361/774
TXT Shaped lead on board:
    Subject matter under subclass 772 wherein the connection wire is located on
    the printed circuit board.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    809,    for structure that facilitates connection of plural components not
    located on a printed circuit board.


CLS 361/775
TXT Busbar:
    Subject matter under subclass 772 wherein the connection wire is a single
    conductive member supplying a plurality of spaced electrical components.


CLS 361/776
TXT Flexible connecting lead:
    Subject matter under subclass 772 wherein the connection wire structure
    comprises a flexible or resilient electrical conductor.


CLS 361/777
TXT By specific pattern on board:
    Subject matter under subclass 760 wherein the lead structure provided for
    facilitating connection comprises a specific geometric arrangement of
    printed conductors on the printed circuit board.


CLS 361/778
TXT Cross-connected:
    Subject matter under subclass 777 wherein a specific geometric arrangement
    comprises an array of crossing conductors disposed of within a same plane.


CLS 361/779
TXT With specific connection material:
    Subject matter under subclass 777 wherein the arrangement of conductors
    comprises a material or substance in or on a conductor to facilitate
    connection of the components therefor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    803,    for plural printed circuit boards with interconnection details.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 734+ for active solid-state devices (e.g., transistors,
    integrated circuit with significant contact structure or material, etc.).

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclass for electrical
    connectors, per se.


CLS 361/780
TXT Different voltage layers:
    Subject matter under subclass 760 wherein the printed circuit board
    contains layers or strips having unequal electric potentials.


CLS 361/781
TXT With switch:
    Subject matter under subclass 760 wherein the printed circuit board
    contains at least a mechanical or electrical device that completes or
    breaks the path of current or sends it over a different path as one of its
    electrical components.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses
    for switches and circuit breakers, per se.


CLS 361/782
TXT Having passive component:
    Subject matter under subclass 760 wherein the printed circuit board
    contains at least a capacitor, inductor, or resistor as one of its
    electrical components.

    (1)     Note.  Printed circuit board must also contain another electrical
    component in conjunction with a passive component to be classified in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    738,    for resistor and capacitor on printed circuit board with module.

    763,    for capacitor and electrical component within printed circuit board
    not with module.

    766,    for capacitor and resistor coated on printed circuit board.

    830,    for plurality of capacitors on a frame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 260 for printed
    circuit with one electrical component.


CLS 361/783
TXT Having semiconductive device:
    Subject matter under subclass 760 wherein a component connected to the
    printed circuit board is an active solid state device having no structural
    details to an active solid state device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    717+,   for an active solid state device with support or housing having
    thermal conduction cooling means with no structural details to an active
    solid state device.

    764,    for integrated circuit within printed circuit board with no cooling
    means and having no structural details to active solid state device.

    820,    for electronic system or device support/housing and having at least
    one semiconductor device as a component with no structural details to an
    active solid state device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 678+ for semiconductor device wherein (a) the housing is for an
    active solid-state device, details of which are positively recited in the
    claims, or (b) wherein the recited housing is necessary to make a usable
    active solid-state device.


CLS 361/784
TXT Plural:
    Subject matter under subclass 748 wherein two or more printed circuit
    boards are utilized to support a plurality of diverse electrical components
    in an interconnected relationship.


CLS 361/785
TXT With separable connector or socket means:
    Subject matter under 784 wherein each printed circuit board can be
    distinctly detached from the mount or support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 43+ for connector with selectable
    circuits and subclasses 55+ for connector with preformed panel circuit
    arrangement.


CLS 361/786
TXT Having key connection:
    Subject matter under subclass 785 comprising a mechanical arrangement of
    guide pins, sockets, contacts, slots, inserts, or grooves in the mount or
    support which allows the connector to be lined up without a danger of
    making a wrong connection.


CLS 361/787
TXT Having spring member:
    Subject matter under subclass 785 wherein (a) an elastic or resilient
    device or mechanism assures good electrical contact with a conductor and a
    component or (b) an elastic or resilient device or mechanism serves as a
    stop for limiting relative movement between separable portions of the
    connector structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    769,    for single printed circuit board with mounting pad and having
    spring connection member.


CLS 361/788
TXT Having backplane connection:
    Subject matter under subclass 785 wherein the printed circuit boards are
    connected to an equipment's rear panel.


CLS 361/789
TXT Having flexible connector:
    Subject matter under subclass 785 wherein the separable connector's
    contact, socket, terminal, or groove comprises an elastic or resilient
    electrical conductor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    776,    for flexible connecting lead on single printed circuit board with
    housing.


CLS 361/790
TXT Stacked:
    Subject matter under subclass 785 wherein the printed circuit boards are
    arranged one on top of another to formulate a pile.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    735,    for stacked modules with housing.


CLS 361/791
TXT Multiple contact pins:
    Subject matter under subclass 785 wherein the separable connectors comprise
    posts or pins arranged in arrays or rows.


CLS 361/792
TXT Plural contiguous boards:
    Subject matter under subclass 784 wherein two or more printed circuit
    boards have surfaces that are adjacent and in physical contact with each
    other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 250+ for
    printed circuit board, per se.


CLS 361/793
TXT Thick film component or material:
    Subject matter under subclass 792 wherein a conductive, resistive, or
    capacitive component, network, or layer is deposited on a substrate using a
    metallic or resistive coating which is more than five (5) micrometers in
    thickness.


CLS 361/794
TXT Power, voltage, or current layer:
    Subject matter under subclass 792 wherein a surface on or within the
    printed circuit board is used to supply electrical energy to electrical
    components mounted on or within the printed circuit board.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    601+,   for housing or mounting assemblies for electrical power
    distribution system and devices, per se.


CLS 361/795
TXT Plural dielectric layers:
    Subject matter under subclass 792 wherein the printed circuit boards
    contain two or more separate insulating mediums which intervene between two
    conductors and permit electrostatic attraction and repulsion to take place
    across them.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301+,   for dielectric capacitors, per se.

    746,    for dielectric material contained in module.

    750,    for dielectric material on flexible printed circuit board.

    762,    for dielectric layer on printed circuit board having component
    within printed circuit board combined with chassis or housing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, appropriate subclass for fluent dielectric, per se.


CLS 361/796
TXT With housing or chassis:
    Subject matter under subclass 784 wherein a casing, enclosure, or sheet
    metal box is provided to support a plurality of printed circuit boards.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    730,    for housings containing plural modules which may or may not
    comprise printed circuits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 41.1+ for frame structure designed to
    support plates or plate-like articles not specifically designated as
    printed circuits.


CLS 361/797
TXT Storage or file cabinet:
    Subject matter under subclass 796 wherein the housing or casing is used for
    a safekeeping or protection of the printed circuit boards.


CLS 361/798
TXT With ejector or extractor:
    Subject matter under subclass 796 wherein the housing or chassis is
    equipped with a mechanism that disengages the printed circuit boards from
    the housing or chassis.


CLS 361/799
TXT Grounding construction or detail:
    Subject matter under subclass 796 wherein the housing or chassis contains
    particular or specified circuitry, that connects to earth.


CLS 361/800
TXT With shielding structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 796 wherein the housing or chassis is
    provided: (a) With means for protecting at least part of the  devices  from
    external electric or magnetic fields, or (b) with means to protect one or
    more elements of the device from electric or magnetic fields generated in
    one or more other parts of a system, or (c) with protecting or screening
    means to prevent radiation of undesired electric or magnetic fields
    generated within systems.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    816,    for diverse electrical components housing and support with
    shielding, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 32+ for
    miscellaneous anti-inductive structures, particularly indented subclasses
    35+ for miscellaneous electrical shields and screen structures not
    elsewhere classifiable.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 91 for
    anti-induction or coupling to other systems with magnetic or electrostatic
    field control (e.g., shielding).

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclass 85 for
    gaseous tube systems with electromagnetic wave radiation prevention or
    shielding means.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 68 for amplifiers with shielding means.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 67 for oscillators combined with
    electromagnetic or electrostatic shield means.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 12 for transmission
    line inductive or radiation interference systems.

    334,    Tuners, subclass 85 for radio tuners with shielding means.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 84 for induction devices with electric
    or magnetic shielding means.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 64 for electrical resistors with
    electrical shielding means.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 841+ for antenna
    structure with electric shielding means.

    348,    Television, subclasses 818+ for a cathode-ray tube with protective
    means.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclass 497 for connector including tape
    cable with shield and subclasses 607+ for connector having or providing
    inductive or capacitive shield.


CLS 361/801
TXT Specific latching or retaining device:

    Subject matter under subclass 796 wherein the chassis or housing comprises
    a particular fastener or holding device that secures the printed circuit
    boards to the chassis or housing.

    (1)     Note.  Locks are considered to be latches or retaining devices for
    this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    726,    for cabinet-type housing with locking means or device.

    732,    for plural modules having lock or interlock.

    747,    for single module with locking means or device.

    759,    for printed circuit board with housing or chassis and having lock
    or interlock.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, subclasses 85+ for drawer locks and subclasses 95+ for locks
    on sliding doors.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 215 for a plurality of
    components having individual locks or latches actuated by a single selector
    or by a group of remote operators, subclasses 216+ for a gang-bar type look
    or latch for plural movable component actuated by another component, and
    subclass 222 for locks or latches for a component.


CLS 361/802
TXT Specific alignment or guide means:
    Subject matter under subclass 796 wherein the housing or chassis contain
    parts that (a) direct the motion of the printed circuit boards or (b) aid
    in the proper positioning of the printed circuit boards.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    741,    for module with printed circuit and having guiding means.

    756,    for printed circuits not contained in modules and having guiding
    means.


CLS 361/803
TXT Interconnection details:
    Subject matter under subclass 784 wherein a conductive path or connecting
    line between the printed circuit boards has specific details.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    778,    for single printed circuit board with housing or chassis and having
    cross-connect arrangement.

    779,    for single printed circuit board with housing or chassis and having
    a specific connection material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclass for electrical
    connectors, per se.


CLS 361/804
TXT Spacer details:
    Subject matter under subclass 784 wherein surfaces or barriers used to
    maintain the printed circuit boards in a uniform distance from each other
    are described thoroughly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    742,    for spacer with circuit boards contained in a module.

    758,    for circuit boards not contained in a module with housing or
    chassis and having a spacer.

    770,    for spacer with circuit board not contained in module and having
    mounting pad.


CLS 361/805
TXT Matrix assembly:
    Subject matter under subclass 679 comprising a plurality of diverse
    electrical components connected by crossed gratings and located at
    intersections of conductors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 107+ for electromagnetically operated selector
    devices.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.79+ for selective
    matrix communication system.


CLS 361/806
TXT Diode:
    Subject matter under subclass 805 wherein the matrix assembly contains a
    plurality of electrical devices that will conduct electricity much more
    easily in one direction than in the other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 40 through 43 for diodes, per se.


CLS 361/807
TXT Component mounting or support means:
    Subject matter under subclass 679 wherein an upholding structure or chassis
    is utilized to hold a plurality of diverse electrical components in an
    interconnected relationship.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    748+,   for component mounting means wherein the support is a printed
    circuit board.


CLS 361/808
TXT Mounting pad:
    Subject matter under subclass 807 wherein an intermediate support connected
    to the support or mount is utilized as a carrier for electrical components.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    767+,   for mounting pad structure specifically for use with a printed
    circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 52.1+ for
    mounting pad, per se.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 158 for mounting
    structure utilized in conjunction with measuring and testing devices.


CLS 361/809
TXT With discrete structure or support:
    Subject matter under subclass 807 wherein means are provided on the chassis
    or support to facilitate connection of the components thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    774,    for component lead structure on a printed circuit board.


CLS 361/810
TXT Plural mounting or support:
    Subject matter under subclass 807 wherein two or more supporting means or
    chassis means are provided to support diverse electrical components.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    784+,   for plural printed circuit boards.


CLS 361/811
TXT With passive components:
    Subject matter under subclass 807 wherein support or chassis is utilized to
    mount resistors, capacitors, or inductors in an interconnected relationship.


CLS 361/812
TXT With particular insulation:
    Subject matter under subclass 807 wherein a support or chassis is utilized
    to mount a plurality of diverse electrical components in an interconnected
    relationship and having details of a nonconductive material that prevents
    the leakage of electricity from a conductor or protects against accidental
    contact.


CLS 361/813
TXT Lead frame:
    Subject matter under subclass 679 wherein a metal skeletal structure is
    utilized to support a plurality of diverse electrical components, portions
    of a metal skeletal structure being removed to provide connecting paths.

    (1)     Note.  Lead frame in Class 257 is defined as a semiconductor device
    combined with housing wherein the contact is part of a network of leads
    suspended from a common lead.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    723,    for electronic system housing or support with thermal conductive
    cooling and having a lead frame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 52.4 for lead
    frame devices with housing means but having no claimed characteristics
    limiting the same to particular  features of electrical equipment
    classifiable in other main classes.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 666+ for lead frame.  See (1) Note, above.


CLS 361/814
TXT Radio type:
    Subject matter under subclass 679 comprising communication type devices
    having no significant art limitations and such devices in combination with
    diverse pieces of electrical apparatus wherein the combination is not
    provided for in any other class or in other subclasses of this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 7.1+ for cabinets or
    enclosures specially designed to house radios, phonograph instruments, or
    records having no electrical components or devices.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 187 for miscellaneous oscillator structures.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 347+ for housings, cabinets, or
    chassis combined with specific functional details or structure of a
    receiver.


CLS 361/815
TXT Tube mounting:
    Subject matter under subclass 814 wherein a support or chassis means is
    structurally connected  to a tube socket.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclass for tube sockets, per
    se.


CLS 361/816
TXT Shielding:
    Subject matter under subclass 679 wherein the electronic systems and
    devices are provided: (a) With means for protecting at least part of the
    devices from external electric or magnetic fields; (b) with means to
    protect one or more elements of the device from electric or magnetic fields
    generated in one or more other parts of the system; or (c) with protecting
    or screening means to prevent radiation of undesired electric or magnetic
    fields generated within the system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    800,    for plural printed circuit boards with chassis or housing combined
    with shielding structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 32+ for
    miscellaneous anti-inductive structures, particularly indented subclasses
    35+ for miscellaneous electrical shields and screen structures not
    elsewhere classifiable.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 515.1 for radiant energy shielding means
    not elsewhere provided for.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 91 for
    anti-induction or coupling to other systems with magnetic or electrostatic
    field control (e.g., shielding).

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 326+ for electric
    lamp and discharge devices having electrode and shield structures.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclass 85 for
    gaseous tube systems with electromagnetic wave radiation prevention or
    shielding means.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 68 for amplifiers with shielding means.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 67 for oscillators combined with
    electromagnetic or electrostatic shield means.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 12 for transmission
    line inductive or radiation interference systems.

    334,    Tuners, subclass 85 for radio tuners with shielding means.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 84 for induction devices with electric
    or magnetic shield means.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 64 for electrical resistors with
    electrical shield means.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 841+ for antenna
    structure with electric shield means.

    348,    Television, subclass 842 for a video display with a light shield.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclass 497 for connector including tape
    cable with shield and subclasses 607+ for connector having or providing
    inductive or capacitive shield.


CLS 361/817
TXT For electronic tube:
    Subject matter under subclass 816 wherein electric or magnetic field
    shielding or screening means is provided for a hermetically sealed glass or
    metal envelope in which conduction of electrons takes place through a
    vacuum or gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 326+ for electric
    lamp and discharge devices having electrode and shield structures.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclass 85 for
    electric lamp and discharge devices systems having shielding means for part
    of the system.


CLS 361/818
TXT EMI:
    Subject matter under subclass 816 wherein electronic systems and devices
    are provided with shielding or screening means to prevent a disturbance
    caused by electromagnetic waves that can impair the operation of electrical
    or electronic equipment.

    (1)     The terms "radio interference," "radio-frequency interference,"
    "noise," "emi," and "rfi" have been employed at various times in the same
    context.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 32+ for
    miscellaneous anti-inductive structures, particularly indented subclasses
    35+ for miscellaneous electrical shields and screen structures not
    elsewhere classifiable.


CLS 361/819
TXT For relay:
    Subject matter under subclass 679 comprising a support or housing for an
    electromechanical device in which contacts are opened or closed by
    variations in conditions of one electric circuit and thereby affect
    operation of other devices in the same or other electric circuits.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142+,   for relay control circuit including housing.

    160+,   for relay control circuits, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 2+ for relays, per se.


CLS 361/820
TXT For semiconductor device:
    Subject matter under subclass 679 comprising a support or housing for at
    least an active solid state device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    717+,   for active solid state devices using thermal conduction as a
    cooling means.

    737,    for IC cards in module with no cooling means.

    764,    for integrated circuit connected to printed circuit board with no
    cooling means.

    783,    for semiconductor device with mounting pad and having no cooling
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 678+ for housing combined with semiconductor device wherein (a)
    the housing is for an active solid-state device, details of which are
    positively recited in the claims or (b) wherein the recited housing is
    necessary to make a usable active solid-state device.


CLS 361/821
TXT For capacitor and inductor:
    Subject matter under subclass 679 comprising a support or housing for at
    least a device consisting essentially of two conducting surfaces separated
    by an insulating material or dielectric such as air, paper, mica, glass,
    plastic film, or oil, and at least one retardation coil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270,    for transformers and inductor with capacitor element.

    271+,   for capacitor, per se.

    738,    for resistor and capacitor on printed circuit board with module.

    763,    for capacitor and electrical component on printed circuit board not
    in module.

    766,    for capacitor and electrical component coated on printed circuit
    board.

    782,    for passive component in conjunction with another electrical
    component on printed circuit board not in module.

    814,    for plurality of capacitors on a frame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 260 for printed
    circuit with a capacitor or an inductor.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclass for inductor, per se.


CLS 361/822
TXT Contact banks:
    Subject matter under subclass 600 comprising arrays or groupings of
    electrical junction points.

    (1)     Note.  The contacts are commonly used for switching devices, wire
    wrapping, etc.  Diverse electrical components must be included for
    classification in this class (361).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, appropriate subclass for
    plural conductors.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclass for connectors having
    plural contacts.


CLS 361/823
TXT Terminal block:
    Subject matter under subclass 600 comprising an insulating base or slab
    equipped with one or more electrical connection points for the purpose of
    making electrical connections thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, appropriate subclass for
    plural conductors.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclass for connectors having
    plural contacts.


CLS 361/824
TXT With protective device or unit:
    Subject matter under subclass 823 wherein terminal blocks contain units or
    devices that safeguard against excessive voltage or current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    630,    for distribution or control panel boards with fuses.

    646,    for panel mounted fuses which are mounted in an electric service or
    distribution box.

    833+,   for fuse blocks of unit construction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclass 4 for fuse structure, per se.


CLS 361/825
TXT Support brackets:
    Subject matter under subclass 600 comprising a fixture projecting from a
    wall or column used for supporting the electrical components or devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclass for supports, per se.


CLS 361/826
TXT Wire distribution (e.g., harness, rack):
    Subject matter under subclass 600 wherein the housings, mounting
    assemblies, or diverse electrical components are combined with wire
    apportion or distribution means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, appropriate subclass for
    cable supports, cable supports having one electrical component or cable
    supports having plural same electrical component.


CLS 361/827
TXT With interconnecting cable:
    Subject matter under subclass 826 wherein a conductive path between two or
    more terminals is an assembly of insulated conductors in a compact form
    covered by a flexible waterproof protective covering.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 102 for cable,
    per se.


CLS 361/828
TXT With switchboard or switch:
    Subject matter under subclass 826 wherein the harness or rack supports a
    device for making, breaking, or changing connections in an electrical
    circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    605+,   for electrical switchgear in power distribution systems and devices.

    628+,   for switches in distribution power boards.

    832,    for switchboard or switch in a frame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclass for
    switches, per se.


CLS 361/829
TXT Frame:
    Subject matter under subclass 600 wherein the electrical components are
    supported by skeletal-type beams forming an open frame or support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclass for supporting frames, per se.


CLS 361/830
TXT With plurality of capacitors:
    Subject matter under subclass 829 wherein the frame supports two or more
    capacitors or condensers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    271+,   for capacitors, per se.

    738,    for capacitor and resistor on printed circuit.

    763,    for capacitor and electrical component on printed circuit board not
    in module.

    782,    for passive component in conjunction with another electrical
    component on printed circuit board not in module.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 260 for printed
    circuit with a capacitor or an electrical component.


CLS 361/831
TXT With cooling means:
    Subject matter under subclass 829 wherein the frame comprises a means for
    dissipating heat from the frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    676,    for electrical power systems with cooling means.

    688+,   for electronic systems and devices with cooling means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclass for cooling means, per se.


CLS 361/832
TXT With switchboard or switch:
    Subject matter under subclass 829 wherein the frame supports a device for
    making, breaking, or changing connections in an electrical circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    605+,   for electrical switchgear in power distribution systems and devices.

    628+,   for switches in distribution power boards.

    828,    for switchboard or switches with wire distribution  means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclass for
    switches, per se.


CLS 361/833
TXT Fuse block:
    Subject matter under subclass 600 wherein an insulating base or slab houses
    a protective device, usually a short piece of wire but sometimes a chemical
    compound which melts and breaks a circuit when a current exceeds a rated
    value.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    630,    for panel boards with fuses.

    835,    for fuses on pullout devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    appropriate subclass for fuses, per se.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclass for fuse combined with
    connector arrangements.


CLS 361/834
TXT Plural:
    Subject matter under subclass 833 wherein two or more fuse blocks are
    employed.


CLS 361/835
TXT Fuse pullout device:
    Subject matter under subclass 600 comprising insertion and removal devices
    for mounting a current protective device or component in a housing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    833+,   for fuse blocks of unit construction.


CLS 361/836
TXT For transformer:
    Subject matter under subclass 600 wherein the housing or mounting assembly
    is combined with an electrical device which changes voltage in direct
    proportion to a ratio of the number of turns of its primary and secondary
    windings.

    (1)     Note.  The electrical housing or mounting assembly may also contain
    other electrical components.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    603,    for power distribution station (substation) housings or mounting
    assemblies combined with transformer.

    620,    for electrical switchgear housing or mounting assembly with
    transformer.

    623,    for electrical power distribution systems housing and mounting
    assemblies with distribution or control unit combined with a transformer.

    663,    for electrical service meter housing or mounting assembly with
    transformer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for transformers, per se.


CLS 361/837
TXT For switch or fuse:
    Subject matter under subclass 600 wherein the housing or mounting assembly
    is combined with an electrical component or device and (a) a mechanical or
    electrical device that completes or breaks a path of current or sends
    current over a different path or (b) a protective device, usually a short
    piece of wire but sometimes a chemical compound, which melts and breaks a
    circuit when a current exceeds a rated value.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    605+,   for electrical switchgear in power distribution systems and devices.

    628+,   for switches in distribution power boards.

    630,    for panel boards with fuses.

    632,    for switchboard or switch in a frame.

    828,    for switchboard or switches with wire distribution means.

    833+,   for fuse blocks of unit construction.

    835,    for fuses on pullout devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 52.1+ for boxes
    or housing containing a switch or fuse and having no structural details of
    a switch or fuse.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclass for
    switches, per se.

    337,    Electricity: Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    appropriate subclass for fuses, per se.


CLS 362/
TTL ILLUMINATION

CLS 362/
TXT CONTENTS


    I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    II.     BASIC SUBJECT MATTER OF THE CLASS

    III.    SCOPE OF THE CLASS

    IV.     GLOSSARY

    V.      RELATIONSHIP WITH OTHER CLASSES

    VI.     INDEX TO CLASSES

    I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    This class is the residual locus of means and processes for casting visible
    radiant energy in at least one direction to render objects in that
    direction visible.

    II.     BASIC SUBJECT MATTER OF THE CLASS

    The basic subject matter of the class is comprised of:

    A.      The combination of a source of visible radiant energy and means to
    modify the distribution or composition of the radiant energy emanating from
    the source.

    B.      Methods utilizing the combination of A., above, to cast light in at
    least one direction to render objects in that direction visible.

    III.    SCOPE OF THE CLASS

    In addition to the basic subject matter of the class, this class also
    provides for:

    A.      Subcombinations of the basic subject matter of the class not
    provided for elsewhere comprising:

    (1)     means to modify the distribution of composition of light from
    sources other than the heavenly bodies;

    (2)     means to support a source of visible radiant energy;

    (3)     means to support the modifying means of item (1), above, and

    (4)     combinations of (1), (2) and/or (3) above.

    B.      Combinations of the basic subject matter of the class and subject
    matter classified elsewhere insofar as the combination is not provided for
    elsewhere.

    C.      Accessories to the basic subject matter of the class limited in
    their intended use to the basic subject matter of the class.

    IV.     GLOSSARY

    The following definitions of terms occurring frequently in the titles and
    definitions of this class are intended only to be used as aids in
    determining placement of subject matter within this class and do not
    necessarily encompass all usages of the terms in the art.  Because the
    following definitions are generalized, certain subclass definitions may
    include definitions of the listed terms which deviate somewhat from the
    definitions given below.  In such cases, the subclass definition is
    controlling.  The use of ambiguous or equivocal art terms in the titles and
    definitions of this class has been avoided wherever possible.  For the
    interpretation of such terms for classification purposes, see the notes to
    the definitions of "Modifier".

    FILTER

    A type of transparent or translucent selected wavelength modifier which
    absorbs light of at least one wavelength (i.e., color) and transmits light
    of another wavelength.

    ILLUMINATING MEANS

    Basic subject matter of the class or subcombinations thereof.

    LIGHT SOURCE

    An element (e.g., filament) or material (e.g., neon) which converts energy
    into visible radiant energy and/or the essential container of such an
    element or material, i.e., a light source envelope including the envelope
    base (e.g., light bulb, fluorescent tube).  Unless otherwise specified a
    light source is assumed to be a point source.  For purposes of
    classification within this class, nominal recitations such as "light unit",
    "lamp", "headlight", etc., are assumed to denote only a light source.

    MODIFIER

    A recited element or combination of elements whose proximate function in
    the claimed combination is, according to the claim or the claimed
    disclosure, to alter the distribution or composition of light emitted from
    a light source by reflecting, refracting, or partially or completely
    absorbing the light.



    (1)     Note.  Certain terms such as "lens", "shield", "screen", etc., are
    used in the art in some instances to denote modifiers and in other
    instances to denote structure whose proximate function is other than to
    modify light. For example, the term "lens" is used in some instances to
    denote means whose proximate function is to refract light and in other
    instances to denote merely a transparent window in a light housing whose
    proximate function is to protect the light source.  Whether or not a means
    recited in a claim in such ambiguous terms is to be considered a modifier
    for placement within this class must be determined by the proximate
    function (according to the claim or the claimed disclosure) of the means in
    the claimed combination.

    (2)     Note.  Certain terms such as "shade", "bowl", etc., are used in the
    art in some instances to denote recited modifiers which, according to the
    claim or claimed disclosure, function to modify light in two or more ways
    provided for separately in this class. A recited "bowl", for example, may,
    according to the claim or claimed disclosure, function in the claimed
    combination to diffuse light by internal scattering within the material of
    which the bowl is made (viz., translucent bowls) and reflect light from one
    of its surfaces.  Such a modifier is classifiable in the first-occurring
    subclass providing for modifiers which perform at least one of its
    modifying functions.

    REFLECTOR

    A light modifying device having a surface which redirects incident light
    back into the medium from which it came.  Reflectors are more commonly
    opaque but may be transparent.  Light incident on the redirecting surface
    of a transparent reflector may arrive from the transparent material of the
    reflector itself in which case it is redirected back into the transparent
    material of the reflector, or it may arrive at the redirecting surface from
    some other material (e.g., air) in which case it is redirected back into
    the other material.  Whether a recited transparent modifier is a reflector
    or some other type of modifier or both depends, for purposes of
    classification within this class, on its proximate function according to
    the claim or claimed disclosure.

    REFRACTOR

    A light modifier whose proximate function is to redirect light comprising a
    light previous material having a pair of opposed surfaces at least one of
    which is, at least in part, so angularly related to the other surface that
    the path of a light ray incident on one opposed surface of the material and
    the path of the same ray after it emerges from the material through the
    other opposed surface are not parallel.  A nominally recited "lens" is
    considered a refractor for purposes of classification within this class
    only if the structural and functional characteristics of a refractor can be
    imputed to it from the claim or claimed disclosure.  (See (1) Note to the
    definition of "Modifier", above).

    SELECTED WAVELENGTH MODIFIER

    A type of modifier which modifies light of at least one wavelength (color)
    differently from light of another wavelength.  Such modifiers may reflect,
    refract or filter light.

    TRANSLUCENT

    Having the property of certain light previous materials which results in
    the random internal scattering of light rays passing through the material.

    TRANSPARENT

    Having the property of certain light previous materials which permits light
    rays to pass through the material in straight lines. Transparent
    illuminating means may or may not be light modifiers.

    V.      RELATIONSHIP WITH OTHER CLASSES

    A.      Light Sources, Per Se:

    Light sources, per se, are not classifiable in this class (362).  Such
    devices are provided for in the following classes:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses
    for a fluid fuel distributor which may be disclosed as an illuminating
    burner.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 462.1+ for self-luminous articles.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, generally, for electric light
    sources, per se, of the nonconsumable electrode type.  See sections VII,
    VIII (subsection 1), IX and X in the class definition of Class 313 for the
    lines between Class 313 and this class (362).

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Consumable Electrodes, for
    consumable carbon arc-type light sources, per se.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, for an electric
    light source and circuitry for energizing the light source where the source
    of power (battery or generator) is not recited as an integral part of the
    claimed combination.

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, appropriate subclasses for laser-type
    light sources, per se.

    399,    Electrophotography, for illumination systems including light
    sources used in electrophotographic devices, specifically subclasses 9+ for
    diagnostics, subclasses 38+ for controls, subclasses 130+ for image
    formation, subclasses 168+ for charging, subclasses 177+ for exposure,
    subclasses 222+ for development, subclasses 297+ for transfer, subclasses
    320+ for fixing, subclasses 343+ for cleaning, and subclasses 361+ for
    document handling.

    431,    Combustion, for flame-type light sources, per se, especially
    subclasses 100+ for a mantle type illuminating burner; subclasses 288+ for
    a candle; and subclasses 298+ for a wick-type liquid fuel burner.



    B.      Light Modifiers:

    Generally, light modifying means, per se, used merely to modify light from
    light sources other than a heavenly body are classifiable in this class
    (362).  For exceptions, see the search notes of subclass 257.

    Light modifying means not limited in use to illumination are not
    classifiable in this class.  Such modifying means are provided for in the
    following classes:

    1.      Filter, i.e., means to modify the composition of light, not limited
    in use to illumination.

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    885+ for optical filters, subclasses 483+ for polarizers.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 38 for a mass
    transmissive of light through all layers and having an opaque border;
    subclass 415 for a stock material product in the form of a nonstructural
    laminate of glass or quartz next to epoxy; subclasses 426+ for a stock
    material product in the form of a nonstructural laminate embodying one or
    more layers of glass or quartz; and subclass 918 (a cross reference art
    collection) for a material abnormally transparent.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, subclasses 11+ for glass compositions which
    may act as a light filter.



    2.      Reflectors, refractors, etc., i.e., means to modify the
    distribution of light, not limited in use to illumination.

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, generally,
    for light modifiers which modify light from an illuminated object or field
    rather than directly from a light generating means.  See  subclasses 515+
    for signal reflectors which may modify the distribution of (reflect) light
    directly from a light generating means; especially subclass 527 for a
    signal reflector for a signal source remote from the observer; subclass 528
    for a signal reflector for a source behind the reflector; subclasses 642+
    for lenses.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, appropriate subclasses for light transmitting
    fibers, rods, or pipes.



    C.      Light Source Supports or Housings:

    This class (362) provides for combinations of a support for a light source
    and significant structure of a light source and for a light source support
    having structural features limited to use with a light source.  Housings
    for light sources having more than nominally recited light source
    supporting means or having or comprising light modifier means of this class
    type are also provided for in this class.  Light source housings, per se,
    and certain types of light source supports are provided for in the
    following classes:

    220,    Receptacles, for housings, per se, for light sources including such
    housings having nominally recited light source supporting means.

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses for supports which may support,
    but are not limited to the support of light sources.  See also the notes to
    the definition of subclass 382, below.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for an electrical
    connector, per se, such as a light bulb or tube socket which may also
    support or contribute to the support of the light bulb or tube. See also
    the notes to the definition of subclass 382, below.



    D.      Signalling and Communication:

    Illuminating means, per se, which are used to convey  information (e.g.,
    "signal lanterns") are generally classified in this class (362) unless
    explicitly provided for elsewhere.

    Means to convey information classifiable in another class combined with
    illuminating means is generally classified in the other class.  Such
    combinations are provided for in the following classes:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, particularly subclasses 480, 502
    and 541+ for means for illuminating subject matter of this class.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 3 for combinations of horns and
    lamps, subclasses 18+ for illuminated mechanical code signal apparatus.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclass 473 for illuminated railway
    signals.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, appropriate subclasses for claimed
    combinations whose proximate function is to convey information by means of
    electrically generated visible light.  Such combinations must necessarily
    include a light source or light source and modifier and some (encoding)
    means which establishes a correspondence between the distribution,
    composition or location of the light and some other fact to be
    communicated.  This requirement is based on the premise that, in signalling
    with visible light, the light itself is merely the carrier of or medium for
    the transfer of information and not the information itself.  If the
    proximate function of the claimed combination is to convey information and
    illuminate or to convey information or illuminate, the combination is
    classifiable in this class (362).  Subcombinations of subject matter of
    this class (362), for example, a light source and modifier which can be
    used for signalling (e.g., "signal lantern") or is used for signalling in
    nonclaimed disclosure, are classified in this class (362), unless
    explicitly provided for in Class 340.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    109+ for light wave communications.



    However, N.B., Class 340 has not been screened for such subcombinations
    which may have been originally classified there in the past.

    E.      Combinations of Devices Provided for in Other Classes and
    Illuminating Means:

    Combinations of devices provided for in other classes and illuminating
    means are classified with the device unless specifically provided for in
    this class (362) whether or not the illuminating means illuminates the
    device itself. See the search notes of the combination subclasses of this
    class (362) for the lines between this class and other relevant classes.

    The following classes provide for combinations of devices of the respective
    class type and illuminating means.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 88 for drying
    apparatus and apparatus for contacting gases or vapors with solids which
    are provided with electric lamp illuminating means.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, particularly subclasses 480, 502
    and 541+ for illuminating means associated with the subject matter of the
    class (40).

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 293 for illuminated liquid level
    and depth gauges.

    84,     Music, subclass 464 for musical instruments combined with means to
    produce color or light effects.

    114,    Ships, subclass 66 for observation ships having means to illuminate
    the object or field to be observed.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 7 for mechanical burglar alarms
    combined with illuminating (e.g., floodlighting) means; subclasses 18+ for
    illuminated mechanical code signal apparatus; subclasses 48, 49 and 54 for
    mechanical illuminated vehicle motion and direction indicators; and
    subclasses 241+ for illuminated radio tuning dials.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 209 for a combined body warmer and
    illuminating means; subclasses 235 and 241 for tool heaters with
    illuminating means; subclasses 255+ for lamp heaters; and subclass 267 for
    a combined lunch bucket heater and illuminating means.

    600,    Surgery, appropriate subclasses for illuminated diagnostic
    apparatus and for apparatus for treating the human body with light rays.
    In particular, search subclasses 101+ for endoscopes; subclass 11 for
    pharygoscopes; subclasses 185+ for nonpivoted gags; subclasses 184+ for
    tongue depressors; subclass 241 for pivoted specula; subclass 200 for
    reflectors with lamps; subclass 249 for miscellaneous illuminated
    diagnostic apparatus not otherwise classified; subclass 200.11 for
    medicating apparatus.

    165,    Heat Exchange, for patents claiming heat exchange apparatus
    combined with a device to be heated or cooled thereby if no structure of
    said device is included other than the structure necessary for cooperation
    with the heat exchange apparatus.  The mere naming of the device as a lamp,
    light fixture, etc., will not be sufficient to exclude the patent from
    Class 165.

    232,    Deposit and Collection Receptacles, subclass 13 for illuminated
    fare boxes.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 18+ for
    ornamental illuminated fountains.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclass 483 for illuminated
    semaphore arms.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for illuminating means combined
    with photocells.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-line Implements, subclass 1.2 for a
    contact lens applicator combined with illuminating means and subclass 66.2
    for illuminating means combined with underwater handling equipment.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 907+ for illuminating means
    combined with means to convey information.  See also subsection D, above.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 67 and 227
    for illuminated clocks.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 100+ for the detailed
    structure of thermometers.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclass 5 for impellers
    combined with illuminating means.

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 29+ for illuminated or illuminating dental
    apparatus.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclasses 13+ for illumination
    buoys.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 47, 91, 242, and 485+ for
    illuminated toys.

    454,    Ventilation, for illuminating means combined with means to
    ventilate an enclosed space other than, or in addition to, a light source
    or light source enclosure, particularly subclasses 293+ for a ceiling
    diffuser with a light fixture.

    601,    Surgery:  Kinesitherapy, subclass 1 for kinesitherapy devices.

    602,    Surgery:  Splint, Brace, or Bandage, subclass 2 for orthopedic
    devices including light, heat, or electrical applicators.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 20+ for electrical energy applied to the body
    for therapeutic purposes.

    606,    Surgery, subclass 1 for surgical instrumentation.



    F.      Special Applications:

    In general, the proximate function of the basic subject matter of this
    class (362) is merely to direct visible radiation in at least one direction
    to render a reflective object in that direction visible to an observer in
    the path of the light reflected from the object.

    Illuminating means used to perform functions provided for in other classes
    are classified in such classes.  See subsection D for classes providing for
    illuminating means used in signalling and communication.  The following
    additional classes also provide for illuminating means used in performing
    the function of the classes:

    128,    Surgery, for illuminating means for treating the human body with
    light rays.  (See subsection E for pertinent subclasses).

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 553 for heating devices wherein the
    heating elements are ordinary incandescent lamps.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 198+ for illuminating means
    used to project motion pictures.

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, for illuminating means used to project
    images.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 46 for incandescent
    materials used in the testing of visible light or materials for optical
    properties; and subclasses 331+ for monochromators of the visible type.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 100+ for
    apparatus and systems including illuminating means for electrically
    recording or reproducing photographic sound records.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 100+ for detailed
    structures of thermometers.

    463,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 51+ for a simulated
    projectile game wherein a light ray is used to simulate a projectile.

    472,    Amusement Devices, subclasses 57+ and particularly subclass 61 for
    illusion apparatus with illuminating means appropriate therefor.



    VI.     INDEX TO CLASSES

    The following Classes are referred to in the corresponding Subsection of
    Section V, above.

    CLASS           SUBSECTION

    9               E

    34              E

    40              D; E

    73              E

    84              E

    106             B, 1

    114             E

    116             D; E

    117             B, 1

    126             E

    128             E; F

    165             E

    219             F

    220             C

    232             E

    239             A; E

    246             D; E

    248             C

    250             A; D; E

    273             F

    294             E

    313             A

    314             A

    315             A

    331             A

    339             C

    340             D; E

    352             F

    353             F

    356             F

    359             B, 1; B, 2

    368             E

    369             F

    374             E

    428             B, 1

    431             A

    433             E

    439             C

    441             E

    446             E

    454             E

    472             F


CLS 362/1
TXT Subject matter under the class definition having means for modifying the
    spectral character of light from an artificial source for the purpose of
    producing light simulating daylight.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes a combination of light sources of
    differing spectral outputs with means for mixing the outputs for a combined
    spectral output simulating daylight.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231,    for plural light sources with different radiation outputs but not
    limited to simulated daylight.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 110+ for optical
    device or special ray transmissive envelope, per se.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclass 95
    for a cabinet to enclose a person and designed to expose the person to the
    sun's rays; and subclasses 88+ for devices to apply light to the body for
    therapeutic purposes.


CLS 362/2
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the means for modifying the light
    has different effects on different light wavelengths such as absorbing some
    while transmitting others or reflecting others.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    293,    for an illumination light source or support combined with a
    selected wavelength modifier but not limited to simulating daylight.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    885+ for light filters, per se.


CLS 362/3
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising means to illuminate a
    subject and designed for use with a device (camera) for recording an image
    of the subject on photosensitive material and not classifiable elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses include subcombinations
    adapted to perfect the illumination function such as a "flashgun" designed
    to give a short burst of high intensity light when used with an unclaimed
    shutter actuator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257+,   for light projectors of general illumination utility including
    "photo flood lights" which fail to require structural features that would
    limit them to a photographic environment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 250+ for a
    printed circuit board, per se.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 260+ for resistive element igniters.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses for
    photoflash bulbs, per se, of the nonconsumable type.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for systems including circuit means for energizing light sources
    of the nonconsumable type.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 243+ for
    electrical systems for igniting combustible flashbulbs of general utility
    and wherein the flashbulbs are not limited by specific structure.  See the
    reference to Class 431 below.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 155+ for combinations of photographic
    lights and significant camera structure which may include photoelectric
    means.

    399,    Electrophotography, for illumination systems including light
    sources used in electrophotographic devices, specifically subclasses 177+
    for exposure.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 357+ for photoflash bulbs, per se, of the
    combustible type and combinations which include means for igniting such
    specific bulbs.  That section also provides for a nominal light source,
    such as a "flashbulb", or a nominal light modifier or "reflector" if
    combined with specific mechanical igniting means, such as percussive means
    and which may include light source support means.  See the reference to
    Class 361 above which provides for more general utility electrical ignition
    means that are not limited by light source, modifier or support details.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclass 151 for a coupling part connector
    combined with means to allow repositioning of a mating part for engagement
    of different contacts on the mating part (e.g., a flash cube); and
    subclasses 620+ for an electrical connector combined with a named circuit
    component; and see the notes appended thereto.


CLS 362/4
TXT Subject matter under subclass 3 having an electrical device which responds
    to radiant light energy by (1) varying its electrical characteristics, (2)
    generating an electric current, or (3) means for determining the intensity
    or quantity of light emanating from a particular location or direction,
    wherein any of the aforementioned three are combined with photographic
    illumination structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for devices which respond to infrared radiation or other forms of
    thermal energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for photocells, circuits and
    apparatus, especially subclass 215 where combined with a diverse type
    device.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 149+ where
    the system is combined with radiant energy sensitive control means.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 213+ for photometers per
    se and see the search class notes for other fields of search.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 173+ for
    relays and solenoids combined with light condition responsive means.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 155+ for combinations of photographic
    lights and significant camera structure which may include light sensing or
    indicating.


CLS 362/5
TXT Subject matter under subclass 3 including means for measuring or indicating
    some condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23+,    for means to illuminate a scale or dial generally.


CLS 362/6
TXT Subject matter under subclass 3 including thermal sensitive means or means
    to facilitate the transfer of heat energy.

    (1)     Note.  It is recognized that all material objects are heat
    conductive and heat sensitive to some degree, but this subclass is limited
    to means for significantly utilizing the thermal reaction characteristics
    of the objects.


CLS 362/7
TXT Subject matter under subclass 3 including means which selectively perform
    two dissimilar functions by appropriate rearrangement of parts or means
    including specific adaptor structure.

    (1)     Note.  Included as dissimilar functions are such examples as:
    continuous lighting and flash lighting, single flash and plural
    simultaneous flashes for greater light intensity; combustive light source
    and incandescent or gas discharge light source; and means for converting
    from manual lamp substitution to automatic indexing lamp substitution.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for the combination of a photoflash bulb and a flood lamp to be
    used simultaneously but without switching means for converting from one
    type to the other.


CLS 362/8
TXT Subject matter under subclass 3 to which has been added a subcombination or
    assembly which is recognized as the subject matter of some other class.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of subclasses 10 to 18 below are
    considered so basic to the operation characterizing this photographic
    illumination section that they are dealt with as manifestations of the
    photographic light operation rather than a combination for this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  In this subclass are included combinations of a photographic
    light unit and (1) mechanical structure for connection to a camera or (2)
    cable storage means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for the combination of a photoflash bulb and a flood lamp without
    control structure such as a selector switch.


CLS 362/9
TXT Subject matter under subclass 8 wherein the added subcombination includes
    specific structure to hold an electrochemical cell.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for an illuminator combined with a cane, baton, umbrella or club
    and which may include a battery.

    103+,   for an illuminator combined with wearing apparel and may include a
    battery.

    109+,   for an illuminator and implement which may include a battery.

    183+,   for an electric self powered lamp per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 503 for vehicle mounted hold-downs.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, cross reference art
    collection 903 for hand-held battery carriers.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 150
    for power pack systems.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing  Apparatus, Product, and
    Process, subclass 100 for a battery support, per se.


CLS 362/10
TXT Subject matter under subclass 3 including means for protecting the user
    from undesirable effects, or means to protect photographic lighting
    apparatus or means that include additional structure that must be
    manipulated before normal operation of photographic lighting apparatus can
    proceed.


CLS 362/11
TXT Subject matter under subclass 3 including two or more light sources, or
    holders for two or more light sources, or structure adapted to support or
    move said holders.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass, or those indented thereunder, include
    structure that facilitate proper orientation for photographic lighting such
    as rotary indexing mechanisms that may support and impart the desired
    movement to a support for plural light sources (flashcubes).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for automatic substitution of nonphotographic light sources.

    184,    for self powered electric lamps with plural lamp bulbs.

    209,    for plural nonelectric light sources.

    210,    for plural carbon arc-type light sources.

    227+,   for plural light sources.

    254,    for light source substitution.


CLS 362/12
TXT Subject matter under subclass 11 wherein the light sources are of different
    sizes or types.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228+,   for plural light sources of a diverse nature for general
    illumination.


CLS 362/13
TXT Subject matter under subclass 11 including (1) means for replacing one
    light source with another, or (2) means for selectively energizing plural
    light sources one at a time.


CLS 362/14
TXT Subject matter under subclass 13 including means to move a light source or
    support from a nonilluminating position to an illuminating position, or
    which allows such movement to be made by the user from one predetermined
    position to another illuminating position.

    (1)     Note.  Mere light source socket means that allow the user to insert
    a light bulb is not sufficient for this or the indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses include means for moving a
    light source support for plural light sources such as a flashcube, where
    not elsewhere classified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for automatic substitution of nonphotographic light sources.

    254,    for light source substitution.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 357+ for (1) the combination of a specific
    Class 431 type combustible flashbulb and a nominal light modifier or
    reflector; or (2) the subcombination of a percussive actuator and indexing
    means for a combustible flashbulb; or (3) a nominal flashbulb with
    mechanical ignition means.


CLS 362/15
TXT Subject matter under subclass 14 combined with means to apply electrical
    energy to a combustible light source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 357+ for a specific Class 431 combustible
    flashbulb and electrically ignited primer without a specific light modifier
    or specific light reflector.


CLS 362/16
TXT Subject matter under subclass 3 including specific means to affect light
    waves emitted from an illuminating light source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257+,   for the combination of a light source or support and a light
    modifier for general illumination.

    317,    for a light modifier, per se, for illumination.


CLS 362/17
TXT Subject matter under subclass 16 wherein the specific means includes two or
    more different light modifying structures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for the combination which may include a safety screen.


CLS 362/18
TXT Subject matter under subclass 16 wherein the specific means permit
    adjustment of the orientation or position of light affecting surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228+,   for adjustable or positionable light modifiers, per se.

    269+    and 277+, for similar subject matter for general illumination.


CLS 362/19
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising a light source which
    emits a ray of light having substantially equal components of wave energy
    in various directions transverse to the path of the ray and means to alter
    the light so that the ray has a greater wave energy component in one
    transverse direction than in another.

    (1)     Note.  Where the illuminating devices includes only a reflector or
    other means which may incidentally polarize the light; the patent is not
    classified in this subclass.  This subclass includes only illuminating
    devices where means are provided especially for the purpose of polarizing
    the light emitted by the light source.  See the other appropriate
    subclasses for illuminating devices with reflectors, especially subclasses
    indented under subclass 296.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    293,    for a light source or support therefor and a nonpolarizing filter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 112 for an electric
    lamp having a light polarizer as an integral part thereof.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 756 for antennas
    with a polarization filter or converter; and subclasses 909+ for radio wave
    polarizers, per se.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    483+ for (1) light polarizing compositions, (2) light polarizing devices,
    and (3) polarizing systems not provided for in some other optical class.


CLS 362/20
TXT Subject matter under the class definition having either (1) one energy
    source and first and second light sources and means to supply energy from
    the energy source to the second light source in response to failure of the
    first light source; or (2) first and second energy sources and one light
    source and means to cause the second energy source to supply energy to the
    light source in response to failure of the first energy source; or (3)
    first and second energy sources and first and second light sources and
    means to cause the second energy source to supply energy to the second
    light source in response to failure of either the first energy source or
    the first light source.


CLS 362/21
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein the light source is an
    incandescent electric filament enclosed in an envelope and may additionally
    be contained in an enclosing means and wherein electric circuit means is
    provided to connect the filament to a source of electrical energy and
    wherein means are provided to disconnect the filament from its source of
    electrical energy or to reduce or otherwise inhibit the flow of energy
    through the filament in response to the breakage of the envelope or the
    enclosing means.


CLS 362/22
TXT Subject matter under subclass 21 having an enclosure which is sealed and a
    fluid within the enclosure and wherein the means to disconnect the filament
    from its source of electrical energy etc. includes a switch and wherein the
    enclosure, the fluid and the switch are so interrelated that a break in the
    enclosure either (1) changes the amount of fluid in the enclosure to open
    the switch, or (2) changes the pressure of the fluid in the enclosure to
    open the switch and thus open the circuit to the filament.


CLS 362/23
TXT Subject matter under the class definition combined with means, claimed or
    disclosed as bearing two or more markings corresponding to the same number
    of consecutive measurements of some variable other than merely the
    position, composition, or distribution of light from the illuminating
    structure of this class wherein the illuminating structure contributes to
    the illumination of the markings.

    (1)     Note.  Generally, means for driving, operating or controlling
    indicator will exclude classification in this Class. For example, a movable
    pointer, clockwork mechanism, measuring means, condition responsive sensor
    or positions indicating sensor.

    (2)     Note.  Combinations including specific structure of machinery or
    apparatus provided for in other classes, beyond recitations of structure
    necessary to set out the relationship of the illuminated scale, dial or
    markings, will generally be classified with that machinery or apparatus.

    (3)     Note.  The variable of the definition above, could be just the
    position of a control knob.  The mere disclosure of illuminating an
    unmarked panel, plate or knob is insufficient for classification herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for a photographic illuminator with measuring or indicating means.
    See other subclasses directed to the basic illuminating structure of this
    class where means indicating the position, compositions or distribution of
    light may be claimed or disclosed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 241 for illuminated gun sights;
    subclasses 348+ for gravity or other force indicators with illuminating
    means.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 204 for illuminated
    license plates; subclasses 480 and 502 for illuminated changeable
    exhibitors; and subclasses 541+ for illuminated signs.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 293 for a liquid level gauge with
    illuminating means; subclass 499 for a speed or acceleration measuring
    device with an illuminated reading device.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 250 for illumination of an
    indicator and see search notes for other search areas.

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclasses 177+ for such scales with illumination.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 463.1 for self luminous dials, etc.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, see Notes above.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclass 67 for
    illuminated clocks with recited drive or clockwork mechanism; subclass 227
    for clock dials, per se.


CLS 362/24
TXT Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein the means is part of an instrument
    for reproducing sounds at a distance wherein the sounds are converted into
    electrical impulses for transmission by wire and whose circuit is
    independent of the means for illuminating the instrument.

    (1)     Note.  The dial must be claimed for placement in this subclass
    rather than in subclass 88 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for a general illuminator for a telephone instrument.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 441+ for telephone
    transmitter dial lights.


CLS 362/25
TXT Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein the means bearing two or more
    markings indicates the temperature of the water or water vapor in a heat
    exchange device which transfers heat from water or water vapor to air.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type may comprise, for
    example, an attachment to a radiator cap or part of the radiator cap of an
    automobile or be attached to the filter neck or radiator of an automobile.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 100+ for detailed
    structure of, thermometers, particularly 146 for radiator cap-mounted
    thermometers.


CLS 362/26
TXT Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein the illuminating structure
    includes (1) an object made of light transmitting material with a
    relatively narrow surface or side disposed adjacent a light source; or (2)
    a transparent, relatively elongated structure which transmits light rays
    from one point to another within the confines of its outer surface or
    surfaces by internal reflections or nodal transmission.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclass include, for example, the
    combination of a relatively thin light transmitting object and a light
    source located in an aperture extending through its major surfaces or
    embedded between said major surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for edge lighted panels without a dial or scale.

    32,     for illumination means which includes light fibers, rods or pipes
    without a dial or scale.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 423 and 541+ for edge
    illuminated signs and including fiber optics.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 200, 244, and 286+ for
    indicators using light guides.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 815.4+, particularly
    subclasses 815.42+ for light piping used in electrically controlled visual
    signal indicators.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, appropriate subclasses for light transmitting
    fibers, rods, or pipes, per se.


CLS 362/27
TXT Subject matter under subclass 26 wherein the illuminating structure
    includes more than one light source.


CLS 362/28
TXT Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein the scale or dial is contained
    within an instrument case and the illuminating structure is external to the
    case; the case having an opening through which the scale or dial is
    observed and either another opening or light transparent portion through
    which light from the external illuminating structure enters the case to
    illuminate the scale or dial.

    (1)     Note.  The instrument has no structure to measure a quantity and
    the dial has no arrangement or structure to classify the instrument or dial
    in an appropriate measuring or indicating class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 792+ for dial type distance
    measuring, and subclasses 501+ for measuring type gauges.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 293 for illuminated liquid level
    gauges; subclass 499 for a speed or acceleration illuminated reading
    device; subclasses 388+ for fluid pressure gauges; and subclass 431 for
    instrument casings.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 250 for illumination of an
    indicator and see search notes for other search areas.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 76.11+ for
    measuring, testing or sensing electricity, subclasses 160+ for electrical
    speed measuring devices, and subclass 156 for casings, per se.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 100+ for detailed
    structure of thermometers in such an arrangement.


CLS 362/29
TXT Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein the means includes a meter housing
    or casing and the illuminating structure includes a light source within
    said housing or casing.


CLS 362/30
TXT Subject matter under subclass 29 wherein the illuminating structure
    includes light modifiers or directors that are interposed between the means
    and the light source.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes combinations wherein a light source
    is located behind the viewing face of a dial or scale plate that is
    translucent or transparent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153,    for edge lighted modifiers or light conducting fibers, rods or
    pipes which may indirectly illuminate other elements.


CLS 362/31
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising a light source or
    support therefor combined with a light transmissive material in the form of
    a solid having two opposite surfaces with overall dimensions very much
    greater than the distance between them and having at least one narrow
    surface (i.e., "edge") joining the two opposite surfaces and exposed to
    light from the source such that light from the source enters the material
    through the narrow surface and is transmitted within the material by
    internal reflections from the opposite surfaces or by nodal transmission.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26+,    for edge lighted panels having indicia engraved thereon.

    32,     for light transmissive materials in the form of fibers, rods or
    pipes.

    330,    for light transmissive panels of the refractive type which are not
    edge-lighted.


CLS 362/32
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising a solid transparent
    material which transmits light within the confines of its outer surface by
    internal reflections therefrom or by nodal transmission.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, for light piping material used
    for card, picture and sign exhibiting.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, particularly subclasses 385+ for the
    manufacture of light piping fibers or filaments.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 200, 244, and 286+ for
    indicators using light guides.

    250,    Radiant Energy, for light piping material used to pipe light to a
    photocell.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, appropriate subclasses for light transmitting
    fibers, rods, or pipes, per se.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 600+ for light piping material used
    in the visible transmission of signals.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 183+, 191, and 213 for light piping material
    used for inspecting  the human anatomy.


CLS 362/33
TXT Subject matter under the class definition having a plurality of light
    sources arranged to direct a condensed and substantially shadowless light
    onto a surface on which objects upon which manual operations are to be
    performed are supported.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type includes, for example,
    systems for illuminating patients for surgical operations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227+,   for plural light sources for general illumination.

    257+,   for a single light source or light source support combined with a
    light modifier for general illumination.


CLS 362/34
TXT Subject matter under the class definition having an emitter of light
    produced by a flameless chemical reaction combined with a light modifier or
    light modifier support structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     for illuminating structure combined with separate fluorescent or
    phosphorescent material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 219+ for a package for
    mixing.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 700 for a chemiluminescent composition.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 483+ for a Class
    313 device combined with a luminescent solid or liquid material.


CLS 362/35
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in which part or all of the
    illuminating means rotates continually in one direction about an axis.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type includes, for example,
    lighthouse beacons or rotating flashing devices which are mechanical.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166+,   for means to block a light source which are not continually
    revolving.

    269+,   for light projector which is rotatable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 480 and 502 for
    revolving signs.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 471+ for revolving lights
    used as hazard warning or emergency lights with vehicles.


CLS 362/36
TXT Subject matter under the class definition which includes a steering
    mechanism or an element of a steering mechanism of a vehicle and wherein
    the motion of the steering mechanism or the element controls the direction
    taken by the vehicle; a multiple position switch or plural electric
    switches, a switch operator to make or break the multiple switch positions
    or to operate selectively the plural electric switches; a plurality of
    electric light sources, generally one source being directed forward and at
    least one light source directed to each side of a vehicle, and in which the
    motion of the steering mechanism or the steering mechanism element controls
    the switch operator to control circuits to at least some of the plurality
    of electric lights.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 81 for
    vehicle headlight systems where no light support is claimed or wherein the
    headlight is only nominally recited.


CLS 362/37
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising means to change the
    direction of movement of a transporting device, or a movable element of
    such means, and a tiltable or rotatable lamp or lamp support wherein motion
    imparted to the direction changing means or to the element thereof to
    change the direction of movement of the transporting device is also used
    concurrently to tilt and rotate the lamp or lamp support.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass type includes lamps or
    lamp supports which are directly supported by the steering gear or the
    steering gear element so that the motion of the steering gear or element to
    direct a vehicle is also the same motion given to the lamp or lamp support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 81 for
    vehicle headlight systems where no light support is claimed or wherein the
    headlight is only nominally recited.


CLS 362/38
TXT Subject matter under subclass 37 having a fluid motion transmission means
    controlled by the steering gear or steering gear element connected to the
    lamp or to the lamp support so that the motion imparted by the steering
    gear or steering gear element to direct the movement of a vehicle is also
    used concurrently to transmit motion through the fluid motion transmission
    means to tilt or rotate the lamp or lamp support.

    (1)     Note.  A dashpot to damp the oscillation of a pivoted lamp or
    pivoted lamp support is not considered a fluid motion transmission means of
    this subclass type.


CLS 362/39
TXT Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein the lamp or lamp support is
    rotatable in a horizontal plane in response to the movement of the
    transporting device or a movable element of such means and the lamp or lamp
    support or at least a portion of the lamp or lamp support is rotatable also
    in a vertical plane and manual means is connected to the lamp or lamp
    support or to the portion of the lamp support to pivot the lamp or lamp
    support in the vertical plane.

    (1)     Note.  The manual means includes mechanism responsive to the foot,
    hand or the other member of a human operator to impart motion to pivot the
    lamp or lamp support or portion thereof in the vertical plane.


CLS 362/40
TXT Subject matter under subclass 37 having means operated by the motion of
    some portion of the human body to tilt or rotate the lamp or lamp support
    independently of the steering mechanism or element.


CLS 362/41
TXT Subject matter under subclass 37 which includes means responsive to the
    movement of the vehicle steering mechanism or element when a turn by the
    vehicle is being made in one direction relative to linear movement of the
    vehicle to rotate the pivoted lamp or pivoted lamp support in the same
    direction as the turn but not when a turn by the vehicle is being made in
    the opposite relative direction.

    (1)     Note.  Typically, subject matter of this subclass type includes two
    headlamps where one headlamp turns and the other remains stationary when a
    vehicle steering mechanism turns in one direction.  When the vehicle turns
    in the other direction, the one headlamp is stationary and the other turns
    in the opposite direction to the first turn.


CLS 362/42
TXT Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein the steering mechanism or element
    includes or comprises a rotatable and turnable annular or circular vehicle
    supporting member which contacts and rolls on a vehicle supporting surface;
    or wherein a turnable means is provided to support means to stop or
    decelerate the vehicle and wherein the lamp or lamp support is tilted or
    rotated by the turning motion of the vehicle supporting member or the
    stopping means support.


CLS 362/43
TXT Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein there are two lamps each rotatable
    about an axis or two lamp supports each having a portion rotatable about an
    axis, a motion transmission means connecting the steering gear or the
    steering gear element to both of the rotatable lamps or to the two
    rotatable portions of the lamp supports so that motion imparted by the
    steering gear or the steering gear element to turn or direct a vehicle is
    also imparted through the motion transmission means to rotate both of the
    lamps concurrently or rotate both of the lamp support portions with the
    turning or direction of a vehicle.


CLS 362/44
TXT Subject matter under subclass 43 wherein there is a single mechanical
    connection between the steering gear or the steering gear element and the
    motion transmission means.


CLS 362/45
TXT Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein the motion transmission means is
    so connected to the two rotatable lamps or to the two rotatable lamp
    support portions that the motion imparted to the motion transmission means
    by the steering gear or the steering gear element first turns one of the
    two rotatable lamps and the motion of the "one" rotatable lamp in turn
    rotates the second rotatable lamp or the motion imparted to the motion
    transmission means by the steering gear or steering gear element first
    turns one of rotatable lamp support portions and the motion of the "one"
    rotatable lamp support portion in turn rotates the second rotatable lamp
    support portion.


CLS 362/46
TXT Subject matter under subclass 45 wherein the steering gear or the steering
    gear element includes either a first movable member to receive motion from
    a human operator; a movable shaft which receives the motion from the first
    movable member; a second movable member receiving the motion from the
    movable shaft or a movable rod moved by the second movable member and the
    motion transmission means is connected to either the first movable member,
    the movable shaft, the second movable member or the movable rod.


CLS 362/47
TXT Subject matter under subclass 46 wherein the motion transmission means
    includes a rigid rod connected to (1) each of the lamps to rotate each of
    the lamps about its axis, or (2) to each of the rotatable portions of the
    lamp supports to rotate each of the rotatable lamp support portions about
    its axis and a rigid member connected directly to each of the rigid rods to
    impart motion to the rods.


CLS 362/48
TXT Subject matter under subclass 45 wherein motion is imparted to the motion
    transmission means to move the two rotatable lamps or lamp portions
    concurrently by a movable bar which is part of the steering gear and which
    functions to join two movable spindle arms of a vehicle steering
    arrangement so that the spindle arms turn concurrently in the same
    direction.


CLS 362/49
TXT Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein the steering gear includes, or the
    steering gear element is a movable member to receive motion from a human
    operator, a movable shaft which receives the motion from the movable member
    responsive to the human operator, a movable member receiving the motion
    from the movable shaft, or a movable rod moved by the member receiving the
    motion from the movable shaft.


CLS 362/50
TXT Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein the motion transmission means
    includes a rigid crank rod directly connected to the rotatable lamp or lamp
    support to pivot the lamp or lamp support about an axis and a rigid movable
    member connected to the crank rod so that the motion of the rigid movable
    member given by the movable steering gear element turns the crank rod to
    impart a turning motion to the rotatable lamp or lamp support to move the
    lamp or lamp support about its axis.


CLS 362/51
TXT Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein motion is imparted to the motion
    transmission means to move the two rotatable lamps or lamp support portions
    concurrently by a movable bar which is part of the steering gear and which
    function to join two movable spindle arms of a vehicle steering arrangement
    so that the spindle arms turn concurrently in the same direction.


CLS 362/52
TXT Subject matter under subclass 43 wherein motion is imparted to the motion
    transmission means to move the two rotatable lamps or lamp support portions
    by a movable bar which is part of the steering gear and which functions to
    join two movable spindle arms of a vehicle steering arrangement so that the
    spindle arms turn concurrently in the same direction.


CLS 362/53
TXT Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein the rotatable lamp or lamp support
    is connected through a motion transmission means to the means to change the
    direction of a vehicle or a movable element of such means which includes or
    is a movable steering member to receive motion from a human operator; a
    movable shaft which receives the motion from the member responsive to a
    human operator; a movable member receiving the motion from the movable
    shaft or a movable rod moved by the member receiving the motion from the
    movable shaft.


CLS 362/54
TXT Subject matter under subclass 53 wherein the motion transmission means
    includes a rigid crank rod directly connected to the rotatable lamp or lamp
    support to pivot the lamp or lamp support about an axis and a rigid movable
    member connected to the crank rod so that the motion of the rigid movable
    member received from the movable steering member or the movable shaft or
    the movable member receiving the motion from the shaft or the movable rod,
    causes the crank rod to pivot the lamp or lamp support about the axis.


CLS 362/55
TXT Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein the lamp or lamp support is
    rotatable and the means to change the direction of movement of a
    transporting device includes, or the movable element of such device, is a
    steering knuckle which supports a steering wheel spindle or an arm
    connected to the knuckle; a motion transmission means connecting the
    knuckle or the arm connected to the knuckle to the lamp or lamp support so
    that motion imparted by the knuckle or the arm connected to the knuckle to
    turn or direct a vehicle is also imparted through the motion transmission
    means to rotate the lamp or lamp support concurrently with the turning of a
    vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  Attachments which are motion transmission elements which are
    connected to a pivoted lamp or lamp support are here.


CLS 362/56
TXT Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein the motion transmission means or
    the rotatable lamp or lamp support includes a motion transfer linkage which
    permits a portion of one member to slide within a portion of another member
    while transferring the motion of the knuckle or knuckle arm to rotate the
    lamp or lamp support.


CLS 362/57
TXT Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein the vehicle steering gear includes
    or the vehicle steering gear element is a bar capable of motion which
    functions to move both steering wheels of a vehicle in the same direction
    and the lamp is rotatable about an axis or the lamp support has a portion
    rotatable about an axis; and a motion transmission means connects the bar
    to the rotatable lamp or the rotatable portion of the lamp support so that
    the motion of the bar is used to direct the movement of a vehicle and
    concurrently to impart motion to the rotatable lamp or the rotatable
    portion of the lamp support through the motion transmission means.

    (1)     Note.  Many patents here include a spring forming part of the
    rotating means which spring upon rotative movement to the rotative lamp or
    rotative portion of the lamp support stores energy to revert the rotating
    lamp or rotating portion of the lamp support back to its initial position
    before movement by the steering gear or steering gear element.  Springs are
    used to bias the lamp or support against movement in a vertical direction.


CLS 362/58
TXT Subject matter under subclass 57 which includes a means to release the
    rotatable lamp or the rotatable portion of the lamp support from the
    control of the bar and the motion transmission means.

    (1)     Note.  The means to release may be between a tie rod and the motion
    transmission means, part of the transmission means, between the rotatable
    lamp or the rotatable portion of the lamp support and the motion
    transmission means or part of the rotatable lamp or rotatable part of the
    lamp support.


CLS 362/59
TXT Subject matter under subclass 57 wherein the motion transmission means
    includes a rigid rod connected to the rotatable lamp or the rotatable
    portion of the lamp support to pivot the lamp or the rotatable portion of
    the lamp support about its axis and therein a movable rigid member
    connected to the rigid rod so that the motion imparted by the bar is
    transmitted through the movable member to the rod to turn the pivoted lamp
    or rotatable portion of the lamp support about its axis.


CLS 362/60
TXT Subject matter under subclass 59 which includes a movable connection
    between (1) the bar and the motion transmission means, (2) the rigid rod
    and the rigid member, (3) the rigid rod and the rotatable lamp or the
    rotatable portion of the lamp support, or (4) any two members of the motion
    transmission means wherein the movable connection includes a movable
    elongated opening formed in a member or by movable elements forming such an
    opening and a movable second member shaped to move within the opening or
    between the elements forming the opening whereby upon movement of the
    elongated opening; the second member between or within the opening will
    move or when the second member moves within or between the member or
    elements forming the member the elongated opening will move to transmit
    motion.


CLS 362/61
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising illuminating means
    combined with either a transporting support therefor having means which
    facilitates movement of the support in at least one direction without
    limiting the extent of its movement in that direction or a subcombination
    of such a support.

    (1)     Note.  Combinations of illuminating means and supports therefor
    having means which facilitate movement of the support in at least one
    direction without limiting the extent of its movement in that direction are
    classifiable in this subclass or the subclasses indented hereunder even
    though additional structure may be claimed in combination therewith which,
    in practice, limits the extent of the movement of the illuminating means in
    that direction.  For example, illuminating means combined with a wheelborne
    support which cooperates with a track which in practice has limits to its
    extent is classifiable here since the combination does include supporting
    means (the wheel-borne support) which of itself meets the requirements of
    the definition of this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The transporting support for the illuminating means of the
    type provided for here may also support other objects as, for example,
    passengers or freight.

    (3)     Note.  The illuminating means of the subject matter of this
    subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder consists of a light source,
    modifier, light source or modifier support of combinations thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 77+ for
    vehicle headlight systems where no light support is claimed or wherein the
    headlight is only nominally recited.


CLS 362/62
TXT Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein the vehicle is supportable above
    the earth entirely by air pressure and the illumination means is mounted on
    the vehicle or a part thereof and is used to permit observations of the
    space external of the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  The light unit may be mounted externally or internally of
    the aircraft or portion of the aircraft.

    (2)     Note.  The illumination means can be a landing light or search
    light but not a lamp for the interior illumination of the aircraft.

    (3)     Note.  Only enough structure of the aircraft or portion of the
    aircraft is generally given to form a support for the light unit.

    (4)     Note.  Movable optical elements may be combined with an aircraft
    and may be separate from or part of the light.

    (5)     Note.  When the light unit or subcombination is mounted internally
    of the aircraft or in a portion of the aircraft an aperture is claimed to
    permit the illumination to be radiated therethrough to the exterior of the
    aircraft or portion thereof.

    (6)     Note.  Included is a lamp in name only, or a lamp with or without
    an electrical circuit combined with an in name only aircraft or aircraft
    part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, generally for aircraft structure.


CLS 362/63
TXT Subject matter under subclass 62 which includes a movable support to mount
    the illumination means, the movable support moving the lamp (1) to and from
    a position within the aircraft, (2) to or from a position forming a portion
    of the exterior surface of the aircraft, or (3) to or from a position
    externally of the aircraft to a second position externally of the aircraft.

    (1)     Note.  Retractable lamps are found in this subclass.


CLS 362/64
TXT Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein the transport device includes, or
    the element of the device is, an opening and a closure for the opening, and
    wherein the illuminating means is positioned so that light radiation from
    the illuminating means will pass through the opening when the closure does
    not block the opening, and wherein closure movable means are provided to
    move the closure from blocking the opening to another position allowing
    light radiation from the illuminating means to pass through the opening.

    (1)     Note.  The "closure" in this subclass is not designed to have the
    closure cooperate with the illumination device when the radiation is
    emitted from the device as the closure is a protective feature for the
    device and a design feature of the vehicle body.


CLS 362/65
TXT Subject matter under subclass 64 wherein the illuminating means has a
    movable support and (1) the closure movable means is part of the movable
    support; (2) the closure movable means is movable by the movable support,
    or (3) the closure movable means moves when the movable support moves.

    (1)     Note.  The closure closes the opening to hide the illuminating
    means when the illuminating means is in one position. In another position,
    the illuminating means is in the opening to permit light radiation
    therefrom to pass through the opening, and the closure is in another
    position away from the opening.


CLS 362/66
TXT Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein the illuminating means is
    rotatable about an axis relative to the transporting support or
    subcombination thereof and wherein a motion transmission means is connected
    to the rotatable, illuminating means and wherein additional means are
    provided to impart motion to the motion transmission means to rotate the
    illuminating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for a vehicle steering mechanism or an element of a steering
    mechanism with a lamp or a lamp support.

    227,    for plural light sources particularly.

    233,    for plural light sources movable by means of a movable mechanical
    arrangement from a remote point.

    419,    for a lamp as a lamp support movable in at least two different ways.

    428,    for a pivoted lamp or lamp support with a movable linkage to move
    the lamp or lamp support from a remote point.


CLS 362/67
TXT Subject matter under subclass 66 wherein the additional means is a
    subcombination of the transporting support comprising (1) a pivoted wheeled
    track engaging truck and wherein a change in the direction of the track
    pivots the truck and the pivoted motion of the truck is imparted to the
    motion transmission means to pivot the rotatable illuminating means; or (2)
    a movable track contacting member supported by the transport support of
    subcombination thereof which, moving along a track, is responsive to
    changes in the direction of the track to impart motion to the motion
    transmission means to pivot the rotatable illuminating means.


CLS 362/68
TXT Subject matter under subclass 67 wherein the motion transmission means
    includes a line which is pliant or a series of elements connected together
    to form a line which is pliant whereby the element or the series of
    elements are capable of transmitting a tension force to transmit the motion
    of the pivoted wheeled truck or the movable track contacting member to the
    pivoted illuminating means.

    (1)     Note.  The pliant line includes chains, ropes, wires and cords.


CLS 362/69
TXT Subject matter under subclass 67 wherein the motion transmission means
    includes pivoted toothed type elements whose teeth interengage so that the
    rotation of one of the toothed elements is transmitted through its teeth to
    the teeth of the other element to impart rotation to the second toothed
    element to transmit the motion of the pivoted truck or track contacting
    member to the rotatable illuminating means.


CLS 362/70
TXT Subject matter under subclass 67 wherein the motion transmission means
    includes rigid levers and members connected together to transmit the motion
    of the pivoted truck or the movable track contacting member to the
    rotatable illuminating means.


CLS 362/71
TXT Subject matter under subclass 66 wherein the transporting support or
    subcombination thereof includes a wheeled vehicle body, a front or rear
    wheel, spring or axle, and means responsive to a change in (1) the spacing
    between the vehicle body and the front or rear wheel, (2) the spacing
    between the spring and axle, or (3) the change in the longitudinal
    inclination of the vehicle to move the rotatable illuminating means to
    adjust the direction of a light beam emitted by the illuminating means so
    that the light beam will strike a road at the same distance regardless of
    the change in the load of the vehicle or the inclination of the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233,    for plural light source having remote adjustment or positioning
    means.

    276,    for a condition responsive light source or modifier.

    384,    for a movable light support controlled by a moving mass.


CLS 362/72
TXT Subject matter under subclass 61 which includes a two wheeled vehicle or a
    structural element thereof wherein the two wheeled vehicle or the
    structural element thereof directly supports the illuminating means or
    wherein the illuminating means is integral with the two wheeled vehicle or
    structural element thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass type includes nominally
    recited light sources as well as light units or elements of the light unit
    such as an optical light modifier or a light casing support for a light,
    per se.

    (2)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass includes powered and
    nonpowered vehicles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193,    for bicycle wheel driven generator.

    396,    for a support to attach a lamp to a   bicycle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 551.1+ for bicycle handle
    bars, and subclasses 594.1+ for bicycle cranks and pedals where no light
    source is involved.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 200+ for bicycles, and subclasses 847+
    for bicycle dust and mud guards.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 67 for bicycle
    hub generators, and subclasses 152+ for permanent magnet machines.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 77+ for
    vehicle lamp and discharge device systems.


CLS 362/73
TXT Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein the transport device includes, or
    the subcombination thereof is, a support in the form of a shelf for storing
    the personal belongings of a person in transit, designed to be mounted
    internally of a transport device wherein the shelf supports the
    illuminating means.

    (1)     Note.  The illuminating means of this subclass type may be integral
    with or separable from the shelf.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclasses 29+ for vehicle attached
    package and article carriers.


CLS 362/74
TXT Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein the transport device is a car
    having a compartment to carry a person, an object or material and the car
    includes, or the subcombination of the transport device is, a roof of the
    car, a ceiling of the car, a ventilation device of a compartmented car or
    an aisle of a car, and the illuminating means is supported by the roof, the
    ceiling of the car, the ventilation device, or forms part of the
    ventilation device or is somehow associated with the aisle of the car.


CLS 362/75
TXT Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein the transport device includes, or
    the subcombination thereof is, a bench, seat or chair designed specifically
    for use in a vehicle, to support one or more persons during the movement of
    a transport device from one location to another, and the illuminating means
    is supported within and by the transport device or by the bench, seat or
    chair within the transport device.


CLS 362/76
TXT Subject matter under subclass 61 which includes an elevator, locomotive
    engine or railway car, and a step or threshold forming part of the
    elevator, engine or car and illuminating means supported by the elevator,
    engine or car to illuminate the threshold or step of the elevator, engine
    or car to enable passengers or workmen to see the step or threshold to step
    down or up the step of the engine or car or in or out of the elevator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     for illuminating means combined with a running board.


CLS 362/77
TXT Subject matter under subclass 61 which includes an outside panel member
    extending across a trolley or streetcar below the windshield thereof and
    the illuminating means supported by the member.


CLS 362/78
TXT Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein the transport device includes or
    the structural element of the transport device is a cover for the hub of a
    transport device wheel; a wheel mounting shaft, a support device for a
    spare wheel of a transport device; a rotating member supporting a transport
    device for movement; or a covering for a portion of a wheel of a transport
    device, and the illumination device or a subcombination of an illumination
    device is mounted (1) on the cover for transmitting light through the cover
    of the hub, (2) on the shaft which mounts a wheel, (3) on the support for a
    spare wheel, (4) on the rotating member supporting the transport device for
    movement, or (5) on or through the covering of a portion of a wheel of the
    transport device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for a pivoted shaft spindle, a wheel or brake member which is part
    of or mounted on an element of a wheeled vehicle steering system.


CLS 362/79
TXT Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein the subcombination of a transport
    device includes a heat exchange member for a liquid cooled internal
    combustion engine having an opening and a closure for the opening or an
    attachment designed to be supported by the heat exchange member or the
    closure member, wherein the illuminating device or subcombination of the
    illumination device is mounted on the heat exchange member, on the closure
    or on a support common to both the heat exchange member or closure and the
    illumination device or subcombination of the illumination device.

    (1)     Note.  Illuminated ornaments for radiator caps and radiator caps
    not provided for elsewhere are here.


CLS 362/80
TXT Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein the transport device includes, or
    the subcombination thereof is, an enclosed compartment or housing of the
    transport device or a part thereof, and the illuminating means is supported
    by the enclosed compartment or housing of the transport device or the part
    thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type includes engine, trunk,
    or passenger compartments, doors, door handles, engine hoods, body panels,
    and trunk lids.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for a ventilation duct, ceiling or roof of a vehicle.

    79,     for radiators, radiator caps, or attachments therefor.


CLS 362/80.1
TXT Windshield or window:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the enclosed compartment, or part
    thereof, is a transparent member of the transport device.


CLS 362/81
TXT Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein the transport device includes, or
    the subcombination thereof is, a footboard of a vehicle, and the
    illuminating means is mounted on or in the vicinity of the footboard so
    that the light from the illuminating means will illuminate an area to the
    side of the transport device, the footboard itself or the vicinity of the
    footboard.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type includes illuminated
    foot or step plates for vehicles.


CLS 362/82
TXT Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein the transport device includes, or
    the subcombination thereof is, a member placed at either end of the
    transport device to absorb shock to prevent or lessen damage by collision
    with a moving or stationary object, and the illuminating means is supported
    by the member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    293,    Vehicle Fenders, subclass 115 for vehicle grille and bumper
    combinations which may provide openings therein permitting light radiation
    therethrough from vehicle attached lamps.


CLS 362/83
TXT Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein the transport device includes, or
    the subcombination thereof is, a mud guard having an inside and outside
    portion, and the illuminating means supported on the inside or the outside
    of the mud guard or the mud guard is optically modified to permit the light
    from the illuminating means to go through a portion of the mud guard so
    that (1) the area inside the mud guard is visible, (2) the side of the
    transport device is visible of the area, forward or backward if the
    transport device is visible.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type includes a fender guide
    in combination with a fender and a splash guard combined with a fender as
    well as fender guide illuminating means, per se.

    (2)     Note.  The illuminating means of this subclass type may be:  a
    headlight, tail light, clearance light, fog light, turn light, or fender
    well light.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 847+ for a vehicle fender.


CLS 362/83.1
TXT Mirror or reflector:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein the support means for an
    illuminating device is a movable reflector (e.g., rear view mirror).


CLS 362/83.2
TXT License plate or bracket:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein the support means for an
    illuminating device is an identification plate, or support therefor, of the
    transport device.


CLS 362/83.3
TXT Other light:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein the support means for an
    illuminating device is any other illuminating device attached to the
    transport device.


CLS 362/84
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising a light source or
    light source support combined with a separate fluorescent or phosphorescent
    material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include a light source per se wherein
    fluorescent material is merely applied to a lamp bulb.  See the search
    class notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for chemiluminescent lighting structure that may include
    fluorescent or phosphorescent material.

    217+,   for elongated light sources of the fluorescent type wherein the
    fluorescent material is part of the light sources.

    260,    for fluorescent light source combined with modifiers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 483.1+ for luminescent devices
    responsive to invisible radiation; and subclasses 493.1+ for radiant energy
    generation and sources that may include fluorescent or phosphorescent
    materials.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 301.2+ for fluorescent or phosphorescent
    compositions.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 483+ and the
    subclasses specified in the notes thereto for electric lamps, per se, and
    electronic tubes which have combined therewith a fluorescent or
    phosphorescent material.


CLS 362/85
TXT Subject matter under the class definition combined with a panel or cabinet
    on which are mounted switches, indicators or other apparatus used for
    centrally controlling electrical or mechanical devices, not classified
    elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for scale or dial illuminators.

    86      through 96, for specific electrical or mechanical devices combined
    with illuminating structure.


CLS 362/86
TXT Subject matter under the class definition combined with a sound transducer
    with means for illuminating some part of the transducer.

    (1)     Note.  In this and the indented subclasses are placed patents whose
    claims all relate to the illuminating features to be applied to the
    transducer and such combinations with modifications of the transducer
    merely for the promotion of illumination.  If specific structure is claimed
    in the transducer with which the source of light is combined, which
    specific structure is independent of the illumination, the patent is
    classified with the transducer whether the illuminating features are
    broadly or specifically claimed.


CLS 362/87
TXT Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein the transducer is an instrument
    for reproducing sound usually by means of the vibration of a stylus or
    needle following a spiral groove on a revolving disc or cylinder.


CLS 362/88
TXT Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein the transducer is an instrument
    for reproducing sounds at a distance wherein the sounds are converted into
    electrical impulses for transmission by wire and whose circuit is
    independent of the means for illuminating the transducer.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes illuminator attachments for a
    telephone wherein the illuminator includes mechanical switch actuator
    structure intended to interact with telephone structure such as a switch
    arm which would engage and be operated by the movement of the telephone
    receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for means to illuminate a telephone dial plate other than just by
    an external light source placed for general illumination of the telephone
    as a whole.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communications, appropriate subclasses, for specific
    telephones and systems.


CLS 362/89
TXT Subject matter under the class definition in combination with a device
    including an assemblage of parts that transmit forces, motion, and energy
    one to another in a predetermined manner and generally support structure
    wherein illuminating means of the class is attached to or built into the
    device to illuminate some part of the device or work area of the device,
    and not classified elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  Illuminating light supports are considered basic subject
    matter of the class even if they include machine elements, and are
    classified in subclasses 382+ below rather than being considered a combined
    device for this section 89+.

    (2)     Note.  Hand held machine tools or implements are classified in
    subclasses 109+ below.

    (3)     Note.  Mere supports or holders of objects other than illuminating
    elements are classified below with the specific type of object support or
    holder, e.g., subclasses 98+, paper holders, subclasses 127+, furniture,
    subclasses 135+, viewing mirror, and subclasses 154+, container.

    (4)     Note.  Heating or refrigerating and fluid dispensers are provided
    for below in subclasses 92+ and 96.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109+,   for hand-held machine tools combined with an illuminator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 88 for
    apparatus with illuminating means.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 520+ for cutting apparatus with illuminating or
    viewing means for work.

    269,    Work Holders, subclass 11 for holder illuminating means.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, appropriate subclasses for typewriters, per
    se.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclass 16 for
    combinations with signal, indicator, illumination or optical means.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclass 5 for such
    surfaces with illumination means.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 169+ for the class device with an illuminator.


CLS 362/90
TXT Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the machine performs the function
    of uniting or ornamenting material by means of a strand which is inserted
    (stitched) in the material at spaced locations by a needle having an eye,
    or equivalent structure, and enchained or otherwise locked in position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 2+ for sewing machines, per se.


CLS 362/91
TXT Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the machine is designed or adapted
    for the removal of foreign matter, not elsewhere classified.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 324 for vacuum
    cleaners with an illuminator for the work area.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclass 113 for apparatus
    combined with alarm, signal, indicating, testing, inspecting, illuminating
    or display means.


CLS 362/92
TXT Subject matter under the class definition combined with apparatus for
    heating or cooling articles not otherwise classified.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus including an enclosure with a display or
    observation window for articles that might be placed in the enclosure is
    classified in subclass 126 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126,    for an illuminated showcase with heat insulation or dissipation
    means.

    218,    for an elongated source light unit with cooling means, and also the
    following subclasses for other illumination structure with heating or
    cooling means: 264, 294, 345, 364, 373, and 437.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 341 for cooking apparatus
    with illuminating means.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 388 for a water heater with signal on
    indicating means; subclass 267 for a heater for a dinner bucket and
    lantern; subclass 97 for a heating stove and illumination; and subclass 213
    for stove lids and tops and illumination.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 58+ for heating and cooling apparatus.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 220 for a heating device with light
    means; and subclasses 339+ for a fluid heater of the radiant energy type.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 236 for cabinets for heating
    and cooling; and subclass 116 for the refrigerated showcase type.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 640 for a heater element
    condition indicator; and subclass 655 for a heating circuit energization
    indicator.

    432,    Heating, subclass 32 for combinations with indicating, illuminating
    or inspection means.


CLS 362/93
TXT Subject matter under subclass 92 wherein the apparatus is combined with a
    light fixture which burns a material to produce light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159,    209 and 266, for nonelectric illuminators, per se, of the class
    type.


CLS 362/94
TXT Subject matter under subclass 92 combined with a circuit breaker linked
    with a closure of said apparatus to control the operation of a light source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    135 and 155, for door or closure-controlled illuminator switches
    combined with other apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.62+ for
    closure operated circuit breakers.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses
    10.8+ for automobile light systems.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 84 for
    circuits dealing with a door or closure controlled load device.


CLS 362/95
TXT Subject matter under the class definition combined with a cover for an
    electrical circuit breaker or electrical receptacle, not classified
    elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 310+ for
    illuminated switch indicators.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 640 and 656 for pilot-light
    indicators.


CLS 362/96
TXT Subject matter under the class definition combined with structure for
    distributing or dealing out liquid, gaseous, or fluidic materials for
    purposes other than supplying fuel or heat exchange materials to an
    artificial light source, not classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118,    for the combination of an illuminator and a pen or pencil.

    149,    for illuminating structure combined with a subceiling with fluid
    handling means.

    218,    294, 345, 364, 373, and 437, for illumination structure of the
    class with ventilating or cooling means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, especially subclass 113 for dispensing apparatus
    combined with an illuminator and see the notes thereat.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 284.2 for a
    liquid sprayer for a headlamp lens.


CLS 362/97
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising a generally planar,
    horizontal transparent or translucent material that is structurally located
    over and with a light source or light source support and serves as a
    support for material to be illuminated, not elsewhere classified.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are drafting tables with the above
    illuminating structure for the purpose of facilitating tracing or tables
    for inspecting fabrics or other thin flexible materials.

    (2)     Note.  Class 108, subclass 23 with similar patents, was not
    screened.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98+,    for means to hold or support paper or similar material combined
    with illumination means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 361 for transparent
    film viewers.

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclass 23 for tables with
    illumination means, and see (2) Note above.

    355,    Photocopying, subclasses 113+ for light boxes used for contact
    printing.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 239 for flaw inspection
    means involving passing light through a transparent or translucent article.

    399,    Electrophotography, for illumination systems including light
    sources used in electrophotographic devices, specifically subclasses 177+
    for exposure.


CLS 362/98
TXT Subject matter under the class definition combined with means for
    supporting sheet-like reading or writing material, and not classifiable
    elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97,     for support means including a transparent or translucent supporting
    surface over a light source.

    127,    for articles of furniture in general, combined with illuminating
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 714+ for tables with
    illumination means, subclasses 341+ for copyholders, and subclasses 541+
    for illuminated signs.


CLS 362/99
TXT Subject matter under subclass 98 wherein the combination constitutes a
    unitary, readily carried structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109,    for other readily carried structure combined with illuminating
    means.


CLS 362/100
TXT Subject matter under the class definition combined with a device attached
    to some part of a door or its knob to illuminate the knob or a hole for
    receiving a key not elsewhere classified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94,     for the combination of a heater or refrigerator and illumination
    means controlled by a door.

    137     and 155, for the combination of a vanity case and illumination
    means controlled by a closure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.62+ for
    the combination for a switch and closure, closure operator or accessory.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 84 for the
    combination of a load of the class type and door or closure controlling
    means.


CLS 362/101
TXT Subject matter under the class definition combined with a receptacle for
    holding a liquid other than fuel or heat exchange materials for a light
    source, not classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     for subject matter of this class combined with a fluid dispenser.

    118,    for a pen and illuminator.

    154+,   for a general container with illumination means.

    318,    for a light modifier of the fluid medium type.

    417,    for a font support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 406+ for display
    devices with gas or liquid movement.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 341 for cooking apparatus
    with illumination means.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclass 113 for apparatus
    of the class combined with illuminating means.


CLS 362/102
TXT Subject matter under the class definition combined with a cane, baton,
    umbrella or club of the hand-held type, and not classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109+,   for an illuminator combined with other hand-held implements.

    157+,   for self powered portable illuminators of the hand-held type,
    especially subclasses 202+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 293+ for sighting rods or
    targets.

    84,     Music, subclass 477 for twirling and conducting batons.

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclasses 16+ for umbrellas and
    canes, per se.


CLS 362/103
TXT Subject matter under the class definition combined with (1) a garment,
    covering or clothing, (2) a harness to be worn by an animal, or (3) an
    article generally composed of precious stones and metal (jewelry) and of an
    analogous nature or imitations of the same which are intended to be worn
    upon the person as ornaments, not otherwise classified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191,    for a flashlight casing with support means.

    382,    for strap supports for an illuminator.

    396,    for clamp or hook supports for an illuminator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, appropriate subclasses for garments or clothing, per se.

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclasses 122+ for boots and shoes,
    per se.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 858+, especially subclass 859, for an
    animal collar including an illumination element when the collar is more
    than nominally recited.


CLS 362/104
TXT Subject matter under subclass 103 wherein a light source or light source
    support is combined with articles generally composed of precious metal and
    stones of an analogous nature not otherwise classified or imitations of the
    same, which are intended to be worn upon the person as ornaments.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., appropriate subclasses for jewelry
    fasteners.

    63,     Jewelry, appropriate subclasses for jewelry, per se.


CLS 362/105
TXT Subject matter under subclass 103 wherein the garment, covering or harness
    is to be worn on the head of the animal or supported by some portion of the
    head.

    (1)     Note.  A head covering as used in this and the indented subclasses
    refers to elements which extend generally along and contiguous to the head
    surface, and (1) over the top of the head, usually in arch or dome-like
    fashion, and/or (2) peripherally around at least a portion of the front,
    sides and/or back of head in general conformance with head contour, as
    exemplified by a mere head band.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 171+ for head coverings, per se.

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclasses
    41+ for spectacles and eyeglasses, per se.


CLS 362/106
TXT Subject matter under subclass 105 wherein the covering extends generally
    over the major portion of the head as distinguished from a mere head band
    or open framework.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    396,    for hook or clamp-type lamp supports for headgear.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 422 for cap attachments for receiving light unit
    structure.


CLS 362/107
TXT Subject matter under subclass 106 adapted for use with a nonelectric type
    illuminator.


CLS 362/108
TXT Subject matter under subclass 103 wherein the garment, clothing or harness
    includes means passing over the shoulder or encircling the torso of the
    animal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes sling-type suspension means where an
    element passes over one shoulder, around the neck, and over the other
    shoulder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 310 for shoulder suspension or torso or limb
    encircling garment supporters or retainers.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclasses 5+ for body and belt
    attached carriers.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclass 89 for body attached,
    worn, supporting, or encircling buoyant devices combined with diverse class
    art devices.


CLS 362/109
TXT Subject matter under the class definition combined with a hand-held device
    whose function is to perform, or assist in the performance of a specific
    operation, or a hand-held holder for such device other than a container,
    not classified elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  This section includes a hand-held holder for a key in
    subclass 116, below.

    (2)     Note.  An illuminator with a handle but without specific structure
    for holding a tool element will be classified according to its illuminator
    structure or function, such as a round flashlight in subclass 202.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23+,    for hand-held instruments with an illuminated scale or dial.

    34,     for chemiluminescent illuminators that may be hand held.

    96,     for hand-held fluid dispensers with illuminators.

    101,    for hand-held liquid containers and illuminators.

    102,    an illuminator combined with a cane, baton, umbrella or club.

    136+,   for vanity case container with a mirror and illuminator.

    138+,   for an inspection device with a mirror and illuminator.

    154+,   for an illuminator combined with a container.

    157+,   for self powered lamps, per se, which may include a handle, and see
    (2) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, especially subclasses 348+ for measuring
    instruments of the class type combined with illumination means, such as a
    spirit level.

    269,    Work Holders, subclass 11 for holder illuminating means.

    349,    Liquid Crystal Cells, Elements and Systems, subclasses 61+ for
    liquid crystal devices with illumination.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    385+, 475, 591+, and 798+ for optical devices with illuminating means.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 108, 160+, 179+, 183, 191, 213, 224, 242, 246,
    and 249 for various diagnostic instruments combined with illuminating means.


CLS 362/110
TXT Subject matter under subclass 109 wherein the device is a weapon from which
    a shot may be discharged by gunpowder or structure formed to resemble a
    weapon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 241 for an illuminated gun sight.

    42,     Firearms, appropriate subclasses for firearms, per se, and note
    especially subclass 1.

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, subclass 42 for a light spot pointer
    projector, per se; subclass 43 for a projector shaped like a pistol or gun.

    463,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 51+ for a simulated
    projectile game wherein a light ray is used to simulate a projectile.


CLS 362/111
TXT Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein illuminator structure may be
    attached to the weapon in such a way that a shot may not be discharged.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes patents wherein a light source or
    switch mechanism is placed in the bore of the weapon.


CLS 362/112
TXT Subject matter under subclass 110 which includes a hand-held portable
    illumination device having a housing shaped to resemble a firearm having a
    hand grip by which the device is held and carried.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191,    for an electric self powered lamp having a handle or other mounting
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Device:  Toys, subclasses 405+ and 403 a toy gun, having
    a lamp, and subclass 485 for other toys having lamps.


CLS 362/113
TXT Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein the class illumination structure
    includes a circuit breaker by a part of a means moved by a finger to fire
    the weapon.


CLS 362/114
TXT Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein the weapon includes an electric
    circuit breaker located in a handle of the weapon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    for an imitation firearm that may include a switch in the handle
    thereof.


CLS 362/115
TXT Subject matter under subclass 109 wherein the device is for cutting,
    dressing or trimming hair.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     for a cleaning machine with illuminator.


CLS 362/116
TXT Subject matter under subclass 109 wherein the instrument includes means for
    retaining a lock key.


CLS 362/117
TXT Subject matter under subclass 109 wherein the device includes a metallic
    mass which, when heated, may be used to apply heat to another object.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes flat irons, and soldering irons not
    classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92+,    for heaters that are not hand held and combined with illumination
    means not classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 220 for electrical heating devices with
    light means; subclasses 227+ for hand manipulative heating devices,
    especially subclass 230 where combined with light means.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 640 for electrical
    pilot-light indicators.


CLS 362/118
TXT Subject matter under subclass 109 wherein the device is a coating implement
    with material supply.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, appropriate subclasses for
    coating implements, per se.


CLS 362/119
TXT Subject matter under subclass 109 wherein the device is used to facilitate
    a mechanical operation such as driving, forming, shaping or finishing an
    article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, appropriate subclasses for hand cutting implements, per se.

    81,     Tools, appropriate subclasses for hand tools, per se.


CLS 362/120
TXT Subject matter under subclass 119 wherein the device includes an elongated
    shank, bit or blade portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for hand-held devices with elongated portions such as canes,
    batons, umbrellas or clubs.


CLS 362/121
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising a light source or
    light source support combined with either (1) a figure with five or more
    points that represents a star, or (2) a figure with an upright bar
    traversed by a horizontal bar, not classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227+,   for plural light sources.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, appropriate subclasses, for
    movable display exhibitors or those with the illusion of motion, and with
    illuminating means.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 3 for a
    cruciform, per se, subclass 11 for a star ornament, per se.


CLS 362/122
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising a light source or
    light source support combined with vegetation (i.e., any member of living
    beings typically lacking locomotive movement or obvious nervous or sensory
    organs) or parts (e.g., blossoms, leaves) or simulations thereof and not
    classifiable elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, appropriate subclasses for
    movable display exhibitors or those with the illusion of motion, and with
    illuminating means.  See especially subclasses 480, 502, 543+, and 614+.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for ornaments, per se, especially subclass 10 for a wreath-type ornament.


CLS 362/123
TXT Subject matter under subclass 122 wherein the member is a woody perennial
    plant having an elongated main stem generally with few branches on its
    lower part, or a shrub or herb, or an imitation thereof, and not classified
    elsewhere.


CLS 362/124
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising a light source or
    light source support combined with an imitation of a living being of the
    nonvegetable type (i.e., typically differing from plants in its capacity
    for spontaneous movement and rapid motor response to stimulation) and not
    classifiable elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 411+ for movable
    figure display; subclass 540 for illuminated dummies; and subclass 543 for
    displays with the illusion of motion.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclass 392 for a figure toy luminous
    eyes, and subclass 485 other toys having lamps.


CLS 362/125
TXT Subject matter under the class definition combined with an enclosure that
    includes a transparent wall or with a transparent wall for such an
    enclosure which permits an article that may be placed within the enclosure
    to be seen from outside the enclosure, and not classifiable elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    for cabinets without a transparent display wall combined with
    illuminating means.

    154+,   for containers without a transparent display wall combined with
    illuminating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 446+ for changeable
    exhibitors, and subclass 540 for illuminated display dummies.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 114 for a showcase-type
    refrigerator, and subclass 223.5 for cabinets with illumination means.


CLS 362/126
TXT Subject matter under subclass 125 wherein the enclosure includes structure
    to minimize the transfer of thermal energy through a wall of the enclosure,
    or to dispel undesirable thermal energy, e.g., refrigerated showcase.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 246+ for apparatus of the display type.


CLS 362/127
TXT Subject matter under the class definition combined with articles of the
    support type used for the general convenience of occupants of a room or
    other occupiable space, and not classifiable elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass, and those indented hereunder, deal with
    articles that function to merely support an object.  Articles, whose
    function is dynamic, are generally classified in the subclasses above or in
    the class providing for the function, e.g., telephone, refrigerator,
    machinery, etc.

    (2)     Note.  In this subclass, and those indented hereunder, the
    supporting is of articles other than a light unit, per se.  For example, a
    base with a vertical standard with a light socket attached thereto, is
    considered a light support and is not classified here unless there is also
    recited additional structure for supporting some diverse art object such as
    a projecting shelf for an ash tray.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97,     for table with a transparent or translucent top located over a
    light source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclass 23 for a table
    with illumination means.

    211,    Supports: Racks, appropriate subclasses.

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses.


CLS 362/128
TXT Subject matter under subclass 127 combined with a smooth surface intended
    to form an image of an object other than a light source by reflection.

    (1)     Note.  Mirrored medicine wall cabinets or nonportable mirrored
    vanity or makeup stands/racks are classified here rather than in subclasses
    136+ below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135+,   for a mirror combined with illumination structure.

    136+,   for portable vanity cases.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports: Cabinet Structure, subclass 224 for cabinet structure
    with a mirror.


CLS 362/129
TXT Subject matter under subclass 128 wherein elements of the combination may
    be readily changed in position with respect to one another or to a
    stationary object as a unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139,    for adjustable mirrors and illumination means, and also see
    subclasses 141 and 142+.


CLS 362/130
TXT Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein the article permits one to lie
    and sleep.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, appropriate subclass for bed details, per se.


CLS 362/131
TXT Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein the article is a device for
    supporting the weight of a person in a seated position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclass 217.6 for an illumination means combined
    with a modified chair structure.


CLS 362/132
TXT Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein the article has structurally
    different means for supporting articles, e.g., table top and a standard
    with a bracket with a hook portion.


CLS 362/133
TXT Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein the article is an enclosure with
    article supporting means.

    (1)     Note.  A recited "cabinet" will not be excluded from this subclass
    if the disclosure indicates that it is intended to hold articles other than
    light unit components.

    (2)     Note.  A "cabinet" for this subclass does not include partial
    enclosures that have one side or top open permanently, i.e., a display rack
    that is closed on only three of four sides is classified above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136+,   for portable vanity cases.

    154+,   for enclosures or containers of the  portable type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, appropriate subclasses for specific
    cabinet structure, and subclass 223.5 for cabinet structure combined with
    illumination means.


CLS 362/134
TXT Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein the article of furniture is a
    block-like mass with article supporting means or surface but without
    spacing legs, panels or pedestal.


CLS 362/135
TXT Subject matter under the class definition combined with a smooth surface
    intended to form an image of an object other than a light source by
    reflection, not classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128+,   above for articles of furniture combined with a mirror and
    illumination means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, appropriate subclasses for image
    projection involving reflectors.

    355,    Photocopying, appropriate subclasses, image project-on printing
    involving reflectors.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    838+ for image forming reflectors, per se.

    399,    Electrophotography, for illumination systems including light
    sources used in electrophotographic devices, specifically subclasses 177+
    for exposure.


CLS 362/136
TXT Subject matter under subclass 135 combined with a small box for containing
    toilet articles.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes portable collapsible or hand-carried
    cases as distinguished from the dressing table furniture type of subclass
    128 above. This subclass also includes mirrored purses or bags.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128+,   for dressing table-type mirrored vanities without a carrying handle.

    154+,   for illuminated containers without a mirror.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    132,    Toilet, subclass 83 for a powder box and applicator with a mirror.


CLS 362/137
TXT Subject matter under subclass 136 combined with a device linked with a
    closure of said box to control the operation of a light source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94,     for a heater or refrigerator door controlled switch.

    155,    for a container with a door or lid controlled switch.


CLS 362/138
TXT Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein the surface is structurally
    combined with a light source support which adapts the resultant combination
    for the inspection of inaccessible places and which usually includes a
    handle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109+,   for an illuminator and hand-held implement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclasses
    221 and 243 for eye examining instruments with illumination means.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 300+ for diagnostic instruments with
    illumination means.


CLS 362/139
TXT Subject matter under subclass 138 wherein the resultant combination has
    means allowing the adjustment of the various elements thereof.


CLS 362/140
TXT Subject matter under subclass 135 combined with (1) more than one light
    source or light source support, or (2) different types of devices that can
    change light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227+,   for illumination with plural light sources.

    257+,   for a light source and a light modifier.


CLS 362/141
TXT Subject matter under subclass 140 wherein elements of the combination may
    be readily changed in position with respect to one another or to a
    stationary object as a unit.


CLS 362/142
TXT Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein elements of the combination may
    be readily changed in position with respect to one another or to a
    stationary object as a unit.


CLS 362/143
TXT Subject matter under subclass 142 wherein the surface element faces in a
    different or opposite direction than that of a light-directing element of
    an integral light-beam apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes combination wherein the light rays
    emitted by the integral light-beam apparatus are not intended to strike the
    mirror surface either directly or indirectly, e.g., vehicle spot light with
    an integral rear view mirror facing in the opposite direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61+,    for illuminating means combined with a vehicle.


CLS 362/144
TXT Subject matter under subclass 142 wherein a combination of said surface and
    light source, support or modifier may be readily changed in position as a
    unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65,     for a vehicle aperture with a retractable headlight.

    66,     for the combination of a vehicle with operating means to move a
    pivoted lamp.

    269,    for the combination of a light modifier and light source or support
    that is tiltable or rotatable as a unit.


CLS 362/145
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein a light source support or
    light source is combined with a component of a constructed stationary body,
    not classified elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass and those indented hereunder are placed
    patents whose claims all relate to the illuminating features to be applied
    to a body component and such combinations with modifications of the body
    merely for the promotion of illumination.  If novelty is claimed in the
    body or component structure with which a source of light is combined, which
    novelty is independent of the illumination, the patent is classified with
    the other body.

    (2)     Note.  In this subclass and those indented hereunder, support
    elements for a light source or unit which do not also function as supports
    for components of the stationary body or building are not considered body
    components for placement in this section.  That is, structure which has no
    other purpose than that of supporting a light source is not considered a
    static structure component for this section.

    (3)     Note.  Class 52, Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), takes
    building structure including features having functions in addition to
    merely supporting the illuminating means or forming the enclosure, barrier
    or other structure illuminated.  In interpreting this line, the presence of
    a claim to building structure not including illuminating means is
    considered conclusive of the fact that such additional function features
    are present.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    for door knob and keyhole illuminators.

    101,    for illumination means combined with a liquid container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g. Buildings), subclass 28 for the subject
    matter of that class combined with artificial illuminating means, and see
    the Search Class Note thereat with respect to this class.

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclass 91 for tents with
    lighting means.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    591+ for building interior illumination with outside light.


CLS 362/146
TXT Subject matter under subclass 145 wherein the component is part of a flight
    of stairs, its supporting framework, casing, baluster or railing.


CLS 362/147
TXT Subject matter under subclass 145 wherein the component is a vertical
    upright or overhead enclosing part of a room or building.


CLS 362/148
TXT Subject matter under subclass 147 comprising means forming a secondary
    horizontal barrier spaced below and coextensible with a ceiling and at
    least one light source supported relative to the secondary barrier or the
    ceiling such that light from the source is directed through or reflected
    from at least a portion of the secondary barrier.


CLS 362/149
TXT Subject matter under subclass 148 combined with means directing the flow of
    a liquid or gas.


CLS 362/150
TXT Subject matter under subclass 148 wherein at least one light source is
    supported by means supporting the secondary barrier.


CLS 362/151
TXT Subject matter under subclass 145 wherein the component is (1) a framed
    heading to conceal curtain tops or fixtures, or (2) a wall or ceiling
    molding.


CLS 362/152
TXT Subject matter under subclass 145 wherein the component is structure
    forming a border, fence, gate or awning.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146,    for interior fencing in the form of staircase posts and boards with
    illumination means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclasses 91 for canopies, per se.

    256,    Fences, appropriate subclasses for fences, per se.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 6+ for
    constructed stationary bodies such as traffic guides, markers and curbs.


CLS 362/153
TXT Subject matter under subclass 145 wherein the component is a surface of a
    structure on which one travels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146,    for staircase illuminators.

    152,    for borders or curbs with illumination means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    road structure, per se.


CLS 362/153.1
TXT Pavement:

    Subject matter under subclass 145 wherein the component is a paved surface
    on which vehicles travel, or on which vehicles are parked.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 9+ for lamp
    housings mounted in, or on, a paved surface wherein no electrical structure
    is claimed.


CLS 362/154
TXT Subject matter under the class definition combined with a receptacle for
    diverse articles not classified elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass and those indented thereunder are placed
    patents whose claims all relate to the illuminating features to be applied
    to a receptacle and such combinations with modifications of the receptacle
    merely for the promotion of illumination.  If novelty is claimed in the
    receptacle with which a source of light is combined, which novelty is
    independent of the illumination, the patent is classified with the
    receptacle.

    (2)     Note.  See the subclasses above for specific receptacles.
    Receptacles for illuminator elements, such as a casing for the batteries of
    a self powered light source, are not treated as receptacles for diverse
    articles for this section but rather are classified with the particular
    illumination feature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    for a liquid container with illumination means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, appropriate subclasses.


CLS 362/155
TXT Subject matter under subclass 154 combined with a circuit breaker linked
    with a closure for said receptacle to control the operation of a light
    source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94,     for the combination of a heater or refrigerator, illumination means
    and a door controlled switch.

    137,    for a vanity case with a mirror and a closure controlled switch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 84 for a
    door or closure controlled load device of that class type.


CLS 362/156
TXT Subject matter under subclass 154 wherein the receptacle is of the type
    that is carried by a person on a trip.


CLS 362/157
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising (1) a casing to
    support an energy source on or within the casing and a light source or a
    support for the light source powered by the energy source; or (2) a support
    to hold an energy source and a light source or a support for the light
    source powered by the energy source; or (3) a light modifier connected to a
    casing or support designed to support an energy source used to produce
    light wherein the modifier directs light from a light source powered by the
    energy source; or (4) a battery and a light source totally supported by the
    battery; or (5) subcombinations and elements of, and accessories limited in
    use to, an integral self energized lamp which produces illumination for
    general lighting not provided for elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  A reservoir for a source of energy may or may not be claimed
    in patents before 1920.  The total disclosure of patents prior to 1920
    including such a reservoir for a gas, liquid or solid burner if meeting the
    requirements of this subclass will allow the placement of a patent in this
    subclass.

    (2)     Note.  A gas, liquid or solid energy source, capable of chemically
    uniting with the oxygen of the air to produce primarily light and heat
    secondarily, a burner for the gas, liquid or solid energy source and an
    optical modifier of light generated by the energy source in the burner will
    be placed here when the energy source is contained integrally with the
    structure having the burner and the light modifier.

    (3)     Note.  Electric energy sources such as primary and secondary
    batteries and electric generators are here when the source is integral with
    the light generator.


CLS 362/158
TXT Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the casing encloses the energy
    source and the light source powered by the energy source and wherein the
    casing permits light emitted by the light source to exit through a portion
    of the casing which is light transmissive and wherein (1) the casing is
    sealed against liquid, gas or dust, or (2) an element or elements of the
    lamp are sealed against liquid, gas or dust, or (3) the lamp is encased in
    a covering which is transparent to the light emitted by the lamp, and which
    is sealed against liquid, gas or dust.

    (1)     Note.  The lamp may be enclosed in a container which may be
    partially or totally transparent to the light emitted by the light source,
    or the lamp casing may be sealed by structure such as a covering, a coating
    of material or joints or the casing may be sealed as by a gasket.  Further,
    a light element may be coated or potted to make the element fluid proof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21+,    for lamps which open the electrical circuit to the light bulb in
    case of fracture of the light source envelope or enclosure.

    164,    for nonelectric miners safety lamps (Davey Lamp).


CLS 362/159
TXT Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the light is generated by means
    other than means which converts energy associated with an electric current
    into visible radiant energy.

    (1)     Note.  Structure which is a subcombination of a nonelectric light
    unit but specialized for use with such a light unit is placed here or in
    the subclasses indented hereunder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209,    for plural nonelectric lamps not of the self-powered type.

    228+,   for plural lamps, one of which may be of the nonelectric,
    nonself-powered type.

    266+,   for nonelectric light source, not of the self-powered type combined
    with a light modifier.

    382+,   for light supports for or with a nonelectric light source of the
    nonself-powered type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 100+ for a mantle type illuminating burner
    and subclasses 298+ for a wick type liquid fuel burner.  Also see the
    Search Class Note under the class definition of Class 431.


CLS 362/160
TXT Subject matter under subclass 159 having means for burning acetylene for
    the emission of light and means to modify the emitted light.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, appropriate subclasses for gas
    generators.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses
    for a fluid distributor which may be disclosed as an illuminated burner.


CLS 362/161
TXT Subject matter under subclass 159 having a light unit comprising a wick or
    other capillary fuel conveying structure on which fuel burns, the wick
    being imbedded in a meltable solid fuel, e.g., wax, etc., which is meltable
    by the heat of the flame and is fed to the flame by the wick, or structure
    peculiarly adapted for supporting the solid fuel and a modifier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    190,    for imitation candles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 288+ for a candle or residual candle
    apparatus.


CLS 362/162
TXT Subject matter under subclass 161 having means to effect a reduction in
    size of the supporting structure from an operative condition to an
    inoperative condition.


CLS 362/163
TXT Subject matter under subclass 161 wherein the modifier is a single unit to
    encompass the candle and transmit light and having an opening at the top
    and bottom for the passage of air.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312,    for a chimney-type light modifier.


CLS 362/164
TXT Subject matter under subclass 159 having means to prevent a flame from
    igniting combustible gases which may surround the light unit.

    (1)     Note.  The means for preventing ignition is usually a fine screen.
    These devices are not sealed type units.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158,    for sealed units, e.g., dust proof, water tight, etc.


CLS 362/165
TXT Subject matter under subclass 164 having means to prevent unauthorized
    access to the light source.


CLS 362/166
TXT Subject matter under subclass 159 having means to absorb a portion of the
    light ray energy and transmit the remainder or means to stop all light ray
    energy from being transmitted.


CLS 362/167
TXT Subject matter under subclass 166 having a refractor or transparent housing
    closure (i.e., "lens") and wherein the selective wavelength transmitting or
    light blocking means is movable between the light source and the lens.


CLS 362/168
TXT Subject matter under subclass 167 having more than one lens.


CLS 362/169
TXT Subject matter under subclass 166 having more than one refractor or
    transparent housing closure members through which light is transmitted.


CLS 362/170
TXT Subject matter under subclass 169 having means whereby a light unit body is
    revolved on a support.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass type includes plural
    lenses generally of different colors so that by rotating the unit a change
    in color will be visible to one looking at the unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168,    for nonelectric lamps having plural lenses and separate selective
    wavelength transmitting or light blocking means movable between at least
    one of the lenses and the light source.


CLS 362/171
TXT Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein a portion of the products of
    combustion is led back to the flame or in which the air, or a portion
    thereof, for combustion is preheated by the combustion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 79 for heating stoves that are
    provided with means for returning the gases or products of combustion from
    the smoke outlet to the combustion chamber of the stove.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 104+ for a mantle-type burner in which the
    fuel is heated by the products of combustion, and subclass 215 for a burner
    in which the exhaust products heat the burner fuel.


CLS 362/172
TXT Subject matter under subclass 171 wherein the lamp's lower part is
    peculiarly structured.

    (1)     Note.  Generally the structure of this subclass type relates to the
    tubes leading to the burner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181,    for base structure, per se.


CLS 362/173
TXT Subject matter under subclass 171 wherein the lamp's upper part is
    peculiarly structured.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass generally relates to the
    hood or dome structure which connects with the upper end of the tubes and
    which allow the escape of the products of combustion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182,    for dome structure, per se.


CLS 362/174
TXT Subject matter under subclass 171 wherein a globe is movable with respect
    to its support structure for access to the burner.


CLS 362/175
TXT Subject matter under subclass 174 wherein the globe has one motion away
    from the support structure and another motion of rotation about a pivot.


CLS 362/176
TXT Subject matter under subclass 174 wherein the globe is moved in alternate
    directions in a straight line.


CLS 362/177
TXT Subject matter under subclass 174 wherein the globe is rotatably
    reciprocated about a fixed axis.


CLS 362/178
TXT Subject matter under subclass 171 wherein details of the tube construction
    is enumerated.


CLS 362/179
TXT Subject matter under subclass 159 having a lace-like hood or envelope of
    thin, porous refractory material which, when positioned in a flame,
    incandesces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 100+ for an incandescent mantle.


CLS 362/180
TXT Subject matter under subclass 159 having means to encompass a light source
    and transmit light and has an opening on the top and bottom for a draft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312,    for chimney refraction, per se.


CLS 362/181
TXT Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein a light unit lower part is
    peculiarly structured.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172,    for base structure of a tubular-type light unit.


CLS 362/182
TXT Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein a light unit upper part is
    peculiarly structured.


CLS 362/183
TXT Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the energy source is an electric
    battery enclosed within a casing and having a light source energizeable by
    the battery and electric connectors supported by the casing to permit
    electrical energy to be passed from outside the casing and electrical means
    external or internal of the casing connected to the connectors and to the
    battery or to the light source or support therefor, whereby electric power
    supplied to the electrical means (1) directly, or indirectly through the
    light source support, energizes the light source, or (2) recharges the
    battery when the light source or light source support is electrically
    disconnected from the battery.

    (1)     Note.  The battery in this subclass is a rechargeable or a regular
    dry cell battery.

    (2)     Note.  The subcombination of a self-powered lamp which includes
    charging terminals to connect an external power source to the battery of
    self-powered lamp is placed here.

    (3)     Note.  Here also are self-powered lamps with integral charging
    means.


CLS 362/184
TXT Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein there are one or more casings
    which support within the casing or casings an electrical battery or
    batteries and there are plural electrical filament bulb light sources
    supported on the casing or casings, or there are plural light bulb supports
    supported on the casing or casings.


CLS 362/185
TXT Subject matter under subclass 184 which includes a guard held by a casing
    to protect the bulbs or bulb sockets from damage and which permits light
    from the light bulb or light from a bulb when supported by the bulb
    support, to pass through.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186,    for wire guards protecting a bulb or bulb socket when combined with
    a flashlight casing.


CLS 362/186
TXT Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the energy source is an electric
    battery supported on or within the casing, the light source is an electric
    filament light source and the light source support is for an electric
    filament light bulb and there is (1) a light transmissive member
    surrounding the filament light source or light source support to permit
    light, emitted from the source or a source supported by the support, to be
    transmitted through the member in at least one hundred and eighty degrees
    of angle in more than one plane, or (2) a protective member covering the
    light bulb or the light bulb support which permits light from the light
    bulb or from a light bulb when supported by the light bulb support to pass
    through the protective member.


CLS 362/187
TXT Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein there is at least one optical
    light modifier which receives light emitted by the light source and wherein
    the light source, the light source support or the optical modifier is
    adjustably mounted so that manual adjustment of the light source, light
    source support or the light modifier will cause a change in the light
    pattern formed by the light.


CLS 362/188
TXT Subject matter under subclass 187 wherein the light or the light source
    support is movable.


CLS 362/189
TXT Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the casing encloses a battery and
    also holds an electric light source or support therefor or wherein there is
    a support to hold a battery and an electric light source or support
    therefor, and wherein (1) the arrangement of the battery, light source
    and/or light source support is designed not to be reused, or (2) the casing
    or support is formed in part of a material which is deformable.

    (1)     Note.  The term "deformable" includes plastic, metal in the form of
    foil and cellulose material such as paper. Here, the casing or support may
    be extruded, cast or stamped or may be a wrapping, but the material of the
    casing or support is flexible.

    (2)     Note.  If, as recited, the battery is integral with a bulb or a
    bulb socket or light modifier and the unit is a "throw-away," the claim is
    classifiable in the subclass.  If, as recited, only the battery pack unit,
    as opposed to a battery or individual batteries which can be replaced, is
    replaceable and separable from the light bulb or bulb socket and the
    battery pack unit supports the lamp bulb or lamp bulb socket, the claim is
    classifiable in subclasses 194+.


CLS 362/190
TXT Subject matter under subclass 157 having means to position, by itself or in
    combination with some other disclosed means, a self-powered lamp with
    respect to some reference point or reference structure.

    (1)     Note.  The "reference point" or "reference structure" of this
    subclass type need not be included in or part of the claimed combination.
    For example, a "reference point" of this subclass type may be on or
    included in structure fixedly positioned with respect to the earth's
    surface, such as a table or floor, from which reference point the
    self-powered lamp is positioned at least in part by the means of this
    subclass type, as for example, a base.


CLS 362/191
TXT Subject matter under subclass 190 combined with or having means to attach
    the support to the reference structure.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of "reference structure" as used in this
    subclass, see the definition of subclass 190, (1) Note.

    (2)     Note.  The reference structure may be an animate or inanimate
    support.  The "means to attach the support" of this subclass includes:
    handles, bails, clamps, hooks, hangers, straps, magnets and suction cups.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103+,   for a lamp held by a piece of wearing apparel or a body support.

    249+,   for a support holding plural light sources.

    269,    for a light source or light support with a light modifier held on a
    rotatable or tiltable support.

    285,    for a light source or support with a light modifier held on an
    adjustable or repositional support.

    382+,   for a light support, per se, particularly subclass 382 for a strap
    support, subclasses 396+ for a clamp or hood support, subclass 398 for a
    magnetic support, and subclasses 399+ for a handle or bail support.


CLS 362/192
TXT Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the energy source is a means
    which converts mechanical energy into electrical energy.


CLS 362/193
TXT Subject matter under subclass 192 wherein the mechanical energy is imparted
    to the generator by a moving member which frictionally engages a movable
    part of the generator.


CLS 362/194
TXT Subject matter under subclass 157 comprising an electric voltaic energy
    source, and an electric light source or support therefor totally supported
    by the voltaic energy source.


CLS 362/195
TXT Subject matter under subclass 194 wherein the voltaic energy source has
    electrical connectors attached to the voltaic energy source to deliver the
    energy of the source externally of the source to the light source or light
    source support and the light source or light source support is totally
    supported by one or more of the connectors.


CLS 362/196
TXT Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the casing is composed of two
    similar parts which together form the flashlight casing.


CLS 362/197
TXT Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein an electric light source or
    support therefor and the casing each has an axis, and the axis of the light
    source or light source support is permanently at an angle to the axis of
    the casing, or the axis of the light source or light source support is
    adjustable relative to the axis of the casing.

    (1)     Note.  An arrangement of a light source or light source support
    having an axis and a casing having an axis parallel to the axis of the
    light source or light source support is excluded from this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type includes, for example,
    "elbow flashlights."

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191,    for a flashlight casing or an end with a support for holding the
    casing or cap.

    200+,   for flashlights which have a casing having at least two major sides
    parallel to each other and the light source or light source support and
    battery are supported by the casing.

    202,    for cylindrical flashlights whose casing supports a lamp bulb or a
    lamp support and encloses a battery.


CLS 362/198
TXT Subject matter under subclass 197 wherein the light source or light source
    support is connected to the casing by a means which is movable to permit
    the light source or light source support to be moved to various locations
    consistent with the length of the means or by an electric cord of such
    length to permit the light source or light source support to be moved to
    various locations consistent with the length of the cord.

    (1)     Note.  The means of this subclass type may be, for example,
    telescopic, flexible, and sectional pivoted members.


CLS 362/199
TXT Subject matter under subclass 197 wherein the light source or light source
    support is mounted upon the casing so that the light source or light source
    support is turnable about a point.


CLS 362/200
TXT Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the casing encloses an electric
    battery and includes at least two planar surfaces parallel to each other
    and supports an electrical filament lamp bulb.


CLS 362/201
TXT Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the lamp bulb includes an
    electric contact and the battery has an electrical contact and the contact
    of the bulb always physically touches the contact of the battery to pass an
    electrical current through the contacts from the battery to the filament.


CLS 362/202
TXT Subject matter under subclass 157 comprising casings for electrically
    self-powered lamp wherein the casing is an elongated hollow member having a
    generally circular cross-section.


CLS 362/203
TXT Subject matter under subclass 202 having a battery of the primary type with
    electrical terminals and an electrical light source or support therefor
    having electrical terminals and a device to move a terminal of the light
    source or light source support into or away from the contact with a
    terminal of the battery.


CLS 362/204
TXT Subject matter under subclass 202 having a battery of the primary type and
    a casing which is a nonconductor of electricity and a first conductor
    supported by the casing and a second conductor separated electrically from
    the first conductor and also supported by the casing and an electrical
    current make and break device electrically connecting the first and second
    conductors to selectively pass current between the battery and an electric
    light source or support therefor.


CLS 362/205
TXT Subject matter under subclass 202 having a primary battery with electrical
    terminals and an electric light source having terminals or an electric
    light source support having at least one electrical terminal contactable
    with one or more terminals of the light source and a manually operated
    electrical current make or break device electrically connecting or
    disconnecting one of the terminals of the battery with a terminal of the
    light source or light source support.


CLS 362/206
TXT Subject matter under subclass 205 wherein the cylinder has two ends and the
    electrical light source or the support therefor is located at one end of
    the cylinder and the switch is located at the other end of the cylinder.


CLS 362/207
TXT Subject matter under subclass 157 comprising an attachment to the
    self-energized lamp to hold and extra electrical filament type (lamp bulb)
    light source, which attachment is supported on or within an electrical
    self-energized lamp or on a subcombination thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The spare electrical bulb may be supported on the end cap of
    the flashlight, on the spring, between an end cap and the battery or
    batteries, which forms part of the electrical circuit between the battery
    or batteries and the lamp bulb, on the reflector of a flashlight or on any
    member forming part of the flashlight.


CLS 362/208
TXT Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the subcombinations or elements
    of self energized lamps include parts and arrangements of parts necessary
    to form a complete electric flashlight but not in themselves forming a
    complete flashlight and and adjuncts to complete electric flashlights which
    permit a flashlight to function as a light source in a manner different
    from the normal use of a flashlight itself.


CLS 362/209
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein there are two or more
    spatially separate light sources and wherein at least two of the sources
    are comprised of light emitting means other than means which converts
    energy associated with an electric current into visible radiant energy and
    means to modify the light therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228+,   for plural light sources, one of which may be nonelectric.

    266,    for a nonelectric light source (or support therefor) combined with
    a light modifier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    431,    Combustion, for nonelectric light sources, per se.


CLS 362/210
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein there are two or more
    spatially separate light sources at least two of which include an electrode
    containing carbon which is consumed during the operation of the device and
    means to modify the light therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209+,   for a carbon arc-type light source and means to modify the light
    therefrom.

    228,    for plural light source, one of which may be of the carbon arc type.


CLS 362/211
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising combinations of two or
    more selectively energizeable filament type light sources in a common
    envelope and a modifier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227+,   for two or more selectively energizeable filament type light
    sources each in its own envelope.


CLS 362/212
TXT Subject matter under subclass 211 provided with means to actuate the
    various filaments, either singularly or simultaneously.


CLS 362/213
TXT Subject matter under subclass 211 wherein means are provided for permitting
    the modifier and light source to be moved relative to each other to vary
    the distribution of light.


CLS 362/214
TXT Subject matter under subclass 211 provided with means to absorb, or
    randomly scatter some or all of the light from at least one of the
    filaments.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type includes, for example,
    translucent screens.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215,    for corrugated, faceted or fluted reflectors or lenses combined
    with multiple filament light sources.


CLS 362/215
TXT Devices under subclass 211 wherein the light modifier has a complex
    modifying surface comprised of a plurality of angularly related planes or
    plurality of surfaces of revolution.


CLS 362/216
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising a source of light
    which, as recited in the claims, is virtually a curved line.

    (1)     Note.  Included in the subject matter of this subclass is, for
    example, a light source comprised of a continuous fluorescent surface of
    revolution generated about a nonlinear axis since the rays of light emitted
    by such a light source, if extended inwardly, all meet on the nonlinear
    axis which thus constitutes the virtual curved line light source of this
    subclass type.

    (2)     Note.  The light source of this subclass type are either recited as
    being curvilinear or as in combination with means whose recited structure
    and function necessarily recognize the curvilinearity of the light source.
    Thus, a filament type light source is not necessarily classifiable here
    even though the filament may be disclosed as being curved.


CLS 362/217
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising (a) a light source
    (see, Glossary:  "Light Source") which is virtually a straight line, at
    least in part, or having a dimension substantially greater in one direction
    than any in a plane transverse to said direction, and a light modifier
    (see, Glossary:  "Light Modifier") structurally related to the light source
    so as to modify light therefrom, or (b) a support for such a light source
    with or without a light modifier.

    (1)     Note.  Light sources of the type provided for in this subclass and
    the subclasses indented hereunder are usually recited as "tubular",
    "elongated", "linear", "cylindrical", and "extended".  In all other cases,
    the elongated nature of the light source must be implied by the claims
    themselves or necessarily imputed from the claimed disclosure in order to
    render the claimed combination structurally complete and operative for the
    functions referred to in the claim.  For example:  "means to support a pair
    of fluorescent lamps" is sufficient basis for placement in this subclass or
    the subclasses indented hereunder even though fluorescent lamps are often
    elongated since the word "fluorescent" itself does not imply length.  On
    the other hand, "means to support a pair of lamps parallel to each other"
    is sufficient basis for placement in this subclass or the subclasses
    indented hereunder since the word "parallel" implies that the lamps have
    length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    260,    "fluorescent type", for combination of a fluorescent light source
    or support therefor and a modifier wherein the source is not an elongated
    type.


CLS 362/218
TXT Subject matter under subclass 217 having means to remove heat generated by
    the light from some part of the claimed combination.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     for fluent material means for conveying thermal energy generated by
    means other than the light source from one point to another.


CLS 362/219
TXT Subject matter under subclass 217 having means to structurally interconnect
    two or more elongated source light units or supports such that the long
    dimension of the respective light sources extend along the same line.


CLS 362/220
TXT Subject matter under subclass 217 having at least one supporting means for
    an elongated light source which supporting means is so structurally related
    to some other part of the claimed combination as to permit the support to
    be moved from one position to another relative to the other part of the
    combination.

    (1)     Note.  Included in the subject matter of this subclass are light
    source supports comprising two or more spatially separated means for
    supporting the same light source, one of which is movable relative to the
    other to accommodate light sources of different lengths.


CLS 362/221
TXT Subject matter under subclass 217 having means structurally relating (as by
    housing or supporting) a circuit element other than the light source or its
    terminal connectors to the light source, its support or the light modifier.

    (1)     Note.  The circuit elements of this subclass type do not include
    mere electrical connection means such as wiring, terminals, or connectors.
    Switches, however, are included.


CLS 362/222
TXT Subject matter under subclass 221 in which the claimed combination includes
    an element made in whole or in part of a light pervious material.

    (1)     Note.  The element may be a light modifier or, for example, a part
    of the light housing.


CLS 362/223
TXT Subject matter under subclass 217 in which the claimed combination includes
    an element made in whole or in part of a light pervious material.

    (1)     Note.  The element may be a light modifier or, for example, a part
    of the light housing.


CLS 362/224
TXT Subject matter under subclass 223 having two or more elements made in whole
    or in part of a light pervious material.


CLS 362/225
TXT Subject matter under subclass 217 having two or more elongated light
    sources or supports for two or more elongated light sources.


CLS 362/226
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising an electric light
    source or an electric light source support and a housing or modifier for
    the light source mutually supported by electrical connector means which are
    quickly attachable to and removable from an electric circuit.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 313, Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, Note VII
    for the line between this class and Class 313.


CLS 362/227
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including more than one source of
    light (see, Glossary: "Light Source").

    (1)     Note.  For inclusion here and in the indented subclasses the
    sources must be claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for plural sources arranged to provide a condensed and shadowless
    illumination for a work area.

    209,    for plural nonelectric light sources.

    210,    for plural carbon arc-type light sources.

    211,    for a multiple filament source in a light unit.

    217+,   for plural elongated light sources in a light unit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    399,    Electrophotography, for illumination systems including light
    sources used in electrophotographic devices, specifically subclasses 177+
    for exposure.


CLS 362/228
TXT Subject matter under subclass 227 wherein at least one of the light sources
    consists of a light emitting heated or ionized solid or gas of one type and
    at least one other light source consists of a light emitting heated or
    ionized solid or gas of another type.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of types of diverse light generators provided for
    in this subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder include any two of
    the following:  electrically (resistively) heated carbon filament,
    electrically (resistively) heated tungsten filament, electrically ionized
    neon, hot gaseous products of combustion (flame), partially ionized
    (irradiated) phosphor coating (fluorescent tube).


CLS 362/229
TXT Subject matter under subclass 228 wherein at least one light source is the
    flame of a burning gas and at least one other is an electrical generator of
    visible radiation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    457,    for fittings used in combined gas and electric fixtures.


CLS 362/230
TXT Subject matter under subclass 227 wherein at least one of the light sources
    emits light of specified wavelength or spectral distribution or wherein at
    least one modifier affects light of at least one wavelength differently
    from light of at least one other wavelength.


CLS 362/231
TXT Subject matter under subclass 230 having at least one source of light
    emitting light having a spectral distribution different from the light
    emitted by at least one other source, or having at least two modifiers each
    of which affects light of one selected wavelength differently from light of
    another wavelength, the selected wavelengths of the two modifiers being
    different.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for subject matter for producing particular wavelengths for the
    purpose of simulating daylight.


CLS 362/232
TXT Subject matter under subclass 227 wherein means are provided for moving, or
    adjusting the position of a source relative to its modifier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277+,   for adjustable or repositionable modifier not claimed in
    combination with plural sources.

    285+,   for an adjustable light source.

    319+,   for an adjustable or positionable light modifier.


CLS 362/233
TXT Subject matter under subclass 227 wherein means are provided which permit
    at least one of the light sources or its modifier to be moved by or under
    the control of a human operator situated beyond reach of the light source
    or modifier.


CLS 362/234
TXT Subject matter under subclass 227 in combination with features other than
    light modifying elements, light support structure, or electrical connection
    means, and not provided for in preceding subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    253,    for combined subject matter wherein plural light sources are not
    claimed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 216+ for the combination
    of a lamp assemblage, or package or a lamp with disparate means.  Note,
    "Assemblage" and "Package" concepts are stated in Class 206.


CLS 362/235
TXT Subject matter under subclass 227 including means to alter the distribution
    or composition of incident light from at least one light source, by
    changing its direction or by the absorption of some or all its energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for light polarizers.

    230,    for similar subject matter wherein the particular wavelength is
    claimed.

    257,    for a light modifier combined with a light source (or support
    therefor).

    317,    for a light modifier, per se.


CLS 362/236
TXT Subject matter under subclass 235 wherein each of at least two light
    sources is associated with a modifier which does not receive light directly
    from the other source or sources.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257+,   for a light source or support therefor and modifier.


CLS 362/237
TXT Subject matter under subclass 236 wherein the light modifiers in the light
    units are substantially duplicates or mirror images of one another.


CLS 362/238
TXT Subject matter under subclass 237 including means to spatially locate
    plural units with respect to each other or with respect to a common support.

    (1)     Note.  The positioning means frequently includes a conduit for the
    electrical supply.


CLS 362/239
TXT Subject matter under subclass 238 wherein the positioning means also
    constitutes or provides means enabling the plural units to be adjusted
    relative to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233,    for remote adjustment or positioning means.


CLS 362/240
TXT Subject matter under subclass 237 including means to enclose two or more
    light units.

    (1)     Note.  A housing provides a window for the ingress and egress of
    light, which may have a transparent or translucent cover, and often has
    ventilation openings, but otherwise totally encloses the light units.


CLS 362/241
TXT Subject matter under subclass 237 wherein the modifiers each have a surface
    which redirects the light back into the medium from which it came.


CLS 362/242
TXT Subject matter under subclass 236 wherein a modifier associated with a
    light source is of a different type than the modifier associated with
    another light source.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of different types of light modifiers are light
    reflectors, light concentrating refractors, light diffusing refractors,
    light filters, and light blocking shields.


CLS 362/243
TXT Subject matter under subclass 242 wherein one of the light modifiers has a
    surface which redirects the light back into the medium from which it came.


CLS 362/244
TXT Subject matter under subclass 236 wherein a modifier includes means having
    a pair of surfaces which causes light passing through to bend, and thus
    emerge from the means at an angle different from which it entered.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246,    for refractors which scatter light.

    326,    for refractors, per se.


CLS 362/245
TXT Subject matter under subclass 244 including means which redirects light
    back into the medium from which it came in addition to a refraction type
    modifier.

    (1)     Note.  The reflector may be part of the same light unit having a
    refractor, or may be part of a distinct light unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327,    for a light modifier, per se, comprising a refractor with a
    reflector.


CLS 362/246
TXT Subject matter under subclass 244 wherein the refractor randomly scatters
    the emergent light.


CLS 362/247
TXT Subject matter under subclass 236 wherein a modifier includes means to
    redirect light back into the medium from which it came.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    341,    for a reflector modifier, per se.


CLS 362/248
TXT Subject matter under subclass 236 including means to block or absorb light
    rays from a source.

    (1)     Note.  A "shade" which reflects light is a reflector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    351,    for shielding type modifiers, per se.


CLS 362/249
TXT Subject matter under subclass 227 including means to spatially position a
    light source relative to some reference point or structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    382+,   for supports for plural light sources, per se.


CLS 362/250
TXT Subject matter under subclass 249 wherein the support includes means to
    vary the position of the light source or sources relative to the reference
    point or structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233,    for remote adjustment means.


CLS 362/251
TXT Subject matter under subclass 249 including electrical means to control the
    electrical current to a light source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, for switch structure,
    per se.


CLS 362/252
TXT Subject matter under subclass 249 wherein the light sources are supported
    in a specific spatial relationship.

    (1)     Note.  The arrangement of the sources is often designed to suggest
    some other object, such as a star of flag.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    392,    for an imitation candle support, per se.

    416,    for a harp or font.


CLS 362/253
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising combinations not
    elsewhere provided for of basic subject matter of the class, including
    subcombinations thereof, with additional means whose proximate function in
    the combination does not contribute to the efficacy (i.e., intended
    proximate function) of the class type subject matter.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass constitutes the residual locus for the
    combination of illuminating means with the object being illuminated.  For
    example, the combinations of a light source and a modifier bearing
    locomotive identification numbers is classified here since, even though the
    modifier is class type subject matter, the function of the indicia is,
    primarily, to express information about the locomotive and only secondarily
    to modify the light from the source by altering its distribution.  Mere
    combinations however of light sources and colored lenses, for example, to
    be used as signaling means are not classified here since such combinations
    only constitute basic subject matter of the class.  Also, combinations of
    illuminating means and signalling means which conveys information about the
    illuminating means are not classified here since the proximate function for
    the signaling means (i.e., to convey information) contributes to the
    efficacy of the illuminating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 204+ for illuminated
    license plates, various subclasses under 427+ and 446+ for illuminated
    display devices, subclass 540 for illuminated dummies, subclasses 541+ for
    illuminated signs, particular subclass 556 for vehicle light, and subclass
    557 for streetlights with signs.


CLS 362/254
TXT Subject matter under the class definition having at least two light
    supports which are movable with respect to an energy source or one light
    bulb with plural energy source contacts which is movable with respect to an
    energy source.

    (1)     Note.  The light support or light bulb are moved because one or the
    other has failed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for a light source substitution done automatically.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 236 for electric
    lamps, per se, which are provided with a spare electrode to replace a
    defective electrode, subclass 237 for electric lamps, per se, which are
    provided with means to replace a defective electrode or which are readily
    demountable so as to be easily repaired, and subclasses 272 and 316 for
    plural filament incandescent lamps.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 87 and 88,
    and indented subclasses for electric lamp and electric space discharge
    device systems provided with means to substitute another lamp or electric
    space discharge device for the operating lamp or discharge device if the
    operating lamp or discharge device fails to operate properly.  Class 362
    provides for such subject matter when the protector, support, or light
    distributor is claimed.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+ for means
    automatically responsive to a condition and search class for other classes
    with related art.


CLS 362/255
TXT Subject matter under the class definition consisting of a light modifier
    having or combined with means cooperable with a light source envelope base
    (see, Glossary: "Light Source") to fixedly position the modifier relative
    thereto.

    (1)     Note.  The cooperable means may, for example, grip or press against
    the envelope or press the modifier against the envelope with sufficient
    force that the friction between the contacting surfaces prevent one surface
    from moving relative to the other under normal operating conditions.


CLS 362/256
TXT Subject matter under subclass 255 combined with one or more light modifiers
    not mounted on the light source envelope.


CLS 362/257
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprised of a light source (see,
    Glossary: "Light Source") or support therefor and a modifier (see,
    Glossary:  "Light Modifier") structurally related to the light source so as
    to modify light therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  Nominal recitations of a light unit (e.g., "light unit",
    "headlight", "lamp") generally imply only a source of light and are
    insufficient basis for placement in this subclass and the subclasses
    indented hereunder unless a light source and a light modifier must be
    imputed from the claimed disclosure to render the claimed combination
    structurally complete and operative for the functions referred to in the
    claim.

    (2)     Note.  Light sources having light modifying envelopes are not
    classifiable, per se, in this class (362).  (For the loci of such subject
    matter, see the Search Class Notes below).  However, combinations of such
    light sources with additional modifying means are classifiable in this
    subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    317+,   for combinations of a modifier and a light source which may be
    spatially related but are not related by the structure of the claimed
    combination.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 110+ for light
    sources having light modifying envelopes, per se.

    399,    Electrophotography, for illumination systems including light
    sources used in electrophotographic devices, specifically subclasses 177+
    for exposure.


CLS 362/258
TXT Subject matter under subclass 257 which includes an electric light source
    lamp or support therefor; a flexible extensible electric cord connected to
    the light source or light source support to deliver electric energy to the
    lamp and a cord storage device to hold the cord when not in use or to
    retain the excess portion of cord that is not needed at the moment; the
    cord being of such length as to permit the light source to be used as a
    portable light at varying distances from an electrical power source up to
    the limit of the length of the cord.

    (1)     Note.  The line between Class 191, Electricity: Transmission to
    Vehicles, Class 362, Illumination, and Class 242, Winding, Tensioning, or
    Guiding is as follows:  A claim including an in name only lamp combined
    with a flexible extension cord to deliver electrical energy to the lamp and
    a cord storage device to store the cord is in Class 191, subclasses 12+.
    Class 362 will take a claim to illumination structure beyond a nominal
    recitation of a lamp, or light unit.  Class 242 which is generic to winding
    and reeling of indefinite length material will not take a claim restricted
    to use with electrical conductors, which transmit electrical energy.


CLS 362/259
TXT Subject matter under subclass 257 wherein the light source is a molecular
    or atomic oscillator having an optical resonator which produces a narrow,
    intense beam of coherent, visible light.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, appropriate subclasses for laser type
    light sources, per se.


CLS 362/260
TXT Subject matter under subclass 257 wherein the source of light is a solid or
    liquid material which emits visible light when irradiated by invisible
    radiation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     for a luminescent material combined with a source (or support
    therefor) of visible light.

    217+,   for an illuminating device having an elongated fluorescent type
    light source or having supports for such a light source.

    263+,   for light sources comprised of a gas or vapor which emits visible
    light when ionized by invisible radiant energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, particularly subclasses 483+
    for fluorescent light sources, per se.


CLS 362/261
TXT Subject matter under subclass 257 wherein the light source has an electrode
    containing carbon which is consumed during the operation of the device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    appropriate subclasses for consumable electrode and the electric systems
    therefor.  Also, see notes to other classes that utilize consumable
    electrodes.


CLS 362/262
TXT Subject matter under subclass 261 having means to feed the electrode by
    gravity or positive means to move the electrode.


CLS 362/263
TXT Subject matter under subclass 257 wherein the light source consists of a
    gas or vapor containing ionized or partially ionized molecules or atoms
    which, in changing their ionization states from nonionized to ionized or
    vice versa or from one ionization level to another, emit visible radiant
    energy.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass and the subclasses
    indented hereunder includes, for example, gas or vapor discharge-type light
    sources and "glow" tubes which are virtually point sources of light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216,    for an ionized gas or vapor light source which is or includes a
    virtually curved line segment.

    217+,   for an ionized gas or vapor light source which is or includes a
    virtually straight line segment.

    260,    for a fluorescent light source which emits visible light in
    response to incident invisible radiation emitted from an ionized gas or
    vapor discharge.


CLS 362/264
TXT Subject matter under subclass 263 having means for raising or lowering the
    temperature of the light source, light source support or light modifier.


CLS 362/265
TXT Subject matter under subclass 263 having operatively associated therewith
    an inductive, capacitive or resistive circuit element.


CLS 362/266
TXT Subject matter under subclass 257 wherein the light is generated by means
    other than means which converts energy associated with an electric current
    into visible radiant energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312+,   for a nonelectric light source having a light pervious chimney.

    382+,   for supports for or with nonelectric light sources, particularly
    subclass 409 for ceiling-suspended supports and subclass 415 for
    standard-type supports.


CLS 362/267
TXT Subject matter under subclass 257 having a means (e.g., gasket) filling the
    space between two adjacent elements to prevent matter on one side of the
    elements from passing between them to the other side or having a gas other
    than air in contact, at least in part, with the source, support therefor,
    or modifier.

    (1)     Note.  Mere recitation of a "sealed" light source (or support
    therefor) and modifier (e.g., "sealed-beam head lamp") is insufficient
    basis for classification in this subclass if the sealing means itself is
    not recited.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306,    for resilient means to force a source or modifier element into
    engagement with another adjacent element without a sealing means between
    the two elements.

    310,    for housing means for a light source or light source support and
    modifier without a sealing means between two adjacent parts.


CLS 362/268
TXT Subject matter under subclass 257 including a plurality of lens elements or
    lens components for concentrating or spreading a light beam.

    (1)     Note.  The term "component" as applied to a lens designates either
    a single transparent mass of refractive material having two opposed
    refracting surfaces or a grouped plurality of such masses arranged in
    series along the optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
    surfaces either in full over all contact or in spaced parallel relation
    with the spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into
    the lens computations; the two refracting surfaces of the single mass and
    the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of the plurality of masses
    having at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced from all other
    adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens.  The axial
    dimension of the air-spacing between either the opposed surfaces of the
    single mass or the axially extreme surfaces of the grouped plurality of
    masses and the other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in
    the lens must be of sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens
    computations in order to limit the axial extent of the lens component.

    (2)     Note.  The term "element" as applied to a lens designates any
    single transparent mass of refractive material having two opposed
    refracting surfaces which surfaces are disposed transversely of the optical
    axis of the lens and spaced there along; i.e., any one of the masses in the
    above component definition regardless of its spacing from adjacent
    refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    642+ for lenses, per se, and the appropriate subclasses.


CLS 362/269
TXT Subject matter under subclass 257 wherein the light source (or support
    therefor) and modifier are structurally related by a common support having
    means to permit the light source (or support therefor) and modifier to
    assume two different positions about an axis without moving with respect to
    each other.

    (1)     Note.  The recitation of a "sealed-beam headlight" is considered a
    nominal recitation of a light source and the combination of a "sealed beam
    headlight" and a tiltable or rotatable  supporting means is therefore not
    classified in this subclass or the subclasses indented hereunder if no
    light modifier is recited in the combination.  Such combinations are
    classified elsewhere and cross-referenced to this subclass or the
    subclasses indented hereunder.

    (2)     Note.  Light units which are held in one position by resilient
    means are not classifiable in this subclass or the subclasses indented
    hereunder merely because an outside force acting against the resilient
    means can rotate or tilt the unit temporarily to a second position.  The
    second position is not considered "assumed" since it lasts only as long as
    the outside force is applied.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66,     for a pivoted lamp or lamp support combined with vehicle structure,
    e.g., fender.

    306,    for a light source or modifier held in place by resilient means and
    having no means recited to vary the position of the light source or
    modifier.

    365+,   for means to mount a tiltable or rotatable lamp housing (e.g., a
    "sealed beam" unit) in a recess in, for example, unclaimed vehicle
    structure.


CLS 362/270
TXT Subject matter under subclass 269 wherein means are provided to permit and
    guide movement of the light source (or support therefor) and modifier in a
    straight line with respect to the common support without moving relative to
    each other.


CLS 362/271
TXT Subject matter under subclass 269 having means to move the unit relative to
    its support.


CLS 362/272
TXT Subject matter under subclass 271 wherein the actuator converts the
    potential energy of a voltage or pressure differential into a force which
    moves the unit.


CLS 362/273
TXT Subject matter under subclass 271 wherein the light unit is structurally
    related to its support by a relatively rotatable helix-shaped member such
    that rotation of the member about the axis of the helix produces movement
    of the unit in the direction of the axis of the helix.


CLS 362/274
TXT Subject matter under subclass 271 wherein the unit is structurally related
    to its support by a yieldable means in such a way that relative movement
    between the unit and its support results in deformation of the yieldable
    means.


CLS 362/275
TXT Subject matter under subclass 269 wherein the unit is rotatable with
    respect to its support about two or more axes.

    (1)     Note.  Light units mounted for universal movement are classifiable
    here, such means may include resilient positioning means urging the unit in
    one direction against a stop which prohibits movement in that direction but
    still allows tilting or rotating of the unit caused by, for example, a
    movement acting on the unit.


CLS 362/276
TXT Subject matter under subclass 257 with or including means which
    continuously senses a variable incident force or energy field and which
    varies or maintains the distribution, composition or intensity of light
    from the source or modifier in response to changes in the sensed force or
    energy.

    (1)     Note.  The sensing means of this subclass may respond, for example,
    to relative changes in direction of the force or gravity, changes in gas
    pressure, changes in incident radiant energy or changes in thermal energy.

    (2)     Note.  The condition responsive means of this subclass type may
    vary the distribution composition or intensity of light continuously with
    changes in the sensed force or energy or abruptly at some level of sensed
    force or energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    384,    for a light source or light source support, per se, movable by a
    gravity responsive pivoted weight.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 1+
    for automatically controlled flexible closures and partitions of general
    utility.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for photocell electric circuits and
    photocell apparatus.  Indented subclass 205 includes those photocells which
    control a shutter in the light path between light source and photocell;
    subclasses 552+ include a photocell means which detects a light emitting
    source wherein the source is solid state.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 82+ and
    149+ for photoelectrically controlled electric lamp circuits (e.g.,
    shifting from "bright" to "dim" filament).

    340,    Communications: Electrical, appropriate subclasses for condition
    responsive lamps which convey information about the condition sensed.


CLS 362/277
TXT Subject matter under subclass 257 wherein means is provided for
    structurally relating the modifier to the light source, light source
    support or some other part of the claimed combination in two or more
    positions of the illuminated surface of the modifier or from an illuminated
    position to an unilluminated position.


CLS 362/278
TXT Subject matter under subclass 277 wherein the modifier is made of a
    deformable material and is adjusted or repositioned by deformation.


CLS 362/279
TXT Subject matter under subclass 277 wherein the modifier includes at least
    two spaced adjacent modifying means each having at least two plane or
    curved surfaces of the type generated by a straight or curved line (the
    "generatrix"); the means being so arranged relative to each other and to
    the light source that (a) no two of the surfaces are generated by an
    extension of the same generatrix, (b) one of the surfaces of one means
    faces one of the surfaces of the adjacent means, (c) one of the surfaces of
    each means is exposed to light from the light source, and (d) light from
    the source is able to pass both surfaces of each means and at least one of
    the surfaces in a direction parallel or tangent to its generatrix, the
    means movable relative to the light source but fixed relative to each other.

    (1)     Note.  A "grid" for purposes of classification in this subclass
    consists of at least two intersecting pairs of louvers.

    (2)     Note.  The two spaced adjacent means of this subclass may be part
    of the same element, as for example, a spiral louver.


CLS 362/280
TXT Subject matter under subclass 277 wherein the illuminated surface of the
    modifier is planar or a surface of revolution generated by the rotation of
    a straight or curved line generatrix about an axis and (a) if planar, the
    modifier is movable such that the illuminated surface moves only in its own
    plane, or (b) if curved, the modifier is movable such that the illuminated
    surface is rotated about the axis of its generatrix.


CLS 362/281
TXT Subject matter under subclass 280 having two or more adjustable or
    repositionable modifiers each with a modifying surface movable in its own
    plane or extension, the modifiers being movable relative to each other.

    (1)     Note.  Classifiable in this subclass is, for example, the
    combination of a light source and an iris type shutter.


CLS 362/282
TXT Subject matter under subclass 277 wherein the modifier is movable between
    two or more positions by rotation about at least one axis.

    (1)     Note.  If claimed combinations classifiable here includes modifiers
    which are disclosed as being adjustable or repositionable in the plane or
    extension of the modifying surface, such combinations are placed as
    originals in subclasses 280 or 281, contrary to normal classification
    procedure, in order to avoid proliferation of cross-reference copies.


CLS 362/283
TXT Subject matter under subclass 282 having two or more adjustable or
    repositionable modifiers at least one of which is angularly adjustable or
    repositionable, the modifiers being movable relative to each other.


CLS 362/284
TXT Subject matter under subclass 282 having means movable with respect to the
    modifier and so structurally related thereto that movement of the means
    relative to the modifier moves the modifier relative to the light source or
    light source support.


CLS 362/285
TXT Subject matter under subclass 257 wherein the light source or light source
    support is movable between at least two positions relative to some other
    part of the claimed combination.


CLS 362/286
TXT Subject matter under subclass 285 having means to establish an
    electromagnetic force which acts directly or through a mechanical motion
    transmission means on the light source or light source support to move the
    light source or light source support from one position to another.


CLS 362/287
TXT Subject matter under subclass 285 wherein the light source is movable in a
    curved path.


CLS 362/288
TXT Subject matter under subclass 285 wherein the light source is urged in at
    least one direction by an elastically deformable means (e.g., spring).


CLS 362/289
TXT Subject matter under subclass 285 wherein the light source is supported by
    means engaging a helix bearing member in such a way that when the helix
    bearing member is rotated about the axis of the helix, the light source is
    moved by the helix in the axial direction.


CLS 362/290
TXT Subject matter under subclass 257 wherein the modifier includes at least
    two spaced adjacent modifying means each having at least two plane or
    curved surfaces of the type generated by a straight or curved line (the
    "generatrix"); the means being so arranged relative to each other and to
    the light source that (a) no two of the surfaces are generated by an
    extension of the same generatrix, (b) one of the surfaces of one means
    faces one of the surfaces of the adjacent means, (c) one of the surfaces of
    each means is exposed to light from the light source, and (d) light from
    the source is able to pass both surfaces of each means and at least one of
    the surfaces in a direction parallel or tangent to its generatrix.

    (1)     Note.  A "grid" for purposes of classification in this subclass
    consists of at least two intersecting pairs of louvers.

    (2)     Note.  The two spaced adjacent means of this subclass may be part
    of the same element, as for example, a spiral louver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    325,    for angularly adjustable louvered or grid type modifiers, per se.

    330,    for panel type refractor modifiers which may include louvers or
    grids.

    342,    for louvered or grid type reflectors, per se.

    354,    for louvered or grid type translucent or opaque modifiers, per se.


CLS 362/291
TXT Subject matter under subclass 290 wherein at least one of the surfaces
    exposed to light from the light source is nonplanar.


CLS 362/292
TXT Subject matter under subclass 290 wherein at least two of the surfaces
    exposed to light from the light source converge towards each other.


CLS 362/293
TXT Subject matter under subclass 257 wherein the modifier has different
    effects on radiation of different wavelengths, as for example, absorbing
    some and transmitting others or transmitting some and reflecting others.


CLS 362/294
TXT Subject matter under subclass 257 combined with means to conduct heat away
    from part of the combination or to prevent heat from being conducted to a
    part of the combination.


CLS 362/295
TXT Devices under subclass 257 provided with means to activate the light unit
    or with means to regulate the strength of an electric current supplied to
    the light unit by varying the resistance of the circuit.


CLS 362/296
TXT Subject matter under subclass 257 wherein the modifier includes a surface
    which redirects incident light back into the medium from which it came.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    341,    for reflectors, per se, for illuminating purposes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 113+ for a light
    source with a reflective coating on its envelope.


CLS 362/297
TXT Subject matter under subclass 296 having either one modifier with two
    reflecting surfaces or two modifiers each with one reflecting surface; the
    surfaces being distinguished either by being separated by nonreflecting
    areas or spaces or by being generated by noncolinear straight lines; a
    curve and a straight line or by two different curves.

    (1)     Note.  One of the surfaces may be integral with, or be a reflecting
    coating on, the light source envelope, but for a light source with a
    reflecting coating on its envelope, per se, see, the Search Notes below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 113+ for a light
    source with a reflecting coating on the envelope.


CLS 362/298
TXT Subject matter under subclass 297 wherein the two reflecting surfaces are
    so arranged relative to each other and to the light source that light from
    the source is reflected by one surface onto the other.


CLS 362/299
TXT Subject matter under subclass 298 wherein at least one reflecting modifier
    consists of or is combined with a transparent material having surfaces so
    arranged relative to at least some of the incident light from the source
    that the angle of entry of the light with respect to the illuminated
    surfaces is different from the angle of the emergent light with respect to
    the surface from which it emerges.


CLS 362/300
TXT Subject matter under subclass 298 wherein at least one modifier consists of
    or is combined with a modifier made of material pervious to light.


CLS 362/301
TXT Subject matter under subclass 298 wherein at least one of the reflecting
    surfaces lies at least in part in one plane.


CLS 362/302
TXT Subject matter under subclass 298 wherein at least two opposed reflecting
    surfaces are generated by the revolution of different curved or straight
    lines (generatrices) revolved about the same axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 816 for skis and ski poles having lights
    combined therewith.


CLS 362/303
TXT Subject matter under subclass 302 wherein light in both directions along
    the axis of the coaxial surfaces is blocked either by the light source
    support or a reflecting surface or some other opaque modifier.


CLS 362/304
TXT Subject matter under subclass 297 wherein two of the reflecting surfaces
    are generated by the revolution of different curved or straight lines about
    the same axis.

    (1)     Note.  One of the surfaces may be integral with, or be a coating
    on, the light source envelope.


CLS 362/305
TXT Subject matter under subclass 304 wherein light in both directions along
    the axis of the coaxial surfaces is intercepted by either the light source
    support or an opaque, translucent or transparent modifier.


CLS 362/306
TXT Subject matter under subclass 296 wherein movement of the light source, the
    modifier or both with respect to some other part of the recited combination
    is prevented in at least one direction by the force exerted by an elastic
    means under stress.

    (1)     Note.  The elastic means may act directly on the element being held
    by it or indirectly as through a latch.

    (2)     Note.  The elastic means may also have another function as, for
    example, carrying current to the light source. Bayonet-type sockets are
    often of this type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    267,    for a light source or modifier resiliently biased against an
    element with a flexible means between the light source or modifier and the
    element to hermetically seal the juncture.

    269,    for resiliently mounted light units with means to rotate or tilt
    the light unit against the effect of the resilient means from one position
    to another.


CLS 362/307
TXT Subject matter under subclass 296 wherein the reflecting surface is part of
    or in combination with a modifier made of light pervious material.


CLS 362/308
TXT Subject matter under subclass 307 wherein the light pervious material is
    transparent and has surfaces arranged relative to at least some of the
    incident light from the source such that the angle of entry of the light
    with respect to the light-facing surface is different from the angle of the
    emergent light with respect to the surface from which it emerges.


CLS 362/309
TXT Subject matter under subclass 308 wherein one of the surfaces is generated
    by two or more straight lines or curves moving either linearly or angularly
    about one or more axes, such surfaces being generally characterized as
    "faceted" or "corrugated".


CLS 362/310
TXT Subject matter under subclass 296 wherein means are provided to completely
    encase the light source (and its envelope, if any) so that the atmosphere
    inside the means is isolated from the atmosphere outside.

    (1)     Note.  The means may be or include a modifier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    267,    for means hermetically sealing the light source from outside
    atmosphere or for containing the light source, support therefor or modifier
    in a gas.


CLS 362/311
TXT Subject matter under subclass 257 wherein the modifier is made of a light
    pervious material.

    (1)     Note.  Light pervious materials include light pervious fabrics even
    though the material out of which the fabric is made may not be light
    pervious.


CLS 362/312
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising hollow, open-ended
    tube-like means for surrounding a flame-type light source to protect the
    flame or to protect the environment from the flame and to guide the flow of
    ambient air to or from the flame to promote combustion or to carry away
    combustion products while permitting the egress of light from the flame, or
    means cooperable with such means to improve or insure its proper
    functioning.

    (1)     Note.  The classification of claimed subject matter in this
    subclass or the subclasses indented hereunder may necessarily be based on
    disclosure of intended use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    356,    for chimney-like modifiers (e.g., frosted) for incandescent light
    source.

    363,    for nonmodifying light-permeable enclosures of light sources.

    376+,   for nonmodifying chimney-like incandescent light protecting  guards.


CLS 362/313
TXT Subject matter under subclass 312 comprising means engaging and positioned
    at least in part by the chimney and cooperable therewith to improve or
    insure the proper functioning of the chimney other than means to support or
    hold the chimney in place.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    314,    for means to support or hold the chimney relative to the light
    source.

    379,    for smoke bells.

    380,    for spark arrestors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 258 for heater chimney with article
    support.


CLS 362/314
TXT Subject matter under subclass 312 comprising means to secure the chimney
    relative to the light source against dislocation by exterior forces (e.g.,
    force of gravity, acceleration or deceleration of a vehicle).


CLS 362/315
TXT Subject matter under subclass 312 wherein the chimney is made up of
    distinct parts or elements.

    (1)     Note.  The chimney may be part transparent and part opaque or it
    may be made of separate parts to avert breakage by unequal expansion.

    (2)     Note.  The parts of the chimney can include a shade or means to
    block light rays.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    351+,   for a shielding means and a chimney.


CLS 362/316
TXT Subject matter under subclass 312 wherein the bottom part of the chimney
    has a special form or shape to engage with a support element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    314,    for a chimney with a modified base and support means.


CLS 362/317
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising means to alter the
    distribution or composition of incident light by changing its direction or
    by absorption of some or all of its energy.

    (1)     Note.  Some terms used to denote light modifying structure may also
    be used to denote structure which does not modify incident light. Placement
    of such structure in this subclass or the subclasses indented hereunder
    will depend on the disclosed proximate function of the structure in the
    claimed combination.  For example, structure denoted as a "lens" which is
    disclosed as focussing or otherwise redirecting light is classifiable in
    this subclass or the subclasses indented hereunder, but structure denoted
    as a "lens" which is disclosed as merely covering or protecting a light
    source is not classifiable here but in subclasses 376+, "GUARD MEANS".
    Other examples of ambiguous terms include "shade", "globe", "bowl",
    "shield", and "screen".


CLS 362/318
TXT Subject matter under subclass 317 wherein a fluid medium is employed to
    modify light from a source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331,    for plural successive light transmitting elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    886 for a filter including a fluid.


CLS 362/319
TXT Subject matter under subclass 317 including means to allow at least a
    portion of the modifier to shift from one position to another with respect
    to a base or support structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277+,   for a light source or support and a modifier adjustable or
    repositionable relative thereto.

    352,    for a shielding means that is collapsible or folding.


CLS 362/320
TXT Subject matter under subclass 319 wherein the modifier is made of a
    deformable material and is adjusted or repositioned by deformation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278,    for a light source or support therefor and a flexible modifier.


CLS 362/321
TXT Subject matter under subclass 319 wherein the modifier is planar and
    movable only in its own plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280+,   for a modifier movable in a plane and a light source or support
    therefor.

    323,    for a curved modifier that moves in a curved plane.


CLS 362/322
TXT Subject matter under subclass 319 wherein the modifier is movable by
    rotation about at least one axis.


CLS 362/323
TXT Subject matter under subclass 322 wherein the modifier has a surface of
    revolution generated by the rotation of a straight curved line generatrix
    about an axis and is movable such that the surface is rotated about the
    axis of its generatrix.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280+,   for a curved modifier that moves in a curved plane and a light
    source or support therefor.

    321,    for a modifier that is planar and moves in its own plane.


CLS 362/324
TXT Subject matter under subclass 322 having means to move the modifier with
    respect to its base or support structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284,    for means to move a modifier with respect to light source or
    support therefor.


CLS 362/325
TXT Subject matter under subclass 322 wherein the modifier includes at least
    two spaced adjacent modifying means each having at least two plane or
    curved surfaces of the type generated by a straight or curved line (the
    "generatrix"); the means so arranged relative to each other that (a) no two
    of the surfaces are generated by an extension of the same generatrix; (b)
    one of the surfaces of one means faces one of the surfaces of the adjacent
    means, and (c) light is able to pass both surfaces of each means and at
    least one of the surfaces in a direction parallel or tangent to its
    generatrix, and wherein the means are pivoted either individually or as a
    unit for angular adjustment or repositioning relative to each other or to a
    common support.

    (1)     Note.  A "grid" for purposes of classification in this subclass
    consists of at least two intersecting pairs of louvers.

    (2)     Note.  The two spaced adjacent means of this subclass may be part
    of the same element as, for example, a U-shaped or spiral louver.


CLS 362/326
TXT Subject matter under subclass 317 comprising a light pervious material
    having a pair of opposed refracting surfaces at least one of which is, at
    least in part, so angularly related to the other surface that the path of a
    light ray incident on one opposed surface of the material and the path of
    the same ray after it emerges from the material through the other opposed
    surface are not parallel.

    (1)     Note.  A refracting surface of this subclass type comprises an
    interface between the material of the refractor and some other material
    (usually air) in which the speed of light is different.

    (2)     Note.  A light pervious material having only parallel refracting
    surfaces, such as window pane, or concentric refracting surfaces, such as a
    nonfocusing or nondispersing headlight lenses, is not considered a
    refractor of this subclass type.  For the loci of such devices, see the
    Search Notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    318,    for a liquid type refractor.

    363,    for transparent globe type housings of the nonlight-modifying type.

    375,    for glass window-type housing closures.

    376,    for nonmodifying-light source protecting means made of transparent
    material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 110+ for electric
    lights, per se, which include a refractor as an integral part thereof.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 753+ for antennas
    with a spaced or external radio wave refractor; subclass 783 for
    waveguide-type antennas with an internal wave refraction means; and
    subclasses 909+ for radio wave refracting means, per se.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, for
    optical elements of general use, see subclasses 591+ for means for
    illuminating buildings interior with outside light, and subclasses 642+ for
    lenses.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 22+ for a
    pavement with light admitting means.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 156+ for a
    stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or sheet
    including a component of varying thickness, and subclasses 426+ for a
    nonstructural composite web or sheet embodying one or more layers of glass.


CLS 362/327
TXT Subject matter under subclass 326 including means for causing a light ray
    striking a surface to return back into the medium from which it came.

    (1)     Note.  A prism which only reflects is placed in the coordinated
    subclasses below.  If the prism both reflects and refracts, it is proper
    for this or the indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    341,    for reflectors, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 755 for antennas
    with spaced or external radio wave refractor and reflector.


CLS 362/328
TXT Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein the reflector and refractor are
    spaced from each other and are different elements.

    (1)     Note.  If the reflector and refractor are laminated together they
    are one element and placed in subclass 327.


CLS 362/329
TXT Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein the modifier has means to envelop
    a light source.

    (1)     Note.  The enclosure may be made up of plural parts, e.g.,
    refractor and reflector, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    363,    for a protector in the shape of a globe.


CLS 362/330
TXT Subject matter under subclass 326 wherein the refractor has an overall
    rectangular perimeter having length and width greatly exceeding its
    thickness.

    (1)     Note.  The panel may be comprised of louver-like elements forming a
    lattice through which air may pass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    339,    for prisms on a circular disk or undefined area.


CLS 362/331
TXT Subject matter under subclass 326 wherein there is more than one refractor
    and the refractors are so located with respect to each other that light ray
    from a source passing through one refractor will also pass through another
    refractor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    318,    for a liquid enclosed within a refractor.


CLS 362/332
TXT Subject matter under subclass 326 wherein the refractor has areas which are
    joined together to form a modifier.

    (1)     Note.  The joined areas are not integral but can be taken apart.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331,    for refractors which may be joined together but the light ray pass
    successively therethrough.


CLS 362/333
TXT Subject matter under subclass 326 wherein the intersections of each of the
    opposed surfaces with a transverse plane includes a plurality of
    convexities each of which constitute a refractor "element", the joined
    bases of which constitute a "main surface".

    (1)     Note.  The opposed surfaces of the subject matter of this subclass
    and the subclasses indented thereunder are, for example, corrugated or
    faceted.


CLS 362/334
TXT Subject matter under subclass 333 wherein at least one of the main surfaces
    is nonlinear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    338,    for a curved main surface with plural similar curvilinear
    refracting elements.

    340,    for a curved main surface with plural angular refracting elements.


CLS 362/335
TXT Subject matter under subclass 326 wherein the intersection of one of the
    opposed surfaces and a transverse plane is or includes a curved line
    refracting element.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of classification in this subclass and the
    subclasses indented hereunder, a distinct convexity in or of the
    intersection of the opposed surface with a transverse plane is referred to
    as a "refracting element" of the intersection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333,    for refractors wherein in the intersection of each of the opposed
    surfaces with a transverse plane includes a curved line refracting element.


CLS 362/336
TXT Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein the intersection of one of the
    opposed surfaces and a transverse plane includes a plurality of refractor
    elements of different sizes or shapes.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of "refracting element", see the
    definition of subclass 335, (1) Note.


CLS 362/337
TXT Subject matter under subclass 336 wherein at least one of the refracting
    elements is comprised of at least two straight lines joined at an angle.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of "refracting element", see the
    definition of subclass 335, (1) Note.


CLS 362/338
TXT Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein two or more curved line refractor
    elements form convexities whose bases are joined to form a curved or angled
    base line.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of "refracting element", see the
    definition of subclass 335, (1) Note.


CLS 362/339
TXT Subject matter under subclass 326 wherein the intersection of one of the
    opposed surfaces with a transverse plane includes a plurality of regularly
    occurring and regularly shaped convexities each comprised of at least two
    straight lines joined at an angle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    326,    for refractors comprised of randomly occurring prismatic type
    refracting surfaces of the type, for example, formed by sand-blasting a
    glass surface.


CLS 362/340
TXT Subject matter under subclass 339 wherein the intersections of the other
    opposed surface and a transverse plane is a curve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333,    for prismatic type refractors wherein the surface opposed to the
    prismatic forms, in intersection with a transverse plane, a plurality of
    curved convexities.


CLS 362/341
TXT Subject matter under subclass 317 having a surface which redirects incident
    light back into the medium from which it came.

    (1)     Note.  The term "shade" may denote either structure which reflects
    light from its surface and/or structure which absorbs or scatters light
    internally. Thus, placement in this subclass or the subclasses indented
    hereunder of structure denoted as a "shade" must depend on its disclosed
    proximate function in the claimed combination. For structure denoted as a
    "shade" which is not disclosed as reflecting light from one of its
    surfaces, see the Search Notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    351+,   for opaque or translucent modifiers including modifiers denoted as
    "shade", and particularly, subclasses 355+ for light permeable modifiers
    which scatter light by random internal reflections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 113+ for electric
    lamps, per se, which include a reflector as an integral part thereof.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 755, 761, 775,
    779, 781+, 815, 817, 818+, and 834+, for antennas with a reflector; and
    subclasses 912+ for radio wave reflectors, per se.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    838+ for reflectors of general use, per se.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 6+ for reflection
    material in a traffic guide or barrier, and subclasses 9+ for reflective
    material in a traffic director.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 426+ for a
    nonstructural composite product including a layer of glass, and especially
    subclasses 433+ where the glass is next to a free metal or an alloy,
    resulting in most instances in a reflector or mirror surface.


CLS 362/342
TXT Subject matter under subclass 341 wherein the modifier includes at least
    two spaced adjacent modifying means each having at least two plane or
    curved surfaces of the type generated by a straight or curved line (the
    "generatrix"); at least one of the surfaces of each means being reflective,
    the means being so arranged relative to each other that (a) no two of the
    surfaces are generated by an extension of the same generatrix, (b) one of
    the surfaces of one means faces one of the surfaces of the adjacent means,
    and (c) light is able to pass both surfaces of each means and at least one
    of the surfaces in a direction parallel or tangent to its generatrix.

    (1)     Note.  A "grid", for purposes of classification in this subclass,
    consists of at least two intersecting pairs of louvers.

    (2)     Note.  The two spaced adjacent means of this subclass may be part
    of the same element as, for example, a U-shaped or spiral louver.


CLS 362/343
TXT Subject matter under subclass 341 combined with a modifier other than a
    reflector or refractor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327,    for a reflector and refractor.


CLS 362/344
TXT Subject matter under subclass 341 including means to protect at least part
    of an illuminating device or to protect an object, e.g., person, animal,
    etc., from an illuminating device.


CLS 362/345
TXT Subject matter under subclass 341 including means to lower the temperature
    of or to move air to or from the reflector.

    (1)     Note.  The means to cool the reflector can be, for example, holes
    for air circulation or means to circulate air or fluid over the surface of
    a reflector.


CLS 362/346
TXT Subject matter under subclass 341 wherein there is one reflective surface
    spaced from another reflective surface so a light ray can pass between them
    or a reflective surface is joined to another reflective surface to form a
    single reflector.

    (1)     Note.  Surfaces laminated together do not constitute a single
    reflector of this subclass type.


CLS 362/347
TXT Subject matter under subclass 341 wherein the intersection of the
    reflective surface and at least one transverse plane forms a curved line.


CLS 362/348
TXT Subject matter under subclass 347 having a repetitive arrangement of forms,
    elements, designs or decorations on at least a portion of the surface.


CLS 362/349
TXT Subject matter under subclass 347 wherein the intersection of the
    reflective surface and a transverse plane forms a line with curved and
    straight segments.


CLS 362/350
TXT Subject matter under subclass 347 having a concave reflective surface
    generated by a symmetrical curved line rotated 180 degrees about the axis
    of symmetry.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323,    for a modifier of this subclass type generated by a segment of a
    circle (the generatrix) and which is repositionable about the center of the
    generatrix.


CLS 362/351
TXT Subject matter under subclass 317 having a material which affects the
    distribution of light either by preventing the light from passing
    therethrough or by randomly scattering the light as it passes therethrough.


CLS 362/352
TXT Subject matter under subclass 351 wherein the modifier includes means to
    affect a reduction in its size from an operative condition to an
    inoperative condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    319,    for means to adjust the size or shape of a light modifier.


CLS 362/353
TXT Subject matter under subclass 351 wherein the modifier has means to fasten
    it to a shield or cover for a light source engaging light source support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    343,    for a modifier and a reflector with socket engaging means.


CLS 362/354
TXT Subject matter under subclass 351 wherein the modifier includes at least
    two spaced adjacent modifying means each having at least two plane or
    curved surfaces of the type generated by a straight or curved line (the
    "generatrix"); the means so arranged relative to each other that (a) no two
    of the surfaces are generated by an extension of the same generatrix, (b)
    one of the surfaces of one means faces one of the surfaces of the adjacent
    means, and (c) light is able to pass both surfaces of each means and at
    least one of the surfaces in a direction parallel or tangent to its
    generatrix.

    (1)     Note.  A "grid", for purposes of classification in this subclass,
    consists of at least two intersecting pairs of louvers.

    (2)     Note.  The two spaced adjacent means of this subclass may be part
    of the same element, as for example, a U-shaped or spiral louver.


CLS 362/355
TXT Subject matter under subclass 351 wherein the light is randomly scattered
    as it passes through the modifier.

    (1)     Note.  The light may be scattered by, for example, random internal
    reflections within the modifier from a plurality of points rather than from
    a surface.


CLS 362/356
TXT Subject matter under subclass 355 wherein the diffusing means is annular.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    351+,   for a shade when no diffusing material is claimed.


CLS 362/357
TXT Subject matter under subclass 356 wherein the diffusing means is a woven or
    knitted fabric and is supported by an annular frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    358,    for annular, wire frame supported modifiers not recited as of the
    diffusing type.


CLS 362/358
TXT Subject matter under subclass 351 wherein the modifier means is supported
    at least in part by wire support structure.


CLS 362/359
TXT Subject matter under subclass 351 wherein the modifier is to be attached to
    the outer surface of a housing or light modifier so as to block light rays
    in at least one direction coming from a light unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323,    for a modifier movable in its own plane.


CLS 362/360
TXT Subject matter under subclass 351 wherein the means to modify the light is
    made of more than one piece.

    (1)     Note.  The pieces may be joined together by a frame or support.
    The means to join the pieces is not considered part of the modifying means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332,    for plural section refractors.


CLS 362/361
TXT Subject matter under subclass 351 wherein at least part of a surface of the
    modifier that is exposed to light rays is nonlinear with respect to a flat
    plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323,    for a modifier movable in its own plane.


CLS 362/362
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising means to entirely
    enclose a light source except for openings for the egress of light and for
    which means no other light modifying function is recited.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type may only partially
    enclose a light source if it cooperates with some other means (e.g.,
    "lens", "cover") to completely enclose the source except from openings for
    the egress of light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    317+,   for housings combined with or comprising light modifiers.


CLS 362/363
TXT Subject matter under subclass 362 having means for surrounding a light
    source wherein said means is made of light pervious material.

    (1)     Note.  The globe itself may assume various shapes such as
    spherical, semispherical, cylindrical, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Generally, the patents in this subclass claim globe
    structure which contributes to the entire enclosure of a light source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312,    for a globe of the draft-type, i.e., chimney effect.


CLS 362/364
TXT Subject matter under subclass 362 which is mountable fully or partially in
    a hollow place, as in the space behind a panel, ceiling, wall, etc., the
    panel, etc., having an opening therein for receiving the housing.

    (1)     Note.  A housing of this subclass type usually includes a
    supporting flange, mounted peripherally at or near the housing portion
    which engages the panel, etc., for positioning the housing in the hollow
    place.


CLS 362/365
TXT Subject matter under subclass 364 comprising means for supporting the
    recessed housing in place, such as by attachment to the panel or some other
    structure behind the panel.


CLS 362/366
TXT Subject matter under subclass 365 having adjustment means to allow for
    variations in panel thickness or panel angle so that the housing may be
    easily and properly mounted.


CLS 362/367
TXT Subject matter under subclass 362 comprising a framework which includes
    sides (usually nonparallel) transparent to light, e.g., clear or partially
    clear glass panes.


CLS 362/368
TXT Subject matter under subclass 362 comprising means for mounting the housing
    onto some surface or object.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and subclasses indented hereunder differ from
    subclass 365 by being mounted "on" something rather than being mounted "in"
    something.


CLS 362/369
TXT Subject matter under subclass 368 having resilient mounting means, such as
    a rubber washer, for inhibiting or preventing the transmission of abrupt
    movement, to protect the housing and the light source contained therein.


CLS 362/370
TXT Subject matter under subclass 368 comprising an arm or bracket attached
    externally to the housing for mounting the housing.


CLS 362/371
TXT Subject matter under subclass 370 comprising means for moving the housing
    relative to its supporting arm or bracket.


CLS 362/372
TXT Subject matter under subclass 362 having means for repositioning the light
    source within the housing.


CLS 362/373
TXT Subject matter under subclass 362 having means to eliminate heat build up,
    such as by air ventilating holes or cooling fins.


CLS 362/374
TXT Subject matter under subclass 362 comprising housings combined with means
    to hold a closure in position relative to the housing.

    (1)     Note.  Closures provided for in this subclass are of the type
    defined in subclass 375.


CLS 362/375
TXT Subject matter under subclass 362 comprising a housing combined with
    transparent means to cover at least in part the opening for the egress of
    light.


CLS 362/376
TXT Subject matter under the class definition having means to protect a part of
    an illuminating device from damage or tampering or to protect an object,
    e.g., person, animal, etc., from an illuminating device.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are guards in the form of a cage
    or screen.


CLS 362/377
TXT Subject matter under subclass 376 wherein part of the guard has means to
    attach the guard to a light source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255,    for a modifier with means to engage a light source.


CLS 362/378
TXT Subject matter under subclass 376 wherein part of the guard has means to
    attach the guard to a light source support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    344,    for a guard and reflector means with socket engaging means.

    353,    for a shield and socket engaging means.


CLS 362/379
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising means placed over
    flame-type light sources to prevent the heat or smoke therefrom from
    blackening or otherwise injuring superimposed structures (e.g., ceilings).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 52.

    454,    Ventilation, appropriate subclasses for smoke bells which may also
    ventilate a room or other structure.


CLS 362/380
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising means (e.g., screens)
    for preventing the escape of sparks or solid burning bodies from or the
    access of insects or dirt into flame type light sources.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164,    for flame screens for miner's safety lamps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 119+ for spark arrestors for nonillumination
    type flames.


CLS 362/381
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising a device applied to a
    gas fixture whereby means are provided for attaching a tube, generally a
    flexible one, to the gas fixture or its support for supplying fuel to an
    auxiliary gas-light fixture or burner without destroying the usefulness as
    illuminators of any of the gas fixture's burner tips.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 118+ for flexible pipes.


CLS 362/382
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising structural means to
    position, by itself or in combination with some other disclosed means, a
    light source or modifier with respect to some reference point or reference
    structure.

    (1)     Note.  The "reference structure" of this subclass may be included
    in the "structural means" of this subclass or it may not.  The "reference
    structure" or "reference point" need not be on an element recited in the
    claims for structure of this subclass type to be classifiable in this
    subclass or the subclasses hereunder.

    (2)     Note.  The line between this class, subclasses 382+ and Classes
    248, Supports and 439, Electrical Connectors, is as follows:  Class 362,
    subclasses 382+ takes any combination of a support with significant
    structure of a light source or a light source support having structural
    features limited to use with the light source. Class 248 takes supporting
    structure, per se.  The mere naming of a light source, as in the preamble
    of a claim or in any other way which does not positively include it as an
    element of the claim, will not operate to take the claim out of Class 248
    unless the support itself is an essential part of the light source or has
    no obvious utility as a support in some other art classes.  See Class 248
    definitions, Note (2), for lines between this class (362) and Class 248.
    Class 439 takes an electrical connector, per se.  The mere recitation in a
    claim of a light source, which is not claimed as being connected to or
    mounted in the electrical connector, will generally not operate to take the
    claim out of Class 439.  If an electrical connector in name only is claimed
    with supporting means which is not limited in use to a Class 362 light
    source, the claim is classifiable in Class 439.  A detailed electrical
    connector (e.g., a claimed contact) with or without a support therefor,
    claimed with a light source in name only is classifiable in Class 439.  If
    a detailed electrical connector is combined with a support which has
    structural features limiting the combination to use with a claimed light
    source, even if claimed in name only, the claim is classifiable in Class
    362. See Class 439 definition, section III (1) and (2) for lines between
    this class (362) and Class 439.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses for structure for supporting light
    sources.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for an electrical
    connector for use with a light source; especially subclasses 527+ for an
    electrical connector with supporting structure therefor.


CLS 362/383
TXT Subject matter under subclass 382 wherein the structural means to position
    a light source includes a pivoted support and (1) audible means to detect
    sound emitted by an object and to transmit the sound to the ears of a human
    operator or to a meter visually noted by a human operator, or (2) visual
    sighting means under the control of a human operator to locate an object
    and means under the control of the operator responsive to the audible means
    or to the visual sighting means connected to the pivoted support to pivot
    the light source support in the direction of the sound of sighting object.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass type includes, for
    example, aircraft detection search lights movable in two different planes.


CLS 362/384
TXT Subject matter under subclass 382 wherein the structural means to position
    a light source or modifier includes a pivoted lamp support, a freely moving
    material mounted to move in response to a change of direction or a change
    in velocity of the material and means connecting the freely movable
    material to the pivoted headlight support.

    (1)     Note.  The material may be solid or fluent material which forms the
    freely movable mass.

    (2)     Note.  Included are gyroscopes, pendulums and flywheels and the
    lamp support may be vertically or horizontally movable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    269+,   for a tiltable or rotatable light source and modifier movable as a
    unit.

    277+,   for a light source and an adjustable or repositionable light source
    with a light modifier.

    319+,   for an adjustable positionable light modifier.

    368+,   for a light housing with an adjustable mounting means.

    372,    for a light housing with an adjustable light source.


CLS 362/385
TXT Subject matter under subclass 382 wherein the structural means to position
    a light source or modifier includes a movable support for the light source
    or modifier and a motor driven by a liquid or a gas under pressure greater
    than or less than atmospheric pressure to move the movable support.


CLS 362/386
TXT Subject matter under subclass 382 wherein the structural means to position
    a light source or modifier is a movable support for the light source or
    modifier and an electromagnetic operator connected to the support to move
    the support when the electromagnetic operator is energized.

    (1)     Note.  The electromagnetic operator includes a solenoid or electric
    motor and the electric circuit to energize the operator may be included in
    the claim.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     for revolving lamps which may be electromagnetically rotated.

    37+,    for a vehicle steering mechanism or element actuated pivoted lamp
    or lamp support which may be electromagnetically actuated.

    227+,   for plural light sources, particularly subclass 233 for remote
    adjustment or positioning means for plural light sources, which may be
    electromagnetically operated.

    272,    for a light source or support and modifier which is tiltable or
    rotatable as a unit and is electromagnetically actuated.

    286,    for an adjustable or repositionable light source or light source
    support which is electromagnetically adjusted or repositioned.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, particularly subclasses
    12+ for linear motors, per se, and subclasses 40+ for rotary motors.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 119+ for
    reciprocating or oscillating motor energized systems; subclass 139 for
    battery-fed motor systems and subclasses 445+ for automatic and/or time
    delay circuits to energize an electric motor; particularly subclasses 466+
    for movement, position or limit of travel control circuits for an electric
    motor.


CLS 362/387
TXT Subject matter under subclass 382 which includes a flexible extensible
    electric cord to deliver electrical energy to a light source from an
    appropriate electrical source, and a cord storage member to hold the cord
    when not in use or to hold the excess cord not needed when in use.

    (1)     Note.  Rotating reels, fixed reels and housings to store the
    electric cord are included in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Class 248 can have reels for suspended supports even though
    limited to use with electrical conductors. Also, an in name only lamp or
    lamp unit combined with a storage device for the electrical power cord
    delivering power to the lamp or lamp unit is Class 191. Class 242 will not
    take reels restricted to use with electrical conductors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157,    for self powered lamps which include an extensible electric cord
    storage member.

    258,    for a light source or support therefor and a modifier with an
    extensible electric cord storage member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, subclasses 122+ for
    flexible extension reels.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 324+ for a reeling
    device of general use, particularly subclasses 400+ for a reeling device
    combined with a nonreeling carrier, for example a portable electric
    appliance, and subclasses 388+ for a reeling device for multiple line
    segments; e.g., one fixed to an electrical source and a second portion
    connected to a shiftable electrical appliance.

    248,    Supports, subclass 329 for a suspended support by a cord having a
    reel on which the cord is wound.


CLS 362/388
TXT Subject matter under subclass 382 wherein the support has means enabling it
    to cooperate with either a horizontal or a vertical surface to position a
    light source or modifier with respect thereto.


CLS 362/389
TXT Subject matter under subclass 382 having means to increase the frictional
    resistance to relative movement between the support and the reference
    structure without increasing the force between the two.

    (1)     Note.  This device is generally a formation of spurs projecting
    from the bottom of the support to prevent displacement when placed on
    slippery surfaces.


CLS 362/390
TXT Subject matter under subclass 382 having resilient means for inhibiting or
    preventing the transmission of abrupt motion between one part of the
    support and another or the reference structure.


CLS 362/391
TXT Subject matter under subclass 382 wherein the support includes means to
    suspend a light source or modifier from a suspended cable or line.

    (1)     Note.  The cable or line is suspended from two points, and the
    support of this subclass type is attachable to the cable or line between
    the two points.


CLS 362/392
TXT Subject matter under subclass 382 wherein the support is covered by or
    comprises means which duplicates in appearance, a candle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161+,   for candle-type illuminating means.


CLS 362/393
TXT Subject matter under subclass 392 wherein part of the support is movable
    relative to another part of the support to reposition the light source or
    modifier.


CLS 362/394
TXT Subject matter under subclass 382 comprising means to open or close the
    circuit energizing an electrical light source other than such means which
    are merely nominally recited.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 2 for circuit
    make and break means which functions according to the fully raised position
    of the light source or modifier; subclasses 329+ for switch actuators or
    operators.


CLS 362/395
TXT Subject matter under subclass 394 comprising a standard wherein a portion
    thereof actuates a circuit breaker.

    (1)     Note.  Ordinary pull-chain and push-button type switch actuators
    are not considered portions of standards of this subclass type even though
    mounted thereon since such actuators do not contribute to the supporting
    function of the standard.

    (2)     Note.  The term "standard", as used in the definition and notes of
    this subclass is defined in the definition of subclass 410, below.


CLS 362/396
TXT Subject matter under subclass 382 wherein the support includes either (1)
    at least two members movable towards each other to grip the reference
    structure between them, or (2) an  effectively C-shaped member which is
    loosely engageable over a reference structure, to support a light source or
    light modifier against the force of gravity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 422 for light source supports combined with hats,
    generally miners' caps, which employ clamps or hooks.


CLS 362/397
TXT Subject matter under subclass 382 wherein the support is attachable to the
    reference structure by means which creates or maintains a vacuum between
    the support and the reference structure, so that the force of atmospheric
    pressure counteracts forces tending to move the support and reference
    structure relative to each other.


CLS 362/398
TXT Subject matter under subclass 382 which includes a magnetic means
    (permanent or electrical) to attach the support to the reference structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 206 for magnetically mounted brackets of general
    application.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 38+ for an electrical connector
    with magnetic securing or supporting means.


CLS 362/399
TXT Subject matter under subclass 382 comprising a support liftable by a human
    being and having means conformable to the grasp of the human hands to
    facilitate the lifting of the support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 110+ for handles not otherwise
    classified.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 752+ for a container handle.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 476.1+ for an electrical
    connector with a handle or a distinct manipulating means.


CLS 362/400
TXT Subject matter under subclass 399 wherein the handle or bail has structural
    means for attaching a means thereto to protect the illuminating means or
    the user.


CLS 362/401
TXT Support under subclass 382 comprising (1) supporting structure, such as a
    rod, which is supported by a fulcrum at some point between its ends, one
    portion of the rod between the fulcrum and an end of the rod being adapted
    for supporting the light source or light modifier and another portion of
    the rod between the fulcrum and the other end of the rod having means,
    usually adjustable for equalizing the otherwise upsetting force of the
    weight of the light source or modifier in order to position the light
    source or modifier, or (2) a system of ropes and pulleys, one end of the
    rope having the light source or modifier attached thereto and another end
    having balancing means for equalizing the force tending to move the light
    source.


CLS 362/402
TXT Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein the force equalizing means is a
    resilient member.


CLS 362/403
TXT Subject matter under subclass 382 comprising (1) means for supporting the
    light source or modifier from above against movement due to gravity; and
    (2) means for permitting the light source or modifier to be moved by the
    force of gravity from one supported position to another.


CLS 362/404
TXT Subject matter under subclass 382 which depends from an overhead horizontal
    surface, comprising means which extends for a substantial length between
    the ceiling or the canopy (cover) which engages the ceiling, and the light
    source or the light modifier.

    (1)     Note.  The suspended support of this subclass type is more than a
    "nipple-pipe" (commonly limited in the trade to a 6 inch length) which,
    when used, is usually concealed by a canopy.

    (2)     Note.  The canopy of this subclass type does not conceal a light
    socket or light source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403,    for adjustable supports comprising light source raising and
    lowering means.

    416,    for specialized hanging means for arc lamps.

    430,    for adjustable supports having means for being mounted to a
    reference structure, such as a ceiling.

    437+,   for a canopy for covering a socket or for supporting a light
    modifier.

    457,    for miscellaneous ceiling mounted supports with canopies.


CLS 362/405
TXT Subject matter under subclass 404 comprising a member with a plurality of
    radial arms extending therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  Supports of this subclass type may have one or more ring
    type supports attached to the radial arms.

    (2)     Note.  The member of this subclass type may not be a prominent one,
    but may comprise only a central joint connection for the radial arms.


CLS 362/406
TXT Support under subclass 405 comprising attaching means for connecting the
    member and its associated structure to the ceiling.


CLS 362/407
TXT Subject matter under subclass 404 comprising a cord or rope or an
    electrical conductor, which supports the light source, combined with a
    device for repositioning the light source an its light modifier to
    concentrate light rays on a desired area or object.


CLS 362/408
TXT Subject matter under subclass 404 comprising a light modifier holder.


CLS 362/409
TXT Subject matter under subclass 404 for supporting a nonelectric light source.


CLS 362/410
TXT Subject matter under subclass 382 wherein the structural means is provided
    with means cooperable with an underlying (i.e., adjacent in the direction
    of the force of gravity) planar surface normal to the force of gravity to
    sustain or position without the aid of any securing device; the light
    source or modifier against movement having a component in the direction of
    the force of gravity (e.g., tilting or "tipping over").

    (1)     Note.  The means cooperable with an underlying planar surface of
    this subclass type provides a "base" for the light source or modifier.


CLS 362/411
TXT Subject matter under subclass 410 including means for regulating electric
    power supplied to an electric light source (e.g., a resistance element,
    transformer, etc.) other than merely a nominally recited on-off switch.


CLS 362/412
TXT Subject matter under subclass 410 wherein the standard is, or resembles, a
    vessel having a mouth of smaller area than the greatest cross-sectional
    area of the vessel.


CLS 362/413
TXT Subject matter under subclass 410 wherein one part of the standard is
    repositionable relative to another part or to the reference point or
    structure.


CLS 362/414
TXT Subject matter under subclass 410 comprising light source supporting means
    mounted at the top end of the standard.


CLS 362/415
TXT Subject matter under subclass 410 having nonelectric light source features.


CLS 362/416
TXT Subject matter under subclass 382 comprising means for suspending an arc
    lamp from some reference point or structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404+,   for chandelier and other ceiling-suspended type supports.


CLS 362/417
TXT Support under subclass 382 comprising means suspendable from the reference
    structure having at least two depending arms for supporting a light source
    therebetween.

    (1)     Note.  The arms are usually shaped for receiving an annular light
    modifier, e.g., shade.


CLS 362/418
TXT Subject matter under subclass 382 wherein one part of the support is
    repositionable relative to another.


CLS 362/419
TXT Subject matter under subclass 418 wherein the adjustable light support has
    structure to move the light support in a plurality of ways each move being
    distinct from the other or the adjustable light support has at least a
    portion of the adjustable light support movable in another way in addition
    to the movement of the adjustable support.


CLS 362/420
TXT Subject matter under subclass 419 wherein there are plural adjustable
    headlight supports each support or a portion of each of the supports being
    pivoted in two different ways and the plural headlight supports or the
    positions of the supports are connected so that both headlight supports or
    the portions of the headlights move together and manual means to pivot both
    headlight supports or both portions or the headlight supports in at least
    one of the two different ways.

    (1)     Note.  The term "manual" includes hand, feet, arm or other body
    portion operated motion transmission means.


CLS 362/421
TXT Subject matter under subclass 419 wherein the adjustable light source
    support includes a spherical bearing surface, a holder or outer member
    conforming to the bearing surface enclosing the bearing surface so that the
    bearing surface and the holder or outer member have relative movement with
    respect to each other to form a universally movable light support for a
    light source.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass type includes, for
    example, hemispherical ball and socket light supports.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66+,    for a vehicle or a vehicle element with an operating means to move
    a lamp, lamp support or subcombination of a lamp.

    227+,   for plural lamp sources, particularly subclass 233 for remote
    adjustment or positioning means for the lamp source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 181.1+ for a stand having a ball and socket
    joint.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 52+, particularly subclasses
    122+ for ball and socket joints.


CLS 362/422
TXT Subject matter under subclass 419 wherein the adjustable light support
    includes a tube capable of movement about the tube axis; a motion
    transmission member mounted for movement within the tube; the adjustable
    light support including a pivoted portion which forms the support of a
    light source capable of movement in addition to the movement of the tube
    about its axis and manual means connected to the tube to rotate the tube
    and the movable portion about the tube axis and connected to the motion
    transmission member to pivot the movable portion of the support selectively
    about its pivot.


CLS 362/423
TXT Subject matter under subclass 422 wherein the internal motion transmission
    member is mounted in the tube for rotary movement and connected at each end
    of the member are a pair of rotating members with teeth which intermesh to
    transmit motion imparted by the manual means to the pivoted portion of the
    light support.


CLS 362/424
TXT Subject matter under subclass 422 wherein the internal motion transmission
    member is mounted for movement in a rectilinear manner and the internal
    motion transmission member connects the manual means to the pivoted portion
    of the light support so that the manual means imparting motion transfers
    motion to the pivoted portion by way of the internal motion transmission
    member.


CLS 362/425
TXT Subject matter under subclass 419 wherein the structure to move the light
    support in a plurality of ways includes a manually operated motion
    transmission member mounted to have straight line and circular motion
    connected to the adjustable support such that the straight line motion of
    the member causes the movable light support to turn one way and the
    circular movement of the member causes the support to move another way.


CLS 362/426
TXT Subject matter under subclass 419 wherein the adjustable light source
    support has pivotal movement about a first axis and the support includes
    two diverging members, each member having a pivot point so that the two
    pivot points mount a light source or an element of a light source or an
    element of a light source for movement about a second axis different from
    the first axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for the combination of a vehicle steering mechanism or element and
    a pivoted lamp or lamp support which also has a pivoted motion about
    another axis under the control of manual means.

    66,     for the combination of a vehicle or vehicle element with a pivoted
    lamp or lamp support which may also be pivoted about a second axis.

    269+,   for a light source or support and modifier which is tiltable and
    rotatable.

    368+,   for a light housing with mounting means which has movement about
    plural axes.

    385,    for a lamp support having motion about plural axes under the
    control of at least one fluid pressure motor.

    386,    for a lamp support having plural motions under the control of at
    least one electromagnetic motor or solenoid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 124.1+ for a vertically and horizontally
    adjustable standard bracket; subclass 258 for a rod type bracket adjustable
    in two different directions; subclass 278.1 for an adjustable bracket
    having vertical and horizontal pivots; subclasses 393+ for a movable stand
    which is tiltable and adjustable in a horizontal plane.


CLS 362/427
TXT Subject matter under subclass 418 wherein the light support supported in
    two or more positions includes at least a member having an axis and means
    to mount the member so that (1) the member can turn about its own axis, (2)
    the member can be turned about an axis different from the axis of the
    member, or (3) a light source supported by the member can be turned about
    the axis of the member.


CLS 362/428
TXT Subject matter under subclass 427 wherein there is motion transmission
    means connected to the pivoted light support member or to a pivoted light
    source supported on the member to pivot the member or the light source as a
    result of a force imparted to the motion transmission means.


CLS 362/429
TXT Subject matter under subclass 418 comprising an adjustable socket holder.


CLS 362/430
TXT Subject matter under subclass 418 comprising means for attaching the
    adjustable arm or bracket to the reference point or reference structure.


CLS 362/431
TXT Subject matter under subclass 382 comprising a post which must be secured
    to the floor, ground, or other substantially horizontal surface in order to
    function properly as a light source support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403,    for posts having light unit raising and lowering means.

    410+,   for similar supports which function without the aid of any securing
    device.


CLS 362/432
TXT Subject matter under subclass 382 comprising structural means for spacing a
    light source or modifier from a solid vertical barrier (e.g., building
    wall, retaining wall).

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass and the subclasses
    indented hereunder usually consists of an elongated member with a light
    source supporting means at or near one end, and at the other end, means
    integral or cooperable with the reference structure to support the member
    itself, or a pair of such members for cooperatively supporting a light
    source between them.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370+,   for arms or brackets combined with a housing.

    404+,   for a ceiling-suspended light source having an arm or bracket.

    410+,   for standards having an arm or bracket.

    431+,   for posts having an arm or bracket.


CLS 362/433
TXT Subject matter under subclass 382 comprising devices for supporting
    modifiers in position relative to a light source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    317+,   for supports which are integral parts of the modifiers.


CLS 362/434
TXT Subject matter under subclass 433 comprising skeleton frames having a
    flanged ring to engage a light source engaging support and electrical
    connector and a ring to which the modifier is connected.


CLS 362/435
TXT Subject matter under subclass 434 attached to the socket which are such
    length as to support the modifier below the socket.


CLS 362/436
TXT Subject matter under subclass 435 attached to the socket and provided with
    clamping jaws which engage the modifier below the socket.


CLS 362/437
TXT Subject matter under subclass 433 which additionally enclose a light source
    engaging support and electrical connector.


CLS 362/438
TXT Subject matter under subclass 437 which cover the electric socket and clamp
    the modifier thereto.


CLS 362/439
TXT Subject matter under subclass 437 comprising means for attaching the light
    modifier holder or socket cover to the reference point or the reference
    structure.


CLS 362/440
TXT Subject matter under subclass 433 comprising a resilient ring to hold or
    clamp the rim of a modifier within the flange of a frame such as a socket
    cover, socket extension, or skeleton frame.


CLS 362/441
TXT Subject matter under subclass 433 which engage the modifier at its lower
    end, the support not being an integral part of the shade.


CLS 362/442
TXT Subject matter under subclass 441 that consists of a series of radial arms
    for directly engaging the modifier, the support not being an integral part
    of the modifier.


CLS 362/443
TXT Subject matter under subclass 433 in the form of collars mounted on a light
    source engaging support and electrical connector which collars support the
    modifier against gravity but, upon removal, permit the modifier to slip off
    the socket.


CLS 362/444
TXT Subject matter under subclass 433 in the form of spring frames mounted
    directly on the bulb.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255+,   for modifiers having spring frames for mounting on a bulb.


CLS 362/445
TXT Subject matter under subclass 433 in the form of spring frames mounted
    directly on the middle or bulged portion of the lamp chimney.


CLS 362/446
TXT Subject matter under subclass 433 comprising means to support a modifier on
    the side of the light source.


CLS 362/447
TXT Subject matter under subclass 433 especially designed to support modifiers
    upon candles.


CLS 362/448
TXT Subject matter under subclass 433 which are formed integrally with a
    portion of a light source engaging support and electrical connector or a
    cover for such a support.


CLS 362/449
TXT Subject matter under subclass 433 adapted to be adjusted to fit various
    sizes of modifiers or to change the position of the modifier in relation to
    the light source.


CLS 362/450
TXT Subject matter under subclass 433 reducible in size when not in use.


CLS 362/451
TXT Subject matter under subclass 433 that allows the modifier to be readily
    dropped or otherwise moved out of the way relative to the light source to
    allow access to the light.


CLS 362/452
TXT Subject matter under subclass 433 comprising a plurality of substantially
    vertical arms, carrying a flanged ring or shield which engages the
    perforations in the crown of an annular modifier; the arms being within the
    modifier and attached at their other ends to the light support or electric
    socket.


CLS 362/453
TXT Subject matter under subclass 433 comprising chains or rods having
    fastening means, such as bands or clips, which engage the rim of a bowl
    shaped light modifier.


CLS 362/454
TXT Subject matter under subclass 453 having means for supporting an electric
    socket.


CLS 362/455
TXT Subject matter under subclass 433 comprising a device for holding a lens
    and for attaching the lens to an element of this class, such as a chimney,
    electric socket, light source, etc.


CLS 362/456
TXT Subject matter under subclass 455 wherein the lens holder is a plate having
    an aperture therein for receiving the lens.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 579+ for illuminated
    sign, lamp box with perforated face.


CLS 362/457
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising miscellaneous
    attachments and fittings, not otherwise provided for.


CLS 362/458
TXT Subject matter under the class definition not classifiable elsewhere.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS

    The following subclasses are collections of cross-references of published
    disclosures pertaining to various specified aspects of the illuminating art
    which aspects do not form appropriate bases for subclasses in the
    fore-going classification (i.e., subclasses superior hereto in the
    schedule).  These subclasses assist a search based on remote function of
    the apparatus and may be of further assistance to the searcher as a
    starting point in further related fields of search either inside or outside
    the class.  Thus, there is here provided a second access for retrieval of a
    limited number of types of disclosure.

    (1)     Note.  Disclosures are placed in these subclasses for their value
    as references and as leads to appropriate main or secondary fields of
    search without regard to their original classification.

    (2)     Note.  The disclosures cross-referenced into the following
    subclasses are examples only of the indicated subject matter, and in no
    instance do they represent the entire extent of the prior art.


CLS 362/800
TXT Devices including a potential barrier between two materials, one of which
    is a semiconductor, wherein the device is designed to emit light.


CLS 362/801
TXT Devices specifically adapted for illuminating a portion of a bed.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are devices finding utility in a hospital or
    convalescent room and may be mounted on a wall, ceiling or bed.


CLS 362/802
TXT Devices including means to complete or break a circuit operable other than
    by a human or animal and as a function of position or condition.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are devices of a portable nature.


CLS 362/803
TXT Devices designed to give a nonactinic light for use in photographers' dark
    rooms.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are light units which include a light source
    which emits light which could produce a chemical change (actinic) combined
    with a medium which blocks or absorbs actinic radiations but passes
    nonactinic radiations.

    (2)     Note.  Light sensitive material, such as photographic film, may
    undergo a chemical change as a function of the exposing light intensity or
    frequency (color).  An illuminator that allows "safe" exposure of one
    specific light sensitive material without unwanted chemical changes may not
    be "safe" for a different material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277+,   for a light source combined with an adjustable or repositionable
    light modifier, subclasses 319+ for the adjustable or repositionable light
    modifier, per se.


CLS 362/804
TXT Devices intended to cast a beam of high intensity light onto a person or
    animal for therapeutic or diagnostic purposes.


CLS 362/805
TXT Illuminating devices intended to stimulate or contribute to plant growth.


CLS 362/806
TXT Devices designed to give a pleasing effect to the eye and combined with a
    light source or light source support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for illuminated jewelry.

    122+,   for wreaths or plants combined with a light source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, appropriate subclasses for
    illuminated objects of the class type, especially for movable objects that
    are intended for advertising displays or exhibits.

    46,     Amusement Devices:  Toys, appropriate subclasses for objects that
    may be handled by a child for amusement.


CLS 362/807
TXT Devices under subclass 806 comprising a pointed object simulating a star or
    cross.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121,    for devices which include independent static structure with either
    (1) five or more points that represent a star, or (2) a figure with an
    upright bar traversed by a horizontal bar, and combined with a light source
    or light source support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 3 for a
    religious artifact, such as a cruciform, per se, and subclass 12 for a
    star-shaped special occasion ornament, per se.


CLS 362/808
TXT Devices under subclass 806 comprising a figured object combined with a
    light source or light source support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for jewelry combined with a light source and which may be a figure.

    122     through 124, for plants or animals combined with a light source or
    support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 3+ for
    ornamental figures, per se.


CLS 362/809
TXT Devices under subclass 808 wherein the figure is spherical to resemble a
    terrestrial body like the earth.


CLS 362/810
TXT Devices under subclass 806 comprising a light source or light source
    support in the shape of an elongated taper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    190,    for self-power light sources whose light support or base resembles
    an upright candle.

    392+,   for imitation candle supports, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 288+ for candles, per se.


CLS 362/811
TXT Subject matter under subclass 806 comprising special lighting means of an
    unnatural nature.


CLS 362/812
TXT Devices which include any form of indicia which is not merely decorative in
    nature.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass would include cross-references of patents
    classified as originals in Class 40.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for illuminated scales or dials with indicia thereon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 541 for illuminated
    signs.


CLS 363/
TTL ELECTRIC POWER CONVERSION  SYSTEMS

CLS 363/
TXT

    I.      DEFINITION OF TERMS USED IN THIS CLASS

    CONVERSION:  In this class includes only the following:



    1.      Changing alternating current to direct current
    (rectification).

    2.      Changing direct current to alternating current          (inverting).

    3.      Systems having means for performing a
    com-                      bination of the conversions of (1) and (2)
                       above so that the input and output current are
                  of the same character, but the system includes
               intermediate means to convert the current to a       different
    character (e.g., A.C. to D.C. to A.C.)

    4.      Changing the frequency of alternating current           from one
    frequency to a different frequency.

    5.      Changing electrical energy having one number    phases to a
    different number of phases.

    6.      Combination of any of the above.





    CURRENT CONVERSION:

    The transformation of electrical energy from alternating current to direct
    current or the transformation of direct current to alternating current.

    PHASE CONVERSION:

    The transformation of electrical energy having one number of phases to
    electrical energy having another number of phases.

    FREQUENCY CONVERSION:

    The transformation of electrical energy having a first frequency to
    electrical energy having a second frequency.

    ALTERNATING CURRENT:

    Alternating current includes pulsating current which is of such a character
    as to have the characteristics of alternating current (e.g., such as to be
    applied to the primary of a transformer to produce alternating current in
    the secondary).

    CHOPPER:

    A device for interrupting current at regular intervals.

    DIRECT CURRENT:

    Direct current includes pulsating current which is of such character as to
    have the characteristics of direct current (e.g., such as the output of
    half-wave rectifier which may be smoothed by filters to produce a
    substantially nonpulsating current).

    DYNAMOTOR:

    Also called a rotary converter or synchronous inverter.  A rotating device
    for changing a D.C. voltage to another value.  It is a combination electric
    motor and D.C. generator with two or more armature windings and a common
    set of field poles.  One armature winding receives the direct current and
    rotates (thus operating as a motor), while the others generate the required
    voltage (and thus operate as dynamos or generators).

    PULSATING CURRENT:

    A nonuniform electron flow which varies periodically but does not reverse
    its direction.

    CONTROL:

    Includes either the maintenance of a condition at a predetermined value or
    the variation of a condition from one value to another.

    AUTOMATIC CONTROL:

    Includes means for sensing the existence of, the magnitude of, or a
    deviation of a predetermined condition, e.g., the existence, magnitude or
    change of temperature voltage, etc., combined with means for initiating the
    operation of a controlled means to perform a controlling operation.

    CURRENT OR VOLTAGE MAGNITUDE CONTROL:
    Includes controlling either the amplitude of the current or voltage, or
    controlling the average or effective value of the current or voltage, even
    though the amplitude is not controlled.

    TRANSFORMER:

    An electrical device which transfers electrical energy from one circuit to
    another circuit at the same frequency solely by electrical induction.

    IMPEDANCE:

    Includes an inductance, or a capitance, or a resistance, or any combination
    thereof, and excludes any source of electrical energy.

    ELECTRICAL SPACE DISCHARGE DEVICE:

    An apparatus which is intended to have an electrical current flow between
    two spaced electrodes, at least part of the current path being constituted
    by a gas vapor or vacuum.  "Electronic tube" is used as the name for an
    electric space discharge device in this class.  Included are discharge
    devices which operate in the open, i.e., not in an enclosed envelope.

    ELECTRONIC TUBE:

    An electrical space discharge device.

    DYNAMOELECTRIC MACHINE:

    A device for converting electrical energy into mechanical energy or
    mechanical energy into electrical energy or combinations thereof which
    involve electromagnetic induction.

    ELECTRIC SOURCE CIRCUIT:

    The circuit designed to be connected to a source of electric energy.

    LINE CIRCUIT:

    The main power path between the source and the load.

    SEMICONDUCTOR:

    A solid or liquid electronic conductor, with resistivity between that of
    metals and that of insulators in which the electrical charge carrier
    concentration increases with increasing temperature over some temperature
    range.  Over most of the practical temperature range, the resistance has a
    negative temperature coefficient. Certain semiconductors possess two types
    of carriers, negative electrons and positive holes.  The charge carriers
    are usually electrons, but there may be also some ionic conductivity.

    THYRISTOR:

    A bistable device comprising three or more junctions.  At least one of the
    junctions can switch between reverse and forward-voltage polarity within a
    single quadrant of the anode-to-cathode voltage-current characteristics.
    Used in a generic sense to include silicon controlled rectifiers and
    gate-control switches as well as multilayer two- terminal devices.

    TRANSISTORS:

    An active semiconductor device usually made of silicon or germanium, having
    three or more electrodes.  The three main electrodes used are the emitter,
    base, and collector. Conduction is by means of electrons (elementary
    particles having the smallest negative electrical charge that can exist)
    and holes (mobile electron vacancies equivalent to a positive charge).

    VIBRATOR:

    A circuit interrupter that has a movable conducting member which moves
    between contacts for converting D.C. to A.C. or A.C. to D.C.

    II.     GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    1.      This is a restricted class for conversion systems wherein a single
    electrical source circuit is coupled to a single electrical load circuit.

    III.    LOAD IN OUTPUT CIRCUIT

    1.      LOAD DEFINED BY ITS CHARACTERISTICS:
    This class provides for conversion systems as defined is Section 1, even
    though the electrical load in the output circuit is recited by its
    characteristics, e.g., an inductive load, a load having negative current
    resistance characteristic, etc.

    2.      PARTICULAR LOAD DEVICE:
    Systems wherein a particular load device is recited in the output circuit
    are classified with the particular art even though the load device is
    recited by name only, e.g., a motor, an electrical furnace, etc.  A partial
    list of such art systems is set forth under "Related Art" below.

    3.      This class does not provide for systems having a plurality of load
    devices whether the load devices are in different output circuits or in the
    same output circuit, except where the plural load device in a single output
    circuit are similar type loads. Therefore, if there are a plurality of
    diverse load devices in a single output circuit, even though recited only
    by their characteristics, e.g., a high inductive load and a low inductive
    load, then the system is excluded from this class.  Class 307, Electrical
    Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 11+ is the generic
    subclass for systems having a plurality of load devices in either single or
    plural output circuits.  For a reference to other classes relating to
    specific art systems which may contain a plurality of load devices, see
    "Related Art", below.

    IV.     CONVERSION SYSTEMS HAVING PLURAL INPUT AND/OR PLURAL OUTPUT CIRCUITS

    1.      This class excludes systems having a plurality of either electrical
    source (input) circuits (see 3 below with reference to polyphase systems)
    or output circuits.  Where the system including the plurality of input
    and/or output comprises or is part of an art device, classification is with
    the art device.  For other such systems, see "Related Art" below.  Class
    307, Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 11+ and
    subclasses 43+ are the generic subclasses for plural output and plural
    input circuits, respectively.

    2.      ALTERNATE INPUT OR LOAD CIRCUITS:
    If the system can operate with only one input and one output circuit at a
    time, even though there might be an alternate input or output circuit,
    classification is in this class (363).  If the system contemplates that
    more than one input or output circuit will be used concurrently at any
    time, the system is excluded from this class and pointed out in (1) above.
    Also, see 3 below with reference to polyphase systems.

    3.      POLYPHASE SYSTEMS:
    Although this class excludes systems having a plurality of input or output
    circuits, systems wherein the input circuit or the output circuit is a
    single polyphase circuit are considered to be systems having a single input
    or output circuit and are included in this class.

    a.      A single polyphase circuit is defined as a polyphase circuit which
    either does not have significantly different sources or significantly
    different load devices or load circuits for its several phases.

    b.      PLURAL SINGLE PHASE SOURCES TO MAKE POLYPHASE:
    Systems wherein a plurality of single phase sources are combined to produce
    a single polyphase output are excluded from this class.  See "Related Art"
    below.

    c.      POLYPHASE FROM SINGLE PHASE: This class includes systems having a
    single phase source circuit where phase converter means are used to produce
    a polyphase output.  See subclass 156 where impedances are used for this
    purpose.

    V.      CONVERSION SYSTEMS INCLUDING VOLTAGE MAGNITUDE AND/OR PHASE CONTROL

    Conversion systems of the type classified herein are included in this
    class, even though they include voltage magnitude and/or phase control
    means.

    VI.     CONVERSION SYSTEMS NOT INCLUDED IN THIS CLASS

    1.      The conversion systems not included in this class for the most part
    relate to the communications arts.  They include such converters as
    oscillators, modulators, demodulators, detectors, amplifiers, repeaters,
    filters, pulsing systems, wave transmission systems, etc.  Many of these
    excluded systems, such as modulators, amplifiers, detectors, include means
    to control an electric current or potential of one character, such as
    direct or alternating current, by means of a control signal so as to
    produce a current or potential of another character.  For example, in an
    amplifier system using an electronic tube with a source of direct current
    connected to the anode, the alternating current in the grid circuit
    controls the electronic tube so that the flow of direct current is varied
    to produce a pulsating current in the output.  Also in some of these
    systems, such as some types of detectors, alternating current modulated by
    a signal is passed through a rectifying system so as to produce in the
    output circuit a pulsating direct current representative of the signal. For
    the lines between some of the excluded systems and this class, see the
    following sections.  Also, for a partial list of such converters and their
    classification, see "Related Art" below.

    It is common practice in the communications arts to refer to a signal or
    control circuit as an "input" circuit and the claims might recite
    "----conversion of one frequency to another" where the first frequency is
    in fact only a signal or control for controlling another electrical source
    circuit which is the source of energy for producing the second frequency.
    In this class, the input circuit is the circuit to which the energy is
    applied which is to appear in the output circuit.

    Systems which include Electricity-Heat-  Electricity Conversion are
    classified in Class 322, subclass 1.5.  Lines and Networks which include
    frequency conversion are classified in Class 333, subclasses 24+, 245 and
    248.

    2.      PULSE FORMING CIRCUITS:

    Systems designed to produce a plurality of discrete pulses similar to the
    pulses used in radar systems by conversion of electrical energy will be
    found in a number of other classes. Some of these classes are as follows:

    Class 178, Telegraphy, has a number of subclasses with pulse producing
    systems.  In Class 178, the pulses are usually representative of a
    telegraph code.  Some of the systems relate to the 5 unit code where
    marking (a pulse) and spacing (no pulse) are used to code information.
    Subclasses 17+ provide for such pulse forming systems and devices where a
    perforated tape or other automatic means controls the production of the
    pulses.  Subclasses 23+ provide for such code pulses where a keyboard is
    used to produce the pulses.  See subclass 66.1 for miscellaneous telegraph
    systems using pulsating currents.

    Class 307, Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses
    106+ contains patents for such pulse producing systems.

    Class 315, Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, provides in many
    of the subclasses for systems using gas or vapor tubes which operate so
    that the energy passes through the gas tube in pulses of energy.  These
    systems are closely analogous to the oscillation generators in Class 331,
    appropriate subclasses.  See the reference to Class 315 in section VI, 7,
    below.

    Class 327, Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 291+ for miscellaneous pulse or clock generating
    circuits.

    Class 332, Modulators, for systems including a pulse generator and means to
    modulate the pulse with intelligence.  See the reference to section VI, 9,
    below.

    Class 340, Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 287+ for signal box
    electric signaling systems having means for transmitting a train of pulse
    signals.  The pulses are usually formed by making and breaking a circuit.

    Class 341, Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 20+ and 173+ for
    a pulse code transmitter.

    Class 379, Telephonic Communications, subclasses 362+ for pulse producing
    systems with converting means for use in telephone cell transmitter systems.

    3.      AMPLIFIERS IN CLASS 330, AND THE CONVERSION SYSTEMS OF THIS CLASS
    (363):

    Systems which are designed to control a local source of energy by means of
    a control wave so as to produce an output which is either an enlarged,
    diminished or identical copy of the control wave of the type used in
    communication systems are classified as amplifiers in Class 330.  In such
    systems, the control wave is not the source of power for the system.

    4.      OSCILLATORS IN CLASS 331, AND CONVERSION SYSTEMS OF THIS CLASS
    (363):

    a.      CONVERTING DIRECT TO ALTERNATING CURRENT:
    Converters fo converting direct to alternating current wherein the system
    is self-controlled are classified in Class 331, except in those cases
    wherein the control involves circuit making and breaking, or wherein a
    resistor is mechanically varied.  Where the system is such that conversion
    may be either way, i.e., A.C. to D.C. or D.C. to A.C. classification is in
    this class (363).  In those cases wherein the conversion is A.C. to D.C.
    classification is in this class (363).  The usual art in Class 331, will
    have a tuned circuit for determining the frequency of the resulting
    alternating current. However, the art in Class 331, subclasses 111+, 129+,
    and 143+ also includes oscillators using resistance-inductance and
    resistance-capacity circuits (e.g., relaxation oscillators) which are
    self-controlled.  Some of the oscillation generators in Class 331 are
    designed to produce pulse waves.  Also, see the reference to Class 315 in
    section VI, 7, for a reference to the systems closely analogous to
    oscillation generators in Class 315.

    b.      OSCILLATORS WITH ALTERNATING POWER SUPPLY:
    Self-controlled oscillatory circuits which have an alternating current
    source of supply are classified as oscillation generators in Class 331,
    subclass 71 where there is no definite relation between the frequency of
    the source circuit and the frequency of the output circuit.

    c.      OSCILLATORS WITH RECTIFIER IN OUTPUT CIRCUIT:

    Where the output of an oscillator is rectified, the overall system is a
    conversion system for this class (363).  See subclasses 1+.

    5.      HARMONIC GENERATORS, FREQUENCY MULTIPLIERS, IN CLASS 327, AND CLASS
    331:

    Systems designed to produce an output alternating current of a frequency
    (f1), from an alternating current having a frequency (f2) may be used as
    frequency multipliers or frequency dividers.  In event the output frequency
    had definite harmonic relation to the frequency (f1), (f1 is a multiple of
    f2) the system is a harmonic generator.  Where the output frequency is a
    submultiple of the frequency (f1) the system is a frequency divider.
    Included as multiples are fractions such as three-halves and as
    submultiples are fractions such as two-thirds.

    If the system includes an electronic tube of type having a control means
    (e.g., grid) as the converting means and the source of power (e.g., anode
    supply) is A.C. or D.C. and the frequency of the output circuit is a
    multiple of the frequency applied to the control circuit, classification is
    in Class 331, particularly, subclass 53 for cascaded oscillator systems of
    the frequency multiplying type, and subclasses 76 and 77 for oscillators
    combined with output coupling networks of the harmonic, producing or
    selecting type.  If the frequency of the output circuit in such electronic
    tube systems is a submultiple of the frequency applied to the control
    circuit, classification is in Class 327. Also included in Class 327 are
    miscellaneous nonlinear active device frequency control circuits (including
    mixers and multipliers) having a configuration other than a single source
    coupled to a single electrical load.

    If there is no definite relation as above set forth, then the system is
    excluded from Class 331, and will be found in this class.  To be classified
    in Class 331 as a frequency multiplier or divider the system must contain a
    local source of energy or signal for controlling the output frequency.
    Where the system is not self-controlled and the source circuit is supplied
    with energy having a frequency (f2) other than the output energy and is the
    same energy as the input energy, and has a frequency relation to the source
    energy, which is determined by the frequency of the source circuit,
    classification is in class (363), regardless of the magnitudes of the
    frequencies or the proposed use of the system.  Also, included in Class 363
    are frequency multipliers and dividers which are not otherwise classified,
    such as motor-generator systems where the motor is supplied by a
    frequency(f2) and the output circuit of the generator has a frequency (f2).

    6.      DEMODULATORS IN CLASS 329, DEMODULATORS AND THE CONVERSION SYSTEMS
    OF THIS CLASS (363):

    Class 329 provides for both the structure of devices used by demodulating
    and for the demodulating systems.  Included in these subclasses are systems
    using a rectifying means designed to rectify a signal modulated wave so as
    to produce in the output circuit a pulsating direct current representative
    of the signal, and electronic tube systems where a modulated wave is
    impressed upon the control means (e.g., grid) of the tube so as to control
    the output to produce a wave representative of the signal.

    7.      THE GAS OR VAPOR TUBE SYSTEMS IN CLASS 315, ELECTRIC LAMP AND
    DISCHARGE DEVICES, SYSTEMS AND THE CONVERSION SYSTEMS IN THIS CLASS (363):

    Class 315 contains many systems which are closely analogous to the systems
    in this class.  Class 315 provides for electrical systems for supplying
    electric current and/or potential to one or more electronic tubes of the
    gas or vapor type.  Many of these systems inherently convert A.C. to D.C.
    or D.C. to A.C.  Some are inherently oscillation generators.  Where the
    system is limited by claimed subject matter to supplying a load circuit, it
    is excluded from Class 315.  Merely claiming the circuit necessary to
    connect the anode to the cathode as a load circuit is not sufficient to
    exclude the system from Class 315. Claiming a load device, either
    specifically or broadly in the output circuit will exclude the system from
    Class 315.  Claiming subject matter which would not be provided unless the
    system were to be used for supplying a load device is sufficient to exclude
    the system from Class 315.  For example, reciting means in the output
    circuit responsive to overload conditions in output circuit to control the
    system will exclude the system from Class 315.

    Particular attention is called to the following subclasses which are fields
    of search for gas or vapor-type systems which inherently convert A.C. to
    D.C. or D.C. to A.C.  Subclasses 88+ where the system includes means to
    substitute one electronic tube for another when the electronic tube becomes
    inoperative by reason of some defect or failure to operate properly;
    subclasses 129+ where the system includes a signal indicator or alarm for
    indicating some condition of the system; and subclasses 194+ where the
    phase shifting means to control the current or potential applied to the
    control (grid circuit).

    a.      A.C. to D.C. In many of the systems in Class 315, the electronic
    tube is an asymmetrical device, and operates to pass electric current in
    one direction only between the electrodes.  Merely naming the device as a
    rectifier or derectifier is not sufficient to exclude the system from Class
    315, unless some subject matter is claimed which limits the system to the
    rectifying or derectifying art. Accordingly, a search for such systems
    where control of the rectifying or derectifying tube is the significant
    factor should include Class 315.

    See the subclasses referred to in the sections above, and also note
    subclasses 137+ where polyphase current is supplied to the tube or tubes
    (note subclass 138 where single phase is changed to polyphase which is
    applied to the tube to tubes); subclasses 246+ where alternating current is
    supplied to one or more tubes.

    b.      D.C. to A.C. Many systems using electric lamps of the gaseous or
    vapor discharge type inherently generate oscillations during operation.
    Class 315 therefore, provides for all systems for merely supplying electric
    current and/or potential to gaseous or vapor discharge devices whether the
    system is claimed as an oscillation generator or merely as a lamp circuit,
    provided that the system is not limited by claimed subject matter to use as
    an oscillation generator, such as, for example, means to transfer the
    oscillating electric energy to another circuit or means to use the
    oscillating energy.

    Also, Class 315 includes systems which do not inherently generate
    oscillations but which do inherently convert D.C. to A.C. The subclass
    referred to in the general Section of VI-7 above, and also note subclasses
    227+ for systems having a condenser in the supply circuit.  Many of the
    systems in subclasses 227+ include relaxation circuits (L-C R-C). Note
    especially subclasses 241+ where the condenser is connected in shunt to the
    tube so as to supply pulses of energy to the tube.  In subclass 229 will be
    found plural tube systems having a commutating condenser where the system
    inherently converts D.C. to A.C. Similar systems using tubes with a
    plurality of anodes or cathodes with a commutating condenser are in
    subclass 235.

    Subclass 323 provides for miscellaneous systems for sequentially starting a
    plurality of gas or vapor tubes.  So-called ring circuits are an example of
    such systems.  The search should extend for any particular type of system
    to the appropriate subclass noted in the search notes to subclass 323.

    8.      MOTOR GENERATOR SYSTEMS IN CLASS 322, ELECTRICITY, SINGLE GENERATOR
    SYSTEMS:

    Class 322 provides for motor-generator set systems wherein there is no
    significant relationship between the characteristics of the electrical
    energy supplied to the motor and the characteristics of the electrical
    energy supplied to the output circuit by the generator.

    Class 363 provides for those motor-generator set systems wherein there is a
    significant relationship between the characteristics of the electrical
    energy supplied to the motor and the characteristics of the electrical
    energy supplied to the output circuit by the generator (e.g., f1 to f2 or
    phase1 to phase2).

    9.      MODULATORS IN CLASS 332, MODULATORS AND THE CONVERSION SYSTEMS IN
    THIS CLASS (363):

    Class 332 includes conversion systems, such as pulse forming systems, D.C.
    to A.C. systems, frequency conversion systems where the purpose of the
    system is to produce a repetitious wave which has one of its
    characteristics (frequency, shape, phase) varied in accordance with an
    intelligence which continuously varies in an arbitrary manner.  An example
    of an arbitrary continuously varying intelligence is speech.  Examples of
    the waves produced by these systems are modulated pulse waves, frequency
    modulated carrier waves.  Oscillation generators which are modulated by an
    intelligence are included in Class 332.

    VII.    LINE BETWEEN CLASS 363 AND CLASS 323, ELECTRICITY, POWER SUPPLY OR
    REGULATION SYSTEMS

    Class 323 is restricted to those systems wherein only the magnitude of the
    current or voltage and/or the magnitude of the phase angle relationship are
    controlled, varied, or regulated.  Class 323 excludes all systems wherein a
    conversion step is performed on the energy going through the system.

    Class 363 provides for systems for converting input electrical energy into
    output electrical energy whose characteristics are different from those of
    the input electrical energy.  A Class 363 conversion system may include as
    a subcombination thereof a voltage magnitude and/or phase control system
    such as might be classified, per se, in Class 323.

    VIII.SYSTEMS NOT INCLUDED IN THIS CLASS

    a.      WAVE SHAPING:
    Mere wave shaping systems where the electrical energy is not converted into
    a different character (e.g., from A.C. to D.C. or vice versa), or where
    there is no phase or frequency conversion are not included in this class.
    For example, networks consisting of passive elements, such as resistors,
    capacitors, and inductances, which function to alter the shape of the wave
    (e.g., to convert a sine wave to a square wave) and which do not involve
    current, phase or frequency conversion means are excluded from Class 363.
    Also excluded are systems such as electronic tube systems and saturable
    reactor systems where a source of energy (e.g., the anode supply in the
    case of an electronic tube system) is controlled by a control signal so as
    to produce a wave having a particular shape, the shape having a definite
    relation to the control wave.

    Class 307, Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses
    106+ accepts class appropriate waveform or wave shape determinative or
    pulse producing systems.  Class 327, Miscellaneous Active Electrical
    Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and Systems, subclasses 100+ accepts
    miscellaneous nonlinear active device converting, shaping or generating
    circuits wherein a single electrical source is not coupled to a single
    electrical load.

    Class 333, Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 19 provides for
    differentiating and integrating networks of the passive type, and subclass
    20 provides for wave shaping networks of the passive type in general.

    b.      FILTERS:
    Class 333, Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 167+ provide
    for filter network which are designed to transmit freely, electrical energy
    of a particular frequency or range of frequencies while to attenuate
    substantially electrical energy of another frequency or range of
    frequencies.  See subclasses 24, 245+ and 248+ for Lines and Networks which
    include frequency conversion.

    c.      WAVE TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS:
    Class 333, Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, includes wave transmission
    systems wherein wave shaping occurs for facilitating transmission or
    correcting for distortion of electrical waves. Subclass 14 provides for
    amplitude compression and expansion systems; subclasses 15 and 16,
    respectively, provide for pilot line and current control systems wherein
    compensation occurs for changes in a transmission line's impedance
    characteristics; subclass 28 provides for equalizers of the passive type
    which modify the attenuation or attenuation and phase characteristics over
    a frequency range of the energy passing therethrough, and subclasses 138+
    provide for passive networks for retarding wave energy a predetermined
    period of time over a range of frequencies.  This class also provides in
    subclasses 25+ for passive networks for balanced to unbalanced circuit
    conversion.  This class further provides in subclasses 236+ for long
    transmission lines which may be balanced; and in subclasses 4+ for plural
    channel systems which include balanced circuits.  See subclasses 24, 245
    and 248 for Lines and Networks which included frequency conversion.

    IX.     CONVERTER STRUCTURE

    1.      This class provides for the electrical system as distinguished from
    the structure of the device which may be used in or as part of the system.
    For the structure of such converting devices, see "Related Art", below.

    X.      RELATED ART

    AMPLIFIERS:

    Class 330, for amplifiers. See section VI, 3 above.

    BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEMS:
    Class 320, Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass for the use of electric power conversion in a battery
    or capacitor charging or discharging system.

    CAR SYSTEMS:
    Class 307, Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses
    9.1+ for systems wherein the electrical equipment of a railroad car such as
    lights, air conditioning apparatus, etc., are supplied with electrical
    energy through a converter.

    CONDENSER CHARGING SYSTEMS:
    Class 307, Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 110
    for systems wherein a plurality of condensers are charged in parallel and
    discharged in series to produce a high voltage, and wherein there is no
    conversion.  Class 320, Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or
    Discharging, subclasses 166+ for miscellaneous capacitor charging or
    discharging systems.

    CONSUMABLE ELECTRODE SYSTEMS:
    Class 314, Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    appropriate subclasses for converter system supplied arc lamps, arc
    welders, etc.

    CURRENT MAGNITUDE CONTROL SYSTEMS:
    Class 323, Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    220-354 for current and/or voltage magnitude control systems.  See section
    VI, 8 above.

    DEMODULATORS:
    Class 329, Demodulators, appropriate subclasses for demodulators.  See
    section VI, 6 above.

    DYNAMOELECTRIC MACHINE:
    (See particular type).

    DYNAMOTOR STRUCTURE:
    Class 310, Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 138 for
    dynamotor structure.

    ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS:
    Class 178, Telegraphy, appropriate subclasses for telegraph systems which
    may include conversion systems as subcombinations thereof.

    Class 246, Railway Switches and Signals, appropriate subclasses for railway
    signaling systems which may include conversion systems as subcombinations
    thereof.

    Class 250, Radiant Energy, subclasses 458+ for signaling communication
    systems utilizing fluorescent or phosphorescent detectors.

    Class 340, Communications:  Electrical, appropriate subclass for signaling
    systems which may include conversion systems as subcombinations thereof.

    Class 342, Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation) appropriate subclasses for radar and directive
    radio systems which may include conversion systems as subcombinations
    thereof.

    Class 359, Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements,
    subclasses 109+ for light wave communications.

    Class 379, Telephonic Communications, appropriate subclasses for telegraphy
    systems which may include conversion systems as subcombinations thereof.

    ELECTRIC MEASURING SYSTEMS:
    Class 250, Radiant Energy, subclass 250 for radio and microwave absorption
    wavemeters.

    Class 324, Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, is the miscellaneous class
    of electrical measuring and texting.  Note subclasses 76.41+ for frequency
    measurement using frequency conversion; subclass 85 for phase comparison
    using frequency conversion; and subclasses 118, 119, and 120 for electric
    metering using current conversion.

    ELECTRIC SPACE DISCHARGE DEVICE:
    (See electronic tube.)

    ELECTROCHEMISTRY:
    Class 204, Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclasses
    for arrangements wherein chemical processes are supplied with electrical
    energy by a conversion system.

    ELECTROCUTING VERMIN:
    Class 43, Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 98+ and 112
    for arrangements wherein such electrocuting devices are supplied by
    conversion systems.

    ELECTRONIC TUBE STRUCTURE:
    Class 313, Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses for
    the structure of electronic tubes.

    ELECTRONIC TUBE SYSTEMS:
    Class 315, Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, for gas or vapor
    tube systems.  See sections VI, 2; VI, 4; and VI, 7 above.

    Class 327, Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous electron tube circuits
    and see the class definition search notes also.

    FILTERS:
    Class 333, Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 167+ for wave
    filters.  See section VIII, (b) above.

    FURNACES, ELECTRIC:
    Class 373, Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, appropriate subclasses for
    electric furnaces which may be supplied by conversion systems.

    GENERATOR STRUCTURE:
    Class 310, Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, appropriate subclasses
    for the structure of electrical generators and motors and subcombinations
    thereof, not elsewhere classified.

    GENERATOR SYSTEMS:
    Class 307, Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses
    43+ for systems where a circuit is energized by a plurality of sources of
    supply.

    Class 322, Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, appropriate subclasses
    for single generator systems.  See section VI, 8 above.

    HARMONIC GENERATOR SYSTEMS:
    See section VI, 5 above.

    HEATING SYSTEMS, ELECTRIC:
    Class 219, Electric Heating, appropriate subclasses for electric heating
    systems supplied by conversion systems.

    LAMP SYSTEMS:
    Class 314, Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    appropriate subclasses for conversion system supplied consumable electrode
    lamp systems.

    Class 315, Electric Lamps and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for conversion system supplied lamp systems.  See sections VI,
    2; VI, 4; and VI, 7 above.

    MODULATORS:
    Class 332, Modulators, see sections VI, 2; VI, 9 above.

    MOTOR SYSTEMS:
    Class 318, Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    electric motor systems, which include conversion means.

    MUSIC:
    Class 84, Music, subclasses 672 - 677 for electrical tone generators which
    include conversion systems as a part thereof.

    OSCILLATORS:
    Class 315, Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, gas or vapor tube
    systems analogous to oscillators.  See sections VI, 2; VI, 4; and VI, 7.

    Class 331, Oscillators, for self-sustaining electric wave generation
    systems.  See sections VI, 2; VI, 4; and VI, 5.

    PHASE CONTROL SYSTEMS:
    Class 323, Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    212-219, subclasses indented under "Phase Control", for phase control
    systems of general application.

    PLURAL INPUT AND/OR OUTPUT SYSTEMS:
    Class 307, Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses
    11+ for systems having plural outputs, and subclasses 43+ for systems
    having plural inputs.

    PULSING SYSTEMS:
    See section VI, 2 above.

    RAILROAD LOCOMOTIVES, ELECTRIC:
    Class 105, Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 49+ for electric motor driven
    locomotives which may include a conversion system for converting the
    electrical energy supplied by the trolley to a form having characteristics
    suitable for the motor.

    RECTIFIER ELEMENT STRUCTURE:
    Class 200, Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate
    subclasses for switches used as rectifier elements; particularly note
    subclasses 19+ for periodic switches.

    Class 257, Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State
    Diodes), appropriate subclasses for devices which may be used as
    rectifiers, including subclasses 107-181 for regenerative type devices
    (e.g., thyristors).

    Class 329, Demodulators, appropriate subclasses for rectifiers used in
    demodulators.

    Class 335, Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 87+ for vibrator type electromagnetic switches.

    Class 361, Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 436 for
    the structure of rectifier elements of the electrolytic type.

    ROTARY CONVERTER STRUCTURE:
    Class 310, Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 129+ for
    rotary converter structure.

    SIGNALING SYSTEMS:
    See Electric Communication Systems.

    SURGERY, ELECTRICAL APPLICATIONS:
    Class 607, Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclass 1
    for arrangements for supplying electricity to the body.  These arrangements
    require electric currents having particular characteristics and it is usual
    for them to include conversion systems as subcombinations.

    SWITCHING SYSTEMS:
    Class 307, Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses
    112+ for class appropriate transmission or interconnection switching
    systems, and subclass 132 for repetitive make and break systems.

    Class 327, Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 365+ for miscellaneous gating circuits analogous to
    mechanical switching.

    Class 361, Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 93+ for
    safety systems involving circuit interruption, subclasses 160+ for relay
    and electromagnetic switching systems, and subclasses 245+ for polarity
    reversing systems.

    TELEGRAPH SYSTEMS:
    (See electric communication systems.)

    TELEPHONE SYSTEMS:
    (See electric communication systems.)

    TESTING SYSTEMS:
    (See electric measuring systems.)

    THERMOCOUPLES OR THERMAL BATTERIES:

    Class 136, Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclasses 200+.

    VOLTAGE MAGNITUDE CONTROL SYSTEMS:
    (See current magnitude control systems.)

    WAVE MODE CONVERTERS:

    Class 333, Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 21 for wave mode
    converters.

    WAVE TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS:

    Class 333, Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, includes wave transmission
    systems.  See section VIII, (c) above.

    X-RAY SYSTEMS SUPPLIED BY RECTIFIERS:

    Class 378, X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 101+.

    XI.     INDEX TO CLASSES REFERRED TO IN PRECEDING SECTIONS

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, electrocuting vermin,
    subclasses 98+, 112, X.

    84,     Music, electric tone generating systems, subclasses 672 - 677, X.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, electric locomotives, subclasses 49+, X.

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, thermocouples or
    thermal batteries, subclasses 200+, X.

    178,    Telegraphy, X; pulse producing systems, subclasses 17+, 23+, 66.1,
    VI, 2.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, X.

    219,    Electric Heating, X.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, X.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
      X.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, miscellaneous
    systems having plural input and/or output circuits, subclasses 11+, 43+, X;
    plural condenser charging systems, subclass 110, X; miscellaneous switching
    systems, subclasses 112+, X; pulsing systems, subclasses 106+, VI, 2; wave
    shaping, subclasses 106+, VIII, a.; dynamotor structure, subclass 138, X;
    rotary converter structure, subclasses 129+, X; generator structure,
    appropriate subclasses, X; car systems, subclasses 9.1+, X.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses,
    electron tube structure, X.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes, X.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, VI, 7; oscillators,
    VI, 4; pulse forming in VI, 2.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, X.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging, X,
    BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEMS; and for subclasses 166+, X, CONDENSER CHARGING
    SYSTEMS.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, motor-generator systems,
    VI, 8. Electricity-heat-electricity conversion, subclass 1.5.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, VII; X.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, electric metering, subclasses
    118, 119, 120, X; frequency measuring, subclasses 76.41+, X; phase
    comparison, subclass 85, X.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, VI, 2; VI, 5; VIII, a; X.

    329,    Demodulators, VI, 6; X. rectifier elements in demodulators, X.

    331,    Oscillators, VI, 4; X. Pulsing system utilizing an electronic tube,
    subclasses 111+, 129+, 143+, VI, 2; harmonic generators, subclasses 53, 76,
    77, VI-5.

    332,    Modulators, VI, 9; pulse forming, VI, 2.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, VIII, c; X; amplitude
    compression and expansion systems, subclass 14, VIII, c; balanced long
    lines, subclasses 4+ and 236+, VIII, c; balanced to unbalanced passive
    conversion networks, subclasses 25+, VIII, c; differentiating or
    integrating systems, subclass 19, VIII, a; delay networks, subclasses 138+,
    VIII, c; equalizers, subclass 28, VIII, c; filters, subclass 213, VIII, b;
    frequency conversion, subclasses 24+, 245, and 248; mode converters,
    subclass 21, X; pilot current controlled systems, subclass 16, VIII, c;
    pilot line controlled systems, subclass 15, VIII, c; wave shaping, subclass
    20, VIII, a.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, pulse code transmitters 341, Coded
    Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 20+ and 173+, VI.2., signal box
    systems, subclasses 287+; VI, 2; signaling systems using conversion, X.

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), radar and directive radio systems, X.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, electrolytic
    rectifiers, subclass 436, X; polarity reversing systems, subclasses 245+,
    X; relay and electromagnetic systems, subclasses 160+, X; safety systems,
    subclasses 93+, X.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, X.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 101+, X.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, X; pulse producing systems, subclass
    362, VI, 2.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, applying
    electricity to the body, subclass 1.


CLS 363/1
TXT CASCADED OR COMBINED, DIVERSE CONVERSIONS IN WHICH THE FREQUENCY OR PHASE
    OR COMBINED CONVERSION IS WITHOUT INTERMEDIATE CONVERSION TO D.C.:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein different types of
    conversions are cascaded or combined without intermediate conversion toD.C.

    (1)     Note.  The conversions must be of the type classifiable in this
    class.  That is, the system must be within the class definition and include
    means to effect a differing sequence or combination of at least two of the
    following operations:

    1.      Current conversion

    2.      Phase conversion

    3.      Frequency conversion

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+     and 34+, for diverse conversion with intermediate conversion to D.C.


CLS 363/2
TXT Current and phase (e.g., D.C. -Ph1 -Ph2):

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the system includes current
    conversion and phase conversion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13+,    for current conversion systems.

    148+,   for phase conversion systems.


CLS 363/3
TXT Phase 1 to phase 2 to D.C.:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein A. C. of one phase is converted to
    A.C. of another phase which is then converted to D.C.


CLS 363/4
TXT Single phase to polyphase to D.C.:

    Subject matter under subclass 3 wherein single phase A.C. is converted to
    polyphase A.C. which is then converted to D.C.


CLS 363/5
TXT With interphase transformer:

    Subject matter under subclass 3 wherein an interphase transformer is
    provided in the polyphase circuit.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 64 for definition of an interphase transformer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for current conversion systems operating without phase conversion
    which include an interphase transformer.


CLS 363/6
TXT Including plural anode/single cathode device:

    Subject matter under subclass 5 wherein the system includes a device having
    multiple anodes, but only a single cathode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66,     for current conversion systems including plural anode/single
    cathode devices; and subclass 168 for frequency-con-version systems
    including plural anode/single cathode devices.


CLS 363/7
TXT With dynamic rectifier in phase 2 to D.C. stage (e.g., commutator type):

    Subject matter under subclass 3 wherein a dynamic rectifier is provided for
    converting the phase 2 A.C. to D.C.

    (1)     Note.  A dynamic converter is a converter having mechanical moving
    parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102+,   for dynamoelectric machine current conversion.

    108,    for current conversion by circuit interrupter, rotating rectifier
    type conversion systems.


CLS 363/8
TXT Current and frequency (e.g., f1-f2-D.C.):

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the system includes current and
    frequency conversion and frequency conversion.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition, under Definition of Terms, for
    definitions of current conversion and frequency conversion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13+,    for current conversion systems.

    157+,   for frequency conversion systems.


CLS 363/9
TXT Combined phase and frequency conversion (i.e., Ph1f1-Ph2f2):

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the system includes phase and
    frequency conversion.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition under Definition of Terms, for
    definitions of phase conversion and frequency conversion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148+,   for phase conversion systems.

    157+,   for frequency conversion systems.


CLS 363/10
TXT By semiconductor device converter:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein the converter means includes a
    semiconductor device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159+,   for frequency conversion by semiconductor converter.


CLS 363/11
TXT By electron tube converter:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein the converter means includes an
    electron tube device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151,    for phase conversion by electron tube converter.

    166,    for frequency conversion by electron tube converter.


CLS 363/12
TXT By saturable reactor converter:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein the converter means includes a
    saturable reactor device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91+,    for current conversion with saturable reactor control means in the
    line current.


CLS 363/13
TXT CURRENT CONVERSION:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the conversion system
    includes means to convert alternating current to direct current or direct
    current to alternating current.

    (1)     Note.  The conversion systems included in this and the indented
    subclasses are the current conversion systems as defined in the class
    definition.

    (2)     Note.  In the communication arts, there are many different
    conversion systems which are, in fact, converters of D.C. to A.C. or vice
    versa.  A partial list of such converters includes oscillators, detectors,
    amplifiers, demodulators, etc.  See section VI of the class definition for
    more detailed discussion of the conversion systems not included in this
    class.  See section X of the class definition for a listing of the related
    art.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for current conversion systems cascaded or combined with frequency
    or phase converters without intermediate conversion to D.C.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, appropriate subclasses for self-sustaining electric
    wave generating systems for converting direct current to alternating
    current.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 101+ for X-ray
    tube energizing circuits which may include circuit interrupter type
    converters.


CLS 363/14
TXT Cryogenic:

    Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein the conversion system is operated
    at temperatures near absolute zero.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141,    for current conversion systems with noncryogenic cooling means.


CLS 363/15
TXT Including D.C.-A.C.-D.C. converter:

    Subject matter under subclass 13 including a first stage with means to
    change direct current to intermediate alternating current, and a further
    second stage with means to change the intermediate alternating current to
    direct current.

    (1)     Note.  Chopper-type converters are classified in this or indented
    subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52+,    67+, 76+, 81+, 84+, 108+, 114+, and 125+, for single stage
    A.C.-D.C. systems.

    55+,    71+, 95+, 109, 120+, 131+, and 135+, for single stage D.C.-A.C.
    systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 118 for amplifiers of
    the type described below under Class 330, when claimed in combination with
    a meter.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 10 for amplifier systems for D.C.
    amplification which have a modulator means to convert D.C. to A.C., and
    A.C. amplifier and demodulator means to detect the D.C. signal for feeding
    to the load.  See the search notes thereunder.


CLS 363/16
TXT Having transistorized inverter:

    Subject matter under subclass 15 in which the D.C.-A.C. conversion is
    performed by transistorized circuitry.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     97+ and 131, for single stage D.C.-A.C. conversion by
    transistorized inverter means.


CLS 363/17
TXT Bridge type:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 in which the inverter consists of either
    two transistors and two capacitors or four transistors in a bridge
    configuration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98,     for transistorized bridge-type conversion means with transistor
    control means in the line circuit.

    132,    for single stage D.C.-A.C. conversion by transistorized bridge-type
    conversion means.


CLS 363/18
TXT Single ended self-oscillating type:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 in which one transistor switch means
    automatically operates to consecutively and periodically couple the source
    to an inductive device.

    (1)     Note.  The inductive device may be a swinging choke or the primary
    winding of a power transformer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for single ended separately driven type.

    30,     for single ended electron tube type.


CLS 363/19
TXT With automatic control of the magnitude of the voltage or current:

    Subject matter under subclass 18 which includes circuitry for the
    regulation of the output voltage or current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     23, 25+, 28, and 78+, for other automatic voltage and current
    regulation circuits.


CLS 363/20
TXT Single ended separately driven type:
    Subject matter under subclass 16 in which one transistor switch means is
    operated by an independent drive circuit to consecutively and periodically
    couple the source to an inductive device.

    (1)     Note.  The inductive device may be a swinging choke or the primary
    winding of a power transformer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for single ended self-oscillating type transistorized inverters.

    30,     for single ended tube type transistorized inverters.


CLS 363/21
TXT With automatic control of the magnitude of the output voltage or current:

    Subject matter under subclass 20 which includes circuitry for the
    regulation of the output voltage or current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     23, 25+, 28, and 78+, for other automatic voltage and current
    regulation circuits.


CLS 363/22
TXT Double ended (i.e., push-pull) self-oscillating type:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 in which the D.C.-A.C. stage comprises a
    push-pull oscillator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24+     and 134, for other double ended separately driven type.

    31,     for double ended tube type inverter.


CLS 363/23
TXT With automatic control of the magnitude of the output voltage or current:

    Subject matter under subclass 22 which includes circuitry for the
    regulation of the output voltage or current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     21, 25+, and 78+, for other automatic voltage and current
    regulation circuits.


CLS 363/24
TXT Double ended (i.e., push-pull) separately driven type:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 in which an independent drive circuit
    controls both the on and the off state of the transistors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22+     and 133, for other transistorized double ended inverters.

    31,     for tube type double ended inverters. 134, for single stage
    transistorized double ended separately driven type inverters.


CLS 363/25
TXT With automatic control of the magnitude of the output voltage or current:

    Subject matter under subclass 24 which includes circuitry for the
    regulation of the output voltage or current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     21, 23, 28, and 78+, for other automatic voltage and current
    regulation circuits.


CLS 363/26
TXT Using pulse width modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 25 wherein circuit means are included to
    control the duration of the pulses that drive the transistors, which
    regulate the magnitude of the output voltage or current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41+,    for pulse modulating techniques in introducing or eliminating
    frequency components to or from inverter   systems.


CLS 363/27
TXT Having thyristor inverter, (e.g., SCR):
    Subject matter under subclass 15 in which the device is a bistable
    semiconductor element made up of three or more junctions.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of these devices are the silicon controlled
    rectifier (SCR), the gate controlled switch (SCS), or the four layer diode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     for inverter systems with automatic control having thyristor
    control means in the line circuit.

    135+,   for single stage thyristor inverter  systems.


CLS 363/28
TXT With automatic control of the magnitude of the output voltage or current:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 which includes circuitry for the
    regulation of the output voltage or current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     21, 23, 28, and 78+, for other automatic voltage and current
    regulation circuits.


CLS 363/29
TXT Having electron tube inverter:

    Subject matter under subclass 15 in which the D.C.-A.C. conversion is
    performed by circuitry utilizing electron tubes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38      and 120+, for other inverters utilizing electron tubes.


CLS 363/30
TXT Single ended type:

    Subject matter under subclass 29 in which one electronic tube is repeatedly
    and periodically coupled to an inductive device.

    (1)     Note.  The inductive device may be a swinging choke or the primary
    winding of a power transformer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18+,    for single ended transistorized self- oscillating type inverters.

    20+,    for single ended transistorized separately driven type inverters.


CLS 363/31
TXT Double ended type (i.e., push-pull):
    Subject matter under subclass 29 in which two electronic tubes are
    alternately and periodically coupled to opposite terminals of a
    center-tapped primary winding of a power transformer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22+,    for double ended transistorized self- oscillating type inverters.

    24+,    for double ended transistorized separately driven type inverters.


CLS 363/32
TXT Rotary-commutator-type inverter:

    Subject matter under subclass 15 in which the conversion is performed
    mechanically utilizing rotating, arcuate segments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109,    for other rotary-type inverters.


CLS 363/33
TXT Vibrator-type inverter:

    Subject matter under subclass 15 in which the conversion is performed by a
    vibrator.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition, under Definition of Terms, for
    definition of vibrator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for other vibrator-type inverters.


CLS 363/34
TXT Including an A.C.-D.C.-A.C. converter:
    Subject matter under subclass 13 including a first stage with means to
    change alternating current to intermediate direct current, and a further
    second stage with means to change the intermediate direct current to
    alternating current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52+,    61, 67+, 84+, 108, 114+, and 125, for A.C. to D.C. single current
    conversion systems.


CLS 363/35
TXT For transfer of power via a high voltage D.C. link (i.e., HVDC transmission
    system):Subject matter under subclass 34 wherein the conversion of A.C. to
    D.C. facilitates the transmission of power as D.C. between A.C. systems.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for HVDC transmission systems with automatic or integral protection
    means.


CLS 363/36
TXT For change of phase (e.g., number of phases):

    Subject matter under subclass 34 wherein there is a phase conversion with
    an intermediate conversion to D.C.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     9+ and 148+, for phase conversion without intermediate conversion
    to D.C.


CLS 363/37
TXT By semiconductor rectifier and inverter:
    Subject matter under subclass 34 which includes semiconductor converting
    elements in both this rectifier and the inverter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     16+ and 27+, for converters which both rectify and invert, and
    utilize semiconductor elements to perform the inverting conversion.

    53+,    61, 67+, 77, and 125+, for semiconductor rectifier systems.

    56+,    131+ and 135, for semiconductor inverter systems.


CLS 363/38
TXT By electron tube rectifier and inverter:
    Subject matter under subclass 34 which includes electron tubes as the
    converting elements in both the rectifier and the inverter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27+,    for current converters which both invert and rectify having
    electron tube inverter.

    114,    for electron tube rectifier systems.

    120+,   for electron tube inverter systems.


CLS 363/39
TXT With means to introduce or eliminate frequency components:

    Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein the system includes means for
    introducing a desired harmonic frequency into the system or filtering an
    undesired frequency component from the system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 3 for
    systems in which currents of different frequency or phase are superimposed
    thereon; and subclass 73 for systems having plural supply circuits of
    different frequency; also, subclass 105 for systems with harmonic filters
    or neutralizers.

    329,    Demodulators, subclasses 318+ for undesired signal removal from a
    frequency demodulator and subclasses 349+ for undesired signal removal from
    an amplitude demodulator.

    332,    Modulators, appropriate subclasses for systems wherein a single
    wave controls a base fundamental or carrier wave to produce a resultant
    modulated wave.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 167+ for wave
    filter networks.


CLS 363/40
TXT In inverter systems:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 where the system is a D.C. to A.C.
    converter.


CLS 363/41
TXT By pulse modulation technique (e.g. PWM, PPM, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 40 wherein each half cycle of the basic
    inverter frequency is divided into two or more pulses in accordance with a
    modulating waveform.

    (1)     Note.  The most common technique in this subclass is pulse width
    modulation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 265+
    for systems having signal shaping, converting or generating means with
    pulse width control.


CLS 363/42
TXT Including notching:

    Subject matter under subclass 41 wherein "Notches" are produced in the
    inverted waveform by temporarily applying opposite discrete voltages from
    that which dominates during the waveform cycle.


CLS 363/43
TXT By step-wave, amplitude summation technique:

    Subject matter under subclass 40 in which a plurality of square waves are
    selectively combined to provide stepped waveform approaching a sine wave.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 107
    for inverters with waveform or wave shape determining systems.


CLS 363/44
TXT In rectifier systems:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 wherein the systems is an A.C.-D.C.
    converter.


CLS 363/45
TXT Including means for reducing ripples from the output:

    Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein the means reduce the ripple from
    the output D.C. line.

    (1)     Note.  The most usual means in this subclass is a low pass filter
    used to eliminate ripple from the D.C. line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 181 for filters of
    the smoothing type, e.g., direct current power supply filters.


CLS 363/46
TXT With ripple responsive, automatic control:
    Subject matter under subclass 45 wherein the means provided are responsive
    to the D.C. ripple on the output line, and the means include circuitry for
    reducing the magnitude of the sensed ripple.


CLS 363/47
TXT With low-pass L or LC filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 45 wherein a low pass inductor or
    inductor-capacitor filter is used to reduce the ripple.

    (1)     Note.  The filter may be integral with or on the output side of the
    rectifier.


CLS 363/48
TXT For semiconductor rectifier:

    Subject matter under subclass 47 wherein the rectification is performed by
    a semiconductor system or device.


CLS 363/49
TXT With starting arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 13 having means to initiate operation of the
    conversion system.


CLS 363/50
TXT Including automatic or integral protection means:

    Subject matter under subclass 13 including means which are automatically
    responsive to an abnormal or unsafe condition and either disables the
    system or corrects the abnormal or unsafe condition.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of the conditions to which the systems of this
    subclass are responsive are:  arc back, flash over, excess heating, short
    circuit, open ground, input voltage failure, failure of an element of the
    system, excess overload and underload.

    (2)     Note.  The abnormal or unsafe condition may be in the converter
    device or in any other part of the system.

    (3)     Note.  An example of the integral protection means is a zener diode
    which responds to an overload condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 635+ for electrical
    apparatus condition responsive means.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    safety and protection of general systems and devices.


CLS 363/51
TXT For high voltage D.C. transmission systems: Subject matter under subclass
    50 wherein the system for which protection is provided is a high voltage
    D.C. transmission system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     for other HVDC transmission systems.


CLS 363/52
TXT For rectifiers:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein the systems for which protection
    is provided is an A.C. to D.C. converter.


CLS 363/53
TXT Semiconductor type:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 which includes a semiconductor device as
    the converting element.


CLS 363/54
TXT Thyristor:

    Subject matter under subclass 53 wherein the semiconductor device is a
    "Thyristor".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 107-181 for regenerative type devices, including thyristors.


CLS 363/55
TXT For inverters:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein the system for which protection is
    provided is a D.C. to A.C. converter.


CLS 363/56
TXT Semiconductor type:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 which includes a semiconductor device as
    the converting element.


CLS 363/57
TXT Thyristor:

    Subject matter under subclass 56 wherein the semiconductor device is a
    "Thyristor".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 107-181 for regenerative type devices, including thyristors.


CLS 363/58
TXT Bridge:

    Subject matter under subclass 57 wherein the inverter circuit is in a
    bridge-type configuration and includes at least one thyristor.


CLS 363/59
TXT With voltage multiplication means (i.e., V out > V in):

    Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein storage type device means are
    provided for multiplying the voltage, so that the output voltage is a
    multiple of the input voltage.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a voltage multiplier is an arrangement wherein
    a plurality of condensers are charged in parallel and discharged in series.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 110
    for voltage multipliers of the type which charges two or more capacitors in
    parallel and discharges them in series.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass for series connection of voltaic cells or capacitors
    in a battery or capacitor charging or discharging system.


CLS 363/60
TXT Including semiconductor means:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the converting means includes a
    nonlinear solid-state device.


CLS 363/61
TXT For Rectifying:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 wherein the conversion is from A.C. to D.C.


CLS 363/62
TXT With voltage division by storage type impedance (i.e., V out >V in):

    Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein storage type device means are
    provided for dividing the voltage, so that the output voltage is a
    subdivision of the input voltage.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a voltage divider is an arrangement wherein a
    plurality of capacitors are charged in series and discharged in parallel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 109
    for voltage dividers of the type which charges two or more capacitors in
    series and discharges them in parallel.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass for series connection of voltaic cells or capacitors
    in a battery or capacitor charging or discharging system.


CLS 363/63
TXT With means to selectively provide D.C. of either polarity:

    Subject matter under subclass 13 having means to optionally supply a D.C.
    output of either a negative or positive polarity.


CLS 363/64
TXT With interphase transformer:

    Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein the conversion system is of a type
    wherein polyphase alternating current is converted to direct current or
    vice versa and an interphase transformer is provided in the polyphase
    circuit.

    (1)     Note.  An interphase transformer is an auto transformer or a set of
    mutually coupled reactors used in combination with the converter
    transformers, where a plurality of transformers are used in the line
    circuits to balance the distribution of current among the converters
    connected to the transformer.  Also, an interphase transformer may be
    connected to the line circuit so as to multiply the number of paths of the
    current through the converter without multiplying the number of phases in
    the line circuit containing the interphase transformers.  Many of the
    systems having interphase transformers use electronic tubes as the
    converting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 142 for
    electronic tube systems of the gas or vapor type having a polyphase source
    of supply for the electronic tubes, the supply circuit including an
    interphase transformer.  The systems in subclass 142 of Class 315 are
    closely analogous to the systems in this subclass as many of the systems in
    Class 315 are disclosed as being rectifying systems.


CLS 363/65
TXT Having plural converters for single conversion:

    Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein a single current conversion is
    effected simultaneously by a plurality of converters.

    (1)     Note.  The converters may be connected in series, in parallel, or
    combinations thereof.

    (2)     Note.  In the systems in this subclass the conversion must be only
    from A.C. to D.C. or from D.C. to A.C.  The ordinary full wave rectifying
    systems are excluded because each half of the wave is rectified by a
    separate converter, and rectifiers are alternately effective, i.e., one
    half of the wave being rectified and then the other half of the wave.  Full
    wave systems having a plurality of converters for each half of the
    alternating current wave are included. Likewise, polyphase systems are
    excluded unless one or more of the phases is provided with a plurality of
    converters so that a single current conversion in a phase is effected by a
    plurality of converters.  Full wave and polyphase converter systems will be
    found in the other subclasses of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15      and 34+, for current conversion systems where the system includes
    means to effect a plurality of current conversion.  Examples of the systems
    in subclasses 34+ are systems which convert A.C. to D.C. to A.C. or which
    convert A.C. to D.C. to A.C. to D.C.

    64,     for current conversion systems which include an interphase
    transformer for multiplying the number of paths through the converter
    without multiplying the number of phases.


CLS 363/66
TXT Including plural anode and single cathode (e.g., vapor arc device):

    Subject matter under subclass 65 wherein each converter means is an
    electron tube device having more than one anode and only one cathode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for cascaded conversion of current and phase including at least one
    plural anode-single cathode device.

    168,    for plural anode-single cathode devices used in frequency
    conversion.


CLS 363/67
TXT Plural rectifiers:

    Subject matter under subclass 65 having more than one rectifier as the
    conversion means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 75+ for plural discrete rectifying active solid-state devices
    combined with a housing.


CLS 363/68
TXT In series (e.g., series SCR's, bridge circuits, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 67 wherein the rectifiers are connected in
    series.


CLS 363/69
TXT In parallel:

    Subject matter under subclass 67 wherein the rectifiers are connected in
    parallel.


CLS 363/70
TXT Including semiconductor device:

    Subject matter under subclass 69 wherein the converting means includes a
    semiconductor device.


CLS 363/71
TXT Plural inverters:

    Subject matter under subclass 65 having more than one inverter as the
    conversion means.


CLS 363/72
TXT Master-slave:

    Subject matter under subclass 71 wherein one inverter is operated in a
    phase shifted relationship with respect to a second inverter.


CLS 363/73
TXT Constant current to constant voltage or vice versa:

    Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein the system includes means for
    changing constant current to constant voltage or vice versa.

    (1)     Note.  Some exemplary arrangements for changing constant current to
    constant voltage or vice versa include monocyclic networks and networks and
    constant current transformers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    220-354 for miscellaneous current regulating systems of the constant
    current type.


CLS 363/74
TXT With condition responsive means to control the output voltage current:

    Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein the system is provided with means
    responsive to a predetermined condition which controls the voltage and/or
    current magnitude of the system in response to that condition.

    (1)     Note.  The control may be accomplished by controlling any of the
    following:

            1.  The converter supply circuit.
    2.  The converter load circuit.
    3.  The converter itself.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 635+ for electrical
    apparatus condition responsive means.


CLS 363/75
TXT Including inductive integral sensing and control means (e.g., ferroresonant
    circuit):

    Subject matter under subclass 74 wherein the system includes inductive
    integral means for performing the dual functions of sensing a condition and
    regulating the output voltage or current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     for plural cooperating sensing and control means for rectifier with
    inductive means in the line circuit.

    90,     for cooperating sensing and control means for rectifier with
    inductive means in the line circuit.


CLS 363/76
TXT Including integral sensing and control means for rectifier:

    Subject matter under subclass 74 wherein the system is a rectifier which
    includes integral means for performing the dual functions of sensing a
    condition and regulating the output voltage or current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52+,    for integral protection means for rectifiers.


CLS 363/77
TXT With semiconductor conversion means:
    Subject matter under subclass 76 wherein the rectifier is a semiconductor
    circuit or device.


CLS 363/78
TXT Cooperating separate sensing and control means:

    Subject matter under subclass 74 wherein the system includes means to sense
    a condition and to operate in conjunction with a separate means to regulate
    the output voltage or current.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes those systems wherein a line
    condition is compared with a standard (e.g., line voltage compared with a
    standard voltage cell).  Such systems are considered to be responsive to a
    single condition.


CLS 363/79
TXT Including plural sensing or control means: Subject matter under subclass 78
    which includes more than one sensing or control means to regulate the
    output voltage or current.

    (1)     Note.  The above plural conditions may include conditions of the
    same kind, such as the voltage of the supply circuit and the voltage of the
    load circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclasses 19, 20, 21, and
    24+ for single generator systems, including motor-generator systems having
    automatic control of the generator in response to plural circuit conditions
    of the generator.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for automatic voltage and/or current control systems which are
    responsive to plural line circuit conditions.


CLS 363/80
TXT With transistor as control means in line circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 having transistor control means in the
    line circuit, the operation of which is controlled by condition responsive
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89,     for similar subject matter in a rectifier system.

    97,     for similar subject matter in an inverter system.


CLS 363/81
TXT For rectifier:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 wherein the condition responsive system is
    included in an A.C.-D.C. converter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     for single sensing and control means for a rectifier system.


CLS 363/82
TXT With inductive control means in the line circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 81 having inductive control means in the line
    circuit, the operation of which is controlled by the condition responsive
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for inductive integral sensing and control means.

    90,     for inductive control means in the line circuit of a rectifier
    system.


CLS 363/83
TXT With electron tube or valve as control means in line circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 81 wherein the line circuit control means
    includes an electronic tube.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition, under Definition of Terms, for
    definition of electronic tube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94,     for similar subject matter in a rectifier system.

    99,     for similar subject matter in an inverter system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for miscellaneous systems for supplying current to electronic
    tubes of the vapor or gas type.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 227
    and 291 for current or voltage magnitude control systems where the current
    or voltage magnitude control means includes an electronic tube.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous electron tube systems not
    otherwise classified.


CLS 363/84
TXT For rectifier system:

    Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein the system is an A.C. to D.C.
    converter.


CLS 363/85
TXT With thyristor control means in the line circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 having a thyristor in the line circuit,
    the operation of which is controlled by condition responsive means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     for this subject matter in an inverter system.


CLS 363/86
TXT External to rectifier (e.g., pre or post regulation):

    Subject matter under subclass 85 wherein the thyristor controls the flow of
    current to or from the rectifier.


CLS 363/87
TXT For plural phase to D.C. rectifier:

    Subject matter under subclass 85 wherein the A.C. input to the rectifier is
    of more than one phase.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129,    for plural phase A.C. to D.C. thyristor rectifier systems.


CLS 363/88
TXT For full wave rectifier with at least 1 three electrode device:

    Subject matter under subclass 85 wherein each half wave is rectified by a
    separate rectifier and the rectifiers are alternately operated to perform
    full wave rectification.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67+,    for plural rectifiers for single conversion.


CLS 363/89
TXT With transistor control means in the line circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 having transistor control means in the
    line circuit, the operation of which is controlled by condition responsive
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     for this subject matter with plural sensing and control means.

    97,     for this subject matter in an inverter system.


CLS 363/90
TXT With inductive control means in the line circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 having inductive control means in the line
    circuit, the operation of which is controlled by condition responsive means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for inductive integral means for performing the dual functions of
    sensing a condition and regulating the output voltage or current.

    82,     for plural sensing with inductive control means in the line circuit.


CLS 363/91
TXT Saturable reactor (e.g., magnetic amplifier):

    Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein the inductive control means is a
    saturable reactor type device.

    (1)     Note.  A saturable reactor is a reactor provided with a control
    winding which is supplied with a direct current to saturate the magnetic
    circuit of the reactor and thereby vary its impedance.

    (2)     Note.  The saturable reactor may be, for example, a magnetic
    amplifier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 249,
    302, 310, and 329 for current and/or voltage magnitude control systems
    where the control means is a saturable transformer.


CLS 363/92
TXT In plural phase to D.C. system:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 wherein the A.C. input to the system is of
    more than one phase and the output from the system is D.C.


CLS 363/93
TXT With plural control windings:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 where the saturable reactor has more than
    one control winding.


CLS 363/94
TXT With electron tube or valve control means in the line circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 wherein the line circuit control means
    includes an electronic tube.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition, under Definition of Terms, for
    definition of Electronic Tube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83,     for this subject matter in a rectifier system having plural sensing
    or control means.

    99,     for this subject matter in an inverter system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for miscellaneous systems for supplying current to electronic
    tubes of the vapor or gas type.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 227
    and 291 for current or voltage magnitude control systems where the current
    or voltage magnitude control means includes an electronic tube.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous electron tube systems not
    otherwise classified.


CLS 363/95
TXT For inverter:

    Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein the system is a D.C. to A.C.
    converter.


CLS 363/96
TXT With thyristor control means in the line circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 95 having a thyristor in the line circuit,
    the operation of which is controlled by condition responsive means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85,     for this subject matter in a rectifier system.


CLS 363/97
TXT With transistor control means in the line circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 95 having transistor control means in the
    line circuit, the operation of which is controlled by condition responsive
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     for this subject matter with plural sensing or control means.

    89,     for this subject matter in a rectifier system.


CLS 363/98
TXT For bridge type inverter:

    Subject matter under subclass 97 wherein the conversion system includes a
    bridge configuration type inverter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for bridge configuration type inverters with automatic or integral
    protection means.


CLS 363/99
TXT With electron tube or valve control means in the line circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 95 wherein the line circuit control means
    includes an electron tube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83,     for this subject matter in a rectifier system having plural sensing
    or control means.

    94,     for this subject matter in a rectifier system.


CLS 363/100
TXT With manual control of the output voltage or current:

    Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein control of the output voltage or
    current is effected by hand operated means.


CLS 363/101
TXT With auxiliary bucking or boosting EMF:
    Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein the system is provided with means
    to supply additional voltage into the system which may either aid or oppose
    the voltage of the system.

    (1)     Note.  The additional voltage may be introduced into either the
    converter supply line or the converter load line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 77+
    for systems in which a plurality of sources of electric current are
    connected in series.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclasses 86+ for
    generator systems including motor generator systems, wherein the field
    winding is supplied by plural sources of excitation voltage.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 259
    and 344 for bucking and/or boosting transformer systems.


CLS 363/102
TXT By dynamoelectric machine converter:
    Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein the converter includes a
    dynamoelectric machine.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition, under Definition of Terms, for a
    definition of Dynamoelectric Machine.

    (2)     Note.  The dynamoelectric machine types commonly used as current
    converters include motor-generator sets and rotary converters.

    (3)     Note.  Although systems involving motor-generator sets are
    generally classified in Class 322, Electricity:  Single Generator Systems,
    in systems wherein there is significant conversion from D.C. to A.C. or
    vice versa, classification is in this class (363). However, the generic
    place for systems involving motor-generator sets is in Class 322.  See
    section VI, 8 for the class definition.

    (4)     Note.  Since many of the problems of operation and control of
    dynamoelectric machine converters are analogous to the problems of
    operation, and control of motors and generators (e.g., starting speed
    control, excitation control, etc.), it is noted that analogous pertinent
    art is classified in the motor and generator classes.  See search classes
    below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150,    for phase conversion systems of the dynamoelectric type.

    174,    for frequency conversion systems of the dynamoelectric type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 113 for the
    structure of a motor-generator set; subclasses 129+ for rotary converter
    structure; and subclass 160 for frequency converters of the dynamoelectric
    type.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    electric motor system.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    electric  motor-driven generator systems; see subclasses 14+ where the
    system includes means for controlling both the motor and the generator;
    note particularly subclass 16 for such systems having simultaneous control
    of both motor and generator; see subclass 39 for electric motor-driven
    generator systems having motor control; and see subclasses 44+ for
    generator control; see (3) Note, above, for the line between Classes 322
    and 363.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    201-204 for control systems having a dynamoelectric machine as the control
    means.


CLS 363/103
TXT Plural collector type:

    Subject matter under subclass 102 wherein the dynamoelectric machine is of
    the type which has plural sets of current collectors.

    (1)     Note.  The usual machine of this type is a rotary converter which
    has a single field structure, a single armature winding and the armature
    winding is provided both with a commutator and slip rings, the direct
    current brushes cooperate with the commutator and alternating current
    brushes cooperating with the slip rings.

    (2)     Note.  Closely analogous subject matter is found in Class 323,
    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems wherein a dynamoelectric
    machine having plural sets of brushes is used to control voltage magnitude.
     However, such dynamoelectric machine (e.g., dynamotor) is not a converter
    since the input and output electrical energy are the same in kind (e.g.,
    both D.C. or both A.C.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150,    for phase conversion systems having a plural current collector type
    dynamoelectric machine as the converter.

    174+,   for frequency conversion systems having a plural current collector
    type dynamoelectric machine as the converter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    201-204 for current and voltage magnitude control systems including a
    dynamoelectric machine having plural sets of current collectors.  See (2)
    Note above.


CLS 363/104
TXT Having plural field windings:

    Subject matter under subclass 103 wherein the dynamoelectric machine is
    provided with plural field windings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 112+ for
    plural, structurally united dynamoelectric machines, subclass 114 for
    plural rotary element dynamoelectric machines operating in different
    fields, subclasses 134, 141, 142, and 149 for plural collector type
    dynamoelectric machines having plural field windings, and subclasses 184+
    for plural field winding structure.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    motor systems wherein the motor is provided with plural field windings;
    particularly note, subclasses 523+ for miscellaneous motor systems wherein
    the motor is provided with plural field windings.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclasses 63+ for plural
    field winding generator systems.


CLS 363/105
TXT Having auxiliary motor drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 103 wherein the dynamoelectric machine is
    provided with an additional driving means.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass is analogous in many
    ways to that of motor-generator set converters. A plural set of current
    collectors converter is analogous to a motor-generator set in that it may
    be considered to have a motor part and a generator part.  The addition of
    another motor means results in an arrangement analogous to a
    motor-generator set having two motors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 9 for systems
    wherein a generator is provided with plural driving means.  See (1) Note,
    above.


CLS 363/106
TXT By circuit interrupter type:

    Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein the converter is a circuit
    interrupter which is operated synchronously with the A.C. current.

    (1)     Note.  The circuit interrupter is a periodic switch.  The usual
    types of switches used in the systems of this subclass are vibrating and
    rotary switches.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177,    for frequency conversion systems having a current interrupter type
    converter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 19+ for the
    structure of periodic switches.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 96+
    for systems having an intermittent regulatory interrupter, and subclasses
    112+ for miscellaneous switching systems.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 87+ for the structure electromagnetically
    operated periodic switches.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ for
    relay and electromagnet systems.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 101+ for X-Ray
    tube energizing circuits which may include circuit interrupter type
    converters.


CLS 363/107
TXT Rotating:

    Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein the circuit interrupter is a
    rotary switch.

    (1)     Note.  A rotary switch is a device wherein a rotary contact member
    coacts with stationary contacts so that as the rotary member rotates the
    circuit between each of the stationary contacts and the rotary contact is
    made and broken in a predetermined sequence.

    (2)     Note.  A usual example of a rotary switch is a commutator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 21+, 24+,
    28+, and 36+ for the structure of rotary switch structures.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 401 for such conversion systems wherein
    the load device is an X-ray apparatus.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 233+ for the
    structure of commutators for dynamoelectric machines.


CLS 363/108
TXT Rectifier (i.e., A.C.-D.C.):

    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein the converter is of the type
    which converts alternating current into direct current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114+,   for rectifying systems having an electron tube type converter.

    125+,   for rectifying systems having a semiconductor type converter.


CLS 363/109
TXT Inverter (i.e., D.C.-A.C.):

    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein the converter is of the type
    which converts direct current into alternating current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120+,   for inverting systems having an electronic tube type converter.

    123+,   for inverting systems having a semiconductor type converter.


CLS 363/110
TXT Vibrating:

    Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein the circuit interrupter is a
    device which has a movable conducting member which moves between contacts
    for converting either D.C. to A.C. or A.C. to D.C.


CLS 363/111
TXT Using electronic tube converter:

    Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein the converter includes an
    electronic tube.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition, under Definition of Terms, for the
    definition of an electronic tube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94,     for current conversion systems wherein an electronic tube is used
    for line circuit control.

    151,    for phase conversion systems including an electronic tube converter.

    166+,   for frequency conversion systems including an electronic tube
    converter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    See section VI of the class definition of this class for other conversion
    systems using electronic tubes which are not included in this class.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for miscellaneous systems for supplying current to electronic
    tubes of the gas or vapor tube type.  In these systems, the output circuit
    may be claimed if it is claimed so broadly as to be in effect the mere
    completion of the circuit so that a discharge may take place.  In many of
    the systems in Class 315, the electronic tube is an asymmetrical discharge
    device and operates to pass electric current in one direction only between
    the discharge electrodes.  Merely naming the device as a rectifier will not
    exclude the patent from Class 315, unless some subject matter is claimed
    which limits the system to the conversion art.  The subject matter of Class
    315 is closely analogous to the subject matter of this and the indented
    subclasses. See section VI, 7 of the class definition for a statement of
    the line between Classes 315 and 363.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 227
    and 291 for control systems involving an electronic tube.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous electron tube systems not
    otherwise classified.


CLS 363/112
TXT With gap in open atmosphere:

    Subject matter under subclass 111 wherein the electronic tube is of the
    type wherein the electric space discharge takes place between electrodes
    which are exposed to the atmosphere.

    (1)     Note.  This type of electronic tube is usually called a spark gap
    or an arc device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses for the
    structure of spark gaps and open air arc devices.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for miscellaneous systems for supplying current to electronic
    tubes of the type which have the gap in the open atmosphere.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 127 for oscillators using a gaseous space
    discharge device of the spark or open arc type, and which convert direct
    current to oscillatory current.


CLS 363/113
TXT With cathode element control:

    Subject matter under subclass 111 wherein the control of the electronic
    tube involves control of the cathode element.

    (1)     Note.  Control of the cathode-anode circuit is not control of the
    cathode element.

    (2)     Note.  A usual cathode element control is the control of cathode
    temperature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 94+ for
    miscellaneous systems for supplying heating current to the cathode or
    cathode heater of an electronic tube. The systems in Class 315, subclasses
    94+ may include the circuit necessary to also supply the anode potential if
    the anode supply is included in combination with the supply of the cathode
    current.  In such systems, the electronic tube may be either a vacuum tube
    or a gas or vapor tube.  However, if the system includes the supply of
    control current or potential to the discharge control means, then only the
    systems limited to having an electronic tube of the gas or vapor type are
    included, and such other systems will be found in Class 250, Radiant
    Energy, or in one of the classes or subclasses specified in the notes to
    the definition of that subclass.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous electron tube systems
    which include means for controlling the cathode element.  See the reference
    to Class 315, above.


CLS 363/114
TXT In rectifier systems:

    Subject matter under subclass 111 wherein the conversion is from A.C. to
    D.C.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for electron tube rectifier used in A.C.-D.C.-A.C. conversion
    systems.

    67+,    for plural electron tube rectifiers for single current conversion.

    81+     and 84+, for electron tube rectifying systems with condition
    responsive means to control the output voltage or current.

    108,    for circuit interrupter type rectifying systems.

    113,    for electronic tube rectifiers with cathode element control.

    125+,   for rectifying systems having semiconductor type converter.


CLS 363/115
TXT With retarding or delaying control means: Subject matter under subclass 114
    wherein means are provided for delaying the operation of the electronic
    tube converter until conditions are such that its operation is safe,
    feasible, or desirable.

    (1)     Note.  An example of such delay control is where the application of
    cathode, anode voltage is delayed until the cathode temperature has reached
    its operating value.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 102+ for
    miscellaneous systems for supplying electric current and/or potential to
    electronic tubes where the system includes means to supply heating current
    to the cathode or cathode heating circuit, and means for delaying the
    application of anode potential until the cathode has reached its operating
    potential.  This subclass in Class 315 provides for vacuum tube systems as
    well as gas or vapor tube systems, provided that in the case of the vacuum
    tubes there is no control of the discharge control (e.g., grid) circuit.
    Systems which are not limited to having a gas or vapor type electronic tube
    and which include the discharge control circuit will be found in Class 327,
    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and Systems,
    appropriate subclasses.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous electron tube systems
    having delayed or retarded operation of the tube.  See the reference to
    Class 315, above.


CLS 363/116
TXT With discharge control means (e.g., grid): Subject matter under subclass
    114 wherein the electronic tube converter is provided with a discharge
    control means.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of such discharge control means include a grid,
    igniter, magnetic control device, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94,     for current conversion systems wherein an electronic tube having
    discharge control means is used for line circuit control.

    121+,   for inverter systems including an electronic tube converter which
    has a discharge control means.

    151,    for phase conversion systems including an electronic tube converter
    which has a discharge control means.

    166+,   for frequency conversion systems including an electronic tube
    converter which has a discharge control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for miscellaneous systems for supplying current to an electronic
    tube of the gas or vapor type which has a discharge control means (e.g.,
    grid, igniter, magnetic field).  Many of the systems inherently operate to
    convert A.C. to D.C. and many of the tubes are referred to as rectifiers,
    and are therefore closely analogous to the systems in this and the indented
    subclass. Note, especially subclasses 137+ where the supply circuit is a
    polyphase alternating current supply circuit; subclasses 194+ where the
    system includes means to shift the phase of the current or potential
    applied to the discharge control means with respect to the anode-cathode
    current to control the tube; subclasses 248+ where the source of supply is
    alternating current; indented subclass 252 providing for those systems
    which include a plurality of discharge control type electronic tubes;
    indented subclasses 261+ providing for those systems where the discharge
    control means is an auxiliary starting electrode (e.g., igniter); indented
    subclass 267 providing for those systems where the discharge control means
    is an electromagnetic means; and indented subclasses 268+ providing for the
    miscellaneous alternating current supplied discharge control tube systems.
    For the line between Classes 315 and 363, see section VI, 7 of the class
    definition.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous electron tube systems not
    otherwise classified.


CLS 363/117
TXT D.C. bias control:

    Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein the control of the electronic
    tube includes varying the magnitude of a direct current or potential
    applied to the discharge control means.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes those systems wherein both an A.C.
    component and a D.C. component are applied to the control means and those
    systems wherein only a D.C. is applied to the control means, provided that
    in each case the actual control of the conductivity of the discharge device
    is accomplished by varying the magnitude of the D.C. voltage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    for the miscellaneous systems having an electronic tube converter
    with a discharge control means, where the conductivity of the electronic
    tube is controlled by controlling the time of application of a voltage but
    not the magnitude of either the D.C. or A.C. applied to the discharge
    control means. See the reference to subclass 118, below.

    118,    for the systems under subclass 116 where the phase of the
    alternating current or potential applied to the discharge control means is
    shifted with respect to the cathode-anode current to control the electronic
    tube.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for miscellaneous systems for supplying current to an electronic
    tube of the gas or vapor type which has a discharge control means, (e.g.,
    grid, igniter, magnetic field).  Many of the systems inherently operate to
    convert A.C. to D.C. and many of the tubes are referred to as rectifiers,
    and are therefore closely analogous to the systems in this subclass.
    Subclasses 261 to 264, and 267 to 275 provide for the systems where the
    tube is supplied with alternating current and where the tube has a
    discharge control means which is controlled by controlling the magnitude of
    the direct current and/or potential is the control circuit.  Subclasses
    261+ provide for those systems where the discharge control means is an
    auxiliary starting electrode (e.g., igniter); subclass 267 provides for
    those systems where the discharge control means is an electromagnetic
    means; and subclasses 268+ provide for the miscellaneous alternating
    current supplied discharge control tube systems.  Note, indented subclass
    270 where both alternating and direct current and/or potential are supplied
    to the control means.  See indented subclass 272 where a rectifier and/or
    discharge device is connected in the circuit of discharge control means.
    For the line between Classes 315 and 321, see section VI, 7 of the class
    definition.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, particularly subclasses 530+ for miscellaneous electron tube
    systems which include DC bias control.


CLS 363/118
TXT Phase angle control:

    Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein the control of the electronic
    tube is accomplished by controlling the phase of an A.C. current or voltage
    applied to the discharge control means with respect to the cathode-anode
    voltage.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes (1) systems wherein both an A.C.
    current or voltage and a D.C. current or voltage are applied to the
    discharge control means and (2) systems wherein one or more A.C. currents
    or voltages are applied to the discharge control means, provided that
    conductivity of the electronic tube is controlled by varying the phase of
    the A.C. voltage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for those systems wherein the conductivity of the electronic tube
    is controlled by both varying the magnitude of a D.C. or voltage applied to
    the discharge control means and by controlling the phase of an A.C. or
    voltage applied to the discharge control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for miscellaneous systems for supplying current to an electronic
    tube of the gas or vapor type which has a discharge control means, (e.g.,
    grid, igniter, magnetic field).  Many of the systems inherently operate to
    convert A.C. to D.C. and many of the tubes are referred to as rectifiers,
    and are therefore closely analogous to the systems in this and the indented
    subclass.  Note, especially subclasses 194+ where the supply circuit is an
    alternating current supply circuit and the system includes means to shift
    the phase of the current or potential applied to the discharge control
    means with respect to the anode-cathode current to control the tube, for
    the line between Classes 315 and 363, see section VI, 7 of the class
    definition.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 237,
    300, and 320 for electronic tube voltage magnitude control systems having
    phase control of the A.C. or voltage applied to the discharge control
    device of the tube.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 231+ for miscellaneous tube phase shift or control
    circuits.


CLS 363/119
TXT Particular waveform grid excitation:
    Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein the control of the discharge
    control means involves the application thereto of a voltage having a
    particular waveform.

    (1)     Note.  Particular waveform is defined as a waveform significantly
    different from that of a sine wave.

    (2)     Note.  Particular waveforms include square top waves, saw tooth
    waves, peaked waves, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 106+
    for miscellaneous wave shaping systems.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for miscellaneous systems for supplying current to an electronic
    tube of the gas or vapor type which has a discharge control means (e.g.,
    grid, igniter, magnetic field).  Many of the systems inherently operate to
    convert A.C. to D.C. and many of the tubes are referred to as rectifiers,
    and are therefore closely analogous to the systems in this and the indented
    subclass. Subclasses 261 to 264 and 267 to 275 provide for the systems
    where the tube is supplied with alternating current, and where the tube has
    a discharge control means which is controlled by applying current or
    voltage of a particular waveform to the discharge control means.  See
    subclasses 261+ for those systems where the discharge control means is an
    auxiliary starting electrode (e.g., igniter).  Note, especially indented
    subclass 262 where a peaking transformer is in the auxiliary starting
    electrode circuit; and subclass 263 where an inductance or surge generator
    is included in the auxiliary electrode circuit.  See subclass 267 for those
    systems where the discharge control means is an electromagnetic means.  See
    subclasses 268+ for the miscellaneous alternating current supplied
    discharge control tube systems.  Note especially indented subclass 274
    where a transformer such as a peaking transformer, is included in the
    control circuit, and indented subclass 275 where a condenser is included in
    the control circuit.  For the line between Classes 315 and 363, see section
    VI, 7 of the class definition.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 100+ for miscellaneous tube networks producing a
    waveform of particular shape.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 19 for
    differentiating and integrating networks of the passive type, and subclass
    20 for wave shaping networks in general of the passive type.


CLS 363/120
TXT In inverter systems:

    Subject matter under subclass 111 wherein the conversion is from D.C. to
    A.C.

    (1)     Note.  There are many conversion systems for converting D.C. to
    A.C. in the communications arts, (e.g., oscillators, harmonic generators,
    amplifiers, etc.).  See section VI of the class definition for a list of
    conversion systems excluded from this class, their classification and the
    lines between them and the subject matter of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for circuit interrupter type inverter systems.

    29+,    for electron tube inverter in D.C.-A.C.-D.C. systems.

    38,     for electron tube inverter in A.C.-D.C.-A.C. systems.

    95+,    for electron tube inverting systems with means to control the
    output voltage or current.

    131+    and 135+, for transistor and thyristor type inverter systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for systems for supplying electric current to electronic tubes
    of the gas or vapor type.  Many of these systems inherently operative to
    convert D.C. to A.C. and are closely analogous to the systems in this and
    the indented subclass.  Note especially subclasses 227+ where a condenser
    is used to control the supply of current to the electronic tube.  In many
    of these systems the condenser causes the current through the tube to flow
    periodically, similar to the current flow in a relaxation oscillator
    circuit.  Note especially indented subclass 229 where the system includes a
    plurality of tubes and a commutating condenser is connected between the
    anodes or cathodes to cause the tubes to become conductive alternately
    (converts D.C. to A.C.).  See subclass 235 where the electronic tube has a
    plurality of cathodes or anodes with a commutating condenser connected
    between the anodes or cathodes to cause the discharge to alternate between
    the plural cathodes or anodes (converts D.C. to A.C.).  See section VI, 7
    of the class definition for the line between Classes 315 and 363.

    331,    Oscillators, appropriate subclasses for self-sustaining electric
    wave generating systems utilizing electronic tubes which convert direct
    current to alternating current.


CLS 363/121
TXT With discharge control means (e.g., grid): Subject matter under subclass
    120 wherein the electronic tube converter has a discharge control means.

    (1)     Note.  Such control means may include a grid, igniter, or magnetic
    control means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    for electronic tube rectifier systems wherein the electronic tube
    has a discharge control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for miscellaneous systems for supplying current to electronic
    tubes of the gas or vapor type where the electronic tube has a discharge
    control means.  Many of these systems inherently operate to convert D.C. to
    A.C. and are closely analogous to the systems in this and the indented
    subclass. Note especially subclass 229 where the system includes a
    plurality of tubes with discharge control means a commutating condenser is
    connected between the anodes or cathodes to cause the tubes to become
    conductive alternately (converts D.C. to A.C.).  See subclasses 233+, 236+,
    and 237+ where a condenser is connected in the supply circuit of a gas or
    vapor tube having a discharge control means, the condenser causing the
    current through the tube to flow periodically similar to the current flow
    in a relaxation oscillator circuit.  See subclasses 233+ where the tube has
    an auxiliary starting electrode (e.g., igniter) as the control means;
    subclass 236 where the control means is a magnetic means; and subclasses
    237+ where the control means is an electrostatic (e.g., grid) electrode.
    See subclass 235 where the electronic tube has a plurality of cathodes or
    anodes and a discharge control means with a commutating condenser connected
    between the anodes or cathodes to cause the discharge to alternate between
    the plural cathodes or anodes (converts D.C. to A.C.).  See section VI, 7
    of the class definition for the line between Classes 315 and 363.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 597 for miscellaneous tube circuits with grid control
    means.


CLS 363/122
TXT Grid-like electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the discharge control means is of
    the type which controls the flow of space current by controlling the space
    charge between the cathode and the anode.

    (1)     Note.  A common designation for this type of control means is a
    grid.  The grid is usually interposed in the discharge path between the
    cathode and anode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    for electronic tube rectifier systems wherein the electronic tube
    is provided with grid control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for miscellaneous systems for supplying current to electronic
    tubes of the gas or vapor type which have a control grid.  Many of these
    systems inherently operate to convert D.C. to A.C. and are closely
    analogous to the systems in this subclass.  Note especially subclass 229
    where the system includes a plurality of tubes with control grids and a
    commutating condenser connected between the anodes or cathodes to cause the
    tubes to become conductive alternately.  See subclass 235 where the
    electronic tube has a plurality of cathodes or anodes and a control grid
    with a commutating condenser connected between the anodes or cathodes to
    cause the discharge to alternate between the plural cathodes or anodes
    (converts D.C. to A.C.).  See subclasses 237+ where a condenser is
    connected in the supply circuit of a gas or vapor tube having a grid, the
    condenser causing the current through the tube to flow periodically similar
    to the current flow in a relaxation oscillator circuit.  See section VI, 7
    of the class definition for the line between Class 315 and Class 363.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 597+ for miscellaneous tube circuits with grid control
    means.


CLS 363/123
TXT Using semiconductor-type converter:

    Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein the converter includes a
    semiconductor device.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition, under Definition of Terms, for the
    definition of semiconductor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for combined phase and frequency conversion by semiconductor device
    converter.

    15+     and 37, and appropriate subclasses for semiconductor type
    converters for either D.C.-A.C.-D.C. or A.C.-D.C.-A.C. conversion.

    53+,    for semiconductor type rectifier systems including automatic or
    integral protection means.

    56+,    for semiconductor type inverter systems including automatic or
    integral protection means.

    159+,   for frequency conversion by semiconductor converter.


CLS 363/124
TXT In chopper converter systems:

    Subject matter under subclass 123 which includes a device used to interrupt
    a D.C. or low frequency A.C. source at regular intervals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 9.1
    and 10.1 for chopper type amplifiers.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 240 for chopper type circuits utilizing
    semiconductors.


CLS 363/125
TXT In rectifier systems:

    Subject matter under subclass 123 wherein the current conversion is from
    A.C. to D.C.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for semiconductor rectifiers in A.C.-D.C.-A.C. conversion systems.

    48,     for semiconductor rectifiers with low pass L or LC filter means for
    reducing ripples from the output.

    53+,    for semiconductor rectifiers including automatic or integral
    protection means.

    61,     for semiconductor rectifiers with voltage multiplication means.

    67+,    for plural semiconductor rectifiers for single current conversion.

    77,     for semiconductor rectifiers including integral sensing and control
    means.

    108,    for circuit interrupter rectifier systems.

    114+,   for electron tube rectifier systems.


CLS 363/126
TXT Diode:

    Subject matter under subclass 125 wherein the semiconductor device is a
    two-terminal device which will conduct electricity more easily in one
    direction than in the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67+,    for systems which rectify by diode strings in series or in parallel.


CLS 363/127
TXT Transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 125 wherein the semiconductor device includes
    a transistor type element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131+,   for transistor inverter systems.


CLS 363/128
TXT Thyristor:

    Subject matter under subclass 125 wherein the semiconductor device is of
    the thyristor type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for thyristor rectifier systems including automatic or integral
    protection means.

    67+,    for systems which rectify by thyristor strings in series or in
    parallel.

    88,     for full wave rectifier with at least 1 three electrode device
    having thyristor control means in the line circuit.

    135+,   for thyristor inverter systems.

    160+,   for thyristor frequency conversion systems.


CLS 363/129
TXT Plural phase to D.C.:

    Subject matter under subclass 128 wherein the A.C. input to the rectifier
    is of more than one phase.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for thyristor plural phase to D.C. converters in single phase to
    plural phase to D.C. systems.

    87,     for plural phase to D.C. conversion with thyristor control means in
    the line circuit.

    92,     for plural phase to D.C. conversion with saturable reactor control
    means in the line circuit.


CLS 363/130
TXT With magnetic control means:

    Subject matter under subclass 128 wherein the thyristor type device is
    regulated by magnetic means.


CLS 363/131
TXT In transistor inverter systems:

    Subject matter under subclass 123 wherein the semiconductor device includes
    a transistor type element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16+,    for transistorized inverters in D.C.-A.C.-D.C. conversion systems.

    80      and 97+, for inverters with transistor control means in the line
    circuit.

    127,    for transistor rectifier systems.


CLS 363/132
TXT Bridge type:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the inverter includes one or more
    transistors in a bridge configuration.

    (1)     Note.  A bridge configuration in this art is a four terminal
    network with the supply being connected to two terminals opposite each
    other, and the load connected to the remaining terminals. One of the load
    terminals may be a center tap of the supply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for transistorized bridge type inverters in D.C.-A.C.-D.C.
    conversion systems.

    98,     for bridge type inverter with transistor control means in the line
    circuit.


CLS 363/133
TXT Double-ended (i.e., push-pull) type:
    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the inverter includes two
    transistors which alternately and periodically couple the source to
    opposite terminals of a center-tapped primary winding of a power
    transformer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22+     and 24+, for transistorized double-ended inverters in
    D.C.-A.C.-D.C. conversion systems.


CLS 363/134
TXT Separately driven:

    Subject matter under subclass 133 in which an independent drive circuit
    controls both the on and the off state of the transistors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24+,    for transistorized double-ended separately driven inverters in
    D.C.-A.C.- D.C. conversion systems.


CLS 363/135
TXT In thyristor inverter systems:

    Subject matter under subclass 123 wherein the semiconductor device includes
    a thyristor type element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27+,    for thyristor inverters in D.C.-A.C.- D.C. conversion systems.

    57+,    for thyristor inverters with automatic or integral protection means.

    96,     for inverters with thyristor control means in the line circuit.

    128+,   for thyristor rectifier systems.


CLS 363/136
TXT Bridge type:

    Subject matter under Subclass 135 combined with a small box for containing
    Toilet Articles.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes portable collapsible or hand-carried
    cases as distinguished form the dressing table furniture type of subclass
    128 above. This subclass also includes mirrored purses or bags.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128+,   for dressing table-type mirrored vanities without a carrying handle.

    154+,   for illuminated containers without a mirror.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    132,    Toilet, subclass 83 for a powder box and applicator with a mirror.


CLS 363/137
TXT D.C. to plural phase A.C.:

    Subject matter under subclass 136 wherein the conversion is from D.C. to
    plural phase A.C.


CLS 363/138
TXT With commutation means:

    Subject matter under subclass 137 having means to alternately and
    repeatedly turn on or off current flowing in one or more arms of the bridge
    inverter circuit.


CLS 363/139
TXT Double-ended (i.e., push-pull) type:
    Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein the inverter includes two
    thyristors which alternately and periodically couple the source to opposite
    terminals of a center-tapped primary winding of a power transformer.


CLS 363/140
TXT Using impedance-type converter:

    Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein the converter includes an
    impedance.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition, under Definition of Terms, for a
    definition of impedance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for voltage division by storage-type impedance.

    156,    for phase conversion by passive phase shift elements.

    158,    for frequency conversion by varactor-type devices.


CLS 363/141
TXT With cooling means:

    Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein means are provided for removing
    heat from the conversion system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for current conversion systems operating at temperatures near
    absolute zero.


CLS 363/142
TXT With means to connect the input to diverse power sources:

    Subject matter under subclass 13 having means to optionally connect power
    sources of differing electrical characteristics to the input of the
    converter system.


CLS 363/143
TXT 110/220 Volts A.C. in constant 110 Volts D.C. out:

    Subject matter under subclass 142 wherein the power sources are 110V A.C.
    and 220V A.C. and the converter system output is 110V D.C.


CLS 363/144
TXT With conductive support mounting:

    Subject matter under subclass 13 having a structure which holds the
    converter means and which is capable of transmitting electricity.


CLS 363/145
TXT Adapted for use with alternators:

    Subject matter under subclass 144 wherein the conductive support is
    designed to be utilized with an alternator.


CLS 363/146
TXT Encased in plug housing:

    Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein the converter system in enclosed
    within a structure which has socket prongs or receptacles.


CLS 363/147
TXT Integrated circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein the conversion means is composed
    of a combination of interconnected circuit elements inseparably associated
    on or within a continuous substrate.


CLS 363/148
TXT PHASE CONVERSION (01 - 02) WITHOUT INTERMEDIATE CONVERSION TO D.C.:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a system is provided
    which converts A.C. having one number of phases into A.C. having a
    different number of phases without intermediate conversion to D.C.

    (1)     Note.  The output number of phases may be either greater or less
    than the input number of phases.

    (2)     Note.  This class does not take those systems wherein a plurality
    of different single phase sources are combined to produce a polyphase
    output or wherein one or more single phase loads are connected to a
    polyphase source line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     where the system includes means for effecting phase conversion, and
    also a single current conversion.

    9+,     where the system includes means for effecting both phase and
    frequency conversions.

    36,     where the system includes means for effecting phase conversion, and
    also plural current conversion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 13+
    for plural load circuits connected to a polyphase system; subclasses 43+
    for systems interconnecting a plurality of supply circuits; but
    particularly subclasses 72+ for supplies having unlike electrical
    characteristics; and subclass 79 for current sources interconnected in
    series but out of phase with each other.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 160 for
    dynamoelectric frequency converter structure.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 138+ for
    electric systems for supplying alternating current to an electric lamp or
    gas or vapor type electronic tube where the system includes a phase
    converting means in the supply circuit.  Subclass 138 provides for those
    systems where single phase current is converted to polyphase current.

    329,    Demodulators, subclasses 315+ for frequency demodulators and
    subclasses 345+ for phase demodulators.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 45 for self-sustaining oscillator systems
    provided with plural output circuits, each output producing a wave of the
    same frequency, the waves being displaced in phase by a fixed angle (other
    than phase coincidence or phase opposition) so as to produce a polyphase
    set of currents or voltages.


CLS 363/149
TXT With automatic voltage magnitude or phase angle control:

    Subject matter under subclass 148 wherein the system is provided with
    automatic current or voltage magnitude or automatic phase angle controls.

    (1)     Note.  Phase angle control includes power factor control.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74+,    for automatic current or voltage magnitude control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    212-303 for automatic phase and voltage regulators.


CLS 363/150
TXT By dynamoelectric machine converter:
    Subject matter under subclass 148 wherein the converter includes a
    dynamoelectric machine.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition, under Definition of Terms, for a
    definition of dynamoelectric machine.

    (2)     Note.  The dynamoelectric machine types commonly used as phase
    converters include motor-generator sets and practically every kind of A.C.
    motor and generator.

    (3)     Note.  Although systems involving motor-generator sets are
    generally classified in Class 322, Electricity: Single Generator Systems,
    systems involving significant phase conversion are classified in this class
    (363). However, the generic place for motor-generator set systems are in
    Class 323.  See section VI, 8 of the class definition.

    (4)     Note.  Since many of the problems of operation and control of
    dynamoelectric machine converters are analogous to the problems of
    operation and control of motors and generators (e.g., starting, speed
    control, excitation control, etc.) it is noted that analogous pertinent art
    is classified in the motor and generator classes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102+,   for current conversion system having a dynamoelectric machine
    converter.

    174+,   for frequency conversion systems having a dynamoelectric machine
    converter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 10+ for
    miscellaneous dynamoelectric machine structures, and subclass 161 for phase
    shifter dynamoelectric machines.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    electric motor systems.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    electric generator systems; particularly subclass 16 for motor-generator
    set systems having simultaneous control of both motor and generator;
    subclass 39 for motor-  generator set systems having motor control.  See
    (3) Note above.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    201-204 for control systems involving dynamoelectric   machines.


CLS 363/151
TXT By electron tube converter:

    Subject matter under subclass 148 wherein the converter includes an
    electronic tube.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition, under Definition of Terms, for a
    definition of an electronic tube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111+,   for current conversion systems having an electronic tube converter.

    166+,   for frequency conversion systems having an electronic tube-type
    converter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous electron tube systems not
    otherwise classified.


CLS 363/152
TXT By induction-type converter:

    Subject matter under subclass 148 wherein the conversion system includes an
    induction type converter.

    (1)     Note.  The usual induction type converter is a transformer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170+,   for frequency conversion systems having an induction type converter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 215,
    247, 301, 305, and 328 for control systems involving a transformer.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for the structure of
    electric transformers, per se.


CLS 363/153
TXT Transformer type:

    Subject matter under subclass 152 wherein the induction type converter is a
    transformer.


CLS 363/154
TXT Stationary:

    Subject matter under subclass 153 wherein the transformer has no moving
    parts.


CLS 363/155
TXT With passive phase shift element:

    Subject matter under subclass 154 wherein the transformer converter system
    includes resistive, capacitive, or inductive elements for phase shifting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156,    for phase conversion by passive phase shift elements.


CLS 363/156
TXT By passive phase shift elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 148 wherein the phase conversion means
    includes resistive, capacitive, or inductive elements for phase shifting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155,    for stationary transformer phase conversion with passive phase
    shift elements.


CLS 363/157
TXT FREQUENCY CONVERSION (f1-f2) WITHOUT INTERMEDIATE CONVERSION TO D.C.:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein an input alternating
    current having a first value of frequency is converted directly into an
    output alternating current having a second value of frequency.

    (1)     Note.  The output frequency may be either greater or less than the
    input frequency.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for the systems wherein an alternating current of a first frequency
    is converted to an alternating current of a second frequency and then
    converted to direct current or vice versa (e.g., f1-f2-D.C. or D.C.-f1-f2).

    9,      for those systems wherein an input alternating current having a
    first frequency and a first number of phases is converted into an output
    alternating current having a second frequency and a second number of phases.

    37      and 38, for the systems wherein an alternating current of a first
    frequency is rectified and the resulting direct current is derectified and
    converted into an alternating current of a second   frequency (e.g.,
    f1-D.C.-f2).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    See the classes referred to in the class definition, under "Related Art",
    for analogous conversion systems in the communication arts.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclasses 14+ for
    generator systems wherein the output frequency may be controlled by
    combined control of generator and driving means; subclasses 29+ for
    automatic control of generator or driving means responsive to generator
    frequency; and subclasses 38+ for systems wherein the output frequency may
    be controlled by controlling the generator driving means.

    329,    Demodulators, subclasses 315+ for frequency demodulators and
    subclasses 345+ for phase demodulators.

    331,    Oscillators, appropriate subclasses for oscillator systems having
    an output frequency which is a beat frequency or a function of a control
    frequency; see particularly subclasses 37+ for beat frequency systems
    wherein two sources of different frequencies are combined in a nonlinear
    device to produce a difference (sometimes sum) frequency; subclass 47 for
    plural oscillator systems wherein one oscillator varies the frequency of
    another; subclass 51 for cascaded oscillators of the frequency dividing
    type; subclass 53 for cascaded oscillators of the frequency multiplying
    type; subclasses 76 and 77 for oscillators combined with a particular
    harmonic producing or selecting network; subclasses 128 and 165+ for
    shock-excited resonant systems; and subclasses 145, 149, 153, and 172+ for
    oscillator systems of the electrically pulsed type.


CLS 363/158
TXT By varactor:

    Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein a two-terminal solid-state device
    which utilizes the voltage variable capacitance of a PN junction is
    included in the conversion systems.

    (1)     Note.  A varactor is also called a varactor diode, silicon
    capacitor, voltage-controlled capacitor, or voltage-variable capacitor.


CLS 363/159
TXT By semiconductor converter:

    Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the converter includes a
    semiconductor device.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition, under Definition of Terms, for the
    definition of semiconductor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for combined phase and frequency conversion by semiconductor device
    converter.

    37,     for systems wherein an A.C. of a first frequency is rectified and
    the resulting D.C. is inverted into an A.C. of a second frequency by
    semiconductor rectifying and inverting means.

    123+,   for current conversion by semiconductor type conversion means.


CLS 363/160
TXT Thyristor type:

    Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein the semiconductor device is of
    the thyristor type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 107-181 for regenerative type devices, including thyristors.


CLS 363/161
TXT Positive and negative groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein thyristor type elements are
    combined in a circuit to form at least two groups, one of which operates
    during the positive half cycle of an A.C. input and the other during the
    negative half cycle.

    (1)     Note.  A group may consist of a number of thyristor type elements
    connected in some well-known rectifier configuration, the output current
    from a group being able to flow in only one direction.


CLS 363/162
TXT Including blanking or inhibiting means:
    Subject matter under subclass 161 including means for rendering
    noneffective a channel or controlling device for a desired interval.


CLS 363/163
TXT Transistor type:

    Subject matter under subclass 159 where the semiconductor device is of the
    transistor type.


CLS 363/164
TXT With automatic voltage magnitude control: Subject matter under subclass 157
    wherein the frequency conversion system includes cooperating separate
    sensing and control means for regulating the magnitude of the output
    voltage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165,    for frequency conversion with automatic frequency control.


CLS 363/165
TXT With automatic frequency control:

    Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein means responsive to a
    predetermined condition acts upon the system to provide a control to
    maintain or vary the output frequency of the system in response to that
    condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164,    for frequency conversion with automatic voltage magnitude control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclasses 17+ for
    miscellaneous generator systems having automatic control of generator or
    driving means, which control may be control of the output frequency.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 1+ for oscillation generation systems with
    automatic frequency stabilization.


CLS 363/166
TXT By electron tube converter:

    Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the converter includes an
    electronic tube.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition, under Definition of Terms, for a
    definition of an electronic tube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for combined phase and frequency conversion by electron tube
    converter.

    38,     for systems wherein an A.C. of a first frequency is rectified and
    the resulting D.C. is inverted into an A.C. of a second frequency by
    electron tube rectifying and inverting means.

    111+,   for current conversion systems having an electronic tube type
    converter.

    151,    for phase conversion systems where the converter includes an
    electronic tube.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, subclasses 674+ for electronic tube musical tone generators
    which may include frequency converters as subcombinations thereof.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 113+ for miscellaneous repetition rate or frequency
    control or conversion.

    329,    Demodulators, particularly subclasses 368 and 370 for an electron
    discharge demodulator device in an amplitude demodulator.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 53 for cascaded oscillator systems of the
    frequency multiplying type, and subclasses 76 and 77 for oscillators
    combined with output coupling networks of the harmonic producing or
    selecting type.  See section VI, 5 of the class definition of this class
    for the line between Class 363 and Class 331, subclasses 53, 76, 77, and
    Class 328.


CLS 363/167
TXT With discharge control means:

    Subject matter under subclass 166 wherein the electronic tube is provided
    with discharge control means.

    (1)     Note.  The discharge control means may include a grid, igniter,
    magnetic element, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 227
    and 291 for current or voltage magnitude control systems having an
    electronic tube as the control means, wherein the electronic tube is
    provided with discharge control means.


CLS 363/168
TXT Including plural anodes and single cathode device (e.g. vapor arc device):

    Subject matter under subclass 167 wherein the electronic tube is a device
    having more than one anode and only one cathode.


CLS 363/169
TXT Thyratron type:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 wherein the electronic tube is of the
    thyratron type.


CLS 363/170
TXT By induction-type converter:

    Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the conversion system includes an
    induction-type converter.

    (1)     Note.  The usual induction-type converter is a transformer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152+,   for phase conversion systems having an induction converter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for the structure of
    electric transformers, per se.


CLS 363/171
TXT Transformer:

    Subject matter under subclass 170 wherein the induction-type device is a
    transformer.


CLS 363/172
TXT Saturable core:

    Subject matter under subclass 171 wherein the saturation state of the core
    of the induction device is controlled to regulate its operation.


CLS 363/173
TXT LC circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 170 wherein the induction-type converter
    includes an LC circuit for regulating the frequency conversion.


CLS 363/174
TXT Dynamoelectric machine:

    Subject matter under subclass 170 wherein the converter includes a
    dynamoelectric machine.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition, under Definition of Terms, for a
    definition of dynamoelectric machine.

    (2)     Note.  Since many of the problems of operation and control of
    dynamoelectric machine converters are analogous to the problems of
    operation and control of motors and generators (e.g., starting, speed
    control, excitation control, etc.), it is noted that analogous pertinent
    art is classified in the motor and generator classes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102+,   for current conversion systems having a dynamoelectric converter.

    150,    for phase conversion systems having a dynamoelectric converter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 10+ for
    miscellaneous dynamoelectric machine structure, particularly, subclass 160
    for frequency converter structure.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems,  appropriate subclasses for
    electric motor systems.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    electric generator systems.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    201-204 for control systems involving dynamoelectric   machines.


CLS 363/175
TXT Motor generator type:

    Subject matter under subclass 174 wherein the dynamoelectric machine is of
    the motor generator type.

    (1)     Note.  In this arrangement the input frequency is supplied to the
    motor and the output frequency is taken from the generator.

    (2)     Note.  Although systems involving motor-generator sets are
    generally classified in Class 322, Electricity: Single Generator Systems,
    systems involving significant frequency conversion are classified in this
    class (363).  However, the generic place for systems involving
    motor-generator sets is in Class 322.  See section VI, 8 of the class
    definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for current conversion systems which have a motor-generator
    converter.

    150,    for phase conversion systems which have a motor-generator converter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 16 for
    miscellaneous motor-generator set systems having simultaneous control of
    both motor and generator; subclasses 17+ for  motor-  generator set systems
    having automatic control of either the motor or generator; subclass 39 for
    motor-generator systems having motor control.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 202 for
    current or voltage magnitude control systems involving balances sets (which
    are motor-generator sets).


CLS 363/176
TXT Including induction motor:

    Subject matter under subclass 174 wherein the dynamoelectric machine is in
    the form of an induction motor.

    (1)     Note.  The dynamoelectric machine does not drive any other device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150,    for phase conversion systems wherein the converter is in the form
    of an induction motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 166+ for
    induction motor structure.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 727+ for induction
    motor  systems.


CLS 363/177
TXT By circuit interrupter converter:

    Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the converter is a circuit
    interrupter.

    (1)     Note.  The circuit interrupter is a periodic switch.  The usual
    types of switches used in the systems in this subclass are vibratory and
    rotary switches.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106+,   for current conversion systems having a circuit interrupter
    converter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 19+ for the
    structure of periodic switches.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 96+
    for systems having intermittent regulatory interruption thereof, and
    subclasses 112+ for miscellaneous switching systems.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 87+ for electromagnetically operated periodic
    switches.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ for
    relay switching systems.


CLS 363/178
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition not provided for in any of the
    subclasses above.


CLS 364/
TTL ELECTRICAL COMPUTERS AND DATA PROCESSING SYSTEMS

CLS 364/
TXT

    I.      GLOSSARY

    DATA PROCESSING:  For the purpose of this class, data processing is defined
    as a systematic operation on data in accordance with a set of rules which
    results in a significant change in the data.

    CALCULATING OPERATIONS:  Arithmetic and/or some limited logic operations
    performed upon or with signals representing numbers or values.

    II.     GENERAL STATEMENT OF THE CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    A.      This is the generic class for electrical apparatus and
    corresponding methods for performing data processing operations, in which
    there is a significant change in the data or for performing calculation
    operations.

    (1)     Note.  This class is limited to electrical data processing and
    calculating computer apparatus and corresponding methods wherein the
    processing or calculation is performed on information carried by wave
    propagation (either electromagnetic or compressional waves) provided that
    input to and output from the apparatus is electrical.  Note:  where the
    apparatus performing the operation is electrically responsive but the data
    is not presented to and output from the apparatus as electrical signals,
    classification is with the appropriate wave energy subject matter, as Class
    359 for light modulators.

    B.      Significantly claimed apparatus external to this class, claimed in
    combination with apparatus under the class definition, which perform data
    processing or calculation operations are classified in the class
    appropriate to the external device unless specifically excluded therefrom.

    C.      Nominally claimed apparatus external to this class in combination
    with apparatus under the class definition is classified in this class
    unless provided for in the appropriate external class.

    III.    THIS CLASS IS STRUCTURED INTO SIX MAIN DIVISIONS:

    1.      Data Processing Control Systems, Apparatus or Processes; subclasses
    130+.

    2.      Applications, subclasses 400+ and 500+.

    3.      Measuring, Testing or Monitoring; subclasses 550+.

    4.      Electric Hybrid Computers; subclasses 600+.

    5.      Electric Digital Calculating Computers; subclasses 700+.

    6.      Electric Analog Computers; subclasses 800+.

    IV.     RELATIONSHIP TO CLASS 395

    Class 395, Information Processing System Organization, was created from
    Class 364, former subclasses 200, 513, 513.5, 518-523, 900 and modified to
    include the data processing related art from Class 371, subclasses 9.1,
    10.1, 11.1,11.3, 12 through 19, 29.1, 29.5, 60, 66, and 68.3.  Hence, Class
    395 provides only for general purpose programmable digital computer systems
    and miscellaneous digital data processing systems as set forth in section
    I(1) of the class definition of Class 395, artificial intelligence as set
    forth in section I(2), and static presentation or display processing as set
    forth in section I(3).  All other Class 364-type subject matter (as
    currently defined in the definitions of Class 364) remains in Class 364.

    V.      AUTOMATED PATENT SYSTEM (APS)

    Subclasses 200 and 900 consist, as noted in IV above, of a conventional
    manual classification system.  In addition cross-reference art collections,
    subclasses 221-286.6 have been created from the subject matter resident in
    subclass 200, and cross-reference art collections 916-971.1 have been
    created from the subject matter resident in subclass 900.

    The cross-reference art collection do not contain paper copies of U.S.
    Patents exist only in electronic form.

    The cross-reference art collections are printed in the Manual of
    Classification and have definitions associated therewith.  They are
    searchable on the Automated Patent System (APS) in the same format as is
    any other subclass printed in the Manual.

    It is permissible upon allowance to designated a cross-reference art
    collection on the blue slip where subject matter of a particular document
    is to be located.  These art collections will be printed on the patent and
    will be searchable on APS in those areas.

    Other than the fact that documents in the art collections exist only in
    electronic form they will be treated the same as in any other traditional
    subclass.  If examiners wish to add or delete copies they will use the
    appropriate forms as is presently done.

    Foreign patents and nonpatent literature in these electronic areas are
    searchable in paper form as is currently the procedure throughout the
    office.

    VI.     SEARCH CLASS

    235,    Registers, various subclasses for basic machines and associated
    indicating mechanisms for ascertaining the number of movements of various
    devices and machines, plus machines made from these basic machines alone
    (e.g., cash registers, voting machines), and in combination with various
    perfecting features, such as printers and recording means. In addition,
    search Class 235 for various data bearing record controlled systems.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, various
    subclasses for generic residual electrical transmission or interconnection
    systems and miscellaneous circuits.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, various subclasses for residual
    electrical communication systems and see related Classes 342, 343, 370, and
    375.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, various subclasses for
    electrical pulse and digit code converters.

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), various subclasses for directive wave systems
    which may include object detection or tracking.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, various subclasses for the selective
    control of two or more light generating or light controlling display
    elements in accordance with a received image signal.

    348,    Television, various subclasses, particularly subclasses 169+ for
    television systems which  may include object detection or tracking.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, various subclasses for optical
    measuring systems which  may include object detection or tracking.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, which is an
    integral part of Class 369 following subclass 18, for record carriers and
    systems wherein information is stored and retrieved by interaction with a
    medium and there is relative motion between a medium and a transducer, for
    example, magnetic disk drive devices and control thereof, per se.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, various subclasses for
    addressable static singular storage elements or plural singular storage
    elements of the same type.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, various subclasses for
    record carriers and systems wherein information is stored and retrieved by
    interaction with a medium and there is relative motion between a medium and
    a transducer.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, various subclasses for generic
    multiplexing and demultiplexing systems.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, various
    subclasses for generic electrical pulse or pulse coded data error detection
    and correction.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, various subclasses for generic
    pulse or digital communication systems.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, various subclasses for generic circuits for pulse
    counting.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, various subclasses for two-way
    electrical communication of intelligible audio information of arbitrary
    content over a link including an electrical conductor.

    382,    Image Analysis, appropriate subclasses for operations performed on
    image data with the aim of measuring a characteristic of an image,
    detecting variations, detecting structures such as in subclass 103 for
    detecting or tracking targets, transforming the image data, and for
    procedures for analyzing and categorizing patterns present in image data.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 1 through 99
    for artificial intelligence including speech recognition, neural nets, and
    robot control; subclasses 100 through 166 for data presentation/computer
    graphics processing; subclasses 180+ for reliability and availability in a
    digital data processing system; and 200.3+ for data transferring among a
    plurality of spatially distributed computers or digital data processing
    systems.


CLS 364/130
TXT DATA PROCESSING CONTROL SYSTEMS, METHODS OR APPARATUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition combined with a device or
    apparatus controlled thereby, the entirety hereinafter referred to as a
    "control system".

    (1)     Note.  An example of such a control system include a data
    processing or calculating computer interactively connected to an external
    device to sense a condition (e.g., position) of such external device.  The
    processed data representing the sensed condition develops a control signal
    to be applied to such external device to perform a general applicability
    control function (e.g., optimization).

    (2)     Note.   "Apparatus" may include a plant, manufacturing process, or
    facility.

    (3)     Note.  Classification herein is based on control system structure
    or function.  The search for particular details of the data processing or
    calculating computer structural entity is elsewhere in this class.

    (4)     Note.  For classification herein the  "Apparatus" being controlled
    must be only nominally recited.  Control systems which are limited by the
    claims to a particular type of process or have a specific utility are
    classified in the  "Application" area of this class. Control systems which
    recite specific steps or have structural details  to a particular type of
    process art classified with the appropriate are device.  For example:  The
    claimed recitation of (a) a chemical controlled process, (b) a distillation
    controlled process and (c) a chemical controlled process which involves a
    chemical reaction, are classified in the  "Control" area of this class, the
     "Application" area of this class and in one of the chemical classes,
    respectively.

    (5)     Note.  Where there is nominal claim recitation of the device or
    apparatus and nominal data processor or computer structure claimed, the
    control system is classifiable herein only when there is no class providing
    for the device or apparatus.

    (6)     Note.  Control systems which include an algorithm peculiar to a
    specific art by claim disclosure are excluded from this class and will be
    found in the class wherein the specific art is classified.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    All of the following classes listed have subclasses providing for control
    or regulating systems or apparatus.



    53,     Package Making, subclasses 52+.

    60,     Power plants, appropriate subclasses.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 160.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 6+.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 2.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 72+.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclasses.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 1+.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, appropriate subclasses.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 43+.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 663+.

    137,    Fluid Handling, appropriate subclasses.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    appropriate subclasses.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, appropriate subclasses (252+).

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 200+.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 2+.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 2+.

    177,    Weighing Scales, appropriate subclasses.

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclasses 247+.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 9+.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 52+.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclasses 2+.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclass 102.

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), appropriate subclasses.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, appropriate
    subclasses.

    244,    Aeronautics, appropriate subclasses.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation,appropriate subclasses.

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants, subclasses 7+.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 1.05+.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, appropriate
    subclasses.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 60 -
    80.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclasses 100+ and 207+.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics and subclasses
    38+ for controls of the electrophotographic process, specifically, subclass
    77 for sequential control programming of machine operation.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, appropriate subclasses.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 8+.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing appropriate subclasses.

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, appropriate subclasses.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), appropriate subclasses.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 1+.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 18+.

    432,    Heating, appropriate subclasses.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 1+.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 2+ for a condition responsive control for
    sandblasting.

    483,    Tool Changing, subclasses 4+ for apparatus including a tool
    transter means combined with a tool support or storage means and a
    programmable control system.


CLS 364/131
TXT Plural processors:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 where more than one processor is used in
    a control system and at least one of the processors is programmable.

    (1)     Note.  Classification herein requires active participation by the
    plural processors in the control system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    187,    for control systems having plural processors where one processor
    (standby) will follow the operation of the other processor (active) and
    takeover operation of the system on failure of the active processor.


CLS 364/132
TXT Master-slave:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 where one processor (master) controls one
    or more other processors (slave).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 200.38+ for
    general purpose master/slave multicomputer data transfer, and subclass 290
    for bus master/slave control.


CLS 364/133
TXT Parallel:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 where the plural processors operate
    independently with respect to each other and are connected to a common bus.


CLS 364/134
TXT Shared memory:

    Subject matter under subclass 133 where the plural processors share access
    to a common memory.


CLS 364/135
TXT Hybrid types (analog, digital):

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein at least one processor is of a
    different type (e.g., analog, digital) then at least one other processor.


CLS 364/136
TXT Including sequence or logic processor:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 where at least one of the processors
    performs sequence or logic functions.


CLS 364/137
TXT Cascade control:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 where the output of a primary controller
    is utilized to adjust the set point of a secondary controller.


CLS 364/138
TXT Supervisory control:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 where a central or host computer is used
    to control plural controllers.


CLS 364/139
TXT Of analog controllers:

    Subject matter under subclass 138 where the controllers are analog and a
    particular characteristic of such as set point is adjusted.

    (1)     Note.  A controller is a device which holds a process or condition
    at a desired level or status as determined by comparison of the actual
    value with the desired value.


CLS 364/140
TXT Sequential or selective:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 where output signals are sequentially or
    selectively applied to control a system in a repetitive, orderly manner
    according to a predetermined schedule of operation.

    (1)     Note.  Sequencing as a basic process is essentially digital in
    nature, the relationship being, for example, "on",  "off" or  "in",  "out",
    etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184+,   for sequential and selective control systems having a diagnostic
    feature.


CLS 364/141
TXT State of condition or parameter (e.g., on/off):

    Subject matter under subclass 140 where input signals representative of a
    particular condition of a system to be controlled are analyzed and a
    comparison made with the predetermined conditions in the operation schedule
    and corresponding output signals produced.


CLS 364/142
TXT Position responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 where the particular system condition or
    parameter is position, the control output signal being produced in response
    to a position responsive input signal.


CLS 364/143
TXT Time responsive (duration):

    Subject matter under subclass 141 where the particular system condition is
    time related, the output signal establishing a particular state (e.g.,
    on/off) of such condition for a prescribed interval or duration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 41 for
    sequential or alternating selectively connected or controlled load
    circuits; and subclasses 141+ for switch actuation with time delay or
    retardation means.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 309.4 for timer controlled
    systems including sequentially actuated indicators.


CLS 364/144
TXT With display:

    Subject matter under subclass 143 where a visual indication related to a
    controlled time interval or duration is provided (e.g., time remaining).


CLS 364/145
TXT Clock-calender (e.g., time of day):

    Subject matter under subclass 143 where the time interval or duration is
    related to a 24-hour day and 7-day week schedule.


CLS 364/146
TXT Operator interface (e.g., display with controls):

    Subject matter under subclass 140 including input/output means by which an
    operator may communicate with the control system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171,    for numerical or digital positioning systems including an operator
    interface feature.

    188+,   for control systems of a general type including an operator
    interface feature.


CLS 364/147
TXT Specific programming (e.g., relay or ladder logic):

    Subject matter under subclass 146 where a predetermined schedule of
    operation may be established directly by use of relay or ladder terminology.


CLS 364/148
TXT Optimization of adaptive control:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 where a control seeks to extremilize
    (optimize) the system's performance criterion (e.g., efficiency,
    consumption, or profit).

    (1)     Note.  Also included here are adaptive systems which include means
    to modify the governing criteria, simply or in a complex fashion to achieve
    better system performance, stability, speed of response sensitivity, etc.
    The object of an adaptive system is to provide means for establishing
    relatively fixed system dynamics for a control system comprising a
    controlled element having varying dynamics.  Some adaptive systems include
    an optimization technique wherein the system seeks to maximize or minimize
    a system variable or are of the self-organizing type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 561 for positional
    servo adaptive or optimization control systems.


CLS 364/149
TXT With model:

    Subject matter under subclass 148 which includes a mathematical model.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164,    where a mathematical model representative of a desired control
    response is used in a feed forward or predictive control system.


CLS 364/150
TXT Comparison with model (e.g., model reference):

    Subject matter under subclass 149 where a measured process output signal is
    compared with an output from the model to develop an error signal which is
    used to control the process.


CLS 364/151
TXT With adjustment of model (e.g., update):

    Subject matter under subclass 149 where the model is adjusted (e.g.,
    updated) in response to changing conditions of the control system.


CLS 364/152
TXT Specific criteria of system performance:

    Subject matter under subclass 148 where a particular characteristic of a
    system is utilized in the optimization operation.


CLS 364/153
TXT Constraints or limits (e.g., max/min):

    Subject matter under subclass 152 where contstraints are placed on the
    excursion of a system variably from a predetermined value.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185,    for protection or reliability features which provide an indication
    of the variation of a control system condition from a limit value.

    552,    for quality control determination where limit values of acceptable
    product quality are established.


CLS 364/154
TXT Variable:

    Subject matter under subclass 153 where the contstraints or limits are
    adjustable.


CLS 364/155
TXT Bidirectional (e.g., oscillatory):

    Subject matter under subclass 153 where a control signal will travel in one
    direction to search out a maximum or minimum value and will reverse
    direction on reaching said maximum or minimum value to search out the other
    of the maximum or minimum value.


CLS 364/156
TXT Economic (e.g., cost):

    Subject matter under subclass 153 where the constraint or limit value
    involves an economic consideration such as minimization of cost.


CLS 364/157
TXT Gain (e.g., tuning):

    Subject matter under subclass 152 where the specific criteria of plant
    performance is system gain.


CLS 364/158
TXT With perturbation:

    Subject matter under subclass 148 where the optimization is performed by
    disturbing the system dynamics and analyzing the system response to such
    disturbance.


CLS 364/159
TXT Test signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 158 where the disturbance is introduced into
    the system from an external source such as by the injection of a test
    signal with the system response to such disturbance being analyzed and the
    system dynamics adjusted to achieve an optimum.


CLS 364/160
TXT Plural modes:

    Subject matter under subclass 148 where the system automatically shifts to
    different modes of operation depending on system conditions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180,    for control system of a general type which operates in multiple
    modes.


CLS 364/161
TXT Proportional-integral (P-I):

    Subject matter under subclass 160 where a system will shift from
    proportional control to a combination of proportional and integral (reset)
    when there is a substantial excursion of a variable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 609 for positional
    servo systems which operate in a proportional-integral or reset mode.


CLS 364/162
TXT Proportional-integral-derivative (P-I-D):

    Subject matter under subclass 160 where the system will shift from
    proportional to a combination of proportional, integral (reset) and
    derivative (rate) dependent on system conditions.

    (1)     Note.  Rate control is added to proportional-integral systems to
    prevent reset windup (antirest windup).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 610 for positional
    servo systems which add rate control to a proportional-integral system to
    provide proportional-integral-derivative (P-I-D) operation.


CLS 364/163
TXT Proportional-derivative (P-D):

    Subject matter under subclass 160 where the system shifts from proportional
    control to a combination of proportional and derivative control.


CLS 364/164
TXT Feed-forward (e.g., predictive):

    Subject matter under subclass 148 where disturbances affecting the system
    are anticipated and compensating signals are generated in order to negate
    these disturbances.


CLS 364/165
TXT Combined with feedback:

    Subject matter under subclass 164 where a feedback (error) signal from the
    controlled system is utilized to develop the feed-forward signal.


CLS 364/166
TXT Rate control:

    Subject matter under subclass 148 where the rate of change of a system
    variable or error signal is utilized to achieve optimization.


CLS 364/167.01
TXT Digital positioning (other than machine tool):

    Subject matter under subclass 130 where the positioning of a control system
    member is controlled by a programmed digital computer utilizing numerical
    values, digital signals, or coded pulses which correspond to desired
    position of control.

    (1)     Note.  The numerical values or digital signals comprise one or more
    discrete symbols which may form a code.

    (2)     Note.  Positional servo control systems are classified in Class
    318; however, the combination of a positional servo system with a
    programmable digital computer is classified here.

    (3)     Note.  Positional servo control systems incorporating a
    nonprogrammable computer are classified in Class 318.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    424.01+, for vehicle positioning control sys-
      tems.

    474.01+, for digital positioning as applied to
      machine tool control systems.


CLS 364/172
TXT Plural variables:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein plural sensed conditions or
    plural signals developed from a single sensed condition are utilized to
    generate a control system signal.


CLS 364/173
TXT Ratio:

    Subject matter under subclass 172 where the quotient of the variables is
    used as a control signal.


CLS 364/174
TXT Positional (e.g., velocity, acceleration):

    Subject matter under subclass 172 where the plural variables are positional
    variables.

    (1)     Note.  Plural variables derivable from a single measurement, such
    as velocity and acceleration, which are the first and second derivatives of
    position, are considered plural variables.


CLS 364/175
TXT Positional with nonpositional:

    Subject matter under subclass 174 where one of the variables is a position,
    speed, or acceleration signal and the other variable is not one of the
    above signals.


CLS 364/176
TXT Specific compensation or stabilization feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 where particular compensation techniques
    are utilized to achieve system stability.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 611+ for positional
    servo systems with stabilizing features.


CLS 364/177
TXT Lag (e.g., deadtime):

    Subject matter under subclass 176 where the delay between the development
    and generation of a system control signal and the actual application of
    such control signal is compensated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 621 for positional
    servo systems with stabilizing features including lead or lag networks.


CLS 364/178
TXT Sampled data system:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 where only a sample of a signal is used
    in the process of deriving a control signal.

    (1)     Note.  The  "sample" may be a series of samples generated from a
    continuous analog signal.


CLS 364/179
TXT Variable rate:

    Subject matter under subclass 178 where the sampled data is not generated
    at a constant rate.


CLS 364/180
TXT Multiple modes (e.g., digital/analog):

    Subject matter under subclass 130 where the control system has more than
    one mode by which it can be controlled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160,    for control systems operating in plural modes to perform an
    optimization function.


CLS 364/181
TXT Manual/automatic:

    Subject matter under subclass 180 where one mode of control is by a manual
    means and the other mode is automatic.


CLS 364/182
TXT Fine/coarse:

    Subject matter under subclass 180 where application of a control signal in
    the  "coarse" mode results in a system response of a relatively large
    magnitude or increments of magnitude and in the "fine" mode results in a
    system response of a relatively small or more precise magnitude or
    increments of magnitude.

    (1)     Note.  An example of such a system is a positional system wherein
    an element to be positioned is moved at high speeds in the  "coarse" mode
    until it reaches a predetermined position wherein the system shifts to the
    "fine" mode and the element is moved at lower speeds or at smaller
    positioned increments until it reaches its final destination.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 592+ for positional
    servo systems which operate in the fine and coarse modes.


CLS 364/183
TXT With specific error signal generation (e.g., up/down counter):

    Subject matter under subclass 130 where a specific apparatus or technique
    is utilized to develop an error signal to be applied to control a system.


CLS 364/184
TXT With protection or reliability feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 relating to the protection and
    reliability of the control system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    safety and protection of devices which do not include data processing.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 180+ for
    reliability and availability including fault detecting, monitoring,
    locating, and recovery in a digital data processing system.


CLS 364/185
TXT Warning or alarm:

    Subject matter under subclass 184 where a visual or aural indication is
    provided in response to the detection of a variation in a control system
    condition from a limit value.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153,    for optimizing or adaptive control systems where limits or
    constraints are placed on the excursion of a control variable.


CLS 364/186
TXT Self-test:

    Subject matter under subclass 184 where the controlled system has
    provisions for internally initiating a check of system conditions.


CLS 364/187
TXT Backup/standby:

    Subject matter under subclass 184 where the controlled system includes a
    spare or backup control device which automatically assumes control of the
    system in response to the failure of the primary control devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclasses
    8.1+ for apparatus fault recovery of a general type with a replacement with
    spare feature.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 182.01+ for
    fault recovery including masking or reconfiguring, per se, in a digital
    data processing system.

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclasses 161+ for general purpose memory accessing and control data
    archiving techniques in digital data processing system (i.e., for example,
    copying data, relocating data, etc.).


CLS 364/188
TXT With operator control interface (e.g., control/display console):

    Subject matter under subclass 130 including input/output means by which an
    operator may communicate with the control system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146,    for sequential or selective control systems having an operator
    interface feature.

    171,    for digital or numerical positioning systems having an operator
    interface feature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 99+ for
    robot control with particular operator interface.


CLS 364/189
TXT Keyboard:

    Subject matter under subclass 188 where the particular input apparatus
    include manual operator actuated devices having a symbolic language meaning.


CLS 364/190
TXT Positional (e.g., joystick):

    Subject matter under subclass 188 where the particular input apparatus
    utilized by the operator provides positional control of a system variable.


CLS 364/191
TXT With preparation of program:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 which includes means for initially
    producing a control program to which the controlled system subsequently
    responds.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 568.1+ for program
    or pattern-controlled positional servo systems with program recording or
    composing means.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 80+ for
    robot arm control program preparation.

    901,    Robots, subcollection 3+ for programming systems for computer
    controlled robots.


CLS 364/192
TXT Editing/modifying:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 including provisions for altering or
    modifying a previously established control program.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 85+ for
    robot control with program modification.


CLS 364/193
TXT Playback:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 where a control system member is manually
    controlled through a cycle of operation during which its conditions are
    recorded for subsequent reproduction through the same cycle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    513,    for robot-control systems where a robot manipulative member is
    positioned through a control cycle and the positions are recorded for
    automatic playback through the same cycle.


CLS 364/194
TXT With specific algorithm:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 which includes a set of rules or
    processes for solving a problem.


CLS 364/400
TXT APPLICATIONS:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the data processing for
    or calculating computer is designed for or utilized in a particular art
    device system, process or environment or is utilized for the solution of a
    specific problem in a field other than mathematics.

    (1)     Note.  For classification herein, there must be significant claim
    recitation of the data processing system or calculating computer and only
    nominal claim recitation of the external art environment.  Where
    significant structure of the external device is recited by the claims,
    classification is in the appropriate device class.

    (2)     Note.  This and indented subclasses will accommodate devices,
    systems, or processes which claim a control of or a control by a particular
    art device or environment and do not have a generic claim to the control;
    see the  "Control" area (subclass 130) of this class for generic control
    devices.

    (3)     Note.  Proper search for particular structural features rather than
    environmental or  "use" considerations is in subclasses below.

    (4)     Note.  In view of the nature of the subject matter included herein,
    consideration of the classification schedule for the diverse art or
    environment is necessary for proper search.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 375+ for record-sensing devices that may be
    combined with calculators or data processing systems and utilized for a
    specific purpose; and subclasses 419+ for record-controlled calculators
    wherein the calculation is performed by mechanical or electromechanical
    means.

    705,    Data Processing: Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/Price Determination,  subclasses 1+ for a business or financial
    transaction data processing system.


CLS 364/400.01
TXT Digital audio data processing system

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein the particular art or field is
    the processing of digital data which represents an audio signal.

    (1)     Note. This subclass is limited solely to audio data processing
    systems that are not classified elsewhere.

    (2)     Note.  An "audio signal" is an electrical signal which represents
    spoken or other sounds which vary with time, and may be in digital or
    analog form (this form implies a conversion to digital form before the
    digital data processing).

    (3)     Note.  Nominal recitation of "audio" is not sufficient to afford
    classification herein of an invention which would be otherwise classified
    elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    27,     Undertaking, subclass 31 for systems adapted for communication with
    entombed persons.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 584+ for measuring sound waves,
    especially subclass 585 for ear or hearing testing by soundwaves and
    subclasses 646+ for measuring sound intensity.

    84,     Music, subclasses 600+ for electronic musical instruments.

    128,    Surgery, subclass 746 for diagnostic audiometers (ear or testing by
    auditory stimulus).

    181,    Acoustics, appropriate subclasses for mechanical audio systems.

    330,    Amplifiers, for amplifiers not having specific input signals or
    specific loads.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, appropriate subclasses for electrical
    communications, in general.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclass 132 for underwater speech transmission by an acoustic wave;
    subclasses 140+ for an acoustic transducer not related to speech signal
    conversion.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, appropriate subclasses
    for storing and retrieving sound signals.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for multiplex
    communications.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, appropriate
    subclasses.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 2.1+ for
    speech signal processing using a computer, subclasses 2.91+ for audio
    signal bandwidth compression or expansion, and subclasses 2.94+ for audio
    signal time compression or expansion (e.g., run length coding).

    455,    Telecommunications, appropriate subclasses for modulated carrier
    wave speech communications.

    505,    Superconductor Technology: Apparatus, Material, Process, subclasses
    150+ for high temperature (Tc 30 K) superconducting devices, and
    particularly subclass 202 for electric communication system containing
    transmitter or receiver of pulse, digital, or electromagnetic radio,
    television, or radar wavefrom; and subclass 203 for electroacoustic
    transducer.

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, subclass 9 for mechanical artificial larynxes.


CLS 364/410
TXT Games and amusements:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein the data processing system or
    calculating computer is designed or utilized in the area of athletic events
    or entertainment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    463,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 1+ for a nonprojectile game
    (e.g., computer/video game), a propelled racing game, a chance device, a
    puzzle, or fortune-telling subject matter including electronic data
    processing.

    472,    Amusement Devices, for specific structure relating to an amusement
    device appropriate      therefor.

    473,    Amusement Devices:  Games, appropriate subclass for a game--other
    than a propelled racing game or a chance device--that includes both a
    tangible projectile and electronic data processing.

    482,    Exercise Devices, particularly subclasses 1+ for specific structure
    relating to an exercise device appropriate therefor and having a specific
    electrical feature which may include a computer, computer related
    circuitry, display, feedback, or software.


CLS 364/411
TXT Scoring:

    Subject matter under subclass 410 wherein the total amount of winning or
    losing in game is kept track of.


CLS 364/412
TXT Wagering:

    Subject matter under subclass 410 which includes the element of chance or
    betting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    705,    Data Processing: Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/Price Determination,  subclass  14 for a game used for a promotional
    or business purpose.


CLS 364/420
TXT Earth sciences (e.g., weather):

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein the data processing system or
    calculating computer is designed for or utilized in the study of the earth
    and/or its related sciences.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 130+ relating to the
    teaching of geography.


CLS 364/421
TXT Seismology:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 wherein a vibrational signal from the
    earth is detected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    806,    for simulated geophysical models.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 108+ for mechanical seismic sources and
    detectors and subclass 113 for seismic wave generation.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 253+ for geophysical exploration or
    irradiation by the use of invisible radiant energy.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 323+ for
    geophysical surface or subsurface exploration in situ which includes
    electrical testing.

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 1 - 205  for radar systems which are
    used in geophysical exploration.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 14+ for geophysical exploration by the use of seismic waves;
    subclasses 87+ for geophysical exploration by the use of compressional
    waves and subclasses 140+ for geophysical vibration transducers.


CLS 364/422
TXT Well logging:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 wherein a signal is emitted by a
    transducer in a bore hole.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    804,    for the simulation of well logging by an analog computer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 152.01+ for well logging, per se,
    especially subclasses 152.02+ for a borehole formation logging wherein the
    logging is not a purely electrical or a purely magnetic test.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 250.01+ for well processes which include
    signalling, and subclass 66 for well apparatus including electrical
    signalling means.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 40+ for a process or
    means of measuring combined with an earth boring means.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 253 for invisible radiant energy detection.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 323+ for electrical
    well bore testing.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 853.1+ for telemetering a
    well bore environment.


CLS 364/468.01
TXT Product assembly or manufacturing:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein the data processing system or
    calculating computer controls, monitors, or manages the sequential
    operations of a production process.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclass 142 for the process of boot and shoe
    making.

    29,     Metal Working, appropriate subclass, especially subclasses 592+ for
    method of mechanical manufacture.

    53,     Package Making, appropriate subclass for an apparatus for and
    method of encompassing, encasing, or completely surrounding goods or
    materials with a cover made from sheet material stock.

    56,     Harvesters, appropriate subclass for a means of severing crops
    which grow above the surface of the ground, without disturbing the soil,
    and a means for gathering the same from the field after they are severed.

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, appropriate subclass for the
    manufacture as it relates to chains, staples, or horseshoes.

    79,     Button Making, appropriate subclass for machines or processes for
    making buttons.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 663+, 695, 696+, 707, 708+, and 712+
    for the control of an apparatus for applying or obtaining a surface coating
    on a base or for impregnating base materials.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    appropriate subclass for wood product manufacturing.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 329+ for woodworking processes.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    1+ for a manufacturing process or apparatus including a step of adhesively
    bonding parts together or the manufacture of articles of commerce in which
    one of the manufacturing steps includes a chemical reaction. See note to
    Class 216, Etching a Substrate: Processes which is an integral part of
    class 156.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 100+ for the process
    of paper making.

    163,    Needle and Pin Making, subclasses 1+ for needle or pin
    manufacturing.

    216,    Etching a Substrate: Processes, subclasses 2+ for the manufacturing
    of a substrate by etching.  See note to Class 156 above.

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), appropriate subclass for a
    method or apparatus for a selective cutting process.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    appropriate subclass.

    300,    Brush, Broom, and Mop Making, subclass 21 for the process of
    manufacturing.

    412,    Bookbinding: Process and Apparatus, subclass 1+ for the process of
    bookbinding.

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclass for applying or obtaining a
    coating or surface.


CLS 364/468.02
TXT Integrated system (Computer Integrated Manufacturing (CIM)):

    Product assembly or manufacturing under subclass 468.01 wherein the
    sequential operations of multiple manufacturing processes are
    interconnected by a host management system (e.g., Production Integrated
    Processing Equipment (PIPE), cluster tools, etc.).


CLS 364/468.03
TXT Design or planning:

    Product assembly or manufacturing under subclass 468.01 wherein the
    calculating computer or data processing system analyzes, prioritizes, or
    modifies input data to arrange the sequential operations for product
    manufacturing or to configure a product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    488,    for a data processing system or calculating computer designed for
    or utilized in the design and analysis of electrical components and
    circuits made up thereof.

    512,    for a data processing system or calculating computer designed for
    or utilized in structural design as it relates to Mechanical Engineering.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, cross reference art
    collections 919+ related to the designing of objects, plan preparation,
    program preparation, computer aided design (i.e., CAD), or computer aided
    software engineering (i.e., CASE).


CLS 364/468.04
TXT 3-D product design technique (e.g., solid modeling):

    Product manufacturing design or planning under subclass 468.03 wherein the
    planned or designed structure is represented as a three dimensional image
    in two dimensional space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    474.05, for 3-D sculpturing in the machining process.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    458 for stereoscopic or three-dimensional imaging.

    382,    Image Analysis, subclass 154 for 3-D or stereo image analysis.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 418+ and 139 for
    three-dimensional or perspective data processing for display presentation.


CLS 364/468.05
TXT Resource allocation:

    Product manufacturing design or planning under subclass 468.03 wherein the
    data processing system or calculating computer control the coordination and
    logistics of physical objects in a manufacturing process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148,    wherein a control seeks to optimize a system's performance
    criterion (e.g., efficiency, consumption, or profit).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    705,    Data Processing: Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/Price Determination,  subclass 8 for allocation of resources or
    scheduling an administrative function by an automated business or
    management system.


CLS 364/468.06
TXT Job scheduling:

    Resource allocation under subclass 468.05 wherein the coordination of the
    physical object is controlled by a system constraint (e.g., time, machine
    availability, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), subclasses 23+ for a means to
    detect the order of occurrence of input data.


CLS 364/468.07
TXT Priority ordering:

    Job scheduling under subclass 468.06 wherein the data processing system or
    calculating computer operate in a supervisory mode to order the sequential
    operations.


CLS 364/468.08
TXT Job release determination:

    Job scheduling under subclass 468.06 wherein the data processing system or
    calculating computer monitors and controls the sequence of manufacturing
    operations based on task output.


CLS 364/468.09
TXT Constraints or rules:

    Product manufacturing design or planning under subclass 468.03 wherein the
    data processing system or calculating computer monitors and controls the
    sequence of manufacturing operations based on a set of operating rules or
    regulations.


CLS 364/468.1
TXT Knowledge based (e.g., expert system):

    Subject matter under subclass 468.09 wherein the data processing system or
    calculating computer generates, monitors, modifies, or controls the
    sequential manufacturing operations using historical data to infer a result.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 20+ for
    trainable (i.e., adaptive) systems, and cross reference art collections
    902+ for art related to the applications of artificial intelligence, and in
    particular cross reference art collection 904 wherein artificial
    intelligence is used in applications related to manufacturing and machines.


CLS 364/468.12
TXT Rework or engineering change:

    Product manufacturing design or planning under subclass 468.03 wherein the
    data processing system or calculating computer monitors and controls the
    sequence of manufacturing operations based on engineering or manufacturing
    changes.


CLS 364/468.13
TXT Material requirements:

    Product manufacturing design or planning under subclass 468.03 wherein the
    data processing system or calculating computer monitors and controls the
    sequence of manufacturing operations based on the necessary construction
    components.


CLS 364/468.14
TXT Bill-of-material:

    Material requirement under subclass 468.13 wherein the data processing
    system or calculating computer uses or creates a list of components for use
    in the product manufacturing design or planning.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    705,    Data Processing: Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/Price Determination, subclass 29 for an itemization of parts,
    supplies, or services (e.g., bill of materials) other than in combination
    with manufacturing.


CLS 364/468.15
TXT Performance monitoring:

    Product assembly or manufacturing under subclass 468.01 wherein the data
    processing system or calculating computer receives information on the
    various quantitative variables associated with the assembly process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    551.01, for a data processing system or calculating computer designed for
    or utilized in measuring and evaluating.


CLS 364/468.16
TXT Quality control:

    Performance monitoring under subclass 468.15 wherein the data processing
    system or calculating computer performs a statistical analysis of a
    manufactured product or manufacturing process and compares the results to
    predetermined specifications or parameters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    for a data processing system or calculating computer designed for
    utilizing specific criteria of system performance.

    552,    for a data processing system or calculating computer designed for
    quality control determinations.


CLS 364/468.17
TXT Defect analysis or recognition:

    Quality control under subclass 468.16 wherein the data processing system or
    calculating computer detects or rectifies discrepancies in the
    manufacturing process or manufactured product.


CLS 364/468.18
TXT Worker or work station efficiency:

    Quality control under subclass 468.15 wherein the data processing system or
    calculating computer analyzes statistical information based on employee
    performance or manufacturing area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    551.01, for a data processing system or calculating computer designed for
    or utilized in measuring and evaluating (i.e., performance).


CLS 364/468.19
TXT With particular work transport control between manufacturing stations:

    Product assembly or manufacturing under subclass 468.01 wherein the data
    processing system or calculating computer controls the movement of assembly
    components or manufactured goods from one location to another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    478.16, for a particular work transport between article handling stations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, appropriate subclass
    for a device for guiding material either vertically, horizontally, or at an
    inclination.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclass for a power-driven
    conveyor for moving a load over a predetermined path or path section.


CLS 364/468.2
TXT Mobile transport:

    Work transport under subclass 468.19 wherein the data processing system or
    calculating computer controls the movement of a nonstationary vehicle for
    transporting work between manufacturing stations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    424.02, for a control system for the operation of an autonomous or unmanned
    vehicle.


CLS 364/468.21
TXT Work positioning:

    Product assembly or manufacturing under subclass 468.01 wherein the data
    processing system or calculating computer is responsible for the setup and
    verification of a product or part at the work station.


CLS 364/468.22
TXT Product tracking (e.g., having product or carrier identification):

    Product assembly or manufacturing under subclass 468.01 wherein the data
    processing system or calculating computer is capable of locating or routing
    a product or product component based on information associated with the
    product or component.


CLS 364/468.23
TXT Having identification controlled manufacturing:

    Product tracking under subclass 468.22 wherein the data processing system
    or calculating computer determines the appropriate assembly step according
    to particular information associated with the individual product component.


CLS 364/468.24
TXT Particular manufactured product or operation:

    Product assembly or manufacturing under subclass 468.01 wherein the data
    processing system or calculating computer controls a specific manufacturing
    step, condition, or workpiece.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 42.53 for
    methods of making artificial bait.

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclass 512 for methods of making
    match splints or sticks.

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, appropriate
    subclass for the making of an abrading tool.

    53,     Package Making, appropriate subclass for an apparatus for and
    method of encompassing, encasing, or completely surrounding goods or
    materials with a cover made from sheet material stock.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, appropriate subclass for manufacturing of
    glass and glass articles.

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, appropriate subclass for a
    special machine, process, blank, or die for making a tool or implement.

    79,     Button Making, appropriate subclass for machines or processes for
    making buttons.

    83,     Cutting, cross reference art collection 906 for chip making and
    cross reference art collection 908 for comb, rake, or other toothed article
    making.

    86,     Ammunition and Explosive-Charge Making, appropriate  subclass for
    instruments and processes peculiarly adapted for making fixed ammunition.

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 280+ for cigarette or cigar making.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, appropriate subclass for the
    manufacturing of paper.

    300,    Brush, Broom, and Mop Making, subclass 21 for the process of
    manufacturing.

    413,    Sheet Metal Container Making, subclasses 1+ for methods of making a
    container of sheet metal.

    452,    Butchering, subclasses 31+ for automatic control of a sausage
    making process.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making: Process and Apparatus,
    subclasses 1+ for the process of the assembly or manufacturing of threaded,
    headed fasteners, or washers.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, appropriate subclass for the manufacture of a paper
    container or tube, per se.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor: Product or Process of
    Making, appropriate subclass for a mixture of materials intended to
    catalyze a reaction or to sorb a component of a fluid or certain single
    materials specifically structured to catalyze a reaction or sorb a
    component.


CLS 364/468.25
TXT Three-dimensional product forming:

    Manufactured product under subclass 468.24 wherein the particular product
    is first represented in two-dimensional space and produced such that it
    occupies space along the x, y, and z coordinate axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    468.04, for 3-D product design technique (e.g., solid modeling).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    subclasses 512+ for the process of producing a hollow work or a tubular
    article.


CLS 364/468.26
TXT Rapid prototyping (e.g., layer by layer, material deposition):

    Three-dimensional product under subclass 468.25 wherein the particular
    manufactured product is formed by the successive application of a building
    material in a stratified manner.


CLS 364/468.27
TXT Stereolithography:

    Rapid prototyping under subclass 468.26 wherein the building material is a
    confined volume of photocurable material successively exposed to light.


CLS 364/468.28
TXT Integrated circuit production or semiconductor fabrication:

    Particular manufacturing product or operation under subclass 468.24 wherein
    the particular manufactured product or operation is related to the
    production or design of electronic circuitry mounted on a substrate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    490,    for the design and analysis of integrated circuits.

    712,    wherein the calculating is effected by integrated circuits or
    chips, the use or specific structure or arrangement of which significantly
    affects or directs the handling of information.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclass 123.1 for a process of metal to
    nonmetal bonding with separate metallic filler wherein the nonmetallic
    material is a semiconductor-type material, and subclasses 179.1+ for the
    process of bonding plural joints of an electrical device (e.g.,
    semiconductor).

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclass, in particular subclasses 499+ for a device having
    integrated circuit structure with electrically isolated components.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    subclass 272.17 for the process of encapsulating a semiconductor or barrier
    layer device (e.g., integrated circuit, transistor, etc.).

    361,    Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 718+ and
    764 for  housing or mounting assemblies with diverse electrical components
    for an integrated circuit.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, subclass 14 for an optical integrated circuit.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 96+ for coating of an integrated
    circuit, printed circuit, or circuit board.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, appropriate subclass
    for methods of making semiconductor devices; see search notes therein.

    505,    Superconductor Technology: Apparatus, Material, Process,
    appropriate subclass, in particular subclasses 300+ for a processes of
    producing or treating high temperature superconductor material or
    superconductor containing products or precursors thereof, subclasses 510+
    for the precursor of high temperature superconductor material or stock, per
    se, or process of producing the precursor and cross reference art
    collections 925+ for the manufacture of a semiconductor device.


CLS 364/469.01
TXT Continuous material having indeterminate length (i.e., web, strand, strip
    sheet):

    Manufactured product under subclass 468.24 wherein the particular product
    is manufactured uninterrupted fashion wherein the final product has no
    specified linear determination.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    231 for surface bonding or assembly having direct contact transfer of an
    adhered lamina from a carrier to a base with formation of a lamina having
    continuous length by molding or casting on endless carrier.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclass 9 for a
    control means responsive to indicia carried by an auxiliary record (e.g.,
    tape or card) and subclasses 10+ for a material-responsive control means.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    subclasses 45.8+ for composite article making having an indefinite
    continuous length and subclasses 165+ for molding a continuous or
    indefinite length body of work.


CLS 364/469.02
TXT Material deposition or application (e.g., spraying, coating, etc.):

    Continuous material manufacturing under subclass 469.01 wherein the data
    processing system or calculating computer controls the application of a
    treating material to the workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    468.26, for rapid prototyping using a layer-by-layer material deposition
    process.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclass 495 for coating or sizing with dyeing process.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 446 for processes of manufacturing
    fibers, filaments, or preforms using vapor deposition.

    100,    Presses, subclass 45 for  automatic or material triggered control
    of material addition, deposition, or discharging.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 624+ for control of deposition of
    coating material or selective area.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 95+ for a process of modifying or
    maintaining internal physical structure or chemical properties of a metal,
    process of reactive coating of a metal, and process of chemical heat
    removing or burning of metal.

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 82+ for controlling a coating
    process in response to a measured or detected parameter  thereof or of a
    characteristic of the electrolytic coating formed.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    subclass 81 for gas or vapor deposition of an article forming material onto
    a mold surface.

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclass for applying or obtaining a
    coating on a surface.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclass 16 for a product wherein a metal is deposited on a
    previously formed image, subclass 128 for a process wherin radiation
    sensitive material is manufactured using a vacuum deposition process,
    subclass 129 for a process wherein radiation sensitive material is made
    using an extrusion coating process, and cross reference art collection 935
    for a coating process making a radiation sensitive element.


CLS 364/469.03
TXT Registration control:

    Continuous material manufacturing under subclass 469.01 wherein the data
    processing system or calculating computer insures the correct reference
    point of the workpiece before the next sequential step is executed.


CLS 364/469.04
TXT Having a reference mark or pattern:

    Registration control under subclass 469.03 wherein the data processing
    system or calculating computer utilizes a predetermined position signal for
    identifying the execution point for the next sequential step or operation.


CLS 364/469.05
TXT Winding:

    Continuous material manufacturing under subclass 469.01 wherein the data
    processing system or calculating computer controls either (1) the rotation
    of a machine element onto which the indeterminate length material is
    wrapped about, or (2) the material being wrapped about a machine element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, appropriate subclass for a process
    or apparatus for progressively winding elongated, flexible material.


CLS 364/470.01
TXT Textile:

    Manufactured product or operation under subclass 468.24 wherein the
    particular product involves the manipulation of fibers into fabric.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles: Fiber Preparation, appropriate subclass, in particular
    subclass 300 for a control means responsive to a sensed condition or
    program.

    26,     Textiles: Cloth Finishing, appropriate subclass, in particular
    subclasses 74+ for web-condition-responsive operation control.

    28,     Textiles: Manufacturing, appropriate subclass, in particular
    subclass 241 and subclasses 248+ for a control means responsive to a sensed
    condition.

    38,     Textiles: Ironing or Smoothing, appropriate subclass, in particular
    subclasses 1+ for control of the smoothing process.

    57,     Textiles: Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 1+ for
    specific processes and control thereof.

    66,     Textiles: Knitting, appropriate subclass for the manufacture of
    fabric structures from strands by forming loops and drawing the bights
    thereof through previously formed loops.

    68,     Textiles: Fluid Treating Apparatus, appropriate subclass for
    machines, implements and accessories for fluid treatment of textile
    fabrics, textile fibers, and pulp.

    87,     Textiles: Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, subclass 20 for a
    textile apparatus with automatic control.

    139,    Textiles: Weaving, appropriate subclass for the manufacture of a
    fabric by a weaving process.


CLS 364/470.02
TXT Pattern design:

    Textile product or operation under subclass 470.01 wherein the data
    processing system or calculating computer is responsible for coordinating
    the information used in either (1) generating or applying a decorative
    motif to the fabric or (2) producing a guideline having specific fabric
    measurements.


CLS 364/470.03
TXT For a garment:

    Pattern design under subclass 470.02 wherein the textile product is an
    article of clothing or apparel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, appropriate subclass for articles of clothing.

    83,     Cutting, cross reference art collections 902 for apparel collar
    making and 908 for buttonhole making.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, for  machines and machine methods of making,
    repairing, and maintaining in proper condition articles of apparel.

    450,    Foundation Garments, appropriate subclass for devices which are
    specifically designed to fit the human body to protect, compress, support,
    restrain, or alter the configuration of the body torso or a portion thereof.


CLS 364/470.04
TXT With particular pattern producing operation (i.e., dyeing):

    Pattern design under subclass 470.02 wherein the pattern design is
    generated by a specific process or technique.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclass 494 for a dyeing step combined with a nominal
    textile manufacturing step.

    28,     Textiles: Manufacturing, subclasses 184 for pattern setting and
    214+ for pile tufting or pattern setting.

    68,     Textiles: Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 231+ for pattern
    system and 238+ for a pattern storage device.

    87,     Textiles: Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, subclasses 14+ for a
    textile apparatus with a pattern mechanism.

    139,    Textiles: Weaving, appropriate subclass for the manufacture of a
    fabric by a weaving process.


CLS 364/470.05
TXT Pattern cutting:

    Textile product or operation under subclass 470.01 wherein the data
    processing system or calculating computer is responsible for controlling
    the cutting procedure for producing a textile article having specified
    dimensions.


CLS 364/470.06
TXT Pattern matching or positioning:

    Textile product or operation under subclass 470.01 further comprising a
    means to align or position a pattern to prevent improper overlap.


CLS 364/470.07
TXT Sewing:

    Textile product or operation under subclass 470.01 wherein the data
    processing system or calculating computer controls the operation of uniting
    or ornamenting material by means of a strand inserted (stitched) in the
    material at spaced locations by a needle and enchained or otherwise locked
    in position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclasses 7.7, 9.1, and 13.2 for sewing of
    shoes.

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 2+ for sewing manufacturing devices.


CLS 364/470.08
TXT With particular input data (e.g., stitch):

    Sewing product or operation under subclass 470.07 wherein the data
    processing system or calculating computer further controls the physical
    characteristics of the sewing operation (i.e., pitch, pattern, location,
    etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 475.17+ for stitch control.


CLS 364/470.09
TXT Embroidering:

    Sewing product or operation under subclass 470.07 wherein the data
    processing system or calculating computer controls the sewing operation to
    create a design or ornamental pattern.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 78+ for embroidering devices.


CLS 364/470.1
TXT Spinning or winding (e.g., yarn):

    Textile product or operation under subclass 470.01 wherein the data
    processing system or calculating computer controls or monitors the various
    parameters associated with the textile machines rotational drive or
    filament being produced.


CLS 364/470.11
TXT Loom control:

    Textile product or operation under subclass 470.01 wherein the data
    processing system or calculating computer controls an apparatus performing
    a weaving process.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 225+ and 327 for control of loom.


CLS 364/470.12
TXT Knitting:

    Textile product or operation under subclass 470.01 wherein the data
    processing system or calculating computer controls an apparatus performing
    a knitting process.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    66,     Textiles: Knitting, appropriate subclass for the manufacture of
    fabric structures from strands by forming loops and drawing the bights
    thereof through previously formed loops.


CLS 364/470.13
TXT Fiber preparation:

    Textile product or operation under subclass 470.01 wherein the data
    processing system or calculating computer controls the manipulation of raw
    material for fiber production.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles: Fiber Preparation, appropriate subclass, in particular
    subclass 300 for a control means responsive to a sensed condition or
    program.


CLS 364/470.14
TXT With monitoring or inspecting (e.g., abnormality detection):

    Textile product or operation under subclass 470.01 wherein the data
    processing system or calculating computer senses or detects any
    irregularities or parameters outside of a specified region.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    550,    for a data processing system or calculating computer designed for
    or utilized in measuring, testing, or monitoring.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    382,    Image Analysis, subclasses 141+ for an image analysis system
    designed as a part of an automated inspection system in a product
    manufacturing environment.


CLS 364/470.15
TXT Yarn quality:

    Monitoring or inspecting under subclass 470.14 wherein the data processing
    system or calculating computer senses or detects any discrepancies in the
    integrity of the stock material's filamentary characteristics.


CLS 364/471.01
TXT Sheet making (e.g., paper products):

    Continuous material manufacturing under subclass 469.01 wherein the
    manufactured product's width is substantially greater than its thickness.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclass 13 for web or article
    formation and subclasses 100+ for paper making processes and products.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, appropriate subclass, in
    particular subclasses 67.1+ for sheetlike articles.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, for articles made from a sheet or web.


CLS 364/471.02
TXT Paper machine or subsystem control:

    Continuous material manufacturing under subclass 471.01 wherein the data
    processing system or calculating computer controls an apparatus associated
    in the process of manipulating pulp or stock in order to produce a paper
    product.


CLS 364/471.03
TXT Profile analyzer or controller:

    Continuous material manufacturing under subclass 471.01 wherein the data
    processing system or calculating computer controls or measures the
    transverse physical properties or characteristics (e.g., the thickness
    distribution, color,  moisture content, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    382,    Image Analysis, subclass 108 for an image analysis system designed
    to examine the color or intensity distribution of an image object.


CLS 364/472.01
TXT Metal:

    Manufactured product or operation under subclass 468.24 wherein the
    particular product belongs to one of a category of electropositive elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 709+ for a control means energized in
    response to an activator stimulated by a condition sensor.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 6.1+ for a control means energized in
    response to an activator stimulated by a condition-sensor, subclasses 28.1+
    for the use of a self-regulating control system utilizing electrical or
    hydraulic energy, subclasses 69, 128, and 200 for modification or control
    of the temperature of the work, tool or machine, and subclass 441 for a
    means to selectably control movement of a tool.

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, appropriate subclass for the
    manufacturing of tools and implements composed of metal.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 195+ for a process of chemical-heat
    removing (e.g., flame-cutting, etc.) or burning of metal having control
    responsive to a sensed condition of a workpiece.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 152+ for safety control means, 154.1+
    for a control means responsive to or actuated by means sensing or measuring
    a condition or variable (i.e., Automatic control), and 157 for a control
    means responsive to an independent timing means.

    413,    Sheet Metal Container Making, appropriate subclass for the
    manufacture of a sheet metal container.


CLS 364/472.02
TXT Casting or drawing:

    Manufactured product or operation under subclass 472.01 wherein the data
    processing system or calculating computer controls the manipulation of
    metal either (1) by pulling or stamping or (2) by pouring molten metal into
    a mold to shape or form the metal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 527.5+ for metal casting.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 80 for casting metal introduced into a
    mold as a solid.


CLS 364/472.03
TXT Control of metallurgical property:

    Casting or drawing under subclass 472.02 wherein the data processing system
    or calculating computer controls, measures, or monitors the manufacturing
    process to maintain the physical properties of the metal within specified
    parameters.


CLS 364/472.04
TXT Rolling:

    Manufactured product or operation under subclass 472.01 wherein the data
    processing system or calculating computer controls the manipulation of a
    metal by changing its physical dimension by passing the metal between
    rotating cylindrical elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 888.073 for rolling or die forming (e.g.,
    drawing, punching) and subclass 527.7 for metal casting combined with
    rolling.

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making subclasses 63+ for rolling
    machines and rolls for forming blanks or bars particularly designed for a
    horseshoe.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 365.2 for the process of rolling and
    subclasses 64+ for metal deforming by twisting an axially moving work.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclass 117 for the process of cold rolling
    and subclasses 158+ for metal rolling, per se.

    413,    Sheet Metal Container Making, subclasses 6+ for assembling a
    receptacle by a rolling process.


CLS 364/472.05
TXT Having schedule adjustment:

    Rolling under subclass 472.04 further comprising management of the
    sequential operations associated with the manufacturing process.


CLS 364/472.06
TXT Control or detection of a particular condition:

    Rolling under subclass 472.04 further comprising the monitoring,
    correction, or inspection of a specific characteristic of the metal rolling
    process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    550,    for a data processing system or calculating computer designed for
    or utilized in measuring, testing, or monitoring.


CLS 364/472.07
TXT Speed control:

    Particular condition control or detection under subclass 472.06 wherein the
    controlled or detected condition is the velocity of either the rotating
    cylindrical element or the metal.


CLS 364/472.08
TXT Tension control (e.g., interstrand):

    Particular condition control or detection under subclass 472.06 wherein the
    controlled or detected condition is a longitudinal force which causes the
    metal to elongate.


CLS 364/472.09
TXT Temperature control:

    Particular condition control or detection under subclass 472.06 wherein the
    controlled or detected condition is heat or thermal energy of the metal.


CLS 364/472.1
TXT Flatness or crown control:

    Particular condition control or detection under subclass 472.06 wherein the
    controlled or detected condition is related to the dimensional attributes
    (i.e., width, thickness, etc.) of the metal.

    (1)     Note. This subclass contains patents where both the thickness and
    width are contoured to further control flatness.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 162 for concurrent pressing and conveying having
    roll crown control.


CLS 364/472.12
TXT Thickness control:

    Particular condition control or detection under subclass 472.06 wherein the
    controlled or detected condition is the dimension perpendicular to both the
    longitudinal and latitudinal directions of the metal.


CLS 364/472.13
TXT Roll eccentricity compensation:

    Thickness control under subclass 472.1 wherein the flatness or crown are
    controlled by the correction of the curvature or ovalness of the roll.


CLS 364/473.01
TXT Glassware forming:

    Manufactured product or operation under subclass 468.24 wherein the data
    processing system or calculating computer controls a particular process
    associated with the manufacturing of glass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, appropriate subclass for the manufacture of
    glass, per se.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process, subclass
    420 for a process of producing or treating high temperature (tc greater
    than 30 k) superconductor material or superconductor containing products or
    precursors thereof with glass forming, working, or treating.


CLS 364/473.02
TXT IS (individual section) machines:

    Glassware forming under subclass 473.01 wherein the data processing system
    or calculating computer controls the operation associated with glassware
    forming on a subset by subset basis.


CLS 364/474.01
TXT Machining:

    Particular manufactured product or manufacturing operation under subclass
    468.24 wherein the area of product manufacturing involves the shaping of a
    solid workpiece by a machine tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, for generic metal shaping.

    72,     Metal Deforming, for applying mechanical stress to a metal
    workpiece to alter the size or shape thereof without removing any material.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, for miscellaneous machine
    subcombinations and mechanisms pertinent to machining.

    82,     Turning, for producing articles of predominantly circular section
    by contacting a cutter with a rotating workpiece or a workpiece with a
    rotating cutter.

    83,     Cutting, for cutting of a workpiece or handling the workpiece
    before or after the cutting thereof.

    219,    Electric Heating, for electrically heated metal working apparatus.


    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), for operating on a workpiece by
    a plurality of selectively powered cutting tool pairs.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, for cutting a
    workpiece by an implement which rotates about and travels along an axis.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, for machining of gears or
    milling or planing of a workpiece.

    451,    Abrading, for a process or apparatus for grinding a workpiece by a
    tool having a natural cutting edge (e.g., a mineral crystal) versus an
    artificial cutting edge (as in milling or filing).


CLS 364/474.02
TXT With particular tool or tool operation:

    Machining under subclass 474.01 in which the type of tool or function
    performed by the tool is specified.


CLS 364/474.03
TXT Tracing or duplicating:

    Particular tool or tool operation under subclass 474.02 wherein the tool
    reproduces a workpiece from an existing one used as a prototype.


CLS 364/474.04
TXT Electrical discharge machining (EDM):

    Particular tool or tool operation under subclass 474.02 wherein the tool
    utilizes an electric arc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 69+ for details of electrical
    discharge apparatus.


CLS 364/474.05
TXT 3-D sculpturing using nontracing prototype sensor:

    Particular tool or tool operation under subclass 474.02 wherein the data
    required to machine an item is obtained by a sensor in proximity to but not
    touching a prototype workpiece.


CLS 364/474.06
TXT Grinding:

    Particular tool or tool operation under subclass 474.02 wherein the tool
    abrasively removes portions of the workpiece.


CLS 364/474.07
TXT Bending (e.g., press brake):

    Particular tool or tool operation under subclass 474.02 wherein the tool
    changes some portion of a workpiece to or from a planar condition.


CLS 364/474.08
TXT Laser:

    Particular tool or tool operation under subclass 474.02 wherein the tool is
    a coherent light source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 121+ for details of laser heating
    apparatus.

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, appropriate subclass.


CLS 364/474.09
TXT Of elongated material (e.g., timber, veneer, web):

    Machining under subclass 474.01 wherein the workpiece has extensive length.


CLS 364/474.1
TXT Portable (e.g., hand-held):

    Machining under subclass 474.01 wherein the machine tool can be
    conveniently carried between workpieces by an operator.


CLS 364/474.11
TXT Supervisory control (e.g., plural tools or plural processors):

    Machining under subclass 474.01 wherein multiple tools are controlled by a
    single data processor or a single tool is controlled by multiple data
    processors.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    for a central or host computer used to control plural controllers.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    483,    Tool Changing, subclass 15 for apparatus including plural machine
    tools combined with means to transfer a tool and a workpiece.


CLS 364/474.12
TXT Having particular control of a motor parameter:

    Machining under subclass 474.01 wherein a specified characteristic of a
    machine tool power plant is regulated.

    (1)     Note.  Such characteristics include voltage, current, power,
    torque, and phase.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity: Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses, for
    parametric control in motor systems having a nominal load.


CLS 364/474.13
TXT Material usage optimization:

    Machining under subclass 474.01 for maximizing the number of finished
    workpieces per area or minimizing the amount of material per workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148,    wherein a control seeks to optimize a system's performance
    criterion (e.g., efficiency, consumption, or profit).


CLS 364/474.14
TXT Multiple mode (e.g., rough-finish, coarse-fine):

    Machining under subclass 474.01 where workpiece handling occurs in a
    plurality of distinct sequential processing phases.


CLS 364/474.15
TXT Adaptive (optimizing) system:

    Machining under subclass 474.01 for maximizing or minimizing some aspect of
    a machining operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148+,   for generic adaptive control systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    483,    Tool Changing, subclasses 4+ for apparatus including a tool
    transfer means combined with a tool support or storage means, and a
    programmable control system.


CLS 364/474.16
TXT Performance monitoring:

    Machining under subclass 474.01 in which the condition of some portion of a
    machining system is utilized to effect a control change therein.


CLS 364/474.17
TXT Condition of tool or workpiece (e.g., tolerance, tool wear):

    Performance monitoring under subclass 474.16 including evaluation of the
    condition of a machine tool or an item being machined.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    551.02, for machine tool measuring and evaluating, per se.


CLS 364/474.18
TXT Offsetting:

    Condition of tool or workpiece under subclass 474.17 wherein some allowance
    is made for variances in tool condition.


CLS 364/474.19
TXT Protective or diagnostic feature:

    Performance monitoring under subclass 474.16 which includes prevention of
    machining system damage or provides information regarding system faults.

    (1)     Note.  Such damage would include injury to an operator.


CLS 364/474.2
TXT Tool/workpiece interference prevention:

    Protective or diagnostic feature under subclass 474.19 which protects
    against tool or workpiece collision.


CLS 364/474.21
TXT Tool selection/change:

    Subject matter under subclass 474.01 comprising processes of choosing an
    appropriate tool or exchanging multiple tools.


CLS 364/474.22
TXT With operator interface feature:

    Machining under subclass 474.01 providing for communication between a
    machining system and an operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188+,   for generic data processing control systems which utilize an
    operator interface.


CLS 364/474.23
TXT Specific programming format (e.g., macro):

    Machining with an operator interface feature under subclass 474.22 where
    the operator utilizes particular software coding techniques.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194,    for generic data processing control systems utilizing a particular
    algorithm.


CLS 364/474.24
TXT Including CAD, CAM, or CIM technique:

    Machining with an operator interface feature under subclass 474.22 in which
    a computer aided design, computer aided manufacturing, or computer
    integrated manufacturing technique provides a machining interface.


CLS 364/474.25
TXT Preset pattern:

    Machining with an operator interface feature under subclass 474.22 where
    previously stored workpiece shape data may be selected.


CLS 364/474.26
TXT Machining path display:

    Machining with an operator interface feature under subclass 474.22 in which
    a desired or actual tool route is visually conveyed to an operator.


CLS 364/474.27
TXT Prompting technique:

    Machining with an operator interface feature under subclass 474.22 where
    the machining system provides suggestions to an operator of future
    machining options.


CLS 364/474.28
TXT Digital positioning technique:

    Machining under subclass 474.01 using particular discrete valued processing
    to determine proper tool location.


CLS 364/474.29
TXT For curve or contour:

    Digital positioning technique under subclass 474.28 where the positioning
    technique is utilized in nonlinear or nonplanar machining.


CLS 364/474.3
TXT Including velocity or acceleration control:

    Digital positioning technique under subclass 474.28 including regulation of
    the first or second derivative of tool displacement.


CLS 364/474.31
TXT Interpolation:

    Digital positioning technique under subclass 474.28 where intermediate
    points are generated between pairs of tool path points.


CLS 364/474.32
TXT Specified tool feed path at entry or withdrawal:

    Digital positioning technique under subclass 474.28 where tool movement is
    along a predetermined trajectory during approach to or retraction from a
    workpiece.


CLS 364/474.33
TXT Repeated machining passes:

    Specified tool feedpath at entry or withdrawal under subclass 474.32 having
    a plurality of tool entry to withdrawal cycles.


CLS 364/474.34
TXT Alignment of tool or workpiece (e.g., origin or path return):

    Digital positioning technique under subclass 474.28 where the spatial
    reference between machine tool and workpiece is controlled.


CLS 364/474.35
TXT Positional compensation or modification:

    Digital positioning technique under subclass 474.28 where the tool position
    is adjusted in response to an undesired or desired positional deviation.


CLS 364/474.36
TXT Coordinate transformation technique:

    Machining under subclass 474.01 which includes conversion of positional
    locations between plural coordinate systems.

    (1)     Note.  Such a conversion might involve, for example, spherical to
    rectangular coordinate transformations.


CLS 364/474.37
TXT With particular measuring device (e.g., probe):

    Machining under subclass 474.01 which is combined with a specified
    measuring device.


CLS 364/475.01
TXT Extruding:

    Manufactured product or operation under subclass 468.24 wherein the
    specific manufacturing step or operation is one in which a material is
    heated and forced through a die to provide the required dimensions of the
    product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 402.19+ for shaping of metals; e.g.,
    bending, extruding, turning, etc.

    53,     Package Making, subclass 561 for molding or extruding a container.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 401 for a process of manufacturing
    fibers, filaments, or preforms by extruding.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 253.1+ for a process to deform metal by
    extruding.

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 375 for a process of making reconstituted tobacco
    using extrusion.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 550 and 689+ for a process wherein
    there is a step of extruding or drawing aluminum or an aluminum based
    alloy.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    244.11+ and 500+ for a process of surface bonding or assembly involving
    casting, plastic molding, or extruding.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    appropriate subclass, in particular subclass 1.29 for optical fiber,
    waveguide, or preform shaping by extruding, subclass 3.3 for the use of
    extrusion to form sheet or rod, subclasses 13+ for formation of solid
    particulate material directly from molten or liquid mass by extrusion
    spraying, subclasses 75+ for random variegated coloring during a molding
    process by extrusion, subclasses 540+ including extrusion direct
    application of fluid pressure differential to permanently shape, distort,
    or sustain work including extrusion, and subclasses 176.1+ shaping
    continuous or indefinite length work by extrusion.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, subclass 67 for forming an article by
    uniting randomly associated metal particles by extrusion.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    subclasses 113+ for a distinct means to feed, support, or manipulate
    preform stock and means for shaping fluent or bulk stock to form united
    product by extrusion, subclasses 131.1+ for a means of feeding fluent stock
    from plural sources to a common shaping means to form composite product by
    an extrusion process, and subclass 516 for a preform assembly means and
    means for bonding of plural preforms involving preform reshaping or
    vulcanizing by extrusion.

    426,    Food or Edible Material: Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 276+ for shaping by extruding and subclass 516 for molding,
    shaping, or casting by an extruding process.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclass 129 for a process of making a radiation sensitive product
    by extrusion coating.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making: Process and Apparatus,
    subclass 16 for a process for making an externally threaded fastener (e.g.,
    bolt) by extrusion and subclass 31 for a process of making a headed
    fastener (e.g., rivet) by extrusion.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 85 and 211 for container making involving
    extruding, drawing, or attenuating, subclas 293 for tube making involving
    extruding, drawing, or attenuating and subclasses 338+ for extruding,
    drawing, or attenuating in container and tube making per se.

    521,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 79+ for extruding a
    solid polymer containing material to form a cellular product.


CLS 364/475.02
TXT Molding:

    Manufactured product or operation under subclass 468.24 wherein the
    specific manufacturing step, condition, or operation is one in which a
    material is shaped or formed in a hollow cavity or matrix.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, appropriate subclass, in particular subclasses 848+,
    856, 858+, 888.047, 888.072, 890.127, and 898.049 for a method of
    mechanically manufacturing using a process of molding or casting.

    53,     Package Making, subclass 423 for forming a cover adjunct or
    application of a cover adjunct to a cover including casting or molding.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 404 for a processes of manufacturing
    fibers, filaments, or preforms with the step of casting or forming a
    nonfiber workpiece (e.g., molding liquid preform, shaping molten glass
    against a forming surface, etc.).

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    231 for a method of surface bonding or assembly with formation of a lamina
    of continuous length by molding or casting on an endless carrier, subclass
    242 for a method of surface bonding or assembly with lamina formation by
    molding or casting, and subclasses 500+ for a method of surface bonding or
    assembly with casting, plastic molding, or extruding means.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    subclass 149 for a molding pressure control means responsive to pressure at
    shaping area.

    426,    Food or Edible Material: Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclass 512 for the process of molding, casting, or shaping food or edible
    material.


CLS 364/475.03
TXT Control of curing:

    Molding under subclass 475.02 wherein the specific manufacturing step or
    operation is one in which the preparation, preservation, or finishing of
    the molded material is by a chemical or physical process.


CLS 364/475.04
TXT Vulcanization:

    Curing control under subclass 475.03 wherein the curing is specifically
    designed to increase the strength, resiliency, and freedom from stickiness
    and odor of (e.g., rubber) by combining with additives in the presence of
    heat and pressure.


CLS 364/475.05
TXT Injection:

    Molding under subclass 475.02 wherein the control of the molding process
    further includes control of the process associated with the flow of
    material under pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    125+ for a method of surface bonding or assembly with injection molding of
    outer lamina.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    subclasses 297.2+ and 328.1+ for forming plural articles including the
    process of introducing material under pressure into a closed mold cavity
    (e.g., injection molding, etc.).


CLS 364/475.06
TXT Plural molding machines or stations:

    Injection under subclass 475.05 capable of collectively managing  a
    multitude of injection molding units or points.


CLS 364/475.07
TXT Control of temperature:

    Injection under subclass 475.05 wherein the controlled condition is the
    heat or thermal energy associated with the injection molding process.


CLS 364/475.08
TXT With control of pressure:

    Injection under subclass 475.05 wherein the controlled condition is a force
    per unit area exerted in the injection molding process.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    subclass 149 for a molding pressure control means responsive to pressure at
    shaping area.


CLS 364/475.09
TXT Monitoring, inspection, or control of a particular condition:

    Particular condition monitoring, inspection, or control under subclass
    475.02 further comprising the regulation, supervision, observation, or
    examination of a specific characteristic of the molding process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    470.14, for the monitoring or inspection of a textile process.

    472.06, for the monitoring, control, or inspection of conditions associated
    with the rolling of metals.


CLS 364/475.1
TXT Control of temperature:

    Particular condition monitoring, inspection, or control under subclass
    475.09 wherein the controlled condition is the heat or thermal energy
    associated with the specific characteristic of the manufacturing process.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 245+ for a
    material treated by electromagnetic energy having temperature control and
    subclass 446 for the process of a gas or vapor in contact with a treated
    material having temperature or moisture control of the  material, gas, or
    vapor.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 162 for temperature or heater control
    responsive to a condition sensing means.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 69, 128, and 200 for modification or
    control of temperature of work, tool, or machine, or with lubrication
    thereof.

    83,     Cutting, subclass 170 for cutting with a means to control or modify
    the temperature of an apparatus or work.

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 303 for tobacco treatment having temperature or
    humidity control of treating fluid.

    202,    Distillation: Apparatus, subclass 160 for a distillation system
    having automatic temperature control.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclass 131 having a means for contacting
    a solid metalliferous material or metal object with a liquid having a means
    to agitate or control temperature of bath.

    355,    Photocopying, subclass 30 for projection printing and copying
    cameras having temperature control.

    366,    Agitating, subclass 145 for agitating including temperature control.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions: Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclass 244 for control of temperature reactivity.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 135+ for milling with
    a means to control temperature.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    subclasses 143+ for control means responsive to or actuated by means
    sensing or detecting a condition or material triggered having temperature
    control.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 33 and 53 for an abrading process including
    temperature modification or control.

    518,    Chemistry: Fischer-Tropsch Processes; or Purification or Recovery
    of Products Thereof, subclass 712 for temperature control or regulation of
    the fischer-tropsch reaction.


CLS 364/476.01
TXT Pressing:

    Particular manufacturing product or operation under subclass 468.24 wherein
    the manufacturing process involves a compressional force being applied to a
    workpiece.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclass 33.4 for a pressing machine
    associated with shoe making and subclass 57.1 for a machine having a seam
    pressing means.

    19,     Textiles: Fiber Preparation, subclass 219 for fiber preparation
    with auxiliary pressing and subclass 248 for restraining fibers in
    approximately stationary in relation to a moving apron.

    38,     Textiles: Ironing or Smoothing, subclasses 44+ for smoothing by a
    roller presser and subclass 144 for pressing or smoothing processes.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 305+ for a press molding machine.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclass 7 for seam pressing and subclass 8
    for forming and pressing.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 48+ for metal deforming by a
    tool-couple pressing together adjacent surface portions of the same work.

    99,     Foods and Beverages: Apparatus, subclass 349 for cooking having a
    material pressing means.

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclass, in particular subclasses 4 and 43+
    for automatic or material-triggered control of a press.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclass 220 for an article
    forming process including pressing with flexible diaphragm.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 52+ for forming, molding, pressing or
    stretching articles of apparel and similar articles.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    subclasses 107 for a method of molding a solid preform, by pressing, to
    produce a disk-shaped record and subclass 297.4 for forming plural articles
    including multilayer pressing.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, subclass 49 for hot isostatic pressing
    (HIP) and subclass 68 for isostatic/hydrostatic pressing.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    subclasses 406+ for a press-forming apparatus having opposed press members.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 142+ for a work advancing during pressing.

    505,    Superconductor Technology: Apparatus, Material, Process, subclass
    432 for a process of producing or treating high temperature superconductor
    material or superconductor containing products or precursors thereof
    including isostatic pressing.


CLS 364/477.01
TXT Heating:

    Particular manufactured product or operation under subclass 468.24 wherein
    an operation of a production process being controlled, monitored, or
    measured is related to the transfer of thermal energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    501,    wherein a chemical process includes the process of first heating a
    mixture.

    503,    wherein a chemical process includes a furnace or oven for drying,
    burning, or baking a substance or body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 58+ for direct heat radiating heat
    generators.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 154.1+ for metal casting apparatus
    including control systems.

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclass, in particular subclasses
    483+ for controlling or regulating plural separate distinct heating
    resistance elements (i.e., one control system for all elements).

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, appropriate subclass, in particular
    subclasses 227+ for the process of applying plural heating and subclasses
    234.1+ for a specific mode of heating or applying pressure.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 2+ for automatic heating control.

    392,    Electric Resistance Heating Devices, appropriate subclass for an
    electrical resisting heating device, per se.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, appropriate subclasses for producing
    metals, alloys, or metal containing compositions in a solid or compact
    state from powdered or particulate material with or without heating.

    432,    Heating, appropriate subclass, in particular subclasses 1+ for a
    process of heating or heater operation.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, subclasses 537+ and
    542+ for methods of fusing and diffusing, respectively, an electrically
    active dopant into a semiconductor, subclasses 660+ for metallization of a
    semiconductor combined with heat treatment of the conductive layer, and
    subclasses 795+ for a thermal treatment modifying the properties of a
    semiconductor substrate.


CLS 364/477.02
TXT Drying:

    Heating under subclass 477.01 further comprising the control, monitoring,
    or measurement of the moisture content associated with the heating process.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclass,
    in particular subclasses 445+ for form-supported treated article with
    drying parameter control.


CLS 364/477.03
TXT Furnace:

    Heating under subclass 477.01 wherein the data processing system or
    calculating computer is specifically designed to control an apparatus in
    which energy in a nonthermal form is converted to heat and supplied to the
    manufacturing process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    477.05, for control of an apparatus for heating or cooking an article
    placed within.

    503,    wherein a chemical process includes a furnace or oven for drying,
    burning, or baking a substance or body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 134.7+ for the process of rotating
    a furnace or chamber utilized in the glass making process, subclasses
    135.6+ for an electric furnace utilized in the glass making process,
    subclass 335 for a glass furnace with furnace charging means, and subclass
    540 for a fiber making apparatus with a furnace charging means.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, appropriate subclass for a furnace used in a specialized
    metallurgical process.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 33 for indirectly heating
    a surface using a furnace, subclass 420 for feed water heaters heated by
    furnace gases, subclasses 422+ for feed water heaters heated by furnace
    gases and steam, and subclass 485 for steam superheaters having a separate
    furnace for heating them.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 345+ for a water heater having a
    kettle furnace.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclasses 36 and 38 for a concentrating
    evaporator having a furnace heated open pan.

    202,    Distillation: Apparatus, subclass 114 for a distilling apparatus
    having a common heating furnace.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 420+ wherein the heating device is a
    crucible or furnace type device.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 10+ for a
    hot-air furnace, per se, subclass 14 for a combined boiler and furnace
    controlled, subclasses 15+ for control of a furnace, subclass 46 for a hot
    air furnace with a timing element.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 48 and 53 for a furnace, per se.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclass 17 for a multiple gas
    furnace gas-type gas and liquid contact apparatus.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, appropriate subclass.

    392,    Electric Resistance Heating Devices, subclass 351 for a floor-type
    furnace.

    432,    Heating, subclass 28 for a process of operating a furnace utilizing
    a heat storage mass, subclass 39 for control of a furnace using selection
    or load balancing of furnace exhaust heated regenerators and subclasses 90+
    for a boiler and work heating furnace, pot, or oven.


CLS 364/477.04
TXT Multizone:

    Furnace under subclass 477.03 further comprising a plurality of
    individually controlled regions or sectors supplied by the furnace.


CLS 364/477.05
TXT Oven:

    Heating under subclass 477.01 wherein the data processing system or
    calculating computer is specifically designed to control an enclosed
    apparatus supplied with heat and used for cooking or heating objects placed
    within.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    477.03, Furnace, for control of an apparatus for supplying heat to a
    manufacturing process.

    503,    wherein a chemical process includes a furnace or oven for drying,
    burning, or baking a substance or body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 19+ for cooking ovens and subclass
    39 for miscellaneous cooking ovens.

    202,    Distillation: Apparatus, subclass 101 for systems with dome ovens
    and subclass 248 for a coke oven type of distilling apparatus.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 391+ for an oven type combined with
    container, enclosure, or support for material to be heated.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 46 for a
    domestic oven having a timing device.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 90+ for a boiler and work heating furnace, pot,
    or oven.


CLS 364/477.06
TXT Sintering, soldering, or bonding:

    Heating under subclass 477.01 wherein the heating process is used for the
    bonding, joining, or fusion of components of a workpiece.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 851 for the mechanical manufacture of an
    electrical device in or on a base including the sintering of the base.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 416 and 427+ for the process of
    manufacturing a fiber, a filament, or a preform by sintering.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 313+ for compositions for or from consolidating by
    agglomerating, calcinating, compacting, indurating, roasting, sintering, or
    solidifying from molten mass, and subclasses 751+ for a process with heat
    treatment (e.g., calcinating, fusing, indurating, roasting, sintering,
    vaporizing, etc.).

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclass 528 for a process of modifying or
    maintaining internal physical structure or chemical properties of metal, a
    process of reactive coating of metal, and a process of chemical heat
    removing or burning of metal including brazing or soldering.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 85.1+ and 129 for bonding with metal
    by brazing or soldering and subclass 616 for bonding metal by soldering.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 51+ for a metallic heat applicator
    (e.g., soldering iron, etc.), subclass 111.5 for a process of metal fusion
    bonding using high frequency vibratory energy with soldering or liquid
    phase bonding, and subclasses 262.31, 262.42, 262.45, 262.51, 262.61,
    262.72, 262.8, and 262.9 for a process of brazing or soldering.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    subclasses 56+ for a process involving vitrifying or sintering of a preform
    to make inorganic article and subclasses 125+ for sintering or heat fusing
    of particles.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, subclasses 1+ for a Powder metallurgy
    processes with heating or sintering.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclass 198 for a process of visible imaging including the step
    of firing or sintering.

    432,    Heating, subclass 13 for a process of heating including melting,
    vaporizing, sintering, expanding comminuting, or classifying work material.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, subclasses 106+ for
    methods of attaching an electrode on or to a semiconductor, subclasses 537+
    for methods of fusing an electrically active dopant into a semiconductor,
    subclasses 660+ for metallization of a semiconductor combined with heat
    treatment of the conductive layer, and subclasses 795+ for a thermal
    treatment modifying the properties of a semiconductor substrate.

    505,    Superconductor Technology: Apparatus, Material, Process, subclasses
    500+ for a process of producing or treating high temperature superconductor
    material or superconductor containing products or precursors thereof by
    heating, annealing, or sintering.


CLS 364/478.01
TXT Article handling:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein the data processing system or
    calculating computer controls, monitors or inspects the manipulation of an
    item to change its position, orientation, or location.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    186,    Merchandising, subclass 58 for a movable order carrier.

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, appropriate subclass, in particular
    subclasses 301, 322, 341, 357, 358, 395, 401, 437, 444, 460.1, 464.1, 507,
    526, 571, 639, 641, 718, 751, 761, 766, and 794 for condition responsive
    control of a conveyor.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclass, in particular subclass 154 for current control,  subclass 489 for
    automatic control associated with feeding and discharging, and subclasses
    491 and 496 for automatic control of discharging, subclass 726 for
    classifying, separating, and assorting fluid suspension including condition
    responsive control,

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclass,
    in particular subclasses 10+ for a device having a means to control the
    advancing material in response to a detected condition.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, appropriate subclass for a process
    or apparatus for progressively winding elongated, flexible material.

    318,    Electricity: Motive Power Systems, subclasses 568.11+ for a
    preprogramable multifunction manipulator designed to move devices through
    variable programmed motions for the performance of changeable tasks on a
    repetitive basis without human intervention.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 34+ for a joint or connector
    having an article handling or directing feature.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, appropriate subclass, in particular
    subclass 138.4 for marine loading and unloading having line tension
    control, subclass 161 for a chamber of a type utilized for a heating
    function and material charging or discharging means with a control system
    responsive to a condition in the chamber, subclass 231 for an apparatus
    particularly adapted for charging or discharging a facility comprising one
    or more sites for the parking of wheeled vehicles having a control system
    responsive to changeable operating instructions, subclass 273 for plural,
    static structures for supporting discrete loads and charging or discharging
    means with a control system responsive to changeable operating
    instructions, subclasses 613+ for an elevator or hoist loading or unloading
    means with a mechanism for flow control, and subclass 699 for a vertically
    swinging load support having a control means responsive to a sensed
    condition.


    446,    Amusement Devices: Toys, subclasses 424+ for a simulation of an
    instrument or machine for displacing or placing articles or material in a
    particular manner.


CLS 364/478.02
TXT Article storing, retrieval, or arrangement (e.g., warehousing, automated
    library):

    Article handling under subclass  478.01 wherein the data processing system
    or calculating computer regulates or manages the movement or distribution
    of an item to be placed in, organized in, or removed from a location
    specified for supply or accumulation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 344 for a cooled article storage
    compartment or cooled isolated material handler means with product
    receiving and storing means.

    312,    Supports: Cabinet Structure, subclasses 9.1+ for a cabinet to store
    audio or visual recording medium.

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 403 for a document filing and retrieval system.

    382,    Image Analysis, subclasses 305+ for image storage or retrieval.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 252 for a charging or
    discharging device with a vehicle storage or retrieval system responsive to
    a manual designation of destination.

    426,    Food or Edible Material: Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 418+ for a process of storing a solid food or edible material
    under a controlled condition.


CLS 364/478.03
TXT Having an identification code:

    Article storing, retrieval, or arrangement under subclass 478.02 wherein
    the item has an identifying mark or address for location management
    physically attached.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    382,    Image Analysis, subclasses 306+ for image storage or retrieval
    using identification indicia on a document.


CLS 364/478.04
TXT Order filling:

    Article storing, retrieval, or arrangement under subclass 478.02 wherein
    the data processing system or calculating computer regulates or manages the
    movement or distribution of an article based on a request for a specific
    quantity or characteristic of the article.


CLS 364/478.05
TXT Article support load management (e.g., pallettizing):

    Article storing, retrieval, or arrangement under subclass 478.02 wherein
    the data processing system or calculating computer regulates or manages the
    arrangement or placement of an item upon a supporting structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclass 369.6 for a conveyor having
    rollers to shift a load vertically to a different plane.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 346.01+ for a supporting base structure.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 754+ for an article
    reorienting device and subclass 798 for an article or material handling
    device having a movable stack support for unloading an article.


CLS 364/478.06
TXT Particular charging or discharging apparatus (e.g., robot):

    Article storing, retrieval, or arrangement under subclass 478.02 further
    including a specific  means to arrange or place an article in a desired
    location.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 762 and 765 for an article
    reorienting device having an article inserting or discharging means.

    901,    Robots, cross-reference art collections 2+ and 31+ for computer
    controlled handling robots.


CLS 364/478.07
TXT Associating or disassociating plural articles:

    Article handling under subclass  478.01 wherein the data processing system
    or calculating computer regulates or manages the segregation or integration
    of multiple items based on similar or dissimilar characteristics.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 464+ for a method of mechanical
    manufacture having an association of parts by an aligning means and
    subclass 467 for the sequential association of parts on a stationary
    aligning means.

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 327 for leaf associating or disassociating in the
    tobacco treatment process.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclass, in particular subclasses 509+ for a method or device for sorting
    special items and certain methods and apparatus

    270,    Sheet-Material Associating, subclasses 4+ and 18+ for the
    association of plural sheets or web combined with a printing process,
    subclasses 32+ for associating and folding plural sheets or webs, and
    subclasses 52+ for associating or disassociating plural sheets or webs.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclass 259 for a method or device
    for developing or testing coordination using the associating of dissimilar
    objects with apertures or pegs having matching size, shape, or color.


CLS 364/478.08
TXT Inserting:

    Associating or disassociating plural articles under subclass 478.07 wherein
    the association or disassociation of plural articles further comprises the
    ability to place into the handled article a secondary item or article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclass 15 for a machine for forcing lasts
    into completed or partially completed boots or shoes.

    53,     Package Making, subclass 115 for inserting cushioning material into
    a package.

    62,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 139 for a means to insert wire into a
    manufactured glass article.

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 72 for a wrapping device having a plug inserting
    means and subclass 94 for a process or apparatus for cigar or cigarette
    making including plug attaching or inserting.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    293+ for a method of surface bonding or assembly including the step of
    inserting lamina in a hole, aperture, or recess of other lamina, and
    subclass 303.1 for inserting lamina into preformed plastic body.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 50 for a device for inserting a tape,
    thread, or cord into a garment, lace, or similar article.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    subclasses 271.1+ for inserting a preform part into a plastic body and
    simultaneously reshaping the body with a mold element.

    270,    Sheet-Material Associating, subclasses 58.31+ for placing sheets in
    a column and inserting marker sheets to indicate number of sheets in the
    column.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 762 and 765 for an article
    reorienting device having an article inserting or discharging means.


CLS 364/478.09
TXT Having an identification code:

    Inserting control under subclass 478.08 wherein the inserted article has an
    identifying mark or address for the manipulation of said article to change
    its position, orientation, or location.


CLS 364/478.1
TXT Monitoring or inspection (e.g., incomplete assembly):

    Inserting control having an identification code under subclass 478.09
    wherein the insertion system is capable of supervising, examining, or
    detecting a condition related to the insertion process or handled article.


CLS 364/478.11
TXT Collating or sorting:

    Associating or disassociating plural articles under subclass 478.07 wherein
    the association or disassociation of plural articles results in the
    separation, grouping, or sequential arrangement of the articles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclass 2 for the sorting of articles completing a
    printing process.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 216 for the sorting or grading of live
    fish and subclasses 712+ for classifying, separating, or grouping animals
    (i.e., sorting) according to size or kind of animal.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 3.1+ for
    a method of or device for sorting special items, subclasses 12.1+ for
    plural, diverse separating operations and subclasses 509+ for sorting
    special items.

    348,    Television, subclass 91 for a picture signal generator used to
    separate manufactured objects in different categories by structure or
    destination.

    355,    Photocopying, subclass 323 for the sorting or collating of
    documents.

    452,    Butchering, subclass 184 for the sorting of a carcass or carcass
    portion.


CLS 364/478.12
TXT Having an identification code:

    Collating or sorting under subclass 478.11 wherein the sorted or collated
    article has an identifying mark or address for the manipulation of said
    article to change its position, orientation or location.


CLS 364/478.13
TXT Having an identification code:

    Article handling under subclass  478.01 wherein the article has an
    identifying mark or address for the manipulation of the article to change
    its position, orientation or location.


CLS 364/478.14
TXT Identification code determines article destination:

    Identification code under subclass 478.13


    wherein the identification code defines a target location of the article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    382,    Image Analysis, subclasses 306+ for image storage or retrieval
    using identification indicia that appear on the document, such as keywords,
    to file the document or to retrieve the document.


CLS 364/478.15
TXT Preparation of an article for an identification code (i.e., printing,
    encoding, etc.):

    Destination code under subclass 478.14 wherein the identification code
    further comprises the step of impressing or stenciling a design or
    character upon the article.


CLS 364/478.16
TXT Particular transport between article handling stations:

    Article handling under subclass  478.01 wherein the data processing system
    or calculating computer controls the movement of the monitored or inspected
    item from one location to another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    468.19, for a particular work transport between manufacturing stations.


CLS 364/478.17
TXT Transport position identification:

    Work transport under subclass 478.16 wherein the data processing system or
    calculating computer functions to indicate the location of a transported
    item.


CLS 364/478.18
TXT Having a conveyor:

    Particular transport under subclass 478.16 wherein the particular transport
    means is an apparatus designed to move an article along a predetermined
    path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, appropriate subclass
    for a device for guiding material either vertically, horizontally or at an
    inclination.


    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, appropriate subclass for a conveyor, per
    se.

    406,    Conveyors: Fluid Current, subclasses 10+ for a means to control a
    conveying fluid or movement of a load in response to a sensed condition.


CLS 364/479.01
TXT Dispensing or vending:

    Article handling under subclass  478.01 wherein the data processing system
    or calculating computer regulates or manages the automatic allotment or
    discharge of an article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclass, in particular subclasses
    9+ for the automatic control of an article dispensing device.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclass, in particular subclasses 52+ for
    the automatic control of a dispensing device.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclasses 3.01+ for delivering to a
    stack of sheets and feeding therefrom, subclasses 8.1+ for feeding an
    individual sheet from a pack of sheets, toward an operation, or  with
    respect to a location where the individual sheet is operated upon, and
    subclasses 278+ for delivering individual sheets from a work station to a
    receiver, stack, or some determined position.

    705,    Data Processing: Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/Price Determination, subclasses  16+ for vending combined with a cash
    or credit transaction.


CLS 364/479.02
TXT Operator or payment initiated:

    Dispensing or vending under subclass 479.01 wherein the dispensing or
    vending of an article is controlled by an input signal representing either
    (1) an operator request or (2) remittance of a sufficient amount of
    compensation.


CLS 364/479.03
TXT Customized dispensed article (e.g., operator design):

    Operator or payment initiated control system under subclass 479.02 having a
    means to receive and store information provided by the operator to tailor
    the dispensed or vended article.


CLS 364/479.04
TXT Demonstration or duplication of article (e.g., software, video, etc.):

    Operator or payment initiated control system under subclass 479.02 wherein
    the dispensing or vending system further enables an operator to sample a
    particular article or dispense a copy of a particular article.


CLS 364/479.05
TXT Printing on or of dispensed or vended article:

    Operator or payment initiated control system under subclass 479.02 wherein
    the dispensing or vending system is capable of marking, lettering, or
    placing any impression on the dispensed or vended article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, appropriate subclass for the production of characters or
    designs on surfaces by impression of types or dies or by applying coating
    material thereto through openings of previous portions of a pattern sheet,
    as in stenciling, or by impression from planographic or intaglio surfaces.

    283,    Printed Matter, appropriate subclass for an article bearing indicia.


CLS 364/479.06
TXT Data collection or reporting (e.g., sales, inventory, etc.):

    Operator or payment initiated control system under subclass 479.02 wherein
    the dispensing or vending system manages or stores information relating to
    the quantity of articles dispensed or vended.


CLS 364/479.07
TXT Authorization (e.g., password, time usage limit, personal identification
    number (PIN)):

    Operator or payment initiated control system under subclass 479.02 wherein
    the dispensing or vending system allows access to the vending operation
    when certain conditions have been satisfied or preapproval has been given.


CLS 364/479.08
TXT Price adjustment:

    Operator or payment initiated control system under subclass 479.02 wherein
    the dispensing or vending system is capable of setting the operating
    parameter of cost.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    464.01, for a data processing system or calculating computer which is
    designed for or utilized in determining charges for goods or services, or
    is utilized for the solution of a problem in this area.


CLS 364/479.09
TXT Blending or mixing:

    Dispensing or vending under subclass 479.01 wherein an article or a number
    of articles are distributed in a sequential fashion or integrated according
    to a predetermined formula before dispensing occurs.


CLS 364/479.1
TXT Condition controlled dispensing (e.g., weight or volume):

    Dispensing or vending under subclass 479.01 wherein a specific article
    characteristic is the controlling variable for the regulation or management
    of the automatic allotment or discharge of the article.


CLS 364/479.11
TXT Central control of plural dispensing units:

    Dispensing or vending under subclass 479.01 wherein a plurality of
    dispensing or vending devices are regulated or managed by a host computer
    or data processing system.


CLS 364/479.12
TXT With particular supply arrangement (e.g., plural sources or compartments):

    Dispensing or vending under subclass 479.01 wherein a dispensing or vending
    device further comprises a housing or cartridge for the particular
    arrangement of the dispensed or vended article.


CLS 364/479.13
TXT Movable (e.g., rotatable):

    Particular supply arrangement under subclass 479.12 positionable relative
    to the dispensing or vending device.


CLS 364/479.14
TXT Monitoring or inspection:

    Dispensing or vending under subclass 479.01 wherein the data processing
    system or calculating computer supervises, examines, or detects a condition
    related to the article being vended or dispensed.


CLS 364/480
TXT Electrical/electronic engineering:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein the data processing system or
    calculating computer is designed for use in the fields of electricity and
    electronics or for the solution of a problem in this area.


CLS 364/481
TXT Measuring and testing:

    Subject matter under subclass 480 wherein the area of electrical/electronic
    engineering is measuring or testing of or for an electrical circuit,
    component, parameter or value.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    506     and 556, for the basic measurements of nonelectrical parameters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for the
    measuring or testing of electric properties.  When significant structure to
    the electrica measuring/testing device is claimed, classification is in
    Class 324.


CLS 364/482
TXT Impedance:

    Subject matter under subclass 481 wherein the area includes the measuring
    or testing of or for the opposition, a circuit offers to the flow of
    current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 600+ for impedance
    measuring.


CLS 364/483
TXT Voltage, current or power:

    Subject matter under subclass 481 wherein the area includes the measuring
    or testing of or for voltage, current or power.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclass 74 for watt-hour meters.


CLS 364/484
TXT Frequency:

    Subject matter under subclass 481 wherein the area includes the measuring
    or testing of at least one frequency of a waveform.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 76.39+ for the
    measuring of frequency.


CLS 364/485
TXT Frequency spectrum:

    Subject matter under subclass 484 wherein the waveform is complex and the
    frequency spectrum is determined or analyzed.


CLS 364/486
TXT Pulse:

    Subject matter under subclass 481 wherein the area includes measuring and
    testing of or for a value or parameter of the variation of a quantity
    characterized by a rise and decay of a finite duration.


CLS 364/487
TXT Waveform:

    Subject matter under subclass 481 wherein the area includes measuring and
    testing of or for a value or parameter of the shape of an electromagnetic
    wave.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 76.12+ for analysis
    of complex waves.


CLS 364/488
TXT Design and analysis:

    Subject matter under subclass 480 wherein the area of electrical/electronic
    engineering is the design and analysis of electrical components and
    circuits made up thereof.


CLS 364/489
TXT Circuits:

    Subject matter under subclass 488 wherein the components are electrical
    components interconnected into functional configurations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous nonlinear active device
    circuits.


CLS 364/490
TXT Integrated:

    Subject matter under subclass 489 wherein the circuits are a combination of
    interconnected circuit elements inseparably associated on or within a
    continuous substrate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses integrated circuit structure with active solid-state
    devices, subclasses 446 and 499+ for integrated circuit devices with
    electrically isolated components, in general, and other appropriate
    subclasses for specific type devices in integrated circuits.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, subclasses 128+ and
    598+ for methods of selectively interconnecting semiconductor barrier
    layer-type device arrays.


CLS 364/491
TXT Layout:

    Subject matter under subclass 490 wherein the area includes the design or
    analysis of the topological arrangement of conductors and components in an
    integrated circuit.


CLS 364/492
TXT Power generation or distribution:

    Subject matter under subclass 480 wherein the area of electrical/electronic
    engineering is the generation of electrical power or the distribution of
    electrical power through networks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems.


CLS 364/493
TXT Economic dispatching:

    Subject matter under subclass 492 wherein the area of power generation or
    distribution is the most economic manner of generating or distributing.


CLS 364/494
TXT Turbine or generator control:

    Subject matter under subclass 492 including the control of either a prime
    mover or a generator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems.


CLS 364/495
TXT With model:

    Subject matter under subclass 492 including the use of an electrical or
    mathematical model of the system.


CLS 364/496
TXT Chemical and engineering sciences:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein the data processing system or
    calculating computer is designed for use in chemistry, chemical engineering
    or other areas of engineering not provided elsewhere or for the solution of
    problems in these areas.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass area excludes chemical reactions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    425,    engineering of vehicles.

    468,    product manufacturing.

    478,    article handling for engineering within an application area not
    denominated as engineering.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    71,     Chemistry:  Fertilizers.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 10.12 and 375+ for processes for the production of
    metal or treatment of molten metal including process control responsive to
    a sensed condition.


    118,    Coating Apparatus.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing.

    504,    Plant Protecting and Regulating Compositions.


CLS 364/497
TXT Chemical analysis:

    Subject matter under subclass 496 wherein the area is the chemical analysis
    of a product or substance or element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, for processes of
    chemical analysis with significant claimed reactions which may include the
    use of a computer.


CLS 364/498
TXT Spectrum analysis (composition):

    Subject matter under subclass 497 wherein the chemical analysis is the
    analysis of substances or bodies through study of their spectra.


CLS 364/499
TXT Chemical property:

    Subject matter under subclass 497 wherein the chemical analysis is the
    analysis of substances or bodies through study of their chemical
    composition.


CLS 364/500
TXT Chemical process control:

    Subject matter under subclass 496 wherein the area is the control of a
    process of or having to do with manufacturing compositions of matter or
    elements.


CLS 364/501
TXT Distillation:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein the chemical process includes the
    process of first heating a mixture to separate more volatile from the less
    volatile parts, and the cooling and condensing the resulting vapor so as to
    produce a more nearly pure or refined substance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory.


CLS 364/502
TXT Physical mixing or separation:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein the chemical process includes the
    process of mixing two or more substances or the separation of one or more
    substance.


CLS 364/503
TXT Kilns:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein the chemical process includes a
    furnace or oven for drying, burning or baking a substance or body.


CLS 364/505
TXT Mechanical and civil engineering:

    Subject matter under subclass 496 wherein the data processing system or
    calculating computer is designed for use in the science concerning the
    motion of and action of forces on bodies and the design, construction,
    operation and care of mechanical processes or items or highways, bridges,
    tunnels, water-works, harbors, etc. or for the solution of a problem in
    these areas.


CLS 364/506
TXT Measuring or testing:

    Subject matter under subclass 505 wherein the area of mechanical and civil
    engineering is measuring or testing of or for a process, device or object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    481,    for measuring electrical properties

    556,    for basic measurements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses, for measuring or
    testing apparatuses or processes not found elsewhere.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 32 for material strain
    analysis; subclass 69 for cutting blade sharpness; subclass 371 for
    flatness of a material and subclass 237 for inspection for flaws or
    imperfections.


CLS 364/507
TXT Flaw or defect:

    Subject matter under subclass 506 for determining the existence or amount
    of flaw or defect.


CLS 364/508
TXT Stress, strain, or vibration:

    Subject matter under subclass 506 wherein the measuring or testing is to
    determine the existence or amount of stress, strain or vibration.


CLS 364/509
TXT Fluid:

    Subject matter under subclass 506 wherein the measuring or testing is done
    on a fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 152.18+ for fluid flow measuring
    and fluid analysis wherein the logging is not a purely electrical or a
    purely magnetic test.


CLS 364/510
TXT Fluid flow:

    Subject matter under subclass 509 wherein the quantity tested or measured
    is flow of a fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 152.18+ for fluid flow measuring
    and fluid analysis, especially subclass 152.42 for determining the relative
    proportion of a fluid constituent of the fluid wherein the analysis is not
    a purely electrical or a purely magnetic test.


CLS 364/511
TXT Power:

    Subject matter under subclass 506 wherein the measuring or testing is to
    determine existence or amount of power other than electrical power, e.g.,
    mechanical horse power.


CLS 364/512
TXT Structural design:

    Subject matter under subclass 505 wherein the area of mechanical and civil
    engineering is structural design.


CLS 364/524
TXT Physics:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein the data processing system or
    calculating computer is designed for or utilized in the science dealing
    with the properties, changes, interactions, etc., of matter and energy or
    for the solution of a problem in this area.


CLS 364/525
TXT Optics or photography:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 wherein the area of physics is that
    concerned with the nature and properties of light, vision or producing
    images upon a photosensitive surface by the chemical action of light or
    other radiant energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for photocell systems; subclass
    315.3 for electron radiography; subclass 316 for thermal pattern recording.

    346,    Recorders, subclasses 107.1+ for optical recorders for recording
    phenomenal information.

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, subclasses 224+ for
    apparatus and method for marking a medium using light or electron beam,
    subclasses 112+ for electrostatic marking, particularly subclasses 129+ for
    producing a charged  pattern  on a medium by scanning the medium with light
    emitted from a light source, and subclasses 121+ wherein the charged
    pattern is created by electron beam in an air tight envelope.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclass.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements,
    appropriate subclass.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclasses 4+ for computerized tomography.

    396,    Photography, appropriate subclass.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics and subclasses
    38+ for controls of the electrophotographic process, specifically, subclass
    77 for sequential control programming of machine operation.


CLS 364/526
TXT Color analysis:

    Subject matter under subclass 525 wherein the area is the analysis of light
    spectra.


CLS 364/527
TXT Atomic or nuclear physics:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 wherein a data processing system or a
    calculating computer is utilized in the study of subatomic particles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 251 for atomic beam devices; subclass 305
    for electron energy analysis; subclass 308 for  inspection of a material
    which includes a radioactive source; subclass 390 for neutron responsive
    means.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 61 for neutron
    generators or responsive devices.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes Systems, and Elements,
    subclasses 100+ for fusion reactions; subclasses 156+ for irradiation to
    produce a nonfission reaction; subclasses 245+ for testing or measuring
    nuclear reactor conditions; and subclasses 207+ for control of nuclear
    reactors.


CLS 364/550
TXT MEASURING, TESTING, OR MONITORING:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the data processing
    system or calculating computer is designed for or utilized in the
    indication of a condition relating to a measurement, analysis, or
    continuous detection.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses will accommodate devices,
    systems or processes which effect  "nominal" control which is incidental to
    the measuring, testing or monitoring.

    (2)     Note.  Where significant structure of an external device or
    quantity is recited by a claim, classification is in the appropriate device
    class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    481+,   for measuring of electrical properties.

    506+,   for measuring of mechanical engineering type properties.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing.


CLS 364/551.01
TXT Measuring and evaluating (e.g., performance):

    Subject matter under subclass 550 wherein there is a detection of a
    quantity over a period and assessment of the quantity detected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    571.01+, for systems providing correction or
      compensation based on evaluation of
      measurement data.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    701,    Data Processing, Navigation, and Relative Location, subclasses 29+
    for systems directed to vehicle maintenance and 99+ for systems directed to
    evaluating engine performance.


CLS 364/551.02
TXT Of machine tool:

    Subject matter under subclass 551.01 which measures and evaluates a
    machine-driven implement, per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    474.17+, for machining systems in which the detected tool condition effects
    a control change.


CLS 364/552
TXT Quality control determinations:

    Subject matter under subclass 551.01 related to procedures, inspections,
    examinations, and tests required during procurement, production, receipt,
    storage and issue that are necessary to provide the user with an item of
    the required quality.


CLS 364/553
TXT Transfer function evaluation:

    Subject matter under subclass 551.01 for assessment of the relationship
    between physical conditions at two different points in time or space in a
    given system which may also describe the role played by the intervening
    time or space.


CLS 364/554
TXT Statistical data (e.g., stochastic variable):

    Subject matter under subclass 551.01 for assessment of events, occurring
    randomly or by chance.


CLS 364/555
TXT Particle count, distribution, size:

    Subject matter under the subclass 551.01 for the enumeration of particles
    and the evaluation of the properties of particles such as size, spatial
    dispersion, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 10 for particle counting, per se.


CLS 364/556
TXT For basic measurements:

    Subject matter under subclass 550 for fundamental measurements.


CLS 364/557
TXT Temperature:

    Subject matter under subclass 556 for measuring thermal quantities.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclasses 205+ for
    thermocouples and subclass 213 for radiation pyrometers.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 31+ for a calorimeter and
    subclasses 100+ for a thermometer.


CLS 364/558
TXT Pressure or density:

    Subject matter under subclass 556 for measuring the force per unit area or
    mass per unit volume of a substance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 32+ for the density of a solid or
    liquid; subclass 37 for fluid pressure and subclasses 700+ for fluid
    pressure gauges.


CLS 364/559
TXT Orientation:

    Subject matter under subclass 556 for measuring the spatial relationship of
    an object with respect to a reference axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 138 for axial alignment
    and subclasses 399+ for alignment in lateral direction.


CLS 364/560
TXT Dimension:

    Subject matter under subclass 556 for evaluating a measurement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, appropriate subclass for geometrically
    measuring a dimension or distance.


CLS 364/561
TXT Distance:

    Subject matter under subclass 560 wherein the measurement is the distance
    between two or more points.


CLS 364/562
TXT Length or height:

    Subject matter under subclass 561 wherein the measurement is made along a
    straight line which contains the points.


CLS 364/563
TXT Width or thickness:

    Subject matter under subclass 561 wherein the points lie in a line
    generally perpendicular to a reference surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 559.01+ for photocell systems which
    detect web, strand, strip or sheet materials.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 429+ for monitoring of
    webs.


CLS 364/564
TXT Area or volume:

    Subject matter under subclass 560 wherein the linear measurement is the
    product of a plurality of dimensions.


CLS 364/565
TXT Rate of change of dimension (e.g., speed):

    Subject matter under subclass 556 for evaluating the rate of change per
    unit of time of a given dimension.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 383+ for measuring speed.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 160 for electrical
    speed measuring.


CLS 364/566
TXT Acceleration and further derivatives:

    Subject matter under subclass 556 for evaluating the second or higher order
    derivatives of the function of dimension with respect to time.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 383+ for measuring acceleration.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 162 for electrically
    measuring of acceleration.


CLS 364/567
TXT Weight:

    Subject matter under subclass 556 for measuring the force an object exerts
    due to gravity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclasses 3 and 25.11+ for weighing devices which
    include claimed structure details to the weighing means.


CLS 364/568
TXT Basis weight:

    Subject matter under subclass 567 for evaluating the weight per unit area.


CLS 364/569
TXT Time or time intervals:

    Subject matter under subclass 556 for evaluating one or more periods of
    duration or the duration between given events.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 181+ for electrical
    time-interval measuring.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 139+ for
    mechanical timepieces.


CLS 364/570
TXT Operations performed:

    Subject matter under subclass 550 where there is significant recitation of
    the particular manner in which the measuring, testing or monitoring is
    accomplished.


CLS 364/571.01
TXT Calibration or compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 570 for determining the accuracy or operating
    characteristics of a measuring device or producing true measurement data
    from initial measurement data.

    (1)     Note.  The true measurement data may be represented by the amount
    of adjustment needed to the initial measurement data.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 870.04 and 870.05 for
    telemetering of information with calibration or calculation means,
    respectively.  For classification herein, specific structure to the
    telemetering means must be claimed.


CLS 364/571.02
TXT Having mathematical operation on initial measurement data:

    Subject matter under subclass 571.01 in which the true measurement data is
    derived from a mathematical function on the initial measurement data.


CLS 364/571.03
TXT Including environmental factors (e.g., temperature):

    Subject matter under subclass 571.02 where ambient data is utilized to
    compensate initial data.

    (1)     Note.  This includes temperature, barometric pressure, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    556+,   for the measurement, per se, of basic quantities such as dimension,
    temperature, or pressure.


CLS 364/571.04
TXT Including predetermined stored data:

    Subject matter under subclass 571.02 where data previously stored in a
    memory is included.


CLS 364/571.05
TXT Using difference involving initial measurement data:

    Subject matter under subclass 571.02 where the offset between two
    successive initial measurements or an initial measurement and a standard is
    utilized to a compensate initial data.


CLS 364/571.06
TXT Using analog calculating elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 571.02 where the true measurement data is
    generated by elements having nondiscrete input and output values.


CLS 364/571.07
TXT By table look-up:

    Subject matter under subclass 571.01 in which the initial measurement data
    is used in a specified manner to obtain the true measurement data
    previously stored in a memory.


CLS 364/571.08
TXT Using operator provided data:

    Subject matter under subclass 571.01 where manually provided data is used
    in generating or deriving the true measurement data.


CLS 364/572
TXT Filtering:

    Subject matter under subclass 570 wherein the operation performed is the
    selection or removal of signal or data components in accordance with
    specified criteria.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    724.011+, for digital filtering.

    825,    for analog filtering.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 167+ for nonactive
    wave filters.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 307 for radio receiver band pass
    filter means.


CLS 364/573
TXT Linearization:

    Subject matter under subclass 570 wherein the operation performed is
    establishing a first degree relationship between two variables.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    700+    and 800+, for digital or analog linearization means, respectively.


CLS 364/574
TXT Noise reduction:

    Subject matter under subclass 570 wherein the operation performed is the
    lessening of the effects of any disturbance tending to interfere with the
    normal operation of the system.

    (1)     Note.  Search the particular art device for noise reduction
    peculiar to the specific art device.


CLS 364/575
TXT Averaging:

    Subject matter under subclass 570 wherein the operation performed is
    determining a single value (mean, mode, median) that summarizes or
    represents the general significance of a set of unequal values.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    734,    for digital averaging means.

    811,    for analog averaging means.


CLS 364/576
TXT Fourier analysis:

    Subject matter under subclass 570 wherein there is a transformation of data
    between the time domain or space domain and the frequency domain.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    726.01+ and 827, respectively, for digital or analog Fourier transformation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 76.12+ for analysis
    of complex waves.


CLS 364/577
TXT Interpolation/extrapolation:

    Subject matter under subclass 570 wherein there is an estimation of a value
    of a variable between or beyond two known values.


CLS 364/578
TXT Simulation or modeling:

    Subject matter under subclass 570 wherein a system or process is
    represented by an electrical model of the system or process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    801,    for electrical analog simulators.


CLS 364/579
TXT With control of testing or measuring apparatus:

    Subject matter under subclass 570 with control of the testing, measuring or
    monitoring apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass will accommodate only nominal control.  For
    generic control systems, see subclasses 130+.


CLS 364/580
TXT Programmed testing conditions:

    Subject matter under subclass 570 wherein the testing, measuring or
    monitoring is done under the control of a sequence of instructions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    760.01, for programmable calculators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclasses 73.1+ for various
    electrical parameter testing methods and apparatus including plural
    automated tests.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 201+ for
    memory testing.


CLS 364/581
TXT Weighting:

    Subject matter under subclass 570 wherein the operation performed is the
    artificial adjustment of measurements in order to account for factors which
    would differ during normal use of a device from the conditions during
    measurement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    700+    and 800+, for digital or analog weighting factors, respectively.


CLS 364/582
TXT Normalization:

    Subject matter under subclass 570 wherein the operation performed is the
    transforming of signals to a common basis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    700+    and 800+, for digital or analog normalization factors, respectively.


CLS 364/600
TXT ELECTRIC HYBRID COMPUTER:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a calculation is
    performed either simultaneously or sequentially upon at least one analog
    and at least one digital signal or wherein either the analog or digital
    signal is involved in a calculation operation on the other signal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include the mere conversion from one
    signal format to another, which conversion has no part in the above
    calculation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    700,    for electric digital calculating computers.

    800,    for electric analog computers.


CLS 364/601
TXT Plural complete computers:

    Subject matter under subclass 600 which includes at least one complete
    analog computer and one complete digital computer.


CLS 364/602
TXT Specialized function performed:

    Subject matter under subclass 600 directed to specialized functions
    performed by hybrid computers or subcombinations thereof in making
    computations.

    (1)     Note.  For classification herein, the function performed must be
    significantly claimed in making a computation.


CLS 364/603
TXT Evaluation of trigonometric functions:

    Subject matter under subclass 602 wherein the function performed is the
    processing of signal to either determine a trigonometric relationship or to
    operate on a signal in accordance with a trigonometric relationship.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    729     and 817+, for electrical digital or electrical analog computers
    which perform the function of evaluation of trigonometric functions.


CLS 364/604
TXT Correlation, convolution, or transformation:

    Subject matter under subclass 602 wherein the function performed is
    cross-correlation, autocorrelation, cross-convolution, autoconvolution or
    transforming a given representation of a data signal to another
    representation without loss of information by an orthogonal transformation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    725.01+, 728.01+, 728.03+, 819+, and 826+, for electrical digital or analog
    computers which perform the function of correlation, convolution or
    transformation.


CLS 364/605
TXT Integration or differentiation:

    Subject matter under subclass 602 wherein the function performed is
    integration or differentiation of at least one of a plurality of input
    signals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    732     and 733, for electrical digital calculating computers.

    828     and 829, for electrical analog computers which perform
    differentiation and integration, respectively.


CLS 364/606
TXT Multiplication or division:

    Subject matter under subclass 602 wherein the function performed is
    multiplication or division to produce a product or quotient from at least
    two input signals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    754.01+ and 761+, for electrical digital computers for performing the
    function of multiplication or division.

    841+    and 850, for electrical analog computers for performing the
    function of multiplication or division.


CLS 364/607
TXT Function generation:

    Subject matter under subclass 602 wherein the function performed is the
    generation of at least one signal by mathematical operation or as part of a
    mathematical operation generates a signal representing a function of at
    least one variable input parameter.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes waveform synthesizers wherein the
    waveform is internally generated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    718.01+ and 851+, for electrical digital or electrical analog computers
    which perform the function of function generation.


CLS 364/608
TXT Piece-wise linear synthesis:

    Subject matter under subclass 607 wherein the desired function is
    approximated by a series of segments of straight lines.


CLS 364/700
TXT ELECTRIC DIGITAL CALCULATING COMPUTER:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a calculation is
    performed upon discrete electrical signals representing a value normally
    described by numerical digits.

    (1)     Note.  The calculations include arithmetic and related logic
    operations.  A related logic operation is one that is associated with
    arithmetic computations.

    (2)     Note.  Discrete signals are discontinuous signals which can assume
    only a finite number of states.

    (3)     Note.  Numerical digits are symbols that represent a specific
    quantity or amount of units.

    (4)     Note.  The value described includes a value represented by a pulse
    repetition rate.

    (5)     Note.  Devices which are claimed as digital computers or
    calculators but do not recite in the claim some type of computational means
    or steps are excluded from this subclass area and are classified with the
    Miscellaneous Digital Data Processing Systems, if the operations performed
    are processing data.


CLS 364/701
TXT Pulse repetition rate:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein quantities are determinable from
    the pulse repetition frequency of the discrete electrical signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for this subject matter utilized in a control system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 144+ for digital to
    analog converters which convert a coded electrical signal to one of related
    pulse repetition frequency.


CLS 364/702
TXT Digital differential analyzer:

    Subject matter under subclass 701 utilized as a digital differential
    analyzer.


CLS 364/703
TXT Multiplication or division:

    Subject matter under subclass 701 wherein the operation performed on an
    electrical signal is multiplication or division.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 113+ for miscellaneous frequency control.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, for pulse dividing and multiplying circuits.


CLS 364/704
TXT Plural complete computers:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 which includes at least two complete
    digital computers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    for plural programmable computers used in a control system.


CLS 364/705.01
TXT Combined with diverse art device:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 which includes a diverse art device
    having a noncalculating function, with common structure utilized in
    performing the calculating and the noncalculating functions, or an
    integrated unit into which the computer and diverse art device are embodied.

    (1)     Note.  Search the art area of the diverse device for the details of
    the diverse device which are claimed.


CLS 364/705.02
TXT Checkbook:

    Subject matter under subclass 705.01 where the diverse device is a
    checkbook.


CLS 364/705.03
TXT Writing instruments (e.g., pen):

    Subject matter under subclass 705.01 where the diverse device is utilized
    for hand-held marking purposes.


CLS 364/705.04
TXT Tape recorder:

    Subject matter under subclass 705.01 where the diverse device is a tape
    recorder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, appropriate
    subclasses, for detail of a magnetic tape recorder, per se.


CLS 364/705.05
TXT Communication device (e.g., telephone, radio, television):

    Subject matter under subclass 705.01 where the diverse device transfers
    information between distant points.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclass 110.01 for particular
    telephonic substation structure combined with a calculator.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 344+ for particular receiver or
    analog modulated signal frequency converter structure combined with a
    calculator.


CLS 364/705.06
TXT Business device (e.g., billing, memorandum):

    Subject matter under subclass 705.01 where the diverse device is used in
    the conducting of trade.

    (1)     Note.  Typical of subject matter found here would be a calculator
    of generic utility combined with a customer billing device.


CLS 364/705.07
TXT Horological device:

    Subject matter under subclass 705.01 where the diverse device measures or
    indicates time.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclass 10 for a
    nominal digital calculating computer in combination with a horological
    device.


CLS 364/705.08
TXT Calendar:

    Subject matter under subclass 705.07 where the horological device provides
    indication of a day of the week or a date.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 28+ for a
    calendar indicator, per se.


CLS 364/706
TXT Programmable calculator:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 which includes a calculator that is
    programmable.

    (1)     Note.  Calculator does not include general purpose computers but is
    restricted to the limited capacity calculator such as desk calculator or a
    pocket calculator.


CLS 364/707
TXT With power saving feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein there is included a power saving
    or conserving feature.


CLS 364/708.1
TXT With specialized housing or casing:
    Subject matter under subclass 700 for specialized housing or casing means
    in conjunction with calculating means.

    (1)     Note.  For classification herein, the calculating means must be a
    significant component of the claimed invention.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 679+ for
    support equipment and housings having computer or computer related
    equipment without structural detail or particular equipment description of
    computer or computer related equipment.


CLS 364/709.01
TXT With specialized input:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 with specialized input in conjunction
    with calculation portion.

    (1)     Note.  For classification herein, the calculating portion must be a
    significant component and the input to the calculating portion must be more
    than nominally recited.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 5 for a
    multiple switch assembly, per se.

    235,    Registers, subclasses 145+ for keyboards.

    341,    Coded Data Generation and Conversion, subclasses 22+ for a keyboard
    controlled code transmitting device.

    348,    Television, subclass 552 for video input devices for computers.


CLS 364/709.02
TXT Having supplemental environment related input:

    Subject matter under subclass 709.01 where input unique to a particular art
    area can be provided in addition to normal calculator input.

    (1)     Note.  Typically found here is non- numeric environment related
    input.


CLS 364/709.03
TXT Cooking:

    Subject matter under subclass 709.02 where the supplemental input relates
    to the preparation of food for consumption.

    (1)     Note.  Typical of subject matter found here is nonnumeric input
    designating a particular food to be cooked.


CLS 364/709.04
TXT Business:

    Subject matter under subclass 709.02 where the supplemental input relates
    to the conduct of trade.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 201+ for
    data processing systems exclusively designed for or utilized in a business
    environment.


CLS 364/709.05
TXT For security:

    Subject matter under subclass 709.01 where a specialized input controls
    accessing of the calculating computer.


CLS 364/709.06
TXT Input verification:

    Subject matter under subclass 709.01 where the specialized input provides a
    check of intended versus actual input.


CLS 364/709.07
TXT Fraction input:

    Subject matter under subclass 709.01 where the specialized input permits
    entry of a fraction.


CLS 364/709.08
TXT Flexible input:

    Subject matter under subclass 709.01 in which some portion of the input is
    made nonrigid to facilitate data entry.


CLS 364/709.09
TXT Including specific computing system interconnection:

    Subject matter under subclass 709.01 for specific structure within the
    specialized input serving as an interface between the device actually
    manipulated by the operator and computing circuitry.

    (1)     Note.  Included here would be keyboard input which includes
    specific structure linking the keyboard, per se, with computing circuitry,
    for example.


CLS 364/709.1
TXT Modular or overlay:

    Subject matter under subclass 709.01 where plug-in modules or overlays are
    utilized to effect data input.


CLS 364/709.11
TXT Including specific nonkeyboard-type information entry:

    Subject matter under subclass 709.01 where information ultimately conveyed
    to the calculating portion is produced by a particular device not having
    plural individually actuatable keys.


CLS 364/709.12
TXT Including specific keyboard-type information entry:

    Subject matter under subclass 709.01 where information ultimately conveyed
    to the calculating portion is produced by a particular device having plural
    individually actuatable keys.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or  Conversion, subclasses 22+ for a keyboard
    controlled code transmitting device.


CLS 364/709.13
TXT Nonmechanical key actuation:

    Subject matter under subclass 709.12 where input keys are operated by other
    than a push and release sequence (e.g., magnetic activation).


CLS 364/709.14
TXT User definable key:

    Subject matter under subclass 709.12 in which the user defines the function
    associated with a keyboard key.


CLS 364/709.15
TXT Plural function key:

    Subject matter under subclass 709.12 where a keyboard key has plurality of
    selectable predetermined functions associated with it.


CLS 364/709.16
TXT Key sequencing (i.e., sequence defines function):

    Subject matter under subclass 709.12 where the order in which a plurality
    of keys is actuated determines the function to be performed.


CLS 364/710.01
TXT With specialized output:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 with specialized output in conjunction
    with calculating portion.

    (1)     Note.  For classification herein, the calculating portion must be a
    significant component and the output from the calculating portion must be
    more than nominally recited.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communication:  Electrical, subclasses 815.4+ for visual indicators.


CLS 364/710.02
TXT Having supplemental environment related output:

    Subject matter under subclass 710.01 where output unique to a particular
    art area can be provided in addition to normal calculator output.

    (1)     Note.  Typically found here is non- numeric environment related
    input.


CLS 364/710.03
TXT Teaching:

    Subject matter under subclass 710.02 where the supplemental output relates
    to education.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    434,    Education and Demonstration, appropriate subclasses for
    instructional devices, per se.


CLS 364/710.04
TXT Business:

    Subject matter under subclass 710.02 where the supplemental output relates
    to the conduct of trade.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 201+ for
    data processing systems exclusively designed for or utilized in a business
    environment.


CLS 364/710.05
TXT Output verification:

    Subject matter under subclass 710.01 in which the output is provided in a
    form permitting checking thereof (e.g., trace).


CLS 364/710.06
TXT Blanking:

    Subject matter under subclass 710.01 where the specialized output has
    provision for suppressing a selected portion of the output.


CLS 364/710.07
TXT Prompting:

    Subject matter under subclass 710.01 where the specialized output provides
    the user with guidance regarding future information entry.


CLS 364/710.08
TXT Selective output:

    Subject matter under subclass 710.01 where the specialized output permits
    choosing the desired output from a plurality of candidates.


CLS 364/710.09
TXT Sequential output:

    Subject matter under subclass 710.01 where the specialized output provides
    successive portions of a desired output one at a time.


CLS 364/710.1
TXT Using particular format:

    Subject matter under subclass 710.01 where the specialized output provides
    the output in a specified form.

    (1)     Note.  The particular format might be engineering notation or
    floating point, for example.


CLS 364/710.11
TXT Symbol accompanying output:

    Subject matter under subclass 710.01 in which the specialized output
    provides a special symbol with the output representation.


CLS 364/710.12
TXT Audio:

    Subject matter under subclass 710.01 where the specialized output is in
    audible form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or  Conversion, subclasses 22+ for a keyboard
    controlled code transmitting device.


CLS 364/710.13
TXT Printer:

    Subject matter under subclass 710.01 in which the specialized output
    provides the output representation in permanent readable form.


CLS 364/710.14
TXT Multiple simultaneous outputs:

    Subject matter under subclass 710.01 where a plurality of output
    representations are made available by the specialized output at the same
    time.


CLS 364/711
TXT Zero suppression:

    Subject matter under subclass 710.06 wherein the blanking means has zero
    suppression capability.


CLS 364/712
TXT Integrated circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein the calculating is effected by
    integrated circuits or chips, the use or specific structure or arrangement
    of which significantly affects or directs the handling of information.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses for integrated circuit structure with active
    solid-state devices, subclasses 446 and 499+ for integrated circuit devices
    with electrically isolated components, in general, and other appropriate
    subclasses for specific type devices in integrated circuits.

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 101+ for electronic
    logic with significant integrated structure.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 564+ for miscellaneous circuits with integrated
    structure.


CLS 364/713
TXT Electro-optical:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein the calculating is effected by
    electro-optical devices.


CLS 364/714
TXT Bubble-domain:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein the calculating is effected by
    bubble-domain devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 1+ for
    magnetic bubble-domain devices used for storage of information.


CLS 364/715.011
TXT Specialized function performed:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 having specialized function involving a
    calculation performed by digital computer or subcombination thereof.

    (1)     Note. For classification herein, the calculating performed in
    effecting the function must be significantly claimed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 800 for
    particular processing architecture which could be utilized in performing
    the specialized function.


CLS 364/715.012
TXT Absolute value or magnitude:

    Subject matter under subclass 715.011 wherein the specialized function is
    to determine the absolute value or magnitude of a result from an arithmetic
    operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 354 for a specific input-to- output function performed by
    an absolute value.


CLS 364/715.013
TXT Median:

    Subject matter under subclass 715.011 wherein the specialized function is
    the middle value in a series.


CLS 364/715.02
TXT Compression/decompression:

    Subject matter under subclass 715.011 for representing a number or group of
    numbers by a smaller number of digits than that possessed originally or the
    inverse operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    382,    Image Analysis, subclasses 232+ for data compression in an image
    processing system.


CLS 364/715.03
TXT Format conversion:

    Subject matter under subclass 715.011 for changing a number having a
    representation in one form to a representation in another form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 310+ for data converters.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or  Conversion, subclasses 50+ for
    digital-to-digital converters.


CLS 364/715.04
TXT Normalization:

    Subject matter under subclass 715.03 in which the number in final form
    includes a single nonzero digit to the left of the radix point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    748,    for floating point systems.


CLS 364/715.05
TXT Unit conversion:

    Subject matter under subclass 715.011 where a number reflecting a first
    system of measurement is changed to reflect a second system of measurement.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are such conversions as English to metric.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 310+ for data conversion.


CLS 364/715.06
TXT Maximum/minimum determination:

    Subject matter under subclass 715.011 in which the largest or smallest of a
    group of numbers is found.


CLS 364/715.07
TXT Scaling:

    Subject matter under subclass 715.011 where a number is modified by a
    predetermined multiplicative factor.


CLS 364/715.08
TXT Shifting:

    Subject matter under subclass 715.011 where a number is changed by moving
    each digit therein simultaneously a specified number of positions in a
    specified direction.

    (1)     Note.  Digits that are shifted beyond the confines of the number
    may or may not be recirculated into the opposite end of the number.  Fixed
    digits may be inserted there instead.


CLS 364/715.09
TXT Determining number of like-valued bits in word:

    Subject matter under subclass 715.011 where the number of 1's or the number
    of 0's in a binary word is determined.


CLS 364/715.1
TXT Determining number of like-valued leading or trailing bits:

    Subject matter under subclass 715.011 where the number of consecutive
    leading or trailing 1's or 0's in a binary word is determined.


CLS 364/715.11
TXT Detecting particular sequence of bits:

    Subject matter under subclass 715.011 for locating a particular string of
    bits in a larger string of bits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 354+ for synchronizers,
    per se.


CLS 364/716.01
TXT Multifunctional:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein the electric digital calculating
    computer provides for selectively performing at least one logical operation
    as well as at least one arithmetical operation relative to operands (e.g.,
    a programmable logic circuit with computational means).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 407+
    for nonlinear reactor logic circuits.

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 37+ for programmable
    logic circuits not performing arithmetic calculations and which are
    typically solid state.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclasses
    for programmable logic circuits which include storage and retrieval of
    information.


CLS 364/716.02
TXT Microprocessor:

    Subject matter under subclass 716.01 wherein the multifunctional operation
    is performed by a microprocessor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    724.013,        for a particular microprocessor used in the filtering
    operation.

    748.16, for a particular microprocessor used in the floating point.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 800 for
    particular processing architecture.


CLS 364/716.03
TXT Array of elements (e.g., AND/OR array, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 716.01 wherein the multifunctional operation
    is performed by a group of many similar, basic, complex, or integrated
    elements without separated enclosures, such as AND/OR arrays, etc.


CLS 364/716.04
TXT Pipeline:

    Subject matter under subclass 716.01 wherein the multifunctional operation
    is performed in a pipeline, the output of one task as input to another
    until a desired sequence of tasks has been carried out.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    726.04, for Fourier transformation performed in a particular pipeline.

    736.05, for arithmetical operation performed in a particular pipeline.

    748.14, for floating point performed in a particular pipeline.

    760.04, for complex number format performed in a particular pipeline.


CLS 364/716.05
TXT Parallel bit input of operand:

    Subject matter under subclass 716.01 wherein the multifunctional operation
    is performed in bit level and the bits of operands are input in parallel.


CLS 364/716.06
TXT Uses look-up table:

    Subject matter under subclass 716.01 wherein the operation involves a
    look-up table to search for a desired item of information.


CLS 364/716.07
TXT More than two operands:

    Subject matter under subclass 716.01 wherein the operations involve three
    or more operands.


CLS 364/717.01
TXT Random number generation:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein the computer generates a number
    or sequence of numbers characterized by unpredictability so that no number
    is any more likely to occur at a given time or place in the sequence than
    any other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 164 for a miscellaneous circuit producing a rectangular
    waveform having a random characteristic (e.g., random width).

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 78 for electrical noise or random wave
    generation by oscillators (e.g., random pulse generators).


CLS 364/717.02
TXT Oscillator controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 717.01 wherein the generation is effected by
    an oscillator or clock.


CLS 364/717.03
TXT Linear feedback shift register:

    Subject matter under subclass 717.01 wherein the generation is performed by
    a feedback shift register in which a proportional relationship exists
    between an input and output.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, appropriate subclasses for a shift register, per se.


CLS 364/717.04
TXT Plural parallel output bits:

    Subject matter under subclass 717.01 wherein the generation produces plural
    bits of a sequence in parallel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    717.07, for plural parallel outputs.


CLS 364/717.05
TXT SEED value controls:

    Subject matter under subclass 717.01 wherein a SEED value is used as an
    initial value in the generation.


CLS 364/717.06
TXT Truly random number:

    Subject matter under subclass 717.01 wherein the generation produces a
    random sequence which is not repeated.


CLS 364/717.07
TXT Plural parallel outputs:

    Subject matter under subclass 717.01 wherein the generation produces plural
    sequences in parallel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    717.04, for plural parallel output bits.


CLS 364/718.01
TXT Function generation:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein a sequence of discrete values is
    generated to represent a desired waveform.


CLS 364/718.02
TXT Direct digital frequency synthesizer:

    Subject matter under subclass 718.01 wherein the generation is performed by
    a digital frequency source capable of producing a multitude of output
    frequencies from the desired frequency of the waveform.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 105+ for a synthesizer converting, shaping, or
    generating a nonlinear signal.


CLS 364/718.03
TXT Memory used to store waveshape:

    Subject matter under subclass 718.01 wherein a circuit allows a waveshape
    to be stored and retrieved for generating the waveform.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 106 for waveform or waveshape determinative circuits.


CLS 364/718.04
TXT Counter as source (i.e., input):

    Subject matter under subclass 718.01 wherein a circuit  counts input pulses
    for producing phase increments as a source.


CLS 364/719
TXT Linear:

    Subject matter under subclass 718.01 where the desired waveform is linear.


CLS 364/720
TXT Circular:

    Subject matter under subclass 718.01 where the desired waveform represents
    circular relationships.


CLS 364/721
TXT Trigonometric:

    Subject matter under subclass 718.01 where the desired waveform has
    trigonometric relationships.


CLS 364/722
TXT Logarithmic/exponential:

    Subject matter under subclass 718.01 where the desired waveform is
    logarithmic or exponential.


CLS 364/723
TXT Interpolation/extrapolation:

    Subject matter under subclass 715.011 for the determination or estimation
    of a value or values of a function between two known values or of the trend
    established between two or more known points.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    577,    for interpolation in measuring, testing or monitoring system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 573 for interpolation
    in positional servo systems.


CLS 364/724.011
TXT Filtering:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein a computational process or
    algorithm separates data, signals, or materials in accordance with
    specified criteria.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    572,    for use in a measuring, testing, or monitoring system.

    574,    for noise reduction in a measuring, testing, or  monitoring system.


    825,    for analog computer filtering.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 551+ for miscellaneous unwanted signal suppression
    utilizing an active filter circuit not performing an arithmetic
    calculation.


CLS 364/724.012
TXT Tapped delay line:

    Subject matter under subclass 724.011 wherein a delay line, in which more
    than two terminal pairs are associated with a single delay channel, is used
    to provide delayed signals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    724.16, for transversal filtering.


CLS 364/724.013
TXT Microprocessor:

    Subject matter under subclass 724.011 wherein the filtering is performed by
    a microprocessor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    716.02, for a particular microprocessor used in the multifunctional
    operation.

    748.16, for a particular microprocessor used in the floating point.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 800 for
    particular processing architecture.


CLS 364/724.014
TXT Nonlinear (e.g., median, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 724.011 wherein the relationship between the
    pertinent measures of the input and output signals cannot be adequately
    described by linear means (e.g., median filter).


CLS 364/724.02
TXT Initialization:

    Subject matter under subclass 724.011 where the filter is placed in a
    beginning state prior to the actual processing.


CLS 364/724.03
TXT Finite arithmetic effects:

    Subject matter under subclass 724.011 for indication or compensation of
    effects arising from the use of operands having a finite length
    representation.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are such effects as overflow, underflow and
    oscillation.


CLS 364/724.04
TXT Delta/differential coded:

    Subject matter under subclass 724.011 in which the samples used in
    processing are present in the delta or differential coded format.


CLS 364/724.05
TXT Multi-dimensional data:

    Subject matter under subclass 724.011 where the data to be processed is
    multi-dimensional (e.g., image data).


CLS 364/724.06
TXT Frequency measurement:

    Subject matter under subclass 724.011 where frequency determination is
    accomplished by first removing from a signal corrupting noise which was
    imposed by a transmission medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    484,    for electrical frequency measurement, per se.


CLS 364/724.07
TXT Coherent:

    Subject matter under subclass 724.011 where a particular frequency is
    eliminated from a signal.


CLS 364/724.08
TXT Frequency detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 724.011 in which a subset of frequencies from
    a known set of possible frequencies is determined to be present.


CLS 364/724.09
TXT Tone detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 724.08 where the subset consists of a single
    frequency.


CLS 364/724.1
TXT Decimation/interpolation:

    Subject matter under subclass 724.011 where the filter deletes from or adds
    to the samples input to it in a specified regular fashion resulting in a
    net sampling rate change.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    723,    for interpolation, per se.


CLS 364/724.11
TXT Matched filter type:

    Subject matter under subclass 724.011 for maximizing the signal-to-noise
    ratio through the use of filters utilizing correlation techniques.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclass 343 for pulse
    demodulation or detection by matched filters.


CLS 364/724.12
TXT By convolution:

    Subject matter under subclass 724.011 in which a convolution technique is
    utilized to accomplish the filtering.


CLS 364/724.13
TXT With multiplexing:

    Subject matter under subclass 724.011 where one of a plurality of signals
    is selected and processed by a given filter or one of a plurality of
    filters is selected to process a given signal.


CLS 364/724.14
TXT Wave:

    Subject matter under subclass 724.011 in which the filter has elements
    representing distributed parameters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 202+ for analog
    wave filters.


CLS 364/724.15
TXT Lattice:

    Subject matter under subclass 724.011, in which the filter has four
    computational or delay elements connected in series to form a closed
    circuit with two nonadjacent ports serving as the input terminals with the
    other two ports serving as output terminals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 169 for analog
    lattice filters.


CLS 364/724.16
TXT Transversal:

    Subject matter under subclass 724.011 where the taps of a digital delay
    element are individually weighted and then summed to produce the filter
    output.


CLS 364/724.17
TXT Recursive:

    Subject matter under subclass 724.011 in which the present filter output is
    a function of present inputs and past filter outputs.


CLS 364/724.18
TXT Nontime domain:

    Subject matter under subclass 724.011 where the data when processed is not
    in the time domain.

    (1)     Note.  Frequently this data is in the frequency domain.


CLS 364/724.19
TXT Adaptive:

    Subject matter under subclass 724.011 where the transfer function of the
    filter is automatically changed as a function of the input signal.


CLS 364/724.2
TXT Equalizer:

    Subject matter under subclass 724.19 where adaptive compensation for
    transmission medium noise imposition is performed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 229+ for equalizers in
    a digital communications system.


CLS 364/725.01
TXT Transform:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein the digital calculation performs
    a transformation of a given representation of a data signal to another
    representation without loss of information by an orthogonal transformation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 2.12 for
    speech signal processing.


CLS 364/725.02
TXT Multi-dimensional:

    Subject matter under subclass 725.01 including a specific apparatus which
    is used for computing an n-dimensional transform of an input signal with n
    greater or equal to two.


CLS 364/725.03
TXT Discrete Cosine Transform (i.e., DCT):

    Subject matter under subclass 725.01 wherein the transformation performed
    is a Discrete Cosine Transform.


CLS 364/726.01
TXT Fourier:

    Subject matter under subclass 725.01 wherein the transformation performed
    is a mathematical operation which decomposes a time varying signal into its
    complex frequency components (amplitude and the phase or real and imaginary
    components).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    382,    Image Analysis, subclass 280 for a Fourier transform performed on
    image data.


CLS 364/726.02
TXT Fast Fourier Transform (i.e., FFT):

    Subject matter under subclass 726.01 wherein the transformation performed
    is a Fast Fourier Transform.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    726.03, for Discrete Fourier Transform.


CLS 364/726.03
TXT Discrete Fourier Transform (i.e., DFT):

    Subject matter under subclass 726.01 wherein the transformation performed
    is a Discrete Fourier Transform.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    726.02, for Fast Fourier Transform.


CLS 364/726.04
TXT Pipeline:

    Subject matter under subclass 726.01 wherein the transformation performed
    by a specific apparatus in passing the output of one task as input to
    another until desired sequence of tasks has been carried out.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    716.04, for multifunctional operation performed in a particular pipeline.

    736.05, for arithmetical operation performed in a particular pipeline.

    748.14, for floating point performed in a particular pipeline.

    760.04, for complex number format performed in a particular pipeline.


CLS 364/726.05
TXT Systolic:

    Subject matter under subclass 726.01 wherein the transformation is
    performed by a specific apparatus having an array of computational elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    736.06, for a particular systolic array used in an arithmetical operation.

    748.15, for a particular systolic array used in a floating point.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 800 for
    systolic array processor architecture.


CLS 364/726.06
TXT Radix greater than two:

    Subject matter under subclass 726.01 wherein a specific apparatus is used
    for computing an n-radix Fourier Transform with n greater than two.


CLS 364/726.07
TXT Butterfly circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 726.01 wherein a specific apparatus performs
    a complex multiplication and a complex addition or subtraction.


CLS 364/727.01
TXT Walsh:

    Subject matter under subclass 725.01 wherein the transformation performed
    is a Walsh Transform.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    382,    Image Analysis, subclass 281 for image transformation or processing
    using a Walsh Transform.


CLS 364/728.01
TXT Convolution:

    Subject matter under subclass 715.011 which the convolution integral is
    evaluated in a digital fashion.

    (1)     Note.  Frequently, the output of a system is determined by
    convolving the system input with the system impulse response.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    724.12, for convolution in digital filtering.

    819,    for analog computer convolution.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    382,    Image Analysis, subclass 279 for convolution in image preliminary
    processing or transformation.


CLS 364/728.02
TXT Cyclic/circular:

    Subject matter under subclass 728.01 where the convolution integral of a
    and b, two series of discrete values, is found by performing a transform
    operation on a and b (producing A and B respectively) and then performing
    the inverse transform operation on the product of A and B.


CLS 364/728.03
TXT Correlation:

    Subject matter under subclass 715.011 where the specialized function is
    measuring the degree of correspondence between two series of discrete
    values by digitally evaluating the correlation integral.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    819,    for analog computer correlation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    382,    Image Analysis, subclass 278 for correlation in image preliminary
    processing or transformation.


CLS 364/728.04
TXT Single bit data:

    Subject matter under subclass 728.03 in which the discrete values have a
    one bit representation.


CLS 364/728.05
TXT Multi-dimensional data:

    Subject matter under subclass 728.03 in which at least one series of
    discrete values is multi-dimensional (e.g., image data).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    820,    for analog correlation of multi-dimensional data.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    382,    Image Analysis, subclass 278 for correlation used in image
    transformation or prerecognition processing.


CLS 364/728.06
TXT Using tapped delay line:

    Subject matter under subclass 728.03 where the outputs from successive
    stages of a digital delay element are utilized.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    724.16, for similar structure utilized in a filtering environment.

    824,    for analog correlation having a tapped delay line.


CLS 364/728.07
TXT Autocorrelation:

    Subject matter under subclass 728.03 in which both series of discrete
    values are from a single source.


CLS 364/729
TXT Evaluation of trigonometric functions:

    Subject matter under subclass 715.011 wherein the specialized function
    performed is the processing of a signal either to determine a trigonometric
    relationship or to operate on a signal in accordance with a trigonometric
    relationship.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    721,    for waveform generation having trigonometric relationships.


CLS 364/730
TXT Vector resolver:

    Subject matter under subclass 729 wherein the signal is a vector and the
    operation is determining the vector components.


CLS 364/731
TXT Coordinate conversion:

    Subject matter under subclass 715.011 wherein the specialized function
    performed is conversion or coordinates from one coordinate system to
    another (e.g., rectangular to polar).

    (1)     Note.  The calculation of the change in coordinates resulting from
    a translation or rotation of a reference coordinate system is included in
    this subclass.


CLS 364/732
TXT Differentiation:

    Subject matter under subclass 715.011  for differentiation of at least one
    of a plurality of input signals.


CLS 364/733
TXT Integration:

    Subject matter under subclass 715.011 for the integration of a sequence of
    discrete values of an input signal.


CLS 364/734
TXT Averaging:

    Subject matter under subclass 715.011 for determining the average of a
    sequence of discrete values.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    575,    for averaging values in testing, measuring, or monitoring system.


CLS 364/735
TXT Solving equations:

    Subject matter under subclass 715.011 wherein the specialized function
    performed is to solve an equation or equations not classified in subclasses
    716.01-734.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded are arithmetic operations classifiable in
    subclasses 736.01+.


CLS 364/736.01
TXT Arithmetical operation:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein numerical quantities form the
    elements of the calculation, including the fundamental operations of
    arithmetic (addition, subtraction, multiplication, comparison, and
    division).


CLS 364/736.02
TXT Multiplication followed by addition (i.e., x*y+z):

    Subject matter under subclass 736.01 wherein the operation performed is a
    multiplication followed by an addition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    748.07, for performing a multiplication followed by addition with floating
    point.


CLS 364/736.03
TXT Matrix (e.g., vector, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 736.01 wherein data to be transformed on is
    in a quantity that has both magnitude and direction or an arrangement of
    rows and columns.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    748.2,  for a particular matrix with floating point.

    754.02, for a particular matrix with multiplication.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 800 for vector
    processor architecture.


CLS 364/736.04
TXT Multiple parallel operations:

    Subject matter under subclass 736.01 including two or more operations in
    which numerical digits are transmitted simultaneously on separate lines.


CLS 364/736.05
TXT Pipeline:

    Subject matter under subclass 736.01 wherein the operation is performed in
    a pipeline by passing the output of one task as input to another until a
    desired sequence of tasks has been carried out.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    716.04, for multifunctional operation performed in a particular pipeline.

    726.04, for Fourier transform performed in a particular pipeline.

    748.14, for floating point performed in a particular pipeline.

    760.04, for complex number format performed in a particular pipeline.


CLS 364/736.06
TXT Systolic:

    Subject matter under subclass 736.01 wherein the operation uses an array of
    computational elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    726.05, for a particular systolic array used in a Fourier transform.

    748.15, for a particular systolic array used in a floating point.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 800 for
    systolic array processor architecture.


CLS 364/736.5
TXT Status condition/flag generation or use:

    Subject matter under subclass 736.01 where an indicator of the present data
    processing status is generated or used to select from a plurality of future
    processing paths.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    724.03, for flag generation or use in a digital filtering finite arithmetic
    effect environment.


CLS 364/737
TXT Error detection or correction:

    Subject matter under subclass 736.01 with means identifying a malfunction
    in the operation of the apparatus or the result produced.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery,
    appropriate subclass for systems which test for malfunction in
    nonarithmetical operations.


CLS 364/738
TXT Parity check:

    Subject matter under subclass 737 wherein the error detection or correction
    utilizes a parity bit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 146.1 for detecting error in
    information content of a group of signals by parity check.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery,
    appropriate subclass for systems which test for malfunction in
    nonarithmetical operations.


CLS 364/739
TXT Residue code:

    Subject matter under subclass 737 wherein the error detection or correction
    utilizes a residue code.

    (1)     Note.  The residue is the remainder after dividing a number by a
    modulo-n.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclass
    54 for error detection by residue code in nonarithmetic operations.


CLS 364/740
TXT Sequential repetition:

    Subject matter under subclass 737 wherein the error detection or correction
    utilizes sequential repetition.


CLS 364/741
TXT Plural parallel devices:

    Subject matter under subclass 737 wherein the error detection or correction
    utilizes plural parallel devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclasses
    68.1+ for plural parallel devices/channels in nonarithmetic operations.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 182.01+ for
    fault recovery including masking or reconfiguring, per se, in a digital
    data processing system.


CLS 364/742
TXT Cathode-ray tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 736.01 wherein the specific apparatus for
    performing the arithmetic operation utilizes a cathode-ray tube.


CLS 364/743
TXT Contact-making device:

    Subject matter under subclass 736.01 wherein the specific apparatus for
    performing the arithmetic operation utilizes a contact-making device such
    as a relay.


CLS 364/744
TXT Radix point control:

    Subject matter under subclass 736.01 for controlling the radix point
    position relative to the numerical digits, e.g., controlling the position
    of a decimal point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    748.04, for overflow or underflow used in a floating point.


CLS 364/745.01
TXT Compensation for finite word length:

    Subject matter under subclass 736.01 wherein the operation results in a
    word modification in length due to insufficient representation of using the
    fixed word length of the arithmetic system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    748.02+, for a particular compensation for finite word length used in a
    floating point.


CLS 364/745.02
TXT Round off or truncation:

    Subject matter under subclass 745.01 wherein the modification is an
    adjustment of the more significant digits in accordance with some specific
    rule or a deletion of one or more of the least significant digits.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    748.03, for round off or truncation used in a floating point.


CLS 364/745.03
TXT Overflow or underflow:

    Subject matter under subclass 745.01 wherein the modification is necessary
    because the word is either too large or too small to be represented using
    the fixed word length.


CLS 364/745.04
TXT Prediction:

    Subject matter under subclass 745.03 wherein the overflow or underflow is
    forecasted before the operation is performed.


CLS 364/746
TXT Residue numbers:

    Subject matter under subclass 736 wherein the numerical digits are in the
    residue number system.


CLS 364/746.1
TXT Galois field:

    Subject matter under subclass 736.01 where the arithmetical operations are
    performed on a 2m element finite arithmetic field.


CLS 364/746.2
TXT Multi-valued:

    Subject matter under subclass 736.01 where the arithmetical operations are
    performed with multi-valued operands.


CLS 364/747
TXT Incremental mode:

    Subject matter under subclass 736.01 wherein the numerical digits represent
    a change in numbers as opposed to whole number representation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 247+ for delta
    modulation.


CLS 364/748.01
TXT Floating point:

    Subject matter under subclass 736.01 wherein the numerical digits are
    expressed in terms of a bounded number (mantissa) and a scale factor
    (characteristic or exponent) consisting of a power of the number base.


CLS 364/748.02
TXT Compensation for finite word length:

    Subject matter under subclass 748.01 wherein the operation results in a
    word modification in length due to insufficient representation of using the
    fixed word length of the arithmetic system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    745.01+, for compensation for finite word length used in arithmetical
    operations.


CLS 364/748.03
TXT Round off or truncation:

    Subject matter under subclass 748.02 wherein the modification is a deletion
    of one or more of the least significant digits and an adjustment of the
    more significant digits in accordance with some specific rule.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    745.02, for arithmetical operations.


CLS 364/748.04
TXT Overflow or underflow:

    Subject matter under subclass 748.02 wherein the modification is necessary
    because the word is either too large or too small to be represented using
    the fixed word length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    745.03,         for overflow or underflow used in arithmetical operations.


CLS 364/748.05
TXT Sticky bit:

    Subject matter under subclass 748.02 wherein the modification is based on
    whether or not a number of least significant digits contains a one.


CLS 364/748.06
TXT Evaluation of root:

    Subject matter under subclass 748.01 wherein the operation performed is the
    determination of a root.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    752,    for evaluation of root used in arithmetic operations.


CLS 364/748.07
TXT Multiplication followed by addition:

    Subject matter under subclass 748.01 wherein the operation performed is
    multiplication followed by an addition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    736.02, for performing a multiplication followed by addition in arithmetic
    operations.


CLS 364/748.08
TXT Reciprocal:

    Subject matter under subclass 748.01 wherein the operation performed is the
    determination of the reciprocal.


CLS 364/748.09
TXT Multiplication:

    Subject matter under subclass 748.01 wherein the operation performed is
    multiplication.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    754.01, for performing a multiplication in arithmetical operations.


CLS 364/748.1
TXT Division:

    Subject matter under subclass 748.01 wherein the operation performed is
    division.


CLS 364/748.11
TXT Addition or subtraction:

    Subject matter under subclass 748.01 wherein the operation performed is
    addition or subtraction.


CLS 364/748.12
TXT Feedback:

    Subject matter under subclass 748.01 wherein the operation is effected by
    the return of a portion of the output to its input.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    760.05, for feeding back partial product to complete the multiplication.


CLS 364/748.13
TXT Parallel:

    Subject matter under subclass 748.01 wherein the operation is effected by
    the use of two or more processors running simultaneously.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    786.01, for providing binary digits operated in a simultaneous manner to
    complete the multiplication.


CLS 364/748.14
TXT Pipeline:

    Subject matter under subclass 748.01 wherein the operation is effected by a
    specific apparatus in passing the output of one task as input to another
    until a desired sequence of tasks has been carried out.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    716.04, for multifunctional operation performed in a particular pipeline.

    726.04, for Fourier transformation performed in a particular pipeline.

    736.05, for arithmetical operation performed in a particular pipeline.

    760.04, for complex number format performed in a particular pipeline.


CLS 364/748.15
TXT Systolic:

    Subject matter under subclass 748.01 wherein the operation is effected by a
    specific apparatus using an array of computational elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    726.05, for a particular systolic array used in a Fourier transform.

    736.06, for a particular systolic array used in an arithmetical operation.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 800 for
    systolic array processor architecture.


CLS 364/748.16
TXT Microprocessor:

    Subject matter under subclass 748.01 wherein the operation is effected by a
    microprocessor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    716.02, for a particular microprocessor used in the multifunctional
    operation.

    724.013,        for a particular microprocessor used in the filtering.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 800 for
    particular microprocessor architecture.


CLS 364/748.17
TXT Complex number format:

    Subject matter under subclass 748.01 wherein the numerical digits have a
    real part and an imaginary part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    754.03+, for using complex number format in a multiplication operation.


CLS 364/748.18
TXT Logarithmic format:

    Subject matter under subclass 748.01 wherein the numerical digits which
    constitute an operand represented by the exponent to which a base number
    must be raised to produce the operand.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 350+ for miscellaneous circuits providing a logarithmic
    function of an input signal.


CLS 364/748.19
TXT Variable length or precision:

    Subject matter under subclass 748.01 wherein the numerical digits which
    constitute an operand are of selectable length or more detail.


CLS 364/748.2
TXT Matrix (e.g., vector, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 748.01 wherein the data to be operated on is
    an arrangement of rows and columns.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    736.03, for a particular matrix with an arithmetic operation.

    754.02, for a particular matrix with a multiplication operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 800 for vector
    processor architecture.


CLS 364/748.5
TXT Logarithmic format:

    Subject matter under subclass 736.01 where an operand is represented by the
    exponent to which a base number must be raised to produce the operand.


CLS 364/749
TXT Variable length:

    Subject matter under subclass 736.01 wherein the number of numerical digits
    that represent numbers are of differing length.


CLS 364/750
TXT Negative radix:

    Subject matter under subclass 736.01 wherein the numerical digits are
    represented in negative radix format.


CLS 364/750.5
TXT Sum of products generation:

    Subject matter under subclass 736.01 for producing and adding together a
    plurality of operand product terms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    724.16, for similar processing in a transversal filter environment.

    728.01, for similar processing in digital convolution.


CLS 364/751
TXT All four basic functions:

    Subject matter under subclass 736.01 wherein the computer has the
    capability of performing the functions of multiplication, division,
    addition and subtraction.


CLS 364/752
TXT Evaluation of roots:

    Subject matter under subclass 736.01 wherein the arithmetic operation
    performed is the determination of roots.


CLS 364/753
TXT Evaluation of powers:

    Subject matter under subclass 736.01 wherein the arithmetic operation
    performed is the raising of numbers to powers.


CLS 364/754.01
TXT Multiplication:

    Subject matter under subclass 736.01 wherein the arithmetic operation
    performed is multiplication.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    748.09, for performing multiplication in the floating point.


CLS 364/754.02
TXT Matrix (e.g., vector, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 754.01 wherein the data to be operated on is
    an arrangement of rows and columns.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    736.03, for a particular matrix with arithmetic operations.

    748.2,  for a particular matrix with floating point.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 800 for vector
    processor architecture.


CLS 364/754.03
TXT Complex number format:

    Subject matter under subclass 754.01 wherein the numerical digits have a
    real part and an imaginary part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    748.17, for using complex number format in floating point.


CLS 364/755
TXT Decimal:

    Subject matter under subclass 754.01 wherein the numerical digits are of
    radix ten.


CLS 364/756
TXT Coded decimal:

    Subject matter under subclass 754.01 wherein the numerical digits are of
    radix ten expressed in terms of another lesser radix.


CLS 364/757
TXT Binary:

    Subject matter under subclass 754.01 wherein the numerical digits are of
    radix two.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    756,    for arithmetic operations on digits of radix two within a
    denomination.


CLS 364/758
TXT Sum of cross products:

    Subject matter under subclass 757 wherein the multiplication is effected by
    the sum of cross products technique.


CLS 364/759
TXT Repeated addition:

    Subject matter under subclass 757 wherein the multiplication is effected by
    the repeated addition technique.


CLS 364/760.01
TXT Multiple digit:

    Subject matter under subclass 759 wherein at a given instant of time a
    plurality of multiplier digits controls the repeated addition operation.


CLS 364/760.02
TXT Carry-save adders (i.e., CSAs):

    Subject matter under subclass 760.01 including an array of carry-save
    adders to perform the multiplication.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    786.03, for parallel carry-save adders.


CLS 364/760.03
TXT Array adders:

    Subject matter under subclass 760.01 including an array of circuits or
    integrated circuits that sum the amplitude of two input signals to perform
    the multiplication.


CLS 364/760.04
TXT Pipeline:

    Subject matter under subclass 760.01 including a specific apparatus in
    passing the output of one task as input to another until a desired sequence
    of tasks has been carried out.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    716.04, for multifunctional operation performed in a particular pipeline.

    726.04, for Fourier transformation performed in a particular pipeline.

    736.05, for arithmetical operation performed in a particular pipeline.

    748.14, for floating point performed in a particular pipeline.


CLS 364/760.05
TXT Feedback:

    Subject matter under subclass 760.01 including means which involves feeding
    back a partial product as an input to complete the multiplication.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    748.12, for feeding back a portion of the output to its input in floating
    point.


CLS 364/761
TXT Division:

    Subject matter under subclass 736.01 wherein the arithmetic operation
    performed is division.


CLS 364/762
TXT Decimal:

    Subject matter under subclass 761 wherein the numerical digits are of radix
    ten.


CLS 364/763
TXT Coded decimal:

    Subject matter under subclass 761 wherein the numerical digits are of radix
    ten expressed in terms of another lesser radix.


CLS 364/764
TXT Binary:

    Subject matter under subclass 761 wherein the numerical digits are of radix
    two.


CLS 364/765
TXT Multiplication by reciprocal:

    Subject matter under subclass 764 wherein the division is effected by
    multiplying the dividend by the reciprocal of the divisor.


CLS 364/766
TXT Repeated subtraction:

    Subject matter under subclass 764 wherein the division is effected by the
    repeated subtraction technique.


CLS 364/767
TXT Multiples of divisor:

    Subject matter under subclass 766 wherein multiples of the divisor are used
    in the repeated subtraction operation.


CLS 364/768
TXT Addition/subtraction:

    Subject matter under subclass 736.01 wherein the arithmetic operation
    performed is addition or subtraction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclass 53 for an electronic
    digital logic type quarter or half-adder.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 355+ for miscellaneous adding or subtracting circuits.


CLS 364/769
TXT Comparison:

    Subject matter under subclass 768 for comparing by determining the
    mathematical magnitude of the difference between two numbers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    715.06,         for determination of  "maximum of" or  "minimum of" a
    series of numbers by comparison.


CLS 364/770
TXT Incrementation/decrementation:

    Subject matter under subclass 768 for incrementation or decrementation
    which is performed by changing by one the value of the numerical digit in
    the least significant digit position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, for electrical pulse counters and counting systems.


CLS 364/771
TXT Radix correction:

    Subject matter under subclass 768 for correction for a change in radix.

    (1)     Note.  For example, binary coded decimal with  "6" correction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    781,    for a device operating in coded decimal fashion that does not
    require radix correction.


CLS 364/772
TXT Serial:

    Subject matter under subclass 771 wherein the radix correction is performed
    by operation on the numerical digits in a serial manner.


CLS 364/773
TXT Signal amplitude:

    Subject matter under subclass 768 wherein the addition or subtraction is
    performed by summing signal amplitudes.


CLS 364/774
TXT Microwaves:

    Subject matter under subclass 768 wherein the addition or subtraction is
    performed utilizing microwave devices.


CLS 364/775
TXT Cryogenic:

    Subject matter under subclass 768 wherein the addition or subtraction is
    performed utilizing cryogenic devices.


CLS 364/776
TXT Tubes:

    Subject matter under subclass 768 wherein the addition or subtraction is
    performed utilizing tubes.


CLS 364/777
TXT Magnetic:

    Subject matter under subclass 768 wherein the addition or subtraction is
    performed utilizing magnetic devices.


CLS 364/778
TXT Decimal:

    Subject matter under subclass 768 wherein the numerical digits are of radix
    ten.


CLS 364/779
TXT Serial:

    Subject matter under subclass 778 wherein the numerical digits are operated
    on in a serial manner.


CLS 364/780
TXT Parallel:

    Subject matter under subclass 778 wherein the numerical digits are operated
    on in a parallel manner.


CLS 364/781
TXT Coded decimal:

    Subject matter under subclass 768 wherein the numerical digits are of radix
    ten expressed in terms of another lesser radix.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    771,    for a device which accomplishes radix correction.


CLS 364/782
TXT Serial:

    Subject matter under subclass 781 wherein the numerical digits are operated
    on in a serial manner.


CLS 364/783
TXT Parallel:

    Subject matter under subclass 781 wherein the numerical digits are operated
    on in a parallel manner.


CLS 364/784.01
TXT Binary:

    Subject matter under subclass 768 wherein the numerical digits are of radix
    two.


CLS 364/784.02
TXT Bipolar junction transistor only or combined with field-effect transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 784.01 including a transistor that uses both
    negative and positive charge carriers or combined with a transistor in
    which current carriers (holes or electrons) are injected at one terminal
    (the source) and pass to another (the drain) through a channel of
    semiconductor material whose resistivity depends mainly on the extent to
    which it is penetrated by a depletion region.


CLS 364/784.03
TXT Field-Effect Transistor (FET):

    Subject matter under subclass 784.01 including a transistor in which
    current carriers (holes or electrons) are injected at one terminal (the
    source) and pass to another (the drain) through a channel of semiconductor
    material whose resistivity depends mainly on the extent to which it is
    penetrated by a depletion region.


CLS 364/784.04
TXT Gate function level:

    Subject matter under subclass 784.01 including means to show a gate
    functional level or combined with a transistor.


CLS 364/784.05
TXT For precharging (e.g., Manchester, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 784.01 using clock signal for precharging a
    field-effect transistor.


CLS 364/785
TXT Serial:

    Subject matter under subclass 784.01 wherein the numerical digits are
    operated on in a serial manner.


CLS 364/786.01
TXT Parallel:

    Subject matter under subclass 784.01 wherein the numerical digits are
    operated upon a simultaneous manner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    748.13, for providing the digits in a parallel manner in floating point.


CLS 364/786.02
TXT Carry-ripple:

    Subject matter under subclass 786.01 wherein a carry signal ripples through
    each digit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    787.02, for block of carry-out signal.


CLS 364/786.03
TXT Carry-save adders:

    Subject matter under subclass 786.01 including more than one carry-save
    adder for performing the addition.


CLS 364/786.04
TXT Adding more than two numbers:

    Subject matter under subclass 786.01 wherein at least three numbers are
    added.


CLS 364/787.01
TXT Carry look-ahead:

    Subject matter under subclass 786.01 wherein the addition or subtraction is
    performed by a circuit which predicts the final carry from propagate and
    generate signals supplied by partial adders.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    787.03, for the carry-out signals of the blocks.


CLS 364/787.02
TXT Slice block having block ripple:

    Subject matter under subclass 787.01 wherein carry-out signal of a block
    ripples through the next block.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    786.02, for the carry signal ripple through digit.


CLS 364/787.03
TXT Slice block having block look-ahead:

    Subject matter under subclass 787.01 wherein the carry signals of the
    blocks look-ahead.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    787.01, for the carry signal look-ahead.


CLS 364/787.04
TXT Tree structured logic blocks:

    Subject matter under subclass 787.01 including more than one logic block
    containing one or more nodes that are linked together in a hierarchical
    fashion.


CLS 364/788
TXT Conditional sums:

    Subject matter under subclass 786.01 wherein the addition or subtraction is
    performed utilizing conditional sums.


CLS 364/800
TXT ELECTRIC ANALOG COMPUTER:

    Subject matter under the class definition which includes devices for
    performing arithmetic and some limited logic operations upon electrical
    signals, such as current or voltage, which are continuously varying
    representations of physical quantities and which are some function of the
    quantities such as direct proportion, inverse proportion or square law
    relationship.

    (1)     Note.  The limited logic operations include comparison or
    selection, for example.

    (2)     Note.  The continuously varying representations, for example, may
    be frequency or pulse width.

    (3)     Note.  Signals wherein the varying representation is pulse rate are
    included with subject matter under  "Electric Digital Calculating Computer".

    (4)     Note.  Examples of the physical quantities above are temperature,
    pressure, angular position, weight numerical values.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous active device analog
    circuits.


CLS 364/801
TXT Simulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 800 wherein the computer is utilized as a
    model of some physical or physiological system.


CLS 364/802
TXT Of electrical phenomenon, devices, or systems:

    Subject matter under subclass 801 wherein the simulated system involves an
    electrical phenomenon, device or system.


CLS 364/803
TXT Of fluid phenomenon, devices or systems:

    Subject matter under subclass 801 wherein the simulated system involves a
    fluid phenomenon, device or system.


CLS 364/804
TXT Wells:

    Subject matter under subclass 803 wherein the fluid phenomenon simulated is
    that of a well.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are patents directed to simulating bore holes
    and devices for pumping the fluid from a well.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    422,    for the application of a computer in well logging.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 853.1+ for telemetering a
    well bore environment.


CLS 364/805
TXT Of vehicles, parts thereof or traffic:

    Subject matter under subclass 801 wherein the simulated system involves a
    vehicle, parts thereof or traffic.

    (1)     Note.   "Parts thereof" are restricted to parts having utility only
    in vehicles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 111, 186 and 239+ for
    navigation training devices and subclasses 30+ for a training device
    including simulation of aircraft movement or control.


CLS 364/806
TXT Of physical phenomenon (e.g., nuclear, heat, waves, geophysics):

    Subject matter under subclass 801 wherein the simulated system involves a
    physical phenomenon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclass 73 for synthetic seismograms and models.


CLS 364/807
TXT Specialized function performed:

    Subject matter under subclass 800 directed to specialized functions
    performed by analog computers or subcombinations thereof in making
    computations.

    (1)     Note.  For classification herein the function performed must be
    significantly claimed in making a computation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 1 for fuzzy
    logic; subclass 3 for fuzzy logic hardware; subclasses 21+ for neural
    networks.


CLS 364/808
TXT Evaluation of equations:

    Subject matter under subclass 807 for obtaining the solution to a
    mathematical problem.

    (1)     Note.  The mathematical problem may be expressed as equations,
    conditions (as) etc., and the solution may be a value or set of values or
    the value which meets some objective criteria.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes subject matter which utilized an
    analog signal as a computing component and in which the computing component
    is employed more than once to determine a mathematical solution by
    successive steps.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass does not include subject matter classifiable
    as specific types of problems or operations in subclasses 811-860.


CLS 364/809
TXT Simultaneous:

    Subject matter under subclass 808 for the solution of simultaneous
    equations or conditions.

    (1)     Note.  Linear programming problems are included herein.


CLS 364/810
TXT Differential (e.g., differential analyzers):

    Subject matter under subclass 808 wherein the equations evaluated are
    differential equations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    702,    for differential analyzers of the digital type.


CLS 364/811
TXT Averaging:

    Subject matter under subclass 807 wherein the function performed is
    determining an average amplitude for a signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    575,    for measuring, testing and monitoring systems which perform an
    averaging operation.

    734,    for averaging by means of a digital calculating computer.


CLS 364/812
TXT Variance or standard deviation determination:

    Subject matter under subclass 807 wherein the function performed is
    determining variance or standard deviation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    552,    for systems where the variance or standard deviation function is
    used as a parameter in measuring or evaluating the quality control of the
    systems.


CLS 364/813
TXT Evaluation of powers:

    Subject matter under subclass 807 wherein the function performed is the
    evaluation of the powers of an input signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 346+ for miscellaneous circuits in which an output
    signal is exponentially related to an input signal.


CLS 364/814
TXT Evaluation of roots (e.g., square roots):

    Subject matter under subclass 807 wherein the function performed is root
    evaluation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 346+ for miscellaneous circuits in which an output
    signal is exponentially related to an input signal.


CLS 364/815
TXT Coordinate conversion or vector resolver:

    Subject matter under subclass 807 wherein the computer converts from one
    coordinate system to another, such as from rectangular to polar or
    resolving a vector into its coordinate values.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclass 61 for coordinate conversion by mechanical
    computers and subclass 410 for coordinate conversion in ordnance computers.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 605 for synchros or
    resolvers used in analog comparison techniques for digital or numerical
    positional servo systems and subclass 661 for resolver type differential
    transformer systems used as a particular position measuring instrument for
    a positional servo error detecting means.


CLS 364/816
TXT Electromechanical:

    Subject matter under subclass 815 wherein the function is performed
    utilizing an electromechanical device.


CLS 364/817
TXT Evaluation of trigonometric functions:

    Subject matter under subclass 807 wherein the function performed is
    processing of a signal to either determine a trigonometric relationship or
    to operate on a signal in accordance with a trigonometric relationship.

    (1)     Note.  Generation of a waveform having trigonometric
    relationship(s) is included herein.


CLS 364/818
TXT Single triangle:

    Subject matter under subclass 817 which solves for an unknown parameter of
    a plane triangle.


CLS 364/819
TXT Correlation or convolution:

    Subject matter under subclass 807 for evaluating cross-correlation,
    auto-correlation, cross-convolution or auto-convolution functions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 76.12+ and indented
    subclass for correlators used in frequency spectrum analyzer systems.

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 378+ for directive radio wave
    communications systems using correlation techniques.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 38+ for correlators used in geophysical communications systems.


CLS 364/820
TXT Of multidimensional data:

    Subject matter under subclass 819 wherein the correlation or convolution is
    of multidimensional data.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclass 5 for correlation functions employed in
    radar systems with map matching.


CLS 364/821
TXT Acoustic:

    Subject matter under subclass 819 utilizing compressional wave propagation
    along or through a medium other than a light modulator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    822,    for light modulation using compressional waves.


CLS 364/822
TXT Optical:

    Subject matter under subclass 819 utilizing optical devices and producing
    an electrical output.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 25 for optical
    neural networks.


CLS 364/823
TXT Magnetic or electromagnetic:

    Subject matter under subclass 819 utilizing a magnetic or electromagnetic
    device.


CLS 364/824
TXT With tapped delay line:

    Subject matter under subclass 819 utilizing a tapped delay line.


CLS 364/825
TXT Filtering:

    Subject matter under subclass 807 utilized for filtering electrical signals
    by computation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    572,    for measuring, testing or monitoring which perform an analog
    filtering operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 552+ for miscellaneous unwanted signal suppression
    utilizing an active filter circuit not performing an arithmetic calculation.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 18 for filters used
    in automatically controlled equalizer or delay networks; subclass 28 for
    analog filters in equalizer coupling networks and subclasses 167+ for
    analog type transversal filter coupling networks.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 229+ and 285 for
    filtering techniques used in distortion or noise prevention or correction
    means for modulated carrier wave communication systems.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 307 for filtering in a radio receiver.


CLS 364/826
TXT Transforms:

    Subject matter under subclass 807 wherein the function performed is
    transforming a given representation of a data signal to another
    representation without loss of information by an orthogonal transformation.


CLS 364/827
TXT Fourier:

    Subject matter under subclass 826 wherein the transformation is from the
    time or space domain to the frequency domain or the converse.


CLS 364/828
TXT Differentiation:

    Subject matter under subclass 807 wherein the function performed is
    differentiation of at least one of a plurality of input signals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 335 for a miscellaneous circuit providing the
    derivative of an input signal without computation.


CLS 364/829
TXT Integrators:

    Subject matter under subclass 807 wherein the function performed is
    integration of at least one of a plurality of input signals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 336+ for a miscellaneous circuit providing the integral
    of an input signal without computation.


CLS 364/830
TXT Plural integration:

    Subject matter under subclass 829 wherein the function performed is plural
    integration.


CLS 364/831
TXT Plural mode (e.g., plural scale):

    Subject matter under subclass 829 wherein the apparatus is capable of
    operating in plural modes or scales.


CLS 364/832
TXT Reset:

    Subject matter under subclass 829 wherein the integration operation is
    reset when the output meets a predetermined condition.


CLS 364/833
TXT Drift correction:

    Subject matter under subclass 829 additionally including the function of
    drift correction.


CLS 364/834
TXT With simultaneous calculation of another function:

    Subject matter under subclass 829 where the input signal on which
    integration is performed is simultaneously subject to a calculation
    function other than integration and the output is a function of both.


CLS 364/835
TXT With a voltage to frequency converter:

    Subject matter under subclass 829 utilizing a voltage to frequency
    converter.


CLS 364/836
TXT Electromechanical:

    Subject matter under subclass 829 utilizing an electromechanical device.


CLS 364/837
TXT Electro-optical:

    Subject matter under subclass 829 utilizing an electro-optical device.


CLS 364/838
TXT Magnetic or electromagnetic:

    Subject matter under subclass 829 utilizing a magnetic or electromagnetic
    device.


CLS 364/839
TXT Amplifier with additional feedback loop:

    Subject matter under subclass 829 utilizing an integrating amplifier with
    an additional feedback loop.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 75+ for amplifier circuits with signal
    feedback.


CLS 364/840
TXT Additional R/C feedback loop:

    Subject matter under subclass 839 including a resistance or capacitance in
    the additional feedback loop.


CLS 364/841
TXT Multiplication:

    Subject matter under subclass 807 wherein the function performed is
    multiplication.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 356+ for a miscellaneous circuit providing the product
    of a plurality of inputs.


CLS 364/842
TXT Time division:

    Subject matter under subclass 841 wherein one input variable is used to
    control the mark-to-space ratio and the other variable is used to control
    the amplitude of a repetitive rectangular wave.

    (1)     Note.  Each variable can be represented by current or voltage and
    the output voltage, proportional to the area of the pulse voltage-time
    curve, represents the product of the input variables.


CLS 364/843
TXT Quarter-square:

    Subject matter under subclass 841 wherein the product produced pertains to
    an analog multiplier whose operation is based upon the identity xy = (1/4)
    (x+y)2 - (1/4) (x-y)2.


CLS 364/844
TXT With charging or discharging of energy storage device:

    Subject matter under subclass 841 wherein the multiplication function is
    performed by charging or discharging of an energy storage device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    subclasses 166+ for a battery or capacitor charging or discharging circuit.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous circuits utilizing the
    charging or discharging of an energy storage device.


CLS 364/845
TXT Photomultipliers:

    Subject matter under subclass 841 wherein the multiplication function is
    performed utilizing photomultipliers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 206+ for photocell controlled circuits
    in general.


CLS 364/846
TXT Electromagnetic:

    Subject matter under subclass 841 wherein the multiplication function is
    performed utilizing an electromagnetic device.


CLS 364/847
TXT Hall effect:

    Subject matter under subclass 846 utilizing the Hall effect principle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 294
    and 368 for resistor-type impedance systems which operate under Hall effect
    principles.


CLS 364/848
TXT Electromechanical (e.g., servo-multipliers):

    Subject matter under subclass 841 wherein the multiplication function is
    performed utilizing an electromechanical device.


CLS 364/849
TXT With alternative division:

    Subject matter under subclass 841 wherein the function performed is
    multiplication of two or more inputs and wherein a division is performed as
    an alternative function.


CLS 364/850
TXT Division:

    Subject matter under subclass 807 wherein the function performed is
    division.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 360 for miscellaneous circuits where the output is a
    quotient of a plurality of inputs.


CLS 364/851
TXT Function generation:

    Subject matter under subclass 807 wherein the wave shape of at least one
    analog signal representing a desired function is generated by mathematical
    operation or a signal is generated as a part of a mathematical operation
    representing a desired function of at least one variable input parameter.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses include waveform
    synthesizers of the analog type wherein the waveform is internally
    generated.

    (2)     Note.  Trigonometric waveform generation is excluded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    817,    for evaluation of trigonometric functions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 334+ for miscellaneous circuits providing a function of
    one or more input signals.


CLS 364/852
TXT Piece-wise linear synthesis:

    Subject matter under subclass 851 wherein the desired function is
    approximated by a series of segments of straight lines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 334+ for a miscellaneous circuit providing a piece-wise
    approximation to a desired input to output function.


CLS 364/853
TXT Interpolation/extrapolation:

    Subject matter under subclass 852 including determining or estimating a
    value or values between two or more known predetermined points or by
    continuing the trend established between two or more known points.


CLS 364/854
TXT Diode breakpoint:

    Subject matter under subclass 852 wherein the function is performed by a
    network or networks of resistors and diodes in which the diodes begin to
    conduct at different values (breakpoints) of an input signal.


CLS 364/855
TXT Cathode-ray tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 851 wherein sensing a pattern within or
    external to the envelope of a cathode-ray tube produces a function signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 324 for multiple variation
    cathode ray display electrical communication systems.


CLS 364/856
TXT Two or more variables:

    Subject matter under subclass 851 wherein the signal represents two or more
    variables.


CLS 364/857
TXT Logarithmic/exponential:

    Subject matter under subclass 851 wherein the particular generated function
    is logarithmic-exponential.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 350+ for miscellaneous circuits providing a logarithmic
    function of an input signal.


CLS 364/858
TXT Triangular, sawtooth, or ramp:

    Subject matter under subclass 851 wherein the particular generated function
    is of the triangular, sawtooth or ramp type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 131+ for miscellaneous circuits providing a sawtooth or
    ramp type waveform.


CLS 364/859
TXT Hyperbolic:

    Subject matter under subclass 851 wherein the particular generated function
    is hyperbolic.


CLS 364/860
TXT Electromechanical:

    Subject matter under subclass 851 wherein the function is performed
    utilizing an electromechanical device.


CLS 364/861
TXT Specialized apparatus:

    Subject matter under subclass 800 including specialized apparatus used as
    an element of the analog computer.

    (1)     Note.  For classification herein the element must be significantly
    claimed.


CLS 364/862
TXT Analog store (e.g., charge transfer):

    Subject matter under subclass 861 wherein the specialized apparatus is an
    analog storage device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses, including subclasses 215+, for charge transfer type
    active semiconductor devices, per se.

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclass 61 for electronic
    logic utilizing a charge transfer device.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, particularly subclasses 263, 271, 277, and 284 for miscellaneous
    delay circuits utilizing a charge transfer device.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 45+ for static
    storage and retrieval of analog information, and subclass 183 for charge
    couple storage systems.


CLS 364/863
TXT Bridge or symmetrical circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 861 wherein the specialized apparatus is a
    bridge circuit or symmetrical circuit.


CLS 364/864
TXT Saturable-reactive device (e.g., magnetic amplifier):

    Subject matter under subclass 861 wherein the specialized apparatus is a
    saturable-reactive device (e.g., magnetic amplifier).

    FOREIGN ART COLLECTIONS

    The definitions for FOR 138-FOR 154 below correspond to the definitions of
    the abolished subclasses under Class 364 from which these collections were
    formed.  See the Foreign Art Collection schedule for specific
    correspondences.  [Note:  The titles and definitions for indented art
    collections include all the details of the one(s) that are hierarchically
    superior.]


CLS 364/FOR138
TXT  Specialized function performed:

    Foreign art collection having specialized functions involving calculations
    performed by digital computers or subcombination thereof.


CLS 364/FOR139
TXT  Multifunctional:

    Foreign art collection for selectively performing at least one logical
    operation as well as at least one arithmetical operation relative to
    operands; e.g., programmable logic circuits with computational means.


CLS 364/FOR140
TXT  Random number generation:

    Foreign art collection for the generation of a sequence of pseudo-random or
    random numbers.


CLS 364/FOR141
TXT  Number sequence generation:

    Foreign art collection where a series of numbers are produced according to
    a predetermined rule.


CLS 364/FOR142
TXT  Function generation:

    Foreign art collection for the generation of a sequence of discrete values
    representing a desired waveform.


CLS 364/FOR143
TXT  Filtering:

    Foreign art collection for selection or rejection of signal components.


CLS 364/FOR144
TXT  Transforms:

    Foreign art collection wherein the specialized function performed is
    transformation of a given representation of a data signal to another
    representation without loss of information by an orthogonal transformation.


CLS 364/FOR145
TXT  Fourier:

    Foreign art collection wherein the transformation performed is a Fourier
    transform.


CLS 364/FOR146
TXT  Walsh:

    Foreign art collection wherein the transformation performed is a Walsh
    transform.


CLS 364/FOR147
TXT  Arithmetical operations:

    Foreign art collection having specific apparatus for performing an
    arithmetic or related operation.


CLS 364/FOR148
TXT  Precision-round off:

    Foreign art collection for controlling the precision or round off of
    numerical digits.


CLS 364/FOR149
TXT  Floating point:

    Foreign art collection wherein the numerical digits are in floating point
    format.


CLS 364/FOR150
TXT  Multiplication:

    Foreign art collection wherein the arithmetic operation performed is
    multiplication.


CLS 364/FOR151
TXT  Multiple digit:

    Foreign art collection wherein at a given instant of time a plurality of
    multiplier digits controls the repeated addition operation.


CLS 364/FOR152
TXT  Binary:

    Foreign art collection wherein the numerical digits are of radix two.


CLS 364/FOR153
TXT  Parallel:

    Foreign art collection wherein the numerical digits are operated on in a
    parallel manner.


CLS 364/FOR154
TXT  Carry look-ahead:

    Foreign art collection wherein the addition or subtraction is performed
    utilizing carry look-ahead techniques.

    FOREIGN ART COLLECTIONS

    Foreign patents/nonpatent literature from Class 364, old subclasses 514+,
    have been transferred directly to foreign art collections below (e.g., FOR
    514) which are intended as repositories only for foreign patents/nonpatent
    literature. The reference in parentheses following each subclass title
    provides the source of the respective foreign patents/nonpatent literature.
    Definitions below correspond to the respective Class 364 source
    definitions.  Art related to the subject matter contained in FOR 514+,
    particularly FOR 514, which utilizes multicomputer data transferring may be
    found in Class 395, subclasses 200.3+.


CLS 364/FOR514
TXT Communication engineering (e.g., pictorial and pulse
    communication) (364/514):

    Foreign art collection including a data processing system or calculating
    computer which is designed for use in the transmission of information or
    for the solution of a problem in this area.


CLS 364/FOR516
TXT Object detection or tracking (364/516):

    Foreign art collection under FOR 514 wherein the area includes the sensing
    or following an object using radiant energy.


CLS 364/FOR517
TXT Signal evaluation (target or noise) (364/517):

    Foreign art collection under FOR 521 wherein the signal is examined in
    order to obtain an assessment of its inherent meaning, probable accuracy,
    relevancy, and relationship to a given situation or context


CLS 365/
TTL STATIC INFORMATION STORAGE  AND RETRIEVAL

CLS 365/
TXT

    I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF THE CLASS SUBJECT MATTER:

    A.      This is the generic class for apparatus or corresponding processes
    for the static storage and retrieval of information.  For classification
    herein, the storage system must be (1) static, (2) a singular storage
    element or plural elements of the same type, (3) addressable.

    (1)     Note.  Static storage and retrieval of information within this
    class means that relative motion is not required between the storage
    element and the source, receiver, or transducer.  For dynamic storage and
    retrieval or magnetic information, see Class 360.

    (2)     Note.  The storage elements within this class are plural elements
    of the same type which may store one or more bits of information per
    element.


    (3)     Note.  The storage system must be addressable, that is, there must
    be an inherent means for writing information into a memory and a means for
    reading the same information from the memory.

            For switching systems, see Class 307, subclasses 112+.

            For selective systems, see Class 340, subclass 825.

            For card readers, see Class 235, subclasses 435+.

            For recorders, see Class 346, appropriate subclass.

            Static memory systems involving data processing techniques are
    classified elsewhere

    B.      This class includes static memory systems wherein the information
    stored in the memory element has electrical, magnetic, or optical
    properties.  This class excludes mechanical or fluidic type storage of
    information, e.g., card files, cams, levels, or fluids, etc. This class
    also excludes the storage of noninformation, e.g., energy, basic signal
    control means, etc.

    C.      Processes for the manufacturing of storage elements are not
    classified within this class.  See:

    29,     Metal Working, for method of assembling storage elements.

    148,    Metal Treatment, for metal stock materials usable as storage
    elements.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, for
    bonding together storage element materials.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions.

    427,    Coating Processes, for coating of storage element materials.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, for methods of making
    semiconductor devices.



    D.      Storage Signals, per se, are not classified herein.  See:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses, including subclasses 225, 260, 390, 391, 903, 904,
    and 910 for solid-state static memory or memory element structure, per se.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, for a cathode-ray tube (CRT)
    type storage tube.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, for a CRT type
    storing system.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 545+ for miscellaneous bias circuits with signal
    protection or bias preservation.

    336,    Inductor Devices, for an inductor type storage element.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, for
    holographic, polarization, and light control type storage elements.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, for capacitor type
    storage element.



    E.      Circuits not specific to storage and retrieval which may constitute
    subcombinations of such apparatus are classified in the appropriate class
    for such circuits, e.g., photosensitive devices.  Class 250; Amplifiers,
    Class 330; Logic Circuits, Class 326; Code Converters, Class 340; Optical
    Elements, Class 359; Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements.

    F.      The combination of the subject matter of this class and an art
    environment is classified with the art environment. See:

    348,    Television, subclasses 714+ for details of static storage device
    which includes the processing of a video signal.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, for phonograph with a
    static storage system.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, for a multiplex system which include
    static storage of information.

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclasses 1+ for addressing combined with specific memory configurations
    (e.g., extended, expanded, dynamic, etc.), subclasses 100+ for generalized
    address forming, and subclasses 200+ for generalized storage accessing and
    control in a digital data processing system.

    II.     ORGANIZATION OF THIS CLASS:

    A.      Magnetic bubble devices, subclasses 1-44.

    B.      Analog storage systems, subclasses 45-48 are provided for devices
    where the information stored is not digital in nature.

    C.      Digital storage systems, subclasses 49-243.5 are provided for
    devices where the information is discrete.

    D.      Miscellaneous, subclass 244 is provided for subject matter not
    found above.

    III.    STATIC STORAGE AND RETRIEVAL SYSTEMS, DEVICES, AND ARRANGEMENTS
    FOUND IN OTHER CLASSES:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 25.35 for method of making piezoelectric
    devices, subclass 737 for apparatus to assemble magnetic memory devices,
    subclasses 25.01+ for making of barrier layer device, subclasses 592.1+ for
    processes of mechanical manufacturing electrical devices.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 568+ for mechanical
    storage elements.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 250+ for
    printed circuit elements which are storage panels.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 112 for static information stored in the form
    of a perforated tape.

    194,    Check-Actuated Control Mechanisms, mechanical storage of a check.

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the  Compositions, subclass 68 for process of record matrix
    forming.


    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 212+ for
    separating components by magnetic repulsion wherein a magnetic pin position
    may be indicative of information.

    235,    Registers, subclasses 435+ for coded record sensors, subclass 493
    for magnetic records.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 550 for holographic interference pattern
    analysis, subclass 553 for a matrix of solid-state light sources.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 62.51+ for magnetic compositions used as a
    storage medium.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses, including subclasses 225, 260, 390, 391, 903, 904,
    and 910 for solid-state static memory or memory element structure.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 401+
    for saturable reactor systems which include thin film parametrons, logic
    circuits, electrets, per se, which are switching type devices, rather than
    storage of information devices and subclass 109 for systems having a
    capacitor.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 311+ for
    piezoelectric devices or systems.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 391+ for
    cathode-ray tube storage devices.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 8.51 for
    cathode-ray tube storing systems, subclass 84.51 for discharge device
    systems which store electrical pulse energy for later retrieval.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    subclasses 166+ for a battery or capacitor charging or discharging circuit.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 43+ for magnetic
    field testing means, subclasses 111+ for storage of voltages and currents;
    and subclasses 210+ for testing of magnetic memory elements, per se.

    326,    Electrionic Digital Logic Circuitry, appropriate subclasses for
    digital logic devices.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, particularly subclasses 199+ for miscellaneous bistable circuits
    and subclasses 365+ for miscellaneous gating circuits.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 4+ for laser type amplifiers having utility
    in information storage.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 4 for plural channel
    systems with balanced circuits, subclasses 124+ for impedance matching
    devices, subclass 12 for transmission lines, subclasses 138+ for delay
    means, subclass 32 for coupling means which include impedance matching
    means, subclasses 170+ for wave filters with bridge means, subclasses 213+
    for negative resistance networks.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 209+ for magnets and electromagnets, per se.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclass for storage element which
    are inductors.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 32 for superconductors, per se,
    having utility as a storage element.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 146.2 for digital comparator
    systems, subclass 347 for code converters, subclasses 825.79+ for selective
    matrix systems which are used to control a device.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 55+ for display elements
    arranged in matrix.

    346,    Recorders, subclasses 2+ for phenomenal apparatus and processes
    recording for processes of producing a record in conjunction with the
    reading of a record, subclasses 74.2+ for magnetically forming a visible
    image record.

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, subclasses 1+ for
    processes and apparatus for conveying information by selectively creating
    on a medium a visibly distinguishable symbol or mark composed of a
    plurality of portions; subclass 113 for thermoplastic marking.

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, subclasses 25+ for selective data
    retrieval of stored information viewed by a projection means.

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 296 for facsimile recording.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    350+ for infrared and ultraviolet optical elements, subclasses 1+ for
    holographic records, subclasses 483+ for polarization devices, subclasses
    290+ for light control by altering an optical medium, surface, or interface.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 112,
    113, and 114 for Hall effect, magnetoresistive or magnetostrictive, and
    magneto-optic devices, respectively.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 160+ for
    control circuits for relay devices, subclass 271 for electrostatic
    capacitors, per se, subclass 600 for housings or mounting assemblies with
    plural diverse electrical components, subclasses 500+ for electrolytic
    capacitors, per se.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, appropriate subclasses,
    subclass 100.1 for the dynamic recording of audio information which may
    include static storage, particularly subclasses 100+ for photographic
    storage of information.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 351+ for pathfinding or
    routing, and subclass 531 for magnetic core for storage in multiplex
    communications which may include a static memory device.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclasses
    21.1+ for diagnostic testing of a memory system, and subclasses 40.11+ for
    digital data error correction during memory access.

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, appropriate subclasses for laser type
    oscillators having utility in information storage.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, for electrical counters and shift registers.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclass 10 for storage of data on the
    operation of an electrophotographic device (i.e., log report) and subclass
    83 for job mode selection with memory.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 62, 82, and 100 for superconductor,
    semiconductor, and piezoelectric products produced, respectively,
    subclasses 127+ for magnetic base or coating processes.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, appropriate subclasses for radiation imagery chemistry process,
    composition, or product used as a storage medium.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, educational devices which may include
    the storage and retrieval of information.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, for methods of making
    semiconductor devices.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 150+ for high temperature (Tc  30 K) superconducting devices,
    particularly subclasses 170+ for static information storage or retrieval.


CLS 365/1
TXT MAGNETIC BUBBLES:

    Subject matter under the class definition where the information stored in a
    magnetic medium is a domain bubble (a single walled magnetic domain having
    an outer boundary which closes on itself and has a geometry independent of
    the boundary of the sheet in which it moves, usually in the form of a
    cylinder).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     where the information stored is in the form of a strip.


CLS 365/2
TXT Disposition of elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 directed to the physical or spatial
    arrangement, packaging, or chip orientation of the magnetic bubbles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 737 for the assembly and disassembly
    apparatus of a bubble domain device, subclass 604 for the process of
    mechanical manufacture of a bubble domain device.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    228 for ferro fluid magnetic bubble.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 110+
    for a domain bubble used as a transducer, subclasses 131+ for a domain
    bubble stored on a dynamic record.


CLS 365/3
TXT Lattice:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 where the bubble lattice consists of a
    plurality of rows and columns of bubble domains which occupy a spatial
    arrangement which is determined to a substantial extent by the interaction
    between the bubbles.


CLS 365/4
TXT Decoder:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 having means to translate one bubble code
    to another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 347 for translating analog to
    digital, digital to analog, or digital to digital.


CLS 365/5
TXT Logic:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a logic function is performed by
    the bubble domain device.


CLS 365/6
TXT Rotating field circuits:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein drive circuits provide rotating
    in-plane magnetic fields in field accessed bubble domain devices.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also includes rotating field coil arrangement
    and structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, for oscillating drive circuits, per se.


CLS 365/7
TXT Detectors:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 where magnetic flux representing the bubble
    domain information is detected or sensed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 34+ for magnetic
    testing.

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses for demodulating elements
    whose resistance or reactance changes in response to an applied magnetic
    field.


CLS 365/8
TXT Magnetoresistive:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 where the detector includes an element
    exhibiting a magnetoresistive effect and that element and its associated
    effect is used to detect or sense magnetic flux from a bubble domain.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 46 for determining
    the characteristics of a magnetic field by a field responsive resistance.

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses for demodulating elements
    whose resistance or reactance changes in response to an applied magnetic
    field.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 215 for magnetostrictive type devices.


CLS 365/9
TXT Hall effect:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 where the detector includes an element
    exhibiting Hall effect and that element and its associated effect is used
    to detect or sense magnetic flux from a bubble domain.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 45 for determining
    the characteristics of a magnetic field utilizing the Hall effect.

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses for demodulating elements
    whose resistance or reactance changes in response to an applied magnetic
    field.


CLS 365/10
TXT Optical:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein the intensity of the flux emanating
    from the bubble information is determined by directing a beam of polarized
    light at the information location and detecting the rotation of
    polarization caused by the flux from a bubble domain.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    281+ and 484 where the properties of the polarized light beam are changed
    as a result of a magnetic field.


CLS 365/11
TXT Generators:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 where the bubble domain is generated or
    nucleated.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes the generation or nucleation of a
    bubble domain by a beam of polarized light.


CLS 365/12
TXT By splitting:

    Subject matter under subclass 11 where the bubble domain is generated by
    splitting (replication) an already existing bubble domain.


CLS 365/13
TXT Plural interacting paths:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 where a plurality of paths or channels
    containing bubble domains interact with each other by attraction or
    repulsion.


CLS 365/14
TXT Closed loop:

    Subject matter under subclass 13 where the path or channel is in the form
    of a closed loop.


CLS 365/15
TXT Major-minor:

    Subject matter under subclass 14 where the path or channel is in the form
    of a major (main) loop and minor (auxiliary) loop.


CLS 365/16
TXT With switch at interacting point:

    Subject matter under subclass 13 where there is a switch (conductor, bubble
    domain, different coercivity overlay, overlay spacing, etc.) in the path or
    channel for propagating the bubble domain into a particular path or channel.


CLS 365/17
TXT Idler switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 where the switch is of the idler type
    where a plurality of bubble domains are continuously recirculated until one
    bubble domain is ejected by an additional bubble domain that has been
    injected into the idler switch.


CLS 365/18
TXT Boundary:

    Subject matter under subclass 13 where the bubble domains interact but
    never cross the boundary located between the paths or channels, the paths
    or channels may be in the same medium or different mediums.


CLS 365/19
TXT Conductor propagation:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 where the bubble domains are propagated by
    energizing conductors associated with the bubble domains.


CLS 365/20
TXT Including A.C. signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 19 where at least one of the conductors is
    energized with an alternating current (A.C.) signal.


CLS 365/21
TXT Three phase signals:

    Subject matter under subclass 19 where a sequence of three conductors are
    energized

    by signals 120o out of phase.


CLS 365/22
TXT One's and zero's:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 where the bubble domain information is
    stored in the medium by its location in relation to a particular element or
    elements (conductor, overlay, path, or channel, etc.) within the bubble
    domain device.


CLS 365/23
TXT Plural direction propagation:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 where a single bubble domain may be
    propagated in more than a single direction such as forward and reverse,
    horizontal to vertical, or vice versa.


CLS 365/24
TXT Nonsequential:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 where the direction of propagation is
    altered by a nonsequential drive field.


CLS 365/25
TXT Velocity:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 where the velocity or speed of bubble
    domain propagation is significant.


CLS 365/26
TXT Turns:

    Subject matter under subclass 25 where the turns or corners between paths
    or channels are significant.


CLS 365/27
TXT Bias:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 where a magnetic bias field aids in the
    propagation of bubble domains.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded are bias fields used for making the size of the
    domain bubbles stable.


CLS 365/28
TXT Variable:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 where the magnetic bias field is variable.


CLS 365/29
TXT Strip domain:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 where the bubble domain is elongated into
    the form of a strip.


CLS 365/30
TXT In-plane field (nonrotating):

    Subject matter under subclass 1 where a magnetic field is provided in the
    direction of the plane of the magnetic bubble storage medium.

    (1)     Note.  The normal rotating field used for propagating bubbles is
    not included.


CLS 365/31
TXT Different size bubbles:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 where there are different size bubbles in
    the same medium or in different mediums.


CLS 365/32
TXT Multiple magnetic layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 where there are a plurality of storage
    layers or the combination of a storage layer and a second nonstorage
    magnetic layer.


CLS 365/33
TXT Magnetic storage material:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 where the particular material or
    composition of the storage medium is disclosed.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes mediums of the isotropic type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 62.51+ for magnetic compositions used as a
    storage medium.


CLS 365/34
TXT Amorphous:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 where the storage medium is of the
    amorphous type.


CLS 365/35
TXT Guide structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 where there is an element or elements for
    guiding a bubble domain along a path or channel, or a guide means outside
    the path or channel for confining the bubble domain within a particular
    path, channel, or area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for confinement (guide structure) means associated with lattice
    arrays.

    32,     where bubbles in another medium are used to guide the information
    bubbles.


CLS 365/36
TXT Ion implantation:

    Subject matter under subclass 35 where the guide structure is formed by ion
    implantation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 523+ for the use of ion plating or
    ion implantation.


CLS 365/37
TXT Slots or rails:

    Subject matter under subclass 35 where the guide structure is a groove or
    slot in the storage medium or a rail of permalloy on the surface of the
    storage medium.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes apertures in the storage medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     where the guide structure is a permalloy overlay in the shape of a
    circular dot or disc.


CLS 365/38
TXT Zigzag:

    Subject matter under subclass 35 where the guide structure is shaped in a
    zigzag fashion.


CLS 365/39
TXT Overlays:

    Subject matter under subclass 35 where an overlay of permalloy is used to
    guide the bubble domain along a path or channel.

    (1)     Note.  Not included are common permalloy overlays known as T-I bars
    and Y-I bars.


CLS 365/40
TXT On opposite sides of storage medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 where the overlays are on both sides of
    the storage medium.


CLS 365/41
TXT Dots:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 where the overlay is in the shape of a dot
    or disc.


CLS 365/42
TXT Wedges:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 where the overlay is in the shape of a
    wedge, also known as an angelfish.


CLS 365/43
TXT Chevrons:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 where the overlay is in the shape of a
    chevron; chevrons are shaped like sergeant strips.


CLS 365/44
TXT Rectangular bars:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 where the overlay is in the shape of a
    rectangular bar.

    (1)     Note.  Not included at I bars associated with common T-I bars and
    Y-I bars.


CLS 365/45
TXT ANALOG STORAGE SYSTEMS:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which the signal is a direct
    or analogous function of the information or intelligence stored.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 8.51 for
    cathode-ray tube (CRT) storage.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    subclasses 166+ for capacitor charging or discharging, per se.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    1+ for analog stor age systems where there is a holographic storage medium
    storing an analog information signal absent any electrical circitry.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for multiplex
    switching techniques similar to addressing or the handling of memory
    information signals.


CLS 365/46
TXT Resistive:

    Subject matter under subclass 45 where the storage element is resistive.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148,    for digital resistive storage elements.


CLS 365/47
TXT Thermoplastic:

    Subject matter under subclass 45 where the storage element is thermoplastic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126,    for digital thermoplastic storage elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, subclasses 113 for
    electrostatic marking devices in which a latent image is made visible by
    applying heat to cause plastic deformation of a charged medium.

    386,    Television Signal Processing for Dynamic Recording or Reproducing,
    subclass 127 for dynamic thermoplastic recording of television signal.


CLS 365/48
TXT Magnetic:

    Subject matter under subclass 45 where the storage element is magnetic.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    399,    Electrophotography, subclass 10 for storage of data on the
    operation of an electrophotographic device (i.e., log report) and subclass
    83 for job mode selection with memory.


CLS 365/49
TXT ASSOCIATIVE MEMORIES:

    Subject matter under the class definition where the information is
    retrieved based on content rather than location; associative memories are
    also referred to as content or tag memories.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    1+ for associative storage systems where there is a holographic storage
    medium storing information absent any electrical circuitry.

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclass 108 for content addressable memory in a memory accessing and
    control system in a digital data processing system and subclass 128 for
    associative memory in a hierarchical caching memory accessing and control
    system in a digital data processing system.


CLS 365/50
TXT Magnetic:

    Subject matter under subclass 49 where the associative memories storage
    elements are magnetic.


CLS 365/51
TXT FORMAT OR DISPOSITION OF ELEMENTS:

    Subject matter under the class definition with specific details of the
    physical or spatial arrangement of the elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     for hardware associated with storage elements.

    63,     for wiring paths of storage elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 592.1+ for the processes of mechanical
    manufacture of storage elements.


CLS 365/52
TXT HARDWARE FOR STORAGE ELEMENTS: Subject matter under the class definition
    having mechanical components or parts which assist in the operation of the
    storage element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for physical arrangement of storage elements.

    63,     for connections between storage elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 50+ for
    electrical boxes and housings.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 600+ for
    hardware and mounting assembly with plural diverse electrical components.


CLS 365/53
TXT Shields:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 which includes means associated with the
    storage device for reducing or preventing electric or magnetic coupling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206,    for noise suppression.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 91 for
    magnetic or electrostatic field control shielding coupled to other systems.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 170 for interstage coupling with shielding
    means.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 607+ for an electrical connector
    having or providing inductive or capacitive shielding.


CLS 365/54
TXT Ground plane:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 which includes a ground plane as one of
    the components of the storage device.


CLS 365/55
TXT Magnetic:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein the storage device is magnetic.


CLS 365/56
TXT Spacers:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 which includes means associated with a
    storage device for separating storage elements or components of the storage
    device.


CLS 365/57
TXT Keeper:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 which includes a component of the storage
    device which is made of highly permeable material and is used to focus or
    concentrate the magnetic flux emanating from the storage device.


CLS 365/58
TXT Slot:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 where a groove or slot is located within
    one of the components of the storage device or the storage element itself.


CLS 365/59
TXT Embedded conductor:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein a conductor is embedded within one
    of the components of the magnetic device or the magnetic element itself.


CLS 365/60
TXT Air gap:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 where an air gap or an air gap space
    filled with a material which has a permeability of about one is located
    within the storage element, within components associated with the device or
    between the element and components.


CLS 365/61
TXT Hairpin conductor:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 where a conductor associated with the
    storage device has the general shape of a hairpin.


CLS 365/62
TXT Permanent magnet:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 where a permanent magnet is used as a
    component in the magnetic storage device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 209 for magnets, per se.


CLS 365/63
TXT INTERCONNECTION ARRANGEMENTS:

    Subject matter under the class definition having physical paths by which
    information is transferred to, from, or between storage elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189.01+, for reading or writing information from or into a static memory
    device.


CLS 365/64
TXT Optical:

    Subject matter under subclass 63 in which optical elements or paths are
    used to contact storage elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215,    for reading and writing a memory location with an optical beam.

    234,    for locating a memory location with an optical beam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 227 for prephotocell system which includes
    light conducting rods, subclass 551 for optical/electrical signal
    isolators, subclass 553 for solid-state light source with an array or
    matrix of photocells.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    1+ for storage systems where there is a holographic storage medium storing
    information signals absent any electrical circuitry.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, appropriate subclasses for light transmitting
    fibers, rods, or pipes.


CLS 365/65
TXT Ferroelectric:

    Subject matter under subclass 63 where the interconnected storage elements
    are ferroelectric devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109     and 117, for ferroelectric memories involving radiant energy.

    145,    for other ferroelectric memories.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    349,    Liquid Crystal Cells, Elements and Systems, subclasses 37, 49, and
    172+ for light control in ferroelectric liquid crystal devices.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    245+ for light control with ferroelectric devices and subclass 484 for
    polarization using ferroelectric devices.


CLS 365/66
TXT Magnetic:

    Subject matter under subclass 63 where the storage elements are magnetic
    devices.


CLS 365/67
TXT Plural diagonal:

    Subject matter under subclass 66 in which single or plural windings are
    threaded or coupled to the magnetic elements at an angle of approximately
    45o to the row or columns.  For example:



CLS 365/68
TXT Tree:

    Subject matter under subclass 66 where the interconnections of the cells
    are shaped as a divergent branching arrangement with each preceding cell
    output connected to a plurality of succeeding cells or vice versa.  For
    example:



CLS 365/69
TXT Crossover:

    Subject matter under subclass 66 where a row (column) of cells are
    interconnected to an adjacent row (column) by mutually crossing over prior
    to the end of the row (column).  For example:



CLS 365/70
TXT Woven:

    Subject matter under subclass 66 where the magnetic storage cells are
    interconnected by windings which are woven as a weft and warp.  For example:



CLS 365/71
TXT Negative resistance:

    Subject matter under subclass 63 where the interconnected storage elements
    exhibit negative resistance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159,    for negative resistance storage elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 568+ for miscellaneous circuits utilizing a negative
    resistance device.


CLS 365/72
TXT Transistors or diodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 63 where the interconnected storage elements
    are transistors or diodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    105 and 174+, for particular transistor or diode storage elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses for transistors and diodes, per se.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous circuits using
    transistors or diodes.


CLS 365/73
TXT RECIRCULATION STORES:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which the output of a storage
    element is connected back to its input, i.e., to form a storage loop.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not accept shift registers, per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     for stepwise movement which does not loop the output of a storage
    element back to its input.

    80,     for magnetic shift registers which do not have a feedback means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for multiplex
    switching techniques similar to addressing or the handling of memory
    information signals.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclasses 122, 124 and 126 for ring counters and
    subclass 129 for pulse counters where the pulse are continuously circulated
    in a closed loop.


CLS 365/74
TXT Magnetic:

    Subject matter under subclass 73 where the recirculation storage device
    uses magnetic storage elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     for magnetic shift registers.


CLS 365/75
TXT Stepwise:

    Subject matter under subclass 73 wherein the information is moved through
    the memory in a stepwise manner.


CLS 365/76
TXT Delay lines:

    Subject matter under subclass 73 wherein the information is moved through a
    delay line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93,     for magnetic shift registers which include a delay means.

    194,    for read/write circuits which include a delay signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 138+ for delay
    lines, per se.


CLS 365/77
TXT Plural paths:

    Subject matter under subclass 73 wherein the information is recirculated
    through plural paths.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 351+ for pathfinding or
    routing in multiplex communications which may include a static memory
    device.


CLS 365/78
TXT PLURAL SHIFT REGISTER MEMORY DEVICES:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which information flows
    through two or more shift registers which are used in a static memory
    system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclasses 109+ for more than nominal recitation of a shift register in
    combination with accessing and control in a digital data processing
    environment and subclasses 117+ for hierarchical memory accessing and
    control.


CLS 365/80
TXT MAGNETIC SHIFT REGISTERS:

    Subject matter under the class definition where information is transferred
    (shifted) from one magnetic element to another along an array.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclasses 57 and 64.


CLS 365/81
TXT Bidirectional:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 in which information can be shifted
    forward or backward.


CLS 365/82
TXT Two cells per bit:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 in which two magnetic elements are
    required to store a single bit of information.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131,    for nonshifting systems which require two elements to store a
    single bit of information.


CLS 365/83
TXT SiPo/PiSo:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 where the magnetic shift register has a
    serial input with parallel out or vice versa.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219,    for read/write circuits which have serial input with parallel out
    or vice versa.


CLS 365/84
TXT Core in transfer loop:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 where a magnetic core is located in the
    transfer loop between the storage elements of the shift register.


CLS 365/85
TXT Continuous:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 having a magnetic shift register where the
    magnetic element is composed of a continuous material with a plurality of
    storage positions along its length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    for nonshifting systems which use continuous type storage elements.


CLS 365/86
TXT Plated wire:

    Subject matter under subclass 85 having a continuous magnetic element which
    is a nonmagnetic wire, ribbon, or tube that is coated with a thin magnetic
    film.


CLS 365/87
TXT Thin film:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 having a magnetic shift register where the
    device is a thin film cell which has a thickness of approximately 1 to
    12,000 angstroms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86,     for magnetic shift register where the element is composed of a
    continuous thin film material.

    171,    for a nonshifting system where the element is a thin film material.


CLS 365/88
TXT Domain tip:

    Subject matter under subclass 87 where the magnetic element has a domain in
    the shape of a tear, "lenicular".


CLS 365/89
TXT Logic:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 where a magnetic shift register is used as
    a logic device.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is limited to logic circuits wherein the
    magnetic element is used as a storage device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 406,
    407, and 408 for logic circuits which are saturable reactor devices.

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, appropriate subclasses for
    electronic digital logic circuits.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 700+
    for logic devices which perform mathematical computations.


CLS 365/90
TXT Multiaperture cell:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 having magnetic shift registers where the
    cell contains two or more apertures for storing information.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140,    for a multiaperture cell used in a nonshifting magnetic system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 408
    and 422 for multiaperture cells in nonlinear reactor systems.


CLS 365/91
TXT Ladder:

    Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein the cell has an array of apertures
    in the shape of squares or rectangles.


CLS 365/92
TXT With other type core:

    Subject matter under subclass 90 where the magnetic shift register includes
    multiaperture cells plus other types of storage cells.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclasses 1+ for addressing combined with specific memory configurations
    (e.g., extended, expanded, dynamic, etc.) and subclasses 101+ for storage
    accessing and control of specific memory compositions in a digital data
    processing system.


CLS 365/93
TXT Including delay means:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 where a magnetic shift register includes a
    delay network or delay means.

    (1)     Note.  The mere delay of a signal is not appropriate subject matter
    for this subclass since all shift registers inherently delay a signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76,     for recirculation storage device which includes delay lines.

    194,    for read/write circuits which use a delay signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 93+ for clocking or
    synchronizing of logic gates or stages.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, particularly subclasses 261+ and 392+ for miscellaneous circuits
    utilizing delay.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 138+ for passive
    delay networks.


CLS 365/94
TXT READ ONLY SYSTEMS (I.E., SEMI-PERMANENT):

    Subject matter under the class definition in which information stored is
    not usually erased, e.g., destructively stored, as for repetitive readout.

    (1)     Note.  Read only systems are normally read by an addressing means
    where coded record sensors are usually scanned spatially.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for information masking.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 435+ for coded record sensors.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    appropriate subclass for a switch, per se.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.79+ for selective
    matrix.


CLS 365/95
TXT With override (i.e., latent image):

    Subject matter under subclass 94 wherein the original information may be
    temporarily overridden, i.e., memory may be operated as read/write with
    read only information recoverable.


CLS 365/96
TXT Fusible:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 wherein the storage element is a fusible
    link.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 50, 530 and 928 for shorted, (e.g., anti-fuse, element's).


CLS 365/97
TXT Magnetic:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 where the rod only memory uses magnetic
    storage elements.


CLS 365/98
TXT Random core:

    Subject matter under subclass 97 in which the storage system is composed of
    a magnetic matrix where some of the intersections have storage elements and
    other interconnections do not.


CLS 365/99
TXT Random writing:

    Subject matter under subclass 97 in which the storage system is composed of
    a magnetic matrix with storage elements at its intersections of which only
    some are wired.


CLS 365/100
TXT Resistive:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 wherein the storage element is resistive.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148,    for other resistive storage elements.


CLS 365/101
TXT Inductive:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 wherein the storage element in inductive.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129,    for other inductive storage elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, for inductors, per se.


CLS 365/102
TXT Capacitative:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 wherein the storage element is
    capacitative.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149,    for other capacitative storage elements.


CLS 365/103
TXT Semiconductive:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 wherein the storage element is a
    semiconductor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174+,   for other semiconductor storage elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, for methods of making
    semiconductor memory devices.


CLS 365/104
TXT Transistors:

    Subject matter under subclass 103 wherein the semiconductor storage element
    includes one or more transistors.


CLS 365/105
TXT Diodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 103 wherein the semiconductor storage element
    includes one or more diodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    for radiant energy memory systems which use diodes.

    175,    for other diode storage elements.


CLS 365/106
TXT RADIANT ENERGY:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the condition or state of
    a memory material or element is altered in accordance with the information
    stored.

    (1)     Note.  The material is altered by a radiation beam and/or changes
    its own state of generating radiation. Information is usually read out
    electrically, e.g., a semiconductive material is irradiated to cause it to
    conduct.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for optical interconnection arrangements.

    120,    for radiant energy storage using informational masking.

    215     and 234, for optical read/write circuits and addressing circuits,
    respectively.

    237,    for electron beam addressing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, for radiant energy devices, per se.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 10, 11, 21, 53-56, 113-118, 184-189, 225-234, 257, 258, 290-294,
    and 414-470 for radiation-sensitive active semiconductor devices.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, for lamp and discharge
    devices, per se.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, for lamp and
    discharge systems.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 514+ for miscellaneous circuits effected by light.

    346,    Recorders, subclasses 107.1+ for optical recorders for recording
    phenomenal information.

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, subclasses 224+ for
    radiation marking, particularly subclass 264 for record receiver or
    handling means therefor, subclasses 225+ for scanning apparatus or method
    for marking information, particularly subclass 262 for record receiver or
    handling means therefor, and subclasses 129+ for electrostatic recorders
    including photoscanning device.

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 296 for facsimile recording.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, for
    optical devices, per se, and systems.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 100+ for
    optical sound recorders.

    386,    Television Signal Processing for Dynamic Recording or Reproducing,
    subclasses 42+ and 128+ for recording or reproducing of televison signal
    using light or beam, subclass 126 for television recording having optical
    disc, and subclass 127 for dynamic thermoplastic recording of television
    signal.


CLS 365/107
TXT Chemical fluids:

    Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein the memory material is a chemical
    fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for analog chemical fluid storage devices.

    153,    for electrochemical storage elements not using radiant energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclass 68 for recording devices.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 62.2 for chemical fluids, per se, used in
    electrical devices.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 94 for measuring
    electricity with a chemical fluid.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, appropriate subclasses for radiation sensitive compositions and
    elements.


CLS 365/108
TXT Liquid crystal:

    Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein the memory material is a liquid
    crystal, i.e., nematic liquid crystal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 38, 50+, and 87+ for liquid
    crystal display devices with selective electrical control means for
    providing a human sensible image or message to be displayed.

    349,    Liquid Crystal Cells, Elements and Systems, appropriate subclasses
    for light control with liquid crystal materials.


CLS 365/109
TXT Photoconductive and ferroelectric:

    Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein the memory element has both
    photoconductive and ferroelectric properties and/or materials.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    for photoconductive memory elements.

    117,    for ferroelectric memory elements using radiant energy.

    145,    for ferroelectric memory elements not using radiant energy.


CLS 365/110
TXT Electroluminescent and photoconductive:

    Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein the memory element has both
    solid-state electroluminescent and photoconductive properties and/or
    materials.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111,    for electroluminescent memory elements.

    112,    for photoconductive memory elements.


CLS 365/111
TXT Electroluminescent:

    Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein the storage material is a
    solid-state electroluminescent material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for information masking storage where the electroluminescent
    element is used as a radiation source and not to store information.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 458.1+ for luminophor irradiation,
    subclasses 483.1+ for luminescent devices.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.79+ for
    electroluminescent switching matrices.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 36, 45, and 76+ for
    electroluminescent display devices combined with selective electrical
    control means for producing a human sensible image or message.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclass 158 for image reproduction and display
    therefore.


CLS 365/112
TXT Photoconductive:

    Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein the storage material is a
    photoconductive material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for photosensitive cells and
    circuits.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 514+ for miscellaneous light sensitive circuits.


CLS 365/113
TXT Amorphous:

    Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein the storage material can be
    changed from a crystalline (ordered) structure to an amorphous (disordered)
    structure by means of radiant energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163,    for amorphous storage elements using electrical properties.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 2-5, 16, 52-63, 646, and 650
    for amorphous material devices.


CLS 365/114
TXT Semiconductive:

    Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein the storage material is a
    semiconductor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174,    for semiconductive storage elements not involving radiant energy.


CLS 365/115
TXT Diodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 114 wherein the semiconductive storage device
    includes one or more diodes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 533 for photocells with solid-state
    light-emitting diodes in the configuration of an array or matrix.


CLS 365/116
TXT Plasma:

    Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein the storage element is a gaseous
    discharge device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, for appropriate discharge
    device, per se.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 169.4 for
    gas display panel device with energizing means.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 37, 41+, and 60+ for gaseous
    discharge display devices combined with selective electrical control means
    for providing a human sensible image or message to be displayed.


CLS 365/117
TXT Ferroelectric:

    Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein the storage element is a
    ferroelectric material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109,    for ferroelectric plus photoconductive radiant energy storage
    elements.

    121,    for storage of information using informational masking with
    polarization wherein the polarizer may be a ferroelectric device.

    145,    for ferroelectric memory elements not involving radiation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    245+ for light control with ferroelectric devices and subclasses 484 for
    polarization using ferroelectric devices.


CLS 365/118
TXT Electron beam:

    Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein the memory material has its state
    changed by radiant energy which is an electron beam.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass will accept cathode-ray tube (CRT) storage
    with random access means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128,    for memories using electron beams for information masking, e.g.,
    CRT with masking means.

    217,    for read/write circuits for an electron beam storage system.

    237,    for addressing a memory with an electron beam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, appropriate subclass for electron beam devices,
    particularly subclasses 492.1+ for irradiating of objects or materials.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 391 for CRT storage
    device, per se.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 8.5+ for
    electron beam storage systems and subclasses 84.5+ for gaseous discharge
    tube storage systems.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 99 for counters using beam type tubes.

    386,    Television Signal Processing for Dynamic Recording or Reproducing,
    appropriate subclass for video signal which includes electron beam devices.


CLS 365/119
TXT Color centers:

    Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein the memory material is a crystal
    containing local imperfections, which will absorb (or generate) light of a
    particular frequency (color) depending on the energy level of the electron
    at the imperfection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    349,    Liquid Crystal Cells, Elements and Systems, subclasses 69 through
    71 for color liquid crystal material used in light control.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 541+ for radiation sensitive color changing composition.


CLS 365/120
TXT INFORMATION MASKING:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a radiant beam is altered
    as a function of the information stored, e.g., light beam used to read
    information stored as transparent and opaque areas in a memory element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    for memories using radiant energy without information masking.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 454+ for sensing records with light beams.

    346,    Recorders, subclasses 107.1+ for optical recorders for recording
    phenomenal information, subclass 74.1 for magnetic visible image recording.

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, subclasses 224+ for
    radiation marking, particularly subclass 264 for record receiver or
    handling means therefor, subclasses 225+ for scanning apparatus or method
    for marking information, particularly subclass 262 for record receiver or
    handling means therefor, and subclasses 129+ for electrostatic recorders
    including photoscanning device.

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 296+ for facsimile recording.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 100+ for
    optical sound recorders.

    386,    Television Signal Processing for Dynamic Recording or Reproducing,
    subclasses 30, 38, 108, 117+, 128+ for photographic television recording,
    subclass 126 for televison recording having optical disc, and subclass 127
    for dynamic thermoplastic recording or television signal.


CLS 365/121
TXT Polarization:

    Subject matter under subclass 120 wherein the polarization of the radiation
    beam is altered as a function of the information stored.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for polarization with ferroelectric memory materials.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    240+ and 484 for changing the properties of polarized light by an applied
    field.


CLS 365/122
TXT Magneto-optical:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the polarization is altered by a
    memory material which has magneto-optic properties.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 114 for
    magneto-optic recording heads.


CLS 365/123
TXT Bragg cells:

    Subject matter under subclass 120 wherein a Bragg cell is used to diffract
    a light beam into plural light beams.


CLS 365/124
TXT Diffraction:

    Subject matter under subclass 120 wherein the radiation beam is diffracted
    as a function of the information stored.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 345+ for measuring
    systems using diffracted light.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    566+ for diffraction gratings.


CLS 365/125
TXT Holograms:

    Subject matter under subclass 124 wherein object and reference beams are
    required to store information.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216,    for circuits used to read/write holographic memories.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclass 457 for holographic card readers.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    1+ for storage systems where there is a holographic storage medium storing
    information signal absent any electrical circuitry.


CLS 365/126
TXT Thermoplastic:

    Subject matter under subclass 120 wherein the radiation beam is altered by
    different thicknesses of a thermoplastic memory material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, subclass 113 for
    electrostatic marking apparatus and processes in which a latent image is
    made visible by applying heat to cause plastic deformation of a charged
    medium.

    386,    Television Signal Processing for Dynamic Recording or Reproducing,
    subclass 127 for dynamic thermoplastic recording of television signal.


CLS 365/127
TXT Transparency:

    Subject matter under subclass 120 wherein the radiation beam is altered by
    the transparent and opaque areas of the memory material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for amorphous memories exhibiting transparency properties.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 454+ for optical card readers.

    386,    Television Signal Processing for Dynamic Recording or Reproducing,
    subclasses 30, 38, 42+, 108, 117+, and 128+ for photographic television
    recording, and subclass 126 for television recording having optical disc.


CLS 365/128
TXT Electron beams:

    Subject matter under subclass 120 wherein the radiation beam being altered
    is an electron beam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118,    for other electron beam memories.

    237,    for circuits to direct an electron beam to a memory location.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, appropriate subclass for electron beam devices.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 391+ for
    cathode-ray tube (CRT) storage device, per se.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 8.5+ for
    electron beam storage systems and subclasses 84.5+ for gaseous discharge
    tube storage systems.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 99 for counters using beam type tubes.


CLS 365/129
TXT SYSTEMS USING PARTICULAR ELEMENTS:

    Subject matter under the class definition where the type of storage element
    used is significant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94+,    for storage elements used as read only memories.

    106+,   for storage elements involving radiant energy.

    120+,   for storage elements involving informational masking.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
     appropriate subclasses for particular active solid-state devices which may
    be found in a static memory device, including subclasses 225, 260, 390,
    391, 903, 904, and 910 for solid-state static memory or memory element
    structure.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, for appropriate lamp and
    discharge devices, per se.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, for particular
    circuits using appropriate lamp and discharge devices.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses and particularly subclasses 199+ for
    bistable devices which may be used in memory cells or arrays.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, for
    particular optical elements.


CLS 365/130
TXT Three-dimensional magnetic array:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 where the magnetic storage elements are
    arrayed in three dimensions.


CLS 365/131
TXT Two magnetic cells per bit:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 where two magnetic elements are used to
    store a single bit of information.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     for two cells per bit magnetic shift registers.


CLS 365/132
TXT Different size cores:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 where at least two of the magnetic
    elements in the system have different dimensions or a different number of
    winding turns.


CLS 365/133
TXT Cells of diverse coercivity:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 in which the material of different
    magnetic elements or the same magnetic element exhibits diverse magnetic
    properties.


CLS 365/134
TXT Continuous cell:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 where the magnetic element is composed of
    a continuous material with a plurality of storage positions along its
    length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85,     for magnetic shift registers which use continuous cells as its
    storage elements.


CLS 365/135
TXT Elongated or bar-shaped cell:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 where the cross section of the magnetic
    storage element is small compared to its length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86,     for magnetic shift registers which use plated wire as the storage
    element.


CLS 365/136
TXT Twisters:

    Subject matter under subclass 135 where the magnetic storage element has an
    easy axis in the helical direction (approximately 45) or is a wire and is
    formed in the shape of a helix.


CLS 365/137
TXT Tubular:

    Subject matter under subclass 135 where the magnetic storage element is in
    the shape of a hollow tube.


CLS 365/138
TXT Chain:

    Subject matter under subclass 135 where the magnetic storage device is an
    elongated element with circular aperture storage positions along its length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     for magnetic shift registers wherein the storage device is an
    elongated element with square or rectangular storage apertures.


CLS 365/139
TXT Plated wire:

    Subject matter under subclass 135 having a continuous element which is a
    nonmagnetic wire or ribbon that is coated with a thin magnetic film.

    (1)     Note.  A wire is considered to be an elongated material of
    indeterminate length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86,     for magnetic shift registers which use continuous plated wire as
    its storage elements.

    171,    for magnetic thin film storage elements which are not of the
    continuous type.


CLS 365/140
TXT Multiaperture cell:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 having a magnetic cell which contains two
    or more apertures for storing information.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90,     for magnetic shift registers which use multiaperture storage cells.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 408
    and 422 for multiaperture cells in nonlinear reactor systems.


CLS 365/141
TXT Apertured plate:

    Subject matter under subclass 140 where a plurality of apertures in a
    magnetic plate are in a common plane which formulates rows and columns.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90,     for magnetic shift registers which use multiaperture storage cells.


CLS 365/142
TXT Aperture with transverse axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 140 where the axes of the apertures of the
    multiaperture element are not parallel.


CLS 365/143
TXT Biax:

    Subject matter under subclass 142 where the axes of the aperture are
    perpendicular.


CLS 365/144
TXT Same size apertures:

    Subject matter under subclass 140 where all of the apertures of the
    multiaperture element are the same size.


CLS 365/145
TXT Ferroelectric:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 where the storage element is
    ferroelectric.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65,     for interconnection arrangements which use ferroelectric storage
    elements.

    109     and 117, for ferroelectrics involving radiant energy.

    157,    for piezoelectric storage devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 62.9 for a composition designed for use as
    piezoelectric material.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 311+ for
    piezoelectric devices.

    349,    Liquid Crystal Cells, Elements and Systems, subclasses 37, 49, and
    172+ for light control in ferroelectric liquid crystal devices.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    245+ for light control with ferroelectric devices and subclass 484 for
    polarization using ferroelectric devices.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 321.1+ for
    ferroelectric capacitors, per se.


CLS 365/146
TXT Electrets:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 in which the storage medium is an
    electret, that is, an element which exhibits a permanent external
    electrostatic field due to internal polarization.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145,    for ferroelectric storage systems.

    147,    for persistent internal polarization devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 400
    for electrets used in saturable reactor systems.


CLS 365/147
TXT Persistent internal polarization (PIP):

    Subject matter under subclass 129 in which storage is effected and
    information is represented by the persistent internal polarization by an
    established electric field in a photoconductive dielectric medium, i.e.,
    photoelectret.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    355,    Photocopying, subclasses 3+ for electric photography.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 31+ for elements of electrical photography and
    radiation sensitive conductive compositions.


CLS 365/148
TXT Resistive:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 in which the storage element is an
    electrically resistive member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    for semipermanent resistor memories.

    112,    for optically controlled resistive devices, i.e., photoconductors.

    160,    for magnetically controlled resistive devices, i.e.,
    superconductors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for photocell devices.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 13+ for resistance value
    responsive to a condition, subclass 32 for superconductors.


CLS 365/149
TXT Capacitors:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 in which the storage element is a
    capacitative device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for semipermanent capacitor memories.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 108
    for pulse generators using a capacitor and subclasses 109 and 110 for other
    capacitor circuits storing energy.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    subclasses 166+ for capacitor charging or discharging, per se.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous circuits utilizing a
    capacitive storage element.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 271+ for
    capacitors, per se, subclasses 500+ for electrolytic capacitors, systems
    and devices.


CLS 365/150
TXT Inherent:

    Subject matter under subclass 149 wherein the capacitor is the inherent
    capacitance of a circuit element.


CLS 365/151
TXT Molecular or atomic:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 in which information is stored at a
    molecular, atomic, a subatomic level, or arrangement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    for color centers (photochromatic material).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 527 for
    the application of atomic or nuclear physics.


CLS 365/152
TXT Nuclear induction or spin echo:

    Subject matter under subclass 151 which exploits nuclear induction spin
    echo capability for information storage and retrieval.


CLS 365/153
TXT Electrochemical:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 where an electrochemical material is used
    for the storage and retrieval of information.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for analog electrochemical storage devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 25.03 for the manufacture of electrolytic
    type devices.

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, appropriate
    subclasses for producing electricity by electrochemical action.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclasses for
    electrolytic devices utilized to produce chemical change, as for example,
    electroplating cells, and for analytical and control electrolytic devices,
    such as pH cells.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 62.2 for electrolytes for electrical
    devices, and subclass 62.3 for barrier layer device compositions.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 132 for arc lamps having electrolytic resistances.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass for charging or discharging an electrolytic capacitor
    or an electrolytic cell.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 79 for the control
    of the generator circuit by the use of electrolytic impedances.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 425+ for
    electrolytic testing systems, such as pH measuring systems.

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses for electrolytic type
    demodulators.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 80+ for mechanically variable
    liquid resistors, and subclass 222 for fixed value liquid resistors.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 500+ for
    electrolytic systems and devices.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclass 140 for rectifying
    systems utilizing electrolytic rectifiers.


CLS 365/154
TXT Flip-flop (electrical):

    Subject matter under subclass 129 in which the storage element is an
    electrical bistable multivibrator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for flip-flop systems having significant interconnection
    arrangements.

    190,    for read/write circuit which uses a complementary information
    storage cell.

    204,    for flip-flops used for sensing information.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 406
    for magnetic flip-flop devices.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 185+ for miscellaneous flip-flop circuits.


CLS 365/155
TXT Plural emitter or collector:

    Subject matter under subclass 154 in which the flip-flop is made up of
    solid-state devices which have plural emitters or plural collectors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179,    for a memory system using plural emitter or collector device as a
    semiconductive storage element (nonflip-flop).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
     appropriate subclasses for active solid-state devices having
    multiple/plural emitters or collectors, especially subclasses 164-166 and
    560-564.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 577 and 578 for miscellaneous transistor circuits
    having multiple collectors or emitters.


CLS 365/156
TXT Complementary:

    Subject matter under subclass 154 employing devices having complementary
    (pnp and npn) conductivity components.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181,    for a memory system using complementary conductivity semiconductive
    device as a storage element (nonflip-flop).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, appropriate subclasses for
    logic circuits utilizing complementary FET devices.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 214, 484+, and 576 for miscellaneous circuits utilizing
    complementary transistors.


CLS 365/157
TXT Magnetostrictive or piezoelectric:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 in which the storage element is
    magnetostrictive or piezoelectric, that is, the shrinkage or expansion of a
    material when placed in a magnetic or electric field, respectively.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76+,    for recirculation stores using magnetostrictive or piezoelectric
    delay lines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 311+ for
    piezoelectric devices.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 138+ for delay
    networks which use a magnetostrictive device.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 215 for magnetostrictive type devices.


CLS 365/158
TXT Magnetoresistive:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 in which the storage element changes in
    electrical conductivity when a magnetic field is applied.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 32+ for magnetoresistive devices,
    per se.


CLS 365/159
TXT Negative resistance:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 in which the storage element exhibits
    negative resistance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for negative resistance interconnection arrangements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, particularly subclasses 568+ for miscellaneous negative resistance
    device circuits.


CLS 365/160
TXT Superconductive:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 in which the storage element is
    superconductive in that it has a finite electrical resistance at particular
    (usually normal) temperatures and magnetic field strength and zero
    resistance at (usually) cryogenic temperatures and low field strengths, the
    change of resistance or presence or absence of current in the
    superconductor being used to signify information.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 1+ for
    superconductive logic circuits.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 186+ and 527+ for miscellaneous circuits utilizing
    superconducting elements.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 216 for superconductive type magnetic devices.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 32+ for superconductors, per se.


CLS 365/161
TXT Thin film:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 in which the superconductor is in
    addition a thin film device.


CLS 365/162
TXT Josephson:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 in which information is stored as a
    function of tunneling in a Josephson junction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 31-36 for Josephson devices, per se.


CLS 365/163
TXT Amorphous (electrical):

    Subject matter under subclass 129 in which information is stored as a
    function of the electrical condition of an amorphous material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for amorphous which are effected by radiant energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 2-5, 16, 49+, especially 52-63, 646 and 650 for amorphous
    material devices.


CLS 365/164
TXT Electrical contacts:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 in which information is stored as a
    function of the condition (e.g., presence or absence, opened or closed) of
    electrical contacts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 568 for memory devices using
    contacts activated by cams.


CLS 365/165
TXT Coherer:

    Subject matter under subclass 164 where storage device contacts are
    embedded in a cohere material which is responsive to a current or pressure
    by a physical change (usually from a solid coherent mass to a powder) which
    effects a change in the material resistance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, appropriate subclass for coherer devices, per
    se.


CLS 365/166
TXT Relay:

    Subject matter under subclass 164 in which the storage element is one or
    more relays.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, appropriate subclass for relay devices, per se.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 160+ for
    electric relay circuits.


CLS 365/167
TXT Simulating biological cells:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 in which information is stored in a
    device which simulates the function of a living nerve cell.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 24+ for
    electronic circuits for stimulating the gross operational function of
    living nerve cells.


CLS 365/168
TXT Ternary:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 which uses storage cells having three
    stable states.


CLS 365/169
TXT Gunn effect:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 in which the storage element is an
    electrical shock wave responsive or generative device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 6-8 for Gunn effect oscillators.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous circuitry employing Gunn
    effect devices.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 107 for Gunn effect oscillators.


CLS 365/170
TXT Hall effect:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 in which the storage element or a
    component of the storage element exhibits Hall effect characteristics.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 45 for determining
    the characteristics of a magnetic field utilizing the Hall effect.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 187 for a stable state circuit with a Hall element and
    subclass 511 for a miscellaneous circuit utilizing a Hall element.

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses for demodulating elements
    whose resistance or reactance changes in response to an applied magnetic
    field.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 32 for Hall effect devices.


CLS 365/171
TXT Magnetic thin film:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 where the storage element is a thin film
    cell which has a thickness of approximately 1 to 12,000 angstroms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87,     for magnetic shift registers which use thin film storage elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 403
    for saturable reactor systems which use thin film components.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 567 for a miscellaneous circuit utilizing a thin film
    device.


CLS 365/172
TXT Isotropic:

    Subject matter under subclass 171 in which the thin film device has a
    plurality of easy axes of magnetization.


CLS 365/173
TXT Multiple magnetic storage layers:

    Subject matter under subclass 171 where information is stored in a
    plurality of magnetic layers within the thin film device.

    (1)     Note.  Included within this subclass are thin film devices
    containing a storage layer and a read out layer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130,    for three-dimensional magnetic storage devices where the adjacent
    layers are separate.


CLS 365/174
TXT Semiconductive:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 in which information is stored and
    retrieved from a semiconductive material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for transistor or diode interconnection arrangement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses for active semiconductive material devices, per se.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous nonlinear circuits
    utilizing semiconducting devices.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, for methods of making
    semiconductor memory devices; see the search notes therein.


CLS 365/175
TXT Diodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 174 in which the semiconductor storage
    element is a diode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for transistor or diode interconnection arrangements.

    105,    for read only memory systems which use semiconductive diodes.

    115,    for radiant energy memory systems which use semiconductive diodes.

    243,    for current steering diodes in an addressing storage system.


CLS 365/176
TXT Silicon on sapphire (SoS):

    Subject matter under subclass 174 in which the storage element is silicon
    on sapphire material.


CLS 365/177
TXT Bipolar and FET:

    Subject matter under subclass 174 in which bipolar and field effect
    transistors are used together in a storage system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 273, 370 and 378 for combined bipolar and field effect devices.


CLS 365/178
TXT Ion  implantation:

    Subject matter under subclass 174 in which the semiconductive storage
    member is subjected to modification by ion implantation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, for methods of making
    semiconductor memory devices; see the search notes therein.


CLS 365/179
TXT Plural emitter or collector:

    Subject matter under subclass 174 in which the semiconductive storage
    element is either a plural emitter or a plural collector device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155,    for flip-flop storage devices which use plural emitter or collector
    semiconductive materials.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses for active solid-state devices having
    multiple/plural emitters or collectors, especially subclasses 164-166 and
    560-564.


CLS 365/180
TXT Four layer devices:

    Subject matter under subclass 174 in which four layer devices are used
    (e.g., pnpn transistors).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
     subclasses 107-181 for regenerative type devices.

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, appropriate subclasses for
    electronic logic circuits utilizing four or more layer devices.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses  for miscellaneous circuits utilizing four
    or more layer devices.


CLS 365/181
TXT Complementary conductivity:

    Subject matter under subclass 174 in which the storage elements are of
    complementary conductivity (e.g., pnp plus npn).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156,    for flip-flop storage devices which use complementary elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses, including regenerative type devices in subclasses
    107-181, bipolar devices in subclasses 565+, and field effect devices in
    subclasses 213+.

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, appropriate subclasses  for
    logic circuits which utilize complementary transistors.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, particularly subclass 576 for miscellaneous circuits utilizing
    complementary transistors.


CLS 365/182
TXT Insulated gate devices:

    Subject matter under subclass 174 in which the storage element is an
    insulated gate device (e.g., FET).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses, including subclasses 288-413 for devices with an
    insulated electrode, including insulated gate electrode.

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, appropriate subclasses for
    logic circuits utilizing field-effect transistors.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous circuits utilizing
    field-effect transistors.


CLS 365/183
TXT Charge coupled:

    Subject matter under subclass 182 in which the storage element is a charge
    coupled device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses, including subclasses 215+, for charge transfer type
    active semiconductor devices, per se.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 63 for charge-coupled devices used as pulse
    counters and shift registers.


CLS 365/184
TXT Variable threshold:

    Subject matter under subclass 182 in which the storage device is a FET
    transistor which has a variable threshold gate, e.g., MNOS.


CLS 365/185.01
TXT FLOATING GATE:

    Subject matter under class definition  wherein a device stores and
    retrieves information from a conductive insulated gate that indefinitely
    holds an amount of charge having a specific polarity, and it is
    electrically insulated and isolated from other parts of the device.

    (1)     Note.  A floating gate array usually has, at least, a second
    control gate that may be connected to the word (row address) line for the
    inducement of an operative control potential during operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

     257,   Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclass 314 for a substructure floating gate memory device having a
    variable threshold  (e.g., by storage of charge in an insulator layer
    adjacent to a channel).


CLS 365/185.02
TXT Disturbance control:

    Subject matter under 185.01 wherein a threshold shifting effect is
    minimized from erasing, reading, and/or programming of a specific memory
    cell on any adjacent memory cells in the floating gate array.


CLS 365/185.03
TXT Multiple values (e.g., analog):

    Subject matter under 185.01 wherein the floating gate device is adapted to
    store and operate on multiple-valued electrical data signals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for analog data signals, per se.

    168,    for nonfloating gate device adapted to store and operate on
    multiple-valued electrical data signals.


CLS 365/185.04
TXT Data security:

    Subject matter under 185.01 wherein the floating gate device has an ability
    to secure or permanently preserve electric data signals from being erased
    (e.g., by tampering or overwriting) from memory cells.

    (1)     Note.  For example, this subject matter may include either an
    integral light shield to prevent memory cells from being erased or circuit
    fuses which may secure the data.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185.32, for radiation erasure details.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    380,    Cryptography, subclass 4 for digital data protection, per se.


CLS 365/185.05
TXT Particular connection:

    Subject matter under 185.01 wherein the floating gate device is enabled to
    form a connection or perform a switchable function.

    (1)     Note.  For example, this subject matter may include a particular
    decoder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for an innerconnection arrangement, per se.

    189.08, for an array capable of performing specified logic functions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 37+ for
    multifunction or programmable connection.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 825.83+ for programmable
    selective matrix connection.


CLS 365/185.06
TXT Segregated columns:

    Subject matter under 185.05 wherein the connection within the floating gate
    device has separate source and drain lines for each column of memory cells,
    thereby each column's source and drain lines are separate from and not
    shared with any other column's source and drain lines.


CLS 365/185.07
TXT Cross-coupled cell:

    Subject matter under 185.05 wherein one or more floating gate elements are
    directly wired in a cross-coupled circuit.

    (1)     Note.  The floating gate element may function, for example, as a
    switch or a load element.

    (2)     Note.  Floating gate arrays that interact with and are connected
    through data/bit lines to a separate cross-coupled volatile static ram cell
    are not classified herein;  for this subject matter see SEARCH THIS CLASS,
    SUBCLASS below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185.08, for floating gate elements that interact with and are connected
    through data/bit lines to a separate cross-coupled volatile static ram cell.


CLS 365/185.08
TXT With volatile signal storage device:

    Subject matter under 185.05 wherein the floating gate device is directly
    connected to exchange a signal between a separate volatile signal storage
    device and itself.

    (1)     Note.  For example, this subject matter may include a separate
    volatile capacitor, a separate volatile SRAM cell, etc.,

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154,    for storage elements that are electrical bistable multivibrators
    (i.e., flip-flops).

    156,    for employing devices having complementary (pnp and npn)
    conductivity components.

    228,    for data preservation.


CLS 365/185.09
TXT Error correction (e.g., redundancy, endurance):

    Subject matter under 185.05 wherein the floating gate device has a
    provision for the substitution of dysfunctional ("bad") cells,
    eitherinitially or from "wear-out" of an element or array, or for
    prevention of the generation of bad cells.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter includes means for increasing the
    "endurance" of an array.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery,
    appropriate subclasses.


CLS 365/185.1
TXT Extended floating gate:

    Subject matter under 185.05 wherein two or more spatially separated
    floating gate elements are connected by a common, extended floating gate.

    (1)     Note.  For example, programming means in the substrate that are
    spatially separated from the main floating gate transistor or a CMOS
    transistor pair share the same floating gate.


CLS 365/185.11
TXT Bank or block architecture:

    Subject matter under 185.05 wherein a floating gate array is divided into
    independently accessible groups of memory cells.

    (1)     Note.  Banks of memory cells (e.g., blocks) may be separated
    through physical layout, particular decoding means, particular wiring
    means, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230.03, for addressing plural banks or blocks, per se.


CLS 365/185.12
TXT Parallel row lines (e.g., page mode):

    Subject matter under 185.11 wherein one of the source or drain lines in a
    floating gate array is parallel with the word (control gate) line of a
    particular row so as to form a row of accessible architecture.

    (1)     Note.  A row of accessible architecture may be separately accessed
    from the other rows.


CLS 365/185.13
TXT Global word or bit lines:

    Subject matter under 185.11 wherein a word (control gate) line or a data
    bit (drain) line in a floating gate array extends through a plurality of
    banks or blocks to form a common connection or connections for at least a
    plurality of the banks or blocks of the entire floating gate array.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter includes memories where the floating
    gate array is the entire intact semiconductor wafer and such lines that
    extend across the entire wafer.


CLS 365/185.14
TXT Program gate:

    Subject matter under 185.05 wherein an additional insulated gate separate
    from the control gate provides programming or erase functions.


CLS 365/185.15
TXT Weak inversion injection:

    Subject matter under 185.14 wherein use of an auxiliary biased or floating
    gate to the source side of the main floating gate induces a weak channel
    thereunder so as to create a hot electron injection path in the channel for
    programming the main floating gate.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter does not include an electrode near the
    source which merely produces a standard channel inversion.


CLS 365/185.16
TXT Virtual ground:

    Subject matter under 185.05 wherein all of the memory cells in a column are
    connected in parallel by column lines, and alternative column lines are
    either connected to ground or switchable to a potential related to ground.

    (1)     Note.  All of the internal columns of the memory cells in the
    floating gate array share a common column line with an adjacent column.
    Each internal column line is shared by two columns of cells to reduce the
    number and size of the connections.


CLS 365/185.17
TXT Logic connection (e.g., NAND string):

    Subject matter under 185.05 wherein the floating gate elements are
    connected in a manner so as to form a logical relationship.

    (1)     Note.  For example, this subject matter includes a particular logic
    (inclusion or exclusion between two electrical signals) connection such as,
    but not limited to, a series connection of a plurality of floating gate
    arrays to form a (N)AND logic or a connection to form a (N)OR logic
    function.  This subject matter specifically includes the "NAND string"
    memory architecture.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 104+ for digital
    logic circuitry, per se.


CLS 365/185.18
TXT Particular biasing:

    Subject matter under 185.01 wherein an operating environment provides
    electrical settings to the floating gate device.

    (1)     Note. For example, particular biasing operations may include
    erasing, programming, testing, and/or reading.


CLS 365/185.19
TXT Multiple pulses (e.g., ramp):

    Subject matter under 185.18 wherein the floating gate has a particular
    biasing that comprises a series of pulses or a pulse that varies at a
    constant rate.

    (1)     Note. The biasing is to enable a particular function (e.g.,
    programming, erasure, testing, verification, etc.)


CLS 365/185.2
TXT Reference signal (e.g., dummy cell):

    Subject matter under 185.18 wherein a data signal on the floating gate is
    compared to a threshold level or a fixed signal that acts as a constant for
    comparison to the data signal.

    (1)     Note. This subject matter includes reference voltage generation
    means for reading, programming, erasing, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210,    for noise suppression by differential sensing using a reference or
    dummy elements.


CLS 365/185.21
TXT Sensing circuitry (e.g., current mirror):

    Subject matter under 185.2 wherein a detailed circuit arrangement compares
    a data signal to the reference signal and delivers a resulting output
    signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems,  subclasses 51+ for particular structure of sensing amplifiers,
    per se.


CLS 365/185.22
TXT Verify signal:

    Subject matter under 185.2 including the use of any circuitry, procedure,
    or other means to verify that the data signal has been properly written or
    erased from a memory cell.


CLS 365/185.23
TXT Drive circuitry (e.g., word line driver):

    Subject matter under 185.18 including logic, power, and switching circuitry
    necessary to drive a word line or bit line of the floating gate device into
    any of its operational modes.


CLS 365/185.24
TXT Threshold setting (e.g., conditioning):

    Subject matter under 185.18 wherein a particular process or means is used
    in a floating gate device to set the threshold to a predetermined value
    during either programming or erasure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

     257,   Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclass 314 for substructure floating gate memory device having a variable
    threshold  (e.g., by storage of charge in an insulator layer adjacent a
    channel).


CLS 365/185.25
TXT Line charging (e.g., precharge, discharge, refresh):

    Subject matter under 185.18 wherein the floating gate device circuitry
    there is either a precharge, refresh, or a discharge of the bit lines.


CLS 365/185.26
TXT Floating electrode (e.g., source, control gate, drain):

    Subject matter under 185.18 wherein one or more of the source, control
    gate, drain, or substrate of a floating gate device is left floating rather
    than being tied to a potential.


CLS 365/185.27
TXT Substrate bias:

    Subject matter under 185.18 wherein the floating gate device has a
    particular and significant biasing applied to the substrate or isolated
    semiconductor well region.

    (1)     Note. This subject matter includes external potential connections
    and may include internal charge pumps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems,  subclass 534 for particular substrate biasing arrangements.


CLS 365/185.28
TXT Tunnel programming:

    Subject matter under 185.18 wherein the floating gate device is programmed
    through a thin insulated region that provides a charge tunnel to the
    floating gate.

    (1)     Note.  For specific hot carrier injection mechanism subject matter,
    see SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185.15, for hot carrier injections by a weak inversion channel.


CLS 365/185.29
TXT Erase:

    Subject matter under 185.18 wherein an arrangement or process is provided
    for reducing the net charge on memory cells on the floating gate.

    (1)     Note.  The convention of "removal of charges" (either positive or
    negative) from the floating gate to reduce the net charge thereon will be
    considered "erasure."  "Erasure" need not be on a complete block or bank to
    be considered under this subject matter.


CLS 365/185.3
TXT Over erasure:

    Subject matter under 185.29 including the use of any circuitry or means to
    measure or prevent over erasure of memory cells (i.e., removal of more
    charge than is desired for a particular logic level setting).


CLS 365/185.31
TXT Nonsubstrate discharge:

    Subject matter under 185.29 wherein the floating gate is erased by
    overlying electrodes or other means not directly connected to the
    substrate, and the charge carriers are not directly removed to the
    substrate.


CLS 365/185.32
TXT Radiation erasure:

    Subject matter under 185.31 wherein electromagnetic wave energy is used to
    erase an electric charge on the floating gate.

    (1)     Note.  Electromagnetic wave energy includes X-ray, gamma ray, ultra
    violet, etc.


CLS 365/185.33
TXT Flash:

    Subject matter under 185.29 wherein the floating gate is electrically
    erasable by block or bulk.

    (1)     Note.  For Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory
    (EEPROM) to be considered flash memory, it must be erasable in blocks
    (e.g., erased as a whole or in a row or in banks).


CLS 365/186
TXT Single device per bit:

    Subject matter under subclass 174 in which the storage element for one bit
    of information is composed of a single semiconductive device.


CLS 365/187
TXT Three devices per bit:

    Subject matter under subclass 174 in which the storage element for one bit
    of information is composed of three semiconductive devices.


CLS 365/188
TXT Four or more devices per bit:

    Subject matter under subclass 174 in which the storage element for one bit
    of information is composed of four or more semiconductive devices.


CLS 365/189.01
TXT READ/WRITE CIRCUIT:

    Subject matter under the class definition for inserting, extracting, or
    handling of an information signal to be stored or retrieved.

    (1)     Note  In this and its indented subclasses the term "processing" as
    applied to signals is specifically intended to excludedigital data
    processing systems and computer systems

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for the physical arrangement of memory components.

    52+,    for storage element hardware.

    63+,    for interconnection arrangement for information transfer.

    230.01+, for selection of memory locations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems,  subclasses 51+ for miscellaneous amplitude discriminating
    circuits having a sense amplifier.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.79+ for selective
    matrix which may be used for control or as a switching means.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for multiplex
    switching techniques similar to addressing or the handling of memory
    information signals.

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclasses 1+ for addressing combined with specific memory configurations
    (e.g., extended, expanded, dynamic, etc.) in a digital data processing
    system, subclasses 100+ for generalized address forming in a digital data
    processing system, and subclasses 200+ for generalized storage accessing
    and control in a digital data processing system.


CLS 365/189.02
TXT Multiplexing:

    Subject matter under subclass 189.01 which includes the transmission of
    plural signals over a single signal path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230.02, for multiplexing of static memory address signals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 351+ for pathfinding or
    routing in multiplex communications which may include a static memory read
    and write circuit.


CLS 365/189.03
TXT Plural use of terminal:

    Subject matter under subclass 189.01 which has a terminal connecting the
    memory to a data handling circuit and another diverse circuit.

    (1)     Note.  Such a diverse circuit may be an addressing, power or
    testing circuit.

    (2)     Note.  Circuits having different signal levels for different
    functions are also found in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189.02, for multiplexing of data signals in a read/write memory circuit.

    230.02, for multiplexing of address signals in a memory addressing circuit.


CLS 365/189.04
TXT Simultaneous operations (e.g., read/write):

    Subject matter under subclass 189.01 including circuitry for performing
    multiple operations (e.g., storing information in and retrieving
    information from the memory) at the same time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230.05, for an addressing circuit having plural address ports for
    independent access.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 276+ for duplex communications
    not limited to a static memory read and write circuit.


CLS 365/189.05
TXT Having particular data buffer or latch:

    Subject matter under subclass 189.01 including a specific detail of a
    temporary storage circuit for a data signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205+,   for a specific sense amplifier circuit in a memory system.

    230.08, for a feature of an address buffer or latch.


CLS 365/189.06
TXT Including signal clamping:

    Subject matter under subclass 189.01 including circuitry for limiting the
    variation of a signal (e.g., voltage) in order to keep such variation at a
    predetermined level.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 309+ for miscellaneous clamping circuits.


CLS 365/189.07
TXT Including signal comparison:

    Subject matter under subclass 189.01 including circuitry to compare plural
    signal in order to control an operation of the system on a data signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for a comparator in a content addressable memory.

    205     and 206+, for comparison between stored data and a reference
    voltage or value.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 1+ for miscellaneous signal comparing circuits.


CLS 365/189.08
TXT Including specified plural element logic arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 189.01 describing the configuration of
    multiple logic devices which handle the information signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, appropriate subclasses for
    electronic digital logic circuitry.


CLS 365/189.09
TXT Including reference or bias voltage generator:

    Subject matter under subclass 189.01 including a particular voltage or bias
    source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210,    for an element used to generate reference voltage for a sense
    amplifier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 311+
    for a self-regulating reference or bias circuit.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 530+ for miscellaneous circuits having significant bias
    circuitry.


CLS 365/189.11
TXT Including level shift or pull-up circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 189.01 including a circuit element which
    makes an adjustment in the voltage level of an information signal to
    enhance driving capability.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 88 and 92 for logic
    circuits with bootstrapping.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 390 and 589 for miscellaneous circuits utilizing
    bootstrapping.


CLS 365/189.12
TXT With shift register:

    Subject matter under subclass 189.01 including a circuit which sequentially
    shifts the data information signal between one element and another in a
    memory array in a serial manner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     for a plural shift register memory device.

    219     and 221, for a serial memory device.

    238,    for memory addressing circuitry including a shift register.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclasses 57 and 64 for structure or circuitry of a
    shift register, not limited to a static memory system.


CLS 365/190
TXT For complementary information:

    Subject matter under subclass 189.01 wherein the read/write circuit is used
    with a memory cell containing complementary information.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204,    for flip-flops used for sensing in a read/write circuit.

    207,    for differential sensing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 545+ for miscellaneous bias circuits with signal
    protection or bias preservation.


CLS 365/191
TXT Signals:

    Subject matter under subclass 189.01 where particular signals are used for
    writing, maintaining, or reading information.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230.01+, for addressing a particular memory.


CLS 365/192
TXT Radio frequency:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 where the particular signal is a radio
    frequency signal.


CLS 365/193
TXT Strobe:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 where the particular signal is used for
    strobing the memory device.


CLS 365/194
TXT Delay:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 where the particular signal is delayed
    during writing or reading.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76,     for recirculation stores used as delay lines.

    93,     for magnetic shift registers including delay means.


CLS 365/195
TXT Inhibit:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 where an inhibit operation is used to
    prevent the writing or reading of information.


CLS 365/196
TXT Sense/inhibit:

    Subject matter under subclass 195 where the same conductor is used for both
    an inhibit operation and a sensing operation during different time periods.


CLS 365/197
TXT Microwave:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 where the particular signal is in the
    microwave range.


CLS 365/198
TXT Transmission:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 where transmission line signals and
    principles are used for writing or reading information.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, for nonstorage of
    information, note subclass 12.


CLS 365/199
TXT Coincident A.C. signal with pulse:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 where the particular signal is the
    combination of an A.C. signal and pulse signal.


CLS 365/200
TXT Bad bit:

    Subject matter under subclass 189.01 in which erroneous, defective, or
    partially defective storage locations are used to store information.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclass
    10.2 and 10.3 for fault recovery of a memory system; subclasses 21.1+ for
    diagnostic testing of a memory system, and subclasses 40.11+ for digital
    data error correction during memory access.

    395,    Information Processing System Organzation, subclasses 182.03+ for
    memory or peripheral subsystem affected recovery, subclass 183.18 for
    memory or storage device compenent fault, and subclass 185.07 for storage
    content error reliability testing in digital data processing systems.


CLS 365/201
TXT Testing:

    Subject matter under subclass 189.01 including the specifics of the memory
    which are tested for defects or erroneous information.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200,    where defective memory devices are used to store information.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 34 for testing of
    magnetic properties.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery,
    subclasses 21.1+ for diagnostic testing of a memory system.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 182.03+ for
    memory or peripheral subsystem affected recovery, subclass 183.18 for
    memory or storage device component fault, and subclass 185.07 for storage
    content error reliability testing in digital data processing systems.


CLS 365/202
TXT Complementing/balancing:

    Subject matter under subclass 189.01 in which complementing or balancing
    signals are used in a read/write circuit, e.g., a storage system having an
    auxiliary storage circuit for complementary signals to be used for noise
    cancellation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 4 for plural channel
    systems with balanced circuits, subclass 25 for coupling networks with
    balanced circuits.


CLS 365/203
TXT Precharge:

    Subject matter under subclass 189.01 wherein circuit lines or elements are
    charged (or discharged) to a desired level just prior to reading or writing
    information.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149     and 150, for information stored in the form of a charge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 109
    for miscellaneous transmission or interconnection capacitor circuits.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    subclasses 166+ for capacitor charging or discharging, per se.


CLS 365/204
TXT Accelerating charge or discharge:

    Subject matter under subclass 189.01 wherein a circuit senses a charging
    (or discharging) operation and switches in a parallel path to decrease the
    charging (or discharging) time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149     and 150, for charging and discharging information stores.

    203,    for precharging circuit lines or elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 109
    for miscellaneous transmission or interconnection capacitor circuits.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    subclasses 166+ for capacitor charging or discharging, per se.


CLS 365/205
TXT Flip-flop used for sensing:

    Subject matter under subclass 189.01 wherein the sensing circuit is a
    flip-flop circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154,    for flip-flop used as storage elements in a memory system.

    190,    for read/write circuits used in a memory system that contains
    flip-flop storage elements.

    207,    for differential sensing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 185+ and particularly subclasses 199+ for miscellaneous
    flip-flop circuits.


CLS 365/206
TXT Noise suppression:

    Subject matter under subclass 189.01 having circuits for the cancellation
    or reduction of noise or spurious signals.


CLS 365/207
TXT Differential sensing:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 where the circuit used is of the
    differential sensing type.


CLS 365/208
TXT Semiconductors:

    Subject matter under subclass 207 where the differential sensing is
    performed upon a semiconductor memory element.


CLS 365/209
TXT Magnetic:

    Subject matter under subclass 207 where the differential sensing is
    performed upon a magnetic memory element.


CLS 365/210
TXT Reference or dummy element:

    Subject matter under subclass 209 where the magnetic differential sensing
    circuit uses an additional magnetic element.


CLS 365/211
TXT Temperature compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 where the circuit used is for
    compensating temperature changes.


CLS 365/212
TXT Semiconductor:

    Subject matter under subclass 211 where the temperature compensation is
    performed upon a semiconductor memory element.


CLS 365/213
TXT Magnetic:

    Subject matter under subclass 211 where the temperature compensation is
    performed upon a magnetic memory element.


CLS 365/214
TXT Particular wiring:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 where the circuit includes wiring the
    elements in a particular arrangement to obtain noise cancellation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     which may or may not include noise cancellation.


CLS 365/215
TXT Optical:

    Subject matter under subclass 189.01 in which the read/write circuit if for
    an optical storage system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106+,   for radiant energy information storage.

    120+,   for information masking in an optical storage system.


CLS 365/216
TXT Holographic:

    Subject matter under subclass 215 wherein the circuit is used to read/write
    holographic memories.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    for information masking which uses holograms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclass 457 for holographic card readers.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    1+ for storage systems where there is a holographic storage medium storing
    information signal absent any electrical circuitry.


CLS 365/217
TXT Electron beam:

    Subject matter under subclass 189.01 in which the read/write circuit is for
    an electron beam storage system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237,    for addressing a memory with an electron beam.


CLS 365/218
TXT Erase:

    Subject matter under subclass 189.01 in which the read/write circuit is or
    includes an erase circuit for a storage system.


CLS 365/219
TXT SiPo/PiSo:

    Subject matter under subclass 189.01 in which the read/write circuit for
    memory provides Serial Input with Parallel Output or Parallel Input with
    Serial Output.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238,    for Cartesian memories in which all of the above concepts may be
    present.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.79+ for logic and
    switching circuits having a matrix form with various input/output
    capability.


CLS 365/220
TXT Parallel read/write:

    Subject matter under subclass 189.01 wherein information is written into a
    memory in parallel form and read out in parallel form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235,    for addressing optical memory locations simultaneously.


CLS 365/221
TXT Serial read/write:

    Subject matter under subclass 189.01 wherein information is written into a
    memory in serial form and read out in serial form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73+,    for recirculation memories which are usually read and written in
    this manner.


CLS 365/222
TXT Data refresh:

    Subject matter under subclass 189.01 wherein decaying information is read
    before it becomes unrecognizable, and rewritten in original form, e.g.,
    charge on a capacitor is read before too much has leaked off, then
    rewritten to a fully charged state.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149,    for capacitor stores which require refresh.

    183,    for charge coupled stores which require refresh.


CLS 365/223
TXT Bridge:

    Subject matter under subclass 189.01 where the sensing circuit is in the
    form of a bridge circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 365 for
    bridge arrangement used in electric storage discharge device.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 98 for balancing
    bridge electricity.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, appropriate subclass for
    bridge type networks.


CLS 365/224
TXT Eddy current:

    Subject matter under subclass 189.01 having circuits containing Eddy
    currents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 40 for measuring Eddy
    currents.


CLS 365/225
TXT Minor loop:

    Subject matter under subclass 189.01 where the read/write circuit results
    in the operation of a magnetic memory element or any hysteresis loop other
    than the major loop.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded are circuits which contain a multiaperture magnetic
    memory element.


CLS 365/225.5
TXT Including magnetic element:

    Subject matter under subclass 189.01 in which the read/write circuit
    includes a magnetic element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230.07, for an address decoder circuit having a magnetic element.

    243.5,  for a memory address selection circuit having a magnetic element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 401+
    for a nonlinear reactor system.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 190+ for a stable state circuit with transformer or
    saturable core device.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for structure of a
    magnetic circuit element.


CLS 365/225.6
TXT Having bipolar circuit element:

    Subject matter under subclass 189.01 including a semiconductor element
    having plural potential barriers (i.e., junctions).

    (1)     Note.  Circuits with only named bipolar devices are included in
    this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, appropriate subclasses for
    logic circuits utilizing bipolar devices.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 574+ for miscellaneous circuits utilizing bipolar
    transistors.


CLS 365/225.7
TXT Having fuse element:

    Subject matter under subclass 189.01 wherein the circuit includes a circuit
    element which is selectively melted or disintegrated to make or break an
    electric circuit to control the operating characteristics of a memory read
    or write circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     for a memory system including data storage by a fusible memory
    element.

    200,    for a memory system including a redundant or spare element and
    having a fuse circuit which selectively activates or deactivates certain
    circuit elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 37+ for a
    programmable logic circuit.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 525 for a miscellaneous circuit with a fusible link.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 825.84 for a selective matrix
    having programmable fusible elements.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, particularly
    subclasses 467, 600, and 601 for methods of altering the conductivity of a
    fuse or antifuse element associated with a semiconductor integrated circuit.


CLS 365/226
TXT POWERING:

    Subject matter under the class definition having powering concepts relating
    to memories.

    (1)     Note.  This class excludes power supplies, per se, which may be
    used for a memory system.  See Classes 307, 327, 330, and 363 for power
    supplies.


CLS 365/227
TXT Conservation of power:

    Subject matter under subclass 226 having means for reduction of operational
    power during the memory standby phase.


CLS 365/228
TXT Data preservation:

    Subject matter under subclass 226 which includes concepts relevant to
    prevention of loss of data in a storage device, e.g., prevention of data
    loss by provision of backup storage means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclasses
    10.2+ for fault recovery of a memory system; and subclasses 21.1+ for
    diagnostic testing of a memory system.


CLS 365/229
TXT Standby power:

    Subject matter under subclass 228 in which data loss is prevented by using
    a secondary (standby) power supply during housepower interruptions.


CLS 365/230.01
TXT ADDRESSING:

    Subject matter under the class definition including selection of a memory
    location.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189.01+, for the reading or writing of information in a memory system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 105+ for digital
    logic decoding circuits, in general, and subclasses 62+ for buffer
    arrangements which convert logic signals between diverse logic devices
    broadly described as addressing electrical memory stores, but not including
    specific circuitry to store information in, or retrieve information from, a
    memory.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.79+ for selective
    matrix which may be used for control or as a switching means.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for multiplex
    switching techniques similar to addressing or the handling of memory
    information signals.

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclasses 1+ for addressing combined with specific memory configurations
    (e.g., extended, expanded, dynamic, etc.) in a digital data processing
    system, subclasses 100+ for generalized address forming in a digital data
    processing system, and subclasses 200+ for generalized storage accessing
    and control in a digital data processing system.


CLS 365/230.02
TXT Multiplexing:

    Subject matter under subclass 230.01 which includes the transmission of
    plural signals over a single signal path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189.02, in which the data signal rather than the address signal is
    multiplexed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 351+ for pathfinding or
    routing in multiplex communications not limited to a static memory
    addressing circuit.


CLS 365/230.03
TXT Plural blocks or banks:

    Subject matter under subclass 230.01 in which the memory elements are
    arranged in plural separate and distinct groups and in which at least one
    element from one of the groups is selectively accessed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclass 2 for extended/expanded memory addressing, subclass 5 for multiple
    memory module static memory addressing in a digital data processing system,
    subclasses 101+ for storage accessing and control combined with specific
    memory configurations (e.g., ROM, RAM, core, CAM, DASD, bubble, dynamic,
    etc.) in a digital data processing system, subclasses 117+ for generalized
    storage accessing and control of hierarchical memory arrangements in a
    digital data processing system, subclasses 147+ for shared memory storage
    accessing and control in a digital data processing system, and subclasses
    200+ for generalized address forming in a digital data processing system.


CLS 365/230.04
TXT Alternate addressing (e.g., even/odd):

    Subject matter under subclass 230.03 which successively addresses memory
    elements in different blocks or banks.


CLS 365/230.05
TXT Multiple port access:

    Subject matter under subclass 230.01 having plural address circuits for
    independent memory access.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189.04, for memory circuits in which two or more operations (e.g., read and
    write) are performed simultaneously.


CLS 365/230.06
TXT Particular decoder or driver circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 230.01 including a detail of a circuit which
    either changes a binary combination of memory address signals to form a
    selection or actuation signal, or which increases the magnitude of such an
    actuation signal.

    (1)     Note.  Mere naming of a decoder or driver circuit is not, of
    itself, basis for classification in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 105+ for this
    subject matter not limited to a memory system.


CLS 365/230.07
TXT Including magnetic element:

    Subject matter under subclass 230.06 in which a memory decoder or driver
    circuit includes a magnetic element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225.5,  for a read/write circuit having a magnetic element.

    243.5,  for a memory address selection circuit having a magnetic element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 401+
    for a nonlinear reactor system.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 190+ for a stable state circuit utilizing a transformer
    or saturable core device.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for structure of a
    magnetic circuit element.


CLS 365/230.08
TXT Including particular address buffer or latch circuit arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 230.01 including a detail of a temporary
    storage device for an address and selection signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189.05, for a feature of a data buffer or latch, which may be combined with
    an address buffer or latch.


CLS 365/230.09
TXT Combined random and sequential addressing:

    Subject matter under subclass 230.01 including switching to permit the
    access to the storage elements either selectively or successively.


CLS 365/231
TXT Using selective matrix:

    Subject matter under subclass 230.01 where at least a single matrix is used
    to select a memory location.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.79+ for selective
    matrices, per se.


CLS 365/232
TXT Magnetic:

    Subject matter under subclass 231 where the elements of the selective
    matrix are magnetic.


CLS 365/233
TXT Sync/clocking:

    Subject matter under subclass 230.01 where synchronizing and clocking
    circuits are used to select a memory location.


CLS 365/233.5
TXT Transition detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 233 which generates a clock or timing signal
    responsive to a change in an input signal.


CLS 365/234
TXT Optical:

    Subject matter under subclass 230.01 having circuits for deflecting an
    optical beam to a particular memory location.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215,    for read/write circuits using optics.


CLS 365/235
TXT Page memories:

    Subject matter under subclass 234 wherein memory locations in a plane are
    addressed simultaneously.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106+,   for particular radiant energy memories.

    120+,   for optical memories involving informational masking.

    215,    for optical reading and writing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, for
    appropriate systems and elements, in particular subclasses 1+ for
    holographic storage.


CLS 365/236
TXT Counting:

    Subject matter under subclass 230.01 wherein a memory location is addressed
    by counting locations to determine when the selected one is reached, e.g.,
    counting matrix rows to address the desired row.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238,    where all rows (columns) of a memory plane are addressed
    simultaneously.

    239,    for selection of locations sequentially.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, for solid-state counter circuits.


CLS 365/237
TXT Electron beam:

    Subject matter under subclass 230.01 for addressing a memory device with an
    electron beam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217,    for read/write circuits in an electron beam storage system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 8.51+ for
    electron beam storage systems in general, subclasses 364+ for cathode-ray
    tube (CRT) deflection circuits.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 99 for counters using beam type tubes.


CLS 365/238
TXT Cartesian memories:

    Subject matter under subclass 230.01 wherein all columns (or rows) of a
    memory plane are addressed simultaneously.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235,    for information stored similarly in optical memories.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.79+ for switching
    matrices.


CLS 365/238.5
TXT Byte or page addressing:

    Subject matter under subclass 230.01 which addresses a group of memory
    elements or a plurality of such groups as a single unit.

    (1)     Note.  The information stored in each of such elements often
    represents a binary digit ("bit") and the information stored in such a
    group of memory elements represents digital words or bytes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220,    for a parallel read/write circuit.

    230.03+, for addressing of plural blocks or banks of memory.

    238,    for a Cartesian memory address circuit.


CLS 365/239
TXT Sequential:

    Subject matter under subclass 230.01 where the memory locations are
    sequenced one after another in an addressing circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236,    for addressing memory locations by counting techniques.

    238,    for addressing simultaneously all columns (rows) of a memory plane.


CLS 365/240
TXT Using shift register:

    Subject matter under subclass 239 where the means for sequencing is a shift
    register.


CLS 365/241
TXT Detectors:

    Subject matter under subclass 239 where the memory locations are detected
    one after another.


CLS 365/242
TXT Current steering:

    Subject matter under subclass 230.01 having means for determining a current
    or voltage path to select a memory location.


CLS 365/243
TXT Diode:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 where the means is a diode(s).


CLS 365/243.5
TXT Including magnetic element:

    Subject matter under subclass 230.01 in which an address circuit includes a
    magnetic element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225.5,  for a read/write circuit having a magnetic element.

    230.07, for an address decoder circuit having a magnetic element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 401+
    for a nonlinear reactor system.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 190+ for a stable state circuit utilizing a transformer
    or saturable core device.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for structure of a
    magnetic circuit element.


CLS 365/244
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition not provided for above.


CLS 366/
TTL AGITATING

CLS 366/
TXT

    I.      GLOSSARY

    AGITATOR

    A stirrer or a deflector.

    DEFLECTOR

    (1)     An element or device secured within and in fixed relation to the
    mixing chamber, or

    (2)     a stationary device in a movable mixing chamber for diverting or
    separating portions of material and then permitting them to recombine so as
    to commingle, thus causing or assisting in agitation of the material.

    MATERIAL

    A mass of fluid, viscous, particulate, or plastic substance which is to be
    agitated.

    MIXING CHAMBER

    A space bounded on at least three sides by well structure within which
    agitation takes place.

    The chamber may be in the form of a trough, a conduit, or a container of
    any shape.  A supply reservoir or a conveyor for feeding material to a
    mixing chamber and which includes means for agitating the material prior to
    its entry into the mixing chamber will not be considered a mixing chamber.

    OSCILLATING

    Rotating alternately in opposite directions about an axis.

    RECIPROCATING RECTILINEARLY

    Moving bodily back and forth in a straight line in the same path so that at
    any instant, all parts of the moving body move in the same direction at the
    same rate.

    ROCKING

    Moving back and forth as a result of a back and forth motion of a curved
    surface on a flat surface.

    ROTATING

    Turning in but one direction about an axis.

    STIRRER

    A device which is movable by an applied force and which in its movement
    causes agitation of material.  The force may be applied manually, by
    movement of the material, by relative motion of the chamber, or by a power
    source, either directly or through a drive train.

    STIRRERS.  PLURAL

    Two or more devices or elements which are movable bodily by an applied
    force and which move bodily relative to each other an in such movement
    cause agitation of material.

    Where a plurality of like or diverse stirrer elements are in fixed relation
    to each other and move together as a unit they will be considered a single
    stirrer even if the elements are adjustable relative to each other prior to
    agitation or are flexible so that portions thereof move relative to each
    other during agitation.

    II.     GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    A.      This is the residual class for apparatus for, and corresponding
    methods of operating on fluid, viscous, plastic, or fluent particulate
    material solely for causing portions of the material to move irregularly
    with respect to each other so as to intermix.  The material may be in
    motion or at rest immediately before agitation.

    B.      Apparatus for agitating articles which are treated in the same
    manner as fluent particulate material will also be included in this class,
    unless classified elsewhere.

    C.      This class includes processes and apparatus for forming colloidal
    suspensions or emulsions by agitation.  The following subject matter is
    excluded:

    (1)     Patents having any controlling claim directed to a stable colloidal
    system product, classifiable in Class 252, Compositions, subclasses 302+.

    (2)     Process which, by their terms, form a stable colloidal system or in
    which the steps recited must necessarily result in the formation of such a
    system (as by adding colloidizing agents, etc.), classifiable in Class 252,
    compositions, subclasses 302+.

    (3)     Processes of forming dispersions or emulsions in which the
    ingredients are specified with sufficient particularity as to form a basis
    of classification in Class 252, Compositions, or some other appropriate
    composition class.

    (4)     Processes and apparatus in which a suspension of a solid in a
    liquid is formed by operations including the comminution of the solid,
    classifiable in Class 241, Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration,
    appropriate subclass.

    (5)     Apparatus consisting of a conduit provided with a flow restrictor
    disclosed for use in forming emulsions of a plurality of fluids
    classifiable in Class 138, Pipes and Tubular conduits, subclasses 40+.
    Where such apparatus has additional combined features, such as means to
    feed material to the restrictor, etc., the patents have been placed in this
    class (366).

    (6)     Mixing devices for a sugar-bearing solution with other liquids or
    solids for promoting the separation of impurities from the solution,
    classifiable in Class 127, Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, subclass 14.

    D.      This class also includes stirrers, per se, which are disclosed for
    use as agitators.  However, see Class 416, Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e.,
    Impellers), appropriate subclasses for an impeller, per se, which may be
    useful as a stirrer but where the disclosed use is solely as an impeller,
    or alternatively as an impeller or stirrer.

    E.      Since agitation of material is incidental or ancillary to many
    apparatuses for treating material for various purposes, an agitator in
    combination with other means for treating material will be found in the
    class providing for the particular treatment.  Similarly, an apparatus for
    treating or handling material which inherently or incidentally agitates the
    material will be included in the appropriate class providing for the
    treating or handling means.  Cross references have been placed in this
    class where the agitating mechanism claimed in combination with other
    treating means has been deemed to have general utility as an agitator.

    F.      Patents issued prior to 1945 have not in all instances been
    classified by their claimed disclosure so that placement of these older
    patents does not necessarily indicate lines of classification.

    III.    FOR APPARATUS INCLUDING AGITATING INCIDENTAL TO OR COMBINED WITH
    OTHER PRIMARY FUNCTION.  SEARCH:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclass 159 for manipulative processes of agitating
    textile material immersed in Liquid for purposes of mechanical or chemical
    treatment other than impregnating or coating (e.g., washing, bleaching,
    dyeing).

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, subclasses 313+ for a process of
    agglomerating particulate nonmetallic elements or inorganic compounds by
    agitation, and subclasses 252+ for apparatus disclosed for use in carrying
    out specific chemical reactions not elsewhere provided for.

    34,     Drying and Gas Vapor Contact With Solids, for a process or
    apparatus for drying material including an agitating step or means.

    53,     Package Making, appropriate subclasses for packaging methods and
    apparatus including agitation of the material packaged, and see
    particularly subclass 525 for apparatus for agitating or jarring material
    in a filled container for compacting the material.

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclasses for processed and apparatus
    for removing heat from material which may include agitation of the material.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 178+ for glass working apparatus
    combined with means for agitating molten glass.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclasses 131+ for apparatus for agitating textile material
    immersed in liquid for purposes of mechanical or chemical treatment other
    than impregnating or coating (e.g., washing machine).

    99,     Food and Beverages:  Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for food
    treating apparatus of that class combined with agitating means; see
    particularly subclasses 452+ for apparatus for treating dairy food, and
    subclasses 518+, 600+ and 623+ for grain hulling agitating step.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 400+ for coating apparatus involving
    agitation of the base and coating materials.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 155+ for a furnace or stove grate
    with means to agitate it for the clearance of ashes, and subclass 387 for a
    water heater with heat type agitating means for the water.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses for
    processes and apparatus for Cleaning or Liquid Contact With Solids
    including a carrier or holder for the solid, and also including agitation
    of the material to promote, facilitate, or perfect the cleaning or Liquid
    Contact.  The agitation may be caused by movement of the carrier through
    the Liquid or by a separate agitator.

    137,    Fluid Handling, appropriate subclasses for transfer process and
    apparatus for fluent material which includes agitation or mixing of the
    material and see particularly subclasses 3+ for processes, and subclasses
    87+, 599+ and 602+ for apparatus.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 109.1 for heat exchange apparatus including
    agitating means for a fluent heat exchange medium therein.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclass 33 for a
    distillation process including the step of agitating the charge in the
    carbonizing zone.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclasses 175 and 265 for distillation
    apparatus combined with agitating means for the distalland.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses for methods and apparatus directed to subject matter of that
    class, and see particularly subclass 233+ for the combination of a sifter
    with an agitator.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses for
    methods and apparatus for separating solids from Liquids, and see
    particularly subclasses 198.1+ or a separator with means to add treating
    material which may include agitating means.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 296+ for an electric heating apparatus
    for a Liquid with means to circulate the Liquid in a fixed path in relation
    to heat surface so as to transfer heat to the Liquid.  Where electrical
    heating means is only broadly claimed, placement will be in Class 366; but
    where details of the heater or control means for the heater are claimed,
    placement will be in Class 219.

    222,    Dispensing, both Classes 222 and 366 have the combination of a
    container and a device operable on the container contents to mix the same,
    and means to discharge the contents.



    A.      Class 366 takes:

    (1)     Agitators with means to feed material thereto.

    (2)     Containers having means to agitate, which means are inoperable to
    assist discharge (e.g., where the agitator is inoperative during discharge)
    and such means combined with additional dispensing means.

    (3)     Any means particularly designed to agitate with only an incidental
    discharge assisting function (e.g., those device in which the agitator must
    operate prior to a dispensing operation, even though it operates during and
    assists the discharge operation).

    B.      Class 222 takes containers of any kind with:

    (1)     Devices particularly designed to convey material therefrom or
    produce a force on the material therein, in a discharge direction with only
    incidental agitation effect.

    (2)     Agitators combined with other nongravity discharge assistance and
    operable together only during the discharging operation (the
    agitator-receptable subcombination going to Class 366).

    (3)     Mere solid material bridge breakers operable to promote gravity
    flow toward a claimed container outlet or discharge assisting means.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses
    for processes an apparatus (1) for projection or spraying material which
    required mixing just prior to or at discharge (e.g., resin type cements),
    usually with a catalyst to cause solidification or setting up, or (2)
    comprising particular nozzle structure of type provided for in Class 239,
    combined with agitation or mixing of ingredients in the supply means,
    provided the ingredients are not of the mortar type provided for in Class
    366, subclasses 1+.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses for processes and apparatus (1) in which agitating steps or
    means are combined with comminuting steps or means, or (2) which, by
    disclosure, will function to comminute the material even if a mixing
    function is also disclosed.

    252,    Composition, appropriate subclasses for processes of making
    compositions provided therein which may include agitation of the material,
    and see the notes to the main class definition of Class 252.  See also
    section II (C) of the Class 366 definition above.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 222 for tumbling type agglomerating apparatus for particulate
    material.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 242 for processes of coating by
    rumbling or tumbling.

    432,    Heating, the residual class for generating heat and applying it to
    materials, subclasses 121+ for a heating chamber with more than nominally
    recited heat generating means and including means for guiding or moving
    material to be heated through or moving material to be heated through or
    along sections of the chamber, or for agitating such material within the
    chamber.

    435,    Chemistry: Molecular Biology and Microbiology, appropriate
    subclasses for fermentation processes and apparatus; see particularly
    subclasses 290.3+ for a composting apparatus including an agitation means;
    subclasses 291.5+ for a malting or mashing apparatus, including an
    agitation means; subclasses 295.1+ for a bioreactor including a draft tube
    as a means for agitation; subclass 296.1 for a bioreactor with a sparging
    means for agitation; subclasses 297.2+ for perfusion bioreactors; subclass
    298.2 for a rotatably mounted bioreactor; and subclass 303.3 for an
    agitated incubator.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 32+ and 326+ for a process or apparatus
    disclosed for use in tumbling a workpiece for the purpose of abrading or
    surface finishing the workpiece.  The abrading or surface finishing may be
    solely by mutual attrition of the workpieces or by an abrasive medium.



    IV.     FOR AGITATING APPARATUS CLASSIFIED ELSEWHERE, SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclass 525 for apparatus for agitating or
    jarrying material in a filled container for the purpose of compacting the
    material.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 40+ for a conduit with a
    flow restrictor or deflector disclosed for use in forming emulsions of a
    plurality of fluids.  Where such a conduit has additional combined
    features, such as means to feed material to restrictor, etc., the patents
    have been placed in Class 366, subclasses 176.1 or 336+.

    166,    Wells, subclass 177.7 for agitating means in combination with a
    well or disclosed solely for use in a well.

    172,    Earth Working, appropriate subclasses for methods and apparatus for
    agitating earth in situ.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 221, 222, 223,
    261, and 273, for electrolytic cells including agitating means.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for a
    process or apparatus for mixing a Liquid with a gas.



    V.      FOR FEEDING AND DISCHARGING SUBCOMBINATIONS, SEARCH CLASS:

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways subclasses 2 and 11 for
    a chute combined with means to agitate the material so as to aid its flow
    along the chute.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 750+ for an oscillating
    conveyor, and subclasses 752+ for a vibrating endless through conveyor, per
    se.



    VI.     FOR AGITATOR SUBCOMBINATIONS CLASSIFIED ELSEWHERE, SEARCH CLASS:

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), appropriate subclasses
    for an impeller, per se, which may be useful as a stirrer but where the
    disclosed use in solely as an impeller, or alternatively as an impeller or
    stirrer.



    VII.    ADDITIONAL SEARCH CLASS NOTE:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses for mechanisms
    which might be useful in transmitting motion to a stirrer or a movable
    mixing chamber.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 128+ for supports for mere movable
    receptacles, and subclasses 146+ for supports for stationary receptacles.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, appropriate
    subclasses, for planetary gear transmissions which might be used to
    transmit motion to a stirrer or mixing chamber; and particularly subclass
    11 for rotary planetary output.



    VIII.   INDEX TO CLASS SEARCH NOTES IN CLASS
            DEFINITION SECTIONS AND SUBCLASSES
            OF THIS CLASS

    CLASS   SECTION SUBCLASS



    8               III

    23              III     1

    29                      71-73

    34              III     22

    53              III, IV

    62              III

    65              III

    68              III

    74              VII     117

    99              III

    100             III     72-74,79

    101                     200

    106             III     2

    118             III

    126             III

    127             II (C)

    134             III     108, 166.1

    137             III     6, 16

    138             II (C), IV      176.1, 336

    165             III

    166             IV

    172             IV      1

    173                     117, 123

    177                     16

    193             V       181.1

    198             V       79, 153.3,
                            154.2, 186

    201             III

    202             III

    204             IV

    209             III

    210             III

    212                     26

    219             III     146

    220                     130, 341

    222             III     10,16,45,
                            154.2

    235                     29

    239             III     101, 184

    241             II (C), III     69

    248             VI

    252             II (C), III

    254                     26

    261             IV      101, 277
                            183.4

    310                     117

    354                     166.1

    404                     1, 22

    406                     3,10,101

    414                     26,36,

                            39, 108

    415                     79

    416             II (D), VI      342,

    422                     162.4

    425             III

    427             III

    432             III

    435             III

    451             III

    475,            VII


CLS 366/1
TXT MORTAR MIXER TYPE:

    Apparatus and corresponding methods under the class definition peculiarly
    adapted for mixing mortar, asphaltic and hydraulic cement, concretes, and
    the like.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, subclass 287 for lime hydrators.

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 371 for mortar mixing hoes.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    (1) highway, pathway, or walkway structure, per se, and (2) process and
    apparatus for making, installing, repairing, or maintaining such structure,
    where such structure, process or apparatus is not otherwise classifiable as
    either (a) specifically provided for in other loci, or (b) of such general
    utility as to be provided for on that basis (see section III and IV under
    Class 404 class definition for known collections of such nature and the
    particular lines of demarcation).


CLS 366/2
TXT Methods:

    Processes under subclass 1 of mixing mortar, asphaltic or hydraulic cement,
    concrete, and the like.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic appropriate subclass,
    particularly subclasses 273+ and  638+ for processes of making mortar,
    asphaltic or hydraulic cement, concrete, and like which are not distinct
    from the compositions thereof.


CLS 366/3
TXT Gas incorporating; fluid mixing, delivering, or conveying:

    Processes under subclass 2 comprising a step or steps of (1) incorporating
    air or gas with the product, or (2) mixing, delivering, and/or conveying
    the product through the medium of a fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for corresponding apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclasses 86+ for moving material along
    a surface by means of or with the assistance of a fluid current issuing
    from the surface and incidentally agitating the material; and subclasses
    136+ for agitation of material in a receptacle which feeds to a fluid
    current conveyor.


CLS 366/4
TXT With heating or cooling:

    Processes under subclass 3 which include the steps of modifying the
    temperature of the material.

    (1)     Note.  The temperature modification may occur before, during, or
    after agitation.


CLS 366/5
TXT Gas incorporating at delivery:

    Processes under subclass 3 which include the steps of introducing a fluid
    with a material at the deliver.


CLS 366/6
TXT Treatment or preparation of material:

    Processes under subclass 2 which include other steps for making a material
    ready for mixing, or modifying a material for the purpose of facilitating
    the mixing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for process combinations involving gas incorporating, fluid mixing,
    discharging, and/or conveying.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 3+ for fluid handling processes,
    including mixing plural fluids.


CLS 366/7
TXT By heating or cooling:

    Processes under subclass 6 wherein the treatment or preparation is the step
    of modifying the temperature of the material.


CLS 366/8
TXT By ingredient proportioning:

    Processes under subclass 6 wherein the treatment or preparation is the step
    of controlling the relative quantities of different materials which are
    mixed.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16+,    for corresponding apparatus.

    160.1+, for feed means of general utility for feeding material in an
    adjustable ratio to a mixing chamber.

    162.1+, for feed means of general utility for feeding material to a mixing
    chamber in a predetermined fixed ratio.


CLS 366/9
TXT Gravity type:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the mixing is effected by the
    single passage of streams of materials through intersecting paths or over
    baffles or the like obstructions which may be either stationary or movable,
    at least one of said streams being gravity impelled.

    (1)     Note.  The term "single passage" is construed to exclude mixers
    such as those having rotting or oscillating receptacles which effect mixing
    by lifting and dropping material over a baffle or baffles a plurality of
    times.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    336+,   for similar mixers of general application.


CLS 366/10
TXT With gas incorporating; fluid mixing, delivering, or conveying:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 for (1) incorporating air or gas with a
    material, or (2) having means for mixing, delivering and/or conveying a
    material through the medium of a fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for corresponding processes.

    25,     for apparatus for heating ingredients during mixing by direct
    application of heated cases thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 3+ for gas dispensing, 630+ for fluid flow
    discharge, and 195 for gas agitation.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclass 86+ for moving material along a
    surface by means of or with the assistance of a fluid current issuing from
    the surface and incidentally agitating the material; and subclasses 136+
    for agitation of material in a receptacle which feeds to a fluid current
    conveyor.


CLS 366/11
TXT Gas incorporating at delivery nozzle:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein the medium of a fluid is
    introduced with the material at the delivery nozzle.


CLS 366/12
TXT Into rotating mixing chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein the medium of a fluid is
    introduced into a mixing chamber which revolves about a fixed axis in one
    direction only.


CLS 366/13
TXT With rotatable stirrer:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein the medium of a fluid is
    introduced into a mixing chamber which has a stirrer which turns in but one
    direction about an axis.


CLS 366/14
TXT Plural mixing chambers:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the mixing is effected two or more
    separate mixing chambers.

    (1)     Note.  The mixing chambers may be arranged to have either
    consecutive or alternative flow therethrough of the material being mixed,
    and the chambers may be concentrically arrange.

    (2)     Note.  Where agitation is provided for in a container or conveyor
    and which agitation is incidental to the dynamic charging of a mixing
    chamber from the container or conveyor.  Classification is in subclasses
    30+.

    (3)     Note.  For purposes of the classification, a compartmented mixing
    chamber is considered to be a single mixing chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for a compartmental type rotatable mortar mixing chamber.


CLS 366/15
TXT Intercommunicating:

    Subject matter under subclass 14 wherein the plural mixing chambers are in
    communication with each other so that the material being mixed may flow
    from one chamber to another.


CLS 366/16
TXT With ingredient proportioning:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including means for controlling or
    regulating the ratio of the ingredients to be mixed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for corresponding process.

    160.1+, for mixing ratio control of general use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 88+ and 98+ for proportioning means, per
    se.

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclass 61 for a weigh chamber translatable among
    plural sources.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 57 and 129+ for dispensing of plural sources.


CLS 366/17
TXT By condition sensing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 wherein the amount of ingredients to be
    added to a batch of mixed ingredients in the mixing chamber is controlled
    or regulated by (1) means in said chamber to detect a condition of said
    batch (e.g., temperature, density, etc.) or  (2) means external said
    chamber to detect a condition of the chamber, per se (e.g., change in the
    amount of energy required to rotate the chamber).


CLS 366/18
TXT By weight:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 wherein the ratio of the ingredients to be
    mixed is controlled or regulated by respectively weighing a quantity of
    each of a said ingredients, prior to charging the mixing chamber with the
    same.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141,    for weighing material of general use.


CLS 366/19
TXT By volume:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 wherein the ratio of the ingredients to be
    mixed is controlled or regulated by respectively measuring a quantity of
    each of said ingredients volume,prior to charging the mixing chamber with
    said ingredients.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160.5,  for feed means of general utility for proportioning materials fed
    to a mixing chamber in which the volume of material is measured.


CLS 366/20
TXT By screw conveyor charging means:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 wherein controlled or regulated by having
    a different rotational speed and/or convolution size for the screw conveyor
    means used to dynamically charge the mixing chamber with said ingredients.


CLS 366/21
TXT By varying opening of charging means:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 wherein the ratio of ingredients to be
    mixed is controlled or regulated by respectively adjusting the gets or
    valve means at each other outlet opening of the charging means to vary the
    size of said opening and thereby control the amount of ingredients that
    egress the charging means and flow into the mixing chamber.


CLS 366/22
TXT With heating or drying:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including means to heat or dry a material
    before, during, and/or after the mixing operation.

    (1)     Note.  The material may be subjected  to agitation during the
    preheating operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for plural mortar mixers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, and see the note to
    the main class definition for the line.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 90+, 92, 95, and
    108+ for road making apparatus including heating means.


CLS 366/23
TXT Heating mixing chamber and ingredient preheater:

    Subject matter under subclass 22 wherein the heating means heats the
    material prior to and during the mixing in a mixing chamber.


CLS 366/24
TXT Heating mixing chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 22 wherein the heating means heats a mixing
    chamber.


CLS 366/25
TXT By hot gases to interior:

    Subject matter under subclass 24 wherein the heating means is a high
    temperature fluid introduced within the mixing chamber.


CLS 366/26
TXT With elevating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including means for bodily raising and
    lowering the mixing chamber as a unit to convey the chamber from a charging
    station to a delivery station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45+,    for mixer receptacles which merely tilt to dump.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    212,    Traversing Hoists, for elevating means of that class type.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force, for
    elevating means of that class type.

    414,    Material of Article Handling, subclasses 592+ for an elevator or
    hoist and loading or unloading means therefor, and see the search notes of
    that subclass for other subclasses of that class (414) which include means
    for raising or lowering a load.


CLS 366/27
TXT With dynamic charging and dynamic delivery:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including means for directly applying a
    force to a material in order to move the material toward or into the mixing
    chamber and forcible removing material therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this classification the term "charging" has
    been limited to positively feeding aggregates or conducting liquid to the
    mixer receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16+,    for proportioning and feeding of ingredients.


CLS 366/28
TXT Interrelated:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 including means for mechanically or
    otherwise connecting the charging and delivery means to operate in a
    related manner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131+,   for interrelated feed and discharge of mixers having general use.


CLS 366/29
TXT With automatic control means:

    Subject matter under subclass 28 including means (1) to directly control
    the operation of the charging and delivery means, or (2) to control the
    enabling or disabling of devices for manually controlling the charging and
    delivery means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 128 and 132 for rotation counters with alarm
    or predetermined stop mechanism.


CLS 366/30
TXT With dynamic charging:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including means for directly applying force
    to a material in order to move the material toward or into the mixing
    chamber, and the corresponding methods.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include those methods and devices in
    which material is permitted to enter the mixing chamber solely under the
    influence of gravity.

    (2)     Note.  The material to which the force is applied may be any one of
    the components of the mixture and may be liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for a gravity type charge hopper or chute.

    76.3,   for a screw conveyor for feeding material into a rubber or heavy
    plastic working apparatus.


CLS 366/31
TXT By vibration:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein the force is applied to the
    material by vibrating element in the path conducting the material to the
    mixing chamber.

    (1)     Note.  The vibrating element may be an element of the device
    conducting the material to the mixing chamber.

    (2)     Note.  The vibratory motion may be induced by a single striking
    movement upon the vibrating element.


CLS 366/32
TXT Of skip or hopper:

    Subject matter under subclass 31 wherein the vibration is applied to one or
    more walls of a skip or hopper supplying the material to the mixing chamber.


CLS 366/33
TXT Plural charge means:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 having more than one charging means.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are mixing chambers having both dynamic and
    static (e.g., hopper) charger means.

    (2)     Note.  If a single dynamic charge device applies force to a
    plurality of streams of material, classification will be in subclass 30.


CLS 366/34
TXT Including dynamic liquid charge:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 wherein at least one of the charge means
    applies force directly to a liquid to move the liquid into the mixing
    chamber.

    (1)     Note.  The force applying means is generally of the pump type.
    Where the force applying means is of the gravitational type or is
    unspecified, classification will be in subclass 36 or 40, as appropriate.

    (2)     Note.  Where such force applying means is the only charge means,
    classification is in subclass 30.


CLS 366/35
TXT Including screw conveyor:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 wherein at least one of the charge means
    includes a screw conveyor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for ingredient proportioning by screw conveyor charging means.

    38,     for a single charge by a screw conveyor.


CLS 366/36
TXT Skip and liquid:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 wherein the dynamic charge means is a skip
    or tilting bucket, and another charge means conducts liquid to the mixing
    chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for a dynamic type liquid charge means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, appropriate subclasses for skip
    handling structure, per se.


CLS 366/37
TXT Plural dynamic:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 having more than one charge means and a
    force is applied directly to the material in each charge means.


CLS 366/38
TXT By screw conveyor:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein the force applying means is a
    screw conveyor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     for a similar device with additional charge means.

    76.3,   for a screw conveyor for feeding material into a rubber or heavy
    plastic working apparatus.


CLS 366/39
TXT Skip:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein the dynamic charge means is a skip
    or tilting bucket.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for a skip and liquid charging device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 683 for a device for loading
    a concrete mixer which device includes means for swinging it in a vertical
    plane.


CLS 366/40
TXT With liquid charge:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including means for supplying liquid to the
    mixing chamber without the direct application of force to the liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30+,    for dynamic charge liquid to the mixing chamber.

    33+,    for charge of liquid additional to the dynamic charge of other
    material to the mixing chamber.


CLS 366/41
TXT Movable charge hopper or chute:

    Subject matter under 1 wherein material is supplied to a mixing chamber by
    a container or static conveyor, at least one portion of which is capable of
    relative motion with respect a mixing chamber.

    (1)     Note.  Motion of the mixing chamber to effect mixing (e.g.,
    rotation) is not considered relative motion as used herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30+,    for dynamic charge means.

    33+,    for similar devices combined with dynamic charge means.


CLS 366/42
TXT With dynamic delivery:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including (1) means movable to remove mixed
    material from a mixing chamber, or (2) means to move a movably mounted
    mixing chamber to effect discharge thereof.


CLS 366/43
TXT Including automatic control means:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 comprising automatic means (1) to directly
    control the discharging means, or (2) to control the enabling or disabling
    of devices for manually controlling the discharge means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     for intercontrol of feed and discharge.


CLS 366/44
TXT Rotatable mixing chamber reversible for delivery:

    Subject matter under 42 wherein the mixing chamber effects agitation by
    rotation and has cooperating means therein to effect delivery when rotated
    in the direction opposite to that in which agitation is effected.


CLS 366/45
TXT Mixing chamber tiltable for delivery:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 wherein the mixing chamber is movably
    mounted so that it may tilt and discharge its contents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for mixers which are bodily elevated from a loading to a
    discharging position.

    53,     for oscillating mixers which move to an extreme position to dump.

    185,    for tilting mixing chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 160+, especially subclass 166 for this type
    of discharge means in general.


CLS 366/46
TXT With stirrer:

    Subject matter under subclass 45 wherein the mixing chamber has a stirrer
    therein.


CLS 366/47
TXT Hand operated tilt:

    Subject matter under subclass 45 wherein the mixing chamber has means
    associated therewith enabling the operator to tilt the chamber by hand.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are mixers that have a manual
    lever or a hand crank for tilting the mixer.


CLS 366/48
TXT Wheelbarrow-type support:

    Subject matter under subclass 47 wherein the mixing chamber is supported on
    a frame comprising two elements which have a single ground contacting wheel
    there between forwardly of the chamber and which extend rearwardly of the
    chamber to terminate in handle portions.


CLS 366/49
TXT Endless belt:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 wherein the means to remove the mixed
    material from the chamber is an endless conveyor.


CLS 366/50
TXT Rotary screw:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 wherein the means to remove the mixed
    material from the chamber is a rotatable auger screw conveyor.


CLS 366/51
TXT Pump:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 wherein the means to remove the mixed
    material from the chamber is a pump which directly forces or induces
    material from the mixing chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     wherein the pump is a rotary screw.


CLS 366/52
TXT Scraper or deflector:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 wherein the means for removing material
    from the mixing chamber is a scraper or a deflector.

    (1)     Note.  The scraper or deflector is so mounted as to direct material
    through the discharge opening of the mixer.


CLS 366/53
TXT Movable mixing chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein mixing is effected by movement of
    the mixing chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for a mixing chamber moved bodily by elevating means which also
    moves the chamber to effect mixing.

    219+,   for agitators of general application with a movable mixing chamber.


CLS 366/54
TXT Rotatable:

    Subject matter under subclass 53 wherein th mixing chamber turns about an
    axis in one direction only.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are surface contacting rolling chambers as
    well as wheel supported chambers wherein rolling contact of the wheels
    causes rotation of the chamber.

    (2)     Note.  The placement of a rotatable mixing chamber upon an
    independently movable platform-type support is not deemed to impart an
    additional motion to the chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213+    and 220+, for a rotatable mixing chamber.


CLS 366/55
TXT With additional diverse motion:

    Subject matter under subclass 54 wherein the mixing chamber has a component
    of motion additional to its rotation.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are surface contacting rolling chambers as
    well as wheel supported chambers wherein rolling contact of the wheels
    causes rotation of the chamber.

    (2)     Note.  The placement of a rotatable mixing chamber upon an
    independently movable platform-type support is not deemed to impart an
    additional motion to the chamber.


CLS 366/56
TXT With agitator:

    Subject matter under subclass 54 wherein the rotatable mixing chamber
    includes an agitator therein.


CLS 366/57
TXT Rigid deflector fixed to chamber wall:

    Subject matter under subclass 56 wherein the agitator is a nonflexible
    device secured within the mixing chamber to divert a portion of the
    material to assist agitation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for a similar device in which reversal of the direction of rotation
    causes the deflector to convey the material through a discharge means.

    52,     for a similar device in which the deflector conveys the material
    through a discharge means after agitation.


CLS 366/58
TXT Compartmental-type chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 57 wherein the deflector forms a partition
    dividing the mixing chamber into a plurality of sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for plural distinct mortar mixing chambers.


CLS 366/59
TXT Helical:

    Subject matter under subclass 57 wherein the deflector has a helical
    configuration.


CLS 366/60
TXT With specified actuating or control means:

    Subject matter under subclass 54 including a particularly described means
    for effecting rotation of the mixing chamber.

    (1)     Note.  Mere recitation of "drive means" of "actuating means" for
    the mixing chamber will not be considered specified actuating means.


CLS 366/61
TXT Hydraulic drive or control:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 wherein the actuating or control means
    includes a device actuated or controlled by a liquid under pressure.


CLS 366/62
TXT With specified support structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 54 including a particularly described element
    of structure for supporting the mixing chamber.

    (1)     Note.  Mere recitation of "support", "support means frame", and the
    like will not be considered specified support structure.


CLS 366/63
TXT Specified rotational mounting:

    Subject matter under subclass 62 wherein the support structure includes a
    particularly described element for permitting rotational movement of the
    chamber about an axis.


CLS 366/64
TXT Movable stirrer:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising a stirrer which has relative
    motion with respect to a mixing chamber.


CLS 366/65
TXT Vertical mixing chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 64 wherein the mixing chamber is used in an
    upright position during agitation.

    (1)     Note.  The mixing chamber is a tank, cylinder, etc.


CLS 366/66
TXT Plural stirrers:

    Subject matter under subclass 64 having more than one stirrer.


CLS 366/67
TXT Including scraper, wiper, or brush:

    Subject matter under subclass 64 including an element having an edge, or a
    plurality of bristles movable in contact with or in close proximity to a
    wall of the chamber for removing material from the wall surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    309,    for rotatable stirrer including a scraper, wiper, or brush.


CLS 366/68
TXT Movable chute:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising a static conveyor and at least
    one portion of which is capable of relative motion with respect to a mixing
    chamber.


CLS 366/69
TXT RUBBER OR HEAVY PLASTIC WORKING:

    Apparatus and method under the class definition including a mixing chamber
    and an agitator therein for use in kneading substantially self-sustaining,
    semisolid, or heavy plastic material such as clay, dough, gum, plastic,
    resin, or similar heavy plastic.

    (1)     Note.  A patent for apparatus or method for mixing ingredients for
    making a plastic mass and kneading the mass will be placed in this or an
    indented subclass.  However, an apparatus or method for mixing the
    ingredients without further kneading the mass will be placed in an
    appropriate subclass elsewhere in this class.

    (2)     Note.  In regard to the line between Class 241 and Class 366, see
    search note to Class 366 under Class 241 definition, section 12.

    (3)     Note.  Kneading is a process to work substantially self-sustaining,
    semisolid, or heavy plastic material into a uniform mixture by pressing,
    folding, and stretching.


CLS 366/70
TXT Candy puller type:

    Subject matter under subclass 69 comprising spaced arms mounted for
    relative motion toward and away from each other whereby said material is
    kneaded by repeated stretching and recombining of stretched portions.


CLS 366/71
TXT Roll couple and scraper:

    Subject matter under subclass 69 wherein the agitator comprises a pair of
    rollers for pressing the material therebetween and means for removing said
    material therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    309+,   for a rotatable stirrer including a scraper, wiper, or brush.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 366/72
TXT Roll couple and work handler:

    Subject matter under subclass 69 wherein the agitator comprises a press
    couple comprises rolls with means to adjust the space between each roll.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 155+ for concurrent pressing and conveying
    apparatus including a roll.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 366/73
TXT Roll couple having adjustment means:

    Subject matter under subclass 69 wherein the agitator comprising a press
    couple comprises rolls with means to adjust the space between each roll.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Processes, subclasses 155+ for concurrent pressing and conveying
    apparatus including a roll, and subclasses 168+ for roll adjustment.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 366/74
TXT Roll traveling within platen:

    Subject matter under subclass 69 wherein the agitator comprises a press
    couple including a roll coacting with the interior of said mixing chamber
    or receptacle type of platen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241+,   for a mixing means comprising a stirrer with a stationary mixing
    chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 156 for a concurrent pressing and conveying
    apparatus comprising external and internal rolls, and subclass 210 for a
    roll and platen-type press.


CLS 366/75
TXT With specified vent means:

    Subject matter under subclass 69 including means in said mixing chamber or
    in a stirrer for releasing gas from said mixing chamber.


CLS 366/76.1
TXT With specified feed means:

    Subject matter under subclass 69 including a particularly described means
    for conveying or admitting material into said mixing chamber.

    (1)     Note.  Mere recitation of an opening, inlet port, or feed conduit
    for the material will not be considered specified feed means.  However, any
    of the following claimed particulars will be considered specified means for
    this subclass:

    (a)     Means applying positive or negative pressure on material to move it
    into the chamber (e.g., pump).

    (b)     Conveyor means (e.g., belt, screw, chute).

    (c)     Feed control means (e.g., valve, gate).

    (d)     Structure determining the proportions of different material fed to
    the chamber.

    (e)     A feed conduit extending into the mixing chamber or in tangential
    relation to the chamber.

    (f)     A plurality of feeders (conduits, chutes, hoppers, etc.) in a
    particular relation to each other and/or to the mixing chamber.

    (g)     A supply reservoir and means to feed material from the reservoir
    into the chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150.1,  for general purpose mixing apparatus having specified feed means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses, for material dispensing
    apparatus, per se.  See the section III of the class definition of this
    class (366) for the line between Class 366 and Class 222.


CLS 366/76.2
TXT Condition responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 76.1 including a detector for sensing a
    variable condition of the apparatus or of the material and means for
    initiating or modifying the movement of material into the mixing chamber in
    response to a signal from the detector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151.1+, for condition responsive means in general purpose mixing apparatus.


CLS 366/76.3
TXT Screw feeder distinct from agitator:

    Subject matter under subclass 76.1 wherein the means for conveying or
    admitting material is a continuous helical blade which is rotated about its
    longitudinal axis and is clearly distinguishable in function and structure
    from the agitator in the mixing chamber

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     38, and 50, for a mortar mixer having a screw conveyor for feeding
    material to or discharging material from a mixing chamber.

    133     and 156.1+, for a mixing apparatus in which material is fed into a
    mixing chamber by a screw conveyor.


CLS 366/76.4
TXT Plural screws:

    Subject matter under subclass 76.3 wherein the means for conveying
    comprises more than one rotary helical blade.

    (1)     Note.  There may be a single feeder with plural screws or plural
    feeders each of which has a screw.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156.2,  for a similar feed means for materials other than rubber or heavy
    plastic in which material is fed into a mixing chamber by a plurality of
    screw conveyors.


CLS 366/76.5
TXT Roller feeder:

    Subject matter under subclass 76.1 wherein the conveying or admitting means
    has an elongated member which is rotated to feed material to the mixing
    chamber.


CLS 366/76.6
TXT Plural feed means:

    Subject matter under subclass 76.1 including a plurality of means for
    conveying or admitting material into the mixing chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177.1+, for mixing apparatus of general utility having plural feed means.


CLS 366/76.7
TXT Piston feeder (e.g., ram):

    Subject matter under subclass 76.1 including a member movable along a
    straight path in the direction of feed of material to move the material
    into the mixing chamber.


CLS 366/76.8
TXT Mixing rotor having recess for material:

    Subject matter under subclass 76.7 wherein the agitator comprises a rotor
    having a recess or pocket (e.g., a blind bore) for receiving the material.


CLS 366/76.9
TXT Chute or hopper with gravity discharge:

    Subject matter under subclass 76.1 wherein material is supplied to the
    mixing chamber solely by gravity by way of a chute or hopper.

    (1)     Note.  A hopper is a funnel shaped container, usually, but not
    necessarily used for dispensing solids.  A chute is an open-topped channel
    or conduit for guiding material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for a movable charge hopper or chute for a mortar mixer.

    68,     for a movable chute for a mortar mixer.

    181.1,  for a mixing apparatus of general utility having plural feeders
    including a chute or hopper with gravity discharge to a mixing chamber.

    183.1,  for mixing apparatus including a static conveyor with gravity
    discharge to a mixing chamber.


CLS 366/76.91
TXT Having plural means to feed material to chute or hopper:

    Subject matter under subclass 76.9 including plural means to feed material
    to the hopper or chute.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177.1+, for a mixing apparatus including plural means for feeding material
    to a mixing chamber.


CLS 366/76.92
TXT Having discharge valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 76.9 including a gate or closure for
    controlling release of material from the chute or hopper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181.3,  for a hopper having a gate or valve in an outlet thereof.

    182.3,  for a container with a valved outlet.


CLS 366/76.93
TXT Including specific structure for controlling flow through the feed means:

    Subject matter under subclass 76.1 including particularly described means
    to start, stop, or regulate the flow of material in the feed means.

    (1)     Note.  More than the mere recitation of a valve or pump is required
    for placement of a patent in this subclass.  There must be a claim of valve
    details, a valve operator mechanism, pump feed rate adjustment means, or
    other feature directly related to adjustment or control of the material
    flow rate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160.1   through 160.5, for apparatus including mixing ratio control means.

    165.4,  for feed means including a flow regulator in a mixing apparatus in
    which material has rotary motion.

    182.1+, for feed means including details of means for controlling flow
    through the feed means.


CLS 366/77
TXT With specified discharge means:

    Subject matter under subclass 69 including a particularly described means
    for conveying or releasing said material from said mixing chamber.

    (1)     Note.  Mere recitation of an opening, outlet port, or discharge
    conduit for the material will not be considered specified discharge means.
    However, any of the following claimed particulars will be considered as
    specified means for this subclass:



    (a)     Means applying pressure on the material to move it out of the
    chamber (e.g., pump).

    (b)     Conveyor means (e.g., belt, chute, screw).

    (c)     Discharge control means (e.g., valve gate).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184+,   for discharge means of general application.


CLS 366/78
TXT Rotating and reciprocating stirrer:

    Subject matter under subclass 69 including a stirrer which turns in but one
    direction about a fixed axis and moves back and forth in a straight line
    along said fixed axis simultaneously or alternately to produce mixing and
    kneading.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241+,   for rotating and reciprocating stirrer within stationary mixing
    chamber of general utility.


CLS 366/79
TXT Stirrer is through-pass screw conveyor:

    Subject matter under subclass 69 wherein the mixing chamber is designed to
    receive material at one end of a path and to discharge it at the other end
    in a continuous flow, and said agitator comprises a stirrer having a
    helical ribbon or thread type conveyor rotatable so as to mix and knead the
    material concurrent with conveying it through said path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    318+,   for screw-type stirrer within a stationary mixing chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 144+ for a concurrent pressing and conveying
    apparatus of general application.  See the search notes in Class 100,
    subclass 144.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 657+ for a conveying element of
    the screw type.

    415,    Rotary, Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, subclasses 72+ for a pump
    including a rotary screw.


CLS 366/80
TXT With deflector:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 including a device secured within and in
    fixed relation to said mixing chamber for assisting said conveyor in mixing
    and kneading.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    336+,   for stationary deflector in flow-through mixing chamber of general
    utility.


CLS 366/81
TXT With additional stirrer element on screw conveyor:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 wherein said conveyor includes an
    additional element on the ribbon or thread (e.g., pin, blade, rib) to
    assist mixing and kneading.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    319,    for screw-type stirrer with additional agitator on screw within a
    mixing chamber of general utility.


CLS 366/82
TXT Ring or disk:

    Subject matter under subclass 81 wherein the additional stirrer element
    comprises an annulus integral with or affixed to the shaft of said conveyor.

    (1)     Note.  The ring or disk may be apertured, grooved, or may have
    other outer surface configuration.


CLS 366/83
TXT Plural screw conveyors on separate shafts:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 comprising separate shafts for distinct
    helical ribbon or thread-type conveyors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    292+,   for plural stirrers within a stationary mixing chamber of general
    utility.


CLS 366/84
TXT In parallel intercommunicating mixing chambers:

    Subject matter under subclass 83 wherein said conveyors are located within
    a plurality of mixing chambers having main axes parallel to each other and
    each mixing chamber is in communication with each other so that material
    may flow from one mixing chamber to another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290,    for stirrer in at least one of intercommunicating adjacent mixing
    chambers having general utility.

    301,    for kneaders in plural chambers.


CLS 366/85
TXT Screw conveyors intermeshing:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 wherein one of said conveyors has a
    profile which contacts a mating surface of parallel screw conveyor along
    the length thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301,    for parallel stirrers intermeshing with each other in a mixing
    chamber of general utility.


CLS 366/86
TXT Intercommunication by conduit:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 wherein the communication between each
    mixing chamber is by means of an elongated, hollow tube.


CLS 366/87
TXT And downstream breaker plate or screen:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 including foraminous means (e.g., grate,
    lattice, screen, etc.) located at the discharge end of said conveyor.


CLS 366/88
TXT Including sections of different pitch:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 wherein the spacing of thread or helical
    ribbon on a portion of said conveyor differs from the spacing of said
    thread or said helical ribbon on another portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    321,    screw-type stirrer with opposite pitch in a mixing chamber of
    general utility.

    323,    screw-type stirrer with varying pitch in a mixing chamber of
    general utility.


CLS 366/89
TXT Varying diameter of shaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 wherein the diameter of a portion of the
    shaft of said conveyor differs from the diameter of the shaft on another
    portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323,    for screw-type stirrer with varying convolutions or shank or
    varying pitch in a mixing chamber of general utility.


CLS 366/90
TXT Notched, apertured, or interrupted thread:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 wherein said thread or said helical ribbon
    has an opening therethrough or a discontinuous portion thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322,    for discontinuous screw stirrers in a mixing chamber of general
    utility.

    324,    for screw-type stirrer with apertured or notched threads in a
    mixing chamber of general utility.


CLS 366/91
TXT Plural mixing chambers:

    Subject matter under subclass 69 wherein said material is kneaded within a
    plurality of mixing chambers.

    (1)     Note.  Mixing chambers which are in communication with each other
    so that material may flow from one chamber to another will be placed in
    this subclass.  Moreover, the communication may be by means of a conduit,
    or through a conduit, or through or across a portion separating the
    chambers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290+,   for stirrer within at least one of intercommunicating adjacent
    mixing chambers of general utility.


CLS 366/92
TXT With means to move mixing chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 69 including a particularly described means
    for moving said mixing chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130,    for an operator supported mixing chamber of general utility.

    197+,   for a mixing chamber of general utility removable from stirrer and
    support.

    208+,   for agitation by movement of support for a mixing chamber of
    general utility.

    219+,   for agitation by movement relative to a stationary support of a
    mixing chamber having general utility.


CLS 366/93
TXT Rotating mixing chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 92 wherein said mixing chamber turns in but
    one direction about its own axis.


CLS 366/94
TXT With rotating stirrer:

    Subject matter under subclass 93 including a stirrer which turns in but one
    direction about a fixed axis within said rotating mixing chamber.


CLS 366/95
TXT Single stirrer:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 wherein only one rotating stirrer is
    within said rotating mixing chamber.

    (1)     Note.  Where a plurality of like or diverse stirrer elements are in
    fixed relation to each other and move together as a unit they will be
    considered as single stirrer even if the elements are adjustable relative
    to flexible so that portions thereof move relative to each other during
    agitation.


CLS 366/96
TXT Stationary mixing chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 69 wherein said mixing chamber is in a fixed
    position during kneading.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241+,   for stirrer within stationary chamber for general application.


CLS 366/97
TXT With rotating stirrer:

    Subject matter under subclass 96 comprising a stirrer which turns in but
    one direction about a fixed axis within said stationary mixing chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    279+,   for a rotatable stirrer in a fixed mixing chamber with general
    utility.


CLS 366/98
TXT Single stirrer:

    Subject matter under subclass 97 wherein only one rotating stirrer is
    within said stationary mixing chamber.

    (1)     Note.  Where a plurality of like or diverse stirrer elements are in
    fixed relation to each other and move together as a unit they will be
    considered a single stirrer even if the elements are adjustable relative to
    each other prior to agitation or are flexible so that portions thereof move
    relative to each other during agitation.


CLS 366/99
TXT Horizontal:

    Subject matter under subclass 98 wherein the axis of said rotating single
    stirrer is horizontal.


CLS 366/100
TXT Stirrer with specified drive means:

    Subject matter under subclass 69 wherein the mixing chamber includes a
    stirrer and a particularly described means for drive said stirrer to mix
    and knead.

    (1)     Note.  Mere recitation of a motor would not be considered as
    specified drive means.


CLS 366/101
TXT BY INJECTING GAS INTO MIXING CHAMBER:

    Apparatus and corresponding methods under the class definition wherein the
    agitation is effected by the introduction of a gas under pressure into
    contact with the material in the mixing chamber.

    (1)     Note.  The injection of gas into a liquid must be primarily for
    agitating the liquid.  If the primary purpose is to mix the gas with the
    liquid, placement will be in Class 261, and see note to that class below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163.1+, for a device wherein material, which may include air, is fed into
    the mixing chamber by suction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 195 for dispensing combined with gas agitation.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 143 for gas
    effected agitation of supply for a fluid sprinkling or spraying device, and
    subclasses 654+ for gas effected agitation of supply for nonfluid material
    sprinkling or spraying device.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus for mixing a liquid with a gas.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclasses 88, 90+, and 136+ for
    agitation of a solid material in a receptacle by injecting gas into the
    receptacle.


CLS 366/102
TXT With stirrer:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 which also includes a stirrer in the
    chamber.


CLS 366/103
TXT Plural stirrers:

    Subject matter under subclass 102 wherein there is more than one stirrer.


CLS 366/104
TXT Diverse:

    Subject matter under subclass 103 wherein one stirrer differs in structure
    from another stirrer.


CLS 366/105
TXT Into rotating mixing  chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein the chamber is rotatable and the
    gas is injected into the chamber while it is rotating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219+,   for a chamber which is rotatable and has additional motion.

    220+,   for a rotatable mixing chamber.


CLS 366/106
TXT Intermittent or pulsating feed:

    Subject matte under subclass 101 wherein the gas is introduced in recurrent
    interrupted sequence or in recurrent variation in flow rate.


CLS 366/107
TXT Plural gas feeders:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein the gas is introduced into the
    chamber through more than one feeder.


CLS 366/108
TXT BY VIBRATION:

    Apparatus and corresponding methods under the class definition wherein the
    agitation of the material is effected by the action of a vibratory device
    producing rapid to and from movement of portions of the material, of the
    mixing chamber, of a portion of the chamber well or of a stirrer, or by
    rapid to and from movement of a stirrer energized by flow of the material
    there against.

    (1)     Note.  A patent for vibratory device, per se, disclosed for use as
    a stirrer by insertion with a mass of of material will be place in
    subclasses 117+ below, and see the search notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contract With Solids, subclass 1 for a method
    of cleaning articles by vibration.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 196+ for dispensing combined with agitation
    by vibration.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 683 for a device for loading
    a concrete mixer, which device includes means for swinging it in a vertical
    plane.


CLS 366/109
TXT Including endless conveyor:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 including an endless means (e.g., belt,
    chain, rotary turret) for moving the material, or a mixing chamber
    containing the material through a zone where the agitation takes place.


CLS 366/110
TXT Of holder for mixing chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein the vibrator device is attached
    to a receptacle or clasp for the mixing chamber, and wherein the vibration
    of the mixing chamber results from the operation of the vibratory device.

    (1)     Note.  For proper placement of a patent in this subclass, the
    mixing chamber does not have to be claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    197+,   for a device wherein the mixing chamber is removable from a stirrer
    and its support.

    208+,   for agitation by mechanical movement of a support for a removable
    mixing chamber.

    219+,   for agitation of material by mechanical movement of a mixing
    chamber relative to a stationary support.


CLS 366/111
TXT Of platform or mixing chamber supported by vibrator:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein the vibratory device directly
    supports the mixing chamber or a platform for supporting the mixing chamber.

    (1)     Note.  For proper placement of a patent in this subclass, the
    mixing chamber does not have be claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for a device wherein a platform for the mixing chamber is attached
    to the vibratory device.

    197+,   for a device wherein the mixing chamber is removable mixing chamber.

    219+,   for agitation of material by mechanical movement of a mixing
    chamber relative to a stationary support.


CLS 366/112
TXT Supported by vibrator solely:

    Subject matter under subclass 111 wherein the platform of the mixing
    chamber is supported solely by the vibratory device.


CLS 366/113
TXT Vibrator mounted in aperture of mixing chamber bottom wall:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein the vibratory device is secured
    in an opening in the bottom wall of the mixing chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    197+,   for a mixing chamber removable from the stirrer and its support.

    208+,   for agitation by mechanical movement of a support for the mixing
    chamber.

    219+,   for agitation of material by mechanical movement of a mixing
    chamber relative to a stationary support.


CLS 366/114
TXT Vibrator attached to mixing chamber wall or platform:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein the vibratory device is fastened
    to the mixing chamber wall or to platform adapted to support the mixing
    chamber.

    (1)     Note.  For proper placement of a patent in this subclass, the
    mixing chamber does not have to be claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111,    for a device wherein a platform for the mixing chamber is merely
    supported by the vibratory device.


CLS 366/115
TXT By bonding:

    Subject matter under subclass 114 wherein the vibratory device is adhered
    or welded to the mixing chamber wall or to the platform.


CLS 366/116
TXT With amplitude or frequency regulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 including means for regulating or
    controlling the amplitude or frequency of the vibration.

    (1)     Note.  Mere recitation of a switch with no particularly described
    means for regulating the frequency or the amplitude of the vibration is not
    sufficient for placement of a patent in this subclass.


CLS 366/117
TXT Of stirrer:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein the agitation of the material is
    effected by a stirrer activated by a vibratory device, or wherein the
    stirrer is a vibratory device acting directly on the material.

    (1)     Note.  A patent for a vibratory device, per se, disclosed for use
    as a stirrer by insertion within a mass of material will be placed in this
    or an appropriate indented subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 20-110 for a mechanical
    vibrator, per se.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, appropriate subclass for the combination
    of a toll and a tool driving or impacting means which combination is not
    limited to a specific tool art, such as specific shape of the work
    contacting portion of the tool, related tools, or an opposed work support.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 328+ for
    piezoelectric vibrators.


CLS 366/118
TXT In mixing chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 wherein the stirrer is within a mixing
    chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243,    for an oscillatable stirrer mounted in a removable closure of a
    stationary mixing chamber.

    276,    for an oscillatable stirrer within a stationary mixing chamber.


CLS 366/119
TXT Actuated by flow of material:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein the flow of the material
    thereagainst as it is fed into the mixing chamber.


CLS 366/120
TXT Pencil type:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 wherein the stirrer comprises an
    elongated slender housing enclosing the vibratory device and which is
    intended for insertion manually into the material by the user.


CLS 366/121
TXT With lubricating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 120 including means to lubricate the moving
    parts in the stirrer.


CLS 366/122
TXT Specified end structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 120 including structure mounted at either end
    of the stirrer (e.g., nose cap, handle, etc.).


CLS 366/123
TXT Actuated by rotary movement of unbalanced- weight shaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 120 wherein the vibration of the stirrer is
    caused by the unbalanced weight which is mounted eccentrically on a
    rotatable shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128,    for a general type of vibrator actuated by rotary movement of
    unbalanced-weight shaft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclass 49 for a drive means for a tool
    as provided for in that class which includes a rotating eccentric mass.


CLS 366/124
TXT Vibrator actuated by fluid under pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein the vibratory device causes
    vibration of the material or of a portion of the chamber wall, the
    vibration of the device being caused by the flow of fluid under pressure
    within the device.


CLS 366/125
TXT Including shaft with radially movable element:

    Subject matter under subclass 124 wherein the vibratory device comprises a
    shaft, a cylindrical housing for the shaft, and a radially movable element
    (e.g., blade, vane, ball, pin) on said shaft, the fluid acting on the
    element or the housing to cause eccentric rotation of the shaft or orbital
    movement of the housing relative to the shaft and thus causing vibration of
    the housing.


CLS 366/126
TXT Fluid acting on orbital rolling ball:

    Subject matter under subclass 124 wherein the vibratory device comprises a
    sphere guided for rolling movement along a generally circular or elliptical
    path by pressure of the fluid thereagainst, the movement of the sphere
    causing the vibration of the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    for a device wherein a ball is movable radially with respect to a
    shaft within a cylindrical housing.


CLS 366/127
TXT By electrostrictive or magnetostrictive transducer:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein the vibration is caused by
    periodic deformation of a dielectric body as the result of an applied
    electric or magnetic field.


CLS 366/128
TXT By rotary movement of unbalanced-weight shaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein the vibration of the device is
    caused by movement of an unbalanced weight which is mounted eccentrically
    on a rotatable shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for a similar device of the pencil type.


CLS 366/129
TXT OPERATOR SUPPORTED:

    Apparatus and corresponding methods under the class definition comprising a
    stirrer and/or mixing chamber which is entirely sustained against the force
    of gravity by the user during agitation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117+,   for an operator supported vibratory stirrer.


CLS 366/130
TXT Mixing chamber type:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein a mixing chamber is so held by
    the user.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are patents for receptacles with
    internal deflector structure wherein the agitation is effected by manual
    manipulation of the receptacle as a whole by the user.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for an apparatus including a holder for a chamber and means to
    cause vibration of the holder to effect agitation of material in the
    chamber.

    209+,   for apparatus including means to secure a chamber to a movable
    support and means to move the support to effect agitation of material in
    the chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 219+ for a package of two
    or more separated materials which are adapted to be commingled within the
    package by manipulation of the package or a part thereof.

    220,    Receptacles, appropriate subclasses for receptacle without
    deflectors and which are disclosed to be manipulated for agitation.


CLS 366/131
TXT HAVING INTERRELATED FEED AND DISCHARGE MEANS:

    Apparatus and corresponding methods under the class definition including
    external means to convey or admit material into the mixing chamber and
    means to convey or release the material therefrom and wherein said means:

    (a)     are interconnected by a duct or conveyor exteriorly of the chamber
    for returning discharge material to the chamber;

    (b)     have a common control system for regulating movement of material
    into and out of the chamber.

    (c)     have a single mechanism for moving the material into and out of the
    chamber, or

    (d)     are specifically related to each other by their relative size.

    (1)     Note.  The feed and discharge may be through a common opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76.3,   for a screw conveyor for feeding material into a rubber or heavy
    plastic working apparatus.

    139,    for a device including means to produce a partial vacuum in the
    mixing chamber which means may also serve to move material into and/or out
    of the chamber.


CLS 366/132
TXT Including means to monitor or control operation:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 including a common control system for
    regulating movement of material into and out of the chamber, and also
    including a detector for sensing a variable condition of the apparatus or
    of the material and initiating or modifying operation of a part of the
    apparatus in response to signal from the detector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151.1,  for an apparatus wherein the feed means is responsive to a
    condition-sensor.


CLS 366/133
TXT By single endless or screw conveyor:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein a single endless or screw
    conveyor serves to either move material into and out of the chamber or to
    return discharged material to the mixing chamber.


CLS 366/134
TXT Plural feed or discharge means:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein there is more than one feed or
    discharge means in a particular relation to each other and/or to the mixing
    chamber.


CLS 366/135
TXT Rotatable mixing chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the agitation takes place in a
    mixing chamber that rotates in one direction only.


CLS 366/136
TXT Recirculating from and to mixing chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the feed and discharge means are
    interconnected by a duct exteriorly of the mixing chamber for returning at
    least a portion of discharge material to the chamber.


CLS 366/137
TXT Directly:

    Subject matter under subclass 136 wherein the discharge material is
    returned without interruption to the mixing chamber.


CLS 366/137.1
TXT JET OR SPRAY IMPINGING FREE-FALLING STREAM:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein material is mixed by
    directing a jet or spray of one material into contact with a free-falling
    stream of another material so as to intermix the material of the jet and
    the stream.

    (1)     Note.  The free-falling stream of material may be solid or liquid.
    The material is considered free-falling if it is unconfined or
    substantially uninfluenced in its motion by any adjacent surfaces or the
    like during its fall through a gas.


CLS 366/138
TXT WITH FLUSHING OF MIXING CHAMBER:

    Apparatus and corresponding methods under the class definition provided
    with means, in addition to inlet and outlet means for the material to be
    agitated, for introducing a cleansing fluid into the mixing chamber.


CLS 366/139
TXT IN VACUUM CHAMBER:

    Apparatus and corresponding methods under the class definition including
    means for producing a partial vacuum in the mixing chamber during agitation.

    (1)     Note.  Substantially the entire contents of the mixing chamber must
    be under reduced (subatmospheric) pressure. Where the contents are not and
    localized vacuum or suction is created to feed material into the chamber,
    placement is as indicated in the search notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163.1+, for a device provided with suction means for feeding material into
    the mixing chamber.


CLS 366/140
TXT WITH SAMPLING:

    Apparatus and corresponding methods under the class definition including
    means for or a step of segregating or removing a portion of the material
    for the purpose of inspection examination, or testing.


CLS 366/141
TXT WITH WEIGHING:

    Apparatus and corresponding methods under the class definition including
    means for or a step of determining the weight of a segregated quantity of
    material.


CLS 366/142
TXT WITH TEST, SIGNAL, OR INDICATOR MEANS:

    Apparatus and corresponding methods under the class definition with means
    for (a) determining a property or characteristic of the material for the
    purpose of indicating the property or (b) producing or providing a
    perceptible manifestation (e.g., audible or visible) of a condition of a
    part of the apparatus or of a condition or rate of flow of the material.

    (1)     Note. If feeding of material is automatically controlled by or in
    response to the determining means, placement is as indicated in the search
    notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151.1+, for mixing apparatus having feed means responsive to a condition
    sensor.


CLS 366/143
TXT WITH INSPECTION MEANS (E.G., WINDOW):

    Apparatus and corresponding methods under the class definition including
    means for viewing a part of the apparatus or a portion of the material.


CLS 366/144
TXT WITH HEATING OR COOLING:

    Apparatus and corresponding methods under the class definition including
    means for modifying the temperature of the material.

    (1)     Note.  The temperature modification may occur before, during, or
    after agitation.

    (2)     Note.  See section III for class lines with other heating or
    cooling classes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 348 for a cooking
    apparatus combined with means to stir material while it is cooking.


CLS 366/145
TXT Including temperature control:

    Subject matter under subclass 144 including means for regulating the
    temperature.


CLS 366/146
TXT Electrical heating:

    Subject matter under subclass 144 wherein the material is heated by means
    of an electric current moving through a resistance element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS SUBCLASS:

    145,    for electrical heating combined with a temperature control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 296+ for an electric heating apparatus
    for a liquid with means to circulate the liquid in a fixed path in relation
    to a heated surface so as to transfer heat to the liquid.  Where electrical
    heating means is only broadly claimed, placement will be in Class 366; but
    where details of the heater or control means for the heater are claimed,
    placement will be in Class 219.


CLS 366/147
TXT Medium in stirrer or mixing chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 144 wherein the temperature modifying means
    includes means for circulating a heated or cooled fluid (e.g., gas, water)
    in the stirrer or for admitting such fluid in to the chamber.


CLS 366/148
TXT Of supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 144 wherein the temperature modification of
    the material is effected prior to its entry into the mixing chamber.


CLS 366/149
TXT Fluid-filled jacket:

    Subject matter under subclass 144 including wall structure surrounding the
    mixing chamber in spaced relation to provide a cavity for a fluid heating
    or cooling medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144,    for a device including a heating or cooling conduit coiled about
    the mixing chamber.

    204,    for a container which supports a mixing chamber and where a cooling
    means can be placed in the container.


CLS 366/150.1
TXT HAVING SPECIFIED FEED MEANS:

    An apparatus or corresponding method under the class definition including a
    particularly described means for conveying or admitting material (i.e.,
    feed means) into the mixing chamber.

    (1)     Note.  Mere recitation of an opening, inlet port, or feed conduit
    for the material is not considered specified feed means.  However, any of
    the following claimed particulars are considered specified means for this
    subclass:

    (a)     means applying positive or negative pressure on material to move it
    into the chamber (e.g., pump);

    (b)     conveyor means (e.g., belt, screw, chute);

    (c)     feed control means (e.g., valve, gate);

    (d)     structure determining the proportions of different materials fed to
    the chamber;

    (e)     a feed conduit extending into the mixing chamber or in tangential
    relation to the chamber;

    (f)     a plurality of feed means (conduits, chutes, hoppers, etc.) in a
    particular relation to each other or to the mixing chamber; or

    (g)     a supply reservoir and means to feed material from the reservoir
    into the chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27+,    30+, and 40, for a mortar mixer type apparatus having means for
    feeding material into a mixing chamber.

    76,     for a rubber or heavy plastic working apparatus having specified
    feed means.

    131,    for a device wherein the feed means and the discharge means are
    interrelated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses, for material dispensing
    apparatus, per se.  See the section III of the Class definition of this
    class (366) for the line between Class 366 and  Class 222.


CLS 366/151.1
TXT Responsive to condition sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 150.1 including a detector for sensing a
    variable condition of the apparatus or of the material and means for
    initiating or modifying the movement of material into the mixing chamber in
    response to a signal from the detector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76.2,   for condition responsive feed means in a rubber or heavy plastic
    working apparatus.

    132,    for an apparatus including interrelated feed and discharge means
    and a sensor to monitor and control its operation.

    141,    for a mixing apparatus including a detector for sensing weight,
    which may include a weight-responsive control.


CLS 366/151.2
TXT Responsive to location of mixing chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 151.1 wherein the sensor is responsive to the
    position of the mixing chamber.


CLS 366/152.1
TXT Proportioning plural material components:

    Subject matter under subclass 151.1 wherein the mixing chamber has feed
    means for different materials, the means for initiating or modifying
    movement of the material controlling at least one of the feed means so as
    to control or maintain the ratio of the materials admitted into the mixing
    chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8       and 16+, for a mortar mixing method or mortar mixer type apparatus
    involving proportioning of plural ingredients.

    160.1+, for specified feed means with mixing ratio control not dependent on
    sensing means.

    162.1+, for specified feed means providing a fixed, predetermined mixing
    ratio.


CLS 366/152.2
TXT By volume or fixed quantity:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.1 wherein (a) the variable condition
    sensed by the detector is a volume or specific quantity of material fed by
    one of the feed means and (b) the detector senses the condition by
    monitoring the feed means.

    (1)     Note.  The specific quantity of material to be fed may be
    determined by the operation of a pump of known capacity for a given time
    period.


CLS 366/152.3
TXT By viscosity:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.1 wherein the detector senses resistance
    to the movement of an object through the material being mixed.


CLS 366/152.4
TXT By electrical conductivity:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.1 wherein the detector senses the
    electrical conductivity of the material being mixed.


CLS 366/152.5
TXT Responsive to viscosity:

    Subject matter under subclass 151.1 wherein the detector senses resistance
    to the movement of an object through the material being mixed.


CLS 366/152.6
TXT Responsive to level of material in feeder:

    Subject matter under subclass 151.1 wherein the detector senses the level
    of material in the feed means.


CLS 366/153.1
TXT Controlling level of material in mixing chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 151.1 wherein the detector senses the level
    of material in the chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 56 and 64+ for feed means controlled by the
    level of material in a receiving chamber.


CLS 366/153.2
TXT Layering:

    Subject matter under subclass 150.1 wherein the feed means deposits the
    material in the mixing chamber in layers and the material is subsequently
    removed from the mixing chamber such that portions of each layer are
    substantially simultaneously removed, thereby mixing the material.


CLS 366/153.3
TXT Endless conveyor:

    Subject matter under subclass 150.1 including an endless conveyor for
    feeding the material to the mixing chamber.

    (1)     Note.  The endless conveyor may be, for example, an endless belt or
    an endless chain carrying material-transporting buckets.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for an endless belt for discharging material from a mortar mixer
    type apparatus.

    133,    for agitating apparatus having interrelated feed and discharge
    means including an endless or screw conveyor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power Driven, appropriate subclasses for endless belt
    conveyors.


CLS 366/154.1
TXT Agitation of material in feeder or supply reservoir:

    Subject matter under subclass 150.1 including means for agitating the
    material in the feed means or in a supply container operatively associated
    with the feed means.

    (1)     Note.  The agitation may be for the purpose of moving the material
    toward the chamber or merely for preventing agglomeration of the material
    so as to maintain its free flow.  The recitation of a screw conveyor or
    other feed means that inherently agitates material is sufficient to make
    placement of a patent here proper.  A trap chamber feeder is not considered
    to inherently agitate material as required for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290,    for plural intercommunicating stationary mixing chambers having a
    stirrer in each chamber.


CLS 366/154.2
TXT By vibration:

    Subject matter under subclass 154.1 wherein the means for agitating the
    material in the feed means includes a vibrating element.

    (1)     Note.  The vibrating element may be part of the feed means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for a mortar mixer having a vibrator element in the path conducting
    material to a mixing chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 533 for gravity conveyors having
    means to affect flow of conveyed material by vibration.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 196+ for a container and means for vibrating
    the container or portion thereof to assist gravity discharge of material
    from the container.


CLS 366/155.1
TXT Rotatable impeller:

    Subject matter under subclass 154.1 wherein the agitator comprises a
    stirrer that agitates the material by turning about an axis.


CLS 366/155.2
TXT Having radially projecting pinlike element:

    Subject matter under subclass 155.1 wherein the stirrer includes an element
    that (a) is elongated in the radial direction of the shaft, (b) has a
    substantially constant cross section perpendicular to its longitudinal axis
    whose thickness is similar in all directions, and (c) has a free radially
    outer end.


CLS 366/156.1
TXT Screw conveyor:

    Subject matter under subclass 155.1 wherein the rotatable impeller
    comprises structure having a continuous helical blade which rotates about
    its longitudinal axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     38, and 50, for mortar mixer type apparatus having screw conveyors
    for feeding or discharging material from a mixing chamber.

    76.3,   for a screw conveyor for feeding material into a rubber or heavy
    plastic working apparatus.

    133,    for mixing apparatus in which material is moved into and out of a
    mixing chamber by a single screw conveyor.


CLS 366/156.2
TXT Plural screw feeders:

    Subject matter under subclass 156.1 wherein there is more than one
    rotatable impeller structure having a continuous helical blade which
    rotates about its longitudinal axis in the feed means.

    (1)     Note.  There may be a single feed means having plural screw feeders
    or plural feed means each having a screw feeder.


CLS 366/157.1
TXT Coaxial or unitary with stirrer:

    Subject matter under subclass 156.1 wherein (a) the mixing chamber has a
    stirrer which moves about an axis aligned with the axis of the rotatable
    impeller or (b) the rotatable impeller extends into the mixing chamber to
    also serve as a stirrer within the chamber.


CLS 366/157.2
TXT Screw stirrer:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.1 wherein (a) the stirrer moving about
    the axis aligned with the screw conveyor is a screw-type stirrer, or (b)
    the screw conveyor extends into the mixing chamber to serve as the stirrer.


CLS 366/157.3
TXT Vertical axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.2 wherein the axes of the screw conveyor
    and screw stirrer are vertical during operation.


CLS 366/157.4
TXT Vertical axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.1 wherein the axes of the screw conveyor
    and stirrer are vertical during operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157.3,  for a mixer including a vertical screw-type stirrer and screw
    conveyor.


CLS 366/158.1
TXT Axis parallel to stirrer in mixing chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 156.1 wherein the mixing chamber has a
    stirrer movable about an axis which is parallel to and noncoaxial with the
    axis of the screw conveyor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157.1,  for mixing apparatus having a screw conveyor coaxial or unitary
    with a stirrer.


CLS 366/158.2
TXT Varying diameter screw or shank:

    Subject matter under subclass 156.1 wherein the helical blade varies in
    diameter along its length or the blade surrounds and is mounted on a
    central shank that varies in diameter.


CLS 366/158.3
TXT Discontinuous screw:

    Subject matter under subclass 156.1 wherein the helical blade is
    interrupted along its length.


CLS 366/158.4
TXT Including upstream agitator:

    Subject matter under subclass 156.1 including an agitator upstream of the
    helical blade in the direction of flow of material in the feed means.


CLS 366/158.5
TXT Stationary deflector:

    Subject matter under subclass 154.1 wherein the means for agitating the
    material in the feed means or supply container comprises a stationary
    deflector configured and arranged to cause irregular flow of material past
    the deflector.


CLS 366/159.1
TXT Returning material to supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 150.1 including means to cause or permit
    material fed toward the mixing chamber to move away from the chamber in the
    feed means before entering the mixing chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136,    for an apparatus including external means for recirculating
    material from and to the mixing chamber.


CLS 366/160.1
TXT Adjustable mixing ratio control:

    Subject matter under subclass 150.1 wherein the feed means includes
    variable means for controlling the relative quantities of different
    materials fed by the feed means to the mixing chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8       and 16+, for a mortar mixing method or mortar mixer type apparatus
    involving proportioning of plural ingredients.

    152.1+, for a similar device wherein the mixing ratio is controlled by a
    condition sensor.

    162.1+, for means feeding materials to a mixing chamber in a predetermined
    ratio that is not adjustable.


CLS 366/160.2
TXT Including pump:

    Subject matter under subclass 160.1 wherein the feed means includes a pump
    for moving or conveying the material to the mixing chamber.

    (1)     Note.  A ``pump" includes a screw- or auger-type feed means for
    purposes of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162.3,  for a feed chamber of decreasing volume.

    176.1+, for a mixing apparatus including a pump that forces material
    through a restriction to agitate it.

    181.8,  for plural feeders including a fluid pump.

    182.2,  for flow control means including a pump.


CLS 366/160.3
TXT By variable pump:

    Subject matter under subclass 160.2 wherein the variable means comprises
    means for varying the speed, duration, or capacity of the pump.


CLS 366/160.4
TXT Piston pump:

    Subject matter under subclass 160.3 wherein the pump utilizes a piston to
    force material out of a housing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176.3,  for a mixing apparatus comprising a piston pump forcing material
    through a restriction.


CLS 366/160.5
TXT By volume:

    Subject matter under subclass 160.1 wherein the variable means includes
    means responsive to a volume of material.

    (1)     Note.  The volume of material must be measured directly; e.g., by
    filling a container or a piston pump cylinder of known volume.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for mortar mixer type apparatus having means for proportioning
    ingredients by volume.

    152.2,  for feed means including means for measuring the volume of material
    fed.


CLS 366/162.1
TXT Predetermined mixing ratio:

    Subject matter under subclass 150.1 wherein the feed means is designed to
    deliver different materials to the mixing chamber in a fixed proportional
    relationship.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152.1+, for a similar device wherein the mixing ratio is regulated by a
    conditionsensor.

    160.1+, for means feeding materials in a constant ratio, which ratio can be
    varied or adjusted.


CLS 366/162.2
TXT Rotatable feeder:

    Subject matter under subclass 162.1 wherein the feed means includes at
    least one feed means that rotates for feeding material to the mixing
    chamber.

    (1)     Note.  Endless conveyors are not considered rotatable feed means.
    Rotatable feed means include screw conveyors, rotatable trap chambers, etc.


CLS 366/162.3
TXT Feed chamber of decreasing volume:

    Subject matter under subclass 162.1 wherein the feed means has a feed
    chamber for feeding material to the mixer and the feed chamber decreases in
    volume during the feeding of material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160.2+, for a piston pump or other feed means having a variable volume
    chamber.


CLS 366/162.4
TXT Impinging jets:

    Subject matter under subclass 150.1 wherein the feed means includes a pair
    of inlets into the mixing chamber constructed to direct material toward a
    common point and wherein the material is introduced into the chamber
    through the inlets with sufficient velocity to form streams that collide at
    the common point and intermix.

    (1)     Note.  Devices in which the energy of any streams formed by mixing
    chamber inlet is substantially dissipated before the streams collide are
    excluded.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 133 and 135 for chemical reactors
    forming impinging jets.


CLS 366/162.5
TXT Having clean-out rod:

    Subject matter under subclass 162.4 including a body that reciprocates
    within the mixing chamber to assist the discharge of the material from the
    chamber.


CLS 366/163.1
TXT By suction:

    Subject matter under subclass 150.1 wherein the material is moved into the
    chamber under the influence of negative pressure produced in the chamber.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not require substantially the entire
    volume of the mixing chamber to be exposed to negative pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139,    for a mixing chamber, the entire contents of which is exposed to
    negative pressure, in which the negative pressure may serve to move
    material into the mixing chamber.


CLS 366/163.2
TXT By venturi or jet pump type device:

    Subject matter under subclass 163.1 including (a) a passage having a region
    of reduced cross- sectional area connected to the mixing chamber and
    constructed so that the flow of a fluid through the region creates the
    suction, or (b) a small tube through which material is directed into a
    larger tube with sufficient velocity to produce the suction.

    (1)     Note.  The passage may constitute a portion of the mixing chamber,
    or a low pressure region of the passage may be fluidly connected to the
    mixing chamber.


CLS 366/164.1
TXT By stirrer:

    Subject matter under subclass 163.1 wherein the suction is produced by
    movement of a stirrer within the mixing chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262+,   for a mixing apparatus including a pump creating a reduced pressure
    to move material through a confined flow path within a mixing chamber.


CLS 366/164.2
TXT Conduit integral with stirrer:

    Subject matter under subclass 164.1 wherein the stirrer is mounted for
    rotation about a fixed axis and the material is fed by the suction to the
    chamber through a conduit that is fixed to or part of the stirrer so as to
    be substantially immovable with respect to the stirrer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169.1+,for a rotatable stirrer through which material is fed into the
    mixing chamber.


CLS 366/164.3
TXT Detachably or adjustably mounted on drive shaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 164.2 wherein the stirrer is mounted on and
    driven by a rotatable drive shaft and the stirrer and at least a portion of
    the conduit can be repositioned or are removably mounted on the drive shaft.


CLS 366/164.4
TXT Stationary deflector in mixing chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 164.3 having a fixed deflector in the mixing
    chamber for providing additional agitation of the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302+,   for a stationary element in a mixing chamber cooperating with a
    rotating stirrer.  See the search notes in subclass 302 for other locations
    of mixing apparatus having stationary agitating elements.


CLS 366/164.5
TXT Outlet behind blade:

    Subject matter under subclass 164.2 wherein the stirrer has a blade and the
    material-conducting conduit discharges the material into a zone to the rear
    of the blade.


CLS 366/164.6
TXT Centrifugal type:

    Subject matter under subclass 164.1 wherein the stirrer is rotatable,
    rotation of the stirrer generating flow of material away from the axis of
    rotation of the stirrer that creates the negative pressure in the mixing
    chamber.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are devices in which all radial
    motion of fluid is incidental to the operation of the device, that is, not
    producing the suction drawing material into the mixing chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263+,   for a centrifugal pump type mixer for circulating material within a
    mixing chamber.


CLS 366/165.1
TXT Material introduced so as to cause rotary motion in mixing chamber (e.g.,
    cyclonic):

    Subject matter under subclass 150.1 wherein the feed means is arranged
    relative to an inner wall of the mixing chamber to cause a generally
    circular or elliptical movement of the material within the chamber.


CLS 366/165.2
TXT Including deflector in chamber (deflector may be part of chamber wall):

    Subject matter under subclass 165.1 wherein the mixing chamber has a
    deflector therein positioned to be contacted by either the material
    entering the chamber or the material undergoing mixing within the chamber.

    (1)     Note.  The deflector may be part of the mixing chamber wall and
    extends into the chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302+,   for a stationary element in a mixing chamber cooperating with a
    rotating stirrer.  See the search notes in subclass 302 for other locations
    of mixing apparatus having stationary agitating elements.


CLS 366/165.3
TXT Rotating stirrer in chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 165.1 wherein the mixing chamber has a
    rotatable member therein for further implementing agitation.

    (1)     Note.  The rotatable member may be driven by a power source such as
    a motor or driven by means of the material entering the mixing chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    279+,   for a rotating stirrer in a stationary mixing chamber, per se.


CLS 366/165.4
TXT Feed means having a flow regulator (e.g., valve or pump):

    Subject matter under subclass 165.1 wherein the feed means includes means
    (e.g., a valve or pump) to control the flow of material into the mixing
    chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182.1+,for means for controlling flow of material to a mixing chamber.


CLS 366/165.5
TXT Manifold in feed means:

    Subject matter under subclass 165.1 wherein the means supplying the
    material has a plurality of outlets into the mixing chamber, all of which
    are connected to a common supply source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173.2,  178.2, and 181.6, for feed means having plural outlets into a
    mixing chamber, all connected to the same source of material.  See the
    search notes in subclass 181.6 for further locations of mixing apparatus
    having plural material feed means or outlets.


CLS 366/166.1
TXT Print washer type:

    Subject matter under subclass 150.1 constructed for washing photographic
    prints or the like.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses for
    a print washer with a support for the work.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 564+ for a photographic fluid treating
    vessel and means to move a film.


CLS 366/167.1
TXT Liquid injector within mixing chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 150.1 wherein the feed means includes a
    passage-forming element projecting into the mixing chamber so as to admit
    liquid material through the element into the chamber.


CLS 366/167.2
TXT Injector is rotatable body having internal material passage and peripheral
    outlet (e.g., slinger):

    Subject matter under subclass 167.1 wherein the injector comprises a
    rotating member having an internal chamber or channel through which the
    material flows and having outlets in its periphery through which material
    is discharged from the chamber or channel into the mixing chamber.

    (1)     Note.  A rotating hollow stirrer (i.e., a rotating body agitating
    material by contact with the exterior surface of the body) through which
    material is fed is not included in this subclass.  See the search notes
    below for the location of such a device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169.1+, for a rotatable stirrer having a material-supplying passage therein.


CLS 366/168.1
TXT Including rotating stirrer:

    Subject matter under subclass 167.1 also including a rotatable stirrer in
    the mixing chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    279+,   for a rotating stirrer in a mixing chamber.


CLS 366/168.2
TXT Driven by material feed:

    Subject matter under subclass 168.1 wherein the stirrer is rotated by
    material fed to the mixing chamber.

    (1)     Note.  Only one of plural feeds need drive the stirrer.


CLS 366/169.1
TXT Fed through stirrer or stirrer drive shaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 168.1 wherein the passage-forming element is
    an integral part of the stirrer.

    (1)     Note.  A drive shaft integral with a stirrer is considered a part
    of the stirrer.

    (2)     Note.  Typical of patents in this subclass is a stirrer having a
    drive shaft and having a passage in the shaft through which liquid is fed
    into the mixing chamber.

    (3)     Note.  Substantially all of the material that flows through the
    passage-forming element must be from outside the mixing chamber rather than
    from the agitated contents of the mixing chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164.2+, for apparatus in which material is fed into a mixing chamber
    through a stirrer or a conduit integral therewith by suction generated by
    the stirrer.


CLS 366/169.2
TXT Fed radially through side wall of shaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 169.1 wherein the material is fed radially
    through a side wall of a drive shaft of the stirrer.


CLS 366/170.1
TXT Rotating mixing chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 169.1 wherein the mixing chamber is rotatable
    to effect agitation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213+    and 220+, for rotating mixing chambers, per se.


CLS 366/170.2
TXT Plural coaxial rotating shafts:

    Subject matter under subclass 169.1 including a rotating shaft coaxial with
    the axis of rotation of the stirrer.

    (1)     Note.  The rotating shaft may or may not be the drive shaft for an
    additional stirrer.


CLS 366/170.3
TXT Passage through stirrer blade:

    Subject matter under subclass 169.1 wherein the passage-forming element is
    a projection of the stirrer having substantial radial extension from the
    axis of rotation of the stirrer.


CLS 366/170.4
TXT Stationary feed conduit received within rotating stirrer or shaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 169.1 wherein the feed means includes a
    stationary conduit having a portion located inside the rotating stirrer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175.1   and 175.3, for a liquid injector received in a moving mixing
    chamber.

    183.3+, for a static material conveyor which may extend into a rotating
    mixing chamber.


CLS 366/171.1
TXT Including cooperating stationary element:

    Subject matter under subclass 168.1 wherein the mixing chamber has an
    immovable element therein which is in addition to the injector and which
    cooperates with the rotatable stirrer to effect agitation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302+,   for a stationary element in a mixing chamber cooperating with a
    rotating stirrer.  See the search notes in subclass 302 for other locations
    of mixing apparatus having stationary agitating elements.


CLS 366/172.1
TXT Plural injectors:

    Subject matter under subclass 168.1 wherein there is more than one
    passage-forming element in the mixing chamber.

    (1)     Note.  A branched tube constitutes plural injectors, while a single
    tube or nozzle having a plurality of perforations without projecting hollow
    fluid conducting members does not constitute plural injectors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173.1+, for plural injectors in a mixing chamber not having a rotatable
    stirrer.

    181.6,  for feed means having plural identical outlets opening into a
    mixing chamber all of the outlets being connected to the same source of
    material.  See the search notes in subclass 181.6 for further locations of
    mixing apparatus having plural material feed means or outlets.


CLS 366/172.2
TXT Injector directs material onto stirrer:

    Subject matter under subclass 168.1 wherein the tube or nozzle directs the
    material into a region immediately adjacent to the stirrer.


CLS 366/173.1
TXT Plural injectors:

    Subject matter under subclass 167.1 wherein there is more than one
    passage-forming element in the chamber.

    (1)     Note.  A branched tube constitutes plural injectors, while a single
    tube or nozzle having a plurality of perforations without projecting hollow
    fluid conducting members does not constitute plural injectors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172.1,  for plural injectors in a mixing chamber having a rotatable stirrer.

    181.6,  for feed means having plural identical outlets opening into a
    mixing chamber, all of the outlets being connected to the same source of
    material.  See the search notes in subclass 181.6 for further locations of
    mixing apparatus having plural material feed means or outlets.


CLS 366/173.2
TXT Plural injectors for material from same source:

    Subject matter under subclass 173.1 having plural passage-forming elements
    in the mixing chamber for material from the same supply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165.5,  178.2, and 181.6, for feed means having plural inlets into a mixing
    chamber connected to a common material source.  See the search notes in
    subclass 181.6 for further locations of mixing apparatus having plural
    material feed means or outlets.


CLS 366/174.1
TXT Deflector:

    Subject matter under subclass 167.1 which also includes an element that is
    in the chamber and stationary relative to the chamber or a support therefor
    serving to divert portions of the material in the mixing chamber so as to
    assist in the agitation.

    (1)     Note.  The deflector need not act directly on fluid introduced by
    the tube or nozzle or a flow induced entirely by the introduction of
    material through the tube or nozzle, but may act on any moving material in
    the chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302+,   for a stationary element in a mixing chamber cooperating with a
    rotating stirrer.  See the search notes in subclass 302 for other locations
    of mixing apparatus having stationary agitating elements.


CLS 366/175.1
TXT Rotating mixing chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 174.1 wherein the mixing chamber is rotatable
    about its axis to assist in the agitation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170.4,  for a stationary feed conduit received within a rotatable stirrer
    shaft.

    175.3,  for a stationary liquid injector located in a movable mixing
    chamber.

    183.3+, for a stationary material conveyor feeding material to a rotating
    mixing chamber.

    213+    and 220+, for a rotatable mixing chamber.


CLS 366/175.2
TXT Injector directs material onto deflector:

    Subject matter under subclass 174.1 wherein the passage-forming element
    directs the material introduced through it onto the stationary element.


CLS 366/175.3
TXT Moving mixing chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 167.1 wherein the mixing chamber moves to
    agitate the material therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    208+, and 219+, for moving mixing chambers.

    170.1,  for a liquid injector in the form of a stirrer in a rotating mixing
    chamber.

    170.4,  for a stationary feed conduit received within a rotatable stirrer
    shaft.

    175.1,  for a liquid injector received in a rotating mixing chamber.

    180.1,  for a rotating mixing chamber having plural feed means.

    183.3+,for a static material conveyor which may extend into a rotating
    mixing chamber.


CLS 366/176.1
TXT Pump forces material through restriction (e.g., static emulsifier):

    Subject matter under subclass 150.1 wherein the feed means is in the form
    of a pump for forcing the material through a narrow restriction for the
    purpose of mixing the material, particularly for the purpose of emulsifying
    or homogenizing the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160.2+,181.8, and 182.2, for a mixing chamber having a pump for feeding
    material to it.

    181.5,  for a flow-through mixing chamber having a stationary deflector for
    agitating the material.

    336+,   and particularly 340, for mixing apparatus in which material is
    divided into different portions by passage around deflectors or through
    apertures therein and recombined for the purpose of mixing or emulsifying
    the material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 40+ for a conduit having a
    restriction that modifies the flow of fluid through the conduit.


CLS 366/176.2
TXT Variable restriction (may be manual or pressure responsive):

    Subject matter under subclass 176.1 wherein the size of the restriction can
    be readily adjusted.

    (1)     Note.  The size of the narrow restriction may be changed by either
    a mechanical means or by fluid pressure acting on the walls of the
    restriction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182.1+,for means for controlling the flow in a feed means.


CLS 366/176.3
TXT Piston pump:

    Subject matter under subclass 176.1 wherein the pump includes a movable
    piston that forces the material to move.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160.4,  for a mixing apparatus having a piston pump for feeding material to
    a mixing chamber.


CLS 366/176.4
TXT Adjustable pressure regulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 176.3 wherein the narrow restriction is
    within a chamber and the pressure within the chamber may be changed by
    adjustable means for maintaining a desired pressure (e.g., a regulator
    valve).


CLS 366/177.1
TXT Plural related feeders having separate outlets to mixing chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 150.1 including a plurality of feed means
    emptying into the mixing chamber through separate outlets and being in a
    particular relation to each other or the mixing chamber.

    (1)     Note.  The mixing chamber that the materials enter must be a
    chamber in which mixing of the type proper for Class 366 occurs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33+,    for plural feed means in a mortar mixer type apparatus.

    107,    for plural feed means for introducing agitating gas into a mixing
    chamber.

    134,    for plural feed or discharge means in a mixing chamber wherein the
    feed and discharge means are interrelated.

    152.1+,160.1+, 162.1+, and 162.4+, for mixing apparatus including means for
    feeding plural materials or material charges into a mixing chamber.

    172.1   and 173.1+, for plural injectors in a mixing chamber.


CLS 366/178.1
TXT Concentric:

    Subject matter under subclass 177.1 wherein at least two elongated feed
    means have a common axis and are arranged one inside the other.


CLS 366/178.2
TXT Feed means has plural identical outlets:

    ubject matter under subclass 178.1 wherein one of the feed means has a
    plurality of outlets into the mixing chamber that are substantially the
    same size and shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165.5   and 173.2, for other feed means having a plurality of outlets.

    181.6,  for nonconcentric feed means having plural identical outlets
    opening into a mixing chamber, all of the outlets being connected to the
    same source of material.  See the search notes in subclass 181.6 for
    further locations of mixing apparatus having plural material feed means or
    outlets.


CLS 366/178.3
TXT Inner feeder passes through wall of outer feeder and extends along common
    axis at the wall:

    Subject matter under subclass 178.1 in which (a) an inner one of the feed
    means extends through a wall of an outer one of the feed means forming an
    intersection between them and (b) the axis of the inner feed means extends
    along the common axis of the feed means at the intersection.


CLS 366/179.1
TXT Intermittent feed:

    Subject matter under subclass 177.1 wherein at least one of the feed means
    supplies quantities of material to the chamber in recurrent interrupted
    sequence.

    (1)     Note.  Means to intermittently operate flow control means for the
    material to repeat a material-supplying operation without operator
    intervention is required for placement in this subclass.


CLS 366/180.1
TXT Rotating mixing chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 177.1 wherein the mixing chamber is rotatable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213+    and 220+, for a rotatable mixing chamber.


CLS 366/181.1
TXT Including chute or hopper with gravity discharge to mixing chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 177.1 wherein the feed means includes a chute
    or hopper that supplies material solely by gravity.

    (1)     Note.  A hopper is a funnel-shaped container usually, but not
    necessarily, used for dispensing fluent solids.  A chute is an open-topped
    channel or conduit for guiding material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for a movable charge hopper or chute for a mortar mixer.

    68,     for a movable chute for a mortar mixer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, for a chute, per se.


CLS 366/181.2
TXT Including distributor:

    Subject matter under subclass 181.1 including means for distributing
    material over a region of the mixing chamber as it is being introduced into
    the mixing chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183.2,  for an obstruction or distributing device in a static conveyor.


CLS 366/181.3
TXT Including gate, valve, or closure:

    Subject matter under subclass 181.1 including a valve, gate, or closure for
    controlling release of material from the chute or hopper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182.3,  for a container having a valved outlet.

    192+,   for a valve or gate in the outlet of a mixing chamber.


CLS 366/181.4
TXT Rotating stirrer and cooperating stationary element:

    Subject matter under subclass 177.1 including a rotating stirrer in the
    mixing chamber and a stationary deflector cooperating therewith to agitate
    the material in the chamber.


CLS 366/181.5
TXT Stationary deflecting element in flow-through mixing chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 177.1 including an obstacle in the mixing
    chamber past which the material flows and which deflects or changes the
    motion of the material to promote mixing of the material.

    (1)     Note.  To be placed in this subclass, the obstacle must be an
    element other than the mixing chamber wall, even if collision of material
    with the wall is responsible for agitating the material.

    (2)     Note.  An obstacle agitating only one of a plurality of materials
    fed to the mixing chamber before combination with other materials is not
    considered to be within the mixing chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302+,   for a stationary element in a mixing chamber cooperating with a
    rotating stirrer.  See the search notes in subclass 302 for other locations
    of mixing apparatus having stationary agitating elements.


CLS 366/181.6
TXT Feed means has plural identical outlets:

    Subject matter under subclass 177.1 wherein a feed means has a plurality of
    outlets opening into the mixing chamber which are substantially the same
    size and shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3+      and 10+, for mortar mixing apparatus in which fluid is introduced
    into a mixing region of a conveying conduit through a plurality of
    substantially identical inlets.

    165.5   and 173.2, for feed means having plural outlets into a mixing
    chamber from the same source of material.

    172.1   and 173.1+, for a mixing chamber having plural liquid injectors.

    178.2,  for concentric feed means, one of which has a plurality of
    identical outlet openings into a mixing chamber


CLS 366/181.7
TXT Feed to narrow space between stirrer and chamber wall:

    Subject matter under subclass 177.1 including a rotatable stirrer in the
    mixing chamber defining a space of relatively small radial dimension
    between the periphery of the stirrer and the wall of the mixing chamber and
    wherein one of the feed means introduces material directly into the space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305,    for similar apparatus wherein the stirrer is spaced a small
    distance from a cooperating stationary element in the mixing chamber.


CLS 366/181.8
TXT Fluid pump:

    Subject matter under subclass 177.1 wherein one of the feed means is a
    device that acts on fluid to force it to move along a path to the mixing
    chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160.2+, 176.1+, and 182.2, for feed means including a pump.


CLS 366/182.1
TXT Including specific structure for controlling flow through the feed means:

    Subject matter under subclass 150.1 including means to start, stop, or
    regulate the flow of material in the feed means.

    (1)     Note.  The mere disclosure of a valve or pump is not sufficient for
    placement of a patent in this subclass.  There must be a disclosure of
    valve details, a valve operator mechanism, pump feed rate adjustment means,
    or other feature directly related to adjustment or control of material flow
    rate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160.1   through 160.5, for apparatus including mixing ratio control means.

    162.5,  for apparatus in which the flow of jets of material is controlled
    by a reciprocating cleanout rod.

    165.4,  for feed means including a flow regulator in a mixing  apparatus in
    which material has rotary motion.

    176.2,  for a variable restriction which agitates or emulsifies material
    flowing through it.


CLS 366/182.2
TXT Including pump:

    Subject matter under subclass 182.1 wherein the feed means includes a pump
    that directly forces material into the mixing chamber.

    (1)     Note.  A ``pump" includes a screw- or auger-type feed means for
    purposes of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160.2+, 176.1+, and 181.8, for feed means including a pump.


CLS 366/182.3
TXT Including feed container having valved outlet:

    Subject matter under subclass 182.1 wherein the feed means includes a feed
    chamber for holding a volume of material, and the means to start, stop, or
    regulate the flow of material includes a valve in an outlet of the feed
    chamber to regulate flow from the feed chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181.3,  for a chute or hopper having a gate, valve, or closure in an outlet
    thereof.

    192+,   for a valve or gate in the outlet of a mixing chamber.


CLS 366/182.4
TXT Including valve in feed conduit:

    Subject matter under subclass 182.1 wherein the feed means includes a
    tubular conduit, and the means to start, stop, or regulate the flow of
    material to the mixing chamber includes a valve.


CLS 366/183.1
TXT Static conveyor with gravity discharge to mixing chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 150.1 wherein the feed means includes a fixed
    structure which conducts the material solely by gravity to the mixing
    chamber.

    (1)     Note.  The feed structure may be a chute, hopper, funnel, etc.  The
    material must be fed solely by gravity through the static structure.  The
    structure must be stationary during feeding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181.1+, for plural feed means including a static conveyor.


CLS 366/183.2
TXT Obstruction or distributing means in outlet (e.g.,  screen):

    Subject matter under subclass 183.1 including stationary flow-modifying
    means in the outlet of the static conveyor past which material must flow to
    enter the mixing chamber.

    (1)     Note.  The flow-modifying means may be, for example, a guide to
    enhance distribution of material throughout the mixing chamber or a screen
    or filter for breaking up or preventing entry of lumps of material or
    foreign matter into the mixing chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181.2,  for a chute or hopper having a stationary distributor for material
    escaping therefrom into the mixing chamber.


CLS 366/183.3
TXT To rotatable mixing chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 183.1 wherein the mixing chamber is rotatable
    to agitate the material therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170.4,  for a stationary feed conduit received within a rotatable stirrer
    shaft.

    175.1   and 175.3, for a liquid injector received in a moving mixing
    chamber.

    213+    and 220+, for a rotatable mixing chamber.


CLS 366/183.4
TXT Closed connection between conveyor and mixing chamber (e.g., sealed joint):

    Subject matter under subclass 183.3 including means for closing off a space
    between the fixed material-conducting structure and a wall forming an
    integral portion of the rotatable mixing chamber so as to prevent escape of
    material between the material-conducting structure and the wall.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, subclasses 345+ for a seal between
    relatively movable parts (i.e., a dynamic seal).


CLS 366/184
TXT WITH SPECIFIED DISCHARGE MEANS:

    Apparatus and corresponding methods under the class definition including a
    particularly described means for conveying or releasing material from the
    mixing chamber.

    (1)     Note.  Mere recitation of an opening, outlet port, or discharge
    conduit for the material will not be considered specified discharge means.
    However, any of the following claimed particulars will be considered as
    specified means for this or an indented subclass:



    (a)     Means for applying pressure on the material to move it out of the
    chamber (e.g., pump compressed air).

    (b)     Conveyor means (e.g., belt, chute, screw, spout).

    (c)     Discharge control means (e.g., valve, fate).

    (d)     Means for tilting or permitting tilting of the chamber on its
    support for discharge of the contents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42+,    for dynamic delivery means to a mortar mixer.

    162.5,  for an impinging jet mixing device in which the mixture is
    discharged from a mixing chamber by a cleanout rod passing through the
    chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 142+ for a
    fluid sprinkling or spraying device with agitation of its supply.


CLS 366/185
TXT By tilting mixing chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 184 wherein the mixing chamber is pivotable
    relative to its support so as to permit material to flow therefrom under
    the force of gravity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45+,    for mortar chamber tiltable for delivery.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling,subclass 405, 425, 697+, and others
    for material containers which may be tilted.


CLS 366/186
TXT By endless belt or screw conveyor:

    Subject matter under subclass 184 wherein the discharge means includes an
    endless belt or screw conveyor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for endless belt or screw conveyor to feed or discharge to a mortar
    mixer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 804+ for an endless belt
    conveyor, per se, and subclasses 657+ for a screw conveyor, per se.


CLS 366/187
TXT Rotatable or oscillatable mixing chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 184 wherein the mixing chamber is rotatable
    in one direction only, or alternatively rotatable about its axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219+,   for a rotatable or oscillatable mixing chamber.


CLS 366/188
TXT Closure-type discharge:

    Subject matter under subclass 187 including an opening in the wall of the
    mixing chamber and a movable or removable cover for the opening for
    selectively permitting the material to flow from the chamber under the
    force of gravity.


CLS 366/189
TXT Batch discharge:

    Subject matter under subclass 184 wherein a predetermined quantity of
    material is removed or release from the chamber by the discharge means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162.5,  for an impinging jet mixer having a relatively movable clean-out
    rod for discharging material from the mixing chamber.


CLS 366/190
TXT By pump within mixing chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 184 wherein egress of the material from the
    mixing chamber is effected by an agitating element which is in contact with
    the material in cooperation with a confined flow path within the chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191,    for a pump situated exteriorly of the mixing chamber to effect the
    discharge of material therefrom by creating a pressure variation in the
    chamber.


CLS 366/191
TXT By suction or compressed air:

    Subject matter under subclass 184 wherein the material is caused to egress
    the chamber by means producing a partial vacuum at the discharge opening of
    the mixing chamber or increasing the pressure of the air on the surface of
    the material in the mixing chamber.


CLS 366/192
TXT Valve or gate:

    Subject matter under subclass 184 wherein the flow of the material from the
    mixing chamber is regulated by a movable means that opens, shuts, or
    partially blocks a discharge opening in or passageway from the chamber.


CLS 366/193
TXT Sliding gate:

    Subject matter under subclass 192 wherein the movable means is a closure
    which is rectilinearly reciprocable in a path transverse to the opening or
    passageway.


CLS 366/194
TXT With rotatable or oscillatable stirrer:

    Subject matter under subclass 184 including a stirrer within the mixing
    chamber which is rotatable about its axis in one direction, or
    alternatively in opposite directions.


CLS 366/195
TXT Interrelated with discharge means:

    Subject matter under subclass 194 wherein the stirrer cooperates with the
    specified discharge means to effect or regulate the flow of material from
    the mixing chamber.


CLS 366/196
TXT Discharge effected by stirrer:

    Subject matter under subclass 194 wherein the stirrer, in its agitating
    movement, acts directly on the material to cause its egress from the mixing
    chamber.


CLS 366/197
TXT MIXING CHAMBER REMOVABLE FROM STIRRER AND SUPPORT:

    Apparatus and corresponding methods under the class definition including
    means to hold a mixing chamber and a stirrer during agitation wherein the
    chamber can be removed from the holder and the stirrer.

    (1)     Note.  If the chamber and stirrer are removed as a unit and the
    stirrer is not removable, see subclass 219 below.

    (2)     Note.  For proper placement of patents in this and indented
    subclasses, the chamber does not have to be claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129,    for an operator supported chamber and stirrer.

    219+,   for a chamber movable relative to a support which may include a
    stirrer.


CLS 366/198
TXT Plural supports:

    Subject matter under subclass 197 having more than one support.


CLS 366/199
TXT Removable power drive means:

    Subject matter under subclass 197 including a power source for moving the
    stirrer and/or the support which can be remove.


CLS 366/200
TXT Support rotatable only:

    Subject matter under subclass 197 wherein the support turns in one
    direction about a fixed axis during agitation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213,    for a support rotatable in one direction only in which a chamber is
    removable from the support.


CLS 366/201
TXT Adjustable stirrer:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the stirrer is adjustable
    relative to the chamber and the adjustment is independent of the agitation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207,    for any adjustable stirrer and/or mixing chamber.

    254,    for an adjustable stirrer mounted in a chamber closure.

    285,    for an adjustable stirrer and a fixed mixing chamber.


CLS 366/202
TXT Support oscillatory only:

    Subject matter under subclass 197 wherein the support rotates alternately
    in opposite directions about an axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210+,   for an oscillatory support where the mixing chamber is removable.


CLS 366/203
TXT Support rectilinearly reciprocable only:

    Subject matter under subclass 197 wherein the support moves back and forth
    in a straight line and in the same path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212,    for rectilinearly reciprocable support without a stirrer.


CLS 366/204
TXT Mixing chamber mounted within container:

    Subject matter under subclass 197 wherein the mixing chamber is supported
    by a receptacle and is on the inside of the receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  The use of the container is for cooling of the chamber but
    not limited to such and the patents are placed here, not in subclass 149.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149,    for a jacket over a mixing chamber for cooling it.


CLS 366/205
TXT Stirrer mounted through mixing chamber bottom wall:

    Subject matter under subclass 197 wherein the stirrer is removable from the
    bottom of wall of the mixing chamber.


CLS 366/206
TXT With motor control:

    Subject matter under subclass 197 including means for governing the
    starting, stopping direction of motion, acceleration, speed retardation,
    etc., of a motor.


CLS 366/207
TXT Adjustable:

    Subject matter under subclass 197 wherein the stirrer and or the mixing
    chamber are adjustable relative to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201,    for an adjustable stirrer, and see search notes.


CLS 366/208
TXT BY MOVEMENT OF SUPPORT FOR REMOVABLE MIXING CHAMBER:

    Apparatus and corresponding methods under the class definition including
    means to hold a mixing chamber and means to permit the holder to move
    during agitation, wherein the chamber is removable from the holder.

    (1)     Note.  For proper placement of patents in this and indented
    subclasses, the chamber does not have to be claimed.

    (2)     Note.  The mixing chamber support has the same movement with or
    without the mixing chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    197+,   for a movable support for a removable mixing chamber and a stirrer.

    219+,   for a mixing chamber movable relative to a fixed support.


CLS 366/209
TXT Mixing chamber secured to support:

    Subject matter under subclass 208 including means to fasten the mixing
    chamber to the surface.


CLS 366/210
TXT Support oscillatory only:

    Subject matter under subclass 209 wherein the support rotates alternately
    in opposite directions about an axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202,    for an oscillatory support and stirrer.


CLS 366/211
TXT Motor driven:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein the support is moved by a power
    source which converts one form of energy to another form of energy.


CLS 366/212
TXT Support rectilinearly reciprocable only:

    Subject matter under subclass 209 wherein the support moves back and forth
    in a straight line and in the same path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203,    for rectilinearly reciprocable support and a stirrer.


CLS 366/213
TXT Support rotatable only:

    Subject matter under subclass 209 wherein the support turns in but one
    direction about an axis during agitation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54+,    for a mortar-type mixer having a rotatable mixing chamber.

    170.1,  175.1, 180.1, and 183.3, for a rotatable mixing chamber having
    specified feed means.

    200,    for a rotatable support and stirrer means.

    220+,   for a mixing chamber rotatable relative to a stationary support.


CLS 366/214
TXT And means to clamp plural mixing chambers:

    Subject matter under subclass 213 including means to secure more than one
    mixing chamber to said support.

    (1)     Note.  Also included are plural means to support plural mixing
    chambers.


CLS 366/215
TXT Support pivotally mounted by plural linkage:

    Subject matter under subclass 209 wherein the support is suspended by more
    than one rod, strap, etc., which are movable about their own axis and cause
    the support to move in an accurate path.


CLS 366/216
TXT Support oscillatory with additional motion:

    Subject matter under subclass 209 wherein the support rotates alternately
    in opposite directions about an axis and also moves in another direction
    during agitation.

    (1)     Note.  The second motion can be oscillatory, rectilinearly, etc.


CLS 366/217
TXT Support rotates about plural axes:

    Subject matter under subclass 209 wherein the support turns in but one
    direction about an axis and also turns in but one direction about another
    axis where the axes are at an angle to each other.


CLS 366/218
TXT Mixing chamber conveyed by support during agitation:

    Subject matter under subclass 208 wherein the mixing chamber is moved along
    or with a device which supports it and causes agitation.


CLS 366/219
TXT BY MOVEMENT OF MIXING CHAMBER RELATIVE TO STATIONARY SUPPORT:

    Apparatus and corresponding methods under the class definition including a
    chamber and means to support the chamber against the force of gravity while
    allowing the chamber to move with respect to support during agitation the
    means to support the chamber being fixed with respect to a surface that
    does not move.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129,    for a chamber support by an operator during agitation.


CLS 366/220
TXT Mixing chamber rotatable only:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 wherein the chamber revolves about a
    fixed axis in one direction only during agitating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54+,    for a mortar-type mixer having a rotatable mixing chamber.

    170.1,  175.1, 180.1, and 183.3, for a rotatable mixing chamber having
    specified feed means.

    213+,   for a removable mixing chamber mounted on a rotatable support.

    237,    for an oscillating chamber.


CLS 366/221
TXT With scraper:

    Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein an element having an edge,
    flaccid surface, etc., which is in contact with or in close proximity to
    the chamber wall causes material to be moved away from the wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    309,    for a scraper within a stationary chamber.


CLS 366/222
TXT Interrelated stirrer and mixing chamber drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 220 having means to move the chamber and also
    move a stirrer.


CLS 366/223
TXT Effecting counter rotation:

    Subject matter under subclass 222 wherein the chamber moves in one
    direction and the stirrer in the opposite.


CLS 366/224
TXT With rotatable stirrer:

    Subject matter under subclass 220 including a stirrer that turns in but one
    direction about an axis.


CLS 366/225
TXT With deflector:

    Subject matter under subclass 220 including a device which is secured
    within and in fixed relation to the mixing chamber or a stationary element
    in the mixing chamber and serving to divert portions of the material in the
    mixing chamber so as to assist in the agitation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221,    for a scraper which can act as a deflector.


CLS 366/226
TXT Foraminous type:

    Subject matter under subclass 225 wherein the element is porous.


CLS 366/227
TXT Helical type:

    Subject matter under subclass 225 wherein the deflector is an elongated
    strip twisted in a spiral shape about the axis of rotation of the chamber,
    or a segment of such a spirally shape strip.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310,    for a helical-type scraper in a stationary mixing chamber.

    320,    for a helical ribbon stirrer in a stationary mixing chamber.

    338,    for a deflector having curved surfaces and located in a stationary
    flow-through mixing chamber.

    339,    for such a deflector in the form of a helical ribbon.


CLS 366/228
TXT Attached directly to chamber wall:

    Subject matter under subclass 225 wherein the deflector is secured in
    direct contact with the chamber wall.


CLS 366/229
TXT Additional deflector on support in chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 228 having a deflector which is not directly
    attached to the chamber wall.


CLS 366/230
TXT Deflector stationary:

    Subject matter under subclass 225 wherein the deflector does not move
    during agitation.

    (1)     Note.  The mixing chamber rotates but the deflector does not moving
    during agitation.


CLS 366/231
TXT Suspended within chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 230 wherein the deflect is supported from
    above the chamber.


CLS 366/232
TXT Mixing chamber supported by shaft at one end only:

    Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein the mixing chamber has an axle
    from one and only which permits it to rotate.

    (1)     Note.  The mixing chamber may be supported at the end opposite the
    shaft by roller, guides, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233,    for a mixing chamber supported by rollers.


CLS 366/233
TXT Roller or suspended support for mixing chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein the mixing chamber moves relative
    to rotating cylinders or wheels which underlie the chamber during rotating,
    or hangs by a support from above so as to allow relative movement of the
    chamber.


CLS 366/234
TXT Foraminous mixing chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein at least part of the mixing
    chamber is porous.


CLS 366/235
TXT Plural mixing chambers:

    Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein there is more than one mixing
    chamber.


CLS 366/236
TXT Rectangular mixing chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein the mixing chamber has four sides
    and four right angles.


CLS 366/237
TXT Mixing chamber oscillating only:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 wherein the chamber is rotatable,
    reciprocated about a fixed axis and there is not other motion.


CLS 366/238
TXT With stirrer:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 including a stirrer to agitate material.


CLS 366/239
TXT Mixing chamber rocking only:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 wherein the chamber is mounted on a
    rocker which allows the chamber to move in a back and forth curved path and
    there is no other motion.


CLS 366/240
TXT Mixing chamber rectilinearly reciprocating only:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 wherein the chamber is moved in alternate
    directions in a straight line and there is no other motion.


CLS 366/241
TXT STIRRER WITHIN STATIONARY MIXING CHAMBER:

    Apparatus and corresponding methods under the class definition including a
    mixing chamber which is in fixed position during agitation and a stirrer
    within the chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    197+,   for a stationary mixing chamber that is removable from a stirrer
    and support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 217+ for a drinking
    vessel and material packaged therein with a space provided for the addition
    of a liquid to be mixed with the material.


CLS 366/242
TXT Mounted in removable mixing chamber closure:

    Subject matter under subclass 241 wherein the stirrer is mounted in an
    entirely supported by a closure that is removable from the chamber.


CLS 366/243
TXT Oscillatory stirrer:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 wherein the stirrer is rotatable
    alternately in opposite directions about an axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    276+,   for an oscillatory stirrer in a fixed mixing chamber.


CLS 366/244
TXT Rotatable stirrer:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 wherein the stirrer turns in one
    direction about an axis.


CLS 366/245
TXT Axis fixed:

    Subject matter under subclass 244 wherein the axis of the stirrer turns,
    but is stationary with respect to its longitudinal movement.


CLS 366/246
TXT Coincident axes:

    Subject matter under subclass 245 wherein the stirrers have a congruent
    axis.


CLS 366/247
TXT Single stirrer:

    Subject matter under subclass 245 wherein there is only one stirrer.


CLS 366/248
TXT Bent bar:

    Subject matter under subclass 247 wherein the stirrer is an integral bar or
    rod that is of curved or crooked shape to produce agitation.


CLS 366/249
TXT Motor driven:

    Subject matter under subclass 247 wherein the rotating stirrer is moved by
    a power source which converts one form of energy into another form of
    energy.


CLS 366/250
TXT Fluid motor:

    Subject matter under subclass 249 wherein the power source is rotated by a
    fluid means.

    (1)     Note.  The fluid may enter into and become part of the material to
    be mixed or the fluid may be external of the mixed material.


CLS 366/251
TXT Electric motor:

    Subject matter under subclass 249 wherein the power source is rotated by an
    electric current.


CLS 366/252
TXT Gear driven:

    Subject matter under subclass 247 wherein the rotatable stirrer is driven
    by a gear or gearing arrangement.


CLS 366/253
TXT Having cooperating stationary element:

    Subject matter under subclass 252 wherein the mixing chamber has an
    immovable element therein which cooperates with the rotatable stirrer to
    effect agitation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230,    for a stationary deflector and a rotatable chamber.

    302+,   for a stationary element in a mixing chamber cooperating with a
    rotating stirrer.  See the search notes in subclass 302 for other locations
    of mixing apparatus having a stationary agitating element.


CLS 366/254
TXT Adjustable stirrer or stirrer element:

    Subject matter under subclass 252 wherein, prior to agitation, (1) the
    position of the stirrer relative to the chamber may be varied, or (2) the
    position of an element of the stirrer may be varied relative to the
    position of another element of the stirrer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201,    for an adjustable stirrer and a mixing chamber removable from a
    support.

    285+,   for an adjustable rotatable stirrer not mounted in a removable
    chamber closure.

    326.1,  for an adjustable element of a rotatable stirrer not mounted in a
    removable chamber closure.


CLS 366/255
TXT Translatable stirrer:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 wherein all parts of the stirrer move
    with the same velocity.


CLS 366/256
TXT Rectilinearly reciprocable only:

    Subject matter under subclass 255 wherein the stirrer is mounted for
    movement only in alternate directions along a straight line in the mixing
    chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255,    for stirrers having additional movements.


CLS 366/257
TXT Plural stirrers:

    Subject matter under subclass 256 wherein there is more than one stirrer.


CLS 366/258
TXT With rotary input drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 256 wherein the movement of the stirrer is
    produced by a rotating element or by revolution of a crank, the motion of
    the rotating element or crank being converted to straight line movement in
    alternate directions.


CLS 366/259
TXT Actuated by pivoted lever:

    Subject matter under subclass 256 wherein the movement of the stirrer is
    produced by an element which moves about a point in such a manner so as to
    move the stirrer in a straight line.


CLS 366/260
TXT Spring return:

    Subject matter under subclass 256 wherein an elastic body is employed to
    return the stirrer from one direction of reciprocable movement.


CLS 366/261
TXT With means to move stirrer and support:

    Subject matter under subclass 241 wherein the stirrer has a support means
    and additional means are provided for moving the support and stirrer in a
    direction transverse to the longitudinal axis of the stirrer.


CLS 366/262
TXT Pump type:

    Subject matter under subclass 241 wherein a confined flow path within the
    mixing chamber forms part of the course through which material is caused to
    pass by means of a pump within the chamber which (a) directly forces or
    induces material through the flow path, or (b) causes the material to move
    to and fro in said path, thereby producing turbulence and agitation of the
    material in the chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164.1+, for a stirrer arranged to create suction in a mixing chamber for
    drawing material into the chamber.

    272,    for a gear-type pump which moves material through a mixing chamber
    while simultaneously agitating the material.


CLS 366/263
TXT Centrifugal:

    Subject matter under subclass 262 wherein the pump is of the centrifugal
    force type, e.g., radial and tangential flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164.6,  for a stirrer producing suction in the manner of a centrifugal pump
    for drawing material into a mixing chamber.


CLS 366/264
TXT Impeller with outer stationary ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 263 wherein the centrifugal pump comprises a
    rotating impeller and an outer stationary ring located in the same general
    diametrical plane with the impeller.


CLS 366/265
TXT Impeller only:

    Subject matter under subclass 263 wherein the centrifugal pump comprises a
    rotating impeller only. e.g., cooperates with no other element.


CLS 366/266
TXT Screw:

    Subject matter under subclass 262 wherein the pump is a continuous helical
    ribbon rotatable about its longitudinal axis to produce the pumping action.


CLS 366/267
TXT Piston:

    Subject matter under subclass 262 wherein the pump is a piston that causes
    material to move.


CLS 366/268
TXT Plural:

    Subject matter under subclass 267 wherein there are two or more pistons for
    moving the material.


CLS 366/269
TXT Inlet and outlet at same end of flow path:

    Subject matter under subclass 267 wherein the inlet and outlet to the flow
    path is at the same and of the flow path.


CLS 366/270
TXT Propeller blade type:

    Subject matter under subclass 262 wherein the pump has one or more blades
    which when rotated about a central shaft produces movement of the material
    in a direction parallel to the axis of rotation.


CLS 366/271
TXT Endless conveyor with paddles:

    Subject matter under subclass 241 wherein the stirrer is attached to an
    endless conveyor for agitating the material.


CLS 366/272
TXT Gear-type stirrer:

    Subject matter under subclass 241 wherein the stirrer comprises at least
    two members having meshing teeth, at least one of said members being
    rotatable and such rotation causing agitation of material in the chamber.


CLS 366/273
TXT Magnetic stirrer:

    Subject matter under subclass 241 wherein the magnetic flux device is
    within the means to hold the mixing chamber.


CLS 366/274
TXT Actuating means in base support:

    Subject matter under subclass 273 wherein the magnetic flux device is
    within the means to hold the mixing chamber.


CLS 366/275
TXT Flexible diaphragm:

    Subject matter under subclass 241 wherein the stirrer is a resilient
    diaphragm within the chamber or chamber walls which on movement agitates
    the material within the chamber.


CLS 366/276
TXT Oscillatory stirrer:

    Subject matter under subclass 241 wherein the stirrer is rotating
    alternately in opposite directions about an axis.


CLS 366/277
TXT With additional motion:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 wherein the stirrer is moved in another
    direction e.g., rectilinearly rotatable, etc.


CLS 366/278
TXT Including rotatable input drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 wherein the oscillating motion of the
    stirrer is caused by a rotatable means.

    (1)     Note.  The rotatable means may be a hand crank, crank wheel, or
    motor.


CLS 366/279
TXT Rotatable stirrer:

    Subject matter under subclass 241 wherein the stirrer rotates about a fixed
    axis in one direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157.1+, 158.1, 164.1+, 165.3, 168.1+, 181.4, and 181.7, for a rotatable
    stirrer in a mixing chamber having specified feed means.


CLS 366/280
TXT With movable element actuated by material:

    Subject matter under subclass 279 wherein the movement of the material
    being mixed causes movement of an element within  the chamber.

    (1)     Note.  The element may be a stirrer or may be mounted on either the
    container or a stirrer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168.2,  for a rotatable stirrer in a mixing chamber driven by material fed
    to the mixing chamber.


CLS 366/281
TXT With support for attachment to mixing chamber rim:

    Subject matter under subclass 279 wherein the stirrer has means to hold the
    stirrer on the rim of the mixing chamber.


CLS 366/282
TXT With motor drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 281 including a power source for converting
    one form of energy into another to cause motion of the stirrer.


CLS 366/283
TXT With gear drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 281 including at least two members having
    meshing teeth, at least one of said members rotatable by a source of power
    and such rotation causing the other member to rotate.


CLS 366/284
TXT Including adjustable rim contact support:

    Subject matter under subclass 283 wherein the support attaching the stirrer
    to the rim has one or more mechanical elements which may be varied.


CLS 366/285
TXT Adjustable:

    Subject matter under subclass 279 wherein the stirrer's position may be
    moved relative to the mixing chamber prior to agitation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201,    for an adjustable stirrer and a mixing chamber removable from a
    support.

    254,    for a rotatable and adjustable stirrer mounted in a removable
    mixing chamber closure.


CLS 366/286
TXT Axially:

    Subject matter under subclass 285 wherein the stirrer is positioned along
    its axis of rotation.


CLS 366/287
TXT Planetary:

    Subject matter under subclass 279 wherein the stirrer rotates on its own
    axis as well as revolves about a second and different axis.


CLS 366/288
TXT Axes of rotation and revolution parallel:

    Subject matter under subclass 287 wherein the stirrer axis is parallel to
    the axis about which the stirrer revolves.


CLS 366/289
TXT Also axially reciprocable:

    Subject matter under subclass 279 wherein the rotatable stirrer also has
    axial movement alternatively back and forth in a straight line.


CLS 366/290
TXT In at least one of intercommunicating adjacent mixing chambers:

    Subject matter under subclass 279 wherein a rotatable stirrer is located
    within at least one of a plurality of mixing chambers which are in
    communication with each other so that material may flow from one chamber to
    another.

    (1)     Note.  The communication may be by means of a conduit or through or
    across a partition separating the chambers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154.1+, for a mixing chamber combined with a feeder or supply reservoir and
    an agitator in the feed or reservoir.


CLS 366/291
TXT Plural stirrers on parallel axes in adjacent mixing chambers:

    Subject matter under subclass 290 wherein there is at least one stirrer in
    at least two mixing chambers and the axis of the stirrers are parallel to
    each other.


CLS 366/292
TXT Plural stirrers:

    Subject matter under subclass 279 wherein there is more than one stirrer
    and at least one of them rotates.


CLS 366/293
TXT Coaxial:

    Subject matter under subclass 292 wherein the stirrers have coincident axes.


CLS 366/294
TXT Differing in speed:

    Subject matter under subclass 293 wherein one stirrer moves at a rate
    unequal to the rate of motion of another stirrer.


CLS 366/295
TXT Diverse stirrers:

    Subject matter under subclass 293 wherein the stirrers are of a different
    type.


CLS 366/296
TXT Rotating in opposite directions:

    Subject matter under subclass 293 wherein the stirrers are rotatable and
    are driven in opposite directions relative to each other.


CLS 366/297
TXT On parallel axes:

    Subject matter under subclass 292 wherein at least two of the stirrers are
    mounted so as to extend in the same direction.


CLS 366/298
TXT Differing in speed:

    Subject matter under subclass 298 wherein one stirrer moves at a rate
    unequal to the rate of motion of another stirrer.


CLS 366/299
TXT Diverse stirrers:

    Subject matter under subclass 297 wherein the parallel stirrers are of a
    different type.


CLS 366/300
TXT Rotating in opposite directions:

    Subject matter under subclass 297 wherein the parallel stirrers are
    rotating in opposite directions relative to each other.


CLS 366/301
TXT Intermeshing with each other:

    Subject matter under subclass 297 wherein one of the stirrers has a profile
    which contacts a mating surface of a parallel stirrer along the length
    thereof.


CLS 366/302
TXT Having cooperating stationary element:

    Subject matter under subclass 279 wherein the mixing chamber has an
    immovable element therein which cooperates with the rotatable stirrer to
    effect or perfect agitation.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a stationary scraper, wiper, or brush for
    removing material from the stirrer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164.4,  for a stationary deflector in a mixing chamber having a rotating
    stirrer and specified feed means.

    165.2,  for a deflector in a mixing chamber, material being introduced into
    the chamber so as to cause rotary motion of the material therein.

    171.1,  for a rotating stirrer and cooperating stationary element in a
    mixing chamber including a liquid injector.

    174.1+, for a stationary deflector in a mixing chamber having a liquid
    injector.

    181.5,  for a mixing chamber without a moving stirrer having specified feed
    means and in which material is mixed by flow past a stationary deflector.

    181.7,  for a mixing apparatus having plural feed means in which a stirrer
    and mixing chamber wall are separated by a small distance and cooperate to
    shear the material at a rate sufficient to mix the material.

    253,    for a rotatable stirrer mounted in a removable mixing chamber
    closure and cooperating with a stationary element.

    264,    for a centrifugal impeller with an outer stationary ring.

    309+,   for a rotatable stirrer in a mixing chamber and a movable scraper,
    wiper or brush for removing material from the chamber wall surface.

    336+,   for a flow-through mixing chamber without a moving stirrer having a
    stationary deflector for dividing and recombining material flowing through
    the mixing chamber.


CLS 366/303
TXT Interdigitating:

    Subject matter under subclass 302 wherein at least one of the stirrers or
    immovable elements has at least two adjacent projections and the other has
    at least one projection which extends between the previous two adjacent
    projections.


CLS 366/304
TXT Parallel to axis of rotation:

    Subject matter under subclass 303 wherein the projections extend in a
    direction parallel to the axis of rotation.


CLS 366/305
TXT Cylindrical or conical stirrer or element:

    Subject matter under subclass 302 wherein either the stirrer or stationary
    element has a substantially cylindrical or substantially  conical
    configuration.

    (1)     Note.  The term "substantially conical" is intended to included
    truncated conical elements.


CLS 366/306
TXT Element mounted on mixing chamber end wall:

    Subject matter under subclass 302 wherein the stationary element is
    attached to the end of the mixing chamber.


CLS 366/307
TXT Element mounted on cylindrical mixing chamber wall:

    Subject matter under subclass 302 wherein the stationary element is
    attached to the curved wall of a substantially cylindrical mixing chamber.


CLS 366/308
TXT Collapsible articulated stirrer:

    Subject matter under subclass 279 wherein the rotatable stirrer has means
    for enabling the stirrer to be folded into a more compact shape.

    (1)     Note.  Normally the folding is for insertion into and out of a
    reduced opening in the mixing chamber.


CLS 366/309
TXT Including scraper, wiper, or brush:

    Subject matter under subclass 279 including an element having an edge of a
    flaccid surface or a plurality of bristles movable in contact with or in
    close proximity to a wall of the chamber for removing material from the
    wall surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     for similar apparatus disclosed for use as a mortar mixer.

    302+,   for a rotatable stirrer and a cooperative stationary scraper,
    wiper, or brush for removing material from the stirrer.


CLS 366/310
TXT Helical type:

    Subject matter under subclass 309 wherein the edge has a spiral
    configuration extending axially about the axis of rotation of the stirrer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS SUBCLASS:

    227,    for helical-type deflector in a rotatable mixing chamber.

    320,    for a helical ribbon stirrer in a stationary mixing chamber.

    338,    for a deflector having curved surfaces and located in stationary
    flow-through mixing chamber.

    339,    for such a deflector in the form of a helical ribbon.


CLS 366/311
TXT Pivotally mounted on noncoincident axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 309 wherein the element is pivotally mounted
    on the support about an axis other than the axis of rotation of the stirrer.


CLS 366/312
TXT Plural distinct scraping edges or wiping surfaces:

    Subject matter under subclass 309 having more than one discrete scraping
    edge or wiping surface.

    (1)     Note.  The edges may be either on a single element or on separate
    elements.


CLS 366/313
TXT Axially offset:

    Subject matter under subclass 312 wherein the two scraping edges are either
    spaced apart in the direction of the axis of rotation of the stirrer or
    wherein each edge has a portion extending beyond the other edge in the
    axial direction.


CLS 366/314
TXT Mounted in mixing chamber bottom wall:

    Subject matter under subclass 279 wherein the stirrer is carried by the
    bottom wall of the mixing chamber.


CLS 366/315
TXT Disk-type stirrer:

    Subject matter under subclass 279 wherein the stirrer has a generally flat
    plate-like configuration.


CLS 366/316
TXT Apertured or notched:

    Subject matter under subclass 315 wherein the stirrer has an opening
    therethrough or indent in the outer edge.


CLS 366/317
TXT With projection:

    Subject matter under subclass 315 wherein the stirrer has an element
    projecting from a surface or the periphery of the stirrer.


CLS 366/318
TXT Screw-type stirrer:

    Subject matter under subclass 279 wherein the stirrer comprises a helical
    ribbon rotatable about its longitudinal axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79+,    for a stirrer comprising a through-pass screw conveyor.

    157.2+, for a mixer including a screw-type stirrer and screw conveyor
    material feeder.


CLS 366/319
TXT With additional agitator elements on screw:

    Subject matter under subclass 318 including other agitator elements on the
    stirrer.

    (1)     Note.  The additional elements may be on the helical ribbon or on
    the stirrer shaft.


CLS 366/320
TXT Openwork helical ribbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 318 wherein the helical ribbon has an open
    central portion for flow of material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227,    for a helical-type deflector in a rotatable mixing chamber.

    310,    for a helical-type scraper in a stationary mixing chamber.

    339,    for a helical ribbon deflector in a stationary flow-through mixing
    chamber.


CLS 366/321
TXT Opposite pitch:

    Subject matter under subclass 318 wherein the stirrer includes a helical
    ribbon portion of opposite pitch.


CLS 366/322
TXT Discontinuous screw:

    Subject matter under subclass 318 wherein the helical ribbon is interrupted
    along its length.


CLS 366/323
TXT Varying diameter of convolutions or shank or varying pitch:

    Subject matter under subclass 318 wherein the helical ribbon changes
    diameter along its length, or the diameter of a shaft supporting the ribbon
    changes, or the distance between the convolutions of the helical ribbon
    changes.


CLS 366/324
TXT Apertured or notched:

    Subject matter under subclass 318 wherein the helical ribbon has an opening
    therethrough or a notch on the edge of the ribbon or the flow of material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    320,    for a helical ribbon with an open central portion.


CLS 366/325.1
TXT Relatively fixed plural elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 279 wherein the rotatable stirrer comprises a
    plurality of agitating elements rigidly secured to a rotatable shaft.

    (1)     Note.  Contiguous agitating portions are considered to form a
    single agitating element except when they differ substantially in geometric
    form.  A thin member that can be regarded as consisting of agitating
    portions that differ substantially only in width, and form continuous major
    working surfaces that may be flat, curved, or bent is considered a single
    agitating element.  An agitating portion is a piece of material constructed
    and arranged to produce significant agitation of material upon movement
    through the material.  For example, agitating portions that project from
    another agitating portion are considered separate agitating elements.

    (2)     Note.  Agitating elements may be interconnected by nonagitating
    portions.  Agitating portions connected only by nonagitating portions are
    considered separate agitating elements.  The shaft of the stirrer is a
    nonagitating portion.


CLS 366/325.2
TXT Pinlike radially projecting element:

    Subject matter under subclass 325.1 wherein an element is (a) elongated in
    the radial direction of the shaft, (b) has a substantially constant cross
    section perpendicular its longitudinal axis whose thickness is similar in
    all directions, and (c) has a free radially outer end.

    (1)     Note.  The element may have a cross section that is roughly a
    square, regular hexagonal, circle, etc.


CLS 366/325.3
TXT Spiral arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 325.1 wherein the elements on the rotatable
    shaft are arranged in a helical pattern thereon.

    (1)     Note.  Not all the elements on the shaft need to be arranged in a
    helical pattern.


CLS 366/325.4
TXT Element mounted parallel to shaft, spaced therefrom, and having at least
    one free end:

    Subject matter under subclass 325.1 wherein one of the elements extends
    parallel to the axis of the shaft in spaced relation to the shaft and has a
    free end to which no supporting structure is directly attached.


CLS 366/325.5
TXT Opposite free ends:

    Subject matter under subclass 325.4 wherein the element has unsupported
    ends opposite each other.


CLS 366/325.6
TXT Looped wirelike element:

    Subject matter under subclass 325.1 wherein one of the elements is a wire
    or rodlike element that is configured to form by itself a substantially
    continuous closed curve.


CLS 366/325.7
TXT Openwork having element supported by central shaft at opposite ends:

    Subject matter under subclass 325.1 wherein an element is independently
    supported at opposite ends and spaced from the shaft between the ends.

    (1)     Note.  The element may be supported at each end by direct
    attachment to the shaft or by attachment to an intermediate supporting
    member.  For the ends to be independently supported, any intermediate
    supporting members must be separate members connected to the shaft.


CLS 366/325.8
TXT Element axis parallel to shaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 325.7 wherein the element is arranged with
    its axis parallel to the axis of the shaft.


CLS 366/325.9
TXT Apertured element:

    Subject matter under subclass 325.8 wherein the element has at least one
    opening formed therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90,     for a rubber or heavy plastic working screw stirrer having
    apertures.

    316,    for a disk-type stirrer having apertures.

    324,    for a screw-type stirrer having apertures.

    325.91, for a stirrer having an apertured blade that is not parallel to the
    shaft axis.

    325.93, for a stirrer having apertured rectangular elements having planar
    working surfaces.

    328.2,  for a stirrer having relatively fixed agitating elements and
    including an apertured element.


CLS 366/325.91
TXT Apertured element:

    Subject matter under subclass 325.7 wherein the element has an opening
    extending through the element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90,     for a rubber or heavy plastic working screw stirrer having
    apertures.

    316,    for a disk-type stirrer having apertures.

    324,    for a screw-type stirrer having apertures.

    325.93, for a stirrer having apertured rectangular elements having planar
    working surfaces.

    325.9,  for a stirrer having an apertured blade that is parallel to the
    shaft axis.

    328.2+, for a stirrer having relatively fixed agitating elements and
    including an apertured element.


CLS 366/325.92
TXT Flat element having major surface lying in plane substantially including
    shaft axis (e.g., paddle type):

    Subject matter under subclass 325.1 wherein an element has a substantially
    planar working surface thereon and the axis of the shaft lies substantially
    in the plane of the working surface.


CLS 366/325.93
TXT Apertured element:

    Subject matter under subclass 325.92 wherein the element has an opening
    formed therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90,     for a rubber or heavy plastic working screw stirrer having
    apertures.

    316,    for a disk-type stirrer having apertures.

    324,    for a screw-type stirrer having apertures.

    325.9,  for a stirrer having an apertured blade that is parallel to the
    shaft axis.

    325.91, for a stirrer having an apertured blade that is not parallel to the
    shaft axis.

    328.2+, for a stirrer having relatively fixed agitating elements including
    an apertured element.


CLS 366/325.94
TXT Openwork having substantially no central shaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 325.1 wherein the elements are arranged to
    form a substantially open central portion along the axis of rotation and
    there is no shaft along the axis of rotation in the open central portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    320,    for a screw-type stirrer in the form of an openwork helical ribbon.

    325.7,  for a rotatable stirrer having an agitating element forming an
    openwork stirrer and having a central shaft present along the axis of
    rotation of the stirrer in the same axial location as the agitating element.


CLS 366/326.1
TXT Adjustable or flexible:

    Subject matter under subclass 325.1 wherein an element is capable of being
    adjusted relative to the shaft or an element is configured and intended to
    flex during mixing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201     and 207, for an adjustable stirrer associated with a removable
    mixing chamber.

    254,    for an adjustable rotatable stirrer mounted on a removable mixing
    chamber closure.

    284,    for an adjustable rotatable stirrer mounted on an adjustable
    support.

    285,    for a rotatable stirrer adjustable relative to a mixing chamber.


CLS 366/327.1
TXT Of different pitch:

    Subject matter under subclass 325.1 wherein an element has an angular
    inclination relative to its plane or surface of rotation that differs from
    that of another element.

    (1)     Note.  Two elements are considered to have the same pitch if the
    pitch of one element at any radius from the axis of rotation at which both
    elements are present is the same as that of the other element at the same
    radius.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for a screw-type stirrer for mixing rubber or heavy plastics having
    sections of different pitch.

    323,    for a general-purpose screw stirrer having varying pitch.

    326.1,  for a rotatable stirrer having an element whose pitch is adjustable.

    327.4,  for a rotatable stirrer having an element with sections of
    different pitch.


CLS 366/327.2
TXT Rodlike element having enlarged outer end:

    Subject matter under subclass 327.1 wherein an element is bar shaped, is
    elongated, and has an enlarged radially outer end.


CLS 366/327.3
TXT Elements of opposite pitch:

    Subject matter under subclass 327.1 wherein an element is angled to move
    material in one direction and another element is angled to move material in
    the opposing direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    321,    for a screw-type stirrer having sections of opposite pitch.

    327.4,  for a rotatable stirrer including agitating elements having
    sections of opposite pitch on the same element.


CLS 366/327.4
TXT Oppositely pitched element sections:

    Subject matter under subclass 327.1 wherein a portion of an element is
    angled to move material in one direction and another portion is angled to
    move material in the opposing direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327.3,  for a rotatable stirrer including different elements having
    opposite pitches.


CLS 366/328.1
TXT Notched element

    Subject matter under subclass 325.1 wherein an element has a cutout portion
    in its edge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90,     for a notched screw stirrer for mixing rubber or heavy plastic.

    316,    for a notched disk-type stirrer.

    324,    for a notched screw-type stirrer of general utility.


CLS 366/328.2
TXT Apertured element:

    Subject matter under subclass 325.1 wherein an element has an opening
    therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90,     for a rubber or heavy plastic working screw stirrer having
    apertures.

    316,    for a disk-type stirrer having apertures.

    324,    for a screw-type stirrer having apertures.

    325.93, for a stirrer having an apertured rectangular element having a
    planar working surface.

    325.9,  for a stirrer having an apertured blade that is parallel to the
    shaft axis.

    325.91, for a stirrer having an apertured blade that is not parallel to the
    shaft axis.


CLS 366/328.3
TXT Noncircular aperture:

    Subject matter under subclass 328.2 wherein the aperture has a shape that
    is noncircular.


CLS 366/328.4
TXT Square aperture:

    Subject matter under subclass 328.3 wherein the aperture is bounded by four
    sides substantially equal in length and intersect at right angles.


CLS 366/329.1
TXT Diverse size or shape:

    Subject matter under subclass 325.1 wherein one element is of different
    dimensions or configuration than another element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81+,    for a screw-type stirrer having additional agitating elements on
    the screw.

    104,    295, and 299, for a mixing apparatus including plural diverse
    stirrers.

    319,    for a screw-type stirrer having additional agitating elements on
    the screw.


CLS 366/329.2
TXT Elements having different lengths:

    Subject matter under subclass 329.1 wherein the longest dimension of one
    element is different from that of another element.


CLS 366/329.3
TXT Including movable scraper:

    Subject matter under subclass 329.1 wherein an agitating element is
    intended to substantially engage and move relative to a wall of the mixing
    chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     for a mortar-type mixer having a scraper for removing material from
    a mixing chamber.

    67,     for a scraper in a mortar-type mixer for removing material from the
    wall of a mixing chamber.

    221,    for a scraper for moving material away from a wall of a rotatable
    mixing chamber.

    309+,   for a mixing apparatus including a scraper or wiper formed of a
    flaccid material or of bristles.


CLS 366/330.1
TXT Axially directing blade (e.g., propeller, helix section, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 325.1 wherein an agitating element is
    relatively thin compared to its other dimensions and is angularly
    positioned with respect to the rotatable shaft so as to produce movement of
    the material in a direction having a component parallel to the axis of
    rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270,    for a pump-type mixing apparatus including a propeller-type stirrer.

    327.1+  and 327.4, for a stirrer having an agitating element pitched to
    move material axially or radially of the stirrer.


CLS 366/330.2
TXT Blade detachably secured to hub:

    Subject matter under subclass 330.1 wherein the rotatable shaft has an
    enlarged section configured to receive the blade in a readily removable
    manner.

    (1)     Note.  The blade may secured to the hub by screws, for example.


CLS 366/330.3
TXT Bowed or angled out of plane of rotation:

    Subject matter under subclass 330.1 wherein the blade is curved or tilted
    to extend substantially out of the plane that is perpendicular to the axis
    of rotation of the shaft and that passes through a point of connection
    between the blade and the shaft.


CLS 366/330.4
TXT Outwardly increasing width:

    Subject matter under subclass 330.1 wherein the widest dimension of the
    blade measured generally perpendicularly to a radial line passing through
    the blade substantially continuously increases in a radially outward
    direction from adjacent the shaft to substantially the outer end of the
    blade.


CLS 366/330.5
TXT Outwardly decreasing width:

    Subject matter under subclass 330.1 wherein the widest dimension of the
    blade measured generally perpendicularly to a radial line passing through
    the blade substantially continuously decreases in a radially outward
    direction from adjacent the shaft to substantially the outer end of the
    blade.


CLS 366/330.6
TXT Nonhorizontal, nonvertical axis of rotation:

    Subject matter under subclass 330.1 wherein the axis of rotation of the
    shaft is neither vertical nor horizontal.


CLS 366/330.7
TXT Convex trailing edge in plane of rotation:

    Subject matter under subclass 330.1 wherein the trailing edge of the
    projection of the blade onto the surface of rotation of the blade is convex
    substantially throughout its length.


CLS 366/331
TXT With specified mounting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 279 wherein the stirrer has a particularly
    described means for either mounting the stirrer shaft to a drive means or
    for mounting the stirrer within the container, e.g., bearing means.

    (1)     Note.  Mere recitation of a mounting means broadly will not be
    considered specified mounting means.


CLS 366/332
TXT Rectilinearly reciprocable stirrer:

    Subject matter under subclass 241 wherein the stirrer moves bodily back and
    forth in a straight line so that at any instant all parts of the moving
    body moves in the same direction at the same rate.


CLS 366/333
TXT In contact with mixing chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 332 wherein the stirrer, while moving back
    and forth for agitating, is in contact with at least a portion of the
    mixing chamber surface.


CLS 366/334
TXT Plural:

    Subject matter under subclass 332 wherein there is more than one stirrer
    and at least one of which moves bodily back and forth in a straight line.


CLS 366/335
TXT On parallel axes:

    Subject matter under subclass 334 wherein the stirrers have parallel axes.


CLS 366/336
TXT STATIONARY DEFLECTOR (DIVIDING AND RECOMBINING TYPE) IN FLOW-THROUGH MIXING
    CHAMBER:

    Apparatus and corresponding methods under the class definition including a
    mixing chamber designed to receive the material at one end of a closed path
    and to discharge it at the other end in a continuous flow and a device
    positioned in the path so as to divert or separate a portion of the stream
    of material in the path relative to other portions and then permit the
    portions to recombine so as to commingle.

    (1)     Note.  The flow of material may, by disclosure, be either under the
    force of gravity or an applied force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150.1+, for a device of this subclass including specified feed means.

    181.5,  for a flow-through mixing chamber having a stationary deflector
    (not limited to the dividing and recombining type) and plural material feed
    means.

    302+,   for a stationary element in a mixing chamber cooperating with a
    rotating stirrer.  See the search notes in subclass 302 for other locations
    of mixing apparatus having stationary agitating elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 40+ for a conduit with a
    flow restrictor or deflector disclosed for use in forming emulsions of a
    plurality of fluids.  Where such a conduit has additional combined
    features, such as means to feed material to the restrictor, etc., the
    patents have been placed in Class 366.


CLS 366/337
TXT Angularly related flat surfaces:

    Subject matter under subclass 336 wherein the deflector structure includes
    a plurality of flat surfaces, each positioned at an acute angle to the flow
    path and also in angular relation to each other.


CLS 366/338
TXT Curved deflector surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 336 wherein the deflector comprises surface
    extending along the path which are bent or twisted gradually and without
    angularity.


CLS 366/339
TXT Helical ribbon or strand:

    Subject matter under subclass 338 wherein the deflector is an elongated
    strip or slender rod twisted in a spiral shape extending along the path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227,    for a helical-type deflector in a rotatable mixing chamber.

    310,    for a helical-type scraper in a stationary mixing chamber.

    320,    for a helical ribbon stirrer in a stationary mixing chamber.


CLS 366/340
TXT Plate or block being apertured, notched, or truncated in shape:

    Subject matter under subclass 338 wherein the deflector is a disk or solid
    body extending across the path and having an opening therethrough or an
    edge portion out away or indented so as to permit portions of the material
    to pass through.


CLS 366/341
TXT STATIONARY MIXING CHAMBER:

    Apparatus under the class definition wherein the mixing chamber is in fixed
    position during the agitation and includes internal structure designed to
    deflect moving material within the chamber so as to cause its agitation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 217+ for a drinking
    vessel and material packaged therein with a space provided for the addition
    of a liquid to be mixed with the material.

    220,    Receptacles, appropriate subclasses for details of a container
    structure.


CLS 366/342
TXT AGITATOR:

    Subject matter under class definition comprising an agitating means, per
    se, not provided for in any of the preceding subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108+,   for a vibrator, per se, disclosed for use an agitating device.

    129+,   for an operator-supported stirrer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), for an impeller which
    has no disclosed agitating function.


CLS 366/343
TXT Stirrer:

    Subject matter under subclass 343 wherein the agitator is a stirrer.


CLS 366/344
TXT With ejector:

    Subject matter under subclass 343 wherein the stirrer has a spindle
    fastened in a socket of motor drive means for the stirrer and including
    means for expelling the spindle from the socket.


CLS 366/345
TXT Ambulant over material-supporting surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 343 wherein the stirrer is mounted on wheels,
    skids, tracks, or the like for movement along a surface intended to support
    material for agitation by the stirrer.


CLS 366/346
TXT Track guided:

    Subject matter under subclass 345 wherein the stirrer is mounted on tracks.


CLS 366/347
TXT COVER OR SHIELD FOR MIXING CHAMBER:

    Subject matter under class definition comprising a closure or protective
    device for the opening in a mixing chamber designed to cooperate with a
    stirrer in the chamber.

    (1)     Note.  The cover  may be shaped to assist in the agitation or it
    may be provided with an aperture for the stirrer to extended therethrough
    into the chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154.1+, for a stirrer mounted in a removable container closure.

    349,    for a protective cover for a stirrer when not in use.


CLS 366/348
TXT METHOD:

    Method under the class definition which is not provided for in any of the
    preceding subclass.


CLS 366/349
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Apparatus under the class definition which is not provided for in any of
    the preceding subclasses.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS

    The following subclasses are collections of published disclosures
    pertaining to various specified aspects of the agitating art which aspects
    do not form appropriate bases for subclasses in the foregoing
    classification (i.e., subclasses superior hereto in the schedule), wherein
    original copies of patents are placed on the basis of proximate function of
    the apparatus.  These subclasses assist a search based on remote function
    of the apparatus and may be of further assistance to the searcher, either
    as a starting point in further related fields of search inside or outside
    the class.  Thus, there is here provided a second access for retrieval of a
    limited number of types of disclosures.

    (1)     Note.  Disclosures are placed in these subclasses for their value
    as references and as leads to appropriate main or secondary fields of
    search without regard to their original classification of their claimed
    subject matter.

    (2)     Note.  The disclosure found in the following subclasses are
    examples only of the indicated subject matter, and in no instance do they
    represent the entire extent of the prior art.


CLS 366/600
TXT BODINE VIBRATOR:

    Collection of patents to Mr. Bodine that pertain to agitating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108+,   for mixers using a Bodine vibrator.


CLS 366/601
TXT MOTOR CONTROL:

    Patents pertaining to the stopping starting, or the regulation of motor
    speed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206,    for motor control of mixing chamber that is removable from the
    stirrer and support.

    249     and 292, for motor control of stirrer within stationary mixing
    chamber.


CLS 366/602
TXT AMALGAM MIXER, E.G., DENTAL FILLING:

    Apparatus adapted to mix dental amalgam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    197+    and 208+, for a mixing chamber that is removable from a support and
    moved to produce agitation of the material.


CLS 366/603
TXT ANIMAL FOOD MXIER:

    Apparatus used for the particular mixing of feed for animals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266,    for feed mixers that operate as a pump-type mixer.

    293+,   for plural stirrers for mixing animal food.

    319+,   for screw-type stirrer for mixing animal food.


CLS 366/604
TXT LATHER MIXER:

    Mixer for the production of foam or lather.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    279+,   for rotatable stirrer in stationary mixing chamber for producing
    lather or foam.


CLS 366/605
TXT PAINT MIXER:

    Apparatus for the stirring of paint consisting of either a device for
    moving the paint container or a stirrer to be inserted into the container
    for mixing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208+,   for apparatus for mixing paint by imparting movement to the
    container.

    241+,   for a stirrer to be inserted into the container.


CLS 366/606
TXT TRACTOR-MOUNTED MORTAR MIXING CHAMBER:

    Apparatus including mortar mixing that is adapted to be mounted on and
    driven by a farm-type tractor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45+,    for tractor-mounted mortar mixer tiltable for deliver.

    54+,    for tractor-mounted mortar mixer that is rotatable.

    64+,    for tractor-mounted mortar mixer having a movable stirrer.


CLS 366/607
TXT CHAIN-TYPE STIRRER:

    Apparatus for mixing wherein either the mixing chamber or the stirrer have
    a chain element thereon for mixing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for movable chamber having a chain element.

    64+,    for movable stirrer having a chain element.


CLS 366/608
TXT STIRRER IN MIXING CHAMBER SIDE WALL:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a mixing chamber
    having a bottom wall and an upwardly extending side wall and a stirrer
    extending through the side wall.


CLS 367/
TTL COMMUNICATIONS, ELECTRICAL:   ACOUSTIC WAVE SYSTEMS AND DEVICES

CLS 367/
TXT

    I.      BASIC SUBJECT MATTER OF THE CLASS

    This is the residual class for the communication of information or
    intelligence in the form of travelling stresses in an elastic medium which
    are detected or generated by electric signal handling means wherein the
    electric signal represents the communicated information or intelligence.

    II.     SCOPE OF THE CLASS

    This class provides for subject matter not classifiable elsewhere
    comprising combinations of acoustic wave transmitters, receivers, and
    electric signal processors as well as electrical acoustic wave
    transmitters, receivers, and signal processors, per se, and subcombinations
    of such devices whose proximate functions are limited to use in acoustic
    wave communications.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, particularly subclass 307 for acoustic
    wave borehole telemetering combined with gravity or earth's magnetic field
    responsive means to indicate the direction or inclination of the borehole.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 570+ for the measuring and
    testing of vibration, per se, particularly subclasses 584+ for the
    measuring and testing of vibration by mechanical (acoustic) waves.

    84,     Music, subclasses 1+ for electrical tone generators combined with
    electric to acoustic wave energy transducers for use in the production of
    music.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 31+ for typewriters which automatically type
    out words in response to spoken words.

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 101+ for mechanical compressional wave
    systems for geophysical explorations; subclasses 123+ for miscellaneous
    mechanical sound echo systems; and subclass 125 for mechanical sound
    locating devices.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, for means to convert
    mechanical energy, including acoustic wave energy, into electric energy,
    and vice versa  not restricted to use in systems and devices of this class
    (367) type.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 384.1+ for electrically
    actuated audible signalling means; and subclass 621 for acoustic wave
    liquid level alarms.

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), appropriate subclasses for radio wave echo
    systems.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, appropriate subclasses
    for electrical recording of continuous, audible signals.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, for means for communicating continuous,
    audible signals electrically.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 2+ for devices relating to
    instruction in object detecting and ranging systems, e.g., radar or sonar
    systems.

    455,    Telecommunications, for the electrical conversion of audible
    acoustic wave signals to electromagnetic radiation, and vice versa.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 150+ for high temperature (Tc  30 K) superconducting device, and
    particularly subclasses 202+ for electric communication system containing
    transmitter or receiver of pulse, digital, or electromagnetic radio,
    television, or radar wave form.

    606,    Surgery, subclasses 2+ for electrical diagnostic devices utilizing
    ultrasonic acoustic waves.


CLS 367/1
TXT SONAR COUNTER-MEASURES:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising decoys or jamming
    systems for rendering nonseismic echo systems or distance or direction
    finding systems ineffective.

    (1)     Note.  The nonseismic echo or distance or direction finding systems
    of this subclass type are the same as those defined in subclasses 87 and
    118, respectively, below.


CLS 367/2
TXT TRANSPONDER:

    Subject matter under the class definition which receives acoustic wave
    energy from a remote source and, in response, transmits radiant energy
    (e.g., radio or acoustic wave energy) to a remote point.


CLS 367/3
TXT Sonobuoys and sonobuoy systems:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 which includes an underwater acoustic wave
    receiver, the output of which modulates a radio transmitter contained in a
    buoy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclasses 1+ for buoys, per se.


CLS 367/4
TXT With component activating or deployment means:

    Subject matter under subclass 3 including structure which automatically
    renders an element or elements of the sonobuoy operative during descent or
    after entering the water.


CLS 367/5
TXT With plurality of sonobuoys:

    Subject matter under subclass 3 in which two or more receiver-transmitter
    devices are employed.


CLS 367/6
TXT With plurality of transponders:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 in which two or more receiver-transmitter
    devices are employed.


CLS 367/7
TXT ACOUSTIC IMAGE CONVERSION:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein acoustic waves reflected
    or refracted from an object are used to form a visual representation of the
    exterior of the object or to form an electrical signal or record from which
    a visual representation of the object may be derived.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 596+ for acoustic imaging of the
    interior of an object.

    348,    Television, subclass 163 for acoustic imaging wherein the means
    which forms the visual representation is a television system.

    600,    Surgery, subclass 400 for acoustic imaging of the eye; subclass 500
    for detecting blood vessel pulsation, and subclass 509 for detecting
    electrical heart beat signals.


CLS 367/8
TXT Acoustic holography:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 in which the visible image is reconstructed
    from data derived from the interference pattern of the reflected or
    refracted acoustic waves and a coherent reference acoustic wave or from
    electrical signals representative of such data.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 603+ for acoustic image
    conversion involved in measuring or testing.


CLS 367/9
TXT Seismic display:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 wherein the reflected or defracted acoustic
    waves travel through the earth.


CLS 367/10
TXT Liquid or deformable surface holography:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 in which the reflected or refracted
    acoustic waves are projected onto a fluid or other elastic surface to
    create a ripple pattern.


CLS 367/11
TXT With memory means:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 including means to store the information or
    intelligence being handled.


CLS 367/12
TXT BEAM STABILIZATION OR COMPENSATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the acoustic waves are
    received or radiated in a directional pattern and wherein means are
    provided to maintain a desired attitude of the pattern regardless of
    movement of the support for the receiving or radiating means, or wherein
    means is provided to counteract or neutralize undesired effects due to
    movement of the support for the receiving or radiating means (e.g., to
    correct for pitch, roll, or yaw of a vessel).


CLS 367/13
TXT TESTING, MONITORING, OR CALIBRATING:

    Subject matter under the class definition having means which determines the
    accuracy, operability, or operating characteristics of acoustic wave
    systems and elements of the class type.


CLS 367/14
TXT SEISMIC PROSPECTING:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the medium through which
    the waves travel comprises the earth or other planetary body and the system
    or element provides an indication of the characteristics or location of
    discontinuities (e.g., strata or foreign bodies) within the medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 101+ for seismic prospecting systems which do
    not involve the handling of electric signals which contain geophysical
    information.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 421 for
    computers and data processing systems especially designed to be used with
    seismic prospecting systems.


CLS 367/15
TXT Offshore prospecting:

    Subject matter under subclass 14 wherein the medium (earth) through which
    the acoustic waves travel is covered by a body of water and wherein the
    acoustic waves either emanate from the medium and travel through the water
    to a detector or are detected at the medium/water interface.


CLS 367/16
TXT Transducer position control:

    Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein the relative depth or location of
    the acoustic wave source or receiver is selectively varied or maintained
    constant.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter wherein the transducer is merely moved, e.g.,
    towed, is not classifiable in this subclass or the subclasses indented
    hereunder without some provision for selectively changing its path of
    motion or to maintain it in a certain path against external influences.


CLS 367/17
TXT Hydromechanical:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 wherein the position of the transducer is
    controlled by structure interacting dynamically with the water surrounding
    the transducer.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter under subclass type is frequently referred to
    in the art as a "paravane".


CLS 367/18
TXT Fluid variation:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 wherein the position of the transducer is
    controlled by varying the bouyancy of the transducer or of structure
    attached to it (e.g., towing cable).


CLS 367/19
TXT Transducer cable location determination:

    Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein the detector is attached to a line
    (i.e., towing, mooring, and/or communication line) and the distance of the
    line from some other object (e.g., another such line) is measured.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclasses 242+ for the towing, per se, of waterborne
    devices.


CLS 367/20
TXT Multiple hydrophone cable systems:

    Subject matter under subclass 15 having a plurality of detectors or sets of
    detectors each attached to different ones of a plurality of communication
    and/or towing lines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclasses 242+ for the towing, per se, of waterborne
    devices.


CLS 367/21
TXT Signal processing:

    Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein electric signals representative of
    the detected acoustic waves or constituents of such signals are
    distinguished from one another or from other kinds of signals (e.g., noise)
    and/or wherein the information or intelligence contained in such signals
    pertaining to the characteristics or location of the discontinuity is
    identified.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 421 for
    computers and data processing systems for the processing of seismic signals.


CLS 367/22
TXT Transducer output weighting:

    Subject matter under subclass 21 wherein the electric signal outputs of two
    or more acoustic wave detectors responding to the same acoustic wave input
    are made to differ from one another by a certain amount.


CLS 367/23
TXT Controlled source signalling:

    Subject matter under subclass 21 wherein the acoustic wave source is
    controlled to emit a certain acoustic wave format.


CLS 367/24
TXT Reverberation removal:

    Subject matter under subclass 21 wherein the effects of the internal
    reflection of acoustic waves within the body of water itself are eliminated
    from or attenuated in the electric signals.


CLS 367/25
TXT Well logging:

    Subject matter under subclass 14 wherein the deflected acoustic waves are
    detected by means which travels through a passageway in the earth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 152.01+ for a well logging, per
    se, wherein the logging is not a purely electrical test or a purely
    magnetic test, especially subclasses 152.02+ for a process or an apparatus
    for borehole formation logging wherein the logging is not a purely
    electrical test or a  purely magnetic test.


CLS 367/26
TXT Threshold set system:

    Subject matter under subclass 25 wherein detected waves are converted to
    electrical signals having a characteristic (e.g., amplitude, timing) which
    is compared with a standard to determine the acceptability of the signal by
    the system.


CLS 367/27
TXT Time interval measurement:

    Subject matter under subclass 25 wherein the time interval between the
    transmission and detection of an acoustic wave is used to determine some
    characteristic of the acoustic medium (i.e., earth).


CLS 367/28
TXT Amplitude measurement:

    Subject matter under subclass 25 wherein the detected acoustic wave is
    converted to an electric signal whose amplitude is used to determine some
    characteristic of the acoustic medium (i.e., earth).


CLS 367/29
TXT Peak amplitude:

    Subject matter under subclass 28 wherein the maximum amplitude of the
    signal is used to determine some characteristic of the acoustic medium.


CLS 367/30
TXT Amplitude comparison:

    Subject matter under subclass 28 wherein differences in amplitudes are used
    to determine some characteristic of the acoustic medium.

    (1)     Note.  The difference of this subclass type may be expressed as
    ratios of amplitudes.


CLS 367/31
TXT Of noncompressional acoustic wave energy:

    Subject matter under subclass 28 wherein the energy of propagating stresses
    other than compressional stresses is measured.

    (1)     Note.  Propagating stresses of this subclass type include shear
    waves, surface waves (which may be referred to as "Rayleigh", "Love",
    "tube" or  "Stoneley" waves), and refracted waves (which may be referred to
    as "head" or "conical" waves).


CLS 367/32
TXT Frequency dependent determination:

    Subject matter under subclass 28 wherein the amplitude measurement involves
    the utilization or finding of a frequency characteristic of the seismic
    signal.


CLS 367/33
TXT Depth recording or control:

    Subject matter under subclass 25 wherein an electric signal representing
    the location of the detector in the passageway is recorded or utilized by
    the system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 152.01+ for a well logging, per
    se, wherein the logging is not a purely electrical test or a purely
    magnetic test, especially subclasses 152.02+ for a process or an apparatus
    for borehole formation logging wherein there is a measurement of depth
    being correlated with another borehole measurement being made and the
    logging is not a purely electrical test or a purely magnetic test.


CLS 367/34
TXT Received signal cycle discrimination:

    Subject matter under subclass 25 wherein particular cycles of the received
    signals are analyzed or processed to provide particular information or
    improved signal-to-noise response.


CLS 367/35
TXT Borehole or casting condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 25 wherein the information or intelligence
    pertains to the passageway itself or to the lining of the passageway.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 152.01+ for a borehole testing,
    per se, wherein the test is not a purely electrical test or a purely
    magnetic test, especially subclass 152.57 for a process or an apparatus for
    testing a borehole casing condition wherein the test is not purely
    electrical or purely magnetic.


CLS 367/36
TXT Land-refraction type:

    Subject matter under subclass 14 wherein alterations in the paths of
    acoustic waves due to their passage through a discontinuity into a medium
    of different velocity are detected and used to represent characteristics or
    the location of the discontinuity.


CLS 367/37
TXT Land-reflection type:

    Subject matter under subclass 14 wherein alterations in the paths of
    acoustic waves deflected from a discontinuity without passing through it
    are detected and used to represent characteristics of or the location of
    the discontinuity.


CLS 367/38
TXT Signal analysis and/or correction:

    Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein various electrical signals
    representative of the detected acoustic waves or constituents of such
    signals are distinguished from one another or from other kinds of signals
    (e.g., noise) and/or wherein the information or intelligence contained in
    such signals pertaining to the characteristics or location of the
    discontinuity is identified.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 421 for
    computers and data processing systems for the analysis and/or correction of
    seismic signals.


CLS 367/39
TXT Random signal correlation:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 wherein the information or intelligence is
    the degree of linear relationship identified by comparing the signal with
    some stochastic characteristic of the transmitted or other reference signal.


CLS 367/40
TXT Received correlation:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 wherein the information or intelligence is
    identified by comparing the signal with signals from other detectors in the
    system or with different time segments in the same signal.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type includes visual
    correlation of signals or records of signals by a person.


CLS 367/41
TXT Transmitted correlation:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 wherein an acoustic wave emitted by the
    system and reflected by a discontinuity is detected and the information or
    intelligence therein identified by comparing the signal representative of
    the detected wave with a signal representative of the emitted wave.

    (1)     Note.  In the subject matter of this subclass type and signal
    representative of the emitted wave may be produced by the detector in
    response to the detection of waves arriving thereat directly from the
    transmitter.


CLS 367/42
TXT Standard correlation:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 wherein the information or intelligence is
    identified by comparing the signal representative of the detected wave with
    another signal of known shape.

    (1)     Note.  The signal of known shape may also drive the acoustic wave
    transmitter, the waves from which, reflected by discontinuities, becoming
    the detected waves of the subject matter of this subclass.  The signal of
    known shape of this subclass type differ from "signal representative of the
    emitted wave" of the preceding subclass in that the signals driving the
    transmitter are not necessarily the same as signals representative of the
    wave actually emitted by the transmitter.


CLS 367/43
TXT Filters:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 including means to attenuate and/or
    separate selected signals or constituent parts of complex signals.


CLS 367/44
TXT Comb filters:

    Subject matter under subclass 43 wherein a plurality of selected signals or
    constituent parts of complex signals may be attenuated or separated
    simultaneously.


CLS 367/45
TXT Adaptive filters:

    Subject matter under subclass 43 wherein the signal selecting
    characteristics of the filter are varied by the signal fed into the filter
    itself.

    (1)     Note.  Filters of this subclass type may appear to "learn" to pass
    the proper signal.


CLS 367/46
TXT Inverse filters:

    Subject matter under subclass 43 wherein the selecting or attenuating
    characteristics are the opposite of similar characteristics of at least
    some part of the acoustic wave medium or system.

    (1)     Note.  The filtering characteristics of the subject matter of this
    subclass may be the inverse of such characteristics of the acoustic wave
    medium or system as, for example, the transmitting transducer, the
    receiving transducer, recording equipment, connecting cables, the earth and
    transducer to earth coupling.


CLS 367/47
TXT Amplitude:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 wherein the distinction is made among the
    amplitudes of the various signals or constituents thereof.


CLS 367/48
TXT Phase:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 wherein the distinction is made among the
    phases of the various signals or constituents thereof.


CLS 367/49
TXT Frequency:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 wherein the distinction is made among the
    frequencies of the various signals or constituents thereof.


CLS 367/50
TXT Timing correction:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 having means to correct or control the
    timing of the various signals in order to compensate for undesired
    influences of differences in acoustic wave paths.


CLS 367/51
TXT Dynamic timing correction:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein the amount of correction or
    control is variable during an interval.


CLS 367/52
TXT Normal moveout:

    Subject matter under subclass 51 wherein the undesired influence is due to
    variations in the transmitter-to-distance.


CLS 367/53
TXT For dip:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein the difference in acoustic wave
    paths is caused by variations in the inclination of subsurface strata.


CLS 367/54
TXT For weathering layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein some or part of the paths lie in
    the zone of relatively low velocity material near the earth's surface and
    the effect of such layer is to be compensated for.


CLS 367/55
TXT Timing mark generation:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 including means to represent a timed
    interval on a signal record or display.


CLS 367/56
TXT Particular source-receiver array:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 wherein a plurality of receivers are
    particularly located relative to one another and to the transmitter of
    acoustic waves.


CLS 367/57
TXT Vertical receiver or source array:

    Subject matter under subclass 56 wherein a plurality of receivers or
    sources are spaced from one another radially with respect to the center of
    the earth.


CLS 367/58
TXT By receiver pattern arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 wherein a plurality of receivers are so
    located relative to one another as to produce signals which when combined
    are inherently analysed or corrected at least to some extent.


CLS 367/59
TXT Compositing system:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 wherein signals from a plurality of
    receivers are combined.


CLS 367/60
TXT Special digital system:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein signals are in digital form and
    are composited by digital processing means other than a general digital
    computer.

    (1)     Note.  A compositing process intended to be performed under control
    of a program in a general purpose digital computer does not constitute a
    basis for classification in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 421 for
    seismic signal compositing processes carried out by general purpose digital
    computers.


CLS 367/61
TXT Beam steering:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein information or intelligence from a
    certain direction is emphasized in the composite signal by delaying the
    signals from certain receivers.


CLS 367/62
TXT Array weighting:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein signals from certain ones of the
    receivers are modified in a predetermined manner before compositing.


CLS 367/63
TXT With preliminary signal processing:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the signals are modified before
    being combined.


CLS 367/64
TXT Optical processing:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 wherein an electrical signal
    representative of a detected acoustic wave is converted into
    electromagnetic radiation in the visible spectrum and is analyzed and/or
    corrected at least in part in that state.


CLS 367/65
TXT Gain control:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 wherein the amplification or attenuation
    of an amplifier is variable.


CLS 367/66
TXT Analog digital compatible systems:

    Subject matter under subclass 65 which may be applicable to the
    amplification or attenuation of either digital or analog signals.

    (1)     Note.  Disclosures classifiable in this subclass may include
    specific embodiments limited to, for example, analog signals but which
    disclosures are comprehensive enough to be applicable to digital signal
    gain control as well.


CLS 367/67
TXT Digital:

    Subject matter under subclass 65 wherein the signal is in the form of
    discrete pulses.


CLS 367/68
TXT Display systems:

    Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein the information or intelligence is
    converted from an electrical signal to a form (visually) perceptible to a
    human being.

    (1)     Note.  The nominal recitation or broad disclosure of display means
    is insufficient basis for classification in this subclass and the
    subclasses indented hereunder.  For classification here some details of the
    means or steps which convert the signal from one form to another must be
    recited.


CLS 367/69
TXT Well logging type:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein the information or intelligence
    displayed is obtained from an acoustic wave detector which travels through
    a passageway in the earth.


CLS 367/70
TXT Color:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein the information or intelligence is
    displayed in various wavelengths.


CLS 367/71
TXT CRT:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein the information or intelligence is
    displayed on a cathode-ray tube.


CLS 367/72
TXT 3-D:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein the display extends or appears to
    extend in three perpendicular directions in space.


CLS 367/73
TXT Synthetic seismograms and models:

    Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein seismic-type signals or data are
    produced artifically.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 806 for
    electric analog computer simulators of geophysical phenomena, per se.


CLS 367/74
TXT Format conversion:

    Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein the information or intelligence
    pertaining to the discontinuity appears in an electric signal variable
    (e.g., amplitude) and is transferred to another signal variable (e.g.,
    frequency).


CLS 367/75
TXT Shear wave:

    Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein the acoustic waves consist of
    stresses in a direction or plane perpendicular to the direction of travel.


CLS 367/76
TXT Telemetry:

    Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein electrical signals representative
    of the acoustic waves are transmitted from the detector to a remote part of
    the system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for seismic telemetering systems in which a time break signal
    represents the instant of generation of seismic energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 870.01+ for generic
    telemetering systems.


CLS 367/77
TXT Radio wave:

    Subject matter under subclass 76 wherein the signals are converted to and
    transmitted as invisible electromagnetic radiation.


CLS 367/78
TXT Multiplex:

    Subject matter under subclass 76 wherein a plurality of distinct electric
    signals are transmitted over the same circuit virtually simultaneously.


CLS 367/79
TXT Time:

    Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein the distinct signals are separated
    from one another in time.


CLS 367/80
TXT Frequency:

    Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein signals are distinguished from one
    another by their frequency.


CLS 367/81
TXT WELLBORE TELEMETERING:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein information or control
    signals are transmitted through a passageway in the earth in the form of
    acoustic waves in a medium in the passageway comprised of material
    different from the surrounding earth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for wellbore telemetering of this subclass type combined with
    acoustic well logging means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 306+ for acoustic wave wellbore
    telemetering systems combined with gravity or earth's magnetic field
    responsive means to determine and indicate the direction or inclination of
    the wellbore.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 853.1+ for nonacoustic wave
    wellbore telemetering, particularly subclasses 855.6 and 856.4 for an
    acoustic transducer with a nonacoustic communication link; and subclasses
    870.01+ for generic telemetering systems.


CLS 367/82
TXT Through drill string or casing:

    Subject matter under subclass 81 wherein the medium is, or is contained in,
    means connecting a drill bit in the passageway to driving apparatus on the
    earth's surface.


CLS 367/83
TXT Through well fluids:

    Subject matter under subclass 81 wherein the medium is a liquid.


CLS 367/84
TXT Rotary valve control:

    Subject matter under subclass 83 wherein the acoustic waves are generated
    by rotational movement of structure which modulates the well fluid flow.


CLS 367/85
TXT Linear valve control:

    Subject matter under subclass 83 wherein the acoustic waves are created by
    linear movement of structure which modulates the flow of well fluid.


CLS 367/86
TXT BOREHOLE TESTING:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein information or
    intelligence pertaining to the walls of a passageway through the earth is
    obtained from a device which travels through the passageway and emits
    acoustic waves into the medium contained within the passageway (e.g., air,
    water) which are reflected from the walls back to the device and detected.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 152.16 for using vibration to
    measure a parameter of a borehole or equipment therein.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 40+ for borehole
    testing apparatus combined with significant boring or penetrating structure.


CLS 367/87
TXT ECHO SYSTEMS:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein intelligence or
    information about a foreign object or other discontinuity in the medium is
    communicated in an acoustic wave reflected from the object or other
    discontinuity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for systems for jamming or interfering with echo systems.

    37,     for echo systems wherein the medium is the earth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), appropriate subclasses  for radio wave echo
    systems.


CLS 367/88
TXT Side scanning or contour mapping sonar systems:

    Subject matter under subclass 87 in which the paths of acoustic waves to
    and/or from the transmitter-receiver are directed laterally and downwardly
    into a body of water from a moving vessel on the body of water or in which
    a topographical record of the bottom of the body of water is produced from
    acoustic waves received at the moving vessel.

    (1)     Note.  The contour mapping devices of this subclass type are not
    limited to side scanning types.


CLS 367/89
TXT Speed determination:

    Subject matter under subclass 87 for determining the rate of change of
    distance between a transmitting-receiving device and the acoustic wave
    reflector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    606,    Surgery, subclasses 2+ for ultrasonic determination of blood flow.


CLS 367/90
TXT By doppler effect:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 which utilizes the frequency shift of the
    reflected signal to determine the relative speed of the reflector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 861.18+ for determining the rate
    of flow of a fluid by measuring the doppler shift of an acoustic wave
    emitted into the fluid.


CLS 367/91
TXT Vehicle mounted system for determining vehicle speed:

    Subject matter under subclass 90 in which the echo system is supported by a
    moving platform whose relative speed is determined.


CLS 367/92
TXT Parametric sonar:

    Subject matter under subclass 87 which produces sum and difference
    frequencies by the nonlinear mixing of compressional waves within the
    propagating medium.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type may be referred to as
    nonlinear or parametric acoustics.


CLS 367/93
TXT Presence or movement only detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 87 which determines that a stationary or
    moving object is within a given area but does not determine the object's
    specific distance or direction from the detecting station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99+,    for distance or direction finding echo systems.


CLS 367/94
TXT By doppler effect:

    Subject matter under subclass 93 wherein the frequency shift of the
    received signal is utilized to determine presence or movement.


CLS 367/95
TXT Returned signal used for control:

    Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein the reflected wave effects the
    regulation, energization, variation, de-energization, or some other
    operation of a device.

    (1)     Note.  The conventional energization of a mere indicating or
    measuring instrument is not considered control and is therefore
    insufficient basis for classification in this subclass.


CLS 367/96
TXT External device:

    Subject matter under subclass 95 in which the device is not an integral
    part of the acoustic wave transmitting or receiving apparatus.


CLS 367/97
TXT Receiver system:

    Subject matter under subclass 95 in which the device is a portion of the
    acoustic wave receiver itself.


CLS 367/98
TXT Automatic gain or threshold control:

    Subject matter under subclass 97 in which the output signal level of the
    acoustic wave receiver or the minimum response level of some part of the
    receiver is controlled by the reflected wave.


CLS 367/99
TXT Distance or direction finding:

    Subject matter under subclass 87 in which the extent of linear and/or
    relative angular spacing between an acoustic wave reflector and receiver is
    determined.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:   Electrical, subclass 621 for acoustic wave liquid
    level alarms.


CLS 367/100
TXT With correlation or matched filtering:

    Subject matter under subclass 99 in which the degree of similarity between
    the transmitted and received signals is measured by multiplying the signals
    together and integrating the result, or in which a waveform of known shape
    is separated from random perturbing noise by optimal filtering.


CLS 367/101
TXT Frequency modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 99 in which the frequency of the transmitted
    acoustic waves is varied repetitively.


CLS 367/102
TXT Linear modulation (e.g., sawtooth):

    Subject matter under subclass 101 in which the frequency increases or
    decreases repetitively at a constant rate between repetitions.


CLS 367/103
TXT With beam steering, scanning, or focussing:

    Subject matter under subclass 99 in which directional characteristics of a
    transmitter or receiver are controlled so that the pattern of transmitted
    or received acoustic wave energy is varied or caused to converge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for beam stabilization or compensation.


CLS 367/104
TXT By transducer movement:

    Subject matter under subclass 103 wherein the transmitting or receiving
    element is caused to change location or to turn about an axis.

    (1)     Note.  Transducers which are fixed relative to a vehicle and which
    only move by virtue of the movement of the vehicle are not considered beam
    steering or scanning transducers of this subclass type.


CLS 367/105
TXT Transducer switching or gating:

    Subject matter under subclass 103 in which the directional characteristics
    are varied by selectively or repetitively opening or closing the electric
    signal path to the transducer.


CLS 367/106
TXT With towing:

    Subject matter under subclass 99 in which at least a portion of the system
    is pulled or hauled by a vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclasses 242+ for the towing, per se, of waterborne
    devices.


CLS 367/107
TXT With indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 99 which includes a means for displaying the
    distance or direction.


CLS 367/108
TXT Digital readout:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 in which the indicator displays the
    distance or direction in numerical (as opposed to analog) form.


CLS 367/109
TXT Rotating lamp:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 in which the display device comprises a
    light source which is moved in a circular path.


CLS 367/110
TXT Color display:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 in which the indication is presented in
    various wavelengths of visible light.


CLS 367/111
TXT Luminous array:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 in which the display device comprises a
    plurality of light emitting elements.


CLS 367/112
TXT Alarm:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 which includes an alerting device (e.g.,
    minimum depth alarm).


CLS 367/113
TXT Cathode-ray tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 in which the display device is an
    evacuated tube with a luminescent screen activated by a controlled electron
    beam.


CLS 367/114
TXT Meter:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 in which the display device is a meter of
    the moving coil type having a coil which pivots between permanent magnets,
    e.g., a volt meter or ammeter.


CLS 367/115
TXT Permanent record:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 in which the display device provides a
    relatively long-lasting display of a transient indication.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type includes, for example,
    a moving stylus display device.


CLS 367/116
TXT Audible or tactile:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein the indication is presented in
    such a way as to be perceivable through the sense of hearing or the sense
    of touch.


CLS 367/117
TXT PLURAL TRANSMITTERS TO RECEIVER OR TRANSMITTER TO PLURAL RECEIVERS:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising systems in which two
    or more acoustic wave transmitters send acoustic signals to an acoustic
    wave receiver-transducer, or in which an acoustic wave transmitter sends
    acoustic signals to two or more acoustic wave receiver-transducers.


CLS 367/118
TXT DISTANCE OR DIRECTION FINDING:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which the extent of linear
    and/or relative angular spacing between an acoustic wave emitter and
    receiver is determined.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass may determine the range,
    azimuth and/or elevation of an acoustic wave source.

    (2)     Note.  The acoustic wave emitter need not be a part of the distance
    and/or direction finding system itself.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:   Electrical, subclass 621 for acoustic wave liquid
    level alarms.


CLS 367/119
TXT With beam steering, scanning, or focussing:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 in which directional characteristics of
    the receiver are controlled so that the directions of optimal reception are
    varied or concentrated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for beam stabilization or compensation.


CLS 367/120
TXT By transducer movement:

    Subject matter under subclass 119 wherein the directional characteristics
    are varied by changing the location of the transducer or by rotating it
    about an axis.


CLS 367/121
TXT By electrical means:

    Subject matter under subclass 119 wherein the directional characteristics
    are varied or concentrated by varying some functional characteristic of the
    electrical circuitry associated with the transducer.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type may consist of, for
    example, a plurality of transducers whose directions of maximum sensitivity
    do not coincide and which are connected to common signal processing
    circuitry in such a way that signals from individual transducers may be
    selectively attenuated to thereby effectively increase the sensitivity of
    the whole receiver in directions corresponding to the directions of maximum
    sensitivity of the transducer whose signals are unattenuated.


CLS 367/122
TXT Transducer switching or gating:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the directional characteristics
    are varied by selectively or repetitively opening and closing the
    electrical signal path from the transducer.


CLS 367/123
TXT With phase shifter or delay means:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the electrical circuitry
    associated with the transducer includes means for changing the travel time
    of a signal from the input of the means to its output.


CLS 367/124
TXT By combining or comparing signals:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein a signal is derived from the
    combination of the signals in two or more receiving channels (as by
    addition or multiplication) or from the measurement of the degree of
    similarity between such signals.


CLS 367/125
TXT Phase comparison and/or correlation:

    Subject matter under subclass 124 in which the degree of similarity of
    received signals is measured by multiplying the signals together and
    integrating the results and/or by measuring the difference in phase between
    them.


CLS 367/126
TXT Addition or subtraction:

    Subject matter under subclass 124 in which the combined signal is the
    result of the addition or subtraction of a signal in one channel to or
    from, respectively, a signal in another channel.


CLS 367/127
TXT With time interval measuring means:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 in which the period of time elapsing
    between reception of compressional wave signals at separate transducers is
    measured.


CLS 367/128
TXT With electromagnetic wave:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 in which a signal is transmitted through
    space in the form of electromagnetic waves.


CLS 367/129
TXT With plurality of transducers:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 having two or more means to convert
    acoustic wave energy to an electrical signal.


CLS 367/130
TXT With towing:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 in which at least a portion of the
    distance and/or direction finding device is pulled or hauled through the
    acoustic medium by a vehicle which is specifically separated from the
    device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclasses 242+ for the towing, per se, of waterborne
    devices.


CLS 367/131
TXT UNDERWATER SYSTEM:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising an acoustic
    wave/electric signal transducer electrically connected to signal processing
    circuitry wherein the acoustic wave medium is water.

    (1)     Note.  The electric signal processing circuitry of this subclass
    type includes any circuit which is used to deliberately alter the signal.
    Mere interconnection means such as transducer leads do not constitute
    signal processing circuitry of this subclass type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for sonar counter-measures.

    2+,     for transponders.

    3+,     for sonobuoy transponders.

    7,      for underwater acoustic image conversions.

    12,     for underwater beam stabilization or compensation.

    15+,    for offshore prospecting.

    87+,    for underwater echo systems.

    117+,   for underwater plural transmitters to receiver or transmitter to
    plural receivers system.

    118+,   for underwater distance or direction finding.

    141+,   for underwater transducers.


CLS 367/132
TXT Analog speech communication:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 in which continuous acoustic wave signals
    having an amplitude, phase, or frequency proportional to voice modulations
    are transmitted and/or received.


CLS 367/133
TXT Remote control:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein acoustic waves are transmitted to
    activate or otherwise affect the operation of a device located at a
    distance from the acoustic wave source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    197+,   for speech or sound responsive selective control.


CLS 367/134
TXT Telemetering:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 in which acoustic waves modulated by a
    specific source are transmitted, received, and demodulated.


CLS 367/135
TXT RECEIVER CIRCUITRY:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising means to convert
    acoustic energy into electrical signals connected to electric signal
    processing means.

    (1)     Note.  The electric signal processing means of this subclass type
    may, in conjunction with the transducer, determine the presence or movement
    of an acoustic wave emitter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93,     for transmitter-receiver systems which determine presence or
    movement of an acoustic wave reflector.


CLS 367/136
TXT Responsive to intruder energy:

    Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein the circuitry is responsive to
    acoustic energy generated by the emplacement of a body within the region of
    sensitivity of the transducer.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type includes, for example,
    intrusion alarms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93,     for intrusion alarms responsive to disturbances in an acoustic wave
    field.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:   Electrical, subclass 566 for nonacoustic
    wave-type vibration detectors used to detect the intrusion or movement of a
    vibration producing body.


CLS 367/137
TXT TRANSMITTER SYSTEMS:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising electrical wave
    generating circuitry coupled to an acoustic wave transducer-emitter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 22+ for a keyboard
    controlled vibrating element for producing an encoded electrical signal.


CLS 367/138
TXT With beam forming, shaping, steering, or scanning:

    Subject matter under subclass 137 in which directional characteristics of
    the transmitter are controlled so that the pattern of transmitted acoustic
    wave energy is varied or caused to converge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for beam stabilization or compensation.


CLS 367/139
TXT Animal control:

    Subject matter under subclass 137 in which the emitted energy is used to
    affect the behavior of animals including insects and humans.


CLS 367/140
TXT SIGNAL TRANSDUCERS:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising means to convert
    energy in the form of acoustic waves into energy in the form of electric
    signals or vice versa.

    (1)     Note.  The proximate functions of transducers classifiable in this
    subclass or in the subclasses indented hereunder limit them to use in
    acoustic wave systems of this class type. For a complete search for similar
    transducers of other or general utility, see the search notes to the
    appropriate subclasses indented hereunder.


CLS 367/141
TXT Underwater type:

    Subject matter under subclass 140 wherein the acoustic waves propagate to
    or from the transducer in water.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 570+ for vibration sensing
    apparatus utilized in the physical testing of materials.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 27 for mechanical submarine bells.

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses .5 and 113-121 for miscellaneous acoustical
    systems such as supersonic systems having electroacoustical transducers.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 311+ for
    piezoelectric generators; and subclass 26 for magnetostrictive generators.


CLS 367/142
TXT Exclusive-type transmitter:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 comprising transducers which are only
    capable of converting electric signals into acoustic waves.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass type is distinguished
    from the type of transducer which is capable of converting electric signals
    into acoustic waves and vice versa.  Such transducers are excluded from
    this subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder.


CLS 367/143
TXT Hydraulically driven vibrator:

    Subject matter under subclass 142 wherein reactive masses are oscillated by
    fluid pressure.


CLS 367/144
TXT Air guns:

    Subject matter under subclass 142 wherein compressed gases are released
    underwater creating a travelling acoustic wave front in the water.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 119+ for similar subject matter which is not,
    however, operated electrically.


CLS 367/145
TXT Explosives:

    Subject matter under subclass 142 wherein a solid, liquid, or gas explosive
    is ignited underwater to create a shock wave.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclass 116 for solid and liquid explosives; and
    subclass 117 for gas explosives which are ignited under water by other than
    electrical means for acoustic effects.


CLS 367/146
TXT Implosive devices:
    Subject matter under subclass 142 which are submersed in water and produce
    acoustic waves therein by abruptly reducing their volume.


CLS 367/147
TXT Spark discharge devices:

    Subject matter under subclass 142 wherein underwater transducer produces an
    electric spark in the surrounding water which creates an acoustic shock
    wave.


CLS 367/148
TXT Electrically driven underwater bells or sirens:

    Subject matter under subclass 142 comprising either an electrically driven
    bell or an electrically driven siren.

    (1)     Note.  The sirens and bells, per se, of this subclass type are of
    the type defined in subclasses 147 and 148, respectively, of Class 116,
    Signals and Indicators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 27 for mechanically operated
    underwater bells and sirens.


CLS 367/149
TXT Exclusive-type receiver:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 comprising transducers which are only
    capable of converting acoustic waves into electrical signals.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass type is distinguished
    from the type of transducer which is capable of converting acoustic waves
    into electric signals and vice versa.  Such transducers are excluded from
    this subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder.


CLS 367/150
TXT With modifying lens:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 combined with an acoustically transparent
    means which changes the direction of a ray of acoustic wave energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 335 for
    piezoelectric-type acoustic wave transducers having modifying lens.


CLS 367/151
TXT With reflector:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 combined with an acoustically opaque
    means to change the direction of a ray of acoustic wave energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 335 for
    piezoelectric-type acoustic wave transducers having acoustic wave
    reflectors.


CLS 367/152
TXT With impedance matching means:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 having means to mechanically couple the
    transucer to the medium in which it is immersed in such a way as to permit
    the maximum amount of energy transfer at selected wave lengths beetween the
    transducer and the medium.


CLS 367/153
TXT Plural transducer array:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 comprising a plurality of transducers
    having electrically distinguishable inputs or outputs arranged in a
    definite spatial relationship with respect to one another.

    (1)     Note.  A plurality of spatially arranged transducer elements having
    only one electrical output or input at which the effects of the individual
    elements are indistinguishable is considered to a unitary transducer and
    not an array of this subclass type.


CLS 367/154
TXT Line array:

    Subject matter under subclass 153 wherein a plurality of transducers are
    structurally mounted on or in a line.


CLS 367/155
TXT Piezoelectric:

    Subject matter under subclass 153 wherein the transducers are of the
    piezoelectric type.

    (1)     Note.  Piezoelectric transducers of this subclass type are defined
    in subclass 157, below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157,    piezoelectric underwater acoustical transducers, per se, of this
    class type.


CLS 367/156
TXT Magnetostrictive:

    Subject matter under subclass 153 wherein the transducers are of the
    magnetostrictive type.

    (1)     Note.  Magnetostrictive transducers of this subclass type are
    defined in subclass 168, below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168,    for underwater acoustical transducers, per se, of this class type.


CLS 367/157
TXT Piezoelectric:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the energy is converted by a
    material which exhibits an electrostatic polarization when subjected to
    mechanical stress or which exhibits mechanical stress tending to produce
    deflection, expansion, or contraction when subjected to electrical stress.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180,    for piezoelectric transducers of this class type not limited to
    underwater use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 311+ for
    piezoelectric elements and devices of general utility.


CLS 367/158
TXT Head and tail mass:

    Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the piezoelectric element has a
    mass acting as a driving or driven piston at one end of its axis and a
    relatively stationary inertial mass at the other end.


CLS 367/159
TXT Elongated cylindrical element:

    Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein piezoelectric matrial is in the
    shape of an elongated cylinder.


CLS 367/160
TXT Bending type:

    Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the mechanical stresses applied
    to or produced in the piezoelectric element include a coplanar pair or
    oppositely directed moments of mechanical force.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 330-332 for
    bending-type piezoelectric transducers of general utility.


CLS 367/161
TXT Multimorph:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 having two piezoelectric elements so
    joined and oriented relative to one another that one expands while the
    other contracts to produce a bending-type stress in the composite structure.


CLS 367/162
TXT With resonant or damping structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the piezoelectric element is
    combined with structure whose natural frequency of vibration is disclosed
    as being either the same as the operating frequency of the element or such
    as to absorb or attenuate undesired wave energy emanating from or applied
    to the piezoelectric element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 321-327 for
    similar subject matter of general utility.


CLS 367/163
TXT With diaphragm:

    Subject matter under subclass 157 having a flexible member which couples
    vibrations in an acoustic medium to or from the piezoelectric element.


CLS 367/164
TXT Single element having a plurality of electrodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein a plurality of electrodes on its
    surface form a plurality of discrete radiating areas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 366 for similar
    subject matter of general utility.


CLS 367/165
TXT Specific support structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 157 having specific means to support the
    piezoelectric transducer.

    (1)     Note.  For purpose of classification in this subclass, the support
    structure must be more than nominally recited.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173,    for nonpiezoelectric transducer having similar support structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 348+ for
    supports for piezoelectric elements of general utility.


CLS 367/166
TXT Liquid filled:

    Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the transducer is filled with a
    liquid for transmitting acoustic wave to or from a fluid medium.


CLS 367/167
TXT Pressure compensating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein means is provided to counteract
    the effects on the transducer of the static pressure of the surrounding
    water.


CLS 367/168
TXT Magnetostrictive:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the acoustic wave energy causes
    or is caused by changes in the dimensions or internal stresses of a
    ferromagnetic material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 26 for
    magnetostrictive transducers of general utility.


CLS 367/169
TXT Elongated continuous type:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein a single transducer is composed
    of multiple transducer elements spaced from one another in extended linear
    or arcuate formats.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153,    for similar arrays of a multiplicity of functionally distinct
    transducers.


CLS 367/170
TXT Electret:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein acoustic wave energy acts on or
    is caused by a dielectric body having separated, permanent electric poles
    of opposite polarity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 400
    for electrets, per se.


CLS 367/171
TXT Liquid filled transducer:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the transducer is filled with an
    acoustically transparent liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166,    for fluid-filled piezoelectric transducers.


CLS 367/172
TXT Transducer with pressure compensating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein means is provided to counteract
    the effects on the transducer of the static pressure of the surrounding
    water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    for similar pressure compensating means combined with piezoelectric
    transducers.


CLS 367/173
TXT Transducer with support:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 having specific means to support the
    transducer.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of classification in this subclass, the support
    structure must be more than nominally recited.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165,    for similar subject matter wherein the transducer is of the
    piezoelectric type.


CLS 367/174
TXT Transducer with diaphragm:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 having a flexible member which couples
    vibrations in an acoustic medium to or from the transducer element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163,    for similar subject matter wherein the transducer is of the
    piezoelectric type.


CLS 367/175
TXT Diaphragm with electric driving coil:

    Subject matter under subclass 174 wherein the diaphragm is driven by an
    electromagnetic coil.


CLS 367/176
TXT Transducer with resonant or damping structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the transducer element is
    combined with structure whose natural frequency of vibration is disclosed
    as being either the same as the operating frequency of the element or such
    as to absorb to attenuate undesired wave energy emanating from or applied
    to the element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162,    for similar subject matter wherein the transducer element is
    piezoelectric.


CLS 367/177
TXT Towed land cables:

    Subject matter under subclass 140 comprising a plurality of transducers
    mounted in or on a cable-like structure which supports the transducers for
    movement with the cable-like structure.


CLS 367/178
TXT Receivers:

    Subject matter under subclass 140 for use in acoustic wave systems to
    convert acoustic wave energy into electrical energy.


CLS 367/179
TXT Pendulum type:

    Subject matter under subclass 178 wherein a body suspended from a fixed
    point swings in an arcuate manner in response to incident acoustic wave
    energy.


CLS 367/180
TXT Piezoelectric:

    Subject matter under subclass 178 wherein acoustic wave energy is converted
    into electrical energy by a material which exhibits an electrostatic
    polarization when subjected to mechanical stress.


CLS 367/181
TXT Capactive:

    Subject matter under subclass 178 comprising an electrical capacitor whose
    electrical parameters are varied by changes in its mechanical parameters
    brought about by acoustic wave energy.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type includes, for example,
    two spaced plates connectible in an electrical circuit, whose spacing is
    varied by the force of incident acoustic wave.


CLS 367/182
TXT Moving coil:

    Subject matter under subclass 178 in which acoustic wave forces move an
    electric coil relative to a ferromagnetic core so as to induce electric
    signals in the coil.


CLS 367/183
TXT Spider spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 182 having resilient means to support the
    coil radially with respect to the core in such a way as to permit relative
    movement of the coil axially with respect to the core.


CLS 367/184
TXT Having arcuate movement:

    Subject matter under subclass 182 wherein the coil is supported for angular
    movement about an axis spaced from and transverse to the axis of the coil.


CLS 367/185
TXT Moving magnet:

    Subject matter under subclass 178 wherein acoustic wave forces move a
    permanent magnet relative to an electric coil in such a way as to induce an
    electric signal in the coil.


CLS 367/186
TXT Having arcuate movement:

    Subject matter under subclass 185 wherein the magnet is supported for
    angular movement about an axis spaced from and transverse to the axis of
    the coil.


CLS 367/187
TXT Spider spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 185 having resilient means to support the
    magnet radially with respect to the coil in such a way as to permit
    relative movement of the magnet axially with respect to the coil.


CLS 367/188
TXT Casing or housing:

    Subject matter under subclass 178 provided with enclosure means to separate
    the transducer from its environment.


CLS 367/189
TXT Vibrator-type transmitter:

    Subject matter under subclass 140 comprising generators of long trains of
    periodic acoustic waves.


CLS 367/190
TXT With feedback control:

    Subject matter under subclass 189 in which a portion of the output of the
    generator is used to control the operation of the generator itself.


CLS 367/191
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition not provided for by any of the
    preceding subclasses.


CLS 367/197
TXT SELECTIVE (E.G., REMOTE CONTROL):

    Subject matter under the class definition for controlling the operation of
    one or more devices to obtain a plurality of results by transmission of a
    designated one of plural distinctive acoustic control signals over a
    smaller number of communications channels than the number of distinct
    results.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are plural addressable receiving devices.

    (2)     Note.  Underwater remote control is excluded from this subclass,
    and is classified in subclass 133.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for selective control of acoustic well logging.

    65+,    for selective control of the gain of a land reflection type signal
    analyses and/or correction in seismic prospecting.

    84      and 85, for valve control in acoustic wellbore telemetry.

    95+,    for acoustic echo systems where the returned signal is used for
    selective control.

    133,    for underwater selective remote control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825+ for similar subject
    matter using communication lines other than acoustical, and the search
    notes thereto for other pertinent subject matter.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    142+ for selective optical remote control.


CLS 367/198
TXT Humanly generated sound or speech responsive (e.g., human whistle):

    Subject matter under subclass 197 in which the control signals are actuated
    or modified in accordance with an audible mechanical vibration produced by
    a human being.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclass
    110 for voice controlled audio signal systems.


CLS 367/199
TXT Frequency responsive actuation:

    Subject matter under subclass 197 wherein each control signal is a
    vibratory wave having a distinctive frequency characteristic.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclass
    110 for voice controlled audio signal systems.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS

    The following subclasses are collections of published disclosures
    pertaining to various specified aspects of the electroacoustic
    communication art which do not form appropriate bases for subclasses in the
    foregoing classification.All copies of U.S. patents to be found in the
    following subclasses are cross-reference copies, the originals of which
    appear in the foregoing subclasses or elsewhere.Therefore, these
    cross-reference art collections serve primarily either as a starting point
    in searching this class or an indication of further fields of search inside
    or outside the class.  In no case should any of these collections be
    considered exhaustive of the subject matter provided for by them.


CLS 367/900
TXT SONAR TIME VARIED GAIN CONTROL SYSTEM:

    Sonar systems in which the amplification factor of a receiver is changed as
    a function of expected attenuation of the received signal.


CLS 367/901
TXT NOISE OR UNWANTED SIGNAL REDUCTION IN NONSEISMIC RECEIVING SYSTEM:

    Receiving systems other than those used for detecting acoustic waves in
    earth wherein the effects of interference are diminished or compensated for.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this collection are conventional filtering
    techniques, time varied gain control systems, and side lobe reduction
    systems which are provided for in other cross-reference art collections in
    this class.


CLS 367/902
TXT SPEED OF SOUND COMPENSATION:

    Acoustic wave echo systems or distance and direction finding systems
    wherein correction is made for errors which would otherwise be introduced
    by variations in the propagation of acoustic waves.


CLS 367/903
TXT TRANSMIT-RECEIVE CIRCUITRY:

    Acoustic wave echo systems which permit alternate projection and detection
    of acoustic wave energy while using a single transducer.


CLS 367/904
TXT DOPPLER COMPENSATION SYSTEMS:

    Acoustic wave systems wherein correction is provided for errors which would
    otherwise occur because of an apparant frequency shift in an acoustic wave
    due to relative movement between source and receiver.


CLS 367/905
TXT SIDE LOBE REDUCTION OR SHADING:

    Acoustic wave echo systems or distance and direction finding systems in
    which signals received from portions of a transducer array other than the
    main lobe are diminished or eliminated, the directive pattern of an array
    being modified by adjusting the distribution of signal phase and/or
    amplitude over the array.


CLS 367/906
TXT AIRBORNE SHOCK-WAVE DETECTION:

    Acoustic wave systems for detecting airborne acoustic waves generated by
    the movement of a ballistic missile, projectile, or other shock-wave
    generating device through the air.


CLS 367/907
TXT COORDINATE DETERMINATION:

    Acoustic wave echo systems or distance or direction finding systems in
    which the receiving system produces at least a pair of numbers which define
    the location of the source (e.g., numbers representing ordinate and
    abscissa or range and bearing).


CLS 367/908
TXT MATERIAL LEVEL DETECTION, E.G., LIQUID LEVEL:

    Acoustic wave echo systems in which the reflector is a fluent material
    contained in a vessel.


CLS 367/909
TXT COLLISION   AVOIDANCE:

    Acoustic wave echo systems or distance or direction finding systems for
    providing advance warning or impending impact of relatively moving objects.


CLS 367/910
TXT PORTABLE SONAR DEVICES:

    Acoustic wave echo systems or distance and direction finding systems which
    are made to be carried and operated by one person.


CLS 367/911
TXT PARTICULAR WELL-LOGGING APPARATUS:

    Subject matter comprising wellhole data acquisition systems using specific
    logging apparatus.


CLS 367/912
TXT Particular Transducer:

    Subject matter under subclass 911 wherein the system uses a specific type
    of acoustic transducer to transmit and/or receive seismic waves.


CLS 368/
TTL HOROLOGY:  TIME MEASURING  SYSTEMS OR DEVICES

CLS 368/
TXT I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF THE CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    A.      This class is the generic class for instruments or portions of
    instruments employed for the measurement of time passage in units of hours,
    minutes, seconds, or fractions thereof or the like.

    B.      Also this class is the residual class for systems or devices or
    portions thereof, so constituted as to effect (i.e., control) the operation
    of the time measuring instrument.

    II.     SUBCOMBINATIONS OF TIME PIECE SYSTEMS OR DEVICES

    A.      This class includes signal indicators (e.g., alarms, striking
    mechanisms, displays, etc.)  specially designed for operation with or by
    time measuring instruments.

    B.      Similarly, other parts of time measuring instruments, (e.g., time
    bases, escapements, oscillators, etc.) relating to the subject matter of
    other classes but designed to function as components of timepiece systems
    or devices are classified in this class.

    III.    COMBINATIONS OF OTHER APPARATUS WHICH INCLUDE APPARATUS OF THIS
    CLASS

    A.      Subject matter where the time measuring system or device is
    controlled by a disparate device is classified here only if not elsewhere
    classifiable.

    B.      Noninteractive combinations of disparate devices and time measuring
    systems or devices are classifiable here if the time measuring art is more
    than nominally claimed, or not elsewhere classifiable.

    C.      This class does not include the following subject matter:

    1.      Excepting the apparatus combinations as provided for in II, III,A,
    and III,B above, systems or devices or portions thereof whose operation is
    affected (i.e., controlled) by a time measuring mechanism.

    2.      Systems or devices which perform computations involving time or
    nontime parameters with an output time signal or indication (e.g., average
    wait time, estimated time of arrival, etc.), such subject matter can be
    found, for example, in Class 701, subclass 203, and Class 705, subclass 418.

    3.      Systems or devices where the time indicating means is a tracing,
    marking, or the like made by a recording instrument, such subject matter
    being proper for Class 346.

    4.      Sundials and like instruments which measure time by the position of
    a shadow are classified in Class 33.

    IV.     SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, subclasses 101+ for compound tools for watchmaking
    or repair.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 896.3+, 231+, and 807+ for processes of
    timepiece assembly.

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 268+ for straight-line ray-type
    celestial instruments with time indicators, e.g., sundials.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 107+ and 358 for
    printed or painted display calendars; and subclass 335 for pen or pencil
    carried calendar indicator.

    63,     Jewelry, for timepiece jewelry attachments or housings.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 1.43+ for proving or calibrating
    of timepieces.

    81,     Tools, subclasses 6+ and 122+ for watchmakers tools.

    84,     Music, subclass 484 for metronomes or the like.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 206+ for chemically activated
    time lapse indicators.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 301+ for timepiece
    storage or shipping cases.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclasses 152, and 164-180 for
    timepiece carriers, e.g., watch bracelet.

    235,    Registers, subclass 114 for time register mechanisms.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 114+ for external supports for timepieces.

    283,    Printed Matter, subclasses 2+ for printed calendars, per se.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 3 for atomic clocks devices.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825+, 870.01+, 914, and 926
    for electrical communications involving time signals.

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 61+ and 73+ for systems in which the
    time interval between transmission and reception of a returned radio wave
    is determined.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 1+ for visual display systems
    with selective electrical control.

    346,    Recorders, appropriate subclasses for time measuring apparatus
    where the time-indicating means is a tracing, marking or the like made by a
    recording instruments.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements,
    appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 36+ for liquid crystal
    electro-optical display systems and devices.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 12 for
    time announcement machines controlled by condition responsive (not time)
    devices.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processsing Systems, subclass 569 for
    computerized time measuring or monitoring.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, for pulse counters and pulse counting systems,
    especially subclass 20 for pulse counters used for measuring time combined
    with measurement of another parameter.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 13, 70+, 114+, 131+, and 190+
    for telephone time announcement and timing mechanisms.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclass 304 for educational time
    teaching devices.

    455,    Telecomunications, subclasses 231 and 344 for clock radio
    combinations.

    968,    Horology, for U. S. patents relating to horology classified
    according to the European Patent Classification System (EPC), the concept
    to horology in the EPC is based on an industry type philosophy and
    therefore encompasses significantly more subject matter than is provided in
    Class 368, and includes, e.g., conventional clocks and watches, electronic
    time-pieces, sun dials, watchmakers, or watch repair tools, calibration,
    etc.


CLS 368/1
TXT CONTROLLED BY A DISPARATE DEVICE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the timepiece is
    regulated (e.g., turned on or off) directly or indirectly by an apparatus
    or device which performs an independant function unrelated to time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10+,    for timepieces with disparate devices where there is no interaction
    between them.

    89+,    for timers, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 12 for
    time announcement machines controlled by condition responsive (not time)
    devices.


CLS 368/2
TXT Speed checker:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the disparate device is an object
    whose velocity (i.e., distance per unit time) across an interval is
    determined by its time in transit (i.e., elapsed time).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113+,   for electrical "event" sensing timers.


CLS 368/3
TXT Game:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the disparate device is an
    amusement apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for toy timepieces.

    96,     for chess clocks.


CLS 368/4
TXT Telephone:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the disparate device is a telephone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for timepieces attached to or housed with telephones without
    interaction.

    55,     for plural timepiece systems with telephone line synchronization.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 70+ for telephone time
    announcement and timing mechanisms so intimately associated and claimed in
    combination with telephone equipment as to be inseparable there from as
    independent devices.


CLS 368/5
TXT Engine (e.g., internal combustion):

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the disparate device is any
    mechanism or machine designed to convert energy into mechanical work
    external to itself.


CLS 368/6
TXT Vehicle (e.g., aircraft, automobile) or vehicle part:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the disparate device is a
    transportation mechanism or an element of a transportation mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  Documents classified here must contain significant details
    of a timepiece mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 917+ for vehicle actuated
    traffic and vehicle signal indicators with time control or display.


CLS 368/7
TXT Actuation of a parking meter:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the vehicle actuates a parking
    meter means.

    (1)     Note.  For example, the actuation means may be mechanical linkages
    to a platform upon which the vehicle comes into contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90+,    for parking meter timers for indicating the length of time a
    vehicle has been parked or the length of time remaining on a parking period.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    194,    Check-Actuated Control Mechanisms, appropriate subclasses for check
    (e.g., coin) controlled parking meters.


CLS 368/8
TXT Actuation of a running-time meter:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the vehicle activates an operating
    time, timing device.


CLS 368/9
TXT Electrical device:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the disparate device is
    electrically operated.


CLS 368/10
TXT COMBINED WITH DISPARATE DEVICE:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a timepiece housed
    with or attached to an additional device which has a function other than
    that of keeping time and which does not serve to perfect the timepiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for timepieces controlled by disparate devices.


CLS 368/11
TXT Ambient condition detector:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein the disparate device is an
    instrument which measures or senses the state of or a quality of its
    environment (e.g., thermometer).


CLS 368/12
TXT External alarm:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein the disparate device is a signal
    device which gives an audible or visual warning and is not an integral part
    of the timepiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244+,   for alarms integral to and controlled by timepieces.


CLS 368/13
TXT Telephone:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein the disparate device is a
    telephone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for timepiece control by telephone.

    55,     for plural timepiece systems with telephone line synchronization.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 428+ and 441+ for similar
    claimed subject matter with nominal timepiece disclosure.


CLS 368/14
TXT Navigational instrument:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein the disparate device is an
    instrument used to manage or direct the course of a vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for astronomical timepieces with navigational display.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 443+
    for similar subject matter involving the electronic computation of time or
    time-related parameters.


CLS 368/15
TXT ASTRONOMICAL:

    Subject matter under the class definition incorporating means for
    indicating celestial body data (e.g., tide occurrences, moon phases, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Sundials and like instruments which measure time by the
    position of a shadow are classified in Class 33.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 268+ for straight-line light
    ray-type celestial instruments with time indicators.


CLS 368/16
TXT With sun, earth, and moon display:

    Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein the positions of the sun, earth,
    and moon are indicated in relation to each other according to the time of
    day, week, or month.


CLS 368/17
TXT With sun and earth display:

    Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein the position of both the sun and
    earth is indicated in relation to each other according to the time of day,
    week, or month.


CLS 368/18
TXT With moon and earth display:

    Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein the position of both the moon and
    earth is indicated in relation to each other according to the time of day,
    week, or month.


CLS 368/19
TXT With tide display:

    Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein tide occurrences are indicated
    according to the time of day.


CLS 368/20
TXT With navigational display:

    Subject matter under subclass 15 comprising timepiece display means with
    the specifically disclosed utility of enabling travel route projection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for timepiece combined (i.e., housed) with a navigational
    instrument.


CLS 368/21
TXT PLURAL TIME ZONES:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a timepiece includes
    means to display the absolute or relative time for more than one of the 24
    divisions of the globe which approximately coincide with meridians at
    successive hours from the observatroy at Greenwich, England.


CLS 368/22
TXT With manually actuated display:

    Subject matter under subclass 21 wherein the display of time in various
    time zones is available only upon manual activation of the display.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69+,    for chronological timepieces with manually activated display.

    224+,   for manually activated displays, per se.


CLS 368/23
TXT With a world globe:

    Subject matter under subclass 21 wherein the time display includes a
    spherical representation of the earth.


CLS 368/24
TXT Including illumination means:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 including means whereby the globe is
    artificially supplied with light (e.g., from within the globe).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     for chronological timepieces with auxiliary lighting means.

    227,    for auxiliary lighting of time displays, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 23+ for illuminated dials, per se.


CLS 368/25
TXT With movable belt display:

    Subject matter under subclass 21 wherein the time is indicated by display
    means which include a moving tape or belt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for timepiece movable belt calendar indicators.

    76+,    for mechanical or electromechanical driven displays for
    chronological timepieces.


CLS 368/26
TXT With movable drum display:

    Subject matter under subclass 21 wherein the time display indicator
    includes a moving cylinder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for timepiece movable drum calendar indicators.

    78,     for chronological timepiece drum displays.

    235,    for drum display details.


CLS 368/27
TXT With movable disk display:

    Subject matter under subclass 21 wherein the time display means includes at
    least one moving circular face (usually more than one), having time
    minerals or the like thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35+     and 37+, for movable disk display calendar indicators.

    77,     for chronological timepiece rotating disk display.

    220,    for rotating disk display trains.

    233,    for rotating disk display dials, per se.


CLS 368/28
TXT WITH CALENDAR INDICATOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means for indicating
    days of the week, weeks of the month, months of the year, years or any
    other man-made divisions of time wherein the lowest time period unit
    indicated is at least equal to the time of one revolution of the earth on
    its axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 107+ and 358 for
    printed or painted display calendars or the like, per se; and subclass 335
    for pen- or pencil-carried calendar indicator.

    283,    Printed Matter, subclasses 2+ for printed calendars, per se.


CLS 368/29
TXT Electro-optical:

    Subject matter under subclass 28 wherein the timepiece display means is
    made from a material whose optical properties can be changed by an
    electrical signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82+,    for chronological timepieces with electro-optical display.

    239+,   for electro-optical displays for timepieces, per se.

    250+,   for electro-optical timepiece alarms.


CLS 368/30
TXT Liquid crystal display (i.e., LCD):

    Subject matter under subclass 29 wherein the electro-optical display is a
    liquid crystal device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     for chronological timepiece with liquid crystal display.

    242,    for timepiece liquid crystal display, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 448 for liquid crystal
    changing exhibitors.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 299.01+ for liquid crystal compositions, per
    se.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 38, 50+, and 87+ for liquid
    crystal display devices with selective electrical control.

    349,    Liquid Crystal Cells, Elements and Systems, appropriate subclasses
    and especially subclass 142 for optical systems and elements utilizing
    liquid crystal materials.


CLS 368/31
TXT Winding and setting:

    Subject matter under subclass 28 comprising means to impart energy to
    operate the timepiece by some turning or coiling process as well as to
    position the time indicators of the timepiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for winding timepieces with calendar indicators.

    34+,    for setting timepieces with calendar indicators.

    185+,   for timepiece setting, per se.

    206+,   for timepiece winding, per se.


CLS 368/32
TXT Having clutch coupling:

    Subject matter under subclass 31 including a two-piece mechanism comprising
    two coaxially-mounted means, one of which slidably engages the other for
    coupling or decoupling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191+,   for timepiece winding and setting, per se.


CLS 368/33
TXT Winding:

    Subject matter under subclass 28 comprising means to impart energy to
    operate the timepiece through some turning or coiling process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31+,    for timepiece with calendar winding and setting.

    206+,   for timepiece winding, per se.


CLS 368/34
TXT Setting or resetting:

    Subject matter under subclass 28 comprising means to position the time
    indicators of the timepiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31+,    for timepieces with calendar indicator, winding and setting.

    185+,   for timepiece setting, per se.


CLS 368/35
TXT Movable ring or disk:

    Subject matter under subclass 34 wherein at least one of the time
    indicators is a movable, circular, band, or flat plate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37+,    for timepieces with calendar indicators having a movable ring or
    disk.

    233,    for timepiece displays having a rotating disk.


CLS 368/36
TXT With clutch:

    Subject matter under subclass 35 wherein the setting means is selectively
    coupled to the time indicator by a two-piece mechanism, comprised of two
    coaxially-mounted means, one of which slidably engages the other to enable
    the coupling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191+,   for timepiece winding and setting having a clutch.


CLS 368/37
TXT Movable ring or disk:

    Subject matter under subclass 28 wherein at least one of the timepiece time
    indicators is a movable, circular, band, or flat plate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35+,    for setting or resetting the calendar indicator having a movable
    ring or disk.


CLS 368/38
TXT With jumper spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 37 comprising a spring-controlled means for
    abruptly advancing the ring or disk from one position to another.


CLS 368/39
TXT Movable drum:

    Subject matter under subclass 28 wherein at least one of the timepiece
    indicators is a rotating cylinder.


CLS 368/40
TXT Movable belt:

    Subject matter under subclass 28 wherein at least one of the timepiece time
    indicators is a striplike band which moves about two or more wheels,
    pulleys, or the like.


CLS 368/41
TXT WITH MEMORANDUM HOLDER OR ERASABLE WRITING SURFACE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a timepiece is provided
    with a holder (e.g., hook, reel, compartment) for an article having thereon
    some information for the timepiece user or provided with an erasable
    writing surface upon which such information may be written.


CLS 368/42
TXT Motion controlled by timepiece:

    Subject matter under subclass 41 wherein the holder or surface is movable,
    movement thereof being under control of the time measuring instrument.


CLS 368/43
TXT Having alarm controlled by holder:

    Subject matter under subclass 41 wherein the holder regulates the operation
    of a signalling device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for timepiece combined with but noninteractive with an alarm.


CLS 368/44
TXT Having pointer controlled by timepiece:
    Subject matter under subclass 41 wherein a pointer is movable under the
    direction of a time-keeping mechanism and pointing to a particular
    memorandum, or part thereof, which is pertinent to a user, for a given time
    or time period.


CLS 368/45
TXT TOY:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising clockwork imitation
    timepiece means for simulating time keeping functions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclass 304 for educational time
    teaching devices.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, appropriate subclasses for an imitation
    time piece.


CLS 368/46
TXT PLURAL TIMEPIECE SYSTEM OR SYSTEM DEVICE (E.G., PRIMARY OR SECONDARY
    CLOCKS):

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to the general
    organization and mechanism or circuitry of plural timepieces whereby the
    displays of any number of these timepieces in remote, different localities
    are operated from a central station.

    (1)     Note.  The central station includes a primary timepiece for
    operating the remote timepiece.

    (2)     Note.  Plug-in AC time base electric clocks are classified in
    subclass 62 and subclasses indented thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 870.01+ for telemetering,
    per se.


CLS 368/47
TXT With wireless synchronization:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 wherein a remote time-display means is
    synchronized, if necessary, to agree with the central station time-display
    at predetermined intervals, and this synchronizing is accomplished by radio
    frequency-type transmission and receiving means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclass 354 for synchronizing the
    operation of sending and receiving mechanisms.


CLS 368/48
TXT With auxiliary power source:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 wherein the main power source for the
    system is replaced by an emergency power source in event of main power
    source failure.


CLS 368/49
TXT With significant winding or setting means: Subject matter under subclass 46
    including means for either winding the spring motor or correcting the time
    indicators of the secondary timepiece.

    (1)     Note.  Nominal recitations of winding or setting means are not
    classified in this or indented subclasses.


CLS 368/50
TXT For winding only:

    Subject matter under subclass 49 comprising means for winding but not
    setting.


CLS 368/51
TXT For setting only:

    Subject matter under subclass 49 comprising means for setting but not
    winding.


CLS 368/52
TXT Primary with direct synchronization or drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 wherein the central station timepiece
    drives the remote timepieces through a physical (electrical or otherwise)
    connection with the remote timepieces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 870.01+ for telemetering,
    per se.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclass 106 for synchronizing the
    operation of sending and receiving mechanisms.


CLS 368/53
TXT By external condition responsive means:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein the synchronization of the remote
    time-readout means is accomplished as a result of some condition, such as
    ambient temperature change.


CLS 368/54
TXT By fluidic actuation means:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein the synchronization or driving of
    the remote time-readout means is accomplished by fluid-pressure means.


CLS 368/55
TXT By communication means:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 comprising transmission means which forms
    a part of a communication system coupling the primary timepiece to the
    secondary timepiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for timepiece controlled by telephone actuation.

    13,     for timepieces noninteractively combined with telephones.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 310.01+ for combined
    signalling over communications transmissions means.


CLS 368/56
TXT By signal frequency change:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein the synchronizing is accomplished
    by a change in the electrical, mechanical, or electromechanical frequency
    of the driving signal.


CLS 368/57
TXT By signal amplitude change:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein the synchronizing is accomplished
    by a change in the amplitude of the driving signal.


CLS 368/58
TXT By signal polarity change:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein the synchronizing is accomplished
    by a change in the polarity of the driving signal.


CLS 368/59
TXT Secondary:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 relating to the remote timepiece and its
    mechanism or circuitry for receiving communication from the central station
    timepiece.


CLS 368/60
TXT With mechanical or electromechanical resetting:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein synchronization of the remote
    time-readout means is accomplished by mechanical or electromechanical means
    (e.g., respectively, spring and lever, or solenoid).


CLS 368/61
TXT Having mechanically actuated electrical switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 wherein an electrical switch is operated,
    by a mechanism, to actuate the electromechanical means.


CLS 368/62
TXT CHRONOLOGICAL:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to timepieces which
    repeat an observable process periodically to indicate a measure of time of
    indefinite continuous duration by regular division, and which contain (a) a
    time-indicator, and (b) an energy source, or (c) a time base, or (d) a
    coupling means between a time base and the time-indicator.

    (1)     Note.  Electrical clocks using plug-in AC as the time base are
    included in this and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89+,    for timepieces which measure elapsed time events of either known or
    unknown duration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, appropriate subclasses for time measuring apparatus
    where the time-indicating means is a tracing, marking, or the like made by
    a recording instrument.


CLS 368/63
TXT Phonetic (e.g., talking clock):

    Subject matter under subclass 62 wherein the time-indicating means is in
    the form of human speech.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272+,   for "cuckoo-clocks".

    274,    for recording indicating means where the recorded material is not
    human speech.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 12 for
    time- announcement machines controlled by condition responsive (not time)
    devices.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 23 for similar
    subject matter with only nominal horological disclosure.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 70+ for time announcement
    combined with telephone.


CLS 368/64
TXT With supplemental power source:

    Subject matter under subclass 62 wherein an auxiliary source of power is
    incorporated in the timepiece.

    (1)     Note.  Generally, the auxiliary power source is used in the event
    of failure of the primary source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203+,   for timepiece power supply details, per se.


CLS 368/65
TXT With fluidic actuation means:

    Subject matter under subclass 62 wherein the timepiece is driven or
    operated by fluid means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for primary timepiece systems with fluidic-2 actuation means.


CLS 368/66
TXT With power monitor:

    Subject matter under subclass 62 wherein power source status is constantly
    checked and displayed by means with in the timepiece.


CLS 368/67
TXT With auxiliary illumination for display:

    Subject matter under subclass 62 wherein the display is supplied with light
    in addition to whatever light it receives from its environment or whatever
    light it emits as a result of its operational state or composition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227,    for timepiece displays with auxiliary illumination, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 23+ for illumination of scales or dials,
    per se.  Also see search class notes under subclass 23 for other specific
    dial illumination.


CLS 368/68
TXT With intensity control of display:

    Subject matter under subclass 62 wherein the timepiece includes means to
    regulate the brightness of the time display.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202,    for compensating regulating of timepiece display for variations in
    external lighting.

    223+,   for time display details, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 20+, 63, 77, and 147+ for
    selective intensity control of a visual display system.


CLS 368/69
TXT With manually actuated display:

    Subject matter under subclass 62 wherein a switch or the like is manually
    operated to cause the timepiece to exhibit information.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass and its indent does not
    include reset mechanisms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101+    and 110+, for manually-actuated stop timers.

    224,    for manually actuated time display, per se.


CLS 368/70
TXT Operated sequentially for distinct time data:

    Subject matter under subclass 69 wherein by controlling the actuation means
    time data is displayed in series by the timepiece.

    (1)     Note.  For example, with one button (Switch) control-one push of
    the button the timepiece displays time of day information; a second push of
    the button and the timepiece displays day/month informataion, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224+,   for manually activated timepiece displays, per se.

    288+,   for protection involving the push-button and timepiece case.

    320+,   for timepiece switch or detent details, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses
    for push-button switch structure, per se.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 156+ for manually activated
    selective electrical control for a visual display system.


CLS 368/71
TXT With simultaneous time indicating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 62 wherein the timepiece includes a plurality
    of means for indicating the time concurrently (e.g., visual and audible
    means).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243+,   for various timepiece-signalling means, per se.


CLS 368/72
TXT Alarm type:

    Subject matter under subclass 71 wherein one of the simultaneous time
    indicators is a signal means which is actuated by a timepiece when the
    timepiece reaches a randomly, preset time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94,     for time interval, gravity-actuated alarm means.

    98+,    for time interval, predetermined mechanical-alarm means.

    109,    for time interval, predetermined electrical-alarm means.

    244+,   for timepiece alarms, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+ for timepiece control
    of alarms.


CLS 368/73
TXT Actuated by electrical means:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the auxiliary time-indicating
    means is electrically operated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250+,   for electrically operated time alarms, per se.


CLS 368/74
TXT With significant winding or setting:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 including means for priming the
    alarm-signalling means (e.g., alarm means coupled to timepiece setting or
    winding mechanism).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185+,   for timepiece regulating with setting or winding means.

    206+,   for timepiece winding means, per se.


CLS 368/75
TXT Sequential hourly sounding means:

    Subject matter under subclas 71 wherein one of the simultaneous time
    indicators is a signal means which is actuated by a timepiece at regular,
    uniformly preset times, (e.g., on the hour, half-hour, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243,    especially 267+, 269+, 272+, 274, and 275, for regularly sounding
    timepiece mechanisms, per se.


CLS 368/76
TXT With mechanical or electromechanical driven display:

    Subject matter under subclass 62 wherin a display of time information or
    indication is powered by a mechanical or electromechanical device, for
    example, a synchronous motor or solenoid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139+,   for mechanical time bases for timepieces, per se.

    157+    and 160+, for electromechanical time bases for timepieces, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 446+ for
    mechanically- or electromechanically-driven display means, per se.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 200+ for indicators driven by
    mechanical or electromechanical force.


CLS 368/77
TXT Rotating disk:

    Subject matter under subclass 76 wherein the time-display includes at least
    one disk or plate (usually more than one), having time numerals or the like
    thereon, which is wheel-shaped and rotates with respect to
    time-reference-indicating means, e.g., a painted line on a transparent
    cover, a window, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for plural time zone timepieces with movable disk display.

    35+     and 37+, for timepieces with calendar indicators and movable disk
    display.

    221,    for rotatable disk dial trains.

    233,    for rotatable timepiece disks, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 284+ for mechanically rotatable
    dial indicators.


CLS 368/78
TXT Drum:

    Subject matter under subclass 76 wherein the time display is an indicia
    bearing cylinder which rotates with respect to an indicator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for plural time zone timepieces with movable drum display.

    39,     for timepieces with calendar indicators having movable drum display.

    222,    for drum display trains.

    235,    for drum display of time, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 299 for mechanically, rotatable,
    indicia bearing drums.


CLS 368/79
TXT Optical:

    Subject matter under subclass 76 wherein the time display consists of means
    for projecting, reflecting, or transmitting electrically produced visible
    radiation from or through time representative indicia.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29+,    for timepieces with calendar electro-optical indicators.

    67,     for timepieces with illumination aid for reading the display.

    82+,    for electronic timepieces with electro-optical displays.

    239+,   for timepiece electro-optical displays, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 200+, especially 202 and 250 for
    indicators with visual light signals.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 815.4+ for electrical
    visual-signalling means with indicator means.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 1+ for visual display systems
    with selective electrical control.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 23+ for artificial-light means for dials.


CLS 368/80
TXT Hand and dial:

    Subject matter under subclass 76 wherein the time display consists of a
    fixed indicia bearing plate and pointers, which rotate with respect to the
    plate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228+,   for timepiece hand or dial details, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 284+ for devices having means to
    apply mechanical force to indicators to cause them to turn about an axis so
    as to indicate information.


CLS 368/81
TXT Having motor located in hand:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the driving means for the hand and
    dial display is a motor which is positioned in the hand or hands.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203,    for timepiece power supply details.


CLS 368/82
TXT With electro-optical display:

    Subject matter under subclass 62 wherein the timepiece-display means is
    made of a material whose optical properties can be changed by an electrical
    signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     for timepieces with electro-optical calendar display.

    79,     for mechanically or electromechanically driven electro-optical
    displays.

    239+,   for timepiece electro-optical displays, per se.

    250+,   for timepiece electro-optical-signalling means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 447+ for
    electro-optical changing exhibitors.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 1+ for visual display systems
    with selective electrical control.


CLS 368/83
TXT Solid body light emitter (e.g., LED):

    Subject matter under subclass 82 wherein a change in the optical properties
    of solid display material is caused by an electrical current and results in
    the emission of visible radiation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241,    for timepiece electro-optical solid body light emitter displays,
    per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 13, 79-103, and 918 for incoherent light emitting injection
    luminescent devices, and subclasses 80-85 for semiconductor light emitting
    sources combined with semiconductor light responsive devices.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 483+ for solid
    material which produces radiant energy upon electrical excitation.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 39, 44+, and 82+ for solid
    body light-emitting display devices with selective electrical control.


CLS 368/84
TXT Liquid crystal device (i.e., LCD):

    Subject matter under subclass 82 wherein a change in the optical properties
    of the display material is caused by an electrical voltage and results in
    the reflection or transmission of visible radiation.

    (1)     Note.  A liquid crystal material is a mateial which flows like a
    liquid and exhibits anisotropic optical properties which are characteristic
    of crystals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for timepieces with calendar information LCD display.

    242,    for timepiece LCD displays, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 448 for liquid crystal
    changing exhibitors.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 299.01+ for liquid crystal compositions,
    per se.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 38, 50+, and 87+ for liquid
    crystal display devices with selective electrical control.

    349,    Liquid Crystal Cells, Elements and Systems, appropriate subclasses
    and especially subclass 142 for optical systems and elements utilizing
    liquid crystal materials.


CLS 368/85
TXT With pulse transforming means:

    Subject matter under subclass 62 wherein pulse signals are changed or
    altered by means internal to the timepiece (e.g., multistage frequency
    dividers with electrical or manual switching).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155+,   for electrical time bases having pulse- transforming means.

    200+,   for regulating means which adjust the frequency or beat by changing
    the pulse rate.

    217+,   for timepiece pulse-transforming means, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 100+ for miscellaneous pulse shaping converting or
    generation.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, for pulse counters and shift registers, per se.


CLS 368/86
TXT Including transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 85 wherein the transforming means include a
    transistor circuit or device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218+,   for timepiece-transistorized pulsetransforming means, per se.


CLS 368/87
TXT Integrated circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein a combination of interconnected
    circuit elements are inseparably associated on or within a continuous
    substrate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219,    for pulse-transforming means with FET integrated circuits, per se.


CLS 368/88
TXT With significant casing or mounting support structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 62 wherein the timepiece incorporates a
    special enclosure or upholding means for the timepiece contents within the
    enclosure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for gravity-actuated time-interval timers with special support
    means.

    203+,   for enclosures and supports relating to timepiece power supplies.

    276+,   for timepiece cases with mounting support structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 301+ for timepiece
    shipping or storage cases.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclasses 152 and 164-180 for
    timepiece carriers, e.g., watch bracelet.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 114+ for external supports for timepieces.


CLS 368/89
TXT TIME INTERVAL:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein means is provided for
    indicating the time of duration of a particular event or upon termination
    of a predetermined time period.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for chronological timepieces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 1+ for miscellaneous discriminating circuits.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 569 for
    electrical computers and data processing systems which measure or monitor
    time intervals; and subclasses 705.07+ for computational digital watches.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, for pulse counters and pulse counting systems,
    especially subclass 20 for pulse counters used for measuring time combined
    with measurement of another parameter.


CLS 368/90
TXT Parking meter type:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 associated with a vehicle or a vehicle
    parking space for indicating the length of time the vehicle has been parked
    or the length of time remaining of a parking period.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for parking meter actuation by a vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    194,    Check-Actuated Control Mechanisms, appropriate subclasses for a
    check (e.g., coin) controlled parking meter.


CLS 368/91
TXT With gravity actuated timer:

    Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein the time indicator is controlled
    by the flow of a fluid or granular material due to gravity or by the
    movement of a solid body due to gravity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93,     for chronometric gravity-actuated timers, per se.


CLS 368/92
TXT With overtime indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 90 including an indicator which indicates an
    additional time interval which is representative of the time beyond the
    expiration of a previous time period.


CLS 368/93
TXT Gravity actuated type (e.g., hourglass):

    Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the time indicating part of the
    timepiece is controlled by the flow of a fluid or granular material due to
    gravity or by the movement of a solid body due to gravity.


CLS 368/94
TXT With alarm means:

    Subject matter under subclass 93 including attention-signalling means to
    indicate the expiration of a predetermined time interval.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for timepieces combined with external alarms.

    43,     for  timepieces  with  memorandum holder-controlled alarms.

    72,     for timepieces with plural simultaneous time indicators, one of
    which is an alarm type.

    98+     and 109, for time interval predetermined timing-alarm means.

    244+,   for timepiece alarms, per se.


CLS 368/95
TXT With special support means:

    Subject matter under subclass 93 including means to hold up the timer
    structure or housing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for chronological timepieces with significant casing or mounting
    support structure.

    276+,   for timepiece cases with mounting support structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 301+ for timepiece
    shipping or storage cases.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclasses 152 and 164-180 for
    timepiece carriers, e.g., watch bracelet.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 114+ for external supports for timepieces.


CLS 368/96
TXT With alternately operating indicators (e.g., chess clock):

    Subject matter under subclass 89 comprising a plurality of time indicators
    which operate by turns, i.e., when one timepiece is turned on, the others
    are turned off.


CLS 368/97
TXT With predetermined mechanical timing means: Subject matter under subclass
    89 wherein the timing means operates mechanically to time a preset time
    interval.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108+,   for predetermined electrical-timing means.

    243+,   especially 246, 247, 248, and 263, for repeat time signalling after
    a preset time interval.


CLS 368/98
TXT Including alarm means:

    Subject matter under subclass 97 including attention signalling means to
    indicate the expiration of the time interval.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94,     for gravity actuated timers with alarm means.

    109,    for electrical or electromechanical predetermined interval-alarm
    means.

    244+,   for timepiece alarms, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 231+ for clock radio combinations.


CLS 368/99
TXT With combined alarm and time motor:

    Subject matter under subclass 98 wherein the alarm train and the time train
    mechanisms have a common motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258     and 259, for timepiece alarms with combined alarm and time motors,
    per se.


CLS 368/100
TXT With cam controlled striker:

    Subject matter under subclass 98 wherein the alarm mechanism has a striking
    element which is regulated by a cam action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254     and 269+, for timepiece cam-controlled signalling means, per se.


CLS 368/101
TXT Mechanical stop time type:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the time interval timepiece is
    operated mechanically with mechanical means for stopping its time indicator
    at will or upon completion of an event of unknown duration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110+,   for electrical or electromechanical, mechanically-actuated stop
    time timepieces.

    113+,   for electrical or electromechanical stop time timepieces.


CLS 368/102
TXT With plural second hands (e.g., split-seconds):

    Subject matter under subclass 101 including timers with more than one
    second hand for indicating different time intervals.


CLS 368/103
TXT With pivoted coupler:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 including pivoted-coupling means between
    the start/stop mechanisms and their time trains.


CLS 368/104
TXT With sliding coupler:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 including sliding-coupling means between
    the start/stop mechanisms and their time trains.


CLS 368/105
TXT With positive stop:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 including means for stopping the timer by
    placing a lever or brake against or in the path of one of the timer's
    moving parts.


CLS 368/106
TXT With reset means:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 including means for returning the time
    indicator(s) to zero, or an original start position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    for electrically operated, mechanically-actuated stop time
    timepieces with reset means.


CLS 368/107
TXT Electrical or electromechanical:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the timing means operates by
    electrical or electromechanical means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89+,    especially 97+ and 101+ for mechanically-operated time
    interval-timing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 1+ for miscellaneous phase or time discriminating
    circuits, subclasses 141+ for miscellaneous synchronizing circuits,
    subclasses 231+ for miscellaneous phase shift circuits, subclasses 263+ for
    miscellaneous delay circuits, and subclasses 291+ for miscellaneous pulse
    or clock waveform generation.

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 61+ and 73+ for systems in which the
    time interval between transmission and reception of a returned radio wave
    is determined.  Those systems determine, for example, the distance or range
    of an object from the transmission-reception station.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, for pulse counters and pulse counting systems
    especially subclass 20 for pulse counters used for measuring time combined
    with measurement of another parameter.


CLS 368/108
TXT For predetermined interval:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the timing means times a preset
    time interval.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97,     for predetermined mechanical-timing means.

    243+,   especially 246, 247, 248, and 263, for repeat time signalling after
    a preset time interval.


CLS 368/109
TXT Including alarm means:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 including attention signalling means to
    indicate the expiration of the time interval.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98+,    for predetermined mechanical-timing means with an alarm.

    244+,   for timepiece alarms, per se.


CLS 368/110
TXT Mechanically actuated stop time type:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein mechanical means is provided for
    stopping a timepiece indicator at will or upon the completion of a
    particular event of intially unknown duration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101+,   for mechanically operated, mechanical stop time timing means.

    113+,   for electrically or electromechanically operated, electrical-timing
    means.


CLS 368/111
TXT With electronic memory storage:

    Subject matter under subclass 110 including means to electronically store
    time interval information.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251,    for time piece-signalling means with electronic memory storage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, for electronic storage
    and retrieval of information, per se; subclasses 185.01+ for floating gate
    memory storage (e.g., flash memory).


CLS 368/112
TXT With reset means:

    Subject matter under subclass 110 including means for returning the
    timepiece indicator to zero, or to an original start position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    for mechanically operated, mechanical stop time timers with reset
    means.


CLS 368/113
TXT Stop time type:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein electrical or electromechanical
    means is provided for stopping a timepiece indicator upon completion of an
    event of initially unknown duration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101+,   for mechanically operated, mechanical stop time timing means.

    110+,   for electrically or electromechanically operated mechanical stop
    time timing means.


CLS 368/114
TXT With physically changeable element:

    Subject matter under subclass 113 including means with a nonelectrical
    characteristic alterable by the time signal or during the time interval,
    which characteristic indicates by the degree of its alteration the length
    of the time interval.

    (1)     Note.  An example of the subject matter of this subclass is an
    electrolytic cell from which the duration of a time interval is determined
    by measuring the quantity of the deposit of a metal element from the
    electrolyte brought about a flow of current through the   electrolyte
    during the time interval to be determined.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 400+ for
    electrolytic analysis and testing apparatus.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 501 for condition responsive
    indicator for particular system function.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process, subclasses 61+ for control means responsive to an electrolytic
    cell sensor; and subclasses 90+ for means to measure and test an
    electrolytic cell.


CLS 368/115
TXT Including cathode-ray tube oscilloscope:

    Subject matter under subclass 113 having a cathode-ray tube visual display
    either as the ultimate-indicating means or as an auxiliary or
    intermediate-indicating means.

    (1)     Note.  The intermediate-indicating means may consist of a
    cathode-ray tube display device whose display is sensed or "read" by
    photocells.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 1+ for
    cathode-ray tube systems in general.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 121 for measuring,
    testing, or sensing electricity, per se, with a cathode-ray tube.

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, subclasses 226+ for
    radiation marking using cathode-ray tube, subclasses 121+ for
    electrostatic marking using electron beam with an air tight envelope.


CLS 368/116
TXT With brightner means:

    Subject matter under subclass 115 having means to increase the light
    intensity of certain portions of the visual display with respect to another
    portions of the visual display.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 383+ for
    cathode-ray sweep circuitry in general with ray intensity control means;
    and subclass 30 for cathode-ray tube, ray modulation circuitry.


CLS 368/117
TXT With variable delay means:

    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein means is provided to displace to
    selective extents in time the signal or a portion of the signal, or
    signals, representative of the interval to be measured.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a portion of an interval signal is the "stop"
    pulse of a "start-stop" pair of pulses.


CLS 368/118
TXT Including time base oscillator:

    Subject matter under subclass 113 including means generating a periodic or
    periodically varying electric signal whose period represents a unit
    interval of time.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, systems in which the
    oscillation of fixed frequency oscillators are counted during the interval
    being measured.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139+    and 155+, for timepiece time bases, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 79 for apparatus
    which compare the frequency or period of one signal with that of another
    signal.

    331,    Oscillators, for oscillators in general; and especially subclasses
    111+, 129+, and 143+ for relaxation oscillators.


CLS 368/119
TXT Plural:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 having two or more periodic or
    periodically varying signal generating means with the periods of the
    signals of at least two of the generating means representing unit intervals
    of time.

    (1)     Note.  The unit intervals generated by the plural generating means
    of this subclass need not be of equal duration. An example of time
    measuring means including plural generators of signals having different
    periods is the "vernier" type of time measuring means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 37+ for beat frequency oscillators; and
    subclasses 46+ for plural oscillators.


CLS 368/120
TXT Including delay means:

    Subject matter under subclass 113 wherein means are provided to displace in
    time the signal or a portion of the signal representative of the interval
    to be measured, for example, the "start" portion of a "start-stop" pair of
    pulses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for time-measuring means including cathode-ray tube oscilloscopes
    in combination with delay means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 141+ for miscellaneous synchronizing circuits,
    subclasses 231+ for miscellaneous phase shift circuits, and subclasses 263+
    for miscellaneous delay circuits.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 138-140 for
    passive delay networks, per se.


CLS 368/121
TXT Including time indicating means actuated by voltage or electrical charge:

    Subject matter under subclass 113 having indicating means, usually as the
    ultimate elapsed time indicator, responsive to a voltage or electrical
    charge representative of said elapsed time.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of indicators of this subclass type are:
    conventional volmeters, ammeters, and ballistic galvanometers.  These
    meters, in many cases, are calibrated in horological units instead of the
    electrical quantities to which they actually respond.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 1+ for miscellaneous signal discriminating circuits.


CLS 368/122
TXT With null indicator having variable circuit element:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the voltage or electrical charge
    indicator indicates a state of zero voltage or electrical charge, and
    variable means is provided to establish said state, the amount of variation
    of said variable means providing a measure of the time interval.


CLS 368/123
TXT With vacuum-tube voltmeter:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the means to indicate the voltage
    or electrical charge is a high-impedance meter including a space discharge
    device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 76.11+, especially
    123+ for vacuum tube voltmeters, per se.


CLS 368/124
TXT ESCAPEMENTS:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising that portion of a
    timing device which measures beats and controls the speed of the device's
    time train.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 1.5 for escapements, per se.

    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, or Animal Powered, subclasses 5, 31, and
    38 for escapement controlled weight or spring power motors.


CLS 368/125
TXT With oscillating or reciprocating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 124 including means which move to-and-fro or
    vibrates as part of the movement of a timepiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157+    and 160+, for electrical time base oscillating or reciprocating
    elements.

    168+,   for timepiece designated oscillating or reciprocating means, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 15+ and 36+ for
    dynamoelectric reciprocating or oscillating means.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 119+ for
    reciprocating or oscillating motor, per se.


CLS 368/126
TXT Magnetic type:

    Subject matter under subclass 125 wherein the oscillating or reciprocating
    means interacts with the escapement through a magnetic means carried by the
    oscillating or reciprocating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163,    for electrical time base for balance wheel carrying magnetic means.


CLS 368/127
TXT Balance wheel type:

    Subject matter under subclass 125 wherein the oscillating means is a wheel
    or wheellike member for regulating the beats of a timepiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158     and 161+, for electrical time bases with balance wheel-type
    oscillating elements.

    169+,   for balance wheel-type oscillating for timepieces, per se.


CLS 368/128
TXT With motion conversion drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein the oscillating motion of the
    balance is used to impel an element to rotating or rectilinear movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135,    for escapements with pendulum-type motion conversion drive means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 20+ and 37 for
    dynamoelectric oscillating or reciprocating motion converting mechanisms.


CLS 368/129
TXT Carrying impulse receiving means:

    Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein the balance wheel-type mechanism
    supports means for receiving short, impelling forces from an escapement.


CLS 368/130
TXT On balance shaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein the balance wheel and the
    impulses means are commonly mounted on the same rod or bar element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225+,   for balance wheel staff details.


CLS 368/131
TXT With pallet lock:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 including pallet means which
    intermittently lock and receive impulses from the escapement and transmit
    the impulses to the balance shaft.


CLS 368/132
TXT With levers:

    Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein interaction between the
    escapement and the balance wheel means is accomplished by means of at least
    two levers, one or more attached to or carrying pallets and another, in the
    form of a roller with a pin projecting from its face, attached to the
    balance means staff.


CLS 368/133
TXT In straight-line configuration:

    Subject matter under subclass 132 having the arbors of the balance wheel
    means, the escapement wheel means and the escapement lever in a straight
    line.


CLS 368/134
TXT Pendulum type:

    Subject matter under subclass 125 wherein the oscillating means is a body
    so suspended from a fixed point so as to move to-and-fro by the force of
    gravity and acquired momentum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165+,   for electrical time bases with pendulum-type oscillating elements.

    179+,   for pendulum-type oscillating for timepieces, per se.


CLS 368/135
TXT With motion conversion drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 wherein the oscillating motion of the
    pendulum is used to impel an element to rotating or rectilinear movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128,    for balance wheel-type escapements with motion conversion drive.

    135,    for escapements with pendulum-type motion conversion drive means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 20+ and 37 for
    dynamoelectric oscillating or reciprocating motion converting mechanisms.


CLS 368/136
TXT With gravity actuation:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 wherein impulse is given to the pendulum
    by falling weights.


CLS 368/137
TXT With beat adjuster:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 including means to regulate the
    oscillation of the pendulum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181+,   for regulating pendulum-type oscillating means, per se.


CLS 368/138
TXT Having a verge:

    Subject matter under subclass 137 including means comprising a lever with
    lips or projections which intermittently lock the escape wheel and transmit
    impulses from the escape wheel to the pendulum.


CLS 368/139
TXT MECHANICAL TIME BASE:

    Subject matter under the class definition including mechanically-powered
    means for providing impulses to the beat measuring time indicator control
    portion of a timepiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155,    for timepiece electrical timepieces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, or Animal Powered, subclasses 27+ and 37+
    for weight and spring-powered motors.


CLS 368/140
TXT Mainspring:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein the mechanical power supply is a
    spring which is designated for use as the principal motive power in a
    timepiece.


CLS 368/141
TXT With protection means:

    Subject matter under subclass 140 including means to prevent damage to the
    mainspring area of the timepiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286+,   for timepiece cases with protection means.

    326,    for balance staff-protection means.


CLS 368/142
TXT With mainwheel on barrel:

    Subject matter under subclass 140 including a mainwheel attached to a
    mainspring barrel.


CLS 368/143
TXT With mainwheel on arbor:

    Subject matter under subclass 140 including a mainwheel attached to a
    mainspring arbor.


CLS 368/144
TXT With attachment means for spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 140 including means connecting the mainspring
    to another part of a timepiece structure.


CLS 368/145
TXT With winding and setting:

    Subject matter under subclass 140 including means to impart energy to the
    mainspring as well as means to adjust the timepiece display to a desired
    condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    190+,   for timepiece winding and setting means, per se.


CLS 368/146
TXT Stem:

    Subject matter under subclass 145 wherein the winding and setting means
    include a manually manipulatable control element, usually cylindrically
    shaped, which projects to the exterior of the timepiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    190+,   for timepiece regulating by stem setting and winding means.

    216,    for timepiece stem winding, per se.

    288+,   for timepiece cases with stem protection means.

    306+    and 308, for timepiece cases with stem details.

    319,    for timepiece stem details, per se.


CLS 368/147
TXT With winding:

    Subject matter under subclass 140 including means for imparting energy to
    the mainspring through a coiling or turning process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206+,   for timepiece winding, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclass 7.5 for watchmakers mainspring winding tools.


CLS 368/148
TXT Self:

    Subject matter under subclass 147 including means to automatically wind the
    mainspring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207+,   for timepiece self-winding means, per se.


CLS 368/149
TXT Electric:

    Subject matter under subclass 148 wherein the automatic means has an
    electrical circuit or component.


CLS 368/150
TXT Weight control:

    Subject matter under subclass 149 wherein a body is moved to provide energy
    transfer to the mainspring.


CLS 368/151
TXT Spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 148 wherein the automatic means further
    includes a secondary spring for controlling the mainspring.


CLS 368/152
TXT Gravity:

    Subject matter under subclass 147 including a falling weight for providing
    energy.


CLS 368/153
TXT Case controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 147 including means on a housing to provide
    or regulate the energy, e.g., a rotatable rim or ringlike member.


CLS 368/154
TXT With spring click:

    Subject matter under subclass 140 including means which is both a spring
    and a clicking mechanism.


CLS 368/155
TXT ELECTRICAL TIME BASE:

    Subject matter under the class definition including electrically-powered
    means for providing impulses or pulses to the beat measuring time indicator
    control portion of a timepiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139+,   for timepiece mechanical time bases.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 119+ for electrical
    reciprocating or oscillating motors.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 569
    and 705.07+ for electronic computational time measuring.


CLS 368/156
TXT Solid-state oscillating circuit type:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 wherein the time base includes an
    oscillating circuit containing solid-state electrical elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 107+ for solid- state oscillating circuits,
    per se.


CLS 368/157
TXT For reciprocating or oscillating element:

    Subject matter under subclass 156 wherein the oscillating circuit controls
    the actuation of a reciprocating or oscillating element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125+,   for timepiece escapements with oscillating or reciprocating means.

    160+,   for electrical time bases of the nonsolid-state oscillating circuit
    type for reciprocating or oscillating elements.

    168+,   for timepiece-designated oscillating or reciprocating means, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 15+ and 36+ for
    dynamoelectric reciprocating or oscillating means.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 119+ for
    reciprocating or oscillating motor, per se.


CLS 368/158
TXT Balance wheel type:

    Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the element is a wheel for
    regulating the beats of a timepiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127+,   for balance wheel-type escapements.

    161+,   for nonsolid-state oscillating circuit- type time bases with
    balance-wheel means.

    169+,   for timepiece oscillating or reciprocating means having
    balance-wheel means.


CLS 368/159
TXT Crystal:

    Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the element is a crystal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 116+ for solid- state oscillators
    controlling electromechanical resonators.


CLS 368/160
TXT For reciprocating or oscillating element:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 wherein the electrical power supply
    actuates a reciprocating or oscillating element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125+,   for timepiece escapements with oscillating or reciprocating means.

    157+,   for electrical time bases of the solid- state oscillating-circuit
    type for reciprocating or oscillating elements.

    168+,   for timepiece designated oscillating or reciprocating means, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 15+ and 36+ for
    dynamoelectric reciprocating or oscillating means.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 119+ for
    reciprocating or oscillating motor, per se.


CLS 368/161
TXT Balance wheel type:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein the element is a wheel for
    regulating the beats of timepieces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127+,   for balance wheel type-escapements.

    158,    for solid-state, electrical, balance wheel type time base.

    169+,   for balance wheel type-oscillating means for timepieces.

    325+,   for balance wheel staff details.


CLS 368/162
TXT With coil:

    Subject matter under subclass 161 wherein at least one coil is on the
    balance wheel.


CLS 368/163
TXT With magnet:

    Subject matter under subclass 161 wherein at least one magnet is on the
    balance wheel.


CLS 368/164
TXT With opening and closing of contacts:

    Subject matter under subclass 161 wherein the balance wheel opens and
    closes an electrical contact.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 134 for motive power
    systems having reciprocating or oscillating motors wherein the winding
    energization is controlled by circuit making and breaking devices.


CLS 368/165
TXT Pendulum:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein the element is a pendulum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134+,   for pendulum-type escapements.

    179+,   for pendulum-type oscillating means  for timepieces.


CLS 368/166
TXT With drive means control:

    Subject matter under subclass 165 wherein the means to impel an element is
    regulated by the pendulum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181+,   for pendulum-type oscillating means with regulation, per se.


CLS 368/167
TXT Tuning fork:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein the element is a tuning fork.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    for escapements having a tuning fork.

    168,    for timepiece tuning forks, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 25 for tuning
    fork-type motor structure.


CLS 368/168
TXT OSCILLATING OR RECIPROCATING MEANS:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means designed to be
    moved to-and-for or vibrated as part of the movement of a timepiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125+,   for escapements having oscillating or reciprocating means.

    157+    and 160+, for electrical time bases with oscillating or
    reciprocating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 15+ and 36+ for
    dynamoelectric reciprocating or oscillating means.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 119+ for
    reciprocating or oscillating motor, per se.


CLS 368/169
TXT Balance wheel type:

    Subject matter under subclass 168 wherein the oscillating means is a wheel
    or wheellike means for regulating the beats of a timepiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127+,   for escapements with balance wheel- type oscillating means.

    158+    and 161+, for electrical time bases with balance wheel-type
    oscillating elements.


CLS 368/170
TXT With regulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 169 including means to control the operation
    of the balance wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184+,   for regulation of timepiece operation, per se.


CLS 368/171
TXT By compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 170 including means to make up for or offset
    unwanted variations in the oscillation or reciprocation of the balance
    wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202,    for regulation of timepieces by compensation, per se.


CLS 368/172
TXT By rack and pinion:

    Subject matter under subclass 170 wherein the balance wheel is regulated by
    means which include a bar with teeth adapted to engage with the teeth of a
    cog wheel.


CLS 368/173
TXT By screw:

    Subject matter under subclass 170 wherein the regulation is accomplished by
    means varied by screw adjustment.


CLS 368/174
TXT With spring bias:

    Subject matter under subclass 173 wherein the screw means is influenced by
    a spring.


CLS 368/175
TXT By hairspring:

    Subject matter under subclass 170 comprising a coiled spring which is used
    to control the balance wheel movement.


CLS 368/176
TXT With curb pins:

    Subject matter under subclass 175 including pin-restraining means, which,
    in conjunction with the hairspring, serve to regulate the motion of the
    balance wheel.


CLS 368/177
TXT With collet:

    Subject matter under subclass 175 including means attaching the inner end
    of the hairspring to the balance staff.


CLS 368/178
TXT With stud:

    Subject matter under subclass 175 including means to support the outer end
    of the hairspring.


CLS 368/179
TXT Pendulum type:

    Subject matter under subclass 168 including a suspended body (e.g., bob)
    reciprocating by gravity and momentum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134+,   for pendulum-type timepiece escapements.

    165+,   for electrical time base pendulum elements.


CLS 368/180
TXT Torsion:

    Subject matter under subclass 179 wherein a spring or rod receives a
    twisting strain in order to oscillate a bob.


CLS 368/181
TXT With regulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 179 including means to adjust the operation
    of the pendulum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137+,   for escapements with pendulum beat adjustment.

    184+,   for timepiece regulation, per se.


CLS 368/182
TXT By thermal compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 181 having means for automatically correcting
    errors in length due to temperature changes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171,    for compensating means involving balance wheel-type oscillating
    means.

    202,    for timepiece regulation for compensation, per se.


CLS 368/183
TXT With lock:

    Subject matter under subclass 179 having means to prevent the oscillating
    or reciprocating motion of the pendulum.


CLS 368/184
TXT REGULATING MEANS:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means intergral to a
    timepiece to control the timekeeping operation of the timepiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137+,   for pendulum escapements with beat adjustment means.

    170+,   for balance wheel-type oscillating with regulation.

    181+,   for pendulum-type oscillating or reciprocating with regulation.


CLS 368/185
TXT For setting:

    Subject matter under subclass 184 including means to put timepiece means
    into proper position, order, or condition for use, and/or including means
    to adjust timepiece-indicating means in accordance with a time standard or
    estimate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31+     and 34+, for timepiece with calendar indicator setting.

    49+,    for plural timepiece system-setting means.

    74,     for chronological timepiece alarm setting.

    106     and 112, for time interval timepiece reset means.

    145+,   for timepiece mainspring setting.

    243+,   for striking and alarm mechanism setting.

    266,    for let-off setting.

    275,    for deactivation means during setting.


CLS 368/186
TXT With rate regulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 185 including means to influence or change
    the operating speed of the timepiece movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137+,   for timepiece pendulum escapements with beat-adjustment means.

    200+,   for timepiece frequency or beat-adjustment means, per se.


CLS 368/187
TXT By electrical device actuation:

    Subject matter under subclass 185 wherein the setting means is operated by
    an electrical device (e.g., switch).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69+     and 224+, for timepiece manual display activation wherein the
    activation means is an electrical switch.

    321,    for electrical switch details for timepieces, per se.


CLS 368/188
TXT With single actuation and plural pulses:

    Subject matter under subclass 187 wherein a single actuation of the setting
    means enables multiple pulse signals.

    (1)     Note.  For example, in setting a digital watch, a button is pushed
    to allow plural pulses to speed the watch display means to the desired
    setting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for sequential presentation of chronological time data from
    timepieces having manually activated displays.


CLS 368/189
TXT With pulse blocking means:

    Subject matter under subclass 187 wherein the setting means stops a train
    of pulse signals.

    (1)     Note.  For example, in setting a watch which is running ahead of
    time, a button is pushed which blocks pulses to the watch display to slow
    down or stop the watch, until the correct time is reached.


CLS 368/190
TXT By winding means (e.g., stem):

    Subject matter under subclass 85 wherein the setting means is used to
    adjust the timepiece for operation by some turning or coiling process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31+     and 33, for timepiece calendar winding.

    49+,    for plural timepiece system winding.

    74,     for winding of chronological timepieceshaving an alarm.

    145+    and 147+, for timepiece mainspring- winding means, per se.

    206+,   for timepiece-winding means, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclass 7.5 for watchmakers mainspring winding tools.

    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, or Animal Powered, subclasses 6+, 10+,
    32+, and 39+ for spring or weight motor winding.


CLS 368/191
TXT Having a clutch:

    Subject matter under subclass 190 wherein the setting means includes a
    two-piece mechanism comprising two coaxially-mounted means, one of which
    slidably engages the other for coupling or decoupling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32      and 36, for timepiece calendar setting with clutch coupling.


CLS 368/192
TXT With lever engagement:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein a bar is used to control shifting
    of the clutch.


CLS 368/193
TXT Coupling:

    Subject matter under subclass 192 including particular means for attaching
    the lever to the clutch.


CLS 368/194
TXT To notch in stem:

    Subject matter under subclass 193 wherein the coupling lever is also
    attached to a cut or indentation in a stem used for winding or setting.


CLS 368/195
TXT With coupling spring biased:

    Subject matter under subclass 194 wherein a spring engages the lever toward
    the notched stem.


CLS 368/196
TXT Having a movable plate:

    Subject matter under subclass 190 wherein the connection between the
    winding or setting train and the means for putting either or both into
    operation is made by a flat, pivoted, twin- coupling means adapted to mesh
    with pinion means of either train.


CLS 368/197
TXT With double gear:

    Subject matter under subclass 196 wherein the movable plate has two gears,
    one at each end for coupling with the winding or setting train.


CLS 368/198
TXT Cam engagement:

    Subject matter under subclass 197 wherein the movable plate is moved into
    engagement with the winding or setting train by a cam or camlike device.


CLS 368/199
TXT Lever engagement:

    Subject matter under subclass 197 wherein the movable plate is moved into
    engagement with the winding or setting train by a bar or bar-like device.


CLS 368/200
TXT For adjusting the frequency or beat:

    Subject matter under subclass 184 comprising means to control the rate of
    regularly recurring events in the operation of a timepiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217,    for pulse-transforming means for timepieces.


CLS 368/201
TXT Of frequency divider:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 comprising means for delivering an output
    which is an integral submultiple or proper fraction of the input frequency.


CLS 368/202
TXT For compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 184 comprising means to counterbalance or
    offset changes in conditions which affect the operation of a timepiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171,    for balance-wheel type compensating regulation.

    181+,   for pendulum-type compensating regulation.


CLS 368/203
TXT POWER SUPPLY DETAILS:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a source of energy
    means for furnishing motive force to timekeeping means, or means which
    house or hold the energy source within the timekeeping means enclosure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48      and 64, for timing means with an auxiliary or supplemental power
    source.


CLS 368/204
TXT Electrical:

    Subject matter under subclass 203 wherein the power supplied is electrical.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process, subclasses 96+ for support for removable electrical cell (i.e.,
    batteries).


CLS 368/205
TXT Solar cell:

    Subject matter under subclass 204 wherein solar energy is stored as
    electrical energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclasses 243+ for
    solar cells, per se.


CLS 368/206
TXT WINDING MEANS:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means for imparting
    energy to a timepiece through a coiling or turning process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31+     and 33, for timepiece calendar winding.

    49+,    for plural timepiece winding.

    74,     for winding of chronological timepieces having an alarm.

    145+    and 147+, for timepiece mainspring-winding means.

    190+,   for timepiece regulating with combined setting and winding means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclass 7.5 for watchmakers mainspring winding tools.

    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, or Animal Powered, subclasses 6+, 10+,
    32+, and 39+ for spring or weight motor winding.


CLS 368/207
TXT Self:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 including means for accomplishing the
    winding automatically.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148,    for timepiece mainspring self-winding.


CLS 368/208
TXT Inertia:

    Subject matter under subclass 207 including an oscillating or vibrating
    body which receives kinetic energy via external motion.


CLS 368/209
TXT With overwind prevention:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 including means to keep the winding means
    from being wound beyond its limits.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141,    for timepiece mainspring-protection means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, or Animal Powered, subclasses 13, 35, and
    43 for spring or weight motor overwind prevention.


CLS 368/210
TXT With condition indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 including means for showing the degree to
    which the timepiece is wound or for indicating the need for winding the
    timepiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249,    for timepiece-signalling means condition indicators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, or Animal Powered, subclasses 14, 36, and
    44 for weight and spring motor winding condition indicators.


CLS 368/211
TXT Audio:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein a sounding means is employed as
    the indicator.


CLS 368/212
TXT Pointer and scale:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein a device which points to scale
    indicia is the indicator.


CLS 368/213
TXT For cranked lever:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 wherein the energy is imparted to means
    for actuating an oscillating or vibrating bar with a crank attachment to
    power the timepiece.


CLS 368/214
TXT Key:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 including a device which fits to an end
    of a shaft to aid in winding.


CLS 368/215
TXT Rim:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 including a rotatable ringlike member
    which is a part of the periphery or outer surface of the timepiece.


CLS 368/216
TXT Stem:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 wherein the winding means includes a
    cylindrical shaft projecting from the timepiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146,    for mainspring stem winding and setting, and see the search notes
    thereunder.


CLS 368/217
TXT PULSE TRANSFORMING MEANS:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means to change pulse
    characteristics as supplied by a time base.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85+,    for chronological timepieces with  pulse-transforming means.

    155+,   for electrical time bases having pulse- transforming means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 100+ for miscellaneous pulse shaping, converting, or
    generating.


CLS 368/218
TXT With transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 217 wherein the transforming means includes a
    transistor circuit or device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86+,    for chronological transistorized pulse- transforming means.

    156+,   for electrical time bases having transistorized pulse-transforming
    means.


CLS 368/219
TXT Field-effect transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 218 wherein the transistor is a field effect
    transisitor.


CLS 368/220
TXT DISPLAY TRAINS:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to trains of gearing
    which transmit motion to timepiece indicators.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223+,   for timepiece display details.

    243+,   for timepiece-signalling means.


CLS 368/221
TXT For rotatable disk dial type:

    Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein the timepiece indicators driven
    by the train to turn round an axis are flat, round shaped, platelike
    objects.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     35+, 37+, 77, and 233, for timepiece rotating disk displays.


CLS 368/222
TXT For drum or plate dial type:

    Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein the timepiece indicators driven
    by the train are cylindrically shaped objects or cylinders with plane
    objects pivotally attached thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     39, 78, and 235, for timepieces with drum or plate displays.


CLS 368/223
TXT DISPLAYS OR DISPLAY DEVICE DETAILS:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising indicator means
    associated with the indicator means used to convey or in conveying the time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243+,   for timepiece-signalling means, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 446+ for changing
    exhibitors.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 200+ for indicators, per se.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 1+ for visual display systems
    with selective electrical control.

    346,    Recorders, appropriate subclasses for time measuring apparatus
    where the time-indicating means is a tracing, marking, or the like made by
    a recording instrument.


CLS 368/224
TXT With manual activation:

    Subject matter under subclass 223 wherein a switch or the like is manually
    operated to cause the display to perform according to design.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69+,    for chronological timepieces with manual actuation.

    101+    and 110+, for manually-actuated stop timers.


CLS 368/225
TXT By motion or position:

    Subject matter under subclass 224 wherein the activating means is operated
    by manual movement or orientation of the display means.


CLS 368/226
TXT With luminous material:

    Subject matter under subclass 223 wherein the indicator means is, at least
    in part, comprised of a fluorescent, phosphoresent or radioactive substance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239+,   for electro-optical timepiece displays, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 462.1+ especially subclasses 463.1+, for
    self-luminous dials, pointers, gauges and bands; and subclasses 483.1+ for
    luminescent devices not classified elsewhere.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 483+ for electric
    lamp and discharge devices with luminescent solid or liquid material.


CLS 368/227
TXT With auxiliary illumination for display:

    Subject matter under subclass 228 comprising an accessory for supplying
    light to the display.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for artificial lighting of world globe plural time zone timepieces.

    67,     for chronological timepieces with auxiliary lighting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 23+ for illumination of scales or dials,
    per se.  Also see search class notes under subclass 23 for other specific
    dial illuminaton.


CLS 368/228
TXT Dial or hand:

    Subject matter under subclass 223 comprising face means with time indicia
    located thereupon or pointer means for use in conjunction with said face
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     for chronological timepieces with mechanical or electromechanical
    drive for hand and dial display.

    102,    for stop time timepieces with plural second hands.


CLS 368/229
TXT With animation (e.g., motion clock):

    Subject matter under subclass 228 wherein at least part of the display is
    in the form of a figure which has lifelike movement during the operation of
    the display, for either timekeeping or entertainment/aesthetic functions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272+,   for "cuckoo-clock"-signalling means.


CLS 368/230
TXT For tactile time perception (e.g., braille clock):

    Subject matter under subclass 228 wherein the time indication is perceived
    by the sense of touch.


CLS 368/231
TXT With time indicia shifting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 228 wherein the face shows the hours up to
    twelve during the first rotation of the hands, after which the numerals are
    automatically changed to show hours from thirteen to twenty-four.


CLS 368/232
TXT Including dial details only:

    Subject matter under subclass 228 including features of timepiece faces.


CLS 368/233
TXT Of rotatable disk type:

    Subject matter under subclass 232 wherein the dial-display means includes
    at least one face (usually more than one), having time numerals or the like
    thereon, and is wheel-shaped, and rotates with respect to time-reference
    means, e.g., a painted line on a transparent cover, a window, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     35+, 37+, and 77, for timepieces with rotatable disk displays.

    222,    for rotatable disk dial trains.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 284+ for mechanically-rotatable
    dial indicators.


CLS 368/234
TXT Translucent:

    Subject matter under subclass 232 wherein the dial transmits any light
    shone through it, diffusely.


CLS 368/235
TXT Of drum of plate type:

    Subject matter under subclass 232 wherein the dial elements are
    cylindrically-shaped and rotate with respect to a time reference indicator,
    (e.g., window, fixed mark, etc.), or wherein planar elements are pivotally
    attached to cylindrically-shaped elements which rotate allowing the planar
    elements to sequentially indicate the time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     39, and 78, for timepieces with drum or plate displays.

    222,    for drum or plate-type dial trains.


CLS 368/236
TXT Of dial fasteners:

    Subject matter under subclass 232 with means for mounting or attaching the
    face.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    309+,   for timepiece cases with front or back details.

    314,    for timepiece cases with dial or sash securing means.


CLS 368/237
TXT Screw:

    Subject matter under subclass 236 wherein the mounting or attaching means
    is a screw.


CLS 368/238
TXT Including hand details only:

    Subject matter under subclass 228 comprising time indicator pointer
    features only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for memorandum holders with a pointer, controlled by a timepiece.

    81,     for chronological timepieces with a motor located in a hand.

    102,    for stop time, mechanical timepieces having plural second hands.

    253,    for timepiece-signalling means with an electrical contact on a hand.


CLS 368/239
TXT Optical:

    Subject matter under subclass 223 wherein the display includes means for
    projecting, reflecting, or transmitting, electrically produced visible
    radiation from or through time representative indicia.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29+,    for timepieces with calendar electro-optical indicators.

    79,     for chronological timepieces with mechanical or electromechanical
    driven optical display.

    82+,    for electronic timepieces with electro-optical display.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 447+ for
    electro-optical changing exhibitors; and subclass 448 for liquid crystal
    changing exhibitors.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 200+, especially subclasses 202
    and 250 for indicators with visual light signals.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 299.01+ for liquid crystal compositions,
    per se.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 13, 79-103, and 918 for incoherent light emitting injection
    luminescent devices, and subclasses 80-85 for semiconductor light emitting
    sources combined with semiconductor light responsive devices.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 483+ for solid
    material which produces radiant energy upon electrical excitation.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 815.4+ for electrical
    visual-signalling means with indicator means.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 1+ for visual display systems
    with selective electrical control.

    349,    Liquid Crystal Cells, Elements and Systems, appropriate subclasses
    and especially subclass 142 for optical systems and elements utilizing
    liquid crystal materials.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 23+ for artificial-light means for dials.


CLS 368/240
TXT With circular pattern of light sources:

    Subject matter under subclass 239 wherein the indicating means is arranged
    in a ring or rings.


CLS 368/241
TXT With solid body light emitter (e.g., LED):

    Subject matter under subclass 239 wherein the indicating means is comprised
    of solid material which emits visible radiation upon application of an
    electrical current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83,     for chronological timepieces with solid body light emitters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 13, 79-103 and 918 for incoherent light emitting injection
    luminescent devices, and subclasses 80-85 for semiconductor light emitting
    sources combined with semiconductor light responsive devices.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 483+ for solid
    material which produces radiant energy upon electrical excitation.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 39, 44+, and 82+ for solid
    body light-emitting display devices with selective electrical control.


CLS 368/242
TXT With liquid crystal display (i.e., LCD):

    Subject matter under subclass 239 wherein the indicating means is comprised
    of liquid crystal material which reflects or transmits visible radiation
    upon application of an electrical voltage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for timepieces with calendar information LCD display.

    84,     for chronological timepieces with LCD display.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 448 for liquid crystal
    changing exhibitors.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 299.01+ for liquid crystal compositions,
    per se.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 38, 50+, and 87+ for liquid
    crystal display devices with selective electrical control.

    349,    Liquid Crystal Cells, Elements and Systems, appropriate subclasses
    and especially subclass 142 for optical systems and elements utilizing
    liquid crystal materials.


CLS 368/243
TXT SIGNALLING MEANS:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means for calling
    attention to the system or device either periodically (e.g., hourly
    striking clock) or when a nonperiodic preset time is indicated by the
    system or device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223+,   for timepiece displays or display device details.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 206 for chemically-activated time
    indicators; and subclasses 22+ for automatic and periodic actuation of
    signals other than time.


CLS 368/244
TXT Time condition responsive (i.e., alarm):

    Subject matter under subclass 243 comprising signalling means, capable of
    being set to be actuated by a timepiece for any predetermined time or times.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for timepieces combined with external alarms.

    43,     for timepieces with memorandum holder-controlled alarm.

    72,     for timepieces with plural, simultaneous, time indicators, one of
    which is of an alarm type.

    94,     for time interval, gravity actuated- alarm means.

    98+,    for time interval predetermined mechanical-timing alarm means.

    109,    for time interval predetermined electrical-timing alarm means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+ for timepiece control
    of alarms.


CLS 368/245
TXT With variable loudness or tone:

    Subject matter under subclass 244 having variations in the sounds produced
    by an acoustic- signalling means.


CLS 368/246
TXT With same day plural time selection:

    Subject matter under subclass 244 wherein means is provided to enable the
    setting of several different predetermined time-of-day times for the
    actuation of the alarm.


CLS 368/247
TXT For more than one day (e.g., eight-day clock):

    Subject matter under subclass 244 wherein the alarm means is associated
    with a timepiece which will operate for a time period longer than a day
    with the alarm means actuated each day at the time for which it has been
    set.


CLS 368/248
TXT With automatic repetition over short interval:

    Subject matter under subclass 244 including means to automatically actuate
    the alarm means several time with short intervals between actuations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263,    for alarm means having shut-off means which reactivate the alarm
    after a short period of time.


CLS 368/249
TXT With signal condition indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 244 including means to display alarm status
    information such as "on-off", "A.M. - P.M." etc.


CLS 368/250
TXT Electrical:

    Subject matter under subclass 244 wherein the alarm means is operated
    electrically.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109,    for predetermined electrical-timing alarm means.


CLS 368/251
TXT With electronic memory storage:

    Subject matter under subclass 250 including means to electronically store
    information relating to the actuation of the alarm means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111,    for mechanically-actuated stop time, time interval timers with
    electronic memory storage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, for electronic storage
    and retrieval of information, per se; subclasses 185.01+ for floating gate
    memory storage (e.g., flash memory).


CLS 368/252
TXT With contact on a circle:

    Subject matter under subclass 250 wherein the circuit to be connected to
    the alarm is in the form of a circle with connection means for completing
    the circuit located at any point of the circumference.


CLS 368/253
TXT With contact on a hand:

    Subject matter under subclass 250 wherein the circuit to be connected to
    the alarm is established through connection means located on a time
    indicator hand.


CLS 368/254
TXT With cam control:

    Subject matter under subclass 250 wherein activation of the alarm is
    regulated by a cam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    269+,   for timepiece cam-controlled-signalling means, per se.


CLS 368/255
TXT With piezoelectric means:

    Subject matter under subclass 250 wherein the alarm means is at least
    partly comprised of material which when subjected to mechanical stress
    produces a voltage, or when subjected to a voltage undergoes mechanical
    stress.


CLS 368/256
TXT With optical signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 250 wherein the alarm is a visible light
    signal.


CLS 368/257
TXT With mechanical let-off:

    Subject matter under subclass 250 wherein the alarm circuit is closed by
    means set in operation by a mechanical trigger or the like.


CLS 368/258
TXT Having alarm winding arbor:

    Subject matter under subclass 257 wherein the let-off is operated by
    movement of the winding arbor when an alarm train is activated.


CLS 368/259
TXT With combined alarm and time motor:

    Subject matter under subclass 250 wherein the timepiece motive power supply
    is also the alarm motive power supply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    260,    for similar subject matter with mechanical motors.


CLS 368/260
TXT With combined alarm and time motor:

    Subject matter under subclass 244 wherein the timepiece motive power supply
    is also the alarm motive power supply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259,    for similar subject matter with electrical motors.


CLS 368/261
TXT Plural:

    Subject matter under subclass 244 having more than one signalling means.


CLS 368/262
TXT With shutoff:

    Subject matter under subclass 244 including means for stopping the alarm.


CLS 368/263
TXT For short period:

    Subject matter under subclass 262 including means initiated by activation
    of the shutoff mechanism for reactivating the alarm after a short time
    interval.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248,    for automatic alarm actuation several times over short intervals.


CLS 368/264
TXT Having spring wind release:

    Subject matter under subclass 262 including means to release the shutoff
    mechanism upon winding the time or alarm spring of the timepiece.


CLS 368/265
TXT With let-off:

    Subject matter under subclass 244 wherein the alarm means is set in
    operation by a mechanical trigger or the like.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257,    for timepiece electrical alarm with mechanical let-off.


CLS 368/266
TXT Setting:

    Subject matter under subclass 265 including means for priming the let-off
    mechanism.


CLS 368/267
TXT Repeat:

    Subject matter under subclass 243 including means to reactivate the
    signalling means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248,    for automatic repeating timepiece alarms.


CLS 368/268
TXT Double snail:

    Subject matter under subclass 267 wherein the reactivation means include at
    least two spiral or volute shaped cams.


CLS 368/269
TXT Cam controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein the signalling means is activated
    through an eccentric wheel or the like motion conversion element.


CLS 368/270
TXT Snail:

    Subject matter under subclass 269 wherein the cam is spiral or volute
    shaped.


CLS 368/271
TXT Pin:

    Subject matter under subclass 269 wherein a pin is attached to the cam.


CLS 368/272
TXT Musical (e.g., "cuckoo-clock"):

    Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein the signalling means is a musical
    instrument or device including "cuckoo-clocks" and the like.


CLS 368/273
TXT Chimes:

    Subject matter under subclass 272 wherein the musical device operates
    percussively to produce harmonious sound.


CLS 368/274
TXT Recorded:

    Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein the signalling means is a
    recording playback device to reproduce prerecorded audio or visual material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     where the recorded material is in the form of human speech.


CLS 368/275
TXT With deactivation during setting:

    Subject matter under subclass 243 including means to disengage the striking
    means from other time indicators, such as hands, while setting those
    indicators.


CLS 368/276
TXT CASES:

    Subject matter under the class definition which includes specific means for
    inclosing or containing the works of a timepiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for chronological timepieces with significant casing structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 301+ for timepiece
    shipping or storage cases.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclasses 152 and 164-180 for
    timepiece carriers, e.g., watch bracelet.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 114+ for external supports for timepieces.


CLS 368/277
TXT Adaptable:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 including means to increase the modes of
    utility of a timepiece.

    (1)     Note.  For example, a case with means allowing a timepiece to be
    used either as a wristwatch or a wall clock.


CLS 368/278
TXT Combined with disparate device:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 including an additional device having a
    function other than that of keeping or measuring time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for timepieces combined with disparate devices.


CLS 368/279
TXT Ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 278 wherein the device is an article of
    jewelry, generally worn on a finger.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    63,     Jewelry, subclasses 1.1+ for combinations of rings with timepieces.


CLS 368/280
TXT Of particular material:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 wherein the case means is comprised of
    one or more significant substances.


CLS 368/281
TXT Wrist worn:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 including means designed for carrying the
    case upon the wrist of a user.


CLS 368/282
TXT With band or bracelet details:

    Subject matter under subclass 281 including significant details of the
    structure of the means for attaching the case to the wrist of the wearer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    63,     Jewelry, subclasses 3+ and 21+ for bracelets, per se, and watch and
    chain attachments.


CLS 368/283
TXT With a cover:

    Subject matter under subclass 281 including means to envelope or screen the
    front or dial opening portion of the case.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    309+,   for timepiece case front or back details.


CLS 368/284
TXT With tubular shape:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 wherein the case is cylindrical in form
    and usually greater in length than in diameter.


CLS 368/285
TXT With ornamentation:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 including decorative attachments or
    details used to enhance the appearance of the case.


CLS 368/286
TXT With protection means:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 including means associated with the case
    to prevent injury or damage to the timepiece.


CLS 368/287
TXT Shock absorbing:

    Subject matter under subclass 286 including means to lessen the effects of
    a blow or an impact to the case.


CLS 368/288
TXT For crown or stem:

    Subject matter under subclass 286 including protection means for winding or
    setting knob and shaft which protrudes from the case.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306+,   for pendant crown or stem details.

    308,    for timepiece cases with crown or stem details.

    319+,   for timepiece crown or stem details,  per se.


CLS 368/289
TXT By waterproofing:

    Subject matter under subclass 288 including means to render the crown or
    stem impervious to water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291+,   for timepiece case waterproofing, per se.


CLS 368/290
TXT Pushbutton stem type:

    Subject matter under subclass 289 wherein the crown or stem is a pushbutton.


CLS 368/291
TXT Waterproofing:

    Subject matter under subclass 286 including means to render the case
    impervious to water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    289+,   for timepiece case crown or stem waterproofing.


CLS 368/292
TXT Noncircular-type case:

    Subject matter under subclass 291 wherein the shape of the case is not
    round.


CLS 368/293
TXT Antimagnetic shielding:

    Subject matter under subclass 286 including means to protect the case or
    its works from magnetic influence.


CLS 368/294
TXT With bezel or crystal details:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 comprising characteristics of an
    internally grooved ring or rim for holding a rigid, transparent cover over
    the face of a timepiece or details of the rigid, transparent cover.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    314,    for dial or sash securing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 807 for means for mounting a crystal to a
    watch or clock.


CLS 368/295
TXT Of bezel only:

    Subject matter under subclass 294 including only the characteristics of the
    internally grooved ring or rim for holding the crystal.


CLS 368/296
TXT Of crystal only:

    Subject matter under subclass 294 including only the characteristics of the
    rigid, transparent cover which fits into the bezel.


CLS 368/297
TXT With details of center:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 comprising characteristics of the central
    movement-holding ring.


CLS 368/298
TXT Integral to front or back:

    Subject matter under subclass 297 wherein the central movement-holding ring
    is a part of the front or back of a timepiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    309+,   for timepiece cases with front or back details.


CLS 368/299
TXT With movement ring details:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 comprising characteristics of rings in
    the cases which are designed and designated to hold the movement of a
    timepiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300,    for means to secure a timepiece movement within a case.


CLS 368/300
TXT With movement securing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 comprising means to fasten the movement
    to the case.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    299,    for rings which hold a movement within a case.


CLS 368/301
TXT With pendant details:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 relating to the post attached to the case
    center, which receives the stem and bow and any atatchments (e.g., chain,
    clip, etc.) thereto.


CLS 368/302
TXT Bow:

    Subject matter under subclass 301 wherein affixed to the pendant is a ring
    generally used to suspend the timepiece, for example, as by a chain
    inserted through the ring and worn about the neck of the timepiece user.


CLS 368/303
TXT Fastener:

    Subject matter under subclass 302 including means to attach the bow to the
    pendant.


CLS 368/304
TXT Pin or screw:

    Subject matter under subclass 303 wherein the fastening means employs a pin
    or screw.


CLS 368/305
TXT Sleeve:

    Subject matter under subclass 303 wherein the fastening means employs a
    tubular element to fit over a rod or the like.


CLS 368/306
TXT Crown or stem:

    Subject matter under subclass 301 including the winding or setting knob and
    shaft which protrudes from the pendant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    288+,   for timepiece cases with protection for their crowns or stems.

    308,    for timepiece case crown or stem details.

    319+,   for timepiece crown or stem details, per se.


CLS 368/307
TXT Fastener:

    Subject matter under subclass 306 including means to attach the crown or
    stem to the pendant.


CLS 368/308
TXT With crown or stem details:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 including the winding or setting knob and
    shaft which protrudes from the case.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    288+,   for protection means for timepiece crowns or stems.

    306+,   for timepiece pendant crown or stem details.

    319+,   for timepiece crown or stem details, per se.


CLS 368/309
TXT With front or back details:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 comprising characteristics of the front
    or rear portions of a timepiece case.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    294+,   for timepiece case bezel or crystal details.


CLS 368/310
TXT Of screw-threading to case center:

    Subject matter under subclass 309 comprising front or back means for
    screwing the front or back to the central movement-holding ring.


CLS 368/311
TXT Of opening spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 309 relating to spring means by which the
    front or back of the case is opened.


CLS 368/312
TXT Cover connection:

    Subject matter under subclass 311 including means which join in the opening
    spring to the cover.


CLS 368/313
TXT Of hinge connection:

    Subject matter under subclass 309 relating to the movable joint whereby the
    front or back of the case is united to the center.


CLS 368/314
TXT With dial or sash securing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 including means for attaching the dial or
    dial holding ring to the case.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228+,   for timepiece dial details, per se.

    294+,   for timepiece cases with bezel or crystal details.


CLS 368/315
TXT With alarm or striking attachment:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 wherein audio or visual signalling means
    is fastened to the case.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243+,   for timepiece signalling means, per se.


CLS 368/316
TXT With support details:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 comprising details of the means to hold
    up or bear the weight of the case and its contents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for chronological timepieces with significant case support
    structure.


CLS 368/317
TXT Base:

    Subject matter under subclass 316 wherein the support means are connected
    to or a part of the bottom of the case.


CLS 368/318
TXT PLATE DETAILS:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to the frame or bridge
    to which the movement or works are secured.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for significant chronological timepiece mounting support structure.

    299     and 300, for movement securing means with timepiece casing means.


CLS 368/319
TXT CROWN OR STEM DETAILS:

    Subject matter under the class definition including particular details of
    the winding or setting knob and/or shaft which protrudes from the timepiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146,    for mainspring stem winding and setting; and see search notes
    thereunder.


CLS 368/320
TXT Switch or detent:

    Subject matter under subclass 319 including means to hold or lock the crown
    or stem into more than one position.


CLS 368/321
TXT Electrical:

    Subject matter under subclass 320 wherein each position of the crown or
    stem causes an electrical circuit to be completed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    187+,   for timepiece regulation by setting with an electrical switch.


CLS 368/322
TXT ARBOR AND PINION DETAILS:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising particular details of
    timepiece shaft and cogwheel arrangements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 231+ for assembling or disassembling of
    timepiece arbors and pinions.


CLS 368/323
TXT CANNON PINION DETAILS:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising particular details of
    a pinion frictionally placed on the center arbor by which time and dial
    trains are connected and having a long boss or pipe to which the
    minute-hand is attached.


CLS 368/324
TXT STAFF AND BEARING DETAILS:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising arbors, wheel
    spindles, or axles, and bearings therefor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143,    for mainspring with a mainwheel on an arbor.


CLS 368/325
TXT Balance:

    Subject matter under subclass 324 wherein the staff is a balance wheel
    staff.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130+,   for balance shafts carrying impulse receiving means.


CLS 368/326
TXT For protection (e.g., shock absorbing):

    Subject matter under subclass 325 comprising means for cushioning, or
    otherwise safeguarding parts of the timepiece associated with the balance
    staff and bearing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141,    for timepiece mainsprings with protection means.

    286+,   for timepiece cases with protection means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 301+ for protective
    packaging of timepieces for shipment or storage.


CLS 368/327
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition not elsewhere classifiable.


CLS 369/
TTL DYNAMIC INFORMATION STORAGE OR RETRIEVAL

CLS 369/
TXT

    I.      DEFINITION OF TERMS USED

    INFORMATION OR INFORMATION SIGNAL

    A time varying physical quantity representing desired intelligence, often
    an audible sound or an electrical signal.

    STORAGE

    Retention of information in a permanent or semipermanent form, or
    establishing such retention.

    STORAGE MEDIUM

    An object having a characteristic which is, or may be, modified at
    positional increments in accordance with the time variation of information
    which is stored thereon.

    RETRIEVAL

    Production or reproduction of a stored information signal from the storage
    medium characteristics.

    RECORD

    (1)     (noun) The pattern of modulation by the information signal of the
    variable storage medium characteristic.

    (2)     (verb) To effect storage of an information signal.

    As these terms have the same spelling the terms "store", "storage medium",
    and variants thereof will be preferred usage in the schedule and
    definitions in order to avoid confusion.

    RECORD CARRIER

    A tangible object upon which an information signal is stored, synonymous
    with storage medium.

    TRACK OR STORAGE TRACK

    A continuous path of an intelligence varied characteristic on the storage
    medium.

    TRACKING

    Following a storage track by a transducer assembly or a component thereof.

    TRANSDUCER ASSEMBLY

    The combination of an energy conversion device (transducer) and device
    coupling the energy conversion device to a storage medium so as to sense or
    to cause a variation of a characteristic therein.

    II.     GENERAL STATEMENT OF THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS CLASS

    A.      This is the generic class for processes of and apparatus for the
    storage or retrieval of arbitrarily variable information (as defined in
    section I, above) which is retained in a storage medium by variation of a
    physical characteristic thereof.  The information is stored or retrieved by
    causing or sensing a variation of a physical characteristic of the storage
    medium by a transducer having relative motion along a continuous path.

    (1)     Note.  The record carrier must have continuous physical extent over
    the path of movement and be able to store a time-varying information
    signal.  Static or discrete systems are classified in Classes 365 and 235,
    respectively.

    (2)     Note.  The characteristic variation is one which must be
    retrievable by a transducer.  Such variation producing only a directly
    perceptible indication (e.g., a graph) is classified in Class 346.

    B.      This class includes processes and apparatus for the copying or
    editing of a storage medium within the above definition limited to such
    copying or editing including a step of storage or retrieval by relative
    motion.

    C.      This class includes the record carrier, per se, having particular
    information storage structure.

    III.    COMBINATIONS OF OTHER APPARATUS WHICH INCLUDE APPARATUS OF THIS
    CLASS

    A.      Significantly claimed subject matter external to this class,
    claimed in combination with apparatus under the class definition, is
    classified in the class appropriate to the external apparatus.

    B.      The combination of an audio signal producing device with the
    subject matter of this class is classified in subclasses 1-12 of this
    class, except the combination with telephone signal devices are classified
    in Class 379, Telephonic Communications subclasses 67+.

    C.      Nominally claimed apparatus external to this class, claimed in
    combination with apparatus under the class definition, is classified
    herein.  Note subclasses 69+.

    IV.     SUBCOMBINATIONS OF DYNAMIC INFORMATION STORAGE AND RETRIEVAL

    A.      This class includes elements and subcombinations peculiar to the
    subject matter of this class (e.g., a phonographic stylus and cartridge).

    (1)     Note.  Subcombination devices of general utility such as
    piezoelectric transducers are classified elsewhere.

    B.      Electrical circuitry which may be used in dynamic storage or
    retrieval, but which is not unique thereto is found in the appropriate
    class for such circuitry.

    C.      Mechanisms forming subcombinations of storage or retrieval devices,
    are classified in the appropriate mechanical class.

    V.      ORGANIZATION OF THIS CLASS

    A.      Combined with Independent Audio System

    Subclasses 1-12 provide for a device of this class and an operatively
    related audio signal source of independent content.  These subclasses may
    include specific magnetic storage or retrieval devices.

    B.      Diverse Types of Storage and Retrieval

    Subclasses 13-18 provide for devices having differing intended kinds of
    storage and retrieval.  These subclasses may include specific magnetic
    storage or retrieval devices.

    C.      Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage and Retrieval

    Class 360 provides for information storage and retrieval by causing or
    sensing modification of a magnetic condition on a record.  Class 360 is to
    be considered an integral part of Class 369 and follows the schedule
    hierarchy, retaining all pertinent definitions and class lines, thereof.
    Classification in Class 360 is evidenced by either explicit recitation or
    sole disclosure of magnetic structure.

    D.      Control Functions

    Subclasses 53-58 provide for devices and processes for modifying or
    maintaining the storage or retrieval operation, other than for sequential
    storage medium selection.

    E.      Monitoring of Condition

    Subclasses 53-58 provide for devices which indicate a condition of a
    storage or retrieval device or a subcombination thereof.

    F.      Special Purpose Devices

    Subclasses 59-85 provide for devices designed for use with or control of
    diverse type devices, or particular processing of the information signal.

    G.      General Recording or Reproducing

    Subclasses 99-173 provide for methods and devices which are concerned with
    either the physics of storage or retrieval or processing of the information
    signal.

    H.      Signal Modification

    Subclasses 174 and 175 provide for devices which are basically electronic
    in nature and are used to modify, correct, or insure the efficient storage
    or retrieval of information signals, and are not limited to any particular
    type of storage or retrieval.

    I.      Dynamic Mechanism Subsystems

    Subclasses 176-257 provide for mechanism subcombinations peculiar to
    storage or retrieval absent more than nominal information handling
    structure.

    J.      Structure of Storage Medium

    Subclasses 272-291 provide for structure of the storage medium element
    having significant structure for carrying information.

    K.      Miscellaneous

    Subclass 292 provides for subject matter under the class definition and not
    found above.

    VI.     FOR RELATED SUBJECT MATTER SEARCH CLASS

    181,    Acoustics, appropriate subclasses for nonelectrical sound wave
    handling systems and components.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 300+ for
    piezoelectric transducers, per se.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 9.1+ for phonograph
    cabinets without storage or retrieval structure.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 692 for an alarm system
    having a sound reproducer.

    346,    Recorders, appropriate subclasses for storage of information on a
    medium in a directly human perceptible form.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 1+ for subject matter of this
    class combined with motion picture recording or projection.

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, subclasses 15+ for image projectors with
    sound accompaniment.

    355,    Photocopying, subclasses 31 and 98 for copying optical sound
    records.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, appropriate
    subclasses for magnetic storage or retrieval analogs to the subclasses
    following Class 18 (see section V above).

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 67+ for similar subject
    matter combined with a telephone system component; and other appropriate
    subclasses for electrical audio signal handling, in general.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing and Systems and Devices,
    appropriate subclasses for electrical audio signal handling in general.

    386,    Television Signal Processing for Dynamic Recording or Reproducing,
    subclasses 1+ for color television recording or reproducing; and subclasses
    46+ for recording or reproducing with video signal processing.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclass 10 for storage of data on the
    operation of an electrophotographic device (i.e., log report) and subclass
    83 for job mode selection with memory.

    455,    Telecommunications, appropriate subclasses for radio devices.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 150+ for high temperature (Tc > 30 K) superconducting material,
    particularly subclasses 170+ for dynamic information storage or retrieval.

    704,    Data Processing: Speech Signal Processing, Linguistics, Language
    Translation, and Audio Compression/Decompression, subclasses 200+ for
    speech signal processing involving data processing.

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclass 4 for addressing dynamic storage devices including address
    formation or manipulation and subclasses 111+ for data accessing and
    control techniques for dynamic storage devices in digital data processing
    systems.


CLS 369/1
TXT COMBINED INDEPENDENT AUDIO SYSTEMS:

    Subject matter under the class definition combined with another audio
    signal system capable of operating independently of the storage or
    retrieval device.

    (1)     Note.  Such distinct apparatus includes public address systems or
    radios.

    (2)     Note.  The apparatus may include an additional storage or retrieval
    device.

    (3)     Note.  The storage or retrieval device may be of the magnetic type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 68+ for a dynamic audio
    signal recorder or reproducer combined with a telephone system or component
    thereof.


CLS 369/2
TXT Changeover between audio systems:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 having switching structure to selectively
    connect the independent audio systems.


CLS 369/3
TXT Fading between plural signals:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the switching structure includes a
    signal handling element which varies continuously over a period of time the
    ratio of two input signals to form a resultant signal which is composed
    solely of the first signal prior to the specified period and solely of the
    second signal subsequent to said period.


CLS 369/4
TXT Combining signals to form composite (e.g., mixing):

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the independent audio signals are
    concurrently passed through a common signal handling element to produce a
    resultant of both signals.

    (1)     Note.  The signals to be combined may be relatively or separately
    adjusted, and monitored to produce a desired resultant effect.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for monitoring of a storage or retrieval system.

    83,     for editing of stored information, in general.


CLS 369/5
TXT One of systems having plural concurrent signal (e.g., stereophonic):

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein one of the systems provides a
    plurality of signals simultaneously.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86+,    for storage or retrieval systems for spatially related acoustic
    signals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing  Systems and Devices, subclasses
    1+ circuitry, in general.


CLS 369/6
TXT Radio:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including a system which converts radio
    frequency energy to audible energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, for radio devices, per se.


CLS 369/7
TXT Including recording from radio:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein an audio signal output of the radio
    is connected to the storage input.

    (1)     Note.  The connection is usually part of an overall selection of
    program sources for the loud speaker output.


CLS 369/8
TXT Oscillator modulated by retrieved information signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 including a source of oscillations
    controlled or otherwise modulated by the information retrieval device.

    (1)     Note.  The oscillator is often a local oscillator in the radio
    circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129,    for a mechanical retrieval controlled oscillator.


CLS 369/9
TXT Mechanical phonograph:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the radio and a mechanical
    phonograph are coupled by a common acoustical element.


CLS 369/10
TXT With common cabinet for cartridge or cassette:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the radio housing includes
    structure unitary therewith for receiving a housing including a storage
    medium.


CLS 369/11
TXT Including separable assembly:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein (a) a radio is converted to a
    cartridge/cassette player by combining a cartridge/cassette module
    therewith, or (b) a cartridge/cassette player is converted to a radio by
    combining a radio module therewith.

    (1)     Note.  A radio module includes a cartridge or cassette housing with
    radio circuitry therein.


CLS 369/12
TXT Cabinet details:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 including structural details of an
    enclosure surrounding the components of the radio and signal retrieval
    system.

    (1)     Note.  The cabinet structure must include some specific detail of
    the combined system, or an element thereof, otherwise such structure is
    classified as a cabinet, per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75.1+   for similar subject matter including only a storage or retrieval
    device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 50+ for boxes
    and housing limited by claimed structure to electrical use but having no
    characteristic limiting them to particular electrical equipment; and
    subclasses 250+ for printed circuit arrangements of general utility.

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 148+ for a diaphragm mounted in a cabinet.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 9.1+ for cabinets or
    enclosures especially designed to house phonograph instruments or records.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 600+ for
    boxes and mountings in combination with electrical apparatus having no
    significant art limitation, or boxes and mounting in combination with
    plural diverse electrical apparatus.


CLS 369/13
TXT STORAGE DIFFERENT FROM RETRIEVAL (E.G., OPTICAL RECORDING AND MAGNETIC
    REPRODUCTION):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein storage medium sensing
    for signal retrieval is diverse from storage medium modification for signal
    storage.

    (1)     Note.  The term "diverse" refers to physically different changes,
    e.g., magnetic, optical, mechanical.

    (2)     Note.  For classification herein the diverse types of storage and
    retrieval must be claimed together.  Alternative embodiments of an
    invention claimed separately are classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for conversion of the information from a variation in one
    characteristic to a variation in a different characteristic of the storage
    medium.

    85,     for transfer of stored information from a storage medium to another
    of diverse type.


CLS 369/14
TXT SIMULTANEOUS DIVERSE TYPES OF STORAGE OR RETRIEVAL:

    Subject matter under the class definition for information signal storage by
    concurrent diverse types of storage medium modification, or information
    signal retrieval by concurrent diverse types of storage medium sensing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93+,    for plural, spatially distinct tracks stored or retrieved by the
    same type of storage or retrieval.


CLS 369/15
TXT ALTERNATIVE DIVERSE TYPES OF STORAGE OR RETRIEVAL:

    Subject matter under the class definition for information signal storage by
    selection of one of diverse types of storage medium modification, or for
    the information signal retrieval by selection of one of diverse types of
    storage medium sensing.

    (1)     Note.  Exemplary of such subject matter would be a recording or
    reproducing device for an elongate web record carrier having both magnetic
    and radiation transducers which may be alternatively switched into a
    circuit for use with either a photographic or magnetic tape.


CLS 369/16
TXT MECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF OPTICAL STORAGE TRACK:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which information is
    mechanically recorded onto a storage medium to produce variations in the
    transmissivity or reflectivity of the storage medium.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter combined with claimed optical reading of
    the storage medium is classified in subclass 13, above.

    (2)     Note.  This subject matter often includes mechanical cutting of an
    opaque layer covering the storage medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127+,   for mechanical information storage, in general.


CLS 369/17
TXT TRACK CONVERSION:

    Subject matter under the class definition including changing from a first
    type to a second type of track having the same signal content on the same
    storage medium.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is conversion from an optical track to a
    magnetic track.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85,     for copying a sound track onto a separate storage medium of a
    different type.


CLS 369/18
TXT OPTICAL READING OF MECHANICAL RECORD:

    Subject matter under the class definition including retrieval by optical
    sensing of a mechanically recorded track.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are devices with photosensitive pickups for
    grooved records.


CLS 369/19
TXT CONTROL BY TIMER OR EXTERNAL EXTRANEOUS CONDITION:

    Subject matter under the class definition including modification of an
    operating condition of the storage or retrieval device by apparatus
    responsive to time or to a condition other than an information parameter
    and external to the storage or retrieval device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47+,    for control of a storage or retrieval operation by an information
    related parameter.


CLS 369/20
TXT By diverse art device:

    Subject matter under subclass 19 wherein the operating condition is
    controlled by apparatus having utility other than to perfect the storage or
    retrieval of a signal.

    (1)     Note.  Detailed structure of the diverse art device is classified
    therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for control of diverse art device by  storage or retrieval device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 692 for a sound reproducer
    controlled by an alarm circuit.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclass 366 for  abnormal condition
    simulating devices.


CLS 369/21
TXT In vehicle or elevator:

    Subject matter under subclass 19 wherein the storage or retrieval device is
    located in a movable passenger carrying compartment.

    (1)     Note.  The controlling condition may be external to the vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 139+ and 901+ for a
    communication device for an elevator or a vehicle, in general.


CLS 369/22
TXT Audible indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 20 wherein the retrieval device is an audible
    reproducer, the content of the reproduced sound information being the
    value, generally numerical, of the time or condition to which the device
    responds.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 67+  for similar subject
    matter in a telephone system.


CLS 369/23
TXT Talking clock:

    Subject matter under subclass 22 wherein the reproduced sound information
    is the time.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclass 63 for
    talking clocks including details of the time determining device.


CLS 369/24
TXT OPERATOR ACTUATED REMOTE CONTROL OR INFORMATION LOCATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition including control of a storage or
    retrieval apparatus by an operator either (a) from a geographically spaced
    location, or (b) of physical location of the information on a storage
    medium.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include conventional control of
    signal processing such as on-off or volume controls.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825+ for electrical remote
    control transmission systems of general utility.


CLS 369/25
TXT Dictation or transcribing:

    Subject matter under subclass 24 particularly adapted to audibly record or
    reproduce the spoken intended contents of a document.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of such adaptation are facilitating correction of
    stored audio information subsequent to storage and prior to retrieval, or
    facilitating retrieval and modification thereof (e.g., backspacing).

    (2)     Note.  A storage or retrieval device designated as for dictation or
    transcription, merely by name and absent structure therefor, is not
    classified herein.


CLS 369/26
TXT Privacy:

    Subject matter under subclass 25 with provision for preventing access to a
    dictation circuit or signal, or to the corresponding portions of the
    storage medium.

    (1)     Note.  Examples include antibackspace tones, and busy or in use
    signals.


CLS 369/27
TXT With access to or marking of specified locations (e.g., indexing):

    Subject matter under subclass 25 having structure to indicate the location
    of the current, or another designated, positioned increment along the
    storage medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for condition indication and monitoring of a storage or retrieval
    device, in general.


CLS 369/28
TXT By stored additional signal (e.g., tone):

    Subject matter under subclass 27 wherein the indication is given by a
    signal stored in the same manner as the information signal.

    (1)     Note.  Such indicating signals are often reproduced as audible
    tones.


CLS 369/29
TXT Remote station (e.g., multiple stations or recording devices):

    Subject matter under subclass 25 wherein the source of the audible
    information to be stored and control equipment is located remotely from,
    and connected by an audible signal transmitting line to the storage device.

    (1)     Note.  The source is often a telephone-type handset.

    (2)     Note.  The connecting line is often similar to a telephone system
    connecting a plurality of audible information devices, or of storage
    devices.  However, classification is herein unless  the system is recited
    to be a telephone system, or conversation is possible over such a system
    (e.g., between handsets).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclass 75 for remote dictation over a
    telephone system.


CLS 369/30
TXT Selective addressing or storage medium (e.g., programmed access, "juke
    box"):

    Subject matter under subclass 24 wherein the control function includes
    storage on or retrieval from a designated storage medium element or portion
    thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The term "random access" is sometimes used for such device.
    However, such usage should be carefully distinguished from random selection
    or indexing which is classified in subclasses 66 and 98, and refers to
    selection absent prior designation.

    (2)     Note.  Positive recitation of steps or apparatus for designation is
    necessary for classification herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for manual tone arm positioning adjuncts.

    178,    for selection of storage medium absent designation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 75+
    for random access of a magnetic record carrier.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclasses 322+ for nominal audio reproduction combined with recording of,
    or controlling by operator response to instruction, or combined with
    audible description corresponding to displayed visual matter, other than a
    display or listing.


CLS 369/31
TXT Novelty device (e.g., talking doll):

    Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein the storage medium is associated
    with a novelty device.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the novelty device constitutes the housing for a
    sound reproducer.  Thus, a doll with a pull string by which the reproducer
    will emit one of several messages as selected by the direction of a pull on
    the string.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63+,    for similar subject matter absent selective addressing.


CLS 369/32
TXT With specified electrical information signal processing:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 including detail of handling the
    information signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99+,    for information signal processing absent selective addressing.


CLS 369/33
TXT With specified electrical control signal processing:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 including detail of handling of an
    electrical signal which affects the operation of storage medium element or
    portion selection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.24 and 825.25 for
    similar subject matter absent structure detail of signal storage.


CLS 369/34
TXT Plural storage medium elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 wherein the selection is of one of a
    plurality of separate storage medium elements.


CLS 369/35
TXT Plural nontranslating storage elements (e.g., in situ):

    Subject matter under subclass 30 having plural storage elements wherein the
    transducing assembly produces all storage element selecting motion.

    (1)     Note.  The transducing assembly may have associated structure for
    driving the storage element in use.

    (2)     Note.  The storage elements have no motion other than that used for
    storage or retrieval.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for a scanning turntable which moves the storage element from its
    nonselected position in a plural disc carrier.


CLS 369/36
TXT With unitary plural disc carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein an integrated mechanical array
    holds the discs in some way that they are readily accessible for selection.

    (1)     Note.  The array holding the discs may be referred to as a magazine.

    (2)     Note.  This subject matter absent storage medium designation is
    classified in subclass 192 and cross-reference thereto should not be made
    in the absence of a nonselective embodiment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 567+ for electric
    motor positioning systems not limited to subject of this class as an end
    element or load.


CLS 369/37
TXT Radial array:

    Subject matter under subclass 36 wherein the mechanical array holds the
    storage discs in a nonparallel pattern or spacing, which pattern may have
    characteristic lines with a common center.

    (1)     Note.  Either the array or retrieval station may move for selective
    positioning.

    (2)     Note.  The diameter of each disc in a common plane may be seen to
    radiate from the same center.

    (3)     Note.  The array classified here may be merely a segment or a
    portion, or an entire circumference.

    (4)     Note.  Arrays of small groups of discs, possibly parallel within
    each group but spaced radially group to group are classified here.

    (5)     Note.  This subject matter absent storage medium designation is
    classified in subclass 192 and cross-reference thereto should not be made
    in the absence of a nonselective embodiment.


CLS 369/38
TXT Moving linear array:

    Subject matter under subclass 36 wherein the mechanical array holds the
    storage discs in parallel along a common axis, and which array is movable
    along such axis for positioning a selected disc adjacent a retrieval
    station.

    (1)     Note.  Arrays of small groups of discs, parallel within each group
    but spaced radially group to group are classified in subclass 37 above.

    (2)     Note.  This subject matter absent storage medium designation is
    classified in subclass 192 and cross-reference thereto should not be made
    in the absence of a nonselective embodiment.


CLS 369/39
TXT Scanning turntable:

    Subject matter under subclass 36 wherein the storage medium motion producer
    moves along a stationary array for positioning relative to a selected disc.

    (1)     Note.  The storage medium motion producer may be a turntable of
    such small diameter as to permit access to both sides of a disc.

    (2)     Note.  This subject matter absent storage medium designation is
    classified in subclass 192 and cross-reference thereto should not be made
    in the absence of a nonselective embodiment.


CLS 369/40
TXT By manually actuated mechanism for movement of tone arm:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 including a hand actuated linkage coupled
    to a tone arm for setting to a selected position on a storage disc.


CLS 369/41
TXT Of track on single storage medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein the designated portion of the
    storage medium is a distinct path of information modulated variation on the
    surface thereof.


CLS 369/42
TXT By mechanical linkage:

    Subject matter under subclass 24 including a device having a plurality of
    relatively moving parts for transmitting a controlling force or motion from
    another location to the storage or retrieval location.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of such devices are Bowden cables or pneumatic
    actuators.


CLS 369/43
TXT WITH SERVO POSITIONING OF TRANSDUCER ASSEMBLY OVER TRACK COMBINED WITH
    INFORMATION SIGNAL PROCESSING:

    Subject matter under the class definition having closed-loop control of the
    alignment between the transducer assembly and the information storage track
    combined with handling of the information signal.

    (1)     Note.  The servo corrects alignment error and, if necessary,
    provides tracking motion for the transducer assembly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220,    for transducer support control of powered support drive having
    storage or retrieval absent information signal handling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses
    77.01+ for track centering on a magnetic record carrier.


CLS 369/44.11
TXT Optical servo system:
    Subject matter under subclass 43 wherein the servo positioning is
    controlled by a radiant energy transducer.

    (1)     Note.  The transducer may be either an information sensing
    transducer or an auxiliary transducer.  Incidental recitation of focusing
    or tracking, or a servo system therefor, is not enough to permit
    classification here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44.27,  for recording systems with initialization/startup/changing modes
    concepts.

    44.32,  for recording systems with defect/abnormal condition concepts.

    44.38,  for a recording system claimed in a plural beam system.

    47      and 51, for optical information storage or retrieval systems where
    a pilot signal is used.

    93+,    for optical systems using plural distinct independent tracks.

    100+,   for optical systems with specific detail of information handling
    portion of system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 201.1+ for optical tracking devices in
    radiant energy systems, per se.


CLS 369/44.12
TXT Solid state optical element with plural dissimilar optical components
    (e.g., using i.c. block, etc.): Subject matter under subclass 44.11
    including a block of material of an integrated chip, semiconductor or solid
    state nature with plural dissimilar optical components or at least one
    optical component with an additional electrical component combined therein.

    (1)     Note.  Examples are acoustic beam deflector and tracking circuit
    are on the same block of material, or a diode laser and acoustic lens in
    the same block of material.

    (2)     Note.  Plural lasers or lasing points of the same
    frequency/wavelength on a common substrate are not classified herein since
    they have similar structure, but may be classified in this Class, subclass
    44.37 or 44.38.  However, if they are of different structure (i.e.
    different laser types) combined in a common structure they are classified
    herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44.37   or 44.38, for servo systems using plural beams.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 13, 79-103 and 918 for incoherent light emitting injection
    luminescent devices, subclasses 80-85 for semiconductor light emitting
    sources combined with semiconductor light responsive devices, and
    subclasses 10, 11, 21, 53-56, 72, 113-118, 184-189, 225-234, 257, 258,
    290-294, 414, and 431-466 for light responsive active semiconductor devices.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, subclass 14 for an integrated optical circuit
    and subclasses 129+ for  a planar optical waveguide.


CLS 369/44.13
TXT Dithering or wobbling the beam or track:
    Subject matter under subclass 44.11 wherein a beam or track is dithered
    wobbled, undulated, vibrated, or oscillated along a track center line for
    tracking or focusing control.


CLS 369/44.14
TXT Optical head servo system structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 44.11 including structural detail of the
    mechanisms for focussing or tracking.

    (1)     Note.  Optical head is defined as a device for producing a focused
    beam of light on a medium containing information and detecting the light
    reflected from the medium to determine the information content of the
    medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    197+ and 819+ for optical heads in general, with or without servo system
    combination, when no recording/playback or combination with the recording
    medium is claimed.


CLS 369/44.15
TXT Elastic, flexible, pliant or spring support of lens or mirror:  Subject
    matter under subclass 44.14 wherein an optical element is supported by some
    type of elastic, flexible, pliant, resilient or spring support for allowing
    or limiting motion in one or more various directions (e.g., elastic support
    holds lens or mirrors and permits focus motion but limits lateral motion,
    etc.).

    (1)     Note.  A piezoelectric bender which supports the lens or mirror
    meets the definition and its flexible condition.


CLS 369/44.16
TXT Flat flexible support (e.g., parallel leaf springs, etc.):  Subject matter
    under subclass 44.15 with planar means to limit or provide a limited
    direction of motion (e.g., support permits only one of focusing or tracking
    motion to occur, etc.).


CLS 369/44.17
TXT Optical head element with rotary motion:
    Subject matter under subclass 44.14 wherein an optical head element such as
    a lens or mirror pivots/rotates about its own axis or about a support axis
    in order to scan or focus on the track.


CLS 369/44.18
TXT Rotary headwheel or scanner (e.g., for use with arcuate, transverse or
    slant tracks, etc.):  Subject matter under subclass 44.17 wherein an
    optical component rotales through a 360 degree motion to follow a track.

    (1)     Note.  Slant tracts or tracks transverse to the storage medium
    motion are found on tape or card medium where the medium moves before or as
    the beam is directed across the medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97,     for systems using tracks transverse to a motion component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, appropriate
    subclasses for magnetic rotary heads and headwheels and the combination
    with magnetic tape.


CLS 369/44.19
TXT Head element pivots on arm (e.g., optical head on disk arm etc.):  Subject
    matter under subclass 44.17 including a support arm which rotates about a
    pivot point to drive the lens or mirror transverse to the track direction
    (e.g., optical lens or mirror is pivoted on a phonograph type arm which may
    provide both track accessing and tracking control, etc.).


CLS 369/44.21
TXT Lens or mirror pivots off center (e.g., on a shaft, etc.):  Subject matter
    under subclass 44.17 wherein the support may or may not pivot about its own
    central axis, but the lens or mirror on this support is pivoted off center.



CLS 369/44.22
TXT Lens or mirror floats (e.g., magnetic field support or lens/mirror can
    freely float and pivot about its own axis, etc.):  Subject matter under
    subclass 44.14 wherein the lens or mirror has no support and floats with
    potential freedom of motion in any direction, though a field such as a
    magnetic field which may limit and control its position and movement.


CLS 369/44.23
TXT Structure for shaping beam or causing astigmatic condition:  Subject matter
    under subclass 44.14 having means to modify the cross-sectional profile or
    energy distribution of the beam or cause an astigmatic beam condition.

    (1)     Note.  The phrase "shaping beam" is intended to include changing
    the intensity distribution characteristics or cross-sectional profile or
    size/diameter of the beam (e.g., for beam intensity control etc.) but not
    for routine focus control which inherently alters the beam size/diameter.

    (2)     Note.  An "astigmatic" condition may be created by a cylindrical or
    unidirectional lens.

    (3)     Note.  Astigmatic is defined as a spherical aberration.


CLS 369/44.24
TXT Means to mask or shield a portion of the beam:
    Subject matter under subclass 44.23 wherein a modification is performed by
    masking or shielding a cross-sectional portion of the beam.

    (1)     Note.  The masking or shielding can be caused by one photodetector
    blocking a portion of the beam from falling onto another photodetector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44.42,  where the servo system has arithmetic operations performed on
    plural detectors outputs and the servo system is responsive to a particular
    shape of the beam by virtue of the beam or detector being that shape.


CLS 369/44.25
TXT Servo signal compared to a reference signal:
    Subject matter under subclass 44.11 wherein a developed servo signal is
    compared to an external reference signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44.27,  if in an initialization/start-up or changing modes system.

    44.34,  if the reference signal is sampled and stored signal of an earlier
    servo signal.


CLS 369/44.26
TXT Servo system operation related to disc structure information format:
    Subject matter under subclass 44.11 wherein the operation of the servo
    system is in cooperation with an information arrangement, format, layout,
    pattern or track structure on the record medium.

    (1)     Note.  The system can be, for example, a preformatted disc where
    tracking is turned on during preformatted regions and off during
    nonrecorded regions absent tracking data, or where servo operation is
    integral with or affected by a constant linear velocity disc format mode of
    operation, etc.


CLS 369/44.27
TXT Initialization/start-up or changing modes of system:
    Subject matter under subclass 44.11 wherein the servo system is affected by
    a change of mode in operation at the beginning of system operation or a
    change of mode during system operation.

    (1)     Note.  "Random accessing" or indexing concepts may be classified
    herein if no specific "selective addressing" or feedback indication of
    arriving at a particular track address occurs.

    (2)     Note.  The action taken by the servo system must be outside or
    beyond its normal routine ongoing continuous servo operation.

    (3)     Note.  Varying the servo system control during a change between
    recording and playback or tracking modes due to the information format of
    the disc is classified above in subclass 44.26.

    (4)     Note.  Examples of initialization/start-up are first track
    recording and track jumping or crossing during a random access type of
    operation.

    (5)     Note.  Examples of mode change during operation are: switching
    between coarse/fine servo control as servo operation begins/changes modes,
    and the servo system responding to some user initiated operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     32 or 33, for random accessing systems with selective addressing.

    44.11,  for generic recording systems without recitation of plural beams.

    44.32,  for recording systems with defect/abnormal condition concepts.

    44.34,  for sampling or digital techniques not associated with the criteria
    for subclass 44.27.

    44.38,  for a recording system claimed in a plural beam system.


CLS 369/44.28
TXT While track jumping or crossing:
    Subject matter under subclass 44.27 wherein the servo system is operative
    during a track jumping or track changing operation or as plural tracks are
    crossed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44.32,  for the concept of "track crossing" when not normally associated
    with a deliberate action to jump across plural tracks such as during
    initial addressing or relocating to another track but where track crossing
    may be accidentally introduced by some abnormal condition as found in
    subclasses 44.32+ below.


CLS 369/44.29
TXT Servo loop gain/switching control:
    Subject matter under subclass 44.27 wherein the servo system continuosly
    varies the servo gain or discretely switches in/out between servo loops.

    (1)     Note.  Varying the gain may be some control operation not only to
    change the gain but to have the ability to vary it to keep it stable and
    prevent undesired varying, and varying the gain may be implemented with
    either active or passive (e.g., notch filter, etc.) elements.

    (2)     Note.  Gain is defined as the ratio of output power to input power
    for a system or component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44.35,  servo loop gain/switching control not associated with criteria for
    subclass 44.27.


CLS 369/44.31
TXT Recording:
    Subject matter under subclasses 44.29 wherein an optical system is capable
    of a writing/recording operation.

    (1)     Note.  An example is recording of a first track on a disc which is
    then used for tracking control for further tracks being recorded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44.33,  for recording systems with a defect/abnormal condition.

    44.38,  for a recording system claimed in a plural beam system.

    44.39,  for generic recording systems without recitation of plural beams.


CLS 369/44.32
TXT Means to compensate for defect or abnormal condition:
    Subject matter under subclass 44.11 wherein the servo system structure or
    operation has means to avoid the servo system being affected by, or so that
    it is responsive to and corrects for an adverse situation.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of conditions being corrected are disc defects,
    tilt, vibrations, shocks, impacts, skew to normal direction to the disc
    surface, vertical warp, jitter, eccentricity, beam variations or some
    condition outside of the ordinary servo operation condition, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44.11,  for generic recording systems.

    44.27,  for recording systems with initialization/start-up/changing modes
    concepts.

    44.38,  for a recording system claimed in a plural beam system.


CLS 369/44.33
TXT Recording (e.g., inhibit recording upon defect, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 44.32 comprising a writing/recording system
    in combination with compensation means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44.31,  for recording systmes including initialization/start-up.

    44.38,  for a recording system claimed in a plural beam system.

    44.39,  for generic recording systems without recitation of plural beams.


CLS 369/44.34
TXT Sampling servo system:
    Subject matter under subclass 44.11 wherein an instantaneous value of a
    variable is obtained at regular intervals (e.g., sample and hold, be it
    analog or digital storage, etc.).


CLS 369/44.35
TXT Servo loop gain/switching control:
    Subject matter under subclass 44.11 wherein the servo system varies the
    servo gain or switches in/out or between servo loops.

    (1)     Note.  Varying the gain also includes techniques for stabilization.


    (2)     Note.  Varying the gain may be implemented with either active or
    passive (e.g., notch filter etc.) elements.

    (3)     Note.  Gain is defined as the ratio of output power to input power
    of a system or component.


CLS 369/44.36
TXT Variable gain:
    Subject matter under subclass 44.35 wherein the servo gain is variable in a
    continuous manner as opposed to being switched between values, but may be
    combined with switching operations.


CLS 369/44.37
TXT Plural incident beams:
    Subject matter under 44.11 wherein plural beams incident upon the recording
    medium are used, which may be one or more focusing, tracking, playback or
    recording beams.

    (1)     Note.  Plurals beams created by splitting a single beam from the
    recording medium (e.g., etc., reflected beam is split and directed to
    plural detectors) is not classified here.


CLS 369/44.38
TXT Recording:
    Subject matter under subclass 44.37 wherein one of the beams is for
    writing/recording operations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44.31,  for recording systems with initialization/start-up/changing modes
    concepts.

    44.33,  for recording systems with defect/abnormal condition concepts.

    44.39,  for generic recording systems without recitation of plural beams.


CLS 369/44.39
TXT Recording:
    Subject matter under subclass 44.11 comprising an optical system capable of
    a writing/recording operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44.31,  for recording systems with initialization/start-up.

    44.33,  for recording systems with defect/abnormal condition.

    44.38,  for a recording system claimed in a plural beam system.


CLS 369/44.41
TXT Arithmetic operation using plural photo-detectors:
    Subject matter under 44.11 where more than one of addition, subtraction,
    multiplication, division is performed upon an output signals of plural
    photodetectors for the purpose of deriving one or more servo signals.


CLS 369/44.42
TXT Beam or detector is not rectanglar or circular:
    Subject matter under 44.41 wherein either the beam or the detector has a
    shape other than rectanglar or circular.


CLS 369/47
TXT CONTROL OF STORAGE OR RETRIEVAL BY A SIGNAL TO BE RECORDED OR REPRODUCED
    (E.G., PILOT OR CONTROL SIGNAL):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a signal to be stored or
    retrieved acts upon apparatus for modifying, adjusting, or maintaining some
    operating condition of the storage or retrieval apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  The controlling signal may be either the information signal
    or a distinct signal for control purposes.


CLS 369/48
TXT Control of information signal channel:

    Subject matter under subclass 47 wherein information signal processing
    circuitry is affected by the controlling signal to determine a parameter of
    the information signal.


CLS 369/49
TXT Of plural interrelated channels:

    Subject matter under subclass 48 wherein the information signal processing
    circuitry includes distinct paths for several signal components, and the
    controlled parameters in each path have a definite relationship to each
    other.


CLS 369/50
TXT Mechanism control by information signal (e.g., voice responsive):

    Subject matter under subclass 47 wherein a mechanical operating condition
    is controlled by a parameter of the information signal.


CLS 369/51
TXT Control of spiral track spacing (e.g., signal variable pitch):

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein the information signal adjusts the
    displacement between adjacent record tracks during storage of the signal.

    (1)     Note.  Such adjustment is often necessary for high values of signal
    amplitude when recording lateral grooves.


CLS 369/52
TXT CONTROL STRUCTURE ON STORAGE MEDIUM SENSED BY OTHER THAN TRANSDUCER SUPPORT
    (E.G., CONDUCTIVE STRIP, NOTCHED EDGE SENSOR):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the storage medium has an
    element thereon which is sensed by an electrical detector distinct from the
    intelligence transducer support wherein the detector controls an operating
    condition of the storage or retrieval apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  The additional structure on the storage medium is not a
    recorded signal, which is classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14+,    for control by a recorded signal of a type diverse from the
    information signal.

    47+,    for control by reproduced signal.

    231+,   for mechanism control structure sensed by transducer support
    mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 77.03
    and 78.11 for nonmagnetic sensing to produce a control signal for magnetic
    transducer track centering and selecting, respectively.


CLS 369/53
TXT WITH CONDITION INDICATING (E.G., MONITORING) OR TESTING:

    Subject matter under the class definition with apparatus including a
    perceptible indication of some condition of a part of the storage or
    retrieval system.

    (1)     Note.  The indication may be given continuously, only to indicate
    an abnormal condition, or only upon initiation by an operator.

    (2)     Note.  Condition indication or testing, absent storage or retrieval
    will be classified in accordance with the pertinent condition in the
    appropriate subclasses of Classes 73, Measuring and Testing; 116, Signals
    and Indicators; 324, Electricity:  Measuring and Testing; 340,
    Communications:  Electrical.


CLS 369/54
TXT With radiation storage or retrieval:

    Subject matter under subclass 53 wherein the information signal is stored
    on or retrieved from the storage medium by information signal modulation of
    a beam of radiant energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100+,   for radiant energy storage or retrieval, in general.


CLS 369/55
TXT Of transducer:

    Subject matter under subclass 53 wherein the component being tested or
    monitored is the transducer assembly.


CLS 369/56
TXT Location on storage medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein the indicated condition of the
    transducer is its position on the storage medium element.


CLS 369/57
TXT Positioning adjunct (e.g., indexing):

    Subject matter under subclass 55 which indicates the position to which the
    transducing assembly is set.


CLS 369/58
TXT Of record carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 53 wherein the storage medium is monitored or
    tested.


CLS 369/59
TXT WITH BINARY PULSE TRAIN INFORMATION SIGNAL:

    Subject matter under the class definition including handling of an
    information signal composed of a series or pattern of identical pulse bits
    characterized solely by their presence or absence.

    (1)     Note.  The term "identical pulse bits" refers to a signal limited
    to one of two predetermined values for an integral multiple of a
    predetermined period of time.

    (2)     Note.  Pulse characteristic modulation is not classified herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 1+ for pattern
    reading type analog to digital converters.


CLS 369/60
TXT SIGNAL PROCESSING BY STORAGE AND SUBSEQUENT RETRIEVAL (E.G., FREQUENCY
    SHIFT, DELAY):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a time-dependent
    characteristic of a signal is modified by storing and subsequently
    reproducing the signal.

    (1)     Note.  The term "characteristic" includes the time of occurrence of
    the signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, appropriate subclasses for
    delay devices utilizing mechanical or electromagnetic waves.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 8+
    for similar subject matter utilizing magnetic storage and retrieval.

    386,    Television Signal Processing for Dynamic Recording or Reproducing,
    subclass 101 for time compressing of an audio signal.


CLS 369/61
TXT STORAGE OF DIRECTLY RETRIEVABLE MODULATED R.F. OR SUPERAUDIBLE CARRIER
    SIGNAL:

    Subject matter under class definition wherein the information is stored in
    the form of a wave modulated by the information signal, which upon
    retrieval forms the stored modulated signal.


CLS 369/62
TXT STORAGE OF SIGNAL MODULATING COMPONENT:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the information signal to
    be stored is presented in the form of a carrier wave modulated by a lower
    frequency component, and the higher frequency wave is partially or
    completely suppressed prior to storage and is reinserted subsequent to
    retrieval.

    (1)     Note.  The term "suppressed" refers to removal of the carrier wave
    as by demodulation.


CLS 369/63
TXT SOUND REPRODUCTION FOR TOY OR NOVELTY DEVICE (E.G., TALKING DOLL):

    Subject matter under the class definition specifically designed for sound
    reproduction and mounting within a device otherwise used for novelty or
    amusement.

    (1)     Note.  Such devices are often of the direct mechanical conversion
    to sound type reproducers.

    (2)     Note.  If the sole disclosure is of a sound reproducer in a toy or
    novelty device, classification is in this subclass even in the absence of
    claimed limitations thereto.

    (3)     Note.  Note classification is in Class 446, Amusement Devices:
    Toys, for sounding toys with structural details of the toy.


CLS 369/64
TXT With electrical information signal processing:

    Subject matter under subclass 63 having electrical circuitry for handling
    the intelligence signal.

    (1)     Note.  Subclasses 63 and 65-68 are intended to include, at most,
    nominal recitation of an electrical information signal.


CLS 369/65
TXT Indexing to track (e.g., consecutive):

    Subject matter under subclass 63 having selection of one of a plurality of
    storage medium tracks by successive operations of the sound reproducer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for similar subject matter having operator controlled designation
    of a track.

    98,     for similar subject matter of general utility.


CLS 369/66
TXT By chance:

    Subject matter under subclass 65 wherein the selection of one of plural
    sound tracks is made without any control of which track is chosen.

    (1)     Note.  The term "random indexing" is sometimes used for these
    devices, and should be distinguished from random access or selective
    addressing as described in (1) Note of subclass 30.

    (2)     Note.  The plural tracks may be on a single or on distinct storage
    elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98,     for indexing by chance to plural tracks on a single surface.

    178,    for indexing by chance to plural storage elements.


CLS 369/67
TXT With beginning or end of cycle stylus return:

    Subject matter under subclass 63 including a mechanical pickup which is
    returned to an initial position prior to beginning or subsequent to
    completion of the reproduction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225+,   for pickup restoring not limited to toys or novelty devices.


CLS 369/68
TXT Manual motion application (e.g., novelty card, hand-held stylus):

    Subject matter under subclass 63 wherein relative motion between the
    storage medium element and transducer assembly is provided by a force
    concurrently applied by an operator's hand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177,    for a mechanism subsystem having a stationary storage medium, in
    general.


CLS 369/69
TXT SYSTEMS OR SUBSYSTEMS COMBINED WITH DIVERSE ART DEVICE:

    Subject matter under the class definition including structure peculiar to
    this class for either information signal processing or storage medium
    element handling, and having specified cooperation with structure otherwise
    classifiable elsewhere and not provided for therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for such subject matter combined with a distinct audio signal
    source.


CLS 369/70
TXT For control of diverse art device:

    Subject matter under subclass 69 including controlling the operation of the
    diverse art device by the storage or retrieval operation.


CLS 369/71
TXT WITH STYLUS CLEANING OR TREATMENT (E.G.,  GRINDING):

    Subject matter under the class definition having removal of debris from, or
    modification of, a stylus.


CLS 369/72
TXT WITH STORAGE MEDIUM CLEANING OR ELECTROSTATIC CHARGE NEUTRALIZATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition having structure or method for
    removing undesired material or electrostatic charge from the storage medium
    combined with storage or retrieval.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, appropriate subclasses
    for mechanical cleaning of storage medium not combined with storage or
    retrieval.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 212+ for
    discharging of an electrostatic charge, in general.


CLS 369/73
TXT By charge leakage (e.g., ionized particles):

    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the cleaning or charge
    neutralization has structure to conduct undesired charge away from the
    storage medium.

    (1)     Note.  The structure may include a source of air ionizing radiation.


CLS 369/74
TXT By tone arm attachment:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the cleaning structure is mounted
    on the transducer assembly support.


CLS 369/75.1
TXT WITH PARTICULAR CABINET STRUCTURE:

    Subject matter under the class definition including structural details of
    an enclosure surrounding the components of the dynamic information storage
    or retrieval system.

    (1)     Note.  The cabinet structures in this and the indented subclasses
    must include some specific structure of a dynamic information storage or
    retrieval system or an element thereof, otherwise such structures
    classified as a cabinet, per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for cabinet structure for a radiophonograph combination.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 50+ for boxes
    and housings limited by claimed structure to electrical use but having no
    characteristic limiting them to particular electrical equipment; and
    subclasses 250+ for printed circuit arrangements of general utility.

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 148+ for a diaphragm mounted in a cabinet.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 9.1+ for cabinets or
    enclosures especially designed to house phonograph instruments or records.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 600+ for
    boxes and mountings in combination with electrical apparatus having no
    significant art limitation, or boxes and mounting in combination with
    plural diverse electrical apparatus.


CLS 369/75.2
TXT With mechanism to place disc on a turntable:

    Subject matter under subclass 75.1 including a mechanical arrangement
    normally inside the cabinet which moves to the cabinet exterior to position
    the record medium element onto a turntable within the cabinet.


CLS 369/76
TXT With electrical information signal processing:

    Subject matter under subclasses 75.1+ including electrical handling of the
    information signal.

    (1)     Note.  Subclasses 75.1 and 77.1 include at most nominal recitation
    of an electrical signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128+,   for electrical information signal processing with mechanical
    storage or retrieval, absent particular cabinet structure.


CLS 369/77.1
TXT Slotted for edgewise insertion of storage disc:

    Subject matter under subclass 75.1 where there is a long narrow opening in
    the cabinet structure which is used to insert or remove a disk shaped
    storage medium.


CLS 369/77.2
TXT Having disc stored in protective jacket:

    Subject matter under subclass 77.1 wherein the disc is surrounded by a
    protective enclosure when in other than the location at which the
    information storage or retrieval is performed.

    (1)     Note.  The protective jacket is often removed from the cabinet with
    the disc remaining therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses
    99.02+ for a floppy disk loading or ejecting mechanism in a magnetic
    recorder or reproducer.


CLS 369/78
TXT With lid-mounted transducer assembly carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 75.1 wherein the enclosure has a lid with
    structure to carry the transducer assembly of the enclosed storage or
    retrieval equipment.


CLS 369/79
TXT With closure-operated interlock or braking actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 75.1 wherein the enclosure has a lid or door
    with structure to prevent or stop the operation of the enclosed equipment
    when the cabinet lid or door is in other than a closed position.


CLS 369/80
TXT Particular acoustical structure (e.g., baffle):

    Subject matter under subclass 75.1 including structure which mechanically
    modifies sound waves.

    (1)     Note.  This is primarily a collection of old style mechanical
    phonographs with sound amplifying or modifying structure (e.g., trumpets,
    baffles, etc.).


CLS 369/81
TXT Having collapsible or expandable acoustic path:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 in which a portion of the acoustic
    structure defining the acoustic path is movable so as to vary a dimension
    of the acoustic path.

    (1)     Note.  Typical structure include lid controlled folding horn, and
    telescoping horn sections for making compact.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 178, 186, and 197 for similar subject matter
    of general utility.


CLS 369/82
TXT Having parallel acoustic paths:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 including structure having a plurality of
    acoustical energy conducting passages through which such energy may travel
    simultaneously.

    (1)     Note.  A baffle in a horn may define several such paths.

    (2)     Note.  The combinations including shutters are classified in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 184 and 185 for similar subject matter of
    general utility.


CLS 369/83
TXT EDITING OF STORED INFORMATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition for deleting, adding, or
    rearranging portions of a stored information signal on a storage medium
    element.

    (1)     Note.  The change to the information signal may be effected either
    by physical rearrangement of portions of the storage medium element (e.g.,
    cutting and splicing), or by rerecording the information signal onto the
    same or another storage medium element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84+,    for rerecording of a signal without modification.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 13+
    for similar subject matter limited to magnetic storage and retrieval.


CLS 369/84
TXT DUPLICATION OR COPYING (E.G., RERECORDING):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein information is retrieved
    from one storage medium and subsequently stored on another distinct storage
    medium.

    (1)     Note.  It is necessary that the retrieval and storage be effected
    by a dynamic transformation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 106+ for the method of stamping duplicate records.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 15+
    for copying a magnetic record.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    appropriate subclasses for apparatus for stamping duplicate record.


CLS 369/85
TXT To diverse type of storage medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 wherein the storage medium element onto
    which the information is stored has a different configuration than the
    storage medium from which the information is retrieved.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are devices for recording phonograph records
    from magnetic tape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for converting the varied characteristic on the same storage medium
    element.


CLS 369/86
TXT STORAGE OR RETRIEVAL OF SPATIALLY RELATED ACOUSTIC SIGNALS (E.G., STEREO):

    Subject matter under the class definition in which the signal to be stored
    is responsive to, or the retrieved signal produces, plural audible
    vibrations which have a common time base and a spatial relationship to
    produce the effect of position or depth.

    (1)     Note.  The plural signals are usually stored and received
    separately and concurrently.

    (2)     Note.  The signals are often combined (e.g., as sum or difference
    signals) before storage and separated after retrieval.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for a radio combined with a storage or retrieval device in which
    either may be stereophonic.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing  Systems and Devices, subclasses
    2.


CLS 369/87
TXT Simulated spatial effect (e.g., pseudo-stereo):

    Subject matter under subclass 86 in which a single reproduced signal is
    processed to give a stereo effect.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing  Systems and Devices, subclasses
    17+ for Pseudo Stereo Systems in general.


CLS 369/88
TXT With transformation or intentional distortion of information signal (e.g.,
    preemphasis):

    Subject matter under subclass 86 having signal processing prior to storage
    which includes an intentional change to the information signal.

    (1)     Note.  Such changes are often frequency dependent signal magnitude
    control to compensate apparatus characteristic differences between the
    storage and the retrieval device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    for similar subject matter for electro-mechanical recording, not
    restricted to plural audio signals.

    174+,   for signal modification not restricted to plural audio signals, nor
    any particular type of storage or retrieval.


CLS 369/89
TXT Quadraphonic:

    Subject matter under subclass 86 in which four or more channels are stored
    or retrieved.


CLS 369/90
TXT Including modulated subchannel signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein at least one channel or combined
    signal modulates an A.C. wave prior to storage, or demodulation of such
    wave after retrieval.

    (1)     Note.  Frequently, both a direct wave and a modulated wave are
    stored upon the same track to permit storage of four channels on two tracks.


CLS 369/91
TXT Having distinct electrical channels:

    Subject matter under subclass 86 having a separate electrical circuit for
    each channel, each of said circuits having no common electrical elements
    other than for power supply.


CLS 369/92
TXT Including distinct storage tracks on record medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein the paths of the transducer over
    the record medium for each channel are physically separated.


CLS 369/93
TXT SYSTEMS HAVING PLURAL PHYSICALLY DISTINCT INDEPENDENT TRACKS ON A SINGLE
    STORAGE MEDIUM SURFACE:

    Subject matter under the class definition having a storage medium element
    with plural spaced apart information modulated tracks.

    (1)     Note.  Adjacent sections of a single continuous spiral track are
    not plural tracks; however, distinct interleaved spirals are plural tracks
    for purposes of this subclass.


CLS 369/94
TXT Having layered storage medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 93 wherein the storage medium element has
    plural coextensive surfaces, a plurality of which have storage tracks
    thereon, and which tracks are each accessible for storage or retrieval from
    the same side of the storage element.


CLS 369/95
TXT Common time base (i.e., simultaneous):

    Subject matter under subclass 93 wherein the plural tracks are either
    stored or intended to be retrieved concurrently.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for simultaneous storage or retrieval of diverse types.

    47+,    for similar subject matter in which one track stores a control
    signal.

    92,     for plural tracks producing binaural effects.


CLS 369/96
TXT Continuous consecutive storage or retrieval of interrupted track for single
    signal (e.g., automatic reversal):

    Subject matter under subclass 93 wherein the plural tracks are
    consecutively utilized for storage or retrieval of a continuing signal.

    (1)     Note.  The tracks may be connected at distinct points.

    (2)     Note.  The term "continuing signal" indicates time continuity of
    the signal being stored or retrieved.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for selective addressing of one of a plurality of signals on a
    record medium.

    98,     for consecutive indexing of signal tracks not limited to use for a
    time-continuous signal.


CLS 369/97
TXT Tracks transverse to a motion component:

    Subject matter under subclass 96 wherein the tracks have a component of
    motion transverse to the microscopic movement of the storage medium element.

    (1)     Note.  The transducer assembly is often movable to obtain a higher
    velocity of relative motion than that of the storage medium.


CLS 369/98
TXT Indexing to discrete signal tracks (e.g., consecutive, by chance):

    Subject matter under subclass 93 wherein selection of the information
    modulated track is made by starting a storage or retrieval operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for such subject matter with designation of track.

    65+,    for similar subject matter utilized in a toy or novelty device.


CLS 369/99
TXT SPECIFIC DETAIL OF INFORMATION HANDLING PORTION OF SYSTEM:

    Subject matter under the class definition having at least one step or
    element of information signal processing particularly described.

    (1)     Note.  Nominal recitation of a signal processing step or element to
    show relationship to mechanical structure will be classified with such
    mechanical structure.

    (2)     Note.  Information processing methods, structure, and circuitry,
    not limited to information storage and retrieval, are each classified in
    the appropriate class therefor.


CLS 369/100
TXT Radiation beam modification of or by storage medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 99 wherein the information signal is stored
    on or retrieved from the storage medium by a beam of radiant energy which
    is modulated by the information signal either (a) to store the information
    on a radiant energy sensitive storage medium, or (b) by a radiant energy
    controlling storage medium for subsequent retrieval by sensing of the
    radiant energy.


CLS 369/101
TXT Invisible radiation (e.g., electron beam or X-ray):

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the radiant energy is either (a)
    radiation outside the visible spectrum (4000-7000A5), or (b) a subatomic
    particle (e.g., electron) beam.

    (1)     Note.  A charged particle (e.g., electron) beam may be considered
    either invisible radiation or a particular electrical current depending
    upon the manner in which such a beam interacts with the storage medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126,    for storage or retrieval by an electron beam modifying or being
    controlled by storage medium element charge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, appropriate subclasses for invisible radiant energy
    devices or systems, in general.


CLS 369/102
TXT Multiplex:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein a single radiation beam
    simultaneously stores or retrieves a plurality of independent signals on a
    single track of the storage medium element.

    (1)     Note.  Each signal may modulate different ranges of value of a
    property (e.g., frequency, polarization) of the radiation beam; or each
    signal may modulate the radiation beam in distinct discrete time intervals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    115+ for a multiplex arrangement for optical communications.


CLS 369/103
TXT Holographic:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the storage medium is a
    three-dimensional coherent image.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    1+ for holographic systems and elements, in general.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 125, 216, and
    235 for holographic static storage or retrieval of information.


CLS 369/104
TXT Ribbon light modulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 including a flat flexible electrical
    conductor variably blocking the optical path in accordance with an
    information current flowing therethrough.


CLS 369/105
TXT Penumbra or push-pull optical system:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the optical path has either (a)
    variably superimposed shadows, or (b) complementarily varying beams.


CLS 369/106
TXT Optical feedback:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 having intelligence signal processing
    circuitry which includes a radiation beam link from a later point in such
    circuitry to a preceding point in such circuitry.


CLS 369/107
TXT Ground noise suppression, signal envelope, or plural optical modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein provision is made to suppress
    spurious signals caused by graininess of the film and emulsion; or the
    storage medium has an additional signal representative of the average
    signal level, or has a plurality of characteristics varied.


CLS 369/108
TXT Color:
    Subject matter under subclass 100 in which the radiant energy beam
    modifies, or is modified by the storage medium in a selectively variable
    frequency dependent manner within the visible spectrum (i.e., 4000-7000Ao).


CLS 369/109
TXT With diffraction (e.g., pits, grating):
    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the radiant energy beam is
    deflected by the edge of an object by other than reflection or refraction.


CLS 369/110
TXT By polarization:
    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the direction of the electric
    field component of the radiant energy beam is restricted.


CLS 369/111
TXT Spiral or helical track:
    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the path along which the
    information is stored or retrieved has plural, curved turns about an axis
    of rotation of the storage medium.


CLS 369/112
TXT With particular imaging element:
    Subject matter under subclass 100 including an element modifying the
    direction of the radiant energy beam and capable of focussing the beam to
    form an image.

    (1)     Note.  The image is generally of the beam source or of the storage
    medium.

    (2)     Note.  Planar mirrors are not classifiable herein.


CLS 369/113
TXT With medium contacting drum or gate in optical system (e.g., sound head):
    Subject matter under subclass 100 including an element in or adjacent to
    the beam path which positions the storage medium and has either a linear or
    cylindrical contacting surface.


CLS 369/114
TXT Movable roller support for optical path:
    Subject matter under subclass 113 in which the element for positioning the
    storage medium is a rotatably mounted drum or roller.


CLS 369/115
TXT With driving or stabilizing mechanism:
    Subject matter under subclass 113 further including driving, movable, or
    other elements for controlling or smoothing the motion of the storage
    medium.


CLS 369/116
TXT Light intensity adjustment or maintenance:
    Subject matter under subclass 100 including modification of the beam source
    to obtain a desired or constant intensity.


CLS 369/117
TXT Having movable shutter or light gate:
    Subject matter under subclass 100 having a variably positioned radiation
    blocking element in the radiation beam path.

    (1)     Note.  The position is generally varied by the information signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for a ribbon type light modulator.


CLS 369/118
TXT With detail, configuration, or adjunct of element having slit or aperture
    in radiation path: Subject matter under subclass 100 having the structure,
    shape, or cooperating device of an element blocking all but a limited area
    of the radiant energy beam.


CLS 369/119
TXT With movement of optical beam (e.g., galvanometer):
    Subject matter under subclass 118 further including periodic variation of
    the beam position.


CLS 369/120
TXT Having particular radiation sensor:
    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein structural detail of the beam
    responsive element is particularly described.


CLS 369/121
TXT With particular light source (e.g., laser, CRT wit phosphor): Subject
    matter under subclass 100 including either structural detail of a light
    source, or a light source characterized by a function or relationship
    additional to conventional light emission.

    (1)     Note.  An additional function or relationship would include light
    coherence or light position control.

    (2)     Note.  The CRT with phosphor herein has position control other than
    for generating or following plural tracks in the storage medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 13, 79-103 and 918 for incoherent light emitting injection
    luminescent devices, and subclasses 80-85 for semiconductor light emitting
    sources combined with semiconductor light responsive devices.


CLS 369/122
TXT Solid state:
    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the light source is a solid
    element emitting light when excited by an electric signal.

    (1)     Note.  Such device are often semiconductive.


CLS 369/123
TXT Glow lamps:
    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the light source is a gas
    discharge device for electric current.


CLS 369/124
TXT With details of electrical signal processing:
    Subject matter under subclass 100 further including a particularly
    described step or structure of electrical modification of the information
    signal.


CLS 369/125
TXT Having photographic storage medium (e.g., variable density or area):

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the storage medium contains a
    component subject to a radiation induced chemical change, and not
    classified in a preceding subclass.

    (1)     Note.  The resultant change may take the form of a variation in
    optical transmissivity or optical track width.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    399,    Electrophotography, subclass 10 for storage of data on the
    operation of an electrophotographic device (i.e., log report) and subclass
    83 for job mode selection with memory.


CLS 369/126
TXT Electrical modification or sensing of storage medium (e.g., capacitive,
    resistive, electrostatic charge): Subject matter under subclass 99 wherein
    the information signal is stored or retrieved by either (a) modulating an
    electrical property of the storage medium by an electrical transducer, or
    (b) sensing an electrical property of the storage medium by a transducer
    electrically related thereto.

    (1)     Note.  Electrical properties may include charge, capacitance, etc.

    (2)     Note.  A charged particle (e.g., electron) beam may be considered
    either invisible radiation or electrical current depending upon the manner
    in which such a beam interacts with the storage medium.


CLS 369/127
TXT Mechanical modification or sensing of storage medium:
    Subject matter under subclass 99 wherein the information signal is stored
    or retrieved by either (a) modulating a mechanical property of the storage
    medium by a mechanical effect produced by the transducing assembly, or (b)
    sensing a mechanical property of the storage medium by a transducing
    assembly mechanically related thereto.


CLS 369/128
TXT With electrical information signal processing:
    Subject matter under subclass 127 including some detail of handling or
    control of the electrical signal input to or output of the transducing
    assembly.

    (1)     Note.  Mere mention of connecting means, or wires along the tone
    arm is not classifiable here.


CLS 369/129
TXT From information modulated oscillator:
    Subject matter under subclass 128 including a source of oscillations
    controlled or otherwise modulated by the transducing assembly to produce an
    A.C. signal with an information related parameter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for similar subject matter combined with a radio.


CLS 369/130
TXT Sensing of elastic deformation or relaxation of storage medium (e.g., skid
    type): Subject matter under subclass 128 including a probe which couples
    the transducer assembly to the storage medium to cause deformation and to
    sense the restoring force thereto.


CLS 369/131
TXT Bidirectional information flow (e.g., record/replay switching): Subject
    matter under subclass 128 wherein the signal processing is switchable
    between a storage and a retrieval mode of information handling.

    (1)     Note.  Typical systems classified here may have an amplifier which
    is switched between recording and playback modes.


CLS 369/132
TXT Recording:
    Subject matter under subclass 128 limited to signal processing for storing
    information.


CLS 369/133
TXT With transformation or intentional distortion of information signal (e.g.,
    compensation for velocity variation with diameter): Subject matter under
    subclass 132 wherein the processing includes some intended change in a
    characteristic of the information signal.

    (1)     Note.  The magnitude control of high frequencies in the information
    signal (e.g., Dolby) is classified here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for similar subject matter for stereophonic systems.


CLS 369/134
TXT With particular amplification characteristic or signal control circuitry
    (e.g., muting): Subject matter under subclass 128 having either (a) an
    amplifier with a particular characteristic (e.g., band-pass), or (b)
    circuitry for control of a characteristic of the electrical information
    signal.

    (1)     Note.  A nominally recited amplifier, of itself, is insufficient
    for classification herein.

    (2)     Note.  Particular control circuitry may be by a switch or a
    circuitry subsystem, such as muting.


CLS 369/135
TXT Specified structure of electrical transducing assembly:
    Subject matter under subclass 127 including some structural detail of the
    storage element modifying or sensing device which includes the combination
    of a complete electricity-force conversion element and a storage medium
    coupling element.

    (1)     Note.  This may include the subcombination of such a modulating or
    sensing device, of itself.

    (2)     Note.  Where the modulating or sensing device is described only by
    name, e.g., "a stylus driving a pickup", without any detail thereof,
    classification is determined by the combination of such a nominally recited
    device with the other elements recited.

    (3)     Note.  Where a tone arm is recited with details of the modulating
    or sensing device, classification is in this or one of the indented
    subclasses; however, such recitation in further combination with storage
    medium support or motion production, or with particular circuitry will be
    classified in the appropriate preceding subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170+,   for stylus coupling devices, in general.

    215+    and 244+, for tone arm devices absent detail of the modifying or
    sensing device.


CLS 369/136
TXT Multichannel (stereo cartridge):
    Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein one or more transducing
    assemblies provide a plurality of independent outputs.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass, as a "stereophonic
    transducer", is a subcombination of the stereo of subclasses 86+ above.


CLS 369/137
TXT By stress application to solid transducing element (e.g., piezoelectric):

    Subject matter under subclass 136 wherein a stylus is coupled to a
    relatively static transducer element which responds to pressure or other
    force.

    (1)     Note.  Typical transducer elements will be piezoelectric,
    electrostrictive, solid state pressure responsive devices, or the like.
    The term "relatively static" refers to the absence fo translatory motion of
    the transducer element, as a whole.


CLS 369/138
TXT With adjustable or replaceable stylus coupling structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 137 wherein the linkage between stylus and
    transducer permits selectable change between styli, or facilitates removal
    and replacement of a stylus assembly.

    (1)     Note.  Typical selectable change is a lever control of either of
    two differently sized styli.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171+,   for a stylus holder with stylus interchanging structure.


CLS 369/139
TXT With details of damping or compliance:
    Subject matter under subclass 136 wherein an element of the transducing
    assembly is specified to have either a desired rigidity or stiffness, or
    elasticity, or absorption as to a dynamic characteristic.

    (1)     Note.  The element having a desired elasticity or absorption may be
    anywhere in the transducing assembly or support structure, with a control
    of vibration or resonance.

    (2)     Note.  The stiffness or compliance is usually formed in the stylus
    lever.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170,    for damping or compliance details of a stylus holder or linkage
    thereof.


CLS 369/140
TXT Plural styli:
    Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein the mechanical force applying
    structure includes more than one stylus.

    (1)     Note.  A typical device classified here may have styli of different
    sizes coupling the storage medium to a monaural cartridge or pickup, with a
    lever to selectably engage one stylus with the storage medium.


CLS 369/141
TXT Plural alternative or with signal handling adjunct:
    Subject matter under subclass 135 including several transducers only one of
    which is operative at any time; or an additional device directly
    cooperating with the transducer for processing either an information
    signal, or another signal in its place.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for a system having an alternative signal.

    129,    for an electromechanical system having switching between a storage
    and a retrieval mode of operation.

    136+,   for plural concurrently operative transducers.


CLS 369/142
TXT Stylus controlled optical element:
    Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein the stylus is coupled to an
    element which controls or affects light.

    (1)     Note.  Typical optical elements may be a vane or mask, or a mirror,
    in a beam of light.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements,
    appropriate subclasses for particular optical elements.


CLS 369/143
TXT Electron tube:
    Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein the stylus is coupled to an
    element which affects operation of an electron tube.

    (1)     Note.  The operation of the electron tube may be affected by either
    external (e.g., magnet) or internal (e.g., grid) elements.


CLS 369/144
TXT Electret or piezoelectric:
    Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein the transducer element has a
    bound electrostatic charge or is otherwise an electrostatic generator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 400
    for electret systems in general.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 311+ for
    piezoelectric generators.


CLS 369/145
TXT Semiconductive:
    Subject matter under subclass 135 including a force responsive element
    having an electrical conductivity intermediate that of a conductor and of
    an insulator.

    (1)     Note.  The element may have a potential barrier layer therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128,    for such subject matter with additional information processing
    circuitry.

    144,    for piezoelectric semiconductive transducer assemblies.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 108 and 414-420 for devices responsive to nonelectrical signals,
    including pressure.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 509+ for miscellaneous externally effected circuits.


CLS 369/146
TXT Magnetic field variation (e.g., magnetostrictive):

    Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein the electrical transducer has
    magnetic field variation related to the information signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, appropriate subclasses for
    generator structure of general utility.


CLS 369/147
TXT Moving signal coil:
    Subject matter under subclass 146 wherein the information signal is
    generated by, or causes movement of, a coil rigidly connected to the stylus
    within a magnetic field.


CLS 369/148
TXT Variable reluctance:
    Subject matter under subclass 146 wherein the magnetic field variation is
    caused by a stylus-linked portion of the magnetic field circuit.


CLS 369/149
TXT Fixed coil surrounding fixed part of magnetic path:
    Subject matter under subclass 148 wherein the information signal is
    generated in a winding about a stationary portion of the magnetic field
    circuit.


CLS 369/150
TXT Capacitive or electrolytic liquid:
    Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein the transducer includes a liquid
    which is specified as having dielectric or conductive properties.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 80+ for mechanically variable
    resistors, in general.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 280+ for
    externally variable capacitors, in general.


CLS 369/151
TXT Electrostatic or capacitive:
    Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein the transducer includes an
    electric field and electrodes related thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 277+ for
    variable capacitors, in general.


CLS 369/152
TXT Variable resistance:
    Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein the transducer has an electric
    circuit element, the resistance of which is varied in accordance with the
    information.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses 291+
    and especially 298+ for variable resistance controlled circuits not limited
    to stylus control of the resistance.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 68+ for mechanically variable
    resistors, in general.


CLS 369/153
TXT Including treatment to facilitate storage (e.g., storage medium softening):

    Subject matter under subclass 127 including treatment of the storage medium
    surface to produce a modification in a physical characteristic thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of such treatment include softening of the storage
    medium and erasure of a previous track by scraping or abrading.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    82,     Turning, subclass 1.12 for record disc erasing not combined with
    mechanical storage thereon.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 36 for a process of record disc erasing by shaping, not combined
    with mechanical storage thereon.


CLS 369/154
TXT Heating (e.g., heated stylus):
    Subject matter under subclass 153 including the application of heat to the
    storage medium.

    (1)     Note.  The heat may be applied indirectly, e.g., through the stylus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclasses for electric heating of
    general utility.


CLS 369/155
TXT Mechanical conversion to or from sound:
    Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein the storage medium sensing or
    modulating element is mechanically coupled to a sound transmitting or
    responsive solid element (e.g., diaphragm), so as to directly couple the
    elements.

    (1)     Note.  The sensing or modulating element is usually in physical
    contact with the storage element.

    (2)     Note.  The term "mechanical" includes a fluidic coupling.

    (3)     Note.  Such devices with sound boxes or acoustical tone arms are
    classified here, however, the subcombination limited thereto are classified
    in the indented subclasses 157-169.


CLS 369/156
TXT Including fluid coupling in force linkage:
    Subject matter under subclass 155 including two diaphragms coupled by an
    enclosed fluid.


CLS 369/157
TXT Sound box with mounting structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 155 limited to a stylus coupled acoustical
    resonator and mounting means therefor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155,    for similar structure combined with storage medium support or
    movement device.


CLS 369/158
TXT Acoustical tone arm:
    Subject matter under subclass 155 limited to a tone arm with acoustical
    coupling structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155,    for such structure combined with storage medium support or movement
    devices.

    244+,   for tone arms, in general.


CLS 369/159
TXT Having plural acoustical paths:
    Subject matter under subclass 158 in which the acoustical coupling
    structure includes a plurality of acoustical energy conducting passages
    through which such energy may travel simultaneously.

    (1)     Note.  Such structure may include two acoustical conduits driven in
    a mechanical push-pull relationship by a single stylus.


CLS 369/160
TXT Sound box:
    Subject matter under subclass 155 limited in extent to a stylus coupled
    acoustical resonator, a casing therefor, or a mechanical linkage used
    therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155,    for such structure combined with storage medium support or movement
    devices.


CLS 369/161
TXT With interchangeable styli:
    Subject matter under subclass 160 having plural styli selectively coupled
    in cooperative relationship with the acoustical resonator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171+,   for stylus holders with interchangeable styli, in general.


CLS 369/162
TXT Including stylus pivoted from fixed casing:
    Subject matter under subclass 160 having a stylus having a tracking motion
    limited to an angular displacement about its support from an immovable
    casing.


CLS 369/163
TXT With sound modification:
    Subject matter under subclass 160 having acoustical structure for
    amplifying, muffling or filtering the incident or reproduce sound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    for mechanical amplification of sound box vibration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, for structure to handle sound, in general.


CLS 369/164
TXT Convertible between lateral and perpendicular modulation modes: Subject
    matter under subclass 160 including structure to cause or respond to stylus
    vibrations in two planes, one being normal and the other parallel to the
    record medium surface.

    (1)     Note.  Such structure in a reproducer may be unitary or alternative.


CLS 369/165
TXT Perpendicular mechanical modulation:
    Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein the sound box causes or is
    responsive to stylus vibration in a plane normal to the surface of the
    storage medium.


CLS 369/166
TXT Recording:
    Subject matter under subclass 165 wherein the stylus modulates the storage
    medium by cutting its surface.


CLS 369/167
TXT With mechanical amplification (e.g., friction coupling):
    Subject matter under subclass 165 having structure to increase the
    amplitude of the mechanical vibrations of the elements coupling the stylus
    and acoustical resonator.

    (1)     Note.  Such structure is often a frictional linkage to an auxiliary
    vibrating structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163,    for sound boxes having acoustical, rather than mechanical,
    amplification.


CLS 369/168
TXT Floating weight:
    Subject matter under subclass 165 having a stylus supporting lever with
    counterbalancing weight structure to minimize or eliminate the weight
    applied by the stylus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254,    for tone arm counterbalancing weight structure, in general.


CLS 369/169
TXT Lateral mechanical modulation:
    Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein the sound box causes or is
    responsive to stylus vibration in a plane tangent, or parallel the surface
    of the storage medium.


CLS 369/170
TXT Stylus holder or shield:
    Subject matter under subclass 127 limited in extent to a support or a
    protecting device for the storage medium engaging element with or without
    such element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135+,   for such holders combined with electrical transducing structure.


CLS 369/171
TXT With structure to interchange styli:
    Subject matter under subclass 170 having structure to select one of a
    plurality of styli for engagement with the storage medium.


CLS 369/172
TXT By replacement:
    Subject matter under subclass 171 wherein each one of the plurality of
    styli successively engage the storage medium.

    (1)     Note.  These are generally single use type needles and are often in
    cartridge or magazine type containers.


CLS 369/173
TXT Stylus:
    Subject matter under subclass 127 limited in extent to the storage medium
    engaging element.


CLS 369/174
TXT Including signal modification:
    Subject matter under subclass 99 including significant detail of changing
    some parameter of the information signal.

    (1)     Note.  The parameter change must modify the relationship among
    plural signal parameters, other than a multiplication of the magnitude.
    Therefore simple amplification is not classified in this or its indented
    subclasses, but a change in degree of amplification (e.g., automatic volume
    control, compression) would be so classified.

    (2)     Note.  Circuitry for changing signal parameters, in general, is
    classified in the class containing the particular circuitry structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for similar subject matter in a stereophonic retrieval system.

    124,    for similar subject matter in a radiation beam retrieval system.

    134,    for similar subject matter in an electrically actuated mechanical
    recording system.


CLS 369/175
TXT Frequency dependent (e.g., separation):
    Subject matter under subclass 174 wherein the signal parameter is varied as
    a function of the signal frequency.

    (1)     Note.  Variation of distribution of differing frequency components
    of the information signal to different ones of a plurality of channels
    (e.g., crossover networks) are classified herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communications, appropriate subclasses for similar
    subject matter not restricted to storage or retrieval.


CLS 369/176
TXT DYNAMIC MECHANISM SUBSYSTEM:
    Subject matter under the class definition including a support for either a
    transducer assembly or a storage medium, or driving means for such a
    support.

    (1)     Note.  Nominal recitation of a signal processing step or structure
    to show relationship to mechanical structure will be classified in this or
    indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  Subcombinations and elements of such structure peculiar
    thereto and not elsewhere classified are also in this or indented
    subclasses.


CLS 369/177
TXT Having stationary storage medium:
     Subject matter under subclass 176 wherein all of the relative motion for
    storage or retrieval is produced by the transducer assembly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63+,    for such reproducers used for a toy or novelty device.


CLS 369/178
TXT Access of multiple storage elements (e.g., record changer): Subject matter
    under subclass 176 having production of additional motion of the transducer
    or storage medium to change the storage medium used for storage or
    retrieval.

    (1)     Note.  Movement of the transducer mounting (e.g., tone arm) is so
    interrelated with multiple storage access, that documents classified herein
    will not ordinarily be cross-referenced to powered transducer drive in
    subclasses 215+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30+,    for similar subject matter having designation or selection of
    storage medium to be used for storage or retrieval.


CLS 369/179
TXT Cylindrical storage element:
    Subject matter under subclass 178 wherein the storage medium has an
    elongate axially symmetric tubular configuration with a closed curved
    surface and an axis of rotation coincident with its axis or symmetry.


CLS 369/180
TXT Flexible disc:
    Subject matter under subclass 178 wherein the accessed storage medium is a
    disc subject to extensive deformation without any permanent effect thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses
    99.02+ for a floppy disk loading or ejecting mechanism in a magnetic
    recorder or reproducer.


CLS 369/181
TXT Stack height adjustment for tone arm or turntable:
    Subject matter under subclass 178 for storage discs and having a tone arm
    and a turntable having a spindle, and having structure to modify the
    position of the tone arm or the turntable along the spindle axis to
    compensate for changes in the height of stacks or discs on the turntable.

    (1)     Note.  The stack height need not be sensed directly, but may be
    inferred by the number of disc changes.


CLS 369/182
TXT Numerical count shut-off:
    Subject matter under subclass 178 including termination of operation in
    response to completion of a settable number of storage or retrieval
    operations.


CLS 369/183
TXT Cam shaft transverse to turntable spindle axis of record changer:

    Subject matter under subclass 178 having a tone arm and a turntable for
    storage discs with a spindle and rotatable shaft with mechanical actuating
    surfaces positioned below the turntable with an axis intersecting the
    spindle and a support for the tone arm such that the actuating surfaces are
    below and proximate both the spindle and tone arm support.


CLS 369/184
TXT Tone arm position control by sensing of disc (e.g., disc or hole size):

    Subject matter under subclass 178 including moving a tone arm away from the
    path of storage disc movement during disc changing and moving the tone arm
    to the starting position on the disc to be placed in use after changing in
    accordance with a sensed dimension indicative of the starting position.

    (1)     Note.  Such dimension may be the diameter of the disc or of a
    spindle aperture therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217,    for tone arm set down control responsive to disc sensing, in
    general.


CLS 369/185
TXT Disc size sensor on or using tone arm:
    Subject matter under subclass 184 wherein the size of the disc to be placed
    in use is determined by a sensing element mounted on, or by direct disc
    contact with, the tone arm.


CLS 369/186
TXT Stepped tone arm stop element:
    Subject matter under subclass 184 in which the tone arm starting position
    is determined by a stop element with a surface having a stair-step
    configuration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 138+ for limit stop
    devices of general utility.


CLS 369/187
TXT Disc size sensor in feed path:
    Subject matter under subclass 184 in which a portion of the sensor is in
    the path of storage disc movement.

    (1)     Note.  By contact with the disc, the disc size then sets the tone
    arm starting position.


CLS 369/188
TXT Disc size sensor at turntable position:
    Subject matter under subclass 184 in which a portion of the sensor is
    adjacent the operative location of the disc.

    (1)     Note.  The sensor is usually adjacent the turntable and active in
    the plane of the disc as it is normally used.


CLS 369/189
TXT Turntable speed control:
    Subject matter under subclass 178 having adjustment or change of motion of
    a rotating horizontal surface which supports and imparts motion to a
    storage medium disc.


CLS 369/190
TXT By sensing of disc (e.g., disc or hole size):
    Subject matter under subclass 189 wherein the nominal rotational speed of
    the turntable is selected in accordance with a sensed parameter (e.g.,
    dimension) of the disc.


CLS 369/191
TXT Storage disc fed to and removed from turntable:
    Subject matter under subclass 178 having a turntable and a supply of
    storage discs in which each of the discs is consecutively moved from the
    supply to the turntable prior to storage or retrieval and subsequently
    removed from the turntable to another location.

    (1)     Note.  The disc may be turned to the original supply to another
    group of discs, or to some indeterminate location.


CLS 369/192
TXT Plural disc holder having unitary separating structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the disc supply includes a casing
    having distinct sections in which each disc is mounted, the sections being
    separated by material structurally integral with said casing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36+,    for this subject matter combined with storage element designation.


CLS 369/193
TXT Grouped removal with sequential feed:
    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the discs are individually moved
    to the turntable, and a plurality of discs in the form of a stack are
    removed from the turntable together.


CLS 369/194
TXT Coplanar storage:
    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the disc position in the supply,
    before movement, is in the same plane as the turntable surface position
    after movement.


CLS 369/195
TXT Both side of disc used:
    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein both sides of a storage disc are
    accessed for information storage and retrieval without operator
    intervention.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199,    for this subject matter with other types of record changers.


CLS 369/196
TXT Separate motors operate turntable and disc change mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 178 having a turntable for storage discs, the
    turntable and structure to change the storage discs being powered by
    separate motors.


CLS 369/197
TXT Plural turntables:
    Subject matter under subclass 178 having a plurality of turntables, each
    being consecutively utilized for storage or retrieval.


CLS 369/198
TXT Plural tone arms:
    Subject matter under subclass 197 having separate transducer assembly
    support arms for different turntables or groups thereof.


CLS 369/199
TXT Both sides of disc used:
    Subject matter under subclass 178 wherein both sides of a storage disc are
    accessed for information storage and retrieval without operator
    intervention.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195,    for similar subject matter with both feed and removal of disc from
    turntable.


CLS 369/200
TXT By inverting disc:
    Subject matter under subclass 199 wherein the disc surface used is changed
    by turning over the disc element.


CLS 369/201
TXT Discs sequentially removed from turntable:
    Subject matter under subclass 178 wherein storage discs are stacked on a
    turntable and are individually removed subsequent to the storage or
    retrieval operation.


CLS 369/202
TXT Discs sequentially fed to turntable:
    Subject matter under subclass 178 wherein the storage discs are
    individually fed to the turntable prior to the storage or retrieval
    operation so as to be stacked upon discs which have previously been used.


CLS 369/203
TXT Tone arm set down adjustment:
    Subject matter under subclass 202 including controllable placement of the
    transducer assembly on the storage disc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184+,   for such adjustment controlled by disc sensing.

    216+,   for similar subject matter not restricted to multiple element
    access devices.


CLS 369/204
TXT By edge controlled feeding of disc:
    Subject matter under subclass 202 including moving the disc to the
    turntable by applying force to the perimeter of the disc.


CLS 369/205
TXT With feed cooperating structure on spindle:
    Subject matter under subclass 204 wherein the spindle has structure or
    configuration cooperating with the disc force application to assist in disc
    feeding.


CLS 369/206
TXT By center hold feeding of disc (e.g., spindle drop):
    Subject matter under subclass 202 including moving the disc to the
    turntable by applying or releasing force adjacent center holes in such
    discs.

    (1)     Note.  The discs are often stacked on a portion of the spindle
    prior to storage or retrieval.


CLS 369/207
TXT Support mechanism adapter for large hole records on small hole spindles:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 having an element extending radially, in
    at least one direction, from the spindle to engage disc apertures larger
    than the spindle diameter.

    (1)     Note.  The adapters, per se, are also classified herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290,    for disc hole size adapters, in general.


CLS 369/208
TXT Having specified spindle structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 206 including detail of the spindle mechanism
    structure.


CLS 369/209
TXT Umbrella type:
    Subject matter under subclass 208 including plural, laterally extendable
    elements mounted on and disposed angularly about the spindle, which
    elements control and support the disc stack.


CLS 369/210
TXT Having shoulder and ejector lever:
    Subject matter under subclass 208 wherein the disc is positioned by a ledge
    formed on the spindle and a lever element is used to feed the disc to the
    turntable.


CLS 369/211
TXT With edge stabilizer:
    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein the disc is held adjacent the
    edge by an element to steady the disc to be fed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205,    for an edge controlled disc feed with cooperating spindle support
    structure.


CLS 369/212
TXT Auxiliary structure (e.g., shut-off preventer, disc spacer): Subject matter
    under subclass 178 having or limited to an element added to modify the
    operation of the record changer or mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of such elements are discs for spacing, a clip or
    other device for defeating last-record shut-off.

    (2)     Note.  Subcombination of this nature peculiar to record changers
    are classified here.


CLS 369/213
TXT Additional motion or storage element support to effect tracking: Subject
    matter under subclass 176 wherein the structure supporting the storage
    medium has a motion component additional to the relative motion along the
    path of motion, which additional motion component maintains each
    instantaneous position of the storage medium having its characteristic
    sensed at the location of a substantially stationary transducer.


CLS 369/214
TXT Cylindrical storage element:
    Subject matter under subclass 213 wherein the storage medium has an
    elongate axially symmetric tubular configuration with a closed curved
    surface and an axis of rotation coincident with its axis of symmetry.


CLS 369/215
TXT Having power driven transducer assembly:
    Subject matter under subclass 176 having a source of power which applies a
    force to drive the transducer assembly along a desired path.

    (1)     Note.  The driving force is often applied to the tone arm.

    (2)     Note.  The incidental driving force resulting from stylus
    engagement with an information carrying groove is not classified herein.


CLS 369/216
TXT Having tone arm set-down control:
    Subject matter under subclass 215 wherein the driving force places the
    transducer assembly on a storage disc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184+,   for similar subject matter in an automatic record changer.


CLS 369/217
TXT By disc sensing (e.g., by sensed disc or hole size): Subject matter under
    subclass 216 wherein the position of the placement is determined by a
    sensed characteristic of the disc, such as disc or hole size.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184+,   for similar subject matter in an automatic record changer.


CLS 369/218
TXT Having groove engaging driving element:
    Subject matter under subclass 215 wherein a groove engaging element,
    distinct from any information coupling element, provides all tracking force
    to the transducer assembly.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of the subject matter classified in this subclass
    include unmodulated grooves and groove coupling elements transmitting only
    tracking motion.


CLS 369/219
TXT With drive transverse to storage track during storage or retrieval:

    Subject matter under subclass 215 wherein the driving force is applied
    during storage or retrieval to provide or modify the motion necessary
    thereto.


CLS 369/220
TXT Controlled by transducer assembly support:
    Subject matter under subclass 219 wherein the driving force is determined
    by a condition (e.g., position, movement) of the transducer supporting
    structure.

    (1)     Note.  The supporting structure is often a tone arm.


CLS 369/221
TXT With additional drive (e.g., scanning, restoring, or return): Subject
    matter under subclass 219 having a second source of driving force which
    produces a different rate or direction of motion and is selectively applied
    to the transducer support.


CLS 369/222
TXT Having pivoted tone arm:
    Subject matter under subclass 219 having a tone arm which supports the
    transducer assembly and which tone arm is subject only to angular
    displacement at the end opposite the transducer assembly so as to cause the
    assembly to travel in a substantially arcuate path.


CLS 369/223
TXT By lead screw:
    Subject matter under subclass 219 wherein the driving force is applied to
    the transducer assembly, or support therefor, by a rotating tubular element
    having an externally extending element of helical configuration.


CLS 369/224
TXT With passive linear tracking:
    Subject matter under subclass 215 including constraining the path of the
    transducer assembly due to incidental motion from stylus engagement to a
    straight line, the driving force being applied other than during storage or
    retrieval.

    (1)     Note.  This driving force is generally a restoring force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249,    for linear tracking absent application of driving force.


CLS 369/225
TXT Restoring after passive tracking:
    Subject matter under subclass 215 wherein the driving force is applied
    after storage or retrieval to place the transducer support at a
    predetermined location.


CLS 369/226
TXT Responsive to transducer support condition (e.g., movement or position):

    Subject matter under subclass 225 where the driving force is initiated or
    controlled by a condition of the transducer assembly support (e.g.,
    movement or position).

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are devices which restore a tone arm to an
    initial position upon reaching lead-out groove.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231+,   for tone arm operated trip devices, in general.


CLS 369/227
TXT Numerical count replay:
    Subject matter under subclass 226 including termination of storage or
    retrieval in response to completion of a settable number of repetitions of
    the restoring operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182,    for numerical count shut-off in a record changer.


CLS 369/228
TXT Controllable position:
    Subject matter under subclass 226 in which either a restoring initiating or
    ending location of the transducer assembly may be adjusted.


CLS 369/229
TXT Turntable mounted template:
    Subject matter under subclass 225 wherein the driving force is derived from
    an adjunct to the turntable which moves the transducer support by guiding
    the stylus to a restored position.


CLS 369/230
TXT Power cueing (i.e., engage/disengage):
    Subject matter under subclass 215 wherein the driving force places the
    transducer assembly into or out of a storage or retrieval relationship with
    the storage medium (e.g., engagement or disengagement between a stylus and
    record).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224,    for such subject matter combined with linear constraint of passive
    tracking.


CLS 369/231
TXT Mechanism responsive to control structure on storage medium sensed by
    transducer support (e.g., trip device): Subject matter under subclass 176
    wherein the storage medium has control structure thereon which is sensed by
    the transducer assembly support to modify the operation of the dynamic
    mechanism subsystem.

    (1)     Note.  This control structure is often a lead-out groove.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47+,    for control by an information signal.

    52,     for storage medium control structure sensed by other than the
    transducer assembly support.

    178+,   for record changing devices which may be controlled by a transducer
    support sensed control structure.

    226+,   for tone arm restoring controlled by similar structure.


CLS 369/232
TXT With turntable braking (e.g., velocity or reverse responsive): Subject
    matter under subclass 231 wherein the storage medium control structure is
    sensed to control a braking device to stop turntable motion.

    (1)     Note.  The motion of the transducer support may be either
    increased, or reciprocatory, speed (velocity) for energizing the brake
    control.


CLS 369/233
TXT Mechanism condition or storage medium responsive control:
    Subject matter under subclass 176 wherein the mechanism subsystem is
    controlled by a condition of an element thereof, or by a characteristic of
    the storage medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    178+,   for such subject matter in a record changing device.

    220,    for a tone arm controlled lateral drive mechanism.

    226,    for a tone arm controlled restoring mechanism.

    231+,   for a tone arm motion controlled mechanism.


CLS 369/234
TXT With turntable braking  (e.g., tone arm position responsive): Subject
    matter under subclass 233 wherein the controlled mechanism subsystem is a
    brake to stop turntable motion.

    (1)     Note.  Braking systems responsive to control structure, such as the
    lead-out groove or the eccentric circle at the end of play (center) of the
    disc record, are classified in 232 above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     for braking controlled by a phonograph cabinet closure.


CLS 369/235
TXT With stopping of motor:
    Subject matter under subclass 234 wherein the motive power is controlled.

     (1)    Note.  This includes electric circuit control of the motor in
    addition to braking.

    (2)     Note.  Systems using a governor controlled motor with braking (such
    as a fly-weight disc) are classified here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243,    for motive power control absent braking.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 362+ for motor
    systems having braking; and subclass 626 for motor systems with a limit or
    end-stop device.


CLS 369/236
TXT Adjustable:
    Subject matter under subclass 234 wherein the mechanism is controlled by a
    linkage which is changeable to suit some desired variation (e.g., tone arm
    position at which braking occurs).


CLS 369/237
TXT With electrical control of brake:
    Subject matter under subclass 234 wherein the mechanism is controlled by an
    electrical subsystem to control the brake.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 52+ and
    specifically subclasses 61.4, 61.41, 61.45+ for switches used for special
    applications.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ for
    control circuits for electromagnetic devices.


CLS 369/238
TXT End limit sensor coupled with tone arm:
    Subject matter under subclass 234 wherein the mechanism is controlled by a
    feeler or other element which is contacted by the tone arm or a projection
    therefrom at a position at the end of play.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236,    for similar subject matter which is adjustable and which is not
    cross- referenced to this subclass.


CLS 369/239
TXT Speed:
    Subject matter under subclass 233 wherein the relative motion used for
    producing storage or retrieval is controlled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189+,   for similar subject matter in a record changing mechanism.

    267,    for turntable speed changing, in general.


CLS 369/240
TXT Variable radius compensation (e.g., constant interaction speed): Subject
    matter under subclass 239 wherein the speed controlling condition is the
    radial position of the transducing assembly.

    (1)     Note.  Such control may be used to establish and maintain a
    constant linear velocity between a storage disc and transducing assembly.


CLS 369/241
TXT Self-responsive (e.g., governor):
    Subject matter under subclass 239 wherein the relative motion is both the
    controlled and controlling condition.

    (1)     Note.  Such control may be used to maintain or limit relative
    motion.


CLS 369/242
TXT Antiskating:
    Subject matter under subclass 233 wherein a controllable lateral force is
    applied to prevent skidding in a direction transverse to the information
    track and on the storage medium surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252,    for antiskating devices absent control.


CLS 369/243
TXT Energizing circuit:
    Subject matter under subclass 233 having an electrical circuit to supply
    power to at least the subsystem and which circuit is controlled to obtain
    the desired effect from the subsystem.

    (1)     Note.  The control is often making or breaking of the circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235,    for such subject matter to stop the motor combined with braking of
    an element driven thereby (e.g., a turntable).


CLS 369/244
TXT Specific detail of transducer assembly support structure (e.g., tone arm):
    Subject matter under subclass 176 having particular detail of structure to
    maintain the transducer assembly at one or more desired locations.

    (1)     Note.  The holding structure may allow motion of the transducer
    assembly.

    (2)     Note.  This and indented subclasses may include nominal recitation
    of information handling structure. However, details of such structure with
    or without support structure will be classified with the particular
    information handling structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158,    for an acoustical tone arm.


CLS 369/245
TXT With manual tone arm displacement adjunct (e.g., cueing):
    Subject matter under subclass 244 including a tone arm and structure to
    manually change the location of tone arm.

    (1)     Note.  The location change may be engagement or disengagement with,
    or position change on, the storage medium element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for a manually actuated mechanism to place the tone arm at a
    designated location on the storage medium.


CLS 369/246
TXT With viscous limiting of motion (e.g., rate damping):
    Subject matter under subclass 245 further including loading of the
    displacement motion by the internal friction of a liquid.


CLS 369/247
TXT Vibration or resonance suppression (e.g., damping):
    Subject matter under subclass 244 including suppression of undesired
    mechanical energy incident upon a tone arm.


CLS 369/248
TXT By viscous damping:
    Subject matter under subclass 247 wherein the suppression of vibration is
    caused by transmission of vibration through a velocity dependent frictional
    force structure, which is usually a liquid.


CLS 369/249
TXT Having linear guide:
    Subject matter under subclass 244 having a structure restricting transducer
    travel to a path along a straight element.


CLS 369/250
TXT Pivoted arm with tracking path compensation:
    Subject matter under subclass 244 wherein the transducer support structure
    is an arm rotatably mounted upon pivoting structure and has structure to
    modify the tracking path (e.g., pivot motion or supplemental pivot).

    (1)     Note.  The tracking path modification is generally to convert the
    path from an arc to a straight line.


CLS 369/251
TXT Having application of counterbalancing force:
    Subject matter under subclass 244 further including application of a force
    to modify the motion of the transducer assembly supporting structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215+,   for causing motion of transducer supporting structure.


CLS 369/252
TXT Lateral (e.g., antiskating):
    Subject matter under subclass 251 wherein the additional force balances
    forces parallel to the storage medium surface.

    (1)     Note.  Such balancing of forces is often used to prevent skidding
    of a storage medium contacting stylus over the surface.


CLS 369/253
TXT By resilient force element (e.g., spring):
    Subject matter under subclass 251 wherein the counterbalancing force is a
    displacement dependent restoring force applied by a highly elastic
    mechanical device or element.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of such mechanical devices include a hydraulic or
    pneumatic device, a coiled spring, or a block of rubber.


CLS 369/254
TXT Specified weight mounting:
    Subject matter under subclass 251 wherein the force applying structure
    includes details of a gravitational force applying structure.


CLS 369/255
TXT Having specified bearing structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 244 including structural detail of an element
    permitting motion of the transducer assembly support.


CLS 369/256
TXT Mechanical details of cartridge mounting:
    Subject matter under subclass 244 having detail of structure for holding a
    cartridge containing a stylus and transducer on a support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135+,   for such subject matter with structural detail of the transducer or
    of the stylus coupling.


CLS 369/257
TXT Rest:
    Subject matter under subclass 244 having or limited to structure to support
    a portion of the transducer assembly support in an inoperative position.

    (1)     Note.  The support portion of the transducer assembly support is
    often support by the storage medium element during operation.


CLS 369/258
TXT Specific detail of storage medium support or motion production: Subject
    matter under subclass 176 having particular detail for maintaining the
    storage medium at a desired location or condition of motion.


CLS 369/259
TXT For endless web looped about plural rotatable mounts (e.g., belt):

    Subject matter under subclass 258 having a plurality of rotatable elements
    about which a continuous, flexible, flat storage medium element is mounted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 324+ for a machine
    convertible information carrier; e.g., a magnetic tape or image film formed
    in an endless loop.


CLS 369/260
TXT For cylinder:
    Subject matter under subclass 258 having a mounting element (e.g., mandrel)
    for a cylindrical storage medium.


CLS 369/261
TXT For pliable (e.g., floppy) disc:
    Subject matter under subclass 258 wherein the support is particularly
    designed for use with a disc subject to extensive deformation without any
    permanent effect.

    (1)     Note.  Incidental use of a support of general utility (e.g.,
    turntable) for a floppy disc is not classified herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180,    for record changer for such discs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses
    99.01+ for a floppy disk drive mechanism in a magnetic recorder or
    reproducer.


CLS 369/262
TXT With storage medium removal adjunct:
    Subject matter under subclass 258 further including means to remove the
    storage medium element from the support or motion producing structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77.1,   for similar subject matter in a slotted cabinet.

    191+    and 201, for removing storage medium elements in a multiple element
    access devices.


CLS 369/263
TXT Mounting structure for support or motion producing assembly (e.g.,
    vibration damping): Subject matter under subclass 258 with structure for
    keeping either of (a) the support, or (b) the motion producing assembly, at
    a particular location.


CLS 369/264
TXT Turntable:
    Subject matter under subclass 258 having a rotating platform upon which a
    storage medium disc is placed.


CLS 369/265
TXT With auxiliary turntable:
    Subject matter under subclass 264 having an additional turntable and
    driving mechanism therefor.

    (1)     Note.  Speed conversion assemblies placed on a turntable to drive
    another turntable at a different speed are classified in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    197+,   for plural turntables for consecutive access to storage medium
    elements.


CLS 369/266
TXT Driving mechanism:
    Subject matter under subclass 264 including features of an element causing
    or coupling motion of the turntable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, appropriate subclasses for
    motor structure not limited to the specific turntable load.


CLS 369/267
TXT Speed changing:
    Subject matter under subclass 266 including an element for changing the
    rotational speed of the turntable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189+,   for similar subject matter in a record changer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    477,    Interrelated Power Delivery Controls, Including Engine Control, for
    interrelated control between a motor and a transmission, clutch, or brake.


CLS 369/268
TXT Braking:
    Subject matter under subclass 264 including structure to prevent further
    rotation of the turntable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232,    for similar subject matter in which the braking is initiated by a
    trip device.

    234+,   for similar subject matter in which the braking is initiated by the
    tone arm position.


CLS 369/269
TXT Bearing structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 264 having particular contact structure
    associating the rotating assembly with surrounding stationary support
    structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, appropriate subclasses for bearing structure of general
    utility.


CLS 369/270
TXT Disc holding or locating (e.g., spindle structure):

    Subject matter under subclass 264 including structure to maintain the
    position of the disc with respect to the turntable.


CLS 369/271
TXT With detail of storage medium contact structure on turntable surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 270 including detail of turntable surface
    which contacts and supports the disc.


CLS 369/272
TXT STORAGE MEDIUM STRUCTURE:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the specific structure of
    the information bearing storage medium is recited.

    (1)     Note. A blank or starting piece not limited to storage or retrieval
    is classified elsewhere, appropriate to the actual blank.  See search notes
    below.

    (2)     Note.  Mention of intended use such as in the preamble of the claim
    is not enough for classification in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 307+ for a container
    under the class definition for removably containing an article which
    includes machine readable information registered thereon.

    252,    Compositions, appropriate subclasses such as for surface lubricants.

    346,    Recorders, subclasses 200+ for a record blank without grooves.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 92, 102+, and 232+ for
    structure of storage medium structure limited to motion pictures.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 131+
    for structure of record medium limited to magnetic storage.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    appropriate subclasses for subject matter not including storing or
    information.

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclasses for article and process
    of making where not limited to a blank with an information track.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 44+ for stock
    material without an information bearing track.


CLS 369/273
TXT Combined with diverse art structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 272 wherein a storage medium is combined with
    an element or structure of another utility.

    (1)     Note.  The combination is classified elsewhere when provided for in
    the class for such art structure.

    (2)     Note.  Typical diverse art structure is a page of a book with a
    clear laminate carrying a phonograph recording.


CLS 369/274
TXT Composite (e.g., package with preview record):
    Subject matter under subclass 272 wherein several storage medium structures
    are related in some particular way.

    (1)     Note.  One form is of several annular rings snapped together to
    form a large disc with chosen recorded bands.


CLS 369/275.1
TXT Optical track structure (e.g., phase or diffracting structure,
    etc.):Subject matter under subclass 272 wherein an information track is in
    the form of a variation of light modifying structure on the storage medium
    element.

    (1)     Note.  The term "light modifying structure" refers to modification
    such as bending, diffraction, phase variation, but does not include simple
    changes in transmissivity or reflectivity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44.11+, 93+ and 100+, for devices and systems utilizing such storage medium
    elements.

    284+,   for a layered storage medium having information modulation of
    transmissivity or reflectivity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclass 454 for optically coded record sensors;
    subclass 487 for optical records, per se.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements,
    appropriate subclasses for light modifying structure, in general.


CLS 369/275.2
TXT Erasable, reversible or re-recordable:
    Subject matter under 275.1 wherein the recording layer permits information
    therein to be erased, reversibly recorded over or re-recorded over.

    (1)     Note.  The term "re-recorded over is intended to include those
    conditions where the "old" data may still exist after the "new" data is
    recorded onto or over the "old" data, such as where the "new" data may be
    of a different nature such as a different playback frequency or different
    pit size.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13+,    where the recording medium storage uses a different recording
    technique than for retrieval (e.g., optical recording and magnetic
    reproduction), or simultaneous or alternative types of storage or retrieval
    occur etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    280+ and 484 for magneto-optical polarization.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 114 for
    magneto-optic storage wherein the intensity of the flux emanating from a
    record is determined by directing a beam of polarized light at the record
    and detecting the rotation of polarization caused by the flux.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 122 for
    information masking systems which use magneto-optical polarization;
    subclasses 185.01+ for floating gate memory storage (e.g., flash memory).


CLS 369/275.3
TXT Track data format/layout:
    Subject matter under subclass 275.1 wherein a recurrent or repeated data
    arrangement, pattern, sectors, or data blocks occur on the information
    medium.

    (1)     Note.  An organized pattern interrelates with an information
    arrangement pattern.

    (2)     Note.  Examples are:  Pre-formatted subject matter wherein data or
    certain track structure (e.g., guide grooves, etc.) has been pre-recorded,
    pre-etched or pre-formatted on the storage medium, having servo, index or
    address sectors or segments or tracks set forth as to there location with
    respect to other data on the storage medium; radial dependent parameter on
    disc medium subject matter wherein the data or information on a disc type
    storage medium has some parameter of the signal or track structure which
    varies as a function of the disc radius (e.g., pit size in some dimension
    varies dependent as a function of disc radius, or CLV/constant linear
    velocity format of recorded data, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44.26,  for servo system operation related to disc structure information
    format.

    94      and 95, for systems using a storage medium element with more than
    one plane of distinct tracks of recording information.

    111,    for systems using a spiral or helical track.

    280,    where the disc thickness varies as a function of the radius.


CLS 369/275.4
TXT Pit/bubble/groove structure specifics:
    Subject matter under subclass 275.1 wherein data is stored in the form of
    pits (indentations), bubbles (protuberances) or modulation of a groove and
    specifics of the pit/bubble/groove are set forth such as its wall angles,
    dimensions, or phase depth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109,    for systems using a diffraction storage medium such as those with
    pits or a grating.


CLS 369/275.5
TXT Protection (e.g., preventing damage to medium, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 275.1 wherein some means of guarding is
    provided to prevent some undesired effect.

    (1)     Note.  Examples include a protective cover or structure to prevent
    scratches, a protective layer to prevent undesired thermal effect or
    chemical reaction or unwanted optical or recording effects, or an adhesive
    layer to prevent peeling.


CLS 369/276
TXT Electrical track structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 272 wherein the storage medium has a track in
    the form of a variation in an electrical property.

    (1)     Note.  The term "variation in an electrical property" refers to
    modification of an electric field or current, for example, variable depth
    capacitive layers or variable thickness resistive layers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126,    for devices utilizing such storage medium elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 204+ for resistive elements piled
    between terminals; and subclass 211 for a resistive element coated on a
    flexible base.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 271+ for
    electrostatic capacitor structure.


CLS 369/277
TXT Special groove (e.g., particular groove shape):
    Subject matter under subclass 272 wherein the storage medium has a groove
    of specified form.


CLS 369/278
TXT Groove acts as control system signal:
    Subject matter under subclass 277 wherein the position of the groove is
    modified for a predetermined control signal.

    (1)     Note.  Distinction should be noted between position changes related
    to only storage (lateral recording) and changes intended to control a
    sensor (eccentric groove for actuating tone arm trip switch).


CLS 369/279
TXT Guide during storage or retrieval:
    Subject matter under subclass 277 wherein a groove is used to position or
    track the interaction element for engagement adjacent the information
    bearing area of the storage medium.

    (1)     Note.  The guide groove of this subclass is usually unmodulated.
    The information area may be at the bottom of the guide, or to one side, and
    may be of any of the types of interaction classifiable in subclasses 99+.

    (2)     Note.  Subcombinations with magnetic storage are excluded from this
    class and are classified in Class 360, subclass 128.


CLS 369/280
TXT Specific disc profile:
    Subject matter under subclass 272 including a disc, the thickness of which
    varies as a function of the radius.

    (1)     Note.  A typical profile will have ridges at the circumference to
    space the modulated grooves from one disc to another to avoid scratching.


CLS 369/281
TXT With interdisc coupling:
    Subject matter under subclass 280 wherein the disc includes an element
    which couples with a similar element of another disc placed thereon so as
    to prevent slippage between the two discs.

    (1)     Note.  The term "element" in this subclass is intended to include
    configuration of the disc, such as ridges or serrated teeth, as well as
    elements additional to the disc structure.


CLS 369/282
TXT Specified center-hole or locating structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 272 wherein the locating element, whether
    centrally positioned or not, is constructed in a particular way.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 2.1+ for bushings, in general.

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 83+ for nonmetallic composite casting.

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 276+ for a bearing sleeve, or liner.


CLS 369/283
TXT Layered (e.g., permanent protective layer):
    Subject matter under subclass 272 wherein the storage medium has an
    adjacent layer.

    (1)     Note.  This layer may be a base, or substrate, or a loose cover
    layer. The loose cover layer will have a permanent relation to the storage
    medium. The cover layer which is completely removable, such as a paper
    sleeve for a disk record, is classifiable in subclass 291.


CLS 369/284
TXT Radiation beam modified or controlling (e.g., photosensitive, optical
    track):Subject matter under subclass 283 wherein at least one layer is
    either (a) responsive to incident radiation to vary a characteristic of
    such layer, or (b) has an information varied radiation characteristic to
    control a beam of radiation.

    (1)     Note.  The characteristics referred to above are transmissivity or
    reflectivity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100+,   for a device utilizing such storage medium elements.

    275.1,  for a storage medium element with light modifying structure.


CLS 369/285
TXT With mask:
    Subject matter under subclass 284 having a mask placed upon the storage
    medium surface to merge between stored signals.


CLS 369/286
TXT Laminated or unified discrete layers:
    Subject matter under subclass 283 wherein the layers are fused, joined,
    glued, or otherwise made into a unitary structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for methods and apparatus for assembling or making
    elements not limited to information storage.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    appropriate subclasses for such subject matter absent information storage.

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclasses for article and process
    making where not limited to a blank with an information track.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 44+ for stock
    material without an information bearing track.


CLS 369/287
TXT Flexible:
    Subject matter under subclass 272 wherein the storage medium taken as an
    entirety is flexible or bendable without breaking in normal use.


CLS 369/288
TXT Specified material:
    Subject matter under subclass 272 wherein the material of which the storage
    medium is made is specifically stated.

    (1)     Note.  Where not limited to structure of the storage medium as
    classified here, the specific material is classified either in blank or
    starting material, or in the chemical class relating to such composition or
    material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, appropriate subclasses for starting materials not
    limited to structure of the stock or starter article.

    346,    Recorders, subclasses 200+ for a record blank without grooves.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 92, 102+, and 232+ for
    structure of storage medium structure limited to motion picture.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 131+
    for structure of record medium limited to magnetic storage.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    appropriate subclasses for subject matter not including storing of
    information.

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclasses for article and process
    of making where not limited to a blank with an information track.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 44+ for stock
    material without an information bearing track.


CLS 369/289
TXT Adjuncts or adapters:
    Subject matter under subclass 272 having or limited to a separable device
    for use with a storage medium.


CLS 369/290
TXT For central area of disc (e.g., hole size or drive sticker): Subject matter
    under subclass 289 wherein an element is added to the portion of a disc
    storage medium adjacent the center.

    (1)     Note.  An adapter for making small holes from a large hole is
    classified here.

    (2)     Note.  Another form classified here is an adhesive device with
    ridges or bumps for reasons related to a disc storage medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 2.1+ for bushings, in general.

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 276+ for a bearing sleeve, or liner.


CLS 369/291
TXT Protectors:
    Subject matter under subclass 289 wherein an element is formed for covering
    or enclosing a storage medium unit for preventing an undesirable harm.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77.2,   for a storage or retrieval arrangement having a slotted cabinet
    adapted to receive a storage disc in a protective jacket.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 307+ for a container
    under the class definition for removably containing an article which
    includes machine readable information registered thereon.

    220,    Receptacles, various subclasses and especially 200+ for cans or
    other casings without the storage medium unit.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 68.1+ for
    envelopes.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 324.2+, 326+, 335+ for
    a machine convertible information carrier on or within a housing typically
    termed cartridge, cassette, or magazine, and subclass 601 for a spool
    provided with a cover.


CLS 369/292
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:
    Subject matter under the class definition not provided for in any of the
    preceding subclasses of this class.


CLS 370/
TTL MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATIONS

CLS 370/
TXT

    I.      TERM DEFINED

    MULTIPLEXING

    The simultaneous transmission of two or more information signals in either
    or both directions over a common (same) transmission medium in such a
    manner that the information signals may be discretely recovered.

    II.     GENERAL STATEMENT OF THE CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    A.      This is the generic class for multiplexing or duplexing systems,
    methods, or apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  Multiplexing includes for example, time division
    multiplexing (TDM) frequency division multiplexing (FDM), orthogonal and
    quasiorthogonal multiplexing techniques, phantom connections and plural
    channel adaptive systems.

    (2)     Note.  Selective or telemetering systems which may be analogous to
    multiplexing techinques not classified here but rather in Class 340,
    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825+ and 870.11+ respectively.

    (3)     Note.  The distinction between multiplexing and selective or
    telemetry is:  in multiplexing, the information is unrestricted as to
    content, e.g., a teletype-writer which uses an alphabet to transmit
    unlimited information, whereas in selective or telemetry devices, the
    information is restricted as to content, e.g., a transducer measuring a
    single parameter.

    B.      This class includes elements and circuits forming subcombinations
    having a utility unique to multiplexing such as rotary distributors used as
    multiplexers, synchronizers used to control distribution of multiplexed
    channels, bridge duplex circuits, resonant circuits having a special
    utility in a frequency division multiplexing system.

    (1)     Note.  Multiplex modulators, per se, are not classified in this
    class.  See Class 332, Modulators, subclasses 106+ for multiplex pulse
    modulation, subclasses 119+ for multiplex frequency modulation, subclasses
    144+ for multiplex phase modulation, and subclasses 151+ for multiplex
    amplitude modulation.

    C.      Electrical circuits which may be used in multiplexing systems but
    are not unique to multiplex communications are classified in the
    appropriate class for such circuits.  For example: Converging or diverging
    switches, Class 327, subclasses 407+ and 415+; Selective system, Class 340,
    subclasses 825+; and Telemetering, Class 340, subclasses 870.11+.

    D.      Significantly claimed multiplex techniques in combination with the
    subject matter of Classes:  178, Telegraphy; 375, Pulse or Digital
    Communications; 379, Telephonic Communications or 455, Telecommunications,
    are classified in Class 370, Multiplex Communications.

    E.      Significantly claimed apparatus external to this class, claimed in
    combination with apparatus under the class definition, which perform
    multiplexing operations, are classified in the class appropriate to the
    external device.  (see section II D above).  For example:  Magnetic
    recording/reproducing, Class 360, subclass 18; Optical
    recording/reproducing, Class 369, subclass 102; Facsimile, Class 358,
    subclass 425; Selective (e.g., remote control), Class 340, subclasses 825+;
    Telemetering, Class 340, subclasses 870.11+; Information Processing System
    Organization, Class 395; Measuring and Testing, Class 73, appropriate
    subclass; Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, Class 324, appropriate
    subclass; and Measuring, Testing, or Monitoring, Class 364, subclasses 550+.

    F.      Nominally claimed apparatus external to this class in combination
    with apparatus under the class definition, is classified in this class
    unless provided for in the appropriate external class.  For example, a
    nominally recited coupled network which includes significant multiplexing
    operations is classified herein.

    G.      Multiplexing systems and related devices found in other classes:

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, appropriate subclass for multiplexed
    railway signalling information.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 562 for multiplexed
    data-transmission links utilized in a servo systems.

    327,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 407+
    and 415+  for converging and diverging signal switched paths, respectively.


    329,    Demodulators, subclasses 300+ for frequency shift keying
    demodulator; subclasses 304+ for phase shift keying demodulator; subclasses
    311+ for pulse demodulator; subclasses 315+ for frequency modulation
    demodulator; subclasses 345+ for phase modulation demodulator; and
    subclasses 347+ for amplitude modulation demodulator.

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 100+ for frequency shift keying modulator;
    subclasses 103+ for phase shift keying modulator; subclasses 106+ for pulse
    modulators; subclasses 117+ for frequency modulator; subclasses 144+ for
    phase modulator; and subclasses 149+ for amplitude modulator.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 1 for plural
    transmission lines or networks; subclass 4 for balanced transmission lines;
    subclass 117 for hydrid-type networks; and subclasses 165 through 167 for
    wave filters.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 853.1+ for geophysical
    systems which may include multiplexing means; subclasses 825+ for selective
    systems analogous to multiplexing systems; subclasses 870.11+ for
    telemetering which may include multiplexing means.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclass 141 for multiplex in
    analog to or from digital conversion.

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave System and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 1 through 25 for radar systems which
    may include multiplexing systems.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, appropriate subclasses for display
    communications which may include multiplexing means.

    348,    Television, appropriate subclasses for television signal
    transmission which may use multiplexing techniques.

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 425 for multiplex facsimile information.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    113+ for duplex optical communication and subclasses 115+ for multiplex
    optical communication.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 18+
    for multiplex magnetic information.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 189.01+ and
    230.01+, for a static memory system with the handling of signal information
    or the addressing of memory locations respectively analogous to
    multiplexing techinques particularly subclasses 189.02 and 230.02 for such
    a system having multiplexed signals in each of the respective systems.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 102 for plural
    information signals multiplexed on an optical storage track.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery,
    appropriate subclasses which are not limited to multiplex communications,
    particularly subclasses 8.1+ for replacement with spare device, subclass
    11.2 for reconfiguring transmission facility, and subclasses 20.1+ for
    transmission facility testing.


    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    1+ for stereo, especially subclasses 2+ for broadcast and multiplex stereo.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, subclasses 1+, 4+, or 16+ for optical
    waveguides with modulation or switching.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 200.3+ for
    general purpose programmable computers which may include multiplexing
    techniques wherein data is transferred between the computers and processing
    of the data by the computers occurs before or after the data transfer
    operation, subclasses 280+ for intrasystem connection, subclasses 726
    through 732 for generic access locking, polling, or arbitrating, and
    subclasses 821+ for input/output (I/O) data processing.


CLS 370/200
TXT PHANTOM:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein an additional channel is
    derived from two suitable arranged pairs of wires called side channels, and
    each pair of wires is a channel itself and at the same time acts as one
    conductor of the phantom channel.

    (1)     Note.  The phantom channel is added by differentially modulating
    the longitudinal, common mode signals of each wire channel at one end of
    both wire channels and by detecting the difference at the other end of said
    wire channels.  Signals from the phantom channel thus are canceled from the
    output of the individual wire channels, but appear as the difference
    between values of common mode currents carried by the wire channels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 45 for a phantom connection on a loaded
    circuit.


CLS 370/201
TXT CROSSTALK SUPPRESSION:

    Subject matter under the class definition including special arrangements to
    eliminate interference among multiplexed channels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278     and 282+, for a transmit/receive interaction control in a duplex
    system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 69+ for circuit maintenance.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclass 417 for telephone cross talk
    suppression, in general.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    13, 47, 71.1+, 83, 93, and 94.1+ for noise and feedback suppression in a
    one-way audio signal transmission system.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 24, 63, 135, 222+, 278.1, 283+,
    296+, and 501+ for noise suppression in a radio system  in general.


CLS 370/202
TXT AMPLITUDE COMPRESSION OR EXPANSION:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein magnitude or a signal is
    reduced prior to transmission and a corresponding magnitude restoration is
    performed at reception.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    477,    for a multiplex system using bandwidth conservation technique.

    521,    for a multiplex system with time compression or expansion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 14 for a companding
    device.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, appropriate subclasses for a
    code converter which may include bandwidth reduction.

    348,    Television, subclasses 384+ for bandwidth reduction relating to
    television signal  processing.

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 426+ for bandwidth reduction relating to
    video processing.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    29+ for audio bandwidth compression or expansion.


CLS 370/203
TXT GENERALIZED ORTHOGONAL OR SPECIAL MATHEMATICAL TECHNIQUES:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein (a) a multiplexed channel
    is uniquely identified and separated from other multiplexed channels by
    members of a pair of mathematical functions having a sum of products or
    having an integral that is zero or sometimes one under specified
    conditions, or (b) particular mathematical processes are used to achieve
    multiplexing techniques.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include TDM or FDM techniques.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses
    725.01+ for orthogonal transformations.


CLS 370/204
TXT Plural diverse modulation techniques:

    Subject matter under subclass 203 wherein a wave carrier of information is
    being modified by more than one modulation technique.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    478,    for a system employing both time division and frequency division
    multiplex.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    332,    Modulators, subclass 108 for multiplex pulse modulation, per se;
    subclasses 119+ for multiplex frequency modulation, per se; subclasses 144+
    for multiplex phase modulation, per se; and subclasses 151+ for multiplex
    amplitude modulation, per se.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, appropriate subclass for
    nonmultiplexed pulse or digital modulation in combination with analog
    modulation.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems, and Devices, subclasses
    2+ for broadcast or multiplex stereo systems using plural diverse types of
    modulation.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 102 for plural modulations of
    nonmultiplexed analog signals.


CLS 370/205
TXT Pulse width and pulse position modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 204 wherein information is contained in the
    time duration of a pulse (pulse width) and in the time of occurrence (pulse
    position) of one pulse after a reference pulse.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    332,    Modulators, subclass 108 for multiplex pulse modulation, per se.


CLS 370/206
TXT Quadrature carriers:

    Subject matter under subclass 203 wherein two carrier frequencies are 90
    degrees in phase (i.e.,  quadrature or orthogonal in phase), e.g., sin2  wt
    and cos2  wt.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclass 235 for equalizing of
    digital quadrature channels.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    19+ for quadrasonic stereo channels.


CLS 370/207
TXT Having a signaling constellation:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 wherein supervisory information is
    transmitted or received in a symbol pattern different from the symbol
    pattern carrying the primary information, and wherein the symbol patterns
    are generated using quadrature modulation technique (e.g., QAM, QPSK, etc.).


CLS 370/208
TXT Particular set of orthogonal functions:

    Subject matter under subclass 203 wherein a special set of orthogonal
    functions are used to achieve multiplexed transmission (e.g., Legendre
    polynomials, Bessel functions).


CLS 370/209
TXT Walsh functions:

    Subject matter under subclass 208 wherein the set of orthogonal functions
    consist of Walsh functions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 727.01
    for a Walsh transformation using an electric digital calculating computer
    in a nonmultiplex communication.


CLS 370/210
TXT Fourier transform:

    Subject matter under subclass 203 utilizing a special mathematical
    relationship that provides a connection between information in the
    frequency domain and the time domain.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 726.01
    for a Fourier transform using an electric digital calculating computer in a
    nonmultiplex communication.


CLS 370/211
TXT Level multiplex:

    Subject matter under subclass 203 wherein two or more information signals,
    each of the signals having a unique amplitude or level, are combined to
    form a combined signal wherein the individual information signals are
    separable by amplitude or level.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclass 286+ for a pulse waveform
    with two or more discrete amplitude levels.


CLS 370/212
TXT PULSE WIDTH (PULSE DURATION) MODULATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein information is contained
    in the time duration of a pulse.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213,    for pulse position modulation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 109+ for a multiplex pulse width modulator,
    per se.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclass 238 for nonmultiplex
    pulse width modulation.


CLS 370/213
TXT PULSE POSITION MODULATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein information is contained
    in the time of occurrence of a pulse after a reference pulse.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212,    for pulse width modulation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 112+ for a multiplex pulse position
    modulator, per se.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclass 239 for nonmultiplex
    pulse position modulation.


CLS 370/214
TXT SIMULTANEOUS TELEGRAPHY AND TELEPHONY:

    Subject matter under the class definition including concurrent transmission
    of bidirectional pulse information signal and audio signal over a single
    transmission channel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 108.01+ for alternative
    transmission of a telegraph or telephone signal over a single channel.


CLS 370/215
TXT PHASE MODULATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein information is contained
    in a shift in phase of a carrier frequency with respect to a reference
    phase.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 144+ for a multiplex phase modulator, per se.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 110+ for angle modulation of
    transmitting signals; and subclasses 205+ for phase modulation of receiving
    signals.


CLS 370/216
TXT FAULT RECOVERY:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a corrective action is
    taken to return a faulty device or system to a satisfactory operating
    condition.

    (1)     Note. Data flow congestion is not considered to be a fault.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229+,   for data flow congestion prevention or congestion control in a
    multiplex system.

    241+,   for the diagnostic testing of a normal or abnormal operation of a
    multiplex communication element or system without any necessary corrective
    action.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery,
    appropriate subclasses for fault detection and recovery of a digital data
    system which is generic and not limited to multiplex communications.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 181+ for
    fault recovery of generic information processing system which is not
    limited to multiplex communication.


CLS 370/217
TXT Bypass an inoperative switch or inoperative element of a switching system:

    Subject matter under subclass 216 including a switching system or network
    which has a provision for alternate routing when the system is fault.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244,    for fault detection of a switching system.

    250+,   for testing of a standard operation of a switching system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 825.16 for selective
    communication monitoring  in a faulty condition.


CLS 370/218
TXT Packet switching system or element:

    Subject matter under subclass 217 wherein information routed in the
    switching system is organized by one or more bytes preceded by an address
    header.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS,  SUBCLASS:

    389,    for packet switching, per se.


CLS 370/219
TXT Standby switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 218 wherein the provision for alternate
    routing of packet switched traffics is a spare or backup switch.


CLS 370/220
TXT Standby switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 217 wherein the provision for alternated
    routing in the switching system is a spare or backup switch.


CLS 370/221
TXT Bypass an inoperative station:

    Subject matter under subclass 216 wherein a faulty node or terminal is
    excluded from service.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclasses
    11.2 for reconfiguration of a system to provide correction in response to a
    fault.


CLS 370/222
TXT In a ring or loop network:

    Subject matter under subclass 221 wherein the inoperative station is an
    element in a closed path transmission system.


CLS 370/223
TXT Using a secondary ring or loop:

    Subject matter under subclass 222 wherein the inoperative station is
    bypassed by using an auxiliary closed transmission loop.


CLS 370/224
TXT Loopback of signals on the secondary ring or loop:

    Subject matter under subclass 223 wherein information on the secondary loop
    is transmitted in reverse direction with the normal transmission loop.


CLS 370/225
TXT Bypass an inoperative channel:

    Subject matter under subclass 216 wherein another path or channel is
    selected and substituted for a path or channel that is malfunctioning.


CLS 370/226
TXT In a repeater system:

    Subject matter under subclass 225 wherein the communication system has at
    least one retransmission station wherein an alternate communication channel
    is provided to convey information when a primary channel or link is failed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242,    for fault detection of a repeater system.

    246+,   for testing of a standard operation of a repeater.

    274,    for a quadruplex repeater.

    279     and 293, for a duplex repeater.

    315+,   for a repeater in communication over free space.

    492,    for repeating information via a frequency channel.

    501+,   for repeating information via a time channel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclass 4 for nonmultiplex telephone
    alternate routing around a faulty  repeater.


CLS 370/227
TXT Using a spare channel:

    Subject matter under subclass 226 wherein the multiplex repeater system has
    a primary and a backup or protection line, and the backup line is activated
    to route information data when the primary channel is malfunctioning.


CLS 370/228
TXT Spare channel:

    Subject matter under subclass 225 wherein the multiplex system has a
    primary and a backup line, and the backup is activated to routed
    information data when the primary channel is malfunctioning.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 825.01 for selective
    communications with a spare channel.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclass
    8.2 for replacement with spare transmission facility or channel which is
    not a multiplex communication system.


CLS 370/229
TXT DATA FLOW CONGESTION PREVENTION OR CONTROL:

    Subject matter under the class definition including provisions for (a)
    avoiding or (b) regulating an actual or potential traffic overload
    condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241+,   for the diagnostic testing of a multiplex communication element or
    system without any necessary action for regulating the traffic overload
    condition.


CLS 370/230
TXT Control of data admission to the network:

    Subject matter under subclass 229 having means for regulating the amount of
    data entering a multiplex network so as to prevent an overloading or a
    further overloading of the network.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235,    for regulating the flow of data between switches or nodes in a
    network.


CLS 370/231
TXT End-to-end flow control:

    Subject matter under subclass 230 wherein a signaling between an
    originating terminal point and a destination terminal point regulates the
    amount of information transmitted into the network.


CLS 370/232
TXT Based on data flow rate measurement:

    Subject matter under subclass 230 wherein the control of data flow overload
    is based on a measurement of the amount of information transmitted per unit
    time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252+,   for determination of communication parameters which may includes a
    measurement of data flow rate.


CLS 370/233
TXT Measurement of the peak data flow rate:

    Subject matter under subclass 232 wherein the control of data flow overload
    is based on a measurement of a maximum value of data flow rate.


CLS 370/234
TXT Measurement of the average data flow rate:

    Subject matter under subclass 232 wherein the control of data flow overload
    is based on a  measurement of a medial value of the data flow rate.


CLS 370/235
TXT Flow control of data transmission through a network:

    Subject matter under subclass 229 having means to regulate the amount of
    information transmitted through the network once the data is in the network.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230+,   for regulation the flow of data at a network entry point.


CLS 370/236
TXT Including signaling between network elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 235 wherein supervisory or control
    information is transmitted between switches or nodes to control data flow
    between switches or nodes.


CLS 370/237
TXT Congestion based rerouting:

    Subject matter under subclass 235 wherein data is communicated on an
    alternate channel when a preferred or desired channel is unavailable due to
    excessive amounts of information already being carried on the preferred or
    desired channel.


CLS 370/238
TXT Least cost or minimum delay routing:

    Subject matter under subclass  235 wherein data is communicated on a
    channel or channels  based upon the determination that the selected channel
    or channels will have the lowest (a) toll, expense, or (b) delay.


CLS 370/239
TXT Using antijabber circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 229 having circuitry for disabling a device
    which is transmitting more information than allocated or transmitting for a
    greater period of time than allocated.


CLS 370/240
TXT In a star coupler:

    Subject matter under subclass 239 wherein the antijabber circuit is in a
    coupling means that distributes signals from one or more inputs among a
    larger number of outputs.


CLS 370/241
TXT DIAGNOSTIC TESTING (OTHER THAN SYNCHRONIZATION):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein at least part of a
    multiplex system is to be evaluated for its performance.

    (1)     Note.   This subclass may include a sole monitoring operation,
    i.e., a terminal which displays or indicates the operating state of the
    multiplex communication system or element.

    (2)     Note.   Testing for the purpose of synchronization in the multiplex
    communication via time channels is not classified in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216+,   for fault recovery in a multiplex system.

    229+,   for preventing or controlling an overload condition in a multiplex
    system.

    503+,   for monitoring of synchronization which may include testing for the
    purpose of synchronization.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 500+ for a generic
    conditional responsive alarm system.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclasses
    20.1+ for a generic transmission facility testing of a digital device.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclass 224 for testing of a
    digital communication system.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 1+, for testing of a
    telephone system.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 183.01+ for
    diagnostic testing of a generic information processing system organization
    which is not limited to multiplex communication.


CLS 370/242
TXT Fault detection:

    Subject matter under subclasses 241 wherein the multiplex communication
    system is tested for any nonstandard operating condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216+,   for multiplex communication systems which take corrective actions
    in response to the detection of a fault.


CLS 370/243
TXT Of a repeater system:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 wherein a retransmission station in the
    multiplex system is tested for any nonstandard operating condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226,    for fault recovery by alternate routing in a repeater system.

    246+,   for testing of a standard operation of a repeater.

    274,    for a quadruplex repeater.

    293,    for a duplex repeater.

    315+,   for a repeater in communications over free space.

    492,    for a repeater communicating information by combining or
    distributing via frequency channels.

    501+,   for a repeater communicating information by combining or
    distributing via time channels.


CLS 370/244
TXT Of a switching system:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 wherein a multiplex switching system is
    tested for any nonstandard operating condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217+,   for fault recovery by bypassing a faulty switch.

    250+,   for testing of a standard operation of a switching system.


CLS 370/245
TXT Of a local area network:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 wherein a communication network over a
    limited geographical area is tested for any nonstandard operating condition.


CLS 370/246
TXT Of a repeater:

    Subject matter under subclass 241 including the testing of a standard
    operation of a multiplex signal retransmission station.

    (1)     Note.  The repeater is often a duplex or a bidirectional repeater.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226,    for fault recovery by alternate routing in a repeater system.

    243,    for fault detection of a repeater system.

    274,    for a quadruplex repeater.

    293,    for a duplex repeater.

    315+,   for a repeater in communications over free space.

    492,    for a repeater communicating information by combining or
    distributing via frequency channels.

    501+,   for a repeater communicating information by combining or
    distributing via time channels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclass
    20.2 for generic testing of a communication channel including a repeater.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclass 213 for testing of a
    digital repeater.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclass 4 for testing of a
    bidirectional telephone repeater.


CLS 370/247
TXT Having a dedicated test line or channel:

    Subject matter under subclass 246 wherein a specified transmission link or
    channel is committed for the testing of a repeater system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251,    for testing of a switching system with dedicated test line or
    channel.

    438+,   for channel assignment using a separate control line or bus for
    access control.

    524,    for communication via time channels using a dedicated signaling
    channel.


CLS 370/248
TXT Path check:

    Subject matter under subclass 241 wherein a link through a multiplex system
    or a connection established through a multiplex switching network is
    monitored for circuit continuity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    351+,   for locating a path through a multiplex switching system.


CLS 370/249
TXT Loopback:

    Subject matter under subclass 241 wherein an equipment is tested by
    connecting a received path to a transmitted path and monitoring the output
    as an indication of the condition of the equipment.

    (1)     Note.  Included are arrangements providing loopback within a single
    terminal.


CLS 370/250
TXT Of a switching system:

    Subject matter under subclass 241 including an evaluation of a multiplex
    switching system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217+,   for bypassing a faulty switch.

    244,    for fault detection of a switching system.

    360+,   for controlling the switching of signals through a circuit switch.


CLS 370/251
TXT Having dedicated test line or channel:

    Subject matter under subclass 250 wherein a specified transmission link or
    channel is committed for the testing of a switching system.


CLS 370/252
TXT Determination of communication parameters:

    Subject matter under subclass 241 wherein a particular communication
    parameter is measured (e.g., traffic noise ratio, freeze out ratio, etc.).


CLS 370/253
TXT Measurement of flow rate of messages having an address header:

    Subject matter under subclass 252 wherein the communication parameter is
    the amount of information transmitted per unit time over a network, and
    wherein information signal is represented by one or a group of bytes
    preceded by identification information indicative of a source or
    destination station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232+,   for measurement of data flow rate to control the admission of data
    to the multiplex network.


CLS 370/254
TXT NETWORK CONFIGURATION DETERMINATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition including apparatus or techniques
    for determining what or how network elements are interconnected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    351+,   for pathfinding or routing.


CLS 370/255
TXT Using a particular learning algorithm or technique:

    Subject matter under subclass 254 wherein the network uses a set of rules
    for solving a problem (configuration determination) in a well defined
    number of steps and also has an ability to create or adjust its own set of
    such rules.


CLS 370/256
TXT Spanning tree:

    Subject matter under subclass 255 wherein one node from a plurality of
    nodes in the network is selected as a root or base node with branches
    interconnecting other nodes to the root node, and wherein the network
    configuration is determined by the relationship between the branch nodes
    and the root node.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    408,    for packet routing in a switching network having nodes
    interconnected in a hierarchy to form a tree.


CLS 370/257
TXT In a bus system:

    Subject matter under subclass 254 involving the configuration determination
    in a network having a common transmission line (bus) forming a
    communication path between a plurality of the user's terminals with the
    network.

    (1)     Note. Terminal address determination is properly classified in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    457,    for initialization of a token passing communication system (i.e.,
    IEEE 802.4).


CLS 370/258
TXT In a ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 257 including the configuration determination
    in a bus network having a closed transmission path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    453,    for initialization of a token passing loop or ring communication
    system (i.e., IEEE 802.5).


CLS 370/259
TXT SPECIAL SERVICES:

    Subject matter under the class definition including provisions for
    subscriber services normally provided with additional fees in a multiplex
    communication network.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of the special services are conferencing, repertory
    dialing, call forwarding or transfer, paging, and call waiting, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 14+ for interactive videophone which may
    include multiplex communication.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 201+ for special services in
    a telephone system which are not limited to a multiplex communication system


CLS 370/260
TXT Conferencing:

    Subject matter under subclass 259 which enables three or more terminals to
    be included in a single call connection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclass 15 for video conferencing.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 202+ for telephonic
    conferencing.


CLS 370/261
TXT Technique for setting up a conference call:

    Subject matter under subclass 260 including details of a process or
    procedure for connecting conferees.

    (1)     Note. This subclass includes supervision or control in connecting a
    call.


CLS 370/262
TXT Operator setup of the conference:

    Subject matter under subclass 261 wherein an operator assists in connecting
    conferees.


CLS 370/263
TXT Conferee signals combined or distributed via time channels:

    Subject matter under subclass 260 wherein conferee signals are assembled or
    separated via different time periods.


CLS 370/264
TXT Using plural diverse channel communications with a dedicated signaling
    channel (i.e., ISDN):

    Subject matter under subclass 263 including a digital communication network
    which simultaneously provides diverse data services including voice, data,
    or video, the network typically provides the user or subscriber access to
    information bearing channels and an indicating channel (i.e., 2 B-Channels
    + 1 D-Channel).

    (1)     Note.  ISDN is an abbreviation of Integrated System Digital Network.


CLS 370/265
TXT Particular technique for combining diverse information types:

    Subject matter under subclass 263 including specific details of techniques
    for combining voice with nonvoice data signals for transmission in the
    conference communication.

    (1)     Note.  The nonvoice data signals may be related or unrelated to the
    voice signal

    (2)     Note.  This subclass may include nominal video signal and
    significant multiplexing technique.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclass 15 for television conferencing wherein the
    image signal transmitted is representative of a live scene.


CLS 370/266
TXT Using summation of conferee signals:

    Subject matter under subclass 263 including a technique for adding conferee
    signals.


CLS 370/267
TXT Digital summation:

    Subject matter under subclass 266 including a technique for adding discrete
    type conferee signals.


CLS 370/268
TXT Including cancellation of certain signals:

    Subject matter under subclass 267 wherein the digital summation is combined
    with a subtraction of certain signals (e.g., canceling one of the conferee
    signals).


CLS 370/269
TXT Including cancellation of certain signals:

    Subject matter under subclass 266 wherein the summation is combined with a
    subtraction of certain signals.


CLS 370/270
TXT Distribution of signals to multiple agent stations:

    Subject matter under subclass 259 having a central controller which
    receives incoming signals and distributes signals to operators at more than
    one station in the system.


CLS 370/271
TXT Special feature of multiplex telephone terminal:

    Subject matter under subclass 259 including structural details of a
    telephone used to provide special services to a subscriber in the multiplex
    communications.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 157+ and 201+ which may have
    special service telephone terminals without dealing with multiplex
    communications.


CLS 370/272
TXT SEXTUPLEX:

    Subject matter under the class definition for the simultaneous transmission
    of six messages, three in each direction over the same transmission medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273+,   for a quaduplex system.

    276,    for a duplex system.

    297,    for a diplex system.


CLS 370/273
TXT QUADRUPLEX:

    Subject matter under the class definition for the simultaneous transmission
    of four messages, two in each direction over the same transmission medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272,    for a sextuplex system.

    276,    for a duplex system.

    297,    for a diplex system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 66.1 for simplex transmission with pulsating
    currents.


CLS 370/274
TXT Repeater:

    Subject matter under subclass 273 in which a retransmission station is
    adapted to quadruplex work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    279     and 293, for a radio and a wire duplex repeater, respectively.

    315+,   for a repeater used in communication over free space.

    492,    for a repeater used in multiplex communications over frequency
    channels.

    501,    for a repeater used in multiplex communications over time channels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 70+ for a repeating system other than
    quadruplex repeater.

    330,    Amplifiers, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclass 61 for
    amplifier (one-way repeater).

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 211+ for a pulse or
    digital repeater communication system.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 338+ for a two way repeater,
    specific to telephony and acting usually through varying current and
    contact pressure rather than by current interruptions.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 7+ for analog repeater communication
    systems.


CLS 370/275
TXT Duplex diplex:

    Subject matter under subclass 273 wherein quadruplexing is achieved by
    diplexing two duplex systems or by duplexing two diplex systems.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    276,    for a duplex system.

    297,    for a diplex system.


CLS 370/276
TXT DUPLEX:

    Subject matter under the class definition for effectively transmitting
    messages simultaneously, one in each direction, over the same transmission
    medium.

    (1)     Note.  Circuits convertible to full duplex operation are also
    classified here.

    (2)     Note.  Full duplex describes two data paths which allow
    simultaneous data transmission in both directions.  Half duplex describes
    one data path which allows data transmission in either of two directions,
    but only one direction at a time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272,    for a sextuplex system.

    273+,   for a quadruplex system.

    275,    for a duplex diplex system.

    296,    for a circuit convertible to half duplex.

    297,    for a diplex system.


CLS 370/277
TXT Communication over free space:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 wherein multiplex communication signals
    are transmitted over a medium which is not a wire or a waveguide.

    (1)     Note.  A waveguide may be used in this communication system for
    other purpose (e.g., for coupling).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    113+ for duplex and subclasses 115+ for multiplex optical communication
    which includes an optical waveguide.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, appropriate subclasses for digital
    communications not limited to multiplex communications.

    455,    Telecommunications, appropriate subclasses for nonmultiplex radio
    communications.


CLS 370/278
TXT Transmit/receive interaction control:

    Subject matter under subclass 277 having means at a station to reduce,
    neutralize, or prevent transfer of an unwanted communication energy between
    a transmitter and a receiver so that the transmitted communication energy
    (e.g., carrier or message signal) does not adversely affect the receiver,
    or so that the received communication energy does not adversely affect the
    transmitter.

    (1)     Note.  Means may be provided to feed a portion of the transmission
    energy to the receiver, or a portion of the received energy to the
    transmitter for monitoring or cancellation.


CLS 370/279
TXT Duplex repeaters:

    Subject matter under subclass 277 including circuitry for compensating
    attenuation losses of duplex signals or for increasing the communication
    range for extension terminal equipment at either end of a duplex
    transmission line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 70+ for a telegraphic nonmultiplex repeater.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 7+ for a nonmultiplex
    telecommunication repeater system.


CLS 370/280
TXT Time division:

    Subject matter under subclass 277 wherein duplex transmission and reception
    signals access a transmission medium in separate time intervals at such a
    rate as to give the appearance of a simultaneous transmission and reception.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    345+,   for a wireless multiplex communications via time channels not
    limited to a duplex system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 73 for a push-to-talk transceiver.


CLS 370/281
TXT Frequency division:

    Subject matter under subclass 277 wherein simultaneous transmission and
    reception between communicating stations occur in separate portions of the
    frequency spectrum of the transmission medium.

    (1)     Note.  Classification here requires more than merely two stations
    in communication on different frequencies. Full duplex operation (i.e.,
    simultaneous transmission and reception by each station) is required.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    343+,   for wireless multiplex communications via frequency channels not
    limited to a duplex system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 23 for a nonmultiplex frequency
    carrier wave repeater system.


CLS 370/282
TXT Transmit/receive interaction control:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 having means at a station to reduce,
    neutralize, or prevent transfer of an unwanted communication energy between
    a transmitter and a receiver so that the transmitted communication energy
    (e.g., carrier or message signal) does not adversely affect the receiver,
    or so that the received communication energy does not adversely affect the
    transmitter.

    (1)     Note.  Means may be provided to feed a portion of the transmission
    energy to the receiver, or a portion of the received energy to the
    transmitter for monitoring or cancellation.


CLS 370/283
TXT Artificial line:

    Subject matter under subclass 282 in which an electrical equivalent of a
    transmission line is used to balance out an effect of local transmission
    current on a local receiving device so the local receiving device responds
    only to signals from the remote transmitter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 4+ for plural
    channel systems with balance circuits and subclass 23 for an artificial
    line in a wave transmission lines or network.


CLS 370/284
TXT Differential:

    Subject matter under subclass 282 wherein a signal is subtracted from a
    composite to achieve separation of transmitted and received signals.


CLS 370/285
TXT Bridge:

    Subject matter under subclass 282 wherein the duplex system comprises a
    circuit type wheatstone-bridge in which substantial neutrality of a
    receiving apparatus to transmitted currents is obtained by impedance
    balance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 117 for a hybrid
    circuit, per se.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclass 345 for a hybrid circuit used
    with a telephone repeater and subclasses 402+ for hybrid circuit used in
    telephone line interfacing.


CLS 370/286
TXT Echo suppression or cancellation:

    Subject matter under subclass  282  having means to reduce undesirable
    effects caused by reflected communication signals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 406+ for this subject matter
    in a nonmultiplexed telephone circuit.


CLS 370/287
TXT Disabling or inhibiting:

    Subject matter under subclass 286 wherein the echo cancellation or
    suppression is performed by blocking a certain signal.


CLS 370/288
TXT Using an attenuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 286 wherein a device is used to reduce the
    magnitude of the reflected communication signal.


CLS 370/289
TXT Having residual echo cancellation or suppression:

    Subject matter under subclass 286 wherein an apparatus is provided to
    cancel or suppress the echo remaining after the main echo has been
    suppressed.


CLS 370/290
TXT Using a particular adaptive filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 286 having a filtering apparatus which adapts
    itself to the varying echo signal to suppress or cancel the echo in the
    main or primary signal.


CLS 370/291
TXT Using a transversal filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 290 wherein the filtering apparatus is
    consists of one or more tapped delay lines with a summing or weighing
    circuit.


CLS 370/292
TXT Using a training sequence:

    Subject matter under subclass 286 wherein a particular information signal
    is communicated to teach an echo canceler or suppressor how to cancel or
    suppress an echo.


CLS 370/293
TXT Duplex repeaters or extenders:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 including circuitry for compensating for
    attenuation losses of duplex signals or for increasing the communication
    range for extension terminal equipment at either end of a duplex
    transmission line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 70+ for a telegraphic nonmultiplex repeater.

    330,    Amplifiers, for an amplifier which may be used as a repeater.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 338+ for a telephonic
    nonmultiplex repeater.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 7+ for a nonmultiplex
    telecommunication repeater system.


CLS 370/294
TXT Time division:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 wherein duplex transmission and reception
    signals access a transmission medium in separate time intervals at such a
    rate as to give the appearance of a simultaneous transmission and reception.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    498+,   for combining or distributing information via time channels not
    limited to a duplex system.


CLS 370/295
TXT Frequency division:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 wherein simultaneous transmission and
    reception between communicating stations occur in separate portions of the
    frequency spectrum of the transmission medium.

    (1)     Note.  Classification here requires more than merely two stations
    in communication on different frequencies. "Full duplex operation" (i.e.,
    simultaneous transmission and reception by each station) is required.

    (2)     Note.  FDM duplex systems (i.e., FDM signals simultaneously
    transmitted and received) are classified here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    480+,   for combining or distributing information via frequency channels
    not limited to a duplex system.


CLS 370/296
TXT Convertible to half duplex:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 wherein the transmission and reception of
    signals occur alternately rather than substantially simultaneously, but
    where the circuitry is convertible to full duplex operation.


CLS 370/297
TXT DIPLEX:

    Subject matter under the class definition for the simultaneous transmission
    of two messages in the same direction over the same transmission medium.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is the home for diplex telegraphy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    275,    for combination of duplex and diplex means in a quadruplex system.

    276+,   for a duplex system.


CLS 370/298
TXT LOW SPEED ASYNCHRONOUS DATA SYSTEM (E.G., TELETYPEWRITER SERVICE):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the multiplex feature is
    unique to a system in which data flow is normally slow and data is not
    recurring at exactly the same periods.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of such systems are teletypewriter and telegraphy.

    (2)     Note.  A signal transmission speed lower than 300 symbols per
    second may be considered a low speed transmission in the scope of this
    class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, appropriate subclass for nonmultiplex asynchronous data
    systems including a teletypewriter.


CLS 370/299
TXT Data switching exchange:

    Subject matter under subclass 298 including switching of input lines to
    selected output lines.


CLS 370/300
TXT Data assembly or formatting:

    Subject matter under subclass 298 in which data bytes are grouped or
    regrouped in particular orders, (e.g., formatting by removal of start or
    stop bits).


CLS 370/301
TXT Transmitting time of transition and logic state:

    Subject matter under subclass 298 in which a representation of the time
    elapsed between a previous scan and a data transition from one logic state
    to another is transmitted along with information about the logic value of
    the data either before or after the transition.


CLS 370/302
TXT Channels separated in frequency:

    Subject matter under subclass 298 wherein channels of a low speed
    asynchronous data system are tuned to respective separate frequencies.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    295,    for a frequency division duplex system.

    343+,   for combining or distributing information via frequency channels in
    communication over free space.

    480+,   for combining or distributing information via frequency channels
    not limited to carrying low speed asynchronous data.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    334,    Tuners, appropriate subclasses for a tuner, per se, that is
    adjustable to a particular frequency by adjusting the inductance or
    capacitance of the tuned circuit.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses  150.1+ for radio receiver signal
    selection based on frequency.


CLS 370/303
TXT Rotary distributor:

    Subject matter under subclass 298 having a signal supply means which
    rotates for successively connecting lines, stations, instruments (e.g., a
    sunflower), or having switches which are selectively controlled by a code
    selection mechanism (e.g., keyboard).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, appropriate subclasses for rotary distributor.


CLS 370/304
TXT Synchronizer:

    Subject matter under subclass 303 having rotary distributors with means for
    controlling the relationship in phase, frequency, or speed between them.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    503+,   for a generic multiplex synchronizing device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 395 for a system for
    synchronizing the rotary motion of a plurality of shafts where adjustable
    gearing is utilized to control the rotation of at least one of the shafts.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 82,
    83, and 87 for an electrical system having a plurality of supply circuits
    or sources of supply with means for controlling the connection or
    disconnection of the supply circuits or sources by means responsive to the
    frequency and/or phase relationship between the circuits or sources (the
    control may involve the control of the speed or angular relation of a
    generator or converter with respect to another; see subclass 82 where
    plural rotary converters are involved and subclass 84 where plural
    generators are involved); and subclass 123 for miscellaneous electrical
    switching systems where the switching operation is controlled by the
    differential speed between two bodies.

    318,    Electricity: Motive Power Systems, subclasses 41+ for plural
    electric motor systems having electrical synchronizing interconnection for
    maintaining synchronization between the motors; subclasses 68+ for plural
    electric motor systems with means for controlling the running speed of one
    motor relative to the speed of another motor including such systems for
    maintaining the motors in synchronism; and subclass 85 for the
    miscellaneous plural electric motor systems with synchronizing or phasing
    control for the motors.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 870.11+ for a telemetering
    system having a rotary distributor; subclass 681 for electric alarm which
    indicate the synchronism or lack of synchronism of a plurality of shafts;
    and subclass 318 for a miscellaneous signaling system having synchronized
    distributors at the transmitter and receiver.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclass 192 for a code
    transmitter with a rotary distributor.

    352,    Optics: Motion Pictures, subclasses 1+ for motion picture apparatus
    for recording or reproducing a motion picture with sound accompaniment.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 46+ for
    clock systems which include a master clock and a secondary or receiving
    clock where the clocks are electrically controlled or operated; subclasses
    52+ for the master clock of such a system with its electrical circuits and
    connections; and subclasses 59+ for the secondary or receiving clock of
    such a system with their immediate operating mechanism.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 354+ for a
    nonmultiplexed synchronizer.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclass 34 for plural
    impellers having synchronizing means.


CLS 370/305
TXT Start-Stop:

    Subject matter under subclass 304 in which the synchronizer operates to
    start or stop the distributors simultaneously.

    (1)     Note.  The distributors (at both ends) after starting usually
    rotate one complete revolution and one or both are stopped at the initial
    point.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 4.1 for a remote controlled automatic printing
    system.


CLS 370/306
TXT Nonmechanical:

    Subject matter under subclass 305 wherein provision is made for controlling
    the operation of the distributor by means of a start-stop electronic
    oscillation generator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclass 369 for start-stop
    synchronization in digital communications not limited to multiplex
    communications.


CLS 370/307
TXT TRANSMULTIPLEXERS:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which conversion from one
    multiplex technique to a different multiplex technique is performed (e.g.,
    conversion between time division multiplex and frequency division
    multiplex).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    478,    for combined time division and frequency division multiplexing.


CLS 370/308
TXT RESONANT TRANSFER TECHNIQUES:

    Subject  matter under the class definition wherein a transfer of
    information samples is achieved by closing access switches to a common bus
    for a predetermined portion of a cycle of a resonant frequency determined
    by reactive components associated with each subscriber line.


CLS 370/309
TXT RESONANT TRANSFER SUBSTITUTES:

    Subject matter under the class definition utilizing techniques that
    strictly speaking do not utilize resonant transfer but are closely
    analogous to and are designed as replacements for resonant transfer
    techniques.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    308,    for a resonant transfer system.


CLS 370/310
TXT COMMUNICATION OVER FREE SPACE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein multiplex communication
    signals are transmitted over a medium which is not a wire or a waveguide.

    (1)     Note.  A waveguide may be used in this communication system for
    other purpose (e.g., for coupling).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    113+ for duplex and subclasses 115+ for multiplex optical communication
    which includes an optical waveguide.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, appropriate subclass for digital
    communications not limited to multiplex communications.

    455,    Telecommunications, appropriate subclass for nonmultiplex radio
    communication.


CLS 370/311
TXT Signaling for performing battery saving:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 having details of a procedure or
    supervisory communication used to control a receiver or transceiver so as
    to conserve power.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 825.44 for a pager including
    battery conservation in a selective communication system.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 38.3 and subclass 343 for radio
    receiver battery conservation.


CLS 370/312
TXT Message addressed to multiple destinations:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein a direction for delivery
    accompanying message information are transmitted to or received by more
    than one corresponding remote station or group of remote stations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    432,    for messages addressed to multiple destinations in wired
    communications.


CLS 370/313
TXT Portable address responsive receiver:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein a lightweight receiver carried by
    an individual is selectively communicated to by the use of receiver
    identification codes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 825.44 for a pager in a
    selective communication system.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 38.1+ for a code responsive radio
    receiver.


CLS 370/314
TXT Using time division multiplexing:

    Subject matter under subclass 313 in which access to the transmission
    medium is divided into discrete time intervals, and information from
    respective channels is transmitted in different time intervals.


CLS 370/315
TXT Repeater:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 having at least a station which
    retransmits signals of other stations to compensate for attenuation losses
    or to extend the communication range between a group of stations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclass  211+ for a repeater in
    digital communications.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 7+ for a carrier wave repeater.


CLS 370/316
TXT Airborne or space satellite repeater:

    Subject matter under subclass 315  wherein a space-deployed station is used
    as a relay communicating station.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 12.1+ for a space satellite carrier
    wave repeater.


CLS 370/317
TXT Including noise compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 316 including a technique to improve the
    quality of transmitted signals by eliminating unwanted or interfering
    signals.


CLS 370/318
TXT Including power control:

    Subject matter under subclass 317 wherein noise is compensated by
    controlling the electrical power or amplitude of the transmitted signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 13.4 for space satellite with power
    control.


CLS 370/319
TXT Multiple access (e.g., FDMA):

    Subject matter under subclass 316 having a scheme for reaching a
    communication medium in which a station is assigned a channel in response
    to that station's request for access and the assignment lasting until it is
    withdrawn.


CLS 370/320
TXT Code division (CDMA):

    Subject matter under subclass 319 wherein spread spectrum codes are
    allocated to allow multiple signals occupying the same channel bandwidth to
    be transmitted simultaneously without interfering with one another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    335,    for CDMA in cellular wireless communications.

    342,    for CDMA in general wireless communications.

    441,    for CDMA in general wire communications.


CLS 370/321
TXT Time division (TDMA):

    Subject matter under subclass 319 in which a station is assigned a vacant
    time slot channel in a time multiplex frame in response to that station's
    request for access and the assignment lasting until it is withdrawn.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    337,    for a wireless communication time division multiple access  in a
    plurality of contiguous regions, each region being served by a respective
    fixed station.

    347,    for a general communication over free space using time channel
    multiple access.

    442+,   for a general communication over wire using time channel multiple
    access.


CLS 370/322
TXT Channel reservation scheme:

    Subject matter under subclass 321 including a technique or method for
    reserving time slots for a multiple access communication.


CLS 370/323
TXT Including onboard switching:

    Subject matter under subclass 321 wherein the airborne or satellite
    repeater has an apparatus for rearranging the order of the received time
    slots, comprising a plurality of receiving and transmitting antennas which
    cover different geographical regions, and wherein received information can
    be routed to the appropriate transmitting antenna.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 13.3 for a space satellite with
    antenna feed network or multiple antenna switching.


CLS 370/324
TXT Synchronization:

    Subject matter under subclass 321 including means for insuring that the
    transmission and reception of time channel multiple access information has
    a proper time relationship.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    350,    for synchronization in general time multiplex wireless
    communications.

    503+,   for synchronization in general time multiplex communications over
    wire.


CLS 370/325
TXT Including onboard switching:

    Subject matter under subclass 319 wherein the airborne or satellite
    repeater has a plurality of receiving and transmitting antennas which cover
    different geographical regions, and wherein received information can be
    routed to the appropriate transmitting antenna.


CLS 370/326
TXT Combining or distributing information via time channels:

    Subject matter under subclass 316 wherein information signals are
    communicated between stations by assembling or separating the signals via
    different time periods on a common transmission medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    345+,   for general communication over free space using time channels.


CLS 370/327
TXT In a trunking system:

    Subject matter under subclass 315 wherein the repeater is used in a system
    having two or more stations communicate using one channel of a plurality of
    channels; the channel is assigned based upon the availability of the
    plurality of channels, and the assignment is controlled by sending
    supervisory information over a control channel.

    (1)     Note.  The channel assignment for a communication may vary during
    the communication between the two stations.

    (2)     Note.  The assignment of a channel bearing supervisory information
    may vary with time, generally daily.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    340,    for a trunking system which does not include a repeater.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 11.1 for a mobile repeater.


CLS 370/328
TXT Having a plurality of contiguous regions served by respective fixed
    stations:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein plural nonmobile base stations
    provide service to different geographical areas having their boundary
    touching each other on a line or a point, and wherein communications
    between mobile units navigating in and out of the areas are regulated by
    the nonmobile base stations.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 422+ for zone or cellular
    radiotelephone system and subclasses 524+ for multiple base radio stations
    system.


CLS 370/329
TXT Channel assignment:

    Subject matter under subclass 328 having details of a process or apparatus
    for allocating a communication channel to a user or subscriber for
    transmission of information.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 450+, 464, and 509+ for channel
    allocation in a cellular radiotelephone system, a private cordless
    telephone, and radio telecommunications system in general, respectively.


CLS 370/330
TXT Having both time and frequency assignment:

    Subject matter under subclass 329 wherein the allocation of communication
    channel includes an assignment of a frequency channel and a time channel or
    time slot.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    478,    for combined time and frequency division.


CLS 370/331
TXT Hand-off control:

    Subject matter under subclass 329 including means to switch the control of
    a mobile communication from one geographical area to another geographical
    area.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 436+ for handoff control in a zoned
    or cellular radiotelephone system not limited to multiplex communications.


CLS 370/332
TXT Based upon a particular signal quality measurement:

    Subject matter under subclass 331 using a process or apparatus which
    measures a selected signal characteristic which will serve as a basis for
    making a determination whether or not to hand-off the mobile station.


CLS 370/333
TXT Signal quality determined by bit error rate:

    Subject matter under subclass 332 wherein the selected signal
    characteristic is measured by determining a ratio of erroneous bits to the
    total number of bits communicated at a given time period.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclasses
    5.1+ for error rate counting.


CLS 370/334
TXT Using multiple antennas at a station:

    Subject under subclass 332 wherein a station (usually a base station) uses
    a plurality of directional antennas for transmitting  or receiving
    information, and wherein signals from another station (usually mobile) are
    received by two or more of the antennas and the hand-off is performed based
    upon signal quality measurements received on the two or more antennas.


CLS 370/335
TXT Combining or distributing information via code word channels using multiple
    access techniques (e.g., CDMA):

    Subject matter under subclass 329 wherein spread spectrum codes are
    allocated to allow multiple signals occupying the same channel bandwidth to
    be transmitted simultaneously without interfering with one another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    320,    for CDMA in space satellite communications.

    342,    for CDMA in general wireless communications.

    441,    for CDMA in general wire communications.


CLS 370/336
TXT Combining or distributing information via time channels:

    Subject  matter under subclass 329 wherein information signals are
    communicated between stations by assembling or separating the signals via
    different time periods on a common transmission medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    345+,   for general communication over free space using time channels.

    498+,   for general communication over wire using time channels.


CLS 370/337
TXT Multiple access (e.g., TDMA):

    Subject matter under subclass 336 having a scheme for reaching a
    communication medium in which a station is assigned a vacant time slot
    channel in a time multiplex frame in response to that station's request for
    access and the assignment lasting until it is withdrawn.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    321+,   for time division multiple access in satellite communication.

    347,    for general communication over free space using time channel
    multiple access.

    442+,   for general communication over wire using time channel multiple
    access.


CLS 370/338
TXT Contiguous regions interconnected by a local area network:

    Subject matter under subclass 328 wherein the base stations in the
    geographical area communication system are interconnect by a common
    communication bus, that allows wireless communication devices to
    communicate with other wireless communication devices or wired
    communication devices.

    (1)     Note.   The common communication bus typically employs multiple
    access techniques such as carrier sense multiple access with collision
    detection (CSMA/CD).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 59+ for fixed or base
    stations connected to an exchange by land lines.


CLS 370/339
TXT Plural usage of common antenna:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 in which more than two transmitters or
    receivers operate from a common antenna.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    297,    for diplex systems (two transmitters or receivers using a common
    antenna).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 100+ for a
    branched transmission lines network and subclasses 24+ for a coupling
    network.

    348,    Television, subclasses 6+ for a cable television system.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclass 257 for a cable system.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 3.1+ for a distributive analog
    system.


CLS 370/340
TXT Using trunking:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein two or more stations communicate
    using one channel of a plurality of channels; the channel is assigned based
    upon the availability of the plurality of channels, and the assignment is
    controlled by sending supervisory information over a control channel.

    (1)     Note.  The channel assignment for a communication may vary during
    the communication between the two stations.

    (2)     Note.  The assignment of a channel bearing supervisory information
    may vary with time, generally daily.


CLS 370/341
TXT Channel assignment:

    Subject matter under subclass 340 including particular details of apparatus
    or technique for allocating channels to a communication between two or more
    stations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329,    for channel assignment in cellular communications.


CLS 370/342
TXT Combining or distributing information via code word channels using multiple
    access techniques (e.g., CDMA):

    Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein spread spectrum coding techniques
     allow multiple signals occupying the same channel bandwidth to be
    transmitted simultaneously without interfering with one another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    320,    for CDMA in space satellite communications.

    335,    for CDMA in cellular  wireless communications.

    441,    for CDMA in general wire communications.


CLS 370/343
TXT Combining or distributing information via frequency channels:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein information signals are
    communicated between stations by assembling or separating the signals via
    different frequency bands of a common transmission medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    480+,   for communications over wire using frequency channels.


CLS 370/344
TXT Multiple access (e.g., FDMA):

    Subject matter under subclass 343 having a scheme for reaching a
    comunication medium in which a station is assigned a frequency channel in
    response to that station's request for access and the assignment lasting
    until it is withdrawn.


CLS 370/345
TXT Combining or distributing information via time channels:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein information signals are
    communicated between stations by assembling or separating the signals via
    different time periods on a common transmission medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    498+,   for communications over wire using time channels.


CLS 370/346
TXT Polling:

    Subject matter under subclass 345 in which individual terminals are queried
    to determine if access to the transmission medium is needed for the
    transfer of information.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    449,    for channel assignment by polling in a wired transmission medium.


CLS 370/347
TXT Multiple access (e.g., TDMA):

    Subject matter under subclass 345 having a scheme for reaching a
    communication medium in which a station is assigned a vacant time slot
    channel in a time multiplex frame in response to that station's request for
    access and the assignment lasting until it is withdrawn.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    442+,   for communications over wire using time division multiple access.


CLS 370/348
TXT Channel reservation scheme:

    Subject matter under subclass 347 including a technique or method for
    reserving a time slot for communication.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    443,    for communications over wire using TDMA with channel reservation
    scheme.


CLS 370/349
TXT Using messages having an address field as header:

    Subject matter under subclass 345 in which information data is organized in
    one or more bytes preceded by an identifier indicative of source or
    destination stations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    389+,   for routing a message which includes an address header.


CLS 370/350
TXT Synchronization:

    Subject matter under subclass 345 including means for insuring that the
    transmission and reception of time multiplex information has a proper time
    relationship.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324,    for synchronization in a TDMA satellite repeater system.

    503+,   for synchronization in general time multiplex communications over
    wire.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 502+ for synchronized stations in a
    nonmultiplex analog communication.


CLS 370/351
TXT PATHFINDING OR ROUTING:

    Subject matter under the class definition including an apparatus or a
    technique for locating a path through a switching network from a source to
    a destination.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes techniques for reorganizing existing
    connections to make room for new connections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216+,   for alternate routing in response to a faulty condition.

    248,    for testing a connection established through a multiplex  network.

    254+,   for network configuration determination.

    431+,   for channel assignment techniques.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 242+ for switching of a
    nonmultiplex voice communication system which may use a time division
    controlling signal.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 311+ for
    data processing intrasystem connection path selecting.


CLS 370/352
TXT Combined circuit switching and packet switching:

    Subject matter under subclass 351 wherein the switching network has both
    (a) a switch which establishes a path between a source and destination with
    the path being held for the duration of the communication, and (b) a switch
    which routes information based on an address associated with the
    information data in a channel which is only occupied for a duration of the
    time required to transmit the information data and the associated address.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    357+,   for a circuit switch.

    389+,   for a packet switch.


CLS 370/353
TXT Switching network having common elements to handle both circuit switched
    traffic and packet switched traffic:

    Subject matter under subclass 352 wherein same structures in a switching
    network perform routing of both circuit switched and packet switched data.


CLS 370/354
TXT Switching network having separate elements to handle circuit switched
    traffic and packet switched traffic:

    Subject matter under subclass 352 wherein noncommon structures within a
    switching network respectively and separately perform routing of circuit
    switched and packet switched data.


CLS 370/355
TXT Routing packets through a circuit switching network:

    Subject matter under subclass 352 wherein packet switched traffic is
    adapted so as to be routed through a switching network designed for circuit
    switched traffic.


CLS 370/356
TXT Routing circuit switched traffic through a packet switching network:

    Subject matter under subclass 352 wherein circuit switched traffic is
    adapted so as to be routed through a switching network designed for packet
    switched traffic.


CLS 370/357
TXT Through a circuit switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 351 wherein the switching network establishes
    a path or channel between two or more terminals and permits the exclusive
    use of the connection between them until the connection is released.

    (1)     Note.  A switching exchange or a concentrator with multiplex
    signals are placed in ths subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The distinction between multiplexing and selective or
    telemetry devices is:  in multiplexing, the information is unrestricted as
    to content, e.g., a teletypewriter which uses an alphabet to transmit
    unlimited information, whereas in selective or telemetry devices, the
    information is restricted as to content, e.g., a transducer measuring a
    single parameter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity: Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 175+ for an
    automatic multiple contact selective switch.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 112+
    for class appropriate switching system.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 365+ for a miscellaneous gating circuit.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 108+ for an electromagnetically operated
    automatic selective switch.


    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 825.79+ for a nonmultiplex
    selective matrix system.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, appropriate subclasses relating to a
    telephonic device, particularly subclass 290 for multiplexed switches and
    subclasses 242+ for a switch having nonmultiplexed signals to be switched,
    and subclass 333 for a concentrator.


CLS 370/358
TXT Switching input signals having different aggregate bit rates:

    Subject matter under subclass 357 wherein the established path has
    different number of information bits flow per unit time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    391,    for packet switching with input signals having different aggregate
    bit rates.


CLS 370/359
TXT Input or output circuit, per se (i.e., line interface):

    Subject matter under subclass 357 having details of a circuit or technique
    for controlling how information is handled at an entrance or exit of the
    switch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    419+,   for a input or output circuit line interface in a packet switching
    system.


CLS 370/360
TXT Switching control:

    Subject matter under subclass 357 including procedures, techniques, or
    apparatus to implement a supervisory function necessary for a proper
    switching of information from an input of the switching network to an
    output of the network.


CLS 370/361
TXT Folded network:

    Subject matter under subclass 360 in which an equivalent N-stage switch is
    achieved with less than N-stage by "folding" back the output of one stage
    to connect with the input of a preceding stage.


CLS 370/362
TXT Bus switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 360 in which time switching occurs by
    connecting communication lines to a common line (bus) for a time sufficient
    to transfer information between the lines (e.g., one time slot).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 311+ for
    data processing intrasystem connection which may use a bus switch.


CLS 370/363
TXT Having details of control storage arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 362 which includes a particular method,
    apparatus, or technique dealing with the storage of supervisory or control
    information for controlling the switching.


CLS 370/364
TXT Having plural buses:

    Subject matter under subclass 362 having more than one bus line.


CLS 370/365
TXT Separate transmit and receive buses:

    Subject matter under subclass 364 having different buses for sending and
    for accepting information.


CLS 370/366
TXT Including serial-parallel or parallel-serial conversion for input or output:

    Subject matter under subclass 360 wherein information in a sequential
    transmission format is changed to a multipath parallel transmission format,
    or vice versa, at an entrance or exit of the switching system.


CLS 370/367
TXT For distribution to a multiplanar switching network:

    Subject matter under subclass 366 wherein the switching system consists of
    two or more parallel switching elements such as parallel space switches.


CLS 370/368
TXT Having details of control storage arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 366 which includes a particular method,
    apparatus, or technique dealing with the storage of supervisory or control
    information for controlling the switching.


CLS 370/369
TXT Having time and space switches:

    Subject matter under subclass 360 in which the switching system is
    organized to have (a) a time stage which reorganizes the order of time
    slots and (b) a space stage which switches time slots on incoming lines to
    a desired outgoing line in either order.


CLS 370/370
TXT Having space switch as intermediate stage (e.g., T-S-T, T-S-S, or S-S-T):

    Subject matter under subclass 369 having a space switch or switches which
    are not the first or last stages of a circuit switching network (i.e.,
    time-space plus an additional switching stage).


CLS 370/371
TXT Having details of control storage arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 370 which includes a particular method,
    apparatus, or technique dealing with the storage of supervisory or control
    information for controlling the switching.


CLS 370/372
TXT Having time switch as intermediate stage (e.g., S-T-S or T-T-S):

    Subject  matter under subclass 369 having at least a time switch which is
    not the first or last stages of a circuit switching network.


CLS 370/373
TXT Having supervisory signaling:

    Subject matter under subclass 369 wherein control information is
    communicated between switches to control the switches.


CLS 370/374
TXT Having details of control storage arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 369 which includes a particular method,
    apparatus, or technique dealing with the storage of supervisory or control
    information for controlling the switching.


CLS 370/375
TXT Time switch, per se (e.g., T or T-T):

    Subject matter under subclass 360 in which information in time slots of
    incoming lines is switched to desired destinations only by storing or
    delaying the information until the desired instant of readout.


CLS 370/376
TXT Time slot interchange, per se:

    Subject matter under subclass 375 having structural details of a device for
    altering the time sequence of information received in predetermined time
    intervals.


CLS 370/377
TXT Having supervisory signaling:

    Subject matter under subclass 375 wherein control information is
    communicated between switches to control the switches.


CLS 370/378
TXT Having details of control storage arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 375 which includes a particular method,
    apparatus, or technique dealing with the storage of supervisory or control
    information for controlling the switching.


CLS 370/379
TXT Data memory addressing:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 wherein a particular storage control
    apparatus or technique is utilized to control the  writing of incoming data
    information into a storage device and the reading of data information
    therefrom for transmission.


CLS 370/380
TXT Space switch, per se (e.g., S or S-S):

    Subject matter under subclass 360 wherein the switching control is for a
    switching system that has a plurality of inputs and a plurality of outputs
    wherein any input can be connected to any output for spatially displacing
    the information.


CLS 370/381
TXT Having details of control storage arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 360 which includes a particular method,
    apparatus, or technique dealing with the storage of supervisory or control
    information for controlling the switching.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    363,    for details of control memory in a bus switch.

    368,    for details of control memory in a switch having serial to parallel
    conversion or vice versa.

    371     and 374, for details of control memory in a combined time and space
    switching system.

    378,    for details of control memory in a time switch.


CLS 370/382
TXT Data memory addressing:

    Subject matter under subclass 381 wherein a particular storage control
    apparatus or technique is utilized to control the  writing of incoming data
    information into a storage device and the reading of data information
    therefrom for transmission.


CLS 370/383
TXT Control storage addressing:

    Subject matter under subclass 381 wherein a particular apparatus or
    technique is utilized to control the reading or writing of control
    information from or to a control memory.


CLS 370/384
TXT Having a supervisory signaling feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 360 wherein control information is
    communicated between stations for switching control.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    496,    for signaling in multiplex communications via frequency channels.

    522+,   for signaling in multiplex communications via time channels.


CLS 370/385
TXT Having a separate signaling network:

    Subject matter under subclass 384 wherein a communication system distinct
    from the switching system is provided for the communication of signaling
    information (i.e. CCITT Signaling System No. 7).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    524,    for a dedicated signaling channel in general communication via time
    channels.


CLS 370/386
TXT Particular switching network arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 357 includes details of a physical
    arrangement of switching elements in a switching system.


CLS 370/387
TXT Multiplanar switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 386 wherein the switching system consists of
    two or more parallel switching elements.


CLS 370/388
TXT Multistage switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 386 wherein the switching system consists of
    two or more sequential switching elements.


CLS 370/389
TXT Switching a message which includes an address header (e.g., packet
    switching):

    Subject matter under subclass 351 wherein information data to be switched
    is organized with one or more bytes preceded by an identification
    information indicative of a source or destination station.

    (1)     Note.   The switching of the message having an address header is
    commonly called packet switching.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    473     and 474, for handling of packet data other than switching.


CLS 370/390
TXT Replicate messages for multiple destination distribution:

    Subject matter under subclass 389 wherein copies of the same information is
    being made for transferring to more than one destination.


CLS 370/391
TXT Switching input signals having different aggregate bit rates:

    Subject matter under subclass 389 wherein the switch has plural input
    lines, and information bits per unit time flow in each line are different
    from one another.


CLS 370/392
TXT Processing of address header for routing, per se:

    Subject matter under subclass 389 having details of techniques or apparatus
    which process the address information field for switching the packet of
    information.


CLS 370/393
TXT Address concatenation:

    Subject matter under subclass 392 wherein information concerning the
    address of nodes or switches in the route of a packet are serially linked
    together in the packet to provide information for the route of packets.

    (1)     Note.   For example, the packet is transmitted through a plurality
    of nodes, and the address of all the nodes in the route will be added to
    the address field of a packet.


CLS 370/394
TXT Sequencing or resequencing of packets to ensure proper output sequence
    order:

    Subject matter under subclass 389 wherein a rearrangement of packets order
    is performed before being outputted to ensure that the packets are
    outputted in the same order as the packets received by the network.


CLS 370/395
TXT Message transmitted using regularly occurring fixed length time intervals
    (e.g., ATM):

    Subject matter under subclass 389 wherein asynchronous packetized
    information is conveyed in regularly occurring time periods of uniform
    duration.


CLS 370/396
TXT Distributed switching:

    Subject matter under subclass 395 wherein the routing of a message from a
    source to a destination is performed by a plurality of nodes which share
    the control of switching and routing functions of the network.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400+,   for non-ATM packet distributed switching.


CLS 370/397
TXT Employing logical addressing for routing (e.g., VP or VC):

    Subject matter under subclass 396 wherein packets of information are
    communicated between two or more stations on physical paths or circuits
    which may vary with time during a connection, and are identified using a
    transparent addressing scheme.

    (1)     Note.  The time varying paths or circuits are also called virtual
    paths (VP) or virtual circuits (VC).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    399,    for employing logical addressing for routing in ATM centralized
    switching.

    409,    for employing logical addressing for routing in non-ATM distributed
    switching.


CLS 370/398
TXT Centralized switching:

    Subject matter under subclass 395 wherein the switching network consists of
    one switch node with a plurality of inputs and a plurality of outputs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    422+,   for non-ATM packet centralized switching.


CLS 370/399
TXT Employing logical addressing for routing (e.g., VP or VC):

    Subject matter under subclass 398 wherein packets of information are
    communicated between two or more stations on physical paths or circuits
    which may vary with time during a connection, and are identified using a
    transparent addressing scheme.


CLS 370/400
TXT Having a plurality of nodes performing distributed switching:

    Subject matter under subclass 389 having a switching architecture in which
    a plurality of switch nodes are provided such that the switching function
    is spread out over a geographical area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    396+,   for ATM distributed switching.


CLS 370/401
TXT Bridge or gateway between networks:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 having a device for interconnecting two
    or more networks at a media-access level of a data-link layer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402,    for a bridge which interconnects two or more bus networks wherein
    the buses have a plurality of terminals connected thereto.

    404,    for a bridge which interconnects two or more closed transmission
    path network having a plurality of terminals connected thereto.


CLS 370/402
TXT Bridge between bus systems:

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein networks interconnected by the
    bridge are characterized by having a common transmission line with a
    plurality of terminals connected thereto.


CLS 370/403
TXT At least one bus is a ring network:

    Subject matter under subclass 402 wherein at least one of the bus systems
    is a closed loop transmission bus.


CLS 370/404
TXT Ring or loop forms backbone for interconnecting other networks:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 wherein a closed path transmission system
    serves as a central switch for switching information to and from other
    networks.


CLS 370/405
TXT The other networks are ring or loop networks:

    Subject matter under subclass 404 wherein the backboned ring or loop
    interconnects other closed transmission line networks having a plurality of
    terminals connected thereto.


CLS 370/406
TXT Plurality rings or loops to form a mesh network:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 having a plurality of nodes wherein each
    node is connected to at least two closed transmission path communication
    links.


CLS 370/407
TXT Interconnected star couplers:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 having interconnection between plural
    couplers that distributes signal from one or more transmission line input
    among a larger number of output lines.


CLS 370/408
TXT Nodes interconnected in a hierarchy to form a tree:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 having a plurality of nodes wherein one
    of the nodes is a root node and other nodes are connected to the root node
    by branches.


CLS 370/409
TXT Employing logical addressing for routing (e.g., VP or VC):

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein packets of information are
    communicated between two or more stations on physical paths which are
    varying with time during a connection, and are identified using a
    transparent addressing scheme.


CLS 370/410
TXT Having a signaling feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein supervisory information is
    communicated between switches to control the switches.


CLS 370/411
TXT Including sorting and merging networks:

    Subject matter under subclass 389 wherein pathfinding through a self
    routing packet switch includes (a) Batcher and (b) Banyan type networks.


CLS 370/412
TXT Queuing arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 389 wherein pathfinding through a packet
    switch involves a particular buffer processing arrangement for control of
    communication of packets in a packet network.


CLS 370/413
TXT Having both input and output queuing:

    Subject matter under subclass 412 having a queuing arrangement at both the
    input and output of the packet switch.


CLS 370/414
TXT Contention resolution for output:

    Subject matter under subclass 413 having a particular protocol to resolve
    the problem of unregulated bidding for an output line by multiple messages
    from different inputs.


CLS 370/415
TXT Having input queuing only:

    Subject matter under subclass 412 having queues exclusively on inputs to
    the network.


CLS 370/416
TXT Contention resolution for output:

    Subject matter under subclass 415 having a particular protocol to resolve
    the problem of unregulated bidding for an output line by multiple messages
    from different inputs.


CLS 370/417
TXT Having output queuing only:

    Subject matter under subclass 412 having queues exclusively on outputs of
    the network.


CLS 370/418
TXT Contention resolution for output:

    Subject matter under subclass 417 having a particular protocol to resolve
    the problem of unregulated bidding for an output line by multiple messages
    from different inputs.


CLS 370/419
TXT Input or output circuit, per se (i.e., line interface):

    Subject matter under subclass 389 having means or techniques for
    controlling how information is handled at an input or output of a switch.


CLS 370/420
TXT For connecting plural subscribers to a network (i.e., network termination):

    Subject matter under subclass 419 wherein the input or output circuit
    interfaces more than one terminal to a transmission line network.


CLS 370/421
TXT Subscribers connected to an input or output circuit by a common bus:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 wherein the terminals to be connected to
    a transmission line network by an interface are interconnected to the
    interface by a common transmission line.


CLS 370/422
TXT Centralized switching:

    Subject matter under subclass 389 having one single switch node for
    switching packet type information from a plurality of inputs to a plurality
    of outputs of the node.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    398+,   for ATM centralized switching.


CLS 370/423
TXT Including a bus for interconnecting inputs and outputs:

    Subject matter under subclass 422 including a closed path for
    interconnecting input interfaces and output interfaces of a packet type
    switch.


CLS 370/424
TXT Including a ring or loop for interconnecting inputs and outputs:

    Subject matter under subclass 423 including a closed path for
    interconnecting input interfaces and output interfaces of a packet type
    switch.


CLS 370/425
TXT Star configuration:

    Subject matter under subclass 422 wherein a data distribution system
    containing a central node or hub connected to one end of each of three or
    more branches and each other end of the branches is connected to a member
    of a local area network multiplex system, and all routing of network data
    takes place through the central node.


CLS 370/426
TXT Having a signaling feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 422 wherein supervisory information is
    communicated between switches to control the switches.


CLS 370/427
TXT Space switching:

    Subject matter under subclass 389 wherein messages are transferred from
    inputs to outputs of a switch node by temporarily providing a physical path
    between the inputs and outputs in order to route the messages.


CLS 370/428
TXT Store and forward:

    Subject matter under subclass 351 including facilities which permit (a) a
    storage of all or part of a message when no outgoing link to a destination
    is free and (b) a subsequent transmission to the destination when such a
    link becomes free.


CLS 370/429
TXT Particular storing and queuing arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 428 having a particular buffer processing
    arrangement for controlling the flow of information.


CLS 370/430
TXT FDM switching:

    Subject matter under subclass 351 wherein signals to be switched are
    frequency division multiplexed in the transmission medium having a
    frequency spectrum divided into segments and respective information
    channels are transmitted in different segments.


CLS 370/431
TXT CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT TECHNIQUES:

    Subject matter under the class definition having details of a technique for
    allocating usage of a communication channel or channels to subscriber
    terminals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329+,   for channel assignment in a communication over free space with a
    plurality of contiguous regions served by respective fixed stations.

    341,    for channel assignment in radio trunking communication.


CLS 370/432
TXT Messages addressed to multiple destinations:

    Subject matter under subclass 431 wherein a direction for delivery
    accompanying message information are transmitted to or received by more
    than one corresponding remote station or group of remote stations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312,    for messages addressed to multiple destinations in wireless
    communications.


CLS 370/433
TXT Only active channels transmitted:

    Subject  matter under subclass 431 wherein the system adapts to changing
    traffic conditions by sending only data from active channels and by
    suppressing data from inactive channels.


CLS 370/434
TXT Concentrator:

    Subject matter under subclass 433 in which a switching device is used to
    reduce the number of transmission channels required to serve remote
    stations by allocating a transmission channel to a remote station only when
    the remote station requests service (e.g., by going off hook).


CLS 370/435
TXT TASI (Time Assignment Speech Interpolation):

    Subject matter under subclass 434 including telephone switching equipment
    whereby a user's line is connected to an idle line when he starts talking
    and is disconnected when he stops talking.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    41+ for speech analysis.


CLS 370/436
TXT Combined time and frequency assignment:

    Subject matter under subclass 431 wherein the assignment of a communication
    channel includes assignment of a frequency channel and a time channel or
    time slot.


CLS 370/437
TXT Adaptive selection of channel assignment technique:

    Subject matter under subclass 431 having an automatic selection of a
    technique that provides an optimum channel assignment performance.


CLS 370/438
TXT Using a separate control line or bus for access control:

    Subject matter under subclass 431 wherein the assignment of a channel is
    controlled by a supervisory signal communicated on a line which is distinct
    from the  line used for communicating information signals.


CLS 370/439
TXT Control line is used to request or reserve access:

    Subject matter under subclass 438 wherein the control line is used by a
    station to send a demand for having a channel assigned or for using a
    communication line.


CLS 370/440
TXT Dual bus dynamic queuing (i.e., DQDB):

    Subject matter under subclass 439 wherein a first bus carries information
    in time slots and a second bus carries time slot reservation and request
    signal for controlling access of information in the time slot of the first
    bus.

    (1)     Note. DQDB stands for distributed queue dual bus.


CLS 370/441
TXT Combining or distributing information via code word channels using multiple
    access techniques (e.g., CDMA):

    Subject matter under subclass 431 wherein spread spectrum coding techniques
     allow multiple signals occupying the same channel bandwidth to be
    transmitted simultaneously without interfering with one another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    320,    for CDMA in space satellite communications.

    335,    for CDMA in cellular wireless communications.

    342,    for CDMA in general wireless communications.


CLS 370/442
TXT Combining or distributing information via time channels using multiple
    access techniques (e.g.,TDMA):

    Subject matter under subclass 431 having a scheme for reaching a
    communication medium in which a station is assigned a vacant time slot
    channel in response to that station's request for access and the assignment
    lasting until it is withdrawn.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    321+,   for TDMA in space satellite communications.

    337,    for TDMA in cellular wireless communications.

    347,    for TDMA in general wireless communications.


CLS 370/443
TXT Using channel reservation:

    Subject matter under subclass 442 wherein a specific time slot channel is
    exclusively reserved to a certain station to access the communication media.


CLS 370/444
TXT With priority resolution:

    Subject matter under subclass 443 wherein the access to a reserved channel
    is based on an order of importance assigned to each station.

    (1)     Note. The permitted transmission may be for the first actuated
    transmitter, or for a transmitter given priority in accordance with a
    program, a condition, or time.


CLS 370/445
TXT Carrier sense multiple access (CSMA):

    Subject matter under subclass 431 having a reservation scheme for reaching
    a communication medium in which a station is assigned a carrier; the idle
    state of a communication channel is determined by sensing the presence or
    absence of a carrier signal on the channel.

    (1)     Note. CSMA with collision detection (CSMA/CD) or a listen while
    talk scheme (LWT) is the basis of the Ethernet protocol.  In this scheme, a
    user listens to a channel while sending out a message and immediately
    ceases transmission before it is completed when a collision with another
    simultaneous transmitting user is detected.


CLS 370/446
TXT Using a star coupler:

    Subject matter under subclass 445 wherein a passive coupler distributes
    information signals from one or more input lines among a larger number of
    output lines.


CLS 370/447
TXT Arbitration for access between contending stations:

    Subject matter under subclass 445 wherein an order of importance is
    assigned to stations or information to resolve situations in which plural
    stations attempt to gain access to the same communication channel at the
    same time.


CLS 370/448
TXT Using weighted back-off timing:

    Subject matter under subclass 447 wherein after a data collision is
    detected, the stations which caused the collision vary the amount of time
    before an attempt to transmit again according to a priority scheme.


CLS 370/449
TXT Polling:

    Subject matter under subclass 431 in which individual terminals are queried
    to determine if access to the transmission medium is needed for the
    transfer of information.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    346,    for polling in wireless communications.


CLS 370/450
TXT Passing a signal identifying the idle or busy state of a channel (e.g.,
    token passing):

    Subject matter under subclass 449 in which a signal indicative of an
    occupancy or nonoccupancy state of a communication channel is sent to
    control access to the communication channel.

    (1)     Note. The signal identifying the idle or busy state of a channel is
    also called the token.


CLS 370/451
TXT On bus:

    Subject matter under subclass 450 in which the idle or busy signal is
    passing on a common trunk line to which a number of terminals can be
    connected through couplers.


CLS 370/452
TXT On ring or loop:

    Subject matter under subclass 451 in which the  idle or busy signal is
    passed from station to station on a closed transmission path.

    (1)     Note. Token passing buses are normally implemented by the creation
    of a logical loop or ring using a token passing list which contains the
    order of which token is to be passed.


CLS 370/453
TXT Initialization or reinitialization of network:

    Subject matter under subclass 452 having means for (a) starting or (b)
    resetting a communication network.


CLS 370/454
TXT Having multiple idle or busy signals simultaneously on the network:

    Subject matter under subclass 452 wherein more than one idle or busy signal
    is present on the loop or ring since multiple frames of information which
    contain the signals are present on the loop or ring at the same time.


CLS 370/455
TXT Including priority resolution:

    Subject matter under subclass 452 wherein an order of importance is
    assigned to stations or information to resolve situations in which plural
    stations attempt to gain access to the same communication channel at the
    same time.


CLS 370/456
TXT Idle or busy signal erasure or frame erasure:

    Subject matter under subclass 452 involving the suppression or elimination
    of an idle or busy signal to ensure that a proper idle or busy signal is on
    the loop or ring.


CLS 370/457
TXT Initialization or reinitialization of network:

    Subject matter under subclass 450 having means for (a) starting or (b)
    resetting a communication network.


CLS 370/458
TXT Using time slots:

    Subject matter under subclass 431 wherein access to a transmission medium
    is performed by using an assigned time period.


CLS 370/459
TXT Having indication of idle or busy state of time slot:

    Subject matter under subclass 458 wherein a time slot is assigned based on
    a test indicating an occupancy or nonoccupancy state of the network.


CLS 370/460
TXT On ring or loop network:

    Subject matter under subclass 459 wherein the indication of idle or busy
    state of a time slot is applied to a ring or loop network.


CLS 370/461
TXT Arbitration for access between contending stations:

    Subject matter under subclass 458 including techniques or apparatus to
    resolve the right of a terminal to use a time slot channel when two or more
    terminals desire to use the channel simultaneously.


CLS 370/462
TXT Arbitration for access to a channel:

    Subject matter under subclass 431 including techniques or apparatus to
    resolve the right of a terminal to use a common communication channel when
    two or more terminals desire to use the channel simultaneously.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    444,    for TDMA with priority channel reservation.

    447,    for CSMA with arbitration for access between contending stations.

    461,    for arbitration for access using time slots.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 825.5+ for priority in
    selective system in general.


CLS 370/463
TXT Details of circuit or interface for connecting user to the network:

    Subject matter under subclass 431 having means or techniques for handling
    the transfer of information from one or more terminal to the transmission
    line network.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359,    for line interface input or output circuit, per se, in a circuit
    switch system.

    419+,   for line interface input or output circuit, per se, in a packet
    switch system.


CLS 370/464
TXT COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUES FOR INFORMATION CARRIED IN PLURAL CHANNELS:

    Subject matter under the class definition including details of methods or
    apparatus for formatting, converting, combining, or distributing
    information signals for transmission or reception via more than one time or
    frequency channel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280     and 294, for time division duplex system.

    281     and 295, for frequency division duplex system.

    298+,   for low speed asynchronous system which may include techniques for
    data formatting, or techniques for combining or distributing information
    via channels separated in frequency or in time.

    310+,   for communication over free space wherein information may be
    combined or distributed via channels separated in frequency or in time.


CLS 370/465
TXT Adaptive:

    Subject matter under subclass 464 in which the transmission format changes
    or adapts automatically, or  is programmed for changing traffic
    requirements, or accommodates a plurality of sources having diverse
    characteristics, (e.g., rates or data format).


CLS 370/466
TXT Converting between protocols:

    Subject matter under subclass 465 including means for converting format and
    timing of message exchanges between two systems governed by different set
    of  communicating rules.


CLS 370/467
TXT Conversion between signaling protocols:

    Subject matter under subclass 466 including means for converting format and
    timing of control or supervisory information exchanges between two systems
    governed by different set of communicating rules.


CLS 370/468
TXT Assignment of variable bandwidth or time period for transmission or
    reception:

    Subject matter under subclass 465 including adaptive allocations of
    different frequency bandwidths or different time period durations for a
    transmission or reception.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    477,    for transmission bandwidth conservation.


CLS 370/469
TXT Processing multiple layer protocols:

    Subject matter under subclass 465 including adaptive processing of
    information which is compliant with rules as set forth in a tiered
    (layered) structured communication.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a multiple layer network is the Open System
    Interconnection (OSI) Reference Model which comprises seven layers
    respectively named:  Physical, Data Link, Network, Transport, Session,
    Presentation and Application.  Each layer assumes an independent function
    which could be individually modified without destabilizing the entire
    system protocols.


CLS 370/470
TXT Frame length:

    Subject matter under subclass 465 having varying time period to transmit a
    recurring number of data bits along with control information.


CLS 370/471
TXT Message having an address header:

    Subject matter under subclass 470 in which information data is organized in
    one or more bytes preceded by an identifier indicative of source or
    destination stations.


CLS 370/472
TXT Byte length:

    Subject matter under subclass 465 wherein byte lengths adapt to changes in
    traffic conditions.

    (1)     Note. A byte is a digital word comprised of a group of related
    pulses.


CLS 370/473
TXT Transmission of a single message having multiple packets:

    Subject matter under subclass 465 wherein the system adapts to transmit
    only a single message formed by plural packets.


CLS 370/474
TXT Assembly or disassembly of messages having address headers:

    Subject matter under subclass 464 including (a) a process of combining into
    a collective unit plural messages having each an address header, or (b) a
    process of decombining a collective unit of messages.


CLS 370/475
TXT Address transmitted:

    Subject matter under subclass 464 in which identifying information
    indicative of the receiving or transmitting station accompanies the data
    transmission.


CLS 370/476
TXT Byte assembly and formatting:

    Subject matter under subclass 464 in which received data is grouped into a
    predefined order (format) either with or without a format conversion.


CLS 370/477
TXT Transmission bandwidth conservation:

    Subject matter under subclass 464 having means for accommodating more
    information per unit time on a given transmission medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    468,    for adaptive assignment of variable bandwidth or time period for
    transmission or reception.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 384+ for video bandwidth reduction.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    29+ for audio bandwidth compression or expansion.


CLS 370/478
TXT Combined time division and frequency division:

    Subject matter under subclass 464 wherein information signals are combined
    or distributed via both time and frequency channels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    330,    for channel assignment having both time and frequency in
    communication over free space.

    436,    for channel assignment having both time and frequency.


CLS 370/479
TXT Combining or distributing information via code word channels:

    Subject matter under subclass 464 in which each multiplexed channel
    consists of a unique code word which carries the information.

    (1)     Note. Separation of each multiplexed channel is usually achieved by
    correlation detection.

    (2)     Note. PCM or pulse code modulation, which is a particular technique
    for transmitting digital signal, should not be classified in this subclass
    if its use is not to make a channel distinct in multiplex communications.

    (3)     Note. A synchronizing word which may use a particular coding
    sequence for synchronization purpose is classified in subclasses 503+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 200+ for spread
    spectrum having nonmultiplex code word communication.


CLS 370/480
TXT Combining or distributing information via frequency channels:

    Subject matter under subclass 464 wherein information signals are
    communicated between stations by assembling or separating the signals via
    different frequency bands on a common transmission medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281     and 295, for a frequency division duplex system.

    302,    for a low speed asynchronous system using frequency channels.

    343,    for multiplex communication over free space via frequency channels


CLS 370/481
TXT Multiple frequency translations:

    Subject matter under subclass 480 wherein a group of signals occupying a
    definite frequency band is transferred from one position in the frequency
    spectrum to another in such a way that the arithmetic frequency difference
    of signals within the band is unaltered.


CLS 370/482
TXT Particular carrier generation:

    Subject matter under subclass 480 including features specific to a
    generation of a basic frequency wave (carrier wave); such basic wave is
    modulated by an information bearing signal (modulating signal) in a
    modulation process.


CLS 370/483
TXT Using angle modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 480 using a modulation in which an angle of a
    sine wave carrier is a characteristic varied from its normal value by
    modulation.

    (1)     Note. Phase and frequency modulation are particular forms of angle
    modulation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215,    for phase modulation.


CLS 370/484
TXT Digital analysis or synthesis of a group:

    Subject matter under subclass 480 in which a frequency multiplex composite
    spectrum is produced or resolved into its constituent channels by digital
    processing techniques (e.g., digital filters).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 724.011
    for a digital filter.


CLS 370/485
TXT Subscriber carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 480 in which an additional individual
    subscriber service is provided by adding a carrier channel to an existing
    communication line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 870.18+ for a telemetric
    carrier signaling system; and subclasses 310.01+ for a signal over a power
    line.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 400+ for a super audible telephone
    carrier system where a super audible carrier wave for transmission of
    telephone signals is transmitted over an electrical system other than a
    baseband telephone line.


CLS 370/486
TXT Program distribution:

    Subject matter under subclass 485 wherein scheduled information is
    distributed over a carrier system (e.g., commercial wired radio broadcast).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312,    for message addressed to multiple destinations.

    339,    for plural transmitters/receivers operating off of a common
    antenna.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 6+ for a cable television distribution
    system.


    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    77+ for one-way program distribution.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 3.1+ for a analog signal
    distribution system.


CLS 370/487
TXT Combined communication of diverse information types:

    Subject matter under subclass 486 wherein the program distribution includes
    plural types of communication media.


CLS 370/488
TXT Connecting filters:

    Subject matter under subclass 485 in which a arrangement of filters or
    filtering techniques are employed for signal combination or separation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    484,    for digital filtering used in a carrier system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 100+ and 165
    through 167 for coupling networks utilized in a manner similar to networks
    classified here.


CLS 370/489
TXT Bus (distributed stations):

    Subject matter under subclass 480 in which information is transferred over
    one or more common frequency channel shared by a plurality of stations
    having the same level of control.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    485,    for a telephone subscriber carrier system.


CLS 370/490
TXT Combined communication of diverse information types:

    Subject matter under subclass 489 wherein distributed information includes
    plural types of communication media.


CLS 370/491
TXT Pilot:

    Subject matter under subclass 480 in which at least one signal wave,
    usually a single frequency, is transmitted for control purposes, e.g.,
    A.G.C., Doppler correction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500,    for pilot control signal in multiplex communications over time
    channels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    1+ for a stereo system with pilot signals.


CLS 370/492
TXT Repeater:

    Subject matter under subclass 480 having a retransmitting station between
    communicating stations to compensate for transmission attenuation losses or
    to extend the range of communication between a group of stations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    274,    for a quadruplex repeater.

    279     and 293, for a duplex repeater.

    315+,   for a repeater used in communication over free space.

    501,    for a repeater used in multiplex communications over time channels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 70R+ for a telegraphic nonmultiplex repeater.

    330,    Amplifiers, for an amplifier which may be used as a repeater.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 338+ for a telephonic
    nonmultiplex repeater.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 23 for a nonmultiplex frequency
    carrier wave repeater system.


CLS 370/493
TXT Combined voice and data transmission:

    Subject matter under subclass 480 having transmission of a composite signal
    comprising audio and data.


CLS 370/494
TXT Data over voice:

    Subject matter under subclass 493 wherein data are transmitted on a carrier
    frequency higher than the voice frequency range.


CLS 370/495
TXT Data under voice:

    Subject matter under subclass 493 wherein data are transmitted on a carrier
    frequency lower than the voice frequency range.


CLS 370/496
TXT Signaling:

    Subject matter under subclass 480 including means for transmitting
    supervisory or indicating information ancillary to principal information
    being transmitted (e.g., E and M signaling).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    522,    for signaling in multiplex communications over time channels.


CLS 370/497
TXT Using particular filtering technique:

    Subject matter under subclass 480 employing devices that allow signals of
    certain frequencies to pass for signal combination or separation.


CLS 370/498
TXT Combining or distributing information via time channels:

    Subject matter under subclass 464 wherein information signals are
    communicated between stations by assembling or separating the signals via
    different time periods on a common transmission medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280     and 294, for a time division duplex system.

    326+,   336+ and 345+,  for combining or distributing information via time
    channels in satellite, cellular, or general communication over free space
    respectively.

    478,    for combined time and frequency division multiplexing.


CLS 370/499
TXT Polarity multiplex:

    Subject matter under subclass 498 in which positive and negative half
    cycles of a carrier wave are respectively modulated independently by
    signals from different sources.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    381,    Electric Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses 2+
    for broadcast or multiplex stereo which may include polarity multiplex
    technique.


CLS 370/500
TXT Pilot:

    Subject matter under subclass 498 including a signal (pilot) separable from
    the usual information transmitted, which signal is utilized for control,
    maintenance, or improvement of signal quality.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    491,    for pilot control signal in multiplex communications over frequency
    channels.


CLS 370/501
TXT Repeater:

    Subject matter under subclass 498 having a retransmitting station between
    communicating stations to compensate for transmission attenuation losses or
    to extend the range of communication between a group of stations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    274,    for a quadruplex repeater.

    279     and 293, for radio and wire duplex repeater respectively.

    315+,   for a repeater used in communication over free space.

    491,    for a repeater used in multiplex communications over frequency
    channels.


CLS 370/502
TXT Bus extenders:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 including at least a common
    retransmission line to extend the communication range between a group of
    transmission lines.


CLS 370/503
TXT Synchronizing:

    Subject matter under subclass 498 including a means for insuring that the
    transmission and reception of time multiplex information has a proper time
    relationship.

    (1)     Note. Included herein is a phase locked loop synchronizer unique to
    multiplex and a system analogous to pulse stuffing or deletion which
    utilize a guard interval but do not stuff or delete, but rather adjust
    timing to prevent conflict.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304,    for a synchronizer in a low speed asynchronous data system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 354+ for synchronizing
    the operations of receiving and transmitting mechanisms.


CLS 370/504
TXT Reference indication consists of a gap:

    Subject matter under subclass 503 in which synchronization is achieved by
    identifying the absence of data transmission for a predetermined interval
    (i.e., a gap) and using that absence to identify a reference point within a
    transmission interval.


CLS 370/505
TXT Pulse stuffing or deletion:

    Subject  matter under subclass 503 wherein synchronization of a pulse train
    is achieved by (a) inserting extra pulses into the train when pulses arrive
    too slow or (b) removing pulses from the train when pulses arrive too fast.


CLS 370/506
TXT Frame or bit stream justification:

    Subject matter under subclass 505 wherein a course of action is taken if a
    receiver station ignores a block of data because an error has occurred or
    the receiver possesses no more buffer space.


CLS 370/507
TXT Mutual (reciprocal) synchronization:

    Subject matter under subclass 503 wherein the clock frequency adjustment of
    one station is based upon information about the status of clock signals
    originating at other stations of the system.


CLS 370/508
TXT Transmission time into time slots adjusted based upon propagation delay
    time:

    Subject matter under subclass 507 including means to adjust the time at
    which a station transmits information into an assigned time period in order
    to compensate for transmission delays which are related to the length and
    type of communication media.


CLS 370/509
TXT Using synchronization information contained in a frame:

    Subject matter under subclass 503 in which the synchronization is performed
    on a cycle of a recurring number of data bits (frame) rather than on the
    individual channels or bits in the frame.


CLS 370/510
TXT Synchronization information is distributed over multiple frames:

    Subject matter under subclass 509 wherein the information used for
    synchronizing the information stream is placed in multiple time locations
    within a time period defining more than one frame.


CLS 370/511
TXT Using redundant synchronization words:

    Subject matter under subclass 510 wherein plural identical synchronizing
    words are transmitted so that the words may be compared to ensure the
    proper recognition of the synchronizing words.


CLS 370/512
TXT Synchronization information is distributed within a frame:

    Subject matter under subclass 509 wherein the information used for
    synchronizing the information stream is placed in multiple time locations
    within the time period defining the frame.


CLS 370/513
TXT Plural synchronization words:

    Subject matter under subclass 512 wherein the information used to
    synchronize the information stream consists of a multiplicity of multibit
    words which are distributed in the frame.


CLS 370/514
TXT Unique synchronization word or unique bit sequence:

    Subject matter under subclass 509 wherein a particular sequence of bits is
    utilized to ensure the proper recognition of the synchronizing information
    so that the information may be properly decoded.


CLS 370/515
TXT Pseudo-random:

    Subject matter under subclass 514 in which a maximal or minimum length
    binary sequence is utilized for achieving synchronization.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    510,    for a pseudo-random sequence distributed over a plurality of frames.


CLS 370/516
TXT Adjusting for phase or jitter:

    Subject matter under subclass 503 including means to correct errors in the
    time of occurrence of transmitted pulses.

    (1)     Note. This includes self clocking in which phase lock loops are
    used to correct phase errors between a local reference and the received
    signal for proper synchronization.


CLS 370/517
TXT Including delay device:

    Subject matter under subclass 516 in which the timing of transmission or
    reception is determined by propagation of one or more pulses down a delay
    device.


CLS 370/518
TXT Provide plural phases of a clocking signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 517 wherein multiple versions of a clock
    signal are provided, and wherein each of the clock signals are phase
    shifted in relation to each other.


CLS 370/519
TXT Delay based upon propagation delay time:

    Subject matter under subclass 517 including a measurement of time required
    for a pulse or a level transition to propagate through a device.


CLS 370/520
TXT Unique synchronization pulse:

    Subject matter under subclass 503 in which a synchronization bit has a
    width, amplitude, phase, or other property which serves to distinguish the
    synchronization bit from data bits.


CLS 370/521
TXT Time compression or expansion:

    Subject matter under subclass 498 where (a) information is read out at a
    faster rate than it is stored, resulting in a time compression, or
    conversely (b) where it is stored at a faster rate than it is read out,
    resulting in a time expansion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    34+ for the time compression or expansion of an electrical audio signal.


CLS 370/522
TXT Signaling (ancillary to main information):

    Subject matter under subclass 498 having means for transmitting or
    detecting signaling information ancillary to the principal information
    transmitted by the system (e.g., dial pulse, onhook/offhook, and ringing
    information all ancillary to the information conveyed by a telephone call).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    496,    for signaling in multiplex communications over frequency channels.


CLS 370/523
TXT Using bit robbing:

    Subject matter under subclass 522 wherein a bit which is normally used to
    convey main information is temporarily used for supervisory information.
    (e.g., the 8th bit of a byte of information is temporarily used for
    signaling).


CLS 370/524
TXT Using a dedicated signaling channel (i.e., D-channel):

    Subject matter under subclass 522 wherein a predefined transmission channel
    is designated for signaling.


CLS 370/525
TXT Digital tone signal generation:

    Subject matter under subclass 522 including a generator which creates an
    encoded binary signal representation of a tone or a wave signal.


CLS 370/526
TXT Digital tone detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 522 including a detector of digital tone or
    digital wave signals.


CLS 370/527
TXT Superimposed or modulated on principal information:

    Subject matter under subclass 522  in which the signaling information is
    carried on the principal information.


CLS 370/528
TXT Inserted in gaps in main information:

    Subject matter under subclass 522 in which gaps in the principal
    information transmitted are used for the transmission of ancillary data
    (e.g., signaling data transmitted during gaps in a speech signal).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    433+,   for information from a different source inserted in gaps occurred
    in the principle information, particularly subclass 435 for time assignment
    speech interpolation.


CLS 370/529
TXT Information superimposed on other information:

    Subject matter under subclass 498 in which the signaling information is
    carried on information other than the principal information.


CLS 370/530
TXT Staircase wave:

    Subject matter under subclass 498 in which a step wave is used for control
    purposes.

    (1)     Note.  An example is activating a plurality of gates sequentially.


CLS 370/531
TXT Magnetic core for switching or storage:

    Subject matter under subclass 498 in which magnetic cores are used for
    switching or storage of multiplexed data.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 401+
    for a saturable reactor system which uses a magnetic core.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 825.79+ for a selective
    matrix which use a magnetic core.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclasses
    for magnetic core memory.


CLS 370/532
TXT Multiplexer or distributor and technique for handling low level input
    signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 498 directed to (a) a scanning or sampling
    switch (multiplexer) operating above the Nyquist rate, or to (b) a
    demultiplexer or desampling switch (distributor) so operating, and
    including a means for improving the accuracy of sampled data, especially
    for a low level signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    303,    for rotary distributor in low speed asynchronous data system..


CLS 370/533
TXT Multiplexer or distributor using pulse amplitude modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 498 directed to (a) a scanning or sampling
    switch (multiplexer) operating above the Nyquist rate, or to (b) a
    demultiplexer or desampling switch (distributor) so operating, and in which
    the signals respectively from or to the multiplexer or distributor are
    transmitting in pulse amplitude modulated format (PAM).


CLS 370/534
TXT Multiplexer or distributor using electron beam switching device:

    Subject matter under subclass 498  directed to (a) a scanning or sampling
    switch (multiplexer) operating above the Nyquist rate, or to (b) a
    demultiplexer or desampling switch (distributor) so operating, and
    utilizing an electron beam switching device such as a cathode-ray tube with
    target electrode for multiplexing or distribution.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306,    for nonmechanical distributor in low speed asynchronous data system.


CLS 370/535
TXT Multiplexing combined with demultiplexing:

    Subject matter under subclass 498 including a system that combines
    techniques of simultaneous transmission and reception of plural signals
    over a common transmission medium.


CLS 370/536
TXT Demultiplexing single signal into plural parallel channels (e.g., parallel
    transmission for increasing transmission speed):

    Subject matter under subclass 535 having a means that derive a group of
    separate channels from a complex multiplex signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 260+ for a single pulse
    train transmitted over plural channels.


CLS 370/537
TXT Multiplexing plural input channels to a common output channel:

    Subject matter under subclass 498 wherein signals from plural input
    channels are transmitted by time multiplex to a common output channel.


CLS 370/538
TXT Plural input channels of different rates to a single common rate output
    channel:

    Subject matter under subclass 537 wherein the amount of information
    transmitted per unit time in each input channel is different from one to
    another.


CLS 370/539
TXT Multiple levels of multiplexing to form a multiplex hierarchy:

    Subject matter under subclass 538 having more than one multiplexing stage.


CLS 370/540
TXT Plural input channels of same rate to a single common rate output channel:

    Subject matter under subclass 537 wherein all input channels have same
    amount of information transmitted per unit time.


CLS 370/541
TXT Multiple levels of multiplexing to form a multiplex hierarchy:

    Subject matter under subclass 540 having more than one multiplexing stage.


CLS 370/542
TXT Demultiplexing single input channel to plural output channels:

    Subject matter under subclass 498 having a means that derives a group of
    separate channels from a complex multiplex signal.


CLS 370/543
TXT Different rate output channels:

    Subject matter under subclass 542 wherein the amount of information
    transmitted per unit time in each output channel is different from one to
    another.


CLS 370/544
TXT Same rate output channels:

    Subject matter under subclass 542 wherein all output channels have same
    amount of information transmitted per unit time.


CLS 370/545
TXT Conversion of rate from a single input to a single output:

    Subject matter under subclass 498 wherein the multiplex system has only one
    input and one output and the amount of information transmitted per unit
    time is different at the input and the output


CLS 370/546
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition not provided for above.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 370/901
TXT WIDE AREA NETWORK:

    Art collection of the multiplex communication system consisting of multiple
    communication systems interconnected to form a larger communication system
    encompassing a larger area than that provided by any one of the
    interconnected communication systems.


CLS 370/902
TXT Packet switching:

    Subject matter under subclass 901 wherein the information data to be
    switched by the communication systems is organized with one or more bytes
    preceded by an identification information indicative of a source or
    destination station.


CLS 370/903
TXT OSI Compliant Network:

    Subject matter under subclass 902 wherein the communication system complies
    with a multilayer reference model as set forth by the Open System
    Interconnection standard.

    (1)     Note. The Open System Interconnection (OSI) Reference Model
    recommends a seven-layer model;  Layer 1 to 7 are respectively called:
    Physical, Data Link, Network, Transport, Session, Presentation, and
    Application.

    (2)     Note. The structured layer approach allows partitioning complex
    communication rules or protocols into independent functions which could be
    individually modified or updated without destabilizing the entire set of
    rules or protocols.


CLS 370/904
TXT Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN):

    Subject matter under subclass 903 wherein the OSI compliant network
    complies with a set of communication standards for providing integrated
    voice and data services to users.

    (1)     Note.  Broadband services are also provided for this set of
    standards.


CLS 370/905
TXT Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM):

    Subject matter under subclass 903 wherein asynchronous packetized
    information is conveyed in regularly occurring time periods of uniform
    duration.


CLS 370/906
TXT Fiber Data Distribution Interface (FDDI):

    Subject matter under subclass 903 wherein the network elements are
    interconnected by counter rotating, dual ring fiber optic media wherein the
    communication on the network is controlled used a token passing protocol.


CLS 370/907
TXT Synchronous optical network (SONET):

    Subject matter under subclass 903 wherein the network is defined by a
    standard which describes a point-to-point connection over a fiber optic
    network which provides a digital communications hierarchy which resolves
    incompatibilities between North America and European digital hierarchies
    and is characterized by the STS-1 frame format which consists of 810 bytes.


CLS 370/908
TXT LOCAL AREA NETWORK:

    Art collection of the multiplex communication system wherein a plurality of
    user's terminals are interconnected by a common communication media.


CLS 370/909
TXT Token ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 908 in which an idle or busy signal,
    indicative of the status of the communications channel or path, is passed
    from station to station on a closed transmission path.


CLS 370/910
TXT Carrier sense multiple access (e.g., Ethernet, 10Base-T):

    Subject matter under subclass 908 having a reservation scheme for reaching
    a communication medium in which a station is assigned a carrier; the idle
    state of a communication channel is determined by sensing the presence or
    absence of a carrier signal on the channel.


CLS 370/911
TXT Bridge (e.g., brouter, bus extender, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 908 having a device for interconnecting two
    or more local area networks.


CLS 370/912
TXT PACKET COMMUNICATIONS:

    Art collection of the multiplex communication system wherein the
    information data to be communicated by the communication systems is
    organized with one or more bytes preceded by an identification information
    indicative of a source or destination station.


CLS 370/913
TXT Wireless or radio:

    Subject matter under subclass 912 wherein the packets are transmitted or
    received over free space.


CLS 370/914
TXT RATE CONVERTER:

    Art collection of the multiplex communication system which receives
    information at one bit rate and transmit at another bit rate.


CLS 370/915
TXT TIME DIVISION CELLULAR RADIO SYSTEMS:

    Art collection of the multiplex communication system having plural
    nonmobile base stations providing service to different geographical areas
    which may overlap or may be contiguous, and wherein mobile stations are in
    communication with the nonmobile stations by information signals combined
    or distributed via separated time periods on a transmission medium.


CLS 370/916
TXT MULTIPLEXER/DEMULTIPLEXER:

    Art collection of the multiplex communication system including methods or
    apparatus for formatting, converting, combining, or distributing
    information signals for transmission or reception via more than one time or
    frequency channel.

    FOREIGN ART COLLECTIONS

    The definitions for FOR 100-FOR 196 below correspond to the definitions for
    only the following abolished subclasses under Class 370 from which these
    collections were formed: 53-57, 58.1-58.3, 59, 60, 60.1, 61-65, 65.5,
    66-68, 68.1, 69.1, 70-84, 85.1, 85.11, 85.15, 85.2-85.9, 91-93, 94.1-94.3,
    95.1-95.3, 97-99, 100.1, 101-103, 104.1, 105, 105.1-105.5, 106-109,
    110.1-110.4, and 111-125. See the Foreign Art Collection schedule for
    specific correspondences. [Note: The titles and definitions for indented
    art collections include all the details of the one(s) that are
    hierarchically superior.]


CLS 370/FOR100
TXT SIMULTANEOUS TELEGRAPHY AND TELEPHONY:

    Foreign art collection including concurrent transmission of bidirectional
    audio signal and a pulse information signal over a single transmission
    channel.


CLS 370/FOR101
TXT MULTIPLEX SWITCHING:

    Foreign art collection including techniques unique to the switching of
    multiplexed channels, including multiplexing and subsequent switching of
    nonmultiplexed channels.


CLS 370/FOR102
TXT Pathfinding:

    Foreign art collection including apparatus and techniques for locating a
    path through a switching network from a desired input to a desired output.


CLS 370/FOR103
TXT Drop channel:

    Foreign art collection including one or more channels of a multiplexed
    composite signal removed and replaced with other channels without
    demultiplexing all channels down to base band.


CLS 370/FOR104
TXT Concentrators:

    Foreign art collection including a switching device used to reduce the
    number of transmission channels required to serve remote stations by
    allocating a transmission channel to a remote station only when the remote
    station requests service (e.g., by going off hook).


CLS 370/FOR105
TXT FDM switching (frequency division multiplexing):

    Foreign art collection including subject matter wherein the signals to be
    switched are frequency division multiplexed.


CLS 370/FOR106
TXT TDM switching (time division multiplexing):

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which access to a
    transmission medium is divided into discrete time intervals and information
    from respective channels is transmitted in differing time intervals.


CLS 370/FOR107
TXT Control processing:

    Foreign art collection including specifics of circuits for controlling the
    time division switching.


CLS 370/FOR108
TXT Distributed:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter where the control circuits
    are dispersed throughout the system.


CLS 370/FOR109
TXT T-S (time-space) or S-T:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which the switching is
    organized to have only a time stage (which reorganized the order of time
    slots) and a space stage (which switches time slots on incoming lines to a
    desired outgoing line) in either order.


CLS 370/FOR110
TXT Packet or addressed data:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter wherein the time division
    multiplexed data to be switched is organized with one or more bytes
    preceded by an address header.


CLS 370/FOR111
TXT Combined with circuit-switching:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which packet information
    is combined and switched with nonpacket (e.g., synchronous) data.


CLS 370/FOR112
TXT Store and forward:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which store and forward
    facilities are provided.


CLS 370/FOR113
TXT Special services with switching (e.g., conference):

    Foreign art collection including the provision of special subscriber
    services (i.e., those not normally provided without additional fees)
    claimed with multiplex switching.


CLS 370/FOR114
TXT TST (time-space-time):

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which the switching is
    organized to have first a time state (one which reorganizes the order of
    the time slots) followed by a space stage (which switches time slots on
    incoming lines to the desired outgoing lines) followed by another time
    stage.


CLS 370/FOR115
TXT STS (space-time-space):

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which the switching is
    organized to have first a space stage (one which switches time slots on
    incoming lines to a desired outgoing line) followed by a time stage (which
    reorganizes the order of the time slots) followed by another space stage.


CLS 370/FOR116
TXT Folded network:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which an equivalent
    N-stage switch is achieved with less than N-stages by "folding" back the
    output of one stage to connect with the input of a preceding stage.


CLS 370/FOR117
TXT Space stage, per se:

    Foreign art collection including structure of a stage which switches
    incoming lines to outgoing lines.


CLS 370/FOR118
TXT Time only:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which information in
    time slots of incoming lines is switcted to desired destinations only by
    storing or delaying the information until the desired instant of readout.


CLS 370/FOR119
TXT Bus switch:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which time switching
    occurs by connecting the lines to be connected to a common bus for a time
    sufficient to transfer information between the lines (e.g., one time slot).


CLS 370/FOR120
TXT Time slot interchangers, per se:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter having a particular time
    slot interchanger/ structure.


CLS 370/FOR121
TXT With signalling feature:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter having signalling equipment
    locatede at a switching exchange facility of a time division multiplex
    network.


CLS 370/FOR122
TXT FREQUENCY DIVISION:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which the frequency
    spectrum of the transmission medium is divided into segments and respective
    information channels are transmitted in differing segments.


CLS 370/FOR123
TXT Multiple frequency translations:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which multiple
    translations in frequency are performed on at least one information signal
    in a frequency division multiplex system.


CLS 370/FOR124
TXT Carrier generation:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter features specific to a
    carrier generator.


CLS 370/FOR125
TXT Angle modulation:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which at least one
    carrier in a frequency division multiplex system is angle modulated.


CLS 370/FOR126
TXT Filtering techniques:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter  in which devices that
    allow signals of certain frequencies to pass are employed for signal
    combination or separation in a frequency division multiplex system.


CLS 370/FOR127
TXT Digital analysis or synthesis of group:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which an FDM composite
    spectrum is produced or resolved into its constituent channels by digital
    processing techniques.


CLS 370/FOR128
TXT Subscriber carrier:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which additional
    individual subscriber service is provided by adding carrier channels to an
    existing communication line.


CLS 370/FOR129
TXT Connecting filters:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which arrangements of
    filters or filtering techniques are employed for signal combination or
    separation.


CLS 370/FOR130
TXT Program distribution:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter wherein program information
    (e.g., commercial radio broadcast) is distributed over a carrier system.


CLS 370/FOR131
TXT Bus (distributed stations):

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which information is
    transferred over one or more frequency division busses shared by a
    plurality of distributed stations.


CLS 370/FOR132
TXT Pilot:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which at least one pilot
    signal is transmitted for control purposes, e.g., A.G.C., doppler
    correction.


CLS 370/FOR133
TXT Repeaters:

    Foreign art collection including subclass matter including a repeater
    having features unique to frequency division multiplexing.


CLS 370/FOR134
TXT Signalling:

    Foreign art collection including means for transmitting signalling
    information ancillary to the principal information being transmitted, e.g.,
    E and M signalling.


CLS 370/FOR135
TXT TIME DIVISION:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which access to the
    transmission medium is divided into discrete time intervals, and
    information from respective channels is transmitted in differing time
    intervals.


CLS 370/FOR136
TXT Polarity multiplex:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which positive and
    negative half cycles of a carrier wave are respectively modulated
    independently by signals from different sources.


CLS 370/FOR137
TXT Adaptive systems:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which the transmission
    format (a) changes or adapts automatically, (b) is programmed for changing
    traffic requirements, or (c) accommodates a plurality of sources having
    diverse characteristics, (e.g., rates, data format).


CLS 370/FOR138
TXT Only active channels transmitted:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which the system adapts
    to changing traffic conditions by sending only data from active channels
    and by suppressing data from inactive channels.


CLS 370/FOR139
TXT TASI (time assigned speech interpolation):

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which time assigned
    speech interpolation (TASI) is used to transmit only active channels.


CLS 370/FOR140
TXT Frame length:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which the frame lenght
    adapts to changes in traffic conditions.


CLS 370/FOR141
TXT Byte length:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which the byte length
    adapts to changes in traffic conditions.


CLS 370/FOR142
TXT Rate:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter (a) in which the bit rate
    per channel transmitted adapts to changes in traffic conditions or (b) in
    which different data rates are accommodated.


CLS 370/FOR143
TXT Bus transmission:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which information is
    transferred to over one or more conductors which form time division
    communication paths between a plurality of terminals.


CLS 370/FOR144
TXT Contention:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter having means to resolve
    situations in which plural stations attempt to gain access to the bus in
    the same time slot.


CLS 370/FOR145
TXT Carrier sense:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which the idle state of
    the bus is determined by sensing the presence or absence of a carrier
    signal on the bus.


CLS 370/FOR146
TXT Token passing:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which a signal (token)
    indicative of the occupancy of the communication channel is used to control
    access to the communication channel.


CLS 370/FOR147
TXT Loop or ring:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which the token passing
    access technique is used in transmission paths having an output
    continuously fed back to an input.


CLS 370/FOR148
TXT Priority:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which a particular order
    of transmission is assigned to stations or information.


CLS 370/FOR149
TXT Variable channel assignment:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which allocations of
    information channels to transmission channels may be changed based upon
    changing demands.


CLS 370/FOR150
TXT Polling:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which individual
    terminals are queried to determine if access to the transmission medium is
    needed for the transfer of information.


CLS 370/FOR151
TXT Plural bus:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which more than one bus
    is used to convey information between stations.


CLS 370/FOR152
TXT With separate control bus:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which a separate bus is
    provided to transmit control information to the station (e.g., clock,
    address or control busses).


CLS 370/FOR153
TXT Loop or ring:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which plural concentric
    loop or ring busses are used to convey information between stations.


CLS 370/FOR154
TXT Bridge between bus systems:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which a connector
    (bridge) is used to interconnect separate bus communication systems.


CLS 370/FOR155
TXT Interconnection between ring or loop:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which a connector
    (bridge) is used to interconnect separate transmission circuits having an
    output continuously fed back to an input.


CLS 370/FOR156
TXT Loop or ring:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which the bus for
    communicating between stations is configured in a closed loop.


CLS 370/FOR157
TXT Asynchronous and nonsynchronous:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which a channel
    allocated a transmission interval on an irregular basis.


CLS 370/FOR158
TXT Address transmitted:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which address
    information accompanies the transmission of data.


CLS 370/FOR159
TXT Multiple access, discrete address:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter which permits multiple
    access to a transmission medium by identifying each transmitter and/or
    receiver with a discrete address.


CLS 370/FOR160
TXT Packet:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which time division
    multiplexed data is organized with one or more bytes preceded by an address
    header.


CLS 370/FOR161
TXT Combined with synchronous information:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which packet information
    is combined with data for causing the transmission and reception of time
    division multiplex information to have proper time relationship.


CLS 370/FOR162
TXT Star, tree, or mesh networks:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which the network over
    which the packets are to be transmitted consists of switching nodes,
    wherein the nodes are interconnected to form a star-shaped, tree-shaped, or
    mesh-shaped network.


CLS 370/FOR163
TXT Variable channel assignment:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which the allocation of
    information channels to transmission channels occurs on an as-needed (i.e.,
    nondedicated) basis.


CLS 370/FOR164
TXT Polling:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which individual
    terminals are queried to determine if they need access to the transmission
    medium for the transfer of information.


CLS 370/FOR165
TXT Time division multiple access:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter having a reservation scheme
    for access to a communication media in which any station is assigned a
    vacant time slot channel in a time division multiplex frame on the media in
    response to that station's request for access and the assignment lasting
    until it is withdrawn.


CLS 370/FOR166
TXT TDM pulse repeater:

    Foreign art collection including repeaters which use time division
    multiplexing techniques.


CLS 370/FOR167
TXT Pilot:

    Foreign art collection including a signal (pilot) separable from the usual
    information transmitted which signal is utilized for control, maintenance,
    or improvement of signal quality.


CLS 370/FOR168
TXT Byte assembly and formatting:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which received data is
    assembled into a particular data format either with or without format
    conversion.


CLS 370/FOR169
TXT Synchronizing:

    Foreign art collection including means for insuring that the transmission
    and reception of time division multiplex information has the proper time
    relationship.


CLS 370/FOR170
TXT Reference indication consists of a gap:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which synchronization is
    achieved by identifying the absence of data transmission for a
    predetermined interval (i.e., a gap) and using that absence to identify a
    reference point within a transmission interval.


CLS 370/FOR171
TXT Pulse stuffing or deletion:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter wherein synchronization of
    a pulse train is achieved by stuffing extra pulses into the train when
    pulses arrive too slow or deleting pulses from the train when pulses arrive
    too fast.


CLS 370/FOR172
TXT Mutual (reciprocal) synchronization:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter wherein the clock frequency
    adjustment of one station is based upon information about the status of
    clock signals originating at other stations of the system.


CLS 370/FOR173
TXT Moving satellite:

    Foreign art collection which includes means for the synchronization of
    stations used in a satellite communications system.


CLS 370/FOR174
TXT Distributed:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which the
    synchronization word or words are spread out within a frame or over plural
    frames.


CLS 370/FOR175
TXT Frame:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which synchronization is
    performed on a cycle of a recurring number of data bits (frame) rather than
    on the individual channels or bits in the frame.


CLS 370/FOR176
TXT Channel:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which synchronization is
    performed on each individual channel as a whole.


CLS 370/FOR177
TXT Bit phase or jitter:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter which corrects for errors
    in the time of occurrence of transmitted pulses.


CLS 370/FOR178
TXT Unique synchronization word:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which the
    synchronization word has an unique code or bit sequence.


CLS 370/FOR179
TXT Unique synchronization pulse:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which a synchronization
    bit has a width, amplitude, phase, or other property which serves to
    distinguish the synchronization bit from data bits.


CLS 370/FOR180
TXT Plural synchronizing words:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which a plurality of
    different synchronizing words are utilized.


CLS 370/FOR181
TXT Pseudo-random:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which a maximal length
    binary sequence is utilized for achieving synchronization.


CLS 370/FOR182
TXT Including delay device:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which the timing of
    transmission or reception is determined by propagation of one or more
    pulses down a delay device.


CLS 370/FOR183
TXT Time compression or expansion:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter where information is read
    out at a faster rate than it is stored, resulting in a time compression, or
    conversely where it is stored at a faster rate than it is read out,
    resulting in a time expansion.


CLS 370/FOR184
TXT Signalling (ancillary to main information):

    Foreign art collection including subject matter with means for transmitting
    and/or detecting signalling information ancillary to the principal
    information transmitted by the system (e.g., dial pulse, on-hook/off-hook,
    and ringing information all ancillary to the information conveyed by a
    telephone call).


CLS 370/FOR185
TXT Digital tone signal generation:

    Foreign art collection including a generator which creates a digital signal
    which represents a tone or a wave signal.


CLS 370/FOR186
TXT Digital tone detection:

    Foreign art collection including a detector of digital tone or digital wave
    signals.


CLS 370/FOR187
TXT Superimposed or modulated on principal information:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which the signalling
    information is superimposed or modulated on the principal information.


CLS 370/FOR188
TXT Inserted in gaps in main information:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which gaps in the
    principal information transmitted are used for the transmission of
    ancillary data, e.g., signalling data transmitted during gaps in a speech
    signal.


CLS 370/FOR189
TXT Multiplexers/distributors (hierarchy and level):

    Foreign art collection including subject matter directed to scanning or
    sampling switches (multiplexers) operating above the Nyquist rate, or to
    demultiplexers or desampling switches (distributors) so operating.


CLS 370/FOR190
TXT Apparatus and techniques for handling low level input signals:

    Foreign art collection including means for improving the accuracy of
    sampled data, especially for low level signals.


CLS 370/FOR191
TXT Pulse amplitude modulation:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which the signals
    respectively from or to the multiplexer or distributor are transmitting in
    pulse amplitude modulated format (PAM).


CLS 370/FOR192
TXT Electron beam switching device:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter utilizing an electron beam
    switching device such as a cathode-ray tube with target electrode for
    multiplexing or distribution.


CLS 370/FOR193
TXT Staircase wave:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which a step wave is
    used for control purposes such as activating a plurality of gates
    sequentually.


CLS 370/FOR194
TXT Magnetic core for switching or storage:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter in which magnetic cores are
    used for switching or storage of multiplexed data.


CLS 370/FOR195
TXT TRANSMISSION BANDWIDTH CONSERVATION:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter having means for providing
    more information per unit time on a given transmission medium.


CLS 370/FOR196
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Foreign art collection including subject matter not provided for above.


CLS 371/
TTL ERROR DETECTION/CORRECTION  AND FAULT DETECTION/RECOVERY

CLS 371/
TXT

    I. TERMS DEFINED

    DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING APPARATUS

    An arrangement of digital processing components in combination with either
    memory component, or I/O components, or both, which cooperate to accomplish
    an information processing function.  The digital data contains information
    which is intelligence used to control and provide the basis for data
    processing.  A processing component performs control, arithmetic, or
    logical operations.

    ERROR

    A change in information content of pulse or pulse coded data to a state or
    value other than the normal state or value of a properly operating device
    or system.

    FAULT

    The failure or malfunction of apparatus exhibited by a change in logic
    variable, data word, or instruction at the point of failure or malfunction.
     A fault may be in the form of a permanent physical failure event such as a
    "stuck-at-zero" condition or a temporary malfunction such as an
    intermittent connection.

    II.     GENERAL STATEMENT OF THE CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    A.      This is the generic class for apparatus and corresponding processes
    for electrical pulse or pulse coded data error detection and/or correction.
     In addition, this is the generic class for apparatus and corresponding
    processes for fault detection and/or recovery of electrical digital data
    processing apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  Fault detection in this class excludes structure and
    processes wherein there is no actual testing using digital data containing
    intelligence.

    B.      This class does not include detection of distortion or degradation
    of pulse or pulse coded data, per se, but rather includes the detection
    and/or correction of errors in information content of pulse or pulse coded
    data which may have occurred due to distortion or degradation changing the
    state or value to such an extent as to comprise an error by definition.

    C.      Apparatus and corresponding processes for error
    detection/correction of fault detection/recovery in the performance of
    arithmetic operations are classified in Class 364, subclasses 737-741.

    D.      Significantly claimed apparatus external to this Class claimed in
    combination with apparatus under the class definition, which perform fault
    detection/recovery operations or error detection/correction techniques, are
    classified with the external apparatus. For example:

    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, Class 360, subclasses
    26, 36.1+, 47, and 53.

    Electrical Operated Counters, Class 377, subclass 82.

    Multiplex Communications, Class 370, subclasses 216+ and 242+.

    Television, Class 348, subclasses 180+.

    Television Signal Processing for Dynamic Recording or Reproducing, Class
    386, subclasses 2+, 13+, 21+, 47+,  76, 85+, 100, and 113+.

    Facsimile, Class 358, subclasses 405, 406, 447, 454, and 463.

    E.      Nominally recited art devices or systems external to this class,
    claimed in combination with subject matter under the class definition, are
    classified in this class.  For example:

    Static memory device (Class 365) claimed in combination with error
    correcting encoding/decoding apparatus is classified herein.

    A nominally recited telecommunications switching system (Class 340) claimed
    in combination with fault diagnostic and/or recovery apparatus is
    classified herein.

    III.    ORGANIZATION OF THIS CLASS

    A.      Special purpose sevices or procedures subclasses 1-6.

    B.      Apparatus fault recovery subclasses 10.2-10.3

    This set of subclasses comprises systems which provide for corrective
    action, upon detection of a failure or malfunction of a device or system,
    to return the device or system to a satisfactory operating condition and
    thus recover from the detected fault.

    C.      Diagnostic testing subclasses 20.1-28

    This set of subclasses comprises systems which evaluate the operational
    condition of a device or system, while operating under controlled
    conditions, to identify and/or isolate any actual or potential error or
    fault.  The monitoring of the operation of a device or system during its
    normal operating sequence and without external control of its operating
    sequence by a testing device is classified in subclasses 48-71 as set forth
    in paragraph E below.

    D.      Digital Data Error Correction subclasses 30-46

    This set of subclasses comprises systems which correct erroneous pulse or
    pulse coded data to the state or value of a properly operating device or
    system.  The subject matter classified herein is limited to correcting
    errors at the data signal level and does not include recovery of apparatus
    failure or malfunction as set forth in paragraph B above.

    E.      Error/fault detection techniques subclasses 48-71

    This set of subclasses comprises systems or devices which utilize specific
    techniques for detecting an error or fault condition.

    F.      Miscellaneous subclass apparatus within the class definition not
    classified elsewhere.

    IV.     SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for
    measuring electrical properties.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, appropriate subclasses for
    code converters, especially subclass 94 for error detection or correction
    of a digital code converter, and subclasses 120+ for testing code
    converters.

    348,    Television, subclasses 180+ for TV monitoring, testing and
    measuring.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 26,
    36.1+, 38.1, 47, and 53 for testing of a dynamic magnetic memory systems.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 184+
    for testing of process control systems; and subclasses 737+ for errors in
    arithmetic operations.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 201 for testing
    of memory systems.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 216+, for fault recovery,
    subclasses 242+, for fault diagnostic testing, and  subclasses 503+ for
    testing for synchronization purpose in multiplexing systems.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclass 10 for testing pulse or
    digital communication systems.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclasses 28+ for error checking of pulse counters.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 1+ for testing telephone
    circuits.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 180+ for
    reliability and availability, fault recovery, locating and avoidance,
    diagnostic testing or monitoring of a digital processing system for
    reliability purpose, and subclasses 186+ for security in a digital data
    processing system.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics of a
    electrophotographic device, particularly subclass 19 for job recovery.


CLS 371/1
TXT SKEW DETECTION/CORRECTION:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which an error caused by the
    time delay between plural parallel bits forming a byte or data word is
    detected and/or corrected.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 26 for
    electronically correcting phasing errors between related information
    signals.


CLS 371/2.1
TXT DATA FORMATTING TO IMPROVE ERROR DETECTION/CORRECTION CAPABILITY:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which a change in data format
    or sequence is utilized to improve the error detection/correction
    capability of a coding scheme.


CLS 371/2.2
TXT Memory access (e.g., address permutation):

    Subject matter under subclass 2.1 which changes the format of digital data
    by having the signal with the data written into or read out of a storage
    device.


    (1)     Note.  Address permutation arrangements are included in this
    subclass.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21.1,   for diagnostic testing of a memory.


CLS 371/3
TXT TESTING OF ERROR-CHECK SYSTEM:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which the proper operation of
    the error detection/correction or fault detection/recovery apparatus itself
    is verified.


CLS 371/5.1
TXT Error count or rate:

    Subject matter under the class definition which determines the number of
    bits in error or the number of bits in error per unit of time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47.1+,  for this subject matter combined with control of synchronization in
    response to an error detection signal.


CLS 371/5.2
TXT Pseudo-error rate:

    Subject matter under subclass 5.1 having a main data path and a secondary
    data path having intentionally degraded performance connected in parallel,
    the secondary path having a decision device to compare and evaluate the
    disagreement between the paths.

    (1)     Note.  Each disagreement is called a pseudo-error.


CLS 371/5.3
TXT Up-down counter:

    Subject matter under subclass 5.1 including an reversible accumulating
    register which counts up in response to an error and counts down in
    response to an error-free increment of time.


CLS 371/5.4
TXT Synchronization control:

    Subject matter under subclass 5.1 in which a determination of the error
    rate is used to control synchronization between devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47.1+,  for error detection controlled synchronization control other than
    by error rate.


CLS 371/5.5
TXT Shutdown or establishing system parameter (e.g., transmission rate):


    Subject matter under subclass 5.1 including control of system operation by
    either deactivation of the system, or controls a parameter related to
    normal system operation, in response to error count or error rate.


CLS 371/6
TXT DATA PULSE EVALUATION/BIT DECISION:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which the information bearing
    parameter (amplitude, pulse position, etc.) of a data pulse is evaluated to
    determine the proper logic state or value.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter in this subclass relates to determining if a
    data pulse represents a particular given logic state, e.g., logic one as
    opposed to logic zero.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 1+ for pulse selecting means.

    329,    Demodulators, subclasses 310+ for pulse modulation or detection,
    per se.


CLS 371/10.2
TXT REPLACEMENT OF MEMORY SPARE LOCATION, PORTION, OR SEGMENT:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which the spare apparatus
    comprises only a location, or a contiguous group of locations of memory.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 200 and 201
    for bad bit and testing read/write circuits, respectively.


CLS 371/10.3
TXT Spare row or column:

    Subject matter under subclass 10.2 spare apparatus comprises only a column
    or row within a memory device or element.


CLS 371/20.1
TXT TRANSMISSION FACILITY TESTING:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which the diagnostic testing
    is performed upon a channel of a transmission medium with a device for
    supplying digital data thereto.

    (1)     Note.  The transmission facility includes the transmission medium
    and all associated equipment required to transmit a message.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 241+ for testing of multiplex
    communication systems.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 224+ for testing of
    pulse or digital communications system.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclass 2 for diagnostic testing of
    telephone equipment.


CLS 371/20.2
TXT For channel having repeater:

    Subject matter under subclass 20.1 wherein a transmission channel has a
    repeating amplifier.


CLS 371/20.3
TXT By tone signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 20.1 which includes application of a test
    signal composed of one or more tone signals.


CLS 371/20.4
TXT Test pattern with comparison:

    Subject matter under subclass 20.1 in which the transmission facility is
    tested by applying a test pattern to the device under test and comparing
    the output to a reference test pattern.


CLS 371/20.5
TXT Loop-back:

    Subject matter under subclass 20.4 in which the transmission facility is
    configured so that the receiver shunts the test pattern back to transmitter
    for comparison at the transmitter.


CLS 371/20.6
TXT Loop or ring configuration:

    Subject matter under subclass 20.l in which a plurality of transmission
    stations or devices are configured in a serial fashion to form a loop or
    ring.


CLS 371/21.1
TXT MEMORY TESTING:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which the diagnostic testing
    is performed upon an information signal storage device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10.2+,  for fault recovery of memory devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 210+ for testing of
    magnetic memory elements, per se.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 26,
    47, and 53 for testing of dynamic magnetic memory systems.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 200 a bad bit
    memory used to store information; and subclass 201 for specifics of a
    memory which is tested but doesn't include data processing techniques.

    386,    Television Signal Processing for Dynamic Recording or Reproducing,
    subclasses 2+ and 47+ for drop-out detection or correction, subclasses 13+
    and 85+ for time correction, and subclasses 21+ and 113+ for recorder or
    reproducer fault condition compensation.


CLS 371/21.2
TXT Read-in with read-out and compare:

    Subject matter under subclass 21.1 in which the testing is done by reading
    in a test pattern, reading out the contents of the memory and comparing the
    output with the test pattern read in.


CLS 371/21.3
TXT Special test patterns (e.g., checkerboard, walking ones):

    Subject matter under subclass 21.2 in which the test patterns are selected
    to exercise the memory by transferring a combination of logic zeroes and
    ones through the memory, e.g., alternating zeroes and ones-checkerboard
    pattern.


CLS 371/21.4
TXT Electrical parameters (e.g., threshold voltage):

    Subject matter under subclass 21.1 in which the diagnostic test measures an
    electrical parameter of the memory device, e.g., threshold voltage.


CLS 371/21.5
TXT Performing arithmetic functions on memory contents:

    Subject matter under subclass 21.1 in which the diagnostic test consists of
    performing an arithmetic function, such as addition, on the contents of the
    memory and comparing the results to a reference value.


CLS 371/21.6
TXT Error mapping or logging:

    Subject matter under subclass 21.1 in which the detected error or fault is
    registered or recorded to present a history for diagnostic purposes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16.5,   for such subject matter used with data processor testing.


CLS 371/22.1
TXT DIGITAL LOGIC TESTING:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which the diagnostic test is
    performed upon a system or element performing a binary logic operation upon
    a signal having plural distinct discrete states.

    (1)     Note.  Testing or measuring of electrical properties are classified
    in Class 324 unless the testing device includes analysis of the information
    content of a digital signal.  Control signals are not data signals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclass,
    particularly subclass 73 for measuring and testing of electrical device
    parameters under controlled conditions.

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclass 16 for electronic
    digital logic circuitry with test facilitating feature and subclasses 21+
    for electronic digital logic circuitry maintaining signal integrity.


CLS 371/22.2
TXT Programmable logic array (PLA) testing:

    Subject matter under subclass 22.1 for testing an array of logical elements
    selectively configurable to sequentially perform various binary logic
    functions.


    (1)     Note.  Examples of such binary logic functions are AND, OR, NAND,
    NOR, and NOT.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclass,
    particularly subclass 73.1 for measuring and testing of electrical device
    parameters under controlled conditions.

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclass 16 for electronic
    digital logic circuitry with test facilitating feature, subclasses 21+ for
    electronic digital logic circuitry maintaining signal integrity, and
    subclasses 37+ for a programmable or multifunctional logic array circuit,
    per se.


CLS 371/22.31
TXT Scan path testing (e.g., level sensitive scan design (LSSD)):

    Subject matter under subclass 22.1 in which digital logic is designed for
    improved testability by including shift register latches (SRL) to enable
    the configuring of the circuitry into combinational logic form.

    (1)     Note. Test data is clocked (scanned) through the combinational
    logic forms and then compared to a reference.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27.1+,  for digital logic testing including test pattern generation in
    general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclass 16 for logic circuitry
    with test feature.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits And Systems, appropriate subclasses for shift register latches,
    per se.


CLS 371/22.32
TXT Boundary scan:

    Subject matter under subclass 22.31 where selected components in a circuit
    are each provided with one or more cells, comprising a single-bit register,
    coupled to a node of a component, such as an input, output, input/output or
    control node, and where said cells are serially coupled in a single chain,
    usually referred to as a boundary-scan chain.


CLS 371/22.33
TXT Random pattern generation (includes pseudorandom pattern)

    Subject matter under subclass 22.31 where a series of digits is generated
    in an unpredictable, incoherent, or arbitrary pattern.

    (1)     Note. Included herein is generation of a series of digits which
    simulates a random pattern.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20.4,   for test pattern with comparison in testing a transmission facility.

    21.3,   for use of special test patterns in memory testing.

    27.2,   for random test pattern generation in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses
    717.01+ for random number generation.


CLS 371/22.34
TXT Plural scan paths:

    Subject matter under subclass 22.31 having more than one group of shift
    register latches connected in series, and which groups form a plurality of
    shift paths (scan paths) along which data can be transmitted.


CLS 371/22.35
TXT Addressing:

    Subject matter under subclass 22.31 including data which specifies a
    location.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27.6,   for addressing in digital logic testing using a test pattern
    generator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 230.01+ for
    addressing memories.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 410+ for
    address formation in data processing systems.


CLS 371/22.36
TXT Clock or synchronization:

    Subject matter under subclass 22.31 including a reference timing function
    or a clock-pulse generator for causing the various parts of the device to
    operate on a common time base.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27.7,   for clock or synchronization in digital logic testing using a test
    pattern generator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 93+ for clocking or
    synchronization of logic stages or gates.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 141+ for synchronizing electrical nonlinear devices.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 551 - 558
    for synchronization in computer systems.


CLS 371/22.4
TXT Signature analysis:

    Subject matter under subclass 22.1 controlled including monitoring of
    controlled conditions of execution test points or nodes within the digital
    logic device and the measured output (signature) is compared to a known
    good signature.


CLS 371/22.5
TXT Built-in test circuit (BILBO):

    Subject matter under subclass 22.1 in which the digital logic testing
    equipment includes a selectively configurable shift register, structurally
    a part of the device being tested.

    (1)     Note.  Some selective configurations of the shift register include
    a latch, linear shift register, multiple input signature register, and a
    forced reset.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein are built-in logic block observation (BILBO)
    devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclass,
    particularly subclass 73.1 for measuring and testing of electrical device
    parameters under controlled conditions.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers,
    subclasses 19+ for a shift register used for measuring or testing; and
    subclass 28 for error checking or correction in a shift register system.


CLS 371/22.6
TXT Structural (in circuit test):

    Subject matter under subclass 22.1 in which each component of the logic
    circuit is tested individually while physically connected to the circuit.

    (1)     Note.  Generally, the test instrument is connected to nodes of the
    logic circuit under test in a unique way for each component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclass,
    particularly subclass 73.1 for measuring and testing of electrical device
    parameters (other than by information signal content) under controlled
    conditions.


CLS 371/24
TXT Device response compared to input pattern:

    Subject matter under subclass 22.1 in which the operational condition of a
    system or device is determined by comparing the system or device response
    to a test signal input pattern.


CLS 371/25.1
TXT Device response compared to expected fault-free response:

    Subject matter under subclass 22.1 in which the operational condition of a
    system or device is determined by comparing the system or device response
    to a predetermined fault-free response.


CLS 371/26
TXT Device response compared to fault dictionary/truth table:

    Subject matter under subclass 22.1 in which the operational condition and
    identification of an actual or potential fault is determined by comparing
    the system response to a predetermined fault dictionary or truth table.


CLS 371/27.1
TXT Including test pattern generator:

    Subject matter under subclass 22.1 in which the specific means or method of
    generating a test pattern for a digital logic testing system is claimed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 100+ for miscellaneous waveform generation or
    conversion.

    345,    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 26 and 194+ for a
    character generator in a visual display system with selective electrical
    control.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses
    717.01+ for random number generators, and subclasses 718.01+ for function
    generators.


CLS 371/27.2
TXT Random pattern generation (includes pseudorandom pattern):

    Subject matter under subclass 27.1 where a series of digits is generated in
    an unpredictable, incoherent or arbitrary pattern.

    (1)     Note. Included herein is generation of a series of digits which
    simulates a random pattern.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20.4,   for testing a transmission facility using a test pattern with
    comparison

    21.3,   for use of special test patterns in memory testing.

    22.33,  for random test pattern generation in boundary scanning.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses
    717.01+ for random number generation.


CLS 371/27.3
TXT Having analog signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 27.1 including an electrical signal, the
    amplitude or frequency of which varies continuously in value over time.


CLS 371/27.4
TXT Simulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 27.1 having an electrical model or a computer
    program which imitates the operation of a device under test.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 578 for
    using computers for simulation, and subclasses 801+ for analog simulation.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 500 for
    simulation of computer components.


CLS 371/27.5
TXT Testing specific device:

    Subject matter under subclass 27.1 where the test pattern is applied to a
    distinctive named means to carry out a special function.

    (1)     Note: Examples of things that are not specific devices include
    "logic  device," "circuit," "device under test," etc.

    (2)     Note: See sections D and E of the class definition for the
    distinction between class 371 and classes having the specific device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21.1+,  for testing an information signal storage device.


CLS 371/27.6
TXT Addressing:

    Subject matter under subclass 27.1 including data which specifies a
    location.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22.35,  for scan path testing with addressing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 230.01+ for
    addressing memories.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 410+ for
    address formation in data processing systems.


CLS 371/27.7
TXT Clock or synchronization:

    Subject matter under subclass 27.1 including a reference timing function or
    a clock pulse generator for causing the various parts of the device to
    operate on a common time base.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22.36,  for clocking or synchronizing in scan path testing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 93+ for clocking or
    synchronizing of logic stages or gates.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 141+ for synchronizing nonlinear devices, circuits, or
    systems.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 551 - 558
    for synchronization in computer systems.


CLS 371/28
TXT Determination of marginal operation limits:

    Subject matter under subclass 22.1 in which the device or system is tested
    under controlled and varying circuit parameters, such as input voltage, to
    determine the range of circuit parameter values within which the device or
    system operates without error or malfunction.


CLS 371/30
TXT DIGITAL DATA ERROR CORRECTION:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which the error in information
    content of pulse or pulse coded data is corrected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for error detection which does not include correction of the error
    signal.


CLS 371/31
TXT Substitution of previous valid data:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 in which a previously validated data state
    or value is substituted for data state or value determined to be erroneous.


CLS 371/32
TXT Request for retransmission:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 in which the digital data error correction
    is achieved by retransmission of data responsive to a request.


CLS 371/33
TXT Retransmission if no ACK returned:

    Subject matter under subclass 32 in which a retransmission of data is
    initiated upon the condition that no acknowledgement (ACK) signal is
    returned from the receiver.


CLS 371/34
TXT Feedback to transmitter for comparison:

    Subject matter under subclass 32 in which the digital data is returned to
    the transmitter for comparsion to detect an error.


CLS 371/35
TXT Including forward error correcting capability:

    Subject matter under subclass 32 in which the digital data is encoded to
    enable error correction at the receiver and retransmission is requested
    only if the error rate exceeds the forward error correcting capability.


CLS 371/36
TXT Majority decision/voter circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 in which error correction is effectively
    achieved by error masking (making error invisible at output) through
    majority logic or voting techniques.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 35+ for threshold
    (e.g., majority) logic.


CLS 371/37.01
TXT Forward correction by block code:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 in which a grouping of symbols (i.e., a
    block of data or a data word) is transformed into a code word having an
    increased number of symbols in order to provide an increased minimum
    distance between code words relative to the minimum distance of the
    corresponding data words in order to provide for forward correction of the
    encoded data in the event that an error or erasure is subsequently imposed
    on the encoded data.

    (1)     Note. This subclass includes both forward error correction, per se,
    (i.e., the receiver corrects the error without requiring any further
    information from the  sender, which requires a minimum amount of redundancy
    in the  transmission since not only must an error be detected, but its
    location must be determined) and forward error correction with the
    assistance of symbol reliability information.

    (2)     Note. Forward error correction (FEC) is an error-correcting
    technique that avoids the need for any reverse channel by enabling
    self-correction of errors at the receiver by adding information (at the
    expense of throughput) to enable the receiver to determine what the error
    was and the correct information to substitute for said error.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43.1,   for convolutional codes in which each check bit is generated as a
    function of a different plurality of information bits and is interspersed
    among the information bits at predetermined intervals with no natural
    beginning point or ending point.


CLS 371/37.02
TXT For packet or frame multiplexed data:

    Subject matter under subclass 37.01 where plural encoded data streams are
    simultaneously transmitted over a common transmission medium in such a
    manner that the information signals may be discretely recovered, wherein
    each data stream contains one or more bytes preceded by an address header
    or where the simultaneously transmitted plurality of data streams include
    synchronization or other control information.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 351+ for multiplex switching
    such as packet or frame switching.


CLS 371/37.03
TXT Hamming code:

    Subject matter under subclass 37.01 where there are m information code
    elements and k error check code elements such that there are sufficient
    check elements to correct a single error and the k check elements are
    determined by even parity checks in conjunction with element values
    appearing in certain selected information positions where each of the
    elements of the code group must be in a parity check subgroup with one or
    more of the check elements and no two different code elements having
    exactly the same set of check elements associated with it.

    (1)     Note.  See U.S. Patent RE23601, columns 5-9, for a more rigorous
    definition.


CLS 371/37.04
TXT Nonbinary data (e.g., ternary):

    Subject matter under subclass 37.01 where each bit of a data word can
    assume more than two values.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 59+ for nonbinary
    logic circuits.


CLS 371/37.05
TXT Variable length data:

    Subject matter under subclass 37.01 where the number of bits in a data word
    is not fixed, but can vary from word to word.


CLS 371/37.06
TXT Using symbol reliability information (e.g., soft decision):

    Subject matter under subclass 37.01 where, during error correction, in
    addition to an error correcting code, use is made of information about the
    reliability of the decoding of a particular bit.


CLS 371/37.07
TXT Code based on generator polynomial:

    Subject matter under subclass 37.01 where a code word c(x), where x is a
    unit delay operator, is generated by dividing a delayed version of the data
    polynomial d(x), i.e,. xnd(x), by a generator polynomial, g(x), and
    subtracting the remainder from the delayed version of the data polynomial,
    thereby producing a code word that is a multiple of the generator
    polynomial, and where the data polynomial d(x) is such that positions
    within the block correspond to powers of x and data values at the positions
    correspond to polynomial coefficient values.


CLS 371/37.08
TXT Bose-Chaudhuri-Hocquenghem code:

    Subject matter under subclass 37.07 where the block code is a t error
    correcting code which is the set of all polynomials [a(c)] over the Galois
    field GF(2m) of degree n-1 or less, such that a(ai)=0, for i=1,3,5,...,2t-1
    where a is a primitive element of the finite field GF(2m), and where c is
    the radix 2 for binary data, a(c)=a0+a1c+a2c2+...+an-1cn-1, and aj=0,1
    (j=0,1,2,...,n-1).


CLS 371/37.09
TXT Golay code:

    Subject matter under subclass 37.07 where the block code is an (n,k,t) type
    polynomial code in which each code word is n=23 bits long, contains k=13
    data or information bits, corrects up to t=3 errors, and the code word also
    contains (n-k)=10 redundant check bits.


CLS 371/37.11
TXT Reed-Solomon code:

    Subject matter under subclass 37.07 where the block code consists of K data
    and N-K check symbols, where N is an arbitrary number and K is less than N,
    and where each symbol is made of J binary bits encoded with a generator
    polynomial g(x) for the code and a field generating polynomial M(x) which
    defines the Galois field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37.5,   for cross-interleave Reed-Solomon codes.


CLS 371/37.12
TXT Syndrome computed:

    Subject matter under subclass 37.07 where decoded data is divided by an
    inverse of the generator polynomial to obtain a data word of 1 bit which
    indicate which bits of the decoded data are in error.


CLS 371/37.2
TXT Double error correcting with single error correcting code:

    Subject matter under subclass 37.01 in which a single bit error correcting
    code arrangement corrects double bit errors by successively correcting
    consecutive single bit errors.


CLS 371/37.3
TXT Error correction during refresh cycle:

    Subject matter under subclass 37.01 including a digital data storage device
    having a refresh cycle in which decaying information is read before it
    becomes unrecognizable, and rewritten in original form, and decoding a
    stored block data code signal for error correction during the refresh
    cycle.


CLS 371/37.4
TXT Double encoding codes (e.g., product, concatenated):

    Subject matter under subclass 37.01 including calculation and independent
    decoding of two independent sets of check words for enhancement of error
    correction.


CLS 371/37.5
TXT Cross-interleave reed-solomon code (CIRC): Subject matter under subclass
    37.4 doubly encoded with Reed-Solomon codes and interleaved to enable the
    correction of burst errors.


CLS 371/37.6
TXT Parallel generation of check bits:

    Subject matter under subclass 37.01 having plural check bit calculating
    elements connected in parallel.


CLS 371/37.7
TXT Error correcting code with additional error detection code (e.g., cyclic
    redundancy character, parity):

    Subject matter under subclass 37.01 which encodes digital data with both an
    error correcting code (ECC) for error correction and detection, and an
    additional error detection code to detect uncorrected errors.

    (1)     Note.  Such additional codes include a cyclic redundancy code (CRC)
    and a parity bit code.


CLS 371/37.8
TXT Look-up table encoding or decoding:

    Subject matter under subclass 37.01 having an encoder or decoder which
    contains a table of all possible error patterns in a corrupted received
    code word and compares the computed syndrome to these patterns to determine
    the position of erroneous bits.


CLS 371/37.9
TXT Threshold decoding (e.g., majority logic):

    Subject matter under subclass 37.01 the decoder operates upon a corrupted
    received code word to compute the parity check sums which are applied to a
    threshold or majority gate and an error indicated if the sums exceed a
    certain value.


CLS 371/38.1
TXT Random and burst error correction:

    Subject matter under subclass 37.01 in which the block code is capable of
    correcting both random and burst errors.

    (1)     Note.  Random errors are of the type where each data bit is
    affected independently by noise.  Burst errors are of the type where
    disturbances introduce errors of unspecified time duration and thus cause a
    cluster of multiple consecutive data bits in error.

    (2)     Note.  Interlacing or interleaving techniques may be used to give a
    random error correcting code the capability of correcting both random and
    burst errors.  A product code or concatenated code may be formed from two
    codes to provide both random and burst error correction capability.


CLS 371/39.1
TXT Burst error correction:

    Subject matter under subclass 37.01 in which the block code is derived to
    be most effective in correcting burst errors.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a block code with good burst-correcting
    capability is the Reed-Solomon code. Interleaving techniques are also
    utilized to improve the burst-correcting capability of a code.


CLS 371/40.11
TXT Memory access:

    Subject matter under subclass 37.01 in which digital data being written
    into or read out of a storage device is encoded in a block code format.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10.2+,  for memory fault recovery systems.

    21.1+,  for diagnostic testing of a memory.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 26,
    36.1+, 47, and 53 for error detection combined with a magnetic, dynamic
    memory system.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 200 and 201
    for bad bit and testing read/write circuits, respectively.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, appropriate subclasses
    for a dynamic, non-magnetic memory device.


CLS 371/40.12
TXT Code word for plural n-bit (n>1) storage units (e.g., x4 DRAM's):

    Subject matter under subclass 40.11 in which there is more than one storage
    device, each storing more than a single digit of data.


CLS 371/40.13
TXT Error correction code for memory address:

    Subject matter under subclass 40.11 where the block code includes a memory
    address as part of the encoded data.


CLS 371/40.14
TXT Dynamic data storage:

    Subject matter under subclass 40.11 where there is relative motion between
    a transducer and an information storage medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, for dynamic
    magnetic data storage and retrieval.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, for dynamic data storage
    and retrieval.


CLS 371/40.15
TXT Disk array:

    Subject matter under subclass 40.14 where the storage medium is a plurality
    of interconnected disks.


CLS 371/40.16
TXT Tape:

    Subject matter under subclass 40.14 where the storage medium is essentially
    of a two dimensional shape with one dimension being very long in relation
    to the other.


CLS 371/40.17
TXT Code word parallel access:

    Subject matter under subclass 40.11 in which the bits of the code word are
    created from parallel data digits.


CLS 371/40.18
TXT Solid state memory:

    Subject matter under subclass 40.11 where the storage device is or contains
    a solid state device (e.g., an integrated circuit or transistor).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21.1+,  for memory testing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 174+ for solid
    state memories.


CLS 371/40.2
TXT Error correct and restore:

    Subject matter under subclass 40.11 which corrects the errors upon readout
    of the data and the corrected data in written into memory as a substitute
    for the erroneous data.


CLS 371/40.3
TXT Error pointer:

    Subject matter under subclass 40.11 which generates a signal (pointer) upon
    the occurrence of a particular type of error or failure.

    (1)     Note.  In many error correcting systems accessing data from a
    memory or storage device, the error pointer identifies the track or channel
    with which the error or failure is associated.


CLS 371/40.4
TXT Check bits stored in separate area of memory: Subject matter under subclass
    40.11 including a section of memory for storage of the check bits separate
    from that the section of memory storing data information.


CLS 371/41
TXT Adaptive error-correction capability:

    Subject matter under subclass 38.1 in which the error-correction capability
    of the system is adapted to the exsiting error rate by selection of
    encoding format.


CLS 371/42
TXT Synchronization:

    Subject matter under subclass 37.8 in which a lack of synchronization
    between encoder and decoder is detected and/or corrected.


CLS 371/43.1
TXT Forward error correction by tree code (e.g., convolutional):

    Subject matter under subclass 30 in which information bits are encoded to
    generate a plurality of check bits, each check bit is generated as a
    function of a different plurality of information bits and is interspersed
    among the information bits at predetermined intervals with no natural
    beginning point or ending point (i.e., there is no length restriction for
    the encoded data).

    (1)     Note. Convolutional coding means adding to the information a
    repeating sequence that is known to the receiver.  By subtracting this
    repeating sequence and performing other tests, the receiver can determine
    what should have been received with a high degree of accuracy.

    (2)     Note. This subclass includes forward error correction, per se,
    (i.e., the receiver corrects the error without requiring any further
    information from the sender, which requires a minimum amount of redundancy
    in the transmission since not only must an error be detected, but its
    location must be determined) and forward error correction with the
    assistance of symbol reliability information.

    (3)     Note. This subclass does not include demodulation decisions based
    upon oversampling or on intersymbol interference alone.

    (4)     Note. This subclass does not include channel equalization or
    predistortion control based on correction results (e.g., decision feedback
    equalization).

    (5)     Note. This subclass does not include detection or correction of
    errors produced by trial values, perturbations, predictions, quantizations,
    estimations or approximations, which errors are used as feedback for
    control of signal generation or coding (e.g., PID controlling, source
    calibration, successive approximation A/D conversion, DSV constrained
    encoding, predictive encoding).

    (6)     Note. Forward error correction (FEC) is an error-correcting
    technique that avoids the need for any reverse channel by enabling
    self-correction of errors at the receiver by adding information (at the
    expense of throughput) to enable the receiver to determine what the error
    was and the correct information to substitute for said error.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30      and 36, for various types of data correction such as trial values,
    perturbations, predictions, quantizations, estimations or approximations,
    which errors are used as feedback for control of signal generation or
    coding.

    37.01+, for block codes wherein the information bits and associated bits
    form independent and distinct blocks of data bits.

    48+,    for various error/fault detection techniques such as those based on
    oversampling or intersymbol interference.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 50+ for digital
    data conversion and subclasses 126+ for analog to or from digital
    conversion.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 229+ for pulse or
    digital equalizers.


CLS 371/43.2
TXT Puncturing:

    Subject matter under subclass 43.1 where single bits are periodically
    deleted at intervals from a low-rate convolutional code.


CLS 371/43.3
TXT Sequential decoder (e.g., Fano or stack algorithm):

    Subject matter under subclass 43.1 where a tree structure of the
    convolutional code is used for searching locally a path which is considered
    to be the most likely to produce a correct data sequence.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43.6,   for maximum likelihood decoding in general.

    43.8,   for branch metric calculation in
    general.


CLS 371/43.4
TXT Trellis code:

    Subject matter under subclass 43.1 where, for a convolutional code of k
    bits length, an inverse coding operation is performed in which 2k-1
    decision bits are used to select an output bit and where after many
    branches, the most probable path will be selected with a high degree of
    certainty, and where the branches form a mesh pattern (i.e., branches start
    at a plurality of points and intersect other branches).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclass 265 for trellis coders
    and decoders in pulse or digital communication.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 2.51 for
    viterbi trellis speech recognition.


CLS 371/43.5
TXT Syndrome decodable (e.g., self orthogonal):

    Subject matter under subclass 43.1 where decoded data is divided by an
    inverse of the generator polynomial to obtain a data word of 1 bit which
    indicate which bits of the decoded data are in error.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37.12,  for syndrome decodable block codes.


CLS 371/43.6
TXT Maximum likelihood:

    Subject matter under subclass 43.1 where a decoder selects the sequence out
    of all the possible transmitted sequences which is most likely to match the
    received data sequence and determines corresponding digital (data)
    information.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43.3,   for a sequential decoder.

    43.7,   for Viterbi decoding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 262 and 341 for maximum
    likelihood decoding (other than for error correction) in pulse or digital
    communication.


CLS 371/43.7
TXT Viterbi decoding:

    Subject matter under subclass 43.1 where data is not decoded as soon as it
    is received, instead, a sequence of data, having a predetermined decoding
    depth, following the digit to be decoded is first collected, then, by
    computing what are known as path metrics, a limited number of possible
    messages are selected, each extending throughout the decoding depth far
    beyond the digit presently to be decoded, with one such survivor sequence
    ending in each of the data states.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43.6,   for maximum likelihood decoding.

    43.8,   for branch metric calculation decoding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 262 and 341 for Viterbi
    decoding (other than for error correction) in pulse or digital
    communication.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 2.51 for
    viterbi trellis speech recognition.


CLS 371/43.8
TXT Branch metric calculation:

    Subject matter under subclass 43.1 where a tree of possible data sequences
    is constructed identifying the possible data sequences in terms of data
    states, and from which correlations are computed for selecting the paths
    which are to survive to the next stage of decoding received data.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43.3,   for sequential decoding.

    43.7,   for Viterbi decoding.


CLS 371/44
TXT Random and burst errors:

    Subject matter under subclass 43.1 in which the convolutional code is
    capable of correcting both random and burst errors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38.1,   for block code correction of both random and burst errors.


CLS 371/45
TXT Burst errors:

    Subject matter under subclass 43.1 in which the convolutional code corrects
    for burst errors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39.1,   for block code correcting of burst errors.


CLS 371/46
TXT Synchronization:

    Subject matter under subclass 43.1 in which a lack of synchronization
    between the encoder and decoder is detected and/or corrected.


CLS 371/47.1
TXT ERROR DETECTION FOR SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which error detecting
    techniques are utilized to detect an out-of-synch condition or to control
    synchronization between devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for block code synchronization error correction.

    46,     for convolutional code synchronization error correction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 503+ for synchronization of
    time multiplex information which may include error detecting techniques.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclass 357 for synchronization
    failure prevention in pulse or digital communication.


CLS 371/48
TXT ERROR/FAULT DETECTION TECHNIQUES:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which specific techniques are
    recited for detecting an error or fault condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30+,    for digital data error correction which include error/fault
    detection techniques.

    SEARCH CLASS

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 180+ for
    reliability and availability, fault recovery, locating, and avoidance in
    digital data processing systems.


CLS 371/49.1
TXT Parity bit:

    Subject matter under subclass 48 in which a redundant bit is added to a
    block of data bits.

    (1)     Note.  This redundant bit or parity bit is of a logic state to make
    the total number of bits having a predetermined logic state within the
    block odd or even.


CLS 371/49.2
TXT Parity generator or checker circuit detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 49.1 which specify the particular elements of
    a parity signal source or comparitor circuit.


CLS 371/49.3
TXT Even and odd parity:

    Subject matter under subclass 49.1 wherein the parity scheme in the system
    includes the generation of parity bits on both an even and odd basis.


CLS 371/49.4
TXT Parity prediction:

    Subject matter under subclass 49.1 which calculates an expected parity
    value prior to execution of an operation and is subsequently compared to
    the actual parity value to detect an error.


CLS 371/50.1
TXT Plural dimension parity check:

    Subject matter under subclass 49.1 in which a single parity bit is derived
    from data bits taken over each of two or more dimensions, such as
    horizontal and vertical parity.


CLS 371/51.1
TXT Storage accessing (e.g., address parity check):

    Subject matter under subclass 49.1 in which the parity bit is calculated
    for data bits read into or read out of an information signal storage
    device.

    (1)     Note.  Address parity check arrangements are included in this
    subclass.


CLS 371/52
TXT Constant-ratio code (m/n):

    Subject matter under subclass 48 in which a code constraint of a
    constant-ratio between bits of a first logic state and a second logic state
    is utilized to enable error/fault detection.


CLS 371/53
TXT Check character:

    Subject matter under subclass 48 in which a check character, derived as a
    predetermined function of a group of data bits, is associated with the
    group of data bits for error detection purposes.


CLS 371/54
TXT Modulo-n residue check character:

    Subject matter under subclass 53 in which a check character, calculated as
    the remainder after the value of the digital data is divided by the
    modulus-n, is associated with the digital data to enable error/fault
    detection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 739 for
    residue code checking in arithmetic operations.


CLS 371/55
TXT Code constraint monitored:

    Subject matter under subclass 48 in which the digital data encoding scheme
    provides inherent constrained conditions which are monitored to enable
    error/fault detection.


CLS 371/56
TXT Multilevel coding (n 2):

    Subject matter under subclass 55 in which the digital data is encoded in a
    multilevel or multistate format where the number of levels or states in
    greater than 2.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclass 292 for disparity
    reduction in multilevel digital communications.


CLS 371/57.1
TXT Forbidden combination or improper condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 48 in which a forbidden combination of
    digital data or improper condition of a device is monitored to enable error
    or fault detection.


CLS 371/57.2
TXT Specified digital signal pattern or pulse count:

    Subject matter under subclass 57.1 in which the forbidden combination is
    either a specified pattern of digital data or a count of one or more types
    of digital pulses.


CLS 371/59
TXT Two key-down detector:

    Subject matter under subclass 57 in which the improper condition is the
    simultaneous activation of two or more keys on a data input device.


CLS 371/61
TXT Data timing/clocking:

    Subject matter under subclass 57 in which the timing or clocking of digital
    data is monitored to detect a predetermined forbidden combination or
    condition.


CLS 371/62
TXT Time delay/interval monitored:

    Subject matter under subclass 57 in which the time delay between events or
    data is detected to determine a predetermined forbidden condition.


CLS 371/63
TXT Two-rail logic:

    Subject matter under subclass 57 in which both the true and complement
    state of each logic function is provided and the simultaneous occurrence of
    both states indicates a forbidden combination.


CLS 371/64
TXT Noise level:

    Subject matter under subclass 57 in which the forbidden condition is the
    presence of noise exceeding a predetermined level.


CLS 371/65
TXT Missing-bit/drop-out detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 57 in which the improper combination is a
    missing bit or dropout of a bit within a data character.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 18+ for missing pulse detecting means.

    386,    Television Signal Processing for Dynamic Recording or Reproducing,
    subclasses 2+ and 47+ for drop-out detecting or correcting in the
    processing of a television signal.


CLS 371/67.1
TXT Comparison of data:

    Subject matter under subclass 48 in which an error or fault is detected by
    the comparison of data.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for diagnostic apparatus testing which include error detection by
    comparison of data.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 146.2 for digital comparator
    devices, per se.


CLS 371/68.1
TXT Plural parallel devices or channel:

    Subject matter under subclass 67.1 in which the data from plural parallel
    devices or channels is compared to detect an error or fault.


CLS 371/68.2
TXT Transmission facility:

    Subject matter under subclass 68.1 which detects an error or fault in a
    device including a channel of a transmission medium with a device for
    supplying a digital signal thereto.


CLS 371/69.1
TXT Sequential repetition:

    Subject matter under subclass 67.1 in which an error or fault is detected
    by comparison of repetitive data.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is majority logic or voter circuitry in
    which the most frequently occurring data is presumed to be correct.


CLS 371/70
TXT True and complement data:

    Subject matter under subclass 5.1 in which the data being transferred and
    compared comprises both the true and complement bit states of the data.


CLS 371/71
TXT Device output compared to input:

    Subject matter under subclass 69.1 in which the error/fault detection is
    enabled by comparing the device output with the device input.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for diagnostic apparatus testing which includes comparsion of the
    device output with the device input.


CLS 371/72
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition not hereinabove classified.

    FOREIGN ART COLLECTIONS

    The definitions for FOR 100-FOR 104 below correspond to the definitions of
    the abolished subclasses under Class 371 from which these collections were
    formed. See the Foreign Art Collection schedule for specific
    correspondences. [Note: The titles and definitions for indented art
    collections include all the details of the one(s) that are hierarchically
    superior.]


CLS 371/FOR100
TXT Scan path testing (LSSD):

    Foreign art collections including subject matter  in which digital logic is
    designed for improved test ability by including shift register latches
    (SRL) to enable the configuring of the circuitry in combinational logic
    form.


CLS 371/FOR101
TXT Including test pattern generator:

    Foreign art collections including subject matter in which the specific
    means or method of generating a test pattern for an error checking system
    is claimed.


CLS 371/FOR102
TXT Block code:

    Foreign art collections including subject matter in which a plurality of
    information bits are encoded to generate a plurality of check bits as a
    function of the information bits with the information bits and check bits
    being associated together to form a block code.


CLS 371/FOR103
TXT Memory access:

    Foreign art collections including subject matter in which digital data
    being written into or read out of a storage device is encoded in a block
    code format.



CLS 371/FOR104
TXT Convolutional code:

    Foreign art collections including subject matter in the information bits
    are encoded to generate a plurality of check bits, each check bit is
    generated as a function of a different plurality of information bits and is
    interspersd among the information bits at predetermined intervals with no
    natural beginning point or ending point as in block codes.


CLS 372/
TTL COHERENT LIGHT GENERATORS

CLS 372/
TXT

    I.      GLOSSARY

    ACTIVE MEDIA

    The material, in which most of the atoms can be placed in an excited state
    (i.e., population inversion state), so that an electromagnetic wave of the
    proper frequency passing through it can stimulate a cascade of photons.

    ACOUSTO-OPTIC

    The effect, on the properties of a beam of light, by sound energy,
    interacting with the light within a volume of matter.

    BIREFRINGENT

    The property of dividing a ray of light into two polarized rays (known as
    the ordinary and extraordinary rays), the directions of polarization of the
    rays being at right angles to each other.

    COHERENT LIGHT

    A single frequency of light.  A light beam in which the electric vector at
    any point in it is related to that at any other point by a definite,
    continuous sinusoidal function.

    DIFFRACTION

    The bending of a light ray in passing the edge formed by contiguous opaque
    and transparent areas.

    ELECTRO-OPTIC

    The effect, on the properties of a beam of light, by an electrical field,
    interacting with the light within a volume of matter.

    GLOW DISCHARGE

    A type of discharge in which a uniform glow is created through the entire
    volume of a gaseous active media rather than a channel or spark discharge
    through a restricted portion of the active media.

    INTERFERENCE

    The interaction of two light waves which, as a result of their relative
    phases, produce a cancellation or reinforcement of wave energy.

    LASER

    A device for generating a very narrow, intense beam of coherent light.  The
    name is derived from the initial letters of "Light Amplification by
    Stimulated Emission of Radiation".  In the emission of ordinary light the
    molecules or atoms of the source emit their radiation independently of each
    other, and consequently there is no definite phase relationship among the
    vibrations in the resultant beam.  The light is incoherent.  The laser, by
    means of an optical resonator, forces the atoms of the material within the
    resonator to radiate in phase.  The emitted radiation is stimulated by the
    excitation of atoms to a higher energy level by means of energy supplied to
    the device.

    LIGHT

    In this class, light includes not only optical wavelengths, i.e., that part
    of the spectrum extending from the near infrared, through the visible, to
    the ultraviolet, but also includes those portions of the spectrum which
    extends from the near infrared through the long wavelength, far infrared,
    and from the ultraviolet to X-rays and gamma rays at the shortest
    wavelengths.

    LIGHT, VISIBLE LIGHT

    Visible light is radiation which stimulates the optical receptors of the
    eye, and having a wavelength from 3850 to 7600 Angstrom units.  The term
    light is used to refer to wavelengths in the above-mentioned range and,
    often, also to refer to the ranges immediately adjacent, i.e., the
    ultraviolet and infrared ranges which are nonvisible.

    MODE

    One of several states of electromagnetic wave oscillation that may be
    sustained in a given resonant system.  Each type of vibration is designated
    as a particular mode, and has its own particular frequency and electric and
    magnetic field configurations.

    OPTICAL ELEMENT

    A structure which performs a basic optical function, i.e., the structure
    when exposed to or placed in the path of a group of light rays will cause a
    deviation of the rays in accordance with a regular pattern, a blocking of
    the rays, or a modification in the character or properties of the light.

    OPTICAL FIBER

    A light guidance system that is cylindrical in shape.  The fiber relies
    upon modal transmission to transmit light along its axial length.  Light
    enters one end of the fiber and emerges from the opposite end with only
    minimal loss.

    OPTICS, OPTICAL

    The science of light and vision and the construction of optical instruments.

    OPTICAL SYSTEM

    A combination of two or more similar or diverse optical elements which are
    optically related.

    REFLECTION

    Light striking a surface and returning back into the medium from which it
    came.

    REFRACTION

    The deviation of light which results when a ray of light passes obliquely
    from a medium of one density to a medium of another density.

    RESONANT CAVITY

    A mode-selecting low-loss optical structure in which the laser action takes
    place by the build-up of electromagnetic field intensity upon multiple
    reflection.

    SEMICONDUCTOR

    An electronic conductor, with resistivity between that of metals and that
    of insulators, in which the electrical charge carrier concentration
    increases with increasing temperature over some temperature range.  Over
    most of the practical temperature range, the resistance has a negative
    temperature coefficient. Certain semiconductors possess two types of
    carriers, negative electrons and positive holes.  The charge carriers are
    usually electrons, but there may be also some ionic conductivity.

    SEMICONDUCTOR LASER

    A light-emitting diode that uses stimulated emission to produce a coherent
    light output.

    SPECTRUM

    The band of colors produced by separating a beam of white light into its
    component frequencies.

    THIN FILM

    A film of optically transparent material, usually deposited by sputtering
    or evaporation, that may be made in a pattern on a substrate or used as
    insulation between successive layers of components, and generally on the
    order of a few wavelengths thick.

    THIN FILM WAVEGUIDE

    A thin dielectric guide film of high refractive index formed adjacent to a
    substrate or support region of lower refractive index.  The thin film
    relies upon modal transmission to transmit light along its length.  Light
    enters one end of the thin film where it is processed (e.g., modulated or
    switched) and emerges from the opposite end.

    WAVEGUIDE

    A system of material boundaries capable of guiding electromagnetic wave.  A
    transmission line comprising a hollow conducting tube within which
    electromagnetic waves are propagated on a solid dielectric or
    dielectric-filled conductor.

    II.     GENERAL STATEMENT OF THE CLASS SUBJECT MATTER:

    This is a restricted class for coherent light generator systems wherein an
    assembly of electrical, mechanical, and optical components produces an
    intense, coherent, directional beam of light by stimulating electronic,
    ionic, or molecular transitions to lower energy levels.

    A.      The generators of this system consists of (a) a medium which may be
    solid, liquid or gaseous, comprising a system of particles, molecules, or
    atoms; (b) means including a source of energy for setting the particles,
    molecules, or atoms into an excited energy state; and (c) means to abstract
    electromagnetic wave energy produced by the relaxation of the system of
    particles, molecules, or atoms to a lower energy state.  The means to
    abstract electromagnetic wave energy provides for escape from said
    substance of substantially coherent electromagnetic radiation in the
    optical or Quasi-optical wavelength range.  In general, the wavelength of
    the emitted radiation lies in the range from the ultraviolet to the far
    infrared of the electromagnetic spectrum, corresponding to a wavelength
    range extending from 100 to 2,000,000 angstroms.

    B.      The generators of these systems when combined with other diverse
    systems or devices will be classified with the diverse system or device.

    III.    FOR RELATED SUBJECT MATTER SEARCH CLASS

    128,    Surgery, appropriate subclasses for lasers used in surgery.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, in particular subclasses
    157.41 and 157.61 for the use of lasers in a reaction.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 121.6 for lasers use in electric arc
    heating.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 423+ for lasers used to generate ions;
    subclasses 281+ for lasers used in ionic separation systems; and subclass
    493.1 for other radiant energy generators.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 301.16+, 301.36, and 301.4+ for
    compositions used as the active medium in lasers; and subclasses 372+ for
    gas compositions used as the active medium in lasers.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
     subclasses 13, 79-103 and 918, for incoherent light emitting injection
    luminescent devices, and subclasses 80-85 for incoherent semiconductor
    light emitting sources combined with semiconductor light responsive
    devices.  In general, to avoid excessive duplication of the same patents in
    both Classes 372 and 257, patents with claims reciting coherent light
    generators (lasers) are not to be cross-referenced in the aforementioned
    subclasses in Class 257 unless those patents contain disclosure of a light
    emitting semiconductor device which is NOT a laser or coherent generator.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for lasers
    used in optical measuring and testing.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    27 for holographic systems having a particular laser source; subclasses
    109+ for optical communication systems which may use a laser, subclasses
    115+ for optical multiplexing communications systems which utilize lasers,
    and subclasses 333+ for laser used as  amplifiers. Search other subclasses
    for the lenses, reflectors, etc., used in laser systems.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 713
    and 800+ for computations which include electro-  optic means.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclasses 103 and 122 for lasers used for nuclear fusion; and subclass 326
    for the combination of a laser and a nuclear reactor.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, subclass 14 for laser in integrated optical
    circuit.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, subclasses 22+ for
    methods of making radiation emissive devices of the semiconductor barrier
    layer type.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 150+ for high temperature (Tc  30 K) superconducting devices,
    particularly subclass 180 for laser generators using high temperature
    superconducting material.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, in particularly Class 522,
    subclass 2 for the use of a laser in preparing or treating a synthetic
    resin or natural rubber.


CLS 372/1
TXT SUPER RADIANT LASER:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein coherent light is
    generated in an inverted medium without the use of cavity feedback.


CLS 372/2
TXT FREE ELECTRON LASER:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein laser action is
    accomplished by sending a relativistic electron beam through a spatially
    periodic transverse magnetic field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for lasers which are pumped by an electron beam.


CLS 372/3
TXT RAMAN  LASER:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which the coherent light is
    generated as a direct result of the excitation of stimulated Raman
    scattering.


CLS 372/4
TXT LONG WAVELENGTH (E.G., FAR INFRARED):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the wavelength of the
    generated light is generally greater than 10 microns.


CLS 372/5
TXT SHORT WAVELENGTH LASER:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the wavelength of the
    generated light is generally less than 400 nanometers (.4 microns).


CLS 372/6
TXT OPTICAL FIBER LASER:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which the laser is constructed
    in the form of an optical fiber.


CLS 372/7
TXT THIN FILM LASER:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the active media of the
    laser is in the form of a thin film.


CLS 372/8
TXT LASER LOGIC SYSTEM:

    Subject matter under the class definition where an optical logic function
    is performed by a laser system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 713 for
    digital computations which include electro-optical means.


CLS 372/9
TXT PARTICULAR BEAM CONTROL DEVICE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein means is provided for
    controlling some characteristic or parameter of the output beam, such as
    its amplitude, frequency, pulse rate, direction, etc., and wherein the
    control is effected prior to the beam's actual departure from the resonant
    cavity of the laser.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 4.3 for modulation of the laser beam after it
    departs the resonant cavity.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements,
    appropriate subclasses for optical devices such as modulators, beam
    scanners, etc., which may be used as light control devices.


CLS 372/10
TXT Q-switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein the beam control device alters the
    losses of a laser cavity for the purpose of generating giant pulses.


CLS 372/11
TXT Absorption type:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein the Q-switch is made of a passive
    material which exhibits an absorptivity that changes with increasing
    irradiance.


CLS 372/12
TXT Electro-optic:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein the beam control device includes a
    material which exhibits an electro-optic effect and has some means of
    applying an electric field across that material.


CLS 372/13
TXT Acousto-optic:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein the beam control device includes a
    material which exhibits an acousto-optic effect and provides some means for
    creating an acoustic wave within that material.


CLS 372/14
TXT Mechanical:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein the beam control device utilizes
    mechanical means to alter the Q of the cavity.


CLS 372/15
TXT Rotating mirror:

    Subject matter under subclass 14 wherein the mechanical means is a rotating
    mirror.


CLS 372/16
TXT Rotating prism:

    Subject matter under subclass 14 wherein the mechanical means is a rotating
    prism.


CLS 372/17
TXT Plural Q-switches:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein the Q-switched laser includes more
    than one Q-switch, either of the same type or of different types.


CLS 372/18
TXT Mode locking:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein means is provided for applying to
    the laser resonator a time-varying perturbation at or near the frequency
    which corresponds to the average axial mode spacing of the laser, so as to
    establish a phase relationship between the oscillatory laser modes,
    resulting in a laser output in the form of a periodic pulse train whose
    repetition rate is equal to the frequency of the perturbation.


CLS 372/19
TXT Mode discrimination:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein means is provided for either
    enhancing or suppressing particular modes of oscillation within the
    resonant cavity.


CLS 372/20
TXT Tuning:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein means is provided for selectively
    varying the output wavelength of the laser.


CLS 372/21
TXT Nonlinear device:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 including an optical device which has an
    output that does not rise or fall in direct proportion to the input.


CLS 372/22
TXT Frequency multiplying (e.g., harmonic generator):

    Subject matter under subclass 21 in which the nonlinear device provides an
    output beam whose frequency is a multiple of the frequency of the input
    beam.


CLS 372/23
TXT Producing plural wavelength output:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein the output is characterized as
    having a plurality of discrete wavelengths.


CLS 372/24
TXT Scanning:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 including means for providing a directional
    scan of the output beam as it exits the laser cavity.


CLS 372/25
TXT Control of pulse characteristics:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein means is provided for selection or
    variation of pulse characteristic, i.e., pulse shape, pulse repetition
    rate, etc.


CLS 372/26
TXT Modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein means is provided internal of the
    resonant cavity for modifying some characteristic of the laser output beam
    so that it varies in step with the instantaneous value of a modulating wave
    or signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 4.3, subclass 7.51 for laser modulators in
    which the means modifying the output beam is positioned external of the
    resonant cavity.


CLS 372/27
TXT Polarization:

    Subject matter under subclass 26 wherein the characteristic modified is the
    polarization of the output beam.


CLS 372/28
TXT Frequency:

    Subject matter under subclass 26 wherein the characteristic modified is the
    frequency of the output beam.


CLS 372/29
TXT Output stabilization:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 including means for stabilizing a parameter
    or characteristic of the output.


CLS 372/30
TXT Pulse:

    Subject matter under subclass 29 wherein the output of the laser is pulsed
    and some parameter characteristic of the pulse is stabilized such as pulse
    width, pulse repetition rate, etc.


CLS 372/31
TXT Amplitude:

    Subject matter under subclass 29 wherein the stabilized parameter is the
    amplitude.


CLS 372/32
TXT Frequency:

    Subject matter under subclass 29 wherein the stabilized parameter is the
    frequency.


CLS 372/33
TXT PARTICULAR OPERATING COMPENSATION MEANS:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means to overcome an
    effect which is deleterious to the operation of the laser.

    (1)     Note.  For example, means for compensating for parasitic
    oscillation, thermal lensing, etc.


CLS 372/34
TXT PARTICULAR TEMPERATURE CONTROL:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means for controlling
    the temperature of the laser or the temperature of its component parts.


CLS 372/35
TXT Liquid coolant:

    Subject matter under subclass 34 including a liquid coolant.


CLS 372/36
TXT Heat sink:

    Subject matter under subclass 34 including details of a heat sink.


CLS 372/37
TXT Having an applied magnetic field:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means for applying a
    magnetic field to some portion of the laser.


CLS 372/38
TXT WITH PARTICULAR COMPONENT CIRCUITRY:

    Subject matter under the class definition including particular circuitry
    for operating specific components of the generator.

    (1)     Note.  Included are, for example, pulse forming networks for
    driving the flash lamp, Q-switch or modulator, light detection and feedback
    for stabilizing frequency amplitude, etc.


CLS 372/39
TXT PARTICULAR ACTIVE MEDIA:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the media in which most
    of the atoms can be placed in an excited state (i.e., population inversion
    state), so that an electromagnetic wave of the proper frequency passing
    through the media can stimulate a cascade of photons, is specified.


CLS 372/40
TXT Amorphous (e.g., glass):

    Subject matter under subclass 39 where the solid active media does not have
    a definite crystalline structure.


CLS 372/41
TXT Insulating crystal:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 where the solid active media is an
    electrically nonconductive composition of matter having definite
    crystalline structure.


CLS 372/42
TXT Utilizing color centers:

    Subject matter under subclass 41 wherein color centers are formed within
    the crystal material which consist of displaced electrons that are trapped
    in regions of positive charge or of a "hole" or region of electron
    deficiency, which behaves like a "negative electron" or "positive hole",
    which can be trapped or localized in well-defined sites and which can
    impart color to the crystal material.


CLS 372/43
TXT Semiconductor:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 wherein the active media is a
    semiconductor.


CLS 372/44
TXT Injection:

    Subject matter under subclass 43 wherein the laser is a p.n junction
    semiconductor device which converts forward-bias electrical input directly
    into coherent optical output power via a process of stimulated emission in
    the region near the junction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 13, 79-103 and 918 for incoherent light emitting injection
    luminescent devices, and subclasses 80-85 for semiconductor light emitting
    sources combined with semiconductor light responsive devices.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, subclasses 22+ for
    methods of making radiation emissive devices of the semiconductor barrier
    layer type.


CLS 372/45
TXT Particular confinement layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein there is present a layer
    specifically designed to provide for carrier and/or radiation confinement.


CLS 372/46
TXT Particular current control structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein there is a means which is
    specifically designed to provide for control of the current flow in the
    area of the active region.


CLS 372/47
TXT Transverse junction:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 wherein the p.n junction is transverse to
    the active layer.


CLS 372/48
TXT Channeled substrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 wherein the substrate has a channel in the
    substrate region adjacent the active region.


CLS 372/49
TXT Particular coating on facet:

    Subject matter under subclass 44 having a specified coating on at least one
    facet.


CLS 372/50
TXT Monolithic integrated:

    Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein the laser is monolithically
    integrated with another laser or with other semiconductor devices which
    form an integral part of the laser.


CLS 372/51
TXT Liquid:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 wherein the physical state of the active
    media is a liquid.


CLS 372/52
TXT Chelate:

    Subject matter under subclass 51 where the liquid active media is in the
    form of a solution of a material having a trivalent rare earth bonded to
    several organic groups or liquids and dissolved in a suitable solvent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for rare-earth chelates dissolved in a solid plastic host material.


CLS 372/53
TXT Dye:

    Subject matter under subclass 51 where the liquid active media is a dye
    media dissolved in a suitable solvent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for an active media including a dye dissolved in a solid plastic
    host material.


CLS 372/54
TXT Particular structural features:

    Subject matter under subclass 51 including particular structure for
    containing or transporting the liquid active media through the laser.


CLS 372/55
TXT Gas:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 wherein the active media is in a gaseous
    form.


CLS 372/56
TXT Metal vapor:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein the gas is a vaporized metal.


CLS 372/57
TXT Excimer or exciplex:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein the active media is a dimer or
    hetero nuclear complex, which is bound in the excited state and free or
    essentially free in the lower state.


CLS 372/58
TXT With means for controlling gas flow:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 having means for moving gas through an
    activation area.


CLS 372/59
TXT Gas maintenance (e.g., purification, replenishment, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 55 including means for maintaining the
    operational level of the active medium.


CLS 372/60
TXT Including a specified gas additive:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein a gas different from the active
    medium is added to the active medium.


CLS 372/61
TXT Discharge tube feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 including a discharge tube having a
    specified feature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses for
    discharge devices, per se.


CLS 372/62
TXT Segmented:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein the means which confines the
    discharge is formed of individual segments.


CLS 372/63
TXT Backflow feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 having gas flow means which bypasses the
    discharge path.

    (1)     Note.  A use of this means is, for example, pressure and
    equalization.


CLS 372/64
TXT Waveguide:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein a waveguide resonator provides the
    necessary feedback to establish oscillation.


CLS 372/65
TXT Support:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 including particular support means for the
    discharge tube.


CLS 372/66
TXT Active media with particular shape:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 where the active media has a particular
    distinguishing shape.


CLS 372/67
TXT Disc-shaped active media:

    Subject matter under subclass 66 where the active media has a cross
    sectional dimension which is substantially greater than its thickness.


CLS 372/68
TXT Plural active media or active media having plural dopants:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 where the active media exists as two or
    more separate and distinct bodies or as a single body doped with ions of
    two or more different chemical elements.


CLS 372/69
TXT PARTICULAR PUMPING MEANS:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which a particular mechanism
    is set forth for exciting the active media.


CLS 372/70
TXT Pumping with optical or radiant energy:

    Subject matter under subclass 69 in which the pumping means excites the
    active media with optical or radiant energy.


CLS 372/71
TXT End-pump laser:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 in which the active media is excited by
    optical or radiant energy directed through an end surface of the active
    media.


CLS 372/72
TXT Pump cavity:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 in which the pumping means is included
    within a housing which interacts with the pumping means so as to enhance
    its operation as, for example, by cooling the pumping means, filtering out
    undesirable wavelengths, focusing the radiation, etc.


CLS 372/73
TXT High-energy particles:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 in which the pumping means is a nuclear
    reactor, radioactive material, or other source of high-energy particle
    radiation capable of exciting the active media.


CLS 372/74
TXT Electron beam:

    Subject matter under subclass 73 in which the high-energy particles take
    the form of an electron beam.


CLS 372/75
TXT Semiconductor:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 in which the pumping means is a light
    emitting semiconductor device.


CLS 372/76
TXT Plasma:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 in which the pumping means is an ionized
    gas of sufficient temperature to radiate electromagnetic energy.


CLS 372/77
TXT Exploding or combustible material:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 in which the pumping means is in the form
    of a material which burns or explodes giving up energy which excites the
    active media.


CLS 372/78
TXT Heat:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 in which the pumping means is a source of
    heat, and heat, per se, excites the active media.

    (1)     Note.  Where heat is not the primary form of the exciting energy
    but merely appears in the spectral range of the radiant energy generated by
    the pump source, search appropriate subclasses under subclass 70 for the
    particular energy source.


CLS 372/79
TXT Solar:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 in which the ultimate source of the pump
    energy is the sun.


CLS 372/80
TXT Excited phosphor:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 in which the pumping means comprises a
    phosphor excited or energized by any of the various forms of radiations and
    which, on excitation, will provide a characteristic emission matched to the
    desired input of the laser.


CLS 372/81
TXT Electrical:

    Subject matter under subclass 69 in which the pumping means creates an
    electrical discharge through the active media which directly excites the
    active media.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43+,    for electrical excitation of semiconductor lasers.


CLS 372/82
TXT Inductive or capacitive excitation:

    Subject matter under subclass 81 in which electrical energy is introduced
    into the electrical discharge path by means of an inductive or capacitive
    coupling mechanism.


CLS 372/83
TXT Transversely excited:

    Subject matter under subclass 81 in which the electrical energy creating
    the electrical discharge is introduced into the active media transverse to
    the optical axis of the laser.


CLS 372/84
TXT Traveling wave:

    Subject matter under subclass 83 in which the electric discharge is
    obtained through a progressive wave of current being propagated in a
    gaseous active medium from one end of the discharge channel to the other.


CLS 372/85
TXT Glow discharge:

    Subject matter under subclass 81 in which a uniform glow-type discharge
    through the entire volume of a gaseous active media is created rather than
    a channel or spark discharge.


CLS 372/86
TXT Having an auxiliary ionization means:

    Subject matter under subclass 81 in which the apparatus includes more than
    one means for ionizing at least a portion of the active media prior to or
    at the same time as the electrical discharge which directly excites the
    active media.


CLS 372/87
TXT Having particular electrode structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 81 in which at least one electrode has
    particular structure.


CLS 372/88
TXT Hollow electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein at least one of the electrodes is
    hollow.


CLS 372/89
TXT Chemical:

    Subject matter under subclass 69 wherein the excitation of the active media
    results from the direct production of the excited states by a chemical
    reaction.


CLS 372/90
TXT Gas dynamic:

    Subject matter under subclass 69 wherein the necessary conditions for
    lasing are created solely by a thermal expansion of the laser gas media to
    supersonic flow speeds.


CLS 372/91
TXT With depopulation of lower states:

    Subject matter under subclass 69 wherein the specified pumping means
    includes means for selectively depumping a lower level to achieve the
    required population inversion.


CLS 372/92
TXT PARTICULAR RESONANT CAVITY:

    Subject matter under the class definition including particulars of a
    mode-selecting low-loss optical structure in which the laser action takes
    place by the build-up of electromagnetic field intensity upon multiple
    reflection.


CLS 372/93
TXT Folded cavity:

    Subject matter under subclass 92 wherein the cavity is folded or includes
    reflective surfaces or other optical structures for bending the optical
    axis of the resonant cavity.


CLS 372/94
TXT Having a ring configuration:

    Subject matter under subclass 93 wherein the cavity is in the configuration
    of a ring or closed loop.


CLS 372/95
TXT Unstable resonator:

    Subject matter under subclass 92 in which the resonant cavity is designed
    so that radiation, upon repeated reflection between the primary and
    feedback reflection surfaces, will progressively move transversely of the
    optical axis until it clears an edge of the feedback reflector and escapes
    from the cavity as output radiation.


CLS 372/96
TXT Distributed feedback:

    Subject matter under subclass 92 in which the feedback structure comprising
    the resonant cavity is distributed through and integrated with the active
    medium of the laser and is created by substantially time constant,
    spatially periodic perturbations in the transmission characteristics of the
    medium along the length thereof, which may take the form of variations in
    the gain, index of refraction, propagation constant, or other parameter of
    the medium.


CLS 372/97
TXT Plural cavities:

    Subject matter under subclass 92 including at least two resonant cavities.


CLS 372/98
TXT Specified cavity component:

    Subject matter under subclass 92 wherein a particular cavity component or
    particular component within the cavity is specified.


CLS 372/99
TXT Reflector:

    Subject matter under subclass 98 wherein the specified component has a
    surface which is reflective or partially reflective.


CLS 372/100
TXT Prism:

    Subject matter under subclass 98 wherein the specified component is a
    geometric solid figure whose end faces are congruent polygons, and whose
    sides are parallelograms.


CLS 372/101
TXT Lens or lens system:

    Subject matter under subclass 98 wherein the specified component is a lens
    or a system of lenses.


CLS 372/102
TXT Grating:

    Subject matter under subclass 98 wherein the specified component has a
    periodic structure capable of dispersing light in accordance with its
    wavelength.

    (1)     Note.  For example the periodic structure may consist of alternate
    opaque and transparent sections, alternate reflecting and nonreflecting
    sections, or alternate high index of refraction and low index of refraction
    sections.


CLS 372/103
TXT Window, aperture and mask:

    Subject matter under subclass 98 wherein the specified component is an
    opening for admission of light, or a transparent cover.


CLS 372/104
TXT Aerodynamic window:

    Subject matter under subclass 103 wherein the window is formed by a window
    gas driven at a high, jet stream velocity across the laser beam such that
    the jet streams serve the same function as a solid window.


CLS 372/105
TXT Birefringent material:

    Subject matter under subclass 98 wherein the specified component includes a
    material exhibiting birefringent properties.


CLS 372/106
TXT Polarizer:

    Subject matter under subclass 98 wherein the specified component is a
    device which produces polarized rays.


CLS 372/107
TXT Mirror support or alignment structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 92 including significant details of structure
    for support or alignment of a mirror.


CLS 372/108
TXT Specified output coupling device:

    Subject matter under subclass 92 including significant details of an output
    coupling device.


CLS 372/109
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition not provided for in any of the
    preceding subclasses of this class.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 372/700
TXT Optical delay:

    Subject matter including disclosure of means for optically subjecting
    coherent light to a time delay.


CLS 372/701
TXT Nozzle:

    Subject matter including disclosure of a nozzle which may be used to
    influence the flow of an active media in a coherent light generator.


CLS 372/702
TXT Isotope:

    Subject matter which includes disclosure of the interaction of coherent
    light and isotopes.


CLS 372/703
TXT Optical isolater:

    Subject matter wherein there is disclosure of an optical means for
    isolating coherent light.


CLS 372/704
TXT Summary reference:

    Subject matter wherein there is a summary statement of coherent light
    generation means or prior art devices.


CLS 372/705
TXT Neat thing:

    Subject matter which includes disclosure of an unusual feature or
    utilization of a coherent light generator.


CLS 373/
TTL INDUSTRIAL ELECTRIC HEATING  FURNACES

CLS 373/
TXT

    I.      DEFINITIONS OF TERMS USED IN THIS CLASS

    ARC

    A prolonged electrical discharge, or series of prolonged discharges between
    two electrodes, or between an electrode and a current carrying material.

    CHANNEL

    A hollow loop, or ring which will contain material to be heated, and which
    permits the insertion of a core of iron to improve the coupling between a
    primary coil and a secondary in the loop, or ring.

    CHARGE

    The material heated by the furnace.

    CHARGING

    The function of supplying a charge to a furnace.

    CRUCIBLE

    A component of the furnace which holds, or otherwise contains the charge.

    DISCHARGING

    The function of removing a charge from a furnace.

    ELECTRODE

    An electrical conducting element that emits, or collects electrons, or
    ions, or controls their movement by means of an electric field on it.

    ELECTRON BEAM

    A narrow stream of electrons moving in the same direction under the
    influence of an electric, or magnetic field.

    ELECTROSLAG DEVICE

    Apparatus enabling one, or more electrodes to be immersed in a slag layer
    which floats on top of the melt.

    FILAMENT

    A slender thread of material.

    FURNACE

    A chamber, enclosure, or other holding means for heating materials therein.

    GLOW DISCHARGE

    The phenomenon of electrical conduction in gasses shown by a slight
    luminosity, without great hissing, or noise, and without appreciable
    heating, or volatilization of the electrode, when the electrostatic
    pressure exceeds a certain value.

    HEARTH

    The part of the furnace upon which the charge is placed and melted down, or
    refined.

    INDUCTION HEATING

    The method of producing heat in a charge by placing it in a electromagnetic
    relationship with an inducing winding, the charge forming the secondary.

    INGOT

    The casting obtained when molten metal is poured into a mold with the
    expectation that it be further processed.

    PLASMA

    A wholly, or partially ionized gas in which the positive ions and the
    negative electrons are roughly equal in number.

    ROOF

    A cover, or lid for the furnace.

    SLAG

    A more, or less completely fused and vitrified material separated during
    the reduction of a metal from its ore which generally floats on top of the
    molten metal during the heat reduction processes found in this class.

    ZONE MELTING

    A process where a selected area of a charge is heated in liquification.

    II.     GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    A.      APPARATUS OF THIS CLASS IS CHARACTERIZED BY THE FOLLOWING:

    1.      Specialized to the use of electricity as the heat source;

    2.      heating withing a chamber, enclosure, or other holding means;

    3.      melting of a charge (e.g., materials such as crushed ore or scrap),
    or preserving a melted charge in a molten state; and

    4.      manipulated, or operated in an industrial environment.

    B.      Processes of Operating the Apparatus of II. A., per se, which do
    not recite a specific metallurgical treatment step.

    C.      Residual Industrial Electric Furnace Processes not elsewhere
    classifiable.

    D.      Industrial Electric Furnaces not elsewhere classifiable.

    E.      Apparatus which is used to simulate electric furnace operations and
    which is not elsewhere classifiable.

    III.    SUBCOMBINATIONS OF INDUSTRIAL ELECTRIC FURNACES PROVIDED FOR IN
    THIS CLASS

    A.      Any subcombination within the purview of II above and disclosed as
    having primary utility as part of an industrial electric furnace apparatus.

    B.      Other subcombinations (e.g., charge stirring apparatus) either
    claimed in conjunction with nominally disclosed industrial furnace
    apparatus, or disclosed as having primary utility in an industrial furnace
    apparatus except as excluded by section IV C.

    IV.     COMBINATIONS OF OTHER APPARATUS WHICH INCLUDES APPARATUS OF THIS
    CLASS

    A.      Control Systems, or disparate device regulators not elsewhere
    classifiable are classified in this class.

    B.      Noninteractive combinations where the industrial electric furnace
    apparatus is more than nominally claimed, or where the combination is not
    elsewhere classifiable are classified in this class.

    C.      EXCLUSIONS:

    1.      An Industrial Electric Furnace which is a subcombination of a
    claimed encompassing system;

    2.      Residential, or home heating furnace systems, or devices;

    3.      Electrical Heating Apparatus with Furnacelike Enclosure, or holding
    means where:  (a) there is no disclosure of utility relating to charge
    melting, or preserving in a molten state, or (b) any utility requiring
    melting is incorporated in a specific metallurgical treatment step (e.g.,
    welding) which is elsewhere classifiable;

    4.      Furnace apparatus powered by electricity whose primary principle of
    operation is unrelated to heating (e.g., electrolytic furnaces).

    5.      Furnace apparatus of the charging and discharging type, wherein the
    furnace is only nominally recited. For example, a furnace apparatus of the
    aforementioned type only nominally reciting an electric furnace having a
    heating element will be found with the particular charging and discharging
    type.

    V.      FOR SUBJECT MATTER RELATED TO THIS CLASS, SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, appropriate subclasses for nonelectric glass
    furnaces and furnace devices.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, appropriate subclasses for processes of consolidating
    metalliferous material or extracting, refining, or melting metals and
    subclasses 10.1+ for electric reduction processes not directed merely to
    processes of operation or manipulation of the furnace.

    110,    Furnaces, appropriate subclass, for furnaces of general utility,
    especially subclasses 235+, for incinerators for the disposal of waster
    material, which incinerators may have structure to render a molten
    material, including metals, disposable.

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for non-coating apparatus for growing
    therein-defined single-crystal of all types of materials, including those
    having means for zone melting.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 58+ for coating apparatus combined
    with heating means for drying the coating, or for effecting a metallurgical
    treatment, e.g., annealing, of a coated article, or of an article which is
    about to be coated, and subclasses 726+ for details of crucible structures
    which contain coating material during vaporization.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, appropriate subclasses for structural features
    peculiar to stoves and furnaces, see particularly subclass 343.5 for
    melting furnaces, or domestic utility.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, appropriate subclasses for electrically
    heated furnaces for vaporizing liquid for the specific purpose of
    concentrating attendant solids.

    164,    Metal Founding, appropriate subclasses for metal casting apparatus
    which may employ electric heating means.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 16 for an electrical
    heating process, or device for forming a hole in the earth by directly
    applying heat to fluidize, or comminute the material forming the earth.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 121 for vaporizing devices with
    electric heating means.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclasses for
    electrical furnaces and electrical processes for electrolysis, or for using
    electrical energy to cause chemical change as distinguished for its use for
    mere heating.

    219,    Electric Heating, which is the generic class for heating
    electrically, as welding, metal heating, domestic heating, heating
    articles, or fluids.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 591+, especially subclasses 592+ for ladles,
    or tundishes used to dispense molten metals.  Such dispensing vessels may
    include means to treat the molten metal where such a treatment is solely
    ancillary to and supportive of the dispensing operation, e.g., spout
    heaters to prevent clogging of the vessel outlet.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 15 for
    automatic temperature, or humidity control in combustion furnaces.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclass 48 for furnace heating system ventilation.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate subclass,
    especially subclasses 65+, for comminuting, or disintegrating means, per
    se, or combined with heating means which do not effect a change in the
    chemical nature of the material being treated.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 251 for molecular, or atomic beam devices
    for producing and propagating an unidirectional stream of neutral
    molecules, or atoms through a vacuum, usually at thermal velocity,
    subclasses 324+ for methods and apparatus to irradiate materials by corona
    radiation, subclass 423 for methods and apparatus to generate ions,
    subclasses 428+ for methods and apparatus to support, contain, or transfer
    fluent material with, or without an irradiating source, subclasses 453.1+
    for methods and apparatus including supports for objects to be irradiated
    with, or without an irradiating source, subclasses 458.1+ for methods and
    apparatus to irradiate luminophors, subclass 492.1+ for methods and
    apparatus to irradiate objects, or materials generally, and subclasses
    472.1+ for invisible radiation generation and sources, particularly
    subclasses 493.1+ for neutron generators.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 30, for methods of forming, or repairing furnace linings by
    shaping, e.g., molding, fluent refractory material.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, for electric, or nonelectric features of
    metallurgical furnaces not limited to characteristics of an electric
    furnace (except electric heating or pouring spout, or material at discharge
    area when only disclosed in an electric furnace).

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 327 for self-baking
    electrode structures, per se.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for systems for supplying electric current to arc furnaces
    provided that the arc furnace is only nominally disclosed.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, for electrical
    power supply, or regulating systems with nominally disclosed electric
    furnace devices.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 365+ for miscellaneous gating circuits, subclasses 509+
    for miscellaneous externally effected circuits, subclasses 518+ for
    miscellaneous control circuits, and subclasses 538+ for miscellaneous bias
    circuits with regulating.

    336,    Inductor Devices, for inductive devices, per se.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclasses 107, 121+ and 144 for means utilizing an electrically controlled
    plasma to produce a thermonuclear reaction.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 147+ for furnace charging
    apparatus, or for furnace chargers combined with that specific furnace
    structure which is solely for facilitating the movement of the material
    into the furnace.

    432,    Heating, appropriate subclass, for heating apparatus of general
    utility.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, appropriate subclasses for furnace lining
    compositions.


CLS 373/1
TXT PLURAL DIVERSE HEATING MEANS:

    Subject matter under the class definition including plural, different in
    kind, or type heating elements.

    (1)     Note.  Usually either the plural heating elements operate on the
    same charge, or one of the heating elements operates as a substitute for
    the other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    432,    Heating, subclass 94 for heating apparatus having (a) two
    distinctly different types of heat generators, (b) a heat generator and a
    source of heat that is not a generator, or (c) a combustion type heat
    generating means using two different fuels.


CLS 373/2
TXT Arc:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein one of the heating elements is an
    electric arc between two electrodes, or between an electrode and a current
    carrying material (e.g., the charge material).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for arc furnaces with environmental control devices.

    60,     for arc furnace devices, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 514 for electric arc heating apparatus
    used for metal casting.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 121.11+ for arc metal heating, per se.


CLS 373/3
TXT With resistance:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 including means to develop heat by the
    passage of current through a material, or device having the property of
    electrical resistance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5+,     for resistance furnaces combined with heating elements other than
    an electrical arc.

    109+,   for resistance furnace details, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 200+ for electric resistance heating,
    per se.


CLS 373/4
TXT With induction:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 including means to produce heat in a charge
    by placing it in an electromagnetic relationship with an inducing winding,
    the charge forming the secondary.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for induction heating elements combined with resistance furnaces.

    7,      for induction furnaces combined with heating elements other than an
    electrical arc, or resistance element.

    138+,   for induction furnace details, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 513 for inductive heating apparatus used
    for metal casting.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 600+ for inductive heating, subclasses
    678+ for microwave heating, and subclasses 764+ for capacitive dielectric
    heating.


CLS 373/5
TXT Resistance:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein one of the heating elements is a
    means to develop heat by the passage of current through a material, or
    device having the property of electrical resistance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for resistance heating elements combined with arc furnaces.

    109+,   for resistance furnace details, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 200+ for electric resistance heating,
    per se.


CLS 373/6
TXT With induction:

    Subject matter under subclass 5 including means to produce heat in a charge
    by placing it in an electromagnetic relationship with an inducing winding,
    the charge forming the secondary.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for inductance heating elements combined with are furnaces.

    7,      for induction furnaces combined with heating elements other than an
    electrical arc, or resistance element.

    138+,   for induction furnace details, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 513 for inductive heating apparatus used
    for metal casting.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 600+ for inductive heating, subclasses
    678+ for microwave heating, and subclasses 764+ for capacitive dielectric
    heating.


CLS 373/7
TXT Induction:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including means to produce heat in a charge
    by placing it in an electromagnetic relationship with an inducing winding,
    the charge forming the secondary.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for inductance heating elements combined with arc furnaces.

    6,      for inductance heating elements combined with resistance furnaces.

    138+,   for induction furnace details, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 513 for inductive heating apparatus used
    for metal casting.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 600+ for inductive heating, subclasses
    678+ for microwave heating, and subclasses 764+ for capacitive dielectric
    heating.


CLS 373/8
TXT ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means to withdraw
    furnace gases, or to trap dust and fumes escaping from the furnace while in
    operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 144+ for means treating, or
    handling gases exhausted by treating means.


CLS 373/9
TXT Arc furnace:

    Subject mater under subclass 8 wherein, the furnace heating element is an
    electric arc between two electrodes, or between an electrode and a current
    carrying material (e.g., the charge material).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for arc furnaces combined with other heating means.

    60+,    for arc furnace devices, per se.


CLS 373/10
TXT ELECTRON BEAM FURNACE DEVICE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein heat is generated to melt
    charge material by the effects of the impingement, of a directed beam, of
    accelerated electrons on the charge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 10.19+ for the production of metal or the treatment of
    molten metal using a wholly or partially charged mixture of gaseous ions
    and electrons (i.e. plasma) as the source of thermal energy.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 121.13+ for welding, machining and
    general heating applications utilizing electron beams, search here also for
    electron guns, or emitters, per se.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 251 for molecular, or atomic beam devices
    for producing and propagating a unidirectional stream of neutral molecules,
    or atoms through a vacuum, usually at thermal velocity, subclasses 324+ for
    methods and apparatus to irradiate materials by corona radiation, subclass
    423 for methods and apparatus to generate ions, subclasses 428+ for methods
    and apparatus to support, contain, or transfer fluent material with, or
    without an irradiating source, subclass 453.11 for methods and apparatus
    including supports for objects to be irradiated with, or without an
    irradiating source, subclass 458.1 for the methods and apparatus to
    irradiate luminophors, subclasses 492.1+ for methods and apparatus to
    irradiate objects, or materials generally, and subclass 493.1 for invisible
    radiation generation and sources, particularly subclasses 493.1+ for
    neutron generators.


CLS 373/11
TXT Vaporizing furnace:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein the charge is heated by the
    electron beam to a gaseous state.

    (1)     Note.  Generally crucibles are fully charged, then moved into an
    area to be struck by the electron beam and then out from under the beam
    when the charge is substantially vaporized.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33+,    for glass furnace charging devices.

    46+     and 42, for electroslag remelting furnace start up charging and
    alloying devices respectively.

    63,     for indirect arc furnaces where the charge is fed into the space
    between the electrodes.

    67+,    for arc furnace ingot remelting where furnace electrodes constitute
    the charge material.

    72+,    for arc furnace crucible details.

    79+,    for arc furnace charging, per se.

    115,    for resistance furnace charging, per se.

    142+,   for induction furnace charging, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 267+ and 327+ for furnace solid fuel feeders
    and subclasses 101+ for furnace fuel feeders, per se.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 726+ for details of crucible
    structures which contain coating material during vaporization.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 420+ for electric heating devices
    combined with nominally disclosed crucible, or furnace-type containers.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 200+ for means to melt, or
    vaporize metal, or to treat liquified metal.

    392,    Electric Resistance Heating Devices, appropriate subclasses for
    electric heating apparatus.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 244 for serially disposed vaporizing
    heating means with solid material deposition means maintained at a
    temperature lower than said heating means.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 208 for a fuel burner having an electrically
    heated fuel vaporizer.


CLS 373/12
TXT Power supply and control circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 11 including means to regulate and power the
    operation of the vaporizing furnace.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for plasma furnaces control systems.

    40,     for glass furnace electrical system regulation.

    49+,    for electroslag remelting furnaces with power supply control.

    70      and 104+, for arc furnace power regulation.

    135,    for resistance furnace control, per se.

    148,    for induction furnace power supply    regulation.


CLS 373/13
TXT Gun assembly:

    Subject matter under subclass 11 including the component structure of the
    means which emits the electron beam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for plasma furnace plasma gun details.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 121.27 for electron gun assembly in
    electron beam heating devices.


CLS 373/14
TXT With deflection control:

    Subject matter under subclass 13 including means to regulate the path of
    the electron beam.


CLS 373/15
TXT Ingot remelting:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein a previously melted and
    subsequently solidified ingot charge is remelted by the furnace.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21+,    for plasma furnace ingot remelting.

    67+,    for arc furnace ingot remelting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 200+ for means to melt, or
    vaporize metal, per se.

    432,    Heating, appropriate subclass for melting furnaces of general
    utility.


CLS 373/16
TXT With plural beam devices:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein the furnace has more than one
    electron beam gun.


CLS 373/17
TXT Zone melting:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein a small area, or zone of the
    charge is liquified by the electron beam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139,    for zone melting utilizing induction heating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclass 10.11 for processes of zone melting of metal.

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, subclasses 37+ for processes for growing
    therein-defined single-crystal of all types of materials, including by zone
    melting, and subclasses 219+ for non-coating apparatus for growing
    therein-defined single-crystal of all types of materials, including by zone
    melting means.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 250.1 for non-coating crystallizing
    apparatus which includes means for zone melting, not including means for
    chemical reaction, and not provided for elsewhere.


CLS 373/18
TXT PLASMA FURNACE DEVICE:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a plasma generating
    means as the heat source to melt, or otherwise treat the material within
    the furnace device.

    (1)     Note.  A plasma flame is generated when an ionizable gas is forced
    through an electrical field.

    (2)     Note.  Plasmatrons are also referred to as "arc torches," "plasma
    guns", etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13+,    for electron beam vaporizing furnace gun assembly details.

    24,     for direct plasma furnaces with side wall mounted plasmatrons.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 231.31+ for fluent
    material supplied plasma devices.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 111.21+
    for plasma generating systems.


CLS 373/19
TXT Indirect heating:

    Subject matter under subclass 18 wherein the material being heated is
    heated principally by heat radiation from the plasma flame, without direct
    contact with the flame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61+,    for arc furnace indirect heating details.


CLS 373/20
TXT Rotary furnace:

    Subject matter under subclass 19 wherein the furnace is rotated, generally
    about its longitudinal axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    432,    Heating, subclasses 103+ for tumbler- type rotary drum furnaces,
    per se.


CLS 373/21
TXT Remelting furnace (i.e., ingot remelting):

    Subject matter under subclass 18 wherein the plasma furnace remelts ingots
    produced from a previous melting/costing process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for electron beam furnace ingot remelting apparatus.

    42+,    for electroslag remelting devices.

    67+,    for arc furnace ingot remelting    apparatus.


CLS 373/22
TXT Direct furnace (i.e., plasma flame impinges on the melt):

    Subject matter under subclass 18 wherein the plasma flame is in contact
    with the material being melted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 164+ for
    chemical processes employing a plasma.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclasses 100+ for means utilizing plasma to produce a thermonuclear
    reaction.


CLS 373/23
TXT Expanded arc column:

    Subject matter under subclass 22 wherein the plasma flame expands, usually
    in a conical shape, as it extends away from the plasmatron.


CLS 373/24
TXT Sidewall mounted plasmatron:

    Subject matter under subclass 22 wherein the plasmatron means extends
    through and is supported by the furnace sidewall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for plasma furnace plasmatrons, per se.


CLS 373/25
TXT Control system:

    Subject matter under subclass 22 including means to regulate the operation
    of the furnace.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for control systems in plasma remelting furnaces.

    40,     for electrical system regulation of glass furnaces.

    49+,    for power supply control in electroslag remelting furnaces.

    70,     77 and 104+, for control, or regulation of arc furnace devices.

    110+    and 135, for control, or regulation of resistance furnace devices.

    140+,   148, and 149+, for control, or regulation of induction furnace
    devices.


CLS 373/26
TXT GLOW DISCHARGE FURNACE DEVICE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the heat is produced from
    a glow discharge generated within the furnace.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 615, 618 and 619
    for glow- type discharge devices, per se.


CLS 373/27
TXT GLASS FURNACE DEVICE:

    Subject matter under the class definition specifically adapted for melting,
    or treating glass or silica.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109+,   for resistance furnaces, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 335 for nonelectric glass furnaces
    with furnace charging means; subclass 347 for nonelectric furnaces having a
    structurally defined delivery or fining zone, and see the search notes
    thereunder.


CLS 373/28
TXT Filament discharge (i.e., bushing):

    Subject matter under subclass 27 wherein the glass is melting in a bushing
    from which the molten glass is discharged as filaments, the bushing being
    heated by passing a current therethrough.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 384+ for glass fiber and filament
    making apparatus, especially subclasses 493+ for means for forming bushings
    with designated compositions; subclasses 496+ for means for forming
    specified bushing tip or glass feeder structure.


CLS 373/29
TXT Joule effect heating:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 wherein the glass is melted, or maintained
    in a molten condition by passing an electric current therethrough between
    at least two electrodes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclass 104 for treating a continuum of
    work by joule effect heating means.


CLS 373/30
TXT Furnace body detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 29 pertaining to the furnace body or tank for
    holding the molten glass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for details of electroslag remelting furnace bodies.

    71+,    for arc furnace body details.

    156     and 163, for induction furnace crucible details.


CLS 373/31
TXT Multichamber:

    Furnaces under subclass 30 which are composed of at least two discrete
    interconnected sections.

    (1)     Note.  For example, melting and refining section, or melting and
    delivery zones.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     for plural arc furnace units operating sequentially on the same
    charge.

    80,     for arc furnace charge preheating.

    144,    for induction furnaces with plural heating elements operating
    sequentially on a charge.


CLS 373/32
TXT With heating between chambers:

    Subject matter under subclass 31 including heating means mounted in the
    passageway between the plural furnace sections, or including furnaces where
    the heating current flows between electrodes mounted one in each furnace
    section.


CLS 373/33
TXT Charging or discharging:

    Subject matter under subclass 29 including means to supply, or remove
    material to be heated, to or from the furnace.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for electron beam furnace charging means.

    42+     and 46+, for electroslag remelting furnace start up charging and
    alloying devices respectively.

    63,     for indirect arc furnaces where the charge is fed into the space
    between the electrodes.

    67+,    for arc furnace ingot remelting where furnace electrodes constitute
    the charge material.

    79+,    for arc furnace charging/discharging, per se.

    115,    for resistance furnace charging/discharging, per se.

    142+,   for induction furnace charging/discharging, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 267+ and 327+ for furnace solid fuel feeders
    and subclasses 101+ for furnace fuel feeders, per se.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 591+ for molten metal dispensing.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 176+ for means to supply a
    charge to a heating means.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 147+ for charging a
    chamber utilized for a heating function.


CLS 373/34
TXT Including batch preheating:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 wherein the batch is heated prior to being
    charged into the furnace, also preheating may be achieved by utilizing the
    waste heat from the furnace, or by means of a separate heat source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     for arc furnace charge preheating.


CLS 373/35
TXT Including discharge area heating:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 wherein means are provided at, or near the
    discharge opening of the furnace to heat the material as it is discharged.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for resistance-heated discharge bushings, the discharge usually
    being in the form of filaments for making glass fibers.


CLS 373/36
TXT Electrode assembly:

    Subject matter under subclass 29 pertaining to the electrode, its holder
    and associate structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54+,    for electroslag remelting furnace electrode structure or
    composition.

    88+,    for arc furnace electrode structure.


CLS 373/37
TXT Protection means:

    Subject matter under subclass 36 including means to protect the electrode
    from excessive deterioration while in use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for electroslag remelting furnace electrodes with protective
    shields.

    64,     for arc furnace electrodes with protective shields.


CLS 373/38
TXT Holder:

    Subject matter under subclass 36 including apparatus to support the
    electrode while in use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52+,    for electroslag remelting furnace electrode support details.

    94+,    for arc furnace electrode support details.


CLS 373/39
TXT Electrical system:

    Subject matter under subclass 29 including means to supply electrical power
    to the furnace.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47+,    for electroslag remelting power supply system details.

    102+,   for arc furnace power supply system details.

    147+,   for induction furnace power supply system details.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 365+ for miscellaneous gating circuits, subclasses 509+
    for miscellaneous externally effected circuits, subclasses 518+ for
    miscellaneous control circuits, and subclasses 538+ for miscellaneous bias
    circuits with regulating.


CLS 373/40
TXT Regulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 including means to regulate the electrical
    power supplied to the furnace.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for control systems indirect plasma furnaces.

    26,     for plasma remelting furnace control systems.

    49+,    for power supply control in electroslag remelting furnaces.

    70,     77 and 104+, for control, or regulation of arc furnace devices.

    110+    and 135, for control, or regulation of resistance furnace devices.

    140+,   148 and 149+, for control, or regulation of induction furnace
    devices.


CLS 373/41
TXT Electrode arrangement (e.g., array):

    Subject matter under subclass 39 wherein the electrodes are arranged in the
    furnace to achieve specific electrical characteristics within the melt
    (e.g., for specific heating patterns in the melt, or to eliminate overlap
    between heating currents).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for electroslag remelting furnace plural electrode arrangements.


CLS 373/42
TXT ELECTROSLAG REMELTING DEVICE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein during electrode
    remelting the electrode is immersed in a slag layer which floats on top of
    the melt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for electron beam furnace ingot remelting.

    21+,    for plasma remelting furnaces.

    67+,    for arc furnace ingot remelting where the ingot is a consumable
    electrode which is melted by the arc during furnace operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 10.24+ for processes in which an electrode is in
    electrical contact with a slag and the electrical current therebetween
    melts the electrode causing the molten metal therefrom to be refined by
    passing through the slag.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 73.1 for electroslag welding apparatus.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 216+ for means for adding a
    solid, liquid or gaseous substance to molten metal.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, Consumable Electrodes,
    appropriate subclasses for consumable electrode devices, per se.


CLS 373/43
TXT Plural furnace units:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 wherein more than one furnace unit, or
    crucible is provided at one location for cooperative simultaneous, or
    sequential operation.

    (1)     Note.  Plural crucibles may be provided to be placed under one
    electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for plural electron beam furnace crucible construction.

    31+,    for glass furnaces with multichamber heating.

    78,     for plural arc furnace units.


CLS 373/44
TXT Body detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 including details of the furnace structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30+,    for details of glass furnace bodies.

    71,     for arc furnace body details.


CLS 373/45
TXT Crucible:

    Subject matter under subclass 44 including the part which holds the melt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for electron beam furnace crucible construction.

    30+,    for glass furnace crucible details.

    72+,    for arc furnace crucible details.

    118,    for crucible details in resistance furnaces where the crucible is a
    resistance heating element.

    156+    and 163, for induction furnace crucible details for coreless and
    core-type induction furnaces respectively.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 726+ for details of crucible
    structures which contain coating material during vaporization.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 335+ for metal molding apparatus
    receptacles for holding, or dispensing molten material.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 420+ for electric heating devices
    combined with nominally disclosed crucible, or furnace-type containers.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 167 and 275+ for details, or
    crucibles used in the metallurgical treatment of molten material.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 156+ and 262+ for details of crucibles where
    the heating means is nonelectric.


CLS 373/46
TXT Start-up:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 having means for adding material to the
    furnace to initiate operation.

    (1)     Note.  Generally molten, or granular slag is added to fill the
    space between the electrode end and the crucible bottom to complete the
    electrical circuit and thus commence furnace operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for crucibles having means built into the bottom thereof to
    complete the circuit for furnace start up.


CLS 373/47
TXT Power supply system:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 including means to supply electrical power
    to the furnace.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for electron beam vaporizing furnaces with power supply and control
    circuitry.

    102,    for arc furnace power supply systems.

    147,    for induction furnace power supply    systems.


CLS 373/48
TXT Conductor arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 47 relating to the arrangement (e.g.,
    spacing) of the power conductors of the furnace.


CLS 373/49
TXT Control:

    Subject matter under subclass 47 wherein means are provided to control or
    regulate electrical power to the furnace.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for electron beam vaporizing furnaces with power supply and control
    circuitry.

    25,     for plasma furnaces control systems.

    40,     for glass furnace electrical system regulation.

    70      and 104+, for arc furnace power regulation.

    135,    for resistance furnace control, per se.

    148,    for induction furnace power supply regulation.


CLS 373/50
TXT By changing electrode position:

    Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein the power is regulated by changing
    the depth of immersion of the electrode into the slag.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for replacement of electrodes during furnace operation in an
    electroslag remelting furnace.

    105+,   for regulating the power supply by changing the positions of the
    electrodes relative to the charge, or each other in an arc furnace.


CLS 373/51
TXT Electrode replacement:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 including apparatus to refit and
    reposition electrode during furnace operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     for electroslag remelting furnace power supply system control by
    changing electrode position.


CLS 373/52
TXT Electrode support:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 including apparatus to support and hold
    the electrode during remelting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for glass furnace electrode holders.

    94+,    for arc furnace electrode support    apparatus.


CLS 373/53
TXT Plural electrodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 for supporting more than one electrode
    simultaneously.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for electroslag remelting furnace power supply systems for plural
    electrode arrangements.


CLS 373/54
TXT Electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 including the shape, or composition of
    electrodes utilized in the electroslag remelting furnace.


CLS 373/55
TXT With protective shield:

    Subject matter under subclass 54 wherein the electrode is provided with
    sheltering, or screening means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for glass furnace electrode assembly means to protect the electrode
    from excessive deterioration while in use.

    64,     for arc furnace electrodes with protective shields.

    127,    for resistance furnace resistance encasement means.


CLS 373/56
TXT WITH CONDENSATING DEVICE:

    Subject matter under the class definition specifically adapted for reducing
    gaseous volatile material.

    (1)     Note.  Condensation is used frequently for treatment of zinc ores
    and cinnabars.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9+,     for arc furnaces with environmental control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 148+ for means treating, or
    handling gases exhausted by the treating means by condensing and collecting
    a volatile constituent.

    432,    Heating, subclass 66, for a heating means, or general utility with
    a condenser for work chamber vapor.


CLS 373/57
TXT Including resistance furnace detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 56 including a furnace having a means to
    develop heat by the passage of current through a material, or device having
    the property of electrical resistance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3       and 5+, for resistance furnaces combined with other type furnaces.

    109+,   for resistance furnaces, per se.


CLS 373/58
TXT With open circuit (e.g., charge internal resistance heating):

    Subject matter under subclass 57 wherein the charge completes the circuit
    and the internal resistance of the charge is the heating element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120+,   for resistance furnaces with open circuit configurations, per se.


CLS 373/59
TXT Including induction furnace detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 56 including an induction coil to subject the
    charge to a variable electromagnetic field for producing a heating current
    by internal resistance losses in the charge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 600+ for inductive heating, subclasses
    678+ for microwave heating, and subclasses 764+ for capacitive dielectric
    heating.


CLS 373/60
TXT ARC FURNACE DEVICE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the charge is heated by
    means of an electric arc produced between opposed electrodes (indirect arc
    furnaces) or between an electrode and the charge (direct arc furnaces).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for arc furnaces with other heating means.

    9+,     for arc furnaces with environmental control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 171 for arc
    furnaces used for the preparation of acetylene by pyrolysis of
    hydrocarbons, especially with the removal of carbon deposits from the arc
    region.


CLS 373/61
TXT Indirect:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 wherein the arc is between spaced
    electrodes, or between an electrode and the crucible exterior and the
    material is heated by radiation from the arc.


CLS 373/62
TXT Arc between spaced electrodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 the arc is between spaced electrodes and
    the material is heated by radiation from the arc.


CLS 373/63
TXT Charge fed into space:

    Subject matter under subclass 62 wherein the charge passes through the arc
    as it is added to the furnace.


CLS 373/64
TXT Wish arc deflection means:

    Subject matter under subclass 62 including means (usually a magnet) to
    deflect the arc from its normal path.


CLS 373/65
TXT Arc between electrode and crucible exterior:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein the arc is drawn between the
    electrode tip and the exterior of the crucible.


CLS 373/66
TXT Combined with or convertible to direct arc furnace:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 including both direct and indirect arc
    heating, or which may be changed from one to the other.


CLS 373/67
TXT Ingot remelting:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 wherein the electrode is metal mass which
    is reheated to liquification to form the charge of the furnace.


CLS 373/68
TXT With internal atmosphere control (e.g., pressure, vacuum, etc):

    Subject matter under subclass 67 wherein the environment within the
    remelting furnace is regulated to have a specific pressure, a vacuum, or a
    specific medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for other arc furnaces with internal atmosphere control.

    110,    for resistance furnaces with internal atmosphere control.

    140,    for induction furnaces with internal atmosphere control.


CLS 373/69
TXT With electrode holder or guide:

    Subject matter under subclass 67 including means to support, or at least
    partially contain the electrode, or means to direct the position, or
    movement of the electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for glass furnace electrode holders.

    50      and 52+, for electroslag electrode support and position control
    arrangements.


CLS 373/70
TXT With power regulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 67 including means to control the arc heating
    capability either, by maintaining a desired electrical power input, or by
    maintaining a desired arc length.


CLS 373/71
TXT Furnace body detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 including details of the furnace structure.


CLS 373/72
TXT Hearth or crucible:

    Subject matter under subclass 71 including the part of the furnace
    structure which holds the molten material.


CLS 373/73
TXT Roof:

    Subject matter under subclass 71 including a cover, or lid for the furnace.


CLS 373/74
TXT With cooling:

    Subject matter under subclass 73 including a means to remove, or reduce
    heat from the roof.


CLS 373/75
TXT Sidewall:

    Subject matter under subclass 71 including means forming the furnace
    sidewalls.


CLS 373/76
TXT With cooling:

    Subject matter under subclass 75 including means to remove, or reduce heat
    from the sidewalls of the furnace.

    (1)     Note.  The cooling means may be intended to cool the entire
    sidewall of the furnace, or for localized (hot spot) cooling.


CLS 373/77
TXT With internal atmosphere control (e.g., pressure, vacuum, etc):

    Subject matter under subclass 71 wherein the furnace body is sealed and
    means are provided to increase the pressure within the furnace, or to
    create a vacuum therein.


CLS 373/78
TXT Plural furnace units:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 wherein more than one complete furnace is
    provided in the same general location for cooperative simultaneous, or
    sequential operation.

    (1)     Note.  The furnace unit may be movable from one heating station to
    another, or the contents of one furnace may be discharged from one furnace
    to another.


CLS 373/79
TXT Charging or discharging:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 including means to supply charge material
    to the furnace, or means to let out the heated charge from the furnace.


CLS 373/80
TXT With charge preheating:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 including means to heat the charge prior
    to heating the charge within the furnace.


CLS 373/81
TXT Top charging:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 including specific means to charge the
    furnace from the top.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes furnaces having chutes for charging
    extending through the roof as well as furnaces having a movable roof to
    open the furnace for charging.


CLS 373/82
TXT Through electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 81 wherein the furnace is charged through a
    hollow electrode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for hollow electrodes, per se.


CLS 373/83
TXT Bottom pour:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 wherein the hearth, or crucible includes
    means in its bottom, or lowest point to discharge the molten charge of the
    furnace.


CLS 373/84
TXT Discharge by tilting:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 wherein the furnace is inclined to allow
    the discharge of its molten charge contents.


CLS 373/85
TXT For manipulation of the charge or melt (e.g., stirring):

    Subject matter under subclass 60 wherein means is provided to mix, agitate,
    or otherwise move the furnace charge while it is within the furnaces.

    (1)     Note.  Generally the charge is undergoing treatment within the
    furnace as it is manipulated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    for resistance furnace charge manipulation means.

    146,    for induction furnace charge manipulation means.


CLS 373/86
TXT Mechanical:

    Subject matter under subclass 85 wherein the stirring device is
    mechanically operated.


CLS 373/87
TXT Crust breaking device:

    Subject matter under subclass 85 for poking the top of the furnace charge
    to fracture incrustation of the molten charge material.


CLS 373/88
TXT Electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 including the structure, or composition of
    the electrode means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     for hollow electrodes utilized for charging a furnace.


CLS 373/89
TXT Self-baking (i.e., soderberg):

    Subject matter under subclass 88 wherein an electrode means is made in situ
    by adding raw electrode material in the form of a paste to an electrode
    casing above the furnace, forcing the paste down the casing whereby it
    bakes into a solid electrode as it enters into the furnace.

    (1)     Note.  The baking is a result of the heat from within furnaces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 327 for self-baking
    electrode structures, per se.


CLS 373/90
TXT Nonconsumable:

    Subject matter under subclass 88 wherein the electrode means remains
    substantially intact during operation.

    (1)     Note.  Generally these electrodes include internal water cooling.

    (2)     Note.  Carbon or graphite electrodes are excluded from this
    subclass unless the carbon, or graphite forms only the tip of the electrode.


CLS 373/91
TXT Sectional:

    Subject matter under subclass 88 including electrode segments joined
    together to form a unitary electrode.

    (1)     Note.  Generally the sections are joined end-to-end utilizing screw
    and socket, or nipple and socket connection techniques.


CLS 373/92
TXT With means to join sections:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 including means to connect the electrode
    segments.


CLS 373/93
TXT Composite (e.g., water cooled body with carbon tip):

    Subject matter under subclass 88 wherein the electrode is composed of a
    water cooled top section and a replaceable, usually carbon, bottom, or tip
    portion.


CLS 373/94
TXT Electrode support:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 including structural means to support the
    electrode means above the melt during operation of the furnace.


CLS 373/95
TXT Seal:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 including means to close off the
    interstices between the electrode means and openings in the furnace roof,
    or sidewall through which the electrode means extends to prevent the escape
    of fumes, etc., from the furnace.


CLS 373/96
TXT With electrode shield:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 including means surrounding the electrode
    to protect it as it is suspended over the melt.


CLS 373/97
TXT For soderbert electrode (i.e., casing):

    Subject matter under subclass 94 including a casing means into which
    electrode material in the form of a paste is fed and from which the baked
    electrode emerges.


CLS 373/98
TXT Mast:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 wherein the support system arrangements
    extends vertically, adjacent the furnace body, and forms a support for the
    electrode crosshead.


CLS 373/99
TXT Crosshead:

    Subject matter under subclass 98 which extend horizontally from the mast
    and have a clamp to hold the electrode suspended over the melt.


CLS 373/100
TXT Slipping holder:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 including holder, or support means to
    permit selective slippage of a consumable electrode into the furnace.


CLS 373/101
TXT With electrical contact or terminal:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 including means to connect the electrode
    to the power supply circuit.


CLS 373/102
TXT Power supply system:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 including means to provide electric power
    for the arc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 130.1+ for details of power supplies
    for electric heating arc devices.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for systems for supplying electric current to arc furnaces
    provided that the arc furnace is only nominally disclosed.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 530+ for miscellaneous circuits with specific source of
    supply or bias voltage.


CLS 373/103
TXT Cable or cable suspension arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 102 including power cable construction, or
    hanging support details.


CLS 373/104
TXT With power regulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 102 including means to control the electrical
    power to the arc.

    (1)     Note.  Where the power to the arc is regulated without changing the
    arc length, the voltage is regulated by means of an induction regulator, or
    by changing the forms of connections used (i.e., top changing).


CLS 373/105
TXT By changing arc length:

    Subject matter under subclass 104 wherein the arc power is regulated by
    changing the positions of the arc electrodes relative to the charge or each
    other.


CLS 373/106
TXT Using hydraulic or pneumatic device:

    Subject matter under subclass 105 wherein the adjustment means includes a
    hydraulically, or pneumatically operated means.


CLS 373/107
TXT With magnetically influenced arc:

    Subject matter under subclass 102 including magnetic means to rotate,
    deflect, or otherwise effect change in the arc parameter.


CLS 373/108
TXT D.C. power:

    Subject matter under subclass 102 wherein the electric power is supplied by
    direct current.


CLS 373/109
TXT RESISTANCE FURNACE DEVICE:

    Subject matter under the class definition including electrical resistance
    means as the heating element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3       and 5+, for resistance furnaces combined with other types of
    furnaces.

    27+,    for glass furnaces which are a species of resistance furnaces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 50+ for resistance heating of metal
    general; subclasses 200+ for resistance heating devices used to heat
    nonmetals.


CLS 373/110
TXT With internal atmosphere control (e.g., pressure, vacuum, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 109 wherein the environment within the
    furnace housing is regulated to have a specific pressure, a vacuum, or a
    specific medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for ingot remelting arc furnaces with internal atmosphere control.

    77,     for arc furnace internal atmosphere control in general.

    140+,   for induction furnace internal atmosphere control.


CLS 373/111
TXT Having tubular charge containing or supporting element:

    Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein the means holding, or holding up
    the charge has a cylindrical shape.


CLS 373/112
TXT Vacuum:

    Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein the environment within the
    furnace housing is regulated to have a vacuum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141,    for induction furnace apparatus to provide and maintain a vacuum
    within the furnace.


CLS 373/113
TXT For cooling:

    Subject matter under subclass 109 including means for lowering the
    temperature of the resistance furnace device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for electroslag furnace body cooling means.

    74      and 76, for arc furnace roof and side wall cooling means
    respectively.

    154,    158 and 160, for induction furnace cooling means in coreless and
    core-type induction furnaces.


CLS 373/114
TXT Terminal:

    Subject matter under subclass 113 wherein the furnace device being cooled
    is the electrode terminal.


CLS 373/115
TXT Charging or discharging:

    Subject matter under subclass 109 including devices for supplying the
    charge into the furnace, or taking the charge out of the furnace.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for electron beam vaporizing furnace charging.

    33+,    for glass furnace charging devices.

    42      and 46+, for electroslag remelting furnace start-up charging and
    alloying devices respectively.

    63,     for indirect arc furnaces where the charge is fed into the space
    between the electrodes.

    67+,    for arc furnace ingot remelting where furnace electrodes constitute
    the charge material.

    79+,    for arc furnace charging, per se.

    142+,   for induction furnace charging, per  se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 267+ and 327+ for furnace solid fuel feeders
    and subclasses 101+ for furnace fuel feeders, per se.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 591+ for molten metal dispensing.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 176+ for means to supply a
    charge to a heating means.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 147+ for charging a
    chamber utilized for a heating function.


CLS 373/116
TXT For manipulation of the charge or melt (e.g., stirring):

    Subject matter under subclass 109 including means to mix, agitate, or
    otherwise move the charge within a furnace heating chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85+,    for arc furnaces with means to manipulate the charge, or melt.

    146,    for induction furnaces with means to manipulate the charge, or melt.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 200+ for various means to
    manipulate charge, or melt material as it is being metallurgically treated.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 103+ for nonelectric furnaces where the charge,
    or melt material is heated in a rotary drum structure; subclasses 120+ for
    other nonelectric furnaces with charge, or melt manipulation means.


CLS 373/117
TXT With heating element detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 109 including specific features of the
    electrical resistance means.

    (1)     Note.  These features include the shape, or composition of the
    resistance, the mounting means for, or the terminal means directly
    connected to the resistor, or the means rendering the resistance
    electrically conductive.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 50+ for resistance heating where the
    internal resistance of the work is the heating element; appropriate
    subclasses under subclasses 200+ for details of electrical resistance
    heating elements of general utility.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, appropriate subclasses for details of
    electrical resistance heating elements, per se.


CLS 373/118
TXT Resistance crucible:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 wherein the heating element is an
    electrically conductive vessel for containing the charge of the furnace.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for electron beam furnace crucible construction.

    30+,    for glass furnace crucible details.

    45+,    for electroslag remelting furnace crucible details.

    72+,    for arc furnace crucible details.

    156+    and 163, for induction furnace crucible details for coreless and
    core-type induction furnaces respectively.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 726+ for details of crucible
    structures which contain coating material during vaporization.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 335+ for metal molding apparatus
    recepticles for holding, or dispensing molten material.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 420+ for electric heating devices
    combined with nominally disclosed crucible, or furnace-type containers.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 167 and 275+ for details, or
    crucibles used in the metallurgical treatment of molten material.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 156+ and 262+ for details of crucibles where
    the heating means is nonelectric.


CLS 373/119
TXT Wall contained:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 wherein the heating element is located
    within the wall of the furnace.


CLS 373/120
TXT Open circuit (e.g., charge internal resistance heating):

    Subject matter under subclass 117 wherein a molten material completes the
    circuit and the internal resistance of the molten material is the heating
    element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for open circuit resistance furnaces with a condensating device.


CLS 373/121
TXT Salt bath  heating:

    Subject matter under subclass 120 wherein a salt is melted by passing
    electric current through it and the charge is immersed in the salt and is
    heated by conduction, with the salt performing the dual function of
    resistance medium and heat-transfer medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 107 and 120 for treatment of
    articles by immersion heating in a salt bath, or other molten material.


CLS 373/122
TXT Including crucible or hearth structure details:

    Subject matter under subclass 120 including structural details of the means
    which holds the melt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for electron beam furnace crucible construction.

    30+,    for glass furnace crucible details.

    72+,    for arc furnace crucible details.

    118,    for crucible details in resistance furnaces where the crucible is a
    resistance heating element.

    156+    and 163, for induction furnace crucible details for coreless and
    core-type induction furnaces respectively.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 726+ for details of crucible
    structures which contain coating material during vaporization.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 335+ for metal molding apparatus
    recepticles for holding, or dispensing molten material.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 420+ for electric heating devices
    combined with nominally disclosed crucible, or furnace-type containers.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 167 and 275+ for details of
    crucibles used in the metallurgical treatment of molten material.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 156+ and 262+ for details of crucibles where
    the heating means is nonelectric.


CLS 373/123
TXT With preheating:

    Subject matter under subclass 120 including means to preheat the principal
    heating means of the furnace to a temperature for rendering the heating
    means electrically conductive.


CLS 373/124
TXT Including starting resistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 123 including a resistor which is the
    preheating means.


CLS 373/125
TXT Including terminal detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 120 including specific structural details of
    the connection point between the charge, or melt and the electrical power
    supply.


CLS 373/126
TXT With axial bore:

    Subject matter under subclass 125 wherein the terminal has an axially
    hollow interior extending therethrough.


CLS 373/127
TXT Having resistance encasement means:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 including an enclosure for the resistance
    heating element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for electroslag remelting furnaces with protectively shielded
    electrodes.

    64,     for arc electrodes with protective shields.


CLS 373/128
TXT Mounting:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 with details of the means for attaching
    the heating element to some other part of the furnace.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94,     for arc furnace electrode support apparatus, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 536 and 542+ for heating unit, or
    resistive element attaching, or securing means.


CLS 373/129
TXT Base:

    Subject matter under subclass 128 wherein the heating element is attached
    to the base of the furnace.


CLS 373/130
TXT Side wall:

    Subject matter under subclass 128 wherein the heating element is attached
    to a vertical wall of the furnace.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 424 for resistance heating elements
    combined with a container for the material being heated, where the
    resistance heating element either surrounds, or is embedded within the
    walls of the container.


CLS 373/131
TXT With resistor element compression:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein the resistor element is subjected
    to pressure.


CLS 373/132
TXT Nonmetallic resistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 including a resistor heating element
    comprised of a material which is metal free.


CLS 373/133
TXT Rodlike:

    Subject matter under subclass 132 wherein the resistor heating element has
    the shape of an elongated cylinder, or bar.


CLS 373/134
TXT Including resistor shape detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 including significant details of the
    shape of the resistor.


CLS 373/135
TXT Control:

    Subject matter under sublass 109 including circuitry for regulating the
    furnace operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for electron beam vaporizing furnace power supply and control
    circuits.

    25,     for plasma furnaces control systems.

    40,     for glass furnace electrical system regulation.

    49+,    for electroslag remelting furnaces with power supply control.

    70      and 104+, for arc furnace power regulation.

    148,    for induction furnace power supply regulation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 482+ for heating devices with power
    supply and voltage, or current regulation, or current control means.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for systems for supplying electric current to arc furnace
    provided that the arc furnace is only nominally disclosed.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 365+ for miscellaneous gating circuits, subclasses 509+
    for miscellaneous externally effected circuits, subclasses 518+ for
    miscellaneous control circuits, and subclasses 538+ for miscellaneous bias
    circuits with regulating.


CLS 373/136
TXT Temperature:

    Subject matter under subclass 135 including means to control the
    temperature of the furnace.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 501+ for temperature
    responsive indicating systems.


CLS 373/137
TXT Lining:

    Subject matter under subclass 109 including covering means for the interior
    walls of the furnaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for glass furnace wall composition.

    75,     for arc furnace side wall details.

    155     and 164, for induction furnace linings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclass 301 for reactive furnace linings.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 30 for processes of furnace lining formation or repair.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 248 and 264 for lining of furnaces of general
    utility.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, appropriate subclasses for specific lining
    compositions.


CLS 373/138
TXT INDUCTION FURNACE DEVICE:

    Subject matter under the class definition including an induction coil to
    subject the charge to a variable electromagnetic field for producing a
    heating current by internal resistance losses in the charge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 513 for high frequency induction heating
    coils combined with metal casting devices.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 600+ for inductive heating, subclasses
    678+ for microwave heating, and subclasses 764+ for capacitive dielectric
    heating.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclass 129 for inductance-type heat
    treatment means.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for inductive devices, per
    se.


CLS 373/139
TXT Zone melting:

    Subject matter under subclass 138 wherein a narrow portion of a solid
    charge is liquified by the heating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for electron beam furnace zone melting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclass 10.11 for processes of zone melting of metal.

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, subclasses 37+ for processes for growing
    therein-defined single-crystal of all types of materials, including by zone
    melting, and subclasses 219+ for non-coating apparatus for growing
    therein-defined single-crystal of all types of materials, including by zone
    melting means.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 250.1 for non-coating crystallizing
    apparatus which includes means for zone melting, not including means for
    chemical reaction, and not provided for elsewhere.


CLS 373/140
TXT With internal atmosphere control (e.g., pressure, vacuum, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 138 including means to regulate the
    surrounding conditions of the charge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68      and 77, for arc furnaces with internal atmosphere control.

    110,    for resistance furnaces with internal atmosphere control.


CLS 373/141
TXT Vacuum:

    Subject matter under subclass 140 wherein the atmosphere is an enclosed
    space from which air, or other gases have been removed.


CLS 373/142
TXT For charging or discharging:

    Subject matter under subclass 138 including means to supply charge material
    to the furnace, or means to let out the heated charge from the furnace.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for electron beam vaporizing furnace charging means.

    33,     for glass furnace charging devices.

    42      and 46+, for electroslag remelting furnace start up charging and
    alloying devices respectively.

    63,     for indirect arc furnaces where the charge is fed into the space
    between the electrodes.

    67,     for arc furnace ingot remelting where furnace electrodes constitute
    the charge material.

    79,     for arc furnace charging, per se.

    115,    for resistance furnace charging, per  se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 267+ and 327+ for furnace solid fuel feeders
    and subclasses 101+ for furnace fuel feeders, per se.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 591+ for molten metal dispensing.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 176+ for means to supply a
    charge to a heating means.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 147+ for charging a
    chamber utilized for a heating function.


CLS 373/143
TXT By tilting:

    Subject matter under subclass 142 wherein the furnace, or a portion thereof
    is inclined from its vertical position to either charge, or discharge the
    furnace.


CLS 373/144
TXT Having plural heating elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 138 including more than one inductive heating
    means for a single furnace.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for furnaces having plural diverse heating means.


CLS 373/145
TXT Having condition signaling means:

    Subject matter under subclass 138 including means for monitoring and
    indicating a characteristic of the furnace operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+ for condition
    responsive indicating systems, per se.


CLS 373/146
TXT With means for manipulation of the charge or melt (e.g., stirring):

    Subject matter under subclass 138 including means to mix, agitate, or
    otherwise move the charge within a furnace heating chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85+,    for arc furnaces with means to manipulate the charge, or melt.

    116,    for resistance furnaces with means to manipulate the charge, or
    melt.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 200+ for various means to
    manipulate charge, or melt material as it is being metallurgically treated.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 103+ for nonelectric furnaces where the charge,
    or melt material is heated in a rotary drum structure; subclasses 120+ for
    other nonelectric furnaces with charge, or melt manipulation means.


CLS 373/147
TXT Power supply system:

    Subject matter under subclass 138 including means to provide electrical
    current and voltage for the induction furnace device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for electron beam vaporizing furnaces with power supply and control
    circuitry.

    47,     for electroslag remelting furnace power supply systems.

    102,    for arc furnace power supply systems.


CLS 373/148
TXT Regulating:

    Subject matter under subclass 147 including means to control the power
    supplied to the furnace device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for electron beam vaporizing furnace power supply and control
    circuits.

    25,     for plasma furnace control systems.

    40,     for glass furnace electrical system regulation.

    49+,    for electroslag, remelting furnaces with power supply control.

    70      and 104+, for arc furnace power regulation.

    135,    for resistance furnaces with control  circuitry.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 482+ for heating devices with power
    supply and voltage, or current regulation or current control means.


CLS 373/149
TXT For furnace regulating:

    Subject matter under subclass 138 including means to control the operation
    of the furnace.


CLS 373/150
TXT Electrical:

    Subject matter under subclass 149 wherein the control means is electrically
    actuated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148,    for induction furnace power supply regulation.


CLS 373/151
TXT Coreless:

    Subject matter under subclass 138 wherein the induced current is produced
    without using a magnetic-core material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159+,   for core-type induction furnace apparatus.


CLS 373/152
TXT Coil:

    Subject matter under subclass 151 wherein the induced current is produced
    by wrapping a current carrying wire around the charge, or around means
    intermediate the charge and the wire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160+,   for core-type induction furnace coil details; and core-type
    induction furnace coil compositions.


CLS 373/153
TXT Support:

    Subject matter under subclass 152 including means to hold, or maintain the
    coil in a particular configuration with respect to the furnace.


CLS 373/154
TXT Cooling:

    Subject matter under subclass 152 including means to reduce heat generated
    in the coil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158,    for other coreless induction furnace cooling arrangements.

    160     and 165, for core-type induction furnace coil cooling and cooling,
    per se, details respectively.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 55+ for modifying the temperature of
    inductive devices, per se.


CLS 373/155
TXT Lining:

    Subject matter under subclass 151 including material covering the interior
    surface of the crucible, or furnace.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30+,    for glass furnace body details.

    44+,    for electroslag remelting furnace body details.

    71+,    for arc furnace body details.

    137,    for resistance furnace lining details.

    162     and 164, for lining details of core-type induction furnace
    channels, crucibles, or furnace bodies.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclass 301 for reactive furnace linings.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 30 for processes of furnace lining formation or repair.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 248 and 264 for linings of furnaces of general
    utility.

    501,    Compositions: Ceramic, appropriate subclasses for specific lining
    compositions.


CLS 373/156
TXT Crucible:

    Subject matter under subclass 151 including means to contain the charge
    while the charge is being heated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for electron beam furnace crucible construction.

    30+,    for glass furnace crucible details.

    72+,    for arc furnace crucible details.

    118,    for crucible details in resistance furnaces where the crucible is a
    resistance heating element.

    163,    for core-type induction furnace crucible details.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 726+ for details of crucible
    structures which contain coating material during vaporization.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 335+ for metal molding apparatus
    receptacles for holding, or dispensing molten material.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 420+ for electric heating devices
    combined with nominally disclosed crucible, or furnace-type containers.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 167 and 275+ for details of
    crucibles used in the metallurgical treatment of molten material.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 156+ and 262+ for details of crucibles where
    the heating means is nonelectric.


CLS 373/157
TXT Conducting (e.g., graphite):

    Subject matter under subclass 156 wherein the crucible is constructed of
    material which allows the flow of electric current.


CLS 373/158
TXT Cooling:

    Subject matter under subclass 151 including means to reduce heat generated
    by the coreless furnace device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154,    for coreless induction furnace coil cooling details.

    160     and 165, for core-type induction furnace coil cooling and cooling
    details, respectively.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for cooling
    furnaces having specified treatment apparatus.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 55+ for modifying the temperature of
    inductive devices, per se.

    432,    Heating, appropriate subclasses for cooling nonelectric, or
    nonspecified furnace apparatus.


CLS 373/159
TXT Core-type (i.e., channel):

    Subject matter under subclass 138 wherein the induced current is produced
    using a magnetic-core material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151+,   for coreless induction furnace apparatus.


CLS 373/160
TXT Coil:

    Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein the induced current is produced
    by wrapping a current wire around the charge, or around means intermediate
    the charge and the wire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    for coreless induction furnace coil details, and coreless induction
    furnace coil compositions.

    154     and 158, for coreless induction furnace coil cooling and cooling,
    per se, details, respectively.

    165,    for other core-type induction furnace cooling arrangements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 55+ for modifying the temperature of
    inductive devices, per se.


CLS 373/161
TXT Channel:

    Subject matter under subclass 159 including details of the charge channel
    structure, or composition.


CLS 373/162
TXT Lining:

    Subject matter under subclass 161 including material covering the interior
    surface of the channel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30+,    for glass furnace body details.

    44+,    for electroslag remelting furnace body details.

    71+,    for arc furnace body details.

    137,    for resistance furnace lining details.

    164,    for lining details of core-type induction furnace crucibles, or
    furnace bodies.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclass 301 for reactive furnace linings.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 30 for processes of furnace lining formation or repair.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 248 and 264 for linings of furnaces of general
    utility.

    501,    Compositions:   Ceramic, appropriate subclasses for particular
    lining compositions.


CLS 373/163
TXT Crucible or hearth:

    Subject matter under subclass 159 including means to contain the charge
    while the charge is being heated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for electron beam furnace crucible construction.

    30+,    for glass furnace crucible details.

    72+,    for arc furnace crucible details.

    118,    for crucible details in resistance furnaces where the crucible is a
    resistance heating element.

    156+,   for coreless induction furnace crucible details.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 726+ for details of crucible
    structures which contain coating material during vaporization.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 335+ for metal molding apparatus
    receptacles for holding, or dispensing molten material.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 420+ for electric heating devices
    combined with nominally disclosed crucible, or furnace-type containers.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 167 and 275+ for details of
    crucible used in the metallurgical treatment of molten material.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 156+ and 262+ for details of crucibles where
    the heating means is nonelectric.


CLS 373/164
TXT Lining:

    Subject matter under subclass 159 including material covering the interior
    surface of the crucible.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30+,    for glass furnace body details.

    44+,    for electroslag remelting furnace body details.

    71+,    for arc furnace body details.

    137,    for resistance furnace lining details.

    162,    for lining details of core-type induction furnace channels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclass 301 for reactive furnace linings.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 30 for processes of furnace lining formation, or repair.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 248 and 264 for linings of furnaces of general
    utility.

    501,    Compositions: Ceramic, appropriate subclasses for specific lining
    compositions.


CLS 373/165
TXT Cooling:

    Subject matter under subclass 159 including means to reduce heat generated
    by the core-type furnace device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154,    for coreless induction furnace coil cooling details.

    160,    for core-type induction furnace coil cooling details.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for cooling
    furnaces having specified treatment apparatus.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 55+ for modifying the temperature of
    inductive devices, per se.

    432,    Heating, appropriate subclasses for cooling nonelectric, or
    nonspecified furnace apparatus.


CLS 373/166
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition including electric furnace device
    details not provided for in the other subclasses of this class.


CLS 374/
TTL THERMAL MEASURING AND  TESTING

CLS 374/
TXT
    I.      GLOSSARY

    HEAT

    Kinetic energy of macroscopically non-observable random modes of motion of
    atoms and molecules.

    TEMPERATURE

    A quantitative measure of the ability of a substance to transmit or receive
    heat energy.

    THERMAL

    Related to heat or temperature.

    THERMAL CHARACTERISTIC

    A property of matter related to heat or temperature.

    THERMAL PARAMETER

    Heat, temperature, or a thermodynamic quantity related thereto.

    THERMAL MEASUREMENT OR TEST

    A determination of a thermal quantity, or a determination of a quantity
    made under a controlled thermal condition.

    II.     STATEMENT OF THE CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    (A)     This is the generic class for making a determination of either (1)
    a characteristic or condition of an object or system utilizing heating or
    cooling as a significant part of the test and not provided for in other
    classes, or (2) a thermal quantity or condition.

    (B)     This class also includes circuitry and devices with structure
    unique to a thermal measurement or test and not elsewhere provided for.

    III.    NOTES

    (1)     Note.  Processes and apparatus are classified together.

    (2)     Note.  A thermal measurement or test made as part of a measurement
    elsewhere classifiable, e.g. liquid level or flow, will be classified with
    the other measurement.  However, a thermal measurement combined with a
    separate measurement, so as to provide separate determinations are
    classifiable herein, note subclasses 142+.

    (3)     Note.  Substantially all apparatus classes include automatic
    control of the apparatus.  Such automatic control usually involves some
    means to measure or test a condition or change of condition, the measuring
    or testing means then operating to control or regulate the apparatus in
    accordance with the results of the measurement or test.  For such subject
    matter, the class appropriate to the type of apparatus controlled should be
    investigated.

    IV.     ORGANIZATION OF THIS CLASS

    A.      Thermal Testing subclasses 1-28 and 43-57 provide for determination
    of either a thermal characteristic of, or the thermal dependence of a
    nonthermal characteristic of, a test specimen. Also included herein is the
    thermal determination of a nonthermal property not elsewhere provided for.

    B.      Heat and Heat Flux Measurement subclasses 29-42 provide for
    determination of heat energy, rate of heat transfer, and other
    miscellaneous thermodynamic potentials (e.g., enthalpy).

    C.      Temperature Measurement subclasses 100-207 provide for quantitative
    determination of temperature and temperature-related composite quantities.

    D.      Specialized Subcombinations subclasses 208 and 209 provide for
    devices having structure peculiar to thermal measuring and testing which
    perfects, but does not perform the determination.

    E.      Miscellaneous subclass 210 provides for subject matter under the
    class definition and not found above.

    V.      SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 516+ for expansion and contraction
    mechanisms, in general.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for measuring a
    nonthermal variable by a thermal measurement, particularly subclasses
    25.01+ for thermal gas analysis; subclasses 61.75 and 61.77 for a heat
    determination of the content or effect of a constituent of a liquid
    mixture; subclass 154 for thermal logging of a formation in a borehole;
    subclasses 204.11+ for thermal volume or rate of flow determination; and
    subclass 295 for thermal liquid level determination.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 34+ for a bellows chamber,
    per se; and subclasses 89+ for a diaphragm, per se.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 342+ for a condition
    indicator for a cooking arrangement.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 388 for a condition responsive
    indicator for a water heater.

    128,    Surgery, subclass 736 for a diagnostic temperature measuring
    arrangement particularly limited by structure to shape of, or placement in
    or on, a living body.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 551+ for fluid handling with condition
    responsive indication.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 248 for a flat iron with a condition
    responsive indicator.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 2+ for
    incubator control, and subclass 94 for thermostatic temperature control
    with an indicator.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclass 3 for an incubator heating system.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 338+ for an infrared radiometer.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 11, for a heat motor actuated
    valve.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclass 39 for a thermostatic
    carburetor.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclass 99 for a metallurgical device
    with a condition responsive indicator.

    366,    Agitating, subclass 142 for agitating structure with a condition
    responsive indicator.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 67+ for controls of fixing,
    particularly subclass 70 for temperature control of a warmup or standby
    mode and subclass 94 for internal machine environment temperature.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 35 for a
    thermometer bulb, per se; and subclass 616 for a bimetallic element, per se.


CLS 374/1
TXT THERMAL CALIBRATION SYSTEM:

    Subject matter under the class definition for determining the accuracy,
    operability, or operating characteristics of a device responsive to a
    thermal condition.

    (1)     Note.  The calibration may involve either a single value or plural
    values including a continuous variation.

    (2)     Note.  The thermal condition responsive device need not be a
    measuring or testing device, e.g. calibration of a thermostat is
    classifiable in this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  A measuring or testing device having a reference or
    calibrating element or subsystem is classified with the measuring or
    testing device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 1.01+ for calibrating or proving
    of a nonthermal condition responsive arrangement.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 67+ for controls of fixing,
    particularly subclass 70 for temperature control of a warmup or standby
    mode and subclass 94 for internal machine environment temperature.


CLS 374/2
TXT By thermal radiation emitting device (e.g. blackbody cavity):

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a reference thermal condition is
    thermal radiation given off from a radiating element.

    (1)     Note.  Such an element would include a blackened element adjacent a
    radiation transmitting element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 393 for an invisible radiant energy source
    used in electrical signalling.


CLS 374/3
TXT By immersion in liquid having controlled temperature:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the reference thermal condition is
    a thermal parameter of a controlled temperature liquid bath.


CLS 374/4
TXT LEAK OR FLAW DETECTION:

    Subject matter under the class definition for testing a solid material for
    a defect or undesired passage of fluent material therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for detection of susceptibility to such a defect caused by a
    thermal effect.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 40+ for leakage testing by fluid
    pressure; and subclasses 104+ for surface or cutting edge testing, in
    general.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclass 103 for similar subject matter in a
    welding process.


CLS 374/5
TXT With heating or cooling of specimen for test:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 wherein heat is applied to or extracted
    from the solid material to permit detection of a thermal anomaly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43+,    for determination of a thermal parameter of an object, in general.


CLS 374/6
TXT DISTANCE OR ANGLE:

    Subject matter under the class definition for determining an angle or
    distance by measuring a thermal property which varies therewith.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, appropriate subclasses for determination
    of spatial relationship by direct contact with a measuring element.


CLS 374/7
TXT Thickness, erosion, or deposition:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the distance measured is the
    thickness or change thereof of a solid body.


CLS 374/8
TXT FLAMMABILITY TESTING:

    Subject matter under the class definition for determining the
    susceptibility of the test specimen to combustion.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is burn rate determination.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 36 for testing of illuminating gas,
    in general.


CLS 374/9
TXT EMISSIVITY DETERMINATION:

    Subject matter under class definition for determining the ability of an
    object to radiate energy in accordance with its temperature.

    (1)     Note.  Such a determination often includes heating the sample.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for measuring total radiant energy emitted from a source.  126 and
    128, for emissivity compensation of temperature measurement by thermally
    emitted radiant energy.


CLS 374/10
TXT DIFFERENTIAL THERMAL ANALYSIS:

    Subject matter under the class definition which compares simultaneous
    thermal effects on a test specimen and a reference specimen of an applied
    variation in temperature.

    (1)     Note.  The reference specimen is usually inert (i.e. undergoes no
    thermodynamic phase changes) over the temperature range of interest.

    (2)     Note.  The comparison is usually a differential determination of
    the specimen conditions being monitored (e.g. temperature difference).

    (3)     Note.  The specimens being compared are exposed to similar
    environmental conditions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112+,   for measurement of temperature difference, in general.


CLS 374/11
TXT Detail of electrical heating control:
    Subject matter under subclass 10 having a particular circuitry arrangement
    for controlling heating of the test and reference specimens.


CLS 374/12
TXT Detail of sample holder or support therefor:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 including structural detail of a specimen
    holder or of a holder supporting arrangement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208,    for such a holder or support, per se.


CLS 374/13
TXT Formed by thermoelectric element:

    Subject matter under subclass 12 wherein the specimen holder is composed of
    a thermoelectric junction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for such subject matter having a sample cup with a distinct
    thermoelement contained therein.

    157,    for a combined thermometer and sampling cup.

    179+,   for a thermometer having a thermocouple sensor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclass 231 for such
    a sample holder, per se.


CLS 374/14
TXT THERMAL GRAVIMETRIC ANALYSIS:

    Subject matter under the class definition for determining the change in
    mass or weight of a sample subjected to heat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    177,    Weighing Scales, appropriate subclasses for weighing devices, per
    se.


CLS 374/15
TXT BY APPLYING KNOWN THERMAL GRADIENT (E.G., INDICATION OF RESPONSE BY
    LOCATION):Subject matter under the class definition having an element with
    a temperature which increases in one direction according to the distance
    from a reference point so as to determine the relationship between a
    thermally responsive property and temperature by observation of the spatial
    distribution of the property.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137,    for determination of a temperature distribution, in general.


CLS 374/16
TXT TRANSFORMATION POINT DETERMINATION (E.G., DEW POINT, BOILING POINT):

    Subject matter under the class definition for determining the temperature
    at which a change of state or phase of the test specimen occurs.

    (1)     Note.  The term "change of state" refers to changes between the
    gaseous, liquids, and solid states.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for such determination using an applied thermal gradient.


CLS 374/17
TXT By change in optical property (e.g., transmission):

    Subject matter under subclass 16 wherein the test is performed by
    determining a change in a light modifying characteristic of the test
    specimen or an element in contact therewith.


CLS 374/18
TXT By reflection (e.g., polished surface):
    Subject matter under subclass 17 wherein the light modifying characteristic
    is reflection from the specimen or an element in contact therewith.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are total internal reflection within the
    specimen and mirrors contacting the specimen.


CLS 374/19
TXT Sensed by instrument (e.g., photocell):
    Subject matter under subclass 18 wherein the reflected light is sensed by
    an element responsive thereto.

    (1)     Note.  Such an element is often a photocell.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 573+ for a prephotocell systems having
    fluent material in its optical path.


CLS 374/20
TXT Controlling heating or cooling:

    Subject matter under subclass 19 including a temperature modifying element
    for the specimen which modifying element is responsive to the light
    responsive element.


CLS 374/21
TXT By electrical condition of specimen:
    Subject matter under subclass 16 wherein the test is performed by
    determining the value, or its change, of an electrical property of the test
    specimen.


CLS 374/22
TXT By change in motion of movable element:
    Subject matter under subclass 16 wherein the test is performed by
    determining the modification of movement of a test element which contact or
    is located within the test specimen.


CLS 374/23
TXT Driven element:

    Subject matter under subclass 22 including an arrangement for applying a
    motion producing force to the movable test element.


CLS 374/24
TXT By change in pressure or flow rate:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 wherein the transition point is
    established by determination of a variation in either the force per unit
    area or the volume per unit time of a fluid specimen.


CLS 374/25
TXT By thermal arrest (e.g., time-temperature curve):

    Subject matter under subclass 16 wherein the transition point is
    established by locating the temperature at which there is no temperature
    change during heating or cooling of the specimen.

    (1)     Note.  The thermal arrest temperature is often located by use of a
    graph of time vs. temperature during heating or cooling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for measurement of the time rate of change of temperature.


CLS 374/26
TXT Of molten metal (e.g., carbon content):
    Subject matter under subclass 25 for determining a thermal arrest point of
    a molten metal.

    (1)     Note.  The thermal arrest point is often used to determine carbon
    content of the molten metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139+,   for molten metal temperature measurement, in general.


CLS 374/27
TXT Between gaseous and liquid states:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 where in the transformation point
    determination is between a gaseous and a liquid state, and not provided for
    in subclass

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are determination of a boiling or a
    condensation point.


CLS 374/28
TXT Dew point:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 wherein the change of state determined is
    that of the temperature at which condensation of a vapor in a sample
    begins, and not provided for in subclasses 17 - 26, above.

    (1)     Note.  The vapor is often water vapor.


CLS 374/29
TXT HEAT FLUX MEASUREMENT:

    Subject matter under the class definition for determining the heat flowing
    through a unit area per unit time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31+,    for measuring the total heat energy at a particular location.


CLS 374/30
TXT By differential temperature measurement along undisturbed thermal gradient:

    Subject matter under subclass 29 wherein the heat flux is determined by
    measuring the temperature difference across a thermal impedance without
    heating or cooling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112+,   for measuring a temperature difference, in general.


CLS 374/31
TXT CALORIMETRY:

    Subject matter under the class definition for determining a quantity of
    heat energy produced or absorbed at a given location.

    (1)     Note.  Calorimetric determination of the amount of constituent in a
    compound or of the heat of chemical combination is classified herein only
    when limited to a determination of heat produced by combustion of the
    specimen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10+,    for calorimetric determination used in differential thermal
    analysis.

    29,     for measuring heat flow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, subclasses 230 and 232 for
    processes involving heat measurement of a catalytic element, or with steps
    involving a chemical reaction other than combustion.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 51 for apparatus for heat measurement
    of a catalytic element, or with an arrangement involving a chemical
    reaction other than combustion.


CLS 374/32
TXT Total radiant energy or power measurement: Subject matter under subclass 31
    for determining the total energy or power produced by a source of radiation.

    (1)     Note.  Microwave, other radio wave, X-ray and gamma ray radiation
    are excluded from this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclasses 213+ for a
    radiant energy sensing thermocouple.

    250,    Radiant Energy, appropriate subclasses for measurement of intensity
    or amplitude of an incident beam of radiant energy.


CLS 374/33
TXT With control of heat added to or lost from a sample container (e.g.,
    isothermal calorimetry):

    Subject matter under subclass 31 including an arrangement to maintain or
    vary the heat energy of a receptacle containing a sample undergoing an
    endothermic or exothermic reaction.


CLS 374/34
TXT With controlled adiabatic shield:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 including an element in thermally
    conductive relation to the sample container and an arrangement to maintain
    the temperature of the element equal to that of the test location by
    heating or cooling the element so as to prevent heat flow between the
    element and the container.


CLS 374/35
TXT Heat absorbing high temperature gas probe (e.g., enthalpy or fluid cooled
    probe): Subject matter under subclass 31 for making a measurement of a
    thermal parameter of a hot gas including transfer of heat energy from the
    hot gas to a measuring element.

    (1)     Note.  The terms "hot" or "high temperature" to describe the gas
    are each intended to specify that the absolute temperature of the probe is
    very small compared to that of the gas.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein are enthalpy probes and probes with a fluid
    coolant therein.


CLS 374/36
TXT Heat value of combustion (e.g., "calorific value"):

    Subject matter under subclass 31 for determining the amount of heat
    produced by burning a given amount of a tested combustible material.


CLS 374/37
TXT Having specified control of input of mixture:

    Subject matter under subclass 36 having a structural detail of an
    adjustment of the amount of air or fuel admitted to the combustion location.

    (1)     Note.  The adjustment may be responsive to the temperature of the
    combustion exhaust fluid.


CLS 374/38
TXT Having bomb or cartridge ignition chamber: Subject matter under subclass 36
    including a container resistant to high pressure produced by rapid ignition
    of the tested material.

    (1)     Note.  The ignition chamber is often immersed in a liquid, or
    includes and electrically operated igniting element.


CLS 374/39
TXT Gain or loss of heat by heat utilizing load in path of heat exchange fluid:

    Subject matter under subclass 31 wherein the heat measured is that taken
    from or added to a heat exchange fluid by a heat utilizing device through
    which the fluid flows.

    (1)     Note.  The term "heat utilizing device" is generally a heating or
    cooling device.


CLS 374/40
TXT Determined by combining flow rate and temperature signals of heat exchange
    fluid: Subject matter under subclass 39 including sensing of the flow rate
    and a temperature of the heat exchange fluid and combining signals
    representative thereof to produce a signal representing heat gain or loss.

    (1)     Note.  The temperature signal is often representative of the
    differential temperature of the fluid prior to and following heat exchange
    with the heat utilizing device.


CLS 374/41
TXT Signals combined electrically:

    Subject matter under subclass 40 wherein the temperature and flow rate are
    each sensed to produce an electrical signal and the signals are
    electrically combined.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 464 for
    similar subject matter with details limited to a calculating arrangement.


CLS 374/42
TXT Throttling calorimeter (e.g., steam quality):

    Subject matter under subclass 31 for measuring a heat energy property of a
    gas or vapor including flow of the gas or vapor through a restriction as
    part of the measurement.

    (1)     Note.  Such devices are often used to determine "steam quality"
    which is the fraction of moisture in the liquid state carried by flowing
    steam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 23.2 for determination of gas
    composition, in general.


CLS 374/43
TXT DETERMINATION OF INHERENT THERMAL PROPERTY (E.G., HEAT FLOW COEFFICIENT):

    Subject matter under the class definition for ascertaining a specimen's
    ability to transmit, transfer, retard, or spread heat and which includes
    heating or cooling of a portion of the specimen.

    (1)     Note.  Properties determined by such a measurement include thermal
    conductivity, thermal diffusivity, or heat transfer coefficient.

    (2)     Note.  Measurement of specific heat is made by calorimetry.


CLS 374/44
TXT Thermal conductivity:

    Subject matter under subclass 43 for determining the coefficient of heat
    flow per unit area with respect to the temperature gradient.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     for determining heat flux, per se.


CLS 374/45
TXT THERMAL TESTING OF A NONTHERMAL QUANTITY:
    Subject matter under the class definition for performing a measurement or
    test of other than a thermal quantity either (1) with a specified thermal
    condition, or (2) to ascertain the dependence of the quantity upon a
    thermal condition.

    (1)     Note.  The thermal condition is usually temperature or heat.

    (2)     Note.  Nominal recitation of thermal recitation combined with a
    test classified elsewhere is classified with the other test.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 151.4, 154.6, and 155.6 for metal
    casting apparatus which may detect a non-thermal condition using a thermal
    sensor.


CLS 374/46
TXT With loading of specimen (e.g., stress or strain):

    Subject matter under subclass 45 wherein the nonthermal test includes
    direct application of a mechanical force to a test specimen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 788+ for testing by loading of a
    specimen, in general.


CLS 374/47
TXT Cyclic:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 wherein the loading is repeatedly varied
    during the test.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 808+ for testing a specimen by
    applying a cyclic load, in general.


CLS 374/48
TXT Torsional:

    Subject matter under subclass 47 wherein the repetitive loading tends to
    twist the specimen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 814 for testing by cyclic
    application of a torsional load, in general.


CLS 374/49
TXT Tensile:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 wherein the loading is a pull tending to
    stretch the specimen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 826+ for tensile testing, in
    general.


CLS 374/50
TXT With detail of heating or cooling structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 49 having a structural detail of an element
    of an arrangement for applying heat to, or extracting heat from, the
    specimen.


CLS 374/51
TXT Compressional:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 wherein the load tends to squeeze the
    specimen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 818 for compressional testing, in
    general.


CLS 374/52
TXT Bending or flexing:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 wherein the test specimen has a long axis
    which the load tends to deform.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 849 for testing by bending or
    flexing, in general.


CLS 374/53
TXT Of cure or hardenability:

    Subject matter under subclass 45 wherein the nonthermal quantity is either
    the degree of polymerization of a polymerizable substance, or the depth to
    which a hardening of an outer layer of metal extends.

    (1)     Note.  The hardening of a layer of metal is often produced by
    quenching.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47+,    for determination of cure by cyclic loading.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 78+ for hardness testing, in
    general; and subclasses 808+ for testing by cyclic loading, in general.


CLS 374/54
TXT Of fluid volume or property (e.g., evaporation rate, flow rate):

    Subject matter under subclass 45 wherein the nonthermal quantity is the
    amount of a fluid or the rate of change of a flow property or evaporation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 450.3 for a metal casting apparatus
    wherein material level maybe measured with a thermal sensor.


CLS 374/55
TXT Expansion or contraction characteristic (e.g., dilatometry):

    Subject matter under subclass 45 wherein the measurement is of a
    temperature dependance of a dimensional change of a test specimen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 147 for an extensometer, per se.


CLS 374/56
TXT Including electrical sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 including a deformation responsive
    electrical sensing element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 763+ for electrical deformation
    measurement, in general.


CLS 374/57
TXT Of susceptibility to thermally induced deterioration, flaw, or failure:

    Subject matter under subclass 45 for determining the properties of a
    specimen with respect to breakdown of structural integrity or of
    degeneration of a characteristic by heating or cooling of the specimen.

    (1)     Note.  Such determination may further include application of other
    energy (e.g., radiation) to the specimen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4+,     for determination of an existing flaw.


CLS 374/100
TXT TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT (E.G., THERMOMETER):

    Subject matter under the class definition for making a quantitative
    determination of a temperature, or of a temperature-related parameter which
    is not otherwise classifiable.

    (1)     Note.  The term "quantitative" requires a numerical result of more
    than two values.

    (2)     Note.  The term "temperature-related parameter" is a quantity
    having a value that is a function of plural temperatures, or of temperature
    and another variable and not elsewhere classified, see subclasses 101+
    below.

    (3)     Note.  A device providing the temperature determination is often
    designated as a "thermometer" or pyrometer", both terms being used in this
    class.

    (4)     Note.  In this and indented subclasses the term "sensing" will
    denote the immediate effect of a parameter and the term "indicating" will
    denote the creation of a humanly perceptible action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31+,    for a calorimeter including a thermometer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 25+ for thermal gas analysis,
    subclasses 75 and 77 for a thermal moisture content determination;
    subclasses 152.12+ for strata identification by thermal measurements in a
    bore hole; and subclass 295 for a thermal measurement to determine liquid
    level.


CLS 374/101
TXT Composite temperature-related parameter: Subject matter under subclass 100
    wherein the quantitative determination is a continuous function of plural
    temperatures, or of temperature, and at least one other variable and which
    function is not otherwise classifiable.

    (1)     Note.  The other variable may include time, radiation, etc.


CLS 374/102
TXT Time-temperature relationship (e.g., integral, deterioration, change):

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein the quantitative determination is
    either, (1) functionally dependent upon, or (2) limited to the time elapsed
    during the measurement.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are measurements of time-temperature
    integrals or other deterioration representative functions.


CLS 374/103
TXT Time-temperature integration performed by particular circuit arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 102 having a detail of a component or
    arrangement of circuitry which integrates a temperature-dependent electric
    signal with respect to time.


CLS 374/104
TXT Peak (maximum or minimum) with respect to time:

    Subject matter under subclass 102 wherein the determination is of a
    temperature having a value, or difference in value from a reference
    temperature exceeding all other such temperatures during a measuring
    interval.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111,    for a determination of the highest or lowest of plural spaced apart
    temperatures.


CLS 374/105
TXT Indicating tube with sensing material return prevention:

    Subject matter under subclass 104 wherein the determination is made by an
    indicating tube type thermometer with an irregularity in its axial bore
    between the bulb and scale of the thermometer so as to prevent the
    expansible material therein from returning to the bulb.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    192,    for an indicating tube thermometer with a holder for shaking.


CLS 374/106
TXT Permanent visual indication (i.e., irreversible):

    Subject matter under subclass 104 wherein the determination is made using
    an arrangement which changes with a change in temperature in only one
    direction, i.e. restoring the temperature to its initial value does not
    restore the arrangement to its original condition.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are arrangements having color change,
    fusible, or diffusion properties.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160,    for a reversible fusible thermometer.

    161+,   for a reversible optical property thermometer.


CLS 374/107
TXT Rate of change:

    Subject matter under subclass 102 where the determination is of the time
    derivative of temperature.


CLS 374/108
TXT Degree-days:

    Subject matter under subclass 102 wherein the composite function is the
    product of the difference of the temperature from a reference temperature
    and the number of days elapsed.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter herein generally includes a clock running
    at a rate dependent upon the outdoor temperature difference below a
    reference temperature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109,    for a climate related composite thermal measurement, in general.


CLS 374/109
TXT Climate related (e.g., wind-chill factor, discomfort index):

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein the composite function is related
    to atmospheric conditions.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are such quantities as wind-chill factor and
    discomfort index.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for a degree-day measurement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 170.01+ for nonthermal
    meteorological measurement; and subclasses 335.08+ for wet and dry thermal
    sensors to determine atmospheric humidity.


CLS 374/110
TXT Plural spaced temperature function:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein the quantitative determination is
    a single function of the temperatures of plural spaced-apart points.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124,    for a temperature distribution display by thermal radiation.

    137,    for temperature distribution or profile.


CLS 374/111
TXT Highest or lowest of spaced temperatures: Subject matter under subclass 110
    wherein the resultant measurement is the highest or lowest temperature at
    several points.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104+,   for a determination of the maximum or minimum temperature during a
    time interval.


CLS 374/112
TXT Difference or gradient:

    Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein the resultant measurement is the
    difference between the temperatures at two of the spaced-apart points or
    the ratio of such a difference to the distance between the two points.


CLS 374/113
TXT By thermoelements connected in series opposition:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein the difference is sensed by two
    thermoelectric current generators having a single current path therethrough
    and connected with the potentials in opposing directions along the current
    path.


CLS 374/114
TXT By current modifying elements in circuit (e.g., bridge):

    Subject matter under subclass 112 having plural elements with a
    temperature-dependent impedance and so connected between a power source and
    output so as to produce a signal related to the temperature difference at
    the output.

    (1)     Note.  A bride having such sensing impedance elements in adjacent
    arms is classified in this subclass.


CLS 374/115
TXT Space average:

    Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein the resultant measurement is the
    summation of temperatures at the spaced apart points divided by the
    summation of said points.

    (1)     Note.  In this definition, the term "summation" includes
    integration over a continuous path as well as discrete additive summation
    so as to include averages over continuous as well as discrete measurement
    points.


CLS 374/116
TXT By single sensor (e.g., elongate or with plural fluid intakes):

    Subject matter under subclass 115 having a sensor which is long enough to
    inherently average the temperature over its length.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are arrangements with fluid temperature
    sensors having housing with multiple inlets along its length.


CLS 374/117
TXT By a vibratory effect (e.g., resonant frequency, acoustical):

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the temperature is determined by
    a parameter of a mechanical vibration.

    (1)     Note.  The mechanical vibration may be an acoustical wave.

    (2)     Note.  The parameter may be the frequency of mechanical or acoustic
    resonance of an element.

    (3)     Note.  A temperature-responsive crystal controlling an oscillator
    in a thermometer is classified herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163+,   for other thermometers having an oscillator, particularly 170+, for
    digital output thermometers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 570+ for testing by, or
    measurement or testing of, vibratory waves.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 66 for a temperature controlled oscillator
    absent an indicating arrangement.


CLS 374/118
TXT Resonant frequency by fluid flow:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 wherein the temperature is determined by
    the frequency of mechanical or acoustical resonance measured by fluid flow.

    (1)     Such elements are often resonating chamber devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135,    for temperature measurement by fluid flow other than by resonant
    vibration production.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 137 for fluid flow acoustical
    generators, in general.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 804+ for fluidic oscillators absent an
    indicating arrangement.


CLS 374/119
TXT Vibration velocity (e.g., echo timing):
    Subject matter under subclass 117 wherein the temperature is determined by
    the speed of a mechanical wave.

    (1)     Note.  the resonant frequency of a fixed wavelength element,
    although inherently a measure of vibration velocity, is classified in
    subclasses 117 and 118 above, without cross-reference to this subclass in
    the absence of a nonresonant variant of velocity determination.


CLS 374/120
TXT In spaced noncontact relationship to specimen:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 having a temperature sensor separated
    from the object by an intervening space or material.


CLS 374/121
TXT By thermally emitted radiation:

    Subject matter under subclass 120 wherein the temperature of a specimen is
    measured by measuring a parameter of the thermal radiation emitted
    therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclasses 213+ for a
    thermoelectric sensor for a thermoelectric radiation pyrometer absent
    processing and indicating circuitry.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 338+ for infrared radiation responsive
    circuitry absent a temperature indication.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 43+ for a pyrometer
    specifically limited to the optical wavelength range of the electromagnetic
    spectrum.


CLS 374/122
TXT By microwave arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the radiation measurement is
    performed directly by microwave signal processing components (e.g.,
    waveguides).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave, subclass 100 for measurement of
    microwave radiation intensity, in general.


CLS 374/123
TXT Transparent material measurement or compensation (e.g., spectral line, gas,
    particulate suspension):

    Subject matter under subclass 121 including compensation for radiation
    transmitted through or blocked from the thermally emitting material.

    (1)     Note.  Measurements involving spectral line intensity or inversion,
    as well as reference emitters from transparency compensation are classified
    herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129,    for radiation thermometers with reference standards, in general.

    161+,   for temperature measurement involving a change in an optical
    property, absent evaluation of thermally emitted radiation.


CLS 374/124
TXT With scanning or temperature distribution display:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the thermally emitted radiation
    from adjacent points of the emitting object is successively evaluated or
    wherein the quantitative or continuous variation of surface temperature is
    displayed in relationship to the points thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 164+ for infrared radiation responsive
    television, in general.


CLS 374/125
TXT With fluid flow purging device:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 having an arrangement to produce a stream
    of fluid flowing past at least one element of a radiation analyzing
    arrangement in order to remove from the element, or the path between the
    element and the emitting object, particulate or other undesired material.

    (1)     Note.  The element is often an optical element (e.g., lens or
    window).

    (2)     Note.  The fluid stream usually has an incidental cooling effect.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    509, for fluid stream particle control for optical elements, in general.


CLS 374/126
TXT Having emissivity compensating or specified radiating surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 including an arrangement to provide, or
    to compensate for departure from, a fourth power dependence of the emitted
    radiation on the absolute temperature, or from the amount of radiation
    emitted by a completely black surface with an emissivity of one.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are blackened surfaces or cavities
    contacting the material the temperature of which is being measured.


CLS 374/127
TXT Having significant frequency limitation or relationship (e.g., peak, ratio):

    Subject matter under subclass 121 including a particular feature of the
    frequency of the thermal radiation, or a portion thereof, sensed to perform
    the temperature determination.

    (1)     Note.  The sensed parameter is often the intensity of the radiation
    at a given frequency.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein are ratio pyrometer, devices determining the
    frequency of peak intensity, and devices having sensors with different
    frequency-intensity characteristics.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 45 for a plural color
    responsive optical pyrometer.


CLS 374/128
TXT Having significant signal handling circuitry (e.g., linearizing, emissivity
    compensation):

    Subject matter under subclass 121 having details of a circuit which
    processes the sensed signal.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is processing to obtain a signal linearly
    related to the temperature or compensating for the emissivity
    characteristics of the radiating object.


CLS 374/129
TXT Comparison with radiation reference standard:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 including an arrangement for comparing
    the thermally emitted radiation to be measured with radiation from a
    reference emitter the radiation from which has a predetermined relationship
    to the emitter temperature.

    (1)     Note.  Such emitters often have a high emissivity factor (E1), and
    include blackened elements and blackbody cavity radiators.

    (2)     Note.  Comparison arrangement may include choppers alternating the
    measured and reference radiation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for a reference radiating device which is not a part of a radiation
    thermometer.

    126,    for radiation temperature measuring with increasing the emissivity
    of the thermally emitting surface.


CLS 374/130
TXT Optical system structure (e.g., lens):

    Subject matter under subclass 121 including a specific limitation of an
    element which changes the direction of the radiation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements,
    appropriate subclasses for optical modifying elements and systems, in
    general.


CLS 374/131
TXT With radiation conducting element:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 including a generally elongate element
    for conducting radiation from one end to the other within the confines of
    the outer surface of the elongate element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 44 for similar subject
    matter using radiation limited to the visual spectrum.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, appropriate subclasses, for light conducting
    elements, in general.


CLS 374/132
TXT Sensor or mounting temperature control:
    Subject matter under subclass 121 including maintaining or modifying the
    temperature of the radiation detector or some portion thereof during
    radiation sensing.


CLS 374/133
TXT Ambient temperature compensated (e.g., dummy sensor):

    Subject matter under subclass 121 having an arrangement to eliminate any
    effects caused by the temperature of the surroundings of the radiation
    sensor.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are arrangements with an additional
    radiation sensor not exposed to the radiation to cancel the temperature
    effects on the radiation receiving sensor.


CLS 374/134
TXT Extrapolation (e.g., simulation, heat flow):

    Subject matter under subclass 120 wherein the temperature at a location is
    measured by measuring temperature or heat flow at a point spaced from the
    location.

    (1)     Note.  The desired location is often inaccessible for measurement.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein are temperature and heat flow simulation or
    analog arrangement.

    (3)     Note.  Included herein are article simulation arrangements, such as
    dummy cans, to determine temperature of the article interior.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29+,    for heat flux measurement, per se.


CLS 374/135
TXT By fluid flow within or to sensor (e.g., convection, heat transfer,
    differential pressure):

    Subject matter under subclass 120 including determination of some parameter
    of a flowing fluid in thermal relationship to an object at a location
    spaced away from the object.

    (1)     Note.  Convection current measurement is included herein.

    (2)     Note.  The parameters of the flowing fluid include flow rate,
    pressure, and temperature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    147 and 148, for direct sensing of fluid temperature.


CLS 374/136
TXT Geophysical (e.g., well bore, underwater):

    Subject matter under subclass 100 for temperature determination beneath the
    surface of the earth or of a body of water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109,    for plural or composite atmospheric temperature measurement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 152.12+ for borehole formation
    logging by making a thermal measurement, subclass 152.33 for thermal rate
    of fluid flow measuring in a borehole; and subclasses 170.01+ for
    measurement of oceanographic or atmospheric phenomena, in general.


CLS 374/137
TXT Temperature distribution or profile:
    Subject matter under subclass 100 for determination of the temperature
    along a path or on a surface and displaying in substantially continuous
    form the temperature at each point of the path or surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124,    for similar subject matter using thermally emitted radiation.

    136,    for similar subject matter particularly adapted for utility in
    geophysical measurement.


CLS 374/138
TXT With fluid flow deflector:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 for measuring temperature of a flowing
    fluid which includes a deflector of the fluid.

    (1)     Note.  An example would be a deflector to suppress the effect of a
    boundary layer of fluid upon a temperature sensing element.


CLS 374/139
TXT Of molten metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the sensor contacts a molten
    metal bath.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for transformation point determination of molten metal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 4 and 150.1 for a process and apparatus,
    respectively, for metal casting or mold making combined with condition
    indication.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclass 87 for metal treating apparatus
    combined with a temperature sensor.


CLS 374/140
TXT Lance (e.g., consumable):

    Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein the sensing arrangement includes
    an elongate housing containing a temperature sensor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclass 234 for a
    thermocouple molten metal lance having a covered and sealed sensing
    junction.


CLS 374/141
TXT Combined with diverse art device:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 having significant temperature measuring
    detail combined with a device having another utility.

    (1)     Note.  Where significant detail of the other device additional to
    that above is claimed such a combination is classifiable with the other
    device and should be cross-referenced herein.

    (2)     Note.  The term "another utility" refers to a function which would
    still be performed if the temperature measurement limitations were removed,
    thus supports or viewing devices are not considered as having other utility.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191,    for an indicating tube thermometer with a viewing element.

    194,    for an indicating tube thermometer with a particular support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclass 319 for a seal combined with a fluid temperature
    indicator, sampler or inspection feature.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 10 for an electric
    lamp or tube having a thermometer combined therewith.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 23+, particularly subclass 25 for an
    illuminating device for a thermometer.


CLS 374/142
TXT With other measuring device:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 combined with a device for making a
    quantitative determination of a parameter other than temperature.

    (1)     Note.  The combination must make distinct determinations of the
    temperature and another parameter.  See (2) Note in section II of the class
    definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101+,   for a single resultant indication of temperature and another
    condition.


CLS 374/143
TXT Pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 142 wherein the other measuring device
    provides quantitative determination of fluid pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 384+ for barometers; and
    subclasses 700+ for fluid pressure measurement, in general.


CLS 374/144
TXT With combustion engine:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the other device is a mechanical
    energy producer operating by combustion.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes a combination with either an internal
    or an external combustion engine.


CLS 374/145
TXT Cooling system:

    Subject matter under subclass 144 wherein the temperature of the system for
    removing heat from the engine is determined.

    (1)     Note.  Such systems are often of the fluid circulation type.


CLS 374/146
TXT Radiator cap mounted thermometer:

    Subject matter under subclass 145 wherein the cooling system has a radiator
    with a cap having the thermometer mounted thereon.


CLS 374/147
TXT With fluid carrying conduit (e.g., shower pipe):

    Subject matter under subclass 141 for determining the temperature of a
    fluid flowing within a tubular element.

    (1)     Note.  Such combinations often include structure for maintaining
    contact between a temperature sensor and the conduit.


CLS 374/148
TXT Sensor within conduit:

    Subject matter under subclass 147 wherein a thermometer sensing element or
    cover therefor protrudes within the conduit.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are sensor wells into which temperature
    sensors may be placed.


CLS 374/149
TXT With cooking compartment or door thereof (e.g., oven):

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the thermometer is mounted in or
    on an oven, or door thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Where significant detail of the oven is claimed,
    classification is in the appropriate class therefor.


CLS 374/150
TXT With bottle (e.g., nursing):

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the device of other utility is a
    container for liquid storage.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are infant feeding bottles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclass 11 for nursing bottle structure.


CLS 374/151
TXT With confection or infant pacifier:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the thermometer is combined with
    an edible casing or a teething device.


CLS 374/152
TXT With electrical component (e.g., transformer):

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the other device is a current
    handling component of an electric circuit.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of such components are transformers, inductors, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    safety and protection arrangements for electrical components.


CLS 374/153
TXT With roll or rotary specimen or support:
    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the temperature of an angularly
    rotatable cylindrical element or of material contacting the element surface
    is measured


CLS 374/154
TXT With coupling between rotating sensor and stationary electrical circuitry:

    Subject matter under subclass 153 including an arrangement to couple a
    sensor located in or on the rotating element, and including indicating
    circuitry which does not rotate.


CLS 374/155
TXT With piercing element:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the diverse art device is an
    object penetrating element to enable interior temperature measurements of
    objects.

    (1)     Note.  A piercing element integral with a temperature probe is
    considered to have independent utility whether or not explicity disclosed.


CLS 374/156
TXT With float:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the diverse art device is a
    buoyant element which supports the thermometer in spaced relation to a
    liquid surface.

    (1)     Note.  The buoyant action of a float is considered to make the
    float a device of independent utility, rather than a static support
    excluded from subclass 141 and its indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 322.5 for a float, per se.


CLS 374/157
TXT With sampling cup:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the diverse art device is a
    holder or container for obtaining a volume of material being measured.

    (1)     Note.  The temperature sensor may extend into the material within
    the sampler.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140,    for such a device in a molten metal lance.


CLS 374/158
TXT With removable cover for sensor (e.g., disposable sheath):

    Subject matter under subclass 100 including an element particularly adapted
    to fit over a temperature sensor during a measurement.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are also probecover subcombinations not
    elsewhere classifiable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209,    for removable probe covers, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclasses 230+ for a
    thermocouple probe combined with a disposable sheath.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 306 for thermometer cases
    for storage, and for a package of disposable sheaths.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 28+ for a resistance thermometer
    probe combined with a disposable sheath.


CLS 374/159
TXT Nonelectrical, nonmagnetic, or nonmechanical temperature responsive
    property:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the temperature is determined by
    a change in a property of a sensing element and which property is other
    than magnetic, electrical, or mechanical.

    (1)     Note.  The term "mechanical" refers specifically to temperature
    dependent expansion or contraction.

    (2)     Note.  Such a property could include an optical property,
    luminescence, sorbtion, or a change of state.


CLS 374/160
TXT Melting or softening:

    Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein the sensor changes between a
    solid and liquid state or changes its flow property.


CLS 374/161
TXT Change of optical property:

    Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein the radiation transmission or
    reflection of the sensor changes.

    (1)     Note.  Such a property would be translucence or polarization.


CLS 374/162
TXT Color:

    Subject matter under subclass 161 wherein the sensor changes color.


CLS 374/163
TXT By electrical or magnetic heat sensor:
    Subject matter under subclass 100 including an element having a temperature
    responsive variation in an electrical or magnetic property thereof and an
    arrangement providing a quantitative indication from the variation.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this and its indented subclasses is circuitry
    peculiar to temperature measurement and not provided for elsewhere.

    (2)     Note.  Sensor structure, per se, is classified with the particular
    element structure (e.g. resistor, magnet, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188,    for a thermometer having a mechanical sensor and an electrical
    indicator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 53-56, 108, 414, and 467-470 for such devices used as
    temperature responsive devices, subclass 295 for insulated gate field
    effect devices with a ferroelectric layer, and subclasses 421-427 for
    magnetic field responsive devices.


CLS 374/164
TXT With preheated sensing probe:

    Subject matter under subclass 163 included a housing having the thermal
    sensing element and an element for heating the housing to assist in the
    temperature determination.

    (1)     Note.  The heating is particularly to assist in the temperature
    measurement as, for example, to heat the probe to a nominal expected
    temperature.  Heating of more general utility is classified in the
    appropriate class.


CLS 374/165
TXT With heat exchanger or conductor:

    Subject matter under subclass 163 including an arrangement to conduct heat
    to the temperature sensing element.


CLS 374/166
TXT At plural zones:

    Subject matter under subclass 163 having plural sensors at different
    locations for distinct temperature measurements of the several locations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110+,   for a single function of plural spaced temperatures.


CLS 374/167
TXT Scanning:

    Subject matter under subclass 166 including successive connection of the
    sensors of each location with the temperature measuring arrangement.


CLS 374/168
TXT With self-rebalancing arrangement (e.g., servo-potentiometer, thermal link):

    Subject matter under subclass 163 including an electric circuit with an
    output which may be balanced by a variable signal which is controlled by
    the output, and which variable signal is utilized as a measure of the
    magnitude of the sensor output.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are servo-potentiometer and thermal links
    for rebalancing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 641 for a thermally
    controlled rebalancing bridge not specifically including an indicator.


CLS 374/169
TXT With thermal lag compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 163 including an arrangement to permit the
    indication of the measured temperature prior to the sensor reaching the
    measured temperature.


CLS 374/170
TXT Digital output:

    Subject matter under subclass 163 including production of a pulse group in
    accordance with the sensed temperature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for similar subject matter where the signal is produced by a
    vibratory effect.


CLS 374/171
TXT With digital linearizing circuitry:

    Subject matter under subclass 170 having electrical pulse or digital
    processing circuitry to modify the pulse group content in accordance with
    the value represented thereby in order to provide an output which is a
    linear function of the sensed temperature.

    (1)     Note.  The modification is generally the inverse function of the
    signal relationship to the temperature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172+,   for response linearizing circuitry other than digital.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclass 140 for an analog to
    digital converter circuit with transducer output linearization.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclasses 27+ for similar subject matter including
    detailed structure of output counters.


CLS 374/172
TXT With compensation for sensor nonlinearity or lead impedance:

    Subject matter under subclass 136 having circuitry to modify the signal
    representing the sensed temperature to form a signal which is linearly
    related to the sensed temperature, or which is independent of the impedance
    of leads connecting the sensor to the other circuit elements.

    (1)     Note.  The signal modification for linearizing is generally the
    function inverse to the sensor temperature response.

    (2)     Note.  The signal modification for impedance compensation may
    include three or more leads to a two terminal sensor, or separable (e.g. by
    polarity) signals energizing the sensor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171,    for such linearization by digital processing circuitry.


CLS 374/173
TXT By feedback in amplifier circuit or with constant current source in circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 172 wherein the signal modification is
    performed by either feedback circuitry of an amplifier, or circuitry of an
    amplifier, or circuitry including a constant current source.


CLS 374/174
TXT By conductive fluid or work function within sensor (e.g., ionization):

    Subject matter under subclass 163 wherein the thermal sensor includes an
    envelope having a fluid or a vacuum therein, and electrodes to provide an
    electric current or space discharge therein, the temperature being
    determined by its effect on the discharge.

    (1)     Note.  The temperature effect may be produced by variation in work
    function, ionization, or thermoelectric potential.


CLS 374/175
TXT Thermal noise generated in conductor:

    Subject matter under subclass 163 responsive to an electric current
    produced by the thermal motion of molecules in the sensor.


CLS 374/176
TXT Including sensor having hysteresis or cryogenic property (e.g.,
    ferromagnetism, superconductivity):

    Subject matter under subclass 163 wherein the sensor has either a residual
    electric or magnetic field absent an external field applied thereto, or a
    property peculiar to temperatures near absolute zero.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are magnetized elements.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein are superconductivity and certain
    paramagnetic-ferromagnetic transitions.


CLS 374/177
TXT Ferroelectric:

    Subject matter under subclass 176 wherein the sensor has a spontaneous
    electrical polarization.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is an electret sensor in a thermometer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 400
    for electrets, per se.


CLS 374/178
TXT By barrier layer sensing element (e.g., semiconductor junction):

    Subject matter under subclass 163 wherein the sensor is composed of
    semiconductive material having a potential barrier therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 512+ for temperature-responsive circuitry containing a
    nonlinear solid-state element.


CLS 374/179
TXT By thermoelectric potential generator (e.g., thermocouple):

    Subject matter 163 wherein the element produces a temperature-dependent
    potential as a result of physical contact between two materials having
    different thermoelectric potentials at the measurement location.

    (1)     Note.  These are usually of the thermocouple type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclasses 200+ for
    thermocouples or thermal batteries, per se.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclasses 33+ for a system
    including a thermal condition controlled generator or driving means
    therefor.


CLS 374/180
TXT Specimen is part of thermoelectric circuit: Subject matter under subclass
    179 including an electrical circuit path passing through the specimen as
    part of the thermoelectric potential generator.


CLS 374/181
TXT Reference junction compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 179 having a reference junction complementary
    to the measuring junction, and an arrangement to modify the output signal
    to eliminate the effect of temperature variation on the reference junction.


CLS 374/182
TXT Reference junction temperature control:
    Subject matter under subclass 179 having a reference junction complementary
    to the measuring junction, and an arrangement to maintain the reference
    junction at a constant temperature.


CLS 374/183
TXT By current modifying sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 163 wherein the sensor has a
    temperature-responsive variation in electrical impedance from which the
    temperature determination is obtained.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this and indented subclasses are circuitry
    arrangements not specifically provided for in subclasses 164-182.


CLS 374/184
TXT Reactive element (e.g., capacitive):
    Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein the temperature is sensed by a
    variation in the ratio of the voltage drop across the sensor to the
    quadrature current through the sensor.

    (1)     Note.  Systems having capacitive or inductive sensors are
    classified herein.


CLS 374/185
TXT Detail of resistive sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 183 including significant structure of a
    resistive sensing element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 25+ for resistance temperature
    sensors, per se.


CLS 374/186
TXT With specified recording arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 having structure for generating a
    permanent or semi-permanent record of the measured temperature.

    (1)     Note.  A temperature measuring device including only nominal
    recitation of a recorder will be classified according to the temperature
    measuring structure.

    (2)     Note.  The record may be a visible representation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, subclasses 33+ for recorders responsive to temperature.


CLS 374/187
TXT Mechanical (e.g., expansion or contraction of material):

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the quantitative temperature
    determination is given by a variation of force, position, or motion caused
    by a variation in a temperature-responsive mechanical property of a sensing
    material.

    (1)     Note.  Such mechanical properties include expansion or contraction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 516+ for expansion and contraction power
    plants.


CLS 374/188
TXT Having electrical indication:

    Subject matter under subclass 187 having electrical measurement of the
    mechanical variation to produce an electrical current for temperature
    determination.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163+,   for temperature determination by directly sensing a thermally
    variable electrical sensor parameter.


CLS 374/189
TXT Plural zones (e.g., indoor-outdoor):

    Subject matter under subclass 187 including plural distinct temperature
    measurements at distinct locations.

    (1)     Note.  The several indications of the measurements may be displayed
    at a single station.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein are coupled displays of indoor and outdoor
    temperature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110+,   for a single function of plural spaced temperatures.

    166+,   for similar subject matter utilizing an electrical or magnetic heat
    sensor.


CLS 374/190
TXT Indicating tube type:

    Subject matter under subclass 187 wherein the expansion of a sensing or
    indicating material is visible through a transparent tube.

    (1)     Note.  The tube or its mounting usually has a graduated scale to
    provide a numerical indication.

    (2)     Note.  Although the material is usually a liquid, use of a gas or a
    semisolid material is included herein.


CLS 374/191
TXT With optical element (e.g., magnifying):
    Subject matter under subclass 190 combined with a distinct arrangement for
    optically modifying the temperature indication.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193,    for an indicating tube itself shaped so as to form an optical
    element.


CLS 374/192
TXT With holder for shaking:

    Subject matter under subclass 190 having an arrangement to assist in
    returning an expanded portion of the sensing material back to a reference
    or storage position.

    (1)     Note.  The reference or storage position usually refers to an
    enlarged bulb at the sensing portion of the thermometer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 335.09 for whirling psychrometers
    (i.e., wet and dry bult thermometers mounted to be whirled on a support to
    cause wet bulb evaporation.


CLS 374/193
TXT Having specified cross-section:

    Subject matter under subclass 190 wherein the cross-section configuration
    of the transparent tube is particularly described.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes a transparent indicating tube shaped
    so as to form an optical element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191,    for an indicating tube thermometer having a distinct optical
    element.


CLS 374/194
TXT With support or housing:

    Subject matter under subclass 190 combined with a particular mounting or
    enclosing arrangement for the thermometer.

    (1)     Note.  Such structure having any additional function than support
    or housing for the thermometer is classified in subclasses 141+, above.


CLS 374/195
TXT With detail of motion transmitting mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 187 having significant detail of a mechanism
    for transmitting motion from a sensing element to an indicating element.

    (1)     Note.  The term "mechanism" requires at least two relatively moving
    elements.


CLS 374/196
TXT One sensing element within another:

    Subject matter under subclass 187 having a compound sensing element with
    two distinct mechanical sensors one of which surrounds the other.


CLS 374/197
TXT With compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 187 having an arrangement to vary the
    indication in response to a condition other than the measured temperature.


CLS 374/198
TXT With adjustment:

    Subject matter under subclass 187 having an arrangement to modify the
    temperature indication.

    (1)     Note.  Such adjustment is often performed manually.


CLS 374/199
TXT Mechanical loading of sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 198 including adjustment of the stress or
    tension applied to the temperature sensing element.


CLS 374/200
TXT Adjustment of limit stop:

    Subject matter under subclass 198 including an adjustable element for
    limiting thermally caused motion of the temperature sensor.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are screw-threaded stop elements.


CLS 374/201
TXT Expanding fluid:

    Subject matter under subclass 187 using the temperature responsive
    expansion or contraction of a confined fluid to determine temperature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    190+,   for an indicating tube-type thermometer with an expanding fluid
    therein.


CLS 374/202
TXT With distinct pressure transmitting fluid:
    Subject matter under subclass 201 having a solid force transmitting element
    applying pressure on a second confined fluid in response to the pressure of
    the sensing fluid, which second fluid pressure is measured to provide the
    temperature determination.


CLS 374/203
TXT Bourdon tube or bellows:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the fluid is confined to an
    elastic tube having either (1) a flexible corrugated wall, or (2) a curved
    or twisted configuration such that an increase of fluid pressure tends to
    straighten the tube.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 729.1 for pressure measurement by a
    bellow; and subclass 732 for pressure measurement by a Bourdon tube.


CLS 374/204
TXT Multiple distinct sensing elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 187 having a sensor including two or more
    separate elements cooperating to increase the mechanical variation causing
    indication.

    (1)     Note.  The separate sensing elements are located at a single
    location to increase the effect of temperature change.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110+,   for a single function of plural sensors in different locations.

    189,    for a mechanical thermometer indicating the temperatures at
    different locations.


CLS 374/205
TXT Compound sensing element (e.g., bimetallic):

    Subject matter under subclass 187 having a solid sensing element composed
    of plural materials joined together along a surface.


CLS 374/206
TXT Coil:

    Subject matter under subclass 205 in which the sensing element is
    continuously curved so as to form a spiral having plural turns.


CLS 374/207
TXT Helix:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 wherein the spiral element extends in the
    direction of it's axis of symmetry.


CLS 374/208
TXT HOUSING, SUPPORT, OR ADJUNCT:

    Subject matter particularly adapted for enclosing, protecting, holding or
    otherwise perfecting subject matter classified in this class, but not of
    itself performing a measurement or test, and not elsewhere classified.

    (1)     Note.  A thermal measuring or testing arrangement including a
    housing, support or adjunct is classified in the appropriate preceding
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12+,    for detail of sample holder in a differential thermal analysis
    arrangement.

    38,     for calorimetric heat value ignition chamber detail.

    192,    for detail of a holder combined with thermometer.

    194,    for detail of a support or housing combined with thermometer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, for an instrument casing for a measuring
    device, in general.


CLS 374/209
TXT Removable probe cover:

    Subject matter under subclass 208 drawn to an element particularly adapted
    to fit over a temperature sensor during measurement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158,    for the combination of a cover and a thermometer or thermometer
    probe.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 306 for a thermometer
    storage package.


CLS 374/210
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition not classifiable in any of the
    preceding subclasses.


CLS 375/
TTL PULSE OR DIGITAL  COMMUNICATIONS

CLS 375/
TXT

    I.      GLOSSARY

    PULSE
    A variation of a voltage or current normally having a constant value.  This
    variation is characterized by a rise and a decay approaching infinitesimal
    duration.

    DIGITAL
    Of or pertaining to the class of devices or circuits in which the output
    varies in discrete steps (i.e., pulses or ``on-off" operation).

    COMMUNICATIONS
    The transmission of information from one point to another.

    II.     GENERAL STATEMENT OF THE CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    A.      This is the generic class for pulse or digital communication
    systems using electrical or electromagnetic signals.  Such communication
    includes transmitting an intelligence bearing signal from one point to
    another in the form of discrete variations in some parameter of the
    electrical or electromagnetic signal.

    (1)     Note.  Telegraph and Teletype systems which include transmission or
    reception of a carrier are classified in Class 375 except for those systems
    specifically provided for in Class 178, such as spark gap in subclass 116
    and coherer in subclass 117.

    (2)     Note.  A carrier which is modulated by a continuously variable
    (analog) signal is classified in Class 455; however, simultaneous
    transmission of independent analog and pulse or digital information bearing
    signals is classified in Class 370.  A device which is convertible from
    analog to pulse or digital may have a time related parameter (e.g., pulse
    width, or repetition rate) continuously variable and be classified herein.

    (3)     Note.  Light Wave Communication is classified in Class 359,
    subclasses 109+ regardless of the type of modulation.

    (4)     Note.  Duplexing or Multiplexing systems which utilize pulse or
    digital information signals are classified in Class 370, Multiplex
    Communications.

    (5)     Note.  Code converters which may be utilized in a pulse or digital
    communication system, are classified in Class 341, Coded Data Generation or
    Conversion.

    (6)     Note.  Addressing of a particular pulse receiver is classified in
    Class 340, subclass 825.52.

    B.      The combination of the subject matter of this class (375) and
    another art environment is generally classified with the other art
    environment where that environment is significant by virtue of the claimed
    relationship. For example:

    Error checking systems, Class 371.

    Electroacoustic geophysical systems, Class 367, subclasses 14+.

    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, Class 360, subclasses
    39+.

    Radar systems, Class 342, subclasses 5+.

    Directive systems, Class 342, subclasses 350+.

    Telemetering systems, Class 340, subclasses 870.01+.

    Television, Class 348, subclasses 471+.

    (1)     Note. Significantly claimed pulse or digital communication handling
    techniques in combination with the subject matter of Class 364, Electrical
    Computers and Data Processing Systems, or Class 395, Information Processing
    System Organization, are classified in Class 364 or Class 395.

    (2)     Note.  Remote control of a transmitter and/or receiver is
    classified herein; however, the remote control of a device external to a
    communication system is classified in Class 340, Communications,
    Electrical, subclasses 825+ (e.g., model airplane).  Remote control of an
    external device by light wave communications is classified in Class 359,
    subclasses 142+.

    C.      Electrical circuits or devices which may use pulse or digital
    handling techniques, but are not unique to communications, are classified
    in the appropriate classes.  For example:

    Pulse characteristic discriminating, comparing or selecting, Class 327,
    subclasses 1+.

    Pulse responsive selective systems, Class 340, subclasses 825.57+.

    Pulse demodulation, per se, Class 329, subclasses 311+.

    Pulse modulation converters to FM, Class 332, subclass 183.

    Pulse modulation, per se, Class 332, subclass 183.

    Pulse generating oscillator Class 331.

    Pulse counting circuits and systems, Class 377.

    Pulse counters and dividers, Class 377.

    Pulse shaping or converting, Class 327, subclasses 100+.

    Digital comparator systems, Class 340, subclasses 146.2.

    Data conversion, Class 235.

    III.    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, appropriate subclasses for noncarrier wave telegraphic
    signalling.

    181,    Acoustics, is the generic class for inventions directed to
    mechanical sound wave radiations, transmission, or reception.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ provide for photoelectric cell
    circuits.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 560+ for pulse
    controlled servo systems.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 76.12+ for analysis
    of complex waves; subclasses 76.39+ for measuring the repetition rate of
    pulses; and subclasses 76.77+ for the phase comparison of pulse voltages.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 1+ for pulse characteristic discriminating or selecting
    and subclasses 100+ for miscellaneous pulse characteristic control.

    329,    Demodulators, subclasses 311+ for  pulse demodulators, per se.

    331,    Oscillators, appropriate subclasses for pulsed or pulse generating
    oscillators.

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 106+ for pulse modulators, per se.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses, 825.57+ for pulse
    responsive selective signalling systems; subclasses 870.18+ for pulse
    modulated telemetering systems.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, for code transmission,
    generation or conversion.

    348,    Television, subclasses 488+ for color television systems utilizing
    pulse modulation and having receivers to detect same; subclasses 384+ for
    bandwidth reduction systems wherein the received signal may be impulse
    form; subclasses 725+ for noncolor television receivers.

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 426+ and 443+ in facsimile systems for
    circuitry peculiar to the receiver.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 39+
    for general processing of digital signals in a magnetic recording system.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 166+ for
    plural pulse responsive relays sequentially operated.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 189.01+ and
    230.01+ for a read/write or addressing circuit which uses pulse signals in
    a static storage system.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    appropriate subclass for the communication of information in the form of
    traveling stresses in an elastic medium.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 320, 335, 342, 441, and 479
    for code division multiplexing with spread spectrum techniques.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery,
    appropriate subclass for generic error checking of digital devices.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, for pulse counters and dividers.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization,200.01+ for data
    transferring among multiple computer systems, and subclasses 821+ for
    Input/Output data processing involving peripherals and digital data
    processing systems.


CLS 375/200
TXT SPREAD SPECTRUM:

    Subject matter under the class definition utilizing a data modulated signal
    which has its energy spread over a transmitted bandwidth which is much
    greater than the bandwidth or rate of information being sent.

    (1)     Note.  Three general types of modulation are in the spread spectrum
    variety:

    A.      Modulation of a carrier by a data modulation signal whose bit rate
    is much higher than the maximum possible repetition rate of the pulses or
    discrete steps.  Such systems are called ``direct sequence" modulated
    systems.

    B.      Carrier frequency shifting in discrete increments in a pattern
    dictated by a code sequence.  These are called ``frequency hoppers." The
    transmitter jumps from frequency to frequency within some predetermined
    set; the order of frequency usage is determined by a code sequence.

    C.      Pulse-FM or ``chirp" modulation in which a carrier is swept over a
    wideband during a given pulse interval.

    (2)     Note.  Wideband FM is not classified here but is classified in
    subclass 88 and Class 455, subclasses 42+.

    (3)     Note.  Closely akin to the frequency hoppers are ``time hopping"
    and ``time-frequency hopping" systems whose chief distinguishing feature is
    that their time of transmission (usually of low duty cycle and short
    duration) is governed by a code sequence.  In time-frequency hoppers it
    follows that the code sequence determines both the transmitted frequency
    and the time of transmission.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254     and 285, for noise or distortion reduction which may include
    patents with subject matter similar to the above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 320, 335, 342, 441, and 479
    for code division multiplexing with spread spectrum techniques.


CLS 375/201
TXT Hybrid forms:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the spread spectrum signals are
    made up of at least two different spread spectrum techniques such as (a)
    simultaneous frequency hopping and direct sequence modulations, (b)
    simultaneous time and frequency hopping, or (c) simultaneous time-hopping
    and direct sequence modulations.


CLS 375/202
TXT Frequency hopping:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 including a system in which the wideband
    signal is generated by jumping from one frequency to another over a large
    number of frequency choices.


CLS 375/203
TXT Time hopping:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 including a system wherein waveforms are
    transmitted at times which are selected from among a plurality of time
    slots, with the selection of time slot being pseudo-random if desired.


CLS 375/204
TXT Pulsed FM or chirp:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 including a signal format in which a
    pulsed carrier is transmitted and is varied in frequency in a known way
    during the transmission.


CLS 375/206
TXT Direct sequence:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 including a form of modulation wherein a
    code sequence is used to directly modulate a carrier, usually by
    phase-shift keying.


CLS 375/207
TXT Matched filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 including a filtering means for passing a
    specific signal with minimum loss while passing minimum noise.


CLS 375/208
TXT Pseudo-noise correlation:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 including a time domain analyzing means
    for detecting a periodic information signal buried in pseudo-noise.


CLS 375/209
TXT Auto-correlation:

    Subject matter under subclass 208 including a means for measuring the
    similarity between a signal and a phase-shifted replica of itself.



CLS 375/210
TXT Cross-correlation:

    Subject matter under subclass 208 including a means for measuring the
    similarity between two different signals.


CLS 375/211
TXT REPEATERS:

    Subject matter under the class definition including apparatus wherein a
    pulse signal is received and retransmitted usually at a higher energy level.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 70+ for telegraph repeaters.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 279 and 293 for wireless and
    wired duplex repeaters respectively, subclass 315 for a wireless multiplex
    repeater, subclass 492 for a frequency division multiplexing repeater, and
    subclass 501 for a time division multiplexing repeater.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 338+ for telephone repeaters.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 7+ for modulated carrier wave
    repeaters.


CLS 375/212
TXT Ring or star configuration:

    Subject matter under subclass 211 wherein the repeaters are formed in a
    loop or a star communication link.


CLS 375/213
TXT Testing:

    Subject matter under subclass 211 for testing a pulse or digital signal
    repeater.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224+,   for other testing of pulse or digital communication equipment.


CLS 375/214
TXT Including pulse regeneration or conversion:

    Subject matter under subclass 211 including conversion (e.g., multilevel to
    binary or parallel-serial-parallel) or where signal pulses are regenerated
    as regards shape and instant of occurrence.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 70+ for telegraph repeaters.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 165+ for miscellaneous rectangular or clock waveform
    regeneration and subclass 317 for distortion by limiting or clipping.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, appropriate subclasses for
    code converters, per se.


CLS 375/215
TXT Phase locked loop:

    Subject matter under subclass 214 having a closed-loop electronic
    servomechanism the output of which locks onto and tracks a received clock
    signal to provide the frequency and phase aligned receiver clock.


CLS 375/216
TXT APPARATUS CONVERTIBLE TO ANALOG:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the transmission system,
    transmitter, or receiver may be altered to alternately send either digital
    or analog information.

    (1)     Note.  Systems or elements that simultaneously convey analog and
    digital information are not in this class but in Class 370, Multiplex.
    Systems wherein the digital data is the address signal for the analog
    message are not here but in Class 455, subclasses 31.1+; and Class 340,
    subclasses 825+.


CLS 375/217
TXT Muting circuit and squelch:

    Subject matter under subclass 216 including a means to automatically quiet
    the receiver by reducing its gain in response to a specified characteristic
    of the input digital signal.


CLS 375/218
TXT EARTH OR WATER MEDIUM:

    Subject matter under the class definition where the ground or water
    supplies the natural medium for the transmission of pulse or digital
    signals.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass has a specific
    underground or underwater structure at each station.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    343,    Communications, Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 719 for antenna
    systems buried underground or submerged underwater.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 141+, for signal transducers under water type.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 40 for analog communications via an
    earth or water medium.


CLS 375/219
TXT TRANSCEIVERS:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which a transmitter and a
    receiver are at the same location and transmit and receive over the same
    medium to-and-from the same remote station.

    (1)     Note.  The simultaneous operation of a transmitter and receiver is
    a duplex operation and is classified in Class 370, Multiplex
    Communications, subclasses 276+.

    (2)     Note. This and indented subclasses accept nominal recitation of a
    digital data processing system or function in combination with transceivers
    and data sets. Significant digital data pre- and postprocessing in
    combination with transceivers are classified in Class 395.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization,  subclasses 821 through
    894 for transferring data from one or more peripherals to one or more
    computers or digital data processing systems for the latter to process,
    store, or further transfer or for transferring data from the computers or
    digital data processing systems to the peripheral.of information processing
    system.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 73+ for analog carrier wave
    transceivers.


CLS 375/220
TXT Transmission interface between two stations or terminals:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 including an interfacing means for
    communicating between two stations.


CLS 375/221
TXT Loopback mode:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 wherein the transceiver or transceiver's
    component is compared by connecting a received path to a transmitted path
    and monitoring the output as an indication of the condition of the
    transceiver or transceiver's component.


CLS 375/222
TXT Modems (data sets):

    Subject matter under subclass 219 including a device that transform a
    characteristic of a typical two level pulse or digital data signal into
    another form suitable for transmission over a transmission circuit.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a modem is a device which converts two level
    pulse signals into two tone signals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257+,   for cable systems and components.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    329,    Demodulators, for demodulators only.

    332,    Modulators, for modulators, per se.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 90.01+ where data is sent
    over lines specifically claimed as telephone lines.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 200.3+ for
    data transferring among multiple computer or digital data processing
    systems, and subclasses 821 through 894 for transferring data from one or
    more peripherals to one or more computers or digital data processing
    systems for the latter to process, store, or further transfer or for
    transferring data from the computers or digital data processing systems to
    the peripherals.


CLS 375/223
TXT Angle modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 222 in which the transmitted characteristic
    or pulses to be transmitted vary the phase  or frequency  of a carrier wave.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211,    for angle modulated pulse repeaters.

    271+,   for pulse modulated carrier systems which are angle modulated.

    302+,   for angle modulated carrier pulse transmitters.

    322+,   for angle modulated carrier pulse receivers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    182 and 183 for an angle modulated light wave transmitter.


CLS 375/224
TXT TESTING:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which at least part of the
    system is tested.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231,    for calibration of automatic equalizers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, for electrical testing or
    measuring in general.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 486 for
    computer based electrical measuring and testing of pulses.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 241+ for diagnostic testing of
    a multiplexing system.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 90.01+ testing of telephone
    systems, some of which may be digital.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 67.1+ for modulated carrier system
    testing; subclasses 115+ for transmitter testing; and subclasses 226.1+ for
    receiver testing.


CLS 375/225
TXT Data rate:

    Subject matter under subclass 224 including a means for measuring the speed
    at which digital information is transmitted or received.


CLS 375/226
TXT Phase error or phase jitter:

    Subject matter under subclass 224 including a means for measuring abrupt,
    spurious variations in the phase of the frequency modulation of successive
    pulses referenced to the phase of a continuous oscillator.


CLS 375/227
TXT Signal noise:

    Subject matter under subclass 224 including a means for measuring a
    signal-to-noise ratio.


CLS 375/228
TXT With indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 224 including a means for displaying to a
    human observer digital information concerning the system characteristics
    being measured.


CLS 375/229
TXT EQUALIZERS:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a delay line tapped at
    the pulse or discrete step interval; a set of adjustable attenuators
    connected to each tap, except for a main tap, which attenuators can be used
    to multiply remaining tap signals by any number between 1 and minus 1; and
    a summing network.

    (1)     Note.  Equalizers, per se, if they include a means to perform
    mathematical calculations, are found in Class 364, subclasses 724.011+ and
    825.

    (2)     Note.  Equalizers, per se, are classified in Class 333.  See
    ``SEARCH CLASS" below.  To be classified here, there must be a pulse or
    digital communication apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 18 for automatically
    controlled systems with control of equalizers or delay network; and
    subclass 28 for coupling networks with equalizer.


CLS 375/230
TXT Automatic:

    Subject matter under subclass 229 having means responsive to the received
    pulses for adjustment of the attenuators (i.e., nonmanual).


CLS 375/231
TXT Training period or initial set up:

    Subject matter under subclass 230 in which there is an initial adjustment
    of the automatic equalizer prior to use or where a test pulse is sent
    through the communication channel to determine what the equalizer settings
    should be.


CLS 375/232
TXT Adaptive:

    Subject matter under subclass 230 where the equalizer tap adjustment is
    automatically changed for optimum equalization using the normal message
    data signals.

    (1)     Note.  The term ``normal message data signals" excludes special
    calibration signals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230,    for automatic equalizers using special calibration signals.


CLS 375/233
TXT Decision feedback equalizer:

    Subject matter under subclass 232 wherein the equalized signal is the sum
    of the outputs of the forward and feedback part of the equalizer.

    (1)     Note.  The forward part is a linear transversal equalizer.
    Decisions made on the equalized signal are fed back via a second
    transversal filter (i.e., feeback part).

    (2)     Note.  The DFE generally eliminates the intersymbol
    interference(ISI).


CLS 375/234
TXT Fractionally spaced equalizer:

    Subject matter under subclass 232 wherein the delay line taps of the
    equalizer are spaced at an interval T which is less than, or a fraction of
    the symbol interval.

    (1)     Note.  The cascaded equalizers combined with a fractionally spaced
    equalizer claimed is classified herein.


CLS 375/235
TXT Quadrature channels:

    Subject matter under subclass 232 in which the received signal is processed
    to provide two components, one which differs in phase from the other by 90
    degrees.


CLS 375/236
TXT Accumulator or up/down counter:

    Subject matter under subclass 232 including either a device which stores a
    number and which, on receipt of another number, adds the two and stores the
    sum, or a counter with the capability of counting in an ascending or
    descending order.


CLS 375/237
TXT PULSE NUMBER MODULATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition where the number of pulses in a
    group conveys the information to be transmitted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 1+ for miscellaneous pulse characteristic
    discriminating and subclasses 100+ for  miscellaneous pulse charateristic
    modifying.

    329,    Demodulators, subclasses 311+ for pulse demodulation.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclass for multiplexing
    systems using pulse modulation.


CLS 375/238
TXT PULSE WIDTH MODULATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which the width of a
    transmitted pulse conveys the transmitted information.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 31+ for miscellaneous circuits providing pulse width or
    spacing discriminating and subclasses 172+ for miscellaneous rectangular or
    pulse waveform width control.

    329,    Demodulators, subclass 312 for pulse width demodulators.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclass 205 for a multiplexing system
    using both pulse width and pulse position modulations, and subclass 212 for
    a multiplexing system using pulse width modulation.


CLS 375/239
TXT PULSE POSITION, FREQUENCY, OR SPACING MODULATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which the information to be
    transmitted is conveyed by means of the relative position of the pulses in
    a series of transmitted pulses, the time or spacing between pulses, or the
    repetition rate (frequency) of the pulses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 1+ for miscellaneous pulse characteristic
    discriminating and subclasses 100+ for miscellaneous pulse characteristic
    modifying.

    329,    Demodulators, subclasses 313+ for pulse rate or position
    demodulators.

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 112+ for a pulse position, frequency or
    spacing modulator, per se.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclass 205 for a multiplexing system
    using both pulse width and pulse position modulations, and subclass 213 for
    a multiplexing system using pulse position modulation.


CLS 375/240
TXT BANDWIDTH REDUCTION OR EXPANSION:

    Subject matter under the class definition where the width of the frequency
    spectrum of a pulse or digital signal is either reduced or expanded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   for spread spectrum communications.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    704,    Data Processing:  Speech Signal Processing, Linguistics, Language
    Translation, and Audio Compression/Decompression, subclasses 500+ for
    bandwidth reduction or expansion of audio signals.


CLS 375/241
TXT Pulse code modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 240 wherein the pulse or digital signal to be
    transmitted is sampled or compared and then converted into a digital pulse
    train which represents the amplitude of the sampled signal at the instant
    of sampling or comparison, and this digital pulse train is transmitted so
    it may be reconverted into a duplicate of the original signal at a receiver.


CLS 375/242
TXT PULSE CODE MODULATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which a signal to be
    transmitted is sampled or compared and then converted into a digital pulse
    train which represents the amplitude of the sampled signal at the instant
    of sampling or comparison, and this digital pulse train is transmitted so
    it may be reconverted into a duplicate of the original signal at a receiver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 106+ for a pulse modulator, per se.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, for code converters to convert
    from analog or digital information appropriate subclasses to pulse code.

    348,    Television, subclasses 488+ for pulse code modulation television
    transmission.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclass for pulse code type
    modulation.


CLS 375/243
TXT Correcting or reducing quantizing errors:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 in which there is a correction made for
    errors or inaccuracies in the encoding of the analog signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254,    for pulse code modulation noise reduction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, for error
    correction in general.


CLS 375/244
TXT Differential:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 where the difference between the actual
    amplitude and a predicted, or locally decoded, value of the amplitude is
    encoded and transmitted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240+,   for predictive bandwidth compression of a digital signal.


CLS 375/245
TXT Quantizer or inverse quantizer:

    Subject matter under subclass 244 including a means for converting the
    instantaneous amplitude of the transmitted signal to the nearest of a fixed
    number of discrete amplitude levels, or reverse quantizer.


CLS 375/246
TXT Length coding:

    Subject matter under subclass 244 wherein words of the converted digital
    signal are in a bit length.


CLS 375/247
TXT Single bit (delta):

    Subject matter under subclass 244 where there is transmitted at most one
    pulse for each sample of the analog signal.

    (1)     Note.  The pulses transmitted represent the variations of the
    analog signal and not their real amplitude.

    (2)     Note.  Usually a pulse is transmitted only when the analog signal
    has changed by an incremental amount.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclass 77 for delta code
    converters and subclass 143 for analog to or from delta code conversion.


CLS 375/248
TXT Nonamplitude delta (area, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 247 where whether a pulse is sent or not is
    determined by a criteria other than the amplitude difference of the sampled
    and locally decoded waveforms.


CLS 375/249
TXT Compand (overload prevention):

    Subject matter under subclass 247 in which the size of the incremental
    amount is variable over a wide dynamic range in response to predetermined
    patterns in the transmitted series of digital bits or ``delta bits" (delta
    modulation pulse train).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 14 for companders,
    per se.


CLS 375/250
TXT Redundancy removal:

    Subject matter under subclass 249 where the delta modulation pulse train is
    replaced, for transmission purposes, by a derived pulse train containing
    fewer pulses, and converting the derived pulse train back to the delta
    modulation pulse train at the receiver.


CLS 375/251
TXT Syllabic:

    Subject matter under subclass 249 in which the companding is instantaneous.

    (1)     Note.  There are two types of syllabic adaptative modulators
    namely, the analog syllabic adaptative modulators and the digital syllabic
    adaptative modulators depending on whether the gain control signal of the
    amplifier is derived from the input analog input signal or from the coded
    digital output signal.  The gain control signal may be derived from the
    input analog signal using a simple envelope detector.  Similarly, the gain
    control signal may be derived from the digital output by means of a
    syllabic filter.  Such syllabic adaptative modulators will provide a
    continuous adaptation of the gain of the amplifier so as to vary the
    amplitude of the steps of the integrator accordingly. The instantaneous
    adaptation or companding is derived from the digital output signal on a
    short time basis.


CLS 375/252
TXT Plural feedback loops:

    Subject matter under subclass 247 having more than one signal path which
    feeds part of an output signal back to its input.


CLS 375/253
TXT Length coding:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 wherein words of the converted digital
    signal are in a bit length.


CLS 375/254
TXT Noise or distortion reduction:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 where there is provision for removing or
    correcting for the effects of extraneous pulses or distortion.


CLS 375/256
TXT PULSE TRANSMISSION VIA RADIATED BASEBAND:

    Subject matter under the class definition where pulses are radiated into
    free space but are not modulated onto a carrier wave.


CLS 375/257
TXT CABLE SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS:

    Subject matter under the class definition where pulses are transmitted on a
    cable or transmission line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222+,   for modems which can be used with a cable system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for multiplex
    communication systems using cables.


CLS 375/258
TXT Transformer coupling:

    Subject matter under subclass 257 including an inductive coupling which is
    used between the driver and the transmission line or between the receiver
    and the transmission line for isolating the d.c. value.


CLS 375/259
TXT SYSTEMS USING ALTERNATING OR PULSATING CURRENT:

    Subject matter under the class definition using alternating, sine, or
    similar wave currents or using pulsating currents in the transmission and
    reception of pulse or digital communications.

    (1)     Note.  A system includes both a transmitter and a receiver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 66.1+ for telegraph systems using
    alternating current.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Devices, Circuits, and Systems,
    subclasses 1+ for miscellaneous pulse characteristic discriminating and
    subclasses 100+ for miscellaneous pulse characteristic modifying.


CLS 375/260
TXT Plural channels for transmission of a single pulse train:

    Subject matter under subclass 259 in which more than one transmission
    channel is utilized to convey one pulse train.

    (1)     Note.  A channel is a normally independent transmission path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 59 for single analog signal
    transmission via plural carrier waves.


CLS 375/261
TXT Quadrature amplitude modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 260 in which the transmitted signal can be
    represented as the superposition of two modulated signals, each being
    obtained by pulse amplitude modulation of a signal sequence on a sinusoidal
    carrier, the two signal sequences being generated in synchronization at the
    same rate, and the two carriers being of the same frequency but 90 degrees
    apart in phase.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    298,    for quadrature amplitude modulation transmitters.

    316+,   for quadrature amplitude modulation receivers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclass 206 for multiplex communications
    using quadrature carriers.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 60 for analog transmission via plural
    phases of one carrier.


CLS 375/262
TXT Maximum likelihood decoder or viterbi decoder:

    Subject matter under subclass 261 for choosing an estimate code word for
    each possible received sequence of a demodulation output.

    (1)     Note.  This method is generally used for decoding the convolution
    codes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclasses
    43.1+, for digital data error correction having a convolution code.


CLS 375/263
TXT Partial response:

    Subject matter under subclass 261 where the binary data rate is above the
    Nyquist rate (equal to twice the transmission bandwidth, and commonly
    regarded as the upper limit on the rate of binary data transmission)
    thereby dispersing the individual input pulses over more than one
    signalling interval.


CLS 375/264
TXT Multilevel:

    Subject matter under subclass 261 in which the transmitted pulse waveform
    has more than two discrete amplitude levels.


CLS 375/265
TXT Trellis encoder or Trellis decoder:

    Subject matter under subclass 261 for improving the noise immunity of
    digital transmission system without bandwidth expansion or reduction of
    data rate.

    (1)     Note.  The encoder employs redundant nonbinary modulation in
    combination with a finite-state encoder which governs the selection of
    modulation signals to generate the coded signal sequence.


CLS 375/267
TXT Diversity:

    Subject matter under subclass 260 where the two or more channels carrying
    the same message go from the transmitter to the receiver via different
    paths, frequencies, or times of transmission.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 132+ for diversity receivers and
    subclasses 504+ for fading elimination in a diversity system.


CLS 375/268
TXT Amplitude modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 259 in which the pulses are multiplied with a
    carrier wave so as to produce and transmit at least one sideband equal to
    the carrier plus or minus the baseband.

    (1)     Note.  In amplitude modulation the amplitude of the carrier wave
    does not change.  The carrier wave can represent the average amplitude of
    the envelope and, since this is the same irrespective of the presence or
    absence of modulation, the carrier wave transmits no information.  The
    information is carried by the sidebands.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    332,    Modulators, for amplitude modulation and pulse modulators.

    455,    Telecommunications, for nonpulse amplitude modulation systems,
    transmitters, and receivers.


CLS 375/269
TXT With phase or frequency shift keying:

    Subject matter under subclass 268 wherein the phase or frequency of the
    amplitude modulated carrier wave is shifted between at least two phases or
    frequencies.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273,    for phase shift keying with additional frequency shift keying.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 120+ for a frequency modulator incorporating
    amplitude modulation and subclass 145 for a phase modulator incorporating
    amplitude modulation.


CLS 375/270
TXT Vestigial or single sideband or suppressed carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 268 where less than two complete sidebands
    are transmitted, with or without the carrier or two complete sidebands are
    transmitted without the carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277,    for vestigial, or single sideband-frequency shift keyed systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 167+ or 170+ for a suppressed carrier type
    or a single or vestigial sideband type amplitude modulator, per se.

    348,    Television, appropriate subclasses for television systems and
    transmitters that use vestigial sidebands.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 46 and 47 for suppressed carrier and
    single or vestigial sideband systems; subclass 109 for amplitude modulation
    transmitters; and subclasses 202 through 204 for amplitude modulated
    receivers.


CLS 375/271
TXT Angle modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 259 where the digital information or pulses
    to be transmitted vary the phase angle or frequency of a carrier wave.

    (1)     Note.  In angle modulation, the total energy content of the output
    spectrum is generally kept constant.  The amplitude of the carrier
    component depends on the modulation index.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211,    for angle modulated repeaters.

    223,    for angle modulated carrier pulse transceivers.

    302,    for angle modulated carrier pulse transmitters.

    322,    for angle modulated carrier pulse receivers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    329,    Demodulators, subclasses 315+ for frequency demodulators,
    subclasses 300+ for a frequency shift keying demodulator, per se, and
    subclasses 304+ for a phase shift keying demodulator, per se.

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 117+ for a frequency modulator, per se, and
    subclasses 144+ for a phase modulator, per se.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    182 and 183 for an angle modulated light wave transmitter.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclass 215 for phase modulation, and
    subclass 483 for angle modulation.


CLS 375/272
TXT Frequency shift keying:

    Subject matter under subclass 271 where the instantaneous frequency of the
    pulse or digitally modulated carrier wave is shifted (generally between two
    frequencies) according to the presence or absence of a pulse, or a mark or
    space, being transmitted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211,    for frequency shift keyed repeaters.

    223,    for frequency shift keyed transceivers.

    303+,   for frequency shift keyed transmitters.

    334+,   for frequency shift keyed receivers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    182 for a frequency modulated light wave transmitter.


CLS 375/273
TXT Combined with phase shift keying:

    Subject matter under subclass 272 where phase shift keying is combined with
    the frequency shift keying.


CLS 375/274
TXT Minimum shift keying:

    Subject matter under subclass 272 wherein the difference between the mark
    and space frequencies is at the minimum value still presenting
    orthogonality (zero cross-correlation) between the mark and space signals
    and thus providing for efficient detection of the data.

    (1)     Note.  Continuous phase is maintained at the mark-space transitions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305,    for minimum shift keyed transmitter.

    336,    for minimum shift keyed receivers.


CLS 375/275
TXT More than two frequencies:

    Subject matter under subclass 272 in which the carrier wave is shifted
    between more than two frequencies.


CLS 375/276
TXT One cycle or less per bit:

    Subject matter under subclass 272 in which the carrier frequency is shifted
    after one or less cycle of the carrier has been transmitted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    274     and 336, for minimum shift keying.

    240,    for band width conservation of a digital signal.


CLS 375/277
TXT Vestigial or single sideband, or suppressed carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 272 wherein one complete sideband, with or
    without the carrier wave and with or without the complimentary sideband, is
    utilized.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270,    for vestigial or single sideband, or suppressed carrier pulse
    amplitude modulated carrier systems.


CLS 375/278
TXT Antinoise or distortion:

    Subject matter under subclass 272 with provision for correction or
    reduction of distortion or for removing or correcting for the effects of
    extraneous pulses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284+,   for antinoise or distortion in a phase shift keying system.

    285,    for antinoise or distortion in a pulse modulated carrier system.

    313,    for key click prevention in a keying circuit.

    346+,   for antinoise or distortion in pulse modulated carrier wave
    receivers.


CLS 375/279
TXT Phase shift keying:

    Subject matter under subclass 271 wherein the instantaneous phase of the
    carrier wave departs from a reference phase in accordance with the
    transmission of pulses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223,    for phase shift keyed transceivers.

    273,    for phase shift keyed combined with frequency shift keyed systems.

    308,    for phase shift keyed transmitter.

    329+,   for phase shift keyed receivers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    183 for a phase modulated light wave transmitter.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 23 for phase shift keyed repeaters.


CLS 375/280
TXT More than two phases:

    Subject matter under subclass 279 in which the phase of the carrier wave is
    shifted between three or more phases.


CLS 375/281
TXT Quaternary:

    Subject matter under subclass 280 where the phases are 90 degrees apart.


CLS 375/282
TXT Biphase (manchester codes):

    Subject matter under subclass 279 where the carrier is an elementary
    alternating current signal having for each data bit a zero crossing in the
    same direction at the beginning of each bit and also at the end of each
    bit, a constant duration, a zero crossing only once intermediate the
    beginning and the end of each bit, the intermediate zero crossing
    representing one of the two signalling conditions when occurring before the
    middle of the data bit and the other of the two signalling conditions when
    occurring after the middle of the data bit.


CLS 375/283
TXT Differential phase shift keying (diphase):

    Subject matter under subclass 279 where the reference phase is the phase
    used to transmit the previous data pulse.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244,    for differential pulse code modulation.

    330,    for differential phase shift keyed receivers.


CLS 375/284
TXT Antinoise or distortion:

    Subject matter under subclass 279 where there is provision for correction
    or reduction of the effects of extraneous pulses or of distortion of the
    wave shape of the transmitted signals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278,    for antinoise or distortion in a frequency shift keyed system.

    285,    for antinoise or distortion in pulse modulated carrier systems in
    general.

    313,    for key click prevention in a pulse modulated carrier transmitter.

    346+,   for pulse modulated carrier wave receivers with antinoise or
    antidistortion provisions.

    353,    for transmitter/receiver feedback compensation in a repeater.


CLS 375/285
TXT Antinoise or distortion:

    Subject matter under subclass 259 with provision for correction or
    reduction of distortion of the wave shape of the carrier wave or for the
    correction or reduction of the effects of extraneous pulses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    267,    for pulse modulated carrier wave systems with diversity.

    278,    for frequency shift keyed systems with antinoise or antidistortion.

    284,    for phase shift keyed systems with antinoise or antidistortion.

    313,    for transmitters with key click prevention.

    346,    for receivers with interference or noise reduction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 28 for passive
    equalizers; and subclasses 165 through 212 for filters, per se.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses
    724.19+ and 825 for filters and equalizers which perform mathematical
    functions during operation.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 63+ for noise reduction systems; and
    subclasses 296+ for noise reducing receivers.


CLS 375/286
TXT MULTILEVEL:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which the transmitted pulse
    waveform has more than two discrete amplitude levels.


CLS 375/287
TXT With threshold level:

    Subject matter under subclass 286 wherein the received or transmitted
    signal is compared with a reference voltage to determine the discrete
    amplitude level.


CLS 375/288
TXT Transmission line:

    Subject matter under subclass 286 including one or more insulated
    conductors arranged to transmit the pulse waveform from one locality to
    another.


CLS 375/289
TXT Bipolar signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 286 wherein the transmitted pulse waveform
    has two level-signaling.


CLS 375/290
TXT Partial response:

    Subject matter under subclass 286 where the binary data rate is above the
    Nyquist rate (equal to twice the transmission bandwidth, and commonly
    regarded as the upper limit on the rate of binary data transmission)
    thereby dispersing the individual input pulses over more than one
    signalling interval.


CLS 375/291
TXT Duobinary:

    Subject matter under subclass 290 wherein the binary data rate is at half
    the baud rate (w=p/T).

    (1)     Note.  The duobinary signaling is generally used for controlling
    the intersymbol interference (ISI).


CLS 375/292
TXT Disparity reduction:

    Subject matter under subclass 286 where the average transmitted amplitude
    level for a predetermined group of bits is reduced as far as possible in
    attempting to reduce d.c. components.


CLS 375/293
TXT Synchronized:

    Subject matter under subclass 286 in which the transmitter (coder) and
    receiver (decoder) operate in predetermined timed relationship.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    354+,   for synchronizers in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 503+ for synchronization in
    multiplex communications.


CLS 375/294
TXT Phase locked loop:

    Subject matter under subclass 293 having a closed-loop electronic
    servomechanism the output of which locks onto and tracks a received clock
    signal to provide the frequency and phase aligned receiver clock.


CLS 375/295
TXT TRANSMITTERS:

    Subject matter under the class definition for forming and transmitting
    pulses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 291+ for miscellaneous circuits producing a clock or a
    pulse wave form.

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 106+ for pulse modulators, per se.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 20+ and 173+ for
    code transmitters.


CLS 375/296
TXT Antinoise or distortion (includes predistortion):

    Systems under subclass 295 where any undesired modulation components
    accompanying a desired modulated carrier wave signal, which components are
    due to electrical disturbances within the useful frequency band or any
    undesired carrier wave distortion and which may originate at a source
    external to the transmitter or which may be generated internally in the
    transmitter, are reduced, eliminated or compensated for, or where the
    transmitted signal may, prior to transmission, be distorted in a manner
    complementary to the distortion introduced in the transmission medium.


CLS 375/297
TXT Power amplifier:

    Subject matter under subclass 296 including an amplifier which is used for
    the modulation process in the transmitter.

    (1)     Note.  Compensation is made to the amplifier due to amplifier
    nonlinearality characteristics.


CLS 375/298
TXT Quadrature amplitude modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 295 in which the transmitted signal can be
    represented as the superposition of two modulated signals, each being
    obtained by pulse amplitude modulation of a signal sequence on a sinusoidal
    carrier, the two signal sequences being generated in synchronization at the
    same rate, and the two carriers being of the same frequency but 90 degrees
    apart in phase.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261,    for quadrature amplitude modulation system using alternating or
    pulsating current.

    316+,   for quadrature amplitude modulation receivers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclass 206 for multiplex communications
    using quadrature carriers.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 60 for analog transmission via plural
    phases of one carrier.


CLS 375/299
TXT Plural diversity:

    Subject matter under subclass 295 including two or more transmitters
    transmit the same messages through two or more channels via different
    paths, frequencies or times of transmission.


CLS 375/300
TXT Amplitude modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 295 in which the pulses are multiplied with a
    carrier wave so as to produce and transmit at least one sideband equal to
    the carrier plus or minus the baseband.

    (1)     Note.  In amplitude modulation the amplitude of the carrier wave
    does not change.  The carrier wave can represent the average amplitude of
    the envelope and, since this is the same irrespective of the presence or
    absence of modulation, the carrier wave transmits no information.  The
    information is carried by the sidebands.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    332,    Modulators, for amplitude modulation and pulse modulators.

    455,    Telecommunications, for nonpulse amplitude modulation systems,
    transmitters, and receivers.


CLS 375/301
TXT Single or vestigial sideband or suppressed carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 where less than two complete sidebands
    are transmitted, with or without the carrier, or two complete sidebands are
    transmitted without the carrier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 167+ or 170+ for a suppressed carrier type
    or a single or vestigial sideband type amplitude modulator, per se.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 109 for single sideband amplitude
    modulated carrier wave transmitters.


CLS 375/302
TXT Angle modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 295 where the digital information or pulses
    to be transmitted vary the phase angle or frequency of a carrier wave.

    (1)     Note.  In angle modulation, the total energy content of the output
    spectrum is generally kept constant.  The amplitude of the carrier
    component depends on the modulation index.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211,    for angle modulated repeaters.

    223,    for angle modulated carrier pulse transceivers.

    271,    for angle modulated carrier pulse system using alternating or
    pulsating current.

    322,    for angle modulated carrier pulse receivers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    329,    Demodulators, subclasses 315+ for frequency demodulators,
    subclasses 300+ for a frequency shift keying demodulator, per se, and
    subclasses 304+ for a phase shift keying demodulator, per se.

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 117+ for a frequency modulator, per se, and
    subclasses 144+ for a phase modulator, per se.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    182 and 183 for an angle modulated light wave transmitter.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclass 215 for phase modulation, and
    subclass 483 for angle modulation.


CLS 375/303
TXT Frequency shift keying:

    Subject matter under subclass 302 where the frequency of the carrier wave
    shifts between predetermined values in accordance with the value of the
    modulating pulse wave.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211,    for frequency shift keyed repeaters.

    272,    for frequency shift keyed systems.

    334+,   for frequency shift keyed receivers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    182 for a frequency modulated light wave transmitter.


CLS 375/304
TXT Antenna tuning with frequency shift:

    Subject matter under subclass 303 where the transmitter is connected to an
    antenna circuit which is tuned to the instantaneous frequency of the
    transmitted carrier wave.


CLS 375/305
TXT Minimum shift keying:

    Subject matter under subclass 303 wherein the differences between the mark
    and space frequencies is at the minimum value still preserving
    orthogonality (zero cross-correlations) between the mark and space signals
    and thus providing for efficient detection of the data. Continuous phase is
    maintained at the mark-space transitions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    274,    for minimum shift keyed systems.

    336,    for minimum shift keyed receivers.


CLS 375/306
TXT One oscillator:

    Subject matter under subclass 303 where the modulated carrier wave is
    generated by altering the frequency of an oscillator in the transmitter.


CLS 375/307
TXT Two or more oscillators:

    Subject matter under subclass 303 where the carrier wave is generated by
    switching between two or more oscillators of differing frequency


CLS 375/308
TXT Phase shift keying:

    Subject matter under subclass 302 where the carrier wave is modulated by
    varying its phase in accordance with the pulses to be transmitted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239,    for phase shift keyed repeaters.

    279,    for phase shift keyed systems.

    329+,   for phase shift keyed receivers.


CLS 375/309
TXT Keying circuits:

    Subject matter under subclass 295 wherein the output signal of the
    transmitter is initiated and terminated by a keying device, such as a
    manually or automatically operated switch.

    (1)     Note.  The keying device may control the active elements of the
    transmitter (oscillator or modulator) or the coupling circuits.

    (2)     Note.  Where the claims are drawn to a keying device controlling an
    oscillator or an amplifier without additional details of the transmitter,
    classification is in Class 331, subclasses 172+ or Class 330, respectively.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 116 for keyed spark gap or arc converter
    transmitters.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    182 and 183 for an angle modulated light wave transmitter.


CLS 375/310
TXT Remote controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 309 wherein the keying device has its control
    part located at a point some distance removed from the transmitter.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes relay controlled keying, wherein the
    operator key controls the relay, the armature controlled contacts being in
    the transmitter circuit.

    (2)     Note.  This distance between the operator key and the transmitter
    circuit controlled thereby may be considerable or the distance may be small
    as with relay controlled keying.


CLS 375/311
TXT Automatic:

    Subject matter under subclass 309 wherein the keying of the transmitter is
    automatically controlled as opposed, for example, to a manual control.

    (1)     Note.  The automatic keying devices of this subclass include
    rotating cylinders, disks, etc., with cams or conductive segments arranged
    in a predetermined fashion for closing contacts in the transmitter circuit
    and controlling the transmission of intelligence.


CLS 375/312
TXT Power or bias voltage supply keying:

    Subject matter under subclass 309 wherein the keying device for controlling
    the operation of the transmitter is in the power or bias voltage supply
    circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 173+ for oscillators controlled by keying
    the power supply circuit.

    332,    Modulators, subclass 181 for plate circuit modulation in an
    amplitude modulator.


CLS 375/313
TXT Key shock or click prevention:

    Subject matter under subclass 309 including provision to eliminate or
    prevent the electrical disturbances produced by abrupt operation of the key.


CLS 375/314
TXT Including auxiliary control tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 309 including an auxiliary electron discharge
    tube in the keying circuit, the conduction of which controls the operation
    of the transmitter and is responsive to the keying means.


CLS 375/315
TXT Modulation by absorption of signal, changing antenna dimension or changing
    antenna impedance:

    Subject matter under subclass 309 including means controlled by the keying
    operation to absorb the oscillations during spacing periods as when the
    transmission of intelligence is by marks and spaces, or to change the
    impedance or dimension of the antenna to cause modulation of the carrier.


CLS 375/316
TXT RECEIVERS:

    Subject matter under the class definition including apparatus to decode,
    demodulate, or otherwise recover the transmitted intelligence.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238,    for pulse width receivers.

    239,    for pulse position, frequency, or number receivers.

    242+,   for pulse code modulation and delta receivers.

    256,    for radiated baseband receivers.

    257,    for cable receivers.

    286+,   for multilevel receivers.

    353,    for pulse amplitude receivers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 63 and 118 for telegraphy receivers.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses
    200.1+ for miscellaneous pulse circuits.

    329,    Demodulators, subclasses 311+ for pulse demodulators, subclasses
    300+ for a frequency shift keying demodulator, per se, and subclasses 304+
    for a phase shift keying demodulator, per se.

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 106+ for a pulse modulator, per se.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 126+ for digital to
    analog converters.

    342,    Communications, Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation) appropriate subclasses for radar receivers in
    which ranging or position determining is claimed.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, for receivers used for multiplex systems.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 130+ for nonpulse radio receivers.


CLS 375/317
TXT Automatic baseline or threshold adjustment:

    Subject matter under subclass 316 where the received signal is compared to
    a reference voltage or current level, the reference level being
    automatically adjusted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses for automatically controlled
    demodulators.


CLS 375/318
TXT Differential amplifier:

    Subject matter under subclass 317 including a circuit that amplifies the
    difference between the received signal and the reference signal.


CLS 375/319
TXT Automatic bias circuit for DC restoration:

    Subject matter under subclass 317 including a means for eliminating
    unwanted DC offset voltages in a receiver for decoding the digitally
    modulated signals.


CLS 375/320
TXT Amplitude modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 316 wherein the receiver extracts a
    modulating signal from an input AM signal whose amplitude of a carrier
    varies over a continuum of values in accordance with the modulating signal.


CLS 375/321
TXT Single or vestigial sideband or suppressed carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 320 in which the receiver is responsive to
    pulses which are amplitude modulated onto a carrier wave in such a manner
    that less than a full  carrier or less than two complete sidebands are
    created by the modulation process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270,    for similar systems.

    301,    for similar transmitters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 202 through 204 for similar analog
    carrier wave receivers.


CLS 375/322
TXT Angle modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 316 where the angle of the sine wave carrier
    is varied in accordance with the pulse or digital information.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    329,    Demodulators, subclasses 315+ for frequency demodulators and
    subclasses 345+ for phase demodulators, per se.


CLS 375/323
TXT Combined phase shift keyed and frequency shift keyed:

    Subject matter under subclass 322 in which the received carrier has been
    modulated both as to its phase and frequency.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273,    for frequency shift and phase shift keyed systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclass 204 for multiplex communications
    with plural diverse modulation techniques.


CLS 375/324
TXT Particular demodulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 322 including a specified type of circuit for
    recovering the pulse or digital signal from the modulated carrier wave.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    329,    Demodulators, subclasses 311+ for pulse demodulators, subclasses
    315+ for frequency demodulators, subclasses 345+ for phase demodulators,
    and subclasses 347+ for amplitude demodulators.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 214 for analog frequency modulation
    receivers with particular discriminator.


CLS 375/325
TXT Including coherent detector:

    Subject matter under subclass 324 including a detecting circuit for
    deriving additional information from the phase of the carrier signal.


CLS 375/326
TXT Carrier recovery circuit or carrier tracking:

    Subject matter under subclass 324 including means for extracting a carrier
    signal from the modulated signal.


CLS 375/327
TXT Phase locked loop:

    Subject matter under subclass 324 wherein the demodulator includes a local
    oscillator synchronized in phase and frequency with the received signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 156+ for miscellaneous synchronizing circuits having a
    phase lock loop.

    329,    Demodulators, particularly subclasses 307+, 325+, and 360+ for
    locked oscillator demodulators.


CLS 375/328
TXT Including switching or gating (digital circuits):

    Subject matter under subclass 324 including circuits such as logic gates
    and counters for processing the angle modulated wave in the receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    303,    for frequency shift keying transmitters with digital circuits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, appropriate subclasses for
    electronic digital logic circuits.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 365+ for miscellaneous gating circuits.


CLS 375/329
TXT Phase shift keying:

    Subject matter under subclass 322 in which the phase of the carrier
    detected has been varied according to the pulse or digital information.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    279+,   for phase shift systems.

    308,    for phase shift keyed transmitters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    329,    Demodulators, subclasses 304+ for a phase shift keying or
    quadrature amplitude demodulator, per se.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 205 for frequency modulation receivers.


CLS 375/330
TXT Differential (diphase):

    Subject matter under subclass 329 in which the bit interval representing
    one of the two binary levels is formed by a change in the phase of the
    received signal relative to the preceding bit interval, and the bit
    interval representing the other of the two binary levels is formed by the
    absence of a change of phase of the received signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    283,    for diphase systems.


CLS 375/331
TXT More than two phases:

    Subject matter under subclass 330 in which there are at least three
    possible phases that the received signal can assume.


CLS 375/332
TXT Plural phase (>2):

    Subject matter under subclass 329 where the received signal can assume one
    of at least three possible phases during a bit interval.


CLS 375/333
TXT Biphase (manchester code):

    Subject matter under subclass 329 wherein the data to be detected has been
    encoded as a 0-1 transition for one bit of information and a 1-0 transition
    for the other bit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282,    for biphase systems.


CLS 375/334
TXT Frequency shift keying:

    Subject matter under subclass 322 where the carrier has been modulated by
    shifting its frequency in accordance with the pulses transmitted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211,    for frequency shift keying repeaters.

    223,    for frequency shift keying transceivers.

    272+,   for frequency shift keying systems.

    303+,   for frequency shift keying transmitters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 179 for frequency shift keying of oscillators.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    182 for a frequency modulated light wave transmitter.


CLS 375/335
TXT More than two frequencies:

    Subject matter under subclass 334 in which the input signal detected has
    three or more frequencies representing three or more pieces of information.


CLS 375/336
TXT Minimum shift keying:

    Subject matter under subclass 334 for receiving a signal having frequency
    shifts equal to the minimum necessary to distinguish a mark from a space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    274,    for minimum shift keying systems.


CLS 375/337
TXT Separate mark and space channels:

    Subject matter under subclass 334 in which one frequency is received over
    one channel and the other frequency is received over another separate
    channel within the receiver.

    (1)     Note.  Systems with entirely independent paths between the
    transmitter and receiver will not be found here but in subclass 260.


CLS 375/338
TXT Interrupted carrier wave:

    Subject matter under subclass 316 in which the pulse or digital information
    is received on a carrier wave which is turned on and off at a rate much
    higher than the signal rate.


CLS 375/339
TXT Carrier controlling local generator:

    Subject matter under subclass 338 comprising means whereby the local
    generator or oscillator is triggered, gated, or otherwise controlled by the
    received signal.

    (1)     Note.  This controlled generator signal is then recorded or
    otherwise used.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 172+ for means for triggering oscillators.


CLS 375/340
TXT Particular pulse demodulator or detector:

    Subject matter under subclass 316 including specific details of the
    apparatus to convert the pulse signal back to baseband.

    (1)     Note.  Angle modulation demodulators are not found here but in
    subclass 324.


CLS 375/341
TXT Maximum likelihood decoder or viterbi decoder:

    Subject matter under subclass 340 wherein a decoding method is used for
    choosing an estimate code word for each possible received sequence of a
    demodulation output.

    (1)     Note.  This method is generally used for decoding the convolution
    codes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262,    for maximum likelihood decoder or viterbi decoder of systems using
    alternating or pulsating current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclasses
    43.1+, for digital data error correction having a convolution code.


CLS 375/342
TXT Locating predetermined portion of pulse:

    Subject matter under subclass 340 in which the demodulator locates a
    predetermined portion of the pulse such as a maxima, minima, or zero
    crossing.


CLS 375/343
TXT Correlative or matched filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 340 where a signal to be demodulated is
    compared point to point with an internally generated reference signal which
    is constructed in such a way that it is at all times a prediction of what
    the signal to be demodulated should be at that time.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses
    724.011+ for digital filters, per se; subclass 728 for digital correlators;
    subclasses 819+ for analog correlation; and subclass 825 for analog
    filtering.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 320, 335, 342, 441, 479, and
    515 for correlation detection in multiplex environment.


CLS 375/344
TXT Automatic frequency control:

    Subject matter under subclass 316 where a receiver frequency response
    characteristic is set or adjusted in response to frequency changes in the
    input signal or charges in the receiver parameters.


CLS 375/345
TXT Automatic gain control:

    Subject matter under subclass 316 where the amplification of the receiver
    is automatically adjusted in accordance with the strength of the received
    signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 129+ and 254 for gain controlled amplifiers.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 234.1+ for nonpulse carrier wave
    automatic gain control.


CLS 375/346
TXT Interference or noise reduction:

    Subject matter under subclass 316 where the deleterious effects of
    extraneous signals are eliminated or suppressed at the receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    285,    for systems with antinoise provisions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses and particularly subclasses 310+, 384+,
    and 551+ for miscellaneous or unwanted signal suppression.

    348,    Television, subclasses 607+ for noise or undesired signal reduction.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 296+ for carrier wave receivers with
    noise reduction not limited to or claiming pulse type signal.


CLS 375/347
TXT Diversity (frequency or time):

    Subject matter under subclass 346 including two separate receivers
    receiving the same signal on two different frequencies or at two different
    locations on the same frequency or one receiver receiving the same signal
    at different times and combining the two thus received signals into a more
    noise free signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 132 for general diversity; and
    subclasses 296+ for receiver diversity.


CLS 375/348
TXT Intersymbol interference:

    Subject matter under subclass 346 to prevent successive data bits or
    symbols from interleaving or influencing one another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229+,   for equalizers.

    290+,   for partial response system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 296 for anti-multipath receivers.


CLS 375/349
TXT Plural signal paths in receiver:

    Subject matter under subclass 346 including more than one signal channel
    included between the receiver input and output.


CLS 375/350
TXT By filtering (e.g., digital):

    Subject matter under subclass 346 wherein the noise is reduced by a
    frequency domain or digital sequence filter.  The filter may remove
    interference or pass only desired signals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses
    724.011+ for digital filter.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 307 for carrier wave receivers with
    filters for noise reduction.


CLS 375/351
TXT Gating, blanking, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 346 where noise pulses are eliminated by the
    operation of switches to open or short the signal path to delete the
    undesired signals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 218+ for squelch and noise blankers.


CLS 375/352
TXT With electromagnetic relay or solenoid:

    Subject matter under subclass 316 including an electromagnetically operated
    switch or an electromagnet with an armature which reciprocates within and
    along the axis of an energized coil.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ for
    control circuits for electromagnetic devices.


CLS 375/353
TXT PULSE AMPLITUDE MODULATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which the amplitude of the
    transmitted pulses represents the transmitted information.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 50+ for miscellaneous pulse amplitude discriminating
    and subclasses 178+ for miscellaneous rectangular or pulse waveform
    amplitude control.

    329,    Demodulators, subclass 311 for pulse amplitude demodulation.

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 115+ for a pulse amplitude modulator, per se.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclass 533 for a multiplexer or
    distributor using pulse amplitude modulation.


CLS 375/354
TXT SYNCHRONIZERS:

    Subject matter under the class definition for synchronizing the operation
    of the receiving and transmitting mechanisms.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass may include multiplex techniques used to
    control synchronization of the transmitter and receiver; however, when the
    information content is multiplexed, classification is in Class 370.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Devices, Circuits, and Systems,
    particularly subclasses 141+ for miscellaneous synchronizing circuits.

    348,    Television, for synchronization TV system.

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 409+ for synchronization in facsimile.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 503+ for synchronizing
    multiplex communications.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 182.1 for
    synchronization fault recovery, subclass 200.78 for synchronizing
    multicomputer data transferring combined with significant data processing,
    and subclasses 551-560 for digital data processing system timing, per se.


CLS 375/355
TXT Synchronizing the sampling time of digital data:

    Subject matter under subclass 354 wherein the sampling time of a sampler is
    synchronized to the transmission baud rate, or twice, or more of the
    transmission baud rate.


CLS 375/356
TXT Network synchronizing more than two stations:

    Subject matter under subclass 354 for synchronizing more than two input or
    output points along a communication system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include multiplex synchronization.


CLS 375/357
TXT Synchronization failure prevention:

    Subject matter under subclass 354 in which there is apparatus to prevent
    the failure of the synchronization apparatus.


CLS 375/358
TXT Feedback, receiver to transmitter:

    Subject matter under subclass 354 in which there is a signal sent from the
    receiver to the transmitter to control the synchronization of the system.


CLS 375/359
TXT Self-synchronizing signal (self-clocking codes, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 354 that receives the synchronizing
    information from the information signal itself rather than requiring the
    transmission and ultimate reception and separation of a special
    synchronizing signal interleaved with the incoming information signal.


CLS 375/360
TXT With transition detector:

    Subject matter under subclass 359 including a circuit for detecting the
    changes of a signal level of the received encoded signal.


CLS 375/361
TXT Manchester code or biphase code:

    Subject matter under subclass 359 wherein the information signal is encoded
    as a 0-1 transition for one bit of information and a 1-0 transition for the
    other bit.


CLS 375/362
TXT Frequency or phase control using synchronizing signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 354 which uses the transmission and ultimate
    reception and separation of a special synchronizing signal interleaved with
    the incoming information signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 491 and 500 for pilot
    insertion in a multiplex communications using frequency or time channels.


CLS 375/363
TXT Synchronization bit insertion into artificially created gaps:

    Subject matter under subclass 362 where there are gaps created in the
    transmitted bit stream in which synchronization bits are transmitted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclass 504 for multiplex
    synchronization where a gap is the synchronization reference point.


CLS 375/364
TXT Synchronization signals with unique amplitude, polarity, length, or
    frequency:

    Subject matter under subclass 362 where the synchronization signals are
    distinguishable from data signals by a differing amplitude, polarity,
    length, or frequency.


CLS 375/365
TXT Synchronization word:

    Subject matter under subclass 362 in which the synchronization signal is a
    multidigit word which is not a member of the set of valid data words.


CLS 375/366
TXT Plurality of synchronization words:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 having at least two or more sync words.


CLS 375/367
TXT Pseudo noise:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 where the unique synchronizing word has
    the property of being produced by a definite calculation process while
    simultaneously satisfying one or more of the standard tests for statistical
    randomness.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclass 515 for a pseudo-random sync
    word in a multiplex environment.


CLS 375/368
TXT Synchronizer pattern recognizers:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 which includes apparatus for recognizing
    the unique synchronizing word.


CLS 375/369
TXT Start-stop:

    Subject matter under subclass 362 where there are synchronization signals
    at both the start and the end of a data word.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 305+ for start-stop
    synchronization of a low speed asynchronous data system.


CLS 375/370
TXT With asynchronous data:

    Subject matter under subclass 369 having a variable time interval between
    successive bits, characters or events of the incoming data stream.


CLS 375/371
TXT Phase displacement, slip or jitter correction:

    Subject matter under subclass 354 which corrects for errors in the time of
    occurrence of transmitted pulses.


CLS 375/372
TXT Elastic buffer:

    Subject matter under subclass 371 wherein a first in-first out (FIFO)
    storage is operated to receive data that is synchronized with a write clock
    from the input signal and therefrom synchronized with the read clock of the
    FIFO storage.


CLS 375/373
TXT Phase locking:

    Subject matter under subclass 371 wherein the receiver clock and received
    data are brought into frequency and phase alignment or coherence.


CLS 375/374
TXT With charge pump or up and down counters:

    Subject matter under subclass 373 including a means for controlling the
    voltage which applied to the voltage control oscillator (VCO) as to change
    the frequency of the phase lock loop.


CLS 375/375
TXT With frequency detector and phase detector:

    Subject matter under subclass 373 including a frequency detecting device to
    ensure the frequency alignment before a phase detector adjusts the phase
    locking.


CLS 375/376
TXT Phase locked loop:

    Subject matter under subclass 373 having a closed-loop electronic
    servomechanism the output of which locks onto and tracks a received signal
    to provide the frequency and phase aligned receiver clock.


CLS 375/377
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition not provided for in any of the
    preceding subclasses of this class.


CLS 376/
TTL INDUCED NUCLEAR REACTIONS:  PROCESSES, SYSTEMS, AND ELEMENTS

CLS 376/
TXT

    I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    This class provides for patents directed to processes involving induced
    nuclear reactions and structures which implement such processes.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of classification in this class, an induced
    nuclear reaction is defined as a change in the nucleus of an atom brought
    about by subjecting it (the nucleus) to (a) an impact with other nuclei of
    the same or different type, or (b) an impact with, or bombardment by,
    subatomic particles or high energy electromagnetic radiations.

    (2)     Note.  Reactions of type (a) in (1) Note, above, include those
    which cause or result in the combining or uniting of at least two nuclei to
    form a different nucleus which reactions are generally referred to as
    fusion  reactions.

            Reactions of type (b) in (1) Note, above, include (1) those which
    cause a splitting or subdivision of the nucleus (usually a heavy nucleus)
    into a plurality of different nuclei and are generally referred to as
    fission reactions, and (2) those which result in a single but different
    nucleus of the same or a different element and are generally referred to as
    transmutations.

    (3)     Note.  A basis for placing a patent into this class is that a
    nuclear reactor be claimed or that it be utilized to obtain a nuclear
    reaction even though the sole or primary aim of the patent in regard to the
    reactor is to obtain useful nuclear energy or to utilize such nuclear
    energy yielding system for conversion into other forms of useful energy or
    power.  This is true even though from a chemical view there may be nothing
    novel, or from an economical view, nothing of value, with respect to the
    products or materials resulting from the nuclear reaction.

    (4)     Note.  Patents to processes are not segregated from patents to the
    structure, but are classified together depending upon the type of structure
    claimed or used in the claimed process.

    II.     SCOPE OF THE CLASS

    Included within the scope of the class are patents directed to (a) the
    nuclear reactor as a system of elements or parts so interrelated as to
    produce induced nuclear reactions and to (b) such elements or parts, per
    se, as are essential and peculiar components of nuclear reactors.  Included
    among (a), for example, are neutron detectors wherein the detection takes
    place by means of an induced nuclear reaction. Included among (b), for
    example, are fuel element structures (including fuel "targets" or
    "pellets"), control component structures, moderator component structures,
    fuel element storage structures, and refueling machines.

    Also included in this class are:

    (1)     Note.  Patents to processes or apparatus including a step or means
    for (a) converting the nucleus of a substance other than the reactor fuel
    to a nucleus of another substance, (b) treating or irradiating of material,
    or (c) making a material radioactive, all within such reactor , including
    for such purposes as the production of nuclear fuel or experimentation,
    study or research, etc.  See subclasses 156+.

    (2)     Note.  Patents to processes or apparatus including a step or means
    for converting the nucleus of a substance or for making a substance
    radioactive by bombardment with accelerated particles from a source other
    than a nuclear reactor.  See subclasses 190+.

    (3)     Note.  Patents directed to combination of a process or apparatus
    under the class definition with a step or means, e.g., (a) of cooling or
    heat exchange even though the purpose is to generate steam for extraneous
    uses, or (b) with a step or means for carrying out of a chemical reaction,
    etc.  See subclasses 317+.

    (4)     Note.  Patents to processes or apparatus including an arrangement
    of steps or means for amplifying neutrons of a subcritical mass to
    controllable fission reaction levels, i.e., subcritical reactors.  See
    subclass 347.

    (5)     Note.  Patents to all devices, structures, and processes for
    irradiating a nucleus with its antinucleus (e.g., protonantproton) so as to
    produce anihilation radiation, i.e., induced matter-antimatter reaction.
    See subclasses 156+.

    (6)     Note.  Patents to processes or devices that utilize a gaseous or
    light element fuel material, the particles of which are electrically
    charged or excited to the point where they become highly ionized and the
    forces of repulsion of like nuclei is overcome, or substantially so,
    wherein it is the intent of the patent that this be the result of such
    ionization, to the end that nuclear fusion of such like nuclei is obtained
    or sought to be obtained.  See subclasses 100+.

    III.    GENERAL LINES WITH OTHER CLASSES AND MISCELLANEOUS SEARCH NOTES

    Reactor structure in combination with any other art device is classified in
    this class.

    (1)     Note.  The line between the subject matter of this class and those
    classes utilizing nuclear energy reactors or reactions in an ancillary
    fashion for such purposes as the production of power either electrical or
    mechanical and for similar purposes is as follows:

            This class provides for claimed apparatus and processes wherein the
    reactor or reaction is recited either specifically or broadly and wherein
    structure utilizing the reactor or reaction, e.g., motor, generator, ship,
    aircraft, etc., is recited either specifically or broadly.

    (2)     Note.  Class 204, Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy,
    subclasses 157.15+ provide for patents to processes utilizing nuclear
    energy to bring about chemical reactions between either inorganic or
    organic compounds in order to provide a different compound or product,
    provided neither reactor structure nor a nuclear reaction is claimed.
    Class 376, however, takes such patents if some reactor structure is claimed
    or if the resulting compound or product is either claimed, or is disclosed
    as being radioactive.

    (3)     Note.  This class also provides for patents to all processes and to
    certain devices or structures for irradiating a substance of a subject
    specimen or sample for research and related purposes or for making such
    substance radioactive.  This holds true however only if the irradiation
    produces a transformation or similar modification of the nucleus of the
    substance, or if the treatment makes the substance radioactive.  For other
    types of irradiation, see Class 250, Radiant Energy, subclasses 492.1+.

    (4)     Note.  Elements and subcombinations of nuclear reactors which may,
    if recited in general terms, be provided for elsewhere, are classified in
    this class if recited in terms of the subject matter of this class.

    (5)     Note.  Class 520, Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, in
    particularly Class 522 for a process of utilizing nuclear energy to bring
    about chemical reactions that treat or prepare a synthetic resin or rubber,
    provided neither nuclear reactor structure nor a nuclear reaction is
    claimed.  Class 376, however, takes such patents if some reacctor structure
    is claimed or if the resulting product is either claimed or disclosed as
    being radioactive.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, appropriate subclasses for processes of subjecting
    living plant or plant matter to nuclear radiation devices other than within
    a nuclear reactor.

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 644.1 for a power plant energized by
    externally applied heat in which heat directly from radioactive decay or
    indirectly from a nominally recited nuclear reactor is used.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses for control
    elements, per se, (including its moving parts) except where (a) the element
    is structurally associated with the reactor and some reactor structure is
    also recited (other than in a mere broad reference to the reactor), or
    where (b) the control element or portion thereof is defined as being
    absorbing material or neutron absorbing material - patents to such elements
    are classified in this class (376).

    114,    Ships, appropriate subclasses for patents to ship structures
    utilizing nuclear reactors for power-generating purposes in which no
    structural elements of the nuclear reactor are claimed.

    166,    Wells, subclass 247 for well processes involving nuclear energy in
    general.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 157.2+ and 193
    for processes and structure for bringing about chemical reactions by
    subjecting material to nuclear radiation.  See reference to Class 204 in
    section III, (2) Note, above.

    244,    Aeronautics, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 53+,
    for patents to aircraft using a nuclear reactor as a power-generating
    source in which no structural elements of the nuclear reactor is claimed.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 251 for molecular or atomic beam devices
    for producing and propagating a unidirectional stream of neutral molecules
    or atoms through a vacuum, usually at thermal velocities; subclasses 253+
    for geological signal processing steps or apparatus involving only a
    nominally recited nuclear reaction; subclasses 324+ for methods and
    apparatus to irradiate materials by corona radiation; subclasses 390.01+
    for neutron responsive means involving no induced nuclear reactions;
    subclasses 423+ for methods and apparatus to generate ions not involving
    induced nuclear reactions; subclasses 453.11+ for methods and apparatus
    including supports for objects to be irradiated with or without an
    irradiating source; subclasses 458.1+ for methods and apparatus to
    irradiate luminophors; subclasses 492.1+ for methods and apparatus to
    irradiate objects or materials generally; subclasses 493.1+ for invisible
    radiation generation and sources not involving induced nuclear reactions;
    and subclasses 505.1+ for generic storage devices for radioactive material.

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants, appropriate subclasses for prime-mover
    plant using nuclear reactor as power-generating source in which no
    structural elements of the nuclear reactor is claimed.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    patents to generator systems utilizing nuclear reactors for power source in
    which no structural element of the nuclear reactor is claimed.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, appropriate subclasses,
    particulary subclass 120 for gamma ray sources.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, particularly
    subclasses 1.11+ for radionuclide containing subject matter, for:
    compositions (A) for preventing, alleviating, treating, or curing abnormal
    and pathological conditions of the living body, for maintaining,
    increasing, decreasing, limiting, or destroying a physiologic body
    function, for diagnosing a physiological condition or state by an in vivo
    test, for controlling or protecting an environment or living body by
    attracting, disabling, inhibiting, killing, modifying, repelling, or
    retarding an animal or micro-organism, (B) for deodorizing, protecting,
    adorning, or grooming a body, (C) for fermentates and extracts for use in A
    or B and not elsewhere provided for, and (D) for such compositions defined
    in terms of specific structure; methods of making the above compositions;
    methods of using the class defined compositions for purposes in A and B;
    and methods of using compounds, per se, for purposes in A and B.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclass 240 for process of subjecting food to nuclear radiation devices
    other than within a nuclear reactor.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 1+ for treatment of the body with radioactive
    substances.

    IV.     GLOSSARY

    (1)     Note.  Certain terms employed in this class have been assigned
    definitions tailored to meet the needs of this class and therefore may be
    more or less restricted or even altogether different from those in common
    usage. These terms are listed below and are flagged with an asterisk where
    they occur in the subclass definition that follow.  The meaning to be given
    to the various "art" terms appearing in this class, but which have not been
    included in the GLOSSARY below, is the same as that generally accepted or
    is in common usage.

    ABSORBING MATERIAL

    See Neutron Absorbing Material.

    ACTIVE VOLUME

    See Reactor Core.

    AMPLIFICATION, NEUTRON

    See Subcritical Reactor.

    BLANKET MATERIAL

    A layer of fertile material placed external to core of the fission reactor.
    See Fertile Material.

    BREEDER MATERIAL

    See (a) Blanket Material and (b) Fertile Material.

    BURNABLE POISON

    A substance with high neutron capture cross section which has a capture
    reaction product of low capture cross section and which is purposely put in
    a fission reactor to influence the long term reactivity variations.

    BY-PRODUCT MATERIALS

    Are nuclear reaction products (except special nuclear fuel material (see
    Nuclear Fuel)  including gases yielded in or made radioactive by explosure
    to the radiation incident to the process of producing or utilizing special
    nuclear fuel in the nuclear reaction.

    COMPONENT, REACTOR

    For the purpose of this class, relates to any of the functional segments or
    parts comprising, when properly associated together, a nuclear reactor,
    e.g., fuel, moderator, coolant (fluid or solid), control rod, reflector,
    shield, etc.

    CONFINEMENT PLASMA

    For the purpose of this class, is either the containment or restraint force
    or the means (structure) for producing such force placed upon the charged
    particles or plasma, e.g., by electric or magnetic fields, so as to
    restrict said particles or plasma within a given volume.

    CONTROL ELEMENT

    For the purpose of this class, is rods, tubes, plates, etc., of a
    reactivity affecting material used to hold a fission reactor at a given
    power level or to vary the rate of reaction.  Control elements can be given
    three names corresponding to three different functions, namely:  (a) power
    control,  regulating or fine control  (affecting only a small change in
    reactivity); (b) safety or scram (capable or reducing the reactivity below
    critical and used general when some emergency condition exists, such as
    power level to high); and (c) shim (affecting a relatively large change in
    reactivity of a reactor, i.e., it is used for coarse control or reactivity).

    CONTROL ROD

    See Control Element.

    CONVERSION

    For the purpose of this class, is the process of artificially bringing
    about a change or transformation in the nucleus of an atom.  Nuclear
    conversion is generally caused by subjecting a material to particle
    bombardment, usually by neutron irradiation as happens in a fission
    reactor.  See also Transmutation.

    COOLANT

    A fluid (liquid, gaseous, or particulate) whose function is to absorb heat
    from the reactor core and to deliver this absorbed heat to a heat exchanger
    or other utilization means exterior to the reactor core.

    CORE, REACTOR

    See Reactor Core.

    CRITICAL

    For the purpose of this class, is the term used to describe the condition
    in which a chain reaction is being maintained at a constant level, i.e., it
    is just self-sustaining.  In order for this state to exist a sufficient
    quantity of fissile material (critical mass) must be assembled in the
    proper shape and concentration.

    FAST NEUTRONS

    See Thermal Neutrons.

    FAST (FISSION) REACTOR

    A nuclear reactor in which most of the fissions are caused by neutrons
    moving with substantially the high speeds they possess at the time of their
    birth in fission. Such reactors contain little or no moderator.

    FERTILE MATERIAL

    An element (isotope) capable of being readily transformed or converted into
    a fissionable substance by capture of a neutron, examples include, U238 and
    Th232.

    FISSILE MATERIAL

    See Fissionable Material.

    FISSION

    The splitting of a heavy nucleus into two (or, very rarely, more) fragments
    (fission products) of more or less equal mass accompanied by the emission
    of neutrons and the release of energy.  It can be spontaneous or it can be
    caused by the impact or a neutron, a fast charged particle or a photon.
    See Fissionable Material.  Cf.  Spallation.

    FISSIONABLE MATERIAL

    Any element or isotope the nucleus of which can be caused by nuclear
    bombardment to undergo nuclear fission and to produce a fission chain
    reaction U233, U235, and Pu239, are examples.  Unless a patent refers to a
    distinction, "fissionable" and "fissile" are considered synonymous for the
    purpose of this class.

    FLUIDIZED BED (FISSION) REACTOR

    A reactor in which the fuel in the form of particles is maintained in a
    fluidized state by a fluid medium.  (The fuel and the fluid are general
    moving in opposite directions).  See subclass 355.  (Includes also support
    of fuel in pellet form in a liquid bath by an upwardly flowing liquid).

    FUEL, FUEL ELEMENT, or FUEL COMPONENT

    See Nuclear Fuel.

    FULLY IONIZED

    For the purpose of this class, is state in which atoms are entirely
    stripped of their orbital electrons for atoms of low mass number, this
    occurs at kinetic temperatures in the region of 1 Kev or more.  In other
    words, matter is in a state of complete ionization; it consists of a gas
    composed of positively charged nuclei and an equivalent number of negative
    electrons with no neutral particles.  See also Plasma.

    FUSION

    For the purpose of this class, is a nuclear reaction in which light nuclei
    combine to form a nucleus of a heavier mass number. See also Thermonuclear
    Fusion Reaction.

    HOMOGENEOUS FUEL

    See Homogeneous Fission Reactor.

    HOMOGENEOUS (FISSION) REACTOR

    A reactor in which the fuel and moderator are intimately mixed or dispersed
    (e.g., the fuel may be a uranium salt dissolved in heavy water) as a
    solution or slurry.

    INDUCED NUCLEAR REACTION

    See section I, (1) Note.

    INTERMEDIATE NEUTRONS

    See Thermal Neutrons.

    IONIZED

    See (a) Fully Ionized and (b) Plasma.

    MAGNETIC MIRRORS

    See Mirror Field.

    MIRROR FIELD

    For confinement of plasma, a system has been devised whereby a longitudinal
    magnetic field is applied to the plasma, but instead of being uniform, the
    field strength is increased at spaced points. The region of enhanced
    magnetic field is referred to as a mirror field or magnetic mirror.
    Substantially all of the charged particles moving from the region of lower
    to that of the higher field strength, will be reflected back into the
    former region. This field thus acts as a sort of potential well which
    inhibits escape of many of the charged particles (and consequent loss of
    energy).

    MODERATOR

    For the purpose of this class, is a substance used within a fission reactor
    core in special relationship with the fuel to reduce the energy, and hence
    speed, of fast neutrons (so far as possible) emanating from the fuel by
    means of collisions without capturing them. Graphite and heavy water are
    examples.

    MODERATED NEUTRONS

    See Thermal Neutrons.

    NEUTRON ABSORBING MATERIAL

    As it relates to nuclear reactors, a substance that poses a high neutron
    absorption ability.

    NEUTRON APLIFICATION

    See Subcritical Reactor.

    NUCLEAR FUEL

    (a) Light elements such as hydrogen, deuterium tritium, lithium, boron
    berylium, etc., which are capable of fusing or combining to form a nucleus
    of higher mass number, (b) fissionable fissile, or special nuclear material
    such as U233, U235, or uranium enriched with either of these Pu239, etc.,
    capable of sustaining a chain reaction.

    NUCLEAR REACTION

    For the purpose of this class, a change in the composition or physical
    characteristics of an atomic nucleus produced (a) directly or indirectly,
    by its irradiation or bombardment by high energy alphaparticles, protons,
    deuterons, slow or fast neutrons or high energy radiations (gamma rays) or
    (b) by fusing or combining nuclei of low atomic number to produce a nucleus
    of higher mass number.  See also class definition, section I, and (1) Note.

    NUCLEAR REACTOR

    For the purpose of this class, a structure inside which an induced nuclear
    reaction is confined, manipulated, or controlled.  A nuclear fission
    reactor is a structure in which a fission chain reaction is a fissionable
    material can be maintained and controlled.  Besides the fuel, it generally
    contains control apparatus, moderator, coolant, etc., and is often
    surrounded by a biological shield.  A nuclear fusion reactor is a structure
    in which a fusion reaction in a nuclear fuel capable of fusing is
    controlled or manipulated. Although it is implied that the rate of such
    reactions increases as the relative velocities of such particles at the
    time of collision, nothing is implied about the means by which such
    precollision velocities are attained.  The same reaction may and usually
    does produce one or more other particles such as neutrons or protons, in
    accordance with well-known reactions.

    PINCH EFFECT

    The self-constriction that occurs in a plasma as a result of the passage of
    a unindirectional current, which current produces an azimuthal
    self-magnetic field that tends to constrict (or pinch) the plasma; or the
    equivalent effect which is produced when a plasma is contained between
    parallel circuits carrying current in the same direction attracting each
    other.

    PLASMA

    For the purpose of this class is a very hot, at least partially, ionized
    gaseous system consisting of equivalent (substantially so) numbers of
    positive ions and electrons, irrespective of whether neutral particles are
    present or not.  It is nearly neutral electrically and highly conducting.
    See also Fully Ionized and subclasses 100+.

    REACTION BY-PRODUCTS

    See By-Product Materials.

    REACTIVITY

    A measure of the amount of the possible departure of a reactor from the
    critical condition where the reaction is just self- supporting.  At any
    steady state of operation the reactivity is zero.  Addition of positive
    reactivity causes divergence; addition of negative reactivity causes the
    reaction to die down.

    REACTIVITY AFFECTING MATERIAL

    As it relates to fission nuclear reactors, this is a material which affects
    the criticality of the reactor and can be (a) a neutron absorbing material
    (which for the purpose of this class is a material which can absorb
    neutrons without reproducing them, e.g., boron, or a fertile material such
    a uranium (U238 or thourium) thus providing a decrease in reactivity, (b) a
    fissionable material such as U235, Pu239, U233 (thus providing an increase
    in reactivity), and (c) a reflector (moderator) material such as graphite
    or water (thus providing an increase in reactivity).

    REACTOR CORE (FISSION REACTOR)

    The central or heart of a nuclear reactor containing as its main
    constituent the nuclear fuel (e.g., enriched uranium, Pu239, etc.), and the
    moderator, if any. Also known as the active volume of the reactor.

    REACTOR GEOMETRY (FISSION REACTOR)

    See subclasses 347+.

    REFLECTOR

    A volume of material placed around the active volume (core) or other
    neutron yielding source serving to scatter back into the active volume some
    of the neutrons which would otherwise be lost to the chain reaction thus
    permitting a reduction in the critical size of the active volume.

    SAFETY ELEMENT or ROD

    See Control Element.

    SCRAM ROD

    See Control Element.

    SHIELD

    For the purpose of this class, generally a mass or armor of concrete, lead
    or other heavy material or other neutron absorbing material erected around
    a reactor or other radioactive source to sheild operating staff by
    absorbing and reducing dangerous radiations (especially neutrons and gamma
    rays) to premissible levels.  See also Neutron Absorbing Material.

    SHIM

    See Control Element.

    SLURRY

    See Homogeneous Reactor .

    SPALLATION

    A nuclear reaction induced by high energy bombardment and involving the
    ejection of two or more small particles or fragments leaving only one large
    residual nucleus.

    SPECIAL NUCLEAR MATERIAL

    See Nuclear Fuel (b).

    SPLITTING

    See Fission.

    STRIPPED of ORBITAL ELECTRONS

    See Fully Ionized.

    SUBATOMIC PARTICLES

    All particles of less than atomic mass, i.e., the elementary particles
    (proton, neutron, electron, positron, neutrino, meson, etc.) as well as the
    alphaparticles and deutrons, the charge and mass of which indicates them to
    be composite particles.

    SUBCRITICAL (FISSION) REACTOR

    For the purpose of this class, is a reactor which has (a) an active volume
    (core) containing less than the necessary amount of fissionable material
    (fuel) to become critical, and (b) an auxiliary neutron source combined
    therewith in such a way as to trigger fissioning with the active volume and
    with proper amplification of neutrons whereby a steady state chain reaction
    results, i.e., it becomes critical.

    TARGET

    The substance which is subjected bombardment by particles of photons of
    high energy in order to produce nuclear reactions therein.

    THERMAL NEUTRONS

    As the energy of any substance has a temperature factor, that of the
    prevailing temperature is termed thermal energy, and when neutrons reach
    equilibrium with the moderator they are called thermal neutrons.  Their
    most probable energy is about 0.025 ev; or the speed of a gas molecule at
    room temperature.  It is this type of neutron that can best enter the
    nucleus of a fissionable atom and remain there long enough to excite the
    atom to the breaking point, attaining fission.  Two other categories of
    neutrons are intermediate and fast.  Fast neutrons are those resulting from
    fission that have lost relatively little of their energy by collision, etc;
    having energies exceeding 0.1 Mev.  Intermediate neutrons have energies
    lying between thermal and fast neutrons.

    THERMONUCLEAR FUEL

    See Nuclear Fuel.

    THERMONUCLEAR (FUSION) REACTORS

    Apparatus in which fusion reactions occur primarily as the result of random
    collisions within the apparatus between gas particles having a Maxwellian
    distribution of velocities about some average temperature. It is implied
    that such reactions are not the result of accelerating one particle into
    another.  While it is also implied that a high average gas temperature is
    sought for to attain a high thermonuclear reaction rate, nothing is implied
    as to the attainment of any minimum temperature.

    TRANSMUTATION

    The bombardment of a nucleus by particle or photon so as to bring about a
    change in the nucleus resulting in a different isotope of the original
    nucleus or resulting in different element(s).


CLS 376/100
TXT NUCLEAR FUSION:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising structures and
    processes in which two reacting nuclei are combined to yield at least one
    nucleus having a greater mass than either of the reacting nuclei.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass and of the subclasses
    indented hereunder may include, for example, reactions and methods
    including neutron generators wherein the neutron is a product of a fusion
    reaction, e.g., A D-T reaction.

    (2)     Note.  Patents are included in this and indented subclasses even if
    there is failure of the system to actually obtain fusion if it is clear
    that the intent or aim of the patent is to obtain it.

    (3)     Note.  Neutrons from an ionized or plasma system or reaction may be
    appropriately utilized or moderated to bring about or cause a fission-type
    nuclear reaction.

    (4)     Note.  Energy or heat of a nuclear fission reaction system may be
    appropriately utilized to bring about ionization to plasma or fusion
    reaction levels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 121.36+ for plasma heating.


CLS 376/101
TXT Pellet guidance system (e.g., pellet injection means):

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein a fusion fuel body is caused to
    be directed to a predetermined position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 396+ for deflection or focusing of
    charged particles.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclass 507 for
    injection or extraction of charged particles.


CLS 376/102
TXT Inertial confinement (e.g., nuclear explosive):

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the reacting nuclei are contained
    in a fuel body and the disassembly of the body is prevented or retarded for
    a predetermined time by mass forces within the body, said nuclei being
    caused to react by the application of external or internal sources of
    energy.

    (1)     Note.  The above mass forces includes but is not restricted to the
    mass of outer layer.

    (2)     Note.  Nuclear explosives are included in this and indented
    subclasses.  The nuclear explosive may include a chemical explosive to aid
    in causing the nuclei to react.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151+,   for fuel bodies of this subclass type, per se.


CLS 376/103
TXT Photon beam (e.g., laser) irradiation:

    Subject matter under subclass 102 wherein the source of energy is a source
    of coherent electromagnetic radiation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 121.6+ for laser heating of a material
    in general.

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, appropriate subclasses for laser
    structure.


CLS 376/104
TXT Optics:

    Subject matter under subclass 103 wherein a laser beam is directed to the
    fuel body by way of reflectors and/or refractors.


CLS 376/105
TXT Particle beam irradiation (excluding photons):

    Subject matter under subclass 102 wherein the source of energy is either a
    charged particle beam or a neutral particle beam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 121.12+ for electron beam heating of a
    material in general.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 492.3 for electron beam irradiation of a
    material in general.


CLS 376/106
TXT Ion beam irradiation:

    Subject matter under subclass 105 wherein the charged particles are ions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 492.3 for ion irradiation of a material in
    general.


CLS 376/107
TXT Fusion reaction by plural colliding plasmas or particle beams:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the nuclei which are to undergo
    reaction are in the form of plasma or beams which are directed towards and
    caused to impact one another so as to cause the fusion reaction.


CLS 376/108
TXT Including accelerating particles into a stationary or static target (e.g.,
    cockcroft-walton generator type):

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein at least one of the reacting
    nuclei is directed into a fixed fuel body containing the other of the
    reacting nuclei in nongaseous form with sufficient energy to produce fusion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for patents which may also illustrate structure for accelerating
    charged particles.

    151+,   for fuel bodies of this subclass type, per se.


CLS 376/109
TXT With target replenishing:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 having structure or steps for renewing or
    replacing the nuclei in the fixed fuel body.


CLS 376/110
TXT With means for modifying the resultant neutron output, e.g., moderator
    means:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein the reacting nuclei produce a
    neutron of a given energy and wherein this given energy is altered or
    attenuated.


CLS 376/111
TXT With means to pulsate ion beam:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein a plurality of ionized nuclei are
    directed towards a target along a given path and the average number of
    nuclei in the path per unit volume varies with time.


CLS 376/112
TXT Cyclotron type acceleration of nuclei:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein the directed nuclei reach the
    sufficient energy through traversal of an orbital path.


CLS 376/113
TXT With electrostatic voltage generating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein the directed nuclei reaches the
    sufficient energy by means which creates a static electric accelerating
    potential.

    (1)     Note.  The accelerating potential can be provided by a Van de Grof
    belt-driven generator.


CLS 376/114
TXT Self-contained neutron sources (e.g., neutron or accelerator tube):

    Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein all reacting nuclei are contained
    within the same enclosure and the product of the reacting nuclei includes a
    neutron.


CLS 376/115
TXT With cooled electrodes or target:

    Subject matter under subclass 114 wherein either (a) the fixed fuel body,
    or (b) a conductor of electrical energy for accelerating or directing the
    nuclei has a provision for removal of heat therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151,    for structured targets, per se, which may have provision for
    cooling incorporated therein.


CLS 376/116
TXT With ion beam collimator or filtering structure (e.g., extractor electrode):

    Subject matter under subclass 114 wherein (a) the cross-sectional area, or
    (b) the density of the directed nuclei in space, traversed by the directed
    nuclei is altered prior to reaction with the fixed nuclei.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass provides for an
    extractor electrode or other means to modify the diameter of the ion beam.


CLS 376/117
TXT With ion beam collimator or filtering structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein (a) the cross-sectional area
    occupied by the directed nuclei, or (b) the density of the directed nuclei
    in space is altered prior to reaction with the fixed nuclei.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass provides for an
    extractor electrode or other means to modify the diameter of the ion beam.


CLS 376/118
TXT Subterranean source:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein the reaction between the reacting
    nuclei takes place beneath the surface of the earth.


CLS 376/119
TXT With control circuitry:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 having electronic means to vary or
    regulate a parameter of the fusion apparatus.


CLS 376/120
TXT Including bunched particle beam:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein traveling in an ordered path
    organized in clusters at least some of the nuclei involved in the reaction
    traverse fixed paths in groups.


CLS 376/121
TXT Magnetic confinement of plasma:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein (a) the nuclei are in a plasma*
    state in a given volume, and (b) the plasma is restrained to the given
    volume through magnetic forces.

    (1)     Note.  Patents wherein magnetic forces solely generated by (a)
    electric discharge, or (b) self-generation in a plasma are not proper for
    this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for patents which may also illustrate structure for magnetically
    accelerating ions or plasmas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 231.01+ for
    plasma-type discharge systems.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 111.01+
    for plasma-type discharge systems.


CLS 376/122
TXT Plasma formed in situ by laser:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the nuclei after introduction
    into the given volume in a nonplasma state are changed to the plasma state
    with the aid of coherent light.

    (1)     Note.  The nuclei can be introduced into the given volume in the
    form of a liquid, solid, or gas.


CLS 376/123
TXT Principal heating by wave energy:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein most of the energy imparted to
    the nuclei for bringing the nuclei to a condition sufficient for reaction
    to take place is imparted through electromagnetic energy.


CLS 376/124
TXT Heating by time varying magnetic field (e.g., by compression):

    Subject matter under subclass 123 wherein the electromagnetic energy is in
    the form of magnetic flux lines whose density changes with time so as to
    compress the confined plasma.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132,    for subject matter of this subclass type wherein the heating
    represents auxiliary heating.


CLS 376/125
TXT Imploding liners:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the restraining of the nuclei is
    assisted by the sudden inward movement of a body which at least partially
    encloses the plasma.

    (1)     Note.  Liners of this subclass type may be either liquid or solid.


CLS 376/126
TXT With enveloping charged particle confinement (e.g., with e or p layer):

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the magnetic force cooperates
    with a charged particle layer (e.g., a layer of electrons or protons)
    separate from an external to the plasma to form a further restraining means
    for maintaining the plasma within the given volume.

    (1)     Note.  The enveloping charged particle layer can be formed from a
    beam of high energy particles injected within a cylindrical zone or
    chamber, which beam is parallel to and enveloping a long axis and is
    subjected to the effects of a magnetic field in a way so as to contain a
    plasma between it and the long axis of the chamber.

    (2)     Note.  The rotary motion of an E layer would generally be in a
    direction opposite to that of the contained plasma.


CLS 376/127
TXT With injection of electrically charged or accelerated particles:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein electrically charged or
    accelerated particulate bodies are injected into the given volume.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for patents which may also illustrate structure for accelerating
    charged particles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 251 for acceleration of particles.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 359.1+ for
    acceleration of particles.


CLS 376/128
TXT Plasma injection:

    Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein the particulate bodies comprise
    substantially equal numbers of positively and negatively charged ions.

    (1)     Note.  The bodies may be in the form of protons and electrons.


CLS 376/129
TXT Negatively charged particle injection:

    Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein the charged particulate bodies
    are comprised of electrons or ions of negative charge.

    (1)     Note.  The particulate bodies of this subclass may be
    macroparticles, i.e., comprised of atoms and/or molecules, having an
    overall negative charge.


CLS 376/130
TXT Neutral particle injection:

    Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein the particulate bodies have no
    net charge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128,    for subject matter wherein the particulate bodies comprise
    substantially equal numbers of positively and negatively charged ions.


CLS 376/131
TXT Auxiliary heating:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein supplemental energy is introduced
    into the given volume.


CLS 376/132
TXT Electromagnetic wave energy:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the energy is selected from a
    predetermined portion of the electromagnetic spectrum.


CLS 376/133
TXT Toroidal confinement of plasma:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the given volume is generated by
    a rotation of a plane closed curve about an axis lying in its plane.

    (1)     Note.  The given volume may be in the shape of a torus, or doughnut
    or race track.


CLS 376/134
TXT Divertors:

    Subject matter under subclass 133 for removing particles at the extremities
    of the given volume which would otherwise (a) impact on means (i.e.,
    chamber) physically containing the volume, or (b) enter the given volume
    and mix with the plasma.

    (1)     Note.  The difference between the divertors of this subclass type
    and the limiters and liners of subclass 136 is that the divertors remove
    the particles, as by means of gaseous flow or magnetic fields, whereas
    limiters and liners are structural elements which trap or absorb the
    particles.


CLS 376/135
TXT Effuser:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 wherein the removal is accomplished by
    means of a gaseous stream.

    (1)     Note.  The gas stream is usually flowing tangentially to the
    enclosure.


CLS 376/136
TXT Limiters or liners:

    Subject matter under subclass 133 for protecting at least a portion of
    physical means (i.e., chamber) containing the given volume.


CLS 376/137
TXT With solid internal conductor:

    Subject matter under subclass 133 wherein at least a portion of the
    magnetic restraining force is created by electrical current-carrying
    structure located within means (i.e., chamber) physically containing the
    volume.


CLS 376/138
TXT Bumpy torus:

    Subject matter under subclass 133 having means (i.e., chamber) physically
    containing the given volume and wherein the physical surface of the means
    has regularly spaced depressions.


CLS 376/139
TXT Linear confinement:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the given volume forms a linear
    containment zone or chamber for the plasma, the lines of magnetic force
    generally being concentric to the axis of the zone or chamber.


CLS 376/140
TXT Mirror devices:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 having substantially constant magnetic
    force along a portion of the axis of the zone or chamber with at least one
    other portion of the axis having a magnetic force whose intensity is
    substantially greater than the intensity of the constant magnetic force.


CLS 376/141
TXT Plasma formed or contained between spaced electrodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 140 wherein the plasma is bounded on two
    sides by electric charge-carrying conductors.


CLS 376/142
TXT Magnetic structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 comprising means for producing magnetic
    confinement forces and support structure therefore.

    (1)     Note.  This may include the coil design by itself or other
    additional features of the electromagnet system such as a coil support
    structure, a coil cooling system.


CLS 376/143
TXT With circuitry:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein electrical signal processing
    means is employed to vary, determine, or otherwise affect the physical
    characteristics of the reacting nuclei in a fusion device directly or
    indirectly.


CLS 376/144
TXT Plasma formed between spaced electrodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the plasma is produced by an
    electrical discharge between two current carrying conductors.


CLS 376/145
TXT Plasma focus:

    Subject matter under subclass 144 wherein compression of the plasma is
    induced bymagnetic forces generated by the electrical discharge and/or by
    magnetic forces self-generated in the plasma.


CLS 376/146
TXT Including removal or use of impurities or reaction products (e.g., energy):

    Subject matter under subclass 100 for removing (a) reaction products which
    may be in the form of particles (charged or neutral) or electromagnetic
    radiation, or (b) undesired particles which have been introduced into the
    given volume, or (c) a portion of the energy of the particles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 203.1 for propulsion systems involving
    radiant energy.


CLS 376/147
TXT Direct conversion of energy:

    Subject matter under subclass 146 wherein a portion of the energy of the
    particles is transformed into electrical output with the use of a one-step
    process or apparatus for accomplishing said one-step process.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type includes, for example,
    MHD conversion.


CLS 376/148
TXT Including use of heat or radiation to effect a chemical reaction:

    Subject matter under subclass 146 wherein the electromagnetic or thermal
    energy resulting directly or indirectly from the reaction of the nuclei
    causes or aids a chemical reaction between materials other than said nuclei.


CLS 376/149
TXT Shock wave heating of plasma or gas (e.g., mhd heating):

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the nuclei which are to undergo
    reaction are in a plasma or gaseous state and wherein the plasma or gas is
    subjected to compressional force acting at a rate greater than the velocity
    of a compressional wave through the plasma or gas.

    (1)     Note.  The action of force on the plasma or gas may be direct or
    indirect.

    (2)     Note.  The shock wave may be produced by an electrical discharge.


CLS 376/150
TXT Chamber structure or material:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 including details of the geometry or
    composition means (i.e., chamber) for physically containing a given volume
    in which the nuclear fusion reaction occurs.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter under subclass type must consist of more than
    a nominal recitation of a toroidal chambers.  A geometrical description of
    the type in subclass 133 of a normal toroid is considered a nominal
    recitation of a toroidal chamber for purposes of this subclass.


CLS 376/151
TXT Fusion targets or pellets:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein either (a) the two nuclei are
    caused to react with the aid of an irradiating energy beam, or (b) one of
    the two nuclei is part of an energy beam which is to irradiate the other
    nuclei to cause the two nuclei to combine, and (c) wherein at least one of
    the irradiated nuclei comprises in part a fusion fuel body having physical
    characteristics determined by the nature of the irradiating energy beam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109,    for combination of target, accelerator, and provision for
    replenishing the target.

    115,    for combination of target, accelerator, and provision for cooling
    the target.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclasses for methods of making the
    targets.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    subclasses 1+ for methods of making targets.


CLS 376/152
TXT For inertial confinement:

    Subject matter under subclass 151 wherein the physical characteristics of
    the fuel body are such that the disassembly of the body is prevented or
    retarded for a predetermined time by mass forces within the body when the
    body is irradiated by an energy beam of coherent light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for laser irradiation of targets or pellets of this subclass (152)
    type.


CLS 376/153
TXT DETECTION OF RADIATION BY INDUCED NUCLEAR REACTION:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the induced nuclear
    reaction takes place in response to the incidence of electromagnetic or
    particulate energy upon the material and a product of the nuclear reaction
    within a structure, which structure is used to indicate incidence of such
    radiation.

    (1)     Note.  Class 376, this subclass takes all detection whose claims
    include an induced nuclear reaction.

    (2)     Note.  The reactions may include B10 +  N    Li7  +  He4, He3 +  N
      H3 + p (proton recoil), B11 +  N    (B12)  C12  + e, or N1 + Li6   H3+
    He4.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 390.01+ for neutron responsive means
    which claim no induced nuclear reaction.


CLS 376/154
TXT By fission:

    Subject matter under subclass 153 wherein the reaction is fission, i.e.,
    the splitting of a nucleus.


CLS 376/155
TXT With boron:

    Subject matter under subclass 153 wherein the nucleus undergoing nuclear
    reaction is boron.


CLS 376/156
TXT NUCLEAR TRANSMUTATION (E.G., BY MEANS OF PARTICLE OR WAVE ENERGY):

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising the bombardment of a
    material to produce an induced nuclear reaction other than that resulting
    in the splitting of a nucleus.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this class includes reactions wherein
    a nucleus of the material is converted or transformed into a different
    nucleus; inclusive of (a) making the material radioactive, (b) producing
    isotopes of the same or a different element, e.g., Co59 Co60, Th232 U233,
    and (b) producing anihilation radiation, e.g., a matter antimatter reaction.

    (2)     Note.  Where a substance such as U238 (or other material) is merely
    used as a fuel carrier with no stated intention of converting it to fuel,
    the substance U238 is not regarded as fertile material for this and
    indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    340,    for reactors, per se, specifically designed to provide for the
    irradiation of material to produce a nonfission reaction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes and non-coating apparatus for
    growing therein-defined single-crystal of all types of materials, and such
    processes combined with perfecting operations.  A subsequent step of
    irradiation to produce a nuclear transformation is provided for in Class
    376.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses
    1.11+ for class defined compositions and methods comprising a radionuclide
    or intended radionuclide.


CLS 376/157
TXT Gamma or charged particle activation analysis:

    Subject matter under subclass 156 wherein gamma or charged particle
    bombardment of the material results in the production of a transmuted
    nuclei of the material, which product is to be analyzed to yield data
    concerning the nucleus of the material and/or its environment.


CLS 376/158
TXT By neutron bombardment:

    Subject matter under subclass 156 wherein the material is bombarded with
    neutrons.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 390.01+ for neutron responsive means
    involving no induced nuclear reaction.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 2+ and 249+ for
    radioactive materials and treatment thereof which does not involve
    irradiation to produce the radioactive material.


CLS 376/159
TXT Neutron activation analysis:

    Subject matter under subclass 158 wherein the neutron bombardment of the
    material results in the production of a product which is to be analyzed to
    yield data concerning the nucleus of the material and/or its environment.


CLS 376/160
TXT Subterranean:

    Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein the bombardment takes place
    beneath the surface of the earth.

    (1)     Note.  As between Class 376 and Class 250, subclasses 253-269.8
    (well-logging), Class 376 takes all well-logging apparatus and processes
    involving induced nuclear reactions even if only nominally recited except
    when the nuclear reaction is nominally recited and the signal processing
    steps or apparatus are recited in detail (e.g., developing of a ratio of
    two signals, classification is in Class 250, subclasses 253-269.8.


CLS 376/161
TXT Specific nuclides:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein a specified activated nucleus is
    recited.


CLS 376/162
TXT Metals:

    Subject matter under subclass 161 wherein the recited nucleus is a nucleus
    of a metal atom.


CLS 376/163
TXT Aluminum, silicon:

    Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein the metal nucleus is either
    aluminum or silicon.


CLS 376/164
TXT Uranium:

    Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein the metal nucleus is uranium.


CLS 376/165
TXT Hydrogen, chlorine:

    Subject matter under subclass 161 wherein the recited nucleus is either
    hydrogen or chlorine.


CLS 376/166
TXT Oxygen, carbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 161 wherein the recited nucleus is either
    oxygen or carbon.


CLS 376/167
TXT With tracer injection:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein the material is injected into the
    earth and then activated or transmuted.

    (1)     Note.  The material is usually in fluid form.


CLS 376/168
TXT Halogens:

    Subject matter under subclass 158 wherein the material bombarded by
    neutrons is a halogen.


CLS 376/169
TXT Iodine:

    Subject matter under subclass 168 wherein the halogen is iodine.


CLS 376/170
TXT Actinides:

    Subject matter under subclass 158 wherein the material bombarded by
    neutrons is an element of atomic number 89 or greater.


CLS 376/171
TXT Breeder or converter reactor structures:

    Subject matter under subclass 170 wherein the material bombarded with
    neutrons is a fertile material and this fertile material is a component of
    and positioned in, a nuclear fission reactor* comprised of two or more of
    the following structural elements:  moderator structure, fuel structure,
    coolant structure (including primary coolant, per se), or fuel support
    structure.

    (1)     Note.  The nuclear reactor will generally comprise a core of
    fissile fuel assemblies with or without moderator, and a coolant.  The
    fertile material may be (1) positioned in the fissile fuel assembly either
    (a) mixed with the fissile fuel material itself, or (b) as a separate
    distinct component of the fissile fuel assembly; or (2) positioned in a
    nonfissile fuel assembly, i.e., a fertile fuel assembly.

    (2)     Note.  Methods of operation directed refueling schemes are provided
    for in subclass 267.


CLS 376/172
TXT Fertile fuel assembly structure or arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 171 wherein the structure or arrangement of
    the fertile material component is more than nominally recited.


CLS 376/173
TXT Having internal fertile regions:

    Subject matter under subclass 172 wherein components containing fertile
    material are positioned inside the reactor core proper.

    (1)     Note.  Since it is normal for most fissile fuel components to
    include fertile materials along with the fissile materials and still be
    classified as fissile fuel components, for a patent to be placed in this
    subclass as an original, there must be such a preponderance of fertile
    material present that the component itself is classified as a fertile fuel
    component.


CLS 376/174
TXT Having particular coolant fluid flow path or pattern within reactor core:

    Subject matter under subclass 171 wherein the coolant* is made to traverse
    a specifically defined route or channel within the reactor core or the
    route taken is such as to place the coolant into a pattern or network.

    (1)     Note.  The recitation of a coolant flowing or circulating through
    the reactor core is not by itself proper subject matter for this subclass.


CLS 376/175
TXT Orifice or fluid control at inlet or outlet of coolant channels:

    Subject matter under subclass 174 wherein means are provided which will
    alter the amount of coolant which is (a) flowing into the coolant channel,
    or (b) flowing out of the coolant channel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    352,    for similar subject matter.


CLS 376/176
TXT Hydraulic holddown:

    Subject matter under subclass 175 wherein a fuel assembly is positioned in
    the coolant channel and the pressure of the coolant is utilized to help
    maintain the fuel assembly in its desired position in the coolant channel.


CLS 376/177
TXT Plural coolant loops or passes through reactor core:

    Subject matter under subclass 174 wherein (a) coolant is caused to traverse
    the reactor core through separate and independent routes, or (b) coolant is
    caused to traverse the reactor core a plurality of times prior to its being
    sent to a heat exchanger or other utilization means which would remove the
    heat from the coolant.


CLS 376/178
TXT Fuel assembly holddown or support:

    Subject matter under subclass 171 wherein means are provided for
    maintaining the fuel assembly in its desired position within the nuclear
    reactor.


CLS 376/179
TXT Coolant manipulated and used exterior of reactor core:

    Subject matter under subclass 171 wherein the coolant circulating within
    the reactor core area has energy (e.g., thermal or kinetic) added to or
    removed therefrom (e.g., by a heat exchanger, pump, or turbine) exterior of
    the reactor core.

    (1)     Note.  The "energy" may be transferred by heat exchange to a
    secondary fluid, etc., which is then utilized in a turbine.


CLS 376/180
TXT Formation of uranium isotopes:

    Subject matter under subclass 170 wherein the neutron bombardment of the
    actinide material results in the production of uranium isotopes.


CLS 376/181
TXT Uranium 233:

    Subject matter under subclass 180 wherein the isotope produced is U-233.


CLS 376/182
TXT Formation of plutonium isotopes:

    Subject matter under subclass 170 wherein the neutron bombardment of the
    actinide material results in the production of plutonium isotopes.


CLS 376/183
TXT Doping of semiconductors:

    Subject matter under subclass 158 wherein the material is a semiconductor
    which contains an element which is converted to a desired dopant by the
    neutron bombardment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes and non-coating apparatus for
    growing therein-defined single-crystal of all types of materials, and such
    processes combined with perfecting operations.  A process comprising the
    step of irradiation to produce a nuclear transformation is provided for in
    Class 376.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, subclass 512 for
    methods of introducing an electrically active dopant into a semiconductor
    region having a combination of diverse steps in which one step involves the
    conversion of an element into a dopant by nuclear transmutation.


CLS 376/184
TXT Rare earths:

    Subject matter under subclass 158 wherein the material bombarded is at
    least one of La, Ce, Pr, Nd, Pm, Sm, Eu, Gd, Tb, Dy, Ho, Er, Tm, Yb, Lu.


CLS 376/185
TXT Alkali and alkaline elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 158 wherein the material bombarded is
    selected from Group I or Group II of the periodic table.


CLS 376/186
TXT Molybdenum, technetium:

    Subject matter under subclass 158 wherein the material bombarded is
    molybdenum or technetium.


CLS 376/187
TXT Lead, polonium, bismuth:

    Subject matter under subclass 158 wherein the material bombarded is lead,
    polonium, or bismuth.


CLS 376/188
TXT Sulfur, phosphorus:

    Subject matter under subclass 158 wherein the material bombarded is sulfur
    or phosphorus.


CLS 376/189
TXT With reaction product treatment (e.g., recovery, separation):

    Subject matter under subclass 158 wherein the neutron bombarded material or
    its by-products are treated or acted on.


CLS 376/190
TXT By charged particle bombardment:

    Subject matter under subclass 156 wherein the bombardment of the material
    is effected with electrically charged particles.


CLS 376/191
TXT Alpha-neutron sources:

    Subject matter under subclass 190 wherein the charged particles is an alpha
    particle and a by-product of the reaction is a neutron.


CLS 376/192
TXT To produce spallation reaction:

    Subject matter under subclass 190 wherein the charged particle bombardment
    causes the ejection of two or more particles from a nucleus in the material.

    (1)     Note.  The ejected particles can by neutrons, protons, deuterons,
    alpha particles, etc.


CLS 376/193
TXT To produce fissile isotopes:

    Subject matter under subclass 192 wherein the ejected particles produce
    fissile isotopes in a second material.


CLS 376/194
TXT Proton bombardment:

    Subject matter under subclass 190 wherein the charged particle is a proton.


CLS 376/195
TXT With reaction product treatment (e.g., recovery, separation):

    Subject matter under subclass 194 wherein the proton bombarded material or
    its by-products are treated or acted on.


CLS 376/196
TXT Alpha (helium nucleus) bombardment:

    Subject matter under subclass 190 wherein the charge particle is an alpha
    particle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191,    for alpha-neutron sources.


CLS 376/197
TXT Wherein the reaction product is an actinide or transuranium element:

    Subject matter under subclass 196 wherein the alpha bombardment of the
    material produces an element of atomic number 89 or greater.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    192,    wherein alpha particles cause spaliation.


CLS 376/198
TXT With reaction product treatment (e.g., recovery, separation):

    Subject matter under subclass 196 wherein the alpha bombarded material or
    its by-products are treated or acted on.


CLS 376/199
TXT Deuteron bombardment:

    Subject matter under subclass 190 wherein the charged particle is a
    deuteron.


CLS 376/200
TXT Wherein the reaction product is an actinide or transuranium element:

    Subject matter under subclass 199 wherein the dueteron bombardment of the
    material produces an element of atomic number 89 or greater.


CLS 376/201
TXT With reaction product treatment (e.g., recovery, separation):

    Subject matter under subclass 199 wherein the deuteron bombarded material
    or its by-products are treated or acted on.


CLS 376/202
TXT Irradiation capsule, holder, or support:

    Subject matter under subclass 156 wherein the material to be bombarded is
    in a carrier or other support structure and this carrier or other support
    structure is subsequently used to convey, position, or insert the material
    into or remove it from the vicinity of the radiation means.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type includes, for example,
    insertable carriers of the rabbit tube type.


CLS 376/203
TXT SEAL ARRANGEMENT:

    Subject matter under the class definition for substantially preventing the
    escape of fluid from a joint between two elements of a nuclear reactor
    fluid confining means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 628+ for a static contact seal for other than an
    internal combustion engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable.


CLS 376/204
TXT For nozzle:

    Subject matter under subclass 203 wherein one of the two elements is a
    fluid conduit which projects from a surface of a pressure vessel.


CLS 376/205
TXT Between pressure vessel cover and vessel or portion thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 203 wherein one of the elements is a
    container, the interior pressure of which is different from the ambient
    pressure and the other element is a closure element for such a container.


CLS 376/206
TXT Rotating plug-type cover:

    Subject matter under subclass 205 wherein the closure means is capable of
    rotary movement.


CLS 376/207
TXT WITH CONTROL OF REACTOR (E.G., CONTROL OF COOLANT FLOW):

    Subject matter under the class definition for changing (including "shut
    down") or maintaining constant the fission reaction rate or power output of
    a nuclear fission reactor.

    (1)     Note.  Detection of a reactor state is proper subject matter for
    this subclass provided it is in combination with a control means for the
    fission reactor.

    (2)     Note.  For the structure of the subcombination control component
    which is an absorber, see this class (376), subclass 327.


CLS 376/208
TXT Pulsed reactors:

    Subject matter under subclass 207 involving a nuclear reactor which is
    designed to be operated in a pulsed mode or which is designed for the
    sudden injection of a large amount of reactivity.


CLS 376/209
TXT Spectral shift:

    Subject matter under subclass 207 wherein control is realized through an
    adjustment made to the energies of the total neutron population.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass, the word "total" in regard to
    neutron population means the overall or core-wide neutron population.


CLS 376/210
TXT By coolant flow:

    Subject matter under subclass 207 wherein the control involves changing the
    rate at which a given mass of coolant enters or exits a fixed volume of
    reactor structure.


CLS 376/211
TXT Exterior of core (e.g., secondary loop control):

    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein the fixed volume is located
    outside of the primary coolant loop of the reactor.


CLS 376/212
TXT By altering quantity or characteristic of fuel within critical area:

    Subject matter under subclass 207 wherein control of the fission reaction
    is realized (a) by reducing the effective quantity of fission fuel in the
    critical area, or (b) by effecting an in situ change in the physical state
    of the fuel.

    (1)     Note.  The change of the physical state is brought about by the
    lowering of density, such as by melting.


CLS 376/213
TXT Wherein control element includes a fissile material:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 wherein a control element includes a
    material which increases the neutron population present.


CLS 376/214
TXT Reactor start-up:

    Subject matter under subclass 207 wherein the fission rate is manipulated
    to achieve a critical condition having at least as many neutrons produced
    by fission as their are fissions, i.e., self-sustaining fission reaction.


CLS 376/215
TXT By electronic signal processing circuitry (e.g., plural redundant circuits):

    Subject matter under subclass 207 comprising electronic circuit means which
    derives a control signal for raising or lowering reactor power from an
    electrical signal representative of a measured reactor variable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+ for condition
    responsive electrical systems in general.


CLS 376/216
TXT Plural sensed different conditions or measured variables correlated:

    Subject matter under subclass 215 wherein representation of at least two
    different measured variables are utilized in the formulation of the control
    signal.

    (1)     Note.  The body of art in this subclass is that which utilizes, for
    example, electronic computers to analyze practically instantaneously, a
    number of reactor variables or conditions and to automatically warn of
    change of a critical reactor condition or actually apply the safety control
    or other element; to energize a system which automatically makes the
    appropriate adjustment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, appropriate subclasses for electronic computers or
    calculators, per se.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, appropriate
    subclasses for the automatic temperatures and humidity regulation.


CLS 376/217
TXT Control programs:

    Subject matter under subclass 216 wherein at least one of the measured
    variables is caused to be altered by a computerized program or its analog
    equivalent so as to produce a predetermined desired result.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 527 for
    data processing systems or computers designed for use with nuclear reactors.


CLS 376/218
TXT Xenon control:

    Subject matter under subclass 217 wherein an operating program is developed
    to minimize the xenon concentration in the nuclear fuel.


CLS 376/219
TXT By movement of control element or by release of neutron absorbing material:

    Subject matter under subclass 207 wherein control is realized by the
    insertion or withdrawal of a reactivity affecting material from the area
    occupied by fissioning reactor fuel.

    (1)     Note.  For the Structure of the subcombination of the control
    component, per se, see this class (376), subclass 327.


CLS 376/220
TXT Wherein the control element is a reflector or moderator material:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 wherein the control element is fabricated
    from a material which either attenuates incident neutron energy or alters
    the vector velocity of the neutron.


CLS 376/221
TXT Variable fluent reflector/moderator level or density:

    Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein a quantity of liquid, gaseous, or
    particulate material having the capacity to alter neutron energy or
    velocity relative to the quantity of fission fuel can be changed.


CLS 376/222
TXT Moderator dump:

    Subject matter under subclass 221 wherein the fluent material is rapidly or
    completely withdrawn.


CLS 376/223
TXT Rotatable control elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 wherein the surface of the control
    element adjacent the surface of a fuel element revolves about an axis
    parallel to each of said surfaces.


CLS 376/224
TXT Finger-type control elements (insertable into fuel element positions):

    Subject matter under subclass 219 wherein plural control elements joined at
    their points most remote from the fission fuel are moved into a repetitive
    assemblage of fission fuel elements to vacant positions which would
    otherwise be occupied by fission fuel elements.


CLS 376/225
TXT Including shock absorber:

    Subject matter under subclass 224 wherein the control elements are provided
    with some means to retard motion.


CLS 376/226
TXT Wherein control element is driven directly into bed of fuel elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 wherein the control element is moved into
    an assemblage of fuel elements having no fixed position.

    (1)     Note.  These fuel elements are usually piles of spherically shaped
    bodies.


CLS 376/227
TXT Control element movable by means of cable and winch, chains or reels:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 wherein the motion is induced by means of
    a flexible linear member.


CLS 376/228
TXT Wherein driver or motivating is electric:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 wherein the means to move the control
    element is electrically actuated.


CLS 376/229
TXT Electrofluidic:

    Subject matter under subclass 228 having motion induced by an electrical
    means which drives a fluid pressure means which in turn moves the control
    element.


CLS 376/230
TXT Wherein driver or motivating is fluidic:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 having motion directly produced by means
    of fluid pressure.


CLS 376/231
TXT Pneumatic:

    Subject matter under subclass 230 wherein the fluid is a gas.


CLS 376/232
TXT By motion transforming means, e.g., rack and pinion:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 wherein the movement of the control
    element is effectuated by at least a pair of interconnected and relatively
    movable motion transmitting members.


CLS 376/233
TXT Releasable coupling:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 wherein a disconnectable joint is
    provided between the control element and the means producing motion so that
    the motion means may be separated from the control element.


CLS 376/234
TXT Including shock absorber:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 wherein the control element is provided
    with a means to retard motion.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass type usually involves
    motion into the fuel elements.


CLS 376/235
TXT Means for locking control element in desired position:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 including means to prevent motion of the
    control element from a desired fixed position.


CLS 376/236
TXT Including control rod insertion and removal schemes:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 having specific patterns for the movement
    of control elements.

    (1)     Note.  This is usually done to improve the fuel consumption in
    region near the control elements.


CLS 376/237
TXT Group movement of control elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 236 wherein simultaneous movement is induced
    in a plurality of control elements.


CLS 376/238
TXT Setback:

    Subject matter under subclass 236 wherein the neutron control element is
    inserted into a fuel region to less than its full extent and maintained at
    that level for a predetermined time period.


CLS 376/239
TXT Rod or support carrying plural elements or diverse materials:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 wherein at least two neutron absorber
    elements, other nonfuel reactivity affecting mechanisms, or one of the
    above in combination with another reactor component are secured to each
    other and moved as a single unit.


CLS 376/240
TXT Sensing or detecting device attached to, embedded in, or integral with
    control element:

    Subject matter under subclass 207 wherein the structure of the control
    element includes a means for measuring the state of a reactor.

    (1)     Note.  The state is usually the temperature or neutron density.


CLS 376/241
TXT Power output control (e.g., load follows with steam dump):

    Subject matter under subclass 207 wherein control is realized through means
    external to the region of fission reaction which raises or lowers the
    deliverable energy of the system.

    (1)     Note.  For similar subject matter involving a boiling water
    reactor, see this class (376), subclass 379.


CLS 376/242
TXT Means to inhibit control rod movement:

    Subject matter under subclass 207 wherein a reactivity affecting material
    is locked in a fixed position relative to the reactor fuel for a
    predetermined time period.

    (1)     Note.  During this period normal control signals inducing movement
    are usually overridden.


CLS 376/243
TXT With cooling of control element:

    Subject matter under subclass 207 wherein provision is made to remove heat
    from the control element.


CLS 376/244
TXT Temperature reactivity control:

    Subject matter under subclass 207 wherein the fission rate of the fuel is
    changed by altering the temperature of the fuel.


CLS 376/245
TXT TESTING, SENSING, MEASURING, OR DETECTING A FISSION REACTOR CONDITION:

    Subject matter under the class definition for determining the state of the
    reactor system or a component thereof.

    (1)     Note.  When the determination involves a nuclear reaction as a
    portion of the detection chain, see this class (376), subclass 153.

    (2)     Note.  Merely providing a window or a trap for visually detecting
    or sampling or inspecting or mentally judging is not considered as proper
    subject matter for this and indented subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  "Operation" or "reaction" is inclusive of the period from
    startup through shutdown.

    (4)     Note.  The "conditions" generally "measured" or "detected", etc.,
    included such as for example, reactor power level, or reactor period,
    neutron density, neutron flux, neutron flux distribution, radioactivity or
    other radiations, temperature, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    409,    for fuel element having enclosed within it, or integrally
    associated with it, some means, device, or material which may be used to
    warn of a condition or in measuring, sensing, monitoring, etc., of a
    condition during normal use of the fuel.

    450,    for fuel element and its closure structure which includes a
    feature, means, or material useful or assisting in detecting or warning in
    regard to leaks or of an otherwise improperly constructed or functioning
    fuel element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for testing or
    measuring of physical properties.

    250,    Radiant Energy, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous measuring
    or detecting, etc., devices for use in conjunction with neutrons or other
    invisible radiations.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for
    testing or measuring of electrical properties.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+ for condition
    responsive signalling.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for measuring
    or testing of thermal properties.


CLS 376/246
TXT Flowmeters:

    Subject matter under subclass 245 wherein the state determined is the
    passage of a given fluid volume passing a fixed point per unit time.


CLS 376/247
TXT Temperature or pressure measurement:

    Subject matter under subclass 245 wherein the state being determined is a
    temperature or pressure of the reactor system or component thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 100+ for temperature
    measurement, in general.


CLS 376/248
TXT Optics:

    Subject matter under subclass 245 wherein the state determined is the
    visual condition of a component.


CLS 376/249
TXT Vessel monitoring or inspection:

    Subject matter under subclass 245 wherein the state being determined is the
    integrity of a reactor vessel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    901,    Robots, subcollection 44 for robot devices which perform an
    inspecting operation.


CLS 376/250
TXT Leak detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 245 wherein the state being determined is the
    undesirable release of material from within a reactor system or component
    thereof.


CLS 376/251
TXT Fuel element leak detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 250 wherein the component is the fission fuel
    element.


CLS 376/252
TXT By acoustic or ultrasonic wave energy:

    Subject matter under subclass 251 wherein the determination is made by the
    analysis of compressional wave energy reflected or emitted from the fuel
    element.


CLS 376/253
TXT By the detection of fission product external to the fuel element:

    Subject matter under subclass 251 wherein the determination is made by
    sensing the presence of nuclear fission reaction product outside the fuel
    element.


CLS 376/254
TXT Flux monitoring:

    Subject matter under subclass 245 wherein the state being determined is the
    quantity of neutrons existing in a given area per unit time.


CLS 376/255
TXT Directly generating electrical signal (e.g., ion detection):

    Subject matter under subclass 254 wherein the determination is performed by
    electrical means directly responsive to neutrons which means produce an
    electrical signal proportional to neutron incidence.


CLS 376/256
TXT Gas sensors (e.g., hydrogen detectors):

    Subject matter under subclass 245 wherein the state determined is the
    presence of a particular gas in the reactor system or component, such as
    hydrogen.


CLS 376/257
TXT Fuel assay (e.g., burnup):

    Subject matter under subclass 245 wherein the state determined is the
    quantity of fissionable material, i.e., material whose nuclei have the
    capacity to split under irradiation, in a reactor fission fuel element.


CLS 376/258
TXT Position detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 245 wherein the state determined is the
    extent to which an element is inserted or withdrawn relative to the
    position of another element.


CLS 376/259
TXT By particular instrumentation circuitry:

    Subject matter under subclass 245 comprising electrical circuitry designed
    to process signals representing measured quantities from which the state
    can be determined.


CLS 376/260
TXT HANDLING OF FISSION REACTOR COMPONENT STRUCTURE WITHIN REACTOR SYSTEM:

    Subject matter under the class definition for physically moving structure
    within the nuclear fission reactor system.

    (1)     Note.  "Handling" as used in this and indented subclasses includes
    moving, or any motion, of a component or segment thereof from one position
    or location to another within or to the outside of; or altogether
    externally of the reactor; and is inclusive also of a rotating or a
    reciprocating motion, but not of a stationary vibrating motion.

    (2)     Note.  The mere circulation of a fluid component is not considered
    as "handling" for this and indented subclasses; however, a peculiar or
    particular nature of circulation may be so considered.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156,    for particular "handling" of materials or components wherein
    nuclear conversion is also involved.

    308,    for "handling" of reactor materials not provided for elsewhere in
    this class.  For example, the handling of fluid-type reaction products.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, appropriate subclasses for handling
    devices and equipment, per se.


CLS 376/261
TXT Fuel component:

    Subject matter under subclass 260 wherein the object moved is the fission
    reactor fuel.

    (1)     Note.  The fuel material, component, or segment as used in this and
    indented subclasses may be a single fuel element or a cluster, etc., of
    fuel elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    308,    for treatment of fission reactor material.

    356,    for fuel dispersed in liquid moderator, etc.

    359,    for fuel in molten state or in molten vehicle.


CLS 376/262
TXT Including handling of a second different, diverse reactor component, (e.g.,
    control element, moderator element, vessel cover removal):

    Subject matter under subclass 261 wherein the fission reactor fuel is moved
    together with another fission reactor system component.

    (1)     Note.  The fission reactor fuel may be moved relative to the other
    reactor component at the same time they are moved together relative to
    fixed element of the reactor system.


CLS 376/263
TXT With pressure vessel cover removal:

    Subject matter under subclass 262 wherein the movement of fuel requires the
    prior movement of the closure of the fuel containing receptacle.


CLS 376/264
TXT Charging or discharging of fuel:

    Subject matter under subclass 261 wherein the fuel is moved into or out of
    the nuclear fission reactor system.

    (1)     Note.  This normally referred to as refueling of the fission
    reactor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses for machine
    elements or mechanisms, per se, which can be used for mechanically
    manipulating the fuel or other reactor component.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 6+ for
    grapples for handling core components.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, appropriate subclasses for material
    handling equipment, per se.


CLS 376/265
TXT Refueling ball-type reactors:

    Subject matter under subclass 264 wherein the movement of fuel occurs
    within a nuclear fission reactor of the type wherein the fuel elements of
    which have a generally spherical shape.

    (1)     Note.  Such fission reactors are commonly referred to as pebble-bed
    reactors.


CLS 376/266
TXT Means for separating low exposure from high exposure elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 265 wherein the movement of the fuel elements
    include means for directing fuel elements which have been in the reactor
    system for a short period of time to one location and means for directing
    fuel element which have been in the reactor system for a longer period of
    time to another location.

    (1)     Note.  Fuel elements which have no fuel left, i.e., are burned up,
    are usually removed from the reactor system.


CLS 376/267
TXT Refueling schemes, patterns, or fuel cycles (e.g., in/out systems):

    Subject matter under subclass 264 wherein the movement involves at least a
    partial rearrangement of the fuel elements in the reactor system to new
    positions previously occupied by other fuel elements or by movement of the
    fuel from or to different portions of the reactor system.

    (1)     Note.  The purpose of the above is typically to improve fission
    fuel consumption.

    (2)     Note.  For the purpose of this subclass, the rearrangement of fuel
    elements may include the movement of other core elements such as control
    elements or reflector elements.


CLS 376/268
TXT Refueling machines:

    Subject matter under subclass 260 wherein the object is an apparatus for
    moving fission fuel elements.


CLS 376/269
TXT With magazine:

    Subject matter under subclass 268 wherein the transfer of fuel involves the
    use of a temporary fuel storage means.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type includes for example,
    (a) fuel transferring machines which have the capacity to store a fuel
    element, and (b) transfer paths which have storage areas therein.


CLS 376/270
TXT With nonaxial transfer capability:

    Subject matter under subclass 268 wherein the fuel element is rotated from
    a position in axial alignment with respect to its position in the core to
    another position about an axis which intersects the axis of its original
    alignment.


CLS 376/271
TXT Upper axial transfer:

    Subject matter under subclass 268 wherein the fuel element is moved between
    its position in the core and a position above and in axial alignment with
    its core position by means located above the core.


CLS 376/272
TXT Storage container systems for new and/or irradiated core elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 260 wherein reactor core elements are in a
    physical enclosure within the reactor system, which enclosure is distinct
    therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type consists of more than a
    mere container for a single core element and therefore referred to as
    container systems. Structures consisting of more than one container, or
    storage for plural core assemblies, or one container with means to support
    or affix the container in a storage pool are typical of the systems of this
    subclass type, such systems are distinguished by their operative or
    structural association with nuclear reactors.

    (2)     Note.  Search Class 250, subclasses 506.1+, and 515.1+ for generic
    storage devices (particularly shipping casks for radioactive material.

    (3)     Note.  The storage systems herein may include a specific means for
    preventing (and therefor controlling) nuclear fission reactions, e.g., by
    the use of neutron absorber materials or by limiting the number of fuel
    elements in a given storage system.

    (4)     Note.  Included in this subclass are storage systems which include
    means for cooling the core elements.

    (5)     Note.  The storage systems herein are for core elements (new, used,
    or irradiated, or damaged) that still retain their structural form which
    identifies them as core elements, for example, before they have been
    physically or chemically altered for processing of the irradiated or
    radioactive material therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    347,    for similar subject matter.  The structure and also the cooling
    systems for the subject matter of this subclass (272) may be similar to the
    structure and cooling systems for the core elements in the nuclear reactor
    itself.


CLS 376/273
TXT SUBTERRANEAN REACTOR STRUCTURES (E.G., UNDERGROUND CONTAINMENT, UNDERGROUND
    EXPLOSIVE):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the reactor structure is
    recited as being located beneath the surface of the earth.

    (1)     Note.  Underground nuclear explosives are proper subject matter for
    this and indented subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The nuclear reaction energy may be obtained from nuclear
    explosives (either fission or fusion) or from a nuclear reactor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118,    for subterranean systems utilizing Crockcroft-Walton Neutron
    generators.

    160,    for subterranean neutron activation analysis.


CLS 376/274
TXT For minimizing radioactive contamination within an underground chamber or
    of the material removed therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 273 wherein the reactor structure is in an
    underground cavity or is caused to form the cavity and radioactive
    contamination resulting from operation of the reactor structure is removed
    or reduced.


CLS 376/275
TXT For extracting materials, or energy from the earth:

    Subject matter under subclass 273 wherein the energy of the nuclear
    reaction is transferred to the earth or to the reactor structure
    surroundings so as to recover material or transferred energy therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclass 247 for similar processes which do not involve a
    nuclear reactor or which do not involve details of the nuclear explosive.


CLS 376/276
TXT In the form of heated water or steam:
    Subject matter under subclass 275 wherein the extracted energy or material
    is H2O in a heated or vaporized state.


CLS 376/277
TXT REACTOR PROTECTION OR DAMAGE PREVENTION:

    Subject matter under the class definition for reducing undesired effects
    resulting from the operation, malfunction, or failure of a nuclear fission
    reactor component.

    1)      Note.  The utilization of shielding or insulation to reduce or
    prevent irradiation damage is proper subject matter for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    274,    for means or steps for minimizing radioactive contamination within
    an underground chamber or of the material removed therefrom.


CLS 376/278
TXT By minimizing positive coolant void coefficient:

    Subject matter under subclass 277 wherein means is provided which minimizes
    or reduces the amount of reactivity increase due to a loss of coolant.


CLS 376/279
TXT Fire extinguishing or prevention:

    Subject matter under subclass 277 wherein the burning of reactor components
    is the undesired effect.


CLS 376/280
TXT Core catchers:

    Subject matter under subclass 277 wherein component failure within the
    fissile and/or fertile region of a reactor is mitigated through the use of
    a barrier that slows or stops the egress of said components(s) from the
    region.

    (1)     Note.  The barrier will also serve to prevent the egress of any
    other component transported with the failed component.


CLS 376/281
TXT Fluid flow reversal protection:

    Subject matter under subclass 277 wherein the undesired effect is a change
    in the direction of flow of a fluid within a reactor component.


CLS 376/282
TXT Emergency core coolant systems (e.g., injecting coolant into reactor or
    pipe systems):

    Subject matter under subclass 277 wherein the undesired effect is fuel
    melting which undesired effect is minimized by providing an alternate
    supply of coolant to the fuel in the event of stoppate or partial
    diminution of the normally present supply of coolant.

    (1)     Note.  The alternate coolant is usually supplied at a rate
    significantly lower than normal coolant.


CLS 376/283
TXT Pressure suppression and relief:

    Subject matter under subclass 277 wherein the undesired effect is component
    damage (e.g., rupture) due to overpressure which undesired effect is
    minimized by providing an energy removal means to dissipate said
    overpressure.


CLS 376/284
TXT By fusible means (e.g., ice):

    Subject matter under subclass 283 wherein the energy removal means includes
    a material which absorbs energy through a physical change of state.


CLS 376/285
TXT Expansion means (e.g., shock absorbers roller bearings):

    Subject matter under subclass 277 wherein the undesired effect is the
    deformation of reactor components due to thermal stress which undesired
    effect is minimized by providing a structure to accommodate such
    deformation.


CLS 376/286
TXT Pipe expansion joints:

    Subject matter under subclass 285 wherein the structure is included in
    reactor piping system.


CLS 376/287
TXT Shield or barrier between radiation or heat source and object to be
    protected (e.g., insulation, thermal shield):

    Subject matter under subclass 277 wherein the undesired effect (a) is the
    presence of radiation in a given area which undesired effect is minimized
    by providing means to attenuate the radiation prior to its entry into said
    area, or (b) to attenuate the egress of material into the area to be
    protected.

    (1)     Note.  Means to attenuate includes means to prevent or retard the
    egress of steam or effluent from a malfunctioning reactor component.  Said
    steam or effluent will contain at least nominal radioactivity.


CLS 376/288
TXT Particular materials:

    Subject matter under subclass 287 wherein the means to attenuate includes a
    specific composition of matter.


CLS 376/289
TXT Thermal insulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 287 wherein the radiation attenuated is
    thermal radiation.


CLS 376/290
TXT For liquid metal cooled fast reactors (e.g., insulation for vault roof, or
    for the vessel walls as by a layer of stagnant or quasi-stagnant coolant):

    Subject matter under subclass 289 having the attenuation in a system which
    includes an unmoderated fission fuel system cooled by molten metal.


CLS 376/291
TXT Concentric tubes or conduits with insulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 289 wherein the means to attenuate thermal
    radiation is or supported by set(s) of nested cylinders.


CLS 376/292
TXT Concentric tubes or conduits:

    Subject matter under subclass 287 wherein the means to attenuate radiation
    and/or egress of material includes set of nested cylinders.

    (1)     Note.  The outer cylinder may provide an additional means to retard
    the egress of material within the inner cylinder.


CLS 376/293
TXT Containment structures:

    Subject matter under subclass 287 wherein the means to attenuate either (a)
    completely surrounds the fission fuel region, or (b) provides the last
    level of attenuation of radiation prior to its entry into the environment.


CLS 376/294
TXT Pressure vessels:

    Subject matter under subclass 293 wherein the means to attenuate completely
    surrounds the fission fuel region, and has the capacity to contain a
    pressurized fluid.


CLS 376/295
TXT Concrete:

    Subject matter under subclass 294 wherein the means to attenuate is
    constructed from a mixture of cement and aggregate.


CLS 376/296
TXT Prestressed:

    Subject matter under subclass 295 wherein the means to attenuate includes
    structure having built-in compressive or tensile forces.


CLS 376/297
TXT With turbine protection means (e.g., turbine trip or overspeed protection
    means):

    Subject matter under subclass 277 wherein the undesired effect is turbine
    damage which undesired effect is minimized by reducing or eliminating the
    energy transfer from the fissioning fuel.


CLS 376/298
TXT Auxilliary heat removal structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 277 wherein the undesired effect is component
    overheating which undesired effect is minimized by providing additional
    thermal energy transfer from said component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for cooling towers.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    cooling towers.


CLS 376/299
TXT Decay heat removal:

    Subject matter under subclass 298 wherein the components are the fission
    fuel bodies and the energy removed is generated when the reactor is
    shutdown.


CLS 376/300
TXT Recombiners:

    Subject matter under subclass 277 wherein the undesired effect is the
    decomposition of water into hydrogen and oxygen which undesired effect is
    minimized by providing structures or processes to join the hydrogen and
    oxygen to form water.


CLS 376/301
TXT Catalytic:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 having a catalyst present to assist in
    the formation of water.


CLS 376/302
TXT Core restraint means:

    Subject matter under subclass 277 wherein the effect is the undesired
    movement of components in the region of the fission fuel bodies which
    effect is minimized by providing structures or processes to retard such
    movement.


CLS 376/303
TXT In-core restraint means:

    Subject matter under subclass 302 wherein the structures or processes to
    retard such movement are positioned among or within the fuel bodies.


CLS 376/304
TXT For moderator structures:

    Subject matter under subclass 302 wherein the components whose movement is
    retarded are those components which attenuate neutron energy.


CLS 376/305
TXT Corrosion or damage prevention:

    Subject matter under subclass 277 wherein the undesired effect is the
    chemical decomposition of a reactor component which undesired effect is
    minimized (a) by providing the component with a barrier to retard the
    dissolution, or (b) by providing a reactant which will react with the
    corrosion causing agent to remove it from or reduce presence in the reactor
    system.


CLS 376/306
TXT By addition of material to coolant:

    Subject matter under subclass 305 wherein the barrier is established by the
    introduction of a material into the coolant which forms a barrier layer on
    the component or which will react with the corrosion causing agent.


CLS 376/307
TXT With pressurizer means:

    Subject matter under subclass 277 wherein the undesired effect is the
    uncontrolled or pressure variations which undesired effect is minimized by
    means for maintaining a desired coolant pressure.


CLS 376/308
TXT FISSION REACTOR MATERIAL (INCLUDING REACTION PRODUCTS) TREATMENT:

    Subject matter under the class definition for adding or removing a material
    from the system or component thereof.


CLS 376/309
TXT Post accident impurity or contaminant removal:

    Subject matter under subclass 308 including the removal of material
    dislocated by accident or by the failure of a reactor component.


CLS 376/310
TXT Impurity removal:

    Subject matter under subclass 308 wherein undesired material is withdrawn
    from the system.


CLS 376/311
TXT Reprocessing of fuel during reactor operation:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein impurities are removed from the
    fuel while the reactor is operating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    358,    for similar subject matter but wherein there is no treatment of the
    fuel itself.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 393+ for processes of producing or treating
    Radioactive metal.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 3+ for processing or
    reprocessing, in general, of nuclear reactor fuel.


CLS 376/312
TXT By cold traps or hot traps:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein the impurities are removed from a
    fluid stream by lowering the temperature thereof to a point which induces
    precipitation of the impurities.


CLS 376/313
TXT By filters, ion exchangers, or aborbers:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein the impurity is removed from a
    fluid through the use of (a) a porous mass through which the fluid is
    passed to separate from it the material held in suspension, or (b) a
    composition of matter which has the property of replacing the charged
    specie of the material in solution with ions of the composition.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses include filters at the coolant
    inlet and of, and integral with, the fuel assembly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    253,    for the collection of fission products used in the detection of
    fuel element flaws.


CLS 376/314
TXT Gas filters (e.g., adsorbers):

    Subject matter under subclass 313 wherein the material to be removed is in
    the gaseous or vapor state.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, digest 9 for radioactive filters.


CLS 376/315
TXT Electrostatic or magnetic filters:

    Subject matter under subclass 313 wherein the removal is accomplished by an
    electrostatic or magnetic field.


CLS 376/316
TXT By pressurized fluid (i.e., blowdown):

    Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein the impurities are flushed from
    the surface of a reactor component by a fluid driven by a fluid pressure
    differential.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type includes, for example,
    the removal of corrosion products from a heat exchanger by a pressurized
    fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 381 for blowdown systems in
    general.


CLS 376/317
TXT COMBINED:

    Subject matter under the class definition in combination with structures or
    processes not provided for in this class, per se.

    (1)     Note.  The combination of a reactor with a heat exchanger, pump, or
    turbine is provided for elsewhere in this class, see subclasses 179, 211,
    378, 391, and 402.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    340+,   for reactor structures with testing or irradiation facilities.

    347+,   for typical nuclear reactor power plant structure which may include
    a turbine.


CLS 376/318
TXT With propulsion means:

    Subject matter under subclass 317 including a nucleat fission reactor
    combined with a device to move the combined structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 203.1 for propulsion systems involving
    radiant energy.


CLS 376/319
TXT Gaseous core:

    Subject matter under subclass 318 wherein the nuclear reactor has its
    fissionable portion in the gas or vapor state or dispersed in a gas or
    vapor.


CLS 376/320
TXT With direct conversion means:

    Subject matter under subclass 317 wherein the nuclear reaction produces
    energy, a portion of which energy is transformed into electrical output by
    a one-step process or apparatus for accomplishing such one-step process.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclasses 200+ for
    thermoelectric systems, per se; and subclass 202 for the combination with
    radioactive decay heat source.


CLS 376/321
TXT Thermionic:

    Subject matter under subclass 320 wherein the one-step includes the heating
    of a material by the products of the nuclear reaction which material emits
    electrons or ions due to the high temperature induced therein.


CLS 376/322
TXT For storing excess energy:

    Subject matter under subclass 317 wherein the energy produced by the
    nuclear reaction is converted to a storable form for later utilization.


CLS 376/323
TXT With chemical reaction:

    Subject matter under subclass 317 wherein the energy of a nuclear reaction
    is employed to aid a chemical reaction.


CLS 376/324
TXT To produce a combustible fuel:

    Subject matter under subclass 323 wherein a product of the chemical
    reaction can be burned to produce energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    275,    for similar subject matter wherein underground hydrocarbons are
    converted in situ to a combustible fuel.


CLS 376/325
TXT Cracking of hydrocarbons:

    Subject matter under subclass 324 wherein the chemical reaction includes
    the breaking of hydrogen carbon molecular linkages.


CLS 376/326
TXT With laser:

    Subject matter under subclass 317 wherein the structure or process to be
    combined with is a source of coherent electromagnetic radiation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, appropriate subclasses for lasers, per
    se.


CLS 376/327
TXT CONTROL COMPONENT FOR A FISSION REACTOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a reactor control
    element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207,    for a control component in combination with means to move the
    component to control the reactor.

    458+,   for moderator structure which is not useable to control the reactor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, appropriate subclasses for ceramic
    compositions useful as a nuclear reactor component or fuel element material.


CLS 376/328
TXT Liquid control component:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein the reactivity affecting material
    is in a liquid state.


CLS 376/329
TXT With vaporization:

    Subject matter under subclass 328 wherein the liquid is vaporized to adjust
    the amount of reactivity affecting material that is within the reactor core
    region.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass includes, for example, the
    use of a heat pipe for varying the amount of reactivity affecting material
    in the reactor.


CLS 376/330
TXT Liquid metal control component:

    Subject matter under subclass 328 wherein the liquid is a fused or molten
    metal.


CLS 376/331
TXT Gaseous control component:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein the reactivity affecting material
    is in a gaseous state.


CLS 376/332
TXT Telescopic control devices:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein the reactivity affecting material
    is in the form of a plurality of elements adapted to slide or move one
    within the other as in the manner of a telescope.


CLS 376/333
TXT Wherein concentration of the reactivity affecting material varies radially
    or axially of the control element:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein the control element is comprised
    of reactivity affecting material and some other material and the relative
    amounts of each material varies radially and/or axially along the length of
    the control element.


CLS 376/334
TXT By utilizing a follower:

    Subject matter under subclass 333 wherein the axial variation in the amount
    of reactivity affecting material is effected by axially joining an
    auxillary control element (follower) having one reactivity effect to a
    primary control element having a different reactivity effect.


CLS 376/335
TXT Flexible control element:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein the control component is in the
    form of a nonrigid or nonself-supporting element (e.g., a cable or a
    plurality of short elements joined one to the other with flexible or
    pivotal couplings).


CLS 376/336
TXT Fuse actuated devices:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein the control component is moveable
    with respect to the reactor core and the means for affecting movement of
    the control component is actuated by or is responsive to, an abnormal
    reactor operating condition (e.g., abnormal increase in temperature or
    abnormal increase in neutron flux).

    (1)     Note.  The abnormal increase in temperature or neutron flux may
    cause the melting of a solder plug which will then allow the control
    component to move relative to the reactor core into a position which will
    cause a decrease in the reactivity of the reactor core.


CLS 376/337
TXT Particulate type:

    Subject matter under subclass 336 wherein the control component is
    comprised of a mass of separate individual elements which are released for
    movement with respect to the reactor core when the fuse is actuated.


CLS 376/338
TXT Particulate type (e.g., balls):

    Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein the control component comprises a
    mass of separate individual elements of reactivity affecting material.


CLS 376/339
TXT Nonconventual control material:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein the reactivity affecting material
    is defined in terms of its composition or elemental constituents and in
    other than one of the conventional control material, i.e., boron or cadmium.


CLS 376/340
TXT REACTOR STRUCTURES WITH TESTING OR IRRADIATION FACILITIES:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising the combination of two
    or more of the following:  moderator structure, fuel structure, coolant
    structure, fuel support structure along with structure designed to
    facilitate or enhance the capability of the reactor structure for the
    testing or irradiation of materials.


CLS 376/341
TXT With material holder or support positioned outside the radiation source:

    Subject matter under subclass 340 wherein the target holder or support is
    positioned or caused to be positioned outside or adjacent to the radiation
    source.


CLS 376/342
TXT With provision for insertion of material to be irradiated into the
    radiation means:

    Subject matter under subclass 340 wherein the reactor structure is designed
    to allow insertion of the material to be irradiated.


CLS 376/343
TXT Flux trap reactor structures:

    Subject matter under subclass 342 wherein a nuclear fission reactor*
    specially constructed so as to provide an internal fuel* free region in
    which the target can be inserted, the fuel free region having a high
    thermal neutron flux*.

    (1)     Note.  The fuel free region will constitute a region or island of
    internal reflector/moderator.

    (2)     Note.  Flux trap reactors utilized for testing of reactor
    components is proper subject matter for this subclass.


CLS 376/344
TXT By fluid pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 342 wherein the material holder is conveyed
    into and through the radiation means by a fluid.


CLS 376/345
TXT Wherein the fluid is a liquid:

    Subject matter under subclass 344 wherein the transporting fluid is a
    liquid.


CLS 376/346
TXT EPI-THERMAL REACTOR STRUCTURES (E.G., INTERMEDIATE NEUTRON SPECTRUM):

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a nuclear fission
    reactor having some moderating material and wherein the neutrons which
    induce the splitting of nucelei, i.e., fission, have velocities in excess
    of thermal velocities, 2200 meters per second.


CLS 376/347
TXT REACTOR STRUCTURES:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising the combination of two
    or more of the following structural elements: moderator structure, fuel
    structure, coolant structure (including primary coolant, per se), or fuel
    support structure.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type includes, for example,
    thermal reactors, i.e., reactors which contain moderating material which,
    though not necessarily disclosed, reduces the energy of the neutrons to
    thermal energy, e.g., 2200 meters per second or 0.03 ev.

    (2)     Note.  If a reactor is generically recited but is disclosed in the
    preferred embodiment as a type of reactor specifically provided for in the
    preseding subclasses, the original copy is placed in the appropriate
    subclass and a cross-reference copy may be placed in this subclass or in a
    subclass indented hereunder.

    (3)     Note.  The coolant structure must be other than such structure
    built into the fuel structure.  For such structures, see subclasses 424 and
    439.

    (4)     Note.  The fuel support structure of this subclass type is other
    than the support structure for fuel components, per se, as provided for,
    for example, in subclass 437.

    (5)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type may include subcritical
    or neutrons amplifying reactor structures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171+,   for breeder reactors.

    340,    for reactor structures with testing or irradiation facilities.

    346,    for epi-thermal reactors.

    423,    for the moderator enclosed together with the fuel.

    458+,   for moderator structure, per se.

    904+,   for specified materials used as moderator and coolant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 81+ for heat exchangers including
    expansion and contraction relieving or absorbing means.


CLS 376/348
TXT Fast thermal composite core:

    Subject matter under subclass 347 wherein the reactor core is comprised of
    at least two regions, one region operating with fast neutrons and the other
    region operating with neutrons at thermal energies, i.e., about 0.025 ev.


CLS 376/349
TXT Flux flattening:

    Subject matter under subclass 347 for providing a flatter flux profile
    across the reactor core.


CLS 376/350
TXT Moderator component varies in its effective density or materials:

    Subject matter under subclass 347 wherein (a) the number of atoms of
    moderator component per unit volume varies in space, or (b) the nature of
    the composition of the moderator varies in space so as to display a
    different moderating effect in one zone of the reactor core area relative
    to that displayed in another zone.

    (1)     Note.  The normal change in coolant density as is found along the
    length of a fuel assembly in a boiling water reactor is not proper for
    placement in this subclass.  Boiling water reactors are in subclasses 370+.


CLS 376/351
TXT Spaced internal reflectors or moderators:

    Subject matter under subclass 350 wherein reflector* or moderator* material
    is placed inside the reactor core at spaced intervals occupied normally by
    fuel assemblies or other internal reactor core structure.


CLS 376/352
TXT Orifice or fluid control at inlet or outlet or coolant channels:

    Subject matter under subclass 347 wherein means are provided which alter
    the amount of coolant* which is (a) flowing into the coolant channel, or
    (b) flowing out of the coolant channel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175,    for similar subject matter involving a breeder or converter reactor
    structure.

    243,    where the orifice is at the inlet or outlet of a control element.

    246,    wherein the orifice functions as a flow meter.


CLS 376/353
TXT With particular control rod guide structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 347 wherein the reactor is controlled by use
    of a control rod* and structure is provided for guiding the control rod
    during movement thereof, said structure being other than the normal in-core
    control rod guide tube structure.


CLS 376/354
TXT Fuel material in contact with and supported by fluid:

    Subject matter under subclass 347 wherein the fuel material is in contact
    with a fluid and at some point in the reactor, or at some time during the
    reaction, the fuel is also supported by the fluid.


CLS 376/355
TXT Fluidized beds:

    Subject matter under subclass 354 wherein the fuel material is in the form
    of particulate bodies, a plurality of which are grouped together to form a
    bed and wherein a fluid flows through the bed of fuel bodies with
    sufficient force to expand the bed of bodies against any force, e.g.,
    gravity.


CLS 376/356
TXT Fuel dispersed in liquid moderator, solution, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 354 wherein the moderator is in liquid form
    and the fuel is dissolved in, or a particulate form of the fuel is
    homogeneously distributed throughout the liquid moderator to form a
    solution, colloid, or slurry.


CLS 376/357
TXT Vapor forming, separating, or manipulating:

    Subject matter under subclass 356 wherein steam or vapor is (a) formed from
    the liquid moderator at least in part during the course of the reaction,
    (b) separated as steam or vapor from the liquid moderator, or (c) wherein
    such steam or vapor is handled in some way internally or externally of the
    reactor.

    (1)     Note.  For other boiling liquid reactors, see subclasses 370+.


CLS 376/358
TXT With particular in situ reconstitution or modification of fuel moderator
    material:

    Subject matter under subclass 356 wherein the fuel moderator component is
    reconstituted or modified during the operation of the reactor by the
    addition or removal of material other than a gas or vapor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    311,    for similar subject matter but wherein the material is treated.


CLS 376/359
TXT Fuel in molten state or in molten vehicle:

    Subject matter under subclass 354 wherein either the fuel or its carrier is
    in a fused or melted state.

    (1)     Note.  The fuel may be a liquified metal, alloy, or compound or one
    of these dispersed (in particulate form) in a liquidfied carrier metal
    alloy, salt, or other compound.


CLS 376/360
TXT Fuel in form of fused salt:

    Subject matter under subclass 359 wherein the molten fuel or molten carrier
    is a salt.


CLS 376/361
TXT Circulating fluid within reactor:

    Subject matter under subclass 347 wherein one of the reactor components is
    a fluid and is under sufficient pressure as to flow into or within the
    reactor during its operation.

    (1)     Note.  A patent is placed in this and indented subclasses even if
    it is not explicit in the claim that a fluid is circulating or flowing if
    by disclosure the fluid must be or is intended to flow or to circulate.

    (2)     Note.  In the subject matter of this subclass type the flow or
    circulation may be intermittent or pulsed.

    (3)     Note.  A patent is not placed in this and indented subclasses where
    there is no flow or circulation but there is a static pressure acting on a
    fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    354+,   for circulating fluids containing the fuel.


CLS 376/362
TXT Fuel assembly supports:

    Subject matter under subclass 361 wherein structure is provided for
    supporting or maintaining the fuel assemblies in their desired positions
    within the nuclear reactor.


CLS 376/363
TXT Suspended fuel assembly:

    Subject matter under subclass 362 comprising means for supporting fuel
    assemblies by their upper ends from the top of the reactor, e.g., or  by
    being attached to the closure plug.


CLS 376/364
TXT Fuel assembly holddown or locking means:

    Subject matter under subclass 362 wherein means are provided for
    maintaining the fuel assembly in its desired position within the reactor
    against the force of the coolant.


CLS 376/365
TXT Hydraulic or pneumatic:

    Subject matter under subclass 364 wherein a fuel assembly is positioned in
    the coolant channel and the pressure of the coolant itself is utilized to
    help maintain the fuel assembly in its desired position in the coolant
    channel.


CLS 376/366
TXT Plural fluids or a fluid in plural phases circulating within reactor (e.g.,
    pressure tube reactor):

    Subject matter under subclass 361 involving the circulation within a
    reactor (e.g., pressure tube reactor) of at least two fluid streams which
    may differ from each other in chemical composition or physical state, e.g.,
    water and steam, water and molten metal, or hydrocarbon.

    (1)     Note.  For a pressure tube reactor to issue in this or indented
    subclasses, a first fluid must be circulating through the pressure tubes
    with a second fluid being present or circulating outside of the tube
    through which the first fluid circulates.

    (2)     Note.  For single fluid pressure tube reactors, search this class
    (376), subclass 401.


CLS 376/367
TXT In heat pipe means:

    Subject matter under subclass 366 wherein the fluid in plural phases flows
    in a conduit comprised of two zones, one for transport of the fluid in the
    liquid state and the other for transport of the fluid in the gaseous state.


CLS 376/368
TXT Including chemically distinct gas:

    Subject matter under subclass 366 wherein one fluid is a gas which is
    chemically different from other fluids present, e.g., water and helium.

    (1)     Note.  The term "gas" includes a liquid or solid in the vapor state.


CLS 376/369
TXT With formation, separation, or manipulation of a second gas:

    Subject matter under subclass 368 wherein a second gaseous component is
    present in the reactor as either steam or vapor and is (a) formed during
    the course of the reaction, (b) separated from another fluid present, or
    (c) handled in some way internally or externally of the reactor.


CLS 376/370
TXT With formation, separation, or manipulation of a vapor (e.g., boiling water
    reactor (bwr) type):

    Subject matter under subclass 366 wherein one of the fluids is steam or
    vapor which is (a) formed at least in part during course of reaction, (b)
    separated as steam or vapor from another fluid, or (c) handled as such in
    some way internally or externally of the reactor.


CLS 376/371
TXT With vapor-liquid separating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 370 having structure for separating or
    removing the vapor from the liquid.


CLS 376/372
TXT With jet pump:

    Subject matter under subclass 370 wherein at least one of the fluids is
    caused to circulate with the aid of a jet pump.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    392     and 407, for other combinations having jet pumps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 151+ for jet pumps, per se.


CLS 376/373
TXT Having specified fluid flow path or pattern within reactor core:

    Subject matter under subclass 370 wherein the coolant is made to traverse a
    specified or predetermined route or channel within the reactor core or the
    route taken is such as to place the coolant into a pattern or network which
    serves to exert a particular effect upon the reactor or reaction.

    (1)     Note.  The recitation of a coolant flowing or circulating through
    the reactor core is not by itself enough to place a patent in this or
    indented subclasses.


CLS 376/374
TXT Plural separate coolant loops through reactor core:

    Subject matter under subclass 373 wherein coolant is caused to traverse the
    reactor core through separate and independent routes.


CLS 376/375
TXT With plural, coolant passes through reactor core:

    Subject matter under subclass 373 wherein the coolant is caused to traverse
    the reactor core a plurality of times prior to its being sent to a heat
    exchanger or other utilization means.


CLS 376/376
TXT Re-entrant type:

    Subject matter under subclass 375 wherein the plural coolant passes, the
    coolant flows first along one flow path in a fuel element structure in one
    direction and then flow through a different flow path in the same fuel
    element structure in the reverse direction.

    (1)     Note.  The flow, for example, may first be along the inner surface
    of the outer wall of the fuel assembly and then reverse its direction and
    flow back through a center portion of the fuel assembly.


CLS 376/377
TXT With particular flow directing or diverting means (e.g., flow baffle):

    Subject matter under subclass 373 wherein structure is provided solely for
    the specific purposes of altering the direction of coolant flow.


CLS 376/378
TXT Vapor manipulated or used exterior of reactor core:

    Subject matter under subclass 370 wherein the steam or vapor has energy
    (e.g., thermal or kinetic) added to or removed therefrom (e.g., by a heat
    exchanger, pump, or turbine) exterior of the reactor core.


CLS 376/379
TXT With flow control of fluid within reactor:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 wherein the manipulation or utilization
    of the vapor exteriorly of the reactor effects some control of (a) the flow
    of the fluids within the reactor core, or (b) the flow of the fluids to an
    external component.


CLS 376/380
TXT Nonaqueous vapor:

    Subject matter under subclass 370 wherein one of the fluids is nonaqueous.


CLS 376/381
TXT Pebble bed reactor:

    Subject matter under subclass 361 wherein the fuel material is in the form
    of generally spherical elements, a plurality of which are held together in
    a container.


CLS 376/382
TXT Having core of separate pebble containers:

    Subject matter under subclass 381 wherein the fuel elements are in a
    plurality of separate containers which are arranged together to form the
    active region of the core.


CLS 376/383
TXT Fluid is a gas:

    Subject matter under subclass 361 wherein the only fluid being circulated
    or otherwise flowing within the reactor is in a gaseous state.

    (1)     Note.  Patents are placed into this and indented subclasses even
    though the gas is capable of existing normally in a nongaseous phase
    provided it is maintained in the reactor without permitting any substantial
    quantity of it to revert to the nongaseous phase.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is inclusive of gas having entrained solids.


CLS 376/384
TXT Wherein the gas is steam:

    Subject matter under subclass 383 wherein the fluid is the vapor phase of
    water.


CLS 376/385
TXT Having specified flow path or pattern within reactor core:

    Subject matter under subclass 383 wherein the coolant is made to traverse a
    specified or predetermined route or channel within the reactor core or the
    route taken is such as to place the coolant into a pattern or network which
    serves to exert a particular effect upon the reactor or reaction.

    (1)     Note.  The recitation of a coolant flowing or circulating through
    the reactor core is not by itself enough to place a patent in this or
    indented subclasses.


CLS 376/386
TXT Plural separate loops:

    Subject matter under subclass 385 wherein coolant is caused to traverse the
    reactor core through separate and independent routes.


CLS 376/387
TXT Plural passes through core:

    Subject matter under subclass 385 wherein the coolant is caused to traverse
    the reactor core a plurality of times prior to its being sent to a heat
    exchanger or other utilization means.


CLS 376/388
TXT Re-entrant type:

    Subject matter under subclass 387 wherein in the plural coolant passes, the
    coolant flows first along one flow path in a fuel element structure in one
    direction and then flows through a different flow path in the same fuel
    element structure in the reverse direction.

    (1)     Note.  The flow, for example, may first be along the inner surface
    of the outer wall of the fuel assembly and then reverse its direction and
    flow back through a center portion of the fuel assembly.


CLS 376/389
TXT With particular flow directing or diverting means (e.g., flow baffle):

    Subject matter under subclass 385 wherein structure is provided solely for
    the specific purpose of altering the direction of coolant flow.


CLS 376/390
TXT With core bypass means (e.g., passage along core barrel or through shield
    structure):

    Subject matter under subclass 389 wherein the flow path or pattern of the
    altered coolant flow includes a path which bypasses the fuel assemblies in
    the core.


CLS 376/391
TXT Manipulated or used exterior of the reactor core:

    Subject matter under subclass 383 wherein the fluid circulating within the
    reactor core area is a coolant which has energy (e.g., thermal or kinetic)
    added to or removed therefrom (e.g., by a heat exchanger, pump, or turbine)
    exterior of the reactor core.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210,    wherein the manipulation involves modification of coolant flow to
    control the reactor.


CLS 376/392
TXT With jet pump:

    Subject matter under subclass 391 wherein the coolant is caused to
    circulate with the aid of a jet pump.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclass 151 for jet pumps, per se.


CLS 376/393
TXT With coaxial flow:

    Subject matter under subclass 391 wherein the coolant exterior of the core
    is caused to flow through a concentric pipe arrangement such that the
    coolant will flow in one direction through the inner pipe and (generally)
    in the opposite direction through the annulus between the inner and outer
    pipes.


CLS 376/394
TXT With single structure component containment (e.g., pod arrangement):

    Subject matter under subclass 391 wherein components of the nuclear reactor
    system are placed within bores of monolithic structure.


CLS 376/395
TXT Having specified fluid flow path or pattern within reactor core:

    Subject matter under subclass 361 wherein the coolant is made to traverse a
    specified or predetermined route or channel within the reactor core or the
    route taken is such as to place the coolant into a pattern or network which
    serves to exert a particular effect upon the reactor or reaction.

    (1)     Note.  The recitation of a coolant flowing or circulating through
    the reactor core is not itself enough to place a patent in this or indented
    subclasses.


CLS 376/396
TXT Plural separate coolant loops through reactor core:

    Subject matter under subclass 395 wherein the coolant is caused to traverse
    the reactor core through separate and independent routes.

    (1)     Note.  The coolant loops can be joined to a common conduit outside
    of the reactor.


CLS 376/397
TXT Plural passes:

    Subject matter under subclass 395 wherein the coolant is caused to traverse
    the reactor core a plurality of times prior to its being sent to a heat
    exchanger or other utilization means.


CLS 376/398
TXT Re-entrant type:

    Subject matter under subclass 397 wherein the plural coolant passes, the
    coolant flows first along one flow path in a fuel element structure in one
    direction and then flows through a different flow path in the same fuel
    element structure in the reverse direction.

    (1)     Note.  The flow, for example, may first be along the inner surface
    of the outer wall of the fuel assembly and then reverses its direction and
    flow back through a center portion of the fuel assembly.


CLS 376/399
TXT With particular flow directing or diverting means (e.g., flow baffle):

    Subject matter under subclass 395 wherein structure is provided solely for
    the specific purpose of altering the direction of coolant flow.


CLS 376/400
TXT With core bypass means (e.g., passage along core barrel or through shield
    structure):

    Subject matter under subclass 399 wherein the flow path or pattern of the
    altered coolant flow includes a path which bypasses the fuel assemblies in
    the core.


CLS 376/401
TXT One-fluid-type pressure tube reactor:

    Subject matter under subclass 395 wherein the flow channels in the reactor
    are formed by a plurality of spaced tubes or conduits, the interiors of
    which are each at pressure substantially higher than the pressure of the
    adjacent medium.


CLS 376/402
TXT Manipulated or used exterior of reactor core:

    Subject matter under subclass 361 wherein the fluid circulating within the
    reactor core area is a coolant which has energy (e.g., thermal or kinetic)
    added to or removed therefrom (e.g., by a heat exchanger, pump, or turbine)
    exterior of the reactor core.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210,    wherein the manipulation involves modification of coolant flow to
    control the reactor.

    369+,   378+, 380, and 391+, for similarly handling gases for use exterior
    of reactor core.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for cooling towers.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    cooling towers.


CLS 376/403
TXT Including tank, pool, or reservoir (e.g., swimming pool):

    Subject matter under subclass 402 wherein a relatively large mass of fluid
    is maintained within a vessel which serves as a tank, pool, or reservoir.

    (1)     Note.  Tank-type reactors, i.e., wherein the reactor core, pumps,
    and heat exchanger are all immersed in the same fluid, are proper subject
    matter for this and indented subclasses.


CLS 376/404
TXT Having reactor core and heat exchanger or pump therein:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 having one vessel in which is situated
    the reactor core, primary heat exchangers, or pump, all of which are
    immersed in the liquid coolant.


CLS 376/405
TXT With particular heat exchanger structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 404 wherein the heat exchanger is more than
    nominally disclosed.

    (1)     Note.  The mere disclosure of a fluid flowing through a heat
    exchanger is insufficient basis for classification in this subclass.


CLS 376/406
TXT Compact or integral (e.g., heat exchanger, core, pumps in same vessel):

    Subject matter under subclass 402 wherein the components of the reactor
    circuit, e.g., heat exchanger, core, pumps, are all contained with a common
    vessel.

    (1)     Note.  The vessel may be partitioned with the reactor core in one
    part, heat exchanger in another and separate part, etc.


CLS 376/407
TXT With jet pumps:

    Subject matter under subclass 402 wherein the coolant is caused to
    circulate with the aid of a jet pump.


CLS 376/408
TXT With means or structure to flash coolant into vapor:

    Subject matter under subclass 402 wherein the coolant is caused to abruptly
    change to the vapor phase, e.g., by sudden pressure reduction.


CLS 376/409
TXT FUEL COMPONENT STRUCTURE:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising an integral structure
    the constituent material of which includes, at least in part, a nuclear
    fuel*.

    (1)     Note.  A patent to be placed as an original into this and indented
    subclasses may be associated with another reactor component when the other
    component is so associated with the fuel component that the plural
    components are treated or handled as one, as when within the fuel component
    structure there is included some other component structure such as a
    coolant, moderator, insulator, thermocouple, or other structure.

    (2)     Note.  For processes of fabricating or manufacturing reactor fuel
    component, search appropriate manufacturing class.

    (3)     Note.  Patents that claim some particular handling of the fuel
    component are placed as originals in the appropriate subclasses in this
    class and may be crossed to this and indented subclasses.

    (4)     Note.  The fuel material inself may be solid, liquid, or gaseous.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261+,   for patents that claim some particular handling of the fuel
    component.

    347,    for patents claiming a fuel separately associated in some
    particular manner with another reactor component, including a fluid
    component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 400.1+ for methods of assembly and
    disassembly of fuel elements, and subclass 723 for apparatus for
    disassembly of fuel elements.  See subclass 906 for a cross-reference art
    collection of documents reflecting to nuclear device making.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 401 for heat-treated metal stock which
    may be useful in the production of fuel elements; and subclass 132 for
    heat-treated actinide metals or alloys.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 625+ for compositions not otherwise
    provided for that may be used as fuels or in fabricating fuel elements.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, particularly subclasses 1+.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 249+ for inorganic
    compounds of the actinide series elements which may be useful as fuel
    components.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 6 for processes of coating nuclear fuel
    particles or elements.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, appropriate subclasses for ceramic
    compositions useful as a nuclear reactor component or fuel element material.


CLS 376/410
TXT With means to prevent thinning of the cladding (e.g., amoeba effect):

    Subject matter under subclass 409 wherein the fuel component structure
    contains a material which serves to inhibit the thinning of the fuel
    covering (i.e., cladding) by diffusion during reactor operation (i.e.,
    "amoeba effect").


CLS 376/411
TXT Spherical particles:

    Subject matter under subclass 409 wherein the fuel is in a spherically
    shaped form.


CLS 376/412
TXT Encased with nonfuel component:

    Subject matter under subclass 409 wherein a material (e.g., fluid) or
    structural element having a reactor function different from that of the
    fuel (e.g., moderator, heat insulator, coolant) is encased, enclosed, or
    sealed together with the fuel material within a ingle container (i.e., a
    "cladding").


CLS 376/413
TXT With internal pressurizer:

    Subject matter under subclass 412 wherein a means is provided within the
    container (ie., cladding) for maintaining the pressure within the fuel
    component substantially constant during or throughout its operating life,
    e.g., by releasing a gas subsequent to fabrication of the fuel component.


CLS 376/414
TXT Coated, preformed, or impregnated layer or part or adhesively bonded layers
    or parts:

    Subject matter under subclass 412 including a preformed layer or part
    having a coating thereon or an impregnate therein, or plural preformed
    layers bonded together.

    (1)     Note.  The bonding may be either autogeneous or by means of a
    bonding agent.

    (2)     Note.  When the preform is porous, the coating or impregnating
    material may be located or concentrated upon the surface or may penetrate
    substantially the entire layer or part.


CLS 376/415
TXT Lubricating layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 414 wherein the coating or impregnate
    comprises a lubricant.


CLS 376/416
TXT Multiple or composite cladding-type layers:

    Subject matter under subclass 414 wherein the cladding itself is comprised
    of a plurality of layers.


CLS 376/417
TXT Including getter layer or barrier layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 416 wherein at least one of the cladding
    layers acts or functions as an absorber or barrier with respect to the
    transport of fuel or nuclear reaction products between the fuel and an
    outer cladding layer.


CLS 376/418
TXT Getter, fission product retainer or filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 412 wherein the nonfuel component functions
    as an absorber or complete or selective barrier with respect to the
    transport of fuel or nuclear reaction products.


CLS 376/419
TXT Burnable poison:

    Subject matter under subclass 412 wherein the nonfuel component is a
    burnable poison*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    447,    for a burnable poison in fuel pack or bundle but not encased with
    the fuel itself.


CLS 376/420
TXT Interpellet spacing or positioning means:

    Subject matter under subclass 412 wherein the encased material is a nonfuel
    material which is positioned between two separate fuel bodies, i.e.,
    pellets.


CLS 376/421
TXT Homogeneously intermixed:

    Subject matter under subclass 412 wherein the encased material is
    intermixed, more or less, homogeneously throughout the fuel material.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass type includes fuel
    dissolved or dispersed in a fluid moderator; the fuel and encased material
    may be a granulated mixture or in the form of a solid solution, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 625+ for radioactive compositions which
    may include the nuclear fuel material.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, appropriate subclasses for ceramic
    compositions useful as a nuclear reactor component or fuel element material.


CLS 376/422
TXT Alloyed fuel:

    Subject matter under subclass 421 wherein the fuel or a part thereof is
    metallic which is alloyed with the encased material which is also metallic.


CLS 376/423
TXT Moderator or reflector:

    Subject matter under subclass 412 wherein the encased material is a neutron
    moderator or reflector material.


CLS 376/424
TXT Coolant or heat exchange material:

    Subject matter under subclass 412 wherein the encased material is a
    coolant* or heat exchange material.


CLS 376/425
TXT Heat insulating material:

    Subject matter under subclass 412 wherein the encased material is not
    transmissive of thermal energy, i.e., is a heat insulating material.


CLS 376/426
TXT Plural fuel segments or elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 409 wherein the fuel component structure is
    comprised of either (a) a plurality of fuel segments which are sealed,
    enclosed, or contained within a single container, or (b) a plurality of
    elements assembled together with each element itself consisting of an
    enclosed, sealed, or contained integral mass of fuel or a plurality of fuel
    segments.


CLS 376/427
TXT In solid moderator block:

    Subject matter under subclass 426 wherein the structure for attenuating
    neutron energy takes the form of a given volume, usually a parallelpiped,
    which contains nuclear fuel eithe as an admixture or discrete bodies,
    positioned therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    421,    for fuel homogeneously mixed with moderator.

    423,    for fuel encased with moderator.


CLS 376/428
TXT Wherin the fissile content varies radially or axially within the same
    container (e.g., plural fuel layers):

    Subject matter under subclass 426 wherein the plural segments are so
    constituted and arranged within a container that the fissile* content of
    the container varies radially or axially.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    435,    for plural fuel elements in a pack or bundle, the fissile content
    of which varies radially or axially.


CLS 376/429
TXT Complementary segments within same container:

    Subject matter under subclass 426 wherein a plurality of fuel segments are
    included within a container with the segments being constructed or shaped
    to complement or mate with each other.

    (1)     Note.  The mere use of a flat surface on the segments (which would
    allow stacking) is not sufficient for placement in this subclass.


CLS 376/430
TXT Spherically shaped segments within same container:

    Subject matter under subclass 426 wherein the fuel segments are
    approximately sperically shaped pellets and are randomly positioned within
    a container.


CLS 376/431
TXT Concentric cylindrical elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 426 comprising at least two tubular fuel
    elements one of which is nested inside the other.


CLS 376/432
TXT Plate-type fuel elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 426 wherein the fuel elements are in the form
    of plates which are at least in part, spaced from and substantially
    parallel to each other.


CLS 376/433
TXT Stacked (e.g., candu type reactor fuel components):

    Subject matter under subclass 426 wherein plural fuel segments, elements,
    or components are assembled in a linear normally vertically realationship,
    e.g., one above the other.


CLS 376/434
TXT In pack or bundle:

    Subject matter under subclass 426 wherein the plural segments or elements
    are held together in a pack or bundlelike relationship relative to each
    other or to a container or to other structure, by a spacing, supporting, or
    securing means.


CLS 376/435
TXT Wherein the fissile content varies radially or axially across the pack or
    bundle:

    Subject matter under subclass 434 wherein the amount or concentration of
    fissile* material varies radially and/or axially across the pack or bundle.

    (1)     Note.  The variation of fissile isotope includes the use of one
    fissile isotope, e.g., plutonium 239 in some fuel members, and another
    fissile isotope, e.g., Uranium 235, in other fuel members.


CLS 376/436
TXT Wire-wrapped fuel elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 434 wherein the spacing means comprises a
    wire wrapped around a fuel element.

    (1)     Note.  The wire may be wrapped in a helical fashion.


CLS 376/437
TXT Having the fuel element ends positioned on or attached to rails:

    Subject matter under subclass 434 wherein the fuel elements have at least
    one of their ends attached to or positioned on a bar (rail).

    (1)     Note.  The pack or bundle will normally have a plurality of such
    rails with the rails being generally parallel to one another.

    (2)     Note.  The rails are not to be considered grids.


CLS 376/438
TXT Including grid:

    Subject matter under subclass 434 wherein a multiaperture structure holds
    or maintains the plural fuel segments or elements in a spaced array.

    (1)     Note.  The multiaperture structure may be a grating or egg
    cratelike structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 664, 666, and 668
    for similar grid structures, per se.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 60.1 for similar grid structures, per se.

    248,    Supports, subclass 68.1 for similar grid structures, per se.


CLS 376/439
TXT With coolant flow path deflecting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 438 wherein the grid is provided with
    structure for the specific purpose of altering (deflecting) the direction
    of coolant flow.


CLS 376/440
TXT For ends of fuel elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 438 wherein the grid contacts and engages the
    ends of the fuel elements.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type may include tie rod end
    plates which engage the ends of the fuel elements.


CLS 376/441
TXT With nonintegral fuel element contacting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 438 wherein the grid is provided with a
    separable component and this component is utilized to contact and maintain
    the fuel pins in the spaced apart array.


CLS 376/442
TXT With fuel element contacting protuberance or projection:

    Subject matter under subclass 438 wherein the grid comprises walls defining
    fuel element compartments, at least one wall of which is provided with
    means extending away from the wall into the compartment to position the
    fuel element therein.


CLS 376/443
TXT With coolant flow path deflecting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 434 wherein structure is provided for the
    specific purpose of altering (deflecting) the direction of coolant flow.


CLS 376/444
TXT With coolant flow bypass means:

    Subject matter under subclass 443 wherein structure is provided such that a
    portion of the coolant does not come into direct contact with the nuclear
    fuel containing members.


CLS 376/445
TXT With thermal expansion compensating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 434 with means to compensate for changes in
    dimension of at least a part of the pack or bundle due to thermal expansion.


CLS 376/446
TXT With removable member:

    Subject matter under subclass 434 wherein the pack or bundle includes a
    member which is removable from the rest of the pack or bundle, e.g., a fuel
    pin, moderator pin, poison pin, a grid, a sheath, etc.


CLS 376/447
TXT Including separate burnable poison or moderator:

    Subject matter under subclass 434 wherein the pack or bundle contains
    burnable poison* or moderator which is not encased together with the fuel,
    that is, the burnable poison or moderator will be in its own separate pin
    or element, in a grid, in the sheath, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    419,    for burnable poison encased with the fuel.

    423,    for moderator encased with the fuel.


CLS 376/448
TXT With means for spacing apart adjacent packs or bundles:

    Subject matter under subclass 434 wherein the assemblies or bundles contain
    structure which serves to maintain the outer surfaces of adjacent packs or
    bundles spaced apart from one another.


CLS 376/449
TXT Having provision or structure for insertion of control elements therein:

    Subject matter under subclass 434 wherein the pack or bundle has provision
    or structure which allows control elements to be inserted therein.


CLS 376/450
TXT With condition sensing or indicating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 409 wherein the fuel component includes a
    structure or material for sensing or indicating some condition of the fuel
    component.

    (1)     Note.  Sensing structure includes, for example, thermocouples and
    strain gages; indicating material may include a gas.  The conditions sensed
    or indicated may include the integrity of the cladding, temperature, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247,    for temperature or pressure measurement.

    251,    for apparatus for or process of detecting, sensing, or monitoring a
    leaking fuel element.


CLS 376/451
TXT Having particular end closure or seal (e.g., weld, plug, cap, etc):

    Subject matter under subclass 409 including a particular or specific means
    for closing the end(s) of a fuel element or component, e.g., weld, cap, etc.


CLS 376/452
TXT With indexing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 451 wherein the fuel element end cap has a
    particular distinguishing feature or structure associated therewith for
    discerning its identity among other fuel elements.


CLS 376/453
TXT Fuel support or covering provided with fins, projections, prongs, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 409 having means to contain, cover, or
    support the fuel, which means is provided with internal or external
    projections, protuberances, prongs, fins, or other similar structure.

    (1)     Note.  The fins, etc., may serve such diverse functions as spacing
    members, support, dividers, aligning of or with heat exchange and fluid
    flow passages, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    436,    for wire-wrapped fuel pins in a pack or bundle.


CLS 376/454
TXT With external fins, projections, prongs, etc:

    Subject matter under subclass 453 wherein the fins, etc., are on the outer
    surface of the fuel container, support, or covering.


CLS 376/455
TXT Hollow, annular, or graduated fuel layers or members (e.g., concentric,
    helical, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 409 wherein at least the portion containing
    the fuel material itself is in the form of a sheet or tube which may be
    arranged or associated with itself concentrically or helically.


CLS 376/456
TXT Vented fuel:

    Subject matter under subclass 409 wherein the fuel component includes a
    means to release fission products therefrom during normal operation of a
    nuclear reactor.


CLS 376/457
TXT Nonconventional jacket or can material:

    Subject matter under subclass 409 wherein the fuel is covered or clad by a
    material other than the conventional cladding materials of Al, Zr, steel,
    etc.


CLS 376/458
TXT MODERATOR OR REFLECTOR COMPONENT STRUCTURE FOR A FISSION REACTOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising structure whose
    proximate function is to attenuate the energy of an incident neutron
    (moderator) or to alter the trajectory of an incident neutron (reflector)
    in a nuclear fission reactor.


CLS 376/459
TXT With means for keying or assembling moderator blocks together:

    Subject matter under subclass 458 wherein the material for reducing neutron
    energy is formed into a given volume, usually a parallelepiped, which is so
    shaped as to facilitate the interconnection of the given volumes one with
    another.


CLS 376/460
TXT ROTATING PLUG-TYPE COVER:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a closure for a
    fission reactor vessel which closure is capable of rotary movement.


CLS 376/461
TXT VESSEL SUPPORTS (E.G., CORE VESSEL-SUPPORTS):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein load-bearing means are
    provided to accomodate the weight of a fission reactor vessel in a fixed
    position.


CLS 376/462
TXT GRIDS:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a multiaperature
    structure holds or maintains reactor components in a spaced array.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 664, 666, and 668
    for similar type grid structures, per se.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 60.1 for similar grid structures.

    248,    Supports, subclass 68.1 for similar grid structures.


CLS 376/463
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising material not provided
    for elsewhere.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 376/900
TXT PARTICULAR MATERIAL OR MATERIAL SHAPES FOR FISSION REACTORS.

    Collections of patents under the class definition that claim or disclose a
    specific or particular reactor component by its material make-up
    (composition, etc.) or when in some particular shape, and not amounting to
    structure provided for in the main schedule above.


CLS 376/901
TXT Fuel:

    Subject matter under subclass 900 wherein the fuel is defined by its
    material makeup.


CLS 376/902
TXT With external lubricating or absorbing material:

    Subject matter under subclass 901 wherein the outer surface of the fuel
    element is provided with a material which facilitates assembly of the fuel
    elements with their spacing, supporting, or scuring means by reducing the
    friction on the fuel elements or is provided with an absorber to facilitate
    handling during refueling.


CLS 376/903
TXT Shapes:

    Subject matter under subclass 901 wherein the fuel is formed into a
    specific or peculiar shape.


CLS 376/904
TXT Moderator, reflector, or coolant materials:

    Subject matter under subclass 900 wherein a specific moderator or coolant
    material is claimed or disclosed which goes beyond such normal materials as
    graphite, Be, H2O, D2O, etc.


CLS 376/905
TXT Organic:

    Subject matter under subclass 904 wherein the material is organic.


CLS 376/906
TXT Metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 904 wherein the material is a metal.


CLS 376/907
TXT Dissociative coolants:

    Subject matter under subclass 904 wherein the coolant is a material which
    dissociates upon heating.


CLS 376/908
TXT REACTOR GEOMETRY (OR PART THEREOF) DEFINED IN TERMS OF NUMERICAL VALUES:

    Subject matter involving numerical relationship between various parameters
    of a nuclear fission reactor.


CLS 376/909
TXT MOBILE REACTORS:

    Subject matter involving a nuclear power generating system which is
    portable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    318,    for nuclear plants which provide propulsion.

    406,    for nuclear plants which are compact or integral.


CLS 376/910
TXT ROTATING REACTORS:

    Subject matter involving a nuclear reactor wherein the core (or at least a
    portion thereof) revolves or rotates about an axis.


CLS 376/911
TXT PLURAL REACTOR SYSTEMS:

    Subject matter involving at least two reactors which are associated
    together in some manner so as to present an overall single system.


CLS 376/912
TXT NUCLEAR REACTOR SYSTEMS SITUATED IN THE OCEAN:

    Subject matter involving a nuclear reactor system which is designed for
    operation and situation directly in a large body of water.


CLS 376/913
TXT ANTIMATTER DEVICES AND METHODS:

    Subject matter involving reactions which produce annihilation radiation.


CLS 376/914
TXT NUCLEAR EXPLOSIVES:

    Collection of patents under the class definition that claim or disclose an
    uncontrolled nuclear reaction structure, e.g., a bomb.


CLS 376/915
TXT FUSION REACTOR FUELS:

    Subject matter involving fuels (materials, compositions) for use in nuclear
    fusion reactions.


CLS 376/916
TXT METHODS OF MAKING FUSION FUEL TARGETS:

    Subject matter involving methods of manufacturing bodies or elements
    containing fusion fuel material.


CLS 376/917
TXT UTILIZING DIFFERENT FUELS OR FUELS IN DIFFERENT FORMS, IN DIFFERENT REACTOR
    REGIONS IN RELATION TO AMOUNTS OF HEAT PRODUCED IN SAID REGIONS:

    Subject matter involving the utilization of different fuels or fuels in
    different forms in relation to amounts of heat produced in the regions.


CLS 376/918
TXT ENTIRE REACTOR CORE OF SINGLE INTEGRAL STRUCTURE:

    Subject matter wherein the entire reactor core is comprised of a unitary
    structure.


CLS 377/
TTL ELECTRICAL PULSE COUNTERS, PULSE DIVIDERS, OR SHIFT REGISTERS:  CIRCUITS AND
    SYSTEMS

CLS 377/
TXT

    I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF THE CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    A.      This is the generic class for circuits or devices for making a
    count of electrical pulses; for circuits or devices for producing output
    pulses which are a fraction of the number of input pulses i.e., pulse
    dividers of for devices where information is stored in and serially
    transferred through a storage medium i.e., shift registers. Also included
    are pulse multipliers which make use of pulse dividing circuits.

    (1)     Note.  The pulse dividers classified in this class make use of
    circuits or devices having a gating or switching action.  For frequency
    changers which do not use such elements, e.g., parametric frequency
    converters, harmonic generators, etc. see the search notes.

    (2)     Note.  In reference to counting electrical pulses it is not
    necessary that a display means be claimed in order for the subject matter
    to be classified in this class.

    (3)     Note.  Magnetic counters are classified here; however magnetic
    shift registers for static storage and retrieval of information are a
    specialized form of shift register which are excluded from this class.
    They are classified in Class 365, subclass 80: also Magnetic "bubble"
    counters are a specialized form of counter and are classified in Class 365,
    subclasses 1+.

    (4)     Note.  Where shift register circuits are used to perform a memory
    or storage function and specific structure relating to such function is
    claimed, e.g., relating to a "read", "write", or "erase" function, the
    subject matter is classified in Class 365.  See especially subclasses 73+
    and 78.

    (5)     Note.  A single "flip-flop" or bistable device is excluded from
    this class even though it can be considered a divide-by-two circuit.  Such
    subject matter is classified in Class 327, subclasses 185+, and Class 361,
    subclasses 168.1+ where the "flip-flop" uses relays.  Where a plurality of
    "flip-flops" are connected together in series the circuit comprises a
    dividing or counting chain and is classified in this class.

    (6)     Note.  The electrical pulses which are applied to a counter may
    originate as mechanical pulses and be subsequently converted to electrical
    pulses.

    B.      Also included are applications using counters i.e., systems or
    devices performing functions other than counting and where a counter is
    used to indicate something about the state or operating condition of the
    device or system.

    C.      Also included are counters, dividers, or shift registers used in
    circuit configurations which comprise more than a counter, per se, but
    where the configuration is not provided for in one of the existing
    Electrical Classes.

    II.     COMBINATIONS OF OTHER APPARATUS WHICH INCLUDE THE APPARATUS OF THIS
    CLASS

    Applications of counters as mentioned in I.B are classified here only if
    significant structure of the device or apparatus external to the counter is
    not claimed. Otherwise, classification is in the appropriate device or
    application class.

    III.  FOR RELATED SUBJECT MATTER

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, especially subclasses 93-105 for mechanical registers or
    counters.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 424
    for parametric frequency converters.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 114+ for miscellaneous pulse frequency modification
    (e.g., multiplication or division) which does not utilize the multiplying
    or dividing elements classified herein, subclasses 185+ for a miscellaneous
    bistable circuit which may be used in counting chains, and subclasses 365+
    for miscellaneous gating circuits.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 1+ for phase locked loop circuits which
    make extensive use of pulse dividing circuits.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.65+ for counters used
    in selective circuits, subclass 825.68 for shift registers used in
    selective circuits.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 50+ for data
    converters which may make use of pulse dividing and shift register circuits.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 8, 9+, and 157+ for
    frequency conversion used in power applications.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, for electronic
    computers which make extensive use of pulse dividing and shift register
    circuits.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 1+ for
    magnetic bubble counters, subclasses 73+ and 78 for shift register circuits
    claimed as static stores, subclasses 80+ for magnetic shift registers, and
    subclass 236 for counting matrix rows to address the desired row or
    location in the memory matrix.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 85+, 155+,
    and 217+ electronic digital timing circuits using pulse dividing means.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, for multiplex systems which make
    extensive use of shift register circuits.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 75+ for machine operation of an
    electrophotographic device reproducing copies, particularly subclasses 79+
    for accounting of copies produced.


CLS 377/1
TXT APPLICATIONS:

    Subject matter under the class definitions designed for or utilized in a
    particular art device.

    (1)     Note.  For classification herein, there must be significant claim
    recitation of counting means or circuit.  Where significant structure of
    the particular art device is claimed, classification is in the appropriate
    device class.


CLS 377/2
TXT Control:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 used to control a machine, apparatus, or
    process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for one counter controlling another counter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, for electric motor servo
    control systems where significant structure of the servo control system is
    claimed.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 130+
    for data processing control systems.


CLS 377/3
TXT Counting, on an object, areas having alternating physical properties (e.g.,
    counting lines on grid, teeth on gear, windings on coil):

    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising means to count, on an object,
    areas or lines having alternate physical properties.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 242 for significant
    optical testing or measuring structure including means to count threads.


CLS 377/4
TXT Betting on the outcome of an event; totalizers:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 where counters or registers are controlled
    to accumulate the totals involved in betting on the various possibilities
    involved in an event and/or to determine the odds involved in the payoff of
    the various possibilities.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 412 for
    betting which include computations.

    705,    Data Processing: Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/price Determination, subclass 14 for a wagering system including data
    processing for a promotional wagering business system which reduces or
    eliminates the cost of a good or product as a prize to encourage trade.


CLS 377/5
TXT Game or sport:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 designed for or utilized in the area of
    athletic events for entertainment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for counters used in betting on the outcome of a event.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 410+
    for games or amusement which include computations or data processing.

    463,    Amusement Devices:  Games, for devices used in games and sport
    where significant structure of the device is recited.

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, for apparatus or means used in a
    game or sport which uses a tangible projectile, which game apparatus or
    means may include a counting means or circuit but significant structure of
    the game apparatus or means is recited.


CLS 377/6
TXT Counting animate or inanimate entities:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 for counting nonliving or living entities.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 551 for
    structure to assorting solids which may include item counting.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 2+ for structure to article
    dispensing which may include counting.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 23+ for structure to dispensing which may
    include counting.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclasses 77+ and 247 for railway
    switching and signaling structure including means for counting railway cars.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 221 for optical or prephotocell systems
    controlled by articles, persons, or animals.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 75+ for machine operation of an
    electrophotographic device reproducing copies, particularly subclasses 79+
    for accounting of copies produced.


CLS 377/7
TXT Coins:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 where the entity is a coin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    453,    Coin Handling, subclasses 30+ and 58+ for structure to coin
    handling which include counters.


CLS 377/8
TXT Flat articles (e.g., sheet, bill, ticket):

    Subject matter under subclass 6 where the length and width of the entity is
    large compared to its thickness.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS

    7,      for counting coins.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 559.01+ for evaluation or detection of
    sheet-type articles which include photocell means.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 79+ for accounting of reproduced
    copies (e.g., flat sheets) in an electrophotographic device.


CLS 377/9
TXT Vehicles:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 where entity is a vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses  425.5+, 907+, and 933+ for
    electrical signaling means for controlling traffic or vehicles.


CLS 377/10
TXT Field of view contains plural entities or entities scanned plural times
    (e.g., microscopic particles):

    Subject matter under subclass 6 where the field of view of a detector
    encompasses plural entities or where entities are scanned plural times.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, for particle counting where
    significant details are recited in regard to handling or preparing the
    particles to be counted.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 555 for
    measuring, testing, or monitoring means, including electrical computation
    means, for the purpose of counting particles.


CLS 377/11
TXT Including particle size determination:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 including means for determining particle
    size.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 39+ for blood analysis.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 555 for
    computation of particle size or distribution.


CLS 377/12
TXT Counting by detecting electrical impedance variations:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 where the entities which are counted are
    detected by sensing the difference in their electrical impedances relative
    to the surroundings.


CLS 377/13
TXT Registering counts for different categories (e.g., accounting):

    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising means for making separate counts
    of different categories of things.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     where the different categories are different particle size
    distributions.


CLS 377/14
TXT Where the different categories represent monetary amounts (e.g., wages,
    charges):

    Subject matter under subclass 13 where the categories are amounts of money
    which are associated with different items.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for counting coins of the same size.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    705,    Data Processing: Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/price Determination, subclasses 30+ for an accounting system having
    significant data processing.


CLS 377/15
TXT Counting based on number of times machine or apparatus operates:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including means for determining the number
    of times a machine or apparatus operates.


CLS 377/16
TXT Determining machine or apparatus operating time or monitoring machine
    apparatus or operation:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising counting means for determining
    the time which a machine or apparatus operates or for identifying or
    measuring some parameter relative to the operation of a machine or
    apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for counting the number of times a machine or apparatus operates.

    38,     for plug-in counters.


CLS 377/17
TXT Position determining:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including counting means utilized in
    determining the position of some entity or for setting the position of some
    entity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for plug-in counters.

    87,     for means for sensing the position of a number wheel in an
    electromechanical counter.


CLS 377/18
TXT Of flat flexible strip (e.g., tape):

    Subject matter under subclass 17 where the entity is a flat flexible strip
    of material.


CLS 377/19
TXT Measuring or testing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 where pulses are counted in systems for
    determining the value of some parameter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, for measuring or testing various physical
    quantities where significant structure of the measuring of testing means is
    claimed.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, for measuring or testing
    electrical quantities where significant structure of the measuring or
    testing means is claimed.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, for measuring or testing optical
    quantities where significant structure of the measuring or testing means is
    claimed.


CLS 377/20
TXT Time combined with measurement of another parameter:

    Subject matter under subclass 19 where pulse are counted for measurement of
    time and for some other parameter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 569 for
    measuring time which include computation or data processing.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, for time measuring
    means, per se.


CLS 377/21
TXT Fluid flow:

    Subject matter under subclass 19 where the parameter is the rate of flow of
    a fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 861+ for means for measuring
    fluid flow where significant structure of the measuring means is claimed.

    137,    Fluid Handling, appropriate subclass for fluid flow which includes
    structure to fluid handling.


CLS 377/22
TXT Weight:

    Subject matter under subclass 19 where the parameter is weight.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    177,    Weighing Scales, for means for measuring weight where significant
    structure of the measuring means is claimed.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 567+
    for mathematical computation of weight.


CLS 377/23
TXT Acceleration:

    Subject matter under subclass 19 where the parameter is acceleration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 488+ for acceleration measuring
    means of the inertial type where significant structure of the measuring
    means is claimed.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 162 for electrical
    accelerometers where significant structure of the measuring means is
    claimed.

    364,    Electrical Computer and Data Processing Systems, subclass 566 for
    mathematically computing acceleration.


CLS 377/24
TXT Dimension:

    Subject matter under subclass 19 where the parameter is measurement of a
    distance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, for means for measuring dimensions where
    significant structure of the measuring means is claimed.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 560+
    for mathematical computation of dimensions.


CLS 377/24.1
TXT Distance and powered vehicle (e.g., odometer):

    Subject matter under subclass 24 including on electronic counter for
    measuring or using distance involving a powered vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 490 for speed measurement with
    distance registering means.

    235,    Registers, subclasses 95 for odometers of the mechanical type.

    346,    Recorders, subclass 15 for recording fare register; subclass 33 for
    external recorder operating means.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 561
    and 565 for systems employing data processing with distance and speed,
    respectively.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 2, 5, and
    6 for time measurement in speed checkers, engines, and vehicles,
    respectively.

    705,    Data Processing: Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/price Determination, subclass 417 for a system  employing data
    processing with a taximeter.


CLS 377/24.2
TXT Distance and human activity (e.g., pedometer, nonpowered golf carts):

    Subject matter under subclass 24 including an electronic counter for
    measuring or using distance under the control of a form of human activity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 3 for measuring or indicating
    means relating to  footwear.

    235,    Registers, subclass 105 for mechanical pedometers.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 71.1 for determining
    nonelectric properties by measuring electric properties.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 561 for
    systems employing data processing with distance.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, appropriate
    subclasses for time-based circuit devices.


CLS 377/25
TXT Temperature:

    Subject matter under subclass 19 wherein counting pulses represents
    temperature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 557 for
    measuring temperature which includes mathematical computation or data
    processing.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 170+ for similar subject
    manner having significant temperature responsive structure.


CLS 377/26
TXT Including memory:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 associated with means for storing data.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, for electronic storage
    and retrieval of information, per se; subclasses 185.01+ for floating gate
    memory storage (e.g., flash memory).


CLS 377/27
TXT SYSTEMS:

    Subject matter under the class definition where the circuitry involved
    includes more than a counter or shift register, per se, but is not
    sufficient for classification with a particular art device.


CLS 377/28
TXT Identifying or correcting improper counter operation (e.g., error checking,
    monitoring; preventing or correcting improper counter operation):

    Subject matter under subclass 27 comprising means for identifying an
    incorrect condition in the operation of the counter or in the result
    produced and/or correcting such condition; or means for preventing such
    condition from arising.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclasses
    30+ for digital data error correction in general.


CLS 377/29
TXT Testing or calibrating the counter:

    Subject matter under subclass 28 comprising means to determine and/or
    adjust some operating condition of a counter or shift register.


CLS 377/30
TXT Preventing an inaccurate count as a result of an external condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 28 comprising means for preventing an
    incorrect count as a result of some condition outside of the counter itself.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for preventing or correcting improper counter operation.

    29,     for testing, monitoring, or calibrating the counter, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 737+
    for error detection or correction in digital computer computational
    operations.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 222 for
    prevention of loss of stored information by replenishing or amplifying a
    decayed signal.


CLS 377/31
TXT Automatic preset:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 where, as a result of the external
    condition, the counter is automatically set to some predetermined count.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 142+ for miscellaneous synchronizing reset circuits
    which may be power supply responsive.


CLS 377/32
TXT Power failure:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 where the external condition is the power
    supply for the counter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 142+ for miscellaneous synchronizing reset circuits
    which may be power supply responsive.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 635+ for indicating systems
    responsive to the condition of electrical apparatus.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 226+ for
    preventing loss of stored information as a result of power interruption.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclass 66 for
    monitoring the power level of a timepiece.


CLS 377/33
TXT Using particular code or particular counting sequence:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 characterized by the use of a code or of a
    counting sequence which has special significance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, appropriate subclasses for
    code conversion, analog to or from digital code conversion, data
    transmitters, or data generation.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 242+ for pulse code
    modulation used in communication systems.


CLS 377/34
TXT Minimum change code (e.g., gray code):

    Subject matter under subclass 33 comprising a code in which only one bit in
    the code group changes when going from a code group representing a given
    number to a code group representing an adjacent number.


CLS 377/35
TXT Excess three code:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 where the code for each number is the same
    as in binary coded decimal except 3 is added to each decimal before
    encoding it into binary.


CLS 377/36
TXT Biquinary code:

    Subject matter subclass 33 wherein the numbers from 0 to 9 are divided into
    two groups and one position of the code is used to determine in which group
    a given number is, and a five position code is used to determine the number
    in the group.


CLS 377/37
TXT Sequential readout of plural counters or sequential sampling of inputs to a
    counter:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 whereby input circuits to a counter are
    sampled in order, or whereby the outputs of plural counters are sampled in
    order.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825+ for selective systems
    in general.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, for multiplex systems in general.


CLS 377/38
TXT Plug in counter:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 where the counter is designed to be
    temporarily attached to a machine or apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for counting the number of times a machine or apparatus operates.

    16,     for using counters to monitor some specific parameter relative to a
    machine, apparatus, or operation, e.g., the time a machine or apparatus
    operates.


CLS 377/39
TXT Comparing counts:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 including means whereby a signal is
    generated or controlled in dependence on the result of comparing a number
    representing one count with another number representing another count.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 1+ for miscellaneous discriminating, comparing, or
    selecting circuits.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 146.2 for digital comparator
    systems, per se.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 769 for
    comparison operations in digital computer arithmetic computations.


CLS 377/40
TXT Nonsignificant zero elimination:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 comprising means for eliminating, from a
    numerical read out, zeros which have no significance in regard to the value
    of a number.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 711 for
    zero suppression in electric digital calculators.


CLS 377/41
TXT Complementing a count:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 including means for generating a number
    which is the difference between a given count and a count representing the
    capacity of the counter.


CLS 377/42
TXT Converting input or output signal from or to an analogue signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 including means whereby pulses to the
    system are converted from an analogue signal or output pulses from the
    system are converted to an analogue signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 126+ for analogue
    to digital or digital to analogue converters, per se.


CLS 377/43
TXT Having phase shift:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 including two pulse trains which are
    shifted from one time relationship with each other to another time
    relationship.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 141+ and 231+ for miscellaneous circuits which may
    utilize phase shifting.


CLS 377/44
TXT Counter-controlled counter:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 where one counter controls another counter.

    (1)     Note.  Connecting counter stages in series to increase the count
    capacity does not constitute a system for classification in this subclass.
    Such circuits are classified in subclasses 57 through 130.


CLS 377/45
TXT Including reversible counter:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 where in one mode successive pulses cause
    the counter to count upward and in another mode cause the counter to count
    downward.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61+,    for direction control of signal information in charge transfer
    device counters and shift registers.

    85,     for reversible electromechanical counters.

    123,    125 and 126, for pulse counting or dividing chains, per se, in the
    form of reversible counters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 770 for
    incrementation or decrementation of pulse signals in digital computer
    systems.


CLS 377/46
TXT Including ring counter:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 including counters whereby information is
    transmitted serially through a counter from input to output (one cycle) and
    then transferred back to the input stage where the cycle begins again.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    124, and 126, for pulse counting or dividing chains, per se, in the
    form of ring counters.


CLS 377/47
TXT Pulse multiplication or division:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 where the number of output pulses in some
    multiple or some fraction of the number of input pulses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18+,    for pulse counting or dividing chains, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 114+ for miscellaneous pulse frequency modification
    (e.g., multiplication or division) which does not utilize the multiplying
    or dividing elements classified herein.


CLS 377/48
TXT Multiplication or division by a fraction:

    Subject matter under subclass 47 where the arithmetic function is
    multiplication or division by a fraction.


CLS 377/49
TXT Counter includes circuit for performing an arithmetic function:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 where a counter includes a circuit for
    performing an arithmetic function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47+,    for pulse multiplication or division means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses
    736.01+ for digital calculators which perform arithmetic operations.


CLS 377/50
TXT Compensation for excess or shortage of pulses:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 comprising means for adding pulses which
    are missing and/or eliminating pulses which are extraneous.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for systems relating to improper counter operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 18+ for miscellaneous detecting of absent or present
    pulses.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclass
    30 for digital data error correction in general.


CLS 377/51
TXT Including structure for detection or indicating overflow condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 comprising means for sensing and/or
    indicating when the count in a counter has exceeded the capacity of the
    counter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     for systems for compensating for an excess or shortage of pulses.


CLS 377/52
TXT With programmable counter (i.e., with variable base):

    Subject matter under subclass 27 including means for varying the modules or
    base of a counter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     for programmable electromechanical counters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 261+ for an output waveform delay circuit which may
    utilize a programmable counting device.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, appropriate
    subclasses, for pulse counters which may be preset to determine time.


CLS 377/53
TXT With photoelectric sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 including means for sensing
    electromagnetic radiation in the visible, ultraviolet, or infrared range.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for counters of dividers, per se, using bistable electro-optical
    devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 336.1+ for invisible radiant energy
    responsive signalling devices and subclasses 200+ for photocell controlled
    systems.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 514+ for miscellaneous nonlinear circuits whose
    operation is dependent upon the external effect of light energy.


CLS 377/54
TXT Using shift register:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 including a device in which information is
    stored in and serially tranferred through a storage medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for shift register circuits of the charge transfer device type, per
    se.

    64,     for shift registers, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 78, 80+, and
    240 for storage and retrieval systems which involve shift registers.


CLS 377/55
TXT Particular input circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 wherein the system is characterized by
    having an input circuit having special significance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for particular input circuits in charge transfer device-type
    counters.

    70,     for particular input circuits in shift registers, per se.

    86,     for particular input circuits in electromechanical counters.

    111,    for particular input circuits for counters in general.


CLS 377/56
TXT Particular output circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 wherein the system is characterized by
    having an output circuit having special significance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for particular output circuits in charge transfer device-type
    counters or shift registers.

    75,     for particular output circuits in shift registers, per se.

    87,     for particular output circuits in electromechanical counters.

    114,    for particular output circuits for counters in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 51+ for miscellaneous circuits combining signal
    amplitude discriminating, comparing, or selecting with a sensing amplifier.


CLS 377/57
TXT CHARGE TRANSFER DEVICE (E.G., ANALOGUE SHIFT REGISTER, CCD, BUCKET BRIGADE
    DEVICE):

    Subject matter under the class definition where the functional element of
    the counter of shift register is an electrostatic potential controlled
    semiconductor structure, whereby counting or shifting is achieved by the
    sequential transfer of localized charges through storage sites within or at
    the surface of the semiconductor body.

    (1)     Note.  In some charge transfer devices, such as bucket brigade
    types as distinguished from CCD types, not all of the charges in the
    storage sites are transferred.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses, including subclasses 215+, for charge transfer type
    active semiconductor devices, per se.

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclass 61 for electronic
    digital logic with a charge transfer device.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 263+, 271, 277, and 284 for miscellaneous delay
    circuits utilizing a charge transfer device.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 165 for frequency or
    time domain filters and delay lines utilizing charge transfer devices.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 862 for
    electric analogue computers using charge transfer devices.

    365,    Static Information Storage And Retrieval, subclasses 185.01+ for
    floating gate memory storage (e.g., flash memory) and subclass 183 for
    static storage charge coupled devices.


CLS 377/58
TXT Compensating for or preventing signal charge deterioration:

    Subject matter under subclass 57 including means for compensating for or
    preventing deterioration of the charge which is passed through the charge
    transfer device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for compensating for or preventing signal deterioration in shift
    registers in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 21+ for digital
    logic circuits including circuits for maintaining logic signal transmission
    integrity.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 379+ for miscellaneous gating circuits including signal
    transfer loss prevention.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 222 for stored
    signal loss prevention by data refresh circuitry.


CLS 377/59
TXT With feedback:

    Subject matter under subclass 57 including means for feeding part of the
    output signal of the charge transfer device back to the input.

    (1)     Note.  See search notes under subclass 57.


CLS 377/60
TXT Particular input or output means:

    Subject matter under subclass 57 wherein the charge transfer device is
    characterized by input or output means having special significance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for particular input circuits in counting systems and see also
    search notes thereunder.

    56,     for particular output circuits in counting systems and see also
    search notes thereunder.


CLS 377/61
TXT Direction and/or path flow control (e.g., clocking or biasing, by charge
    splitting):

    Subject matter under subclass 57 for controlling the direction or path in
    which the charge moves through the charge transfer device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for shift direction control in shift registers in general.


CLS 377/62
TXT In charge-coupled device:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 where the localized charges which move
    through storage sites include substantially all the mobile charges at a
    storage site.


CLS 377/63
TXT Charge-coupled device:

    Subject matter under subclass 57 where the localized charges which move
    through storage sites include substantially all the mobile charges at a
    storage site.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     Including circuitry for direction and/or path flow control in
    charge coupled devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 185.01+ for
    floating gate memory storage (e.g., flash memory) and subclass 183 for
    static storage circuits using charge coupled devices.


CLS 377/64
TXT SHIFT REGISTER:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising an information storage
    device in which the information, in the form of electric pulses, is stored
    in and serially transferred through a storage medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57+,    for shift registers using charge transfer means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 78 for plural
    shift register memory devices, subclasses 80+ for magnetic shift register
    memory systems, subclass 189.12 for a shift register in a static memory
    system read/write circuit subclass 240 for sequencing memory locations in
    an addressing circuit using shift registers.


CLS 377/65
TXT Using electromechanical relays:

    Subject matter under subclass 64 using mechanical switching devices which
    are electrically controlled.


CLS 377/66
TXT Asynchronous:

    Subject matter under subclass 64 where each stage of a register triggers
    the succeeding stage without the need for timing pulses.


CLS 377/67
TXT Multirank (i.e., rows of storage units form a shift register):

    Subject matter under subclass 64 comprising plural sets of stages where
    information can be synchronously shifted between these sets of stages.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for charge transfer multirank shift registers.


CLS 377/68
TXT Compensating for or preventing signal deterioration:

    Subject matter under subclass 64 including means for compensating for or
    preventing deterioration of the signal which is passed through the shift
    register.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for compensating for or preventing signal charge deterioration in
    charge transfer devices.


CLS 377/69
TXT Shift direction control:

    Subject matter under subclass 64 where means are included to control the
    direction in which information can be transferred through the register.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for counting systems including reversible counters.

    61+,    for signal direction control in charge transfer device registers or
    counters.

    85,     for reversible electromechanical counters.

    123,    for pulse counting or dividing chains of the reversible counter
    type using only three electrode semiconductor-type bistable regenerative
    trigger circuits.

    125,    for reversible counting or dividing chains using bistable
    regenerative trigger circuits in general.

    126,    for reversible counting and dividing chains in general.


CLS 377/70
TXT Particular input circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 64 wherein the shift register is
    characterized by an input circuit having special significance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for counter systems including particular input circuits and see
    also search notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 83 for magnetic
    shift registers having parallel inputs, subclass 219 for memory read write
    circuitry using parallel inputs and serial outputs and subclass 220 wherein
    information is written into a memory in parallel form and read output in
    parallel form.


CLS 377/71
TXT Pulse shaping:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 for changing the shape or form of a pulse.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111,    for particular input circuits for counters, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 100+ for miscellaneous pulse shaping circuits.


CLS 377/72
TXT With feedback:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 having means for feeding a portion of the
    output signal of the register back to the input.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for systems including a ring counter- type feedback arrangement and
    see also notes thereunder.

    59,     for feedback controlled charge transfer device-type shift registers
    or counters.

    129,    for counters where pulses are continuously circulated in a closed
    feedback loop.


CLS 377/73
TXT Including logic circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 including a circuit for performing a
    logical operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     for shift registers with particular transfer means including a
    logic circuit.

    116,    for counters with particular transfer means including a logic
    circuit.


CLS 377/74
TXT Field-effect transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 73 where the logic circuit includes a
    field-effect transistor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     for a shift register with particular transfer means including
    clocking or synchronizing circuits using field-effect transistors.

    117,    for counters with particular transfer circuits including
    field-effect transistor logic circuits.


CLS 377/75
TXT Particular output circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 64 where the register is characterized by
    having an output circuit of special significance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for counting systems including particular output circuits.

    60,     for charge transfer device-type counters or shift registers having
    particular output means.

    87,     for electromechanical counters having particular output means.

    114,    for counters in general having particular output circuits.


CLS 377/76
TXT Sequential output (e.g., tapped delay line):

    Subject matter under subclass 75 where information appears successively on
    a plurality of output terminals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for sequential readout of plural counters in a counting system.

    56,     for counting systems including a particular output circuit.

    114,    for particular output circuits for a counter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 83, 219, 221,
    and 239 for static memories involving sequential readout means.


CLS 377/77
TXT Particular transfer means:

    Subject matter under subclass 64 where the register is characterized by
    means of special significance for coupling information from the output of
    one stage of the register to the input of a succeeding stage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57+,    for charge transfer device-type counters or shift registers having
    particular transfer means.

    115+,   for counters or dividers in general including particular transfer
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 93+ for clocking of
    logic stages or gates in general.


CLS 377/78
TXT Phased clocking or synchronizing:

    Subject matter under subclass 77 where the signals synchronizing operation
    of the register are applied to two sets of register stages, the signals
    applied to one set being in time displaced relationship with the signals
    applied to another set.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104+,   for phased clocked counters or dividers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 93+ for clocking or
    synchronizing of logic stages or gates.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 141+ for miscellaneous synchronizing circuits and
    subclasses 291+ for miscellaneous clock signal generation.


CLS 377/79
TXT Field-effect transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 78 including a field-effect transistor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    for field-effect transistor-type phase clocked counters or dividers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 213+ for field effect devices.

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 95+ for clocking or
    synchronizing of FET logic stages or gates.


CLS 377/80
TXT Parallel clocking:

    Subject matter under subclass 77 where the signals synchronizing operation
    of the register are simultaneously applied to more than one stage of the
    register.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    for counters or dividers controlled by a particular parallel gating
    or clock signal.


CLS 377/81
TXT Logic circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 77 including a circuit for performing a
    logical operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73+,    for shift registers having particular input circuits and including
    logic circuits.

    116+,   for counters or dividers having particular transfer means and
    including logic circuits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 89 for magnetic
    shift registers using logic circuits.


CLS 377/82
TXT ELECTROMECHANICAL COUNTER:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means whereby the
    electrical pulses to be counted produce a mechanical motion which controls
    a mechanical counting device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 93-105 for mechanical counters.


CLS 377/83
TXT Counting or dividing chains using relays:

    Subject matter under subclass 82 comprising a plurality of stages connected
    in a serial arrangement such that the state of one stage is a function of
    the state of an adjacent stage and the state of a given stage is determined
    by the position of one or more relays.


CLS 377/84
TXT Programmable (i.e., with variable base):

    Subject matter under subclass 82 including means for varying the modules or
    base of a counter.


CLS 377/85
TXT Reversible:

    Subject matter under subclass 82 where, in one mode, successive pulses
    cause the counter to count upward and in another mode cause the counter to
    count downward.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for counting systems including a reversible counter.

    69,     for shift registers in general having direction control of pulse
    signals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 770 for
    incrementing and decrementing in computational devices and systems.


CLS 377/86
TXT Particular input means:

    Subject matter under subclass 82 where the counter is characterized by
    having input means of special significance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for particular input circuits in systems using counters, dividers,
    and shift registers.


CLS 377/87
TXT Particular output means:

    Subject matter under subclass 82 where the counter is characterized by
    having output means of special significance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for particular output circuits used in systems employing pulse
    counters, dividers, or shift registers.


CLS 377/88
TXT With resetting:

    Subject matter under subclass 82 for returning the counter to a state
    representing an initial count.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for counting systems including automatic preset circuits for
    preventing an inaccurate count.

    84,     for resetting means in programmable electromechanical counters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 142+ for a miscellaneous synchronizing circuit
    providing a reset signal which may be responsive to a power supply.


CLS 377/89
TXT Rotary magnet:

    Subject matter under subclass 82 where the electromechanical means includes
    a rotating magnet.


CLS 377/90
TXT Stepping switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 82 where the electromechanical means is a
    multiposition switch which succeeding pulses move through its various
    positions.


CLS 377/91
TXT Clutch or escapement:

    Subject matter under subclass 82 where the electromechanical means includes
    a clutch or an escapement.


CLS 377/92
TXT Pawl and ratchet:

    Subject matter under subclass 82 where the electromagnetic means controls a
    ratchet.


CLS 377/93
TXT WITH SUPERCONDUCTIVE ELEMENT:

    Subject matter under the class definition where the functional element of
    the counter is operated at temperatures in the neighborhood of absolute
    zero where electrical resistance becomes essentially zero.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 31-36 for superconductive active devices, per se.

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 1+ for
    superconducting logic circuits.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 86 for a stable state circuit utilizing a superconducting
    element and subclasses 527+ for miscellaneous superconducting circuits.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 160+ for
    static memory systems using superconductive elements.


CLS 377/94
TXT COUNTING OR DIVIDING IN INCREMENTAL STEPS (I.E., STAIRCASE COUNTER):

    Subject matter under the class definition whereby each pulse is stored and
    adds an incremental value to the previously existing stored value and an
    element or circuit is caused to change state when the stored value reaches
    a predetermined point.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 126+ for a miscellaneous staircase or stepwave
    generator.


CLS 377/95
TXT Charge storage (e.g., capacitor without polarization hysterisis):

    Subject matter under subclass 94 including a storage element capable of
    holding a current charge.

    (1)     Note.  The storage element may be for example an integrating
    capacitor.


CLS 377/96
TXT Using auxiliary pulse generator triggered by incoming pulses:

    Subject matter under subclass 95 where a pulse generator is triggered when
    the stored value reaches a predetermined point.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 100+ for miscellaneous signal converting, shaping, or
    generating circuits.


CLS 377/97
TXT Hysteresis storage (e.g., counters using saturable magnetic core elements):

    Subject matter under subclass 94 where the incremental values are points on
    the hysteresis loop of a particular material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 401+
    for nonlinear systems (e.g., saturable).


CLS 377/98
TXT DEVICES HAVING MORE THAN TWO STABLE STATES:

    Subject matter under the class definition where a pulse counter of
    frequency divider comprises one or more devices having more than two stable
    states.


CLS 377/99
TXT Beam type tube (e.g., magnetron, cathode-ray tube):

    Subject matter under subclass 98 where the device having more than two
    stable states is a tube which generates a beam of atomic particles.


CLS 377/100
TXT Multi-cathode gas discharge tubes:

    Subject matter under subclass 98 where the device having more than two
    stable states is a gas discharge tube having a plurality of cathodes.


CLS 377/101
TXT USING BISTABLE MAGNETIC CORES OR FERROELECTRIC CAPACITORS:

    Subject matter under the class definition where the counter or divider
    utilizes magnetic cores or ferrelectric capacitors having two or more
    stable states.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97,     for counting or dividing in incremental steps using saturable
    magnetic core elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 190+ for a miscellaneous stable state circuit utilizing
    a transformer or saturable core device.


CLS 377/102
TXT USING BISTABLE ELECTRO-OPTICAL DEVICES:

    Subject matter under the class definition where the counter or divider
    utilizes devices for converting light radiation into electrical current and
    which devices have two or more stable states.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 187 for a miscellaneous stable state circuit which is
    light sensitive.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 185.01+ for
    floating gate memory storage (e.g., flash memory), subclasses 106+ where
    the condition or state of a memory material or element is altered by a beam
    of radiant energy and see also the search notes thereunder and subclasses
    215 and 234 for optical read/write circuits and addressing circuits
    respectively.


CLS 377/103
TXT COUNTING OR DIVIDING CHAINS USING GAS-FILLED TUBES:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a plurality of stages
    connected in a serial arrangement such that the state of one stage is a
    function of the state of an adjacent stage and the state of a given stage
    is determined by the conductive state of a gas-filled tube.


CLS 377/104
TXT PHASED CLOCKING:

    Subject matter under the class definition where the signals synchronizing
    operation of the counter are applied to counter stages in a time displaced
    relationship with one another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for a counting system including two pulse trains which are time
    shifted in relation to each other.

    78+,    for shift registers having particular transfer means of the phase
    clocking or synchronizing type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 93+ for clocking or
    synchronizing logic stages or gates.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 141+ for miscellaneous synchronizing circuits.


CLS 377/105
TXT Field-effect transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 104 including a field-effect transistor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     for shift registers controlled by field-effect transistor-type
    phase clocking or synchronizing circuits and see also search notes
    thereunder.


CLS 377/106
TXT PARTICULAR PARALLEL GATING OR CLOCK SIGNAL:

    Subject matter under the class definition where the signals synchronizing
    operation of the counter are simultaneously applied to more than one stage
    of the counter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     for shift registers, per se, having parallel clocking-type signal
    transfer circuitry.

    104+,   for phased clocking of counter and dividing circuits and see also
    search notes thereunder.


CLS 377/107
TXT STARTING, STOPPING, PRESETTING, OR RESETTING THE COUNTER:

    Subject matter under the class definition for assisting in initiating
    operation of the counter, causing operation of the counter to cease or
    placing the counter in a state representing an initial count.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for systems for preventing an inaccurate count by means of
    automatic preset.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 142+ for a miscellaneous synchronizing circuit
    providing a reset signal which may be responsive to a power supply.


CLS 377/108
TXT Counter chains with a radix or base other than the number two raised to an
    integral power:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 where the number of different states the
    counter can assume is other than a power of two.


CLS 377/109
TXT Decade:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 where the number of different states the
    counter can assume is ten.


CLS 377/110
TXT Programmable (e.g., with mechanical or electromechanical switch means for
    selecting the count):

    Subject matter under subclass 108 including means for varying the modules
    or base of a counter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33+,    for counting systems using particular code or counting sequence.

    52,     for systems including a programmable counter (i.e., with variable
    base) and see also search notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 261+ for an output waveform delay circuit which may
    utilize a programmable counting device.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, appropriate
    subclasses, for pulse counters which may be preset to determine time.


CLS 377/111
TXT PARTICULAR INPUT CIRCUITS FOR COUNTER:

    Subject matter under the class definition where the counter is
    characterized by having a special input circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for systems using counters, dividers, and shift registers and
    having particular input circuits.

    60,     for charge transfer devices having particular input circuit means.

    70+,    for shift registers having a particular input circuit.

    86,     for electromechanical counters having particular input means.


CLS 377/112
TXT INDICATING MEANS:

    Subject matter under the class definitions for providing information as to
    the state of the counter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 815.4+ where the
    information signals and/or results in electrical communication systems are
    visually displayed.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 1+ for visual display systems
    with selective electrical control.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, appropriate
    subclasses, for indicating means for time measuring systems or devices.


CLS 377/113
TXT Using glow discharge lamps:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 where the indication results from an
    electron discharge through a gas-filled tube.


CLS 377/114
TXT PARTICULAR OUTPUT CIRCUITS FOR COUNTER:

    Subject matter under the class definition where the counter is
    characterized by an output circuit having special significance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for systems using counters, dividers, and shift registers and
    having particular output circuits.

    60,     for charge transfer devices having particular output circuit means.

    75+,    for shift registers having a particular output circuit.

    87,     for electromechanical counters having particular output means.


CLS 377/115
TXT PARTICULAR TRANSFER MEANS (E.G., MASTER-SLAVE):

    Subject matter under the class definition where the counter is
    characterized by a circuit having special significance for transferring the
    output of one stage of a counter to the input of another stage of the
    counter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57+,    for transfer circuits using charge transfer devices (e.g., charge
    coupled devices, bucket brigade devices).

    77+,    for shift registers having particular transfer means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 202+ for a miscellaneous master-slave bistable latch.


CLS 377/116
TXT Including logic circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 115 including a circuit for performing a
    logical operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     for shift registers having logic circuits as the particular
    transfer means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, particularly subclasses 93+ for
    the clocking or synchronizing of logic stages or gates.


CLS 377/117
TXT Field-effect device (e.g., JFET, IGFET, MNOS):

    Subject matter under subclass 116 where the circuit includes a field-effect
    device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     for shift registers with phase clocking of transfer means and using
    field-effect transistors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 213+, for field effect
    devices.


CLS 377/118
TXT PULSE COUNTING OR DIVIDING CHAINS:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a plurality of stages
    and connected in a serial arrangement such that the state of one stage is a
    function of the state of an adjacent stage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27+,    for systems using one or more counter or divider chains.

    57+,    for charge transfer device-type counting and dividing chains.

    83,     for chains using relays.

    101,    for chains using magnetic cores or ferroelectric capacitors.

    102,    for chains using electro-optical devices.

    103,    for chains using gas filled tubes.

    108,    for counter chains with radix or base other than the number two
    raised to an integral power.


CLS 377/119
TXT Using bistable regenerative trigger circuits:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 where each stage utilizes a device which,
    as a result of having a feedback loop gain greater than one, can be changed
    from a nonconducting to a conducting state by means of a incoming pulse.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 199+ for miscellaneous bistable circuits.


CLS 377/120
TXT Using only semiconductors having at least three electrodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 119 where the only active elements in the
    trigger circuit are semiconducting devices having three or more electrodes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 185+ for miscellaneous stable state circuits utilizing
    a semiconducting device.


CLS 377/121
TXT Field effect device (e.g., JFET, IGFET, MNOS):

    Subject matter under subclass 120 where the active element is a
    field-effect device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for shift registers using field-effect transistor-type logic
    circuits in the input circuit.

    79,     for shift registers with phase clocking or synchronizing circuits
    using field-effect transistors.

    105,    for phase clocked counters using field-effect transistors.

    117,    for counters having transfer means which use field effect
    transistors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 208+ for a miscellaneous bistable circuit utilizing an
    FET.


CLS 377/122
TXT Ring counter:

    Subject matter under subclass 120 where the semiconducting devices are used
    in the stages of a counter through which information is transmitted
    serially from input to output (one cycle) and then tranferred back to the
    input stage where the cycle begins again.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for systems including ring counters.


CLS 377/123
TXT Reversible counter:

    Subject matter under subclass 120 where the semiconducting devices are used
    in the stages of a counter which, in one mode, counts upward and, in
    another mode, counts downward.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for systems including reversible counters.


CLS 377/124
TXT Ring counter:

    Subject matter under subclass 119 where the regenerative trigger circuits
    are used in the stages of a counter through which information is
    transmitted serially from input to output (one cycle) and then transferred
    back to the input stage where the cycle begins again.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for systems including ring counters.

    122,    for ring counters using bistable regenerative trigger circuits
    including semiconductors having at least three electodes.


CLS 377/125
TXT Reversible counter:

    Subject matter under subclass 119 where the regenerative trigger circuits
    are used in the stages of a counter, which, in one mode, counts upward and,
    in another mode, counts downward.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for systems including reversible counters.

    123,    for reversible counter chains using bistable regenerative trigger
    circuits including semiconductors having at least three electrodes.


CLS 377/126
TXT Ring or reversible counter:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 where the regenerative trigger circuits
    are used (1) in the stages of a counter through which information is
    transmitted serially from input to output (one cycle) and then transferred
    back to the input stage where the cycle begins again or (2) in the stages
    of a counter which, in one mode, counts upward and, in another mode, counts
    downward.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for systems including reversible counters.

    46,     for systems including ring counters.

    122,    for ring counters using bistable regenerative trigger circuits
    including semiconductors having at least three electrodes.

    123,    for reversible counter chains using bistable regenerative trigger
    circuits including semiconductors having at least three electrodes.

    124,    for ring counter chains in general using bistable regenerative
    trigger circuits.

    125,    for reversible counter chains in general using bistable
    regenerative trigger circuits.


CLS 377/127
TXT Using bistable semiconductors having at least three electrodes or analogous
    complementary transistor circuits (e.g., avalanche transistor SCR's):

    Subject matter under subclass 118 where each stage utilizes semiconductors
    which have two stable states and at least three electrodes or where each
    stage utilizes complementary transistors connected so as to function in the
    same way as a single semiconductor having two or more stable states.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for chains using bistable regenerative trigger circuits comprising
    semiconductors having at least three electrodes.


CLS 377/128
TXT Using bistable semiconductors having only two electrodes (e.g., tunnel
    diode, multilayer diode):

    Subject matter under subclass 118 where each stage utilizes semiconductors
    having two stable states and having only two electrodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    for chains using bistable regenerative trigger circuits.


CLS 377/129
TXT PULSES CONTINUOUSLY CIRCULATED IN A CLOSED LOOP:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means whereby pulses at
    the output of a circuit are continuously fed back to the input of the
    circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for means for starting, stopping, or resetting a counter and
    subclasses, 122, 124, and 126, for ring counters.


CLS 377/130
TXT Subject matter under the class definition not classifiable in any of the
    proceeding subclasses.


CLS 378/
TTL X-RAY OR GAMMA RAY SYSTEMS  OR DEVICES

CLS 378/
TXT

    I.      INTRODUCTION

    This class is the result of a reclassification of the X-ray art which was
    extracted from several classes, principally Class 250, Radiant Energy.  The
    subject matter of this class is, therefore, essentially identical in scope
    to the X-ray subject matter formerly found in the more comprehensive Class
    250 with the addition of the X-ray source subject matter of Class 313,
    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices (subclasses 55-60 and 330, now
    abolished). Selected disclosures concerning elements  "for use in" but not
    restricted to X-ray systems were removed from the above described body of
    art and placed in more appropriate classes.

    II.     GLOSSARY

    DETECTOR

    A material or device whose response to X-ray energy is used to indicate the
    presence or amount of incident radiation.

    GAMMA RAY

    In this class the term "gamma ray" is considered to be synonymous with the
    term "X-ray".  Gamma rays are usually considered to be produced by some
    natural phenomenon such as the decay of an atomic nucleus whereas X-rays
    are usually considered to be produced by an electronic tube or other
    manufactured device.

    INSPECTION OR EXAMINATION

    A term implying a source of X-ray energy, and/or means to irradiate an
    object by said source and a detector responsive to X-radiation from the
    object to provide an indication representing some characteristic of the
    object.

    OBJECT OR ANALYTE

    A material subjected to X-radiation for treatment or whose response to or
    effect on the X-radiation is used to indicate something about the material.

    X-RAY

    Electromagnetic radiation lying in a range between "cosmic rays" and
    "ultraviolet rays". This range is defined as lying between 0.001 and 100
    angstrom units or 10-11 and 10-6 centimeters in wavelength.

    III.    GENERAL STATEMENT OF THE CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    A.      This is the generic class for apparatus and corresponding processes
    involving the generation or use of electromagnetic radiation within the
    X-ray spectrum as defined above.

    B.      Methods, systems, and elements with specific features
    characteristic of X-ray applications are classified herein.

    C.      Mere use with or attachment to an X-ray device or recitation of an
    undefined X-ray test or analysis is insufficient to cause classification
    within this class.

    IV.     RELATIONSHIP TO OTHER CLASSES

    A.      Significantly claimed apparatus external to this class, claimed in
    combination with apparatus under the class definition which is used to
    monitor, control or otherwise effect the operation of the external
    apparatus, is classified in the class appropriate to that external
    apparatus.

    B.      Nominally claimed apparatus external to this class, claimed in
    combination with apparatus under the class definition, is classified in
    this class unless provided for in the appropriate external class.

    V.      SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 600+ and 652+
    for beds with body support or positioning means and subclasses 630+ for
    patient examination tables.

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 806 for film or tape cartridge manufacture.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 361+ for viewers for
    X-ray transparencies.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 23.2 for the analysis of gases;
    particularly subclass 23.35, for the combination of a gas chromatography
    test and a radiation (invisible and visible) test of the effluent from the
    test; subclasses 53.01+ for the examination of liquids or a liquid
    suspension of solids; subclasses 73+ for moisture content or absorption
    characteristics generally; subclass 104 for surface or cutlery edge testing
    generally; subclasses 151+ for bore hole and drilling study tests
    generally; subclasses 861+ for volume or rate of flow meters generally;
    subclasses 290+ for liquid level or depth gauges; and subclasses 570+ for
    ultrasonic testing.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 451 for apparatus for
    subjecting foods and beverage to wave, radiant, and electrical energy.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 620+ for coating apparatus combined
    with means to apply radiant energy to the work.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclass 1 for processes
    of cleaning or contacting of solids with liquids which include the
    application of radiant energy to the work.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    272.2+ and 379.6 for methods and apparatus which include applying wave
    energy to work.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 49 and 192 for
    processes using radiant energy.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 250.1 for means to apply electrical or
    wave energy to work.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 455 for film receptacles.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses, especially subclass 589 for radiant energy type automatic
    assorting.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 214 for image intensifiers; subclasses
    306+ for sample bombardment with protons or electrons which may produce
    X-rays; subclasses 336.1+ for radiant energy detectors; subclass 492.2 for
    generic irradiation of semiconductor substrates; subclasses 496.1+ for
    radioactive sources; and subclasses 515.1+ for radiation shielding.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 478 for X-ray shield compositions or
    contrast agents for inanimate objects.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 405+ for direct application of electrical or wave energy to work.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, appropriate subclasses for sheet
    feeding.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses for
    electric space discharge devices, per se, including cathode-ray tubes,
    electric discharge lamps, liquid electrode discharge devices, gas or vapor
    filled discharge devices and vacuum tubes, and for the electrodes
    filaments, fluorescent targets and shields for electric space discharge
    devices.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 22 for consumable electrode discharge devices which have means to
    feed a fluent material (e.g., solid particles to the discharge space.)

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, especially subclass
    III for systems wherein a fluent material is supplied to the discharge area
    between the discharge electrodes of the discharge device.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    motor control devices usable in rotary anode X-ray tube systems.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, for measuring or testing of
    electrical properties by the use of radiant energy.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    109+ for light wave communications.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 413.23
    for computer analysis or data processing in radiation detection or
    treatment systems and subclass 527, for the application of a computer to
    atomic or nuclear physics.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 101 for
    recorder-reproducers using invisible radiation.

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, subclass 5 for short wavelength lasers
    including X-ray lasers.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclasses 156+ for X-rays generated by means of an induced nuclear
    reaction, e.g., wherein the internal conversion of an electron within the
    nucleus generates soft gamma rays.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 310+ for exposure identification means;
    subclases 360+ for cameras using film magazines; and subclasses 512+ for
    film casettes.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics, subclasses 38+
    for controls, subclasses 130+ for image formation, subclasses 168+ for
    charging, subclasses 177+ for exposure, subclasses 222+ for development,
    subclasses 297+ for transfer, subclasses 320+ for fixing, subclasses 343+
    for cleaning, and subclasses 361+ for document handling.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 403+ for film cassette
    unloaders and/or reloaders.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 9.4+
    for X-ray contrast compositions for use in animate objects.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 234, 236 and 237+, particularly subclass 240 for processes
    involving the use of electrical, wave, or radiant energy in food treatments.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses  65, 160 and 457+ for processes of
    coating using electrical or wave energy.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclass 5 for radiation masks; and subclasses 966+ for
    cross-reference art collections of disclosures relating to X-ray imagery.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, appropriate subclass
    for methods of making semiconductor devices; see the search notes therein.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 407+ for detecting nuclear, electromagnetic, or
    ultrasonic radiation in diagnostic testing.

    601,    Surgery:  Kinesitherapy, subclasses 15+ for apparatus in direct
    contact which applies radiation to a human being.

    604,    Surgery, subclass 20 for the applications of light, radiation, and
    electrical energy to the body.

    606,    Surgery, subclass 130 for stereotactic devices.


CLS 378/1
TXT SPECIFIC  APPLICATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising an X-ray system
    including means which adapts that system to a specific application.

    (1)     Note.  Specific methods are classified in the same subclass as the
    corresponding apparatus in this and each of the following subclasses.


CLS 378/2
TXT Radiation coding:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including means to spatially modulate a
    beam of X-rays prior to its impinging upon an object or means to spatially
    demodulate a modulated beam.

    (1)     Note.  The spatial modulation may be produced by spatial filtering
    of an unmodulated beam or by means within the X-ray source which directly
    produces a modulated beam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145,    for X-ray zone plates which may be used as modulators or
    demodulators.


CLS 378/3
TXT Mossbauer effect:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including systems and devices such as
    spectrometers employing the Mossbauer effect, i.e., the absorption or
    emission of gamma rays by an atomic nucleus without the nuclear recoil that
    usually accompanies such phenomena.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 527 for
    the application of a computer to atomic or nuclear physics.


CLS 378/4
TXT Computerized tomography:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 employing computer processing of X-ray
    absorption or transmission data to produce an image of a cross section of
    an object.

    (1)     Note.  Specifically described computer systems or algorithms which
    meet the general definition of Class 364 and do not include significant
    tomography structure should be placed in Class 364 in accordance with
    section II, B of that class definition.

    (2)     Note.  The devices found herein usually include some mechanism
    which allows relative movement between the source or detector of X-rays and
    the object being examined. The tomographic movement is typically produced
    by holding the object stationary and moving the X-ray source and the
    detector simultaneously in opposite directions about a pivot point lying in
    a plane through the object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21+,    for noncomputerized tomography.

    901,    for a cross-reference art collection of tomography programs or
    processors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 413.23
    for algorithms and computer systems used in tomography; and subclasses 819+
    for analog computations of convolution data.

    600,    Surgery, subclass 437 for ultrasonic computer tomography.


CLS 378/5
TXT Energy discriminating:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 including irradiating an object with X-rays
    or one or more specific energy levels and determining transmission or other
    characteristics of the object at the one or more energy levels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for fluorescence composition analysis with spatially dispersive
    energy analysis.

    82+,    for spatial energy dispersion analysis.

    156+,   for energy selective filters.


CLS 378/6
TXT Fluorescence or scatter mapping:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 including determining the distribution in
    intensity of X-rays exiting an object, the X-rays having been deviated in
    direction by the object or being the result of secondary emission from the
    object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44+,    for nontomography fluorescence imaging.

    87,     for nontomography scatter imaging.


CLS 378/7
TXT Scatter compensating:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 including mitigating the effects of primary
    beam deviation or spreading from a desired direction usually upon passage
    through the object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86+,    for scatter analysis.

    154+,   for antiscatter grids.


CLS 378/8
TXT Object responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 including controlling the tomograph or a
    part thereof in response to some condition or characteristic of the object
    being studied.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95,     for object responsive control circuits in nontomography
    applications.


CLS 378/9
TXT Plural sources:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 including more than one source of X-rays.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92,     for electronic circuits for plural sources.

    193,    for supports for plural sources.


CLS 378/10
TXT Nonrotating source or detector:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 wherein the source or detector is
    stationary or is moved for purposes other than scanning.


CLS 378/11
TXT Source or detector translation within plane:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 including means which causes movement,
    other than rotational movement, of the source or detector within the plane
    of the cross section of the object being examined.


CLS 378/12
TXT With electronic scanning:

    Subject matter under subclass 11 including means within the source of
    X-rays which causes movement of an electron beam across the X-ray target to
    cause movement of the beam of X-rays.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for electronic scanning circuits for X-ray sources.

    137,    for scanning X-ray tubes, per se.


CLS 378/13
TXT Radial:

    Subject matter under subclass 11 wherein the source or detector is
    translated in a direction essentially parallel to the mean direction of
    X-ray propagation.


CLS 378/14
TXT Fan beam translation:

    Subject matter under subclass 11 wherein the beam is in the shape of a
    planar fan diverging away from the source.


CLS 378/15
TXT Continuous mechanical rotation:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 including means for electrically
    interfacing the source or detector in such manner that continuous
    unidirectional mechanical rotation can take place without interruption of
    the operation of the source or detector.

    (1)     Note.  Slip rings, energy storage within the rotating structure,
    and telemetering signals from the rotating to the stationary structure are
    typical means used in systems of this type.


CLS 378/16
TXT Beam energy or intensity control:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 including means for controlling beam energy
    (e.g., voltage, hardness, wavelength, frequency) or intensity (e.g., flux
    density).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108     through 112, for regulated X-ray source power supplies.

    145+,   for beam control devices, per se.


CLS 378/17
TXT Tiltable or nonvertical examination plane:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 including means which allows the source or
    detector to be positioned such that the cross section being imaged is in
    some other than the more usual vertical plane.


CLS 378/18
TXT With tissue equivalent material:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 including use in the path of the X-rays of
    a material whose X-ray absorption characteristics are similar to those of
    the object to be examined for purposes such as path length compensation.

    (1)     Note.  Surrounding a human being with water is one example of the
    subject matter found here.

    (2)     Note. This subclass also includes "examination phantoms" such as
    manikins.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156,    for X-ray filters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 505.1 for examination phantoms in general.


CLS 378/19
TXT Beam detection system:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 including detailed structure, technique, or
    control of radiation detection in computerized tomographic systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 336.1+ for radiation detectors, per se.


CLS 378/20
TXT Object positioning or aligning:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 including means for sustaining the object
    under examination against gravity in a selected orientation relative to the
    X-ray source or detector or means for indicating or monitoring the position
    of the object relative to the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68+,    177, 195, and 208, for object supports.

    205,    for X-ray system alignment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 600+ and 630+
    for beds with body support or positioning means.

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 322+ for patient examination tables.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses 1+
    for apparatus in direct body contact with supports and applies radiation to
    a human being.


CLS 378/21
TXT Tomography:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including means which produces an image of
    a cross section of an object.

    (1)     Note.  The devices found herein usually include some mechanism
    which allows relative movement between the source or detector of X-rays and
    the object being examined.  In conventional tomography, the tomographic
    movement is typically produced by holding the object stationary and moving
    the X-ray source and the recording medium simultaneously in opposite
    directions about a pivot point lying in a plane through the object.

    (2)     Note.  Tomography is commonly referenced in the art by the
    equivalent terms laminography, planiography, sectional radiography.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4+,     for computerized tomography.


CLS 378/22
TXT With nonphotographic detector:

    Subject matter under subclass 21 including fluoroscopic, electronic,
    electrostatic or other such detector which does not require photographic
    processing to develop an image.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189+,   for nonphotographic detector supports.


CLS 378/23
TXT Dynamic tomography:

    Subject matter under subclass 21 including the production of a set of
    radiographs which, when superimposed in a stack for viewing with the
    radiographs aligned so that the images of a given point in the object all
    coincide, all other points or object details in the same plane will be
    revealed in an unobstructed view and images of all points lying in other
    planes, even closely adjacent planes, will be obscured or blurred out.

    (1)     Note.  Other specific planes may be selectively viewed by
    appropriate positioning of the radiographs within the stack.

    (2)     Note.  Dynamic tomography typically utilizes a planar tomographic
    movement achieved with the effective pivot point of the linkage being
    disposed in a plane through the object with separate images being recorded
    for each of multiple exposures which are made at different angles through
    the object, i.e., a different film or other recording medium is used for
    each exposure to produce the set of radiographs.

    (3)     Note.  Dynamic tomography is also referenced in the art as plane
    slipping tomography, plane slipping laminography, variable depth
    laminography, simultaneous multiple tomography, etc.


CLS 378/24
TXT Transverse tomography:

    Subject matter under subclass 21 wherein the source, object, and detector
    of X-rays or gamma rays are arranged in such fashion that the cross section
    being imaged is other than the usual longitudinal cross section.


CLS 378/25
TXT Planar tomography:

    Subject matter under subclass 21 wherein the source is moved in a plane
    parallel to the object plane or cross section to be imaged.


CLS 378/26
TXT Linear tomography:

    Subject matter under subclass 25 wherein the source is moved along a
    straight line.


CLS 378/27
TXT Nonplanar tomography:

    Subject matter under subclass 21 wherein the source is moved along a path
    which is nonplanar, e.g., spherical or is nonparallel to the object plane
    or cross section to be imaged.


CLS 378/28
TXT Xeroradiography:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including a detector upon which a latent
    image in the form of a pattern of electric charges is produced by action of
    x-radiation or gamma radiation.

    (1)     Note.  The detector usually includes (a) a pair of spaced imaging
    electrodes defining an imaging gap therebetween, (b) an image receptor
    sheet lying within the gap between the electrodes, (c) an imaging fluid
    filling the remaining space between the electrodes, and (d) an enclosing
    chamber.  By applying a charge across the electrodes and ionizing the fluid
    through irradiation, charges will be removed from or deposited upon the
    image receptor sheet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 324+ for apparatus for or the method of
    corona irradiation to charge the detector without subsequent altering of
    the charge.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics, subclasses 38+
    for controls, subclasses 130+ for image formation, subclasses 168+ for
    charging, subclasses 177+ for exposure, subclasses 222+ for development,
    subclasses 297+ for transfer, subclasses 320+ for fixing, subclasses 343+
    for cleaning, and subclasses 361+ for document handling.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 966+ for cross-reference art collections of disclosures
    relating to X-ray imagery.


CLS 378/29
TXT With real time display:

    Subject matter under subclass 28 including means for displaying an image of
    the object under examination at the time of exposure to radiation in
    addition to or instead of the subsequent production of a hard copy image
    record.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98,     for X-ray systems including circuits and means for displaying and
    signaling.


CLS 378/30
TXT With focused gap field:

    Subject matter under subclass 28 wherein the electric field between the two
    imaging electrodes is focused such that the paths of charged particles
    traveling between the electrodes converge at the origin of the imaging
    X-rays or gamma rays.

    (1)     Note.  Focusing  may be achieved by the use of cylindrically or
    spherically curved imaging electrodes.


CLS 378/31
TXT With auxiliary electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 28 including one or more additional
    electrodes within the gap between the imaging electrodes for purposes such
    as ion flow control.


CLS 378/32
TXT With uniform charging of image receptor:

    Subject matter under subclass 28 including means for uniformly charging the
    image surface of an image receptor sheet before exposure to X-rays or gamma
    rays.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 324+ for xerographic charging devices.


CLS 378/33
TXT With gap fluid handling:

    Subject matter under subclass 28 including means for supplying, removing,
    sealing, or recycling imaging fluid employed within the interelectrode gap
    of the imaging chamber.


CLS 378/34
TXT Lithography:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including the projection of an X-ray image
    upon an X-ray sensitive resist usually through a patterned mask.


CLS 378/35
TXT Pattern mask:

    Subject matter under subclass 34 restricted to the mask itself which is
    made up of adjacent areas of X-ray opaque and X-ray transparent material
    arranged in a selected pattern (usually of an electronic circuit) and used
    for X-ray lithographic production of plural copies of the pattern.

    (1)     Note.  Although this subclass is restricted to single elements, it
    is placed here in the schedule as an exception to the general rule of
    hierarchy since the element described is used only in the system of the
    parent subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, subclass 12 for nonetch function
    mask involving etching.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclass 5 for pattern masks used in photo-lithography.


CLS 378/36
TXT Holography or interferometry:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including the generation, analysis, or
    recording of interference patterns resulting from the interaction of plural
    X-ray wavefronts or the making of optical holograms from conventional
    radiographs, e.g., stereo radiography, to permit holographic display of the
    information.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for conventional stereo radiography.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    1+ for optical holography.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 125 for memories
    including holograms.


CLS 378/37
TXT Mammography:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including means for X-ray examination of
    the female breast.


CLS 378/38
TXT Dental panoramic:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including producing an image of a curved
    dental structure.

    (1)     Note.  An example of the devices found herein is a device wherein
    an image of all teeth on upper and/or lower jaws is formed on a single
    photographic plate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168+,   for dental film supports.

    191,    for dental fluoroscopic detector     supports.


CLS 378/39
TXT Moving source and detector:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 including moving the source and the
    detector simultaneously about an axis generally parallel to the patient's
    spine.


CLS 378/40
TXT Continuous image:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 wherein the image is formed during one
    continuous movement of the source and detector.

    (1)     Note.  The movement of the source and detector is typically both
    rotation about an axis and movement of the axis along a predetermined path.


CLS 378/41
TXT Stereoscopy:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including formation of plural related
    images which, when properly viewed, exhibit depth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98+,    for television display of stereo images.

    174,    for supports for plural films or plates.

    193,    for supports for plural sources.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    462+ for light type devices for stereoscopically viewing X-ray stereograms
    or a stereoscopic record or records and optical systems for producing a
    visual record taken from two different points of view.


CLS 378/42
TXT Fluoroscopy:

    Subject matter under subclass 41 including a fluorescent screen upon which
    the images are formed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    190+,   for fluoroscopes.


CLS 378/43
TXT Telescope or microscope:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including the collection and detection of
    X-rays from distant objects (e.g., the stars) or the formation of an image
    of an object, which image is substantially larger than the object.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    368+ and 399+ for visible light telescope or microscopes.


CLS 378/44
TXT Fluorescence:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including the measurement or analysis of
    secondary X-rays resulting from the excitation by primary x-radiation or
    gamma radiation of analyte atoms.

    (1)     Note.  Although not specifically include within each of the
    following definitions, fluorescence systems usually include (a) a source of
    primary X-rays or gamma rays, (b) an analyte which emits fluorescent
    X-rays, (c) an analyte holder or positioning means, and (d) a detector of
    the fluorescent X-rays.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for Mossbauer effect devices.

    6,      for fluorescence or scatter mapping.

    143,    for sources which produce secondary X-rays.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses, especially subclass 589 for radiant energy type automatic
    assorting.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 306+ for sample bombardment with protons
    or electrons which may produce X-rays and subclasses 253+ for geological
    surveying.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclasses 156+ for X-rays generated by means of an induced nuclear
    reaction, e.g., wherein the internal conversion of an electron within the
    nucleus generates soft gamma rays.


CLS 378/45
TXT Composition analysis:

    Subject matter under subclass 44 including measurement of the chemical
    composition, quantity (density), or presence of a specific substance in an
    analyte.

    (1)     Note.  The measurement is typically accomplished by energy analysis
    of the fluorescent X-rays emitted by the object under examination.  The
    energy of specific line emissions uniquely identifies chemical elements and
    the intensity of the emission characterizes its quantity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for absorption composition analysis.

    83      and 88, for diffraction, reflection, or scattering composition
    analysis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, appropriate subclasses for chemical
    composition analysis.


CLS 378/46
TXT Plural diverse X-ray analyses:

    Subject matter under subclass 45 including some type of X-ray analysis of
    the analyte in addition to fluorescence composition analysis.


CLS 378/47
TXT Fluid analyte:

    Subject matter under subclass 45 wherein the composition to be measured is
    a fluid or is contained in a fluid.


CLS 378/48
TXT With standardization:

    Subject matter under subclass 45 including comparison of the fluorescent
    spectra emitted by the analyte with reference spectra emitted by substances
    of known composition.


CLS 378/49
TXT With spatially dispersive energy analysis:

    Subject matter under subclass 45 including specially separating fluorescent
    X-rays of different frequencies prior to determination of the intensity
    thereof.

    (1)     Note.   This subclass requires that the origin of the X-rays being
    analyzed is an analyte which is excited to fluorescence by primary X-rays,
    while the means for spatial energy dispersion of X-rays of subclass 82 will
    function regardless of the manner of production of the X-rays.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for computerized tomography using energy discrimination.

    83,     for composition analysis by spatial energy dispersion.

    156+,   for energy selective filters.


CLS 378/50
TXT Thickness or density analysis:

    Subject matter under subclass 44 including measurement of the thickness or
    density of an object such as a sheet or coating.

    (1)     Note.  This measurement is typically accomplished by comparing the
    attenuation of fluorescent X-rays generated within the object with the
    attenuation in a reference object of known thickness or density.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54+,    for absorption type thickness or density analysis.

    89+,    for scattering type thickness or density analysis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 152.05+ for measuring density
    within a borehole.


CLS 378/51
TXT Absorption:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including the measurement or analysis of
    X-rays that have passed through an object under examination to determine
    the attenuation or other change in X-ray characteristics resulting from the
    passage.

    (1)     Note.  Although not specifically included within each of the
    following definitions, absorption systems usually include, (a) a source of
    X-rays or gamma rays, (b) an object under examination, (c) an object holder
    or positioning means, and (d) a detector of X-rays.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for X-ray absorption involving the Mossbaurer effect.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses, especially subclass 589 for radiant energy type automatic
    assorting.


CLS 378/52
TXT Fluid level measuring:

    Subject matter under subclass 51 which includes a body of fluent material,
    an X-ray or gamma ray source, and a detector responsive to the source
    arranged so that the body of fluent material is located in the radiation
    path between the source and detector or the body of fluent material
    supports either the source or detector, wherein the detector produces an
    output representative of the height or depth of the body of fluent material
    and methods corresponding to the apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 290+ for liquid level or depth
    gauges not using invisible light.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 109+ and 227+ for mechanical
    liquid level indicators.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 386+ for liquid level responsive or
    maintaining system.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 306+ for contained fluent material level
    signalling where charged particles are used to sense the level of the
    material.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 612+ for fluent or
    pulverized material level signalling not using invisible light.


CLS 378/53
TXT Composition analysis:

    Subject matter under subclass 51 including measurement of the chemical
    composition, quantity (density), or presence of a specific substance in an
    analyte.

    (1)     Note.  The measurement is typically accomplished by energy analysis
    of the X-ray spectra as absorbed by the analyte and comparing the absorbed
    spectra with reference a spectra from substances of known composition.  The
    energy of specific line absorptions uniquely identifies chemical elements
    and the degree of the absorption characterizes its quantity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for fluorescence composition analysis.

    83      and 88, for diffraction, reflection, or scatter composition
    analysis.


CLS 378/54
TXT Thickness or density analysis:

    Subject matter under subclass 51 including measurement of the thickness or
    density of an object such as a sheet or coating.

    (1)     Note.  This measurement is typically accomplished by analyzing the
    attenuation of X-rays as a result of their passage through the object under
    examination.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     for fluorescence thickness or density analysis.

    89+,    for scatter type thickness or density analysis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 152.05+ for measuring density
    within a borehole.


CLS 378/55
TXT With movable source or detector:

    Subject matter under subclass 54 including means to allow movement of the
    source or detector to X-rays relative to the object being examined.


CLS 378/56
TXT With standardization:

    Subject matter under subclass 54 including comparison of the attenuation of
    X-rays passing through the object under examination with the attentuation
    produced by a reference object of known thickness or density.


CLS 378/57
TXT Inspection of closed container:

    Subject matter under subclass 51 including examining the contents of a
    closed container such as luggage without opening that container.


CLS 378/58
TXT Flaw analysis:

    Subject matter under subclass 51 including detection and location of a
    structural defect in an object under examination by analyzing the pattern
    of absorption of X-rays passing through the object in comparison with
    pattern of absorption of X-rays passing through a reference object of known
    integrity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86,     for scatter type flaw analysis.


CLS 378/59
TXT Pipe testing:

    Subject matter under subclass 58 wherein the object under examination is a
    pipe.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 220 for magnetic pipe
    testing.


CLS 378/60
TXT Pipe crawler:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 including self propelled means of
    transporting an X-ray or gamma ray source or detector along the interior of
    a pipe to be examined.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198,    for mobile X-ray source supports.


CLS 378/61
TXT Tire testing:

    Subject matter under subclass 58 wherein the object under examination is a
    tire.


CLS 378/62
TXT Imaging:

    Subject matter under subclass 51 including forming a visible or latent
    image of a field of X-rays that has been modulated by absorption during
    passage through an object.

    (1)     Note.  The image may be photographic or electronic in nature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for fluorescence imaging.

    87,     for scatter imaging.

    163,    for size, distance, or location determination within an examined
    object relative to reference indices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 478 for X-ray shield compositions or
    contrast agents for inanimate objects.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 9.4+
    for X-ray contrast compositions for use in animate objects.

    430,    Radiation, Imagery Chemistry:   Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclass 5 for radiation masks; and subclasses 966+ for
    cross-reference art collections of disclosures relating to X-ray imagery.


CLS 378/63
TXT Combined with non-X-ray imaging:

    Subject matter under subclass 62 including forming an image using visible
    light, mechanical impression or other such technique in addition to the
    image formed by using X-rays.


CLS 378/64
TXT Irradiating:

    Subject matter under subclass 51 wherein the object to which X-radiation is
    being applied is the sole primary receiver of the radiation.

    (1)     Note.   A secondary receiver or detector of radiation may be
    included in a system of this subclass for purposes such as control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Food and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 451 for apparatus for
    subjecting foods and beverages to wave, radiant, and electrical energy.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    272.2+ and 379.6 for methods and apparatus which include applying wave
    energy to work.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 492.1+ for non-X-ray irradiating.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 405+ for direct application of electrical or wave energy to work.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 234, 236 and 237+, particularly subclass 240 for processes
    involving the use of electrical, wave or radiant energy in food treatments.


CLS 378/65
TXT Therapy:

    Subject matter under subclass 64 wherein the purpose of applying the
    radiation is treatment or cure of a disease or other disability.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    604,    Surgery, subclass 20 for the applications of light, radiation, and
    electrical energy to the body.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses 1+
    for apparatus in direct body contact which applies radiation to a human
    being.


CLS 378/66
TXT Of fluid:

    Subject matter under subclass 64 wherein the object of irradiation is a
    fluid or is contained in a fluid.


CLS 378/67
TXT With tortuous flow:

    Subject matter under subclass 66 wherein the fluids travels in a circuitous
    path during irradiation that bends, twists, or curves.


CLS 378/68
TXT Including object support or positioning:

    Subject matter under subclass 64 including means for sustaining the object
    of irradiation against gravity in a selected orientation during irradiation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     and the subclasses noted thereunder, for object support,
    positioning, or aligning devices.


CLS 378/69
TXT With object moving:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 including means which causes movement of
    the supported object.


CLS 378/70
TXT Diffraction, reflection, or scattering analysis:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including the measurement or sensing of
    X-rays, the direction of which have been modified by interaction with an
    object under examination.

    (1)     Note.  Although not specifically included within each of the
    following definitions, diffraction, reflection, or scattering systems
    usually include, (a) source of X-rays or gamma rays, (b) a diffracting,
    reflecting, or scattering object, (c) an object holder or positioning
    means, and (d) a detector of diffracted, reflected, or scattered X-rays.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses, especially subclass 589 for radiant energy type automatic
    assorting.


CLS 378/71
TXT Diffractometry:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 providing for the generation and
    examination or determination of at least part of the characteristic X-ray
    diffraction pattern of an analyte.

    (1)     Note.  Devices under subclass 82 employ diffraction elements such
    as crystals and gratings which spatially disperse X-rays according to their
    energy. These elements are not objects or examination as in this subclass
    but rather are tools for examining something else since their diffraction
    patterns are known.


CLS 378/72
TXT Stress analysis:

    Subject matter under subclass 71 including detecting the presence or
    measuring the extent of stress within an analyte by analyzing the manner in
    which its X-ray diffraction pattern is modified when the X-rays are
    incident on a stressed area.


CLS 378/73
TXT Crystalography:

    Subject matter under subclass 71 wherein the analyte is a crystal.


CLS 378/74
TXT Topography:

    Subject matter under subclass 73 including measuring surface features of a
    crystal by analyzing the manner in which X-rays are differentially
    diffracted by different areas of the surface of the crystal.


CLS 378/75
TXT Powder technique:

    Subject matter under subclass 73 wherein the crystal is in pulverized form
    and is analyzed by processes such as the Debye-Scherrer method.


CLS 378/76
TXT Back reflection:

    Subject matter under subclass 73 in which the crystal is analyzed by the
    back reflection technique.

    (1)     Note.  For a more detailed treatment of the back reflection
    technique, see Applied X-rays, by George L. Clark, Magraw Hill Book Co.,
    1955.


CLS 378/77
TXT Precession:

    Subject matter under subclass 73 in which the crystal is analyzed by the
    precession technique.

    (1)     Note.  For a more detailed treatment of the precession technique,
    see  Applied X-rays,  by George L. Clark, Magraw Hill Book Co., 1955.


CLS 378/78
TXT Piezoelectric crystal:

    Subject matter under subclass 73 in which the crystal being analyzed is
    piezoelectric, i.e., becomes electrically polarized when mechanically
    strained or mechanically strained when electrically polarized.


CLS 378/79
TXT Analyte support:

    Subject matter under subclass 71 including detailed structure of the
    analyte holder or positioning means.


CLS 378/80
TXT With environmental control:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 including means to alter the pressure,
    temperature, or composition of the atmosphere surrounding the analyte.


CLS 378/81
TXT Goniometer:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 including means for translating, rotating,
    or oscillating the analyte.


CLS 378/82
TXT Spatial energy dispersion:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 including means for physically spreading
    out an X-ray beam into its various energy components by diffraction, e.g.,
    spectrometers and monochromators.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes means for spatial energy separation
    of X-rays, which means function regardless of the origin or manner of
    production of the X-rays.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for computerized tomography using energy discrimination.

    49,     for spatially dispersive energy analysis of the X-ray fluorescence
    of an analyte.

    156+,   for energy selective filters.


CLS 378/83
TXT Composition analysis:

    Subject matter under subclass 82 including measurement of the chemical
    composition, quantity (density), or presence of a specific substance in an
    analyte.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes means for energy analyzing X-rays
    that have interacted with or have been produced by an analyte such as by
    scattering or radioactive decay for the purpose of determining analyte
    composition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     or fluorescence composition analysis.

    53,     for absorption composition analysis.

    88,     for scatter type composition analysis.


CLS 378/84
TXT Monochromator of focusing device:

    Subject matter under subclass 82 including a specific element of its
    support means for limiting the energy spectrum of a beam of X-rays to a
    narrow band of energies or for converging a beam of X-rays.

    (1)     Note.  The elements of this subclass comprise crystals and gratings
    which, by diffraction, spatially disperse X-rays according to their energy.
    These elements are not the objects of examination as in subclass 71 above
    but rather are tools for examining something else since their diffraction
    patterns are known.


CLS 378/85
TXT With plural dispersing elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 comprising plural elements for focusing or
    energy analyzing X-rays by diffraction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157,    for plural filters.


CLS 378/86
TXT Scatter analysis:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 including the measurement or analysis of
    X-rays that have been modulated in direction by an object under examination.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for scatter compensation in computerized tomography.


CLS 378/87
TXT Imaging:

    Subject matter under subclass 86 including forming a visible or latent
    image of X-rays that have been modulated in direction by interaction with
    an object.

    (1)     Note.  The image may be photographic or electronic in nature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for computerized tomography fluorescence or scatter mapping.

    44+,    for fluorescence imaging.

    62,     for absorption imaging.


CLS 378/88
TXT Composition analysis:

    Subject matter under subclass 86 including measurement of the chemical
    composition, quantity (density), or presence of a specific substance in an
    analyte.

    (1)     Note.  The measurement is typically accomplished by deflection
    analysis of the X-rays modified in direction by the analyte and comparing
    the deflection with reference data from substances of known composition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for fluorescence composition analysis.

    53,     for absorption composition analysis.

    83,     for spatial energy dispersion composition analysis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 253 for geological surveying.


CLS 378/89
TXT Thickness or density analysis:

    Subject matter under subclass 86 including measurement of the thickness or
    density of an object such as a sheet or coating.

    (1)     Note.  This measurement is typically accomplished by comparing the
    modification in direction of X-rays as a result of their interaction with
    an object under examination with  the modification in direction produced by
    a reference object of known thickness or density.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     for fluorescence thickness or density analysis.

    54+,    for absorption thickness or density analysis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 152.05+ for measuring density
    within a borehole.


CLS 378/90
TXT Plural diverse X-ray analyses:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 including some type of X-ray analysis of
    the analyte in addition to scatter type thickness or density analysis.


CLS 378/91
TXT ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a combination of
    electrically connected devices for powering or controlling and connected to
    an X-ray source or detector or displaying an image or other information
    developed from the source or detector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    for X-ray sources, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 336.1+ for radiant energy detectors, per
    se.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous nonlinear active device
    circuits.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, appropriate subclasses for indicating
    and display systems in general.


CLS 378/92
TXT For plural X-ray sources:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 in which there are two or more X-ray or
    gamma ray sources with circuit portions being provided for one or more of
    the sources.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for computerized tomography using plural sources.

    193,    for supports for plural sources.


CLS 378/93
TXT For electrode movement:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 wherein the source is an X-ray tube having
    a movable target or electrode and at least one part of the circuit is
    connected thereto to control or monitor its movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125     and 135, for X-ray tubes with movable targets or electrodes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, for motor control circuits.


CLS 378/94
TXT With movement sensing:

    Subject matter under subclass 93 including detection of electrode motion,
    usually to prevent energization of the tube until proper speed of the
    electrode is attained.


CLS 378/95
TXT Object responsive control:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 wherein the circuit controls the source in
    response to a sensed condition of the object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for object responsive control circuits used in computerized
    tomography.

    97      and 108, for dose responsive control circuits.


CLS 378/96
TXT Exposure timer:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 wherein the circuit includes means to
    determine the length of time that the object is exposed to radiation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for means for termination of exposure to prevent damage to the
    system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 89+ for
    interval timers, per se.


CLS 378/97
TXT Dose responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 96 wherein the means to determine the
    duration of exposure is responsive to the amount of radiation being applied
    to the object or received by the detector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for dose controlled X-ray source power supplies.


CLS 378/98
TXT With display or signaling:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 wherein an image of the object is
    displayed electronically or some condition of the object or of the X-ray
    system is indicated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+ for condition
    responsive indicating systems.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 1+ for visual display systems
    with selective electrical control.


CLS 378/98.11
TXT With image subtraction:

    Subject matter under subclass 98.9 wherein the television system includes
    means for subtracting one image from another and then displaying the
    resultant image so as to, for example, enhance the display of a particular
    body part such as a blood vessel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for data processing.

    382,    Image Analysis, appropriate subclasses for image analysis.


CLS 378/98.12
TXT With image subtraction or addition:

    Subject matter under subclass 98.2 wherein the television system includes
    means for subtracting or adding one image from another and then displaying
    the resultant image so as to, for example, enhance the display of a
    particular body part such as a blood vessel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for data processing.

    382,    Image Analysis, appropriate subclasses for image analysis.


CLS 378/98.2
TXT Television:

    Subject matter under subclass 98.1 wherein the display is in the form of a
    television image.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for stereoscopic radiography that employs television.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 214 for image intensifier tubes.

    358,    Facsimile, appropriate subclasses for non-X-ray television.


CLS 378/98.3
TXT With visible light optics:

    Subject matter under subclass 98.2 wherein the X-ray television system
    includes visible light optical elements between the means for converting
    the X-ray image to a visible light image and the means for converting the
    visible light image to an electronic video signal.

    (1)     Note. These elements may comprise optical cubes, lenses, mirrors,
    prisms, optical fibers, filters, diaphragms, or shutters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, for
    optical elements.


CLS 378/98.4
TXT With electronic X-ray scatter compensating:

    Subject matter under subclass 98.2 wherein the X-ray television system
    includes electronic circuit means for modifying the video signal
    representative of the X-ray image in accordance with an electronic signal
    representative of the X-rays that are scattered by the imaged object or by
    its surroundings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7       and 154, for compensating for z-ray scatter in computer tomograph
    and for mechanical devices for eliminating scattered X-rays.


CLS 378/98.5
TXT With auxiliary data video display:

    Subject matter under subclass 98.2 wherein the X-ray television system
    includes means for displaying on a television monitor information in
    addition to the actual X-ray image.

    (1)     Note. Such information may comprise positional data of the examined
    object or the X-ray equipment, exposure parameters such as X-ray tube
    voltage and current, the outline of a body organ or contrast agent bolus,
    an EKG waveform or a visible light image of the examined object or
    different colors which may represent a time lapse, composition, or regions
    of interest.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162,    for nontelevision acquisition or recording of auxiliary data.


CLS 378/98.6
TXT With electronically scanned X-ray source:

    Subject matter under subclass 98.2 wherein the television system includes a
    source of X-rays that comprises an electron tube with means to emit a small
    diameter X-ray beam that is electronically scanned over the object to be
    examined.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113     and 137, for X-ray tube scanning circuits and for scanning X-ray
    tubes.


CLS 378/98.7
TXT With automatic image brightness control:

    Subject matter under subclass 98.2 wherein the X-ray television system
    includes means for automatically adjust or maintain constant the image
    brightness of the video display.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97      and 108, for control of X-ray dosage.


CLS 378/98.8
TXT With solid-state image detector:

    Subject matter under subclass 98.2 wherein the X-ray television system
    includes a solid-state detector that generates the video image in response
    to the X-ray or visible light image.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, appropriate subclasses for solid detectors.


CLS 378/98.9
TXT With plural X-ray energies:

    Subject matter under subclass 98.2 wherein the television system includes
    means for acquiring X-ray images at more than one X-ray energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156,    for energy filtering of X-rays.


CLS 378/101
TXT X-ray source power supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 wherein the circuit includes specific
    devices such as voltage regulators, current convertors, and rectifiers
    which are used to develop the required voltages and currents for proper
    operation of the X-ray or gamma ray source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 11+
    and 43+ for plural load power supplies and circuits.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for general purpose power supplies.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, appropriate subclasses for power
    conversion systems.


CLS 378/102
TXT Mobile or portable:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 including means to supply energy to the
    X-ray or gamma ray source during irradiation by other than connection to
    power mains.

    (1)     Note.  The devices herein are frequently for supplying power to
    movable parts of stationary systems.


CLS 378/103
TXT Energy storage:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 including means such as capacitors and
    inductors used for energy storage.


CLS 378/104
TXT With specific rectifier:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 including a detailed embodiment of means
    to convert alternating current to direct current.


CLS 378/105
TXT High frequency:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 including means to supply alternating
    current at a frequency higher than standard 60 hertz alternating current.


CLS 378/106
TXT With pulse output:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 including means to supply current in
    single short bursts or interrupted at a regular rate.


CLS 378/107
TXT With AC output:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 including supplying power to a
    self-rectifying source in the form of alternating high potential current.


CLS 378/108
TXT Dose regulated:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 including means to control the power
    supply in response to the amount of radiation being applied to or
    transmitted by an object.

    (1)     Note.  These circuits require means for measuring the amount of
    radiation that is actually incident on the object or detector.


CLS 378/109
TXT Current regulated:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 including controlling the amount of
    current being supplied to the source.


CLS 378/110
TXT Automatic:

    Subject matter under subclass 109 including maintaining constant current or
    adjusting current according to a predetermined program without manual
    control.


CLS 378/111
TXT Voltage regulated:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 including controlling the level of the
    voltage being supplied to the source.


CLS 378/112
TXT Automatic:

    Subject matter under subclass 111 including maintaining constant voltage or
    adjusting voltage according to a predetermined program without manual
    control.


CLS 378/113
TXT Electron beam control:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 including supplying appropriate voltages
    and current to a source to control the focus or intensity or to cause
    scanning or deflection of the X-ray producing electron beam therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for tomography systems which include electronic scanning.

    137,    for X-ray tubes, per se, which include electron scanning or
    deflecting means.

    138,    for X-ray tubes, per se, which include electron focusing or
    intensity control means.

    146     and 193, for mechanical X-ray scanning.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 364+ for
    non-X-ray cathode-ray tube deflection circuits.


CLS 378/114
TXT With switching means:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 wherein the circuit includes a detailed
    embodiment of a switching circuit for controlling the operation of an X-ray
    system or its components.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     for exposure time switching.


CLS 378/115
TXT For selecting:

    Subject matter under subclass 114 wherein the switching means is operative
    to select between different portions of the circuit, different devices
    connected to the circuit or different modes of operation.


CLS 378/116
TXT Technique or detector:

    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein the switching means selects
    between different modes of operation of the system or between several
    detectors.


CLS 378/117
TXT For safety or protection:

    Subject matter under subclass 114 wherein the switching means causes
    discontinuation of operation of a portion or all of the system upon the
    occurrance of an undesired condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    safety and protection of systems and devices in general.


CLS 378/118
TXT Tube overload:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 wherein the undesired condition is
    overload of the X-ray tube.


CLS 378/119
TXT SOURCE:

    Subject matter under the class definition including methods and means for
    generating X or gamma rays not provided for elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, subclass 5 for short wavelength lasers
    including X-ray lasers.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclass 156 for X-rays generated by means of an induced nuclear reaction,
    e.g., wherein the internal conversion of an electron within the nucleus
    generates soft gamma rays.


CLS 378/120
TXT Nuclear excited:

    Subject matter under subclass 119 wherein the source is caused to emit
    X-rays through excitation of a target upon bombardment of the target with
    subatomic particles generated by the nuclear decay of a radioactive
    substance.


CLS 378/121
TXT Electron tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 119 wherein the source is an electronic
    discharge device.

    (1)     Note.  A typical X-ray tube includes an envelope within which are
    positioned a filament used to heat a cathode which emits a beam of
    electrons which strikes a target which target then emits X-rays.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses for
    non-X-ray electron tubes.


CLS 378/122
TXT Field emission or cold cathode:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein electrons are ejected by a
    cathode upon the application of an intense potential gradient between the
    cathode and anode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 309 or discharge
    devices having a multipointed or serrated edge electrode and subclass 336
    for point source cathodes.


CLS 378/123
TXT Vacuum control:

    Subject matter subclass 121 wherein the tube includes means such as
    getters, regulators, and pumps to permit variation of the vacuum within the
    tube or which act continuously to maintain the vacuum, e.g., by scavenging.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125+    and 135, for X-ray tubes with movable electrodes which may include
    vacuum seals for the electrode moving means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 547 for related
    subject matter used in discharge devices generally.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    subclasses 38+ and 73 for related subject matter used in the manufacture
    and repair of discharge devices.


CLS 378/124
TXT With plural targets or anodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 including more than one target for the
    beam of electrons or more than one anode within the tube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    for tubes with plural electrodes other than targets or anodes.


CLS 378/125
TXT With movable target:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the target within the tube is
    movable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135,    for tubes with movable electrodes other than the target.


CLS 378/126
TXT Translation or nutation:

    Subject matter under subclass 125 wherein the movement is in a straight
    line or a compound movement other than simple rotation.


CLS 378/127
TXT Temperature modification:

    Subject matter under subclass 125 wherein means are provided to modify one
    or more temperatures within the tube, e.g., to decrease the operating
    temperature of the rotor bearings to prevent them from seizing.

    (1)     Note.  Also included is subject matter having means comprising
    evaporable metal for transferring heat away from the focal spot to lower
    the maximum instantaneous local temperature on the target itself.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141+,   for X-ray tubes other than the movable target type with cooling
    means.

    199+,   for cooling means external to the X-ray tube.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 11+ for temperature
    modification in discharge devices generally.


CLS 378/128
TXT With thermal impedance:

    Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein a temperature (usually the
    bearing temperature) is modified through the use of means to diminish the
    rate of heat transfer in a specific direction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 133 for diminishing thermal radiation by
    surface polishing.


CLS 378/129
TXT With increased emissivity:

    Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein a surface is conditioned to
    enhance the radiation of heat.

    (1)     Note.  Typical conditioned surfaces are target surfaces or motor
    rotor surfaces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 133 for increasing thermal radiation by the
    coating or roughening of surfaces.


CLS 378/130
TXT With cooling fluid:

    Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein a fluid is used to remove heat
    from some region of the tube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141+,   for X-ray tubes other than the movable target type with cooling
    means.

    199+,   for cooling means external to the X-ray tube.


CLS 378/131
TXT With specific motor means:

    Subject matter under subclass 125 including detailed means to produce
    target movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, appropriate subclasses for
    electrical motor structure, per se.


CLS 378/132
TXT With specific bearing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 125 including detailed structure for
    supporting while allowing movement of the target.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, appropriate subclasses for bearings, per se.


CLS 378/133
TXT With lubrication:

    Subject matter under subclass 132 including means for maintaining the
    bearing in a proper state of lubrication.


CLS 378/134
TXT With plural cathodes or heaters:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 including more than one cathode or heater
    within the tube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124,    for tubes with plural targets or anodes.


CLS 378/135
TXT With movable electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein an electrode within the tube
    other than the target is movable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125+,   for tubes with movable targets.


CLS 378/136
TXT With specific cathode:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 including a specific embodiment of a
    cathode defining particular material or structure.


CLS 378/137
TXT With electron scanning or deflecting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 including means to electrostatically or
    magnetically move the beam of electrons from one position to another on the
    target.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for computerized tomography systems which include electronic
    scanning.

    113,    for power supplies for electron scanning X-ray tubes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 364 for cathode-ray
    tube structure not specific to X-ray tubes.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 364 for
    cathode-ray tube scanning circuits not specific to X-ray tubes.


CLS 378/138
TXT With electron focusing or intensity control means:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 including means to converge the beam of
    electrons into a spot at the target or to control the electron density of
    the beam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 452+ for
    cathode-ray tubes provided with focusing means for the electron beam.


CLS 378/139
TXT With potential stress distribution:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 including means for decreasing local
    potential gradients such as would result in puncturing of the envelope,
    e.g., the means is typically a coating on the surface of the envelope, the
    resistivity of the coating being just low enough to drain off electrical
    charges which would otherwise accumulate during the operation of the tube.


CLS 378/140
TXT With X-ray window or secondary radiation screen:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 provided with means for absorbing
    secondary electrons and/or unwanted photons, and X-ray tubes having a
    window in the envelope of the tube which passes a broader spectrum of X-ray
    radiation than is passed by the remainder of the envelope.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass, for example, are X-ray tubes
    having an envelope made of a glass which transmits only "hard" X-rays and
    which has a window made of a material that will transmit "soft" X-rays.

    (2)     Note.  A typical secondary screen is a hood surrounding the target
    with an entrance aperture for primary electrons and an exit aperture for
    desired X-rays.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161,    for windows, per se.


CLS 378/141
TXT With cooling means:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein means is provided to remove heat
    from some region of the tube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127+,   for temperature modification means in movable target tubes.

    199+,   for cooling means external to the X-ray tube.


CLS 378/142
TXT With solid heat conductor or shield:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the cooling means is in the form
    of a solid and acts to remove heat by conduction from or blocks the passage
    of heat to some region of the tube.


CLS 378/143
TXT Target:

    Subject matter under subclass 119 including a specific embodiment of an
    element which is designed to generate X-rays when bombarded by electrons or
    other radiation.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains patents for targets (which are
    sources of X-rays) when the target is not claimed in combination with a
    tube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121+,   for targets claimed in combination with an X-ray tube.


CLS 378/144
TXT Rotary:

    Subject matter under subclass 143 including targets specifically designed
    to be rotated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125+,   for X-ray tubes with movable targets.


CLS 378/145
TXT BEAM CONTROL:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising adjusting X-ray beam
    characteristics subsequent to generation of the X-ray beam to provide
    desired beam size, shape, energy, intensity, propagation direction, or
    other such features.

    (1)     Note.  The means for adjusting the beam characteristics may be
    included within the X-ray source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for beam energy or intensity control in computerized tomography.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 505.1 for radiation controlling means in
    general.


CLS 378/146
TXT Scanner:

    Subject matter under subclass 145 including means to cause the beam of
    X-rays to sweep over a selected area by sequentially passing small portions
    of a large beam while blocking all other portions, e.g., an X-ray opaque
    Nipkow disk.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     113 and 137, for systems including scanning an electron beam across
    a target to thus cause scanning of the emitted X-rays.


CLS 378/147
TXT Collimator:

    Subject matter under subclass 145 comprising control of X-ray beam shape,
    size, axial direction, or focal length.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes X-ray opaque aperture plates, source
    mounted masking devices, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Beam masking devices positioned on or adjacent an irradiated
    object so as to protect the object are considered radiation shields and are
    classified in Class 250, Radiant Energy, subclass 515.1.


CLS 378/148
TXT Plural selectable:

    Subject matter under subclass 147 including means to select one of a
    plurality of collimators.


CLS 378/149
TXT Multiaperture:

    Subject matter under subclass 147 wherein the collimator is formed of a
    large number of small apertures, e.g., arranged in the form of a honeycomb,
    which apertures are employed simultaneously.


CLS 378/150
TXT Variable:

    Subject matter under subclass 147 wherein the shape, size, axial direction,
    or focal length of the beam is variable.

    (1)     Note.  Variable collimators are referred to in the art by numerous
    alternative terms such as diaphragms, shutters, screens, masks, or cones.


CLS 378/151
TXT Automatic:

    Subject matter under subclass 150 wherein the collimator is caused to vary
    in response to the sensing of some condition of the X-ray device or the
    object.


CLS 378/152
TXT With linear leaf motion:

    Subject matter under subclass 150 wherein the aperture in the collimator is
    bounded by movable leaves of X-ray opaque material and these leaves are
    each movable along straight lines.


CLS 378/153
TXT With pivotal leaf motion:

    Subject matter under subclass 150 wherein the aperture in the collimator is
    bounded by movable leaves of X-ray opaque material and these leaves are
    each movable about pivot points.


CLS 378/154
TXT Antiscatter grid:

    Subject matter under subclass 145 including a plurality of X-ray opaque
    elements arranged in the form of a grid and used to prevent the passage
    therethrough of X-rays coming from other than a desired direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140,    for secondary radiation screens combined with X-ray sources.

    149,    for structure wherein X-ray opaque elements define a large number
    of small apertures.


CLS 378/155
TXT With grid moving means:

    Subject matter under subclass 154 including means to move the grid, such
    that a shadow of the grid does not appear in the final X-ray image.


CLS 378/156
TXT Filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 145 including means which allows the passage
    therethrough of X-rays of selected energy or intensity.

    (1)     Note.  A single filter may allow the passage of photons having
    different energies at different portions thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for computerized tomography using energy discrimination.

    49,     for spatially dispersive energy analysis of the X-ray fluorescence
    of an analyte.

    82+,    for spatial energy dispersion analysis.


CLS 378/157
TXT Plural:

    Subject matter under subclass 156 including a plurality of separate filter
    units.


CLS 378/158
TXT Single filter with plural elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 156 including a plurality of filter elements
    joined to form a single filter unit.


CLS 378/159
TXT Contoured:

    Subject matter under subclass 156 wherein the filter is of nonuniform
    thickness.


CLS 378/160
TXT Shutter or chopper:

    Subject matter under subclass 145 including means which may be rapidly
    opened or closed to completely block or pass an X-ray beam.


CLS 378/161
TXT Window:

    Subject matter under subclass 145 including an aperture in an X-ray opaque
    material which is closed by an X-ray transmissive material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140,    for windows combined with X-ray sources.


CLS 378/162
TXT AUXILIARY DATA ACQUISITION OR RECORDING:

    Subject matter under the class definition including the acquisition or
    recording of information concerning the object or the exposure other than
    the image of the object.

    (1)     Note.  The recording usually takes the form of a marking or coding
    on a photographic plate upon which the image of the object is formed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, for recording devices, per se.

    606,    Surgery, subclass 130 for stereotactic devices, i.e., holders
    comprising X-ray opaque marking for supporting surgical instruments
    relative to a patient.


CLS 378/163
TXT Distance or dimension marker:

    Subject matter under subclass 162 including means of known dimensions which
    are at least partly opaque to X-rays placed on or near the object at known
    distances from each other such that they appear in the final image of the
    object and whose images may be used to calculated distance or dimensions
    within the object.


CLS 378/164
TXT Coodinate grid:

    Subject matter under subclass 163 wherein the means comprises a coordinate
    grid which is at least partly opaque to X-rays.


CLS 378/165
TXT Patient or exposure data:

    Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein the data concerns patient related
    information or the image number, duration, intensity, or other
    characteristic of the exposure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    396,    Photography, subclasses 310+ for exposure identification.


CLS 378/166
TXT With light projection:

    Subject matter under subclass 165 wherein the data is recorded by
    projecting light modulated with the data onto the X-ray detector.

    (1)     Note.  The light may be infrared, visible or ultraviolet.


CLS 378/167
TXT PHOTOGRAPHIC DETECTOR SUPPORT:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means to support,
    contain, or position an X-ray detector of the photographic type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    396,    Photography, appropriate subclasses for photographic film support,
    positioning, aligning, and moving means, in general.


CLS 378/168
TXT Dental:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 wherein the object under examination
    includes the teeth or jaw of a patient.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38+,    for dental panoramics.

    191,    for dental fluoroscopic detector supports.


CLS 378/169
TXT Cassette:

    Subject matter under subclass 168 including a container for the detector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 455 for film receptacles.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 512+ for photographic film cassettes.


CLS 378/170
TXT With aligning:

    Subject matter under subclass 168 including means to position the detector
    in a selected alignment with the source and object.


CLS 378/171
TXT For roll or strip film:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 wherein the film is in the form of a roll
    or strip.


CLS 378/172
TXT Serial plate of cassette changer:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 providing for the sequential supply of
    unexposed X-ray plates or cassettes to an X-ray exposure station and for
    the subsequent removal therefrom of exposed plates or cassettes.


CLS 378/173
TXT Serial film or film pack changer:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 providing for the sequential supply of
    unexposed X-ray films or film packs to an X-ray exposure station and for
    the subsequent removal therefrom of exposed films or film packs.


CLS 378/174
TXT For plural films or plates:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 including plural photographic detector
    units.


CLS 378/175
TXT For plural exposures on single film or plate:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 including means to position a film or
    plate in such manner that plural exposures may be made on that single film
    or plate.


CLS 378/176
TXT With real time imaging:

    Subject matter under subclass 175 including means such as a fluorescent
    screen or a television system which provides a visual presentation of the
    X-ray image being recorded photographically.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     for real time display combined with xeroradiography.

    98,     for X-ray systems including circuits and means for displaying and
    signaling.

    190,    for fluoroscopes.


CLS 378/177
TXT With object support or positioning:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 including means combined with the
    detector support which supports or positions the object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     and the subclasses noted thereunder, for object support,
    positioning or aligning devices.


CLS 378/178
TXT For seated object:

    Subject matter under subclass 177 including means to support an animate
    object in a seated position.


CLS 378/179
TXT Pivoted object support:

    Subject matter under subclass 177 including means for pivoting the object
    during X-ray examination.


CLS 378/180
TXT With object retaining:

    Subject matter under subclass 177 including means to prevent movement of
    the object relative to the detector once it has been positioned.


CLS 378/181
TXT For movable film or plate:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 wherein the photographic detector is in
    the form of a film or plate and means is provided to move the detector
    support.


CLS 378/182
TXT Sheet film cassette:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 wherein the detector is in the form of
    sheet film and is enclosed in a container therefor.


CLS 378/183
TXT Self-developing:

    Subject matter under subclass 182 including means within the cassette to
    develop the film after exposure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    396,    Photography,  subclasses 30+ for developing cameras.


CLS 378/184
TXT Flexible:

    Subject matter under subclass 182 wherein the cassette is not rigid.


CLS 378/185
TXT With radiation modifying:

    Subject matter under subclass 182 wherein the cassette includes some means
    to modify the radiation entering the cassette such as antiscatter means,
    filters, or intensifier screens.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145+,   for beam control means, per se.


CLS 378/186
TXT With antiscatter means:

    Subject matter under subclass 185 including means to admit X-rays from a
    desired direction only.


CLS 378/187
TXT With film clamping:

    Subject matter under subclass 185 including means for holding the film in
    intimate contact with a support surface such as foam pads, pressure plates,
    or cassette evacuation means.


CLS 378/188
TXT With hinged cover:

    Subject matter under subclass 182 wherein the cassette includes a cover
    hinged to the body thereof.


CLS 378/189
TXT NONPHOTOGRAPHIC DETECTOR SUPPORT:

    Subject matter under class definition including means to support, contain,
    or position an X-ray detector of a nonphotographic type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for nonphotographic detectors used in tomography.


CLS 378/190
TXT Fluoroscope:

    Subject matter under subclass 189 wherein the detector exhibits an image of
    the object by means of a material which fluoresces in response to the
    X-radiation being transmitted through the object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for stereofluorscopy.


CLS 378/191
TXT Dental:

    Subject matter under subclass 190 wherein the object under examination
    includes the teeth or jaw of a patient.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38+,    for dental panoramics.

    168+,   for dental film supports.


CLS 378/192
TXT Foot or shoe examination:

    Subject matter under subclass 190 wherein the object under examination
    includes the foot or shoe of a patient or customer.


CLS 378/193
TXT SOURCE SUPPORT:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means to support,
    contain, or position an X-ray source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 496.1+ for containment and shielding of
    radioactive sources and subclass 522.1 for source supports.


CLS 378/194
TXT Including cable handling:

    Subject matter under subclass 193 including means to house, support, or
    manipulate the cables which supply the X-ray source.

    (1)     Note.  The source cables may serve for the transfer of electrical
    energy or hydraulic, pneumatic or cooling fluid.


CLS 378/195
TXT Including object support or positioning:

    Subject matter under subclass 193 including means combined with the source
    support which supports or positions the object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     and the subclasses noted thereunder, for object support,
    positioning, or aligning devices.


CLS 378/196
TXT With movable source:

    Subject matter under subclass 195 wherein means is provided to move the
    source with respect to the object.


CLS 378/197
TXT Including movable source:

    Subject matter under subclass 193 wherein means is provided to move the
    source.


CLS 378/198
TXT With mobile support:

    Subject matter under subclass 197 wherein the support which allows movement
    of the source is itself movable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for pipe crawlers.


CLS 378/199
TXT Source cooling:

    Subject matter under subclass 193 wherein the source support includes means
    to cool external surfaces of the source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127+    and 141, for means for cooling the interior of an X-ray tube.


CLS 378/200
TXT Liquid coolant:

    Subject matter under subclass 199 wherein the means to cool the source
    includes a liquid which acts to remove heat from the source.


CLS 378/201
TXT Shock proofing:

    Subject matter under subclass 193 including means to prevent contact with
    voltage carrying elements which supply power to or are a part of the source.


CLS 378/202
TXT Fluid immersion:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the shock proofing includes
    immersion of the source in a nonconductive fluid.


CLS 378/203
TXT Shielding:

    Subject matter under subclass 193 wherein the source support includes means
    to shield the X-ray source to eliminate unwanted radiation.


CLS 378/204
TXT ACCESSORY:

    Subject matter under the class definition which are not X-ray devices in
    and of themselves but which are specifically and uniquely designed for use
    in or with X-ray devices.


CLS 378/205
TXT Alignment:

    Subject matter under subclass 204 including means designed to aid in the
    alignment of source, object, or detector relative to one another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for alignment devices used in computerized tomography.


CLS 378/206
TXT With light projection:

    Subject matter under subclass 205 including the projection of a beam of
    light in a direction such that by monitoring the position where the light
    strikes the object, alignment may be achieved.

    (1)     Note.  The light may be infrared, visible, or ultraviolet.


CLS 378/207
TXT Testing or calibration:

    Subject matter under subclass 204 including means designed to test an X-ray
    device for proper operation or to aid in the adjustment of the device for
    operation within desired characteristics.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 252.1 for calibration or standardization
    methods used in radiant energy systems.


CLS 378/208
TXT Object holder or support:

    Subject matter under subclass 204 including means to maintain the object in
    a selected position or orientation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     and the subclasses noted thereunder, for object support,
    positioning, or aligning devices.


CLS 378/209
TXT Table or couch:

    Subject matter under subclass 208 wherein the support is in the form of a
    table or couch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 630+ for surgical supports.


CLS 378/210
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition not provided for under any of the
    previous subclasses.

          CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTION


CLS 378/901
TXT COMPUTER TOMOGRAPHY PROGRAM OR PROCESSOR:

    Art collection of disclosures including computer devices or programs
    relating to X-ray tomography.


CLS 379/
TTL TELEPHONIC COMMUNICATIONS

CLS 379/
TXT


    I.      DEFINITION OF TERMS USED

    BI-DIRECTIONAL

    Capable of use, particularly in transmitting information in two opposite
    directions.  Additionally, when used to describe an audio transducer,
    capable of conversion of sound both to and from electrical signal
    variations.

    TELEPHONE

    An instrument, known as a user terminal set, containing an audio
    reproducer, and a speech-to-electricity transducer.  An obsolete usage of
    this term (telephone) is broad enough to include a microphone or
    reproducer; however, a microphone or reproducer, per se, is classified in
    Class 381.

    CALL ADDRESS SIGNAL

    An electrical representation of a called terminal designation (i.e.,
    telephone number) which controls switching apparatus to establish a
    connection from a calling terminal.

    DIALING

    Generating a call address signal.  Although a dial is a rotary pulse
    generating switch, the term dialing is sometimes used generically as in the
    terms "tone dialing" and "resistance dialing".

    SUBSCRIBER

    Telephone user or service location.

    SUBSCRIBER

    Telephone circuitry or instruments at subscriber location.

    II.     STATEMENT OF THE CLASS SUBJECT MATTER:

    (a)     Systems, processes and instruments for the two-way electrical
    transmission of intelligible audio information having arbitrary content
    over a link including an electrical conductor, between spaced apart
    locations, so as to enable conversation therebetween, and intended for the
    private use of a listener or a group of listeners.

    The term "intelligible" used above is intended to include the capability
    for transmission of speech or the like (e.g., music), rather than
    restriction to a specified audible signal, such as a bell or buzzer. (b)
    Switching, signalling or signal transmission peculiar to, or specified as
    for a telephone or a telephone system, except for multiplex communications
    as indicated in section III, below.  (c) Subsystems, elements and adjuncts
    peculiar to such transmission and not provided for elsewhere.

    III.    RELATIONSHIP TO OTHER SPEECH COMMUNICATIONS CLASSES:

    This class (Class 379, Telephonic Communications) requires the capability
    for two-way spoken communications, or specified used of a telephone line,
    and subsystems peculiar to either of the above.  Class 181, Acoustics,
    includes a mechanical telephone. Class 380, Cryptography, includes all
    speech or telephone equipment which conceals message content despite
    interception or unauthorized reception of a telephone signal. Class 381,
    Electrical Audio Signal Processing and Systems is a generic electrical
    speech processing system and apparatus class and includes, for example,
    such systems as, megaphones, public address systems and hearing aids; and
    transducers such as microphones, earphones or loudspeakers and also
    includes either of a telephone microphone or receiver, but not their
    combination as in a handset.  Class 455 includes audio signal
    telecommunications by a modulated carrier wave not having telephone land
    line structure or limitations.

    IV.     NOTES:

    (1)     Note.  Bi-directional audio communication is normally a duplex
    arrangement, and simultaneous audio transmission of a single conversation
    in this class (379), and excluded from Class 370, Multiplex Communications,
    subclasses 276+, in the absence of some other particular multiplexing
    technique.

    (2)     Note.  With exception of voice signal duplexing as pointed out in
    (1) Note above, subject matter including multiplexing, particularly
    involving plural conversations, regardless of recitation of telephone
    limitations, is excluded from this class (379) and is classified in Class
    370, Multiplex Communications.

    (3)     Note. Audible signalling for call alerting, or producing a signal
    having other specific content, such as bells, buzzers, etc., are classified
    in Class 340, Communications:  Electrical even if nominally characterized
    as used in a telephone.

    (4)     Note.  Electromagnetic switches for automatic telephone switching
    type, per se, are classified in Class 335.

    (5)     Note.  Electrical connectors merely nominally characterized as for
    telephones, in the absence of additional telephone structure are classified
    in Class 439, Electrical Connectors.

    (6)     Note.  Named communications or telecommunications networks absent
    recitation of telephone or voice limitation are not classifiable herein.

    (7)     Note.  The following terms when used in a communication system or
    instrument are considered to specify telephone equipment except as
    specified in (2) Note above with respect to multiplexing or in class or
    subclass search notes:

    dial tone       off-hook
    handset on-hook
    hookswitch      ringback
    howler  sidetone
    intercom        switchboard
    key set switchhook
                    telephone line (used with
                    switching system)
                    tip and ring (leads)

    V.      GENERAL OUTLINE OF           Subclasses

            THE CLASS:

    A.      Observation, measuring, or testing      1 - 36

    B.      Coin-free paystation, emer-
    gency, or alarm equipment       37-51

    C.      For handicapped user    52

    E.      Wireless or carrier link        55.1 - 56.3

    F.      With voice signal storage       67 - 89

    G.      Composite system or terminal    90 - 110

    H.      Usage measurement or display    111 - 142

    I.      Paystations     143 - 155

    J.      Key, private or party systems   156 - 187

    K.      Call or terminal limiting       188 - 200

    L.      Special services        201 - 218

    M.      Switch telephone network        219 - 332

    N.      Network component systems       333 - 349

    O.      Supervisory or control signalling       350 - 386

    P.      Substation or line circuitry
    or component    387 - 418

    Q.      Terminal Structure or accessory 419 - 456

    R.      Miscellaneous   457


CLS 379/1
TXT DIAGNOSTIC TESTING, MALFUNCTION INDICATION, OR ELECTRICAL CONDITION
    MEASUREMENT:

    Subject matter under the class definition for either (a) evaluating or
    monitoring the condition of a telephone system or a component thereof in
    order to determine the presence of a faulty or nonstandard condition or (b)
    quantitatively determining an electrical parameter of a telephone system or
    component thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Testing to determine which one of several normal status
    conditions exist (e.g., busy-idle, off-hook) is not classified in this or
    indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  The testing or measurement must be specifically claimed as
    in or for a telephone system or a component thereof for classification in
    this or indented communication or telecommunication system is not
    sufficient for classification in these subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for an
    electrical measurement or test not limited to a telephone instrument or
    system.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 635+ for fault indication
    of an electrical apparatus, and an electrical parameter, respectively.


CLS 379/2
TXT Including fault responsive disconnection of tested component:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including automatic removal from operation
    of a component evaluated as faulty.


CLS 379/3
TXT Of hybrid, or echo suppressor or canceller:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 for testing a device for coupling a
    two-wire to four-wire interconnecting circuit or for eliminating an echo
    effect in a telephone system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    345,    391 and 402+, for a hybrid in telephone equipment.

    406+,   for an echo suppressor.


CLS 379/4
TXT Of repeater:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 which tests a device which amplifies or
    transfers a signal between two telephone circuits, or circuit sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    338+,   for a telephone repeater.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclass 243 for fault detection of a
    multiplex repeater, and subclasses 246+ for testing of a standard operation
    of a multiplex repeater.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclass 213 for testing of a
    pulse or digital repeater.


CLS 379/5
TXT By loopback:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including transmitting a known signal from
    a testing location over a communication path to a second remote location
    which retransmits the known signal back to the testing location for use in
    evaluating the transmission path or a device are the remote location.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclass 249 for loopback testing in a
    multiplex system.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclass
    20.5, for loopback testing of a communications circuit of general utility
    by a digital test signal.


CLS 379/6
TXT By analysis of injected tone signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 which includes placing a signal into the
    system to be tested and comparing the parameters of the output signal from
    the system over a continuous range with the corresponding parameters of the
    signal input.

    (1)     Note.  Such testing is often used in determination of degradation
    or crosstalk.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 628 for measurement
    of interference between circuits.


CLS 379/7
TXT For detection of eavesdropping device:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 to determine whether an undesired or
    surreptitious receiving device is connected to telephone equipment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     for an eavesdropping device.


CLS 379/8
TXT With blocking of normal usage:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including prevention of normal use of a
    telephone system component being evaluated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    381,    for a make busy circuit, in general.


CLS 379/9
TXT Of centralized switching system:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 for evaluating the operation of a system or
    component which selectively connects two of a plurality of telephone lines
    for communication therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242+,   for a centralized telephone switching system.


CLS 379/10
TXT By automatic testing sequence (e.g., programmable, scanning):

    Subject matter under subclass 9 which serially performs plural steps
    included in a central switching arrangement evaluation.


CLS 379/11
TXT Routiner:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein centralized switching equipment is
    tested by performing actual line selection.


CLS 379/12
TXT With dedicated testing line or trunk:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 including a line or trunk used exclusively
    for measurement or diagnostic testing.


CLS 379/13
TXT Of call timing or charging equipment:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 for evaluating equipment which measures
    call duration or cost.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111+,   for a call timing and charging arrangement.


CLS 379/14
TXT Of plural exchange network:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein a plurality of switching offices
    facilities are tested.



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219+,   for a plural exchange telephone network.


CLS 379/15
TXT Of automatic switching equipment:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 for testing switching equipment which
    performs a selective call connection in response to a call address signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258+,   for automatic switching equipment.


CLS 379/16
TXT Of switching path:

    Subject matter under subclass 15 which evaluates the route of a switching
    connection through telephone switching equipment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273+,   for alternate routing of a call connection.


CLS 379/17
TXT Of switching selector:

    Subject matter under subclass 15 for testing a device which selects a
    branch of the switching path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 415+ for testing of
    an electromagnetic switch.


CLS 379/18
TXT By use of call address signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 15 which generates a selective switching
    control signal specifying a called station address.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    352+,   for telephone call address signal generating, in general.


CLS 379/19
TXT Rapid manual connecting structure for test equipment:

    Subject matter under subclass 15 designed or located for connection of a
    testing or measurement arrangement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for such connectors
    not limited to testing telephone switching devices.


CLS 379/20
TXT Of switchboard element condition (e.g., lamp):

    Subject matter under subclass 9 for evaluating an element of an arrangement
    for manual line interconnection.

    (1)     Note.  Such elements may include lamps or cords.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 403+ for testing of
    a lamp, in general.


CLS 379/21
TXT Using portable test set (e.g., handset type):

    Subject matter under subclass 1 in which a line test or measurement is
    performed with a device which is small and light enough to be easily
    carried by an individual.


CLS 379/22
TXT Of trunk or long line:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a characteristic of an
    interexchange or in specified telephone conductor is evaluated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for testing of a subscriber line or loop.


CLS 379/23
TXT Of line signalling:

    Subject matter under subclass 22 which evaluates the transmission or
    operation of a control signal on a telephone line.


CLS 379/24
TXT Electrical parameter measurement (e.g., attenuation):

    Subject matter under subclass 22 including structure for providing a
    quantitative indication of an electrical characteristic of the line or
    trunk or the signal thereon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 600+ for impedance
    measurement of a nontelephone line.


CLS 379/25
TXT Conductor identification or location:

    Subject matter under subclass 22 for determining the identity or position
    of a telephone line conductor.


CLS 379/26
TXT Fault detection or location  (e.g., continuity, leakage):

    Subject matter under subclass 22 to determine the presence or location of a
    conductor fault in a telephone line conductor.


CLS 379/27
TXT Of subscriber loop or terminal:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 for evaluating, measuring, or monitoring a
    characteristic of a subscriber line or station.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for physical testing,
    in general.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    58+ for evaluation of an audio device other than telephone equipment.


CLS 379/28
TXT Of data transmission instrument:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 for testing of a digital signal data
    terminal connected to a telephone line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93.01+, transmission of a digital message signal over a telephone line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 224+ for testing a
    digital transmission instrument not part of a telephone arrangement.


CLS 379/29
TXT Terminal arrangement to enable remote testing (e.g., testing interface):

    Subject matter under subclass 27 which includes an arrangement to
    facilitate localization of faults in, or localized testing of, either a
    substation or a subscriber loop.

    (1)     Note.  The testing may be performed either at the substation or
    remotely, e.g., from a central office.


CLS 379/30
TXT Loop impedance (e.g., resistance, capacitance):

    Subject matter under subclass 27 for measuring the electrical impedance
    along and across a subscriber line or terminal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 600+ for electrical
    impedance measurement.


CLS 379/31
TXT Of line signalling generator (e.g., dial, tone code generator):

    Subject matter under subclass 27 for testing or measuring a voice frequency
    signalling generator or an impulsing signal producing arrangement, in a
    terminal.


CLS 379/32
TXT Indication of nonstandard condition of telephone equipment:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 for monitoring the condition of telephone
    equipment and providing a perceptible indication of a fault or other
    improper equipment condition.

    (1)     Note.  Diagnostic testing of equipment responsive to a fault only
    during performance of the test is excluded from this subclass and
    classified in subclasses 2-30 above.


CLS 379/33
TXT Alarm or emergency (e.g., cut line):

    Subject matter under subclass 32 where the indicated condition is of
    damage, or imminent hazard to, telephone equipment.


CLS 379/34
TXT SERVICE MONITORING OR OBSERVATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition for monitoring the response of a
    telephone operator, or the response time of telephone equipment.

    (1)     Note.  The response time usually indicates time elapsed after the
    user service request.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    for determination of call traffic on, or usage of, telephone system
    equipment.


CLS 379/35
TXT Listening-in or eavesdropping type:

    Subject matter under subclass 34 for making a telephone conversation
    audible to a person without the conversing parties being notified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85+,    for audio recording of a telephone conversation.


CLS 379/36
TXT FREE CALLING FROM PAYSTATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a terminal, normally
    requiring payment for usage, which has provision for limited usage without
    payment.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes both emergency and nonemergency free
    calling from a paystation, for example "0", "800" and "911" calls.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45+,    for emergency calling not including free calling from a paystation.

    143,    for a paystation.


CLS 379/37
TXT EMERGENCY OR ALARM COMMUNICATIONS (E.G., WATCHMAN'S CIRCUIT):

    Subject matter under the class definition for summoning response to a
    hazardous situation over a telephone line.

    (1)     Note.  The term "hazardous situation" refers to a condition or
    occurrence posing imminent danger to life, health, or property.

    (2)     Note.  The subject matter in this and it's indented subclasses
    included both systems solely for emergency use an details of adjunct to
    other systems to specifically provide for emergency situations.  Further,
    an arrangement incidentally (e.g., an automatic dialer) be used for an
    emergency situation will be classified with such arrangement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 287+ for a signal box alarm
    arrangement, particularly subclass 288 for alarm transmission over a power
    line.


CLS 379/38
TXT Personal monitoring (e.g., for the ill or infirm):

    Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein the hazardous situation is a
    condition of, or occurrence related to the well-being of an individual.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     for a telephone instrument particularly designed for a handicapped
    user.


CLS 379/39
TXT Responsive to sensed nonsystem condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 37 which responds automatically to a
    condition, external to the telephone system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106+,   for remote condition indication, other than an emergency or alarm
    condition, over a telephone line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+ for a condition
    responsive alarm system not including telephone apparatus.


CLS 379/40
TXT Automatic dialing:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 which generates a predetermined call
    address signal for establishing a connection to a given telephone station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for automatic dialing in transmission of a recorded audio alarm
    message.


CLS 379/41
TXT Transmission of recorded audio message:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 which sends a previously stored sound
    message signal over a telephone line in response to an emergency condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for transmission of recorded audio message in emergency or alarm
    communications that is not automatically condition responsive.


CLS 379/42
TXT Plural conditions:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 wherein more than one emergency or alarm
    condition is detected (e.g., fire, intrusion, health hazard).


CLS 379/43
TXT Fire:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 wherein the detected condition is flame,
    heat or smoke.


CLS 379/44
TXT Intrusion:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 wherein the detected condition is the
    entry of  a living being into a given space.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 541+ for an intrusion alarm
    not limited to telephone equipment.


CLS 379/45
TXT Central office responsive to emergency call or alarm (e.g., "911", operator
    position display):

    Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein a central office has equipment to
    make a connection or provide a display for an emergency situation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for free calling from a paystation.


CLS 379/46
TXT Called line or station condition responsive (e.g., recall if busy):

    Subject matter under subclass 37 where a condition of a called line or
    station controls further operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for a telephone equipment alarm condition.

    209,    for this subject matter, in a nonalarm system.


CLS 379/47
TXT Plural alarms over single line:

    Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein a plurality of alert signals are
    sent over one telephone line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for a condition responsive plural alarm signals.


CLS 379/48
TXT Announcement or alarm received at terminal station (e.g., "butt-in", alarm):

    Subject matter under subclass 37 which enables a central station (a) to
    interrupt normal telephone communication to make an announcement to, or (b)
    to actuate an alarm at, a terminal station.


CLS 379/49
TXT Central station with plural substations:

    Subject matter under subclass 37 having a single central alarm station
    connected to a plurality of terminal stations.


CLS 379/50
TXT By pulse or digital signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein the alarm signal is transmitted
    over a telephone line as a pulse or a digital signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93.01+, transmission of a digital message signal over a telephone line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, appropriate subclasses for
    nontelephone digital communication.


CLS 379/51
TXT With automatic dialing or transmission of recorded audio message:

    Subject matter under subclass 37 to either (a) generate a predetermined
    call address signal for establishing a connection to a given telephone
    station, or (b) send a previously stored sound message signal over a
    telephone line response to an emergency condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for a call originating arrangement which transmits, a previously
    recorded audio message, not limited to an emergency condition.


CLS 379/52
TXT INCLUDING AID FOR HANDICAPPED USER (E.G., VISUAL, TACTILE, HEARING AID
    COUPLING):

    Subject matter under the class definition particularly designed for use by
    a physically impaired individual.

    (1)     Note.  Devices specifically for coupling a hearing aid to a
    telephone (e.g., magnetic pickup, microphone holder) are classified herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    395,    for a terminal having an amplifying arrangement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 825.19 for communication or
    control for the handicapped.


CLS 379/55.1
TXT HAVING NEAR FIELD LINK (E.G., CAPACITIVE, INDUCTIVE):

    Subject matter under the class definition having a transceiver, a base
    station, and a limited range system (i.e., field strength=k/d where k is a
    constant and d=distance between the transceiver and base station antennas)
    whereby signal transfer is inductive or capacitive, rather than
    electromagnetic.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclass 8 for similar subject matter
    used in train dispatching.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 700+ for an
    antenna used for baseband communication.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclass 79
    for a one-way near field voice system.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 41 for a modulated carrier type near
    field communications system.


CLS 379/56.1
TXT HAVING LIGHT WAVE OR ULTRASONIC LINK FOR SPEECH OR PAGING SIGNAL:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a telephone circuit
    connection is made by a transmitted electromagnetic wave group having
    wavelengths between .000075 cm and .000038 cm, or which has sonic
    vibrations above audible sound (20,000 Hz).

    (1)     Note.  For classification herein there must be some connection to a
    telephone landline,  for example, where a connection is made through a
    telephone operator or exchange.

    (2)     Note.  Optical telephones are classified herein.  For
    subcombinations involving optical communication see the search notes below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 311.1 for a generic paging
    arrangement.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    109+ for systems and subsystems using an optical carrier which may include
    a telephone landline in nominal recitation.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, appropriate subclasses for optical conducting
    elements, per se.


CLS 379/56.2
TXT Including fiber optic link within telephone network:

    Subject matter under subclass 56.1 wherein the electromagnetic wave is a
    light wave which propagates within a  light transmitting waveguide in a
    telephone network.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    109+ for systems and subsystems using an optical carrier.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, appropriate subclasses for optical conducting
    elements, per se.


CLS 379/56.3
TXT Including infra-red link with landline telephone network:

    Subject matter under subclass 56.1 wherein the electromagnetic wave is in a
    range of radiation wavelengths invisible to the human eye lying between 750
    nanometers and  about 1 millimeter.


CLS 379/67
TXT WITH AUDIO MESSAGE STORAGE OR RETRIEVAL:

    Subject matter under the class definition combined with structure for
    retention of an audio massage signal, or for retrieval thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Such storage or retrieval must include a telephone system
    component at least nominally claimed.  Mere designation of the apparatus as
    a "telephone answering device" is, of itself, insufficient for
    classification in this or indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    for audio signal distribution over a telephone line, not including
    storage or retrieval.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclasses
    for a static memory or system.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, appropriate subclasses
    for audio information storage or retrieval.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 2.67+ for a
    system having speech synthesis.


CLS 379/68
TXT Dynamic audio signal recording or reproduction:

    Subject matter under subclass 67 which utilizes relative motion with
    respect to a record medium to perform the audio message storage or
    retrieval.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, appropriate
    subclasses for a magnetic tape recorder.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, appropriate subclasses
    for a phonograph.


CLS 379/69
TXT Call originating:

    Subject matter under subclass 67 including generating station-designating
    signals for initiation of telephonic communication with a designated
    station and subsequently transmitting a reproduced announcement hereto or
    recording a message therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  The communication established is for connection to the
    recorder or reproducer.

    (2)     Note.  The subject matter herein may include sequential selection
    of designated stations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40      and 51, for similar subject matter to transmit fire, burglar, or
    police calls or alarms over the telephone system.

    355+,   for an automatic telephone dialing device.


CLS 379/70
TXT Call intercept or answering:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 including establishing of telephonic
    communication between a component connected to the recorder or reproducer
    and a distinct calling station connected to the telephone system in
    response to a calling signal initiated from the calling station.

    (1)     Note.  The component is often the station being called.

    (2)     Note.  The recorder or reproducer is usually actuated in response
    to the telephonic communication.

    (3)     Note.  Such subject matter often includes both a reproducer for
    transmitting an announcement upon initial actuation and subsequently
    actuated recorder for generating a record of an incoming message.


CLS 379/71
TXT Consecutive use of recorded phrases or words to form message:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 selectively supplying phrases or words in
    real time sequence to develop a complete announcement for transmission
    through the telephone system.

    (1)     Note.  Typical of systems herein are time announcing systems in
    which different words are reproduced in a desired order so that the time is
    verbalized.  For example:  "The time is" -- "twelve" -- "fifty" -- "four",
    in which each quoted phrase has been reproduced from the storage medium.

    (2)     Note.  Time announcing systems not limited to a telephone system
    are classified in Class 369, subclass 23.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclass 63 for time
    announcing systems having details of the time measuring system.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 23 for time
    announcing systems not limited to telephone equipment.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 2.67+ for
    speech synthesis based on sequential sounds or bits.


CLS 379/72
TXT Sequential or repeated announcement during single call initiated cycle:

    subject matter under subclass 70 wherein the announcement is restarted or
    changed so as to form a series or repeated or changed announcements.

    (1)     Note.  A "series" means at least one repetition or modification of
    an initial announcement.


CLS 379/73
TXT Plural record carrier channels:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 wherein a single record carrier in the
    recorder or reproducer has a plurality of distinct record tracks thereon.

    (1)     Note.  The term "record carrier" is the tangible object upon which
    the recorded signal is stored.

    (2)     Note.  The plural tracks may be transversely displaced from each
    other.

    (3)     Note.  The plural record tracks are often used for recording
    distinct receive messages.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for remote control over a telephone system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 24+ for remote
    control of a recording or reproducing device other than by a telephone
    system.


CLS 379/74
TXT Remote control over telephone line:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 which operates the recorder or reproducer
    for other than its normal call responsive operation by a specified signal
    transmitted over the telephone system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102+,   for remote control over a telephone system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 24+ for remote
    control of a recording or reproducing device other than by a telephone
    system.


CLS 379/75
TXT Remote dictation:

    Subject matter under subclass 74 for correction of the recorded message
    subsequent to recording and prior to reproduction of the final recorded
    incoming message.

    (1)     Note.  Mere naming of a device as for "dictation" absent particular
    structure therefore is insufficient to provide classification in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 25+ for
    dictation devices.


CLS 379/76
TXT Announcement selection or replacement:

    Subject matter under subclass 74 wherein the operation includes choosing or
    changing a message to be transmitted by the reproducer to the telephone
    system in response to an incoming call.

    (1)     Note.  A selection system may be used for a stock quotation.  Such
    a system not limited to a telephone system is classified in Class 340,
    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 825.26+.


CLS 379/77
TXT Control by generated tone:

    Subject matter under subclass 74 wherein the specified signal has an audio
    frequency component.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is control by push button telephone devices.


CLS 379/78
TXT Acoustic coupling:

    subject matter under subclass 70 wherein the connection between the
    telephone system component and the reproducer or recorder is effected by a
    sound wave produced and detected by a complementary pair of transducers.

    (1)     Note.  Such subject matter often involves a pair of such acoustic
    links in opposite directions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    444,    for an acoustic telephone system coupler.


CLS 379/79
TXT With specified call initiated cycle control circuitry:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 including circuitry to control the
    actuation or deactuation of the recorder or reproducer in response to a
    telephone system condition related to an incoming call.

    (1)     Note.  For classification herein, either details of the circuitry
    or response to a particular condition other than call receipt is required.
    Mere nominal recitation of circuitry responsive to call receipt is not
    classifiable herein, as such response is necessarily inherent in a call
    answering or intercepting device.

    (2)     Note.  The "call initiated cycle" is a sequence of reproducing and
    recording mode of the recording and reproducing device.


CLS 379/80
TXT Voice signal presence responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 wherein the cycle control circuitry is
    responsive to the continuation, cessation, or absence of an incoming audio
    signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     for similar subject matter responsive to any other line condition.

    420,    for voice control of a telephone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 50 for voice
    control of a recording system.


CLS 379/81
TXT Call termination responsive (e.g., hang-up):

    Subject matter under subclass 79 wherein the cycle control circuitry is
    responsive to a line condition representative of the cessation of
    telephonic communications (e.g., open circuit, dial tone presence).

    (1)     Note.  Such cessation may be effected by the caller hanging up or
    being disconnected.


CLS 379/82
TXT Having specified call initiation (e.g., ringing) responsive circuitry:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 including a detail of circuitry responsive
    to a system or component condition related to call alert signalling or
    start of receipt of call.


CLS 379/83
TXT Structural detail of storage medium drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 including a specific mechanical feature of
    a mechanism for causing relative emotion of the record medium.


CLS 379/84
TXT At switching facility (e.g., central office, switchboard):

    Subject matter under subclass 70 wherein the component connected to the
    recorder or reproducer is located at a switching station to which a
    plurality of telephone circuits are connected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67      and 88+, for voice message storage or retrieval at a centralized
    switching location by other than a dynamic mechanism (e.g., static memory).


CLS 379/85
TXT Recording of telephone signal during normal operation:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein the record generated is of an
    audible signal in a telephone system, which signal exists independently of
    the recording device.

    (1)     Note.  Normal operation includes, for example, two-way voice
    communication.


CLS 379/86
TXT Inductive pickup:

    Subject matter under subclass 85 wherein the signal from the telephone
    system is coupled for record generating by two electrical devices having an
    interacting magnetic field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    433,    for an inductive telephone pickup.


CLS 379/87
TXT Reproduced signal distributed over telephone line:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein a reproduced information bearing
    audio signal is coupled by the telephone system to a remote station for
    conversion into sound.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes use of a telephone system as a
    reproduced signal program distribution system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    for audio program distribution over a telephone line, not limited
    to a reproduced signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    77+ for one-way audio signal program distribution, not limited to a
    telephone system.


CLS 379/88
TXT Stored in digital form:

    Subject matter under subclass 67 including a feature of digital storage or
    retrieval of the audio signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclasses
    for static memory structure or related circuitry.


CLS 379/89
TXT Subscriber control of central office message storage or retrieval:

    Subject matter under subclass 88 wherein the message storage is located at
    a central switching office and wherein the content of the audio message is
    controlled from a subscriber terminal.


CLS 379/90.01
TXT TELEPHONE LINE OR SYSTEM COMBINED WITH DIVERSE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM OR
    SIGNALLING (E.G., COMPOSITE):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a nontelephone signal is
    transmitted over a conductor of telephone signals, or a telephone signal is
    transmitted over nontelephone electrical circuitry.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66,     for a telephone carrier over a power line.

    110,    for a composite telephone set.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 310.01+ for signalling over
    a diverse electrical line.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for simultaneous
    transmission of a telephone signal and another electrical communications
    signal, or multiplexing plural telephone signals, over a common channel.


CLS 379/91.01
TXT Credit authorization:

    Subject matter under subclass 90.01 wherein the nontelephone signal is used
    to permit or deny a charge to an individual account over a telephone line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144,    for a credit card operated pay station.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 380+ for a credit card operated register
    having significant card reading structure.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 825.33 for remote credit
    authorization, not limited to use of telephone equipment.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 201+ for
    business oriented applications for computers.


CLS 379/91.02
TXT At switching station:

    Subject matter under subclass 91.01 including a switching facility having
    structure or circuitry for credit transaction processing.


CLS 379/92.01
TXT Polling:

    Subject matter under subclass 90.01 wherein plural controlled devices
    transmit a personal or personal choice status signal in response to an
    interrogation signal.

    (1)     Note.  The personal or personal choice signal may be successively
    transmitted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 13+ for television two-way interactive.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 2 for radio audience survey and use of
    telephone equipment.


CLS 379/92.02
TXT Televoting:

    Subject matter under subclass 92.01 wherein the personal or personal choice
    status signal is used to cast a vote.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 212 for voting.


CLS 379/92.03
TXT Having central station equipment:

    Subject matter under subclass 92.01 including a central station with
    specific structure or circuitry for status signal processing.


CLS 379/92.04
TXT Having subscriber station equipment:

    Subject matter under subclass 92.01 including a user terminal with specific
    structure or circuitry for generating or transmitting the status signal.


CLS 379/93.01
TXT Having transmission of a digital message signal over a telephone line:

    Subject matter under subclass 90.01 for transfer of message information by
    either a multi-level pulse signal or a data signal consisting of a series
    of ones and zeros, over a line specifically described as a telephone line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for simultaneous
    voice and data communications.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclass 222 for modems or data
    sets, per se.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 200.01+ for
    data transferring among multiple computer and digital data processing
    systems, and subclasses 821 through 894 for transferring data from one or
    more peripherals to one or more computers for the latter to process, store,
    or further transfer, or for transferring data from the computer to the
    peripherals.


CLS 379/93.02
TXT Access restricting:

    Subject matter under subclass 93.01 which permits or denies the rights to
    use remote digital computing or communication equipment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    380,    Cryptography, subclass 4 for digital communications usage
    restriction.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 287+ for bus
    access regulating in a digital data processing system, subclass 609 for
    privileged access to a database or file in a computer environment, and
    subclasses 856+ for digital data processing system Input/Out access
    regulating.


CLS 379/93.03
TXT Personal identification:

    Subject matter under subclass 93.02 whereby access is granted by matching
    user characteristics (e.g., voiceprint, fingerprint, signature) of the
    person desiring access.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    382,    Image Analysis, subclasses 115+ for personnel identification.


CLS 379/93.04
TXT Two or more calls:

    Subject matter under subclass 93.02 whereby gaining access requires
    multiple calls.


CLS 379/93.05
TXT Terminal interface circuitry:

    Subject matter under subclass 93.01 having a specific electronic
    arrangement interrelating a device or equipment to the telephone line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    399,    for connecting a telephone communications line to a central
    switching office or a subscriber station.

    442,    for connecting a device to the line by direct connection through
    the terminal.


CLS 379/93.06
TXT Digital:

    Subject matter under subclass 93.05 wherein the interface circuitry  is
    connected to a telephone line in which the information is encoded as a
    series of ones and zeros.


CLS 379/93.07
TXT To plural lines or networks:

    Subject matter under subclass 93.05 wherein the interface circuitry is for
    connecting to at least two telephone lines or groups of stations.


CLS 379/93.08
TXT Transmission scheme (e.g., compression/decompression, transmission rate):

    Subject matter under subclass 93.01 including a particular detail of a
    methodology in which the message signal is conveyed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93.31,  for modulated signal transmission scheme.

    100.17, for image data transmission scheme.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 17+ for video signal transmission scheme.


CLS 379/93.09
TXT Switching between different terminal types (e.g., voice/data switch):

    Subject matter under subclass 93.01 including an arrangement for selecting
    between diverse communication modes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100.15+, for switching to other communication modes in which the
    communication modes include a visual-graphic copy reproduction mode (e.g.,
    facsimile mode).


CLS 379/93.11
TXT Among at least three terminal types:

    Subject matter under subclass 93.09 wherein the arrangement includes
    switching among at least three different modes.


CLS 379/93.12
TXT Sales, ordering, or banking system:

    Subject matter under subclass 93.01 wherein the transmitted digital message
    signal is used for financial transactions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 201+ for
    business oriented applications for computers.


CLS 379/93.13
TXT Amusement (e.g., game, lottery):

    Subject matter under subclass 93.01 wherein the digital message signal is
    for conducting a recreational activity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 410+
    for games and amusements.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 6.3 for entertainment systems.

    463,    Amusement Devices: Games, subclass 41 for games with a telephonic
    communication link.


CLS 379/93.14
TXT Having switching station:

    Subject matter under subclass 93.01 including equipment which performs the
    functions of establishing and releasing connections and includes structure
    or circuitry for digital message signal processing.

    (1)     Note.  Nominal recitations of ISDN packet switching network in
    conjunction with telephonic communications are properly classified here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 352+ for switching systems
    including both circuit and packet switches, and for network detail in
    conjunction with telephonic communications.


CLS 379/93.15
TXT Having format conversion:

    Subject matter under subclass 93.14 wherein an electronic structure is
    particularly adapted for transforming the digital message signal from one
    form into another form (e.g., text-to-voice, voice-to-text, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100.13, for image format conversion.


CLS 379/93.17
TXT Having station display:

    Subject matter under subclass 93.01 including a structure particularly
    adapted for conversion of a digital information signal into a visual
    message signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for testing of such an instrument.

    142,    376, and 386, for subject matter drawn to perceptible display of
    supervisory control signals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 219+ for a digital
    signal transceiver.


CLS 379/93.18
TXT Having tone code recognition for generating alphanumeric characters:

    Subject matter under subclass 93.17 including an arrangement for character
    or symbol pattern recognition to show letters of the alphabet or numerals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93.27,  for generating alphanumeric information by tone codes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 25+ for alphanumeric
    display and character generator.


CLS 379/93.19
TXT Having pressure or position sensitive surface (e.g., touch-screen, light
    pen):

    Subject matter under subclass 93.17 wherein the terminal display includes
    input means responsive to force or location along the display face.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 18 and 87 for stylus and tablet.

    345,    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 173+ for touch panels,
    subclass 179 for stylus, and subclasses 180+ for light pen.


CLS 379/93.21
TXT Having conferencing:

    Subject matter under subclass 93.17 which enables three or more data
    terminals on distinct subscriber lines to be included in a single call
    connection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202,    for telephone conferencing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclass 15 for video conferencing.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 260+ for special services with
    conferencing.


CLS 379/93.22
TXT At pay station:

    Subject matter under subclass 93.17 wherein the structure includes a public
    telephone from which calls can be paid for by means of currency, credit, or
    debit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91.01+, for credit authorization.

    143+,   for check operated control (e.g., pay station).


CLS 379/93.23
TXT Having user information display (e.g., telephone number, name, address,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 93.17 wherein the visual message signal is
    personal data.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142,    for calling number display.

    354,    for called number display.


CLS 379/93.24
TXT Having electronic mail:

    Subject matter under subclass 93.17 wherein the information signal is
    assigned to a memory location for storage and retrieved by a station having
    access to the memory location (e.g., text mail).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89,     for subscriber control of central office audio message storage or
    retrieval.

    100.08, for image electronic mailbox system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 402 for electronic mailbox.


CLS 379/93.25
TXT Having remote database (e.g., videotex system):

    Subject matter under subclass 93.17 including a database having structure
    or circuitry for supplying information in electronic form from the database
    to subscriber terminals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100.11, for image information retrieval.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclass 7 for broadcast on demand and subclass 13 for
    two-way interactive communication.

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 403 for document filing and retrieval system.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 4.1+ for remote control of
    distribution.


CLS 379/93.26
TXT By voice frequency signal (e.g., tone code):

    Subject matter under subclass 93.01 wherein the pulse or data signal is
    specifically described as converted into one or more tones lying within the
    audible frequency spectrum.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 219+ for modems and
    digital transceivers, per se.


CLS 379/93.27
TXT Alphanumeric:

    Subject matter under subclass 93.26 including a structure particularly
    adapted for recognition of tone codes generated via dual-tone,
    multi-frequency signals into letters or numbers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93.18,  for display of alphanumeric characters generated using tone code
    recognition.


CLS 379/93.28
TXT Modulated audio tone:

    Subject matter under subclass 93.26 wherein a pulse or data signal causes a
    variation in the frequency, phase, or amplitude of an audible tone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclass 222 for modems which may
    have telephonic communications in nominal recitations.


CLS 379/93.29
TXT Reconfigurable:

    Subject matter under subclass 93.28 wherein communication operating
    parameters can be reprogrammed to conform with different communication
    standards or perform different communication modes.


CLS 379/93.31
TXT Protocol:

    Subject matter under subclass 93.28 including particular details of
    transmission scheme.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93.08,  for transmission scheme, not limited to use of modem.

    100.17, for image data transmission scheme.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 17+ for video signal transmission scheme.


CLS 379/93.32
TXT Initial setup:

    Subject matter under subclass 93.31 including a particular start-up
    handshaking sequence.


CLS 379/93.33
TXT Having adjustable speed:

    Subject matter under subclass 93.31 wherein the transmission protocol
    includes different data transmission rates.


CLS 379/93.34
TXT Having recognition and selection:

    Subject matter under subclass 93.31 including determination of one of a
    plurality of modulator-demodulator types and for connecting to a compatible
    type.


CLS 379/93.35
TXT Having call-waiting:

    Subject matter under subclass 93.28 for signalling a first station in
    communication with a second station that a third station desires
    communication with the first station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215,    for call waiting with telephone equipment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 259+ for special services.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 414+ for special services in a
    radiotelephone system.


CLS 379/93.36
TXT Line powered:

    Subject matter under subclass 93.28 including particular circuitry for
    deriving power from the telephone line to data communication equipment
    (DCE).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102.04, for remote control of power source.


CLS 379/93.37
TXT Having acoustic link:

    Subject matter under subclass 93.26 wherein a digital signalling device is
    connected to a telephone line by a sound wave passing between a
    complementary pair of electroacoustic transducers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     for an acoustic link between a telephone answering device and a
    telephone line.

    444,    for a telephone acoustic coupler, per se.


CLS 379/100.01
TXT To produce visual-graphic copy (e.g., facsimile):

    Subject matter under subclass 90.01 where the nontelephone signal is a
    visual or graphic representation of a document for producing a visually
    readable reproduction at a receiving station.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 500+ for natural color facsimile, in general;
    and subclasses 400+ for facsimile.


CLS 379/100.02
TXT Having detachable device (e.g., detachable storage medium, scanner):

    Subject matter under subclass 100.01 having an arrangement wherein an
    element can be separated from a main unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    357,    for insertable call signal generation circuitry (e.g., card).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 473+ for hand-held reader.


CLS 379/100.03
TXT Usage system:

    Subject matter under subclass 100.01 wherein data related to each
    transmission operation is recorded or generated.


CLS 379/100.04
TXT Communication charge calculation:

    Subject matter under subclass 100.01 wherein the cost of the transmission
    is tabulated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111+,   for usage measurement.


CLS 379/100.05
TXT Monitoring:

    Subject matter under subclass 100.01 wherein a condition of a
    visual-graphic copy reproduction is sensed or determined.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for diagnostic testing, malfunction indication, or electrical
    condition measurement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 406 and 441 for facsimile calibrating and
    alarm.


CLS 379/100.06
TXT Communication status notification:

    Subject matter under subclass 100.01 wherein information relating to a
    transmission/reception or line state is indicated.


CLS 379/100.07
TXT Using mark sheet:

    Subject matter under subclass 100.01 performing operations based on
    information read from a marked form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 375+ for systems controlled by data bearing
    records.

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 468 for facsimile control.


CLS 379/100.08
TXT Electronic mailbox:

    Subject matter under subclass 100.01 wherein the transmitted message is
    assigned to a memory location for storage and retrieved by a station having
    access to the memory location.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89,     for subscriber control of central office audio message storage or
    retrieval.

    93.24,  for electronic mail messaging system, not limited to use of
    facsimile equipment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 402 for electronic mailbox.


CLS 379/100.09
TXT Relay system:

    Subject matter under subclass 100.01 wherein the message is transmitted to
    some intermediate point, and at a later time, further retransmitted to a
    remote destination.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 407 for facsimile relay system.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 7+ for signal repeaters that may
    regenerate the repeated signal and which are used in radio systems.


CLS 379/100.11
TXT From a library:

    Subject matter under subclass 100.01 wherein the visual or graphic
    information accessed is from a collection of such information.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93.25,  for remote database, not limited to use of facsimile equipment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 403 for document filing and retrieval system.


CLS 379/100.12
TXT Connection to plural networks or lines:

    Subject matter under subclass 100.01 including connection to at least two
    telephone lines or networks.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93.07,  for plural networks or lines, not limited to use of facsimile
    equipment.


CLS 379/100.13
TXT Format conversion:

    Subject matter under subclass 100.01 having a specific structure for
    transforming the nontelephone signal to another form (e.g., image-to-voice,
    image-to-text, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93.15,  for format conversion at switching station.


CLS 379/100.14
TXT Call signal generation (e.g., auto-dial):

    Subject matter under subclass 100.01 wherein a called station address
    signal is transmitted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    355+,   for repertory or abbreviated call signal generation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 440 for telephone number or address of
    designator.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 564 for radiotelephone equipment with
    auto-dialing or repertory dialing.


CLS 379/100.15
TXT Having switching to other communication modes:

    Subject matter under subclass 100.01 including an arrangement enabling
    connection between different communication types.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93.09+, for switching between different communication modes, not limited to
    use of facsimile equipment.


CLS 379/100.16
TXT Voice mode:

    Subject matter under subclass 100.15 wherein the different communication
    types include an intelligible human sound mode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67+,    for audio message storage or retrieval.


CLS 379/100.17
TXT Transmission scheme:

    Subject matter under subclass 100.01 including a particular detail of the
    transmission protocol.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93.08,  for transmission scheme, not limited to use of facsimile equipment.


    93.31,  for modulated signal transmission scheme.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 17+ for video signal transmission scheme.


CLS 379/101.01
TXT Audio program distribution:

    Subject matter under subclass 90.01 where an audio program is transmitted
    to subscribers over a telephone system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87,     for program distribution of dynamically retrieved audio signal
    (e.g., from a storage medium).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 6+ for television program distribution.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    77+ for one-way audio signal program distribution.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 3.1+ for radio program distribution,
    other than by telephone equipment.


CLS 379/102.01
TXT Remote control:

    Subject matter under subclass 90.01 wherein the signal is used to operate a
    distant device over a telephone line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74+,    for remote control of a telephone answering device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 825+ for remote control
    system not specified as using a telephone line.


CLS 379/102.02
TXT Communication device:

    Subject matter under subclass 102.01 wherein the device has the primary
    function of receiving or transmitting information.


CLS 379/102.03
TXT Entertainment appliance (e.g., TV, VCR, radio, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 102.02 wherein the device converts  media
    signals into humanly perceivable signals, typically sight or sound, or
    records the media signals for later playback.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclass 734 for remote control device not specified as
    using a telephone line.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 352+ for remote control of a radio
    receiver.


CLS 379/102.04
TXT Power source:

    Subject matter under subclass 102.02 wherein the control is directed toward
    applying electric energy to the communication equipment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93.36,  for power supply of modem.


CLS 379/102.05
TXT Of heating, ventilation, air conditioner (e.g., HVAC):

    Subject matter under subclass 102.01 wherein the device controls a climate
    or circulates air.


CLS 379/102.06
TXT Of physical entrance or exit lock:

    Subject matter under subclass 102.01 wherein the control restricts movement
    of a person by permitting or preventing ingress or egress  through a door
    or other similar structural closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167+,   for an intercom system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, appropriate subclasses for a lock.

    235,    Registers, subclass 382 for coded record controlled access control.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 825.31+ for an electrical
    access control arrangement responsive to intelligence comparison.


CLS 379/102.07
TXT Having indication:

    Subject matter under subclass 102.01 wherein a condition or state of the
    controlled device is reported in humanly perceivable form.


CLS 379/106.01
TXT Remote indication over telephone line (e.g., telemetry):

    Subject matter under subclass 90.01 for providing a signal representing a
    sensed condition at a distant station via the telephone line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39+,    for similar subject matter which is responsive to an emergency or
    alarm condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 500+ for sensed condition
    attainment signalling and subclasses 870.01+ for telemetering system.


CLS 379/106.02
TXT Patient monitoring:

    Subject matter under subclass 106.01 wherein the sensed condition includes
    medical data of an individual.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclass 904 for telephone telemetry.


CLS 379/106.03
TXT Meter reading:

    Subject matter under subclass 106.01 where the sensed condition is a
    measurement of a quantitative indicating device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 870.02+ for telemetering of
    a meter indication.


CLS 379/106.04
TXT Having power supply circuitry:

    Subject matter under subclass 106.03 including particular electrical
    devices for connecting electrical energy to the meter.


CLS 379/106.05
TXT Having ringing suppression:

    Subject matter under subclass 106.03 wherein the signal is exchanged
    between a central station and the subscriber's telephone without causing
    the telephone bell to sound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106.09, for ringing suppression, not limited to use of meter reading
    equipment.


CLS 379/106.06
TXT Having time window:

    Subject matter under subclass 106.03 wherein the sensed condition is
    transmitted to a central station at an appointed time period.


CLS 379/106.07
TXT Having interrogation signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 106.03 wherein the sensed condition is
    transmitted to a central station in response to a request signal initiated
    by the central station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106.11, for interrogation signal, not limited to use of meter reading
    equipment.


CLS 379/106.08
TXT Having line status detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 106.03 including an arrangement for sensing
    an electrical state of a subscriber circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    377,    for line or loop condition detection.


CLS 379/106.09
TXT Ringing suppression:

    Subject matter under subclass 106.01 wherein the signal is exchanged
    between a central station and the subscriber's telephone without causing
    the telephone bell to sound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106.05, for ringing suppression of meter reading equipment.


CLS 379/106.11
TXT Interrogation signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 106.01 wherein the signal is transmitted to a
    central station in response to a request signal initiated by the central
    station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106.07, for interrogation signal of meter reading equipment.


CLS 379/108.01
TXT Telegraphy:

    Subject matter under subclass 90.01 for transmitting a telephone signal
    over a telegraph circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93+,    for transmission of a digital message signal over telephone
    equipment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 79+ for transmitters and subclasses 118+ for
    receivers.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclass 214 for simultaneous telegraphy
    and telephony.


CLS 379/108.02
TXT Over telephone line:

    Subject matter under subclass 108.01 for transmitting a telegraph signal
    over a telephone line.


CLS 379/110.01
TXT COMPOSITE SUBSTATION OR TERMINAL (E.G., HAVING CALCULATOR, RADIO):

    Subject matter under the class definition in which a telephone instrument
    also has structure or circuitry for performing a diverse independent (i.e.,
    nontelephone) function.

    (1)     Note.  There may be a relationship between the telephone and
    diverse function, as in diverse audio muting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90+,    for a composite telephone further including transmission of diverse
    signals or over a diverse line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 705.05
    for a digital calculating computer combined with a telephone or other
    communication device.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 344+ for a receiver combined with
    diverse art device.


CLS 379/111
TXT WITH USAGE MEASUREMENT (E.G., CALL OR TRAFFIC REGISTER):

    Subject matter under the class definition which determines the length,
    number, frequency, or cost of telephone usage and is combined with
    telephone equipment.

    (1)     Note.  The telephone usage determining equipment, per se, is
    classifiable elsewhere.

    (2)     Note.  Such equipment often includes a register for counting calls,
    or determining time of usage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for testing of usage measurement equipment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclass 91 for a mechanical register operated by a
    telephone.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclass 4 for a
    horological device controlled by a nominally recited telephone.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, appropriate subclasses for an electrical counter or
    register, per se.


CLS 379/112
TXT Computer or processor control:

    Subject matter under subclass 111 wherein telephone usage determination is
    controlled by a digital signal processing calculating device.

    SEARCH CLASS

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 514 for
    computers used for communications purposes.


CLS 379/113
TXT Call traffic recording:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 where a computer or processor counts the
    number of calls.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    for telephone traffic recording not specifically controlled by a
    computer or processor.


CLS 379/114
TXT Call charge metering or monitoring:

    Subject matter under subclass 111 for a particular telephone set or the
    cost to a subscriber.


CLS 379/115
TXT Interexchange operations:

    Subject matter under subclass 114 wherein the charge determination is made
    at one exchange and then transmitted to another related to the calling
    station.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is "CAMA" - Centralized Automatic Message
    Accounting where the accounting for several central exchanges is handled at
    only one office.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219+,   for interexchange switching or signalling.


CLS 379/116
TXT Hardcopy record generating:

    Subject matter under subclass 115 for producing a permanent record of the
    call charge or basis therefor.


CLS 379/117
TXT Of station on polystation or party line:

    Subject matter under subclass 114 which determines a call charge of a
    terminal on a party line

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177+,   for a party line telephone system.


CLS 379/118
TXT Identification of station:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 which determines to which station on a
    party line a call is charged.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183,    for party line station identification.


CLS 379/119
TXT Hardcopy record generating (e.g., ticket printing):

    Subject matter under subclass 114 which produces a permanent record showing
    a numerical quantity indicating the call charge or basis therefor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    for generating a hardcopy record at an exchange other than that to
    which the calling station is connecting.


CLS 379/120
TXT With line identification or class of service determination:

    Subject matter under subclass 119 which ascertains the identity, or service
    entitlement, of a calling line.


CLS 379/121
TXT At central office:

    Subject matter under subclass 114 wherein the determination is made at the
    central switching office to which the telephone set is connected.


CLS 379/122
TXT With display:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 which produces an indication of the call
    charge or basis therefor.


CLS 379/123
TXT Paystation (e.g., escrow control):

    Subject matter under subclass 121 for measuring the cost of a call from a
    paystation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143+,   for a paystation arrangement.


CLS 379/124
TXT Pulse counting or accumulating (e.g., "message metering"):

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the charge determination is made
    by accumulation of call connection timing pulses.


CLS 379/125
TXT Local or zone:

    Subject matter under subclass 124 wherein the charge determination is made
    of calls within the local calling area.


CLS 379/126
TXT Automatic message accounting:

    Subject matter under subclass 124 which records the data necessary to
    prepare an itemized bill for a subscriber.


CLS 379/127
TXT Having line identification (e.g., automatic number identification-"ANI"):

    Subject matter under subclass 126 in which telephone message accounting
    equipment identifies the telephone number of the dialing station.


CLS 379/128
TXT Time of day controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 124 to count or accumulate timing pulses at
    different rates controlled in accordance with the time of day.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems and Devices, subclasses 4 and 13
    for time measurement controlled by, or combined with a telephone.


CLS 379/129
TXT Manually set (e.g., key and lock):

    Subject matter under subclass 121 having a hand operated call charge
    metering device.


CLS 379/130
TXT At subscriber station:

    Subject matter under subclass 114 wherein the determination is made at the
    location of the telephone set being monitored.


CLS 379/131
TXT Time controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 which modifies the call charge
    determination in accordance with time or elapsed duration.


CLS 379/132
TXT Paystation (e.g., escrow control):

    Subject matter under subclass 131 for measuring the cost of a call from a
    paystation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143+,   for a paystation arrangement.


CLS 379/133
TXT Call traffic recording or monitoring:

    Subject matter under subclass 111 for making a determination of the total
    number of calls, or the number of calls per unit time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for measuring the response time of telephone equipment.


CLS 379/134
TXT At central station:

    Subject matter under subclass 133 wherein the determination is made at a
    switching station spaced remotely from the user terminal.


CLS 379/135
TXT With hardcopy record generation (e.g., ticket printing):

    Subject matter under subclass 134 which produces a permanent record showing
    the number of calls utilizing the particular monitored telephone system
    element.


CLS 379/136
TXT With display:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 for producing a visual indication of the
    number of calls.


CLS 379/137
TXT Trunk usage (e.g., peg count):

    Subject matter under subclass 134 which ascertains the number of calls on a
    shared trunk line.


CLS 379/138
TXT All trunks busy metering:

    Subject matter under subclass 137 which determines the duration during
    which all trunks monitored are in a busy condition.


CLS 379/139
TXT Counting the number of completed connections:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 for incrementing a totalling device by
    one unit in response to a successful call attempt.


CLS 379/140
TXT At subscriber:

    Subject matter under subclass 133 wherein the determination is made at the
    location of a telephone terminal set.


CLS 379/141
TXT Mechanical register:

    Subject matter under subclass 140 wherein the traffic information is sorted
    in a mechanical register.


CLS 379/142
TXT WITH CALLING NUMBER DISPLAY OR RECORDING AT CALLED SUBSTATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition located at the called substation
    which provides either a visible indication, or a permanent or
    semi-permanent record, of the telephone number of a calling terminal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for calling number identification on a hardcopy call charge record.

    264+,   for line identification at a central switching facility.


CLS 379/143
TXT WITH CHECK OPERATED CONTROL (E.G., PAYSTATION):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a telephone is operated
    by an authorized payment and includes telephone circuitry.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for a paystation having provision for free calling.

    123,    for paystation charge metering at a central office.

    132,    for paystation charge metering at the terminal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    194,    Check-Actuated Control Mechanisms, appropriate subclasses for a
    check controlled telephone mechanism, per se, or for a check controlled
    device of general utility.


CLS 379/144
TXT Other than coin:

    Subject matter under subclass 143 wherein the telephone paystation accepts
    paper currency or a credit card.


CLS 379/145
TXT Fraud or interference prevention:

    Subject matter under subclass 143 for mitigation of inaccurate or false
    indication of payment.


CLS 379/146
TXT Coin signalling or control:

    Subject matter under subclass 143 having some detail of transmitting a
    signal, representative of the presence and denomination of a coin to, o0r
    controlling the disposition of a coin from, the central office.


CLS 379/147
TXT Coin box audit or totalizer:

    Subject matter under subclass 146 where the amount or value of the coins in
    the coin box of the pay station is signalled.


CLS 379/148
TXT Denomination:

    Subject matter under subclass 146 which determines the value of a deposited
    coin.


CLS 379/149
TXT Post-pay coin collection:

    Subject matter under subclass 146 which accepts deposit of the coin after
    the connection is made between the pay station and a called subscriber.

    (1)     Note.  Two-way audio connection is often not established until
    deposit of the required payment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123,    for a pay station in which metered services (e.g., long distance
    toll charges) are paid in advance.


CLS 379/150
TXT Coin disposition (i.e., return or collection):

    Subject matter under subclass 146 which sends a deposited coin into one of
    a plurality of coin handling paths e.g., selectively collecting or
    refunding coin).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123,    for similar subject matter having escrow control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    194,    Check-Actuated Control Mechanisms, appropriate subclasses for a
    coin return mechanism not combined with telephone circuitry.


CLS 379/151
TXT Upon connection to called station:

    Subject matter under subclass 150 wherein coin disposition is directly
    responsive to the successful call connection to a called party.


CLS 379/152
TXT Magnet, electromagnet, or relay controlled from central office:

    Subject matter under subclass 150 wherein the paystation has a magnetic
    device controlled by a signal from a central switching station, the
    magnetic device in turn controlling the disposition of a deposited coin.


CLS 379/153
TXT Paystation (e.g., controlled by refund key):

    Subject matter under subclass 150 wherein coin disposition is controlled by
    equipment at the paystation.


CLS 379/154
TXT At central office:

    Subject matter under subclass 143 wherein the control function is performed
    at a switching station spaced remotely from the user terminal.


CLS 379/155
TXT At terminal station (e.g., coin paystation):

    Subject matter under subclass 143 wherein the control is performed within
    or adjacent to the user terminal.


CLS 379/156
TXT MULTI-LINE OR KEY SUBSTATION SYSTEM WITH SELECTIVE SWITCHING AND CENTRAL
    SWITCHING OFFICE CONNECTION:

    Subject matter under the class definition including circuitry for allowing
    a subscriber terminal to be selectively connected to one of a plurality of
    lines, at least one of which is a public telephone line.

    (1)     Note. Each public telephone line is associated with a unique
    director number.

    (2)     Note.  A PBX is a system connected to one of a plurality of shared
    usage lines (trunks) as opposed to lines associated with individual
    directory numbers; however, a key system may be associated with a PBX
    system.


CLS 379/157
TXT With special service:

    Subject matter under subclass 156 providing for an additional service
    beyond normal telephone call signalling or connection (i.e., those not
    normally provided without additional fees).

    (1)     Note.  Such services generally involve three or more stations or
    two or more call connections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201+,   for centralized switching with special services.


CLS 379/158
TXT Conferencing:

    Subject matter under subclass 157 enabling three or more terminals to be
    included in a single call connection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202+,   for conferencing not limited to a key telephone system.


CLS 379/159
TXT With intercom system:

    Subject matter under subclass 156 having a line which is not normally
    connected to the public telephone system.

    (1)     Note.  These lines are often connected between terminals on the
    key-type system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    for an intercom system, per se.


CLS 379/160
TXT With connection of intercom station to subscriber line:

    Subject matter under subclass 159 including connecting an intercom
    instrument to a public telephone line.


CLS 379/161
TXT With exclusion or priority feature (e.g., lockout or privacy):

    Subject matter under subclass 156 where use of one terminal on a particular
    line denies or cuts off access of another terminal to the line.


CLS 379/162
TXT Detail of hold circuitry:

    Subject matter under subclass 156 including details of circuitry to allow
    an established telephone connection be maintained without the transmission
    or reception of audio signals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     for dynamic reproduction of a recorded audio signal combined with
    line holding.

    393,    for line holding other than in a key system.


CLS 379/163
TXT Electronic:

    Subject matter under subclass 162 having a discharge or solid state device.


CLS 379/164
TXT Line status indication or call alerting:

    Subject matter under subclass 156 including circuitry to provide a
    perceptible indication of an incoming call or other status of one or more
    of the lines connected to a terminal.


CLS 379/165
TXT Switching or supervision feature (e.g., common control, digital):

    Subject matter under subclass 156 which provides for connection control or
    signalling within a telephone key system.


CLS 379/166
TXT Detail of line circuit or line card:

    Subject matter under subclass 156  including a subscriber loop or line
    circuit or an interchangeable support therefor.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are circuit boards having features of the
    subscriber loop or line.


CLS 379/167
TXT PRIVATE (E.G., HOUSE OR INTERCOM) OR SINGLE LINE SYSTEM:

    Subject matter under the class definition having (a) a plurality of
    stations none of which is connected to the public telephone system, (b) two
    subsets connected by a single line.


CLS 379/168
TXT Lockout:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 which blocks access to the system by
    stations other than those involved in a specific communication.


CLS 379/169
TXT Central power source:

    Subject matter under subclass 168 having a single energy source for the
    entire system.


CLS 379/170
TXT With paging:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 which produces a perceptible call
    notification signal intended for a specific individual.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes an audible or other individualized
    signal for summoning an individual to a particular location.

    (2)     Note.  The subject matter in this subclass excludes ringing or
    other nonindividualized call alerting signals.


CLS 379/171
TXT Having plural stations with selective calling (e.g., master):

    Subject matter under subclass 167 having three or more station at least two
    of which have provision to direct a call to any other station.


CLS 379/172
TXT With call addressing:

    Subject matter under subclass 171 in which an originating station generates
    a signal representing the called station which signal actuates equipment to
    cause the desired connection.


CLS 379/173
TXT With call addressing:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 in which the originating station
    generates a signal representing the called station which signal actuates
    equipment to cause the desired connection.


CLS 379/174
TXT Including body or apparel supported terminal (e.g., headgear):

    Subject matter under subclass 167 in which a system has a voice terminal
    peculiarly adapted to be retained by a body portion or an article of
    clothing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    430,    for a body supported terminal.


CLS 379/175
TXT For underwater use (e.g., in diver's suit):

    Subject matter under subclass 174 in which terminal is specifically adapted
    for operation by a submerged user.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclass 132 for an underwater speech communication system using acoustical
    waves in water as a portion of the transmission link.


CLS 379/176
TXT With central power source:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 having a single electrical energy source
    for the entire system.


CLS 379/177
TXT POLYSTATION LINE SYSTEM (I.E., PARTY LINE):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the terminals of plural
    subscribers having different call addresses are connected to the central
    switching office by a single line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 2 for party line telegraph systems.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.38+ for selective party
    line signalling.


CLS 379/178
TXT Revertive call:

    Subject matter under subclass 177 which enables calling another party on
    the same line.


CLS 379/179
TXT Call alerting (e.g., ringing):

    Subject matter under subclass 177 which directs a call alerting signal to a
    party line subscriber terminal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252+,   for call alerting.


CLS 379/180
TXT Full selective or tuned (e.g., harmonic):

    Subject matter under subclass 179 which uniquely directs the ringing signal
    to a particular subscriber terminal.

    (1)     Note.  The unique direction often uses frequency selection of the
    ringing signal.


CLS 379/181
TXT Semi-selective (e.g., line side, polarized):

    Subject matter under subclass 179 wherein the ringing signal is directed to
    a subset of the terminals connected to the line.

    (1)     Note.  The signal direction often uses control of the polarity of,
    or the side to which, the signal is directed.


CLS 379/182
TXT Automatic or unattended:

    Subject matter under subclass 177 including a switching exchange for
    performing call connection solely in response to a call address signal.


CLS 379/183
TXT Station identification:

    Subject matter under subclass 182 which further ascertains the identity of
    a calling station.


CLS 379/184
TXT Lockout:

    Subject matter under subclass 182 for blocking access to a line already in
    use.


CLS 379/185
TXT Portable or mobile:

    Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein a terminal is either mounted in a
    vehicle, or is of such size and configuration so as to be carried by an
    individual.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55.1,   for similar subject matter having a near field link.

    56.1+,  for similar subject matter having a radio or an electromagnetic
    field link.


CLS 379/186
TXT Central power source:

    Subject matter under subclass 177 having a common electrical energizing
    supply for the stations connected to a line.


CLS 379/187
TXT Connected to central office:

    Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein a polystation line is connected
    to a central switching office.


CLS 379/188
TXT CALL OR TERMINAL ACCESS ALARM OR CONTROL:

    Subject matter under the class definition for restricting the calls that
    may be made from a particular station, or generating an alerting signal in
    response to a call or call attempt in violation of a call restriction.


CLS 379/189
TXT Fraud or improper use mitigating or indication (e.g., "blue box", "black
    box"):

    Subject matter under subclass 188 to defeat or indicate an attempt to
    override the call range restriction without a proper authorization or
    control function.


CLS 379/190
TXT Time out:

    Subject matter under subclass 188 which in response to a specified
    equipment status for a specified duration either changes the status, or
    generates an alerting signal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass would include disconnection of a terminal
    after a set time.


CLS 379/191
TXT At switching center:

    Subject matter under subclass 190 wherein a status control or an alerting
    function is performed at a switching center remote from the terminal.


CLS 379/192
TXT Of call duration (e.g., conversation timer):

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein a status control or an alerting
    function is performed when the duration of elapsed time during a call
    exceeds a predetermined length.


CLS 379/193
TXT Of specific equipment:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the status of particular
    telephone system equipment is determined for the status control or alerting
    function.


CLS 379/194
TXT Lockout or double use signalling:

    Subject matter under subclass 188 which locks access to, or indicates an
    attempt to access, the system by a station other than one previously in use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160,    for this subject matter  in a key telephone system.

    168,    for this subject matter in a private system.

    184,    for this subject matter in a party line system.


CLS 379/195
TXT In automatic system:

    Subject matter under subclass 194 wherein the access prevention or attempt
    determination is made in an automatic switching system.


CLS 379/196
TXT At switching center:

    Subject matter under subclass 188 wherein the call restriction function or
    generation of the alerting signal is performed at a switching station
    remote from a user terminal.


CLS 379/197
TXT Central office:

    Subject matter under subclass 196 wherein the switching center is a central
    office.


CLS 379/198
TXT PBX:

    Subject matter under subclass 196 wherein the switching center is a private
    branch exchange.


CLS 379/199
TXT At substation:

    Subject matter under subclass 188 wherein the call or terminal restriction
    or alerting function is performed at a subscriber terminal.


CLS 379/200
TXT Restrictive dialing circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 199 wherein the call restriction limits the
    call address signals which may be generated.


CLS 379/201
TXT SPECIAL SERVICES:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a switching,
    connection, or control function additional to those necessary to establish
    and maintain a single call connection between two stations.

    (1)     Note.  These services generally involve three or more stations or
    two or more call connections.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of such special services are conferencing,
    abbreviated dialing, call forwarding or transfer, paging, call waiting, and
    special networks.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157+,   for this subject matter in a key telephone system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 259+ for such special services
    combined with multiplex switching.


CLS 379/202
TXT Conferencing:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 which enables three or more terminals on
    distinct subscriber lines to be included in a single call connection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158,    for conferencing involving a key-type substation system.


CLS 379/203
TXT Operator control:

    Subject matter under subclass 202 wherein the conferencing connection is
    performed by an attendant at a central switching office.


CLS 379/204
TXT Subscriber control:

    Subject matter under subclass 202 wherein the conferencing connection is
    established or modified by central office switching equipment in response
    to signalling from a subscriber terminal.


CLS 379/205
TXT Conference initiation by single calling station:

    Subject matter under subclass 204 wherein a signalling function is
    performed at the calling terminal to originate the conference call.


CLS 379/206
TXT At substation:

    Subject matter under the subclass 202 wherein the conference call line
    coupling or switching is performed at a subscriber station.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are plural line conferencing and audio
    conferencing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158,    for a key telephone system having a conferencing circuit.


CLS 379/207
TXT At plural exchanges:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 providing a modification of normal
    telephone call signalling or connection between different exchanges.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219+,   for plural exchange networks or signalling.


CLS 379/208
TXT Priority override (e.g., butt-in):

    Subject matter under subclass 201 allowing a designated type of call to
    interrupt another telephone conversation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215,    for call interruption or signalling therefor by any additional
    incoming call.

    218,    for call interruption performed by an operator.


CLS 379/209
TXT Repetitive call attempts (e.g., camp-on-busy, retry):

    Subject matter under subclass 201 which includes producing successive
    repeated call attempts.


CLS 379/210
TXT Call diversion (e.g., call capture):

    Subject matter under subclass 201 for directing a call connection from an
    addressed telephone station to another.

    (1)     Note.  The changed connection may be either the calling or the
    called station.


CLS 379/211
TXT Call forwarding:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 for rerouting an incoming call from an
    intended addressed station to another desired station without completion of
    the call connection to the addressed station.


CLS 379/212
TXT Call transfer:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 for changing a completed call connection
    to an addressed station to another station after completion of call
    connection to the addressed station.


CLS 379/213
TXT Intercept (e.g., dead or changed number):

    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein a call made to one of a specified
    group of addresses is directed to a predetermined location.


CLS 379/214
TXT Secretarial or answering service:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 for call completion to an alternative
    station upon a designated condition.

    (1)     Note.  The designated condition may include:  time, no answer for
    specified interval, or request.


CLS 379/215
TXT Call waiting:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 for signalling a first station in
    communication with a second station that a third station desires
    communication with the first station.

    (1)     Note.  The first station can usually communicate alternatively with
    the second and third stations.


CLS 379/216
TXT Abbreviated dialing or direct call (e.g., hot line):

    Subject matter under subclass 201 responsive to either a service request
    condition or, to a line signal code of less than the complete call address
    signal, for completing the call address connection in the same manner as if
    the full call address signal were received.

    (1)     Note.  The term "service request condition" is generally an
    off-hook condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    355+,   for abbreviated call signal generation.


CLS 379/217
TXT Audible paging:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 which connects a telephone circuit to a
    loudspeaker system for summoning an individual.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 311.1 for a paging system.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclass 75
    for a megaphone and subclass 82 for a public address system.


CLS 379/218
TXT Performed by operator (e.g., butt-in, busy verification):

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the special service is performed
    by an attendant at a central or branch switching station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for telephone alarm butt-in equipment.


CLS 379/219
TXT PLURAL EXCHANGE NETWORK OR INTERCONNECTION:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a system having more
    than one exchange (e.g, switching office), or a circuit connection
    therebetween.

    (1)     Note.  A branch exchange (e.g., PBX, PABX, etc.) is considered to
    be a separate switching office for purposes of this and its indented
    subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242,    for single exchange and generic centralized switching.


CLS 379/220
TXT With interexchange network routing:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 for selecting one of plural paths for a
    call switched between two or more exchanges.


CLS 379/221
TXT Alternate routing:

    Subject matter under subclass 220 for selecting a different path in
    response to a blockage or other failure to connect.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273+,   for alternate routing within a single exchange.


CLS 379/222
TXT Toll center:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 including a switching center for
    switching toll calls from other exchanges.


CLS 379/223
TXT With operator assistance:

    Subject matter under subclass 222 where the toll center has an operator to
    assist in completion of toll calls.


CLS 379/224
TXT Tandem switching center:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 having a switching center or office
    located intermediate between an originating and receiving switching office
    for switching the trunks connected to such offices.


CLS 379/225
TXT Multi-PBX interconnection:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 which connects a plurality of private
    branch exchanges by shared trunks therebetween.


CLS 379/226
TXT Having a manual exchange:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 wherein at least one of the plural
    exchanges has manual call connection.


CLS 379/227
TXT With an automatic exchange:

    Subject matter under subclass 226 further including an exchange which
    switches calls in response to a call address signal.


CLS 379/228
TXT Having signalling to operator:

    Subject matter under subclass 227 which causes an indication at an operator
    position at a remote switching office.


CLS 379/229
TXT Interexchange signalling:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 including transmission of control or
    supervisory signals between exchanges.


CLS 379/230
TXT Signalling path distinct from trunk (e.g., CCIS):

    Subject matter under subclass 229 wherein the control or supervisory
    signals for a group of trunks are multiplexed and transmitted over a single
    separate communication channel.


CLS 379/231
TXT Central office-to-PBX signalling:

    Subject matter under subclass 231 including transmission of control or
    supervisory signals from a central office to a private branch exchange.


CLS 379/232
TXT PBX trunk groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 231 including a plurality of shared trunk
    lines connecting the central office and the private branch exchange.


CLS 379/233
TXT Direct inward dialing:

    Subject matter under subclass 231 wherein a call address designating a
    terminal connected to a private branch exchange will control connection to
    such a terminal.


CLS 379/234
TXT PBX to central office signalling (e.g., direct outward dialing):

    Subject matter under subclass 229 which transmits control or supervisory
    signal from a private branch exchange to a central switching exchange.


CLS 379/235
TXT Voice frequency signalling over trunk:

    Subject matter under subclass 229 wherein control or supervisory signals
    are transmitted as tones within the audible frequency range.


CLS 379/236
TXT D.C. signalling over trunk:

    Subject matter under subclass 229 wherein the control or supervisory signal
    is represented by the presence or polarity of the current or voltage in a
    particular circuit.


CLS 379/237
TXT Pulse or digital signalling:

    Subject matter under subclass 236 wherein the control or supervisory
    signals are represented by the time pattern of abrupt variations in a
    specified signal.


CLS 379/238
TXT Having signalling repeater:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 including amplification of interexchange
    pulse or digital signals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    341+,   for a telephone pulse signalling repeaters, per se.


CLS 379/239
TXT Using register-sender:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 including storage and subsequent
    retransmission of pulse or digital interexchange signalling information.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    288+,   for a centralized switching register-sender.


CLS 379/240
TXT Interexchange trunk circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 229 including trunk circuit switching.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333,    for subscriber line and trunk switching.


CLS 379/241
TXT Glare or simultaneous seizure mitigation:

    Subject matter under subclass 240 for prevention of call blocking caused by
    seizing of a trunk at both ends thereof.


CLS 379/242
TXT CENTRALIZED SWITCHING SYSTEM:

    Subject matter under class definition which selectively connects two
    telephone subscriber lines for communication.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes a single telephone office and generic
    telephone switching.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219+,   for a plural exchange network.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 401 through
    406 for addressing combined with specific memory configurations (e.g.,
    extended, expanded, dynamic, etc.) in a digital data processing system;
    subclasses 410 through 421.11 for generalized address forming in a digital
    data processing system; and subclasses 427 through 497.04 for generalized
    storage accessing and control in a digital data processing system.


CLS 379/243
TXT Class of service determination or transmission:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 to identify or supply a designation
    related to different types or levels of service applicable to calling
    station.


CLS 379/244
TXT In common control system:

    Subject matter under subclass 243 which supplies a type of service
    designation in stored number switching equipment.


CLS 379/245
TXT Identification:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 at a central switching office for
    determining which telephone system component is used in a particular call.


CLS 379/246
TXT Of line or trunk:

    Subject matter under subclass 245 wherein the identified component is a
    telephone signal conductor unique to a terminal station or concentrator.


CLS 379/247
TXT With display:

    Subject matter under subclass 246 for providing a visual indication of the
    line or trunk used.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142,    for a calling number display at a called substation.


CLS 379/248
TXT Using matrix:

    Subject matter under subclass 246 including an array of elements to
    determine the line or trunk identity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.79+ for a selective
    matrix.


CLS 379/249
TXT For nuisance call mitigation:

    Subject matter under subclass 246 for identifying a calling station which
    is a source of undesired, annoying, or abusive calls.


CLS 379/250
TXT Four-wire switching:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 for connecting two lines, each of which
    has a physically separate pair for each direction of transmission.


CLS 379/251
TXT With generating of call associated substation signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 which generates and transmits a signal to
    a substation which indicates the presence of, or result of, a call attempt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315+,   for signalling to an operator at a switching facility.

    372+,   for line signalling received at substation.

    418,    for call signal generating, per se.


CLS 379/252
TXT For alerting signal at called station (e.g., ringing):

    Subject matter under subclass 251 where the signal is a humanly perceptible
    signal at the called terminal.


CLS 379/253
TXT Electronic:

    Subject matter under subclass 252 having an electric circuit element
    utilizing an electron discharge device or semiconductor component.


CLS 379/254
TXT Associated with connector:

    Subject matter under subclass 252 wherein the call signal generating device
    is associated with a particular final stage selecting device.


CLS 379/255
TXT With interrupter:

    Subject matter under subclass 252 having timing equipment which
    periodically blocks the alerting signal.


CLS 379/256
TXT Having automatic or through ringing:

    Subject matter under subclass 251 which generates a call alerting signal in
    response to a connection being made to a line by the operator, or which
    enables an operator to by-pass another operator position for subscriber
    signalling.


CLS 379/257
TXT For calling station (e.g., status or progress tones):

    Subject matter under subclass 251 where a line condition responsive or call
    associated signal is transmitted back to the calling terminal.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are tones indicating the condition or result
    of a call attempt.


CLS 379/258
TXT Switching controlled in response to called station addressing signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 including ccontrol of line
    interconnection in response to a call address signal.

    (1)     Note.  The call address signal is a selectively signal which
    specifies the identity of the particular line or terminal with which
    communication is desired.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18+,    for testing of automatic switching arrangement by use of a call
    address signal.

    111+,   for usage measurement.

    173+,   for an intercom with call addressing.

    201+,   for identification of a station address.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 105+ for an automatic telephone switch, per se.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825+ for a signal
    controlled switching system, not limited to telephone switching.


CLS 379/259
TXT Including deflected electron beam switching device or mechanical or optical
    switching control (e.g., fluidic):

    Subject matter under subclass 258 in which a supervisory or control signal
    controls the operation of (a) electron beam deflecting equipment, (b) a
    light modifying element, or (c) a mechanical force or flow modifying
    element, so as to cause a change in a detected pattern of the deflected to
    modified quantity, which in turn controls a call connection.

    (1)     Note.  The supervisory or control signal is often a call address
    signal.

    (2)     Note.  Such control often utilizes optical, fluidic, or mechanical
    logic.


CLS 379/260
TXT With operator position or completion of call (e.g., dial "0",
    semi-automatic):

    Subject matter under subclass 258 where intervention by a human operator is
    necessary in order to complete at least some telephone calls.

    (1)     Note.  There must be a called station addressing signal (e.g., dial
    pulses) included in order to classified here.

    (2)     Note.  Some examples of semi-automatic systems are:  Operator
    dialed calls and calls dialed at a terminal which cause a visible
    indication of the called station's number at a manual operator's position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    308     through 332, for centralized switching systems having human
    operators without a called station signal.


CLS 379/261
TXT Operator controlled register-sender:

    Subject matter under subclass 260 wherein a register-sender is located at
    an operator attended switchboard for manual actuation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239,    for a plural exchange network with a register-sender.

    288,    for common control central switching with a register-sender.


CLS 379/262
TXT Call extension by operator:

    Subject matter under subclass 260 where the operator dials the called
    station address.


CLS 379/263
TXT With call indicator or announcer:

    Subject matter under subclass 262 having means to provide the operator with
    a visual or sound indication of a desired called station address.


CLS 379/264
TXT A to B operator:

    Subject matter under subclass 262 in which a call is extended from an
    operator answering the calling station to another operator who completes
    the connection to the called station.


CLS 379/265
TXT Call distribution to operator:

    Subject matter under subclass 260 for selecting and connecting a calling
    terminal to an operator.


CLS 379/266
TXT Call queuing:

    Subject matter under subclass 265 which processes a plurality of
    simultaneous call attempts to a lesser number of operators by holding each
    of the calls in excess of the number of operators until an operator is
    available.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    309,    for call distribution or queuing to an operator absent called
    number controlled switching.


CLS 379/267
TXT Operator's console:

    Subject matter under subclass 260 having details of the equipment used by
    the operator.


CLS 379/268
TXT Having shared or common switching control:

    Subject matter under subclass 258 having a device which stores the call
    address signal and equipment for controlling switching in response to the
    stored signal.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses include equipment for code
    conversion of the call address signal.


CLS 379/269
TXT Distributed control:

    Subject matter under subclass 268 including plural switching stages and
    having several address signal storage means each providing control based on
    switching stage, level, or function.


CLS 379/270
TXT In-stage or interstage scanning (e.g., link scanning):

    Subject matter under subclass 268 which sequentially provides connection
    between a plurality of link between or within plural switching stages.


CLS 379/271
TXT Having multistage switching:

    Subject matter under subclass 268 wherein the switching is performed by
    plural interconnected and interactive switching stage.


CLS 379/272
TXT Path selection or routing:

    Subject matter under subclass 271 which determines a path configuration
    through plural switching stage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 826+ for channel selection
    through a plural stage switching matrix.


CLS 379/273
TXT Alternate routing:

    Subject matter under subclass 272 which modifies the path configuration in
    response to a blockage of a previous chosen configuration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221,    for alternate routing in interexchange network routing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 827 for alternate routing
    channel selecting switching not limited to telephone equipment.


CLS 379/274
TXT With busy or idle test:

    Subject matter under subclass 273 which determine whether or not a
    component desired for use is already in use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277,    297 and 381, for busy or idle testing of a telephone system
    component other than in alternate routing multistage common control.


CLS 379/275
TXT Including marking circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 272 which includes placing a potential on a
    lead or contact of a path selecting multistage switching device and a
    hunting circuit for making a connection to the lead or contact in response
    to the potential thereon.


CLS 379/276
TXT End-to-end marking (e.g., self-seeking):

    Subject matter under subclass 275 which includes placing a marking
    potential at both ends of the switching path.


CLS 379/277
TXT With busy or idle test:

    Subject matter under subclass 272 which determines whether a line or a
    switching element is in use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    274,    for busy or idle testing of a telephone system component in
    alternate routing multistage common control equipment.

    297,    337 and 381, for busy or idle testing of a telephone system
    component other than in multistage common control equipment.


CLS 379/278
TXT Interstage junctor or "trunk":

    Subject matter under subclass 271 including a circuit connecting the stages
    of multistage switching equipment.


CLS 379/279
TXT Control reliability (e.g., redundancy):

    Subject matter under subclass 268 with switching control in accordance with
    the reliability of the control components.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclass
    8.2, for redundancy in a signal transmission facility or channel not
    limited to telephone equipment.


CLS 379/280
TXT Including registering or storing device for call address signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 268 which includes a specific detail of a
    call address signal storage device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers;
    Circuit and Systems, appropriate subclasses for a register circuit, per se.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 401 through
    406 for addressing combined with specific memory configurations (e.g.,
    extended, expanded, dynamic, etc.), and sublcasses 428 through 443 for
    storage accessing and control of specific memory compositions in a digital
    data processing system.


CLS 379/281
TXT Conversion between dial pulse and voice frequency signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 280 which changes the call address signal
    between a pattern of abrupt variation in a DC signal such as pulses and
    corresponding tone frequencies and variations thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    339,    for signal conversion in a telephone repeater.


CLS 379/282
TXT Voice frequency receiver:

    Subject matter under subclass 280 which is selectively responsive to audio
    frequency signalling tones.


CLS 379/283
TXT Dual tone multifrequency (DTMF) receiver:

    Subject matter under subclass 282 in which the voice frequency receiver is
    responsive to the simultaneous occurrence of designated frequency pairs.


CLS 379/284
TXT With processor:

    Subject matter under subclass 280 which controls switching functions in
    accordance with instructions stored in memory.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, for digital data
    processing systems, per se, subclasses 200.01+ for data transferring among
    multiple computer systems, and subclasses 311+ for intrasystem switching
    control.


CLS 379/285
TXT With magnetic memory:

    Subject matter under subclass 280 having a magnetizable element for signal
    storage.


CLS 379/286
TXT Signal processing (e.g., dial pulse analysis):

    Subject matter under subclass 280 wherein the call signal storage device or
    associated circuitry modifies the call address signal.


CLS 379/287
TXT Electronic:

    Subject matter under subclass 280 in which the call address storage device
    includes an electron discharge device or a semiconductor component.


CLS 379/288
TXT Register-sender:

    Subject matter under subclass 280 including storage and subsequent
    transmission of received call address signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239,    for plural exchange signalling using a register-sender.


CLS 379/289
TXT Translator:

    Subject matter under subclass 268 which changes an electrical signal
    appearing in one code representation of the same information.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, appropriate subclasses for
    code converting devices.


CLS 379/290
TXT With time division of control or supervisory signals:

    Subject matter under subclass 268 including a communication channel for
    control or monitoring signals corresponding to one of a plurality of
    distinct speech channels and in which access to the communication channel
    is divided into discrete time intervals, each of such intervals
    corresponding to one of the speech channels and which are switched so
    rapidly as to give the effect of simultaneous transmission of all of the
    control or indicating signals.

    (1)     Note.  Placement in this subclass is limited to those systems in
    which only the control or supervisory signals are multiplex.  Systems in
    which the voice signals are also multiplexed are found in Class 370.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for multiplexing
    of message signals.


CLS 379/291
TXT With detail of crosspoint switching structure (e.g., crossbar):

    Subject matter under subclass 268 particularly describing a feature of
    selection equipment for an element of a switching array.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306,    for crosspoint switch detail in other than common control equipment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 112 for a telephone crossbar switch, per se.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 825.79 for details of
    switching arrays or matrices, not elsewhere classifiable.


CLS 379/292
TXT Electronic crosspoint (e.g., solid-state):

    Subject matter under subclass 291 wherein the switching element includes an
    electron discharge device or a semiconductor component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    287,    for common control switching with registering or storing a call
    address signal and having an electronic component.


CLS 379/293
TXT Having line finder:

    Subject matter under subclass 258 for locating and connecting a calling
    line to switching apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    377+,   for an off-hook detector, per se.


CLS 379/294
TXT Including electronic element (e.g., tube or semiconductor):

    Subject matter under subclass 293 including an electron discharge device or
    semiconductor component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    287     and 292, for electronic elements in other telephone switching
    systems.


CLS 379/295
TXT Plural:

    Subject matter under subclass 293 including multiple line finders.


CLS 379/296
TXT With repeater:

    Subject matter under subclass 258 having means which receives, amplifies
    and retransmits a signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238,    for interexchange signalling having a repeater.

    338+,   for a telephone repeater, per se.


CLS 379/297
TXT Having specified busy-idle test:

    Subject matter under subclass 258 including equipment to determine whether
    or not a component desired for use is already in use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    274,    277, 337, and 381, for busy-idle testing in specific equipment.


CLS 379/298
TXT Direct control:

    Subject matter under subclass 258 wherein successive switching devices for
    making the call connection are directly responsive to the calls address
    pulse signal transmitted from the calling station.


CLS 379/299
TXT Step-by-step system:

    Subject matter under subclass 298 having a plurality of switching stages
    working sequentially and independently of the state of subsequent stages.


CLS 379/300
TXT Having plural wiper sets:

    Subject matter under subclass 299 having multiple rotary movable circuit
    contact elements.


CLS 379/301
TXT Having potential control:

    Subject matter under subclass 299 which establishes or maintains electrical
    potential at some part of the switching system.


CLS 379/302
TXT Having rotary switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 299 including a movable circuit completing
    device, which has rotational motion.


CLS 379/303
TXT Coordinate system (e.g., X-Y):

    Subject matter under subclass 299 having a movable circuit completing
    element, the motion of which has two perpendicular components.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302,    for a step-by-step coordinate system where one of the components is
    angle of rotation.


CLS 379/304
TXT All relay type:

    Subject matter under subclass 298 in which all switching is performed by
    electromagnetically controlled contact apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 825.79 for a relay matrix.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ for a
    relay control circuit.


CLS 379/305
TXT Having motor-driven switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 298 having a switching element driven by a
    motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302,    for a similar subject matter in a step-by-step system.


CLS 379/306
TXT With crosspoint switch detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 258 having a detail or a switching element of
    a rectangular switch array.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291,    for common control crosspoint switch detail.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 112 for a telephone crossbar switch, per se.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 825.79 for details of
    switching arrays or matrices, not elsewhere classifiable.


CLS 379/307
TXT With power supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 258 which provides electric power to at least
    part of the telephone equipment being used.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322,    for a power supply in centralized switching.


CLS 379/308
TXT Switching apparatus for connecting calling line to operator's position:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 which connects a terminal to an
    operator's position in response to the presence of a call.


CLS 379/309
TXT Call distribution or queuing:

    Subject matter under subclass 308 with circuitry for handling a plurality
    of calls at the same time to a lesser number of operator's positions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266,    for call queuing to an operator an automatic or semiautomatic
    system.


CLS 379/310
TXT Divided central (e.g., communication between switchboards):

    Subject matter under subclass 242 in which subscriber lines are grouped
    upon separate switchboards at a switching exchange.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219+,   for interexchange signalling.

    264,    for call extension from an A operator to a B operator.


CLS 379/311
TXT Having signalling path feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 having signalling conductors connecting a
    plurality of the switchboards for signalling between any two switchboards.


CLS 379/312
TXT Having multiple answering jacks for multiplied line:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 including plural jack connectors for a
    line on different switchboards of a switching exchange.

    (1)     Note.  The plural line appearances enable a call to be handled by
    operators at different switchboards.


CLS 379/313
TXT Multiple section switchboard:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 having a switchboard with plural
    sections, each section having a separate jack connector for each subscriber.


CLS 379/314
TXT Auxiliary (e.g., overflow):

    Subject matter under subclass 313 in which a switchboard has an additional
    section which is used primarily when the capacity of the other sections is
    exceeded.


CLS 379/315
TXT With line-signal control:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 having a switchboard with a line
    condition responsive indicator and controlled in response to an operator's
    action on the call connection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    350+,   for telephone line signalling.


CLS 379/316
TXT Spring-jack cut-off:

    Subject matter under subclass 315 wherein the switchboard has a jack
    containing resilient contact elements which contact elements are
    disconnected by insertion of plug into the jack and which insertion stops
    the operation of the indicating signal.


CLS 379/317
TXT Relay cut-off:

    Subject matter under subclass 315 wherein the line signal operation is
    stopped by a relay in response to insertion of a plug into a switchboard
    jack.


CLS 379/318
TXT Central power source:

    Subject matter under subclass 315 including a common, centrally located,
    power supply for signalling, talking, or both.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322+,   for power supplies in centralized switching systems.


CLS 379/319
TXT Single switchboard (e.g, cord circuit):

    Subject matter under subclass 242 including structure or circuitry of a
    manual line switching apparatus actuated by a single operator.


CLS 379/320
TXT Switchboard circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 319 including a detail of the switchboard
    circuitry.


CLS 379/321
TXT Connection to operator's terminal:

    Subject matter under subclass 320 including a detail of a connection
    between the switchboard and the operator's telephone set.


CLS 379/322
TXT Power supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 which supplies electricity to a telephone
    system component.


CLS 379/323
TXT Power to switching equipment:

    Subject matter under subclass 322 which supplies electricity to the
    centralized switching equipment.


CLS 379/324
TXT Central power source (e.g., common battery, line current feed):Subject
    matter under subclass 322 where a single power supply provides electricity
    for a plurality of branches connected to the central switching equipment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    318,    for line signal control with a central power source.


CLS 379/325
TXT Structure of equipment:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 directed to the physical configuration of
    the switching system.


CLS 379/326
TXT Wire or cable distribution:

    Subject matter under subclass 325 including the structure of conductors in
    central switching equipment.


CLS 379/327
TXT Main or intermediate distribution frame:

    Subject matter under subclass 326 having a structure for holding the wires
    or cables.


CLS 379/328
TXT Equipment mounting or support:

    Subject matter under subclass 325 which retains the equipment at a given
    location against the force of gravity.


CLS 379/329
TXT Allowing movement of equipment (e.g., movable, modular):

    Subject matter under subclass 328 permitting relative motion between the
    mounting or support and the equipment.


CLS 379/330
TXT Housing:

    Subject matter under subclass 325 including a cover for a part of the
    equipment.


CLS 379/331
TXT Having protective circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 which prevents damage to the circuits of
    the central switching system from improper conditions.


CLS 379/332
TXT Plug and socket:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 in which part of the equipment is
    inserted to a cooperating connector in another part of the equipment.


CLS 379/333
TXT CONCENTRATOR OR TRUNK SELECTOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition for connecting a large number of
    subscriber lines to a smaller number of shared or trunk lines.

    (1)     Note.  The subscriber lines are only connected alternatively to the
    shared or trunk lines; for simultaneous transmission see Class 370,
    Multiplex Communications.


CLS 379/334
TXT Concentrator-distributor pair (e.g., line concentrator):

    Subject matter under subclass 333 having two similar complementary
    contractors to permit a large number of subscriber lines to be connected
    and supervised over a small number of trunk lines connecting the two
    complementary concentrators.


CLS 379/335
TXT Using crossbar or crosspoint switching:

    Subject matter under subclass 333 wherein the connection is performed
    either by a rectangular switch array or a selective plural stage switch
    having plural horizontal and vertical contact paths.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291+,   for crosspoint switching structure in a common control system.

    306,    for crosspoint switch detail in a centralized switching system.


CLS 379/336
TXT With magnet, electromagnet, or relay:

    subject matter under subclass 333 wherein the concentrator includes either
    (a) an electrically excited, or a permanent, source of magnetic
    polarization, or (b) a magnetically operated switch.


CLS 379/337
TXT With busy-idle test (e.g., idle trunk finder):

    Subject matter under subclass 333 which determines if a trunk is in use and
    controls the switching in response to a determination of nonuse.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    274,    277, 297, and 381, for busy or idle testing.


CLS 379/338
TXT REPEATER (E.G., VOICE FREQUENCY):

    Subject matter under class definition which receives and retransmits a
    signal which is amplified or processed in a telephone system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass excludes amplifiers in terminal sets,
    particularly of the hands-free type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for testing of a repeater.

    146+,   for a coin signal repeater.

    238,    for a interexchange signalling repeater.

    296,    for an automatic centralized switching system with a repeater.

    420,    for a hands-free terminal.

    432,    for terminal having an amplifier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, appropriate subclasses for an amplifier.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, appropriate
    subclasses for an amplifier in an electrical audio system.


CLS 379/339
TXT With signal conversion (e.g., dial to DTMF, analog to PCM):

    Subject matter under subclass 338 which coverts a signal from variations in
    one parameter to variations of another.

    (1)     Note.  an example such variations conversion is from that of abrupt
    variations in a DC signal such as pulses to variations of tone frequency.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281,    for signal conversion in a common control system.

    353,    for control line signalling.


CLS 379/340
TXT Having line length compensation or equalization:

    Subject matter under subclass 338 including structure to either modify an
    electrical parameter in a complementary relationship with a
    distance-related effect on a telephone signal, or to cause the signal
    transmitted through the line to be independent of frequency.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    394,    for line equalization at a telephone substation.

    398,    for telephone line equalization.


CLS 379/341
TXT Pulse or tone repeater (e.g., electromechanical relay):

    Subject matter under subclass 338 for amplifying or restoring a pulse or
    tone signal.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are electromagnetic relays.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238,    for interexchange signalling repeaters.

    296,    for similar subject matter combined with a centralized switching
    facility.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 160+ for
    relay control circuits.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 211+ for a pulse
    repeater.


CLS 379/342
TXT Electronic (e.g., logic circuitry):

    Subject matter under subclass 341 having a signal processing component
    utilizing an electron discharge device or semi-conductor component.


CLS 379/343
TXT Controlled by a pilot or reference signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 338 wherein the repeater is controlled by a
    signal having a predetermined characteristic (e.g., frequency, amplitude).


CLS 379/344
TXT Component processes bidirectional signals:

    Subject matter under subclass 338 including a component handling signals
    travelling in either direction over a telephone line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 276+ for a duplex repeater.


CLS 379/345
TXT Including two-to-four wire conversion or hybrid circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 344 including a component for coupling two
    physically separate line pairs each conducting a signal in opposite
    directions to a single two-wire line carrying signals in opposite
    directions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    391+    and 402, for other hybrid circuits in telephone equipment.


CLS 379/346
TXT With frequency discriminator or negative impedance element:

    Subject matter under subclass 338 which (a) selectively passes particular
    signal frequencies, or (b) has elements which have negative impedance.


CLS 379/347
TXT With gain or attenuation control:

    Subject matter under subclass 338 having circuitry to maintain or modify
    any increase or decrease in the magnitude of the signal.


CLS 379/348
TXT Transmission of power to distant repeater:

    Subject matter under subclass 338 where a repeater receives energizing
    power over the telephone line.


CLS 379/349
TXT Having voice frequency transformer:

    Subject matter under under subclass 338 having a transformer specifically
    intended for use in the audio frequency range.


CLS 379/350
TXT SUPERVISORY OR CONTROL LINE SIGNALLING:

    Subject matter under class definition for transmitting either a selective
    control signal, or a status indicating signal, over a telephone line.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are dialing, ringing, and off-hook signals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251+,   for centralized switching combined with call associated signalling.


CLS 379/351
TXT Signalling integrity protection (e.g., voice signal immunity):

    Subject matter under subclass 350 including circuitry to distinguish
    between the supervisory or control signal and other signals on the line and
    prevent response to the other signals.


CLS 379/352
TXT Substation originated:

    Subject matter under subclass 350 which transmits a called station address
    signal over a telephone line from a subscriber terminal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also includes a transmitted line signal.

    (2)     Note.  Supervisory signals (e.g., off-hook) are excluded from this
    and indented subclasses are classified in subclasses 377+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for diagnostic testing of a line signal generator.

    90+,    for selective signalling over a telephone line for control of a
    diverse are device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825+ for selective
    signalling not limited to a telephone system; subclasses 345+ for a code
    transmitting device.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 24 for an illuminated telephone dial.


CLS 379/353
TXT Conversion of signal form:

    Subject matter under subclass 352 which converts a signal from variations
    in one parameter to variations of another.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of such parameters are amplitude, frequency, or
    phase of the control signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    339,    for a repeater having signal conversion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, appropriate subclasses for
    code converters.


CLS 379/354
TXT With called number display:

    Subject matter under subclass 352 which produces a visual indication of the
    called station address.


CLS 379/355
TXT Repertory or abbreviated call signal generation:

    Subject matter under subclass 352 which produces a complete call address
    signal i response to actuation of a single key or in response to a
    generated code of less than the complete address signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216,    for abbreviated calling performed at a central switching office.


CLS 379/356
TXT With dynamic memory:

    Subject matter under subclass 355 including storage or retrieval of dialing
    code information by relative motion between a transducer and a relatively
    movable storage medium a property of which is altered in accordance with
    the stored information.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for a dynamic audio signal memory combined with a telephone system
    component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, appropriate subclasses
    for dynamic recording reproduction.


CLS 379/357
TXT Insertable control element or circuitry (e.g., card):

    Subject matter under subclass 355 comprising a circuit element or other
    object which controls the generation of the call signal, and is readily
    removable from the signal generator.


CLS 379/358
TXT By motor driven dial rotating device:

    Subject matter under subclass 355 wherein the abbreviated call signal
    controls an electromechanical device which actuates a rotary dial pulse
    generator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    363,    for an electromechanical dial rotating device.


CLS 379/359
TXT Pulse signal generating (e.g., dialing):

    Subject matter under subclass 355 which produces a call address signal in
    the form of several sequential groups of pulses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    362+,   for pulse signal call address generators.


CLS 379/360
TXT Voice frequency band signalling (e.g., reed devices):

    Subject matter under subclass 352 wherein of tones within the audible sound
    spectrum and which have distinct frequencies to perform selective control.

    (1)     Note.  The voice frequency tones are often combination of
    frequencies.

    (2)     Note. This subclass also includes read devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235,    for voice frequency signalling between exchanges.

    282+,   for a voice frequency call address signal receiver.

    341+,   for tone repeaters.

    386,    for voice frequency line signalling reception.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, appropriate subclasses for
    code converters.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 272+ and 303+ for voice
    frequency digital communications and transmitters.


CLS 379/361
TXT Electronic (e.g., tone generator):

    Subject matter under subclass 360 wherein the signalling tones are produced
    by an electron discharge device or a semiconductor component.


CLS 379/362
TXT Pulse signal generator (e.g., rotary dial):

    Subject matter under subclass 352 wherein the selective control signal is
    composed of abrupt variations imposed upon a signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 30 and 184+ for a
    numerical pulse code transmitter.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, appropriate subclasses for digital
    pulse communications.


CLS 379/363
TXT Control of motor driven dial rotating device:

    Subject matter under subclass 362 which  includes an electromechanical
    apparatus for actuating a rotary dial.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    358,    for repertory or abbreviated dialing using a motor driven dial
    rotating device.


CLS 379/364
TXT With nonrotary actuator (e.g., key or slide type):

    Subject matter under subclass 362 having a pulse producer actuated by a
    mechanism having linear motion.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are actuators of the slide or push button
    type.


CLS 379/365
TXT Specified switching contact (e.g., contact spring):

    Subject matter under subclass 362 including structure of the electrical
    switching element.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are contact spring arrangements.


CLS 379/366
TXT With detail of dial return mechanism (e.g., driving spring, speed governor):

    Subject matter under subclass 362 including structure of the mechanical
    arrangement for returning the dial to its original position.

    (1)     Note.  Included are driving spring arrangements.


CLS 379/367
TXT Finger wheel or mechanical adjunct (e.g., finger stop):

    Subject matter under subclass 362 including structure of the rotary finger
    engaging element.

    (1)     Note.  A subcombination limited in extent to a finger wheel, per
    se, is also classified herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    456,    for a dialing tool.


CLS 379/368
TXT Plural-switch number input device (e.g., keypad):

    Subject matter under subclass 352 including a manually actuated device
    having several switches for determining the content of the selective
    control signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 20+ and 173+ for
    code transmitters.


CLS 379/369
TXT Detail of mounting of switch pad or dial:

    Subject matter under subclass 352 including a support of a manual actuator
    for the address signal.


CLS 379/370
TXT In handset:

    Subject matter under subclass 369 wherein the actuator and mounting are
    located in a unitary housing containing both a microphone and earphone.


CLS 379/371
TXT Magneto signalling:

    Subject matter under subclass 352 contains a manually actuated generator
    for providing a line signal.

    (1)     Note.  These are generally the older hand crank telephone.

    (2)     Note.  The line signal is considered an address signal for purposes
    of subclass 352.


CLS 379/372
TXT Signal reception at substation:

    subject matter under subclass 350 wherein a control or line signal is
    received at a subscriber terminal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    386,    for systems where the signals are received at a point not
    specifically designated to be a subscriber terminal.


CLS 379/373
TXT Incoming call alerting (e.g., ringing):

    Subject matter under subclass 372 where the control or supervisory signal
    is generated in response to a call directed to a subscriber terminal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179+,   for call alerting on a party line.

    251+,   for call associated signal generation in a central switching system.


CLS 379/374
TXT With music or audible message generation:

    Subject matter under subclass 373 for generating an audible alerting signal
    consisting of music or of a recorded or synthesized spoken message.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67+,    for transmission of a synthesized or a dynamically reproduced audio
    signal over a telephone line.


CLS 379/375
TXT With electronic call sounder (e.g., tone "ringer"):

    Subject matter under subclass 373 where an audible alerting signal is
    generated at a subscriber terminal by a circuit having at least one
    electronic device.


CLS 379/376
TXT With visual indication of incoming call:

    Subject matter under subclass 373 where there is a visible indication at a
    subscriber terminal which indicates the presence of an incoming telephone
    call.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247,    for display of the identity of a called line or trunk.


CLS 379/377
TXT Using line or loop condition detection (e.g., line circuit):

    Subject matter under subclass 350 in which the supervisory or control
    signal is generated in response to an electrical state of a subscriber
    circuit.


CLS 379/378
TXT With current controlling electromagnetic core device (e.g., Hall-effect
    device):

    Subject matter under subclass 377 having a magnetizable element within a
    coiled conductor for current control.


CLS 379/379
TXT With optical link between line and switching system:

    Subject matter under subclass 377 including a communication link between a
    subscriber's line and a central switching system which uses light waves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    109+ for optical communications.


CLS 379/380
TXT By bridge circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 377 including a network arranged so that,
    when an electromotive force is present across one branch, the response of a
    suitable detecting device in another branch may be zeroed by suitable
    adjustment of the electrical consistents of still other branches.


CLS 379/381
TXT Busy test or make busy:

    Subject matter under subclass 377 for determining whether or not a loop or
    line connected to a terminal is in use, or to simulate such an in-use
    condition on a line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    274,    277 and 337, for various busy testing circuits.


CLS 379/382
TXT For ring trip or polarity reversal detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 377 including detection of a change in the
    polarity of the potential difference across the line or loop, or of an
    off-hook condition of the called terminal to cause cessation of the
    alerting signal.

    (1)     Note.  Off-hook detection often accomplished by distinguishing a
    voice signal from an A.C. ringing signal.


CLS 379/383
TXT Of plural lines:

    Subject matter under subclass 377 having more than one line or loop.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156+,   for a multiline system with selective switching and central office
    connection.

    264+,   for identification of a line in a central office.

    333+,   for a line concentrator.


CLS 379/384
TXT By scanning:

    Subject matter under subclass 383 where a condition of each of the plural
    loops or lines is detected by sensing each line in sequence.


CLS 379/385
TXT Relayless:

    Subject matter under subclass 377 wherein line or loop condition signalling
    is performed by circuitry other than electromagnetically operated contacts.


CLS 379/386
TXT Signal receiver (e.g., tone decoder):
    Subejct matter under subclass 350 for receiving the supervisory or control
    line signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    351,    for similar subject matter having spurious response protection.

    372,    for supervisory or control line signalling reception at a
    subscriber terminal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.36+ for selective
    signal indicating.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 316+ for a pulse
    communication receiver.


CLS 379/387
TXT SUBSTATION OR TERMINAL CIRCUITRY:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising electrical
    relationships of circuit elements of a terminal set or a group of such sets
    connected to a single line circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156+,   for a key substation system.

    177+,   for a polystation line system.

    199+,   for a call limiting substation system.

    419+,   for the structure of a terminal.


CLS 379/388
TXT For loudspeaking terminal:

    Subject matter under subclass 387 including a terminal set having an
    electrical-to-audio signal transducer which produces an audible signal of
    sufficient intensity to be intelligible to a user not in contact with the
    telephone terminal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    420+,   for loudspeaking terminal structure.

    432,    for a loudspeaking terminal housing.


CLS 379/389
TXT With circuitry for voice control of transmission direction:

    Subject matter under subclass 388 permitting operation f the terminal in
    only one direction in  response to the presence of a voice signal to be
    transmitted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclass
    110 for a voice controlled one-way audio system.


CLS 379/390
TXT With amplification or attenuation level control:

    Subject matter under subclass 388 having a circuit for adjusting or
    maintaining the level of signal strength.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    347,    for amplification or attenuation control in a telephone repeater.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    104+ for amplitude or volume control for an audio system.


CLS 379/391
TXT Sidetone control or hybrid circuit (e.g., induction coil):

    Subject matter under subclass 387 for maintaining that portion of the
    speech signal which is transmitted from a telephone transmitter and
    reproduced at adjacent receiver at a desired degree of separation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402,    for similar subject matter at a telephone line interface.


CLS 379/392
TXT Suppression (e.g., anti-sidetone):

    Subject matter under subclass 391 for minimizing the amount of sidetone
    reproduced by a receiver.


CLS 379/393
TXT Hold circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 387 for maintaining a subscriber loop circuit
    in an active but noncommunicating mode.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162+,   for a key system hold circuit.


CLS 379/394
TXT Impedance matching or line equalizing:

    Subject matter under subclass 387 wherein the terminal includes a circuit
    to either make the terminal and line impedances equal, or to equalize
    frequency attenuation characteristic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    398,    for telephone line equalization or impedance matching, other than
    in terminal circuitry.


CLS 379/395
TXT Amplifying:

    Subject matter under subclass 387 for increasing the audio signal at a
    terminal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, appropriate subclasses for an amplifier.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    120+ for audio systems with amplifiers.


CLS 379/396
TXT Visual signalling (e.g., lamp):

    Subject matter under subclass 387 to modify or emit light in response to
    one or more terminal conditions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    376+,   for visual call alerting.


CLS 379/397
TXT Wire distribution:

    Subject matter under subclass 387 including the placement of conductors
    within the terminal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    326+,   for wire or cable distribution at a centralized switching facility.


CLS 379/398
TXT LINE EQUALIZATION OR IMPEDANCE MATCHING:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a circuit to cause the
    signal transmitted through the line to be independent of frequency, or
    providing for adjustment of the impedance thereof to optimize signal
    transmission to, and reception from, a telephone line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    394,    for this subject matter  in terminal circuitry.


CLS 379/399
TXT SUBSCRIBER LINE OR TRANSMISSION LINE INTERFACE:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a circuit for
    connecting a telephone communications line to a central switching office or
    a subscriber station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27+,    for diagnostic testing of a subscriber loop.

    219+,   for interconnection of plural exchanges.

    377+,   for line signalling using line or loop condition detection.

    387+,   for substation circuitry.

    398,    for line equalization or impedance matching.

    414+,   for transmission line characteristic control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, appropriate subclasses for a
    passive connection between a transmission line and another device.


CLS 379/400
TXT For line length compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 399 including structure to change an
    electrical parameter in a complementary relationship with a
    distance-related effect on a telephone signal.

    (1)     Note.  Amplifying of a telephone signal is classified in subclasses
    338+.


CLS 379/401
TXT Voltage boosting circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 which increases the magnitude of a
    voltage source in accordance with the length of a related telephone line.


CLS 379/402
TXT Hybrid circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 399 including a two-wire to four-wire
    converter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for testing of a hybrid circuits.

    344,    for similar subject matter including a telephone repeater.

    391+,   for a hybrid circuit in a substation of terminal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 24+ for a coupling
    network.


CLS 379/403
TXT With adjustable balance circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 402 which includes a circuit having an
    impedance the reactive component of which is substantially equal in
    magnitude and opposite in sign to that of the two-wire line, the impedance
    being variable for adjustment purposes.


CLS 379/404
TXT Automatic adjustment:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 which varies the impedance of the balance
    circuit in accordance with a sensed unbalanced condition.


CLS 379/405
TXT Electronic noninductive:

    Subject matter under subclass 402 which connects the bidirectional two-wire
    line with two unidirection two-wire lines and operated by means of an
    element in which signal transmission is controlled by an electron discharge
    device or a semiconductor component.


CLS 379/406
TXT Echo suppression, antisinging, or reverse path blocking:

    Subject matter under subclass 399 including circuitry to prevent undesired
    reflection, oscillation, or signal transmission.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for testing an echo suppressor.

    392,    for sidetone suppression in a terminal or substation.


CLS 379/407
TXT Disable or inhibit:

    Subject matter under subclass 406 wherein the undesirable signal prevention
    device includes signal blocking.


CLS 379/408
TXT Control by pilot frequency signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 406 wherein the undesirable signal is
    prevented by equipment responsive to a reference frequency signal.


CLS 379/409
TXT Having variolosser or attenuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 406 wherein the undesired path signal
    prevention device reduces the magnitude of the signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 81 for an attenuator.


CLS 379/410
TXT Echo cancellation (e.g., phase opposition):

    Subject matter under subclass 406 which produces a replica of the undesired
    signal and offsetting the undesired signal by said replica.

    (1)     Note.  An example of such signal offsetting would include combining
    the undesired signal with a phase opposed replica thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for testing of an echo suppressor or canceller.

    392,    for an anti-sidetone device in a telephone terminal or substation.


CLS 379/411
TXT Having transversal filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 410 wherein an echo is cancelled by a
    multiply tapped delay line with a summing or weighting circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 165 for a time
    domain filter.


CLS 379/412
TXT Protective circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 399 having a circuit which prevents damage to
    the telephone line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Device, subclass 119 for high
    voltage surge protection of a communication line.


CLS 379/413
TXT Power supply (e.g., battery feed):

    Subject matter under subclass 399 wherein the interface further includes a
    source of electrical energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322+,   for a power supply at a central switching office.


CLS 379/414
TXT TRANSMISSION LINE CONDITIONING:

    Subject matter under the class definition for varying an electrical
    parameter of a telephone channel.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter is often included to bring a circuit
    value of a desired or standard value.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22+,    for diagnostic testing of a telephone transmission line.

    381,    for a make busy arrangement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, appropriate subclasses for
    a telephone conductor.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, appropriate subclasses for a
    load line.


CLS 379/415
TXT Reactance neutralizing:

    Subject matter under subclass 414 for adding a reactive impedance to
    counteract reactive line impedance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    394,    for impedance matching in a telephone substation or terminal.

    398,    for impedance matching or line equalization.


CLS 379/416
TXT Interference suppression:

    Subject matter under subclass 414 which reduces or eliminates an undesired
    signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for testing of an echo suppressor.

    400+,   for echo cancellation or antisinging in a subscriber line or
    transmission line interface.


CLS 379/417
TXT Anti-crosstalk:

    Subject matter under subclass 416 to reduce or eliminate a signal from one
    telephone channel induced in another.


CLS 379/418
TXT CALL SIGNAL GENERATING (E.G., RINGING OR TONE GENERATOR):

    Subject matter under the class definition which produces an electrical
    signal which actuates a device producing a perceptible signal indicative of
    the status or presence of a desired call connection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for testing of a line signalling generator.

    65,     for a single channel telephone carrier system including call
    signalling.

    164,    for call alerting in a multiline or key substation.

    179+,   for call alerting in a polystation line system.

    201+,   for a special service.

    251+,   for call signal generation in a centralized switching system.

    352+,   for substation originated call signal generation.

    373+,   for reception of a call alerting signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 384.1+ for an audible
    indication.


CLS 379/419
TXT TERMINAL:

    Subject matter under the class definition including an audio reproducer and
    microphone.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses also include subcombinations
    and components peculiar to such devices and not elsewhere classified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110.01, for a composite terminal.

    156+,   for key system.

    167+,   for an intercom system station.

    352+,   for call address or other line signalling structure at a terminal.

    441+,   for accessory or auxiliary equipment usable with the subject matter
    of this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclass 88 for an illuminated telephone instrument.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    150+ for a microphone or speaker, per se.


CLS 379/420
TXT Having loudspeaking conversation capability (e.g., hands-free type or
    speakerphone):

    Subject matter under subclass 419 which permits conversation with a user
    without physical contact with the terminal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    388+,   for circuitry particularly designed for a loudspeaking terminal.


CLS 379/421
TXT Having muting:

    Subject matter under subclass 419 where a transducer in the terminal is
    prevented from being operational.


CLS 379/422
TXT Switch or switch actuator structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 419 comprising a mechanical or electrical
    device which completes, breaks, or changes the path of an electrical
    current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses
    for a switch, per se.


CLS 379/423
TXT Line selection:

    Subject matter under subclass 422 where the switch connects one of a
    plurality of lines to a component of the system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156+,   for substation circuitry including plural lines used with line
    selecting terminals.


CLS 379/424
TXT Receiver or handset position responsive (e.g., hookswitch):

    Subject matter under subclass 422 which opens or closes the switch contacts
    in response to a change of relative position between the part of the
    terminal containing the audio reproducer and the rest of the terminal.


CLS 379/425
TXT With mechanism for latching hookswitch or plunger against motion:

    Subject matter under subclass 424 which includes structure to prevent a
    hook or plunger operated switch from being operated by the handset or
    receiver.


CLS 379/426
TXT Movable holder for receiver or handset:

    Subject matter under subclass 424 having a switch actuator which holds the
    telephone reproducer, the actuator being movable relative to the rest of
    the terminal.


CLS 379/427
TXT Having plunger and lever linkage:

    Subject matter under subclass 424 where the switch actuator includes a
    movable rodlike place engaging a rigid piece that pivots about a point to
    actuate the switch.


CLS 379/428
TXT Housing or housing component:

    Subject matter under subclass 419 having a casing enclosing components of a
    terminal set.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    D14,    Recording, Communication, or Information Retrieval Equipment,
    subclasses 140+ for a design a telephone housing.


CLS 379/429
TXT Having distinct circuitry support structure (e.g., circuit board):

    Subject matter under subclass 428 including structure separate from the
    other terminal elements to hold or connect an electrical component of a
    telephone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 600+ for a
    housing or mounting assembly for a plurality of diverse electrical
    components.


CLS 379/430
TXT Body supported (e.g., headgear):

    Subject matter under subclass 428 including apparatus for frictional
    abutting engagement between the user's body and a telephone terminal
    receiver-transmitter device.

    (1)     Note.  These instruments include structure to support both a
    receiver and a transmitter casing adjacent a user's head by engagement
    therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    449,    for handset holders that are attachable to terminal housing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclass 25
    for a stereo headphone, subclass 74 for a headphone circuit, and subclasses
    183 and 187 for a headphone.


CLS 379/431
TXT Separate housings for earphone and microphone (e.g, candlestick type):

    Subject matter under subclass 428 including a transmitter and a receiver in
    different cases.

    (1)     Note.  The different cases may be separately positioned.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    426,    for similar subject matter including a hookswitch supported
    receiver.


CLS 379/432
TXT Loudspeaking set:

    Subject matter under subclass 428 in which a telephone housing radiates
    reproduced sound to a user located away from the terminal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    420,    for a loudspeaking terminal.


CLS 379/433
TXT Handset structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 428 including a housing that contains both
    the receiver and the transmitter devices.

    (1)     Note.  The receiver and transmitter are usually spaced apart, and
    have separate acousitc chambers, with a portion of the surrounding or
    connecting housing forming a handle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370,    for a handset mounting feature for a dial or switchpad.


CLS 379/434
TXT Specified terminal configuration (e.g., novelty type):

    Subject matter under subclass 428 having a specific shape, orientation,
    simulation or other geometric relation of portions of a telephone terminal
    housing.

    (1)     Note.  The term simulation is intended to comprehend fanciful
    characters and caricatures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 141+ for a nonoperative toy
    telephone.

    D14,    Recording, Communication, or Information Retrieval Equipment,
    subclasses 140+ for an ornamental design of telephone equipment.


CLS 379/435
TXT Wall set or convertible type:

    Subject matter under subclass 428 wherein the telephone set includes
    structure to provide support from an adjacent vertical building element or
    to convert the wall set for use upon a horizontal planar surface.


CLS 379/436
TXT Desk set:

    Subject matter under subclass 428 wherein the terminal is configured so as
    to provide normal operation with the terminal base resting on a horizontal
    planar surface.


CLS 379/437
TXT Protective structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 428 wherein a terminal includes apparatus to
    prevent damage to the terminal or some component thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    451,    for similar subject matter separable from telephone terminal
    structure.


CLS 379/438
TXT Of cord or connector:

    Subject matter under subclass 437 for protecting a terminal lead wire or
    connector.


CLS 379/439
TXT Antiseptic:

    Subject matter under subclass 437 for protective germicidal or hygienic
    structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    452,    for an antiseptic terminal accessory.


CLS 379/440
TXT Casing or enclosure, per se:

    Subject matter under subclass 428 consisting of housing structure
    surrounding the electromechanical parts of the telephone set.


CLS 379/441
TXT TERMINAL ACCESSORY OR AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT:

    Subject matter under the class definition used with and not part of a
    telephone set.


CLS 379/442
TXT With circuit connection to terminal:

    Subject matter under subclass 441 for connecting a device to the line by
    direct connection through the terminal.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a terminal patch cord or connector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90.01+, for a similar circuit connection for diverse art device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for circuit
    connectors, per se.


CLS 379/443
TXT Including coupler (e.g., inductive);

    Subject matter under subclass 441 for transferring a signal from a telepone
    terminal other than by direct circuit connection.

    (1)     Note.  Such transfer may be performed by an inductive or other
    coupling to the telephone terminal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55.1,   for an inductive or other near field link telephone system.


CLS 379/444
TXT Acoustic:

    Subject matter under subclass 443 where the transfer is performed by direct
    circuit connection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     for this subject matter combined with a telephone answering device.


CLS 379/445
TXT Locking device:

    Subject matter under subclass 441 wherein a fastening apparatus prevents
    unauthorized usage of a telephone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    70,     Locks, appropriate subclasses for a lock, per se.


CLS 379/446
TXT Telephone receiver support:

    Subject matter under subclass 441 including apparatus for holding a
    telephone receiver to a telephone set.

    (1)     Note.  A support to hold a telephone reproducer to structure other
    than at telephone set is classified in Class 381, Electrical Audio Signal
    Processing Systems and Devices, subclass 205.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    426,    for a terminal having a movable holder or a telephone receiver
    which operates a switch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses, for a support, per se.


CLS 379/447
TXT Attachable to terminal housing:

    Subject matter under subclass 441 having structure to support the accessory
    or auxiliary equipment adjacent the terminal housing.


CLS 379/448
TXT Hookswitch operator:

    Subject matter under subclass 447 including apparatus for depressing the
    actuator of a receiver or handset position responsive switch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    424+,   for a hookswitch.


CLS 379/449
TXT Handset holder (e.g., shoulder rest):

    Subject matter under subclass 447 including apparatus for holding a handset
    on a human body.


CLS 379/450
TXT Clips onto terminal structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 447 including a device that attaches to the
    telephone terminal structure.


CLS 379/451
TXT Protective structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 441 including apparatus that guards and/or
    shields the telephone or some part thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    437+,   for a terminal including apparatus to prevent damage to the
    terminal or a component thereof.


CLS 379/452
TXT Antiseptic, disinfecting, or disposable:

    Subject matter under subclass 451 including structure to prevent
    cross-infection by telephone users.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is antiseptic, disinfecting, or disposable
    structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    439,    for antiseptic terminal structure.


CLS 379/453
TXT Hood or enclosure (e.g., booth):

    Subject matter under subclass 441 including a protective covering for a
    telephone or a fenced off or confined area for a telephone as in a
    telephone booth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses for
    structural detail of a telephone booth absent any significant telephone
    component structure or relationship.


CLS 379/454
TXT Support or stand:

    Subject matter under subclass 441 including structure to retain the
    telephone apparatus in a desired position.

    (1)     Note.  The structure can serve as a mounting for a push button, a
    volume control or other items.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    446,    for structure to support a telephone receiver from another part of
    the telephone terminal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses for a support, per se.


CLS 379/455
TXT Handset holder:

    Subject matter under subclass 454 including apparatus that supports the
    telephone handset.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    449,    for handset holder attachable to a telephone terminal housing.


CLS 379/456
TXT Dialing tool:

    Subject matter under subclass 441 comprising a device having structure for
    dialing a telephone.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass requires the device to have a limitation
    particularly designed for cooperation with the manual actuation device and
    not merely incidentally useful therewith (e.g., a pencil).


CLS 379/457
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition not provided for in any of the
    preceding subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    381,    Electrical Audio Processing Systems and Devices, appropriate
    subclasses for one way-audio circuits and audio transducers, per se.

    FOREIGN ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 379/FOR100
TXT HAVING NEAR FIELD LINK (E.G., CAPACITIVE, INDUCTIVE):

    Foreign art collection having a transceiver, a base station, and a near
    field or limited range system (i.e., field strength=k/d where d=distance
    between the transceiver and base station antennas) whereby signal transfer
    is inductive or capacitive, rather than electromagnetic.


CLS 379/FOR101
TXT HAVING ELECTROMAGNETIC LINK FOR SPEECH OR PAGING SIGNAL (E.G.,
    LIGHT WAVE LINK):

    Foreign art collection wherein a circuit connection is made by a
    transmitted electromagnetic field or wave group.


CLS 379/FOR102
TXT Control of selectively responsive paging arrangement over
    telephone line:

    Foreign art collection in which telephone equipment is used to transmit a
    signal to selectively operate or control equipment to produce a perceptible
    notification signal over an electromagnetic link.


CLS 379/FOR103
TXT Radio telephone system or instrument:

    Foreign art collection including either (a) a base station transceiver
    connected to a land telephone line, or (b) a mobile station.


CLS 379/FOR104
TXT Zoned or cellular system:

    Foreign art collection including plural stations providing service to
    different geographical areas.


CLS 379/FOR105
TXT Having zoned/cellular system switching (e.g., handoff):

    Foreign art collection having communication between base stations to
    control communications with a mobile station.


CLS 379/FOR106
TXT Including cordless extension set (i.e., having single subscriber
    line access):

    Foreign art collection including a base transceiver connected to a single
    subscriber line and a cooperating portable transceiver.


CLS 379/FOR107
TXT With privacy or lockout (e.g., identity verification):

    Foreign art collection which permits use of a base station only by an
    authorized subscriber or transceiver.


CLS 379/FOR108
TXT Including supervisory or control signalling:

    Foreign art collection for generating, processing, or receiving switching
    or status indicating signals.


CLS 379/FOR109
TXT HAVING SINGLE CHANNEL TELEPHONE CARRIER:

    Foreign art collection wherein a single telephone speech signal modulates a
    carrier signal which has a frequency above the range of human audibility.


CLS 379/FOR110
TXT Including call signalling (e.g., ringing, off-hook, dialing):

    Foreign art collection which performs a call related signalling operation
    distinct from voice information.


CLS 379/FOR111
TXT Over power line:

    Foreign art collection wherein a modulated telephone carrier is transmitted
    over a power line electrical conductor.


CLS 379/FOR112
TXT TELEPHONE LINE OR SYSTEM COMBINED WITH DIVERSE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
    OR SIGNALLING (E.G., COMPOSITE):

    Foreign art collection wherein a nontelephone signal is transmitted over a
    conductor of telephone signals, or a telephone signal is transmitted over
    nontelephone electrical circuitry.


CLS 379/FOR113
TXT Credit authorization:

    Foreign art collection to permit or deny a charge to an individual account
    by nonvoice signals over a telephone line.


CLS 379/FOR114
TXT Polling (e.g., audience survey):

    Foreign art collection wherein plural controlled devices transmit a
    personal or personal choice status signal in response to an interrogating
    signal.


CLS 379/FOR115
TXT With transmission of a digital message signal over a telephone line:

    Foreign art collection for transmission of message information by either a
    multi-level pulse signal, or a digital data signal, over lines specifically
    described as telephone lines.


CLS 379/FOR116
TXT Including switching station:

    Foreign art collection including a switching facility having structure or
    circuitry for digital message signal processing.


CLS 379/FOR117
TXT Access restricting:

    Foreign art collection for restricting telephone access to digital
    computing or communication equipment.


CLS 379/FOR118
TXT Including terminal for display of digital information:

    Foreign art collection including structure particularly adapted for
    conversion of a digital information signal into a visual message signal.


CLS 379/FOR119
TXT By voice frequency signal (e.g., tone code):

    Foreign art collection wherein the pulse or digital data signal is
    specifically described as converted into one or more tones lying within the
    audible frequency spectrum.


CLS 379/FOR120
TXT By modulated audio tone:

    Foreign art collection wherein a pulse or digital data signal causes a
    variation in the frequency, phase or amplitude of an audible tone.


CLS 379/FOR121
TXT Having acoustic link:

    Foreign art collection wherein a digital signalling device is connected to
    a telephone line by a sound wave passing between a complementary pair of
    electroacoustal transducers.


CLS 379/FOR122
TXT To produce visual-graphic copy reproduction (e.g., facsimile):

    Foreign art collection where the nontelephone signal is a visual or graphic
    representation of a static document for producing a visually readable
    permanent copy at a receiving station.


CLS 379/FOR123
TXT Audio program distribution:

    Foreign art collection where an audio program is transmitted to subscribers
    over a telephone system.


CLS 379/FOR124
TXT Remote control:

    Foreign art collection having signalling over a telephone line for control
    of a nontelephone device at a remote location.


CLS 379/FOR125
TXT Of entrance of exit lock:

    Foreign art collection which controls a mechanism for permitting or
    preventing access through a door or other similar structural closure.


CLS 379/FOR126
TXT With indication:

    Foreign art collection which indicates a condition of the controlled device.


CLS 379/FOR127
TXT From terminal:

    Foreign art collection wherein a device is controlled from a telephone
    terminal.


CLS 379/FOR128
TXT Remote indication over telephone line (e.g., telemetry):

    Foreign art collection for providing a signal representing a sensed
    condition at a remote location over the telephone line.


CLS 379/FOR129
TXT Meter reading:

    Foreign art collection where a sensed condition is an indication of a
    quantitative indicating device.


CLS 379/FOR130
TXT Telegraphy:

    Foreign art collection for transmitting a telephone signal over a telegraph
    circuit.


CLS 379/FOR131
TXT Over telephone line:

    Foreign art collection for transmitting a telegraph signal over a telephone
    line.


CLS 379/FOR132
TXT COMPOSITE SUBSTATION OR TERMINAL (E.G., HAVING CALCULATOR, RADIO):

    Foreign art collection in which a telephone instrument also has structure
    or circuitry for performing a diverse independent (i.e., nontelephone)
    function.


CLS 380/
TTL CRYPTOGRAPHY

CLS 380/
TXT I.      DEFINITION OF TERMS:

    CRYPTOGRAPHY

    The study of secret information storage or communication.

    CRYPTANALYSIS

    Determination of encryption code of encrypted message (i.e., codebreaking).

    CODE

    Information concealed by substitution of words or symbols for words of the
    concealed message.

    CIPHER

    Information concealed by substitution or interchange of text characters for
    those in the original message.

    ENCRYPTING OR ENCIPHERING

    A process of obscuring information by intentionally changing it to a form
    unintelligible to a casual or unauthorized observer.

    DECRYPTING OR DECIPHERING

    A process of extracting concealed information from an intentionally
    obscured form and changing it into a form intelligible to a recipient with
    proper authorization or equipment.

    KEY

    A formula, word or signal used to define the code in encryption or
    decryption of the information.  Such a signal is often a digital signal
    having a predetermined or pseudorandom content.

    II.     SUBJECT MATTER UNDER THIS CLASS:

    This class includes equipment and processes which (a) conceal or obscure
    intelligible information by transforming such information so as to make the
    information unintelligible to a casual or unauthorized recipient, or (b)
    extract intelligible information from such a concealed representation,
    including breaking of unknown codes and messages.

    III.    NOTES:

    1.      Cryptographic processing may include, e.g., scrambling or masking
    or their complementary transformations.

    2.      All electrical communications equipment which processes an
    information signal for purposes of concealment are classified in this class.

    3.      Processing or converting of a signal for purposes of handling or
    transmission which may incidentally render a signal unintelligible are not
    classified in this class.

    4.      Mere blocking of access to the information is not considered a
    cryptographic transformation of the signal or information.

    5.      Use of the following terms shall be presumptive of classification
    in this class: scrambling, encrypting, decrypting, enciphering,
    deciphering, cryptography.

    6.      Use of the following terms may be indicative of classification in
    this class if a cryptographic function is supported by disclosure or claim
    language:  privacy, access, encoding, decoding, masking.

    7.      A cryptogram or a cryptographic record absent a separate encrypting
    or decrypting device is classified in Class 283.

    IV.     SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 37 for a private printing recorder; subclass
    99.1 for an acoustically shielded sounder.

    235,    Registers, subclass 495 for a perforated, coded record (e.g.,
    punched card or tape) reading template.

    283,    Printed Matter, subclass 73 for a printed or embossed article
    absent decryption structure.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 20+ and 173+, for
    code transmission, and 50+ for code conversion not specified as a
    concealing or cryptographic coding method.

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 13+ for radar electronic warfare;
    subclasses 42+ for a radar transponder identification system.

    348,    Television, subclass 5.5 for unauthorized use control of television
    equipment by signal access blocking.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 188+ for telephone use or
    access blocking equipment.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclass
    73.1 for electrically operated sound or noise masking.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 180+ for
    reliability and availability in digital data processing systems, subclasses
    186+ for security in digital data processing systems, subclasses 200.3+ for
    data transferring among multiple computer systems.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclass 12 for unit or part identification,
    subclass 84 for key sheet controlling job mode, and subclasses 366+ for
    document handling of unauthorized copy prevention.

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclasses 163+ for memory access limiting less cryptographic means or
    function.


CLS 380/1
TXT CRYPTANALYSIS:

    Subject matter under the class definition which includes breaking of a
    secret code or cipher.

    (1)     Note.  After the code has been broken, use of the code for
    reception is classified elsewhere in this class.


CLS 380/2
TXT EQUIPMENT TEST OR MALFUNCTION INDICATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition for evaluating or monitoring the
    condition of cryptographic equipment or equipment associated with a
    cryptographic system.

    (1)     Note.  Associated equipment includes testing or monitoring of
    diverse equipment (e.g. communication or display equipment) which would be
    classified in either the class providing for the particular equipment or in
    a testing class absent association with cryptographic equipment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for
    electrical measuring and testing of general utility.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 224+ for testing or
    pulse or digital communications equipment.


CLS 380/3
TXT STORED INFORMATION ACCESS OR COPY PREVENTION:

    Subject matter under the class definition which conceals or prevents
    rerecording of machine readable information by making the stored
    information unintelligible.

    (1)     Note.  Such information often includes a set of programmed
    instructions for information retrieval or processing equipment.

    (2)     Note.  For purposes of classification the term "machine readable
    information" excludes an access or authorization code, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclass 8 for electronic
    digital logic security.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 15+
    for magnetic record copying; subclass 60 for recording prevention not
    limited to cryptography.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 84+ for
    dynamic record rerecording.


CLS 380/4
TXT Digital data (e.g., software program protection, data encryption):

    Subject matter under subclass 3 which prevents duplication of, or
    unauthorized access to, information stored as a group of discrete pulses.

    (1)     Note.  Such information often includes a set of programmed
    instruction for computing equipment.

    (2)     Note.  For classification herein encryption of data or instructions
    is required.  Data or program protection using an instruction, such as a
    control signal which deletes data or disables a recording or control
    function, is not classified herein, but rather in the appropriate storage
    or computing equipment class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for encrypted communications between digital computers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 60 for
    recording prevention not including cryptography.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for computing equipment controlled by an instruction program.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclass for
    electromagnetic storage systems, and subclasses 185.01+ for floating gate
    memory storage (e.g., flash memory).

    705,    Data Processing: Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/price Determination, subclasses 16+ for payment enabled access to
    software absent cryptography.


CLS 380/5
TXT Video:

    Subject matter under subclass 3 for preventing rerecording of, or
    unauthorized access to, a stored picture signal representative of an object
    or image.

    (1)     Note.  The stored picture signal represents either a static image
    (e.g., facsimile), or an object or image movable with time.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    386,    Television Signal Processing for Dynamic Recording or Reproducing,
    subclasses 1+ for dynamic recording or reproducing of color signal and
    subclasses 46+ for dynamic recording of reproducing of black/white
    television signal.


CLS 380/6
TXT ELECTRIC SIGNAL MASKING:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the characteristics of an
    information bearing electric signal are obscured by the addition of an
    extraneous interfering signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9+,     for signal encryption by scrambling or other modification.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 1 for jamming of a modulated carrier
    wave signal.


CLS 380/7
TXT Video:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 for masking a picture signal representative
    of an object or image.

    (1)     Note.  The picture signal may represent either a static image
    (e.g., facsimile), or an object or image movable with time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10+     for video signal encryption by scrambling or other modification.


CLS 380/8
TXT By signal having discrete step amplitude variation:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the amplitude of the masking signal
    varies in discrete steps.


CLS 380/9
TXT ELECTRIC SIGNAL MODIFICATION (E.G., SCRAMBLING):

    Subject matter under the class definition which makes an information signal
    unintelligible by varying a parameter of the information signal.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses include message signal
    scrambling, or interchange of letters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for information signal encryption by masking with a second signal.


CLS 380/10
TXT Video:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 for modifying either (a) a picture signal
    representative of an object or image, or (b) a signal transmitted with such
    a picture signal (e.g., audio).

    (1)     Note.  The picture signal may represent either a static image
    (e.g., facsimile), or an object or image movable with time.


CLS 380/11
TXT Variable time delay modulation of baseband video signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 which encrypts a picture signal before
    carrier modulation by application of varying amounts of time delay.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses also include time shifting
    between video information and synchronizing signals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     for encryption of other than picture signals by variable time delay
    modulation.


CLS 380/12
TXT Carrier phase shift:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 in which a picture signal modulated onto a
    carrier wave is modified by a phase change of the carrier.


CLS 380/13
TXT Carrier frequency conversion:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 in which the frequency of a carrier wave
    is modified for encryption.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for similar subject matter used with other than video information.


CLS 380/14
TXT Nonstandard scan of video information:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 which encrypts the video signal by use of
    nonstandard scan components.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of a nonstandard scan are:  Nonadjacent scan lines,
    oppositely directed scan lines, or nonsequential video information in a
    standard scan line.


CLS 380/15
TXT By modifying synchronizing signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 which encrypts the synchronizing portion
    of the video signal.


CLS 380/16
TXT Record or coin controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein video signal modification is
    actuated by an object authorizing or making payment for use of the
    equipment.

    (1)     Note.  Such objects may include coins and other currency, or credit
    cards.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23+     for signal encryption in verification of record operated equipment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    194,    Check-Actuated Control Mechanisms, appropriate subclasses for coin
    operated equipment of general utility.

    235,    Registers, subclasses 375+ for coded record operated equipment,
    absent cryptographic equipment.

    348,    Television, subclass 3 for remote computing a television subscriber
    payment and subclass 5.5 for television access control equipment without
    cryptographic structure.


CLS 380/17
TXT Phase inversion of scan line information:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 which inverts the phase of selected video
    scan line information signals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38+,    for encryption using phase inversion not limited to video
    communication.


CLS 380/18
TXT Facsimile:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 which transmits or reproduces an optically
    scanned static picture represented by an electrical signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for generating a printed record of decrypted characters, rather
    than an image of a document.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 400+ for facsimile equipment absent signal
    encryption.


CLS 380/19
TXT Encrypting of accompanying audio signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 which modifies an audio signal so as to
    render the sound unintelligible in a conventional receiver.


CLS 380/20
TXT Control coding:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 which transmits an auxiliary signal
    between the transmitter and receiver for actuation or modification of an
    encrypting or decrypting function.

    (1)     Note.  Such control signals may be transmitted in either direction
    between the transmitter and receiver.

    (2)     Note.  The auxiliary signals referred to above should be
    distinguished from normal pilot tones or decoding sequence signals which
    synchronize or phase lock a decrypting device but do not turn on, monitor,
    or modify the operation of decrypting equipment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclass 5.5 for video signal access control equipment.


CLS 380/21
TXT Having transmission or distribution of key signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein a sequence of signals necessary for
    decoding of an encrypted signal is transmitted over a data link.

    (1)     Note.  The key signal may be transmitted separately from, or
    together with, the encrypted message signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44+,    for a key generator for data stream substitution enciphering.


CLS 380/22
TXT With magnetic record carrier (e.g., tape, drum):

    Subject matter under subclass 9 utilizing storage on or retrieval from a
    moving magnetic element for encoding the signal.

    (1)     Note.  The moving element is often an elongate web.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3+,     for encryption of recorded data.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 7 and
    8+ for delay, and for modification, respectively, of an electrical signal
    by recording and subsequent retrieval from a magnetic record medium.


CLS 380/23
TXT With user or record actuated authentication:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 which encrypts a signal indicating proper
    authorization of an individual or validity of a record for operating a
    device.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of the classifications referred to in the
    following search notes are classified in this class (380) if encryption or
    encrypting equipment is included therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 375+ for a coded record operated system,
    absent signal encryption.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.31+ for electrical
    selective authorization control; subclass 825.34 for selective electrical
    authentication.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 91.01+ for credit
    authorization, other than verbal, by telephone; subclasses 102.01+ for
    remote control by telephone.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclass 12 for unit or part identification,
    subclass 84 for key sheet controlling job mode, and subclasses 366+ for
    document handling of unauthorized copy prevention..


CLS 380/24
TXT Electronic funds transfer (e.g., automatic teller):

    Subject matter under subclass 23 which encrypts a signal for authorization,
    or authorization request (e.g., password), for credit or debit of funds to
    a customer's account.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for currency dispensing
    structure, absent signal encryption.

    235,    Registers, subclass 379 for a coded record actuated banking system;
    subclasses 380+ for a coded record operated credit system, absent signal
    encryption.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 825.33 for an intelligence
    comparing credit system, absent signal encryption.

    379,    Telephonic Communication, subclasses 91.01+ for automatic credit
    authorization over a telephone line absent signal encryption.

    705,    Data Processing: Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/price Determination, subclass 18  for an electronic  cash register
    having cryptography; subclass 44 for a general funds transfer or credit
    transaction requiring authorization or authentication not including a
    cryptographic limitation.


CLS 380/25
TXT Computer:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 which encrypts and transmits authorization
    for access to computing or data processing equipment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for computer access authorization absent encryption.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 93.02+ for computer access
    restriction over a telephone line absent encryption.

    705,    Data Processing: Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/price Determination, subclasses 18+ for a business management data
    processing system not including a cryptographic limitation.


CLS 380/26
TXT With mechanical control of signal encryption (e.g., cam):

    Subject matter under subclass 9 including an electrical element controlled
    by the motion of physical configuration of a solid object.

    (1)     Note.  The device in this subclass generally use a mechanically
    varying element as a cryptographic key.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein are cam controlled elements.


CLS 380/27
TXT By perforated record:

    Subject matter under subclass 26 which controls cryptographic signal
    modification in accordance with a pattern of openings along the length of
    an elongate web.

    (1)     Note.  The elongate web may be a movable strip.

    (2)     Note.  The pattern of perforations may supply the encryption key.


CLS 380/28
TXT By particular algorithmic function encoding:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein an algorithmic operation is
    performed upon a signal, in order to encrypt the information signal.

    (1)     Note.  The processed signal may be the message signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for a computer which performs a mathematical transformation.


CLS 380/29
TXT NBS/DES algorithm:

    Subject matter under subclass 28 which encrypts a digital signal by a
    sequence including an initial 64-bit permutation, a 56-bit encryption-key
    dependent substitution block computation, and an inversion of the initial
    permutation.

    (1)     Note.  The details of this encryption algorithm are published in
    the U.S. Government standard:  Federal Information Processing Standard
    (FIPS) publication No. 46, January 15, 1977, U.S. National Bureau of
    Standards.


CLS 380/30
TXT Public key:

    Subject matter under subclass 28 including an encryption algorithm which is
    computationally infeasible to invert, and having distinct encryption and
    decryption keys.

    (1)     Note.  The encryption keys do not require secrecy and are usually
    published.


CLS 380/31
TXT Plural modulation of single carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 which modulates a carrier with more than
    one signal or varies more than one signal parameter.

    (1)     Note.  The additional signal may be scrambling signal or another
    information signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclass 204 for multiplexing by plural
    forms of modulation; subclasses 343+ and 480+ for combining or distributing
    information via frequency channels.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    4+ for stereophonic signal broadcasting using an AM receiver.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 61 for a carrier wave system using
    plural modulation for a signal message absent cryptographic equipment.


CLS 380/32
TXT Wobbling of carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 31 which varies the frequency of an
    information modulated carrier signal periodically over a definite range.


CLS 380/33
TXT Using plural paths or channels:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 which transmits an information signal or a
    portion thereof over different communications links simultaneously,
    serially, or alternately.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes an alternate nonencrypted
    communications path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.03+ for selective
    communication channel selection, absent encryption.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 242+ for selective switching
    of a nonencrypted telephone circuit.


CLS 380/34
TXT Plural carrier frequencies:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 which transmits different composite parts
    of an information signal over carrier waves of different frequencies.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 59 for a system which transmits a
    signal message over plural carrier waves absent message concealment.


CLS 380/35
TXT Variable time delay modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 which applies varying amounts of time delay
    to the information signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36+,    for encryption by time segment interchange.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 144+ for phase modulation by an information
    signal.


CLS 380/36
TXT Time segment interchange:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 which divides the message signal into time
    interval segments the order of which are interchanged.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for this subject matter which interchanges time segments by use of
    a magnetic record carrier.


CLS 380/37
TXT Block/data stream enciphering:

    Subject matter under subclass 36 wherein time interchanged data segments
    are processed either in discrete blocks, or a continuous stream, of bits or
    pulses which serially comprise the message stream.


CLS 380/38
TXT Frequency shift or inversion:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 which modifies a segment of the frequency
    spectrum of the information signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 343+ and 480+ for combining or
    distributing information via frequency channels, absent cryptography.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 240+ for bandwidth
    compression or expansion to facilitate digital signal handling, rather than
    conceal information.

    704,    Data Processing:  Speech Signal Processing, Linguistics, Language
    Translation, and Audio Compression/Decompression, subclasses 500+ for audio
    signal bandwidth compression or expansion for purposes other than
    concealment of information.


CLS 380/39
TXT With plural band pass filters:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 which divides the signal into a plurality
    of subbands by filtering prior to a frequency shift or inversion.


CLS 380/40
TXT With plural band pass filters:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 which divides the signal into a plurality
    of subbands by filtering prior to further encryption.


CLS 380/41
TXT With quantizing and subsequent normalizing of signal (e.g., reentry
    telephone circuitry):

    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein the message signal amplitude is
    divided into discrete amplitude ranges which are subsequently weighted and
    combined.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclass 200 for quantizing of
    an analog signal.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, appropriate subclasses for pulse
    code modulation equipment.


CLS 380/42
TXT Data stream/substitution enciphering:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 which encrypts a message signal composed of
    a stream of data elements serially and continuously to produce a stream of
    the corresponding encrypted data elements.

    (1)     Note.  The encryption may be performed by either modification of
    substitution of the data stream elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for this subject matter combined with time segment interchange.


CLS 380/43
TXT Key sequence signal combined with data signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 wherein a predetermined sequence of
    digital signals is combined element-for-element with the message signal
    data elements to produce an encrypted or decrypted signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for transmission or distribution of the key signal.


CLS 380/44
TXT With particular key generator:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 including a detail of a predetermined
    digital sequence signal generator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 78 for a random oscillator.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses
    717.01+ for a random digital signal generator.


CLS 380/45
TXT Multiple key level:

    Subject matter under subclass 44 including plural encrypting or decrypting
    stages each of which has a separate key.


CLS 380/46
TXT Nonlinear (e.g., pseudorandom):

    Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein the key signal does not vary in a
    constant or predictable manner.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a pseudorandom key signal generator.


CLS 380/47
TXT Plural generators:

    Subject matter under subclass 44 which includes more than one generator to
    produce the predetermined signal sequence.


CLS 380/48
TXT With particular synchronization or initiation:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 which uses a particular signal or circuit
    for control of timing relationships between a transmitting encrypting
    device and a receiving decrypting device.


CLS 380/49
TXT With digital signal handling (e.g., digital control digital computer
    communication):

    Subject matter under subclass 9 in which an encrypting or decrypting device
    utilizes a digital signal manipulation technique on the information signal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes use of an encrypted signal to form a
    communication link between plural computing or data processing devices.
    Also included is encryption controlled by a pulse or digital signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, appropriate subclasses for digital
    signal or processing absent encryption.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 180+ for
    reliability and availability in digital data processing systems, subclasses
    186+ for security in digital data processing systems, and subclasses 200.3+
    for data transferring among multiple computer systems.


CLS 380/50
TXT Including shift register or memory:

    Subject matter under subclass 49 which uses digital information storage
    equipment for encryption or decryption of the information signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 80+ for a
    magnetic shift register.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclasses 64+ for a shift register.


CLS 380/51
TXT With production of printed copy (e.g., printer, typewriter):

    Subject matter under subclass 9 which generates a permanent visible record
    of either the encrypted or decrypted characters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for reproduction of an optically scanned document image in
    cryptographic equipment.

    52,     for an electrical cryptographic device controlled by a keyboard not
    limited to a typewriter.

    55,     for an electrical cryptographic device controlled by a keyboard not
    limited to a typewriter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclass 90 for a typewriter having
    electrical key reassignment without message concealment (e.g., "QWERTY" to
    "DVORAK" conversion).


CLS 380/52
TXT Including particular structure or housing (e.g., display, keyboard):

    Subject matter under subclass 9 which includes a detail of the
    configuration or arrangement of the cryptographic equipment of
    communications equipment connected thereto.

    (1)     Note.  Such equipment may include an enclosure, keyboard display,
    etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 22+ for a keyboard
    controlled noncryptographic encoding circuit.


CLS 380/53
TXT Audio transducer mounting or structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 including a structural detail or an audio
    sensing or reproducing transducer or a mounting therefor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, appropriate subclasses for an audio transducer housing.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, appropriate subclasses for a
    bidirectional speech circuit or audio terminal, not including cryptographic
    equipment.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    150+ for an electrical transducer not connected to cryptographic equipment.


CLS 380/54
TXT BY MODIFYING OPTICAL IMAGE (E.G., TRANSMISSIVE OVERLAY):

    Subject matter under the class definition which changes the visible
    appearance of an object so as to encrypt visible markings, or to decode the
    appearance of the object into intelligible visible markings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    283,    Printed Matter, subclasses 17 and 73 for an object with encrypted
    information printed or embossed thereon.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements,
    appropriate subclasses for optically transmissive elements, particularly
    subclasses 1+ for a holographic element; subclasses 619+ for a surface
    composed of lenticular elements; subclasses 885+ for an optical filter.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclass 12 for unit or part identification,
    subclass 84 for key sheet controlling job mode, and subclasses 366+ for
    document handling of unauthorized copy prevention.


CLS 380/55
TXT WITH PRODUCTION OF PRINTED COPY (E.G., CRYPTOGRAPHIC PRINTER OR TYPEWRITER):

    Subject matter under the class definition which generates a permanent
    visible record of either the encrypted or decrypted characters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 89+ for a typewriter having key
    reassignment without message concealment (e.g., "QWERTY" to "DVORAK"
    conversion).


CLS 380/56
TXT SELECTIVELY MOVABLE ELEMENT HAVING CODE CHARACTERS:

    Subject matter under the class definition for encrypting a message signal
    which is composed of distinct intelligible characters which are visibly
    positioned on relatively movable surfaces to enable transposing or
    substituting such characters.

    (1)     Note.  The term "character" is intended to mean at least a distinct
    intelligible element, but also includes phrases, numbers, etc., as the
    intelligence bearing or the encrypted message


CLS 380/57
TXT Rotatable:

    Subject matter under subclass 56 wherein adjacent movable character bearing
    surfaces have a circular motion component.


CLS 380/58
TXT Characters on peripheral surfaces (e.g., cylinder section):

    Subject matter under subclass 57 wherein the character bearing surface is
    on an edge surface of a movable element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    399,    Electrophotography, subclass 12 for unit or part identification,
    subclass 84 for key sheet controlling job mode, and subclasses 366+ for
    document handling of unauthorized copy prevention.


CLS 380/59
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition not provided for in any of the
    preceding subclasses.


CLS 381/
TTL ELECTRICAL AUDIO SIGNAL PROCESSING SYSTEMS AND DEVICES

CLS 381/
TXT This class provides for:  (a) wired one-way electrical transmission or
    processing systems for audio signals, (b) Stereophonic systems, which are
    not elsewhere classified, (c) instrument or process for converting an
    electrical audio information signal to or from humanly audible form.

    (1)     Note.  A "system" is an assemblage of two or more elements having
    diverse functions.

    (2)     Note.  An "audio" signal is an electrical signal which represents
    spoken or other sounds which vary with time, and may be in analog or
    digital form.

    (3)     Note.  Combinations of a loudspeaker or microphone with another
    audio signal processing device (e.g., amplifier, filter, etc.) or other
    circuit (e.g., bias circuit) are classified herein even if the loudspeaker
    or microphone is included by name only.

    (4)     Note.  Nominal recitation of "audio" is not sufficient to afford
    classification herein of an invention which would be otherwise classified
    elsewhere.

    (5)     Note.  A transducer for conversion of speech or similar sound
    (e.g., music) to or from a corresponding electrical signal, and the
    combination of such a transducer with acoustical structure is classified in
    subclasses 150+.  Note that transducer structure combined with circuitry,
    other than a lead or connector, is classified with the system, either in
    this class (381), or in an external class for processing an audio signal.

    (6)     Note.  Excluded from this class are two-way wired electrical audio
    signal transmission systems which are classified in Class 379.
    Transmissions of pulse signals which do not represent audio signals is
    classified in Classes 178 and 375.  Multiplex Communication Systems (except
    stereophonic multiplex systems) are classified in Class 370. Modulated
    Carrier Wave Communication Systems and devices are classified in Class 455,
    Telecommunication. Combinations of subject matter of this class with
    structure of a more comprehensive combination (e.g., Television Set) are
    classified with the combination.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    27,     Undertaking, subclass 31 for systems adapted for communication with
    entombed persons.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 584+ for measuring sound waves,
    especially subclass 585 for audiometers (ear or hearing testing), and
    subclasses 646+ for measuring sound intensity.

    84,     Music, subclasses 600+ for electronic musical instruments.

    181,    Acoustics, appropriate subclasses for mechanical audio systems.

    330,    Amplifiers, for amplifiers not having specific input signals or
    specific loads.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, appropriate subclasses for electrical
    communications in general.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclass 132 for underwater speech transmission by an acoustic wave;
    subclasses 140+ for an acoustic transducer not related to speech signal
    conversion.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, appropriate subclasses
    for storing and retrieving sound signals.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for multiplex
    communications.

    455,    Telecommunications, appropriate subclasses for modulated carrier
    wave speech communications.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 150+ for high temperature (Tc  30 K) superconducting devices,
    and particularly subclasses 202+ for electric communication system
    containing transmitter or receiver of pulse, digital, or electromagnetic
    radio, television, or radar wave form.

    600,    Surgery, subclass 559 for audiometers (ear or testing by auditory
    stimulus).

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, subclass 9 for mechanical artificial larynxes.

    704,    Data Processing:  Speech Signal Processing, Linguistics, Language
    Translation, and Audio Compression/Decompression, subclasses 200+ for
    speech signal processing using a  computer.


CLS 381/1
TXT BINAURAL AND STEREOPHONIC:

    Subject matter under the class definition where there are two or more
    independent sound signals which are to be separately reproduced so as to
    create a sense of depth.

    (1)     Note.  "Sound signals" are electric signals representing sounds.

    (2)     Note.  Stereophonic or pseudo stereo- phonic systems are classified
    here, not in Class 370.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, for magnetically
    recording or reproducing stored stereophonic information.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 85+ for
    recording or reproducing stored stereophonic information.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for multiplex in
    general.


CLS 381/2
TXT Broadcast or multiplex stereo:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 for the broadcasting or transmission of two
    or more independent sound signals which are to be reproduced so as to
    create a sense of depth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, for magnetically
    recording or reproducing stored stereophonic information.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 85+ for
    recording or reproducing stored stereophonic information.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for multiplex in
    general.

    455,    Telecommunications, appropriate subclasses for broadcast, nonstereo
    radio communications.


CLS 381/3
TXT FM final modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 where stereophonic signals are broadcast by
    means of a radio carrier wave which is only frequency modulated.

    (1)     Note.  There may also be an amplitude modulated subcarrier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 42+, 93, 110+, and 205+ for
    frequency modulated carrier wave communications in general.


CLS 381/4
TXT AM subcarrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 3 where a carrier wave is frequency modulated
    by a subcarrier which has been amplitude modulated by a signal.


CLS 381/5
TXT Four discrete channels:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 where the independent sound signals are
    four in number.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19+,    for quadrasonic sound systems in general.


CLS 381/6
TXT Having transmitter:

    Subject matter under subclass 5 including means for generating and
    modulating a carrier wave by a stereophonic signal and usually including
    the coupling of the modulated carrier wave to the transmission medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 39- 129 for radio transmitters in
    general.


CLS 381/7
TXT Switch-type detector or modulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 having a detector or modulator which
    extracts information from or adds information to an input waveform only at
    instants determined by a selector pulse.


CLS 381/8
TXT Two diodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 in which the detector or demodulator is
    limited to containing, two diodes.


CLS 381/9
TXT Four or more diodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 in which the detector or demodulator
    contains at least four diodes.


CLS 381/10
TXT Channel separation control:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 where there is control over the electrical
    or acoustical difference between the independent sound signals.


CLS 381/11
TXT Automatic switchover between mono and stereo modes:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 where a receiver is changed from a monaural
    receiver to a stereophonic receiver in response to the presence of a
    stereophonic signal at its input.


CLS 381/12
TXT Stereo indicators (e.g., stereo presence):
    Subject matter under subclass 4 having an indicator which gives an
    indication in response to the presence of a stereophonic signal.


CLS 381/13
TXT Antinoise:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 having provision for the reduction or
    elimination of an unwanted signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 50.1+, 63+, 222+, 283+, and 296+ for
    noise elimination in radio communications in general.


CLS 381/14
TXT Having transmitter:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 including means for generating and
    modulating a carrier wave by a stereophonic signal and usually including
    the coupling of the modulated carrier wave to the transmission medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 39- 129 for radio transmitters in
    general.


CLS 381/15
TXT AM or both AM and angle final modulation: Subject matter under subclass 2
    having a carrier wave which is amplitude modulated and which may also be
    angle modulated.


CLS 381/16
TXT Having transmitter:

    Subject matter under subclass 15 including means for generating and
    modulating a carrier wave by a stereophonic signal and usually including
    the coupling of the modulated carrier wave to the transmission medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 39- 129 for radio transmitter in
    general.


CLS 381/17
TXT Pseudo stereophonic:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 having a device or arrangement which
    transforms single channel audio signals into a plurality of channels of
    audio information to create a sense of depth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63+,    for reverberators, which are often used to create a stereophonic
    effect.


CLS 381/18
TXT Pseudo quadrasonic:

    Subject matter under subclass 17 where the plurality of channels are four
    in number.


CLS 381/19
TXT Quadrasonic:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 in which four independent sound signals are
    to be reproduced.


CLS 381/20
TXT Matrix:

    Subject matter under subclass 19 where the four independent sound signals
    are either (1) combined or coded to give one or more complex signals or (2)
    one or more complex signals are combined or decoded to recover the four
    independent sound signals.


CLS 381/21
TXT 4-2-4:

    Subject matter under subclass 20 where four quadrasonic signals are
    multiplexed into two more complex signals, then expanded back into four
    signals.


CLS 381/22
TXT Variable decoder:

    Subject matter under subclass 21 where the two more complex signals are
    combined in variable ratios in order to recover the four independent sound
    signals.


CLS 381/23
TXT With encoder:

    Subject matter under subclass 21 where the four independent sound signals
    are combined or coded to give two complex signals.


CLS 381/23.1
TXT Hearing aid:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 having a small ambient sound reproducing
    system wherein two or mote output transducers transmit independent sound
    signals directly into the ear or skull for use by a hearing impaired
    individual to increase the sound level received by the ear (i.e., listening
    assistance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68+,    and the search notes therein for hearing aids, in general.


CLS 381/24
TXT Speaker arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including transducers for reproducing the
    sound signals, and the spatial relationship of the transducers to their
    surroundings.


CLS 381/25
TXT Earphone:

    Subject matter under subclass 24 where the transducers are intended to be
    placed in or over the ear.


CLS 381/26
TXT Stereo sound pickup device (microphone):
    Subject matter under subclass 1 including a single transducer system for
    converting sound waves into two or more independent sound signals.


CLS 381/27
TXT Center channel:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 where a third sound signal is derived from
    combination of two independent sound signals.


CLS 381/28
TXT Amplifier:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including a device to increase the
    amplitude of the independent sound signals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, appropriate subclasses for an amplifier not having a
    specific source of input signals or a specific load.


CLS 381/54
TXT HELIUM SPEECH:

    Subject matter under the class definition where an output speech signal is
    of differing apparent predominant frequency but of the same duration as the
    input speech signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29+,    for bandwidth compression or expansion of a speech signal.


CLS 381/55
TXT AUDIO TRANSDUCER PROTECTION CIRCUITRY:

    Subject matter under the class definition where there is an audio
    transducer and circuitry to protect the transducer from damage due to
    abnormal operating conditions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111+,   for systems having specific audio transducers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    circuitry to protect other systems and devices in general from damage due
    to abnormal operating conditions.


CLS 381/56
TXT MONITORING OF SOUND:

    Subject matter under the class definition having a qualitative (yes-no)
    indication dependent upon a parameter of sound waves, e.g., loudness,
    quality, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58+,    for monitoring the operation of audio devices.

    77+,    for systems having a microphone at a location remote from a
    listening location (i.e., one-way intercoms).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 570+ for measuring and testing
    sound waves where a quantative (numerical) indication is given, especially
    645+ for measuring an acoustic parameter.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 135+ for acoustic wave receiver circuitry.


CLS 381/57
TXT Amplification control responsive to ambient sound:

    Subject matter under subclass 56 where the ambient sound level, at a place
    where sound is being reproduced, is evaluated and the result used to
    control the volume of the reproduced sound.


CLS 381/58
TXT MONITORING/MEASURING OF AUDIO DEVICES:

    Subject matter under the class definition having an indicator, measuring
    device, or eavesdropping means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56+,    for monitoring of sound waves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+ for condition
    responsive alarms.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclasses
    20.1+ for testing transmission facilities.


CLS 381/59
TXT Loudspeaker operation:

    Subject matter under subclass 58 where an operating parameter of a sound
    reproducing transducer is measured or indicated.


CLS 381/60
TXT Testing of hearing aids:

    Subject matter under subclass 58 in which at least part of a hearing aid is
    tested.

    (1)     Note.  A hearing aid is a small audio reproducing system for the
    hard of hearing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68+,    for hearing aids.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 570+ for measuring vibration
    including sound waves.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, for electrical testing or
    measuring in general.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 241+ for  multiplex testing.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 67.1+ for modulated carrier system
    testing: subclasses 115+ for transmitter testing; and subclasses 226.1+ for
    receiver testing.


CLS 381/61
TXT SOUND EFFECTS:

    Subject matter under the class definition where the audio signal is
    selectively distorted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 174+ for
    signal modification in a recording system.


CLS 381/62
TXT Tremolo or vibrato effects:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 having means to produce a rapid variation
    in amplitude or pitch of a signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     for means to introduce echos into a signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, subclass 1.25 for producing vibrato in an electronic musical
    instrument.

    181,    Acoustics, subclass 143 for a moving sound producer or deflector
    which can produce tremolo effects.


CLS 381/63
TXT Reverberators:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 having a device for producing echos in the
    audio signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, subclass 1.24 for reverberation production in electronic
    musical instruments, and digest 26 for musical reverberation.

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 123+ for echo system.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 138-164 for delay
    lines.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 7 for
    recording for momentary delay to produce echos.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 60 for using a
    recording system to delay a signal.


CLS 381/64
TXT Mechanical (e.g., reverberation chamber):

    Subject matter under subclass 63 where the echos are produced by other than
    electrical means.


CLS 381/65
TXT Helical spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 64 where the echos are produced by reflecting
    a compressional sound wave along a helical spring.


CLS 381/66
TXT DEREVEBERATORS:

    Subject matter under the class definition for removing echos from a sound
    signal.


CLS 381/67
TXT STETHOSCOPES, ELECTRICAL:

    Subject matter under the class definition forming an instrument used to
    convey sounds to the ear of a user.

    (1)     Note.  If the instrument is particularly adapted for use on or in a
    living body, classification is in Class 128, Surgery, but if the instrument
    can be used generally (e.g., to detect leaks or the internal sounds of
    machinery) classification is here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclass 131 for mechanical stethoscopes.

    600,    Surgery, subclass 528 for specific structure, adapted to be placed
    on or in a living body, for detecting sounds emanating from the heart.


CLS 381/68
TXT HEARING AIDS, ELECTRICAL:

    Subject matter under the class definition having a small ambient sound
    reproducing system wherein the output transducer transmits directly into
    the ear or skull for use by the hard of hearing to increase the sound level
    received by the ear (i.e., listening assistance).

    (1)     Note.  Hearing aids which directly stimulate the body electrically
    or which are permanently attached (i.e., surgically) to the body are
    classified in Class 600 Surgery.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass provides for hearing aids within the scope of
    its definition in combination with spectacle structure such as temples. See
    Class 351, Optics: Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclasses
    41+ for spectacles and eyeglasses, and subclasses 111+ for spectacle
    temples.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for testing of hearing aids.

    74,     for headphone circuits.

    75,     for megaphones.

    183,    for a headphone, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 585 for ear or hearing testing, and
    subclasses 645+ for measuring acoustic parameters.

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 126+ for mechanical hearing aids.

    330,    Amplifiers, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 65 and
    250+ for amplifiers involving structural details or elements, and
    transistor amplifiers.

    600,    Surgery, subclass 25 for an implanted hearing aid.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses
    55+ for devices promoting hearing function, including electrical
    stimulation.

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, subclass 10 for artificial ears having electrical
    hearing aid as a subcombination.


CLS 381/68.1
TXT Directional:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 where the response of an input transducer
    (i.e., microphone to the ambient sound varies significantly with the
    direction of incidence of the sound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155,    for a directional microphone, per se.


CLS 381/68.2
TXT Frequency control:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 including a circuit to control the
    amplitude of the hearing aid as a function of the frequency.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are tone control, filtering or modulating or
    carrier waves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS;

    98+,    for frequency control for an audio system.


CLS 381/68.3
TXT Bone conduction:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 in which sound is conducted to the inner
    ear through the cranial bones.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151,    for a bone conduction audio transducer, per se.


CLS 381/68.4
TXT Gain control:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 for barying the amount of amplification of
    the output signal.

    (1)     Note.  The amount of amplification may be adjusted either manually
    or in response to a sound parameter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104+,   for amplitude or volume control of an audio system.


CLS 381/68.5
TXT Spectacle:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 in combination with an eyeglass frame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclasses
    41+ for spectacle and eyeglasses, and subclasses 111+ for spectacle temples.


CLS 381/68.6
TXT Ear insert:

    Subject matter under subclass 69 which fits entirely within and is
    completely supported by the user's ear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    187,    for a sound reproducer inserted in the ear.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members) Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, subclass 10 for an artificial ear having an
    electrical hearing aid as a subcombination.


CLS 381/68.7
TXT Hook over ear:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 including support structure which engages
    the exterior of the user's ear.


CLS 381/69
TXT Specified casing or housing:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 including a specific container for the
    hearing aid components.


CLS 381/69.1
TXT Having vacuum tube amplifier:

    Subject matter under subclass 69 including an amplifier which uses one or
    more electron tubes.


CLS 381/69.2
TXT Having battery:

    Subject matter under subclass 69 including at least one battery used as a
    power source.


CLS 381/70
TXT ARTIFICIAL LARYNX, ELECTRICAL:

    Subject matter under the class definition for replacing or supplementing
    the larynx and involving electrical actuation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, subclass 375 for imitation trumpets, jew's harps, and reed
    horns of variable pitch.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 137+ for horns, whistles and
    compressional wave generators.

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 207.14+ for tubes to be inserted into the
    trachea or larynx.

    181,    Acoustics, pertinent subclasses for sound amplifying and
    transmitting means and methods.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 297+ for a toy having means to
    emit sound imitating a voice.

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclass 64 for an illusion caused
    by sound imitation or effect.

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, subclasses 24+ for electrically actuated
    artificial body members other than a larynx and subclass 9 for
    nonelectrical artificial larynxes.

    704,    Data Processing:  Speech Signal Processing, Linguistics, Language
    Translation, and Audio Compression/Decompression, subclasses 258+ for
    speech signal synthesis and subclass 271 for speech signal processing
    applied to a handicap aid.


CLS 381/71.1
TXT ACOUSTICAL NOISE OR SOUND CANCELLATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition, not elsewhere classifiable,
    comprising a noise cancellation system where audible noise is at least
    partially eliminated by generating and acoustically emitting an
    out-of-phase replica of an offending sound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73.1,   for sound or noise masking.

    94.1+,  for suppression of the effects of unwanted signals on desired
    signals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, subclass 119 for noise
    elimination in fans, turbines, jet engines, etc.


CLS 381/71.11
TXT Adaptive filter topology:

    Subject matter under subclass 71.8 having the functional interconnections
    between two or more transfer function models which make up an overall
    circuit or computational arrangement designed to generate a counterwave.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71.13,  for the generation of the out-of-phase replica using analog
    circuitry or non-adaptive filter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses
    724.19+ for adaptive digital filter structures, per se.


CLS 381/71.12
TXT Algorithm or formula (e.g., LMS, Filtered-X, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 71.8 having a specific computational sequence
    or a mathematical formula used in computation of a counterwave.


CLS 381/71.13
TXT Analog or nonadaptive:

    Subject matter under subclass 71.8 in which the out-of-phase replica is
    generated using either analog circuitry or an electrical circuit having a
    fixed transfer function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71.11,  for the generation of a counterwave using adaptive filter topology.


CLS 381/71.14
TXT Tonal noise or particular frequency or band:

    Subject matter under subclass 71.8 in which the noise cancellation system
    is particularly designed to either eliminate noise having a high degree of
    underlying periodicity or process noise at a particular frequency or within
    a limited or particular frequency band.


CLS 381/71.2
TXT Acoustic, nonairborne vibration sensing or counterwave emission:

    Subject matter under subclass 71.1 which senses vibration from or which
    imparts a cancelling wave directly to a solid or liquid medium or structure.

    (1)     Note. In order to be properly classifiable here, the primary object
    should be attenuation of acoustic sounds.  In most cases, this will mean
    that a sensor such as a microphone will be needed to detect sound
    propagated through air, such as the residual sound after the counterwave
    source's output has been acoustically summed with the original noise.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 167.1 + for means
    compensating for an earth-transmitted force, i.e., earthquake.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 136+ for resilient shock or vibration
    absorbers.  See especially subclasses 140.14 and 140.15 for subject matter
    including electronic or magnetic control, or subclass 140.11 for subject
    matter having an energy absorbing feature.


CLS 381/71.3
TXT From appliance:

    Subject matter under subclass 71.1 wherein the noise cancellation system
    cancels noise emanating from a device such as an air conditioner,
    refrigerator, vacuum cleaner, etc.


CLS 381/71.4
TXT Within cabin or compartment of vehicle:

    Subject matter under subclass 71.1 wherein the noise cancellation system
    cancels noise within a humanly occupied space of an aircraft, automobile,
    etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86,     for electrical audio systems combined with vehicles.


CLS 381/71.5
TXT Within duct:

    Subject matter under subclass 71.1 wherein the noise cancellation system
    cancels noise propagating in a tube, canal, pipe, or similar conduit,
    including automobile inlet and exhaust pipes.


CLS 381/71.6
TXT Adjacent ear:

    Subject matter under subclass 71.1 wherein the noise cancellation system is
    associated with a structure in a manner designed to cancel noise in the
    immediate vicinity of a person's ears.

    (1)     Note. Structures included in this subclass are headrests, hearing
    protectors, etc. Hearing protectors based on active noise cancellation are
    classified herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for hearing protector without noise cancellation.


CLS 381/71.7
TXT Particular transducer or enclosure structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 71.1 specifying details of an
    electro-acoustic energy converter or housing for use in an active noise
    cancellation system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88+,    for enclosure or housing.

    150+,   for electro-acoustic audio transducer.


CLS 381/71.8
TXT Counterwave generation control path:

    Subject matter under subclass 71.1 having either a feedback or feedforward
    circuit or a sequence of computations to generate the out-of-phase replica
    of the offending noise.


CLS 381/71.9
TXT Non-acoustically derived reference signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 71.8 in which a transducer used to obtain a
    signal for processing detects a form of energy other than sound vibration.

    (1)     Note.  Examples are spark timing, crankshaft position, manifold
    pressure of an engine, etc.


CLS 381/72
TXT HEARING PROTECTORS, ELECTRICAL:

    Subject matter under the class definition which provides a barrier to the
    transmission of at least some sounds to the ear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68+,    for hearing aids, electrical.


CLS 381/73.1
TXT SOUND OR NOISE MASKING:

    Subject matter under the class definition which utilizes sound to reduce
    the distractive influences of unwanted sound or other audible noise.

    (1)     Note.  The unwanted sound may include intelligence bearing sound
    (e.g., conversation).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclass 1 for pain reducing or relaxation inducing sound.

    380,    Cryptography, subclasses 6+ for an electrical audio signal masked
    for concealment by another signal.


CLS 381/74
TXT HEADPHONE CIRCUITS:

    Subject matter under the class definition having means to perform a desired
    electrical or electronic function in conjunction with a device held against
    the ear having a diaphragm which vibrates according to current variations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for electrical hearing aids.


CLS 381/75
TXT MEGAPHONES:

    Subject matter under the class definition for amplifying the human voice
    and which is capable of being carried.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for headphone circuits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 177+ for sound intensifying horns.


CLS 381/76
TXT LECTERNS:

    Subject matter under the class definition having an enclosure in the form
    of a reading desk.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from here are lecterns which have no electric audio
    signal processing circuitry.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, appropriate subclasses for lecterns,
    per se.

    362,    Illumination, appropriate subclasses of light sources for use with
    lecterns.


CLS 381/77
TXT ONE-WAY AUDIO SIGNAL PROGRAM DISTRIBUTION:

    Subject matter under the class definition for delivering the output of an
    audio signal source to a remote location, or to a plurality of
    electric-signal-to-sound transducers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.26+ for stock quotation
    systems.

    348,    Television, subclasses 6+ for wired television broadcasting and
    distribution system.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 486+ for multiplex program
    distribution systems.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 3.1+ for radio program distribution
    systems.


CLS 381/78
TXT Drive-in:

    Subject matter under subclass 77 for providing one-way communication
    between a central location and one or more stations accessible to occupants
    of automobiles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87+,    for audio systems having nonelectrical features such as mountings,
    housings etc.


CLS 381/79
TXT Near field:

    Subject matter under subclass 77 which is a near field or limited range
    system (i.e., field strength 1/d where d = distance from the transmitter to
    the receiver) where signal transfer from transmitter to receiver is
    inductive or capacitive rather wired.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 41 for near field modulated carrier
    wave systems.


CLS 381/80
TXT Multiple channel:

    Subject matter under subclass 77 having more than one audio signal path.


CLS 381/81
TXT With switching:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 where there is the making, breaking or
    changing connections between audio signal paths.


CLS 381/82
TXT Public address system:

    Subject matter under subclass 77 having an input transducer to convert
    sound into an electrical signal and an output transducer converting the
    electrical signal into sound so that the sound can be heard over a large
    area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for megaphones.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 1+ for public
    address systems combined with recording reproducers.


CLS 381/83
TXT Feedback suppression:

    Subject matter under subclass 82 having provision for preventing audio
    coupling from loudspeaker to microphone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93,     for feedback suppression in audio systems in general.


CLS 381/84
TXT Spare amplifier substitution:

    Subject matter under subclass 82 having provision for substituting one
    amplifier for another.


CLS 381/85
TXT Speaker or channel switching:

    Subject matter under subclass 82 having provision for changing audio signal
    paths or audio reproducers.


CLS 381/86
TXT VEHICLE:

    Subject matter under the class definition with a vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  Classified here are electrical audio systems combined with
    vehicles, other communication devices with vehicles are classified in Class
    340, Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 425.5+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 425.5+, note especially
    subclasses 460 and 474 for vehicle with horn, siren, or other electrical
    communication means not elsewhere provided for.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 345+ for a vehicle mounted radio
    receiver.


CLS 381/87
TXT HAVING NONELECTRICAL FEATURE (E.G., MOUNTING):

    Subject matter under the class definition including a mechanical adjunct or
    device such as a mounting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     for drive-in systems.

    188,    for an audio transducer with a mounting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 148+ for a diaphragm combined with an
    enclosure.


CLS 381/88
TXT Having enclosure or housing:

    Subject matter under subclass 87 where the mechanical adjunct or device is
    a specific container for electrical components.

    (1)     Note.  Combinations of enclosures or housings and audio signal
    processing circuitry are classified here, housings, per se, are classified
    in Classes 220 and 312, electrical devices with housings are classified
    with the appropriate electrical devices (e.g., Class 330 for amplifiers
    with housings).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159,    for a loudspeakers with an enclosure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 148+ for diaphragm and enclosure.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 600+ for
    enclosures or housings for plural diverse electrical components.


CLS 381/89
TXT With loudspeakers driven in given phase relationship:

    Subject matter under subclass 88 where there are a plurality of
    loudspeakers in the specific container which are driven such as that their
    output sound has a particular phrase relationship.


CLS 381/90
TXT With loudspeaker (e.g., baffle, spatial orientation, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 88 where the specific container holds a
    loudspeaker.


CLS 381/91
TXT With microphone:

    Subject matter under subclass 88 where the specific container holds a
    microphone.


CLS 381/92
TXT DIRECTIVE CIRCUITS FOR MICROPHONES:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a circuit for imparting
    directional pickup characteristics to microphones.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155,    for a directional microphone, per se.


CLS 381/93
TXT FEEDBACK SUPPRESSION:

    Subject matter under the class definition for prevention or reduction of an
    output signal from being returned to an input.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83,     for feedback suppression in a public address system.

    95,     for a microphone system having feedback.

    96,     for a loudspeaker system having feedback.


CLS 381/94.1
TXT NOISE OR DISTORTION SUPPRESSION:

    Subject matter under the class definition with provisions for reducing the
    effects of an unwanted signal on a desired signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for antinoise means in broadcast or multiplex stereo systems.

    71.1+,  for acoustical noise or sound cancellation.

    73.1,   for audio masking.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 551+ for unwanted signal suppression.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses
    724.01+ for selection or rejection of signal components and subclass 825
    for filtering electrical signals by computation.


CLS 381/94.2
TXT Spectral adjustment:

    Subject matter under subclass 94.1 in which the unwanted signal is either
    at least partially removed by processing a selected frequency or frequency
    band, such as by subtracting the contents of a particular frequency band
    from the input signal, or is overcome by preemphasis of a particular
    frequency or band to enhance the signal to noise ratio.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83,     for feedback elimination in a public address system (this is
    frequently done by spectral subtraction using notch filters, for example).

    93,     for feedback elimination in an audio system under the class
    definition.

    94.7,   for noise suppression using a signal channel and noise channel.

    98+,    for control of frequency characteristics in an audio signal in
    general, such as for equalization.

    106,    for compression/expansion ("compansion") sytems, which achieve
    enhanced signal to noise ratio through compression.  Preemphasis is often
    found with compression.


CLS 381/94.3
TXT In multiple frequency bands:

    Subject matter under subclass 94.2 in which processing takes place in more
    than one spectral region, i.e., more than one frequency or frequency band
    is processed.


CLS 381/94.4
TXT Interpolation:

    Subject matter under subclass 94.1 in which a segment of a desired signal
    which contains noise is replaced with an estimate of what it would or
    should have been in the absence of noise, the estimate being based on the
    desired signal's values before or after, or before and after, the noise
    occurred.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 577 for
    interpolation/extrapolation for measuring, testing, or monitoring and
    subclass 723 for interpolation, per se.


CLS 381/94.5
TXT Soft switching, muting, or noise gating:

    Subject matter under subclass 94.1 designed to prevent a momentary, sudden
    fluctuation of voltage or current (a "pop") in a circuit as a result of a
    sudden change of an operating parameter in the circuit, such as the
    application of power; or to attenuate or cutoff on a broad-band basis the
    audio output of a circuit when the audio signal does not contain
    intelligence; or to switch off  the signal input to a system when the
    signal or noise level on the input is above a certain threshold (a
    condition which usually indicates that only noise is present).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94.8,   for peak limiting or pulsive noise compensation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 194.1+ for muting and subclasses
    218+ for squelch.


CLS 381/94.6
TXT Hum or ground loop:

    Subject matter under subclass 94.1 designed to eliminate frequency
    components generated as a result of AC power supply contamination, or
    compensate for noise transmission caused by currents flowing through an
    electrical conductor which connects two different circuit points, each of
    which is nominally at ground potential.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 149 for hum or noise or distortion bucking
    introduced into signal channel.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 298+ for noise or interference
    elimination in the receiver power supply.


CLS 381/94.7
TXT Using signal channel and noise channel:

    Subject matter under subclass 94.1 having separate inputs, each
    respectively containing primarily the desired and undesired signals, and
    which derives at least one "clean" output having the desired signal by
    utilizing both inputs, such as by subtracting one input from the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94.2,   for noise suppression using spectral adjustment.


CLS 381/94.8
TXT Peak limiting or pulsive noise compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 94.1 designed to restrict the amplitude of
    relatively short duration, high amplitude excursions of a desired signal to
    prevent distortion in a subsequent stage such as a modulator or amplifier,
    or compensate for the effects of sporadic or short duration undesired
    signals ("pulses").

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94.5,   for soft switching, muting, or noise gating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 310+ for limiting, clipping, or clamping lessens or
    eliminates an intermittent spuriously generated component from a signal.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 223+ for noise blanking.


CLS 381/94.9
TXT Feedforward circuitry for transducer compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 94.1 having circuitry designed to compensate
    for distortion which is generated by a transducer itself (such as a
    loudspeaker or microphone), without using feedback.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95,     for microphones with feedback.

    96,     for systems which compensate for loudspeaker distortion using
    feedback.


CLS 381/95
TXT MICROPHONE FEEDBACK:

    Subject matter under the class definition having a microphone and a circuit
    and also having provision for returning a fraction of an output signal of
    the circuit to an input of the circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93,     for feedback suppression in audio systems.

    96,     for a loudspeaker circuit with feedback.

    168+,   for a microphone, per se.


CLS 381/96
TXT LOUDSPEAKER FEEDBACK:

    The mechanical or electromechanical coupling of a portion of a sound wave
    output of a system under the class definition to a preceding part or input
    circuit of the system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93,     for feedback suppression in audio systems.

    95,     for microphones with feedback.

    150+,   for a loudspeaker, per se.


CLS 381/97
TXT INCLUDING PHASE CONTROL:

    Subject matter under the class definition with means to vary or maintain
    the phrase of an electrical signal relative to either another signal or a
    standard.


CLS 381/98
TXT INCLUDING FREQUENCY CONTROL:

    Subject matter under the class definition with means to vary or maintain
    the frequency response of the system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for vibrato effects.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 165-212 for
    filters, per se.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 255+, 266 and 268 for frequency
    response control in radio receivers.


CLS 381/99
TXT Having crossover filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 98 that separates a signal into two or more
    separate frequency bands.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 132+ for crossover
    networks, per se.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 175 for record
    players with frequency dependent signal separation.


CLS 381/100
TXT With active device:

    Subject matter under subclass 99 having an electrical or electronic element
    capable of controlling voltages or currents to produce gain or switching
    action in a circuit (e.g., transistor, vacuum tube, or saturable reactor).


CLS 381/101
TXT Automatic tone control:

    Subject matter under subclass 98 having a control used to alter
    automatically the frequency response of the system so that a listener can
    be provided the most pleasing sound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 28, and 167-212
    for tone control, per se.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 267 for tone control in a radio
    receiver.


CLS 381/102
TXT With amplitude control:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 including automatic tone control combined
    with means for adjusting or setting the signal level or for obtaining a
    substantially constant amplitude output signal for a range of variations of
    the amplitude of an input signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 233.1 for combined volume and tone
    control in a radio receiver.


CLS 381/103
TXT Having automatic equalizer circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 98 designed to compensate for an undesired
    amplitude-frequency and/or phrase-frequency characteristic of the system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 28 for equalizers,
    per se.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 133 for
    recording with equalization.


CLS 381/104
TXT INCLUDING AMPLITUDE OR VOLUME CONTROL:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means for adjusting or
    setting the signal level or for obtaining a substantially constant
    amplitude output signal for a range of variations of the amplitude of an
    input signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for amplitude control combined with automatic tone control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 306+ for miscellaneous amplitude control circuits.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 129+, 254 and 278+ for amplitude control for
    amplifiers.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 13+ and 68+ for variable resistors.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 232.1+ for amplitude control in a
    radio receiver.


CLS 381/105
TXT Remote:

    Subject matter under subclass 104 where the amplitude or volume is
    controlled by at least one or more devices from a remote point.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825+ for remote control in
    general.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 24+ for remote
    control of a recording or reproducing device.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 355 for remote amplitude or volume
    control in a radio receiver.


CLS 381/106
TXT With amplitude compression/expansion:

    Subject matter under subclass 104 having electrical audio signal system
    combined with provision for decreasing the amplitude range of an applied
    audio signal or for restoring the full amplitude range of an amplitude
    compressed audio signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 14 for amplitude
    compression/expansion, per se.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclass 202 for amplitude compression or
    expansion in a multiplex system.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 72 for amplitude compression/expansion
    in a radio system.

    704,    Data Processing:  Speech Signal Processing, Linguistics, Language
    Translation, and Audio Compression/Decompression, subclasses 500+ for audio
    signal bandwidth compression or expansion and subclasses 503+ for audio
    signal time compression or expansion.


CLS 381/107
TXT Automatic:

    Subject matter under subclass 104 having means to control the signal level
    adjusting means automatically as a function of some characteristic of an
    input signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for automatic gain control for decoding quadrasonic signals.


CLS 381/108
TXT Including feedback:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 further having provision for returning a
    fraction of an output signal back to an input.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83,     for feedback suppression in a public address system.

    93,     for feedback suppression in a audio systems in general.

    95,     for microphone circuits with feedback.

    96,     for loudspeaker circuits with feedback.


CLS 381/109
TXT With manual volume control:

    Subject matter under subclass 104 wherein volume is controlled in
    accordance with the position of a device which is adjusted by hand.


CLS 381/110
TXT VOICE CONTROLLED:

    Subject matter under the class definition which is controlled in some
    manner in response to a voice signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclass 198 for speech responsive selective control in general.


CLS 381/111
TXT CIRCUITRY COMBINED WITH SPECIFIC TYPE MICROPHONE OR LOUDSPEAKER:

    Subject matter under the class definition combined with a specific
    audio-to-electrical signal or electrical-to-audio transducer.

    (1)     Note.  Classified herein are microphone or loudspeakers combined
    with a diverse type of circuit (e.g., amplifier) or circuit element (e.g.,
    resistor) other than a lead or connector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    for audio signal systems having a generic microphone.

    150+,   for a specific type of microphone or loudspeaker.


CLS 381/112
TXT With carbon microphone:

    Subject matter under subclass 111 where the transducer is a carbon
    microphone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180+,   for a carbon microphone, per se.


CLS 381/113
TXT With electrostatic microphone:

    Subject matter under subclass 111 where the transducer is an electrostatic
    microphone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173,    for an electrostatic microphone, per se.


CLS 381/114
TXT With piezoelectric microphone:

    Subject matter under subclass 111 where the transducer is a piezoelectric
    microphone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173,    for a piezoelectric microphone, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 311+ for
    piezoelectric transducers.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 157+ for underwater type piezoelectric transducers.


CLS 381/115
TXT With magnetic microphone:

    Subject matter under subclass 111 where the transducer is a magnetic
    microphone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176,    for a magnetic microphones, per se.


CLS 381/116
TXT With electrostatic loudspeaker:

    Subject matter under subclass 111 where the transducer is an electrostatic
    loudspeaker.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191+,   for an electrostatic loudspeakers, per se.


CLS 381/117
TXT With magnetic loudspeaker:

    Subject matter under subclass 111 where the transducer is a magnetic
    loudspeaker.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    192+,   for a magnetic loudspeaker, per se.


CLS 381/118
TXT WITH MUSICAL INSTRUMENT:

    Subject matter under the class definition for amplifying or reproducing the
    sounds of musical instruments.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter classified herein merely receives,
    amplifies and/or reproduces signals representing musical sounds while the
    subject matter classified in Class 84 generates musical sounds.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, subclasses 1+ for musical instruments, especially subclasses
    1.01+ for electronic musical instruments.


CLS 381/119
TXT WITH MIXER:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a circuit having two or
    more inputs and a common output which combines separate input signals
    linearly in desired proportions to produce an output signal.


CLS 381/120
TXT WITH AMPLIFIER:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a device for producing
    an output of greater amplitude than is applied at an input.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, appropriate subclasses for amplifiers not having
    specific input signals or specific loads.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclass 395 for amplifiers combined
    with telephone systems.


CLS 381/121
TXT Feedback:

    Subject matter under subclass 120 where a fraction of an output signal is
    returned to an input.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71.1+,  for acoustical sound cancellation.

    83,     for public address systems with feedback suppression.

    93,     for feedback suppression for audio systems in general.

    95,     for microphone circuits with feedback.

    96,     for loudspeaker circuits with feedback.

    108,    for automatic amplitude control having feedback.


CLS 381/122
TXT HAVING MICROPHONE:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a generic microphone
    combined with an element having diverse function (e.g., a microphone and an
    amplifier).

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter under the class definition having a specific
    microphone combined with a diverse element is found in subclasses 111+.

    (2)     Note.  Microphones are also found in the subject matter of
    subclasses 26, 55-58, 64+, 67-69, 75-85, 91, and 95.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168+,   for a microphone, per se.


CLS 381/123
TXT SWITCHING:

    Subject matter under the class definition where there is the making,
    breaking or changing connections in an electrical circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7+,     for switch type stereo modulators or detectors.

    11,     for switching between mono and stereo modes.

    55,     for audio transducer protection circuitry.

    81,     for switching in multiple channel program distribution.

    85,     for speaker or channel switching in a public address system.

    110,    for voice controlled switching of audio systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, for switches, per se.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 112+
    for electrical transmission or interconnection switching systems.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 365+ for miscellaneous gating circuits including
    channel selection.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets for magnetic switches.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 825.01 for spare channel
    switching.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ for
    relay or solenoid circuits.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 357+ for multiplex switching
    circuit.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction And Fault Detection/Recovery, subclasses
    8.1+ for replacing a faulty apparatus with a spare.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 242+ for switching in
    telephone systems, and subclass 325 for telephone switches, per se.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 78+ for transmitter-receiver
    switching.


CLS 381/124
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition not hereinabove classified.


CLS 381/150
TXT ELECTRO-ACOUSTIC AUDIO TRANS-DUCER:

    Subject matter under the class definition having a structure or process for
    converting an information signal between audible sound vibrations and a
    corresponding time-varying electrical quantity.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are instruments such as microphones,
    speakers earphones, and housings or supports peculiar thereto.  However,
    combinations with circuitry, other than leads, terminals, or connectors,
    are not classified herein, but are classified in the preceding subclasses
    of this class (381).

    (2)     Note.  The audible sound vibrations are generally speech or music.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, appropriate subclasses for an attachment to a casing of
    an audio transducer.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 300+ for a
    piezoelectric transducer not limited to audio utility.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave System and Devices,
    subclasses 140+ for a nonaudio acoustical transducer.


CLS 381/151
TXT Body contact wave transfer (e.g., bone-conduction earphone, larynx
    microphone):

    Subject matter under subclass 150 wherein sound vibrations are obtained
    from or imparted to a portion of a human body in direct contact with a
    vibrating component of an electroacoustical transducer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68.3,   for similar subject matter used in a hearing aid.


CLS 381/152
TXT Driven diverse static structure (e.g., wall, sounding board):

    Subject matter under subclass 150 combined with a stationary structural
    element having a function independent of electricity-to-sound conversion
    and being driven to radiate sound waves by an audio transducer mounted
    thereon.

    (1)     Note.  Devices which vibrate walls to emit intelligible sound are
    classified herein.


CLS 381/153
TXT With acoustic wave modifying structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 150 having a passive element for changing a
    characteristic of audible sound vibrations produced or detected by an
    electroacoustic transducer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, appropriate subclasses for an acoustic wave modifying
    device, per se.


CLS 381/154
TXT Including sound conducting tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 153 including a tubular element through which
    sound is conducted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclass 22 for sound conducting tube structure.


CLS 381/155
TXT Directional:

    Subject matter under subclass 153 wherein a characteristic of emitted or
    received sound is varied externally of the transducer in accordance with
    the direction of the sound path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92,     for a directive microphone circuit.


CLS 381/156
TXT Sound intensifying of spreading element (e.g., horn):

    Subject matter under subclass 153 wherein the intensity of a sound wave is
    modified.

    (1)     Note.  The intensity is generally modified by an increase or
    decrease of cross-section are of the sound path.


CLS 381/157
TXT Mouthpiece:

    Subject matter under subclass 156 wherein the modifying element is designed
    for use close to the mouth of a person speaking into a microphone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclass 242 for a sound muffing type mouthpiece.


CLS 381/158
TXT Absorbing or attenuating element (e.g., baffle, obstruction, damping):

    Subject matter under subclass 153 wherein the sound intensity is lessened.


CLS 381/159
TXT Enclosure or resonant cavity:

    Subject matter under subclass 153 wherein the acoustic structure includes
    either (a) a chamber having a particular resonant characteristic, or (b) a
    housing surrounding the electroacoustical transducer.

    (1)     Note.  Any housing or enclosure will modify acoustic energy
    incident upon or radiated from a transducer and this type of combination
    will be classified herein unless the enclosure is specifically recited as
    transparent to or not affecting, acoustic waves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 148+ for a combined diaphragm and enclosure;
    subclasses 198+ for an acoustic housing or enclosures, per se.


CLS 381/160
TXT Reflecting element:

    Subject matter under subclass 153 having an element which reflects the
    sound waves.


CLS 381/161
TXT With mechanical amplifier arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 150 having a vibrating solid element
    intermediate a conversion between mechanically increases the amplitude of
    the vibrations of the solid.


CLS 381/162
TXT Detail of mechanical vibration coupling to transducer (e.g., tuned
    vibrating element):

    Subject matter under subclass 150 including a detail of a mechanical
    element which transfers sound vibrations to or from the audio transducer.


CLS 381/163
TXT Having bi-directional transducer:

    Subject matter under subclass 150 having a single device which converts
    sound waves to electrical variations and electrical variations to sound
    waves.

    (1)     Note.  For classification herein, conversion in both directions
    must be specifically included.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclass 420 for a loudspeaking type
    telephone set with a single bi-directional transducer; subclass 433 for a
    handset having a single bi-directional transducer.


CLS 381/164
TXT Thermal response to, or generation of, sound vibration:

    Subject matter under subclass 150 where sound waves either modify or are
    emitted by a temperature effect on an element material, or area of the
    device.


CLS 381/165
TXT By modifying fluid flow:

    Subject matter under subclass 150 having a source of gas flow which flow
    interacts with an electrical circuit to either (a) vary the current therein
    in accordance with incident sound waves, or (b) produce sound waves
    corresponding to an applied audio information signal in the electric
    circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166,    for similar subject matter having a fluid electrical conducting
    element absent fluid flow.


CLS 381/166
TXT Having fluid as a conducting element:

    Subject matter under subclass 150 wherein an electrically conductive
    element of the transducer is a fluid.

    (1)     Note.  The fluid conducting element may be either the portion
    converting the signal between electrical variations and sound waves, or an
    electrode connecting the circuit to another transducer.

    (2)     Note.  The fluid may include an ionized path between electrodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165,    for a fluid flow modifying transducer.


CLS 381/167
TXT Ionized gap, spark, or flame:

    Subject matter under subclass 166 which ionizes the air or other gas or
    causes sparks across a gap.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are also plasma, glow discharge, or flame.


CLS 381/168
TXT Microphone:

    Subject matter under subclass 150 for converting an audible sound wave into
    a corresponding time variation of an electrical signal.

    (1)     Note.  This and its indented subclasses specify sound to audio
    signal conversion.  Generic audio transducers and signal to sound
    conversion (i.e., reproduction) are classified in subclasses 183 and the
    following subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 649+ for a vibration or sound
    testing sensor.


CLS 381/169
TXT With mounting or support feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 168 wherein a microphone is combined with
    positioning, placement, or holding structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188,    for similar subject matter not limited to a microphone.

    205,    for a transducer mounting or support structure, per se.


CLS 381/170
TXT Compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 168 having a plurality of independent
    microphone devices in a single casing.


CLS 381/171
TXT Micromagnetic:

    Subject matter under subclass 168 in which the incident sound vibrates a
    diaphragm so as to vary both the resistance of a microphone contact and
    magnetic induction means which reinforce each other to produce a combined
    affect on an electric current.


CLS 381/172
TXT Light modifying:

    Subject matter under subclass 168 for converting an incident sound wave to
    an audio signal by means of a light modifying element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 618+ for a transmitter for light
    wave communication.


CLS 381/173
TXT Piezoelectric or ferroelectric:

    Subject matter under subclass 168 having an element made of either (a) a
    material which produces a voltage when subjected to a mechanical stress or
    (b) a material having a spontaneous electrical polarization.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    190     and 191, for reproducer or generic transducer of the piezoelectric
    or ferroelectric type, respectively.


CLS 381/174
TXT Capacitive:

    Subject matter under subclass 168 having an electrostatic capacitance
    element which varies in accordance with sound waves incident thereon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 283.1+ for
    pressure responsive electrostatic capacitors, per se.


CLS 381/175
TXT Semiconductor junction microphone:

    Subject matter under subclass 168 having an element with conductivity
    intermediate that of a conductor and an insulator and having one region
    having predominantly electron conductivity (n-type) and another region
    having predominantly hole (p-type) conductivity forming a potential barrier
    layer therebetween.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 53+, 108, 225+, and 414+ for nonelectrical input devices,
    including subclasses 415+ for pressure sensors.


CLS 381/176
TXT Conductive diaphragm (e.g., reed, ribbon):

    Subject matter under subclass 168 having an electrically conductive element
    as a portion of the diaphragm.


CLS 381/177
TXT Dynamic (e.g., magnetic):

    Subject matter under subclass 168 including a diaphragm to which a current
    conducting element is attached and which is positioned in a fixed magnetic
    field.


CLS 381/178
TXT Vibrating electrical contact:

    Subject matter under subclass 168 in which two elements have an area of
    intermittent electrical contact caused by oscillatory motion of an element
    in accordance with incident sound waves.


CLS 381/179
TXT Resistive:

    Subject matter under subclass 168 having an element the resistance of which
    is varied by incident sound waves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, appropriate subclasses for a condition
    responsive variable resistor.


CLS 381/180
TXT Granular or carbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 180 having a sound responsive resistive
    element composed of either elemental carbon, or a mass of comminuted
    material.


CLS 381/181
TXT Differential:

    Subject matter under subclass 180 having two sound responsive resistance
    elements one positioned on either side of a central diaphragm.


CLS 381/182
TXT Plural or compound reproducers:

    Subject matter under subclass 180 having a plurality of sound producing
    transducer having two or more elements performing the same or similar
    functions.


CLS 381/183
TXT Headphone:

    Subject matter under subclass 182 including a head engaging element which
    holds the transducer against the ears of a user.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    187,    for a headphone or earphone, in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclass 430 for similar subject matter
    combined with a microphone for two-way conversation.


CLS 381/184
TXT Different types of diaphragms:

    Subject matter under subclass 182 having two or more flexible membranes
    which differ in size, shape or composition.


CLS 381/185
TXT Having common voice coil:

    Subject matter under subclass 182 where two or more flexible membranes are
    driven by a common helix of conductive material carrying an electrical
    information signal.


CLS 381/186
TXT Plural diaphragms:

    Subject matter under subclass 182 including a speaker having plural
    flexible membranes, for radiating sound waves.


CLS 381/187
TXT Having body supported structure (e.g., earphone):

    Subject matter under subclass 150 including an element engaging either the
    body or clothing of the user and which supports and positions the
    transducer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183,    for a plural reproducer headphone.


CLS 381/188
TXT With mounting or support feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 150 combined with a positioning, placement,
    or holding structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169,    for similar subject matter combined with a comrophone.

    205,    for transducer mounting or support structure, per se.


CLS 381/189
TXT Having protective or shielding feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 150 having structure for shielding a
    transducer from adverse environmental conditions or preventing undesired
    effects caused by an external magnetic field.

    (1)     Note.  Adverse conditions include moisture and impact.


CLS 381/190
TXT Electrostrictive, magnetostrictive, or piezoelectric:

    Subject matter  under subclass 150 including an element which expands or
    contracts in accordance with an applied electric or magnetic field, or
    which produces a mechanical stress tending to produce deflection,
    expansion, or contraction when subjected to an applied electrical voltage.

    (1)     Note.  The term deflection covers both twisting and bending.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173,    for a piezoelectric microphone.


CLS 381/191
TXT Having electrostatic element (e.g., electret, vibrating plate):

    Subject matter under subclass 150 including either a capacitor with a
    vibratable plate, or an element which has a spontaneous electrical field,
    one of which is caused to vibrate by an audio signal or incident sound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174,    for a capacitive microphone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 400
    for electrets.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 516 for miscellaneous vibration sensitive circuits.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 283.1+ for
    a pressure responsive capacitor, per se.


CLS 381/192
TXT Electromagnetic (e.g., dynamic):

    Subject matter under subclass 150 wherein an information varied electrical
    signal produces a similarly varying magnetic field which causes motion is a
    sound radiating device to produce a corresponding acoustical wave.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177,    for a dynamic microphone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 10+ for a
    dynamoelectric motor.


CLS 381/193
TXT Having feature of edge-supported diaphragm:

    Subject matter under subclass 192 having structure for supporting a sound
    radiating flexible membrane along its periphery.


CLS 381/194
TXT Movable voice coil:

    Subject matter under subclass 192 having a spiral shaped conductor attached
    to a flexible membrane and positioned in an air gap in a magnetic circuit,
    so as to drive the membrane in accordance with an applied current.


CLS 381/195
TXT Multiple (e.g., double):

    Subject matter under subclass 194 having more than one voice coil.


CLS 381/196
TXT Pattern:

    Subject matter under subclass 194 where the voice coil comprise a
    particular configuration of conductive material applied directly to the
    diaphragm.


CLS 381/197
TXT Centering:

    Subject matter under subclass 194 for adjustment of voice coil position in
    the air gap so that the coil and air gap axes coincide.


CLS 381/198
TXT Including adjustment mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 192 which varies a physical parameter of an
    electromagnetic transducer.


CLS 381/199
TXT Magnetic circuit or core structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 192 including either a path of magnetic flux
    from north pole to south pole of a magnet or electromagnet through a
    magnetic material, or a detail of a magnetizable core element.


CLS 381/200
TXT Armature:

    Subject matter under subclass 199 wherein the magnetic circuit includes a
    movable element.


CLS 381/201
TXT Magnet configuration (e.g., tubular or
    u-shaped):

    Subject matter under subclass 199 including a magnet having a particular
    shape.


CLS 381/202
TXT Specified diaphragm shape or structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 192 including a flexible membrane with a
    specified shape or made of a specified material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 167+ or 173+ for critically defined diaphragm
    structure, or diaphragm shape, per se, respectively.


CLS 381/203
TXT Flat:

    Subject matter under subclass 202 where the diaphragm has a substantially
    planar surface.


CLS 381/204
TXT Conical:

    Subject matter under subclass 202 where the diaphragm has a configuration
    of at least a portion of a regular solid joining the circumference of a
    circle in a plane with a point along its axis of symmetry outside the plane.

    (1)     Note.  The term "at least a portion" is intended to encompass both
    conical and frustro-conical configurations.


CLS 381/205
TXT Electro-acoustical transducer mounting or support:

    Subject matter under subclass 150 including structure for positioning,
    placement, or holding a transducer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169,    for similar subject matter combined with a microphone.

    188,    for similar subject matter in combination with a transducer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclass 446 for a telephone receiver
    support from a telephone terminal.

    FOREIGN ART COLLECTIONS

    The definitions for FOR 100-FOR 122 below correspond to the definitions of
    the abolished subclasses under Class 381 from which these collections were
    formed.  See the Foreign Art Collection schedule for specific
    correspondences.  [Note:  The titles and definitions for indented art
    collections include all the details of the one(s) that are hierarchically
    superior.]


CLS 381/FOR100
TXT AUDIO BANDWIDTH COMPRESSION OR EXPANSION:

    Foreign art collection where there is either an expansion or reduction of
    the bandwidth required for transmission of a sound signal using analog
    techniques or elements.


CLS 381/FOR101
TXT With content reduction encoding:

    Foreign art collection where redundant information is discarded and
    replaced by a code indicating what has been discarded.


CLS 381/FOR102
TXT Delay line:

    Foreign art collection having means to cause a time delay of a sound signal.


CLS 381/FOR103
TXT TIME COMPRESSION OR EXPANSION (E.G., RUN LENGTH CODING):

    Foreign art collection where there is either an expansion or reduction of
    the time required for transmission of a sound signal using analog
    techniques or elements.


CLS 381/FOR104
TXT With content reduction encoding:

    Foreign art collection where redundant information is discarded and
    replaced by a code indicating what has been discarded.


CLS 381/FOR105
TXT SPEECH ANALYSIS AND SYNTHESIS COMBINED:

    Foreign art collection where signals representing the component parts of an
    input speech wave are generated and then the signals representing the
    component parts are used to produce a synthetic speech wave using analog
    techniques or elements.


CLS 381/FOR106
TXT Using frequency:

    Foreign art collection where the signals represent the value of a function
    of a component frequency.


CLS 381/FOR107
TXT Pitch:

    Foreign art collection where the signal represents the amplitude or
    frequency of the apparent predominant frequency of the speech wave.


CLS 381/FOR108
TXT Formants:

    Foreign art collection where the signals represent the amplitude or
    frequency values of any of several resonance bands which determine the
    phonetic quality of a vowel sound.


CLS 381/FOR109
TXT Using time:

    Foreign art collection where the signals represent the value of a function
    of time.


CLS 381/FOR110
TXT SPEECH ANALYSIS (E.G., PHONEME RECOGNITION):

    Foreign art collection where an input speech signal is separated into its
    component parts using analog techniques or elements.


CLS 381/FOR111
TXT Voice recognition:

    Foreign art collection which discriminates between different voices.


CLS 381/FOR112
TXT Word recognition:

    Foreign art collection which discriminates between different sounds or
    words.


CLS 381/FOR113
TXT Phonetic typewriters:

    Foreign art collection where the output is typescript.


CLS 381/FOR114
TXT Frequency domain:

    Foreign art collection where the component parts are functions of frequency.


CLS 381/FOR115
TXT Detection of speech in noise:

    Foreign art collection where an output is generated in response to the
    presence of a voice or speech signal input which may be obscured by noise.


CLS 381/FOR116
TXT Signal to noise ratio enhancement:

    Foreign art collection where there is noise present along with the speech
    signal and the amplitude of the speech wave is increased relative to the
    amplitude of the noise.


CLS 381/FOR117
TXT Speech parameter display:

    Foreign art collection where there is an output signal perceptible by the
    eye which represents one of the component parts of the input speech signal.


CLS 381/FOR118
TXT Speech pitch fundamental frequency:

    Foreign art collection where the component part is the apparent predominant
    frequency of the input speech wave.


CLS 381/FOR119
TXT Speech formant frequencies:

    Foreign art collection where the components parts are any of several
    resonance bands which determine the phonetic quality of a vowel sound.


CLS 381/FOR120
TXT SPEECH SYNTHESIS:

    Foreign art collection where the component parts of a speech signal are
    combined to produce a synthetic speech wave using analog techniques or
    elements.


CLS 381/FOR121
TXT Speech from printed matter:

    Foreign art collection where the synthetic speech wave is generated
    according to a written or printed text.


CLS 381/FOR122
TXT Vocal tract model:

    Foreign art collection having an analog of a human vocal tract.

    FOREIGN ART COLLECTIONS

    The definitions for FOR 123-FOR 124 below correspond to the definitions of
    the abolished subclasses under Class 381 from which these collections were
    formed. See the Foreign Art Collection schedule for specific
    correspondences. [Note: The titles and definitions for indented art
    collections include all the details of the one(s) that are hierarchically
    superior.]


CLS 381/FOR123
TXT ACOUSTICAL NOISE OR SOUND CANCELLATION

    Foreign art collections including subject matter where audible noise is at
    least partially eliminated by generating an out-of-phase replica of the
    offending sound.


CLS 381/FOR124
TXT NOISE SUPPRESSION

    Foreign art collections including subject matter with provision for
    reducing the effects of unwanted signals upon desired signals.


CLS 382/
TTL IMAGE ANALYSIS

CLS 382/
TXT

    CLASS DEFINITION

    I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF THE CLASS
            SUBJECT MATTER

            This is the generic class for apparatus and corresponding methods
    for the automated analysis of an image or recognition of a pattern*.
    Included herein are systems that transform an image for the purpose of (a)
    enhancing its visual quality prior to recognition, (b) locating and
    registering the image relative to a sensor or stored prototype, or reducing
    the amount of image data by discarding irrelevant data, and (c) measuring
    significant characteristics of the image.



    II.     SCOPE OF THE CLASS

    (1)     Note.  Automated document pattern* analysis or verification, which
    includes detection of alphanumerics, is classified in this class.

    (2)     Note.  To be classified herein, no actual recognition or
    identification need be performed.  It is sufficient that substantial
    digital image processing, such as a coding, enhancement, or transformation
    process, be performed on the image data for classification herein.

    (3)     Note.  Pattern* analysis or verification limited to the intrinsic
    properties of a document is classified in Class 356, subclass 71 if visible
    light is used; otherwise, search Class 250, subclass 271 for similar
    subject matter which includes infrared or ultraviolet light.  Documents
    that are analyzed or verified by information content, such as pattern*s or
    alphanumeric characters, are classified in this class (382). Document
    verification limited to a photocell system is classified in Class 250,
    subclass 556.

    (4)     Note. Alphanumeric characters and other pattern*s are to be
    distinguished from coded indicia. Coded indicia are designed specifically
    to facilitate reading by machine and are not intended to be read by humans
    (e.g., the Universal Product Code on grocery items). Reading or sensing of
    coded indicia which does not include the recognition of any alphanumeric
    character or pattern* is classified in Class 235, subclasses 435+. However,
    reading or sensing of pattern*s or alphanumeric characters in combination
    with coded indicia is classified in this class (382).  Example: Reading a
    credit card that contains a printed name plus a magnetic code is classified
    in Class 235 if only the magnetic code is read. Otherwise, if both the
    printed name and the magnetic code are read, classification is herein.

    (5)     Note. The images analyzed and processed herein are images that are
    representative of a "real" scene (such as images obtained by a camera,
    scanner, or image detector), including obtained images of people, places,
    and things, wherein the image represents the actual scene. The presentation
    or generation of images that are (a) computer generated or otherwise
    artificial, or (b) a combination of computer-generated images and real
    images is properly classified in Class 395,  subclasses 101+ for computer
    graphics and control of data presentation with creation or manipulation of
    graphic objects or text performed by a computer or processor, and
    subclasses 326+ for operator interfaces.

    (6)     Note. The specific processing of television pictures and signals,
    where a television system is an integral part of the system, is properly
    classified in Class 348. When images generated by a television camera are
    processed, and the television system is not an integral part of the overall
    system, and the system is either disclosed or claimed in an environment
    with substantial digital image processing or in a pattern* recognition*
    environment, proper classification is herein.

    (7)     Note. For systems drected to the processing of a displayed image,
    where the processing is directed to the altering of the display image or of
    the display system itself, proper classification is in Class 345.

    (8)     Note. The testing or measuring of distances, areas, volumes,
    thicknesses, or defects in objects is excluded from this class. However,
    where the measurements of these parameters are either disclosed or claimed
    in an environment with substantial digital image processing or in a
    pattern* recognition* environment, classification is in this class.

    (9)     Note. Image analysis* having specific and significantly claimed
    utility in art environments external to this class is classified in the
    appropriate external classes unless it is specifically excluded therefrom.
    For example:

            For radar, Class 342, Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems
    and Devices (e.g., Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 104+, 115+, or 147+.

            For facsimile, Class 358, Facsimile, subclasses 400+.

            For color facsimile, Class 358, Facsimile, subclasses 500+.

            For coded record sensor, Class 235, Registers, subclasses 435+.

    (10)    Note. Purely optical systems for image processing are excluded from
    this class; instead, see Class 356 and Class 359.

    (11)    Note. Subcombinations specific to image analysis* or pattern*
    recognition are classified herein.

    III.    GLOSSARY

    IMAGE ANALYSIS*
    For the purpose of this class, image analysis* is defined as a systematic
    operation or series of operations performed on data representative of an
    observed image with the aim of measuring a characteristic of the image,
    detecting variations and structure in the image, or transforming the image
    in a way that facilitates its interpretation.

    IMAGING SYSTEM*
    For the purpose of this class, an imaging system is any means which
    acquires an image. For example, it includes video cameras, CCD arrays,
    scanners, etc.

    PATTERN*
    For the purpose of this class, a pattern* is any form in an image having
    discernable characteristics that provide a distinctive identity when
    contrasted with other forms.  For example, the character "A" has a
    distinctive identity when contrasted with all other letters of the alphabet.

    PATTERN* RECOGNITION*
    For the purpose of this class, pattern* recognition* is defined as any
    procedure for ascertaining differences, as well as similarities, between
    pattern*s under observation and partitioning the pattern*s into appropriate
    categories based on these perceived differences and similarities; or any
    procedure for correctly identifying a discrete pattern*, such as an
    alphanumeric character, as a member of a predefined pattern* category.

    PIXEL*
    The smallest distinguishable and resolvable area in an image.

    IV.     SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 488+ for mechanically determining
    speed and acceleration; subclass 865.4 for mechanical signature
    verification instruments.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 18+ for writing elements and detectors.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 509+ for
    sorting paper money, mail pieces, bottles, and other objects.

    235,    Registers, subclasses 435+ for coded record sensors; subclasses
    487+ for coded records.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 201.2+ for autofocus control of
    photocell circuits; subclass 223 for optical inspection of bottles using
    radiant energy; subclasses 455+ for tomography; subclasses 548, 559+, and
    571+ for web and sheet inspection using a photocell system; and  subclass
    556 for document verification that is limited to a photocell system.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.3+ for intelligence
    comparison and authorization or identification of personnel using
    communications system; subclasses 907+ and 933+ for specific vehicle
    detection and traffic control.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 112+ for visual display of
    images; subclass 126 for rotation of a displayed image; and subclasses 127+
    for control of the size of a displayed image.

    348,    Television, subclasses 62+ for aids for the blind; subclasses 86+
    for manufacturing where a television system is an integral part of the
    system; subclasses 125+ for flaw detection where a television system is an
    integral part of the system; subclasses 135+ for object and scene
    measurements where a television system is an integral part of the system;
    subclass 161 for object comparison where a television system is an integral
    part of the system; subclass 384 for bandwidth compression of television
    signals where a television system is an integral part of the system;
    subclasses 571+ for image processing specific to television where a
    television system is an integral part of the system.

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclasses
    200+ for optical measurements of the eye.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 3+ for range finding and
    stereoscopic optical measuring; subclasses 27+ for optically determining
    velocity; subclass 71 for document pattern* analysis or verification;
    subclasses 372+ for optical measuring of the physical properties of an
    object; subclasses 388+ for optical configuration comparison; subclasses
    429+ for inspection of webs and threads; subclasses 237+ for optical
    inspection for flaws and imperfections; subclasses 39+ for visible-light
    blood analyzing instruments.

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 500+ for natural color facsimile; and
    subclasses 400+ for facsimile systems.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communications) and Elements,
    subclasses 1+ for holographic systems; and subclasses 559+ for optical
    Fourier transforms, convolution, and correlation.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 131 for
    the use of plural processors in a computer system; subclasses 274.9, 276.6,
    and 972.4 for neural networks used in a computer system; subclasses 413.07+
    for computer applications in blood analysis; subclasses 413.13+ for
    computer applications in medical imaging; subclasses 468+ for use of
    computers in manufacturing; subclass 470 for computer controlled
    manufacturing of textiles;  subclass 551.02 for the evaluation of a work
    tool using a computer system; subclasses 556+ for computer determination of
    dimensions; subclasses 715.011+ for computer-implemented conversion of
    data; subclasses 724.011+ and 825 for computer-implemented filters;
    subclasses 725.01+, 819+, and 826+ for transforms (Fourier, correlation,
    convolution) implemented by computer; and FOR 514+ for foreign art
    collections of computer-based communication engineering which may include
    object detection or tracking.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    appropriate subclasses for extraction and processing of seismic samples and
    borehole samples.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 103 for storage
    of holographic images.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery,
    appropriate subclasses for digital data error in general.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclasses 10+ for blood cell counters.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 21+ for
    tomography; subclass 37 for mammography; and subclasses 62+ for imaging.

    380,    Cryptography, subclasses 9+ for encryption of data, including
    character data.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 2.09+ for
    speech or voice pattern* recognition**; subclasses 21+ for artificial
    intelligence applications of neural networks; subclasses 80+ for robot
    control; subclasses 119+ for three-dimensional presentation; subclass 130
    for determining and using texture in computer graphics and display; and
    subclasses 133+ for  transformation of computer-generated images.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 89+ for automatic focus control or
    rangefinding in a camera environment.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 224+ for the
    processing of textiles.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 112+ for reading aids for
    the handicapped.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 300+ for various diagnostic devices.

    705,    Data Processing: Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/price Determination, subclasses 401+  for a postage meter.

    707,    Data Processing - Database And File Management, Data Structures, or
    Document Processing, subclasses 500-542 for document processing performed
    by a computer for presentation.

    901,    Robots, appropriate subclasses for the details of a robot.

    902,    Electronic Funds Transfer, subclasses 3 through 7 and 25+ for
    identification of individuals, such as with biometrics and bank cards, in a
    funds transfer system.


CLS 382/100
TXT APPLICATIONS:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the image analysis* is
    disclosed as being designed for or utilized in a diverse art device,
    system, process, or environment.

    (1)     Note.  For classification herein, there must be significant claim
    recitation of an image analyzing system.  Where the claims recite
    significant structure of the external art environment, classification is in
    the appropriate external art class.

    (2)     Note.  In view of the subject matter included herein, the
    classification schedule for the diverse art or environment should be
    considered for proper search.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclass 922 for image analysis.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses for sorters operating on various items such as mail, paper
    currency, and bank checks.

    235,    Registers, subclasses 375+ for systems controlled by a coded
    record, and subclasses 435+ for coded record sensors.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, appropriate subclasses for systems
    which identify trains or indicate their positions.

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), appropriate subclasses for object detection and
    positioning using radar.

    348,    Television, subclasses 61+ for specific uses of television in image
    analysis*, where a television system is an integral part of the system.

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 426+ for image analysis* applied to the
    problem of data compression in facsimile systems; and subclasses 500+ for
    data processing and compression in color facsimile systems.

    380,    Cryptography, subclasses 9+ for encryption of data, including
    character data.


CLS 382/101
TXT Mail processing:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the image is sensed from
    materials, such as letters and packages, handled in a postal system.

    (1)     Note.  Included are locating of stamps and address blocks on a mail
    piece as well as codes on a mail piece that are outside of the address
    block and the reading thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 584 and
    900 for sorting of mail.

    705,    Data Processing: Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/price Determination, subclasses 401+ for postage meters.


CLS 382/102
TXT ZIP code:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein the image sensing is limited
    specifically to finding and reading a series of numbers that indicate the
    general location where the mail piece is to be sent (e.g., a ZIP code or
    postal code).


CLS 382/103
TXT Target tracking or detecting:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein an object is located, recognized,
    or followed (tracked) by an imaging system*.

    (1)     Note.  The object may be either stationary or moving with respect
    to the imaging system*. The types of objects include, but are not limited
    to, planes, military vehicles, stars, and similar pattern*s.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), appropriate subclasses for object detection and
    positioning using radar.

    348,    Television, subclasses 169+ for object tracking using television,
    where a television system is an integral part of the system.


CLS 382/104
TXT Vehicle or traffic control (e.g., auto, bus, or train):

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein a conveyance that is, or can be,
    manned is located, identified, or controlled by image analyzing techniques.

    (1)     Note.  Included are:  reading of tire pattern*s and codes; control
    of the vehicle by movements of the operator being detected by the imaging
    system*; and identification or recognition of the vehicle by an imaging
    system*.  The types of vehicles include automobiles, buses, and trains or
    rail cars.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 907+ and 933+ for specific
    vehicle detection and traffic control.

    348,    Television, subclass 113 for navigation control of conveyance using
    a television camera, where a television system is an integral part of the
    system.


CLS 382/105
TXT License plate:

    Subject matter under subclass 104 including image sensing for specifically
    finding and reading a series of alphanumerics from a plate on, or affixed
    to, a conveyance such as an automobile.


CLS 382/106
TXT Range or distance measuring:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the length or magnitude of a path
    from a sensor or imaging system* to an object is determined.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 3+ for optical measuring
    of distances and ranges.


CLS 382/107
TXT Motion or velocity measuring:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the amount of change in position
    or movement of an imaged object is determined.

    (1)     Note.  Included is determination of the speed or acceleration, or
    change in speed or acceleration, or change of the position of the imaged
    object.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 488+ for mechanically determining
    speed and acceleration.

    348,    Television, subclasses 154 and 155 for motion detection using a
    television camera, where a television system is an integral part of the
    system.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 27+ for optically
    determining velocity.


CLS 382/108
TXT Surface texture or roughness measuring:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the examined characteristics of
    an imaged object include distribution of color and intensity on a surface
    to give an appearance of texture, such as smooth, rough, shiny, or dull.

    (1)     Note.  Included is determining a representation of the physical
    structure of the surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 430 for determining and using
    texture in computer graphics and display.


CLS 382/109
TXT Seismic or geological sample measuring:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the analyzed image is a sample of
    earth or rock.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are core samples and samples from
    boreholes, as well as other geological samples. Features extracted from the
    sample include those that define the form, structure, color, and
    mineralogical composition of the sample.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 152.01+ for boreholes, and
    subclass 784 for measuring earth stresses.

    348,    Television, subclass 85 for use of television systems in borehole
    inspection.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 241 for borescopes and
    bore inspection.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    appropriate subclasses for extraction and processing of seismic samples and
    borehole samples.


CLS 382/110
TXT Animal, plant, or food inspection:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the examined or analyzed image is
    an animal, plant, or foodstuff.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are livestock, birds, fish, grain,
    fruit, nuts, plants, roots, and vegetables.


CLS 382/111
TXT Textiles or clothing:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the image analysis* is designed
    for, or used in, the inspection or production of textiles or apparel.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is the inspection or examination
    of leather, fabric, yarn, and various other types of cloth. Included also
    is analysis of pattern*s for cutting the textile material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 237+ and 429+ for
    optical inspection of cloth and similar material.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 470 for
    computer-controlled manufacturing of textiles.


CLS 382/112
TXT Document or print quality inspection (e.g., newspaper, photographs, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the accuracy or correctness of
    printed pattern*s on an object under inspection is determined or the
    inspection of the accuracy of reproduced pattern*s is determined.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are imaging system*s that inspect webs, such
    as newspaper, etc., for proper registration of the print thereon. Also
    included herein is  inspection of the condition of a document for soiling,
    staining, and similar damage to the document.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 559+ and 571+ for optical inspection of
    webs.


CLS 382/113
TXT Reading maps, graphs, drawings or schematics:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the imaging system* is
    specifically designed for reading or processing documents having graphical
    notations or illustrations.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are systems that extract data from these
    documents and identify features therein. Also included herein are systems
    that read the chemical notations that represent chemical structures.

    (2)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are systems that read only texts.


CLS 382/114
TXT Reading aids for the visually impaired:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein a particular representation of an
    image is generated that can be interpreted by a sense other than sight.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are systems that recognize letters, words,
    or documents and provide an output that does not rely primarily on sight
    for sensing, including audio or tactile reproduction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communication:  Electrical, subclass 825.19 for communication or
    control for the handicapped.

    348,    Television, subclasses 62+ for use of a television camera in
    systems for aids for the visually impaired, where a television system is an
    integral part of the system.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 112+ for reading aids for
    the handicapped.


CLS 382/115
TXT Personnel identification (e.g., biometrics):

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein an image or an image pattern* is
    analyzed for the purpose of recognizing an individual or verifying a
    person's identity.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are measurements of a finger, hand, or foot,
    as well as keystroke dynamics and ID cards.

    (2)     Note.  It is not necessary that the pattern* selected for analysis
    be a physical characteristic of the person to be identified. Any pattern*,
    such that its connection to a given individual permits confident
    identification of the individual, is sufficient.

    (3)     Note.  Included are both identification of a person (i.e.,
    comparing the input feature to a plurality of stored features to identify
    the person) and verification of the identity of a person (i.e., comparing
    the input feature to a specific feature, such as an ID card, to verify the
    person's identity).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 380+ for an identification card system
    wherein a code rather than a pattern* is identified; see also Class 382, II
    B (2) Note.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.3+ for intelligence
    comparison.

    704,    Data Processing:  Speech Signal Processing, Linguistics, Language
    Translation, and Audio Compression/Decompression, subclasses 246+ for voice
    recognition and subclass 273 for security systems including speech signal
    processing.

    902,    Electronic Funds Transfer, subclass 3 for biometrics, and
    subclasses 4+ and 25+ for use of bank cards and similar devices to identify
    individuals in an electronics funds transfer system.


CLS 382/116
TXT Using a combination of features (e.g., signature and fingerprint):

    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein more than one type of distinct
    identification process is used to recognize or verify a person's identity.

    (1)     Note.  Included are any combination of identification or
    recognition processes or systems specified elsewhere in this class, or
    specifically classified elsewhere, where the emphasis is on the use of a
    plurality of different recognition processes and not to the particulars of
    any individual process in the identification of a person.


CLS 382/117
TXT Using a characteristic of the eye:

    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein a person is identified by
    analyzing the person's eye or characteristics of the eye, including retinal
    pattern*s and iris pattern*s.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclasses
    200+ for optical measurements of the eye.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements,
    appropriate subclasses for viewing the eye using optical elements.


CLS 382/118
TXT Using a facial characteristic:

    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein a person is identified by
    analyzing the person's face or characteristics thereof, including distinct
    features of the face like eyes, nose, mouth, etc. and spacing of the
    features, as well as the face as a whole, including facial curves and
    thermal energy pattern*s of the face.

    (1)     Note.  The actual examination of the eye itself for personnel
    recognition is classified in this class, subclass 117.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclass 204
    for optical measurements of distances between pupils.


CLS 382/119
TXT Using a signature:

    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein a person is identified by
    analyzing the pattern* of a signed name.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this subclass, the focal point of the
    analysis must be the writer rather than the written message; that is, an
    attempt must be made to identify the writer rather than the mere alpha
    content of the signature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 865.4 for mechanical signature
    verification instruments.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 18+ for writing instruments and sensor
    tablets.

    348,    Television, subclass 161 for the remote verification of signatures
    using television and having an operator making a decision as to the
    authenticity of the signature, where a television system is an integral
    part of the system.


CLS 382/120
TXT Sensing pressure together with speed or acceleration:

    Subject matter under subclass 119 wherein the pressure characteristics of
    the writing sample are used in combination with either speed (velocity,
    that is, the first derivative of the values of the pen movement) or
    acceleration (change in velocity, that is, the second derivative of the
    values of the pen movement) characteristic to identify the person doing the
    writing.


CLS 382/121
TXT Sensing pressure only:

    Subject matter under subclass 119 wherein the characteristic of the writing
    sample used is only pressure or force exerted by the writer with a writing
    instrument during the writing of the sample.


CLS 382/122
TXT Sensing speed or acceleration only:

    Subject matter under subclass 119 wherein the characteristic of the writing
    sample used is only speed (velocity, that is, the first derivative of the
    values of the pen movement) or acceleration (change in velocity, that is,
    the second derivative of the values of the pen movement) exerted by the
    writer with a writing instrument during the writing of the sample.


CLS 382/123
TXT Sensing geometrical properties:

    Subject matter under subclass 119 wherein the characteristics of the
    writing sample used are static parameters of the writing.

    (1)     Note.  The static parameters include shapes, dimensions, and key
    points of the sample. Also included are detecting and using selected points
    of the sample with respect to a reference, such as a grid on which the
    sample is written.


CLS 382/124
TXT Using a fingerprint:

    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein a person is identified by
    analyzing the person's fingerprint.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    283,    Printed Matter, subclasses 68+ for fingerprint identifying.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 71 for visually comparing
    a fingerprint on a document with a standard fingerprint.


CLS 382/125
TXT Extracting minutia such as ridge endings and bifurcations:

    Subject matter under subclass 124 in which the finest details of a
    fingerprint are measured so as to identify a person.

    (1)     Note.  These details are commonly called ``minutiae" and consist of
    features such as ridge endings, bifurcations, tri-radii, and cores.


CLS 382/126
TXT With a guiding mechanism for positioning finger:

    Subject matter under subclass 124 wherein the system includes specific
    apparatus to place the finger to be inspected at a specific location with
    respect to an imaging system*.


CLS 382/127
TXT With a prism:

    Subject matter under subclass 124 wherein a prism is used as part of an
    imaging system* so as to acquire an image of the fingerprint for
    identification.

    (1)     Note.  Included are systems where the fingerprint is directly
    applied to the prism for pickup by the imaging system*.


CLS 382/128
TXT Biomedical applications:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the image analyzing system is
    designed specifically for or utilized in the areas of radiation imaging or
    microscopic cell analysis for the detection or diagnosis of disease, or any
    other image analyzing application substantially related to medicine,
    health, or other life sciences not provided for elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclass 922 for image analysis.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 455+ for tomography.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 39+ for visible-light
    blood analyzing instruments.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing, subclasses 413.13+ for
    computer applications in medical imaging.  See subclasses 413.07+ for
    computer applications in blood analysis.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclasses 10+ for blood cell counters.


CLS 382/129
TXT DNA or RNA pattern* reading:

    Subject matter under subclass 128 wherein cells or cell objects are
    analyzed for specific parameters related to DNA, RNA, or chromosome
    pattern*s.


CLS 382/130
TXT Producing difference image (e.g., angiography):

    Subject matter under subclass 128 wherein related images are processed
    (e.g., by subtraction) to produce difference images indicative of
    dissimilarities.


CLS 382/131
TXT Tomography (e.g., CAT scanner):

    Subject matter under subclass 128 wherein a means or process is provided
    for generating or processing digitized images of one or more slices of a
    nominally solid object, generated by computer tomography (i.e., CT),
    magnetic resonance (i.e., MR) or ultrasonically.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 455+ for tomography.


CLS 382/132
TXT X-ray film analysis (e.g., radiography):

    Subject matter under subclass 128 related to processing standard film or
    digitized X-ray images (e.g., bone fractures or mammography) such as for
    enhancement, segmentation, tone generation.


CLS 382/133
TXT Cell analysis, classification, or counting:

    Subject matter under subclass 128 related to optically viewing or digitally
    storing cell images for evaluating characteristics of cell images by
    chromaticity of features and feature counting.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is counting the number of a particular type
    of cell.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclasses 10+ for blood cell counters.


CLS 382/134
TXT Blood cells:

    Subject matter under subclass 133 wherein the cell analysis,
    classification, or counting is directed to red, white, or other types of
    blood cells.


CLS 382/135
TXT Reading paper currency:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 including means or process  that can
    sense images of paper money to verify authenticity, discriminate
    denominations, sense condition, or count documents, based on optical or
    magnetic scanning.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    194,    Check-Controlled Apparatus, subclass 4 for verifying the
    authenticity of money.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 534 for
    sorting paper money.

    235,    Registers, subclass 379 for banking systems controlled by a coded
    record.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for sensing using photocells.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 71 for visually comparing
    currency with a standard.

    902,    Electronic Funds Transfer, subclass 7 for the identification of
    counterfeit money in a funds transfer system.


CLS 382/136
TXT Reading coins:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein a means or process is provided
    for inspecting a coin so as to identify the coin or determine its
    numismatic condition or irregularities.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    902,    Electronic Funds Transfer, subclass 7 for  identification of
    counterfeit money in a funds transfer system.


CLS 382/137
TXT Reading bank checks (e.g., documents bearing E-13B type characters):

    Subject matter under subclass 100 including apparatus that can sense images
    of a bank check and extract measurements to verify authenticity or classify
    the sensed bank based on optical scanning.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are systems that read E-13B type characters
    from bank checks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    705,    Data Processing: Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/price Determination, subclass 45 for a financial transaction data
    processing system having paper bank check handling.


CLS 382/138
TXT Reading monetary amount:

    Subject matter under subclass 137 wherein user-entered data  corresponding
    to the cash value of the bank check are recognized.


CLS 382/139
TXT Reading MICR data:

    Subject matter under subclass 137 related to reading preprinted magnetic
    ink character or symbol data from the bank check.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is reading feature information (e.g., stroke
    length or thickness) which is scanned to generate a data signal.


CLS 382/140
TXT Including an optical imager or reader:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein the bank check is also optically
    scanned for viewing or storage or for  obtaining optical as well as
    magnetic characteristics useful in character recognition.


CLS 382/141
TXT Manufacturing or product inspection:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the image analysis* system has
    been designed for use in product manufacturing (e.g., integrated circuits
    or metal parts), including as part of automated inspection systems for
    recognizing defects or irregularities or as part of the system to control
    the manufacturing by image analysis*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 86+ and 125+ for manufacturing and flaw
    detection using a television camera, where a television system is an
    integral part of the system.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing, subclasses 468.01+ for
    use of computers in manufacturing.


CLS 382/142
TXT Bottle inspection:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein a rigid or semirigid container
    typically of glass or plastic having a comparatively narrow neck or mouth
    is inspected to determine the dimensions or a condition of the container.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also may include means or process for reading
    symbol data from a vessel or a label on a vessel.

    (2)     Note.  In this subclass inspection of can goods are excluded from
    this subclass. Can goods are appropriately classified in this class,
    subclass 44.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 223 for optical inspection of bottles
    using radiant energy.

    348,    Television, subclass 127 for bottle inspection using a television
    camera, where a television system is an integral part of the system.


CLS 382/143
TXT Inspection of packaged consumer goods:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein packaged products (e.g.,
    cigarettes) or labels on the goods are inspected for irregularities in
    appearance or other defects.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 509+ for
    sorting various consumer goods like cigarettes.


CLS 382/144
TXT Mask inspection (e.g., semiconductor photomask):

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein photomasks for semiconductor or
    printed circuit board fabrication are scanned for defects, holes, etc.


CLS 382/145
TXT Inspection of semiconductor device or printed circuit board:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein semiconductor wafers, chips, or
    similar materials or an insulating board on which circuit has been printed
    are inspected for defect detection, dimension checking, mark reading, or
    other conditions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 833 for assembling an electrical component
    to an insulating base utilizing an optical sighting means.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, particularly subclass
    16 for methods of treating electronically functioning semiconductor
    substrates including a step of measuring an optical characteristic of the
    process or of the electronic device.


CLS 382/146
TXT Measuring external leads:

    Subject matter under subclass 145 wherein external leads of a component are
    inspected, such as for coplanarity, shape,  or alignment prior to insertion
    into a printed circuit board or the like.


CLS 382/147
TXT Inspecting printed circuit boards:

    Subject matter under subclass 145 wherein a printed circuit or printed
    wiring board is inspected to locate defects in conductors, holes, the
    presence or absence of components, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclass 126 for circuit board inspection using a
    television camera, where a television system is an integral part of the
    system.


CLS 382/148
TXT At plural magnifications or resolution:

    Subject matter under subclass 145 wherein inspection is performed at more
    than one image magnification or resolution.


CLS 382/149
TXT Fault or defect detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 145 wherein a device is inspected for defects
    relating to dimensional tolerances, surface irregularities, etc.


CLS 382/150
TXT Faulty soldering:

    Subject matter under subclass 149 wherein means or process is provided for
    inspecting printed circuit board packages containing IC or other devices to
    identify defective or missing soldering or bonding points.


CLS 382/151
TXT Alignment, registration, or position determination:

    Subject matter under subclass 145 wherein semiconductor or other electrical
    component devices are inspected to determine position or alignment with
    respect to a process mask or during installation.


CLS 382/152
TXT Tool, workpiece, or mechanical component inspection:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 related to inspection for defects in
    manufactured objects including raw sheet metal, punched, stamped, or
    engraved machine parts or fasteners, or welding seams; also for inspection
    of wear of tool working surfaces (e.g., drilling or cutting tools).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 551.02
    for the evaluation of a work tool using a computer system.


CLS 382/153
TXT Robotics:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 related to autonomous vehicle navigation
    via scene analysis (i.e., object recognition and avoidance) or reference to
    known markings (e.g., guide lines on a warehouse floor) or to positioning
    articles by automated manufacturing systems using image analysis*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 113+ for navigation, where a television
    system is an integral part of the system.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 80+ for
    robot control.

    901,    Robotics, appropriate subclasses for robotics navigation or
    operation.


CLS 382/154
TXT 3-D or stereo imaging analysis:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein a three-dimensional scene is
    imaged using at least two cameras or camera locations for the generation of
    XYZ coordinate data of any object within the scene.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 418+ and 139 for
    three-dimensional or perspective data processing for display presentation.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 12+ for stereoscopic
    imaging.


CLS 382/155
TXT LEARNING SYSTEMS:

    Subject matter under the class definition where the image analysis* system
    is not rigidly structured but is adaptive and capable of changing during a
    test or training period and/or according to experience gained.


CLS 382/156
TXT Neural networks:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 in which the learning system comprises
    multiple layers of interconnected neurons.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclass 925 for neural network.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 21 for
    artificial intelligence applications of neural networks.


CLS 382/157
TXT Network learning techniques(e.g., back propagation):

    Subject matter under subclass 156 which includes details of how connections
    to individual neurons are weighted.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are systems that perform back propagation,
    Kohonen feature maps, adaptive resonance theory, and learning vector
    quantization 2(LVQ2).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 23 for neural
    network training algorithms.


CLS 382/158
TXT Network structures:

    Subject matter under subclass 156 which includes structural features of the
    network such as number of layers, number of neurons per layer, long and
    short term weights, and neuron construction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 24 through
    27 for neural network structures.


CLS 382/159
TXT Trainable classifiers or pattern* recognizers (e.g., adaline, perceptron):

    Subject matter under subclass 155 wherein the learning system compares
    unknown input pattern*s to reference pattern*s, the reference pattern*s
    being generated through a series of training steps.


CLS 382/160
TXT Generating a standard by statistical analysis:

    Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein means or process is provided for
    creating the reference pattern*s based on probability or frequency of
    occurrence of data within the training pattern*s.


CLS 382/161
TXT Alphanumerics:

    Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein the input pattern*s classified or
    recognized are alphanumeric symbols.


CLS 382/162
TXT COLOR IMAGE PROCESSING:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the image analysis* is
    specifically adapted for color images represented in various color spaces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 150+ for color format for
    display systems.

    348,    Television, subclasses 453+ for chrominance processing of an image.


CLS 382/163
TXT Drop-out color in image (i.e., color to be removed):

    Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein an object to be imaged includes
    colors which are either (a) detected and removed from the image of the
    object or (b) ignored or not detected by the imaging system*.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are documents with specific preprinted
    colors thereon.


CLS 382/164
TXT Image segmentation using color:

    Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein regions of the image are
    discriminated and separated based on color features, including locating
    areas on an original document that are encircled by a color marker.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 538 for selecting image portions in color
    facsimile.


CLS 382/165
TXT Pattern* recognition* or classification using color:

    Subject matter under subclass 162 which includes selecting and measuring
    color features to be used in recognizing a pattern*, structure, or object.


CLS 382/166
TXT Compression of color images:

    Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein the quantity of data used to
    represent a color image is reduced without loss of essential information.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are techniques such as encoding each color
    plane separately or converting from one color system to another in order to
    facilitate compression.


CLS 382/167
TXT Color correction:

    Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein signals representative of the
    colors in the image are modified to achieve improvements such as gamma
    correction, gradation correction, color balancing, contrast enhancement,
    and noise reduction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 518 through 523 for color correction in
    facsimile environment.


CLS 382/168
TXT HISTOGRAM PROCESSING:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a representation of the
    frequency of occurrence of image intensity or image features is used to
    derive properties of the image, to locate pattern*s within the image, or to
    otherwise process the image.


CLS 382/169
TXT With a gray level transformation (e.g., uniform density transformation):

    Subject matter under subclass 168 wherein the histogram is manipulated to
    achieve gray level transformations including histogram equalization,
    histogram normalization, contrast enhancement, and tone scale
    transformations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    for color correction of an image.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 147+ for gray level
    transformation for a displayed image.

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 455 through 461 for gray level processing in
    facsimile environment.


CLS 382/170
TXT With pattern* recognition* or classification:

    Subject matter under subclass 168 wherein the histograms of unknown input
    pattern*s are compared to histograms of known pattern*s in order to
    determine the identity of the unknown pattern*.


CLS 382/171
TXT For segmenting an image:

    Subject matter under subclass 168 where the histogram is processed in order
    to separate distinct regions in an image including distinguishing text and
    graphics areas and isolating lines and characters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164,    for image segmentation based on color features.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 453 for image portion selection in facsimile
    environment.


CLS 382/172
TXT For setting a threshold:

    Subject matter under subclass 168 where the histogram is analyzed in order
    to set one or multiple thresholds including methods based on locating
    histogram peaks and valleys.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 466 for variable thresholding techniques.


CLS 382/173
TXT IMAGE SEGMENTATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein operations are carried
    out on an image so that certain meaningful regions of pattern*s of
    interest, as defined by an observer, are distinguishable from other regions
    or pattern*s.


    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are segmenting operations
    performed on a single character for the purpose of decomposing the
    character into simpler features. This sort of character decomposition is
    classifiable herein below in the appropriate subclass indented under
    ``Feature Extraction" or ``Image Transformation".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164,    for segmentation based on color.

    171,    for segmentation based on histogram.


CLS 382/174
TXT Using projections (i.e., shadow or profile of characters):

    Subject matter under subclass 173 wherein a profile, indicating a sum or
    count of image elements along one dimension of the image, or a shadow,
    indicating the existence of an image element along one direction, is used
    to isolate identifiable regions.


CLS 382/175
TXT Separating document regions using preprinted guides or markings:

    Subject matter under subclass 173 wherein machine-printed marks (such as
    control marks, rectangular frames, boundary lines, or identification codes)
    or hand-printed marks on an original document are used to identify
    distinguishable regions of interest.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 453 for image portion selection in the
    facsimile environment.


CLS 382/176
TXT Distinguishing text from other regions:

    Subject matter under subclass 173 including means or process for
    identifying regions of text from other regions on a document.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are systems performing dilation/erosion or
    measuring gradients, variance, texture, and run-lengths.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 462 for text and image detection in the
    facsimile environment.


CLS 382/177
TXT Segmenting individual characters or words:

    Subject matter under subclass 173 wherein individual characters and words
    are isolated by determining the position of the characters or words, often
    including determining the coordinates of a bounding box circumscribing the
    character or word.


CLS 382/178
TXT Separating touching or overlapping characters:

    Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein separating characters that are
    run together includes processes such as dekerning, predicting separation
    lines, and comparing possible segmented objects to library objects.


CLS 382/179
TXT Segmenting hand-printed characters:

    Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein the characters to be isolated are
    handwritten.


CLS 382/180
TXT Region labelling (e.g., page description language):

    Subject matter under subclass 173 which includes assigning new or merging
    existing object labels to derive a set of connected components in the image
    or establishing relationships between regions on a page and storing the
    relationship.


CLS 382/181
TXT PATTERN* RECOGNITION*:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the image analyzing
    system possesses a further capability of identifying discrete pattern*s
    (such as alphanumeric characters) viewed within a scene or image; or of
    assigning pattern*s to appropriate categories as determined by resident
    categorization rules.


CLS 382/182
TXT Limited to specially coded, human-readable characters:

    Subject matter under subclass 181 wherein the pattern* recognition* unit is
    designed specifically to read a special alphabet of highly stylized letters
    or numbers that have incorporated into their form a machine-readable code.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include recognition of coded
    pattern*s such as the Universal Product Code (UPC), which is designed to be
    machine-readable only and which bears no resemblance to any human-readable
    alphabet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137,    for the E-13B font of machine- and human-readable characters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 435+ for the reading of a code which is not
    an alphanumeric.


CLS 382/183
TXT Characters formed entirely of parallel bars (e.g., CMC-7):

    Subject matter under subclass 182 wherein the machine-readable, human
    language symbols are constructed entirely of spaced-apart, substantially
    parallel bars, lines, or strokes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclass 462 for bar code readers which do not include
    reading an alphanumeric.


CLS 382/184
TXT With separate timing or alignment marks:

    Subject matter under subclass 182 further requiring that machine-readable
    indicia are used for alignment or timing purposes during scanning.


CLS 382/185
TXT Ideographic characters (e.g., Japanese or Chinese):

    Subject matter under subclass 181 wherein the pattern*s to be recognized
    comprise ideographic or pictographic symbols such as, for example, kanji
    (Chinese characters), kana (Japanese phonetic alphabets), or hangul (Korean
    characters).


CLS 382/186
TXT Unconstrained handwriting (e.g., cursive):

    Subject matter under subclass 181 wherein the pattern*s to be recognized
    comprise handwritten characters which do not conform to a particular form
    or style, such as continuous cursive script.


CLS 382/187
TXT On-line recognition of handwritten characters:

    Subject matter under subclass 181 further requiring that:  (a) a signal be
    produced as a character or symbol is being formed by hand, (b) the signal
    be suitable for processing by a pattern* recognition* device, and (c) the
    pattern* recognition* device receives the signal as the character or symbol
    is being formed.


CLS 382/188
TXT Writing on ordinary surface (i.e., electronics are in pen):

    Subject matter under subclass 187 wherein the recognition system utilizes a
    pen which includes means to output a signal indicative of the motion,
    direction of travel, pressure, speed, or acceleration, for example, of the
    pen.


CLS 382/189
TXT With a display:

    Subject matter under subclass 187 wherein the recognition unit includes a
    means for displaying inputted characters, results of recognition, or
    information relevant to processing.


CLS 382/190
TXT Feature extraction:

    Subject matter under subclass 181 which includes the process of selecting
    and measuring pieces of information, such as size, shape, texture, or
    position, to be used in recognizing a pattern*, structure, or object.

    (1)     Note.  For the purpose of this subclass, ``feature" is a synonym
    for characteristic measurement, component, descriptor, attribute, pattern*
    primitive, and any other term of art referring to the information derived
    from a pattern* and utilized in pattern* recognition*.

    (2)     Note.  The aim of feature extraction is to reduce the amount of raw
    pattern* data while finding a set of attributes for which the different
    classes of pattern*s separate.


CLS 382/191
TXT Multispectral features (e.g., frequency, phase):

    Subject matter under subclass 190 wherein the frequency or phase of an
    electromagnetic spectrum of the pattern* is used to recognize the pattern*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 454+ for optical coded card readers.


CLS 382/192
TXT Feature counting:

    Subject matter under subclass 190 in which characteristics are extracted
    from a pattern* by any of the following methods:  (a) Counting lines or
    points of intersection between thepattern* and either a generally
    two-dimensional raster or any array of scanning elements to derive count
    values that may be used either alone or in combination with other feature
    data to identify the pattern*; (b) computing, from a digital image of the
    pattern*, the relative frequency of occurrence of specific pattern*s in the
    image; or (c)  counting any other property of the pattern*s to be
    recognized in order to facilitate recognition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168+,   for determining and using a histogram to process or recognize a
    pattern* or image.


CLS 382/193
TXT Counting intersections of scanning lines with pattern*:

    Subject matter under subclass 192 wherein the distinguishing features
    counted are the points or locations at which scanning lines intersect
    portions of a pattern*.


CLS 382/194
TXT Counting individual pixel*s or pixel* pattern*s:

    Subject matter under subclass 192 wherein the distinguishing features
    counted are pixel*s; for example, the total number of pixel*s, the number
    of pixel*s in an area or window, pattern*s of pixel*, etc.


CLS 382/195
TXT Local or regional features:

    Subject matter under subclass 190 which includes analyzing the content of
    partial areas and elementary regions of a pattern* to produce what are, in
    essence, simpler subpattern*s or component parts of the original pattern*.


CLS 382/196
TXT Slice codes:

    Subject matter under subclass 195 wherein the pattern* to be recognized is
    intersected by one or more scan lines, and each scan line is individually
    encoded according to the particular configuration of pattern* and
    background elements sampled along the line.

    (1)     Note.  The scan lines may be uniform, as in a television raster, or
    they may be distributed over the pattern*.  The scan lines may be straight
    or curved.


CLS 382/197
TXT Directional codes and vectors (e.g., Freeman chains, compasslike codes):

    Subject matter under subclass 195 wherein the outline of a pattern* is
    encoded as a connected sequence or chain of feature signals representing
    headings or points of the compass.


CLS 382/198
TXT Extracted from alphanumeric characters:

    Subject matter under subclass 197 wherein the directional features or
    vectors are extracted from letters, numerals, or other human language
    symbols.


CLS 382/199
TXT Pattern* boundary and edge measurements:

    Subject matter under subclass 195 wherein local features are extracted
    specifically in areas of transition between the pattern* and the
    background, thereby producing so-called transition, edge, or boundary
    signals.

    (1)     Note.  To be classified herein, the measurements of boundaries and
    edges should be for the purpose of recognition of the pattern*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143,    for data compression using boundaries and edges.

    166+,   for the enhancement of boundaries and edges.


CLS 382/200
TXT Measurements made on alphanumeric characters:

    Subject matter under subclass 199 wherein the boundary or edge measurements
    are made on letters, numerals, or other human language symbols.


CLS 382/201
TXT Point features (e.g., spatial coordinate descriptors):

    Subject matter under subclass 195 including any of the following:  an image
    is sampled at only a few key locations to determine whether essential
    points in a pattern* are present at those locations; every measurement on
    the image results in a set of values representing spatial coordinates only;
    or each of the features sought within a pattern* can be defined by a
    specific point.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of such features are scan intercepts, line endings,
    and the intersection of lines.


CLS 382/202
TXT Linear stroke analysis (e.g., limited to straight lines):

    Subject matter under subclass 195 wherein the only local features ever
    measured for recognition purposes are the straight-line strokes in a
    pattern*.

    (1)     Note.  Horizontal, vertical, and oblique lines are some examples of
    straight-line strokes used in forming certain alphanumeric characters.


CLS 382/203
TXT Shape and form analysis:

    Subject matter under subclass 195 wherein the local features extracted for
    recognition processing include empirically derived character components
    (i.e., curves, bays, loops, convex arcs, etc.), geometrical configurations
    (i.e., rectangles, circles, triangles, parabolas, etc.), or fundamental
    space measurements (i.e., distance, area, circumference, ratio of perimeter
    to area, etc.).


CLS 382/204
TXT Topological properties (e.g., number of holes in a pattern*, connectivity,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 203 in which the features do not depend on
    measurements of dimensions or areas but are concerned instead with numbers
    or relationships of the different geometrical units (vertices, edges,
    faces, holes) involved.


CLS 382/205
TXT Local neighborhood operations (e.g., 3x3 kernel, window, or matrix
    operator):

    Subject matter under subclass 195 in which the image under analysis,
    together with any pattern* therein, is divided into a plurality of
    generally two-dimensional neighborhoods (also known as windows, sections,
    or regions), and a computation is executed on each neighborhood based on a
    local computational algorithm or on a set of mapping operators which
    transform various qualitative geometric properties of the image into
    quantitative values.

    (1)     Note.  To be classified herein, the neighborhood operation is for
    use in the recognition of a pattern*.  If a neighborhood operation is used
    for the transformation of an image or to perform a morphological operation,
    proper classification is in this class, subclass 209.


CLS 382/206
TXT Global features (e.g., measurements on image as a whole, such as area,
    projections, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 190 wherein the features extracted for
    recognition purposes are not the component parts of what is essentially a
    more complex pattern*, but rather are measurements characterizing the
    entire pattern* as a single entity.


CLS 382/207
TXT Waveform analysis:

    Subject matter under subclass 190 wherein the pattern* to be recognized is
    first converted into an equivalent electrical analog signal, and this
    signal is then analyzed according to waveform analysis techniques in order
    to obtain useful measurements for recognition processing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclass 134 for display of waveform
    images.


CLS 382/208
TXT With a tapped delay line:

    Subject matter under subclass 207 wherein the waveform analyzing system
    utilizes a delay line with tapped outputs for detecting the value of a
    waveform at various points along the waveform, thereby allowing sampling of
    the waveform at time-spaced intervals.


CLS 382/209
TXT Template matching (e.g., specific devices that determine the best match):

    Subject matter under subclass 181 wherein a pattern* is detected directly
    by looking for a match between the input image and a representation of the
    pattern*, traditionally a two-dimensional template or mask.


CLS 382/210
TXT Spatial filtering (e.g., holography):

    Subject matter under subclass 209 in which an optical image of each
    pattern* to be recognized is transformed into a light amplitude
    distribution that is proportional to the two-dimensional Fourier transform
    of the pattern* image, and a spatial filter located in the transform plane
    modifies selected Fourier components of the resulting Fourier spectrum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280,    for nonholographic Fourier transformations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclass 457 for holographic encoded records.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 550 for interference pattern* analysis
    limited to prephotocell systems.


CLS 382/211
TXT With electrically controlled light modulator or filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein the spatial filtering unit
    comprises an electrically, or electronically controllable light modulator
    to impart an amplitude or phase modulation onto light passing through or
    reflected by the modulator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    237+ for optical modulators.


CLS 382/212
TXT Nonholographic optical mask or transparency:

    Subject matter under subclass 209 wherein the optically formed image of
    each pattern* to be identified is compared to a set of optically stored
    prototypes, holograms not included.


CLS 382/213
TXT Using both positive and negative masks or transparencies:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 wherein pattern* matching is performed
    using optically stored prototypes which represent both positive and
    negative versions of the pattern*s to be recognized.


CLS 382/214
TXT With a display:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 wherein the recognition system includes
    means for displaying inputted pattern*s or for displaying the results of
    the matching.


CLS 382/215
TXT Using dynamic programming or elastic templates (e.g., warping):

    Subject matter under subclass 209 wherein an image signal is deformed to
    optimally match another image signal for comparison in time or space, such
    as a template being geometrically distorted to achieve geometric conformity
    with another template.


CLS 382/216
TXT At multiple image orientations or positions:

    Subject matter under subclass 209 wherein the matching of pattern*s is
    performed as the pattern*s are translated or rotated with respect to each
    other.

    (1)     Note.  Also included herein is a plurality of stored templates
    which are positioned or oriented with respect to one another and compared
    to the input to determine the correct match.


CLS 382/217
TXT Electronic template:

    Subject matter under subclass 209 wherein the recognition system, having
    converted an input pattern* into corresponding electrical signals, looks
    for a match between those signals and any one of a set of pattern*
    standards that are implemented electronically.


CLS 382/218
TXT Comparator:

    Subject matter under subclass 217 wherein standards, held in a storage unit
    of the pattern* recognition* system and representing known pattern*s, are
    compared to an as-yet-unrecognized input pattern* in a manner such that a
    signal is developed reflecting the similarity between the standards as
    stored and the input pattern*.

    (1)     Note.  Details of a specific comparison device must be claimed for
    original classification herein.


CLS 382/219
TXT Determining both similarities and differences:

    Subject matter under subclass 218 wherein both the matched and mismatched
    portions of pattern*s during a comparison, are utilized for recognition.


CLS 382/220
TXT Calculating weighted similarity or difference (e.g., don't-care areas):

    Subject matter under subclass 218 wherein certain areas or features that
    are more important than others are assigned a greater weight or value so
    that their correspondence with an input pattern* yields a larger output
    match value; this subclass l so includes using reference pattern*s that
    have areas that can be of any value and still produce a match, such as
    don't-care areas.


CLS 382/221
TXT Counting difference pixel*s:

    Subject matter under subclass 218 wherein pixel*s of a pattern* which do
    not match another pattern* are used to determine the degree of
    correspondence between the pattern*s.


CLS 382/222
TXT Using an Exclusive-OR gate:

    Subject matter under subclass 221 wherein means are included for performing
    an Exclusive OR function, to indicate similarities or differences between
    pattern*s.


CLS 382/223
TXT Resistor matrix:

    Subject matter under subclass 217 wherein various configurations of
    resistors form electronic masks representing pattern* standards or
    criteria, and the resistors combine elements or groups of elements of the
    pattern* to be identified and develop a match voltage or current signal.


CLS 382/224
TXT Classification:

    Subject matter under subclass 181 including a specific mechanism for
    assigning the pattern* to one of several possible pattern* classes
    (categories) based on measurements of intraclass similarity or interclass
    differences.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    707,    Data Processing - Database and File Management, Data Structures, or
    Document Processing, subclasses 1+ for a file indexing or retrieval system.


CLS 382/225
TXT Cluster analysis:

    Subject matter under subclass 224 wherein pattern*s are classified
    according to clusters or groups  of points or vectors indicative of
    features in a multidimensional feature space.

    (1)     Note.  While ``feature extraction" is a process of mapping image
    points into vectors in a multidimensional feature space, the process of
    detecting clusters of vectors in that space and separating the clusters is
    a task of ``classification".


CLS 382/226
TXT Sequential decision process (e.g., decision tree structure):

    Subject matter under subclass 224 wherein the classification of a pattern*
    proceeds sequentially through logical stages, each successive stage
    reducing typically the number of likely choices of pattern* classes,
    culminating finally in either a definite class assignment for the pattern*
    or a reject signal.


CLS 382/227
TXT With a multilevel classifier:

    Subject matter under subclass 226 wherein a different classification
    principle is utilized at each stage or level.

    (1)     Note.  For example, given a two-level classifier, the first level
    might employ a dictionary look-up method, and if no decision is reached at
    the first level (i.e., no match), the second level is then activated
    employing a nearest neighborhood method.


CLS 382/228
TXT Statistical decision process:

    Subject matter under subclass 224 in which statistics or the laws of
    probability play a significant role in determining the proper
    classification of a pattern*.


CLS 382/229
TXT Context analysis or word recognition (e.g., character string):

    Subject matter under subclass 181 wherein the recognition system examines
    the environment of a pattern* for clues as to the pattern*'s identity.

    (1)     Note.  For example, when the pattern* is an alphanumeric character,
    advantage is taken of the fact that a character is normally embedded in a
    word, and the word in a message.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    707,    Data Processing - Database and File Management, Data Structures, or
    Document Processing, subclasses 500 and 530+ for text searching.


CLS 382/230
TXT Trigrams or digrams:

    Subject matter under subclass 229 wherein the recognition system utilizes
    the characteristics of strings of two or three characters.


CLS 382/231
TXT Checking spelling for recognition:

    Subject matter under subclass 229 wherein recognition is verified based on
    whether a recognized character string is a valid character combination
    (i.e., it is a known or acceptable word).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    707,    Data Processing - Database and File Management, Data Structures, or
    Document Processing, subclass 533 for checking the spelling of a text.


CLS 382/232
TXT IMAGE COMPRESSION OR CODING:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which the quantity of data
    used to represent an image is reduced to minimize storage or transmission
    requirements.

    (1)     Note.  In subclasses 133 through 154, the employed systems
    conventionally include both compression and decompression means or
    processes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclass 202 for image data compression
    in display device.

    348,    Television, subclasses 384 through 440 for bandwidth compression
    systems for television, where the television is an integral part of the
    system.

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 426 through 433 for time or band width
    compression in facsimile.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 715.02
    for compression/decompression in digital computers.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclass 122 for bandwidth
    reduction or expansion in communications systems.


CLS 382/233
TXT Including details of decompression:

    Subject matter under subclass 232 which further includes apparatus,
    elements or operations for decompressing or decoding the compressed coded
    image data so as to restore the original image.

    (1)     Note.  The restored image may include minor differences or noise
    due to compression losses, but should be substantially similar to the
    original image prior to compression.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 715.02
    for decompression in digital computers.


CLS 382/234
TXT Parallel coding architecture:

    Subject matter under subclass 232 which includes two or more processing
    paths in parallel so as to compress or code a plurality of pixel*s or
    pixel* groups at substantially the same time.


CLS 382/235
TXT Substantial processing of image in compressed form:

    Subject matter under subclass 232 in which compressed image data is
    operated upon or manipulated  without being expanded or decompressed.

    (1)     Note.  Processing can include modifications to the appearance of
    the image in decompressed form or the determination of decompressed image
    characteristics, without actually decompressing the image.


CLS 382/236
TXT Interframe coding (e.g., difference or motion detection):

    Subject matter under subclass 232 including means or processes for encoding
    a plurality of image frames based on  at least one relationship between the
    data of two or more of the image frames.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are sequences of images in which
    each frame is coded separately, which are classified according to the type
    of coding performed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 400 through 421 for interframe coding of
    television signals, where the television is an integral part of the system.


CLS 382/237
TXT Gray level to binary coding:

    Subject matter under subclass 232 in which multi-bit pixel* values
    representing a plurality of image intensity values are compressed or coded
    into single bit pixel* values representing one of two image intensities.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclass 56 for multilevel to
    binary coding in digital converters.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclass 147 for generation of grey scale
    of an image.

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 429 and 455 through 460 for gray level to
    binary coding in facsimile.


CLS 382/238
TXT Predictive coding:

    Subject matter under subclass 232 wherein the value or characteristic of at
    least one future pixel* is predicted based upon the value or characteristic
    of at least one earlier or neighboring pixel* and the image data is coded
    using or based upon the prediction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 394 and 409 through 419 for predictive
    encoding of television signals, where the television is an integral part of
    the system.

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 261.2 and 430 for predictive coding in
    facsimile.


CLS 382/239
TXT Adaptive coding (i.e., changes based upon history, activity, busyness,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 232 including a means or process for
    selecting one of a plurality of coding routines, or modifying a single
    coding routine based upon the characteristics of either the original image
    or a coded image.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclass 51 for adaptive
    coding in digital converters.

    348,    Television, subclasses 404 through 407 and 419 for adaptive coding
    in television, where the television is an integral part of the system.

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 261.2 and 430 for adaptive coding in
    facsimile.


CLS 382/240
TXT Pyramid, hierarchy or tree structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 232 wherein the compression of the image data
    proceeds sequentially through logical stages, each successive stage
    reducing the amount of data required to represent the image.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226,    for sequential decision process in a tree structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclass 79 for tree
    structures in digital converters.


CLS 382/241
TXT Polygonal approximation:

    Subject matter under subclass 232 in which objects in an image are coded by
    approximating the shape of each object using polygons.

    (1)     Note.  Generation of shapes based on a polygon description for
    presentation is classified in Class 395, Information Processing System
    Organization, subclass 141.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclass 441 for generation of shapes
    based on a polygon description.


CLS 382/242
TXT Contour or chain coding (e.g., Bezier):

    Subject matter under subclass 232 in which lines or edges in an image are
    approximated using curves, line segments or using mathematical
    approximations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 17, 23 - 26, 441, and 467+ for
    computer generation or presentation of shapes or character fonts for
    display using similar approximations.


CLS 382/243
TXT Shape, icon or feature-based compression:

    Subject matter under subclass 232 including means or processes for
    assigning codes to shapes, symbols and other features detected in the image.


CLS 382/244
TXT Lossless compression:

    Subject matter under subclass 232 in which no image data is lost during
    compression and decompression.

    (1)     Note.  The decompressed image is identical to the original image
    prior to compression.


CLS 382/245
TXT Run length coding:

    Subject matter under subclass 244 in which the length of each run in the
    image (i.e., the number of adjacent pixel*s in a row having the same value)
    is used to encode the image.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclass 59 for  run length
    coding in digital converters.

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 261.1 for run length coding in facsimile.


CLS 382/246
TXT Huffman or variable length coding:

    Subject matter under subclass 244 in which image data are encoded using a
    variable length code, such that the most common image data have the
    shortest codes.

    (1)     Note.  This coding requires a statistical analysis of the frequency
    of occurrence for different image data.  This analysis can be part of the
    compression routine, or can be predetermined based upon the type of data
    likely to be compressed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 65 and  67 for
    Huffman coding and variable length coding, respectively, in digital
    converters.

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 427 for Huffman coding in facsimile.


CLS 382/247
TXT Arithmetic coding:

    Subject matter under subclass 244 in which the image data, consisting of a
    sequence of source symbols, is assigned a single arithmetic code word that
    defines an interval of real numbers between 0 and 1.


CLS 382/248
TXT Transform coding:

    Subject matter under subclass 232 in which the image data undergoes a
    mathematical transformation such as a Fourier or Laplace transform, and the
    transform coefficients are used to encode the image.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 395 and 403 through 408 for transform
    coding of television signals, where the television is an integral part of
    the system.


CLS 382/249
TXT Fractal:

    Subject matter under subclass 248 in which the transform coding of an image
    is achieved by translating the image into fractal equations, a fractal
    being a complex pattern* that recurs at various sizes in the image.

    (1)     Note.  For example, the image may be decomposed into overlapping
    blocks and, by use of a fractal formula, the shape, size and color of each
    block is transformed until it matches another block. The compressed image
    file will then contain just the numbers needed to specify the mathematical
    relations between the blocks.


CLS 382/250
TXT Discrete cosine or sine transform:

    Subject matter under subclass 248 in which image data is partitioned into
    blocks and transformed using the discrete cosine or the discrete sine
    transform.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 395 and 403 through 408 for transform coding
    of television signals, where the television is an integral part of the
    system.

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 432 through 433 for discrete cosine transform
    of images in a facsimile  environment.


CLS 382/251
TXT Quantization:

    Subject matter under subclass 232 in which a broad range of input image
    values are mapped to a limited number of output image values.

    (1)     Note.  The quantization of an image possesses two components:
    space and amplitude.  Spatial quantization, or sampling, divides the
    original image into grid cells (pels or pixel*s).  Amplitude or gray-level
    quantization then assigns to each grid cell an integer value corresponding
    to the brightness level within the cell.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not include amplitude or gray-level
    quantization in which a variable threshold, gain or slice level allows the
    quantization to adapt to varying input image values.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270     through 273, for adaptive quantization based on a variable
    threshold, gain or slice level.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclass 405 for adaptive quantization of television
    signals, where the television is an integral part of the system.


CLS 382/252
TXT Error diffusion or dispersion:

    Subject matter under subclass 251 in which any error in a given output
    image value that results from quantization is distributed among surrounding
    values so as to reduce the losses that accumulated errors would have on the
    output image as a whole.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 465 and 466 for error diffusion in facsimile.


CLS 382/253
TXT Vector quantization:

    Subject matter under subclass 251 in which a limited number of image values
    are stored in a codebook or dictionary and only those image values are
    outputted that are closest to the input image values.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 414, 417, 418, and 422 for vector
    quantization as applied to television signals.


CLS 382/254
TXT IMAGE ENHANCEMENT OR RESTORATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition directed to the improvement of
    pictorial or image information so that the result is more suitable than the
    original information for human or machine interpretation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 606 through 624 for the reduction of noise
    or undesired signals in television.

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 447, 454, 461, and 463 for various signal
    enhancing and noise reduction techniques used in facsimile systems.


CLS 382/255
TXT Focus measuring or adjustment (e.g., deblurring):

    Subject matter under subclass 254 wherein the focal length between an image
    sensor and an object being sensed is either measured or adjusted in order
    to correct distortions such as blurring.

    (1)     Note.  The measurement or adjustment may be done physically through
    the optical system or it may be done electronically through a series of
    image processing operations performed on the signals from the image sensor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 201.2 through 201.8 for automatic  focus
    control of photocell circuits and apparatus.

    348,    Television, subclasses 345 through 357 for focus control in
    television.

    355,    Photocopying, subclasses 55 through 63 for focus control in
    photocopiers.


    396,    Photography, subclasses 89+ for automatic camera focusing in
    photography.


CLS 382/256
TXT Object boundary expansion or contraction:

    Subject matter under subclass 254 in which pixel*s are added or deleted
    from the boundaries of objects in an image.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 144 and 470 for generation of
    an outline or an edge of a character for display presentation.


CLS 382/257
TXT Dilation or erosion (e.g., opening or closing):

    Subject matter under subclass 256 in which pixel*s are added or deleted by
    a specific morphological operation that passes a structuring element over
    the entire image.

    (1)     Note.  The structuring element may be implemented by a simple logic
    circuit such as an AND gate for erosion, which contracts the objects in an
    image, and an OR gate for dilation, which expands the objects.  The
    morphological operation known as ``opening", which consists simply of an
    erosion followed by a dilation, generally smooths the contours of the
    objects, breaks narrow isthmuses, and eliminates thin protrusions.  The
    morphological operation known as ``closing", which consists of a dilation
    followed by an erosion, tends to smooth sections of contours but, as
    opposed to opening, it generally fuses narrow breaks and long thin gulfs,
    eliminates small holes, and fills gaps in the contours.


CLS 382/258
TXT Line thinning or thickening:

    Subject matter under subclass 256 in which the thickness of any object in
    the image is either reduced or broadened to some uniform standard.

    (1)     Note.  Thinning algorithms that iteratively delete edge points of a
    region are generally subject to the constraints that deletion of these
    points (a) does not remove end points, (b) does not break connectedness,
    and (c) does not cause excessive erosion of the region.


CLS 382/259
TXT Skeletonizing:

    Subject matter under subclass 258 wherein the objects which, for example,
    may be the strokes or lines forming an alpha-numeric character, are reduced
    to a one pixel* width while their connectedness is maintained.


CLS 382/260
TXT Image filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 254 directed to any electrical apparatus or
    image processing operations that enhance images by suppressing or
    minimizing certain spatial frequencies.

    (1)     Note.  Optical filters are not included in this subclass. For such
    excluded subject matter see class 359, Optics:  Systems and Elements,
    subclasses 885 through 892.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210,    for holographic spatial filters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 165 through 212
    for time or frequency domain filters.

    359,    Optics:  Systems and Elements, subclasses 885-892 for optical
    filters.  (see (1) Note, above).

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses
    724.011+ through 724.2 for digital filters.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 213, 286, 307, and 339 for various
    electrical filters used in telecommunications.


CLS 382/261
TXT Adaptive filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 260 wherein parameters of the filter change
    in accordance with the input image data.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclass 610 for adaptive noise filters used in
    television.


CLS 382/262
TXT Median filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 260 wherein a gray level of each pixel* in an
    image is replaced by the median of the gray levels in a neighborhood of
    that pixel*.

    (1)     Note.  The median filter is often used as an alternative to
    neighborhood averaging filters which tend to blur the image while smoothing
    it. The median filter, on the other hand, preserves edge sharpness during
    smoothing.


CLS 382/263
TXT Highpass filter (i.e., for sharpening or enhancing details):

    Subject matter under subclass 260 wherein low-frequency components of the
    image are attenuated or eliminated.

    (1)     Note.  Generally, highpass filtering reduces overall contrast and
    average intensity as it sharpens edges and other sharp details.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of highpass filters are the Laplacian, Sobel,
    Roberts and Prewitt operators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 606 and 625 through 631 for edge sharpening
    in television.


CLS 382/264
TXT Lowpass filter (i.e., for blurring or smoothing):

    Subject matter under subclass 260 wherein high-frequency components of the
    image are attenuated or eliminated.

    (1)     Note.  Generally, lowpass filtering blurs edges as it removes small
    details from the image, reduces noise and bridges small gaps in lines or
    curves.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a lowpass filter is the Gaussian filter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclass 597 for the generation of soft edges in
    television signals.


CLS 382/265
TXT Recursive filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 260 in which the filter is repeatedly applied
    to the image until a specified condition is met.


CLS 382/266
TXT Edge or contour enhancement:

    Subject matter under subclass 254 wherein processing is done to visually
    enhance the outlines of individual characters or objects of interest in the
    image by emphasizing high frequency, transitional image data while
    deemphasizing or removing low-frequency, homogeneous background image data.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199     through 200, for edge or contour enhancement designed to facilitate
    the recognition of pattern*s.

    263,    for edge or contour enhancing filters.


CLS 382/267
TXT Minimize discontinuities in dot-matrix image data (i.e., connecting or
    merging the dots):

    Subject matter under subclass 266 including specific processing to reduce
    gaps or breaks in the borders of image objects such as by ``filling-in"
    pixel*s which are closer than a predetermined distance to the edge of the
    object.

    (1)     Note.  A specific application of this procedure is the merging or
    blending of the dots in dot-matrix lettering in order to create solid black
    lettering.


CLS 382/268
TXT Minimize discontinuities at boundaries of image blocks (i.e., reducing
    blocking effects or effects of wrap-around):

    Subject matter under subclass 266 including means or processes to smooth
    undesirable transitions at the boundaries separating discrete pixel* blocks
    after the blocks have undergone processing such as compression or
    decompression, or to process pixel*s at the edges of an image when the
    process requires neighboring or context pixel*s.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 433 for reduction of blocking effects in
    facsimile.


CLS 382/269
TXT Minimize jaggedness in edges (e.g., anti-aliasing):

    Subject matter under subclass 266 which includes processing to reduce the
    ``stair-step" effect at curved edges of characters or other objects to
    accurately represent the high frequency detail of the original image.

    (1)     Note.  Anti-aliasing at time of image generation in computer
    graphics system is classified in Class 395, Information Processing System
    Organization, subclasses 141+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 136 and 137 for anti-aliasing
    techniques in display systems.


CLS 382/270
TXT Variable threshold, gain or slice level:

    Subject matter under subclass 254 wherein quantization of an input analog
    or gray scale image to produce an output gray scale image or bit map
    utilizes a threshold, gain or slice level which self-adjusts according to
    characteristics such as the contrast or brightness of the image or portion
    of the image being processed.

    (1)     Note.  For the purpose of this subclass, ``quantization" refers
    strictly to amplitude quantization or digitization (i.e. assigning to each
    pixel* an integer value corresponding to a brightness level).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251     through 253, for spatial quantization or sampling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 350+
    for solid-state circuits or systems that employ variable thresholds.

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 466 for variable thresholding in facsimile
    systems.


CLS 382/271
TXT Based on the results of a count:

    Subject matter under subclass 270 wherein the threshold or quantization
    value derived for a particular element in the image depends upon the
    relative frequency of occurrence of each brightness level in a region
    around the image element or the number of ``black" image elements at a
    particular location over a number of images of the same object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172,    for setting a threshold using a histogram.


CLS 382/272
TXT Based on a local average, mean or median:

    Subject matter under subclass 270 wherein the threshold or quantization
    value of a particular image element depends on an average, mean or median
    measurement of neighboring elements, with a similar average, mean or median
    operation being applied to each element of the whole image.


CLS 382/273
TXT Based on peak levels:

    Subject matter under subclass 270 wherein the threshold or quantization
    value of a particular image element is set according to the highest and/or
    lowest amplitude of some measured signal, such as the grey levels of
    neighboring image elements or a white or black signal produced by scanning
    a reference plate prior to scanning the image.


CLS 382/274
TXT Intensity, brightness, contrast or shading correction:

    Subject matter under subclass 254 which involves correcting pixel* values
    for variations in ambient lighting or the optimum brightness, intensity or
    contrast range of an image to enhance desired image features.

    (1)     Note.  Systems which use feedback from image processing in order to
    control the intensity of an illumination source are included herein.

    (2)     Note.  Adjusting intensity or color according to light sources,
    surface characteristics and object orientation in a computer graphics/data
    presentation system is classified in class 395, subclass 126.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 205 for intensity control of light sources.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 20, 63, 77, 147+, and 429+ for
    correcting, adjusting, or controlling the intensity, brightness, or
    contrast for shading of an image for display presentation.

    348,    Television, subclasses 251 and 254 for shading and grey-level
    correction of television signals.

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 461 for shading correction in facsimile systems.


CLS 382/275
TXT Artifact removal or suppression (e.g., distortion correction):

    Subject matter under subclass 254 directed to correcting undesirable image
    characteristics such as spatial distortion (i.e. subtracting difference
    data between frames to correct for blurring due to motion), sensor or
    optical system induced artifacts (i.e. geometric aberrations), process
    induced artifacts (i.e. ``worm" artifacts caused by error diffusion) or
    physical deterioration of a scanned object itself (i.e. dirt or dust on
    photographic negatives).


CLS 382/276
TXT IMAGE TRANSFORMATION OR PRE-PROCESSING:

    Subject matter under the class definition directed either to
    transformation of a given representation of an image into another
    representation by some mathematically-derived transform or process; or to
    operations performed on an image representation, prior to any attempt at
    recognition, for the specific purpose of facilitating acquisition or
    subsequent recognition of imagery pattern*s.

    (1)     Note.  Image sensors per se are excluded from this subclass.


CLS 382/277
TXT Transforming each dimension separately:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 wherein a multidimensional transformation
    or process (such as a two-dimensional FFT) is performed using separate
    one-dimensional transforms or processes. In other words, the rows of an
    image array are transformed separately from the columns, the horizontal
    components are transformed separately from the vertical components, or each
    axis is transformed separately from the other axes.


CLS 382/278
TXT Correlation:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 wherein a correlation operation is
    performed on image data.

    (1)     Note.  For correlation specifically used for pattern* recognition*,
    subclasses 110+ take precedence.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses
    728.03- 728.07 for specific correlation hardware.


CLS 382/279
TXT Convolution:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 wherein a convolution operation is
    performed on image data.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclass 137 for performing a convolution
    operation on an image data.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 728.01
    through 728.02 for specific convolution hardware.


CLS 382/280
TXT Fourier transform:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 wherein a Fourier transform is performed
    on image data.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210,    for systems that obtain a Fourier transform of an image optically.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses
    726.01+ for specific Fourier transform hardware.


CLS 382/281
TXT Walsh, Hough or Hadamard transform:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 wherein a Walsh, Hough, or Hadamard
    transform is performed on image data.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses
    725.01+ and 727.01+ for specific Walsh transform hardware.


CLS 382/282
TXT Selecting a portion of an image:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 wherein transformation or pre-processing
    operations are performed on a limited subset of the total image data which
    has been designated using a scanning window or preliminary step which
    identifies specific regions of the image (i.e., only text portions).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173+,   for actually segmenting the  image into regions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 118 and 434 for clipping an
    image to a designated region for display presentation.

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 453 for image portion selection in a facsimile
    system.


CLS 382/283
TXT Using a mask:

    Subject matter under subclass 282 wherein input image data is compared with
    a standard, such as coordinate data stored in a memory, so that certain
    image data may be removed or masked, allowing only the data in a desired
    area to be extracted for further processing.


CLS 382/284
TXT Combining image portions (e.g., portions of oversized documents):

    Subject matter under subclass 276 wherein a final image is created by
    selectively combining, merging, or superimposing regions from multiple
    images (e.g. pasting a first image portion into a base image), or regions
    from the same image which had to be scanned, stored or processed in pieces.

    (1)     Note.  Systems and methods for merging/overlapping graphic objects
    including systems which display a computer generated change of appearance
    (e.g., selection of hairstyles or clothing is overlaid with a video image
    or a model) are classified in Class 395, Information Processing System
    Organization, subclass 135.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 115+ and 435 for merging or
    overlapping diverse images or graphic objects for display presentation.

    348,    Television, subclasses 584-601 for combining video images from
    plural sources.


CLS 382/285
TXT Mapping 2D image onto a 3D surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 wherein a two-dimensional image is
    projected onto a three-dimensional surface so as to give the illusion that
    the image has a third dimension.

    (1)     Note.  Systems and methods wherein images are mapped from two
    dimensions onto a three-dimensional surface and there is also more than
    nominal computer graphics processing of the transformed image data,
    appropriate classification is in Class 395, Information Processing System
    Organization, subclass 125.

    (2)     Note.  In order to be classified in this subclass the conversion of
    two-dimensional image to a three-dimensional surface should include
    substantial image analysis*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 578 and 580 for three-dimensional special
    effects in video images, where the television is an integral part of the
    system.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 425 for mapping an image onto
    the surface of a three-dimensional object in a computer graphics
    environment.


CLS 382/286
TXT Measuring image properties (e.g., length, width, or area):

    Subject matter under subclass 276 encompassing the extraction  of physical
    properties exhibited by imaged objects such as length, width, thickness,
    size, area, shape, and boundary points to aid in later processing.

    (1)     Note.  For those features that are extracted from an image
    specifically for the purpose of recognizing pattern*s, subclasses 91+ take
    precedence.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 372-387 for the optical
    measurement of various properties of objects.

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 449 for the detection of document size in a
    facsimile system.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 556+
    for basic measurements such as area, width, length, distance, etc.


CLS 382/287
TXT Detecting alignment marks:

    Subject matter under subclass 286 wherein the properties extracted from an
    image relate to reference marks, sometimes called fiducials, which are used
    to measure the image position or orientation and aid in image alignment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 557 and 561 for the detection of the
    position of a coded record, web, strand, strip or sheet.

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 488 for the detection of the document position
    in a facsimile system.


CLS 382/288
TXT Determining center of gravity or moment:

    Subject matter under subclass 286 wherein the properties extracted from an
    image relate to its center point or its various moments, such as the moment
    of inertia, center of gravity, center of mass, and so on.


CLS 382/289
TXT Determining amount an image is rotated or skewed:

    Subject matter under subclass 286 wherein the properties extracted from an
    image relate to its inclination or skew angle measured with respect to a
    reference which may be, for example, a scanning direction or the physical
    orientation of a sensor array.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include the measurement of image
    orientation based on alignment marks or fiducials.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    287,    for measurement of image orientation based on alignment marks or
    fiducials.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 138+ for systems that
    measure the axial alignment or angle of various objects.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 559 for
    orientation measurement.


CLS 382/290
TXT Where the image is a character, word, or text:

    Subject matter under subclass 289 wherein the measurement is undertaken to
    determine the amount of skew or angular orientation of a character, word,
    or text.


CLS 382/291
TXT Determining the position of an object:

    Subject matter under subclass 286 wherein the properties extracted from an
    image result in a set of values representing spatial coordinates or
    features, such as document edges, and the position of an object relative to
    a reference.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 373 through 375 for
    systems that measure the displacement or position of various objects.

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 488 for the detection of the document position
    in a facsimile system.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 105 for
    determining the position of object data in a computer graphics environment.


CLS 382/292
TXT Where the object is a character, word, or text:

    Subject matter under subclass 291 wherein the set of values relates
    specifically to the position of a character, word or text.

    (1)     Note.  For example, the values may represent the left, right, upper
    and lower extremities of a printed character or word.


CLS 382/293
TXT Changing the image coordinates:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 encompassing image coordinate
    transformations undertaken to correct geometric distortions or
    misregistration between the image and, for example, an image sensor.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass is any system which requires
    some special marking, grid, fiducial or coded indicia to register the image
    of a document or other object relative to the image sensor. For such
    excluded subject matter see this class, subclass 287.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    287,    for detection of alignment marks for aligning the position or
    orientation of an image.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclass 580 for the geometric transformation of
    television signals.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 731 for
    specific coordinate conversion hardware.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 433+ for changing image
    coordinates of computer generated objects in a computer graphics system.


CLS 382/294
TXT Registering or aligning multiple images to one another:

    Subject matter under subclass 293 encompassing the registration or
    alignment between two or more images. The images, for example, may be from
    consecutive image frames or fields; or they may be of the same scene taken
    at different viewing angles or at different times; or they may consist of
    an original image and stored prototypes.


CLS 382/295
TXT To position or translate an image:

    Subject matter under subclass 293 wherein a coordinate transformation is
    undertaken for the purpose of shifting the image (or a signal
    representation thereof) from one position in space to another position
    relative to a coordinate reference.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 121+ and 436+ for controlling
    image movement or translating an object for display presentation.


CLS 382/296
TXT To rotate an image:

    Subject matter under subclass 293 wherein a coordinate transformation is
    undertaken for the purpose of turning the image (or a signal representation
    thereof) about an axis or center, or adjusting the image's orientation and
    skew.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes transformations of a kind that rotate
    the sampling of an image about an axis while holding the image itself
    stationary. As an example, an image is sampled first along a sequence of
    vertical columns to obtain a two-dimensional representation of the image,
    and this representation is then sampled along a sequence of horizontal rows
    to obtain still another representation of the image.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 126 and 436+ for ratation of
    an graphical image for display presentation.

    348,    Television, subclass 583 for the rotation of video images in a
    television system.


CLS 382/297
TXT Rotation of image is limited to 90#, 180#, or 270#:

    Subject matter under subclass 296 wherein the coordinate transformation
    results in an image turned 90, 180, or 270 degrees relative to the original
    image.


CLS 382/298
TXT To change the scale or size of an image:

    Subject matter under subclass 293 wherein a coordinate transformation is
    undertaken for the purpose of either reducing or enlarging the overall size
    of an image (or a signal representation thereof).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 127 - 131 and 439 for scaling
    or controlling the size of an image or object for display presentation.

    348,    Television, subclasses 561, 581, 582 and 704 for the control of
    image size or magnification in a television system.

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 451 for the conversion of a document size in a
    facsimile system.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 715.07
    for specific scaling hardware.


CLS 382/299
TXT Raising or lowering the image resolution (e.g., sub pixel* accuracy):

    Subject matter under subclass 298 wherein the image scaling is achieved by
    altering the spatial resolution or density of dots, pixel*s or image
    elements used to represent the image in a quantized form.  Such
    transformations may be utilized in a multiuse environment to achieve
    compatibility between input and output devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclass 132 for defining the resolution
    of an image to be displayed.


CLS 382/300
TXT Interpolation:

    Subject matter under subclass 299 wherein the resolution of an image is
    increased by the addition of counterfeit pixel*s (or image elements) whose
    values are calculated (i.e., interpolated) based on real image pixel*s that
    are in the neighborhood of the counterfeit pixel*s to be added.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 441+ for interpolation techniques used to
    convert the format of video signals.

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 428 and 525 for interpolation in facsimile
    systems.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 723 for
    specific interpolation hardware.


CLS 382/301
TXT Where the image is an alphanumeric character:

    Subject matter under subclass 298 wherein the image whose scale or size is
    changed is a letter, number or other language symbol.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 128 and 467+ for the
    generation or modification of character fonts, in a data presentation or
    computer graphics generation system.


CLS 382/302
TXT Multilayered image transformations:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 in which different portions of an image
    are transformed separately or the image as a whole is subjected to a set of
    image processing transformations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing System, subclass 131 for
    processing different portions of an image separately by utilizing plural
    processors.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 121+ and 436+ for
    trasformation of an image or graphical object. for generation of computer
    graphic images using plural processors.


CLS 382/303
TXT Pipeline processing:

    Subject matter under subclass 302 wherein several layers of transformations
    are combined such that a first layer of transforms are applied to an
    initial representation of an image, a second layer of transforms is applied
    to the output of the first layer, and so on.

    (1)     Note.  The sequence of transformations may be conducted either by a
    serial pipeline of image processing stages or by a single stage with
    feedback.


CLS 382/304
TXT Parallel processing:

    Subject matter under subclass 302 wherein the trans-formations are applied
    simultaneously to the image.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 133
    through 134 and 229.2 for parallel processing architecture.


CLS 382/305
TXT Image storage or retrieval:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 wherein the image inputted to the image
    analyzing system is stored in, or retrieved from, a large capacity storage
    medium such as an optical disk.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes document management and image filing
    systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 403 and 404 for document memory management
    and retrieval.

    707,    Data Processing - Database and File Management, Data Structures, or
    Document Processing, subclasses 1+ for a file indexing or retrieval system.


CLS 382/306
TXT Using identification indicia on document:

    Subject matter under subclass 305 wherein indicia, such as keywords, that
    appear on a document are used to file the document or to search the
    document data to be retrieved.


CLS 382/307
TXT General purpose image processor:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 directed to an arrangement of processing
    elements that may be programmed or reconfigured to perform a variety of
    image processing operations.


CLS 382/308
TXT Morphological operations (i.e., local neighborhood operations):

    Subject matter under subclass 307 wherein the processing is limited to
    local neighborhood operations performed on an image and implemented by
    convolving the image with an image of a structuring element, typically a
    3x3 or 5x5 pixel* object, kernel or window.


CLS 382/309
TXT EDITING, ERROR CHECKING OR CORRECTION (e.g., POST-RECOGNITION PROCESSING):

    Subject matter under the class definition directed to any operation for
    testing the reliability and performance of an image analyzing system,
    uncovering or correcting errors, making editorial changes in images read by
    the system, or preparing the output of the system for further processing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclass 437 for error checking in coded record sensors.

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 504 and 406 for measuring, testing and
    calibrating facsimile systems.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 550+,
    737+, for performance monitoring and error checking in computer systems.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery for generic
    error checking systems.


CLS 382/310
TXT Correcting alphanumeric recognition errors:

    Subject matter under subclass 309 directed to correcting textual data such
    as the letters, numbers and other characters that make up a text and that
    could not be recognized or that were misrecognized by a character
    recognition system.


CLS 382/311
TXT Including operator interaction:

    Subject matter under subclass 309 wherein a human operator checks, corrects
    or edits the image data usually with the aid of a keyboard and a display.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 156+ and 326+ for the use of
    input devices or operator interfaces for controlling the display of an
    image.


CLS 382/312
TXT IMAGE SENSING:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein an image sensor is
    specifically claimed for converting an image into signals that are readily
    usable in image analysis*.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are image sensors disclosed or
    claimed specifically in environments other than image analysis*.  For
    example, search the appropriate subclasses in Class 358 for facsimile
    scanners; Class 235 for coded record sensors; Class 250 for photocell
    sensors and sensing arrays; and Class 359 for purely optical scanning
    systems and elements.


CLS 382/313
TXT Hand-held:

    Subject matter under subclass 312 wherein the sensor must be handled by a
    human operator to generate the necessary image signals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 18-20 for telegraphy systems that sense
    writing.

    235,    Registers, subclass 472 for hand-held coded record sensors.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 163 through 166 and 179
    through 183 for hand-held input devices in display systems.

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 473 for hand-held readers in facsimile.


CLS 382/314
TXT Sensing mechanism in stylus:

    Subject matter under subclass 313 wherein the image sensor, which may be an
    optical, electrical, magnetic, or piezoelectric device, is housed within a
    pen or stylus held by the human operator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 179-183 for the use of a pen
    or stylus as an input device in a display environment.


CLS 382/315
TXT Sensing mechanism in platen:

    Subject matter under subclass 313 wherein the image sensor is mounted
    within, underneath or around the surface (often referred to as a platen) on
    which the image is formed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 18 through 20 for the use of a digitized
    writing tablet.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 173 through 178 for the use of
    touch panels in general.


CLS 382/316
TXT Curve tracer:

    Subject matter under subclass 312 having means for causing the image sensor
    to follow the edge, contour or boundary of an image pattern* (such as an
    alphanumeric character) so that measurements may be made that are useful in
    analyzing or recognizing the pattern*.

    (1)     Note.  No physical movement of the image sensing device itself is
    necessary to follow a pattern* boundary.  Light projected and controlled by
    an image sensor may do the actual moving, as in a flying spot scanner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 202 for photocells that follow the edge of
    pattern* image.


CLS 382/317
TXT Sensor control (e.g., OCR sheet controls copier or fax):

    Subject matter under subclass 312 wherein the image sensor is directed and
    controlled by certain special markings or guides on a document or by
    specific internal programming so as to skip nonessential items of
    information, to skip lines on a document, to control timing and sampling,
    to regulate speed, to use the sensor output for a specific control function.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are programmable character recognition
    systems that read programming instructions from preprinted,
    machine-readable documents and forms.  Also included are OCR forms that
    control the operation of photocopiers and facsimile machines.


CLS 382/318
TXT Multiple scanning:

    Subject matter under subclass 312 wherein the same image area is scanned
    more than once.


CLS 382/319
TXT Prescanning:

    Subject matter under subclass 318 in which a preliminary scan of the image
    area is done for the purpose of pre-recognition processing (i.e., image
    alignment, evaluation of print quality, etc.).


CLS 382/320
TXT Magnetic:

    Subject matter under subclass 312 wherein magnetic properties of an image
    are sensed by suitable magnetic transducer(s).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 449 through 450 for magnetic card readers.


CLS 382/321
TXT Optical (e.g., OCR):

    Subject matter under subclass 312 wherein the optical properties of an
    image are sensed by suitable optical transducer(s).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 454+ for optical card readers.

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 474+ for optical facsimile scanners.


CLS 382/322
TXT Single spot:

    Subject matter under subclass 321 wherein an optical transducer
    (cooperating with a flying-spot scanner, for example) senses a property at
    a single spot in the image, and that spot is swept progressively over an
    image area.


CLS 382/323
TXT Single line:

    Subject matter under subclass 321 wherein a plurality of optical
    transducers sufficient to form a single line of sensing elements, sense the
    optical properties in a corresponding line of the image, and that line is
    swept progressively over an image area.


CLS 382/324
TXT Full retina:

    Subject matter under subclass 321 wherein a plurality of optical
    transducers sufficient to form a two-dimensional array of sensing elements,
    simultaneously sense the optical properties in a corresponding
    two-dimensional area of the image.


CLS 382/325
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition for analysis of image data and
    not elsewhere classified.

    (1)     Note.  Included within this subclass are such items as integrated
    circuit layouts and devices for selecting character fonts.

    (2)     Note.  Image analysis* properly classified above should not, as a
    rule, be cross-referenced here.


CLS 383/
TTL FLEXIBLE BAGS

CLS 383/
TXT

    I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF THE CLASS SUBJECT MATTER:

    This is the residual class for receptacles comprised of a peripheral wall
    made of flaccid or flexible material, with at least one closed end, and
    having an access opening, which may be an open end of the receptacle or
    which may be provided in the peripheral wall or closed end of the
    receptacle.  Receptacles of this class type must function, by disclosure,
    to hold contents which in turn are to be eventually removed from the
    receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  The peripheral wall is the surrounding external boundary of
    the bag which, together with a closed end, forms a structure intended to
    confine or hold contents.

    (2)     Note.  An access opening must be intended to permit insertion of
    removal of bag content, and may be closed or closable.

    (3)     Note.  A blank intended to be made into a bag of this class type is
    classified with the bag.  A blank is defined as a piece of stock material
    cut into final shape prior to being folded and secured in usable bag form.

    (4)     Note.  The flaccid or flexible bag material may be strengthened or
    reinforced to prevent tearing, or to aid in maintaining the bag in a given
    configuration.

    (5)     Note.  Patents issued before 1900 have been placed hereunder by
    total disclosure.

    II.     SCOPE OF THE CLASS:

    This class admits all bags not provided for elsewhere which satisfy the
    General Statement above.

    III.    RELATION TO RECEPTACLE CLASSES:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, subclasses 100+ for a purse
    (i.e., a container which is used to carry personal items, such as money,
    keys, or identification, on one's person) and subclasses 154+ for a flaccid
    protective cover which is configured for and supported by the article it
    protects.

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclasses 100+ for a hand carried
    suitcase, briefcase, or other container which is used for transporting
    personal items while traveling.



            Note.  Although purses and wallets provided for in Class 150 are
    also used to transport personal items while traveling, they customarily
    remain with or near the person.  The suitcases and briefcases provided for
    in Class 190 normally remain at one's destination (e.g., hotel or office)
    after the traveling has been completed.



    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, for a bag having a specialized use
    or feature provided for in that class, or a bag having content therein, and
    in particular, subclass 69 for a container for a rubber bag (e.g., hot
    water bottle, fountain syringe, etc.); subclasses 219+ for a bag which has
    been modified to permit mixing of two or more separated materials therein;
    subclass 245 for a laminate wall bag having tobacco therein; subclass 260
    for a pouch having tobacco therein; subclasses 286+ for a bag having an
    interior member for supporting an article of clothing and a second member
    for attachment to an external support; subclasses 315.1+ for golf bags or
    arrow quivers; subclasses 363+ for a bag for a tool employed for medical or
    dental purposes; subclass 390 for plural bags connected together and wound
    into a roll; subclasses 438+ for a bag for an object or substance adapted
    for use in the treatment of wounds or diseased portions of the body;
    subclasses 457+ for a bag having ornamentation or a bag which simulates the
    appearance of a disparate object; subclass 459.1 for a bag having an
    indicator; subclass 459.5 for a bag having indicia; subclass 466 for a bag
    attached to a panel and used as an enclosing cover for a content item;
    subclasses 484+ for a bag having content therein and formed by two sheets
    sealed together completely around the content; subclass 497 for a bag which
    is shrunk around its content; subclasses 521+ for a bag which includes
    means for protecting its content against shock; subclass 524.8 for a bag
    that has been evacuated; subclasses 525+ for a miscellaneous bag having
    content therein; subclass 554 for a container for two or more bags;
    subclass 568 for a bag adapted to contain two or more separate, particular
    materials disclosed for commingling externally of the bag; subclass 620 for
    a bag for an electrical component which is made of static electricity
    shielding material; subclass 802 for a cross-reference art collection of
    shirred casings.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclass 400 for a plastic bottle and subclasses
    11.1+ for a bag used as a nursing bottle liner.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 9.1+ for a bag united with a
    three-dimensional self-sustaining framework, subclasses 400+ for a bag
    which is a separable liner combined with a rigid receptacle, subclasses
    470+ for a bag used as a lining, per se, within or without other barrier
    structure.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 400+ for
    paper cups and subclasses 68.1+ for envelopes.



    IV.     RELATION TO SUPPORT CLASSES:

    In general, as between the receptacle classes and the support classes, the
    receptacle classes provide for the combination of a receptacle plus
    support; except, the support classes will accept a claim to a support
    combined with a receptacle, wherein the claim (1) nominally recites the
    receptacles, or (2) recites only so much of the receptacle structure as is
    needed to cooperate with the support, or (3) recites only those receptacle
    features which have been modified specifically to cooperate with the
    support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, for a built-up open framework for supporting a
    plurality of bags.

    248,    Supports, for a device which carries the weight of a bag or
    otherwise holds it or steadies it against the pull of gravity, and in
    particular, subclasses 95+ for bag holders.



    V.      RELATION TO HEAT TRANSFER CLASSES:

    A.      Related Classes

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 4 for baglike refrigeration apparatus which
    produces a refrigeration effect by (1) a chemical reaction or (2)
    dissolving a solid in a liquid; subclass 259.3 for a baglike refrigeration
    apparatus having means for attaching it to a living body for the purpose of
    cooling it, and not limited to therapeutic use; subclasses 529 and 530 for
    a baglike refrigeration apparatus in which the enclosed coolant or
    refrigerant is disclosed as being for reuse within the apparatus (e.g.,
    sealed and refreezable).



            Note.  See Class 206, Special Receptacle and Package, subclasses
    219+ for other types of compartmented containers disclosed as permitting
    commingling of two or more initially separated materials.



    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 204+ for a baglike heating
    apparatus, which has its own source of heat, and is used for warming the
    body, hand, or foot; subclasses 263.01+ for a baglike heating apparatus
    wherein the source of heat includes chemicals or chemical compositions
    which generate heat without flame when they are (1) brought into contact
    with one another or (2) mixed with water.



            Note.  See Class 206, Special Receptacle and Package, subclasses
    219+ for other types of compartmented containers disclosed as permitting
    commingling of two or more initially separated materials.



    128,    Surgery, appropriate subclasses (including the subdivision
    represented as Class 604) for a hot water or ice bag limited by claimed
    structure to therapeutic use.  The structure may, for example, be used to:

    1.      Apply substances to the body.

    2.      Absorb substances from the body

    3.      Permit insertion into a body cavity.

    (1)     Note.  607, Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application,
    subclass 96 is a collecting point for all hot water bags which have means
    for attachment to the body and 108 is a collecting point for those which
    are specifically configured for a body part.

    (2)     Note.  Class 62, subclass 259.3, is the locus of patents directed
    to a nontherapeutic ice bag having means to attach it to the body.

    (3)     Note.  For other medical or surgical bags, search Class 604,
    Surgery, subclass 262 for a medical bag which includes an injection element
    which is for insertion into the body, subclass 408 for a bag which is
    intended solely for storing blood or body treating fluids, and subclasses
    317+ for a bag which is intended solely for receiving body fluids or waste
    products from the body.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses, in particular subclass 46
    for a baglike heat transfer apparatus having either (1) both an inlet and
    an outlet disclosed for a circulating heat exchange medium or (2) means for
    circulating a heat exchange medium.



    B.      Bag Feature Summary "Common" hot water or ice bag, whose contents
    are intended to be removed before the bag is reused.  Class 383, Flexible
    Bags.

    Cold appliance (e.g., icebag) limited by claimed structure to therapeutic
    use.  Class 607, Surgery: Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application,
    subclass 96.

    Cold appliance which is reusable without removing the coolant.  Class 62,
    Refrigeration, subclasses 529 and 530.

    Cold appliance which is supported on the body but not limited by claimed
    structure to therapeutic use.  Class 62, Refrigeration, subclass 259.3.

    Cold appliance utilizing an endothermic process (e.g., chemical reaction,
    solid dissolved by or in a liquid, crystallization, etc.).  Class 62,
    Refrigeration, subclass 4.

    Hot appliance (e.g., hot water bag) limited by claimed structure to
    therapeutic use.  Class 607, Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical
    Application, subclass 96.

    Hot appliance supported on the body or configured to support part of the
    body, even if not for a therapeutic use.  Class 607, Surgery: Light,
    Thermal, and Electrical Application subclasses 108+.

    Hot appliance utilizing an exothermic process (e.g., combustion or other
    chemical reaction, solid dissolved by or in a liquid, crystallization,
    etc.).  Class 126, Stoves and Furnaces, in particular subclasses 204+ for
    body warmers and subclass 263 for flameless chemical heaters.

    Heat exchange appliance (hot or cold) having both an inlet and outlet, or a
    means to circulate a heat exchange medium, or an appliance utilizing both
    heating and cooling.  Class 165, Heat Exchange.

    VI.     RELATION TO OTHER CLASSES AND INDEX:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, for a water bed bag or a pillow.

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 110+ for handles, per se.

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., for fasteners, per se, particularly
    subclass 30.5 for a bag fastener, per se, and subclasses 572+ for a rib and
    groove fastener.

    29,     Metal Working, for methods of assembly in general.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 299+ for a check,
    label or tag, per se.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 2.11+ for an
    inflatable building.

    55,     Gas Separation, subclass 361 for a bag-like filter.

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 361+ for a bag-like device especially
    adapted for use in gathering fruit or nuts.

    62,     Refrigeration, see V above.

    70,     Locks, subclasses 64+ for a bag combined with a lock of that class
    type (e.g., key, combination, etc.), wherein the modification of the bag is
    only of a character to accommodate the lock.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 863.91 for a sample holder.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 646 for a silo breather
    bag.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, for flexible material of that
    class type nominally claimed as a bag.  This Class, 383, provides for
    specific material combined with significant bag structure.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 200+ for indicators, per se.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 65+ for a feed bag particularly
    configured to be employed in feeding an animal.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 204+ and subclasses 263.01+ for
    chemical heaters, and see V above.

    128,    Surgery, appropriate subclasses, for a hot water or ice bag
    combined with claimed structure limited to therapeutic use.  Such structure
    may for example:



    1.      Apply substances to the body

    2.      Absorb substances from the body

    3.      Permit insertion into a body cavity, and see V above.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 390 and 391 for a bag having a separate filling aid which is
    disclosed as being removable from the bag when not in use.

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, for a purse, wallet, and
    coin purse or protective article cover, and see III above.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, for
    adhesive bonding in general and particularly, subclasses 69+ for securing
    end closure to containers.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 46 for a nonrigid bag-like heat exchange
    device having an inlet and an outlet for circulating heat exchange medium,
    and see V above.

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, for traveling containers of that
    type, and see III above.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, for a bag having a specialized use
    provided for in that class or a bag having content therein; and see III
    above.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 348+ for a filter bag
    of that class type.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 126+ for a bag embodied as regular
    parts of a rack, and see IV above.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclass 400 for plastic bottles, and subclass
    11.1 for a bag used as a nursing bottle liner, and see III above.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 400+ for a bag which is a separable liner
    combined with a rigid receptacle, subclass 470 for a bag used as a lining,
    per se, within or without other barrier structure, and see III above.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 92+ for a collapsible wall type, subclasses
    206+ for a dispensing supply container having a resilient wall, subclasses
    460+ for a dispensing container having a funnel-type outlet, subclasses
    544+ for a dispensing supply container having a flow controller for the
    discharge outlet, and subclasses 566+ for a dispensing supply container
    having a nozzle, spout, or other pouring device.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, for a bag having a strap or other
    means which is intended for supporting the bag on the bearer's body while
    allowing the bearer's hands to remain free.  Any bag of this type is proper
    for Class 224 even if it also includes an element which optionally may be
    gripped by the bearer's hand.



            This Class, 383, includes bags having handles which are intended to
    be grasped by the hand.  The test to be used is:  As long as the bearer's
    hand must remain occupied in order to carry the bag it is proper for this
    Class 383 even if it is also intended to be simultaneously slung over the
    bearer's shoulder.



    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 400+ for
    paper cups and subclasses 68.1+ for envelopes, and see III above.

    232,    Deposit and Collection Receptacles, subclasses 30+ for a bag which
    cooperates with a mail collection box, and subclasses 43.1+ for a bag
    intended to be filled with content items one at a time through one opening
    and intended to be emptied of its contents all at once through a different
    opening.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 31 for aeronautical balloons.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 95+ for a bag support, per se, or a bag
    support combined with a nominally claimed bag, and see IV above.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, for a valve, per se.

    252,    Compositions, for compositions of that class type nominally claimed
    as a bag.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses, for a process of making a bag by molding, casting,
    or shaping.

    280,    Land Vehicles, appropriate subclasses, for a bag combined with a
    wheel.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 137+ for hand
    carried article carriers which are not bags, and subclasses 152+ for a
    sling-type article carrier.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    appropriate subclasses for an apparatus of that class type which is used to
    make a bag.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 106+ for a bag having food content therein, and subclass 138 for
    a bag or casing, per se, disclosed as being edible.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    and in particular, subclasses 34.1+ for stock material nominally claimed as
    a bag and subclasses 34.1+ for an edible food casing having a closed end.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclasses 88-125 for an
    inflatable bag used as a personal flotation device.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 220+ for an inflatable toy.

    454,    Ventilation, for ventilation features, per se.

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, subclasses 569+ for an inflatable
    projectile (e.g., a basketball, football, soccerball, etc.) used in a game
    or sport.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, appropriate subclasses, for a method or apparatus of
    that class type for making a bag, and in particular, subclasses 186+ for
    pliable container making and subclasses 309+ for container or tube erecting.


CLS 383/1
TXT BIODEGRADABLE FEATURE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein at least a portion of the
    bag is made of a material disclosed as being readily decomposable or
    disintegratable when exposed to the elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, Digest 30, for a biodegradable container not provided
    for elsewhere.


CLS 383/2
TXT SELECTIVELY ADJUSTABLE VOLUME:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the bag includes means
    which permit the size of the bag to be optionally changed from one distinct
    content holding configuration to another, and back.

    (1)     Note.  To be proper for this subclass the bag must be capable of
    being converted back and forth from one volume configuration to another
    (i.e., smaller to larger), and include means for positively maintaining the
    bag in its smaller configuration.

    (2)     Note.  Bags provided with means for allowing a one-time increase in
    volume to accommodate increased contents are classified on other features.

    (3)     Note.  Bags which are designed to go from a collapsed, nonuse
    configuration to a one-size content holding configuration are classified on
    other features.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclasses 103+ for an article of
    hand carried luggage having means for changing the volume.


CLS 383/3
TXT INFLATABLE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the bag or a portion
    thereof is disclosed as being fillable with, and retaining, gas at or above
    atmospheric pressure.

    (1)     Note.  The gas can be either the contents of the bag or gas which
    is  used to inflate a portion of the bag, such as a wall area.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 2.11+ for a
    structure, or a component thereof, of that class which is shaped, supported
    or  strengthened by an enclosed fluid, and see (1) Note. of subclass 2.11
    for other locations of inflatable devices, elements, members, structures,
    etc.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 646 for a silo breather
    bag.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 31+ for lighter-than-air balloons.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclass 125 for an inflatable
    baglike device which functions as a personal flotation device.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 87+ for inflatable amusement
    devices and toys.

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, subclasses 569+ for an inflatable
    projectile (e.g., a basketball, football, soccerball, etc.) used in a game
    or sport.


CLS 383/4
TXT CONVERTIBLE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the bag is disclosed as
    being transformable into a nonbag device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclasses 1+ for an article of
    luggage which is convertible to or from nonluggage device.


CLS 383/5
TXT TAMPER INDICATING:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the bag includes means
    which reveals that an unauthorized person has attempted to gain or has
    gained access to the bag.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, for indicators, per se, which may be used
    to indicate tampering.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 807 for a cross-reference
    art collections of tamper resistant containers.


CLS 383/6
TXT LIFTING OR SUSPENDING ELEMENT (E.G., HANDLE):

    Subject matter under class definition wherein the bag includes structure
    designed to cooperate directly with an unclaimed, extraneous support for
    the purpose of pendantly supporting the bag on said support.

    (1)     Note.  "Pendantly supporting" is defined as either hanging or
    lifting the bag against the pull of gravity.

    (2)     Note.  An "extraneous support" may be a peg, a hook, a clothesline,
    a human hand, etc.

    (3)     Note.  The part of the bag which is deemed to be the "lifting or
    suspending element" is always the claimed structure which engages directly
    with the unclaimed, extraneous support.

    (4)     Note.  The claimed combination of a bag with (for example) a
    detachable handle or hook, etc., is properly classified in this or indented
    subclasses if the handle or hook is used for engagement with an unclaimed
    extraneous support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 110+ for a handle, per se.

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclass 39 for a trunk combined
    with a handle, and subclasses 115+, for an article of hand carried luggage
    combined with a handle.


CLS 383/7
TXT Unitary with bag (e.g., element formed by hand hole):

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the lifting or suspending element
    is one piece with the bag.

    (1)     Note.  Structure combined with, and reinforcing, a unitary lifting
    or suspending element is included here.


CLS 383/8
TXT Loop extending between opposite walls:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein the unitary lifting or suspending
    element is a strip of bag material which is connected at its ends to two
    opposed portions of the peripheral wall, e.g., front and rear walls.


CLS 383/9
TXT Bag material includes aperture for rodlike support:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein the bag includes an opening in the
    material thereof, which opening is by disclosure to receive a slender,
    elongated, cylindrically-shaped support or like element.

    (1)     Note.  A bag which includes a plurality of openings, each of which
    is sized to receive a rodlike support, is classified here.

    (2)     Note. The "lifting or suspending element" is considered to be that
    part of the bag, above the hand opening, which is engaged by the hand.

    (3)     Note.  A bag having a slit which defines the perimeter of a flap
    which can be folded out of the plane of the bag wall to form an aperture is
    proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for a bag having a unitary folded portion which can receive a
    rodlike support under the fold.

    10,     for a bag which includes an opening sized to receive more than one
    finger.


CLS 383/10
TXT Bag material includes hand-receiving aperture:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein the bag includes an opening in the
    bag material which is intended, by disclosure, to receive a hand.

    (1)     Note.  A bag having an opening which is sized to receive more than
    one finger but not a whole hand is classified here.

    (2)     Note.  The "lifting or suspending element" is considered to be that
    part of the bag, above the hand opening, which is engaged by the hand.

    (3)     Note.  A bag having a slit which defines the perimeter of a flap
    which can be folded out of the plane of the  bag wall to form an aperture
    is proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for similar subject matter wherein an aperture is sized to receive
    only one finger.


CLS 383/11
TXT Magnetic or adhesive-type element (includes VelcroR):

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the lifting or suspending element
    is attached to the extraneous support by an adhesive, VelcroR or
    magnetic-type coupling.

    (1)     Note.  The bag is normally easily removed from the support.


CLS 383/12
TXT Attached to bag frame:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the lifting or suspending element
    is connected to a rigid element or plurality of elements which form a
    closed geometrical configuration and maintain part of the bag in a given
    configuration, e.g., mouth frame.


CLS 383/13
TXT Detachable:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 including means permitting the element to
    be removed from the bag.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclass 116 for an article of
    hand carried luggage combined with a detachable handle.


CLS 383/14
TXT With provision for positioning element in nonuse location:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the bag or the lifting or
    suspending element is provided with specified means which maintains the
    lifting or suspending element in a given position or configuration from
    which (or out of which)it must be at least partially moved or removed
    before it can function as a handle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    D3,     Travel Goods and Personal Belongings, subclass 72 for a design
    patent for a container having a recessed handle which extends to an
    operative position.


CLS 383/15
TXT Plural interengaging elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein at least two lifting or suspending
    elements include means which hold them together during the lifting or
    suspending function.

    (1)     Note.  A bag having two lifting or suspending elements which are
    merely grasped simultaneously with one hand are classified on other
    features.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for a single lifting or suspending loop which passes through a
    smaller loop to close the bag mouth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclass 117 for an article of
    hand carried luggage combined with a handle having plural interengaging
    elements.


CLS 383/16
TXT Plural elements located at diverse bag regions (i.e., bag bottom, bag
    middle, and/or bag top):

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein at least two lifting or suspending
    elements are provided, each of which has a gripping portion which is
    located at a different bag area from the other.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this definition a bag is considered to have
    three distinct areas or regions:  The bag top being located at or adjacent
    the access opening, the bag bottom being opposite the bag top, and the bag
    middle being in between the top and bottom.


CLS 383/17
TXT Including reinforcement or stress distribution means attached to or
    adjacent element:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the bag or element includes
    structure which enhances the transfer of the bag load to the lifting or
    suspending element.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this and indented subclasses are arrangements
    that: (1) Strengthen the attachment of the element to the bag, (frequently
    by increasing the area of contact or reinforcing that area) and/or (2)
    effectively extend the handle down the sides of the bag or completely under
    the bag bottom (either as an extension of the handle material itself or as
    a reinforced strip).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7+,     for similar features combined with a unitary element.

    903,    for stress relief features not involving the lifting or suspending
    element.


CLS 383/18
TXT Extending across bag bottom:

    Subject matter under subclass 17 wherein the element either traverses, or
    is attached to a reinforcing means which traverses, the bottom of the bag.

    (1)     Note.  The reinforcement or stress distribution means may be
    located either inside or outside the bag.


CLS 383/19
TXT Extending axially through bag interior to bag bottom:

    Subject matter under subclass 17 wherein an elongated member extends
    centrally through the inside of the bag and is attached to the bag at a
    plurality of vertically spaced places at least one of which is at or
    adjacent the bottom.


CLS 383/20
TXT Additional layer of material at element attachment location:

    Subject matter under subclass 17 wherein the reinforcement or stress
    distribution means is an additional layer of material at the place of
    attachment of the lifting or suspending element.

    (1)     Note.  The reinforcement or stress distribution means may be a
    folded section of bag material.


CLS 383/21
TXT Attached to distinct end wall:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the lifting or suspending element
    is attached to an end of the bag which has clearly discernible boundaries,
    e.g., fold lines.


CLS 383/22
TXT Hanging element:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the element, by disclosure, is used
    for suspending the bag from an inanimate, usually stationary support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7+,     for a bag having a hanging element which is unitary therewith.


CLS 383/23
TXT Hook-type:

    Subject matter under subclass 22 wherein the suspending element is bent or
    curved to form an open-sided geometrical configuration with the open side
    facing generally downwardly.


CLS 383/24
TXT Closed loop:

    Subject matter under subclass 22 wherein the suspending element includes a
    double-over portion, the ends of which are secured to one another and the
    bag.


CLS 383/25
TXT Single element:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the bag includes only one lifting
    or suspending element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7+,     for a bag having a single element which is unitary therewith.


CLS 383/26
TXT Bag includes opening through bag material to receive element:

    Subject matter under subclass 25 wherein the bag includes a gap or hole in
    the material thereof which is adapted to receive the lifting or suspending
    element.


CLS 383/27
TXT Opening extending through fold or folded bag portion:

    Subject matter under subclass 26 wherein part of the bag is folded along a
    fold line, and a gap or hole adapted to receive the lifting or suspending
    element is located within the fold.


CLS 383/28
TXT Secured to bag interior:

    Subject matter under subclass 25 wherein the element is attached to the
    inside portion of the bag.


CLS 383/29
TXT Straddles bag mouth:

    Subject matter under subclass 25 wherein the lifting or suspending element
    extends across the access opening and has portions which overlap the
    exterior of opposed peripheral wall portions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for a lifting or suspending element which straddles the bag mouth
    and is unitary with the bag.


CLS 383/30
TXT Secured to folded bag closure:

    Subject matter under subclass 25 wherein the element is attached to a
    portion of the bag which is foldable or has been folded to close the bag
    mouth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88+,    for bags that are closed by the folding wall portions on a common
    fold line.


CLS 383/31
TXT Closure flap:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein the folded bag portion includes a
    piece of bag material which extends from one bag wall across the access
    opening, and overlies a portion of the opposed bag wall when the bag mouth
    is closed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84+,    for a closure flap, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclass 902 for a brief case
    having a closure flap.


CLS 383/32
TXT WITH STACKING FEATURE:

    Subject matter under class definition wherein the bag includes means to aid
    in maintaining the relative position of it and at least one other bag, one
    on top of the other.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a bag whose exterior surface is made to
    be tacky to provide slip resistance between it and a vertically positioned
    bag.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 503+ for special
    receptacles or packages of that class type having structural features or
    vertical stacking of similar receptacles.


CLS 383/33
TXT WITH MEANS TO MAINTAIN THE BAG MOUTH IN A OPEN CONFIGURATION:

    Subject matter under class definition including means associated with the
    bag access opening to hold it open during insertion or removal of bag
    contents.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are reinforcing elements around the bag mouth
    to maintain it in a given geometrical shape during filling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for resilient closing means. 104, for free-standing bags which may
    inherently provide open mouths but do not have means specifically
    associated with the bag mouths.

    119,    for other bag wall reinforcements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 390 and 391 for a bag having a separate filling aid which is
    disclosed as being removable from the bag when not in use.

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclass 106 for an article of
    hand carried luggage having means to bias the luggage mouth into an open
    configuration.


CLS 383/34
TXT Hinged mouth stiffeners:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 wherein the access opening includes
    reinforcing elements which are articulated to one another.


CLS 383/34.1
TXT Stiffeners include four or more hinged segments:

    Subject matter under subclass 34 including four or more reinforcing
    elements articulated at four or more joints.


CLS 383/35
TXT WITH MEANS TO FACILITATE MANUAL SEPARATION OF FLATTENED BAG WALLS:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the bag includes means
    which air in separating flatten peripheral wall portions from one another
    by hand.

    (1)     Note.  Tabs or other elements which are grasped for the purpose of
    pulling apart closure elements (e.g., rib and groove elements) are
    classified with the particular closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for means which maintain the access opening in the open position.

    73,     for a bag having a drawstring-type securing element and a mouth
    opening aid.


CLS 383/36
TXT WITH INTEGRAL FUNNEL:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the bag mouth is
    surrounded by tapered structure, usually cone shaped, which directs a flow
    of material into the bag.

    (1)     Note.  The tapered structure must be permanently attached to the
    bag.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    for a bag having a separate filling aid which is designed to be removed
    from the bag when not in use.


CLS 383/37
TXT PLURAL:

    Subject matter under class definition comprising more than one bag.

    (1)     Note.  Plural bags connected together or to a common element are
    included herein if they are separable and independently usable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for a bag having more than one compartment, or plural bags
    permanently attached to a common support or to each other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 390 for plural bags
    connected in series in roll form and subclass 554 for a package of plural
    bags.


CLS 383/38
TXT COMPARTMENTED:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the bag includes means
    forming two content holding sections which are separated from one another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclasses 109+ for a
    compartmented article of hand carried luggage.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 219+ for a compartmented
    bag designed to permit mixing of separated materials, subclass 216 for a
    compart-mented bag for two or more diverse articles or materials, and
    subclass 568 for a bag for two or more separate, particular materials
    disclosed for commingling externally of the bag.


CLS 383/39
TXT Compartment-forming member secured to backing:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 wherein the bag includes a first planar
    element seamed to a second element at three or more spaced locations in
    order to form compartments between adjacent seams.


CLS 383/40
TXT Including auxiliary compartment:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 wherein the bag includes a main or primary
    bag section or compartment and another, secondary compartment.

    (1)     Note.  The main compartment must be either significantly larger
    than the auxiliary or disclosed as a main or primary compartment.

    (2)     Note.  The auxiliary compartment is usually designed to receive
    contents which are different from those received by the main compartment.


CLS 383/41
TXT WITH PLURAL ACCESS OPENINGS:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein two or more openings in
    the bag are claimed which are independently usable for insertion or removal
    of content.

    (1)     Note.  A portion of the bag, presently sealed, which is claimed as
    a past opening (e.g., filling) or future opening (e.g., emptying) is
    considered to be an opening for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for multiple independent closures for a single access opening.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclass 112 for an article of
    hand carried luggage having more than one access opening.


CLS 383/42
TXT WITH CLOSURE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the bag includes means
    for preventing insertion or removal of content through the same access
    opening.

    (1)     Note.  Where the closure for the access opening (e.g., top) and end
    structure (e.g., bottom) are not distinguishable, the reference is
    classified hereunder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121,    for end structure which does not close the access opening.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 30.5 for a bag closure,
    per se.


CLS 383/43
TXT Self-closing type:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 wherein the closure functions to close the
    access opening without manual manipulation.

    (1)     Note.  A claimed bag closure which is inherently self-closing is
    classified hereunder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for means to maintain the bag mouth in an open configuration which
    may also be self-closing.

    103,    for bag vents having closures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle on Package, subclasses 260 and 266 for tobacco
    containing pouches which may be self-closing.


CLS 383/44
TXT Responsive to content (e.g., valve):

    Subject matter under subclass 43 wherein the weight or pressure of the
    content forces the closure into its closed configuration.

    (1)     Note.  A claimed bag closure which inherently closed by the content
    (i.e., valve bag) is classified in this and indented subclasses.


CLS 383/45
TXT With vent:

    Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein the bag further includes means for
    relieving any pressure differential between the bag interior and exterior.

    (1)     Note.  A bag having a vent which allows the escape of air while the
    bag is being filled is classified here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100+,   for a nonvalve bag with a vent.


CLS 383/46
TXT With closure reinforcing or stiffening means:

    Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein the bag closure includes means for
    increasing its strength or rigidity.


CLS 383/47
TXT With means to facilitate opening closure:

    Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein the bag is provided with means
    which aid in opening the closure during filling.


CLS 383/48
TXT With supplemental closing feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein the bag includes means which, in
    addition to the weight or pressure of the content, aid in closing the
    access opening.

    (1)     Note.  The supplemental feature may be a unitary part of the
    closing means.


CLS 383/49
TXT Resilient:

    Subject matter under subclass 48 wherein the closure is elastically biased
    toward the closed condition.

    (1)     Note.  The elasticity may be an inherent property of the closure,
    per se.


CLS 383/50
TXT Reversely folded portion of closure element:

    Subject matter under subclass 48 wherein the supplemental closing feature
    comprises a portion of the closure which is intended to be folded upon the
    remainder thereof.


CLS 383/51
TXT Slit or slot:

    Subject matter under subclass 48 wherein an elongated cut or opening
    extends through the material of the closure for the purpose of increasing
    its flexibility to enhance closing.


CLS 383/52
TXT Adhesive:

    Subject matter under subclass 48 wherein the supplemental closing feature
    is an adherent.


CLS 383/53
TXT In distinct end wall:

    Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein the closure is located in an end
    of the bag, said end having clearly discernible boundaries e.g., fold lines.


CLS 383/54
TXT Including separate closure element:

    Subject matter under subclass 53 wherein the closure includes an initially
    separate member which has been secured to the bag.


CLS 383/55
TXT Folded bag corner:

    Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein the closure includes a portion of
    the bag which is bounded on two sides by intersecting bag edges and has
    been doubled over.


CLS 383/56
TXT Including separate closure element:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein the closure includes an initially
    separate member which has been secured to the bag.


CLS 383/57
TXT Closure includes inwardly folded bag wall portions:

    Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein the closure comprises two parts of
    the peripheral wall which have been folded into the bag interior and which
    form opposing portions of the periphery of the bag mouth.


CLS 383/58
TXT Overlying access opening in bag material:

    Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein the closure element covers a slit
    or hole in the bag through which the bag is intended to be filled or
    emptied.


CLS 383/59
TXT Including auxiliary means for forming leakproof closure seal:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 wherein the bag includes means, in
    addition to the closure, for preventing the ingress of gas or liquid, or
    egress of bag contents around the element.


CLS 383/60
TXT Annular gasket:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the auxiliary means is a distinct
    sealing ring interposed between the closure and the bag.


CLS 383/61
TXT Multiple independent closures for single access opening:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 wherein a single access opening includes
    more than one closure element, each of which is capable of closing the
    access opening by itself.


CLS 383/62
TXT With provision for positioning closure element in nonuse location:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 wherein the bag includes specified means
    for maintaining the closure element in a given position or configuration
    from which (or out of which) it must be at least partially moved or removed
    before it can function as a closure.


CLS 383/63
TXT Rib and groove:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 wherein the closure includes a projection
    which is integral with and extends along at least a portion of the opening
    and which interlocks with a mating recess extending along an opposite
    portion of the opening.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 588+ for rib and groove
    elements, per se.


CLS 383/64
TXT With sliding element:

    Subject matter under subclass 63 wherein the bag includes an element which
    straddles the rib and groove closing means and is slideable there along for
    the purpose of pressing or holding the rib and groove in interlocking
    relationship.


CLS 383/65
TXT Including means to facilitate disengagement:

    Subject matter under subclass 63 wherein the bag includes means (e.g., pull
    tabs) which aid in the separation of the rib and groove during opening of
    the bag.


CLS 383/66
TXT For access opening in sidewall:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 wherein the peripheral wall of the bag
    includes an access opening which can be closed by the closure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclass 113 for an article of
    hand carried luggage having a closure panel struck from the luggage wall.


CLS 383/67
TXT For access opening in bag bottom:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 wherein the part of the bag which is
    lowermost during normal usage thereof is provided with an access opening
    which can be closed by the closure.


CLS 383/68
TXT Elongated clamping elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 wherein the closure includes two,
    essentially rigid members which extend substantially completely along the
    opposite sides of the bag mouth with means cooperating with the members to
    press or hold the bag mouth shut.

    (1)     Note.  The members can be separate bars or opposed portions of a
    one piece clip.

    (2)     Note.  The clamping action must perform the closing function not
    merely secure the closing means to the bag.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    905,    for ductile clamp-like devices.


CLS 383/69
TXT Sliding:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein the closure includes an element
    which slides relative to, and in engagement with bag material in order to
    effect bag closure.


CLS 383/70
TXT Twisted bag mouth:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 having means to facilitate closing the bag
    by turning a portion of the bag so as to form a spiral.


CLS 383/71
TXT Gathered bag mouth:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 having means whereby the material
    surrounding the access opening is "bunched-up" together to close the
    opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     for a plug-type closure which may have the bag mouth gathered about
    it.


CLS 383/72
TXT Including drawstring-type securing element:

    Subject matter under subclass 71 wherein the bag mouth is gathered together
    by a cord or beltlike element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    D3,     Travel Goods, and Personal Belongings, and Storage or Carrying
    Articles, subclass 41 for design patents for cases having drawstrings.


CLS 383/73
TXT With mouth opening aid:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein means is provided to facilitate
    the opening of the bag after it has been closed by the drawstring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     for a bar having means to facilitate manual separation of flattened
    bag walls.


CLS 383/74
TXT With means to maintaining the securing element in closed configuration:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the bag includes means which
    retards or prevent the drawstring from returning to its open-bag
    configuration after it has been used to close the bag.


CLS 383/75
TXT In bag hem:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the bag includes a folded portion
    of bag material which has been secured to the peripheral wall around the
    access opening and wherein the drawstring extends between the folded
    portion and the bag wall.


CLS 383/76
TXT Through bag openings:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the drawstring extends through
    holes in the bag material or interstices of its weave and alternates
    between the interior and exterior of the bag.


CLS 383/77
TXT Securing element consisting of unitary bag portion:

    Subject matter under subclass 71 wherein the closing means includes an
    element which is of "one-piece" with the bag.


CLS 383/78
TXT Including separate closure element for straddling bag mouth (i.e., overlaps
    exterior portions of opposed bag walls):

    Subject matter under subclass 42 wherein the closure includes an initially
    unattached element which is disclosed as being for directly overlying the
    access opening and overlapping the exterior or opposed peripheral wall
    portions when the bag is closed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     for a bag with a similar closure which does not straddle (i.e.,
    overlap exterior portions of) the mouth.

    88,     for a bag closed by folding or rolling the bag walls together and
    then securing it by means of an element secured to two opposing bag walls.


CLS 383/79
TXT Including securing element designed to extend through aligned openings in
    closure element (e.g., stitching):

    Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein element extends through aligned
    holes in opposed portions of the closure element (or interstices in the
    weave) when the bag mouth is closed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    903,    for similar subject matter which is designed to relieve stress at
    particular locations of a bag.


CLS 383/80
TXT Cap-type:

    Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein the bag includes a closure element
    which is designed to overlie the access opening and has a depending skirt
    to flange which is designed to surround the mouth and to overlap adjacent
    areas of the peripheral wall.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include bags having access openings
    whose walls are flattened together before being covered.


CLS 383/81
TXT Reusable:

    Subject matter under subclass 76 wherein the closure element can be used to
    close the bag more than once.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     for a reusable cap-type closure element.

    86,     for similar subject matter for a flap type closure which does not
    straddle the bag mouth (i.e., overlap exterior portions).


CLS 383/82
TXT Bag walls designed to be rolled together or folded on common fold line:

    Subject matter under subclass 81 wherein opposing portions of the
    peripheral bag wall (e.g., front and rear walls are either doubled-over
    along the same line or curled up together when the bag mouth is closed.


CLS 383/83
TXT Bag walls designed to be rolled together or folded on common fold line:

    Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein opposing portions of the
    peripheral bag wall are either doubled-over along the same line or are
    curled up together when the bag mouth is closed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85,     for similar subject matter involving a closure flap which does not
    straddle (i.e., overlap exterior portions of) the bag mouth.

    88,     for bags which are closed by folding the bag walls along a common
    fold line but do not have an element straddling the access opening.


CLS 383/84
TXT Including closure flap which overlaps sidewall exterior when closed:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 wherein the closure comprises a piece of
    material which extends from one bag wall, across the access opening, and
    overlies a portion of the opposed wall when the bag mouth is in the closed
    configuration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     for a bag having a closure flap which straddles (i.e., overlaps
    exterior portions of) the bag mouth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclasses 236+ for an article
    receiver of that class type having a closure flap.


CLS 383/85
TXT Bag walls designed to be rolled together or folded on common fold line:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 wherein opposing peripheral wall portions
    are either doubled over along the same line or are curled up together when
    the bag mouth is closed.


CLS 383/86
TXT Reusable:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 wherein the closure flap can be used to
    close the bag mouth more than once.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85,     for a bag which has an openable closure flap as well as bag walls
    which are designed to be rolled together or folded on a common fold line.


CLS 383/86.1
TXT Including fastening element removably extending through aperture in bag
    material:

    Subject matter under subclass 86 including a securing member having an
    element which passes through a hole in the bag material adjacent the bag
    mouth to keep it closed.


CLS 383/86.2
TXT Aperture extends through closure flap:

    Subject matter under subclass 86.1 wherein the hole in the bag material is
    located in the closure flap.


CLS 383/87
TXT Flap side edges permanently secured to bag (e.g., sandwich bag type):

    Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein the sides of the flap are
    permanently secured to and extend along the bag walls so as to hold the
    flap in overlapped position with respect to the peripheral bag wall.


CLS 383/88
TXT Bag walls designed to be rolled together or folded on common fold line:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 wherein opposing portions of the
    peripheral bag wall (e.g., front and rear walls) are either doubled-over
    along the same line or are curled up together when the bag mouth is closed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     for bags which are closed by a closure element which straddles the
    access opening and which have their bag walls folded on a common fold line
    or rolled together.


CLS 383/89
TXT With separate securing element for roll or fold:

    Subject matter under subclass 88 including means additional to and distinct
    from bag material, for maintaining the rolled or folded portions of the bag
    walls in position when the bag is closed.

    (1)     Note.  The "additional" means may be, for example, an adhesive.


CLS 383/90
TXT Element extends substantially 180o or more around roll or fold:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the securing element is folded
    approximately 1800 or more around the rolled or folded bag walls.


CLS 383/91
TXT Element extends around side edge:

    Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein the securing element is folded
    around a lateral bag edge in a direction which is generally parallel with
    the extent of the bag mouth.


CLS 383/92
TXT Including securing element designed to extend through aligned openings in
    bag material (e.g., stitching):

    Subject matter under subclass 42 wherein an element extends through aligned
    holes in opposed portions of the peripheral wall (or interstices of its
    weave) when the bag mouth is closed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71+,    for similar subject matter which gathers the bag mouth.

    79,     for similar subject matter wherein the securing element
    additionally extends through a separate closure element.


CLS 383/93
TXT Closure within bag:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 wherein the means for closing the access
    opening is located inside the bag peripheral walls.

    (1)     Note.  The closure means may be either a separate element or an
    integral connection between bag walls, e.g., heat seal.


CLS 383/94
TXT Heat seal:

    Subject matter under subclass 93 wherein the closure includes portions of
    bag material which have been welded together.


CLS 383/95
TXT Reusable:

    Subject matter under subclass 93 wherein the closure can be used to close
    the bag more than once.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81      and 86, for reusable closures which straddle or fold across the bag
    mouth, respectively.


CLS 383/96
TXT Stopper or plug:

    Subject matter under subclass 95 wherein the closure is a plug or stopper
    type.


CLS 383/97
TXT Zipper:

    Subject matter under subclass 95 wherein the closure comprises a plurality
    of complementary, interlocking hook members which cooperate with a slider
    or runner which functions to interconnect or separate the hook members.


CLS 383/98
TXT Overlapped flaps:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 wherein the closure includes at least two
    flaps which overlap one another when the bag mouth is closed.

    (1)     Note.  The flaps are usually folded portions of the peripheral wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    for a bag end structure comprising overlapped flaps.


CLS 383/99
TXT Reusable:

    Subject matter under subclass 98 wherein the flaps can be used to close the
    bag more than once.


CLS 383/100
TXT WITH VENTING OR VENTILATION MEANS:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the bag comprises either
    (1) means for relieving positive or negative pressure inside the bag (or
    bag structure), or (2) means which allow circulation of fluid (e.g., air)
    into and out of the bag.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for a bag having a content responsive closure and a vent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclass 429 and Digest 2 for vacuum cleaner bags.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 203.01+ for a receptacle closure comprising
    a pressure responsive vent or valve.


CLS 383/101
TXT Fluid circulates between bag plies:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the vented fluid travels, at
    least in part, between two layers of a multi-layer bag.


CLS 383/102
TXT Previous material:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the element or elements through
    which the venting or ventilating function is effected are made from a
    material which is permeable to the vented fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for a bag having a venting or ventilating opening which is not a
    pore or interstice of the material through which the vented fluid passes.


CLS 383/103
TXT Opening in bag material:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the vented fluid passes through
    an aperture or slit in the bag.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43+,    for a valve bag, which is filled or emptied through the opening.

    102,    for bags which are vented or ventilated through the permeable
    material, (i.e., passes through pores or interstices of the material).


CLS 383/104
TXT FREE-STANDING:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means to maintain the
    bag in an upright configuration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for bags having means which specifically maintain the bag mouth in
    an open configuration (i.e., more than the incidental result of being
    free-standing).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 9.1+ for a bag united with a
    three-dimensional self-sustaining framework, and subclass 400 for a
    removable bag combined with a support, wherein the bag is more than
    nominally claimed.

    248,    Supports, subclass 95 for a bag support, per se, or a removable bag
    support combined with a bag, wherein the claim (1) nominally recites the
    bag, (2) recites only those bag features necessary to cooperate
    specifically with the support, or (3) recited only those bag features which
    have been modified specifically to cooperate with the support.


CLS 383/105
TXT WALL DETAILS:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the peripheral side wall
    includes a specified feature.

    (1)     Note.  The mere recitation of, for example, a "sidewall" or "wall
    panel" is not considered to be a specified feature.


CLS 383/106
TXT Transparent portion or window:

    Subject matter under subclass 105 wherein the peripheral wall is provided
    with means for viewing a portion of the bag content.

    (1)     Note.  A "window" may be nothing more than an aperture through the
    bag material.


CLS 383/107
TXT Specified seam structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 105 including details of a joint which
    connects two parts of the peripheral wall.

    (1)     Note.  The mere recitation of a "seam" or "connection" is not
    included here.


CLS 383/108
TXT Waterproof:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein the seam is constructed so as to
    prevent the passage of liquid through it.


CLS 383/109
TXT Multi-layer or ply:

    Subject matter under subclass 105 wherein the bag material includes more
    than one layer of material over substantially the entire surface area of
    the bag.

    (1)     Note.  A coating is considered to be a "layer" or "ply".


CLS 383/110
TXT Insulated:

    Subject matter under subclass 109 wherein one of the layers is designed to
    retard the transfer of heat therethrough.


CLS 383/111
TXT Removable ply:

    Subject matter under subclass 109 wherein provision is made to allow one of
    the layers to be separated from another.


CLS 383/112
TXT Stretchable layer or ply:

    Subject matter under subclass 109 wherein one of the layers is designed to
    be extended.

    (1)     Note.  A stretchable material may be either elastic or inelastic.


CLS 383/113
TXT Barrier layer or ply (e.g., waterproof):

    Subject matter under subclass 109 wherein one of the plies prevents a
    specified substance from penetrating it.


CLS 383/114
TXT Including specified end structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 109 including details of the bag bottom.


CLS 383/115
TXT Overlapping extension formed by cuts in bag wall:

    Subject matter under subclass 114 wherein portions of the peripheral wall
    located opposite one another, can be folded so as to partially lie one over
    the other; and wherein one of the portions is formed by a pair of slits or
    slots.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126,    for similar end structure where the bag wall is formed of a single
    layer of ply.


CLS 383/116
TXT Coating or lamination:

    Subject matter under subclass 109 wherein at least two layers are
    substantially coextensively bonded to one another.


CLS 383/117
TXT Woven or mesh-type material:

    Subject matter under subclass 105 wherein the bag is made from a material
    which is formed from interengaged or interconnected strands.


CLS 383/118
TXT Stretchable:

    Subject matter under subclass 105 wherein the bag wall material is designed
    to be extended.

    (1)     Note.  A stretchable material may be either elastic or inelastic.


CLS 383/119
TXT Reinforced:

    Subject matter under subclass 105 wherein the peripheral wall of the bag
    includes means which strengthen or stiffen it.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is not intended to be a complete collection of
    reinforced bags.  Therefore, search the appropriate preceding subclass for
    a bag having a reinforcement located in or on a particular element which is
    provided for in that subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for a free standing bag having a reinforced peripheral wall.


CLS 383/120
TXT Pleated or gusseted:

    Subject matter under subclass 105 wherein a portion of the peripheral side
    wall is doubled over or folded.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 118.1 for an open ended casing
    which is not disclosed as being edible.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 802 for a Cross-Reference
    Art Collection of shirred casings.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 106+ for a casing containing food, and subclasses 138+ for a
    casing, either closed or open ended, which is disclosed as being edible.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 35.1+ for an
    inedible food casing having a closed end.


CLS 383/121
TXT END STRUCTURE (E.G. BOTTOM):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the bag includes a
    specified feature of the closed end.


CLS 383/121.1
TXT Rigid bottom:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the bag bottom is made of stiff,
    inflexible material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 904 for a cross- reference art collection of
    buckets and pails.


CLS 383/122
TXT Seamless:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the bag bottom is a continuous,
    unitary segment of two opposing peripheral wall portions.

    (1)     Note.  While no seams are used to form the bottom, other portions
    of the bag may be secured to it by seams.


CLS 383/123
TXT Formed by folding bag walls on common fold line and joining together:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the bag bottom is formed by
    initially doubling over opposed bag walls along a common fold line and
    securing (e.g., gluing) them together.


CLS 383/124
TXT Foldable to form distinct end wall:

    Subject matter under subclass 123 wherein the bag bottom has areas which
    can be overlapped to produce a discernible bottom wall.


CLS 383/125
TXT Overlapping extensions of opposed walls:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein portions of the peripheral wall
    located opposite one another can be folded so as to partially lay over one
    another.


CLS 383/126
TXT Extension formed by cuts in bag wall:

    Subject matter under subclass 125 wherein one of the overlapping extensions
    is disclosed as being formed by a pair of slits or slots in the peripheral
    wall.


CLS 383/127
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a bag not provided for
    else where.


CLS 383/200
TXT BAG HAVING MEANS TO FACILITATE OPENING IT BY SEVERING BAG MATERIAL OR BAG
    PART (E.G., TEARING, CUTTING, PIERCING, ETC.):Subject matter under the
    class definition wherein the bag includes means which facilitate forming an
    access opening by splitting or puncturing the bag material or a bag part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclass 87.05 for a
    wrapper having severing means, subclasses 307+ for an envelope with
    severing means, and subclass 210 for a box having a closure secured by a
    releasable or frangible bond.

     428,   Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 43 for a sheet,
    web, or layer which has been weakened to facilitate tearing and subclasses
    131+, particularly subclass 136, for sheet material having slits or
    apertures.


CLS 383/201
TXT Tearing facilitated by specified fiber or molecular orientation:Subject
    matter under subclass 200 wherein the bag material or an attached tearing
    means includes either filaments or molecules arranged in a particular way
    to make it easier to tear open the bag.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    908,    for an art collection of bags made from material having a specified
    grain direction or molecular orientation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclass 205 for a box
    having a specified fiber or molecular orientation.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 105+ for
    grain, strips, or filamentary elements in respective layers, or components
    in angular relation, subclass 114 for grain, strips, or filamentary
    elements in different layers, or components in parallel relation, and
    subclass 910 for a cross-reference art collection of products made from
    material having molecular orientation.


CLS 383/202
TXT Combined with, or modified for opening by, a sharp-edged cutting implement
    or a piercing implement:Subject matter under subclass 200 combined with, or
    modified for opening by, an instrument having a keen edge or a fine point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205,    for a bag having a separate tearing element (e.g., tear string)
    which is gripped and pulled to open the bag.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, for a cutting implement, per se.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 277+ for a closure having cutting,
    punching, or cutter-accommodating means.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 31+ for a dispensing means having a
    cutter or punch for forming an outlet opening.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 81+ for a dispensing means having a cutter
    or punch for forming a dispensing opening in a container.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclass 204 for a box
    combined with, or modified for opening by, a cutting implement, and
    subclass 308 for an envelope combined with, or modified for opening by, a
    cutting implement.


CLS 383/203
TXT Including means for reclosing the bag:
    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the bag includes structure for
    closing it after it has been opened.


CLS 383/204
TXT Including a bag portion which is completely separated from the bag during
    tearing (e.g., tear strip):Subject matter under subclass 203 wherein the
    bag is torn open by detaching part of the bag from the remainder of the bag.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209,    for a bag having a line of weakness which delineates substantially
    the entire tearing path and having a portion which is completely separated
    during tearing.


CLS 383/205
TXT Including a separate tearing element which is gripped and pulled to open
    the bag:Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the opening means
    includes a member which is not of one-piece construction with the bag but
    is attached to it and is manually grasped and drawn away from the bag
    during tearing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 254+ for a bottle or jar closure which
    is opened by pulling a separate tearing element.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 279+ for a closure which is opened by
    pulling a separate tearing element.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 238+ for a
    box which is openable by pulling a separate tearing element and subclasses
    309+ for an envelope which is openable by pulling a separate tearing
    element.


CLS 383/206
TXT Cord, string, wire, or thread:
    Subject matter under subclass 205 wherein the separate tearing element is a
    slender, flexible, filamentlike element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclass 257 for a bottle or jar closure having a
    wire or string rip cord.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 279+ for a closure having a thread, string,
    cord, or wire for tearing it open.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclass 239 for a box
    having a thread, string, cord, or wire for tearing it open and subclass 311
    for an envelope having a thread, string, cord, or wire for tearing it open.


CLS 383/207
TXT Line of weakness delineates substantially the entire tearing path:Subject
    matter under subclass 200 wherein the bag includes a line of reduced
    strength which defines almost all of the extent of the tearing.


CLS 383/208
TXT Line of perforations having means for preventing leakage before
    opening:Subject matter under subclass 207 wherein the line of weakness is a
    series of holes or incisions through the bag material and wherein the bag
    includes structure to prevent passage of fluent material through the holes
    or incisions.


CLS 383/209
TXT Bag portion completely separated from the bag during tearing:Subject matter
    under subclass 207 wherein the bag is torn open by detaching part of the
    bag from the remainder of the bag.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204,    for a reclosable bag having a portion which is completely separated
    during tearing.


CLS 383/210
TXT BAG CLOSURE SECURED BY A RELEASABLE OR FRANGIBLE BOND (E.G., PEEL
    SEAL):Subject matter under the class definition wherein at least two parts
    of the bag are secured together by a peelable or frangible adhering means
    (e.g., glue, heat seal, etc.) so that the parts may be easily separated
    without tearing the bag or the bag closure to gain access to the contents
    of the bag.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclass 80.5 for an
    envelope having a releasable or frangible bond, subclass 123.1 for a box
    having a separate peelable closure or securing element, and subclasses 245+
    for releasably bonded box parts.


CLS 383/211
TXT Adhesive bond:
    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein the releasable or frangible bond
    is formed by means of a sticky substance (e.g., glue) which has been
    applied to the bag or closure.



    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 383/901
TXT HOT WATER OR ICE BAG:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the bag is intended to be
    used to hold a hot or  cold substance, usually to warm or cool a portion of
    a users body.


CLS 383/902
TXT HAVING NONBAG USE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the bag is intended to be
    used for something other than holding contents intended to be removed.


CLS 383/903
TXT STRESS RELIEF:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the bag includes means
    for preventing strains from occurring or means for distributing strains to
    prevent tearing.


CLS 383/904
TXT FILLING TUBE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the bag includes a
    conduit through which contents are inserted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39+,    for "valve bags".


CLS 383/905
TXT DEAD FOLD (DUCTILE) CLOSURE ELEMENT:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the bag includes a
    closing means made of malleable material so that it will stay in a given
    position.


CLS 383/906
TXT DISPENSING FEATURE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the bag includes
    specified means for facilitating the removal of contents.


CLS 383/907
TXT PECULIAR, PARTICULAR SHAPE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the bag has an unusual,
    specified shape.


CLS 383/908
TXT MATERIAL HAVING SPECIFIED GRAIN DIRECTION OR MOLECULAR ORIENTATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the bag is made from a
    material which has either fibers or molecules aligned in a specified
    direction.


CLS 384/
TTL BEARINGS

CLS 384/
TXT

    I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    This class is the generic class for devices, known as bearings, designed
    for general use, where one element continuously bears the weight of
    another, either suspended therefrom, or imposed thereon, and wherein there
    is either linear motion (e.g., a cross head) rotary motion (e.g., of a
    shaft or axle), or oscillating movement, (e.g., a lever) between the two
    elements. The bearings may have either sliding, or rolling contact with the
    supported member.

    The class includes (a) supports for bearings where such supports are
    specially formed to receive, and are placed in combination with, bearings,
    and when not limited to any classified art; (b) antifriction means, as
    balls, or rollers, designed to receive a rotating shaft, or to be used in
    connection with a pivoted, sliding, or rotary element; and (c) lubricating
    devices wherein any of the above bearings are modified for receiving and
    supplying lubricant.

    This class including methods pertaining to bearings, when not otherwise
    provided for.

    (1)     Note.  Patents issued prior to 1950 have not in all instances been
    classified by their claimed disclosure so that placement of these older
    patents does not necessarily indicate lines of classification.

    (2)     Note.  Necessary but not particularly sufficient criteria for
    inclusion in this class are that the "bearing" (1) have at least two moving
    parts that slide or roll against one another and (2) should be intended to
    reduce friction between significantly more massive elements than the
    bearing itself.

    II.     GENERAL LINES WITH OTHER CLASSES AND MISCELLANEOUS SEARCH NOTES.

    (1)     Note.  Where the bearing forms but an element of a structure, and
    the claims are not limited to the bearing, or bearing support structure,
    see the appropriate art class.

    (2)     Note.  Claimed compositions of matter even though particularly
    adapted for use as bearings, or composition, per se, claimed either alone,
    or with other claims to a bearing element, are classified in the
    appropriate composition class (e.g., Class 75, Specialized Metallurgical
    Processes, Compositions for Use Therein, Consolidated Metal Powder
    Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate Mixtures, and Compositions etc.)
    and cross-referenced here.

            Also where a product is claimed as a stock material, that is,
    without sufficient structure in the claims to limit the product to bearing
    use, it is classified in Class 428, Stock Material or Miscellaneous
    Articles.

    (3)     Note.  Many objects, such as, auto wheels, conveyor rollers or
    etc., theoretically meet the criteria in (2) Note 1. GENERAL STATEMENT OF
    CLASS SUBJECT MATTER but are nonetheless not bearings as commonly
    understood and as such are not classified in this class, see search class
    for placement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 18+ for casters, 45+ for wheels
    and wheel attaching devices, 86.1+ for door, or gate hangers and 128+ for
    hinges.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 898+ for processes of making bearings.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 122+ for alloys.

    82,     Turning, subclass 30 for bearing used in connection with lathe head
    stocks.

    84,     Music, subclass 228 for pedal bearings.

    104,    Railways, subclass 46 for turntable bearings.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 79 for inside drive boses for
    locomotives.

    114,    Ships, subclass 169 for post bearings.

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, appropriate subclasses for wheels and
    bearings.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus which includes bearings, or guides.

    184,    Lubrication, for lubrication devices separable from, or not a part
    of, the bearing, or not including any modified structure of the bearing.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 260+ for an end connection for a vehicle
    leaf spring in the form of a rotary bearing.

    295,    Railway Wheels and Axle, appropriate subclasses for wheels and
    bearings.

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, appropriate subclasses for wheels
    and bearings.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 155 and electric
    meter bearings.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems, or Devices, subclass 324 for
    bearings for clocks and watches.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 354+ for guideway, or bearings for
    carriage and subclasses 441+ for bearings for type bar pivot support.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 52+ for articulated joints.

    464,    Rotary Shaft, Gudgeons, Housing, and Flexible Couplings for Rotary
    Shafts, appropriate subclasses for shafting, or shaft casings.

    508,    Solid Antifriction Devices, Materials Therefor, Lubricant and
    Separant Compositions for Moving Solid Surfaces, and Miscellaneous Mineral
    Oil Compositions, for subject matter as explained in the class title.


CLS 384/1
TXT VIBRATORY, (E.G., PIEZOELECTRIC, OR KINETIC BEARING):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein vibration e.g., brought
    about by a piezoelectric effect, results in reduced friction, either
    through creation of a fluid film or otherwise; or where motion in one
    direction is used to reduce the friction coefficient in another direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for fluid linear bearings.

    100+,   for fluid rotary bearings.


CLS 384/2
TXT NONJOINT, NONROTATING FULCRUM BEARING:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein there is angular movement
    of the axis of a supported element with respect to a supporting element
    about a pivot point and where a ball or roller at the pivot point, if
    present, does not move.

    (1)     Note. "Flexural pivots" (flexible joints) is specifically excluded
    both from Class 384, since they are actually a form of flexible joint.
    Where there is any indication that a device function as a flexible joint,
    it is classified in Class 403 subclass 291.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not include "pivot pin" type bearings,
    where there is rotation about the axis of a shaft.  Such a bearing is
    considered a rotary bearing, even if it rotates through only a small
    fraction of a circle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154+,   for shaft-type pivots for limited rotary movement.

    203+    and 206+, for self-aligning ball and socket.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclasses 246+, 253+ and 264 for a similar
    bearing in combination with a weigher.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 119+ for two members connected
    together by a joint which includes a pivot.


CLS 384/3
TXT Knife-edge fulcrum:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the fulcrum is the edge of a
    wedge-shaped element.


CLS 384/4
TXT Edges up and down:

    Subject matter under subclass 3 wherein there are plural edges, one of
    which points toward, and another of which points away, from the center of
    the earth.


CLS 384/5
TXT Edge up:

    Subject matter under subclass 3 wherein an edge points away from the center
    of the earth.


CLS 384/6
TXT Edge down:

    Subject matter under subclass 3 wherein an edge points toward the center of
    the earth.


CLS 384/7
TXT LINEAR BEARING:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which a supported element has
    sliding or line movement in a straight direction, on a supporting element.

    (1)     Note.  A race is the object upon which the raceway is formed.  A
    raceway is a bearing contact surface, that is, the surface upon which
    another raceway slides or upon which a rolling element, such as a ball or
    roller, rolls.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 52+ for two or more members
    connected together by a joint which includes a guide or slide.


CLS 384/8
TXT With detection, nonbearing magnetic or hydraulic feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 including means for inspection or detection
    of bearing element conditions, or magnetic features not functioning as a
    magnetic bearing, or means for hydraulic support or damping of a bearing
    element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for temperature, electrical or orthogonal feature.

    12,     for fluid linear bearings.

    13+,    for lubricating linear bearings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 90.5 for a
    magnetic bearing.


CLS 384/9
TXT With temperature, electrical or orthogonal feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 including means for temperature control,
    compensation, or insulation, or means for electrical functions, or means
    providing for linear movement in at least two directions at right angles to
    each other.


CLS 384/10
TXT Tensioned or resilient race or roller member:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein means are provided to tension a
    bearing contact surface element, or wherein a race or rolling element is of
    a material that bounces or springs back to shape.


CLS 384/11
TXT For crosshead:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein the bearing is for joining a piston
    rod to a connecting rod.


CLS 384/12
TXT Fluid bearing:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein fluid under pressure is used to
    support an element in whole or in part during relative rectilinear movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for linear bearing lubrication.

    100+,   for rotary fluid bearings.


CLS 384/13
TXT Lubricating:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 having means in the bearing for allowing
    lubricant to reach a bearing surface and means for lubricating the bearing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    184,    Lubrication, subclasses 5 and 100, for slide bearing lubricators
    and subclasses 24+ for piston rod lubricators.


CLS 384/14
TXT Bearing for valve stem:

    Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein the bearing supports a valve stem.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,             for a valve stem bearing.

    29,     for a cylindrical outer race.


CLS 384/15
TXT Combined with seal or guard:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 including means for shielding the exposed
    parts of the bearing or for preventing matter form entering into, passing
    through, or escaping therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130+,   for seals for plain rotary bearings and especially subclass 137 for
    scrapers.

    477+,   for seals for radial antifriction bearings.

    607+,   for seals for thrust antifriction bearing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, appropriate
    subclasses for guides or seals, per se, of the flexible partition type.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 345+ for a seal between relatively movable parts (i.e.,
    a dynamic seal).


CLS 384/16
TXT Annular:

    Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein the seal is ring shaped.


CLS 384/17
TXT For extension table:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein a bearing is part of means to allow
    the area of a table surface to be increased.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 65+ for guides
    in a coplanar extension surface extension table.


CLS 384/18
TXT Ball bearing for drawer:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein a ball bearing is designed to
    support a drawer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 334.1+ for similar
    antifriction guides in combination with or involving particulars of
    relation with a cabinet and a horizontally slidable component.


CLS 384/19
TXT Roller bearing for drawer:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein a roller bearing is designed to
    support a drawer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 334.1+, 349 and 350 for
    guides with antifriction bearings in combination with or involving
    particulars or relation with a cabinet and a horizontally slidable
    component.


CLS 384/20
TXT Plain bearing for drawer:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein a bearing having sliding friction
    contact is designed to support drawers for sliding movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 312, 330.1+, 349, and 350
    for guides or slides combined with structure of a cabinet and a
    rectilinearly movable component thereof, or involving particulars of
    relationship with a cabinet or its movable components.


CLS 384/21
TXT Stop, detent, or lock:

    Subject matter under subclass 20 wherein means are specified to limit
    relative movement of bearing races.


CLS 384/22
TXT Anchoring or aligning means:

    Subject matter under subclass 20 wherein means are specified to attach the
    bearing to a drawer or cabinet structure, or to correctly position the
    bearing, drawer and cabinet with respect to one another.

    (1)     Note.  The positioning may be done automatically, as for example,
    by a resilient element.


CLS 384/23
TXT Specified race structure or material:

    Subject matter under subclass 20 having particularly described race shape
    or material of a race.


CLS 384/24
TXT Having relatively movable parts for lateral insertion and retention of
    shaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 in which the supporting element comprises
    relatively movable parts, said parts in one relative position permitting
    the supported element to be moved into supported position in a direction
    transverse to the direction sliding or line movement, and relatively
    movable parts movable, to a second relative position to prevent movement of
    the supported element in a direction transverse to the direction of sliding
    or line movement, without interfering with said sliding or line movement.


CLS 384/25
TXT Combined plain and antifriction:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 where bearing support is provided partly by
    a sliding friction bearing and partly by a separate rolling friction
    bearing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for combined linear ball and roller antifriction bearings.


CLS 384/26
TXT Plain bearings:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein the sliding or line movement is of
    friction type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclasses 406+ and 409+ for a guiding device for an elevator car.


CLS 384/27
TXT For flush tank:

    Subject matter under subclass 26 wherein the bearing is for a toilet flush
    tank valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 397+ for a float
    type flush tank discharge valve having a seating guide.


CLS 384/28
TXT For valve stem:

    Subject matter under subclass 26 wherein the bearing is for a valve stem
    shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for a valve stem bearing with lubricating means.


CLS 384/29
TXT Cylindrical outer race:

    Subject matter under subclass 26 in which the supported element is guided
    in its sliding or line movement in a cylindrical bore means which
    constitutes the outer member.

    (1)     Note.  Where the guiding action is secondary, as in a piston, see
    the appropriate art class.

    (2)     Note.  Borehole or well casing contacting structure is classified
    in Class 175 subclass 325 even though specific wear surface structure is
    claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14      and 28,  for bearings used with valve stems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclasses 241.1+ for centering or friction drag means for
    well devices, the primary purpose of which is to center the device while
    stationary or to act as a relatively stationary point of reference to
    enable manipulation of a well device.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 325.1+ for bore wall
    engaging means.


CLS 384/30
TXT For die set or stamping mill shaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 29 wherein the bearing is for guiding means
    such as a die set, stamp mill, battery stamp, or vulcanizing press.


CLS 384/31
TXT For hand-held drill shaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 29 wherein the bearing is to support the
    shaft of a hand-held drill.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 24 for above ground bearings with laterally
    moving segments which may guide the shaft of a well drill.

    (2)     Note.  See note to subclass 29 for line between this class and
    Class 175, "Boring or Penetrating the Earth".


CLS 384/32
TXT For piston rod:

    Subject matter under subclass 29 where the bearing is for a piston rod
    shaft.


CLS 384/34
TXT For seat:

    Subject matter under subclass 26 wherein the bearing is used for adjusting
    a seat for linear translation, generally an auto vehicle seat.


CLS 384/35
TXT More than two telescoping members:

    Subject matter under subclass 26 wherein at least a third bearing race
    moves relative to two other relatively longitudinally translating races.


CLS 384/36
TXT For structural installation:

    Subject matter under subclass 26 wherein the bearing is used for permitting
    small relative movement for large structures, such as bridge components.


CLS 384/37
TXT Resilient supporting member:

    Subject matter under subclass 26 having a resilient element for supporting
    the bearing.

    (1)     Note.  The resilient supporting member does not include the bearing
    contact surface, i.e., the race.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for a linear resilient race.


CLS 384/38
TXT Self-aligning:

    Subject matter under subclass 26 having means for automatically adjusting a
    bearing surface orientation for optimum efficiency.

    (1)     Note.  Self-aligning linear bearings which empty resilient material
    for self-alignment feature are found in subclass 37.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for resilient supporting member.


CLS 384/39
TXT Gib:

    Subject matter under subclass 26 comprising an element which is adjustable
    for keeping a linear bearing race correctly aligned.

    (1)     Note.  The gib may also include adjustment means.


CLS 384/40
TXT With adjustment means:

    Subject matter under subclass 26 including means to move the bearing or
    structure supporting the bearing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for adjustment means and a gib.


CLS 384/41
TXT Assembling means:

    Subject matter under subclass 26 wherein a bearing and/or its related
    support structure comprise structure for allowing assembly.


CLS 384/42
TXT Specified pad, liner, wear plate or race structure; bearing material:

    Subject matter under subclass 26 having a particularly recited race or
    bearing material of a bearing race.

    (1)     Note.  A pad, liner, wear plate are more specific means for objects
    functioning as races.


CLS 384/43
TXT Recirculating:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein roller or ball antifriction
    elements circulate within an endless race track, e.g., raceway, part of the
    time in a loaded, and part of the time in an unloaded state.

    (1)     Note.  The track usually has one loaded straightway, the one
    unloaded straightway which are parallel, and circular endways connecting
    the straightaways.

    (2)     Note.  A race is the object upon which the raceway is formed.  A
    raceway is a bearing contact surface, that is, the surface upon which the
    other raceway slides or on which a rolling element, such as a ball or
    roller, rolls.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    415,    for recirculating antifriction bearing for a rotary shaft.


CLS 384/44
TXT Roller:

    Subject matter under subclass 432 wherein the antifriction elements are
    rollers e.g., cylindrical, tapered, barrel-shaped, needle-shaped, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    565,    for roller structure.


CLS 384/45
TXT No cylindrical race:

    Subject matter under subclass 43 wherein no race is cylindrical.

    (1)     Note.  A single longitudinal groove in an otherwise cylindrical
    race shall not be enough to qualify subject matter for this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The cylindrical member is usually a shaft, and the groove is
    generally a form of anti-rotation key.


CLS 384/46
TXT Roller bearing for extension cylinder:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 comprising a pulley-type roller bearing for
    a relatively long shaft such as that employed in railroad switch
    pull-shafts, or pull-shafts for oil well stripper pumps.


CLS 384/47
TXT Alternating roller; or antifriction bearing for auto seat:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein the bearing comprises (1) rollers
    which alternate in the orientation of their axis of rotation; or (2) a ball
    or roller bearing for linear adjustment of a automobile type seat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops subclasses 65+ auto seat or other
    vehicle structure and bearings.


CLS 384/48
TXT Combined ball and roller bearings:

    Subject matter under subclass  7 wherein both ball and roller bearings are
    used separately but in the same bearing assembly.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include bearings where one type of
    bearing facilitates movement of another type of bearing of which it is a
    part, as for example, when a roller bearing is journaled on a shaft via
    ball bearings.  Such bearings would classified as roller bearings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     for a roller bearing journaled on a shaft via ball bearings.


CLS 384/49
TXT Ball bearing:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein the linear antifriction element is
    a ball.

    (1)     Note.  Roller antifriction elements in a linear antifriction
    bearing often have their own radial bearing systems, which may include ball
    bearings, but because the linear antifriction element is a roller, these
    devices are classified in subclass 50 below, and not in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Where different embodiments use balls in one embodiment and
    rollers in another, they are included here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for linear ball an roller antifriction bearings.


CLS 384/50
TXT Roller bearing:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 comprising a roller antifriction element
    which has a particular shape e.g., cylindrical, tapered, barrel, needle,
    etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    548,    for roller bearing for a rotary bearing.


CLS 384/51
TXT Cage configuration:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 comprising specified cage structure.


CLS 384/52
TXT Cylindrical inner or outer track:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein an inner race is a shaft or an
    outer race is a cylindrical bore, or both.


CLS 384/53
TXT Location or plural roller sets; more than two telescoping members:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein: (a) spatial relationship of more
    than two linear sets of rollers in specified; or (b) three or more sets of
    races are nested now within the other, each movable relative to the other
    two.


CLS 384/54
TXT Resilient member:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein a resilient element is used in a
    bearing or support.

    (1)     Note. The resilient element need not be a support element it may
    also be a race, cage, or rolling element.


CLS 384/55
TXT Raceway configuration:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein the shape of the raceway surface
    is specified and is not a flat surface, unless the precise degree of
    flatness is indicated.


CLS 384/56
TXT Nonaxle-supported roller structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein roller structure is specified,
    other than cases wherein a roller is journaled on a shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for roller-on-shaft structure.


CLS 384/57
TXT Adjustment or self-alignment means:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 having means to change the position of the
    bearing.

    (1)     Note.  The change of position may be automatic, e.g., self-aligning.


CLS 384/58
TXT Roller-on-axle bearing:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein structure is specified of a roller
    that rotates about a shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein structure is specified of a roller
    that rotates about a shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for freely-rotating roller structure.


CLS 384/59
TXT Assembling means:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein a bearing is designed to
    facilitate assembly either of the bearing itself or of the bearing on its
    support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191.3,  for assembling railway car journals.

    244,    for means to assemble or disassemble a bearing and its support.

    724+,   for means to assemble or disassemble a bearing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 898+ and particularly subclasses 898.06+,
    898.07 and 898.08  for process of manufacturing bearings.


CLS 384/91
TXT ROTARY BEARING:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the relative motion
    between the two elements includes a rotary component.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses include subcombination of
    bearings not otherwise classified.


CLS 384/92
TXT Roller drill bit type:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 for specified bearing structure for a
    rotary bit in which a cutter element, or carrier for a fixed cutter is
    rotatably mounted thereon so that the cutter element, or carrier may roll,
    or tend to roll on a surface of a borehole as the bit is rotated.

    (1)     Note.  Patents have been classified in this and indented subclasses
    which claim a portion of a bit which supports the specified bearing, or a
    specified bearing disclosed for a roller drill bit.

    (2)     Note.  A drill bit with details of the bit is in Class 175.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 227+ for storage means
    for bit lubricant carried by bit, or shaft and subclasses 371+ for a bit
    earth cutter having details of the bit and see search note for Class line.


CLS 384/93
TXT Lubricating detail:
    Subject matter under subclass 92 having specified structure, or details of
    a bearing lubrication system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is limited to liquid, or grease type
    lubrication systems.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95,     for a solid lubricant in, or on a bearing surface.


CLS 384/94
TXT Seal detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 92 wherein a bearing seal has specified
    details such as shape, or material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130,    for a plain bearing with a specified seal.


CLS 384/95
TXT Inserts or bearing surface detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 92 in which a bearing surface is modified (a)
    to receive a different material in a portion of the surface, (b) to receive
    thin strips (c) by special treatment to improve its antifriction, or wear
    resisting properties, or (d) by specified material therefor.


CLS 384/96
TXT Roller cone retaining means:

    Subject matter under subclass 92 including means to hold a roller cone on
    its supporting shaft.


CLS 384/97
TXT Water lubricated propeller shaft or well shaft type:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 for supporting either a propellor shaft,
    or a well pump shaft and is lubricated by water.

    (1)     Note.  Patents have been classified in this and indented subclasses
    which claim a shaft and specified bearing, or a specified bearing disclosed
    for shaft lubricated by water.


CLS 384/98
TXT With elongated strips or staves:

    Subject matter under subclass 97 including discreet axially, narrow and
    long elements placed next to each other to form the bearing surface.


CLS 384/99
TXT Hydraulic or pneumatic bearing support:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 wherein the bearing contact surface, or a
    portion thereof is movable mounted and is acted upon and supported by a
    hydraulic, or pneumatic system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100+,   for a fluid bearing.


CLS 384/100
TXT Fluid bearing:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 wherein fluid pressure is used to support
    an element wholly, or partially, balance the bearing, or resist the
    vertical, or horizontal thrust of a rotary element by interposing a layer
    that in operation eliminates contact between relatively rotating elements.

    (1)     Note.  Fluid (i.e., liquid, or gas) support and lubrication both
    involve interposing a fluid between relatively moving members.  In general,
    the difference between them is that lubrication merely minimizes contact
    between the members, whereas fluid support eliminates it altogether via a
    thicker layer of fluid.  Almost all gas bearings, or hydrodynamic, or
    hydrostatic bearings, involve fluid support

    (2)     Note.  If relatively moving elements can either rotate, or slide
    they are in these subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322,    for lubricating a bearing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 170 for roll type presses having a yieldable
    mounted roll and in which the yield force is transmitted by fluid pressure.

    384,    Bearings, subclass 12 for a linear fluid bearing.


CLS 384/101
TXT With antifriction bearing:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 including an antifriction bearing.

    (1)     Note.  The plain and the antifriction bearings are used either
    simultaneously. or alternatively.


CLS 384/102
TXT Backup:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein the antifriction bearing
    functions as a backup bearing during fluid bearing breakdown, during
    start-up, or low, or reversed speeds.


CLS 384/103
TXT Flexible member:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 having a pliant element which is between
    relatively moveable bearing parts to form areas for the fluid.

    (1)     Note.  There are usually plural flexible members to form pad like
    areas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 124 and 125, for ground effect vehicle
    support platforms.


CLS 384/104
TXT Plural ends fixed:

    Subject matter under subclass 103 wherein the flexible element is connected
    to a relatively rotating bearing part at more than one end of the flexible
    element.


CLS 384/105
TXT Thrust bearing:

    Subject matter under subclass 103 designed for loads imposed in the
    direction of the axis rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    420,    for thrust bearings, and see search note.


CLS 384/106
TXT Auxiliary resilient support:

    Subject matter under subclass 103 wherein the flexible element is supported
    by separate resilient elements.


CLS 384/107
TXT Radial and thrust:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 designed for loads imposed both in the
    direction of the axis of rotation and normal to the axis of rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    for a fluid bearing and an antifriction bearing.

    228,    for plain thrust and radial bearing.


CLS 384/108
TXT Spherical:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein a relatively rotating element has
    at least a portion of the bearing surface concaved, or ball shaped.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206+,   for ball and socket plain bearing.


CLS 384/109
TXT Gas bearing:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein the fluid is a gas.


CLS 384/110
TXT Conical:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein a relatively rotating element has
    a cone shaped bearing surface.


CLS 384/111
TXT Outer recess forming fluid pad:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein the outer bearing has a
    nonannular cavity of significant axial and circumferential extent for
    receiving fluid.

    (1)     Note.  There can be plural pads in a bearing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118,    for radial outer recess forming fluid pad.


CLS 384/112
TXT Grooved thrust bearing surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein the thrust bearing surface has a
    narrow furrow, or hollow cut for receiving the fluid.


CLS 384/113
TXT Central member recess:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein an inner relatively rotating
    element has a groove, or passage for receiving the fluid.

    (1)     Note.  The groove, or passage may be located in the thrust bearing
    portion, in the radial bearing portion, or in both.

    (2)     Note.  There may be plural grooves, or passages in the bearing.


CLS 384/114
TXT Radial:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 designed for loads imposed only normal to
    the axis of rotation.


CLS 384/115
TXT Shaft recess:

    Subject matter under subclass 114 wherein an inner relatively rotating
    element has a groove, or passage for receiving the fluid.

    (1)     Note.  There may be plural grooves, or passages in the shaft.


CLS 384/116
TXT Half-circular or less outer member:

    Subject matter under subclass 114 wherein the outer bearing structure is
    semicircular, or less than 180 in extent.


CLS 384/117
TXT Pivoted fluid pad:

    Subject matter under subclass 114 wherein the bearing has a cavity in its
    surface for receiving the fluid and also has a rocking, or tilting movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    for a thrust bearing having a pivoted fluid pad.

    309,    for a load distributing pivoted pad and see search notes.


CLS 384/118
TXT Outer recess forming fluid pad:

    Subject matter under subclass 114 wherein the outer bearing has a
    nonannular cavity of significant axial and circumferential extent for
    receiving the fluid.

    (1)     Note.  There can be plural pads in a bearing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111,    for an outer recess forming fluid pad for a radial and thrust
    bearing.


CLS 384/119
TXT Resilient mounting member or seal:

    Subject matter under subclass 114 having a material that bounces, or
    springs back to shape and takes at least part of the weight of supporting
    the bearing surface and permits relative movement, or vibration thereof
    with respect to a support and/or means for preventing matter from entering
    into, passing through, or escaping from the bearing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124,    for a thrust fluid bearing resilient mounting member, or seal.

    130+,   for a bearing with a seal.

    215+,   for a resilient mounting member for a   plain bearing.


CLS 384/120
TXT Circumferentici groove in outer member:

    Subject matter under subclass 114 wherein the bearing surface of an outer
    relatively rotating element has a narrow furrow, or hollow cut that is
    around its periphery for receiving the fluid.


CLS 384/121
TXT Thrust:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 designed for loads imposed in the
    direction of the axis of rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    420+,   for thrust bearing and see search notes.


CLS 384/122
TXT Pivoted fluid pad:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the bearing has a cavity in its
    surface for receiving the fluid and also has a rocking, or tilting movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for a radial bearing having a pivoted fluid pad.

    309+,   for a load distributing pivoted pad and see search notes.


CLS 384/123
TXT Grooved bearing surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the bearing surface has a narrow
    furrow, or hollow cut for passage of the fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    for a fluid radial and thrust bearing wherein the thrust bearing is
    grooved.


CLS 384/124
TXT Resilient mounting member or seal:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 having a material that bounces, or
    springs back into shape and takes at least part of the weight of supporting
    the bearing surface and permits relative movement, or vibration thereof
    with respect to a support and/or means for preventing matter from entering
    into, passing through, or escaping from the bearing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    for a radial fluid bearing resilient mounting member, or seal.

    130+,   for a bearing with a seal.

    215+,   for a resilient mounting member for a plain bearing.


CLS 384/125
TXT Resilient bearing surfaces:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 wherein the bearing contact surface is a
    material that bounces, or springs back to shape.


CLS 384/126
TXT Plural bearing, one plain and one antifriction:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 including antifriction bearing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101+,   for a fluid bearing and an antifriction bearing.

    194,    for a self-adjusting thrust and radial plain bearing.

    228,    for a thrust and radial plain bearing.


CLS 384/127
TXT Roller:

    Subject matter under subclass 126 wherein the antifriction bearing includes
    an element that rolls during use.


CLS 384/128
TXT Tapered roller:

    Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein the element has a gradual
    decrease in width.


CLS 384/129
TXT Plain bearing:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 having sliding, or line contact with the
    support element, or with the rotary, or oscillating shaft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 111+ for a pivotal, or
    oscillating movement of a lever.


CLS 384/130
TXT With specified seal:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 including means for preventing matter
    from entering into, passing through, or escaping from the bearing.

    (1)     Note.  The bearing and seal can be integral e.g., bearing
    constructed to act as a seal or vice versa or the bearing modified to
    receive, or otherwise cooperate with a seal.

    (2)     Note.  A broadly recited seal, e.g., seal, bearing seal, etc.,
    which recites no structure is placed below in the schedule.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100+,   for a fluid bearing which includes seals.

    322+,   for lubricating which include a broadly recited seal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 345+ for a seal between relatively movable parts (i.e.,
    a dynamic seal).


CLS 384/131
TXT Fluid actuated:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein the seal is moved by a fluid.


CLS 384/132
TXT Fluid barrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein the seal comprises a sealing
    barrier of liquid, of gas, or of a mixture of both.

    (1)     Note.  These subclasses includes centrifugal means to pump a
    sealing fluid.


CLS 384/133
TXT Magnetic fluid:

    Subject matter under subclass 132 wherein the sealing barrier is a liquid
    which contains magnetic properties.


CLS 384/134
TXT Gas:

    Subject matter under subclass 132 wherein the barrier fluid is a gas.


CLS 384/135
TXT Centrifugal:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein the seal is moved, or held in
    place by centrifugal force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132+,   for centrifugal means to pump a sealing fluid.


CLS 384/136
TXT With wick:

    Subject matter under subclass 135 including a fibrous element which acts as
    a reservoir and/or a distributing means.


CLS 384/137
TXT And scraper:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 having means to remove excess lubricant
    from the shaft and return it to the lubricant reservoir, or for removing
    material from the shaft about to enter the bearing from its outside.


CLS 384/138
TXT Unitary bearing and seal:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein the bearing and seal is one
    element.


CLS 384/139
TXT Relatively rotatable radially contacting:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein the seal comprises relatively
    rotatable elements presenting complementary sealing surfaces normal to, or
    at an oblique angle to the axis of rotation.


CLS 384/140
TXT Flexible sealing member:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 where the relatively rotating radially
    contacting sealing element is made of flexible material.


CLS 384/141
TXT Diaphragm:

    Subject matter under subclass 140 wherein the flexible seal is attached to
    one of the rotatable elements and to a part which is axially movable
    therewith.


CLS 384/142
TXT Axially translatable member rotatable with shaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein one of the relatively rotatable
    elements is axially movable and is mounted on a shaft for rotation
    therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149,    for a radially contained seal with axially acting follower.


CLS 384/143
TXT Plural seals:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 where there is more than one seal.


CLS 384/144
TXT Labyrinth:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein the seal has a succession of
    baffles which define a slight clearance to create a series of throttling
    zones to impede the passage of fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132+,   for a fluid barrier seal.


CLS 384/145
TXT Arcuate bearing surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein the seal conforms to a bearing
    surface which has a shape of a sphere to permit angular, or lateral
    movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206+,   for a ball and socket which is self-adjusting.


CLS 384/146
TXT Axially spaced lip:

    Subject matter under subclass 145 wherein the seal includes a projecting
    rim extending axially of the major seat engaging part of the seal.


CLS 384/147
TXT Lip seal:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein the seal includes a projecting
    rim for contacting a relatively moving element to be sealed, the rim
    extends axially of the center of the seal seat.


CLS 384/148
TXT With radially acting bias means:

    Subject matter under subclass 147 including means tending to urge the seal
    in a radial direction.


CLS 384/149
TXT Radially contained seal with axially acting follower:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein the seal is in an assembly
    comprising a chamber and an element coaxial therewith, wherein the seal is
    within the chamber and an element exerts an axial thrust on the sealing
    causing it to be moved radially into a sealing engagement with the chamber
    and a shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142,    for an axially translatable member rotatable with shaft.


CLS 384/150
TXT Mechanically actuated:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein the seal is moved by mechanical
    means e.g., a nut, or separate resilient elements etc.


CLS 384/151
TXT Resilient sealing surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein the seal is on the outer area of
    the bearing, or shaft and is made of a resilient material.


CLS 384/152
TXT O-rings:

    Subject matter under subclass 151 wherein the seal is in the shape of a
    round, or oval ring.


CLS 384/153
TXT Elastomeric:

    Subject matter under subclass 151 wherein the resilient material is an
    elastomer.


CLS 384/154
TXT Rocking type bearing:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein the relatively rotating element
    has a limited and reciprocating rotary motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, subclass 2 for a bearing of the pivot type.


CLS 384/155
TXT Lubricated:

    Subject matter under subclass 154 wherein the bearing includes lubricating
    material, or means for lubricating the bearing surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322+,   for lubricating of bearings.


CLS 384/156
TXT Movable pivot axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 154 wherein the axis of the bearing shifts
    its position in a cyclical manner during the reciprocating rotary motion.


CLS 384/157
TXT For plow or colter disk:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 having means for supporting the bearing
    which receives a hub, or rotary shaft of a plow, or colter disk.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 518+, for rolling, or rotating earth
    working tools including bearings for disks, or colters and see search notes.

    384,    Bearings, subclass 460, for an antifriction bearing mounting, for a
    disk plow.


CLS 384/158
TXT Railway car journal:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein a radial bearing and or a
    housing, e.g., box, is designed specifically for railway car journal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    459,    for railway antifriction bearing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    295,    Railway Wheels and Axles, appropriate subclasses for car wheel and
    axle construction and wheel attaching devices.


CLS 384/158.1
TXT With resilient mounting member:

    Subject matter under subclass 158 having a material that bounces or springs
    back into shape and takes at least part of the weight of supporting the
    bearing and permits relative movement or vibration thereof with respect to
    a support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215+,   for a resilient mounting member for a plain bearing and see search
    notes.


CLS 384/159
TXT With guard or seal:

    Subject matter under subclass 158 including means for preventing the escape
    of lubricant, preventing dust or other matter from entering the bearing or
    journal box.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclass 356 for a dynamic seal for use in a journal box.


CLS 384/160
TXT Lubricating:

    Subject matter under subclass 158 having means in the bearing for allowing
    a lubricant to reach a journal bearing surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322,    for lubricating of plain bearings an see search notes.


CLS 384/161
TXT For thrust bearing:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein the lubricating is for a bearing
    designed for loads imposed in the direction of the axis of rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    368+,   for a rotary plain thrust bearing with lubricating means.


CLS 384/162
TXT For brass bearings:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein the journal bearing is made of
    brass which is modified by grooves, cresses, apertures or the like for
    conveying or distributing lubricating to the bearing surface.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 191 for definition of "brass".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191+,   for brasses bearings.


CLS 384/163
TXT Reservoir fed:

    Subject matter under subclass 162 having means to hold the lubricant which
    is fed to the bearing surface.


CLS 384/164
TXT Capillary:

    Subject matter under subclass 163 wherein a capillary means is used to
    convey the lubricant to the bearing..

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    379,    for lubricant fed by capillary means to plain bearings.


CLS 384/165
TXT With lower reservoir:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 having means to hold the lubricant
    wherein the holding means is below a journal axle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403,    for a plane bearing with a lower reservoir for a horizontal shaft.


CLS 384/166
TXT Journal operated feed:

    Subject matter under subclass 165 having means operated by movement of an
    element of the car journal for feeding lubricant to the journal bearing.


CLS 384/167
TXT Band:

    Subject matter under subclass 166 wherein a belt shaped element rotated by
    a journal axle dips into the lubricant to feed the bearing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    405+,   for rotary shaft moving a band to lubricate a plain bearing.


CLS 384/168
TXT Centrifugal:

    Subject matter under subclass 166 wherein lubricant is impelled by
    centrifugal force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    465,    for centrifugal feed of a lubricant to an antifriction bearing.


CLS 384/169
TXT Pump:

    Subject matter under subclass 166 wherein the lubricant is fed by a pump.


CLS 384/170
TXT Capillary:

    Subject matter under subclass 165 wherein a capillary means is used to
    convey lubricant to the bearing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    379,    for capillary feed of a lubricant to a plain bearing and see search
    notes.


CLS 384/171
TXT With wick biasing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 170 having mans to urge a capillary material
    against a journal axle.


CLS 384/172
TXT Metal spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 171 wherein the urging means is made of metal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    184,    Lubrication, subclass 45 for spring operated followers for force
    feed of a lubricator.


CLS 384/173
TXT Coil spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 172 wherein the metal spring is in the form
    of a coil.


CLS 384/174
TXT Rubber:

    Subject matter under subclass 171 wherein the urging means is made of
    rubber or similar composition.


CLS 384/175
TXT With capillary material retainer:

    Subject matter under subclass 170 including means to hold or support
    capillary material.


CLS 384/176
TXT Integral with box:

    Subject matter under 175 wherein the retainer is integral with a journal
    box.


CLS 384/177
TXT Including roller applicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 165 having means for applying the lubricant
    which turns about an axis of rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    407+,   for roller or ball for applying a lubricant to a shaft and a plain
    bearing.


CLS 384/178
TXT Yieldably supported:

    Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein the roller is yieldably held by
    means of a spring, weight, fluid pressure, etc.


CLS 384/179
TXT Coil spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 178 wherein the yieldable means is in the
    form of a coil spring.


CLS 384/180
TXT Spring under compression:

    Subject matter under subclass 179 wherein the coil spring operates under
    pressure.


CLS 384/181
TXT Wick structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein the means to feed lubricant is a
    fibrous element having a specified configuration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    413,    for wick structure to feed lubricant to a rotary shaft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Thereof:  Product or Process of
    Making, subclass 400 for which composition.


CLS 384/182
TXT Sheet metal journal box:

    Subject matter under subclass 158 wherein the car journal box is formed of
    sheet metal in a particular configuration.


CLS 384/183
TXT With journal retainer and guide:

    Subject matter under subclass 158 including a retainer or guide element.

    (1)     Note.  The retainer or guide element are normally not in contact
    with the rotating axle.


CLS 384/184
TXT Lateral guide:

    Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein the guide element is mounted
    laterally in a horizontal sense to the side of the rotating journal axle.


CLS 384/185
TXT Mounting feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 184 wherein there is specified means for
    supporting the guide element.


CLS 384/186
TXT Resilient:

    Subject matter under subclass 185 wherein the support means is made of a
    resilient material.


CLS 384/187
TXT Interior:

    Subject matter under subclass 158 wherein a journal box is located on the
    inside of the wheel on the journal axle.


CLS 384/188
TXT Includes thrust bearing:

    Subject matter under subclass 158 having means to close and opening in a
    journal box.


CLS 384/189
TXT Lid:

    Subject matter under subclass 158 having means to close and opening in a
    journal box.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, appropriate subclasses, for closures
    of the type provide for an see the search notes thereto in section IV for
    the loci of closures in other classes.


CLS 384/190
TXT Mounted for swinging:

    Subject matter under subclass 189 wherein the lid is mounted on the journal
    box by means of a hinge or other pivotal connection.


CLS 384/190.1
TXT About pivot at right angle to plane of lid:

    Subject matter under subclass 190 wherein the lid swings in a single plane
    on a pivot which is perpendicular to the place of the lid.


CLS 384/190.2
TXT Spring and cam biased open:

    Subject matter under subclass 190 including a cam cooperating with an end
    of a spring mounted on the lid to hold the lid open.

    (1)     Note.  Frequently, the same mechanism also acts to hold the lid
    closed.


CLS 384/190.3
TXT With roller:

    Subject matter under subclass 190.2 including a roller cooperating with the
    cam.


CLS 384/190.4
TXT Spring biased closed:

    Subject matter under subclass 190 including a spring to close the lid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    190.2+, for spring which can bias a lid open and/or closed.


CLS 384/190.5
TXT Sliding:

    Subject matter under subclass 189 wherein the lid is mounted for
    rectilinear movement in the plane of the lid.


CLS 384/190.6
TXT Lid structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 189 having specified structure or form of the
    lid.


CLS 384/190.7
TXT With latch:

    Subject matter under subclass 190.6 including means to fasten or latches
    the lid.


CLS 384/191
TXT Brasses:

    Subject matter under subclass 158 wherein a journal bearing is located in
    the top of the journal box and bears against the upper surface of the
    rotating journal axle.

    (1)     Note.  The brasses is usually a half bearing.


CLS 384/191.1
TXT Self   aligning:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the bearing is formed with a
    curved surface which permits self alignment of the bearing


CLS 384/191.2
TXT Bearing surface liner or insert:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the bearing is shaped to receive
    a surface liner to reduce friction or an insert for strengthening the
    bearing.


CLS 384/191.3
TXT Assembling means:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein a bearing is designed to
    facilitate assembly either of the bearing itself or of the bearing on its
    support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59,     for assembling a roller bearing and see search notes.


CLS 384/191.4
TXT Mounting structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 having means to hold the bearing to a
    journal box.


CLS 384/192
TXT Self-adjusting or self-aligning:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein relatively sliding surface in a
    bearing support structure permit continuous self movement of the bearing
    position to compensate for shaft misalignment, or the bearing and shaft
    have limited motion, allowing for oscillation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247,    for adjustment means for a bearing.

    495+,   for self-aligning means for an antifriction bearing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 64, 365+ and 367 for
    a centrifugal extractor gyratorially mounted on a shaft.

    430,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 53+ for plural members
    interconnected by plural articulation axes.

    494,    Imperforate Bowl:  Centrifugal Separators, subclass 46 for a
    rotatable bowl having a bearing means adapted to enable the bowl to
    establish dynamic axis of rotation.


CLS 384/193
TXT For vertical shaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 192 where the bearing receives force from a
    shaft whose axis is perpendicular to a horizontal plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226+,   for a bearing and a vertical shaft.

    420+,   for thrust bearings and see search notes.


CLS 384/194
TXT With lower thrust and upper radial bearing:

    Subject matter under subclass 193 wherein the shaft carrying an element to
    be rotated is supported at its base by a thrust bearing and near the point
    of attachment of the element by a radial bearing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107+,   for a fluid radial and thrust bearing.

    126,    for a plain bearing and an antifriction bearing.

    228,    for vertical shaft with a thrust and radial bearing.


CLS 384/195
TXT Oscillatory suspension:

    Subject matter under subclass 193 in which the shaft carrying an element to
    be rotated is pivotally supported above the body.


CLS 384/196
TXT Resiliently centered:

    Subject matter under subclass 195 having yielding means to assist in
    maintaining the shaft vertically centered.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198,    for an oscillating thrust bearing with resilient centering means
    for a shaft.

    200,    for a shaft balancing means with resilient centering means for the
    shaft.

    215,    for a resilient mounting member.


CLS 384/197
TXT Oscillating thrust bearing:

    Subject matter under subclass 193 wherein a thrust bearing is pivoted to
    permit the shaft to move from the vertical.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    420+,   for thrust bearings and see search notes.


CLS 384/198
TXT Resiliently centered:

    Subject matter under subclass 197 having yielding means to assist in
    maintaining the shaft vertically centered.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196,    for an oscillating suspension means with resilient centering means
    for a shaft.

    200,    for a shaft balancing means with resilient centering means for the
    shaft.

    215,    for a resilient mounting member.


CLS 384/199
TXT Shaft balancing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 193 wherein the adjusting means is mounted on
    the shaft for the purpose of maintaining it vertically centered.


CLS 384/200
TXT Resiliency on radial bearing:

    Subject matter under subclass 199 wherein yielding means act on a bearing
    which receive radial force to assist in maintaining the shaft vertically
    centered.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196,    for an oscillating suspension means with resilient centering means
    for a shaft.

    198,    for an oscillating thrust bearing with resilient centering means
    for a shaft.

    215,    for a resilient mounting member.


CLS 384/201
TXT Having body and spindle connector:

    Subject matter under subclass 193 including a coupling means holding an
    element, e.g., bowl, to the shaft wherein the element is carried by the
    shaft.


CLS 384/202
TXT Resilient:

    Subject matter under subclass 192 wherein the bearing support includes a
    material that bounces, or springs back into shape.


CLS 384/203
TXT Ball and socket:

    Subject matter under subclass 202 wherein one element has portion in the
    shape of a sphere which is received in a recess of another element and
    there is a relatively sliding movement between them.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206,    for a ball and socket not resiliently mounted.


CLS 384/204
TXT For electric motor:

    Subject matter under subclass 203 wherein the self adjusting bearing is
    mounted in an electric motor housing.


CLS 384/205
TXT Fixed pivot axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 192 wherein the relatively sliding surfaces
    are part of support means for holding the bearing which turns about an axis
    that does not move.

    (1)     Note.  Shaft hangers having plain bearings mounted to pivot about a
    fixed axis are included in this subclass.


CLS 384/206
TXT Ball and socket:

    Subject matter under subclass 192 wherein one element has a portion in the
    shape of a sphere which is received in a recess of another element and
    there is a relatively sliding movement between them.

    (1)     Note.  The ball element has a bearing surface through its center.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for a spherical fluid bearing.

    145,    for an arcuate bearing surface.

    203,    for a ball and socket resiliently supported.


CLS 384/207
TXT Sheet metal socket:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 in which at least a portion of the socket
    is formed from a metal whose thickness is thin.


CLS 384/208
TXT Assembly:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 in which the ball and/or socket are
    shaped so that they can be put together, or taken apart for repair, or use.


CLS 384/209
TXT Separable ball retaining member:

    Subject matter under subclass 208 wherein the socket includes a detachable
    element which serves to retain the ball in the socket after the bearing
    structure has been assembled.


CLS 384/210
TXT Lock ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 209 wherein the detachable element has a
    circular band shape for holding the assembly together.


CLS 384/211
TXT Of ball:

    Subject matter under subclass 208 wherein the ball is shaped, or designed
    to enable, or facilitate its assembly within the socket member.


CLS 384/212
TXT Sectional:

    Subject matter under subclass 211 in which the ball is assembled from
    discrete ball elements within the socket.


CLS 384/213
TXT With lubricating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 including means for allowing a lubricant
    to flow to a bearing surface, or means for applying a lubricant to a
    bearing surface.

    (1)     Note.  The bearing surface is that of a plain bearing and/or the
    sliding surface between a ball and a socket.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322,    for lubricating means for a radial bearing and see search notes for
    other search.


CLS 384/214
TXT Having felt or wick:

    Subject matter under subclass 213 including a fibrous element e.g., cord,
    shet, etc., which acts as a reservoir and/or a distributing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    413,    for a wick and reservoir.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Composition, subclass 425.5, for wick composition.


CLS 384/215
TXT With resilient mounting member:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 having a material that bounces, or
    springs back into shape and takes at least part of the weight of supporting
    the bearing and permits relative movement, or vibration thereof with
    respect to a support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124,    for a resilient mounting member for a fluid thrust bearing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 560+ for a resilient support for an article of
    general use.


CLS 384/216
TXT For connecting rod:

    Subject matter under subclass 215 designed to be used on a connecting rod.


CLS 384/217
TXT Lock type:

    Subject matter under subclass 215 wherein part of the bearing contact
    surface is resiliently biased for securing a rotating shaft in its
    operating position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219,    for a biased bearing surface segment.


CLS 384/218
TXT Coil spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 215 wherein the resilient element is in the
    form of a helix.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 216 for connecting rod bearing assemblies
    having resilient supporting elements, most of which are coil springs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216,    for a connecting rod bearing assembly with coil springs.


CLS 384/219
TXT Biased bearing surface segment:

    Subject matter under subclass 218 wherein the coil spring acts to move a
    portion of the bearing contact surface with respect to the remainder of the
    bearing contact surface.


CLS 384/220
TXT Nonmetallic:

    Subject matter under subclass 215 wherein the resilient element is made of
    a material that lacks the characteristics of a metal.


CLS 384/221
TXT Laminated:

    Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein the resilient nonmetallic member
    is composed of a series of layers.


CLS 384/222
TXT Cylindrical:

    Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein the nonmetallic resilient element
    is in the shape of a circular body of uniform diameter, the extremities of
    which are equal parallel circles.


CLS 384/223
TXT For thrust bearing:

    Subject matter under subclass 215 wherein the resilient member is for
    supporting loads imposed in the direction of the axis of rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    420+,   for thrust bearings, and see search notes.


CLS 384/224
TXT Pivoted pad:

    Subject matter under subclass 223 wherein the resilient mounting element is
    for supporting a bearing on an element that turns about an axis.

    (1)     Note.  The supporting, or holding means can be either formed
    partly, or wholly of resilient material.


CLS 384/225
TXT Helical coil spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 223 wherein the resilient means is a spring
    where several convolutions of a coil lie in different planes.


CLS 384/226
TXT For vertical shaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein the bearing receives force from a
    shaft whose axis is perpendicular to a horizontal plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193+,   for a self-adjusting vertical shaft and a bearing.


CLS 384/227
TXT Spinning  spindle:

    Subject matter under subclass 226 having means for supporting a spindle
    e.g., shafts for bobbins in a bolster, cylindrical races, or supports, of a
    spinning machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 129+ for
    receiving elements.


CLS 384/228
TXT With thrust and radial bearing:

    Subject matter under subclass 227 including both a thrust bearing and a
    radial bearing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126+,   for plain bearing and an antifriction bearing.

    194,    for a self-adjusting vertical shaft with a lower thrust and upper
    radical bearing.

    420,    for trust bearings and see search notes.


CLS 384/229
TXT Adjustable spindle:

    Subject matter under subclass 228 having means for moving the spindle with
    respect to the bolster.


CLS 384/230
TXT Laterally resilient:

    Subject matter under subclass 228 wherein the spindle is yieldingly
    maintained in a vertical position by the use of a spring, rubber, etc.


CLS 384/231
TXT Resilient  sleeve:

    Subject matter under subclass 230 wherein the means yieldingly maintaining
    the spindle in a vertical position is an element of cylindrical shape and
    the inner surface contacts the spindle.


CLS 384/232
TXT Volute coil spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 230 wherein the means yieldingly maintaining
    the spindle in a vertical position is a spring where several convolutions
    of a coil lie in the same plane.


CLS 384/233
TXT Helical coil spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 230 wherein the means yieldingly maintaining
    the spindle in a vertical position is a spring where several convolutions
    of a coil lie in different planes.


CLS 384/234
TXT Fluid damping:

    Subject matter under subclass 230 wherein a specified fluid means is used
    for damping the spindle lateral movement.


CLS 384/235
TXT Rubber:

    Subject matter under subclass 230 wherein the means yieldingly maintaining
    the spindle in a vertical position is an elastomeric element.


CLS 384/236
TXT At fixed end:

    Subject matter under subclass 235 wherein the elastomeric element is
    located at a fixed end of the spindle.


CLS 384/237
TXT With interior dead shaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 228 wherein the spindle is mounted on and
    centered by a fixed shaft e.g., post, stud shaft, etc.


CLS 384/238
TXT Pivoting spindle:

    Subject matter under subclass 228 having means for allowing the spindle to
    rock about a point.


CLS 384/239
TXT Bolster type bearing:

    Subject matter under subclass 227 having means for securing the bearing to
    a support.

    (1)     Note.  Bolster is the name given to a bearing used in spinning
    frame and is usually secured to a rail.


CLS 384/240
TXT Lower end thrust bearing:

    Subject matter under subclass 227 wherein the thrust bearing supports the
    spindle shaft at the shaft end, or near the end.

    (1)     Note.  The shaft end can have a smaller diameter than the main part
    wherein the thrust bearing then supports the shaft at that area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243,    for a lower end thrust bearing for a spinning spindle.


CLS 384/241
TXT With lubricating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 227 including means for allowing a lubricant
    to flow to a bearing surface, or means for applying a lubricant to a
    bearing surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322,    for lubricating means for a radial bearing and see search notes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 133+ for
    lubricating means for receiving elements.


CLS 384/242
TXT Base supported table or drum:

    Subject matter under subclass 226 wherein the bearing is for holding a
    vertically revolving table, drum, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    420+,   for thrust bearings and see search notes.


CLS 384/243
TXT Lower end thrust bearing:

    Subject matter under subclass 226 wherein a thrust bearing supports the
    vertical shaft at the shaft end, or near the end.

    (1)     Note.  The shaft end can have smaller diameter than the main part
    wherein the thrust bearing then supports the shaft at that area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240,    for a lower end thrust bearing of general use.


CLS 384/244
TXT For shaped shaft end:

    Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein the lower end of the shaft is
    shaped to engage the thrust bearing, or to engage an element, e.g., ball,
    supported by the thrust bearing.


CLS 384/245
TXT Spherical shaft end:

    Subject matter under subclass 244 wherein the shaft end is globular shaped
    so as to form a tangential point.


CLS 384/246
TXT Conical shaft end:

    Subject matter under subclass 244 wherein the shaft end is cone shaped.


CLS 384/247
TXT With adjustment means:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 including means to move the bearing, or
    structure supporting the bearing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 218+ for axle Box mounting for
    trucks.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 265 for an adjustment for moving a
    pivotal end connection for a vehicle leaf spring.


CLS 384/248
TXT For thrust bearing:

    Subject matter under subclass 247 wherein the means for adjusting the
    bearing is for controlling thrust pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    420+,   for thrust bearings and see search notes.


CLS 384/249
TXT Threaded member moves axially:

    Subject matter under subclass 248 wherein a screw element is moved along
    the axis of a bearing for adjustment.

    (1)     Note.  The threaded member can be integral with the thrust bearing.


CLS 384/250
TXT For crankshaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 248 wherein the bearing either supports, or
    is carried by a crankshaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    294,    for a sleeve, or liner for a crankshaft.


CLS 384/251
TXT For thrust plate:

    Subject matter under subclass 248 wherein the adjusting means moves a
    member in the shape of a disk, flat piece of material, etc. which is placed
    at the end of a shaft for the purpose of taking the thrust.


CLS 384/252
TXT And support:

    Subject matter under subclass 247 including bearing holding structure which
    holds the adjusting means for positioning of the bearing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses
    113+, for bearings which are moved, with their supported shafts and
    pulleys, for the purpose of tensioning a belt.


CLS 384/253
TXT Simultaneous adjustment:

    Subject matter under subclass 252 wherein a plurality of bearings are
    simultaneously adjusted by actuation of the adjusting means.


CLS 384/254
TXT For horse power or sand reel:

    Subject matter under subclass 252 wherein the bearing is for use with means
    that is driven by a horse, or a sand reel mechanism.


CLS 384/255
TXT Eccentric:

    Subject matter under subclass 252 wherein the bearing is eccentric, or is
    mounted in an eccentric support and can be adjusted by rotation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 145+ for similar structure in an
    anticulated joint.


CLS 384/256
TXT For roller end support:

    Subject matter under subclass 252 wherein the bearing is for supporting the
    end of a press, or conveying roller.


CLS 384/257
TXT For suspended shaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 252 wherein the bearing support structure
    extends from a surface, usually overhead, and is for supporting a shaft.

    (1)     Note.  These assemblies are sometimes referred to as shaft hangers.


CLS 384/258
TXT Screw adjustment:

    Subject matter under subclass 257 wherein the adjusting means includes a
    rotatable threaded member.


CLS 384/259
TXT Horizontal and vertical:

    Subject matter under subclass 258 which include both horizontally and
    vertically acting screw adjusting means.


CLS 384/260
TXT Rectilinear:

    Subject matter under subclass 252 wherein the adjusting means act in a
    linear direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257+,   for a suspended shaft rectilinear adjusting means.


CLS 384/261
TXT Bearing surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 247 wherein the adjusting means acts to
    adjust one portion of the bearing contact surface with respect to another
    portion of the bearing contact surface, or to apply pressure to an area of
    bearing contact surface.


CLS 384/262
TXT For axle:

    Subject matter under subclass 261 wherein the adjusting means is for moving
    a tapered sleeve, or adapted to compensate for wear on a stub axle, or axle
    rotatably mounting a wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202+,   for bearings having resilient wear compensating adjusting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclass 115 for screw attached
    wheel attaching devices having an adjustable plural part nut.


CLS 384/263
TXT Adjustable bearing surface segment:

    Subject matter under subclass 261 wherein the adjusting means acts on a
    discreet, relatively movable, section of the bearing contact surface.


CLS 384/264
TXT Axial adjustment:

    Subject matter under subclass 263 wherein the adjusting means acts to move
    the adjustable bearing surface segment in an axial direction.


CLS 384/265
TXT Axially spaced annular segments:

    Subject matter under subclass 263 wherein the adjustable bearing surface
    segment comprises a wholly, or partially circumferentially extending
    annular segment which is relatively radially adjustable and axially spaced
    with respect to another annular bearing contact surface segment.


CLS 384/266
TXT Two opposed bearing surface segments:

    Subject matter under subclass 263 wherein the bearing contact surface
    consists of two diametrically opposed relatively adjustable bearing surface
    supports.


CLS 384/267
TXT With wedge adjustment:

    Subject matter under subclass 266 wherein the adjusting means includes a
    tapered, or cam element which acts to position the adjustable bearing
    surface segment.


CLS 384/268
TXT For connecting rod:

    Subject matter under subclass 267 wherein the bearing is for use with a
    connecting rod.


CLS 384/269
TXT Transverse screw adjustment:

    Subject matter under subclass 268 wherein the wedge element is adjusted by
    a threaded element extending in directing crosswise to both the connecting
    rod axis and the bearing axis.


CLS 384/270
TXT For connecting rod:

    Subject matter under subclass 266 wherein the bearing is for use with a
    connecting rod.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    268+,   for connecting rod bearing having a wedge adjustment.

    430,    for a nonadjustable connecting rod bearing.


CLS 384/271
TXT Tapered sleeve:

    Subject matter under subclass 261 wherein the bearing contact surface is
    tapered so that it can be adjusted to take up wear.

    (1)     Note.  Bearing assemblies wherein the bearing contact surface
    involves more than a single tapered sleeve, or where the tapered sleeve is
    formed of a plurality of discreet segments are found in subclasses 263+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263+,   for bearing surface segments.


CLS 384/272
TXT Split:

    Subject matter under subclass 271 wherein the tapered sleeve is cut, or
    open longitudinally of its axis.

    (1)     Note.  Although split, all tapered sleeves in this subclass are
    single, unitary members.


CLS 384/273
TXT Split  sleeve:

    Subject matter under subclass 261 wherein the bearing contact surface is
    cut, or open longitudinally of its axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272,    for tapered split sleeve.


CLS 384/274
TXT Pressure applying:

    Subject matter under subclass 261 wherein the adjusting means acts to apply
    force to a portion of a unitary bearing contact surface defining member.


CLS 384/275
TXT Radial collar and sleeve:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 having an element of tube shape and an
    element that embraces and extends radially beyond the tube element and are
    mounted on the shaft, which transmits thrust.


CLS 384/276
TXT Specified sleeve or liner:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein one of the bearing contact
    surfaces is defined by an annular member having substantially cylindrical
    inner and outer surfaces, the thickness between said inner and outer
    surfaces being less than the radius of said inner surface.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include patents which claim a bearing
    element solely by setting forth the material of which it is made, of which
    see the appropriate composition, or stock material classes.  In this
    connection the following classes should be considered:



    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, for articles defined solely by their metal, or alloy composition.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, for hollow, or tubular stock.

    148,    Metal Treatment, particularly subclass 400.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 9+ for lubricating compositions and
    especially subclasses 12+ for bearings having a lubricating function
    claimed solely in terms of their compositions.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for a stock material product in the form of a single, or plural layer web,
    or sheet not elsewhere classified.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 2.1+, for similar bushings which
    line openings, or sockets to reinforce the same and/or provide a smooth
    surface to prevent abrasion of elements passing therethrough or there into,
    without constituting a bearing.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 898+ for methods of making bearings.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclass for methods of making a machine element, or bearing by
    a laminating operation.

    295,    Railway Wheels and Axles, subclass 35, for bushings for railway car
    wheels.

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 53+ for journal brasses and subclass 216 for
    antifriction bearings.

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, subclasses 170.1+ and 230+
    for a motor, or pump bearing, seal, or liner and including pump, or fluid
    motor structure of the type there classifiable.


CLS 384/277
TXT Insulating:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 wherein either the sleeve, liner, or
    supporting structure is made of a material selected for its thermal, or
    electrical insulating properties.


CLS 384/278
TXT Temperature compensating:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 designed to compensate for changes in
    temperature, e.g., operate at high temperatures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    317+,   for specified cooling means for a bearing.


CLS 384/279
TXT Porous metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 wherein either the sleeve, liner, or a
    support structure has pores through which the lubricant may pass.

    (1)     Note.  The holes are in a patter, or array form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    293,    for an array of holes for lubricant.


CLS 384/280
TXT Liner on shaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 wherein the liner, or sleeve is mounted
    on a shaft.


CLS 384/281
TXT Removably secured:

    Subject matter under subclass 280 wherein the liner, or sleeve can be
    separated for the shaft.


CLS 384/282
TXT Bearing surface insert:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 wherein the bearing surface of the
    sleeve, or liner is provided with a solid lubricating, or antifriction
    material set into its surface.


CLS 384/283
TXT Groove:

    Subject matter under subclass 282 wherein the insert is mounted in a narrow
    furrow, hollow cut, etc., in the bearing surface.


CLS 384/284
TXT Pocket array:

    Subject matter under subclass 282 wherein there is more than one insert
    which are mounted in a regular pattern of holes formed in the bearing
    surface.


CLS 384/285
TXT Circular pocket:

    Subject matter under subclass 284 wherein the pockets have circular
    cross-sections.


CLS 384/286
TXT Lubricant distributing:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 wherein the bearing surface of the
    sleeve, or liner is contoured to facilitate the distribution of lubricant
    over the bearing surface.

    (1)     Note. Lubricant bearings for shafts which do not have sleeves on
    liners are in subclasses 397+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322,    for lubricating of general use.

    397+,   for lubricating a shaft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 264 and 268 for lubrication features on
    a connecting bearing for a vehicle leaf spring.


CLS 384/287
TXT High speed:

    Subject matter under subclass 286 wherein the lubricant sleeve is designed
    to operate at speeds greater than 30,000 r.p.m.


CLS 384/288
TXT For crankshaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 286 wherein the lubricant distributing sleeve
    is for use on a crankshaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    294,    for a sleeve for a crankshaft.


CLS 384/289
TXT For rotary member:

    Subject matter under subclass 286 wherein the lubricant distributing sleeve
    is for a rotary element, e.g., wheel, pulley, etc. which is to be mounted
    on a fixed support, e.g., shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    416+,   for a rotary member and broadly recited plain bearing.


CLS 384/290
TXT Outer sleeve or shaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 289 wherein the lubricant distributing sleeve
    is nonrotatably mounted on an end of a fixed axle.


CLS 384/291
TXT Groove:

    Subject matter under subclass 286 wherein lubricant is distributed by
    narrow furrow, hollow cut, etc. in the bearing surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    378,    for spiral groove in an axle, or hub for lubricant.


CLS 384/292
TXT Helical or herring bone:

    Subject matter under subclass 291 wherein the grooves are arranged in
    either a helical, or a herring bone configuration.


CLS 384/293
TXT Pocket array:

    Subject matter under subclass 286 wherein a regular pattern of lubricant
    distributing holes is formed on the bearing surface of the sleeve, or liner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    279,    for a sleeve, or liner made of porous material.


CLS 384/294
TXT For crankshaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 wherein the sleeve, or liner supports, or
    is carried by a crankshaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250,    for a thrust bearing for a crankshaft.


CLS 384/295
TXT Mounting feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 wherein the sleeve includes structure to
    facilitate the mounting thereof in the bearing support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280+,   for a liner mounted on a shaft.


CLS 384/296
TXT Radial protrusion or sleeve end flange:

    Subject matter under subclass 295 wherein the sleeve mounting structure
    includes an outwardly extending radial protrusion, or a pair of outwardly
    expanding flanges located on opposite ends of the sleeve.


CLS 384/297
TXT Nonmetal:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 wherein the sleeve, or liner, or the
    bearing contact surface thereof, is formed of a nonmetallic material, e.g.,
    plastic, wood, etc.


CLS 384/298
TXT Fabric layer and capillary passages:

    Subject matter under subclass 297 wherein the sleeve either includes a
    woven fabric layer, or is formed with capillary passages opening to the
    bearing contact surface.


CLS 384/299
TXT Nylon:

    Subject matter under subclass 297 comprising a layer which contains a
    polymeric compound is next to a polyester containing layer.


CLS 384/300
TXT Polytetrafluorethylene (e.g., teflon*):

    Subject matter under subclass 297 comprising a layer which contains
    fluorine.


CLS 384/301
TXT Spirally split:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 wherein the sleeve, or liner is separated
    divided, etc. along a spiral, or helical line.


CLS 384/302
TXT Distributed weight:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 having means for distributing a load over
    the entire bearing.


CLS 384/303
TXT For thrust bearing:

    Subject matter under subclass 302 comprising means for spreading the thrust
    over various thrust bearing parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    420+,   for thrust bearings and see search notes.


CLS 384/304
TXT Tandem thrust:

    Subject matter under subclass 303 wherein various thrust bearing parts are
    axially spaced and means are provided to relate the thrust force on one
    part to the thrust force on another.


CLS 384/305
TXT Grooved:

    Subject matter under subclass 303 wherein the thrust distributing means
    comprises grooves in a bearing surface.


CLS 384/306
TXT Pivoted pad:

    Subject matter under subclass 303 wherein the load distribution means has a
    rocking, or tilting movement and forms only a segment of a bearing surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228+,   for a load distributing pivoted pad and see search notes.


CLS 384/307
TXT With lubricating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 306 including means for allowing a lubricant
    to flow to a bearing surface.


CLS 384/308
TXT Pad mounting structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 306 having specified means for holding or
    supporting the pad.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312,    for tilting pad mounting structure.


CLS 384/309
TXT Pivoted pad:

    Subject matter under subclass 302 wherein the load distribution means has a
    rocking, or tilting movement and forms only a segment of a bearing surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for a radial bearing having a pivoted fluid pad.

    122,    for a thrust bearing having pivoted fluid pad.

    306,    for a thrust bearing pivoted pad.


CLS 384/310
TXT Noncircumferential:

    Subject matter under subclass 309 wherein a radially outer relatively
    rotating bearing structure is semicircular, or less in extent.


CLS 384/311
TXT Lubricant supply structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 309 including means in the bearing for
    allowing lubricant to reach a bearing surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322+,   for lubricating structure of a bearing.


CLS 384/312
TXT Pad mounting structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 309 having specified means for holding, or
    supporting the pad.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    308,    for pad mounting structure for a thrust bearing.


CLS 384/313
TXT Cooling by lubricant:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein a lubricant also lowers the
    temperature at the bearing to keep the temperature from getting too high.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    317+,   for specified cooling means.

    322,    for lubricating a bearing where the   lubricant does not act as a
    coolant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    184,    Lubrication, subclass 104, for heating and cooling devices for
    lubricators.


CLS 384/314
TXT Emergency lubrication:

    Subject matter under subclass 313 having means for supplying lubrication
    and cooling fluid because of a generally unexpected occurrence.


CLS 384/315
TXT Water lubrication:

    Subject matter under subclass 313 wherein a lubricating and cooling medium
    is water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97,     for water lubricated propellor shaft and well shaft.


CLS 384/316
TXT Fluid path:

    Subject matter under subclass 313 having means defining a flow passage for
    the lubricating fluid.

    (1)     Note.  The lubricant also acts as the cooling means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    321,    for a coolant path.


CLS 384/317
TXT Specified cooling means:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein the bearing is cooled by a medium
    other than a lubricant, e.g., radiatory means, by a separate fluid in
    passage through the bearing, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278,    for temperature compensating sleeve, or liner.

    313+,   for a cooling lubricant.

    900,    for cooling or heating not designated in the regular schedule.


CLS 384/318
TXT Mist:

    Subject matter under subclass 317 wherein the lubricant is suspended in a
    gaseous coolant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    496,    for cooling, heating or insulating an antifriction bearing.

    900,    for cooling or heating not designated in the regular schedule.


CLS 384/319
TXT Frozen lubricant:

    Subject matter under subclass 317 wherein the liquid lubricant is congealed
    by cold.

    (1)     Note.  The frozen lubricant is used at room temperature wherein it
    is frozen all, or some of the time.


CLS 384/320
TXT Nonliquid cooling:

    Subject matter under subclass 317 wherein the cooling means comprises a
    medium other than a liquid.


CLS 384/321
TXT Coolant path:

    Subject matter under subclass 317 wherein the coolant flows through
    specified passage.


CLS 384/322
TXT Lubricating:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 having means in the bearing for allowing
    a lubricant to reach a bearing surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286,    for lubricating means in a bearing sleeve, or liner.

    307,    for lubricating means for thrust bearings and cooling means.

    313,    for lubricating and cooling means.

    462+,   for lubricating an antifriction bearing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, appropriate subclasses for lubrication
    of engine bearing  elements

    184,    Lubrication, for lubricating means not part of bearing.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclass 268 for an end connection for a vehicle
    leaf spring and having a lubrication feature.


CLS 384/368
TXT For thrust bearing:

    Subject matter under subclass 322 wherein lubricating is for a bearing
    designed for loads imposed in the direction of the axis of rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    420,    for thrust plain bearing and see search notes.


CLS 384/369
TXT Forced feed:

    Subject matter under subclass 368 wherein the lubricant is supplied to a
    bearing surface by pressure.

    (1)     Note.  Included are pump systems and bearings grooved, or otherwise
    altered so that lubricant under pressure can be supplied to the bearing
    surface, a reservoir, or pressure normally produced by rotation of a shaft
    is not proper for this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  If the lubricant supports one of two relatively rotating
    elements to the extent that there is positive clearance between them in
    operation, the patent is in subclasses 100+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100+,   for a fluid bearing.

    373,    for means to force feed a lubricant to a bearing between a fixed
    axle and an element rotatably supported thereon.

    398,    for means to force feed a lubricant to a bearing which cooperates
    with a rotary shaft.

    400,    401+ and 403+, for a lubricant reservoir.


CLS 384/370
TXT Capillary:

    Subject matter under subclass 368 wherein the lubricant is conveyed by
    capillary means to the bearing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    379,    for capillary means for lubricating a radial bearing and see search
    notes.


CLS 384/371
TXT For bearing at end of shaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 368 wherein the lubricant is supplied to
    bearing surface which is located at the end of a shaft.


CLS 384/372
TXT Fixed shaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 322 for the lubrication of a bearing surface
    between a stationary axle and an element rotatably supported thereon.

    (1)     Note.  The device usually involves some modification of the axle
    itself.


CLS 384/373
TXT Forced feed:

    Subject matter under subclass 372 having means to supply the lubricant to
    the bearing by pressure.

    (1)     Note.  Included are pump systems and bearings grooved, or otherwise
    alterwise altered so that lubricant under pressure can be supplied to the
    bearing surface.  A reservoir, or pressure normally produced by rotation of
    a shaft is not proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    369,    for lubricant force feed to a thrust bearing and see search notes.


CLS 384/374
TXT Yoke reservoir:

    Subject matter under subclass 372 having means for holding the lubricant
    which is shaped so that the holding means is on both sides of a rotating
    element.


CLS 384/375
TXT Shaft-supported reservoir:

    Subject matter under subclass 372 having means to hold the lubricant which
    is held on the axle.


CLS 384/376
TXT At end of shaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 375 wherein the reservoir is held at one of
    the extremities of the axle.


CLS 384/377
TXT Specified external feed:

    Subject matter under subclass 372 wherein the lubricant is supplied to the
    axle surface by a particularly described means for allowing the lubricant
    to flow from an area not enclosed in the axle.


CLS 384/378
TXT Spiral groove:

    Subject matter under subclass 377 wherein the lubricant is distributed to
    the bearing surface by a narrow furrow, hollow cut, etc. in the form of a
    spiral on an axle, or hub.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291+,   for a groove in sleeve or liner for lubricant.


CLS 384/379
TXT Capillary:

    Subject matter under subclass 377 wherein a capillary means is used to
    convey the lubricant to the axle surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160+,   for lubricating a rotating shaft of a railway car journal.

    370,    for capillary means used with a thrust bearing.

    382     and 383, for capillary means used with a fixed shaft internal feed.

    387,    for capillary means used with a rotating reservoir.

    402     and 405+, for capillary means used with a reservoir external to a
    bearing.


CLS 384/380
TXT Internal feed:

    Subject matter under subclass 372 in which the lubricant is supplied to the
    axle surface by a passage through the axle.


CLS 384/381
TXT Internal reservoir:

    Subject matter under subclass 380 wherein the axle is bored out to form a
    reservoir for supplying lubricant to the axle surface.


CLS 384/382
TXT Capillary:

    Subject matter under subclass 381 wherein a capillary means is used to
    convey the lubricant to the axle surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    379,    for capillary means for lubricating a radial bearing and see search
    notes.


CLS 384/383
TXT Capillary:

    Subject matter under subclass 380 wherein a capillary means in used to
    convey the lubricant to the axle surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    379,    for capillary means for lubricating a radial bearing and see search
    notes.


CLS 384/384
TXT Clearer or agitator:

    Subject matter under subclass 372 having an element which is inserted into
    a lubricating passage for the purpose of opening the passage, or for
    stirring the lubricant therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    395,    for an agitator in a reservoir that rotates about an axis.


CLS 384/385
TXT Reservoir in rotating member:

    Subject matter under subclass 322 wherein the rotating element carries, or
    is constructed with a reservoir for lubricant.


CLS 384/386
TXT Removable reservoir:

    Subject matter under subclass 385 wherein the reservoir can be separated
    for the rotating support.


CLS 384/387
TXT Capillary:

    Subject matter under subclass 385 wherein a capillary means is used to
    convey the lubricant from the reservoir to the axle surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    379,    for capillary means for lubricating a radial bearing and see search
    notes.


CLS 384/388
TXT With feed regulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 385 having means for controlling the rate of
    flow from the reservoir to the bearing surface, e.g., by a value.


CLS 384/389
TXT Feed to shaft end and center:

    Subject matter under subclass 385 having means for feeding the lubricant
    simultaneously to the center and end of the axle from the rotating member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    390,    for lubricant to end of axle.

    391,    for lubricant to center of axle.


CLS 384/390
TXT End feed:

    Subject matter under subclass 385 having means for feeding the lubricant to
    the end of the axle, usually from a reservoir at the side of the rotating
    member.


CLS 384/391
TXT Center feed:

    Subject matter under subclass 385 having means for feeding the lubricant to
    the center of the axle, usually from a reservoir in the center of the
    rotating element.


CLS 384/392
TXT Including distributing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 385 having an element which spreads the
    lubricant over the bearing surface.


CLS 384/393
TXT Including inward deflector:

    Subject matter under subclass 385 having at least one curved propeller,
    vane, tube, etc. which is used for carrying the lubricant to the bearing
    surface.


CLS 384/394
TXT Including rotary blade:

    Subject matter under subclass 385 wherein the rotating  element has at
    least one propeller, vane, etc. attached to it and projects into the
    reservoir.


CLS 384/395
TXT With agitator:

    Subject matter under subclass 385 including an element member for stirring
    up the lubricant thereby aiding in applying the lubricant to the shaft
    surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    384,    for an agitator within a lubricating passage.


CLS 384/396
TXT Bolt type shaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 32 for lubricating the engaging surfaces of a
    bolt and a member turnably mounted thereon.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes vehicle suspension spring shackle
    bolt lubrication.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 161 for lubricated hinges.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 257, for lubricated sprocket
    chain pins.

    367,    Communications, Electrical: Acoustic Wave System and Devices,
    subclass 54, for end connections for vehicle leaf springs.


CLS 384/397
TXT For rotary shaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 322 for the lubrication of a bearing for
    rotating shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160+,   for lubricating a rotating shaft of a railway car journal.


CLS 384/398
TXT Forced feed:

    Subject matter under subclass 397 having means to supply the lubricant to
    the bearings by pressure.

    (1)     Note.  Included are pump systems and bearings groove, or otherwise
    altered so that lubricant under pressure can be supplied to the bearing
    surface.  A reservoir, or pressure normally produced by rotation of a shaft
    is not proper for this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  If the lubricant supports one of the two relatively rotating
    elements to the extent that there is positive clearance between them in
    operation, the patents are placed in 100+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    369,    for lubricant force feed to a thrust bearing and see search notes.


CLS 384/399
TXT Lubricant metering structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 398 having specified means in the bearing
    structure to promote uniform lubrication flow.


CLS 384/400
TXT Reservoir external to bearing:

    Subject matter under subclass 397 having a receptacle which is separate
    from the bearing, or bearing support and supplies lubricant to the bearing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    372+,   for reservoir used with a fixed shaft.

    401,    for an upper reservoir which is part of the bearing, or bearing
    support.

    403,    for a lower reservoir which is part of the bearing, or bearing
    support.


CLS 384/401
TXT Upper reservoir for horizontal shaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 397 having a receptacle wherein the
    receptacle bottom is above a horizontal shaft and the lubricant is supplied
    to the bearing from above the axis of the shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400,    for a reservoir external to a bearing, or bearing support and see
    search note.


CLS 384/402
TXT Capillary:

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein a capillary means is used to
    convey the lubricant from the upper reservoir to the bearing surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    379,    for capillary means for lubricating a radial bearing and see search
    notes.


CLS 384/403
TXT Lower reservoir for horizontal shaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 397 having a receptacle wherein the
    receptacle bottom is below a horizontal shaft and the lubricant is supplied
    to the bearing from below the axis of the shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165+,   for a lower reservoir for a railway car journal.

    400,    for a reservoir external to a bearing, or bearing support and see
    search notes.


CLS 384/404
TXT Shaft operated elevating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 having an element, other than the bearing
    member, operated by the shaft to raise lubricant to a point above the
    bottom of the bearing surface and allows the lubricant flow to the bearing
    under low pressure, e.g., by gravity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    398+,   for all means supplying lubricant to the bearing surfaces under
    light pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    184,    Lubrication, subclasses 11.1+ and 13.1, for splash type lubricators.


CLS 384/405
TXT Band or chain:

    Subject matter under subclass 404 having a belt shaped element, or a
    flexible series of joined links, loosely carried by the shaft, dips into
    the lubricant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    for a band lubricant feed means to a railway car bearing.


CLS 384/406
TXT Ring type:

    Subject Subject matter under subclass 405 wherein the means to raise the
    lubricant is circular and rigid.


CLS 384/407
TXT Roller or ball:

    Subject matter under subclass 404 wherein a cylindrical, or spherical
    shaped element raises the lubricant.

    (1)     Note.  If the roller, or ball acts also as a bearing, see the
    appropriate roller-bearing subclass below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177,    for a roller applicator of lubricant to a shaft of a railway car
    journal.


CLS 384/408
TXT Capillary:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 wherein a capillary means is used to
    convey the lubricant from the lower reservoir to the bearing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    379,    for capillary means for lubricating a radial bearing and see search
    notes.


CLS 384/409
TXT With wick biasing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 408 including means tending to urge the wick
    against a bearing surface.


CLS 384/410
TXT With wick retainer:

    Subject matter under subclass 408 including specified means to hold, or
    support capillary means.


CLS 384/411
TXT Differing capillary properties:

    Subject matter under subclass 408 wherein the capillary means is made of
    more than one kind of capillary material which have distinct capillary
    properties.


CLS 384/412
TXT With lubricant impelling means:

    Subject matter under subclass 408 including means for pumping lubricant
    from one location to another.


CLS 384/413
TXT Wick structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 408 wherein the capillary means is a fibrous
    element having a specified configuration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Composition, subclass 425.5 for wick composition.


CLS 384/414
TXT Suction or pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 having means to feed the bearing by a
    vacuum and/or back pressure.


CLS 384/415
TXT For vertical shaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 397 wherein the lubricating is for a bearing
    which receives a radial force from a shaft whose axis is perpendicular to a
    horizontal plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    368+,   for lubricating a thrust bearing combined with a radial bearing.


CLS 384/416
TXT For rotary member:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein the bearing assembly comprises a
    support and bearing for a generally cylindrical, or disk shaped rotary
    element e.g., wheel, pulley, etc.

    (1)     Note.  A wheel, shaft, pulley, etc. can be claimed in name only
    with modifications provided for the bearing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    289+,   for lubricant distribution to a rotary member, e.g., sleeve, or
    liner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclasses 109+, for axle boxes,
    131, for axle spindles and 134+, for skein ended axis.


CLS 384/417
TXT Pulley:

    Subject matter under subclass 416 wherein the bearing is for a rotary
    element which is used to transmit, or receive power through a belt which
    travels over its face.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses
    151+ for pulley structure.


CLS 384/418
TXT Roller:

    Subject matter under subclass 416 wherein the bearing is for a rotary
    element having a cylindrical outer surface, or an outer surface shaped to
    engage a track.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, for general assembly of
    rolls, or the structure thereof.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, for general assembly of rolls, or the
    structure thereof.

    492,    Roll or Roller, subclasses 16+ for a roll, per se, not elsewhere
    provided for, in which the outer surface of the roll is rotatable relative
    to its supporting shaft.


CLS 384/419
TXT Elongated:

    Subject matter under subclass 418 wherein the length of the roller is
    greater than the diameter of the roller.


CLS 384/420
TXT Thrust bearing:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 designed for loads imposed in the
    direction of the axis of rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    for fluid thrust bearing with flexible elements.

    107+,   for fluid radial and thrust bearing.

    121+,   for a fluid thrust bearing.

    161,    for railway car thrust bearings.

    193+,   for a self adjusting thrust bearing for a vertical shaft.

    223+,   for a thrust bearing resiliently mounted.

    228+,   for a thrust and radial bearing for a vertical shaft.

    242,    for a lower end thrust bearing.

    248+,   for a thrust bearing with adjustment means.

    303+,   for a thrust bearing of the distributing weight type.

    368,    for a thrust bearing with lubricating means.


CLS 384/421
TXT For pivoted or towed vehicle:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 wherein the pressure, or force is at the
    center about which a trailer turns when connected to a vehicle pulling it.
    e.g., fifth wheel for a wagon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 189, for center plate bogies for
    railway trucks.

    212,    Traversing Hoist, subclass 70 for pivots for rotary cranes.


CLS 384/422
TXT For pivot of vehicle wheel frame:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 wherein the pressure, or force is at the
    center about which a support turns which is between a body e.g., railway
    car and wheels.


CLS 384/423
TXT For railway car side:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 wherein the pressure, or force is between
    the body bolster and truck bolster of a railway car and which are subject
    to intermittent loader as the car body tilts from a vertical axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 200+, for bolster connecting for
    bogies.


CLS 384/424
TXT Axially spaced collars:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 wherein the shaft is provided with a
    number of elements which embrace the shaft and are arranged in series along
    the shaft axis and which are adapted to be engaged and supported by annular
    projecting bearings mounted in a bearing casing.


CLS 384/425
TXT Including thrust plate at shaft end:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 having means in the shape of a disk, flat
    piece of material, etc. Which is placed at the end of the shaft for the
    purpose of taking the thrust.


CLS 384/426
TXT Plural end plates:

    Subject matter under subclass 425 wherein a series of plates, or disks are
    placed between the end of the shaft and the bearing casing.


CLS 384/427
TXT Axially related hub liner:

    Subject matter under subclass 425 wherein the plate is in the form of a
    washer, annular plate, etc. which embraces the shaft between a hub and a
    stationary element, or bearing.


CLS 384/428
TXT Mounting or support:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 having means to hold, or steady the
    bearing against the force of gravity.

    (1)     Note.  The bearing is usually secured to the mounting, or support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    537+,   for mounting an antifriction ball bearing.

    584+,   for mounting an antifriction roller bearing.

    620,    for mounting an antifriction thrust bearing.


CLS 384/429
TXT For crankshaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 428 wherein the bearing is for supporting a
    shaft bent at right angles with respect to an engine etc., or is carried on
    a portion of a shaft bent at right angles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    457+,   for antifriction crankshaft bearing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 469+ for control lever and
    linkage system and subclasses 606+ for casings.


CLS 384/430
TXT Connecting rod:

    Subject matter under subclass 429 wherein the bearing carried in the
    crankshaft has an element which is to be joined to another element to cause
    motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    268     and 270, for an adjustable connecting rod bearing.


CLS 384/431
TXT Pedal type crank:

    Subject matter under subclass 429 wherein the bearing is for supporting an
    arm bent at right angle and designed for a foot pedal to be attached to one
    end of the arm.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    458,    for an antifriction type pedal crank bearing.


CLS 384/432
TXT Block and cap type:

    Subject matter under subclass 429 wherein the bearing holding means
    comprises a base element for supporting the bottom part of a bearing
    surface and a top element for holding the upper part of a bearing surface
    and means to fasten the base and top together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    434,    for a block and cap of general use.


CLS 384/433
TXT Engine housing closure:

    Subject matter under subclass 432 wherein the block and cap are designed to
    seal, or close an opening in an engine housing in which a crankshaft is
    mounted.


CLS 384/434
TXT Block and cap type:

    Subject matter under subclass 428 wherein the bearing holding means
    comprises a base element for supporting the bottom part of a bearing
    surface and a top element for holding the upper part of a bearing surface
    and means to fasten the base and top together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    432,    for a  block and cap for holding a crankshaft.


CLS 384/435
TXT Lock type:

    Subject matter under subclass 428 wherein part of the bearing contact
    surface is movable so as to release the rotating shaft from a fixed
    position in the bearing.


CLS 384/436
TXT Pivoted:

    Subject matter under subclass 435 wherein the movable bearing surface turns
    about a fixed point.

    (1)     Note.  Locating elements which are elongated and have a curved
    bearing contact surface formed at one end are known in the art as "hook".


CLS 384/437
TXT Having bolt securing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 436 wherein the pivoted bearing surface is
    held in position by a threaded element.


CLS 384/438
TXT Machine housing:

    Subject matter under subclass 428 wherein the bearing supports a shaft
    extending into an interior wall of a substantially closed means that
    transmits, or changes the application of energy, e.g., an electric motor, a
    pump, etc.


CLS 384/439
TXT Mounted in wall aperture:

    Subject matter under subclass 428 wherein the bearing, or bearing support
    structure is designed to be held in an opening, or hole formed in a flat
    support surface.


CLS 384/440
TXT Bearing surface integral with support:

    Subject matter under subclass 428 wherein the bearing contact surface is
    formed with a major portion of the bearing support structure.


CLS 384/441
TXT Annular support:

    Subject matter under subclass 428 wherein the outer surface of the bearing
    support structure is designed to be held in, or on a circular element.

    (1)     Note.  The bearing may be supported within a pipe casing.


CLS 384/442
TXT Single direction:

    Subject matter under subclass 428 wherein the bearing is supported by or
    supported on supporting structure which generally extends away from a
    supporting surface in one direction such that the bearing is supported from
    only one side.

    (1)     Note.  Nonadjustable shaft hangers are classified here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 49+ for pipe and cable supports, especially
    subclasses 58+ for the suspended type.  Also subclasses 200+ for brackets,
    per se.


CLS 384/443
TXT From above:

    Subject matter under subclass 442 wherein the supporting surface is located
    above the bearing.


CLS 384/444
TXT From below:

    Subject matter under subclass 442 wherein the supporting surface is located
    below the bearing.


CLS 384/445
TXT Antifriction bearing:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 wherein the friction is in the nature of
    rolling friction, as in a ball or roller bearing.

    (1)     Note.  Bearing assemblies and identifiable elements of bearing are
    in this and indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  A bearing assembly is those elements necessary for the
    operation of the bearing, that is friction reducing function.

    (3)     Note.  Antifriction bearing subcomponents are classified here if
    they are disclosed, e.g., whether the bearing subcomponent is for a plain
    or antifriction bearing, then the bearing subcomponent is classified above
    under plain bearings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92+,    for an antifriction bearing with conventional roller drill bit
    structure.

    126+,   for an antifriction bearing combined with a plain bearing.


CLS 384/446
TXT Nonbearing magnetic feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 445 wherein the magnetic feature is other
    than a magnetic support that is a magnetic bearing feature.

    (1)     Note.  A magnetic bearing is defined as where lines of magnetic
    force sustain the weight of a rotating body against the force of gravity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 90.5 for a
    magnetic bearing.


CLS 384/447
TXT Elliptical eccentric, alternating roller, or mass ball features;
    compensating for nonthermal deformation; centrifugal preload:

    Subject matter under subclass 445 wherein the bearing or bearing support
    structure includes (a) elliptical features or (b) features wherein two axes
    are offset or (c) where rollers alternate their orientations; or (d) where
    the bearing comprises a loose mass of balls; or (e) where means are
    provided for compensating for nonthermal deformation, e.g.; deformation due
    to weight or other force of (f) including centrifugal preloading means.


CLS 384/448
TXT Sensor or inspection features; liquid metal or shipping protection
    features; bearing member integral with seal:

    Subject matter under subclass 445 wherein the bearing or bearing support
    structure includes (a) means for sensing or visually inspecting bearing
    conditions; or (b) where a liquid metal such as mercury or gallium is
    employed; or (c) where means are provided for protection of the bearing
    during shipping or initial operation; or (d) where a race, cage, or rolling
    element is in unitary form with a seal.

    (1)     Note.  "Unitary" means in one piece.


CLS 384/449
TXT Outer race integral with wheel:

    Devices under subclass 445 wherein an outer race is a wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    543+,   for a fixed shaft and rotating outer element.


CLS 384/450
TXT Skew prevention; formular relationship:

    Subject matter under subclass 445 wherein (a) means are provided to avoid
    undesired roller skew; or (b) wherein a specified formula in mathematical
    symbols relates different bearing elements.

    (1)     Note.  Skew angle is defined as the angle between the axis of
    rotation of the rolling element (roller and a plane normal to the path or
    relative motion of the raceways confronting the rolling element.


CLS 384/451
TXT Recirculating or nonannular path:

    Subject matter under subclass 445 wherein antifriction elements
    recirculated in a closed path or where the path is otherwise nonannular,
    e.g., spiral.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43+,    for linear recirculating bearings.


CLS 384/452
TXT Radial bearing with separate thrust bearing; radial ball-thrust roller:

    Subject matter under subclass 445 comprising rolling elements some of which
    take mainly radial load and some of which take mainly thrust load.

    (1)     Note.  Where a single element takes both type of load, the patent
    is classified according to the load sustaining in the greater proportion.
    If this is not clear then the presumption is that the greater load is in
    the radial direction.

    (2)     Note.  Bearings where there is a ball taking radial load and a
    roller taking axial load specifically are classified in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    494,    for a ball bearing and roller bearing boll for radial load.


CLS 384/453
TXT Radial ball-thrust ball:

    Subject matter under subclass 452 wherein a ball takes radial load and
    another ball takes axial load.


CLS 384/454
TXT Radial roller-thrust ball:

    Subject matter under subclass 452 wherein a roller takes radial load and a
    ball takes thrust load.


CLS 384/455
TXT Radial roller-thrust roller:

    Subject matter under subclass 452 wherein a roller takes radial load and
    another roller takes thrust load.


CLS 384/456
TXT Radial bearing:

    Subject matter under subclass 445 designed for loads imposed mainly normal
    to the axis of rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114+,   for fluid type radial bearings.


CLS 384/457
TXT For crankshaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 456 wherein the bearing is for supporting a
    shaft bent at right angles with respect to an engine or is carried on a
    portion of a shaft bent at right angles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    429+,   for plain rotary bearing for crankshaft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 469+ for control lever and
    linkage systems and subclasses 606+ for casings.


CLS 384/458
TXT For pedal crank:

    Subject matter under subclass 457 wherein the bearing is for supporting an
    arm bent at a right angle and designed for a foot pedal to be attached to
    one end of the arm.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    431,    for plain rotary bearings for pedal crankshafts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 594.1+ for cranks and
    pedals with additional elements.


CLS 384/459
TXT Railway car journal:

    Subject matter under subclass 456 wherein the bearing is particularly
    adapted for railway car journal boxes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79+,    for car-journal lubricators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    259,    Railway Wheels and Axles, appropriate subclasses for car wheel and
    axle construction and wheel-attaching devices.


CLS 384/460
TXT Disk plow:

    Subject matter under subclass 456 having means for supporting the bearing
    which receives a hub or rotary shaft of a plow or colter disk.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157,    for a plain rotary bearing for a disk plow type element.


CLS 384/461
TXT Concentric:

    Subject matter under subclass 456 comprising a plurality of radially spaced
    rolling elements in concentric relation.

    (1)     Note.  "Concentric" means having the same point as the center of a
    circle or a sphere, but for this subclass it will suffice if the radially
    spaced rolling elements overlap axially.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    512,    for plural axially spaced balls with an integral race and the balls
    on the same side of the race.

    513+,   for plural axially spaced balls on opposite sides of a race.


CLS 384/462
TXT Lubricating:

    Subject matter under subclass 456 wherein an antifriction bearing is
    combined with a lubricating means and the antifriction bearing is modified
    to cooperate with the lubricating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322,    for lubricating means for a plain bearing and see search notes.

    606,    for antifriction thrust bearing lubricating

    SEARCH CLASS:

    184,    Lubrication, for lubricating means not  part of a bearing.


CLS 384/463
TXT Solid lubricant feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 462 wherein a lubricant is in a firm state
    when used.


CLS 384/464
TXT Dipping, surface treatment or member versus lubricant density:

    Subject matter under subclass 462 wherein (a) the bearing is sometimes
    immersed in lubricant and sometimes not, (b) where a bearing surface is
    treated for lubricating, e.g., embedded or coated or (c) where the density
    of the rolling element is related to the lubricant density.


CLS 384/465
TXT Centrifugal feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 462 wherein lubricant is impelled by
    specified centrifugal force or a slinger.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168,    for centrifugal feed of a lubricant to a railway car bearing.


CLS 384/466
TXT Jet, baffle or value:

    Subject matter under subclass 462 having lubricant jet means, a specified
    lubricant baffle or a lubricant valve.


CLS 384/467
TXT Cooling by lubricant:

    Subject matter under subclass 462 wherein the lubricant also lowers the
    temperature of the bearing to keep the temperature of the bearing from
    getting too high.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    313,    for cooling by lubricant of a plain bearing.

    476,    for other types of cooling of the bearing.

    900,    for cooling or heating not designated in the regular schedule.


CLS 384/468
TXT Oil mist feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 462 including means for producing an oil mist.


CLS 384/469
TXT Porous or wick structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 462 wherein the lubricant can be retained in
    pores of a material or retained in a wick type material.


CLS 384/470
TXT Cage structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 462 wherein lubricating is facilitated by
    specified cage structure.


CLS 384/471
TXT With pressure or suction means:

    Subject matter under subclass 462 including specified means to established
    pressure or suction so as to move lubricant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    465,    if the means operates by centrifugal force.

    472,    for an impeller without specified structure for creating pressure
    or suction.


CLS 384/472
TXT Impeller:

    Subject matter under subclass 462 wherein the bearing, per se, includes
    structure for impelling lubricant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    465,    for a centrifugal impeller.

    471,    for reciting the creation of pressure or suction.


CLS 384/473
TXT Reservoir, filter or lubrication circuit structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 462 including specified reservoir, filter, or
    lubricant circuit structure.


CLS 384/474
TXT Lubrication port:

    Subject matter under subclass 462 including a specified lubrication port.


CLS 384/475
TXT In race:

    Subject matter under subclass 474 wherein the port is in a race.


CLS 384/476
TXT With cooling, heating or insulating:

    Subject matter under subclass 456 including means to control the
    temperature of the bearing, e.g., raise or lower the temperature, or shield
    the bearing from heat, cold or electrical charge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    317,    for cooling a plain bearing.

    467,    for cooling an antifriction bearing by lubricant.

    900,    for cooling or heating not designated in the regular schedule.


CLS 384/477
TXT With specified seal:

    Subject matter under subclass 456 including means for preventing matter
    from entering into, passing through, or escaping from the bearing.

    (1)     Note.  The bearing can be in a support means and the seal acting at
    the juncture of adjacent elements.

    (2)     Note.  A broadly recited seal, e.g., bearing seal, etc., which
    recites no structure is classified on the basis of the bearing structure,
    rather than here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    607,    for antifriction thrust bearing seal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 175 for a rotary press having a guard for the
    roll bearing.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 345+ for a seal between relatively movable parts (i.e.,
    a dynamic seal).


CLS 384/478
TXT Centrifugal loading or slinging; fluid seal:

    Subject matter under subclass 477 wherein (a) the seal is loaded by
    centrifugal force generated by the seal itself; or (b) wherein a sealing
    gas or liquid is itself the barrier to fluid or particle passage.


CLS 384/479
TXT Pressure establishing or loading:

    Subject matter under subclass 477 wherein (a) means are provided to create
    a pressure condition within the sealing assembly, or (b) wherein means are
    provided whereby the seal is loaded responsive to pressure.


CLS 384/480
TXT Labyrinth:

    Subject matter under subclass 477 wherein a seal comprises a succession of
    baffles which define a slight clearance with each other or with an
    additional member, providing a series of throttling zones to impede the
    passage of fluid or particles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144,    for a labyrinth seal with a plain.

    478,    for a fluid seal.


CLS 384/481
TXT Relatively rotatable radially contacting:

    Subject matter under subclass 477 wherein the seal comprises relatively
    rotatable elements presenting complementary sealing surfaces normal to or
    at a nonzero angle to the axis of rotation.

    (1)     Note.  These are sometimes called "face seals".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139+,   for a relatively rotatable radially contacting seal with a plain
    bearing.


CLS 384/482
TXT Resilient sliding surface material:

    Subject matter under subclass 481 wherein one of the sealing surfaces
    comprises a resilient material.


CLS 384/483
TXT Radially contained packing with axially acting follower:

    Subject matter under subclass 477 wherein the sealing assembly comprises a
    chamber and an element coaxial therewith, a packing within the chamber and
    a follower exerting an axial thrust on the packings and biasing it radially
    into sealing engagement with the chamber and coaxial member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149,    for a plain bearing with a radially contained seal with axially
    acting follower.


CLS 384/484
TXT Lip seal:

    Subject matter under subclass 474 wherein the seal comprise a resilient
    element extending radially and resiliently contacting a relatively rotating
    surface parallel to the axis of rotation, via an annular surface thin in
    comparison to the rest of the resilient element and axially displaced form
    the main portion of the element, at least in operation.


CLS 384/485
TXT Radially outward lip:

    Subject matter under subclass 484 where the lip seal extends radially
    outwardly from the axis of rotation.


CLS 384/486
TXT Plural lips:

    Subject matter under subclass 484 wherein there is more than one lip in a
    single seal.

    (1)     Note.  A plurality of lip seals is classified on the basis of
    individual seal structure.


CLS 384/487
TXT Radially opening U-shaped retainer:

    Subject matter under subclass 477 wherein the seal includes a retainer
    U-shaped in cross-section and opening in a radial direction, with a seal
    element located in the retainer and extending radially beyond it to contact
    a concentric relatively rotating surface.


CLS 384/488
TXT Flange small clearance:

    Subject matter under subclass 477 wherein the seal comprises a radially
    extending annular flange approaching but not contacting a relatively
    rotating member so as to substantially but not completely close an annular
    opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    480,    for plural flanged seals.


CLS 384/489
TXT O-ring or end cap seal:

    Subject matter under subclass 477 wherein the seal (a) is a resilient)-ring
    or (b) is an annular disc sealing off one entire end of a bearing, from the
    outer race to the axis of rotation.

    (1)     Note.  An end cap seal may comprise a small venting hole.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    for a plain bearing with an O-ring seal.


CLS 384/490
TXT Ball bearing:

    Subject matter under subclass 456 wherein the rolling friction is a
    spherical element.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses includes bearing assembles or
    specified bearing components.

    (2)     Note.  A spherical element has every part of its bearing surface
    equally distant form the center.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    609,    for a thrust ball bearing.


CLS 384/491
TXT Ball structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 490 wherein structure other than sphericity,
    e.g.m hollowness, holes, or minor appendages, of a substantially spherical
    ball, is specified.

    (1)     Note. A ball surface does not have be continuous to be placed here
    but all surface contact areas must be an equal distance from the ball
    center.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    565,    for roller structure which may have a curved surface but all
    surface contact area are not an equal distance from the roller center.


CLS 384/492
TXT Ball or race composition or material:

    Subject matter under subclass 490 wherein the composition, e.g., density or
    porosity; or material of a ball or race is specified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    907,    Crosss-Reference Art Collection for bearing material not provided
    in the regular schedule.


CLS 384/493
TXT Temperature compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 490 including means for compensating for
    changes brought about by a change in temperature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    557,    for a roller bearing with temperature compensation.

    605,    for a thrust bearing with temperature compensation.

    905,    for temperature compensation, not otherwise designated in the
    regular schedule.


CLS 384/494
TXT Ball and roller bearings:

    Subject matter under subclass 490 including a roller bearing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    452,    for plural bearings one of which is a thrust bearing.


CLS 384/495
TXT Self-aligning:

    Subject matter under subclass 490 wherein the bearing is automatically
    adjustable to compensate for flexure, pivoting or axial displacement of a
    shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    192+,   for self-aligning of a plain bearing.

    558,    for self-aligning of a roller bearing.

    612,    for self-aligning thrust ball bearing.


CLS 384/496
TXT Ball to larger spherical surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 495 wherein the alignment is effectuated by
    means of interacting of a ball with a larger spherical surface.


CLS 384/497
TXT Radially outer larger spherical surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 496 wherein the larger spherical surface is
    located radially outside the ball.


CLS 384/498
TXT Conforming spherical surfaces:

    Subject matter under subclass 495 wherein alignment is effectuated by means
    of the interaction of mating concave and convex spherical surfaces of
    substantially the same radius of curvature.


CLS 384/499
TXT Split race:

    Subject matter under subclass 490 wherein a race is split
    circumferentially, so as to produce plural complete rings or split
    transversely, so as to produce one incomplete annulus (split ring).


CLS 384/500
TXT With race adjustment means:

    Subject matter under subclass 499 including means to move the position of a
    race.


CLS 384/501
TXT Double split:

    Subject matter under subclass 499 wherein both the inner and outer races
    are circumferentially split.


CLS 384/502
TXT Split ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 499 wherein the race is split transversely,
    so as to produce a break in the circumference of the annulus.


CLS 384/503
TXT Fractured split:

    Subject matter under subclass 502 wherein the split is by means of a
    fracture.


CLS 384/504
TXT Plural rows balls:

    Subject matter under subclass 499 comprising plural axially spaced rows of
    balls.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    512,    for plural axially spaced balls with integral race.


CLS 384/505
TXT One race only split:

    Subject matter under subclass 499 wherein only one of the two ball races is
    a split race.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500,    for split race with adjustment means.

    504,    for plural rows of balls with a split race.


CLS 384/506
TXT Inner race split:

    Subject matter under subclass 505 wherein it is the radially innermost race
    that is split.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500,    for split race with adjustment means.


CLS 384/507
TXT Slot for ball insertion:

    Subject matter under subclass 490 wherein a slot is provided for inserting
    a ball.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    511,    for an annular opening in a race for ball insertion.


CLS 384/508
TXT With means for blocking slot:

    Subject matter under subclass 507 including structure designed to block the
    slot under operating conditions.


CLS 384/509
TXT Blocking by cage:

    Subject matter under subclass 508 wherein the blocking structure is a ball
    cage.


CLS 384/510
TXT Specified means facilitating assembly or disassembly:

    Subject matter under subclass 490 wherein structure is designed to
    particularly facilitate assembly or disassembly of the bearing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    537,    for assembling a bearing in a support, mounting means, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 898+ for the method of assembling bearing
    structure and subclasses 724+ and 898+ for a machine or apparatus for
    assembling bearing structure.


CLS 384/511
TXT Annular opening for ball insertion:

    Subject matter under subclass 510 wherein the facilitating means includes
    an opening, around the entire circumference of a race, provided for ball
    insertion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    507,    for a slot in a race for ball insertion.


CLS 384/512
TXT Plural axially spaced balls with integral race:

    Subject matter under subclass 490 comprising plural axially spaced rows of
    balls rolling on an integral race on the same radial surface of that race.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    461,    for plural axially overlapping rolling elements.

    504,    for plural rows of balls with a split race.

    513+,   for plural axially spaced rows of balls rolling on an integral race
    wherein the balls are on opposite sides of the integral race.


CLS 384/513
TXT Specified bearing race structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 490 having a particularly described race.

    (1)     Note.  A broadly recited race: e.g., race, bearing race; etc.,
    which recites no structure or shape is placed where it would be otherwise
    classifiable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    517,    for an axially biased race.


CLS 384/514
TXT Strictly conical contact surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 513 wherein the race comprises a strictly,
    i.e., not rounded, conical surface on which the ball rolls.


CLS 384/515
TXT Including radial race flange:

    Subject matter under subclass 513 wherein the race comprises an integral
    radial flange.


CLS 384/516
TXT Ball groove surface detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 513 wherein the race structure comprises
    specified detail of the ball rolling groove surface, e.g., the slope of the
    groove, on which the ball rolls.


CLS 384/517
TXT Axially biased race:

    Subject matter under subclass 490 where a race is subjected to continual
    axial resilient force.


CLS 384/518
TXT Subject matter under subclass 517 wherein the force is supplied by means
    comprising a coil spring.


CLS 384/519
TXT Adjustment means:

    Subject matter under subclass 490 having means to move the position of the
    bearing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    447,    for eccentric features some of which may function as adjustment
    means.


CLS 384/520
TXT Discrete spacing member:

    Subject matter under subclass 490 wherein balls are maintained a determined
    distance apart in a race by a discrete element that is not connected from
    one ball to another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    524,    for a discrete spacing element connected to cage structure.


CLS 384/521
TXT Ball spacer:

    Subject matter under subclass 520 wherein the spacing element is spherical.


CLS 384/522
TXT Roller spacer:

    Subject matter under subclass 520 wherein the spacing element is a roller.


CLS 384/523
TXT Cage structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 490 having means for spacing balls in a race.


CLS 384/524
TXT Including antifriction members:

    Subject matter under subclass 523 wherein the cage structure includes balls
    or rollers that do not bear radial force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    521     and 522,  for discrete antifriction elements as spacers.


CLS 384/525
TXT Wire cage:

    Subject matter under subclass 523 wherein the cage is formed from wire.


CLS 384/526
TXT Resilient feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 523 wherein the cage comprises resilient
    structure.


CLS 384/527
TXT Material, composition or laminate:

    Subject matter under subclass 523 wherein  the material or composition of
    the cage is specified, or it is formed as a laminate.


CLS 384/528
TXT Fully circular aperture for ball:

    Subject matter under subclass 523 wherein the cage comprises a fully
    circular aperture for receiving each ball.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    533,    for a noncircular or nonconforming pocket for a ball.


CLS 384/529
TXT Two circular apertures per ball:

    Subject matter under subclass 5228 wherein there are two apertures for
    receiving each ball.


CLS 384/530
TXT Plural elements joined to form an aperture:

    Subject matter under subclass 528 wherein the aperture is formed by plural
    elements connected together.


CLS 384/531
TXT U- or C-shaped slot:

    Subject matter under subclass 523 wherein the race has a substantially U -
    or C - shaped opening for holding a ball.


CLS 384/532
TXT Unitary uniform strip:

    Subject matter under subclass 531 wherein the cage is formed from a single
    strip of material of uniform thickness.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    534,    for a unitary strip with other than U- or C-shaped slots.


CLS 384/533
TXT Entirely noncircular or nonconforming pocket:

    Subject matter under subclass 523 wherein a ball-holding pocket either has
    no circular portions or has a circular portion but of a radius of curvature
    that does not conform with that of the ball.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    528,    for a fully circular aperture for a ball.


CLS 384/534
TXT Unitary member:

    Subject matter under subclass 523 wherein the cage is formed from a unitary
    element of material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    528+,   for a fully circular aperture for a ball which may be a unitary
    strip.

    532,    for U - or  C - shaped slots in a unitary strip.


CLS 384/535
TXT Resilient support member:

    Subject matter under subclass 490 having resilient means for supporting the
    bearing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    581,    for a resilient support member for a roller bearing.


CLS 384/536
TXT Elastomer or plastic:

    Subject matter under subclass 535 wherein the resilient means comprises an
    elastomer or plastic.


CLS 384/537
TXT Assembling means:

    Subject matter under subclass 490 wherein a bearing assembly and/or means
    to support the bearing comprise structure for allowing assembly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    410,    for assembling of a ball bearing.


CLS 384/538
TXT Wedge means:

    Subject matter under subclass 537 wherein the means comprises a tapered
    element for a wedging function.


CLS 384/539
TXT Snap means:

    Subject matter under subclass 537wherein the means comprises a resilient
    structure that deforms during assembly.


CLS 384/540
TXT Threaded sleeve:

    Subject matter under subclass 537 wherein the means comprises a hollow tube
    or cylinder with threads on the inside or outside, e.g., a nut.


CLS 384/541
TXT Radial set screw:

    Subject matter under subclass 537 wherein the means comprises a threaded
    rod used for locking adjustable parts in position and the rod moves in a
    radial direction.


CLS 384/542
TXT Bolt:

    Subject matter under subclass 537 wherein the means comprises a rod and the
    end usually has a head.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    538,    for wedging means with a bolt for securing the bearing.

    541,    for a radial set screw.


CLS 384/543
TXT Fixed shaft and rotating outer member:

    Subject matter under subclass 490 having a stationary axle and a radially
    outer element, rotatably supported thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    416,    for a rotary member with a plain bearing.


CLS 384/544
TXT For hub:

    Subject matter under subclass 543 wherein the hub is for a bicycle wheel.


CLS 384/545
TXT For bicycle hub:

    Subject matter under subclass 544 wherein the hub is for a bicycle wheel.


CLS 384/546
TXT Outermost member cylindrical:

    Subject matter under subclass 543 wherein the radially outer element has
    only a cylindrical periphery.

    (1)     Note.  The cylindrical member turns about a bearing assembly.


CLS 384/547
TXT Outermost member grooved:

    Subject matter under subclass 543 wherein the radially outer element has
    only a grooved periphery.

    (1)     Note.  The grooved member turns about a bearing assembly.


CLS 384/548
TXT Roller bearing:

    Subject matter under subclass 456 wherein the rolling friction is from a
    roller element, e.g., cylindrical, tapered, barrel-shaped, needle-shaped,
    etc.

    (1)     Note.  See Note to 491 for the definition of a ball bearing.


CLS 384/549
TXT Fixed supporting roller:

    Subject matter under subclass 548 wherein the bearing rotates on its own
    axis, but does not revolve about the axis of a fixed supporting means, and
    supports a large cylindrical member, e.g., a drum, for rotation.

    (1)     Note.  When more than a race is claimed classification is with the
    appropriate class, e.g., Class 34, Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With
    Solids; 241, Solid Material comminution or Disintegration; 248, Supports;
    etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 108 for
    rotary drums or receptacles.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 178 of a
    roller supported receptacle.

    248,    Supports, subclass 130 for a rotating receptacle.


CLS 384/550
TXT Toothed:

    Subject matter under subclass 548 wherein the roller comprises teeth which
    mesh with other  teeth in  a race or other adjacent roller.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    598,    for a toothed thrust roller bearing.


CLS 384/551
TXT Discrete circumferential or axial spacer:

    Subject matter under subclass 548 wherein (a) rollers are maintained a
    determined circumferential distance apart in there ace by discrete elements
    that are not connected from one ball to another; or (b) wherein discrete
    elements axially spaced individual rollers.


CLS 384/552
TXT Spaced by balls:

    Subject matter under subclass 551 wherein load-bearing roller are located
    position by nonload-bearing balls.


CLS 384/553
TXT Spaced by rollers:

    Subject matter under subclass 551 wherein load-bearing roller are located
    position by nonload-bearing rollers.


CLS 384/554
TXT With associated rings:

    Subject matter under subclass 553 wherein the nonload0bearing rollers are
    related in position to one another by a plurality of rings.


CLS 384/555
TXT Mating grooves and projections:

    Subject matter under subclass 553 wherein annular grooves or projections on
    the load-bearing roller skate with annular projections or grooves on the
    nonload-bearing spacing rollers.


CLS 384/556
TXT Hydraulic axial jacking:

    Subject matter under subclass 548 wherein fluid pressure means is employed
    to initially position of "jack" a bearing assembly element.

    (1)     Note.  Where the hydraulic force remains in effect, i.e., for
    resilient support, see Class 384, subclass 99.


CLS 384/557
TXT Temperature compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 548 including means for compensating for
    change brought about by a change in temperature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    493,    for a ball bearing with temperature compensation.

    605,    for a thrust bearing with temperature compensation.

    905,    for temperature compensation not designated in the regular schedule.


CLS 384/558
TXT Self-aligning:

    Subject matter under subclass 548 wherein the bearing is automatically
    adjustable to compensate for flexure, pivoting or axial displacement of a
    shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193+,   for self-aligning of a plain bearing.

    620,    for self-aligning of a thrust roller bearing.


CLS 384/559
TXT Means facilitating assembly or disassembly:

    Subject matter under subclass 548 wherein structure is so designed to
    particularly aid in assembling or disassembling a bearing assembly.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 898+ and 724+ for machines, apparatus and
    methods for effecting the assembly.


CLS 384/560
TXT By cage or race structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 559 wherein ring and associated receiving
    groove are used to facilitate assembly or disassembly.


CLS 384/561
TXT By groove and ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 559 wherein a ring and associated receiving
    groove are used to facilitate assembly or disassembly.


CLS 384/562
TXT By threaded member:

    Subject matter under subclass 559 wherein a threaded element, e.g., a nut
    and/or bolt, is used in assembly or disassembly.


CLS 384/563
TXT Axially biased race or roller:

    Subject matter under subclass 548 having means for resiliently urging a
    bearing race or roller in an axial direction.

    (1)     Note.  This is often referred to as "preloading".


CLS 384/564
TXT Race end structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 548 wherein a race has either integral flange
    or separate, e.g., and associated ring, axial end structure.


CLS 384/565
TXT Roller structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 548 comprising specified detail of the roller.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for and
    see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 384/566
TXT Helical feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 565 wherein the roller comprises helical
    structure.


CLS 384/567
TXT Hollow:

    Subject matter under subclass 565 wherein the roller has bore passing
    entirely through it in the roller's axial direction.


CLS 384/568
TXT Curved roller:

    Subject matter under subclass 565 wherein the roller is entirely nonlinear
    in cross-section, excepting only portions of axial ends.


CLS 384/569
TXT Race, liner or sleeve:

    Subject matter under subclass 548 having an element that has specified
    structure in the bearing assembly of the roller bearing contact surface, of
    a liner, or of a sleeve.


CLS 384/570
TXT Split ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 569 wherein the element is split
    transversely, so as to produce a break in the circumference of the annulus.


CLS 384/571
TXT Tapered race:

    Subject matter under subclass 569 wherein a race is tapered in
    cross-section.


CLS 384/572
TXT Cage structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 548 having specified structure of an annular
    roller spacing element.


CLS 384/573
TXT Wire, filament, segmented or surface treated:

    Subject matter under subclass 572 wherein the cage is composed (a) of wire,
    (b) of filamentous material, (c) of separate annular or circumferential
    segments; or (d) wherein the cage surface is specially treated or coated.


CLS 384/574
TXT Projecting into or through roller:

    Subject matter under subclass 572 wherein the cage includes  a portion
    entering into or through a recess or bore in the axial end of a roller.


CLS 384/575
TXT Uniform sheet metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 572 wherein the cage is fabricated of sheet
    metal of uniform thickness.


CLS 384/576
TXT Nonmetallic:

    Subject matter under subclass 572 wherein the cage comprises nonmetallic
    material.


CLS 384/577
TXT Split ring or open slot:

    Subject matter under subclass 572 wherein the cage annulus has a split in
    it circumference or roller retaining cavities in the cage are open on one
    side.


CLS 384/578
TXT Nonunitary:

    Subject matter under subclass 572 wherein the cage is composed of plural
    elements.


CLS 384/579
TXT Bolted, welded or with spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 578 wherein the elements of the cage are
    bolted or welded together; or the cage includes a specified spring.


CLS 384/580
TXT Lip on transverse bar:

    Subject matter under subclass 572 wherein a connecting piece of the cage,
    parallel to the axis of rotation of a bearing supported element, has a lip
    to help retain the roller.


CLS 384/581
TXT Resilient support member:

    Subject matter under subclass 548 which has a resilient supporting means.


CLS 384/582
TXT Elastomer or plastic:

    Subject matter under subclass 581 wherein the resilient means comprises an
    elastomer or plastic.


CLS 384/583
TXT With adjustment means:

    Subject matter under subclass 548 including means to move the bearing
    assembly, or part thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    447,    for eccentric features, some of which may function as adjustment
    means.

    563,    for an axially biased race.


CLS 384/584
TXT Assembling means:

    Subject matter under subclass 548 wherein a bearing assembly and/or means
    to support the bearing, comprise structure for allowing assembly.


CLS 384/585
TXT Race fastening means:

    Subject matter under subclass 584 having means to secure a roller bearing
    race in its appropriate location.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connection, appropriate subclasses for a joint between a
    rotary shaft and a device mounted thereon.


CLS 384/586
TXT Fixed shaft and rotating outer member:

    Subject matter under subclass 548 wherein a radially outer element rotates
    abut a fixed shaft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    295,    Railway Wheels and Axles, subclass 10 for loose tire railway wheels.

    305,    Wheel Substitutes for Land Vehicles, subclass 7 for a rigid
    circular track provided with a wheel or roller within the track on a fixed
    shaft.

    492,    Roll or Roller, subclasses 16+ for a roll, per se, not elsewhere
    provided for, in which the outer surface of the roll is rotatable relative
    to its supporting shaft.


CLS 384/587
TXT Outermost element cylindrical:

    Subject matter under subclass 586 wherein  the radially outermost element
    has only a cylindrical periphery.


CLS 384/588
TXT Outermost element grooved:

    Subject matter under subclass 586 wherein the radially outermost element
    has a grooved periphery..


CLS 384/589
TXT For hub:

    Subject matter under subclass 586 wherein a rotating outer member comprises
    structure relating to its hub.


CLS 384/590
TXT Thrust bearing:

    Subject matter under subclass 445 designed for loads imposed mainly in the
    direction of the axis of rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    121 and 420+, especially subclasses 420+ for similar type thrust
    bearings and see the search notes.


CLS 384/591
TXT Vehicle center:

    Subject matter under subclass 590 wherein the bearing transmits radial,
    axial and moment forces from an upper structure to the base of a vehicle
    center revolving table, as a bridge, turntable, etc.


CLS 384/592
TXT Ball:

    Subject matter under subclass 591 wherein the bearing is a ball bearing.


CLS 384/593
TXT Roller:

    Subject matter under subclass 591 wherein the bearing is a ball bearing.


CLS 384/594
TXT Railway truck center bearing:

    Subject matter under subclass 590 wherein the bearing is a center bearing
    for railway cars and is designed to transmit radial, axial and moment
    forces from a railway truck structure to a base.


CLS 384/595
TXT Railway truck side bearing:

    Subject matter under subclass 590 wherein the bearing is designed to be
    located between a car-truck bolster and a body bolster on a railway car,
    upon which bearing load is imposed when the car body tilts from a vertical
    as when the car is turning.


CLS 384/596
TXT Ball:

    Subject matter under subclass 595 wherein the bearing is a ball bearing.


CLS 384/597
TXT Roller:

    Subject matter under subclass 595 wherein the bearing element is a roller.


CLS 384/598
TXT Toothed:

    Subject matter under subclass 597 wherein the roller comprises teeth which
    mesh with other teeth in a race or other adjacent roller.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    550,    for a toothed radial roller bearing.


CLS 384/599
TXT With self-adjustment means:

    Subject matter under subclass 597 including means for automatically moving
    the bearing assembly or a component thereof.


CLS 384/600
TXT Assembling means:

    Subject matter under subclass 597 having specified means to put together
    the bearing assembly.


CLS 384/601
TXT Contaminant elimination; adjustment means:

    Subject matter under subclass 597 having either means to eliminate
    deleterious  fluid or solid material from the bearing, or prevent its
    entry; or to move the bearing assembly or component thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    599,    for self-adjustment means for a roller bearing.


CLS 384/602
TXT Adjustment by shim:

    Subject matter under subclass 601 wherein the adjustment means includes a
    spacing shim.


CLS 384/603
TXT Spinning spindle:

    Subject matter under subclass 590 wherein the bearing is designed to
    support a spindle, i.e., shaft, for bobbins in a spinning machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227+,   for a spinning spindle having plan bearings.


CLS 384/604
TXT Different size rolling elements; spacers; noncircular array:

    Subject matter under subclass 590 wherein rolling elements of different
    sizes are employed within the same set of races; or discrete
    circumferential spacers are employed between rolling elements; or wherein
    there is a noncircular array of rolling elements in the same radial plane.


CLS 384/605
TXT Temperature compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 590 including means for compensating for
    changes brought about by a change in temperature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    493,    for a ball bearing with temperature compensation.

    557,    for a roller bearing with temperature compensation.

    905,    for temperature compensation not designated in the regular schedule.


CLS 384/606
TXT Lubricating:

    Subject matter under subclass 590 having means to lubricate the bearing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322+,   for lubrication of plain bearings and see search notes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, appropriate subclasses for lubrication
    means for lubrication of internal-combustion engine parts.

    184,    Lubrication, appropriate subclasses for lubrication means of
    general utility.


CLS 384/607
TXT Seals:

    Subject matter under subclass 590 having means for preventing matter from
    entering into, passing through or escaping from the bearing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130+,   for seals for plain bearings.

    477,    for seals for antifriction radial bearings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 345+ for a seal between relatively movable parts (i.e.,
    a dynamic seal).


CLS 384/608
TXT Concentric rolling members:

    Subject matter under subclass 590 comprising a plurality of rows of
    antifriction elements in concentric relation.

    (1)     Note.  "Concentric" means about the same center point of a circle
    or sphere, but for purposes of this subclass it shall suffice if radially
    spaced rolling elements axially overlap.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    613,    for plural axially spaced rows at balls.

    619,    for plural axially spaced roller bearing.


CLS 384/609
TXT Ball bearing:

    Devices under subclass 590 wherein the antifriction element is a ball.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    490,    for a radial bearing with a ball element.


CLS 384/610
TXT Single ball:

    Subject matter under subclass 609 where only one ball takes the entire
    thrust load.


CLS 384/611
TXT Resilient feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 609 wherein the bearing assembly has a
    resilient element.


CLS 384/612
TXT Self-aligning:

    Subject matter under subclass 609 comprising means to align the bearing or
    bearing assembly automatically.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    495,    for a self-aligning ball bearing.


CLS 384/613
TXT Plural rows balls or tandem thrust:

    Subject matter under subclass 609 having more than one axially spaced row
    of balls, which may or may not have means to distribute force among the
    rows.

    (1)     Note.  The rows of balls are often with a common race.


CLS 384/614
TXT Cage structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 609 having detailed means for spacing balls
    in a race.


CLS 384/615
TXT Race structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 609 having specified race detail.


CLS 384/616
TXT Adjustment means:

    Subject matter under subclass 609 comprising means to move the bearing
    assembly or a component thereof.


CLS 384/617
TXT Assembling means:

    Subject matter under subclass 609 having specified means to put together
    the bearing assembly.


CLS 384/618
TXT Roller bearing:

    Subject matter under subclass 590 wherein the rolling friction is from a
    roller element, e.g., a cylindrical tapered, barrel-shaped, or
    needle-shaped element.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 491 for definition of a ball bearing


CLS 384/619
TXT Roller structure or orientation; plural axially spaced rows or tandem
    thrust:

    Subject matter under subclass 618 having detailed of a roller element; or
    the orientation of the rollers is specified; or having two or more axially
    spaced roller rows which may or may not have means to distribute force
    among the rows.


CLS 384/620
TXT Resilient feature; adjustment or self-alignment means; assembling means:

    Subject matter under subclass 618 having resilient means for supporting the
    bearing; or means to move or allow for automatic movement of the bearing or
    bearing assembly or a component thereof; or specified means to put together
    the bearing assembly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    558,    for a self-aligning roller bearing.


CLS 384/621
TXT Race and cage structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 618 having detailed means for spacing rollers
    in a race and in addition details of a race.


CLS 384/622
TXT Race structure:

    Devices under subclass 618 having specified race detail.


CLS 384/623
TXT Cage structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 618 having specified means for spacing
    rollers in a race.


CLS 384/624
TXT BEARING SAFETY OR SELF-CLEANING MEANS:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein specified means are
    provided to protect either a bearing or a human, or to remove containment
    matter automatically.


CLS 384/625
TXT BEARING-SURFACE TREATMENT:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein bearing surface has been
    specially treated to improve its antifriction or wear-resisting properties.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes all special processes for treating
    bearing surfaces not otherwise provided for in the art.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 89.5 for burning-in, wearing-in and oil
    burnishing and subclasses 898+ for methods of making bearing.

    148,    Metal Treatment, appropriate subclasses for processes of
    significant heat treatment of metal to modify or maintain the internal
    physical structure (i.e., microstructure, etc.) or chemical property of
    metal, and appropriate subclasses for processes of reactive coating of
    metal substrates wherein an external agent combines with the metal
    substrate to form a coating thereon containing an element from said
    substrate.

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 80+ for electrolytic coating
    processes.

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, for treating a bearing surface
    including a chemical etching operation.


CLS 384/626
TXT SHIM FOR BEARING:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a piece of material is
    used to take up wear or adjust parts of a bearing.


CLS 384/627
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition not provided for above.



         CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 384/900
TXT Cooling or heating:

    Apparatus, or fluid to raise, or lower the temperature of a bearing.


CLS 384/901
TXT Floating bushing:

    This art principally includes rotationally free bushings between an inner
    and an outer bearing, but also includes axial or radial freedom.


CLS 384/902
TXT Porous metal member:

    The metal member has pores through which lubricant may pass or in which
    lubricant can be impregnated.


CLS 384/903
TXT Retaining ring:

    The ring is for holding bearing parts together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    561,    for assembly of a bearing using a ring.


CLS 384/904
TXT Propeller shaft outer bearing:

    The bearing is where the propeller shaft passes through the hull of a ship
    or boat.


CLS 384/905
TXT Temperature compensation:

    The Bearing is designed so that deviation due to temperature will be
    counteracted, compensated for, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Temperature compensation features provided for in the
    regular schedule should not be cross-referenced here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    493,    for a ball bearing with temperature compensation.

    557,    for a roller bearing with temperature compensation.

    605,    for a thrust bearing with temperature compensation.


CLS 384/905.1
TXT Cup-shaped bearing:

    A bearing in the form of a hollow cylinder with a closed end.


CLS 384/906
TXT Antirotation key:

    The bearing assembly has a nonattaching element preventing rotation of one
    element relative to another.


CLS 384/907
TXT Bearing material or solid lubricant:

    Specified bearing material and/or a solid lubricant.

    (1)     Note.  Some bearing materials are referred to in the literature as
    solid lubricants, and vice versa.


CLS 384/907.1
TXT Jewel, glass, ceramic or carbon:

    A material comprising precious or semiprecious stones, ceramic material, or
    a form of carbon.


CLS 384/908
TXT Nylon or polytetrafluorethylene:

    Specified bearing material and/or a solid lubricant.


CLS 384/909
TXT Plastic:

    Nonmetallic high molecular weight bearing elements not provided for in
    subclass 907.


CLS 384/910
TXT Powders:

    The material, usually a solid lubricant, is in powder form.


CLS 384/911
TXT Including fiber:

    The bearing member includes fiber.


CLS 384/912
TXT Metallic:

    the bearing member is wholly or predominantly composed of metal.


CLS 384/913
TXT Metallic compounds:

    A metal in chemical compound with another material, for example, Molybdenum
    desulfide, not found above.

    (1)     Note.  If the metallic compound is in fused, vitreous, or
    crystalline form, (e.g., Aluminum Oxide as sapphire), then it would be
    found in subclass 907.1 above, and not cross-referenced here.


CLS 385/
TTL OPTICAL WAVEGUIDES

CLS 385/
TXT I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF THE CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    A.      Subject matter appropriate to this class falls into one of the
    following categories:

    (1)     An optical waveguiding element, per se, or a grouping thereof which
    conveys light from one point to another through an optically transparent
    elongated structure by modal transmission, total internal reflection, or
    total reflectorization.

    (2)     A combination of an optical waveguiding element with an additional
    broadly recited optical element which couples light thereto or therefrom or
    a combination including a broadly recited optical element which couples
    light between plural optical waveguiding elements.

    (3)     A combination of an optical waveguiding element with structure
    which mechanically joins this waveguiding element with another or with a
    diverse optical element.

    (4)     An optical modulator where the modulation of a light wave
    characteristic is performed exclusively within an optical waveguiding
    element.

    (5)     Other miscellaneous devices formed of an optical waveguide (e.g., a
    waveguide sensing device) and supplemental devices which are limited to use
    with an optical waveguide (e.g., an external clamp or retainer) not
    otherwise classifiable.


    B.      Nominally claimed structure, external to this class in combination
    with apparatus under the class definition, is classified in this class
    unless provided for in the appropriate external class.

    C.      Significantly claimed structure, external to this class claimed in
    combination with structure under the class definition, is classified in the
    class appropriate to the external device unless specifically excluded
    therefrom.

     (1)    Note.  A detailed optical amplifier/frequency converter, per se, or
    such subject matter in combination with additional wave guide structure is
    classified in Class 359.  The nominal recitation of any type of optical
    amplifier/ converter together with additional waveguide structure is
    classified in this class (385) wherein such combination meets the class
    requirements.

     (2)    Note.  Optical modulation that occurs within the area of total
    internal reflection of an optical waveguide belongs in this class, whereas
    modulation occurring outside the optical waveguide is classified in Class
    359.

     (3)    Note.  If significant details beyond the nominal recitation of a
    detector or light source are claimed, classification is elsewhere.

     (4)    Note.  A device having an optical wave going through a bulk
    material, such as a semiconductor, glass, etc., does not belong in this
    class since the wave is not totally confined within the boundaries of the
    bulk material.  If, however, the wave is totally confined within an area
    but specified leakage, as designed, is built into the area for some desired
    results, this would then belong in this class.

     (5)    Note.  The optical fibers and waveguides classified in this class
    are final products, suitable for immediate optical transmission.  Excluded
    from this class are articles of intermediate shape (e.g., blanks, preforms)
    from which optical fibers and waveguides are made (as by drawing or
    extruding).  Such intermediate articles are classified in Class 428,
    subclass 542.8.

     (6)    Note.  Fiber optics refers to optical devices for conveying light
    or images through a particular configuration of glass or plastic fibers.
    Incoherent fiber optic bundles will transmit light but not an image.
    Coherent fiber optic bundles can transmit an image through small, clad
    optical fibers where the fiber ends have similar positions at opposite
    bundle ends.

     (7)    Note.  An optical fiber waveguide is basically a light guidance
    system that is cylindrical in shape.  The fiber relies upon modal
    transmission to transmit light along its axial length. Light enters one end
    of the fiber and emerges from the opposite end with only minimal loss.

     (8)    Note.  The thin-film waveguide is a thin dielectric guide film of
    high refractive index formed adjacent to a substrate or support region of
    lower refractive index.  The thin-film relies upon modal transmission to
    transmit light along its length.  Light enters one end of the thin-film
    where it is processed (e.g., modulated or switched) and emerges from the
    opposite end.

    (9)     Note.  Combinations including an optical waveguide and a device of
    the Class 257 type are classified here provided the combination does not
    meet the requirements of a still larger system class.

     (10)   Note.  A tee coupler is an optical component used to interconnect a
    number of terminals through optical waveguides by using partial reflections
    at dielectric interfaces or metallic surfaces, or by splitting the optical
    waveguide bundle.

     (11)   Note.  Modal Transmission is a form of guide-wave propagation
    characterized by a particular field pattern.

     (12)   Note.  A laser in an integrated optical circuit is classified here
    in Class 385 (see section III of Class 372, class definition).

                       DEFINITIONS OF CLASS TERMS

    CONNECTING
    The physical or mechanical joining of optical waveguiding structures to
    provide a stable region of light transfer therebetween. The waveguiding
    structures which are joined together are characterized by terminal ends
    which are mechanically prepared. This includes ferrule type housings for
    demountable as well as permanent connections, mechanical sleeves which
    partially or wholly surround and secure the ends of the structures or the
    light transfer regions, and "assistance-type" structures which serve to
    align and guide the ends of waveguiding structures into an effective light
    transfer relationship. The waveguiding structures which can be connected
    (as defined herein) include optical fibers, optical fiber bundles,
    nonfiber-like optical waveguides, and electro-optical transmitting or
    receiving devices (e.g., semiconductor laser diodes).

    COUPLING
    The interchange of light radiation among or between waveguiding
    structures,wherein the mechanical interconnection between the structures is
    of little or no importance. The radiation interchange may be accomplished
    through any of a number of physical phenomena, including the evanescent
    wave coupling phenomenon, various modal coupling phenomena, refraction,
    reflection, as well as through induced changes in structure parameters
    which govern light transmission (for example, electro-optically or
    electromagnetically induced refractive index changes in an "interaction" or
    coupling region). However, devices for input/output of a light wave to/from
    an optical confinement area, or devices for manipulating an optical wave
    within or adjacent to an optical confinement area, which employ holography,
    are classified in the holography area of the Class 359 schedule.

    INPUT-OUTPUT COUPLING
    The introduction of electromagnetic light radiation into an optical
    waveguiding structure from a source which is external to the structure, or
    the extraction of electromagnetic light radiation from an optical
    waveguiding structure to a detecting device at its exterior. This term
    ("input-output coupling") is specifically defined to include only the
    coupling of light from a source (e.g., a laser) into an optical waveguide
    or the coupling of light from an optical waveguide to a detector (e.g., a
    photodiode), and thus excludes the coupling of light between optical
    waveguides.

    LIGHT TRANSMITTING ROD
    Any optically transparent elongated structure used to transmit light from
    one end to the other end by other than modal transmission (e.g., in a
    random fashion).

    OPTICAL FIBER
    A light transmitting (optical) waveguide formed in a generally cylindrical
    form, often of extremely small diameter and of great length, which confines
    the transmitted radiation therewithin by means of the principle of total
    internal reflection.  Optical fibers are usually comprised of a central
    light transmitting core of relatively high refractive index, surrounded by
    a concentric cladding of relatively low refractive index.

    OPTICAL WAVEGUIDE
    An optical waveguide is a waveguide which guides radiation in the visible
    and near-visible portions of the spectrum by means of total internal
    reflection.

    TOTAL INTERNAL REFLECTION
    A principle based upon Snell's Law, which defines the relationship between
    incident and refracted light rays at a boundary between two media of
    different refractive indices:

    n1 sin Q1 = n2 sin Q2 where

    n1 = refractive index of first medium

    n2 = refractive index of second medium

    Q1 = angle of incident ray at boundary

    Q2 = angle of refracted ray at boundary

    For Q2 = 90 degrees, the critical angle of incidence is given by Qc = sin-1
    (n2/n1).

    At angles of incidence greater than Qc, the light is reflected from the
    boundary.

    TOTALLY REFLECTORIZED
    The state of an optical element having all of its inward facing lateral
    surfaces made reflectors, as for example by the coating thereof with a
    reflective metal.

    WAVEGUIDE
    A waveguide is defined as any structure capable of guiding electromagnetic
    radiation in a direction parallel to its axis, while substantially
    confining the radiation to a region within and adjacent to its surfaces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, appropriate subclasses for chemical treatment of
    fibers.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 700+ for various metal working jigs, and
    subclasses 854-873 for assembling electrical terminals to conductors or
    circuits (e.g., using ferrules, splicing, etc.).

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass  1 for optical readout therefrom
    and subclasses 227+ for straightline light ray type instruments.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 427+ for illuminated
    special effects display, subclasses 451 and 452 for illuminated changing
    exhibitor, and subclasses 546 and 547 for illuminated signs (e.g., by fiber
    optics).

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 3+ for cable
    forming by twisting.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 385+ for processes of forming
    optical fibers, waveguides, and preforms, particularly subclass 386 for
    processes of forming planar waveguides; subclasses 388, 389, 390, and 397+
    for forming optical fibers or waveguides having specified composition;
    subclasses 393, 402, and 403 for forming optical fibers or waveguides
    having particular cross section or configuration; subclasses 406+ for
    processes of forming combined with joining optical fibers or waveguides;
    subclasses 413+ and 430+ for processes of forming combined with coating
    optical fibers or waveguides; and subclasses 489+ for apparatus for forming
    optical fibers or waveguides.

    70,     Locks, digest 51 for light sensitive lock control.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 293 for liquid level/depth gauge
    with illumination, subclasses 488+ for speed/ acceleration testing that may
    use optical waveguides, subclass 653 for optical indication of vibration,
    subclass 705 for an optical fluid pressure gauge, subclass 800 for optical
    stress or strain testing, and subclass 861.08 for optical measurement of
    volume or rate of flow.

    83,     Cutting, subclass 913 for filament-to-staple-fiber cutting.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclass 201 for optical explosive
    ignition.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 202 for visual light signal
    indicators.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 569+ for solar heat collectors
    which may utilize optical waveguides.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, appropriate subclasses for cable
    containing ducts.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    158 for methods of joining fibers (bonding) end-to-end.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 68.1+ for
    electrical cables, per se, and particularly subclass 70 for combined
    optical/electrical cables or a submarine repeater housing.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 310+ for
    illuminated switch indicators and digest 47 for light guide switch
    indicators.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 192.29 for forming
    a transparent optical conductor by sputtering.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 13.1+ for special article supports.

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, especially subclasses 24+ for
    methods of making an optical device by chemical etching combined with an
    additional manufacturing step.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 121.36+ for methods and apparatus for
    fusing (splicing) optical fibers.

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, subclasses 94+ for apparatus which
    scribes then breaks optical fibers.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for advancing fibers through a tube (i.e., cable).

    235,    Registers, subclass 473 for optical fiber coded record sensors.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 3.12 and 3.16+ for missiles guided by
    optical fibers.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 227.11+ for optical or pre-photocell
    systems having a light conductor and subclass 577 for a fluid level optical
    system.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 13, 79-103 and 918 for incoherent light emitting injection
    luminescent devices, subclasses 80-85 for semiconductor light emitting
    sources combined with semiconductor light responsive devices, subclasses
    10, 11, 21, 53-56, 72, 113-118, 184-189, 225-234, 257, 258, 290-294, 414,
    and 431-466 for light responsive active semiconductor devices, and
    subclasses 446 and 499+ for integrated circuit devices with electrically
    isolated components, in general, and other appropriate subclasses for
    specific type devices in integrated circuits.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 1.24+ for shaping, treating, or extruding optical fibers,
    waveguides, or preforms.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclass 260 for coupling where both
    members are pliable and nonmetallic.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 372 for a cathode-ray
    tube with light conducting fiber or rod.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 96+ for electrical
    testing using radiant energy.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 24+ for coupling
    networks; subclasses 141+, 150+ and 157+ for delay lines; and subclasses
    209+ for waveguide tunable filters.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 555+ for intrusion
    detection by light beam; subclass 815.42 for a visual indicator with light
    piping; and subclasses 853.1+ for wellbore telemetry which may include
    optical waveguides.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclass 137 for A-to-D or
    D-to-A conversion using fiber optics.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 180+ for light pen input
    visual display systems.

    346,    Recorders, subclass 33 for well logging which may use optical
    waveguides.

    348,    Television, subclasses 13+ for two-way communication which may
    include a videophone, subclass 197 for mechanical-optical scanning with
    fiber optics, subclass 359 for camera with fiber optics, and subclass 804
    for video display with fiber optics.

    355,    Photocopying, subclass 1 for photocopying with fiber optics.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 73.1 for optical fiber or
    waveguide inspection, subclass 241 for inspection borescopes in general,
    subclass 350 for ring laser gyros including optical waveguides, and
    subclass 352 for Fabry-Perot cavities.

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 484 for scanning with fiber optics or optical
    waveguides and subclass 901.1 for fiber optic cross-reference art
    collection.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements,
    appropriate subclasses for optical systems such as communications systems
    which may utilize an optical waveguide.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 748+ for
    housings with electrical connection of PC boards.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 32 for illumination systems which utilize an
    optical fiber.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 112 for
    photoconductive static information storage or retrieval.

    367,    Communications, Electrical: Acoustic Wave System and Devices,
    subclass 25 for well logging using fiber optics and subclasses 140+ for
    acoustic transducers in general.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 18 for optical
    reading of a mechanical record.

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, subclass 6 for optical fiber lasers.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 131 for thermal measurement
    using optical fibers.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 56.1+ for light wave link for
    speech or paging signal.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclass 64 for optical detector of toner in a
    developing unit, subclass 118 for optics with particular modular or
    displaceable structure, subclass 137 for optical intermediate storage of
    original image formation, subclasses 196+ for variable magnification,
    subclass 218 for exposure lens, and subclass 219 for exposure of an image
    formation having fiber optics.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    subclass 802 (Cross-Reference Art Collection) for cable tube or rod
    splicing.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 163.1+ for processes of coating
    optical fibers, filaments, rods, or waveguides.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 364+ for
    miscellaneous filaments or fibers.

    433,    Dentistry, subclass 29 for dental handpieces provided with optical
    transmission cables for illuminating the work.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for connectors of
    electrical conductors.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclass 219 for toys having optical
    fibers.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 41+ for a process of grinding glass.

    501,    Compositions: Ceramic, subclass 37 for the ceramic composition of
    an optical fiber.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    appropriate subclasses.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 101+, for surgical specula including
    endoscopes, subclasses 184+, 248+, and 249 for other surgical diagnostic
    implements.

    601,    Surgery:  Kinesitherapy, subclasses 15+ for optical kinesitherapy.


CLS 385/1
TXT TEMPORAL OPTICAL MODULATION WITHIN AN OPTICAL WAVEGUIDE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a device varies a
    property of light as a function of time only as it traverses the waveguide
    where such variation is in accordance with a varying signal which can be of
    any energy form.

    (1)     Note.  Such properties of the traversing light include amplitude,
    frequency, phase, or polarization.

    (2)     Note.  The variation can be imparted through elasto-optic,
    magneto-optic, acousto-optic, etc., interactions with the waveguide.

    (3)     Note.  Elasto-optic modulation involves varying a property of a
    light wave propagating in an optical waveguide by a mechanical stressing
    applied thereto.

    (4)     Note.  Magneto-optic modulation involves varying a property of a
    light wave propagating in an optical waveguide by a magnetic field applied
    thereto.

    (5)     Note.  Acousto-optic modulation involves varying a property of a
    light wave propagating in an optical waveguide by a modulating sonic
    (acoustic) wave applied thereto.

    (6)     Note.  The modulation must take place exclusively within the
    waveguide. Optical modulation occurring outside of a waveguide is
    classified in Class 359.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4+,     for directional modulation within fiber optics.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    238+ for light wave temporal modulation outside of a waveguide.


CLS 385/2
TXT Electro-optic:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the optical properties of an
    optical waveguiding element which determine the temporal modula-tion are
    varied by an applied modulating electrical field.

    (1)     Note.  Includes electro-optic modulation within an optical
    waveguide using a particular optical coupling (for example, between
    juxtaposed (adjacent) waveguides). Also, included is electro-optic
    modulation performed by a combination of components integrated on a common
    substrate or chip.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for directional electro-optic modulation within an optical
    waveguide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    245+ for electro-optic temporal modulation outside of an optical waveguide.


CLS 385/3
TXT Phase modulation type:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the normal zero phase of a constant
    amplitude optical wave (i.e., carrier wave) is shifted by an angle
    proportional to the amplitude of an impressed signal (i.e., modulating
    signal).

    (1)     Note.  A sinusoidal signal of zero phase will have a zero amplitude
    at the intersection of the x-y axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    238+ for temporal phase modulation outside of a waveguide.


CLS 385/4
TXT DIRECTIONAL OPTICAL MODULATION WITHIN AN OPTICAL WAVEGUIDE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the path of a light wave
    exiting a waveguide is varied in accordance with a varying signal applied
    to the waveguide which can be of any energy form.

    (1)     Note.  The directional modulation must take place exclusively
    within the waveguide. Optical directional modulation occurring outside of a
    waveguide is classified in Class 359.

    (2)     Note.  This includes elasto-optic directional modulation, wherein
    deflection of a light wave output from an optical waveguide is varied in
    synchronization with the amplitude of an impressed mechanical stressing
    thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for light wave temporal modulation within an optical waveguide
    wherein the light beam is modulated relative to time in accordance with the
    modulating input signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communi-cation) and Elements,
    subclasses 298+ for optical directional modulation out-side of an optical
    waveguide.


CLS 385/5
TXT Light intensity dependent (e.g., nonlinear ef-fects):

    Subject matter under subclass 4 wherein  the directional modulation is a
    function of the amplitude of the incident light wave itself.

    (1)     Note.  Includes thermo-optic directional modulation, wherein
    deflection of a light wave output from an optical waveguide is varied in
    response to the intensity of applied thermal radiation.


CLS 385/6
TXT Magneto-optic:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 wherein properties of an optical
    waveguiding element which determine the directional modulation are
    con-trolled by a modulating magnetic field applied to the element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    298+ for magneto-optic directional modulation outside of a waveguide.


CLS 385/7
TXT Acousto-optic:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 wherein proper-ties of an optical
    waveguiding element which determine the directional modulation are
    con-trolled by a modulating sonic wave applied to the element.

     SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, appropriate subclasses for acoustic devices, in general.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    305+ for acousto-optic directional modulation outside of a waveguide.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave System and Devices,
    subclasses 140+ for acoustic transducers.


CLS 385/8
TXT Electro-optic:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 wherein the optical properties of an
    optical waveguiding element which determine the directional modution are
    changed by a modulating electrical field applied to the element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    315+ for electro-optical directional modulation outside of a waveguide.


CLS 385/9
TXT Coupling between waveguides:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 wherein coupling between juxtaposed optical
    transmission elements achieves electro-optic directional modulation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    for optical waveguide coupling, per se.


CLS 385/10
TXT Diffraction grating (e.g., Bragg):

    Subject matter under subclass 8 wherein electro-optic directional
    modulation within a waveguide utilizes an element having a series of very
    close, equidistant, parallel lines, (i.e., grating) or wherein the
    waveguide has a grating impressed upon it by an externally applied field.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    566+ for a diffraction grating, per se.


CLS 385/11
TXT POLARIZATION WITHOUT MODULATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the polarization of an
    incoming light wave is modified as a result of passing through an optical
    waveguiding element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for time dependent polarization modulation of light within a
    waveguide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    483+ for light polarization without modulation outside of a waveguide.


CLS 385/12
TXT OPTICAL WAVEGUIDE SENSOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition where-in an optical waveguide,
    per se, is responsive to an environmental change.

    (1)     Note.  This is a residual subclass for generic optical waveguide
    sensing elements which are not elsewhere classifiable. See the SEARCH CLASS
    notes below.

    (2)     Note.  Combinations of an optical waveguide with an external
    sensing element or sensing elements, per se, that are not optical
    waveguides, are classified else-where.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94,     for optical fiber/nonfiber device connectors which are sealed to
    exclude the effects of environmental conditions.

    128,    for coated optical fiber waveguides which may also act as a sensor
    under certain conditions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 293 for optical liquid level
    sensing; subclasses 488+ for optical speed or acceleration testing;
    subclass 577 for optical depth sensing; subclass 653 for optical vibration
    sensing; subclass 705 for optical fluid pressure sensing; subclass 800 for
    optical stress or strain sensors; and subclass 861.08 for optical sensing
    of volume and rate of flow.

    235,    Registers, subclass 473 for optical fiber coded record sensors.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 227.11+ for optical sensing systems
    employing light conductors and photocells.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 96 for electrical
    testing using optical means and subclasses 244.1 for a magnetometer that
    uses optical means.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 555 for light beam intrusion
    detection and subclasses 853.1+ for wellbore testing.

    346,    Recorders, subclass 33 for wellbore recording.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 73.1 for optical measuring
    and testing for optical fiber/waveguide inspection.

    367,    Communications, Electrical: Acoustic Wave System and Devices,
    subclass 25 for wellbore telemetering and subclasses 140+ for acoustic
    transducers.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 131 for thermal sensing
    using optical fibers.


CLS 385/13
TXT Including physical deformation or movement of waveguide:

    Subject matter under subclass 12 wherein the environmental change to be
    detected produces an alteration in the shape or position of the waveguide.

    (1)     Note.  Physical deformations include, for example, cutting or
    breaking of the waveguide, compressing or elongating the waveguide (or of
    the surrounding coating/substrate), or microbending the waveguide.


CLS 385/14
TXT INTEGRATED OPTICAL CIRCUIT:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a combination of
    transparent, elongated structures or components are formed on a common
    substrate or chip of monolithic or hybrid construction.

    (1)     Note.  Components in addition to the optical waveguide might
    include active optical elements (e.g., LED) or passive elements (e.g.,
    lens).

    (2)     Note.  An integrated optical circuit including a combination of an
    optical waveguide and a device of the Class 357 type is classified here
    provided the combination does not meet the requirement of a still larger
    system class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129,    for a planar optical waveguide structure which can be (but is not
    necessarily) the starting point for many integrated optical circuits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 13, 79-103 and 918 for incoherent light emitting injection
    luminescent devices, subclasses 80-85 for semiconductor light emitting
    sources combined with semiconductor light responsive devices, subclasses
    10, 11, 21, 53-56, 72, 113-118, 184-189, 225-234, 257, 258, 290-294, 414,
    and 431-466 for light responsive active semiconductor devices, and
    subclasses 446 and 499+ for integrated circuit devices with electrically
    isolated components, in general, and other appropriate subclasses for
    specific type devices in integrated circuits.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 350 for optical ring laser
    gyros which are often integrated.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 748-796+
    for connection of electrical integrated circuits (not optical).

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, appropriate subclasses for details to a
    laser.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, subclasses 24+ for
    methods of making a semiconductor integrated circuit having both light
    emissive and light responsive devices.


CLS 385/15
TXT WITH OPTICAL COUPLER:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein an optical waveguide is
    combined with an interface element which enables efficient transfer of
    light between the waveguide and a point external to the interface element.

    (1)     Note.  For the purpose of this schedule, coupling is not the same
    as connecting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for mechanical connecting means which are disconnectable without
    destroying the optical element (e.g., ferrule type connections).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 227.11+ for coupling of optical
    conductor (waveguide) system to photocell.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 24 for coupling
    networks for wave (e.g., microwave, millimeter wave, quasi-optical wave)
    transmission lines; subclasses 141, 150 and 157 for delay lines of wave
    transmission networks; and subclass 209 for waveguide tunable filters for
    wave transmission networks.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 352 for optical
    Fabry-Perot cavities.


CLS 385/16
TXT Switch (i.e., switching from one terminal to another, not modulation):

    Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein the output of an optical waveguide
    is selectively coupled to the input of a different optical waveguide.

    (1)     Note.  These couplings are not necessarily physically connected.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is for switching without any specifically
    mentioned computation or modulation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41      and 42, for directional couplers which could be employed as
    switches and subclasses 4+ for directional optical modulation in waveguides
    (e.g., for scanning).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses
    for electrical switches.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 310+ for
    piezoelectric elements and devices.

    348,    Television, subclass 197 for optical scanning with fiber optics.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    115+ for an optical multiplex communication system which may include an
    optical waveguide and switch; subclasses 107+ for switching utilized in
    optical compu-tation; and subclass 618 for light divid-ing and combining
    arrangements utiliz-ing single channel to/from plural chan-nels.


CLS 385/17
TXT Matrix switch (i.e., M X N, where M and  N are 3 or more):

    Subject matter under subclass 16 wherein a plurality of switches can
    selectively couple light on any of M input waveguides to any of N output
    waveguides where the M input waveguides and the N output waveguides form a
    rectilinear array.


CLS 385/18
TXT Reflective-type switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 wherein  selective coupling of light
    between waveguides is achieved by mirror or mirrorlike elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communi-cation) and Elements,
    subclasses 838+ for mirrors, in general.


CLS 385/19
TXT Stationary waveguides with movable opaque element:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 wherein an optically nontransmissive
    device moving into or out of the optical path between stationary waveguides
    provides the switching effect.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73,     for optical fiber connectors having an optical element between
    facing optical fiber end faces.

    140,    for optical waveguide attenuators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    227+ for light control by moving an opaque element or medium in or through
    a light path.


CLS 385/20
TXT Multiple pole multiple throw:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 wherein the optical switch operates to
    selectively couple light between a plurality of input waveguides and any
    one of their respective plurality of output waveguides.

    (1)     Note.  Switching of all input waveguides takes place simultaneously.

    (2)     Note.  The number of output waveguides associated with each input
    waveguide is the same.


CLS 385/21
TXT Double pole multiple throw:

    Subject matter under subclass 20 wherein the optical switch operates to
    selectively couple light between a pair of input waveguides and any one of
    their respective plurality of output waveguides.

    (1)     Note.  Switching of both input waveguides takes place
    simultaneously.

    (2)     Note.  The number of output waveguides associated with each input
    waveguide is the same.


CLS 385/22
TXT Single pole multiple throw (relay switch):

    Subject matter under subclass 16 wherein the optical switch operates to
    selectively couple light from a single input waveguide to any one of a
    plurality of output waveguides.


CLS 385/23
TXT Single pole single throw:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 wherein the optical switch operates to
    selectively couple light from a single input waveguide to a single output
    waveguide.


CLS 385/24
TXT Plural (e.g., data bus):

    Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein an optical waveguide is used as a
    common trunk line to which a number of terminals can be interconnected
    through optical couplers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     Star coupler, for input only on one specified input terminal which
    is distributed to many terminals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclass 137 for analog to
    digital and digital to analog conversion utilizing fiber optics.

    345,    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 180+ for light pens
    used as input devices for visual display systems with selective electrical
    control.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communi-cation) and Elements, subclass
    118 for multiplexed optical local area networks (LANS), subclass 127 for
    wavelength division or frequency division multi-plexing by optical
    coupling; subclass 173 for optical communication systems including a
    transmitter, a receiver, and an optical waveguide; and subclasses 107+ for
    optical computing.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 224.8
    for data processing systems specifically adapted for an optics application;
    subclasses 240.6 or 935.54 for a computer optical bus, per se, and subclass
    953.7 for optical delay lines, per se.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 112 for
    optically performed static storage/retrieval of data.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 18 for optically
    performed dynamic storage/retrieval of data.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 53 and 56 for optically
    performed telephonic communications.


CLS 385/25
TXT Movable coupler:

    Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein the coupler may be repositioned
    about a fixed optical waveguide.


CLS 385/26
TXT Slip ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 25 having a structure which permits coupling
    of light during relative rotary motion of elements contained therein.

    (1)     Note. The most common slip-ring configuration is the rotor/stator
    arrangement, with either or both rotating continuously with respect to each
    other, and with optical radiation continuously being coupled across the gap.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    554 for stabilization of images transmitted by means of optical elements,
    and subclass 196 for derotation prisms.


CLS 385/27
TXT Particular coupling function:

    Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein the coupling achieves a specified
    operation on the light entering or exiting the waveguide.


CLS 385/28
TXT Coupling between modes in a waveguide or fiber:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 wherein  coupling is achieved between
    light modes in an optical waveguide.


CLS 385/29
TXT Mode strippers:

    Subject matter under subclass 28 wherein a particular mode or modes of
    light propagating in a waveguide is extracted by a coupler.


CLS 385/30
TXT Evanescent wave coupling:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 wherein the desired coupling function is
    achieved by matching the propagation constants of light travelling in
    coupled waveguides (also resulting in overlapping evanescent fields).

    (1)     Note.  The structure of evanescent wave couplers often includes the
    removal of most of the waveguide cladding material in the actual coupling
    region.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 41+ for a process of abrading a glass
    substrate (a typical technique for forming evanescent wave couplers).


CLS 385/31
TXT Input/output coupler:

    Subject matter under subclass 15 including an element which permits
    efficient transfer of light into or out of the waveguide.

     SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    124+ for a communication system which may include an optical waveguide and
    I/O coupler.


CLS 385/32
TXT Coupling light through a waveguide bend or loop:

    Subject matter under subclass 31 wherein light is coupled into or out of an
    optical waveguide through a curved portion whose radius of curvature is
    smaller than that required to confine light therein.


CLS 385/33
TXT Lens:

    Subject matter under subclass 31 wherein the coupling element focuses light
    by refraction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    642+ for lens elements, per se, and subclasses 362+ for compound lens
    systems.


CLS 385/34
TXT Rod type:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 wherein the coupling lens has the form of
    an elongated cylinder.


CLS 385/35
TXT Spherical:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 wherein the coupling lens has the form of
    a globe.


CLS 385/36
TXT Prism:

    Subject matter under subclass 31 wherein coupling is performed by a double
    refracting element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    831+ for prism elements, per se.


CLS 385/37
TXT Grating:

    Subject matter under subclass 31 wherein coupling is performed by a
    diffraction grating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    566+ for optical grating structure and subclass 34 for holographic
    diffraction elements in combination with optical waveguides.


CLS 385/38
TXT End fire:

    Subject matter under subclass 31 wherein the coupler comprises the optical
    medium immediately adjacent one end of the waveguide.


CLS 385/39
TXT Particular coupling structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein details of the structure of the
    coupler are recited.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for a specified function achieved by a coupler.


CLS 385/40
TXT Electrodes on or near the coupling region:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 wherein electrically conductive terminals
    are adjacent to an optical energy transfer zone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for electro-optic temporal modulation within a waveguide.

    8,      for electro-optic directional modulation within a waveguide.


CLS 385/41
TXT Directional coupler:

    Subject matter under subclass 40 wherein interconnected optical paths of a
    coupler are externally activated to enable  input on a first optical path
    to be coupled only to a second optical path for optical beam transmission,
    and a received optical beam on a third optical path is coupled only to the
    first optical path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for directional couplers which do not require an external
    electrical field stimulus for their operation.


CLS 385/42
TXT Directional coupler:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 wherein interconnected optical paths of a
    coupler enable  input on a first optical path to be coupled only to a
    second optical path for optical beam transmission and a received optical
    beam on a third optical path is coupled only to the first optical path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for directional couplers which require an external electrical field
    stimulus for their operation.


CLS 385/43
TXT Tapered coupler:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 wherein a physical dimension or optical
    characteristic of the waveguide core or cladding increases or decreases
    continuously with distance along the axis of the guide, and wherein this
    increase or decrease in dimension is essential to the coupling function.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are the "biconically tapered, fused optical
    fiber couplers" (both single mode and multimode).


CLS 385/44
TXT "T" coupler or duplex coupler:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 wherein the coupler has two perpendicular
    waveguide legs forming a tee which connects an input port to two output
    ports or two input ports to a single output port.


CLS 385/45
TXT "Y" coupler:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 wherein the coupler has three waveguide
    legs joined at the center in a "Y" shape which connects an input port to
    two output ports or two input ports to a single output port.

    (1)     Note.  This differs from a "T" coupler only in the  geometrical
    configuration of the three legs.


CLS 385/46
TXT Star coupler:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 wherein a passive coupler distributes
    light from one or more input waveguides among a larger number of output
    waveguides.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for an optical data bus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    120 and 121 for optically multiplexed local area networks (LANS) utilizing
    active and passive Star couplers.


CLS 385/47
TXT Multiport coupler using reflective surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 wherein an optical beam is coupled to
    plural zones by  mirror type elements.

    (1)     Note.  This includes a beam splitter containing a reflective
    surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    618 for beam splitters and combiners in other optical arrangements.


CLS 385/48
TXT Access couplers, power tappers, or power dividers:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 wherein the coupler structure permits
    optical linking with a waveguide without providing a load thereto.


CLS 385/49
TXT Fiber to thin film devices:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 wherein at least one optical fiber and at
    least one thin film optical device are coupled to allow efficient light
    propagation therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for connector structures involving at least one optical fiber and
    at least one nonfiber optical device.


CLS 385/50
TXT Waveguide to waveguide:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 wherein two or more optical waveguides are
    coupled to allow efficient light propagation therebetween.

     (1)    Note.  The waveguides may be planar or fiber type.


CLS 385/51
TXT Permanently fixed coupler:

    Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein the optical waveguide  and coupler
    are physically joined together by a permanent connection (e.g., welding,
    epoxy, or adhesive putty).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     for permanently fixed connections be-tween optical fibers and
    nonfiber de-vices.

    95,     for optical fiber waveguide splice ar-rangements.


CLS 385/52
TXT With alignment device:

    Subject matter under subclass 15 including a device which maintains the
    mutual spatial orientation between coupled waveguides.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136,    for external retainers.

    137,    for optical fiber holders.


CLS 385/53
TXT WITH DISENGAGEABLE MECHANICAL CONNECTOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein an optical fiber or
    optical fiber bundle is combined with structure utilized in the reversible
    mechanical joining of the fiber or bundle with another such combination or
    with an individual fiber, bundle, or broadly recited optical device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95+,    for a permanent-type connection (i.e., splice).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 748-796+
    for electrical connection to printed circuit boards.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    subclass 802 for cable tube or rod splicing.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, for electrical connector structure in
    general.


CLS 385/54
TXT Structure surrounding optical fiber bundle-to-bundle connection:

    Subject matter under subclass 53 wherein the joining of a fiber bundle to
    another is secured by a device enveloping the junction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for structure surrounding fiber-to-fiber connection.

    115,    for optical fiber bundles, per se.


CLS 385/55
TXT Structure surrounding optical fiber-to-fiber connection:

    Subject matter under subclass 53 wherein the joining of an individual fiber
    to another is secured by an element enveloping the junction.

    (1)     Note.  This includes, for example, extensive sleeve structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for structure surrounding bundle-to-bundle connection.

    123,    for optical fiber waveguides, per se.


CLS 385/56
TXT Multi-part (e.g., two pieces screwed together or bayonet latched):

    Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein the enveloping element consists of
    a plurality of interengaging parts each associated with an individual
    fiber.


CLS 385/57
TXT Magnetically actuated:

    Subject matter under subclass 56 wherein the multi-part connection is
    achieved by applying a magnetic field.


CLS 385/58
TXT With additional structure at or immediately surrounding each optical fiber
    end face:

    Subject matter under subclass 56 including details of structure at or near
    the terminal surface of a fiber contained within the connector.


CLS 385/59
TXT Plural fiber-to-fiber  connections:

    Subject matter under subclass 58 wherein pairs of corresponding multiple
    fibers are connected in a specified manner.


CLS 385/60
TXT Fiber end held in ferrule:

    Subject matter under subclass 58 wherein one end of the fiber is contained
    in a strengthening terminal element having an aperture comparable in size
    to the fiber cross-sectional diameter.


CLS 385/61
TXT Lens-shaped ferrule:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 wherein the ferrule is transparent and has
    a refracting outer surface.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also includes those ferrules having a separate
    lens there-within.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    642+ for a lens element, per se.


CLS 385/62
TXT Compressively fixed (e.g., chuck, collet, crimp, set screws, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 60 wherein the fiber is locked in place
    within the ferrule by applying mechanical pressure.


CLS 385/63
TXT Plate-type holding structure (e.g., jewel):

    Subject matter under subclass 60 wherein the ferrule has a planar surface
    through which the fiber passes.

    (1)     Note.   "Jewels" are made of a very hard material and have an
    accurately machined hole therein for accommodating the optical fiber.


CLS 385/64
TXT Plural rods or balls structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 wherein the ferrule includes multiple
    elongated or spherical components.


CLS 385/65
TXT Groove-type holding structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 wherein the fiber is supported within the
    ferrule by a structure having a surface recess parallel to the long axis of
    the fiber.


CLS 385/66
TXT Tube-type holding structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 wherein the fiber is supported within the
    ferrule by a cylindrical structure.


CLS 385/67
TXT Eccentric arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 66 wherein the tube is arranged so that its
    longitudinal axis is parallel to, but spaced from, the longitudinal axis of
    the ferrule; thereby, making it off-center with respect to the ferrule.


CLS 385/68
TXT Capillary tubes:

    Subject matter under subclass 66 wherein the tube holding the fiber has a
    bore which is just slightly larger than the diameter of the fiber itself.


CLS 385/69
TXT With additional structure rearward of fiber joint to secure additional
    cable layers:

    Subject matter under subclass 56 which includes structure offset from the
    fiber joint in a direction along the fiber axis where such structure
    prevents undesired motion of layers concentric with and outside of the
    fiber itself.

    (1)     Note.  The additional cable layers may be secured by means of
    adhesive, by crimping, etc.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass  includes the so-called "cable joints".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclass 260 for pliable, nonmetallic
    pipe couplings.


CLS 385/70
TXT With additional structure at or immediately surrounding each optical fiber
    end face:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 detailing structure at or near the
    terminal surface of a fiber contained within the connector.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass differs from subclass 56 in that a single
    mechanical structure surrounding the joint is addressed, whereas subclass
    56 requires separate mechanical structure associated with each side of the
    joint and with the separate structures being interengaged (e.g., screwed
    together)


CLS 385/71
TXT Plural fiber-to-fiber connections:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 wherein the fiber structures joined each
    include multiple fibers.


CLS 385/72
TXT Fiber end held in ferrule:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 wherein the terminal edge of a fiber is
    supported and protected by an element which has an opening for the fiber.


CLS 385/73
TXT With additional optical element between facing fiber ends:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein there is a component performing an
    optical function which is located between the fiber and its mating fiber.

    (1)     Note.  The optical elements include filters, apertures, index
    matching media, etc.


CLS 385/74
TXT Lens:

    Subject matter under subclass 73 wherein the optical component focuses
    transiting light waves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    642+ for a lens element, per se.


CLS 385/75
TXT With additional nonoptical structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 including supplemental structure not
    having an optical function.

    (1)     Note.  This includes, for example, electrically conducting elements
    which are mated simultaneously with the optical elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for purely electrical
    connectors.


CLS 385/76
TXT Optical fiber/optical fiber cable termination structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 53 detailing structure situated at the end of
    one fiber or fiber cable which is to form one half of the optical junction.


CLS 385/77
TXT At or immediately surrounding an optical fiber end face:

    Subject matter under subclass 76 detailing structure at or concentric with
    the terminal surface of a fiber.


CLS 385/78
TXT Fiber end held in ferrule:

    Subject matter subclass 77 wherein one end of the fiber is contained in a
    strengthening terminal element having an aperture comparable in size to the
    fiber cross-sectional diameter.


CLS 385/79
TXT Lens-shaped ferrule:

    Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein the ferrule is shaped in such a
    fashion that it focuses light at a predetermined point.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also includes those ferrules having a separate
    lens there-within.


CLS 385/80
TXT Adhesively fixed:

    Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein the fiber is secured to the
    ferrule with glue.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses.


CLS 385/81
TXT Compressively fixed (chuck, collet, crimp, set screw, etc.)

    Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein the fiber is secured to the
    ferrule by a structure providing mechanical pressure.


CLS 385/82
TXT Plural rods or balls structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein the ferrule includes multiple
    elongated or spherical components.


CLS 385/83
TXT Groove-type holding structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein the fiber is supported in a
    structure which has a recessed slot parallel to the longitudinal axis of
    the fiber.


CLS 385/84
TXT Tube-type holding structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein the fiber is supported within the
    ferrule by a cylindrical structure.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are terminating ferrules with capillary tube
    structure and eccentrically arranged tube structure.


CLS 385/85
TXT Fiber/ferrule further processed (grinding, polishing, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 78 including treatment of the fiber/ ferrule
    assembly.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, appropriate subclasses for glassworking.

    83,     Cutting, subclass 913 for cutting optical fibers or filaments.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    625+ for etching processes.

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, subclass 94 for apparatus for
    scribing then breaking optical fibers.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 41+ for a process of abrading optical fibers.


CLS 385/86
TXT Structure rearward of optical fiber end face to secure additional fiber or
    cable layers:

    Subject matter under subclass 76 which includes structure offset from the
    fiber end in a direction along the fiber axis where such structure prevents
    undesired motion of layers concentric with and outside of the fiber itself.



CLS 385/87
TXT Having at least one layer compressively fixed (e.g., crimp, tightening
    screws, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein a layer is secured by a structure
    which exerts a mechanical pressure thereupon.


CLS 385/88
TXT Optical fiber to a nonfiber optical device connector:

    Subject matter under subclass 53 wherein a device for mechanically joining
    a fiber to an additional optical device is recited.

    (1)     Note.  Typical nonfiber optical devices could include semiconductor
    lasers, LED's, photodiodes, etc.  However, where significant detail to the
    nonfiber device is recited, classification is elsewhere.  See SEARCH CLASS
    notes below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 227.11+ for optical fiber waveguides in
    a prephoto-cell system.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 13, 79-103 and 918 for incoherent light emitting injection
    luminescent devices, subclasses 80-85 for semiconductor light emitting
    sources combined with semiconductor light responsive devices, subclasses
    10, 11, 21, 53-56, 72, 113-118, 184-189, 225-234, 257, 258, 290-294, 414,
    and 431-466 for light responsive active semiconductor devices, and
    subclasses 446 and 499+ for integrated circuit devices with electrically
    isolated components, in general, and other appropriate subclasses for
    specific type devices in integrated circuits.


CLS 385/89
TXT Plural fiber/device connections:

    Subject matter under subclass 88 detailing connection between single fiber
    to plural de-vices, plural fibers to a single device, or a plurality of
    paired fiber/device connections.


CLS 385/90
TXT Fiber adjustable relative to device:

    Subject matter under subclass 88 including structure to reposition the
    fiber relative to the device.


CLS 385/91
TXT Fiber permanently fixed after adjustment:

    Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein the fiber is locked in place
    relative to the second device, for example, by adhesive means or by
    soldering, etc.


CLS 385/92
TXT With housing:

    Subject matter subclass 88 wherein the connec-tion is enclosed in a
    protective structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 600+ for
    generic electrical housings.


CLS 385/93
TXT Including lens:

    Subject matter under subclass 92 wherein the housing incorporates a
    focusing device therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communi-cation) and Elements,
    subclasses 642+ for a lens element, per se.


CLS 385/94
TXT Sealed from environment:

    Subject matter under subclass 92 wherein the housing provides a hermetic
    barrier between the connection and ambient conditions.


CLS 385/95
TXT WITH SPLICE (PERMANENT CONNEC-TION):

    Subject matter under the class definition where-in two fibers are joined
    together in such a fashion that they may not be subsequently separated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for a disengageable mechanical optical connector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 4.1-4.3 for methods of joining
    glass optical fibers.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    158 for methods of bonding fibers (of indefinite length) end-to-end.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 121.36+ for methods and apparatus for
    fusion splicing optical fibers.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    subclass 802 for cable tube or rod splicing.


CLS 385/96
TXT Fusion splicing:

    Subject matter under subclass 95 wherein the splice is formed by high
    temperature melting and rejoining.


CLS 385/97
TXT Alignment of fiber ends prior to splicing:

    Subject matter under subclass 95 wherein a particular orientation between
    the fibers to be spliced is specified.


CLS 385/98
TXT End-to-end (butt) coupling:

    Subject matter under subclass 97 wherein the two fibers are colinear and
    are joined end-to-end.


CLS 385/99
TXT Including splice joint reinforcement:

    Subject matter under subclass 95 wherein structure is provided to
    strengthen the spliced connection.


CLS 385/100
TXT OPTICAL TRANSMISSION CABLE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein an optical fiber or
    fibers are incorporated into an assembly that provides tensile strength and
    external protection for the fibers.

    (1)     Note.  If significant electrical structure is claimed,
    classification is in Class 174.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes optical fiber cables having
    additional transmission means such as electrical conductors within the
    cable where the optical fibers transmit light.

    (3)     Note.  Sometimes the optical fibers within the cable are helically
    or reverse helical (S-Z) wound in order to provide protection thereto.

    (4)     Note.  A single optical conductor with a protective coating not
    providing tensile strength is classified in subclass 128.  A single
    conductor with cladding not used for protection is classified in subclasses
    123+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115+,   for an optical fiber bundle which is not in an assembly providing
    tensile strength and external protection thereto.

    123+,   for an optical fiber waveguide with cladding, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 3-19 for
    cable forming when twisting is involved.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, appropriate subclasses for cable
    containing ducts.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 68.1+ for
    electrical cable structure in general.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 1-8 for
    advancing fibers through tubes (i.e., so as to form cables).

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, especially subclass 18 for winding
    a glass strand.


CLS 385/101
TXT With electrical conductor in the same cable:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the optical cable additionally
    contains an electrical conductor therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 70 for a combined
    electrical/optical cable having significant electrical cable detail.


CLS 385/102
TXT Tightly confined (i.e., fiber tightly held inside the outer sheath):

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein adjacent optical fiber or fibers
    have their collective movement restricted by a surrounding sheath and
    strength element of the cable.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are those tightly confined cables
    having a strength element (e.g., a steel wire) external to the primary
    cable structure.


CLS 385/103
TXT Having a central strength member:

    Subject matter under subclass 102 wherein the tightly confined cable
    includes at its center an element which prevents excessive cable bending.

    (1)     Note.  The strength member can be made of metal, plastic, yarn, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for loose tube type cable with strength member.


CLS 385/104
TXT Particular fiber orientation (e.g., helically wound, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 102 wherein the fibers within a cable have a
    specified spatial interrelationship (for example, helically wound, S-Z
    stranded, etc.).


CLS 385/105
TXT Compartmentalized:

    Subject matter under subclass 102 wherein the optical fibers within a cable
    are grouped and each group is kept distinct by a separator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for compartmentalized loose tube type cable.


CLS 385/106
TXT Plural unit type(plural complete cables within a single outside sheath):

    Subject matter under subclass 102 wherein multiple complete cables are
    confined within a single outside sheath.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    for plural unit loose tube type cables.


CLS 385/107
TXT With armoring:

    Subject matter under subclass 102 wherein the optical fibers of the cable
    are encased in a concentric metallic sleeve or in a sleeve made of a
    plurality of armor wires.


CLS 385/108
TXT Prestressed:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein the armoring is mechanically
    stressed prior to application to the cable.

    (1)     Note.  The stress can be compression or tension.


CLS 385/109
TXT Loose tube type:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the individual fibers within a
    transmission cable are loosely confined within an outer elongated sheathing
    structure.

    (1)     Note.  The fibers can move when stress is applied to the cable or
    when the cable is flexed.


CLS 385/110
TXT Compartmentalized:

    Subject matter under subclass 109 wherein the optical fibers within a cable
    are grouped and each group is kept distinct by a separator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    for compartmentalized tightly confined cable.


CLS 385/111
TXT Particular fiber orientation:

    Subject matter under subclass 109 wherein the fibers are placed within the
    tube in a particular spatial interrelationship (e.g., helically wound, s-z
    stranded, etc.).


CLS 385/112
TXT Plural unit type:

    Subject matter under subclass 109 wherein multiple optical loose tube
    cables are placed together into one large cable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    for plural unit tightly confined cables.


CLS 385/113
TXT With strength member:

    Subject matter under subclass 109 wherein the optical cable includes an
    element preventing excessive bending thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The strength element can be made of metal, plastic, yarn,
    etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for tightly confined cable with central strength member.


CLS 385/114
TXT Ribbon cable:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein a cable is formed of plural
    parallel optical fibers lying in a single plane.

    (1)     Note.  The ribbon cable may or may not include strength member
    elements.


CLS 385/115
TXT OPTICAL FIBER BUNDLE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein an assemblage of
    individual optical fibers are placed adjacent one another to guide light
    collectively.

    (1)     Note.  Nonimaging optical fiber bundles are used primarily for
    illumination, ornamentation, and display. Optical fiber bundles are rarely
    used in data transmission.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100+,   for an optical transmission cable which provides protection to the
    fibers therein.

    123+,   for an optical fiber waveguide with cladding, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 546-547 for
    illuminated signs using optical fiber bundles.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical,  subclasses 815.42+ for visual
    indicators utilizing light piping (i.e., optical fiber bundles).

    362,    Illumination, subclass 32 for illumination utilizing optical
    fibers.


CLS 385/116
TXT Imaging (i.e., with coherent fiber structure and includes shaping,
    enhancing, and correcting):

    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein images can be transmitted through
    a fiber bundle by having the individual fiber ends similarly arranged at
    opposite bundle ends.

    (1)     Note.  An imaging optical fiber bundle is also known as a
    "coherent" bundle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 1+ for visual display
    systems with selective electrical control wherein the display system may
    include fiber optics.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclass 137 for optical intermediate storage
    of original image formation, subclasses 196+ for variable magnification,
    subclass 218 for exposure lens, and subclass 219 for exposure of an image
    formation having fiber optics.


CLS 385/117
TXT For fiber scope (endoscope):

    Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein the imaging fiber bundle is used
    in an instrument to transmit an image of a remote location to the viewing
    end of the fiber bundle.

    (1)     Note.  If the fiber scope is adapted for use in a particular art
    area, classification is in the art area; otherwise, classification is in
    this class (385).

    (2)     Note.  Fiber scopes may contain both a coherent fiber optic bundle
    (for imaging) and a noncoherent bundle (for illumination).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 65+ for video endoscopes.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 241 for inspection
    borescopes.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    367 for a compound lens right angle inspector.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses
    1+ for light applying instruments.


CLS 385/118
TXT With manipulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 wherein the fiber scope is combined with
    structure for manipulation thereof (i.e., sideways, rotational or
    longitudinal movement).

    (1)     Note.  Such manipulation can be automatically controlled (e.g.,
    wall-climbing) or can be remotely operated (e.g., control wires).


CLS 385/119
TXT With lens or mirror:

    Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein the imaging bundle is combined
    with an element having two refracting edges or is combined with a
    reflective device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    642+ for lenses, per se, and subclasses 838+ for  mirrors, per se.


    399,    Electrophotography, subclass 137 for optical intermediate storage
    of original image formation, subclasses 196+ for variable magnification,
    subclass 218 for exposure lens, and subclass 219 for exposure of an image
    formation having fiber optics.


CLS 385/120
TXT Fiber bundle plate:

    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein the plural fibers are terminated
    in a single planar structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 372 for CRT's having
    optical fiber array structures.

    348,    Television, subclasses 359 and 804 for television systems employing
    fiber optic arrays.

    355,    Photocopying, subclass 1 for a photocopier with optical fiber
    arrays.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclass 137 for optical intermediate storage
    of original image formation and subclass 219 for exposure of an image
    formation having fiber optics.


CLS 385/121
TXT Transition between geometric shapes:

    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein the fibers in the bundle are
    geometrically distributed to match the shape of an additional waveguiding
    structure with which the bundle is to interact.


CLS 385/122
TXT HAVING NONLINEAR PROPERTY:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein an optical waveguide
    material having a strong second (or higher) order response function to
    optical radiation is recited.

    (1)     Note.  The nonlinear property could include Rayleigh, Brillouin,
    Raman scattering, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 582+ for light transmission modifying
    compositions.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements,  subclass
    240 for light wave temporal modulation via a nonlinear device outside of an
    optical waveguide, subclass 255 for electro-optic polarization modulation
    by a nonlinear device, and subclasses 328+ for optical harmonic generators
    which could use nonlinear optics.


CLS 385/123
TXT OPTICAL FIBER WAVEGUIDE WITH CLADDING:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a low refractive index
    sheathing or covering surrounds a higher index of refraction core of an
    optical fiber, in order to confine light in the core by means of total
    internal reflection.

    (1)     Note.  The fiber waveguides of this subclass are of generally
    cylindrical configuration.

    (2)     Note.  Planar type optical waveguides are provided for in subclass
    129.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100+,   for an optical transmission cable which provides protection to the
    fibers therein.

    115+,   for an optical fiber bundle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 385+ for processes of forming
    optical fibers or waveguides, particularly subclasses 413+ for processes of
    depositing a clad by vapor deposition; subclasses 420+ for processes of
    doping a clad; and subclass 405 for  processes of simultaneously forming
    clad and core.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 1.24+ for shaping, treating, or extruding optical fibers,
    waveguides, or preforms.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 364+ for fiber
    stock material.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    appropriate subclasses for superconductors which could be in optical fiber
    form.


CLS 385/124
TXT With graded index core or cladding:

    Subject matter under subclass 123 wherein the index of refraction of the
    core or cladding material varies axially or radially.


CLS 385/125
TXT Utilizing nonsolid core or cladding:

    Subject matter under subclass 123 wherein the core or cladding material is
    a liquid or gas.


CLS 385/126
TXT Utilizing multiple core or cladding:

    Subject matter under subclass 123 wherein a single waveguide includes
    plural cladding or core layers.


CLS 385/127
TXT Concentric:

    Subject matter under subclass 126 wherein the various core and cladding
    layers are nested cylinders.


CLS 385/128
TXT Where the second or further layer is a coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein a coating having no optical
    property forms an external protective layer around the core.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses for
    coating or plastic compositions.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 192.29 for sputter
    coating onto an optical fiber waveguide.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, appropriate subclasses for synthetic
    resins and organic compounds.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 162 and 163.1+ for processes of
    coating optical fibers, filaments, rods, or waveguides.


CLS 385/129
TXT PLANAR OPTICAL WAVEGUIDE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the optically conductive
    material includes a flat surface confining the optical beam therein.

    (1)     Note.  Cylindrically configured optical waveguides are provided for
    in subclass 123.

    (2)     Note.   This may include planar waveguides having  imaging elements
    therein (e.g., Luneberg lens).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes and non-coating apparatus for
    growing therein-defined single-crystal of all types of materials, including
    organic or inorganic, and including those suitable as or to produce an
    optical waveguide.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 192.29 for sputter
    coating onto an optical fiber waveguide.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 954.4
    for thin film storage elements.


CLS 385/130
TXT Thin film optical waveguide:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein the structure that is used to
    confine and guide the light through modal transmission is a dielectric rib,
    planar, or channel waveguide.

    (1)     Note.  The thin-film is a thin layer of light transmitting
    material, usually deposited by sputtering or evaporation, that  may be made
    in a pattern to form an optical waveguide on, or adjacent to, a supporting
    substrate.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes graded index thin-film waveguides.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    332 for a dielectric optical waveguide used in frequency converters.


CLS 385/131
TXT Multilayer structure (mixture):

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein the optical waveguide is formed
    from a plurality of layers for the transmission of light therethrough.

    (1)     Note.  This might include, for example, a semiconductor npn layer
    structure forming an optical waveguide structure.


CLS 385/132
TXT Channel waveguide:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein the waveguide consists of a
    channel or depression in the deposited dielectric providing a light path
    therethrough.


CLS 385/133
TXT OPTICAL IMAGING TUNNEL:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein an optical device having
    internally reflecting inner walls is capable of producing multiple images
    of a point source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    894+ for optical apertures, tubes, or transparent closures.


CLS 385/134
TXT ACCESSORIES:

    Subject matter under the class definition which are devices particularly
    adapted to be used with optical fibers or other waveguide structures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 1 for optical readout and
    subclasses 227-299 for straightline light ray type instruments.

    433,    Dentistry, subclass 29 for optical dental tools.


CLS 385/135
TXT Splice box and surplus fiber storage/trays/organizers/carriers:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 wherein a structure is provided in which
    one or more fibers may be organized and placed in their required position
    for proper coupling of optical energy between them.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 13.1+ for special article supports
    (racks).


CLS 385/136
TXT External retainer/clamp:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 wherein an external device is used to
    provide support to an optical fiber, cable, fiber bundle, or waveguide.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are pulling eyes, etc.


CLS 385/137
TXT Fiber holder (i.e., for single fiber or holding multiple single fibers
    together):

    Subject matter under subclass 136 wherein the retainer is particularly
    adapted to hold a single fiber or to hold plural single fibers together.

    (1)     Note.  These are neither connectors or connector terminals, but
    rather chuck- type structures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses for supports in general.

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses for work holders in general.

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, appropriate subclasses for chucks in general.


CLS 385/138
TXT Bushing structure (e.g., penetrator):

    Subject matter under subclass 134 wherein the accessory is an element
    insertable through a structure and this accessary forms a lining in the
    opening thereby protecting an optical fiber or cable passing therethrough.

    (1)     Note.  The opening is through a wall or bulkhead, for example.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 70 for submarine
    cable repeater housings and subclasses 152+ for an electrical cable bushing.


CLS 385/139
TXT Plug/termination device:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 wherein the accessory is an element
    protecting the end of an optical fiber from the environment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76+,    for connector terminal structure.


CLS 385/140
TXT Attenuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 involving a device which reduces the
    intensity of light entering or exiting a waveguide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    599+ for diffusion, subclasses 885+ for absorption filters, and subclasses
    227+ for moving discrete opaque elements into or out of light paths.


CLS 385/141
TXT HAVING PARTICULAR OPTICAL CHARACTERISTIC MODIFYING CHEMICAL COMPOSITION:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein chemical structure which
    changes a particular light wave parameter  is recited.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses for
    plastic compositions.

    252,    Compositions, appropriate subclasses for compositions in general.


    260,    Chemisty of Carbon Compounds, appropriate subclasses for synthetic
    resins and organic compounds.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses for
    inorganic chemistry.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, subclass 37 for ceramic optical fiber
    compositions.


CLS 385/142
TXT Of waveguide core:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the chemical details of the
    central light conveying portion of the waveguide which has a relatively
    high refractive index are recited.


CLS 385/143
TXT Organic:

    Subject matter under subclass 142 wherein the composition includes carbon.


CLS 385/144
TXT Of waveguide cladding:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the chemical details of the
    concentric coating which has a relatively low refractive index and which
    immediately surrounds the waveguide core are recited.


CLS 385/145
TXT Organic:

    Subject matter under subclass 144 wherein the composition includes carbon.


CLS 385/146
TXT NONCYLINDRICAL OR NONPLANAR SHAPED  WAVEGUIDE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the cross section of the
    waveguide is neither circular nor flat.


CLS 385/147
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition not provided for in any of the
    preceding subclasses.

             CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 385/900
TXT SOLAR COLLECTOR OR TRANSMITTER:

    Art collection relating to devices for the gathering or distribution of
    light from the sun which utilize optical waveguides.


CLS 385/901
TXT ILLUMINATING OR DISPLAY APPARATUS:

    Art collection of optical waveguides utilized in lighting or sign-type
    devices.


CLS 385/902
TXT NONBUNDLE FIBERSCOPE DEVICES:

    Art collection of viewing devices of diverse utility which are formed from
    other than an optical fiber bundle.


CLS 386/
TTL TELEVISION SIGNAL PROCESSING  FOR DYNAMIC RECORDING  OR REPRODUCING

CLS 386/
TXT I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF THE CLASS SUBJECT MATTER:

    This class deals with apparatus and corresponding processes for processing
    a sequence of images, in which the light variation composing the images may
    change with time (e.g., natural ``live" scenes) for dynamic recording or
    reproducing of the sequence of images.



    The processing involves the following steps:

    (a)     Receiving  a sequence of images from a local (e.g., camera, etc.)
    or remote source (e.g. broadcasting station, satellite, cable, etc.);

    (b)     Converting the received sequence of images into a form suitable for
    dynamic storage, which form may or may not be reproduced later; or

    (c)     Converting retrieved information from a dynamic storage medium into
    a sequence of images.



    This class also deals with apparatus or processes for  recording a single
    still or frame video using a dynamic recording device having relative
    movement between a transducer and a medium.

    II.     SUBCOMBINATION OF TELEVISION SIGNAL PROCESSING FOR DYNAMIC
    RECORDING OR REPRODUCING:

    (1)     This class includes apparatus and corresponding processes for
    making copies or editing of a recorded sequence of images falling within
    the above definition.

    (2)     This class includes dynamic storage medium having magnetic or
    optical properties.

    (3)     This class includes both black and white or color sequences of
    images.

    III.    SIMILAR SUBJECT MATTER IN OTHER CLASSES:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, for systems in which display elements are
    selectively controlled in accordance with a received image data signal. The
    image data includes character or graphical information, and may include,
    for example, information data from a  peripheral input device, from the
    reception of a television signal, from the recognition of image data, or
    from the  generation or creation of image data by a computer.

    348,    Television, for  systems that generate, process, transmit, or
    transiently display a sequence of images, either locally or remotely, in
    which the local light variations composing the images may change with time
    (e.g., natural ``live" scenes) by methods involving the steps of scanning
    an object or scene, and transiently displaying the object or scene by
    converting an electrical signal representative of the object (i.e., video
    signal) into a visible image of the object.

    355,    Photocopying, for systems in which an original picture is copied
    photographically. The electric signal representative of a characteristic of
    the original picture is derived and employed to modify the operation of the
    systems.

    358,    Facsimile, for systems that transmit and reproduce arbitrarily
    composed pictures in which the local light variations composing each of the
    pictures are not subject to variation with time, e.g., documents (both
    written and printed), maps, charts, photographs (other than motion picture
    film).

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, for systems in
    which the storage or retrieval of information is caused by relative
    movement between a magnetic record carrier and a transducer.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval,  for systems in which
    arbitrarily variable information (i.e., a time varying physical quantity
    representing desired intelligence, often an audible sound or an electrical
    signal), is retained in a storage medium by variation of a physical
    characteristic thereof. The information is stored or retrieved by causing
    or sensing a variation of a physical characteristic of a storage medium by
    a transducer having relative motion along a continuous path.

    382,    Image Analysis, for systems in which legible alphanumeric or like
    character forms are analyzed for pattern recognition, systems for
    transforming an image for the purpose of enhancing its visual quality prior
    to recognition, or for locating and registering the image relative to a
    sensor or stored prototype, or for reducing the amount of image data by
    discarding irrelevant data, or for measuring significant characteristics of
    the image.

    IV.     RELATED SUBJECT MATTER FOUND IN OTHER CLASSES:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 603.01+ for method of making magnetic
    transducers.

    84,     Music, subclasses 601+ for recording or reproducing means in
    combination with musical instruments.

    106,    Composition: Coating or Plastic, for plastic composition usable in
    magnetic record carriers.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, for apparatus for making coated magnetic record
    carriers.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 300+ for magnetic stock material.

    178,    Telegraphy, for recording or reproducing means combined with code
    transmitters or receivers.

    200,    Electricity: Circuit Makers or Breakers, for switching devices
    usable in magnetic recorders or reproducers.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, for means for advancing
    a record carrier past a transducer.

    235,    Registers, subclasses 419+ for record controlled electromechanic
    calculators, and subclass 493 for magnetic records used in register.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 324+ for magnetic tape
    or film.

    252,    Composition, subclasses 62.51+ for  magnetic compositions.

    312,    Supports: Cabinet Structure, subclass 7.2 for television cabinets.

    318,    Electricity: Motive Power Systems, subclasses 560+ for positional
    servo systems, subclasses 567+ for program or pattern controlled systems,
    and  subclasses 41+ and 85 for synchronization circuitry.

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclass 112 for voltage or
    current storage means including magnetic storage and subclasses 244+ for
    magnetic field testing means usable in reproducing magnetic records.

    329,    Demodulators, for demodulators usable in magnetic reproduction.

    330,    Amplifiers, for amplifiers usable in magnetic recording or
    reproducing; see especially subclass 149 for noise compensation.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 20+ and 172 for television-type oscillator
    synchronization.

    332,    Modulators, for modulators usable in magnetic recording.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 28 for equalizers
    usable in magnetic recording or reproducing.

    336,    Inductor Devices, for core and coil structures similar to those of
    magnetic recording or reproducing transducers.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, for code converters usable in
    or using dynamic storage techniques.

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), for radar systems.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, appropriate subclasses.

    346,    Recorders, for recorders usually of the graphic type and record
    carriers therefor.

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, appropriate
    subclasses.

    348,    Television, for apparatus or methods involving the steps for
    generating, processing, transmitting, or transiently displaying television
    signals.

    352,    Optics: Motion Pictures, for motion picture apparatus in
    combination with recorders or reproducers.

    353,    Optics: Image Projectors, for projectors combined with recorders or
    reproducers.

    355,    Photocopying, subclasses 31 and 98 for copying optical sound
    records.

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 296+ for recording means combined with
    facsimile.

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements,  subclasses
    281+ and 484 for magneto-optical polarization devices usable in magnetic
    signal reproduction.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, appropriate
    subclasses .

    361,    Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 143+, 159,
    and 267 for demagnetizing means for records and heads when not in
    combination with recorders or reproducers.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses  130+
    for generic data processing control systems; subclasses 400+ for particular
    application of data processing systems or calculating computers; subclasses
    550+ for data processing systems or calculating computers utilized to
    effect a measuring, testing, or  monitoring operation of an external device
    or quantity; subclasses 600+ for hybrid computers; subclasses 700+ for
    digital calculating computers; and subclasses 800+ for analog computers.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclasses
    for magnetic, electric, or optical static storage/retrieval of information.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, appropriate subclasses.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 8 through 11 for pulse
    modulation, subclasses 53+ for multiplex switching, subclasses 69.1+ for
    frequency division multiplexing, and subclasses 77+ for time division
    multiplexing.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 41, 51, and 67+ for recorders
    or reproducers combined with telephones.

    380,    Cryptography, especially subclasses 5, 7, and 10+ for cryptographic
    video equipment and techniques.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, appropriate
    subclasses for electrical audio signal handling in general.

    382,    Image Analysis, appropriate subclasses for pattern recognition.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 1+ for
    artificial intelligence, subclasses 100+ for data presentation and computer
    graphics, and subclasses 200.01+ for multicomputer data transferring.

    396,    Photography, various subclasses for pictorial information recording
    devices.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 61+ for typewriting machines
    including  magnetic storage means for storing retrievable information.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, appropriate subclasses for alloys
    which are claimed broadly as ``magnetic," ``magnetized," or ``permanent
    magnet" or alloys defined only in terms of their composition which are
    inherently magnetic.

    427,    Coating Processes, methods of making and coating magnetic record
    carriers.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, articles usable as
    magnetic record carriers.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, appropriate subclasses for radiation imagery chemistry process,
    composition, or product used as a storage medium.

    455,    Telecommunications, various subclasses for transmitters and
    receivers.



CLS 386/1
TXT PROCESSING OF COLOR TELEVISION SIGNAL FOR  DYNAMIC RECORDING OR
    REPRODUCING:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising apparatus having
    specific utility in treating a television signal including a chrominance
    component for dynamic storage or retrieval of the signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46+,    for processing of black and white television signal for dynamic
    recording or reproducing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, appropriate subclasses for processing a television
    signal.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, appropriate
    subclasses for dynamic magnetic recording or reproducing in general.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclasses.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, appropriate subclasses
    for dynamic recording or reproducing in general.


CLS 386/2
TXT Drop-out correction:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising means for repairing a detected
    unsatisfactory signal condition (e.g., loss of signal or discontinuities in
    a signal) by substitution or regeneration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47+,    for drop-out correction of a black and white television signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclass 617 for drop-out correction of a color
    television signal.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclass
    65 for detection of missing bit or dropout of a bit within a data character.


CLS 386/3
TXT Including switching means and delay means:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein means for repairing includes (a) an
    interrupter activated during the occurrence of the detected unsatisfactory
    signal condition and (b) a device which retards the television signal.


CLS 386/4
TXT Editing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including means for deleting from, adding
    to, or rearranging portions of a previously recorded color television
    signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52+,    for editing of a black and white television signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 13 for
    dynamic magnetic record editing in general.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 83 for editing
    of dynamic record in general.


CLS 386/5
TXT Line, field, or frame skipping:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including means for deleting at least one
    line, field, or frame for every H lines, fields, or frames  (H is an
    integer greater than two) of the color television signal at the time of
    recording.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for line, field, or frame skipping recording of a black and white
    television signal.


CLS 386/6
TXT Fast reproducing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a  duration (i.e., a time interval
    by which a certain number of television frames is recorded or reproduced)
    of the color television signal at the time of reproducing is less than that
    at the time of recording.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68+,    for fast, slow, or stop reproducing of a black and white television
    signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    29 through 35 for bandwidth or time compression or expansion.


CLS 386/7
TXT Slow reproducing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a duration (i.e., a time interval
    by which a certain number of television frames is recorded or reproduced)
    of the color television signal at the time of reproducing is greater than
    that at the time of recording.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68+,    for fast, slow, or stop reproducing of a black and white television
    signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    29 through 35 for bandwidth or time compression or expansion.


CLS 386/8
TXT Still reproducing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 in which one frame of the  color television
    signal is repeatedly reproduced for a  predetermined period of time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68+,    for fast, slow, or stop reproducing of a black and white television
    signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    29 through 35 for bandwidth or time compression or expansion.


CLS 386/9
TXT Signal amplitude level control:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising means for controlling the
    instantaneous amplitude level or the envelope level of the color television
    signal during recording or reproducing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93,     for amplitude level control of black and white television signal
    during recording or reproducing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, appropriate subclasses for amplifiers, per se.

    348,    Television, subclass 613 for signal amplitude level control of a
    nonrecorded television signal.


CLS 386/10
TXT Including color burst or reference signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 where the amplitude of  a color burst
    component signal is controlled, or a reference signal is monitored for
    controlling the amplitude of the color television signal.

    (1)     Note. The reference signal may include, for example, a pilot or a
    color burst signal.


CLS 386/11
TXT Color killer:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 comprising means for suppressing or
    eliminating the amplitude of a chrominance component signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 643+ for television color killer image
    signal processing.


CLS 386/12
TXT Synchronization signal modification:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising means for generating a signal
    which is added to or substituted for a synchronizing component of the color
    television signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for synchronization signal modification of a special reproduced
    black and white television signal.

    84,     for modification of a synchronization component in a black and
    white television recording or reproducing apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclass 502 for extracting, processing or reinserting
    the synchronization component of a color video signal.


CLS 386/13
TXT Time (e.g., phase or frequency) correction:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 for correction of  timing error introduced
    during recording or reproducing of the color television signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85+,    for time (e.g., phase or frequency) correction of a black and white
    television signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 498+ for time correction of a nonrecorded
    color television signal.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 70
    through 78.15 for time control in general for dynamic magnetic recording.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 47+ and 239+
    for time control in general dynamic recording.


CLS 386/14
TXT By controlling relative transducer/record medium speed:

    Subject matter under subclass 13 where the time correction is effected by
    regulating a speed of a transducer in relation to a record medium.


CLS 386/15
TXT Disc:

    Subject matter under subclass 14 where the record medium has a thin
    circular shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for generic recording or reproducing of a color television signal
    using disc.

    70,     for track accessing in a special reproducer having disc.

    82,     for a special reproducing apparatus having disc.

    105,    for recording of a digital audio signal onto disc.

    106,    for recording of an audio signal onto disc.

    125+,   for black and white television signal recording or reproducing
    apparatus having disc.


CLS 386/16
TXT Using recorded reference (e.g., pilot signal):

    Subject matter under subclass 13 where the  time correction is effected by
    using a signal recorded on the record medium for that purpose.

    (1)     Note. The recorded signal is not a standard component (e.g.,
    luminance, chrominance, synchronization signals, color burst) of the
    television signal.


CLS 386/17
TXT Phase or frequency matching of color television signal component to an
    external reference:

    Subject matter under subclass 13 where the time correction is effected by
    comparing phase or frequency of a recorded color television component  with
    that of a specified inputted signal from a remotely located source.


CLS 386/18
TXT Using variable delay:

    Subject matter under subclass 17 having a delay means, the delay time of
    which is alterable.


CLS 386/19
TXT Color burst:

    Subject matter under subclass 17 where the recorded color television
    component is a reference burst signal which serves as a color synchronizing
    signal to establish a frequency or phase reference for the chrominance
    signal.


CLS 386/20
TXT Digital technique:

    Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein the color television signal is
    converted to or from a signal composed of a series or pattern of identical
    pulse bits characterized solely by their presence or absence.


CLS 386/21
TXT Recorder or reproducer fault condition compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including means for correcting error
    introduced during recording or reproducing of the color television signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113+,   for recorder or reproducer fault condition compensation of a black
    and white television signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 607+ for noise or undesired signal reduction.


CLS 386/22
TXT Crosstalk:

    Subject matter under subclass 21 for the reduction or elimination of noise
    introduced by interference between at least two reproduced channels or two
    reproduced tracks.

    (1)     Note. This subclass includes reduction of crosstalk between
    different tracks or channels, or cross talk between audio and video
    portions of the color television signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 609+ for reduction of crosstalk in a
    television system.

    370,    Multiplexing Communications, subclass 6 for reduction of crosstalk
    in multiplexing.


CLS 386/23
TXT Heads having different azimuth angles:

    Subject matter under subclass 22 wherein the reduction or elimination of
    crosstalk is effected by an arrangement of recording or reproducing  heads
    in such a manner that angular displacements formed between head gaps and
    their respective recorded tracks are dissimilar.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for a fast, slow, or stop reproducing apparatus using heads having
    different azimuth angles.


CLS 386/24
TXT Different phase between adjacent lines or fields of color  television
    signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 22 wherein the reduction or elimination of
    crosstalk is effected by continuously changing a phase of a carrier
    frequency signal which is used to modulate at least a color television
    component.


CLS 386/25
TXT Comb filtering:

    Subject matter under subclass 21 comprising a multiple-series bandpass
    filter means for passing only frequencies within a number of narrow bands.


CLS 386/26
TXT Frequency modulation for recording on the same track:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein components of the color television
    signal (e.g., luminance or chrominance), which  occupy different frequency
    bands, are processed using specific frequency modulator or demodulator
    circuitry and are added for recording purpose.

    (1)     Note. The specific frequency modulator or demodulator circuitry
    includes, for example, frequency mixer, converter, or shifter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 117+ and 144+ for frequency or phase
    modulator, per se.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 825.70 and 825.71+ for phase
    and frequency responsive selective systems and subclasses 870.18+ for
    frequency or phase modulated telemetry systems.

    348,    Television, subclass 724 for modulating television signal.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclass 12 for phase modulation
    multiplex communication.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 271+, 302+, and 322+
    for frequency or phase modulated carrier wave pulse or digital
    communications.


CLS 386/27
TXT Compressing when recording or decompressing when reproducing:

    Subject matter under subclass 26 wherein a parameter (bandwidth, data, time
    etc.) of at least one of the components of the color television signal is
    reduced at the time of writing-in, or increased at the time of reading-out
    while preserving its information content.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for compressing or decompressing in a generic color television
    signal processing apparatus for recording or reproducing.

    109+,   for compressing or decompressing of black and white television
    signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, appropriate subclasses for
    code converters which may include bandwidth reduction.

    348,    Television, subclasses 384+ for bandwidth reduction in a television
    system.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclass 7 for multiplex systems with
    amplitude compression of incoming signal and corresponding expansion,
    subclass 109 for time compression or expansion in time division
    multiplexing, and subclass 118 for bandwidth conservation techniques.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    29 through 35 for bandwidth or time compression or expansion.

    382,    Image Analysis, subclasses 232+ for image compression or coding.


CLS 386/28
TXT Phase shifting:

    Subject matter under subclass 26 wherein the phase of a carrier frequency
    signal used to modulate at least one of the color television components is
    continuously changed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for phase control  or phase modulation of carrier signal.


CLS 386/29
TXT Having another signal

    Subject matter under subclass 26 wherein at least one auxiliary signal
    (e.g., audio signal, pilot signal, graphic or picture information data,
    etc.) in addition to the frequency modulated color television signal is
    processed and recorded.


     SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

     39,    for generic recording or reproducing of a color  television signal
    in combination with an audio signal.

      96+,  for generic recording or reproducing of a black and white
    television signal in combination with an audio signal.


CLS 386/30
TXT Using diffraction technique or strip filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including the use of a diffraction grating
    or a parallel or nonparallel line strip color filter for encoding color
    information onto a  noncolor record receiver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 273+, 285+, and 289+ for line strip color
    filters in combination with television cameras.

    352,    Optics: Motion Pictures, subclasses 66+ for making color motion
    pictures using monochromatic film.

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    558+ for filters of the type used in devices in this subclass.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 305+ for color photography in general using
    monochromatic film.


CLS 386/31
TXT Separately processed primary color signals:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein primary color signals (i.e., red,
    blue, and yellow) are manipulated or treated as distinct signals before or
    after recording.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for recording or reproducing apparatus in which luminance and
    chrominance are processed separately.


CLS 386/32
TXT Separately recorded:

    Subject matter under subclass 31 in which the processed primary color
    signals are recorded on separate tracks of a record receiver.


CLS 386/33
TXT Compressing when recording or decompressing when reproducing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a parameter (bandwidth, data, time
    etc.) of a component of the color television signal is reduced at the time
    of writing-in, or increased at the time of reading-out while preserving its
    information content.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for compressing or decompressing of a frequency modulated color
    television signal.

    109+,   for compressing or decompresing of a black and white television
    signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, appropriate subclasses for
    code converters which may include bandwidth reduction.

    348,    Television, subclasses 384+ for bandwidth reduction in a television
    system.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclass 7 for multiplex systems with
    amplitude compression of incoming signal and corresponding expansion,
    subclass 109 for time compression or expansion in time division
    multiplexing, and subclass 118 for bandwidth conservation techniques.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    29 through 35 for bandwidth or time compression or expansion.

    382,    Image Analysis, subclasses 232+ for image compression or coding.


CLS 386/34
TXT Digitizing, processing and converting of analog color television signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising (1) means for converting an
    electrical analog color television signal into digital signal, (2) means
    for processing the converted digital signal, and (3) means for converting
    the processed digital signal back to an analog signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 32 for
    similar subject matter in dynamic magnetic information storage or retrieval
    and subclasses 39+ for general processing of a digital signal in dynamic
    magnetic information storage or retrieval.


CLS 386/35
TXT Selective recording or reproducing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising means for specifying any of a
    plurality of  color television signals, in different formats, to be
    recorded or reproduced.

    (1)     Note. The different formats include, for example, NTSC (National
    Television System Committee),  PAL (Phase Alternation Line), etc.


CLS 386/36
TXT Channel splitting:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising means for separating the color
    television signal into signals inputted into two or more paths before
    recording.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    for channel splitting of a black and white television signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 22+
    for splitting an information signal for recording on plural distinct tracks
    or reproducing such signal.


CLS 386/37
TXT High definition television recording or reproducing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising means for recording or
    reproducing a high resolution or wide band color television signal having
    more scanning lines than that of a standard NTSC television signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123,    for recording or reproducing of a high definition black and white
    television signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 426+ for bandwidth reduction of high
    definition television signal.


CLS 386/38
TXT Including television camera:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising a television camera having
    optical-electrical converting means for converting an optical image signal,
    obtained in a selected recording mode (e.g., still or motion), into an
    electrical image signal representing the color television signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for television camera combined with a processing apparatus to
    record  or reproduce a black and white television signal together with an
    audio signal.

    117+,   for television camera combined with a processing apparatus to
    record or reproduce a black and white television signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 207+ for television signal processing
    including camera means for scanning image of the object or scene.

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 479 for video camera scanning document or other
    static image.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 429+ for photographic camera combined with
    other devices or structures having independent utility or purpose.


CLS 386/39
TXT Including audio signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the color television signal and
    associated electrical signal containing frequency in the audible range are
    recorded onto a recording medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     for recording of a frequency modulated television signal with
    another signal such as an audio signal.

    96+,    for recording a black and white television signal with audio.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 462 and 480+ for television signal including
    additional information such as sound.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, appropriate
    subclasses for processing of an audio signal.


CLS 386/40
TXT Digital recording or reproducing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the color television signal is
    recorded or reproduced in a form of a signal composed of a series or
    pattern of identical pulse bits characterized solely by their presence or
    absence.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124,    for digital recording of a black and white television signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 32
    and  39+ for converting an analog signal to digital form for recording,
    reproducing, and reconverting, and for general processing of a digital
    signal, respectively.


CLS 386/41
TXT Phase control of carrier signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein phase of a signal used to modulate
    at least a component of the color television is controlled.

    (1)     Note. This subclass includes phase modulation of a carrier signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for phase shifting of a modulated color television signal.


CLS 386/42
TXT Using light or beam:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including means for recording the color
    television signal onto a dynamic photographic record medium (e.g., film),
    or for reproducing the signal therefrom.

    (1)     Note. This subclass includes apparatus for recording video images
    on a film by scanning a light or beam across the film or by creating a
    hologram on the film.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128+,   for the use of light  or beam to record black and white television
    signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, subclasses 107.1+ for optical recording of phenomenal
    information.

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, subclasses 224+ for
    radiation marking.

    348,    Television, subclasses 97+ for motion picture film scanning.

    352,    Optics: Motion Pictures, appropriate subclasses for photographic
    motion picture recording in general.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 100+ for
    dynamic photographic information storage or retrieval in general.


CLS 386/43
TXT Color signal in nonpictorial form:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 including means for recording the  color
    television signal in a form of a modulated track which is visibly
    unintelligible, or for reproducing such a signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 106+ for
    radiant energy static storage /retrieval systems and subclasses 120+ for
    information masking storage/retrieval systems.


CLS 386/44
TXT Separately processed luminance and chrominance:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein components of the television signal
    (e.g., luminance or chrominance) are manipulated or treated as distinct
    signals before or after recording.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31+,    for system in which primary color signals (red, blue, yellow) are
    processed separately.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclass 663 for specific circuitry to separate
    chrominance and luminance signals.


CLS 386/45
TXT Using disc:

    Subject matter  under subclass 1 wherein the color television signal is
    recorded onto a record medium having thin circular shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for time correction of a color television signal by regulating a
    speed of a transducer in relation to a disc.

    70,     for track accessing in a special reproducer having disc.

    82,     for a special reproducing apparatus having disc.

    105,    for recording of a digital audio signal onto disc.

    106,    for recording of an audio signal onto disc.

    125,    for black and white television signal recording or reproducing
    apparatus having disc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 86,
    97.01+, and 135 for  film, disc, card scanning, or related subject matter.


CLS 386/46
TXT PROCESSING OF TELEVISION SIGNAL FOR DYNAMIC RECORDING OR REPRODUCING:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising apparatus having
    specific utility for treating a television signal for dynamic storage or
    retrieval of the signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for processing of color television signal for dynamic recording or
    reproducing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, appropriate subclasses for processing a television
    signal.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, appropriate
    subclasses for dynamic magnetic recording or reproducing in general.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclasses.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, appropriate subclasses
    for dynamic recording or reproducing in general.


CLS 386/47
TXT Drop-out correction:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 comprising means for repairing a detected
    unsatisfactory signal condition (e.g., loss of signal or discontinuities in
    a signal) by substitution or regeneration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for drop-out correction of a color television signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclass 616 for drop-out compensator.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclass
    65 for detection of missing bit or dropout of a bit within a data character.


CLS 386/48
TXT For synchronization signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 47 wherein a television signal component
    composed of pulses at rates related to line and field frequencies for
    synchronizing scanning processes is detected and corrected.


CLS 386/49
TXT Using static memory or delay means:

    Subject matter under subclass 47 comprising a storage means (e.g., static
    memory or delay means) for temporarily holding information related to the
    detected unsatisfactory signal condition.


CLS 386/50
TXT Interpolation:

    Subject matter under subclass 49 comprising means for generating a
    compensated television signal by a mathematical process for estimating
    portions of the television signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73,     for interpolation of a fast, slow, or stop reproduced television
    signal.


CLS 386/51
TXT Specific drop-out detection

    Subject matter under subclass 46 comprising details of circuitry for
    detecting an unsatisfactory signal condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for drop-out correction of color television signal.

    47+,    for drop-out correction of black and white television signal.


CLS 386/52
TXT Editing:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 comprising means for deleting from, adding
    to, or rearranging portions of a previously recorded television signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for editing of a color television signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 13 for
    dynamic magnetic record editing in general.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 83 for editing
    of dynamic record in general.


CLS 386/53
TXT Fading-in and fading-out:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 including means for gradually and
    simultaneously increasing and decreasing the amplitudes of two image or
    video signals of previously recorded television signals in a manner that
    the amplitude of one image signal is attenuated to zero while that of the
    other is increased to a maximum value.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 578+ for special effects including fading.


CLS 386/54
TXT Audio signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein an electrical signal containing
    frequency in the audible range (15-20,000 hertz) is edited.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for recording a color television signal together with an audio
    signal.

    75,     for a fast, slow, or stop reproduced television signal including
    audio.

    96+,    for recording of a black and white television signal together with
    an audio signal.


CLS 386/55
TXT Editing decision list (EDL):

    Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein the previously recorded television
    signal is edited by means of a look-up table containing at least address
    data associated with edit commands.


CLS 386/56
TXT Rewrite after read:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 including means for writing edited
    television signal in place of the previously recorded television signal
    reproduced from a recording medium by which the edited television signal is
    written onto.


CLS 386/57
TXT Control track:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 including a pulse signal recorded in a
    separate track, distinguished from television track for carrying out
    editing of the previously recorded television signal.



CLS 386/58
TXT Phase comparison:

    Subject matter under subclass 57 comprising a phase comparator means for
    generating a phase error signal by comparing phases of the signal recorded
    in the separate track with that of a reference signal.


CLS 386/59
TXT Counting control pulse:

    Subject matter under subclass 57 including a counter for counting a
    predetermined number of pulses in the pulse signal, thereby controlling the
    editing.


CLS 386/60
TXT Numerical code:

    Subject matter under subclass 57 wherein the pulse signal recorded in the
    separate track represents numbers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for editing using numerical code in a synchronization signal.


CLS 386/61
TXT Using synchronization signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein a television signal component
    composed of pulses at rates related to line and field frequencies for
    synchronizing scanning processes  is used to specify portions of the
    television signal to be edited.


CLS 386/62
TXT Numerical code:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein the television signal component
    includes coded data representing numbers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for editing using numerical code in a control pulse.


CLS 386/63
TXT Having erasing head:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 comprising an erasing transducer having
    means for deleting portions of the recorded television signal.


CLS 386/64
TXT Having auxiliary dynamic memory means:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein edited television is recorded onto
    a relative movable recording medium  (e.g., film, tape, card, disk) that is
    distinguished from a first recording medium for storing the previously
    recorded television signal.


CLS 386/65
TXT Having time code for addressing signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 wherein video information is recorded on a
    recording medium along with associated coded data for identifying location
    of the video information in hours, minutes, and seconds.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 13+
    for dynamic magnetic record editing in general.


CLS 386/66
TXT Synchronizing of recording or reproducing devices:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 comprising means for maintaining a correct
    time relationship between events which occurred in at least two apparatus
    for processing television signals for dynamic recording or reproducing of
    the signals.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 13 for
    dynamic magnetic record editing in general.


CLS 386/67
TXT Long play recording:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 wherein more information in the television
    signal is recorded by a reduction of recording medium speed without
    changing relative head-to-recording medium velocity.


CLS 386/68
TXT Fast, slow, or stop reproducing:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 for reproducing the  television signal in
    such a manner that its duration is different from that at the time of
    recording.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      7, and 8, for fast, slow, or stop reproducing of a color television
    signal, respectively.


CLS 386/69
TXT Track searching:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein the television signal is
    reproduced by randomly accessing a desired track on a recording medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 32 and 44.28
    for selective addressing or random accessing.


CLS 386/70
TXT Disc:

    Subject matter under subclass 69 wherein the recording medium has a thin
    circular shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for time correction of a color television signal by regulating a
    speed of a transducer in relation to a disc.

    82,     for a special reproducing apparatus having disc.

    105,    for recording of a digital audio signal onto disc.

    106,    for recording of an audio signal onto disc.

    125,    for black and white television signal recording or reproducing
    apparatus having disc.


CLS 386/71
TXT Synchronization signal modification

    Subject matter under subclass 68 comprising means for generating a signal
    which is added to or substituted for a synchronizing component of the
    television signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for synchronization signal modification of a color television
    signal.

    84,     for modification of a synchronization component in a black and
    white television recording or reproducing apparatus.


CLS 386/72
TXT Including head switching means:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 including an interrupter activated during
    fast, slow, or stop reproducing for outputting video signal read out by a
    special reproducing head.


CLS 386/73
TXT Interpolation:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 including means for performing a
    mathematical process for estimating portions of the reproduced television
    signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     for drop-out correction of television signal by interpolation.


CLS 386/74
TXT Different azimuth:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 including heads arranged in such a manner
    that angular displacements formed between head gaps and their respective
    recorded tracks are dissimilar.

    (1)     Note. The heads include, for example, reproducing heads, recording
    and reproducing heads, and main and auxiliary heads.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for reducing crosstalk in a television signal by using different
    azimuth angle heads.


CLS 386/75
TXT Having audio:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 including an electrical signal containing
    frequency in the audible range (15-20,000 hertz).


CLS 386/76
TXT Noise reducing circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 including means for compensating effect of
    an unwanted electrical disturbance signal.


CLS 386/77
TXT Having static memory:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 comprising nonrelative movable storage
    means for temporarily storing the television signal during the fast, slow,
    or stop reproducing.


CLS 386/78
TXT Locus or track control:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 where a path that a reproducing transducer
    follows relative to a recorded track is controlled.


CLS 386/79
TXT Using control signal on the recording medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein the path a reproducing transducer
    follows relative to a recorded track is controlled by a signal recorded on
    the recording medium for that purpose.


CLS 386/80
TXT Automatic control of the speed of the medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein the fast, slow, or stop
    reproducing is carried out by controlling the speed of a record medium
    using a feedback signal.


CLS 386/81
TXT Tape:

    Subject matter under subclass 68  wherein the television signal is
    reproduced from a non-transparent elongated dynamic recording medium.


CLS 386/82
TXT Disc:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein the television signal is
    reproduced from a recording medium having thin circular shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for time correction of a color television signal by regulating a
    speed of a transducer in relation to a disc.

    45,     for color television signal recording or reproducing apparatus
    having disc.

    70,     for track accessing in a special reproducer having disc.

    106,    for recording of an audio signal onto disc.

    126,    for black and white television signal recording or reproducing
    apparatus having disc.


CLS 386/83
TXT Including programmable apparatus:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 including means for storing timed commands
    for executing a future recording or reproducing function.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 731 through 734 for tuning of a receiver and
    for remote control of a receiver.


CLS 386/84
TXT Synchronization signal modification:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 comprising means for generating a signal
    which is added to or substituted for a synchronizing component of the
    television signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for synchronization signal modification of a color television
    signal.

    71,     for synchronization signal modification of a special reproduced
    black and white television signal.


CLS 386/85
TXT Time (e.g., phase or frequency) correction:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 for correction of a timing error
    introduced during recording or reproducing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13+,    for time (e.g., phase or frequency) correction of a color
    television signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 497+ for flutter or jitter correction.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 47 and 239 for
    time control in general dynamic recording.


CLS 386/86
TXT Of relative transducer/record medium speed:

    Subject matter under subclass 85 where the time correction is effected by
    controlling a speed of a transducer in relation to a record medium.


CLS 386/87
TXT By controlling speed of record medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein the relative speed is controlled
    by controlling speed of the record medium.


CLS 386/88
TXT Using recorded reference (e.g., pilot signal):

    Subject matter under subclass 85 where the  time correction is effected by
    using a signal recorded on the record medium for that purpose.

    (1)     Note. The recorded signal is not a standard component (e.g.,
    luminance, chrominance, synchronization signals, color burst) of the
    television signal.


CLS 386/89
TXT Using variable delay:

    Subject matter under subclass 85 having a delay means,  the delay time of
    which is alterable.


CLS 386/90
TXT Digital technique:

    Subject matter under subclass 85 wherein a television signal subjected to
    time base correction is a signal composed of a series or pattern of
    identical pulse bits characterized solely by their presence or absence.


CLS 386/91
TXT By controlling read-write operations:

    Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein the time base correction is
    carried out by generating write-in clock signal as a function of read-out
    clock signal.


CLS 386/92
TXT Simultaneously recording of a plurality of television  signals:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 wherein at least two separated television
    signals are recorded at the same time.


CLS 386/93
TXT Signal amplitude level control:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 comprising means for controlling the
    instantaneous amplitude level or the envelope level of the television
    signal during recording or reproducing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9+,     for amplitude level control of a color television signal during
    recording or reproducing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, appropriate subclasses for amplifiers, per se.

    348,    Television, subclasses 613+ for complementary system (e.g.,
    preemphasis-deemphasis) for processing television signal at encoder or
    transmitter.


CLS 386/94
TXT Record protection (e.g., anti-copying):

    Subject matter under subclass 46 comprising means for modifying the
    television signal for inhibiting it from being recorded or reproduced.

    (1)     Note. Means for modifying includes signal or pulse mixed to the
    television signal.

    (2)     Note. This subclass includes systems for disabling the effect of
    means for inhibiting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 60 for
    dynamic magnetic recording or erasing prevention in general.

    380,    Cryptography, subclasses 3 through 5 for stored information access
    or copy prevention.


CLS 386/95
TXT Having another signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 46  wherein at least one auxiliary signal
    (e.g., code signal, timing signal, graphic or picture information data,
    message data, etc.) in addition to the television signal is processed and
    recorded.

    (1)     Note. The auxiliary signal may be a secondary television signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     for processing and recording an auxiliary signal together with a
    frequency modulated color television signal.

    92,     for simultaneously recording of a plurality of television signals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 461+ for nonpictorial data packet in
    television format and subclass 473 for television signal including
    additional information.


CLS 386/96
TXT Audio signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 95 wherein the auxiliary signal is an
    electrical signal, the frequency of which is within the audio range
    (15-20,000 hertz).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     for recording of a frequency modulated television signal with
    another signal such as an audio signal.

    39,     for recording a color television signal with audio.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclass 462 for television signal including audio.


CLS 386/97
TXT Selective mode (e.g., mono, stereo, or bilingual):

    Subject matter under subclass 96 including means for designating one of a
    plurality of different types of inputted audio signals (e.g., mono, stereo,
    bilingual) for recording or reproducing.


CLS 386/98
TXT Multiplexing or demultiplexing:

    Subject matter under subclass 96 wherein the television signal and the
    audio signal are combined and recorded such that at any instant of time
    either the television signal or the audio signal is presented at an output
    channel for recording, or the television signal and the audio signal are
    separated from a combined multiplexed signal to be outputed at two
    separated channels for reproducing.


CLS 386/99
TXT Plurality of audio channels:

    Subject matter under subclass 98 comprising at least two channels for
    inputting  audio signals to be multiplexed with the television signal; or
    at least two output channels for outputting audio signals separated from
    the combined multiplexed signal.


CLS 386/100
TXT Fault condition compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 96 including means for correcting  an
    introduced error.

    (1)     Note. The introduced error may be contained in the audio signal or
    may be caused by the presence of the audio signal.


CLS 386/101
TXT Time compressing:

    Subject matter under subclass 96 comprising means for reducing a length of
    time required for recording of the audio signal while preserving its
    information content.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for compressing or decompressing of a frequency modulated color
    television signal.

    33,     for compressing or decompressing of a color television signal.

    109,    for compressing or decompressing of a black and white television
    signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclass 109 for time compression or
    expansion.


CLS 386/102
TXT Including mixing or adding means:

    Subject matter under subclass 96 comprising means for combining the
    television signal and the audio signal to provide a composite signal for a
    unitary recording.


CLS 386/103
TXT On a different substrate of the recording medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 96 wherein the audio signal and the
    television signal are recorded on different layers of a recording medium.


CLS 386/104
TXT Digital audio signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 96 wherein the audio signal is  provided in a
    form of a pulse train signal composed of a series or pattern of identical
    pulse bits characterized solely by their presence or absence.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for recording of a color television signal together with an audio
    signal.


CLS 386/105
TXT Disc:

    Subject matter  under subclass 104 wherein the digital audio signal is
    recorded onto a record medium having thin circular shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for time correction of a color television signal by regulating a
    speed of a transducer in relation to a disc.

    45,     for color television signal recording or reproducing apparatus
    having disc.

    70,     for track accessing in a special reproducer having disc.

    82,     for a special reproducing apparatus having disc.

    106,    for recording of an audio signal onto disc.

    125,    for black and white television signal recording or reproducing
    apparatus having disc.


CLS 386/106
TXT Disc:

    Subject matter  under subclass 96 wherein the audio signal is recorded onto
    a record medium having thin circular shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for time correction of a color television signal by regulating a
    speed of a transducer in relation to a disc.

    45,     for color television signal recording or      reproducing apparatus
    having disc.

    70,     for track accessing in a special reproducer having disc.

    82,     for a special reproducing apparatus having disc.

    105,    for recording of a digital audio signal onto disc.

    125,    for black and white television signal recording or reproducing
    apparatus having disc.


CLS 386/107
TXT Including television camera:

    Subject matter under subclass 96 comprising a television camera having
    optical-electrical converting means for converting an optical image signal,
    obtained in a selected recording mode (e.g., still or motion), into an
    electrical image signal representing the television signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for television camera combined with a generic processing apparatus
    for recording or reproducing a color television signal.

    117+,   for television camera combined with a generic processing apparatus
    for recording or reproducing a black and white television signal.

    121,    for single still or frame recording of a black and white television
    signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 207+ for television signal processing
    including camera means for scanning image of the object or scene.

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 479 for video camera scanning document or other
    static image.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 429+ for photographic camera combined with
    other devices or structures having independent utility or purpose.


CLS 386/108
TXT Television signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 95 wherein the auxiliary signal is a
    secondary television signal.


CLS 386/109
TXT Compressing in recording or decompressing in reproducing:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 wherein at least a parameter (bandwidth,
    data, time, etc.) of the television signal is reduced  at the time of
    writing-in, or increased at the time of reading-out while preserving its
    information content.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for compressing or decompressing of a frequency modulated color
    television signal.

    33,     for compressing or decompressing of a color television signal.

    101,    for time compressing of an audio signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, appropriate subclasses for
    code converters which may include bandwidth reduction.

    348,    Television, subclasses 384+ for bandwidth reduction system for
    television system.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclass 7 for multiplex systems with
    amplitude compression of incoming signal and corresponding expansion,
    subclass 109 for time compression or expansion in time division
    multiplexing, and subclass 118 for bandwidth conservation techniques.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    29 through 35 for bandwidth or time compression or expansion.

    382,    Image Analysis, subclasses 232+ for image compression or coding.


CLS 386/110
TXT Line, field, or frame skipping:

    Subject matter under subclass 109 comprising means for deleting at least
    one line, field, or frame for every H lines, fields, or frames (H is an
    integer greater than two) of the television signal at the time of recording.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for line, field, or frame skipping of a color television signal.


CLS 386/111
TXT Intraframe or interframe:

    Subject matter under subclass 109 wherein data of television signal is
    reduced for recording by coding each frame on a frame by frame basis, or by
    coding difference between video information in successive frames.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    382,    Image Analysis, subclass 236 for image coding using interframe
    coding.


CLS 386/112
TXT Digital compressing:

    Subject matter under subclass 109 wherein the television signal to be
    compressed for recording is provided in a form of a pulse train signal
    composed of a series or pattern of identical pulse bits  characterized
    solely by their presence or absence.


CLS 386/113
TXT Recorder or reproducer fault condition compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 including means for correcting an error
    introduced during recording or reproducing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21+,    for recorder or reproducer fault condition compensation of color
    television signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 607+ for noise or undesired signal reduction
    in image signal processing circuit.


CLS 386/114
TXT Noise reduction:

    Subject matter under subclass 113 wherein the introduced error includes an
    unwanted electrical disturbance signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76,     for noise reduction in a special reproducing apparatus for black
    and white television signal.


CLS 386/115
TXT Crosstalk:

    Subject matter under subclass 114 wherein the electrical disturbance signal
    is  noise caused by interference between at least two reproduced channels
    or two reproduced tracks.

    (1)     Note. Included are reduction of crosstalk between different tracks
    or channels, and crosstalk between audio and video portions of the
    television signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22+,    for crosstalk reduction in color television signal recorder or
    reproducer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 609+ for reduction of crosstalk.


CLS 386/116
TXT Digital technique:

    Subject matter under subclass 113 in which the error to be corrected is in
    a form of a pulse train signal composed of a series or pattern of identical
    pulse bits characterized solely by their presence or absence.


CLS 386/117
TXT Including television camera:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 comprising a television camera having
    optical-electrical converting means for converting an optical image signal
    into an electrical image signal representing the television signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for camera combined with a processing apparatus to record or
    reproduce a color television signal.

    107,    for camera combined with a processing apparatus to record or
    reproduce a black and white television signal together with an audio signal.

    121,    for single still or frame recording.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 207+ for television signal processing
    including camera means for scanning image of the object or scene.

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 479 for video camera scanning document or other
    static image.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 429+ for photographic camera combined with
    other devices or structures having independent utility or purpose.


CLS 386/118
TXT Housing or mounting:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 comprising means for enclosing or
    supporting at least a part of the television camera, or for mechanically
    connecting the camera with the apparatus for treating the television signal.


CLS 386/119
TXT Synchronizing:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 comprising means for locking operation of
    the television camera with that of the apparatus for treating the
    television signal.


CLS 386/120
TXT Selective mode (e.g., still or motion):

    Subject matter under subclass 117 wherein recording operation of the
    television camera can be switched  between different processes to obtain
    the optical image signal.


CLS 386/121
TXT Single still or frame recording:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 wherein the television signal to be
    recorded is a signal representing information displayed on a total area of
    one television screen (e.g., 525 horizontal scanning lines for NTSC).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for processing apparatus to record or reproduce  a color television
    signal in combination with a camera.

    117+,   for processing apparatus to record or reproduce  a  black and white
    television signal in combination with a camera.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, subclasses 107.1+ for recording of phenomenal
    information by light or beam.

    348,    Television, subclass 18 for a still frame transmission, subclass 24
    for selection of one frame out of a series of unrelated images for
    displaying, and subclasses 207+ for television signal processing including
    camera means for scanning image of the object or scene.

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 479 video camera scanning document or other
    static image.


CLS 386/122
TXT Channel splitting:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 comprising means for separating the
    television signal into signals inputted into two or more paths before
    recording.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for channel splitting of a color television signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 22+
    for splitting an information signal for recording on plural distinct tracks
    or reproducing such signal.


CLS 386/123
TXT High definition television recording or reproducing:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 comprising means for recording or
    reproducing a high resolution or wide band television signal having more
    scanning lines than that of a standard NTSC television signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for recording or reproducing of a high definition color television
    signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 426+ for bandwidth reduction of high
    definition television signal.


CLS 386/124
TXT Digital recording or reproducing:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 wherein the television signal is recorded
    or reproduced in a form of a pulse train signal composed of a series or
    pattern of identical pulse bits  characterized solely by their presence or
    absence.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for digital recording or reproducing of a color television signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 32
    and  39+ for converting an analog signal to digital form for recording,
    reproducing, and reconverting, and for general processing of a digital
    signal, respectively.


CLS 386/125
TXT Using disc:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 wherein the television signal is recorded
    onto a record medium having a thin circular shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for time correction of a color television signal by regulating a
    speed of a transducer in relation to a disc.

    45,     for generic recording or reproducing of a color television signal
    using disc.

    70,     for track accessing in a special reproducer having disc.

    82,     for a special reproducing apparatus having disc.

    105,    for recording of a digital audio signal onto disc.

    106,    for recording of an audio signal onto disc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 86,
    97.01+, and 135 for  film, disc, card scanning, or related subject matter.


CLS 386/126
TXT Optical:

    Subject matter under subclass 125 wherein the disc is  responsive to a
    light beam (e.g., laser) for recording or reproducing of the television
    signal.


CLS 386/127
TXT Onto thermoplastic record:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 including the use of a plastic recording
    medium, onto which an electrostatic charge pattern corresponding to the
    television signal to be recorded is placed, then the plastic is heated so
    that it is deformed by electrostatic and surface tension forces in
    proportion to the charge laid down, the plastic is then allowed to cool,
    forming a recording of the television signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, subclass 113 for
    electrostatic marking wherein a latent image is made visible by applying
    heat to cause plastic deformation of a charged medium.

    365,    Static Information Storgage and Retrieval, subclass 47 for analog
    thermoplastic storage element and  subclass 126 for information masking
    wherein radiation beam is altered as a function of a thermoplastic memory
    material.


CLS 386/128
TXT Using light or beam:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 wherein the television signal is
    reproduced from or recorded onto a dynamic photographic record medium
    (e.g., film).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes apparatus for recording video images
    on a film by scanning a light or beam across the film or by creating a
    hologram on the film.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for the use of light or beam to record color television signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, subclasses 107.1+ for optical recording of phenomenal
    information.

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, subclasses 224+ for
    radiation marking.

    348,    Television, subclasses 97+ for motion picture film scanning.

    352,    Optics: Motion Pictures, appropriate subclasses for photographic
    motion picture recording in general.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 100+ for
    dynamic photographic information storage or retrieval in general.


CLS 386/129
TXT Recording at different frame rate:

    Subject matter under subclass 128 wherein the television signal, occurring
    at 30 frames per second, is subjected to a 3:2 pull down technique such
    that it can be recorded on film moved at a rate of 24 frames per second.


CLS 386/130
TXT Cathode-ray tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 128 wherein the television signal is recorded
    on the record medium using a beam formed by a stream of electrons emitted
    from a cathode of an evacuated envelope.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 364+ for
    cathode-ray tube, per se.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 1+ for
    cathode-ray tube circuits, per se.

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclasses 121+ for measuring,
    testing, or sensing using a cathode-ray tube.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 10+ for CRT display.

    347,    Incrememtal Printing of Symbolic Information, subclasses 226+ for
    radiation marking using cathode-ray tube.

    348,    Television, subclasses 805+ for CRT video display.

    355,    Photocopying, subclass 20 for projection printing and copying
    cameras with a cathode ray tube as a light source.

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 485 for facsimile system having cathode-ray
    tube scanning.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 23+ for process of producing cathode-ray tube.


CLS 386/131
TXT Converting  one television format to another:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 comprising means for changing  a
    television signal transmitted or recorded at a first standard scanning
    frequency to a television signal received or reproduced at a second
    standard scanning frequency without loss of information.


CLS 388/
TTL ELECTRICITY:  MOTOR CONTROL  SYSTEMS

CLS 388/
TXT

    I.      Statement of Class Subject Matter

    This class and Class 318, Electricity:  Motive Power Systems are the
    generic loci for systems of electrical control of electric motors.

    Where an electric motor control system is claimed in combination with a
    load device and the load device is claimed either (1) in general terms only
    (e.g., "load device", "variable load", "means actuated by motor", etc.) or
    (2) in specific terms, but by name only (e.g., "vehicle", "rolling mill",
    "gearing", etc.), classification is in this class (388) or in Class 318,
    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems.  See Notes below for the current line
    between these two classes.

    Where significant structure of a load device is claimed in combination with
    a motor control system, classification is with the load device.

    Examples of classes which provide for the combination of significant load
    device structure and motor control include: Class 62, Refrigeration; Class
    180, Motor Vehicles; Class 187, Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or
    Stationary Lift for Vehicle; Class 219, Electric Heating; Class 244,
    Aeronautics; Class 250, Radiant Energy; Class 290, Prime-Mover Dynamo
    Plants; Class 322, Electricity:  Single Generator Systems; Class 360,
    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval; Class 414, Material or
    Article Handling; and Class 417, Pumps.

    Note:  This class is being developed in stages from old Class 318,
    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems.  As other sections of Class 318 are
    reclassified, they will be added hereto.

    A.      Types of Motors

    Note:  At the present stage of development of this class, only the
    following types of motor are included.

    1.      DIRECT CURRENT (DC) COMMUTATING MOTOR:  An electric motor designed
    to operate on direct current and having a commutator electrically connected
    to a winding of the motor.

    B.      Modes of Motor Control

    Note:  At the present stage of development of this class, only the
    following modes of motor control are included.

    1.      ACCELERATION CONTROL:  Controlling the rate of change of speed of
    an electric motor either (a) from zero speed to some running speed, or vice
    versa, or (b) from one running speed to another running speed by variation
    of the electric power input to the motor.  Acceleration control includes
    deceleration control.

    2.      DECELERATION CONTROL:  Controlling the rate of change of speed of
    an electric motor from a first running speed to a second (lower) running
    speed, including zero speed, by variation of the electric power input to
    the motor.

    3.      RUNNING SPEED CONTROL:  Controlling an electric motor so as to
    maintain a particular substantially constant running speed.

    II.     Class Organization and Search Philosophy

    This class has been structured according to a new classification philosophy
    known as "Concept Capture Classification" (CCC or 3C).  This type of
    classification facilitates a new computer-based search method while
    continuing to support all traditional uses of the classification of patents.

    A.      Organizational Structure - The class consists of two complementary
    classification schedules:

    1.      A hierarchical schedule of subclasses (numbered from 800 to 860).
    The hierarchy of these subclasses follows all the rules that apply
    throughout the Manual of Classification.  These subclasses are designed to
    accommodate, in general, the claimed subject matter in the patents.  They
    differ from subclasses elsewhere in the Manual only in that they are
    somewhat broader and tend to contain fewer disclosure-based cross-reference
    copies.

    2.      A "term list," or schedule of Art Collections (numbered from 900 to
    937).  This list is an indexing scheme with little hierarchy.  These Art
    Collections are much like other Art Collections throughout the Manual of
    Classification except that care has been taken to place copies of each
    patent in Class 388 into each and every Art Collection for which that
    patent has a significant disclosure.  In other words, the "concepts"
    disclosed in each patent are "captured" for later reference by placing
    cross reference copies into all the appropriate art collections, thus the
    name "Concept Capture Classification."

    B.      Method of Classifying Newly Issued Patents

    When a new patent is issued in this class, copies should be placed in all
    appropriate subclasses of the hierarchical schedule as required by the
    claims.  Further copies should be placed in all appropriate (according to
    disclosure) art collections in order to capture as much information about
    the patent as possible for future reference.  Although cross- references
    based on the disclosure but not the claims may be placed in the regular
    subclasses, they should be limited as much as possible to the Art
    Collections.

    C.      Suggested Search Strategies

    1.      A traditional search of paper copies may be conducted in the same
    way as with any other class by selecting subclasses from among those
    numbered subclasses 800-860, and then looking at each patent in each
    subclass chosen.  This approach may also be used on the "Automated Patent
    System" (APS) with limitation that only those patents more recent than 1975
    are available for text display.

    2.      A computer-aided search (or "CCC Search") may be conducted by
    searching a collection of subclasses and Art Collections combined using the
    logical operations of the APS or of the "Classification and Search Support
    Information System" (CASSIS), CD/ROM version.  In either of these systems
    one would compose a search statement that says, for example, "Give me a
    list of all patents which are in subclass 811 and art collections (902 and
    903 and 917)."  To appear on the output list a patent would have to have a
    copy in all of the subclasses chosen.  A somewhat less restrictive search
    statement might be used, as for example, "Give me a list of all patents
    which are in subclass 811 and art collections (902 or 903 or 917).

            In each of the search examples (811 and 902 and 903 and 917; and
    811 and 902 or 903 or 917) note that the art collections (902, 903 and 917)
    are used as tools to search the subclass (811).  In other words the
    subclass 811 is the true location of the patent but it resides there with
    many other patents of the same proximate function.  Traditionally, it has
    been necessary to look at all patents in subclass 811 during a search and
    make judgments "on the spot" as to their relevancy to a given search
    condition. With a CCC search, one enters the search condition into the
    computer in terms of which art collections are chosen, then the computer
    selects from subclass 811 only those  which are relevant to the given
    conditions.  In this way the searcher, hopefully, views fewer patents which
    are more relevant to his search and he does not miss "hidden" or "implicit"
    disclosures.

    3.      An experimental computer-aided "CCC search" with specialized output
    is available on a personal computer in Group 210 and on the CASSIS CD/ROM
    machines in many Patent Depository Libraries.  These machines are
    programmed to give a search of up to three subclasses using up to six art
    collections. e.g., Search (811 or 819 or 831) and (902 or 903 or ... or 937)

            Note.  This search treats the three subclasses as separate searches
    and prints the lists of "hits" separately for each.  The output is in the
    form of a graph with patent number as vertical axis and art collections as
    horizontal axis. For each patent found as a "hit" a line is printed giving
    the patent number, which subclass it is in, and which art collections (of
    those entered) it is in.  If the patent is in one subclass and one art
    collection (only) it is considered a "2-way hit", if it is in one (or more)
    subclass(es) and all six art collections it is considered a "7-way hit" and
    is flagged accordingly.  Obviously, "7-way" hits share more features with
    the search statement than "2-way" hits.  This special output offers the
    important advantage of not only identifying relevant patents, but of
    indicating just what is relevant about each included patent.

    III.    Glossary

    ANALOG:  Of or pertaining to the general class of devices or circuits in
    which the output varies as a continuous function of the input (cf.,
    "digital" below).

    ANALOG CONTROL:  A control circuit utilizing analog, as opposed to digital,
    signals.

    ARMATURE:  The moving element in an electromechanical device such as the
    rotating part of a generator or motor, the movable part of a relay, or the
    spring mounted portion of a bell or buzzer.

    BRUSH:  A piece of conductive material, usually carbon or graphite, which
    rides on the commutator of a motor and forms the electrical connection
    between the motor and a power source.

    CLOSED:  LOOP CONTROL:  A method of control in which the power input of a
    motor is adjusted by a control circuit which compares a reference signal
    with a feedback signal proportional to an output parameter (e.g., speed) of
    the motor to modify the power input of the motor so as to achieve or
    maintain some desired operating condition of the motor (e.g., constant
    running speed).

    COMMUTATOR:  The part of a motor armature to which the armature windings
    are connected.  It consists of a set of conductors arranged about the
    rotation axis of the armature and insulated from the axis and from one
    another.  A set of stationary contacts, called "brushes" ride on the outer
    face of the conductors and thereby connect the armature windings to a power
    source.

    COUNTER EMF:  A voltage developed in an inductive circuit (e.g., in an
    armature winding) by an alternating or pulsating current.  The polarity of
    this voltage is at every instant opposite that of the applied voltage.

    DIGITAL:  Of or pertaining to the general class of devices or circuits in
    which the output varies in discrete steps (cf., "analog" above).

    DIGITAL CONTROL:  A control circuit utilizing digital, as opposed to
    analog, signals.

    ELECTRIC MOTOR:  A machine which transforms electrical energy into
    mechanical work.  Note:  For a description of each of the several types of
    electric motor, see section IA above.

    FEEDBACK:  The return of energy from the output of a motor to the input for
    the purpose of controlling the input so as to achieve or maintain a desired
    output condition.

    FIELD WINDING:  A coil of insulated wire which produces a magnetic field in
    the space occupied by the motor armature.

    LOAD:  That device, or system, which is the recipient of the mechanical
    work output of an electric motor.

    MICROPROCESSOR:  A circuit which can be programmed with stored instructions
    to perform a variety of functions, which functions may include, for
    example, one or more modes of motor control.

    MOTOR CONTROL:  A system or device (usually an electrical circuit) which
    causes one or more of the operating parameters of a motor to be held
    constant or to be changed in a predetermined way.  Note:  For a description
    of each of the several modes of motor control, see section IB above.

    OPEN LOOP CONTROL:  A method of control in which the power input to a motor
    is varied so as to achieve a desired running condition (e.g., constant
    running speed) without the use of feedback.

    PHASE LOCKED LOOP:  A closed loop circuit in which the output signal is
    compared to a reference signal and any phase difference between the two
    signals is used to adjust the output signal to "lock" it to the phase of
    the reference signal.

    IV.     Search Notes

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses
    228.1+ for motor driven refrigerant compressors.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, appropriate subclasses for electric motor driven
    vehicles or vehicle subsystems.

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclasses 289+ for an elevator with an electric drive motor controlled by
    means having an electric component.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses
    for generic structure of circuit making and breaking devices.

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclasses for electric heating
    apparatus including electric motors.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, appropriate
    subclasses for temperature and humidity regulating systems which include an
    electric motor, particularly subclasses 74+ for electric motor actuated
    systems.

    244,    Aeronautics, appropriate subclasses for aeronautical subsystems
    which include electric motors.

    250,    Radiant Energy, appropriate subclasses for radiant energy
    responsive apparatus which include motors.

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants, subclasses 9+ for prime-mover dynamo
    plants including electric traction motors;   subclasses 10+, 22+, 30, 31,
    36+, 38, 46, 47 and 48 for electric motor starters for prime-mover dynamo
    plants.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 401+
    for generic saturable reactor systems.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, appropriate subclasses for
    generic structure of electric motors, particularly subclass 189 for
    variable length or tapped windings.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, electric motor systems are
    found throughout the class both as driving means for a generator and as a
    control therefor.  See particularly subclass 16 for electric motor driven
    generator systems having simultaneous control of motor and generator;
    subclass 39 for electric motor driven generator systems having electric
    motor control; subclasses 70, 71, 80 and 84 for generator control systems
    employing electric motor systems therein.  See section IV of the class
    definition of Class 322.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 340 for
    electric motor systems which control transformer tap changing; subclass 364
    for electric motor systems controlled impedance selection systems; and
    appropriate subclasses throughout the class for electric motor actuated or
    controlled phase control systems.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 518+ for miscellaneous control systems.

    331,    Oscillators, appropriate subclasses for oscillators, per se,
    particularly subclasses 1+ for tunable oscillators of the automatic
    frequency stabilizing type; and subclasses 48, 90 and 177+ for oscillators
    having means for setting or controlling the frequency of a generated wave
    of the oscillator by varying a frequency determining element of the
    oscillator.

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 106+ for generic pulse modulation control
    systems.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, appropriate
    subclasses for control of motors used in dynamic recording apparatus.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 23+ for
    motor protection circuits which cause shut-down of the motor when
    predetermined conditions are met or exceeded; and subclasses 139+ for
    control circuits for relays and other electro-magnetic devices.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 157+ for frequency
    conversion systems for controlling the frequency applied to load circuits
    in general.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 130+
    for generic digital data processing control systems.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclasses 27+ for generic pulse counting systems.

    414,    Material of Article Handling, appropriate subclasses for control of
    motors used in materials or article handling apparatus.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 1+ for condition responsive control of a pump
    driver motor.


CLS 388/800
TXT CLOSED LOOP SPEED CONTROL SYSTEM FOR DC MOTOR WITH COMMUTATOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a signal proportional to
    the running speed of a DC commutating motor (i.e., a feedback signal) is
    used to regulate the input to the motor to maintain a constant running
    speed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS

    825+,   for open loop (i.e., without feedback) speed control systems for
    commutating DC motors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 59+ and 66+ for
    speed control in plural, diverse, or diversely controlled DC motors;
    subclasses 772+, 799+ and 823+ for speed control in AC Induction motors;
    and subclasses 138 and 254 for speed control in brushless (i.e.,
    noncommutating) motors.


CLS 388/801
TXT Field control, or field and armature control, by digital or combined analog
    and digital circuitry:

    Subject matter under subclass 800 in which regulation of the running speed
    of the motor is effected by digital, or a combination of analog and
    digital, circuitry which controls the energization of, (1) a field winding
    of the motor, or (2) both a field winding and an armature winding.

    (1)     Note.  See the glossary section of the class definition for
    definition of the terms "digital" and "analog".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    803+,   for analog (only) closed loop running speed control of field
    windings or of both field and armature windings.

    809+,   for digital or combined analog and digital closed loop running
    speed control systems which control an armature winding only.


CLS 388/803
TXT Field control, or field and armature control, by analog (only) circuitry:

    Subject matter under subclass 800 in which regulation of the running speed
    of the motor is effected by analog circuitry which controls the
    energization of, (1) a field winding of the motor, or (2) both a field
    winding and an armature winding.

    (1)     Note.  See the glossary section of the class definition for
    definition of the term "analog."

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    816+,   for analog closed loop running speed control systems which control
    an armature winding only.


CLS 388/804
TXT By pulse width or duty cycle modification:

    Subject matter under subclass 803 wherein energy is applied to the motor in
    the form of a series of pulses and the running speed of the motor is
    controlled by varying the width of the pulses or by periodic interruption
    of the pulses.


CLS 388/805
TXT By phase or frequency modification:

    Subject matter under subclass 803 wherein the control circuit functions by
    determining the phase or frequency relationship between a reference signal
    and a feedback signal and by applying an adjustment, based on this
    relationship, to the motor input.


CLS 388/806
TXT By voltage or current modification:

    Subject matter under subclass 803 wherein the control circuit functions by
    determining the voltage or current relationship between a reference signal
    and a feedback signal and by applying an adjustment, based on this
    relationship, to the motor input.


CLS 388/807
TXT With variable impedance:

    Subject matter under subclass 806 wherein the control circuit includes a
    variable impedance device.

    (1)     Note.  Variable impedance devices include potentiometers, variable
    inductors, and variable capacitors.


CLS 388/808
TXT By selection of windings:

    Subject matter under subclass 803 wherein running speed is controlled by
    selecting the windings of the motor field, or armature, or both, which
    receive energization.


CLS 388/809
TXT Armature control by digital or combined analog and digital circuitry:

    Subject matter under subclass 800 in which regulation of the running speed
    of the motor is effected by digital, or a combination of analog and
    digital, circuitry which controls the energization of an armature winding
    only.

    (1)     Note.  See the glossary section of the class definition for
    definition of the terms "digital" and "analog".


CLS 388/811
TXT By pulse width or duty cycle modification:

    Subject matter under subclass 809 wherein energy is applied to the motor in
    the form of a series of pulses and the running speed of the motor is
    controlled by varying the width of the pulses or by periodic interruption
    of the pulses.


CLS 388/812
TXT By phase and frequency modification:

    Subject matter under subclass 809 wherein the control circuit functions by
    determining both the phase and the frequency relationships between a
    reference signal and a feedback signal and by applying an adjustment, based
    on this relationship, to the motor input.


CLS 388/813
TXT By phase modification:

    Subject matter under subclass 809 wherein the control circuit functions by
    determining the phase relationship between a reference signal and a
    feedback signal and by applying an adjustment, based on this relationship,
    to the motor input.


CLS 388/814
TXT By frequency modification:

    Subject matter under subclass 809 wherein the control circuit functions by
    determining the frequency relationship between a reference signal and a
    feedback signal and by applying an adjustment, based on this relationship,
    to the motor input.


CLS 388/815
TXT By voltage or current modification:

    Subject matter under subclass 809 wherein the control circuit functions by
    determining the voltage or current relationship between a reference signal
    and a feedback signal and by applying an adjustment, based on this
    relationship, to the motor input.


CLS 388/816
TXT Analog armature control:

    Subject matter under subclass 800 in which regulation of the running speed
    of the motor is effected by analog (only) circuitry which controls the
    energization of an armature winding only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    803+,   for analog closed loop running speed control systems which control
    a field winding or both a field and an armature winding.


CLS 388/819
TXT By pulse width or duty cycle modification:

    Subject matter under subclass 816 wherein energy is applied to the motor in
    the form of a series of pulses and the running speed of the motor is
    controlled by varying the width of the pulses or by periodic interruption
    of the pulses.


CLS 388/820
TXT By phase of frequency modification:

    Subject matter under subclass 816 wherein the control circuit functions by
    determining the phase or frequency relationship between a reference signal
    and a feedback signal and by applying an adjustment, based on this
    relationship, to the motor input.


CLS 388/821
TXT By voltage and current modification:

    Subject matter under subclass 816 wherein the control circuit functions by
    determining both the voltage and current relationships between a reference
    signal and a feedback signal and by applying an adjustment, based on this
    relationship, to the motor input.


CLS 388/822
TXT By voltage modification:

    Subject matter under subclass 816 wherein the control circuit functions by
    determining the voltage relationship between a reference signal and a
    feedback signal and by applying an adjustment, based on this relationship,
    to the motor input.


CLS 388/823
TXT By current modification:

    Subject matter under subclass 816 wherein the control circuit functions by
    determining the current relationship between a reference signal and a
    feedback signal and by applying an adjustment, based on this relationship,
    to the motor input.


CLS 388/824
TXT By variable impedance (e.g., potentiometer):

    Subject matter under subclass 816 wherein the control circuit includes a
    variable impedance device.

    (1)     Note.  Variable impedance devices include potentiometers, variable
    inductors, and variable capacitors.


CLS 388/825
TXT OPEN LOOP SPEED CONTROL SYSTEM FOR DC MOTOR WITH COMMUTATOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a derived reference
    signal is applied to the input circuit of a commutating DC electric motor
    to regulate the running speed of the motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    800+,   for closed loop speed control systems for commutating DC motors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 59+ and 66+ for
    speed control in plural, diverse, or diversely controlled DC motors;
    subclasses 772+, 799+ and 823+ for speed control in AC induction motors;
    and subclasses 138 and 254 for speed control in brushless (i.e.,
    noncommutating) motors.


CLS 388/826
TXT Field control, or field and armature control:

    Subject matter under subclass 825 in which regulation of the running speed
    of the motor is effected by circuitry which controls the energization of,
    (1) a field winding of the motor, or (2) both a field winding and an
    armature winding.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass, and the subclasses indented hereunder, the
    control circuitry may function in either a digital mode or an analog mode
    or a combination of digital and analog modes.  See the glossary section of
    the class definition for definition of the terms "digital" and "analog."

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    828+,   for digital or combined analog and digital open loop running speed
    control system which control an armature winding only.

    830+,   for analog (only) open loop running speed control of armature
    (only) windings.


CLS 388/827
TXT With plural selectable speeds (e.g., manual switch):

    Subject matter under subclass 826 including means for selection of two or
    more preset speeds.


CLS 388/828
TXT Armature control by digital or combined analog and digital circuitry:

    Subject matter under subclass 825 in which regulation of the running speed
    of the motor is effected by digital, or a combination of analog and
    digital, circuitry which controls the energization of an armature winding
    only.

    (1)     Note.  See the glossary section of the class definition for
    definition of the terms "digital" and "analog."


CLS 388/829
TXT By pulse width or duty cycle modification:

    Subject matter under subclass 828 wherein energy is applied to the motor in
    the form of a series of pulses and the running speed of the motor is
    controlled by varying the width of the pulses or by periodic interruption
    of the pulses.


CLS 388/830
TXT Analog armature control:

    Subject matter under subclass 825 in which the regulation of the running
    speed of the motor is effected by analog (only) circuitry which controls
    the energization of an armature winding only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    826+,   for analog open loop running speed control systems which control a
    field winding or both a field and an armature winding.


CLS 388/831
TXT By pulse width or duty cycle modification:

    Subject matter under subclass 830 wherein energy is applied to the motor in
    the form of a series of pulses and the running speed of the motor is
    controlled by varying the width of the pulses or by periodic interruption
    of the pulses.


CLS 388/832
TXT By frequency modification:

    Subject matter under subclass 830 wherein the control circuit functions by
    adjusting the frequency of DC power pulses applied to the motor input.


CLS 388/833
TXT By voltage or current modification:

    Subject matter under subclass 830 wherein the control circuitry functions
    by adjusting the amplitude of the voltage or current which is applied to
    the input circuit of a motor.


CLS 388/834
TXT By selection of windings:

    Subject matter under subclass 830 wherein running speed is controlled by
    selecting the windings of the armature which receive energization.


CLS 388/835
TXT By control of motor structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 830 wherein running speed is controlled by
    altering the structural relationship of motor components.


CLS 388/836
TXT Position or number of brushes:

    Subject matter under subclass 835 wherein the structure is altered by (a)
    repositioning one or more commutator brushes or, (b) changing the number of
    brushes in use.


CLS 388/837
TXT By periodic mechanical switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 830 wherein running speed is controlled by
    means of a mechanical switch which operates repetitiously at a
    predetermined rate.


CLS 388/838
TXT With plural selectable speeds (e.g., with manual switch, potentiometer):

    Subject matter under subclass 830 including means for selecting two or more
    speeds.

    (1)     Note.  Speed selection may be either (1) continuous (e.g., using a
    potentiometer), or (2) discontinuous (e.g., using a multi-position
    mechanical switch).


CLS 388/839
TXT By selecting impedance:

    Subject matter under subclass 838 wherein running speed is controlled by
    insertion of an impedance device and provision is made for selecting a
    device from among several having different impedance values.

    (1)     Note.  Impedance devices include resistors, capacitors, and
    inductors.


CLS 388/840
TXT Resistive:

    Subject matter under subclass 839 wherein the impedance device is a
    resistor.


CLS 388/841
TXT Inductive:

    Subject matter under subclass 839 wherein the impedance device is an
    inductor.


CLS 388/842
TXT CLOSED LOOP ACCELERATION CONTROL SYSTEM FOR DC MOTOR WITH COMMUTATOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a signal proportional to
    the running speed of a DC commutating motor (i.e., a feedback signal) is
    used to regulate the input to the motor to control the rate of change of
    speed (i.e., acceleration of deceleration) or the motor.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass, and the subclasses indented hereunder, the
    control circuitry may function in either a digital mode or an analog mode
    or a combination of digital and analog modes.  See the glossary section of
    the class definition for definition of the terms "digital" and "analog."

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    848+,   for open loop (i.e., without feedback) acceleration control systems
    for commutating DC motors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 64 and 90+ for
    acceleration control in plural, diverse, or diversely controlled DC motors;
    and subclasses 138 and 254 for acceleration control in brushless (i.e.,
    noncommutating) motors.


CLS 388/843
TXT Field control, or field and armature control:

    Subject matter under subclass 842 in which regulation of the acceleration
    of the motor is effected by circuitry which controls the energization of,
    (1) a field winding of the motor, or (2) both a field winding and an
    armature winding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    844+,   for closed loop acceleration control systems which control an
    armature winding only.


CLS 388/844
TXT Armature control:

    Subject matter under subclass 842 in which regulation of the acceleration
    of the motor is effected by circuitry which controls the energization of an
    armature winding only.


CLS 388/847
TXT By voltage or current modification:

    Subject matter under subclass 844 wherein the control circuit functions by
    determining the voltage or current relationship between a reference signal
    and a feedback signal and by applying an adjustment, based on this
    relationship, to the motor input.


CLS 388/848
TXT OPEN LOOP ACCELERATION CONTROL SYSTEM FOR DC MOTOR WITH COMMUTATOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a derived reference
    signal is applied to the input circuit of a commutating DC electric motor
    to regulate acceleration or deceleration of the motor.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass, and the subclasses indented hereunder, the
    control circuitry may function in either a digital mode or an analog mode
    or a combination of digital and analog modes.  See the glossary section of
    the class definition for definition of the terms "digital" and "analog."

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    842+,   for closed loop acceleration control systems for commutating DC
    motors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 64 and 90+ for
    acceleration control in plural, diverse, or diversely controlled DC motors
    and subclasses 138 and 254 for acceleration control in brushless (i.e.,
    noncommutating) motors.


CLS 388/849
TXT Field control, or field and armature control:

    Subject matter under subclass 848 in which regulation of the acceleration
    of the motor is effected by circuitry which controls the energization of,
    (1) a field winding of the motor, or (2) both a field winding and an
    armature winding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    853+,   for open loop acceleration control systems which control an
    armature winding only.


CLS 388/850
TXT By transformer or inductive device:

    Subject matter under subclass 849 wherein acceleration of the motor is
    controlled by a transformer or other inductor.


CLS 388/851
TXT By patterned switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 849 wherein acceleration of the motor is
    controlled by a mechanical device which makes and breaks the motor circuit
    according to a predetermined pattern.


CLS 388/852
TXT By insertion of resistance:

    Subject matter under subclass 849 wherein acceleration of the motor is
    controlled by increasing or decreasing the amount of resistance in the
    motor circuit.


CLS 388/853
TXT Armature control:

    Subject matter under subclass 848 in which regulation of the acceleration
    of the motor is effected by circuitry which controls the energization of an
    armature winding only.


CLS 388/854
TXT By voltage or current modification:

    Subject matter under subclass 853 wherein the control circuitry functions
    by adjusting the amplitude of the voltage or current applied to the input
    circuit of the motor.


CLS 388/855
TXT By selectable or variable impedance:

    Subject matter under subclass 853 wherein the control circuit includes a
    variable impedance device or a set of fixed impedance devices which are
    selectable by switches, or other means.

    (1)     Note.  Variable impedance devices include potentiometers, variable
    inductors, and variable capacitors.


CLS 388/856
TXT By insertion of resistance or shorting of circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 855 wherein the impedance device is a
    variable resistor, or a set of fixed resistors of different values -
    including zero resistance (short circuit).


CLS 388/857
TXT With relay:

    Subject matter under subclass 856 including a relay.


CLS 388/858
TXT Time delay relay:

    Subject matter under subclass 857 including a time-delayed relay.


CLS 388/859
TXT With patterned switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 856 wherein resistance are inserted by a
    mechanical device which functions according to a predetermined pattern.


CLS 388/860
TXT Manual:

    Subject matter under subclass 855 wherein the impedance value of the motor
    circuit is selected or varied manually.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 388/900
TXT SPECIFIC SYSTEM OPERATIONAL FEATURE:

    Electronic cross-reference art collection under the class definition
    including miscellaneous aspects of motor control.

    (1)     Note.  This art collection is intended to serve as a repository for
    art which an examiner wishes to collect as he would do in creating an
    "unofficial digest".  When sufficient art embodying a given creative
    concept is assembled here, an official art collection will be established
    for that concept.


CLS 388/901
TXT Sample and hold:

    Art collection of systems which periodically sample an output parameter and
    generate a feedback signal based on the periodic sample.

    (1)     Note.  Systems which continuously monitor an output parameter, and
    which generate a continuously varying feedback signal therefrom, are not
    cross-referenced here.


CLS 388/902
TXT Compensation:

    Art collection of systems which apply one or more corrective signals to a
    motor input drive signal in order to compensate for operational
    irregularities.

    (1)     Note.  "Operational irregularities" include, but are not limited
    to:  temperature changes, frequency drift, voltage fluctuations, friction,
    structural changes.


CLS 388/903
TXT Protective (e.g., voltage or current limit):

    Art collection of systems which act to prevent damage to a motor or to
    circuitry associated with a motor.


CLS 388/904
TXT Stored velocity profile:

    Art collection of systems which include means for storing and using a
    predetermined velocity profile or pattern of velocities and changes of
    velocity.


CLS 388/905
TXT Armature and field windings connected in series (i.e., series motor):

    Art collection of systems which control electric motors wherein the
    armature and field windings of the motor are connected in series
    relationship.


CLS 388/906
TXT Proportional-integral system:

    Art collection of systems with means to correct both instantaneous (i.e.,
    proportional) errors and long term average (i.e., integral) errors.


CLS 388/907
TXT SPECIFIC CONTROL CIRCUIT ELEMENT OR DEVICE:

    Electronic cross-reference art collection under the class definition
    including miscellaneous circuit subsystems or devices used in control
    systems throughout this class.

    (1)     Note.  This art collection is intended to serve as a repository for
    art which an examiner wishes to collect as he would do in creating an
    "unofficial digest".  When sufficient art embodying a given creative
    concept is assembled here, an official art collection will be established
    for that concept.


CLS 388/907.2
TXT Bridge circuit:
    Art collection of systems which include one or more of the several types of
    circuit known as "bridge" circuits, e.g., "H" type, Wheatstone type, etc.


CLS 388/907.5
TXT Computer or microprocessor:
    Art collection of systems which include digital logic circuitry operating
    under the control of a stored set of instructions, i.e., a program.


CLS 388/908
TXT Frequency to voltage converter:

    Art collection of systems which include a circuit element or subsystem
    whose function is to convert the frequency of an electrical signal to a
    voltage.


CLS 388/909
TXT Monitoring means:

    Art collection of systems with means to monitor one or more parameters and
    warn of abnormal conditions.


CLS 388/910
TXT Operational/differential amplifier:

    Art collection of systems which include a circuit element or subsystem
    comprised of an operational or differential amplifier.


CLS 388/911
TXT Phase locked loop:

    Art collection of systems which include a circuit element or subsystem
    which exhibits the property of securing and maintaining a given phase
    relationship between two electrical signals.


CLS 388/912
TXT Pulse or frequency counter:

    Art collection of systems which include a circuit element or subsystem
    which counts electrical pulses or frequencies.


CLS 388/913
TXT Saturable reactor, space discharge device, or magnetic amplifier:

    Art collection of systems which include one or more of the devices known as
    saturable reactors, space discharge devices, or magnetic amplifiers.


CLS 388/914
TXT Thyratron or ignitron:

    Subject matter under art collection 913 wherein the device is specifically
    a thyratron or an ignitron.


CLS 388/915
TXT Sawtooth or ramp waveform generator:

    Art collection of systems which include a circuit element whose function is
    to generate a repetitious wave with linear rising, or falling, slope.


CLS 388/916
TXT Threshold circuit:

    Art collection of systems which include circuit elements which conduct only
    at voltages above a predetermined minimum value.


CLS 388/917
TXT Thyristor or SCR:

    Art collection of systems which include a bistable circuit element whose
    function is to reverse the polarity of an electrical signal.


CLS 388/918
TXT Triggered by unijunction transistor:

    Subject matter under art collection 917 in which the operation of the
    thyristor or SCR is initiated by a signal from a unijunction transistor.


CLS 388/919
TXT Triggered by resistor or capacitor:

    Subject matter under art collection 917 in which the operation of the
    thyristor or SCR is initiated by a signal from a resistor or a capacitor.


CLS 388/920
TXT Chopper:

    Subject matter under art collection 917 in which rhyristor or SCR is used
    to periodically interrupt conduction of a current.


CLS 388/921
TXT Timer or time delay means:

    Art collection of systems which include a circuit element or subsystem
    whose function is to measure time intervals or to determine start or stop
    times for electrical signals.


CLS 388/922
TXT Tuned or resonant circuit:

    Art collection of systems which include an oscillating circuit which can be
    set to oscillate at a predetermined frequency.


CLS 388/923
TXT SPECIFIC FEEDBACK CONDITION OR DEVICE:

    Electronic cross-reference art collection under the class definition
    including miscellaneous devices for generating signals responsive to
    specific conditions at the output of the motor.

    (1)     Note.  This art collection is intended to serve as a repository for
    art which an examiner wishes to collect as he would do in creating an
    "unofficial digest".  When sufficient art embodying a given creative
    concept is assembled here, an official art collection will be established
    for that concept.


CLS 388/924
TXT Centrifugal device (e.g., governor):

    Art collection of systems wherein feedback is provided by a rotary
    mechanical device which senses the speed of the motor by sensing the
    position of weights which are subject to centrifugal forces due to the
    rotation of the motor.


CLS 388/925
TXT Including contacts which open and close motor circuit:

    Subject matter under art collection 924 wherein the rotary device includes
    electrical contacts which function to open or close the motor circuit at
    different positions of the weights.


CLS 388/926
TXT Which controls a vacuum tube or solid-state device in motor circuit:

    Subject matter under art collection 924 wherein a signal from the rotary
    mechanical device is applied to a vacuum tube, or a solid state device,
    which is a part of a motor control circuit.


CLS 388/927
TXT Which varies resistance of motor circuit:

    Subject matter under art collection 924 wherein the rotary mechanical
    device varies the amount of resistance in a motor control circuit.


CLS 388/928
TXT Which controls position of commutator brushes:

    Subject matter under art collection 924 wherein the rotary mechanical
    device controls the relative position of motor commutator brushes.


CLS 388/928.1
TXT Counter or back EMF (CEMF):
    Art collection of systems in which an opposing voltage, i.e., counter
    electromotive force or CEMF, induced in an armature winding, by virtue of
    the armature's motion within the magnetic field of a field winding is used
    as a feedback signal in controlling a motor.


CLS 388/929
TXT Fluid/granular material flow rate, pressure, or level:

    Art collection of systems in which the running speed of a motor is
    controlled in accordance with a feedback signal which is proportional to
    the flow rate, the pressure, or the level of a fluid or granular (i.e.,
    particulate) material.


CLS 388/930
TXT Load or torque:

    Art collection of systems in which the running speed of a motor is
    controlled in accordance with a feedback signal which is proportional to a
    load or counter torque applied at the motor output.


CLS 388/931
TXT Electric generator or magnet as auxiliary load:

    Subject matter under art collection 930 wherein the counter torque is
    applied to the motor output by a magnet, or by driving an electric
    generator.


CLS 388/932
TXT With reverse torque (e.g., braking):

    Subject matter under art collection 930 wherein the torque is applied to
    the motor output by a mechanical or electromagnetic brake.


CLS 388/933
TXT Radiant energy responsive device:

    Art collection of systems wherein a feedback signal is generated by a
    device which is sensitive to radiant energy.


CLS 388/934
TXT Thermal condition:

    Art collection of systems in which the running speed of the motor is
    controlled in accordance with a signal which is proportional to the
    temperature of the motor or of another component of the system.


CLS 388/935
TXT SPECIFIC APPLICATION:

    Electronic cross-reference art collection under the class definition
    including miscellaneous specific applications of motor controls.

    (1)     Note.  This art collections is intended to serve as a repository
    for art which an examiner wishes to collect as he would do in creating an
    "unofficial digest".  When sufficient art embodying a given creative
    concept is assembled here, an official art collection will be established
    for that concept.


CLS 388/936
TXT Food preparation equipment:

    Art collection of systems of motor control applied in the context of a tool
    for the preparation of food (e.g., electric mixer, food processor, blender,
    etc.).


CLS 388/937
TXT Hand tool:

    Art collection of systems of motor control applied in the context of a
    portable tool (e.g., electric drill, screwdriver, saw, etc.).


CLS 392/
TTL ELECTRIC RESISTANCE HEATING DEVICES

CLS 392/301
TXT Borehole type:
    Subject matter under Class 219, subclass 200 wherein the heating device
    comprising an electrical resistance heating element is disclosed for use in
    an elongated hole in the earth.

    (1)     Note.  The patents classified here are for electrical oil well
    heaters, per se.  The combination of a heater and sufficient well structure
    is in Class 166.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 45 for geographical heat exchange.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 57+ and 272.1+ for well apparatus comprising a
    heater in the well and see subclass 60 for the line between Classes 166 and
    219.  See, also, (1) Note above.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 16+ for an electrical
    heating process or device for forming a hole in the earth by directly
    applying heat to fluidize or comminute the material forming the earth.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 3+
    for mining by in situ conversion of solid to fluid and which includes
    heating means or steps and subclass 14 for process of directly applying
    heat.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 131 for temperature
    modification or control of earthen formation by heating.

    432,    Heating, subclass 62 for geographic or structural installation.


CLS 392/302
TXT With heat exchange fluid:
    Subject matter under subclass 301 wherein the heating device comprises a
    fluid which is heated by the heating element, and the heated fluid conveys
    its heat to the well or bore.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    357,    for intermediate heat absorber.

    456,    for heat exchange fluid line connected heated storage tank.

    496,    for continuous fluid heater.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 104.11+ for intermediate fluent heat
    exchange material receiving and discharging heat.


CLS 392/303
TXT With vapor generator:
    Subject matter under subclass 301 wherein the heating device includes means
    for converting a substance from a solid or liquid to a gaseous state.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324+,   for fluid-in-circuit circuit type heater.

    342,    for vaporization by stored heat.

    386+,   for vaporizer.


CLS 392/304
TXT Heating element surrounding delivery pipe:
    Subject matter under subclass 301 wherein the heating element encircles an
    outer surface of a tube inserted into the well for conveying fluid into or
    out of the well.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    468+,   for pipeline tracing fluid heater.

    472,    for flexible hose type fluid heater.

    479+,   for externally heated line connected section for fluid heater.


CLS 392/305
TXT Suspended by cable in well:
    Subject matter under subclass 301 wherein the heating device is supported
    from a well-head by a flexible line-like member.


CLS 392/306
TXT Plural separate heating devices:
    Subject matter under subclass 301 wherein the borehole contains two or more
    heating devices spaced from one another so that heating devices can heat
    different portions of the borehole.


CLS 392/307
TXT Combined with nonelectric heating means (e.g., gas, etc.):
    Subject matter under Class 219, subclass 200 wherein the heating device
    comprises an electrical heating element in combination with at least one
    other heat source of a nonelectrical nature,  e.g., gas, etc.

    (1)     Note.  The other heat source may be utilized either simultaneously
    or alternately with the electrical device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 601 for inductive heating with diverse
    type heating; for microwave heating see subclass 679 with a diverse device
    and subclasses 680+ with diverse-type heating.

    432,    Heating, subclass 94 for disparate heat sources or fuels.


CLS 392/308
TXT For heating liquid:
    Subject matter under subclass 307 wherein the heating device is for heating
    a substance in that state in which the particles move freely among
    themselves but without tendency to separate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    311+,   for heating liquid by fluid-in-circuit type heater.

    441+,   for tank or container type liquid heater.

    465+,   for continuous flow type fluid heater.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, appropriate subclasses for liquid
    heaters and vaporizers.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 344+ for water heaters.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for heating liquid by
    utilizing heat exchange.

    237,    Heating Systems, appropriate subclasses for heating liquid by
    heating systems.


CLS 392/309
TXT Hot plate:
    Subject matter under subclass 307 wherein the heating device includes means
    on which a removable vessel is to be heated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    467,    for hot plate of a continuous flow type fluid heater.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 279+ for infusors.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, appropriate subclasses for hot plate type.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 443+ for electric hot plates.


CLS 392/310
TXT Oven type:
    Subject matter under subclass 307 wherein the heating device includes an
    enclosed chamber for containing the material to be heated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 273+ for oven.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 678+ for microwave heating, and
    subclasses 391+ for electrically heated ovens.


CLS 392/311
TXT Fluid-in-circuit type heater:
    Subject matter under Class 219, subclass 200 wherein the heating device
    includes an electrically conductive fluid, e.g., water, heated by passing
    an electric current directly through the conductive fluid between two or
    more spaced conductors in electrical contact with the fluid, whereby the
    conductive fluid itself acts as an electric resistance element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 245+ for
    material subjected to electrical energy.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 358 for electrode type
    and subclass 451 for electric, radiant or vibrational treating means.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclass 19 for applying
    electric energy directly to material.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 748 for utilizing
    electrical or wave energy directly applied to liquid.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 600+ for inductive heating, note
    subclass 628 heat exchange by fluid or liquid; subclasses 678+ for
    microwave heating, note subclass 687 for a fluid heater; and subclasses
    764+ for capacitive dielectric heating.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 80+ for liquid resistance element.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 29+ for joule
    effect heating and subclasses 120+ for charge internal resistance heating.

    426,    Foods or Edible Material: Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 234+ for passage of electric current through food material.


CLS 392/312
TXT Method:
    Subject matter under subclass 311 comprising processes for heating fluid by
    utilizing the liquid itself as an electrical resistance and passing
    electrical energy therethrough.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    426,    Foods or Edible Material: Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 237+ for direct application of electrical or wave energy to food
    material and, particularly, subclasses 244+ for involving dielectric
    heating or passage of electric current through food material.


CLS 392/313
TXT Portable:
    Subject matter under subclass 311 wherein the fluid-in-circuit heater may
    be lifted or carried bodily from place-to-place by hand.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 523 for housing, casing or support
    insertable into material or support to be heated.


CLS 392/314
TXT Continuous flow of fluid being heated:
    Subject matter under subclass 311 wherein the fluid-in-circuit heater
    comprises a flow path for the uninterrupted flow of fluid to be  heated, an
    inlet connected to a pressurized source of fluid and the electrodes
    arranged with the fluid flow path for heating the fluid while it
    uninterruptedly flows through the path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    396+,   for continuous flow line connected heater for vaporizer.

    465+,   for continuous flow type fluid heater.


CLS 392/315
TXT With means to adjust current path between electrodes:
    Subject matter under subclass 314 including means to vary the effective
    length or cross-sectional area of the current flow between the electrodes.

    (1)     Note.  Generally the varying of the current path results in varying
    the resistance of the path and consequently the magnitude of the current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323,    for reservoir or tank.

    329,    for line connected boiler.

    334,    for manually filled tank or container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 80+ for mechanically variable or
    adjustable liquid resistors.


CLS 392/316
TXT Responsive to condition of fluid:
    Subject matter under subclass 315 wherein the continuous fluid-in-circuit
    heater includes means which senses and responds to the fluid to adjust the
    current path between the electrodes.


CLS 392/317
TXT Movable dielectric means:
    Subject matter under subclass 315 wherein the current path is adjusted by a
    shiftable electrical insulation means interposed between or surrounding the
    electrodes whereby the passage of current between the electrodes may be
    controlled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    330,    for adjusting current path between electrodes in line connected
    boiler.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 82 for fluid resistance devices with
    an adjustable insulating barrier between electrodes.


CLS 392/318
TXT Current control means:
    Subject matter under subclass 314 wherein the fluid-in-circuit heater
    includes means to vary the flow of electrical current between an external
    source of current and the heating device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 507+ for significant current
    connection means for heating devices in general under the class definition.


CLS 392/319
TXT With discharge member for line or tank:
    Subject matter under subclass 314 wherein the continuous fluid-in-circuit
    heater includes means defining a passage or vent for permitting the fluid
    to flow out of a supply line or  receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    473+,   for fluid heater with discharge member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 334+ for systems with heating or cooling.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 146.1+ for fluid dispensing with heating.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 128+ for
    means for heating or cooling the system or fluid, and particularly 133 for
    spray member having heater.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 113 and 114 for means for electrically cooling
    or heating body.


CLS 392/320
TXT Tube or pipe forms flow path:
    Subject matter under subclass 314 wherein the flow path for the fluid to be
    heated comprises a fluid conveying elongated tubular member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    397+,   for continuous flow line connected heater for vaporizer.

    480+,   for externally heated line connected section.

    486,    for heated line section with heating element internal of flow path.

    488+,   for pipe or tube forming flow path with heating element internal of
    flow path.


CLS 392/321
TXT Pipe forms at least one electrode:
    Subject matter under subclass 320 wherein the pipe structure comprises at
    least one of the electrodes.


CLS 392/322
TXT With reservoir or tank:
    Subject matter under subclass 311 wherein fluid-in-circuit heater includes
    a container for heating a fixed quantity of fluid held therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400+,   for vaporizer.

    441+,   for container type liquid heater.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 279+ for infusers with
    a liquid supply, subclass 358 for an electrode type cooking device,
    subclasses 403+ for cooking devices of the boiler or deep-fat fryer type,
    and subclass  451 for a device that subjects food to an electric or
    high-frequency energy.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, appropriate subclasses for water
    heaters utilizing a boiler type tank, particularly subclasses 13.1+ for
    stand boiler.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 334 for systems utilizing electric heating
    means and which may utilize tanks.


CLS 392/323
TXT With means to adjust current path between electrodes:
    Subject matter under subclass 322 including means to vary the effective
    length or cross-sectional area of the current flow between the electrodes.

    (1)     Note.  Generally the varying of the current path by subject matter
    of this subclass type results in varying the resistance of the path and
    consequently the magnitude of the current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315,    for continuous flow of fluid being  heated.

    329,    for line connected boiler.

    334,    for manually filled tank or container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, particularly subclasses 80+ for mechanically
    variable or adjustable liquid resistors.


CLS 392/324
TXT Steam or vapor generator:
    Subject matter under subclass 311 wherein the fluid-in-circuit heater
    includes means for converting a fluid material to a vapor or gas state.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    303,    for borehole type heater.

    342,    for vaporization by stored heat.

    386+,   for vaporizer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 524+ and 535+ for
    means for applying vapor in a bath.

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclasses 69 and 77.1+ for steam
    iron.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 125+ for
    vaporizers in fumigating apparatus.

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclasses 89+ and 103 for retort
    by electric heater.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, appropriate subclasses for apparatus
    for generating vapors from liquids and further utilizing the vapors thus
    generated, e.g., steam generator.  The structure found in this class is
    very similar to those found in Class 219, especially the so-called flashers
    in subclasses 40+ and wick in subclass 366.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 434+ and 543+ for charge
    forming devices involving vaporizers.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 20+, 369+, and 377+ for steaming
    apparatus.

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 203.12+ for vaporizers for medicaments.

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 228 and 272 for hair shaping curls by steam.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, appropriate subclasses for devices for
    the concentration of solids held in solution or suspension by evaporation.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclasses 104 for vaporizing mineral
    oil, and subclasses 121 for electric heating.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclass 19 for applying
    electrical energy directly to material.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for distillation
    apparatus in general.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, appropriate subclasses for a
    process of distilling a liquid.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, classes 313 and 347+ for a
    process of distilling mineral oils.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 51 for apparel apparatus by heating and
    steaming.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 9, 16+, and 67 for heating systems by
    steam.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 136 for sprays
    with means to generate a water vapor or steam.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 67+ for specific compositions useful for
    vaporization purposes.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 127+ for external
    supply or removal of heat and subclass 142 for heat produced by
    electricity.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 305 for fume generating apparatus
    and 292+ for sterilizers using steam.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 208 and 258 for a fuel burner having an
    electrically heated fuel vaporizer.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses
    81+ for bathing apparatus.


CLS 392/325
TXT Line connected boiler:
    Subject matter under subclass 324 wherein the fluid-in-circuit heater
    includes a vessel having an inlet for receiving water from an external
    source of supply and an outlet for  discharging vapor from the vessel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400+,   for vaporizing in-line connected tank.

    449,    for liquid heating container or tank.


CLS 392/326
TXT Control of electrode immersion level:
    Subject matter under subclass 325 wherein the boiler includes means to
    control the depth of the electrode immersed in the water to be heated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 80+ and 86 for level of liquid
    element adjustable on electrodes.


CLS 392/327
TXT By electrode current:
    Subject matter under subclass 326 wherein the electrode immersion level is
    controlled by the magnitude of current flow between the electrodes.


CLS 392/328
TXT By pressure:
    Subject matter under subclass 326 wherein the electrode immersion level is
    controlled by the exertion of force of vapor in the boiler.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 496 for heaters in general with current
    control responsive to the pressure of the medium being heated.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 38 for fluid pressure responsive to
    liquid element resistors.


CLS 392/329
TXT With means to adjust current path between electrodes:
    Subject matter under subclass 325 including means to vary the effective
    length or cross-sectional area of the current flow between the electrodes.

    (1)     Note.  Generally the varying of the current path results in varying
    the resistance of the path and consequently the magnitude of the current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315,    for continuous flow of fluid being heated.

    322,    for reservoir or tank.

    334,    for manually filled tank or container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 296 for
    voltage or current regulating systems utilizing liquid resistors.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, particularly subclasses 80+ for mechanically
    variable or adjustable liquid resistors.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 29 and 120+ for
    electric furnace structure including adjustable electrodes.


CLS 392/330
TXT Movable dielectric means:
    Subject matter under subclass 329 wherein the current path is adjusted by a
    shiftable electrical insulation means interposed between or surrounding the
    electrodes whereby the passage of current between the electrodes may be
    controlled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    317,    for continuous flow of fluid being heated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 82 for fluid resistance devices with
    an adjustable insulating barrier between electrodes.


CLS 392/331
TXT Electrode arrangement:
    Subject matter under subclass 325 including details of the manner in which
    the conductors are arranged to distribute the current in-line connected
    boiler.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 29+ and 120+ for
    electrode details of electric heating furnaces.


CLS 392/332
TXT Water jet electrode:
    Subject matter under subclass 331 wherein the electrode arrangement
    includes one electrode which spurts out a stream of water directed at
    another electrode.


CLS 392/333
TXT Manually filled tank or container:
    Subject matter under subclass 324 wherein the vapor generator includes a
    vessel with an opening through which the vessel is filled by hand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403+,   for container with self-contained evaporant supply.

    442,    for manually pour-in liquid type tank.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 223 for washboards.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 128+ for
    means for heating or cooling the system or fluid.


CLS 392/334
TXT With means to adjust current path between electrodes:
    Subject matter under subclass 333 including means to vary the effective
    length or cross-sectional area of the current flow between the electrodes.

    (1)     Note.  Generally the varying of the current path results in varying
    the resistance of the path and consequently the magnitude of the current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315,    for continuous flow of fluid in fluid-in-circuit type heater.

    323,    for reservoir or tank.

    329,    for line connected boiler.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 296 for
    voltage or current regulating systems utilizing liquid resistors.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, particularly subclasses 80+ for mechanically
    variable or adjustable liquid resistors.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 29+ and 120+ for
    electric furnace structure including adjustable electrodes.


CLS 392/335
TXT With supply interlock means:
    Subject matter under subclass 333 wherein the tank or container includes
    means for preventing the flow of water into the container while the
    electrodes are electrically energized.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 50 for
    interlocking switch arrangements.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 437 for immersible heating unit.


CLS 392/336
TXT Separate electrode compartment:
    Subject matter under subclass 333 wherein the tank or container includes a
    distinct section containing the electrodes to isolate the electrodes  from
    the remainder of the tank or container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    405,    for separate heating chamber.

    445,    for immersible heating unit attaching or support means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 524+ and 535+ for
    means for applying vapor in a bath.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 437 for immersible heating unit.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, particularly subclasses 80+ for mechanically
    variable or adjustable liquid resistors.


CLS 392/337
TXT Electrode compartment removable from tank:
    Subject matter under subclass 336 wherein the separate electrode
    compartment may be separated from the tank.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    406,    for removable container with self- contained evaporant supply.


CLS 392/338
TXT Electrode details:
    Subject matter under subclass 311 including details of the electrode
    structure of the fluid-in-circuit type heater.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331,    for electrode arrangement for line connected tank.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 358 for electrode type
    and subclass 451 for electric, radiant or vibrational treating means.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electric and Wave Energy, particularly subclasses 280+
    for electrodes for electrolytic cell.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, particularly subclasses 80+ for mechanically
    variable or adjustable liquid resistors.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 29+ and 120+ for
    significant electrode structure combined with furnaces.


CLS 392/339
TXT With heat storage means:
    Subject matter under Class 219, subclass 200 wherein the heating device
    includes a heat accumulating medium insulated against heat loss for storing
    heat to be dissipated at a later time by a process of heat transfer.

    (1)     Note.  See search notes for other heat exchange means and heat
    absorber without storage of heat to be dissipated at a later time.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclass 83 for additive heat
    solid.

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 322+ for baffles or heat retainer structure.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 310 and 320+ for fireless brooder and
    incubators.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 33 for accumulator and
    subclasses 367.1+ for heat transmitter.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 105, 207, 273.5, 375, 400, 617+,
    and  910 for heat storage means.

    132,    Toilet, subclass 117 for removable heat storage means.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 4+, 10, 104.11, 185, and 236 for heat
    storage.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 258, 399, 430, 439, 462, 530, and 540
    for heat storage or exchange means.

    237,    Heat Systems, subclasses 44 and 75 for heat accumulator.

    432,    Heating, subclass 30 for process of utilizing a heat storage means
    and subclasses 214+ for heat generating means heats heat storage mass of
    solid material.


CLS 392/340
TXT Method:
    Subject matter under subclass 339 including processes for storing heat in
    the heat accumulating medium or dissipating stored heat at a later time.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 236 for process of heat exchange.

    432,    Heating, subclass 30 for process of utilizing a heat storage means.


CLS 392/341
TXT For fluid heating (e.g., gas or liquid, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 339 wherein the heat storage means is used
    for heating a liquid or gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    379,    for concentrated heated air stream.

    441+,   for tank or container type liquid heater.

    465+,   for continuous fluid heater (not in stored medium).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses
    for apparatus employing heated gas.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 35 for liquid heaters and
    vaporizers having accumulator.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 400 and 617+ for heat storage mass
    of solar heat collector.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclass 105 for devices
    with heating, cooling or exchange means.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 301 for hydrants with protection against
    freezing which may be a heater and subclasses 334+ for systems with heating
    or cooling.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 32-35 for thawing and freeze
    protection.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, appropriate subclasses for heating
    fluids.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for heating fluids.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 57-62 for heating or heat insulating means.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclasses 104+ for vaporizing devices
    and subclasses 138+ for condensing devices utilizing heating means.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclasses 81+ for apparatus utilizing
    heating means.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 175+ for systems
    employing heater or heat exchanger means.


CLS 392/342
TXT For vaporization:
    Subject matter under subclass 339 wherein the stored heat is used for
    converting a substance from a solid or liquid to a gaseous state.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324+,   for fluid-in-circuit type heater.

    386+,   for vaporizer (not in storage medium).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclasses 69 and 77.1 for
    smoothing implements with moistening means.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 129 for
    vaporizers in fumigating apparatus.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, appropriate subclasses for apparatus
    for generating vapors from liquids and further utilizing the vapors thus
    generated, e.g., steam generator.  The structure found in this class is
    very similar to those found in Class 219, especially the so-called flashers
    in subclasses 40+ and wicks in subclass 366.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 543+ for charge forming
    devices involving vaporizers.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 369+ for steaming apparatus.

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 203.12+ for vaporizers for medicaments.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, appropriate subclasses for devices for
    the concentration of solids held in solution or suspension by evaporation.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for
    the distillaion of mineral oils.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for distillation
    apparatus in general.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, appropriate subclasses for a
    process of distilling a liquid.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, Classes 313 and 347+ for a
    process of distilling mineral oil.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 401 for ovens with steam generating
    means.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 136 for
    sprayers with means to generate a water vapor or steam.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 67+ and 346+ for specific compositions
    useful for vaporization purposes.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 305 for fume generating apparatus
    and 292+ for sterilizers using steam.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 208 for a fuel burner having an electrically
    heated fuel vaporizer.

    432,    Heating, subclass 31 for heating of or by wall or radiant surface.


CLS 392/343
TXT For subsequent heating by radiation:
    Subject matter under subclass 339 wherein the stored heat is used for
    transmitting heat energy to the object or material by electro-magnetic
    waves within the infrared range of the spectrum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    375+,   for convection space heater with  radiation.

    391,    for vaporizer using radiant heat source.

    407+,   for radiant heater.

    483,    for continuous flow heater with radiation.


CLS 392/344
TXT For subsequent heating by convection:
    Subject matter under subclass 339 wherein the stored heat is used for
    transmitting heat energy to the object or material by an air motion as a
    result of difference in density and the action of gravity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    347,    for convection space heater.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses
    for convection type drying.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 67+ for hot air stove structure of
    the convection type and subclasses 99+ for hot air furnace structure.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for convection heating.

    237,    Heating Systems, appropriate subclasses for heating systems for
    rooms or spaces utilizing convective heating of the fluid (air) in the
    rooms or space.


CLS 392/345
TXT Means to control heating accumulating medium:
    Subject matter under subclass 339 wherein the heat storage means includes
    means responsive to a heat level in accumulating medium to regulate the
    amount of the heat stored in the accumulating medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 492+ for automatic regulating or
    controlling means.


CLS 392/346
TXT Heat accumulating medium details:
    Subject matter under subclass 339 including details of the structure or
    composition of the heat accumulating medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 322+ for baffle or heat retainer structure of
    furnace.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 207 for heated block of body,
    subclass 400 for heat accumulator structure, and subclasses 674+ for
    absorber of solar heat collector.


CLS 392/347
TXT Convection space heater:
    Subject matter under Class 219, subclass 200 wherein air heated by an
    electric device is intended to heat an occupied space, e.g., a room by the
    motion in a fluid resulting from a difference in density and the action of
    gravity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 451 for convection type heating
    devices for railway cars.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 58+ for hot air stove structure of
    the convection type; subclasses 99+ for hot air furnace structure;
    subclasses 148+ for fire plate; subclasses 628+ for solar heat collector.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for convection heating.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 46+, 50, and 70+ for heating systems
    for rooms or spaces utilizing convective heating of the fluid (air) in the
    rooms or space.


CLS 392/348
TXT Artificial fire:
    Subject matter under subclass 347 wherein the convection space heater
    includes means to give a visual illusion or appearance of an actual fire.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 427 for simulated
    fireplace.

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclasses 91+ for portable
    shelter with heating, lighting or ventilating.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 220 for light means.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 125 for simulation feature.


CLS 392/349
TXT Central heating type:
    Subject matter under subclass 347 wherein the convection space heater is
    located at a central location to convey heated air to different parts or
    rooms of a building.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 99+ for hot air furnaces.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 50 for room heat exchangers with central
    fluid supply.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 10+ for
    hot air furnace.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 50+ for air heating system.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 228+ and 330+ for ventilating a building.


CLS 392/350
TXT With air delivery duct:
    Subject matter under subclass 349 wherein the central heater includes a
    flue or channel for conveying heated air to different parts or rooms of a
    building.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    479+,   for externally heated line connected section.

    485+,   for heated line section with heating element internal of flow path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 99+ for hot air furnaces.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 120+ for impeller or conveyor moving
    exchange material.


CLS 392/351
TXT Floor furnace type:
    Subject matter under subclass 347 wherein the convection heater is
    installed in a recess in the floor of a room.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 116 for floor and wall furnaces.


CLS 392/352
TXT Baseboard type:
    Subject matter under subclass 347 comprising a heating device having one
    long dimension with means for mounting the device to a wall or floor at
    their intersection such that its long dimension is parallel to the
    intersection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 53+ for related to wall, floor or ceiling
    structure of a chamber.

    237,    Heating systems, subclass 79 for radiator with shields.

    454,    Ventilating, subclasses 287+ for baseboard type.


CLS 392/353
TXT With baffle:
    Subject matter under subclass 352 wherein the baseboard heater includes a
    plate or wall for directing heated air in a desired flow pattern.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    374,    for portable convection spaced heater.

    383,    for portable heated air stream.


CLS 392/354
TXT With intermediate heat absorber:
    Subject matter under subclass 347 wherein the convection space heater
    includes an accumulator placed between the heater and the space for
    collecting heat from the heater for subsequent  transmission to the air
    being heated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302,    for heat exchange fluid in borehole type heater.

    339+,   for heat storage means.

    377+,   for heat exchange fluid in convection space heater.

    456,    for heat exchange fluid in tank or container type liquid heater.

    496,    for heat exchange fluid in continuous flow fluid heater.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 101 for host air furnace with boiler.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 104.11+ for intermediate heating by
    convection.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 22 and
    36+ for radiator type.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 16-18 and 70+ for radiator and boiler.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 67 for vaporization, or expansion,
    refrigeration or heat or energy exchange.


CLS 392/355
TXT Heated by radiant source:
    Subject matter under subclass 354 wherein the heat absorber is heated by
    energy in the form of electromagnetic waves within the infrared range of
    the spectrum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    391,    for vaporizer using radiant heat source.

    407+,   for radiant heater.

    460,    for liquid heater producing radiation.

    483,    for fluid heater producing radiation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 638+ for thermosiphonic circulation.


CLS 392/356
TXT With fan blower:
    Subject matter under subclass 355 wherein the air to be heated is directed
    to the heat absorber by a rotating fan.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    358,    for guiding heated air by heat exchange fluid.

    360+,   for forced air type.


CLS 392/357
TXT With fluid heat absorber:
    Subject matter under subclass 354 wherein the intermediate heat absorber
    includes a liquid or gas for absorbing the heat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302,    for heat exchange fluid used in a borehole.

    339,    for convection space heating in heat storage.

    377,    for convection combined with radiation.

    456,    for heat exchange fluid line connecting heated storage tank.

    496,    for continuous fluid heater.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 101 for hot-air furnace combined with
    boiler.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 104.11 for intermediate fluent heat
    exchange material receiving and discharging heat.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 16-18 and 70+ for radiator and boiler.


CLS 392/358
TXT By fan blower:
    Subject matter under subclass 357 wherein the air to be heated is directed
    to the heat absorber by a rotating fan.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    356,    for guiding heated air by radiant source.

    360+,   for forced air type.


CLS 392/359
TXT Wall mounted:
    Subject matter under subclass 357 wherein the heating device is mounted on
    a continuous side structure of a room.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    352+,   for baseboard type heater.

    363,    for forced air type.

    370,    for convection space heater without forced air.

    381,    for concentrated heated air stream.

    430,    for radiant heater with reflector.

    436,    for radiant extended surface heater.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 116 for floor or wall furnace.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 53+ for related wall structure of a
    chamber.


CLS 392/360
TXT Forced air type:
    Subject matter under subclass 347 wherein the means for guiding air to be
    heated employs a power driven fan, blower, or pump to force the air into
    contact with the heating element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    379+,   for concentrated heated air stream.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 103 and 110 for hot air furnace
    with compressed air.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 340 for systems including apparatus in
    which the fluid in system circulates in heat exchange relationship.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 120+ for impeller or conveyor moving
    exchange material.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 400 for heat energy transfer by
    convection.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 10+ for
    hot air furnaces.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 50+ for hot air heating systems.

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, appropriate subclasses for
    fluid pump.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impeller), appropriate subclasses
    for impeller.

    417,    Pumps, appropriate subclasses for pumps.


CLS 392/361
TXT Heating attachment for fan:
    Subject matter under subclass 360 wherein the forced air heater includes a
    heating unit, having an electrical resistance element, attachable to a
    self-supported fan for heating air circulated by the fan.


CLS 392/362
TXT Fan with heated blades:
    Subject matter under subclass 360 wherein the heating elements for heating
    the air are mounted on or disposed in the vanes of the fan.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, subclasses 114, 116, and
    175-179 for passage in blade, vane, shaft or rotary distributor
    communication with working fluids.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclass 95 for heating,
    cooling or thermal insulation means.


CLS 392/363
TXT Wall mounted:
    Subject matter under subclass 360 wherein the forced air heater is readily
    mounted on a continuous side structure of a room.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359,    for convection heater with heat exchange fluid.

    370,    for convection space heater.

    381,    for concentrated heated air stream.

    430,    for radiant heater with reflector.

    436+,   for radiant extended surface heater.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 116 for floor or wall furnace.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 53+ for related wall structure of a
    chamber.


CLS 392/364
TXT Ceiling mounted:
    Subject matter under subclass 360 wherein the forced air heater is readily
    mounted to the overhead covering of a room.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    436,    for heat radiating panel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 116 for floor or wall furnace.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 53+ for related wall structure of a
    chamber.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 292+ for ceiling type diffuser and subclass
    354 for ceiling or wall mounted.


CLS 392/365
TXT Portable:
    Subject matter under subclass 360 wherein the forced air heater may be
    lifted or carried bodily from place to place by hand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    373,    for portable convection space heater.

    383,    for portable heated air stream.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 67+ and 110 for hot air stoves and
    furnaces.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 533 for portable heater unit with
    housing, casing or support means.


CLS 392/366
TXT With fan position adjusting means:
    Subject matter under subclass 365 wherein the portable forced air type
    heater includes means for selectively varying the position of the fan with
    respect to a base or support structure.


CLS 392/367
TXT Multi-direction air outlet:
    Subject matter under subclass 365 wherein the portable heater includes a
    passage or vent for distributing heated air in two or more different
    directions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    440,    for radiant heater.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 126+ for plural outlets.


CLS 392/368
TXT With baffle:
    Subject matter under subclass 365 wherein the portable heater includes a
    plate or wall for directing heated air in a desired air flow pattern.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    353,    for portable baseboard type convection space heater.

    374,    for portable convection space heater.

    388,    for portable heated air stream.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 67+ for hot air and subclass 99 for
    hot air furnace with air baffles.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 120+ for conveyor moving exchange
    material.


CLS 392/369
TXT Counterflow:
    Subject matter under subclass 368 wherein the baffle causes an airflow
    through the housing to reverse its direction of flow at least once when
    inflowing from an inlet to an outlet.


CLS 392/370
TXT Wall mounted:
    Subject matter under subclass 347 wherein the convection space heater is
    readily mounted on a continuous side structure of a room.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359,    for convection heater with heat exchange fluid.

    363,    for forced air type heater.

    381,    for concentrated heated air stream.

    430,    for radiant heater with reflector.

    436+,   for radiant extended surface heater.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 116 for floor or wall furnace.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 53+ for related wall structure of a
    chamber.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 276+ for wall type diffuser and subclass
    354 for ceiling or wall mounted.


CLS 392/371
TXT In wall cavity:
    Subject matter under subclass 370 wherein the convection space heating
    device is located within a recess or hollow space formed in the wall of a
    room.


CLS 392/372
TXT Mounted in or on window or door:
    Subject matter under subclass 347 wherein the convection heater is mounted
    in or on an opening in the wall of a building for the admission of light
    and air, or an opening in a wall to permit entrance into or exit from a
    room, building or other enclosure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 53+ for related wall structure.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 203 for windshield or window of a
    vehicle and subclass 213 for static structure.

    454,    Ventilation, for subclass 195 for door and subclasses 196+ for
    window.


CLS 392/373
TXT Portable:
    Subject matter under subclass 347 wherein the convection space heater may
    be lifted or carried bodily from place-to-place by hand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    365,    for portable forced air type heater.

    383,    for portable heated air stream.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 67+ and 110 for hot air stoves and
    furnaces.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 533 for portable heater unit with
    housing, casing or support means.


CLS 392/374
TXT With baffle:
    Subject matter under subclass 373 wherein the portable heater includes a
    plate or wall for directing heated air in a desired air flow pattern.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    353,    for baseboard type convection space heater.

    368,    for portable convection space heater.

    383,    for portable heated air stream.


CLS 392/375
TXT Combined with radiation:
    Subject matter under subclass 347 wherein the heated air in a room is
    resulted in combination with electromagnetic waves within the infrared
    range of the spectrum.

    (1)     Note.  An example of the apparatus to be found here comprises a
    device transmitting heat energy by convection and direct radiation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    343,    for using stored heat for radiation.

    344+,   for using stored heat for convection.

    407+,   for radiant heater.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 91+ for electric radiant.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 49 for radiant panel; subclass 133 for
    polished surface; subclasses 148+ for radiator core type; subclasses 168+
    for panel or wall structure;  and subclass 185 for heat transmitter.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 36+ for
    heating radiator.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 16+ and 70+ for heat radiator.


CLS 392/376
TXT With reflector:
    Subject matter under subclass 375 including opaque mirror-like means which
    redirects incident infrared radiation back into the medium from  which it
    came.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    422+,   for radiant heater.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 133 for coated, roughened or polished
    surface.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    636+ for mirror.


CLS 392/377
TXT With heat exchange fluid:
    Subject matter under subclass 375 including a fluid which is heated by the
    resistance heating element for subsequent transmission to the space to be
    heated.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    344,    for convection space heating in heat storage.

    357,    for intermediate heat absorber.

    456,    for heat exchange fluid line connected heated storage tank.

    496,    for continuous fluid heater.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 104.11+ for intermediate fluent heat
    exchange.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 36+ for
    heating radiators.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 16+ for combined radiator and boiler
    and subclasses 70+ for heat radiators.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 67 for vaporization, or expansion,
    refrigeration or heat or energy exchange.


CLS 392/378
TXT In plural sections:
    Subject matter under subclass 377 having two or more compartments for
    accommodating the heat exchange fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 172+ for side-by-side tubular structure
    or tube sections.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 16+ for combined radiator and boiler
    and subclasses 70+ for heat radiator.


CLS 392/379
TXT Concentrated heated air stream (i.e., blast):
    Subject matter under Class 219, subclass 200 wherein the heating device
    includes means for blowing air through a passage in which an electrical
    resistance heating element is mounted for producing an intensified or a
    jet-like flow of  heated air.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    360,    for forced air type.

    473,    for fluid heater carried on discharge member.

    478,    for fluid conveying tube or pipe comprising resistance heating
    element.

    479,    for externally heated line connected section.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 535+ for means for
    applying hot air directly to body of user.

    5,      Beds, subclass 423 for means to force air.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 94+ for
    hair on head and subclasses 241+ for gas or vapor distributing and applying
    agitators.

    132,    Toilets, subclasses 112+ for orifice for applying fluent material
    and subclasses for heater, fluid supply, or surrounding fluid housing.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    497 for gas, vapor or flame contact means for work.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 120+ for impeller or conveyor moving
    exchange material.


CLS 392/380
TXT For drying body part:
    Subject matter under subclass 379 wherein the concentrated heated air
    stream device is disclosed for drying a part of human body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    360,    for forced air type.


CLS 392/381
TXT Wall mounted:
    Subject matter under subclass 380 wherein the body drying heater is readily
    mounted on a continuous side structure of a room.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359,    for convection heater with heat exchange fluid.

    363,    for forced air type heater.

    370,    for convection space heater.

    430,    for radiant heater with reflector.

    436,    for radiant extended surface heater.


CLS 392/382
TXT With support:
    Subject matter under subclass 379 wherein the concentrated heated air
    stream heater includes means to position an article to be heated in  the
    path of the heated air stream.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 458+ for housing, casing or support
    means for heating unit.


CLS 392/383
TXT Portable:
    Subject matter under subclass 379 wherein the concentrated heated air
    stream heater may be lifted or carried bodily from place-to-place by hand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    373,    for portable convection space heater.

    365,    for portable forced air type heater.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 227 for electrically hand manipulative
    tools or instruments and subclass  533 for portable heater unit with
    housing, casing or support means.


CLS 392/384
TXT With handle:
    Subject matter under subclass 383 wherein the heating device includes means
    attached to the heating device to be gripped by the hand when the device is
    lifted or carried.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404,    for hand-held container.

    476,    for hand-held discharge member.


CLS 392/385
TXT Pistol-grip type:
    Subject matter under subclass 384 wherein the handle is L-shaped and
    attached to the heating device at only one end.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 110+ for handle.


CLS 392/386
TXT Vaporizer:
    Subject matter under Class 219, subclass 200 wherein the heating device is
    disclosed for use in converting a substance from a solid or liquid to a
    gaseous state.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324+,   for fluid-in-circuit type heater.

    342,    for vaporization with heat storage means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclasses 77.1+ for moistening
    means.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 125+ for
    vaporizers in fumigating     apparatus.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 50.1+ for liquified gas transferred as
    liquid.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 222 for steamers.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 726+ for crucible.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, appropriate subclasses for apparatus
    for generating vapors from liquids and further utilizing the vapors thus
    generated, e.g., steam generator.  The structure found in this class is
    very similar to those found in Class 219, especially the so-called flashers
    in subclasses 40+ and wicks in subclass 366 which do not disclose an
    electrical heating  means.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 543+ for charge forming
    devices involving vaporizers.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 20 for steam or hot water; subclass
    113 for air moisteners; and subclasses 369+ for steaming apparatus.

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 203.12+ for vaporizers for medicaments.

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 227+ for heater, fluid supply, or surrounding
    fluid housing and subclasses 272+ for vapor reservoir.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, appropriate subclasses for devices for
    the concentration of solids held in solution or suspension by evaporation.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclasses 104+ for apparatus, for the
    distillation of mineral oils and, especially, subclass 121 for electric
    heating.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for distillation
    apparatus in general.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, appropriate subclasses for a
    process of distilling a liquid.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 313 and 347+ for
    a process of distilling mineral oil.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 175+ for heater or
    heat exchange.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 401 for ovens with steam generating
    means.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 51 for heating and steaming.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 44 for
    humidity control.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclass 9 for steam and subclasses 16+ for
    combined radiator and boiler.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 34+ for
    diffusers; subclasses 128+ for sprayers with means to generate a water
    vapor or steam; and subclasses 136+ for vapor generator.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 67+ for specific compositions useful for
    vaporization purposes and subclasses 305+ for smokes, fogs, or gaseous
    primary dispersants.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 127+ for external
    supply or removal of heat and subclass 141 for electric heater.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 305 for fume generating apparatus
    and 292+ for sterilizers using steam.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 13+, 208, and 258 for a fuel burner having
    an electrically heated fuel vaporizer.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses
    81+ for bathing apparatus and subclasses 96+ for thermal applicators.


CLS 392/387
TXT Method:
    Subject matter under subclass 386 including processes for converting a
    substance from a solid or liquid to a gaseous state.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 12+ for process
    by distilling, or liquefying vapors of, used agent.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 200+ for heat exchange process.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 308+ for
    fractionation.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 1+ for
    processes of distributing fluid material on or over an area or into the air.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 13 for processes of heating or heater
    operation.

    432,    Heating, subclass 13 for process of  heating or heater operation.


CLS 392/388
TXT For metal vapor deposition:
    Subject matter under subclass 386 wherein the heating device is disclosed
    for vaporizing a metallic substance to be deposited on a substrate.

    (1)     Note.  The terms "evaporant", "coating material" and "film-forming
    material" are synonymous in this art.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 715+ for gas or deposition.


CLS 392/389
TXT With crucible:
    Subject matter under subclass 388 wherein the vaporizer includes an
    evaporation vessel for containing the metallic substance to be evaporated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403,    for container with self-contained evaporant supply.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 726+ for crucible or evaporator
    structure.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 262+ for crucible.


CLS 392/390
TXT With disposable evaporant cartridge or container:
    Subject matter under subclass 386 wherein the vaporizer includes a
    replaceable case or shell or vessel for containing the substance to be
    evaporated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403+,   for container with self-contained evaporant supply.

    470,    for continuous fluid heater.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 46 for flexible envelope or cover type.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 214 for vending, dispensing or display
    device.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 146.1+ for heating or cooling means.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 113+ for cooling or heating body, treating or
    collected material or device.


CLS 392/391
TXT By radiant heat source:
    Subject matter under subclass 386 wherein the substance is converted into
    gaseous form by heat energy in the form of electromagnetic waves within the
    infrared range of the spectrum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    347,    for convection space heating.

    407+,   for radiant heater.

    460,    for liquid heater producing radiation.

    483,    for fluid heater producing radiation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, Digest 6 for infrared.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 493.1+ for infrared radiation generators
    not provided for elsewhere.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 31 for scavenging or purging period started by
    combustion demand.


CLS 392/392
TXT Wall mounted:
    Subject matter under subclass 386 wherein the vaporizer may be mounted on a
    continuous side structure of a room.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359,    for convection heater with heat exchange.

    363,    for forced air type heater.

    370,    for convection space heater.

    381,    for concentrated heated air stream heater.

    430,    for radiant heater with reflector.

    436,    for radiant extended surface heater fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 53+ for related wall, floor or ceiling
    structure of a chamber.


CLS 392/393
TXT By light bulb heat source:
    Subject matter under subclass 386 wherein the substance is converted to the
    vapor state by the heat generated from an incandescent filament enclosed in
    a sealed, transparent envelope.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 220 for light means and subclass 552 for
    heating element structure.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses for
    electric lamp.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 234+ for gaseous or vacuum spacing
    between element and casing or housing.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 101 for liquid container.


CLS 392/394
TXT Liquid evaporant (e.g., water, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 386 wherein the substance to be evaporated is
    a liquid (e.g., water, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324+,   for steam or vapor generator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 524+ for vapor or
    heat in bath and subclasses 535+ for means for applying vapor or hot air
    directly to body of user.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclass 78 for air moistener.


CLS 392/395
TXT With wick:
    Subject matter under subclass 394 wherein the liquid to be evaporated is
    transferred from a reservoir to the heating element by a porous or
    absorbent pad or fibrous matter woven into a bundle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 34+ for slow
    diffusers and, particularly, subclasses 44+ for wicks.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 94+ for porous mass
    and subclasses 100+ for porous sheets.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 120+ for work chamber having heating means.


CLS 392/396
TXT In continuous flow line connected heater:
    Subject matter under subclass 394 wherein the liquid evaporant is contained
    in means defining a flow path for uninterrupted flow of the liquid from an
    inlet connected to a pressurized source to a vapor outlet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    465,    for continuous flow type fluid heater.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, appropriate subclasses for liquid
    heaters of the continuous flow type.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 543+ for continuous flow
    heater associated with internal-combustion engine.

    128,    Surgery, subclass 203.17 for electrically heated means for
    producing water vapor.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclasses 104+ vaporization.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 600+ for inductive heating, subclasses
    678+ for microwave heating, and subclasses 764+ for capacitive dielectric
    heating.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 128+ for the
    system fluid with heating or cooling, and, particularly, subclasses 136+
    for vapor generation.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 208 for electrically heated section.


CLS 392/397
TXT Pipe or tube forms flow path:
    Subject matter under subclass 396 wherein the flow path for the liquid to
    be evaporated is a liquid-conveying long passage or tube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    320,    for pipe or tube section forming flow passage with fluid-in-circuit.

    478,    for fluid conveying tube or pipe.

    480+,   for pipe or tube forming flow path in continuous fluid heater.

    488+,   for pipe or tube forming flow path in with heating elements
    internal of flow path.


CLS 392/398
TXT With internal heating element:
    Subject matter under subclass 397 wherein an electrical resistance heating
    element is located within the pipe or tube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    320,    for tube or pipe forming flow path.

    485+,   for heated line section with heating element internal of flow path.


CLS 392/399
TXT Flash chamber:
    Subject matter under subclass 394 wherein the heating device includes an
    enclosed compartment in which the evaporant is instantly vaporized upon
    injection therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclass 77.83 for additional
    chamber for generating steam.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 40 for flasher.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclass 3 for spray type evaporators.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclasses 84 for spraying of
    distilland into vaporization zone and subclass 90 for returning
    distillation product to a previous distillation zone.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclass 361 for flash
    vaporization.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 222+ for hair heaters.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 128+ for
    heating or cooling means for the system or system fluid.


CLS 392/400
TXT In-line connected closed tank (i.e.,  pressurized):
    Subject matter under subclass 394 wherein the liquid is contained in a
    vessel connected to a source of liquid supply, and from which the the vapor
    may be drawn off from an outlet or draw  off pipe, and in which pressures
    above  atmosphere may be maintained.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    325+,   for line connected boiler.

    449+,   for fluid heating container or tank.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclass 22 for closed evaporating
    chambers.


CLS 392/401
TXT With internal heating element:
    Subject matter under subclass 441 wherein the closed tank includes an
    electrical resistance heating element which is supported within the vessel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    451,    for line connected tank.

    497,    for details of immersion heater.


CLS 392/402
TXT In-line connected open tank or container (i.e.,  nonpressurized):Subject
    matter under subclass 394 wherein the liquid is contained in a vessel
    connected to a source of liquid supply, and from which the vapor may be
    drawn off from an outlet or draw off pipe, and in which pressures equal to
    atmosphere may be maintained.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    325+,   for line connected boiler.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 113 for air moisteners.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators subclasses 32+ for open pans.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 44 for
    humidity control.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclass 78 for air moistener.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 127+ for external
    supply or removal of heat; subclasses 141+ for heat producer; digest 15 for
    duct humidifier.


CLS 392/403
TXT Container with self-contained evaporant supply:
    Subject matter under subclass 394 wherein the liquid evaporant is bodily
    contained within the vaporizing device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333+,   for manually filled tank or container.

    444+,   for portable tank or container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    237,    Heating Systems, subclass 78 for air moisteners.


CLS 392/404
TXT Hand-held:
    Subject matter under subclass 403 wherein the container is to be held in
    the hand during use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclass 77.1 for moistening means.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 125+ for
    fumigators.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 222 for steamers.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclass 96
    for thermal applicators.


CLS 392/405
TXT With separate heating chamber:
    Subject matter under subclass 403 wherein the container is subdivided into
    two communicating chambers, the heating device being disposed in one
    chamber and the evaporant in the other chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    336+,   for separate electrode compartment.


CLS 392/406
TXT Removable:
    Subject matter under subclass 405 wherein the heating chamber may be
    readily attached to or detached from the container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    337,    for electrode compartment removable  from tank.


CLS 392/407
TXT Radiant heater:
    Subject matter under Class 219, subclass 200 wherein the heating device
    includes means which emits heat in the form of electromagnetic waves within
    the infrared range of the spectrum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    343,    for using stored heat for radiation.

    375+,   for convection space heater with radiation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 524+ for
    apparatus which may utilize radiant heat.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 620+ for means to apply electrical or
    radiant energy to work.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 301+ for brooders combined with
    incubators, and subclasses 318+ for electrical incubators utilizing radiant
    heating.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 91+ for radiation type and 569+ for
    solar heat collector.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 49 for radiant building panels and subclass
    133 for coated, roughened or polished surface.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 36+ for
    systems utilizing heating radiators.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 16+ for combined heat radiator and
    boiler and subclasses 70+ for heat radiators in general.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 493.1+ for infrared radiation generators
    not provided for elsewhere.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses for
    radiant type.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 521 for coating processes utilizing
    radiation as a heat source to polymerize an applied coating, subclass 545,
    for coating processes utilizing resistance heat in the pretreatment of a
    substrate or the post-treatment of a coated substrate; subclasses 592+ for
    coating processes employing resistance heat during the deposition of a
    coating on a substrate.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclass 96
    for thermal applicators which may utilize radiant energy.


CLS 392/408
TXT With filter or diffuser for radiant energy:
    Subject matter under subclass 407 wherein the radiant heater includes means
    for attenuating certain wavelengths while passing others with  relatively
    no change, or means for scattering or dispersing radiation within selected
    wavelengths.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 110+ for optical or
    special ray transmissive envelope.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 293 for selected wavelength modifier.


CLS 392/409
TXT Hand-held:
    Subject matter under subclass 407 wherein the radiant heater is to be held
    in the hand during use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 504 for hand-held.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses
    88+ for light applicators.


CLS 392/410
TXT With air or gas circulation:
    Subject matter under subclass 409 wherein the hand held radiant heater
    comprises means to provide a flow of air or gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    383,    for portable air blaster.

    476,    for hand-held discharge member.


CLS 392/411
TXT Lamp banks (i.e., array of plural lamps):
    Subject matter under subclass 407 wherein the radiant heater comprises a
    plurality of incandescent filaments each enclosed in a sealed, transparent
    envelope arranged in a line or in tiers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 405 for heat energy reflecting or
    directing means, and subclass 411 for infrared generating means.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 227+ for plural light sources.


CLS 392/412
TXT Adjustable lamps position:
    Subject matter under subclass 411 wherein the array of plural lamps
    includes means to allow at least a group of lamps to shift from one
    position to another with respect to a base or support structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclass 239 for relative adjustment means.


CLS 392/413
TXT Adjustable individual lamp position:
    Subject matter under subclass 412 wherein the group of lamps includes means
    to allow each lamp to shift with respect to base or support structure.


CLS 392/414
TXT Lamp banks form arch:
    Subject matter under subclass 411 wherein the lamp banks are arranged to
    form a curve or bow.


CLS 392/415
TXT Lamp banks movable relative to stationary work during use:
    Subject matter under subclass 411 wherein the lamp banks includes means
    permitting the lamp banks to be moved along a fixed track during use.


CLS 392/416
TXT With chamber:
    Subject matter under subclass 407 wherein the heating device is located in
    an enclosed cavity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 405 for heat energy reflecting or
    directing means and subclass 411 for infrared generating means.


CLS 392/417
TXT For heating moving strand, web, or sheet:
    Subject matter under subclass 407 wherein the radiant heater includes means
    for heating a strand, web or sheet like material during its transport.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 519 and
    611+ for sheets, webs or strands.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 388 for conveyor.


CLS 392/418
TXT With support for workpiece:
    Subject matter under subclass 407 wherein the radiant heater includes
    structural means to position a workpiece with respect to a base or
    structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 405 for heat energy reflecting or
    directing means; subclass 411 for infrared generating means; subclass 388
    for conveyor; and subclasses 458+ for support means for heating unit.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 33 for work-table lighting system.


CLS 392/419
TXT Focused radiant beam:
    Subject matter under subclass 407 wherein the radiant heater includes means
    for producing intense electromagnetic radiation in a converging pattern to
    a limited or  well-defined area of an object, e.g., point or line, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 683 and 684+ for concentrating
    reflector; subclasses 683 and 698+ for concentrating lens; and subclasses
    680+ for energy concentrator with support for material heated.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses
    88+ for transparent rods.


CLS 392/420
TXT Plural reflectors:
    Subject matter under subclass 419 including two or more opaque mirror-like
    means which redirect the incident radiation back to the medium from which
    it came.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 405 for heat energy reflecting or
    directing means and subclass 411 for infrared generating means.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    850+ for plural mirrors.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 297+ for plural reflecting surface and
    subclasses 346+ for plural separate reflectors or separate section.


CLS 392/421
TXT Elliptical or ellipsoidal reflector:
    Subject matter under subclass 419 wherein the concentrated beam is produced
    by a reflector assembly of elliptical or ellipsoidal shape.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 405 for heat energy reflecting or
    directing means and subclass 411 for infrared generating means.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    838+ for mirrors.


CLS 392/422
TXT With reflector:
    Subject matter under subclass 407 including opaque mirror-like means which
    redirects the electromagnetic radiation from a source into a flow of
    electromagnetic radiation in a parallel or diffuse pattern.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 133 for coated, roughened or polished
    surface.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 405 for electric ovens with heat energy
    reflecting or directing means; subclass 411 for infrared generating means;
    and 461 for housed electric heaters in general with heat energy reflecting
    or deflecting means.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 493.1+ for an invisible radiation source
    with a casing or a radiation modifying member.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 11 for a resistive element combined
    with means for reflecting heat onto the element.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 700+ for radio
    antennas and, particularly, subclasses 912+ for reflectors or directors.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, for light
    reflecting or directing means in general and, especially, subclasses 838+
    for optic mirrors or reflectors.

    362,    Illumination, for artificial light directing or reflecting means
    and, particularly, subclasses 296+ and 341+ for reflectors.


CLS 392/423
TXT Elongated reflector:
    Subject matter under subclass 422 wherein the reflector has a length
    greater than its width.


CLS 392/424
TXT Heating element in transparent tubular envelope:
    Subject matter under subclass 423 wherein the heating device includes a
    tube shape enclosure enclosing the heating element and is translucent to
    the radiation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses for
    transparent tubular envelope.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 234+ for gaseous or vacuum spacing
    between element and casing or housing.


CLS 392/425
TXT With exposed radiant heating element:
    Subject matter under subclass 423 in which the heating element lays open to
    the atmosphere.


CLS 392/426
TXT Bowl-shaped reflector:
    Subject matter under subclass 422 wherein the reflector's shape is defined
    by a concave surface having a central axis of rotation (e.g., hemispherical
    or parabolic reflector).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 405 for heat energy reflecting or
    directing means and subclass 411 for infrared generating means.


CLS 392/427
TXT Annular heating element concentric with reflector axis:
    Subject matter under subclass 426 wherein the heating element is ring
    shaped and centered about the central axis of the bowl-shaped reflector.


CLS 392/428
TXT Linear heating element aligned with reflector axis:
    Subject matter under subclass 426 wherein the heating element is extended
    in a line and aligned with the central axis of the bowl-shaped reflector.


CLS 392/429
TXT Coiled on core:
    Subject matter under subclass 428 wherein the electric resistance wire is
    wound on an elongated electrically insulated support member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 296+ for helical or wound
    resistance element.


CLS 392/430
TXT Wall mounted:
    Subject matter under subclass 422 wherein the radiant heater with reflector
    is readily mounted on a continuous side structure of a room or other
    enclosure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359,    for convection heater with heat exchange fluid.

    363,    for forced air type heater.

    370,    for convection space heater.

    381,    for concentrated heated air stream heater.

    392,    for vaporizer.

    436,    for radiant extended surface heater.


CLS 392/431
TXT Collapsible or foldable reflector:
    Subject matter under subclass 422 wherein the reflector comprises a
    plurality of reflector sections which may be brought into a compact form by
    bending and laying the sections together.


CLS 392/432
TXT Radiant extended surface type heater:
    Subject matter under subclass 407 wherein the radiant heater comprises a
    wide or enlarged surface for emitting radiation as a broad beam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 49 for radiant building panel; subclasses
    168+ for conduit within, or conforming to, panel or wall structure; and
    subclasses 172+ for side-by-side tubular structure or tube sections.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 213 for static structure.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 283+ for zigzag or sinuous
    resistance element; subclasses 306+ for base extending along resistance
    element; subclasses 315+ for mounting or supporting means; and  subclass
    321 for resistance element cores and frames.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 127-134 for having
    resistance encasement means.

    432,    Heating, subclass 31 for heating of or by wall or radiant surface.


CLS 392/433
TXT With exposed radiant heating element:
    Subject matter under subclass 432 wherein the heating element lays open to
    the atmosphere.


CLS 392/434
TXT On ceramic support structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 433 wherein the radiant heating element is
    supported by an electrically insulative refractory material.


CLS 392/435
TXT With heat radiating panel:
    Subject matter under subclass 432 wherein the radiant heater comprises an
    overall rectangular perimeter having length and width greatly exceeding its
    thickness.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 49 for radiant building panel; subclasses
    168+ for conduit within, or conforming to, panel or wall structure; and
    subclasses 172+ for side-by-side tubular structures or tube sections.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 528, 548 and 549 for flexible or
    resilient; subclass 543 for coating printed or deposited on core sheath or
    support.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 212 for tape or sheet, and
    subclasses 306-314 for base extending along resistance element.


CLS 392/436
TXT Wall or ceiling mounted:
    Subject matter under subclass 435 wherein the radiant heater panel is
    readily mounted on a continuous side structure of a room.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 53+ for related to wall, floor or ceiling
    structure of a chamber.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 213 for static structure.


CLS 392/437
TXT Plural panels:
    Subject matter under subclass 436 wherein the radiating panel structure
    includes at least two or more panels.


CLS 392/438
TXT Heating element formed as coating on radiating panel surface:Subject matter
    under subclass 435 wherein the the heating element is a layer of an
    electrical resistance material spread over a surface of the  radiating
    panel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 543 for coating printed or deposited on
    core sheath or support means.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 307- 309 for resistance element
    coated on base.


CLS 392/439
TXT Nonmetallic panel:
    Subject matter under subclass 438 wherein the heating element is coated on
    a nonmetallic panel.


CLS 392/440
TXT Multi-direction radiant heat output:
    Subject matter under subclass 407 wherein the heat generated by the radiant
    heater is simultaneously guided in two or more directions.


CLS 392/441
TXT Tank or container type liquid heater:
    Subject matter under Class 219, subclass 200 wherein the heating device
    includes a vessel for heating liquid therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    308,    for heating liquid by electricity combined with nonelectric heating
    means.

    322,    for reservoir or tank type of fluid-in-circuit heater.

    325,    for line connected boiler.

    333,    for manually filled tank or container.

    341,    for fluid heating with heat storage means.

    377+,   for heat exchange fluid.

    400+,   for in-line connected closed tank.

    402,    for in-line connected open tank.

    403+,   for container with self-contained evaporant supply.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclass 493 for pool type
    with heating means.


CLS 392/442
TXT Pour-in displacement discharge type tank:
    Subject matter under subclass 441 wherein the tank has an open inlet
    through which unheated liquid is poured into the tank to discharge through
    an open outlet a quantity of heated liquid equal to that poured in.


CLS 392/443
TXT Flexible container (e.g., water bottle, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 441 wherein the tank or container is made of
    easily deformable material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses  421+ for heating or cooling of waterbed mattress.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 204+ for body warmers.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 46 for flexible envelope or cover type.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 528+ for flexible or resilient heater
    unit housing and subclass 549 for flexible core.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 901 for hot water bags.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclass 114
    for hot water bags adapted for application to the human body.


CLS 392/444
TXT Portable container or tank:
    Subject matter under subclass 441 wherein the container or tank may be
    lifted or carried bodily from place-to-place by hand.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for various
    containers adapted for the heating or processing of foods which may be
    portable.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 229 for a fish enclosure with a heat
    exchanger and subclass 262 for an aquarium with a heat exchanger.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 344+ for water heaters.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 429+ for vessel and stand; subclasses
    438+ for vessel; and subclass 533 for portable heater unit with housing,
    casing or support means.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 146.1+ for heating or cooling means.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 128+ for
    heating or cooling means for the system or system fluid.


CLS 392/445
TXT Plural compartments:
    Subject matter under subclass 444 wherein the portable tank structure
    contains two or more interconnected compartments consisting of at least one
    heating compartment wherein the liquid to be heated is in heat exchange
    relationship to a heating device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322+,   for reservoir or tank.

    333+,   for manually filled tank or container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverage:  Apparatus, subclasses 279+ for infusers.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for compartmented tanks.

    220,    Receptacle, appropriate subclasses for compartmented tanks.


CLS 392/446
TXT With agitator:
    Subject matter under subclass 444 wherein the tank or liquid container is
    provided with means to stir, move or circulate the heated liquid in the
    tank to maintain a constant uniform temperature condition throughout the
    entire quantity of liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 229 for a fish enclosure with a heat
    exchanger and subclass 262 for an aquarium with a heat exchanger and
    aerator which may agitate.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 109.1 for agitating or stirring structure.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 144+ for heating or cooling.

    432,    Heating, subclass 151 for stirrer in externally heated tank.


CLS 392/447
TXT With internally positioned heating element:
    Subject matter under subclass 444 wherein the heating device for heating
    the liquid in the tank or container is placed in a portion of the tank
    or        container receiving the liquid to be  heated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333+,   for manually filled tank or container.

    403+,   for container with self-contained evaporant supply.

    497+,   for immersion heater details.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 344+ for water heaters.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 437 for  immerciable and subclass 523
    for housing, casing or support insertable into material or space to be
    heated.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 146.1 for heating or cooling means.


CLS 392/448
TXT Removably inserted through fill opening:
    Subject matter under subclass 447 wherein the heating element positioned
    internally of the container or tank may be readily placed into or removed
    from the tank through a hole through  which the quantity of liquid to be
    heated is poured in the container or tank.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 229 for a fish enclosure with a heat
    exchanger and subclass 262 for an aquarium with a heat exchanger.


CLS 392/449
TXT Line connected tank:
    Subject matter under subclass 441 wherein the tank or container includes an
    inlet connected to a pressurized source of liquid and an outlet for
    discharging heated liquid from the tank.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    325+,   for steam or vapor generator line connected boiler.

    341,    for fluid heating by heat storage means.

    400+,   for line connected closed tank.

    402,    for line connected open tank.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 279+ for infusers.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 13.1+ for stand boiler.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 344+ for water heaters.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for line connected tank.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 415+ for multilayer barrier structure, and
    subclasses 459 for hot water boiler type.


CLS 392/450
TXT Plural serially connected compartments:
    Subject matter under subclass 449 wherein the tank or container structure
    contains two or more serially interconnected compartments consisting of at
    least one heating compartment wherein the liquid to be heated is in heat
    exchange relationship to the heating device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322+,   for reservoir or tank.

    325+,   for line connected boiler.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 500+ for compartmented receptacles.


CLS 392/451
TXT With immersion heating element:
    Subject matter under subclass 449 wherein the heating device includes an
    electrical resistance heating element which is supported within the liquid
    to be heated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322+,   for reservoir or tank.

    324+,   for steam or vapor generator.

    401,    for line connected closed tank.

    497,    for details of immersion heater.


CLS 392/452
TXT With baffle or guard:
    Subject matter under subclass 451 wherein the immersion heater includes a
    plate or wall for directing the liquid in a desired flow pattern in the
    tank.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 344+ for water heaters and subclass
    362 for stand boiler circulation.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for baffle or guard.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 523 for housing, casing or support
    insertable into material or space to be heated.


CLS 392/453
TXT Removably insertable into tubular receptacle in tank:
    Subject matter under subclass 451 wherein the heating device may be placed
    into or removed from a tube shaped water-tight receiver extending into the
    tank.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    398,    for internal heating element for continuous flow line connected
    heater.

    401,    for internal heating element for in-line connected closed tank.

    487+,   for jacket for heating element.

    497,    for immersion heater details.

    503,    for particular sheath or jacket composition of immersion heater.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 523 for immersion type and subclass 534
    for rigid tubular housing, casing or support.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 232+ for casing or housing readily
    openable or separable from element.


CLS 392/454
TXT Plural heating zones:
    Subject matter under subclass 451 wherein the heating device is located in
    at least two or more separate areas of the tank to be heated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 344+ for water heaters.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 1 for
    burner control and for multistage controls.


CLS 392/455
TXT With heating element mounting arrangements:
    Subject matter under subclass 451 including details of mounting
    arrangements of the heating element in the tank.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401,    for internal heating element.

    501,    for particular mounting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 437 for immersible heater; subclass 523
    for housing, casing or support insertable into material or space to be
    heated; subclass 526 for means for attaching housing or casing to an
    external device; and  subclass 536 for heating unit mounting or attaching
    means.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 228 for casing extending through
    plate; subclass 229 for probe type; and subclasses 315+ for mountings or
    supporting means.


CLS 392/456
TXT With heat exchange fluid:
    Subject matter under subclass 451 wherein the tank includes a fluid which
    is heated by the heating element for subsequent transmission of the heat to
     the liquid to be heated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302,    for heat exchange fluid used in borehole.

    357,    for convection space heater using heat exchange fluid.

    496,    for continuous fluid heater using heat exchange fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 376+ for fluid heated vessels.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 104.11 for intermediate fluent heat
    exchange material receiving and discharging heat.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 139+ for
    spaced jacket or compartment for heating fluid.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 67+ for vaporization, or expansion,
    refrigeration or heat or energy exchange.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 231 for incased, embedded, or housed
    resistors in liquid.


CLS 392/457
TXT With protecting means against galvanic corrosion:
    Subject matter under subclass 451 wherein the heating device in-line
    connected tank includes means to prevent or retard electrochemical
    corrosion produced when one metal is in electrical contact with another
    more noble metal, both being in the same corroding medium or electrolyte,
    with a current between them.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 134.1 for protector or protective agent.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 196+ for object
    protection.

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 459 for hot water boiler type.


CLS 392/458
TXT With external heater:
    Subject matter subclass 449 wherein the heating device is located outside
    of the tank and in heat exchange relation with the liquid to be heated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400,    for in line connected closed tank.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 73 for a temperature-controlled watering
    device, subclass 229 for a fish enclosure with a heat exchanger and
    subclass 262 for an aquarium with a heat exchanger.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 424 for  protecting means for heating
    unit or switch; subclass 436 for heating unit attaching or support means;
    subclasses 438+ for vessel combined with container; and subclass 535 for
    specially formed or adapted to fit material to be heated.

    432,    Heating, subclass 225 for heat applicator having structure for
    mounting it on or around object to be heated.


CLS 392/459
TXT Clamped or secured to tank wall:
    Subject matter under subclass 458 including a means to fasten or anchor the
    heating element to the tank wall.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 536 for heating unit mounting or
    attaching means and subclass 542 for resistive-element attaching, securing
    or electrical insulation means.


CLS 392/460
TXT Producing radiation:
    Subject matter under subclass 458 wherein the external heater emits heat in
    the form of electromagnetic waves within the infrared range of spectrum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    355,    for heated by radiant source.

    391,    for vaporization by radiant heat source.

    407,    for electric radiant heater in general.

    483,    for fluid heater producing radiation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 569+ for solar heat collector.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 133 for coated, roughened or polished
    surface.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 493.1+ for infrared radiation generators
    not provided for elsewhere.

    432,    Heating, subclass 31 for heating of or by wall or radiant surface.


CLS 392/461
TXT With externally mounted circulation-type heater:
    Subject matter under subclass 458 wherein the liquid of the tank is heated
    as it flows through an external flow heater having an inlet for receiving
    cold liquid from the tank and an outlet for returning heated liquid to the
    tank.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322,    for reservoir or tank.

    377,    for heat exchange fluid.

    465+,   for continuous flow type fluid heater.

    471,    for combined liquid flow heater and pump unit.

    479+,   for externally heated line connected section.

    485+,   for heated line section with heating element internal of flow path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 344+ for water heaters and subclass
    362 for stand boiler circulation.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 108 for recirculation and subclass 132 for
    heating or cooling means in open communication with reservoir.


CLS 392/462
TXT Laterally disposed (i.e., side-arm type):
    Subject matter under subclass 461 wherein the heater is positioned and
    connected to a side of the tank.


CLS 392/463
TXT With timer controlled energization:
    Subject matter under subclass 449 wherein the line connected tank includes
    means for automatically or manually connecting a source of current or power
    at regular predetermined times of the day or for predetermined intervals of
    time.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 327 for automatic control
    or heating means utilizing timers.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 262 and 266+ for time or program
    actuators for such systems.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 492+ for automatic power supply,
    current regulation or current control devices for heaters in general under
    the class definition and utilizing cycling or timing means.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 46 for
    control devices with timing element.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 2+ for automatic control apparatus
    which may comprise timing means.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, appropriate
    subclasses for regulating times.


CLS 392/464
TXT Off-peak power:
    Subject matter under subclass 463 wherein the timer permits energization of
    the heater at the time of day during which power usage is at a minimum,
    i.e., off-peak.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    339+,   for heat storage means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for electrical transmission and interconnection switching
    systems.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 365+ for miscellaneous gating circuits.


CLS 392/465
TXT Continuous flow type fluid heater:
    Subject matter under Class 219, subclass 200 wherein the heating device
    comprises a flow path for the uninterrupted flow of fluid, either a liquid
    or gas, to be heated; an inlet connected to a pressurized source of fluid;
    and an electric resistance heating element arranged in the fluid flow path
    for heating the fluid while it uninterruptedly flows through the path.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter is also known as "in-line fluid
    heaters", "through flow fluid heaters", and "demand type fluid heaters".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    314+,   for fluid-in-circuit type heater.

    341,    for fluid heating by storage means.

    357,    for fluid heat absorber.

    396+,   for continuous flow line connected heater for vaporizer.

    461,    for externally mounted circulation type heater.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclass 598 for shower with
    heating means.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 279 for beverage
    preparing apparatus which may include a continuous flow water heater.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, appropriate subclasses for liquid
    heaters of the continuous flow type.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 142.5 and 545-558 for
    continuous flow heater associated with internal-combustion engine.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 344 for continuous flow heater
    associated with stoves and furnaces.

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 203.26+ for means for heating treating agent,
    respiratory gas, or mixture thereof and subclasses 204.17+ for electrically
    heated means producing water vapor.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 334+ for systems with heating or
    cooling.


    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 32+ for thawing and freezing
    protection.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for continuous fluid heater.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 175+ for heater or
    heat exchanger.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 600+ for inductive heating, note
    subclass 628 for heat exchange by fluid or liquid; and subclasses 678+ for
    microwave heating, note subclass 687 for a fluid heater; and subclass 208
    for radiator or cooling system.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 146.1+ for heating or cooling means.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 13 for heating
    or cooling and subclasses 128+ for the system fluid with heating or cooling.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 219+ for heated line feeds steam to fuel
    basin area.

    D23,    Environmental Heating and Cooling; Fluid Handling and Sanitary
    Equipment, subclasses 314+ for heating or cooling.


CLS 392/466
TXT Method:
    Subject matter under subclass 465 including processes for heating a
    continuous flow of fluids (e.g., air or water, etc.) by conversion of
    electrical energy to heat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 283+ for
    processes of treating hair on head and, particularly, subclasses 443+ for
    processes of gas or vapor contact with material treated.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 714 for process of heating by using
    solar heat.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 1+ for heat exchange processes which may
    include heating.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 272.1+ for processes of injecting heat into wells.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 600+ for processes of
    liquid purification or separation.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 1+ for dispensing processes which may
    include heating.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclass 12 for process of automatic control of
    heating systems.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 1-13 for
    processes of fluid sprinkling, spraying and diffusing.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 11 for process of combustion or burner by
    feeding heat.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 1-31 for heating processes and, particularly,
    subclasses 29 and 30 for fluid heating processes.


CLS 392/467
TXT With hot plate:
    Subject matter under subclass 465 wherein the continuous fluid heater
    includes means for supporting a removable vessel to be heated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 275-323 for beverage
    heaters utilizing a continuous flow heater which may include a hotplate.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 4+ for cooking and heating stove.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 429+ and 443+ for electrically heated
    hotplate.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 146.1 for heating or cooling means.


CLS 392/468
TXT Pipeline tracing:
    Subject matter under subclass 465 wherein the heating device comprises the
    entire length of a pipeline carrying the flow of fluid which is  heated by
    a linearly extending electrical resistance heater coextensive with the
    exterior of the pipeline length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    472,    for flexible fluid heater.

    479+,   for heated line section with heating elements external of flow
    path, particularly 480-482 for a pipe or tube forming flow path.

    485+,   for heated line section with heating element internal of flow path.

    486,    for plural pipes or tubes form flow path.

    488+,   for pipe or tube forms flow path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 301+ for hydrant with freeze protection
    which may include a heater and  subclasses 334+ for systems with heating
    and cooling.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 32+ for thawing and freezing
    protection.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 522 for housing, casing, or support
    performing plural diverse functions and subclass 535 for a pipe to be
    heated.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 146.1+ for a device with heating or cooling
    means.


CLS 392/469
TXT Skin-effect heater type (e.g., S.E.C.T., etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 468 wherein the resistance heating element of
    the pipeline length is accomplished by the flow of alternating current
    through the walls of a ferromagnetic  pipe, and the current flow is
    confined to the interior of the ferromagnetic  pipe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    478,    for fluid conveying tube or pipe comprising resistive heating
    element.

    480+,   for pipe or tube forms flow path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 33 for electric thawing and
    freezing protection.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, appropriate subclasses for
    electrical conductors or conduits.


CLS 392/470
TXT Disposable cartridge, tube or bag forms heated flow path (e.g., blood bag,
    etc.):Subject matter under subclass 465 wherein the flow path comprises a
    hollow cylinder, sack, case or shell which can be readily removed and
    replaced after use.

    (1)     Note.  The disposable cartridge, tube or bag may be a blood bag.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 46 for flexible envelope or cover type.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 146.1+ for heating or cooling means.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 113 and 114 for means for heating body treating
    material or device and subclasses 403+ for containers for body treating
    materials.


CLS 392/471
TXT Combined liquid flow heater and pump unit:
    Subject matter under subclass 465 wherein the fluid flow heater includes a
    hydraulic machine for creating a continuous flow of liquid combined with
    the fluid heating means in a common enclosure.

    (1)     Note.  The pump may be a mechanical pump, vapor pump, ejector pump,
    etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 279+ for infusers.

    165,    Heating Exchange, subclass 108 for  recirculation and subclasses
    120+ for impeller or conveyor moving exchange material.

    166,    Wells, subclass 62 for eduction pump or plunger in well.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 146.1+ for heating or cooling means.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 128+ for
    heating or cooling means for these systems or system fluid.

    417,    Pumps, subclass 208 for pumps by heating of pumped fluid.


CLS 392/472
TXT Flexible (e.g., hose, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 465 wherein the flow path is formed by a pipe
    or passage made of a deformable material which is capable of being bent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 32+ for thawing and freezing
    protection and subclasses 118+ for flexible pipes.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 47 for combined
    fluid conduit and electrical conductor.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 547 for particular material to be heated.


CLS 392/473
TXT Fluid heater carried on discharge member:
    Subject matter under subclass 465 wherein the heat is supported on a member
    defining a passage or vent for escaping or discharging a fluid from a
    supply line or a reservoir.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    379+,   for concentrated air stream.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 334+ for systems with heating or cooling.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 214 for  vending, dispensing or display
    devices.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 146.1+ for heating or cooling means.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 128+ for
    means for heating or cooling the system or fluid.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 1+ for means to
    impart heat to material.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 547+ for means to heat or cool.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 113 and 114 for means for electrically cooling
    or heating body.


CLS 392/474
TXT With flow control valve (e.g., faucet, etc.):
    Subject matter under 473 wherein the discharge member is provided with a
    valve operable to control the rate of fluid flow through the discharge
    member.


CLS 392/475
TXT Valve turns heating element on and off:
    Subject matter under subclass 474 wherein the valve is arranged to actuate
    an electrical control means to turn the heating element on and off in
    synchronism with the opening and closing of the valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.80+ for
    fluid controlling valve.


CLS 392/476
TXT Hand-held discharge member:
    Subject matter under subclass 473 wherein the discharge member is to be
    held in the hand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    383+,   for portable heater for concentrated heated air stream.

    404,    for hand-held container with self-contained evaporant supply.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 214 for vending, dispensing or display
    device and subclass 230 for tip cooling, clamping or lighting means.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 146.1 for heating or cooling means.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses
    104+ for thermal applicators with fluid supply and subclass 113 for
    internal applicator.


CLS 392/477
TXT With storage container for fluid to  be heated:
    Subject matter under subclass 476 wherein the hand-held discharge member is
    provided with a container or reservoir for the fluid to be heated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 52+ for metal heat applicator.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 128+ for
    heating or cooling means for the system or system fluid and subclasses 133+
    for spray terminal carrying member carriers heater.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 1+ for means to
    impart heat to material.


CLS 392/478
TXT Fluid conveying tube or pipe comprising resistive heating element:Subject
    matter under subclass 465 wherein the flow path through the fluid heater is
    formed by a conduit made of an electrically resistive material having at
    least two points thereon connected to a source of electricity whereby the
    conduit itself comprises the resistive heating means for heating the fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 341 for heating or cooling of the system
    by electric heating element.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 33 for thawing and freeze
    protection by electricity.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 547 for particular material to be heated.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 146.1 for heating or cooling means.


CLS 392/479
TXT Externally heated line connected section:
    Subject matter under subclass 465 wherein the fluid heating device
    comprises means defining a closed flow path having an inlet and an outlet,
    an electric resistance heating element  externally of the flow path
    arranged to heat the fluid flowing therethrough, and means at the inlet and
    outlet of the flow path for coupling the heating device into a fluid flow
    line as a part thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The heating element may be secured or coupled in any heat
    conductive manner to the external surface of the heated line section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    396,    for in continuous flow line connected vaporizer.

    473,    for fluid heater carried on discharge member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 344+ for water heaters.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 340+ for circulation fluid in heat
    exchange  relationship.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 32+ for thawing and freeze
    protection.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 535 for a pipe to be heated.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 146.1+ for molten metal dispensing with
    heating.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 208 for electrically heated section.


CLS 392/480
TXT Pipe or tube forms flow path:
    Subject matter under subclass 479 wherein the flow path for the fluid to be
    heated comprises a fluid conveying elongated hollow cylinder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304,    for heating element surrounding delivery pipe.

    320+,   for fluid-in-circuit type heater.

    397+,   for continuous flow line connected heater for vaporizer.

    461,    for externally mounted circulation type heater.

    468+,   for pipeline tracing.

    470,    for disposable cartridge, tube or bag forms heated flow path.

    472,    for hose type heater.

    482,    for plural pipes or tubes forms flow path.

    486+,   for heated line section with heating element internal of flow path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 279+ for infusers.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 146.1+ for heating or cooling means.


CLS 392/481
TXT Coiled:
    Subject matter under subclass 480 wherein the tube or pipe is in the form
    of a spiral or helix.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    320,    for tube or pipe forms flow path.

    396+,   for continuous flow line connected vaporizer.

    461,    for externally mounted circulation type heater.

    468+,   for pipeline tracing.

    472,    for flexible hose.

    480+,   for pipe or tube forms flow path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 279+ for infusers.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 244-251 for oil or loop
    tube.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 344+ for water heaters.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 535 for specially formed or adapted to
    fit material to be heated.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 146.1+ for heating or cooling means.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 128+ for
    heating or cooling means for system or system fluid.


CLS 392/482
TXT Plural pipes or tubes form flow path:
    Subject matter under subclass 479 wherein the flow path for the fluid to be
    heated comprises at least two or more fluid conveying hollow cylinders.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    320+,   for tube or pipe forms flow path in fluid-in-circuit heater.

    461,    for externally mounted circulation type heater.

    468+,   for pipeline tracing.

    472,    for flexible hose.

    478,    for fluid conveying tube or pipe comprising resistive heating
    element.


CLS 392/483
TXT Heating element producing radiation:
    Subject matter under subclass 479 wherein the the external heater has an
    electrical resistance heating element which emits heat in the form of
    electromagnetic waves within the infrared range of spectrum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    355,    for intermediate heat absorber

    391,    for vaporizer using radiant heat source.

    407+,   for radiant heater.

    460,    for external heater producing radiation.

    468,    for pipeline tracing.

    470,    for disposable cartridge, tube or bag forming flow path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 344+ for water heaters and
    subclasses 569+ for solar heat collector.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 133 for coated, roughened or polished
    surface.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 600+ for inductive heating, note
    subclass 628 for heat exchange by fluid or liquid, and subclasses 678+ for
    microwave heating, note subclass 687 for a fluid heater.


CLS 392/484
TXT Block forms flow path:
    Subject matter under subclass 479 wherein the flow path is formed in a
    solid mass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    467,    for hot plate.

    494,    for heated line section with heating element internal of flow path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 279+ for infusers.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 128+ for
    heating or cooling means for the system or system fluid.


CLS 392/485
TXT Heated line section with heating element internal of flow path:Subject
    matter under subclass 465 wherein the fluid heating device comprises means
    defining a closed flow path having an inlet and an outlet, an electrical
    resistance heating element disposed in the flow path and arranged to heat
    the fluid flowing therethrough, and means at the inlet and outlet of the
    flow path for coupling the heating device into a fluid flow line as part
    thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301+,   for borehole type.

    320+,   for tube or pipe forming flow path.

    341+,   for fluid heating.

    396,    for in continuous flow line connected vaporizer.

    461,    for externally mounted circulation type heater.

    468,    for pipeline tracing.

    473,    for fluid heater carried on discharge member.

    497,    for immersion heater details.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 340+ for circulation fluid in heat
    exchange relationship and subclass 185 for gas collecting float.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 32+ for thawing and freeze
    protection.


CLS 392/486
TXT Plural pipes or tubes form flow path:
    Subject matter under subclass 465 wherein the flow path for the fluid to be
    heated comprises two or more fluid conveying hollow cylinders.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    314+,   for continuous flow of fluid being heated.

    468+,   for pipeline tracing.

    472,    for flexible hose.

    478,    for fluid conveying tube or pipe comprising resistive heating
    element.

    482,    for plural pipes or tubes forming flow path.


CLS 392/487
TXT With jacket for heating element:
    Subject matter under subclass 485 wherein the heating element is enclosed
    by an outer protective covering.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    489,    for single pipe or tube forming flow path.

    503,    for particular sheath or jacket composition of immersion heater.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 177+ for tubular structure.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 437 for immersible heating unit
    attaching or support means; subclass 520 for heater-unit housing, casing or
    support means; subclass 523 for housing, casing or support insertable into
    material or space to be heated; subclass 534 for rigid tubular housing,
    casing or   support; subclass 544 for element imbedded within or completely
    surrounded by core, sheath or support means; and subclass 548 for
    particular construction or material.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 226+ for incased, embedded, or
    housed.


CLS 392/488
TXT Pipe or tube forms flow path:
    Subject matter under subclass 485 wherein the flow path for the fluid to be
    heated comprises a fluid conveying elongated hollow cylinder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    308,    for heating fluid with non-electric heating means.

    397,    for pipe or tube forming flow path.

    470+,   for disposable cartridge, tube or bag forming heated flow path.

    472,    for flexible hose.

    478,    for fluid conveying tube or pipe comprising resistive element.

    480+,   for pipe or tube forming flow path for continuous fluid heater.

    482,    for plural pipes or tubes forming flow path.


CLS 392/489
TXT With jacket for heating element:
    Subject matter under subclass 488 wherein the heating element is enclosed
    by an outer protective covering.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    487,    for plural pipe or tube forming flow path.

    503,    for particular sheath or jacket composition of immersion heater.


CLS 392/490
TXT Plural heated line sections (e.g., series or parallel, etc.):Subject matter
    under subclass 485 including two or more separate heated line sections in
    series or parallel arrangement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    486,    for plural pipes or tubes forming flow path.


CLS 392/491
TXT With baffle-defined flow path:
    Subject matter under subclass 485 wherein the flow path is provided with a
    member or members in the flow path for guiding and directing the flow with
    respect to the inlet or outlet thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    368+,   for portable forced air type heater with baffle.

    374,    for portable convection space heater with baffle.

    379+,   for concentrated heated air stream heater.


CLS 392/492
TXT Producing counterflow circulation:
    Subject matter under subclass 491 wherein the baffle is arranged to reverse
    the direction of fluid flow flowing through the flow path at least once
    between the inlet and the outlet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    351,    floor furnace type heater.

    369,    for counterflow of convection space heater.


CLS 392/493
TXT Heating element integral with baffle:
    Subject matter under subclass 492 wherein the baffle includes the heating
    element as a unitary part of the baffle to define flow path and heat up the
    fluid.


CLS 392/494
TXT Block forms flow path:
    Subject matter under subclass 485 wherein the flow path is formed in a
    solid mass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    467,    for hot plate.

    484,    for externally heated line connected section.


CLS 392/495
TXT Plural different fluids simultaneously heated:
    Subject matter under subclass 465 wherein the heating device includes
    separate distinct flow paths for  simultaneously heating at least two or
    more different fluids.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 210+ for heated section supplied by separate
    diverse feeds.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 113+ for means for cooling a heating body,
    treating or collected material or device.


CLS 392/496
TXT With heat exchange fluid:
    Subject matter under subclass 465 wherein the heating device includes a
    fluid which is heated by the heating element for subsequent transmission to
    the flow path for heating up the  continuous flow of fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302,    for borehole type.

    344,    for convection space heating in heat storage.

    357+,   for fluid heat absorber.

    377,    for convection combined with radiation.

    456,    for heat exchange fluid line connected heated storage tank.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 375 for water heating vessels with
    heat accumulator means.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 104.11+ for intermediate fluent heat
    exchange material receiving and discharging heat.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 139 for spaced
    jacket or compartment for heating fluid.

    252,    Composition, subclasses 67+ for   vaporization, or expansion,
    refrigeration or heat or energy exchange.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 231 for electrical resistors in
    liquid.


CLS 392/497
TXT Immersion heater details:
    Subject matter under Class 219, subclass 200 including details of an
    electrical resistance heating element which is supported within liquid to
    be heated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301+,   for boreholoe type.

    357+,   for fluid heat absorber.

    377+,   for heat exchange fluid.

    398,    for internal heating element.

    401,    for line connected closed tank.

    447+,   for internally positioned heating element.

    451+,   for immersion heating element.

    471,    for liquid heater with pump unit.

    473+,   for fluid heater carried on discharge member.

    485+,   for heated line section with heating element internal of flow path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 279+ for infusers and
    subclasses 401+ for heat distributor, baffle or enclosure.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 73 for a temperature-controlled watering
    device, subclass 229 for a fish enclosure with a heat exchanger and
    subclass 262 for an aquarium with a heat exchanger.


CLS 392/498
TXT With thermostatic control means:
    Subject matter under subclass 497 wherein the immersion heater includes an
    electrical control means for controlling the temperature of the  liquid to
    be heated between predetermined upper and lower limits or at or above
    predetermined lower limit

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 73 for watering troughs with liquid
    temperature control means.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 437 for  immersible heating unit;
    subclasses 510+ for thermally responsive means; and subclass 523 for
    housing, casing or support insertable into material or space to be heated.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, appropriate subclass
    for automatic temperature control systems.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclasses 298+ for thermally actuated switches.


CLS 392/499
TXT Buoyant in liquid:
    Subject matter under subclass 497 wherein the heater includes means capable
    of keeping the heater afloat in the liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 73 for   temperature controlling water
    devices.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 366-368 for submerged water heaters.


CLS 392/500
TXT With plural heating elements:
    Subject matter under subclass 497 wherein the heater includes two or  more
    immersed heating elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 476+ for plural separate heating
    devices; subclass 523 for housing, casing or support insertable into
    material or space to be heated; subclass 537 for heating units combined
    with single casing, housing or support; and subclass 539 for heating unit
    structure comprising plural separate and distinct resistive elements.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 260+ for plural resistors and
    subclasses 319+ for plural resistors extending between supports.


CLS 392/501
TXT With particular mounting means:
    Subject matter under subclass 497 wherein the heater includes means for
    rigidly attaching the heater to a liquid container or tank.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electrical Heating, subclass 526 for means for attaching housing or
    casing to an external device; subclasses 536+ for heater unit attachment
    means for heater  housings in general; and subclasses 542+ for significant
    heating unit structure adapted for use with the heating device under the
    class definition and including significant resistive element attaching,
    securing, or insulation means.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 228+ for casing extending through
    plate; and subclasses 315+ for resistance devices combined with mounting or
    supporting means.


CLS 392/502
TXT Having positive temperature coefficient:
    Subject matter under subclass 497 wherein the resistance heating element of
    the immersion heater increases its resistance as the temperature increases.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 504+ for variable resistance means and
     subclasses 552+ for heating element structure.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 22+ for thermistor type and
    subclasses 25+ for ambient temperature.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 183+ for current
    modifying sensor and, particularly, subclass 185 for detail of resistive
    sensor.


CLS 392/503
TXT Particular sheath or jacket composition:
    Subject matter under subclass 497 wherein the heater includes parts or
    elements to form an outer, protective covering applied over the heating
    element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 177+ for tubular structure.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 437 for immersible heating unit
    attaching or support means; subclasses 520+ for heat-unit housing, casing
    or support means; subclass 534 for  rigid tubular housing, casing or
    support; subclass 544 for element embedded within or completely surrounded
    by core, sheath or support means; and subclass 548 for  particular
    construction or material of core, sheath or support.


CLS 395/
TTL INFORMATION PROCESSING  SYSTEM ORGANIZATION

CLS 395/
TXT

    I.      GLOSSARY

    The terms below have been defined for purposes of classification in this
    class and are shown in underlined type when used in the class and subclass
    definitions. When these terms are not underlined in the definitions, the
    meaning is not restricted to the glossary definitions below.

    ACCESS

    To obtain entry to or locate, read into memory, and prepare for some
    operation (e.g., an operation regarding disks, files, or records; a
    procedure for network entry).

    APPLICATION PROGRAM

    A computer program design to perform a certain type of work, such as an
    application to manipulate text, numbers, graphics, or a combination of
    these elements.  An application program differs from an operating system
    (which runs a computer), a utility program (which performs maintenance or
    general-purpose chores), and a language (with which computer programs are
    created).

    BUS

    A conductor used for transferring data, signals, or power.

    COMPUTER

    A machine that inputs data, processes data, stores data, and outputs data.


    DATA

    Representation of information in a coded manner suitable for communication,
    interpretation, or processing.

    Address data - Data that represent or identify a source or destination.

    Instruction data - Data that represent an operation and identify its
    operands, if any.

    Status data - Data that represent conditions of data, digital data
    processing systems, computers, peripherals, memory, etc.

    User data - Data other than address data, instruction data, or status data.

    DATA PROCESSING

    See PROCESSING, below.

    DATA TRANSFER

    The moving of data from one location to another, or the passing of program
    control from one portion of a program to another.

    DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING SYSTEM

    An arrangement of processor(s) in combination with either memory or
    peripherals, or both, performing data processing.

    END EFFECTOR

    A terminal on a robot arm that carries a hand, welding gun, painting
    nozzle, or other tool.

    ENTITY

    An item that can be treated as a unit and, often, as a member of a
    particular category or type.

    ENVIRONMENT

    A set of resources made available to the user of a system which defines
    specifications such as a  command path (where to look for files), a system
    prompt and, sometimes, the location of resources or working files.

    ERROR

    Manifestation of a fault as an undesired event that occurs when actual
    behavior deviates from the behavior that is required by initial
    specifications.

    FAILURE

    Manifestation of an error as a nonperformance of an expected system service
    as required by the initial specifications.

    FAULT

    A flaw in a functional unit (hardware or software).

    INFORMATION

    Meaning that a human being assigns to data by means of the conventions
    applied to that data.

    INTERFACE

    A connection between two elements so that they can work with one another

    MEMORY

    A functional unit to which data can be stored and from which data can be
    retrieved.

    MULTITASKING

    A mode of operation in which a computer works on more than one task at a
    time.

    NETWORK

    A group of computers and associated devices that are connected by
    communications facilities which exists to provide users of the computers
    with the wherewithal for communicating and transferring data
    electronically.  Some types of communication are simple user-to-user
    messages; others (viz., distributed processing), can involve several
    computers sharing  workloads or cooperating to perform a task.

    OBJECT

    A variable comprising routines and data that is treated as a discrete
    entity.

    OPERATING SYSTEM

    Software responsible for controlling the allocation and usage of hardware
    resources such as memory, central processing unit- (CPU-) time, disk space,
    and peripherals.  The operating system is the foundation on which
    applications programs (e.g.; word processing, spreadsheets) are built.

    PERIPHERAL

    A functional unit that transmits data to or receives data from a computer
    to which it is coupled.

    PROCESS

    A coherent sequence of steps undertaken by a program to manipulate data
    such as transferring data internally or externally, handling an interrupt,
    or evaluating a function.

    PROCESSING

    Methods or apparatus performing systematic operations upon data or
    information exemplified by functions such as data or information
    transferring, merging, sorting, and computing (i.e., arithmetic operations
    or logical operations).

    (1)     Note. In this class, the glossary term data is used to modify
    processing in the term data processing; whereas the term digital data
    processing system refers to a machine performing data processing.

    (2)     Note. In an effort to avoid redundant constructions, in this class,
    where appropriate, the term address data processing is used in place of
    address data data processing.

    PROCESSOR

    A functional unit that interprets and executes instruction data.

    PROTOCOL

    A set of rules or processes for enabling computers to exchange data with as
    little error as possible.

    RECOVERY

    Responding to a fault in a system by either returning a system to a
    previous level of correct operation, achieving a degraded level of correct
    operation, or safely shutting down the system.

    RESOURCE

    Any part of computer or a network, such as a disk drive, printer, or
    memory, that can be allotted to a program or process while it is running.
    In programming, a resource can be used by more than one program or in more
    than one place in a program; for example, dialog boxes, bit maps, and fonts
    are resources in many windowing programs.

    ROBOT

    A powered arm structure having or capable of having an end effector.

    ROUTING

    Receiving transmitted messages within a network and forwarding them to
    their correct destinations over a available route selected according to a
    predetermined criteria.

    SECURITY

    Extent of protection for system hardware, software, or data from
    maliciously caused destruction, unauthorized modification, or unauthorized
    disclosure.

    SERVER

    A computer running administrative software that controls access to all or
    part of a network and its resources (e.g., disk drives, printers). A
    computer acting as a server allocates resources to  computers acting as
    workstations on the network.

    SYNCHRONIZATION

    Matching of timing between separate computers or among the components of a
    system so that all are coordinated.

    TASK

    A standalone application or a subprogram that is run as an independent
    entity.

    II.     GENERAL STATEMENT OF THE CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    A.      This is the generic class for electrical computers and digital data
    processing systems and corresponding data processing methods including
    methods and apparatus for controlling operations of computers and digital
    data processing systems.

    B.      This class also includes certain fields of information processing.
    Examples include artificial intelligence, business data processing, word
    and text processing and machine translation, display processing and
    animation, speech signal processing, and simulation. In practical terms
    these fields of information processing relate to applications of computers
    operating on data and information taking place within the boundaries of a
    computer system or digital data processing system.

    C.      This class also provides for digital data processing systems or
    methods for data processing for (a) static presentation (i.e., hard copy)
    or (b) display, wherein the processing of data for display includes the
    creation or manipulation of graphic objects (e.g., artificial images) or
    text by a digital data processing system prior to use by or within a
    specific display system.

    D.      This class also provides for audio signal compression or
    decompression based on bandwidth or time.

    E.      This class does not provide for methods and apparatus for moving or
    processing specified    information except for (a) artificial intelligence
    as noted in section IIB above, (b) audio signal compression or
    decompression as noted in section IID above, and (c) the processing of data
    for static presentation (hard copy) or display as noted in section IIC
    above.  For methods and apparatus for processing other types of specified
    information, see the SEARCH CLASS notes, below.

    III.    RELATIONSHIP WITH OTHER CLASSES

    A.      Class 364, Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems,
    Related Systems and Functions in General

    (1)     Except for those art areas dealing with selected information as
    noted in sections IIB, IIC, and IID above, this class (395) is limited to
    digital data processing systems and functions which are concerned with the
    movement of nonspecified data and the processing thereof by digital data
    processing systems. Systems concerned with movement or processing of other
    specific types of information and digital signals, per se, are classified
    elsewhere. See the SEARCH CLASS notes  below.

    (2)     Systems directed to a specific end use of information, for example,
    sensor data processed by a computer means for control purposes in systems
    classified external to this class, are classified either (a) in the
    appropriate external device class when provided for there, or (b) in Class
    364. See the class definition for Class 364, sections IIB and IIC. In Class
    364, subclass 130, the (5) Note reads: "Where there is nominal claim
    recitation of the device or apparatus and nominal data processor or
    computer structure claimed, the control system is classifiable herein only
    when there is no class providing for the device or apparatus." And in Class
    364, subclass 400, the (1) Note reads: "For classification herein, there
    must be significant claim recitation of the data processing system or
    calculating computer and only nominal claim recitation of the external art
    environment. Where significant structure of the external device is recited
    by the claims, classification is in the appropriate device class.". See
    also the SEARCH CLASS notes in Class 364 and the SEARCH CLASS notes below.

    (3)     Analog, digital, and hybrid systems for performing arithmetical
    operations, per se (e.g., multiplying, dividing, transforming,
    trigonometric function evaluation, convolution, etc.), digital signal
    processing, per se (e.g., filtering, function generation, random number
    generation, etc.), and calculators, per se, except as noted herein, are
    classified in Class 364.

    B.      Artificial Intelligence (e.g., Applications of AI, Image Analysis,
    and Speech Analysis)

    (1)     This class does not include subject matter wherein an image pattern
    is recognized or significant image analysis is performed.

    (2)     Overall systems nominally reciting artificial intelligence in
    combination with the basic subject matter of another class (i.e.,
    applications of AI) are classified in the appropriate device class.
    However,  this class provides a cross-reference art collection for
    applications of fuzzy logic in art collections 900+ and applications of
    artificial intelligence in art collections 902+.

    (3)     This class includes subject matter directed to artificial
    intelligence data processing which is disclosed or claimed in plural
    diverse arts both in combination and in the alternative (e.g., digital data
    processing system for use in image analysis (classified, per se, in Class
    382, Image Analysis) and/or electrical audio signal processing (classified,
    per se, in Class 381, Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and
    Devices)).

    C.      Storage and Input/Output Operations

    (1)     This class includes digital data processing systems and functions
    in which peripherals are addressed or accessed in a digital data processing
    system.  Digital data processing systems in which memory is addressed or
    accessed is found in Class 711. Internal elements and circuitry for
    memories are found primarily in Class 307, Class 326, and Class 365.
    Dynamic storage devices are classified primarily in Class 360 and Class
    369. See the SEARCH CLASS notes below.

    D.      Error Detection and Correction Class 371

    (1)     This class includes combinations of fault recovery, error
    detection, or error correction with significant processing within digital
    data processing systems. Systems directed to error detection and
    correction, per se, are found in Class 371. See the SEARCH CLASS notes
    below.

    E.      Communications Classes

    (1)     This class includes significant data processing in combination with
    communication of data, and allowed types of information, amongst digital
    data processing systems.  For multiplexing see Class 370. And for systems
    directed to selective communication systems, see Class 340. For systems
    directed to communication techniques such as pulse or digital
    communications, see Class 375. See also the SEARCH CLASS notes below.

    IV. COMPUTER CLASS LAYOUT

    This section provides an overview of Class 395 by concept and by mainline
    subclasses in Class 364 and Class 395

    A. Hierarchical layout of the concepts in Class 395 is as follows:

    AREAS   FIELDS

    Design Processing:      simulation, design, software development tools;

    Business and databases: business data processing, databases and data
    structures;

    Document processing     machine translation, document processing and word
    processing;

    Man-machine interfacing static presentation, printing, graphics processing,
    operator interfaces, speech signal processing;

    Artificial intelligence fuzzy systems, knowledge based systems, expert
    systems;

    Operating system topics task management, virtual machines, system
    initialization, configuring and reconfiguring

    Reliability and availability:   fault recovery, state recovery, fault
    locating and error detection;

    Security        access to a computer system or network;

    Power control   turning on and off systems or system components;

    System architecture,com-

    munication and components       multicomputer, interprocess communications,
    bus transactions, Input/Output processing and peripherals;

    Access and control      access control, interrupt processing, internal
    control, instruction processing, clocks and timing;

    Miscellaneous   subject matter not provided for above;

    Cross-referenced art-

    collections     expert systems applications, special man-machine interfaces.



    B. Hierarchy of Computer Topics presently in Class 364 and Class 395

    Source  TOPIC

    364/400+        COMPUTER CONTROL OF VEHICLES AND SUBSYSTEMS THEREFOR,
    NAVIGATION SYSTEMS AND MILITARY APPLICATIONS OF COMPUTERS

    364/400+,395/80-99      COMPUTER CONTROL OF CHEMICAL PROCESS CONTROL,
    ELECTRICAL POWER GENERATION, PRODUCT MANUFACTURING, MACHINING, ROBOTICS,
    AND ARTICLE HANDLING AND DISTRIBUTION

    364/130-194     GENERIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING CONTROL SYSTEMS (most
    likely to be a class combined with outcome of 364/468+

    364/481+ & 550+ MEASURING, TESTING AND EVALUATING OF PHYSICAL PARAMETERS IN
    THE NONCOMPUTER SCIENCES (e.g., temperature, pressure, distance, volume,
    friction, time and time intervals, etc.)

    364/550+,some 700+      GENERIC COMPUTER BASED SIGNAL ACQUISITION and
    DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING

    364/496+,578, 395/500   CHEMICAL CAD, SIMULATION AND DESIGN

    364/468+,578, 395/500   MANUFACTURING CAD, SIMULATION AND DESIGN

    364/488-491,578,395/500 SIMULATION and DESIGN TOOLS

    395/701+        SOFTWARE PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT TOOLS

    395/712 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION AND VERSION MANAGEMENT OF OPERATING SYSTEMS,
    APPLICATION PROGRAMS AND OTHER EXECUTABLE PROGRAMS

    395/201+        AUTOMATED FINANCIAL OR BUSINESS PRACTICE OR MANAGEMENT
    SYSTEM

    395/601+        DATABASE ACCESSING METHODS (including: Document indexing or
    retrieval as appropriate)

    395/611+        DATABASE SCHEMA TYPES

    395/616+        FILE AND DATABASE MANAGEMENT

    395/751+        LINGUISTICS (including Machine Translation)

    395/761+        DOCUMENT PROCESSING (including: document types, plural
    diverse media, mark-up languages, and editing)

    395/101-117,    STATIC PRESENTATION PROCESSING (e.g., for printers and
    plotters)

    395/118-143,152-154     COMPUTER GRAPHICS PROCESSING (Including: 3-D,
    surface and object processing, font generation and animation and display
    processing hardware)

    395/326+        OPERATOR INTERFACE (e.g., applications, on-screen
    workspaces, menuing, icons)

    395/2.09+       SPEECH PROCESSING (including: for storage and transmission,
    recognition, synthesis and applications)

    395/1, 3-77     ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE (including: Neural networks, expert
    systems)

    395/670+        TASK MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL (i.e., aspects of process
    scheduling (e.g., operating systems context switching))

    395/406 VIRTUAL MACHINES

    395/651+        DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING SYSTEM INITIALIZATION AND
    CONFIGURATION (e.g., initializing, setup, configuration, and resetting,
    including: booting, rebooting, warm booting, remote booting, BIOS, initial
    program load (IPL), bootstrapping)

    395/653 RECONFIGURING (e.g., changing system settings)

    395/180-185.10  RELIABILITY AND AVAILABILITY

    395/186-188.01  SECURITY

    364/700+        ARITHMETIC PROCESSING AND CALCULATORS

    395/750 POWER CONTROL

    395/500 EMULATION OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS FOR COMPATIBILITY

    395/200.01-200.21       MULTICOMPUTER DATA TRANSFERRING

    395/650 INTERPROGRAM COMMUNICATION AND INTERPROCESS COMMUNICATION

    395/280-312     INTRASYSTEM CONNECTION (including: bus transaction
    processing, e.g., arbitration)

    395/821-894     INPUT/OUTPUT DATA PROCESSING

    395/726 ACCESS LOCKING

    395/727 ACCESS POLLING

    395/728-732     ACCESS ARBITRATING

    395/800 PROCESSING ARCHITECTURES

    395/376+        ARCHITECTURE BASED INSTRUCTION PROCESSING

    395/380 INSTRUCTION ALIGNMENT

    395/381+        INSTRUCTION FETCHING

    395/384+        INSTRUCTION DECODING

    395/390 INSTRUCTION ISSUING

    395/392+        DEPENDENCY CHECKING AND RESOLUTION

    395/561+        PROCESSING CONTROL (including: types of instructions,
    branching and microsequencing)

    395/733-742     INTERRUPT PROCESSING

    395/551+        SYNCHRONIZATION OF CLOCKS, DATA, SIGNALS AND PULSES

    395/553 SYNCHRONIZATION OF PLURAL PROCESSORS

    395/555+        CLOCK, PULSE ND TIMING INTERVAL GENERATION AND ANALYSIS

    395/559 CONTROL OF SYSTEMS, DEVICE AND DATA TRANSMISSION BASED ON CLOCK

    395/898 BYTE-WORD ORDER REARRANGING, BIT-FIELD INSERTION OR EXTRACTION,
    STRING LENGTH DETECTING, OR STRING SEQUENCE DETECTING

    395/899 MISCELLANEOUS

            CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS

    395/900 FUZZY LOGIC

    395/901 SPECIAL ROBOT STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS

    395/902 APPLICATIONS USING AI WITH DETAILS OF THE AI SYSTEM

    395/935 DOCUMENT STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS

    395/947 FONT CHARACTER EDGE PROCESSING

    395/948 ALTERATION OF STORED FONTS TO MAINTAIN FEATURE CONSISTENCY
    THROUGHOUT SCALED FONT

    395/949 ANIMATION PROCESSING METHODS

    395/961 OPERATOR INTERFACE WITH VISUAL STRUCTURE OR FUNCTION DICTATED BY
    INTENDED USE

    395/971 COOPERATIVE DECISION SUPPORT SYSTEMS FOR GROUPS OF USERS

    395/972 INSERTED REAL-TIME VIDEO IN OPERATOR INTERFACE

    395/973 SCROLL TOOLS (e.g., window scroll bars)

    395/974 SLIDER CONTROLS AS ON-SCREEN OBJECTS IN OPERATOR INTERFACE

    395/975 POP-UP DIALOG BOXES FOR ENTRY

    395/976 3-D ICONS

    395/977 DYNAMIC ICONS (e.g., animated or live action)

    395/978 AUDIO INTERACTION AS PART OF AN OPERATOR INTERFACE


    V.      SEARCH CLASS

    235,    Registers, various subclasses for basic machines and associated
    indicating mechanisms for ascertaining the number of movements of various
    devices and machines, plus machines made from these basic machines alone
    (e.g., cash registers, voting machines), and in combination with various
    perfecting features, such as printers and recording means. In addition,
    search Class 235 for various data bearing record controlled systems.

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, appropriate subclasses for
    generic digital logic devices, circuity, and subcombinations thereof,
    wherein nonarithmetical operations are performed upon discrete electrical
    signals representing a value normally described by numerical digits.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 825+ for controlling one or
    more devices to obtain a plurality of results by transmission of a
    designated one of plural distinctive control signals over a smaller number
    of communication lines or channels, particularly subclass 825.02 for tree
    or cascade selective communication, subclasses 825.03+ for channel
    selection, subclass 825.05 for a plurality of controlled devices connected
    by a communication line in a closed series configuration, subclasses
    825.06+ for communication systems where status of a controlled device is
    communicated, subclasses 825.2+ for synchronizing selective communication
    systems, subclasses 825.5+ for lockout or priority in selective
    communication systems, subclasses 825.52+ for addressing, and subclasses
    825.52+ for pulse responsive actuation.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, various subclasses for
    electrical pulse and digit code converters (e.g., systems for originating
    or emitting a coded set of discrete signals or translating one code into
    another code wherein the meaning of the data remains the same but the
    formats may differ).

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, various subclasses for the selective
    control of two or more light generating or light controlling display
    elements in accordance with a received image signal, and subclasses 1+ for
    visual display systems with selective electrical control including display
    memory organization and structure for storing image data and manipulating
    image data between a display memory and display device.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, which is an
    integral part of Class 369 following subclass 18, for record carriers and
    systems wherein information is stored and retrieved by interaction with a
    medium and there is relative motion between a medium and a transducer, for
    example, magnetic disk drive devices and control thereof, per se.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 130+
    for data processing control systems, 400+ for applications of computers in
    various environments, 550+ for applications of computers in measuring and
    testing, 600+ for hybrid computers, 700+ for calculators, digital signal
    processing and arithmetical processing, per se, and 800+ for electric
    analog computers.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, various subclasses for
    addressable static singular storage elements or plural singular storage
    elements of the same type (i.e., the internal elements of memory, per se).

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, various subclasses for
    record carriers and systems wherein information is stored and retrieved by
    interaction with a medium and there is relative motion between a medium and
    a transducer.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, for the simultaneous transmission of two
    or more signals over a common medium, particularly subclasses 254+ for
    network configuration determination, subclasses 351+ for pathfinding or
    routing which includes circuit switching or packet switching, and
    subclasses 465+ for adaptive communication which includes processing or
    converting of communication protocols.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, various
    subclasses for generic electrical pulse or pulse coded data error detection
    and correction.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, various subclasses for generic
    pulse or digital communication systems and synchronization of clocking
    signals from input data.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, and Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, various subclasses for generic circuits for pulse
    counting.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, various subclasses for two-way
    electrical communication of intelligible audio information of arbitrary
    content over a link including an electrical conductor.

    380,    Cryptography, subclasses 3+ for stored information access or copy
    prevention (e.g., software program protection or computer virus detection)
    in combination with data encryption, and subclasses 22 through 25 and 50
    for electric signal modification and other appropriate subclasses.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, various
    subclasses for wired one-way audio systems, per se.

    382,    Image Analysis, various subclasses for operations performed on
    image data with the aim of measuring a characteristic of an image,
    detecting variations, detecting structures, or transforming the image data,
    and for procedures for analyzing and categorizing patterns present in image
    data.

    388,    Electricity: Motor Control Systems, cross-reference art collection
    907.5 for computer or processor control of D.C. motor acceleration or speed.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics, subclasses 38+
    for controls, subclasses 130+ for image formation, subclasses 168+ for
    charging, subclasses 177+ for exposure, subclasses 222+ for development,
    subclasses 297+ for transfer, subclasses 320+ for fixing, subclasses 343+
    for cleaning, and subclasses 361+ for document handling.

    455,    Telecommunications, appropriate subclasses for modulated carrier
    wave communication, per se, and subclass 26.1 for subject matter which
    blocks access to a signal source or otherwise limits usage of modulated
    carrier equipment.

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclasses 1+ for addressing combined with specific memory configurations
    (e.g., extended, expanded, dynamic, etc.) in a digital data processing
    system, subclasses 100+ for generalized storage accessing and control in a
    digital data processing system, and subclasses 200+ for generalized address
    forming in a digital data processing system.


CLS 395/1
TXT ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the system or method has
    the capacity to perform one or more of the functions of recognition, speech
    signal processing, knowledge processing (i.e., propositional logic,
    reasoning, learning, self-improvement), complex operations of a manipulator
    (e.g., robot* control), or inexact reasoning (e.g., fuzzy logic).

    (1)     Note.  For a general statement of the scope of this subclass and
    the subclasses indented hereunder, see section III B, of the class
    definition for this class (395).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    382,    Image Analysis, subclasses 181+ for recognition involving image
    analysis.


CLS 395/3
TXT Fuzzy logic hardware:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the system includes a specific
    circuit arrangement for performing logic with more than two levels, e.g.,
    nonbinary or analog logic systems.


CLS 395/10
TXT Knowledge processing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the system or method (1) has the
    capacity to process knowledge (i.e., data comprised of an integrated
    collection of facts and relationships), (2) has the capacity to generate
    its own set of rules (e.g., trainable processors), (3) structurally
    duplicates the human brain (e.g., neural networks), (4) functionally
    duplicates a law of nature (e.g., inheritance, evolution, etc.), or (5) has
    the capacity for solution of problems in these areas.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder provide
    for (1) knowledge processing solely, (2) applying knowledge processing to
    control in a generic environment, (3) applying knowledge processing to
    control in a specific environment where the environment is only nominally
    recited, or (4) applying knowledge processing solely to diagnostics in any
    environment.

    (2)     Note.  Where knowledge processing is used for control in a specific
    environment where the environment is fully recited and tied to the
    knowledge processing, classification is with the specific environment.



CLS 395/11
TXT Plural processing systems:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 comprising two or more systems, or methods
    utilizing two or more systems, wherein at least one system is a knowledge
    processing system.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type includes, for example,
    plural expert systems, a nonknowledge-processing controller presetting a
    neural network, or an expert system programming a nonknowledge-processing
    controller.


CLS 395/12
TXT Graphical or natural language user interface:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein presentation of data to the user
    of the system includes nonverbal representations or symbols, or statements
    in standard English language syntax.


CLS 395/13
TXT Genetic algorithms:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein the system uses a sequence of
    steps that (1) starts with a group of solutions to a problem, (2)
    represents each solution as a coded data string, (3) divides and splices
    the coded numerical strings to create new solutions, and (4) determines the
    fitness of the new solutions.


CLS 395/20
TXT Trainable (i.e., adaptive) systems:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein (1) the system creates its own set
    of rules (i.e., connection weights) (e.g., learns by example) or wherein
    (2) the data processing method involves in any way a system which creates
    its own set of such rules.


CLS 395/21
TXT Neural networks:

    Subject matter under subclass 20 wherein the system uses parallel
    distributed processing processors constructed in hardware or simulated in
    software.

    (1)     Note.  Parallel computer systems are provided for in subclass 800,
    below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    800.01+, (see (1) Note, above).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclass 925 for neural network.


CLS 395/22
TXT Connectionist expert systems:

    Subject matter under subclass 21 wherein the parallel distributed
    processing processors have been trained to be an expert system, that is, to
    process data formed by an integrated collection of facts and relationships
    (i.e., knowledge).


CLS 395/23
TXT Training (i.e., programming or learning):

    Subject matter under subclass 21 wherein a specific method or apparatus is
    used to adjust the rules (i.e., connection weights).


CLS 395/24
TXT Structures:

    Subject matter under subclass 21 including details of the construction of
    the processing processors or their interconnections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 35+ for threshold
    (e.g., majority) digital logic which may be utilizable for neural networks.


CLS 395/25
TXT Radiant energy type (e.g., optical):

    Subject matter under subclass 24 wherein the structure includes a source or
    detector of radiant wave energy.

    SEARCH CLASS

    382,    Image Analysis, for subject matter wherein an image is detected and
    significant analysis of the image is performed.


CLS 395/26
TXT Sequential processor:

    Subject matter under subclass 24 wherein the structure comprises one or
    more computers that process software step-by-step.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type includes, for example,
    a parallel system simulated on a sequential system.


CLS 395/27
TXT Including a digital or binary element:

    Subject matter under subclass 24 wherein the structure includes a
    processing component that can assume only two values.


CLS 395/50
TXT Expert systems:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 comprising a system wherein the data
    consists of an integrated collection of facts and relationships (i.e.,
    knowledge).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder provide
    for details of expert systems, or of the operation of expert systems, of
    either stand-alone expert systems or of expert systems interacting with
    other systems.

    (2)     Note.  The subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder provide
    for the creation and maintenance of expert systems.



CLS 395/51
TXT Deduction, control, or search techniques:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein a process or system uses a
    specific (1) method or system for processing the integrated collection of
    facts and relationships, (2) inferencing method or system, (3) method or
    system for interconnecting parts of the expert system, (4) internal or
    external structured data accessing method or system, or (5) method or
    system for searching the integrated collection of facts and relationships.



CLS 395/52
TXT Forward or backward chaining:

    Subject matter under subclass 51 including an inferencing method or system
    using logic processing that starts with a set of known facts and applies
    rules to the facts until no new facts are generated or a goal is reached
    (i.e., forward chaining), or logic processing that starts with a goal and
    then finds rules to fit the goals and then checks to see if known facts fit
    the found rules (i.e., backward chaining).


CLS 395/53
TXT Blackboarding:

    Subject matter under subclass 51 wherein a specific method or system for
    interconnecting parts of the expert system uses a special memory (i.e.,
    blackboard) where data from one part of the expert system can be written so
    that it can be accessed by other parts of the expert system.



CLS 395/54
TXT Knowledge base accessing (e.g., DBMS, table):

    Subject matter under subclass 51 wherein a specific data accessing method
    or system, such as a database management system or a lookup table, is used
    to access a database containing the knowledge of the expert system (i.e.,
    the knowledge base).


CLS 395/55
TXT Truth maintenance systems (TMS):

    Subject matter under subclass 51 wherein the processing of the integrated
    collection of facts and relationships include belief revision by tracking
    dependencies among propositions and informing a user as to which
    propositions can be believed.


CLS 395/60
TXT Knowledge representations:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein a process or system uses (1) a
    specific type of relationship in the integrated collection of facts and
    relationships, (2) a specific type of integrated collection of facts and
    relationships, or (3) a specific type of fact in the integrated collection
    of facts and relationships.


CLS 395/61
TXT For inexact knowledge (e.g., fuzzy logic):

    Subject matter under subclass 60 wherein the facts or relationships include
    a weight value other than 1 (e.g., 1/2, .5, 1.5, 60%).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for the following when used in an
    expert system: confidence factors; fuzzy logic; membership functions;
    probabilistic logic; uncertainty; or analog logic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for logic using a weight value other than one.


CLS 395/62
TXT Objects (i.e., object-attribute-value), frames and slots, or scripts:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 wherein the specific integrated collection
    of facts and relationships uses (1) a set of slots (i.e., a frame) related
    to a specific object, each slot storing a feature of the object, (2) an
    outline (i.e., a script) of an episode of a certain type, or (3) the name
    of some item (i.e., an object) in either an object-attribute-value triplet
    or an object-attribute pair.

    (1)     Note.  An example of part of a script as defined above would
    include:


    Event (1) - Enter restaurant

    Event (2) - Order meal

    Event (3) - Eat meal

    Event (4) - Pay for meal


CLS 395/63
TXT Semantic network (i.e., conceptual dependency, fact based structure):

    Subject matter under subclass 60 wherein the specific integrated collection
    of facts and relationships formalizes objects and values as nodes, and
    connects the nodes with arcs or links that indicate the relationships
    between the various nodes.


CLS 395/64
TXT Rete network or meta-knowledge:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 which (1) uses a reticular network
    algorithm on the collection of facts and relationships (e.g., is formed of
    subcollections which are searched in parallel) or (2) includes a hierarchy
    of collections, i.e., a higher level integrated collection of facts and
    relationships about a lower level integrated collection of facts and
    relationships (i.e., knowledge about knowledge).


CLS 395/65
TXT Inheritance:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 wherein the specific integrated collection
    of facts and relationships is connected in a hierarchy of levels which
    allow facts or relationships missing in a lower level to be taken (i.e.,
    inherited) from a connected higher level where they are present.


CLS 395/66
TXT Predicate logic or predicate calculus:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 wherein the specific integrated collection
    of facts and relationships uses a complex logic system formed with
    arguments and predicates.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides, for example, for such formats of
    facts and relationships as for the statement "Bottle one contains a
    liquid," x = "bottle one," P = "contains a," and y = "liquid," where x and
    y are arguments and p is a predicate.

    (2)     Note.  The notation of predicate logic is either xPy or P(x,y).

    (3)     Note.  Predicate logic is usually considered an extension of
    propositional logic.


CLS 395/67
TXT Propositional logic:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 wherein the specific integrated collection
    of facts and relationships uses a simple logic formed with truth values
    (e.g., "X is a metal," "if C then D") or logic connectives (e.g., and, or,
    not).


CLS 395/68
TXT History base:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 wherein the specific integrated collection
    of facts and relationships include historical data (i.e., data collected
    over a period of time) about the expert system or about the area of
    expertise.


CLS 395/75
TXT Creation or modification of an expert system:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 comprising means (i.e., software or
    hardware) for initially developing or altering the expert system.


CLS 395/76
TXT Expert system shells or tools:

    Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein the software for developing an
    expert system (1) contains an inference engine, a user interface, and
    knowledge acquisition aids, but no knowledge base (i.e., a "tool") or (2)
    provides an interface to such a tool or an expert system (i.e., a "shell").


CLS 395/77
TXT Learning or knowledge acquisition by the expert system:

    Subject matter under 75 wherein the existing expert system has the
    capability to automatically add to its current integrated collection of
    facts and relationships.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter of this subclass type include such strategies
    for automatically adding to the collection of facts and relationships as,
    for example, induction.


CLS 395/80
TXT Robot control:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising a system or method which (1)
    creates, modifies, provides data to, or performs special calculations for
    use by, a computer program or computer system* for controlling a robot as a
    unit or a robot end effector for general use, or (2) uses a specific
    control scheme, such as plural processors or plural robots or knowledge
    processing, in a computer system* for controlling at least one robot.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder do not
    provide for systems or methods that deal solely with creating, modifying,
    or using a computer program or digital data processing system for
    controlling a substructure of a robot other than an end effector for
    general use, such as controlling (1) the torque of a robot servo mechanism
    rather than the torque of the entire robot or (2) a robot vision system not
    integrally tied to the rest of the robot control.  For the loci of such
    art, see the Search Class notes, below.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder do not
    provide for systems or methods that use an unmodifiable pre-existing
    computer program for controlling a single robot without providing
    additional data to the program or performing any special calculations for
    use by the program (e.g., mere robot position or velocity control without
    further data input, such as, visual input).

    (3)     Note.  End effectors for a specific use are classified with such
    specific use.  See the Search Class notes, below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 124.1+ for welding robots.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 568.1+ for robot
    servo motor details (e.g., servo torque control).


CLS 395/81
TXT Combined with knowledge processing (e.g., natural language system):

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the system or method is combined
    with knowledge processing.


CLS 395/82
TXT Plural controlled devices or plural non-vision controlling devices:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the system or method (1) has the
    capability to control a second device in addition to the robot, or (2)
    includes at least first and second processors, both of which control the
    robot and neither of which solely control robot vision.


CLS 395/83
TXT Plural robots:

    Subject matter under subclass 82 wherein the second device is another robot.


CLS 395/84
TXT Plural processors:

    Subject matter under subclass 82 wherein the first and second controlling
    devices are processors.


CLS 395/85
TXT Specific enhancing or modifying techniques (e.g., adaptive control):

    Subject matter under subclass 80 comprising means or methods for altering
    the normal operation of a particular aspect of the robot* control.


CLS 395/86
TXT Coordinate transformation:

    Subject matter under subclass 85 wherein the enhancement or modification
    deals with changing from a first coordinate system to a second coordinate
    system.


CLS 395/87
TXT Interpolation:

    Subject matter under subclass 85 wherein the enhancement or modification
    deals with inserting calculated intermediate points between already known
    points of a robot path.


CLS 395/88
TXT Programmed data (e.g., path) modified by sensed data:

    Subject matter under subclass 85 wherein the enhancement or modification
    deals with modifying program control of a robot based on data from sensors.


CLS 395/89
TXT Compensation or calibration:

    Subject matter under subclass 85 wherein the enhancement or modification
    deals with correcting for inherent errors in a robot or for aligning a
    robot.


CLS 395/90
TXT Collision prevention:

    Subject matter under subclass 85 wherein the enhancement or modification
    deals with stopping a robot from contacting a solid object in a manner that
    would damage the robot or the object.


CLS 395/91
TXT Overload prevention:

    Subject matter under subclass 85 wherein the enhancement or modification
    deals with stopping a robot from attempting to move a load that is beyond
    the capabilities of the robot.


CLS 395/92
TXT Based on user input:

    Subject matter under subclass 85 wherein the enhancement or modification is
    based on data supplied to a robot directly from a programmer.


CLS 395/93
TXT With particular sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the system or method is provided
    data by a specified type of sensor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    382,    Image Analysis, for subject matter wherein an image is detected and
    significant analysis of the image is performed.


CLS 395/94
TXT Vision sensor (e.g., camera, photocell, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 93 wherein the sensor detects light.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    382,    Image Analysis, subclasses 141+ for subject matter that
    significantly claims the sensor gathering image data and processing that
    data to detect patterns, and the robot is only peripherally claimed.


CLS 395/95
TXT With control of force:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the system or method controls
    force.


CLS 395/96
TXT With control of robot torque:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the system or method controls or
    limits the torque of the robot* as a unit.


CLS 395/97
TXT Using particular manipulator orientation computations (e.g., vector/matrix
    calculations):

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the system or method uses a
    specific vector or matrix calculation in order to control the directional
    positioning of the end effector* of the robot*.


CLS 395/98
TXT Using jacobian computations:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the system or method uses a
    Jacobian computation scheme, that is, an equation representing the
    mathematical operation for conversion of a function in terms of one set of
    variables to a function in terms of a second set of variables.


CLS 395/99
TXT With particular operator interface (e.g., teaching box, digitizer, tablet,
    pendant, dummy arm):

    Subject matter under subclass 80 including details of the operator
    interface.


CLS 395/101
TXT STATIC PRESENTATION PROCESSING (E.G., FOR A PRINTER):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the processed data is
    presented for viewing on a fixed medium, such as paper.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for claims directed to processors or
    data processing of this subclass type with nominal recitation of the
    printer/recorder structure.

    (2)     Note.  Recorders in which the structure and control hardware
    include a nominally recited CPU or processor are classified in Class 346,
    Recorders.

    (3)     Note.  Electrostatic image generation structure including optics,
    beam generation, record carrier (e.g., paper) handling, image
    synchronization, halftone, and data control for recording or static
    representation having a nominally recited CPU or processor is classified in
    Class 347, Incremental printing of symbolic informationand Class 358,
    Facsimile, subclasses 296-304 (for facsimile).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, appropriate subclasses (see (2) and (3) Note, above),
    particularly subclass 29 for structural elements of plotters and subclass
    76.1 for structural elements of thermal recorders.

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, appropriate
    subclasses (see (3)Note above), particularly subclasses 112+ for structure
    elements of electrostatic marking apparatus, subclasses 171+ for structures
    elements of thermal marking apparatus, and subclasses 224+ for structure
    elements of radiation marking devices.

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 296-303 (see (3) Note, above).


CLS 395/102
TXT Size or scale control:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein the processed data presented is
    magnified or reduced or proportioned for presentation.


CLS 395/103
TXT Plotters:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein presentation is performed by X-Y
    movement of a marking means wherein the motion is controlled by the
    presentation data.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, subclass 29 for multiple input plotter structure;
    subclass 46 for color plotter structure; subclass 49 for multiple markers;
    and subclass 139 for plotter head structure.


CLS 395/104
TXT Plural marking means:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein more than one independently
    movable or different type of writing element is used for presenting the
    processed data.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, subclass 46 for plural marker structure including color
    or multiple marking means and subclass 139 for structural elements of a
    carriage.


CLS 395/105
TXT Position or velocity determined:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein the position or speed of the
    marking means or image medium modifies the presentation of the data.


CLS 395/106
TXT Specific to image source:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein image data format or processing
    thereof is designed to function with a particular image source.


CLS 395/107
TXT Flying dot (e.g., laser beam):

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein the presentation on a fixed
    medium is produced by means of a continuously moving beam or stream of ink,
    light, ions, electrons, or radiation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, subclass 107.3 for details of phenomenal recorders
    including mirror galvanometer.

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, subclasses 225+ for
    apparatus and processes for marking a record receiver by scanning the
    record receiver with a writing beam, subclasses 226+ for cathode ray
    scanner, subclasses 120+ for marking the medium by information carrying
    flow of invisible charged particles, and subclasses 129+ for electrostatic
    marking apparatus including photoscanning device.


CLS 395/108
TXT Dot matrix array (e.g., printheads):

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein presentation of processed data is
    produced by means of an array of plural writing elements that are in a
    fixed position relative to each other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, see subclasses 1+ for
    selective marking by ink jet; subclasses 171+ for thermal marking using
    thermal printhead, subclasses 233+ for structure of a multiple beam scanner
    (e.g., LEDs), subclasses 129+ for electrostatic marking apparatus including
    photoscanning device, particularly subclass 130 for such apparatus using
    light emmiting diodes.


    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 120.01+ for thermal recording
    typewriters and subclasses 124.01+ for wire dot matrix typewriters.


CLS 395/109
TXT Attribute control:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein the presentation data is
    modified, altered or stabilized to control the color, contrast, resolution,
    or intensity of the static presentation (e.g., halftone).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 500 color control for facsimile recording; and
    subclass 298 for resolution halftone for facsimile.


CLS 395/110
TXT Character or font:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein the processing of presentation
    data generates or retrieves patterns defining alphanumerics.


CLS 395/111
TXT Details of medium positioning (e.g., movement to or from presentation
    location of medium):

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein the presentation data affects or
    is affected by the movement of the fixed medium to or from the location of
    the actual presentation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, appropriate subclasses for sheet
    feeding or delivering, per se.

    346,    Recorders, subclass 134 for means for driving record receivers for
    recorders.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 361+ for a document handling
    apparatus in a photocopier.


CLS 395/112
TXT Emulation or plural modes:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein data is modified such that a
    presentation system responds like, reacts like, or imitates another type of
    presentation system or has more than one mode of operation.


CLS 395/113
TXT Data corruption, power interruption or print prevention:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein presentation operations are
    performed in which systems, devices, or events are monitored for errors,
    faults, malfunctions, deviations or security considerations for expected
    results or steps are taken to prevent the occurrence of such errors, or to
    prevent presentation operations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    750.01+, for computer power control in general.


CLS 395/114
TXT With communications (e.g., data compression, data expansion, plural
    devices):

    Subject matter under subclass 101 with details of communication between
    elements within a static presentation system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200.77, for compression/decompression in computer-to-computer data
    transferring.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 500 for natural color facsimile; subclasses
    296-304 for facsimile type recording apparatus.


CLS 395/115
TXT With memory:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 with details of memory configuration,
    storage or retrieval of data to be presented.


CLS 395/116
TXT Page or frame memory:

    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein a significant portion of the data
    is stored as a contiguous unit in the form to be presented.


CLS 395/117
TXT Details of image placement or content:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein the format of the presentation
    data is controlled.


CLS 395/180
TXT RELIABILITY AND AVAILABILITY:

    Subject matter under the class definition further including means or steps
    for increasing a conditional probability of correctly performing services
    (e.g., data processing) throughout a time interval, given correct
    performance at the beginning of the interval, or for increasing the
    probability of correctly performing services at any given instant.

    (1)     Note. Classification in this array requires more than nominal
    recitation of data processing components in combination with means or steps
    for furthering correct data processing operations by mechanisms including
    error detecting, performance monitoring, fault locating, and fault recovery.

    (2)     Note. The species of reliability and availability directed to
    memory accessing and control with data archiving, backups, device access
    limiting, and security is classified elsewhere. See the SEARCH CLASS notes
    below. Other species of reliability and availability in memory accessing
    and control such as isolating failed memory and storing redundant data are
    classified in this array.

    (3)     Note. Reliability features in a data processing control system are
    classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 184
    through 187 for reliability features in a data processing control system.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery,
    appropriate subclasses for generic error detection and correction, and
    fault detection and recovery.

    380,    Cryptography, subclass 4 for stored digital data access or copy
    prevention in combination with data encryption; e.g., software program
    protection or computer virus detection in combination with data encryption.


CLS 395/181
TXT Fault recovery:

    Subject matter under subclass 180 further including means or steps for
    responding to a failure by either returning a system to a previous level of
    correct operation, achieving a degraded level of correct operation, or
    safely shutting down the system after detecting the error or locating the
    fault.

    (1)     Note. Classification here requires significant data processing
    features claimed. For fault recovery in a system without significant data
    processing method or apparatus, classification is elsewhere. See the SEARCH
    CLASS notes below.

    (2)     Note. Classification here requires notification or detection of the
    fault, its location, and a further action. Subcombinations used in the
    process of fault recovery; e.g., fault locating, are classified below.

    (3)     Note. "Page faults" are a species of faults peculiar to memory
    accessing and are classified elsewhere in this class. See the SEARCH THIS
    CLASS, SUBCLASS notes below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery,
    appropriate subclasses for error detection and correction of general
    utility.

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclasses 133+ for entry replacement strategies and page fault recovery.


CLS 395/182.01
TXT By masking or reconfiguration:

    Subject matter under subclass 181 further including means or steps for
    recovery by selecting a correct output from a concurrently active redundant
    functional unit in place of the output of the failed functional unit, or by
    replacing or isolating the failed functional unit.

    (1)     Note. This subclass is for fault recovery by masking or
    reconfiguration in combination with significant data processing. Generic
    fault recovery is classified elsewhere. See the SEARCH CLASS notes below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclass
    72 for fault recovery by replacing or isolating the failed functional unit
    not provided for elsewhere.


CLS 395/182.02
TXT Of network:

    Subject matter under subclass 182.01 further including means or steps for
    recovery at a network level (e.g., recovery from nodal failures).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, various subclasses for residual
    electrical communication systems, subclass 827 for alternate routing in a
    plural stage communication system, and see related Class 342 and Class 343.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 216+ for fault recovery and
    subclasses 229+ for data flow congestion prevention and control in a
    multiplex communication system.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, various subclasses for generic
    pulse or digital communication systems.


CLS 395/182.03
TXT Of memory or peripheral subsystem:

    Subject matter under subclass 182.01 further including means or steps for
    recovery from a fault of a memory function level or the peripheral function
    level, or for recovery limited to a specialized processor accessing either
    memory, peripheral, or other I/O device.

    (1)     Note. "Page faults" are a species of faults peculiar to memory
    accessing and are classified elsewhere. See the SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS
    notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    821+,   for transferring data from one or more peripherals to one or more
    computers for the latter to process, store, or further transfer or for
    transferring data from the computers to the peripherals (i.e., Input/Output
    data processing).


    SEARCH CLASS:

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclasses
    10.2 and 10.3 for memory fault recovery of general utility without
    significant data processing features claimed.

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclasses 100+ for means (e.g., processor, controller, etc.) or steps for
    governing memory in a digital data processing system or the passage (e.g.,
    reading or writing) of data thereto and subclasses 133+for entry
    replacement strategies and page fault recovery.


CLS 395/182.04
TXT Redundant stored data accessed (e.g., duplicated data, error correction
    coded data, or other parity-type data):

    Subject matter under subclass 182.03 further including means or steps for
    recovery by accessing redundant stored data.

    (1)     Note. This and indented subclasses rely on information which is a
    function of the actual data of concern as exemplified in one simple form by
    parity data. The species of fault recovery or avoidance concerned with
    storing archival verbatim copies of data is classified elsewhere in this
    class. See SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS notes below.

    (2)     Note. Parity and error-correction coded storage of general utility
    in a system without data processing features claimed are classified
    elsewhere. See SEARCH CLASS notes below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclasses
    40.11+ for memory access block coding, and subclass 51.1 for storage
    accessing error/fault detection techniques.

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclasses 161+ for preventing the corruption, loss, alteration, or
    disclosure of data by storing, as in making backup copies.


CLS 395/182.05
TXT With reconfiguration (e.g., adding a replacement storage component):

    Subject matter under subclass 182.04 further including means or steps for
    statically replacing a failed memory component.

    (1)     Note. Classification here requires more than selecting a correct
    output from a concurrently active redundant functional unit in place of the
    output of the failed component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclasses
    10.2 and 10.3 for recovery from failure of memory, by replacing or
    isolating the failed memory, in a system without significant data
    processing features claimed.


CLS 395/182.06
TXT Isolating failed storage location (e.g., sector remapping):

    Subject matter under subclass 182.03 further including means or steps for
    recovery by disabling access to a failed memory location.

    (1)     Note. Classification here requires more than selecting a correct
    output from a concurrently active redundant functional unit in place of the
    output of the failed component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 200 and 201
    for bad bit and testing of static storage.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclasses
    10.2 and 10.3 for recovery from failure of memory, by replacing or
    isolating the failed memory, in a system without significant data
    processing features.

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclasses 170+ for automatically determined memory space allocation.


CLS 395/182.07
TXT Access processor affected (e.g., I/O processor, MMU, DMA processor):

    Subject matter under subclass 182.03 further including means or steps for
    recovery from fault of an access processor (e.g., memory management unit
    (MMU), direct memory access (DMA) processor, I/O processor, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    800.01+, for digital data processing system architecture, per se.


CLS 395/182.08
TXT Of processor:

    Subject matter under subclass 182.01 further including means or steps for
    recovery from fault of a processor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    800.01+, for digital data processing system architecture, per se.


CLS 395/182.09
TXT Concurrent, redundantly operating processors:

    Subject matter under subclass 182.08 further including means or steps for
    recovery employing redundant processors substantially simultaneously
    performing the same operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 131+
    for master/slave processor in a data processing control system, and
    subclasses 184+ for protection or reliability in a digital data processing
    control system application.


CLS 395/182.1
TXT Synchronization maintenance of processors:

    Subject matter under subclass 182.09 further including means or steps for
    maintaining processor state synchronization to achieve redundancy of
    operation.

    (1)     Note. Classification here requires a redundant processor for the
    purpose of reliability, such as by consideration of state of internal
    registers and the like of the redundant processors and thus the machines
    themselves. Synchronization in the form of timing and clock skew is
    classified elsewhere. See the SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS notes below.

    (2)     Note.  Classification here requires the existence of a fault
    condition.  Synchronization maintenance at the clock level, however, is
    classified elsewhere.  See the search class notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200.78, for multicomputer and synchronizing.

    551+,   for clock synchronization, per se.

    553,    for synchronization maintenance of plural processors, per se.

    555+,   for digital data processing system clock, pulse and timing interval
    generation, per se.

    670+,   for task management, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 354+ for communications
    synchronizing.


CLS 395/182.11
TXT Prepared backup processor (e.g., initializing cold backup) or updating
    backup processor (e.g., by checkpoint message):

    Subject matter under subclass 182.08 further including means or steps for
    readying a backup processor or digital data processing system to replace a
    failed primary processor or digital data processing system, or to receive
    recent processing result(s) from a backup processor or digital data
    processing system that may be relied upon.

    (1)     Note. Classification here allows for the backup processor or
    digital data processing system to be performing operations unrelated to
    backup operation before or after failure of the primary processor or
    digital data processing systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 131+
    for data processing control system applications employing plural
    processors, and subclasses 184+ for protection or reliability in a digital
    data processing system based control system application.


CLS 395/182.12
TXT Of power supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 182.01 further including means or steps for
    recovery using power supply subsystem component redundancy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    750.01+, for power control in a digital data processing system environment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 707 for
    electrical digital calculating computer (i.e., calculator) with power
    saving feature.


CLS 395/182.13
TXT State recovery (i.e., process or data file):

    Subject matter under subclass 181 further including means or steps for
    recovery by restoring data in a data file, or data for a process, to data
    at a previous point in time.

    (1)     Note. The species of fault recovery or avoidance concerned with
    storing verbatim copies of data is classified elsewhere. See the SEARCH
    THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS notes below.

    (2)     Note. Parity and error-correction coded storage of general utility
    in a system without data processing features claimed is classified
    elsewhere.

    (3)     Note.  This state recovery subclass provides for reliability and
    availability recovery under the condition of a fault.  Data management, per
    se, is classified elsewhere.  See the search class notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182.04+,for recovery by accessing redundant stored data.

    703,    for source code management.

    712,    for software version management.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclasses
    40.11+ for memory access block coding, and subclass 51.1 for storage
    accessing error/fault detection techniques.

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclasses 141+ for cache memory coherency, per se; subclasses 147+ for
    shared memory data processing which may employ data management principles;
    and subclasses 161+ for preventing the corruption, loss, alteration, or
    disclosure of data by storing, as in making backup copies.


CLS 395/182.14
TXT With forward recovery (e.g., redoing committed action):

    Subject matter under subclass 182.13 further including means or steps for
    recovery by re-executing an operation in response to detecting an error in
    an operation.

    (1)     Note. Recovery by operation retry or error detection by sequential
    repetition in a system without data processing features is classified
    elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclass
    69.1 for sequential repetition.

    707,    Data Processing - Database and File Management, Data Structures, or
    Document Processing, subclass 202 for database file recovery.


CLS 395/182.15
TXT Reexecuting single instruction or bus cycle:

    Subject matter under subclass 182.14 further including means or steps for
    recovery by retrying single instruction or bus cycle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280+,   for system intraconnecting and bus processing, per se.


CLS 395/182.16
TXT Transmission data record (e.g., for retransmission):

    Subject matter under subclass 182.13 further including means or steps for
    recovery of a communication process (e.g., a session) using a record.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    821+,   for I/O processing and communication between computers and
    peripherals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclasses
    31 through 35 for retransmission in a system without data processing
    features claimed.


CLS 395/182.17
TXT Undo records:

    Subject matter under subclass 182.13 further including means or steps for
    recovery of data in the presence of uncommitted action using a record of
    the data created before the action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    616+,   for database and file maintenance in the absence of a fault
    condition.

    792+,   for editing in a text data processing applications.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    707,    Data Processing - Database and File Management, Data Structures, or
    Document Processing, subclasses 500+ for a word data processing
    applications on computers.


CLS 395/182.18
TXT Plural recovery data sets containing set interrelation data (e.g., time
    values or log record numbers):

    Subject matter under subclass 182.13 further including means or steps for
    recovery using sets of sequenced or linked recovery data containing set
    sequencing or linking data.


CLS 395/182.19
TXT With state validity check:

    Subject matter under subclass 182.13 further including means or steps
    wherein recovery is controlled by verifying the accuracy of the state data.


CLS 395/182.2
TXT With power supply status monitoring:

    Subject matter under subclass 182.13 further including means or steps
    wherein recovery is controlled by a power supply status monitor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    750.08, for generic power control monitoring in a digital data processing
    system environment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 707 for
    electrical digital calculating computer (i.e., calculator) with power
    saving feature.


CLS 395/182.21
TXT Resetting processor:

    Subject matter under subclass 181 further including means or steps for
    recovery using clearing or initializing of a processor register.


CLS 395/182.22
TXT Safe shutdown:

    Subject matter under subclass 181 further including means or steps for
    recovery including termination of a system component to a safe condition.

    (1)     Note. Isolating (i.e., disabling) an output of a failed network,
    processor, memory, peripheral, I/O, or power supply component is classified
    elsewhere. See SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182.02, for network affected fault recovery.

    182.03, for memory or peripheral subsystem affected.

    182.06, for isolating failed storage locations.

    182.08, for processor affected fault recovery.

    182.12, for power supply affected fault recovery.

    750.01+, for power control in a digital data processing system environment.


CLS 395/183.01
TXT Fault locating (i.e., diagnosis or testing):

    Subject matter under subclass 180 further including means or steps for
    pinpointing a fault using either a reactive diagnosing or a proactive
    testing, including testing for developmental stage fault avoidance, for
    assurance, or for maintenance.

    (1)     Note. An invention directed to locating a fault in a digital data
    processing system including more than nominal data processing, or where the
    fault is specific to a nongeneral use of a digital data processing system,
    is classified here. Fault locating in combination with a specific art
    device not of the basic subject matter of this class is classified with the
    art device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclass 73.1 for various
    electrical testing arrangements that may include fault locating.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 241+ for diagnostic testing in
    multiplex communications.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostic testing of a
    photocopier, including computer controlled malfunction warning and recovery.


CLS 395/183.02
TXT Artificial intelligence (e.g., diagnostic expert system):

    Subject matter under subclass 183.01 wherein the testing is performed using
    an artificial intelligence technique; e.g., fault tree, reasoning rules,
    self-learning.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for artificial intelligence, per se.

    902+,   for applications of AI in various systems.


CLS 395/183.03
TXT With particular access structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 183.01 further including means or steps
    related to an access structure specialized for observing or controlling a
    test or diagnosis.


CLS 395/183.04
TXT Substituted emulative component (e.g., emulator microprocessor):

    Subject matter under subclass 183.03 further including means or steps for
    using a tester component that can emulate (i.e., functionally operate as) a
    normal component in the tested system.


CLS 395/183.05
TXT Memory emulator feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 183.04 further including means or steps for
    using memory that can functionally replace a system component.

    (1)     Note. For classification here the replaced component need not be a
    memory.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500,    for compatibility, simulation, and emulation of system components.


CLS 395/183.06
TXT Built-in hardware for diagnosing or testing within-system component (e.g.,
    microprocessor test mode circuit, scan path):

    Subject matter under subclass 183.03 further including means or steps for
    testing or diagnostic access using specialized testing or diagnosing
    hardware permanently built into a component of the system being tested or
    diagnosed.


CLS 395/183.07
TXT Additional processor for in-system fault locating (e.g., distributed
    diagnosis program):

    Subject matter under subclass 183.03 further including an additional
    processor for controlling all or part of in-system testing or diagnosis.


CLS 395/183.08
TXT With particular stimulus creation:

    Subject matter under subclass 183.01 further including means or steps for
    selection or generation of a signal (i.e., data) for testing or diagnosing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 201 for static
    memory testing.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclasses
    20.1+ for memory testing including pattern generation.


CLS 395/183.09
TXT Derived from analysis (e.g., of a specification or by simulation):

    Subject matter under subclass 183.08 further including means or steps for
    deriving a test or diagnosis program based on an analysis of specification,
    design, or output of the system to be tested or diagnosed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclass 73.1 for various
    electrical testing arrangements that may include fault locating.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 488
    through 491 for integrated circuit design, analysis, and testing, and
    subclass 578 for simulation including event simulators for logic design.


CLS 395/183.1
TXT Halt, clock, or interrupt signal (e.g., freezing, hardware breakpoint,
    single-stepping):

    Subject matter under subclass 183.08 further including means or steps for
    controlling a processor or digital data processing system to be tested or
    diagnosed by applying an interrupt, halt, or clock signal to a processor or
    digital data processing system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    555+,   for clock processing, per se.

    568,    for instruction processing in support of testing, debugging,
    emulation, etc.

    701+,   for software development tools.

    868+,   for Input/Output device interrupt processing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclasses 204 for virtual address branch or jump address predicting; and
    subclasses 213 for generalized prefetch, look-ahead, jump, or predictive
    address generating.


CLS 395/183.11
TXT Substituted or added instruction (e.g., code instrumenting, breakpoint
    instruction):

    Subject matter under subclass 183.08 further including means or steps for
    substituting or adding a testing or diagnosing instruction into a program
    or instruction data stream of a processor or digital data processing system
    being tested or diagnosed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    380     through 389, for instruction processing, per se, including
    instruction alignment, fetching and decoding.

    561+,   for processing control at the processor level, per se.

    568,    for instruction processing in support of testing, debugging,
    emulation, etc.


CLS 395/183.12
TXT Test sequence at power-up or initialization:

    Subject matter under subclass 183.08 further including means or steps for
    performing a sequence of tests automatically in response to a power-up or
    initialization action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284,    for utilizing a hardware structure for providing a processor with
    an arrangement of the digital data processing system including
    characteristics of the digital data processing system's components.

    651     through 653, for digital data processing system initialization and
    configuration at boot-time.

    828,    for assigning operating characteristics to peripherals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclass 170 for automatically determining and allocating memory space or
    specifying an allocation.


CLS 395/183.13
TXT Analysis (e.g., of output, state, or design):

    Subject matter under subclass 183.01 further including means or steps for
    evaluating the output, state, or design, of a computer system or a
    processor or a program, for fault locating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclass 73.1 for various
    electrical testing arrangements that may include fault locating.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 488
    through 491 for integrated circuit design, analysis, and testing, and
    subclass 578 for simulation including event simulators for logic design.


CLS 395/183.14
TXT Of computer software:

    Subject matter under subclass 183.13 further including means or steps for
    locating a fault in software or testing software.

    (1)     Note. This subclass also provides for detecting an error in
    instruction data in combination with a digital data processing system.
    Generic coded information error detection is classified elsewhere. See
    SEARCH CLASS notes below.

    (2)     Note. This subclass also provides for fault locating in software
    analysis by mechanisms such as debugging, automatic code generating, object
    oriented design, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery,
    appropriate subclasses for coded information error detecting.


CLS 395/183.15
TXT Monitor recognizes sequence of events (e.g., protocol or logic state
    analyzer):

    Subject matter under subclass 183.13 further including means or steps for
    locating a fault by using a monitor for classifying or otherwise
    recognizing a sequence of events.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200.54, for computer network managing including monitoring.


CLS 395/183.16
TXT Component dependent technique:

    Subject matter under subclass 183.01 further including means or steps for
    fault locating that are specific to a device under test.


CLS 395/183.17
TXT For reliability enhancing component (e.g., testing backup spare, or fault
    injection):

    Subject matter under subclass 183.16 further including means or steps for
    fault locating specific to fault in a reliability enhancing component.


CLS 395/183.18
TXT Memory or storage device component fault:

    Subject matter under subclass 183.16 further including means or steps for
    fault locating specific to a fault in a memory.


CLS 395/183.19
TXT Bus, I/O channel, or network path component fault:

    Subject matter under subclass 183.16 further including means or steps for
    fault locating specific to a fault in a bus, peripheral or I/O channel, or
    network path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280+,   for subject matter directed to system intraconnecting and bus
    access processing.


CLS 395/183.2
TXT Peripheral device component fault:

    Subject matter under subclass 183.16 further including means or steps for
    fault locating specific to a fault in a peripheral device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    821+,   for subject matter directed to Input/Output processing and
    communication between peripherals and computers or digital data processing
    systems.


CLS 395/183.21
TXT Output recording (e.g., signature or trace):

    Subject matter under subclass 183.01 further including means or steps for
    recording output from the system under test or diagnosis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184.01, for error logging without recording.

    185.01, for error detecting, per se.


CLS 395/183.22
TXT Operator interface for diagnosing or testing:

    Subject matter under subclass 183.01 further including means or steps for
    interfacing with an operator for fault locating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, appropriate subclasses for information
    displaying.


CLS 395/184.01
TXT Performance monitoring for fault avoidance:

    Subject matter under subclass 180 further including means or steps for
    monitoring event durations and event counts for anticipating or recognizing
    faults.

    (1)     Note. This subclass relates to the fault avoidance species of
    reliability.

    (2)     Note. This subclass includes event duration and counting
    arrangements for statistical analysis of system operations and predictive
    methods of fault avoidance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200.54, for computer network managing including monitoring.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 402 for
    operations research, subclasses 550+ for measuring, monitoring, and testing
    applications of computers, and subclasses 715.011+ for various arithmetic
    data processing operations performed by digital calculating computers.

    368,    Horology: Time Measuring Systems or Devices, appropriate subclasses
    for time measurement.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclasses 64+ for shift registers, and subclasses
    107+ and 11+ for counters.


CLS 395/185.01
TXT Error detection or notification:

    Subject matter under subclass 180 further including means or steps for
    automated on-line sensing of errors, or for storing or propagating such
    error information (e.g., error logging).

    (1)     Note. In keeping with the philosophy of the reliability and
    availability array in Class 395, the art in this and indented subclasses
    represents subcombinations specific to reliability and availability.
    Overall combinations utilizing these subcombinations appear higher in this
    array.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180+,   for fault recovery in combination with error detecting or notifying.

    183.01+,for fault locating combined with error detecting or notifying.

    184.01, for performance monitoring for fault avoidance in combination with
    error detecting or notifying.


CLS 395/185.02
TXT State error (i.e., content of instruction, data, or message):

    Subject matter under subclass 185.01 further including means or steps for
    detecting an error based on the information content of an instruction, a
    message, or data.


CLS 395/185.03
TXT State out of sequence:

    Subject matter under subclass 185.02 wherein an ordering of state
    information related to a succession of data, instructions etc., is the
    basis for state analysis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    381     through 383, for instruction fetching and prefetching.

    580     through 591, for branching instruction processing.

    670+,   for task management and control, per se.

    868+,   for Input/Output device interrupt processing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclass 204 for virtual address branch or jump address predicting; and
    subclass  213 for generalized prefetch, look-ahead, jump, or predictive
    address generating.


CLS 395/185.04
TXT Control flow state sequence monitored (e.g., watchdog processor for
    control-flow checking):

    Subject matter under subclass 185.03 to detect state errors in an
    instruction data sequence.


CLS 395/185.05
TXT Error checking code:

    Subject matter under subclass 185.03 for detecting consistency of
    information by using a code (e.g., parity, etc.) which is generated from
    the information.

    (1)     Note. Error checking codes are a function of the actual data of
    concern, as exemplified in one simple form by parity data.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclasses
    40.11+ for memory access block coding, and subclass 51.1 for storage
    accessing.

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclasses 161+ for preventing the corruption, loss, alteration, or
    disclosure of data by storing, as in making backup copies.


CLS 395/185.06
TXT Address error:

    Subject matter under subclass 185.02 further including means or steps for
    detection or notification of error of address state.


CLS 395/185.07
TXT Storage content error:

    Subject matter under subclass 185.02 further including means or steps for
    detection or notification of error of storage state.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclass 144 for cache status data bits (e.g., bits indicating modified,
    valid, dirty data), wherein coherency for each unit or block of data
    includes associated identifier bit(s) to indicate the validity status of an
    associated cached location; subclass 156 for status storage control
    techniques including provisions for storing status data (e.g., control
    status words, program status words, etc.) associated with memory accessing
    and control; and subclass 165 for movement/transfers of data amongst
    locations within a same memory level.


CLS 395/185.08
TXT Timing error (e.g., watchdog timer time-out):

    Subject matter under subclass 185.01 further including means or steps for
    detection or notification of error of timing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    551+,   for clock synchronization, per se.

    553,    for synchronization maintenance of plural processors, per se.

    555+,   for digital data processing system clock, pulse and timing interval
    generation, per se.

    670+,   for task management, per se.


CLS 395/185.09
TXT Bus or I/O channel device fault:

    Subject matter under subclass 185.08 further including means or steps for
    detecting errors related to a flaw in a bus, peripheral, or I/O channel
    device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280+,   for system intraconnecting and bus processing, per se.

    821+,   for subject matter directed to Input/Output processing and
    communication between peripherals and computers or digital data processing
    systems.


CLS 395/185.1
TXT Error forwarding and presentation (e.g., operator console, error display):

    Subject matter under subclass 185.01 further including means or steps for
    propagating error information so as to make notification of detected error.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118+,   for presentation processing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, appropriate subclasses for information
    displaying.


CLS 395/186
TXT SECURITY:

    Subject matter under the class definition further including means or steps
    for increasing a system's extension of protection of system hardware,
    software, or data from maliciously caused destruction, unauthorized
    modification, or unauthorized disclosure to or by an end user.

    (1)     Note. This subclass is for protection against unauthorized use by a
    user. Fault recovery and locating, and fault detecting in a digital data
    processing system that is maliciously caused (e.g., by a computer virus),
    or the result of other unauthorized access, is classified elsewhere. See
    the SEARCH CLASS notes below.

    (2)     Note. Means or steps to prevent incorrect memory access requests
    that are not a system end-user request are classified elsewhere. See the
    SEARCH CLASS notes below.

    (3)     Note. Authorization control without significant data processing
    features is classified elsewhere. See the SEARCH CLASS notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180+,   for recovering from, locating, or detecting a system fault caused
    by malicious or unauthorized access (e.g., by virus).

    287+,   for regulating access of processors or memories to a bus.

    726,    for general purpose access regulating and arbitration.

    856+,   for regulating access of peripherals to computers or vice-versa.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclass 8 for digital logic
    circuits acting to disable or prevent access to stored data or designated
    integrated circuit structure.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 825.3+ for authorization
    control without significant data processing features claimed.

    380,    Cryptography, subclasses 3+ for stored information access or copy
    prevention (e.g., software program protection or computer virus detection)
    in combination with data encryption, subclasses 22 through 25 and 50 for
    electric signal modification, and other appropriate subclasses.

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclass 150 for regulating access to shared memories and subclasses 163+
    for preventing unauthorized memory access requests.


CLS 395/187.01
TXT Computer network:

    Subject matter under subclass 186 further including means or steps for
    providing system security at network level.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200.55, for controlling which of plural computers may transfer data via a
    communications medium.


CLS 395/188.01
TXT Password:

    Subject matter under subclass 186 further including means or steps for
    providing system security by employing checking or monitoring of
    information, such as authorization code data.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclasses
    40.11+ for memory access block coding, and subclass 51.1 for storage
    accessing error/fault detection techniques.

    380,    Cryptography, subclass 4 for stored digital data access or copy
    prevention in combination with data encryption; e.g., software program
    protection or computer virus detection in combination with data encryption.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 26.1 for subject matter which blocks
    access to a signal source or otherwise limits usage of modulated carrier
    equipment.

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclass 164 for memory access requiring authorization code information
    (e.g., password or key other than encryption key, etc.).


CLS 395/200.3
TXT MULTICOMPUTER DATA TRANSFER- RING:

    Subject matter under the class definition further comprising means or steps
    for transferring data among a plurality of spatially distributed (i.e.,
    situated at different locations) computers or digital data processing
    systems via one or more communications media (e.g., computer networks)
    wherein the computers or digital data processing systems employ the data in
    data processing before or after the transferring, and wherein the data
    processing affects the data transfer between the computers.

    (1)     Note. The subject matter of this subclass is characterized by data
    transfer occurring as an external communication between separate computers
    which themselves are distinguishable processing entities.

    (2)     Note. The basic distinctions between this subclass together with
    its indented subclasses and the communications classes (e.g., Classes 340,
    342, 343, 358, 370, 375, 379, 455, etc.) are (a) the subclasses herein
    include computers, rather than other data communications devices, and (b)
    the computers perform data processing in addition to transferring data
    therebetween. Overall combinations directed to a system for performing
    communications functions only are classified in the communications art
    classes. See the SEARCH CLASS notes below.

    (3)     Note. Processes and apparatus for preprocessing or postprocessing
    of signals in the data transfer to effect a particular method of
    communications (e.g., modulating, demodulating, encoding, decoding, phase
    locking) is classified in the appropriate communications class. See the
    SEARCH CLASS notes below for examples.

    (4)     Note. Subject matter relating to transmission or interconnection
    systems not classifiable herein and not appropriate for the communication
    classes is classified in the residual class for all transmission or
    interconnection systems. See the SEARCH CLASS notes below.

    (5)     Note. Processes and apparatus for error detection and correction
    (EDAC), fault detection and recovery, and for increasing the probability of
    a computer, digital data processing system, or computer network performing
    correctly (i.e., increasing its reliability and availability), per se, are
    classified elsewhere. See the SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS notes below.

    (6)     Note. Processes and apparatus for enhancing the security of
    computers, digital data processing systems, and computer networks, per se,
    are classified elsewhere. See the SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS notes below.

    (7)     Note. Processes and apparatus for housing or mounting computers,
    digital data processing  systems, calculators, or components thereof are
    classified elsewhere. See the SEARCH CLASS notes below.

    (8)     Note.  Subject matter relating to neu-
    ral networks, per se, are classified elsewhere. See the SEARCH THIS CLASS,
    SUBCLASS notes below.

    (9)     Note. Subject matter relating to distributed or remote accessing of
    databases or files, per se, is classified elsewhere. See the SEARCH THIS
    CLASS, SUBCLASS notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21+,    for neural networks.

    180+,   for increasing the probability of a computer, digital data
    processing system, or a computer network performing correctly
    (i.e.,increasing its reliability and availability).

    186+,   for protecting a computer, digital data processing system, or
    computer network from unauthorized use (e.g., virus detecting, user
    identifying, etc.).

    280+,   for transferring data among the memories, processors, and buses of
    a single computer.

    312,    for crossbar switching.

    511,    for transferring data between locations in the same memory or
    between memories.

    526,    for transferring data between graphic system components in a
    computer graphic processing  system.

    566,    for processing control for data transfer.

    601+,   for computerized database and file accessing and retrieving.

    611+,   for organizing and interrelating data or files.

    616+,   for managing and maintaining files and databases.

    651+,   for determining the initial configuration of a single computer.

    653,    for altering an established configuration of a single computer.

    670+,   for administrating process or job execution over a digital data
    processing system.

    680+    for interprogram or interprocess communicating.

    712,    for installing and managing particular versions of executable
    programs and operating systems in a single computer.

    800.01+, for digital data processing system architectures such as multiple
    instruction multiple data (MIMD) computers, vector and array computers, and
    single-chip computers.

    821+,   for transferring data from one or more peripherals to one or more
    computers for the latter to process, store, or further transfer, or for
    transferring data from the computers to the peripherals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, for all subject
    matter relating to electrical transmission or interconnection systems not
    classified elsewhere.

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, appropriate subclasses for
    electronic digital logic circuitry.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 825+ for controlling one or
    more devices to obtain a plurality of results by transmission of a
    designated one of plural distinctive control signals over a smaller number
    of communication lines or channels, particularly subclass 825.02 for tree
    or cascade se-lective communication, subclasses 825.03+ for channel
    selection, subclass 825.05 for a plurality of controlled devices connected
    by a communication line in a closed series configuration, subclasses
    825.06+ for communication systems where status of a controlled device is
    communicated, subclasses 825.2+ for synchronizing selective communication
    systems, subclasses 825.44+ for code responsive selective call receiving,
    subclasses 825.5+ for lockout or priority in selective communication
    systems, subclasses 825.52+ for addressing, and subclasses 825.57+ for
    pulse responsive actuation.

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), various subclasses for communications via
    directive radio waves and related systems.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 1+ for plural display systems.

    348,    Television, various subclasses for generating, processing,
    transmitting or transiently displaying a sequence of images, either locally
    or remotely, in which the local light variations composing the images may
    change with time (e.g., natural "live" scenes).

    358,    Facsimile, various subclasses for systems that transmit and
    reproduce arbitrarily composed pictures in which the local light variations
    composing each of the pictures are not subject to variation with time;
    e.g., documents (both written and printed), maps, charts, photographs
    (other than motion picture film).

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, in
    particular subclasses 109+ for optical communication in combination with
    electrical communication and subclasses 115+ for multiplexing in an optical
    communication system.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 683+ for
    housings or mounting assemblies for computers, digital data processing
    systems, calculators, or components thereof.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 131+
    for plural processors in a digital control system application, and FOR
    514+, particularly FOR 514 through FOR 520, for foreign art collections
    pertaining to communication systems which may employ computers.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, for the simultaneous transmission of two
    or more signals over a common medium where the transmitted data are generic
    to the transmission activity, particularly subclasses 351+ for time
    division multiplex (TDM) switching, subclasses 498+ for time division bus
    transmission, and subclass 475 for asynchronous TDM communications
    including addressing.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclasses
    30+ for correcting errors in the transmitted data such as parity checking
    and cyclical redundancy checking.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, various subclasses for digital
    communications processing including modulating, demodulating, encoding,
    decoding, and phase locking.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, various subclasses for two-way
    electrical communication of audio information of arbitrary content.

    380,    Cryptography, various subclasses for concealing, obscuring, and
    extracting intelligible information by, for example, coding and decoding.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, various
    subclasses for wired one-way audio systems, per se.

    386,    Television Signal Processing for Dynamic Recording or Reproducing,
    various subclasses for apparatus and corresponding processes for processing
    (which may include receiving) a sequence of images in which the light
    variation composing the images may change with time (e.g., natural "live"
    scenes) for dynamic recording or reproducing of the sequence of images.

    455,    Telecommunications, for modulated carrier wave communications, per
    se.


CLS 395/200.31
TXT Distributed data processing:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.3 wherein the separate computers or
    digital data processing systems performing different tasks share data to
    accomplish an overall goal.

    (1)     Note.  Means or steps for computerized database and file accessing
    and retrieving, especially hierarchical, bit-mapped and flat indexing,
    hashing, stapling, and containerizing database operations and methods are
    classified elsewhere. See the SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS notes below.

    (2)     Note. Means or steps for organizing and interrelating data or
    files, including relational, network, hierarchical, and entity-relationship
    models for databases are classified elsewhere. See the SEARCH THIS CLASS,
    SUBCLASS notes below.

    (3)     Note.  Means or steps for managing and maintaining files and
    databases in computers and digital data processing systems are classified
    elsewhere. See the SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS notes below.

    (4)     Note.  Means or steps for exchanging data or messages between two
    executing programs or processes with only nominal recitation of processing
    data transferred between the computers are classified elsewhere. See the
    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS notes below.

    (5)     Note.  Means or steps for controlling operations to execute
    processes or jobs within the operating system environment of a digital data
    processing system with only nominal recitation of processing data
    transferred between the computers are classified elsewhere. See the SEARCH
    THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200.38, for master/slave computer arrangements for transferring data.

    474+,   for shared memory accessing and control.

    601+,   for means or steps for computerized database and file accessing and
    retrieving, especially hierarchical, bit-mapped and flat indexing, hashing,
    stapling, and containerizing database operations and methods.

    611+,   for means or steps for organizing and interrelating data or files,
    including relational, network, hierarchical, and entity-relationship models
    for databases.

    616+,   for means or steps for managing and maintaining files and databases
    in computers and digital data processing systems.

    670+,   for means or steps for controlling operations to execute processes
    or jobs within the operating system environment of a digital data
    processing system with only nominal recitation of processing data
    transferred between the computers.

    680+,   for means or steps for exchanging data or messages between two
    executing programs or processes with only nominal recitation of processing
    data transferred between the computers.

    800.28, for distributed processing system architectures.


CLS 395/200.32
TXT Processing agent:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.31 wherein a data processing entity,
    executing within a computer, autonomously establishes a dialog (e.g., a
    negotiation) with another computer, on behalf of a user or another
    processing entity, in order to transfer data between the computers.


CLS 395/200.33
TXT Client/server:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.31 wherein at least one local computer
    provides a user interface and performs local data processing to interact
    with at least one remote computer which implements data processing (e.g.,
    data management, data sharing) within a generic time-sharing environment in
    response to the local computer to transfer data between the local computer
    and the remote computer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    326+,   for operator interfaces.

    335,    for particular operator client/server interfaces customized by
    modifying links between interface features and routines performed.


CLS 395/200.34
TXT Computer conferencing:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.3 further comprising means or steps for
    enabling collaborative processing of data by the computers or digital data
    processing systems.

    (1)     Note.  Means or steps for computerized database and file accessing
    and retrieving, especially hierarchical, bit-mapped and flat indexing,
    hashing, stapling, and containerizing database operations and methods are
    classified elsewhere. See the SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS notes below.

    (2)     Note.  Means or steps for organizing and interrelating data or
    files, including relational, network, hierarchical, and entity-relationship
    models for databases are classified elsewhere. See the SEARCH THIS CLASS,
    SUBCLASS notes below.

    (3)     Note.  Means or steps for managing and maintaining files and
    databases in computers and digital data processing systems are classified
    elsewhere. See the SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    330,    for operator interfaces for computer conferencing.

    601+,   for means or steps for computerized database and file accessing and
    retrieving, especially hierarchical, bit-mapped and flat indexing, hashing,
    stapling, and containerizing database operations and methods.

    611+,   for means or steps for organizing and interrelating data or files,
    including relational, network, hierarchical, and entity-relationship models
    for databases.

    616+,   for means or steps for managing and maintaining files and databases
    in computers and digital data processing systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 260+ for multiplexed
    communications enabling three or more terminals to be included in a single
    call connection.


CLS 395/200.35
TXT Cooperative computer processing:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.34 wherein the plural computers or
    digital data processing systems jointly operate on the same data.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331+,   for operator interfaces for cooperative computer work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 1+ for plural display systems.


CLS 395/200.36
TXT Demand based messaging:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.34 further comprising means or steps for
    processing user data in response to a demand to transfer data between the
    computers (e.g., electronic mail messaging).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 93+ for transmitting a
    digital message signal over a telephone line.


CLS 395/200.37
TXT Priority based messaging:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.34 further comprising means or steps for
    processing data in response to the priority characteristics of data
    transferred between the computers (e.g., message priority  alerts).


CLS 395/200.38
TXT Master/slave computer controlling:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.3 wherein one or more of the computers
    (i.e., master computers) regulates the operations of one or more of the
    other computers (i.e., slave computers).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200.31, for distributed data processing data transfer.

    290,    for master/slave controlling within a single digital data
    processing system.

    800.31, for master/slave distributed processing system architectures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 825+ for controlling one or
    more devices to obtain a plurality of results by transmission of a
    designated one of plural distinctive control signals over a smaller number
    of communication lines or channels, particularly subclass 825.06+ for
    communication systems where status of a controlled device is communicated.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 132 for
    master/slave arrangements in general purpose digital processing control
    systems (e.g., feedback control systems).


CLS 395/200.39
TXT Master/slave mode selecting:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.38 wherein at least one of the computers
    can function either as a master computer or as a slave computer.


CLS 395/200.4
TXT Slave computer locking:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.38 further comprising means or steps for
    restricting at least one of the slave computers to exchange data with only
    one of a plurality of master computers.


CLS 395/200.41
TXT Master accessing slave storage:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.38 further comprising means or steps for
    enabling at least one of the regulating (i.e., master) computers to store
    data to or read data from memory of at least one of the of the regulated
    (i.e., slave) computers.


CLS 395/200.42
TXT Computer-to-computer direct memory accessing:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.3 further comprising means or steps for
    transferring data between memories of different computers with minimal or
    no intervention from main processors of the computers.

    (1)     Note. Subject matter comprising means or steps for transferring
    data directly between the peripherals and memories of computers rather than
    between computers is classified elsewhere. See the SEARCH THIS CLASS,
    SUBCLASS note below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    842+,   for input/output data processing with direct memory accessing (DMA)
    for transferring data directly between the peripherals and memories of
    computers.


CLS 395/200.43
TXT Multicomputer data transferring via shared memory:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.3 wherein the computers transfer data
    through one or more memories accessible by the computers.

    (1)     Note.  Means or steps for employing shared memory in computer
    graphics processing and for accessing and controlling shared memory, per
    se, are classified elsewhere. See the SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS notes
    below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    474+,   for shared memory accessing and controlling, per se.

    512,    for employing shared memory in computer graphics processing.


CLS 395/200.44
TXT Plural shared memories:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.43 wherein at least one of the computers
    selects at least one of a plurality of memories and transfers the data
    through the selected memories.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    475,    for accessing shared solid-state memory within a single computer.


CLS 395/200.45
TXT Partitioned shared memory:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.43 wherein at least one of the computers
    transfers the data through a single memory, which is logically divided into
    sections, each of which is allocated to one of the computers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    456,    for partitioned cache accessing and control.

    480,    for dividing or segmenting a given logical memory into independent
    sections or domains.


CLS 395/200.46
TXT Accessing another computer's memory:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.43 wherein at least one of the computers
    directly transfers the data to or from memory collocated with and allocated
    to at least one of the other computers.


CLS 395/200.47
TXT Remote data accessing:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.3 wherein computers located at distant
    sites transfer data via at least one dedicated communications line (e.g., a
    telephone connection).

    (1)     Note.  Means or steps for computerized database and file accessing
    and retrieving, especially hierarchical, bit-mapped and flat indexing,
    hashing, stapling, and containerizing database operations and methods are
    classified elsewhere. See the SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS notes below.

    (2)     Note. Subject matter relating to transceivers including modems are
    classified elsewhere, per se. See the SEARCH CLASS notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    601+,   for means or steps for computerized database and file accessing and
    retrieving, especially hierarchical, bit-mapped and flat indexing, hashing,
    stapling, and containerizing database operations and methods.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 825+ for selective
    electrical communication systems.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 219+ for transceivers
    including modems, per se.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, various subclasses for two-way
    transmission of intelligible audio information having arbitrary content
    over an electrical conductor.


CLS 395/200.48
TXT Using interconnected networks:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.47 wherein independent computers are
    linked by one or more interconnected networks (e.g., wide area networks
    (WANs), the "Internet").


CLS 395/200.49
TXT Accessing a remote server:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.47 wherein large blocks of data (e.g.,
    streamed data) are transferred between a remote file server and a
    requesting computer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200.61,         for protocols enabling streamed
    data transfer from computer-to-
    computer.


CLS 395/200.5
TXT Network computer configuring:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.3 further comprising means or steps for
    assigning operating characteristics to the computers.

    (1)     Note.  Classification herein is proper if the configuration
    processing operation involves a data transfer dialog between two or more
    computers which exchange status data in order to determine the operating
    characteristics of one or more of the computers.

    (2)     Note. The result of the configuration processing as applied herein
    is at least semi-permanent (i.e., the configuration data are maintained by
    the configured computer once these are established without need to
    reestablish the configuration data for a different processing session).

    (3)     Note.  Means or steps for establishing the operational parameters
    by transferring data between two or more computers which process data
    pertaining to the parameters of the transfer connection or the processing
    session in order to determine the operating mode for one or more of the
    computers which will be connected to, or engage in a processing session
    with, another computer is classified elsewhere. See the SEARCH THIS CLASS,
    SUBCLASS notes below.

    (4)     Note.  Means or steps for configuring or reconfiguring a single
    computer without processing data transferred between the computer being
    configured and another computer in order to determine the operating
    characteristics to be configured is classified elsewhere. See the SEARCH
    THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS notes below.

    (5)     Note.  Means or steps for installing and managing particular
    versions of executable programs and operating systems with only nominal
    recitation of processing data transferred between the computers are
    classified elsewhere. See the SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200.58, for establishing the operational parameters by transferring data
    between two or more computers which process data pertaining to the
    parameters of the transfer connection or the processing session in order to
    determine the operating mode for one or more of the computers which will be
    connected to, or engage in a processing session with, another computer.

    284,    for system configuring by providing arrangement data to a processor
    in a single digital data processing system.

    651+,   for determining the initial configuration of a single computer.

    653,    for altering an established configuration of a single computer

    712,    for installing and managing particular versions of executable
    programs and operating systems with only nominal recitation of processing
    data transferred between the computers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 825+ for controlling one or
    more devices to obtain a plurality of results by transmission of a
    designated one of plural distinctive control signals over a smaller number
    of communication lines or channels, particularly subclasses 825.5+ for
    lockout or priority in selective communication systems.


CLS 395/200.51
TXT Reconfiguring:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.5 wherein one of the computers transfers
    data (e.g., addresses, allocation tables, operating programs, etc.) to or
    from another computer which changes the functional configuration of one of
    the computers within the network after it has been established.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    653,    for altering an established configuration of a single computer.

    800.15, for reconfiguring array processor architectures.


CLS 395/200.52
TXT Initializing:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.5 wherein one of the computers transfers
    data (e.g., addresses, allocation tables, operating programs, etc.) to or
    from another computer which establishes the functional configuration of one
    of the computers within the network.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    651+,   for determining the initial configuration of a single computer.


CLS 395/200.53
TXT Computer network managing:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.3 further comprising means or steps for
    managing the resources of the computers connected by a computer network or
    of the network itself.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 254+ for determining multiplex
    network configurations.


CLS 395/200.54
TXT Computer network monitoring:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.53 further comprising means or steps for
    detecting or observing operating characteristics or conditions of computers
    connected through a computer network or of the network itself.

    (1)     Note. Protocol analyzers and logic analyzers are classified
    elsewhere, per se. See the SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS notes below.

    (2)     Note. Data processing systems or calculating computers designed for
    or utilized in the indication of a condition relating to a measurement,
    analysis, or continuous detection (i.e., measuring, testing, or monitoring)
    are classified elsewhere. See the SEARCH CLASS notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183.15, for protocol analyzers and logic analyzers.

    184.01, for performance monitoring for fault avoidance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 825+ for controlling one or
    more devices to obtain a plurality of results by transmission of a
    designated one of plural distinctive control signals over a smaller number
    of communication lines or channels, particularly subclasses 825.06+ for
    communication systems where status of a controlled device is communicated.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 550+
    for data processing systems or calculating computers designed for or
    utilized in the indication of a condition relating to a measurement,
    analysis, or continuous detection.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 252+ for determining
    communications parameters.


CLS 395/200.55
TXT Computer network access regulating:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.53 further comprising means or steps for
    controlling which of the plural computers may transfer data via the
    communications media.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    187.01, for providing system security at the network level.

    200.59, for controlling access to network resources.

    287+,   for regulating access of processors or memories to a bus.

    477,    for regulating access to shared memories.

    726,    for general purpose access locking.

    727,    for general purpose access polling.

    728+,   for general purpose access arbitrating.

    856+,   for regulating access of peripherals to computers or vice versa.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 825+ for controlling one or
    more devices to obtain a plurality of results by transmission of a
    designated one of plural distinctive control signals over a smaller number
    of communication lines or channels, particularly subclasses 825.5+ for
    lockout or priority in selective communication systems.


CLS 395/200.56
TXT Network resource allocating:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.53 further comprising means or steps for
    apportioning resources to one or more computers on a network.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    287+,   for regulating access of processors or  memories to a bus.

    477,    for regulating access to shared memories.

    726,    for general purpose access locking.

    728+,   for general purpose access polling.

    856+,   for regulating access of peripherals to  computers or vice-versa.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 825+ for controlling one or
    more devices to obtain a plurality of results by transmission of a
    designated one of plural distinctive control signals over a smaller number
    of communication lines or channels, particularly subclasses 825.5+ for
    lockout or priority in selective communication systems.


CLS 395/200.57
TXT Computer-to-computer session/connection establishing:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.3 comprising means or steps for creating
    a session connection between the computers.

    (1)     Note. As used herein, a session is the time during which at least
    two computers maintain an active connection between themselves in order to
    support an ongoing dialog for transferring data between the computers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200.79, for interconnecting plural computer networks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 825.01 through 825.04 for
    selective electrical communication systems with channel selecting.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, for simultaneously transmitting two or
    more signals over a common medium, par- ticularly subclasses 431+ for
    asynchronous time-division multiplexing (TDM) communications channel
    assignment techniques.


CLS 395/200.58
TXT Session/connection parameter setting:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.57 further comprising means or steps for
    establishing at least one operational parameter for transferring data for a
    session or connection between the computers (e.g., protocol, address, or
    rate selection).

    (1)     Note.  Classification herein is proper if establishing the
    operational parameter involves  transferring data between two or more
    computers which process data pertaining to the parameters of the transfer
    connection or the processing session in order to determine the operating
    mode for one or more of the computers which will be connected to, or engage
    in a processing session with, another computer.

    (2)     Note. The operating mode established by the data processing
    operation herein is transient (i.e., the operating parameters are used by
    the computers for only the established connection or session and must be
    reestablished for a different processing session or connection).

    (3)     Note. Configuration processing operations involving a data transfer
    dialog between two or more computers which process status data in order to
    determine the operating characteristics of one or more of the computers are
    classified elsewhere. See the SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200.5,  for configuration processing operations involving a transfer dialog
    between two or more computers which process status data in order to
    determine the operating characteristics of one or more of the computers.


CLS 395/200.59
TXT Network resources access controlling:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.57 further comprising means or steps for
    controlling or limiting access by computers on a network to resources on
    the network (e.g., trusted third party authentication).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    187.01, for providing system security at the network level.

    200.55, for regulating access to the network communications media.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 825.34 for selective
    electrical communications systems with intelligence comparison for identity
    authentication.

    380,    Cryptography, subclasses 23 through 25 for systems employing
    encrypted user or record actuated authentication, and subclass 49 for
    digital control or digital computer communication in which an encrypting or
    decrypting device utilizes a digital signal manipulation technique on the
    information signal.


CLS 395/200.6
TXT Computer-to-computer protocol implementing:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.3 further comprising means or steps for
    controlling the format and relative timing of transfer of data between the
    computers in order to maintain communication.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 465+ for adaptive
    communication techniques for data carried in plural channels.


CLS 395/200.61
TXT Computer-to-computer data streaming:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.6 further comprising means or steps for
    processing streamed data transferred between computers wherein the data are
    transferred more or less continuously.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200.49,         for data transfer between a remote file server and a
    requesting computer where the data may be streamed.


CLS 395/200.62
TXT Computer-to-computer data transfer regulating:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.6 further comprising means or steps for
    correcting or modifying the data transfer operation to conform with the
    operating conditions of the computers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    881,    for input/output (I/O) synchronous data transfer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, particularly subclasses 229+ for data
    flow congestion prevention or congestion control in a TDM communications
    system.


CLS 395/200.63
TXT Transfer speed regulating:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.62 further comprising means or steps for
    controlling the aggregate rate at which data are exchanged between the
    computers (e.g., speed changing, rate optimization, packet size
    optimization).

    (1)     Note. Means or steps for controlling a first rate at which some of
    the computers transmit data such that the first rate does not exceed a
    second rate at which other of the computers can receive data are classified
    herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    849,    for controlling the flow of data transmission to or from
    peripherals.

    880,    for input/output (I/O) transfer rate regulating.


CLS 395/200.64
TXT Data flow compensating:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.62 further comprising means or steps for
    transferring data from a first computer at a given rate or time,
    temporarily storing the data, and transferring the data to another computer
    at a different rate or at a later time (e.g., data discarding, buffer
    overflow control, space or bit insertion, buffer status flag supervising,
    transfer buffer management).

    (1)     Note.  Memory devices, per se, are classified in their respective
    device classes.  More specifically, registers are classified in Class 235.
    Static memory devices including internal elements of memories are
    classified in Class 365.  Display memory organizations and structures
    (i.e., selective visual display systems) are classified in Class 345.  See
    the SEARCH CLASS notes below.

    (2)     Note.  Buffers used in static presentation processing, computer
    graphics processing, input/output processing, or visual displaying and as
    caches for memory accessing, addressing, or controlling are classified
    elsewhere.  See the SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    for page/frame buffers in printers or other static presentation
    processing  devices

    403,    for addressing cache memory with specific memory configuration.

    445+,   for cache memory accessing and control to transfer data between
    processor(s) and main memory.

    509,    for video memories and frame buffers in computer graphics
    processing systems

    872+,   for input/output (I/O) data buffering.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, various subclasses for basic machines and associated
    indicating mechanisms for ascertaining the number of movements of various
    devices and machines and machines made from these basic machines alone and
    in combination with various perfecting features such as printers and
    recording means.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, particularly subclasses 27 and 507+, for
    buffers and other storage devices in visual display systems.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, various subclasses for
    static memory devices including internal elements of the memory,
    particularly subclass 189.05 for buffering or latching data being read from
    or written to memory and subclass 230.08 for buffering and latching address
    data being employed to access memory.


CLS 395/200.65
TXT Congestion avoiding:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.62 further comprising means or steps for
    controlling the flow of data between the computers to prevent overfilling
    or overcrowding the computers or the communications media with data (e.g.,
    throttling, traffic management, status signaling).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 229+ for avoiding or
    regulating an actual or potential traffic overload condition.


CLS 395/200.66
TXT Computer-to-computer data framing:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.6 further comprising means or steps for
    grouping data into a specified arrangement in order to transfer the grouped
    data between the computers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 825+ for controlling one or
    more devices to obtain a plurality of results by transmission of a
    designated one of plural distinctive control signals over a smaller number
    of communication lines or channels, particularly subclasses 825.57+ for
    pulse responsive actuation.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 470 through 476 for frame
    manipulating to facilitate the simultaneous transmission of two or more
    signals over a common medium.


CLS 395/200.67
TXT Computer-to-computer handshaking:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.6 further comprising means or steps for
    exchanging instruction data between computers to signal readiness to
    exchange user data or to signal receipt of user data.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    285+,   for handshaking protocols between components of a single digital
    data processing system.


CLS 395/200.68
TXT Computer-to-computer data routing:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.3 further comprising means or steps for
    selecting a path via which the computers will transfer data.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    311+,   for switching for intrasystem connection path selecting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 825+ for controlling one or
    more devices to obtain a plurality of results by transmission of a
    designated one of plural distinctive control signals over a smaller number
    of communication lines or channels, particularly subclasses 825.03+ for
    channel selection and subclasses 825.79 and 825.8 for matrix connection
    selection.

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    117 for switching multiplexed optical communications.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, for the simultaneous transmission of two
    or more signals over a common medium, particularly subclasses 351+ for
    asynchronous TDM communications pathfinding or routing.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 219+ for plural exchange
    networks or interconnections and subclasses 242+ for centralized switching
    systems.


CLS 395/200.69
TXT Alternate path routing:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.68 further comprising means or steps for
    selecting a substitute path when a desired path is unavailable (e.g.,
    blocked path).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 825+ for selective
    communications, particularly subclass 825.01 for spare channel selecting.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 216+ for fault recovery in a
    multiplex switching system.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, particularly subclasses 221 and 273 for
    alternate routing in a telephone system.


CLS 395/200.7
TXT Prioritized data routing:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.68 further comprising means or steps for
    transferring the data in accordance with a ranking assigned to the data.


CLS 395/200.71
TXT Least weight routing:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.68 further comprising means or steps for
    selecting the path between source and destination by which the data are
    transferred by optimizing at least one predetermined criteria (e.g., cost,
    connect time, path length/delay, preferred routing/carriers, bandwidth
    utilization).


CLS 395/200.72
TXT Routing data updating:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.68 further comprising means or steps for
    periodically exchanging control data indicating how to transfer data among
    nodes or routes in a network.


CLS 395/200.73
TXT Decentralized controlling:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.68 wherein each respective computer
    selects its own path by which to transfer data associated with its
    individual transfer operation or node (e.g., message flooding).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 902+ for packet switching
    systems.


CLS 395/200.74
TXT Centralized controlling:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.68 wherein one computer selects the
    path(s) used for data transfer by each of the other computers.


CLS 395/200.75
TXT Computer-to-computer data addressing:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.3 further comprising means or steps for
    transferring address data associated with user data between the computers
    to ensure that associated user data are transferred to or from the intended
    computers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401+,   for addressing specific types of memories.

    410+,   for addressing in computer systems, per se.

    823+,   for employing addresses for input/output (I/O) processing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 825+ for controlling one or
    more devices to obtain a plurality of results by transmission of a
    designated one of plural distinctive control signals over a smaller number
    of communication lines or channels, particularly subclasses 825.52+ for
    addressing, and subclasses 825.57+ for pulse responsive actuation.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, for the simultaneous transmission of two
    or more signals over a common medium, particularly subclasses 474 and 475
    for asynchronous time division multiplex communications including
    addressing.


CLS 395/200.76
TXT Computer-to-computer data modifying:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.3 further comprising means or steps for
    changing a format of the data transferred between the computers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 50+ for generic
    logic circuits for transforming digital signals in one code to digital
    signals in another code and subclasses 126+ for convertors for transforming
    analog signals to digital signals and vice versa.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 715.03
    for electric digital calculating computers performing specialized functions
    for converting data formats.


CLS 395/200.77
TXT Compressing/decompressing:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.76 wherein the data are processed to
    reduce the transfer payload volume or to recover the data from a compressed
    payload.

    (1)     Note. Compression and decompression of data, per se, is classified
    elsewhere. See the SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS and SEARCH CLASS notes below.

    (2)     Note. Compression/decompression of the data herein occurs in
    addition to other processing of the data by the computers to facilitate the
    transferring of the result of the other processing performed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.91+,  for compressing or expanding the bandwidth of an audio signal.

    114,    for communication of compressed data in a static presentation
    system.

    612,    for manipulating data structures in a database system.

    888,    for data compression or expansion for improving transfer efficiency
    between peripheral devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclass 60 for converting
    digital codes to or from a packed format.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 715.02
    for electric digital calculating computers performing specialized functions
    for compressing or decompressing data.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 477 for conserving
    transmission bandwidth and 521 for time compression or expansion.

    382,    Image Analysis, subclasses 232+ for compressing and decompressing
    image data.


CLS 395/200.78
TXT Multicomputer synchronizing:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.3 further comprising means or steps for
    matching timing between the computers.

    (1)     Note.  Classification herein is proper if data (e.g., tokens,
    semaphores) are transferred between the computers for processing to
    accomplish synchronization of the computers.

    (2)     Note.  Single clock or timing circuit control of processors, plural
    clocks, or timing circuits synchronized to control the processors, or
    operations synchronized to occur on the same clocking or timing cycle is
    classified elsewhere. See the SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    551+,   for generalized processor timing operations.

    553,    for single clock or timing circuit control of processors, plural
    clocks, or timing circuits synchronized to control the processors, or
    operations synchronized to occur on the same clocking or timing cycle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 825+ for controlling one or
    more devices to obtain a plurality of results by transmission of a
    designated one of plural distinctive control signals over a smaller number
    of communication lines or channels, particularly subclasses 825.2+ for
    synchronizing selective communication systems.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 503+ for synchronizing
    information transmitted via time channels.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 354+ for pulse or
    digital communications synchronizing.


CLS 395/200.79
TXT Multiple network interconnecting:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.3 further comprising means or steps for
    coupling plural networks so that data can be transferred therebetween.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 825+ for controlling one or
    more devices to obtain a plurality of results by transmission of a
    designated one of plural distinctive control signals over a smaller number
    of communication lines or channels, particularly subclass 825.02 for tree
    or cascade selective communication.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, for the simultaneous transmission of two
    or more signals over a common medium, particularly subclasses 489+ and 901
    for time division bus transmission.


CLS 395/200.8
TXT Network-to-computer interfacing:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.3 further comprising means or steps for
    integrating the computers with networks for orderly, efficient operations.

    (1)     Note. Transceivers including modems are classified elsewhere, per
    se. See the SEARCH CLASS notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500,    for general purpose compatibility, simulation, or emulation of
    system components.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 825+ for controlling one or
    more devices to obtain a plurality of results by transmission of a
    designated one of plural distinctive control signals over a smaller number
    of communication lines or channels, particularly subclass 825.02 for tree
    or cascade selective communication.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, various subclasses for routers,
    switchers, and related subject matter, especially subclass 463 for circuits
    or interfaces for connecting a user to a network.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 219+ for transceivers
    including modems, per se.


CLS 395/200.81
TXT Ring computer networking:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.3 wherein the computers are connected
    sequentially in a loop configuration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 825+ for controlling one or
    more devices to obtain a plurality of results by transmission of a
    designated one of plural distinctive control signals over a smaller number
    of communication lines or channels, particularly subclass 825.05 for a
    plurality of controlled devices connected by a communication line in a
    closed series configuration.

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    119 for multiplexing communications within optical local area networks
    configured as a loop.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 452+ for assigning
    communications channels on a ring or loop and subclass 909 for token ring
    LANs.


CLS 395/200.82
TXT Star or tree computer networking:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.3 wherein the computers are connected via
    the communications media in a branched configuration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Selective Communications, subclass 825.02 for selectively operating
    alternate circuitry branches which exercise control of succeeding circuitry.

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    120 and 121 for multiplexing communications within optical local area
    networks in active or passive star configurations.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclass 407 for interconnected star
    couplers and subclass 408 for nodes interconnected in a hierarchy to form a
    tree.


CLS 395/200.83
TXT Bused computer networking:

    Subject matter under subclass 200.3 wherein the computers are connected to
    a common transmission medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280+,   for intrasystem connecting using buses and bus transaction
    processing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 431+ for assigning channels to
    subscriber terminals and subclass 910 for carrier sense multiple access
    LANs.


CLS 395/280
TXT INTRASYSTEM CONNECTING (E.G., BUSES AND BUS TRANSACTION PROCESSING):

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising means or steps for
    interconnecting or communicating between component(s) connected to an
    interconnection medium (e.g., bus) within a single digital data processing
    system.

    (1)     Note. This subclass is for interfacing between compatible
    components only. Components that can communicate information without any
    format changes or translation are classified in this subclass. Interfaces
    between incompatible digital processing components are classified elsewhere
    in this class. See SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS, below.

    (2)     Note. This subclass requires more than nominal recitation of
    intrasystem connections and communication. However, a detailed recitation
    of a processing architecture art area such as an MIMD, vector, or array
    processor or single chip microprocessor having a connecting feature which
    is nominally or particularly recited is excluded herein and classified with
    the particular processing architecture. See the SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS
    notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200.3+, for data transferring among a plurality of spatially distributed
    computers or digital data processing systems.

    500,    for interfacing between incompatible components.

    800.01+, for particular processing architecture art areas including MIMD,
    vector, or array processors or single chip microprocessors which may
    include some connecting feature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclass 30 for bus or line
    terminating circuitry, and subclasses 62+ for generic digital logic, gate
    level, and interface circuitry.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 825+ for controlling one or
    more devices to obtain a plurality of results by transmission of a
    designated one of plural distinctive control signals over a smaller number
    of communication lines or channels, particularly subclass 825.02 for tree
    or cascade selective communication, subclasses 825.03+ for channel
    selection, subclass 825.05 for a plurality of controlled devices connected
    by a communication line in a closed series configuration, 825.06+ for
    communication systems where status of a controlled device is communicated,
    subclasses 825.2+ for synchronizing selective communication systems,
    subclasses 825.5+ for lockout or priority in selective communication
    systems, subclasses 825.52+ for addressing, and subclasses 825.57+ for
    pulse responsive actuation.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, for the simultaneous transmission of two
    or more signals over a common medium, particularly subclasses 254+ for
    network configuration determination, and subclasses 351+ for pathfinding or
    routing which includes circuit switching or packet switching.


CLS 395/281
TXT Bus expansion or extension:

    Subject matter under subclass 280 including means or steps for electrically
    connecting additional circuit boards to the interconnection medium.

    (1)     Note. This subclass will accept computer docking stations for
    docking portable computers.


CLS 395/282
TXT Card insertion:

    Subject matter under subclass 281 wherein additional circuit boards are
    capable of being plugged into or removed from a motherboard, backplane, or
    bus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    safety and protection of systems and devices.


CLS 395/283
TXT Hot insertion:

    Subject matter under subclass 282 including means or steps for allowing
    plug-in or removal of the additional circuit boards into a powered
    motherboard or backplane.


CLS 395/284
TXT System configuring:

    Subject matter under subclass 280 including means or steps for utilizing a
    hardware structure for providing to a processor arrangement data of the
    digital data processing system including characteristics of the digital
    data processing system's components.

    (1)     Note. Configuration at booting via software is classified elsewhere
    in this class. See SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS, below.

    (2)     Note. Assigning operating characteristics to peripherals is
    classified elsewhere in this class. See SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS, below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    651     through 653, for digital data processing system initialization and
    configuration at boot-time.

    828,    for assigning operating characteristics to peripherals.


CLS 395/285
TXT Protocol:

    Subject matter under subclass 280 including means or steps for providing an
    exchange of information in accordance with a set of rules or standards
    designed to enable digital data processing system components to connect
    with each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200.6+  for computer- to-computer data transfer protocol implementing.

    831,    for Input/Output protocol selecting for data transfer between a
    computer and peripheral(s).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, various subclasses for residual
    electrical communication systems and see related Class 342 and Class 343.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, various subclasses for generic
    multiplexing and demultiplexing systems.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, various subclasses for generic
    pulse or digital communication systems.


CLS 395/286
TXT Using transmitter and receiver:

    Subject matter under subclass 285 including means or steps using a
    transmitter and receiver for exchanging the information between the digital
    data processing system components.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 219+ for transceivers.


CLS 395/287
TXT Bus access regulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 280 including means or steps for providing
    control signals and commands to digital data processing system components
    connected to the bus in order to maintain information-handling or bus
    activities.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200.55, for computer network access regulating in multicomputer data
    transferring

    670,    for task management and control related to process or job
    execution, and subclass 652 for process scheduling

    726,    for generalized locking, polling, access arbitrating, and interrupt
    processing.

    848,    for DMA with access regulating.

    856+,   for access regulating in the transferring of data from one or more
    peripherals to one or more computers for the latter to process, store, or
    further transfer or for transferring data from the computers to the
    peripherals (i.e., Input/Output processing access regulating).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for TDM, FDM,
    etc., subclasses 352+ and 389+ for packetized multiplex communications, and
    subclasses 438+ for access control by a separate control line or bus, and
    445+ for bus contention including carrier sense.

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclass 150 for regulating simultaneous access to shared memory.


CLS 395/288
TXT Bus locking:

    Subject matter under subclass 287 including means or steps for preventing
    access by a digital data processing system component to a shared
    interconnecting medium while another digital data processing system
    component has temporary exclusive control of the interconnecting medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 26.1 for subject matter which blocks
    access to a signal source or otherwise limits usage of modulated carrier
    equipment.


CLS 395/289
TXT Bus polling:

    Subject matter under subclass 287 including means or steps for bus access
    regulating by determining the status of each digital data processing system
    component in a digital data processing system by another processing digital
    data processing system component which accesses each of the digital data
    processing system components one at a time.

    (1)     Note. Classification herein allows appropriate action such as
    granting access according to a status determination.

    (2)     Note. Subject matter directed to the interrogation of peripherals
    is classified elsewhere in this class. See SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS,
    below.

    (3)     Note. Generalized access polling is classified elsewhere in this
    class. See SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS, below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    727,    for generalized access polling under the class definition.

    864+,   for subject matter directed to polled interrogation of peripherals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 451+ for bus polling.


CLS 395/290
TXT Bus master/slave controlling:

    Subject matter under subclass 287 wherein a digital data processing system
    component is provided with control over other digital data processing
    system components connected to the bus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200.38+, for multicomputer master/slave arrangements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 131 for
    the use of plural processors and a master/slave arrangement in a digital
    control system application.


CLS 395/291
TXT Rotational prioritizing (i.e., round robin):

    Subject matter under subclass 287 including means or steps for granting bus
    access to all contending digital data processing system components one at a
    time in a predetermined order before any one digital data processing system
    components may again obtain the bus.


CLS 395/292
TXT Bus request queuing:

    Subject matter under subclass 287 including means or steps for storing
    requests for access to the bus in the order in which they are received.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    874,    for I/O data buffering queue content modifying.


CLS 395/293
TXT Centralized bus arbitration:

    Subject matter under subclass 287 including means or steps for determining
    which of plural digital data processing system components contending for
    access to a shared bus shall be granted access at any one time, wherein the
    determination is performed by a single digital data processing system
    component common to the digital data processing system components.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    726,    for generalized locking, polling, access arbitrating, and interrupt
    processing.

    856+,   for access regulating in the transferring of data from one or more
    peripherals to one or more computers or digital data processing systems for
    the latter to process, store, or further transfer or for transferring data
    from the computers or digital data processing systems to the peripherals
    (i.e., Input/Output processing access regulating).


CLS 395/294
TXT Static bus prioritization:

    Subject matter under subclass 293 including means or steps for granting the
    contending plural digital data processing system components access to the
    bus in accordance with a fixed ranking assigned to each digital data
    processing system component.


CLS 395/295
TXT Physical position bus prioritization:

    Subject matter under subclass 294 including means or steps for granting the
    contending digital data processing system components access to the shared
    bus based on their physical location on the bus.


CLS 395/296
TXT Dynamic bus prioritization:

    Subject matter under subclass 293 including means or steps for changing the
    ranking of the contending digital data processing system components.


CLS 395/297
TXT Time-slotted bus accessing:

    Subject matter under subclass 293 including means or steps for granting the
    contending digital data processing system components use of the shared bus
    for a predetermined time period.


CLS 395/298
TXT Delay reduction:

    Subject matter under subclass 293 including means or steps for decreasing
    the arbitration time among the contending digital data processing system
    components on the bus.


CLS 395/299
TXT Decentralized bus arbitration:

    Subject matter under subclass 287 including means or steps for determining
    which of plural digital data processing system components contending for
    access to a shared bus shall be granted access at any one time, wherein the
    determination is performed by circuitry located in more than one of the
    contending digital data processing system components.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    726,    for generalized locking, polling, access arbitrating and interrupt
    processing.

    856+,   for access regulating in the transferring of data from one or more
    peripherals to one or more computers or digital data processing systems for
    the latter to process, store, or further transfer or for transferring data
    from the computers or digital data processing systems to the peripherals
    (i.e., Input/Output processing access regulating).


CLS 395/300
TXT Hierarchical or multilevel accessing:

    Subject matter under subclass 299 including means or steps for performing
    more than one level of bus arbitration in order to grant access to one of
    the contending digital data processing system components.


CLS 395/301
TXT Static bus prioritization:

    Subject matter under subclass 299 including means or steps for granting the
    contending plural digital data processing system components access to the
    bus in accordance with a fixed ranking assigned to each digital data
    processing system component.


CLS 395/302
TXT Physical position bus prioritization:

    Subject matter under subclass 301 including means or steps for granting the
    contending digital data processing system components access to the shared
    bus based on their physical location on the bus.


CLS 395/303
TXT Dynamic bus prioritization:

    Subject matter under subclass 299 including means or steps for changing the
    ranking of the contending digital data processing system components.


CLS 395/304
TXT Time-slotted bus accessing:

    Subject matter under subclass 299 including means or steps for granting the
    contending digital data processing system components use of the shared bus
    for a predetermined time period.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, various subclasses for generic
    multiplexing and demultiplexing systems.


CLS 395/305
TXT Delay reduction:

    Subject matter under subclass 299 including means or steps for decreasing
    the arbitration time among the contending digital data processing system
    components on the bus.


CLS 395/306
TXT Bus architecture:

    Subject matter under subclass 280 including means or steps for providing
    structural interconnection for data transfer between buses.


CLS 395/307
TXT Buses having variable widths:

    Subject matter under subclass 306 including means or steps for providing an
    interconnection structure between buses having different bit sizes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    380,    for instruction aligning.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclass 201 for boundary alignment.


CLS 395/308
TXT Dual bus systems:

    Subject matter under subclass 306 wherein two buses are provided for data
    transfer.


CLS 395/309
TXT Interface architecture:

    Subject matter under subclass 280 including means or steps for providing an
    interconnection structure for data transfer between digital data processing
    system components.


CLS 395/310
TXT Using register structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 309 wherein the interconnection structure is
    a temporary memory.

    (1)     Note. Buffering of data between devices to allow for changing of
    the data transmission rate/speed is classified elsewhere. See SEARCH THIS
    CLASS, SUBCLASS, below.

    (2)     Note. Storing of messages for electronic mail purposes is
    classified elsewhere. See SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS, below.

    (3)     Note. Storing data for transmission between peripherals and
    computers or digital data processing systems is classified elsewhere in
    this class. See SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS, below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200.43+, for multicomputer data transferring which may include storing of
    data in shared memory, and subclasses 200.62+ for computer-to-computer data
    transfer regulating which may include the use of control registers.

    872+,   for I/O data buffering in data transfer between peripherals and
    computers.


CLS 395/311
TXT Switching (i.e., intrasystem connection path selecting):

    Subject matter under subclass 280 including means or steps for establishing
    a temporary connection or link between two digital data processing system
    components by an intermediary station that serves to provide the connection.

    (1)     Note. The subject matter here in accordance with its parent
    subclass and its class requires connecting and reconnecting of links within
    a single digital data processing system or computer which distinguishes it
    from electrical communications switching, telephone switching systems, and
    computer network switching. See the SEARCH CLASS notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200.3+, for means or steps for computer network switching.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 825+ for subject matter
    including means or steps for electrical communications switching.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, for the simultaneous transmission of two
    or more signals over a common medium, particularly subclasses 229+ for data
    flow congestion prevention and control, subclasses 254+ for network
    configuration determination, subclasses 351+ for pathfinding or routing
    which includes circuit switching or packet switching, and subclasses 465+
    for adaptive communication which includes processing or converting of
    communication protocols.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, for subject matter including means or
    steps for telephone switching systems.


CLS 395/312
TXT Crossbar:

    Subject matter under subclass 311 wherein the intermediary station or
    stations are comprised of a matrix of switch points.


CLS 395/376
TXT ARCHITECTURE-BASED INSTRUCTION PROCESSING:

    Subject matter under the class definition including instruction data
    processing for particular processor architectures.

    (1)     Note. Instruction data are defined in the glossary for this class
    to be data representative of an operation and identifying its operands, if
    any.

    (2)     Note. Instruction processing classified here is predicated on a
    particular identifiable digital data processing system architecture
    directing the nature of the instruction processing. Processing control,
    however, is classified elsewhere.

    (3)     Note. This subclass is for instruction processing forced in a
    certain direction by an overall processing architecture. Digital data
    processing system architectures and computer architectures, per se, are
    classified elsewhere.

    (4)     Note. Register level transactions at the arithmetic logic unit
    level (ALU-level) or functional unit level (FU-level) and logic for
    realizing such transactions are often a part of instruction processing, per
    se. However, general purpose digital logic circuits are classified
    elsewhere.

    (5)     Note. This subclass represents a "special" category of instruction
    processing dictated by an architectural construct. Instruction data
    processing for performing instruction data processing in support of data
    transferring including special software interrupts, traps, and halts;
    nonlogic and nonarithmetic functions are classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183.1,  for fault locating using a halt.

    183.11, for fault locating using a substituted or added instruction.

    561+,   for processing control, per se, and in particular subclass 567 for
    instruction data processing in support of data transferring, subclass 568
    for special nonlogic, nonarithmetic instructions, and subclass 591 for
    software interrupts and traps.

    701+,   for software development environments and tools, per se.

    800.01+, for digital data processing system architectures and computer
    architectures, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, appropriate subclasses for
    general purpose digital logic circuitry including programmable logic arrays
    (PLA).

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 700+
    for details of logic circuits for performing arithmetic operations.


CLS 395/377
TXT Data flow based system:

    Subject matter under subclass 376 comprising means or steps wherein
    initiation of instruction execution is driven by availability of data
    required by the instruction.

    (1)     Note. This subclass is for data flow computing which generally
    utilizes tokens for asynchronous passing of instructions or data for
    execution by the appropriate unit. Message passing systems, per se, are
    classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200.3+, for use of tokens in certain multicomputer arrangements.

    800.25, for data flow computer architectures, per se.


CLS 395/378
TXT Stack-based computer:

    Subject matter under subclass 376 comprising means or steps where the
    architecture's processor is based upon a stack model and all instruction
    data processing occurs through use of the stack (e.g., the HP 3000
    computer).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    569,    for context preservation.

    677,    for use of stack with multitasking or timesharing.

    678,    for use of stack in context switching.


CLS 395/379
TXT Multiprocessor instruction:

    Subject matter under subclass 376 comprising means or steps including
    processing of an instruction specific for a plural processor computer
    architecture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200.3+,for multicomputer data transferring, per se.

    706,    for compilers for parallel or multiprocessor systems.


CLS 395/380
TXT INSTRUCTION ALIGNMENT:

    Subject matter under the class definition including accessing and retrieval
    of instruction data of fixed or variable length from a memory or buffer and
    for shifting of such instruction data to align it with a physical memory or
    buffer boundary.

    (1)     Note. This subclass is for alignment of instruction data. Subject
    matter directed to the big endian little endian problem is properly
    classified here. Generic byte word order rearranging is classified
    elsewhere.

    (2)     Note. This subclass accepts shifting instruction data for alignment
    purposes. Shifting of memory spaces, such as boundary alignment related to
    memory addressing and page mapping, is classified elsewhere.

    (3)     Note. Emulation techniques often rely on instruction alignment as
    part of an overall combination. This subclass accepts only nominal
    recitations to emulation in combination with instruction aligning.
    Emulation systems, per se, are classified elsewhere.

    (4)     Note. This subclass accepts only nominal recitations to digital
    data processing system architectures and computer architectures, per se,
    where realignment of an instruction is occurring. Architecture-based
    instruction data processing in, for example, a super-scaler processor is
    classified elsewhere.

    (5)     Note. Dynamic aligning of instruction data is proper for this
    subclass. Compilers performing "static" alignment functions are classified
    with software development tools.

    (6)     Note. This subclass is directed to aligning instruction data.
    Aligning other data in, for example, cache memory is typically found
    elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    376,    for architecture-based instruction data processing.

    386,    for variable length instruction data decoding.

    705+,   for compilers, per se.

    898,    for generic byte-word order rearranging, bit-field insertion and
    extraction, and string length and sequence detecting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclass 2 for addressing extended or expanded memory, and subclass 5 for
    addressing multiple memory modules; subclass 201 for address generation
    directed to slip control, misaligning and boundary alignment; subclass 209
    for page address generation processing; subclass 212 for address generation
    by varying bit-length or size; and subclass 118 for cache memory accessing
    and control, per se, and subclass 133 for cache memory entry replacement
    strategies.


CLS 395/381
TXT INSTRUCTION FETCHING:

    Subject matter under the class definition directed to locating and
    retrieval of instruction data for processing.

    (1)     Note. This subclass is concerned with locating and retrieving
    instruction data in direct support of an instruction pipeline. Memory
    accessing and control at other higher levels, such as, cache memory, disk
    memory and shared memory are classified elsewhere.

    (2)     Note. This subclass only accepts nominal recitation of addressing
    schemes and address data generation. Address formation, addressing of
    operands, and address generation in response to a microinstruction is
    elsewhere.

    (3)     Note. This subclass only accepts nominal recitation of addressing
    schemes and address data generation. Generalized address formation and
    addressing in combination with particular memory systems is classified
    elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    825+,   for Input/Output data processing macro language and command
    processing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclasses 1 through 5 for addressing in combination with particular memory
    systems, subclass 214 for operand fetching,  subclass 215 for address
    formation in response to a microinstruction, subclasses 100 through 116 for
    accessing and control of specific memory compositions,  subclasses 118
    through 146 for cache memory,  and subclasses 147 through 153 for shared
    memory access and control.


CLS 395/382
TXT Of multiple instructions simultaneously:

    Subject matter under subclass 381 for causing a fetch of a plurality of
    instruction data to occur at the same time.


CLS 395/383
TXT Prefetching:

    Subject matter under subclass 381 including fetching of a given instruction
    or variable before it is utilized.

    (1)     Note. This subclass provides for advance fetching of instruction
    data. Memory access pipelining is classified elsewhere.

    (2)     Note. This subclass is for the fetching of instruction data.
    Generating of addresses for implementing a prefetch is classified elsewhere.

    (3)     Note. Prefetching for branch target addressing is classified
    elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    584,    for branch target instruction addressing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclasses 213 for formation or generation of prefetch addresses and
    subclass 169 for memory access pipelining.


CLS 395/384
TXT INSTRUCTION DECODING (E.G., MICROINSTRUCTION, START ADDRESS GENERATORS,
    HARDWIRED):

    Subject matter under the class definition including the internal hardware,
    firmware, or software operation by which a computer system determines the
    meaning of an instruction's operation code, control bits, and operands.

    (1)     Note. This subclass is for decoding instruction data to determine
    its meaning for subsequent execution or decision making. Generic decoding
    circuits and methods and decoder circuits and methods are classified
    elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 105+ for decoding
    circuitry.


CLS 395/385
TXT Decoding instruction to accommodate plural instruction interpretations
    (e.g., different dialects, languages, emulation, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 384 including means or steps for decoding a
    same instruction identifier to mean a different operation depending on
    particular states or condition within the system.

    (1)     Note. This subclass is for instruction decoding for plural
    interpretations. Emulation, per se, is classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    705+,   for compilers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    704,    Data Processing:  Speech Signal Processing, Linguistics, Language
    Translation, and Audio Compression/Decompression, subclasses 1+ for machine
    translation of natural languages.


CLS 395/386
TXT Decoding instruction to accommodate variable length instruction or operand:

    Subject matter under subclass 384 including means or steps for decoding
    instruction data whose length varies.

    (1)     Note. This subclass is for decoding instructions whose lengths
    vary. Alignment of instructions to a boundary is classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    380,    for alignment of instruction data.


CLS 395/387
TXT Decoding instruction to generate the address of a microroutine:

    Subject matter under subclass 384 including means or steps for utilizing
    instruction data to develop a starting or initial address of the
    microroutine responsible for controlling execution of the instruction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclasses 215 for generation of a memory address in response to a
    microroutine.


CLS 395/388
TXT Decoding by plural parallel decoders:

    Subject matter under subclass 384 including means or steps for decoding an
    instruction in parallel steps by plural decoding elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    800.01+, for parallel computer architecture.


CLS 395/389
TXT Predecoding of instruction component:

    Subject matter under subclass 384 for decoding part of an instruction at an
    earlier processor cycle than the remainder of the instruction.

    (1)     Note. This subclass will accept only nominal recitations of
    instruction caching in regards to predecoding. Caching, per se, is
    classified elsewhere.

    (2)     Note. This technique is often used in combination with branch
    instruction processing in order to prefetch for anticipated branch
    execution and in parallel processing. This subclass accepts only
    significant recitations of predecoding in overall combinations directed to
    prefetching, branch instruction processing, and parallel processing.
    Prefetching, branch instruction processing, and parallel processing, per
    se, are classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    383,    for instruction prefetching.

    391,    for decoding for data dependency processing for parallel issuance.

    580+,   for branching.


CLS 395/390
TXT INSTRUCTION ISSUING:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means or steps for
    dispatching an instruction for execution (e.g., designating a register
    after resolving data conflicts).

    (1)     Note. Dispatching in the field of process control for task
    management dealing with process scheduling, load balancing, etc., is
    classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    377,    for data flow computing.

    670+,   for task management or task control.


CLS 395/391
TXT Simultaneous issuance of multiple instruction:

    Subject matter under subclass 390 including means or steps for issuing
    plural instruction in parallel (e.g., superscalar, very long instruction
    word (VLIW)).

    (1)     Note. This subclass provides for dynamic, hardware-based multiple
    instruction issuance or scheduling. Static instruction scheduling by a
    compiler or an assembler is classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    705+,   for compilers, per se.


CLS 395/392
TXT DYNAMIC INSTRUCTION DEPENDENCY CHECKING, MONITORING, OR CONFLICT RESOLUTION:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means or steps for
    on-the-fly testing of instructions and operands to assess conflicts related
    to data or functional unit availability (e.g., identifying dependencies,
    attempting to resolve dependencies, or both).

    (1)     Note. This subclass is directed to means and steps for controlling
    instruction issuing or executing which takes into account readiness of the
    instruction processing resource(s). Task resource management is classified
    elsewhere.

    (2)     Note. This subclass is also for dynamic hardware based dependency
    checking. Dependency checking performed by a compiler is classified
    elsewhere.

    (3)     Note. Reliability and availability of functional units include the
    determination of a fault condition and are classified elsewhere.

    (4)     Note. This subclass includes dealing with resource management
    problems within the instruction stream, generally at the ALU functional
    unit level. Resource management in a manufacturing environment is
    classified elsewhere.

    (5)     Note. This subclass deals with reserving use of functional units at
    the instruction level of a digital data processing system. Reservations for
    seat assignment for travel or entertainment are classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180+,   for reliability and availability.

    205+,   for reservation, check-in, booking for reserving space.

    208,    for scheduling and allocating resources for administrative
    functions.

    676,    for dependency checking amongst processes and tasks.

    705+,   for compilers and dependency checking.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems subclasses 468+
    for manufacturing environment resource allocation applications.

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclass 125 for instruction data caching and subclass 169 for memory
    access pipelining.


CLS 395/393
TXT Scoreboarding, reservation stations, or aliasing:

    Subject matter under subclass 392 utilizing scoreboarding, reservation
    stations, aliasing (i.e., renaming), or combinations thereof for dependency
    checking and resolution.

    (1)     Note. This subclass is for use of a hardware-based scoreboard,
    reservation station, or alias table for determining or resolving
    instruction data dependencies. File renaming is classified elsewhere. File
    maintenance is classified elsewhere. Task management, per se, is classified
    elsewhere not file renaming or file maintenance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    670+,   for process task management, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    707,    Data Processing - Database and File Management, Data Structures, or
    Document Processing, subclasses 200+ for file renaming or file maintenance.


CLS 395/394
TXT Commitment control or register bypass:

    Subject matter under subclass 392 including means or steps for controlling
    the writing of results to registers and for bypassing results around
    registers to eliminate or alleviate data availability conflicts.

    (1)     Note. This subclass provides for systems that control the
    commitment of results to the register file and for bypassing results around
    the register file to functional units to alleviate data dependency, for
    example, as in getting data to a functional unit in deeply pipelined or
    super scaler systems. Data consistency in a cache or cache by-pass is
    classified elsewhere.

    (2)     Note. This subclass provides for out-of-order execution but assures
    in order commitment of results to the register file. However, memory
    accessing techniques, per se, are classified elsewhere.

    (3)     Note. Context preserving, per se, is classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    569,    for context preservation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclass 403 for addressing cache memory; subclass 413 for virtual
    addressing; subclasses 468 through 470 for cache coherency, in particular
    subclass 469 for write through and 470 for write back; and subclasses 482
    for read-modify-write techniques.


CLS 395/395
TXT Reducing the impact of a stall or pipeline bubble:

    Subject matter under subclass 392 including means or steps for allowing an
    instruction execution to catch up with other instructions in a pipeline
    without flushing the execution pipeline.

    (1)     Note. This subclass is directed to reducing a time penalty of
    pipeline stalls or pipeline bubbles due to data hazards or instruction
    hazards. Conditional branching creates similar data hazards and pipeline
    stalls. However, pipeline stall or pipeline bubble due to branching are
    classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    580+,   for branching when an instruction hazard exists.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclass 140 for data hazards related caching and subclass 169 for memory
    access pipelining.


CLS 395/406
TXT VIRTUAL MACHINES TASK AND PROCESS MANAGEMENT:

    Subject matter under class definition wherein addresses are determined in a
    memory system accommodating addressing requirements for software emulation
    of a target computer or digital data processing system on a base computer
    or digital data processing system.

    (1)     Note. Classification here includes virtual addressing techniques
    (that is, for example, processing logical to physical (real, absolute)
    address translation entries).  Virtual memory addressing deals with logical
    addressing techniques.  Classification here is proper if there is
    significant virtual memory processing for systems accommodating  emulation
    of a target computer or digital data processing system on a base computer
    or digital data processing system.  Logical Addressing for physical
    enhancements, such as extended and expanded memory, is classified elsewhere
    in this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    527,    for compatibility, emulation, and simulation of systems or system
    components.

    569,    for processing control and instruction processing for context
    preserving, and subclass 570 for processing control and instruction
    processing for mode switch or change.

    670+,   for task management, per se, especially subclasses 677 and 678
    directed to multitasking and context switching.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclass 6 for accomodating addressing requirements for software emulation
    of a target computer or digital data processing system on a base computer
    or digital data processing system, and subclasses 202+ for address mapping
    and virtual addressing, per se.


CLS 395/500
TXT COMPATIBILITY, SIMULATION, OR EMULATION OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means or steps by which
    a digital data processing system, memory, or peripheral is made compatible
    with or caused to emulate or simulate another digital data processing
    system, memory, or peripheral.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides, for example, for porting application
    program(s) from one specific digital processing system to another specific
    processing system*.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass provides, for example, for different types of
    interfaces between incompatible components or programs that require data
    format changes to ensure proper communication or exchange of information.

    (3)     Note.  The inventive concept or the overall combination of the
    claimed system should be directed to performing compatibility operations.

    (4)     Note.  Mere nominal recitation of compatibility, simulation or
    emulation means, or steps are insufficient for classification in this
    subclass.  This subclass provides for how these effects are accomplished
    rather than merely for the effects themselves.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses
    468.03+, for design and planning in product assembly or manufacturing, and
    subclass 578 for simulation of any level of integrated circuit simulation.


CLS 395/527
TXT EMULATION OF SYSTEM COMPONENT FOR COMPATIBILITY:

    Subject matter under the class definition directed to in-system (i.e., in
    situ) emulation of system components for compatibility.

    (1)     Note. Subject matter of this subclass is directed to use of
    emulation as is often done in proving a design. Emulation, per se, is
    classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180+,   for reliability and availability, per se, including fault locating
    subclasses 183.01+.

    500,    for emulation, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclasses 500+ for fault
    detecting in electrical circuits or of electronic components.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 481+
    for electrical measuring and testing, subclasses 488+ for integrated
    circuit design, and subclass 578 for simulation.


CLS 395/551
TXT SYNCHRONIZATION OF CLOCKS, DATA, SIGNALS, OR PULSES:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein clocks or timing signal,
    timing pulse, or data associated with the control or regulation of any one
    or combination of processing components, memory components, and I/O
    components are caused to operate in synchronization.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182.1,  for fault recovery synchronization maintenance of processors in
    systems with concurrent redundantly operating processors by masking or
    reconfiguring.

    182.13, for state recovery, per se, in computers or digital data processing
    systems.

    200.78, for multicomputer synchronization in a network.

    561+,   for processing control, per se.

    595     through 598, for processing sequence control.

    670+,   for task and process scheduling, per se.

    881,    for synchronous data transfer in I/O process timing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclass 103 wherein the clock frequency
    adjustment of one station is based on information about status of clock
    signals originating at other stations of the system.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 106+ for synchronizing
    the operation of pulse or digital receiving and/or transmitting mechanisms.

    705,    Data Processing: Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/price Determination, subclasses 7 through 9 for operations research,
    per se, including systems directed to generalized linear programming
    problem solving and cost function analysis, resource allocating in business
    transaction processing, and scheduling of interrelated processes.


CLS 395/552
TXT Using delay:

    Subject matter under subclass 551 wherein the clock or timing signals,
    timing pulses, or data are delayed to provide synchronization.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 409
    for circuits that include a delay for synchronization between logic stages.


CLS 395/553
TXT SYNCHRONIZATION OF PLURAL PROCESSORS:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein control or regulation of
    clocking or timing operations of two or more processors is synchronized.

    (1)     Note. Classification here is proper if a single clock or timing
    circuit controls the processors, plural clocks or timing circuits are
    synchronized to control the processors, or operations are synchronized to
    occur on the same clocking or timing cycle. Passing of tokens and
    semaphores for multicomputer synchronizing is classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182.1,  for fault recovery synchronization maintenance of processors in
    systems with concurrent redundantly operating processors by masking or
    reconfiguring.

    182.13, for state recovery, per se, in computers or digital data processing
    systems.

    200.78, for multicomputer synchronization in a network.

    561+,   for processing control, per se.

    595     through 598, for processing sequence control.

    670+,   for task and process scheduling, per se.

    881,    for synchronous data transfer in I/O process timing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 409
    for synchronization between logic stages.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 825.14 wherein the
    synchronization includes a reference timing function for operating plural
    system components.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclass
    5.4 in which a determination of the error rate is used to control
    synchronization between devices; subclass 47.1 in which error detecting
    techniques are utilized to control synchronization between devices.

    705,    Data Processing: Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/price Determination, subclasses 7 through 9  for operations research,
    per se, including systems directed to generalized linear programming
    problem solving and cost function analysis, resource allocating in business
    transaction processing and scheduling of interrelated processes.


CLS 395/555
TXT CLOCK, PULSE, OR TIMING SIGNAL GENERATION OR ANALYSIS:

    Subject matter under the class definition including generation, division,
    or distribution of clock signals, pulse signals, and/or timing signals in a
    digital data processing system from one or more sources into groups of
    continuous and successive time increments, including event timing and
    counting, the correction of the clock signals, pulse signals, and/or timing
    signals.

    (1)     Note. This subclass accepts signal generators producing several
    clock or timing signals, signal generators with changeable or programmable
    intervals, and generation of signals using a delay function or device.
    Particular components such as delay devices, per se, are classified
    elsewhere.

    (2)     Note. Mere nominal recitation of a computer or digital data
    processing system in combination with a clock or timing generation circuit
    is not proper for this subclass. Timing generation circuits, per se, such
    as oscillators, electrical pulse counters, pulse dividers, or shift
    register systems are classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 164+ and 291+ for miscellaneous clock or rectangular
    waveform generation.

    331,    Oscillators, appropriate subclasses.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, appropriate subclasses.


CLS 395/556
TXT Generation and selection of multiple clocks, variable clocks, or
    frequencies:

    Subject matter under subclass 555 including generation and selection of
    plural or variable timing intervals.

    (1)     Note. This subclass accepts selecting or programming a clock rate
    in a computer or digital data processing system. Setting system initial
    operating parameters through a booting process is classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    651     through 653, for computer system booting, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclass 96.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits,
    subclass 152 for obtaining a single delayed clock, subclass 295 wherein
    multiple separate output waveforms are produced and appear at respective
    output terminals, subclass 296 wherein multiple clock waveforms are derived
    at circuit outputs from plural clock inputs, and subclass 298 wherein
    plural inputs are utilized to produce a single clock output.


CLS 395/557
TXT Event timers, counting, scheduling:

    Subject matter under subclass 555 wherein counting is performed, an event
    is timed, or an operation is scheduled using the generated intervals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185.08, for error detection or notification in timing using, for example,
    watchdog timer time-out.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclass
    16.3 wherein the processor is tested by requiring periodic updating of a
    time monitoring device within a preset time interval known as a window; and
    subclass 62 wherein the time delay between events or data is detected to
    determine a predetermined forbidden condition.


CLS 395/558
TXT Correction for skew, phase, rate adjustment, or alignment:

    Subject matter under subclass 555 wherein the timing interval is corrected
    for skew or phase, or there is a rate adjustment or alignment.

    (1)     Note. This subclass accepts clock and timing interval skew, phase,
    and rate correcting in digital data processing systems and computers.
    Recovery from a fault caused by a timing interval skew is classified
    elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180+,   for reliability and availability, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclass 96.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits,
    subclass 156 wherein a circuit compares the phase of the output signal with
    a reference signal and converts any difference into a correction voltage
    that changes the phase of the output so that it matches that of the
    reference or input signal; and subclass 292 wherein clock accuracy is
    ensured by correction for anticipated or actual clock errors.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclass 1
    wherein an error caused by the time delay between plural parallel bits
    forming a byte or data word is detected and/or corrected.


CLS 395/559
TXT CONTROL OF SYSTEMS, DEVICES, AND DATA TRANSMISSION BASED ON CLOCK OR TIMING
    SIGNALS:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein there is a significant
    temporal, incremental, or sequencing control provided to one or more
    digital data processing systems, processors, memory, or peripherals, or to
    data transmission between these systems or components.

    (1)     Note. This is a generic subclass for control of operations of
    digital data processing systems or components thereof and for timing and
    clock related control of movement of data between systems and/or
    components.

    (2)     Note. Nominally claimed control of apparatus external to this class
    in combination with apparatus under this class definition is classified in
    this class unless provided for in the appropriate external class.

    (3)     Note. Significantly claimed control of apparatus external to this
    class in combination with apparatus under the class definition, which
    perform data processing or transmission operations, are classified in the
    class appropriate to the external device unless specifically excluded
    therefrom.

    (4)     Note. For the control of processing of a specific type of
    information or the movement thereof or a specific end use for the
    information external to the class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 825+ for systems directed
    solely to addressing and communication between signaling systems and
    signaling devices between a communication medium.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for systems
    directed solely to multiplexing.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, appropriate subclasses for pulse
    modulation, transmitters, receivers, and synchronizers.


CLS 395/560
TXT By inhibiting or stopping clock or device:

    Subject matter under subclass 559 wherein the clock or interval generator
    or a component of the system is inhibited or stopped.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    750.04, for power conservation by controlling clock speed.


CLS 395/561
TXT PROCESSING CONTROL:

    Subject matter under the class definition including the dynamic control of
    execution, processing, or sequencing of instruction data within a processor.

    (1)     Note. This subclass provides for generic microsequencing control or
    hardware sequencing control of instruction data within a processor.
    Specialized architecture-based instruction processing is classified
    elsewhere.

    (2)     Note. This subclass is directed to instruction processing and
    machine level instruction execution. However, instruction sequence control
    within a compiler, by a compiler, or by an operating system is classified
    elsewhere.

    (3)     Note. This subclass is for processing instructions. Sequencing as
    is common in computerized numerical controllers (CNC), industrial
    controllers, computer driven machining, etc., is classified elsewhere.

    (4)     Note. Hardwired sequencers are also often referred to as
    "sequential state machines" in the art. They are appropriately classified
    here when they are performing control or sequencing of instruction data
    within a processor.

    (5)     Note. Graphic command processing is classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    376+,   for architecture based instruction processing.

    522,    for graphic command processing.

    670+,   for operating system task management and control.

    705+,   for compilers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 130+
    for general purpose computer control systems; subclass 468 for
    manufacturing control systems; and subclasses 474.01+ for machine tool
    control systems.


CLS 395/562
TXT Arithmetic operation instruction processing:

    Subject matter under subclass 561 for control of execution or processing of
    instruction data peculiar to arithmetic operation (e.g., add, subtract,
    multiply, etc.).

    (1)     Note. This subclass is directed to control of execution or
    processing of an instruction peculiar to arithmetic operation. Arithmetic
    functional units, that is, machines which carry out arithmetical
    calculations, per se, are classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 700+
    for electrical calculators; subclasses 715.011+ for digital logic
    architectures performing specialized functions such as function generation
    and filtering; subclasses 725.01+ for transforms (e.g., Fourier);
    subclasses 729+ for trigonometric functions; and subclasses 732+ for
    arithmetic operations, per se.


CLS 395/563
TXT Floating point or vector:

    Subject matter under subclass 562 for control of execution or processing of
    instruction data peculiar to a floating point or vector operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 748.01
    for floating point arithmetical operations.


CLS 395/564
TXT Logic operation instruction processing:

    Subject matter under subclass 561 for control of execution and/or
    processing of instruction data peculiar to logic operation (e.g., AND, OR,
    exclusive OR, etc.).

    (1)     Note. This subclass provides for the control of execution of
    instruction data peculiar to logical operations. Digital logic, per se
    (e.g., AND gates, OR gates, combinations of gates, etc.), is classified
    elsewhere.

    (2)     Note. This subclass is concerned with processing instruction data
    within a processor. The field of computer graphics processes pixels using
    logical operations. However, logical operations for graphics are classified
    elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    523+,   for logical operations in computer graphics.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Digital Logic Circuitry, appropriate subclasses for gate constructs
    and logic functional circuits.


CLS 395/565
TXT Masking:

    Subject matter under subclass 564 for control of execution or processing of
    instruction data peculiar to blocking and passing data elements contained
    within memory words or processor registers.

    (1)     Note. This subclass provides for control of execution of
    instruction data which is peculiar to masking. Generic masking of digital
    words in a digital data processing system is classified elsewhere.

    (2)     Note. Masking is a generic technique for stripping, passing,
    eliminating, or blocking a part of a digital word. Masking used as a
    subcombination to an overall combination such as, for example, to enable or
    disable interrupts or to enable or disable a status line is classified
    elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182.01+,for masking in relation to fault recovery.

    735+,   for interrupt processing in relation to masking.

    898,    for generic masking of digital data.


CLS 395/566
TXT Processing control for data transfer:

    Subject matter under subclass 561 including means or steps for processing
    instruction data that specifically support or perform data transfer
    operations.

    (1)     Note. This subclass provides for processing instruction data that
    performs data transfer. Data transfer, per se, is classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200.3+,for multicomputer data transferring.

    825+    for I/O command processing.

    853,    for I/O data transfer specifying.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for multiplex
    communications, per se.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, for pulse or digital
    communications, per se.

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclass 214 for operand address generation and subclass 215 for
    microinstruction address generation.


CLS 395/567
TXT Instruction modification based on condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 561 including means or steps for changing the
    operation of an instruction based upon some condition by substituting
    and/or changing the instruction in some manner.

    (1)     Note. This subclass also provides for modification of
    microinstructions in order to perform a different operation.

    (2)     Note. This subclass provides for modification of an instruction to
    change its operation or data usage. Modification of instruction addresses
    for the purpose of branching is classified elsewhere.

    (3)     Note. Instruction substitution or modification in support of
    tracing or fault locating is classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183.11, for instruction substitution in support of fault locating.

    580+,   for branching, per se.

    701+,   for software development tools.


CLS 395/568
TXT Specialized instruction processing in support of testing, debugging,
    emulation, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 561 including means or steps for the
    execution or sequencing of instruction data that support testing,
    debugging, or emulation.

    (1)     Note. Classification in this subclass requires more than nominal
    recitation of execution of an instruction. Specific means or steps involved
    in the specific execution of the instruction itself are properly classified
    in this subclass.

    (2)     Note. This subclass is directed to instruction level processing for
    debugging. A software development environment for compilers is classified
    elsewhere.

    (3)     Note. This subclass is directed to instruction processing, and
    testing, debugging, or emulation is distinguished from the related topics
    under data processing system reliability and availability. There, a fault
    condition must be encountered and the fault is either detected, detected
    and located, or recovered from, and nominal instruction data processing may
    be claimed. For classification here, a fault may be nominally recited but
    substantial instruction processing must be claimed.

    (4)     Note. This subclass is directed to instruction processing, and
    testing, debugging or emulation is distinguished from emulation, per se.
    There, nominal instruction data processing may be claimed. For
    classification here, an emulation may be nominally recited, but substantial
    instruction processing must be claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183.11+,for debugging and fault locating.

    500,    for emulation and simulation, per se.

    670+,   for task management, per se.

    704+,   for compilers, program code analyzers, and debuggers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    371,    Error Correction/Detection and Fault Detection/Recovery,
    appropriate subclasses.


CLS 395/569
TXT Context preserving (e.g., context swapping, check-pointing, register
    windowing):

    Subject matter under subclass 561 including for storing volatile data
    contained in processor registers such that the volatile data can be
    restored at some point later in time.

    (1)     Note. This subclass is directed to the register level transactions
    necessary for preserving the context of an instruction or an instruction
    pipeline. Multitasking, context switching, and context swapping at the task
    or operating system level are classified elsewhere.

    (2)     Note. This subclass concerns itself with data in the pipeline at a
    point in time when a context swap is to be performed. The control of the
    commitment of results to a register file or for bypassing results around a
    register file to functional units to alleviate data dependency is
    classified elsewhere.

    (3)     Note. Transactions with higher level memory in a digital data
    processing system memory hierarchy such as page swapping or writeback is
    classified with the memory accessing and controlling art.

    (4)     Note. The term "windowing" also applies to operator interfaces and
    often includes logical operations at the register level. However, register
    windowing here is for instruction registers and instruction pipelines.
    Windowing for operator interfaces is classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    340+,   for operator interface windowing.

    394,    for commitment control or register bypass.

    677+,   for mode switching, context switching and multitasking between
    processes often referred to as "context switching at the task or operating
    system level."

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 112+ for display attribute
    controller.

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclass 3 for addressing cache memory; subclasses 203+ for virtual
    addressing techniques; subclasses 141+ for cache coherency, specifically
    subclass 142 for cache write-through and subclass 143 for cache write-back.


CLS 395/570
TXT Mode switch or change:

    Subject matter under subclass 561 including means or steps for changing a
    mode of processing an instruction (e.g., sequential processing to parallel
    processing, etc.).

    (1)     Note. A digital data processing system can have a variety of mode
    changes. In general, substantial recitation of a mode change type in
    combination with nominal recitation of instruction processing is classified
    with the mode change type. More than nominal recitation of instruction data
    execution is required for classification herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186+,   for security mode changes.

    652+,   for mode changing by booting or reconfiguring.

    677+,   for multitasking and operating system mode changing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    380,    Cryptography, appropriate subclasses for security, per se.


CLS 395/571
TXT Generating next microinstruction address:

    Subject matter under subclass 561 including means or steps for generating
    the address of the next microinstruction in sequence to be processed.

    (1)     Note. This subclass provides for details of generating a next
    microinstruction address. Generation of a next microinstruction address is
    classified elsewhere. Similarly, generation of a next address for a data
    element, per se, is classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    383,    for prefetch of instruction data.

    580+,   for next macroinstruction address generation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclasses 200+ for address formation.


CLS 395/572
TXT Detecting end or completion of microprogram:

    Subject matter under subclass 561 including means or steps for detecting or
    sensing the completion or end of a microprogram routine.

    (1)     Note. This subclass provides for detection of the completion of
    execution of a microprogram routine. Macroprogram branching and
    microprogram branching are classified elsewhere.

    (2)     Note. Interruption of the end of a microprogram routine is
    classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    580+,   for macroprogram branching and microprogram branching.

    591,    for exception processing or interrupt processing.


CLS 395/573
TXT Hardwired controller:

    Subject matter under subclass 561 utilizing a sequential state machine,
    hardwired logic, or both for sequencing the flow of instruction data.

    (1)     Note. Controlling and sequencing are common functions of digital
    data processing systems. This subclass provides for details of a
    processor's internal operation and sequencing of instruction data.
    Numerical controllers and sequencers, per se, are common in industrial
    control and are classified elsewhere.

    (2)     Note. Hardwired controllers and sequencers are common digital data
    processing systems arts, in general, for their inherent speed advantage.
    This subclass provides for details of a processor's internal operation and
    sequencing of instruction data. Hardwired controllers directed to
    application specific data processing or ASICs (application specific
    integrated circuits) for specific application, per se, such as digital
    filtering, graphics data processing, and arithmetic data processing, are
    classified with the application art area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500,    for circuit emulators.

    522,    for graphic command processing.

    527,    for in-circuit emulators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 37+ for
    multifunctional circuits including finite state machines.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 130+
    for industrial controllers and numerical controllers, subclasses 468+ for
    continuous material processing and machine tool control, subclasses 488-491
    for integrated circuit design, subclass 578 for simulation; and subclasses
    715.011+ for digital filtering and arithmetical processing, per se.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclasses 27+ for systems, and subclasses 118+ for
    pulse counting or dividing chains.


CLS 395/580
TXT Branching (e.g., delayed branch, loop control, branch predict, interrupt):

    Subject matter under subclass 561 including means or steps for performing a
    change in instruction data flow brought about by instruction data execution
    or external stimuli.

    (1)     Note. This subclass provides for instruction data flow changes.
    Program execution flow changes for the purpose of task management and
    control related to process or job execution is classified elsewhere.

    (2)     Note. Address generation for branching is classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185.03, for detection state out of sequence errors.

    670,    for task management and control related to process or job
    execution, and subclass 652 for process scheduling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclass 213 for address generation for branching, subclass 125 for
    instruction data caching, and subclass 169 for memory access pipelining.


CLS 395/581
TXT Conditional branching:

    Subject matter under subclass 580 including means or steps for supporting
    changes in program execution flow based upon some condition within the
    processor (e.g., branch if equal, branch if zero, etc.).


CLS 395/582
TXT Simultaneous parallel fetching or executing of branch and fall-through path:

    Subject matter under subclass 581 including systems which execute in
    parallel both the branch taken and branch failure paths of a conditional
    branch until such time as the outcome of the conditional branch is known.


CLS 395/583
TXT Evaluation of multiple conditions or multiway branching:

    Subject matter under subclass 581 including means or steps for evaluating
    more than a single condition in one instruction or for choosing to branch
    to at least one of multiple destinations.


CLS 395/584
TXT Prefetching a branch target (i.e., look ahead):

    Subject matter under subclass 581 including means or steps for prefetching
    an instruction from the target of a branch in anticipation of the branch
    being taken.

    (1)     Note. This subclass provides for prefetch in relation to a
    conditional branch. Generic prefetching is classified elsewhere.

    (2)     Note. Address generation for prefetching is classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    383,    for generic prefetch of instruction data.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclass 213 for address generation for prefetching.


CLS 395/585
TXT Branch target buffer:

    Subject matter under subclass 584 including means or steps for memorizing
    or holding the last several branch target addresses so that if the branch
    is encountered, the target address does not have to be recalculated.


CLS 395/586
TXT Branch prediction:

    Subject matter under subclass 581 including means or steps for attempting
    to theorize or guess the outcome of a branch before that outcome can be
    determined.


CLS 395/587
TXT History table:

    Subject matter under subclass 587 including means or steps for memorizing
    the outcomes of the last several branch instruction encountered and that
    use that memory to more accurately predict the outcome of that same branch
    if it is encountered again in the future.


CLS 395/588
TXT Loop execution:

    Subject matter under subclass 580 including means or steps for controlling
    the execution of program loops.

    (1)     Note. This subclass provides for details of the internal control of
    a processor and sequencing of instruction data for the performance of
    loops. Programming of loops and compiling of loop statements are classified
    elsewhere.

    (2)     Note. Subroutine calling and returning is classified elsewhere.

    (3)     Note. Interrupt service and return is classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    589     through 590, for subroutine call and subroutine return processing.

    591,    for exception processing (interrupts and traps).

    670+,   for task level and operating system functions.

    704+,   for compilers.

    733+,   for interrupt service and interrupt return processing in a digital
    data processing system.


CLS 395/589
TXT To macroinstruction routine:

    Subject matter under subclass 580 including means or steps for accessing
    and performing a particular predefined function, routine, or command.

    (1)     Note. This subclass provides for the details of the internal
    sequencing and processing of instruction data for performing routines not
    otherwise provided for. For example, graphic command processing, arithmetic
    operation command processing, and logic operation command processing are
    classified elsewhere.

    (2)     Note. The combination of an applications art area with
    macroinstruction or command processing is classified in the art area. For
    example, graphic command processing, emulators, compilers, and natural
    language processing are classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500,    for emulation.

    522,    for graphic command processing.

    705+,   for compilers or translators.

    752+,   for natural language translation.


CLS 395/590
TXT To microinstruction subroutine:

    Subject matter under subclass 580 including means or steps for calling
    microcode subroutines from another microroutine.

    (1)     Note. Subroutine class in industrial control or numerical control
    is classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 130+
    for industrial or numerical controllers.


CLS 395/591
TXT Exception processing (interrupts and traps):

    Subject matter under subclass 580 including means or steps for handling
    asynchronous or unexpected changes in instruction data flow.

    (1)     Note. This subclass provides for details of the internal operation
    of a processor for responding to an interrupt by the processor. Subject
    matter directed to queuing interrupts, prioritizing interrupts or signals
    in a digital data processing system is classified elsewhere.

    (2)     Note. Details of interrupt processing for the purposes of task
    management or multitasking are classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    677+,   for task management and multitasking.

    733+,   for interrupt queuing and prioritizing.


CLS 395/595
TXT Processing sequence control (i.e., microsequencing):

    Subject matter under subclass 561 including means or steps for controlling
    the sequencing of the execution of a microinstruction.


CLS 395/596
TXT Plural microsequencers (e.g., dual microsequencers):

    Subject matter under subclass 595 including two or more microsequencers for
    sequencing through microroutines.


CLS 395/597
TXT Multilevel microcontroller (e.g., dual-level control store):

    Subject matter under subclass 595 including means or steps for sequencing
    microinstruction processing utilizing a multilevel (e.g., dual level)
    microcode wherein, for example, a first level microcode addresses and
    controls the retrieval of a second or subsequent level microcode.


CLS 395/598
TXT Control store architecture:

    Subject matter under subclass 595 having a microprogram storage that is
    writable/changeable so that a different microprogram may be installed, for
    example, showing details of an arrangement of the micromemory within a
    microsequencer.

    (1)     Note. Writable control store architectures are properly classified
    here. Also a product by process PLA operating as a microprogram ASIC could
    go here. However, transistor level or logic gate level chip design is
    classified elsewhere.

    (2)     Note. Classification herein requires more than nominal recitation
    of microcode in combination with writable control store. Memory accessing
    and memory addressing are classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500,    for emulators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 37+ for
    multifunctional or programmable logic including PLA, PAL, PLD, etc.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses
    488-491 for integrated circuit design tools.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, for details of memory
    design at the transistor or gate level.

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclasses 100+ for memory accessing and control.


CLS 395/651
TXT DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING SYSTEM INITIALIZATION AND CONFIGURATION (E.G.,
    INITIALIZING, SETUP, CONFIGURATION, OR RESETTING):

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising means or steps for
    establishing original operating parameters or data for a computer or
    digital data processing system, such as, allocating extended or expanded
    memory, specifying device drivers, paths, files, buffers, disk management,
    etc.

    (1)     Note. The subject matter of this subclass is directed to the
    initial configuration of a system. In contrast, basic Input/Output system
    (BIOS) setup on a personal computer which is normally directed to steps
    which take place after the booting or loading of the operating system and
    means or steps for setting system parameters or variables which may be
    modified by the user are classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182.01+,for reconfiguring in the event of a fault under fault recovery,
    reliability and availability.

    183.12, for testing at power up.

    200.5+, for network computer configuring.

    284,    for configuring under system intra-connecting.

    333     through 335, for configuring an operator interface.

    497.01+,for memory configuring.

    652,    for loading initialization program (e.g., booting, rebooting, warm
    booting, remote booting, basic Input/Output system (BIOS), initial program
    load (IPL) or bootstrapping).

    653,    for reconfiguring of system settings, per se.

    800.01+, for processor architectures.

    828+,   for peripheral configuration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 825+ for selective
    communication systems.

    707,    Data Processing - Database and File Management, Data Structures, or
    Document Processing, subclasses 200+ for file system handling.


CLS 395/652
TXT Loading initialization program (e.g., booting, rebooting, warm booting,
    remote booting, basic Input/Output system (BIOS), initial program load
    (IPL), bootstrapping):

    Subject matter under subclass 651 directed to means or steps for booting a
    computer or digital data processing system.

    (1)     Note. This subclass includes initial program load (IPL), bootstrap,
    re-booting/resetting, loading an updated basic Input/Output system (BIOS),
    and warm/cold booting. These events typically occur automatically in the
    computer system at power on reset or after a warm boot or warm restart and
    include reading memory locations. Memory accessing and control, per se, and
    address formation, per se, however, are classified elsewhere.

    (2)     Note. For the purpose of this definition it should be understood
    that transferring an operating system into memory may involve the use of a
    secondary loader program.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183.12, for power-on self test (POST).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclasses 200+ for address formation and subclasses 170+ for memory space
    allocation or memory configuring.


CLS 395/653
TXT RECONFIGURING DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING SYSTEM (E.G., CHANGING SYSTEM
    SETTINGS):

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising means or steps for
    changing system settings or operational modes after they have been set.

    (1)     Note. The subject matter of this subclass is directed to alteration
    of system settings, parameters, or operational modes that have been
    previously set or initialized. Initialization of a system is classified
    above.

    (2)     Note. For the purpose of this definition "system settings" includes
    any system data orientation or device configuration required for a
    particular mode of operation of a digital data processing system.

    (3)     Note. The subject matter of this subclass is directed to alteration
    of system settings, parameters, or operational modes that have been
    previously set or initialized. Context switching of a processor, computer,
    or digital data processing system between executing processes, tasks, or
    threads is classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182.01+,for reconfiguring in the event of a fault under fault recovery,
    reliability and availability.

    183.12, for testing at power up.

    200.5+, for network computer configuring.

    284,    for configuring under system intra-connecting.

    497.01+,for memory configuring.

    570,    for mode switching under processing control at the ALU level.

    651,    for configuring of system settings, per se.

    677     through 678, for multitasking and context switching under task
    management and control.

    800.01+, for processor architectures.

    828+,   for peripheral configuration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 333 - 335 for configuring an
    operator interface.

    707,    Data Processing - Database and File Management, Data Structures, or
    Document Processing, subclasses 200+ for file system handling.


CLS 395/670
TXT TASK MANAGEMENT OR CONTROL:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising means or steps for
    administrating over processor or job execution in a digital data processing
    system.

    (1)     Note. For clarification, a "process" and a "task" are equivalent
    terms in the art. In addition, a "thread" is a path of execution within a
    process.

    (2)     Note. Control functions such as subroutine calling and control are
    classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182.1,  for fault recovery synchronization maintenance of processors in
    systems with concurrent redundantly operating processors by masking or
    reconfiguring.

    182.13, for state recovery, per se, in computers or digital data processing
    systems.

    185.02+,for state error detecting, per se.

    200.78, for multicomputer synchronization in a network.

    346,    for interwindow links and communication.

    390+,   for instruction issuing.

    551+,   for clock synchronization, pulse and timing in computers or digital
    data processing systems.

    561+,   for processing control, per se.

    580     through 591, for branching, conditional branching and exception
    processing.

    595     through 598, for processing sequence control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 130+
    for generic control systems, and subclasses 468.05+ for manufacturing
    control systems that involves accommodating for interrelated control and
    manufacturing processes and resource allocation.

    705,    Data Processing: Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/price Determination, subclasses 7 through 9 for operations research,
    per se, including systems directed to generalized linear programming
    problem solving and cost function analysis, resource allocating in business
    transaction processing and scheduling of interrelated processes.


CLS 395/671
TXT Batch or transaction processing:

    Subject matter under subclass 670 comprising means or steps directed to (a)
    managing processes by collecting, listing, and storing jobs for later
    sequential execution as a group without user intervention (i.e., batch
    processing), or (b) executing jobs immediately after they are received by a
    system and occurring in groups (i.e., transaction processing).

    (1)     Note. Data processing where jobs are executed on a computer
    immediately after they are received by the system is properly classified
    here. However, interpreters which interpret and execute one instruction at
    a time are classified elsewhere.

    (2)     Note. Subject matter of this subclass may include transaction
    processing and job processing between multiple processors, computers, or
    digital data processing systems and may involve user intervention.

    (3)     Note. The term "batch" historically takes on slightly different
    meaning depending on the scale of the data processing system. In a
    microcomputer a stored batch file contains a "batch" of operating system
    commands to be executed automatically when the batch file is invoked. On
    larger systems jobs and their associated data are typically collected and
    stored for later processing as a "batch".

    (4)     Note. This subclass is directed to process transactions, per se.
    Database transaction processing and business transaction processing are
    classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    705+,   for compilers and program code translators, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS

    705,    Data Processing: Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/price Determination, subclasses 7 through 9 for operations research,
    per se, including systems directed to generalized linear programming
    problem solving and cost function analysis, resource allocating in business
    transaction processing and scheduling of interrelated processes.

    707,    Data Processing - Database and File Management, Data Structures, or
    Document Processing, subclasses 1+ for database accessing and control.


CLS 395/672
TXT Process scheduling:

    Subject matter under subclass 670 comprising means or steps for scheduling
    multiple tasks based upon any considered factors, e.g., priority of
    execution, balancing the work load or resources, memory use, register use,
    resource availability, time constraints, etc.

    (1)     Note. Includes task assignment, (i.e., deciding which processor or
    other resources will be used to execute one or more tasks).

    (2)     Note. Signaling, semaphores, and mutual exclusion mechanisms (i.e.,
    mutexes) used for program or process synchronization purposes are
    classified here. However, interprocess communication (IPC) is classified
    elsewhere. Mutual exclusion mechanisms are used to synchronize data access
    across multiple processes. Mutual exclusion mechanisms can be acquired or
    "owned" by only one process or thread at a time. A semaphore controls
    access to a shared system resource by using a reference count scheme.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    287+,   for bus access regulating.

    584+,   for instruction prefetching under subclass 580 branching.

    680,    for interprocess communication.

    728+,   for access arbitrating, per se.

    733+,   for interrupt processing, per se.

    800.28, for distributed processing system architecture.

    856+,   for Input/Output access regulation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclass 169 for memory access pipelining.


CLS 395/673
TXT Priority scheduling:

    Subject matter under subclass 672 for determining an order of execution of
    jobs to be done based on the level of relative importance or precedence
    assigned with each job.

    (1)     Note. For the purpose of this subclass, scheduling constraints may
    include resource characteristics, e.g., performance, availability, data
    coherency, etc.


CLS 395/674
TXT Resource allocation:

    Subject matter under subclass 672 for allocating digital data processing
    system resources for tasks and often including deciding how best to use the
    available resources to get the job done.

    (1)     Note. This subclass is directed to deciding which resources to use.
    The process of deciding which jobs to do first and what order to do them in
    is classified in subclass 673.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    390+,   for instruction issuing.

    673,    for priority scheduling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 346 for interwindow links and
    communication.

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclasses 170+ for memory configuring.


CLS 395/675
TXT Load balancing:

    Subject matter under subclass 672 directed to minimizing processing
    execution time by efficiently distributing work load amongst operational
    computers, processors and other system resources.

    (1)     Note. This may be done by a centralized mechanism which monitors
    the system processors, or by a distributed method, where idle processors
    query busy processors for extra work to reduce idle time. Polling of
    peripherals, however, is classified elsewhere.

    (2)     Includes initial task assignment to certain resources based on
    utilization of the resources (e.g., sending a task to the processor with
    the least utilization or load).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    856+,   for Input/Output access regulation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclasses 133+ for cache memory entry replacement strategies.


CLS 395/676
TXT Dependency-based cooperative processing of multiple programs working
    together to accomplish a larger task:

    Subject matter under the subclass 672 comprising means or steps for
    identifying and dealing with dependencies between executing programs, tasks
    and processes (e.g., data dependencies, control flow dependencies, etc.).

    (1)     Note. This subclass is directed to the analysis for dependencies in
    executing programs, for example, for situations where at least one
    executing program requires data from at least one other executing program
    and wherein the requisite data is used to make decisions affecting the
    operational sequence of at least one program. Compilers that analyze
    program code dependencies during compiling are classified elsewhere.

    (2)     Note. This subclass provides for signaling and communicating which
    allows two executing programs or processes to cooperate. Signaling and
    communicating between two computers/processors, independent of the tasks
    being executed, for example, to synchronize the processors, by handshaking
    is classified elsewhere. See search notes below.

    (3)     Note. Signaling, semaphores, and mutual exclusion mechanisms used
    for program or process synchronization purposes are classified here. For
    clarification, mutual exclusion mechanisms (i.e., mutexes) are used to
    synchronize data access across multiple processes. Mutexes can be acquired
    o"owned" by only one process or thread at a time. A semaphore controls
    access to a shared system resource by using a reference count scheme.
    Interprocess communication (IPC) is classified elsewhere.

    (4)     Note. Redundant systems for fault tolerance and fault avoidance
    often include multiple, redundant processors executing the same program so
    that if one fails, another can be substituted. Cooperative processing such
    as this is done for fault avoidance. Such subject matter is classified
    elsewhere in the class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180+,   for redundant systems some fault-tolerant systems may include
    multiple, redundant processors executing the same program so that if one
    fails, another can be used.

    200.3+,for multiprocessing systems, including subclass 200.78 directed to
    synchronizing multiple computers.

    392     through 395, for instruction dependency checking and resolution.

    553,    for synchronization of clocks between two computers, processors or
    digital data processing systems independent of the tasks being executed.

    680     through 684, for interprocess communication (IPC) or signalling.

    706,    compiling code for a parallel or multiprocessor system.

    800.01+, for architectures, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplexed Communications, appropriate subclasses for asynchronous
    communications.

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclasses 150 through 151 for memory access regulation.


CLS 395/677
TXT Multitasking, time sharing:

    Subject matter under subclass 672 comprising means or steps for dividing
    processor time of a computer or digital data processing system between
    multiple executing programs or processes.

    (1)     Note. This subclass is directed to multitasking systems
    characterized by operating system means or steps for managing or
    supervising a switch between two or a plurality of discrete executing
    processes or tasks. For the purpose of this definition, each process or
    task has its own instruction data pointer and an address space comprised of
    code, data and free memory, and may include other data necessary to restore
    a process undergoing a context switch. Since each process has its own
    instruction data pointer and an address space comprised of code, data and
    free memory, every process at any given point in time has a state or
    context defined by the contents of its instruction data pointer and address
    space. Multitasking systems classified here facilitate the switching from
    one context to another. Recovering a digital data processing system or
    computer process combined with the detection of a fault, however is
    classified elsewhere.

    (2)     Note. Preemptive multitasking (also called "time slicing") is
    included under this subclass. For clarification, preemptive multitasking is
    characterized by an operating system periodically (i.e., according to a set
    schedule) interrupting the execution of a process and passing control to
    another waiting process and performing a context switch after which the
    context for the next pending process is restored, and the next process is
    executed for the duration of its time slice or "quantum". Instruction
    processing related to context switching and mode switching is classified
    elsewhere.

    (3)     Note. Nonpreemptive and cooperative multitasking are included under
    this subclass. Nonpreemptive multitasking is where a currently executing
    task yields control to another task when it is ready, rather than being
    forcibly preempted by an operating system. Cooperative multitasking is
    where one or more background tasks are given processing time during idle
    times in the foreground task. In contrast, user-implemented task or context
    switching between two or more applications programs which are both resident
    in memory at the same time where only the foreground application is given
    processing time and a user may manually activate a background task by
    bringing the window or screen of the background task to the front is
    classified elsewhere.

    (4)     Note. For clarity, time sharing is a form of multitasking. Time
    sharing is generally characterized by multiple users executing programs on
    a client-server system. A client-server system is characterized by at least
    one server computer and a plurality of clients or users which operate from
    terminals or computers programmed to emulate terminals. Examples of time
    sharing systems are systems which implement the UNIXTM or WINDOWS NTTM
    operating systems. On a time sharing system the processing time allotted to
    each user program is interleaved by the operating system. Privileged users
    can be assigned higher priority and will receive more processing time than
    nonprivileged users. Access control determination for process arbitration,
    per se, is classified elsewhere in this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181+,   for fault recovery, per se, in computer systems and digital data
    processing systems.

    182.13  through 182.2, for recovery from detected faults in a process or
    data file using stored state data and history logs.

    182.21, for resetting a processor combined with fault detection.

    569     through 570, for instruction and register level context preserving,
    context swapping, mode switching and mode swapping under subclass 561
    processor control.

    671,    for batch processing and transaction processing where complete
    programs are executed in their entirety from start to finish.

    678,    for this form of user-implemented task or context switching between
    two or more applications programs which are both resident in memory at the
    same time where only the foreground application is given processing time
    and a user may manually activate a background task by bringing the window
    or screen of the background task to the front.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses
    131-136 for generic data processing control systems including plural
    processors and fault recovery.


CLS 395/678
TXT Context switching:

    Subject matter under the subclass 677 comprising means or steps for saving
    and restoring state data (i.e., context) of a task, process, or thread in a
    preemptive, nonpreemptive, or cooperative multitasking system.

    (1)     Note. This subclass is directed to the specific implementation
    details of performing a context switch in a preemptive, nonpreemptive, or
    cooperative multitasking system.

    (2)     Note. Also included in this subclass is the user-implemented task
    or context switch between two or more application programs which are
    resident in memory at the same time. In this arrangement only the
    foreground application is given processing time. A user may manually
    activate a background task by bringing the window or screen of the
    background task to the front. An example of this type of task switch is
    when a user switches between a WINDOWS 3.1TM program and a MS-DOS program
    by invoking the Alt-Tab key press combination.

    (3)     Note. A context switching is typically implemented with interrupts
    and multitasking patents often use language directed to interrupts to
    explain how time sharing takes place. Therefore, a patent directed to
    context switching and reciting interrupt processing is properly classified
    here. Interrupt processing, per se, is classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    569,    for context preserving at the instruction processing level.

    733,    for interrupt processing, per se.


CLS 395/680
TXT INTERPROGRAM COMMUNICATION, INTERPROCESS COMMUNICATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising means or steps for
    exchanging data or messages between two executing programs or processes,
    independent of the hardware used in the communication.

    (1)     Note. Classification here requires more than nominal recitation of
    "tasks", "processes", "programs", etc.

    (2)     Note. The subject matter of this subclass is directed to
    communication between processes. Hardware mechanisms such as bus
    transaction processing, data transfer between computers and digital data
    processing systems is classified elsewhere.

    (3)     Note. The basic distinctions between this subclass together with
    its indented subclasses and the communications classes (e.g., Class 340,
    Class 342, Class 343, Class 358, Class 370, Class 375, Class 379, Class
    455, etc.) are (i) the subclasses here include digital data processing
    systems or computers, rather than other data communications devices, and
    that (ii) the communication is between tasks and processes in a digital
    data processing systems or computers. Overall combinations directed to a
    system for performing communications functions only are classified in one
    of the communications art classes.

    (4)     Note. Preprocessing or postprocessing of signals in a data transfer
    to effect a particular communications method (e.g., modulating,
    demodulating, encoding, decoding, and phase locking) is classified in the
    appropriate communications class. See below for examples.

    (5)     Note. Subject matter relating to transmission or interconnection
    systems not classifiable herein and not appropriate for the communication
    classes should be classified in the residual class for all transmission or
    interconnection systems.

    (6)     Note. This subclass is for communication between processes and
    tasks. Communication between computers or digital data processing systems
    and peripherals is classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180+,   for methods and apparatus for increasing the probability of a
    system performing correctly.

    186+,   for methods and apparatus serving to protect a digital data
    processing system from unauthorized use (e.g., virus detecting, user
    identifying, etc.).

    200.3+,for transferring data between a plurality of computers even if the
    transferring employs peripherals, e.g., modems, line adapters.

    280+,   for data transferring among memories, processors, and buses of a
    computer.

    800.01+, for digital data processing system architectures such as multiple
    instruction multiple data (MIMD) computers, vector and array computers, and
    single-chip computers.

    821+,   for transferring data from one or more peripherals to one or more
    computers for the latter to process, store, or further transfer or for
    transferring data from the computers to the peripherals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, the residual
    class for all transmission or interconnection systems, various subclasses
    for interconnection systems, per se.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 825+ for controlling one or
    more devices to obtain a plurality of results by transmission of a
    designated one of plural distinctive control signals over a smaller number
    of communication lines or channels.

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices, various
    subclasses for communications via radio waves and related systems.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 346 for interwindow links and
    communication.

    358,    Facsimile, various subclasses for the recordation, reproduction and
    transmission of sequences of images of arbitrary composition.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 131+
    for plural processors in a digital control system application.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, for the simultaneous transmission of two
    or more signals over a common medium.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclasses
    30+ for correcting errors in the transmitted data such as parity checking
    and cyclical redundancy checking.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, various subclasses for digital
    communications processing including modulating, demodulating, encoding,
    decoding, and phase locking.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, various subclasses for two-way
    electrical communication of audio information of arbitrary content.

    380,    Cryptography, for concealing, obscuring and extracting intelligible
    information by for example coding and decoding.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, various
    subclasses for wired one-way audio systems, per se.

    455,    Telecommunications, for modulated carrier wave communications, per
    se.

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclasses 100+ for accessing or controlling memories that are peripherals.


CLS 395/681
TXT Device driver communication:

    Subject matter under subclass 680 comprising means or steps for
    communication between application programs and/or operating systems and
    callable interfacing programs (i.e., device driver programs) which further
    facilitate communication and/or control of peripheral hardware devices such
    as printers, disk drives, tape drives, CRT displays, etc.

    (1)     Note. Subject matter under this subclass is directed to high-level
    communication from an operating system or application program to a device
    driver program (i.e., program to program). Device drivers are software
    programs which are custom designed to handle the low-level implementation
    details required to directly access and control a particular peripheral
    device (i.e., program to hardware). Device drivers, per se, are classified
    elsewhere. See the appropriate peripheral device area for details of how
    the low-level control of the hardware device is implemented.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101+,   for static presentation processing, per se, and in particular
    subclasses 113 and 114 for reliability and data communication, per se.

    200.5+, for configuring a network computer.

    821+,   for Input/Output data processing, per se.

    828,    for generalized peripheral configuration, per se, including
    subclass 830 for address assignment and configuration initialization,
    subclass 831 for protocol selection, and subclass 840 for concurrent
    Input/Output processing and data transfer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclasses 427+ for managing memory and for memory accessing and control.


CLS 395/682
TXT Application program interfacing (API):

    Subject matter under subclass 680 comprising a set of routines, procedures,
    or interfaces which facilitate requests or calls from one or more
    application programs to lower-level operating system routines.

    (1)     Note. This subclass is directed to the tools which allow
    application programs to utilize an operating system. Application programs
    for specific information processing tasks, such as, simulation and design,
    program development environments, business data processing, database
    systems, machine translation and document processing appear nearest to the
    top of this class hierarchy.

    (2)     Note. This subclass is directed to the tools which allow
    application programs to utilize an operating system. Programming tools, per
    se, are classified elsewhere in this class.

    (3)     Note. Object oriented data structure principles are may be employed
    in the development of an API and are properly classified here. Object
    oriented data structures, per se, are classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200.3+,for multicomputer data transferring, per se.

    339+,   for on-screen workspaces or objects and subclass 346 for
    interwindow links and communication.

    561+,   for processing control including branch instruction processing.

    701     through 711, for software development tools, per se.

    733+,   for interrupt processing, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 327 - 332 for operator
    interface aspects of workgroup for plural users or sites.

    707,    Data Processing - Database and File Management, Data Structures, or
    Document Processing, subclass 103 for object oriented schema types.


CLS 395/683
TXT Object-oriented messaging:

    Subject matter under subclass 680 comprising means or steps for
    communication between objects (e.g., a message tells a receiving object
    what to do) wherein a method or member function of a receiving object is
    invoked or called by a sending method of a sending object and the message
    passing may involve passing actual parameters (i.e., for example, either by
    reference or by value) to the target object.

    (1)     Note. Object-oriented data structure principles employed in message
    passing are properly classified here. Mere recitations to object oriented
    data structures, per se, does not automatically cause classification in
    this subclass. Object-oriented data structures, per se, are classified
    elsewhere.

    (2)     Note. Messaging techniques abound in the data communications arts
    in the form of signalling protocols, message protocols, semaphore
    techniques, token passing, etc. An object oriented paradigm will present
    generalized functionality in a neatly reusable and/or customizable program
    code "module". Therefore, a concept search for a messaging technique should
    also consider the other communications classes as appropriate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200.3+, for multicomputer data transferring, per se, and subclasses 200.43+
    for transferring data via a shared memory.

    285,    for bus protocols, per se.

    348     through 349, for icons and metaphoric icon objects under operator
    interfacing subclass 326.

    561+,   for processing control including branch instruction processing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, the residual
    class for all transmission or interconnection systems, various subclasses
    for interconnection systems, per se.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 825+ for controlling one or
    more devices to obtain a plurality of results by transmission of a
    designated one of plural distinctive control signals over a smaller number
    of communication lines or channels.

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices, various
    subclasses for communications via radio waves and related systems.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 346 for interwindow links and
    communication.

    358,    Facsimile, various subclasses for the recordation, reproduction and
    transmission of sequences of images of arbitrary composition.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, for the simultaneous transmission of two
    or more signals over a common medium.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclasses
    30+ for correcting errors in the transmitted data such as parity checking
    and cyclical redundancy checking.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, various subclasses for digital
    communications processing including modulating, demodulating, encoding,
    decoding, and phase locking.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, various subclasses for two-way
    electrical communication of audio information of arbitrary content.

    380,    Cryptography, for concealing, obscuring and extracting intelligible
    information by for example coding and decoding.

    455,    Telecommunications, for modulated carrier wave communications, per
    se.

    707,    Data Processing - Database and File Management, Data Structures, or
    Document Processing, subclass 103 for object oriented schema types


CLS 395/684
TXT Remote procedure calling (RPC):

    Subject matter under subclass 680 comprising means or steps for invoking a
    target procedure in a remote address space.

    (1)     Note. For clarification a remote procedure call is distinguished
    from local subroutine calls because the target procedure of a RPC is
    invoked in a remote address space. Therefore, pointers or references to
    local data are invalid within the address space of the remote machine.
    Addressing, per se, branch instruction processing and compilers, per se,
    are classified elsewhere.

    (2)     Note. For clarification, remote procedure calls are used in a
    distributed programming environment. Communication with a remote
    environment is simplified in that programmers of distributed applications
    need not concern themselves with implementation details of communication
    with another address space, as support for the remote procedure call is
    provided by a kernel of each machine. Distributed data processing, per se,
    and software development tools, however, are classified elsewhere.

    (3)     Note. The subject matter of this subclass is directed to remote
    procedure calls (RPC). Although RPCs look a lot like local procedure calls
    to the programmer, there are slight differences in the calling semantics.
    In addition, branching is a related topic. A concept search on RPC,
    branching or local procedure calling should consider these related topics
    are classified elsewhere in the class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200.31+, for distributed data processing.

    561+,   for processing control including branch instruction processing.

    701+,   for programming tools.


CLS 395/685
TXT Dynamic linking, late binding:

    Subject matter under subclass 680 wherein functions contained within one or
    more executable code libraries (e.g., a dynamic link library or DLL) are
    called as needed at runtime by one or more application programs.

    (1)     Note. For clarification, dynamic linking is distinguished from
    static linking in that very large programs can be executed in a limited
    memory space by loading and invoking external executable libraries only
    when needed at run time. The main executable program is much smaller than
    would result if the libraries and object files had been statically linked
    prior to runtime. In addition, multiple applications may reference a single
    dynamic link library (DLL). This eliminates redundant code and results in a
    more modular system. Also, existing programs can be readily updated without
    recompilation by providing updated DLLs.

    (2)     Note. In implicit dynamic linking links between calls in the
    application and functions in the DLL are resolved at link time. In explicit
    dynamic linking links between calls in the application and functions in the
    DLL are resolved at run time.


CLS 395/701
TXT SOFTWARE PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT TOOL (E.G., INTEGRATED CASE TOOL, STAND ALONE
    DEVELOPMENT TOOL):

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising means or steps
    operating on a computer or digital data processing system which enable a
    user to author, create and manage computer implemented processes.

    (1)     Note. This subclass and those indented below accept computer
    programming tools, environments and application programs which enable a
    programmer to create computer programs, for example, by use of a flow
    chart, pseudo code, a graphical description, program specifications, or by
    writing source code directly. However, particular software applications
    such as natural language translators, business tools, word processors,
    etc., are classified elsewhere.

    (2)     Note. The tools classified here may translate input data into
    source code, translate source code into object code, link object code into
    executable code or simply bring existing source code modules together to
    satisfy specified requirements. Code convertors that change BCD to BINARY
    are classified elsewhere.

    (3)     Note. The software development tools classifiable here may include
    the use of artificial intelligence in the construction of a program.
    However, artificial intelligence programming tools for developing expert
    systems are classified elsewhere.

    (4)     Note. The general ability to link certain modules together to form
    a program is classifiable here. However, where the programming tool is
    directed to a particular application such as the control of a particular
    machine or device of another class the proper classification is in said
    machine or device class when provided for there. When the programming of a
    particular machine is not provided for in the device class, the proper
    classification is in the computer applications art Class 364. For example,
    programming for programmable positionable servo systems is classified with
    the positionable servo systems art. See the search class notes below. And,
    for example, programming for the control of machine tools is classified
    with the machine tools control art (e.g., Class 364, subclasses 474.22+).

    (5)     Note. The software programming tools in this subclass array often
    utilize graphical, symbolic or iconic metaphors in the user interface. The
    combination of a programming tool with user interface metaphors is properly
    classified here. However, generalized operator interface inventions such as
    on-screen workspaces and features of GUI's such as pop-up controls and
    menus are classified elsewhere in this class.

    (6)     Note. The software development tools here may include tools which
    perform the function of cross-compiling a program. However, a program which
    performs the cross-compiling in-situ (i.e., an application running on a
    platform) is an emulator and is classified with emulation in this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     artificial intelligence for programming AI tools and developing
    expert systems.

    500,    for emulator application programs.

    527,    for in-system emulation of system components for compatibility.

    967,    for a cross-reference art collection directed to visual or iconic
    programming used in process control and configuration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity: Motive Power Systems, subclasses 560+ for programmable
    positionable servo systems.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, appropriate subclasses for
    digital code-to-digital code converters, A/D converters and D/A converters.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 326 - 358 for generalized
    operator interface.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 184+
    for programming methods for general purpose controllers and industrial
    controllers; subclasses 474.22-474.27 for machine tool operator interface;
    and subclass 578 for simulation.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 76- 78 for sequential and programmed
    control of photocopying machines.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, appropriate subclasses for means and
    method for teaching computer programming.

    705,    Data Processing: Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/price Determination, subclasses  1+ for business data processing, per
    se.

    707,    Data Processing - Database and File Management, Data Structures, or
    Document Processing, subclasses 500+ for document and text processing, per
    se.


CLS 395/702
TXT Generating source code:

    Subject matter under subclass 701 wherein a program or high-level
    development tool facilitates creation of the list of human-readable
    instruction data in a programming language.

    (1)     Note. This subclass is for tools which are used to facilitate
    software development and may include recitation and processes involving the
    use of graphical user interfaces, "visual" development environments and
    flow charts. However, general purpose operator interfaces, graphical user
    interfaces (GUI), or other graphical displays are classified elsewhere.

    (2)     Note. The source code generating programs or tools classified here
    may generate source code directly without using graphics, for example, by
    use of a specification. However, program generation tools utilizing a
    specification directed to the physics of materials or interactions of
    constituent parts of a physical process, such as, in the field of
    simulating chemical, electrical, or mechanical processes for the purpose of
    design and analysis are classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500,    for emulators, per se.

    967,    for an iconic programming cross-reference art collection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 326+ for operator interfaces,
    per se.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 512
    and 578 simulation.


CLS 395/703
TXT Managing source code:

    Subject matter under subclass 701 directed to the enterprise of program
    development administration including, for example, maintaining source code
    modules or files, preprocessing or integrating source code, generating
    design documentation from source code, or source code version management.

    (1)     Note. The subject matter of this subclass is limited to managing
    source code in a programming tool environment. As evidenced by the many
    notes which follow, the generic concepts of version management, data
    consistency and data coherency are distributed throughout the class under
    various titles, such as, document version management, file and database
    maintenance, consistency, etc. Therefore, a concept search for data
    management, per se, should include consideration of these related topics.

    (2)     Note. For the purpose of this definition preprocessing or
    integration of source code occurs when source code modules or files are
    combined or processed before compilation (e.g., using a preprocessor to
    process include files or MACROS, using a MAKEFILE to select and schedule
    source files for compilation).

    (3)     Note. For the purpose of this definition generating design
    documentation occurs when pseudo-code, structure charts, flow charts, data
    flow diagrams, entity-relationship diagrams, class hierarchies, comment
    listings, or other graphs or programming aids are generated by scanning the
    source code. Source code version management is where versions of source
    code are managed in a library to facilitate team software development.

    (4)     Note. For the purpose of this definition examples of source code
    version management include UNIX utilities SCCS (Source Code Control System)
    and RCS (Revision Control System).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182.13+, for process and data state recovery, per se, in particular
    subclass 182.18 for use of plural data sets (i.e., logs) containing set
    interrelation data.

    186+,   for security in digital data processing systems.

    676,    for identifying and dealing with runtime dependencies between
    executing programs, tasks, processes, e.g., data dependencies, control flow
    dependencies, etc.

    712,    for software installation and version management of operating
    systems, application programs, and other executable programs.

    726+,   for access control, per se.

    772,    for document version management under document processing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 327 - 332 for operator
    interfaces aspects of workgroup for plural users or sites and subclass 971
    for a collection of art directed to interface aspects of cooperative
    decision support systems for groups of users.

    705,    Data Processing: Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/price Determination, subclasses 1 through 45  for automated financial
    or business practice or management systems.

    707,    Data Processing - Database and File Management, Data Structures, or
    Document Processing, subclass 8 for database concurrency, and subclasses
    200+ for file and database maintenance systems including data coherency in
    database systems.

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclasses 141 through 146 for cache memory data coherency.


CLS 395/704
TXT Program code execution analyzer, debugger or monitor:

    Subject matter under subclass 701 comprising means or steps for examining
    code at execution using breakpoints, hooks, tracing or instruction
    substitution, etc.

    (1)     Note. This subclass is for programming tools which help programmers
    debug executable code in the development phase of programming. Recovery
    from a runtime fault or exception in an already functioning and tested
    program is classified elsewhere in this class.

    (2)     Note. This subclass includes performance analyzers for determining
    efficiency of execution, program status monitors, program execution time
    analysis (e.g., time profilers), and program resource utilization monitors
    (e.g., memory use profilers or pointer utilization profilers).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180+,   for error detection/correction not related to software program
    development and in particular 183.01+ directed to fault locating.

    182.13  through 182.2, for state recovery such as reexecuting instructions
    in a computer process.

    183.1,  for generating a halt, clock or interrupt signal in the detection
    of a fault.

    183.11, for substituting or adding an instruction in the detection of a
    fault.

    183.13  through 183.15, for analyzing outputs, state or design in the
    detection of a fault including computer software faults.

    500,    for emulation, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 400+
    for general monitoring and testing not related to Software Program
    Development, and in particular subclass 550 for generalized measuring and
    testing and subclass 569 for timing analysis.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery,
    appropriate subclasses for error correction/detection, per se.


CLS 395/705
TXT Program code translator or compiler:

    Subject matter under subclass 701 comprising means or steps for converting
    program code from one form to another.

    (1)     Note. The translation can vary in degree of complexity from a
    simple reordering of program code blocks or statements to reverse compiling
    from executable code to source code.

            EXAMPLES OF PROGRAM CODE
    TRANSLATORS:

    interpreters-:[source code] -> the instructions are interpreted and
    executed one instruction at a time.



    compiler -:[source code] -> [object code].



    reverse compilers -:[executable code]-> [source code].



    cross-compilers -:[code on a first system] ->   [execution on a second
    system].



    cross platform -:[code for HOST1 (e.g., IBM)] -> [Code for HOST2 (e.g., VAX)
    ].



    cross language -:[source code in a first language; e.g., Pascal] -> [source
    code in a second language; e.g., "C"].

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500,    for emulators and emulation of a program or device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, appropriate subclasses
    A-to-D/D-to-A converters, D-to-D converters (e.g., BCD-to-decimal).

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems subclasses 488-491
    for "silicon compilers" (i.e., tools used in the design and analysis of
    integrated circuits).

    704,    Data Processing - Speech Signal Processing, Linguistics, Language
    Translation, and Audio Compression/Decompression, subclasses 1+ for parsers
    and syntax checkers for linguistic and natural language applications, (e.g.
    parsing, grammatical rules, etc.).

    707,    Data Processing - Database and File Management, Data Structures, or
    Document Processing, subclass 4 for database query language translators,
    (e.g., SQL to QBE) and for compilers of embedded SQL database query
    statements (nonprocedural language).


CLS 395/706
TXT Compiling code for a parallel or multiprocessor system:

    Subject matter under subclass 705 for analyzing and compiling code which is
    intended for execution on a parallel or multiprocessor system.

    (1)     Note. For the purpose of this definition the code is generally
    analyzed for parallel sections, multiprocessor execution relationships, and
    parallel or cooperative data dependencies. Code is then compiled to create
    one or more programs for a parallel, cooperative, or distributed data
    processing system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200.31+, for a distributed data processing system.

    207     through 209, for operations research, per se, including systems
    directed to generalized linear programming problem solving.

    676,    for identifying and dealing with a run-time dependency between
    executing programs, tasks, processes (e.g., a data dependency, control flow
    dependency, etc.).

    709,    for optimizing compilers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 715.011
    for calculating and computing systems for performing arithmetic operations,
    such as subclass 735 directed to solving equations.


CLS 395/707
TXT Translation using an intermediate form or language:

    Subject matter under subclass 705 wherein at least two levels of code
    conversion are performed during the conversion of program code from an
    initial form to a target form.

    (1)     Note. For the purpose of this definition, it is not required that
    the program code in the target form be executable code.

    (2)     Note. Classification here is proper even if an intermediate form of
    the code is produced during a transitional process of code translation from
    the initial form to the target form. However, for the purpose of these
    definitions a symbol table generated by a multipass compiler is not
    considered to be an intermediate code form and is classified with
    compilers, per se.

    (3)     Note. Linkers are not found in this subclass. See search notes
    below.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    705,    for generating symbol tables by a compiler.

    710,    for linking object code.

    711,    for dynamic linking.

    785,    for format transformation of document types.


CLS 395/708
TXT Analyzing syntax, data, or an expression for compilation:

    Subject matter under subclass 705 wherein the grammar of a code form is
    analyzed before compilation for compliance with established rules of the
    code form.

    (1)     Note. Products of preconversion analysis functions are manipulated
    and refined code forms. Therefore, a concept search for code refinement
    techniques, per se, should include the other subclasses directed to the
    related subject matter of performing translations, per se.

    (2)     Note. This subclass is for subject matter directed to grammar
    analysis in the environment of software programming and development tools.
    Parsers and syntax checkers for linguistic and natural language
    applications, (e.g., parsing, grammatical rules, etc.) are classified
    elsewhere. A concept search for a parser or syntax checker, per se, should
    include the other subclasses directed to the related subject matter in
    natural language processing.

    (3)     Note. This subclass is for subject matter directed to grammar
    analysis of procedural languages in the environment of software programming
    and development tools. Database query language translators, (e.g., SQL to
    QBE) and compilers of embedded SQL database query statements (nonprocedural
    language) are classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    705,    for code translators and compilers.

    707,    for code translation using an intermediate form.

    759,    for parsers and syntax checkers for linguistic and natural language
    applications, (e.g. parsing, grammatical rules, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    707,    Data Processing - Database and File Management, Data Structures, or
    Document Processing, subclass 4 for database query language translators,
    (e.g., SQL to QBE) and for compilers of embedded SQL database query
    statements (non-procedural language).


CLS 395/709
TXT Optimization (e.g., removing redundancy):

    Subject matter under subclass 708 comprising means or steps for making
    program code compilation or execution more efficient with respect to a
    performance parameter such as speed, memory usage or other resource usage.

    (1)     Note. This subclass is for optimizing compilers. For the purpose of
    this definition it should be understood that optimization steps may occur
    during any phase of the compilation. And, if a compiler does not perform an
    optimization, it's code would still run, however, not as efficiently as
    code that has been optimized with respect to a parameter or set of
    parameters. Further, for the purpose of this definition a "fast" compiler
    is considered to be an optimizing compiler in this subclass.

    (2)     Note. This subclass is for optimizing compilers. Classification is
    proper here if the compiler addresses some specified performance cost
    function. For example, optimizing should be to reduce or eliminate
    redundant code, redundant arithmetic operations or unnecessary memory
    accesses. These types of optimizations result in a smaller executable
    target program. In contrast, optimizing to decrease target program
    execution time by using inline code to eliminate the overhead of function
    calls will satisfy speed requirements but result in a much larger
    executable program. Generic systems dealing with cost functions and
    optimization of processes, per se are classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207     through 209, for operations research, per se, including systems
    directed to generalized linear programming problem solving.

    676,    for identifying and dealing with run-time dependencies between
    executing programs, tasks, processes, (e.g., data dependencies, control
    flow dependencies, etc.).


CLS 395/710
TXT Linking:

    Subject matter under subclass 701 comprising means or steps for joining
    files or libraries of object code to create executable program code.

    (1)     Note. For the purpose of this definition, processes for linking
    include resolving address data references and external references between
    separate files or libraries of object code to create an executable program.

    (2)     Note. Static linking is classified in this subclass, since images
    of all linked object files and object libraries become an integral part of
    the executable program.

    (3)     Note. The subject matter of this subclass is directed to linking
    object code to create an executable program. The linking of related data,
    objects, text data (e.g., hypertext) and other information which is
    intended for graphical display is classified elsewhere. See search this
    class, subclass notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    346,    for linking of related data, objects, text data (e.g., hypertext)
    and other information which is intended for graphical display.


CLS 395/712
TXT SOFTWARE INSTALLATION AND VERSION MANAGEMENT OF AN OPERATING SYSTEM,
    APPLICATION PROGRAM, OR OTHER EXECUTABLE PROGRAM:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising manual or automated
    means or steps implemented on one or more target computers for installing
    an operating system, application program, or other executable program; or,
    version management of an operating system, application program or other
    executable program.

    (1)     Note. The subject matter for this subclass is limited to
    installation and version management of executable programs and operating
    systems. As evidenced by the many notes which follow, the generic concept
    version management is distributed throughout the class under various
    titles, such as, document version management, file and database maintenance
    and managing source code. Therefore, a concept search for version
    management, per se, should include consideration of these related topics.

    (2)     Note. Version management includes checking for compatibility
    between specific versions of application programs and operating systems.
    Means and step for making systems compatible with one another, per se, are
    classified under many different mainline subclasses in this class under
    topics such as emulation, peripheral configuring, peripheral adapting,
    network computer configuring, and digital data processing system
    initialization and configuration, per se (e.g., initializing, setup,
    configuration, and resetting). A concept search on the topic of
    compatibility should consider these related areas.

    (3)     Note. For the purposes of this definition "installation" is defined
    as a one-time loading event which occurs only when a new version of an
    operating system or application program is updated and released.

    (4)     Note. For the purpose of this definition the installation of
    software includes the local and remote loading or copying of an operating
    system, application program, or other executable program onto a target
    storage medium such as a hard disk, tape drive, or memory device and
    version management includes keeping track of the installed version of an
    operating system, application program, or other executable program.

    (5)     Note. This subclass is directed to the processes for installing and
    managing of versions of software. Medium for delivering software, per se,
    such as, punched cards, paper or magnetic tapes, magnetic and optical
    disks, pluggable modules, cartridges and cards, networks and memories are
    classified elsewhere. When claimed in combination with installation they
    are classified here.

    (6)     Note. This subclass accepts generic updating and upgrading of
    software locally or over a network. However, purchasing software over a
    network divorced from installation or upgrading is classified elsewhere.

    (7)     Note. The identification of the specific hardware and/or software
    resources required by a particular version operating system or application
    program is also properly classified here. However, recovering from faults
    in digital data processing systems, locating faults or detecting faults in
    digital data processing systems to ensure reliability and availability is
    classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181+,   for fault recovery, per se.

    200.5+, for network computer configuring.

    500,    for emulation of system components.

    651     through 652, for digital data processing system initialization and
    configuration, per se.

    703,    for source code version management under software development which
    may include UNIX utilities such as SCCS (Source Code Control System) and
    RCS (Revision Control System).

    772,    for document version management.

    828     through 834, for peripheral configuring.

    882     through 894, for peripheral adapting.

    SEARCH CLASS

    705,    Data Processing: Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/price Determination, subclasses 1+ for automated financial or business
    practice or management systems including purchasing software over a network.

    707,    Data Processing - Database and File Management, Data Structures, or
    Document Processing, subclass 8 for database concurrency, subclasses 200+
    for file and database maintenance systems including data coherency in
    database systems, and particularly subclass 203 for version management of
    nonexecutable files and databases.


CLS 395/726
TXT ACCESS LOCKING:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising means or steps for
    preventing access to a shared digital data processing system resource or
    computer system resource.

    (1)     Note. This subclass is for access blocking of general utility. See
    the SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS notes below.

    (2)     Note. Locking access to a bus is classified elsewhere. See the
    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS notes below.

    (3)     Note. Locking access to memory is classified elsewhere. See the
    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS notes below.

    (4)     Note. Security, per se, is classified elsewhere. See the SEARCH
    THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186+,   for security, per se, in digital data processing systems.

    288,    for bus locking.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 825.3+ for security (e.g.,
    authorization) in selective communication systems.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclasses
    40.11+ for memory access block coding, and subclass 51.1 for storage
    accessing error/fault detection techniques.

    380,    Cryptography, subclass 4 for stored digital data access or copy
    prevention in combination with data encryption; e.g., software program
    protection or computer virus detection in combination with data encryption.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 26.1 for subject matter which blocks
    access to a signal source or otherwise limits usage of modulated carrier
    equipment.

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclasses 163+ for memory access limiting.


CLS 395/727
TXT ACCESS POLLING:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising means or steps for
    granting access to a shared digital data processing system resource or
    computer system resource by one of a plurality of shared digital data
    processing system components by interrogating each of the components in a
    predetermined order.

    (1)     Note. This subclass is for access polling of general utility.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    287+,   for bus access regulating in a digital data processing system.

    848,    for DMA with access regulating

    856+,   for digital data processing system Input/Output access regulating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 825.08 for selective
    communication address polling control.

    370,    Multiplex Communications,  subclasses 431+ for channel assignment
    techniques which includes channel access by polling.

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems:  Memory,
    subclass 150 for regulating simultaneous access to shared memory.


CLS 395/728
TXT ACCESS ARBITRATING:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising means or steps for
    determining which of plural digital data processing system components or
    computer system components contending for access to a shared resource shall
    be granted access at any one time based upon a predetermined criteria.

    (1)     Note. For classification herein it is adequate that the grant is
    determined. The access grant is not required for classification here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    287+,   for bus access regulating in a digital data processing system.

    670,    for task management and control related to process or job
    execution, and subclass 652 for process scheduling.

     711,   Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclass 150 for regulating simultaneous access to shared memory.

    848,    for DMA with access regulating.

    856+,   for digital data processing system Input/Output access regulating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications,  subclasses 431+ for channel assignment
    techniques which includes arbitration for access to a channel.


CLS 395/729
TXT Centralized arbitrating:

    Subject matter under subclass 728 further comprising means or steps for
    performing the arbitration for the contending digital data processing
    system components by a single processor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    293+,   for bus access regulating in a digital data processing system.


CLS 395/730
TXT Decentralized arbitrating:

    Subject matter under subclass 728 further comprising means or steps for
    performing the arbitration for the contending digital data processing
    system components by circuitry resident in each of the contending digital
    data processing system components.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    299+,   for decentralized bus access regulating in a digital data
    processing system.


CLS 395/731
TXT Hierarchical or multilevel arbitrating:

    Subject matter under subclass 728 further comprising means or steps for
    performing more than one level of arbitration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300,    for decentralized multilevel bus accessing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclasses 117+ for hierarchical memory accessing and control.


CLS 395/732
TXT Access prioritizing:

    Subject matter under subclass 728 further comprising means or steps for
    granting the access in accordance with a predetermined ranking.


CLS 395/733
TXT INTERRUPT PROCESSING:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising means or steps for
    stopping, halting, or suspending a current processing function within a
    digital data processing system components or computer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183.1,  for controlling a processor to be tested or diagnosed by applying
    an interrupt, halt, or clock signal to the processor.

    185.03, wherein an ordering of state information related to a succession of
    data, instructions etc., is the basis for state analysis.

    868+,   for Input/Output device interrupt data processing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclass 204 for virtual address branch or jump address predicting and
    subclass 213 for generalized prefetch, look-ahead, jump, or predictive
    address generating.


CLS 395/734
TXT Multimode interrupt processing:

    Subject matter under subclass 733 wherein the digital data processing
    system or computer has multiple modes of operation and further comprising
    means or steps for processing the interrupt differently depending on a mode
    of operation of the digital data processing system or computer.


CLS 395/735
TXT Interrupt inhibiting or masking:

    Subject matter under subclass 733 further comprising means or steps for
    ignoring or delaying the interrupt.


CLS 395/736
TXT Interrupt queuing:

    Subject matter under subclass 733 further comprising means or steps for
    storing interrupt signals for later execution.


CLS 395/737
TXT Interrupt prioritizing:

    Subject matter under subclass 733 further comprising means or steps for
    processing plural interrupts in accordance with a predetermined ranking.


CLS 395/738
TXT Variable:

    Subject matter under subclass 737 further comprising means or steps for
    changing a priority level of at least one interrupt in dependence on system
    conditions.


CLS 395/739
TXT Programmable interrupt processing:

    Subject matter under subclass 733 further comprising means or steps for
    processing the interrupt under the influence of a user changeable or
    replaceable stored program.


CLS 395/740
TXT With processor status:

    Subject matter under subclass 733 further comprising means or steps for
    processing the interrupt in accordance with the current condition of the
    digital data processing system, processor, or computer.


CLS 395/741
TXT With source or destination identifier:

    Subject matter under subclass 733 wherein the interrupt signal includes
    data identifying the source or destination of the interrupt.


CLS 395/742
TXT With handling vector:

    Subject matter under subclass 733 wherein the interrupt includes branch
    address data or a peripheral unit identifier data identifying the location
    of an interrupt handling routine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    670+,   for task management and control, per se.

    680+,   for interprogram communication.


CLS 395/750.01
TXT COMPUTER POWER CONTROL

    Subject matter under the class definition including details of steps or
    means for modifying the amount of power used by a digital data processing
    system or the system response to available power.

    (1)     Note. This subclass includes power reduction, powering-up systems,
    powering-down systems, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for power interruption prevention in static presentation processing.

    182.12, 182.2, and 183.12, for power supply related reliability and
    availability fault recovery and fault locating.

    FOR 750, for a foreign art collection involving computer power control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for power supply regulation, in general.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 707 for
    power-saving features in an electric digital calculating computer.


CLS 395/750.02
TXT By external command:

    Subject matter under subclass 750.01 wherein  modification of power in a
    digital data processing system is initiated by a signal from outside of the
    system.


CLS 395/750.03
TXT Power conservation:

    Subject matter under subclass 750.01 wherein means or steps are provided to
    reduce the amount of power consumed by a digital data processing system.


CLS 395/750.04
TXT By clock speed control (e.g., clock on/off):

    Subject matter under subclass 750.03 wherein power conservation is achieved
    by regulating system oscillator frequency.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    560,    for control of generic systems and devices by inhibiting or
    stopping a clock.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 113+ for miscellaneous frequency control.

    331,    Oscillators, appropriate subclasses for oscillators, per se.

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 117+ for a frequency modulator.


CLS 395/750.05
TXT Active/idle mode processing:

    Subject matter under subclass 750.03 wherein power conservation is achieved
    by selectively removing or reducing power to all elements of a digital data
    processing system according to a pre-defined pattern (i.e., mode) which
    results in a temporary interruption of data processing.

    (1)     Note. There may be more than two modes in a given system.

    (2)     Note. Included here are sleep/resume, suspend/resume, or standby
    systems.

    (3)     Note. Power is subsequently applied or increased to recommence
    normal processing.


CLS 395/750.06
TXT By shutdown of only part of system:

    Subject matter under subclass 750.03 wherein power conservation is achieved
    by selectively turning power off to only a portion of the digital data
    processing system.


CLS 395/750.07
TXT Power sequencing:

    Subject matter under subclass 750.01 involving the application or removal
    of power to a digital data processing system by a predetermined series of
    stages.

    (1)     Note. Also included here is subject matter involving power sequence
    inhibit.


CLS 395/750.08
TXT Having power source monitoring:

    Subject matter under subclass 750.01 including sensing of some digital data
    processing system power parameter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184.01, for system performance monitoring for fault avoidance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclasses 76.11+ for measuring
    or testing of electricity, per se.


CLS 395/800.01
TXT PROCESSING ARCHITECTURE:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a particular
    arrangement of (a) elements of an individual complete processor which may
    be formed on a single integrated chip, (b) components of a complete digital
    data processing system, (c) plural processing elements, (d) plural
    processors, or (e) plural digital data processing systems where processing
    is performed on a generic instruction or process.

    (1)     Note. Excluded herein is specific instruction implementation such
    as branching, store multiple, etc. See SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS notes
    below.

    (2)     Note. Implementation of a generic instruction within a particular
    instruction set is classified here.

    (3)     Note. This subclass and its indents require more than nominal
    recitation of the architecture of processing elements or operations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     for plural processor robot control.

    200.3+, for data transfer between plural spatially distributed computers or
    digital data processing systems.

    280+,   for particular intrasystem connecting (e.g., bus transaction
    processing) not included in a particular processing architecture.

    376+,   for architecture based instruction processing including specific
    instruction implementation.

    502+,   for a computer graphic processor system which includes plural
    graphics processors.

    706,    for program code translating or compiling for  multiprocessor
    system.

    733+,   for interrupt processing, in general.

    FOR 800, for a foreign art collection involving computer processing
    architecture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 825+ for controlling one or
    more devices to obtain a plurality of results by transmission of a
    designated one of plural distinctive control signals over a smaller number
    of communication lines or channels, particularlysubclass 825.02 for tree or
    cascade selective communication, subclasses 825.03+ for channel selection,
    subclass 825.05 for a plurality of controlled devices connected by a
    communication line in a closed series configuration, 825.06+ for
    communication systems where status of a controlled device is communicated,
    subclasses 825.2+ for synchronizing selective communication systems,
    subclasses 825.5+ for lockout or priority in selective communication
    systems, subclasses 825.52+ for addressing, and subclasses 825.57+ for
    pulse responsive actuation.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 700+
    and particularly subclasses 715.01+ for an electric digital calculating
    computer which may utilize processor structure similar to that contained
    herein and FOR 514+ for foreign art collections involving communication
    engineering.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, for the simultaneous transmission of two
    or more signals over a common medium where the transmitted data is generic
    to the transmission activity, particularly subclasses 351+ for time
    division multiplex (TDM) switching, subclasses 498+ for time division bus
    transmission, and subclasses 475 for asynchronous TDM communications
    including addressing.


CLS 395/800.02
TXT Vector processor:

    Subject matter under subclass 800.01 including specific adaptation of the
    architecture or structure which operates on one-dimensional data arrays.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    800.1+, for array processor architecture, in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 700+
    and particularly subclasses 715.01+ for an electric digital calculating
    computer which may utilize processor structure similar to that contained
    herein.


CLS 395/800.03
TXT Scalar/vector processor interface:

    Subject matter under subclass 800.02 which includes an intermediate
    structure linking a scalar processor with a vector processor.


CLS 395/800.04
TXT Distributing of vector data to vector registers:

    Subject matter under subclass 800.02 involving structure providing vector
    data transfer to vector registers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200.3+, for data transfer between plural complete spatially distributed
    computers or digital data processing systems.


CLS 395/800.05
TXT Masking to control the access to data in vector         register:

    Subject matter under subclass 800.04 which is directed to specific
    structure or operation to screen out access to a particular location in a
    vector register.


CLS 395/800.06
TXT Controlling access to external vector data:

    Subject matter under subclass 800.02 wherein access to external vector
    processing data is regulated.


CLS 395/800.07
TXT Vector operation:

    Subject matter under subclass 800.02 wherein the functioning of the vector
    processor is specified.


CLS 395/800.08
TXT Sequential:

    Subject matter under subclass 800.07 wherein the vector processing is
    performed in program order.


CLS 395/800.09
TXT Concurrent:

    Subject matter under subclass 800.07 wherein multiple vector instructions
    are issued simultaneously.


CLS 395/800.1
TXT Array processor:

    Subject matter under subclass 800.01 comprising four or more identical
    processing elements (e.g., cells) joined in a two-dimensional or higher
    arrangement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 700+
    and particularly subclasses 715.01+ for an electric digital calculating
    computer which may utilize processor structure similar to that contained
    herein.


CLS 395/800.11
TXT Array processor element interconnection:

    Subject matter under subclass 800.1 including details of the structure
    which mutually joins the multiple processing elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280+,   for particular intrasystem connecting (e.g., bus transaction
    processing) not included in a particular array processing architecture.


CLS 395/800.12
TXT Cube or hypercube:

    Subject matter under subclass 800.11 wherein the multiple processing
    elements are joined in a 3-or-greater dimensional pattern.


CLS 395/800.13
TXT Partitioning:

    Subject matter under subclass 800.11 which controls the structure joining
    the processing elements by partitioning the array into groups of processing
     elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    456,    for partitioned cache accessing and control.


CLS 395/800.14
TXT Processing element memory:

    Subject matter under subclass 800.11 which controls the structure joining
    the memory within an individual array processor element or associated with
    an individual array processor element.


CLS 395/800.15
TXT Reconfiguring:

    Subject matter under subclass 800.11 wherein an existing structure joining
    the array processing elements is modified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200.51, for reconfiguring in a multicomputer data  transfer network.

    284,    for intrasystem configuring not included in a   particular
    processing architecture.

    653,    for changing system settings after they have been set.


CLS 395/800.16
TXT Array processor operation:

    Subject matter under subclass 800.1 wherein a specific function or process
    performed by the array processor is specified.


CLS 395/800.17
TXT Application specific:

    Subject matter under subclass 800.16 wherein the overall operation or
    process of an array processor is directed toward a particular purpose.

    (1)     Note. Included here, for example, is generic pattern matching not
    elsewhere provided for.

    (2)     Note. Pattern matching for image processing is classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    382,    Image Analysis, appropriate subclasses and particularly subclasses
    181+ for image analysis pattern recognition.


CLS 395/800.18
TXT Data flow array processor:

    Subject matter under subclass 800.16 wherein the array processor performs a
    calculation when all required data is present (data-driven).

    (1)     Note. This would include a wavefront array processor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    377,    for architecture based data flow instruction processing including
    specific instruction implementation.

    800.25, for a generic data flow processor.


CLS 395/800.19
TXT Systolic array processor:

    Subject matter under subclass 800.16 wherein data moves between the plural
    processing elements in accordance with a global reference timing signal.


CLS 395/800.2
TXT Multimode (e.g., MIMD to SIMD, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 800.16 wherein the array processor may switch
    between plural operating modes.

    (1)     Note. This might include, for example, an initial MIMD mode which
    subsequently changes to an SIMD mode.


CLS 395/800.21
TXT MIMD:

    Subject matter under subclass 800.16 wherein the array processor operates
    in a multiple instruction, multiple data mode.


CLS 395/800.22
TXT SIMD:

    Subject matter under subclass 800.16 wherein the array processor operates
    in a single instruction, multiple data mode.


CLS 395/800.23
TXT Superscalar:

    Subject matter under subclass 800.01 comprising architecture which
    determines a group of upcoming instructions which do not mutually interfere
    with each other and issues or dispatches this group simultaneously.

    (1)     Note. Excluded herein is specific instruction implementation such
    as branching, store multiple, etc. See SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS notes
    below.

    (2)     Note. Implementation of a generic instruction within a particular
    instruction set is classified here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    391,    for simultaneous issuance of multiple instructions      including
    specific instruction implementation.


CLS 395/800.24
TXT Long instruction word:

    Subject matter under subclass 800.01 comprising architecture which includes
    compiler scheduled issuing of multiple opcodes per instruction.

    (1)     Note. Excluded herein is the specifics of the compiler.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    391,    for simultaneous issuance of multiple instructions      including
    specific instruction implementation.

    705+,   for compiler details.


CLS 395/800.25
TXT Data driven or demand driven processor:

    Subject matter under subclass 800.01 wherein a plural processor structure
    performs a calculation when all required data is present (data-driven) or
    when other processors request the calculation result (demand-driven).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    800.18, for data flow array processor.


CLS 395/800.26
TXT Detection/pairing based on destination, ID tag, or  data:

    Subject matter under subclass 800.25 which is directed to specific
    structure or operation to perform detecting or pairing dependent upon
    intended destination, a particular identification tag or the data itself.


CLS 395/800.27
TXT Particular data driven memory structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 800.25 including a data driven interface with
    specific memory structure to enhance the data flow capability of the
    processor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    427+, for particular storage accessing and control.


CLS 395/800.28
TXT Distributed processing system:

    Subject matter under subclass 800.01 including particular architecture
    including two or more physically separate processors performing different
    tasks with shared resources such that their combined work contribute to a
    common goal.

    (1)     Note. Subject matter including a distributed processing system
    having more than nominal recitation of data transfer is classified
    elsewhere.

    (2)     Note. Subject matter including a distributed processing system
    having more than nominal recitation of process scheduling is classified
    elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200.31, for distributed data processing having significant multicomputer
    data transfer.

    672+,   for distributed data processing having significant process
    scheduling.


CLS 395/800.29
TXT Interface:

    Subject matter under subclass 800.28 wherein details of the interconnection
    which mutually joins the multiple processors are provided.


CLS 395/800.3
TXT Operation:

    Subject matter under subclass 800.28 wherein the functioning of the plural
    processors is specified.


CLS 395/800.31
TXT Master/slave:

    Subject matter under subclass 800.3 wherein physically separate processors
    include a primary processor (master) controlling the operation of a
    secondary processor (slave).

    (1)     Note. Controlling of data transfer between master/slave processors
    is classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200.38, for specific data transferring in a master/slave computer.

    290,    for bus master/slave controlling.

    504,    for a computer graphic processing system including master/slave
    processors.


CLS 395/800.32
TXT Microprocessor or multichip or multimodule processor having sequential
    program control:

    Subject matter under subclass 800.01 comprising a CPU on a single
    integrated circuit chip or on plural integrated chips or in plural discrete
    units which provide serial processing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    519,    for computer graphic processing system on       integrated chip.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 700+
    and particularly subclasses 715.01+ for an electric digital calculating
    computer which may utilize processor structure similar to that contained
    herein.


CLS 395/800.33
TXT Having multiple internal buses:

    Subject matter under subclass 800.32 wherein the internal structure of the
    processor includes plural buses.


CLS 395/800.34
TXT Including coprocessor:

    Subject matter under subclass 800.32 wherein an auxiliary processor
    provides a supplemental function for or other assistance to a primary
    processor.

    (1)     Note. Details of the application or algorithm performed on the
    coprocessor are classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    503,    for a computer graphic processing system which includes a
    coprocessor.


CLS 395/800.35
TXT Digital Signal Processor:

    Subject matter under subclass 800.34 wherein the auxiliary processor is
    particularly configured to perform high speed data manipulations.

    (1)     Note. Details of the application or algorithm performed on the
    Digital Signal Processor are classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 700+
    for a electric digital calculating  computer.


CLS 395/800.36
TXT Application specific:

    Subject matter under subclass 800.32 wherein the processor is generically
    adapted for a particular purpose.

    (1)     Note. Details of the application or algorithm performed on the
    processor are classified elsewhere.


CLS 395/800.37
TXT Programmable (e.g., EPROM):

    Subject matter under subclass 800.32 wherein operation of the processor may
    be externally modifiable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    651+,   for digital data processing system initialization and configuration.


CLS 395/800.38
TXT Offchip interface:

    Subject matter under subclass 800.32 wherein particular internal structure
    of the processor is provided which allows interfacing from the processor to
    an external device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    309,    for particulars of the interfacing offchip bus.

    821,    for off processor/peripheral external busing.


CLS 395/800.39
TXT Externally controlled internal mode switching via pin:

    Subject matter under subclass 800.38 wherein an internal processor mode may
    be changed by an external means connected to the processor by an electrical
    contact.


CLS 395/800.4
TXT External sync or interrupt signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 800.38 wherein the processor receives a
    synchronization or interrupt signal from an outside source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    553,    for synchronization of plural processors.

    733+,   for interrupt processing in general.


CLS 395/800.41
TXT RISC:

    Subject matter under subclass 800.32 wherein the set of processing
    instructions available is relatively small and rapidly executable (i.e.,
    Reduced Instruction Set Computing) and a new instruction is fetched during
    the time when a previous instruction is  executed.


CLS 395/800.42
TXT Operation:

    Subject matter under subclass 800.32 wherein specific  functioning of the
    processor is recited.

    (1)     Note. Details of the application or algorithm performed on the
    processor are classified elsewhere.


CLS 395/800.43
TXT Mode switching:

    Subject matter under subclass 800.42 wherein the ability to change between
    multiple processor operating modes is recited.


CLS 395/821
TXT INPUT/OUTPUT DATA PROCESSING:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising means or steps for
    transferring data from one or more peripherals to one or more digital data
    processing systems or computers for the latter to process, store, or
    further transfer or for transferring data from the digital data processing
    system or computers to the peripherals.

    (1)     Note. Classification here requires more than nominal recitation of
    "peripherals", "peripheral devices", "Input/Output", "I/O", etc.

    (2)     Note. Code conversion in transferring codes from a keyboard to a
    computer or digital data processing system is classified elsewhere. Code
    conversion for control of image data for display-including the transferring
    of data to be displayed via a peripheral input device (keyboard, joystick,
    mouse, touch tablet, etc.) to a computer or digital data processing system
    and subsequently transferring image data to a peripheral display device via
    a display memory or display controller is classified elsewhere. Code
    conversion for transmitting data from a peripheral fax machine to a
    computer (e.g., by modem) for transmission over a telephone line to another
    computer (e.g., by modem) for transmission to another peripheral fax
    machine is classified elsewhere. See the SEARCH CLASS notes below.

    (3)     Note. Subject matter comprising means or steps for transferring
    data to peripherals for presenting the data on a fixed medium; i.e., a hard
    copy, is classified elsewhere in this class. See the SEARCH THIS CLASS,
    SUBCLASS notes below.

    (4)     Note. In the instance where the peripheral is a memory,
    classification is with storage accessing and control.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101+,   for transferring data to peripherals for presenting the data on a
    fixed medium.

    180+,   for furthering the reliability or availability of peripherals or a
    further subclass thereof (e.g., subclass 182.03 for memory or I/O subsystem
    affected faults, 183.19 for bus or I/O channel device fault, etc.).

    186+,   for furthering the security of peripherals.

    200.3+, for transferring data between a plurality of computers even if the
    transferring employs peripherals (e.g., modems, line adapters).

    280+,   for transferring data among memories, processors, and buses of a
    computer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 22+ for code
    conversion in transferring codes from a peripheral keyboard to a computer.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, appropriate subclasses for selective
    electrical control of image data for display, including the transferring of
    data to be displayed via a peripheral input device (keyboard, joystick,
    mouse, touch tablet, etc.) to a computer and subsequently transferring
    image data to a peripheral display device via a display memory/display
    controller.

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 400+ (facsimile) for transmitting data from a
    peripheral fax machine to a computer (e.g., by modem) for transmission over
    a telephone line to another computer (e.g., by modem) for transmission to
    another peripheral fax machine.

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclasses 427+ for accessing or controlling memories that are peripherals.


CLS 395/822
TXT Input/Output expansion:

    Subject matter under subclass 821 further comprising means or steps for
    increasing the number of the peripherals that can be coupled to the digital
    data processing systems or computers.


CLS 395/823
TXT Input/Output addressing:

    Subject matter under subclass 821 further comprising means or steps for
    employing identifiers for the peripherals, digital data processing system
    or computers in order to transfer data therebetween.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclasses 1+ for addressing combined with specific memory configurations
    (e.g., extended, expanded, dynamic, etc.) in a digital data processing
    system, subclasses 200+ for generalized address forming in a digital data
    processing system, and subclasses 100+ for generalized storage accessing
    and control in a digital data processing system.


CLS 395/824
TXT Address data transfer:

    Subject matter under subclass 823 further comprising means or steps for
    transferring address data between the peripherals and digital data
    processing systems or computers to ensure that associated user data are
    transferred to the intended peripherals and digital data processing systems
    or computers.


CLS 395/825
TXT Input/Output command processing:

    Subject matter under subclass 821 further comprising means or steps for
    fetching, buffering, decoding, or executing instruction data in order to
    transfer user data between the peripherals and digital data processing
    systems or computers.

    (1)     Note. This and indented subclasses are directed to command
    processing for Input/Output operations, subclasses 561+ for processing
    control, and subclass 566 for processing control for data transfer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    561+,   for processing control, and subclass 566 for processing control for
    data transfer.


CLS 395/826
TXT Operation scheduling:

    Subject matter under subclass 825 further comprising means or steps for
    specifying the order in which the peripherals and digital data processing
    systems or computers perform functions in order to transfer the user data
    between the peripherals and digital data processing systems or computers.


CLS 395/827
TXT Concurrently performing Input/Output operations and other operations
    unrelated to Input/Output:

    Subject matter under subclass 825 further comprising means or steps for
    performing non-Input/Output functions while also transferring data between
    the peripherals and digital data processing system or computers.


CLS 395/828
TXT Peripheral configuration:

    Subject matter under subclass 821 further comprising means or steps for
    assigning operating characteristics to the peripherals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284,    for configuring by utilizing a hardware structure for providing the
    arrangement of the digital data processing system including characteristics
    of the digital data processing system's components to a digital data
    processing system processor.

    651     through 653, for digital data processing system initialization and
    configuration at boot-time.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclasses 170+ for automatically determining or allocating memory space.


CLS 395/829
TXT Address assignment:

    Subject matter under subclass 828 further comprising means or steps for
    giving identifiers (i.e., address data) to the peripherals.

    (1)     Note. See the SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS notes for subclass 823.


CLS 395/830
TXT Configuration initialization:

    Subject matter under subclass 828 further comprising means or steps for
    automatically assigning operating characteristics when the peripherals,
    digital data processing system, or computers are started or reset.


CLS 395/831
TXT Protocol selection:

    Subject matter under subclass 828 further comprising means or steps for
    choosing a data communications protocol to be employed in order to transfer
    data between the peripherals and digital data processing systems or
    computers.


CLS 395/832
TXT As input or output:

    Subject matter under subclass 828 further comprising means or steps for
    assigning ports or adapters, which are associated with the peripherals, to
    permit either transferring data from the peripherals to the digital data
    processing system or computers or from the digital data processing system
    or computers to the peripherals.


CLS 395/833
TXT By detachable memories:

    Subject matter under subclass 828 further comprising means or steps for
    assigning the operating characteristics based on data stored in removable
    memories.


CLS 395/834
TXT Mode selection:

    Subject matter under subclass 828 further comprising means or steps for
    choosing methods of operating for the peripherals.


CLS 395/835
TXT Peripheral monitoring:

    Subject matter under subclass 821 further comprising means or steps for
    enabling digital data processing system or computers to detect or observe
    operating characteristics or conditions of the peripherals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180+,   for furthering the reliability or availability of peripherals
    especially subclass 182.03 for memory or I/O subsystem affected faults,
    subclass 183.19 for bus or I/O channel device fault, and subclass 184.01
    for performance monitoring.

    651     through 653, for digital data processing system initialization and
    configuration at boot-time.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclasses
    20.1+ for transmission facility testing and subclasses 21.1+ for memory
    testing.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 34+ and 112+ for service
    monitoring and usage monitoring in telephonic communications.


CLS 395/836
TXT Characteristic discrimination:

    Subject matter under subclass 835 further comprising means or steps for
    detecting the connections, types, or configurations of the peripherals.


CLS 395/837
TXT Availability monitoring:

    Subject matter under subclass 835 further comprising means or steps for
    detecting whether the peripherals are available to participate in
    transferring data with the digital data processing system or computers.


CLS 395/838
TXT Activity monitoring:

    Subject matter under subclass 835 further comprising means or steps for
    detecting the amounts or types of usage of the peripherals over a period of
    time.


CLS 395/839
TXT Status updating:

    Subject matter under subclass 835 further comprising means or steps for
    detecting or reporting changes in the conditions of the peripherals.


CLS 395/840
TXT Concurrent Input/Output processing and data transfer:

    Subject matter under subclass 821 further comprising means or steps for
    performing additional I/O-related functions while also exchanging data
    between the peripherals and computers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    827,    for exchanging data between the peripherals and computers while
    performing tasks unrelated to Input/Output data processing.


CLS 395/841
TXT Concurrent data transferring:

    Subject matter under subclass 840 further comprising means or steps for
    transferring plural groups of data between the peripherals and digital data
    processing systems or computers at the same time.


CLS 395/842
TXT Direct memory accessing (DMA):

    Subject matter under subclass 821 further comprising means or steps for
    transferring data between peripherals and memories of a digital data
    processing system or computer with minimal or no intervention from a main
    processor of the digital data processing system or computer.

    (1)     Note. Direct Memory Accessing (DMA) appears here in the schedule
    for its classical treatment as an I/O operation as opposed to a memory
    accessing and control operation per se. Memory accessing and control are
    classified elsewhere. See the SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS notes below

    (2)     Note. Transferring data "directly" between memories of different
    digital data processing system or computers is classified elsewhere. See
    search notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200.42, for, computer-to-computer direct memory accessing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, which is an
    integral part of Class 369 following subclass 18, for record carriers and
    systems wherein information is stored and retrieved by interaction with a
    medium and there is relative motion between a medium and a transducer, for
    example, magnetic disk drive devices and control thereof, per se.

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclasses 100+ for memory accessing and controlling, per se.


CLS 395/843
TXT With programmed control memory accessing:

    Subject matter under subclass 842 further comprising means or steps for
    transferring data directly between the peripherals and memories and also
    for transferring data between the peripherals and the memories under
    control of the central or main processor(s), although not necessarily at
    the same time.


CLS 395/844
TXT By command chaining:

    Subject matter under subclass 842 further comprising means or steps for
    linking individual instruction data and then executing the linked
    instruction data to transfer data directly between the peripherals and
    memories.


CLS 395/845
TXT Timing of:

    Subject matter under subclass 842 further comprising means or steps for
    determining when to transfer data directly between the peripherals and
    memories.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    551+,   for clock synchronization, per se.

    553,    for synchronization maintenance of plural processors, per se.

    555+,   for digital data processing system clock, pulse and timing interval
    generation, per se.

    670+,   for task management, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, various subclasses for TDM, FDM, etc.,
    per se.


CLS 395/846
TXT Using addressing:

    Subject matter under subclass 842 further comprising details of generating
    or employing address data to transfer data directly between the peripherals
    and the memories of the digital data processing systems or computers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclasses 1 through 5 for addressing combined with specific memory
    configurations (e.g., extended, expanded, dynamic, etc.) and subclasses
    200+ for generalized address forming.


CLS 395/847
TXT Via separate bus:

    Subject matter under subclass 842 wherein plural buses permit a processor
    to access memories concurrently with direct memory accesses.


CLS 395/848
TXT With access regulating:

    Subject matter under subclass 842 further comprising means or steps for
    directing which of the peripherals may transfer data directly with the
    memories.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186+,   for computer security, per se.

    287+,   for bus access regulating in a digital data processing system.

    670+,   for task and process management, per se.

    726+,   for general purpose access regulating in digital data processing
    systems.

    733+,   for interrupt processing, per se.


CLS 395/849
TXT Flow controlling:

    Subject matter under subclass 821 further comprising means or steps for
    controlling a first rate at which the peripherals or the digital data
    processing system and computers transmit data such that the first rate does
    not exceed a second rate at which the computers or digital data processing
    system and peripherals can receive data.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200.63, for transfer speed regulating in computer-to-computer data
    transferring.


CLS 395/850
TXT Frame forming:

    Subject matter under subclass 821 further comprising means or steps for
    arranging data into a specified format in order to transfer the arranged
    data between the peripherals and digital data processing system or
    computers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, for the simultaneous transmission of two
    or more signals over a common medium, particularly subclasses 470+ for
    adaptive arranging data into variable frame lengths in order to transfer
    data between systems requiring different frame formats.


CLS 395/851
TXT Transfer direction selection:

    Subject matter under subclass 821 further comprising means or steps for
    specifying whether data are to be transmitted from the peripherals to the
    digital data processing system or computers or from the digital data
    processing system or computers to the peripherals.


CLS 395/852
TXT Transfer termination:

    Subject matter under subclass 821 further comprising means or steps for
    ceasing to exchange data between the peripherals and digital data
    processing system or computers.


CLS 395/853
TXT Data transfer specifying:

    Subject matter under subclass 821 further comprising means or steps for
    defining characteristics of a desired transfer of data between the
    peripherals and digital data processing system or computers (e.g., amount
    of the data to be transferred, location of the data to be transferred).

    (1)     Note. The combination of specifying data transfer properties and
    configuring a peripheral is classified elsewhere.  This subclass is for
    data transfer specifying, per se.


CLS 395/854
TXT Transferred data counting:

    Subject matter under subclass 853 wherein the amount of the data to be
    transferred is defined and the amount of data subsequently transferred is
    computed.

    (1)     Note. As a reminder, the glossary for this class defines a computer
    as a special instance of a digital data processing system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    835+,   for digital data processing system or computers detecting or
    observing operating characteristics or conditions of peripherals.


CLS 395/855
TXT Burst data transfer:

    Subject matter under subclass 853 wherein the characteristics are specified
    as to enable a plurality of data to be transferred in a single
    transmission.


CLS 395/856
TXT Input/Output access regulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 821 further comprising means or steps for
    controlling which of the peripherals may transfer data with which of the
    digital data processing systems or computers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200.3+, for transferring data among multiple computer systems,

    287+,   for access regulation and arbitration within a digital data
    processing system,

    726,    for generalized locking, polling, access arbitration and interrupt
    data processing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclasses 200+ for generalized address formation.


CLS 395/857
TXT Access dedication:

    Subject matter under subclass 856 further comprising means or steps for
    permitting certain of the peripherals to exchange data with only certain of
    the digital data processing system or computers.


CLS 395/858
TXT Path selection:

    Subject matter under subclass 856 further comprising means or steps for
    choosing a route via which the peripherals and digital data processing
    system or computers will transfer data.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 825.01+ for channel and path
    selecting in electrical communications, per se.


CLS 395/859
TXT Access request queuing:

    Subject matter under subclass 856 further comprising means or steps for
    storing requests to transfer data from the peripherals, or digital data
    processing systems or computers so that the requests may be serviced later.


CLS 395/860
TXT Access prioritization:

    Subject matter under subclass 856 further comprising means or steps for
    preferring certain of the peripherals, or digital data processing systems
    or computers over others in servicing requests therefrom to transfer data.


CLS 395/861
TXT Dynamic:

    Subject matter under subclass 860 further comprising means or steps for
    changing preferences given to the peripherals, or digital data processing
    systems or computers.


CLS 395/862
TXT Group:

    Subject matter under subclass 860 further comprising means or steps wherein
    the preference is based on a class to which the peripherals, or digital
    data processing systems or computers belong, or on functions the
    peripherals, or digital data processing system or computers perform.


CLS 395/863
TXT Physical position:

    Subject matter under subclass 860 wherein the preference is based on the
    location of the peripherals, or digital data processing system or computers
    relative to each other.


CLS 395/864
TXT Prioritized polling:

    Subject matter under subclass 860 further comprising means or steps for
    interrogating the peripherals to determine readiness thereof to transfer
    data.

    (1)     Note. This subclass requires a determination of a rank of a polled
    device to carry out a transaction, as opposed to a strictly time-based
    polling. See the SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    866,    for polling for access, without prioritized accessing.


CLS 395/865
TXT Time-slot accessing:

    Subject matter under subclass 860 further comprising means or steps for
    cyclically permitting the peripherals, or digital data processing system,
    or computers to transfer data for fixed periods of time.


CLS 395/866
TXT Input/Output polling:

    Subject matter under subclass 856 further comprising means or steps for
    interrogating the peripherals to determine readiness thereof to transfer
    data.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    856,    for polling for access combined with prioritized accessing.


CLS 395/867
TXT Polled interrupt:

    Subject matter under subclass 866 further comprising means or steps for
    enabling the computers or digital data processing systems to recognize and
    respond to interrupt signals from the peripherals by interrogating the
    peripherals.


CLS 395/868
TXT Input/Output interrupting:

    Subject matter under subclass 856 further comprising means or steps for
    servicing requests for access from the peripherals by suspending processing
    being performed by the digital data processing system or computers and then
    granting access to the requesting peripherals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183.1,  for controlling a processor to be tested or diagnosed by applying
    an interrupt, halt, or clock signal to the processor.

    185.03, wherein an ordering of state information related to a succession of
    data, instructions, etc., is the basis for state analysis.

    555+,   for clock processing, per se.

    569+,   for instruction processing for context switching.

    670+,   for task management, per se, which generally is triggered by an
    interrupt event.

    733+,   for stopping, halting, or suspending a currently executing
    processing function within a digital data processing system or computer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclass 204 for virtual address branch or jump address predicting and
    subclass 213 for generalized prefetch, look-ahead, jump, or predictive
    address generating.


CLS 395/869
TXT Masking:

    Subject matter under subclass 868 further comprising means or steps for
    inhibiting the servicing of the access requests.


CLS 395/870
TXT Vectored:

    Subject matter under subclass 868 further comprising means or steps wherein
    the interrupting peripherals supply, along with the access requests, data
    identifying locations of routines for servicing the access requests.


CLS 395/871
TXT Accessing via a multiplexer:

    Subject matter under subclass 856 further comprising means or steps for
    employing a concentrator to regulate the access of a plurality of the
    peripherals, or digital data processing systems or computers.


CLS 395/872
TXT Input/Output data buffering:

    Subject matter under subclass 821 further comprising means or steps for
    temporarily storing data being transferred between the peripherals, and
    digital data processing systems or computers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200.64, for computer-to-computer data transferring which may include
    controlling buffer registers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 56+ for employing
    tri-state buffers.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 189.05 for
    buffering or latching data being read from or written to memories, and
    subclass 230.08 for buffering or latching address data being employed to
    access memories.

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclasses 118+ for caching under storage accessing and control.


CLS 395/873
TXT Alternately filling or emptying buffers:

    Subject matter under subclass 872 further comprising means or steps for
    temporarily storing the data in plural memories wherein data are stored to
    and retrieved from at least one of the memories while other data are
    retrieved from or stored to at least one of the other memories.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclass 5 for addressing multiple memory modules using interleaving
    techniques, subclasses 200+ for generalized addressing techniques, and
    subclass 157 for generalized use of interleaving in memory accessing and
    control.


CLS 395/874
TXT Queue content modification:

    Subject matter under subclass 872 further comprising means or steps wherein
    the data are temporarily stored in memories and the order in which the data
    are to be retrieved from the memories is altered.


CLS 395/875
TXT Contents validation:

    Subject matter under subclass 872 further comprising means or steps for
    employing memories to temporarily store the data and for designating
    whether the memories currently contain data to be transferred therefrom.


CLS 395/876
TXT Buffer space allocation or deallocation:

    Subject matter under subclass 872 further comprising means or steps for
    employing memories to temporarily store the data and for increasing or
    decreasing the size of the memories.

    SEARCH CLASS

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclasses 170+ for generalized memory configuring.


CLS 395/877
TXT Fullness indication:

    Subject matter under subclass 872 further comprising means or steps for
    employing memories to temporarily store the data and for detecting or
    reporting the amount of data stored in the memories.


CLS 395/878
TXT Input/Output process timing:

    Subject matter under subclass 821 further comprising means or steps for
    regulating when functions are performed in order to transfer data between
    the peripherals, and digital data processing systems or computers.

    (1)     Note. This subclass is directed to timing considerations for
    Input/Output processes in communications between a peripheral and digital
    data processing system or computer.  Communication between programs,
    processes, or tasks (i.e., interprogram communication and interprocess
    communication) is classified elsewhere.  See the SEARCH THIS CLASS,
    SUBCLASS notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200.01, for data transferring between plural computers, per se.

    200.78, for synchronizing the operations of plural digital data processing
    systems and computers.

    555+,   for clock processing, per se.

    670+,   for task management, per se, which generally is triggered by an
    interrupt event.

    680+,   for interprogram and interprocess communication.


CLS 395/879
TXT Processing suspension:

    Subject matter under subclass 878 further comprising means or steps for
    temporarily halting the performance of the functions; e.g., to wait for
    data to be transferred from the peripherals.


CLS 395/880
TXT Transfer rate regulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 878 further comprising means or steps for
    setting the speed at which data are exchanged between the peripherals, and
    digital data processing system or computers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200.63, for transfer speed regulating in computer-to-computer data
    transferring.


CLS 395/881
TXT Synchronous data transfer:

    Subject matter under subclass 878 further comprising means or steps for
    exchanging data between the peripherals and digital data processing systems
    computers accompanied by clock pulses.


CLS 395/882
TXT Peripheral adapting:

    Subject matter under subclass 821 further comprising means or steps for
    making the peripherals compatible with the digital data processing systems
    or computers.

    (1)     Note. Adapting memories or processors to buses is distinguished
    from peripheral adapting and is classified elsewhere in this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280+,   for adapting compatible memories or processors to buses, memories
    to memories, for adapting processors to processors, and for adapting plural
    buses.


CLS 395/883
TXT Universal:

    Subject matter under subclass 882 further comprising means or steps having
    the capability to interface different types of peripherals to the computers
    or digital data processing systems.


CLS 395/884
TXT Via common units and peripheral-specific units:

    Subject matter under subclass 882 further comprising means or steps for
    employing functional units generic to different types of peripherals and
    functional units specific to the different types to interface the
    peripherals, and digital data processing systems or computers.


CLS 395/885
TXT Input/Output data modification:

    Subject matter under subclass 882 further comprising means or steps for
    changing a format of data transferred between the peripherals, and digital
    data processing systems or computers.


CLS 395/886
TXT Width conversion:

    Subject matter under subclass 885 further comprising means or steps for
    transferring data between peripherals that process data of a first size and
    digital data processing systems or computers that process data of a second
    size, different from the first.

    (1)     Note. Adapting from Input/Output buses to system buses is
    distinguishable from width converting here and is classified elsewhere in
    this class. See SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306+,   for various bus architectures and bus width adapting.


CLS 395/887
TXT Keystroke interpretation:

    Subject matter under subclass 885 further comprising means or steps for
    changing signals that are generated by a keyboard into digital data.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 156+ for various display
    peripheral interface input devices including mice and joysticks.


CLS 395/888
TXT Data compression and expansion:

    Subject matter under subclass 885 further comprising means or steps for
    compacting data for more efficient transferring between the peripherals,
    and digital data processing systems or computers, or for more efficient
    storage in peripherals.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200.77, for compression/decompression in computer-to-computer data
    transferring.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    380,    Cryptography, appropriate subclasses for data encryption and
    decryption, per se.


CLS 395/889
TXT Analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog:

    Subject matter under subclass 885 further comprising means or steps for
    changing the format from analog signals to digital data or vice versa.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, appropriate subclasses for
    analog/digital, digital/digital, and digital/analog conversion.


CLS 395/890
TXT Digital-to-digital:

    Subject matter under subclass 885 further comprising means or steps for
    changing the format from one type of digital data to another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, appropriate subclasses for
    analog/digital, digital/digital, and digital/analog conversion.


CLS 395/891
TXT Serial-to-parallel and parallel-to-serial:

    Subject matter under subclass 885 further comprising means or steps for
    changing the format from serial to parallel or vice versa.


CLS 395/892
TXT Application-specific peripheral adapting:

    Subject matter under subclass 882 further comprising means or steps for
    making certain types of peripherals compatible with digital data processing
    systems or computers.

    (1)     Note. Classification herein should follow the hierarchy of classes
    and is proper unless provided for elsewhere. See the SEARCH CLASS notes
    below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 156+ for various display
    peripheral interface input devices.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 708.1
    for physical details of housings and casings for digital calculators,
    subclasses 709.01+ for input devices for electric digital calculators, and
    subclasses 710.01+ for output devices for electric digital calculators.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 219+ for transceivers.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, for two-way transmission of intelligible
    audio information having arbitrary content over an electrical conductor.


CLS 395/893
TXT For user input devices:

    Subject matter under subclass 892 wherein the peripheral is a user input
    device other than a keyboard, per se, or a cursor controller, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 18 through 20 for various input devices
    relying on mechanical pens, electrostatic pens, and the like coacting with
    a tablet or receiver.

    250,    Radiant Energy, appropriate subclasses, for example subclasses
    203.1+, 215, 229+, and 566+, for a variety of techniques relying on radiant
    energy that may be used in gathering positional or other information for
    input to digital data processing system.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 156+ for various display
    peripheral interface input devices.

    356,    Optics: Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses, for example
    subclasses 3+ for a variety of techniques that may be used in optically
    gathering positional or other information for input to digital data
    processing system.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 708.1
    for physical details of housings and casings for digital calculators, and
    subclasses 709.01+ for input devices for electric digital calculators.


CLS 395/894
TXT For data storage devices:

    Subject matter under subclass 892 wherein the peripheral is a data storage
    device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, which is an
    integral part of Class 369 following subclass 18, for record carriers and
    systems wherein information is stored and retrieved by interaction with a
    medium and there is relative motion between a medium and a transducer, for
    example, magnetic disk drive devices and control thereof, per se.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, various subclasses for
    addressable static singular storage elements or plural singular storage
    elements of the same type.

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory,
    subclasses 100+ for memory accessing and control.


CLS 395/898
TXT BYTE-WORD ORDER REARRANGING, BIT-FIELD INSERTION OR EXTRACTION, STRING
    LENGTH DETECTING, OR SEQUENCE DETECTING:

    Subject matter under the class definition directed to digital data word
    processing and filtering not provided for by the mainline subclasses above.

    (1)     Note. This subclass is for generic processing of digital words
    including sorting, list processing and bit or byte operations at the word
    level. Instruction processing for logical operations on digital words and
    digital logic, per se, is classified elsewhere.

    (2)     Note. This subclass does not accept generic processing of digital
    words for the expressed purpose of converting one code to another code
    (e.g., BCD => BINARY). These teachings are classified elsewhere. Nor does
    this subclass accept encryption. Encryption is classified elsewhere.

    (3)     Note. Processing of digital words to an expressed filtering effect
    on acquired signals or an arithmetic operation on a series of digital words
    is classified elsewhere.

    (4)     Note. Searching and sorting in databases, files, and word
    processing applications are not classified here and instead are classified
    with the respective application art areas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    562     through 570, for specialized instruction data processing (e.g., for
    debugging, for logic operations, for context preserving, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, appropriate subclasses for
    analog-to-digital convertors and digital-to-digital code convertors.

    364,    Electrical Computer and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 700+
    for arithmetical processing, per se, and subclasses 715.011+ for digital
    filtering, per se.

    380,    Cryptography, for encryption.

    707,    Data Processing - Database and File Management, Data Structures, or
    Document Processing, subclasses 1-206 for database and file searching and
    sorting.


CLS 395/899
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition not provided for by any of the
    mainline subclasses above.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 395/900
TXT FUZZY LOGIC:

    Subject matter comprising data processing with inexact reasoning
    implemented using set membership functions.


CLS 395/901
TXT SPECIAL ROBOT STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS:

    Subject matter comprising a robot with special structural elements that are
    not provided for elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  Structural elements of this subclass type include, for
    example, robot arm structures excluded from Class 901, Robots, subclasses
    15 through 18.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    901,    Robots, subclasses 15-18 for robot* arm structures not provided for
    in this class (see (1) Note, above).


CLS 395/902
TXT APPLICATIONS USING AI WITH DETAILS OF THE AI SYSTEM:

    Subject matter comprising an expert system having a specific area of
    application.


CLS 395/903
TXT Control:

    Subject matter under subclass 902 wherein the expert system provides
    control data.


CLS 395/904
TXT Manufacturing or machines (e.g., agricultural machinery, machine tools,
    robots):

    Subject matter under subclass 903 wherein the application is related to
    manufacturing or machinery.


CLS 395/905
TXT Vehicle or aerospace:

    Subject matter under subclass 903 wherein the application is related to a
    vehicle or aerospace.


CLS 395/906
TXT Process plants:

    Subject matter under subclass 903 wherein the application is related to a
    process plant.


CLS 395/907
TXT Power plants:

    Subject matter under subclass 906 wherein the process plant is a power
    plant.


CLS 395/908
TXT Electronic or computer (internal or network) circuits:

    Subject matter under subclass 903 wherein the application is related to the
    internal operation of a computer, or its connection in a network, or to an
    electronic circuit.


CLS 395/909
TXT Communication:

    Subject matter under subclass 903 wherein the application is related to
    communication.


CLS 395/910
TXT Elevators:

    Subject matter under subclass 903 wherein the application area is related
    to elevators.


CLS 395/911
TXT Nonmedical diagnostics:

    Subject matter under subclass 902 wherein the expert system provides
    nonmedical diagnostic data.


CLS 395/912
TXT Manufacturing or machines (e.g., agricultural machinery, machine tools,
    robots):

    Subject matter under subclass 911 wherein the application is related to
    manufacturing or machinery.


CLS 395/913
TXT Vehicle or aerospace:

    Subject matter under subclass 911 wherein the application is related to a
    vehicle or aerospace.


CLS 395/914
TXT Process plants:

    Subject matter under subclass 911 wherein the application is related to a
    process plant.


CLS 395/915
TXT Power plants:

    Subject matter under subclass 914 wherein the process plant is a power
    plant.


CLS 395/916
TXT Electronic or computer (internal or network) circuits:

    Subject matter under subclass 911 wherein the application is related to the
    internal operation of a computer or its connection in a network, or to an
    electronic circuit.


CLS 395/917
TXT Communications:

    Subject matter under subclass 911 wherein the application is related to
    communications.


CLS 395/918
TXT Elevators:

    Subject matter under subclass 911 wherein the application area is related
    to elevators.


CLS 395/919
TXT Designing, planning, programming, CAD, CASE:

    Subject matter under subclass 902 wherein the expert system provides data
    related to the designing of objects, plan preparation, program preparation,
    computer aided design (i.e., CAD), or computer aided software engineering
    (i.e., CASE).


CLS 395/920
TXT Simulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 919 wherein the expert system provides
    simulation related data, e.g., three-dimensional computer simulation of a
    piston of a car on a computer screen.


CLS 395/921
TXT Layout (e.g., circuit, construction):

    Subject matter under subclass 919 wherein the expert system provides layout
    related data, e.g., computer circuit layout or building layout.


CLS 395/922
TXT Computer program preparation:

    Subject matter under subclass 919 wherein the expert system provides
    computer program preparation related data.


CLS 395/923
TXT Construction:

    Subject matter under subclass 919 wherein the expert system provides data
    related to the construction industry, e.g., building codes.


CLS 395/924
TXT Medical:

    Subject matter under subclass 902 wherein the expert system provides
    medical related data.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclass 924 for a medical diagnostics using artificial
    intelligence.


CLS 395/925
TXT Business:

    Subject matter under subclass 902 wherein the expert system provides
    business related data.


CLS 395/926
TXT Time management:

    Subject matter under subclass 925 wherein the data is time management data


CLS 395/927
TXT Education or instruction:

    Subject matter under subclass 902 wherein the expert system provides
    education or instruction related data.


CLS 395/928
TXT Earth sciences:

    Subject matter under subclass 902 wherein the expert system provides earth
    sciences related data.


CLS 395/929
TXT Geological (e.g., seismology):

    Subject matter under subclass 928 wherein the expert system provides
    geology related data.


CLS 395/930
TXT Environment:

    Subject matter under subclass 928 wherein the expert system provides
    environment related data.


CLS 395/931
TXT Weather:

    Subject matter under subclass 930 wherein the data is weather data.


CLS 395/932
TXT Mathematics, science or engineering:

    Subject matter under subclass 902 wherein the expert system provides
    mathematics, science or engineering related data.


CLS 395/933
TXT Law, law enforcement, or government:

    Subject matter under subclass 902 wherein the expert system provides law,
    law enforcement, or government related data.


CLS 395/934
TXT Information retrieval or information management:

    Subject matter under subclass 902 wherein the expert system provides
    information retrieval or information management related data.


CLS 395/FOR100
TXT Speech signal processing:

    Foreign art collection wherein the system performs operations or functions
    on signals which represent speech.

    FOREIGN ART COLLECTIONS

    Foreign patents/nonpatent literature from Class 395, old subclasses 750 and
    800, have been transferred directly to foreign art collections below (i.e.,
    FOR 750 and FOR 800) which are intended as repositories only for foreign
    patents/nonpatent literature. The reference in parentheses following each
    subclass title provides the source of the respective foreign
    patents/nonpatent literature. Definitions below correspond to the
    respective Class 395 source definitions.


CLS 395/FOR750
TXT POWER CONTROL (395/750):

    Foreign art collection including details of steps or means for modifying
    the amount of power used by a digital data processing system or the system
    response to available power.


CLS 395/FOR800
TXT PROCESSING ARCHITECTURE (395/800):

    Foreign art collection for digital data processing system(s), that is,
    arrangements of processor(s) in combination with either memory or
    peripherals, or both, performing data processing not provided for above.


CLS 396/
TTL PHOTOGRAPHY

CLS 396/
TXT I.      DEFINITIONS OF TERMS USED

    APERTURE

    An aperture is an opening in the camera through which light passes in order
    to expose a photographic medium.

    APERTURE VALUE (Av)

    Aperture value is a logarithmic number indicative of  aperture size.

    CAMERA

    A camera is a device which, when actuated, uses light to record an image of
    an object which may be chemically developable to become visible. It
    generally includes (a) a light-tight enclosure, (b) a lens for forming an
    image of an object at an image plane, (c) a holder for a photographic
    medium at the image plane, (d) a device to control the light flux reaching
    the photographic medium, and (e) an opaque device selectively operable to
    pass light to a photographic medium for a period of time. See Section VII
    below (e.g., Classes 250 and 378) for information regarding picture-making
    devices of diverse energy spectra.

    CAMERA STRUCTURE

    Camera structure is that subcombination of a camera not otherwise provided
    for in another class.

    DEVELOPING APPARATUS

    Developing apparatus is that which makes a photographic image visible.

    DIAPHRAGM

    A diaphragm is a device to change the light flux passing through the
    aperture.

    EXPOSURE

    Exposure is the act of allowing light to reach the photographic medium.

    EXPOSURE CONTROL CIRCUIT

    An exposure control circuit is an electronic circuit to control the
    exposure.

    EXPOSURE OBJECTIVE

    An exposure objective is an objective that focuses light from the object
    onto a photographic medium.

    EXPOSURE SYSTEM

    An exposure system is one that has means to regulate or adjust an amount of
    light reaching the photographic medium.

    EXPOSURE TIME

    Exposure time is the length of time an exposure occurs.

    EXPOSURE TIME VALUE (Tv)

    Exposure time value is a logarithmic number indicative of exposure time.

    EXPOSURE VALUE (Ev)

    Exposure value is the sum of the aperture value and exposure time value.

    FLASH DEVICE

    A flash device is a means to produce one or more bursts of light to provide
    scene illumination for exposure.

    FOCUSING

    Focusing is the act of obtaining a sharp image of a subject by adjusting a
    lens system.

    FRAME

    A frame is the space or area on a photographic medium normally occupied by
    one picture.

    IN-FOCUS

    An in-focus condition occurs when an object image attains its sharpness.

    LIGHT FLUX

    Light flux is the rate of light flow across a surface.

    OBJECT (or SUBJECT)

    An object or a subject refers to a person or thing within the scene to be
    recorded on a photographic medium.

    OBJECTIVE

    An objective is a lens that normally faces the object.  See Class 359 for a
    more specific definition.

    PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIUM

    A photographic medium is a material coated with a chemical that is
    photosensitive to actinic light.

    RANGEFINDING

    Rangefinding is the act of measuring the distance from a subject to the
    camera.

    SCENE

    A scene is the view to be recorded on a photographic medium.

    SHUTTER

    A shutter is a device for blocking or unblocking the passage of light for
    controlling the exposure time.

    II.     GENERAL STATEMENT OF THE CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    A.      This class provides for photographic apparatus not classified
    elsewhere, generally for recording a picture made by a source of light on a
    photographic medium.

    B.      This class also includes fluid-treating apparatus for development
    of film.

    C.      This class will not receive for original placement a patent
    claiming alternative embodiments, one of a type proper for this class and
    one of a type related to another recording class. Patents claiming
    alternative embodiments will be placed in the class that provides for the
    alternative and crossed in the appropriate subclass in this class. This
    class will receive a patent disclosing two types of recording devices when
    the claims are general or related to this class.

    D.      Subcombinations of picture recording apparatus not otherwise
    provided for, such as a removable film-holder unit, hood, camera housing,
    and camera setting indicator or legend, are classified here.

    E.      Also classified here are certain accessories related to photography
    not otherwise provided for such as studio structure (e.g., background,
    photographic model, or support, etc.), camera mounting or rest, camera
    attachment (e.g., a vignetter), retouching, or burnishing device.

    F.      Nonchemical processes involving photographic apparatus of sections
    A-E above (e.g., operating such apparatus) are included in this class. See
    Class 430 SEARCH CLASS notes below for processes of radiation imagery
    chemistry.

    G.      Excluded herein is subject matter relating to image recording of an
    original or carrier which is developed by toner and video cameras utilizing
    a semiconductive or CCD device. Such subject matter may be found, for
    example, in Class 355, Photocopying and Class 348, Television,
    respectively. See Section III for the line between Class 396 and Class 348.

    III.    LINE BETWEEN THIS CLASS AND CLASS 348, TELEVISION,

    Class 396 will receive for original placement a patent disclosing both
    Class 396 and Class 348 devices when the claims are general or directed
    only towards Class 396 subject matter and are otherwise proper therefor.

    Class 396 will not receive for original placement a patent claiming
    alternative embodiments, one of a type proper for Class 396 and one of a
    type proper for Class 348.  Such a patent should be classified as an
    original in Class 348 and crossed into the appropriate subclass in Class
    396.

    Similar placement applies to a claim reciting a combination of Class 348
    and Class 396 subject matter.  The original is classified in Class 348 with
    a cross to Class 396 except where Class 348 subject matter merely provides
    a perfecting feature of a Class 396 type camera or camera system. In that
    case, the original is classified in Class 396.

    (1)     Note. Class 396, subclasses 429+ will accept a combination of a
    Class 396 type camera and a diverse art device where such combination is
    not otherwise provided for.

    For classification purposes above, the recitation of an ``image sensor,"
    ``image pickup device," or the like that generates an image representative
    electrical signal which may be subsequently processed or displayed, or the
    positive recitation of a ``video camera" in a claim is considered to be
    Class 348 subject matter if otherwise proper therefor.

    IV.     OBJECT ILLUMINATION SUBCOMBINATIONS CLASSIFIED ELSEWHERE

    Artificial light sources, per se, may be distinguished as being either
    noncombustible or combustible.

    Class 313, Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, provides for noncombustible
    incandescent lamps, where the filament is not intended to be burned or
    consumed and for gas discharge lamps of the ``electronic flash" type.

    Class 315, Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, provides for the
    combination of a Class 313 light source and the electrical circuitry for
    energizing the same.

    Class 361, Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 248+
    provides for circuits of general utility for igniting combustible or
    explosive devices, such as rockets or dynamite.

    Class 362, Illumination, provides for the combination of an artificial
    light source with a protector, support or distributor, and subclasses 3+
    specifically provides for photographic lights.

    Class 431, Combustion, subclasses 357+ provide for combustible illuminating
    flash devices such as photographic bulbs, and subclass 362 provides for
    electrical circuitry for electrically igniting a combustible light source.

    (1)     Note.  Class 396, Photography, subclasses 155+ provide for the
    combination of an illumination device and essential camera structure other
    than a mere recitation of a ``camera housing wall".

    V.      FLUID-TREATING APPARATUS CLASSIFIED ELSEWHERE

    Class 34, Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, is the generic class
    for the contacting of solids with either, or both, gases or vapors.  Class
    34 provides for the apparatus which merely claims a gas generator, such as
    ammonia, with means for containing the gas for treating ``photographic"
    material and may include means for handling or feeding the material in or
    into the gas treatment area.  The inclusion of heating means for vaporizing
    liquid or solid ammoniated compounds to release ammonia gas or vapor does
    not preclude classification in Class 34.

    Class 134, Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, is the generic class
    for apparatus for contacting solids with liquids for any purpose not
    provided for in other classes. The Class 134 definitions should be referred
    to for the classification of patents directed to subcombinations of fluid
    treating apparatus.

    Class 355, Photocopying, subclasses 27+, 100, and 106+ provide for
    combinations of photocopying apparatus and developing apparatus.

    Class 366, Agitating, subclass 166 provides for mixing chambers of the
    print washer-type including specified feed means without a separate work
    holder where turbulence or agitation will inherently occur during normal
    usage.

    (1)     Note.  Class 396, Photography, subclass 579 provides for gas
    treatment of claimed specific material such as ``diazo" sheet material.

            Class 396, Photography, subclasses 30+ provide for the combination
    of a camera and developing apparatus not limited to photocopying.

            Class 396, Photography, provides for a claimed recitation of a
    vessel containing a developing solution and a vessel containing a fixing or
    washing solution with means for moving a photographic film, print, or plate
    therethrough sequentially.

            Class 396, Photography, also provides for the combinations which
    include claimed recitations concerning specified solutions, such as
    ``hypo," or specified material by its photographic characteristic or
    orientation, such as emulsion side up.

            Class 396, Photography, subclasses 589+ provide for the combination
    of fluid treating apparatus and a dark cabinet wherein the light-excluding
    features are claimed.

            Class 396, Photography, subclasses 580+ provide for fluid treating
    apparatus for treating superimposed or laminar sheets.

            Class 399, Electrophotography, subclasses 237+ for liquid
    development.

    VI.     CAMERA CASE SUBCOMBINATIONS CLASSIFIED ELSEWHERE

    Class 206, Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 316.2, provides for
    receptacles particularly constructed to contain a camera such as having a
    special shape and interior arrangement provided with shelves, racks, or
    arrangements of clasps or retaining devices for holding a camera.

    Class 224, Package and Article Carriers, provides for devices for carrying
    a camera wherein means are provided that are especially adapted to be
    supported upon a person's body.

    Class 312, Supports:   Cabinet Structure, subclass 10.1, provides for
    cabinet structure designed to house picture machines or films or other
    highly inflammable material and subclasses 21+ provide cabinets for housing
    and supporting instruments so that relative guided motion between the
    instrument and the cabinet structure results in placement of the instrument
    in a position exposed for use or in a position as for storage, out of the
    way in cabinet structure.  Some of the patents include the instrument
    housed by name only but in general if any instrument structure is recited,
    the combination is classified with the instrument.

    (1)     Note. Class 396, Photography, subclasses 535+ provide for a camera
    which includes a detailed light-excluding case, casing, or housing.

    VII.    FOREIGN ART COLLECTIONS IN CLASS 396

    In establishing new Class 396, only a portion of the foreign
    patents/nonpatent literature from old Class 354 was reclassified along with
    the U.S. patents into subclasses 1-661 of the new Class 396 schedule.

    (a)     Those Class 354 subclasses with foreign patents/nonpatent
    literature which were not reclassified into subclasses 1-661 of Class 396
    had these documents transferred directly to equivalent foreign art
    collections maintaining their original titles and positioning.

    (b)     Those Class 354 subclasses with foreign patents/nonpatent
    literature which were reclassified into subclasses 1-661 of Class 396 have
    no equivalent foreign art collections. The Class 396 subclasses having
    associated foreign patent/nonpatent literature are as follows: 1-5, 14-47,
    207-209, 246-256, 268-276, 281-296, 301-309, 322-350, 429-434, 438,
    505-563, and 661.

    (c)     The foreign art collections in Class 396 (subclasses FOR 700 - FOR
    971) are intended only for receiving foreign patents/nonpatent literature.

    (d)     In subclasses 1-661, references to foreign art collections under
    ``SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS" are intended only as a guide and
    consideration should be given to the remaining set of foreign art
    collections in completing a search.

    (e)     Definitions of the foreign art collections were excerpted from the
    corresponding Class 354 subclass definitions.

    VIII.   SEARCH CLASS

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 100 for
    wiping-type, photographic-film cleaners.

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 266 for a straight line light ray
    geometrical instrument which is camera mounted, subclass 314 for impressing
    an indication of a borehole direction or inclination on a photosensitive
    record, subclass 334 for an indicator of the direction of force traversing
    a natural medium which is structurally installed on a camera and related to
    a feature thereof, and subclass 615 for a contact member which facilitates
    the positioning of a photographic element or element holder at a desired
    spacing with respect to a support.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 361+ for a
    photographic transparency viewer.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 1.42+ for camera shutter proving
    or calibrating.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses for an element
    of a camera; e.g., gear, cam, etc.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclass 417 for processes producing free metal from photographic
    waste at 300 degrees Centigrade or greater combined with a step at less
    than 300 degrees Centigrade and using a liquid nonmetallic material,
    subclass 635 for processes recovering silver from photographic material at
    300 degrees Centigrade or greater, and subclass 713 for processes producing
    free metal from photographic material below 300 degrees Centigrade using a
    liquid nonmetallic material.

    83,     Cutting, subclass 948 for a CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTION relating
    to photographic film cutting.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 213 for an indicator with a camera
    merely providing support.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclass 64 for apparatus
    exhibiting liquid contact with a longitudinally travelling strip (e.g.,
    photographic) where there are sequential work-treating stations or a
    station with means to transfer work or fluid-applying devices, and subclass
    122 for apparatus exhibiting liquid contact with a longitudinally
    travelling strip (e.g., photographic).

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    58 for miscellaneous chemical manufacturing methods of contour or profile
    photography to reproduce a three-dimensional object.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 15 and 90, for telegraphy including a
    photographic operation.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 316.2 for a special camera
    receptacle or package.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclass 908 for a CROSS-REFERENCE
    ART COLLECTION relating to a photographic (e.g., camera) carrier.

    235,    Registers, subclass 64.7 for a mechanical photographic calculator,
    and subclass 91 for a device (e.g., photograph) operated register.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 324+ for an unwinding
    and rewinding coil-to-coil machine convertible information carrier (e.g.,
    magnetic tape or photographic film, etc.) cartridge system, or subclasses
    615+ for a residual guide or guard that directs elongated flexible material
    that may be combined with more than one nominal winding structure.

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses, for a device which carries the
    weight of an article or otherwise holds or steadies it against the pull of
    gravity, and a device for holding an article to its support.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 214 for a special photocell or electron
    tube circuit (including photographic control), subclasses 363.02+ for a
    luminophor body scanner or camera with radiant energy source, subclasses
    475.2+ for photographic-type detection of invisible radiation, and
    subclasses 580+ for the making of a photograph by invisible radiation
    generally. A camera or part thereof which may be used to take a photograph
    by visible light as well as by ultraviolet or infrared rays is in Class
    396.  Picture making by a Class 250 device combined with a Class 396 device
    is provided for in Class 250.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 582+ for optical filter composition and
    optical filter defined only in terms of its composition.

    283,    Printed Matter, subclass 77 for a photographic personal identifier
    with revealable concealed information, and subclass 112 for a photograph
    and revealable concealed information which is plastic laminated.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, Digest 48, for a camera cover fastener.

    294,    Handling: Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 139 for an
    optical instrument support per se to be gripped and carried by hand.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 937 for a vehicle detector
    with camera.

    342,    Communications, Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    RADAR, Radio Navigation), subclass 66 for a directive radio wave system
    where the return signal controls a camera.

    346,    Recorders, particularly subclasses 107.1+ for the subject matter of
    that class combined with a photographic step or apparatus.

    348,    Television, appropriate subclasses and particularly subclasses 272+
    and 294+ for an electronic camera with a semiconductor matrix in place of
    film.

    351,    Optics: Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclasses
    206+ for an eye examining instrument with eye photography.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, appropriate subclasses for motion picture
    method or apparatus, especially subclass 51 for methods of recording a
    series of drawings using photographic images as guides, subclass 137 for a
    motion picture camera structurally convertible to a still camera, and
    subclass 169 for a motion picture camera which can selectively record a
    single frame.

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, subclass 5+ for a projection system for
    mapping or aerial photograph rectifying.

    355,    Photocopying, for photographically copying information from an
    original or carrier that is not classified elsewhere, while generally
    employing a concentrated source of light and an image receiving medium with
    a photosensitive emulsion surface.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for
    measuring or testing combined with photographic recording provided for
    there, subclass 3 for rangefinder, subclasses 213+ for photometers,
    subclass 302 for dispersed light spectroscopy using a photographic medium,
    subclass 404 for photographic light wave frequency analysis, and subclasses
    443+ for light transmission or absorption analysis of photographic film.

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 302 for facsimile photographic recording,
    subclass 527 for a color facsimile photographic previewer, and subclass
    909.1 for a CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTION related to an electronic still
    camera with a semiconductor matrix in place of film.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements,
    appropriate subclasses for optical subcombinations of a camera, and
    subclass 564 for optical Fourier transform spatial filtering with
    photographic media.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 3+ for photographic lighting, per se.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 525+
    for data processing systems related to optics or photography.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 125 for dynamic
    information storage or retrieval having a photographic storage medium.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclasses 167+ for methods and apparatus for making pictures
    of animate and inanimate objects by the action of X-rays and gamma rays.

    386,    Processing of Color Television Signal for Dynamic Recording or
    Reproducing, subclasses 42+ for color television signal recording or
    reproducing using a dynamic photographic record, and subclasses 128+ for
    generic television signal recording or reproducing using a dynamic
    photographic record.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics, subclasses 38+
    for controls, subclasses 130+ for image formation, subclasses 168+ for
    charging, subclasses 177+ for exposure, subclasses 222+ for development,
    subclasses 297+ for transfer, subclasses 320+ for fixing, subclasses 343+
    for cleaning, and subclasses 361+ for document handling.

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclasses for the method of making
    a filter by coating.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 98+ for a
    structurally defined developed film or photographic print, subclasses 195+
    for a structurally defined sheet with discontinuous or differential coating
    such as a retouched photograph, subclasses 221+ for a developed film or
    photographic print in which an element or component is structurally
    defined, and subclasses 411.1 for a developed film or photographic print
    defined merely by the composition of its layers.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, appropriate subclasses for radiation imagery chemistry involving
    process, composition, and product.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 357+ for a combustion type illuminating
    flash device.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclass 408 for a simulated camera toy
    providing a sound.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 53+ for rigid container making with
    photographic reproduction, subclasses 187+ for pliable container making
    with photographic reproduction, and subclass 270 for tube making with
    photographic reproduction, and subclasses 320+ for manufacturing from a
    sheet or web with photographic reproduction.

    536,    Organic Compounds, subclass 40 for recovering nitrated cellulose
    from photographic film, and subclass 78 for recovering cellulose acetate
    from photographic film.

    600,    Surgery, subclass 525 for electric heartbeat signal recording using
    a CRT and camera.

    D16,    Photography and Optical Equipment, subclasses 200+ for design
    patents relating to cameras or bodies therefor, and subclasses 237+ for
    design patents relating to photographic accessories.

    D21,    Games, Toys, and Sports Goods, subclass 110 for design patents
    relating to a scale model photographic toy.

    In subclasses 1-661 below, references to Foreign Art Collections (e.g., FOR
    700) under ``SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS" are merely suggestions for
    locations of related foreign patents/nonpatent literature and are intended
    only as a guide.


CLS 396/1
TXT STUDIO STRUCTURE:

    Subject matter under the class definition having means to assist in taking
    a photograph which is not part of a camera or attached to a camera.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclass 722 for television studio equipment.

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    591+ for means for illuminating building interiors with outside light.

    362,    Illumination, appropriate subclasses for artificial illumination
    generally.


CLS 396/2
TXT Photo booth:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising a self-contained, relatively
    small studio enclosure which permits automatic photography of an individual
    or small group.


CLS 396/3
TXT Background or foreground:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 having means auxiliary to a primary object
    which are included in a photograph to produce a scenic effect.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, appropriate
    subclasses for backgrounds in the form of plural strips, slats, or panels
    interconnected for relative motion, where only the structure thereof, with
    or without operating, mounting, or housing means, are claimed and no
    features specialized to photography (such as surface characteristics of the
    background or particular relation to the object to be photographed) are
    claimed.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 88+ for sets used in motion
    pictures.


CLS 396/4
TXT Lighting:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including detailed studio illuminating
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155+,   for camera structure combined with object illuminating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 3+ for photographic lighting, per se.


CLS 396/5
TXT Object support:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including structure for maintaining an
    object at a desired position during studio photography.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310+,   for camera data recording.

    419+,   for camera support, in general.

    556+,   for phototype composing which may include diverse-type stencil
    carrier.


CLS 396/6
TXT DISPOSABLE OR RECYCLABLE CAMERA:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which a camera body structure
    is loaded with film at a factory and the entire structure is returned to
    the factory for removal and processing of the film.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    535+,   for a camera body detail.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    399,    Electrophotography, subclass 109 for remanufacturing of
    electrophotographic parts.


CLS 396/7
TXT AERIAL CAMERA:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a camera is specifically
    adapted for aerial photography or is combined with or specially adapted for
    attachment to a support which is at a practically inaccessible altitude or
    is combined with means specially adapted for controlling exposures at
    inaccessible altitudes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 756+, for foreign art collections involving aerial cameras.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 144+ for television cameras adapted for
    aerial viewing.

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    820 for lens mounts with means to compensate for temperature change.


CLS 396/8
TXT Having shutter or film feed speed and air or spin speed synchronizing:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein the camera is intended to be
    mounted on an air vehicle and has means for varying the speed of the
    shutter or photographic medium feeding mechanism in response to a change in
    the speed of the air vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    387+,   for camera structure with film drive in general.

    FOR 757, for a foreign art collection involving an aerial camera having
    shutter or film speed and air or spin speed synchronizing.


CLS 396/9
TXT Simultaneous recording of plural images:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein two or more images are recorded at
    the same time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322+,   for plural image recording in general.

    FOR 759+, for foreign art collections involving an aerial camera having
    simultaneous recording of plural images.


CLS 396/10
TXT Plural images recorded on plural film:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein the plural images are recorded on
    separate photographic media.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322+,   for plural image recording in general.

    FOR 760, for a foreign art collection involving an aerial camera having
    plural images recorded on plural film.


CLS 396/11
TXT Including continuously moving film:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein a film is shifted without
    interruption during the recording of a single exposure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20+,    for a scanning camera.

    387+,   for camera structure with film drive in general.

    FOR 762, for a foreign art collection involving an aerial camera including
    continuously moving film.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics: Motion Pictures, appropriate subclasses for recording of
    motion pictures.


CLS 396/12
TXT Support or holder:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 including means for supporting the camera
    against gravity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    419+,   for camera support, in general.

    FOR 765, for a foreign art collection involving an aerial camera having
    support or holder.


CLS 396/13
TXT Having stabilizing (e.g., gyroscope, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 12 wherein the camera support has a
    stabilizing system to compensate for the movement of the structure to which
    the support is mounted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for systems which actually sense camera shake and provide
    subsequent stabilization.

    FOR 761, for a foreign art collection involving an aerial camera having
    direction stabilizing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 5+ for gyroscopes.


CLS 396/14
TXT BODY EXAMINATION PHOTOGRAPHY:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a camera is adapted to
    photograph a living being or portion thereof for subsequent identification
    or inspection.


CLS 396/15
TXT Skin ridge pattern (e.g., fingerprint):

    Subject matter under subclass 14 wherein a camera is adapted to photograph
    distinctive elongated raised areas of a skin surface.

    (1)     Note. This typically comprises fingerprint photography but may also
    include comparable photography of a palm or sole of foot.


CLS 396/16
TXT Mouth, jaw, or tooth:

    Subject matter under subclass 14 wherein a camera is adapted for
    dental-type photography.


CLS 396/17
TXT Endoscope:

    Subject matter under subclass 14 wherein a camera is attached to a device
    which may be inserted within the body through a relatively small opening.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 65+ for a video endoscope.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, subclasses 117+ for an optical fiber bundle
    endoscope, per se.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 101+ for a surgical endoscope with illuminating
    means which may or may not include an imaging device such as a camera.


CLS 396/18
TXT Eye photography:

    Subject matter under subclass 14 wherein a camera is adapted to photograph
    the exterior or interior of an eye.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for eye gaze tracking.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclasses
    206+ for an objective-type eye examining or testing instrument that
    includes still or motion picture photographic apparatus.


CLS 396/19
TXT HOLLOW CAVITY TYPE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a camera is specifically
    adapted for use in photographing the interior of a hollow cavity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for a camera with endoscope.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, subclasses 107.2 for well-bore photographic recorders.

    348,    Television, subclasses 65+, 84, and 85 for television cameras
    adapted for use in endoscopes, pipelines, or well-bores, respectively.


CLS 396/20
TXT SCANNING CAMERA:

    Subject matter under class definition including camera structure wherein
    there is relative motion between the lens and a light sensitive surface in
    order to increase the angular extent of the view covered.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for an aerial camera making a single exposure on a continuously
    moving film.

    436,    for variable frame masking producing a wide aspect ratio photograph.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses and particularly subclass 349.1
    for a rotatable support base.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 69+ for a motion picture
    panoramic camera.


CLS 396/21
TXT Including reflector:

    Subject matter under subclass 20 which utilizes a mirrorlike element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    351,    for means to reflect an image to film in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    838+ for a mirror, per se.


CLS 396/22
TXT Concave film surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 20 wherein a photographic medium surface is
    bent into the form of a partial cylinder and the exposure is made upon the
    inner cylindrical surface.


CLS 396/23
TXT Convex film surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 20 wherein a photographic medium surface is
    bent into the form of a partial cylinder and exposure is made upon the
    outer cylindrical surface.


CLS 396/24
TXT Synchronization of film and camera movement:

    Subject matter under subclass 20 including means to apply a force to
    photographic medium surfaces to effect motion, and means which operates in
    time relationship therewith to apply a force to the camera to effect its
    motion during exposure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for shutter/film speed with air/spin speed synchronizing.

    11,     for an aerial camera utilizing continuously moving film.

    387+,   for camera structure and film drive, in general.


CLS 396/25
TXT UNDERWATER, WATERPROOF, OR WATER-RESISTANT CAMERA:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a camera is provided with
    means for protection from liquid intrusion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    535+,   for a generic camera housing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclass 81 for television cameras adapted for use in
    underwater environments.


CLS 396/26
TXT Fluid pressure detection or modification:

    Subject matter under subclass 25 which senses or changes gas or liquid
    pressure in the immediate vicinity of the camera.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 700+ for a fluid pressure gauge.


CLS 396/27
TXT Camera removable from handheld casing:

    Subject matter under subclass 25 including a camera portion readily
    separable from a manually supported enclosure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    420+,   for a camera with operator support, in general.


CLS 396/28
TXT Having illumination device:

    Subject matter under subclass 25 including structure providing light to an
    underwater object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155+,   for object exposure illumination, in general.


CLS 396/29
TXT Handheld camera:

    Subject matter under subclass 25 wherein the camera is manually supported.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    420+,   for a camera with operator support, in general.


CLS 396/30
TXT SELF-DEVELOPING CAMERA:

    Subject matter under the class definition having camera structure and
    developing means which are enclosed in a light excluding case in which a
    photographic medium may be subjected to one or more fluid-treating
    operations, such as sensitizing, developing, etc.

    (1)     Note. For classification herein, the camera and treating devices
    must be in a single light excluding case or connected by a light excluding
    chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    527,    for plate or cut film assemblies, per se, which include processing
    chemicals.

    564+,   for photographic fluid treating apparatus, per se.


CLS 396/31
TXT Including means to treat superimposed material:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein an image-exposed sheet or strip is
    brought into contact with a second sheet or strip and means to treat the
    sheet or strip with a fluid.

    (1)     Note. Generally a sheet with an exposed image thereon and a second
    (receptor) sheet are brought into contact after a fluid has been applied
    thereto to transfer the image from one sheet to the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    580+,   for fluid-treating apparatus, per se, for treating superimposed or
    laminar sheets.


CLS 396/32
TXT Including pressure means:

    Subject matter under subclass 31 having means to apply a pressing force to
    facilitate the dispensing of processing fluids to the image-exposed sheet.

    (1)     Note. This subclass includes the collapsing of a rupturable
    container of fluid to release the fluid on the sheet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    582+,   for treating superimposed or laminar sheets with fluid dispensing
    apparatus, per se.


CLS 396/33
TXT Roller:

    Subject matter under subclass 32 wherein the means to apply a pressing
    force has a peripheral surface in the shape of a cylinder.

    (1)     Note. The roller must be for the purpose of dispensing the fluid as
    distinguished from rollers which may be used to move or press the sheets
    without a fluid dispensing action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for a roller dispensing the fluid by a wetting action rather than a
    pressing action and with superimposed sheets.

    42,     for a fluid roller applicator not limited to superimposed sheets.


CLS 396/34
TXT Light shield:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 which includes light blocking at a
    photographic medium exit slot.


CLS 396/35
TXT Tab:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 wherein a small projection from the side
    of a camera is pulled to provide motive force to remove a photographic
    medium therefrom.


CLS 396/36
TXT Ejecting:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 which provides means to propel a
    photographic medium from the camera.


CLS 396/37
TXT Having pick:

    Subject matter under subclass 36 having a claw member which moves a
    photographic medium into engagement with the ejecting means.


CLS 396/38
TXT Exposed photographic medium engaging or holding:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 having means to handle or retain a
    photographic medium following exposure.


CLS 396/39
TXT Holding chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 wherein the retaining means comprises a
    container attached to or an integral part of a camera.


CLS 396/40
TXT Mechanical detail of roller or roller drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 which recites particular mechanical
    structure of the roller or drive mechanism therefor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    584,    for roller details in fluid treating apparatus which operates on
    superimposed sheets.


CLS 396/41
TXT Operating on rolled material:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 wherein one of the sheets or strips is
    wound into the form of a cylinder.


CLS 396/42
TXT Including fluid applicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 having a supply of treating fluid and
    including means for dispensing said fluid onto light sensitive material.

    (1)     Note. The fluid applicator is a saturated web, wetting roll,
    sprayer, doctor blade, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    564+,   for various fluid applicator apparatus, per se, and especially
    subclasses 582+, 604+, 625, and 627.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 239+ for liquid application members
    in an electrophotographic device.


CLS 396/43
TXT Including film processing tank:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 having a receptacle or container for
    holding the developing fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    636+,   for a film or print processing vessel.


CLS 396/44
TXT And means to move film:

    Subject matter under subclass 43 including active means to propel light
    sensitive material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    387+,   for camera structure with film drive, in general.


CLS 396/45
TXT Having tank filling means:

    Subject matter under subclass 44 including a supply source of fluid and
    means for dispensing the fluid in the tank.


CLS 396/46
TXT Operating on rolled photographic medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 44 having a supply of light sensitive
    material wound into the form of a cylinder.


CLS 396/47
TXT Plural tanks:

    Subject matter under subclass 44 having two or more receptacles or
    containers.


CLS 396/48
TXT CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR SEQUENCING AT LEAST THREE FUNCTIONS:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a circuit to coordinate
    three or more major camera operations (e.g., coordination of focus
    operation, exposure control, and film advancing; coordination of self-timer
    operation, photometering, and focus operation; etc.).


CLS 396/49
TXT SELF-ORGANIZING SYSTEM:

    Subject matter under the class definition having means to self-organize
    previously set camera parameters in order to make decisions about
    subsequent camera settings.

    (1)     Note. This includes systems utilizing neural networks, fuzzy logic,
    and other artificial intelligence circuits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, appropriate subclasses
    for generic artificial intelligence circuits.


CLS 396/50
TXT ATTITUDE SENSING:

    Subject matter under the class definition having means to detect
    orientation of a camera.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52+,    for camera shake sensing.


CLS 396/51
TXT EYE TRACKING:

    Subject matter under the class definition having means to detect gaze
    direction or visual axis of a camera operator's eye.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for a camera particularly adapted for eye photography.


CLS 396/52
TXT CAMERA SHAKE SENSING:

    Subject matter under the class definition having means to detect vibration
    of a camera.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring or Testing, subclasses 570+ for vibration measuring.


CLS 396/53
TXT With accelerometer:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 having a device that detects acceleration
    of the camera.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring or Testing, subclasses 488+ for acceleration measuring.


CLS 396/54
TXT With photoarray:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 having an array of photoelements to detect
    the camera vibration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 443+ for a light-sensitive array consisting of solid-state
    elements.


CLS 396/55
TXT Having stabilization system:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 having a means to compensate for vibration
    of the camera.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for an aerial camera with stabilizing.

    421,    for an operator camera support with stabilization not having camera
    shake detecting.


CLS 396/56
TXT HAVING WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROL:

    Subject matter under the class definition having means to control a camera
    from a distance by electromagnetic signals or sound (e.g., voice).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    297+,   for nonremote operator controlled data entry into a camera.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    142+ for generic optical communication remote control.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclass 8 for remote monitoring of an
    electrophotographic device or component.


CLS 396/57
TXT Camera system data/mode entry:

    Subject matter under subclass 56 wherein the means sets camera parameters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    297+,   for nonremote operator controlled data entry into a camera.


CLS 396/58
TXT Camera aiming:

    Subject matter under subclass 56 wherein the means changes the camera field
    of view.


CLS 396/59
TXT Camera release:

    Subject matter under subclass 56 wherein the means starts an exposure cycle.

    (1)     Note. Excluded herein is a camera release initiated by a mere burst
    of light from an object exposure illumination means which activates a
    photocell.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171,    for object exposure illumination means which may activate a
    photocell for camera release.

    263+,   for a camera release control circuit in general.

    502+,   for a mechanical shutter release or actuator means.


CLS 396/60
TXT PSEUDO ZOOM:

    Subject matter under the class definition having means to designate and
    record the location of a portion of a standard size photographic frame
    which, during subsequent printing of such portion, simulates the use of a
    variable focal length lens at the time of the original exposure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72+,    for camera structure with a variable focal length camera objective
    (e.g., zoom, etc.).

    311,    for generic recording of photographic data used in subsequent
    processing.

    435+,   for variable frame masking by an opaque element.


CLS 396/61
TXT FLASH SYSTEM RESPONSIVE TO FOCAL LENGTH OR DISTANCE

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein an artificial
    illumination means or a circuit controlling the artificial illumination
    means is adjusted in accordance with the focal length of the exposure
    objective or the distance from the camera to an object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155+,   for object exposure illumination in general.

    FOR 771+, for foreign art collections involving object illumination with
    camera structure.


CLS 396/62
TXT Illumination angle responds to focal length or distance:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein an output light beam area of the
    artificial light varies according to the focal length of the exposure
    objective.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175,    for a variable illumination angle device, in general.


CLS 396/63
TXT EXPOSURE CONTROL SYSTEM RESPONSIVE TO FOCAL LENGTH:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a shutter or diaphragm
    mechanism is adjusted in accordance with the focal length of an exposure
    objective.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213+,   for camera exposure control circuit in general.

    FOR 710+, for foreign art collections involving a camera automatic exposure
    control system or device.


CLS 396/64
TXT Control of full open aperture value:

    Subject matter under subclass 63 wherein the effective maximum aperture
    size is responsive to focal length.


CLS 396/65
TXT EXPOSURE CONTROL SYSTEM RESPONSIVE TO DISTANCE:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means to adjust a
    shutter or diaphragm in accordance with the distance from the camera to an
    object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213+,   for camera exposure control circuit in general.

    FOR 710+, for foreign art collections involving a camera automatic exposure
    control system or device.


CLS 396/66
TXT With linear solenoid or rotary motor:

    Subject matter under subclass 65 wherein the adjusting means includes a
    prime mover using electromotive force to produce a mechanical rotation or
    translation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ for
    control circuits of electromechanical devices.


CLS 396/67
TXT Electric distance signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 65 including a circuit for producing a signal
    indicative of the distance between the camera and an object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281+,   for a camera indicator, in general.


CLS 396/68
TXT Selective guide number:

    Subject matter under subclass 65 including a manually adjustable member to
    input to the adjusting means a value related to the light output capability
    of an illumination means.


CLS 396/69
TXT Low light activated:

    Subject matter under subclass 65 including means to detect the amount of
    scene light and to enable the adjusting means when the amount of scene
    light is below a preset level.


CLS 396/70
TXT Having indicator:

    Subject matter under 65 including means to convey photographic related
    information to the camera operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281+,   for a camera indicator, in general.


CLS 396/71
TXT HAVING LENS CONVERTER OR EXTENSION TUBE:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a unit removably
    mounted to the exposure objective which alters the focal length or permits
    closeup photography.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73+,    for lens substitution-type focal length modification.

    530,    for an adapter providing mechanical interface between a lens having
    one type of mount and a camera having a different type of mount.

    544+,   for a camera attachment, per se.


CLS 396/72
TXT HAVING VARIABLE FOCAL LENGTH OF CAMERA OBJECTIVE:

    Subject matter under the class definition having camera structure and means
    to change the focal length of an exposure objective.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for a camera with pseudo zoom capability.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    676+ for a lens, per se, with variable magnification (e.g., zoom).


CLS 396/73
TXT Lens moves in or out of light path:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein a lens may be inserted or removed
    from the photographic light path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for a converter which may be removably attached to an exposure
    objective to vary focal length.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    672+ for a lens, per se, having selective magnification by exchanging a
    lens component.


CLS 396/74
TXT Turret type:

    Subject matter under subclass 73 including a rotating disc or table to
    insert or remove a lens from the photographic light path.


CLS 396/75
TXT Motorized lens displacement:

    Subject matter under subclass 73 wherein the lens is moved in or out of the
    light path by a motor.


CLS 396/76
TXT Manually selected preset zoom position or range:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 including a device to move the exposure
    objective to a memorized zoom position or within a zoom range manually
    chosen by a camera operator.


CLS 396/77
TXT Automatic change of focal length:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the focal length of a camera
    objective is adjusted in accordance with a sensed condition without
    operator intervention.


CLS 396/78
TXT Constant image size:

    Subject matter under subclass 77 wherein the exposure objective is adjusted
    to maintain the size of an image unchanged (e.g., as the object moves
    further away or closer to the camera).


CLS 396/79
TXT Having focus operation:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 including means to adjust the sharpness of
    an object image for focus compensation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89+,    for camera exposure objective focusing, in general.

    FOR 700+, for foreign art collections involving automatic camera focusing.

    FOR 835+, for foreign art collections involving manual camera focusing.


CLS 396/80
TXT Including focus/distance detecting circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 which has a circuit which produces a
    signal representative of a focus condition or range to an object.


CLS 396/81
TXT And focal length responsive memory:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 having an electronic static storage means
    containing data used to maintain focus of the exposure objective system as
    the focal length is varied.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, particularly subclasses
    103+, 114+, and 174+ for a static storage element comprising semiconductor
    material.


CLS 396/82
TXT Focus position adjusted according to focal length:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein objective focusing is modified by
    a change in focal length.


CLS 396/83
TXT Having mechanical interlock:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 having a mechanical connection between
    compensator and variator elements of the exposure objective in order to
    maintain focus as the focal length is varied.


CLS 396/84
TXT Having direct viewfinder:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 having a viewfinder with an optical path
    separate from the optical path to the photosensitive medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    373+,   for camera structure with viewfinder, in general.

    FOR 859+, for foreign art collections involving a camera viewfinder.


CLS 396/85
TXT Power zoom:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein a motor drives the exposure
    objective to change focal length.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    696+ for a variable magnification (e.g., zoom) lens, per se, having motor
    driven adjustment.


CLS 396/86
TXT Speed control or step driving:

    Subject matter under subclass 85 wherein the velocity of the exposure
    objective is regulated or where the exposure objective is moved in discrete
    increments.


CLS 396/87
TXT Having position sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 85 which includes a device which detects the
    location of the exposure objective.


CLS 396/88
TXT Having indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 having means to convey information to the
    camera operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281+,   for camera structure with display in general.

    FOR 910+, for foreign art collections involving a camera indicator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, appropriate subclasses for a selective
    display in general.


CLS 396/89
TXT WITH EXPOSURE OBJECTIVE FOCUSING MEANS, FOCUSING AID,  OR RANGEFINDING
    MEANS:

    Subject matter under the class definition having means for adjusting the
    relative spacing between an exposure objective and the photographic medium
    to alter a sharpness of an object image; means for assisting a camera
    operator in making a visual determination of image sharpness; or means for
    measuring a distance from a camera to an object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for control circuit for sequencing at least three functions which
    may include focusing.

    79+,    for camera structure with variable focal length of an exposure
    objective including focusing means.

    461     and 509, for diaphragm structures, per se, which may open for
    focusing or viewing.

    534,    for a camera hood which may be used in focusing or viewing.

    FOR 700+, for foreign art collections involving automatic camera focusing.

    FOR 835+, for foreign art collections involving manual camera focusing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 201.1 for photocell controlling its
    optical path.

    348,    Television, subclasses 345+ for focus control of video camera.

    352,    Optics: Motion Pictures, subclass 140 for focus control with a
    motion picture camera.

    355,    Photocopying, subclass 56 for automatic focusing of a projection
    printer.


    356,    Optics: Measuring and Testing, subclasses 3+ for rangefinding, per
    se.

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    694+ for zoom-type lens adjusting mechanism, and subclasses 823+ for lens
    mount adjusting mechanism.


CLS 396/90
TXT Lens resetting:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 having means to drive the exposure
    objective to an initial position.


CLS 396/91
TXT Lens characteristic compensating:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 having means to correct the focusing or
    rangefinding means according to a condition (e.g., optical aberration, full
    open aperture, etc.) of the exposure objective.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 814, for a foreign art collection involving rangefinder adjustably
    coupled with focusing to compensate for change of camera lens.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    637 for path length or aberration correcting element in dividing,
    combining, or plural image forming, etc.


CLS 396/92
TXT By selecting effective photoelements:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 including means to choose appropriate
    photosensitive elements for a condition of the exposure objective.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    for dual purpose photoelement in exposure objective focusing means
    or rangefinding means.

    111,    for optical detail with photoelement system in exposure objective
    focusing means or rangefinding means.

    172,    for photocell measuring the light output of an artificial
    illumination means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for generic photocell circuits.


CLS 396/93
TXT By modifying electric focus or drive signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 including means to correct the data of a
    focus condition signal of the exposure objective in accordance with a
    desired in-focus condition signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 123+ and 159+ for frequency or amplitude
    modulation including stabilization, noise reduction, or compensation.


CLS 396/94
TXT With mechanical rangefinder:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 including means to alter an
    interconnection between a nonelectrical device, which determines a distance
    from a camera to an object, and an exposure objective to compensate for
    exposure objectives having different characteristics.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138+,   for mechanical rangefinding means for measuring the distance from
    the camera to the object.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 3+ for rangefinders, per
    se.


CLS 396/95
TXT Having pursuit mode:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 having a means to predict movement of the
    object for focusing the exposure objective.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153,    for actual detection of object motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclass 352 for video camera, system, and detail with
    motion detection in focus control.


CLS 396/96
TXT Having accumulation photoarray and time control means:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 having an array of photoelements that
    integrates an amount of light received from the object over a time period
    for focusing the object image and a means to vary the time period.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for camera shake sensing using photoarray.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for generic photocell circuits.

    348,    Television, subclass 332 for video camera, system and detail with
    array of photocells.


CLS 396/97
TXT Temperature compensating:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 having a means to correct for changes in
    the operation of the focusing or rangefinding means due to changes in
    temperature of the surrounding atmosphere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    820 for lens mount with temperature compensation or control.


CLS 396/98
TXT Ambient light compensating:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 having a means to correct for changes in
    the operation of the focusing or rangefinding means due to changes in light
    of a scene to be photographed.


CLS 396/99
TXT With amplification control:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the means for focusing the
    exposure objective includes a variable gain circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 254 and 278+ for semiconductor amplifying
    device with gain control means.


CLS 396/100
TXT Dual purpose photoelement:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 having a light  responsive element used
    for another purpose besides focusing or rangefinding.

    (1)     Note.  A dual purpose photoelement is, for example, a photoelement
    that monitors the brightness of a scene and transmits signals to an
    automatic focusing control circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111,    for optical detail with photoelement system in focusing or
    rangefinding means.

    162,    for photocell in the termination control of an illumination means.

    171,    for photocell used as a flash trigger.

    172,    for photocell measuring the light output of an artificial
    illumination means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for generic photocell circuits.


CLS 396/101
TXT With electronic filtering:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 including a circuit for eliminating
    unwanted components of a signal from the focusing or rangefinding means
    (e.g., spatial filtering, frequency filtering, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 551+ for unwanted signal suppression using electrical
    nonlinear devices.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 166 and 167+, for
    time domain or frequency domain filters.

    364,    Electrical Computer and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 572,
    724.011+, and 825 for diverse data processing filters.


CLS 396/102
TXT Having in-focus threshold adjustable:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 including a circuit  for generating a
    variable reference signal representing adequate sharpness of an object
    image (e.g., an in-focus condition of an object image).


CLS 396/103
TXT Manually selected preset focus position or range:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 including a circuit to move the exposure
    objective to a memorized focus position chosen by the camera operator or
    within a manually chosen focus range.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76,     for a manually selected preset zoom position or range.


CLS 396/104
TXT Reliability of focus/distance signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 including a circuit for judging a
    performance of focusing or rangefinding.


CLS 396/105
TXT Using sound:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the distance from the camera to
    the object is determined by emitting or detecting sound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for camera controlled by electromagnetic signals or sound.

    FOR 701, for a foreign art collection involving camera autofocusing using
    sound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    367,    Communications, Electrical: Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 99+ for an acoustic echo system, per se, for distance or
    direction finding.


CLS 396/106
TXT Having auxiliary illumination:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 which includes an artificial illumination
    source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for studio structure with lighting.

    28,     for underwater, waterproof, or water- resistant camera having an
    illumination device.

    61+,    for flash system responsive to focal length or distance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 541 for burglar alarms
    combined with means to photograph the burglar.

    348,    Television, subclasses 370+ for video camera, system, and detail
    with object or scene illumination.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 198+ for projection light
    sources.

    355,    Photocopying, subclasses 67+ for illumination systems with a
    projection printer.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 248+ for
    electrical circuits of general utility for igniting combustible or
    explosive devices.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 3+  for photographic lighting, per se.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 357+ for combustible illuminating flash
    devices such as photographic bulbs.


CLS 396/107
TXT Intersecting focusing lights:

    Subject matter under subclass 106 having means to project light rays from
    two separate stations within the camera to a common point on the object for
    focusing or rangefinding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 812, for a foreign art collection involving a camera rangefinder using
    focusing lights.


CLS 396/108
TXT Intensity control:

    Subject matter under subclass 106 having means to adjust the brightness of
    the artificial illumination source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205,    for power supply control in artificial illumination means.


CLS 396/109
TXT Having plural emitters:

    Subject matter under subclass 106 having more than one artificial
    illumination source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 11+ for photographic lighting with plural
    light sources.


CLS 396/110
TXT Scanning emitter:

    Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein the artificial illumination
    source emits light rays that  move across the object.


CLS 396/111
TXT Optical detail with photoelement system:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 including a photoelement system and a
    specific light-modifying means used to control focusing or rangefinding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 702+, for foreign art collections involving photoelectric-type,
    automatic camera focusing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 201.2+ for photocell controlling its own
    optical systems with automatic focus control.

    348,    Television, subclasses 336+ for video camera, system and detail
    with color separating optics.

     359,   Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    618+ for light dividing, combining, or plural image forming.


CLS 396/112
TXT Double wedge prism:

    Subject matter under subclass 111 wherein the light modifying means
    includes at least two triangular shaped refracting elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    353,    Image Projectors, subclass 81 for prism in an image projector light
    path.

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    625 for focusing or defocusing using noncurved surfaces (e.g., prismatic,
    etc.), subclass 640 for light-dividing, combining, or image-forming by
    prismatic-type refractor, and subclass 837 for a prism with refracting
    surface.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 339 for light modifier with prismatic type
    refractor.


CLS 396/113
TXT Microprism or lenslet:

    Subject matter under subclass 111 wherein the light modifying means
    includes an array of refracting elements producing a plurality of identical
    images.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    621+ for light dividing, combining, or plural image forming using plural
    lenticular plates.


CLS 396/114
TXT Dual reimage lens type:

    Subject matter under subclass 111 wherein the light modifying means
    includes two lenses behind the lens system for producing images of the
    object.


CLS 396/115
TXT Photosensor area with unique edge pattern:

    Subject matter under subclass 111 wherein the photoelement system includes
    a photosensor area having a specific edge configuration (e.g., a sawtooth,
    a curve, a ramp, etc.).


CLS 396/116
TXT Scanning type:

    Subject matter under subclass 111 wherein the light modifying means
    includes a moving optical element other than an exposure objective.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    209-221 and 223-226 for light deflection using a moving element.


CLS 396/117
TXT Mirror type:

    Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein the moving optical element is
    reflective.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    212+ and 223+ for light deflection by moving a reflective element.


CLS 396/118
TXT Moving photocell:

    Subject matter under subclass 111 wherein the photoelement system is moved.

    (1)     Note.  A photocell is an electronic device having electrical
    properties which vary in accordance with illumination.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for generic photocell circuits.


CLS 396/119
TXT Photoelements with different optical path lengths:

    Subject matter under subclass 111 wherein the photoelement system includes
    photoelements located at different distances from the exposure objective.

    (1)     Note.  The different distances may be the result of a
    light-modifying element that changes the distance the light travels (i.e.,
    optical distance) which may be different than the distance measured by a
    ruler (i.e., physical distance).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for generic photocell circuits.


CLS 396/120
TXT With Position Sensitive Device (PSD):

    Subject matter under subclass 111 wherein the photoelement system is a
    light receiving element which can produce two or more current outputs upon
    receiving light from an object.

    (1)     Note.   A distance from a camera to an object is measured based on
    the ratio of the current outputs of the PSD.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 206.1 and 206.2 for position sensitive
    device in photocell controlled circuit.


CLS 396/121
TXT Plural focusing or rangefinding areas:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 including a circuit that obtains data from
    more than one object area for focusing or rangefinding.


CLS 396/122
TXT Utilizing weight coefficients:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 having a circuit to assign a priority
    factor to each datum of the obtained data.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for a circuit judging a performance of focusing or rangefinding.


CLS 396/123
TXT Automatic area selection:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the object area is selected by a
    device using an algorithm for determining whether or not the object area is
    in focus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for a circuit judging a performance of focusing or rangefinding.


CLS 396/124
TXT Single focus area with variable size or location:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 having a photoarray and means for
    selecting a subset of the photoarray to perform focusing or rangefinding.


CLS 396/125
TXT Processing circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 including details of an analyzing circuit
    that generates at least one signal for focusing or rangefinding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for a circuit generating a variable reference signal of an in-focus
    condition.


CLS 396/126
TXT Null type or zero-difference type:

    Subject matter under subclass 125 wherein the processing circuit generates
    two signals and detects an in focus condition when the two signals are
    essentially equal in magnitude.

    (1)     Note.  An in-focus condition occurs when the image of the object
    attains a desired sharpness.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits and
    Systems, subclasses 63+ for an amplitude discriminator, per se, having
    plural inputs.


CLS 396/127
TXT Inflection point type:

    Subject matter under subclass 125 wherein the processing circuit generates
    a signal and detects an in-focus condition when the signal is at a relative
    maximum or minimum magnitude (i.e., when the first derivative of the signal
    function becomes zero).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits and
    Systems, subclasses 58+ for signal extrema discriminating, per se.


CLS 396/128
TXT Image correlation type:

    Subject matter under subclass 125 wherein the processing circuit generates
    two image signals and determines the phase difference of the image signals
    for focusing or rangefinding.


CLS 396/129
TXT Power supply control:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the means for adjusting an
    exposure objective includes details of an electrical power generation,
    regulation, or control circuitry.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301+,   for generic camera power supply.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity: Power Supply or Regulation Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for power supply or regulation, in general.

    348,    Television, subclass 372 for power supply in video camera, system,
    and detail.


CLS 396/130
TXT Focus lock:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 including means to stop further focusing
    or rangefinding once an in focus condition of the object is obtained to
    allow a camera operator to change an area of a scene to be photographed
    while maintaining the in focus condition.


CLS 396/131
TXT Manually actuated power focus:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the means for adjusting the
    exposure objective includes a manually manipulated member (e.g. lever,
    dial, knob, push button) and a motor (spring or electrical type) responding
    to the manually manipulated member for displacing the exposure objective
    for focusing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for manual manipulator in exposure control system responsive to
    distance.

    216,    for manual manipulator in exposure control circuit with clamp or
    stop needle device.

    218,    for manual manipulator in exposure control circuit with direct
    drive galvanometer device.

    297+,   for operator controlled data entry into camera.

    391,    for a film drive double exposure prevention mechanism having manual
    override.


CLS 396/132
TXT Dual purpose motor:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 having a single motor for adjusting the
    exposure objective and for controlling an exposure system.


CLS 396/133
TXT Lens drive circuit or motor structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the means for adjusting the
    exposure objective includes a circuit and a motor, or details of the motor
    structure, responding to the circuit for displacing the exposure objective.
    (e.g. motor drive control circuit, piezoelectric motor, wave motor).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248,    for shutter driven by piezoelectric motor.

    256,    for shutter controlled by stepping motor.

    259+,   for diaphragm controlled by stepping motor.

    261,    for diaphragm driven by piezoelectric motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    696+ for lens adjusting mechanism driven by motor.


CLS 396/134
TXT Backlash or jam detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 133 which includes means to correct a
    deviation that occurs in the displacement of the exposure objective or to
    detect a malfunction of the exposure objective adjusting means.


CLS 396/135
TXT Speed control:

    Subject matter under subclass 133 having means to control the rate of
    motion of the motor.


CLS 396/136
TXT Duty cycle:

    Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein the speed of the motor is
    controlled by varying the percentage of time that power is applied to the
    motor during a periodic power cycle.


CLS 396/137
TXT Auto/manual mode selection:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 having means to choose between automatic
    or manual focusing or rangefinding.


CLS 396/138
TXT Mechanical rangefinder:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 including nonelectrical means to measure
    the distance from the camera to the object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94,     for mechanical rangefinding means with lens characteristic
    compensating.

    FOR 809+, for foreign art collections involving camera structure and
    rangefinder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 3+ for rangefinders, per
    se.


CLS 396/139
TXT Rangefinder coupled with focusing:

    Subject matter under subclass 138 wherein the mechanical rangefinder is
    connected to the exposure objective and both are moved simultaneously for
    focusing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 810+, for foreign art collections involving camera structure and
    rangefinder coupled with focusing.


CLS 396/140
TXT Having parallax correction:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 including means to correct for the
    difference between an actual view covered by the exposure objective and an
    apparent view seen by the mechanical rangefinder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149,    for parallax correction with viewfinder in focusing or rangefinding
    operation.

    377,    for parallax correction with viewfinder in general.

    FOR 811, for a foreign art collection involving parallax correction in a
    camera rangefinder with coupled focusing.


CLS 396/141
TXT Having viewfinder:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 including an optical device attached to
    or part of a camera to indicate an extent of a scene to be photographed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     for direct viewfinder in camera structure with variable focal
    length of camera objective.

    148,    for viewfinder in focusing or rangefinding operation in general.

    373+,   for camera structure with viewfinder in general.

    FOR 813, for a foreign art collection involving camera structure with
    rangefinder coupled with focusing and viewfinder.

    FOR 839+, for foreign art collections involving manual camera focusing
    having viewfinder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclass 341 for optical viewfinder in video camera,
    system, and detail.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 8, for combination of a
    rangefinder and viewfinder, per se.


CLS 396/142
TXT Cam means to actuate rangefinder:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein the mechanical rangefinder and
    the exposure objective are moved by a cam/follower mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  A cam/follower mechanism is a device that produces movement
    by using a mechanical element that rides on the surface of a rotating or
    translating eccentric.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 815, for a foreign art collection involving a rangefinder actuated by a
    cam.


CLS 396/143
TXT Lever means to actuate rangefinder:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein the mechanical rangefinder and
    the exposure objective are moved by a lever/fulcrum mechanism.

    (1)     Note. A lever/fulcrum mechanism is a device that produces movement
    by using a mechanical element that rotates on a pivot point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 816, for a foreign art collection involving a rangefinder actuated by a
    lever where the rangefinder is focus coupled.


CLS 396/144
TXT Mechanical mechanism for displacement of exposure objective:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 having mechanical means (e.g., gear train,
    lever) for moving the exposure objective to obtain a sharp image.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 835+, for foreign art collections involving manual camera focusing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    822+ for lens mount with adjustable focusing mechanism.


CLS 396/145
TXT Bed or bellows type:

    Subject matter under subclass 144 including a flat platform upon which the
    exposure objective moves or a pleated expandable element between the
    exposure objective and the camera body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    341+,   for bellows objective camera exclusive of recited focusing
    operation.


CLS 396/146
TXT Having lock mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 144 including a means to prevent accidental
    movement of the exposure objective.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    344,    for bellows objective camera with guide and lock.

    503,    for safety lock of shutter actuator.


CLS 396/147
TXT Having indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 having means to convey focusing or
    rangefinding information to a camera operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for indicator in exposure control system responsive to distance.

    88,     for indicator in camera structure with a variable focal length
    camera objective.

    163,    for indicator in camera structure with artificial illumination
    termination control.

    201+,   for indicator with object exposure illumination.

    239,    for indicator in exposure control circuit with manually selective
    exposure mode.

    255,    for indicator in exposure control circuit of shutter speed function.

    281+,   for camera indicator in general.

    515,    for detachable film holder unit with integral means to show film
    use which is not visible to operator during normal operation.

    578,    for fluid treating apparatus testing, calibrating, or indicating.

    FOR 709, for a foreign art collection involving automatic camera focusing
    with focus indicator.

    FOR 838, for a foreign art collection involving manual camera focusing with
    distance indicator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclass 84 for light-controlling display.


CLS 396/148
TXT Having viewfinder:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 including an optical device attached to or
    part of the camera to indicate an extent of a scene to be photographed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141,    for viewfinder and a mechanical rangefinder.

    373+,   for camera structure with viewfinder in general.

    FOR 839+, for foreign art collections involving manual camera focusing with
    viewfinder.

    FOR 859+, for foreign art collections involving camera detail including
    viewfinder.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 8 for combination of a
    rangefinder and viewfinder, per se.


CLS 396/149
TXT Having parallax correction:

    Subject matter under subclass 148 including means to correct for a
    difference between an actual view covered by the exposure objective and an
    apparent view seen by the viewfinder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140,    for parallax correction with mechanical rangefinder coupled with
    focusing.

    377,    for parallax correction with viewfinder in general.


CLS 396/150
TXT Including focusing screen:

    Subject matter under subclass 148 including an optical device having a
    surface upon which a scene image formed by the exposure objective can be
    seen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 840+, for foreign art collections involving manual camera focusing with
    viewfinder including focusing screen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    355,    Photocopying, subclasses 44+ for focusing screen in projection
    printing or copying cameras.


CLS 396/151
TXT Film and focusing screen interchangeable:

    Subject matter under subclass 150 wherein the focusing screen and a
    photographic medium are successively brought into a same position relative
    to the exposure objective.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 808, for a foreign art collection involving camera having
    interchangeable film and focusing screen.


CLS 396/152
TXT And reflector or refractor:

    Subject matter under subclass 150 including an optical device that turns
    back or bends light (e.g., mirror or prism), behind the exposure objective
    for directing light to the focusing screen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 841, for a foreign art collection involving manual camera focusing
    including focusing screen and reflector.


CLS 396/153
TXT OBJECT MOTION DETECTION:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein movement of a
    photographic subject is sensed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95,     for focusing having means to predict object movement.


CLS 396/154
TXT FORESHOOTING:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means to partially
    expose a photographic medium prior to the main picture taking exposure in
    order to modify photographic medium sensitivity.


CLS 396/155
TXT WITH OBJECT ILLUMINATION FOR EXPOSURE:

    Subject matter under the class definition having means to illuminate an
    object with artificial light (illumination means; e.g., a flash device) for
    exposure purposes in combination with a camera structure.

    (1)     Note.  Exposure purposes include, for example, preexposure
    illumination for red-eye reduction, determining a proper exposure, or
    providing illumination when the shutter is open.

    (2)     Note. See ``OBJECT ILLUMINA-TION SUBCOMBINATIONS" note under the
    main class definition for line  notes with other classes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for studio structure with lighting.

    28,     for underwater, waterproof, or water- resistant camera having an
    illumination device.

    61+,    for flash system responsive to focal length or distance.

    106+,   for focusing or rangefinding  operation with auxiliary illumination.

    FOR 713+, for foreign art collections involving a camera automatic exposure
    control system including artificial illumination.

    FOR 771+, for foreign art collections involving object illumination with
    camera structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, see (2) Note above.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, see (2) Note above.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 541 for burglar alarms
    combined with means to photograph the burglar.

    348,    Television, subclasses 370+ for video camera, system, and detail
    with object or scene illumination.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 198+ for projection light
    sources.

    355,    Photocopying, subclasses 67+ for illumination systems with a
    projection printer.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 248+ for
    electrical circuits of general utility for igniting combustible or
    explosive devices.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 3+ for photographic lighting, per se.

    431,    Combustion, see (2) Note above.


CLS 396/156
TXT With Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 having an IGBT connected in series with
    an illumination means circuit and used to control the start and termination
    of the artificial light producing from the illumination means.

    (1)     Note.  An Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor (IGBT) is a
    voltage-controlled, three-terminal, switching device that is a combination
    of a thyristor of pnpn structure and a MOS field effect transistor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 427+ and 438+ for switching device using field effect
    transistor or four-or-more layer device.


CLS 396/157
TXT Having preexposure illumination:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 in which the illumination means operates
    a first time to illuminate the object for a preparatory photographic
    operation prior to exposure and operates a second time to illuminate the
    object for exposure.

    (1)     Note. A preparatory photographic operation includes red-eye
    reduction, photometering, test flashing, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 715, for a foreign art collection involving automatic exposure control
    including artificial illumination and preexposure flashing.


CLS 396/158
TXT For red-eye reduction:

    Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the preparatory photographic
    operation is to decrease the pupil size of a subject's eyes to minimize
    having the color of a subject's eyes appear red in the developed picture
    (e.g., red-eye effect).


CLS 396/159
TXT Having artificial illumination termination control:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 having a means to stop the illumination
    means from producing light whenever a proper amount of illumination has
    been given to the object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 716+, for foreign art collections involving automatic exposure control
    including flash termination control of artificial illumination.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: System, subclasses 307+ for
    automatic current or voltage regulation of lamp or discharge devices.


CLS 396/160
TXT Including multipurpose terminal:

    Subject matter under subclass 159 having a detailed terminal which connects
    an illumination means to a camera body and through which plural distinct
    control signals are transmitted in either direction.


CLS 396/161
TXT Including exposure control circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 159 having a circuit to control an exposure
    system (e.g., shutter or diaphragm).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166+,   for exposure control circuit with illumination mode.

    171,    for photocell that responds to a burst of light for starting a
    flash operation or for starting an exposure system.

    180+,   for camera structure with object illumination and exposure
    synchronizer.

    213+,   for generic camera exposure control circuit.

    FOR 720+, for foreign art collections involving an automatic exposure
    control system including artificial illumination where exposure is
    controlled without controlling flash.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 221, 229+, and 362+ for exposure control
    circuit in video camera, system, and detail.

    352,    Motion Pictures, subclasses 141 and 177 for automatic diaphragm or
    shutter control in a motion picture camera; subclass 199 for projection
    light source synchronized with shutter.


CLS 396/162
TXT Having photocell optical path structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein the termination control includes
    a photocell and an optical means for conducting, directing, or modifying
    light reaching the photocell.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111+,   for optical detail with photoelement system in focusing or
    rangefinding operation of the camera.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 201.1 for photocell controlling its own
    optical system.

    348,    Television, subclasses 336+ for video camera, system, and detail
    with color separating optics.

     359,   Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    618+ for light-dividing, combining, or plural image forming.


CLS 396/163
TXT Having indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 159 having a means to convey information to a
    camera operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for indicator in exposure control system responsive to distance.

    88,     for indicator in camera structure with a variable focal length
    camera objective.

    147,    for indicator with focusing and rangefinding means.

    201+,   for indicator with object exposure illumination.

    239,    for indicator in exposure control circuit with manually selective
    exposure mode.

    255,    for indicator in exposure control circuit of shutter speed function.

    281+,   for camera indicator in general.

    515,    for detachable film holder unit with integral means to show film
    use which is not visible to operator during normal operation.

    578,    for fluid treating apparatus testing, calibrating, or indicating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclass 84 for light-controlling display.


CLS 396/164
TXT Variable intensity control:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 having a means to adjust the brightness
    of the artificial light from the illumination means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 718, for a foreign art collection involving automatic exposure control
    including artificial illumination which is charge level or power supply
    responsive.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 307+ for
    automatic current or voltage regulation.


CLS 396/165
TXT Activated under low light condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 in which the illumination means is
    automatically enabled whenever scene light is insufficient for a proper
    exposure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 719, for a foreign art collection involving automatic exposure control
    including artificial illumination automatically activated under low light
    condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 307+ for
    automatic current or voltage regulation.


CLS 396/166
TXT Exposure control circuit with illumination mode:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 in which a circuit controlling a shutter
    or a diaphragm (i.e., exposure control circuit) is modified when the
    illumination means is intended to be used.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161,    for artificial illumination termination control with exposure
    control circuit.

    171,    for photocell that responds to a burst of light for starting a
    flash operation or for starting an exposure system.

    180+,   for camera structure with object illumination and exposure
    synchronizer.

    213+,   for generic camera exposure control circuit.

    FOR 720+, for foreign art collections involving an automatic exposure
    control system including artificial illumination where exposure is
    controlled without controlling flash.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 221, 229+, and 362+ for exposure control
    circuit in video camera, system, and detail.

    352,    Motion Pictures, subclasses 141 and 177 for automatic diaphragm or
    shutter control in a motion picture camera; subclass 199 for projection
    light source synchronized with shutter.


CLS 396/167
TXT Exposure control circuit responsive to illumination source readiness:

    Subject matter under subclass 166 having means to detect when the
    illumination means is enabled in order to automatically switch the shutter
    or diaphragm control circuit to the illumination mode of operation.


CLS 396/168
TXT Program mode function:

    Subject matter under subclass 166 in which the exposure control circuit
    automatically determines both an aperture value and exposure time value in
    accordance with a scene illumination (i.e., no manual setting of the
    aperture value or exposure time is required).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242+,   for program mode in generic exposure control circuit.


CLS 396/169
TXT Shutter speed function only:

    Subject matter under subclass 166 in which the exposure control circuit
    adjusts an exposure time value to control a shutter only.

    (1)     Note.  Manual control circuit that has an illumination mode and
    that adjusts both exposure time value and aperture value is classified in
    subclass 166.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242+,   for program mode in generic exposure control circuit.

    246+,   for adjustment of shutter speed function only in generic exposure
    control circuit.


CLS 396/170
TXT Diaphragm function only:

    Subject matter under subclass 166 in which the exposure control circuit
    adjusts an aperture value to control a diaphragm only.

    (1)     Note.  Manual control circuit that has an illumination mode and
    that adjusts both exposure time value and aperture value is classified in
    subclass 166.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242+,   for program mode in generic exposure control circuit.

    257+,   for adjustment of diaphragm function only in generic exposure
    control circuit.


CLS 396/171
TXT Having photocell used as flash trigger or used for camera release:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 in which a photoelement responds to a
    burst of light for starting an illumination means (a flash operation) or
    for starting the exposure system.

    (1)     Note.  Slave flashes are included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59,     for a remote control circuit which provides a wireless signal to
    achieve camera release.

    100,    for dual purpose photoelement in focusing or rangefinding operation.

    263+,   for a release control circuit, in general.

    FOR 724, for a foreign art collection involving automatic exposure control
    including a photocell used as flash trigger for artificial illumination.


CLS 396/172
TXT Photocell directly illuminated:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 wherein a photoelement receives the
    artificial light directly from the illumination means to measure the light
    output of the illumination means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92,     for lens characteristic compensating by selecting effective
    photoelements during focusing.

    96,     for focusing or rangefinding with accumulation photoarray and time
    control.

    100,    for dual purpose photoelement in focusing or rangefinding.

    111+,   for focusing or rangefinding devices with optical details of a
    photoelement system.

    162,    for photocell in the termination control of an illumination means.

    171,    for photocell used as a flash trigger.

    269,    for a photocell having specific camera location and responsive to
    an adjacent light emitter in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for generic photocell circuits.


CLS 396/173
TXT Multiple flashing from a single unit for a single exposure:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 in which one flash device operates more
    than one time during one exposure.


CLS 396/174
TXT Bounce type:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 in which the illumination means rotates
    about an axis to make the artificial light reflect from a surface, such as
    a ceiling, to the object to more fully diffuse the artificial light.


CLS 396/175
TXT Variable illumination angle:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 wherein the illumination means includes
    means to change the cross-section area of the artificial light beam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    274,    for a camera photocell and means for changing the photocell field
    of view.

    FOR 795, for a foreign art collection involving camera structure and a
    variable angle artificial illumination system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclass 369 for changing viewing angle via optics in
    video camera.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 287 for angularly adjustable or
    repositionable light source with modifier.


CLS 396/176
TXT Having flash built into camera:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 wherein the illumination means and a
    camera body are constructed as a single integrated unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 796, for a foreign art collection involving camera structure and flash
    built into camera.


CLS 396/177
TXT Pop-up flash:

    Subject matter under subclass 176 wherein the single integrated unit
    includes a spring or a motor to extend the illumination means from the
    camera body.


CLS 396/178
TXT Folding flash:

    Subject matter under subclass 176 wherein the illumination means is
    manually collapsed and extended from the camera body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    348+,   for folding or collapsible camera.

    FOR 848, for a foreign art collection involving double exposure preventing
    with foldable camera.


CLS 396/179
TXT Flash mode mechanical exposure control:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 including an all mechanical device to
    adjust an aperture size or an exposure time when the illumination means is
    enabled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    472+,   for shutter with mechanical delayed release means.

    475+,   for shutter with mechanically delayed closing.


CLS 396/180
TXT Having exposure synchronizer:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 including means to actuate the
    illumination means in timed relationship with an exposure.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses include shutter mechanism
    which is synchronized with an operation of an activation switch in a flash
    lamp circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 776+, for a foreign art collection involving artificial illumination
    and camera synchronization.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 177 for motion picture camera
    with starting or stopping means responsive to shutter and subclass 199 for
    projection light sources synchronized with shutter.


CLS 396/181
TXT Shutter controlled by explosive force of flash device:

    Subject matter under subclass 180 wherein a flash device includes a
    combustible material the ignition of which provides a mechanical force to
    open or close a shutter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 777, for a foreign art collection involving artificial illumination
    with synchronized shutter controlled by explosive force of flash device.


CLS 396/182
TXT Multiple illumination units for single exposure:

    Subject matter under subclass 180 including more than one illumination
    means actuated during a single exposure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 779, for a foreign art collection involving artificial illumination and
    camera synchronizing including multiple illumination units.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 11+ for plural light sources in
    photographic lighting.


CLS 396/183
TXT Shutter relay or solenoid:

    Subject matter under subclass 180 including electromagnetic means to
    actuate or release a shutter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    463+,   for shutter with dynamoelectric actuator.

    FOR 780, for a foreign art collection involving artificial illumination and
    camera synchronizing with shutter relay or solenoid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 139+ for
    electromagnetic device control circuits.


CLS 396/184
TXT Having pneumatic shutter release:

    Subject matter under subclass 180 including gas pressure means to actuate a
    shutter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    476,    for shutter mechanically delayed closing including pneumatic means.

    499,    for shutter with plural oscillating blades including pneumatic
    actuator.

    FOR 781, for a foreign art collection involving artificial illumination and
    camera synchronizing having pneumatic shutter release.


CLS 396/185
TXT Electromechanical energizing generator:

    Subject matter under subclass 180 including an electro-mechanical
    transducer which produces electric current for operating the illumination
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 782, for a foreign art collection involving artificial illumination and
    camera synchronizing having energizing generator in flash unit.


CLS 396/186
TXT Reflex mirror activates switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 180 including a reflex mirror which closes a
    switch for activating the illumination means when it moves from a viewing
    position to an exposure position.

    (1)     Note.  A reflex mirror is a mirror which when in a viewing position
    diverts light from the objective to the viewfinder, and when in an exposure
    position allows light from an objective to pass to the photographic medium
    (film).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    352,    for camera structure having reflex mirror to reflect image to film.

    353,    for a twin lens reflex camera.

    354+,   for a single lens reflex camera.

    447,    for camera detail with reflex mirror.

    FOR 783, for a foreign art collection involving artificial illumination and
    camera synchronizing where a reflex mirror closes contacts.


CLS 396/187
TXT Having time delay adjustment means:

    Subject matter under subclass 180 including means to alter the starting
    time of the illumination means with respect to an initiation of shutter
    opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 784+, for foreign art collections involving artificial illumination and
    camera synchronizing having time delay adjustment.


CLS 396/188
TXT Positional:

    Subject matter under subclass 187 wherein a mechanical device is displaced
    for altering the starting time of the illumination means with respect to
    the initiation of shutter opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 785, for a foreign art collection involving artificial illumination and
    camera synchronizing having a positional time delay adjustment.


CLS 396/189
TXT Detachable synchronizer:

    Subject matter under subclass 180 wherein the means to actuate the
    illumination means in timed relationship with the exposure can be
    disconnected from the camera.

    (1)     Note.  Illumination means connected to a camera by a detachable
    cable are proper for this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The synchronizer is not part of the camera nor of flash unit
    but only attached thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 786, for a foreign art collection involving artificial illumination and
    detachable camera synchronizer.


CLS 396/190
TXT Convertible:

    Subject matter under subclass 180 including means for changing from one
    type of illumination means to another.

    (1)     Note.  A camera capable of alternatively using a percussive flash
    or electrically activated flash, or a flash unit capable of using two forms
    of flash bulbs, is proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 787, for a foreign art collection involving a convertible artificial
    illumination source and camera synchronizing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclass 7 for a convertible photographic lighting
    device.


CLS 396/191
TXT Percussive illumination source:

    Subject matter under subclass 180 wherein the illumination means includes
    combustible illuminating material which is ignited by a mechanical striking
    blow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181,    for a shutter controlled by the explosive force of a flash device.

    FOR 788, for a foreign art collection involving a percussive illumination
    source and camera synchronizing.


CLS 396/192
TXT Bulb substitution:

    Subject matter under subclass 180 wherein the illumination means includes
    extra flash bulbs which are automatically substituted for flash bulbs that
    have already been activated or are defective and which cannot produce light
    (e.g., flashcubes, flipflash, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  A flash bulb is a light bulb giving a brief, intense light
    for exposure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173,    for multiple flashing from a single unit for a single exposure.

    197,    for bulb substitution of the illumination means without exposure
    synchronizer.

    FOR 789+, for foreign art collections involving a flash unit having spare
    lamps and camera synchronizing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 13+ for lamp substitution or selection in
    photographic lighting devices.


CLS 396/193
TXT Having unison film advancing and lamp switching:

    Subject matter under subclass 192 including means for coordinating an
    advance of a photographic medium (film) with the automatic substitution of
    the extra flash bulbs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    387+,   for camera structure with film drive.

    FOR 790, for a foreign art collection involving a flash unit having spare
    lamps and camera synchronizing including unison film advance and lamp
    switching.


CLS 396/194
TXT Curtain shutter:

    Subject matter under subclass 180 wherein the camera structure includes a
    shutter which is formed by a flexible sheet or curtain.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    479+,   for curtain-type shutter, per se.

    FOR 792, for a foreign art collection involving object illumination and
    camera synchronizing including a curtain shutter.


CLS 396/195
TXT Actuated by shutter movement:

    Subject matter under subclass 180 wherein the camera structure includes a
    shutter and a switch responsive to the shutter movement for activating the
    illumination means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 793, for a foreign art collection involving object illumination and
    camera synchronizing where flash unit contacts are actuated by shutter
    movement.


CLS 396/196
TXT Bulb ejector:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 including means to remove a flash bulb
    from its socket.


CLS 396/197
TXT Bulb substitution:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 wherein the illumination means includes
    extra flash bulbs which are automatically exchanged for flash bulbs that
    have already been activated or are defective and which cannot produce light
    (e.g., flashcubes, flipflash, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173,    for multiple flashing from a single unit for a single exposure.

    192,    for bulb substitution of the illumination means in timed
    relationship with an exposure.

    FOR 794, for a foreign art collection involving object illumination with
    camera structure having lamp substitution.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclass 13 for lamp substitution or selection in
    photographic lighting devices.


CLS 396/198
TXT Having adapter unit:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 including an additional housing
    detachably mounted between the illumination means and the camera body to
    connect the illumination means to the camera.


CLS 396/199
TXT Lens mounted illumination unit:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 having a flash device attached onto an
    exposure objective (e.g., lens) of the camera.


CLS 396/200
TXT Reflector detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 wherein the illumination means includes
    structure of an optical element that turns back (i.e., reflects) the
    artificial light from the illumination means to an object.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    838+ for a mirror, per se.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 16 for specific light modifier in
    photographic lighting.


CLS 396/201
TXT Having indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 having means to convey visible
    illumination information to a camera operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for indicator in exposure control system responsive to distance.

    88,     for indicator in camera structure with a variable focal length
    camera objective.

    147,    for indicator with focusing and rangefinding means.

    163,    for indicator in camera structure with artificial illumination
    termination control.

    239,    for indicator in exposure control circuit with manually selective
    exposure mode.

    255,    for indicator in exposure control circuit of shutter speed function.

    281+,   for camera indicator in general.

    515,    for detachable, film-holder unit with integral means to show film
    use which is not visible to operator during normal operation.

    578,    for fluid-treating apparatus testing, calibrating, or indicating.

    FOR 772+, for foreign art collections involving camera structure and object
    illumination having measuring, testing, or indicating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 84+ for light-controlling
    display.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 5 for measuring or indicating in
    photographic lighting devices.


CLS 396/202
TXT Go/no-go indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the indicator informs a camera
    operator that the illumination means is ready to produce light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 773+, for foreign art collections involving camera structure and object
    illumination having flash ready indicator.


CLS 396/203
TXT Indicating power source status:

    Subject matter under subclass 202 wherein the indicator shows a status of a
    capacitor charge level or a battery level of the illumination means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 774, for a foreign art collection involving camera structure and object
    illumination having flash ready indicator showing power source status.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    399,    Electrophotography, subclass 37 for power supply diagnostics in an
    electrophotographic device.


CLS 396/204
TXT Effective distance indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the indicator shows a distance an
    object should be from the camera for proper illumination of the object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 775, for a foreign art collection involving camera structure and object
    illumination having distance indicator.


CLS 396/205
TXT With power supply detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 including a specific structure of an
    electrical power generation, regulation, distribution, or control circuitry
    of the illumination means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301,    for camera power supply in general.

    FOR 718, for a foreign art collection involving camera automatic exposure
    control including artificial illumination which is charge level or power
    supply responsive.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for power supply or regulation, in general.


CLS 396/206
TXT Having DC to DC converter:

    Subject matter under subclass 205 including means to step up or step down
    the direct voltage of the power supply.


CLS 396/207
TXT EXPOSURE DATA FROM FILM CONTAINER:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein exposure data which is
    stored on a photographic medium container is transferred to another camera
    component.

    (1)     Note. Exposure data includes, for example, mode information, film
    speed, latitude, etc.

    (2)     Note. Excluded herein is midroll interrupt means which may utilize
    information on a film container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    390,    for midroll interrupt means which may utilize information stored on
    a film container.


CLS 396/208
TXT Electrical component on or in film container:

    Subject matter under subclass 207 wherein the film container comprises an
    electrical circuit element.


CLS 396/209
TXT Controlling optical filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 207 wherein the exposure data is used to
    regulate an optical path filter.

    (1)     Note. Intensity attenuation by such a filter may occur over a
    particular range of optical frequencies or be uniform over all frequencies.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    885+ for absorption filters, per se.


CLS 396/210
TXT EXPOSURE DATA FROM FILM ITSELF:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein exposure data stored
    directly on a photographic medium is transferred to another camera
    component.

    (1)     Note. Exposure data includes mode information as well as such
    information as film speed or latitude.

    (2)     Note. Excluded herein is midroll interrupt means which may utilize
    information placed on film.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    390,    for mid roll interrupt means which may utilize information stored
    on a photographic film.


CLS 396/211
TXT EXPOSURE DATA FROM DETACHABLE MEMORY CARD:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein exposure data stored in a
    semiconductive memory device which is itself removable from a camera is
    transferred to another camera component.

    (1)     Note. This does not include, for example, a removable lens or
    electronic flash unit containing a fixed (i.e., nonremovable) semiconductor
    memory device.

    (2)     Note. Exposure data includes mode information as well as such
    information as film speed or latitude.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclasses
    for memories, per se.


CLS 396/212
TXT BULB OR TIME EXPOSURE MODE:

    Subject matter under the class definition having means to keep the shutter
    open as long as the shutter release button is depressed or to open the
    exposure path upon the first depression of the shutter release button and
    to close the exposure path upon the second depression.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263+,   for a camera release control circuit.

    502+,   for a shutter release mechanism.


CLS 396/213
TXT EXPOSURE CONTROL CIRCUIT:

    Subject matter under the class definition having electric circuit means to
    control a shutter, a diaphragm, or another optical element; e.g., a light
    filter for regulating the amount of light reaching a photographic medium or
    film.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for control circuit for sequencing at least three functions which
    may include exposure control.

    63+,    for exposure control system responsive to focal length.

    65+,    for exposure control system responsive to distance.

    100,    for photocell used for another purpose besides focusing or
    rangefinding.

    161,    for camera structure with artificial illumination termination
    control including exposure control circuit.

    166+,   for exposure control circuit with illumination mode.

    171,    for photocell that responds to a burst of light for starting a
    flash operation or for camera release.

    180+,   for camera structure with object illumination and exposure
    synchronizer.

    263+,   for a generic release control electrical circuit.

    FOR 710+, for foreign art collections involving camera automatic exposure
    control system or device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclasses 243+ for
    photoelectric devices, per se.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for generic photocell circuits.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Device, subclasses 523+ for
    photosensitive devices and subclasses 103+ for photosensitive devices
    having secondary emitters.

    348,    Television, subclasses 221, 229, and 362+ for exposure control in
    video camera.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 141 and 177 for automatic
    diaphragm or shutter control in motion picture camera.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 213+ for photometers.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 51+ for control of exposure in an
    electrophotographic device.


CLS 396/214
TXT Clamp or stop needle control device:

    Subject matter under subclass 213 in which the shutter or the diaphragm
    responds to a device sensing a deflected position of a galvanometer needle.

    (1)     Note.  A galvanometer is an instrument having a needle attached to
    a coil rotated by electrodynamic force when a current is passed through the
    coil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 738, for a foreign art collection involving camera automatic exposure
    control having clamp or stop needle-type control of a diaphragm shutter.

    FOR 747, for a foreign art collection involving camera automatic exposure
    control having clamp or stop needle-type control of a diaphragm.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclasses 76.11+ for measuring
    electricity using a galvanometer.


CLS 396/215
TXT To control exposure time:

    Subject matter under subclass 214 in which the clamp or stop needle control
    device regulates exposure time of the shutter.


CLS 396/216
TXT Override or manual control:

    Subject matter under subclass 214 having camera operator manipulated means
    to regulate the amount of light reaching the photographic medium to
    supersede an automatic exposure control or independent of automatic
    exposure control.

    (1)     Note.  Automatic exposure control is the adjustment of the shutter
    or the diaphragm in accordance with the brightness of the scene as detected
    by a photoelement without camera operator intervention.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    297+,   for operator-controlled data entry into camera.


CLS 396/217
TXT Direct drive galvanometer control device:

    Subject matter under subclass 213 including a galvanometer having its
    rotation directly transmitted  to control the shutter or the diaphragm.

    (1)     Note.  A galvanometer is an instrument having a needle attached to
    a coil rotated by electrodynamic force when a current is passed through the
    coil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 749+, for foreign art collections involving camera automatic exposure
    control having direct drive galvanometer control of a diaphragm.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclasses 76.11+ for measuring
    electricity using a galvanometer.


CLS 396/218
TXT Override or manual control:

    Subject matter under subclass 217 having camera operator manipulated means
    to regulate the amount of light reaching the photographic medium to
    supersede automatic exposure control or independent of automatic exposure
    control.

    (1)     Note. Automatic exposure control is the adjustment of the shutter
    or the diaphragm in accordance with the brightness of the scene as detected
    by a photoelement without camera operator intervention.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    297+,   for operator-controlled data entry into camera.


CLS 396/219
TXT Circuit detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 217 in which the electric circuit means
    contains another component (e.g., a switch, transistor, etc.) in addition
    to a photocell or a battery.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 750, for a foreign art collection involving camera automatic exposure
    control having direct drive galvanometer control of a diaphragm which uses
    a bridge circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for generic photocell circuits.


CLS 396/220
TXT Plural blades:

    Subject matter under subclass 217 wherein the shutter or the diaphragm
    comprises more than one blade.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    497,    for shutter with plural oscillating blades.

    510,    for diaphragm with plural pivoted blades.


CLS 396/221
TXT Responsive to power source condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 213 having a means to avoid changes in the
    operation of the exposure control means due to fluctuations in current or
    voltage of a power source (e.g., voltage/current regulator).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277+,   for camera operation responsive to battery condition in general.


CLS 396/222
TXT Bracketing:

    Subject matter under subclass 213 having means to take a plurality of
    exposures at incremented exposure times or aperture values to obtain an
    intentional under, over, or proper exposure.


CLS 396/223
TXT Override control:

    Subject matter under subclass 213 having means to regulate the amount of
    light reaching the photographic medium to supersede automatic exposure
    control.


CLS 396/224
TXT Photometer lock:

    Subject matter under subclass 213 having means to allow a camera operator
    to store a value indicative of a scene brightness which will be used by the
    exposure control circuit during a future exposure (i.e., AE lock).


CLS 396/225
TXT Color temperature compensation or detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 213 having means to correct or sense a
    spectral distribution of light reaching the photographic medium.

    (1)     Note. Spectral distribution is the function that represents
    intensity of each frequency of light in a visible spectrum.


CLS 396/226
TXT Film latitude responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 213 wherein the exposure control circuit
    operates in accordance with a range of gray scale values or tonal values
    that can be recorded on the photographic medium; i.e., film latitude.


CLS 396/227
TXT Maximum or minimum f-number responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 213 wherein the exposure control circuit
    takes into account the smallest and largest aperture size of an exposure
    objective.

    (1)     Note. F-number represents light passing ability of a lens and is
    equal to the ratio of the lens focal length divided by the aperture size
    value.


CLS 396/228
TXT Having log transformation circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 213 in which the exposure control circuit
    includes means to convert a voltage or current to a voltage or current
    having a logarithmic function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 725+, for foreign art collections involving camera automatic exposure
    control having a logarithmic transformation.


CLS 396/229
TXT Digital:

    Subject matter under subclass 228 in which a counter, a register, or CPU is
    used in the transformation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 726, for a foreign art collection involving camera automatic exposure
    control having a digital logarithmic transformation.


CLS 396/230
TXT Antilog:

    Subject matter under subclass 228 in which the logarithmic voltage or
    current is transformed to its original value.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 727, for a foreign art collection involving camera automatic exposure
    control with log expansion.


CLS 396/231
TXT Having temperature compensation circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 213 having a means to correct for changes in
    the operation of the exposure control means due to changes in ambient
    temperature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 728, for a foreign art collection involving camera automatic exposure
    control with temperature compensation.


CLS 396/232
TXT Viewfinder light compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 213 having a means to correct for changes in
    the operation of the exposure control means due to light entering a camera
    viewfinder eyepiece.


CLS 396/233
TXT Having plural photocells:

    Subject matter under subclass 213 having more than one light responsive
    device in the exposure control means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 729+, for foreign art collections involving camera automatic exposure
    control having plural photocells.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for generic photocell circuits.


CLS 396/234
TXT More than two photometering areas:

    Subject matter under subclass 233 in which the light responsive device has
    more than two discrete light responsive areas.

    (1)     Note.  A single photocell array or self- scanning photocell is
    considered to have more than two discrete light responsive areas unless it
    is explicitly stated to have only two.


CLS 396/235
TXT Velocity control of shutter or diaphragm component:

    Subject matter under subclass 213 wherein the exposure control circuit
    controls the rate of motion of a shutter or diaphragm element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246,    for exposure time circuit control of the shutter.

    257,    for aperture size circuit control of the diaphragm.


CLS 396/236
TXT Look-up table memory:

    Subject matter under subclass 213 wherein the exposure control circuit has
    an addressable semiconductor memory for storing exposure related values.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclasses
    for memories, per se.


CLS 396/237
TXT Manually set limit of exposure time or aperture value:

    Subject matter under subclass 213 wherein the exposure control circuit
    responds to a manually set range restricting an exposure time or aperture
    value.


CLS 396/238
TXT Manually selective exposure mode:

    Subject matter under subclass 213 in which a plurality of exposure modes
    can be selected by a camera operator.

    (1)     Note. Exposure modes include, for example, manual mode, aperture
    priority, shutter priority, or program mode.


CLS 396/239
TXT Having indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 238 having means to convey photographic
    related information to the camera operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for indicator in exposure control system responsive to distance.

    88,     for indicator in camera structure with a  variable focal length
    camera objective.

    147,    for indicator with focusing and rangefinding means.

    163,    for indicator in camera structure with artificial illumination
    termination control.

    201,    for indicator with object illumination for exposure.

    255,    for indicator in exposure control circuit of shutter speed function.

    281+,   for camera indicator in general.

    515,    for detachable film holder unit with integral means to show film
    use which is not visible to operator during normal operation.

    578,    for fluid treating apparatus testing, calibrating, or indicating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 84+ for light-controlling
    display.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 170+ for indicating means
    visible in viewfinder of motion picture camera.


CLS 396/240
TXT Pulse train type:

    Subject matter under subclass 213 wherein the exposure control means
    includes means producing a series of pulses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 291+ for pulse waveform generators, per se.


CLS 396/241
TXT With exposure filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 213 includes an optical device which
    eliminates unwanted components of the light reaching the photographic
    medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209,    for exposure data derived from film container which controls an
    optical filter.

    275,    for filter in front of photocell to block undesired wavelengths of
    light.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 212+ for shutters with
    light-modifying blades including means to alter the color content of light.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    586-590 for light interference using device with layers of specified
    refracting index, and subclasses 885+ for generic color filters.


CLS 396/242
TXT Program mode:

    Subject matter under subclass 213 wherein the exposure control circuit
    adjusts both exposure time and aperture value in accordance with a detected
    brightness of the scene.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168,    for program mode circuits combined with object illumination.

    FOR 742, for a foreign art collection involving camera automatic exposure
    control having selectable priority.

    FOR 743, for a foreign art collection involving  camera automatic exposure
    control having programmed control only.


CLS 396/243
TXT Program selection:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 wherein a camera operator can choose one
    of a plurality of algorithms for adjusting both exposure time and aperture
    value.


CLS 396/244
TXT Stepping motor type:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 in which the exposure control circuit
    drives a stepping motor for controlling the amount of light reaching the
    film.

    (1)     Note.  A stepping motor is an electromechanical device which
    rotates by a fixed amount each time it is pulsed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256,    for shutter speed function controlled by stepping motor.

    260,    for diaphragm function controlled by stepping motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 49 for structure
    of stepping motor.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 685 for stepping
    motors in a closed-loop servo environment, in general.


CLS 396/245
TXT Manual Av circuit with automatic Tv circuit, or vice versa:

    Subject matter under subclass 213 including a manual aperture control
    circuit (Av circuit) responsive to a manually set aperture value with an
    automatic exposure time control circuit (Tv circuit) generating an exposure
    time calculated from the manually set aperture value and a detected scene
    brightness; or a manual Tv circuit responsive to a manually set exposure
    time value with an automatic Av circuit generating an aperture value
    calculated from the manually set exposure time value and a detected scene
    brightness.

    (1)     Note.  Aperture value (Av) or exposure time value (Tv) is a
    logarithmic number indicative of the aperture size or the exposure time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 741+, for foreign art collections involving camera automatic exposure
    control having circuit for controlling separate diaphragm and shutter.


CLS 396/246
TXT Shutter speed function only:

    Subject matter under subclass 213 wherein the exposure control circuit
    determines an exposure time to control a shutter mechanism only.

    (1)     Note.  Manual control circuit for both Av and Tv is classified in
    subclass 213.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169,    for shutter speed function control in exposure control circuit with
    illumination mode.

     452+,  for a camera shutter, per se.


CLS 396/247
TXT Shutter lag correction:

    Subject matter under subclass 246 wherein the exposure control circuit sets
    an exposure time that compensates for a built-in delay of the shutter
    mechanism.


CLS 396/248
TXT Piezoelectric driven:

    Subject matter under subclass 246 wherein the exposure control circuit
    drives the shutter mechanism using a piezoelectric device.

    (1)     Note.  A piezoelectric device produces a voltage when stressed or
    undergoes mechanical stress when subjected to a voltage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261,    for piezoelectric device driving a diaphragm mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 311+ for a
    piezoelectric device, per se.


CLS 396/249
TXT Electro-optical element:

    Subject matter under subclass 246 wherein the shutter is an electro-optical
    device (e.g., Kerr cell, liquid crystal device, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    457,    for an electro-optical camera shutter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    237+ for an electro-optical modulator per se.


CLS 396/250
TXT With digital counter:

    Subject matter under subclass 246 in which the exposure control circuit
    contains a digital counter or register.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, appropriate subclasses for an electrical counter, per
    se.


CLS 396/251
TXT Having RC circuit for timing:

    Subject matter under subclass 246 in which the exposure control circuit
    contains at least one RC (resistor and capacitor) circuit, the time
    constant of which is used for exposure time control.


CLS 396/252
TXT Including memory capacitor:

    Subject matter under subclass 251 in which the RC circuit contains at least
    one capacitor to store a voltage proportional to a scene brightness for a
    period of time during which the exposure control circuit cannot sense the
    scene brightness.

    (1)     Note.  A single capacitor which performs both memory and timing is
    proper for this subclass.


CLS 396/253
TXT Including plural selective capacitors:

    Subject matter under subclass 251 having multiple capacitors from which to
    choose.


CLS 396/254
TXT Including plural selective resistors:

    Subject matter under subclass 251 having multiple resistors from which to
    choose.


CLS 396/255
TXT Having indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 251 having means to convey photographic
    related information to the camera operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for indicator in exposure control system responsive to distance.

    88,     for indicator in camera structure with a variable focal length
    camera objective.

    147,    for indicator with focusing and rangefinding means.

    163,    for indicator in camera structure with artificial illumination
    termination control.

    201,    for indicator with object illumination for exposure.

    239,    for indicator in exposure control circuit with manually selective
    exposure mode.

    281+,   for camera indicator, in general.

    515,    for detachable film holder unit with integral means to show film
    use which is not visible to operator during normal operation.

    578,    for fluid treating apparatus testing, calibrating, or indicating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 84+ for light-controlling
    display.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 170+ for indicating means
    visible in viewfinder of motion picture camera.


CLS 396/256
TXT Stepping motor:

    Subject matter under subclass 246 in which the exposure control circuit
    drives a stepping motor for driving the shutter mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  A stepping motor is an electromechanical device which
    rotates by a fixed amount each time it is pulsed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244,    for stepping motor under program mode of an exposure control
    circuit.

    260,    for stepping motor driving a diaphragm mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 49 for structure
    of stepping motor.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 685 for stepping
    motors in a closed-loop servo environment.


CLS 396/257
TXT Diaphragm function only:

    Subject matter under subclass 213 wherein the exposure control circuit
    determines an aperture value to control a diaphragm mechanism only.

    (1)     Note.  Manual control circuit for both Av and Tv is classified in
    subclass 213.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170,    for diaphragm function control in exposure control circuit with
    illumination mode.

    505+,   for a camera diaphragm, per se.

    FOR 746+, for foreign art collections involving camera automatic exposure
    control having circuit for controlling diaphragm only.


CLS 396/258
TXT Pawl/ratchet type:

    Subject matter under subclass 257 in which the diaphragm is adjusted to
    obtain a specific aperture size by an engagement of a mechanical device
    allowing rotation in only one direction (i.e., a pawl) with a toothed wheel
    (i.e., a ratchet).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 748, for a foreign art collection involving camera automatic exposure
    control having a ratchet/pawl mechanism for controlling diaphragm only.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Elements and Mechanisms, subclasses 575+ for generic pawls
    and ratchets.


CLS 396/259
TXT Servo motor type:

    Subject matter under subclass 257 wherein the diaphragm mechanism is
    controlled by an electric motor, the rotation or speed of which is
    controlled by a corrective electrical signal that is fed back to the motor
    circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 751+, for foreign art collections involving camera automatic exposure
    control having servo motor type circuit for controlling diaphragm only.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 560+ for motors in a
    positional servo system.


CLS 396/260
TXT Using stepping motor:

    Subject matter under subclass 259 in which the exposure control circuit
    drives a stepping motor for driving the diaphragm to obtain a specific
    aperture size.

    (1)     Note.  A stepping motor is an electromechanical device which
    rotates by a fixed amount each time it is pulsed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244,    for stepping motor under program mode of an exposure control
    circuit.

    256,    for stepping motor driving a shutter mechanism.

    FOR 752, for a foreign art collection involving camera automatic exposure
    control having servo motor-type circuit which uses a stepping motor for
    controlling diaphragm only.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 49 for structure
    of stepping motor.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 685 for stepping
    motors in a closed-loop servo environment, in general.


CLS 396/261
TXT Piezoelectric driven:

    Subject matter under subclass 257 wherein the exposure control means drives
    the diaphragm mechanism using a piezoelectric device.

    (1)     Note.  A piezoelectric device produces a voltage when stressed, or
    undergoes mechanical stress when subjected to a voltage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248,    for shutter driven by piezoelectric device.

    FOR 753, for a foreign art collection involving camera automatic exposure
    control having special driving arrangement for controlling diaphragm only.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 311+ for a
    piezoelectric device, per se.


CLS 396/262
TXT Electro-optical element:

    Subject matter under subclass 257 wherein the diaphragm is an
    electro-optical device (e.g., Kerr cell, liquid crystal device, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    506,    for an electro-optical camera diaphragm.

    FOR 753, for a foreign art collection involving camera automatic exposure
    control having special driving arrangement for controlling diaphragm only.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    237+ for an electro-optical modulator, per se.


CLS 396/263
TXT CAMERA RELEASE CONTROL CIRCUIT:

    Subject matter under the class definition having an electrical circuit
    which controls a signal starting a photographic exposure cycle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59,     for a wireless remote control camera release circuit.

    502+,   for a mechanical shutter release or actuator means.


CLS 396/264
TXT Self-timer:

    Subject matter under subclass 263 including a circuit which delays for a
    time the signal which starts a  single photographic exposure cycle.

    (1)     Note. An operator initiates the self-timer and then may enter the
    picture before a shutter is actuated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59,     for a wireless remote control camera release circuit.

    286,    for a self-timer indicator.

    472,    for a mechanically delayed release means (e.g., self-timer).

    FOR 878, for a foreign art collection involving an electrical circuit
    providing delayed shutter release.


CLS 396/265
TXT Intervalometer (e.g., rapid sequence):

    Subject matter under subclass 263 wherein a signal starting an exposure
    cycle is produced at a particular time period after the end of a previous
    exposure cycle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    387+,   for camera structure with film drive, in general.


CLS 396/266
TXT Safety lock:

    Subject matter under subclass 263 having means to inhibit the camera
    release signal to prevent accidental initiation of an exposure cycle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    503,    for a mechanical shutter safety lock.


CLS 396/267
TXT WITH LIGHT PIPE OR GUIDE:

    Subject matter under the class definition including an optical waveguide
    (e.g., a fiber optic cable) which conveys light between points.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    385,    Optical Waveguides, appropriate subclasses for an optical
    waveguide, per se.


CLS 396/268
TXT HAVING PHOTOCELL AT SPECIFIC POSITION WITHIN CAMERA:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which a photocell is located
    with respect to a specific camera structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for camera shake sensing using photoarray.

    92,     for lens characteristic compensating by selecting effective
    photoelements.

    96,     for focusing or rangefinding with accumulation photoarray and time
    control.

    100,    for dual purpose focusing photoelement.

    111+,   for focusing or rangefinding devices with optical details of a
    photoelement system.

    162,    for photocell in the termination control of an illumination means.

    171,    for photocell used as a flash trigger.

    172,    for photocell measuring the light output of an artificial
    illumination means.

    570,    for fluid-treating apparatus with photocell control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for generic photocell circuits.


CLS 396/269
TXT Photocell responsive to adjacent illuminator

    Subject matter under subclass 268 wherein the photocell is radiated by a
    light emitter in close proximity to the photocell.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172,    for photocell measuring light output of an object exposure
    illumination means.


CLS 396/270
TXT Movable into or out of light path:

    Subject matter under subclass 268 including a mechanism to displace the
    photocell into or out of the light entering the camera.


CLS 396/271
TXT In viewfinder area:

    Subject matter under subclass 268 in which the  photocell is mounted in or
    in the vicinity of a viewfinder.


CLS 396/272
TXT Having two or more mirrors:

    Subject matter under subclass 268 in which the camera has at least two
    mirrors and the photocell receives light reflected by at least one of the
    mirrors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    850+ for generic plural mirror systems.


CLS 396/273
TXT Having light reflected from film or shutter or through film:

    Subject matter under subclass 268 in which the photocell receives light
    reflected from a surface of the film in the camera or from a surface of the
    camera shutter or through the film.


CLS 396/274
TXT Having means for changing the photocell field of view:

    Subject matter under subclass 268 including means to change a cross-section
    area through which the photocell receives light from a scene to be
    photographed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclass 369 for changing viewing angle via optics in
    video camera.


CLS 396/275
TXT With color filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 268 includes a filter in front of the
    photocell to block undesired wavelengths of light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209,    for exposure data derived from film container which controls an
    optical filter.

    241,    for exposure filter in exposure control circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 212+ for shutters with
    light-modifying blades including means to alter the color content of light.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    586-590 for light interference using device with layers of specified
    refracting index and subclasses 885+ for generic color filters.


CLS 396/276
TXT Having variable light transmission means:

    Subject matter under subclass 268 wherein the camera structure has means to
    adjust a light flux received at the photocell from an object to be
    photographed.

    (1)     Note. Predetector adjustable apertures or neutral density filters
    are properly classified here.

    (2)     Note.  This does not include the camera diaphragm.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    888 for a neutral density absorption filter.


CLS 396/277
TXT BATTERY INSERTION/REMOVAL/ DEPLETION RESPONSIVE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a camera element is
    responsive to loading, unloading, or low voltage condition of a battery.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221,    for exposure control circuit responsive to power source condition.

    301+,   for camera structure with power supply details.


CLS 396/278
TXT Having battery backup:

    Subject matter under subclass 277 having a device for maintaining power
    upon removal or depletion of primary battery.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280,    for a power switch responsive camera system.


CLS 396/279
TXT Having indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 277 having means to convey information
    regarding battery insertion, removal, or depletion to a camera operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281+,   for camera structure with indicator, in general.


CLS 396/280
TXT INITIALIZING/STORING RESPONSIVE TO POWER SWITCH:

    Subject matter under the class definition having means to set a camera
    element or information to a preset condition upon turning a power switch on
    or off.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277+,   for camera responsive to battery insertion, removal, or depletion.

    301+,   for camera structure with power supply details.


CLS 396/281
TXT HAVING CAMERA INDICATOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition having means to convey
    photographic information to a camera operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for indicator in exposure control system responsive to distance.

    88,     for indicator in camera structure with a variable focal length
    camera objective.

    147,    for indicator with focusing and rangefinding    means.

    163,    for indicator in camera structure with artificial illumination
    termination control.

    201,    for indicator with object illumination for exposure.

    239,    for indicator in exposure control circuit with manually selective
    exposure mode.

    255,    for indicator in exposure control circuit of shutter speed function.

    515,    for detachable film holder unit with integral means to show film
    use which is not visible to operator during normal operation.

    578,    for fluid treating apparatus testing, calibrating, or indicating.

    FOR 709, for a foreign art collection involving automatic camera focusing
    including focus indicator.

    FOR 763, for a foreign art collection involving an aerial camera and
    indicator.

    FOR 772+, for foreign art collections involving object illumination and
    indicator.

    FOR 819, for a foreign art collection involving motor film drive and spring
    tension indicator.

    FOR 838, for a foreign art collection involving manual camera focusing and
    distance indicator.

    FOR 855, for a foreign art collection involving film advancing and film
    position indicating.

    FOR 910+, for foreign art collections involving camera detail indicator or
    setting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 84+ for light-controlling
    display.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 170+ for indicating means
    visible in viewfinder of motion picture camera.


CLS 396/282
TXT Display intensity control:

    Subject matter under subclass 281 having means to adjust a brightness of
    the indicator to render it easily observed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 147+ for intensity control for
    a visual display system.


CLS 396/283
TXT Sound:

    Subject matter under subclass 281 in which the indicator produces a sound
    or vibration perceptible to the camera operator.


CLS 396/284
TXT Film condition indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 281 in which the indicator shows a status of
    the film resulting from a camera operation (e.g., end-of-film, film frame
    count, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    515,    for a film cassette or cartridge with integral means to show film
    use which is not visible to an operator during normal operation.

    FOR 855, for a foreign art collection involving film advancing means
    including film position indicator.


CLS 396/285
TXT Double exposure warning:

    Subject matter under subclass 284 wherein the indicator shows that a film
    section has been exposed and the film must be fed to bring another section
    into position before another exposure can be made.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    389,    for film drive with double exposure prevention.


CLS 396/286
TXT Self-timer indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 281 in which the indicator conveys
    information concerning delayed release of a shutter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264,    for camera release control circuit with self-timer.


CLS 396/287
TXT Nonmechanical visual display:

    Subject matter under subclass 281 in which the indicator produces an
    optically perceivable indication without using moving parts (e.g., lamps,
    LED's, etc.).

    (1)     Note. Excluded herein are mere comparison type indicators which
    produce light adjusted by an operator until the light intensity matches
    scene brightness.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    295,    for comparison-type camera indicator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 84+ for light-controlling
    display.


CLS 396/288
TXT Having holographic display:

    Subject matter under subclass 287 in which the indicator exhibits a
    three-dimensional pattern (i.e., in holographic form).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    1+ for generic holographic system or element.


CLS 396/289
TXT Ambient light condition display using one of three light emitters:

    Subject matter under subclass 287 in which brightness of a scene is shown
    as above, below, or correct for photographic operation by using one of
    three indicator lamps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 150 and 151 for selective
    color attributes with optical means in visual display systems.


CLS 396/290
TXT Bar graph/scale display:

    Subject matter under subclass 287 in which the indicator is shown in the
    form of a bar whose length varies essentially in a continuous manner or by
    lighting one of a plurality of emitters adjacent to a printed legend.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 35+ and 140 for bar graph
    display.


CLS 396/291
TXT Pictograph display:

    Subject matter under subclass 287 in which the indicator shows an image
    symbol.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclass 117 for display of specified
    image of abnormal condition.


CLS 396/292
TXT Character segment display:

    Subject matter under subclass 287 in which the indicator includes a
    plurality of segments arranged to produce optically viewable letters or
    numbers when selected segments are activated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    318,    for camera structure with data recording including segmented
    alphanumeric indicia.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 34 and 141+ for character
    display.


CLS 396/293
TXT Galvanometer type:

    Subject matter under subclass 281 in which the indicator includes a needle
    of a galvanometer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclasses 76.11+ for measuring
    electricity using a galvanometer.


CLS 396/294
TXT Having plural pointers or match needle:

    Subject matter under subclass 293 which includes a second needle manually
    displaced to a predetermined position with respect to the needle of the
    galvanometer in order to adjust a camera mechanism.


CLS 396/295
TXT Comparison type:

    Subject matter under subclass 281 in which the indicator produces light
    that is adjusted by a camera operator until the intensity of the light
    matches a scene brightness.


CLS 396/296
TXT Having display in viewfinder:

    Subject matter under subclass 281 wherein the indicator is disposed within
    the field of view of the viewfinder of the camera.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    373+,   for camera structure with viewfinder, in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 333+ for video camera with viewfinder or
    display monitor.

    352,    Optics: Motion Pictures, subclasses 170+ for indicating means
    visible in viewfinder of motion picture camera.


CLS 396/297
TXT HAVING OPERATOR CONTROLLED DATA ENTRY INTO CAMERA:

    Subject matter under the class definition having means to input desired
    photographic operating parameters or modes into a camera system by an
    operator.

    (1)     Note.  Also included here are patents reciting specific locations
    of camera manual manipulators.

    (2)     Note.  Excluded herein are mechanisms which merely manually
    override double exposure prevention in a camera film drive.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for wireless remote camera system data/mode entry.

    68,     for manual manipulator in exposure control system responsive to
    distance.

    131,    for manual manipulator actuating power focus.

    216,    for manual manipulator in exposure control circuit with clamp or
    stop needle device.

    218,    for manual manipulator in exposure control circuit with direct
    drive galvanometer device.

    391,    for a film drive double exposure prevention mechanism having manual
    override.

    543,    for photographic switch details.


CLS 396/298
TXT Manual manipulators on lens unit or lens mount:

    Subject matter under subclass 297 wherein manual manipulators for entering
    data into the camera system are on the exposure objective or lens mount.


CLS 396/299
TXT Manual manipulators on camera body unit:

    Subject matter under subclass 297 wherein manual manipulators for entering
    data into the camera system are on the camera housing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    535+,   for a camera housing detail.


CLS 396/300
TXT Manual data entry using peripheral device:

    Subject matter under subclass 297 wherein data is entered into the camera
    system using an external device (e.g., bar code readers, external general
    purpose computers, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  For data entry using detachable memory cards, see subclass
    211.


CLS 396/301
TXT WITH POWER SUPPLY DETAIL:

    Subject matter under the class definition including specifics of electrical
    power generation, regulation, or control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for generic power supply or regulation.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 88+ for controlling power supply in
    an electrophotographic device.


CLS 396/302
TXT Having time-out circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 301 having a circuit which disables camera
    power after a predetermined time period.


CLS 396/303
TXT Power distribution management:

    Subject matter under subclass 301 wherein power is selectively supplied to
    various camera elements for power management.


CLS 396/304
TXT Having nonelectrochemical power source:

    Subject matter under subclass 301 wherein power is generated by means other
    than an electrochemical battery.

    (1)     Note. This might include, for example, piezoelectric or solar cell
    sources.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, appropriate
    subclasses for a thermoelectric or solar cell power source, per se.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 311+ for a
    piezoelectric generator.


CLS 396/305
TXT COLOR IMAGE USING MONOCHROME FILM:

    Subject matter under class definition having means for recording an image
    set on a light sensitive surface of a monochromatic base, the individual
    pictures or images representing an intensity image of the scene
    photographed corresponding to a particular color which is different from
    the color of the other images of the set.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322+,   for means to record plural images, in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 66+ for motion picture cameras
    using monochromatic film for recording color images.

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, subclasses 31+ for composite color image
    projectors.

    355,    Photocopying, subclasses 32+ for multicolor photocopying projecting
    and copying cameras; subclass 88, for multicolor contact printing.

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    502 for polarization elements with color filters, subclasses 618+ for light
    dividing, combining or plural image forming and subclasses 885+ for
    absorption filters, per se.

    399,    Electrophotography, appropriate subclasses for plural diverse color
    involving exposure, development, transfer, fixing, and cleaning in an
    electrophotographic device.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, appropriate subclasses for chemical radiation imagery involving
    color.


CLS 396/306
TXT Using a lenticular element:

    Subject matter under subclass 305 including means involving the
    interposition of a planar surface composed of a plurality of transmitting
    elements, each having a curved surface, between a subject and the
    light-sensitive surface.

    (1)     Note.  Lenticular elements may be applied directly or in
    conjunction with a photosensitive film. Apparatus designed for use with
    such a composite film that necessitates the inclusion of additional color
    selective elements (e.g., filters, etc.) is classified herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322+    and particularly 327, for means to record plural images that
    include lenticular elements and not limited by color selective means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, appropriate subclasses for projectors
    involving lenticular film.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    619+ for a surface composed of lenticular elements, per se.


CLS 396/307
TXT Plural color filter sections:

    Subject matter under subclass 306 including a color selective element
    composed of plural portions that are selective to different colors, e.g.,
    trichromic filter disk composed of red, green, and blue selective
    juxtaposed sections or portions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    885+ for absorption filters, per se.


CLS 396/308
TXT Simultaneous recording of images:

    Subject matter under subclass 305 wherein the individual pictures are
    recorded on separate light sensitive surfaces at the same time.

    (1)     Note. Recording the individual pictures or images on contiguous
    portions of the same film by separate light paths is proper for this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305,    where the images are recorded successively.

    306,    for producing a color image using monochrome film utilizing an
    element comprising a planar surface having multiple lenses thereon.

    322+,   for plural simultaneous image recording, in general.


CLS 396/309
TXT Images recorded on separate films:

    Subject matter under subclass 308 wherein the separate light sensitive
    surfaces are on different light sensitive material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    446,    for plural film in a camera.


CLS 396/310
TXT WITH DATA RECORDING:

    Subject matter under the class definition including camera structure and
    means for storing photographic information either on the photographic
    medium or on a separate storage element.

    (1)     Note. Photographic information includes exposure information as
    well as other information related to a photograph such as date, place, or
    operator name.

    (2)     Note. The data recorded is auxiliary to the image being recorded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322+,   for plural image recording.

    549+,   for phototype composing having letter or other symbol transfer to a
    photographic medium.

    FOR 766+, for foreign art collections involving exposure identification.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, appropriate subclasses for data recorders, per se.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 90 for devices to place titles
    on motion pictures.

    355,    Photocopying, subclasses 39 and 40+ for means to mark
    photosensitive surfaces which are also used to copy an original or carrier
    (document or negative) and does not involve a three dimensional subject.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 162+ for exposure
    identification of X-ray photographs.


CLS 396/311
TXT Data for control of subsequent processing of film:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein the data recorded by the camera
    provides input for processing apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for a camera with pseudo zoom data recording.


CLS 396/312
TXT Sound:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein audio information is recorded.


CLS 396/313
TXT Having handwritten data:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein photographic data is placed on
    the photographic medium by a handheld instrument.


CLS 396/314
TXT Having transfer strip:

    Subject matter under subclass 313 wherein data is transferred to the
    photographic medium from a carrier by pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 768+, for foreign art collections involving exposure identification by
    transfer strip.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    462,    Books, Strips and Leaves for Manifolding, subclasses 25+ for
    transfer strips, per se.


CLS 396/315
TXT Optical:

    Subject matter under 310 wherein data is recorded using light.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, subclasses 107.1+ for photographic data recorders, per
    se.


CLS 396/316
TXT Mask or stencil:

    Subject matter under subclass 315 including means for blocking light from
    the film to form indicia.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    435+,   for means to variably mask portions of a frame, in general.

    556+,   for phototype composing using stencil-type characters.

    FOR 768+, for foreign art collections involving exposure identification by
    stencil.


CLS 396/317
TXT Having auxiliary illumination:

    Subject matter under subclass 316 wherein a camera itself generates light
    for illuminating the mask or stencil.


CLS 396/318
TXT Segmented alphanumeric indicia:

    Subject matter under subclass 315 wherein discrete optical elements are
    patterned in such a way that indicia representing letters or numbers are
    formed.


CLS 396/319
TXT Magnetically on film or film cassette:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein data is recorded onto a magnetic
    medium which is a part of the film or film cassette.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate
    subclasses for dynamic magnetic information storage or retrieval means.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclasses
    for statically storing or retrieving information on a magnetic medium in
    general.


CLS 396/320
TXT Recording head position control:

    Subject matter under subclass 319 which includes means to locate a
    recording head relative to the magnetic medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 75+
    for automatic head control in dynamic magnetic information storage or
    retrieval, in general.


CLS 396/321
TXT Removable semiconductor memory:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein data is recorded into an
    integrated circuit memory temporarily attached to a camera body or film
    cassette.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211,    for a detachable memory card which provides exposure data to a
    camera system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclasses
    for statically storing or retrieving information utilizing semiconductive
    elements in general.


CLS 396/322
TXT PLURAL IMAGE RECORDING:

    Subject matter under the class definition having means to photographically
    record (1) plural images on one or more frames by a single exposure or (2)
    plural exposures on a single frame.

    (1)     Note.  As indicated in the search notes below, this section does
    not provide for a plurality of single plate or frame exposures taken
    successively with a corresponding movement of unexposed plate or film
    frames into exposing position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305+,   for means for forming plural color sensitive images utilizing
    monochrome film.

    353     and 354+, for reflex cameras which may allow successive recording
    of plural images.

    360+,   for a magazine camera which may allow recording plural images
    successively.


CLS 396/323
TXT Having alternative single image recording:

    Subject matter under subclass 322 including means to select plural image
    recording or single image recording during a single exposure.

    (1)     Note.  A stereoscopic camera including means to allow making
    nonstereoscopic exposures such as single frame exposures are proper for
    this subclass.


CLS 396/324
TXT Stereoscopic:

    Subject matter under subclass 322 wherein the plural images recorded
    correspond to the perspectives offered by a right and left eye.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 57+ for stereoscopic motion
    picture cameras.

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, subclasses 7+ for stereoscopic image
    projectors.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    462+ for miscellaneous stereoscopic devices.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 41+ for method
    and apparatus for making stereoscopic X-ray photographic exposures.


CLS 396/325
TXT Plural camera arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 324 having more than one camera each with its
    own lens and housing system.

    (1)     Note. Included here is a stereoscopic plural camera mount, per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    326+,   for plural spaced lens systems with a common housing, and
    subclasses 322+ for dual cameras which record plural images and are not
    limited to stereoscopic recording.


CLS 396/326
TXT Single camera with plural spaced objectives:

    Subject matter under subclass 324 wherein a single camera has plural spaced
    lenses for recording separate images.


CLS 396/327
TXT With lenticular screen, mirror, or prism:

    Subject matter under subclass 326 including a plane surface composed of a
    plurality of transmitting curved elements, a reflector, or a transparent
    body bounded in part by two plane surfaces angularly related (i.e., not
    parallel) where at least one of the plane surfaces is internally reflecting
    or refracting to impinging incident light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331,    for plural image reflection onto a single objective.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    619+ for a surface composed of lenticular elements, subclasses 831+ for
    prisms, and subclasses 838+ for reflectors.


CLS 396/328
TXT Having film feed or guide:

    Subject matter under subclass 326 including means to move a photographic
    medium or to direct a photographic medium in a desired path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    387+,   for camera structure with film drive, in general.

    440+,   for film-restraining means or a pressure plate.


CLS 396/329
TXT Having adjustable camera mount:

    Subject matter under subclass 324 including means to adjust the positioning
    of a camera to effect the recording of plural images that are to give the
    impression of solidity or relief.

    (1)     Note. An adjustable single camera stereoscopic mount, per se, is
    classified here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    325,    for a stereoscopic plural camera mount, per se.

    FOR 914, for a foreign art collection involving a stereoscopic mounting or
    rest.


CLS 396/330
TXT Having lenticular screen:

    Subject matter under subclass 324 including a planar surface composed of a
    plurality of transmitting elements each having a curved surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    619+ for a surface composed of lenticular elements.


CLS 396/331
TXT Plural image reflection onto single objective:

    Subject matter under subclass 324 including means having two or more
    mirrors or prisms for reflecting their images onto a lens.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    351,    for means to reflect an image to film.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    831+ for prisms, per se, and subclasses 838+ for reflectors, per se.


CLS 396/332
TXT Simultaneous recording of plural distinct subjects:

    Subject matter under subclass 322 which records at the same time two or
    more images of subjects at locations having diverse optical paths to a
    camera focal plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310+,   for image and photographic data recoring.

    FOR 770, for a foreign art collection involving exposure identification
    including auxiliary identification photographing system.


CLS 396/333
TXT Simultaneous recording of single subject:

    Subject matter under subclass 322 having means within an integral housing
    to facilitate simultaneously recording plural images of a single subject.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    308+,   for simultaneous recording of color images using monochrome film.

    324+,   for recording plural stereoscopic images.


CLS 396/334
TXT Different planes:

    Subject matter under subclass 333 wherein the images are recorded in
    diverse planes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    309,    for simultaneous recording of color images using monochrome film
    where the images are recorded on separate films.


CLS 396/335
TXT Sequential recording on different areas of a single frame:

    Subject matter under subclass 322 wherein exposures are made upon
    successive portions of a single frame of a photographic medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20+,    for a scanning camera.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 167+ for
    photographic detector supports including film and plate moving and
    positioning means.


CLS 396/336
TXT Including rotary objective or photographic medium support:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein successive exposures are obtained
    by relative revolving movement of a lens and a light sensitive surface
    holder between exposures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    387+,   for camera structure and film drive, in general.


CLS 396/337
TXT Including preobjective mask:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein an element is disposed or
    attached between the subject and the lens to limit the exposure areas of
    the successive portions of exposed material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    435+,   for post-objective masking, in general.


CLS 396/338
TXT Including shiftable objective or photographic medium support:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein successive sections are brought
    into exposure position by relative shifting movement between a lens and a
    light sensitive surface holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    336,    for relative rotary movement.

    387+,   for camera structure and film drive, in general.


CLS 396/339
TXT Shiftable photographic medium support only:

    Subject matter under subclass 338 wherein only the light sensitive surface
    holder is moved.


CLS 396/340
TXT Including shiftable post-objective mask:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein successive light sensitive
    sections are exposed by shifting an apertured opaque device that is located
    between the objective and the light sensitive surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    435+,   for post-objective masking, in general.


CLS 396/341
TXT BELLOWS OBJECTIVE CAMERA:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a flexible (usually
    pleated) opaque cylinder expandable along the optical axis of an objective
    and which connects the objective with a camera body.

    (1)     Note. The expandable (i.e., bellows) portion of this type of camera
    which joins an objective to a camera body may either be recited or
    disclosed for classification herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145,    for a mechanical focusing mechanism in a bed or bellows camera in
    which an exposure objective is displaced.

    350,    for a foldable or collapsible camera with pivoting lens which may
    have bellows structure joining diverse camera housing portions.

    373+,   for a bellows viewfinder.

    FOR 805, for a foreign art collection involving a bellows reflex camera
    having single objective.

    FOR 848, for a foreign art collection involving double exposure prevention
    having extensible camera structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 121+ for corrugated bellows,
    per se.


CLS 396/342
TXT Camera front or lens mount angularly adjustable:

    Subject matter under subclass 341 wherein a camera front or objective mount
    is pivotable with respect to a photographic medium plane so that the plane
    of the camera front or objective mount is not parallel to the photographic
    medium plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    437,    for a camera back or film carrier angularly adjustable.


CLS 396/343
TXT Having lens movable in its plane:

    Subject matter under subclass 341 including means to move an objective
    within a single plane that is perpendicular to the lens axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    813+ for lens support, per se, which includes relatively movable portions
    to permit movement of the lens in a single plane.


CLS 396/344
TXT Having guide and lock:

    Subject matter under subclass 341 including guides or ways on a camera base
    along which a lens holder moves and clamping means to hold the lens holder
    at various positions along the base.


CLS 396/345
TXT Having hinged base attached to bellows:

    Subject matter under subclass 341 including a hinge joining a base or front
    of the camera with the pleated expandable element.


CLS 396/346
TXT Having self-erecting lens holder:

    Subject matter under subclass 345 wherein a lens holder, connected to the
    bellows, is moved into operating position as the hinged base or front is
    moved from a closed inoperative position to an open operative position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    349,    for a folding camera which stows an axially moving nonbellows
    objective.

    350,    for a folding camera which stows a pivoting nonbellows objective.


CLS 396/347
TXT Hinged linkage between objective mount and housing:

    Subject matter under subclass 341 wherein hinged braces between an
    objective support and a camera housing provide support for the bellows or
    help to maintain the bellows at a particular extension.

    (1)     Note. A typical example of such a structure is the ``lazy tong".


CLS 396/348
TXT FOLDING OR COLLAPSIBLE CAMERA:

    Subject matter under class definition including means to effect a reduction
    in camera size from an operative condition to an inoperative condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    341+,   for a bellows objective camera.

    373+,   for a folding or collapsible viewfinder.

    FOR 805, for a foreign art collection involving a folding reflex camera
    having single objective.

    FOR 848, for a foreign art collection involving double exposure prevention
    having folding camera structure.


CLS 396/349
TXT Having axially moving lens:

    Subject matter under subclass 348 wherein a camera lens moves parallel to
    its optical axis during folding or collapsing.


CLS 396/350
TXT Having pivoting lens:

    Subject matter under subclass 348 wherein a camera lens partially rotates
    about an axis located in the plane of the lens during folding or collapsing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    346,    for a bellows objective camera with self-erecting lens holder.


CLS 396/351
TXT HAVING MEANS TO REFLECT IMAGE TO FILM:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a mirror to reflect the
    light rays from an object onto a light sensitive surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for a scanning camera which includes a reflector.

    FOR 797, for a foreign art collection involving a camera which reflects an
    image to film.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 94 for a motion picture camera
    with deflected field of view.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    838+ for a mirror, per se.


CLS 396/352
TXT Having reflex mirror:

    Subject matter under subclass 351 which includes means to reflect light
    passing through the objective lens to a viewfinder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186,    for illumination means and a reflex camera.

    353,    for a twin lens reflex camera.

    354+,   for a single lens reflex camera.

    447,    for details of a camera reflex mirror.


CLS 396/353
TXT TWIN LENS REFLEX CAMERA:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising camera structure with
    two similar lenses, one a camera lens and one for a viewfinder, which are
    so coupled that they both focus on exactly the same plane and the
    viewfinder shows the view as focused by the camera lens.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186,    for illumination means and a reflex camera.

    354+,   for a single lens reflex camera.

    447,    for details of a camera reflex mirror.

    FOR 798, for a foreign art collection involving a twin lens reflex camera.


CLS 396/354
TXT SINGLE LENS REFLEX CAMERA:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising camera structure with
    one lens and a mirror to reflect image light passing through the lens to a
    viewfinder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186,    for illumination means and a reflex camera.

    353,    for a twin lens reflex camera.

    447,    for details of a camera reflex mirror.

    FOR 799+, for foreign art collections involving a reflex camera with single
    objective.


CLS 396/355
TXT Having shutter and additional means to block light from film (e.g.,
    screen):

    Subject matter under subclass 354 having means to obstruct light from the
    light sensitive surface in addition to a shutter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 801, for a foreign art collection involving a reflex camera with single
    objective and light blocking from film.


CLS 396/356
TXT Having manually operated mirror:

    Subject matter under subclass 354 wherein the mirror is moved into and out
    of the image light path by hand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 803, for a foreign art collection involving a reflex camera with single
    objective having manipulating means.


CLS 396/357
TXT Having focal plane shutter:

    Subject matter under subclass 354 including a  shutter positioned adjacent
    to the plane where an image will be formed on a photographic medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    452+,   for details of a camera shutter.


CLS 396/358
TXT With mirror support or drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 354 which includes a mount for the mirror or
    means to move the mirror.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    356,    for a manually operated mirror.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    871+ for a mirror with mount, per se.


CLS 396/359
TXT Plate camera:

    Subject matter under subclass 354 including two or more light sensitive
    surfaces, herein called "plates," not in the same plane which are encased
    within a camera and are brought to the exposure position one at a time
    without opening the receiver to light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    360+,   for a generic magazine camera which utilizes photographic plates.

    FOR 804, for a foreign art collection involving a reflex plate camera
    having single objective.


CLS 396/360
TXT MAGAZINE CAMERA:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein two or more
    light-sensitive surfaces (herein called "plates"), not in the same plane,
    are encased within a camera structure or light-tight receiver attachable
    thereto and are brought to the exposure position one at a time without
    opening the camera or receiver to light or removing the receiver from the
    camera.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30+,    for self-developing cameras which may include a film magazine.

    335+,   for plural image recording formed successively on a single plate.

    359,    for a plate-type single lens reflex camera.

    517+,   for plate or cut film holders.

    FOR 822+, for foreign art collections involving a magazine camera.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 98+ for individual picture
    plate type.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 167+ for
    photographic detector supports including film and plate moving and
    positioning means.


CLS 396/361
TXT Rotatable magazine:

    Subject matter under subclass 360 wherein the plates are mounted on a
    turret or drum magazine which is rotatable 360 degrees and which places a
    new plate in the exposure position upon a predetermined amount of rotation
    (e.g., a turret may have 2 or more sides with plates mounted on each side
    and pivoted at its center).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 823, for a foreign art collection involving a magazine camera having a
    rotatable magazine.


CLS 396/362
TXT Flexible light guard for entrance of hand:

    Subject matter under subclass 360 wherein a flexible end to the magazine
    box or light guard admits the hand of the operator to the box to permit a
    change of the plate which is effected by hand guidance of the changing
    mechanism or by a handhold on the plate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    590+,   for a fluid-treating, dark cabinet with hand insertion.

    FOR 824, for a foreign art collection involving a magazine camera with a
    hand-changed plate.


CLS 396/363
TXT Tilting receiver:

    Subject matter under subclass 360 wherein the change of the plate from
    storage to exposure position or vice versa, necessitates vertical tilting
    of a receiver holding more than one plate in different planes.

    (1)     Note. Receivers which are hinged to the camera or to another in
    order that they may be moved out of the way when not in use, but which can
    be kept immovable for successive transfers, are not placed here, but are
    classified according to the method of transfer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 825, for a foreign art collection involving a magazine camera with
    tilting magazine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 186+ for article dispensers in which
    the supply container is movably mounted for dispensing.


CLS 396/364
TXT Flexible carrier for plates:

    Subject matter under subclass 360 wherein the magazine is characterized by
    flexible carrier means (e.g., a belt) for transferring the plates between
    the storage and exposure positions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 826+, for foreign art collections involving a magazine camera having
    flexible carrier for plates.


CLS 396/365
TXT Having tab means:

    Subject matter under subclass 364 wherein each sensitized plate has its own
    carrier with a tab portion for manually pulling the plate around a curved
    track to or from the exposure area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 827, for a foreign art collection involving a magazine camera having
    flexible carrier for plates including tab means.


CLS 396/366
TXT Sliding plate:

    Subject matter under subclass 360 wherein plates are moved in a straight
    line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 828+, for foreign art collections involving a magazine camera having a
    sliding plate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 268+ for article dispensers not
    otherwise provided for having reciprocating (including oscillating) means
    for ejecting the articles therefrom.


CLS 396/367
TXT Sliding and return:

    Subject matter under subclass 366 wherein plates are moved to an exposure
    position and back to the receiver in alternate directions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 829, for a foreign art collection involving a magazine camera having a
    plate which slides and returns.


CLS 396/368
TXT Intermediate exposure chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 366 wherein the plate is moved to an exposure
    position between two other plate receivers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 830, for a foreign art collection involving a magazine camera having a
    sliding plate and intermediate exposure chamber.


CLS 396/369
TXT Quarter-turned plate:

    Subject matter under subclass 360 including two receivers with plates, the
    planes of these plates are perpendicular to each other, and means for
    exposing the plates or transferring them from one receiver to the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    363,    for rotating an entire receiver.

    FOR 831+, for foreign art collections involving a magazine camera having a
    quarter-turned plate.


CLS 396/370
TXT Tilting:

    Subject matter under subclass 369 wherein the plate transfer from one
    receiver to the other is effected by swinging the plate upon an axis in or
    near one of its edges.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    363,    for rotating an entire receiver.

    FOR 832+, for foreign art collections involving a magazine camera having a
    tilting quarter-turned plate.


CLS 396/371
TXT Base guide:

    Subject matter under subclass 370 wherein the plate is guided at its base
    during movement between its two storage positions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 833, for a foreign art collection involving a magazine camera having a
    tilting quarter-turned plate with base guides.


CLS 396/372
TXT Rear plates replaceable:

    Subject matter under subclass 360 wherein the plates are removed from one
    end or face of a receiver and replaced at the other end or back of the same
    receiver in a plane parallel to their first positions.

    (1)     Note.  A space does not cease to be the same receiver in the sense
    used in the above definition because it is divided by a partition whose
    plane is parallel to that of the plates and which moves transversely to
    this plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    362,    for hand-changed plates using a flexible light guard.

    363,    for tilting the receiver.

    FOR 834, for a foreign art collection involving a magazine camera with rear
    plate replaceable.


CLS 396/373
TXT WITH VIEWFINDER:

    Subject matter under the class definition including camera structure
    combined with means to show a scene that will be included in a frame.

    (1)     Note. If no camera structure is claimed then the viewfinders, per
    se, will be classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141,    for rangefinder and viewfinders.

    148+,   for lens focusing and viewfinders.

    296,    for a camera indicator in a viewfinder.

    FOR 859+, for foreign art collections involving a camera viewfinder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 227+ for finders that do not
    deflect light.

    348,    Television, subclasses 333 and 341 for television camera viewfinder
    or display monitor.

    352,    Optics: Motion Pictures, subclass 171 for viewfinder and motion
    picture cameras.

    356,    Optics: Measuring and Testing, subclasses 247+ for fiducial
    instruments.


CLS 396/374
TXT Electronic:

    Subject matter under subclass 373 in which the scene is electrically
    reproduced on a viewing screen, such as an LCD monitor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclass 333 for television camera electronic
    viewfinder or display monitor.


CLS 396/375
TXT Lensless:

    Subject matter under subclass 373 in which the scene is viewed directly
    without any optics.


CLS 396/376
TXT Pose reflector:

    Subject matter under subclass 373 having means to reflect an image of a
    human subject as seen in the viewfinder back to the human subject.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 860, for a foreign art collection involving a  camera viewfinder having
    pose reflector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    838+ for mirror, per se.


CLS 396/377
TXT Parallax correction:

    Subject matter under subclass 373 including means to correct the difference
    between an actual view covered by the exposure objective and an apparent
    view seen by the viewfinder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140,    for parallax correction in a mechanical rangefinder coupled with
    focusing.

    FOR 861, for a foreign art collection involving a camera viewfinder having
    parallax correction.


CLS 396/378
TXT Selective or adjustable viewfinder field:

    Subject matter under subclass 373 having means to choose between plural
    viewfinder fields or to vary a viewfinder field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 862, for a foreign art collection involving a camera viewfinder having
    selective or adjustable viewfinder field.


CLS 396/379
TXT Zoom:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 in which a focal length or angle of view
    can be adjusted continuously.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72+,    for variable focal length of camera objective.


CLS 396/380
TXT Variable size of mask opening:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 in which a portion of the scene that is
    viewed is changeable by altering the dimension of a viewing aperture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    435+,   for variable frame masking.


CLS 396/381
TXT Variable orientation of finder image:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 in which the position of a mask opening
    is changeable between horizontal and vertical.


CLS 396/382
TXT Lens detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 373 including specifics of an optical
    component that refractively focuses light.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    642+ for a lens, per se.


CLS 396/383
TXT Selective or adjustable viewing position:

    Subject matter under subclass 373 which permits an operator to view one of
    several viewfinder images on fixed diverse planes or which permits angular
    adjustment of the viewfinder.

    (1)     Note. The viewfinder may have a viewing window or screens which are
    at 90 degrees to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 863, for a foreign art collection involving a camera viewfinder having
    selective or adjustable viewing position.


CLS 396/384
TXT With prism:

    Subject matter under subclass 373 having means to internally reflect or
    refract the light such as a pentaprism or porro prism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    831+ for a prism, per se.


CLS 396/385
TXT With reflector:

    Subject matter under subclass 373 having means for returning light striking
    a surface into the medium from which it came.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 864+, for foreign art collections involving a camera viewfinder having
    a reflector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    838+ for a mirror, per se.


CLS 396/386
TXT Plural:

    Subject matter under subclass 385 having more than one reflector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 865, for a foreign art collection involving a camera viewfinder having
    plural reflectors.


CLS 396/387
TXT WITH FILM DRIVE:

    Subject matter under class definition having camera structure and means to
    convert energy to produce or impart motion to a light-sensitive material.

    (1)     Note.  If no camera structure is claimed, then the drive means, per
    se, would be classified in the appropriate mechanical drive class.  See
    SEARCH CLASS below for typical mechanical drive classes and search notes
    attached thereto for lines with other classes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 817+, for foreign art collections involving a camera motor film drive.

    FOR 852+, for foreign art collections involving  camera film advance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for material advancement, per se, by acting on the material intermediate
    its length.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 324+ for unwinding and
    rewinding a machine convertible information carrier, per se.


CLS 396/388
TXT Detachable drive unit:

    Subject matter under subclass 387 wherein a device providing powered film
    movement is readily removable from or attachable to a camera body.


CLS 396/389
TXT Double exposure prevention:

    Subject matter under subclass 387 wherein the camera has some structure
    which inhibits two superimposed images.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    285,    for double exposure warning.

    FOR 847+, for foreign art collections involving camera double exposure
    prevention.


CLS 396/390
TXT Midroll interrupt:

    Subject matter under subclass 389 wherein the camera has structure enabling
    the removal of a roll of film prior to exposure of the entire roll and to
    return the roll of film at a later time for completion of the exposure of
    the roll of film.


CLS 396/391
TXT Having manual override:

    Subject matter under subclass 389 including means to permit the operator to
    manually manipulate a shutter actuating means so that the double exposure
    can be made.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 849, for a foreign art collection involving manual override of camera
    double exposure prevention.


CLS 396/392
TXT Having film-sensing member:

    Subject matter under subclass 389 including means for engaging a film to
    detect a state of film advancement and, responsive to the detection, either
    permitting or prohibiting exposure.


CLS 396/393
TXT Having double cable release:

    Subject matter under subclass 389 including two synchronously operated
    elongated actuators, one for the film drive and the other for a shutter
    release.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    504,    for cable release, in general.


CLS 396/394
TXT Responsive to film-winding lever:

    Subject matter under subclass 389 in which a manually operated member for
    film transport cocks a shutter or releases a shutter lock.


CLS 396/395
TXT Film movement limiting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 387 including means to restrict film
    advancement to an increment corresponding to one film frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 846, for a foreign art collection involving interlocking film advance
    and shutter tension or setting including film movement limiting.

    FOR 853, for a foreign art collection involving film advancing means having
    film movement limiting.


CLS 396/396
TXT From film drive transmission member:

    Subject matter under subclass 395 wherein a mechanical driving mechanism
    controls the amount of film advancement to the desired increment without
    sensing film movement.


CLS 396/397
TXT From film itself:

    Subject matter under subclass 395 including means to detect film movement
    and in response to the detection limiting advancement to the desired
    increment.


CLS 396/398
TXT Having switch actuated by perforation sensing pawl:

    Subject matter under subclass 397 wherein the means for detecting film
    movement is a member which rides on the film and in response to a film
    opening makes or breaks a circuit connection.


CLS 396/399
TXT Having film locked by perforation sensing pawl:

    Subject matter under subclass 397 wherein engagement of a member which
    rides on the film and in response to a film opening directly restrains
    further advancement of the film.


CLS 396/400
TXT Having film transport mechanism locked by perforation sensing pawl:

    Subject matter under subclass 397 wherein movement of a member which rides
    on the film and in response to a film opening shifts a member to prohibit
    further operation of the film drive means.


CLS 396/401
TXT Film transport cocks shutter:

    Subject matter under subclass 387 wherein a motive power for moving the
    film also charges a shutter mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    443,    for camera element cocking or resetting in general.

    FOR 844+, for foreign art collections involving interlocking film advance
    and shutter tension or setting.


CLS 396/402
TXT Film transport cocks shutter and mirror:

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein the motive power also charges a
    reflex mirror.


CLS 396/403
TXT Having mechanically actuated circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 387 wherein a film drive circuit is triggered
    by the motion of a physical element.

    (1)     Note.  This would include, for example, a cam-actuated circuit.

    (2)     Note.  A significant electronic film drive circuit not mechanically
    actuated is classified in subclasses 406+.


CLS 396/404
TXT Film feed error detection or end of film detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 wherein a mechanically actuated circuit
    senses improper film movement or maximum film extension from its container.


CLS 396/405
TXT Rewind:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 wherein a mechanically actuated circuit
    reverses film movement at the completion of all desired exposures thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    410,    for a significant electronic rewind circuit.

    413,    for mechanical detail of a rewind mechanism.

    FOR 854, for a foreign art collection involving film advance including
    rewind means.


CLS 396/406
TXT Having significant electronic circuit detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 387 having a particular electrical or
    electronic device for controlling film movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 821, for a foreign art collection involving automatic film advance
    having electronically timed electrical motor.


CLS 396/407
TXT Prewind:

    Subject matter under subclass 406 wherein the electrical or electronic
    device controls a mechanism to withdraw the entire length of film from the
    film container prior to a first exposure.


CLS 396/408
TXT Initialization:

    Subject matter under subclass 406 wherein the electronic circuit controls
    film movement prior to the first desired exposure.


CLS 396/409
TXT Film feed error detection or end of film detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 406 having electrical or electronic means to
    sense improper film movement or maximum film extension from its container.


CLS 396/410
TXT Rewind:

    Subject matter under subclass 406 having an electrical or electronic
    circuit which reverses film movement at the completion of all desired
    exposures thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    405,    for a mechanically actuated rewind circuit.

    413,    for mechanical details of a rewind mechanism.

    FOR 854, for a foreign art collection involving film advance including
    rewind means.


CLS 396/411
TXT Mechanical detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 387 wherein the subject matter relates to
    miscellaneous mechanical structure or particular mechanical features of the
    film drive.


CLS 396/412
TXT Spring motor:

    Subject matter under subclass 411 including means to mechanically store
    energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    185,    Motors: Spring, Weight, or Animal Powered, subclasses 37+ for a
    spring motor, per se.


CLS 396/413
TXT Rewind:

    Subject matter under subclass 411 comprising means to  reverse film
    movement at the completion of all desired exposures thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    405,    for a mechanically actuated rewind circuit.

    410,    for a significant electronic rewind circuit.

    FOR 854, for a foreign art collection involving film advance including
    rewind means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 124 for rewinding of film strip.


CLS 396/414
TXT Posterior film roll:

    Subject matter under subclass 411 having a photographic medium roll which
    lies behind the plane upon which an exposure is made.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    511+,   for a removable film holder unit.

    FOR 856, for a foreign art collection involving film advance including a
    posterior roll.


CLS 396/415
TXT Having threading structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 411 including means for the initial
    advancement of a film leader from a supply chamber to a take-up chamber.


CLS 396/416
TXT Drive means having rectilinear path:

    Subject matter under subclass 411 wherein a member supplying motive power
    to the film moves linearly while in engagement with the film.


CLS 396/417
TXT Sheet film:

    Subject matter under subclass 411 wherein transported film comprises an
    individual piece of rectangular or cut film.


CLS 396/418
TXT Including electric motor:

    Subject matter under subclass 411 also having means converting electrical
    energy to mechanical energy to provide motive power.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 820+, for foreign art collections involving automatic film advance
    having an electric motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity: Motive Power Systems,  appropriate subclasses for
    electric motor.


CLS 396/419
TXT CAMERA SUPPORT:

    Subject matter under class definition including structure for maintaining a
    photographic camera in a fixed position or fixed path of movement with
    respect to some reference point.

    (1)     Note.  Camera structure combined with a camera support is
    classified here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12+,    for an aerial camera support or holder.

    329,    for an adjustable stereoscopic camera support.

    FOR 913+, for foreign art collections involving a camera mounting or rest.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, appropriate subclasses for
    a horizontally supported planar surface.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 316.2 for a camera case.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclass 185 for camera carriers that are attached to the operator's body
    or belt.

    248,    Supports, for supports of general utility, and especially
    subclasses 163.1+ for a plural leg support.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 139 for an
    optical instrument (e.g., camera) carrier gripped and carried by hand.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 243 for a motion picture camera
    with support, and see (1) Note thereunder.


CLS 396/420
TXT Operator supported:

    Subject matter under subclass 419 wherein a camera operator assists in
    maintaining the photographic camera in fixed position.


CLS 396/421
TXT Having stabilization:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 wherein  provision is made for damping
    out vibrations due to the movement of an operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for aerial camera stabilizing.

    55,     for systems which actually sense camera shake and provide
    subsequent stabilization.


CLS 396/422
TXT Having means to attach other photographic accessories:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 which allows additional photographic
    accessories to be connected to the operator support.


CLS 396/423
TXT Having strap:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 wherein a flat belt provides camera
    operator support structure.


CLS 396/424
TXT Integral with camera body:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 wherein an interface structure between
    the operator and the camera is a constituent part of a camera housing.


CLS 396/425
TXT Having release actuator on support:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 wherein a shutter release is located on
    the support itself.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    502+,   for mechanical camera shutter release means, per se.


CLS 396/426
TXT Having actual or simulated handheld weapon structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 425 including an individually carriable
    implement of hunting or war or simulated version thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, appropriate subclasses for a firearm, per se, such as a
    rifle.

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, appropriate subclasses for a
    mechanical projector, per se, such as a crossbow.


CLS 396/427
TXT Surveillance type:

    Subject matter under subclass 419 wherein a camera mount is particularly
    adapted to permit surreptitious photographic monitoring of an area usually
    for security purposes.


CLS 396/428
TXT Adjustable support:

    Subject matter under subclass 419 wherein the support may be selectively
    fixed in any one of a plurality of positions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329,    for an adjustable stereoscopic camera support.


CLS 396/429
TXT CAMERA COMBINED WITH OR CONVERTIBLE TO DIVERSE ART DEVICE:

    Subject matter under class definition wherein a camera is combined with
    means recognized as the subject matter of some other class, or selectively
    performs two dissimilar functions by appropriate rearrangement of parts or
    use of special adaptor structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    544+,   for a camera attachment, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 137 for conversion from a still
    to motion picture camera.


CLS 396/430
TXT Convertible to developed image projector or viewer:

    Subject matter under subclass 429 wherein a camera is convertible to a
    device which projects or allows observation of a visible image.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    353,    Image Projectors, for an image projector, in general.


CLS 396/431
TXT With light beam projector for delineating field of view:

    Subject matter under subclass 429 wherein a camera is combined with a light
    source which marks object boundaries which will appear in a photographic
    frame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, appropriate subclasses for illumination devices, per
    se.


CLS 396/432
TXT With diverse compound lens system (e.g., microscope):

    Subject matter under subclass 429 wherein a camera is combined with a
    separate plurality of lenses or lens groups arranged in series coaxially
    along an optical axis so that light rays passing from an object external to
    the plurality of lenses form an image of that object, which is subsequently
    viewed and which plurality of lenses or lens groups is recognized as
    subject matter of another class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    363 for a compound lens system which may have a broadly recited
    photographic image recorder where the primary purpose of the system is that
    of viewing.


CLS 396/433
TXT With camouflage structure (e.g., spy camera):

    Subject matter under subclass 429 wherein a camera is combined with
    structure intended to hide the presence of such camera from an outside
    observer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    427,    for a surveillance-type camera support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    89,     Ordnance, subclass 36.01 for ordnance shrouds or cloaks.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 919 for a
    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTION related to camouflaged articles.


CLS 396/434
TXT With radio or clock:

    Subject matter under subclass 429 wherein a camera is combined with either
    a wireless audio receiver or timekeeping device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    368,    Horology, subclasses 10+ for a detailed horological device combined
    with disparate device.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclasses 344+ for a detailed
    telecommunications receiver combined with diverse art device.


CLS 396/435
TXT VARIABLE FRAME MASKING:

    Subject matter under class definition having means to change the physical
    dimensions of the exposed area of a frame utilizing an opaque element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    337,    for plural image recording which includes a preobjective mask.

    FOR 806, for a foreign art collection involving camera with picture size
    variable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics: Motion Pictures, subclasses 79+ for plural picture size
    motion pictures.


CLS 396/436
TXT Having wide aspect ratio:

    Subject matter under subclass 435 wherein   longitudinal strips at the top
    and bottom of a frame are simultaneously blocked off by an opaque element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20+,    for a scanning camera.


CLS 396/437
TXT CAMERA BACK OR FILM CARRIER ANGULARLY ADJUSTABLE:

    Subject matter under the class definition having means to cover the rear of
    a camera or means to support a photographic medium wherein either is
    shiftable with respect to an objective so that the vertical plane of the
    objective is not parallel to a plane of the means to cover the rear of a
    camera or of the means to support a photographic medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    342,    for a bellows objective camera having a front or lens mount which
    is angularly adjustable.

    FOR 807, for a foreign art collection involving a camera having camera back
    or film carrier angularly adjustable.


CLS 396/438
TXT DAGUERREOTYPE:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to that branch of
    photography known as "daguerreotypy" in which sensitization and development
    are secured by the use of mercury vapor to produce a positive image on a
    silver coated copper plate.

    (1)     Note. Included here also is a plate vise or holder, per se, which
    is adapted for daguerreotype use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    579,    for gaseous treating photographic apparatus, in general.

    654,    for photographic plate holders, in general.

    658+,   for burnishing, in general.


CLS 396/439
TXT CAMERA DETAIL:

    Subject matter under class definition which defines miscellaneous structure
    or particular details of a camera.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 842+, for foreign art collections involving camera details.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    399,    Electrophotography, subclass 207 for diaphragm, shutter, or shading
    board in an electrophotography device.


CLS 396/440
TXT Film restraining means or pressure plate:

    Subject matter under subclass 439 having means to press or hold a film in a
    plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 843, for a foreign art collection involving film restraining means.


CLS 396/441
TXT Pneumatic or magnetic:

    Subject matter under subclass 440 in which a force to press or hold the
    film is generated by a pressure differential created by a gas medium or by
    a magnet.


CLS 396/442
TXT On camera door:

    Subject matter under subclass 440 in which the means to press or hold the
    film is located on a closure member.


CLS 396/443
TXT Camera element cocking or resetting:

    Subject matter under subclass 439 having means to move camera components to
    a ready position in preparation for taking a picture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401+,   for film transport that cocks shutter.

    FOR 891, for a foreign art collection involving a pivoting or rotating
    blade shutter and cocking means.


CLS 396/444
TXT Shutter charging lever on lens housing:

    Subject matter under subclass 443 wherein an elongated member for cocking a
    shutter is on the body structure surrounding the optical elements.


CLS 396/445
TXT Film cutoff:

    Subject matter under subclass 439 having means for cutting a portion of a
    light-sensitive material from a strip.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    613,    for photographic cutting in a fluid treating apparatus.

    FOR 851, for a foreign art collection involving film cut-off.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding and Reeling, subclasses 522+ for convolute winding with
    cutting.

    355,    Photocopying, subclass 29 for means to cut film in projection
    printing.


CLS 396/446
TXT Plural film types:

    Subject matter under subclass 439 wherein the camera structure provides for
    an alternative use of more than one type of supply or size of light
    sensitive material for recording.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded herein are mere plate holders having provision for
    accepting plates of diverse sizes (i.e., plate holder kit).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    309,    for plural film in a camera used for color photography which
    utilizes monochrome film.

    322+,   for plural image recording.

    519+,   for plate or cut film holder kit.

    FOR 850, for a foreign art collection involving a plural film-type camera.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 79+ for motion pictures with
    plural picture sizes or types.


CLS 396/447
TXT Reflex mirror:

    Subject matter under subclass 439 comprising means for selectively
    reflecting light from an optical path of the camera lens to a viewfinder to
    enable through the lens viewing of the object.

    (1)     Note. Included here are submirrors which operate in conjunction
    with the reflex mirror.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    353,    for twin lens reflex camera.

    354+,   for single lens reflex camera.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    838+ for mirrors, per se.


CLS 396/448
TXT Lens cover:

    Subject matter under subclass 439 comprising integral camera structure for
    protecting the object side of a lens.


CLS 396/449
TXT Diaphragm shutter unit:

    Subject matter under subclass 439 comprising a single means to interrupt
    and control light passing through the lens to a light sensitive material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    471,    for plural shutters.

    FOR 870, for a foreign art collection involving a shutter and diaphragm
    formed from the same pivoted or sliding plates.


CLS 396/450
TXT Sliding plate:

    Subject matter under subclass 449 wherein the light interrupter means is a
    stiff sheet which travels in a linear path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    483+,   for sliding plate-type shutter.


CLS 396/451
TXT Between the lens components:

    Subject matter under subclass 449 wherein the light interrupter is placed
    between the front and rear lens components of an objective.


CLS 396/452
TXT Shutter:

    Subject matter under subclass 439 comprising means to interrupt the light
    passing through the lens to a light sensitive material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180+,   for shutters synchronized with illumination means.

    246+,   for exposure control circuit controlling shutter speed function
    only.

    FOR 866+, for foreign art collections involving details of a camera shutter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, appropriate subclasses, especially
    subclasses 204+ for shutters utilized in motion picture apparatus.

    355,    Photocopying, subclass 121 for shutter utilized in photocopying,
    and see search notes for other search areas in Class 355.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    227+ for movable opaque light control element, per se; subclasses 237+ for
    optical modulator (including electro-optical), and subclasses 738+ for lens
    having light limiting or controlling means, and see notes attached thereto
    for the line with Class 396.


CLS 396/453
TXT Having braking or damping:

    Subject matter under subclass 452 comprising means to slow the speed of the
    light interrupting member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235,    for exposure control circuit with velocity control of shutter or
    diaphragm component.

    FOR 892, for a foreign art collection involving camera shutter having
    pivoting or rotating blade and brake means.


CLS 396/454
TXT Having braking or damping member in path of shutter:

    Subject matter under subclass 453 wherein the means to slow the speed
    intersects a path of travel of the light interrupting member so that there
    is contact between the light interrupting member and the means to slow a
    speed.


CLS 396/455
TXT Having pneumatic or electromagnetic braking or damping:

    Subject matter under subclass 453 wherein a force to slow the speed is
    generated by a pressure differential created by a gas medium or by a
    soft-iron device wound with a current carrying coil of insulated wire.


CLS 396/456
TXT Of focal plane shutter:

    Subject matter under subclass 453 wherein the light interrupting member is
    at an image plane of the lens.


CLS 396/457
TXT Electro-optical, magneto-optical, or photochromic type:

    Subject matter under subclass 452 having an optical medium whose light
    transmission characteristics can be changed by an application of an
    electric or magnetic field or light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249,    for exposure control circuit for electro-optical shutter.

    506,    for diaphragm of electro-optical, magneto-optical or photochromic
    type.

    FOR 867, for a foreign art collection involving an electro-optical shutter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    237+ for light intensity modulation.


CLS 396/458
TXT Including diaphragm:

    Subject matter under subclass 452 including means to selectively vary the
    amount of light passing through the lens from the given object to a light
    sensitive material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    505+,   for a diaphragm, per se.

    FOR 868+, for foreign art collections involving a shutter and diaphragm.


CLS 396/459
TXT Plural selectable apertures:

    Subject matter under subclass 458 including multiple different sized
    openings which may be chosen to control the light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 869, for a foreign art collection involving a shutter having a plural
    apertured diaphragm.


CLS 396/460
TXT Including coupled shutter and diaphragm:

    Subject matter under subclass 458 having means to connect the shutter and
    diaphragm so that a means to adjust one will also adjust the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 871, for a foreign art collection involving a shutter having a coupled
    diaphragm.


CLS 396/461
TXT Diaphragm blades open for focusing or viewing:

    Subject matter under subclass 458 having means for moving blades of a
    diaphragm to allow the maximum amount of light to pass through for focusing
    or viewing or means to hold blades of a diaphragm fully open until the
    shutter release is actuated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    509,    for a diaphragm, per se, which opens for focusing or viewing.

    FOR 872, for a foreign art collection involving a shutter and diaphragm
    which opens for focusing or viewing.


CLS 396/462
TXT Having shutter between lens components:

    Subject matter under subclass 452 wherein the shutter is placed between
    front and rear components of a lens.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 873, for a foreign art collection involving a shutter located between
    lens.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    642+ for a lens, per se.


CLS 396/463
TXT Dynamo-electric actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 452 having means to convert electrical energy
    to mechanical energy by means of an electromagnet to cause the shutter to
    actuate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183,    for illumination means combined with a shutter actuated by a relay
    or solenoid.

    508,    for dynamo-electric actuator of diaphragm.

    FOR 874+, for foreign art collections involving a dynamo-electric actuated
    shutter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 160+ for
    control circuits of relays or solenoids.


CLS 396/464
TXT Having planar coil:

    Subject matter under subclass 463 wherein the windings of the electromagnet
    lie in a single plane.


CLS 396/465
TXT Latching relay:

    Subject matter under subclass 463 wherein the armature of the electromagnet
    engages a drive element of the light-intercepting member to hold the drive
    element in a fixed position.


CLS 396/466
TXT Plural latching relays:

    Subject matter under subclass 465 including more than one armatured
    electromagnet.


CLS 396/467
TXT Plural linear solenoids:

    Subject matter under subclass 463 having more than one dynamoelectric means
    which are constrained to move in a straight line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 166+ for a
    plural solenoid control circuit.


CLS 396/468
TXT Single linear solenoid:

    Subject matter under subclass 463 having only one dynamoelectric means
    which is constrained to move in a straight line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 875, for a foreign art collection involving a shutter actuated by a
    single linear solenoid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 160+ for a
    solenoid control circuit.


CLS 396/469
TXT Plural dynamo-electric actuators:

    Subject matter under subclass 463 having more than one means to convert
    electrical energy to mechanical energy by means of an electromagnet to
    cause the shutter to actuate.


CLS 396/470
TXT Having spring return:

    Subject matter under subclass 463 wherein the means to provide the motive
    force for restoring the light-intercepting member to an initial position is
    a resilient member.


CLS 396/471
TXT Plural shutters:

    Subject matter under subclass 452 having more than one means to interrupt
    the light.

    (1)     Note.  The means to interrupt the light are not plural blades for a
    single opening but means to interrupt the light in more than one plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    449,    for diaphragm shutter.

    FOR 876,        for a foreign art collection involving plural shutters.


CLS 396/472
TXT Having mechanical delayed release means (e.g. self-timer):

    Subject matter under subclass 452 including means to mechanically defer for
    a time the initial actuation of the shutter.

    (1)     Note.  An operator actuates the delay means and then may enter the
    picture before the shutter is actuated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59,     for camera release by wireless remote control circuit.

    191,    for means to delay movement of a shutter with respect to actuation
    of an illumination source.

    264,    for self-timing release control circuit.

    475+,   for mechanically delayed closing of shutter.

    502,    for mechanical shutter release or actuator means.

    FOR 877+, for foreign art collections involving a shutter having delayed
    release means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 3.5+ for a retarded latch
    trip.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclass 71 for a retarded compression spring and
    subclass 74 for a retarded tension spring.


CLS 396/473
TXT Having gear train:

    Subject matter under subclass 472 wherein the means to delay the shutter
    release includes plural gearing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 879+, for foreign art collections involving a shutter having
    clock-train delayed release means.


CLS 396/474
TXT Detachable from camera:

    Subject matter under subclass 473 having means to remove the delay means
    from the camera.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 880, for a foreign art collection involving a shutter having
    clock-train delayed release means which is detachable from camera.


CLS 396/475
TXT Having mechanically delayed closing:

    Subject matter under subclass 452 having means to   mechanically hold the
    shutter fully open for a certain period of time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    472,    for mechanically delayed release.

    FOR 896+, for foreign art collections involving a shutter having pivoting
    or rotating blade with retard means.

    FOR 907, for a foreign art collection involving a shutter release and
    timing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 1.42+ for timing apparatus for a
    camera shutter.


CLS 396/476
TXT Including pneumatic means:

    Subject matter under subclass 475 wherein the means to hold the shutter
    open is a member utilizing gaseous pressure differentials.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 897, for a foreign art collection involving a pivoting or rotating
    blade shutter having pneumatic retard means.


CLS 396/477
TXT Including gear means:

    Subject matter under subclass 475 wherein the means to hold the shutter
    open is provided by a member with one or more protuberances or grooves
    which interengage and cooperate with mating protuberances on, or grooves
    in, another member to form therewith a positive force means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 899, for a foreign art collection involving a pivoting or rotating
    blade shutter having a gear retard means.


CLS 396/478
TXT Including cam means:

    Subject matter under subclass 475 wherein the means to hold the shutter
    open is provided with a surface of fixed points of varying distance from a
    fixed point which surface is in contact with a follower to vary the time
    the shutter remains open.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 900, for a foreign art collection involving a pivoting or rotating
    blade shutter having a cam retard means.


CLS 396/479
TXT Curtain type:

    Subject matter under subclass 452 wherein the light interrupter means is a
    resilient or flexible sheet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194,    for curtain shutter and illumination means.

    FOR 881+, for foreign art collections involving a curtain or flexible
    plate-type shutter.


CLS 396/480
TXT Plural curtains:

    Subject matter under subclass 479 having more than one resilient or
    flexible sheet to form an opening which passes across the light sensitive
    material to produce an exposure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 882+, for foreign art collections involving a shutter having plural
    curtains or plates.


CLS 396/481
TXT Curtain width opening adjustable:

    Subject matter under subclass 480 including means to adjust or control an
    extent of the opening to produce the exposure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 883, for a foreign art collection involving a curtain shutter having
    variable curtain width opening.


CLS 396/482
TXT Three or more rollers:

    Subject matter under subclass 481 including three or more supply and takeup
    spools for storing the curtains or flexible plates.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 884, for a foreign art collection involving a curtain shutter having
    variable curtain width opening and three or more rollers.


CLS 396/483
TXT Sliding plate type:

    Subject matter under subclass 452 wherein the light interrupter means is a
    stiff sheet which travels in a linear path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 885+, for foreign art collections involving a shutter formed by a
    sliding rigid plate.


CLS 396/484
TXT Plural plates:

    Subject matter under subclass 483 having more than one stiff sheet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 886+, for foreign art collections involving a shutter formed by plural
    sliding rigid plates.


CLS 396/485
TXT Having apertured plate:

    Subject matter under subclass 484 including light passing openings in the
    stiff sheets.


CLS 396/486
TXT Having base plate detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 484 including specific structure of the
    mounting member which supports the shutter components.


CLS 396/487
TXT Having plate support detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 484 including specific structure of an
    elongated linkage means determining the path of travel of the stiff sheets.


CLS 396/488
TXT Having plate detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 484 including specific structure of the stiff
    sheets.


CLS 396/489
TXT Having drive detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 484 including specific structure of the means
    to provide motive force to the stiff sheets.


CLS 396/490
TXT Move in opposite directions:

    Subject matter under subclass 484 wherein one of the stiff sheets slides in
    a reverse direction with respect to the other sheet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 887, for a foreign art collection involving a shutter formed by plural
    sliding rigid plates which move in opposite directions.


CLS 396/491
TXT Rectilinear reciprocation:

    Subject matter under subclass 483 wherein a rigid plate is moved in
    alternate directions in a straight line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 888+, for foreign art collections involving a sliding rigid plate
    shutter having rectilinear reciprocation.


CLS 396/492
TXT Vertical motion:

    Subject matter under subclass 491 wherein the rigid plate is moved in a
    straight line so as to form a right angle with the plane of the horizon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 889, for a foreign art collection involving a sliding rigid plate
    shutter having rectilinear reciprocation with vertical motion.


CLS 396/493
TXT Pivoting or rotating blade type:

    Subject matter under subclass 452 wherein the shutter includes means which
    is mounted for movement in one direction only or is rotatably reciprocated
    about a fixed axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 890+, for foreign art collections involving a shutter having pivoting
    or rotating blade.


CLS 396/494
TXT Having auxiliary light blocking:

    Subject matter under subclass 493 comprising two or more blades to stop
    light from entering a camera.

    (1)     Note.  One blade allows light to enter an aperture when actuated,
    while the other blade will block the light so that the blade allowing light
    can return to its original position without allowing light to enter the
    aperture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 893, for a foreign art collection involving a shutter having pivoting
    or rotating blade and aperture cover or lid.


CLS 396/495
TXT Shutter blade moves continuously from closed to open to closed position:

    Subject matter under subclass 493 comprising means for moving a blade with
    a first aperture in it past a second aperture so that the first aperture
    moves on past the second aperture to close it from light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 894+, for foreign art collections involving a shutter having pivoting
    or rotating blade which moves continuously from closed to open to closed
    position.


CLS 396/496
TXT Blade moves in opposite directions on alternate exposures:

    Subject matter under subclass 495 wherein the blade with the aperture moves
    first in one way past the second aperture and then moves back past the
    second aperture when another picture is taken.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 895, for a foreign art collection involving a shutter having pivoting
    or rotating blade which moves continuously from closed to open to closed
    position in opposite directions on alternate exposures.


CLS 396/497
TXT Plural oscillating blades:

    Subject matter under subclass 493 wherein there are two or more blades that
    are rotatably reciprocated about a fixed axis from an open to a closed
    position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 901, for a foreign art collection involving a shutter having plural
    oscillating blades.


CLS 396/498
TXT Having gear means:

    Subject matter under subclass 497 wherein the means to drive the shutter
    blades is a toothed wheel which engages one or more similar wheels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 902, for a foreign art collection involving a shutter having plural
    oscillating blades including gear means.


CLS 396/499
TXT Having pneumatic actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 497 wherein the blades are moved by gas
    pressure means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184,    for illumination means combined with pneumatic shutter actuating
    means.

    FOR 903, for a foreign art collection involving a shutter having plural
    oscillating blades and a pneumatic actuator.


CLS 396/500
TXT Symmetrical opening:

    Subject matter under subclass 497 wherein the blades move in diverse
    directions from or toward a center and form an aperture which always varies
    the same from the center.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 904, for a foreign art collection involving a shutter having plural
    oscillating blades forming a symmetrical opening.


CLS 396/501
TXT Opposite movement:

    Subject matter under subclass 497 wherein one blade moves in one direction
    while another blade moves in another direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 905, for a foreign art collection involving a shutter having plural
    oscillating blades of opposite movement.


CLS 396/502
TXT Release or actuator means:

    Subject matter under subclass 452 comprising means to allow a shutter to
    operate or means to apply a bias or mechanical advantage to effect movement
    of a shutter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59,     for camera release by wireless remote control.

    263+,   for camera release control circuit.

    472+,   for mechanically delayed release.

    FOR 906+, for foreign art collections involving a shutter release or
    actuator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 178 for manual control of a
    motion picture camera.


CLS 396/503
TXT Having safety lock:

    Subject matter under subclass 502 comprising means to prevent the shutter
    actuator from being accidently actuated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266,    for a safety lock in a camera release control circuit.

    FOR 908, for a foreign art collection involving a shutter having release or
    actuator and safety lock.


CLS 396/504
TXT Cable release:

    Subject matter under subclass 502 comprising a flexible element for
    transmission of tension or compression.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    393,    for a double cable release in film drive double exposure prevention.

    FOR 909, for a foreign art collection involving a shutter cable release or
    actuator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 500.5+  for flexible
    transmitter.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 179 for remotely operated motion
    picture cameras.


CLS 396/505
TXT Diaphragm:

    Subject matter under subclass 439 having means to selectively vary the
    amount of light passing through the lens from the given object to a
    light-sensitive material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257+,   for exposure control circuit controlling diaphragm function only.

    449+,   for diaphragm shutter.

    458,    for a shutter with diaphragm.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    237+ for optical modulator (including electro-optical), and subclasses 738+
    for lens having light-limiting means, and see notes attached thereto for
    the line with Class 396.


CLS 396/506
TXT Electro-optical, magneto-optical, or photochromic type:

    Subject matter under subclass 505 having optical media whose light
    transmission characteristics can be changed by an application of an
    electric or magnetic field or of light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262,    for exposure control circuit for electro-optical diaphragm.

    457,    for shutter of electro-optical, magneto-optical, or photochromic
    type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    237+ for light-intensity modulation.


CLS 396/507
TXT Including irregular diaphragm opening:

    Subject matter under subclass 505 having a nonsymmetrical aperture.


CLS 396/508
TXT Dynamo-electric actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 505 having means to convert electrical energy
    to mechanical energy by means of an electromagnet to cause the diaphragm to
    actuate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    463+,   for dynamo-electric actuator of shutter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 160+ for
    control circuits of relays or solenoids.


CLS 396/509
TXT Diaphragm opens for focusing or viewing:

    Subject matter under subclass 505 comprising means for manual adjustment of
    a diaphragm aperture setting means so that the aperture remains fully open
    until a setting means is released or the diaphragm aperture is set or a
    device is pressed to fully open the aperture and returns to set position
    after release of a pressed device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    461,    for a shutter with diaphragm that opens for focusing or viewing.


CLS 396/510
TXT Plural pivoted blades:

    Subject matter under subclass 505 comprising more than one blade and means
    to restrain a motion of the blade to an arcuate path.


CLS 396/511
TXT Detachable or removable film holder unit:

    Subject matter under subclass 439 comprising means to support a supply of
    light-sensitive material, and the support is extractable from a camera
    housing so that light-sensitive material can be put on the support and
    replaced in the camera housing so a picture can be recorded or the support
    may contain the light-sensitive material for placement into a camera
    housing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    414,    for removable film holder unit and posterior roll with camera film
    drive.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding and Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 348+, 538.4, 588.5,
    and 588.6 for a holder of coiled material which includes image film.


CLS 396/512
TXT Film cassette or cartridge:

    Subject matter under the subclass 511 having the light-tight enclosure
    containing a supply spool such that the entire enclosure including the
    spool is removable and insertable as a unit.


CLS 396/513
TXT Light seal:

    Subject matter under the subclass 512 having means to prevent light from
    entering a film exit opening of the light-tight enclosure.


CLS 396/514
TXT Film or spool locking means:

    Subject matter under the subclass 512 having means for preventing rotation
    of the film or spool except when the light-tight enclosure is in an
    operative position in the camera.


CLS 396/515
TXT Including film use indicator:

    Subject matter under the subclass 512 having means integral with the
    light-tight enclosure providing a demonstration of an exposure status of
    the film.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281,    for camera indicator.


CLS 396/516
TXT Thrust type:

    Subject matter under the subclass 512 wherein the light-tight enclosure
    contains a single spool having the film wound completely thereon and means
    are provided for ejecting the film leader from the light-tight enclosure.


CLS 396/517
TXT Plate or cut film holder:

    Subject matter under subclass 511 wherein the support means holds a sheet
    of light-sensitive material during its exposure in the camera, and the
    holder must be removed from the camera after each exposure to place the
    next sheet of film in position for exposure or protects the material while
    it is being transported.

    (1)     Note. Devices which are not merely double plateholders, but by
    means of which separate light-sensitized surfaces or separate portions of
    the same light-sensitive material are simultaneously exposed in a
    stereoscopic camera, are classified in this class, subclasses 324+.  Where
    these separate surfaces or portions are successively brought into the same
    position relative to a lens for exposure, even when they are not separable
    from the camera, they are classified according to the means used in
    subclasses 333+, 335+, 360+, and 414.

    (2)     Note.  Ground glass screens combined with plateholders and camera
    guides are found in this class, subclasses 150+.

    (3)     Note.  Magazines in which two or more light-sensitive surfaces not
    in the same plane are brought to an exposure position one at a time without
    opening the receiver to the light are classified in this class, subclasses
    360+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 91+ for devices which register the number of
    times the plateholder has been opened to indicate the number of prints
    taken.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 167+ for
    photographic detector supports including film and plate moving and
    positioning means.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, appropriate subclasses for a holder in combination with chemically
    defined radiation-sensitive film or plates.


CLS 396/518
TXT Light seal:

    Subject matter under subclass 517 wherein the support means includes one or
    more movable means to prevent the admission of light to the plateholder
    through openings therein, except such slides or doors that close front or
    rear openings used to admit the plate or to expose it when in place.


CLS 396/519
TXT Plate fastening or kit:

    Subject matter under subclass 517 which has particular cornerpieces,
    catches, or other devices which support or retain a light sensitive
    material within a plateholder or which provides an adapter structure (i.e.,
    kit) to permit one size of light-sensitive material to be inserted in a
    plateholder normally supporting light sensitive material of a different
    size.

    (1)     Note. Adaptations of kits to special types of magazine cameras are
    classified with camera structure. Thus, extended bases upon kits occur in
    this class, subclass 371.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    446,    for camera using plural film types.


CLS 396/520
TXT Adjustable:

    Subject matter under subclass 519 wherein the retaining parts are adaptable
    to fit surfaces of different sizes.


CLS 396/521
TXT Solution drain or resistant:

    Subject matter under subclass 517 wherein the support means permits
    collection of a liquid from wet plates or prevents or withstands the
    injurious effects of such liquid.


CLS 396/522
TXT Closure lock or check:

    Subject matter under subclass 517 including means to retain the slide,
    door, or other plateholder closure or prevent reexposure of the
    light-sensitive material.


CLS 396/523
TXT Auxiliary:

    Subject matter under subclass 517 wherein the support means are for the
    purpose of supplying plates or light-sensitive material to and removing the
    same from ``principal" plateholders in daylight and either do not
    themselves hold the plate or light-sensitive material during exposure or
    have independent front closures and are otherwise light-excluding.

    (1)     Note.  When these auxiliary holders contain more than one plate and
    are capable of successively supplying these plates to exposure positions,
    the holders become magazines and are classified in this class, subclasses
    360+, if claimed alone or with a detailed camera, unless the device is a
    mere double plateholder.


CLS 396/524
TXT Having dark slide:

    Subject matter under subclass 517 wherein a removable or displaceable
    sliding member, located parallel and adjacent to the image-receiving plate
    or sheet, protects the light- sensitive material from outside light before
    and after exposure and is removed or displaced while in exposing position
    to uncover the image receiving surface to permit exposure.


CLS 396/525
TXT Having hinged part:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 wherein a cover or other member (other
    than the light seal protecting the dark slide entrance) is mounted by means
    of hinges or the equivalent relative to the portion of the support means
    supporting the plate.


CLS 396/526
TXT Double holder:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 wherein two plates, sheets or light
    sensitive materials are supported so as to be parallel but facing in
    opposite directions.


CLS 396/527
TXT Self-developing:

    Subject matter under subclass 517 wherein each sheet of light-sensitive
    material carries the chemicals necessary for processing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30+,    for a complete self-developing camera.


CLS 396/528
TXT Flexible holder:

    Subject matter under subclass 517 wherein the means for containing the
    light sensitive material is made of a nonrigid material.


CLS 396/529
TXT Lens mount:

    Subject matter under subclass 439 including structure engaging the rim
    portion around substantially the entire circumference or rim of the
    objective or its components to secure the objective to the camera
    supporting structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, appropriate subclasses for lens supports
    together with motion picture structure.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    819+ for lens mounts, per se, and the mere recitation of a camera wall or
    mounting plate or focal plane is not sufficient to remove the lens mounting
    structures therefrom. Also see (2) Note of subclass 819.


CLS 396/530
TXT Lens adapter:

    Subject matter under subclass 529 including means for connecting a lens
    having one type of engaging structure with a camera having a different type
    of engaging structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for supplemental optical device that attaches to the objective and
    which modifies focal length or which permits closeup photography.


CLS 396/531
TXT Bayonet mount:

    Subject matter under subclass 529 wherein the engaging structure comprises
    a rotatable pin and slot mechanism on the lens and camera body.


CLS 396/532
TXT Having electrical contact detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 531 including specific structure of the means
    for transmitting electrical power or signals from the lens to the camera
    body.


CLS 396/533
TXT Threaded mount:

    Subject matter under subclass 529 wherein the engaging structure comprises
    mutually engaging helical grooves on the lens and camera body.


CLS 396/534
TXT Hood:

    Subject matter under subclass 439 having means for reducing  light upon or
    excluding light from a focusing surface in order that an image formed upon
    it may be clearly seen (e.g., curtains, shade, cover, etc).


CLS 396/535
TXT Body structure or housing:

    Subject matter under subclass 439 having structure for receiving light
    sensitive material for cooperating with significant camera mechanism or for
    substantially encasing or enclosing camera mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 121 for flexible corrugated
    bellows, per se.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 10.1 for cabinet structure
    for projector.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 242 for motion picture projector
    housings.

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, subclass 119 for image projector
    housings.


CLS 396/536
TXT Rear door or latch detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 535 including specific structure of a rear
    closure member or the mechanism for holding the rear closure member in
    closed position.


CLS 396/537
TXT Having viewing port:

    Subject matter under subclass 536 including a transparent window for
    observing selected conditions interiorly of a camera housing.


CLS 396/538
TXT Film chamber detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 535 including specific structure of a
    compartment holding the light-sensitive material.


CLS 396/539
TXT Battery compartment:

    Subject matter under subclass 535 wherein the body has structure
    particularly adapted for receiving a battery therein.


CLS 396/540
TXT Ergonomic design:

    Subject matter under subclass 535 wherein the structure has a particular
    shape intended to enhance a comfort of an operator during use of the device.


CLS 396/541
TXT Modular body:

    Subject matter under subclass 535 wherein the camera body is comprised of
    individual component parts which may be selectively assembled in a desired
    configuration.


CLS 396/542
TXT Having printed circuit detail:

    Subject matter under 439 including details of a physical circuit layout or
    a printed circuit arrangement.


CLS 396/543
TXT With mechanical switch detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 439 including  mechanical details of a
    photographic switch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses
    for electrical switches, per se.


CLS 396/544
TXT CAMERA ATTACHMENT:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising accessory means which
    may be attached to a camera to facilitate taking a photograph.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for camera lens converter.

    429+,   for a complete camera combined with diverse art device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    885+ for absorption filters, per se.


CLS 396/545
TXT Vignetter:

    Subject matter under subclass 544 having means for partially masking a
    portion of the transverse area of a light path to produce a graduated
    shading effect.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    355,    Photocopying, subclasses 125+ for a diffusing or masking device
    used in contact printing.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    599 for miscellaneous optical diffusing systems or elements.


CLS 396/546
TXT EXPOSING MULTICOLOR CATHODE-RAY TUBE TARGETS:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means to record an
    image on a photosensitive surface, and which recorded image upon
    development is to be used as a multicolor luminescent target of a
    cathode-ray tube.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    430,    Radiation Image Chemistry-Process, Composition or Product,
    subclasses 23+ for radiation image chemistry involved in making a CRT
    element.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    appropriate subclasses for generic CRT manufacturing process and apparatus.


CLS 396/547
TXT Having light source or optical element which moves during exposure:

    Subject matter under subclass 546 wherein an illuminating source or light
    path modifying element is in motion during the exposure of multicolor
    cathode-ray tube targets.

    (1)     Note.  A moving light source may comprise a scanned light beam.


CLS 396/548
TXT LINE GENERATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition having means to generate a line
    by exposing a photosensitive surface to a light beam moving over the
    surface.

    (1)     Note.  The line may be part of a pattern or design to be drawn.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    549+,   for composing by selecting characters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, subclasses 107.1+ for a photographic-ray type recorder.


CLS 396/549
TXT PHOTOTYPE COMPOSING:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means for selecting, in
    a desired order or sequence, characters to be reproduced and reproducing an
    image of the characters in the desired arrangement on a photographic medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for object support in a studio.

    548,    for composing by generating a line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, subclasses 107.1+ for a photographic recorder.


CLS 396/550
TXT Photoelectronic type:

    Subject matter under subclass 549 wherein the characters to be reproduced
    are shown on a cathode-ray tube.


CLS 396/551
TXT Having character printing control by program card, tape, or disk:

    Subject matter under subclass 549 including means to sense holes,
    indentations, or other index marks on a sheet, tape, or disk and means
    responsive to the condition of such sensing means for governing the
    printing of the characters.


CLS 396/552
TXT Having justifying, tabulating, centering, or spacing apparatus:

    Subject matter under subclass 549 including means to adjust the space
    before, after, or between characters of a completed line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    554,    for line correction by optics.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), subclasses 4+ for type width
    and interword space totalizer.


CLS 396/553
TXT With electrical pulse counter:

    Subject matter under subclass 552 which includes a circuit which
    electrically totalizes pulses applied thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counter, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, appropriate subclasses for an electrical pulse
    counter, per se.


CLS 396/554
TXT Optical line correction:

    Subject matter under subclass 549 including optical means to change the
    length of a line or the size of the object to be reproduced.


CLS 396/555
TXT Having means to detect indicia:

    Subject matter under subclass 549 including means to sense holes,
    indentations, or other index markers on the character or character support
    and means responsive to the conditions of such sensing means for insuring
    the character will be reproduced in the desired arrangement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    551,    for the sensing of holes, indentations, or index marks, etc., on a
    web or tape to control printing of characters.


CLS 396/556
TXT Having stencil-type character means:

    Subject matter under subclass 549 including opaque planar means having a
    mark, sign, or symbol shaped perforation thereon.


CLS 396/557
TXT Plural character types:

    Subject matter under subclass 556 having two or more different styles of
    characters; e.g., upper or lower case letters.


CLS 396/558
TXT Having a moveable carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 556 including means to hold or support said
    characters and means to apply a force to said holder or support to effect a
    motion in a particular direction, or means to constrain the motion of said
    holder or support in a desired direction.


CLS 396/559
TXT Rotary:

    Subject matter under subclass 558 comprising means to cause the holder or
    support to move in a curvilinear path.


CLS 396/560
TXT Key operative:

    Subject matter under subclass 559 wherein the movement is caused by a
    manually actuated lever.


CLS 396/561
TXT Fixed carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 556 including means to hold or support the
    characters in a desired position fixedly with respect to a reproducing
    device.


CLS 396/562
TXT Photographic medium handling:

    Subject matter under subclass 549 including manipulation of a
    light-sensitive film or plate.


CLS 396/563
TXT SENSITOMETRY:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to the determination of
    the sensitivity of photographic material to light.

    (1)     Note.  Sensitometers test the sensitivity of photographic material
    to light whereas actinometers or exposure meters test light intensity and
    densitometers test the light transmission characteristics of material.

    (2)     Note. This subclass also provides for the making of optical wedges
    of varying light transmission characteristics involving the controlled
    exposure of photosensitive material to light for use in subsequent
    sensitometric apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    355,    Photocopying, subclasses 38, 68, and 83 for combinations including
    photocells or light-monitoring means.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 213+ for light exposure
    meters, per se, and subclasses 443+ for means which measure film density by
    light transmission or absorption. See (3) Note under subclass 443 for
    classification of methods which involve the comparison of optical densities
    of the type found in subclasses 443+ in combination with an exposure of a
    visible light sensitive film.

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    885+ for light filters, per se, and the classes recited thereat, under (1)
    Note.


CLS 396/564
TXT FLUID-TREATING APPARATUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition having a device for subjecting a
    photographic medium to a gas or liquid or to related subcombinations not
    classified elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  See the note to ``Fluid Treating Apparatus" in the main
    class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30+,    for a self-developing camera.

    FOR 915+, for foreign art collections involving fluid-treating apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 400- 696 for the process of dyeing a
    plastic.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, see (1) Note above.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    analogous apparatus applied to fluid treatment of textiles.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for coating
    a surface with a sensitized solution.

    355,    Photocopying,  see (1) Note above.

    366,    Agitating, see (1) Note above.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 237+ for liquid toner development in
    an electrophotographic device.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 401+ for chemical post imaging processing of radiation
    imagery materials.


CLS 396/565
TXT Having fluid filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 564 including a device which removes
    undesired particulate matter from the treatment fluid.


CLS 396/566
TXT Having program card, tape, or disk:

    Subject matter under subclass 564 which utilizes an  information bearing
    device that controls a fluid treating sequence of operations.


CLS 396/567
TXT Photographic medium or cartridge sensing:

    Subject matter under subclass 564 wherein a characteristic or presence of a
    light-sensitive medium or container therefor is detected.


CLS 396/568
TXT Photographic medium length, width, area, or amount sensing:

    Subject matter under subclass 567 wherein a geometric property or the
    quantity of a light- sensitive medium is detected.


CLS 396/569
TXT Transmittivity/reflectivity of photographic medium sensing:

    Subject matter under subclass 567 having means to project light onto or
    through a photographic medium and a detecting photoresponsive device which
    determines the density of the photographic medium or the extent of
    development.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    563,    for sensitometry which may include a subsequent density
    determination.


CLS 396/570
TXT Photocell controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 564 with a light- responsive device which
    regulates some portion of the fluid-treating apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213+,   for photocell exposure control circuits.

    FOR 916, for a foreign art collection involving photocell controlled
    fluid-treating apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 93 for mixtures maintained by optical
    properties.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for photocell circuits.


CLS 396/571
TXT Heating, cooling, or temperature detecting:

    Subject matter under subclass 564 with means for changing the temperature
    of the apparatus, fluid or material or sensing the thermal condition
    thereof.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes a processing fluid tank combined with
    a thermostatically controlled heat exchanger for the fluid in the tank.

    (2)     Note. Mere recitation of elements which may inherently affect the
    temperature, such as a circulating water bath, is insufficient for
    placement in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 917, for a foreign art collection involving fluid-treating apparatus
    and temperature control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 666 for automatic temperature control
    of coating apparatus.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 374 for a water heater vessel with
    automatic control.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 56+ for
    automatic control of apparatus of that class.


CLS 396/572
TXT Temperature detecting or controlling of drying station:

    Subject matter under subclass 571 which senses or regulates a temperature
    condition of or surrounding a photographic medium in an area adapted to
    remove moisture from the photographic medium.


CLS 396/573
TXT Having liquid bath or jacket:

    Subject matter under subclass 571 wherein a temperature condition inside a
    fluid-treating vessel is modified by surrounding liquid.


CLS 396/574
TXT Processing vapor from source other than photographic medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 571 wherein a latent image on a photographic
    medium is made visible by a gaseous substance provided externally to the
    photographic medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    579,    for generic gaseous treating of a photographic medium.


CLS 396/575
TXT Thermal developing, controlling temperature of photographic medium or
    controlling of developing amount:

    Subject matter under subclass 571 wherein heat causes a latent image on a
    photographic medium to become visible, the temperature of a light sensitive
    material is modified, or heating or cooling determines the extent of
    photographic development.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    572,    for temperature detecting or controlling of a drying station.


CLS 396/576
TXT Heating processing liquid before entry to treating station:

    Subject matter under subclass 571 wherein a liquid which performs a
    treating operation is warmed prior to its introduction to a treating
    station.


CLS 396/577
TXT Plural stations:

    Subject matter under subclass 571 including multiple treating stations.


CLS 396/578
TXT Having testing, calibration, or indicating:

    Subject matter under subclass 564 including an evaluation of a
    fluid-treating operation or the presentation of the result of such
    evaluation to an operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281+,   for camera structure with indicator.


CLS 396/579
TXT Gaseous-treating:

    Subject matter under the subclass 564 wherein the fluid is a gas or vapor.

    (1)     Note. This subclass includes an ammonia gas generator with means
    for containing a specific light-sensitive material in a specific
    orientation to allow treatment of the material by the generated gas.

    (2)     Note. See the note to ``Fluid Treating Apparatus" in the main class
    definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    438,    for subject matter related to daguerreotype photography.

    FOR 918, for a foreign art collection involving gaseous-type,
    fluid-treating apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, see (2) Note above.


CLS 396/580
TXT Treating superimposed or laminar sheets:

    Subject matter under subclass 564 wherein an image-exposed strip is brought
    into contact with a second strip for fluid treatment.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes apparatus for bringing a first sheet
    with an exposed image thereon into contact with a second (receptor) sheet
    after fluid has been applied thereto to effect the transfer of the image of
    the first sheet to the second sheet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31+,    for analogous apparatus in a self-developing camera.

    FOR 919+, for foreign art collections involving fluid-treating of
    superimposed or laminar sheets.


CLS 396/581
TXT Rollers sequentially submerge and press sheet:

    Subject matter under subclass 580 including revolving cylinders to immerse
    at least one of the strips in treating fluid and subsequently squeeze the
    strips together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 920, for a foreign art collection involving fluid-treating of
    superimposed or laminar sheets where rollers sequentially submerge and
    press sheet.


CLS 396/582
TXT Having fluid dispensing:

    Subject matter under subclass 580 including means for distributing treating
    fluid to one of the strips.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes dispensing means such as metered
    spray devices and wetting rollers or belts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for a self-developing camera with a fluid applicator.

    FOR 921+, for foreign art collections involving fluid-treating of
    superimposed or laminar sheets including fluid dispensing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    399,    Electrophotography, subclass 283 for dispensing of liquid toner in
    an electrophotographic device.


CLS 396/583
TXT Collapsible container:

    Subject matter under subclass 582 wherein the distributing means includes a
    rupturable holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 922, for a foreign art collection involving fluid-treating of
    superimposed or laminar sheets including fluid dispensing and having a
    collapsible container.


CLS 396/584
TXT Removable or variable pressure roller or particular roller texture,
    composition, configuration or spacing:

    Subject matter under subclass 583 in which a roller may be readily inserted
    or removed, exerts a modifiable force, or in which a detail is provided of
    a roller surface characteristic, chemical makeup, shape, or offset distance.


CLS 396/585
TXT Roll film handling:

    Subject matter under subclass 583 which includes manipulation of a
    photographic medium which has been formed into a cylindrical mass by
    revolving.


CLS 396/586
TXT Nonrolling fluid spreading apparatus:

    Subject matter under subclass 583 wherein fluid is distributed by means
    other than a rotating cylinder.


CLS 396/587
TXT Having fluid reservoir:

    Subject matter under subclass 580 including means to store the treating
    fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    641,    for a film processing vessel having a reservoir.

    FOR 923, for a foreign art collection involving fluid-treating of
    superimposed or laminar sheets and having a fluid reservoir.


CLS 396/588
TXT Reversal processing:

    Subject matter under subclass 564 with means for re-exposing the material
    with an initial latent image thereon.

    (1)     Note. This subclass includes means for exposing the material to
    diffused light after the material has been initially exposed, developed,
    but not fixed, to produce a positive image when again developed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 924, for a foreign art collection involving reversal processing
    fluid-treating apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclass 407 for reversal processing involving radiation imagery
    chemistry.


CLS 396/589
TXT Dark cabinet:

    Subject matter under subclass 564 with a light-excluding case adapted to
    hold the material while it is being subjected to the fluid subsequent to
    exposure.

    (1)     Note. The light-excluding features must be positively recited for
    placement in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30+,    for a self-developing camera.

    517+,   for a detail of a camera plate or cut film holder.

    FOR 925+, for foreign art collections involving a fluid-treating dark
    cabinet.


CLS 396/590
TXT Hand or body insertion:

    Subject matter under subclass 589 wherein the case includes means to admit
    a portion of an operator's body through flexible lightguards.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    362,    for a magazine camera with light guard for entrance of hand.

    FOR 926+, for foreign art collections involving a fluid-treating dark
    cabinet having hand or body insertion.


CLS 396/591
TXT Hand/arm access ports on opposite sides of cabinet:

    Subject matter under subclass 590 wherein there are hand/arm openings
    located on noncontiguous sides of a dark cabinet.


CLS 396/592
TXT Multiple hand/arm access ports on single side of cabinet:

    Subject matter under subclass 590 wherein there are plural hand/arm
    openings located on one side of a dark cabinet.


CLS 396/593
TXT Having ventilation:

    Subject matter under subclass 590 including means for circulating air
    through the case.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 927, for a foreign art collection involving a fluid-treating dark
    cabinet having hand or body insertion and ventilation.


CLS 396/594
TXT Daylight loading:

    Subject matter under subclass 589 having means for introducing the material
    into the case without the necessity of using a dark room.

    (1)     Note. This subclass includes means whereby the nonsensitive end of
    the material in a roll or cartridge is attached to a device which may be
    actuated after a lightproof cover of the case is closed to withdraw the
    sensitive portion for treatment within the lightproof environment of the
    dark cabinet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    612+,   for disclosed but unclaimed dark cabinet combinations including
    material feed means.

    FOR 928, for a foreign art collection involving a daylight loading dark
    cabinet.


CLS 396/595
TXT Having film-holding cabinet insertable into developing tank:

    Subject matter under subclass 589 including means to support the material
    in a casing which is insertable into a fluid-treating receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 929, for a foreign art collection involving a film-holding cabinet
    insertable into developing tank.


CLS 396/596
TXT Protective cover stripping:

    Subject matter under subclass 595 wherein a backing which prevents damage
    to a photographic medium is peeled off.


CLS 396/597
TXT Film in spaced spiral for processing:

    Subject matter under subclass 595 including rolled film which is inserted
    into means providing a spaced spiral configuration to the film or wherein
    rolled film is wrapped on the outside of an elongated cylinder prior to
    further processing.


CLS 396/598
TXT Having film support or handling means:

    Subject matter under subclass 589 including means to hold the material in
    position or manipulate the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 930+, for foreign art collections involving a dark cabinet and film
    support or handling means.


CLS 396/599
TXT Roll film handling:

    Subject matter under subclass 598 having means for manipulating the
    material that is wound into a cylindrical mass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 931+, for foreign art collections involving a dark cabinet and roll
    film handling means.


CLS 396/600
TXT Having motor driven film winding spool:

    Subject matter under subclass 599 including means to convert energy to
    produce or impart motion to a reel upon which the material is wound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    387+,   for a camera motor film drive.

    FOR 932, for a foreign art collection involving a dark cabinet and roll
    film handling means having motor driven film winding spool.


CLS 396/601
TXT Film in spaced spiral for processing:

    Subject matter under subclass 599 wherein the rolled film is inserted into
    means providing a spaced spiral configuration to the film or wherein the
    rolled film is wrapped on the outside of an elongated cylinder prior to
    further processing.


CLS 396/602
TXT Plate film handling means:

    Subject matter under subclass 598 wherein the material is relatively
    inflexible.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 933, for a foreign art collection involving a dark cabinet and plate
    film-handling means.


CLS 396/603
TXT Film immersed and removed:

    Subject matter under subclass 598 wherein the means to manipulate the
    material effects a dipping action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    617+,   for dipping means not limited to use in a dark cabinet.

    FOR 934, for a foreign art collection involving a dark cabinet having film
    support and film immersed and removed.


CLS 396/604
TXT Fluid application to one side only of photographic medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 564 wherein the device applies the fluid to
    only a single side of the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    582+,   where superimposed or laminar sheets are treated.

    FOR 935+, for foreign art collections involving fluid-treating apparatus
    having fluid application to one side only of film.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for means for applying a
    surface coating on a base.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 88+ for means
    including fluid-applying means.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 137+ and 208+
    for manually operated means for dispensing or applying material to work.


CLS 396/605
TXT By web:

    Subject matter under subclass 604 wherein fluid is applied by a pliable
    belt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 936, for a foreign art collection involving fluid-treating apparatus
    having fluid application by web to one side only of film.


CLS 396/606
TXT By roller:

    Subject matter under subclass 604 having a revolving cylinder as the fluid
    applicator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 936, for a foreign art collection involving fluid-treating apparatus
    having fluid application by roller to one side only of film.


CLS 396/607
TXT Having clutch or specified speed:

    Subject matter under subclass 606 which includes structure to couple or
    decouple driving means to a roller or having details of the rotational
    speed thereof.


CLS 396/608
TXT Having doctoring or wiper blade:

    Subject matter under subclass 606 which, in addition to a roller, includes
    the spreading of a predetermined amount of fluid to one side of a
    photographic medium by a broad, flat device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    610,    for fluid application by means other than a roller to a
    photographic medium contained in a cassette or cartridge which may
    additionally include a blade detail.


CLS 396/609
TXT Nonroller fluid application to downward facing emulsion surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 604 wherein fluid is dispensed towards the
    downward facing emulsion side of a photographic medium by means other than
    a rotating cylinder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    606+,   for a roller applying fluid to a downward facing emulsion surface.


CLS 396/610
TXT Having photographic medium cassette or cartridge:

    Subject matter under subclass 604 wherein a light-sensitive medium is in a
    light-tight, portable container.


CLS 396/611
TXT Plate or wafer-type photographic medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 604 wherein the light responsive medium is
    planar and relatively rigid.


CLS 396/612
TXT Having photographic medium feed:

    Subject matter under subclass 564 including means to introduce or withdraw
    the material into or from a fluid-treating area.

    (1)     Note. This and indented subclasses include means that provide
    sprockets that engage perforations in the material and which are driven by
    motive power means as well as means that grip one end of a film strip to
    pull the film strip.

    (2)     Note. Mere guide means that do not include drive or propelling
    means is not sufficient for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    387+,   for camera structure with film drive.

    FOR 937+, for foreign art collections involving fluid-treating apparatus
    having film feed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding and Reeling, appropriate subclasses, for winding and
    reeling means, per se.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, appropriate subclasses for feeding or
    delivering sheet material means.


CLS 396/613
TXT And cutting device:

    Subject matter under subclass 612 which includes means for severing the
    photographic medium or its container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    445,    for camera detail having film cutoff.


CLS 396/614
TXT And scrub brush, wipers, squeegee, or squeeze rollers:

    Subject matter under subclass 612 including means providing a rubbing
    action to the photographic medium.


CLS 396/615
TXT Variable path length, variable path width, or alternative path:

    Subject matter under subclass 612 wherein the route taken by the
    photographic medium during processing is adjustable in length, width, or
    wherein plural selectable routes are provided.


CLS 396/616
TXT Having clutch, speed detail, or variable processing time:

    Subject matter under subclass 612 which includes structure to couple or
    decouple driving means in the photographic medium feed, provides a detail
    of photographic medium feed velocity, or permits adjustable treatment time
    of the photographic medium.


CLS 396/617
TXT And photographic medium immersed and removed:

    Subject matter under subclass 612 with means to dip the material in the
    fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 938+, for foreign art collections involving fluid-treating apparatus
    including film feed where the film is immersed and removed.


CLS 396/618
TXT Having band, belt, or chain:

    Subject matter under subclass 617 in which the photographic medium
    transmission mechanism includes an elongated loop of material.


CLS 396/619
TXT Having detail of feed mechanism cleaning:

    Subject matter under subclass 617 including means to remove dirt or debris
    from the photographic medium feed structure or to facilitate cleaning
    thereof.


CLS 396/620
TXT Strip type:

    Subject matter under subclass 617 wherein the material is relatively long
    and narrow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 939, for a foreign art collection involving fluid-treating apparatus
    including strip film feed where the film is immersed and removed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for strip advancing means, per se.


CLS 396/621
TXT Crane type:

    Subject matter under subclass 620 wherein the strip-type material is
    suspended from an overhead device which transports it to a processing area.


CLS 396/622
TXT Plural stations:

    Subject matter under subclass 617 wherein there is more than one treating
    area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 940, for a foreign art collection involving fluid-treating apparatus
    including film feed where the film is immersed into and removed from plural
    stations.


CLS 396/623
TXT Film in spaced spiral for processing:

    Subject matter under subclass 612 wherein film is inserted into means
    providing a spaced spiral configuration to the film or wherein the rolled
    film is wrapped on the outside of an elongated cylinder prior to further
    processing.


CLS 396/624
TXT Plural stations:

    Subject matter under subclass 612 including photographic medium feed
    between multiple processing areas.


CLS 396/625
TXT Single station and plural fluids:

    Subject matter under subclass 564 wherein plural diverse fluids are
    selectively applied to the material and then withdrawn from a single
    processing area.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes means for supplying a liquid to a
    material processing tank, withdrawing the liquid, and repeating the
    sequence with a different liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 941, for a foreign art collection involving fluid-treating apparatus
    having a single station and plural fluids.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 94.1+ for means
    for supplying or applying plural different fluids.


CLS 396/626
TXT Having fluid-circulating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 564 including means for introducing and
    withdrawing the fluid to and from a treatment area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 942+, for foreign art collections involving fluid-treating apparatus
    and fluid circulating means.


CLS 396/627
TXT And fluid-spraying means:

    Subject matter under subclass 626 with fluid spraying means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 943, for a foreign art collection involving fluid-treating apparatus
    including fluid circulating and spraying means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses
    for fluid spraying means, per se.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclass 246 for spraying.


CLS 396/628
TXT And photographic medium support means:

    Subject matter under subclass 626 with means to hold the photographic
    medium in position for treatment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 944, for a foreign art collection involving fluid-treating apparatus
    including fluid circulating and plate support means.


CLS 396/629
TXT And rocking tray or support:

    Subject matter under subclass 626 including means to effect oscillation of
    a fluid vessel or material holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 945, for a foreign art collection involving fluid-treating apparatus
    including fluid circulating by rocking tray or support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    366,    Agitating, subclass 239 for a mixing chamber having rocking motion
    without a separate workholder.


CLS 396/630
TXT Plural stations:

    Subject matter under subclass 626 including multiple processing areas.


CLS 396/631
TXT For wash station:

    Subject matter under subclass 626 wherein circulating fluid is utilized in
    the processing area which provides rinsing of a photographic medium.


CLS 396/632
TXT Having electrical circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 626 wherein the fluid circulating means
    includes plural interconnected electrical elements.

    (1)     Note. Examples of electrical elements are transistors, diodes,
    resistors, and capacitors.


CLS 396/633
TXT Having fluid-agitating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 564 including means within a treating vessel
    for vibrating the fluid or means to vibrate the vessel or a material holder
    to produce fluid vibration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 946+, for foreign art collections involving fluid-treating apparatus
    including fluid agitating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 108+ for agitation by vibration.


CLS 396/634
TXT Rotating carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 633 wherein the means includes a revolving
    material holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 947+, for foreign art collections involving fluid-treating apparatus
    including fluid-agitating and rotating carrier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 157+ for
    apparatus including a rotary work holder.


CLS 396/635
TXT Motor driven:

    Subject matter under subclass 634 including means to convert energy to
    produce or impart motion to the holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 948, for a foreign art collection involving fluid-treating apparatus
    including fluid agitating and motor driven rotating carrier.


CLS 396/636
TXT Photographic medium processing vessel:

    Subject matter under subclass 564 wherein the device includes a fluid
    receptacle for the treatment of the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 949+, for foreign art collections involving a fluid-treating apparatus
    film or print processing vessel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, appropriate subclasses for receptacles, per se, and
    the search notes therein for other pertinent classes.

    366,    Agitating, subclass 166.1 for print washer-type agitator.  Also,
    see Section V of the class definition of this class (396).


CLS 396/637
TXT Having interlocking doors:

    Subject matter under subclass 636 including treating areas separated by a
    light-excluding partition and interlinked closures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 950, for a foreign art collection involving a fluid-treating apparatus
    film or print processing vessel having interlocking doors.


CLS 396/638
TXT Attachment or accessory:

    Subject matter under subclass 636 including a device which may be attached
    to the receptacle or to a support for the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 951+, for foreign art collections involving a fluid-treating apparatus
    film or print processing vessel including an attachment or accessory.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 694+ for attachments for metallic
    receptacles.


CLS 396/639
TXT Visual photographic medium scanner:

    Subject matter under subclass 638 wherein the attachment device includes
    means to permit the visual scanning of the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 952, for a foreign art collection involving a fluid-treating apparatus
    film or print processing vessel including an attachment or accessory which
    allows visual film scanning.


CLS 396/640
TXT Adjustable photographic medium holding means:

    Subject matter under subclass 638 wherein the device includes means to
    alter the position of a material support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 953, for a foreign art collection involving a fluid-treating apparatus
    film or print processing vessel including an attachment or accessory which
    allows adjustment of film holder.


CLS 396/641
TXT Reservoir:

    Subject matter under subclass 638, wherein the attachable device is a fluid
    storage means.

    (1)     Note. This subclass includes structure defining a fluid recess that
    may depend upon the position of the vessel.  That is, the attachment may
    form a lip with the top of the vessel so that when the vessel is placed on
    a side, a fluid recess is formed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    587,    for fluid-treating of superimposed or laminar sheets having a fluid
    reservoir.

    FOR 954, for a foreign art collection involving a fluid-treating apparatus
    film or print processing vessel including an attachment or accessory
    reservoir.


CLS 396/642
TXT Having photographic medium support:

    Subject matter under subclass 636 including structure to hold the
    light-sensitive material.

    (1)     Note. This subclass includes a tank or tray with film supports that
    are integral with the tank or tray such as projections that space the
    material from the bottom of the tank or tray.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 955, for a foreign art collection involving a fluid-treating apparatus
    film or print processing vessel including film or plate support.


CLS 396/643
TXT In shallow tray or pan:

    Subject matter under subclass 642 wherein the support of the
    light-sensitive medium is located in an open container of negligible depth.


CLS 396/644
TXT For plate:

    Subject matter under subclass 642 which provides support for a relatively
    rigid photographic medium.


CLS 396/645
TXT Having film-guiding ribs:

    Subject matter under subclass 636 including passive means to limit a path
    of movement of the material  during its treatment by a fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 956, for a foreign art collection involving a fluid-treating apparatus
    film or print processing vessel and film guiding ribs.


CLS 396/646
TXT Film guide:

    Subject matter under subclass 564 having passive means to limit a path of
    movement of the material during its treatment by a fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    642,    for a film-processing vessel with film support.

    FOR 957, for a foreign art collection involving a fluid-treating apparatus
    including film guide.



    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, may include a nominal
    recitation of a supply or take-up coil (e.g., less than a support for such
    a coil or a cooperative relationship between a tension or exhaust detector
    and reel driving or reel stopping means, etc.), subclass 196.1 for a
    passive guide combined with a material feeder.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, Guiding, subclasses 615+ for a residual guide
    or guard that directs elongated flexible material that may be combined with
    more than nominal winding structure.


CLS 396/647
TXT Photographic medium holding device:

    Subject matter under subclass 564 having structure by which the material is
    lifted, stretched or supported for treatment and wherein the structure is
    independent of a fluid vessel.

    (1)     Note. This subclass provides for film, print, or plateholders, per
    se, that are manually manipulated by an operator and are generally designed
    to contact the light-sensitive material in areas that will not mar the
    image areas while allowing fluid contact with the image areas when the
    holder and material is moved into treatment areas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    642,    for a film-processing vessel with film support.

    FOR 958+, for foreign art collections involving a fluid-treating apparatus
    film-holding device.


CLS 396/648
TXT Spool:

    Subject matter under subclass 647 wherein the structure is cylindrical
    usually having a rim or ridge at each end and an axial portion on which or
    about which the material is placed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 959, for a foreign art collection involving a fluid-treating apparatus
    film holding spool device.


CLS 396/649
TXT Tensioning means:

    Subject matter under subclass 647 wherein the structure includes means for
    stretching the material.

    (1)     Note. ``Tensioning" as used herein does not include the inherent
    tensioning that occurs when the material is bowed or slightly bent when
    inserted into retaining slots or grooves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 960, for a foreign art collection involving a fluid-treating apparatus
    film-holding tensioning device.


CLS 396/650
TXT Adjustable means:

    Subject matter under subclass 647 wherein the structure includes means to
    permit movement of elements to accommodate material of different sizes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 961, for a foreign art collection involving a fluid-treating apparatus
    film holding device which is adjustable.


CLS 396/651
TXT Retaining means:

    Subject matter under subclass 647 wherein the structure includes means for
    restraining the material.

    (1)     Note. This subclass includes hangers or holders with slots, guides,
    or compartments for loosely holding the material and does not include
    clamping.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    652+,   for photographic medium clamping means.

    FOR 962, for a foreign art collection involving a fluid-treating apparatus
    film-retaining device.


CLS 396/652
TXT Gripping means:

    Subject matter under subclass 647 wherein the structure includes means to
    clamp the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 963+, for foreign art collections involving a fluid-treating apparatus,
    film-gripping device.


CLS 396/653
TXT Frame with opposed force-gripping means:

    Subject matter under subclass 652 having an open structure providing means
    in fixed spatial relationship which can apply opposing force to both sides
    of at least one set of noncontiguous film edges.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 964, for a foreign art collection involving a fluid-treating apparatus
    opposed frame-gripping means.


CLS 396/654
TXT Plate:

    Subject matter under subclass 652 wherein the structure is adapted to clamp
    relatively rigid material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    438,    for a daguerreotype plate vise.

    FOR 965, for a foreign art collection involving a fluid-treating apparatus,
    plate-gripping means.


CLS 396/655
TXT RETOUCHING:

    Subject matter under the class definition including mechanical means for
    improving a photographic surface by adding lines, stipples, etc.

    (1)     Note. Broadly claimed tools, per se, that are disclosed for
    multiple utility will be classified with the other art device; e.g.,
    cleaning, abrading, coating, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 966+, for foreign art collections involving photographic retouching.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, and the notes thereto in
    regard to manually manipulated devices for applying or spreading a coating
    on a work surface by movement of the device relative to the surface and
    contact therewith.  Note especially section V of the definitions thereat.

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 118+ for similar tools.


CLS 396/656
TXT Stand:

    Subject matter under subclass 655 having means for holding an article which
    is to be retouched, usually characterized by an open framework which
    permits illumination of the underside of the article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 967+, for foreign art collections involving a photographic retouching
    stand.


CLS 396/657
TXT Vibrating:

    Subject matter under subclass 656 including means to give a vibratory
    motion to the holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 968, for a foreign art collection involving a photographic vibrating
    retouching stand.


CLS 396/658
TXT BURNISHING:

    Subject matter under class definition having means to polish a photographic
    image by applying friction to it or heat and pressure to it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    438,    for a daguerreotype plate vise that may be used for burnishing.

    FOR 969+, for foreign art collections involving photographic burnishing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, appropriate subclasses for  burnishing
    machines and tools adapted for boot or shoe making.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 90.01+ for machines or processes for
    condensing, compacting, smoothing or polishing the surface of metallic or
    nonmetallic articles, usually by rubbing them with a smooth surface of
    greater hardness than that of the article being operated upon.

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, appropriate subclasses for ironing
    and smoothing fabrics generally.

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses for presses not otherwise provided
    for.


CLS 396/659
TXT Rotary burnishing surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 658 wherein the surface which actually
    polishes the photograph revolves around an axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 970+, for foreign art collections involving photographic rotary machine
    burnishing.


CLS 396/660
TXT Internally heated:

    Subject matter under subclass 659 including means to raise the temperature
    of a rotary tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    FOR 971, for a foreign art collection involving photographic burnishing by
    a rotary machine which is internally heated.


CLS 396/661
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition which is not provided for in any
    of the preceding subclasses of this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    462,    Books, Strips and Leaves for Manifolding, subclasses 25+ for
    transfer strips, per se.

    FOREIGN ART COLLECTIONS

    Subclasses 1-661 in this class may have associated
    foreign-patents/nonpatent-literature from that portion of Class 354
    foreign-patents/nonpatent-literature which was reclassified.  The remaining
    foreign-patents/nonpatent-literature from old Class 354 have been
    transferred directly to foreign art collections below (FOR 700-FOR 971)
    which are intended as repositories for only
    foreign-patents/nonpatent-literature.  Foreign-patents/nonpatent-literature
    in subclasses 1-661 as well as in the foreign art collections (FOR 700-FOR
    971) should be considered in completing a search.  The Class 354 subclass
    reference in parentheses following each subclass title below provides the
    source of the respective foreign-patents/nonpatent-literature.  Definitions
    below correspond to the respective Class 354 subclass definitions.


CLS 396/FOR700
TXT AUTOMATIC CAMERA FOCUSING: (354/400)

    Foreign art collection including means responsive to a focus condition of
    the camera and for automatically adjusting the lens system of the camera to
    produce a desired degree of sharpness of an image.


CLS 396/FOR701
TXT Using sound: (354/401)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 700 in which the distance to an object is
    determined by emitting or detecting sound.


CLS 396/FOR702
TXT Having photoelectric focusing system or device: (354/402)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 700 including a photoelectric means
    responsive to the focus condition of the camera and for adjusting the lens
    system of the camera to produce a desired degree of sharpness of an image.


CLS 396/FOR703
TXT Using active ranging: (354/403)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 702 in which the photoelectric means
    responds to artificially generated light reflected off an object.


CLS 396/FOR704
TXT Having moving optical means in front of photocell: (354/404)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 702 having an optical means other than
    the camera lens which is moved in a manner in front of the photoelectric
    means for focusing purposes.


CLS 396/FOR705
TXT Having moving mirror: (354/405)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 704 in which the optical means is a
    mirror.


CLS 396/FOR706
TXT Having stationary beam splitter: (354/406)

    Subject matter subclass FOR 702 having a stationary optical means which
    splits the image light into a plurality of paths for focusing purposes.


CLS 396/FOR707
TXT Having split image means: (354/407)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 706 in which the stationary optical means
    fractures the image light into more than one partial image for focusing
    purposes.


CLS 396/FOR708
TXT Having two separate stationary predetector optical systems: (354/408)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 702 having two photoelectric means each
    one having a stationary lens  system of focusing the image of an object.


CLS 396/FOR709
TXT Having focus indicator: (354/409)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 702 having an indicator which shows the
    state of focus of the camera.


CLS 396/FOR710
TXT AUTOMATIC EXPOSURE CONTROL SYSTEM OR DEVICE: (354/410)

    Foreign art collection having means which automatically controls the
    exposure of photographic film in combination with camera structure.


CLS 396/FOR711
TXT Nonphotoelectric exposure control type: (354/411)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 710 having a radiant energy responsive
    device which does not employ the photoelectric effect (e.g., comparison
    photometer).


CLS 396/FOR712
TXT For controlling entire photographic operation: (354/412)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 710 which includes circuitry for
    controlling the entire photographic operation of exposing photographic
    film.


CLS 396/FOR713
TXT Including artificial illumination system or device: 354/413)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 710 including a light source to direct
    light to an object, or means to control the intensity or time interval of
    light from the light source.


CLS 396/FOR714
TXT For fill-in illumination: (354/414)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 713 in which the artificial light is used
    to supplement natural lighting.


CLS 396/FOR715
TXT Having preexposure flashing: (354/415)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 713 in which an entire flash cycle occurs
    prior to commencing an exposure cycle and second flash cycle occurs during
    the exposure cycle.


CLS 396/FOR716
TXT Having flash termination control: (354/416)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 713 in which illumination from the
    artificial light source is terminated after a time determined by a light
    responsive device.


CLS 396/FOR717
TXT Quench type: (354/417)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 716 in which termination occurs by
    shorting or shunting the flash power source.


CLS 396/FOR718
TXT Charge level or power supply responsive: (354/418)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 713 having circuitry responsive to the
    charge level or power supply condition of the flash device.


CLS 396/FOR719
TXT Automatically activated under low light condition:(354/419)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 713 in which the flash device is
    automatically enabled whenever insufficient scene light exists.


CLS 396/FOR720
TXT Controlling exposure without controlling flash: (354/420)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 713 in which artificial illumination is
    held constant and circuitry adjusts either the diaphragm or exposure time
    dependent on the artificial illumination.


CLS 396/FOR721
TXT Having follow focus control of exposure: (354/421)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 720 having means for setting the distance
    to the subject which controls the exposure circuitry.


CLS 396/FOR722
TXT Having single circuit controlling the shutter and diaphragm: (354/422)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 720 in which a single circuit controls
    both the shutter and diaphragm.


CLS 396/FOR723
TXT Having means for controlling only the diaphragm: (354/423)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 720 in which circuitry controls only the
    diaphragm functions.


CLS 396/FOR724
TXT Having photocell used as flash trigger: (354/424)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 713 in which the light responsive means
    responds to a burst of light for triggering the start of flash operation.


CLS 396/FOR725
TXT Having log transformation circuit: (354/425)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 710 in which the voltage or current from
    a light responsive means is transformed to a natural log function.


CLS 396/FOR726
TXT Digital: (354/426)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 725 in which a counter or register is
    used for transformation.


CLS 396/FOR727
TXT Having log expansion: (354/427)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 725 in which the logarithmic voltage or
    current is inversely transformed to its original value.


CLS 396/FOR728
TXT Having temperature compensation circuit: (354/428)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 725 having circuitry which electrically
    compensates for changes in the logarithmic transformation circuitry due to
    temperature changes.


CLS 396/FOR729
TXT Having plural photocells: (354/429)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 710 having more than one light responsive
    device.


CLS 396/FOR730
TXT   Measuring special property of light or subject (e.g., color,
    speed, etc.): (354/430)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 729 in which the light responsive means
    measures properties of the light other than intensity.


CLS 396/FOR731
TXT Having light reflected from film or shutter: (354/431)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 729 in which the light responsive means
    receives light which has been reflected from the film or shutter in the
    camera.


CLS 396/FOR732
TXT Having more than two cells: (354/432)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 729 in which more than two discrete light
    responsive means are present.


CLS 396/FOR733
TXT Having only two cells measuring light directly from subject: (354/433)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 729 in which only two light responsive
    means are present and each receive light directly from the object with no
    more than a lens or aperture in front of each light responsive means.


CLS 396/FOR734
TXT Having only two cells used to control exposure time: (354/434)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 729 in which only two light responsive
    means are present and the outputs of each are used to control exposure time.


CLS 396/FOR735
TXT Having circuit for controlling a diaphragm shutter: (354/435)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 710 including a circuit which controls a
    single means behind the camera's optical system for limiting both the cross
    sectional area of the admitted light and the length of time the film is
    exposed to the light.


CLS 396/FOR736
TXT Walking beam type: (354/436)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 735 in which the diaphragm shutter is
    formed by two sliding rigid plates which move in opposite directions.


CLS 396/FOR737
TXT Using digital control: (354/437)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 736 in which the circuit contains either
    a counter, register or analog to digital converter.


CLS 396/FOR738
TXT Clamp or stop needle type: (354/438)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 735 in which the specific maximum
    aperture is set by a follower making mechanical contact with the needle of
    a galvanometer which is controlled by the circuit.


CLS 396/FOR739
TXT Stepping motor type: (354/439)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 735 in which the diaphragm shutter is
    driven by a stepping motor.


CLS 396/FOR740
TXT Solenoid control type: (354/440)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 735 in which a solenoid is used to
    release the diaphragm shutter or to stop the diaphragm shutter at a
    specific aperture size.


CLS 396/FOR741
TXT Having circuit for controlling separate diaphragm and shutter: (354/441)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 710 including a circuit which controls a
    separate means for limiting the cross sectional area of the admitted light
    and a separate means for limiting the length of time the film is exposed to
    the light.


CLS 396/FOR742
TXT Having selectable priority: (354/442)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 741 in which electrical parameters of the
    circuit may be manually set to selectively set exposure time or aperture or
    to have both exposure time and aperture automatically determined.


CLS 396/FOR743
TXT Having programmed control only: (354/443)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 741 in which aperture and exposure time
    are both always automatically set.


CLS 396/FOR744
TXT Having exposure time priority only: (354/444)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 741 in which exposure time is always
    manually set and aperture is always automatically set.


CLS 396/FOR745
TXT Having aperture priority only: (354/445)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 741 in which aperture is always manually
    set and exposure time is always automatically set.


CLS 396/FOR746
TXT Having circuit for controlling diaphragm only: (354/446)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 710 including a circuit which is limited
    solely to controlling the cross sectional area of the admitted light.


CLS 396/FOR747
TXT Clamp or stop needle type: (354/447)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 746 in which the specific maximum
    aperture is set by a follower making mechanical contact with the needle of
    a galvanometer which is controlled by the circuit.


CLS 396/FOR748
TXT Ratchet/pawl type: (354/448)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 746 in which the diaphragm is stopped at
    a specific aperture by engagement of a pawl with a ratchet.


CLS 396/FOR749
TXT Direct drive galvanometer type: (354/449)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 746 in which the rotation of a
    galvanometer controlled by the circuit is directly transmitted via a shaft
    or gear train for moving the diaphragm to a specific aperture.


CLS 396/FOR750
TXT Having bridge circuit: (354/450)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 749 in which the circuit contains a
    network having two terminal pairs one of which is connected to a
    galvanometer and arranged such that when power is fed to one terminal pair,
    by suitable adjustment of the elements in the network, zero output is
    obtained at the terminal pair connected to the galvanometer.


CLS 396/FOR751
TXT Servo motor type: (354/451)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 746 in which the circuit contains a
    feedback section indicative of the specific aperture value which is used to
    make further adjustment to the aperture.


CLS 396/FOR752
TXT Using stepping motor: (354/452)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 751 in which the servo circuit is used to
    control a stepping motor which drives the diaphragm to a specific aperture.


CLS 396/FOR753
TXT Including special driving arrangement: (354/453)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 746 in which the diaphragm is driven
    directly by a linear solenoid, electrostatic force or by an electro-optical
    means.


CLS 396/FOR754
TXT Including irregular diaphragm opening: (354/454)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 746 in which the diaphragm means produces
    an irregularly varying aperture.


CLS 396/FOR755
TXT Having interchangeable lens: (354/455)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 746 in which the circuit is adapted to be
    used in cameras having interchangeable lens.


CLS 396/FOR756
TXT AERIAL CAMERA: (354/65)

    Foreign art collection wherein a camera is specifically adapted for aerial
    photography or a camera combined with or specially adapted for attachment
    to a support which is at a practically inaccessible altitude or a camera
    with means specially adapted for controlling exposures at inaccessible
    altitudes.



CLS 396/FOR757
TXT Having shutter or film feed speed and air or spin speed
    synchronizing: (354/66)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 756 wherein the camera has means for
    varying the speed of the shutter or light sensitive material feeding
    mechanism in response to a change in the speed of an air vehicle.


CLS 396/FOR758
TXT Remote exposure control: (354/67)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 756 including means to control a camera
    by a device actuated by radiation whereby an operator or a radiation source
    can control the camera through the device from a remote point.


CLS 396/FOR759
TXT Simultaneous recording of plural images: (354/68)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 756 wherein two or more images are
    recorded at the same time.


CLS 396/FOR760
TXT Plural images recorded on plural film: (354/69)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 759 wherein the plural images are
    recorded on separate light sensitive materials.


CLS 396/FOR761
TXT Having camera direction stabilizing (e.g., gyroscope, etc.): (354/70)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 756 wherein the camera has an image
    stabilizing system to compensate for the movement of the camera holding
    structure.


CLS 396/FOR762
TXT Including continuously moving film: (354/71)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 756 wherein a film is shifted without
    interruption during the recording of a picture.


CLS 396/FOR763
TXT Having indicator, signal or scale: (354/72)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 756 including means to indicate
    information pertaining to the operation of the camera to an operator.


CLS 396/FOR764
TXT Including synchronization: (354/73)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 756 having means for operating in timed
    relation two or more devices, e.g., shutter and diaphragm, shutter and
    illumination means, etc.


CLS 396/FOR765
TXT Support or holder: (354/74)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 756 including means for supporting the
    camera against gravity.


CLS 396/FOR766
TXT EXPOSURE IDENTIFICATION: (354/105)

    Foreign art collection including camera structure and means to facilitate
    marking light sensitive surfaces for identification purposes.


CLS 396/FOR767
TXT Autographic camera: (354/106)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 766 wherein said means is part of the
    camera structure.


CLS 396/FOR768
TXT Stencil or indicia transfer strip: (354/107)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 767 wherein said means involves the use
    of a stencil or transfer strip.


CLS 396/FOR769
TXT Removable: (354/108)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 768 wherein said strip is inserted or
    extracted from said camera during normal usage.


CLS 396/FOR770
TXT Having auxiliary identification photographing system: (354/109)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 766 including means for recording a
    plurality of objects in a plurality of planes, the reproduction of which is
    recorded on a single frame of said surface.


CLS 396/FOR771
TXT OBJECT ILLUMINATION COMBINED WITH CAMERA STRUCTURE: (354/126)

    Foreign art collection having artificial means to illuminate a subject in
    combination with camera structure.


CLS 396/FOR772
TXT Having measuring, testing or indicating: (354/127.1)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 771 including means for measuring,
    testing or indicating some condition of the illumination source or the
    camera structure.


CLS 396/FOR773
TXT Having flash ready indicator: (354/127.11)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 772 in which the readiness of the flash
    device is indicated.


CLS 396/FOR774
TXT Indicating power source status: (354/127.12)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 773 in which the indicator is responsive
    to the quantity of charge on a capacitor,  the quantity of voltage or
    current of a battery or operative status of an electric energy source which
    powers the flash unit.


CLS 396/FOR775
TXT Having distance indicator: (354/127.13)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 772 in which the indicator sets or
    displays the distance from the flash unit to the subject.


CLS 396/FOR776
TXT Having camera synchronization: (354/129)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 771 including means to actuate the
    shutter in timed relationship with the illumination means.


CLS 396/FOR777
TXT Shutter controlled by explosive force of flash device: (354/130)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 776 including a combustible material
    whose ignition provides a mechanical force to operate a shutter mechanism.


CLS 396/FOR778
TXT Remote control (e.g., radio wave, etc.): (354/131)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 776 including means to control a camera
    by a device actuated by radiation whereby an operator or a radiation source
    can control the camera through the device from a remote point.


CLS 396/FOR779
TXT Multiple illumination units: (354/132)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 776 including more than one illumination
    means simultaneously operated.


CLS 396/FOR780
TXT Having shutter relay or solenoid: (354/133)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 776 including electromagnetic means to
    actuate or release a shutter.


CLS 396/FOR781
TXT Having pneumatic shutter release: (354/134)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 776 including gas pressure means to
    actuate a shutter.


CLS 396/FOR782
TXT Energizing generator contained in flash unit: (354/135)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 776 including an electromechanical
    transducer which forms part of a flash unit to produce electric current for
    energizing the illumination means.


CLS 396/FOR783
TXT Reflex focusing mirror closes contacts: (354/136)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 776 including an illumination circuit
    that is closed by the movement of a reflex focusing mirror from a focusing
    position to an exposure position.


CLS 396/FOR784
TXT Having time delay adjustment means: (354/137)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 776 wherein means are provided for
    varying the time interval between the initiation of the illumination and
    the shutter actuation.


CLS 396/FOR785
TXT Positional: (354/138)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 784 including means to change the time
    interval by moving an element to a selected position.


CLS 396/FOR786
TXT Having detachable synchronizer: (354/140)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 776 including means to disconnect the
    synchronizer from the camera.


CLS 396/FOR787
TXT Convertible illumination means: (354/141)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 776 including means for changing from one
    type of illumination means to another.


CLS 396/FOR788
TXT Percussive illumination source: (354/142)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 776 including mechanical means to deliver
    a striking blow to combustible illuminating material.


CLS 396/FOR789
TXT Flash unit includes spare lamps: (354/143)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 776 including means for sequentially
    substituting operative lamps for expended lamps.


CLS 396/FOR790
TXT Having unison film advance and lamp switching: (354/144)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 789 including means for coordinating the
    introduction of unexposed light sensitive surface into an exposing position
    and the substitution of an operative illumination lamp into illumination
    position.


CLS 396/FOR791
TXT Electronic flash unit: (354/145.1)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 776 having an illumination source of the
    gas discharge type.


CLS 396/FOR792
TXT Curtain shutter: (354/146)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 776 including a light excluding member
    which is a flexible sheet or curtain with an opening which passes across a
    light sensitive surface to produce an exposure and is usually roller
    mounted.


CLS 396/FOR793
TXT Flash unit contacts actuated by shutter movement: (354/147)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 776 including an electrical firing
    circuit with switch contacts that are mechanically controlled by the
    mechanical movement of a shutter or shutter actuator mechanism.


CLS 396/FOR794
TXT Lamp substitution: (354/148)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 771 including means for permitting
    movement of a spare source into illumination position.


CLS 396/FOR795
TXT Having variable illumination angle: (354/149.1):

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 771 in which the illumination angle is
    adjustable.


CLS 396/FOR796
TXT Having flash built into camera: (354/149.11)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 771 in which the illumination unit is
    part of the camera body.


CLS 396/FOR797
TXT INCLUDING MEANS TO REFLECT IMAGE TO FILM: (354/150)

    Foreign art collection having a mirror to reflect the light rays from an
    object onto a light sensitive surface.


CLS 396/FOR798
TXT TWIN LENS REFLEX CAMERA: (354/151)

    Foreign art collection comprising camera structure with two similar lenses,
    one a camera lens and one for a viewfinder, which are so coupled that they
    both focus on exactly the same plane and a mirror in a fixed position to
    reflect, through the viewfinder lens, exactly the same view as viewed by
    the camera lens.


CLS 396/FOR799
TXT REFLEX CAMERA WITH SINGLE OBJECTIVE: (354/152)

    Foreign art collection comprising camera structure with one lens and a
    mirror to reflect an exact view of a scene to a viewfinder and then the
    mirror is moved so the scene will be recorded.


CLS 396/FOR800
TXT Film advance means sets mirror: (354/153)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 799 including means to move a light
    sensitive surface from one frame to another and means to position the
    mirror so that it will reflect the scene to the viewfinder.


CLS 396/FOR801
TXT Having means to block light from film (e.g., screen, etc.): (354/154)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 799 having means to obstruct light from
    the light sensitive surface in addition to a shutter and mirror.


CLS 396/FOR802
TXT Plural optical means in view finder: (354/155)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 799 including a combination of two or
    more similar or diverse optical elements which are optically related.


CLS 396/FOR803
TXT Having manipulating means (e.g., lever, etc.): (354/156)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 799 having a lever which is operated by
    hand to move the mirror.


CLS 396/FOR804
TXT Plate camera: (354/157)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 799 including two or more sensitized
    surfaces, herein called ``plates", not in the same plane are encased within
    a camera and are brought to the exposure position one at a time without
    opening the receiver to light.


CLS 396/FOR805
TXT Folding, collapsible or bellows camera: (354/158)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 799 including means to effect a reduction
    in camera size from an operative condition to an inoperative condition.


CLS 396/FOR806
TXT PICTURE SIZE VARIABLE: (354/159)

    Foreign art collection having means to permit the recording of an image and
    means to change the physical dimensions of a frame.


CLS 396/FOR807
TXT CAMERA BACK OR FILM CARRIER  ANGULARLY ADJUSTABLE: (354/160)

    Foreign art collection having means to support a light-sensitive surface or
    means to cover the rear of a camera wherein either is shiftable with
    respect to an objective so that the vertical plane of the objective is not
    parallel to a vertical plane of the light-sensitive surface or means to
    cover the rear of the camera.


CLS 396/FOR808
TXT CAMERA FILM AND FOCUSING SCREEN EXCHANGEABLE: (354/161)

    Foreign art collection having a focusing surface and plateholder which are
    removable or detachable so that the surface and the plateholder can be
    successively brought into the same position relative to the lens.


CLS 396/FOR809
TXT WITH RANGEFINDER: (354/162)

    Foreign art collection having camera structure and means to measure the
    distance of an object from two fixed stations on the camera.


CLS 396/FOR810
TXT Rangefinder coupled with focusing: (354/163)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 809 wherein the means to measure the
    distance is joined to a camera lens and they both are moved simultaneously.


CLS 396/FOR811
TXT Having parallax correction: (354/164)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 810 including means to correct for the
    change in position of a scene seen in a viewfinder and that which will
    actually be photographed by a lens.


CLS 396/FOR812
TXT Focusing lights: (354/165)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 810 including means for projecting
    intersecting focusing light rays from a camera.


CLS 396/FOR813
TXT Having viewfinder: (354/166)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 810 including a viewing device attached
    to or part of a camera so as to indicate what portion of the view in front
    of the camera will actually be recorded.


CLS 396/FOR814
TXT Having adjustable coupling to compensate for change of camera
    lens: (354/167)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 810 including means to shift the means
    joining the rangefinder and lens to synchronize them.


CLS 396/FOR815
TXT Cam means to actuate rangefinder: (354/168)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 810 wherein the means to move the
    rangefinder is a surface of fixed points of varying distance from a fixed
    point which surface is in contact with a follower.


CLS 396/FOR816
TXT Lever means to actuate rangefinder: (354/169)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 810 wherein the means to move the
    rangefinder is an element which moves accurately about a fulcrum member.


CLS 396/FOR817
TXT MOTOR FILM DRIVE (e.g., spring, etc.): (354/170)

    Foreign art collection having camera structure and means to convert energy
    to produce or impart motion to a light-sensitive material.


CLS 396/FOR818
TXT Automatic film advance: (354/171)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 817 wherein the light-sensitive material
    is moved upon each actuation of a shutter by automatic mechanism.


CLS 396/FOR819
TXT Having spring tension indicator: (354/172)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 818 including means to indicate to an
    operator of a camera information pertaining to the operation of a spring
    motor.


CLS 396/FOR820
TXT Having electric motor: (354/173.1)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 818 in which the automatic mechanism
    includes an electric motor.


CLS 396/FOR821
TXT Having electronic timing: (354/173.11)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 820 in which the operation of the
    electric motor is limited and controlled by an electronic circuit having an
    electronic timing means.


CLS 396/FOR822
TXT MAGAZINE CAMERA: (354/174)

    Foreign art collection wherein two or more light sensitive surfaces, herein
    called ``plates", not in the same plane are encased within a camera
    structure or light-tight receiver attachable thereto and are brought to the
    exposure position one at a time without opening the receiver to light.


CLS 396/FOR823
TXT Rotatable magazine: (354/175)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 822 wherein the plates are mounted on a
    turret or drum magazine which is rotatable 360 degrees and which places a
    new plate in the exposure position upon a predetermined amount of rotation
    (e.g., a turret may have 2 or more sides with plates mounted on each side
    and pivoted at its center).


CLS 396/FOR824
TXT Hand-changed plate: (354/176)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 822 wherein a flexible end to the
    magazine-box or light-guard admits the hand of the operator to the box to
    permit a change of the plate to be effected by hand guidance of the
    changing mechanism or by a handhold on the plate.


CLS 396/FOR825
TXT Tilting magazine: (354/177)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 822 wherein the change of the plate from
    storage to exposure position or vice versa, necessitates vertical tilting
    or rotating a receiver constituting at least a part of the magazine and
    itself holding more than one plate in different planes.


CLS 396/FOR826
TXT Flexible carrier for plates: (354/178)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 822 wherein the magazine is characterized
    by flexible carrier means for transferring the plates between the storage
    and exposure positions.


CLS 396/FOR827
TXT Having tab means: (354/179)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 826 wherein each sensitized plate has its
    own carrier with a tab portion for manually pulling the plate around a
    curved track to or from the exposure area.


CLS 396/FOR828
TXT Sliding plate: (354/180)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 822 wherein the plate moves in a straight
    line.


CLS 396/FOR829
TXT Sliding and return: (354/181)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 828 wherein the plates in the receiver
    are moved in alternate directions from an exposure position and back to the
    receiver.


CLS 396/FOR830
TXT Intermediate exposure chamber: (354/182)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 828 wherein the plate is moved to an
    exposure position between two other plate receivers.


CLS 396/FOR831
TXT Quarter-turned plate: (354/183)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 822 including two receivers with plates,
    the planes of these plates are perpendicular to each other, and means for
    exposing the plates or transferring them from one receiver to the other.


CLS 396/FOR832
TXT Tilting: (354/184)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 831 wherein the plate transfer from one
    receiver to the other is effected by swinging the plate upon an axis in or
    near one of its edges.


CLS 396/FOR833
TXT Baseguides: (354/185)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 832 wherein the plate is guided at its
    base during movement between its two storage positions.


CLS 396/FOR834
TXT Rear plate replaceable: (354/186)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 822 wherein the plates are removed from
    one end or face of a receiver and replaced at the other end or back of the
    same receiver in a plane parallel to their first positions.


CLS 396/FOR835
TXT MANUAL CAMERA FOCUSING: (354/195.1)

    Foreign art collection having manually adjustable means for moving lenses
    of a camera to obtain sharpness of an image on a light sensitive surface
    and camera structure.


CLS 396/FOR836
TXT Diaphragm controlled by focusing: (354/195.11)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 835 wherein the lens is coupled to a
    diaphragm so that the diaphragm is set by movement of the lens.


CLS 396/FOR837
TXT Plural lenses: (354/195.12)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 835 having two or more lenses to direct
    light rays upon a light sensitive surface.


CLS 396/FOR838
TXT Having distance indicator: (354/195.13)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 835 including means to indicate the
    distance between the camera and the object to be photographed.


CLS 396/FOR839
TXT Having viewfinder: (354/199)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 835 including a viewing device attached
    to or part of a camera that will show a scene that is to be recorded.


CLS 396/FOR840
TXT Including focusing screen: (354/200)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 839 including a surface upon which the
    image formed by the lens can be seen.


CLS 396/FOR841
TXT And reflector: (354/201)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 840 including a mirror surface wherein
    light striking said mirror surface will return back into the medium from
    which it came and onto said focusing surface or screen.


CLS 396/FOR842
TXT CAMERA DETAILS: (354/202)

    Foreign art collection wherein the subject matter relates to miscellaneous
    structure or particular details adapted for or intended for use with a
    camera.


CLS 396/FOR843
TXT Film-restraining means: (354/203)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 842 having means to press or hold a film
    in a plane in which an image formed by a lens is sharp.


CLS 396/FOR844
TXT Interlocking film advance and shutter tension or setting: (354/204)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 842 having means for moving a
    light-sensitive material wherein the means is coupled with shutter
    mechanism.


CLS 396/FOR845
TXT Focal plane shutter: (354/205)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 844 wherein a shutter is located near the
    focal plane of a lens.


CLS 396/FOR846
TXT Including film movement limiting means: (354/206)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 844 having means to limit the light
    sensitive material to one frame.


CLS 396/FOR847
TXT Double exposure prevention: (354/207)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 842 wherein the camera has some structure
    or indicator which prevents or warns an operator of double exposure.


CLS 396/FOR848
TXT Foldable, collapsible, or extensible camera structure: (354/208)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 847 including means to effect a reduction
    in size of a foldable, collapsible, or extensible lens holder from an
    operative condition to an inoperative condition.


CLS 396/FOR849
TXT Having manual override (i.e., permits double exposure): (354/209)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 847 including means to permit an operator
    to manually manipulate a shutter actuating means so that a double exposure
    can be made.


CLS 396/FOR850
TXT Plural film type: (354/210)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 842 wherein the camera structure provides
    for more than one supply of light sensitive material for recording.


CLS 396/FOR851
TXT Film cut-off: (354/211)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 842 having means for cutting a portion of
    a light-sensitive material from a strip.


CLS 396/FOR852
TXT Film-advancing means: (354/212)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 842 having means for moving
    light-sensitive material.


CLS 396/FOR853
TXT Having film movement limiting means (i.e., movement stops after
    one frame):(354/213)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 852 including means to limit the
    light-sensitive material advance to one frame.


CLS 396/FOR854
TXT  Including rewind means: (354/214)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 852 comprising means to reverse the
    winding of the light-sensitive material.


CLS 396/FOR855
TXT Including film position indicating means: (354/215)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 852 comprising means to convey
    information to an operator related to the light sensitive material position
    with an exposure plane.


CLS 396/FOR856
TXT  Posterior roll: (354/216)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 852 having a roll which lies behind the
    plane upon which an exposure is made.


CLS 396/FOR857
TXT  Film frame counting or measuring: (354/217)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 842 comprising means to indicate the
    number of pictures taken or means to indicate how much sensitive material
    is used or left to be used.


CLS 396/FOR858
TXT Measuring: (354/218)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 857 including the means to indicate the
    length of light- sensitive material used or left to be used.


CLS 396/FOR859
TXT Viewfinder: (354/219)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 842 for an attachment to or used as part
    of a camera that will show a scene that will be included in a frame.


CLS 396/FOR860
TXT Pose reflector: (354/220)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 859 having means for returning a light
    striking a surface into the medium from which it came so that a person can
    see a view of himself.


CLS 396/FOR861
TXT  Parallax correction: (354/221)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 859 including means to correct for the
    change in position of a scene seen in a viewfinder and that which will
    actually be photographed by a lens.


CLS 396/FOR862
TXT Selective or adjustable viewfinder field: (354/222)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 859 having means to permit a person to
    determine the areas included on a negative or means to regulate the area on
    a negative.


CLS 396/FOR863
TXT Selective or adjustable viewing position: (354/223)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 859 having means to permit angular
    adjustment of the viewfinder or person to select the angle of viewing.


CLS 396/FOR864
TXT Having reflector: (354/224)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 859 having means for returning light
    striking a surface into the medium from which it came.


CLS 396/FOR865
TXT Plural: (354/225)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 864 having more than one reflector.


CLS 396/FOR866
TXT Shutter: (354/226)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 842 having means to interrupt the light
    passing through a lens to a light-sensitive material.


CLS 396/FOR867
TXT Electro-optical type: (354/227.1)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 866 having optical media that can be
    changed by the application of an electric or magnetic field.


CLS 396/FOR868
TXT Having diaphragm: (354/228)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 866 including means to control the amount
    of light passing through a lens to a light sensitive material.


CLS 396/FOR869
TXT Plural apertured diaphragm: (354/229)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 868 including more than one opening to
    control the light.


CLS 396/FOR870
TXT Shutter and diaphragm formed by the same pivoted or sliding
    plates: (354/230)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 868 wherein the same means interrupts and
    controls light passing through a lens to a light sensitive material.


CLS 396/FOR871
TXT Including coupled shutter and diaphragm: (354/231)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 868 having means to connect the shutter
    and diaphragm so that a means to adjust one will also adjust the other.


CLS 396/FOR872
TXT Diaphragm opens for focusing or viewing: (354/232)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 868 having means for moving the blades of
    a diaphragm to allow the maximum amount of light to pass through for
    focusing or viewing or means to hold the blades of a diaphragm fully open
    until the shutter release is actuated.


CLS 396/FOR873
TXT Having shutter between lens: (354/233)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 866 wherein the shutter is placed between
    front and rear components of a lens.


CLS 396/FOR874
TXT Dynamo-electric actuated: (354/234.1)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 866 having means to convert electrical
    energy to mechanical energy by means of an electromagnet to cause the
    shutter to actuate.


CLS 396/FOR875
TXT Single linear solenoid: (354/235.1)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 874 having only one dynamoelectric means
    which is constrained to move in a straight line.


CLS 396/FOR876
TXT Plural shutters: (354/236)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 866 having more than one means to
    interrupt the light.


CLS 396/FOR877
TXT Having delayed release means: (354/237)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 866 including means to defer for a time
    the initial actuation of the shutter.


CLS 396/FOR878
TXT Including electric circuit means: (354/238.1)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 877 wherein the means to delay the
    shutter release includes an electric system.


CLS 396/FOR879
TXT Having clocktrain: (354/239)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 877 wherein the means to delay the
    shutter release includes plural gearing.


CLS 396/FOR880
TXT Detachable from camera: (354/240)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 879 having means to remove the delay
    means from the camera.


CLS 396/FOR881
TXT Curtain or flexible plate type: (354/241)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 866 wherein the light interrupter means
    is a resilient or flexible sheet.


CLS 396/FOR882
TXT Plural curtains or plates: (354/242)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 881 having more than one resilient or
    flexible sheet wherein two resilient or flexible sheets form an opening
    which passes across a light sensitive material to produce an exposure.


CLS 396/FOR883
TXT Curtains width opening: (354/243)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 882 including means to adjust or control
    the extent of the opening to produce an exposure.


CLS 396/FOR884
TXT More than two rollers: (354/244)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 883 including three or more supply and
    take-up spools for storing the curtains or flexible plates.


CLS 396/FOR885
TXT Sliding rigid plate: (354/245)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 866 wherein the light interrupter means
    is a stiff sheet.


CLS 396/FOR886
TXT Plural plates: (354/246)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 885 having more than one stiff sheet.


CLS 396/FOR887
TXT Moves in opposite directions: (354/247)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 886 wherein one of the stiff sheets
    slides in a diverse direction with respect to the other sheet.


CLS 396/FOR888
TXT Rectilinear reciprocation: (354/248)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 885 wherein a rigid plate is moved in
    alternate directions in a straight line.


CLS 396/FOR889
TXT Vertical motion: (354/249)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 888 wherein the rigid plate is moved in a
    straight line so as to form a right angle with the plane of the horizon.


CLS 396/FOR890
TXT Pivoting or rotating blade: (354/250)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 866 wherein a shutter is mounted for
    movement in one direction only or is rotatably reciprocated, about a fixed
    axis.


CLS 396/FOR891
TXT Having cocking means: (354/251)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 890 comprising means to set a shutter
    actuation means.


CLS 396/FOR892
TXT Having brake means: (354/252)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 890 comprising means to stop a shutter
    blade after a complete shutter actuation.


CLS 396/FOR893
TXT Including aperture cover or lid: (354/253)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 890 comprising two or more blades to stop
    light from entering a camera.


CLS 396/FOR894
TXT Shutter blade moves continuously from closed to open to closed
    position: (354/254)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 890 comprising means for moving a blade
    with a first aperture in it past a second aperture, e.g., diaphragm, so
    that the first aperture moves on past the second aperture to close if from
    light.


CLS 396/FOR895
TXT Blade moves in opposite direction on alternate exposures: (354/255)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 894 wherein the blade with the aperture
    moves first in one way past the second aperture and then moves back past
    the second aperture when another picture is taken.


CLS 396/FOR896
TXT Having retard means: (354/256)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 890 having means to hold a shutter fully
    open for a certain period of time.


CLS 396/FOR897
TXT Including pneumatic means: (354/257)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 896 wherein the means to hold the shutter
    open is an expansible chamber motor.


CLS 396/FOR898
TXT Including electric circuit means: (354/258.1)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 896 wherein the means to hold a shutter
    open is a magnet or solenoid that is controlled by electrical components
    connected together so that an electric current will flow through the
    components.


CLS 396/FOR899
TXT Including gear means: (354/259)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 896 wherein the means to hold a shutter
    open is provided with one or more protuberances or grooves which
    interengage and cooperate with mating protuberances on, or grooves in,
    another member to form therewith a positive force means.


CLS 396/FOR900
TXT  Including cam means: (354/260)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 896 wherein the means to hold a shutter
    open is provided with a surface of fixed points of varying distance from a
    fixed point which surface is in contact with a follower to vary the time
    the shutter remains open.


CLS 396/FOR901
TXT Plural oscillating blades: (354/261)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 890 wherein there are two or more blades
    that are rotatably reciprocated about a fixed axis from an open to a closed
    position.


CLS 396/FOR902
TXT Having gear means: (354/262)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 901 having means to actuate the blades
    which means have plural protuberances which interengage and cooperate with
    mating protuberances.


CLS 396/FOR903
TXT Having pneumatic actuator: (354/263)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 901 wherein the blades are moved by gas
    pressure means.


CLS 396/FOR904
TXT Symmetrical opening: (354/264)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 901 wherein the blades move in diverse
    directions from or toward a center and form an aperture which always varies
    the same from the center.


CLS 396/FOR905
TXT Opposite movement: (354/265)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 901 wherein one blade moves in one
    direction while another blade moves in another direction.


CLS 396/FOR906
TXT Release or actuator means: (354/266)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 866 comprising means to allow a part of a
    camera structure to operate or means to apply a bias or mechanical
    advantage to effect movement of a part of a camera structure.


CLS 396/FOR907
TXT Timing means: (354/267.1)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 906 comprising means to allow a shutter
    to be open for a predetermined time period.


CLS 396/FOR908
TXT Having safety lock: (354/268)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 906 comprising means to prevent the
    shutter actuator from being accidently actuated.


CLS 396/FOR909
TXT Cable release: (354/269)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 906 comprising a flexible element for
    transmission of tension or compression.


CLS 396/FOR910
TXT Indicator or setting means: (354/289.1)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 842 comprising structure for exhibiting,
    as by registry or nonregistry of significantly placed indicia, the
    displacement or the adjusted position of some camera part.


CLS 396/FOR911
TXT Indicia on lens ring or housing: (354/289.11)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 910 in which the indicator or setting
    means is in the form of markings on the lens ring or lens housing of the
    camera.


CLS 396/FOR912
TXT Having electric circuit means: (354/289.12)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 911 in which the indicator or setting
    means includes electric circuit means.


CLS 396/FOR913
TXT CAMERA MOUNTING OR REST: (354/293)

    Foreign art collection including structure for maintaining a photographic
    camera in a fixed position or fixed path of movement with respect to some
    other body or the earth; or including structure facilitating the holding of
    the camera by an operator.


CLS 396/FOR914
TXT Stereo: (354/294)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 913 including means to facilitate the
    positioning of one or two cameras to effect the recording of plural images
    that are to give the impression of solidity or relief.


CLS 396/FOR915
TXT FLUID-TREATING APPARATUS: (354/297)

    Foreign art collection having a device for subjecting light sensitive
    material to a gas or liquid or to subcombinations not classified elsewhere.


CLS 396/FOR916
TXT  Photocell controlled: (354/298)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 915 with a light responsive device which
    regulates some portion of the fluid treating apparatus.


CLS 396/FOR917
TXT And temperature control: (354/299)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 915 with means for regulating the
    temperature of the apparatus, fluid or material.


CLS 396/FOR918
TXT Gaseous treating: (354/300)

    Subject matter under the subclass FOR 915 wherein the fluid is a gas or
    vapor.


CLS 396/FOR919
TXT Treating superimposed or laminar sheets: (354/301)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 915 wherein an image-exposed strip is
    brought into contact with a second strip for fluid treatment.


CLS 396/FOR920
TXT Rollers sequentially submerge and press sheet: (354/302)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 919 including revolving cylinders to
    immerse at least one of the strips in treating fluid and subsequently
    squeeze the strips together.


CLS 396/FOR921
TXT Having fluid dispensing: (354/303)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 919 including means for distributing
    treating fluid to one of the strips.


CLS 396/FOR922
TXT Collapsible container: (354/304)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 921 wherein the distributing means
    includes a rupturable holder.


CLS 396/FOR923
TXT Having fluid reservoir: (354/305)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 919 including means to store the treating
    fluid.


CLS 396/FOR924
TXT Reversal processing: (354/306)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 915 with means for reexposing the
    material with an initial latent image thereon.


CLS 396/FOR925
TXT Dark cabinet: (354/307)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 915 with a light-excluding case adapted
    to hold the material while it is being subjected to the fluid subsequent to
    exposure.



CLS 396/FOR926
TXT Hand or body insertion: (354/308)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 925 wherein the case includes means to
    admit a portion of an operator's body through flexible lightguards.


CLS 396/FOR927
TXT Having ventilation: (354/309)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 926 including means for circulating air
    through the case.


CLS 396/FOR928
TXT Daylight loading: (354/310)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 925 having means for introducing the
    material into the case without the necessity of using a dark room.


CLS 396/FOR929
TXT Having film-holding cabinet insertable into developing tank: (354/311)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 925 including means to support the
    material in a casing which is insertable into a fluid-treating receptacle.


CLS 396/FOR930
TXT Having film support or handling means: (354/312)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 925 including means to hold the material
    in position or manipulate the material.


CLS 396/FOR931
TXT Roll film handling: (354/313)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 930 having means for manipulating the
    material that is wound into a cylindrical mass.


CLS 396/FOR932
TXT Having motor driven film winding spool: (354/314)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 931 including means to convert energy to
    produce or impart motion to a reel upon which the material is wound.


CLS 396/FOR933
TXT Plate film handling means: (354/315)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 930 wherein the material is relatively
    inflexible.


CLS 396/FOR934
TXT Film immersed and removed: (354/316)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 930 wherein the means to manipulate the
    material effects a dipping action.


CLS 396/FOR935
TXT Fluid application to one side only of film: (354/317)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 915 wherein the device applies the fluid
    to only a single side of the material.


CLS 396/FOR936
TXT By roller or web: (354/318)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 935 having a revolving cylinder or a belt
    as the fluid applicator.


CLS 396/FOR937
TXT Having film or paper feed: (354/319)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 915 including means to introduce or
    withdraw the material into or from a fluid-treating area.


CLS 396/FOR938
TXT And film immersed and removed: (354/320)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 937 with means to dip the material in the
    fluid.


CLS 396/FOR939
TXT Strip type: (354/321)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 938 wherein the material is relatively
    long and narrow.


CLS 396/FOR940
TXT Plural stations: (354/322)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 938 wherein there is more than one
    treating area.


CLS 396/FOR941
TXT Single station and plural fluids: (354/323)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 915 wherein plural diverse fluids are
    selectively applied to the material and then withdrawn from a single
    processing area.


CLS 396/FOR942
TXT Having fluid circulating means: (354/324)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 915 including means for introducing and
    withdrawing the fluid to and from a treatment area.


CLS 396/FOR943
TXT And fluid spraying means: (354/325)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 942 with fluid sprinkling means.


CLS 396/FOR944
TXT  And plate support means: (354/326)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 942 with means to hold relatively rigid
    material in position for treatment.


CLS 396/FOR945
TXT By rocking tray or support: (354/327)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 942 wherein means effect fluctuation of a
    fluid vessel or material holder.


CLS 396/FOR946
TXT Having fluid-agitating means: (354/328)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 915 including means within a treating
    vessel for vibrating the fluid or means to vibrate the vessel or a material
    holder to produce fluid vibration.


CLS 396/FOR947
TXT Rotating carrier: (354/329)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 946 wherein the means includes a
    revolving material holder.


CLS 396/FOR948
TXT Motor driven: (354/330)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 947 including means to convert energy to
    produce or impart motion to the holder.


CLS 396/FOR949
TXT Film or print processing vessel: (354/331)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 915 wherein the device includes a fluid
    receptacle for the treatment of the material.


CLS 396/FOR950
TXT Having interlocking doors: (354/332)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 949 including treating areas separated by
    a light-excluding partition and interlinked closures.


CLS 396/FOR951
TXT Attachment or accessory: (354/333)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 949 including a device which may be
    attached to the receptacle or to a support for the receptacle.


CLS 396/FOR952
TXT Visual film scanner: (354/334)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 951 wherein the attachment device
    includes means to permit the visual scanning of the material.


CLS 396/FOR953
TXT Adjustable film-holding means: (354/335)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 951 wherein the device includes means to
    alter the position of a material support.


CLS 396/FOR954
TXT Reservoir: (354/336)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 951 wherein the attachable device is a
    fluid storage means.


CLS 396/FOR955
TXT Having film or plate support: (354/337)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 949 including structure to hold the light
    sensitive material.


CLS 396/FOR956
TXT Having film-guiding ribs: (354/338)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 949 including passive means to limit a
    path of movement of the material in order that the material may be
    supported or stretched during its treatment by a fluid.


CLS 396/FOR957
TXT Film guide: (354/339)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 915 having passive means to limit a path
    of movement of the material in order that the material may be supported or
    stretched during its treatment by a fluid.


CLS 396/FOR958
TXT Film-holding device: (354/340)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 915 having structure by which the
    material is lifted, stretched or supported for treatment and wherein the
    structure is independent of a fluid vessel.


CLS 396/FOR959
TXT Spool: (354/341)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 958 wherein the structure is cylindrical
    which usually has a rim or ridge at each end and an axial portion on which
    or about which the material is placed.


CLS 396/FOR960
TXT Tensioning means: (354/342)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 958 wherein the structure includes means
    for stretching the material.


CLS 396/FOR961
TXT Adjustable means: (354/343)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 958 wherein the structure includes means
    to permit movement of elements to accommodate material of different sizes.


CLS 396/FOR962
TXT Retaining means: (354/344)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 958 wherein the structure includes means
    for restraining the material.


CLS 396/FOR963
TXT Gripping means: (354/345)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 958 wherein the structure includes means
    to clamp the material.


CLS 396/FOR964
TXT Opposed frame-gripping means: (354/346)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 963 wherein the clamping means include
    elements that act on opposite portions of the material.


CLS 396/FOR965
TXT Plate: (354/347)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 963 wherein the structure is adapted to
    clamp relatively rigid material.


CLS 396/FOR966
TXT RETOUCHING: (354/348)

    Foreign art collection having means for improving a photographic surface by
    adding lines, stipples, etc., mechanically and compounds for preparing the
    surface to receive the lines or stipple marks.


CLS 396/FOR967
TXT Stand: (354/349)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 966 having means for holding an article
    which is to be retouched, usually characterized by an open framework which
    permits illumination of the under side of the article.


CLS 396/FOR968
TXT Vibrating: (354/350)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 967 including means to give a vibratory
    motion to the holder.


CLS 396/FOR969
TXT BURNISHING: (354/351)

    Foreign art collection having means to polish a photographic image by
    applying to it heat-pressure or friction and such compounds as facilitate
    these operations.


CLS 396/FOR970
TXT Rotary machine: (354/352)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 969 having means that move in a circular
    motion for polishing the photograph.


CLS 396/FOR971
TXT Internally heated: (354/353)

    Subject matter under subclass FOR 970 including means to raise the
    temperature of a rotary tool.


CLS 399/
TTL ELECTROPHOTOGRAPHY

CLS 399/
TXT I.      DEFINITIONS OF TERMS USED

    ELECTROSTATOGRAPHY

    The formation and utilization of latent electrostatic charge patterns for
    recording or reproducing patterns in viewable form, for example:
    reproducing information from an original or carrier by selectively exposing
    a photoconductive member to an electrical or magnetic condition that
    produces a latent image whereby the image is developed to a visible image,
    then transferred and fixed from the photoconductive member to a medium.

    LIGHT SOURCE

    The source of illumination for the copier.  The light source includes
    filters, reflectors, screens, and other light modifiers used to affect the
    spectral distribution, spatial distribution, and intensity of the
    illumination.

    IMAGE

    The representation of an object (e.g.,original, carrier) produced by the
    transmission or reflection of light incident upon the original.

    IMAGE-BEARING MEMBER

    A substrate for holding an electrostatic charge pattern or a toner image.

    IMAGE, LATENT

    The invisible image produced by the action of light alone or with other
    electrostatic charge-producing means on, or in, a photoreceptor.  A latent
    image may be made visible by development.

    IMAGING

    Forming an image that is a reproduction of an original.

    MACHINE

    A complete unit, in itself, for imaging an original or carrier onto a
    receiver.  It may also include means for developing, transferring, and
    fixing the image, as well as means for handling the record carrier on which
    the image is fixed.

    MASTER

    (a) The negative or positive original from which reproductions are made,
    (b) a microform copy  used for the production of copies, or  (c) a copy
    from which additional reproductions are made.

    NEGATIVE

    A visible image on a copy material in which the dark portions of an
    original appear light and the light portions appear dark.

    ORIGINAL

    Any object (generally two-dimensional)  from which a copy is made by
    forming an image thereof on a photoconductor.

    PHOTOCONDUCTIVE MATERIAL

    A material that is an insulator in the dark and conducts electricity in
    proportion to the amount of impinging light or actinic radiation.  This is
    usually provided as a layer of electrically conductive material on a
    conductive support.  During use, the electrical conductor is charged
    (sensitized) in the dark, and light (in image configuration) allows or
    causes the electrically conductive layer to conduct so that the charge
    leaks through to the conductive layer leaving a charge pattern
    corresponding to the original image (electrostatic latent image).

    PHOTOCONDUCTIVE MEMBER

    A medium whose electrical conductivity, electrical charge, magnetic
    condition, or electrical emissivity is selectively altered by the action of
    electromagnetic radiation during imaging.

    PLATEN

    A flat or curved piece of rigid material on or against which an original is
    placed for imaging the original onto a photoconductive member.

    TONER

    Charged material (e.g., finely divided powder; i.e., usually thermoplastic
    or pigmented polymer particles), ink, or magnetic particles used in
    electrostatic processes to make visible a latent image and which may be
    treated (e.g., fused, dried, etc.) to render the image permanent.  Toner
    can be charged by triboelectric action, by the direct application of charge
    (e.g., corona), or by inducing the charge  through the action of the
    electrostatic latent image.  The material may include or exclude a carrier
    element and may also be called "marking particles" or "developer material."

    II.     GENERAL STATEMENT OF THE CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    This class provides for electrophotographically reproducing an original
    (e.g., document) by the action of light directly from the original to a
    photoconductive member whose electrical conductivity, electrical charge,
    magnetic condition, or electrical emissivity of a photoconductive medium is
    selectively altered by the action of light to produce an electrostatic
    latent image which persists after imaging based upon differences in such
    electrical property.  The latent image is made visible by development; and
    the developed image may be made permanent by transfer and fixing, or
    fixing. This class provides for the subcombinations directed to charging,
    developing, transferring, fixing, cleaning, or sheet feeding for an
    electrophotographic apparatus whether or not the imaging light is directly
    from the original.  This class also provides for methods and means for
    perfecting the apparatus provided above (e.g., control of
    electrophotographic process, diagnostics, operator interface, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  The apparatus herein classified generally involves the
    application of a uniform electrostatic charge to a photoresponsive medium
    comprising a conductive support coated with a photoconductive insulator.
    Latent electrostatic images are formed by exposure of an original directly
    onto the photoresponsive medium through an optical lens system. The charge
    applied to the light sensitive medium is selectively discharged by exposure
    and remains only on selected portions of the photoresponsive medium (i.e.,
    those areas which correspond to the original image). The photoresponsive
    medium is moved to a developing station where toner is applied to the
    charged areas of the photoresponsive medium forming a visible image
    thereupon. The photoresponsive medium is then moved to a transfer station
    where the toned image is transferred to a copy substrate (e.g., a piece of
    paper). The toned substrate is then fed to a fixing station where the toner
    is permanently affixed to the paper, usually by heat or pressure. The
    photoresponsive medium is then moved to a cleaning station where
    untransferred toner  and any leftover electrical charge are removed so
    another copy cycle can begin.

    (2)     Note.  The use of the limitation "directly" above excludes image
    formation systems in which an image of an original is detected and
    converted to electrical signals which are subsequently utilized to generate
    further illumination signals to optically form an image of the original on
    the medium. This excluded subject matter may be found, for example, in
    Class 347, subclasses 112+, and in Class 358, subclasses 400+ and more
    specifically 401.  However, the nominal recitation of a light image to an
    electrical signal or an equivalent statement would not serve to exclude
    subject matter from Class 399.  Also, Electrophotography has no
    modification of converted electrical signals.

    III.    ELECTROPHOTOGRAPHY APPARATUS CLASSIFIED ELSEWHERE

    In Class 250, Radiant Energy, subclass 315.3 provides for xerographic
    copying methods and apparatus which utilize invisible radiation, subclass
    317.1 provides for infrared or thermal image document pattern copying
    methods or apparatus, and subclasses 582 and 583 provides for methods and
    apparatus to  expose by radiant energy a recording detector.  Copying
    methods are classified in Class 430, Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process,
    Composition, or Product Thereof.


    IV.     ELECTROPHOTOGRAPHY APPARATUS COMBINED WITH ANOTHER STRUCTURE OR
    STRUCTURES AND CLASSIFIED ELSEWHERE

    Claims which recite apparatus for photographing something other than an
    original or carrier as herein defined and also for copying an original or
    carrier are classified in Class 396, Photography, especially subclasses
    310+, 322+, and 429+, or Class 346, Recorders.  Class 386, Television
    Signal Processing for Dynamic Recording or Reproducing, subclasses 30, 42,
    43, 128+, and 130+ provide for the photocopying which includes forming a
    television image where a cathode-ray tube is recited.  Class 396,
    Photography, subclasses 429+, provides for patents where only a nominal
    cathode-ray tube is recited.  The combination of a detailed register with a
    broadly or specifically claimed copier is classified in Class 235,
    Registers.  (See the first paragraph of the Class 235 class definition.)

    V.      ELECTROPHOTOGRAPHY SUBCOMBINATIONS CLASSIFIED ELSEWHERE

    Class 226, Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, especially
    subclasses 52+, provides for film advancing mechanisms where no more than a
    nominal optical or photocopying element is claimed.  Photographic lights
    and projection lights, per se, are in Class 362, Illumination, subclasses
    3+ and 257+.  Class 271, Sheet Feeding or Delivering, provides for sheet
    feeding or delivering means where no specific electrophotographic structure
    is recited.  Class 359, Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and
    Elements, provides for lenses in subclasses 642+, reflectors in subclasses
    838+, and optical absorption filters in subclasses 885+.

    VI.     SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, for devices for merely
    cleaning the photosensitive medium, particularly subclasses 1.51+ for
    electrostatic cleaning.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, for devices for
    treating a coating, including fusing or coalescing a particulate coating by
    solvent vapor treatment, per se.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 2+ for related subject
    matter concerning automatic operation or control of machine elements and
    mechanisms.


    101,    Printing, for printers where the ink or imaging material is
    affected by an electrostatic field.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, for apparatus for producing configured coatings
    applied to a support material under the control or direction of electrical,
    magnetic, or radiant energy applied to the coating material in a
    predetermined pattern; for applying a light sensitive coating to a support
    material; for development or transfer, by a coating operation, of images
    made by electric photography, or for applying protective coatings to the
    developed or transferred image; also any or all of these combined with
    aftertreatment of the developed image or cleaning of the light sensitive
    medium, especially subclasses 51, 58+, 72+, 200+, 308+, 620+, 720+, and
    722+.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, for methods of cleaning
    the photosensitive medium, particularly subclasses 1+ for cleaning
    including the application of electrical, radiant, or wave energy.

    137,    Fluid Handling, appropriate subclasses for generic fluid handling
    apparatus which may be used to apply liquid toner to a latent image to make
    it visible.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 77+ for telegraphic devices combined with
    other instruments (e.g., an electrophotographic copier).

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 381+ for generic braking devices which may be
    used to stop scanning devices, for example, while minimizing vibrations.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 116.5+ for generic stop
    mechanisms which may be used for power stop control of electrophotographic
    movable platen scanners.

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclasses for
    methods and apparatus for forming or developing an image by electrolysis,
    electro-osmosis, electrophoresis, or cathode sputtering, and combinations
    of electric photographic apparatus therewith.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 316.1 for special
    receptacles for an optical or photographic means.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, especially subclasses
    52+ for film advancing means in a copier where no more than one optical
    element is claimed and where no detailed optics are recited, and
    appropriate subclasses for means to advance, for example, photoresponsive
    electrophotographic copy paper on rolls.

    235,    Registers, for a detailed register in combination with a broadly or
    specifically claimed copier.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 44+ for
    means to control the humidity of paper used in an electrophotographic
    copier or the atmosphere within the copier, for example.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses
    for apparatus used to apply liquid developer to latent image-bearing
    material.


    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding,  subclasses 159+ and 324+ for
    apparatus used to wind or unwind rolls of photoresponsive electrographic
    material, reeling and unreeling means of the type employed in still picture
    apparatus and for the type used in motion picture devices, for subject
    matter where no cooperation between an optical element and reeling
    mechanism is recited, where no detailed optical element is set forth, and
    where only one nominally claimed optical element is present.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 315.3 for methods and apparatus for
    xerographic copying by use of invisible radiation, subclass 316.1 for
    related electrostatic recorders using infrared or thermal radiation to form
    the latent image of an original which is copied by electrophotography,
    subclasses 317.1+ for document copies relying upon infrared or thermal
    patterns of the document transferred to the copy paper, and subclasses 582
    and 583 for an apparatus to expose, by invisible radiation generally, a
    recording detector generally.

    252,    Compositions, for subject matter, especially subclass 501.1
    photosensitive electrically conductive or emissive compounds, used as
    electrophotographic photoresponsive media, as well as for other
    compositions used in electrophotographic devices.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 75+ for generic
    apparatus which places a document or item to be developed in contact with
    liquid developer or vice versa.

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 289+ for detailed holders for an original.


    270,    Sheet-Material Associating, subclasses 1.1+ for generic sheet
    material associating with printing.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, for generic sheet feeding or
    delivering apparatus, where no specific optical or photographic structure
    is set forth.

    323,    Electricity: Power Supply or Regulation Systems, for power
    supplies, per se.

    346,    Recorders, subclasses 74.2+ for related magnetographic recording
    devices, subclasses 107.1+ for light or beam recording, and subclasses
    150.1+ for related electrostatic recording apparatus and processes.

    347,    Incremental Printing and Symbolic Information, subclasses 1 through
    109 for ink jets, particularly subclass 55 for applying an electric field
    ejection intermittently; subclasses 111 through 170 for electric marking,
    particularly subclass 158 for delivering to the recording medium visible
    particles to develop a latent image; subclasses 171 through 223 for thermal
    printers; and subclasses 224 through 264 for light (i.e., ROS scanners).

    352,    Optics: Motion Pictures, for photocopying apparatus and methods
    involving a motion picture camera or motion picture projector.

    353,    Optics: Image Projectors, appropriate subclasses for picture
    carriers, projection printing of composite images, and for editing or
    auxiliary viewing devices associated with image projectors.

    356,    Optics: Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for optical
    measurement and test instruments used in diagnostic testing of an
    electrophotographic copier.

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 300 for electrostatic or electrolytic facsimile
    recording apparatus which may be combined with electrophotographic copiers.
     Class 399, Electrophotography has no modification of converted electrical
    signals.

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, appropriate
    subclasses for optical elements of an electrophotographic copier's
    illumination and image formation system, especially subclasses 642+ for
    lenses, in subclasses 838+ for reflectors, and  subclasses 885+ for optical
    absorption filters.

    361,    Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 212+ for
    means to discharge or prevent accumulation of static electric charge and
    subclasses 225+ for electric charge generating or conducting means.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 3+ and 257+ for photographic and
    projection light source subcombinations which may include condenser lenses
    having no other photocopying structure, and  subclasses 227+ for plural
    sources of illumination.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 130+
    for generic data processing control systems; and subclasses 525+ for
    computer control of optics or photography devices.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 48+ for
    subject matter related to magnetographic electrophotography.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 125 for having
    photographic storage medium (e.g., variable density or area).

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 1+ for thermal
    calibration devices.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclasses 1+ for applications of counters, including
    subclass 8 for counting flat articles (e.g., sheets).

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 28+ for
    xeroradiographic subject matter.

    380,    Cryptography, subclasses 23+ for cryptographic user authentication
    systems and subclass 54 for changing the visible appearance of an object to
    encrypt visible markings.

    386,    Television Signal Processing for Dynamic Recording or Reproducing,
    subclasses 30, 42, 43, 128+, and 130 for a photographic recorder in
    combination with detailed television means for first transmitting an image
    of the original to the surface of a cathode-ray tube and then photographing
    that image.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 100+ for
    data presentation computer applications, subclasses 183.01+ for generic
    diagnostic testing involving data processing.

    396     Photography, especially subclasses 310+, 322+, and 429+ for
    photocopying in combination with photographing of an object other than a
    sheet or film strip and also for copying a sheet or film strip by first
    transmitting an image of the original to the surface of a nominally claimed
    cathode-ray tube and then photographing the image on the surface of the
    cathode-ray tube.

    427,    Coating Processes, especially subclasses 458+ for related subject
    matter involving the direct application of electrical, magnetic, or wave
    energy to form, cure, or otherwise affect electrophotographic coatings.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof,  appropriate subclasses for radiation imagery chemistry, process,
    composition, or product, especially subclasses 31+ for related
    electrophotographic processes; for purposes of classification, Class 430,
    subclasses 31+, controls over Class 399; where the process claimed is
    expressed in terms of Class 399 apparatus or subcombinations thereof,
    placement is appropriate in Class 399.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 49+ for ventilation systems used as part of
    an electrophotographic machine to remove harmful vapors produced by the
    machine.


    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, appropriate
    subclasses for generic systems and components which may be used to drive
    electrophotographic, photoresponsive, endless webs or belts.

    492,    Roll or Roller, subclass 8 for specific magnet or electromagnetic
    structure.

    VII.    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    Each subclass definition may contain an OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS
    listing that is to be used for informational purposes only.  These
    classification listings may change at any time after their publication and
    are therefore not guaranteed to be current.  In addition, the
    classification listing does not necessarily indicate the sole relationship
    between the U.S. Patent Classification System and foreign classifications.
    Even where a single classification is listed for a single U.S. subclass, a
    one-to-one correlation should not be inferred.  As a result,  information
    contained therein is considered to be only a guide to related subject
    matter.

    Types of other classification systems may include IPC6 which indicates an
    International Patent Classification (sixth edition) of the World
    Intellectual Property Organization (WIPO), JPO/FI which indicates the
    Japanese Patent Office and its File Index (FI is a subdivision of the IPC
    with related subject matter) classifications, or the European Patent
    Classification (EPC) which indicates the European Patent Office's
    classification and also further subdivides the IPC into related subject
    matter.


CLS 399/1
TXT COMBINED WITH DIVERSE SUBJECT MATTER:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein an electrophotographic
    device is combined with another art device or structure having an added
    purpose or independent utility other than to perfect an electrophotographic
    device and which combination is not provided for elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 77+ for an electrophotographic copier
    combined with means for electronically sending a copy of the original from
    the copier as well as making a copy thereof.

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, for diverse printers
    (i.e., ink-jet, thermal, LED, LCD), per se.

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 300+ for electrostatic or electrolytic
    facsimile recording apparatus.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/00, for an electrographic process using a charge pattern.

            G03G    15/04, for exposing (i.e., transmitting the information
    given by the original image to the recording material).

            G03G    15/22, involving multiple steps.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/22 103D, for integrating in a facsimile.


CLS 399/2
TXT With diverse image formation:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a means or method is provided for
    forming an image by an apparatus other than that provided for in this
    class.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter, for example, may include an
    electrophotographic device that is combined with a raster output scanner
    used as an alternative exposure unit.

    (2)     Note.  Diverse subject matter may have techniques of image
    formation using an embossing.


CLS 399/3
TXT Electrostatic:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the diverse image is formed by a
    charge pattern deposited onto or discharged from a medium forming a latent
    image.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, subclasses 107.1+ for related photographic subject
    matter.

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, subclasses 112+
    wherein an image is formed by depositing an electrostatic charge on or
    removing an electrostatic charge from a medium.

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 300+ for electrostatic or electrolytic
    facsimile recording apparatus.


CLS 399/4
TXT Light (e.g., laser, LED, LCD):

    Subject matter under subclass 3 wherein the discharge is caused by visible
    radiant energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, subclasses 129+ for
    LED's, subclasses 134+ for LCD's, and subclasses 224+ for lasers.


CLS 399/5
TXT Shared optics:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 wherein a common optical component or light
    source is used for the image formation of this class and the diverse image.


CLS 399/6
TXT Composite image:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 wherein an image produced by diverse
    imaging apparatus is combined with an image that is produced by the action
    of light directly from an original.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194,    for a composite image by light exposure directly from an original.


CLS 399/7
TXT On or adjacent to platen:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 wherein an image source, other than an
    original provided for in this class, is used in addition to or in place of
    the original.


CLS 399/8
TXT REMOTE MONITORING:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a means or method is
    provided for transmitting or receiving data about a condition of an
    electrophotographic device or component thereof to an external location.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, appropriate subclasses for related
    subject matter.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 102+ for signalling over a
    telephone line for control of a nontelephone device at a remote location.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/00, for an electrographic process using a charge pattern.

    JPO/FI  G03G    21/00 396, for central control or remote control over
    multiple apparatus.

    EPC     G03G    15/00C10, for remote control machines (e.g., by a host).


CLS 399/9
TXT DIAGNOSTICS:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a means or method is
    provided for detecting or analyzing (a) a condition that is outside the
    normal operating condition or (b) a malfunction or potential malfunction of
    an electrophotographic device or component thereof.

    (1)     Note.  For example, this subject matter may include detection of an
    access door not being closed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for remote monitoring of an electrophotographic device.

    38+,    for control of the electrophotographic processes (e.g., charging,
    exposure, developing, transferring, fixing, and cleaning).

    75+,    for control of machine operations.

    91+,    for internal machine environmental control.

    107+,   for an electrophotographic device having particular structure.

    127+,   for supplemental electrophotographic processes.

    130+,   for image formation, per se.

    343+,   for cleaning an imaging surface.

    361+,   for document handling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 1.01+ for generic instrument
    calibration devices and methods.

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclasses 452+ for testing a
    material property using electrostatic phenomenon (this type of test may be
    employed to determine the humidity or electrical insulating properties of
    copy paper, a photosensitive material, etc.) and subclasses 457+ which
    employ means to measure an electrostatic field, such a field being an
    integral property of the electrophotographic process.

    356,    Optics: Measuring and Testing, subclasses 445+ for testing the
    reflectivity of the copy paper, for example, to determine proper exposure,
    toner concentration, etc.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 1+ for thermal
    calibration devices.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclasses 28+ for diagnostic testing of counters.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 183.01+ for
    generic diagnostic testing involving data processing.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/00, for an electrographic process using a charge pattern.

    JPO/FI  G03G    21/00 386, for displaying and alarming.

            G03G    21/00 388, for control of electrographic apparatus.

            G03G    21/00 500, for special measures to malfunction.

            G03G    21/00 520, for a safety device of electrographic apparatus.

    EPC     G03G    15/00D, for self-diagnostics, malfunction, and lifetime
    display.


CLS 399/10
TXT Log report:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein data  is  recorded or stored (e.g.,
    in memory) of an analyzed performance, a malfunction, or a series of
    abnormal events of an electrophotographic device or component.

    (1)     Note.  For example, this subject matter may include printing of
    status.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

     83,    for job mode selection with memory.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 48 for subject
    matter related to magnetographic electrophotography.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 125 for a
    photographic storage medium (e.g., variable density or area).


CLS 399/11
TXT Service mode:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein a technician operates or tests or
    calibrates the machine.

    (1)     Note.  For example, this subject matter may include operating the
    apparatus or component without producing a copy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for operating or testing the machine from a remote location (i.e.,
    over a network or phone line).

    107+,   for removal or insertion of components.

    126,    for mechanical adjustments.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/00, for an electrographic process using a charge pattern.

    JPO/FI  G03G    21/00 510, for check and maintenance of electrographic
    apparatus.


CLS 399/12
TXT Unit or part identification:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein a means or method is provided for
    detecting or distinguishing an attachable or replaceable part of a
    particular type or color or manufacturer or condition.

    (1)     Note.  For example, this subject matter may include a product
    identification of a replacement part that would otherwise be physically
    attachable to the apparatus (e.g., toner cartridges for different colors).

    (2)     Note.  For example, this subject matter may include determining if
    a component is new or used.


CLS 399/13
TXT Component present or mounted:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein a means or method is provided for
    distinguishing whether or not a component is either present or properly
    attached in an operative manner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for detecting an access door ajar.

    16,     for diagnostics of document handling.

    24+,    for diagnostics of consumable materials.


CLS 399/14
TXT Unacceptable copy coverage

    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein a means or method is provided for
    determining that an acceptable copy cannot be produced because of the
    condition or nature of the original or an unsuitable feature selection or a
    machine default condition.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/00, for an electrographic process using a charge pattern.

    JPO/FI  G03G    21/00 390, for applicability and inapplicability.


CLS 399/15
TXT By inspection of copied image:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein an image on a copy medium is
    analyzed.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter may include a special test  image for
    visual inspection by the operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for controlling formation of a test image.


CLS 399/16
TXT Document handling:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein a means or method is provided for
    analyzing a movement of a sheet medium through a traveled path of an
    electrophotographic device or component; or for analyzing the presence or
    absence of a sheet or recording medium, or holder therefor.

    (1)     Note.  For example, this subject matter may include forms of
    movement such as feeding, inverting, stacking, sorting, collating, and
    conveying.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    361+,   for normal machine operation for handling documents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for means to advance electrophotographic photoresponsive copy paper.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 44+ for
    means to control the humidity of paper used in an electrophotographic
    copier, or the atmosphere within the copier to improve performance of the
    apparatus.


    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, appropriate subclasses for subject
    matter related to winding and unwinding electrophotographic photoresponsive
    webs, etc.

    270,    Sheet-Material Associating, subclasses 1.1+ for related document
    handling subject matter.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, appropriate subclasses for related
    subject matter.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/00, for an electrographic process using a charge pattern.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/00 526, by detecting and correcting malfunctions related
    to paper handling.

            G03G    15/00 530, by measuring the characteristics of a means of
    discharging copies, of a sorter, and of a collator.

    EPC     G03G    15/00J, for detecting malfunctions relating to paper
    handling (e.g., jams).

            G03G    15/00J1, for detecting multiple sheets.


CLS 399/17
TXT Of original:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 wherein the handling of the document to be
    reproduced is analyzed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for analyzing the condition of the image to be reproduced.


CLS 399/18
TXT Malfunction detection responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 wherein the electrophotographic device
    performs a corrective operation in addition to or beyond displaying a
    warning or shuts down in response to the document handling abnormality.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter may include, for example, performing a
    cleaning operation in response to a jam or the automatic displacement of
    parts.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/00, for an electrographic process using a charge pattern.

    EPC     G03G    15/00C3, for machine control (e.g., microprocessor
    control).


CLS 399/19
TXT Job recovery:

    Subject matter under subclass 18 wherein a means or method is provided for
    completing a job run in progress or accounting for lost copies after an
    interruption or shutdown.


CLS 399/20
TXT Purge:

    Subject matter under subclass 18 wherein a means or method is provided for
    continuing sheet feeding despite a malfunction.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter may include, for example, continued
    feeding of a sheet downstream from a jam.

    (2)     Note.  This subject matter may also include feeding out sheets left
    in an intermediate tray.


CLS 399/21
TXT Jam:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 wherein a means or method is provided for
    analyzing whether or not a sheet medium is traveling normally through a
    path.


CLS 399/22
TXT Misstrip of copy:

    Subject matter under subclass 21 wherein a means or method is provided for
    detecting whether or not the copy medium has failed to separate from an
    imaging or fixing member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315,    for details of the separation discharger (i.e., passive separation
    by neutralizing the transfer charge).

    323,    for stripping a copy during fixing.

    398,    for stripping from photoconductive member when delivering from
    transfer position.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/00, for an electrographic process using a charge pattern.

    EPC     G03G    15/00J2, for detecting missed stripping from a xerographic
    drum, band, or platen.


CLS 399/23
TXT Copy medium supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 wherein a means or method is provided for
    determining the need for replacement of copy medium.


CLS 399/24
TXT Consumable:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein a means or method is provided for
    determining the usable lifespan or exhaustion of a component or perishable
    material.

    (1)     Note.  For example, this subject matter may also include
    maintenance counters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for component present or mounted.

    23,     for "out of paper" maintenance.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/00, for an electrographic process using a charge pattern.

    JPO/FI  G03G    21/00 512, for determining the time for repairing and
    replacing.


CLS 399/25
TXT Process cartridge:

    Subject matter under subclass 24 wherein the component is a single unit
    that contains both a  photoconductive member and an apparatus for one or
    more of charging, exposing, developing, transferring, and cleaning.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111+,   for process cartridge unit having particular modular or
    displaceable structure.


CLS 399/26
TXT Photoconductive member:

    Subject matter under subclass 24 wherein a means or method is provided that
    determines whether or not a light-responsive member or a portion thereof is
    defective or needs replacement.

    (1)     Note.  A light-responsive member has a particular physical,
    electrical, or magnetic characteristic which enables the member to change
    its (a) electrical resistivity or (b) conductivity or (c) charge or (d)
    emissivity or (e) magnetic condition or (f) persistent internal
    polarization upon exposure to radiant energy in the form of light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116+,   for photoconductive member having particular modular or
    displaceable structure.

    161,    for advancing a renewable section of photoconductor.


CLS 399/27
TXT Toner:

    Subject matter under subclass 24 wherein a means or method is provided for
    determining whether or not replenishment or replacement is, or may be,
    required for developer material.

    (1)     Note.  For example, this subject matter may include carrier
    particles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     for diagnostics of cleaning a waste toner container.

    49,     for detection of toner involving plural control processes.

    61+,    for detection of toner in a developing unit.

    99+,    for toner removal.

    106,    for a toner cartridge.

    120,    for a new and waste toner container.

    129,    for supplemental exposure or charging of residual toner.

    134,    for image formation with photoconductive toner.

    224,    for adding colored toner.

    239+,   for application of liquid developer.

    253,    for conditioning dry toner.

    254+,   for mixing dry toner.

    258+,   for supplying new toner.

    265+    for application of dry developer.

    359,    for supplying reclaimed toner to the developing device.

    409,    for binding copies by toner.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/08, for solid developer.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/08 114, for detection of a toner level.

    EPC     G03G    15/08H2, for detection of toner level.


CLS 399/28
TXT Color:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 wherein an analysis is made of plural
    colors of toner.


CLS 399/29
TXT Deterioration or developability of toner:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 wherein a means or method is provided for
    determining defects or abnormalities in material used to visualize a latent
    image.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for an out-of-toner condition.

    30,     for the out-of-toner condition being determined by the
    concentration detector.


CLS 399/30
TXT By concentration detector:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 wherein the need for replenishment or
    replacement is determined by a means or method that analyzes a ratio of
    toner particles to carrier particles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58+,    for concentration control.


CLS 399/31
TXT Image forming component:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein a means or method is provided that
    analyzes an abnormal condition for forming a latent or toner image.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     for controlling charging in response to a detected condition.

    66,     for controlling a charge applied for transferring an image.


CLS 399/32
TXT Of exposure system (e.g., lamp, scanning, erase):

    Subject matter under subclass 31 wherein a means or method is provided for
    analyzing a light source, light projection, or scanning system.


CLS 399/33
TXT Fixing (e.g., over-temperature protection):

    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein a means or method is provided for
    analyzing an abnormal condition of permanently fixing a toner image to a
    copy medium or substrate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67+,    for condition-responsive control of fusing.

    91,     for a fire extinguisher internal to the machine.

    122,    for fixing unit with particular modular or displaceable structure.

    320+,   for fixing (e.g., fusing), per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 1+ for thermal
    calibration devices.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/20, for fixing.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/20 110, for preventing burn damage of the copy sheet.


CLS 399/34
TXT Cleaning:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein a  means or method is provided for
    analyzing the performance of a residual toner removal system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for control of cleaning during the electrophotography process.

    123,    for particular structure of a cleaning unit.

    149,    for combined development and cleaning by a single component.

    245,    for self-cleaning, with electrodes, a liquid development
    application member.

    327,    for cleaning of a fixing member.

    343+,   for cleaning an imaging surface (i.e., photoconductive member),
    including a cleaning member cyclically movable into and out of contact with
    the imaging surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 1.51+ for
    electrostatic cleaning and subclasses 300.1+ for air blast or suction which
    may be used to clean electrophotographic, photoresponsive imaging surfaces.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclass 1 for cleaning
    applications of electric, wave, ray, or radiant energy.


CLS 399/35
TXT Waste toner container:

    Subject matter under subclass 34 wherein a means or method is provided for
    determining the condition (e.g., fullness, presence, absence, etc.) of a
    holder for removed toner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for a component present or mounted.

    27,     for diagnostic of consumables (e.g., toner).

    49,     for detection of toner involving plural control processes.

    61+,    for detection of toner in a developing unit.

    99+,    for toner removal.

    106,    for a toner cartridge.

    120,    for a new and waste toner container.

    129,    for supplemental exposure or charging of residual toner.

    134,    for image formation with photoconductive toner.

    224,    for adding colored toner.

    239+,   for application of liquid development.

    253,    for conditioning dry toner.

    254+,   for mixing dry toner.

    258+,   for supplying new toner.

    265+    for application of dry development.

    359,    for supplying reclaimed toner to the developing device.

    409,    for binding copies by toner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 612 for condition responsive
    indication of fluent material levels.


CLS 399/36
TXT Of motive power or driven unit:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein a means or method is provided that
    analyzes the mechanical movement of a motor operation or motor-driven
    component.

    (1)     Note.  The component being driven may be a drum or the  belts of a
    photoconductive member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    for driving a photoconductive member.


CLS 399/37
TXT Power supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein a means or method is provided that
    analyzes an electrical source or its connection to an electrophotographic
    device or component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88+,    for machine operations with power supply.

    168+,   for charging of a photoconductive member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity: Power Supply or Regulation Systems, for a power
    supply, per se.

    361,    Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices,  subclasses 212+ for
    means to discharge or prevent accumulation of static electric charge and
    subclasses 225+ for electric charge generating or conducting means.


CLS 399/38
TXT CONTROL OF ELECTROPHOTOGRAPHY PROCESS:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a means or method is
    provided that senses a condition or change of condition and effects an
    image-forming operation of an electrophotography process (e.g., charging,
    exposing, developing, transfer, fixing, or cleaning), component, or device
    in response to the sensed or changed condition.

    (1)     Note. For example, this subject matter includes the following
    controlling arrangements: control of ion modulation, forming a new latent
    image for plural developing or transferring in response to voltage
    detection, control of treatment of developed image prior to transfer,
    reformation of latent image for producing multiple copies, and enablement
    of image formation in response to detection of charge, exposure, or
    concentration.  For other controlling arrangements within the
    electrophotographic apparatus which do not involve the electrophotographic
    process, see SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9+,     for diagnostics of an electrophotographic device.

    75+,    for control of machine operations.

    92,     for controlling a cooling fan in response to sensed temperature.

    107+,   for electrophotographic device having particular structure.

    128,    for condition responsive control of fatigue treatment (e.g.,
    supplemental charge or exposure).

    130+,   for image formation, per se.

    187,    for condition responsive control of erase light.

    343+,   for cleaning an imaging surface.

    361+,   for control of an automatic document feeder in response to
    detection of original.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/00, for an electrographic process using a charge pattern.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/00 303, for image quality control.

    EPC     G03G    15/00C6, for measuring the copy material characteristics
    (e.g., weight, thickness).

            G03G    15/00C7, for measuring the photoconductor characteristics
    (e.g., temperature, a test patch).


CLS 399/39
TXT Color balance:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 wherein a  means or method is provided for
    controlling each of a group of individual image formations that are
    combined to produce a color copy.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter may include controlling charging or
    exposure or developing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for analyzing a malfunction or potential malfunction of color
    reproduction.

    54,     for color selection control.

    112,    for modular or displaceable color process cartridge unit.

    178+,   for formation of color separation images.

    184,    for color image editing of a selectable area.

    223+,   for development (e.g., applicators) of a color image.

    298+,   for transfer of a color image.

    326,    for fixing or fusing a color image.

    344,    for cleaning a color-image-bearing surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 42+ for related subject matter (i.e., colored image
    products).

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/01, for producing multicolored copies.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/01, for producing multicolored copies.

    EPC     G03G    15/01D, for details of unit.

            G03G    15/01D6, for developing.


CLS 399/40
TXT Of overlapped toner images:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 wherein a second or subsequent color toner
    image is developed on the previously developed image(s).


CLS 399/41
TXT Single detector for plural toners:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 wherein color balance is achieved by
    regulating the amount of colored toner being applied to a latent image.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for diagnostic of consumables (e.g., toner).

    35,     for diagnostics of cleaning a waste toner container.

    61+,    for detection of toner in a developing unit.

    224,    for adding colored toner.

    253,    for conditioning dry toner.

    254+,   for mixing dry toner.

    258+,   for supplying new toner.

    359,    for supplying reclaimed toner to the developing device.


CLS 399/42
TXT Artificial intelligence:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 wherein an electrophotography system or
    method has the capacity to perform one or more of the functions of
    recognition, speech signal processing, knowledge processing (i.e.,
    propositional logic, reasoning, learning, self-improvement), complex
    operations of a manipulator (e.g., robot* control), or inexact reasoning
    (e.g., fuzzy logic).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 274+
    for digest on artificial intelligence.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 1 and 3
    through 77 for artificial intelligence, per se.


CLS 399/43
TXT Responsive to number of copies or passage of time:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 wherein a means or method is provided that
    effects a change in condition-responsive control according to an amount of
    copies produced or a passage of time.

    (1)     Note.  A control cycle being run every (n) times a copy is produced
    is classified with that control.

    (2)     Note.  A change in the set value of a process (e.g., charging,
    exposure, mode according to number of copies, etc.) that is otherwise not
    condition-responsive controlled is classified below.  See SEARCH THIS
    CLASS, SUBCLASS below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237,    for adding liquid toner in response to the number of copies.

    258,    for adding dry toner in response to the number of copies.


CLS 399/44
TXT Having temperature or humidity detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 wherein a means or method is provided that
    compensates or adjusts a control parameter in response to a temperature or
    humidity condition within the electrophotographic device.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include temperature control of fusing
    in response to fusing temperature detection.  For fusing temperature
    control subject matter, see SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS below.

    (2)     Note.  For example, a voltage applied to the charger is adjusted
    according to the temperature of the photoconductive member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69+,    for temperature control of fusing.

    94+,    for internal machine temperature.

    97,     for internal machine humidity.


CLS 399/45
TXT Responsive to copy media characteristic:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 wherein a means or method is provided that
    compensates or adjusts a control parameter of the electrophotographic
    device in response to the detection of copy media type or attribute.


CLS 399/46
TXT Of plural processes:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 wherein a means or method is provided for
    a controlling operation of two or more image-forming processes (i.e.,
    charging, exposing, developing, or transfer) in response to a sensed or
    changed condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39+,    for control of color balance controlling two or more processes.


CLS 399/47
TXT Having detection of exposure light:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 wherein the sensed condition is light
    reflected from or passed through an original.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/00, for an electrographic process using a charge pattern.

    EPC     G03G    15/00C5, for measuring the original characteristics (e.g.,
    contrast, density).


CLS 399/48
TXT Having detection of photoconductor potential:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 wherein the sensed condition is an
    electrostatic potential of a  photoconductive member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73,     for sensing means (e.g., electrometer or electrostatic voltmeter).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclasses 452+ for testing a
    material property using electrostatic phenomenon (this type of test may be
    employed to determine the humidity or electrical insulating properties of
    copy paper, a photosensitive material, etc.) and subclasses 457+ which
    employ means to measure an electrostatic field, such a field being an
    integral property of the electrophotographic process.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/00, for an electrographic process using a charge pattern.

    EPC     G03G    15/00C7E, for characteristics for an electrical parameter
    (e.g., voltage).


CLS 399/49
TXT Having detection of toner (e.g., patch):

    Subject matter under subclass 46 wherein a means or method is provided that
    senses developing material.

    (1)     Note.  Developing material may be applied in the form of a test
    patch or a developed image.

    (2)     Note.  Developing material may be detected in a developing
    apparatus before application to the latent image.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for diagnostic of consumables (e.g., toner).

    35,     for diagnostics of cleaning a waste toner container.

    41,     for detecting plural colors of toner for concentration control.

    61+,    for detection of toner in a developing unit.

    99+,    for toner removal.

    106,    for a toner cartridge.

    120,    for a new and waste toner container.

    129,    for supplemental exposure or charging of residual toner.

    134,    for image formation with photoconductive toner.

    224,    for adding colored toner.

    239+,   for application of liquid developer.

    253,    for conditioning dry toner.

    254+,   for mixing dry toner.

    258+,   for supplying new toner.

    265+    for application of dry developer.

    359,    for supplying reclaimed toner to the developing device.

    409,    for binding copies by toner.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/00, for an electrographic process using a charge pattern.

    EPC     G03G    15/00C7, for measuring photoconductor characteristics
    (e.g., temperature, a test patch).

            G03G    15/00C8, for measuring the characteristics of an image on
    the copy material.


CLS 399/50
TXT Control of charging:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 wherein a charge or potential level of a
    photoconductive member is adjusted in response to the sensed condition.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter is for the charging of a photoconductive
    member only.  For other charging (e.g., charging of toner), see SEARCH THIS
    CLASS, SUBCLASS below.

    (2)     Note.  This subject matter includes, for example, using light
    exposure to control the charge level.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88+,    for machine operations with power supply.

    100,    for particle or contaminant control in removal of toner from a
    charging member (e.g., corona wire).

    115,    for charging unit having a modular or displaceable structure.

    128+,   for supplemental process (e.g., fatigue treatment) involving
    charging.

    153,    for simultaneous charging and exposure.

    168+,   for charging, per se.

    296,    for exposure or charging of a developed image prior to transfer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity: Power Supply or Regulation Systems, for power supply,
    per se.

    361,    Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices, for subclasses 212+
    for means to discharge or prevent accumulation of static electric charge
    and subclasses 225+ for electric charge generating or conducting means.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof,  appropriate subclasses for radiation imagery chemistry, process,
    composition, or product, especially  Cross-Reference Art Collection 902 for
    cross-reference art collections involving charging.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/02, for sensitizing (i.e., laying down a uniform charge).

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/02 102, for arrangements for the control or the circuits.

    EPC     G03G    15/02C, for an arrangement for controlling the amount of a
    charge.


CLS 399/51
TXT Control of exposure:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 wherein a means or method is provided for
    controlling the illumination of an original in response to the sensed
    condition.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter includes regulating the amount of
    voltage or current to a lamp that illuminates an original or to a shutter
    in the optical path, or regulating the amount of light used in the
    formation of the latent image.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177+,   for exposure, per se.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/043, for controlling illumination or exposure.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/04 120, for controlling the exposure.

    EPC     G03G    15/052E, for controlling illumination or exposure.


CLS 399/52
TXT In response to light from original:

    Subject matter under subclass 51 wherein the illumination is controlled in
    response to the detected image density of an original.


CLS 399/53
TXT Control of developing:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 wherein a means or method is provided that
    controls the application of toner to the latent image in response to
    detection of an image-forming condition.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter may include, for example, dispensing
    toner in response to a sensed condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222+,   for developing, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, for coating, per se.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/08, for using a solid developer (e.g., powder developer).

    EPC     G03G    15/08H6, for testing or measuring developer properties or
    quality (e.g., charge, size, flowability).


CLS 399/54
TXT Color selection:

    Subject matter under subclass 53 wherein color of toner is selected in
    response to the sensed condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for analyzing a malfunction or potential malfunction of color
    reproduction.

    39+,    for balance control of color.

    112,    for modular or displaceable color process cartridge unit.

    178+,   for formation of color separation images.

    184,    for color image editing of a selectable area.

    223+,   for development (e.g., applicators) of a color image.

    298+,   for transfer of a color image.

    326,    for fixing or fusing of a color image.

    344,    for cleaning a color-image-bearing surface.


CLS 399/55
TXT Bias control:

    Subject matter under subclass 53 wherein voltage or current used to aid or
    influence development is controlled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240,    for liquid application member with applied bias.

    241,    for liquid development with electrode influencing the attraction of
    liquid developer.

    270+,   for magnetic brush-type application member with applied bias.

    285,    for roller-type application member with applied bias.

    291,    for powder cloud applicator with electrode(s) influencing the
    attraction of dry developer.

    293,    for fluidized bed applicator with electrode(s) influencing the
    attraction of dry developer.

    295,    for cascade applicator with electrode(s) influencing the attraction
    of dry developer.

    314,    for electrostatic transfer with applied bias.

    354,    for cleaning an imaging surface by a fibrous brush with applied
    voltage.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/06, for developing.

    EPC     G03G    15/06C, for controlling the potential of the developing
    electrode.


CLS 399/56
TXT In response to potential of latent image:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein the bias is controlled in response
    to the sensed potential of a latent image to be developed.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter also includes a "self-biased" electrode.


CLS 399/57
TXT Liquid:

    Subject matter under subclass 53 wherein a liquid level, concentration, or
    additive is controlled in response to a detected condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237+,   for liquid development.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/10, for using a liquid developer.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/10 115, for detecting the liquid developer concentration.

    EPC     G03G    15/10D1, for detection or control of the toner (liquid)
    concentration.


CLS 399/58
TXT Concentration control:

    Subject matter under subclass 53 wherein an amount or percentage of toner
    within the toner and carrier mixture is controlled.

    (1)     Note.  The concentration is generally effected by adding new toner
    to the developing unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for toner concentration detector.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/10, for using a liquid developer.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/08 115, for detecting and controlling the toner
    concentration.

    EPC     G03G    15/08H1, for detection or control of the toner
    concentration.


CLS 399/59
TXT Setting of reference value:

    Subject matter under subclass 58 wherein a means or method is provided for
    designating a threshold level in response to a toner-carrier concentration.


CLS 399/60
TXT Detection of developed image:

    Subject matter under subclass 58 wherein the concentration control is
    effected according to the sensed amount or density of toner that has been
    applied to a latent image.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for a densitometer detail in an electrophotographic device.


CLS 399/61
TXT Detection of toner in developing unit:

    Subject matter under subclass 58 wherein the concentration is controlled in
    response to detecting a property of the developer.

    (1)     Note. For example, this subject matter includes electrical property
    of toner or charge/mass ratio (Q/M).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for diagnostic of consumables (e.g., toner).

    35,     for diagnostics of cleaning a waste toner container.

    49,     for detection of toner involving plural control processes.

    99+,    for toner removal.

    106,    for a toner cartridge.

    120,    for a new and waste toner container.

    129,    for supplemental exposure or charging of residual toner.

    134,    for image formation with photoconductive toner.

    224,    for adding colored toner.

    239+,   for application of liquid developer.

    253,    for conditioning dry toner.

    254+,   for mixing dry toner.

    258+,   for supplying new toner.

    265+    for application of dry developer.

    359,    for supplying reclaimed toner to the developing device.

    409,    for binding copies by toner.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/10, for using a liquid developer.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/08 507K, for detecting and testing.


CLS 399/62
TXT Concentration detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein the concentration is controlled in
    response to a detected toner and carrier mixture ratio.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for toner concentration detector.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/10, for using a liquid developer.

    EPC     G03G    15/08H1E, for a concentration being measured by electrical
    means.


CLS 399/63
TXT Magnetic detector:

    Subject matter under subclass 62 wherein a means or method is provided for
    detecting the concentration by using the magnetic properties of toner or
    carrier material.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/10, for using a liquid developer.

    EPC     G03G    15/08H1M, for a concentration being measured by magnetic
    means.


CLS 399/64
TXT Optical detector:

    Subject matter under subclass 62 wherein a means or method is provided for
    detecting concentration by using a light source.

     SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118,    for optics with particular modular or displaceable structure.

    137,    for optical intermediate storage of original image.

    196+,   for variable magnification during exposure.

    200+,   for automatic adjustment of an optical component due to a change in
    magnification.

    209,    for a repositioning of a scanning carriage due to a change in
    scanning length.

    216,    for slit exposure by pivoting mirror.

    218,    for specific lens during exposure.

    219,    for fiber optics used during exposure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 316.1 for special
    receptacles for an optical or photographic means.

    356,    Optics: Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for optical
    measurement and test instruments.

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass 12
    for copying by holographic means.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, for optical waveguiding element, per se,
    particularly subclass 116 for imaging (i.e., with coherent fiber structure
    and includes shaping, enhancing, and correcting).

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/10, for using a liquid developer.

    EPC     G03G    15/08H1L, for a concentration being measured by optical
    means.


CLS 399/65
TXT Including sample holder:

    Subject matter under subclass 64 wherein the toner to be detected is
    attracted to a detection location by an applied voltage.


CLS 399/66
TXT Control of transfer:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 wherein a  means or method is provided for
    controlling a parameter which causes a toner image to move from one surface
    or member to another.

    (1)     Note.  A parameter may be for example voltage, current, or pressure.

    (2)     Note.  Included herewithin is control of separation and electrical
    discharge of copy medium to remove charge applied by transfer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    for particle or contaminant control of toner on a transfer member.

    121,    for transfer unit with particular modular or displaceable
    structure.


    154,    for image formation with transfer of latent image.

    297+,   for transferring a toner image, per se.

    388+,   for feeding a copy to the transfer position.

    397+,   for delivering a copy from the transfer position.


CLS 399/67
TXT Control of fixing:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 wherein a  means or method is provided for
    controlling a parameter which causes a developed image to be permanently
    attached to a copy medium or substrate.

    (1)     Note.  A parameter may be, for example, voltage, current, or
    pressure.

    (2)     Note.  Common applications for attaching an image to a copy medium
    are heat, pressure, and solvent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for over-temperature protection during fixing.

    91,     for a fire extinguisher internal to the machine.

    122,    for fixing unit with particular modular or displaceable structure.

    320+,   for fixing (e.g., fusing), per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 1+ for thermal
    calibration devices.


CLS 399/68
TXT Conveyance of copy:

    Subject matter under subclass 67 wherein a speed at which the copy is
    transported through the fixing arrangement is regulated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    361+,   for document handling, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 1+ for thermal
    calibration devices.


CLS 399/69
TXT Temperature control:

    Subject matter under subclass 67 wherein a means or method is provided for
    controlling the amount of thermal energy that is applied to permanently fix
    a developed image to a copy medium or substrate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for over-temperature protection during fixing.

    91,     for a fire extinguisher internal to the machine.

    122,    for fixing unit with particular modular or displaceable structure.

    320+,   for fixing (e.g., fusing), per se.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/20, for fixing (e.g., by using heat).

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/20 109, for detecting and regulating the fixing
    temperature.

    EPC     G03G    15/20H2P3, for controlling or regulating the fixing
    temperature.

            G03G    15/20H2P3A, especially the axial heat repartition.


CLS 399/70
TXT Warmup or standby mode:

    Subject matter under subclass 69 wherein the temperature of a fixing unit
    is (a) controlled on power initiation or (b) set to a predetermined
    temperature when the fixing unit is idle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 1+ for thermal
    calibration devices.


CLS 399/71
TXT Control of cleaning:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 wherein a means or method is provided for
    controlling a parameter which causes removal of developed material from an
    imaging surface after an image is transferred to a copy medium.

    (1)     Note.  A parameter may be, for example, voltage, current, or
    pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34+,    for cleaning diagnostics.

    123,    for particular structure of cleaning unit.

    149,    for combined development and cleaning by a single component.

    245,    for self-cleaning with electrodes a liquid development application
    member.

    327,    for cleaning of fixing member.

    343+,   for cleaning an imaging surface (i.e. photoconductive member),
    including a cleaning member cyclically movable into and out of contact with
    the imaging surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 1.51+ for
    electrostatic cleaning and subclasses 300.1+ for air blast or suction which
    may be used to clean electrophotographic, photoresponsive imaging surfaces.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 1+ for cleaning
    applications of electric, wave, ray, or radiant energy.


CLS 399/72
TXT Forming test image:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 wherein a means or method is provided for
    creating a latent or toner test image that can  be detected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for inspection of copied image.


CLS 399/73
TXT Electrometer detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 wherein a means or method is provided for
    measuring a potential or charge level of a photoconductive member.

    (1)     Note.   The electrometer may also be called an electrostatic
    voltmeter.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for detection of photoconductor potential.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, for electrical measuring and
    testing, per se.


CLS 399/74
TXT Densitometer detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    measuring an optical density of toner.

    (1)     Note.  The optical density is the negative logarithm of the percent
    transmittance (or reflectance) or a transparent material (or opaque).  For
    example, photographic transmission, photographic reflection, visual
    transmission of a material, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics: Measuring and Testing, for optical measuring and testing,
    per se.


CLS 399/75
TXT MACHINE OPERATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a means or method is
    provided for performing the basic cyclic operation necessary for the
    apparatus to run.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9+,     for diagnostics of an electrophotographic device.

    38+,    for control of the electrophotographic processes (e.g., charging,
    exposure, developing, transferring, fixing, and cleaning).

    91+,    for internal machine environmental control.

    107+,   for electrophotographic device having particular structure.

    127+,   for supplemental electrophotographic processes.

    130+,   for image formation, per se.

    343+,   for cleaning an imaging surface.

    361+,   for document handling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, for registers, per se, include attachments to machines
    where the purpose is to ascertain or count the number of movements thereof.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/00, for an electrographic process using a charge pattern.

            G03G    21/00, for an arrangement not provided for by groups 13/00
    to 19/00 (e.g., cleaning or elimination of residue).

    JPO/FI  G03G    21/00 370, for control shared by components in the
    electrographic apparatus and control of the entire apparatus.

            G03G    21/00 388, for control of electrographic apparatus.

            G03G    21/00 502, for structure of a mechanical means adapted for
    controlling the electrographic apparatus.

    EPC     G03G    15/00C, for machine (e.g., regulating different parts of
    the machine, multimode copiers, microprocessor control).


CLS 399/76
TXT Sequential control:

    Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein the cyclic operation actuates the
    various components of the apparatus in the proper timing and sequence for
    producing a copy.

    (1)     Note.  Normal electrophotographic device functions, such as
    xerographic and paper handling, are classified below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, for registers, per se, include attachments to machines
    where the purpose is to ascertain or count the number of movements thereof.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    21/14, for an electronic sequencing control.

    JPO/FI  G03G    21/00 372, for timing by simultaneous control.


CLS 399/77
TXT Programmed:

    Subject matter under subclass 76 wherein the timing and sequence are
    provided by computer processing by a list of software instructions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 130+
    for generic data processing control systems and subclasses 525+ for
    computer control of optics or photography devices.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, for computer data
    processing, per se.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    21/14, for electronic sequencing control.

    EPC     G03G    21/14, for electronic sequencing control.


CLS 399/78
TXT Reference signal (e.g., pulse train):

    Subject matter under subclass 76 wherein the timing and sequence are
    provided by a generated series of clock pulses or a plurality of timed
    control signals.


    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    21/14, for electronic sequencing control.

    EPC     G03G    21/14B, for sequencing control wherein control pulses are
    generated by the mechanical movement of parts of the machine.


CLS 399/79
TXT Accounting:

    Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein a means or method is provided that
    authorizes, counts, or registers an amount of copy medium produced from an
    electrophotographic device.

    (1)     Note.  For example, this subject matter may include vending,
    renting, or charging a customer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, for registers, per se, include attachments to machines
    where the purpose is to ascertain or count the number of movements thereof.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses
    464.01+ for cost or price calculations.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclasses 13 through 16 for accounting of machine or
    apparatus operating or monitoring time.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    21/02, for counting the number of copies, Billing.

    JPO/FI  G03G    21/00 392, for control on producing multiple number of
    copies; arrangement for collecting the coping fees.

            G03G    21/00 394, for structure of the counter used for
    electrographic apparatus.

    EPC     G03G    21/02, for counting the number of copies, Billing.


CLS 399/80
TXT User access:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 wherein the authorization is provided by
    identification (e.g., ID number or key card).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    366,    for restricted use based only on a property of a document or
    original to be copied.


CLS 399/81
TXT Operator interface (e.g., display control panel):

    Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein an input or output arrangement is
    provided for communicating with an operator of the electrophotographic
    device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    for operator adjusted density of an image formation.

    158,    for display of developed image.

    182+,   for editing color images.

    387,    for copy length adjustment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 681+ for
    display support.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/00, for electrographic process using a charge pattern.

    EPC     G03G    15/00C4, for user-machine interface; Display panels;
    Control console.


CLS 399/82
TXT Job mode:

    Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein a means or method is provided for
    selecting document handling functions to be performed on a group of
    documents by a sequence of operations.

    (1)     Note.  For example, document handling functions may include simplex
    or duplex, one or both sides, transparencies, number of copies, collate or
    stack, magnification, etc.

    (2)     Note.  This subject matter may include selection of a color to be
    used or a "default mode setting," in addition to other attributes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203,    for plural exposure modes.

    367,    for plural modes of operation for an automatic document feeder.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/00, for electrographic process using a charge pattern.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/01R, for setting, changing, and displaying the mode.

            G03G    21/00 376, for selection and display of copy mode.

            G03G    21/00 378, for automatic selection of mode.

            G03G    21/00 380, for guidance selecting a copy mode.

            G03G    21/00 384, for changing the control according to changes of
    copy mode.


CLS 399/83
TXT Having memory:

    Subject matter under subclass 82 wherein the job mode is selected from or
    retained in an electronic storage unit.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter may include a removable device (e.g.,
    integrated circuit card).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for storage of data on the operation of an electrophotographic
    device (i.e., log report).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 48 for subject
    matter related to magnetographic electrophotography.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 125 for having
    photographic storage medium (e.g., variable density or area).

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/00, for electrographic process using a charge pattern.

    EPC     G03G    15/00C9, for using information from an external support
    (e.g., a magnetic card).


CLS 399/84
TXT Key sheet:

    Subject matter under subclass 82 wherein a job mode is determined in
    response to detection of indicia or a mark on an original or other medium.

    (1)     Note.  A mode is set, initiated, or changed by detection of a key
    sheet, marked original, or record card.  The key sheet is generally on top
    of a stack of originals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    382,    Image Analysis, subclass 317 for image sensor control (e.g., OCR
    sheet controls copier or fax).

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/00, for electrographic process using a charge pattern.

    EPC     G03G    15/00C9F, for being interleaved with the original or
    directly written on the original (e.g., using a control sheet).


CLS 399/85
TXT Having mode change:

    Subject matter under subclass 82 wherein the job mode is changeable to a
    different setting automatically or during operation.


CLS 399/86
TXT Auto copy size or magnification:

    Subject matter under subclass 85 wherein the job mode is automatic
    selection of the size of the copy medium or the magnification.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/00, for an electrographic process using a charge pattern.

    EPC     G03G    15/00C11, for matching the image with the size of the copy
    material (e.g., by calculating the magnification or selecting the adequate
    copy material size).


CLS 399/87
TXT Having priority interrupt:

    Subject matter under subclass 85 wherein an operating mode is stopped to
    allow a second job mode to be run and the original mode is returned to
    after the completion of the second job mode.

    (1)     Note.  Generally a first mode of operation is interrupted before
    completion to enter a second job mode.  This includes returning to the
    first mode after completing the second.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for job recovery after interruption.


CLS 399/88
TXT Having power supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein a means or method is provided for
    feeding electrical energy to an electrophotographic device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for diagnostics of power supplied to an electrophotographic device
    or component.

    168+,   for charging a photoconductive member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity: Power Supply or Regulation Systems, for power supply,
    per se.

    361,    Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices, for subclasses 212+
    for means to discharge or prevent accumulation of static electric charge
    and subclasses 225+ for electric charge generating or conducting means.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/00, for an electrographic process using a charge pattern.

    JPO/FI  G03G    21/00 398, for electrical power source control, (e.g.,
    arrangement for electrical power sources).

    EPC     G03G    15/00P, for details relating to power supplies, circuit
    boards, and electrical connections.


CLS 399/89
TXT Supplying power to charger:

    Subject matter under subclass 88 wherein the power is supplied to a
    charging unit for charging a photoconductive member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168+,   for charging, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 235 for
    specific power supply of electric charge generating or conducting means.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/00, for an electrographic process using a charge pattern.

    EPC     G03G    15/02E, for supplying power to the sensitizing device.


CLS 399/90
TXT Electrical connection:

    Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein a means or method is provided for
    connecting electrical signals or power between operative components or for
    a ground connection to a photoconductive member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for having a power supply.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 309.15+ for timer controlled
    systems.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 1+ for a
    timer controlled by a disparate device and subclasses 10+ for a timer
    combined with a disparate device.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/00, for an electrographic process using a charge pattern.

    EPC     G03G    15/00P, for details relating to power supplies, circuit
    boards, and electrical connections.


CLS 399/91
TXT INTERNAL MACHINE ENVIRONMENT:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein method or apparatus is
    provided that prevents or ameliorates adverse conditions of the machine
    interior atmosphere.

    (1)     Note.  For example, adverse conditions include high or low
    temperature, vibration, noise, humidity, scattered toner, or contaminants.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9+,     for diagnostics of an electrophotographic device.

    33,     for over-temperature protection during fixing.

    38+,    for control of the electrophotographic processes (e.g., charging,
    exposure, developing, transferring, fixing, and cleaning).

    67+,    for condition-responsive control of fusing.

    75+,    for control of machine operations.

    107+,   for electrophotographic device having particular structure.

    122,    for fixing unit with particular modular or displaceable structure.

    127+,   for supplemental electrophotographic processes.

    130+,   for image formation, per se.

    320+,   for fixing (e.g., fusing), per se.

    343+,   for cleaning an imaging surface.

    361+,   for document handling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, for humidity and
    temperature control, per se.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 1+ for thermal
    calibration devices.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    21/20, for humidity or temperature control.

    JPO/FI  G03G    21/00 530, for internal apparatus environment control of
    the electrographic apparatus.

    EPC     G03G    21/20, for humidity or temperature control, also ozone
    evacuation; internal apparatus environment control.


CLS 399/92
TXT Forced air circulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 wherein a means or method is provided for
    generating air flow within the electrophotographic device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    343,    for cleaning an imaging member by air or vacuum.

    355,    for air circulation used in conjunction with a cleaning brush.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    21/20, for humidity or temperature control.

    JPO/FI  G03G    21/00 538, for removal of unnecessary substances from
    atmospheric air.

    JPO/FI  G03G    21/00 540, for ozone evaluation.


CLS 399/93
TXT Having filtering (e.g., ozone removal):

    Subject matter under subclass 92 wherein a means or method is provided for
    screening out particles or gas within the atmosphere of the
    electrophotographic device.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    21/20, for humidity or temperature control.

    JPO/FI  G03G    21/00 534, for humidity or temperature control (e.g., by
    using a heater or a fan).


CLS 399/94
TXT Temperature:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 wherein a  means or method is provided for
    adjusting or dealing with adverse temperature within the
    electrophotographic device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for over-temperature protection of a fuser.

    44,     for having temperature or humidity detection.

    69+,    for condition-responsive temperature control of fusing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 1+ for thermal
    calibration devices.


CLS 399/95
TXT Platen:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 wherein a means or method is provided to
    prevent overheating of a structure for supporting an original during
    exposure.


CLS 399/96
TXT Photoconductive member:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 wherein a means or method is provided for
    heating or cooling a photoconductive member.

    (1)     Note.  For example, this subject matter includes detecting a
    temperature of a photoconductive member for controlling the heating or
    cooling thereof.


CLS 399/97
TXT Humidity:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    regulating or ameliorating adverse conditions due to the moisture content
    of the environment within the electrophotographic device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for temperature or humidity detection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, for humidity
    control, per se.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    21/20, for humidity or temperature control.

    JPO/FI  G03G    21/00 534, for humidity or temperature control (e.g., by
    using a heater or a fan).


CLS 399/98
TXT Particle or contaminant control:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 wherein an arrangement is provided that
    limits the harmful effects caused by toner dust, mist, or other airborne
    fragments.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter also includes applying a voltage or
    electrical connection to part(s) of the apparatus to prevent the attraction
    or settling of airborne particles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    343+,   for cleaning a photoconductive member.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    21/00, for an arrangement not provided for by groups 13/00
    to 19/00 (e.g., cleaning or elimination of residue).

    JPO/FI  G03G    21/00 310, for cleaning (e.g., elimination of residual
    magnetic powder or elimination of paper residue).


CLS 399/99
TXT Toner removal:

    Subject matter under subclass 98 wherein an arrangement is provided for the
    cleaning of scattered, airborne, or spilled toner from parts of the
    electrophotographic device other than the surface bearing a developed
    electrostatic latent image.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter also includes an arrangement for
    cleaning toner from the surface of the photoconductive member that does not
    receive toner for imaging.  For cleaning toner from parts that normally
    come in contact with toner (e.g., developing, doctor blade, etc.), see
    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for diagnostic of consumables (e.g., toner).

    35,     for diagnostics of cleaning a waste toner container.

    49,     for detection of toner involving plural control processes.

    61+,    for detection of toner in a developing unit.

    106,    for a toner cartridge.

    120,    for a new and waste toner container.

    129,    for supplemental exposure or charging of residual toner.

    134,    for image formation with photoconductive toner.

    222+,   for cleaning toner from a developing unit.

    224,    for adding colored toner.

    239+,   for application of liquid developer.

    253,    for conditioning dry toner.

    254+,   for mixing dry toner.

    258+,   for supplying new toner.

    265+    for application of dry developer.

    359,    for supplying reclaimed toner to the developing device.

    409,    for binding copies by toner.


CLS 399/100
TXT Charging member (e.g., corona wire):

    Subject matter under subclass 99 wherein particles or contaminants are
    removed from the apparatus for applying charge to the photoconductive
    member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     for control of charging.

    115,    for charging unit having a modular or displaceable structure.

    128+,   for supplemental process (e.g., fatigue treatment) involving
    charging.

    153,    for simultaneous charging and exposure.

    168+,   for charging, per se.

    296,    for exposure or charging of a developed image prior to transfer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity: Power Supply or Regulation Systems, for power supply,
    per se.

    361,    Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices, for subclasses 212+
    for means to discharge or prevent accumulation of static electric charge
    and subclasses 225+ for electric charge generating or conducting means.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof,  appropriate subclasses for radiation imagery chemistry, process,
    composition, or product, especially  Cross-Reference Art Collection 902 for
    charging.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/02, for laying down a uniform charge (e.g., for
    sensitizing; corona discharge device).

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/02 103, for safety and cleaning arrangement.

    EPC     G03G    15/02B, for the maintenance of the charging device (e.g.,
    cleaning device or ozone removing device).


CLS 399/101
TXT Transfer member:

    Subject matter under subclass 99 wherein particles or contaminants are
    removed from the apparatus for transferring a latent image to a copy medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66,     for condition responsive control of transfer.

    121,    for transfer unit with particular modular or displaceable
    structure.


    154,    for image formation with transfer of latent image.

    297+,   for transferring a toner image, per se.

    388+,   for feeding a copy to the transfer position.

    397+,   for delivering a copy from the transfer position.


CLS 399/102
TXT Seal:

    Subject matter under subclass 98 wherein an arrangement is provided that
    prevents the escape of toner or developer material from an internal unit.


CLS 399/103
TXT Developer seal:

    Subject matter under subclass 102 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    preventing toner from escaping the developing unit.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/08, for using solid developer or powder developer.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/08 505, for preventing the toner scattering.

            G03G    15/09, for preventing the toner scattering using a magnetic
    brush.


    EPC     G03G    15/08S1, for preventing toner scattering (e.g. seals).


CLS 399/104
TXT Magnetic:

    Subject matter under subclass 103 wherein the developer seal is a magnetic
    arrangement.


CLS 399/105
TXT Elastic material:

    Subject matter under subclass 103 wherein the developer seal is a flexible
    material.


CLS 399/106
TXT Toner cartridge:

    Subject matter under subclass 103 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    preventing toner from escaping a removable, sealed container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for diagnostic of consumables (e.g., toner).

    35,     for diagnostics of cleaning a waste toner container.

    49,     for detection of toner involving plural control processes.

    61+,    for detection of toner in a developing unit.

    99+,    for toner removal.

    120,    for a new and waste toner container.

    129,    for supplemental exposure or charging of residual toner.

    134,    for image formation with photoconductive toner.

    224,    for adding colored toner.

    239+,   for application of liquid developer.

    253,    for conditioning dry toner.

    254+,   for mixing dry toner.

    258+,   for supplying new toner.

    265+    for application of dry developer.

    359,    for supplying reclaimed toner to the developing device.

    409,    for binding copies by toner.


CLS 399/107
TXT HAVING PARTICULAR STRUCTURE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a housing arrangement of
    the electrophotographic component or device has a replaceable or
    displaceable configuration for transporting, reconfiguration, maintenance,
    service, or repair.

    (1)     Note.  For parts of the apparatus undergoing displacement during
    normal operation, see SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9+,     for diagnostics of an electrophotographic device.

    38+,    for control of the electrophotographic processes (e.g., charging,
    exposure, developing, transferring, fixing, and cleaning).

    75+,    for control of machine operations.

    91+,    for internal machine environmental control.

    127+,   for supplemental electrophotographic processes.

    130+,   for image formation, per se.

    317,    for a displaceable transfer member with copy medium guide.

    332,    for a cyclically displaceable fixing nip.

    345,    for a cleaning arrangement disengageable from the imaging surface.

    361+,   for document handling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 316.1 for special
    receptacles for an optical or photographic means.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/00, for an electrographic process using a charge pattern.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/00 550, for a housing and its components.

    EPC     G03G    15/00, for an electrographic process using a charge pattern.


CLS 399/108
TXT Portable:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein an electrophotography device has
    an ability to be transported or moved by hand (i.e., carried).

    (1)     Note.  This may also include an electrophotographic device that
    operates from a battery power supply, solar power supply, or portable
    energy source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 316.1 for special
    receptacles for an optical or photographic means.


CLS 399/109
TXT Remanufacturing:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein parts of the apparatus, such as a
    process cartridge, are serviced, reconditioned, or modified for further use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 895.1 for repairing or servicing a roller.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    94 for renewing or repairing articles for use.


CLS 399/110
TXT Modular or displaceable:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein parts of the apparatus are
    removable or movable to gain access to the interior or other parts of the
    electrophotographic device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258,    for a toner cartridge.

    360,    for toner waste container.

    391,    for plural copy-medium sources having interchangeable trays.

    393,    for copy-medium input trays that are interchangeable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 316.1 for special
    receptacles for an optical or photographic means.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    21/16, mechanical means for facilitating the maintenance of
    the apparatus (e.g., modular arrangement).

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/00 554, mechanical means which makes the maintenance of
    the apparatus easy, (e.g., positioning the components).

    EPC     G03G    21/16, mechanical means for facilitating the maintenance of
    the apparatus (e.g., modular arrangement).


CLS 399/111
TXT Process cartridge unit:

    Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein the particular structure provides
    a photoconductive member and one or more means for charging, exposing,
    developing,  transferring, etc., as a contained, separate unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for diagnostics of consumable process cartridge.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    21/18, for using a processing cartridge.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/00 556, for housing and its components using a
    processing cartridge.

    EPC     G03G    21/18, for using a processing cartridge.


CLS 399/112
TXT Color:

    Subject matter under subclass 111 wherein the process cartridge unit is
    capable of producing a copy that has more than one color.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for analyzing a malfunction or potential malfunction of color
    reproduction.

    39+,    for balance control of color.

    54,     for color selection control.

    178+,   for formation of color separation images.

    184,    for color image editing of a selectable area.

    223+,   for development (e.g., applicators) of a color image.

    298+,   for transfer of a color image.

    326,    for fixing or fusing of a color image.

    344,    for cleaning a color-image-bearing surface.


CLS 399/113
TXT Having subunit separation:

    Subject matter under subclass 111 wherein the process cartridge is designed
    or arranged to be disassembled or separated into component parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109,    for remanufacturing a process cartridge.


CLS 399/114
TXT Including cover:

    Subject matter under subclass 111 wherein an arrangement is provided for a
    protective encasement to the process cartridge unit.


CLS 399/115
TXT Charging unit:

    Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein the means for applying a charge
    to or removing it from an imaging member is displaceable, removable, or
    adjustable.

    (1)     Note. This subject matter may include, for example, an arrangement
    for manually positioning or replacing a corona wire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     for control of charging.

    88+,    for machine operations with power supply.

    100,    for particle or contaminant control in removal of toner from a
    charging member (e.g., corona wire).

    128+,   for supplemental process (e.g., fatigue treatment) involving
    charging.

    153,    for simultaneous charging and exposure.

    168+,   for charging, per se.

    296,    for exposure or charging of a developed image prior to transfer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity: Power Supply or Regulation Systems, for power supply,
    per se.

    361,    Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices, for subclasses 212+
    for means to discharge or prevent accumulation of static electric charge
    and subclasses 225+ for electric charge generating or conducting means.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof,  appropriate subclasses for radiation imagery chemistry, process,
    composition, or product, especially  subclass 902 for charging.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/02, for sensitizing (i.e., laying down a uniform charge).

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/02 102, for arrangements for the control or the circuits.

    EPC     G03G    15/02C, for an arrangement for controlling the amount of a
    charge.


CLS 399/116
TXT Photoconductive member:

    Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein the removable or replaceable unit
    is an electrostatic, latent, image-bearing member.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/00, for an electrographic process using a charge pattern.

    JPO/FI  G03G    21/00 354, structure arranged for replacing a
    photosensitive material.


CLS 399/117
TXT Drum mount:

    Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    bearing support of a cylindrically shaped photoconductive member.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/00, for an electrographic process using a charge pattern.

    EPC     G03G    15/00H1, for replacement, testing, etc., relating to drum.


CLS 399/118
TXT Optics:

    Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein an arrangement is provided that
    allows an alignment of an optical component between an original and a
    photoconductive member.

    (1)     Note.  The optical components may consist of reflectors, mirrors,
    or lens, or holders therefor, to guide a light from an original to a
    photoconductive member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for optical detector of toner in a developing unit.

    137,    for optical intermediate storage of original image.

    196+,   for variable magnification during exposure.

    200+,   for automatic adjustment of an optical component due to a change in
    magnification.

    209,    for a repositioning of a scanning carriage due to a change in
    scanning length.

    216,    for slit exposure by pivoting mirror.

    218,    for specific lens during exposure.

    219,    for fiber optics used during exposure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 316.1 for special
    receptacles for an optical or photographic means.

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass 12
    for copying by holographic means.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, for optical waveguiding element, per se,
    particularly subclass 116 for imaging (i.e., with coherent fiber structure
    and includes shaping, enhancing, and correcting).


CLS 399/119
TXT Developing unit:

    Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein the removable or replaceable unit
    applies toner to a latent image to render the image visible.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222+,   for development, per se.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/08, for using solid developer, powder developer.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/08 506, for mounting/dismounting.

    EPC     G03G    15/08S, for details concerning the developer unit structure
    (e.g., arrangement for removing or positioning the unit).


CLS 399/120
TXT New and waste toner container:

    Subject matter under subclass 119 wherein the removable or replaceable unit
    contains both new and used toner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for diagnostic of consumables (e.g., toner).

    35,     for diagnostics of cleaning  waste toner container.

    49,     for detection of toner involving plural control processes.

    61+,    for detection of toner in developing unit.

    99+,    for toner removal.

    106,    for toner cartridge.

    129,    for supplemental exposure or charging of residual toner.

    134,    for image formation with photoconductive toner.

    224,    for adding colored toner.

    239+,   for application of liquid developer.

    253,    for conditioning of dry toner.

    254+,   for mixing of dry toner.

    258+,   for supplying new toner.

    265+    for application of dry developer.

    359,    for supplying reclaimed toner to the developing device.

    409,    for binding copies by toner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, for package making, per se.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 449+ for plate or sheet.

    220,    Receptacles, for receptacles, per se.

    222,    Dispensing, for dispensing material from a container.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclass 132 for
    rupturable seals.


CLS 399/121
TXT Transfer unit:

    Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein the displaceable or removable
    part is an arrangement for transferring an image from one surface or medium
    to another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66,     for condition responsive control of transfer.

    101,    for particle or contaminant control of toner on a transfer member.

    154,    for image formation with transfer of latent image.

    297+,   for transferring a toner image, per se.

    388+,   for feeding a copy to the transfer position.

    397+,   for delivering a copy from the transfer position.


CLS 399/122
TXT Fixing unit:

    Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein the displaceable or removable
    part is an arrangement for permanently adhering toner to a copy medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for over-temperature protection during fixing.

    67+,    for condition-responsive control of fusing.

    91,     for a fire extinguisher internal to the machine.

    320+,   for fixing (e.g., fusing), per se.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/20, for fixing (e.g., by using heat).

    EPC     G03G    15/20H2P1M, for maintenance purpose (e.g., for removing a
    jammed sheet).


CLS 399/123
TXT Cleaning unit:

    Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein the displaceable or removable
    part is provided for cleaning a surface of an image-bearing member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for cleaning diagnostics.

    71,     for control of cleaning during the electrophotography process.

    149,    for combined development and cleaning by a single component.

    245,    for self-cleaning with electrodes a liquid development application
    member.

    327,    for cleaning a fixing member.

    343+,   for cleaning an imaging surface (i.e., photoconductive member),
    including a cleaning member cyclically movable into and out of contact with
    the imaging surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 1.51+ for
    electrostatic cleaning and subclasses 300.1+ for air blast or suction which
    may be used to clean electrophotographic, photoresponsive, imaging
    surfaces.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 1+ for cleaning
    applications of electric, wave, ray, or radiant energy.


CLS 399/124
TXT Paper path access:

    Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein the displaceable part gives
    access to a traveled path of the original or copy medium.

    (1)     Note.  The copy-medium path of travel may be before or after image
    transfer.


CLS 399/125
TXT Clamshell type:

    Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein a housing arrangement is provided
    with an upper frame and a lower frame that opens and closes about a pivot
    point.


CLS 399/126
TXT Adjustment:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein a mechanical means such as a
    screw or cam is provided for setting or changing the position of a
    component.


CLS 399/127
TXT SUPPLEMENTAL ELECTROPHOTO-
    GRAPHIC PROCESS:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein one or more of charging,
    exposing, developing, or cleaning is performed other than during, or
    directly for, copying or reproduction.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter may include, for example, prewetting,
    prerotation, or postrotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9+,     for diagnostics of an electrophotographic device.

    38+,    for control of the electrophotographic processes (e.g., charging,
    exposure, developing, transferring, fixing, and cleaning).

    75+,    for control of machine operations.

    91+,    for internal machine environmental control.

    107+,   for electrophotographic device having particular structure.

    130+,   for image formation, per se.

    156,    for modification of latent image.

    343+,   for cleaning an imaging surface.

    361+,   for document handling.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    21/00, for an arrangement not provided for by groups 13/00
    to 19/00 (e.g., cleaning, elimination of residue).

            G03G    21/06, for eliminating residual charges from a reusable
    imaging member.

            G03G    21/08, for using optical radiation.


CLS 399/128
TXT Exposure or charging (e.g., fatigue treatment):

    Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein a photoconductive member is
    exposed or charged other than for image formation.

    (1)     Note.  For example, this subject matter may include fatigue
    treatments used to stabilize the photoconductive member for its next
    application.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     for control of charging.

    100,    for particle or contaminant control in removal of toner from a
    charging member (e.g., corona wire).

    115,    for charging unit having a modular or displaceable structure.

    153,    for simultaneous charging and exposure.

    168+,   for charging, per se.

    296,    for exposure or charging a developed image prior to transfer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity: Power Supply or Regulation Systems, for power supply,
    per se.

    361,    Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices, for subclasses 212+
    for means to discharge or prevent accumulation of static electric charge
    and subclasses 225+ for electric charge generating or conducting means.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof,  appropriate subclasses for radiation imagery chemistry, process,
    composition, or product, especially Cross-Reference Art Collection 902 for
    charging.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    21/00, for an arrangement not provided for by groups 13/00
    to 19/00 (e.g., cleaning, elimination of residue).

            G03G    21/06, for eliminating residual charges from a reusable
    imaging member.

            G03G    21/08, for using optical radiation.

    JPO/FI  G03G    21/00 340, for eliminating residual charge.

            G03G    21/00 342, for using optical radiation.

            G03G    21/00 345, for fatigue treatment of the photosensitive
    material.

    EPC     G03G    21/00F, for fatigue treatment of the photoconductor.


CLS 399/129
TXT Of residual toner:

    Subject matter under subclass 128 wherein the charging or exposure is of
    untransferred toner to be removed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for diagnostic of consumables (e.g., toner).

    35,     for diagnostics of cleaning a waste toner container.

    49,     for detection of toner involving plural control processes.

    61+,    for detection of toner in a developing unit.

    99+,    for toner removal.

    106,    for a toner cartridge.

    120,    for a new and waste toner container.

    134,    for image formation with photoconductive toner.

    224,    for adding colored toner.

    239+,   for application of liquid developer.

    253,    for conditioning dry toner.

    254+,   for mixing dry toner.

    258+,   for supplying new toner.

    265+    for application of dry developer.

    359,    for supplying reclaimed toner to the developing device.

    409,    for binding copies by toner.


CLS 399/130
TXT IMAGE FORMATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a copy is produced by
    making a latent image visible with toner or marking particles.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter also includes a second or subsequent
    exposure or development of the same image to enhance the reproduction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9+,     for diagnostics of an electrophotographic device.

    38+,    for control of the electrophotographic processes (e.g., charging,
    exposure, developing, transferring, fixing, and cleaning).

    75+,    for control of machine operations.

    91+,    for internal machine environmental control.

    107+,   for electrophotographic device having particular structure.

    127+,   for supplemental electrophotographic processes.

    343+,   for cleaning an imaging surface.

    361+,   for document handling.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/22, for involving the combination of more than one step
    according to groups G03G 13/02 to 13/20.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/22, for involving the combination of more than one step
    according to groups G03G 13/02 to 13/20.

    EPC     G03G    15/22, for involving the combination of more than one step
    according to groups G03G 13/02 to 13/20.


CLS 399/131
TXT Photoelectrophoretic:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein particles suspended in an
    insulative liquid carrier between electrodes migrate in an image
    configuration in response to both an electrical potential difference
    between electrodes across the suspension and light exposure in image
    configuration.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    17/04, for using photoelectrophoresis.

            G03G    17/06, apparatus using photoelectrophoresis.

    JPO/FI  G03G    17/04, for using photoelectrophoresis.

            G03G    17/06, apparatus using photoelectrophoresis.

    EPC     G03G    17/04, for using photoelectrophoresis.

            G03G    17/06, apparatus using photoelectrophoresis.


CLS 399/132
TXT Thermoplastic deformation:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein a latent electrostatic image is
    made visible by the deformation of a thermoplastic layer.

    (1)     Note.  The deformation is usually by heat or solvent.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    16/00, for electrographic processes using deformation of
    thermoplastic layers.

    JPO/FI  G03G    16/00, for electrographic processes using deformation of
    thermoplastic layers.

    EPC     G03G    16/00, for electrographic processes using deformation of
    thermoplastic layers.


CLS 399/133
TXT Having layer separation (e.g., manifold imaging):

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein is provided an  imaging layer
    between a donor sheet and a receiver sheet that is structurally fracturable
     in response to the combined effect of an applied electrical field and
    exposure that provides a negative image on one of the sheets and a positive
    image on the other.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    17/08, for using an electrophoto-adhesive process (e.g.,
    manifold imaging).

    JPO/FI  G03G    17/08, for using an electrophoto-adhesive process (e.g.,
    manifold imaging).

    EPC     G03G    17/08, for using an electrophoto-adhesive process (e.g.,
    manifold imaging).


CLS 399/134
TXT Having photoconductive toner:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein the photoconductive medium is in
    the form of toner or particles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for diagnostic of consumables (e.g., toner).

    35,     for diagnostics of cleaning a waste toner container.

    49,     for detection of toner involving plural control processes.

    61+,    for detection of toner in a developing unit.

    99+,    for toner removal.

    106,    for a toner cartridge.

    120,    for a new and waste toner container.

    129,    for supplemental exposure or charging of residual toner.

    224,    for adding colored toner.

    239+,   for application of liquid developer.

    253,    for conditioning dry toner.

    254+,   for mixing dry toner.

    258+,   for supplying new toner.

    265+    for application of dry developer.

    359,    for supplying reclaimed toner to the developing device.

    409,    for binding copies by toner.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/00, for an electrographic process using a charge pattern.

            G03G    15/22, for involving the combination of more than one step
    according to groups G03G 13/02 to 13/20.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/00 119, for using photoconductive toner.

    EPC     G03G    15/22G, for using photoconductive toner particles.


CLS 399/135
TXT Ion modulation (e.g., screen):

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein the photoconductive member is in
    the form of a screen or grid or apertures and, after formation of a latent
    image as per the class definition, serves to modulate the flow of ions or
    charged particles to produce a similar or the same latent image on a second
    member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    347,    Incremental Printing and Symbolic Information, subclass 55 for
    applying an electric field ejection intermittently.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/05, for imagewise charging (e.g., photoconductive
    control screen, optically activated charging means).

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/05, for imagewise charging (e.g., photoconductive
    control screen, optically activated charging means).

            G03G    15/22 107, for machines handling xeroradiographic images
    and for machines using a photocontrolled ion flow.

    EPC     G03G    15/22H, for using a photocontrolled ion flow.


CLS 399/136
TXT Simultaneously with charge transfer:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein a latent electrostatic image in
    or on a photoconductive member is transferred to or reproduced on a
    separate second member, generally dielectric and in contact or separated by
    a small gap, by conduction of electrical charges across the gap or by
    direct transfer of charge between the members under the influence of light
    in imagewise configuration, where one or both of the members are precharged
    or a voltage is applied therebetween during imaging.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/05, for imagewise charging (e.g., photoconductive
    control screen, optically activated charging means).

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/044, by charge transfer onto the recording material in
    accordance with the image.

            G03G    15/18 101, by simultaneously performing the exposure and
    the latent image transfer.

    EPC     G03G    15/044, by charge transfer onto the recording material in
    accordance with the image.


CLS 399/137
TXT Optical intermediate storage of original image:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein the original image is stored in a
    light image memory in an optical component between the original and
    photoconductive member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for optical detector of toner in a developing unit.

    118,    for optics with particular modular or displaceable structure.

    196+,   for variable magnification during exposure.

    200+,   for automatic adjustment of an optical component due to a change in
    magnification.

    209,    for a repositioning of a scanning carriage due to a change in
    scanning length.

    216,    for slit exposure by pivoting mirror.

    218,    for specific lens during exposure.

    219,    for fiber optics used during exposure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 316.1 for special
    receptacles for an optical or photographic means.

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass 12
    for copying by holographic means.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, for optical waveguiding element, per se,
    particularly subclass 116 for imaging (i.e., with coherent fiber structure
    and includes shaping, enhancing, and correcting).


CLS 399/138
TXT Operator adjusted density:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein a means or method is provided for
    an operator to select or adjust the relative lightness or darkness of a
    reproduced image.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter also includes adjustment for line image
    or photo image.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     for operator interface panel.


CLS 399/139
TXT Formation of master, photocopy-printer:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein a toner image is formed and
    subsequently used as the original for further reproduction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145,    for plural copies from the same latent image.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/22, for involving the combination of more than one step
    according to groups G03G 13/02 to 13/20.

    EPC     G03G    15/22M, for a process involving the formation of a master
    (e.g., photocopy-printer machine).


CLS 399/140
TXT To produce microimage:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein formation of an
    electrophotographic image is reproduced in miniature (e.g., microfilm or
    microfiche) on a thin flexible cellulose material.

    (1)     Note.  For example, this subject matter includes multiframe
    microfiche film that may be used in conjunction with a microphotographic
    copying machine.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/22, for involving the combination of more than one step
    according to groups G03G 13/02 to 13/20.

    EPC     G03G    15/22A2, for machines handling microimages (e.g., microfilm
    copiers).


CLS 399/141
TXT Film process head:

    Subject matter under subclass 140 wherein an apparatus is provided for
    engaging multiple frames of film at a time.

    (1)     Note.  Separate sections of the process head are for charging,
    exposing, developing, fixing, drying, etc.


CLS 399/142
TXT Development:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein a section of the film process
    head is directed to applying toner to a latent image.


CLS 399/143
TXT Selectively positive or negative:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein method or apparatus is provided
    for automatically or selectively producing either a positive copy (relative
    light and dark portions are the same in original and copy) or a negative
    copy (light and dark portions are reversed between original and copy).

    (1)     Note.  The negative copy mode is generally used for producing a
    copy with a white background where the original has a black background
    (e.g., negative film).


CLS 399/144
TXT Reader-printer

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein an apparatus is provided for
    making a full-size reproduction from a microfilm or microfiche original.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter may include an arrangement for viewing
    the image to be reproduced.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/22, for involving the combination of more than one step
    according to groups G03G 13/02 to 13/20.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/22 104, for reader-printers.


CLS 399/145
TXT Plural copies from same latent image:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein apparatus is provided for
    developing the same electrostatic latent image more than one time to
    produce plural copies.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139,    for formation of original used for reproduction.


CLS 399/146
TXT Contact exposure:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein an original and a photoconductive
    member are adjacent or in close proximity to each other during exposure.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/22, for involving the combination of more than one step
    according to groups G03G 13/02 to 13/20.

    EPC     G03G    15/22C, for using contact-printing.


CLS 399/147
TXT Having overlayer:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein a separate film is provided
    between a photoconductive member and a developing unit for indirect
    development or development on a reverse side of a photosensitive sheet
    bearing a latent image.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/22, for involving the combination of more than one step
    according to groups G03G 13/02 to 13/20.

    EPC     G03G    15/048D, for the image being formed on a dielectric cover
    layer.


CLS 399/148
TXT Combined or plural functions by single component:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein a means or method is provided
    that performs two or more electrophotographic functions (e.g., charging,
    exposing, developing, transferring, fixing, and cleaning).

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/22, for involving the combination of more than one step
    according to groups G03G 13/02 to 13/20.

            G03G    15/24, whereby at least two steps are performed
    simultaneously.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/22 101C, by two revolutions, one copy type.

            G03G    15/24, whereby at least two steps are performed
    simultaneously.

    EPC     G03G    15/24, whereby at least two steps are performed
    simultaneously.

            G03G    15/30C, with more than one photoconductor revolution for
    each copying cycle.


CLS 399/149
TXT Development and cleaning:

    Subject matter under subclass 148 wherein a single electrophotographic
    component performs the functions of developing a latent image and cleaning
    the photoconductive member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for cleaning diagnostics.

    71,     for control of cleaning during the electrophotography process.

    123,    for particular structure of cleaning unit.

    245,    for self-cleaning with electrodes a liquid development application
    member.

    327,    for cleaning of fixing member.

    343+,   for cleaning an imaging surface (i.e., photoconductive member),
    including for a cleaning member cyclically movable into and out of contact
    with the imaging surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 1.51+ for
    electrostatic cleaning and subclasses 300.1+ for air blast or suction which
    may be used to clean electrophotographic, photoresponsive imaging surfaces.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 1+ for cleaning
    applications of electric, wave, ray, or radiant energy.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/30, in which projection is formed on a drum.

    EPC     G03G    15/30C, with more than one photoconductor revolution for
    each copying cycle.


CLS 399/150
TXT Simultaneously:

    Subject matter under subclass 149 wherein the single component performs the
    developing and cleaning at the same time.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter may include a means or method for
    distributing or disorienting a residual toner image to be cleaned.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/24, whereby at least two steps are performed
    simultaneously.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/08 507B, for special methods and devices without a
    cleaner.


CLS 399/151
TXT Combined with scanning:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein one or more electrophotographic
    process units (e.g., a charger) is attached to or integrated with a movable
    scanning carriage for exposing the original.

    (1)     Note.  Other electrophotographic process units may be a developing
    unit, transfer unit, fixing unit, or cleaning unit.


CLS 399/152
TXT Simultaneous exposure and development:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein an apparatus is provided for
    developing a latent image on a photoconductive member while it is being
    exposed in image configuration.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/24, whereby at least two steps are performed
    simultaneously.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/24, whereby at least two steps are performed
    simultaneously.

    EPC     G03G    15/24, whereby at least two steps are performed
    simultaneously.


CLS 399/153
TXT Simultaneous charging and exposure:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein an apparatus is provided for
    applying a charge to the photoconductive member at the same time it is
    being exposed, typically through an aperture in the frame of a corona
    charging device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    296,    for exposure or charging of a developed image prior to transfer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof,  appropriate subclasses for radiation imagery chemistry, process,
    composition, or product.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/056, for using internal polarization.

            G03G    15/24, whereby at least two steps are performed
    simultaneously.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/24, whereby at least two steps are performed
    simultaneously.

    EPC     G03G    15/24, whereby at least two steps are performed
    simultaneously.


CLS 399/154
TXT Having transfer of latent image:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein an apparatus is provided for
    transferring an electrostatic latent image from one medium or substrate to
    another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66,     for condition responsive control of transfer.

    101,    for particle or contaminant control of toner on a transfer member.

    121,    for transfer unit with particular modular or displaceable
    structure.


    297+,   for transferring a toner image, per se.

    388+,   for feeding a copy to the transfer position.

    397+,   for delivering a copy from the transfer position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclass 489 for electric or magnetic transfer process by
    using a difference in electrostatic or magnetic attraction.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/18, for transferring a pattern to a second base of a
    charge pattern.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/18, for transferring a pattern to a second base of a
    charge pattern.

            G03G    15/01A, for producing multicolored copies by latent image
    transfer.

    EPC     G03G    15/18, for transferring a pattern to a second base of a
    charge pattern.


CLS 399/155
TXT Having reciprocating imaging member:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein the photoconductor moves in a
    back-and-forth motion during the electrophotographic process.


CLS 399/156
TXT Having modification of latent image:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein an apparatus is provided for
    supplemental charging or exposure of an electrostatic latent image.

    (1)     Note.  The additional charging or exposure may occur before or
    after the latent image is completely formed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127+,   for supplemental electrophotographic processes.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/045, with means for charging or discharging distinct
    portions of the charge pattern on the recording material (e.g., for
    contrast enhancement or discharging nonimage areas).

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/052, by charging or discharging after sensitizing.

    EPC     G03G    15/052, by charging or discharging after sensitizing (e.g.,
    contrast enhancing processes).


CLS 399/157
TXT To produce outline image:

    Subject matter under subclass 156 wherein the modification of the latent
    image produces an outlined shape of the original image.


CLS 399/158
TXT Display of developed image:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein a method or apparatus is provided
    that allows a developed image to be observed that has not been fixed or
    fused to a copy medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     for operator interface panel.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/00, for an electrographic process using a charge pattern.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/22 106, for involving the combination of more than one
    step according to groups.

            G03G    13/02 to 13/20, for electrophotographic projectors.


CLS 399/159
TXT Photoconductive member:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein a light responsive member has a
    particular physical, electrical, or magnetic characteristic which enables
    the member to change its (a) electrical resistivity or (b) conductivity or
    (c) charge or (d) emissivity or (e) magnetic condition or (f) persistent
    internal polarization upon exposure to radiant energy in the form of light.

    (1)     Note.  The light sensitive member may have, for example, a
    distinctive shape, width, orientation angle, etc.

    (2)     Note.  This subject matter may include an arrangement for interior
    exposure (i.e., from within a belt or drum) of the photoconductive member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for a diagnostic of consumable photoconductive member.

    116+,   for a photoconductive member having particular modular or
    displaceable structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclass 415.1 for a flexible sheet clamping device.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/00, for an electrographic process using a charge pattern.

    JPO/FI  G03G    21/00 350, for mechanical constitution of the recording
    medium or photosensitive.

            G03G    21/00 352, for mechanical means of mounting a thin
    photosensitive sheet.

    EPC     G03G    15/00H, for details relating to xerographic drum, band, or
    platen (e.g., replacing, testing).

            G03G    15/00H1, relating to drum.


CLS 399/160
TXT Selection of image frame area:

    Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein a means or method is provided for
    positioning or locating an image area in relation to a point along a
    rotational path.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter may include compensation for a seam in
    the photoconductive member.


CLS 399/161
TXT Renewable layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein a means or method is provided for
    advancing unused portions of a photoconductive member to an operative
    position.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter includes a rotatable hollow cylinder and
    guiding apparatus around the periphery of the cylinder including a portion
    located inside the cylinder for supplying and taking up a web or belt and
    one or more openings in the periphery of the cylinder through which the web
    or belt may be supplied and collected.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guilding, subclasses 324+ for unwinding
    photographic film.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/00, for an electrographic process using a charge pattern.

    EPC     G03G    15/00H1R, with renewable photoconductive layer.


CLS 399/162
TXT Belt:

    Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein the photoconductive member is in
    the form of a flexible web.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, for belt
    power transmission, per se.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/00, for an electrographic process using a charge pattern.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/00 117, for using a photoconductive film type
    photosensitive material.

    EPC     G03G    15/00H2, for relating to band (e.g., tensioning).


CLS 399/163
TXT Having nonuniform motion:

    Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein different portions of the
    photoconductive belt move at various speeds.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter may include stopping the photoconductive
    belt during exposure.


CLS 399/164
TXT Having backing support:

    Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein a means or method is provided to
    support a photoconductive belt at the point of engagement with an operative
    component.

    (1)     Note.  An operative component, for example, may be an exposure or
    developing device.


CLS 399/165
TXT Alignment or tensioning:

    Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein a means or method is provided for
    restricting the tracking motion of the photoconductive belt.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter also includes tension adjustment of the
    photoconductive belt.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, for a process or apparatus for
    tensioning (i.e., applying or regulating longitudinal stress) and for
    guiding (i.e., establishing or confining the path of movement of a running
    material of indefinite length).


    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/00, for an electrographic process using a charge pattern.

    EPC     G03G    15/00H2, for relating to band (e.g., tensioning).

            G03G    15/00H2A, for maintaining the lateral alignment of the band.


CLS 399/166
TXT Plate:

    Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein the photoconductive member is in
    the form of a plate or a sheet attached to a rectangular plate.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/00, for an electrographic process using a charge pattern.

    EPC     G03G    15/00H4, relating to plate or sheet.


CLS 399/167
TXT Drive apparatus:

    Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein a driving arrangement is provided
    that imparts motion to a photoconductive member.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter may include recitation of a particular
    speed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, for power driven conveyors, per se.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, for belt
    power transmission, per se.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/00, for an electrographic process using a charge pattern.

    EPC     G03G    15/00H3, for a drive mechanism for photosensitive medium.


CLS 399/168
TXT Charging:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein a method or apparatus is provided
    that applies a voltage or current to a photoconductive member to produce or
    remove an electrostatic charge potential.

    (1)     Note.  The applied voltage or current may remove a charge from a
    photoconductive member. This subject matter does not include removing a
    charge by the action of light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     for control of charging.

    88+,    for machine operations with power supply.

    100,    for particle or contaminant control in removal of toner from a
    charging member (e.g., corona wire).

    115,    for a charging unit having a modular or displaceable structure.

    128+,   for a supplemental process (e.g., fatigue treatment) involving
    charging.

    153,    for simultaneous charging and exposure.

    296,    for exposure or charging of a developed image prior to transfer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity: Power Supply or Regulation Systems, for power supply,
    per se.

    361,    Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices, for subclasses 212+
    for means to discharge or prevent accumulation of static electric charge
    and subclasses 225+ for electric charge generating or conducting means.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof,  appropriate subclasses for radiation imagery chemistry, process,
    composition, or product, especially Cross-Reference Art Collection 902 for
    charging.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/02, for sensitizing (i.e., laying down a uniform charge).

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/02, for laying down a uniform charge (e.g., for
    sensitizing; Corona discharge devices).

            G03G    15/02 101, for using the characteristics of the structure.

            G03G    15/02 102, for arrangements for the control or the circuits.

    EPC     G03G    15/02, for sensitizing (i.e., laying down a uniform charge).


CLS 399/169
TXT Having selection of area to be charged:

    Subject matter under subclass 168 wherein a means or method is provided for
    limiting an electrical charge application to a selected area on the
    photoconductive member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    187+,   for light exposure to reduce the charged area.


CLS 399/170
TXT Corona:

    Subject matter under subclass 168 wherein a high voltage is applied to a
    conductor (e.g., wire) which causes a current to flow to the member to be
    charged by ionization of the air or gas surrounding the conductor.

    (1)     Note.  This condition is not sufficient to cause sparking.

    (2)     Note.  This subject matter may include an arrangement to supply new
    corona wire.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 324 through 325 for corona irradiation
    and charging of moving objects.

    361,    Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 225+ for
    electrical charging of objects and materials, particularly subclass 235 for
    having a specific power supply.


CLS 399/171
TXT Having grid:

    Subject matter under subclass 170 wherein a screen or wire electrode is
    provided between the conductor (e.g., corona wire) and photoconductive
    member.


CLS 399/172
TXT Having case:

    Subject matter under subclass 170 wherein a shield is placed around a
    corona arrangement.


CLS 399/173
TXT Needle type:

    Subject matter under subclass 170 wherein the corona is produced by a pin
    electrode or electrodes.


CLS 399/174
TXT Contact:

    Subject matter under subclass 168 wherein an electrical charge is applied
    to a photoconductor by a contacting member.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/02, for laying down a uniform charge (e.g., for
    sensitizing; Corona discharge device).

    EPC     G03G    15/02A, for sensitizing (i.e., laying-down a uniform charge
    by contact, friction, or induction; e.g., roller, brush chargers).


CLS 399/175
TXT Brush:

    Subject matter under subclass 174 wherein the contact charger is brushlike
    or fibrous.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/02, for laying down a uniform charge (e.g., for
    sensitizing; Corona discharge device).

    EPC     G03G    15/02A, for sensitizing (i.e., laying-down a uniform charge
    by contact, friction or induction; e.g., roller, brush chargers).


CLS 399/176
TXT Roller:

    Subject matter under subclass 174 wherein the contact charger is a
    rotatable cylinder.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/02, for laying down a uniform charge (e.g., for
    sensitizing; Corona discharge device).

    EPC     G03G    15/02A, for sensitizing  (i.e., laying-down a uniform
    charge by contact, friction or induction; e.g., roller, brush chargers).


CLS 399/177
TXT Exposure:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein a method or apparatus is provided
    that conducts radiant energy in the form of light directly from an original
    to an image-bearing member.

    (1)     Note.  The use of the limitation "directly" excludes image
    formation systems in which an image of an original is detected and
    converted to electrical signals which are subsequently utilized to generate
    further illumination signals to optically form an image of the original on
    the medium. This excluded subject matter may be found, for example, in
    Class 346, subclasses 74.2+, and in Class 358, subclasses 300 and 301.

    (2)     Note.  Exposure of a charged photoconductive member to a pattern of
    light results in an electrostatic latent image.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for control of exposure.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/04, for exposing (i.e., imagewise exposure by optically
    projecting the original image on a photoconductive recording material).

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/04, for exposing (i.e., imagewise exposure projecting
    the original image on a recording material).

            G03G    15/04 111, for using the characteristics of the optical
    system.

    EPC     G03G    15/04, for exposing ( i.e., transmitting the information
    given by the original image to the recording material; electron beam tubes
    for electrography for transferring a charge pattern through the face platen
    to the recording material).


CLS 399/178
TXT Formation of color separation images:

    Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein a colored original is exposed to
    a plurality of different colored lights to produce separation images.

    (1)     Note.  The plurality of different colors may be produced by filters
    or different colored light sources.

    (2)     Note.  Rather than forming a total light image of an original, the
    light image is filtered (or different colored exposure lights are used) to
    produce a single-colored light image which is a light image of the
    original.  A succession of latent images are thus produced, each
    corresponding to a separate, different-colored, single light image.  Each
    latent image is developed with toner complementary in color to the color of
    the filtered light image.  The toner images are superimposed in
    registration to produce a color copy corresponding to the latent image
    formed with red light developed with cyan toner.  A blue light image is
    developed with yellow toner.  A green light image is developed with
    magenta.  Also, another term for color separation images is color resolved
    images.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for analyzing a malfunction or potential malfunction of color
    reproduction.

    39+,    for balance control of color.

    54,     for color selection control.

    112,    for modular or displaceable color process cartridge unit.

    184,    for color image editing of a selectable area.

    223+,   for development (e.g., applicators) of a color image.

    298+,   for transfer of a color image.

    326,    for fixing or fusing of a color image.

    344,    for cleaning a color-image-bearing surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 42+ for methods of related subject matter (i.e.,
    colored image products).

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/01, for producing multicolored copies.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/01 112, for producing multicolored copies using the
    characteristics related to the exposure process.

    EPC     G03G    15/01D4, for exposing.


CLS 399/179
TXT To plural photoconductive members:

    Subject matter under subclass 178 wherein color separation images are
    exposed to a plurality of photoconductive members.


CLS 399/180
TXT Having halftone screen:

    Subject matter under subclass 178 wherein a means or method is provided
    that reproduces an original image in lines, segments, or dots by enabling
    an original to appear as if it were projected through a screen having a
    lattice of parallel lines at a specified angle.

    (1)     Note.  Line or halftone images may be formed electrostatically
    (e.g., via a photoconductive member with a line or periodic dot pattern
    thereon).


    (2)     Note.  Color images are frequently exposed onto a photoconductive
    member as line images formed at different specified angles for different
    colors.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/01, for producing multicolored copies.

    EPC     G03G    15/01D4H, for exposing and forming a halftone image.


CLS 399/181
TXT Halftone image:

    Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein a means or method is provided
    that reproduces an original image in lines, segments, or dots.

    (1)     Note.  Lines or halftone images may be formed electrostatically
    (e.g., via a photoconductive member with a line or periodic dot pattern
    thereon).


    SEARCH CLASS:

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 42+ for related subject matter (i.e., colored image
    products).


CLS 399/182
TXT Having image editing:

    Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein a means or method is provided
    that allows a particular or selected area of an original image to be
    modified or reproduced.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter includes an area of an original for
    reproduction in a specific or selected color.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     for operator interface panel.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/36, for editing (i.e., producing a composite image by
    copying one or more original images or parts thereof).

    EPC     G03G    15/04C, for image composition (e.g., adding or superposing
    information on the original image).


CLS 399/183
TXT Selectable area:

    Subject matter under subclass 182 wherein a means or method is provided
    that designates a specific portion of an original image to be edited.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter may include a composite image produced
    by masking or trimming, and also detection of a marked portion (area) of
    the original.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194,    for a composite image without masking or trimming.


CLS 399/184
TXT Color:

    Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein a means or method is provided for
    selecting the color developer material being applied to a selected portion
    of an image-bearing member to produce a copy having a different color than
    the original.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter also including the achromatic colors --
    black, gray, and white -- or transparent areas.

    (2)     Note.  Developer material may be magnetic or nonmagnetic toner
    particles, or toner particles mixed with a liquid carrier material, or
    magnetic or nonmagnetic toner particles mixed with magnetic particles that
    act as carriers under the influence of a magnetic field.

    (3)     Note.   The apparatus can also be selectively operated to produce a
    copy with only one color of toner present in the reproduction.

    (4)     Note.  In most cases the units not being selected are inoperative
    after the time of selection.  Selection may be done by an operator or
    automatically.

    (5)     Note.  A full color reproduction contains all of the chromatic
    colors in the original.  It is usually achieved by using substractive color
    primaries (e.g., cyan, magenta, and yellow).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for analyzing a malfunction or potential malfunction of color
    reproduction.

    39+,    for balance control of color.

    54,     for color selection control.

    112,    for a modular or displaceable color process cartridge unit.

    178+,   for formation of color separation images.

    223+,   for development (e.g., applicators) of a color image.

    298+,   for transfer of a color image.

    326,    for fixing or fusing of a color image.

    344,    for cleaning a color-image-bearing surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 42+ for related subject matter (i.e., colored image
    products).


CLS 399/185
TXT Touch pad:

    Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein a pressure sensitive surface is
    used to input the area of the original to be selected.

    (1)     Note.  The touch pad orientation may be in graphical terms of a
    two-dimensional x,y coordinate system.


CLS 399/186
TXT Details of erase light:

    Subject matter under subclass 182 wherein an illumination is applied to
    remove charge from a latent image by an array of individually controllable
    light sources.


    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/04, for exposing (i.e., imagewise exposure by optically
    projecting the original image on a photoconductive recording material).

    EPC     G03G    15/052A, for discharging nonimage areas (e.g., erasing,
    producing margins).


CLS 399/187
TXT Edge or interframe erase:

    Subject matter under subclass 182 wherein an illumination is applied to
    remove an electrostatic charge from an area corresponding to a border of an
    original image.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/04, for exposing (i.e., imagewise exposure by optically
    projecting the original image on a photoconductive recording material).

    EPC     G03G    15/052A, for discharging nonimage areas (e.g., erasing,
    producing margins).


CLS 399/188
TXT Copy blank leading edge:

    Subject matter under subclass 187 wherein the charge-removing illumination
    is operated to produce a front portion free of toner on a copy medium.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter may also include changes to the feed
    timing of the copy medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    394,    for changes to the feed timing of the copy medium where no erase
    lights are involved.


CLS 399/189
TXT Cover position:

    Subject matter under subclass 187 wherein the charge-removing illumination
    is operated in response to detection of the position of a cover member.


CLS 399/190
TXT Variable size:

    Subject matter under subclass 187 wherein the charge-removing illumination
    is applied to a region that is changeable in size.

    (1)     Note.  This size variation may include an area that varies due to a
    change in magnification or an area that is determined by detecting an
    original or its image.


CLS 399/191
TXT Using exposure light:

    Subject matter under subclass 187 wherein the charge-removing illumination
    is light emitted from a light source that also exposes an original.


CLS 399/192
TXT Side edge lamps:

    Subject matter under subclass 187 wherein the charge-removing illumination
    is provided by an erase light source that is positioned at the lateral
    sides of the photoconductive member.


CLS 399/193
TXT Binding offset:

    Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein a means or method is provided for
    shifting the position of an image with respect to a copy medium.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter may include erasing a portion of the
    latent image to produce the offset.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/04, for exposing (i.e., imagewise exposure by optically
    projecting the original image on a photoconductive recording material).

    EPC     G03G    15/052A, for discharging nonimage areas (e.g., erasing,
    producing margins).


CLS 399/194
TXT Composite:

    Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein a means or method is provided
    that reproduces exposures of several documents or portions thereof onto one
    copy medium as one image.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter may also include two separate exposures
    of the same original where the entire image is copied twice.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183,    for a composite image produced by masking or trimming.


CLS 399/195
TXT Generating paper feed signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein a copy medium actuation or
    control signal is produced by a moving original or optical component (e.g.,
    scanning carriage).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    361+,   for document handling, per se.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/30, in which projection is formed on a drum.

    EPC     G03G    15/30B, with special means to synchronize the scanning
    optic to the operation of other parts of the machine (e.g., photoreceptor,
    copy paper).


CLS 399/196
TXT Variable magnification:

    Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein a means or method is provided for
    selectively producing a copy in more than one magnification ratio.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for optical detector of toner in a developing unit.

    118,    for optics with particular modular or displaceable structure.

    137,    for optical intermediate storage of original image.

    140,    for producing a microimage not variable in size.

    200+,   for automatic adjustment of an optical component due to a change in
    magnification.

    209,    for a repositioning of a scanning carriage due to a change in
    scanning length.

    216,    for slit exposure by pivoting mirror.

    218,    for specific lens during exposure.

    219,    for fiber optics used during exposure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 316.1 for special
    receptacles for an optical or photographic means.

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass 12
    for copying by holographic means.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, for optical waveguiding element, per se,
    particularly subclass 116 for imaging (i.e., with coherent fiber structure
    and includes shaping, enhancing, and correcting).

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/041, for exposing with variable magnification.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/04 117, for exposing using variable magnification.

    EPC     G03G    15/052B, for exposing using variable magnification.


CLS 399/197
TXT Having calculation:

    Subject matter under subclass 196 wherein a means or method is provided
    that calculates the magnification ratio.

    (1)     Note.  The input parameter may be, for example, enlargement or
    reduction ratios, size of copy medium, etc.


CLS 399/198
TXT Exposure adjustment:

    Subject matter under subclass 196 wherein a means or method is provided for
    varying an amount of light reaching a photoconductive member to compensate
    for the change in magnification.

    (1)     Note.  An amount of light may be varied by intensity or
    cross-sectional area.


CLS 399/199
TXT Additional lens:

    Subject matter under subclass 196 wherein copy magnification is varied
    through an alternative optical component that focuses light by refraction.

    (1)     Note.  An additional lens may also include a lens that is a
    substitute lens.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118,    for optics with particular modular or displaceable structure.

    137,    for optical intermediate storage of original image.

    196+,   for variable magnification during exposure.

    200+,   for automatic adjustment of an optical component due to a change in
    magnification.

    209,    for a repositioning of a scanning carriage due to a change in
    scanning length.

    216,    for slit exposure by pivoting mirror.

    218,    for specific lens during exposure.

    219,    for fiber optics used during exposure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 316.1 for special
    receptacles for an optical or photographic means.

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass 12
    for copying by holographic means.


CLS 399/200
TXT Having scanning modification:

    Subject matter under subclass 196 wherein copy magnification is varied by
    changing the movement of a sweeping exposure.

    (1)     Note.  This modification may also include a change in the speed of
    the moving photoconductive member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for optical detector of toner in a developing unit.

    118,    for optics with particular modular or displaceable structure.

    137,    for optical intermediate storage of original image.

    196+,   for variable magnification during exposure.

    209,    for a repositioning of a scanning carriage due to a change in
    scanning length.

    216,    for slit exposure by pivoting mirror.

    218,    for specific lens during exposure.

    219,    for fiber optics.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 316.1 for special
    receptacles for an optical or photographic means.

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass 12
    for copying by holographic means.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, for optical waveguiding element, per se,
    particularly subclass 116 for imaging (i.e., with coherent fiber structure
    and includes shaping, enhancing, and correcting).


CLS 399/201
TXT Lens positioning:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein copy magnification is varied by
    moving the location of an optical component that focuses light by
    refraction.


CLS 399/202
TXT Mirror or scanning carriage positioning:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein an optical component that
    reflects light is repositioned to compensate for a change in magnification.


CLS 399/203
TXT Selective or convertible:

    Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein a means or method is provided
    that selectively operates among different exposure configurations.

    (1)     Note.  An original may take the form of a film, book, different
    weight paper, etc.  The most common exposure configurations are (a) an
    arrangement for thick or thin originals or (b) an arrangement where a book
    is exposed by a moving scanning carriage or (c) an arrangement where the
    scanning carriage is moved to a separate position and parked or (d) an
    arrangement where an original is moved through the exposure station by
    rollers.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/30, in which projection is formed on a drum.

    EPC     G03G    15/30A, with arrangements for copying different kinds of
    originals (e.g., sheets, books).


CLS 399/204
TXT Two-up copying:

    Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein a means or method is provided for
    separately exposing two originals on a platen.

    (1)     Note.  Two originals being copied may be, for example, the open
    pages of a book.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    368,    for feeding two originals to exposure position.


CLS 399/205
TXT Having reference position (relative positioning):

    Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein a means or method is provided for
    movement of an optical component with relative positioning to a
    corresponding location for an original or photoconductive member.


CLS 399/206
TXT Slit exposure:

    Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein a portion of an original image is
    projected onto a photoconductive member continuously from one end of an
    original to the other until the entire original is exposed.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter may include, for example, either
    producing plural latent images from one exposure by splitting the light
    from the original into two or more portions or producing latent images on
    back and forth scanning.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/04, for exposing (i.e. imagewise exposure by optically
    projecting the original image on a photoconductive recording material).

            G03G    15/28, in which projection is obtained by line scanning.

            G03G    15/30, in which projection is formed on a drum.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/04 113, for slit exposure (e.g., movement of the drum
    and movement of the original image).

            G03G    15/28, in which projection is obtained by line scanning.

            G03G    15/30, in which projection is formed on a drum.

    EPC     G03G    15/28, in which projection is obtained by line scanning.

            G03G    15/30, in which projection is formed on a drum.


CLS 399/207
TXT Diaphragm, shutter, shading board:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 wherein a means or method is provided
    between an original and a photoconductive member for regulating or
    adjusting the cross-sectional area of the light reaching the
    photoconductive member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    355,    Photocopying, subclass 71 for a projection-type copier with a
    shutter in the illumination system.


CLS 399/208
TXT Speed or acceleration control:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 wherein a means or method is provided for
    regulating a velocity of a drive component involved in exposing an original.

    (1)     Note.  A drive component may be an optical component, platen, or
    scanning carriage which may be operated by open-loop or feedback response
    circuitry.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210,    for damping or braking.


CLS 399/209
TXT Variable scanning (e.g., length):

    Subject matter under subclass 206 wherein a means or method is provided for
    changing the distance moved by a platen or a scanning carriage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

     64,    for optical detector of toner in a developing unit.

    118,    for optics with particular modular or displaceable structure.

    137,    for optical intermediate storage of original image.

    196+,   for variable magnification during exposure.

    200+,   for automatic adjustment of an optical component due to a change in
    magnification.

    216,    for slit exposure by pivoting mirror.

    218,    for specific lens during exposure.

    219,    for fiber optics used during exposure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 316.1 for special
    receptacles for an optical or photographic means.

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass 12
    for copying by holographic means.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, for optical waveguiding element, per se,
    particularly subclass 116 for imaging (i.e., with coherent fiber structure
    and includes shaping, enhancing, and correcting).


CLS 399/210
TXT Damping or braking:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 wherein a means or method is provided for
    stopping the motion of a scanning carriage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclass 381 where vibration is restrained or dissipated by
    resistance to sliding between the surfaces of the members.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 116.5+ for automatic
    operation for stopping a machine when a predetermined result is reached.


CLS 399/211
TXT Scanning carriage parallel to original:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 wherein a means or method is provided for
    scanning an original by moving a light source or reflective apparatus in
    parallel to a flat original.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/04, for exposing (i.e., imagewise exposure by optically
    projecting the original image on a photoconductive recording material).

            G03G    15/28, in which projection is obtained by line scanning.

            G03G    15/30, in which projection is formed on a drum.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/04 115, moving the platen for the original.


CLS 399/212
TXT Having half-rate carriage:

    Subject matter under subclass 211 wherein a reflector for directing light
    from an original to a photoconductive member is provided on a member moving
    in coordination with the scanning carriage and at one-half the speed
    thereof.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter provides a constant optical path length
    as the scanning carriage moves along the original.


CLS 399/213
TXT Movable platen:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 wherein a holder for an original moves
    relative to the optical system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206,    for a movable platen and moving optical system.


CLS 399/214
TXT Lock or clamp:

    Subject matter under subclass 213 wherein a means or method is provided for
    restraining the movement of the platen.


CLS 399/215
TXT By conveying original:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 wherein a means or method is provided for
    transporting an original past a stationary optical system.

    (1)     Note.  The moving of the original may be accomplished by rollers,
    belts, rotating drum, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206,    for moving an original and moving an optical system.


CLS 399/216
TXT By pivoting mirror:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 wherein a means or method is provided for
    rotating a reflective apparatus about a stationary pivot point for scanning
    an original.

    (1)     Note.  For a pivoting mirror on a moving scanning carriage, see the
    appropriate subclass under scanning.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for optical detector of toner in a developing unit.

    118,    for optics with particular modular or displaceable structure.

    137,    for optical intermediate storage of original image.

    196+,   for variable magnification during exposure.

    200+,   for automatic adjustment of an optical component due to a change in
    magnification.

    209,    for a repositioning of a scanning carriage due to a change in
    scanning length.

    218,    for specific lens during exposure.

    219,    for fiber optics used during exposure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 316.1 for special
    receptacles for an optical or photographic means.

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass 12
    for copying by holographic means.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, for optical waveguiding element, per se,
    particularly subclass 116 for imaging (i.e., with coherent fiber structure
    and includes shaping, enhancing, and correcting).


CLS 399/217
TXT Full frame exposure (entire original at once):

    Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein a means or method is provided for
    exposing the entire original at one time.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/26, in which the charge pattern is obtained by
    projection of the entire image (i.e., whole-frame projection).

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/04 112, by exposure of entire surface.

            G03G    15/26, in which the charge pattern is obtained by
    projection of the entire image (i.e., whole-frame projection).

    EPC     G03G    15/26, in which the charge pattern is obtained by
    projection of the entire image (i.e., whole-frame projection).


CLS 399/218
TXT Lens:

    Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein a particular optical component
    which focuses light by refraction is used during the exposure process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for optical detector of toner in a developing unit.

    118,    for optics with particular modular or displaceable structure.

    137,    for optical intermediate storage of original image.

    196+,   for variable magnification during exposure.

    200+,   for automatic adjustment of an optical component due to a change in
    magnification.

    209,    for a repositioning of a scanning carriage due to a change in
    scanning length.

    216,    for slit exposure by pivoting mirror.

    219,    for fiber optics used during exposure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 316.1 for special
    receptacles for an optical or photographic means.

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass 12
    for copying by holographic means and subclasses 642+ for lens, per se.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, for optical waveguiding element, per se,
    particularly subclass 116 for imaging (i.e., with coherent fiber structure
    and includes shaping, enhancing, and correcting).


CLS 399/219
TXT Fiber optics:

    Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein a means or method is provided for
    conveying light from an original image through a particular configuration
    of glass or plastic fibers to a photoconductive member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for an optical detector of toner in a developing unit.

    118,    for optics with particular modular or displaceable structure.

    137,    for optical intermediate storage of an original image.

    196+,   for variable magnification during exposure.

    200+,   for automatic adjustment of an optical component due to a change in
    magnification.

    209,    for a repositioning of a scanning carriage due to a change in
    scanning length.

    216,    for slit exposure by pivoting mirror.

    218,    for specific lens during exposure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 316.1 for special
    receptacles for an optical or photographic means.

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass 12
    for copying by holographic means.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, for optical waveguiding element, per se,
    particularly subclass 116 for imaging (i.e., with coherent fiber structure
    and includes shaping, enhancing, and correcting).


CLS 399/220
TXT Light source:

    Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein a means or method is provided for
    emitting light to illuminate an original.

    (1)     Note.  Types of light sources may be halogen, fluorescent, etc.


    (2)     Note.  This subject matter may also include on-and-off timing or
    temperature regulation of the lamp.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95,     for controlling the on-and-off condition of the light source to
    prevent overheating the platen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    355,    Photocopying, subclasses 67+ for photocopying illumination not
    particular to electrophotography.

    362,    Illumination, for illumination, per se.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/04, for exposing (i.e., imagewise exposure by optically
    projecting the original image on a photoconductive recording material).

    EPC     G03G    15/04L, for details of illuminating systems (e.g., lamps,
    reflectors).


CLS 399/221
TXT Modifier (e.g., reflector, filter):

    Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein a means or method is provided
    between a light source and an original for changing the emitted light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207,    for a light-aperture modifier between the original and the
    photoconductive member.


CLS 399/222
TXT Development:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein an apparatus is provided for
    making visible a latent image by the application of developer material.

    (1)     Note.  Developer material may consist of magnetic or nonmagnetic
    toner particles, toner particles mixed with a liquid carrier material, or
    magnetic or nonmagnetic toner particles mixed with magnetic particles that
    act as carriers under the influence of a magnetic field.  Toner may also be
    called marking particles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    347,    Incremental Printing and Symbolic Information, subclass 158 for
    delivering to the recording medium visible particles to develop a latent
    image.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 457+ for related processes used to
    achieve the same result as the apparatus herewithin. Processes primarily
    classifiable in Class 427, subclasses 457+, focus on developing and fixing
    and other coating steps, but may also claim latent image-forming steps. For
    purposes of classification, claims which recite significant amounts of
    apparatus of the type used in electrophotography are not properly
    classifiable in Class 427, but may be classified herewithin depending on
    whether or not an image formation apparatus is claimed.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, for developing methods.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/06, for developing.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/06, for developing.

    EPC     G03G    15/06, for developing.


CLS 399/223
TXT Plural diverse (e.g., color):

    Subject matter under subclass 222 wherein more than one color of developer
    material is provided for developing one or more latent images.

    (1)     Note.  The apparatus can also be selectively operated to produce a
    copy with only one color of toner present in the reproduction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for analyzing a malfunction or potential malfunction of color
    reproduction.

    39+,    for balance control of color.

    54,     for color selection control.

    112,    for modular or displaceable color process cartridge unit.

    178+,   for formation of color separation images.

    184,    for color image editing of a selectable area.

    298+,   for transfer of a color image.

    321,    for fixing or fusing of a color image.

    344,    for cleaning a color-image-bearing surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, for coating,per se.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 42+ for related subject matter (i.e., colored image
    products).

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/01, for producing multicolored copies.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/01 111, by superposing the toners of three primary
    colors.

            G03G    15/01 113, using the characteristics related to the
    development process.

            G03G    15/01 115, for correcting colors.

            G03G    15/01 116, using a one-shot color method (e.g., a mosaic
    method in which the toner is composed of toners of three primary colors).

            G03G    15/01 117, for producing two-colored copies.

            G03G    15/08 503, using a solid developer concerning colors.

    EPC     G03G    15/01, for producing multicolored copies.


CLS 399/224
TXT Adding toner:

    Subject matter under subclass 223 wherein developer materials of different
    colors are added separately to an applicator or applicators.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for diagnostic of consumables (e.g., toner).

    35,     for diagnostics of cleaning a waste toner container.

    49,     for detection of toner involving plural control processes.

    61+,    for detection of toner in a developing unit.

    99+,    for toner removal.

    106,    for a toner cartridge.

    120,    for a new and waste toner container.

    129,    for supplemental exposure or charging of residual toner.

    134,    for image formation with photoconductive toner.

    239+,   for application of liquid development.

    253,    for conditioning dry toner.

    254+,   for mixing dry toner.

    258+,   for supplying new toner.

    265+    for application of dry development.

    359,    for supplying reclaimed toner to the developing device.

    409,    for binding copies by toner.


CLS 399/225
TXT Single applicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 223 wherein an individual applicator
    selectively or sequentially applies developer material of different colors.


CLS 399/226
TXT Plural applicators single position:

    Subject matter under subclass 223 wherein a plurality of applicators are
    exchangeable in relation to a single developing position.


CLS 399/227
TXT Rotary type:

    Subject matter under subclass 226 wherein the plurality of applicators
    revolve about a common axis.


CLS 399/228
TXT Selectively active:

    Subject matter under subclass 223 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    activating an applicator from a plurality of applicators that are all in
    developing positions for applying colored developer material.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter is usually provided to prevent the
    nonselected device from applying toner to the photoconductive member.  This
    subject matter may also include movement away from the photoconductor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    234,    for similar subject matter involving one applicator.


CLS 399/229
TXT By magnetic means:

    Subject matter under subclass 228 wherein the selective activation means
    includes a magnetic member.


CLS 399/230
TXT By diverting toner:

    Subject matter under subclass 228 wherein the selective activation means
    includes changing or stopping the flow of developing material.


CLS 399/231
TXT Toner images overlapped:

    Subject matter under subclass 223 wherein a second or subsequent toner
    image is developed on the previously developed image(s).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, for coating, per se.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 42+ for related subject matter (i.e., colored image
    products).

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/01, for producing multicolored copies.

    EPC     G03G    15/01S1B, onto which the monocolor images are superposed
    before common transfer.

            G03G    15/01S1B1, with special treatment between monocolor image
    formation.


CLS 399/232
TXT Opposite polarity:

    Subject matter under subclass 231 wherein the overlapped toner image is of
    a different polarity then the previous latent image or toner charge
    polarity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 42+ for related subject matter (i.e., colored image
    products).


CLS 399/233
TXT Liquid:

    Subject matter under subclass 223 wherein a latent image is developed with
    different color liquid developer material.

    (1)     Note.  Liquid developer material (i.e., liquid toner) is usually
    toner particles mixed with a liquid carrier material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 42+ for related subject matter (i.e., colored image
    products).


CLS 399/234
TXT Development prevention:

    Subject matter under subclass 222 wherein means or method is provided for
    restraining the flow of toner to prevent unwanted development (e.g.,
    nonimage areas).

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter includes the prevention of applying
    toner on a photoconductive member and does not include using erase lights
    for limiting development of a latent image. For prevention of development
    by use of erase lights, see SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98,     for preventing deposition of airborne contaminant toner.

    169,    for preventing development by controlling the area to be charged.

    186,    for preventing development of part of the a latent image by using
    erase lights.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/08, for using solid developer, powder developer.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/08 507H, for driving and stopping.


CLS 399/235
TXT Bias voltage:

    Subject matter under subclass 234 wherein an electrical potential prevents
    unwanted toner from being applied.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 457+ for related processes used to
    achieve the same result as the apparatus herewithin. Processes primarily
    classifiable in Class 427, subclasses 457+, focus on developing and fixing
    and other coating steps, but may also claim latent image-forming steps. For
    purposes of classification, claims which recite significant  numbers of
    apparatus of the type used in electrophotography are not properly
    classifiable in Class 427, but may be classified herewithin depending on
    whether or not an image-formation apparatus is claimed.


CLS 399/236
TXT Applicator speed:

    Subject matter under subclass 222 wherein a driving arrangement is provided
    that sets or regulates a velocity at which developer is applied to
    developing means.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/08, for using solid developer, powder developer.

            G03G    15/09, for using a magnetic brush.

            G03G    15/10, for using a liquid developer.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/08 507H, for driving and stopping.


CLS 399/237
TXT Liquid development:

    Subject matter under subclass 222 wherein a liquid developer is applied to
    render the latent image visible.

    (1)     Note.  Liquid developer material (i.e., liquid toner) is usually
    toner particles mixed with a liquid carrier material.

    (2)     Note.  The liquid carrier may be an insulator hydrocarbon liquid
    (e.g., kerosine).

    (3)     Note.  This subject matter does not include dry toner of granular
    or particle type even though it may possess fluid properties. For dry
    toner, see SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233,    for liquid color development.

    252+,   for dry toner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, for coating, per se.

    137,    Fluid Handling, for fluid handling, per se.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    for fluid handling.

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 302+ for
    separating liquids by direct application of electrolysis or electric force
    to the liquid.


    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 222+ for magnetic
    liquid separation, per se.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/10, for using a liquid developer.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/10 116, using a liquid developer for wetting the
    recording material.

    EPC     G03G    15/10, for using a liquid developer.


CLS 399/238
TXT Having dispensing:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 wherein liquid toner is supplied or
    transported to an apparatus for applying toner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239+,   for applying liquid developer by application member.

    246+,   for spraying liquid developer.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/10, for using a liquid developer.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/10 114, using a liquid developer for supplying a new
    developer.

    EPC     G03G    15/10, for using a liquid developer.


CLS 399/239
TXT Application member (e.g., roller, belt):

    Subject matter under subclass 237 wherein an apparatus is provided for
    applying the liquid developer material to a latent image.

    (1)     Note.  Liquid developer material (i.e., liquid toner) is usually
    toner particles mixed with a liquid carrier material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for diagnostic of consumables (e.g., toner).

    35,     for diagnostics of cleaning a waste toner container.

    49,     for detection of toner involving plural control processes.

    61+,    for detection of toner in a developing unit.

    99+,    for toner removal.

    106,    for a toner cartridge.

    120,    for a new and waste toner container.

    129,    for supplemental exposure or charging of residual toner.

    134,    for image formation with photoconductive toner.

    224,    for adding colored toner.

    253,    for conditioning dry toner.

    254+,   for mixing dry toner.

    258+,   for supplying new toner.

    265+    for application of dry development.

    359,    for supplying reclaimed toner to the developing device.

    409,    for binding copies by toner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, for coating, per se.

    137,    Fluid Handling, for fluid handling, per se.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    for fluid handling.

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 302+ for
    separating liquids by direct application of electrolysis or electric force
    to the liquid.


    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 222+ for magnetic
    liquid separation, per se.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/10, for using a liquid developer.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/10 112, using a developer roller.


CLS 399/240
TXT Having applied bias:

    Subject matter under subclass 239 wherein the application member is
    maintained at a predetermined electrical potential to aid in or influence
    the development.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for controlling a bias which influences development.

    241,    for liquid development with an electrode influencing the attraction
    of liquid developer.

    270+,   for a magnetic brush-type application member with applied bias.

    285,    for a roller-type application member with applied bias.

    291,    for a powder cloud applicator with electrode(s) influencing the
    attraction of dry developer.

    293,    for a fluidized bed applicator with electrode(s) influencing the
    attraction of dry developer.

    295,    for a cascade applicator with electrode(s) influencing the
    attraction of dry developer.

    314,    for an electrostatic transfer with applied bias.

    354,    for cleaning an imaging surface using a fibrous brush with applied
    voltage.


CLS 399/241
TXT Having electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 wherein a bias voltage is provided to
    influence the attraction of liquid developer material to a latent
    image-bearing member.

    (1)     Note.  For example, this apparatus may include wires or a screen
    having an applied voltage.

    (2)     Note.  Liquid developer material (i.e., liquid toner) is usually
    toner particles mixed with a liquid carrier material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for controlling a bias which influences development.

    240,    for a liquid application member with applied bias.

    270+,   for a magnetic brush-type application member with applied bias.

    285,    fora roller-type application member with applied bias.

    291,    for a powder cloud applicator with electrode(s) influencing the
    attraction of dry developer.

    293,    for a fluidized bed applicator with electrode(s) influencing the
    attraction of dry developer.

    295,    for a cascade applicator with electrode(s) influencing the
    attraction of dry developer.

    314,    for an electrostatic transfer with applied bias.

    354,    for cleaning an imaging surface using a fibrous brush with applied
    voltage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 302+ for
    separating liquids by direct application of electrolysis or electric force
    to the liquid.


    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 222+ for magnetic
    liquid separation, per se.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/10, for using a liquid developer.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/06 102, for developing using electrode bias for a liquid
    developer.

    EPC     G03G    15/06, for developing.


CLS 399/242
TXT Sequential:

    Subject matter under subclass 241 wherein the electrode is in the form of a
    plurality of sections or elements which each affects the development in
    turn.


CLS 399/243
TXT Flexible:

    Subject matter under subclass 241 wherein the electrode is pliant.


CLS 399/244
TXT Screen:

    Subject matter under subclass 241 wherein the electrode is a wire mesh or a
    plate with holes therethrough.


CLS 399/245
TXT Self-cleaning:

    Subject matter under subclass 241 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    maintaining the electrode free from excessive deposits of liquid developer
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34+,    for cleaning diagnostics.

    71,     for control of cleaning during the electrophotography process.

    123,    for a particular structure of a cleaning unit.

    149,    for combined development and cleaning by a single component.

    327,    for cleaning a fixing member.

    343+,   for cleaning an imaging surface (i.e., photoconductive member),
    including for a cleaning member cyclically movable into and out of contact
    with the imaging surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 1.51+ for
    electrostatic cleaning and subclasses 300.1+ for air blast or suction which
    may be used to clean electrophotographic, photoresponsive imaging surfaces.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 1+ for cleaning
    applications of electric, wave, ray, or radiant energy.


CLS 399/246
TXT Sprayed:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 wherein the liquid developer material is
    forced under pressure onto a latent image-bearing member.

    (1)     Note.  The liquid developer material is usually unsupported at the
    moment of contact with the image surface.

    (2)     Note.  Liquid developer material (i.e., liquid toner) is usually
    toner particles mixed with a liquid carrier material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, for coating, per se.

    137,    Fluid Handling, for fluid handling, per se.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    for fluid handling.

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 302+ for
    separating liquids by direct application of electrolysis or electric force
    to the liquid.


    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 222+ for magnetic
    liquid separation, per se.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/10, for using a liquid developer.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/10 117, using a liquid developer for applying mist by
    using a liquid.


CLS 399/247
TXT Fountain:

    Subject matter under subclass 246 wherein the liquid developer material is
    pumped against the force of gravity to a point where it contacts a latent
    image-bearing member and subsequently flows into a drainage outlet.


CLS 399/248
TXT Immersion:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 wherein a latent image-bearing member is
    passed through a pool of the liquid developer material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, for coating, per se.

    137,    Fluid Handling, for fluid handling, per se.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    for fluid handling.

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 302+ for
    separating liquids by direct application of electrolysis or electric force
    to the liquid.


    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 222 for magnetic liquid
    separation, per se.



    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/10, for using a liquid developer.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/10 111, using a developer tray.

    EPC     G03G    15/10I, for using a liquid developer with which the
    recording material is brought in contact (e.g., immersion or surface
    immersion development).


CLS 399/249
TXT Removing excess developer (e.g., squeegee):

    Subject matter under subclass 237 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    removing excess liquid developer material from a developed image before
    transfer.

    (1)     Note.  Liquid developer material (i.e., liquid toner) is usually
    toner particles mixed with a liquid carrier material.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/10, for using a liquid developer.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/10 113, for removing excess toner from developed images.


    EPC     G03G    15/10E, for removing excess developer.


CLS 399/250
TXT Liquid carrier condensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 wherein liquid developer material is
    condensed to recover the liquid carrier material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 302+ for
    separating liquids by direct application of electrolysis or electric force
    to the liquid.


    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 222+ for magnetic
    liquid separation, per se.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, for an intimate contact between
    gases and liquids to exchange properties or mutually modify conditions.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/10, for using a liquid developer.

    EPC     G03G    15/10F, for condensing developer fumes.


CLS 399/251
TXT Drying (e.g., warming, heating):

    Subject matter under subclass 237 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    removing liquid carrier moisture content from a copy medium.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/11, for removing excess liquid developer (e.g., by heat).

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/11, for removing excess liquid developer (e.g., by heat).

            G03G    15/12, heating device.

    EPC     G03G    15/12, for warming (i.e., drying or recording material
    developed with a liquid developer).


CLS 399/252
TXT Dry development:

    Subject matter under subclass 222 wherein a dry developer material is
    applied to render the latent image visible.

    (1)     Note.  Dry developer material may be toner particles (magnetic or
    nonmagnetic) mixed with magnetic particles that act as carriers under the
    influence of a magnetic field.

    (2)     Note.  For example, this subject matter may include immersion of
    the latent image in dry toner.  For immersion with liquid toner, see SEARCH
    THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248,    for liquid toner immersion of an image-bearing member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, for coating, per se.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    for fluent material handling

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/08, for using solid developer, powder developer.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/08 502, for a developing method.

            G03G    15/08 507, for special methods and devices.

    EPC     G03G    15/08, for using solid developer, powder developer.

            G03G    15/08G, for immersion.


CLS 399/253
TXT Conditioning of toner:

    Subject matter under subclass 252 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    treating impurities or unwanted effects and properties of dry developer
    material.

    (1)     Note.  For example, this subject matter may include filtered toner
    being recycled from a cleaning unit.

    (2)     Note.  For example, this subject matter may include an arrangement
    for preventing wrongly charged toner from being applied to a latent image.

    (3)     Note.  The toner may be treated when fed into or when in the
    developing unit (e.g., treated to remove impurities or heated to remove
    moisture or coating).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for diagnostic of consumables (e.g., toner).

    35,     for diagnostics of cleaning a waste toner container.

    49,     for detection of toner involving plural control processes.

    61+,    for detection of toner in a developing unit.

    99+,    for toner removal.

    106,    for a toner cartridge.

    120,    for a new and waste toner container.

    129,    for supplemental exposure or charging of residual toner.

    134,    for image formation with photoconductive toner.

    224,    for adding colored toner.

    239+,   for application of liquid development.

    254+,   for mixing dry toner.

    258+,   for supplying new toner.

    265+    for application of dry development.

    359,    for supplying reclaimed toner to the developing device.

    409,    for binding copies by toner.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/08, for using solid developer, powder developer.

    EPC     G03G    15/08H5, arrangement for conditioning developer in the
    developing sump (e.g., removing impurities or humidity).


CLS 399/254
TXT Mixing:

    Subject matter under subclass 252 wherein the dry developer material is
    stirred or agitated in a developing unit.

    (1)     Note.  For example, this subject matter may include blending toner
    with carrier particles, and it may also include stirring toner before the
    start of image formation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for diagnostic of consumables (e.g., toner).

    35,     for diagnostics of cleaning a waste toner container.

    49,     for detection of toner involving plural control processes.

    61+,    for detection of toner in a developing unit.

    99+,    for toner removal.

    106,    for a toner cartridge.

    120,    for a new and waste toner container.

    129,    for supplemental exposure or charging of residual toner.

    134,    for image formation with photoconductive toner.

    224,    for adding colored toner.

    239+,   for application of liquid development.

    253,    for conditioning dry toner.

    258+,   for supplying new toner.

    262,    for stirring developing material (toner) in a supply hopper or
    cartridge.

    265+    for application of dry development.

    359,    for supplying reclaimed toner to the developing device.

    409,    for binding copies by toner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    366,    Agitating, for mixing or agitating materials together.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/08, for using solid developer, powder developer.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/08 110, for agitating.

            G03G    15/08 507D, for circulating and transporting.

    EPC     G03G    15/08H, arrangement for preparing, mixing, transporting, or
    dispensing developer.

            G03G    15/08H3D, arrangement for metering and dispensing toner
    into the development sump; Toner hoppers; Augers.


CLS 399/255
TXT Having new toner:

    Subject matter under subclass 254 wherein additional new developer material
    is mixed with developer material in the developing unit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    366,    Agitating, for mixing or agitating materials together.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/08, for using solid developer, powder developer.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/08 507E, for supplying and agitating.


CLS 399/256
TXT Auger:

    Subject matter under subclass 254 wherein the mixing is provided by a
    rotating spiral member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    366,    Agitating, for mixing or agitating materials together.


CLS 399/257
TXT Purging:

    Subject matter under subclass 252 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    removing dry developer material from the developing device.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/08, for using solid developer, powder developer.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/08 507C, for collecting.

    EPC     G03G    15/08H4, arrangement for purging used developer from the
    developing unit.


CLS 399/258
TXT Supplying new toner:

    Subject matter under subclass 252 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    supplying unused dry developer from a supply hopper to a sump.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter may include supplying carrier particles
    and feeding back toner to a supply hopper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for diagnostic of consumables (e.g., toner).

    35,     for diagnostics of cleaning a waste toner container.

    49,     for detection of toner involving plural control processes.

    61+,    for detection of toner in a developing unit.

    99+,    for toner removal.

    106,    for a toner cartridge.

    120,    for a new and waste toner container.

    129,    for supplemental exposure or charging of residual toner.

    134,    for image formation with photoconductive toner.

    224,    for adding colored toner.

    239+,   for application of liquid development.

    253,    for conditioning dry toner.

    254+,   for mixing dry toner.

    265+    for application of dry development.

    359,    for supplying reclaimed toner to the developing device.

    409,    for binding copies by toner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, for package making, per se.

    222,    Dispensing, for dispensing material from a container.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/08, for using solid developer, powder developer.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/08 507C, for collecting.

    EPC     G03G    15/08H, arrangement for preparing, mixing, transporting, or
    dispensing developer.

            G03G    15/08H3, arrangement for supplying new toner; Toner
    cartridges.

            G03G    15/08H3D, arrangement for metering and dispensing toner
    into the development sump; Toner hoppers; Augers.


CLS 399/259
TXT Diverse (e.g., carrier and toner):

    Subject matter under subclass 258 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    supplying plural types (not color) or components of developer material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224,    for supplying plural colors of toner.


CLS 399/260
TXT Metering (regulating, gate, discharge ports):

    Subject matter under subclass 258 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    controlling the amount of dispensed toner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for controlling the dispensed amount in response to a sensed
    condition.


CLS 399/261
TXT Vibration:

    Subject matter under subclass 258 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    dispensing toner by shaking its container.


CLS 399/262
TXT Cartridge:

    Subject matter under subclass 258 wherein an arrangement is provided for a
    removable container that holds and dispenses dry developer material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    for a modular or displaceable developing unit having a particular
    structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, for package making, per se.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 449+ for a plate or sheet.

    220,    Receptacles, for receptacles, per se.

    222,    Dispensing, for dispensing material from a container.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclass 132 for
    rupturable seals.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/08, for using solid developer, powder developer.

    EPC     G03G    15/08H3D, arrangement for metering and dispensing toner
    into the development sump; Toner hoppers; Augers.

            G03G    15/08H3R, for using a sealing film to be ruptured or cut.


CLS 399/263
TXT Having internal rotary member:

    Subject matter under subclass 262 wherein the removable cartridge provides
    an arrangement for stirring or mixing the dry developer material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254,    for mixing dry developer.


CLS 399/264
TXT Removing excess developer:

    Subject matter under subclass 252 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    removing surplus dry developer material or carrier particles from a
    developed image.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249,    for similar subject matter used with a liquid developed image.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/095, for removing excess solid developer.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/08 507R, for removing excess solid toner from developer
    images.

    EPC     G03G    15/08R, arrangement for removing carriers or excess toner
    from a developed image (e.g., fog preventing).


CLS 399/265
TXT Application member:

    Subject matter under subclass 252 wherein an apparatus is provided for
    transporting dry developer material to a position where it is attracted to
    a latent image by an electrostatic force.

    (1)     Note.  Dry developer material may be toner particles mixed with
    magnetic particles that act as carriers under the influence of a magnetic
    field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for diagnostic of consumables (e.g., toner).

    35,     for diagnostics of cleaning a waste toner container.

    49,     for detection of toner involving plural control processes.

    61+,    for detection of toner in a developing unit.

    99+,    for toner removal.

    106,    for a toner cartridge.

    120,    for a new and waste toner container.

    129,    for supplemental exposure or charging of residual toner.

    134,    for image formation with photoconductive toner.

    224,    for adding colored toner.

    239+,   for application of liquid development.

    253,    for conditioning dry toner.

    254+,   for mixing dry toner.

    258+,   for supplying new toner.

    359,    for supplying reclaimed toner to the developing device.

    409,    for binding copies by toner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, for coating, per se.


CLS 399/266
TXT Having cloud-forming application:

    Subject matter under subclass 265 wherein an alternating current electrode
    or magnetic field generating member creates a nebulous mass of toner
    between the application member and the latent image.

    (1)     Note. The electrode may be, for example, a wire (or wires) or
    screen.


CLS 399/267
TXT Magnetic brush:

    Subject matter under subclass 265 wherein the application member aligns the
    dry developer material by its magnetic field in the form of a brushlike
    configuration.

    (1)     Note.  For example, this subject matter may include an arrangement
    for electrically discharging the surface of a magnetic brushlike structure.

    (2)     Note.  For example, this subject matter may include vibrating the
    magnetic brush.

    (3)     Note.  For example, this subject matter may include details for
    housing or casing, per se.

    (4)     Note.  For example, this subject matter may include magnetic
    structures on opposing sides of a latent image-bearing member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272,    for a magnetic brush used to load a magnetic brush application
    member.

    281,    for a magnetic bush used to load a developing roller application
    member.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/09, for using a magnetic brush.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/09, for using a magnetic brush.

    EPC     G03G    15/09, for using a magnetic brush.

            G03G    15/09D, with one-component toner.


CLS 399/268
TXT Having sheet guide:

    Subject matter under subclass 267 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    positioning a latent image-bearing copy medium in relation to a magnetic
    brush developing device.


CLS 399/269
TXT Plural:

    Subject matter under subclass 267 wherein two or more magnetic brushes
    apply dry developer material to a latent image.


CLS 399/270
TXT Having applied bias:

    Subject matter under subclass 267 wherein the magnetic brush is maintained
    at a predetermined electrical potential to aid in or influence the
    development.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for controlling a bias which influences development.

    240,    for a liquid application member with applied bias.

    241,    for liquid development with electrode influencing the attraction of
    liquid developer.

    285,    for a roller-type application member with applied bias.

    291,    for a powder cloud applicator with electrode(s) influencing the
    attraction of dry developer.

    293,    for a fluidized bed applicator with electrode(s) influencing the
    attraction of dry developer.

    295,    for a cascade applicator with electrode(s) influencing the
    attraction of dry developer.

    314,    for an electrostatic transfer with applied bias.

    354,    for cleaning an imaging surface using a fibrous brush with applied
    voltage.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/09, for using a magnetic brush.

    EPC     G03G    15/09B, for using a magnetic brush with bias voltage.


CLS 399/271
TXT Auxiliary electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 270 wherein a developing bias is applied to a
    member separate from and in addition to the magnetic brush.


CLS 399/272
TXT Loading:

    Subject matter under subclass 267 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    applying dry developer material onto the magnetic brush.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281+,   for loading a roller.


CLS 399/273
TXT Unloading (e.g., scraper):

    Subject matter under subclass 267 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    removing dry developer material from the magnetic brush after development.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    283,    for unloading a roller.


CLS 399/274
TXT Regulating (e.g., doctor):

    Subject matter under subclass 267 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    leveling or removing excess dry developer material on the magnetic brush
    before applying it to a latent image-bearing member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284,    for regulating a roller.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 261 for a doctor or film distributing
    engaging applicator.


CLS 399/275
TXT Having stationary magnet:

    Subject matter under subclass 274 wherein the regulating member is a
    magnetic brush having a fixed (i.e., nonrotating) magnet structure.

    (1)     Note.  For example, this subject matter may include a stated
    spatial relationship between the application member and one or more
    magnetic poles.


CLS 399/276
TXT Sleeve:

    Subject matter under subclass 267 wherein the magnetic brush is surrounded
    by a nonmagnetic shell.

    (1)     Note.  For example, this subject matter may include the
    composition, structure (e.g., layer), or surface properties (e.g.,
    roughness) of the sleeve.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/09, for using a magnetic brush.

    EPC     G03G    15/09E1, for relating to the shell structure (e.g.,
    structure composition of a magnetic brush).


CLS 399/277
TXT Magnet:

    Subject matter under subclass 267 wherein the magnet structure has a
    particular construction, orientation, or strength.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, for magnets and electromagnets, per se.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/09, for using a magnetic brush.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/09A, for structuring and manufacturing the magnetic
    roller.

    EPC     G03G    15/09E, for details concerning the magnetic brush roller
    structure (e.g., magnet configuration).


CLS 399/278
TXT Web or belt:

    Subject matter under subclass 277 wherein the magnetic brush applicator is
    in the form of a web or belt.


CLS 399/279
TXT Roller:

    Subject matter under subclass 265 wherein the application member is a
    rotatable cylinder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 895+ for roller making.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for structure of rollers, per se.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/08, for using solid developer, powder developer.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/08 501, for developer carriers (using a magnetic brush
    15/09).

    EPC     G03G    15/08F, on a donor element (e.g., web, roller).


CLS 399/280
TXT Having eccentric film:

    Subject matter under subclass 279 wherein the roller is surrounded with a
    thin, flexible member of larger circumference than the roller used for
    applying the dry developer material to a latent image-bearing member.


CLS 399/281
TXT Loading:

    Subject matter under subclass 279 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    applying dry developer material onto the roller.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272,    for loading a magnetic brush.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/08, for using solid developer, powder developer.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/08 501A, for a supply roller.


CLS 399/282
TXT By magnetic brush:

    Subject matter under subclass 281 wherein the loading is by a member that
    conveys or aligns developer material in its magnetic field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    267,    for a magnetic brush that applies developer to a latent image.


CLS 399/283
TXT Unloading (e.g., scraper):

    Subject matter under subclass 279 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    removing dry developer material from the roller after development.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273,    for unloading a magnetic brush.


CLS 399/284
TXT Regulating (e.g., doctor):

    Subject matter under subclass 279 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    leveling or removing excess dry developer material on the roller before
    applying it to a latent image-bearing member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    274+,   for regulating a magnetic brush.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 261 for a doctor or film distributing
    engaging applicator.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/08, for using solid developer, powder developer.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/08 504, for controlling toner layer thickness (using a
    magnetic brush 15/09).


CLS 399/285
TXT Having applied bias:

    Subject matter under subclass 279 wherein the roller is maintained at a
    predetermined electrical potential to aid in or influence the development.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for controlling a bias which influences development.

    240,    for a liquid application member with applied bias.

    241,    for liquid development with electrode influencing the attraction of
    liquid developer.

    270+,   for a magnetic brush-type application member with applied bias.

    291,    for a powder cloud applicator with electrode(s) influencing the
    attraction of dry developer.

    293,    for a fluidized bed applicator with electrode(s) influencing the
    attraction of dry developer.

    295,    for a cascade applicator with electrode(s) influencing the
    attraction of dry developer.

    314,    for an electrostatic transfer with applied bias.

    354,    for cleaning an imaging surface using a fibrous brush with applied
    voltage.


CLS 399/286
TXT Details:

    Subject matter under subclass 279 wherein the roller consists of a specific
    composition or of specific surface properties.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 895+ for roller making.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for structure of rollers, per se.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/08, for using solid developer, powder developer.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/08 501C, for a roller with surface roughness.

            G03G    15/08 501D, for a roller, per se.


CLS 399/287
TXT Fiber brush:

    Subject matter under subclass 265 wherein the application member is a
    fibrous brush.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/08, for using solid developer, powder developer.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/08 501, for developer carriers (using a magnetic brush
    15/09).

    EPC     G03G    15/08E, on a brush.


CLS 399/288
TXT Web or belt:

    Subject matter under subclass 265 wherein the application member is a
    broad, continuous flat surface.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/08, for using solid developer, powder developer.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/08 501F, for a developing belt (using a magnetic brush
    15/09).

    EPC     G03G    15/08F, on a donor element (e.g., web, roller).


CLS 399/289
TXT Having field curtain:

    Subject matter under subclass 252 wherein toner (developing material) is
    transported by an alternating electric field.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 233 for toner
    conveyors with use of forces of electric charge or field.


CLS 399/290
TXT Powder cloud:

    Subject matter under subclass 252 wherein the development is by a nebulous
    mass of toner particles finely dispersed in a body of gas.

    (1)     Note.  For example, this subject matter includes air suspension of
    toner.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/08, for using solid developer, powder developer.

    EPC     G03G    15/08D, in a powder cloud.


CLS 399/291
TXT Having electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 290 wherein the powder cloud arrangement uses
    a conductor with an applied bias to aid in or influence development.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for controlling a bias which influences development.

    240,    for a liquid application member with applied bias.

    241,    for liquid development with electrode influencing the attraction of
    liquid developer.

    266,    for cloud-forming electrode application of toner.

    270+,   for a magnetic brush-type application member with applied bias.

    285,    for a roller-type application member with applied bias.

    293,    for a fluidized bed applicator with electrode(s) influencing the
    attraction of dry developer.

    295,    for a cascade applicator with electrode(s) influencing the
    attraction of dry developer.

    314,    for an electrostatic transfer with applied bias.

    354,    for cleaning an imaging surface using a fibrous brush with applied
    voltage.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/08, for using solid developer, powder developer.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/06 101, for using electrode bias for a solid developer.


CLS 399/292
TXT Fluidized bed:

    Subject matter under subclass 252 wherein the development is by an agitated
    pool of dry developer material.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter also includes a fluidized bed that is
    agitated by stirring or by a vibration arrangement.  For agitation of toner
    caused only by the movement of a photoconductor member, see SEARCH THIS
    CLASS, SUBCLASS in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252,    for agitation of toner caused by movement of the photoconductor
    member.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/08, for using solid developer, powder developer.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/08 111, for cascading (including a fluid bed).

    EPC     G03G    15/08C, for cascading.


CLS 399/293
TXT Having electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 292 wherein the fluidized bed arrangement
    uses a conductor with an applied bias to aid in or influence development.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for controlling a bias which influences development.

    240,    for a liquid application member with applied bias.

    241,    for liquid development with electrode influencing the attraction of
    liquid developer.

    266,    for a cloud-forming electrode application of toner.

    270+,   for a magnetic brush-type application member with applied bias.

    285,    for a roller-type application member with applied bias.

    291,    for a powder cloud applicator with electrode(s) influencing the
    attraction of dry developer.

    295,    for a  cascade applicator with electrode(s) influencing the
    attraction of dry developer.

    314,    for an electrostatic transfer with applied bias.

    354,    for cleaning an imaging surface using a fibrous brush with applied
    voltage.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/08, for using solid developer, powder developer.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/06 101, for using electrode bias for a solid developer.


CLS 399/294
TXT Cascade:

    Subject matter under subclass 252 wherein the development is by dry
    developer material either poured or allowed to fall under the influence of
    gravity onto the latent image.

    (1)     Note.  For example, this subject matter includes bucket conveyors.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/08, for using solid developer, powder developer.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/08 111, for cascading (including a fluid bed).

    EPC     G03G    15/08C, for cascading.


CLS 399/295
TXT Having electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 294 wherein the cascade arrangement uses a
    conductor with an applied bias to aid in or influence development.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for controlling a bias which influences development.

    240,    for liquid application member with applied bias.

    241,    for liquid development with electrode influencing the attraction of
    liquid developer.

    266,    for cloud-forming electrode application of toner.

    270+,   for a magnetic brush-type application member with applied bias.

    285,    for a roller-type application member with applied bias.

    291,    for a powder cloud applicator with electrode(s) influencing the
    attraction of dry developer.

    293,    for a fluidized bed applicator with electrode(s) influencing the
    attraction of dry developer.

    314,    for an electrostatic transfer with applied bias.

    354,    for cleaning an imaging surface using a fibrous brush with applied
    voltage.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/08, for using solid developer, powder developer.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/06 101, for using electrode bias for a solid developer.


CLS 399/296
TXT Treatment of developed image prior to transfer:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein an apparatus is provided that
    charges, exposes, applies pressure to the toner, or otherwise aids in the
    transfer of a developed toner image.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    for particle or contaminant control in removal of toner from a
    charging member (e.g., corona wire).

    128+,   for supplemental process (e.g., fatigue treatment) involving
    charging.

    153,    for simultaneous charging and exposure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof,  appropriate subclasses for radiation imagery chemistry, process,
    composition, or product.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/16, of a toner pattern (e.g., a powder pattern).

    EPC     G03G    15/16P, with means for preconditioning the toner image
    before the transfer.


CLS 399/297
TXT Transfer:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein an apparatus is provided for
    transferring a developed image from an image-bearing member to another
    medium or surface.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass may also include cleaning the transfer drum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66,     for condition responsive control of transfer.

    101,    for particle or contaminant control of toner on a transfer member.

    121,    for a transfer unit with particular modular or displaceable
    structure.

    154,    for image formation with transfer of latent image.

    388+,   for feeding a copy to the transfer position.

    397+,   for delivering a copy from the transfer position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclass 489 for an electric or magnetic transfer process
    using a difference in electrostatic or magnetic attraction.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof,  appropriate subclasses for radiation imagery chemistry, process,
    composition, or product.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/16, of a toner pattern (e.g., a powder pattern).

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/16, of a toner pattern (e.g., a powder pattern).

    EPC     G03G    15/16B, of a toner pattern (e.g., a powder pattern on a
    base other than paper).


CLS 399/298
TXT Color:

    Subject matter under subclass 297 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    either sequentially or simultaneously transferring a developed image having
    two or more different colors from one surface to another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for analyzing a malfunction or potential malfunction of color
    reproduction.

    39+,    for balance control of color.

    54,     for color selection control.

    112,    for a modular or displaceable color process cartridge unit.

    178+,   for formation of color separation images.

    184,    for color image editing of a selectable area.

    223+,   for development (e.g., applicators) of a color image.

    326,    for fixing or fusing a color image.

    344,    for cleaning a color-image-bearing surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 42+ for related subject matter (i.e., colored image
    products).

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/01, for producing multicolored copies.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/01 114, using the characteristics related to the image
    transfer process.

    EPC     G03G    15/01D14, for transferring a pattern to a second base.


CLS 399/299
TXT From plural photoconductive members (e.g.,drums):

    Subject matter under subclass 298 wherein the transfer is from more than
    one discrete image-bearing member (e.g., plural photoconductive drums).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 42+ for related subject matter (i.e., colored image
    products).

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/01, for producing multicolored copies.

    EPC     G03G    15/01S2, using more than one reusable intermediate
    recording medium (e.g., one for every monocolour image).


CLS 399/300
TXT From multiple positions:

    Subject matter under subclass 298 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    receiving toner images from two or more different positions of an
    image-bearing member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 42+ for related subject matter (i.e., colored image
    products).


CLS 399/301
TXT Registration:

    Subject matter under subclass 298 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    producing correct alignment of the overlapped or superposed multiple toner
    images.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 42+ for related subject matter (i.e., colored image
    products).


CLS 399/302
TXT By intermediate transfer member:

    Subject matter under subclass 298 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    transferring a developed color image to an intermediary surface or medium
    before transferring it to a final medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    308,    for intermediate transfer member of a developed noncolor image.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 42+ for related subject matter (i.e., colored image
    products).

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/01, for producing multicolored copies.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/01 114A, using the characteristics related to the image
    transfer process using an intermediate recording medium.


CLS 399/303
TXT Copy medium carrier (e.g., drum or belt):

    Subject matter under subclass 298 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    transporting a copy medium to a single transfer position a plurality of
    times for receiving a toner image each time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    381+,   for document handling of copy medium.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/01, for producing multicolored copies.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/01N, for process of sheet-transporting.


CLS 399/304
TXT Having gripper:

    Subject matter under subclass 303 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    attaching a copy medium to the drum or belt.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter may also use the same basic arrangement
    for detaching the copy medium from the transfer member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclass 415.1 for a flexible sheet clamping device.


CLS 399/305
TXT Vacuum or pneumatic:

    Subject matter under subclass 304 wherein the attachment is by suction or
    forced air.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 42+ for related subject matter (i.e., colored image
    products).


CLS 399/306
TXT From plural photoconductive members (e.g., duplex):

    Subject matter under subclass 297 wherein an image is transferred from
    multiple discrete photoconductive members onto both sides of a copy medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    309,    for transferring developed images to both sides of a copy medium,
    wherein an intermediate member is used.


CLS 399/307
TXT Having simultaneous fixing:

    Subject matter under subclass 297 wherein the toner image is permanently
    attached to the copy medium at the same time it is transferred.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/16, of a toner pattern (e.g., a powder pattern).

            G03G    15/20, for fixing, (e.g., by using heat).

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/24, whereby at least two steps are performed
    simultaneously.


    EPC     G03G    15/24, whereby at least two steps are performed
    simultaneously.


CLS 399/308
TXT By intermediate transfer member:

    Subject matter under subclass 297 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    transferring a developed image to an intermediary surface or medium before
    transferring it to a final medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302,    for intermediate transfer member of a developed color image.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/16, of a toner pattern (e.g., a powder pattern).

    EPC     G03G    15/16A, using at least one intermediate support.

            G03G    15/16A1, with means for handling the intermediate support
    (e.g., heating, cleaning, coating with a transfer agent).


CLS 399/309
TXT To produce duplex:

    Subject matter under subclass 308 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    transferring developed images to both sides of a copy medium where at least
    one side is transferred from an intermediate member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306,    for image transfer of multiple discrete photoconductive members to
    a copy medium.


CLS 399/310
TXT Electrostatic:

    Subject matter under subclass 297 wherein the transfer is induced by an
    electrical potential, voltage, or current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 214 for
    discharge of paper or paper handling machines.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/16, of a toner pattern (e.g., a powder pattern).

    EPC     G03G    15/16, of a toner pattern (e.g., a powder pattern).


CLS 399/311
TXT Corona:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein the potential, voltage, or
    current is caused by ionization of the air or gas surrounding a conductor.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/16, of a toner pattern (e.g., a powder pattern).

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/16 102, by corona charge transfer.


CLS 399/312
TXT Having belt transporting copy:

    Subject matter under subclass 311 wherein a flat, broad, continuous web or
    belt is provided for carrying the recording medium through the transfer
    position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    361+,   for document handling, per se.


CLS 399/313
TXT Roller or belt:

    Subject matter under subclass 297 wherein the electrostatic force for
    causing (inducing) transfer is applied to (a) a drumlike cylinder or (b) a
    flat, broad, continuous web or belt.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/16, of a toner pattern (e.g., a powder pattern).

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/16 103, by bias roller transfer.


CLS 399/314
TXT Having applied bias:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein a specific voltage or current is
    used to cause the transfer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for controlling a bias which influences development.

    240,    for a liquid application member with applied bias.

    241,    for liquid development with electrode influencing the attraction of
    liquid developer.

    270+,   for a magnetic brush-type application member with applied bias.

    285,    for a roller-type application member with applied bias.

    291,    for a powder cloud applicator with electrode(s) influencing the
    attraction of dry developer.

    293,    for a fluidized bed applicator with electrode(s) influencing the
    attraction of dry developer.

    295,    for a cascade applicator with electrode(s) influencing the
    attraction of dry developer.

    354,    for cleaning an imaging surface using a fibrous brush with applied
    voltage.


CLS 399/315
TXT Having discharger (e.g., separation):

    Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    removing charge imparted to a copy medium by the transfer.

    (1)     Note.  The charge is commonly removed by corona, bias voltage, or
    grounded member such as a brush, roller, belt, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for diagnostic of misstrip of copy.

    323,    for stripping a copy during fixing.

    398,    for stripping from photoconductive member when delivering from
    transfer position.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/14, for transferring a pattern to a second base.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/14 101F, for transferring a pattern to a second base by
    discharge.

            G03G    15/14 101K, for transferring a pattern to a second base by
    reducing the amount of charge at the leading edge and at the side edge of
    the copy sheet and by removing the toner.

            G03G    15/00G4E, using electrostatic means (e.g., a separating
    corona).


CLS 399/316
TXT Having copy medium guide:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    guiding or positioning a copy medium during the transfer.


CLS 399/317
TXT Retractable:

    Subject matter under subclass 316 wherein an arrangement is provided for a
    transferring member to move a copy medium away from an image-bearing member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121,    for a retractable transfer unit for jam removal.


CLS 399/318
TXT By pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 297 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    exerting pressure to cause a developed image to transfer to a copy medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    313,    for transfer by pressure combined with electrostatic force.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/16, of a toner pattern (e.g., a powder pattern).

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/16 101, using means other than static force.

    EPC     G03G    15/16, of a toner pattern (e.g., a powder pattern).


CLS 399/319
TXT Vibration:

    Subject matter under subclass 297 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    using an oscillating or vibrating motion to transfer a developed image onto
    a copy medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 311 for
    piezoelectric elements and devices.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/16, of a toner pattern (e.g., a powder pattern).

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/16 101, using means other than static force.

    EPC     G03G    15/16, of a toner pattern (e.g., a powder pattern).


CLS 399/320
TXT Fixing (e.g., fusing):

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein an apparatus is provided that
    causes a toner image to be permanently attached to a copy medium or
    substrate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for over-temperature protection during fixing.

    67+,    for condition-responsive control of fusing.

    91,     for a fire extinguisher internal to the machine.

    122,    for a fixing unit with particular modular or displaceable structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, for devices for
    treating a coating, including fusing or coalescing a particulate coating by
    solvent vapor treatment, per se.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, for related apparatus used to fix
    electrophotographic coatings.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 1+ for calibration
    systems which may be used to test or calibrate the heat-fixing apparatus of
    electrophotographic devices.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof,  appropriate subclasses for radiation imagery chemistry, process,
    composition, or product.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/20, for fixing (e.g., by using heat).

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/20, for fixing (e.g., by using heat).

    EPC     G03G    15/20, for fixing.


CLS 399/321
TXT Color:

    Subject matter under subclass 320 wherein a copying apparatus is provided
    that fixes two or more different color toners.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/20, for fixing (e.g., by using heat).

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/01K, for producing multicolored copies using fixing.


    EPC     G03G    15/01, for producing multicolored copies.


CLS 399/322
TXT Having copy-handling during fixing:

    Subject matter under subclass 320 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    transporting, guiding, or manipulating a copy medium during fixing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    381+,   for document handling of copy medium.

    400,    for delivering from transfer position to fixing.

    406,    for removing sheet curl caused by fixing.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/20, for fixing (e.g., by using heat).

    EPC     G03G    15/20H2P4, with means for handling the copy material in the
    fuser nip (e.g., introduction guides, stripping means).


CLS 399/323
TXT Stripping:

    Subject matter under subclass 322 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    separating a copy medium from a fixing member or preventing the copy medium
    from wrapping around the fixing member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for diagnostic of misstrip of copy.

    315,    for details of the separation discharger (i.e., passive separation
    by neutralizing the transfer charge).

    398,    for stripping from photoconductive member when delivering from
    transfer position.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/20, for fixing (e.g., by using heat).

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/20 106, stripping of the copy sheet.


CLS 399/324
TXT Offset prevention:

    Subject matter under subclass 320 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    preventing developer material from adhering to a fixing member.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter may also include an application of
    voltage to the fixing member to repel toner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, digest 1 for offset prevention or anti-offset.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/20, for fixing (e.g., by using heat).

    EPC     G03G    15/20H2P2, with special means for lubricating or cleaning
    the fuser unit (e.g., applying offset preventing fluid).


CLS 399/325
TXT Parting agent applicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 324 wherein an arrangement is provided that
    applies an anti-offset to a fixing member.

    (1)     Note.  The anti-offset may be a lubricant (usually a silicone oil
    substance).


    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/20, for fixing (e.g., by using heat).

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/20 104, by applying an offset preventing fluid.


CLS 399/326
TXT Cleaning member:

    Subject matter under subclass 325 wherein the parting agent is applied by a
    member that cleans the fixing member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for cleaning diagnostics.

    71,     for control of cleaning during the electrophotography process.

    123,    for particular structure of cleaning unit.

    149,    for combined development and cleaning by a single component.

    245,    for self-cleaning with electrodes a liquid development application
    member.

    327,    for cleaning a fixing member.

    343+,   for cleaning an imaging surface (i.e., photoconductive member),
    including for a cleaning member cyclically movable into and out of contact
    with the imaging surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 1.51+ for
    electrostatic cleaning and subclasses 300.1+ for air blast or suction which
    may be used to clean electrophotographic, photoresponsive imaging surfaces.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 1+ for cleaning
    applications of electric, wave, ray, or radiant energy.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/20, for fixing (e.g., by using heat).

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/20 104, by applying an offset preventing fluid.

            G03G    15/20 105, cleaning of the roller.


CLS 399/327
TXT Cleaning of fixing member:

    Subject matter under subclass 320 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    removal of developer material or other contaminants from a fixing member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for cleaning diagnostics.

    71,     for control of cleaning during the electrophotography process.

    123,    for particular structure of cleaning unit.

    149,    for combined development and cleaning by a single component.

    245,    for self-cleaning with electrodes a liquid development application
    member.

    343+,   for cleaning an imaging surface (i.e., photoconductive member),
    including for a cleaning member cyclically movable into and out of contact
    with the imaging surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 1.51+ for
    electrostatic cleaning and subclasses 300.1+ for air blast or suction which
    may be used to clean electrophotographic, photoresponsive imaging surfaces.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 1+ for cleaning
    applications of electric, wave, ray, or radiant energy.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/20, for fixing (e.g., by using heat).

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/20 105, cleaning of the roller.

    EPC     G03G    15/20H2P2, with special means for lubricating or cleaning
    the fuser unit (e.g., applying offset preventing fluid).


CLS 399/328
TXT By heat and pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 320 wherein the fixing is performed by
    simultaneously applying thermal energy and force.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 200+ for resistive heating devices,
    particularly subclass 216 for heating in a reproductive device and subclass
    243 for heating devices with pressure, subclasses 600+ for inductive
    heating, subclasses 678+ for microwave heating, and subclasses 764+ for
    capacitive dielectric heating.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/20, for fixing (e.g., by using heat).

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/20 101, by fixing device using heat.

    EPC     G03G    15/20H2, using contact heat.


CLS 399/329
TXT Continuous web:

    Subject matter under subclass 328 wherein a belt member moves with the
    toner image during the application of heat and pressure.


CLS 399/330
TXT Heated roller:

    Subject matter under subclass 328 wherein pressure is applied between a
    heated drum member and a member providing backing support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 895+ for roller making.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 60 for heated rollers and subclass 101
    for a solid member with heat exchange means.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 469+ for heated rollers.

    432,    Heating, subclass 60 for heated rollers.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for structure of rollers, per se.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/20, for fixing (e.g., by using heat).

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/20 102, by a hot roller.

            G03G    15/20 103, for structure of the roller, manufacturing
    thereof.

    EPC     G03G    15/20H2D, for details of fixing rollers (e.g., structure).


CLS 399/331
TXT Pressure rollers:

    Subject matter under subclass 330 wherein pressure is applied between a
    pair of roller members.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 895+ for roller making.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for structure of rollers, per se.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/20, for fixing (e.g., by using heat).

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/20 107, for driving the roller, using roller pressure.

    EPC     G03G    15/20H2P, combined with pressure.

            G03G    15/20H2P5, for details of pressure units (e.g., structure).


CLS 399/332
TXT Cyclically (e.g., with movement of copy):

    Subject matter under subclass 331 wherein the fixing arrangement opens and
    closes at the point of contact with the movement of the copy medium
    therethrough.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    for a displaceable fixing nip for jam removal.

    361+,   for document handling, per se.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/20, for fixing (e.g., by using heat).

    EPC     G03G    15/20H2P1, with retractable fixing or pressure unit.


CLS 399/333
TXT Composition or layers:

    Subject matter under subclass 330 wherein the heat or pressure member has a
    specific construction or surface property.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/20, for fixing (e.g., by using heat).

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/20 103, for structure of the roller, manufacturing
    thereof.

    EPC     G03G    15/20H2D1, for relating to the chemical composition of the
    roller layers (compositions usable for both fixing and pressure rollers).


CLS 399/334
TXT Axial heat distribution:

    Subject matter under subclass 330 wherein the heat is differentially
    applied along its center axis.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter generally corresponds to the width of
    the copy medium or to compensate for heat loss at the end of a roller.


CLS 399/335
TXT By heat:

    Subject matter under subclass 320 wherein the fixing is performed by
    applying thermal energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 600+ for inductive heating, subclasses
    678+ for microwave heating, subclasses 764+ for capacitive dielectric
    heating, and subclasses 200+ for heating devices, per se, particularly
    subclass 392 for electrical resistive heating devices.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/20, for fixing (e.g., by using heat).

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/20 101, by fixing device using heat.

    EPC     G03G    15/20H2, using contact heat.


CLS 399/336
TXT Radiant, infrared, or microwave:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein the thermal energy is in the form
    of radiant heat or the thermal energy is produced by radio frequency
    heating.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/20, for fixing (e.g., by using heat).

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/20 108, radiated with high intensity in short duration.

            G03G    15/20 302, from high frequency (microwave).

    EPC     G03G    15/20H1, using radiant heat (e.g., infrared lamps,
    microwave heaters).


CLS 399/337
TXT Coordinated with sheet movement:

    Subject matter under subclass 336 wherein the heating element is activated
    when a copy medium is moved to an operative position of the fixing unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    361+,   for document handling, per se.


CLS 399/338
TXT Contact:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein the thermal energy is applied by
    a member in contact with the copy medium.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/20, for fixing (e.g., by using heat).

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/20 301, of a hot pipe roller.

    EPC     G03G    15/20H2, using contact heat.


CLS 399/339
TXT By pressure (without heat):

    Subject matter under subclass 320 wherein the fixing is performed by
    applying force.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/20, for fixing (e.g., by using heat).

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/20 111, by pressure.

    EPC     G03G    15/20H2, using pressure only.


CLS 399/340
TXT By solvent:

    Subject matter under subclass 320 wherein the fixing is performed by
    applying solvent.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/20, for fixing (e.g., by using heat).

    EPC     G03G    15/20S, using a solvent.


CLS 399/341
TXT Having treatment of image:

    Subject matter under subclass 320 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    applying a process to or on the fused image which enhances, modifies, or
    protects the copy.

    (1)     Note.  For example, this process may be glossing the fixed image.


CLS 399/342
TXT Lamination:

    Subject matter under subclass 341 wherein treatment of the fixed image is
    by applying an overlayer of transparent material.


CLS 399/343
TXT CLEANING OF IMAGING SURFACE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein an apparatus is provided
    that removes developing material from an imaging surface after an image is
    transferred.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for cleaning diagnostics.

    71,     for control of cleaning during the electrophotography process.

    91+,    for an internal machine environmental control.

    123,    for particular structure of cleaning unit.

    127+,   for supplemental electrophotographic processes.

    149,    for combined development and cleaning by a single component.

    245,    for self-cleaning with electrodes a liquid development application
    member.

    327,    for cleaning a fixing member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 1.51+ for
    electrostatic cleaning and subclasses 300.1+ for air blast or suction which
    may be used to clean electrophotographic, photoresponsive imaging surfaces.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 1+ for cleaning
    applications of electric, wave, ray, or radiant energy.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclass 125 for cleaning methods.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    21/00, for an arrangement not provided for by groups 13/00
    to 19/00 (e.g., cleaning, elimination of residue).

    JPO/FI  G03G    21/00, for an arrangement not provided for by groups 13/00
    to 19/00 (e.g., cleaning, elimination of residue).

            G03G    21/00 310, for cleaning (e.g., elimination of residual
    magnetic powder), elimination of paper residue (elimination from the
    atmosphere 538).

            G03G    21/00 312, for removing residual toner from the
    photosensitive material.

    EPC     G03G    21/00, for an arrangement not provided for by groups 13/00
    to 19/00 (e.g., cleaning, elimination of residue).

            G03G    21/00B, for removing solid developer or debris from the
    electrographic recording medium.


CLS 399/344
TXT Color:

    Subject matter under subclass 343 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    separately handling or treating differently colored removed toners.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for analyzing a malfunction or potential malfunction of color
    reproduction.

    39+,    for balance control of color.

    54,     for color selection control.

    112,    for a modular or displaceable color process cartridge unit.

    178+,   for formation of color separation images.

    184,    for color image editing of a selectable area.

    223+,   for development (e.g., applicators) of a color image.

    298+,   for transfer of a color image.

    326,    for fixing or fusing a color image.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 42+ for related subject matter (i.e., colored image
    products).

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/01, for producing multicolored copies.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/01L, for removing multicolored copies.

    EPC     G03G    15/01, for producing multicolored copies.


CLS 399/345
TXT Retractable cleaning arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 343 wherein the cleaning arrangement is
    disengaged from an image surface during noncleaning.


CLS 399/346
TXT Including lubricant:

    Subject matter under subclass 343 wherein the cleaning arrangement includes
    applying a lubricant to the image surface.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter may include the lubricant material being
    added to (a) the cleaning member (blade), (b) the image-bearing surface, or
    (c) the developer material.


CLS 399/347
TXT Abrasion or film removal:

    Subject matter under subclass 343 wherein an abrasive agent polishes,
    grinds, or removes material from an image surface during cleaning.


CLS 399/348
TXT Removing liquid developer:

    Subject matter under subclass 343 wherein the cleaning arrangement removes
    a liquid developer material from an imaging surface.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    21/00, for an arrangement not provided for by groups 13/00
    to 19/00 (e.g., cleaning, elimination of residue).

    JPO/FI  G03G    21/00 328, for removing residual liquid developer.

            G03G    21/00 330, adsorbent developer.

            G03G    21/00 334, for collecting or recycling waste liquid
    developer.

    EPC     G03G    21/00C, for removing liquid developer.


CLS 399/349
TXT Plural diverse:

    Subject matter under subclass 343 wherein the cleaning arrangement consists
    of more than one type of apparatus to clean the imaging surface.

    (1)     Note.  For example, both a blade cleaning apparatus and a brush
    cleaning apparatus may be included.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    21/00, for an arrangement not provided for by groups 13/00
    to 19/00 (e.g., cleaning, elimination of residue).

    EPC     G03G    21/00B, for removing solid developer or debris from the
    electrographic recording medium.


CLS 399/350
TXT Blade:

    Subject matter under subclass 343 wherein the cleaning arrangement is a
    blade used to scrape developer material off an imaging surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 1.51+ for
    electrostatic cleaning, subclasses 256.5+ for moving surface scrapper, and
    subclasses 300.1+ for air blast or suction which may be used to clean
    electrophotographic, photoresponsive imaging surfaces.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    21/00, for an arrangement not provided for by groups 13/00
    to 19/00 (e.g., cleaning, elimination of residue).

    JPO/FI  G03G    21/00 318, for using a blade.

    EPC     G03G    21/00B1, for using a blade as a major cleaner.


CLS 399/351
TXT Having holder:

    Subject matter under subclass 350 wherein the blade is held in place by, or
    set to rest upon, a support member.


CLS 399/352
TXT Web:

    Subject matter under subclass 343 wherein the cleaning arrangement is a
    belt or cloth used to remove developer material from an imaging surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 1.51+ for
    electrostatic cleaning, subclasses 256.5+ for moving surface wiper, and
    subclasses 300.1+ for air blast or suction which may be used to clean
    electrophotographic, photoresponsive imaging surfaces.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    21/00, for an arrangement not provided for by groups 13/00
    to 19/00 (e.g., cleaning, elimination of residue).

    JPO/FI  G03G    21/00 322, for using a web.

    EPC     G03G    21/00B3, for using a band.


CLS 399/353
TXT Fibrous brush:

    Subject matter under subclass 343 wherein the cleaning arrangement is a
    fibrous brush used to brush off developer material from an imaging surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 1.51+ for
    electrostatic cleaning, subclasses 256.5+ for moving surface brush, and
    subclasses 300.1+ for air blast or suction which may be used to clean
    electrophotographic, photoresponsive imaging surfaces.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    21/00, for an arrangement not provided for by groups 13/00
    to 19/00 (e.g., cleaning, elimination of residue).

    JPO/FI  G03G    21/00 314, for using a fur brush.

    EPC     G03G    21/00B2, for using a brush.


CLS 399/354
TXT Having applied voltage:

    Subject matter under subclass 353 wherein the fibrous brush includes an
    applied electrical potential or current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for controlling a bias which influences development.

    240,    for a liquid application member with applied bias.

    241,    for liquid development with electrode influencing the attraction of
    liquid developer.

    270+,   for a magnetic brush-type application member with applied bias.

    285,    for a roller-type application member with applied bias.

    291,    for a powder cloud applicator with electrode(s) influencing the
    attraction of dry developer.

    293,    for a fluidized bed applicator with electrode(s) influencing the
    attraction of dry developer.

    295,    for a cascade applicator with electrode(s) influencing the
    attraction of dry developer.

    314,    for an electrostatic transfer with applied bias.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    21/00, for an arrangement not provided for by groups 13/00
    to 19/00 (e.g., cleaning, elimination of residue).

    JPO/FI  G03G    21/00 320, for using an electrostatic or magnetic means.

    EPC     G03G    21/00B4, through electrostatic or magnetic means.


CLS 399/355
TXT Having forced air (e.g.,vacuum):

    Subject matter under subclass 353 wherein the fibrous brush includes a
    forced air flow arrangement to capture developer material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92+,    for an internal machine environment having forced air circulation.

    343,    for a vacuum without a fibrous brush.


CLS 399/356
TXT Magnetic:

    Subject matter under subclass 343 wherein the cleaning arrangement uses a
    magnetic field to remove or assist in the removal of developer material.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    21/00, for an arrangement not provided for by groups 13/00
    to 19/00 (e.g., cleaning, elimination of residue).

    JPO/FI  G03G    21/00 316, for using a magnetic brush.

            G03G    21/00 320, for using an electrostatic or magnetic means.

    EPC     G03G    21/00B4, through electrostatic or magnetic means.


CLS 399/357
TXT Roller:

    Subject matter under subclass 343 wherein the cleaning arrangement uses a
    roller to remove developer material from an imaging surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 1.51+ for
    electrostatic cleaning, subclasses 256.5+ for moving surface scrapper, and
    subclasses 300.1+ for air blast or suction which may be used to clean
    electrophotographic, photoresponsive imaging surfaces.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 895+ for roller making.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for structure of rollers, per se.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    21/00, for an arrangement not provided for by groups 13/00
    to 19/00 (e.g., cleaning, elimination of residue).

    EPC     G03G    21/00B6, for using a roller as major cleaner.


CLS 399/358
TXT Having handling of removed material:

    Subject matter under subclass 343 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    transporting or holding the removed developer material.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    21/10, for collecting or recycling waste developer.

    JPO/FI  G03G    21/00 326, for collecting or recycling waste powder
    developer (including the developer eliminated from the atmosphere).

    EPC     G03G    21/10, for collecting or recycling waste developer.


CLS 399/359
TXT Recycled to developing:

    Subject matter under subclass 358 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    returning removed toner to a developing unit to be reused.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter may also include an arrangement for
    treating (e.g., auger) or filtering toner prior to reuse.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for diagnostic of consumables (e.g., toner).

    35,     for diagnostics of cleaning a waste toner container.

    61+,    for detection of toner in a developing unit.

    99+,    for toner removal.

    106,    for a toner cartridge.

    120,    for a new and waste toner container.

    224,    for adding colored toner.

    253,    for conditioning dry toner.

    254+,   for mixing dry toner.


CLS 399/360
TXT Having storage:

    Subject matter under subclass 358 wherein the cleaning arrangement provides
    for containing the developer material after removal from an imaging surface.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    21/12, for toner waste containers.

    EPC     G03G    21/12, for toner waste containers.


CLS 399/361
TXT DOCUMENT HANDLING:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a method or apparatus is
    provided that feeds, inverts, stacks, sorts, collates, conveys, delivers,
    or manipulates a recorded carrier of any kind having an image in any form
    thereon.


    (1)     Note.  If the most comprehensive claim of a patent application
    recites document handling means or methods more than nominally (i.e., in
    specific or particular detail), but recites electrophotographic copying
    subject matter only nominally (i.e., generically), then classification for
    examination purposes shall be in the appropriate document handling class
    (e.g., Class 270 or Class 271) regardless of whether or not direct optical
    formation of an image on a photoresponsive member is generically recited.
    Classification as an original issued patent shall be the same as for
    examination of the application. Classification as a cross-reference of the
    issued patent in Class 355 is discretionary.

    (2)     Note. An example of nominal recitations of electrophotographic
    copying subject matter in a claim is as follows: means for producing copies
    of one or more document sheets in a collating mode of operation, means for
    imagewise exposing an original onto a photoconductor, clamping means for
    defining an exposure region and positioning a sheet therein, and exposure
    means for subjecting an original sheet to exposure through said clamping
    means.

    (3)     Note.  This subject matter also may include two or more
    electrophotographic devices that are operatively interfaced together to
    operate as a system whereby each electrophotographic device is capable of
    producing a copy by itself.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16+,    for analyzing a malfunction or abnormality in handling documents.

    38+,    for control of the electrophotographic processes (e.g., charging,
    exposing, developing, transferring, fixing, and cleaning).

    75+,    for control of machine operations.

    91+,    for an internal machine environmental control.

    107+,   for an electrophotographic device having particular structure.

    127+,   for supplemental electrophotographic processes.

    130+,   for image formation, per se.

    306,    for plural image formation systems wherein each system produces an
    image for one side of a duplex copy.

    343+,   for cleaning an imaging surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for means to advance, for example, electrophotographic photoresponsive copy
    paper.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 44+ for
    means to control the humidity of paper used in an electrophotographic
    copier or the atmosphere within the copier to improve performance of the
    apparatus.


    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, appropriate subclasses for subject
    matter related to winding and unwinding electrophotographic photoresponsive
    webs, etc.

    248,    Supports, supports, per se, for devices which carry the weight of
    an article or articles or otherwise hold or steady it or them against the
    pull of gravity, and devices for holding an article to its support.

    269,    Work Holders, for work holders, per se.

    270,    Sheet-Material Associating, subclasses 1.1+ for related subject
    matter.


    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, appropriate subclasses for related
    subject matter.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclasses 1+ for applications of counters, per se,
    including subclass 8 for counting flat articles (e.g., sheets).

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/00, for an electrographic process using a charge pattern.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/00 104, apparatus for producing a large amount of copies
    at high speed.

    EPC     G03G    15/00, for an electrographic process using a charge
    pattern.


CLS 399/362
TXT Book copying:

    Subject matter under subclass 361 wherein an arrangement is provided for an
    opened book to lay in close contact with a platen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    355,    Photocopying, subclass 25 for book page copying


CLS 399/363
TXT Original and copy:

    Subject matter under subclass 361 wherein the document handling involves a
    particular processing of both the original and copy medium.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/00, for an electrographic process using a charge pattern.

    EPC     G03G    15/00R, arrangement for copying both sides of an original
    for copying onto both sides of a copy sheet.


CLS 399/364
TXT Duplex:

    Subject matter under subclass 363 wherein an arrangement is provided that
    handles an original and a copy medium to produce an image on both sides of
    the copy medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306,    for image transfer of multiple discrete photoconductive members to
    a copy medium.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/00, for an electrographic process using a charge pattern.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/00 106, mechanisms for copying onto both sides of a
    copying sheet, for superposing, control for transporting sheets.


CLS 399/365
TXT Original:

    Subject matter under subclass 361 wherein an arrangement is provided that
    handles an original document to be reproduced.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/00, for an electrographic process using a charge pattern.

    EPC     G03G    15/00F, apparatus which relate to the handling of originals
    for photographic purposes in general.


CLS 399/366
TXT Unauthorized copy prevention:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 wherein a property or condition of the
    original prevents a copy from being made thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     for accounting of user access during machine operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    283,    Printed Matter, Cross-Reference Art Collection 902 for
    antiphotocopy.

    380,    Cryptography, subclass 51 for cryptography with production of
    printed copy.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    21/04, for preventing copies being made of an original.

    JPO/FI  G03G    21/00 550, for prevention of producing counterfeits by
    electrographic copying.

            G03G    21/00 552, by registering the original picture.

            G03G    21/00 554, by recording an identification mark on the
    original picture.

            G03G    21/00 560, by modifying a copied picture from the original
    picture.

            G03G    21/00 562, by supplying an identification code of copying
    machine to the copied picture.

    EPC     G03G    21/04, for preventing copies being made of an original.


CLS 399/367
TXT Automatic document feeder:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 wherein an original is automatically
    moved up to the exposure position and out.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/00, for an electrographic process using a charge pattern.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/00 107, for transporting and delivering originals.

    EPC     G03G    15/00F1, for transporting.


CLS 399/368
TXT Plural originals simultaneously:

    Subject matter under subclass 367 wherein a plurality of originals are
    simultaneously fed into the exposure position.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter may also be called two-up copying or
    signature copy.


CLS 399/369
TXT Plural document holders:

    Subject matter under subclass 367 wherein the original document is
    selectively fed from more than one document holder.


CLS 399/370
TXT Having size detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 367 wherein the size of the original is
    detected by a detection device in the automatic document feeder.

    (1)     Note.  The size may be detected during transportation (i.e., while
    the sheet is in motion).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    376,    for original size detection.

    386,    for continuous copy in response to detection of the original.


CLS 399/371
TXT Having position detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 367 wherein the presence, position, or
    location of an original is detected by a detection device in the automatic
    document feeder.


CLS 399/372
TXT Registration:

    Subject matter under subclass 367 wherein the original is positioned or its
    movement timed within the automatic document feeder before being subjected
    to the exposure operation.


CLS 399/373
TXT Recirculating:

    Subject matter under subclass 367 wherein an original is returned to the
    same document holder after being exposed.


CLS 399/374
TXT Copying both sides of original:

    Subject matter under subclass 367 wherein an original is inverted in order
    to expose both sides of the original (i.e., duplex).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306,    for image transfer of multiple discrete photoconductive members to
    a copy medium.

    364,    for duplex original and copy handling.


CLS 399/375
TXT For continuous or fanfold paper:

    Subject matter under subclass 367 wherein an original is in the form of a
    continuous substrate or rolled strip or web.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    386,    for continuous copy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, for advancing sheet
    material that is of an indeterminate length.


CLS 399/376
TXT Having detection of size:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 wherein a detection device on a document
    tray, platen, or path provides an indication of the dimensions of an
    original.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370,    for detection of size during automatic document feed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 571 for detection of position by
    photocells.


CLS 399/377
TXT Holder:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    supporting an original before, during, and after exposure.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter includes a particular configuration of
    document trays.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    405,    for exist tray.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, supports, per se, for devices which carry the weight of
    an article or articles or otherwise hold or steady it or them against the
    pull of gravity, and devices for holding an article to its support.

    269,    Work Holders, for work holders, per se.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/00, for an electrographic process using a charge pattern.

    EPC     G03G    15/00F2, holders for originals and exposure platens.


CLS 399/378
TXT Film (e.g., transparency):

    Subject matter under subclass 377 wherein the original is a thin, flexible
    cellulose member.


CLS 399/379
TXT Platen:

    Subject matter under subclass 377 wherein an arrangement is provided for a
    backing structure against which an exposure device illuminates an original.


CLS 399/380
TXT Having cover:

    Subject matter under subclass 379 wherein an arrangement is provided for an
    overlay structure that holds an original in place.


CLS 399/381
TXT Copy:

    Subject matter under subclass 361 wherein an arrangement is provided that
    handles the medium that receives a duplication of an original.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter includes the overall configuration for
    handling a copy medium (e.g., from cassette, to image transfer, to exit
    tray).

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/00, for an electrographic process using a charge pattern.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/00 510, for feeding sheets.

            G03G    15/00 514, by measuring the characteristics of a sheet
    feeder.

            G03G    15/00 516, by using sheets of paper.

            G03G    15/00 518, by measuring the characteristics of the
    identical mechanisms to those used for transporting sheets.

    EPC     G03G    15/00G, for apparatus which relate to the handling of copy
    material.


CLS 399/382
TXT Interleaving (e.g., cover or partitioning sheet):

    Subject matter under subclass 381 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    inserting divider sheets between selected copy media.


CLS 399/383
TXT Plural copies (from same original):

    Subject matter under subclass 381 wherein an arrangement is provided that
    handles two or more copies of an original.


CLS 399/384
TXT Continuous (e.g., roll, fanfold):

    Subject matter under subclass 381 wherein a copy medium is a continuous
    substrate, strip, or web of rolled stock material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    375,    for continuous or fanfold paper during automatic document feed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, for advancing sheet
    material that is of an indeterminate length.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/00, for an electrographic process using a charge pattern.

    EPC     G03G    15/00G2, wherein paper is wound off a roll; Supply rolls;
    Roll holders.


CLS 399/385
TXT Having cutting:

    Subject matter under subclass 384 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    severing the copy medium from stock material.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter may also include sheets cut before
    transfer.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/00, for an electrographic process using a charge pattern.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/00 522, by measuring the characteristics of web cutting.


    EPC     G03G    15/00G2B, for cutting wherein paper is wound off a roll;
    Supply rolls; Roll holders.


CLS 399/386
TXT In response to detection of original:

    Subject matter under subclass 385 wherein the severing position is
    determined by sensing the size or some other attribute of the original.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370,    for detection of size during automatic document feed.


CLS 399/387
TXT Length adjustment:

    Subject matter under subclass 385 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    adjusting the length of the copy medium by a human operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     for operator interface (e.g., display control panel).


CLS 399/388
TXT Feeding to transfer position:

    Subject matter under subclass 381 wherein the copy medium is transported to
    a transfer position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66,     for condition responsive control of transfer.

    101,    for particle or contaminant control of toner on a transfer member.

    121,    for a transfer unit with a particular modular or displaceable
    structure.

    154,    for image formation with transfer of a latent image.

    297+,   for transferring a toner image, per se.

    397+,   for delivering a copy from the transfer position.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/00, for an electrographic process using a charge pattern.

    EPC     G03G    15/00G3, for transporting.


CLS 399/389
TXT Having detection of size or type:

    Subject matter under subclass 388 wherein a document tray or holder
    provides an indication of the dimensions of a copy medium or indicates the
    type of the copy medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    376,    for original size detection.


CLS 399/390
TXT Having treatment of copy medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 388 wherein the copy medium is treated prior
    to reaching the transfer area.

    (1)     Note.  The treatment may include the following operations on the
    sheet (a) the application of heat, (b) the application of a release agent
    to clean a used sheet in order for it to be re-used, (c) bending the sheet,
    and (d) cleaning contaminants such as paper dust from the sheet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 70 for chemical means to remove toner
    from used paper.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 4+ for chemical means
    to remove toner from used paper.

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclasses for laser removal of toner
    from used paper.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/00, for an electrographic process using a charge pattern.

    EPC     G03G    15/16R, with means for preconditioning the paper base
    before the transfer.


CLS 399/391
TXT Plural copy medium sources:

    Subject matter under subclass 388 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    feeding copy medium from plural input sources into the transfer position.

    (1)     Note.  The plural sources may be included within a unitary
    structure.


CLS 399/392
TXT Manual feed:

    Subject matter under subclass 391 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    feeding copy medium directly into an input source (prior to transfer
    position) by a human operator.


CLS 399/393
TXT Copy medium input tray:

    Subject matter under subclass 388 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    feeding copy medium from an input source into the transfer position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, supports, per se, for devices which carry the weight of
    an article or articles or otherwise hold or steady it or them against the
    pull of gravity, and devices for holding an article to its support.

    269,    Work Holders, for work holders, per se.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/00, for an electrographic process using a charge pattern.

    EPC     G03G    15/00G1, for piling, stacking arrangements; Cassettes;
    Peeling off.


CLS 399/394
TXT In registration with image:

    Subject matter under subclass 388 wherein the conveyance of the copy medium
    is altered in order to feed the copy medium in registration with the latent
    image directly or indirectly in accordance with the conveyance of the
    original.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195,    for feeding control done in relation to the exposure operation.

    301,    for registration performed in order to superimpose a plurality of
    color images on a copy medium.


CLS 399/395
TXT Skew correction:

    Subject matter under subclass 394 wherein the conveyance of the copy medium
    is altered in direction to correct the relationship between the image and
    the copy medium.


CLS 399/396
TXT Speed control of conveyance:

    Subject matter under subclass 394 wherein the alteration is to the velocity
    of transport.


CLS 399/397
TXT Delivering from transfer position:

    Subject matter under subclass 381 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    transporting the copy medium after is has passed the transfer position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66,     for condition responsive control of transfer.

    101,    for particle or contaminant control of toner on a transfer member.

    121,    for a transfer unit with a particular modular or displaceable
    structure.

    154,    for image formation with transfer of a latent image.

    297+,   for transferring a toner image, per se.

    388+,   for feeding a copy to the transfer position.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/00, for an electrographic process using a charge pattern.

    EPC     G03G    15/00G3, for transporting.


CLS 399/398
TXT Stripping from photoconductive member:

    Subject matter under subclass 397 wherein an apparatus is provided that
    actively separates a copy medium from a photoconductive member.

    (1)     Note.  The stripping may occur, for example, by forced air,
    scraping, or bending the copy medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for diagnostic of misstrip of copy.

    315,    for details of the separation discharger (i.e., passive separation
    by neutralizing the transfer charge).

    323,    for stripping a copy during fixing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclass 900 for strippers.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/14, for transferring a pattern to a second base.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/14 100B, for transferring a pattern to a second base by
    stripping guide or a stripping roller.

            G03G    15/14 100C, for transferring a pattern to a second base by
    air suction or blow.

            G03G    15/14 100D, for transferring a pattern to a second base by
    a protruding member from a photosensitive material.

            G03G    15/14 100E, for transferring a pattern to a second base by
    static suction.

            G03G    15/14 100G, for transferring a pattern to a second base by
    a curvature.

            G03G    15/14 100J, for transferring a pattern to a second base by
    curling and folding the leading edge of the copy sheet.

            G03G    15/14 100Z, for transferring a pattern to a second base by
    others.


    EPC     G03G    15/00G4, for removing a copy sheet from a xerographic drum,
    band, or plate.


CLS 399/399
TXT Claw:

    Subject matter under subclass 398 wherein a grasping curved structure is
    provided that strips a copy medium from a photoconductive member.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/14, for transferring a pattern to a second base.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/14 101A, for transferring a pattern to a second base by
    a stripping claw.


CLS 399/400
TXT To fixing (e.g., fuser):

    Subject matter under subclass 397 wherein an apparatus is provided that
    delivers a copy medium with a transferred toner image to a fuser position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322,    for copy handling during fixing.


CLS 399/401
TXT Re-fed for additional image:

    Subject matter under subclass 397 wherein the copy medium is transported
    back to the transfer position for a second or subsequent time.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/00, for an electrographic process using a charge pattern.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/00 106, mechanisms for copying onto both sides of a
    copying sheet; for superposing; control for transporting sheets.


CLS 399/402
TXT Having intermediate storage:

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein a copy medium is temporarily
    stored prior to an additional image being transferred to the copy medium.


CLS 399/403
TXT Having collating:

    Subject matter under subclass 397 wherein a plurality of the same or
    different copy medium are arranged into a plurality of different locations
    according to a predetermined, informative, or significant order.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/00, for an electrographic process using a charge pattern.

    EPC     G03G    15/00G1, for piling, stacking arrangements; Cassettes;
    Peeling off.

            G03G    15/00G5, devices for collating copy materials (e.g.,
    sorters control, copies in staple form).


CLS 399/404
TXT Having offset stacking:

    Subject matter under subclass 397 wherein the copy medium is gathered and
    delivered through an output from the transfer position in an uneven
    arrangement.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/00, for an electrographic process using a charge pattern.

    EPC     G03G    15/00G1, for piling, stacking arrangements; Cassettes;
    Peeling off.


CLS 399/405
TXT Discharge of copy (e.g., exit tray):

    Subject matter under subclass 397 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    supporting a copy that is delivered to an output device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    377,    for holder of original.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/00, for an electrographic process using a charge pattern.

    EPC     G03G    15/00G6, means for discharging copies (e.g., exit trays).


CLS 399/406
TXT Curl correction:

    Subject matter under subclass 397 wherein a copy is delivered to an output
    device that prevents the copy from curling up at the edges.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter also includes correction of curl created
    by a fixing unit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 197 and 270+ for
    decurling.

    271,    Sheet Feeding of Delivering, subclasses 161, 188, and 209 for
    decurling.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclass 459 for decurling.


CLS 399/407
TXT Post-processing:

    Subject matter under subclass 397 wherein a copy or copies receive further
    treatment after copying is complete.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter may include folding or punching.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    270,    Sheet-Material Associating, subclass 53 for sheet associating with
    stapling.

    OTHER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS:

    IPC6    G03G    15/00, for an electrographic process using a charge pattern.

    JPO/FI  G03G    15/00 534, characterized by the subsequent processes.

    EPC     G03G    15/00G5, devices for collating copy materials (e.g.,
    sorters control, copies in staple form).


CLS 399/408
TXT Having binding:

    Subject matter under subclass 407 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    attaching together a plurality of copy medium or sheets.


CLS 399/409
TXT By toner:

    Subject matter under subclass 408 wherein developing material is used as an
    adhesive to attach together a plurality of copy media or sheets.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for diagnostic of consumables (e.g., toner).

    35,     for diagnostics of cleaning a waste toner container.

    49,     for detection of toner involving plural control processes.

    61+,    for detection of toner in a developing unit.

    99+,    for toner removal.

    106,    for a toner cartridge.

    120,    for a new and waste toner container.

    129,    for supplemental exposure or charging of residual toner.

    134,    for image formation with photoconductive toner.

    224,    for adding colored toner.

    239+,   for application of liquid development.

    253,    for conditioning dry toner.

    254+,   for mixing dry toner.

    258+,   for supplying new toner.

    265+    for application of dry development.


CLS 399/410
TXT By staple:

    Subject matter under subclass 408 wherein an arrangement is provided for
    driving a thin piece of wire through a plurality of copy media or sheets
    that will secure or bind the copy media or sheets together.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, for stapling, per se.


CLS 399/411
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein an arrangement that has
    not been provided for in the previous subclasses is provided herein.


CLS 400/
TTL TYPEWRITING MACHINES

CLS 400/
TXT

    I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    1.      This is the generic class for an apparatus wherein a user of the
    apparatus causes an intelligible character* to be imprinted on a
    record-medium* by a type-member* that is impressed on the record-medium,
    said type-member being selected from a plurality of different type-members,
    and the selected type-members being impressed serially to form a sequence
    of characters that record intelligible information.

    2.      This class includes a method of using the apparatus of (1) above.

    II.     EXPLANATORY NOTES ON THE SCOPE OF THE CLASS

    (1)     Note.  The definition as written above is intended to emphasize the
    major difference between this class (400) and the class of Printing (101).
    The difference is that as a general rule in this class each character* is
    imprinted serially by a type-member* that is selected from an assortment of
    type-members, the assortment containing only one of each type-member to be
    impressed, and the selection being made in sequence to imprint one
    character after another to form a word, and one word after another to form
    the text to be read.  In Class 101, on the other hand, a plurality of
    type-members are arranged to be printed simultaneously to form a
    print-line* or a page* or a plurality of pages of printed text.

    (2)     Note.  The word "intelligible" in the definition of this class does
    not limit the character to a visible character. A character that is
    invisible to the human eye can be intelligible to a "scanner" that "reads",
    for example, infrared light emanations, and thus be intelligible within the
    definition stated above.

    (3)     Note.  Explanatory note regarding placement of patents within the
    class. A typewriter includes many elements, often numbering in the hundreds
    and even thousands of elements.  Because of this, many patents in the
    typewriter art include claims that recite elements of a typewriter that are
    named in a claim for the purpose of setting forth the environment of the
    inventive structure.  In such patents, the mere naming of various elements
    in a claim will not necessarily be the basis of placing a patent having
    such a claim into the schedule as an original patent.  Original placement
    will be based upon the inventive concept emphasized in a patent claim
    rather than on the basis of all the elements that are merely named in a
    claim.

    III.    GLOSSARY

    In the typewriter art certain words and terms have acquired distinct and
    specialized meanings.  The following Glossary will define and explain the
    terms so as to facilitate understanding of, and simplify, the definitions
    of the subclasses to follow.  Throughout the class definition and the
    subclass definitions, an asterisk (*) following a word or term will
    indicate that it has been defined in this section. For a term that is
    defined in this Glossary and used in the title or definition of a subclass,
    the individual words of the term are separated by a hyphen (-) to indicate
    that the term is alphabetized in this Glossary as if it were a single word.

    APRON

    A member closely adjacent to the cylindrical platen* of a typewriter that
    serves to guide a record-medium* into close contact with the platen.  It is
    usually a thin sheet of relatively rigid material having a length dimension
    approximating the length of the platen and is arcuately shaped to
    approximately the radius of the platen whereby it conforms to part of the
    periphery of the platen.  It is usually located underneath the platen and
    closely adjacent thereto so that the record-medium is guided between the
    apron and the platen to be partially wrapped around the platen. The apron
    may also serve as a mounting for feed-rollers* that cooperate with the
    platen to move the record-medium in a line-space* direction.

    AUXILIARY-RECORD-PROGRAM

    A set of instructions used in a programmed-control-system* of a typewriter,
    which set of instructions may be readily removed from the typewriter so
    that another set of instructions may be inserted into the typewriter to
    perform a different or a modified sequence of typing functions.

    CARRIAGE

    A mechanism for supporting a record-medium* or for supporting a
    type-head-carrier*, which mechanism is provided with means to effect
    relative movement between the record-medium and a type-head-carrier that is
    at the print-point*, the movement occurring along a line that is parallel
    to the print-line*.  A "carriage-feed" means effects carriage movement in
    the direction that causes character* symbols to be imprinted in succession,
    thus "carriage feed" also effects character-space* and word-space*
    distances.  In most typewriters used for typing a European language said
    direction is from left to right, but there are some typewriters capable of
    imprinting successive characters from right to left even though the words
    will be read from left to right, and there are other typewriters intended
    to imprint successive characters from right to left because the words will
    be read from right to left.  In any event, the carriage-feed direction is
    always the direction that causes characters to be imprinted in succession.

    In some typewriters the record-medium is held to a platen that is mounted
    on a carriage, and the "platen carriage" (together with the record-medium)
    is moved relative to the main frame of the typewriter.  Each successively
    actuated type-member* is impressed at a print-point that is stationary
    relative to the main frame.  The platen-carriage (e.g., right to left) is
    opposite to the direction in which successive characters are imprinted and
    read (e.g., left to right).  (The directions mentioned apply except as
    noted above.)  In some typewriters the record-medium is held to a platen
    that does not move during the imprinting of a print-line.  The type-member
    is on a type-head* that is on a type-head-carrier that is mounted on a
    carriage, and the type-head carriage is moved relative to the main frame of
    the typewriter.  Each successively actuated type-member is impressed at a
    print-point that is moved relative to the main frame.  The "type-head
    carriage" movement (e.g., left to right) is in the direction in which
    successive characters are imprinted and read (e.g., left to right).  In
    both forms of typewriter noted above, the term carriage feed is applied to
    movement of the carriage in the direction that effects imprinting of
    successive characters and words*.  Thus, for a platen-carriage typewriter,
    carriage feed is usually from right to left (but note the exception above),
    whereas for a type-head-carriage typewriter, carriage feed is usually from
    left to right.  Either typewriter is also capable of carriage reversal,
    which is in the direction opposite to carriage feed, and is used for
    "carriage return" (e.g., to start a new print-line) or is used for carriage
    backspace (e.g., to move a carriage a distance equivalent of one or more
    character-spaces in a reverse direction).

    CARRIAGE-RACK

    A bar having teeth or notches along one of its sides, which bar is affixed
    to a carriage*, and which teeth or notches cooperate with a pawl* or a
    pinion gear to enable or cause movement of the bar and the carriage to
    which it is affixed.  There may be provision for adjustment of the bar
    relative to the carriage, but the adjustment is usually made at the time of
    manufacture of the typewriter, or may be made subsequently during a period
    of time when the typewriter is not being used for typing.  When a
    carriage-rack cooperates with a pawl, it acts as a ratchet*, and for a
    discussion of how a pawl and ratchet operates as a carriage-feed mechanism,
    see the definition of pawl in this Glossary, section III.

    CASE-SHIFT

    Case-shift is the relative movement between a record-medium* and a
    type-face* or a type-die* that is at the print-point*, which movement is
    effected by pressing a case-shift key* concurrently with the pressing of a
    character* key.  In most typewriters, selection of which character is to be
    imprinted in sequence is made by selection of the character keys.  In a
    typewriter with a case-shift, a choice of upper-case* (i.e., "CAPITAL"
    letter) or lower-case* (i.e., "small" letter) form of the selected letter
    is possible by concurrently pressing or not pressing the case-shift key.
    Analogous choice of other characters that appear on the various character
    keys is also possible with the case-shift key.  In some typewriters
    case-shift is effected by moving into one of two positions (or in other
    typewriters one of three positions) any of (a) a type-bar-segment*, or (b)
    a platen, or (c) a type-head* that carries at least two fixedly related
    type-face elements; in all of these the movement occurs in a plane
    substantially parallel to the plane occupied by the type-face at the
    print-point.  In some typewriters a type-head is on a type-head-carrier*
    and includes a type-set-assemblage* thereon, and in such typewriters
    case-shift is effected by moving the type-head so that the chosen type-face
    (i.e., upper-case or lower-case) will be impacted against the
    record-medium.  In some typewriters, case-shift may also be used to imprint
    a character in a different font* or a character in a different language for
    specialized uses.

    CHARACTER

    A single symbol imprinted on a record-medium* by a type-member* and
    intended to be read by the human eye, or intended to be "read" by a
    mechanical or electrical scanner, for the purpose of conveying intelligence
    to the reader (i.e., human reader or mechanical "reader").  It forms one of
    the elements needed to form a word*.  In most typewriters a character is
    formed by impressing a single type-member against a record-medium, usually
    via an inking means.  However, a single character may also be formed by
    impressing a plurality of different type-members either simultaneously or
    successively in the same zone or area of the record-medium.  A character
    may be (a) one of the letters in an alphabet, either upper-case* (i.e.,
    "CAPITAL" letter), or lower-case* (i.e., "small" letter), or (b) one of the
    numeral digits (i.e., "0" through "9"), or (c) a punctuation mark [e.g.,
    comma (,), colon (:), etc.], or (d) one of a variety of signs and symbols
    incorporated into a typewriter intended for general usage [e.g., dollar
    sign ($), ampersand symbol (&), etc.].  The number or variety of characters
    that a particular typewriter may imprint is limited only by the size of the
    typewriter and the area allotted to the key-board* and the type-members of
    that typewriter.

    CHARACTER-SPACE

    Character-space is the distance that the carriage* or the record-medium* is
    moved to effect the separation of one imprinted character* from a
    subsequently imprinted character of the same word*.  In most alphabets the
    width of one character (i.e., the distance that it extends along the
    print-line*) differs from the width of another character.  In many
    typewriters the character-space distances are in equal increments of
    carriage feed.  Due to the fact that successively imprinted characters have
    different widths, the spaces between the successive characters are unequal.
     To compensate for different widths, some typewriters are provided with
    mechanism to vary the carriage feed.  This mechanism causes the carriage
    feed to be proportional to the width of the character imprinted by a
    type-face*.  The unequal increments of carriage feed produced by this
    mechanism results in equal spaces between successively imprinted
    characters, thereby improving the uniformity and appearance of the typing.

    COLLATING-TABLE

    A platform or support used while a plurality of sheets or webs are arranged
    or assembled according to an orderly system. The sheets or webs may include
    record-medium* pieces or transfer-medium* pieces in any desired order or
    sequence and the assemblage of pieces comprises that which is to be typed
    on.  The term "collating" as used in this class (400) is used to describe a
    simple structure that is used for collating, usually manually.  It differs
    somewhat from the term collating as applied to a machine that accomplishes
    a similar result of arranging or assembling plural sheets or webs.

    CONDENSED-BILLING

    A term used in the typewriter industry for the production of a condensed or
    summary record of a succession of typed documents (e.g., bills or
    numerical data).  The operation includes the typing of plural copies (e.g.,
    an "original copy" and one or more "carbon copies", or duplicate "original
    copies") simultaneously on plural record-medium* pieces.  At least one of
    the pieces is intended to be complete as to heading, address, and other
    information that is to be sent to one user.  At least another piece is to
    be retained by the typist, and is not required to be complete; that is, it
    may omit much of the information, but may be a composite or summary or
    condensed record of the information that is to be sent.  The record-medium
    on which the condensed-billing is typed is therefore moved in line-space*
    distances that differ from the line-space distances of the complete record
    medium.

    DENOMINATIONAL-STOP

    A component of the carriage* mechanism that causes stopping of the carriage
    in any of selected denominational column positions. In a denominational
    column a sequence of numerical digits is imprinted on one print-line* and
    further sequences of numeral digits are imprinted in successive
    print-lines, one print-line below the previous print-line.  The
    distinguishing characteristic of a denominational column is that the
    decimal point of successive print-lines of numeral digits is in vertical
    array, or in the instance where the decimal point of successive numbers is
    not actually imprinted, the "units" digit of the successive numbers is in
    vertical array.  Thus the position where the carriage will be stopped to
    imprint each of a succession of numbers will depend on whether the first
    digit of a sequence of numeral digits is to be a "hundreds" digit, or a
    "tens" digit, etc.  A denominational-stop is usually a "counter stop" (see
    the discussion under the definition of tab-rack* in this Glossary).

    FEED-ROLLER

    A rotatable element having a cylindrical or cylindroidal periphery that
    contacts a surface of a sheet or web of record-medium* material or
    transfer-medium* material and enables or causes movement of the sheet or
    web.  Usually a feed-roller cooperates with a second element and the sheet
    or web lies between the feed-roller and the second element, the opposite
    surfaces of the sheet or web being closely adjacent to the corresponding
    surfaces of the feed-roller and the second element and in nonsliding
    contact therewith.  When the second element is a platen* the feed-roller
    serves as a "pressure roller" to urge the sheet or web toward the platen,
    and the platen is rotated to cause feed movement of the sheet or web.  When
    the second element is another feed-roller either or both of the
    feed-rollers may be driven for rotation, the rollers being rotated in
    opposite rotational directions to cause feed movement, and the two
    feed-rollers cooperate to form a feed-roller couple.

    FONT

    A complete assortment of type in the same style and size to imprint
    character* symbols having a substantially uniform appearance.  Examples of
    font include elite and pica (both refer to size of type), italic (i.e.,
    having slope to the right), and cursive (i.e., having flowing lines
    connecting individual characters in a style resembling handwriting), these
    being only a few of the fonts used in various typewriters.

    FUNCTION

    In general, an operation performed on or by a typewriter during use of the
    typewriter for typing.  As used by the typewriter industry, however, the
    term "function" is limited to an operation other than (a) impressing a
    type-member* against a record-medium* to imprint a character* (which
    thereby concurrently effects a character-space*), or (b) effecting a
    word-space*.  Examples of typewriter operations considered by the industry
    to be functions are:  backspace, carriage return, case-shift*, tabular
    stopping, line-space* (i.e., for record-medium feed), ribbon feed, and
    similar typewriter movements.

    INK

    A substance (usually fluid, may be viscous or solid) that is applied to the
    surface of a record-medium* in the configuration of a typed character*
    symbol to make the character visible to a reader of the typed text.  An
    important property of ink is its ability to form a "permanent" symbol, that
    is, a symbol that is not easily erased (or erased only with great
    difficulty), and it is this property that aids the production of an
    original copy of the typed text. (See the definition of transfer-medium* in
    this Glossary, section III, for a discussion of the difference between
    original copy and carbon copy.)  A fluid ink may be applied directly to a
    type-face*, from which type-face the ink is directly imprinted onto a
    record-medium.  A viscous ink may be applied to the record-medium via an
    ink-impregnated ribbon*, and the ink therein will "flow" by capillary
    action from unused portions of the ribbon into the used portions of the
    ribbon.  A solid ink may be applied via a so-called "carbon-ink" ribbon,
    which is often a single-use or one-use ribbon because all or most of the
    coating of the ribbon is imprinted onto the record-medium when a type-face
    is impacted thereagainst. A "hecto-graphic" ink is a particular form of ink
    that is soluble and is used to form a "master" plate used in a "spirit
    duplicating" copying process.

    KEY

    An element on a typewriter, located on a key-board*, which element is
    pressed to cause either (a) the actuation of a type-member* to imprint a
    character* that corresponds to the selected key, or (b) the actuation of a
    selected function* of the typewriter.  In a manual typewriter a key is
    usually pressed by a finger of a user, and the movement of the selected key
    is transmitted via a system of levers and links into movement of a
    corresponding type-member actuator or function actuator. In some
    typewriters and external power source assists the actuation.  In other
    typewriters keys are pressed successively in response to signals to the
    typewriter by a human or mechanical operator.  The key referred to in (a)
    above (i.e., a character key) also causes a character-space* movement of
    the carriage* as well as actuation of the type-member.

    KEY-BOARD

    That portion of a typewriter which is located so as to face and be adjacent
    to the user of a typewriter, and containing the key* elements that are to
    be pressed in succession to produce a text that is being typed, or pressed
    as needed to actuate a particular function* of the typewriter.

    LINE-SPACE

    The distance caused by relative movement between a record-medium* and a
    print-point* of a type-member* against the record-medium, which movement
    effects separation of one print-line* of typed text from a subsequently
    imprinted line of typed text on the same page* of text.  It is effected by
    incremental relative movement that occurs in a direction perpendicular to
    the direction in which a print-line is formed.  In most typewriters the
    type- member is impressed in substantially the same area of the typewriter
    and the record-medium is effectively held to a platen* which moves
    incrementally between successive print-lines, but in some typewriters the
    type-member and its acutating mechanism moves in a corresponding direction
    in incremental movements between successive print-lines. Thus, in most
    typewriters, line-space movement is a specific form of record-medium
    movement, but line-space movement is a determinate, incremental movement in
    selected units of distance or in multiples or fractions thereof.  If a unit
    of distance is considered as one line-space, the multiples would include
    two or three line-spaces and the fractions would include one-half, one and
    one-half, or two and one-half line-spaces, all these distances being
    selected by the user of a typewriter according to the needs of the user.
    The most significant aspect of line-space movement is that it is related to
    a preceding or succeeding print-line on the record-medium as distinguished
    from record-medium movement which is not related to a print-line, but
    rather is an indeterminate movement.

    LOWER-CASE

    A "small" letter, similar in appearance to this text, as opposed to
    upper-case*.  The names lower-case and upper-case are derived from the
    printing art during the period when type-faces* were handpicked and
    handset, the type being picked from a tray in which the capital or
    upper-case type were held in compartments physically located above the
    compartments for the small or lower-case type.

    MAGNETIC

    A property of nature resulting in attraction or orientation of a ferrous
    material relative to a body having such a property.  Examples of such a
    body include the earth, a loadstone, and a coil of wire in an electrical
    circuit, all of which have, or can generate, a magnetic field. Magnetism is
    used to produce a force, as in a magnetic solenoid, or to transmit a force,
    as in a magnetic clutch.  Magnetic also describes a property inherent in an
    auxiliary-record-program* containing ferrous particles capable of being
    oriented or reoriented relative to the auxiliary record, the orientation of
    the particles being sensed to effect a typing operation in response to the
    sensing.

    MARGIN

    The distance from an edge of the record-medium* to the closest character*
    symbol of a print-line* to that edge.  The term is most usually used when a
    plurality of print-lines are typed and the first imprinted characters of
    each of the print-lines are all equally spaced from the edge.  When typing
    any language that is read from left to right, the left margin is the
    distance from the left edge to these first characters and will usually be
    parallel to that edge, whereas the right margin is the distance of the
    right edge to the last characters of the successive print-lines.  However,
    because the number of characters in a print-line is subject to chance, the
    right margin will usually not be equally spaced from the right edge unless
    "justification" is performed.  For a discussion of justification, see (1)
    Note to the definition of subclass 1 below.

    MARGIN-STOP

    A member that is used to stop the movement of a carriage* when the carriage
    reaches the margin* of the record-medium*.  The margin-stop of a platen*
    carriage (see the definition of carriage in this Glossary) is usually
    mounted on the platen carriage for movement therewith and cooperates with a
    stop fixed to the frame of the typewriter, whereas the margin-stop of a
    "typehead-carriage" (see the definition of carriage in this Glossary) is
    usually mounted on the frame of the typewriter and cooperates with a stop
    mounted on the type-head carriage for movement therewith, but in either
    typewriter one margin-stop may be set for various margin distances for the
    left margin and another margin-stop may be set for various margin distances
    for the right margin.

    PAGE

    A unit of printed text corresponding to that which would appear on one leaf
    or sheet of a book, newspaper, or document. It usually refers to a sheet of
    text, but in the instance where text is imprinted on a web (i.e., of
    indeterminate-length material), it refers to that length of web which will
    subsequently be cut to form a sheet of determinate length.

    PAPER-FINGER

    A member that is in substantial contact with a platen* or with a
    record-medium* that is supported or backed by the platen, which member
    thereby ensures contact of a record-medium with the platen.  It is usually
    an elongated element, and in those typewriters wherein the platen is
    cylindrical the paper-finger is arcuate and conforms to the periphery of
    the platen for a substantial length of the paper-finger in order to hold
    the record-medium to the platen.

    PAWL

    A movable member having a protruding portion that engages a notch between
    two adjacent teeth of a ratchet* to cause or enable intermittent movement
    of the ratchet.  The movement of a pawl is usually two-way, that is,
    oscillation or reciprocation, and the protruding portion of the pawl
    engages a notch between two adjacent teeth of the ratchet and moves
    relative to the ratchet over or around one of the teeth to engage a notch
    between the next two adjacent teeth.  In one form of pawl and ratchet
    mechanism, the pawl is driven while engaged in a notch between the teeth to
    thereby drive the ratchet, and then is retracted to reengage a notch
    between the next teeth.  In another form of pawl and ratchet mechanism, the
    ratchet is urged to be moved, but its movement is restrained by the pawl;
    movement of the pawl momentarily releases the ratchet for movement of the
    ratchet, and return of the pawl to a notch between the next teeth again
    restrains the ratchet.  In either mechanism a plurality of pawls, or a pawl
    with a plurality of protruding portions may be used alternately.

    PITCH

    The term "pitch" in the typewriter art derives from its usage in mechanics
    or machinery, where it refers to the distance between two things in series,
    e.g., two adjacent threads of a screw or two adjacent teeth of a toothed
    wheel or rack, etc.  As used in the typewriter art, "pitch" refers to a
    line-space* distance or to a character-space* distance, as such distances
    are caused by mechanical elements in the typewriter.  Some typewriters are
    capable of imprinting different character* sizes due to easily replaceable
    type-head* elements.  In order to maintain a proper or pleasing appearance
    to the type text, it is necessary, when such a change in character size is
    made, also to change the character-space and line-space distances in proper
    proportion to that of the character size.  Such a typewriter is therefore
    also capable of having the pitch changed when character size is changed.

    PLATEN

    An element that serves as a support or backing for a record-medium* while a
    type-member* is impressed against the record-medium and thereby prevents
    movement of the record-medium during impression; or an element that serves
    as a support or backing for a record-medium and also moves the
    record-medium toward the type-member for impression of the type-member
    against the record-medium.  Although from the derivation of the word
    "platen" it should comprise a flat or planar plate, in the typewriter art
    it is not so limited.  In most typewriters the platen is a cylinder having
    a generally smooth surface, and the record-medium is partially wrapped
    around the periphery of the cylinder.  In use the cylinder is rotated until
    the location of the record-medium corresponds to the desired location of
    the print-line* to be imprinted thereon, and after the desired line has
    been imprinted, the cylinder is rotated an increment corresponding to a
    desired line-space*, thereby moving the record-medium.  Some typewriters do
    include a flat platen, which may be a plate having dimensions corresponding
    to the record-medium (i.e., sheet), or may be a bar platen having
    dimensions corresponding to the height of a character* and the length of a
    print-line, or may be an anvil having dimensions corresponding to the
    height and width of a single character.

    PRINT-LINE

    A single row of imprinted, spaced character* symbols and word* groups that
    is part of the text being typed.  It is usually a straight row, but
    particular characters of the line may be offset therefrom, as, for example,
    to imprint subscript (i.e., slightly below the line) or superscript (i.e.,
    slightly above the line), or to imprint a mathematical or chemical formula
    without negating its characteristics as a line.  It is usually formed and
    read across a page, either from left to right as in European languages, or
    from right to left, as in Semitic languages, but may also be formed and
    read parallel to one of the side margins* of a page* (i.e., "up" or
    "down"), as in some Oriental languages.

    PRINT-POINT

    Print-point is the typewriter industry term for the area or spot on the
    record-medium* that a type-member* is impressed against to imprint a
    character* on the record-medium. The print-point may be fixed or movable
    relative to a typewriter main frame as discussed in the definition of
    carriage* in this Glossary.

    PROGRAMMED-CONTROL-SYSTEM

    Means for regulating the operation of a typewriter to perform a
    predetermined sequence of operations for typing, which means include a set
    of instructions which may be replaced or modified at will, to which
    instructions the typewriter mechanism responds by performing the sequence
    of operations.  The instructions may be in the form of a tangible article
    such as a tape or card or disc with visible or invisible indicia thereon,
    or may be in the form of an intangible "computer program" including a
    "memory" and related circuitry, but in any event, must be related to the
    operation of a typewriter to be considered for this class.

    RATCHET

    A movable member having teeth thereon and at least one notch between the
    teeth, which notch is engaged by a protruding portion of a pawl* to cause
    or enable intermittent movement of the ratchet.  The manner in which a pawl
    and ratchet mechanism is used in a typewriter is discussed under the
    definition of pawl in this Glossary, section III.  Ratchet teeth may be
    part of a "ratchet wheel" or of a "ratchet rack", and the action of the
    pawl is similar in both instances.  However, since a ratchet wheel is
    circular, its motion will be a one-way rotational intermittent motion; and
    since a ratchet rack is linear, its motion will be a one-way rectilinear
    intermittent motion.

    RECORD-MEDIUM

    A piece of material, usually paper but not limited to paper, on which
    material is recorded an imprint of a type-member* that is impressed against
    the material to form a character* to be read.  The material may be a
    relatively thin "sheet" having a determinate width and a determinate
    length, or may be a "web" having a determinate width and an indeterminate
    length.  The recording is usually by way of an ink* that coats the material
    in the form of a line representing a character; but other kinds of
    recording may be done, as, for example, embossing, which deforms the
    surface of the material to raise or lower the surface into a line
    representing the character, or perforating, which punches a plurality of
    holes in the material that taken together form a representation of a
    character.

    RIBBON

    A piece of elongated and relatively thin transfer-medium* material
    impregnated with, or carrying, ink* that is to be applied to a
    record-medium*, which material is interposed between the record-medium and
    a type-face* that is at the print-point*. When the type-face is impressed
    against the record-medium (with the ribbon therebetween) a portion of the
    ink on the ribbon will be transferred to the record-medium to form a
    readable character* symbol corresponding to the symbol on the type-face
    that was impressed against the record-medium.  Although in most typewriters
    the ribbon is an elongated relatively narrow strip of material, these
    dimensions are not critical in its usage as a ribbon.  (For example, a
    ribbon may be narrow and sufficiently short to be held in the hand of a
    typist while being temporarily positioned adjacent to the print-point, or a
    ribbon may be elongated and as wide as the record-medium to be typed on.)
    What is critical in its usage as a ribbon for making an original copy is
    (a) its location directly between the record-medium and the type-face that
    is at the print-point, and (b) the use of a "permanent" or not easily
    erasable ink; the combination forms an original copy of the typed text, in
    contrast to a carbon copy. (See the definitions of transfer-medium and ink
    in this Glossary for a discussion of carbon copy).

    Among the various forms of ribbon used in a typewriter are:

    (a)     a fabric ribbon coated or impregnated with "permanent" ink, the
    ribbon being reusable many times or until the ink therein is depleted, and
    producing an original copy;

    (b)     a carbon-ink ribbon coated with permanent ink, the ribbon being
    usually a single-use ribbon due to the operation wherein all or most of the
    coating is deposited on the record-medium during the impact of a type-face
    thereagainst, and producing an original copy (see the definition of
    transfer-medium in this Glossary, section III, for a discussion of the
    difference between the permanent ink used in a carbon-ink ribbon, and the
    carbon coating of a "carbon-paper" transfer-medium);

    (c)     a "hectographic" ribbon that uses a soluble ink and produces a
    "master" plate subsequently used in a spirit duplicating copy process;

    (d)     a carbon-paper ribbon coated with a substance containing carbon or
    other pigment to produce a carbon copy that is easily erasable;

    (e)     a "correction" ribbon that is used to correct an error in typing as
    discussed in the definition of subclass 697 below.

    It should be noted that in early typewriter technology the term "ribbon"
    usually referred only to a fabric ribbon mentioned above; therefore, unless
    a disclosure particularly describes a ribbon by an intended function or
    specific coating, it should be assumed that a fabric ribbon is disclosed.

    SPACE-BAR

    An element on a typewriter, located on a keyboard*, which element is
    pressed to cause a carriage-feed movement of the carriage* without an
    imprint of a character*, thereby to separate one word* from another word on
    a print-line*.

    TAB

    A tab is an abbreviated form of the term "tabular", which term refers to a
    columnar arrangement of character* symbols on a page* of text.  A "column"
    of text is formed by imprinting a particular symbol on one print-line* and
    subsequently imprinting the same or another particular symbol on another
    print-line directly below the first print-line (i.e., equally spaced from
    one of the side edges of the record-medium*), and repeating the typing
    until a plurality of print-lines have been formed, all of which are in
    vertical array.  The particular symbol may be the first letter of the first
    word* in each of the successively imprinted print-lines, and two or more
    columns are usually arranged in such a "column-set" arrangement, each of
    the columns being arrayed at a preset distance from an edge of the
    record-medium. The particular symbol may be the decimal point or the
    "units" digit of a set of numeral digits representing a number; this
    arrangement is termed "denominational". The terms "column" and "tabular"
    are also discussed in (1) Note and (2) Note to subclass 284, the term
    "denominational" is also discussed in (1) Note to subclass 285, and the
    term column set is discussed in (3) Note to subclass 284 and defined in
    subclass 285.1.  It should also be noted that, in some disclosures, the
    term "tab" has been used as an abbreviation of an element which is better
    known as a "tab-stop" element and is discussed in this Glossary under
    tab-rack*.

    TAB-RACK

    A component of the carriage* mechanism that causes stopping of the carriage
    in any of selected tabular (see tab* in this Glossary) positions.  A
    tab-rack is an elongated member extending parallel to the direction of
    carriage movement and having a length substantially the same as the extent
    of carriage movement.  On the tab-rack a plurality of "tab-stop" elements
    are mounted, each of said elements being movable transversely of the length
    of the tab-rack form a "clear" position at which the element is passive to
    a "set" position at which the element is able to cooperate with a
    "counter-stop" element.  In operation, relative movement between the
    tab-rack and the counter stop is effected in the lengthwise direction of
    the tab-rack until a set tab stop abuts against the counter stop.  Usually
    the tab-rack is connected to the carriage and its tab stop abuts a
    stationary counter stop, thereby stopping the carriage.  The same result
    may be achieved by mounting the counter stop on the carriage and abutting
    the counter stop against a set tab stop on a stationary tab-rack, thereby
    stopping the carriage.  A plurality of counter stops may be provided, one
    of which counter stops may be set to stop the carriage in a preset column
    or denominational position.  A typewriter capable of tabular operation is
    provided with at least three key* elements for regulating the operation.
    One of the keys, labelled "set" (or a variant thereof) is depressed by the
    typist to move a selected tab-stop element from its passive position to its
    set position on the tab-rack. Another key, labelled "tab" (or a variant
    thereof), or unlabeled but having a distinctive shape, is depressed by the
    typist to concurrently (a) release the carriage from its normal
    carriage-feed mechanism to enable unrestrained movement of the carriage,
    and (b) set a counter stop into a position where it will abut against the
    set tab stop when the counter stop and tab stop engage one another, whereby
    the movement of the carriage will be stopped in the tabular position.  A
    third key, labelled "clear" (or a variant thereof), is depressed by the
    typist to move any of the previously set tab stops back to its passive
    position on the type-rack.

    TOGGLE-LINKAGE

    An assemblage of at least two links, pitmans, bars, or struts and at least
    three pivots, an end of one link being connected to an end of the other
    link by a pivot that is common to both links.  Each of the links also has a
    pivot at the end remote from the common pivot, which common or intermediate
    pivot is movable from a first (or "broken") position at which the common
    pivot is not in line with the other two pivots to a second (or
    "straightened") position at which the common pivot is substantially in line
    with the other two pivots, or which common pivot is movable from said
    second position to said first position.  Such movement is accomplished by a
    force applied to the common pivot in a direction approximately at right
    angles to either link, thereby moving the remote pivots relatively away
    from each other (i.e., when the common pivot moves to the second position)
    or relatively toward each other (i.e., when the common pivot moves to the
    first position).

    TRANSFER-MEDIUM

    A piece of material, relatively thin as compared to its other dimensions,
    and flexible so as to conform to various configurations as required in a
    typewriter, which material is impregnated or coated on one or both of its
    opposite surfaces with a preparation of ink* or gelatin or other
    substance-containing carbon or other pigment that is capable of being
    transplaced from a surface of said material onto a surface of an adjacent
    record-medium*.  Among the various forms of transfer-medium used in a
    typewriter are:

    (a)     a "permanent" ink transfer-medium in the form of an elongated,
    narrow ribbon*, a wide ribbon, a disc, etc., all of which have the property
    that the character* symbol imprinted with the use of this transfer-medium
    is not easily erased, thereby producing an "original copy" text;

    (b)     a "carbon-paper" transfer-medium, so called because one of its
    surfaces is coated with a substance containing carbon or other pigment
    having the property that the character imprinted with this transfer-medium
    is easily erased, thereby producing a "carbon copy" text;

    (c)     a "hectographic" ink transfer-medium, using an ink that is soluble
    in a particular solvent and is used to form a "master" plate that is
    subsequently used in a "spirit duplicating" copying process, and

    (d)     a "correction" transfer-medium that is coated with a substance
    containing a pigment of the same color as that of the record-medium, and is
    used to correct an error in typing (as discussed in the definition of
    subclass 697 below).

    TYPE-BAR

    An elongated member having at one end a type-member* (i.e., a type-die* or
    a type-face*) element and at its other end a connection to one or more key*
    elements. In most manual type-writers, the number of type-bars corresponds
    to the number of keys provided, and the type-bars are pivoted to a
    type-bar-segment* so that the various type-faces are all impressed at
    approximately the same print-point*, but many variations of the
    construction are to be found.  The type-bars may be pivoted to individual
    linkages, or may be slidable to print position.  In some typewriters a
    single key may actuate a plurality of type-bars; in others, a plurality of
    keys may be depressed simultaneously to actuate a single type-bar; and in
    others (e.g., stenographic typewriters), there may be a plurality of
    character* symbols simultaneously imprinted.

    TYPE-BAR-SEGMENT

    A type-bar-segment is an arcuate member that serves to support all the
    type-bar* members for pivotal motion so that each of the type-member*
    elements carried by the type-bar members will be impressed onto the
    record-medium* at approximately the same print-point*.  In some manual
    typewriters the type-bar-segment is moved to effect case-shift*.  (This
    occurs because the type-member (i.e., type-face* or type-die*) that is at
    the print-point has been moved as a result of moving the type-bar-segment,
    so that an upper-case* or a lower-case* form of character* symbol is
    imprinted on the record-medium according to the choice of the typist.)  The
    difference between a type-bar-segment and a type-face-carrier* (which also
    permits a type-bar to move relative thereto) is that a type-face-carrier
    moves both for selection of a character and for choice of upper-case of
    lower-case, whereas a type-bar-segment moves only for choice of upper-case
    or lower-case.

    TYPE-DIE

    An element that is impressed against a record-medium* to deform or pierce
    the surface of the record-medium into a representation of a character*.  It
    is that portion of a type-member* that projects from the body of the
    type-member and contacts the surface of the record-medium to raise or lower
    the contacted surface relative to the uncontracted surface into a line
    representing a character, or to form one or more perforations in the
    contacted surface, which perforations taken together represent a character.

    TYPE-FACE

    An element that is impressed against a record-medium* to imprint a line
    representing a character*.  It is that portion of a type-member* that
    projects from the body of the type-member, and contacts the surface of the
    record-medium to form the character by ink* applied to the type-face and
    transferred to the record-medium, or by ink applied via an ink ribbon* or
    similar transfer material that lies between the type-face and the surface
    of the record-medium.

    TYPE-FACE-CARRIER

    A type-face-carrier is a mechanism on which is mounted a plurality of
    type-member* elements (i.e., type-face* or type-die*) for movement of any
    one type-member relative to the remainder of the type-members mounted
    thereon.  Usually a group of type-faces comprising a type-set-assemblage*
    is mounted on a type-face-carrier, face-carrier, and the type-face-carrier
    is capable of various kinds of movement.  A typist will select one key*
    element from among the many key elements available, causing the
    type-face-carrier to move to a position at which the selected type-face
    will impact against a record-medium* to imprint the selected character*
    symbol (e.g., a particular letter, or a particular number, etc.) on the
    record-medium.  A typist may choose to effect case-shift* or not effect
    case-shift, thereby to choose from the character symbols available on one
    key element the one symbol (e.g., the upper-case* or the lower-case* form
    of the same letter, etc.) thereby causing the type-face-carrier to move to
    a position at which the chosen type-face will imprint the chosen symbol.
    The mechanism also causes or enables relative movement between the
    type-face and the record-medium (e.g., movement of the type-face toward the
    print-point*) to imprint the selected or the chosen character or symbol on
    the record-medium.  (See this Glossary, section III, under the definitions
    of the terms type-bar-segment* and type-head-carrier* for the differences
    between those mechanisms and a type-face-carrier).

    TYPE-HEAD

    A type-head is an element comprising one or more type-member* elements
    integral one with the other(s).  In most manually powered type-writers a
    type-set-assemblage* is distributed among a plurality of type-heads, each
    of which as two type-face* elements.  Some of these type-heads include a
    type-face for imprinting a particular letter in lower-case* and a type-face
    for imprinting the same letter in upper-case*, the choice being made by a
    case-shift* mechanism.  Other type-heads in these manually powered
    type-writers include a type-face for imprinting a number and a type-face
    for imprinting a symbol (see the definition of character* in this Glossary
    for examples of a symbol), the choice of which is to be imprinted also
    being made by the case-shift mechanism.  In some electrically powered
    typewriters a single type-head includes a complete type-set-assemblage, and
    said type-head is mounted on a type-head-carrier*.  In such typewriters the
    single type-head is moved for selection of the type-face to be imprinted,
    or for the choice of the case to be used.  In the definitions of the
    subclasses that follow, the term "type-head" has usually been reserved for
    the element that includes a type-set-assemblage on an electrically powered
    typewriter, and the element on the type end of a type-bar* has usually been
    referred to as a type-face.

    TYPE-HEAD-CARRIER

    A type-head-carrier is a mechanism on which is mounted at least one
    type-head* that includes a type-set-assemblage* (e.g., a group of
    type-face* elements) thereon for movement of the type-head relative to the
    type-head-carrier.  Usually a type-head-carrier and the type-head mounted
    thereon are capable of various kinds of movement.  A typist will select one
    key* element from among the many key elements available, causing the
    type-head to move (e.g., by oscillating and/or tilting) to a position at
    which the selected type-face will impact against a record-medium* to
    imprint the selected character* symbol (e.g., a particular letter, or a
    particular number, etc.) on the record-medium.  A typist may choose to
    effect case-shift* or not effect case-shift, thereby to choose from the
    character symbols available on one key element the one symbol (e.g., the
    upper-case* or the lower-case* form of the same letter, etc.) that is to be
    imprinted, thereby causing the type-head to move to a position at which the
    chosen type-face will imprint the chosen symbol.  The mechanism also causes
    or enables movement of the type-head (i.e., by movement of the
    type-head-carrier) between the type-face and the record-medium (e.g.,
    movement of the type-face toward the print-point*) to imprint the selected
    or the chosen character or symbol on the record-medium. The difference
    between a type-head-carrier and a type-face-carrier* (which also carries a
    type-set-assemblage that moves both for selection of a character and for
    choice of upper-case or lower-case) is that a type-face-carrier supports
    individually movable type-face elements, whereas a type-head-carrier
    supports a type-head wherein all the type-face elements are integral
    therewith.

    In some typewriters that use a type-head-carrier a single type-head
    includes a complete type-set-assemblage, and this type-head may be removed
    from its carrier and be replaced with a different type-head having a
    different font* (e.g., the style, character size, alphabet, or symbols that
    the typewriter can produce). In some typewriters that use a
    type-head-carrier plural type-heads may be provided, each including a
    complete type-set-assemblage (e.g., in different fonts, etc.) or each
    including only part of a complete type-set-assemblage (e.g., one-half of an
    assemblage on one type-head and the other half of that assemblage on the
    other type-head).

    TYPE-MEMBER

    An element having on a surface thereof a type-die* or a type-face* which is
    impressed against a record-medium* to imprint a character* in or on the
    surface of the record-medium.  In most typewriters there is only one
    type-member corresponding to each character* that is to be typed, and the
    user of the typewriter selects from the assortment of type-members provided
    in the apparatus one type-member at a time to be imprinted, and serially
    imprints the selected type-members to form the characters representing the
    text to be typed.

    TYPE-SET-ASSEMBLAGE

    A group of type-face* elements including a multiplicity of type-faces for
    imprinting the different character* symbols that a typewriter is capable of
    imprinting in the same font* of type.  In many typewriters a
    type-set-assemblage is carried on a plurality of type-bar* members that
    include all the type-faces that the typewriter can imprint, either in
    upper-case* or in lower-case*, or in the various character symbols.  In
    other typewriters a single type-head* includes all type-faces that the
    typewriter can imprint in the same font, and that type-head can be removed
    from the typewriter to be replaced by a type-head for another
    type-set-assemblage of a different font.  In still other typewriters two or
    more type-heads are provided to comprise one type-set-assemblage, or to
    comprise two or more type-set-assemblages in different fonts.

    TYPEWRITER-ACTUATED-CONTROL

    Typewriter-actuated-control is intended to refer to a mechanism wherein a
    first part of a typewriter moves to accomplish its intended first-part
    function, and during said movement the first part engages a second part to
    move the second part, thereby accomplishing a second function as the second
    part is moved.  A simple example of a typewriter-actuated-control exists in
    the instance of a typewriter wherein the ribbon* vibrator has means for
    opening the guide means of the vibrator for the purpose of facilitating
    insertion of a new ribbon. When the vibrator is next lifted or raised to
    enable the ribbon to cover the print-point* to imprint the next character*,
    the upward movement of the vibrator for typing causes engagement of
    elements that "automatically" causes closing of the vibrator guide to its
    normal position without special intervention of the typist to accomplish
    the guide-closing function.

    UNIVERSAL-BAR

    A member that is part of a drive train of a typewriter, which member is
    driven by any of a multiplicity of elements and which member serves to
    drive any of a different multiplicity of elements.  A universal-bar may be
    driven, for example, by a space-bar*, or by a character* key* element that
    causes imprint of a character and also drives the universal-bar either
    directly or via a type-bar* member or associated linkage.  The
    universal-bar may then serve to drive a carriage-feed mechanism or a
    ribbon-feed mechanism or a character-counter mechanism or all these
    exemplary mechanisms concurrently.

    UPPER-CASE

    A capital letter, similar in appearance to this text,

    as opposed to lower-case*.  The derivation of the terms upper-case* and
    lower-case is discussed in the definition of lower-case in this Glossary.
    See the definitions of character* and case-shift* in this Glossary for the
    forms of symbols that are imprinted when the case-shift mechanism is in the
    upper-case mode.

    VIBRATOR

    Vibrator is the typewriter industry term for an element or an assemblage of
    elements that (a) guides a ribbon* or constrains the ribbon for movement
    along its elongated dimension, and (b) is located on the typewriter
    adjacent to the print-point*, and (c) moves at least a portion of the
    ribbon that is so guided transversely to its elongated dimension from a
    first position adjacent to but not covering the print-point to a second
    position covering the print-point.  The first position is a normal, or
    "rest" position that permits the print-line* to be seen by a typist, and
    the second position places the ribbon over the print-point so that a
    type-face* will be impressed against the ribbon to imprint a character* on
    a record-medium*.  The vibrator movement may be controlled so as to move
    different zones of the ribbon to the print-point, each of which zones
    extends longitudinally and is spaced transversely to the others, whereby
    different colored characters may be imprinted.

    WORD

    For purposes of this class, a word is one or more imprinted character*
    symbols that are grouped together and separated from other groups of
    characters to convey intelligence or information to a reader.  Usually a
    word consists of one or more letter characters that taken together as a
    group may also be spoken by people of a national or ethnic folk, but
    especially for purposes of this class, a word may consist of more number
    characters as well as letter characters, the words then conveying
    information in a cryptographic "language".

    WORD-SPACE

    The distance that separates the last character* of one word* of imprinted
    text from the first character of a subsequent word of the same text on the
    same line of text.

    IV.     RELATIONSHIP TO SPECIFIC CLASSES

    (1)     Note.  The relationship of this class (400) to classes which
    warrant specific mention is as follows:



    101,    Printing, involves the imprinting on a record-medium* of a
    multitude of character symbols simultaneously to form a print-line* or a
    page* or a plurality of pages of printed text.  The significant difference
    between this class (400) and Class 101 lies in the term "simultaneously".
    In Class 101 plurality of type-face* elements are assembled.  If a
    plurality of occurrences of a particular character are to be printed, a
    corresponding number of type-faces representing that character are included
    in the assemblage.  When the entire assemblage of type-faces is inked and
    impressed against a record-medium, all the type-faces will be imprinted
    simultaneously.  In this class (400) only one type-face element is provided
    for each character to be imprinted, and the type-faces are impressed in
    sequence to form the text.  Two exceptions should be noted.  In a
    stenographic typewriter, the typist may select two or more characters to be
    imprinted to form a syllable of a word, and may then select two or more
    characters to form another syllable of a word.  One or more of the
    characters selected for one syllable may be selected again to form another
    syllable, but only one type-face for each character to be imprinted is
    provided in the stenographic typewriter.  In a logotype typewriter a
    plurality of type-face elements may be preassembled to form a word or
    symbol, but the logotype type-face is one of the type-face elements of the
    typewriter, and the logotype type-face element is selected as one of the
    type-face elements in the sequence of characters to be imprinted serially.
    Various subcombinations of elements are usable either in a Class 101
    printing press or in a typewriter of this class (400).  Among such
    subcombinations are a ribbon-feeding or ribbon-inking mechanism, a
    record-medium feeding mechanism, etc., but the placement of a patent to
    such subcombination will be governed by the environment of the machine.

    178,    Telegraphy, includes in subclasses 4 and 23 disclosures of printing
    telegraph systems that are similar in some aspects to a typewriter. In
    general, Class 178 involves a telegraphic system including one or more
    signal-sending units, one or more signal-receiving units, and electrical
    circuitry, the system being capable of (a) transmitting a signal over great
    distances, or (b) boosting or amplifying the signal, or (c) mixing signals
    that have been generated in a plurality of sending units, transmitting the
    mixed signals over a single line and unmixing the signals at a plurality of
    receiving units so that each receiver will transcribe only its own signal
    from the single line, or (d) selecting the receiving units that will be
    controlled by the sending units. Class 178 also provides, in various
    subclasses, for subcombinations including key-board*, key* element, type
    wheel, and other elements that are peculiar to printing telegraph systems.
    This class (400) as related to Class 178, involves a typewriter that is (a)
    directly coupled to a second typewriter by electrical or mechanical linkage
    over a short distance (e.g., "master-slave" relationship), or (b) coupled
    by way of a "storage" or "memory" circuit to itself or to a second
    typewriter (e.g., "input-output" relationship), or (c) controlled to modify
    the typing signals generated by a typist to create a text different from
    that which would be produced by the unmodified generated signals (e.g., by
    "justification" (see subclass 1).  This class (400) will also accept
    subcombinational aspects of a telegraphic printer that embody typewriter
    subcombinations not provided for in Class 178.  Examples of such
    subcombinations include:  ribbon* feed, carriage* feed, record-medium feed,
    type-head* structure, key-board mechanism, type-bar* action, tabulator
    structure, etc.

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), the relationship of this class
    (400) to Class 234 is fully set forth in the class definition of Class 234,
    in section V, paragraph E.  Reference is made to the relationship between
    Class 234 and Class 400, Typewriting Machines, in that note.

    235,    Registers, the relationship of this class (400) to Class 235 is set
    forth in the "SEARCH CLASS" 400, Typewriting Machines, that appears under
    the definition of Class 235, subclass 60.

    346,    Recorders, provides for an ink* jet means for recording
    intelligence.  This class (400) provides for a typewriter structure in
    which the usual type-face* element that impresses a character symbol
    against a record-medium is replaced by an ink jet for imprinting a
    character symbol on a record-medium.  To be placed as an original into this
    class, a patent should clearly recite the typewriter structure that
    controls the ink jet to form characters successively.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, includes in subclasses
    101+ disclosures involving a data-processing system that generates a
    printout of the results produced by the processing system.  The significant
    subject matter of such a system that is proper for Class 395 is in the
    processing of data within the system, and the printer associated with said
    system is disclosed to provide the environment for said processing and is
    for the purpose of recording data of said processing in its "raw" or
    unmodified form.  The environment may include details of the printing
    member such as a print hammer or print head, a platen*, a line advance,
    etc., if the environment is passive or recited by name only.



    V.      SEARCH NOTES TO OTHER CLASSES INCLUDING MATERIAL HANDLING OR
    MATERIAL FEEDING

    (1)     Note.  The following classes include subcombinations that may be
    included in a typewriter to feed a record-medium* or a ribbon* or other
    sheetlike or weblike material.  For a patent to be placed as an original
    into this class (400) the claimed subject matter of such patent should be
    clearly related to a typewriter (e.g., be directed to one or more
    ink*-ribbon spools in a typewriter, sheet, or web feeding involving
    line-space* distances or format control in a typewriter, etc.).


    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 341 for a copyholder
    that is not part of a typewriter, but which may be used in conjunction with
    a typewriter for advancing material that may be copied from during typing.

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, appropriate subclasses for
    a support for sheet or web material.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses and especially subclass
    33 for dispensing of a sheetlike article.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for feeding of web material.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding appropriate subclasses for the
    winding of web material onto a roll or the unwinding of web  material from
    a roll.

    248,    Supports, subclass 442.2 for a support for a copyholder.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclass 8 for appropriate
    sheet-feeding structure.

    281,    Books, Strips, and Leaves, subclass 45 for a book or leaf holder.

    462,    Books, Strips, and Leaves for Manifolding, appropriate subclasses
    and especially subclass 73 for the holding and formation of books, strips
    and leaves for manifolding.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 411, 413, 430, 433, and 451 for the folding
    of zigzag or fan folded material.

    VI.     SEARCH NOTES TO OTHER CLASSES INCLUDING SUBCOMBINATIONS USABLE IN A
    TYPEWRITER

    (1)     Note.  The following classes include subcombinations that may be
    included in a typewriter for various purposes needed during the operation
    of a typewriter.  For a patent to be placed as an original into this class
    (400) the claimed subject matter of such patent should be clearly related
    to a typewriter (e.g., be directed to a device for cleaning a type-face* of
    a typewriter, a bell for indicating the occurrence of the end of a
    print-line* in a typewriter, etc.).

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 246 include an
    attachment for cleaning.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses for a linkage
    that is usable as an actuating mechanism of a typewriter.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 148 and 200 for an indicator or
    a bell.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 200 for coating apparatus applicable to
    a typewriter to re-ink a ribbon*.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for dispensing of liquid.

    276,    Typesetting, subclass 28 for justification in a type setting
    machine.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    838+ for a  reflector usable in a typewriter.

    384,    Bearings, appropriate subclasses for guide structure usable in a
    typewriter.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 176, 202, and 227 for a
    key-board* for teaching or learning purposes.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for,
    especially subclasses 49+ for concentric layered annular roll structure and
    subclasses 57+ for single annular member roll structure.


CLS 400/1
TXT INCLUDING JUSTIFICATION OR QUADDING OF PRINT-LINE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein more than one print-line*
    of character* symbols is imprinted on a record-medium* to form a page* of
    text, and wherein significance is attributed to the typing operation known
    as "justification" as that term is discussed and defined in (1) Note below,
    or significance is attributed to the typing operation known as "quadding"
    as that term is discussed and defined in (2) Note below, either operation
    modifying the print-lines of a page of text.

    (1)     Note.  When typing in a language that is read from left to right, a
    typist can predetermine the left margin (i.e., the distance from the left
    edge of the record-medium to the first character of the print-line).  The
    right margin (i.e., the distance from the right edge of the record-medium
    to the last character of the print-line) is subject to chance and depends
    on the number of character symbols and word* groups in the print-line;
    therefore, the right margin will usually not be even. "Justification"
    corrects the uneven right margin by expanding or contracting the print-line
    as necessary to make all the print-lines of uniform length.  Justification
    is usually accomplished by typing a rough draft to form a print-line that
    ends within a "justification zone" and then retyping with the addition or
    subtraction of "unit" spaces to or from the character-space* or word-space*
    distances on the print-line.  The characters and spaces in a print-line may
    be stored in a justification circuit which may include a "memory" and
    circuitry to modify the memory by the addition or subtraction of unit
    spaces described above to expand or contract the print-line.  Justification
    may also be accomplished by typing on a stretchable record-medium as
    described in subclass 14 below.

    (2)     Note.  The term "quadding" is derived from the printing and type
    setting arts, where the word "quad" refers to a piece of metal that is of
    less height than a type-face* and is used to form a blank space in the
    printed line.  By introducing quads in sufficient numbers and appropriate
    positions, a printed line could be printed as "quad right" (i.e., the last
    character of successively printed lines uniformly spaced from the right
    edge of a page) or printed as "quad left" (i.e., the first character of
    successively printed lines uniformly spaced from the left edge of a page)
    or printed as "quad center" (i.e., the first and the last character of the
    same printed line equally spaced from the left and the right edge of the
    page, respectively). A similar appearance of text and successively
    imprinted print-lines can be accomplished on a typewriter by quadding to
    control the location of the first or the last character (or both of said
    characters) of a print-line. In addition, the quadded print-lines may also
    be expanded or contracted in an operation similar to justification
    [described in (1) Note above], so that the text that has been subjected to
    a quadding operation will also appear to be justified.


CLS 400/2
TXT Including quadding of print-line:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein more than one print-line* of
    character* symbols is imprinted on a record-medium* on a page* of text, and
    wherein significance is attributed to the typing operation known as
    "quadding" as that term is discussed and defined in (2) Note of subclass 1
    above.


CLS 400/3
TXT By programmed-control-system:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein significance is attributed to the
    typing operation known as "justification" as that term is discussed and
    defined in (1) Note of subclass 1 above, and wherein the justification is
    accomplished by way of a programmed-control-system*.

    (1)     Note.  The programmed-control-system is not particularly described
    in the patents of this subclass (3), but rather is referred to as a
    "register" of a "memory" that is modified, or a variant of such
    terminology.  However, it is clearly described as a means for modifying the
    operation of a typewriter to produce a justified print-line*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, and see (1) Note,
    section IV, of the Class Definition of this class (400).


CLS 400/4
TXT On auxiliary-record-program (e.g., tape, card, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 3 wherein the programmed-control-system*
    includes a set of instructions that may be readily removed from the
    typewriter so that another set of instructions may be inserted into the
    typewriter to perform a different or modified sequence of justifying
    operations.


CLS 400/5
TXT Magnetic record:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 wherein an auxiliary-record-program*
    includes or contains ferrous particles capable of being oriented or
    reoriented relative to the auxiliary-record-program, the orientation of the
    particles being sensed to effect the control of the typewriter or the
    justification of a print-line* typed thereby.


CLS 400/6
TXT With error-correcting storage register:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 wherein the programmed-control-system*
    includes a "memory" circuit and means for amending or modifying the program
    in the event that a typist has made a mistake in the typed text or in the
    justification thereof so that the text may be retyped with the mistake
    rectified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for error detection and correction of a program for selection of
    type-face* elements.


CLS 400/7
TXT Including artificial or end-of-line hyphen:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 wherein the auxiliary-record-program*
    includes provision of determining if and where a "hyphen" will be imprinted
    at the end of a print-line* and provision for inserting the hyphen properly.

    (1)     Note.  A hyphen is a punctuation mark comprising a short line used
    to indicate the end of a syllable in a word* which has been divided so that
    one or more syllables of that word appear on one print-line and the
    remainder of the syllables of that word appear on a succeeding print-line.


CLS 400/8
TXT By using "no-print" device:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein significance is attributed to the
    typing operation known as "justification" as that term is discussed and
    defined in (1) Note to subclass 1 above, and wherein the justification is
    accomplished with the use of a means for not printing or suppressing the
    imprinting of one or more character* symbols of a print-line*.


CLS 400/9
TXT By interword or intercharacter spacing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein significance is attributed to the
    typing operation known as "justification" as that term is discussed and
    defined in (1) Note of subclass 1 above, and wherein the justification is
    accomplished by adding to or subtracting from the character-space* or the
    word-space* distances in a print-line*.


CLS 400/10
TXT Variable carriage-feed mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein the character-space* or the
    word-space* distances are varied for justification by moving the carriage*
    in irregular or unequal increments of movement.

    (1)     Note. The variable carriage-feed mechanism that may be used for the
    typewriter of this subclass is of the kind that, per se, is found in
    subclass 303.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    303,    and see (1) Note above.


CLS 400/11
TXT Carriage slidable relative to its carriage-rack:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein the typewriter is provided with a
    carriage* that is attached to a tab-rack* that enables the carriage to be
    moved in a character-space direction and wherein the character-space or the
    word-space* distances are varied for justification by moving the carriage
    along the tab-rack in varying or irregular increments required for
    justification.

    (1)     Note.  A fuller explanation of the relationship between the various
    elements of a carriage-feed mechanism will be found in the definitions of
    tab-rack and the various definitions of subclasses indented under 283.


CLS 400/12
TXT By interword spacing only:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein the justification is accomplished
    by adding to or subtracting from the word-space* distances in a print-line*.


CLS 400/13
TXT Including plural space-bars for different spacings:

    Subject matter under subclass 12 wherein the typewriter is provided with
    two or more space-bar* elements on the key-board* of the typewriter, each
    of which space-bar* elements will effect a word-space* distance different
    than the other(s), and wherein justification is accomplished by using one
    or another of the space-bars during the imprinting of the print-line*
    according to what distances are needed to justify the print-line.


CLS 400/14
TXT By typing line on stretchable medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein significance is attributed to the
    typing operation known as "justification" as that term is discussed and
    defined in (1) Note to subclass 1 above, and wherein the justification is
    accomplished by typing print-line* of character* symbols on a material that
    is capable of being elongated.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass justification is accomplished by typing a
    print-line on a stretchable ribbon* to an extent less than that of the
    desired print-line, and subsequently adhering either the ribbon or the
    characters* that have been imprinted on the ribbon to the record-medium*.


CLS 400/15
TXT Including justification indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein significance is attributed to the
    typing operation known as "justification" as that term is discussed and
    defined in (1) Note to subclass 1 above, and wherein the typewriter is
    provided with means for helping the typist to know the need for
    justification or the number of character-space* distances required for
    justification.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    703,    for other indicator means.


CLS 400/16
TXT FOR TYPING OR FORMING CONTINUOUS OR DISCONTINUOUS LINE (E.G., BY "LINER"):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein significance is
    attributed to a typewriter capable of producing a mark on a record-medium*,
    which mark is long in proportion to its breadth.

    (1)     Note.  The mark may be formed by a penlike instrument that applies
    ink* to the record-medium in a continuous stroke or movement of the
    instrument relative to the record-medium (e.g., by moving the record-medium
    with respect to a stationary pen), or may be formed by impacting the
    record-medium with a succession of short marks (e.g., each produced by a
    dash) that overlap to form a continuous line, or the marks may be
    separated, but taken as a whole form a dotted line or a dashed line.


CLS 400/17
TXT Including programmed-control-system:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 wherein a programmed-control-system* is
    used for giving instructions to which the typewriter responds by forming
    said mark (e.g., a line) in the record-medium*.


CLS 400/18
TXT By scriber (e.g., pen, pencil, etc.) or  with scriber guide:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 wherein said mark is formed or produced by
    contacting the record-medium* with an instrumentality that is provided with
    ink*, pigment, or coating material that is visible to the eye, and by
    moving the record-medium, or the instrumentality while the record-medium is
    coated on the record-medium, or wherein said mark is formed or produced by
    such an instrumentality with the help of a device, which device is used by
    an operator to direct the course or path of the instrumentality while in
    contact with the record-medium.

    (1)     Note.  In this and the indented subclasses, the scriber is
    disclosed as an addition to a usual or standard typewriter.


CLS 400/19
TXT For writing in script:

    Subject matter under subclass 18 wherein the instrumentality is moved
    relative to the record-medium* in a path that forms cursive letters (i.e.,
    joined together in flowing strokes as formed in handwriting).


CLS 400/20
TXT Rotatable disc scriber:

    Subject matter under subclass 18 wherein the instrumentality is a plate
    turned on an axis and having a thin peripheral edge that is coated with
    ink* that is transferred to the record-medium* as the plate is turned while
    the edge is in contact with the record-medium and while relative movement
    between the plate axis and the record-medium occurs.


CLS 400/21
TXT Responsive to carriage movement:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 wherein the typewriter is provided with a
    carriage* that carries a platen* that supports the record-medium*, which
    carriage is movable in a direction parallel to a print-line*, and wherein
    said mark is formed as a result of the carriage being moved while a marking
    instrument or device is brought into contact with the record-medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    299,    for a similar structure that imprints a succession of the same
    character* symbol.


CLS 400/22
TXT Underscoring concurrently with character imprinting:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 wherein the typewriter is provided with
    type-face* elements that are selectively impressed against the
    record-medium* to imprint character* symbols on the record-medium, and
    wherein a mark is imprinted at the same time that a character is imprinted,
    the mark being a short line that is imprinted underneath any of the
    selected characters.


CLS 400/23
TXT FOR TYPING ON FLAT RECORD-MEDIUM OR AGAINST FLAT PLATEN:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the significance is
    attributed to a typewriter in which the record-medium* that is being typed
    on is planar or in which the record-medium is backed by a platen* that is
    planar.

    (1)     Note.  In the definition of the term platen in the Glossary,
    section III, there is a discussion of some of the various forms of platen.
    Included therein is a discussion of the difference between a flat or planar
    platen and a cylindrical platen.  This and indented subclasses are the loci
    of disclosures wherein a typewriter is provided with a significant flat or
    planar platen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    648,    for a cylindrical platen in a typewriter.


CLS 400/24
TXT For typing on a book:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein significance is attributed to a
    typewriter particularly intended for typing on a book.

    (1)     Note.  A "book" is an assemblage of pages* or sheets that have been
    fastened or bound together.  One of the characteristics of a book that is
    significant in this subclass or the subclasses indented hereunder is that
    pages are turned to be inverted for recording of information thereon.  As a
    consequence of such use, the number of pages on one side of the binding
    will increase as the number of pages on the other side of the binding
    decreases, resulting in unequal thicknesses of material on each side of the
    binding.


CLS 400/25
TXT Including a type-head (e.g., cylinder,  disc, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 24 wherein the typewriter is provided with a
    type-head* element that carries type-face* elements thereon.

    (1)     Note.  A type-head is distinguished from a type-face* in that a
    type-head carries in one member a complete (or substantially complete)
    type-set-assemblage* that includes many type-faces.


CLS 400/26
TXT Against cylindrical backing:

    Subject matter under subclass 24 wherein the book that is being typed on is
    supported against movement away from the type-face* that is impressed
    against the book, the support being an elongated member that is circular in
    cross section.

    (1)     Note.  The back or supporting is similar in configuration to a
    cylindrical platen*, but the book is not partially wrapped about the platen
    as in the usual typewriter where the record-medium*  encompasses the platen
    through approximately 180o.  In this typewriter, the book is approximately
    tangent to the surface of the cylindrical backing.


CLS 400/27
TXT Including adjustment of typewriter relative to book (e.g., to compensate
    for book thickness):

    Subject matter under subclass 24 wherein significance is attributed to
    modifications made in the position of operating portions of the typewriter
    that are required due to the configuration of the book that is being typed
    on.

    (1)     Note.  See the (1) Note of subclass 24 for one of the
    configurations of a book that requires special adjustments to be made to a
    typewriter to type on a book.


CLS 400/28
TXT Including adjustment of book support relative to typewriter (e.g., for top
    or bottom of book, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 24 wherein significance is attributed to
    modifications made in the position of that portion of a typewriter that
    holds a book in position to be typed on.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also provides for a support that holds a book
    upright so that the top or the bottom of a book may be typed on.


CLS 400/29
TXT For typing on flat blueprint or drawing (e.g., "platenless" typewriter):

    Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein significance is attributed to a
    typewriter in which the record-medium* that is being typed on has length
    and width dimensions that are substantially greater than the corresponding
    dimensions of the typewriter, and wherein the typewriter is moved in
    directions parallel to said dimensions to properly locate the typewriter
    relative to the record-medium.

    (1)     Note.  The term platenless has been ascribed to such a typewriter
    because it does not have a platen* ( in the usual sense of the word)
    connected thereto.  Instead, the drawing board or other large, flat surface
    that ordinarily  supports a blueprint or drawing also supports the
    typewriter, and serves as the platen for this form of typewriter.


CLS 400/30
TXT For typing on carton or package:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein significance is attributed to a
    typewriter in which the record-medium* that is being typed on is a
    three-dimensional object that has flat surfaces defining its sides, and
    wherein either the typewriter or the object may be moved to enable the
    typewriter to type on one of the surfaces.


CLS 400/31
TXT By multidirectional movement of typewriter structure (e.g., "Elliot-Fisher"
    structure):

    Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein significance is attributed to a
    typewriter that is mounted relative to a flat platen* so that the
    typewriter, its key-board*, type-bar* members, and all its operating
    mechanisms move as a unit in the widthwise and lengthwise dimensions of the
    platen.

    (1)     Note.   The term Elliot-Fisher derives from the names of the
    persons to whom the invention and development of this form of typewriter is
    ascribed.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass also includes structure for levelling the
    carriage* frame relative to the flat platen.


CLS 400/32
TXT Bottom-strike typewriter including type-bar action or bar platen or anvil
    platen:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein significance is attributed to a
    typewriter in which type-face* elements impact against a flat platen* from
    underneath the platen, to structure that moves a type-bar* carrying a
    type-face element from its rest position to its impact position, or to a
    bar platen (e.g., a platen having dimensions corresponding to the height of
    a character* and the length of a print-line*), or to an anvil platen (i.e.,
    a platen having dimensions corresponding to the height and width of one
    character).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    408,    for a bottom-strike typewriter and its type-bar action mechanism.


CLS 400/33
TXT Top-strike typewriter including pivoted type-bar:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein significance is attributed to a
    typewriter in which type-face* elements impact against a flat platen* from
    above the platen, and wherein significance is also attributed to structure
    that moves a type-bar* carrying a type-face from its rest position to its
    impact position, the movement being arcuate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    415,    for a top-strike typewriter and its type-bar-action mechanism.


CLS 400/34
TXT Including carriage-return mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein significance is attributed to a
    typewriter in which type-face* elements impact against a flat platen*, and
    wherein significance is also attributed to movement of the carriage* of the
    typewriter in a direction opposite to the character-space* direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    313,    for carriage-return mechanism.


CLS 400/35
TXT Including case-shift by shifting platen:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein significance is attributed to a
    typewriter in which type-face* elements impact against a flat platen*, and
    wherein significance is also attributed to movement of the platen to
    accomplish case-shift* from a lower-case* form of a letter to an
    upper-case* form of that letter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251,    for case-shift mechanism.


CLS 400/36
TXT Including ribbon-feed mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein significance is attributed to a
    typewriter in which type-face* elements impact against a flat platen* at a
    print-point*, and wherein significance is also attributed to mechanism for
    feeding a ribbon* relative to the print-point.

    (1)     Note.  Mechanism for feeding a ribbon is found in subclass 223,
    which subclasses should be searched for ribbon feed, per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223,    and see (1) Note above.


CLS 400/37
TXT For typing on manifold set (e.g., with type-die, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein significance is attributed to a
    typewriter in which type-face* elements or type-die* elements impact
    against a record-medium* that is backed by a flat platen*, and wherein
    significance is also attributed to the use of manifold set that includes
    carbon paper so that the typewriter produces an original copy and at least
    one carbon copy.

    (1)     Note.  The terms "carbon paper" and "manifold set" are discussed in
    (1) Note and (2) Note, respectively, of subclass 497.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    497,    for a cylindrical-platen typewriter for typing on a manifold set
    and see (1) Note above.


CLS 400/38
TXT Including feeding of wide carbon paper transverse to feed of record-medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein the record-medium* of a typewriter
    is fed in a first direction coinciding with the line-space* direction, and
    wherein said carbon paper is moved (i.e., fed) in a second direction
    substantially perpendicular to the first direction and the carbon paper has
    a width dimension that is relatively large and approximately equal to the
    length of a page* of record-medium.

    (1)     Note.  In some typewriters of this subclass the carbon paper is
    wound on either a supply roll or a take-up roll or both.


CLS 400/39
TXT Including spool for roll of carbon paper:

    Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein said carbon paper is of
    indeterminate length and is wound on a reel either for supply or take up of
    the carbon paper or both.


CLS 400/40
TXT Including clamp or guide for carbon paper:

    Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein the flat platen* or another
    portion of the typewriter is provided with means to firmly hold said carbon
    paper to the platen, or to lead or direct the carbon paper relative to the
    platen.


CLS 400/41
TXT Including adjustment of platen perpendicular to its surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein the platen* of the typewriter is
    movable for the purpose of varying its position relative to other portions
    of the typewriter, the movement occurring along a line at right angles to
    the flat surface of the platen.


CLS 400/42
TXT Including aligning and feeding manifold set:

    Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein said manifold set includes a
    plurality of pieces of web record-medium* interleaved with a plurality of
    pieces of web carbon paper, all the pieces being in surface-to-surface
    relationship and the pieces are positioned so that their corresponding side
    edges are located adjacent one another or so that a particular indicium
    that occurs along the length dimension of one piece is located adjacent to
    a corresponding indicium that occurs along the length dimension of another
    web, and wherein the manifold set is moved along the flat platen* in a
    line-space* direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    606,    for aligning and feeding of plural webs in a standard typewriter.


CLS 400/43
TXT Including feed of tally strip:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein significance is attributed to the
    feeding of a tally strip in a flat-platen* typewriter.

    (1)     Note.  The term "tally strip" is discussed in the definition of
    subclass 586, see the (1) Note thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    586,    for a cylindrical-platen typewriter for typing on a tally strip and
    see (1) Note above.


CLS 400/44
TXT Including line-spacing mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein significance is attributed to a
    typewriter in which type-face* elements impact against a record-medium*
    that is backed by a flat platen* at a print-point*, and wherein
    significance is also attributed to effecting relative movement between the
    record-medium and the print-point in a step-by-step manner so that
    successively imprinted print-lines* will be spaced apart by line-space*
    distances.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    545,    for line-spacing by incremental rotation of a cylindrical platen.


CLS 400/45
TXT Platen shifted for line-spacing:

    Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein line-space distances are effected
    by moving the flat platen* along a line that is perpendicular to the
    print-line*.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also includes some typewriters wherein the
    platen is shifted for line-spacing and the platen is also shifted for
    character-spacing.


CLS 400/46
TXT Including adjustment of line-space distance or increment:

    Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein the extent of the space
    intervention between two successive print-lines* may be varied.

    (1)     Note.  The difference between the two kinds of adjustment herein
    provided for is as follows:

            If a typist changes the space between one print-line and the next
    print-line to be typed, by manual intervention for the one print-line which
    is to be differently spaced, that is an adjustment of line-space* distance.
    However, if the typewriter is re-set to change the spaces between any
    plurality of print-lines to make those spaces different from the spaces
    between a previous plurality of print-lines, that is adjustment of the
    line-space increment.


CLS 400/47
TXT Including disengagement of line-spacing mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein the typewriter is provided with
    means whereby structure for effecting the relative movement (i.e., of
    subclass 44) may be disconnected temporarily.

    (1)     Note.  The disengagement is usually for the purpose of facilitating
    the loading of a flat platen* with record-medium*. Also found herein is a
    typewriter wherein the line-spacing* mechanism may be locked against
    movement.


CLS 400/48
TXT Work support (e.g., sheet or card holddown or guide, sheet-size platen,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein significance is attributed to a
    device or member for backing the record-medium* as type-face* elements are
    impacted thereagainst.

    (1)     Note.  The device or member may include a flat platen*, per se, for
    example, characterized as being of dimensions corresponding to a sheet that
    it will hold, or may include means for holding or guiding the record-medium
    relative to the flat platen, these being only examples of the subject
    matter of this subclass.


CLS 400/49
TXT Collating-table attachment:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein significance is attributed to a
    collating-table* that is associated with a flat-platen* typewriter.


CLS 400/50
TXT INCLUDING DELAY MEANS FOR PREVENTING MALFUNCTION IN POWERED TYPEWRITER:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a source of energy other
    than that supplied by a typist is used to actuate, or aid a typist to
    actuate, mechanism for performing first and second sequential operations on
    a typewriter.  The typewriter having a capability of performing each of
    said operations in an optimum time period from the instant that each
    operation has been initiated by a signal, until the instant that each
    operation is complete, and wherein there will be a failure in proper
    performance of the second operation if the first operation has not reached
    a first predetermined stage of performance before the second operation has
    reached a second predetermined state of performance and wherein
    significance is attributed to sensing an occurrence wherein a signal to
    initiate the second operation has been given prematurely.  As a result of
    such sensed occurrence, retarding the performance of the second operation
    to assure the first operation has reached the first stage before the second
    operation reaches the second stage.


CLS 400/51
TXT Delay of sequential character rate in programmed-control typewriter:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein the sequential operations are
    regulated by a programmed-control-system*, and wherein the first and second
    operations are each for typing of a character*, and wherein the retarding
    of the second operation is by increasing the period of time for performing
    the second operation from said optimum period to a time greater than said
    optimum period.


CLS 400/52
TXT Delay by storage of next character to be imprinted:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein the first and second operations
    are each for typing a character*, and wherein after the second operation
    has been initiated, it is retarded by holding it from completion for a
    predetermined period of time.


CLS 400/53
TXT INCLUDING ADJUSTMENT MEANS TO COMPENSATE FOR WEAR:

    Subject matter under the class definition whereby attrition of a typewriter
    part occurs during use of the typewriter, and wherein significance is
    attributed to changing the position of such part relative to another part
    to counteract such attrition.


CLS 400/54
TXT SAFETY SWITCH OR CONDITION-RESPONSIVE-CUTOFF SWITCH FOR ELECTRICALLY
    POWERED TYPEWRITER:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein typewriter mechanism is
    driven with the help of force derived from electrical energy and wherein
    significance is attributed to a device for influencing a circuit through
    which the energy is supplied, said device being either for preventing the
    typist from being harmed, or for interrupting the circuit as a result or
    characteristic of the state of the environment or the occurrence of a
    predetermined event in a typewriter.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of devices provided for in this subclass are a
    switch which cannot be placed in an "on" position unless a cover prevents
    access to the electrically powered mechanism, and a switch that will
    automatically turn the power "off" after a preset time interval if the
    typewriter is left unattended.


CLS 400/55
TXT INCLUDING ADJUSTMENT FOR OPTIMUM PRINTING PLANE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein significance is
    attributed to adjustment of the optimum printing plane of a typewriter as
    that term is discussed and defined in (1) Note below.

    (1)     Note.  In over simplified terms, a typewriter requires at least two
    elements for a typing operation.  One of these elements is a type-member*
    that impacts against a record-medium* at a print-point*; another of these
    elements is a platen* that serves to prevent movement of the record-medium
    away from the type-member during impact.  (Obviously, other structures and
    mechanisms are also required for operation, but discussion of these may be
    deferred.)  The type-member includes a type-face* that lies in a plane; the
    platen includes a surface that lies in a plane.  In the instance of a
    cylindrical platen, the platen plane is theoretically tangent to the
    peripheral surface of the platen, whereas the surface itself is arcuate,
    therefore not planar, but considering the small area of a character*
    compared to the area of a cylindrical platen, the difference between the
    arcuate surface and the tangent plane is minimal; the platen plane can be
    considered as planar.  Theoretically, the platen plane should coincide with
    the type-face plane when the type-face is at the print-point to ensure an
    imprinted character that is uniformly legible at any point on its area.
    Actually, the two planes cannot coincide because of the thickness of the
    record-medium and the thickness of a ribbon*, both of which lie between the
    two planes in most typewriters, but at the very minimum the two planes
    should be parallel, one to the other. Because in an actual typewriter the
    planes may become out of parallelism with each other, it is necessary to
    provide means to adjust either the platen plane or the type-face plane, or
    both, to correct the possible misalignment.  Moreover, in an actual
    typewriter the number or thickness of record-medium sheets may vary.  If
    the record-medium of greater than usual thickness is used, the type-face
    will impact the surface of the record-medium at a print-point that is
    further from the axis of the platen than is usual. The type-face plane
    would not be parallel to the plane of the record-medium at the new
    print-point.  To summarize, the "optimum printing plane" is the plane at
    which the type-face and the record-medium best meet to form an imprinted
    character that is uniformly legible at any point on its area, and is the
    result of adjustments to the typewriter to ensure the coincidence and
    parallelism of the record-medium with the type-face at the print-point.


CLS 400/56
TXT Responsive to thickness of record-medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein the thickness dimension of the
    record-medium* (i.e., its dimension perpendicular to a surface area) is
    measured, and the adjustment of the optimum printing plane is made by the
    typewriter as a result of such measurement.


CLS 400/57
TXT In accordance with the number of sheets of record-medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein the typist determines the number
    of sheets or record-medium* that is to be typed upon during the typing
    operation, and wherein the typist makes an adjustment to the typewriter as
    a result of such determination.


CLS 400/58
TXT By adjustment of platen relative to carriage:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein the optimum printing plane is
    adjusted by varying the position of the typewriter platen* with respect to
    the carriage* on which the platen is supported.


CLS 400/59
TXT By adjustment of carriage (e.g., carriage-guide rollers):

    Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein the optimum printing plane is
    adjusted by varying the position of the carriage* of the typewriter with
    respect to the print-point.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the position of roller elements or the
    carriage frame on which the carriage moves to and fro is adjusted.


CLS 400/60
TXT Via adjustment of case-shift linkage:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the typewriter is provided with a
    case-shift mechanism that is connected to the carriage* for choice of
    upper-case* or lower-case* form of type-face* element, and wherein the
    optimum printing plane is adjusted by varying the position of the carriage
    with respect to the case-shift mechanism.


CLS 400/61
TXT INCLUDING CONTROL OF FORMAT AND SELECTION OF TYPE-FACE BY
    PROGRAMMED-CONTROL-SYSTEM (E.G., INPUT TYPEWRITER):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a
    programmed-control-system* governs the operation of a typewriter so as to
    control the format of the text to be imprinted on a record-medium* and so
    as to impress selected or chosen type-face* elements against the
    record-medium.

    (1)     Note.  The term "format" refers to physical appearance.  As used in
    the typewriter art the term refers to the appearance of a page* of text of
    typewritten character* symbols. Control of format involves (a) movement of
    the record-medium in the line-space* direction (i.e., the "Y" direction of
    a graph) to locate the record-medium at a desired print-line* location and
    (b) movement of the carriage* (e.g., a platen* carriage or a type-head*
    carriage) in a character-space* direction (i.e., the "X" direction of a
    graph) to locate the first-imprinted-character symbol of the print-line
    along that print-line. Format control also governs such function*
    operations as carriage return (Found, per se, in subclass 313), tabulation
    (found, per se, in subclass 284), subsequent line-spacing* (found, per se,
    in subclass 545), or record-medium feeding (found, per se, in subclasses
    578), (these functions being only exemplary) so that the entire format of
    the printed text on the record-medium is controlled.  In some typewriters
    having format control the typewriter or the program is capable of being
    modified to change the format as desired.  For example, a paragraph of text
    comprising six print-lines, each print-line having approximately 70
    characters thereon, may be changed to a paragraph comprising 12
    print-lines, each print-line having approximately 35 characters thereon; or
    the distance between successive print-lines may be varied as desired to
    compress or expand the typed text to fit a page.

    (2)     Note.  In the typewriter of this and indented subclasses, the
    programmed-control-system also governs the operation to select or choose
    the type-face elements that are to be used to imprint the characters in
    sequence. The difference between "select" and "choose" as to type-face, is
    discussed in the glossary under definitions such as case-shift*,
    type-face-carrier*, type-head, and type-head-carrier*. Briefly, a
    particular type-face is selected from among the many available from a
    type-set-assemblage, whereas an upper-case* form of letter (As
    distinguished from a lower-case* form of the same letter) is chosen from
    the forms available on one key* element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for selection of type-face by a programmed-control-system.

    76,     for control of format by a programmed-control-system.


CLS 400/62
TXT Including means for responding to input program or incoming signals and
    providing output program or signals representing typing operations (e.g.,
    output typewriter):

    Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein the typewriter is governed by an
    auxiliary-record-program* or is governed by an instrumentality outside of
    the typewriter, which instrumentality transmits to the typewriter the
    instructions necessary to control the typing functions* and type-face*
    selections and choices, and wherein the typewriter also generates an
    auxiliary-record-program or also generates the instructions necessary to
    control the typing functions and type-face selections and choices for
    another typewriter.

    (1)     Note.  The typewriter of this subclass is known as an
    "input-output" typewriter in the art.  The "input" of this typewriter may
    be from a program in the form of a punched or magnetic tape or other
    record, or may be in the form of signals from a "computer" or "register" or
    "memory" outside of the typewriter.  The "output" of this typewriter may
    also be in the form of a program tape or other record, or may be in the
    form of signals to a "computer" or "register" or "memory", the signals
    being generated in response to depression of the key* elements on a
    key-board* by a typist and being transmitted to another typewriter.  The
    typewriter of this subclass is capable of responding to an input and of
    producing an output.  Also a typewriter of this subclass could be one of
    several typewriters in a chain wherein the "input" of one typewriter is
    converted to an "output" of that typewriter, which "output" of the first
    typewriter becomes the "input" of a second typewriter, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     for an "output" typewriter.


CLS 400/63
TXT Including editing or revision system:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein significance is attributed to a
    typewriter capable of editing or revision as those terms are discussed and
    explained in the notes below.

    (1)     Note.  The term "revision" is applied to an operation wherein the
    text of typewritten material is changed. Typically, a typist types a "rough
    draft" text and generates a "rough draft program".  The text is proof-read
    and various changes are indicated where necessary to add, delete, modify
    spelling, or otherwise correct the text.  The typist or proofreader then
    locates on the rough draft text and program the portion of text to be
    changed and reprograms to correct the text.  The reprogrammed corrections
    may be put onto a correction program or onto the rough draft program or
    onto another instrumentality.  The correction program is then combined with
    the rough draft program to in corporate all the changes and corrections
    into a master program which is then used to reproduce as many original
    copies as are desired.  A revision system typewriter is sometimes used as
    an input or as an output, and usually additional equipment is necessary to
    correlate the changes so that they may be entered properly in the master
    program.

    (2)     Note.  The term "editing" is applied to an operation wherein the
    appearance (e.g., the format) as well as the text of typewritten material
    is changed.  An editing system will usually operate similarly to a revision
    system, but will include changes such as "centering", "indent
    paragraphing", or other format control changes.  An incoming program (i.e.,
    input) will be modified by appropriate equipment to perform format control
    or character-selection control that is different from the original program.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 200.3+ for
    data transferring among multiple computer systems, and subclasses 821
    through 894 for transferring data from one or more peripherals to one or
    more computers for the latter to process, store, or further transfer or for
    transferring data from the computers to the peripherals; and see (1) Note,
    section IV, of this class (400) under the heading of class (395) for a note
    to the differences between the subject matter of the two classes.


CLS 400/64
TXT Including right-hand margin control system:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein the programmed-control-system*
    governs the location or extent of the margin* at the right side of the
    record-medium* that is being typed on.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the "input" to the typewriter does not
    include right-hand margin control and such control is added by the system,
    or the system does particularly include a right-hand margin control and
    such control is either retained or is particularly modified by the system.
    The operation known as "justification" is not included here, but is to be
    found in subclass 1.


CLS 400/65
TXT Including typing of graphical representations:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein the programmed-control-system*
    governs the operation of a typewriter so as to imprint character* symbols
    and also governs the operation of said typewriter so as to produce a graph
    denoting the imprinted character symbols.

    (1)     Note.  A "graph" is defined as a diagram representing a system of
    connections or interrelations among two or more things by a number of
    distinctive dots, bars, etc.  The graph or chart produced in this subclass
    represents the letter characters or number characters that are imprinted by
    the typewriter.


CLS 400/66
TXT Including baseplate attachment with electromagnets for input or output
    operations:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein significance is attributed to a
    mechanism that is connected as an adjunct to a typewriter, which mechanism
    is used to convert a typewriter that is operable by a typist depressing the
    key*  elements of the key-board* to a typewriter that is operable by a
    programmed-control-system*, and which mechanism is located underneath the
    typewriter and operates the type-face* selecting or choosing means and the
    function* operations of the typewriter.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the attachment is used to convert a standard
    typewriter to an input-output typewriter, but it may also be part of the
    typewriter that is used as a "computer terminal".


CLS 400/67
TXT Separate interrelated programs:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein a typewriter is provided with at
    least two programmed-control-system* programs, each of which programs is
    intended for a different sequence of operations to be performed, by the
    typewriter, and the programs being coordinated to produce a final text.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass, one of the programs may be for the
    selection or choice of character* symbols and another program may be for
    the line-space* or the character-space* control, and both programs are used
    together.


CLS 400/68
TXT Including message writing (e.g., address program, form-letter program,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 67 wherein at least one of the programs
    effects the typing of a part of a communication of information and another
    of the programs effects the typing of another part of the same
    communication.

    (1)     Note.  An example of the subject matter of this subclass is a
    program for typing the body of a letter (i.e., "letter" in the sense of a
    piece of correspondence) that will be sent to various people, and a
    plurality of programs, each program for typing the address of each of the
    people to whom the correspondence will be sent.


CLS 400/69
TXT Type-face selection via magnetic program tape:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein the program-control-systems*
    includes an auxiliary-record-program* that comprises a band or ribbon* of
    material containing ferrous particles capable of being oriented or
    reoriented relative to the band or tape, the orientation of the particles
    being sensed to effect selection or choice of the type-face* elements that
    will be impressed against the record-medium* to effect imprint of
    character* symbols in sequence.


CLS 400/70
TXT INCLUDING SELECTION OF TYPE-FACE BY PROGRAMMED-CONTROL-SYSTEM OR BY REMOTE
    CONTROL:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a
    programmed-control-system or a signal from outside of a typewriter governs
    the operation of the typewriter so as to impress selected or chosen
    type-face* elements against the record-medium* to imprint character*
    symbols successively.

    (1)     Note.  In the typewriter of this and indented subclasses the
    programmed-control-system is used to select or choose the type-face
    elements that are to imprint the characters in sequence.  The difference
    between "select" and "choose" as to the type-face element  is discussed in
    the glossary, section III, under definitions such as case-shift*,
    type-face-carrier*, type-head*, and type-head-carrier*.  Briefly, A
    particular type-face is selected from among the many available from a
    type-set-assemblage*, whereas an upper-case* form of letter (As
    distinguished from a lower-case* form of the same letter) is chosen from
    the forms of that letter available on one key* element.

    (2)     Note.  The signal from outside the typewriter that governs the
    operation of the typewriter is usually referred to in such functional terms
    as "reader", "translator", "storage", "input", etc.  it is not a remote
    signal such as that transmitted by a printing telegraph of Class 178.  See
    (1) note to Class 178, Telegraphy, in section IV of the class definition of
    this class (400), for the distinction between this class (400) and Class
    178, Telegraphy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for selection of type-face and control of format by a
    programmed-control-system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, and (2) note above.


CLS 400/71
TXT Plural typewriters coupled for simultaneous operation (e.g., "master-slave"
    relationship):

    Subject matter under subclass 70 wherein a first typewriter, while it is
    operating to type on a record-medium*, produces signals. These signals
    (i.e., signals from inside the first typewriter, but from outside a second
    typewriter) are used to govern the operation of the second typewriter
    concurrently with the operation of the first typewriter, whereby
    corresponding character* symbols are typed onto a second record-medium at
    the same time that character symbols are typed onto the first record-medium
    by operation of the key-board* of the first typewriter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for a typewriter coupled to an information-recording machine.


CLS 400/72
TXT Including character-selection latches (e.g., for type-face selection):

    Subject matter under subclass 70 wherein the programmed-control-system*
    governs the selection or choice of a type-face* element that is part of a
    type-head* by way of components known in the typewriter industry as
    "character-selection latches".

    (1)     Note.  The term character-selection latch refers to a component
    used in a typewriter having a spheroidal type-head that is supported by a
    type-head-carrier* that is mounted on a type-head carrier* (see the
    definition of carriage in the glossary).  A typewriter of this subclass is
    provided with a plurality of these components (usually five or six), each
    of which is hook shaped to "latch" to a common actuator bar or member and
    is connected to a "whiffletree" arrangement of links.  A signal
    representing a selected character* or function* causes one or character is
    selected, certain of the components will be latched and when another
    particular character is selected, other components will be latched or a
    different permutation of components will be latched.  Movement of the
    common actuator will move those components that have been permutatively
    latched thereto.  Movement of the latched components will move the links of
    the whiffletree, and movement of the whiffletree links will be converted
    into tilting and/or rotational movement of a spheroidal type-head to
    thereby position the selected type-face so that movement of the
    type-head-carrier to the record-medium* will effect imprint of the selected
    character,  or movement of the whiffletree links will be converted into
    movement of a selected function* (e.g., case-shift*).


CLS 400/73
TXT Including particular reader structure and operation:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 wherein significance is attributed to
    means for converting the information stored on the program of a
    programmed-control-system* into the operation of selection or choice of a
    particular type-face* element and motion of the selected or chosen
    type-face to the record-medium*.

    (1)     Note.  In the patents of this subclass the converting means (i.e.,
    the "reader") is specifically claimed as a part of the typewriter that
    controls the operation of the typewriter in specific terms.  In other
    words, the typewriter is more than merely named as a load for the reader.
    The reader having a named typewriter is proper for Class 364, see the
    search class note below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 106 for a
    reader of a programmed-control-system together with a named typewriter.


CLS 400/74
TXT Including error detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 wherein significance is attributed to a
    portion of the program of a programmed-control-system* which provides
    verification of the text to insure that the character* symbols that are
    being imprinted on the record-medium* are the characters that the
    programmed-control-system is instructing the typewriter to imprint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for an error-correcting storage register in a "justification"
    typewriter.


CLS 400/75
TXT Including type-bar selection using mechanical program:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 wherein the type-face* elements are
    mounted on type-bar* members, and wherein the programmed-control-systems*
    includes an auxiliary-record-program* that is directly linked to means for
    actuating the type-bars for selection of the type-faces to be impressed
    against the record-medium*, or is directly linked to a case-shift*
    mechanism for choice of the upper-case* or lower-case* form of the
    type-face to be impressed against the record-medium.

    (1)     Note.  In the typewriter of this subclass a plurality of type-bars
    are used, each type-bar carrying usually two type-faces thereon, one
    type-face for upper-case and another type-face for lower-case character.
    Also the typewriter of this subclass does not use an electrical "reader" of
    the program for converting the program to signals that cause actuation of
    the type-faces, but instead, this typewriter actuates the typefaces
    directly from the program.


CLS 400/76
TXT INCLUDING CONTROL OF FORMAT BY PROGRAMMED-CONTROL-SYSTEM:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a
    programmed-control-system* governs the operation of a typewriter so as to
    control the format of the text to be imprinted on a record-medium*.

    (1)     Note.  The term "format" is discussed in (1) Note of subclass 61,
    above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS;

    61,     for control of format and selection of type-face* by a
    programmed-control-system.


CLS 400/77
TXT TYPEWRITER CONTROLS OTHER INFORMATION RECORDER:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a first typewriter is
    capable of operation of imprint character* symbols on a record-medium*, and
    wherein another machine is capable of operation to imprint character
    symbols or to form indicia on the same or on another record-medium, and
    wherein operation of the first typewriter concurrently influences the
    operation of the other machine.

    (1)     Note.  The other machine may be a printing machine, an accounting
    machine, a card-punch machine, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for a typewriter that controls another typewriter.


CLS 400/78
TXT Typewriter controls apparatus used for accounting function:

    Subject matter under subclass 77 wherein the other machine influenced by
    the first typewriter is a machine which prints indicia on a Record-Medium*,
    said indicia resulting from a mathematical computation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, for a mechanical device or a record controlled system
    for performing a mathematical computation.

    705,    Data Processing: Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/price Determination, subclasses 30+ for an electrical data processing
    accounting system.


CLS 400/79
TXT And a tape-punch or card-punch apparatus:

    Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein operation of the first typewriter
    also concurrently influences a machine for providing indicia in the form of
    apertures in a sheet or web of material.

    (1)     Note.  A sheet is a relatively thin piece of material having
    determinate width and determinate length.  A web is a relatively thin piece
    of material having determinate width and indeterminate length.  A card is a
    sheet that is slightly thicker than a sheet and therefore stiffer than a
    sheet.


CLS 400/80
TXT Typewriter (e.g., output typewriter) controls tape-punch or card-punch
    apparatus:

    Subject matter under subclass 77 wherein the other machine influenced by
    the first typewriter is for providing indicia in the form of apertures in a
    sheet or web of material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for an "input-output" typewriter.


CLS 400/81
TXT And imprints the character represented by the punched code on the tape or
    card:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the apertures denote character*
    symbols and wherein provision is made for imprinting the character symbols
    denoted by the apertures on the web or sheet.


CLS 400/82
TXT INCLUDING PLURAL, INDEPENDENTLY SUPPORTED  KEY-BOARDS, PLATENS, OR
    TYPE-SET-ASSEMBLAGES:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein there is provided more
    than one key-board* mounted separate from each other, or there is provided
    more than one platen* mounted separate from each other, or there is
    provided more than one type-set-assemblage* mounted separate from each
    other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    353,    for a typewriter having an auxiliary carriage*.

    585,    for a typewriter having a divided platen.


CLS 400/83
TXT DISPLAYING TYPEWRITER-FORMED REPRESENTATION OF PRINT-LINE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein significance is
    attributed to the showing to the typist or another person a visible
    expression or designation of the character* symbols that are to be or are
    being imprinted on a record-medium* as a print-line*.


CLS 400/84
TXT By projecting typed image on screen:

    Subject matter under subclass 83 wherein the visible expression or
    designation is cast or exhibited by way of an optical system that includes
    a surface on which the likeness of the print-line* on the record-medium* is
    visible.


CLS 400/85
TXT Including transparent or translucent record-medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 wherein the record-medium* enables passage
    of light there-through, and the light is transmitted by said optical system
    onto said surface to exhibit the print-line*.


CLS 400/86
TXT OPERATING BY SOUND:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein significance is
    attributed to a typewriter responsive to the sound of the human voice to
    perform typing operations.


CLS 400/87
TXT FOR OPERATION BY A HANDICAPPED USER:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein significance is
    attributed to a typewriter intended to be operated by a typist whose
    physical capacities are limited.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    475,    for a typewriter wherein some functions are foot actuated.


CLS 400/88
TXT POCKET TYPEWRITER:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein significance is
    attributed to a typewriter that is sufficiently small to be carried on the
    person of a user within a pocket or handbag.


CLS 400/89
TXT KEY REASSIGNMENT:

    Subject matter under the class definition which changes the relationship
    between the key designation and the printed character.

    (1)     Note.  The term key designation includes either a change in
    actuated printing element or key designator (e.g., mask or overlay).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    380,    Cryptography, subclasses 51 and 55 for a cryptographic typewriter.


CLS 400/90
TXT Electrically powered:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein significance is attributed to a
    typewriter that is operated with the help of electricity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    380,    Cryptography, subclass 55 for an electrical cryptographic
    typewriter.


CLS 400/91
TXT STENOGRAPHIC TYPEWRITER:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein significance is
    attributed to a typewriter intended to be used while typing in "shorthand"
    or stenographically.

    (1)     Note.  Various terms are used in the art to refer to such a
    typewriter, including "shorthand", "steno-typograph" and "tachygraphic",
    and variations of such words.  A typewriter capable of stenographic
    operation has a distinctive appearance that is different from that of the
    usual typewriter.  The keyboard* is arranged so that plural key* elements
    are pressed simultaneously by the fingers of one or both hands of the
    typist, and the type-face* elements are impressed against the
    record-medium* simultaneously in groups.  The imprinted character* symbols
    therefore appear in the record-medium in groups, and the record-medium,
    which is usually a relatively narrow strip of elongated material, is moved
    after each group of characters have been imprinted thereon. The stenotypist
    thus forms groups of characters in succession, each group corresponding to
    a syllable of a word*, thus the operation of such a typewriter can be rapid
    and can be used while recording a spoken conversation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    482,    for a key-board specialized for use in a stenographic typewriter.


CLS 400/92
TXT Using common-letter type-face:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 wherein the type-face* elements in the
    stenographic typewriter are of the form or in one of the Fonts* that is
    normal and usual in a typewriter.


CLS 400/93
TXT Including plural type-faces mounted on carrier and movable for selection of
    type-face:

    Subject matter under subclass 92 wherein significance is attributed to the
    support for the type-bar* members, each of which carries at least one
    type-face* element, and the selection of two or more type-face elements to
    type a message stenographically.


CLS 400/94
TXT Electrically powered:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 wherein significance is attributed to a
    stenographic typewriter that is operated with the help of electricity.


CLS 400/95
TXT LOGOTYPE TYPEWRITER (E.G., WORD TYPING):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein significance is
    attributed to a typewriter in which one or more of the imprinting members
    is formed as an assemblage of type-face* or type-die* elements, each of
    which elements imprints simultaneously or in quick succession one with the
    others as if the assemblage was a single element, thus imprinting a
    plurality of character* symbols on the record-medium* by the one impression
    of the member.

    (1)     Note.  The difference between this form of typewriter and a
    printing machine proper for Class 101 is discussed in section IV of the
    definition of this class (400), under the note to Class 101 in (1) note of
    section IV.


CLS 400/96
TXT Including date-stamp type-face:

    Subject matter under subclass 95 wherein at least one of the imprinting
    members is a typeface* or an assemblage of type-face elements that form
    character* symbols representing the name or number of a month or day or
    year.


CLS 400/97
TXT Including signature type-face:

    Subject matter under subclass 95 wherein at least one of the imprinting
    members is a typeface* or an assemblage of type-face elements that form
    character* symbols representing a person's name as written by that person.


CLS 400/98
TXT Actuation of single key types plural characters:

    Subject matter under subclass 95 wherein depression of one key* element by
    a typist will effect the impressing of more than one type-face* element
    onto a record-medium*

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass separate type-face elements imprint
    corresponding character* symbols in quick succession when a single key is
    depressed.


CLS 400/99
TXT Characters typed simultaneously:

    Subject matter under subclass 98 wherein depression of one key* element
    will effect the impressing of more than one type-face* element onto a
    record-medium* at the same time.


CLS 400/100
TXT PLURAL-KEY-ACTUATED TYPEWRITER (E.G., PERMUTATIVE KEY-BOARD):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein significance is
    attributed to a typewriter in which a single type-face* element is caused
    to be impressed against a record-medium* to imprint a single character*
    symbol, the actuation of said single type-face being initiated or powered
    by the pressing of a plurality of key* elements on the key-board*.

    (1)     Note.  As discussed in the definitions of character, key, and
    type-member* in the glossary, section III, most typewriters are provided
    with a mechanism whereby a single key element is selected by a typist and
    pressed to cause a single type-face to be impressed against a record-medium
    to imprint a single character on the record-medium.  In a typewriter of
    this and indented subclasses a plurality of key elements are pressed by the
    typist to imprint a single character on the record-medium.  This typewriter
    uses a "permutative" mechanism in the key-lever linkage and the type-bar*
    or type-head* action linkage which changes the linkages and enables a
    particular selection of pressed key elements to imprint a selected
    character and enables another particular selection of pressed key elements
    to imprint another selected character.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    472,    for a key-board in a standard   typewriter.


CLS 400/101
TXT Having type-faces disposed on pivotable type-bars:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein a type-face* element is carried
    by a type-bar* member that is mounted to be moved in an arcuate path as the
    type-bar moves from a rest position to a print-point* position.


CLS 400/102
TXT Having type-faces disposed on rotatable type-head:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein a type-face* element is carried
    by a type-head* element that turns about an axis while the typeface that is
    to be selected or chosen is moved to a position where the type-face will be
    impressed against the record-medium*.


CLS 400/103
TXT CODE-PRINTING TYPEWRITER (E.G., FOR PRINTING A PATTERN OR MARK):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein significance is
    attributed to a typewriter that is capable of imprinting a mark or spot of
    ink* on a record-medium*, the imprint of a succession of such marks or
    spots forming a particular coded pattern.

    (1)     Note.  A typewriter of this and indented subclasses may be capable
    of imprinting a succession of character* symbols that together from an
    intelligible text, but this typewriter is also capable of imprinting a
    pattern that is sensed or "read" by another machine or a pattern that forms
    a picture to a human's eye.  In some instances the pattern embodies a
    sequence of number digits, but the digits represent a pattern of indicia or
    signs rather than a numerical value.


CLS 400/104
TXT For typing and encoding:

    Subject matter under subclass 103 wherein the typewriter is capable of
    imprinting in a normal or usual English Alphabet as well as capable of
    imprinting a mark or spot of ink* on the record-medium*.


CLS 400/105
TXT Including  magnetic encoding:

    Subject matter under subclass 104 wherein the mark or spot of ink* that is
    imprinted is in the form of ferrous particles capable of being oriented or
    reoriented by magnetism, or is in the form of ink containing such ferrous
    particles.


CLS 400/106
TXT Including coded ink (e.g., phosphorescent or color-coded ink, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 103 wherein the mark or spot of ink* is
    characterized by having a particular color or pigment or chemical
    composition, any of which characteristics is significant in determining the
    coded pattern that is desired.


CLS 400/107
TXT For coding by conductive mark:

    Subject matter under subclass 103 wherein the mark or spot or ink* that
    forms part of the coded pattern is capable of conducting a current of
    electricity.


CLS 400/108
TXT For marking laundry:

    Subject matter under subclass 103 wherein significance is attributed to the
    imprinting of a mark or spot of ink* on an article of apparel that is to be
    washed.


CLS 400/109
TXT FOREIGN-LANGUAGE TYPEWRITER:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein significance is
    attributed to a typewriter that is capable of imprinting character* symbols
    in an alphabet other than the standard English alphabet.

    (1)     Note.  The standard "English" alphabet is one that is derived from
    the Roman or Latin alphabet, and therefore is common to languages used in
    many European countries, including most of the western European countries.
    This and indented subclasses provide for a typewriter capable of typing in
    such alphabets as Cryllic (e.g., for Russian, Bulgarian or Serbian),
    Semitic (e.g., Arabic, Hebrew), Greek, Medieval German, etc., or is capable
    of typing such oriental languages as Chinese, Japanese, etc., the
    enumeration being only exemplary.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    484,    for a key-board* specialized for use in a foreign-language
    typewriter.


CLS 400/109.1
TXT Braille:

    Subject matter under subclass 109 wherein the character* symbols are
    embossed in the record-medium* so as to be discerned by tactile sensation.

    (1)     Note.  The typewriter of this subclass usually forms a character*
    in the form of a pattern of embossments, each different pattern
    representing a different letter or number or other symbol. A trained blind
    person feels the different patterns with his/her fingers and so ``reads"
    the character*s that form the text.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    483,    for a key-board* intended for use in a ``Braille" typewriter.


CLS 400/110
TXT Including oriental language:

    Subject matter under subclass 109 wherein the typewriter is capable of
    imprinting character* symbols used in an oriental language.

    (1)     Note.  An "Oriental" language is one that is used by the
    inhabitants of Asia.  Such languages as Chinese, Japanese, Burmese, etc.
    are examples of Oriental languages.


CLS 400/111
TXT Including semitic language:

    Subject matter under subclass 109 wherein the typewriter is capable of
    imprinting character* symbols used in a Semitic language.

    (1)     Note.  A "Semitic" language is one that is used by such people as
    Arabs and Hebrews.  It is characterized by being written and read from
    right to left.


CLS 400/112
TXT ANNULAR TYPEWRITER (E.G., FOR TYPING AROUND CIRCUMFERENCE OF PLATEN):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein significance is
    attributed to a typewriter having a cylindrical or partially cylindrical
    platen* for supporting or backing a record-medium* in which typewriter
    character* symbols are imprinted on the record-medium in such manner that
    each successively imprinted character in a direction extending around the
    periphery of the platen.

    (1)     Note.  Successive characters may be imprinted in a helical
    arrangement around the periphery, thus requiring no mechanism for
    line-space* distances, or the platen may be moved axially between
    successive print-line* typing, thus producing line-spaces.


CLS 400/113
TXT Including vertically disposed platen:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein said platen* turns about an axis
    during use of the typewriter, and wherein said axis extends upwardly
    relative to the typewriter.

    (1)     Note.  The turning of the platen is in increments corresponding to
    character-space* distances and may be rotated in one direction for a
    cylindrical platen or be rotated by increments followed by oscillation in a
    return direction for a partially cylindrical platen.


CLS 400/114
TXT Platen axis horizontal and extending front-to-rear:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein said platen* turns about an axis
    that is disposed to be parallel to the base of the typewriter and parallel
    to the sides of the typewriter.


CLS 400/115
TXT Power actuated:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein one or more mechanisms of the
    typewriter is/are driven with the help of energy derived from a source
    other than the energy of the typist.


CLS 400/116
TXT MUSIC-ROLL OR MUSICAL-NOTATION TYPEWRITER:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein significance is
    attributed to a typewriter capable of imprinting character* symbols on a
    music roll, or capable of imprinting character symbols representing the
    notes used for indicating the signs and tones of a musical composition.

    (1)     Note.  A "music roll" is a web of record-medium* having holes
    therein, the holes controlling the playing of a "player piano".  In the
    typewriter of this subclass the music roll is also imprinted with the words
    of the song being played on the player piano, so that a user may sing along
    with the music being played.


CLS 400/117
TXT Musical-notation typewriter:

    Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein significance is attributed to a
    typewriter capable of imprinting character* symbols representing the notes
    used for indicating the signs and tones of a musical composition.


CLS 400/118.1
TXT TYPING BY HEATED DIE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein significance is
    attributed to a typewriter in which character* symbols are successively
    imprinted or formed in or on a surface of a record-medium* by applying a
    piece of metal having a form (image) therein directly against said
    record-medium* and heating said metal to thereby provide the image on the
    record-medium*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120.01+,for apparatus for recording utilizing heat applied indirectly to
    the record-medium*.


CLS 400/118.2
TXT TYPING BY OTHER THAN TYPE-FACE OR TYPE-DIE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein significance is
    attributed to a typewriter in which character* symbols are successively
    imprinted or formed on a surface of a record-medium* by forming the
    character* portion by portion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 141-142 and 467+ for character
    or font generation and display.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 101+ for
    processing of data for presentation to the print-head and for computer
    graphics and control of data presentation with creation or manipulation of
    graphic objects or text performed by a computer or processor.

    707,    Data Processing - Database and File Management, Data Structures, or
    Document Processing, subclasses 500-542 for document processing performed
    by a computer for presentation.


CLS 400/118.3
TXT Electroconductive transfer:

    Subject matter under subclass 118.2 wherein a recording means conducts
    current through a resistive layer of the record-medium* or an ink* carrier
    for generating heat to produce a record upon the record-medium* by the
    reason of the medium becoming scorched, burned, marked, or otherwise
    thermochemically changed.


CLS 400/120.01
TXT Thermal:

    Subject matter under subclass 118.2 wherein a recording means, due to its
    being in a heated condition, produces a record upon the record-medium* as
    by reason of the medium becoming scorched, burned, marked, or otherwise
    thermochemically changed.


CLS 400/120.02
TXT Multicolor:

    Subject matter under subclass 120.01 wherein the record produced is
    polychromatic.


CLS 400/120.03
TXT Having multilayered colored transfer material:

    Subject matter under subclass 120.02 including an ink* carrier comprising
    stratified strips, each with a different chromatic ink*.


CLS 400/120.04
TXT Having single layer colored transfer material:

    Subject matter under subclass 120.02 including an ink* carrier consisting
    of a single strip having plural regions, each having a different chromatic
    ink*.


CLS 400/120.05
TXT Block driving:

    Subject matter under subclass 120.01 wherein the recording means comprises
    recording elements grouped into sections capable of being selectively
    energized.


CLS 400/120.06
TXT Sequentially:

    Subject matter under subclass 120.05 in which at least two of the sections
    are energized alternately.


CLS 400/120.07
TXT Gradational recording:

    Subject matter under subclass 120.01 wherein the shading of the produced
    record varies.


CLS 400/120.08
TXT Preheating:

    Subject matter under subclass 120.01 wherein the recording means,
    record-medium*, or ink*-carrier is warmed-up prior to recording.


CLS 400/120.09
TXT Density control:

    Subject matter under subclass 120.01 comprising a regulating means for
    controlling the amount of energy supplied to the recording means to
    maintain a uniform output on the record.


CLS 400/120.1
TXT By number of heated recording elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 120.09 wherein the regulating means controls
    the amount of energy supplied to selected recording elements based on a
    number of recording elements being simultaneously energized.


CLS 400/120.11
TXT In accordance with output characteristic of recording elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 120.09 wherein the regulating means responds
    to variations in resistance values of heat radiating resistor elements
    constituting recording elements of the recording means.


CLS 400/120.12
TXT By voltage regulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 120.09 wherein the regulating means responds
    to changes in electrical potential across a heating element used for
    heating the recording means.


CLS 400/120.13
TXT By transfer material or record receiver:

    Subject matter under subclass 120.09 wherein the regulating means is
    responsive to a parameter associated with the ink* carrier, the ink*, or
    the record-medium*.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of the parameter are: the thickness of the ink*
    carrier, the thickness of the paper, the volatility of the ink*, etc.


CLS 400/120.14
TXT In accordance with temperature of the recording means:

    Subject matter under subclass 120.09 wherein the regulating means responds
    to variations in temperature of the recording means.


CLS 400/120.15
TXT By history of recording elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 120.09 wherein the regulating means responds
    to the amount of energy supplied to a particular recording element during
    its previous use.


CLS 400/120.16
TXT Recording means support or actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 120.01 comprising a mechanism for holding or
    moving the recording means from an operative position in which the
    recording means is pressed against the record-medium* to an inoperative
    position in which the recording means is released from pressing engagement
    with the record-medium*.


CLS 400/120.17
TXT Adjustable:

    Subject matter under subclass 120.16 comprising means for selectively
    varying pressure applying the recording means against the record-medium*.


CLS 400/120.18
TXT Pre- or post-image recording treatment:

    Subject matter under subclass 120.01 comprising fixing or fusing means for
    applying substances, energy, or pressure upon the record-medium* or the
    record.


CLS 400/124.01
TXT Character formation by impact (e.g., wire matrix):

    Subject matter under subclass 118.2 wherein the character* symbol is formed
    on the record-medium by percussing two or more discrete elements (i.e.,
    impact members) arranged in a group by use of an actuator directly or
    indirectly against the record-medium*.

    (1)     Note.  The discrete elements are arranged into the configuration of
    a selected character*, the same or different discrete elements being
    selectable to arrange such elements into the configuration of a different
    selected character*, wherein each of the discrete elements is a member that
    is movable from a rest position where it does not effect imprinting to an
    active position where it effects printing, and wherein the configuration of
    a selected character* symbol is formed by moving selected members from a
    rest position to an active position by energization of actuators in the
    printhead.


CLS 400/124.02
TXT With signal conditioning:

    Subject matter under subclass 124.01 including an electrically powered
    actuator and means to modify the input power thereof (i.e., the signal) to
    control operating parameters of the actuator.

    (1)     Note.  These parameters include: length of actuation, strength of
    actuation, and exact time of actuation.


CLS 400/124.03
TXT Overheat protection:

    Subject matter under subclass 124.02 wherein the input power is  modified
    to prevent excessive temperatures in the actuator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124.13, for details of the structure of the printhead which dissipates heat
    produced by the printhead.


CLS 400/124.04
TXT Responsive to impact member position:

    Subject matter under subclass 124.02 wherein the input power is modified
    according to the location of the actuators along the print-line*.


CLS 400/124.05
TXT Control of drive force:

    Subject matter under subclass 124.02 wherein the input power is modified in
    order to change the strength of the pressure applied by the impact member
    against the record-medium*.


CLS 400/124.06
TXT Manifold form or plural copies:

    Subject matter under subclass 124.05 wherein the force which is applied to
    the record-medium* by the impact members is varied according to the number
    of sheets of the record-medium* being printed upon.


CLS 400/124.07
TXT With wear or defect compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 124.02 wherein impact member selection is
    determined so as to distribute even consumption thereof, or to offset
    broken or missing impact members.


CLS 400/124.08
TXT Plural printheads:

    Subject matter under subclass 124.01 including more than one discrete
    groupings of impact members arranged along the print-line*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     for typewriters which have more than one printhead, which may be
    more than one type of printhead.


CLS 400/124.09
TXT Multicolor:

    Subject matter under subclass 124.08 wherein the character* symbol or
    successive character* symbols produced are polychromatic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120.02+, for thermal printers which print in multiple colors.

    216.1,  for ribbon* movement systems which are used in multicolor printers.

    240+,   for specifics of ribbon*s having multiple colors thereon.


CLS 400/124.1
TXT With inking:

    Subject matter under subclass 124.01 wherein ink* is applied to the impact
    members prior to the impact members percussing the record-medium*.

    (1)     Note.  This is generally done by providing a reservoir for ink* on
    the printhead, and the impact members are driven through or next to a pad
    which distributes the ink* onto the impact members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    470+,   for structure which directly inks type-faces in a typewriter.


CLS 400/124.11
TXT Printhead:

    Subject matter under subclass 124.01 including significant structure of the
    impact member, the actuators, or the housing therefor (i.e., the printhead).


CLS 400/124.12
TXT Having assembly means:

    Subject matter under subclass 124.11 including structure for
    interconnecting portions of the printhead together or for connecting the
    printhead to a support.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, various subclasses for methods of assembly of
    printheads.


CLS 400/124.13
TXT Overheat protection:

    Subject matter under subclass 124.11 including cooling means.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is limited to patents wherein the printhead
    has structure for transferring heat therefrom, e.g., fins, fluid flow
    means, etc.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124.03, for ways of controlling the power to the printhead to reduce heat
    buildup.


CLS 400/124.14
TXT With actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 124.11 including significant structure of the
    means for applying percussing force to the impact members (i.e., the
    actuator).

    (1)     Note.  Patents claiming a printhead having significant actuator
    structure are classified here.


CLS 400/124.15
TXT Single actuator for simultaneous actuation of plural impact members:

    Subject matter under subclass 124.14 including means for concurrently
    percussing more than one impact member against the record-medium* by use of
    a single actuator.


CLS 400/124.16
TXT Electrostrictive, magnetostrictive, or piezoelectric:

    Subject matter under subclass 124.14 wherein the percussive force is
    produced in the actuator by periodic deformation of a dielectric body as a
    result of an applied electric or magnetic field or electric voltage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electric Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 311+ for
    specifics of general purpose piezoelectric actuators.


CLS 400/124.17
TXT Actuator having electromagnet:

    Subject matter under subclass 124.14 wherein the means for producing the
    percussive force includes a looped conductor for conducting electrical
    current which produces a magnetic* field.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 209+, for details of specific electromagnet
    structure.


CLS 400/124.18
TXT Electrical component:

    Subject matter under subclass 124.17 including significant structure to an
    electric circuit or any portion thereof for conducting electric current
    through the looped conductor.

    (1)     Note.  The electromagnet is not considered to be a part of the
    ``significant structure to an electric circuit" for purposes of
    classification in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass could include, for example, a printhead with
    an electromagnet having a particular electrical terminal or connector, etc.


CLS 400/124.19
TXT Moving coil:

    Subject matter under subclass 124.18 wherein the looped conductor is
    displaceable relative to the housing responsive to the magnetic* field
    produced therein.


CLS 400/124.2
TXT Permanent magnet:

    Subject matter under subclass 124.18 wherein the magnetic* field acts
    against the magnetic* field of a material which is magnetically polarized.

    (1)     Note.  This does not include magnetic* fields which exist for a
    moving coil.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 229+ for general purpose electromagnets which
    include a permanent magnet.


CLS 400/124.21
TXT With biasing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 124.17 including resilient means acting to
    move the impact members against the force exerted by the magnetic* field.


CLS 400/124.22
TXT Backstop:

    Subject matter under subclass 124.21 including significant structure of
    means for halting movement of the actuator towards its rest position.


CLS 400/124.23
TXT Armature structure or mounting:

    Subject matter under subclass 124.17 including significant structure of a
    movable portion of the electromagnet or support means therefor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124.31, for details of the attachment of an impact member to an
    electromagnetically driven actuator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 270+ for details of mounting general purpose
    electromagnetic* actuators, and subclasses 279+ for structure of armatures
    used in general purpose electromagnets.


CLS 400/124.24
TXT Impact member guide:

    Subject matter under subclass 124.11 including significant structure of
    means for directing the impact member towards the record-medium*.


CLS 400/124.25
TXT With lubricator:

    Subject matter under subclass 124.24 including means for applying a
    friction reducing substance between the impact member and the directing
    means.


CLS 400/124.26
TXT Specific material:

    Subject matter under subclass 124.24 wherein significance is attributed to
    the material which forms the directing means for the impact member.


CLS 400/124.27
TXT Including shifting of guide:

    Subject matter under subclass 124.24 wherein the impact member directing
    means is movable relative to the housing or to a carriage* which supports
    the housing.

    (1)     Note.  This is usually done in order to increase the density of
    output by shifting one set of impact members relative to another on the
    same printhead.


CLS 400/124.28
TXT Impact member tip arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 124.11 wherein significance is attributed to
    the layout of the record-medium* contacting portion of the impact members
    within the housing.

    (1)     Note.  To be in this subclass, the layout should be arranged in
    other than a straight line.


CLS 400/124.29
TXT Impact member structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 124.11 including significant structure of the
    member which causes the impression on the record-medium*.


CLS 400/124.3
TXT Tip cross-section:

    Subject matter under subclass 124.29 wherein significance is attributed to
    the shape of the portion of the impact member that impacts against the
    record-medium*.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include impact members which are
    uniformly circular.


CLS 400/124.31
TXT With attachment or engagement means:

    Subject matter under subclass 124.29 including means for connecting or
    interfacing the impact member with an actuator.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes caps which are formed on the impact
    members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124.23, for details of an electromagnetically driven actuator.


CLS 400/124.32
TXT Specific material:

    Subject matter under subclass 124.29 wherein significance is attributed to
    the material which forms the impact member.

    (1)     Note.  This includes but is not limited to different materials for
    the impact tip as opposed to the remainder of the impact member.


CLS 400/127
TXT TYPING TO PRODUCE EMBOSSED CHARACTER:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein significance is
    attributed to a typewriter in which imprinting on a record-medium* is
    accomplished by a type-die* that contacts a surface of the record-medium
    and permanently deforms the surface to raise or lower the contacted surface
    relative to the uncontacted surface into a line representing a character*.

    (1)     Note.  An example of the form of typing accomplished by the
    typewriter of this and indented subclasses is the making of a credit card
    or an address plate having letters and symbols raised above the surface of
    the card or plate.


CLS 400/128
TXT Character embossed or typed on nonplanar article (e.g., golf ball,
    toothbrush, etc):

    Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein significance is attributed to the
    record-medium* that the typewriter is typing on, the record-medium being an
    object having a shape or configuration that is other than flat, and wherein
    the type-die* permanently embosses a character* symbol in a surface of the
    object.


CLS 400/129
TXT By type-die mounted on carrier movable for selection of character:

    Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein a typewriter is provided with a
    support for a multiplicity of type-die* elements for embossing the
    different character* symbols that the typewriter is capable of embossing,
    which support is enabled to be moved relative to the record-medium*,
    whereby any of the type-die elements may be selected to be impressed
    against the record-medium; and the selected type-die element may be
    impressed to emboss a character symbol on the record-medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    for similar structure for mounting piercing type-die elements
    thereon.


CLS 400/130
TXT Including programmed-control-system:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein the selection of a type-die*, or
    the control of a function* of the typewriter, is governed by a
    programmed-control-system*.


CLS 400/131
TXT Electrically powered:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein electricity is used to energize
    selection of a type-die* or the operation of a function* of the typewriter.


CLS 400/132
TXT Type-die reciprocable on carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein the selected type-die* element is
    moved to and fro relative to the support, the movement occurring for the
    purpose of impressing the selected type-die against the record-medium*.


CLS 400/133
TXT On endless-band carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein the support for the type-die*
    elements is an elongated, closed-loop strip movable in the direction of its
    elongation, to select the type-die to be impressed against the
    record-medium*.


CLS 400/134
TXT On rotatable carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein the support for the type-die*
    elements is a member that turns about an axis to select the type-die to be
    impressed against the record medium*.


CLS 400/134.1
TXT Actuated by key-board control:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 wherein the type-die* element that is to
    be impressed against the record-medium* is selected by pressing a
    corresponding key* element located on a key-board*, the pressing of which
    key causes selection of type-die and movement of the selected type-die to
    the print-point*.


CLS 400/134.2
TXT Including type-die movable relative to carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 134.1 wherein the selected type-die* element
    moves to the print-point* with respect to its support and to the other
    type-die elements that are on the support.


CLS 400/134.3
TXT With magazine for supply of record-medium plates:

    Subject matter under subclass 134.2 wherein the typewriter is provided with
    means for storing a quantity of record-medium* articles that are to be
    embossed, said means including a receptacle or container for storing the
    articles.


CLS 400/134.4
TXT On manually held embosser:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 wherein the member that supports the
    type-die* elements is part of an instrumentality for embossing character*
    symbols one at a time in succession, which instrumentality is intended to
    be grasped in a hand of a user and operated while so grasped.


CLS 400/134.5
TXT Including web supply of record-medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 134.4 wherein the instrumentality is provided
    with means for storing a quantity of record-medium* in the form of an
    indeterminate-length strip of material on which character* symbols are to
    be embossed.


CLS 400/134.6
TXT Including web supply of record-medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 wherein the support for the type-die*
    elements is part of an instrumentality, which instrumentality is provided
    with means for storing a quantity of record-medium* in the form of an
    indeterminate-length strip of material on which character* symbols are to
    be embossed.


CLS 400/135
TXT TYPING TO PRODUCE PIERCED CHARACTER:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein significance is
    attributed to a typewriter in which imprinting on a record-medium* is
    accomplished by a type-die* that contacts a surface of the record-medium
    and cuts through that surface into the opposite surface to form one or more
    perforations in the surface, which perforations taken together represent a
    character*.

    (1)     Note.  An example of the form of typing accomplished in the
    typewriter of this and indented subclasses is the writing of a bank check
    or money order representing an amount of money to be paid, the digits
    representing the amount being pierced or scarified into the surface of the
    check so that alteration of the check cannot be accomplished without
    visible indication of an attempt to alter the check.


CLS 400/136
TXT Cutout character for stencil:

    Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein significance is attributed to the
    formation of a character* symbol by excising the record-medium* using
    type-die* elements that sever the record-medium to produce perforations
    therein, each perforation having an outline of a character symbol.

    (1)     Note.  The record-medium so severed with cutout characters is used
    as a stencil by placing the stencil on surface and coating the stencil and
    surface with pigment.  When the stencil is lifted from the surface, the
    pigmented areas on the surface will form the characters that have been cut
    out of the stencil record-medium.


CLS 400/137
TXT Check-protection character:

    Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein significance is attributed to the
    formation or character* symbols on a form that directs a bank of financial
    institution to pay money, or a form that shows the amount of money to be
    paid for value received.

    (1)     Note.  The significance of the particular form of character in the
    typewriter of this and indented subclasses is that such characters cannot
    be altered without detection; thus, the amount of money that the check
    represents will not be raised in value.


CLS 400/138
TXT By type-die mounted on carrier movable for selection of character:

    Subject matter+ under subclass 137 wherein a typewriter is provided with a
    support for a multiplicity of type-die elements for piercing the different
    character* symbols that the typewriter is capable of piercing, which
    support is enabled to be moved relative to the record-medium* whereby any
    of the type-die elements may be selected to be impressed against the
    record-medium and the selected type-die element may be impressed to pierce
    a character symbol on the record-medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129,    for similar structure for mounting embossing type-die elements
    thereon.


CLS 400/138.1
TXT Electrically powered:

    Subject matter under subclass 138 wherein electricity is used to energize
    selection of type-die* or operation of a function* of the typewriter.


CLS 400/138.2
TXT On rotatable carrier (e.g., for scarifying elements, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 138 wherein the support for the type-die
    elements is a member that turns about an axis to select the type-die to be
    impressed against the record-medium*.

    (1)     Note.  In the typewriter of this subclass the type-die elements
    usually pierce one surface of the record-medium to roughen that surface
    beyond a level where the surface may be made smooth again.  The intent is
    not necessarily for the type-die to perforate both surfaces of the
    record-medium, but rather to scarify at least one surface.


CLS 400/138.3
TXT Actuated by key-board control:

    Subject matter under subclass 138.2 wherein the type-die* element that is
    to be impressed against the record-medium* is selected by pressing a
    corresponding key* element located on a key-board*, the pressing of which
    key causes selection of a type-die and movement of the selected type-die to
    the print-point*.


CLS 400/138.4
TXT Including plural-character type-die:

    Subject matter under subclass 138.2 wherein at least one of the type-die*
    elements is constructed so as to have type-dies representing or
    corresponding to more than one character* symbol, whereby when one of such
    elements is impressed against the record-medium*, a plurality of character
    symbols will be formed in the record-medium.

    (1)     Note.  The typewriter of this subclass usually imprints an amount
    of money spelled in letter symbols rather than numeral symbols.


CLS 400/138.5
TXT And rotating contact with platen:

    Subject matter under subclass 138.4 wherein the type-die* elements turn
    about an axis while being impressed against the record-medium* that is
    backed up by a platen*.


CLS 400/138.6
TXT For type-die including piercing or cutting elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 138.2 wherein the type-die* elements include
    slender elements, each having a sharp point at one end, or include
    elements, each having a sharp edge, which sharp point or edges penetrate
    through both opposite surfaces of the record-medium* as the type-die
    impacts the record-medium.


CLS 400/139
TXT INCLUDING TYPE-SET-ASSEMBLAGE MOUNTED ON CARRIER AND RELATIVELY MOVABLE FOR
    SELECTION AND FOR IMPACT OF TYPE-FACE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a typewriter is provided
    with a type-head-carrier* or with a type-face-carrier*, either of which
    carriers supports a type-set-assemblage* for movement of the type-face*
    elements thereon relative to the record-medium*, whereby any of the
    type-face elements may be selected or chosen to be impressed against a
    record-medium and the selected or chosen type-face element may be impressed
    to imprint a character* symbol.

    (1)     Note.  The definition of type-head- carrier in the Glossary,
    section III, discusses the difference between a type-head-carrier and a
    type-face-carrier. Briefly, a type-head-carrier supports a type-head*
    wherein all type-faces are integral one with the others, whereas a
    type-face-carrier supports type-faces that are movable, one with respect to
    the others.  The difference between "selected" and "chosen" is also
    discussed in the Glossary under the definition of case-shift* and other
    definitions.  Briefly, a particular type-face is selected from among the
    many available from a type-set-assemblage whereas an upper-case* form of
    letter (as distinguished from a lower-case* form of the same letter) is
    chosen from the forms available on one key* element.

    (2)     Note.  In some typewriters movement of the selected or chosen
    type-face for impact is a relative movement; that is, in these typewriters
    the platen* (and the record-medium supported thereby) are moved toward the
    selected or chosen type-face, whereas in most typewriters the type-face
    moves toward the platen.

    (3)     Note.  The definition of type-bar-segment* discusses the
    differencebetween a type-bar-segment and a type-face-carrier.  Briefly, a
    type-bar-segment supports a type-set assemblage for case-shift movement
    (i.e., choice of upper-case or lower-case), whereas a type-face-carrier
    supports a type-set- assemblage for selection of type-face from among many
    type-faces as well as for choice of upper-case or lower-case.


CLS 400/140
TXT Including type-faces movable relative to type-face-carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein a typewriter is provided with a
    type-face-carrier* that supports a type-set-assemblage* comprising a
    plurality of separate type-face* elements, and wherein the typewriter is
    also provided with a mechanism for selecting or choosing the particular
    type-face that is to be impressed against the record-medium* and with a
    mechanism for moving said type-face toward the print-point*.

    (1)     Note.  In this and indented subclasses the term type-face may
    include, for example, an element carrying both the upper-case* and
    lower-case* forms of the same letter, and both forms on the same element
    are moved together, although only the chosen form of the letter is
    impressed against the record-medium.  The relative movement referred to is
    that which moves the element for the selected letter away from the other
    type-face elements of a type-set-assemblage and toward the print-point.


CLS 400/141
TXT Slidable type-faces mounted on reciprocable carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 140 wherein the type-face-carrier* supports a
    plurality of type-face* elements each of which elements may be reciprocated
    relative to the type-face-carrier, and wherein the type-face-carrier may be
    reciprocated relative to the typewriter.

    (1)     Note.  The direction of reciprocation of the type-face elements is
    usually perpendicular to the direction of reciprocation of the
    type-face-carrier.


CLS 400/141.1
TXT On rotatable or oscillatable carrier reciprocable along its axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the type-face-carrier* may be
    reciprocated relative to the typewriter and may also be turned in one
    direction of to-and-fro in opposite directions about an axis of turning,
    and wherein the reciprocation of the type-face carrier is along a line that
    coincides with said axis of turning.


CLS 400/142
TXT Slidable type-faces on rotatable carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 140 wherein the type-face-carrier* supports a
    plurality of type-face* elements each of which elements may be reciprocated
    relative to the type-face-carrier, and wherein the type-face-carrier may be
    turned on an axis relative to the typewriter.


CLS 400/143
TXT Rotatable type-face-carrier including type-faces on pivotable arms:

    Subject matter under subclass 140 wherein the type-face-carrier* supports a
    plurality of members, each of which members is oscillatable to and fro on
    its own axis, and each of which members supports one of the type-face*
    elements of a type-set-assemblage*, and wherein the type-face-carrier may
    be turned on an axis relative to the typewriter.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the members (i.e., pivotable arms) extend in a
    direction parallel to the axis of the type-face-carrier and pivot in a
    direction extending radially of the axis.


CLS 400/144
TXT Type-face-carrier including type-faces on flexible arms:

    Subject matter under subclass 140 wherein the type-face-carrier* supports a
    plurality of members, each of which members is resilient and oscillatable
    to and fro relative to the carrier, and each of which members supports one
    of the type-face* elements of a type-set-assemblage*.


CLS 400/144.1
TXT Rotatable or oscillatable carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 144 wherein the type-face-carrier* may be
    turned relative to the typewriter either in one direction or to and fro in
    opposite directions about an axis of turning, thereby to turn the plurality
    of members and type-face* elements relative to the typewriter.


CLS 400/144.2
TXT Carrier having coplanar flexible arms (e.g., "daisy" wheel, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 144.1 wherein the type-face carrier* includes
    the plurality of resilient members, and wherein the members extend radially
    from the axis of the carrier in substantially the same plane, and each
    member, and the type-face* element supported thereby, oscillates in a
    second plane that is coincident with said axis.

    (1)     Note.  The term "daisy" wheel has been applied to this form of
    type-set- assemblage* and carrier due to its resemblance to a daisy.


CLS 400/144.3
TXT Continuously rotated carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 144.2 wherein the type-face-carrier* turns in
    one direction without stopping during the typing operation of the
    typewriter.


CLS 400/144.4
TXT Manually rotated carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 144.2 wherein the type-face-carrier* turns by
    power applied directly by the typist to the carrier.


CLS 400/145
TXT Type-faces on deformable type-face-carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 140 wherein the type-face-carrier* is made of
    a material that is resilient and supports a plurality of type-face*
    elements thereon, and wherein the selected or chosen type-face is yieldably
    displaced relative to the type-faces remaining in the type-set-assemblage*
    and the displaced type-face is impressed against the record-medium*.


CLS 400/145.1
TXT Rotatable carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 145 wherein the type-face-carrier* may be
    turned on an axis relative to the typewriter.


CLS 400/145.2
TXT Cylindrical carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 145.1 wherein the type-face-carrier* has the
    configuration of a cylinder or a cylindroid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    for a type drum having a cylindrical appearance.


CLS 400/146
TXT Including endless-band carrier for type-faces:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein a typewriter is provided with a
    member that supports a type-set-assemblage* for movement of the type-face*
    elements therewith relative to the typewriter, which member is an
    elongated, closed-loop strip trained around two or more pulleys and movable
    in the direction of its elongation to select or choose the type-face to be
    impressed, and which type-face elements are moved with the strip in a
    direction substantially perpendicular to the elongation toward the
    record-medium* to impress the type-face against the record-medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    for an endless-band type-face-carrier* in an embossing typewriter.


CLS 400/147
TXT Type-faces arranged in rectilinear row and selected by reciprocable
    movement:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein a typewriter is provided with a
    member that supports a type-set-assemblage* for movement of the type-face*
    elements therewith relative to the typewriter, which member may be
    reciprocated along a first straight line for selection or choice of the
    type-face elements thereon, and on which member the type-face elements are
    supported in a second straight line that is parallel to said first straight
    line.

    (1)     Note.  The reciprocating movement defined above is that which is
    needed for selection of choice of a type-face. There may also be another
    movement, for example, a pivoting motion toward the record-medium*,
    imparted to the member for impressing the type-face against the
    record-medium.


CLS 400/148
TXT On rotatable carrier having plural rectilinear rows:

    Subject matter under subclass 147 wherein the member is reciprocated along
    said first straight line and also may be turned about an axis that is
    parallel to said first straight line, and on which member two or more sets
    of type-face* elements are supported, each set in a straight line parallel
    to said first straight line.

    (1)     Note.  Each set of type-face elements defined above may comprise
    all or part of a type-set-assemblage*, or may comprise upper-case* or
    lower-case* forms of the same letter, or may comprise type-set-assemblage
    having different font* assortments of type-faces.  The rotation of the
    member enables selection or choice from among the type-faces of different
    sets of type-faces.


CLS 400/149
TXT Plural type-heads mounted for selective individual type-head-imprinting
    movement:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein a typewriter is provided with two
    or more typehead* elements that are supported on the typewriter to enable
    motion of each of the typeheads toward the print-point* of the typewriter
    separately from the other(s) to imprint the selected or chosen type-face*
    element on the record-medium*.


CLS 400/150
TXT Type-heads arranged for selective individual imprinting movement away from
    coaxial rest position:

    Subject matter under subclass 149 wherein each of the type-head* elements
    is supported for rotation on its own axis of rotation and each of the
    type-heads may be moved toward the print-point* of the typewriter
    separately from the other(s) to imprint the selected or chosen type-face*
    element on the record-medium* and wherein all of the axes of rotation of
    all the type-head elements are normally in the same line, the selected
    type-head being moved away from said line when it is moved toward the
    print-point.


CLS 400/151
TXT Turret carrier for type-heads:

    Subject matter under subclass 149 wherein the type-head* elements are each
    supported on a platform or member, which platform or member is capable of
    rotation about an axis of rotation, and each of the type-head elements
    being capable of separate movement toward the print-point* of the
    typewriter.


CLS 400/151.1
TXT Axis of turret carrier parallel to platen axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 151 wherein the print-point* is located on or
    adjacent to the platen* of the typewriter, which platen is rotatable about
    an axis, and wherein the axis of rotation of said platform is parallel to
    the axis of rotation of the platen.


CLS 400/152
TXT Type drum having multiple type-set-assemblages:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein the typewriter is provided with a
    member that is (a) cylindrical or cylindroidal, (b) rotatable about an axis
    that extends through the cylinder parallel to the circumference of the
    cylinder, and (c) supporting a plurality of type-set-assemblage* groups of
    type-face* elements on the circumference of the cylinder.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the type drum extends in length to substantially the
    full width of the record-medium* and each of the type-set-assemblages
    extends around the circumference of the type drum.  The number of
    type-set-assemblages provided on the type drum corresponds to the number of
    character* symbols and character-space* distances that may be included
    within the width of the record-medium.  Selection of type-face for the
    first character of a print-line* is made from the first type-set-assemblage
    and selection of the second character of that print-line is made from the
    next adjacent type-set-assemblage, the action being repeated until the
    entire print-line has been imprinted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145.2,  for a cylindrical, deformable type-face-carrier*.


CLS 400/153
TXT Imprint by movement of record-medium against type-face:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein the relative movement between a
    selected or chosen type-face* and the record-medium* occurs as result of
    the record-medium being moved to the type-face for imprint of a character*
    symbol on the record-medium.


CLS 400/154
TXT By hammer impacting record-medium against type-face on type-head (e.g.,
    type shuttle, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 153 wherein the record-medium* is moved to a
    type-face* that is supported by a type-head* by means of a striking member
    that imparts to the record-medium a sudden movement toward the selected or
    chosen type-face.


CLS 400/154.1
TXT Including selection of type-face:

    Subject matter under subclass 154 wherein the typewriter is provided with
    mechanism for selecting or choosing the particular type-face* that is to be
    impressed against the record-medium* by the movement of the record-medium
    toward the type-face.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161.1,  for selecting mechanism on a typewriter having a type-head* movable
    for imprinting.


CLS 400/154.2
TXT Via pulley and cord arrangement (e.g., summing displacements):

    Subject matter under subclass 154.1 wherein said selecting mechanism
    includes an elongated, flexible element trained around a plurality of
    rotatable wheels, the mechanism being connected to a type-head* that
    supports the type-face* elements.


CLS 400/154.3
TXT By shortest peripheral path:

    Subject matter under subclass 154.1 wherein the typewriter is provided with
    a type-head* having a cylindroidal or spheroidal surface having the
    type-face* elements of a type-set-assemblage* thereon, which type-head is
    normally in a particular rest position and is moved to a second position at
    which the selected or chosen type-face will be impressed against the
    record-medium*, and wherein significance is attributed to movement of the
    type-head that results in the least amount of type-head movement as it
    moves from the rest position to the second position.


CLS 400/154.4
TXT Via coded disc in electric or magnetic circuit (e.g., photoelectric):

    Subject matter under subclass 154.1. wherein said selecting mechanism,
    includes one or more circular plates, each plate being rotatable to a
    position where particular index characteristics on the plate(s) are related
    to an arrangement within the mechanism that causes completion of an
    electrical or magnetic circuit, the completion of the circuit effecting
    selection or choice of the type-face* desired by the typist.

    (1)     Note.  The index characteristics may be, for example, notches or
    apertures in the discs, which permit passage of a beam of light that
    actuates a photoelectric cell when the notches or apertures in several
    discs are aligned, or may be magnetic code in one or more discs, which
    completes a circuit when proper alignment of the code disc(s) is
    accomplished.


CLS 400/154.5
TXT Via stepping motor responsive to selection:

    Subject matter under subclass 154.1 wherein said selecting mechanism
    includes an electric motor that rotates incrementally, the rotation being
    caused by the selection or choice of a type-face* and the motor being
    connected to a type-head* that supports the type-face elements.


CLS 400/155
TXT Via electrical or electromagnetic means:

    Subject matter under subclass 154.1 wherein said selecting mechanism
    includes an electrical circuit or an electromagnetic device connected to a
    type-head* that supports the type-face* elements.

    (1)     Note.  The mechanism or circuit for this subclass may include a
    commutator, a solenoid, an electromagnetic coil, an induction coil, or
    other similar device used in the selection or choice of a type-face.


CLS 400/155.1
TXT Including plural-function actuation by electromagnet(s):

    Subject matter under subclass 155 wherein said selecting mechanism includes
    an electromagnet powered by an electrical current, and wherein the
    typewriter includes mechanism for performing at least one other function*,
    which function is energized by either the same electromagnet that energizes
    the selecting mechanism or by a different electromagnet powered by an
    electrical current.


CLS 400/156
TXT Via helical arrangement of projections:

    Subject matter under subclass 154.1 wherein said selecting mechanism
    includes a rotatable cylindroidal member having elements on the cylindrical
    surface thereof that protrude from the surface, which elements are arranged
    to form a helix on the cylindrical surface and which elements engage
    portions of the selecting mechanism to connect the mechanism to a
    type-head* that supports the type-face* elements.


CLS 400/156.1
TXT Via mechanically permutated bar(s), disc(s), or plate(s):

    Subject matter under subclass 154.1 wherein said selecting mechanism
    includes one or more members, each member being either (a) an elongated
    component that is movable along its length, or (b) a circular component
    that is rotatable, or (c) a flat and relatively thin component that is
    movable in a plane parallel to its width and length dimensions, and also
    having particular index characteristics on the member, which member(s)
    is/are moved to a position relative to an arrangement within the mechanism
    where the index characteristics are aligned to enable movement of another
    component of the mechanism to effect selection or choice of the type-face*
    desired by the typist.


CLS 400/156.2
TXT Via planetary gear arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 154.1 wherein said selecting mechanism
    includes a plurality of toothed wheels in mesh one with the other(s) and at
    least one rotating and revolving about another, while in mesh therewith,
    which assemblage of toothed wheels in connected to a type-head* that
    supports type-face* elements, one of which elements is to be selected or
    chosen for impression.


CLS 400/156.3
TXT Including latch means:

    Subject matter under subclass 156.2 wherein the assemblage of toothed
    elements is provided with means to temporarily secure the toothed elements
    together until the selected or chosen type-face* has been impressed against
    the record-medium*.


CLS 400/157
TXT Including type-faces arranged along helical path(s):

    Subject matter under subclass 154 wherein the typewriter is provided with a
    type-head* that is formed as a rotatable, cylindroidal member having
    type-face* elements on the cylindroidal surface thereof, which type-face
    elements are arrayed as a helix on the cylindroidal surface, and wherein
    selection or choice of the type-face that is to be impressed against the
    record-medium* is made from one of the helically arrayed elements.

    (1)     Note.  The type-set-assemblage* of type-faces may be arranged in
    one or more helical paths.


CLS 400/157.1
TXT Including particular structure of hammer(s):

    Subject matter under subclass 154 wherein significance is attributed to
    said striking member or the means for causing movement of, or supporting,
    said striking member.


CLS 400/157.2
TXT Electromagnetically actuated:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.1 wherein the striking member is moved by
    a magnet that is powered by electricity.


CLS 400/157.3
TXT For variable impression (e.g., impact control):

    Subject matter under subclass 157.1 wherein movement of the striking member
    is regulated as to its striking force, whereby the striking force can be
    changed as desired.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    for impact control in a typewriter wherein a type-head* moves
    toward the record-medium.


CLS 400/157.4
TXT Hammer(s) mounted on endless belt or in helical array:

    Subject matter under subclass 157.1 wherein the striking member(s) is/are
    supported on an elongated, closed-loop strip trained around two or more
    pulleys and movable in the direction of its elongation, or wherein the
    striking members are supported on a rotatable, cylindroidal component and
    are arranged in a helix around the circumference of said component.


CLS 400/158
TXT Including platen for moving record-medium against type-face and mechanism
    for feeding record-medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 153 wherein the typewriter is provided with a
    platen* that is a backup for the record-medium* and is also provided with a
    mechanism for moving the record-medium in a line-space* direction, which
    platen also moves the record-medium toward the selected or chosen
    type-face* for imprint of a character* symbol on the record-medium.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the record-medium is moved in a line-space
    direction by a mechanism other than the platen.


CLS 400/158.1
TXT Including moving and feeding by platen:

    Subject matter under subclass 158 wherein the platen* also moves the
    record-medium* in a line-space* direction by rotation of the platen.


CLS 400/159
TXT Including platen for moving record-medium against type-face and mechanism
    for inking type-face:

    Subject matter under subclass 153 wherein the typewriter is provided with a
    platen* that is a backup for the record-medium* and is also provided with a
    mechanism for applying ink* to the imprinting surface or line of a
    type-face*, which platen moves the record-medium toward the selected or
    chosen type-face for imprint of a character* symbol on the record-medium
    after said type-face has been inked.


CLS 400/160
TXT Imprint by pivoting of type-head-carrier and type-head against
    record-medium:


    Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein the typewriter is provided with a
    type-head-carrier* that supports a type-head* for movement relative to said
    carrier so that any of the type-face* elements on the type-head may be
    selected or chosen to be impressed on the record-medium*, and wherein the
    type-head-carrier is supported for arcuate movement of said carrier toward
    the record-medium to imprint the corresponding character* symbol on the
    record-medium.


CLS 400/161
TXT Type-head-carrier movable on movable carriage:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein said type-head-carrier* is
    mounted on a carriage* to be arcuately movable toward the record-medium* to
    impress a selected or chosen type-face* against the record-medium, and
    wherein said carriage is movable to impart character-space* and word-space*
    distances to the carriage and the type-head-carrier that is mounted thereon.


CLS 400/161.1
TXT Including selection of type-face (e.g., on "golf-ball" type-head):

    Subject matter under subclass 161 wherein the typewriter is provided with
    selecting mechanism for moving the type-head* relative to its
    type-head-carrier* to select or choose the particular type-face* that is to
    be impressed against the record-medium* by movement of the type-head toward
    the record-medium.

    (1)     Note.  The term "golf-ball" type-head has been applied to the
    type-heads of this subclass because of the spheroidal configuration of the
    type-head elements found herein.


CLS 400/161.2
TXT Via gear train:

    Subject matter under subclass 161.1 wherein said mechanism for selecting or
    choosing the particular type-face* is driven by an assemblage of toothed
    wheels or toothed members in mesh, one with the other(s), which assemblage
    is connected to a type-head* that supports type-face elements, one of which
    elements is to be selected or chosen for impression.


CLS 400/161.3
TXT Gears mounted on type-head and type-head-carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 161.2 wherein at least one of the toothed
    wheels is supported by, or integral with, the type-head* and at least
    another of the toothed wheels is supported by the type-head-carrier*.


CLS 400/161.4
TXT Including gear (e.g., rack) reciprocated by transmission mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 161.2 wherein said toothed member moves
    to-and-fro in a straight line and is driven by an assemblage of elements
    that converts movement of various kinds into the straight line movement of
    the toothed member.


CLS 400/161.5
TXT Via multiple cam surfaces:

    Subject matter under subclass 161.1 wherein said mechanism for selecting or
    choosing the particular type-face* is driven by a plurality of cam surfaces
    that are connected by way of cam surface followers to the type-head* that
    supports type-face elements, one of which elements is to be selected or
    chosen for impression.

    (1)     Note.  A "cam surface" is defined as the edge periphery of a disc
    that rotates about an axis, the radial distance from the axis to the
    periphery varying around the periphery.  As the disc rotates, the distance
    of a follower that is in contact with the periphery will increase and
    decrease relative to the axis of the disc, thus the rotation of the disc
    will effect substantially radial movement of the follower.  The cam
    surfaces may be on separate disc elements or may be on a single member
    having separate cam surfaces.


CLS 400/162
TXT Type-head movable for selection of type-face:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein the typewriter is provided with
    selecting mechanism for moving the type-head* relatively to its
    type-head-carrier* to select or choose the particular type-face* that is to
    be impressed against the record-medium* by movement of the type-head toward
    the record-medium.

    (1)     Note.  The difference between this subclass (162) and subclass
    161.1 above is that in this subclass the type-head is movable for selection
    of the particular type-face, whereas in subclass 161.1 the type-head is
    mounted on a type-head-carrier that is movable toward the record-medium,
    and the type-head-carrier is mounted on a carriage* that is movable for
    character-space* distances.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154.1,  for selecting a mechanism in a typewriter having a hammer movable
    for imprinting.

    161.1,  and see (1) Note above.


CLS 400/162.1
TXT Via pulley and cord arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein said selecting mechanism includes
    an elongated, flexible element trained around a plurality of rotatable
    wheels, the mechanism being connected to a type-head* that supports the
    type-face* elements.


CLS 400/162.2
TXT Via shortest peripheral path:

    Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein the typewriter is provided with a
    type-head* having a cylindroidal or spheroidal surface having the
    type-face* elements of a type-set-assemblage* thereon, which type-head is
    normally in a particular rest position and is moved to a second position at
    which the selected or chosen type-face will be impressed against the
    record-medium*, and wherein significance is attributed to movement of the
    type-head that results in the least amount of type-head movement as it
    moves from the rest position to the second position.


CLS 400/162.3
TXT Via coded disc in electric or magnetic circuit (e.g., photoelectric):

    Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein said selecting mechanism includes
    one or more circular plates, each plate being rotatable to a position where
    particular index characteristics on the plate(s) are related to an
    arrangement within the mechanism that causes completion of an electrical or
    magnetic circuit, the completion of the circuit effecting selection or
    choice of the type-face* desired by the typist.

    (1)     Note.  The index characteristics may be, for example, notches or
    apertures in the discs, which permit passage of a beam of light, that
    actuates a photoelectric cell when the notches or apertures in several
    discs are aligned, or may be a magnetic code in one or more discs, which
    completes a circuit when proper alignment of the code disc(s) is
    accomplished.


CLS 400/163
TXT Via stepping motor responsive to selection:

    Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein said selecting mechanism includes
    an electric motor that rotates incrementally, the rotation being caused by
    the selection or choice of a type-face* and the motor being connected to a
    type-head* that supports the type-face elements.


CLS 400/163.1
TXT Via electrical or electromagnetic means:

    Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein said selecting mechanism includes
    an electrical circuit or an electromagnetic device connected to a
    type-head* that supports the type-face* elements.

    (1)     Note.  The mechanism or circuit for this subclass may include a
    commutator, a solenoid, an electromagnetic coil, an induction coil, or
    other similar device used in the selection or choice of a type-face.


CLS 400/163.2
TXT Including electromagnetically actuated type-head movement toward
    record-medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 163.1 wherein said electromagnetic device
    causes the type-head* to be moved in the direction of the record-medium* in
    order to effect the imprint of the selected type-face* element.


CLS 400/163.3
TXT Including plural-function actuation by electromagnet(s):

    Subject matter under subclass 163.1 wherein said selecting mechanism
    includes an electromagnet powered by an electrical current, and wherein the
    typewriter includes mechanism for performing at least one other function*,
    which function is energized by either the same electromagnet that energizes
    the selecting mechanism or by a different electromagnet powered by an
    electrical current.


CLS 400/164
TXT Via helical arrangement of projections:

    Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein said selecting mechanism includes
    a rotatable cylindroidal member having elements on the cylindrical surface
    thereof that protrude from the surface, which elements are arranged to form
    a helix on the cylindrical surface and which elements engage portions of
    the selecting mechanism to connect the mechanism to a type-head* that
    supports the type-face* elements.


CLS 400/164.1
TXT Via pneumatic actuation:

    Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein said selecting mechanism is
    caused to operate by the energy that is transmitted and said mechanism by
    way of exertion of a force upon a gaseous material.


CLS 400/164.2
TXT Via setting elements actuating selector-command members:

    Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein said selecting mechanism includes
    one or more members, each member being either (a) an elongated component
    that is movable along its length, or (b) a circular component that is
    rotatable, or (c) a flat and relatively thin component that is movable in a
    plane parallel to its width and length dimensions, and also having
    particular index characteristics on the member, which member(s) is/are
    moved to a position relative to an arrangement within the mechanism where
    the index characteristics are aligned to enable movement of another
    component of the mechanism to effect selection or choice of the type-face*
    desired by the typist.


CLS 400/164.3
TXT Control arm connected to selection gear and movable to engage
    key-lever-actuated abutment:

    Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein said selecting mechanism includes
    a pivotable lever having at one end thereof a toothed portion that is in
    mesh with a toothed wheel that is associated with and drives the
    type-head*, which lever has at the other end thereof a portion that will
    engage any of a plurality of stops when one of the stops is interposed into
    the path of pivoting of the lever, the inter-position of the selected stop
    to be engaged being made by the depression of a selected key* element.


CLS 400/164.4
TXT Via stop pins actuatable by key-board:

    Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein said selecting mechanism includes
    a plurality of slender, elongated elements that are connected to the
    type-head* for movement there of, each of said elements being also
    connected to and moved by the depression of a selected key* element.


CLS 400/164.5
TXT Toothed member connected to selection gear and slidable by key-lever
    movement:

    Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein said selecting mechanism includes
    a bar having serrations or teeth along one edge thereof, the serrations
    being in mesh with a toothed wheel that is linked to the type-head* for
    movement thereof, which bar is reciprocated to various extents in
    accordance with the selection of a particular key* element and the
    depression of the selected key.


CLS 400/164.6
TXT Selection gear rotated by key-lever movement:

    Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein said selecting mechanism includes
    a toothed wheel connected to the type-head* for movement thereof, which
    toothed wheel is turned by the depression of a key* element corresponding
    to the selected character* symbol desired to be typed.


CLS 400/165
TXT Simultaneous rotation and translation of type-head by manually powered
    actuation (e.g., helical shift):

    Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein said selecting mechanism moves a
    type-head* that is formed as a rotatable cylindroidal member having
    type-face* elements on the cylindroidal surface thereof, which type-face
    elements are arrayed as a helix on the cylindroidal surface, and wherein
    selection or choice of the type-face that is to be impressed against a
    record-medium* is made by turning the member about its axis of rotation and
    moving the member along the axis at the same time it is turning, the
    movement being caused by a hand of the typist.


CLS 400/165.1
TXT Via manually powered actuation other than by key-board (e.g., stylus
    selection):

    Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein selection or choice of the
    type-face* that is to be impressed against the record-medium* is made by a
    typist who moves a member that is part of a selecting mechanism that does
    not include a key-board*.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass (165.1) the typist manipulates a slender,
    elongated rod (i.e., a stylus) to select or choose the particular type-face
    for impression.


CLS 400/165.2
TXT Including type-head movable to print-point by actuator common to all
    type-faces:

    Subject matter under subclass 165.1 wherein said mechanism includes a
    type-head* that is moved from a rest position to the print-point* position
    by a member that causes only such movement, and wherein selection or choice
    of the type-face* element that is to be impressed against the
    record-medium* is made by a hand of the typist.

    (1)     Note.  In most typewriters that include a type-head having a
    type-set-assemblage* thereon, depression of a key* element causes at least
    two movements of the type-head. One such movements is for selection or
    choice of the type-face that is to be impressed, and another movement is
    for moving the type-head against the print-point; therefore an actuator for
    each key element is required.  In a typewriter of this subclass, selection
    is made by a typist who moves the type-head manually, and movement of the
    type-head to the print-point is made by a single actuator that only moves
    the type-head to the print-point.  A typewriter with this kind of mechanism
    is often called a "toy" typewriter.

    (2)     Note.  In this subclass (165.2) selection of the particular
    type-face may be made by rotating the type-head manually or with the aid of
    a rack and pinion that is manually powered.


CLS 400/165.3
TXT Selection by rotatable dial:

    Subject matter under subclass 165.2 wherein the type-head* has affixed
    thereto a plate bearing indicia, letters or character* symbols
    corresponding to those which may be imprinted on the record-medium*, which
    plate is turned by a hand of the typist to thereby turn the type-head for
    selection or choice of the type-face* to be impressed against the
    record-medium.


CLS 400/166
TXT Including impact control:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein the arcuate movement of said
    type-head-carrier* toward the record-medium* is regulated as to its
    impression force, whereby the impression force can be changed as desired.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157.3,  for impact control in a typewriter wherein a hammer moves the
    record-medium toward a selected type-face*.


CLS 400/167
TXT Including rebound control:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein the type-head-carrier* is
    supported for arcuate movement from a rest position to a print-point* and
    for return arcuate movement from the print-point to the rest position, and
    wherein the return movement is regulated as to the force with which the
    type-head* is returned whereby the type-head will come to rest gently, or
    wherein the return movement is stopped as soon as the type-head reaches its
    rest position whereby the type-head is prevented from springing away from
    its rest position after return.


CLS 400/168
TXT Articulated-support joint:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein the type-head-carrier* is
    supported for arcuate movement from a rest position to a print-point* and
    for return arcuate movement from the print-point to the rest position, and
    wherein significance is attributed to the connection between the
    type-head-carrier and its support, which connection enables the arcuate
    movement to occur.


CLS 400/169
TXT Detenting to fix type-head for imprinting:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein the typewriter is provided with
    mechanism on the type-head-carrier* to temporarily secure the type-head* to
    the type-head-carrier while said carrier is moving toward the
    record-medium* whereby the selected or chosen type-face* element will not
    move relative to the type-head-carrier.


CLS 400/170
TXT Including movable printing anvil within type-head:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein the type-head* is a hollow member
    having type-face* elements on the exterior surface thereof, and wherein the
    member is provided with one or more elements adjacent to the interior
    surface of the member, which element(s) move(s) to engage the interior
    surface opposite to the type-face element that has been selected or chosen
    to be impressed against the record-medium*.


CLS 400/171
TXT Plural type-set-assemblages selectively moveable from a storage station to
    a printing station:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein the typewriter is provided with
    more than one type-set-assemblage*, only one of which assemblages is
    actively in use during any particular period of time, the other(s) of the
    assemblages being retained inactively at a location on or adjacent to the
    typewriter for easy removal from the inactive location to the active
    location.


CLS 400/172
TXT Type-faces mounted on type chips and removable from storage for printing:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein the typewriter is provided with a
    type-set-assemblage* comprising type-face* elements all of which elements
    are separate and separable one from the others, and all of which elements
    are supported in or on a type-face-carrier* from which carrier each
    selected or chosen type-face is taken for impression of the type-face
    against a record-medium* and replaced into the carrier.


CLS 400/173
TXT With means for exposing last-typed character:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein significance is attributed to
    means for showing the typist the character* symbol that was imprinted just
    prior to the time that the typist wished to see the character.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124.01+, for similar subject matter in a "matrix" printer typewriter.


CLS 400/174
TXT Type-head, per se:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein significance is attributed to the
    type-head* that bears a type-set-assemblage* in a typewriter.


CLS 400/175
TXT Detachable from carrier (e.g., inter-changeable):

    Subject matter under subclass 174 wherein the type-head* may be removed
    from the type-head-carrier* and replaced thereon or another type-head
    replaced on the type-head-carrier.


CLS 400/176
TXT HAVING FLUID-PRESSURE POWER DRIVE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a typewriter or a portion
    thereof is caused to operate by energy that is derived from or transmitted
    via the exertion of force upon a fluid (i.e., a flowable material).

    (1)     Note.  The most usual fluid employed in these typewriters is air,
    but a liquid may also be employed as a fluid-pressure means.


CLS 400/177
TXT Including pneumatic decoder for perforated tape:

    Subject matter under subclass 176 wherein the typewriter is controlled for
    operation by a mechanism that includes (a) a strip having holes therein,
    and (b) means for moving the strip relative to a bar having holes therein
    whereby the strip will cover the holes in the bar except when a hole in the
    strip matches a hole in the bar, and (c) means for passing air or gas
    through the holes in the bar when a hole in the bar is uncovered by a hole
    in the strip, whereby a signal or pulse is generated by the passage of air
    or gas through a hole in the bar, and (d) means for converting the signals
    or pulses so generated into one or more operation(s) of the typewriter.


CLS 400/178
TXT For producing typewriter-control tape (e.g., perforated tape, etc.)

    Subject matter under subclass 176 wherein the energy of said fluid is used
    to form indicia on a strip that will subsequently be used to regulate the
    operation(s) of a typewriter.

    (1)     Note.  The fluid pressure may be applied to a punch (or a plurality
    of punches) that cause a tape to be perforated, or may be applied to form
    indicia on a tape that will control a typewriter.


CLS 400/179
TXT For type-face selection or choice:

    Subject matter under subclass 176 wherein the energy of said fluid is used
    to select or choose a type-face* element that is to be impressed against a
    record-medium*, or is used to cause the selected or chosen type-face
    element to be impressed against the record-medium to imprint a character*
    symbol thereon.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the typewriter usually operates by a typist
    depressing a key* element, the movement of the key producing the air
    pressure that actuates a type-bar* (to which the selected type-face is
    affixed) from rest position to the print-point* position.

    (2)     Note.  The terms "select" and "choose" (or variants of those terms)
    and the differences between the terms are discussed in the Glossary under
    definitions such as case-shift*, type-face-carrier*, type-head* and
    type-head-carrier*.  Briefly, a particular type-face is selected from among
    the many available from a type-set-assemblage*, whereas an upper-case* form
    of letter (as distinguished from a lower-case* form of the same letter) is
    chosen from the forms available on one key* element.


CLS 400/180
TXT Including key-board driven by external pneumatic source:

    Subject matter under subclass 179 wherein the energy of said fluid is used
    to depress the selected key* elements on the key-board* of the typewriter,
    and wherein the force exerted upon the fluid is applied by means outside of
    the typewriter.


CLS 400/181
TXT By pneumatic actuation of type-face or type-bar:

    Subject matter under subclass 179 wherein the energy of said fluid is used
    to cause a selected or chosen type-face* element or a type-bar* carrying
    such element to be impressed against the record-medium* to imprint a
    character* symbol thereon.


CLS 400/182
TXT For movement of carriage or platen:

    Subject matter under subclass 176 wherein the energy of said fluid is used
    to cause motion of either the carriage* or the platen* of the typewriter.


CLS 400/183
TXT Including line-spacing:

    Subject matter under subclass 182 wherein the motion of either the
    carriage* or of the platen* is such as to effect line-space* distances to
    the record-medium*.


CLS 400/184
TXT HAVING TYPEWRITER-CONTROLLED RECIPROCABLE ELECTROMAGNETIC DRIVE FOR PLURAL
    FUNCTIONS IN SAME TYPEWRITER:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the typewriter is
    provided with means to actuate the operation of more than one function*
    thereof, each of said means including a magnetic* motor energized by
    electricity and movable to-and-fro in a straight line, and the actuation of
    each of said means being initiated by a typist who is typing on the
    typewriter that is being actuated.

    (1)     Note.  The "motor" of this subclass is usually a solenoid energized
    by electricity and initiated by pressing a switch that is connected to a
    key* element other than a character* key. For similar structure wherein
    character key elements actuate type-bar* action mechanisms, see subclass
    359.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359,    and see (1) Note above.


CLS 400/185
TXT HAVING POWER-DRIVEN OPERATOR FOR PLURAL FUNCTIONS:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the typewriter is
    provided with means to actuate the operation of more than one function*
    thereof, each of said means being energized by force other than that
    supplied by the typist.

    (1)     Note.  For the purposes of this and indented subclasses, the
    operation of line-space* means is considered to be equivalent to the
    operation of record-medium* feeding means and effectively is only a single
    function.


CLS 400/186
TXT Via continuously rotated power roll selectively connected to operate:

    Subject matter under subclass 185 wherein the energizing force drives one
    function* or another function at the will of the typist by way of a
    continuously rotated power roll.

    (1)     Note.  The term "continuously rotated power roll" is defined below
    in subclass 370 as that structure is applied to operate selected type-bar*
    members.  In this subclass (186) a similar structure is used to operate a
    selected one of plural functions or is used to operate an auxiliary
    function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370,    and see (1) Note above.


CLS 400/187
TXT Usable selectively (e.g., for powered or manual operation, alternative
    usable functions, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 185 wherein the energizing force drives one
    function* or another function at the will of the typist, or wherein the
    energizing force is either used or not used to operate the typewriter at
    the will of the typist.

    (1)     Note.  When the energizing force is not used to drive the
    typewriter, the typist supplies the force needed to drive the
    typewriter-actuating means.


CLS 400/188
TXT FOR TYPING ON REVERSE SURFACE OF RECORD-MEDIUM:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a record-medium* has a
    first surface which faces toward a platen*, and the record-medium has a
    second surface which faces toward a type-face* when the type-face is at a
    print-point*, and wherein significance is attributed to imprinting
    character* symbols on the first surface of the record-medium.

    (1)     Note.  The characters are usually in mirror image, and the
    record-medium is either transparent so as to be able to read the characters
    through the record-medium, or the record-medium is a "hectograph" master.
    See Glossary, section III, for further discussion of hectograph under terms
    ribbon* and transfer-medium*.


CLS 400/189
TXT By simultaneous use of both surfaces of same ribbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 188 wherein a ribbon* is used as a
    transfer-medium* for imprinting said character* symbols on said first
    surface, and wherein the same ribbon is used as a transfer-medium for
    imprinting corresponding character symbols on another record-medium surface
    or on a surface of another record-medium at the same time the character
    symbols are imprinted on the first surface.


CLS 400/190
TXT By use of "carbon paper":

    Subject matter under subclass 188 wherein carbon paper is used as a
    transfer-medium* for imprinting said character* symbols on said first
    surface.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note under subclass 497 in this class for a
    discussion of the term carbon paper.


CLS 400/191
TXT INCLUDING INTERPOSED INKING DEVICE (E.G., RIBBON) FOR RECORD-MEDIUM:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein significance is
    attributed to a transfer-medium* which is intended to be positioned between
    a record-medium* and a type-face* to have simultaneous surface contact with
    the type-face and the record-medium to form a character* on the
    record-medium, or to the manner of renewing the transfer characteristics of
    the transfer-medium while it is on the typewriter, or to the manner of
    holding the transfer-medium on the typewriter, or to the manner of moving
    the transfer-medium relative to the print-point* on the typewriter.

    (1)     Note.  A transfer-medium which is only for correction of an error
    in typing is found in this class, subclass 697.

    (2)     Note.  Inking a type-face directly for forming a character without
    the use of an interposed transfer-medium is found in various subclasses in
    this class indented under subclass 383.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass (191) provides for an interposed inking member
    having a configuration other than an elongated ribbon*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    383,    and see (2) Note above.

    697,    and see (1) Note above.


CLS 400/192
TXT Moved by continuously rotating power drive intermittently applied:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the transfer-medium* is a ribbon*
    having a length dimension and a width dimension, and wherein movement along
    either dimension is imparted to the ribbon by way of a rotated power drive
    intermittently applied, the rotation of the drive shaft not stopping during
    the operation of the typewriter.

    (1)     Note.  The term "rotated power drive intermittently applied" is
    defined below in subclass 365 as that term is applied to operate selected
    type-bar* members.  In this subclass (192) a similar structure is used to
    cause feeding of a ribbon or actuation of the vibrator* for a ribbon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    365,    and see (1) Note above.


CLS 400/193
TXT Inking device handheld during typing:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the transfer-medium* is manually
    supported between the record-medium* and the type-face* as the type-face is
    impressed against the record-medium through the transfer-medium.


CLS 400/194
TXT Endless ribbon or cartridge therefor:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the transfer-medium* is a ribbon*
    in the form of a closed-loop band having an elongated dimension.

    (1)     Note.  The ribbon may be driven in a single direction, thus
    avoiding need for ribbon-reversing structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237,    for an ink* ribbon, per se.


CLS 400/195
TXT Mobius strip:

    Subject matter under subclass 194 wherein the ribbon is a one-sided surface
    formed by holding a first end of an elongated rectangle fixed, rotating the
    opposite end 180 about an axis coincident with a centerline of the
    rectangle parallel to the long dimension thereof, and securing the opposite
    end to the first end.

    (1)     Note.  A Mobius strip is a unique topological phenomenon in that an
    object formed as described above will apparently have two "surfaces", but
    mathematically and actually will have only one surface.  This can be proved
    by forming a Mobius strip as described and then applying a mark along the
    surface continuously along the length thereof without lifting the marker
    from the surface or crossing the edge of the strip.  The experimenter will
    find that the marker will eventually reach the mark initially produced,
    thus proving the actuality of only a single surface. In a ribbon*, this
    permits typing against the apparently two "surfaces" without further
    manipulation of the ribbon.


CLS 400/196
TXT Including storage (e.g., in cartridge, etc.) of ribbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 194 wherein a portion of the band is
    supported in a holder, and the band and holder are attachable to and
    removable from the typewriter as a unit to facilitate replacement of the
    band.


CLS 400/196.1
TXT Having ribbon stored in pleated form:

    Subject matter under subclass 196 wherein the portion of the band in the
    holder is folded in a regular pattern of folds that are transverse to the
    elongated dimension of the band, and are alternately folded in opposite
    folds.


CLS 400/197
TXT Renovation of used ribbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the transfer-medium* is a ribbon*
    which ribbon during typing is at least partially depleted of ink*, and the
    ribbon is treated to maintain or increase its efficacy as a transfer-medium
    while the ribbon is on the typewriter.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of ribbon treatment provided for in this subclass
    are adding ink to the ribbon, moistening the ribbon, etc.


CLS 400/198
TXT With ink heater (e.g., for melting solid ink):

    Subject matter under subclass 197 wherein ink* which is on or to be added
    to the ribbon* is relatively thick, hard, or viscous at normal room
    temperature, and wherein the typewriter is provided with means for
    elevating the temperature of the ink to increase its flowability.

    (1)     Note.  Also found in this subclass is a disclosure of means to heat
    a record-medium* adjacent to the print-point* to promote uniform
    distribution of the ink imprinted on the record-medium.


CLS 400/199
TXT By discrete auxiliary band movable with ribbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 197 wherein the ribbon* is movable in a
    direction parallel to its longitudinal extent while it is on the
    typewriter, and the ribbon treatment includes contacting the ribbon with a
    separate elongated strip of material, said strip moving in face to face
    contact and concurrently with at least a portion of the ribbon.

    (1)     Note.  The band may be loaded with ink* to replenish the ink supply
    in the ribbon.


CLS 400/200
TXT Selectively actuatable re-inker:

    Subject matter under subclass 197 wherein the ribbon* is treated by a
    device which adds ink* to the ribbon; said device being movable at the will
    of the typist, to either a position on the typewriter at which the device
    is operative to add ink to a position at which it is inoperative to add ink.


CLS 400/201
TXT Of multicolor ribbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 197 wherein the ribbon* which is treated has
    plural fields of differently pigmented or tinted ink* materials.


CLS 400/202
TXT Renovator attachable to typewriter for replenishing ribbon ink:

    Subject matter under subclass 197 wherein the ribbon* is treated by a
    device which adds ink* to the ribbon, said device being detachably mounted
    on the typewriter.


CLS 400/202.1
TXT Attached to ribbon spool:

    Subject matter under subclass 202 wherein the ribbon* is wound in
    convolutions on a reel, which is mounted on the typewriter, and the device
    for adding ink* is mounted in or on said reel.


CLS 400/202.2
TXT And includes refillable chamber (e.g., reservoir) for liquid ink:


    Subject matter under subclass 202 wherein the device for adding ink* to the
    ribbon* comprises a container which can be resupplied with flowable ink.


CLS 400/202.3
TXT And conveyor or discrete drops of ink:

    Subject matter under subclass 202.2 wherein the ink* from the container is
    supplied to the ribbon* via a member that transports the ink in separate
    globulelike portions.


CLS 400/202.4
TXT And re-inking roller:

    Subject matter under subclass 202.2 wherein the ink* from the container is
    supplied to the ribbon* via a rotatable member having a cylindrical surface
    for receiving and transporting the ink.


CLS 400/203
TXT Ribbon disposed within platen:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the transfer-medium* is a
    ribbon*, and the ribbon is housed interiorly of a hollow typewriter platen*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242,    for a spool mounted on a typewriter.


CLS 400/204
TXT For typing plural copies simultaneously with ribbon(s) (e.g., duplicate
    typing):

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the transfer-medium* is a ribbon*
    and wherein plural portions of the same ribbon, or plural ribbons, are
    positionable relative to plural record-medium* pieces so that a single
    impact of a type-face* against the record-medium* imprints an identical
    character* on each of said pieces at the same time.

    (1)     Note.  Proper placement of a patent into this or an indented
    subclass requires recitation of a transfer-medium in ribbon form. Usually
    the typewriter of these subclasses is used to type "duplicate original
    copy" texts of typed material. The term "original copy" refers to typed
    text that is imprinted with the use of a ribbon coated with ink* to form
    characters that are not


            easily erased from the record-medium.  The ribbon used may be an
    inked fabric ribbon, although in some typewriters a different form of
    ribbon, called a "carbon ribbon" or a "carbon-ink ribbon" has come into
    use.  An " original copy" is distinguished from a "carbon copy" in at least
    two respects:  an original copy is on a record-medium that is located
    adjacent to a fabric ribbon or a carbon ribbon at the print-point*, so that
    a type-face will impact directly or through the ribbon to cause
    transplacing of ink directly onto the surface of the record-medium, and the
    character imprinted onto the original may be erased only with difficulty; a
    carbon copy is on a record medium that under lies an original copy and a
    sheet of transfer-medium, usually consisting of "carbon paper", and the
    character imprinted onto a carbon copy is erased easily.

    (2)     Note.  In placing a patent as an original into this or one of the
    subclasses indented hereunder, consideration must be taken of the intent of
    the patent as determined by various criteria.  The primary criterion is the
    intent to produce a plurality of original copy texts. This is determined by
    a positive disclosure of at least one of the following criteria:  (a) at
    least two record-medium pieces are imprinted each via a ribbon with
    "permanent" (i.e., not easily erasable) ink, (b) the ribbon(s) being used
    are reversible (i.e., fed in two opposite directions so that the ribbon is
    used and reused). If the specification is not clear as to plural original
    copy texts, the patent may be cross-referenced herein, but placed as an
    original patent into subclass 497 as appropriate.  The use of carbon paper
    in typing carbon copies is found in this class, subclass 497.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    497,    and see (2) Note above.


CLS 400/205
TXT Including holder for short length of ribbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 204 wherein there is provided a device for
    supporting at least one ribbon* in position relative to a platen* to
    receive a type-face* impact and wherein the length of the ribbon or ribbons
    supported by said device approximates the platen dimension along the
    print-line*.


CLS 400/205.1
TXT Holder movable to inoperative position on typewriter:

    Subject matter under subclass 205 wherein the device, while mounted on the
    typewriter, is selectively positionable by the typist to move the ribbon*
    or ribbons supported by the device to a position where the ribbon or
    ribbons will not receive the type-face* impact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206.2,  for a similar holder for plural ribbons.


CLS 400/206
TXT Using plural ribbon(s) [e.g., additional ribbon(s)]:

    Subject matter under subclass 204 wherein the imprinting of identical
    character* symbols on the record-medium* pieces is accomplished by the
    concurrent use of more than one ribbon.


CLS 400/206.1
TXT Including "carbon paper" ribbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 wherein at least one ribbon* is a ribbon
    formed from carbon paper.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note under subclass 497 in this class for a
    discussion of the term carbon paper.


CLS 400/206.2
TXT And ribbon holder movable to inoperative position on typewriter:


    Subject matter under subclass 206 wherein there is provided a device for
    supporting at least one ribbon* in position on the typewriter to receive a
    type-face* impact, and wherein said device, while mounted on the typewriter
    is selectively positionable by the typist to move the ribbon or ribbons
    supported by the device to a position where the ribbon or ribbons will not
    receive the type-face impact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205.1,  for a similar holder for a short length of ribbon.


CLS 400/206.3
TXT On plural coaxial spools:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 wherein ribbon*-receiving reels are
    provided to mount the ribbons on the typewriter, and wherein at least two
    of the reels are so mounted on the typewriter, as to have a common
    centerline about which the reels may rotate in paying-out or taking-up the
    ribbons.


CLS 400/206.4
TXT On single spool:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 wherein at least one ribbon*-receiving
    reel is provided to mount the ribbons on the typewriter, and wherein more
    than one ribbon is convoluted on a single reel.


CLS 400/207
TXT Package for ribbon facilitating mounting of ribbon on typewriter (e.g.,
    ribbon cartridge):

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the transfer-medium* is a ribbon*
    housed in a receptacle, and wherein the ribbon and receptacle are
    attachable to and removable from the typewriter as a unit, or the
    receptacle contributes in simplifying attachment of the ribbon to the
    typewriter.

    (1)     Note.  A ribbon spool for a typewriter with no additional package
    structure is found in this class, subclasses 242+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242+,   and see (1) Note above


CLS 400/208
TXT Package attached to typewriter:

    Subject matter under subclass 207 wherein the ribbon* and the receptacle
    remain on the typewriter during typing.


CLS 400/208.1
TXT And includes separable assemblage of spools:

    Subject matter under subclass 208 wherein the ribbon* receptacle comprises
    a pair of interconnected ribbon-receiving reels, and wherein the reels are
    disconnected from each other when attached to the typewriter.


CLS 400/209
TXT For bottom-strike typewriter:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein significance is attributed to a
    ribbon* specialized for use in a typewriter in which type-face* elements
    impact against the platen* (and thereby impact against a record-medium*
    that is backed by the platen) at a print-point* located adjacent to an
    underneath part of the platen.


CLS 400/210
TXT For boldface typing:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein significance is attributed to
    imprinting character* symbols formed of lines having greater than normal
    thickness.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304,    for varying carriage feed to accomplish a similar result.

    466,    for a type-face* configuration which accomplishes a similar result.


CLS 400/211
TXT Including mechanism for shifting ribbon laterally at print-point:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the transfer-medium* is a ribbon
    and provision is made for moving the ribbon in a direction transverse to
    its elongated dimension, such movement occurring in an area of the
    typewriter adjacent to the print-point*.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass (211) the transverse movement occurs by
    reason of the entire ribbon and the spool(s) on which the ribbon is wound
    or mounted being moved in the transverse direction.


CLS 400/212
TXT Via electrically powered actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 211 wherein the movement of a ribbon* in a
    transverse direction is accomplished with the help of force derived from
    electrical energy.


CLS 400/213
TXT For impact of successive type-face on one field of ribbon in path not
    parallel to longitudinal extent of ribbon (e.g., "zigzag", oblique, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 211 wherein type-face* elements strike the
    same print-point* of a typewriter in a series of impacts against a ribbon*
    that moves in a length direction between successive impacts and that has a
    zone of a particular color, the dimensions of which zone correspond to the
    length and to at least part of the width of the ribbon, and wherein
    succeeding elements impact the zone at areas of the zone that are spaced
    widthwise as well as lengthwise of the ribbon.

    (1)     Note.  The path of the successive impacts on the ribbon so moved
    may be zigzag, oblique, sinusoidal, etc., as the ribbon moved
    longitudinally and transversely of the print-point.


CLS 400/213.1
TXT Via ribbon vibrator:

    Subject matter under subclass 213 wherein the transverse movement of the
    ribbon* is accomplished by a ribbon vibrator*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215+,   for a ribbon vibrator and means for moving the vibrator.


CLS 400/214
TXT Plural ribbons shiftable laterally (e.g., by duplicate vibrators):

    Subject matter under subclass 211 wherein more than one ribbon* is mounted
    on the typewriter, and provision is made for such transverse movement to be
    given to each of the ribbons.


CLS 400/215
TXT By ribbon vibrator:

    Subject matter under subclass 211 wherein at least a portion of an
    elongated ribbon* is constrained for movement within a vibrator* and
    wherein the vibrator moves the constrained portion transversely to the
    elongated dimension of the ribbon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213.1,  for a ribbon vibrator producing a particular path on the ribbon.


CLS 400/215.1
TXT Including vibrator shiftable during use of nonfeed character key (e.g., for
    typing accent mark, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 215 wherein the typewriter is provided with
    means for normally moving the carriage* to the extent of a character-space*
    for each depression of a character* key* and with means for normally moving
    the vibrator* concurrently with carriage movement, and wherein significance
    is attributed to a mode of operation in which a character key is depressed
    to move the vibrator without concurrent movement of the carriage.

    (1)     Note.  The mode of operation defined above enables two type-face*
    elements to be impacted successively at the same print-point* on the
    record-medium* so that a letter and an accent mark for that letter may be
    imprinted.


CLS 400/215.2
TXT With retardation of vibrator return after type-face impact (e.g., with
    dashpot):

    Subject matter under subclass 215 wherein the vibrator* movement is
    regulated in such a manner that the ribbon* is temporarily held at its
    print-point* covering position for receiving successive type-face* impacts
    without completely uncovering the print-point after each impact.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for a disclosure wherein the
    print-point remains covered by the ribbon when typing at a normal rate, but
    if the typist stops typing, the vibrator moves the ribbon to permit viewing
    the print-point.


CLS 400/215.3
TXT With elevation and holding of vibrator above print-point (e.g., to
    facilitate ribbon insertion:

    Subject matter under subclass 215 wherein provision is made for selectively
    lifting and sustaining the vibrator* in a position higher than the
    print-point* to facilitate access to the vibrator.


CLS 400/215.4
TXT With inactivation of vibrator (e.g., for cutting a stencil):

    Subject matter under subclass 215 wherein provision is made for selectively
    controlling the movement of the vibrator* in a manner such that the typist
    may choose to not have the vibrator move transversely so that the ribbon*
    will not cover the print-point* during typing.


CLS 400/216
TXT Including variable throw of vibrator:

    Subject matter under subclass 215 wherein provision is made for changing
    the extent of transverse movement imparted to the vibrator* so as to change
    the extent the ribbon* is moved transversely relative to the print-point*.


CLS 400/216.1
TXT For diverse-field (e.g., plural-color) ribbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 216 wherein the ribbon* has zones with
    different characteristics, each zone having dimensions that correspond to
    the length and to at least part of the width of the ribbon, and the change
    in the extent of the transverse vibrator* movement is for changing the
    ribbon zone which is over the print-point* to receive the type-face* impact.


CLS 400/216.2
TXT With typewriter-controlled change of field:

    Subject matter under subclass 216.1 wherein a first part of a typewriter
    moves to accomplish its intended first-part function, and during said
    movement the first part engages a second part to move the second part, and
    wherein movement of the second part causes movement of the vibrator* that
    changes the ribbon* zone that is over the print-point*.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for a typewriter wherein the typist
    may preset the typewriter to imprint selected columns of type in different
    colors of ink*.


CLS 400/216.3
TXT By movement parallel to print-line:

    Subject matter under subclass 216.1 wherein the vibrator movement is in the
    same direction as the longitudinal extent of the print-line*.


CLS 400/216.4
TXT Vibrator throw controlled via alternate pins selectively inserted in slots:

    Subject matter under subclass 216.1 wherein an assemblage of elements for
    moving the vibrator* to change ribbon* zones includes one member or members
    having plural peg-like projections selectively positionable in respective
    elongated openings in another member or members, and wherein the extent of
    vibrator movement is controlled according to which of the pins is
    positioned relative to its respective opening.


CLS 400/216.5
TXT Field selection by selectively positioned stop faces to limit vibrator
    movement:

    Subject matter under subclass 215.1 wherein an assemblage of elements for
    moving the vibrator* to change ribbon* zones includes a member having a
    surface which, during vibrator movement, is intended to contact an abutment
    surface on another member, and wherein the extent of vibrator movement for
    zone selection is controlled by the position of said abutment surface.


CLS 400/216.6
TXT To compensate for case-shift:

    Subject matter under subclass 216.1 wherein significance is attributed to
    accommodating the extent of transverse vibrator* movement to take into
    account relative change of position between a record-medium* and a
    type-face* as a result of case-shift*.


CLS 400/217
TXT To shift impact path (e.g., during ribbon reversal):

    Subject matter under subclass 211 wherein the ribbon* is intended to
    receive multiple type-face* impacts along a first zone extending parallel
    to the elongated dimensions of the ribbon, and wherein significance is
    attributed to the manner of moving the ribbon transversely relative to its
    elongated dimension so that subsequent type-face impacts will be in a
    different zone transversely spaced from the first zone.


CLS 400/217.1
TXT By adjustable ribbon guide spaced from supply spool:

    Subject matter under subclass 217 wherein the ribbon* is wound in
    convolutions of a reel and is led from the reel past the print-point* via a
    member which causes the ribbon to follow a predetermined path, and wherein
    the transverse movement of the ribbon is caused by selectively changing the
    position of said member relative to the print-point.


CLS 400/218
TXT Ribbon-reversing mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the transfer-medium* is a ribbon*
    and the provision is made for moving the ribbon relative to a print-point*
    in a first direction as character* symbols are imprinted on a
    record-medium* during typing, and wherein significance is attributed to a
    manner of causing the ribbon to move relative to the print-point in a
    direction opposite to said first direction for further typing of characters
    on the record-medium using the same ribbon.


CLS 400/219
TXT Including means responsive to depletion of ribbon supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 218 wherein the ribbon* is moved to the
    print-point* from a location where the ribbon has been stored on the
    typewriter, and wherein there is means for detecting when such ribbon
    storage has been exhausted to cause the ribbon to move in the opposite
    direction.


CLS 400/219.1
TXT Including an electric switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 wherein said detecting means includes a
    device for influencing an electrical circuit used in the operation of a
    member or members controlling the direction of movement of the ribbon*.


CLS 400/219.2
TXT Including lever retained in spool by wound ribbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 wherein the ribbon* is stored on the
    typewriter in convolutions on a reel, and wherein said detecting means
    includes a member mounted on the reel and held in a first position by the
    convoluted ribbon, said member being movable to a second position to
    influence ribbon direction-changing means when the ribbon has been unwound
    from engagement with the member.


CLS 400/219.3
TXT Including sensor for diameter of wound ribbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 wherein the ribbon* is stored on the
    typewriter accumulated in wound convolutions, and wherein said detecting
    means includes a detecting member which is biased against the outermost
    convolution in a manner such that said member moves as the number of
    convolutions increases or decreases and wherein the movement of said member
    influences the ribbon direction-changing means.


CLS 400/219.4
TXT Sensor received in depression in core of spool:

    Subject matter under subclass 219.3 wherein the ribbon* is stored on the
    typewriter in convolutions around a cylindrical surface of a reel, and
    wherein said cylindrical surface includes an opening or cavity which
    receives said detecting member when all the convolutions have been
    exhausted from the reel.


CLS 400/219.5
TXT Including projection from ribbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 wherein the ribbon* includes a
    protuberance from a surface thereof, and said detecting means includes a
    member actuated by said protuberance to influence ribbon direction-changing
    means when the ribbon storage is exhausted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239,    for a ribbon, per se, having a protuberance for actuating reversing
    mechanism.


CLS 400/220
TXT Alternative pawl-and-ratchet drive including ratchet directly connected to
    spool or spindle:

    Subject matter under subclass 218 wherein opposite ends of the ribbons* are
    attached respectively to first and second cylindrical members, the first
    member having a first ratchet* secured thereon to be driven by a first
    pawl* and thereby move the ribbon in the first direction by winding it on
    the first member, and the second member having a second ratchet secured
    thereon to be driven by a second pawl and thereby move the ribbon in the
    opposite direction by winding it on the second member, and wherein means
    are provided for causing the first pawl to be operative in its driving
    relationship with the first ratcher while the second pawl is caused to be
    inoperative, or for causing the second pawl to be operative in its driving
    relationship with the second ratchet while the first pawl is caused to be
    inoperative.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236.1,  for pawl-and-ratchet drive for ribbon feeding.


CLS 400/220.1
TXT Including common pawl member (e.g., double-toothed pawl):

    Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein the first and second pawls* are
    formed as integral parts of a single component.


CLS 400/220.2
TXT Including member interposed in pawl drive path:

    Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein the means for causing a pawl* to
    be inoperative includes an element having a surface positionable in the
    path of the pawl to prevent engagement of the pawl with its ratchet*.


CLS 400/221
TXT Alternative gear drive including gear directly connected to spool or
    spindle:

    Subject matter under subclass 218 wherein opposite ends of the ribbon* are
    attached respectively to first and second cylindrical members, the first
    member having a first toothed-driven wheel secured thereto, and the second
    member having a second toothed-driven wheel secured thereto, the first and
    second driven wheels being driven by a toothed driving wheel selectively
    engageable with either of the driven wheels or being driven by first or
    second driving wheels engageable respectively with the first or the second
    driven wheels, the driving wheel or wheels having a different axis of
    rotation than the driven wheels, and wherein shiftable means are provided
    to selectively cause a driving wheel to operatively engage the first driven
    wheel to move the ribbon the first direction by winding the ribbon on the
    first member, or to cause a driving wheel to operatively engage the second
    driven wheel to move the ribbon in the opposite direction by winding the
    ribbon on the second member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236.2,  for gear drive for ribbon feeding.


CLS 400/221.1
TXT And gears mounted on ends of axially shiftable common shaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 221 wherein a first driving wheel is secured
    to one extremity of a rod having an elongated dimension and a second
    driving wheel is secured to the opposite extremity of the same rod, the rod
    being shiftable in opposite directions parallel to the elongated dimension
    of the rod to either engage the first driving wheel with the first driven
    wheel or to engage the second driving wheel with the second driven wheel.


CLS 400/221.2
TXT And gears mounted on ends of pivoted common shaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 221 wherein a first driving wheel is secured
    to one extremity of a rod having an elongated dimension, and a second
    driving wheel is secured to the opposite extremity of the same rod, the rod
    being movable about an axis perpendicular to its elongated dimension to
    either engage the first driving wheel with the first driven wheel or to
    engage the second driving wheel with the second driven wheel.


CLS 400/222
TXT Alternative clutch drive including clutch member directly connected to
    spool or spindle:

    Subject matter under subclass 218 wherein opposite ends of the ribbon* are
    attached respectively to first and second cylindrical members, the first
    member having a first driven coupling device secured thereto, and the
    second member having a second driven coupling device secured thereto, the
    first and second driven coupling devices being driven by a driving coupling
    device selectively engageable with either of the driven coupling devices or
    being driven by first or second driving coupling devices selectively
    engageable respectively with the first or the second driven coupling
    devices, the driving coupling device or devices being coaxial with the
    driven coupling devices and the driving and driven devices having a
    one-to-one drive ratio, and wherein shiftable means are provided to
    selectively cause a driving coupling device to operatively engage the first
    driven coupling device to move the ribbon in the first direction by winding
    the ribbon on the first member, or to cause a driving coupling device to
    operatively engage the second driven coupling device to move the ribbon in
    the opposite direction by winding it on the second member.


CLS 400/223
TXT Ribbon-feeding mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the transfer-medium* is a ribbon*
    and significance is attributed to a manner of moving the ribbon relative to
    a print-point* in a direction parallel to the longitudinal extent of the
    ribbon as character* symbols are imprinted on a record-medium* or to the
    manner of regulating such ribbon movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for ribbon feed in a flat-platen typewriter.

    218,    for ribbon reversing wherein ribbon feeding is disclosed.


CLS 400/224
TXT For feeding ribbon angularly to print-line at print-point:

    Subject matter under subclass 223 wherein the lengthwise dimension of at
    least a portion of the ribbon* which is at the print-point* extends in a
    direction other than parallel to the print-line*.


CLS 400/224.1
TXT Ribbon fed perpendicular to print-line at print-point:

    Subject matter under subclass 224 wherein the lengthwise dimension of the
    portion of the ribbon* which is at the print-point* extends at a
    right-angle to the print-line*.


CLS 400/224.2
TXT Ribbon is full-page wide:

    Subject matter under subclass 224.1 wherein a dimension of the ribbon*
    transverse to the longitudinal extent of the ribbon is approximately the
    same as the dimension of the record-medium* parallel to the print-line*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246,    for a cylindrical member for convoluting thereon a ribbon of
    similar dimension.


CLS 400/225
TXT Including electrically powered drive means (e.g., solenoid, stepping motor,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 223 wherein movement of the ribbon* is
    accomplished with the help of force derived from electrical energy.


CLS 400/226
TXT For feeding ribbon partial character-space before impact and partial
    character-space after impact:

    Subject matter under subclass 223 wherein the ribbon is moved relative to
    the print-point* in incremental distances approximating the width of a
    character* as characters are imprinted on the record-medium*, and wherein
    the ribbon is moved a portion of such incremental distance prior to a
    type-face* contacting the ribbon, and the ribbon is moved the remaining
    portion of such incremental distance after the same type-face contacts the
    ribbon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232,    for ribbon feeding at a particular feed rate.


CLS 400/227
TXT For narrow carbon ribbon (e.g., carbon ink, "single use", etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 223 wherein the ribbon* being moved is a
    carbon-ink ribbon or a "carbon-paper" ribbon.

    (1)     Note.  See the definition of ribbon in the Glossary, section III,
    for a discussion of carbon-ink and carbon-paper ribbons, and see (1) Note
    under subclass 497 for a discussion of the term carbon-paper.


CLS 400/227.1
TXT Ribbon destroyed after use:

    Subject matter under subclass 227 wherein provision is made for treating
    the ribbon* on the typewriter after the ribbon leaves the print-point* so
    as to render illegible any type-face* impressions on the ribbon or to make
    the ribbon useless for further typing.


CLS 400/227.2
TXT Or for alternately used fabric ribbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 227 wherein a "fabric" ribbon* is also
    mounted for use on the typewriter and provision is made for either moving
    the fabric ribbon relative to the print-point* or for moving the
    "carbon-paper" or "carbon-ink" ribbon relative to the print-point, the
    ribbon which is so moved being selectable by the typist which is so moved
    being selectable by the typist.

    (1)     Note.  See the definition of ribbon in the Glossary, section III,
    for a discussion of fabric ribbon.


CLS 400/228
TXT Including pin-feed-engaging ribbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 223 wherein the ribbon* is moved by
    contacting the ribbon with elements that are movable in a ribbon-feeding
    direction, which elements either pierce the ribbon or move into preformed
    openings in the ribbon.


CLS 400/229
TXT Mounted with movable type-face-carrier or type-head-carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 223 wherein the ribbon* is attached to a
    type-face-carrier* or is attached to a type-head-carrier* either of which
    carriers moves relative to a stationary record-medium* for imprinting the
    character* symbols along the print-line*, whereby the ribbon moves with
    either the type-face-carrier or the type-head-carrier.


CLS 400/230
TXT With fast rewind of ribbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 223 wherein the ribbon* is supplied to the
    print-point* from a coiled supply of the ribbon so that the supply is
    depleted while the ribbon is moved in a first direction during imprinting
    of character* symbols, and wherein provision is made for rapidly moving the
    ribbon in the opposite direction to replenish the coiled supply, no
    character symbols being imprinted during such rapid movement.


CLS 400/231
TXT With prevention of ribbon feed (e.g., for nontype operation, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 223 wherein there is a drive mechanism for
    moving the ribbon* relative to the print-point*, and wherein significance
    is attributed to stopping or disconnecting such drive mechanism while a
    function* is performed on the typewriter.

    (1)     Note.  It is usual to have ribbon movement depend on carriage*
    movement as the carriage is moved in the direction of the print-line* while
    character* symbols are imprinted so that a fresh ribbon surface is
    presented for each type-face* impact. There are other carriage movements
    (e.g., for spacing between words, backspace, etc.) where no imprint takes
    place and so a fresh ribbon surface is not needed as a result of the latter
    movements.  This subclass (231) provides for disclosures wherein ribbon
    drive mechanism is disconnected for carriage movements when no imprinting
    takes place.


CLS 400/232
TXT Including feed at particular feed rate (e.g., "creep"  feed):

    Subject matter under subclass 223 wherein the ribbon* is moved a
    predetermined distance relative to the print-point* each time a character*
    is imprinted on the record-medium*, and wherein significance is attributed
    to the speed at which the ribbon is so moved or to the distance the ribbon
    is so moved.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226,    for feeding ribbon a partial character-space* before type-face*
    impact and a partial character-space after type-face impact.


CLS 400/233
TXT Ribbon feed from supply only during carriage return:

    Subject matter under subclass 223 wherein a carriage* is moved in a first
    direction along a print-line* as character* symbols are imprinted, and the
    carriage is moved in a second direction opposite to the first direction to
    begin another print-line, and wherein the ribbon* is moved to the
    print-point* from a location where the ribbon has been stored on the
    typewriter, such movement of the ribbon from storage taking place only when
    the carriage is moved in the second direction.


CLS 400/234
TXT Including ribbon tensioner:

    Subject matter under subclass 223 wherein significance is attributed to
    means for maintaining the ribbon* in a relatively taut or non-sagging
    condition as the ribbon is moved relative to the print-point*.


CLS 400/235
TXT Drive applied by means directly engaging ribbon in advance of takeup:

    Subject matter under subclass 223 wherein the ribbon* is accumulated at a
    location on the typewriter after the ribbon has moved past the
    print-point*, and wherein the ribbon is moved in the direction parallel to
    its longitudinal extent by a motion-transmitting mechanism which contacts
    the ribbon at a place on the typewriter between the print-point and the
    accumulated location of the ribbon.


CLS 400/235.1
TXT Drive applied by pinch-roller couple:

    Subject matter under subclass 235 wherein the motion-transmitting mechanism
    includes a pair of rotatable cylindrical members positioned with respect to
    each other, and to the ribbon*, in a manner such that one member engages
    one surface of the ribbon, and the other member engages the opposite
    surface of the ribbon, whereby rotation of the members in opposite
    rotational directions moves the ribbon toward the location wherein the
    ribbon is accumulated.


CLS 400/236
TXT Drive applied directly to spool or spool spindle:

    Subject matter under subclass 223 wherein one end of the ribbon* is
    attached to a cylindrical member, and wherein the ribbon is moved past the
    print-point* by rotating the member about its axis to wind the ribbon in
    convolutions thereon, said member being rotated by a motion-transmitted
    mechanism, and said mechanism including a component rigidly secured to the
    cylindrical member.


CLS 400/236.1
TXT By a pawl driving a ratchet on the spool or spindle:

    Subject matter under subclass 236 wherein the component secured to the
    cylindrical member is a ratchet*, and wherein the motion-transmitting
    mechanism includes a pawl* for moving the ratchet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220,    for pawl-and-ratchet drive used with ribbon reversing.


CLS 400/236.2
TXT By a gear driving a gear on the spool or spindle:

    Subject matter under subclass 236 wherein the component secured to the
    cylindrical member is a first toothed wheel, and wherein the
    motion-transmitting mechanism includes a second toothed wheel engageable to
    rotate the first toothed wheel, said first and second toothed wheels having
    different and non-coextensive axes of rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221,    for gear drive used with ribbon reversing.


CLS 400/237
TXT Ribbon, per se:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the transfer-medium* is a ribbon*
    and significance is attributed to the structure or characteristics of the
    ribbon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194,    for an endless ribbon.


CLS 400/238
TXT Having leader portion (e.g., for threading, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 237 wherein significance is attributed to a
    modification of either end of the ribbon*.

    (1)     Note.  Such modification may be for various reasons including
    facilitating attachment to a spool, facilitating threading of the ribbon
    through a guide, or permitting handling without soiling the typist's
    fingers with ink*.


CLS 400/239
TXT With ribbon-reversing indicator or device on ribbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 wherein the ribbon* is of a kind which,
    when in use on a typewriter, is intended to be moved in either of opposite
    directions relative to a print-point*, and wherein significance is
    attributed to a modification of the ribbon which either alerts the typist
    that directional change of the ribbon is desired or controls the mechanism
    for changing the directional movement of the ribbon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218,    for a mechanism for moving a ribbon in either of opposite
    directions.


CLS 400/240
TXT Including differently pigmented fields:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 wherein the ribbon* has plural zones
    impregnated or coated with a coloring agent intended to be transferred from
    the ribbon to the record-medium* during typing, the coloring agent in one
    zone being ink* of a first color, and the coloring agent in another zone
    being of a different shade or color than the first color.


CLS 400/240.1
TXT Including correction-material field:

    Subject matter under subclass 240 wherein one of the zones includes a
    coloring agent which is a coating of a color approximating the color of the
    record-medium*, which coating will adhere to the ink*, of an imprinted
    character*, or wherein one of the zones includes a chemical agent which
    eradicates the ink that has been imprinted on the record-medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    697,    for an error-correcting sheet or tape.


CLS 400/240.2
TXT With prevention of bleeding between adjacent fields:

    Subject matter under subclass 240 wherein significance is attributed to a
    manner of impeding the migration of the coloring agent from one zone to
    another zone next to it.


CLS 400/240.3
TXT Including fields arranged transversely to elongated dimension of ribbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 240 wherein each zone has a dimension that
    corresponds to the width and to only a part of the length of the ribbon*.


CLS 400/240.4
TXT Including more than two fields:

    Subject matter under subclass 240 wherein the ribbon* has at least three
    zones.


CLS 400/241
TXT Particular ribbon material:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 wherein significance is attributed to the
    substance from which the ink*-carrying portion of the ribbon* is made.


CLS 400/241.1
TXT Synthetic material:

    Subject matter under subclass 241 wherein the substance is a compound
    formed from chemical reaction involving elements, radical, or simpler
    compounds.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for disclosure of a ribbon* wherein
    the ink*-carrying substance of the ribbon is a "man-made" substance rather
    than a substance which occurs naturally.


CLS 400/241.2
TXT Wherein ink is entrapped in ribbon material (e.g., microcapsules,
    micropores, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 241.1 wherein the substance includes a
    component having extremely small orifices or openings or chambers therein,
    the orifices or openings or chambers each holding a discrete quantity of
    ink*.


CLS 400/241.3
TXT Particular weave pattern:

    Subject matter under subclass 241 wherein the ribbon is formed from
    interlaced thread-like elements, and wherein significance is attributed to
    the manner in which such elements are arranged relative to each other.


CLS 400/241.4
TXT Including ink-impervious backing for ribbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 241 wherein the ribbon* has first and second
    surfaces, the first surface contacting a record-medium* to imprint a
    character* by transferring ink* from the ribbon to the record-medium when
    the second surface is contacted by a type-face*, and wherein the second
    surface of the ribbon is formed of a substance through which ink is
    incapable of passing to preclude direct contact of the type-face with ink.


CLS 400/242
TXT Ribbon spool or mount therefor:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the transfer-medium* is a ribbon*
    in the form of an elongated tape that is spirally wound around a
    cylindrical member, and wherein significance is attributed to said member
    or to holding the member and the ribbon wound thereon on a typewriter.

    (1)     Note.  The member (i.e., spool) may have flanges extending radially
    to retain the spiral convolutions of the ribbon wound thereon, or may be a
    core having no flanges.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203,    for a spool mounted within a platen*.

    207,    for a package for ribbon spool(s) simplifying mounting the ribbon
    and spool on a typewriter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 600+ and 118+ for a
    spool to support wound material.


CLS 400/243
TXT Universally adaptable:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 wherein significance is attributed to a
    modification of, or an attachment for, the cylindrical member which
    facilitates holding the member on any of diverse shapes or kinds of
    supports on a typewriter.


CLS 400/244
TXT Including ribbon-reversing indicator or device on spool or mount:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 wherein the cylindrical member is
    intended to be rotated in either of opposite directions depending on
    whether the ribbon is to be wound thereon or to be unwound therefrom, and
    wherein significance is attributed to a modification of such cylindrical
    member which either alerts the typist that a change in directional rotation
    of the member is desired, or which controls the mechanism for changing the
    directional rotation of the member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218,    for a mechanism for moving a ribbon in either of opposite
    directions.


CLS 400/245
TXT Including magnetic retainer:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 wherein magnetic* force is used to hold
    the cylindrical member in position on the typewriter.


CLS 400/246
TXT Spool for full-page-wide ribbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 wherein the cylindrical member is
    intended to accommodate a ribbon* having a dimension transverse to its
    longitudinal extent which dimension is approximately the same as the
    dimension of the record-medium* parallel to the print-line*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224.2,  for a mechanism for feeding ribbon of similar dimension.


CLS 400/247
TXT Means auxiliary to ribbon mechanism (e.g., shield, guide, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the transfer-medium* is a
    ribbon*, and wherein significance is attributed to a device used in
    conjunction with the ribbon, but which device does not itself effect the
    imprint of a character* or function* of the typewriter, or which device is
    not provided for in any of the subclasses indented under subclass 191.


CLS 400/248
TXT Including guide for ribbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 247 wherein the device is a member for
    conducting or leading the ribbon* from its place of storage on the
    typewriter to the print-point* or from the print-point to a place of
    storage on the typewriter.


CLS 400/248.1
TXT Ribbon guide opening expandable to facilitate ribbon insertion:

    Subject matter under subclass 248 wherein the member includes a pair of
    components between which the ribbon* extends, said components having first
    and second positions movable relative to each other and being spaced
    further from each other at said second position than at said first position
    to facilitate placement of the ribbon between the components at said second
    position.


CLS 400/248.2
TXT And typewriter-actuated closing of guide:

    Subject matter under subclass 248.1 wherein a first part of a typewriter
    moves to accomplish its intended first-part function, and during said
    movement the first part engages a second part to move the second part, and
    wherein movement of the second part causes relative movement of said
    components from said second position to said first position.


CLS 400/248.3
TXT Including electrical, magnetic, or pneumatic guide means:

    Subject matter under subclass 248 wherein the member for conducting or
    leading the ribbon* is influenced by electrical, magnetic, or pneumatic
    energy.


CLS 400/249
TXT Including indicator for depletion of ribbon (e.g., bell, sign, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 247 wherein the ribbon* is supplied to the
    print-point* from a supply of ribbon, and wherein significance is
    attributed to a device for informing the typist that the supply has been
    exhausted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    703,    for an indicator of general utility in a typewriter.


CLS 400/250
TXT Including tool for inserting ribbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 247 wherein said device comprises an
    implement for installing the ribbon* in position on the typewriter.


CLS 400/251
TXT CASE-SHIFT MECHANISM:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein significance is
    attributed to a means in a typewriter for performing a case-shift* function
    by effecting relative movement between a record-medium* and a type-face*
    element that is at the print-point* whereby a typist is enabled to choose
    which one of two or more forms of character* symbols that may be imprinted
    by pressing a particular character key* element will be imprinted, the
    choice being made by the typist who presses or does not press a case-shift
    key.

    (1)     Note.  As discussed in the definition of case-shift in the
    Glossary, section III, case-shift is the function* that enables a
    typewriter to imprint either an upper-case* form or a lower-case* form of
    character symbol with the same key element, depending on whether the
    case-shift key is used or not used.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     for case-shift in a flat-platen* typewriter.


CLS 400/252
TXT Including programmed-control-system:

    Subject matter under subclass 251 wherein the operation of the case-shift*
    mechanism to effect the form of a type-face* that is to be impressed
    against the record-medium* is governed by a programmed-control-system*.


CLS 400/253
TXT Including electronic control or code-bar control:

    Subject matter under subclass 251 wherein the operation of a case-shift*
    mechanism to effect the form of a type-face* that is to be impressed
    against a record-medium* is governed by either (a) an electrical system
    involving the flow of electrons in a circuit, or (b) a plurality of members
    having particular index characteristics thereon, which members are moved to
    a position relative to an arrangement of element(s) within the mechanism
    where the index characteristics are aligned one with another to enable
    movement of another component of the mechanism to effect choice of
    operation or non-operation of the case-shift mechanism.


CLS 400/254
TXT Controlled by typewriter-actuated mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 251 wherein the operation of the case-shift*
    mechanism to effect the form of a type-face* that is to be impressed
    against the record-medium* is governed by an arrangement of parts in the
    typewriter, which arrangement includes a first part that moves to
    accomplish its intended first-part function*, and during such movement the
    first part engages a second part to move the second part, which second part
    is connected to the case-shift mechanism to accomplish case-shift as the
    first part moves to accomplish its first-part function.


CLS 400/255
TXT Including plural case-shift mechanisms (e.g., for simultaneous or selective
    use):

    Subject matter under subclass 251 wherein one typewriter is provided with
    at least two case-shift* means.

    (1)     Note.  One exemplary use of two case-shift mechanisms is in a
    typewriter wherein the carriage*, and thereby the platen* that is carried
    by the carriage, is vertically movable in a case-shift mode, and wherein
    the type-bar-segment*, and thereby the type-set-assemblage* that is carried
    by the type-bar-segment, is also movable for case-shifting.


CLS 400/256
TXT Actuated by toggle-linkage:

    Subject matter under subclass 251 wherein the case-shift* mechanism
    includes a toggle-linkage* assemblage that is used to move a portion of the
    typewriter for case-shifting.


CLS 400/257
TXT For case-shift by type-head (e.g., spherical type-head) movement:

    Subject matter under subclass 251 wherein the typewriter is provided with a
    type-head* that includes a type-set-assemblaged*, which type-head is moved
    by case-shift* mechanism for selection of the form of character* symbol to
    be used.

    (1)     Note.  The typewriter of this subclass often is provided with a
    "golf-ball" or spheroidal type-head*.  See the definition of type-head in
    the Glossary, section III, for a discussion of other configurations of
    type-head elements.


CLS 400/258
TXT Power-operated mechanism (e.g., for locking shift key):

    Subject matter under subclass 251 wherein the case-shift* mechanism is
    actuated with the help of force generated by or derived from a source other
    than the typist.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for power applied for a miscellaneous
    function* in the case-shift mechanism of the typewriter, including some
    disclosures of a solenoid used for locking the shift-key element of the
    key-board.


CLS 400/259
TXT For shifting platen:

    Subject matter under subclass 258 wherein said force is used to move the
    platen* in its case-shift* movement.


CLS 400/260
TXT For shifting type-bar-segment:

    Subject matter under subclass 258 wherein said force is used to move the
    type-bar-segment* in its case-shift* movement.


CLS 400/261
TXT Multiple-shift mechanism (i.e., for type-bar having three or more
    type-faces thereon):

    Subject matter under subclass 251 wherein the typewriter is provided with a
    plurality of type-bar* members, each type-bar having at least three
    type-face* elements thereon, only one of which type-face is to be impacted
    to form only one character* on record-medium* for each pressing of a
    character key* element, and wherein the case-shift* mechanism is arranged
    to cause relative movement between a record-medium and the selected
    type-bar that is at a print-point* into one of at least three positions,
    whereby a chosen one of the type-face* with respect to the type-bar* that
    carries the type-face, the movement being a turning motion.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for a typewriter wherein a platen* is
    shifted vertically, or horizontally, as in a bottom-strike or top-strike
    typewriter.


CLS 400/262
TXT For shifting type-bar-segment:

    Subject matter under subclass 261 wherein case-shift* is effected by moving
    the type-bar-case-shift* is effected by moving the type-bar-segment*
    relative to the typewriter thereby moving the type-bar* members and the
    type-face* elements carried thereby to the platen*.


CLS 400/263
TXT For shifting type-bar or type-face on type-bar:

    Subject matter under subclass 261 wherein case-shift* is effected by moving
    the type-bar* relative to the typewriter, or by moving the type-face*
    relative to the type-bar, whereby in either event the type-face is moved
    relative to the platen*.


CLS 400/263.1
TXT By pivoting type-face relative to type-bar:

    Subject matter under subclass 263 wherein case-shift* is effected by moving
    the type-face* with respect to the type-bar* that carries the type-face,
    the movement being oscillatory or arcuate.


CLS 400/263.2
TXT By rotating type-face relative to type-bar:

    Subject matter under subclass 263 wherein case-shift* is effected by moving
    the type-face* with respect to the type-bar* that carries the type-face,
    the movement being a turning motion.


CLS 400/264
TXT For shifting platen:

    Subject matter under subclass 251 wherein case-shift* is effected by moving
    the platen* relative to the typewriter, thereby moving the record-medium*
    relative to the type-face* element which will impact thereagainst.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261,    for case-shift by moving platen in a multiple-shift typewriter


CLS 400/265
TXT Fore-and-aft (e.g., for top-strike or bottom-strike typewriter):

    Subject matter under subclass 264 wherein the movement of the platen*
    during case-shift* is in a direction that extends between the front and
    rear of the typewriter and substantially parallel to the bottom of the
    typewriter.

    (1)     Note.  The typewriter of this subclass is usually one wherein the
    type-face* impacts against the top of the platen or the bottom of the
    platen.


CLS 400/266
TXT Mounted on pivotally movable platen carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 264 wherein the platen* is supported by
    structure that moves the platen in the arc of a circle for case-shift*
    purposes.

    (1)     Note.  In most typewriters, the platen- carrier or platen-support
    structure is a carriage*.


CLS 400/266.1
TXT With movement of platen out of typing position:

    Subject matter under subclass 266 wherein said structure enables the
    platen* to be removed from adjacent the print-point*.

    (1)     Note.  In the typewriter of this subclass the platen is movable out
    of typing position or may be entirely removed from the carriage* that
    normally supports the platen.


CLS 400/266.2
TXT Including adjustable counterbalance spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 266 wherein the platen* and the structure
    that moves the platen has mass that exerts a downward force, and wherein
    the typewriter is provided with a component or assemblage of elements that
    exerts an upward force on the said structure to compensate for this
    downward force of said structure, which component or assemblage of elements
    is resilient and the upward force exerted by the component or assemblage is
    variable.


CLS 400/266.3
TXT Including a yieldable link (e.g., spring, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 266 wherein said structure includes movable
    members that effect movement of the platen*, at least one of which members
    is a resilient member.


CLS 400/267
TXT By depression of space-bar:

    Subject matter under subclass 264 wherein movement of the platen* for
    case-shift* is accomplished by pressing the space-bar* element on the
    key-board*.


CLS 400/268
TXT For shifting type-face or type-bar:

    Subject matter under subclass 251 wherein case-shift* is effected by moving
    a type-face* or by moving a type-bar* relative to the typewriter platen*,
    the direction of such movement being considered to be parallel to a plane
    in which the print-point* lies, thereby causing a chosen type-face to be
    impacted against a record-medium* at the print-point.

    (1)     Note.  The type-face may be one of many type-faces on a type-head*
    containing a type-set-assemblage*, in which event case-shift occurs by
    moving the type-head so that the chosen type-face will be in position to be
    impacted.  Or the type-face may be movable relative to a type-bar that
    carries only two (or three) type-faces.


CLS 400/269
TXT By shifting type-bar or type-face on type-bar:

    Subject matter under subclass 268 wherein case-shift* is effected by moving
    a type-bar*, together with the type-face* supported thereby relative to the
    platen* or by moving a type-face relative to the type-bar that supports the
    type-face, thereby moving the type-face relative to the platen.


CLS 400/269.1
TXT By pivoting type-face relative to type-bar:

    Subject matter under subclass 269 wherein case-shift* is effected by moving
    a type-face* with respect to the type-bar* that supports the type-face
    thereby moving the type-face relative to the platen*, the movement being
    oscillatory.


CLS 400/270
TXT Mounted on type-bar support (e.g., guide pin, type-bar-segment , etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 268 wherein the typewriter is provided with
    structure that sustains the type-bar* members in an operative relationship
    to enable the type-bars, and the type-face* elements carried by the
    type-bars, to move from rest position to print-point* position as each
    type-bar is selected to impact its type-face against the record-medium*,
    which structure also enables movement of the type-set-assemblage* that is
    sustained on the structure, the movement of the type-set-assemblage being
    for the purpose of effecting case-shift*.

    (1)     Note.  In some of the typewriters of this subclass the type-bars
    are mounted on a type-bar-segment* which moves so that a chosen type-face
    of the selected type-bar will impact the record-medium.


CLS 400/270.1
TXT Ring hanger support:

    Subject matter under subclass 270 wherein said structure includes a
    generally annular member to which the type-bar* members are connected.

    (1)     Note.  The ring hanger of this subclass is usually used in a
    top-strike typewriter or bottom-strike typewriter.


CLS 400/270.2
TXT Including ball-bearing support:

    Subject matter under subclass 270 wherein said structure includes a
    mechanical assemblage known as a "ball bearing" to which the type-bar*
    members are connected for movement.

    (1)     Note.  A ball bearing is a device in which a shaft or journal turns
    upon a number of balls running in an annular track.


CLS 400/270.3
TXT Including pivoted-lever support (e.g., cantiveler spring, etc.):


    Subject matter under subclass 270 wherein said structure includes elements
    that are fulcrumed for arcuate movement, which elements the type-bar*
    members are connected for movement of the type-bars from rest position to
    print-point* position.


CLS 400/271
TXT By choosing from one of a plurality of type-bars operated by a single key:

    Subject matter under subclass 251 wherein choice of which form of
    type-face* (i.e., upper-case* form or lower-case* form) is to be impressed
    against the record-medium* is made from one of a group of type-bar* members
    any of which members may be chosen to be actuated by depressing one
    particular character* key* element of the key-board*.


CLS 400/272
TXT Including key attachment for case-shift:

    Subject matter under subclass 251 wherein case-shift* is effected by a key*
    element on the key-board* that is pressed, the pressing of the case-shift
    key being caused by a device that is connected to the typewriter, which
    device is actuated or operated by the typist.


CLS 400/273
TXT Operated by user's leg, (e.g., foot, knee, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 272 wherein said device is energized by a
    lower limb of the typist.

    (1)     Note.  A typewriter of this subclass is usually intended to
    increase typing speed by giving the typist the capability of actuating
    case-shift* by a key* element that is pressed by action of a foot, knee,
    etc., rather than pressed by a finger.  A typewriter for handicapped
    persons is found in subclass 87 above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87,     and see (1) Note above.


CLS 400/274
TXT For locking case-shift mechanism in position (e.g., rebound lock, cam,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 251 wherein said relative movement effects a
    rearrangement of parts on the typewriter to at least two locations relative
    to the typewriter frame, and wherein significance is attributed to means
    for maintaining the particular arrangement of parts as desired by the
    typist until another location of said parts is desired.

    (1)     Note.  In the typewriter of this subclass, the case-shift*
    mechanism is held by a cam, or is prevented from rebounding out of position
    into an undesired position. Also included herein is a typewriter wherein
    the platen* is locked in a raised position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    663,    for other locking mechanism in a typewriter.


CLS 400/275
TXT For locking platen in fore-and-aft position (e.g., by overcenter spring,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 274 wherein the platen* of the typewriter
    during case-shift* is in a direction that extends between the front and
    rear of the typewriter and substantially parallel to the bottom of the
    typewriter, and said two locations are the extreme front and rear of the
    extent of movement of the plate, and wherein significance is attributed to
    means for maintaining the platen in its extreme front or rear location
    until another location is desired by the typist.


CLS 400/276
TXT For locking shift-key lever in depressed position:

    Subject matter under subclass 274 wherein the case-shift* function is
    accomplished by pressing a particular key* element known as a shift key,
    which shift-key element is connected to a fulcrumed bar for movement of the
    bar when the shift-key element is pressed by a typist, and wherein
    significance is attributed to means for maintaining the shift key in the
    position it has been moved to when it is pressed by the typist.


CLS 400/276.1
TXT By toggle-linkage:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 wherein said means includes a
    toggle-linkage* connected between said fulcrumed bar and the typewriter.


CLS 400/276.2
TXT By means pivoted on shift-key lever:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 wherein said means includes a component
    that is oscillatably mounted on said fulcrumed bar.


CLS 400/277
TXT Including limit stop (e.g., block, chain, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 251 wherein said relative movement is halted
    at the extreme ends of the desired movement by the interengagement of a
    component that moves with the case-shift* mechanism and a component that is
    fixed to the typewriter.


CLS 400/278
TXT Including limit screw:

    Subject matter under subclass 277 wherein at least one of said components
    is an elongated helically threaded member that is rotatable about an axis
    extending in its elongated dimension and is movable along its axis as it is
    rotated about its axis.


CLS 400/279
TXT CONTROL OF PRINT POSITION ALONG PRINT-LINE BY SIGNAL GENERATED BY
    PROGRAMMED-CONTROL-SYSTEM:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a
    programmed-control-system* is provided for transmitting instructions to a
    typewriter mechanism to govern the location where a type-face* element will
    be impressed against the record-medium*, the location being along a path
    parallel to the print-line*.


CLS 400/280
TXT Program is indicia on auxiliary member:

    Subject matter under subclass 279 wherein the instructions are in the form
    of marking or openings on an element which is supplementary to the
    record-medium*.


CLS 400/281
TXT Member is punched tape or card:

    Subject matter under subclass 280 wherein the supplementary element is an
    elongated, relatively narrow strip of material, or a sheet of material,
    said material having apertures formed therein in a particular pattern, and
    the apertures representing the instructions governing the operation of the
    typewriter.


CLS 400/282
TXT Program is indicia on record-medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 279 wherein the instructions are in the form
    of markings or openings on the record-medium* itself.


CLS 400/283
TXT CARRIAGE OR CARRIAGE-MOVING OR MOVEMENT-REGULATING MECHANISM:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein significance is
    attributed to the carriage* of a typewriter, or to movement of the
    carriage, or to control of movement or stoppage of movement of the
    carriage, which movement occurs along a line that is parallel to the
    print-line*.

    (1)     Note.  The definition of the term "carriage" in the Glossary,
    section III, includes a discussion of the movement referred to the above,
    the direction of such movement, and the difference between a "platen*
    carriage" and a "type-head* carriage".


CLS 400/284
TXT For stopping carriage in tabular position (e.g., column-set positions):

    Subject matter under subclass 283 wherein the carriage* is caused to be
    moved in a direction that enables the character* symbols to be imprinted in
    succession (i.e., the character-space* direction), and wherein the movement
    in said direction is controlled such that after the carriage has moved past
    a predetermined number of character-space distances, the carriage will be
    stopped in a position corresponding to a print-point* for the start of a
    column of character symbols.

    (1)     Note.  The term "column" refers to a plurality of print-lines*
    arranged one above or below another in vertical array (i.e., a particular
    character of each successive line of type being equally spaced from one of
    the side edges of a sheet or web record-medium*).

    (2)     Note.  The term "tabular" refers to at least one, but usually a
    plurality of columns each arranged in vertical array and each parallel to a
    side edge of a sheet or web as well as to other column(s) that are produced
    on the sheet or web.

    (3)     Note.  In the typewriter of this subclass the tab-stop elements on
    the tab-rack* are set in active position to effect typing of a column.  The
    typewriter is thus said to be "column set".


CLS 400/285
TXT In denominational positions:

    Subject matter under subclass 284 wherein the typewriter is used to imprint
    one or more columns of numeral digits, and wherein the carriage* is stopped
    in a position such that the decimal point of a succession of numbers typed
    one below the other(s) will be arranged in vertical array.

    (1)     Note.  In the instance of a "denominational" column the left
    character* of successive print-lines* will not necessarily be one below the
    others, depending on whether the left character represents a "hundreds"
    digit, a "tens" digit, etc.  Rather the decimal point will be in vertical
    array. Moreover, in the instance where the decimal point of successive
    numbers is not actually imprinted, but is merely understood to be present,
    the particular character is the basis of the columnar arrangement, is in
    fact the "units" digit of the successive numbers.


CLS 400/285.1
TXT And column-set positions:

    Subject matter under subclass 285 wherein the carriage* may be stopped in a
    column position and then be further moved and again stopped in a
    denominational position within said column.

    (1)     Note.  The term "column" is discussed in (1) Note of subclass 284;
    the term "column set" is discussed in (3) Note of subclass 284; and the
    term "denominational" is discussed in (1) Note of subclass 285.  The
    typewriter of this and indented subclasses combine features of two forms of
    tabulation, that is, carriage is brought to a selected column field and the
    carriage is further brought to a selected denominational position within
    the selected column field.


CLS 400/285.2
TXT Tab-rack stop intercepted by denominational-stop:

    Subject matter under subclass 285.1 wherein the carriage* is stopped by the
    interengagement of a selected denominational-stop* with a "tab stop" that
    is mounted on a tab-rack*.

    (1)     Note. The term "tab stop" is discussed in the definition of
    tab-rack in the Glossary, section III.


CLS 400/285.3
TXT Tab stops grouped in stepped fashion:

    Subject matter under subclass 285.2 wherein the "tab stop" elements are
    arranged on the tab-rack* in sets or assemblages of tab stops, the
    individual tab stops of each set being in an ascending or descending scale
    of individually varying length in each assemblage, and each set or
    assemblage being arranged for a different "columnar" arrangement.

    (1)     Note.  The term "tab stop" is discussed in the definition of
    tab-rack in the Glossary, section III, and the term "columnar" is a
    variation of the term "column" which is discussed in (1) Note of subclass
    284.


CLS 400/285.4
TXT With control of zero or space for decimal point:

    Subject matter under subclass 285 wherein significance is attributed to the
    suppression or regulation of the imprinting of a "zero" digit in a sequence
    of number digits, or wherein significance is attributed to the regulation
    of the occurrence of a character-space* associated with a "decimal point"
    in a sequence of number digits or the regulation of the decimal point
    associated with a sequence of number digits.


CLS 400/285.5
TXT With reverse-direction movement of carriage:

    Subject matter under subclass 285 wherein the carriage* is moved in a
    direction opposed to the normal character-space* direction during the
    imprinting of numeral digits in denominational columns.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the number is imprinted from the most
    significant to the least significant digit by backspacing the carriage from
    right to left along the print-line*, or the number is imprinted so that the
    first denominational digit typed is the least significant digit.


CLS 400/285.6
TXT Helically mounted denominational-stop(s):

    Subject matter under subclass 285 wherein significance is attributed to an
    arrangement of denominational-stop* components, the components being
    carried on a drum or cylinder in an array that has the configuration of a
    helix around the surface of the drum or cylinder.


CLS 400/286
TXT Shiftable denominational-stop(s):

    Subject matter under subclass 285 wherein significance is attributed to the
    movement of a denomination-stop* or the interengagement of said
    denominational-stop with a tab-stop element on a tab-rack*.


CLS 400/286.1
TXT Step-shaped denominational- or tab-stop(s):

    Subject matter under subclass 286 wherein either the denominational-stop*
    components or the "tab-stop" elements on the tab-rack* are arranged in sets
    or assemblages, the components or elements of each set being in an
    ascending or descending scale of individually varying length in each
    assemblage.


CLS 400/286.2
TXT Engaging movable tab-rack means:

    Subject matter under subclass 286 wherein significance is attributed to the
    interengagement of a denominational-stop* with a tab-stop element on a
    tab-rack* or to the movement of said tab-stop element from inactive
    position to active position or return from active to inactive position.


CLS 400/286.3
TXT With latch or lock means:

    Subject matter under subclass 285 wherein significance is attributed to
    means for temporarily securing against unwanted or undesired movement any
    parts of the mechanism that is included in the tabulator mechanism for
    denominational column(s).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    663,    for other locking mechanism in a typewriter.


CLS 400/287
TXT Column set by control of mutilated carriage-rack:

    Subject matter under subclass 284 wherein the carriage* is caused to move
    quickly to its "column-set" position by use of a carriage-rack* that has
    gaps in the teeth or notches of the bar that is part of the carriage-rack,
    the length of the gap determining the length of the character-space*
    distance that is to be jumped in moving the carriage to the column-set
    position.


CLS 400/288
TXT Column set by control of tab-rack:

    Subject matter under subclass 284 wherein the carriage* is caused to move
    to its "column-set" position by moving a tab-rack* component from an
    inoperative position to an operative position, the tab-rack having tab-stop
    elements thereon which are active to govern or regulate the column-set
    position.


CLS 400/289
TXT Column set by control of tab-stops or column- stops or counter-stops:

    Subject matter under subclass 284 wherein the carriage* is caused to be
    moved to its "column-set" position and stopped in that position by
    "tab-stop" elements mounted on a tab-rack*, selected of said elements
    having been moved from a "clear" position to a "set" position, or the
    carriage is stopped in a column-set position by a "counter-stop" element.

    (1)     Note.  For further discussion of the terms used and their
    operation, see the definition of tab-rack in the Glossary, section III.


CLS 400/289.1
TXT Tab-stops grouped in stepped fashion:

    Subject matter under subclass 289 wherein the "tab-stop" elements are
    arranged in sets or assemblages of tab stops on the tab-rack*, the
    individual tab stops of each set being in an ascending or descending scale
    of individually varying length in each assemblage, and each set or
    asemblage being arranged for a different "columnar" arrangement.


CLS 400/290
TXT Forward or reverse tabulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 284 wherein the carriage* is caused to be
    moved and is caused to be stopped in a position corresponding to a
    print-point* for the start of a column of character* symbols, the movement
    occurring in a character-space* direction, or the carriage is caused to be
    moved in a direction opposite to the character-space direction and caused
    to be stopped in a position corresponding to a print-point for the end of a
    column of character symbols.

    (1)     Note.  The typewriter of this subclass is sometimes also provided
    with a carriage-shuttling mechanism, which enables the carriage to travel
    in a forward or a reverse direction directly between tabular positions
    without having to first return to home position following a tabulating
    movement.


CLS 400/291
TXT With impact cushion or rebound check:

    Subject matter under subclass 284 wherein the carriage* is moved in a first
    direction and then stopped in a tabular position, and wherein the stopping
    of the carriage is regulated by a component or assemblage that is yieldable
    or limited in the movement of said component or assemblage when used to
    stop the carriage, whereby the energy of movement of the carriage is
    absorbed and/or any movement in a direction opposite to said first
    direction is inhibited.


CLS 400/292
TXT With control of carriage velocity:

    Subject matter under subclass 284 wherein the carriage* is moved and then
    stopped in tabular position, and wherein the speed of movement of the
    carriage is regulated.


CLS 400/293
TXT By multiple pitch tab-racks or mutilated gear:

    Subject matter under subclass 284 wherein the carriage* is moved and then
    stopped in tabular position, the movement and stopping being regulated or
    governed by either (a) a tab-rack* component in which one plurality of
    tab-stop elements are spaced to one pitch* distance and another plurality
    of tab stops are spaced to another pitch distance, or a plurality of
    tab-racks, each tab-rack having tab-stop elements spaced to a different
    pitch from one from another, or (b) a toothed driving member having gaps in
    the teeth of the member.


CLS 400/294
TXT Stop-setting or stop-clearing mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 284 wherein significance is attributed to
    structure for causing movement of a "tab-stop" element from a passive
    position (i.e., a position at which it will not engage with a
    "counter-stop" element) to an active (i.e., "set") position (i.,e., a
    position at which it will engage with a counter-stop element to stop a
    moving carriage* in a "tabular" position), or for causing movement of a
    tab-stop element from an active position to a passive (i.e., "clear")
    position, or wherein significance is attributed to structure for causing
    movement of a counter-stop element from a passive position to an active
    position or for causing movement of a counter-stop element from an active
    position to a passive position.

    (1)     Note.  The terms "tab-stop" element and "counter-stop" element have
    been discussed in the definition of tab-rack* in the Glossary, section III,
    and the term "tabular" has been discussed in the definition of tab* as well
    as in (2) Note to the definition of subclass 284 above.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass provides for a type-writer wherein the tab
    stop(s) is/are cleared, i.e., moved from active position to inactive
    position.


CLS 400/294.1
TXT With stop magazine (i.e., for supply of stops):

    Subject matter under subclass 294 wherein the typewriter is provided with a
    receptacle in which the "tab-stop" elements are contained ready for use,
    from which receptacle the tab stops are removed to be used for use in the
    tabulating mechanism, and to which receptacle the tab stops are returned
    after use in the tabulator mechanism.


CLS 400/294.2
TXT With key-locking mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 294 wherein the typewriter is provided with
    means to prevent activation of the key* element that effects tabulation or
    the key element that effects any action or function* other than the setting
    or clearing of a "tab-stop" element during the time that the tab stop is
    cleared or set.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    663,    for other locking mechanism in a typewriter.


CLS 400/294.3
TXT Drum-mounted tab-stops:

    Subject matter under subclass 294 wherein the "tab-stop" elements are
    carried on a cylindrical member or on a segment of a cylindrical member,
    either on the inner or the outer periphery of the member or on the radial
    surface of the member.


CLS 400/295
TXT Stop setting by linear shift or tab-stop or counter-stop:

    Subject matter under subclass 294 wherein the "tab-stop" element or the
    counter-stop element is set into its active position by moving the tab stop
    or the counter stop along a straight-line path relative to the structure
    that supports the element.


CLS 400/295.1
TXT Stop shifts horizontally from tab-rack:

    Subject matter under subclass 295 wherein the "tab-stop" element is set
    into an active position by moving the tab stop forwardly or rearwardly
    relative to the tab-rack* component that carries the tab-stop elements.


CLS 400/295.2
TXT Stops shifts laterally along tab-rack:

    Subject matter under subclass 295 wherein the "tab-stop" element is set
    into one position or another position to accomplish the tabulation by
    moving the tab stop along the length of the tab-rack* component that
    carries the tab-stop elements.


CLS 400/296
TXT Stop setting by movement of tab-rack:

    Subject matter under subclass 294 wherein the tab-rack* of the typewriter
    is movable from one position to another relative to the carriage* of the
    typewriter, and wherein the "tab-stop" element on the tab-rack is set into
    active position by moving the tab-rack.


CLS 400/296.1
TXT Tab-rack rotates about its axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 296 wherein the movement of the tab-rack* is
    a turning movement that occurs about a center that extends through the
    tab-rack component along the length of the component.


CLS 400/296.2
TXT Plural tab-racks:

    Subject matter under subclass 296 wherein the typewriter is provided with
    more than one tab-rack* component.


CLS 400/297
TXT Stop setting by partial rotation of tab stop relative to tab-rack:

    Subject matter under subclass 294 wherein the "tab-stop" elements are
    mounted on a tab-rack* component for arcuate motion of the tab stops with
    respect to the tab-rack, and wherein the tab-stop element is set into
    active position for tabulation by moving the tab stop with such arcuate
    motion.


CLS 400/297.1
TXT Stop setting by pivoting pawllike stop:

    Subject matter under subclass 294 wherein the "tab-stop" element is set
    into active position for tabulation by moving the tab-stop element with an
    arcuate movement.

    (1)     Note.  The tab stop is usually hook- shaped and has a pivot axis on
    the end remote from the hook.


CLS 400/298
TXT Tab-stop or tab-rack structure, per se:

    Subject matter under subclass 284 wherein significance is attributed to the
    conformation or other characteristics of the tab-stop element, per se, or
    the tab-rack* component, per se.


CLS 400/299
TXT With rotatable type wheel for repeat printing in response to carriage
    movement:

    Subject matter under subclass 283 wherein the typewriter is provided with a
    type-member* in the form of a disc that turns about an axis and bears on
    the edge of the disc a plurality of type-face* elements all of which
    type-faces imprint the same character* symbol on the record-medium* when
    the edge of the disc is impressed against the record-medium, and wherein
    the typewriter is provided with means to urge the disc against the
    record-medium as the carriage* is moved in a character-space* direction,
    whereby as the carriage so moves as the disc is impressed against the
    record-medium, a series of the same character symbol is imprinted on the
    record-medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for a liner responsive to carriage movement.


CLS 400/300
TXT Key-actuated mechanism for nonfeed of carriage (e.g., "silent" key, locking
    carriage, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 283 wherein the carriage* is normally caused
    to be moved in a direction that enables the character* symbols to be
    imprinted in succession (i.e., the character-space* direction) by or
    concurrently with successive pressing of successive character key*
    elements, but wherein significance is attributed to a mode of operating the
    typewriter whereby pressing of a particular key element will not cause
    movement of the carriage.

    (1)     Note.  The purpose of this mechanism is to permit the imprinting of
    a character* symbol without an accompanying character-space* movement of
    the carriage, thereby permitting two or more symbols to be imprinted at the
    same print-point*.  The mechanism thus permits a letter and an accent mark,
    or a letter and a vowel symbol, or two different letters (these being only
    exemplary of the possibilities), to be imprinted at the same print-point.


CLS 400/301
TXT By disabling carriage-escapement mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein the nonfeed or the nonmovement of
    the carriage* is caused by temporarily making the normal carriage-feed
    mechanism ineffective to move the carriage.

    (1)     Note.  For discussion of how the normal carriage-escapement
    mechanism operates, see the definition of subclass 329.


CLS 400/302
TXT By key actuated independently of carriage feed:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein the nonfeed or nonmovement of the
    carriage* is caused by the pressing of a special key* element on the
    key-board*, which special key is used only to prevent carriage movement and
    has no other effect on the carriage movement.


CLS 400/303
TXT For varying carriage feed:

    Subject matter under subclass 283 wherein the carriage* is caused to be
    moved in a direction that enables the character* symbols to be imprinted in
    succession (i.e., the character-space* direction), and wherein the movement
    in said direction is regulated to occur in irregular or unequal increments
    of movement, the increments corresponding to variable character-space
    distances or variable word-space* distances.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for a variable carriage-feed mechanism used in a "justification"
    typewriter.


CLS 400/304
TXT For kerning or overlap imprinting:

    Subject matter under subclass 303 wherein the movement of the carriage* in
    the character-space* direction is regulated to enable (a) imprinting a
    first character* symbol in a first character-space, moving the carriage to
    a distance less than a full character-space distance, and imprinting a
    second character different from the first character partly within the
    character-space of the first-character, or (b) imprinting a first character
    symbol in a first character-space, moving the carriage a very short
    distance relative to the first character-space, and imprinting the first
    character again almost within the first character-space, but only slightly
    displaced from the first character.

    (1)     Note.  The operation described in (a) above is known as "kerning"
    and is sometimes used to form a compound letter symbol out of two standard
    letter symbols.  The operation described in (b) is known as overlap
    imprinting and is sometimes used to form a "boldface" letter symbol.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210,    for a ribbon used for boldface typing.


CLS 400/305
TXT By force-feed or screw-feed mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 303 wherein the carriage* is caused to be
    moved in a carriage-feed (i.e., character-space*) direction through
    irregular increments by a mechanism that positively engages the carriage or
    a portion affixed thereto and that positively moves in a direction to
    thereby move the carriage therewith in said direction, or wherein the
    carriage is caused to be moved by the rotation of a helically threaded
    member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    328,    for force-feed mechanism in an equal increment carriage feed.


CLS 400/306
TXT Proportional to variable widths of imprinted characters:

    Subject matter under subclass 303 wherein the irregular or unequal
    increments of movement of the carriage* correspond to the various widths of
    the character* symbols that are imprinted on the record-medium*.

    (1)     Note.  In the definition of the term character-space* in the
    Glossary, section III, there is a discussion of the reason for variable
    carriage feed. Briefly, in this mode of operation the carriage is moved
    along the print-line* to the extent that a particular character extends
    along the print-line. Therefore the distances between adjacent characters
    are more nearly equal one to another, and the resulting text appears
    uniform and gives a pleasing appearance.


CLS 400/306.1
TXT By settable elements (e.g., pins, bars, slides, etc):

    Subject matter under subclass 306 wherein the irregular increments of
    carriage* movement are caused by drive means that includes a movable member
    that is provided with components that may be set into active position to
    engage with another portion of the drive means, which component may be
    cleared out of active position so as not to engage with the other portion
    of the drive means, the selection of the amount of increment of carriage
    movement being made by setting or not setting the components.


CLS 400/306.2
TXT By ratchet wheel and controlled pawl:

    Subject matter under subclass 306 wherein the irregular increments of
    carriage* movement are caused by drive means that includes a pawl* that is
    oscillated and caused to move into engagement with the teeth of a ratchet*
    in the form of a ratchet wheel.

    (1)     Note.  The term "ratchet wheel" is defined in the definition of
    ratchet.


CLS 400/306.3
TXT Including multiple pawls:

    Subject matter under subclass 306.2 wherein the drive means is provided
    with a plurality of pawl* members.


CLS 400/306.4
TXT And multiple wheels:

    Subject matter under subclass 306.3 wherein the drive means is also
    provided with a plurality of ratchet wheels.


CLS 400/307
TXT By ratchet rack and controlled pawl:

    Subject matter under subclass 306 wherein the irregular increments of
    carriage* movement are caused by drive means that includes a pawl* that is
    oscillated and caused to move into engagement with the teeth of a ratchet*
    in the form of a ratchet rack.

    (1)     Note.  The term "ratchet rack" is defined in the definition of
    ratchet.


CLS 400/307.1
TXT Including multiple pawls:

    Subject matter under subclass 307 wherein the drive means is provided with
    a plurality of pawl* members.


CLS 400/307.2
TXT By cooperating toothed members (e.g., gear, segment, rack, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 306 wherein the irregular increments of
    carriage* movement are caused by drive means that includes at least two
    components, each of which is formed with notches or teeth, the notches of
    one component intermeshing with the notches of the other so that movement
    of one component is transmitted to the other component.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are drive means having gears or
    differential gears, or gear and rack. or gear segment and gear, in many
    arrangements of such components.


CLS 400/308
TXT Carriage backspace mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 283 wherein the carriage* is caused to be
    moved in a direction opposite to the typing (i.e., character-space*)
    direction that enables the character* symbols to be imprinted in
    succession, and wherein the movement in said opposite direction is
    regulated to occur in increments corresponding to character-space distances
    but in the direction opposite to the character-space direction.

    (1)     Note.  The backspace increments may be regular (i.e., corresponding
    to equal character-space distances), or the backspace increments may be
    irregular or unequal or variable (i.e., corresponding to variable
    character-space distances, mechanism for which is found in subclass 303).


CLS 400/309
TXT Backspace proportional to variable width of imprinted characters:

    Subject matter under subclass 308 wherein the carriage* is caused to be
    moved in irregular or unequal increments, the increment of movement for any
    particular movement corresponding to a variable character-space* distance
    equivalent to the various widths of the character* symbols that were
    imprinted on the record-medium* just prior to the need for backspacing.

    (1)     Note.  See the definition of character-space in the Glossary,
    section III, for a discussion of the need for variable carriage feed.  This
    discussion is amplified in (1) Note to the definition of subclass 306.  In
    the typewriter of this subclass the backspace distance is the same amount,
    but in the opposite direction, as the variable character feed, and is for
    the purpose of returning the carriage to exactly the same print-point* that
    the carriage was before a particular character was imprinted.


CLS 400/310
TXT Including powered drive means:

    Subject matter under subclass 308 wherein the carriage* is caused to be
    moved by way of energy supplied to the typewriter by other than the typist.

    (1)     Note.  The typewriter of this subclass is powered by such energy as
    an electric motor, a solenoid, a continuously rotated power roll the power
    of which is intermittently applied, etc.


CLS 400/311
TXT Including pawl and escapement wheel:

    Subject matter under subclass 308 wherein the carriage* is caused to be
    moved by the actuation of a key* element that moves a pawl* that
    interengages with one of the teeth of a toothed wheel to drive the carriage
    in a backspace direction.


CLS 400/312
TXT Including pawl and escapement rack:

    Subject matter under subclass 308 wherein the carriage* is caused to be
    moved by the actuation of a key* element that moves a pawl* that
    interengages with one of the teeth of a ratchet* rack to drive the carriage
    in a backspace direction.


CLS 400/313
TXT Carriage-return mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 283 wherein the carriage* is caused to be
    moved in a direction opposite to the typing (i.e., character-space*)
    direction that enables the character* symbols to be imprinted in
    succession, and wherein the movement in said opposite direction is
    regulated to retrogress the carriage back to the beginning of a print-line*.

    (1)     Note.  The carriage is usually returned until it is stopped by a
    margin* regulator or margin-stop* element.  In some typewriters the
    carriage return may be modified to stop at a preset position to permit the
    first character of a new print-line to be indented from the margin*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for carriage return in a flat-platen* typewriter.


CLS 400/314
TXT With concurrent line-spacing:

    Subject matter under subclass 313 wherein the record-medium* is moved in a
    line-space* direction during approximately the same time that the carriage*
    is returned to the beginning of a print-line*.

    (1)     Note.  The line-spacing movement may occur at the beginning or at
    the end or during the carriage-return movement.


CLS 400/314.1
TXT Using electromagnetic drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 314 wherein the carriage*-return movement is
    powered by a solenoid or similar electromagnetic means.


CLS 400/314.2
TXT For selected number of line-spaces:

    Subject matter under subclass 314 wherein the record-medium* is moved in a
    predetermined number of line-space* increments during the carriage-return
    movement, and wherein the predetermined number may be changed at the will
    of the typist.


CLS 400/314.3
TXT With disconnection of return by margin-stop:

    Subject matter under subclass 314 wherein significance is attributed to
    disablement of the mechanism that returns the carriage* when the carriage
    engages the margin* regulator that is located at the beginning of a
    print-line*, wherein the carriage-feed drive may regain control of the
    carriage movement.

    (1)     Note.  The term "margin regulator" is defined in the definition of
    subclass 342.


CLS 400/314.4
TXT Initiated by user's leg or foot:

    Subject matter under subclass 314 wherein significance is attributed to
    starting the return of the carriage* by a movement of a lower limb of the
    typist.


CLS 400/314.5
TXT Initiated by actuator adjacent key-board:

    Subject matter under subclass 314 wherein significance is attributed to
    starting return of the carriage* by movement by a typist of a key* element
    on or near the key-board*.

    (1)     Note.  In most manually powered typewriters, the carriage return is
    by way of a lever adjacent to the platen*. The typewriter of this subclass
    is usually electrically powered, and pressing of a key initiates the return.


CLS 400/314.6
TXT By return-clutch means:

    Subject matter under subclass 314 wherein the carriage* return is powered
    by way of a clutch mechanism that is provided in the typewriter especially
    for carriage-return purposes.

    (1)     Note.  A "clutch" is a mechanism for intermittently connecting a
    rotating driving shaft to a driven shaft by way of faces that are
    connected, one face to each shaft, and intermittently connected to one
    another.


CLS 400/315
TXT Responsive to carriage position:

    Subject matter under subclass 313 wherein the carriage* return is initiated
    as a result of the carriage having moved in the character-space* direction
    to a predetermined location relative to the typewriter.

    (1)     Note.  The typewriter of this subclass is usually electrically
    powered.


CLS 400/316
TXT Partial return (e.g., for start of paragraph, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 313 wherein significance is attributed to a
    return of the carriage* to a position short of the normal or usual return
    to a margin* of the page*.

    (1)     Note.  The partial return is usually to a position where a new
    paragraph will be started at a location on the record-medium* that is
    indented from the margin of the text.


CLS 400/317
TXT Including power drive (e.g., electric, spring, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 313 wherein the carriage* is returned by way
    of energy applied to the mechanism other than energy supplied by the typist
    at the time of carriage return.


CLS 400/317.1
TXT For bidirectional drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 317 wherein the carriage* is moved in its
    return movement and in its feed movement by way of energy applied to the
    mechanism other than energy supplied by the typist.


CLS 400/317.2
TXT By spring-driven motor:

    Subject matter under subclass 317 wherein the carriage is moved in its
    return movement by way of energy that is stored in a resilient or yieldable
    component connected to a drive train that moves the carriage.

    (1)     Note.  The power for winding the spring to store energy that will
    subsequently be used during typing to return the carriage whenever so
    desired by the typist maybe supplied by an electric motor or may be
    supplied by the user of the typewriter.  Disclosures of this form of spring
    energy are properly classified herein because the energy is stored and not
    applied by the typist at the time of carriage return.


CLS 400/317.3
TXT Powered via engagement of a clutch:

    Subject matter under subclass 317 wherein the carriage* is moved in its
    return movement by way of energy that is applied by way of a clutch
    connection.

    (1)     Note.  A "clutch" is a mechanism for intermittently connecting a
    rotating driving shaft to a driven shaft by way of faces that are
    connected, one face to each shaft, and intermittently connected to one
    another.


CLS 400/318
TXT Initiated by actuator adjacent key-board:

    Subject matter under subclass 313 wherein significance is attributed to
    starting return of the carriage by movement by a typist of a key* element
    on or near the key-board*.


CLS 400/319
TXT Carriage-feed mechanism (e.g., escapement, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 283 wherein the carriage* is caused or
    enabled to be moved in a direction that enables the character* symbols to
    be imprinted in succession (i.e., the character-space* direction), and
    wherein the movement in said direction is regulated to occur in regular or
    equal increments of movement, each increment corresponding to a
    character-space distance or a word-space* distance.


CLS 400/320
TXT For carriage on which a type-head-carrier is mounted:

    Subject matter under subclass 319 wherein the carriage* supports a
    type-head-carrier* for movement of both the carriage and the
    type-head-carrier in said direction that enables the character* symbols to
    be imprinted in succession (i.e., the character-space* direction).

    (1)     Note.  As discussed in the Glossary, section III, under the
    definition of carriage, in some typewriters the record-medium* is held by a
    platen* that is mounted on a "platen carriage" that is moved in said
    direction (i.e., the character-space direction) thereby moving the
    record-medium for character-space and word-space* distances.

            In the typewriter of this subclass the record-medium does not move
    during the imprinting of characters symbols. Instead the type-face*
    elements are impacted against a record-medium at a different print-point*
    for each character.  The type-face elements are on a type-head* that is
    mounted on a type-head-carrier that is supported on a "type-head carriage"
    that moves relative to the stationary record-medium, thereby moving the
    successively impacted type-faces for character-space and word-space
    distances.


CLS 400/320.1
TXT With concurrent movement of carriage for record-medium and carriage for
    type-head-carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 320 wherein a typewriter is provided with two
    carriage* mechanisms, one of which carriage (i.e., a "platen carriage")
    supports a platen that holds a record-medium* for movement of both the
    platen and the record-medium in a character-space* direction and the other
    of which carriage (i.e., a "type-head* carriage") supports a
    type-head-carrier* for movement of both the type-head carriage and the
    type-head-carrier in a character-space direction.

    (1)     Note.  As discussed in the Glossary, section III, under the
    definition of carriage, usually the direction of carriage feed for a platen
    carriage is from right to left, whereas the direction of carriage feed for
    a type-head carriage is from left to right (but note the note exceptions
    discussed in that definition).


CLS 400/321
TXT With repeat spacing:

    Subject matter under subclass 319 wherein the carriage* is urged to be
    moved in successive increments of movement (the increments corresponding to
    character-space* distances) a plurality of said increments occurring upon
    the pressing of one key* element on the key-board*.

    (1)     Note.  The typewriter of this subclass is usually one that is
    electrically powered, thus enabling repeat spacing with one pressing of a
    space key or space-bar*.


CLS 400/322
TXT By electric or magnetic power:

    Subject matter under subclass 319 wherein the movement of the carriage* is
    caused by electricity or magnetism.

    (1)     Note.  The electricity is supplied to an electric motor or to an
    electromagnet (e.g., a solenoid) which effects carriage-feed movements to
    the carriage.  Also included in this subclass is a typewriter wherein a
    spring motor is assisted by an auxiliary electric motor.


CLS 400/323
TXT Carriage-feed in two directions (e.g., continuous typing in both
    directions):

    Subject matter under subclass 319 wherein the carriage* is urged in a first
    direction and the movement in said first direction is regulated as defined
    in subclass 319, and wherein said carriage is alternately urged in a second
    direction that is opposite to said first direction and the movement in said
    second direction is also regulated as defined in subclass 319.

    (1)     Note.  A "print-line*" is usually formed by imprinting successive
    characters* in the order in which they are read.  However, some typewriters
    are capable of imprinting successive characters in reverse order, that is,
    the first character imprinted is the last character of the print-line, the
    second character imprinted is the next-to-last character of the print-line,
    etc.  In the typewriter of this subclass the first print-line may be
    imprinted in regular order and the second print-line may be imprinted in
    reverse order, the text being imprinted alternately from left to right, and
    then from right to left in "continuous" typing action.


CLS 400/323.1
TXT In selected direction (e.g., for semitic language, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 323 wherein one of said first or second
    directions is chosen for the primary or significant direction of carriage*
    movement.

    (1)     Note.  The purpose of this mode of operation is to imprint
    successive character* symbols in a character-space* direction that is
    opposite to that which is used in the usual typewriter.  In most
    typewriters, characters are imprinted from left to right to conform to most
    European languages, therefore a platen carriage that moves the
    record-medium* effects movement of the platen carriage from right to left
    whereas a type-head carriage that moves a type-head-carrier effects
    movement of the type-head carriage from left to right.  Certain Semitic
    languages, e.g., Arabic and Hebrew, are written from right to left,
    therefore in the typewriter of this subclass, the carriage movement feed
    direction is selectively changed to be reversed from the directions
    referred to above.


CLS 400/324
TXT Word-space concurrent with typing of last character of word:

    Subject matter under subclass 319 wherein significance is attributed to a
    carriage*-feed mechanism that produces a word-space* whenever the last
    character* symbol of a word* has been imprinted on the record-medium*.


CLS 400/325
TXT By space-bar mechanism (e.g., separate connection to escapement), or
    paragraph-indentation key:

    Subject matter under subclass 319 wherein significance is attributed to the
    actuation of a carriage*-feeding movement as a result of pressing a
    space-bar*-key* element, or wherein significance is attributed to the
    actuation of a carriage-feeding movement that moves the carriage a distance
    equivalent to a plurality of character-space* increments as a result of
    pressing a single key element.

    (1)     Note.  The distance referred to is that needed to start a new
    paragraph in a text wherein the first letter of a paragraph is indented
    from the margin* of the body of the text.


CLS 400/326
TXT With compensator for tilt of typewriter:

    Subject matter under subclass 319 wherein significance is attributed to
    mechanism that counterbalances the force of gravity acting on a carriage*
    when the typewriter is inclined to the horizontal.

    (1)     Note.  A typewriter is usually operated while it is in a horizontal
    position. The carriage therefore moves horizontally, and the weight of its
    mass does not affect its movement. However, if the typewriter is tilted and
    its carriage is moved along a line that is inclined to the horizontal, the
    weight of the carriage will affect its movement.  Disclosures in this
    subclass provided for means to compensate for the weight of the carriage
    due to tilting of the typewriter.


CLS 400/327
TXT For diagonal print-line:

    Subject matter under subclass 319 wherein significance is attributed to a
    mode of operating a typewriter whereby successively imprinted character*
    symbols form a print-line* that is inclined relative to the top or bottom
    edge of a rectangular sheet.

    (1)     Note.  The diagonal print-line is usually formed by concurrently
    feeding the carriage* and feeding the record-medium* between successive
    imprints of characters.


CLS 400/328
TXT By force-feed or screw mechanism (e.g., direct drive, screw-biasing
    carriage, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 319 wherein the carriage* is caused to be
    moved in a carriage-feed (i.e., character-space*) direction by a mechanism
    that positively engages the carriage or a portion affixed thereto and that
    positively moves in said direction to thereby move the carriage therewith,
    or wherein the carriage is caused to be moved in said direction by a
    helically threaded element that is rotated and cooperates with another
    complementary element on the carriage to move the carriage.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the carriage may be moved by a spring that
    is biased or tensioned by a screw, or the carriage may be moved by a pawl*
    engaging and moving a ratchet* wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305,    for force feed in a variable-feed carriage mechanism.


CLS 400/328.1
TXT Including pawl and toothed rack:

    Subject matter under subclass 328 wherein the carriage* is caused to be
    moved by a pawl* that engages in a notch between two teeth of a ratchet*
    rack, which rack is connected to the carriage to cause movement of the
    carriage when the pawl moves while in engagement with the rack.

    (1)     Note.  The term "rack" as used in this definition is discussed
    under the definitions of pawl and ratchet in the Glossary, section III.


CLS 400/329
TXT Carriage escapement controlled by pawl:

    Subject matter under subclass 319 wherein the carriage* is urged by a
    source of power to be moved in a direction for imprinting successive
    character* symbols on the record-medium* (e.g., a character-space*
    direction), and the movement in said direction is regulated by a mechanism
    that (a) restrains the carriage against movement, and (b) releases the
    carriage momentarily to be urged to move, and (c) again restrains the
    carriage against movement, which mechanism includes a member or members
    having movement relative to the carriage or to a portion connected thereto,
    the relative movement between the member(s) and carriage effecting the
    restraint and momentary release of the carriage to produce the increments
    of movement corresponding to character-space and word-space* distances.

    (1)     Note.  The regulating mechanism defined above is usually a pawl*
    and ratchet* mechanism as these members are defined in the Glossary,
    section III.

    (2)     Note.  Movement of the carriage during carriage feed is related to
    movement of the type-face* element to the print-point* for impressing the
    type-face against the record-medium*. These movements occur in various
    terms applied in the typewriter art.  In all the sequences a typist
    initiates the operation by pressing a key* element which causes movement of
    a type-face (e.g., a type-face on a type-bar*, a type-face on a type-head*,
    etc.) from its rest position.  In "full-drop" escapement the sequence is
    (a) the type-face is impressed at the print-point, (b) the carriage starts
    its movement through a full character-space distance, and (c) the carriage
    completes a character-space and stops.  In a "half-drop" escapement the
    sequence is (a) the carriage starts its movement but stops momentarily
    approximately halfway in a character-space, (b) the type-face is impressed
    at the print-point, and (c) the carriage continues its movement through the
    remainder of the character-space.  In "speed" escapement (also known as
    "reverse" escapement) the sequence is (a) the carriage starts its movement
    through a full character-space distance, (b) the carriage completes a
    character-space and stops, and (c) the type-face is impressed at the
    print-point.  In all the sequences the type-face is returned to its rest
    position and the key* is also returned to its rest position. The
    differences between the various sequences are primarily in the time
    available to enable a type-bar (which carries the type-face element) to
    move from rest position to print-point position and back to rest position
    (a) as related to the time available for a next-actuated type-bar to
    perform the same movements without interference from the previously
    actuated type-bar, and (b) as related to the time available to move the
    carriage through a carriage space.


CLS 400/329.1
TXT Means to ensure engagement of pawl at start of print-line (i.e.,
    overbanking control):

    Subject matter under subclass 329 wherein significance is attributed to
    structure that will positively cause a pawl* of the regulating mechanism to
    contact the carriage* or a portion (e.g., a ratchet*) connected thereto
    whenever the carriage has been properly positioned at the beginning of the
    print-line* (i.e., in most typewriters at the left margin* or the
    print-point* proper for the imprint of the first character* symbol of a
    print-line).


CLS 400/329.2
TXT Carriage-feed initiated and completed during depression of character key
    (e.g., "speed" or "reverse" escapement):

    Subject matter under subclass 329 wherein a key* element that is used to
    cause imprint of a character* symbol is pressed, the pressing of said key
    element initiating (a) the movement of a type-face* from its rest position
    to the print-point*, and (b) the movement of the carriage* through a
    character-space* distance, and wherein the movement of the carriage is
    started and completed through a complete character-space before the
    type-face impacts the print-point.

    (1)     Note.  The differences between "full-drop" escapement, "half-drop"
    escapement, and "speed" or "reverse" escapement are discussed in (2) Note
    to the definition of subclass 329 above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    330.2,  for "half-drop" escapement and see (1) Note above.


CLS 400/329.3
TXT Pawl rocker spring regulating device:

    Subject matter under subclass 329 wherein a pawl* is supported by a
    component, which component is mounted for oscillation relative to a
    carriage-rack* or to a ratchet* disc or wheel and is urged into engagement
    with the teeth or notches of the carriage-rack or the ratchet disc by a
    yieldable element, and wherein the force with the yieldable element urges
    the component is adjustable.


CLS 400/330
TXT Via ratchet wheel connected to pinion and carriage-rack:

    The regulating mechanism includes (a) a carriage-rack* affixed to the
    carriage*, and (b) a rotatable gear having teeth that are engaged with
    teeth or notches in the carriage-rack, and (c) a ratchet* that is in the
    form of a rotatable disc or wheel and is joined to the rotatable gear, and
    (d) a pawl* that cooperates with the ratchet, the assemblage of parts
    cooperating to effect the restraint and momentary release of the carriage.


CLS 400/330.1
TXT And plural pawls:

    Subject matter under subclass 330 wherein the regulating mechanism includes
    more than one pawl* member.

    (1)     Note.  Usually two pawls are provided, one of the pawls disengaging
    from between two adjacent teeth of a ratchet* momentarily, and the other of
    the pawls holding the ratchet against movement in excess of one increment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332.1,  for escapement mechanism having plural pawls and one or more
    ratchet racks.


CLS 400/330.2
TXT For half-drop escapement:

    Subject matter under subclass 330.1 wherein significance is attributed to
    an action of the pawl* and ratchet* mechanism that restrains, momentarily
    releases, and again restrains the movement of said carriage* to produce a
    "half-drop" escapement.

    (1)     Note.  The term half-drop escapement is discussed in (2) Note to
    subclass 329 above, wherein the action of various forms of carriage
    escapement (including "speed" escapement) is discussed and compared.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329.2,  for "speed" escapement and see (1) Note above.


CLS 400/330.3
TXT Mounted on pivotable pawl carrier or rocker:

    Subject matter under subclass 330.1 wherein said pawl* members are
    supported by a component, which component is mounted for oscillation
    relative to said ratchet* disc or wheel to enable one or another of the
    pawls to engage one or another of the teeth or notches of the ratchet disc
    or wheel, whereby the disc or wheel, and thereby the carriage*, is
    alternately restrained against movement, released for movement, and
    restrained against movement.


CLS 400/330.4
TXT Including pawl(s) fixed to rocker:

    Subject matter under subclass 330.3 wherein one or more of said pawl*
    members are integral with or fixedly secured to said component.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes some typewriters wherein the
    component or rocker includes fixed offset pawls.


CLS 400/330.5
TXT And slidable pawl:

    Subject matter under subclass 330.4 wherein at least one of said pawl*
    members is mounted for rectilinear movement relative to said oscillatable
    component.


CLS 400/330.6
TXT Including pawl pivoted about axis parallel to rocker axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 330.4 wherein said component oscillates about
    a first axis and one of said pawl* members oscillates about a second axis
    that is parallel to said first axis.


CLS 400/330.7
TXT Mounted on movable (e.g., rotatable, slidable) pawl carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 330.1 wherein said pawl* members are
    supported by a component, which component is mounted for movement relative
    to said ratchet* disc or wheel to enable one or another of the pawls to
    engage one or another of the teeth or notches of the ratchet disc or wheel,
    whereby the disc or wheel, and thereby the carriage*, is alternately
    restrained against movement, released for movement, and restrained against
    movement.

    (1)     Note.  The movement of the component or pawl carrier may be
    reciprocation or rotation.


CLS 400/330.8
TXT Including particular structure of pawl (e.g., pivoted, unitary, with
    roller, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 330.1 wherein significance is attributed to
    the construction of manner or mounting of said pawl* member.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are typewriters wherein the pawl is pivoted
    in a particular way, or is a unitary member, or is provided with a roller
    at the ratchet*-engaging end thereof, etc.


CLS 400/331
TXT Including plural ratchet wheels:

    Subject matter under subclass 330 wherein the regulating mechanism includes
    more than one ratchet* that is in the form of a rotatable disc or wheel.


CLS 400/331.1
TXT Including particular structure of ratchet wheel:

    Subject matter under subclass 330 wherein significance is attributed to the
    construction of the rotatable ratchet* disc or ratchet wheel.


CLS 400/331.2
TXT Including cushioned escapement support (e.g., rocker, pawl buffer, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 330 wherein significance is attributed to the
    construction of the support for the pawl* member or of the component on
    which the pawl is oscillatable, or of the ratchet* wheel with which the
    pawl cooperates, which construction is characterized in that it is provided
    with yieldable or resilient means.

    (1)     Note.  The support absorbs excess movement or the force or shock of
    movement of the carriage* or its driving or escapement mechanism.


CLS 400/331.3
TXT Including particular structure of mount for ratchet wheel (e.g., bearing,
    clutch, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 330 wherein significance is attributed to the
    construction of the support for the rotatable ratchet* disc or ratchet
    wheel that enables the disc or wheel to rotate.


CLS 400/332
TXT Via toothed rack:

    Subject matter under subclass 329 wherein the regulating mechanism includes
    (a) a ratchet* that is in the form of a bar having teeth or notches along
    one of its sides, and (b) a pawl* that cooperates with the ratchet, the
    assemblage of parts cooperating to effect the restraint and momentary
    release of the carriage*.

    (1)     Note.  In a "platen-carriage" typewriter (see the discussion of
    platen carriage in the definition of carriage in the Glossary, section
    III), the ratchet is usually a carriage-rack*.  In a "type-head carriage"
    typewriter (see the discussion of type-head* carriage in the Glossary,
    section III) the ratchet [defined in (a) above] is usually fixed to the
    frame of the typewriter.


CLS 400/332.1
TXT And plural pawls:

    Subject matter under subclass 332 wherein the regulating mechanism includes
    more than one pawl* member.

    (1)     Note.  Usually two pawls are provided, one of the pawls disengaging
    from between two adjacent teeth of a carriage-rack* momentarily, and the
    other of the pawls holding the carriage-rack against movement in excess of
    one increment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    330.1,  for escapement mechanism having plural pawls and one or more
    ratchet* wheels.


CLS 400/332.2
TXT Mounted on pivotable pawl carrier or rocker:

    Subject matter under subclass 332.1 wherein said pawl* members are
    supported by a component, which component is mounted for oscillation
    relative to a carriage-rack* to enable one or another of the pawls to
    engage one of the teeth or notches of the carriage-rack, whereby the
    carriage* is alternately restrained against movement, released for
    movement, and restrained against movement.


CLS 400/332.3
TXT Mounted on movable (e.g., rotatable, slidable) pawl carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 332.1 wherein said pawl* members are
    supported by a component, which component is mounted for movement relative
    to said ratchet* bar to enable one or another of the pawls to engage one or
    another of the teeth or notches of the ratchet bar, whereby the ratchet
    bar, and thereby the carriage*, is alternately restrained against movement,
    released for movement, and restrained against movement.

    (1)     Note.  The movement of the component or pawl carrier may be
    reciprocation or rotation.


CLS 400/332.4
TXT Including particular structure of pawl (e.g., slidable, pivoted, unitary,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 332.1 wherein significance is attributed to
    the construction or manner of mounting of said pawl* member.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are typewriters wherein the pawl is pivoted
    in a particular way, or is slidable relative to the carriage-rack* with
    which it cooperates, or is a unitary member, etc.


CLS 400/332.5
TXT Including plural toothed racks (e.g., pivoted, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 332 wherein the regulating mechanism includes
    more then one ratchet* that is in the form of a bar having teeth or notches
    along one of its sides, or includes a bar having teeth or notches along
    more than one of its sides.


CLS 400/332.6
TXT Including particular structure of rack (e.g., toothed, slidable, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 332 wherein significance is attributed to the
    construction of the ratchet* bar.


CLS 400/333
TXT Universal-bar or actuator therefor:

    Subject matter under subclass 319 wherein significance is attributed to the
    universal-bar* in the drive train of the carriage-feed mechanism or of any
    other mechanism of the typewriter, or to a means for moving the
    universal-bar.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is a typewriter wherein the
    universal-bar is actuated by a key* lever.


CLS 400/333.1
TXT Connected to actuator for another function:

    Subject matter under subclass 333 wherein the universal-bar* is part of the
    drive train for a function* of the typewriter in addition to the
    carriage*-feed function.

    (1)     Note.  The term "carriage feed" is defined in the definition of
    subclass 319.  The other function mentioned above may be the vibrator* for
    the ink*-ribbon* feed, or the ink-ribbon feed itself.


CLS 400/333.2
TXT Adjustable:

    Subject matter under subclass 333 wherein significance is attributed to
    means for varying the relationship of the universal-bar* to the drive train
    of which it is a part.


CLS 400/333.3
TXT Actuated by type-bar or type-bar action:

    Subject matter under subclass 333 wherein significance is attributed to a
    universal-bar* which is caused to be moved by a type-bar* or by the
    actuating mechanism of a type-bar.


CLS 400/334
TXT Carriage-feed-release mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 319 wherein the carriage* is moved and the
    movement is controlled by a movement-regulating mechanism that engages the
    carriage or a portion affixed thereto, which mechanism may be temporarily
    disconnected from the carriage to enable unregulated movement of the
    carriage.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for a disclosure wherein the carriage
    may be disengaged from a carriage-feed spring which, per se, is provided
    for in subclass 336.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    553,    for a line-space* actuator that also has an effect on the
    carriage-feed release.


CLS 400/334.1
TXT By disengagement of clutch between ratchet wheel and pinion:

    Subject matter under subclass 334 wherein the regulating mechanism that
    enables carriage feed includes a rotatable gear having teeth with teeth or
    notches in a carriage-rack* and a ratchet* in the form of a rotatable disc
    or wheel that is joined to the rotatable gear, and also includes a clutch
    that connects the gear to the disc wheel, and wherein significance is
    attributed to means for disconnecting the clutch to disconnect the gear
    from the disc or wheel.


CLS 400/334.2
TXT By disengagement of escapement pawl(s):

    Subject matter under subclass 334 wherein the regulating mechanism that
    enables carriage feed includes a pawl* or pawl members that engage with
    teeth or notches in a carriage-rack*, and wherein significance is
    attributed to means for disconnecting the pawl or pawls from the
    carriage-rack to enable temporary unregulated movement of the carriage*.


CLS 400/334.3
TXT From carriage-rack:

    Subject matter under subclass 334.2 wherein the means for temporarily
    disconnecting the pawl* or pawl members from the carriage-rack* acts by
    moving the carriage-rack away from the pawl or pawl members.


CLS 400/335
TXT With particular connection to carriage (e.g., gear train, pulley and strap,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 319 wherein significance is attributed to
    means for enabling or causing carriage-feed movement, which movement is
    regulated to occur in regular or equal increments of movement, and which
    means is not provided for in previous subclasses.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are such means as gear drive, a pulley and
    strap connection, etc.


CLS 400/336
TXT Spring-biasing carriage for feed:

    Subject matter under subclass 319 wherein significance is attributed to a
    yieldable element that urges the carriage* of a typewriter to be moved in a
    carriage-feed (i.e., character-space*) direction, the movement being
    regulated by a mechanism previously provided for in this schedule.


CLS 400/336.1
TXT Torsion spring in rotatable barrel:

    Subject matter under subclass 336 wherein said yieldable element is in the
    form of an elongated member wound in a plurality of spiral convolutions
    housed within a hollow drum, one end of the member being fixed to the drum
    to effect rotation of the drum when the yieldable element is tensioned.


CLS 400/337
TXT Carriage-retarder mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 283 wherein the carriage* is caused to be
    moved in either a character-space* direction or in a direction opposite to
    said character-space direction, and the movement in either of said
    directions in controlled to slow or decelerate said movement or to maintain
    a uniform rate of movement whereby acceleration is controlled.


CLS 400/338
TXT Including governor responsive to speed or momentum:

    Subject matter under subclass 337 wherein said movement of the carriage* is
    controlled by a regulator that acts as a result of a tendency for the
    velocity of the carriage to increase, the action of the regulator being to
    inhibit said tendency.


CLS 400/338.1
TXT Using centrifugal force:

    Subject matter under subclass 338 wherein the regulator utilized the
    tendency of a mass that is rotating about an axis to be impelled away from
    that axis by the rotation, the action of the regulator being to control the
    velocity of the carriage.


CLS 400/338.2
TXT Using inertial force retarder (e.g., flywheel, weight, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 338 wherein the regulator utilizes the
    tendency of a mass that is in motion to remain in motion or the tendency of
    a mass that is at rest to remain at rest, the action of the regulator being
    to control the velocity of the carriage.


CLS 400/339
TXT Using fluid or fluent-material retarder:

    Subject matter under subclass 337 wherein said movement of the carriage* is
    controlled by a regulator that utilizes the movement of a flowable
    substance as a means to control the velocity of the carriage.

    (1)     Note.  The flowable substance used includes a gas, a liquid, or a
    fluent material such as sand or small particles in a device sometimes
    termed a "dashpot" or similar structure.


CLS 400/340
TXT Using frictional retarder (e.g., strap, disc, drum, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 337 wherein said movement of the carriage* is
    controlled by a regulator that utilizes the motion of two surfaces in close
    contact with each other, and the consequent resistance to such motion due
    to the close contact, as a means to control the velocity of the carriage.

    (1)     Note.  Among the various structures used as friction retarder or
    friction brake means are:  a drum, a disc, a helically wrapped spring, a
    strap, etc., any of which cooperate with a surface moving relatively
    thereto for causing a frictional retarding force to be generated.


CLS 400/341
TXT Carriage-buffer stop or rebound control:

    Subject matter under subclass 337 wherein significance is attributed to a
    regulator that is located at the end of travel of a carriage* and controls
    the stopping of the carriage when the carriage reaches the end of its
    travel, or inhibits a tendency for the carriage to bounce or retract from
    its stopping position when it reaches the end of its travel.


CLS 400/342
TXT Margin-regulator (e.g., adjustable margin-stop) mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 283 wherein the carriage* is caused or
    enabled to be moved in either a character-space* direction or an opposite
    direction, and wherein significance is attributed to a margin-stop* for
    controlling the movement of the carriage in either of said directions by
    stopping the carriage at a preset point, which point is adjustable relative
    to the typewriter, and which point corresponds to either the left margin*
    or the right margin of the record-medium* that is being typed on.

    (1)     Note.  In most typewriters the right-hand margin regulator (i.e.,
    of a typewriter that imprints successive character* symbols from left to
    right) is usually combined with a mechanism to prevent further typing on
    the print-line*, although the preventing mechanism may be disengaged at the
    will of the typist to enable imprinting of several additional characters on
    the same print-line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    671+,   for a lock responsive to the end of a type print-line.


CLS 400/343
TXT With intermediate margin-stop:

    Subject matter under subclass 342 wherein the typewriter is provided with
    one margin-stop* for the left margin* and another margin-stop for the right
    margin, and is further provided with a third margin-stop between the one
    and the other margin-stops.

    (1)     Note.  The third margin-stop is used selectively.  That is, for a
    particular text, the typist may require the temporary use of a margin-stop
    located at a margin other than the usual left-hand or right-hand margin.
    The intermediate margin-stop is then used for this temporary purpose.


CLS 400/344
TXT With other typewriter function controlled by margin-stop (e.g., signal,
    line-space):

    Subject matter under subclass 342 wherein said margin-stop* also regulates
    the action or nonaction of another typewriter function*.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the margin-stop causes the ringing of a
    bell or the actuation of a signal in response to the travel of the
    carriage* to the end of a print-line* or the margin-stop causes
    platen*-increment rotation for line-spacing and the end of a carriage*
    movement to the end of a print-line.


CLS 400/345
TXT Carriage-arrest function (e.g., "overbank"):

    Subject matter under subclass 344 wherein the carriage* is moved in a
    carriage-return direction and the movement in that direction is stopped in
    a controlled manner to prevent or inhibit shock to the mechanism or rebound
    from the stopping position.


CLS 400/346
TXT Print-line locking function:

    Subject matter under subclass 344 wherein the carriage* is caused or
    enabled to be moved in a carriage-feed (i.e., character-space*) direction,
    and the movement in that direction is stopped by the margin-stop* and also
    causes the key* elements to be locked to prevent pressing any of the
    character* keys so that no further character symbols may be imprinted on
    the record-medium*.

    (1)     Note.  The typewriter of this subclass is provided with a
    margin-stop to stop the carriage at the end of its print- line*.  However,
    the margin stop may be released by a margin-stop-release key on the
    keyboard*, the pressing of which key will disengage the locking of the
    carriage and of the key elements so that several more characters may be
    imprinted on the print-line.


CLS 400/347
TXT With multiple-pitch selector:

    Subject matter under subclass 342 wherein the typewriter is provided with
    means to determine the pitch* of the character-space* distances and to
    change the pitch by changing the carriage*-feed mechanism for different
    character-space distances and wherein significance is attributed to set the
    margin-stop* members in conformance with different pitches used for a
    particular size or font* of type-face*.


CLS 400/348
TXT With release of margin-stop:

    Subject matter under subclass 342 wherein significance is attributed to
    selective disengagement of one or another margin-stop* member from its
    active carriage-stopping position, thereby to enable one or more character*
    symbols to be imprinted on the record-medium* to the right or to the left
    of the normal margin* of the text being typed.


CLS 400/349
TXT Conjointly set or centrally spring biased:

    Subject matter under subclass 342 wherein the margin-stop* members at
    opposite ends of the carriage* or at opposite ends of the travel of the
    carriage are both moved to a new position at the same time, or wherein the
    movement of one or both of the margin-stop members is urged by a yieldable
    member toward the middle of the carriage or toward the middle of movement
    of the carriage.


CLS 400/350
TXT On record-medium table or paper-finger:

    Subject matter under subclass 342 wherein the margin-stop* member is
    mounted on the support that holds the record-medium* or is mounted on the
    paper-finger* that helps to hold the record-medium to the platen*.


CLS 400/351
TXT Margin-stop structure, per se:

    Subject matter under subclass 342 wherein significance is attributed to the
    structure of the margin-stop* member itself.


CLS 400/352
TXT Carriage, per se, or guideway therefor:

    Subject matter under subclass 283 wherein significance is attributed to
    structure of the carriage* of the typewriter or to the structure of the
    rail or track or component(s) that enable the carriage to move relative to
    the typewriter during carriage feed, or carriage return of
    carriage-backspace motion of the carriage.

    (1)     Note.  In many typewriters the carriage is a structure on which the
    platen* is supported or mounted for intermittent or incremental rotation of
    the platen to effect line-space* distances.  In such typewriters the platen
    carriage intermittently moves the platen (and the record-medium* that is
    held thereto) along the print-line* to effect character-space* and
    word-space* distances.  In other typewriters the type-head carriage* is a
    structure on which a type-head-carrier* is supported or mounted for
    movement of a type-head* that includes a multiplicity of type-member* or
    type-face* elements. In such latter typewriters the record-medium remains
    stationary during the imprinting of a print-line, and the type-head
    carriage intermittently moves the type-along the print-line to effect
    character-space and work-space distances.


CLS 400/353
TXT Including auxiliary carriage:

    Subject matter under subclass 352 wherein the typewriter is provided with a
    main carriage* that supports a platen* and is also provided with a
    secondary or auxiliary carriage that supports the same or an auxiliary
    platen in cooperative relationship therewith.

    (1)     Note.  A distinction should be made between the typewriter of this
    subclass, wherein the main and the auxiliary carriages cooperate in the
    same typewriter, and the typewriter of subclass 82 wherein plural platens
    may be independently supported in an assemblage of typewriters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     and see (1) Note above.


CLS 400/354
TXT Guideway or bearings for carriage:

    Subject matter under subclass 352 wherein significance is attributed to the
    rail or track or component(s) associated with the carriage*, which
    component(s) enables the carriage to move relative to the typewriter during
    carriage feed, or carriage return, or carriage backspace motion of the
    carriage, or wherein significance is attributed to the journals, gudgeons,
    or assemblages that reduce the effects of friction between moving parts.


CLS 400/354.1
TXT Guideway cooperating with ball bearings or roller bearings:

    Subject matter under subclass 354 wherein significance is attributed to the
    cooperative association of the rail or track with the journals, gudgeons,
    or assemblages, which assemblages include a bearing known as a ball bearing
    or a roller bearing.

    (1)     Note.  The form of bearing for this and indented subclasses
    includes two annular members having an annular space therebetween, in which
    annular space a plurality of rollers or balls are provided.  By this
    construction, one of the members is enabled to rotate relative to the other
    member, the rollers or the balls revolving and rotating within annular
    space.


CLS 400/354.2
TXT Including bearing holder geared to carriage:

    Subject matter under subclass 354.1 wherein said bearings are provided with
    toothed portions, and a part of the carriage* is provided with other
    toothed portions, and wherein the toothed portions of the bearings
    intermesh with the toothed portions of the carriage.


CLS 400/354.3
TXT Including repositionable guideway:

    Subject matter under subclass 354.1 wherein the rail or track for the
    carriage* may be shifted or adjusted relative to the typewriter.

    (1)     Note.  This construction enables an operator to clean, or align or
    adjust the parts of the typewriter.


CLS 400/355
TXT Means for repositioning carriage or platen thereon:

    Subject matter under subclass 283 wherein the carriage* of the typewriter
    may be shifted or adjusted relative to the typewriter, or the platen* that
    is on the carriage may be adjusted relative to the carriage.


CLS 400/356
TXT To nonprint position:

    Subject matter under subclass 355 wherein the shift or adjustment is from a
    position at which the platen* supported by the carriage* is in an operative
    (i.e., typing) position, to a position at which the platen, still supported
    by the carriage, is not in operative position.

    (1)     Note.  This construction enables a carriage to be moved out of the
    way to facilitate cleaning, inspection, or adjustment of the interior of
    the typewriter.


CLS 400/357
TXT To detach carriage:

    Subject matter under subclass 355 wherein the carriage* of the typewriter
    may be readily removed from, and the same or another carriage may be
    replaced in, the typewriter.

    (1)     Note.  This construction enables a carriage to be removed to
    facilitate cleaning of the interior of the typewriter, or to replace the
    carriage with one of a different size.


CLS 400/358
TXT To detach platen:

    Subject matter under subclass 355 wherein the platen* of the typewriter may
    be readily removed from, and the same or another platen may be replaced in,
    the carriage.


CLS 400/359
TXT HAVING TYPEWRITER-CONTROLLED RECIPROCABLE ELECTROMAGNETIC DRIVE FOR
    TYPE-BAR ACTUATION IN SAME TYPEWRITER:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the typewriter is
    provided with one or more magnetic* motors energized by electricity and
    movable to-and-fro in a straight line, the magnetic motor(s) being used for
    effecting the movement of any type-bar* member from a rest position to a
    print-point* position and being initiated by a typist who is typing on the
    typewriter that is being actuated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184,    for a typewriter having electromagnetic actuators for plural
    functions*.


CLS 400/360
TXT Including electromagnetic return of universal actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 359 wherein said one magnetic* motor is used
    to retract any or all of the type-bar* members from a print-point* position
    to a rest position by way of one linkage that serves to move any of the
    members.


CLS 400/361
TXT Including actuator to complete depression of selected key or key lever:

    Subject matter under subclass 359 wherein one or more of said magnetic*
    motors is energized when a selected key* element or a selected key lever is
    pressed by the typist, the energization of the magnetic motor causing the
    continuance of movement of the selected type-bar* member connected to said
    selected key or key lever has completed movement from a rest position to a
    print-point* position.

    (1)     Note.  The term "selected" is discussed in the definitions of
    case-shift* and type-bar assemblage in the Glossary, section III, and the
    term "key lever" is defined in subclass 472 below.

    (2)     Note.  The typewriter of this subclass may include one magnetic
    motor (i.e., "universal" actuator) that completes the depression of any key
    or key lever, or may include a magnetic motor (i.e., an individual
    solenoid) for each of the keys or key levers.


CLS 400/362
TXT Including  universal actuator to actuate selected type-bar action:

    Subject matter under subclass 359 wherein the typewriter is provided with a
    plurality of type-bar* members and a plurality of linkages connected so as
    to join one linkage to one type-bar member, whereby pressing of a selected
    key* element will cause movement of a corresponding selected type-bar, and
    wherein one said magnetic* motor is provided, which magnetic motor causes
    movement of any selected type-bar member by way of a corresponding linkage.


CLS 400/363
TXT And individual solenoids to connect the type-bar action to be actuated:

    Subject matter under subclass 362 wherein the typewriter is provided with
    magnetic* motors in addition to said one magnetic motor, which additional
    magnetic motors are used to join one linkage to a corresponding type-bar*,
    and wherein one additional magnetic motor corresponding to a selected
    type-bar is energized to join the selected linkage to the selected type-bar
    when said one magnetic motor is energized to cause movement of the selected
    type-bar.


CLS 400/364
TXT Including individual solenoids to actuate the selected type-bar action:

    Subject matter under subclass 359 wherein the typewriter is provided with a
    plurality of type-bar* members and with a plurality of magnetic* motors,
    one such motor being effective to cause movement of one type-bar, and
    wherein the pressing of a selected key* element causes energization of a
    corresponding selected magnetic motor to cause movement of its connected
    type-bar.


CLS 400/365
TXT HAVING ROTATED POWER DRIVE INTERMITTENTLY APPLIED FOR TYPE-BAR ACTUATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein mechanical energy is used
    to turn a shaft, said shaft being the origin of the force needed to perform
    any of the typing operations in a typewriter, and wherein said shaft is
    caused to be connected temporarily to a force-transmitting member only when
    an operation is to be performed, which operation includes the movement of a
    type-bar* (i.e., having a type-face* element thereon) from a rest position
    to a print-point* position for imprinting a character* on a record-medium*,
    or the movement of any element of a typewriter to perform a typing
    function*.

    (1)     Note.  The mechanical energy is usually supplied by a electric
    motor that is powered to rotate continuously.  The operation usually
    performed is the intermittent (i.e., on demand of the typist) actuation of
    a succession of type-bar members that are on a type-bar-segment*, but is
    not limited to that operation.  A typist using such an "electric
    typewriter" needs to exert only as much force in depressing a key* element
    as is needed to connect the force-transmitting member to the shaft or to
    release the energy stored in a spring to actuate an operation such as
    type-bar actuation, carriage feed, carriage return, case-shift*, etc., the
    named operations being only exemplary. The power may be applied directly
    via a power roll of a linkage or may be applied indirectly via means to
    transfer the power to an intermediate selectively operated actuator (e.g.,
    such as a spring) capable of storing the power.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    192,    for a continuously rotated power drive intermittently applied for
    ribbon* feed or vibrator* actuation.


CLS 400/366
TXT Including jam-release means:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 wherein a power-driven typewriter is
    provided with means for freeing a blockage caused by two movable parts of
    the typewriter tending to occupy the same space at the same time.

    (1)     Note.  The most frequent occurrence of a jam results from two
    type-face* elements, each on its respective type-bar*, that arrive at the
    print-point* at the same time.  Since a print-point accommodates only one
    type-face element, a jam will occur if two such elements tend to occupy the
    print-point simultaneously.  The mechanism of this subclass inhibits the
    actuation of one of the type-bars to prevent such an occurrence.  In a
    typewriter that is not provided with such preventing means, or in a
    typewriter in which such a jam occurs despite said means, the mechanism
    effects the release of such a jammed condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    425,    for other jam-release mechanism.


CLS 400/367
TXT Interposed components driven by filter shaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 wherein the typewriter is driven by a
    power drive that includes said shaft and a second shaft, which second shaft
    is rotated intermittently (i.e., when an operation is to be performed), and
    has radial projections thereon one of which projections strikes a member
    when the second shaft is rotated, which member is moved substantially
    tangentially of the second shaft when struck, and which member lies between
    the second shaft and a linkage that actuates the operation to be performed.

    (1)     Note.  The operation that is performed is usually the selection of
    a type-face* to be impacted against the record- medium* and the actuation
    of the type-bar* that carries the selected type-face.


CLS 400/368
TXT For repeat-type action:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 wherein the typewriter is driven by a
    power drive and is capable of an operation in which a typist presses one
    particular character*-key* element and the type-face* corresponding to said
    key will impact the record-medium* again and again to produce a succession
    of character symbols during the one pressing of the key element, all of
    which symbols are the same character.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    299,    for a typewriter capable of forming a succession of character
    symbols, all of which symbols are the same character.


CLS 400/369
TXT With prevention of repeat typing:

    Subject matter under subclass 368 wherein said typewriter is capable of
    said operation in which repeated typing of the same character* symbol
    occurs, or is capable of inhibiting the repeated typing operation.

    (1)     Note.  A typewriter of this subclass includes a mechanism that is
    either (a) particularly designed to prevent repeat typing that might
    otherwise occur, or (b) capable of selectively inhibiting the repeated
    typing operation.


CLS 400/370
TXT Via continuously rotated power roll:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 wherein said shaft is turned
    uninterruptedly (i.e., continuously rotated) and is fixed to a generally
    cylindrical member for similar continuous rotation of the member, which
    cylindrical member is positioned transversely of the type-bar* action
    mechanisms and the key* lever mechanisms of the typewriter, and is provided
    with surface modifications or characteristics intended to be engaged
    temporarily with a component that is connected to a type-bar action or to
    means for actuating a function* when a typist depresses a selected key
    element that initiates said one action or said one function*.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes a typewriter having (a) a plurality
    of pulleys fixed on a continuously rotated drive shaft, each type-bar
    action being selectively connected with its respective pulley by a flexible
    band, or (b) a continuously rotated cam-shaped element selectively
    engageable by each key lever to limit the rate of depression of the key
    lever and to drive the selected key lever to its rest position subsequent
    to impact of the type-bar against the record-medium*.

    (2)     Note.  A power roll of this subclass (370) differs from a drive
    shaft of subclass 365 in that a drive shaft is merely a continuously
    rotated shaft, whereas a power roll is located in the typewriter in a
    particular transverse relationship, has a surface that is particularly
    modified to engage a selected component for movement of the component, and
    cooperates with the selected component under control of the typist by way
    of key lever elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186,    for a continuously rotated power roll selectively connected to
    plural functions.


CLS 400/371
TXT And oscillatable cam:

    Subject matter under subclass 370 wherein said continuously rotated
    cylindrical member intermittently drives a component, which component has a
    cam surface and pivots to-and-fro in an arc to move a lever on which the
    component is mounted.

    (1)     Note.  A "cam surface" is defined as the edge periphery of a disc
    that oscillates or rotates about an axis, the radial distance from the axis
    to the periphery varying around the periphery.  The cam is mounted on a
    lever that is pivotally mounted and is connected to the type-bar* action
    linkage.  When the cam is temporarily connected to the cylindrical member,
    the cam oscillates about its axis, thereby pushing the lever through the
    pivot axis of the cam.  The resulting oscillation of the lever actuates the
    type-bar linkage.


CLS 400/372
TXT And rotatable cam (e.g., single-lobe cam):

    Subject matter under subclass 370 wherein said continuously rotated
    cylindrical member intermittently drives a component, which component has a
    cam surface and turns around an axis to move a lever on which the component
    is mounted.

    (1)     Note.  A "cam surface" is defined as the edge periphery of a disc
    that oscillates or rotates about an axis, the radial distance from the axis
    to the periphery varying around the periphery.  The cam is mounted on a
    lever that is pivotally mounted and is connected to the type-bar* action
    linkage.  When the cam is temporarily connected to the cylindrical member,
    the cam rotates about its axis, thereby pushing the lever through the pivot
    axis of the cam.  The resulting oscillation of the lever actuates the
    type-bar linkage.


CLS 400/373
TXT Including double-lobe cam:

    Subject matter under subclass 372 wherein said cam surface is so configured
    that it will effect two complete oscillatory movements of the lever on
    which it is mounted during each rotation (i.e., through 360o) of said
    component, a complete oscillatory movement comprising a movement away from
    and a movement toward a rest or normal position.


CLS 400/374
TXT And friction leg (e.g., other than by cam):

    Subject matter under subclass 370 wherein said continuously rotated
    cylindrical member intermittently drives a component by nonslidable contact
    between a surface of the member and a surface of the component.


CLS 400/375
TXT Snatch roll:

    Subject matter under subclass 370 wherein the surface characteristics of
    said continuously rotated cylindrical member include toothlike projections
    extending circumferentially around the member, each projection being
    substantially parallel to the axis of rotation of the member to form a
    longitudinally corrugated surface on the member, and wherein said component
    is a pawl* or a star wheel (i.e., a rotatable element having projections or
    teeth extending radially), which component is temporarily engaged with said
    surface when an actuation of the typewriter is desired.


CLS 400/375.1
TXT Including plural coaxial snatch discs:

    Subject matter under subclass 375 wherein said continuously rotated
    cylindrical member is formed as a composite assemblage of elements rotating
    on the same axis, each of which elements extends in an axial direction to
    only part of the axial length of said member, but is otherwise similar in
    configuration to said member as to its toothlike projections.

    (1)     Note.  The elements may be arranged so that the teeth of the side
    by side discs form a composite projection that is parallel to the axis, or
    may be arranged with the side by side discs rotationally displaced so that
    the teeth form a composite projection that is helical about the axis.


CLS 400/375.2
TXT With control of impact force:

    Subject matter under subclass 375 wherein the cylindrical member and the
    component cause a type-bar* together with its type-face* element to be
    impressed against a record-medium* with a particular impetus, and wherein
    the cooperation between the cylindrical member and the component, or
    movement of the component itself, may be regulated as to its impression
    impetus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    376,    for impact control in a typewriter having a power roll.


CLS 400/375.3
TXT With electromagnetic control of pawl:

    Subject matter under subclass 375 wherein said component is a pawl* that
    engages a notch between the projection of said cylindrical member when an
    actuation of the typewriter is desired, the pawl being moved into
    engagement with the notch by the energization of an electromagnetically
    driven element.


CLS 400/375.4
TXT And star wheel:

    Subject matter under subclass 375 wherein said component is a rotable
    element having projections or teeth extending radially from the axis of
    rotation of the element, and wherein a projection or tooth of said element
    engages a notch between the projections of said cylindrical member when an
    actuation of the typewriter is desired.


CLS 400/376
TXT With control of impact force:

    Subject matter under subclass 370 wherein the member and the component
    cause a type-bar* together with its type-face* element to be impressed
    against a record-medium* with a particular impetus, and wherein the
    cooperation between the cylindrical member and the component, or the
    movement of the component itself, may be regulated as to its impression
    impetus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    375.2,  for impact control in a typewriter having a snatch roll.


CLS 400/377
TXT Via limited-rotation clutch:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 wherein said continuously rotated shaft
    is caused to be connected intermittently and temporarily to said
    force-transmitting member by way of a clutch that is engaged for only a
    predetermined number of degrees of rotation and disengaged after the
    predetermined number of degrees of rotation has been transmitted.

    (1)     Note.  A clutch is a mechanism that includes a first element
    rotatable with a first shaft and a second element rotatable to drive a
    second shaft.  The elements and shafts are rotatable about a common axis,
    and at least one of the elements is movable relative to the other element
    into nonslidable engagement therewith.  When the elements are in engagement
    the rotation of the first shaft will be transmitted to the second shaft and
    when the elements are not in engagement the second shaft will not be
    rotated by the first shaft.  The rotation of the continuously rotating
    shaft causes rotation of the first shaft, which causes rotation of the
    second shaft by way of the intermittently engaged elements, and the
    force-transmitting member is connected to the second shaft to be
    intermittently driven thereby.


CLS 400/378
TXT Plural cams clutched to drive shaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 377 wherein the typewriter is provided with a
    plurality of said second elements, each of which second elements includes a
    cam surface that is connected by way of a cam-surface follower to a
    force-transmitting member for a selected type-bar* action.


CLS 400/379
TXT Via spring drive (e.g., spring-driven snatch roll):

    Subject matter under subclass 365 wherein said shaft is caused to be
    connected intermittently and temporarily to said force-transmitting member
    by way of at least one resilient or yieldable component, which component is
    stressed by rotation of the shaft, and the stress in the component is
    released intermittently or selectively to actuate a selected type-bar*
    action.


CLS 400/380
TXT Including Individual spring for each type-bar action:

    Subject matter under subclass 379 wherein the typewriter is provided with a
    plurality of said components corresponding to the number of type-bar*
    members and the number of mechanisms that actuate the type-bars, one of
    said components being connected to each one of said type-bars.


CLS 400/381
TXT Including reciprocable common actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 379 wherein one force-transmitting member is
    capable of being connected to any of a plurality of type-bar* action
    mechanisms as selected by a typist, and wherein said force-transmitting
    member moves to-and-fro to make such connection.


CLS 400/382
TXT Via reciprocating common actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 wherein said shaft is caused to be
    connected intermittently and temporarily to said force-transmitting member
    by way of a component that moves to-an-fro, and wherein a plurality of
    force-transmitting members are provided, each member effecting movement of
    one of a plurality of type-bar* action mechanisms as selected by a typist.


CLS 400/383
TXT TYPE-BAR-ACTION MECHANISM OR TYPE-FACE ON TYPE-BAR OR TYPE-FACE INKER:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein significance is
    attributed to (a) means for effecting movement of a type-bar* member from
    its rest (i.e., normal or base) position to its print-point* (i.e.,
    type-face* impacting) position or to the close vicinity of the print-point
    position, or (b) means for returning a type-bar from its print-point
    position to its rest position, or (c) structure for enabling such movement
    or for supporting a type-bar during such movement, or (d) a type-face
    mounted on or supported by a type-bar, or (e) means for applying ink* to a
    type-face before the type face is impacted against the record-medium*, or
    (f) structure that is used in conjunction with a type-bar.

    (1)     Note.  Although it is apparent that the movement of a type-bar is
    ordinarily initiated by the pressing of a key* element by a typist, none of
    the key, or key-board* or key-lever mechanisms is included in the structure
    of this or indented subclasses.  For such key structure, see subclass 472.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is for a rear-strike typewriter wherein
    significance is attributed to a typewriter in which the type-member*
    elements impact against the platen* (and thereby impact against a
    record-medium that is backed by the platen) at a print-point* located
    adjacent to a rearmost part of the platen.  This subclass is also for a
    front-strike typewriter having structure not provided for in the following
    subclasses wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter in which the
    type-member elements impact against the platen (and thereby impact against
    a record-medium that is backed by the platen) at a print-point located
    adjacent to a foremost part of the platen.


CLS 400/384
TXT Spring drive for type-bar action:

    Subject matter under subclass 383 wherein the movement of a type-bar* from
    its rest position to its print-point* position is caused by the manual
    depression of a key* element by a typist by way of a resilient or yieldable
    component that is stressed and the stress is released intermittently or
    selectively to effect said movement.


CLS 400/385
TXT With added-motion mechanism for type-bar near print-point:

    Subject matter under subclass 383 wherein a typewriter is provided with
    first means for effecting movement of a type-bar* from its rest position to
    a position close to (i.e., the vicinity of) the print-point* of the
    typewriter, and is also provided with additional means for effecting
    further movement of the type-bar from the close position to a print-point
    position.


CLS 400/386
TXT Including toggle-linkage:

    Subject matter under subclass 385 wherein said additional means includes a
    toggle-linkage* in the actuating mechanism at effects said further movement.


CLS 400/387
TXT Including momentum accumulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 385 wherein said additional means includes a
    mass or weight, the inertia of said mass providing the force that effects
    said further movement.


CLS 400/388
TXT Including hammer, roller, or presser mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 385 wherein said additional means includes a
    striker element that imparts a sudden impact, or includes a cylindrical
    element that rolls against said type-bar*, or includes a forcer element
    that urges the type-bar, any of which elements is not directly connected to
    the type-bar, but which effects said further movement of the type-bar.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes a typewriter wherein the first means
    of subclass 385 effects rectilinear movement of a type-bar from its rest
    position to a position close to the print-point* of the typewriter.


CLS 400/388.1
TXT Type-bar pivotable to vicinity of print-point:

    Subject matter under subclass 388 wherein the first means (i.e., of
    subclass 385) effects arcuate movement of a type-bar* from its rest
    position to a position close to the print-point* of the typewriter.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes a top-strike and bottom-strike as
    well as front-strike typewriters.


CLS 400/389
TXT With power assist for mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 385 wherein said additional means effects
    further movement of the type-bar* with the help of electrical or
    electromagnetic energy applied to the type-bar-actuator means.


CLS 400/390
TXT With end-thrust mechanism for type-bar:

    Subject matter under subclass 383 wherein a type-bar* of a typewriter is an
    elongated member having a type-face* (or a type-die*) element thereon
    located at one end of said member, said type-face being positioned so that
    its surface is approximately perpendicular to the elongated length of the
    member, and wherein the movement of said type-bar is in the direction of
    its length as it moves from a rest position to a print-point* position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    459,    for a guide for a thrusted type-bar.


CLS 400/391
TXT Type-bar slidable on flat support:

    Subject matter under subclass 390 wherein said type-bar* is carried by a
    planar member and is moved relative to the member while in contact with the
    surface of the member.


CLS 400/391.1
TXT Driven by gear means:

    Subject matter under subclass 391 wherein the movement of the type-bar* is
    effected by way of at least two toothed members, the teeth of which
    intermesh so that as one member is moved, another member is also moved.


CLS 400/391.2
TXT Driven by cam means:

    Subject matter under subclass 391 wherein the movement of the type-bar* is
    effected by way of a member having a cam surface connected to a cam-surface
    follower.

    (1)     Note.  A "cam surface" is defined as the edge periphery of a disc
    that rotates or oscillates about an axis, the radial distance of the axis
    to the periphery varying around the periphery. As the disc rotates or
    oscillates, the distance of a follower that is in contact with the
    periphery will increase and decrease relative to the axis of the disc, thus
    the rotation or oscillation of the disc will effect substantially radial
    movement of the follower.


CLS 400/391.3
TXT Driven by toggle-linkage:

    Subject matter under subclass 391 wherein the movement of the type-bar* is
    effected by way of a toggle-linkage* connected to the type-bar.


CLS 400/391.4
TXT With power assist for mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 391 wherein the movement of the type-bar* is
    effected with the help of electrical or electromagnetic energy applied to
    the type-bar-moving means.


CLS 400/392
TXT Including momentum accumulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 390 wherein said movement of said type-bar*
    is helped by a mass or weight, the inertia of said mass providing the force
    that effects said movement.


CLS 400/393
TXT For top-strike or bottom-strike typewriter:

    Subject matter under subclass 390 wherein significance is attributed to a
    typewriter in which type-face* elements impact against the platen* (and
    thereby impact against a record-medium* that is backed by the platen) at a
    print-point* located adjacent to an uppermost part of the platen or at a
    print-point located adjacent to an underneath part of the platen.


CLS 400/394
TXT With type-bar pivot traveling during typing movement of type-bar:

    Subject matter under subclass 383 wherein a type-bar* of a typewriter is
    mounted for oscillatory or arcuate movement about an axis while the
    type-bar moves from its rest position to its print-point* position, and
    wherein said axis also move from a first position to a second position
    while the type-bar moves.

    (1)     Note.  The structure defined is directed to what is effectively a
    "floating" type-bar.  The pivot end of the type-bar pivots about a first
    axis, and the first axis pivots about a second axis, thus imparting a
    compound movement to the type-face* that is affixed to the other end of the
    type-bar.


CLS 400/395
TXT Type-bar pivot on longitudinally movable carrier in top-strike typewriter:

    Subject matter under subclass 394 wherein the type-bar* is mounted for
    oscillatory or arcuate movement about an axis, and the axis is in a support
    that moves rectilinearly to-and-fro relative to the print-point* position,
    and wherein the type-bar is in a top-strike typewriter.

    (1)     Note.  The term "top-strike typewriter" is defined in the
    definition of 415 below.

    (2)     Note.  Many of the typewriters in this subclass also have ink-pad
    means to apply ink* to the type-face* while the type-bar is in a rest
    position.


CLS 400/396
TXT With ink pad on type-bar rest:

    Subject matter under subclass 394 wherein said type-bar* or the type-face*
    element carried thereby is supported while in its rest position by an
    element, which element includes a block or mass of porous or absorbent
    material that is impregnated with ink* whereby a type-face that is resting
    on the element will be coated with ink in preparation for the next impact
    of the type-face against a record-medium*.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also includes an ink pad in a top-strike or a
    bottom-strike type-writer.


CLS 400/397
TXT With disconnection of type-bar action during movement thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 383 wherein a type-bar* of a typewriter is
    caused to move from its rest position to its print-point* position by drive
    linkage that associates or joins a key*lever to the type-bar so that
    movement of the key lever transmits movement to the type-bar, and wherein
    the drive linkage is temporarily disassociated or disjoined while the
    type-bar is moving to a print-point position so that the type-bar may
    continue its movement without further typing movement of the key lever.

    (1)     Note.  The structure defined permits the key lever to stop its
    movement or to return to its rest position while the type-bar is still
    moving to its print-point position.

    (2)     Note.  The term "key lever" is defined in the definition of
    subclass 472 below.


CLS 400/398
TXT With accelerated (e.g., motion amplifying) type-bar action:

    Subject matter under subclass 383 wherein significance is attributed
    mechanism that effects an increase in the rate of speed of a type-bar* as
    it moves from its rest position to its print-point* position, which
    mechanism includes a link or lever that pivots about a fulcrum that shifts
    relative to the link or lever as the type-bar moves.

    (1)     Note.  It is, of course, inherent in any member that moves from a
    rest position to a second position that acceleration from zero velocity to
    a maximum velocity must occur during such movement, but most disclosures of
    type-bar-action mechanism are silent as to acceleration.  In this and
    indented subclasses, the claimed disclosure of the patents therein
    emphasize the structure of the action that produces a type-bar movement
    which accelerates during all or part of its motion from its rest position
    to its print-point position.


CLS 400/399
TXT By rolling contact between links:

    Subject matter under subclass 398 wherein the mechanism includes one lever
    or link that pivots with respect to an associated lever or link on a
    fulcrum that rolls or turns at the point of association.


CLS 400/399.1
TXT By key lever rolling on fulcrum:

    Subject matter under subclass 399 wherein the lever or link that pivots
    with respect to its associated lever or link is a key* lever.

    (1)     Note.  The term "key lever" is defined in the definition of
    subclass 472.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein are mechanisms in which a key lever rolls on
    a frame or a fulcrum plate or a sublever, or in which a sublever is pivoted
    on a key lever.


CLS 400/400
TXT By cam-engaging link:

    Subject matter under subclass 398 wherein the mechanism includes a
    component that rotates or oscillates about an axis, which component has an
    edge periphery that varies in radius around the periphery and which
    component is associated with a lever or link to provide the means for
    shifting the fulcrum of the lever.


CLS 400/401
TXT By breaking and straightening toggle-linkages:

    Subject matter under subclass 398 wherein the mechanism includes at least
    two toggle-linkage* assemblages associated with a lever for moving the
    type-bar*, one of which toggle-linkages act to move the lever when the
    toggle-linkage is straightened and the other of which toggle-linkages act
    to move the lever when the toggle-linkage is broken.

    (1)     Note.  The terms "broken" and "straightened" as applied to a
    toggle-linkage are discussed in the Glossary, section III, under the
    definition of toggle-linkage.


CLS 400/402
TXT By breaking toggle-linkage (e.g., to pull type-bar to print-point):

    Subject matter under subclass 398 wherein the mechanism includes a
    toggle-linkage* assemblage associated with a lever for moving the
    type-bar*, which toggle-linkage acts to move the lever when the
    toggle-linkage is broken.

    (1)     Note.  The term "broken" as applied to a toggle-linkage is
    discussed in the Glossary, section III, under the definition of
    toggle-linkage.  In this subclass the type-bar is pulled to the
    print-point* as the toggle-linkage is broken.


CLS 400/403
TXT By straightening toggle-linkage (e.g., to push type-bar to print-point):

    Subject matter under subclass 398 wherein the mechanism includes a
    toggle-linkage* assemblage associated with a lever for moving the
    type-bar*, which toggle-linkage acts to move the lever when the
    toggle-linkage is straightened.

    (1)     Note.  The term "straightened" as applied to a toggle-linkage is
    discussed in the Glossary, section III, under the definition of
    toggle-linkage. In this subclass the type-bar is pushed to the print-point*
    as the toggle linkage is straightened.


CLS 400/404
TXT Including adjustment of toggle-linkage anchor position:

    Subject matter under subclass 398 wherein the mechanism includes a
    toggle-linkage* assemblage associated with a lever for moving the
    type-bar*, which toggle-linkage includes one link pivoted to the typewriter
    frame at a location that may be varied relative to the frame, whereby the
    effect of the toggle-linkage on the lever may be varied.


CLS 400/405
TXT By type-bar connecting link:

    Subject matter under subclass 398 wherein the mechanism includes a lever or
    bell crank or link that associates the type-bar* member with the key* lever
    for moving the type-bar with an increase in the rate of speed of the
    type-bar.


CLS 400/405.1
TXT Including gear connection:

    Subject matter under subclass 405 wherein the lever or bell crank or link
    is provided with a toothed portion moving in the arc of a circle, the teeth
    meshing with a toothed portion on the type-bar* member to effect movement
    of the type-bar when the key* lever moves the lever, bell crank, or link of
    the mechanism.


CLS 400/406
TXT By pin and slot connection:

    Subject matter under subclass 398 wherein the mechanism includes a lever or
    link having a narrow, elongated aperture therein associated with a lever or
    link having a short rod extending through the aperture, the aperture and
    rod providing the means for shifting the fulcrum.


CLS 400/407
TXT Including type-bar starter means:

    Subject matter under subclass 398 wherein significance is attributed to
    that portion of the type-bar* moving mechanism that initiates movement of
    the type-bar away from the rest position.


CLS 400/408
TXT For bottom-strike typewriter:

    Subject matter under subclass 383 wherein significance is attributed to a
    typewriter in which the type-face* elements impact against the platen* (and
    thereby impact against a record-medium* that is backed by the platen) at a
    print-point* located adjacent to an underneath part of the platen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for a type-bar* action in a flat-platen typewriter.


CLS 400/409
TXT Including simultaneous actuation of plural type-bars for simultaneous
    imprinting:

    Subject matter under subclass 408 wherein two or more type-bar* members,
    each type-bar carrying at least one type-face* element thereon, are each
    moved from a respective rest position to a respective print-point* position
    to impact two or more type-faces against the record-medium* at the same
    time.


CLS 400/410
TXT With pivotally mounted platen carrier (e.g., for access, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 408 wherein the typewriter is provided with a
    platen* for backing the record-medium*, which platen is supported for
    movement of the platen relative to the typewriter during typing operation,
    and wherein the platen support also enables movement of the platen out of
    typing position being in the arc of a circle.

    (1)     Note.  The movement out of typing position enables the platen to be
    taken out of the way so that access to the interior of the typewriter is
    possible.


CLS 400/411
TXT Type-bar actuated by rack and gear:

    Subject matter under subclass 408 wherein type-face* elements are carried
    by respective type-bar* members and wherein each type-bar is moved from a
    rest position to a print-point* position by way of a reciprocable bar
    having teeth along one edge thereof and a rotatable disc having teeth on
    the periphery thereof, the teeth of the disc meshing with the teeth of the
    bar so that movement of one toothed element causes movement of the other
    toothed element which causes movement of the type-bar.


CLS 400/412
TXT Including type-bar mounting arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 408 wherein type-face* elements are carried
    by respective type-bar* members, and wherein significance is attributed to
    structure for supporting the type-bars for movement from a rest position to
    a print-point* position.

    (1)     Note.  The structure includes a mounting having discontinuous
    arrangement of type-bars at front and rear of platen*, a mounting for
    type-bars having an elongated pivot portion transverse to the platen axis,
    and a mounting for type-bars pivoted for lateral movement.


CLS 400/413
TXT With type-face inker (e.g., ink-pad rest):

    Subject matter under subclass 408 wherein the typewriter is provided with
    means to apply ink* to the type-face* element.

    (1)     Note.  The inker is usually in the form of an ink pad having ink
    thereon, the ink pad serving also as a rest to support the type-bar* member
    with the type-face in contact with the ink pad, and may have means for
    rotating the type-bar as it moves from the print-point* position (with the
    type-face upwardly oriented) to the rest position (with the type-face
    downwardly oriented).


CLS 400/414
TXT Including key or key-lever arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 408 wherein significance is attributed to the
    key* elements or the key-lever bars or to structure that support the key
    elements of a bottom-strike typewriter.

    (1)     Note.  The term "key lever" is defined in the definition of
    subclass 472 below.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass is key-lever structure for moving
    an intermediate horizontal linkage transverse to the key levers and
    type-bar* members, structure including a vertically movable key lever, and
    a key that moves a horizontally movable draw bar or link instead of a key
    lever.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    472+,   for a key-board* or keys of a standard typewriter.


CLS 400/415
TXT For top-strike typewriter:

    Subject matter under subclass 383 wherein significance is attributed to a
    typewriter in which type-face* elements impact against the platen* (and
    thereby impact against a record-medium* that is backed by the platen) at a
    print-point* located adjacent to an uppermost part of the platen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for a type-bar* action in a flat-platen typewriter.


CLS 400/416
TXT Including type-bars pivoted on both sides of, or above and across, platen
    axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 415 wherein the type-bar* members carrying
    the type-face* elements of a type-set-assemblage* are either (a) disposed
    into two groups, one group of type-bars being oscillated about an axis (or
    axes) located in front of the platen* and the other group of type-bars
    being oscillated about an axis (or axes) located behind the platen, or (b)
    oscillated on one or more type-bar axes, the axis of oscillation of each
    type-bar being disposed over the platen and transverse to the length
    dimension of the platen.

    (1)     Note.  The disposition of the type-bars discussed in (a) of the
    definition may be above and in front of, or above and behind, the platen.
    The disposition of the type-bars discussed in (b) may be in two groups on
    axes above and across the platen axis.


CLS 400/417
TXT With type-face inker (e.g., ink pad, roller, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 415 wherein the typewriter is provided with
    means to apply ink* to the type-face* element.

    (1)     Note.  The inker is usually in the form of an ink-pad element or an
    ink-roller element impregnated with ink.  Contact of the type-face with the
    inking element applies a coating of ink to the type-face for subsequent
    application to the record-medium* as the type-face is impressed against the
    record-medium.


CLS 400/418
TXT Type-bar pivoted by gear connection:

    Subject matter under subclass 415 wherein the type-bar* member is
    oscillated from a rest position to a print-point* position, the oscillation
    being effected by a toothed portion on the type-bar, the teeth of the
    type-bar being intermeshed with teeth on a toothed component that is caused
    to rotate or oscillate.


CLS 400/419
TXT Type-member or type-bar pivoted and rotatable (e.g., for selection of
    type-face):

    Subject matter under subclass 415 wherein a plurality of type-face*
    elements are carried on a type-member* or carried by a type-bar*, which
    type-bar is an elongated member that is oscillatable from a rest position
    to a print-point* position about a pivot, and wherein either the
    type-member or the type-bar may be turned or oscillated about an axis that
    is substantially perpendicular to the pivot axis of the type-bar, whereby
    one of the plurality of type-faces on any type-member or type-bar may be
    positioned or oriented to be impressed against the record-medium* when the
    type-bar is oscillated to the print-point.

    (1)     Note.  The structure provides for selection of one of a plurality
    of type-faces from the limited number of type-faces available on one
    type-member.  For a typewriter wherein a type-head* includes a plurality of
    type-faces comprising a type-set-assemblage*, see subclass 139 above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139+,   and see (1) Note above.


CLS 400/420
TXT Type-bar pivoted by push link:

    Subject matter under subclass 415 wherein the type-bar* member is
    oscillated from a rest position to a print-point* position, the oscillation
    being effected by a component that is connected to the type-bar and is
    moved in a direction along its length dimension with force that tends to
    compress the length dimension.


CLS 400/421
TXT Type-bar pivoted by cam:

    Subject matter under subclass 415 wherein the type-bar* member is
    oscillated from a rest position to a print-point* position, the oscillation
    being effected by a component that rotates or oscillates about an axis,
    which component has an edge periphery that varies in radius about the
    periphery and which component is associated with the type-bar to cause the
    type-bar to move toward the print-point as the component oscillates or
    rotates.


CLS 400/422
TXT Type-bar action:

    Subject matter under subclass 383 wherein significance is attributed to
    mechanism for effecting the movement of a type-bar* from its rest (i.e.,
    normal or base) position to its print-point* (i.e., type-face* impacting)
    position.


CLS 400/423
TXT Including selectively disengageable type-bar action to render action
    inoperable:

    Subject matter under subclass 422 wherein said mechanism includes links or
    components normally connected together for enabling the mechanism to effect
    movement of a type-bar* from its rest position to its print-point*
    position, and wherein one or more of the links or components may be
    temporarily disconnected at the will of the typist, whereby the mechanism
    is made ineffective.

    (1)     Note.  The purpose of this mechanism is to enable the typist to
    prevent unauthorized use of the typewriter while the typist is away from
    the typewriter.


CLS 400/424
TXT With type-face pivoted on type-bar for rolling contact with platen:

    Subject matter under subclass 422 wherein the type-bar* member supports a
    type-face* element for arcuate movement relative to the type-bar, the
    movement being on an axis that is parallel to the axis of the platen* to
    which the type-bar is moved for impression of the type-face at the
    print-point* and wherein the type-face rolls against the platen by moving
    the type-face-element axis around the platen axis when the type-face is
    adjacent to the print- point.


CLS 400/425
TXT Including jam-release means:

    Subject matter under subclass 422 wherein a typewriter having type-bar*
    members that are movable from a rest position to a print-point* position is
    provided with means for freeing a blockage caused by two type-bars tending
    to occupy the same space at the same time.

    (1)     Note.  The tendency for jamming is enhanced because all of the
    type-bars impress against the same print-point. Rapid typing will increase
    the probability that a previously impressed type-face*  element will not
    have cleared the print-point before the succeeding type-face reaches the
    print-point, or the possibility that two type-face elements reach the
    print-point simultaneously.  The resulting jammed condition is released by
    the means of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    366,    for other jam-release means.


CLS 400/426
TXT Including type-bar return before release of key lever:

    Subject matter under subclass 422 wherein the type-bar* is moved from a
    rest position to a print-point* position and from a print-point position
    back to a rest position, and at least the movement from rest to a
    print-point is accomplished as a result of a typist pressing a key* element
    on the key-board* of the typewriter, and wherein the movement of the
    type-bar from a print-point back to a rest position may be accomplished
    while the key element is still pressed by the typist.


CLS 400/427
TXT Including yieldable link in type-bar action:

    Subject matter under subclass 422 wherein said mechanism includes a
    resilient component as part of the drive train that causes the movement of
    the type-bar* member from a rest position to a print-point* position.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the yieldable link is part of the drive
    train.  This yieldable link is different from the return spring of subclass
    436 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    436+,   and see (1) Note above.


CLS 400/428
TXT Including means to limit type-bar movement:

    Subject matter under subclass 422 wherein significance is attributed to
    means for regulating the movement of the type-bar* member in its movement
    from a rest position to a print-point* position or its movement from a
    print-point position to a rest position, said means being part of said
    mechanism for effecting said movement.

    (1)     Note.  The means is within the mechanism itself rather than being
    the platen* at the print-point.  The means may include a toggle-linkage*,
    or may control the impact force, or the velocity of the type-bar.


CLS 400/429
TXT Type-bar pushed or pulled by hooklike cam:

    Subject matter under subclass 422 wherein the type-bar* movement is
    effected by a mechanism that includes an elongated component that is
    pivoted adjacent to one end thereof, said one end being configured as a
    curved extension that extends into a concavity of a cooperating member that
    is included in said mechanism, the curved extension also having a side edge
    periphery that varies in radius around the periphery whereby as the
    component pivots its periphery extending into the concavity will cause
    movement of the cooperating member.


CLS 400/430
TXT Type-bar pulled to print-point:

    Subject matter under subclass 422 wherein the type-bar* member is moved
    from a rest position to a print-point* position by a component that is part
    of the type-bar-action mechanism, which component is itself under tension
    as the type-bar is moved to the print-point.


CLS 400/430.1
TXT By cam means (e.g., slotted cam, helix, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 430 wherein said component oscillates or
    rotates about an axis and is provided with a periphery that engages a
    cooperating element and causes movement of the cooperating element (and
    thus causes movement of the type-bar*-action mechanism) as the component
    periphery is caused to be rotated or oscillated.


CLS 400/430.2
TXT By toggle-linkage:

    Subject matter under subclass 430 wherein said tension component is part of
    a toggle-linkage* assemblage.


CLS 400/430.3
TXT With movable type-bar-segment:

    Subject matter under subclass 430 wherein the type-bar* members of the
    typewriter are mounted on a type-bar-segment*, which type-bar-segment is
    mounted so as to be movable.

    (1)     Note.  The movement of the type-bar-segment is often for the
    purpose of enabling case-shift* movement and the type-bar-action mechanism
    is modified to enable such movement.


CLS 400/431
TXT Type-bar moved to print-point by gear drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 422 wherein said mechanism includes at least
    two components having teeth or notches thereon, the teeth of one component
    intermeshing with the teeth of the other component whereby the movement of
    one component is transmitted to the movement of the other component, and
    the components being associated in the type-bar*-action mechanism.


CLS 400/432
TXT Type-bar moved to print-point by cam means:

    Subject matter under subclass 422 wherein said mechanism includes a
    component that is rotated or oscillated about an axis, which component has
    an edge periphery that varies in radius about the periphery, and which
    periphery contacts an element in the type-bar*-action mechanism that is
    moved by the rotation or oscillation of the component.


CLS 400/433
TXT Type-bar moved to print-point by toggle-linkage:

    Subject matter under subclass 422 wherein said mechanism includes a
    toggle-linkage* assemblage associated in the type-bar*-action mechanism.


CLS 400/434
TXT Including connecting link or joint:

    Subject matter under subclass 422 wherein significance is attributed to one
    or more of the components in the structure of said mechanism that effects
    the movement of a type-bar* from its rest position to its print-point*
    position, or wherein significance is attributed to structure that joins
    said components to enable movement to occur between the components.


CLS 400/434.1
TXT Adjustable (e.g., in length, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 434 wherein significance is attributed to
    structure of said component for varying the component as to its position,
    dimensions, or effectiveness in the mechanism.


CLS 400/434.2
TXT Flexible (e.g., spring, strap, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 434 wherein significance is attributed to
    structure of said component that is bendable or yieldable or pliant.


CLS 400/434.3
TXT Including connecting element (e.g., joint, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 434 wherein significance is attributed to
    structure that joins said components to enable movement to occur between
    the components.


CLS 400/435
TXT Type-bar rebound preventer (e.g., via latch, brake, linkage, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 383 wherein significance is attributed to
    means for retarding movement of a type-bar* that is returning from its
    print-point* position to its rest position, whereby the type-bar will not
    spring back from its rest position.

    (1)     Note.  The intent of rebound control is to prevent or minimize a
    second movement from its rest position to its print-point position so as to
    prevent multiple images.  Rebound control includes structure such as a
    latch, a brake, and an arrangement of linkages similar to a toggle-linkage*
    assemblage, which structure tends to prevent rebound in spite of the force
    with which the type-bar is returned to its rest position.


CLS 400/436
TXT Type-bar return spring connected to type-bar action linkage:

    Subject matter under subclass 383 wherein significance is attributed to a
    resilient or yieldable means for effecting the movement of a type-bar* from
    its print-point* position to its rest position, said means being part of or
    joined to means for effecting movement of the type-bar from its rest
    position to its print-point position.


CLS 400/437
TXT For impact control:

    Subject matter under subclass 436 wherein a type-bar* member is moved from
    its rest position to its print-point* position to impress a type-face* by
    force against a record-medium* backed by a platen* at the print-point, and
    wherein significance is attributed to regulating or governing said force by
    said resilient or yieldable means.


CLS 400/438
TXT With adjustment means (e.g., for "touch" control, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 436 wherein a type-bar* member is moved from
    its rest position to its print-point* position, the movement being caused
    by the pressing of a key* element on a key-board* by a typist exerting
    force on the key, and wherein significance is attributed to changing the
    amount of force exerted by the typist for pressing the key element.

    (1)     Note.  The "touch" control of this subclass is intended to modify
    the typewriter to the needs of various typists who might use the same
    typewriter.  Some typists use a light or lesser touch, striking the keys
    with little force.  The same typewriter, if subsequently used by a typist
    with a heavy touch who strikes the keys with great force, might have its
    platen* damaged.  The touch control tends to prevent this.


CLS 400/438.1
TXT Including an indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 438 wherein the typewriter that is provided
    with said force-changing attribute is also provided with a device for
    showing the typist an indication of how much force is required to press the
    key* elements of the typewriter.


CLS 400/439
TXT Attached to type-bar or universal-bar:

    Subject matter under subclass 436 wherein said resilient or yieldable means
    is fastened to the type-bar* itself or to the universal-bar* that causes
    movement of the type-bar.


CLS 400/440
TXT Attached to key lever (e.g., tension spring):

    Subject matter under subclass 436 wherein said resilient or yieldable means
    is fastened to the key* lever of the typewriter.

    (1)     Note.  The term "key lever" is defined in the definition of
    subclass 472 below.

    (2)     Note.  The typewriter of this subclass is usually provided with a
    tension spring (i.e., a spring which exerts force when its ends are pulled
    apart).


CLS 400/440.1
TXT Compression spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 440 wherein the resilient or yieldable means
    is a component that exerts a returning force when the opposite ends thereof
    are pushed together.


CLS 400/440.2
TXT Cantilever spring (e.g., torsion, hairpin, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 440 wherein the resilient or yieldable means
    is an elongated component having two ends, one of the ends being fixed to
    the frame of the typewriter and the other of the ends being movable to
    exert a returning force.

    (1)     Note.  The spring may be configured as a leaf spring or a torsion
    spring or a hairpin spring, these being only exemplary of the
    configurations used.


CLS 400/441
TXT Type-bar pivot support:

    Subject matter under subclass 383 wherein significance is attributed to
    structure that holds a fulcrum or axis, on which fulcrum or axis a
    type-bar* oscillates during its movement from its rest position to
    print-point* position and its return from its print-point position to its
    rest position.


CLS 400/442
TXT For plural groups of type-bars:

    Subject matter under subclass 441 wherein the type-bar* members of a
    typewriter are arranged in two or more sets, each set including only part
    of the full type-set-assemblage* of the typewriter, and each set of
    type-bars being supported on a separate pivot support that is common to all
    the type-bars of that set.


CLS 400/442.1
TXT Having type-bars disposed on plural ring supports:

    Subject matter under subclass 442 wherein each set of type-bar* members is
    mounted in a pivot support that has a circular or annular configuration.


CLS 400/442.2
TXT Including type-bars pivoted on vertical pivot(s) (e.g., moved in horizontal
    plane):

    Subject matter under subclass 442 wherein each of the type-bar* members is
    mounted for oscillation about an axis that is disposed vertically so that
    the oscillation occurs horizontally.


CLS 400/443
TXT Ring support:

    Subject matter under subclass 441 wherein each type-bar* member is mounted
    for oscillation in a pivot support that has a circular or annular
    configuration.

    (1)     Note.  Usually this form of support (i.e., ring support) is used in
    a top-strike typewriter or a bottom-strike typewriter.


CLS 400/444
TXT Type basket laterally movable relative to platen and key-board:

    Subject matter under subclass 441 wherein the type-bar* members are
    arranged in a unitary support, which support is mounted so as to be moved
    with respect to the platen* and to the key-board* of the typewriter in a
    plane that is parallel to a horizontal plane tangent to the platen.


CLS 400/445
TXT Type-bar-segment (e.g., wire journal):

    Subject matter under subclass 441 wherein significance is attributed to
    said structure being configured as a type-bar-segment.

    (1)     Note.  In the typewriter of this subclass a wire or thin elongated
    member is usually the common bearing or journal for all the type-bar*
    members.


CLS 400/445.1
TXT With guide for movement of segment:

    Subject matter under subclass 445 wherein the typewriter is provided with
    means associated with the type-bar-segment* that constrains the
    type-bar-segment to motion along a predetermined path.

    (1)     Note.  The guide means of this subclass is usually for constraining
    case-shift* movement of the type-bar-segment.


CLS 400/445.2
TXT Including hanger for individual type-bar:

    Subject matter under subclass 445 wherein the type-bar-segment* is provided
    with a plurality of components, each component being affixed to or
    dependent from the type-bar-segment, and each component serving to support
    one type-bar* member for oscillation of the type-bar.


CLS 400/445.3
TXT And bearing for type-bar:

    Subject matter under subclass 445.2 wherein significance is attributed to a
    part in or on said component in which a pivot or journal or gudgeon that is
    connected to the type-bar* member turns or oscillates relative to said
    component.

    (1)     Note.  The bearing of this subclass may be a ball bearing, a roller
    bearing, a conical bearing, etc., these forms of bearing being only
    exemplary of those found herein.


CLS 400/445.4
TXT Interchangeable (i.e., easily removable) segment:

    Subject matter under subclass 445 wherein significance is attributed to a
    type-bar segment* that may be taken out of the typewriter without the use
    of special tools to be replaced by the same or a different type-bar-segment.


CLS 400/445.5
TXT With type-bar anvil:

    Subject matter under subclass 445 wherein the type-bar-segment* is provided
    with a component located adjacent to the position at which the type-bar*
    member stops when the type-face* element has reached the print-point*
    position, which component acts to stop the type-bar at the print-point.

    (1)     Note.  In most typewriters the type-bar has some momentum when its
    type-face is at the print-point.  To prevent damage to the platen* by
    repeated impacts of the type-face against the platen.  The anvil of this
    subclass is provided to absorb the momentum of the type-bar rather than the
    platen absorbing the momentum of the type-bar.


CLS 400/446
TXT Interconnected (e.g., nested) support bearings:

    Subject matter under subclass 441 wherein significance is attributed to a
    part in or on said structure, in which part of a pivot or journal or
    gudgeon that is connected to the type-bar* member turns or oscillates
    relative to said structure, and which part of one type-bar is held partly
    within the confines of a similar part of an adjacent type-bar.


CLS 400/447
TXT Ball-and-socket bearing for type-bar (e.g., universal joint):

    Subject matter under subclass 441 wherein significance is attributed to the
    form of bearing that enables the type-bar* member to oscillate from its
    rest position to its print-point* position and return, the bearing
    including a spheroidal part that is partially enclosed in a concavity that
    at least partially surrounds the spheroidal part.


CLS 400/448
TXT Roller bearing or ball bearing for type-bar:

    Subject matter under subclass 441 wherein significance is attributed to the
    form of bearing that enables a type-bar* member to oscillate from its rest
    position to its print-point position and return to its rest position, the
    bearing being a roller bearing or a ball bearing.

    (1)     Note.  A  form of bearing for this subclass includes two annular
    members having an annular space therebetween, in which annular space a
    plurality of rollers or balls are provided.  By this construction, one of
    the members is enabled to rotate relative to the other member, the rollers
    or the balls revolving and rotating within the annular space.


CLS 400/448.1
TXT Including plural bearings for each type-bar:

    Subject matter under subclass 448 wherein each of the type-bar* members is
    provided with at least two of said bearings, at least one such bearing
    being on each side of the type-bar.


CLS 400/449
TXT Adjustable bearing for type-bar:

    Subject matter under subclass 441 wherein significance is attributed to
    structure that holds the pivot or axis on which the type-bar* member
    oscillates, which structure may be varied in its location or effect on the
    oscillation of the type-bar.

    (1)     Note.  In the typewriter of this subclass the type-bar bearing is
    adjustable as to its position, its frictional characteristics, or
    resistance to oscillation of the type-bar, etc.


CLS 400/450
TXT Pin support for type-bar:

    Subject matter under subclass 441 wherein significance is attributed to
    structure on which the type-bar* member oscillates, which structure
    comprises a short rodlike component that is provided for each of the
    type-bar members.


CLS 400/451
TXT Wire support for type-bars:

    Subject matter under subclass 441 wherein significance is attributed to
    structure on which the type-bar* member oscillates, which structure
    comprises a slender, elongated component that serves as a pivot for all the
    type-bars.


CLS 400/452
TXT Type-bar structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 383 wherein significance is attributed to the
    type-bar* member itself or to the portions of the type-bar that are
    integral therewith.


CLS 400/453
TXT With type-face movable in plane of type-bar movement:

    Subject matter under subclass 452 wherein the type-bar* member is moved
    from its rest position to its print-point* position along an imaginary
    surface, and wherein the type-face* element is carried by the type-bar so
    as to be moved by the type-bar and also to be moved relative to the
    type-bar, both movements of the type-face elements occurring along said
    imaginary surface.

    (1)     Note.  The type-face element is usually pivoted to the type-bar,
    but may be attached to the type-bar by a leaf spring.


CLS 400/454
TXT Type-bar rest or rest support:

    Subject matter under subclass 383 wherein significance is attributed to
    that portion of a typewriter that holds or supports the type-bar* in its
    rest or normal or inactive position, or wherein significance is attributed
    to structure that holds said portion on the typewriter.


CLS 400/455
TXT Including metallic material:

    Subject matter under subclass 454 wherein significance is attributed to
    said portion of said structure being fabricated of metal.


CLS 400/456
TXT Type-bar or type-member guide structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 383 wherein significance is attributed to
    means located on the frame of the typewriter or located adjacent to the
    print-point* of the typewriter, which means serves to confine the movement
    of a type-bar* member that is approaching the print-point into a path that
    will insure the correct positioning of a type-member* (i.e., a type-face*
    element or a type-die* element) relative to the print-point.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the guide means is located in the vicinity
    of the pivot axis of the type-bar.


CLS 400/457
TXT Including resilient means for energy absorption or kickback:

    Subject matter under subclass 456 wherein the guide means is provided with
    a yieldable element that is engaged and partially displaced by the
    type-bar* member print-point*, the displacement of the yieldable element
    storing the force of movement of the type-bar and/or the return of the
    yieldable element to its original condition serving to initiate the return
    of the type-bar to its original rest position.


CLS 400/458
TXT Mounted on platen-carriage:

    Subject matter under subclass 456 wherein the guide means is carried by the
    carriage* of the typewriter that holds the platen* of the typewriter.


CLS 400/459
TXT For thrusted type-bar:

    Subject matter under subclass 456 wherein the type-bar* member that is
    guided is an elongated member having a type-face* element (or a type-die*
    element) thereon located at one end of said member, said type-face being
    positioned so that its surface is approximately perpendicular to the
    elongated length of the member, and the movement of said type-bar is in the
    direction of its length as it moves from its rest position to its
    print-point* position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    390+,   for means for moving a thrusted type-bar member.


CLS 400/460
TXT Guide adjacent print-point:

    Subject matter under subclass 456 wherein said guide means is located in
    the vicinity of the print-point* of the typewriter.


CLS 400/460.1
TXT Including rollers or balls:

    Subject matter under subclass 460 wherein said guide means is provided with
    a pair of cylindrical elements or a pair of spheroidal elements to
    facilitate the guiding of the type-bar* element or the type-bar* member to
    the print-point*.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the rollers or balls are located one on each side of
    the type-face* element or the type-bar member at the print-point, and
    reduce the friction between the guide and the element or member.


CLS 400/460.2
TXT Including pin or collar:

    Subject matter under subclass 460 wherein said guide means includes a
    projection on the type-face* element or the type-bar* member that enters
    into an aperture in the guide means at the print-point*, or includes a
    projection on the guide means that enters into an aperture in the type-face
    element or the type-bar member when the element or member is at the
    print-point.


CLS 400/461
TXT Adjustable guide:

    Subject matter under subclass 456 wherein the guide means includes parts
    that may be varied in their relationship to the typewriter or the
    print-point*.


CLS 400/462
TXT Type-member structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 383 wherein significance is attributed to the
    type- member* (i.e., the type-face* element or the type-die* element)
    itself or to a portion of the type-member that is integral therewith.


CLS 400/463
TXT Removable type-member:

    Subject matter under subclass 462 wherein significance is attributed to a
    type-member* which may be disconnected from the type-bar* member and/or the
    same or a different type-member replaced on the type-bar.


CLS 400/464
TXT Rotatable on type-bar:

    Subject matter under subclass 462 wherein significance is attributed to a
    type-member* which is turnable on any axis relative to the type-bar* member
    on which the type-member is mounted.


CLS 400/465
TXT Pivotable on type-bar:

    Subject matter under subclass 462 wherein significance is attributed to a
    type-member* which is oscillatable on a axis relative to the type-bar*
    member on which the type-member is mounted.


CLS 400/466
TXT Type-face or type-die configuration (e.g., reverse image, boldface,
    piercing, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 462 wherein significance is attributed to the
    shape or physical characteristics or character* imprinting characteristics
    of a type-face* element or of a type-die* element.

    (1)     Note.  Among the forms of type-face or type-die found in this
    subclass are such exemplary elements as:  a type-face for typing a
    reverse-image character, a piercing type-die, and embossing type-die, a
    type-face for boldface (i.e., thick line) imprinting, a type-face for
    erasing or obliterating by overprinting, a self-cleaning type-face, a
    stencil-cutting type-die, a miniature or an oversized type-face, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210,    for a ribbon* used for boldface typing.


CLS 400/467
TXT Dust guard for type-bar action mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 383 wherein significance is attributed to
    structure on a typewriter, which structure serves to protect the moving
    parts of a type-bar* action from the effects of foreign matter which could
    harm the action if introduced thereinto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    496,    for a dust guard for a key*-lever pivot.


CLS 400/468
TXT For type-bar bearing (e.g., shield on type-bar segment):

    Subject matter under subclass 467 wherein the dust-protecting structure is
    mounted adjacent to the type-bar* member at the location where the type-bar
    is pivoted for movement.


CLS 400/469
TXT Attachment to type-bar for imprinting extra character:

    Subject matter under subclass 383 wherein a typewriter is provided with a
    full type-set-assemblage* of type-face* elements carried by type-bar*
    members, and wherein significance is attributed to the addition to one of
    the type-bars of an added type-face element that imprints an additional
    character* on the record-medium*.


CLS 400/470
TXT Ink-impregnated type-face or inker for type-face:

    Subject matter under subclass 383 wherein significance is attributed to
    means for applying ink* to the type-face* element prior to impressing the
    type-face against the record-medium* directly (i.e., without the use of an
    interposed inking ribbon*).

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the type-face carries its own supply of ink
    in the form of ink that is impregnated into the type-face element.


CLS 400/471
TXT Including stationary ink pad for inking type-face directly:

    Subject matter under subclass 470 wherein ink* is applied to the type-face*
    element by an ink-impregnated block of absorbent material, which block is
    mounted on the typewriter.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the ink-impregnated block also serves as the
    type-bar* rest that is contacted by the type-face in its rest position.


CLS 400/471.1
TXT And a wick for feeding pad from reservoir:

    Subject matter under subclass 471 wherein the typewriter is provided with a
    receptacle containing liquid ink* and a conduit including fibrous material,
    which conduit leads from the receptacle to the ink-impregnated block to
    transfer ink therethrough by capillary action.


CLS 400/472
TXT KEY-BOARD OR KEY-LEVER-ACTUATING MECHANISM:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein significance is
    attributed to (a) the key-board* of a typewriter, or (b) one or more of the
    key* elements of the typewriter, or (c) a key lever, which key lever is a
    fulcrumed bar that is moved by the pressing of a key element is connected
    to a mechanism that causes relative movement between a type-face* or a
    type-die* and a record-medium* to effect record-medium, or which bar is
    connected to a mechanism to initiate or cause the operation of a function*
    of the typewriter, or (d) means for effecting the pressing of one or more
    key elements.

    (1)     Note.  Mechanism which locks the key-board or key lever against
    movement will not be found in this or the indented subclasses.  Such
    mechanism is provided for in subclass 414 under appropriate titles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100+,   for a typewriter having a permutative key-board.

    414+,   for a key element or a key lever on a bottom-strike typewriter.

    663+,   for lock mechanism, and see (1) Note above.


CLS 400/473
TXT Including mechanism (e.g., auxiliary key-board) for activating keys:

    Subject matter under subclass 472 wherein a typewriter is provided with
    means that cause the key* elements of a typewriter key-board* to be pressed
    successively.

    (1)     Note.  A distinction is made between a key-board having keys that
    are contacted by the fingers of a typist, and an auxiliary or additional
    key-board having elements that in effect substitute for the fingers of a
    typist.  The auxiliary key-board may be used when it is desired to use a
    typewriter having a standard key-board arrangement by overlying the
    standard key-board with the auxiliary key-board having a different
    key-board arrangement.  The auxiliary key-board converts the pressings of
    the keys thereon into pressings of the keys of the standard key-board so
    that a typist familiar with the arrangement of the auxiliary key-board will
    be able to use a standard key-board typewriter.  The auxiliary key-board
    may also be used to a) convert the key-board of a manually powered
    typewriter to the key-board of a power-operated typewriter (e.g., an
    "input" typewriter), (b) provide the keyboard of a manually powered
    typewriter with the capability of sending electrical signals (e.g., an
    "output" typewriter, (c) convert the key-board of a cryptographic
    typewriter, or (d) provide a standard key-board for the typist when the
    keyboard of the typewriter is not standard.


CLS 400/474
TXT Electromagnetic key-board-drive mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 473 wherein said means includes components
    that are moved by electromagnetic force to press the key* elements
    successively.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is for an auxiliary key-board* wherein
    pressing the key elements of the auxiliary key-board causes electromagnetic
    components to press the corresponding key elements of the typewriter.  See
    subclass 479.2 for a keyboard wherein pressing of the key elements moves an
    electromagnetic component to effect movement of a corresponding key lever.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    479.2,  and see (1) Note above.


CLS 400/475
TXT Operated by user's leg (e.g., foot, knee, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 473 wherein said means is energized by a
    lower limb of the typist.

    (1)     Note.  A typewriter of this subclass is usually intended to
    increase typing speed by giving the typist the capability of actuating such
    functions* as carriage* return, case-shift*, word-space*, etc., by a key*
    element that is pressed by action of a foot, knee, etc., rather than
    pressed by a finger.  A typewriter for a handicapped person is found in
    subclass 87 above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87,     and see (1) Note above.


CLS 400/476
TXT For actuating function key only:

    Subject matter under subclass 473 wherein said means causes only a
    function*-key* element to be pressed.

    (1)     Note.  As discussed in the Glossary, section III, a function is an
    operation other than the impressing of a type-face* against a
    record-medium* to imprint a character*.  The auxiliary mechanism of this
    subclass therefor causes pressing of, for example, a tabulator key, a
    backspace key, a line-space* key, etc.


CLS 400/477
TXT Including means generating a signal for type selecting or other typing
    function:

    Subject matter under subclass 472 wherein a typewriter is provided with
    means for producing a pulse or code indication whenever a key* element is
    pressed.

    (1)     Note.  The key element may be one that is pressed to select a
    character* or one that is pressed for case-shift* or one that is pressed to
    perform any function* of the typewriter.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass are disclosures wherein the
    pressing of a key causes a light to pass to a photoelectric cell, for
    example, to generate a signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100+,   for a typewriter having a permutative key-board*, and wherein
    pressing of different permutations of keys generates signals to type
    different character symbols.


CLS 400/478
TXT Via slidable code bars:

    Subject matter under subclass 477 wherein the code indication is produced
    by rectilinearly movable members having notches or grooves in one surface
    of the members, the members being moved in accordance with the particular
    key* element that has been pressed, and the signal being generated in
    accordance with the relative relationship of the notches in the members.


CLS 400/479
TXT Via electrical component (e.g., switch, stylus, etc.) in or with key-board:

    Subject matter under subclass 477 wherein the pulse is produced by a device
    in an electrical circuit, which device completes the circuit whenever a
    key* element is pressed.

    (1)     Note.  In the typewriter of this subclass the electrical circuit
    may include a rodlike element (i.e., stylus) held in a hand of the typist,
    which element is manually moved to contact a particular key element to
    complete the circuit.


CLS 400/479.1
TXT Capacitance-responsive switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 479 wherein the device that completes the
    electrical circuit is one that embodies the electrical phenomenon known as
    "capacitance".


CLS 400/479.2
TXT Electromagnetic-responsive switch:

    Subject matter under subclass 479 wherein the device that completes the
    electric circuit is one that embodies the electrical phenomenon known as
    "magnetism" that is energized by electricity.


CLS 400/480
TXT Including control of key action (e.g., buffer, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 472 wherein significance is attributed to the
    regulating or governing of the movement or speed of movement or stopping of
    a key* element or said fulcrumed bar (i.e., a key lever) of a typewriter
    key-board*.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for a buffer that absorbs some of the
    kinetic energy imparted to the keys of the typewriter by the typist.


CLS 400/481
TXT By regulating key force or movement (e.g., key dip or stroke):

    Subject matter under subclass 480 wherein significance is attributed to the
    governing of the amount of pressure applied by the typist to the key*
    elements of the typewriter or to the distance that the fingers of the
    typist move during pressing of the key elements.


CLS 400/482
TXT For stenographic typewriter:

    Subject matter under subclass 472 wherein significance is attributed to a
    typewriter key-board* that is used in a stenographic typewriter.

    (1)     Note.  The term "stenographic typewriter" is defined and discussed
    in the definitions and notes of subclasses 91+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91+,    and see (1) Note above.


CLS 400/483
TXT For Braille typewriter:

    Subject matter under subclass 472 wherein significance is attributed to a
    typewriter key-board* that is used in a Braille typewriter.

    (1)     Note.  The term "Braille typewriter" is defined and discussed in
    the definition and note of subclass 109.1.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109.1,  and see (1) Note above.


CLS 400/484
TXT For foreign-language typewriter:

    Subject matter under subclass 472 wherein significance is attributed to a
    typewriter key-board* that is a foreign-language typewriter.

    (1)     Note.  The term "foreign-language" typewriter is defined and
    discussed in the definition and note of subclass 109.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109+,   and see (1) Note above.


CLS 400/485
TXT Key-board having multiple-character, multiple-movement keys:

    Subject matter under subclass 472 wherein significance is attributed to a
    key-board* having key* elements that are movable in a plurality of
    directions as pressed by a typist, each of which directional movements of a
    key element effecting the imprinting of a different character* symbol on
    the record-medium*.

    (1)     Note.  In most typewriters a typist presses an individual character
    key to imprint either the upper-case* or the lower-case* form of a letter,
    and certain of the character keys are usable to imprint either a number or
    a particular symbol.  The choice of symbols imprinted by pressing a
    particular key is limited to one of two symbols in such typewriters.  In a
    typewriter of this subclass, a key element is pressed and moved in the
    plane of its face, and the direction of its movement will effect typing of
    a different character.


CLS 400/486
TXT Key-board arranged according to character location:

    Subject matter under subclass 472 wherein significance is attributed to the
    positioning relative to one another of the key* elements that are each
    pressed to effect imprint of a particular character* symbol.

    (1)     Note.  The vast majority  of typewriters are manufactured so that
    their key-board* arrangements are the same or standard.  This standard
    arrangement permits any typist familiar with the standard key-board to type
    on any typewriter without looking at the individual keys.  In the
    typewriters of this subclass the arrangement of the keys and characters
    thereon is emphasized (and is usually other than standard) for various
    purposes.  The standard key-board is also known in the industry as a
    "qwerty" key-board, and is so called because of the arrangement of letters
    along one row of keys in that key-board.


CLS 400/487
TXT Color-coded key-board:

    Subject matter under subclass 486 wherein significance is attributed to the
    color or tint of the key* elements that are positioned on the key-board*,
    the elements being grouped in accordance with color.


CLS 400/488
TXT Key-board including row of keys having different heights:

    Subject matter under subclass 472 wherein significance is attributed to the
    positioning of the key* elements of a key-board* in accordance with the
    distances from the topmost surface of each key element to a common base.

    (1)     Note.  In most typewriters, the key elements are arranged in a
    plurality of rows, each row extending transversely across the front of the
    key-board and one row of keys higher or lower than another.  This
    arrangement conforms to the design and manufacturing requirements of most
    of the industry. In the typewriter of this subclass, the height of one key
    in a particular row will be different than the height of another key in the
    same row to conform to the natural shape and reach of the typist's fingers.


CLS 400/489
TXT Key-board including keys grouped to facilitate positioning of typist's
    fingers:

    Subject matter under subclass 472 wherein significance is attributed to the
    positioning of the key* elements of a key-board* in accordance with the
    distance that the fingers of a typist needs to reach from a rest position
    of the typist's hands to pressing position of the typist's fingers on the
    key element to be pressed.


CLS 400/490
TXT Key-cap or key-stem structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 472 wherein significance is attributed to a
    key* cap, which key cap is that part of a key element that is engaged by a
    finger of the typist during pressing of the key or is visible to the typist
    and bears a character* symbol corresponding to the character that will be
    imprinted on the record-medium* when the key is pressed, or wherein
    significance is attributed to a key stem, which key stem is that part of a
    key element that connects the key cap to the key lever.


CLS 400/491
TXT Including cushioning means (e.g., yieldable surface):

    Subject matter under subclass 490 wherein either said key* cap or said key
    stem includes means that tends to absorb some of the force exerted by the
    typist's fingers as the key elements are pressed during typing.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the cushion is usually a yieldable or
    resilient pad.


CLS 400/491.1
TXT Including underlying air-cushion:

    Subject matter under subclass 491 wherein said means includes a resilient
    bag or container having a gas therein.


CLS 400/491.2
TXT Including spring supporting key cap or key stem:

    Subject matter under subclass 491 wherein said means includes a resilient
    or yieldable component that connects said key* cap to said key stem or that
    connects said key stem to the key lever and holds the parts of the key
    element in place.


CLS 400/491.3
TXT With sensory indicator (e.g., sound, tactile response, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 491.2 wherein said means also includes a
    member that stimulates one of the senses of the typist to enhance the
    awareness of the typist to the act of typing.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is a device to produce an audible
    "click" when the key* element is pressed, or indicate to the sense of touch
    a slight, temporary pause in the movement of the key lever.


CLS 400/492
TXT Adjustable in plane of key(s) (e.g., to facilitate reach, rotatable, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 490 wherein said key* element has the topmost
    surface of its key cap lying in a particular plane, and wherein the
    position of said key cap relative to the key-board* may be varied while the
    top surface of the key cap remains in said particular plane.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are typewriters wherein a key cap may be
    rotated about an axis that is perpendicular to its top surface, or wherein
    a key cap or a key element may be adjusted to-and-fro or sidewise to fit
    the reach of a typist's fingers.


CLS 400/493
TXT Including character-bearing disc on key cap:

    Subject matter under subclass 490 wherein said key* cap is provided with a
    thin, flat, circular component mounted on the top surface of the key cap,
    which component bears on its top surface an indicium representing the
    character* symbol that will be imprinted on the record-medium* when the key
    element bearing said key cap is pressed.


CLS 400/493.1
TXT Secured by encircling ring member:

    Subject matter under subclass 493 wherein said component is mounted on said
    key* cap and fastened thereto by an annular element that surrounds the
    component and the key cap.


CLS 400/493.2
TXT With slot for exchanging disc:

    Subject matter under subclass 493.1 wherein said element is provided with
    an elongated hole therein, through which hole the component may be removed
    from the key* cap and through which hole the same or another component may
    be inserted onto the key cap.


CLS 400/494
TXT Having raised or recessed character:

    Subject matter under subclass 490 wherein said key* cap is provided with an
    indicium representing the character* symbol that will be imprinted on the
    record-medium* when a key element bearing said key cap is pressed, which
    indicium projects above the top surface of the key cap or is formed as a
    groove in the top surface of the key cap.


CLS 400/495
TXT Including means for mounting key cap or key stem:

    Subject matter under subclass 490 wherein significance is attributed to the
    manner of connecting said key* cap or said key stem to the key lever that
    is moved when a key element is pressed.


CLS 400/495.1
TXT By spring means:

    Subject matter under subclass 495 wherein the connection between said key*
    cap or key includes a yieldable or resilient member.


CLS 400/496
TXT Key lever or space-bar mounting structure (e.g., dust guard, buffer, pivot,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 472 wherein significance is attributed to a
    fulcrumed bar that is moved by pressing of a key* element or a space-bar*
    element on a key-board* element on a key-board*, or to the fulcrum of said
    bar, or to structure that serves to protect said fulcrum from the intrusion
    of foreign matter to said fulcrum or to a component that serves to support
    or stop the movement of said fulcrumed bar.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for the key lever, per se, or the
    space-bar lever, per se, or the dust guard adjacent to the pivot or the
    buffer or rest for the lever, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    467+,   for a dust guard for a type-bar* action mechanism.


CLS 400/497
TXT WITH CONTROL OF "CARBON PAPER" FOR TYPING PLURAL SIMULTANEOUS COPIES BY
    SINGLE IMPRESSION (E.G., ON "MANIFOLD SET"):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein one typewriter, using one
    set of key* elements and one type-set-assemblage*, types one "original
    copy" and at least one "carbon copy", the carbon copy being produced by use
    of "carbon paper" adjacent to the carbon copy, and wherein significance is
    attributed to the use of, movement of, or position of, carbon paper in the
    typing of the carbon copy.

    (1)     Note.  The term carbon paper is a typewriter industry term for a
    transfer-medium* coated on one of its surfaces with a substance containing
    carbon or other pigment, this form of transfer-medium having the property
    that a character* symbol imprinted therewith is easily erased.  In contrast
    to an ink* that impregnates the fibers of a record-medium* or adheres
    tightly to the surface thereof, a carbon paper includes a pigment that
    lightly coats the surface of a record-medium and can be easily removed from
    said surface.  In the early technology of carbon paper manufacture, it was
    made using carbon as the pigment of the coating, therefore its name,
    despite recent development which has produced carbon paper having other
    colors and pigments and made without carbon.  In use, a sheet or web or
    ribbon* of carbon paper is placed with its coated surface adjacent to a
    surface of a record-medium (which is to be the carbon copy) and its
    uncoated surface adjacent to the undersurface of the record-medium which is
    to be the "original copy".  The impact of a single type-face* will effect
    the imprint of a corresponding character on both copies.  To produce
    additional carbon copies, a corresponding number of pieces of carbon paper
    and record-medium are used underlying the first of the carbon copies.

    (2)     Note.  A manifold set is an assemblage that includes at least one
    piece of carbon paper with its coated surface adjacent to a surface of one
    piece of a record-medium that is to be the carbon copy.  To produce an
    original copy a piece of record-medium must be placed over the assemblage,
    and to produce additional carbon copies, other assemblages may be placed
    under the first-mentioned assemblage.

    (3)     Note.  Use of carbon paper to produce one or more carbon copies is
    found in this and the indented subclasses. However, other subclasses found
    higher in the schedule reflect the use of carbon paper for other purposes.
    One of these subclasses is subclass 190 wherein carbon paper is used to
    type on the reverse surface of a record-medium. Another of these subclasses
    is subclass 206.1 wherein carbon paper in the form of a narrow elongated
    ribbon is used. Also in subclass 227 a narrow carbon ribbon which is
    usually a carbon-ink film, but may be a carbon-paper ribbon, is fed by a
    ribbon-feed mechanism.

    (4)     Note.  The typerwriter of this subclass includes a structure for
    changing the feed direction of a sheet or web of carbon paper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37+,    for a flat-platen* typewriter for typing on a manifold set.

    190,    206.1 and 227+, and see (3) Note above.

    204+,   for typing of plural original copies simultaneously.


CLS 400/498
TXT Including prevention of full imprint on "carbon copy" record-medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 497 wherein significance is attributed to the
    interposition of a shield or barrier between said carbon paper and said
    carbon copy at selected portions of a print-line*, whereby said selected
    portions will not be imprinted on the carbon copy.


CLS 400/499
TXT On record-medium wound around platen together with carbon paper:

    Subject matter under subclass 497 wherein one record-medium* for said
    original copy, and at least one record-medium for said carbon copy, and at
    least one of said carbon papers is interleaved as a manifold set, and said
    manifold set is coiled around the platen* in plural convolutions as typing
    on the record-medium progresses.

    (1)     Note.  In some of the disclosures of this subclass the carbon paper
    is attached to the platen.


CLS 400/500
TXT With means for causing slack in web of manifold set:

    Subject matter under subclass 497 wherein the typewriter is to type on a
    manifold set comprising a plurality of webs of record-medium* material and
    at least one web or sheet of carbon paper interleaved with the
    record-medium, webs, the assemblage being under tension as a result of
    being fed through the typewriter by the platen*, and wherein the tension in
    the assemblage is relieved whereby accurate feeding is accomplished.

    (1)     Note.  The term "manifold set" is defined in (2) Note of subclass
    497, the term "web" is defined as a piece of material having a determinate
    width and an indeterminate length, and the term "sheet" is defined as a
    piece of material having a determinate width and a determinate length.


CLS 400/501
TXT By arcuate movement of carbon paper carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein said webs or sheets of carbon
    paper are supported by or mounted on a member, which member is oscillated
    while in contact with the webs or sheets whereby to relieve the tension in
    said webs or sheets and said assemblage.


CLS 400/502
TXT By clamp on carbon paper carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein said webs or sheets of carbon
    paper are supported by or mounted on a member, which member includes means
    for firmly gripping said webs or sheets and moving them relative to the
    typewriter whereby to relieve the tension in said webs or sheets and said
    assemblage.


CLS 400/503
TXT By use of other than rectangular sheet carbon paper (e.g., disc, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 497 wherein said carbon paper is configured
    to have a shape that is not a sheet of determinate length and determinate
    width or not a web of indeterminate length and determinate width.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the carbon paper is usually a disc of
    circular configuration, and see subclass 504 below wherein the carbon paper
    is configured as an endless band that is not considered to be a web of
    indeterminate length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    504,    for an endless band piece of carbon paper.


CLS 400/504
TXT Endless-band carbon paper:

    Subject matter under subclass 503 wherein said carbon paper is configured
    as a closed-loop strip of material having a determinate width, but the
    length of which is interminable due to its closed-loop configuration.


CLS 400/505
TXT By multicolor carbon paper:

    Subject matter under subclass 497 wherein said carbon paper is formed
    having a plurality of colors or pigments thereon, whereby the carbon copy
    imprinted therewith may have character* symbols imprinted in selected
    colors.


CLS 400/506
TXT With means to prevent creep (e.g., relative movement) between record-media:

    Subject matter under subclass 497 wherein significance is attributed to
    means in the typewriter for ensuring that a record-medium* piece for a
    carbon copy will be fed through the typewriter at the platen* at exactly
    the same feed rate as a record-medium piece for an original copy.


CLS 400/507
TXT Including means for creep feed of carbon paper:

    Subject matter under subclass 497 wherein significance is attributed to
    means for ensuring that said carbon paper will be fed through the
    typewriter at the platen* at a rate of feed less than the feed rate of the
    record-medium* for an original copy or the feed rate of the record-medium
    for a carbon copy.


CLS 400/508
TXT Including spool or support for roll of carbon paper:

    Subject matter under subclass 497 wherein said carbon paper is in the form
    of a web (i.e., indeterminate length) of material that is coiled in
    convolutions on a reel, and wherein significance is attributed to said reel
    or to means for mounting the reel on the typewriter.


CLS 400/509
TXT Including a flat roll or core therefor:

    Subject matter under subclass 508 wherein significance is attributed to the
    configuration of the coiled convolutions being compressed in a first
    diametral dimension and expanded in a second diametral dimension at right
    angles to the first dimension, or wherein significance is attributed to a
    reel on which a coil of said configuration has been wound.


CLS 400/510
TXT And guide for changing feed direction:

    Subject matter under subclass 508 wherein said carbon paper is advanced
    from the wound roll to a platen* where the carbon paper is used, the carbon
    paper being advanced along a path that is not a straight line, and wherein
    significance is attributed to a member which ensures that the carbon paper
    will follow the bends of the path along which the carbon paper advances.


CLS 400/510.1
TXT Spool support shiftable to and from platen:

    Subject matter under subclass 510 wherein the wound roll of said carbon
    paper is mounted on a reel that may be moved toward the platen* or moved
    away from the platen.


CLS 400/511
TXT Feed mechanism for feed from roll of carbon paper:

    Subject matter under subclass 503 wherein the typewriter is provided with
    means for advancing said carbon paper from a wound roll thereof to a
    platen* where the carbon paper is used.


CLS 400/511.1
TXT Responsive to return of carriage:

    Subject matter under subclass 511 wherein the carriage* of a typewriter is
    moved from a location at which the last character* of a print-line* has
    been imprinted to a location at which the first character of a succeeding
    print-line is to be imprinted, and wherein significance is attributed to
    said advancing of said carbon paper under control of said carriage movement.


CLS 400/511.2
TXT With retraction of carbon paper for reuse thereof (e.g., by slidable
    carrier):

    Subject matter under subclass 511 wherein said carbon paper is advanced
    from a wound roll in a first direction toward the platen* for use in typing
    carbon copies, and wherein said carbon paper is drawn back in a second
    direction opposite to the first direction so that the carbon paper may be
    used again in a subsequent typing operation while it is advanced in the
    first direction for use in typing carbon copies.

    (1)     Note.  The retraction of the carbon paper usually occurs at the
    completion of one page* (e.g., one form of a plurality of business forms)
    on the record-medium* web and is for the purpose of repositioning the
    carbon paper between the next forms to be typed.  When the pigment on the
    carbon paper is depleted, the worn portion of carbon paper is torn off and
    a fresh supply pulled from the wound roll of carbon paper.  In this
    subclass the carbon paper roll is mounted on a slidable carrier and the
    movement of the carrier effects advancement and retraction of the carbon
    paper.


CLS 400/511.3
TXT Carbon paper rewound for retraction:

    Subject matter under subclass 511.2 wherein said carbon paper that is drawn
    back in the second direction is coiled again onto the same coil from which
    it was unwound during the advancement in the first direction.


CLS 400/511.4
TXT By driving carbon paper roll directly from platen (e.g., by endless band):

    Subject matter under subclass 511.3 wherein the force required to coil said
    carbon paper is taken from the platen* which is rotated during operation of
    the typewriter.


CLS 400/512
TXT And support for roll of record-medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 508 wherein the record-medium* that is to be
    typed on is also in the form of a web (i.e., indeterminate length) of
    material that is coiled in convolutions on a reel mounted on the typewriter.

    (1)     Note.  The typewriter of this subclass may also have a support for
    a roll of carbon paper.


CLS 400/513
TXT Including relative movement between carbon paper and record-medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 497 wherein the typewriter is provided with
    means for moving the record-medium* and with means for moving said carbon
    paper, and wherein significance is attributed to mechanism that causes the
    carbon paper to move at a rate of movement different from that of the
    record-medium or in a different direction, whereby the carbon paper and the
    record-medium are moved with respect to each other.


CLS 400/514
TXT Including positioning of auxiliary record-medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 513 wherein the typewriter is normally used
    to type on a manifold set that comprises a record-medium* and at least one
    piece of carbon paper and at least one other record-medium, and wherein
    significance is attributed to the insertion into the typewriter of an
    additional record-medium for typing thereon.

    (1)     Note.  The additional record-medium may be inserted from the front
    of the platen* or from the rear of the platen.


CLS 400/515
TXT Including front insertion of carbon paper or record-medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 513 wherein either said carbon paper or the
    record-medium* is fed into the typewriter by guiding the leading edge of a
    piece of carbon paper or record-medium directly between the platen* and the
    print-point* of the typewriter via structure that is positioned between the
    platen and the typist.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    595+,   for insertion of a sheet for "condensed-billing*" from front of
    platen.


CLS 400/516
TXT By simultaneously advancing record-medium and retracting carbon paper:

    Subject matter under subclass 513 wherein the record-medium* is moved in a
    direction to line-space* the record-medium, and said carbon paper is moved
    in the opposite direction at the same time, both movements occurring after
    typing of one page* of text and before typing on a subsequent page of text.

    (1)     Note.  The movements referred to above do not occur during typing
    on a particular page of text.  Rather during the typing of a page both the
    record-medium and carbon paper materials move in the same direction, and
    the specified movements occur between successive pages.


CLS 400/517
TXT By means to arrest advance of carbon paper:

    Subject matter under subclass 513 wherein the record-medium* is moved in a
    direction to line-space* the record-medium, and wherein the relative
    movement between the record-medium and said carbon paper is effected by
    means for preventing the carbon paper from moving, the relative movement
    occurring after the typing of one page* of text and before typing on a
    subsequent page of text.

    (1)     Note.  During the typing of a page the record-medium and carbon
    paper materials are line-spaced together. The action described above occurs
    between pages, when the record-medium is advanced and the carbon paper
    remains stationary.


CLS 400/518
TXT Carbon paper carrier(s) respositionable relative to platen:

    Subject matter under subclass 513 wherein said carbon paper is held to and
    moved by a member (i.e., a carrier) that is movable on the typewriter with
    respect to the platen* thereof.

    (1)     Note.  In this and indented subclasses the carbon paper is usually
    in the form of one or more sheets supported on a carrier usually movable on
    horizontal rails toward and away from the platen. Movement in the
    record-feed direction is usually by the platen and a feed-roller*.
    Retraction of the carbon paper for the purpose of repositioning the carbon
    paper usually is by manually pushing the carrier away from the platen after
    the feed mechanism has released the record-medium* and carbon paper
    material.


CLS 400/518.1
TXT Plural carriers disposed side-by-side for selective use singly or
    simultaneously:

    Subject matter under subclass 518 wherein the typewriter is provided with
    two or more of said carriers, and wherein each of said carriers is mounted
    on the typewriter for movement with respect to the platen* along a path,
    and the path for each of the carriers is parallel one to the others,
    whereby any of the carriers is movable along its own path individually or
    any of the carriers are movable together or at the same time.


CLS 400/518.2
TXT Plural carriers for serial retraction of plural carbon papers:

    Subject matter under subclass 518 wherein the typewriter is provided with
    two or more of said carriers, and wherein each of said carriers is movable
    with respect to the platen* in a return direction opposite to the
    line-space* direction of the record-medium*, and wherein the carriers are
    moved in said return direction one by one in sequence.

    (1)     Note.  As plural manifold sets of carbon paper and record-medium
    are typed on, there in a tendency for the carbon paper to stick to the
    record-medium, which makes it difficult to retract the carbon paper from
    the platen.  The construction provided for in this subclass permits one
    carbon paper to be retracted, then another, thus facilitating the
    retraction of the carbon papers despite the tendency to stick together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    519.2+, for another construction for this purpose.


CLS 400/518.3
TXT With means to imprint selectively on one or more media (e.g., by holding
    selected media away from print-line):

    Subject matter under subclass 518 wherein a typewriter normally is used to
    type an original copy and several carbon copies simultaneously, and wherein
    a typist is enabled to type one or more character* symbols on one or more
    of the copies without typing those character symbols on the other copies.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the original copy and/or one or more of the carbon
    copies that is/are not to be imprinted are moved to a position away from
    the print-point* so that a type-face* will not impact there-against.  An
    alternative structure to perform this operation is the provision of a
    second platen* member positioned to shield some of the copies and enable
    imprinting on the other copies.


CLS 400/518.4
TXT Including retraction of carbon paper and record-medium and subsequent
    advance of record-medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 518 wherein said carbon paper and the
    record-medium* is moved on the typewriter with respect to the platen*
    thereof in a return direction that is opposite to the line-space* direction
    of the record-medium, and wherein the record-medium is then moved in the
    line-space direction.

    (1)     Note.  The retraction and subsequent advance is for the purpose of
    repositioning the carbon paper relative to the next page* or form to be
    typed, and occurs after the preceding page or form has been typed.


CLS 400/519
TXT Carbon paper carrier movable rectilinearly:

    Subject matter under subclass 518 wherein said carrier for said carbon
    paper is movable along a straight line.

    (1)     Note.  The path of movement of the carrier is usually along a line
    that extends at right angles to the axis of the platen* and substantially
    tangent to the circumference of the platen. The support for the carrier may
    extend to the rear of the typewriter in a substantially horizontal
    disposition or may extend substantially vertically from a member fixed at
    the back of the typewriter.


CLS 400/519.1
TXT With means to hold record-medium against retraction:

    Subject matter under subclass 519 wherein said carbon paper carrier is
    moved in a return direction that is opposite to the line-space* direction
    of the record-medium*, and wherein the typewriter is provided with means to
    ensure that the record-medium will not move in said return direction as the
    carbon paper moves in that direction.


CLS 400/519.2
TXT Including means to reduce binding of carbon paper during retraction:

    Subject matter under subclass 519 wherein said carbon paper carrier is
    moved with respect to the platen* in a return direction opposite to the
    line-space* direction of the record-medium*, and wherein a tendency for the
    carbon paper to stick to the record-medium, is lessened.

    (1)     Note.  As plural manifold sets of carbon paper and record-medium
    are typed on, there is a tendency for the carbon paper to stick to the
    record-medium, which makes it difficult to retract the carbon paper from
    the platen.  The construction provided for in this and indented subclasses
    enables the separation of the carbon paper from the record-medium, thus
    facilitating the retraction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    518.2,  for another construction for this purpose.


CLS 400/519.3
TXT Including lifting of platen for retraction of carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 519.2 wherein the original copy and the
    manifold set(s) of carbon paper and carbon copy record-medium* are normally
    disposed to be fed from the rear of the platen*, underneath the platen, and
    to the front of the platen to the print-point*, and wherein the platen is
    raised from its normal position to a position above and clear of its normal
    position to enable the carbon paper carrier (and the carbon paper held
    thereby) to be moved in said return direction.


CLS 400/519.4
TXT With guard over settable parts (e.g., denominational jacks, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 519.2 wherein significance is attributed to a
    structure on the typewriter that serves to protect various movable
    components from being moved unintentionally as the platen* is lifted.

    (1)     Note.  The components that are apt to be moved unintentionally are
    usually located at the rear of the typewriter, near the path of movement of
    the manifold sets that are being fed to the platen, and are usually the
    denominational-stops* of the typewriter.


CLS 400/519.5
TXT With relative movement between record media (e.g., for condensed-billing,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 519.2 wherein significance is attributed to
    movement of one record-medium* with respect to another record-medium, this
    movement being in addition to the movement of one or more carbon papers
    with respect to the record-medium.

    (1)     Note.  The relative movement of record media usually is for the
    purpose of facilitating condensed-billing*.


CLS 400/519.6
TXT With support or guiding or positive-driving structure for carrier (e.g.,
    table, adjustable stop, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 519 wherein significance is attributed to
    means for mounting said carrier for said carbon paper, or to means for
    restraining said carrier for movement along its intended line of movement,
    or to means for effecting movement of the carrier as the platen* is
    incrementally rotated.


CLS 400/519.7
TXT Carbon paper carrier on endless member:

    Subject matter under subclass 518 wherein said carrier for said carbon
    paper is moved by a component that is trained around two or more pulleys
    and is in the form of a closed-loop band.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also provides for mechanism for adjusting the
    endless member laterally of its direction of movement and for mechanism for
    adjusting the carrier relative to the endless member.


CLS 400/520
TXT Carbon paper holder (e.g., loading board, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 497 wherein significance is attributed to a
    means for supporting one or more pieces of said carbon paper, or to means
    for enabling a typist to associate carbon paper with record-medium* pieces
    or align a set of associated pieces with the typewriter for proper
    subsequent feed of the pieces to the platen*.


CLS 400/521
TXT FOR TYPING ON CARD IN CARD HOLDER:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein significance is
    attributed to a typewriter provided with means for supporting or retaining
    a relatively stiff piece of record-medium* material while the typewriter is
    being used to imprint character* symbols on the record-medium.

    (1)     Note.  Due to the stiffness of the record-medium (i.e., card) it
    does not readily conform to the periphery of the cylindrical platen* around
    which the card is partially wrapped during typing.  This causes problems,
    especially during the typing of a print-line* near the top or bottom edge
    of the card.  Other problems in typing on a card are due to the size of the
    card, which is often smaller in length and width than a sheet.  Disclosures
    in this and the indented subclasses are directed to means for over-coming
    the problems caused by typing on a card. This subclass provides for a
    retaining means that may be removed from and replaced on the typewriter
    easily.


CLS 400/522
TXT Flexible holder fed around platen with single card:

    Subject matter under subclass 521 wherein the retaining means comprises a
    sheet of material into which or onto which one record-medium* card is
    temporarily secured so that during typing no relative movement occurs
    between the record-medium and the retaining means, which retaining means is
    sufficiently bendable to be partially wrapped around a cylindrical platen*
    together with the record-medium secured thereto, whereby both the retaining
    means and the record-medium are moved in line-space* increments during
    typing on the record-medium.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is also for a disclosure wherein one manifold
    set [which term is defined in (2) Note of subclass 497] is temporarily
    secured to a flexible retainer or holder.


CLS 400/523
TXT On card pierced or indented to aid holding:

    Subject matter under subclass 521 wherein the retaining means has
    projections thereon that enter into, or cause the formation of, holes or
    depressions in the surface of the record-medium* card, whereby the card is
    more securely retained by the retaining means.


CLS 400/524
TXT Holder movable responsive to case-shift:

    Subject matter under subclass 521 wherein the typewriter is provided with a
    case-shift* mechanism having relatively movable parts, and wherein the
    retaining means is moved when the case-shift parts are moved.


CLS 400/525
TXT Card holder carried by platen:

    Subject matter under subclass 521 wherein the retaining means is supported
    by the platen* of the typewriter for movement therewith.


CLS 400/526
TXT And actuated in response to platen rotation:

    Subject matter under subclass 525 wherein the platen* is incrementally
    turned for line-space* movements during operation of the typewriter, and
    wherein the retaining means includes a device for contacting the
    record-medium* card and holding the card to the retaining means, which
    device moves toward the card for holding thereof as the platen starts its
    turning movement.


CLS 400/527
TXT With platen surface modified for card:

    Subject matter under subclass 525 wherein the platen* of the typewriter is
    a cylinder having a periphery that is altered from a circular periphery,
    the alteration being made for the purpose of accommodating the
    record-medium* card or the retaining means for the card.


CLS 400/527.1
TXT Including card gripper on platen:

    Subject matter under subclass 527 wherein the alteration is made for the
    purpose of accommodating a device that is movable to closely contact the
    card and hold it to the platen*.

    (1)     Note.  In some typewriters the card gripper is pivotable with
    respect to the platen.


CLS 400/527.2
TXT Including axially extending slot or hollow in platen:

    Subject matter under subclass 527 wherein the alteration is a narrow
    elongated groove in the periphery of the platen*, or is a cavity in the
    platen, which groove or cavity is parallel to the axis of rotation of the
    platen.


CLS 400/528
TXT Holder attached via detachable arms at ends of platen:

    Subject matter under subclass 525 wherein the retaining means is supported
    by the platen* by way of members that are located at opposite extremities
    of the platen, which members are removable from and replaceable on the
    platen.


CLS 400/529
TXT Holder attached via pins on holder or via adhesive attachment:

    Subject matter under subclass 525 wherein the retaining means is supported
    by the platen* by way of projections on said retaining means that interfit
    into depressions on or in the surface of the platen, or wherein the
    retaining means is supported by the platen* by way of a device that adheres
    said retaining means to the surface of the platen.


CLS 400/530
TXT Holder attached via element (e.g., band) gripping platen periphery:

    Subject matter under subclass 525 wherein the retaining means is supported
    by the platen* by way of a member that has frictional (i.e., nonslidable)
    contact with the circumferential surface of the platen, or wherein said
    member extends around the entire circumference of the platen.


CLS 400/531
TXT Including line-spacing of holder or card:

    Subject matter under subclass 521 wherein the record-medium* card is moved
    by the retaining means in a direction to feed the card in line-space*
    distances to enable imprint of successive print-line* rows.

    (1)     Note.  In this or indented subclasses the card may be line-spaced
    by moving it together with its holder, or may be line-spaced by moving the
    card relative to a stationary holder.


CLS 400/532
TXT Variable line spacing (e.g., platen creep):

    Subject matter under subclass 531 wherein the distance that the retaining
    means moves between successive print-line* rows is changed.

    (1)     Note.  The typewriter of this subclass sometimes has a platen*
    moved with "platen creep", (i.e., increment of platen rotation smaller than
    usual line-space* increment).


CLS 400/533
TXT In a curvilinear path:

    Subject matter under subclass 531 wherein the retaining means is moved with
    the record-medium* card thereon along a line that is continuously bending
    and without angles.


CLS 400/534
TXT By pinion and rack:

    Subject matter under subclass 531 wherein the retaining means is moved with
    the record-medium* card thereon by way of two members, one member being a
    toothed wheel or disc that is rotated and the other member being a toothed,
    elongated bar that is connected to the retaining means, and wherein the
    teeth of the two members intermesh, whereby the rotation of the toothed
    wheel effects movement of the toothed bar and the retaining means.


CLS 400/535
TXT Including support engaging bottom edge of card:

    Subject matter under subclass 521 wherein the means for retaining the
    record-medium* cards includes a member having an upwardly oriented surface,
    which surface is used as a rest for the lowermost edge of a vertically
    upstanding card.


CLS 400/536
TXT Card holder mounted on typewriter frame:

    Subject matter under subclass 521 wherein the retaining means is supported
    by a stationary portion of the typewriter.

    (1)     Note.  In this and indented subclasses the card holder usually
    includes an element similar to a paper-finger* that is closely adjacent to
    the surface of the platen* and that tends to urge the record-medium* card
    toward the platen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    543,    for similar structure that is mounted on the carriage* of the
    typewriter.


CLS 400/537
TXT Including means enabling movement of card relative to holder:

    Subject matter under subclass 536 wherein the retaining means includes a
    device that causes the record-medium* card to be moved with respect to the
    retaining means.


CLS 400/538
TXT Transparent card holder:

    Subject matter under subclass 536 wherein significance is attributed to a
    retaining means that is made of a material through which light may pass,
    whereby a typist is enabled to see the print-line* on the record-medium* as
    the character* symbols are being imprinted.


CLS 400/539
TXT Including finger movable away from holding position:

    Subject matter under subclass 536 wherein the retaining means includes a
    member that tends to urge the record-medium* card against the surface of
    the platen*, which member may be moved away from the platen to a location
    at which it does not urge the card to the platen.


CLS 400/540
TXT Spring urged to holding position:

    Subject matter under subclass 539 wherein the retaining means includes a
    yieldable element that provides the force to urge the record-medium* card
    against the surface of the platen*.

    (1)     Note.  The typewriter of this subclass sometimes is provided with a
    second element that provides additional force to urge the record-medium
    card against the surface of the platen.


CLS 400/541
TXT Including a feed-roller:

    Subject matter under subclass 521 wherein the retaining means includes a
    feed-roller* that cooperates with the platen* to feed a record-medium* card.


CLS 400/542
TXT Card holder mounted on platen-carriage frame:

    Subject matter under subclass 521 wherein the retaining means is supported
    on the structure that also supports a carriage* that moves a platen*
    relative to the typewriter.

    (1)     Note.  The typewriter of this subclass includes a feed-roller*
    shaft that supports the card holder, or the card holder is supported on an
    element pivotable about an axis located behind the platen.


CLS 400/543
TXT Including gripper or means urging card against platen:

    Subject matter under subclass 521 wherein the retaining means includes two
    members, each of which members has a surface that faces the surface of the
    other member, and wherein the surfaces are spaced apart a distance
    corresponding to one of the dimensions of the record-medium* card, whereby
    the card will fit between and be held by the two surfaces, or wherein the
    retaining means includes a member that tends to urge the record-medium card
    against the surface of the platen*.

    (1)     Note.  The urging of this subclass is usually mounted on the
    carriage* of the typewriter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    536+,   for similar structure that is mounted on the frame or a fixed part
    of the typewriter.


CLS 400/544
TXT Backing for stencil cutting (e.g., celluloid strip, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 521 wherein significance is attributed to a
    retaining means that holds a record-medium* card, or to a protecting means
    that protects the platen* from damage by the impacting type-face* elements
    while the typewriter is being used for cutting a stencil.

    (1)     Note.  As referred to herein, a "stencil" is a card or sheet having
    a surface that is normally impervious to the passage of ink* from one
    surface to the opposite surface.  However, when the stencil is impacted by
    a type-face element, the surface is modified along the line that represents
    the character* symbol corresponding to the type-face, the modification
    being such as to permit ink to flow from one surface to the opposite
    surface.  The card or sheet that has had its surface so modified is then
    usable in a "Mimeograph" printing machine.  (The term Mimeograph is a
    trademark.)  The operation of typing on the stencil material is known as
    "cutting" the stencil.


CLS 400/545
TXT FOR LINE-SPACING BY INCREMENTAL ROTATION OF PLATEN:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a typewriter is provided
    with a cylindrical platen* and wherein significance is attributed to the
    turning of said platen in step by step manner to effect line-space*
    distances to a piece of record-medium* that is held to and backed by said
    platen.

    (1)     Note.  As discussed in the definition of "line-space" in the
    Glossary, section III, line-space is usually effected in units of one, two
    or three line-spaces, and sometimes effected in half spaces (e.g.,
    one-half, one and one-half or two and one-half), but rarely more than three
    line-spaces in any single unit of movement.  In some typewriters provision
    is made for multi-incremental line-spacing, which is the rotation of a
    platen through increments greater than three line-spaces, usually for the
    purpose of quickly moving a sheet of record-medium out of the typewriter,
    or for the purpose of effecting a line-space distance between the end of
    one paragraph of text and the start of another paragraph, which distance is
    greater than normal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44+,    for line spacing of a flat platen.


CLS 400/546
TXT To facilitate condensed-billing (i.e., by determining a desired limit or
    amount of retrograde or advance platen movement):

    Subject matter under subclass 545 wherein significance is attributed to a
    typewriter that is capable of performing a condensed-billing* operation by
    regulating the increments (i.e., the step by step turning movements) of
    rotation of the platen* that cause the record-medium* to move in a
    line-space* direction and regulating increments of rotation of the platen
    that cause the record-medium to move in a direction opposite to the
    line-space direction.

    (1)     Note.  As discussed in the Glossary, section III, the term
    "condensed-billing" is used in the typewriter industry to refer to an
    operation wherein one record-medium (e.g., a bill or financial statement)
    contains information (e.g., an address) and a second record-medium is to
    contain only a summary of the information.  The line-spacing mechanism of
    this and indented subclasses facilitates the production of the
    condensed-billing record.


CLS 400/547
TXT Including stop structure (e.g., traveling stop, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 546 wherein the incremental rotation of the
    platen* is regulated by the contact of one movable abutment with another
    stationary abutment, one of said abutments being on or connected to the
    platen and the other of said abutments being on or connected to the
    typewriter frame, whereby the platen rotation is positively halted by such
    contact.


CLS 400/547.1
TXT For arresting platen at limit of both retrograde and advance movement:

    Subject matter under subclass 547 wherein the incremental rotation of the
    platen* in a direction that causes record-medium* movement in a line-space*
    direction is halted by contact of a movable and a stationary abutment, and
    wherein platen rotation in an opposite direction is also halted by contact
    of a movable and a stationary abutment.

    (1)     Note.  Rotation of the platen in either direction may be stopped by
    the same or different abutments.


CLS 400/547.2
TXT By stop travelling in a rectilinear path:

    Subject matter under subclass 547.1 wherein the movable abutment is
    displaced along a straight line.


CLS 400/547.3
TXT By lever or push-rod drive for platen:

    Subject matter under subclass 547.1 wherein the rotation of the platen* in
    both of said directions is caused by a movable arm that is moved to-and-fro
    with reciprocatory or oscillatory movement, the movement of the arm in both
    directions being limited by contact of said abutments to correspond the arm
    movement to a desired degree of rotation of the platen in either direction.


CLS 400/547.4
TXT Via gear drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 547.3 wherein the movable arm is connected to
    the platen* by way of intermeshed coacting rotatable toothed members.


CLS 400/547.5
TXT Including lever on axis transverse to platen axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 547.4 wherein the platen* rotates about a
    first axis that extends lengthwise thereof, and wherein said movable arm
    oscillates about a second axis that extends at right angles to said first
    axis.


CLS 400/547.6
TXT Including relatively adjustable coaxial gear segments:

    Subject matter under subclass 547.4 wherein the connection of the movable
    arm to the platen* includes a rotatable toothed wheel coacting with an
    assemblage of toothed members, which assemblage comprises a plurality of
    toothed elements, each element being an arcuate portion of a toothed wheel,
    the elements being disposed side by side to rotate about a common axis and
    being repositionable one with respect to the other(s) about the common axis
    so as to vary the peripheral extent of the teeth of the assemblage that
    coacts with the rotatable toothed wheel, whereby the number of teeth of the
    assemblage that is in mesh with the toothed wheel may be varied to vary the
    platen rotation.


CLS 400/547.7
TXT Via pawl and ratchet wheel drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 547.3 wherein the movable arm is connected to
    the platen* by way of a pawl* joined to the movable arm and a ratchet* in
    the form of a disc joined to the platen.


CLS 400/547.8
TXT With spring motor:

    Subject matter under subclass 547.7 wherein said ratchet* is joined to the
    platen* by way of a resilient component, a portion of which component is
    moved to tension the component, and another portion of which component is
    moved by the tension in the component to rotate the platen.

    (1)     Note.  The spring motor of this subclass may be used to rotate the
    platen in a direction to feed the record-medium* (i.e., move it in
    line-space* direction) or to retract the record-medium (i.e., move it in a
    direction opposite to line-space direction).


CLS 400/548
TXT With graduated scale (e.g., on drum periphery):

    Subject matter under subclass 546 wherein the typewriter is provided with a
    device that facilitates the positioning of the condensed-billing*
    record-medium*, which device includes a measuring instrument calibrated in
    units that indicate the extent to which the platen* should be rotated in
    either direction of its rotation to correspond to the desired location of
    said record-medium.

    (1)     Note.  The measuring instrument (i.e., scale) may be on the
    circumference of a circular member or drum.


CLS 400/549
TXT Actuated by key on key-board:

    Subject matter under subclass 545 wherein the typewriter is provided with
    mechanism to effect incremental rotation of the platen* in response to a
    depression of a key* on the key-board* of the typewriter.

    (1)     Note.  In most typewriters having a key-operated line-space*
    mechanism the power to effect the line-spacing is electrical power from an
    external source.  A non-electric or manual typewriter is usually provided
    with a line-space lever that is powered by the hand of the typist.


CLS 400/550
TXT For multi-incremental rotation (e.g., "platen sweep"):

    Subject matter under subclass 545 wherein the typewriter is provided with
    mechanism to effect a plurality of increments of rotation greater than
    three such increments in one stroke of an actuating lever.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for mechanism to facilitate rapid
    line-spacing* and is often termed "platen* sweep" in the typewriter
    industry.  It is used, for example, to feed a record-medium* piece into
    position for typing the first print-line* thereon after insertion of the
    piece into the typewriter, or for spacing a greater than usual distance
    between the last print-line of one paragraph and the first print-line of a
    succeeding paragraph.  The number of platen-sweep increments are usually
    variable within a range or, for example, four increments to about 18
    increments or more.


CLS 400/551
TXT For line-spacing in forward or reverse direction:

    Subject matter under subclass 545 wherein the typewriter is provided with
    mechanism for effecting line-space* distances to a piece of record-medium*
    in the usual direction of record-medium feed or in a direction opposite to
    said usual direction.


CLS 400/552
TXT With "floating" platen:

    Subject matter under subclass 545 wherein the typewriter is provided with a
    platen* that is supported in its typing position solely by
    platen-supporting rollers underlying the platen, and wherein incremental
    rotation of the platen is effected by incrementally rotating said
    platen-supporting rollers that are in frictional contact with the platen.

    (1)     Note.  This form of platen support does not require bearings and
    carriage* structure to support the ends of the platen, thereby making it
    possible to type on a record-medium* piece that is wider than the length of
    the platen. For feeding of such a piece, see subclass 623.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    623,    and see (1) Note above.


CLS 400/553
TXT Via line-space/carriage-feed-release actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 545 wherein significance is attributed to
    structure on the typewriter that performs the following operations
    substantially concurrently:  (a) the platen* is caused to be turned through
    one or more increments, and (b) the carriage* is enabled to be moved in a
    carriage-return direction opposite to the character-space* direction, and
    (c) the structure that normally engages a portion of the carriage to move
    the carriage in the character-space direction is temporarily disengaged,
    whereby the carriage-return movement is made relatively quiet.

    (1)     Note.  In the typewriter of this subclass the structure is directed
    to means for line-spacing* which also, by some connection to the carriage
    feed, effects release of the carriage feed for purposes as stated in the
    definition.  For structure to cause carriage feed release, see subclasses
    334+ above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334+,   and see (1) Note above.


CLS 400/554
TXT For facilitating even wear of platen surface (e.g., by irregular
    increments, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 545 wherein significance is attributed to the
    movement or adjustment of a platen* for the prevention of damage or
    deterioration to the platen by reason of the repeated impacting of
    type-face* elements on the same locations on the surface of the platen.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the disclosures of this subclass include mechanisms
    for irregular line-spacing* to insure that successive print-line* rows will
    not be impacted against the same longitudinal paths of the platen, thus the
    longitudinal depressions in the surface of the platen that would otherwise
    be formed are distributed over the entire surface of the platen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    555+,   for structure to adjust the platen for irregular increments.


CLS 400/555
TXT By irregular increments of platen rotation (e.g., for adjustment of platen
    relative to its actuator, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 545 wherein the typewriter is provided with a
    first mechanism for effecting normal increments of platen* rotation that
    correspond to normal line-space* distances for the feeding of
    record-medium* between successive print-line* rows, and wherein
    significance is attributed to a second mechanism that effects or enables
    rotation of the platen in other than normal increments that correspond to
    other than normal line-space distances for irregular feeding of
    record-medium.

    (1)     Note.  The irregular platen rotation increment may enable
    imprinting of successive print-lines that are spaced apart by distances
    that are greater than or less than normal line-space distances, or may
    enable imprint of subscript or superscript character* symbols.


CLS 400/556
TXT Including disconnecting ratchet wheel from platen (e.g., declutching
    ratchet, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 555 wherein said first mechanism for
    effecting normal increments of platen* rotation includes a ratchet* in the
    form of a disc or wheel that is joined to or engaged with the platen, and
    wherein said second mechanism for effecting other than normal increments
    unjoins or disengages the ratchet from the platen, thereby enabling
    rotation of the platen relative to its ratchet.


CLS 400/556.1
TXT Via relatively displaceable pin and slot members:

    Subject matter under subclass 556 wherein the ratchet* wheel and the
    platen* (i.e., the two components referred to below in this definition) are
    normally joined or engaged by way of at least one projection on one of said
    components that interfits with at least one aperture on the other of said
    components, and wherein the unjoining or disengaging occurs by moving the
    projection to disengage it from the aperture.


CLS 400/556.2
TXT Via toothed ring and locking member(s):

    Subject matter under subclass 556 wherein the ratchet* wheel and the
    platen* (i.e., the two components referred to below in this definition) are
    normally joined or engaged by way of a first member on one of said
    components and a second member on the other of said components, which first
    member has notches extending along an arc and which second member is a
    projection that interfits with one of the notches in the first member, and
    wherein the unjoining or disengaging occurs by moving the two said members
    apart.


CLS 400/556.3
TXT Including pivotable locking member(s):

    Subject matter under subclass 556.2 wherein said second member (i.e., the
    projection) is mounted to swing to-and-fro about an axis, thus enabling the
    projection to move in an arc of a circle.


CLS 400/556.4
TXT Including radially displaceable locking member(s):

    Subject matter under subclass 556.2 wherein said second member (i.e., the
    projection) is mounted to move along a line that is a radius of the arc
    along which the notches of said first member extend.


CLS 400/557
TXT Via ball or roller clutching member(s):

    Subject matter under subclass 556 wherein the ratchet* wheel and the
    platen* (i.e., the two components referred to below in this definition) are
    normally joined or engaged by way of a spherical or cylindrical member, the
    surface of which member frictionally engages a surface of each of said two
    components, and wherein the unjoining or disengaging occurs by moving the
    surface of the member away from a surface of either or both components.


CLS 400/558
TXT Via binding jaws gripping annular flange between jaws:

    Subject matter under subclass 556 wherein the ratchet* wheel and the
    platen* (i.e., the two components referred to below in this definition) are
    normally joined or engaged by way of a first member which is on one of said
    components and is a radially projecting rim or ring having parallel radial
    faces on opposite sides of the rim, and a second member which is on the
    other of said components and includes two parts that straddle the rim of
    the first member, the two parts of the second member being movable toward
    each other with the rim therebetween to frictionally engage the radial
    faces of the first member, and wherein the unjoining or disengaging occurs
    by moving the parts of the second member away from each other and the
    corresponding radial faces of the first member.


CLS 400/559
TXT Via friction plate members engageable by axial displacement (e.g., pressure
    plate, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 556 wherein the ratchet* wheel and the
    platen* (i.e., the two components referred to below in this definition) are
    normally joined or engaged by way of a first member connected to one of the
    components and a second member connected to the other of the components,
    both of which components and both of which members are rotatable on a
    common axis, and wherein said members are positioned one relative to the
    other so that a substantially radial surface of one member faces a
    substantially radial surface of the other member and one member is movable
    relative to the other along the common axis, whereby movement of one member
    toward the other into nonslidable contact with the other effects joining or
    engagement of the members and of the components connected thereto for
    normal incremental rotation of the platen by the ratchet*, and movement of
    one member away from the other effects unjoining or disengagement of the
    members.


CLS 400/559.1
TXT Friction members have cooperating conical surfaces:

    Subject matter under subclass 559 wherein the substantially radial surface
    of each of said members is modified so that the surface of one member is
    like the exterior surface of a cone and the surface of the other member is
    like the interior surface of a cone, the facing surfaces of the members
    corresponding one to the other.


CLS 400/560
TXT Via frictional engagement of periphery of cylindrical member:

    Subject matter under subclass 556 wherein the ratchet* wheel and the
    platen* (i.e., the two components referred to below in this definition) are
    normally joined or engaged by way of a first member connected to one of the
    components and a second member connected to the other of the components,
    which first member has a cylindrical circumferential surface and which
    second member has a surface that is movable toward the circumferential
    surface to be in nonslidable contact therewith for normal incremental
    rotation of the platen, and wherein the second member is movable away from
    the circumferential surface for unjoining or disengaging the members.


CLS 400/560.1
TXT Friction member(s) acting on inner periphery of drum:

    Subject matter under subclass 560 wherein said first member is hollow and
    has an interior circumferential surface and said second member contacts
    said interior surface for joining or engaging the components or moves away
    from the interior surface for unjoining or disengaging the components.


CLS 400/560.2
TXT Pivotable member(s):

    Subject matter under subclass 560.1 wherein said second member is movable
    toward and away from the interior surface in a path that is an arc of a
    circle about an axis, the axis being a fixed or movable axis.


CLS 400/561
TXT Expandable band or split ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 560.1 wherein said second member is a
    circular or coiled element having a periphery that may be enlarged to
    conform to or mate with the interior surface of said first member to make
    nonslidable contact therewith, or may be diminished to unjoin or disengage
    the members.


CLS 400/562
TXT Including settable stops:

    Subject matter under subclass 555 wherein said second mechanism includes
    means for rotating the platen* and two or more abutments, a first of which
    abutments is stationary relative to the platen and a second of which
    abutments is connected to the platen so that as the platen rotates the
    second abutment will move toward the first abutment until contact of the
    abutments is made and platen rotation will cease, and wherein the distance
    between the abutments prior to platen rotation may be varied.


CLS 400/563
TXT Including plural detents selectively engageable with ratchet wheel:

    Subject matter under subclass 555 wherein said first mechanism includes a
    first ratchet* in the form of a disc or wheel having teeth protruding from
    a peripheral edge thereof and notches between the teeth, and also includes
    a first arm having a protrusion that meshes with one of the notches in the
    ratchet disc to restrain rotation of the disc, and wherein said second
    mechanism includes a second arm having a protrusion that meshes either with
    notches in the first ratchet disc or with notches in a second ratchet disc,
    and wherein the first arm is used for normal incremental rotation of the
    platen* or the second arm is used for other than normal rotation of the
    platen.

    (1)     Note.  In the device defined above, if one ratchet wheel is used
    with two detents that are alternately engaged with the ratchet wheel, the
    space between the detents in the circumferential dimension of the ratchet
    wheel is such as to provide irregular increments of detented ratchet-wheel
    position.  If two ratchet wheels are used with two detents, one of the
    ratchet wheels is provided with teeth having a circumferential spacing
    different from the other, and one detent is used with one of the ratchet
    wheels for normal incremental rotation, and the other detent is used with
    the other ratchet wheel for other than normal incremental rotation.


CLS 400/564
TXT Including a drive member engageable with line-space ratchet wheel:

    Subject matter under subclass 555 wherein said first mechanism for
    effecting normal increments of platen* rotation includes a ratchet* disc
    having teeth and notches on the peripheral edge thereof and being connected
    to the platen, a first pawl* that engages in one of the notches between the
    teeth and moves to rotate the platen incrementally, and a detent (i.e., an
    arm having a protrusion that meshes with one of the notches to restrain
    rotation at the incremental position), and wherein said second mechanism
    for effecting other than normal increments includes either (a) a second
    pawl that engages in one of the notches of the ratchet and moves to rotate
    the platen to the extent of a partial increment, or (b) and additional
    means to move said first pawl to the extent of a partial increment.


CLS 400/564.1
TXT Via displaceable detent:

    Subject matter under subclass 564 wherein said second mechanism includes
    means to move said detent (i.e., of said first mechanism) while it is in
    mesh with one of the notches of said ratchet* disc in an arcuate path to
    the extent of a partial increment, thereby rotating the platen* to a
    similar extent.


CLS 400/565
TXT Detent-release structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 555 wherein said first mechanism for
    effecting normal increments of platen* rotation includes a ratchet* disc
    having teeth and notches on the peripheral edge thereof and being connected
    to the platen, a pawl* that engages in one of the notches between the teeth
    and moves to rotate the platen incrementally, and a detent (i.e., and arm
    having a protrusion that meshes with one of the notches to restrain
    rotation at the incremental position), and wherein said second mechanism
    includes means for moving the protrusion of said detent out of mesh with
    any of the notches, and wherein significance is attributed to structure
    that effects or enables the movement of the detent.


CLS 400/566
TXT With friction brake for platen:

    Subject matter under subclass 565 wherein said second mechanism also
    includes means for restraining rotation of the platen* while the detent is
    out of mesh with the notches of the ratchet* disc, which means includes a
    first surface on or connected to the platen and a second surface
    nonrotatably associated with the platen and relatively movable into
    nonslidable contact with the first surface to prevent platen rotation.


CLS 400/566.1
TXT With simultaneous disengagement of drive pawl:

    Subject matter under subclass 565 wherein said second mechanism also
    includes means to move said pawl* (i.e., of said first mechanism) out of
    contact or engagement with any of the notches of the ratchet* disc at the
    same time that said detent (i.e., of said first mechanism) is out of mesh
    with any of the notches in the ratchet disc.


CLS 400/567
TXT Including gear (e.g., differential gear, etc.) structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 555 wherein said second mechanism includes at
    least two intermeshing and coacting toothed members that connect said first
    mechanism with the platen*.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the gear drive, for example, a differential drive or
    a planetary gear arrangement, is used to connect the platen ratchet* wheel
    and the platen so as to provide for adjustment of the platen relative to
    the ratchet wheel.


CLS 400/568
TXT By electric-power drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 545 wherein the incremental rotation (i.e.,
    step-by-step turning) of the platen* is accomplished with the help of force
    derived from electrical energy.

    (1)     Note.  The forms of electrical power used include:  an
    electromagnet, a stepping motor (i.e, an electric motor operated
    incrementally), a rotating electric motor, etc., the named devices being
    only exemplary of those that may be used.


CLS 400/569
TXT By gear train (e.g., including a clutch):

    Subject matter under subclass 545 wherein the incremental rotation of the
    platen* is accomplished by way of a plurality of toothed members, the teeth
    of which members intermesh to cause movement of one member when another
    member is moved, one of said members being connected to the platen.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are disclosures in which a
    differential gear train or a planetary gear train is used, or in which a
    clutch device is used to connect a gear train to the platen.


CLS 400/570
TXT By double-cam drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 545 wherein the incremental rotation of the
    platen* is accomplished by way of an element or an assemblage of elements,
    which element or assemblage is moved to-and-fro by two cam surfaces that
    act together on the same rotating member, and which element or assemblage
    is connected to the platen.

    (1)     Note.  A "cam surface" is defined as the edge periphery of a disc
    that rotates about an axis, the radial distance from the axis to the
    periphery varying around the periphery.  As the disc rotates, the distance
    of a follower that is in contact with the periphery will increase and
    decrease relative to the axis of the disc, thus the rotation of the disc
    will substantially effect radial movement of the follower.  The cam
    surfaces may be on separate disc elements or may be on a single member
    having separate cam surfaces.


CLS 400/571
TXT By friction drive (e.g., including regulation of increments):

    Subject matter under subclass 545 wherein the incremental rotation of the
    platen* is accomplished by way of two members, each member having a surface
    in nonsliding contact with the other, one of which members is connected to
    the platen and the other of which members is connected to an actuator that
    is moved when platen rotation is desired.

    (1)     Note.  In some typewriters of this subclass a predetermined extent
    of movement of the actuator effects a predetermined number of degrees of
    rotation of the platen, which number of degrees comprises a predetermined
    number of steps or increments of platen rotation, and the number of such
    steps effected by any movement of the actuator may be changed from one
    predetermined number of steps to a different predetermined number of steps,
    whereby a change may be made in the number of degrees of platen rotation
    that is accomplished by an extent of actuator movement.  The change may be
    accomplished by changing the amount of actuator movement, or by changing
    the range of actuator movement over which the actuator is effective to
    cause platen rotation.


CLS 400/572
TXT By pawl and ratchet wheel drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 545 wherein the incremental rotation of the
    platen* is accomplished by way of a ratchet* disc connected to the platen
    that is intermittently rotated step-by-step by a pawl* that is moved by an
    actuator when platen rotation is desired.


CLS 400/573
TXT Including rectilinearly movable pawl:

    Subject matter under subclass 572 wherein the pawl* is moved to-and-fro by
    an actuator along a straight line to contact and rotate the ratchet*
    incrementally.


CLS 400/573.1
TXT And resilient drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 573 wherein the actuator is connected to the
    pawl* or to the ratchet* by way of a yieldable connection that enables a
    different extent of actuator movement than is imparted to the pawl by the
    actuator.


CLS 400/574
TXT Including pawl carrier coaxial with ratchet wheel:

    Subject matter under subclass 572 wherein the platen* is incrementally
    rotated about an axis that extends lengthwise of the platen, and the
    ratchet* disc is connected to the platen to rotate about the same axis, and
    wherein said actuator effects to-and-fro oscillation of a member about said
    axis, said pawl* being mounted on said member for corresponding oscillation
    of the pawl so that the pawl engages a notch of the ratchet disc at a first
    location relative to the typewriter and moves the ratchet and the platen
    through a first predetermined number of degrees of platen rotation.


CLS 400/574.1
TXT And means to regulate pawl engagement or drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 574 wherein a predetermined extent of
    movement of the actuator effects a predetermined extent of movement of said
    member and the pawl* mounted thereon to move the ratchet* disc and the
    platen* connected thereto through a first predetermined number of degrees
    of platen rotation that correspond to a first predetermined number of steps
    of platen incremental movement, and wherein the number of steps effected by
    a movement of the actuator may be changed by changing the location at which
    said pawl engages a notch of said ratchet disc to a second location
    relative to the typewriter so that a second predetermined number of degrees
    of rotation of the platen will be caused, that will correspond to a second
    predetermined number of steps of platen incremental movement.


CLS 400/575
TXT Including means to regulate pawl engagement or drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 572 wherein a predetermined extent of
    movement of the actuator effects movement of the pawl* to engage a notch in
    the ratchet* disc at a first location relative to the typewriter and moves
    the ratchet and the platen* through a first predetermined number of degrees
    of platen rotation that correspond to a first predetermined number of steps
    of platen incremental movement, and wherein the number of steps effected by
    movement of the actuator may be changed so that a second predetermined
    number of degrees of platen rotation will be caused that will correspond to
    a second predetermined number of steps of platen incremental movement.


CLS 400/575.1
TXT By movable ratchet-wheel shield:

    Subject matter under subclass 575 wherein the change in the number of steps
    effected by movement of the actuator is caused by an element having a
    surface with which the pawl* or a portion connected thereto is in contact
    until the pawl is moved to said first location, which element is movable so
    that the pawl is in contact with the surface until the pawl is moved to a
    second location, at which second location the pawl will engage a notch in
    the ratchet* disc to effect a second predetermined number of steps of
    platen incremental movement.


CLS 400/575.2
TXT By stop adjustable to limit movement of actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 575 wherein the extent of movement of the
    actuator is predetermined by an abutment that is contacted by the actuator
    at the end of its movement, and wherein the change in the number of steps
    effected by movement of the actuator is caused by changing the position of
    the abutment relative to the actuator.


CLS 400/576
TXT Via foldable line-space actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 545 wherein significance is attributed to an
    actuator for effecting the step-by-step increments of platen* rotation,
    which actuator includes an elongated bar that is moved by the hand of a
    typist when incremental platen rotation is desired, the bar being formed of
    at least two pieces hinged together so that the bar may be extended to the
    length of the pieces or may be doubled, one alongside another, to occupy a
    lesser length, or the bar being hinged at its mounting so that the bar may
    be placed into operative position or placed into an inoperative position
    where it may be stored in a compact relationship with the typewriter.


CLS 400/577
TXT With means to prevent reverse rotation or ensure full increment (e.g., for
    "backlash" prevention):

    Subject matter under subclass 545 wherein the platen* normally rotates
    incrementally in a first direction, and wherein significance is attributed
    to a device that stops the platen from rotating in a direction opposite to
    said first direction, or wherein significance is attributed to a means for
    making sure that each step of platen rotation is a complete step.


CLS 400/578
TXT SHEET OR WEB (E.G., RECORD-MEDIUM) FEEDING MECHANISM:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein significance is
    attributed to movement of a record-medium* relative to a typewriter, which
    relative movement is necessary for typing a print-line* and occurs in a
    direction generally coinciding with the direction in which line-space*
    movement occurs, or wherein significance is attributed to structure which
    facilitates, or contributes to, or enables said record- medium movement.

    (1)     Note.  For a discussion of the difference between line-space
    movement and record-medium movement, see the definition of line-space in
    the Glossary, section III, and for a discussion of the difference between a
    sheet and a web, see the definition of record-medium, also in the Glossary.

    (2)     Note.  This and indented subclasses relate to the feeding of a
    sheet or web from a supply to the typewriter, or to the movement within the
    typewriter for line-space or similar purposes, or to the delivery of a
    sheet or web from the typewriter to a receiver of the sheet or web.  To be
    properly placed as an original patent into this or the indented subclasses,
    the claimed disclosure of such patent should describe the typewriter by
    more than its name.

    (3)     Note.  Typewriters of this subclass include such structures as:  a
    stationary sheet table or apron*, a conformation that prevents a sheet
    having an irregularity or hole thereon from being torn at the hole as the
    sheet moves through the typewriter, or a typewriter with plural stationary
    tables or an auxiliary support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for feeding of web material.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, appropriate subclasses for feeding or
    delivering of sheet material.


CLS 400/579
TXT Including skew correction responsive to position of sheet or web:

    Subject matter under subclass 578 wherein a piece of record-medium* is
    intended to be moved in a direction parallel to one of the side edges of
    the piece, the movement being caused by a record-medium feed means, and
    wherein the action of said feed means is regulated so that if there is a
    tendency for the record-medium to move sidewise or other than in the
    intended direction, the feed means will be adjusted to overcome the
    tendency, the adjustment being made as a result of a sensing of the
    tendency toward sidewise movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    619+,   for a means for positioning the side edge of a web.


CLS 400/580
TXT Including forming indicia on record-medium during typing to find next line
    to be typed:

    Subject matter under subclass 578 wherein significance is attributed to (a)
    the imprinting or formation of a mark on the record-medium* while a
    print-line* is being typed thereon, and (b) the use of said mark during a
    subsequent reinsertion of the record-medium into the typewriter, the mark
    effecting the stopping of the feed of the reinserted record-medium in a
    position proper for the imprinting of a new print-line.

    (1)     Note.  In the typewriter of this and indented subclasses, a typist
    will usually type one print-line of text, remove the record-medium from the
    typewriter, and then will reinsert the record-medium to continue the typing
    of one (or more) print-lines.  Each occasion for removal and reinsertion of
    the record-medium will be reason to imprint or form a mark which will
    subsequently be used to stop the feed of the record-medium when the
    record-medium has been fed to the position where a new print-line is to be
    typed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    583.3,  for a programmed-control-system* wherein indicia on the
    record-medium are part of the program to control the feeding of the
    record-medium.


CLS 400/581
TXT To find last-produced slit or hole or notch in sheet:

    Subject matter under subclass 580 wherein the record-medium* is in sheet
    form and said mark on the sheet is formed thereon by (a) piercing the sheet
    without removing material therefrom, or by (b) perforating the sheet
    through both opposite surfaces thereof, or by (c) cutting out a portion of
    the edge of the sheet, and wherein any of the marks described is made
    concurrently with the typing of the print-line* that is to be used as a
    reference location of a new print-line that the typist wishes to type.


CLS 400/582
TXT Including programmed-control-system for record-medium feed (e.g., on
    auxiliary record):

    Subject matter under subclass 578 wherein a programmed-control-system* is
    used for giving instructions to which the typewriter responds in moving a
    record-medium* in a direction coinciding with the direction in which
    line-space* movement occurs.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the record-medium is in the form of a sheet
    of determinate length and width.


CLS 400/583
TXT For web record-medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 582 wherein the record-medium* is a piece of
    material having indeterminate length.


CLS 400/583.1
TXT Program on auxiliary-record tape:

    Subject matter under subclass 583 wherein the instructions are on an
    elongated, relatively narrow strip of material that is supplementary to the
    record-medium*.


CLS 400/583.2
TXT Program is indicia on rotatable disc or drum:

    Subject matter under subclass 583 wherein the instructions are markings or
    openings or projections in or on a platelike or cylindrical member that
    turns about its own axis.

    (1)     Note.  The markings or indicia may be magnetically or electrically
    conductive strips applied to the plate or cylinder in a particular pattern,
    or may be openings arranged to pass light to a photocell in a particular
    pattern.


CLS 400/583.3
TXT Program is indicia on record-medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 583 wherein the instructions are markings or
    openings on the record-medium* itself.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    580+,   for a typewriter wherein markings on the record-medium control feed
    of the record-medium to the next print-line* to be typed.


CLS 400/583.4
TXT Including plural speed record-medium feed:

    Subject matter under subclass 583 wherein provision is made for moving the
    record-medium* at one velocity or at a different velocity.


CLS 400/584
TXT Including feed of plural record-media arranged side-by-side (e.g., fed
    independently of platen):

    Subject matter under subclass 578 wherein movement of at least two
    record-medium* pieces occurs, and wherein the pieces are placed so that a
    side edge of one piece is adjacent to an opposite side edge of another
    piece, or wherein one of the record-medium pieces is moved by structure
    other than the platen*.

    (1)     Note.  In many typewriters the record-medium material is partially
    wrapped around a cylindrical platen so it does not lie in a plane, but the
    arrangement of the sheets in the patents of this and indented subclasses is
    such that if the record-medium material did lie in a plane, the plural
    pieces would lie in the same plane to be side by side.

    (2)     Note.  In some typewriters a platen effects line-space* movement of
    one of the record-medium pieces and a feed-roller* couple that is spaced
    from the platen along the line of movement effects line-space movement of
    the other record-medium piece.


CLS 400/585
TXT By divided platen:

    Subject matter under subclass 584 wherein the typewriter is provided with
    at least two platen* elements for supporting or backing a corresponding
    number of record-medium* pieces, which platen elements are coaxial one with
    the other(s).

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the platens are coaxial but mounted on the
    same typewriter carriage* so that two pieces or record-medium may be
    independently moved in the same typewriter.  See the patents of subclass 82
    above for a typewriter having two or more separate and independently
    mounted platens.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     and see (1) Note above.


CLS 400/585.1
TXT With positive clutch for simultaneous rotation of platen sections:

    Subject matter under subclass 585 wherein the plurality of platen* elements
    are connected one with the other(s) by means that enables one to be
    disconnected from the other(s) or enables one to be connected to the
    other(s) whereby all the elements may turn at the same time.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also provides for a typewriter wherein the
    plural platen sections may be turned at different rotational speeds.


CLS 400/586
TXT Including feed of tally strip record-medium (e.g., plural tally strips):

    Subject matter under subclass 578 wherein significance is attributed to the
    movement of a tally strip relative to the typewriter.

    (1)     Note.  The term "tally strip" is a typewriter industry or "art"
    term for an elongated, relatively narrow piece of record-medium* that is
    used in a typewriter in addition to the record-medium ordinarily used.  The
    tally strip is fed separately from the ordinary record-medium and is used
    to record thereon a summation of information.  On a tally strip information
    that can be recorded includes for example, the sum of a column of numbers,
    a number representing the total items shipped during a particular day, a
    listing of bills of lading for a particular period of time, words
    identifying a particular document, and similar subject matter summarizing
    activities recorded by a typist using the typewriter.  Due to the
    dimensions of a tally strip, it is handled in a typewriter (often an
    accounting machine) in a manner that is different from the way ordinary
    record-medium is handled.  Disclosures for this and indented subclasses are
    distinguished in that the handling of one or more tally strips is
    significant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for a flat-platen* typewriter for typing on a tally strip.


CLS 400/587
TXT And feed of endless transfer-medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 586 wherein a transfer-medium* is also moved
    relative to the typewriter, which transfer-medium is in the form of a
    closed-loop band, and is for use with a tally strip.


CLS 400/588
TXT On plural-platen (e.g., divided platen) typewriter:

    Subject matter under subclass 586 wherein the typewriter is provided with
    at least two platen* elements.

    (1)     Note.  The plural platens may be in the form of a divided platen
    for side by side record media as in subclass 585 above, or may be separate
    platens.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    585+,   and see (1) Note above.


CLS 400/589
TXT With locking or interlocking mechanism (e.g., line lock, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 586 wherein a typewriter is provided with
    locking mechanism or with interlocking mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  The terms "locking" mechanism and "interlocking" mechanism
    are defined and discussed in the definition and notes of subclass 663 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    663+,   for other locking or interlocking mechanism.


CLS 400/590
TXT Including feed varied for amount of tally strip on spool:

    Subject matter under subclass 586 wherein the tally strip is an elongated
    tape wound onto a reel and wherein the distance that the tally strip is
    moved for feeding thereof is dependent upon the diameter of the wound reel
    of tally strip.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the feed of the tally strip is adjusted in
    accordance with the change in diameter of the tally-strip spool so that the
    line-space* distances between print-lines* on the tally strip will remain
    constant.


CLS 400/591
TXT Including tally-strip feed transverse to feed of main record-medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 586 wherein the direction of movement of the
    tally strip is in a direction that is perpendicular to the direction of
    movement of the primary-record-medium* in the typewriter.


CLS 400/592
TXT Including feed independent of platen:

    Subject matter under subclass 586 wherein the movement of the tally strip
    relative to the typewriter is effected by a mechanism other than the
    platen* of the typewriter.


CLS 400/593
TXT With cutting or spring tensioning of tally strip:

    Subject matter under subclass 586 wherein the typewriter is provided with
    means for severing a portion of the tally strip from the supply of tally
    strip, or wherein the tally strip is tautened during its movement by a
    yieldable element contacting the tally strip, or wherein the tally strip is
    wound on a supply spool or a takeup spool and the tally strip is tautened
    by a yieldable element cooperating with either of said spools.


CLS 400/594
TXT Including structure or mounting or adjustment of tally-strip roll:

    Subject matter under subclass 586 wherein significance is attributed to a
    wound reel of tally-strip material, or to a support for a wound reel of
    tally-strip material, or wherein the typewriter is provided with a
    carriage* that supports a platen*, and wherein the support for the wound
    reel of tally-strip material is carried by the typewriter or by a
    typewriter portion other than the carriage, or wherein the support for the
    wound reel of tally-strip material is provided with means for varying the
    position of the wound reel relative to the typewriter.


CLS 400/594.1
TXT And roll for transfer-medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 594 wherein the typewriter is also provided
    with a wound reel of transfer-medium* material and a support for the wound
    reel of tally-strip material.


CLS 400/595
TXT Including insertion of sheet from front of platen (e.g., for
    "condensed-billing", via sheet guide, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 578 wherein movement of a record-medium*
    sheet occurs, and wherein a sheet is fed into the typewriter by guiding the
    leading edge of a sheet directly between the platen* and the print-point*
    via structure that is positioned between the platen and the typist.

    (1)     Note.  This mode of inserting the sheet is usually for the purpose
    of facilitating a condensed-billing*-typing operation.

    (2)     Note.  In some typewriters insertion via the front of the platen is
    facilitated by moving the platen rearwardly to form a larger throat.
    Subclass 649, which relates to platen movement, should be considered.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    515,    for insertion of "carbon paper" from front of platen.


CLS 400/596
TXT Including feed responsive to presence of sheet:

    Subject matter under subclass 595 wherein the movement of the
    record-medium* sheet occurs as a result of inserting the sheet into the
    typewriter to a predetermined point in the typewriter.

    (1)     Note.  The insertion of the sheet is usually manual, by the typist
    manually guiding the sheet to the platen*, and the feed of the sheet
    subsequent to insertion thereof is usually typewriter actuated, by a
    motorized mechanism that is responsive to a control initiated by the sheet
    insertion.


CLS 400/597
TXT With subsequent line-spacing independent of platen:

    Subject matter under subclass 595 wherein movement of a record-medium*
    sheet occurs in a line-space* direction, said movement being caused by
    mechanism other than the platen* of the typewriter.


CLS 400/598
TXT With digitally selected, typewriter-actuated feed to selected line to be
    typed (e.g., via "dialing disc", etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 595 wherein the typewriter is provided with a
    mechanism that causes movement of the record-medium* sheet for any of a
    plurality of determinate distances to a determinate position relative to
    the typewriter, the position being that at which the typist desires to
    imprint a print-line*, which mechanism includes a movable component (or
    components) bearing indicia thereon representing said distances, which
    component is moved by the typist in accordance with the desired distance,
    the movement of the component effecting the movement of the sheet to the
    determinate position.

    (1)     Note.  The component is similar to a telephone dial in appearance,
    and is moved in a similar manner (i.e., by the typist's finger) to cause
    the typewriter to move the sheet.


CLS 400/599
TXT Insertion of sheet relative to other record-medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 595 wherein said record-medium* sheet is fed
    into the typewriter and into relationship with another record-medium.


CLS 400/599.1
TXT With sheet associating attachment (e.g., collating-table, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 599 wherein a support fixed to the typewriter
    is used to bring the record-medium* sheet into relationship with the other
    record-medium.

    (1)     Note.  A collating-table* is usually the device that facilitates
    the association of the two record-medium pieces.


CLS 400/600
TXT Via feed throat having gate (e.g. actuated by power, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 595 wherein a record-medium* sheet is led
    into the typewriter by way of a passageway that includes a movable barrier,
    which barrier may be positioned so that it prevents movement of the sheet
    or may be positioned so that it enables movement of the sheet into the
    typewriter.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the "gate" is opened and closed by a
    power-actuated means.


CLS 400/600.1
TXT With platen repositioned for sheet insertion:

    Subject matter under subclass 600 wherein the platen* of the typewriter is
    movable to a position at which it enables movement of the record-medium*
    sheet into contact with the platen.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the platen together with a feed-roller*
    effectively form a "gate" in the feed throat that prevents insertion of the
    record-medium when the platen and feed-roller are engaged.  In this
    condition the leading edge of the record-medium is stopped at the platen.
    The repositioning of the platen away from the feed-roller effectively opens
    the gate so that the record-medium can be fully inserted into the throat,
    usually until the leading edge of the record-medium engages a stop.  The
    throat is then closed by moving the platen back into engagement with the
    feed-roller, the record-medium being located therebetween.  At this time
    the record medium is properly located relative to the intended print-line*
    and may be moved in line-space* direction by rotation of the platen and the
    feed-roller.


CLS 400/600.2
TXT With feed-roller repositioned for sheet insertion:

    Subject matter under subclass 600 wherein the platen* cooperates with a
    feed-roller* to feed a record-medium* sheet, which feed-roller is movable
    to a position at which it enables movement of the sheet into proper
    location relative to the platen.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the "gate" is opened by moving the
    feed-roller away from the platen.


CLS 400/600.3
TXT And sheet feed by additional feed-roller couple:

    Subject matter under subclass 600.2 wherein feed movement of a
    record-medium* sheet is assisted by a feed-roller*, cooperating with
    another feed roller, the two cooperating feed-rollers forming a roller
    couple that is added to the feed-roller of subclass 600.2.


CLS 400/600.4
TXT Coincident to pivoting of sheet guide:

    Subject matter under subclass 600.2 wherein a record-medium* sheet is led
    into the typewriter by way of a passageway that is movable in an arc, and
    wherein the movement of the passageway is concurrent with the movement of
    said feed-roller.

    (1)     Note.  The passageway (i.e., "sheet guide") of this subclass
    (600.4) may be separate from the passageway (i.e., "feed throat") of
    subclass 600 or may be an extension of the feed-throat passageway.


CLS 400/601
TXT With laterally movable sheet holder (e.g., having concurrent feed movement):

    Subject matter under subclass 595 wherein a record-medium* sheet is carried
    or supported for feeding movement by a guide member, which member is
    movable in a direction substantially perpendicular to the direction of
    sheet feed, or wherein the guide member is also movable with the sheet in a
    sheet-feeding direction, such movement occurring at the same time as the
    perpendicular movement.


CLS 400/602
TXT With sheet ejector:

    Subject matter under subclass 595 wherein the typewriter is also provided
    with means to remove a record-medium* sheet from the typewriter.


CLS 400/603
TXT Via chute(s) or feed-roller couple (e.g., plural chutes):

    Subject matter under subclass 595 wherein a record-medium* is led into the
    typewriter by way of a member that extends in the direction of sheet feed
    and at least partly surrounds the width and thickness dimensions of the
    sheet, or wherein feed movement of a record-medium sheet is caused by a
    feed-roller* cooperating with another feed-roller, the two cooperating
    feed-rollers forming a roller couple.

    (1)     Note.  Two or more of such members may be provided, or each of said
    members may have its position relative to the typewriter changed in a
    direction substantially perpendicular to the direction of sheet feed.

    (2)     Note.  The member (i.e., chute) may guide the leading edge of a
    record-medium* sheet to the rear of the platen* (i.e., a position relative
    to the platen that is diametrically opposite to the print-point* of the
    platen).


CLS 400/603.1
TXT Pivotable chute:

    Subject matter under subclass 603 wherein said member is mounted to be
    oscillatable in an arc.


CLS 400/604
TXT Attachment to typewriter for converting to condensed-billing operation:

    Subject matter under subclass 595 wherein significance is attributed to a
    structure that may be affixed to or removed from a typewriter, which
    structure enables the typewriter to be used for condensed-billing* if so
    desired by a typist.


CLS 400/605
TXT For feeding plural record-media concurrently or selectively:

    Subject matter under subclass 578 wherein significance is attributed to
    means associated with a typewriter for moving two or more record-medium*
    pieces, either all of the pieces at the same time or one of the pieces
    relative to the other(s) in a manner as desired by a typist or other
    operator.

    (1)     Note.  The record media to be moved may include, for example,
    plural webs, or plural sheets, or an assemblage of sheet and web material.
    Transfer-medium* (e.g., "carbon" paper) may also be included within the
    assemblage of material to be fed, but if significance is attributed to the
    function* of the transfer-medium, a search for disclosures thereof should
    include subclasses 497+.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass also includes a device for keeping one of the
    record-medium pieces separate from the other(s) as the pieces are fed
    through the typewriter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    497+,   for feeding of "manifold sets" and see (1) Note above.


CLS 400/606
TXT Plural webs superimposed and aligned to each other during typing:

    Subject matter under subclass 605 wherein two or more webs or
    record-medium* are positioned in a surface-to-surface relationship (i.e., a
    top surface of one web adjacent to a bottom surface of another web) and the
    webs are further positioned so that their corresponding side edges are
    located adjacent to one another or so that a particular indicium that
    occurs along the length dimension of one web is located adjacent to a
    corresponding indicium that occurs along the length dimension of another
    web that is in a surface-to-surface relationship therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for aligning and feeding of plural webs in a flat-platen*
    typewriter.


CLS 400/607
TXT Including movement of one record-medium relative to another:

    Subject matter under subclass 605 wherein significance is attributed to the
    movement of a sheet or web of record-medium* with respect to a second sheet
    or web of record-medium.


CLS 400/607.1
TXT In lateral direction (e.g., lateral shift of web or sheet carrier):

    Subject matter under subclass 607 wherein the movement of the sheet or web
    is in a direction substantially perpendicular to the line-space* direction
    in which feed occurs.

    (1)     Note.  The movement described above is usually for the purpose of
    aligning one sheet or web with respect to another.


CLS 400/607.2
TXT By insertion of additional record-medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 607 wherein one sheet or web of
    record-medium* is fed into the typewriter by guiding the leading edge of
    the sheet or web to a position relative to the platen* of the typewriter
    that is diametrically opposite to the print-point* of the platen.


CLS 400/607.3
TXT With concurrent feed-roller and line-spacing control:

    Subject matter under subclass 607 wherein the typewriter includes a
    feed-roller* cooperating with a platen* to feed two record-medium* pieces
    of material, one of which pieces is intended to remain in the typewriter
    while the other piece of material is removed, and wherein, to aid in the
    removal of the other piece, the feed-roller is moved out of cooperation
    with the platen (i.e., away from the platen) while at the same time the
    piece remaining in the typewriter is moved a line-space* distance.

    (1)     Note.  The record-medium that is removed could be a bill or
    financial statement, whereas the record-medium that remains in the
    typewriter could be a tally strip.


CLS 400/608
TXT With clamp for holding one record-medium stationary:

    Subject matter under subclass 607 wherein the relative movement of one
    sheet or web of record-medium* with respect to a second sheet or web of
    record-medium is caused by firmly gripping one of the sheets or webs to
    restrain its movement while the other sheet or web is moved.


CLS 400/608.1
TXT Selectively engageable feed-rollers or feed-roller brakes:

    Subject matter under subclass 608 wherein the sheet or web record-medium*
    that is to be restrained is firmly gripped by a member that is normally a
    feed-roller*, or wherein the feed-roller is prevented from rotating.

    (1)     Note.  Normally a feed-roller cooperates with a platen* so that
    incremental rotation of the platen causes feed of the record-medium because
    the feed-roller presses the record-medium against the platen. However, if
    the platen does not rotate and the feed-roller presses the record-medium
    against the stationary platen, the record-medium will also remain
    stationary.  In this subclass the record-medium is firmly gripped between
    the feed-roller and the stationary platen to restrain movement of the
    record-medium, or the record-medium is firmly gripped between a stationary
    platen and a stationary feed-roller to restrain movement of the
    record-medium.


CLS 400/608.2
TXT By auxiliary feed-roller or platen section (e.g., separate feed of sheets):

    Subject matter under subclass 607 wherein the feed movement of one sheet or
    web of record-medium* is effected with the aid of one feed-roller* and the
    feed movement of another sheet or web or record-medium is effected with the
    aid of a second feed-roller, or wherein each feed-roller urges a separate
    sheet or web record-medium against a separate platen*.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass one feed-roller may cooperate with a platen
    and the second feed-roller cooperates with another feed-roller forming a
    feed-roller couple, or the separate platens may be coaxial.


CLS 400/608.3
TXT By retrograde movement of one record-medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 607 wherein the relative movement of one
    sheet or web of record-medium* with respect to a second sheet or web of
    record-medium is caused by reversing the usual feed direction of one of the
    sheets or webs in a direction opposite to the usual line-space* direction.


CLS 400/608.4
TXT Including differential movement by separate drive means:

    Subject matter under subclass 607 wherein each of the sheets or webs of
    record-medium* is moved at a different rate of speed, the movement being
    effected by different feed means.


CLS 400/609
TXT Mount for plural web rolls:

    Subject matter under subclass 605 wherein the pieces of record-medium* are
    in the form of web material (i.e., each is a piece of material of
    indeterminate length), and each web is a spirally convoluted roll, and
    wherein each spirally convoluted roll is supported on an axis associated
    with the typewriter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    613+,   for a mount for a single web roll.


CLS 400/610
TXT Including sheet-associating attachment (e.g., pin-band-encircling platen):

    Subject matter under subclass 605 wherein significance is attributed to
    structure which facilitates or contributes to the movement of two or more
    sheets or webs of record-medium*, which structure includes means whereby
    one sheet or web is enabled to be positioned with respect to another sheet
    or web in a particular location relative to the typewriter so that both
    sheets or webs will be moved into or out of the typewriter as desired by a
    typist or other operator.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a typewriter having a rear
    collating-table* with clamps or an indicator.


CLS 400/610.1
TXT With table or frame (e.g., collating-table):

    Subject matter under subclass 610 wherein the means for positioning the
    sheets or webs of record-medium* includes a platform attached to the
    typewriter and closely adjacent to the platen*, on which platform the
    sheets or webs are assembled prior to insertion of the assemblage into the
    typewriter.

    (1)     Note.  The platform is usually a collating-table* and usually
    includes means to align the front edges of the sheets.


CLS 400/610.2
TXT Front collating-table with sheet-holding means (e.g., clamps):

    Subject matter under subclass 610.1 wherein the platform includes a
    collating-table* that is located on the typewriter so as to lead the
    assembled sheets or webs of record-medium* to a position adjacent to the
    print-point* of the platen*, and also includes means to temporarily secure
    the assembled sheets or webs to the platform.


CLS 400/610.3
TXT Including pin-holding means:

    Subject matter under subclass 610.2 wherein the securing means includes an
    element that has a relatively slender, elongated configuration, one end of
    which engages the sheets or webs of record-medium*.


CLS 400/610.4
TXT Including indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 610.2 wherein the platform includes a marking
    or sign to show the positioning of the sheets or webs of record-medium*
    relative to the platform.


CLS 400/611
TXT For feeding web record-medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 578 wherein significance is attributed to
    means associated with a typewriter for moving a web of record-medium*
    relative to the typewriter.

    (1)     Note.  The term "web" is discussed in the definition of
    "record-medium", in the Glossary, section III.

    (2)     Note.  The movement of the web in this and indented subclasses is
    that which causes the web to enter or exit the typewriter, or to move in a
    line-space* direction or to move relative to a moving carriage*.  Movement
    of the web (or any record-medium) by and with a moving carriage will be
    found in subclasses relating to the carriage, subclasses 283+.

    (3)     Note.  The typewriter of this subclass may have a magnetic clutch
    drive for effecting web feed.


CLS 400/612
TXT Feeding web or sheet in perpendicular directions:

    Subject matter under subclass 611 wherein significance is attributed to the
    movement of a piece of web material (or of a piece of sheet material)
    record-medium* in either (a) a line-space* direction, or (b) a
    character-space* direction, the two directions being transversely related
    to each other, and the movement in either direction being caused by means
    other than a moving platen*.

    (1)     Note.  The two directions noted above are referred to in the
    typewriter art as "x" direction, (i.e., the line-space direction) and "y"
    direction, (i.e., the character-space direction).


CLS 400/613
TXT With web supply or takeup or mount therefor (e.g., web cartridge, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 611 wherein the typewriter is provided with
    means for holding a source of web material to be typed on, or with means
    for holding the web material that has been typed on and is being removed
    from the typing zone of the typewriter.

    (1)     Note.  Either the supply or the makeup can be a convoluted roll of
    web material, but the subject matter of this and indented subclasses is not
    limited to a web roll.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    609,    for a mount for plural web rolls.


CLS 400/613.1
TXT Including insertion of leading edge of web:

    Subject matter under subclass 613 wherein significance is attributed to
    means for facilitating the entry of a web into the typewriter.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass also provides for the
    reentry of a web that has been torn or separated from itself, thus causing
    a new "leading edge" to be formed, and also provides for a "dolly" to
    facilitate insertion of the web.


CLS 400/613.2
TXT For folded or creased web (e.g., fan-folded web):

    Subject matter under subclass 613 wherein significance is attributed to the
    web material being doubled over upon itself, or to the web material having
    a surface configuration that is caused by doubling the material upon itself.


CLS 400/613.3
TXT With web smoother:

    Subject matter under subclass 613.2 wherein significance is attributed to
    means for flattening a configuration in the web material that was caused by
    doubling the material upon itself.


CLS 400/613.4
TXT Holder for fan-folded web mounted to move with carriage:

    Subject matter under subclass 613.2 wherein the web of material has an
    indeterminate length dimension and is folded upon itself transversely of
    said dimension, the direction of folding alternating along said dimension,
    and wherein said web is supported by a receptacle or container, is
    supported on the carriage* or is supported on a portion of the typewriter
    that partakes of carriage movement.

    (1)     Note.  The web of material may be record-medium* material or may be
    transfer-medium* material (e.g., "carbon paper") that is handled as
    record-medium material, and the typing of simultaneous copies is not
    included in the claimed disclosures.


CLS 400/614
TXT Including web rewind:

    Subject matter under subclass 613 wherein the web of record-medium* that
    has been typed on and is being removed from the typing zone of the
    typewriter is convoluted spirally into a roll.


CLS 400/614.1
TXT Connected to platen drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 614 wherein the typewriter is provided with a
    platen* and means to rotate the platen, and wherein said rotating means
    also rotates said roll to convolute the removed web onto the roll.


CLS 400/615
TXT Mounted on typewriter having transversely moving carriage:

    Subject matter under subclass 613 wherein the typewriter is provided with a
    carriage* that is movable in carriage feed and carriage return directions
    and wherein said web material is supported relative to said carriage.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the web material is supported on a mounting
    that is fixed relative to the typewriter, but the web is guided to follow
    the movements of the carriage as the carriage moves in carriage feed and
    carriage return directions.

    (2)     Note.  The term "carriage feed" is defined in subclass 319, and the
    term "carriage return" is defined in subclass 313.


CLS 400/615.1
TXT Mounted to move with carriage:

    Subject matter under subclass 615 wherein said roll is supported on means
    that is fixed to the carriage*, whereby the roll partakes of carriage feed
    and carriage return movements.


CLS 400/615.2
TXT For feeding tape in direction of print-line (i.e., transverse feed):

    Subject matter under subclass 613 wherein the web of record-medium* is in
    the form of an elongated but relatively narrow strip of material that is
    mounted to be moved so that its length dimension moves parallel to the
    direction in which a print-line* is typed.

    (1)     Note.  The width dimension of the strip is usually approximately
    equal to or only slightly greater than the height of a character* symbol.


CLS 400/616
TXT By pin-feed means (e.g., reciprocating pin, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 611 wherein the means for moving a web of
    record-medium* includes at least one short, slender element that is
    configured to enter into a hole in the web and is moved in a direction
    parallel to the line-space* direction to thereby move the web.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the pin reciprocates to-and-fro, engaging
    the web in one of its movements and disengaging from the web in the return
    movement.


CLS 400/616.1
TXT Including laterally adjustable bands (e.g., tractor feed, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 616 wherein the means for moving a web of
    record-medium* includes at least two closed loop flexible members that move
    in a direction parallel to the line-space* direction, and each of which
    members includes one or more of said elements, and wherein the position of
    either or both of the members relative to the web can be varied in a
    direction perpendicular to the line-space direction.

    (1)     Note.  In some typewriters of this subclass the position of two of
    said members relative to the web is varied at the same time, and both bands
    are moved oppositely in equal distances. This is termed "tractor feed".


CLS 400/616.2
TXT Pin feed on endless band:

    Subject matter under subclass 616 wherein the means for moving a web of
    record-medium* includes at least one closed loop flexible member that moves
    in a direction parallel to the line-space* direction, which member includes
    one or more of said elements.


CLS 400/616.3
TXT Pin wheel (e.g., on platen cylinder):

    Subject matter under subclass 616 wherein the means for moving a web of
    record-medium* includes a circular member that rotates so that its
    periphery moves in a direction parallel to the line-space* direction, which
    member includes one or more of said elements.

    (1)     Note.  In some typewriters of this subclass the circular member is
    the platen* or the element(s) is/are associated with the platen to rotate
    therewith.


CLS 400/617
TXT By friction-feed means (e.g., reciprocating finger or gripper or pinch
    roller, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 611 wherein the means for moving a web of
    record-medium* includes one or more members that closely contact the
    surface(s) of the record-medium adjacent thereto and move relative to the
    typewriter in a direction parallel to the line-space* direction while the
    surface(s) of the member(s) do not slide relative to the surface(s) of the
    record-medium, thereby moving the record-medium in said direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    634+,   for friction-feed means usually applied to a sheet, and see (1)
    Note to that subclass.


CLS 400/618
TXT With web tensioning or braking:

    Subject matter under subclass 611 wherein the typewriter is provided with
    means for moving a web of record-medium* relative to the typewriter and is
    also provided with means for resisting the movement of the web, whereby the
    web is tautened or slowed in movement, or wherein the resisting means tends
    to effect stoppage in the movement of the web of record-medium.


CLS 400/619
TXT Including web guiding or aligning (e.g., laterally, relative to print-line,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 611 wherein significance is attributed to
    means for positioning a web of record-medium* relative to a particular
    location on the typewriter or leading the web to said location.

    (1)     Note.  The web may be positioned transversely of the direction of
    line-space* movement or may be positioned with respect to the print-line*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    579,    for skew correction of a web.


CLS 400/620
TXT Including web shifting to view print-line:

    Subject matter under subclass 611 wherein significance is attributed to a
    movement of the web of record-medium* that has been typed on, which
    movement is for the purpose of enabling a typist to see the character*
    symbols that have been typed on the print-line*.


CLS 400/621
TXT With web cutter (e.g., tear bar, wire tool, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 611 wherein a typewriter is provided with
    means to sever one portion of a web of record-medium* from another portion
    of that web.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes a cutter that has an edge against
    which the web is torn.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses for a cutter not associated with a
    typewriter.


CLS 400/621.1
TXT For longitudinal cut:

    Subject matter under subclass 621 wherein the web is severed along a line
    that extends along the direction of movement of the web.


CLS 400/621.2
TXT And gauge for tear-off length:

    Subject matter under subclass 621 wherein the severing means comprises an
    element having a sharp edge, against which edge a web of record-medium* is
    moved by the user of a typewriter to sever the web, and wherein the
    typewriter is provided with an indicator that helps the typist to determine
    the amount of web to be severed from the body of the web.


CLS 400/622
TXT With holder for single sheet (e.g., clip, backing sheet, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 578 wherein significance is attributed to the
    use of a support in addition to a platen*, which support holds one sheet of
    record-medium* during typing on the sheet, or wherein significance is
    attributed to a relatively thin piece of material having length and width
    dimensions corresponding to the length and width of a sheet of
    record-medium*, which piece of material lies between the sheet of
    record-medium and the platen* and holds the record-medium thereto while
    typing is performed on the sheet of record-medium.


CLS 400/623
TXT Mounted on carriage (e.g., for extra-wide sheet, cylindroidal holder, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 622 wherein said support is held by the
    carriage* of a typewriter.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is also for a support in the shape of a hollow
    cylindroidal member that substantially surrounds the platen* or for a
    support for a sheet of record-medium* that has a width dimension (i.e., a
    dimension that  extends in a direction perpendicular to the line-space*
    distance), which width dimension is greater than the corresponding length
    dimension of the platen that backs the record-medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    552,    for a "floating" platen capable of feeding such an extra-wide sheet.


CLS 400/624
TXT For feeding sheet from stack or pack holder:

    Subject matter under subclass 578 wherein significance is attributed to
    means associated with a typewriter for removing one sheet of record-medium*
    from a pile consisting of a plurality of such sheets regularly arranged in
    a support or receptacle, or to means for moving such a sheet into the
    typewriter for typing thereon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclass 145 and other appropriate
    subclasses for sheet feeding means not associated with a typewriter.


CLS 400/625
TXT Add delivering to sheet receiver (e.g., by roller couple):

    Subject matter under subclass 624 wherein the typewriter is provided with
    means to move the sheet of record-medium* that has been typed on out of the
    typewriter and onto a support or receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass a "roller couple" (defined in subclass 636)
    may be used to move a sheet of record medium into a typewriter for typing
    thereon or out of a typewriter after typing, thereon.


CLS 400/626
TXT By engaging between flap and body of envelope:

    Subject matter under subclass 624 wherein the record-medium* to be typed on
    is a folded sheet or a wrapper having a folded portion adjacent to a main
    portion, and wherein the feed means is an element that moves between the
    folded portion and the main portion to engage the sheet or wrapper at the
    fold to thereby move the sheet or wrapper.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclass 2 for an envelope feeder not
    associated with a typewriter.


CLS 400/627
TXT By pneumatic means:

    Subject matter under subclass 624 wherein the typewriter is provided with
    means for moving the sheet of record-medium*, which means includes a
    gaseous fluid medium under subatmospheric or above-atmospheric pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclasses 90+ for a pneumatic sheet
    feeding means not associated with a typewriter.


CLS 400/628
TXT By reciprocating of oscillating member:

    Subject matter under subclass 624 wherein the typewriter is provided with
    means for moving the sheet of record-medium*, which means includes an
    element that moves to-and-fro in a straight line or an arcuate path and
    engages the sheet for movement thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclasses 44+ for a reciprocating
    sheet feeding means not associated with a typewriter.


CLS 400/629
TXT By endless-band or rotating (e.g., feed-roller) member:

    Subject matter under subclass 624 wherein the typewriter is provided with
    means for moving the sheet of record-medium*, which means includes a
    flexible element orbiting in a closed loop and that engages the sheet for
    movement thereof, or wherein the typewriter is provided with means for
    moving the sheet of record medium, which means includes a surface or
    element that, turns about an axis and that engages the sheet for movement
    thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclasses 34+ for an endless sheet
    feeding means not associated with a typewriter; and subclasses 109+ for a
    rotating sheet feeding means not associated with a typewriter.


CLS 400/630
TXT Including aligning of sheet edge prior to typing:

    Subject matter under subclass 578 wherein significance is attributed to
    structure for positioning or locating a sheet of record-medium* with
    respect to some part of a typewriter, which structure is used before any of
    the character* symbols are imprinted on the sheet and is used by
    positioning a border of the sheet against the structure.

    (1)     Note.  In most typewriters a sheet is inserted adjacent to the
    platen* and moved in a line-space* direction.  The "leading" edge of the
    sheet is that edge which is parallel to a print-line* (i.e., perpendicular
    to the line-space direction) and enters the typewriter first.  The "side"
    edge of the sheet is that edge which is parallel to the line-space
    direction.  The structure of this and indented subclasses ensures that
    either or both of the edges will be properly aligned with the print-lines
    so that the typed text will have a pleasing appearance on the page*.


CLS 400/631
TXT Aligner moved to operate concurrently with disengagement of feed means:

    Subject matter under subclass 630 wherein the typewriter is provided with
    means to move a sheet through the typewriter, which means is shiftable into
    a first position at which it will not move the sheet or into a second
    position at which it will move the sheet, wherein the aligning structure is
    shiftable into a first position at which it will align the sheet or into a
    second position at which it will not align, but instead permit the sheet to
    be moved through the typewriter, and wherein the first position of the
    moving means coincides with the first position of the aligning means
    whereby the sheet will be aligned when the sheet moving means is not
    operative.


CLS 400/632
TXT Including leading-edge aligner located past print-point:

    Subject matter under subclass 630 wherein the aligning structure is located
    in a position at which it will engage and align the leading edge of the
    sheet after the leading edge has been moved beyond the print-point* of the
    typewriter.

    (1)     Note.  The term "leading" edge is defined in subclass 630 in (1)
    Note thereto.


CLS 400/632.1
TXT Adjustable leading-edge aligner:

    Subject matter under subclass 632 wherein the position of the aligning
    structure may be changed.


CLS 400/633
TXT Side-edge aligner (e.g., adjustable, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 630 wherein the aligning structure is located
    in a position at which it will engage and align the side edge of a sheet.

    (1)     Note.  The term "side" edge is defined in subclass 630 in (1) Note
    thereto.


CLS 400/633.1
TXT On rear sheet table or apron:

    Subject matter under subclass 633 wherein the aligning structure is mounted
    on a support for holding a sheet of record-medium* adjacent to a
    typewriter, which support is positioned adjacent to the back side of the
    platen*.


CLS 400/633.2
TXT Adjustable aligner (e.g., with lock):

    Subject matter under subclass 633.1 wherein the aligning structure is
    mounted so as to permit variation in the position of the aligning structure
    relative to the support.

    (1)     Note.  The aligner may be provided with means for latching the
    structure to the support to prevent relative movement thereof.


CLS 400/634
TXT Including friction-feed means (e.g., band):

    Subject matter under subclass 578 wherein significance is attributed to
    movement of a record-medium* in a line-space* direction, which movement is
    caused by one or more members having a surface or surfaces that closely
    contact the surface(s) of the record-medium adjacent thereto and move
    relative to the typewriter in a direction parallel to the line-space
    direction while the surface(s) of the member(s) do not slide relative to
    the surface(s) of the record-medium, thereby moving the record-medium in
    said direction.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass a flexible feed band cooperates with a
    platen* to feed a sheet of record-medium lying between the band and the
    platen.

    (2)     Note.  In amplification of the phrase "in a direction parallel to
    the line-space direction", the following should be noted.  Two members
    having surfaces that face one another with the record-medium therebetween
    may comprise a roller couple, wherein each of the feed-roller* elements
    rotate about a fixed axis in opposite rotational directions, but the two
    peripheral portions of the roller surfaces that are closest to each other
    are tangent to substantially the same line and the rotation is such as to
    move the tangent roller surfaces in the line-space direction.  Similar
    members may move along a line perpendicular to their axes without rotation
    of the rollers, thus moving the record-medium that is therebetween, and
    return along the same line but in opposite direction, but during the return
    movement the rollers rotate so as not to return the record-medium; or, two
    nonrotatable members may close onto the record-medium and move in the
    line-space direction, but open out of contact with the record-medium for
    return of the members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    617+,   for friction feed of a web by a reciprocating-gripper couple or a
    reciprocating-pinch-roller couple.


CLS 400/635
TXT By endless-feed band:

    Subject matter under subclass 634 wherein one of said members is a flexible
    strip of material having a closed-loop or continuous configuration.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the endless band cooperates with the platen* to feed
    a sheet lying between the band and platen.


CLS 400/636
TXT By roller couple (e.g. rotatable pinch rollers, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 634 wherein at least one member contacts one
    surface of the record-medium* and at least another member contacts the
    opposite surface of the record-medium, and wherein each member is a
    cylinder or a cylindroid rotatable in opposite rotational directions with
    the record-medium therebetween.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass a roller couple comprises two
    counter-rotating rollers with record-medium therebetween, neither of which
    rollers is a platen*.  In the subclasses indented hereunder, the platen is
    cylindrical or cylindroidal and is rotatable to feed record-medium
    frictionally engaged thereby, and the other roller is a pressure roller
    that urges the record-medium into frictional contact with the platen.  The
    roller couple of the indented subclasses thus comprises a platen and a
    pressure roller cooperating to feed record-medium lying therebetween.  The
    pressure roller is termed a "feed-roller" even though it may not be driven
    other than by frictional contact with the platen or the record-medium.


CLS 400/636.1
TXT With typewriter-actuated control or feed-roller position:

    Subject matter under subclass 636 wherein a feed-roller* is movable into a
    first position at which it is in contact with a platen* or is movable into
    a second position at which it is not in contact with the platen, and
    wherein either movement of the feed-roller results from or is concurrent
    with movement of a mechanism of the typewriter.

    (1)     Note.  The term typewriter-actuated-control* is intended to refer
    to a control or regulator that is actuated by the typewriter itself or a
    part thereof that is moved by other than directly manually triggered
    operation.  In most manual typewriters a typist presses various key*
    elements to effect a particular typing operation.  The key-pressed
    operation is not typewriter actuated, but if that operation in turn effects
    second operation without further intervention by the typist, the second
    operation is typewriter actuated.


CLS 400/636.2
TXT Including intermediate drive means (e.g. gears) connecting feed-roller to
    platen:

    Subject matter under subclass 636 wherein the feed-roller* is caused to
    rotate by a mechanical transmission that joins the platen* to the
    feed-roller.

    (1)     Note.  The mechanical transmission may include rotatable toothed
    wheels, the teeth of which wheels intermesh one with the other(s).


CLS 400/636.3
TXT Including feed-roller having equalizing or pressure-adjusting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 636 wherein a feed-roller* is urged (or a
    plurality of feed-rollers are urged) toward an associated platen* by a
    mechanism, which mechanism is regulated so that (a) the force with which
    the feed-roller is urged (or any of the feed-rollers are urged) may be
    varied, or (b) the force with which either end of the feed-roller is urged
    (or either end of any of the feed-rollers is urged) may be varied so as to
    cause the ends of the feed-roller(s) to be urged with equal force.

    (1)     Note.  In a pressure-adjusting mechanism the purpose is to adjust
    the spring force by which one feed-roller (or a plurality of feed-rollers)
    is biased against the platen or another feed-roller to increase or decrease
    the force over the platen.  In a pressure-equalizing mechanism the purpose
    is to enable the feed-roller (or a plurality of feed-rollers) to be applied
    with equal force over the platen.


CLS 400/637
TXT Including lower feed-roller(s) (e.g., pressure roller, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 636 wherein significance is attributed to one
    or more feed-roller* elements that are located relative to the associated
    platen* adjacent to the underneath surface of the platen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is for a typewriter wherein the
    lower-feed-rollers are disposed along a single axis.


CLS 400/637.1
TXT Including concurrent control for disengagement of upper and lower
    feed-rollers:

    Subject matter under subclass 637 wherein a typewriter is provided with one
    or more feed-rollers* that are located adjacent to the underneath surface
    of an associated platen* and is further provided with one or more
    feed-rollers located adjacent to the topmost surface of said platen, and
    wherein both the underneath feed-rollers are simultaneously moved toward
    the platen or simultaneously moved away from the platen.


CLS 400/637.2
TXT Mounted on apron:

    Subject matter under subclass 637 wherein said feed-rollers* are supported
    adjacent to the platen* on the apron* of the typewriter.


CLS 400/637.3
TXT Mounted on plural roller carriers:

    Subject matter under subclass 637 wherein two or more lower feed-rollers*
    are provided, and wherein at least one of the feed-rollers is supported on
    one member, and at least another of the feed-rollers is supported on
    another member.


CLS 400/637.4
TXT Including plural parallel carrier pivots:

    Subject matter under subclass 637.3 wherein each of said members oscillates
    about a separate axis, and the axes of oscillation are parallel one to the
    other(s).


CLS 400/637.5
TXT Including single carrier pivot intermediate front and rear lower
    feed-rollers:

    Subject matter under subclass 637.3 wherein said one member and said
    another member each oscillates about the same axis that is movable with
    respect to the platen* with which the feed-rollers* are associated, and
    which axis is located between a feed-roller below and forward of the platen
    axis and a feed-roller below and rearward of the platen axis.


CLS 400/637.6
TXT Mounted on single carrier having pivot intermediate front and rear lower
    feed-rollers:

    Subject matter under subclass 637 wherein two or more lower feed-rollers*
    are provided, at least one feed-roller being supported on a member to be
    adjacent to an associated platen* in a location below an forward of the
    platen axis, and at least another feed-roller being supported on the same
    member to be adjacent to said platen in a location below and rearward of
    the platen axis, and wherein said member oscillates about an axis that is
    movable toward and away from the platen and is located between said
    feed-rollers.


CLS 400/638
TXT Including feed or pressure roller mounted on "paper-finger":

    Subject matter under subclass 636 wherein significance is attributed to a
    feed-roller* that is supported by a paper-finger* associated with a platen*.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the "paper-finger" may be supported on a
    "paper bail" that is adjacent to the topmost surface of the platen with
    which the paper bail is associated. The term paper bail is defined in
    subclass 639.1 below.


CLS 400/639
TXT Including upper feed-roller(s) (e.g., pressure roller, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 636 wherein significance is attributed to one
    or more feed-rollers* that are located relative to the associated platen*
    adjacent to the topmost surface of the platen.


CLS 400/639.1
TXT Mounted on "paper bail":

    Subject matter under subclass 639 wherein the upper feed-roller(s)* is/are
    supported by a paper bail which term is discussed and defined in (1) Note
    below.

    (1)     Note.  The term "paper bail" is the term used by the typewriter
    industry to refer to a particular structure that holds a paper sheet to a
    platen*.  It usually includes a bar that extends along the length of the
    platen parallel to the axis thereof.  An arm is affixed to each end of the
    bar, and the other ends of the two arms are pivoted about a common axis
    parallel to the platen axis, whereby the paper bail is hinged so that its
    bar overlies the platen. When a record-medium* is fed between the platen
    and the paper bail, the paper bail holds the record-medium to the platen.


CLS 400/639.2
TXT Disengaged from platen by compound movement  of bail (e.g., on
    double-pivoted mount):

    Subject matter under subclass 639.1 wherein the "paper bail" is normally
    closely adjacent  to the platen* with which it is associated, but where the
    paper bail is supported so as to be moved out of its closely adjacent
    position, the movement being such as to combine two or more kinds of motion.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the movement usually combines a
    reciprocatory motion with an oscillatory motion.  In some typewriters, the
    paper bail is supported on an oscillatable member, which member is in turn
    supported on a second oscillatable member.


CLS 400/640
TXT With cooperating scale:

    Subject matter under subclass 636 wherein the roller couple feed means is
    associated with a measuring instrument that is calibrated in units
    corresponding to character-space* distances.


CLS 400/641
TXT Feed-roller structure or brake or spacer therefor:

    Subject matter under subclass 636 wherein significance is attributed to the
    construction of a feed-roller*, or wherein the feed-roller includes means
    to retard its rotational movement or includes means to connect the
    feed-roller with a drive means for the feed-roller, or wherein significance
    is attributed to a feed-roller construction including a plurality of such
    feed-rollers on a single axis and means for separating one feed-roller from
    other feed-rollers along said axis.


CLS 400/642
TXT Including sheet guide (e.g., for sheet insertion, etc.):

    Subclass matter under subclass 578 wherein significance is attributed to
    structure on or attached to a typewriter, which structure contributes to or
    facilitates the movement of a sheet of record-medium* through the
    typewriter in its intended or necessary path for proper typing on the
    record-medium.


CLS 400/643
TXT Platen-encircling band:

    Subject matter under subclass 642 wherein the structure includes a
    relatively narrow member that substantially surrounds a platen* and guides
    the sheet for movement around the platen.


CLS 400/644
TXT Sheet stripper (e.g., for preventing reentry, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 642 wherein the structure includes a member
    that is closely adjacent to a platen* around which a sheet of
    record-medium* is partially wrapped during typing on the sheet, which
    member is located relative to the platen in a position to engage the
    leading edge of the sheet as that leading edge exits from the platen and
    guide that leading edge out of contact with the platen.


CLS 400/645
TXT Sheet holddown member (e.g., "paper finger", end-of-page holddown, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 642 wherein the structure includes a member
    that is closely adjacent to a platen* around which a sheet of
    record-medium* is partially wrapped during typing on the sheet, which
    member engages a surface of the sheet and urges the sheet into contact with
    the platen, or wherein significance is attributed to the member engaging
    the surface of a sheet when the end of a page* is adjacent to the member.


CLS 400/645.1
TXT With aperture or notch (e.g., for typing therethrough, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 645 wherein the member has a hole
    therethrough or a portion cut out of an edge thereof, which hole or cut-out
    portion is located adjacent the print-point* of the typewriter and serves
    to permit a type-face* to impact the record-medium* through the hole or
    cutout portion.


CLS 400/645.2
TXT On or with erasing plate or signal or indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 645 wherein the member is mounted on or is
    part of a support that is used to support a record-medium* while a
    record-medium has an eraser applied thereto, or wherein the member is
    mounted on or is part of a measuring instrument that is calibrated in units
    corresponding to character-space* distances, or wherein the member is
    provided with means to alert the typist to a condition of the typewriter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    698,    for an erasing table.


CLS 400/645.3
TXT Movably mounted on movable finger carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 645 wherein the member is supported by a
    structure on the typewriter, and wherein the structure may be moved
    relative to the typewriter and the member may be moved relative to the
    structure.

    (1)     Note.  In some typewriters of this subclass either the structure or
    the member may be moved in a path that extends around the platen* with
    which the structure and the member are associated.


CLS 400/645.4
TXT Pivotally mounted holddown:

    Subject matter under subclass 645 wherein the member is supported for
    oscillatory or arcuate movement about an axis related to the axis of the
    platen*.

    (1)     Note.  In some typewriters of this subclass the axis of the member
    is substantially perpendicular to the axis of the platen.


CLS 400/645.5
TXT Mounted in front of platen axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 645 wherein the member is supported relative
    to the platen* on a structure that is located adjacent to the platen and
    between the platen and a typist.


CLS 400/646
TXT Sheet table at delivery side of platen:

    Subject matter under subclass 642 wherein the typewriter includes a platen*
    around which a sheet of record-medium* is partially wrapped during typing
    on the sheet, and wherein the support is located relative to the platen in
    a position to receive the sheet as that sheet exits from the platen after
    being typed thereon.


CLS 400/647
TXT Movable sheet table or apron (e.g., detachable, extensible, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 642 wherein the structure includes a support
    for holding a sheet of record-medium* adjacent to a typewriter or includes
    an apron* for holding a sheet adjacent to the platen* of a typewriter,
    which support or apron is capable of being moved with respect to the platen
    with which it is associated.

    (1)     Note.  The support may be removed from and replaced on some
    typewriters without disassembly of other parts of the typewriter, or may be
    made larger or smaller.


CLS 400/647.1
TXT Pivotable (e.g., fingerlike support):

    Subject matter under subclass 647 wherein the support is capable of being
    moved in an arcuate or oscillatory path.

    (1)     Note.  The support may comprise one or more elongated (e.g.,
    fingerlike) members.


CLS 400/648
TXT PLATEN OR PLATEN-MOVING MECHANISM:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein significance is
    attributed to the platen* of a typewriter or to means for moving the platen.

    (1)     Note.  The platen moving mechanism or the patents for this portion
    of the schedule is that platen movement which is not caused by carriage*
    feed or carriage return and similar carriage movements, or which is not
    caused by case-shift*, or which is not caused by line-space* mechanism.
    For such movements, other portions of this schedule are more properly
    appropriate.

    (2)     Note.  A flat platen of a typewriter is provided for in subclasses
    23+ of this schedule.  This subclass (648) and the subclasses indented
    hereunder provided for a cylindrical platen or a platen having a
    configuration other than significantly flat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23+,    and see (2) Note above.


CLS 400/649
TXT For movement of platen other than for line-spacing:

    Subject matter under subclass 648 wherein a platen* is moved for a purpose
    other than to effect a line-space* distance.

    (1)     Note.  The movement of the platen is the typewriter of this
    subclass is often to enable an extra-thick "manifold set" to be inserted
    between the platen and the apron* associated therewith, or to move the
    platen so that typing on the record-medium* may be more readily seen by the
    typist, or to enable adjustments to be made to the record-medium relative
    to the platen, etc.


CLS 400/650
TXT Cylindrical platen adjustable to facilitate compactness:

    Subject matter under subclass 649 wherein a platen* has extreme ends, one
    of which ends is movable relative to the other.

    (1)     Note.  The purpose of this adjustment is to enable a platen to be
    extended or compressed in length, or to enable the turning knob of a platen
    to be moved along the axis of the platen.


CLS 400/651
TXT Cylindrical platen axially adjustable:

    Subject matter under subclass 649 wherein the platen* or a portion thereof
    is movable along its own axis of rotation.


CLS 400/652
TXT Platen movement conjointly with type-face movement:

    Subject matter under subclass 649 wherein a platen* is moved toward a
    print-point* during substantially the same period of time that a type-face*
    element is moved toward the same print-point.


CLS 400/653
TXT By eccentric mounting for platen:

    Subject matter under subclass 649 wherein the platen* is rotatable about a
    first axis, and the first axis is rotatable about a second axis on the
    carriage* and parallel to the first axis.


CLS 400/654
TXT Character-size platen (e.g., anvil, disc, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 648 wherein a platen* has length and height
    dimensions approximating the corresponding width and height dimensions of a
    character* which is backed by the anvil platen.


CLS 400/655
TXT Mounted on movable carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 654 wherein the character-size platen* is
    supported on a mechanism that enables movement of the platen relative to
    the typewriter.


CLS 400/656
TXT Bar (i.e., line size) platen:

    Subject matter under subclass 648 wherein a platen* has a length dimension
    equal to or greater than the length of a print-line* on a record-medium*,
    and has a height dimension approximating the height of a character*.


CLS 400/657
TXT Mounted on cylindrical member:

    Subject matter under subclass 656 wherein a bar platen* has (as defined in
    subclass 656 above) is included in or on the surface of a cylindrical plate
    (as defined in subclass 659 below).


CLS 400/658
TXT Semicylindrical platen:

    Subject matter under subclass 648 wherein a platen* is an arcuate plate
    extending peripherally approximately 180o about an axis and extending along
    the axis for a dimension approximately equivalent to the width of a
    record-medium* supported by said platen.


CLS 400/659
TXT Cylindrical platen:

    Subject matter under subclass 648 wherein a platen* has a surface that is
    generated by a line revolving about an axis parallel to the line.

    (1)     Note.  Although the definition of "cylinder" stated above would
    produce only a smooth-surfaced "right cylinder", it is not intended that a
    cylindroidal member having minor surface roughness be barred from any of
    the subclasses indented hereunder. Such minor surface variations are in
    fact found in the platen members found in subclasses 661.3+, 661.4, or 662
    below.


CLS 400/660
TXT Detachably secured to platen carriage:

    Subject matter under subclass 659 wherein a platen* is mounted on a
    carriage* for movement with the carriage by structure that enables the
    platen to be removed from and replaced on the carriage without disassembly
    of other parts of the typewriter.


CLS 400/660.1
TXT By axially displaceable supporting shaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 660 wherein the structure includes a rod on
    which the platen* is mounted for rotation of the platen about an axis
    coincident with the platen and the rod, which rod is movable along its axis
    for removal of the platen mounted on the rod.


CLS 400/660.2
TXT By pivoted member overlying platen shaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 660 wherein the structure includes a rod on
    which the platen* is mounted for rotation of the platen about an axis
    coincident with the platen and the rod, which rod is held to the carriage*
    by a member that is over the rod and is oscillatable away from the rod for
    removal of the rod and platen mounted thereon.


CLS 400/660.3
TXT By disengageable platen sectors:

    Subject matter under subclass 660 wherein the platen* is formed of a
    plurality of segments surrounding the axis of rotation of the platen and
    wherein the platen is removed from the carriage* by disassembling the
    segments.


CLS 400/661
TXT With sound-muffling means:

    Subject matter under subclass 659 wherein significance is attributed to a
    platen* that is provided with means for eliminating or reducing the noise
    produced by the impact of a type-member* against the surface of the platen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    689+,   for other means for muffling the noise produced by a typewriter.


CLS 400/661.1
TXT Including plural layers of varying hardness:

    Subject matter under subclass 661 wherein the platen* is formed of a
    plurality of thicknesses of material substantially concentrically arranged,
    and wherein the outermost thickness of material is of a different firmness
    than the innermost thickness.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    662,    for a platen having surface portions of varying hardness.


CLS 400/661.2
TXT Including cylinder containing fluent (e.g., fluid, etc.) material:

    Subject matter under subclass 661 wherein the platen* includes a
    cylindrical tube surrounding a flowable substance.

    (1)     Note.  The material within the cylinder may be, for example, sand,
    air, liquid, etc., or any other fluent material that yields under impact.


CLS 400/661.3
TXT Including cylindrical sections or rings (e.g., of character-space width):

    Subject matter under subclass 661 wherein the platen* is formed of a
    plurality of annular elements each having a circular dimension equal to the
    diameter of the platen cylinder and a width dimension extending axially of
    the platen.

    (1)     Note.  In some typewriters each of the annular elements may have a
    width dimension equal to the width of a character*.


CLS 400/661.4
TXT Including a wound member:

    Subject matter under subclass 661 wherein the platen* is formed of a
    plurality of convolutions of material about the axis of the platen.

    (1)     Note.  The convolutions may be wound spirally (i.e., increasing in
    diameter as the convolutions are wound around the axis) or helically (i.e.,
    having the same diameter but progressing along the axis as the convolutions
    are wound around the axis), or be a combination of both forms of
    convolutions.


CLS 400/662
TXT Including particular surface characteristic (e.g., translucent, pigment
    yielding, corrugated, of varying hardness, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 659 wherein significance is attributed to the
    properties of the circumferential surface of the platen*.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the platen may be translucent, may include
    a pigment-yielding surface, may be formed with ridges or irregularities, or
    may be formed with different firmness of material along either its length
    or periphery, or have other surface characteristics not otherwise provided
    for.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    661.1,  for a platen having plural layers of varying hardness.


CLS 400/663
TXT LOCKING OR INTERLOCKING MECHANISM:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein significance is
    attributed to means for preventing an operation from occurring or to means
    for preventing a normally movable member from moving, or wherein
    significance is attributed to means for preventing two mutually exclusive
    operations from occurring simultaneously or to means for preventing two
    mutually exclusive movable members from moving simultaneously.

    (1)     Note.  The difference between "lock" and "interlock" will best be
    illustrated by the following examples. In typing a line of text, the
    typewriter carriage* reaches a position, determined by a margin-stop*,
    corresponding to the end of a print-line*.  At this position of the
    carriage, it is desirable to prevent further movement of the carriage, or
    movement of any of the key* elements, or of the space-bar*.  A lock means
    prevents such movement, but does not prevent a desired carriage return
    movement.  Moreover, a typist may override a carriage lock by pressing a
    margin*-release key.  A lock may also be used to prevent movement of
    typewriter keys, carriage, or other parts during transport of the
    typewriter.  An interlock is used to prevent movement of one key while
    another key is pressed, or to prevent movement of a key while the carriage
    is moving to a tabular position.  Stated in different terms, if it is not
    desirable for two operations or movements to occur at the same time, an
    interlock is used to prevent one while the other is occurring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247+,   for a case-shift* locking means.

    286.3,  for a denominational lock in a tabular carriage.

    294.2,  for a key lock in a tabular  carriage.

    589,    for locking mechanism in a typewriter including tally-strip feeding.


CLS 400/664
TXT For interlocking plural functions or mechanisms:

    Subject matter under subclass 663 wherein significance is attributed to
    means for preventing two mutually exclusive operations from occurring
    simultaneously or to means for preventing two mutually exclusive movable
    members from moving simultaneously.

    (1)     Note.  The significant aspect of this and indented subclasses lies
    in the phrase "mutually exclusive".  As discussed in (1) Note of subclass
    663 above, mutually exclusive operations or movements exist where it would
    not be desirable, or would result in jamming or faulty operation, for one
    to occur simultaneously with the other.


CLS 400/665
TXT Plural carriage-moving mechanisms (e.g., escapement, tabulation, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 664 wherein a typewriter is provided with
    first means for causing movement of a carriage* in a first mode of
    operation and also provided with second means for causing the carriage to
    be moved in a second mode of operation, and wherein the typewriter is also
    provided with an interlock for preventing one of the means from operating
    when the other means is operating.


CLS 400/666
TXT Plural keys or key linkages (e.g., for type-face selection, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 664 wherein a typewriter is provided with at
    least two key* elements or at least two sets of lever arrangements for
    transmitting movement of a key into movement of a type-head*, and wherein
    the typewriter is also provided with an interlock for preventing one of the
    keys or lever arrangements from being effective to operate when the other
    is operating.

    (1)     Note.  In a typewriter of this subclass when a first key has been
    fully depressed to cause operation of a first type-bar* a second key can be
    moved to a small extent, but will not cause operation of a second type-bar;
    or simultaneous full depression of two keys is prevented, thereby
    preventing simultaneous operation of two type-bars.  See subclass 667 for a
    key-board* lock using an interlock mechanism so that no key may be moved.

    (2)     Note.  Also in this subclass, the interlock means may include: an
    electrical interlock, an interlock including a plurality of elements that
    are displaced to prevent intrusion of a second key lever when a first key
    lever has displaced the elements, a flexible strip that is tautened to
    prevent a second key lever from being moved when a first key lever has
    tautened the strip, and a plate that is shifted by one key lever to prevent
    movement of a second key lever, the mechanisms described being only
    exemplary of those found herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    667,    and see (1) Note above.


CLS 400/667
TXT Key-board lock using interlock mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 663 wherein a typewriter is provided with an
    interlock mechanism that prevents any movement of any key* element when the
    lock mechanism is effective.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass a lock mechanism acts on an interlock
    mechanism to cause the interlock mechanism to be effective to prevent
    movement of any of the keys.  Stated differently, the lock mechanism
    controls the interlock mechanism, but the interlock mechanism does not
    control the lock mechanism.

    (2)     Note.  For a discussion of the difference between a "lock" and an
    "interlock", see (1) Note of subclass 663.


CLS 400/668
TXT Locking means actuated in response to a condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 663 wherein significance is attributed to
    means for preventing an operation from occurring or to means for preventing
    a normally movable member from moving, either means being made effective as
    a result of a characteristic or state of environment or the occurrence of a
    predetermined event in a typewriter.


CLS 400/669
TXT Failure of power supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 668 wherein the preventing means is made
    effective as a result of the absence of external power to a typewriter that
    requires external power for its operation.

    (1)     Note.  The structure defined locks a mechanism in an electric
    typewriter, whereby if a key* has been inadvertently pressed while power is
    not applied thereto, that key will not cause operation when power is
    reapplied to the typewriter.


CLS 400/670
TXT End-of-page lock (e.g., responsive to preset condition):

    Subject matter under subclass 668 wherein the preventing means is made
    effective when a predetermined state of the typewriter has been reached,
    which state corresponds to the termination of a page* of typed text.

    (1)     Note.  The preset condition that causes locking may be the passage
    of the bottom edge of a sheet past a particular point on the typewriter,
    the typing of a predetermined number of print-lines* of type, etc., or any
    condition that actuates a lock so that no further print-lines may be typed
    on that particular page.


CLS 400/670.1
TXT Responsive to end-of-page sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 670 wherein a typewriter is provided with
    means to detect the termination of a page* of typed text, whereby the
    preventing means is made effective.

    (1)     Note.  The sensor can detect the trailing edge of a sheet of
    record-medium*, or can detect a hole, mark, or other indicium in either a
    sheet or a web of record-medium that corresponds to the end of a page.


CLS 400/670.2
TXT Including lock for platen or line-space:

    Subject matter under subclass 670 wherein the preventing means is effective
    to stop the rotational movement of a platen*, or the movement of a
    line-space* mechanism.


CLS 400/670.3
TXT By cam groove and follower:

    Subject matter under subclass 670.2 wherein the preventing means includes a
    channel that is engaged by a member within the channel, which channel is
    formed as a helical or spiral cam and is moved by incremental rotation of a
    platen*, whereby the movement of the channel effects movement of the member
    to effect stopping of the platen.


CLS 400/671
TXT End of maximum typed line:

    Subject matter under subclass 668 wherein the preventing means is made
    effective when the typewriter carriage* that is moving in a
    character-space* direction arrives at a predetermined position relative to
    the typewriter.

    (1)     Note.  In most typewriters, the position is determined by a margin*
    regulator (usually the right-hand-margin regulator for English or other
    European languages), and the locking means prevents further carriage
    movement as well as movement of any of the character*-key* elements.  The
    locking means may usually be disengaged, however, to permit the typing of
    several more characters on the same line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    342+,   for margin-regulator mechanism.


CLS 400/671.1
TXT Actuated by space-bar:

    Subject matter under subclass 671 wherein the preventing means is made
    effective by operation of the space-bar* of the typewriter after the
    typewriter carriage* has arrived at a predetermined position relative to
    the typewriter.


CLS 400/671.2
TXT Universal-bar lock (e.g., pivoted latch, slidable latch, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 671 wherein the preventing means prevents the
    universal-bar* from moving, whereby typewriter elements that are normally
    driven by the universal-bar are not driven.


CLS 400/671.3
TXT Actuated by paper-finger:

    Subject matter under subclass 671.2 wherein the universal-bar* is prevented
    from moving when a paper-finger* that is mounted to move with a platen* on
    a carriage* engages an element that is stationary relative to the frame of
    the typewriter.


CLS 400/671.4
TXT Interposed component:

    Subject matter under subclass 671.2 wherein the preventing means includes
    an element that is movable into either of two positions, in a first
    position the element is between a fixed portion of a typewriter and the
    universal-bar* or a member affixed to and movable with the universal-bar,
    and in a second position the element is not between the portion and the
    universal-bar, whereby when the element is in the first position the
    universal-bar is prevented from moving its full movement in a direction to
    actuate the function* that would be actuated if the element were in its
    second position.


CLS 400/672
TXT Escapement lock:

    Subject matter under subclass 671 wherein the preventing means prevents the
    carriage* from moving by holding the carriage escapement to be incapable of
    carriage feed.

    (1)     Note.  The term "carriage escapement" is defined in the definition
    of subclass 329.


CLS 400/672.1
TXT Type-bar lock:

    Subject matter under subclass 671 wherein the preventing means includes an
    element that prevents a type-bar* from moving.


CLS 400/672.2
TXT Key-lever lock (e.g., by hook on key lever):

    Subject matter under subclass 671 wherein the preventing means includes an
    element that prevents a key* lever from moving.

    (1)     Note.  In some typewriters the key lever is prevented from moving
    by an element on a typewriter frame that contacts a hooklike member that is
    mounted on the key lever.


CLS 400/673
TXT Coin-controlled lock (e.g., responsive to print-lines, time, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 668 wherein the preventing means is made
    ineffective by using a token representing money, whereby a typewriter may
    be made available for hire.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the typewriter of this subclass is operable after
    the insertion of a coin, and operates for a preset number of print-lines*,
    or character* symbols, or period of time, or any countable characteristic,
    after which the typewriter is inoperable.


CLS 400/674
TXT For locking carriage in centered position (e.g., with shipping support):

    Subject matter under subclass 663 wherein significance is attributed to
    means for preventing a carriage* from moving away from a position that is
    substantially midway of the total distance that the carriage is capable of
    moving.

    (1)     Note.  The purpose of a lock of this and indented subclasses is
    usually to enable transport of a typewriter without damage to its movable
    parts.


CLS 400/675
TXT And disengaging case-shift lock:

    Subject matter under subclass 674 wherein a typewriter is provided with
    means to latch its case-shift* mechanism, and said preventing means also
    unlatches said case-shift mechanism.


CLS 400/676
TXT Key-board security lock (e.g., cover plate, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 663 wherein significance is attributed to
    means for preventing access to the key-board* of a typewriter.


CLS 400/677
TXT For locking selected group(s) of keys:

    Subject matter under subclass 663 wherein significance is attributed to
    means for preventing movement of a particular plurality of key* elements.


CLS 400/678
TXT For locking key in actuated position (e.g., to remove type-face from ink
    pad):

    Subject matter under subclass 663 wherein significance is attributed to
    means for preventing return movement of a particular key* element after
    that key has been pressed by a typist.

    (1)     Note.  In some typewriters of this subclass the typewriter is
    provided with a type-member*-inking block that the type-member contacts
    while in a rest position, and said preventing means locks a key element
    while the type-member is out of contact with its inking block.


CLS 400/679
TXT MEANS AUXILIARY TO TYPEWRITING FUNCTION:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein significance is
    attributed to structure that is part of a typewriter to aid a typist in
    using a typewriter, or significance is attributed to a device used in
    conjunction with a typewriter, which device is connected to, or may be
    disconnected from, a typewriter, and which device is used by a typist in
    the operation of a typewriter, but which structure or device does not
    itself effect the imprint of a character*, a character-space* or
    word-space*, or a function* of the typewriter.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder provide
    for structure that facilitates use of a typewriter for typing, which
    structure is not provided for elsewhere in this class (400).  It is
    emphasized, however, that a patent to be properly placed herein should
    claim a subcombination that is in a typewriter rather than claim a
    subcombination by itself.


CLS 400/680
TXT Means for collapsing typewriter or support for record-medium or copy:

    Subject matter under subclass 679 wherein the structure of a typewriter is
    capable of being compacted to occupy a volume smaller than which it
    occupies while it is used for typing, or wherein the typewriter is provided
    with means for holding or retaining a record-medium* or a text from which
    the typist is reading as the typing is done, and wherein the holding or
    retaining means is capable of being compacted.


CLS 400/681
TXT By tilting typewriter (e.g., via collapsible legs, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 680 wherein the typewriter is made ready for
    use by pivoting it in one direction, and is compacted by pivoting it in the
    opposite direction.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the entire typewriter is tilted, including
    the key-board*, the carriage*, the type-member* elements, and all the parts
    carried by the main frame, or the typewriter is compacted by moving one or
    more of the leg portions of the typewriter.


CLS 400/682
TXT By moving key-board relative to frame (e.g., into plural operating
    positions, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 680 wherein the typewriter is compacted by
    movement of the key-board* with respect to the typewriter.

    (1)     Note.  In some typewriters the key-board is hinged to be pivoted or
    folded over with respect to the body of the typewriter.  In other
    typewriters the key-board is slidable so as to be moved toward and away
    from the body of the typewriter.


CLS 400/683
TXT By moving carriage relative to frame:

    Subject matter under subclass 680 wherein the typewriter is compacted by
    movement of the carriage* relative to the typewriter.

    (1)     Note.  In some typewriters the carriage is hinged to be pivoted or
    folded over with respect to the body of the typewriter.


CLS 400/684
TXT By moving type-bars relative to frame:

    Subject matter under subclass 680 wherein the typewriter is compacted by
    movement of the set of type-bar* elements within the typewriter.

    (1)     Note.  In many typewriters having this means for compacting the
    typewriter, the set of type-head* elements are arranged to lie in a curved
    line while they are in operative position, the curve of the line being such
    that each type-head travels approximately the same distance from its rest
    position to the print-point*.  For compacting the typewriter, the
    type-heads are retracted so they all lie in substantially a straight line
    or common plane.


CLS 400/685
TXT Including typewriter built into carrying case:

    Subject matter under subclass 680 wherein the typewriter is manufactured to
    be part of an enclosure for the typewriter, which enclosure also includes a
    handle for lifting and holding the enclosure and the typewriter so
    enclosed, and wherein the typewriter is compacted by moving component parts
    thereof to within the enclosure.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is not for a case into which a typewriter may
    be temporarily positioned for carrying, but rather for a case that is
    intended as a permanent part of the typewriter, except that the case may be
    temporarily dismantled if necessary for repair or maintenance.


CLS 400/686
TXT Buffer (e.g., dashpot, of particular material, etc.) for movable typewriter
    element:

    Subject matter under subclass 679 wherein a typewriter includes at least a
    first element that is moved relative to a second element, and wherein
    significance is attributed to abutment means for controlling the stopping
    of one element by the other when the elements contact one another at the
    end of their relative movement toward one another.


CLS 400/687
TXT Having nonimpact movement:

    Subject matter under subclass 686 wherein the elements are caused to
    contact one another with a motion that is gradual rather than sudden.

    (1)     Note.  The function* of this buffer is to provide for silent
    operation and to reduce the degree of wear on the parts due to impacting of
    the elements against each other.


CLS 400/688
TXT Means for increasing typewriter noise:

    Subject matter under subclass 679 wherein significance is attributed to
    amplification of or addition to the sounds produced by a typewriter during
    normal use thereof.


CLS 400/689
TXT Means for muffling typewriter noise:

    Subject matter under subclass 679 wherein significance is attributed to
    elimination or reduction of the sound produced by a typewriter during
    normal use thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS: SUBCLASS:

    661,    for a platen* having means for muffling noise produced by a
    typewriter.


CLS 400/690
TXT By sound-barrier enclosure for typewriter (e.g., by sound-absorbing
    material):

    Subject matter under subclass 689 wherein a typewriter is provided with
    means that substantially surrounds all or part of the typewriter mechanism,
    which means absorbs or baffles the noise normally produced by the
    typewriter during use thereof, or is provided with means that substantially
    soaks up the noise normally produced by a typewriter during use thereof.


CLS 400/690.1
TXT With viewing window (e.g., having reflection eliminator):

    Subject matter under subclass 690 wherein the surrounding means has a
    transparent section therein so that the typist may see any part of the
    typewriter or the record-medium.

    (1)     Note.  In some typewriters the transparent section is arranged to
    prevent or reduce the possibility of the typist seeing a false or unwanted
    image.


CLS 400/690.2
TXT And externally protruding (e.g., key-board, etc.) operating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 690.1 wherein the surrounding means also has
    an opening therein so that some part of the typewriter that effects proper
    functioning of the typewriter extends beyond the surrounding means.

    (1)     Note.  The part that extends beyond the enclosure is usually the
    key-board*.


CLS 400/690.3
TXT With externally protruding operating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 690 wherein the surrounding means has an
    opening therein so that some part of the typewriter that effects proper
    functioning of the typewriter extends beyond the surrounding means.


CLS 400/690.4
TXT Including means facilitating opening of enclosure:

    Subject matter under subclass 690 wherein the surrounding means has a
    section that provides access to the interior of the surrounding means, and
    wherein significance is attributed to said section or to an element that
    maintains said section in an access-permitting position or in an
    access-preventing position.


CLS 400/691
TXT Frame, casing, or support for typewriter:

    Subject matter under subclass 679 wherein significance is attributed to (a)
    that part of the structure which supports movable portions of the
    typewriter for movement relative thereto, or (b) that part of the structure
    which encloses or surrounds the typewriter or a portion thereof, or (c)
    that part of the structure that sustains the typewriter in typing position.


CLS 400/692
TXT Having means facilitating interchange of parts:

    Subject matter under subclass 691 wherein the typewriter is one in which
    one or more of the elements thereof may be exchanged one for another, and
    wherein said frame structure is particularly arranged to effect such
    exchange of typewriter elements.


CLS 400/693
TXT Housing structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 691 wherein significance is attributed to
    that part of the structure which encloses or surrounds the typewriter or a
    portion thereof.


CLS 400/693.1
TXT For ink-ribbon spool (e.g., spool cover, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 693 wherein the housing structure at least
    partially encloses a reel on which a ribbon* of inked* material is wound.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for that portion of the housing that
    covers the ribbon spool and is movable out of the way to provide access to
    the ribbon spool.  The cover may be pivoted or slidable or removable.


CLS 400/694
TXT Made of particular material (e.g., plastic, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 691 wherein significance is attributed to the
    substance which a typewriter frame, casing, or support is manufactured of.


CLS 400/695
TXT Means for correcting typing errors (e.g., by abrasive eraser, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 679 wherein significance is attributed to the
    removal of a mistake that may have been produced in the typed text and the
    rectification of the mistake to produce a correctly typed text.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass an abrasive eraser is usually the
    correcting means.


CLS 400/696
TXT By laser beam or adhesive-surface ribbon or chemical eradicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 695 wherein the mistake is removed by (a) a
    laser means, or (b) a specially prepared tape that has on one surface
    thereof a coating to which the ink* of an imprinted character* will adhere,
    or (c) a chemical composition which will dissolve or remove the ink of an
    imprinted character.

    (1)     Note.  The term "laser" is an acronym for Light Amplification by
    Stimulated Emission of Radiation, and is defined as "a device that utilizes
    the natural oscillation of atoms for amplifying or generating
    electromagnetic waves in the visible region of the spectrum".

    (2)     Note.  The adhesive-surface ribbon" [part (b) of the definition] is
    used by temporarily placing it between the incorrectly imprinted character
    and the type-face* that was improperly used, and restriking with the same
    improper type-face, thereby causing the incorrectly imprinted character to
    adhere to the coating and be stripped from the record-medium*.


CLS 400/697
TXT By overprinting (e.g., with coated material) to cancel error:

    Subject matter under subclass 695 wherein a mistake is removed by using a
    specially prepared sheet or tape that has on one surface thereof a coating
    of a color approximating the color of the record-medium*, which coating
    will adhere to the ink* of an imprinted character*, which sheet or tape is
    used by temporarily placing it between the incorrectly imprinted character
    and the type-face* that was improperly used, and restriking with the same
    improper type-face, thereby causing the incorrectly imprinted character to
    be covered by the coating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240.1,  for a ribbon* having a field for imprinting character symbols and a
    field for overprinting erroneous characters.


CLS 400/697.1
TXT With drive for ribbon having coating thereon:

    Subject matter under subclass 697 wherein the specially prepared tape is
    wound on a spool and the tape is advanced relative to the record-medium*.

    (1)     Note.  In some typewriters of this subclass the correction by
    overprinting is performed by depressing a single key* element (identified
    by some term indicating correction), which effects the following actions:
    (a) the carriage* is backspaced one character-space*, (b) the ribbon*,
    which has an inking field and a coated field, is shifted so as to move the
    inking field out of imprinting position and move the coating field into
    imprint position, and (c) the carriage-feed mechanism is made temporarily
    ineffective (i.e., "silenced").  Then (a) the improperly used type-face*
    will be restruck to coat the incorrect character* with pigment that is the
    color of the record-medium, but the carriage will not be character-spaced,
    (b) the ribbon will be reshifted so that the inking field will overlie the
    print-point*, and (c) the correct type-face will be actuated which will
    imprint the correct character and character-space on the carriage.


CLS 400/698
TXT With erasing table:

    Subject matter under subclass 695 wherein a typewriter is provided with a
    platform to support the record-medium* while the incorrectly imprinted
    character* is being rubbed by an abrasive eraser.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    645.2,  for an erasing plate combined with a sheet holddown member.


CLS 400/699
TXT With receptacle for refuse:

    Subject matter under subclass 695 wherein a typewriter is provided with a
    container that serves to collect the material that is worn away from the
    record-medium* while an abrasive eraser is rubbed over the surface of the
    record-medium.


CLS 400/700
TXT With means for rubbing eraser over surface of record-medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 695 wherein a typewriter is provided with
    mechanism to move an abrasive eraser relative to the record-medium*.


CLS 400/701
TXT Means for cleaning, or facilitating cleaning of, type-face:

    Subject matter under subclass 679 wherein significance is attributed to the
    removal of extraneous matter from a type-face*.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is for a holder for a type-head* or a
    type-member* which holder supports the type against movement while a
    cleaner is applied to the type.


CLS 400/702
TXT By coating type-face (e.g., via type-face cleaner, brush, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 701 wherein the extraneous matter is removed
    by rubbing a type-face relative to an element that cleans the type-face.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass the cleaner is usually a liquid that is
    usually carried by a ribbon* or sheet which is impacted by the type-face or
    is a brush having bristles, past which brush the type-face* moves.


CLS 400/702.1
TXT Including means for moving brush:

    Subject matter under subclass 702 wherein the element is a member having
    bristles, which member is given motion to contact a type-face*, whereby the
    type-face is cleaned.


CLS 400/703
TXT Indicator means:

    Subject matter under subclass 679 wherein significance is attributed to a
    device used in conjunction with a typewriter, which device helps the typist
    to know the skill of the typist, or the condition of the typewriter, or the
    location of a portion of the typewriter or the record-medium* relative to
    the typewriter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for a justification indicator.

    249,    for an indicator or ribbon* depletion:


CLS 400/704
TXT For indicating typist's skill or needed adjustment:

    Subject matter under subclass 703 wherein significance is attributed to a
    mechanism for showing the user's proficiency in manipulating the various
    mechanisms and functions of the typewriter being used, or wherein the
    device helps the user to know the condition of the typewriter so that if
    the typewriter is not operating properly, it can be put into working
    condition.

    (1)     Note.  One example of the disclosures found herein is a means for
    determining if the type-head* is properly aligned relative to the
    print-point* so that if the alignment is incorrect, the type-head can be
    adjusted on its type-bar*.


CLS 400/705
TXT For indicating position of carriage along print-line:

    Subject matter under subclass 703 wherein the device shows the location of
    the carriage* relative to the print-line* in the direction that the
    print-line is formed by successive imprints of character* symbols on a
    record-medium*.


CLS 400/705.1
TXT Of carriage for type-head-carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 705 wherein the carriage* is one on which a
    type-head-carrier* is mounted.


CLS 400/705.2
TXT With word counter:

    Subject matter under subclass 705 wherein the device shows a user of the
    typewriter how many word* groups have been imprinted on a print-line*.

    (1)     Note.  The word counter usually operates by counting the actuations
    of the space-bar* as a print-line is formed, and indicating to the typist a
    signal or display in accordance with such a count.  To be properly placed
    into this subclass, a patent should claim the word counter in combination
    with other typewriter elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclass 102 for a word counter, per se, for use in a
    typewriter.


CLS 400/705.3
TXT By means driven from carriage (e.g., for indicating end of print-line,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 705 wherein the device is moved as a result
    of the carriage* being moved along the print-line*.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are devices such as a calibrated dial or
    tape that displays the number of character-space* distances imprinted or
    remaining to be imprinted, or a device that indicates a selected position
    of the carriage along its path of movement.

    (2)     Note.  Also in this subclass is an indicator that provides a signal
    to the typist when, during movement of the carriage, the desired end of the
    print-line, or the beginning of a new print-line to be typed, is approached.


CLS 400/705.4
TXT Scale for facilitating tabulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 705 wherein the device is a measuring
    instrument calibrated in units corresponding to character-space* distances,
    which instrument is used to help a typist set tabular positions for the
    carriage*.

    (1)     Note.  The term "tabular" is defined in subclass 283 and further
    discussed in (2) Note thereto.


CLS 400/705.5
TXT Scale for facilitating centering of print-line:

    Subject matter under subclass 705 wherein the device is a measuring
    instrument calibrated in units corresponding to character-space* distances,
    which instrument is used to help a typist to determine the midpoint of a
    print-line* relative to the midpoint of a record-medium*.

    (1)     Note.  The purpose of this device is to aid the typist to center a
    particular print-line, for example, a heading, a title, etc., relative to
    the side edges of a page*.  Any print-line may be so centered, but usually
    it is the first-appearing print-line of a page or the first-appearing
    print-line of a portion of text that requires a heading to distinguish that
    portion from other portions of the text; therefore, the centered print-line
    may appear anywhere on a page.


CLS 400/706
TXT For indicating position of line or end-of-page:

    Subject matter under subclass 703 wherein the device shows the location of
    a record-medium* that has been, or is to be, moved in a line-space*
    direction, the location being shown relative to an intended print-point* or
    a previously imprinted print-line* or to an intended last print-line
    expected to appear on a page*.


CLS 400/706.1
TXT By scale mounted on paper table:

    Subject matter under subclass 706 wherein the device is a measuring
    instrument calibrated in units corresponding to line-space* distances,
    which device is located on a support for a record-medium* sheet.


CLS 400/707
TXT By means driven from platen cylinder:

    Subject matter under subclass 706 wherein the device is moved as a result
    of the platen* being rotated incrementally.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this and indented subclasses are devices such as
    a calibrated dial, tape, or the like which displays the amount of
    incremental rotational movements of the platen*, or a device that can be
    set manually to produce a signal when a predetermined movement of the
    record-medium* in the line-space* direction has occurred.


CLS 400/707.1
TXT Drive initiated by detector of record-medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 707 wherein the device is provided with means
    to sense a characteristic of the record-medium* and said means causes
    connection of the device with the platen* to move the device.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the sensor detects the trailing end of a sheet
    (i.e., the absence of a sheet that has moved past a particular location).
    However, this subclass also provides for a sensor to detect an index mark,
    a hole or notch, an area of magnetically oriented particles on the sheet,
    or any other indication that a particular point on the sheet has reached a
    particular location.


CLS 400/707.2
TXT Including relatively movable pointer and scale (e.g., rotatable or
    rectilinearly movable pointer):

    Subject matter under subclass 707 wherein the device includes two elements,
    one of which elements is calibrated in units corresponding to line-space*
    distances, and the other of which elements indicates any of the
    calibrations on the first-mentioned element, and wherein either of the
    elements is moved with respect to the other element to indicate line-space
    distances.

    (1)     Note.  The device (i.e., pointer) may move with a turning or with a
    straight-line motion.


CLS 400/707.3
TXT Scale rotated by gear drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 707.2 wherein said calibrated element is
    moved with a turning motion and wherein the turning motion is caused by the
    incremental rotation of the platen* by way of a drive train that includes
    gear wheels.


CLS 400/707.4
TXT Rotatable scale coaxial with platen cylinder:

    Subject matter under subclass 707.2 wherein said calibrated element is
    moved with a turning motion and wherein the element is located on the same
    axis as that of the platen*.


CLS 400/707.5
TXT With line numbering:

    Subject matter under subclass 707 wherein a typewriter is provided with
    means for imprinting successive numeral digits representing successive
    numbers for the successive print-lines that are typed, whereby an
    indication of the number of lines that have been typed is shown.


CLS 400/708
TXT Including detector of record-medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 706 wherein the device is provided with means
    to sense a characteristic of the record-medium* and said means causes an
    indication of the location of the record-medium to be shown to the typist.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the sensor detects the trailing end of a sheet
    (i.e., the absence of a sheet that has moved past a particular location).
    However, this subclass also provides for a sensor to detect an index mark,
    a hole or notch, an area of magnetically oriented particles on the sheet,
    or any other indication that a particular point on the sheet has reached a
    particular location.


CLS 400/708.1
TXT Having electrical contacts separated by record-medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 708 wherein said sensing means includes an
    electrical circuit having two elements intended to touch one another for
    completion of the circuit, which two elements are maintained in a separated
    or open position by the record-medium*, whereby when the record-medium is
    absent from between the elements, the circuit will be closed.

    (1)     Note.  The platen* itself may include one of the elements of the
    circuit, and the absence of the record-medium may be indicated by a hole in
    the record-medium at the location of the electrical element.


CLS 400/709
TXT For aligning record-medium with print-point or print-line (e.g., for
    facilitating correction of error, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 703 wherein the device helps a typist to
    position a record-medium* so that a particular point on the record-medium
    will be precisely located with respect to the print-point* at which a
    type-face* will impact.

    (1)     Note.  A device of this subclass helps the typist to position a
    particular character* so that it can be overprinted for error correction,
    or to position the record-medium to start a word or line at the proper
    point on the record-medium.


CLS 400/709.1
TXT By transparent indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 709 wherein said device has the capability of
    transmitting light therethrough, whereby a character* on a record-medium*
    may be seen through the device.


CLS 400/709.2
TXT For indicating print-line alignment:.

    Subject matter under subclass 709 wherein said device has an extended
    straight edge thereon, whereby a particular print-line* on the
    record-medium* will be precisely located with respect to the print-line at
    which a type-face* will impact

    (1)     Note.  The indicator of this subclass is used when a previously
    typed sheet is reinserted into the typewriter, and permits a newly typed
    line to be aligned relative to previously typed lines.


CLS 400/710
TXT Including a page counter:

    Subject matter under subclass 703 wherein said device indicates the number
    of page* units that have been typed.


CLS 400/711
TXT Including a light:

    Subject matter under subclass 703 wherein a typewriter is provided with
    means for emitting a visible signal to a typist when a condition of the
    typewriter has been reached.


CLS 400/712
TXT Including means producing an audible sound (e.g., plural tones, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 703 wherein a typewriter is provided with
    means for emitting a noise that can be heard by a typist when a condition
    of the typewriter has been reached.

    (1)     Note.  The noise may be emitted in two or more frequencies of sound.


CLS 400/713
TXT Attachment for shielding or screening record-medium or typewriter (e.g.,
    against wind, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 679 wherein significance is attributed to a
    device used to cover a portion of the typewriter or the record-medium* or
    used to protect a portion of the record-medium.

    (1)     Note.  One of the purposes of the shield or screen is to hide the
    typed material from curious or prying eyes looking over the typist's
    shoulder. Another purpose is to protect the typewriter of the record-medium
    from the effects of air moving in the vicinity of the typewriter.


CLS 400/714
TXT For screening key-board:

    Subject matter under subclass 713 wherein the device covers the key-board*
    of a typewriter.

    (1)     Note.  The purpose of the cover is usually to prevent the typist
    from seeing the key-board while learning the "touch" system of typing.


CLS 400/715
TXT Attachment for guiding fingers or hands of typist (e.g., hand rest):

    Subject matter under subclass 679 wherein significance is attributed to a
    device that separates the key* elements of a key-board* into groups of
    keys, each group including those keys that are usually pressed by a
    particular finger of the typist's hands during "touch" typing, or to a
    device that serves to support the hands or the arms of a typist during the
    typing operation.


CLS 400/716
TXT Attachment for illuminating or viewing (e.g., prism, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 679 wherein significance is attributed to a
    device that casts light on, or reflects or refracts light from, the
    record-medium* or a portion of the typewriter.

    (1)     Note.  The purpose of the device is to enable the typist to see
    those portions of the typewriter, or of the text being typed, that may
    normally be out of sight.  A prism (i.e., an optically transparent body
    having planar surfaces angularly related to one another) may be part of the
    viewing system.


CLS 400/717
TXT Attachment for holding an article (e.g., pencil, eraser, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 679 wherein significance is attributed to a
    device that is used to retain an object within sight or reach of the
    typist, which object is used by the typist during the typing operation.

    (1)     Note.  The object in this subclass may be a pen or pencil, or
    correcting paper, or eraser, etc.


CLS 400/718
TXT Copyholder:

    Subject matter under subclass 717 wherein the object retained is a text
    from which the typist is reading as the typing is done.


CLS 400/718.1
TXT Actuated by typewriter (e.g., to simulate line-spacing, for web copy, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 718 wherein the device is provided with
    structure that is movable to indicate to the typist that portion of the
    text in the holder that the typist is then reading from and typing, which
    structure is caused to be moved by a portion of the typewriter.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for a copyholder that moves the text
    being copied from a relative to a stationary indicator, or for a copyholder
    wherein a movable indicator moves over a stationary text, but in either
    event the movement results from actuation of the line-space* lever.  Also
    found in this subclass is a pointer or indicator that is actuated by a
    carriage-feed mechanism and indicates character* position, and a pointer
    that is actuated by a carriage-return mechanism to move a pointer in a
    line-space direction.


CLS 400/718.2
TXT With adjustment of line-spacing:

    Subject matter under subclass 718.1 wherein the text being copied is moved
    by the structure in line by line fashion, and wherein the distance that the
    text is moved for each line may be changed.


CLS 400/719
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition not provided for in the previous
    subclasses.

    (1)     Note.  A patent for this subclass would include a typewriter or a
    portion of a typewriter used for a nontyping operation.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS

    The following subclasses are collections of published disclosures
    pertaining to various aspects of the typewriter art, which aspects do not
    form appropriate bases for subclasses in the foregoing classification,
    (i.e., subclasses superior hereto in the schedule) wherein original copies
    of patents are placed in the basis of proximate function of the apparatus.



    These subclasses assist a search based on remote function of the apparatus
    and may be of further assistance to the searcher, either as a starting
    point in searching this class or as an indication of further related fields
    of search inside or outside the class.  Thus, there is here provided a
    second access for retrieval of a limited number of types of disclosures.
    Disclosures are placed in these subclasses for their value as references
    and as leads to appropriate main or secondary fields of search, without
    regard to their original classification or their claimed subject matter.
    The disclosures found in the following subclass are examples, only, of the
    indicated subject matter, and in no instance do they represent the entire
    extent of the prior art.


CLS 400/900
TXT CHEMICAL-SYMBOL CHARACTER:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the typewriter is capable
    of imprinting a character* that represents a symbol used in chemistry.


CLS 400/901
TXT CONTINUOUSLY ROTATING TYPE-HEAD:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the typewriter is
    provided with a type-head that includes a type-set-assemblage*, which
    type-head turns continuously and impacts the record-medium* even as it is
    turning.


CLS 400/902
TXT STEPPING-MOTOR DRIVE FOR WEB FEED:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the typewriter is
    provided with an electric motor that turns in increments and is used to
    line-space* a piece of web record-medium*.


CLS 400/903
TXT STEPPING-MOTOR DRIVE FOR CARRIAGE FEED:

    Subject matter under class definition wherein the typewriter is provided
    with an electric motor that turns in increments and is used to impart
    character-space movements to the carriage.


CLS 400/904
TXT SUBSCRIPT OR SUPERSCRIPT CHARACTER:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the typewriter is capable
    of typing a character* that is located below the usual print-line* or above
    the usual print-line.


CLS 401/
TTL COATING IMPLEMENTS WITH  MATERIAL  SUPPLY

CLS 401/
TXT INDEX TO CLASS DEFINITION AND NOTES





    I.      INTRODUCTORY NOTES

    II.     CLASS DEFINITION

    III.    GLOSSARY OF TERMS

    IV.     SCOPE OF THIS CLASS

    V.      RELATION TO OTHER CLASSES

    A.      Classes pertaining to coating.

    B.      Other loci of patents to coating implements with material supply.

    C.      Classes pertaining to subcombinations of, or accessories for, the
    subject matter of this class.

    D.      Miscellaneous.

    VI.     INDEX TO OTHER CLASSES REFERRED TO IN SECTION V OR IN SUBCLASS
    DEFINITIONS

    VII.    CRITERIA FOR PLACEMENT OF DOCUMENTS IN THIS CLASS

    VIII.   SUBCLASS DEFINITIONS

    I.      INTRODUCTORY NOTES

    This is the residual class for patents directed to coating implements as
    defined in Section II of this publication.

    For placement of a patent in this class, its claimed disclosure must meet
    the minimum requirements of the class definition and should not extend
    beyond the boundaries indicated in section IV, SCOPE OF THE CLASS, and
    discussed in section V, RELATIONSHIP TO OTHER CLASSES.

    Terms followed by an asterisk(*) are defined in section III, GLOSSARY OF
    TERMS, and those followed by the symbol # are defined in (10) Note to the
    definition of subclass 49.

    Where a defined term has been identified by an * or # symbol in the
    definition of a subclass, the identification is generally not repeated for
    the same term in the definition of subclasses indented thereunder.

    Throughout this publication, where appropriate, the alternative singular or
    plural forms of a noun have been indicated by the addition of "(s)"
    immediately following such noun (e.g., "tool(s)" to mean "tool or tools").

    II.     CLASS DEFINITION

    This is the residual class for a manually manipulated device for applying
    or spreading a coating on a work surface by movement of the device relative
    to the surface and contact therewith, which device includes, or is combined
    with, either:

    (A)     a supply of, or support for, solid coating material, or

    (B)     a tool* and means to supply fluent coating material either to the
    tool or to the work surface.

    (1)     Note.  For the purpose of this class, the term "manually
    manipulated" is intended to include manipulation of the implement by any
    part of the human body (such as the hand, foot or head).

    III.    GLOSSARY OF TERMS

    (1)     Note.  Terms used in titles and definitions of this class, either
    repeatedly or in a special or limited sense, are defined below.  For
    economy of space, an asterisk (*) following a term in a definition or note
    indicates that reference should be had to this glossary for its specific
    meaning.

            Certain terms related particularly to implements including solid
    material for rubbing contact are defined in (10) Note to the definition of
    subclass 49 and are signalized by the symbol # following the term in a
    definition or note where it occurs.

    APPLICATOR

    A coating tool or such a tool combined with a manually manipulable holder.

    FEEDER

    Means to guide fluent coating material from a reservoir to or through a
    coating tool or to a work surface.

    FLOW-REGULATOR

    Means (e.g., valve), including a part which is movable, to open, close, or
    restrict a passage for coating material or for gas, and thus to control
    movement of coating material in the implement.  A removable closure,
    however, will not be considered to be a flow-regulator.

    MATERIAL

    A liquid or solid substance which is intended to be applied to a work
    surface as a coating.

    RESERVOIR

    A container or retainer for storing fluent coating material.

    SUPPLY-MEANS

    A reservoir or a feeder for fluent coating material.

    TOOL

    An instrumentality having a portion which is designed and intended to apply
    or spread coating material on a work surface by contact therewith.  The
    tool may be spaced from the work surface only by the thickness of material
    deposited by the tool.

    IV.     SCOPE OF THIS CLASS

    This class is intended to serve as the residual depository for patents for
    manually held and manually manipulable coating implements which include a
    coating tool* and means for supplying coating material to the work
    contacting portion of the tool or to the work adjacent the tool.

    The tool may be any form of applicator or spreader, or a surface of a piece
    of solid coating material.  A cleaning tool which cannot be structurally
    distinguished from a coating tool will be considered as a tool appropriate
    for this class.

    The coating material may be liquid, flowable plastic, fluent (particulate)
    solid, solid dispersible or soluble in a liquid vehicle, solid adapted to
    be pulverized by some means prior to application to a work surface, or a
    self-sustaining piece of solid material adapted to deposit a layer of
    itself by rubbing contact with the work surface.  No distinction is made
    between materials which are intended to form a permanent coating (e.g.,
    paint, ink) or a temporary coating (e.g., water, soap, alcohol).

    The supply-means* may be a reservoir or material retainer in communication
    with the tool or a conduit for conveying material from a remote source to
    the tool. Also included in this class is the combination of a supply
    container and an independent applicator which is intended to be dipped into
    the container for collecting a quantity of coating material therefrom. In
    the case of solid coating material intended for coating by rubbing contact,
    the entire piece of material will be considered the supply and the work
    contacting portion will be considered the tool.

    Included in this class, then, are patents for nib type fountain pens,
    stylographic pens, ball point and felt nib pens, paint rollers with
    reservoir (tank, conduit or tray), and fountain brushes and mops; also
    patents for pencils, crayons, lipsticks and the like.

    A patent for the combination of an art device of this class with an art
    device of another class will generally be placed in this class (401) unless
    specifically provided for elsewhere.

    A patent for a subcombination of an art device of this class will generally
    be classified with the combination unless provided for elsewhere.  For
    example, the subcombination of a crayon holder will be placed in subclasses
    88+.

    A patent for a holder of general utility, in which the tool is not claimed
    or merely claimed broadly but is disclosed alternatively as a coating tool
    of this class or a tool classifiable elsewhere, will be placed in this
    class (401) as an original and cross-referenced in the class(es) providing
    for the other disclosed tool(s).

    V.      RELATION TO OTHER CLASSES

    A.      Classes pertaining to coating.

    1.      Class 15, Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, is the locus
    of patents to:

    a.      Machines designed or adapted for cleaning which includes a tool*
    and a supply-means*.

    b.      Tools*, with or without supply-means*, which are disclosed as
    attachments for cleaning or coating machines. See, especially, subclass
    104.9.

    c.      Coating tools*, per se, which may be disclosed as subcombinations
    of the subject matter of Class 401.  However, a patent to such a tool which
    includes claimed manipulating means disclosed as also serving as
    supply-means* (e.g., pen barrel) will be found in Class 401.

    d.      Stationary cleaning devices with material supply-means*, that is,
    devices which are mounted on a fixed support so as to require manipulation
    of the work relative to the tool*.  See subclass 104.92.

    e.      Tools* which are coated or impregnated with material adapted to be
    applied to a work surface but not including any additional supply-means*.
    See subclasses 104.93+.

    f.      Loading means for a coating tool*.  See subclasses 257.05+, and
    especially subclasses 257.07+ wherein the loading means is associated with
    an inkwell.

    2.      Class 101, Printing, is the locus of patents to hand-manipulated
    implements adapted to apply a coating in the form of characters or designs
    to a work surface.  See especially subclasses 114+, 327+ and 335+.

    3.      Class 106, Compositions: Coating or Plastic, is the residual locus
    of patents to coating compositions and processes for making them.  See,
    especially, subclasses 3+ for polishes, and subclasses 31.01+ for marking
    compositions (e.g., inks in subclasses 31.13+).  See, also, (2) Note under
    the class definition of Class 106 for the relation of that class to the
    other composition classes.

    4.      427, Coating Processes, for processes of coating, per se.

    5.      Class 118, Coating Apparatus, is the residual locus of patents to
    coating apparatus including coating devices which are stationary, that is,
    devices which are mounted on a fixed support so as to require manipulation
    of the work relative to the tool*.  See especially, subclasses 76+, for a
    coating device which includes a piece of solid material for rubbing
    contact, and subclasses 264+, for a device which includes a static,
    saturable or fluid-permeable, solid work-contacting coating element.

    (1)     Note.  For the line between Classes 15 and 118 see sections IV
    through IX in the definition of Class 118.

    B.      Other loci of patents to coating implements with material supply.

    1.      The following classes take precedence over Class 401 for a claimed
    coating implement with material supply including or combined with a
    particular feature or limitation, as indicated in the individual notes:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, is the locus of patents
    to stationary cleaning devices with material supply; and see section V, A,
    1-d of this publication.

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, is the locus of patents to line-marking
    devices (e.g., pen, pencil) combined with means adapted to cooperate with
    an element upon or adjacent the work surface for guiding movement of the
    tool*. See subclasses 18.1+ and especially subclasses 34+.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, is the locus of patents to applicators claimed or
    solely disclosed for coating plant surfaces by contact therewith.  See,
    especially, subclass 1.5.

    81,     Tools, subclass 9.22, is the locus of patents to coating implements
    with material supply combined with means for perforating the work surface
    so that the coating material may enter the perforations (e.g., tatooing
    pen).

    111,    Planting, is the locus of patents to implements claimed or solely
    disclosed for inserting seed, fertilizer or poisons into the ground.  See
    especially, subclass 7.2.

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 286+, is the locus of patents to toilet kits
    including a coating implement (e.g., lipstick, powder puff) and an
    additional part or device particularly useful for a toilet function (e.g.,
    comb, mirror); and subclasses 216+ and 320, for cosmetic applicators (e.g.,
    lipstick) so shaped as to aid in applying the cosmetic in a definite form
    or pattern.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 20.5, is the locus of patents to implements comprising a coating
    tool and a reservoir in combination with a source of supply and separable
    therefrom, wherein the source of supply includes force-producing means for
    moving coating material from the source of supply to the reservoir.
    (However, where the force-producing means (e.g., pump) is solely in the
    implement, or entirely absent from the combination, such patents will be
    found in Class 401, subclasses 118+).

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, is the
    locus of patents to coating implements combined with means for pressing the
    coated layer into engagement with another layer. See especially, subclasses
    441.5+ for implements of the envelope moistening and sealing type.

    184,    Lubrication, is the locus of patents to implements for lubricating
    machine parts (e.g., belt, cable or chain) wherein the part to be
    lubricated is recited in the claim.  See, especially subclasses 15.1+ and
    99.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, is the locus of patents to a coating
    implement combined with a receptacle or packaging means therefor.  See
    especially subclasses 214, 229, 316.1+, and 371.  However, where the
    combination is of such a nature that part of the cover material of the
    package remains with the implement during the coating operation (e.g., as a
    handle) or where the cover is only nominally claimed, such patent will be
    found in Class 401.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclass 94, for a device to
    affix indicia to the hard surface of a roadway and subclasses 101+, for a
    device which distributes material on the surface of a road of the earth
    combined with means to treat said surface of material. A manually
    manipulated device which merely coats a road surface to provide a visual
    indicia is classified in Class 401.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus, is
    the locus of patents to coating apparatus for moldable plastic material or
    earth materials (e.g., clay or mortar) in which the apparatus is capable of
    shaping the coating in plural dimensions, e.g., coating and controlling the
    shape of one side edge or imparting a particular cross-sectional shape to
    the deposited material.  See especially subclasses 87 and 458.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Class 523, subclass 161 for a composition containing a
    synthetic resin and having utility as a ballpoint pen ink composition or to
    processes of preparing said composition.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 1 to 3, 11+, 289+, and 890.1+ for patents to
    applicators and depositors solely disclosed as applying medicaments to the
    human body.



    2.      A patent to the combination of an implement of this class and a
    device classifiable in another class will generally be placed in such other
    class, provided no more of the implement structure is claimed than is
    necessary to establish its relationship with the other art device.  The
    classes where this rule has been applied include:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 427+, for the
    combination of a pencil with an eraser.

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 10+, for the combination
    of a pencil, or the like, with means to attach it to a garment pocket.

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 123+, for the combination of a coating
    implement with a cutter.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 89.1, for the
    combination of a pen with a blotter.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 334+, for a pen or
    pencil combined with means for displaying indicia (e.g., calendar).

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, appropriate subclasses for a coating
    implement combined with means for attachment to the body, hand, or wrist.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 570+, particularly
    subclasses 588+ for a randomly oriented coil holder which may include a
    particularly supported roll of note paper in a nominally defined writing
    implement, and subclass 905 for a reel with a storage chamber.

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, for the combination of a coating implement
    (e.g., pencil) and a socket for securing an accessory device (e.g., eraser)
     thereto; and see, for example, subclasses 42, 43, and 43.1+ for such an
    attachment having resilient jaws.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 96, for a coating implement combined with a
    light.



    C.      Classes pertaining to subcombinations of, or accessories for, the
    subject matter of this class.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, is the locus of patents
    to coating tools, per se, (subclasses 104.001+); and see section V, A, 1 of
    this publication.

    137,    Fluid Handling, is the residual locus of patents to fluid handling
    means which includes a flow-regulator*

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    is the locus of patents to a source of supply combined with filling means
    adapted to coact with a separable receiver which is an implement of Class
    401 (e.g., fountain pen); and see section V, B, 1, above.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 69.2+, is the locus of patents to
    inkwells or inkstands combined with a pen rack.

    222,    Dispensing, is the residual locus of patents to apparatus for
    dispensing material.  See, especially, subclasses 92+, for a dispenser
    including a nonresilient collapsible wall (e.g., toothpaste tube);
    subclasses 129+, for a dispensing device including selective or separate
    feed from plural supply sources or compartments; subclass 146, for a
    dispenser including means for heating or cooling the material dispensed;
    subclass 187, for a dispenser from which the material is discharged or fed
    by means of a wick or absorbent material; subclass 191, for a dispenser
    combined with a handle adapted for connection with a coating tool;
    subclasses 206+, for a dispenser including a resilient wall portion which
    is adapted to be elastically deformed so as to apply a discharging force on
    the material; subclasses 251+, for a dispenser having force-producing means
    for discharging material, which is not provided for in preceding
    subclasses; and subclasses 544+, for a dispenser having a flow-regulator*.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, is the locus of patents
    to devices which are disclosed as adapted to discharge material in the form
    of a spray, mist, droplets, or modified stream either to a coating tool or
    directly to a work surface.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, is the residual locus for patents to a
    flow-regulator*, per se.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, is the locus of patents for joints
    between fluid, wire or cable conducting pipes, tubes or tubular bodies.

    403,    Joints or Connections, is the locus of patents for joints of
    general application.





    D.      Miscellaneous.

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 441.2, is the locus of patents to processes
    of assembling the ball and seat of a ballpoint pen.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, is the residual locus of patents to
    mechanical movements, per se.  See subclasses 20-110 under MECHANICAL
    MOVEMENTS for means, other than gearing, for imparting motion to one body,
    wherein the two motions or an intermediate motion, differ in form, type or
    degree; subclasses 111+, for means for imparting a step-by-step movement to
    a unidirectionally driven member; subclasses 640+, for relatively rotatable
    bodies which impart or receive motion to or from each other; and subclasses
    469+, for control lever and linkage systems.

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclass 26.2, is the locus
    of patents to the combination of an inkwell and a desk.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 6+, is the
    residual locus of patents to processes of cleaning involving the use of an
    implement of this class (401).

    215,    Bottles and Jars, is the locus of patents to bottles and jars which
    may be disclosed as supply containers for coating material (e.g., inkwell).

    220,    Receptacles, is the residual locus of patents to containers which
    may be disclosed as supply containers for coating material.

    346,    Recorders, is the locus of patents to coating implements (e.g.,
    pen) disclosed solely for use as attachments for recorder mechanisms.  See,
    especially, subclass 140.1.

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, see subclasses 1+ for
    selective printing of symbolic information by ink jet.





    VI.     INDEX TO OTHER CLASSES REFERRED TO IN SECTION V OR IN SUBCLASS
    DEFINITIONS.

    Class   In section V,   In Subclass(es)
            Paragraph:

    15      A1, B1, B2, C   6, 7, 40, 48, 52,
                            55, 68, 82, 88, 92,
                            99, 117, 118, 121,
                            196, 201, 221,
                            265, 268

    16                      49, 88

    24      B2              131,  243

    29      D               208

    30      B2              99

    33      B1              9, 22, 35, 52, 193

    40      B2

    47      B1

    74      D               65, 66, 68, 179

    101     A2              208, 218

    106     A3              49

    108     D               118

    111     B1

    118     A5              1, 118, 196, 207

    132     B1              49, 118, 193, 196

    134     D

    137     C               44, 120, 270

    141     B1, C           118, 119, 134

    144                     96

    145     B2              50, 91

    156     B1

    184     B1              1, 49, 88.1

    206     B1              88, 131, 132

    211     C               118, 123, 131

    215     D               118, 132

    220     D               121, 132, 134, 141

    222     C1,             118, 120, 133, 134,

                            138, 140, 143, 145,

                            152, 156, 180, 190,

                            198, 270

    224     B2              6

    226                     55, 65, 67

    228                     1

    239     C               28, 134, 198

    242     B2

    248                     48

    251     C               270

    252                     125

    254                     67

    279     B2              93, 94

    285     C               86, 251

    294                     7

    312                     118

    346     D

    362     B2

    403     C               86, 251

    404     B.I.

    425     B 1             1, 5, 48

    427     4a

    428                     49

    464                     75, 86







    VII.    CRITERIA FOR PLACEMENT OF DOCUMENTS IN THIS CLASS

    In determining placement of patents in the schedule the following guide
    lines will be followed:

    A.      As between coordinate subclasses providing for specific tools,

    1.      Where the tool is only claimed generically and

    (a)     only one specific tool is disclosed, original placement will be in
    the subclass providing for the specific tool; however,

    (b)     when the disclosure includes several specific tools, original
    placement will be in the first subclass providing for any one of the
    specifically  disclosed tools with a cross-reference to each subclass
    providing for another specifically disclosed tool.

    2.      Where there are both generic claims and claims to a single
    disclosed species, the species claims will control original placement.

    3.      Where there are claims to more than one species of tool, patent
    placement will follow the usual principles of schedule superiority.

    B.      A patent to a subcombination of an implement of this class will be
    placed in the subclass providing for the combination except where the
    subcombination is provided for lower in the schedule or in another class.

    C.      For purposes of determining whether an implement has diverse tools
    for subclasses 16+, or plural tools for subclasses 29+, 34+, 36, and 37+,
    the diverse types of tools, as recognized and defined in the subclasses
    indicated parenthetically below, are as follows:

    1.      multiple-tip multiple-discharge tool (subclass 28),

    2.      solid material for rubbing contact (e.g., pencil, chalk, wax)
    (subclass 49),

    3.      porous tool through which material flow (subclass 196),

    4.      ball, roller or endless belt (subclass 208),

    5.      bifurcate pointed nib (subclass 221),

    6.      stylus (subclass 258),

    7.      blade-like, pad-like, or apertured tool (subclass 261),

    8.      brush, broom or mop (subclass 268), and

    9.      any tool which differs from any of the above in structure and in
    mode of transferring material from supply to work (subclass 292).

    Tool forms grouped together, as above, (e.g., ball, roller or endless belt)
    will be considered as of the same type and not diverse.  A patent for an
    implement, comprising plural tool forms of the same type, which does not
    fall within the definitions of subclasses 29+, 34+, 36, or 37+, will be
    placed in the first appearing subclass in the schedule providing for any
    one of said tool forms.

    A tool which may appear to fit two different type classifications will be
    considered to be of that type higher in the list above.  For example, a
    roller brush will be considered a roller (4). Hence an implement including
    a roller brush (4) and a flat brush (8) will be considered as comprising
    diverse tools for subclasses 16+ (i.e., a roller and a brush).


CLS 401/1
TXT Implement under the class definition provided with means for transferring
    thermal energy to the coating material carried by the implement prior to
    its application to the surface.

    (1)     Note.  For placement in this subclass a patent must contain an
    express teaching of a heat imparting means whereby heat is either (a)
    generated within the implement, as by a burner or resistance heater, or (b)
    conducted by the implement from an outside source, e.g., body (hand) heat
    of the user.

    (2)     Note.  A patent claiming structure adapted to utilize heat from a
    user's hand to induce or cause flow of material, by thermal expansion of
    said material in an unvented reservoir, for the purpose of coating a work
    surface will be placed in this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  A patent for a device for heating and applying sealing wax
    is acceptable for this class and subclass only when the disclosure makes it
    clear that the device includes a tool which contacts the work for applying
    or spreading the coating material.  A patent for a device for heating and
    dispensing sealing wax onto a surface, without contact between the device
    and the surface, will be placed in Class 222, Dispensing, subclass 113 or
    subclass 146.1.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for an implement whose coating material is melted by transfer of
    heat from a workpiece.

    225+,   for a bifurcate tool implement including means for retaining
    coating material which has flowed out of the reservoir because of
    inadvertent heating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 620+, for coating apparatus including
    means for treating the coating material with electrical or radiant energy,
    and especially subclasses 641+ for such an apparatus including radiant
    heating; and subclass 271, for an apparatus including an applicator coated
    or impregnated with normally solid material which requires the application
    of heat to render it fluent; and see section V A 5 of this publication.

    184,    Lubrication, subclasses 98+, for a lubricating device in which
    solid or semi-solid lubricant is adapted to be heated by the friction of
    bearing parts and thereby melted.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 146, for a dispenser combined with a heater
    for melting sealing wax and permitting it to flow to a surface; and see (3)
    Note, above.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 51+ for a similar implement,
    limited by disclosure to coating a metal surface with molten metal.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 110+, for a hand-manipulable sealing wax applier including (1)
    means to melt the wax and apply it to a surface and (2) a seal for making
    an impression on the applied wax.


CLS 401/2
TXT Implement under subclass 1 including a reservoir* and/or a feeder* and in
    which the heat imparting means is located only in the zone containing the
    tool* and the feeder, or at that portion of the reservoir from which the
    material passes directly to the work surface.


CLS 401/3
TXT Implement under the class definition including manually engageable means
    for manipulation of the implement which means is of a material or
    construction which resists heat transfer between the coating material and
    the hand of the user and is disclosed as having this property.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for an implement including material heating means and a
    heat-insulating handle.


CLS 401/4
TXT Implement under the class definition including a reservoir* and means
    within the reservoir which has the sole function of stirring or shaking the
    material therein or otherwise moving it for the purpose of putting or
    maintaining the material in a fluent state.

    (1)     Note.  The agitating means must be other than, or a modification
    of, a part of the implement which is used for a different purpose (e.g.,
    tool, feeder, valve, valve actuator).

    (2)     Note.  A scraper, cutter, or comminutor which merely divides the
    material into smaller particles is not considered to be an agitator for
    this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258+,   for an implement including a stylus tool in which the work-engaging
    rod or needle has an enlarged portion within the reservoir, usually serving
    primarily as a valve or a tool-actuator, which portion incidentally serves
    to agitate material in the reservoir.


CLS 401/5
TXT Implement under the class definition provided with adjustable means for
    positively determining the depth of the material deposited on the work
    surface by physical contact with the layer of material deposited or being
    deposited.

    (1)     Note.  The regulating means may be structure for adjustably spacing
    the tool orifice from the work surface, or it may be an additional
    adjustable element (e.g., an adjustable doctor blade) moving with the tool
    and smoothing or scraping the deposited material to the desired thickness.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 87 and 458 for a similar device including means for also
    controlling the shape of one side edge of, or for imparting a particular
    cross-sectional shape to, the deposited material; and see section V, B, 1
    of this publication.


CLS 401/6
TXT Device under the class definition provided with means shaped to fit some
    portion of the body of the operator or to secure the implement to the
    operator's body while in use; or to secure a supply reservoir*, which feeds
    to the tool*, to the operator's body.

    (1)     Note.  The mere recitation of a "handle" will not justify placement
    of a patent in this subclass.  However, such terms as "hand-grip,"
    "pistol-grip," or "finger notch will be sufficient for such placement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 443 for a dip
    pen shaped to engage or receive the hand or finger of the user; and see the
    search notes thereto.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, appropriate subclasses for a portable
    device having means for attachment to the body, or for conforming to the
    hand, respectively, to facilitate transportation thereof.


CLS 401/7
TXT Device under subclass 6 wherein the body attaching means is in the form of
    a pouchlike or cuplike receptacle which is open only at one end for
    receiving the hand or finger of the user.

    (1)     Note.  The receptacle may be in the form of a mitt or glove.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 227, for a
    coating implement, per se, with a pocket for receiving a hand, finger, or
    foot of the user.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 25, for a
    miscellaneous pouchlike or cuplike receptacle for receiving a hand or
    finger for facilitating a handling operation.


CLS 401/8
TXT Device under subclass 6 wherein the body attaching means is in the form of
    a ring (open or closed), or a band secured at its ends to the implements,
    for receiving the hand or finger of the user therethrough or thereunder.


CLS 401/9
TXT Implement under the class definition wherein the tool* is shaped, or a
    plurality of tools are arranged, (a) to engage a work surface which is
    concave or convex, or (b) to simultaneously engage (1) the opposing edges
    or surfaces of slit or groove, (2) angularly related or noncoplanar
    surfaces of a workpiece, or (3) opposite surfaces of a workpiece.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 41.1+, for an implement
    including a plurality of scribing tools for making spaced, parallel,
    relatively narrow lines on a curved or on plural work surfaces.


CLS 401/10
TXT Implement under subclass 9 including two tool surfaces facing toward each
    other so as to engage simultaneously two oppositely facing surfaces of a
    workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  A patent for an implement having tool surfaces for engaging
    the inner and outer surfaces of a tubular member will be placed in this
    subclass.


CLS 401/11
TXT Implement under subclass 9 wherein the tool has an inwardly curved surface
    adapted to conform to an outwardly curved work surface.


CLS 401/12
TXT Implement under subclass 11 provided with means for retaining a supply of
    butter or equivalent material and having an arcuate tool surface for
    conforming to the surface of an ear of corn and for applying the material
    thereto as the implement is moved therealong.


CLS 401/13
TXT Implement under the class definition provided with means, including a
    receiver, for removing all or some of the material* which has been applied
    by the tool* to the work surface for subsequent disposal or reuse.

    (1)     Note.  The receiver must be in the nature of a chamber or conduit
    and not merely an absorbent element which, by its nature, is inherently
    capable of performing the spreading function of a tool; but it may also
    serve as the supply-means*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for an implement including adjustable means for regulating coating
    thickness by displacing a surface portion of the material deposited by the
    tool.


CLS 401/14
TXT Implement under the class definition provided with cushioning, shock
    absorbing or other spacing means adapted to contact a surface in the
    working environment of the tool* and thereby to prevent contact of the tool
    or some other portion of the implement with said surface such as might
    scratch or mar that surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193,    for an implement provided with a work-engaging guide.


CLS 401/15
TXT Implement under the class definition provided with means to deflect or to
    prevent accidental or undesired spattering or spreading of material*, or to
    receive excess material which may flow by gravity from the tool* or the
    work surface.

    (1)     Note.  The excess material received by the drip catcher may or may
    not be returned to the supply means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for an implement including means to withdraw material from the work
    surface.

    225+,   for an implement of the bifurcate pointed nib type provided with a
    capillary overflow receiver.


CLS 401/16
TXT Implement under the class definition which includes two or more coating
    tools* of different type as listed under section VII C of this publication.

    (1)     Note.  Two or more tools of the same type, differing in degree
    (e.g., size or rigidity) or color of coating material to be applied, will
    not be considered diverse tools.  For example, a broom combined with a
    brush, or a chalk stick with a crayon, will be considered a plural tool,
    rather than a diverse tool, device.


CLS 401/17
TXT Implement under subclass 16 including mutually exclusive and entirely
    independent means in feeding relation to each of said diverse coating tools.


CLS 401/18
TXT Device under subclass 16 wherein one of said diverse tools is adapted to be
    physically removed, for individual use, from another part of the device
    which retains another tool.

    (1)     Note.  The inclusion in the device of a flexible strand or a chain
    to limit the distance which a removed tool can be moved away from the rest
    of the device will not bar placement in this subclass.


CLS 401/19
TXT Implement under subclass 16 including a piece of cohesive, nonfluent,
    self-sustaining material, an end or surface of the piece constituting one
    of the tools and the rest of the piece serving as the supply for said tool.

    (1)     Note.  A patent for an implement comprising a holder for solid
    material for rubbing contact combined with a tool of a different type which
    has no related supply means* will be placed in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for an implement in which each of the diverse coating tools has an
    independent supply (e.g., pencil and ball point pen).


CLS 401/20
TXT Implement under subclass 19 wherein the solid material is in the shape of
    an elongated relatively slender rod positioned in a casing or holder and
    another tool is a bifurcate nib pen as defined in subclass 221.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for a pencil combined with a pen having individual supply-means*
    (e.g., fountain pen).

    18,     for a pencil combined with a dip pen without supply-means, which
    pencil and pen are separable for independent use.


CLS 401/21
TXT Implement under subclass 16 one tool of which has an endless peripheral
    work-engaging surface and is mounted for movement about an axis passing
    therethrough, and wherein a portion of the surface is always communicable
    with the supply-means* and some other portion of the surface is
    simultaneously in position to engage the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208+,   for an implement of this class including only a ball, roller or
    endless belt tool.


CLS 401/22
TXT Implement under subclass 16 wherein said tools are so positioned relative
    to each other that substantially the same area of work surface engaged by
    one of the tools is immediately thereafter engaged by another of the tools
    in their movement over the surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 41.1+, for an implement
    including diverse scribing tools simultaneously operative along parallel
    paths for making a plurality of spaced, relatively narrow lines.


CLS 401/23
TXT Implement under subclass 16 wherein one tool is formed of a previous layer
    or mass having interstices of substantially capillary size through which
    the coating material must pass from one surface thereof to another and
    hence to the work surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196+,   for an implement of this class including only a porous tool.


CLS 401/24
TXT Implement under subclass 23 in which another tool is formed of a plurality
    of elongated filamentary elements joined to a common support, either
    individually or in groups, and projecting therefrom free of one another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for an implement which includes a tool which is a brush, broom or
    mop and another tool which is blade-like or pad like.

    268+,   for an implement of this class including only a tool of the brush,
    broom or mop type.


CLS 401/25
TXT Implement under subclass 16 in which one tool has a work-engaging portion
    in the form of either an elongated edge, a surface having substantial
    length and width, or an edge surrounding an opening at the end of a passage
    for coating material.


CLS 401/26
TXT Implement under subclass 25 wherein said one tool includes an opening
    extending through, and entirely surrounded by, the work engaging surface or
    edge, through which opening the material* may flow for distribution on the
    work surface by the tool.


CLS 401/27
TXT Implement under subclass 25 including means for releasing material* to a
    work surface in a zone which is near the area contracted by one of the
    tools, or in a manner not requiring engagement of any of the tools with the
    work surface.

    (1)     Note.  For the purpose of this subclass the depositing means may
    release the material to the work surface only, or partly to the work
    surface directly and partly to a tool.

    (2)     Note.  To be considered as discharging material to the work
    surface, for placement in this subclass, the discharge must be beyond the
    area circumscribed by the totality of the work-surface-contacting portions
    of the implement (e.g., beyond the area within a ring of
    work-surface-contacting filamentary elements or a group of brushes).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137,    for an implement comprising a tool, or similar tools, and means for
    dispensing material adjacent the tool(s), and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 401/28
TXT Implement under the class definition wherein the tool* comprises a support
    and a plurality of individually spaced finger-like or tooth-like work
    contacting projections extending therefrom and wherein either (a) the
    projections are hollow and open-ended to provided a passage for material*
    from the supply-means* to the work surface, or (b) the projections are
    formed integrally from the same material as the support and the support has
    a plurality of feed apertures adjacent the projections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    268+,   for an implement whose tool comprises a support and a plurality of
    filamentary elements assembled therewith; particularly, subclass 291, for
    such type of tool having a multi-perforate support for the filamentary
    elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 589+, for a
    multiple-tip multiple-discharge spray head.


CLS 401/29
TXT Implement under the class definition including more than one coating tool*,
    an enclosing member for at least one of said tools, and means to cause or
    permit relative movement between said one tool and its enclosing member,
    without complete separation, to the extent that the tool may alternately
    occupy an exposed operative position and an inoperative position wherein
    the tool is retained in concealed position within said enclosing member.

    (1)     Note.  A patent for an implement including a plurality of pieces of
    solid material for rubbing contact and means for selectively causing or
    permitting movement of each piece between operative and inoperative
    position will be placed in this subclass if each piece is provided with a
    carrier which cooperates with the means for causing or permitting movement.
     However, a patent wherein the implement includes only a single means which
    is directly engageable with a selected piece of such solid material to
    cause or permit movement of the piece through an opening in a guide member
    between operative and inoperative position will be placed in subclasses
    49+; and particularly in subclass 56 where the implement includes positive
    means for causing, rather than merely permitting, such movement.

    (2)     Note.  A patent in which a spare tool-and-reservoir unit is
    removable from a storage compartment of the implement and is adapted to be
    reassembled with the implement so as to be in use position, to replace an
    expended unit, will be placed in a subclass appropriate to the particular
    disclosed tool (e.g., subclasses 209+ for a ball point pen).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16+,    for an implement comprising diverse tools including at least one
    projectable and retractable tool.

    55+,    for an implement including means to project and retract a piece of
    solid material for rubbing contact; particularly indented subclasses 56 for
    such an implement including means for selectively replenishing its feed
    guide from any one of a plurality of storage compartments, 57 for such an
    implement including means for sequentially replenishing its feed guide from
    storage means, and 85 for such an implement including means for storing
    other such pieces in nonuse position for manual removal and association
    with the projection-retraction means.

    88+,    for an implement including means to guide a manually movable piece
    of solid material between nonuse and use positions; and indented subclass
    89 for this combination further including means to store an additional
    piece of material in nonuse position.

    99+,    for an implement including a single, linearly projectable and
    retractable tool which is other than solid material for rubbing contact.


CLS 401/30
TXT Implement under subclass 29 including one means for imparting projection
    and retraction movement to at least two tools, said means interconnecting
    said tools during such movement so that one tool is moved to the exposed
    position and the other tool is moved in a direction away from its exposed
    position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for an implement wherein movement of one tool toward projected
    position releases a retainer (e.g., latch), whereupon another tool is
    retracted by a spring.


CLS 401/31
TXT Implement under subclass 29 wherein at least two tools are projectable and
    retractable and each such tool includes a member protruding exteriorly of
    the body of the implement and accessible to the hand of a user, for moving
    the tool between projected and retracted position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82+,    for an implement including a manual actuator for advancing a single
    piece of solid coating material for rubbing contact.

    99,     for an implement including means, manually accessible through a
    slot in the side of the casing, for projecting and retracting a tool which
    is other than solid material for rubbing contact.


CLS 401/32
TXT Implement under subclass 29 wherein at least two tools are projectable and
    retractable, said implement including one means engageable with each such
    tool individually, at the option of the user, for moving the tool into
    operative position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for an implement comprising a single piece of solid material for
    rubbing contact, and means to selectively replenish material in the feed
    guide.


CLS 401/33
TXT Implement under subclass 32 including a resilient member for biasing the
    projected tool toward the retracted position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for an implement comprising means to advance a single tool of solid
    material for rubbing contact, which implement includes a retraction spring.

    109+,   for an implement including a single projectable and retractable
    tool, other than solid material for rubbing contact, and a retraction
    spring.


CLS 401/34
TXT Implement under the class definition including at least two coating tools*,
    each of which is fixed in operative position, and each of which is provided
    with a separate supply-means* in feeding relation thereto.

    (1)     Note.  A tool will be considered to be in operative position even
    though it is protected, when not in use, by a removable cap.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for an implement comprising confronting tool faces, each with
    independent supply, which tool faces are adapted to coat oppositely facing
    work surfaces.

    17,     for an implement comprising diverse tools each with an individual
    supply.

    29+,    for an implement including a plurality of tools at least one of
    which is projectable and retractable.


CLS 401/35
TXT Implement under subclass 34 wherein at least two tool-and-supply
    combinations are mounted adjacent each other and substantially in
    parallelism, with their work-engaging portions extending from the same end
    of a common support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for an implement having diverse tools simultaneously extending
    toward, and operative along the same path of, a work surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 41.1+, for an implement
    including plural side-by-side scribing tools whose work engaging portions
    are spaced from each other for making a plurality of spaced, relatively
    narrow lines.


CLS 401/36
TXT Implement under the class definition including a plurality of tools* and
    means, under control of the user, for directing flow of coating material
    from a supply-means* exclusively to any one of said tools.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45+,    for an implement including plural, individually controllable
    supply-means* feeding to the same tool or directly to the work surface.

    136,    for an implement including means for selectively feeding coating
    material either to a tool or to a work surface.


CLS 401/37
TXT Device under the class definition which includes more than one coating
    tool* and whose supply of coating material may be applied to the work
    surface by at least one, but not all, of the tools.

    (1)     Note.  A patent to an implement including a material supply and a
    tool for coating preceded or followed by a like tool for cleaning (e.g.,
    scraper, brush) will be placed in this or an indented subclass;

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for an implement having diverse tools operative along the same
    path, one of which tools may be a coating tool and the other a noncoating
    tool.


CLS 401/38
TXT Device under subclass 37 comprising a reservoir* or a retainer for solid
    coating material and wherein one of the tools* is an applicator* combined
    with the reservoir or retainer for receiving material* by direct contact of
    the tool with the material; and wherein the applicator is completely
    separable from the reservoir or retainer for removal of material from such
    reservoir or retainer and for application of the removed material to a work
    surface.

    (1)     Note.  A mere tenuous connection, such as a chain or flexible
    strand, between a supply container and a separable tool will not bar
    placement of a patent including such structure from this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118+,   for a device which includes only one tool, which tool is an
    applicator separable from its supply container.


CLS 401/39
TXT Device under subclass 37 in which said tools are each formed of a plurality
    of elongated filamentary elements (e.g., bristles, strands) joined to a
    common support (e.g., core, back or flexible backing) either individually
    or in groups (e.g., tufts) and projecting therefrom free of one another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16+,    for an implement including diverse tools.

    38,     for a device wherein one of the coating tools is completely
    separable from its supply container and is a brush, broom, or mop.


CLS 401/40
TXT Implement under the class definition including a supply-means* for a liquid
    vehicle and a supply of soluble or dispersible material so related to the
    supply-means that admixture of the material to the vehicle can occur by (a)
    flow of the vehicle only, into direct contact with the material, or (b)
    movement of the material into contact with the vehicle prior to entry of
    the mixture into the feeder*.

    (1)     Note.  A patent wherein contact of the concentrate with the carrier
    occurs as a result of the flow of each through a separate feeder, or a
    feeder branch, leading from a separate reservoir will be placed in
    subclasses 44+ even if a mixing chamber is provided at the junction of the
    feeder branches or separate feeders.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass will take a patent for an implement including
    a reservoir for a liquid carrier and a compartment, entirely out of
    communication with the reservoir, for the concentrated material, so
    arranged that the material can get into the reservoir only by some manual
    act of the user.

    (3)     Note.  An implement including concentrated material but not having
    a reservoir or conduit supply means for a liquid to dissolve the material,
    will be found in a subclass characterized by the nature of the disclosed
    tool; see the search notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for an implement including solid material and a liquid carrier in
    which the material is dissolved or dispersed and wherein the tool of the
    implement is of multiple-tip, multiple-discharge construction (e.g.,
    massaging tool).

    44+,    for an implement including a plurality of supply-means feeding to a
    single tool or to the work; and see (1) Note, above.

    201,    for a porous tool implement having a compartment for containing
    solid coating material adapted to be dissolved by an externally supplied
    liquid, as by dipping the implement in a liquid.

    252,    for a bifurcate nib implement including an attached supply retainer
    feeding directly to the tool, which retainer stores solid coating material
    adapted to be dissolved by dipping the tool and retainer in a liquid.

    268,    for an implement of the brush, broom, or mop type, having a
    compartment for containing solid material adapted to be dissolved by an
    external source accessible to the material directly, rather than by way of
    supply-means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 257.07 for a
    container including pigment and a supply-means for a liquid vehicle
    positioned to permit contact with the pigment for solution or dispersal of
    the liquid vehicle therewith.


CLS 401/41
TXT Implement under subclass 40 wherein the dispersible or soluble material is
    retained in position within, or contiguous to, the feeder or a discharge
    passage of a reservoir* for the liquid carrier.


CLS 401/42
TXT Implement under subclass 41 wherein the concentrated material is retained
    in position within, or contiguous to, the feeder and includes a flexible
    hose section for receiving the liquid carrier from a reservoir which is not
    part of the implement, or means for attachment of the implement to a pipe
    or flexible hose leading to such a reservoir.


CLS 401/43
TXT Implement under subclass 42 wherein the feeder includes divergent portions
    one of which communicates with the concentrated material and the other is
    isolated therefrom, and the implement includes means for stopping or for
    adjusting the flow through one of these portions with respect to the flow
    through the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for an implement including means for controlling the rate of flow
    from each of a plurality of supply sources which feed to a tool or to a
    work surface and are independent of (i.e., in nonserial flow relation to)
    one another.


CLS 401/44
TXT Implement under the class definition including either (a) a feeder* and a
    plurality of reservoirs* each of which is adapted to be in direct supply
    relation to the feeder, or (b) a plurality of feeders or feeder branches
    each of which is communicable with a different reservoir; said feeder,
    feeders, or feeder branches being adapted to guide coating material to or
    through the same tool*, or to a work surface, or to the tool and to the
    work surface.

    (1)     Note.  A patent for an implement including a spare supply
    cartridge, or a supply cartridge having compartments with individual
    dispensing outlets adapted to be individually connected by the user in
    feeding relation to the tool, will be placed in subclass 45.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40+,    for an implement including a plurality of intercommunicating
    reservoirs, of which one contains concentrated coating material and another
    contains concentrated coating material and another contains a liquid
    vehicle for the material, and wherein mixture of the materials occurs prior
    to entry into the feeder.

    43,     for an implement which includes a conduit supply-means* for a
    liquid vehicle which may, selectively, be placed in or out of communication
    with a reservoir or retainer for concentrated material.

    133+,   for an implement comprising a pen section which includes a feeder
    and means for establishing communication with a spare supply cartridge upon
    assembly therewith.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 255+, for a flow system including plural
    reservoirs each of which has a separate flow line leading therefrom.


CLS 401/45
TXT Implement under subclass 44 which either (a) includes a feeder adapted to
    be placed in feeding relation with any of a plurality of reservoirs, at the
    option of the user, or (b)includes means for varying or interrupting flow
    to or through one of the plurality of feeders or feeder branches, without
    similarly affecting the flow to or through another.

    (1)     Note.  Flow regulating means which is not part of the claimed
    device (e.g., a faucet valve) cannot be relied upon for placement of a
    patent in this subclass, even though such means is disclosed as serving to
    produce selective or proportional flow otherwise conforming to the
    definition of this subclass.


CLS 401/46
TXT Implement under subclass 45 in which one of the feeders or feeder branches
    is a pipe or flexible hose section for conducting material from a remote
    source which is not part of the implement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for an implement in which conduit supply means for a liquid carrier
    feeds into a reservoir or retainer for concentrated material for solution
    or dispersion of the material in the carrier.


CLS 401/47
TXT Implement under subclass 44 wherein the materials adapted to be supplied by
    the separate supply means differ in some physical or chemical property
    (e.g., color, consistency, liquid and solid).

    (1)     Note.  Hot and cold water supplied from separate taps or hoses are
    considered diverse materials for the purpose of this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass will take an implement including means to
    supply a propellant gas (e.g., foam generator) so as to intermingle with
    liquid coating material when such gas is applied in a feeder so that the
    mixture may be applied to a work surface. Where such intermingling occurs
    in the reservoir for the liquid coating material the patent will be placed
    in subclasses 40+.  Where the propellant is a gas which is not intended to
    be part of the coating the patent will be placed in either subclass 188 or
    190.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40+,    for an implement in which diverse materials are intermingled in a
    reservoir and applied to a surface; and see (2) Note above.

    188,    for an implement including one-way means for adding gas to the
    reservoir so as to apply force on the coating material therein.

    190,    for an implement including a pressurized reservoir; and see (2)
    Note, above.


CLS 401/48
TXT Implement under the class definition including a work-contacting element,
    in addition to the tool*, which element serves, or helps, to sustain the
    tool upon the work surface against the force of gravity, or to maintain a
    desired angular relationship of the tool to the work surface, during the
    coating operation.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides primarily for carriages, wheels,
    skids, etc., which relieve the tool or operator of the weight of the
    implement and which are intended to preclude operation of the device in a
    free path along the surface according to the will of the operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for an implement including adjustable support means for regulating
    the coating thickness.

    6,      for an implement provided with body-conforming (e.g., hand grip) or
    body-attaching (e.g., hand loop) means.

    9,      for an implement including a tool for a curved work surface or a
    plurality of tools arranged to engage a plurality of angularly related,
    noncoplanar or opposed work surfaces.

    131,    for an implement with means to support or stabilize same when not
    in use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 437, for a dip
    pen including means to support or stabilize the pen while in use.

    248,    Supports, subclass 118.5, for an armrest adapted to move with the
    arm of a person while he is performing a writing operation, and see the
    search notes thereto.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 87 and 458 for a hand-manipulable device for applying plastic
    material onto a surface including a work-engaging member to support or
    stabilize the device and controlling at least one lateral Woodworking Tools
    dimension of the applied material.


CLS 401/49
TXT Implement under the class definition comprising (1) a support# adapted to
    utilize a piece of nonfluent, cohesive, self-sustaining coating material
    and to allow an end or surface of said piece to be applied directly to a
    work surface, or (2) a piece of such material, an end or surface of which
    is specifically shaped to adapt it to be applied directly to a work surface.

    (1)     Note.  The work engaging end or surface of the piece of solid
    material constitutes the tool* and the rest of the piece is the supply.

    (2)     Note.  A patent claiming no more than a piece of solid coating
    material having a shaped end for contacting the work will be placed in
    this, rather than an indented subclass even though the disclosure indicates
    the piece as being intended for use in a combination provided for in such
    indented subclass.

    (3)     Note.  See the Search Notes, below to subclasses 1, 29+, 34+, 37+,
    118+, and 208+, for loci for devices which store coating material in a
    solid form but apply portions of it by means of a tool, frequently after
    converting the material to a fluent state.

    (4)     Note.  A disclosure that material is extruded through an orifice is
    an indication that the material is fluent and therefore is not in the form
    of a nonfluent, cohesive, self-sustaining piece, as required by the
    definition of this subclass.  A patent to a coating implement utilizing
    such extrudable material will be placed elsewhere in this class, based on
    other features; see the search notes below to other subclasses in this
    class.  For example, tooth paste, thick enough to retain its extruded shape
    when squeezed from a tube but which is wiped from the tube opening onto a
    surface, rather than applied in stick form, is not considered solid
    material for the purpose of this subclass; however, a self-sustaining
    semi-solid material (e.g., lip stick) of such consistency as to be
    attrited, rather than flowed upon a surface, is considered solid material
    for this subclass.

    (5)     Note.  A patent to solid coating material claimed in terms of its
    cross-sectional configuration will be placed in the appropriate class
    providing for stock material.  See section VI of the definition for Class
    428, Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, for the relationship of that
    class (428) to various other stock material classes.

    (6)     Note.  A patent to a piece of solid coating material, per se,
    claimed as a composition with no more than nominally expressed structure,
    as "bar," "rod," "block," "layer," "stick," "strand," "strip," etc., will
    be placed in the appropriate composition class.  The various composition
    classes are listed in order of superiority in the class definition of Class
    106, Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, under (2) Note, subheading A.

    (7)     Note.  For placement of a patent to a holder# of general utility,
    in which the tool is either not claimed or only broadly claimed, see the
    note in the last paragraph of section IV of this publication.

    (8)     Note.  An implement will be considered to include only a single
    tool, with provision for supply of additional pieces of material, when the
    implement includes only a single means to cause or permit movement of a
    piece of material through an opening in a guide# to a use position, which
    single means is selectively associable directly with a single one of a
    plurality of pieces of solid coating material.  However, the implement will
    be considered to have plural tools, and a patent thereto will be placed in
    subclasses 29+, when the implement has a single means to cause or permit
    such movement of a selectable one of a plurality of units, each of which
    units comprises a piece of solid coating material and a carrier#
    specifically provided for the purpose of selective association with said
    means; and see (1) Note to the definition of subclass 29.

    (9)     Note.  A single holder with two or more pieces of solid material,
    or with a single piece having two exposed ends, each piece or end having a
    surface positioned for use (e.g., a wooden pencil with different colored
    leads exposed at each end) will be considered an implement having plural
    tools for placement in subclass 34, unless one of said tools is projectable
    and retractable, in which case the patent to the implement will be placed
    in subclasses 29+.

    (10)    Note.  The following terms, which occur in the titles and
    definitions of this and indented subclasses, are defined below.  The symbol
    (#) following a word or phrase indicates that reference should be had to
    this glossary for the specific meaning thereof.  Terms which are used in
    the titles and definitions of this class as a whole are defined in the
    GLOSSARY OF TERMS, section III of this publication.




    CARRIER

    - a member attached to a piece of solid coating material so as to be
    movable therewith in a guide#.

    EXPENDABLE

    - SHEATH- a holder# for a piece of solid coating material which is adapted
    or required to have a portion thereof, adjacent the tool*, removed so as to
    expose the coating material as it is attrited in use.  See HOLDER.

    FOLLOWER

    - a member movable in a guide# and adapted to contact a piece of solid
    coating material therein to advance it to and through the opening in
    response to an applied force.

    GUIDE

    - that part of an implement which defines a path of travel for a piece of
    solid coating material to and through an opening in the implement to a use
    position of the tool* end of the piece.

    HOLDER

    - that part of an implement which retains a piece of solid coating
    material, or which retains a unit consisting of a piece and an expendable
    sheath, in such a manner as to expose the tool* end of the piece and to be
    manipulable therewith as a single entity (e.g., sleeve, wrapper).  The
    holder and the piece, or the holder and the unit, may be relatively
    adjustable manually, but not by advancing means (as defined in subclass 55).

    SUPPORT

    - all the parts of an implement, collectively, which retain the piece. It
    may be a holder# or it may include a carrier,# or follower, and a guide# as
    well as a housing for enclosing the entire organization of parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for an implement of this class provided with means for heating
    solid material, as for rendering it fluent.

    19+,    for an implement with solid coating material for rubbing contact
    and including a coating tool of some other species (e.g., pen or brush).

    29+     and 34+, for an implement comprising two or more tools of solid
    material for rubbing contact.

    37+,    for a device including a container for a supply of solid or pasty
    material and a plurality of brushes, one of which removes a portion of the
    material from the container for application to a work surface; particularly
    subclass 38, wherein said one brush is separable from the container for
    such application.

    40+,    for an implement including means retaining soluble or dispersible
    solid material and supply-means* for a liquid carrier in which the solid
    material is dissolved or dispersed before application to a work surface.

    118+,   for a device which includes a container for a solid or pasty
    material and an independent applicator for receiving material from the
    supply and applying it directly to the work; particularly, subclass 126,
    wherein the applicator is, or is attached to, a closure for the container
    and is thus retained in communication with the supply.

    200,    for an implement including a pervious tool through which
    particulate solid material may sift.

    201,    for a porous tool provided with a pocket for soluble solid material.

    208+,   for an implement with solid material supply which is not rubbed
    directly on the work, but is deposited on a roller tool which applies it to
    a work surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 108+, for a patent to a ring,
    cap or sleeve for reinforcing a pencil and which may include a pencil by
    name only.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses, for
    coating material claimed as a mass or layer; and see (6) Note above.

    132,    Toilet, subclass 319, for a cosmetic applier including a tool or
    guide peculiarly shaped to apply a cosmetic in a definite form or pattern
    (e.g., a bow-shaped lip rouge applicator).

    184,    Lubrication, subclass 15.1, for a solid stick lubricant for a named
    belt, cable or chain; and subclass 99, for a similar device adapted to be
    applied to a bearing.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for solid coating material in the form of a structurally defined or coated
    web, sheet or rod, for which no other classification, exists, or for a mass
    or layer containing a structurally defined element (e.g., particle or
    fiber), especially subclasses 357+.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Class 523, subclass 164 for a composition containing a
    synthetic resin and having utility as the writing material in a lead pencil
    or crayon composition or to processes of preparing said composition.

    604,    Surgery, subclass 309 for applying solid treating material to the
    body.


CLS 401/50
TXT Implement under subclass 49 including means to cut, tear, or break away a
    part of a substantially coextensive sleeve or covering for a piece of such
    solid material so as to expose an end of such piece, and/or means to impart
    a particular form (e.g., point or wedge) to the work contacting portion of
    the piece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for an implement provided with heating means which may shape or
    otherwise prepare the tip of a piece of solid material for coating.

    9+,     for an implement including a tool* so shaped as to engage a curved
    or non-planar surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 451+ for a pencil-sharpener, per se;
    particularly subclass 460 for a sharpener which is open-ended so that the
    point of the pencil may protrude therethrough to permit the pencil to be
    used with the sharpener retained thereon.


CLS 401/51
TXT Implement under subclass 50 wherein the severing or shaping means comprises
    a member having an edge revolvable relative to and in engagement with the
    material or sheath for severing portions therefrom.


CLS 401/52
TXT Implement under subclass 49 combined with a tool or device which has a
    function other than coating and for which combination there is no specific
    provision in any other class.

    (1)     Note.  A device which holds, moves, modifies, or works upon the
    coating tool or material supply is considered to have a coating function.
    For example, advancing means, means to limit tool projection, or means to
    store additional material, etc., are related to the coating implement.
    Examples of a device which does not have a coating function include an
    eraser, an envelope slitter, a pocket clip, a stamp holder, etc.

    (2)     Note.  A patent for a specific tool* of solid material for rubbing
    contact, or specific support# therefor, combined with another art device
    will be placed in this subclass.  However, if the tool or support is only
    claimed nominally, or if no more of the tool or support is claimed than is
    necessary to define the combination thereof with the other art device, then
    the patent will be placed in the class providing for the other art device;
    and see the search notes hereunder and under subclass 195 for the loci of
    such combinations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     18, or 19+, for a pencil combined with a coating tool of a
    different type.

    29+     or 34+, for an implement in which two or more
    solid-coating-material tools are combined.

    48,     for an implement of this class combined with means to support or
    stabilize it while in use.

    50+,    for a pencil combined with a device for shaping the tool (e.g.,
    pencil sharpener) or severing its covering.

    131,    for an implement for applying fluent coating material, combined
    with means to support or stabilize it when not in use.

    195,    for an implement of this class, utilizing a coating supply other
    than solid material for rubbing contact, combined with a tool or device
    which has a function other than coating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 125.1+, for
    an  eraser or eraser holder and means for attaching it to a pencil; or for
    such an eraser or holder in combination with a pencil, where no more of the
    pencil is claimed than is necessary to define the claimed relationship with
    the eraser.

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 123, for a pencil attachment including a cutter
    and, usually, a clasp.

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 414, for a cord straight-line
    guide combined with means for chalking the cord.


CLS 401/53
TXT Implement under subclass 49 provided with a guide#, and with means to
    prevent exposure of the tool* beyond a predetermined distance from the
    opening in the implement.

    (1)     Note.  The means to limit tool projection may include (a) a part
    which is movable to and from the use position of the tool so as to engage
    and locate the tool end of the piece at said use position, or (b) a part
    engageable with the tool end of the piece, or with a surface which is not
    part of the implement (e.g., a work surface), for locating the piece
    preliminary to operation of advancing means for moving the tool end a
    predetermined increment of advance through the opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for an implement including means for reinforcing the tool end of a
    piece of solid material for rubbing contact extending from an opening in a
    support.

    65,     for an implement having means to feed the solid material in a
    step-by-step manner for a plurality of predetermined increments.


CLS 401/54
TXT Implement under subclass 49 wherein the piece of coating material is
    elastically or resiliently mounted in the support# by means other than, or
    in addition to, an element of material advancing means, so that excess
    pressure on the tool end of the piece will cause the material to recede
    into the support and release of such excess pressure will allow a return of
    the tool end to use position.

    (1)     Note.  The piece of coating material may be rigidly held in a feed
    mechanism and the mechanism may be elastically mounted within an outer
    casing.

    (2)     Note.  The cushion mounting of the tool is usually to prevent
    breakage of the piece by excess force imposed on the tip.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for an implement including means to limit projection of the tool,
    which means may include a resilient mounting for the piece of material.

    81,     for an implement of this class provided with a spring to advance
    solid coating material for rubbing contact, which spring may also
    inherently serve as a cushioning means.


CLS 401/55
TXT Implement under subclass 49, including a guide# for the piece, and means to
    move such piece along the guide and through the opening in the guide to a
    use position of the tool*.

    (1)     Note.  Such a modification of a piece of material, or of an
    expendable sheath#, as a screw thread formed therealong which cooperates
    with a cam element in a holder or sleeve is considered to be advancing
    means for this subclass.  However, a patent to an implement consisting of a
    piece in an expendable-sheath not so modified and a point-protector
    therefor will be placed in subclass 91.

    (2)     Note.  A patent will be placed in the appropriate subclass indented
    hereunder when a claim therein includes the subject matter of the indented
    subclass and an element, at least, of a disclosed means to advance a piece
    of material, which might be the feed guide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29+,    for an implement including a plurality of coating tools (e.g.,
    solid-material tools) of which at least one is projectable to a use
    position or retractable within an enclosing member.

    54,     for an implement including (1) an assemblage comprising a guide and
    means to advance a piece of solid coating material through an opening in
    the guide, (2) a support for the unit, and (3) means for cushioning the
    unit in the support.

    99+,    for an implement of this class adapted to utilize fluent coating
    material and having a projectable and retractable tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 429+ and 433,
    for an implement including a guide and means to advance a piece of erasive
    material to and through an opening in the guide to a use position.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses,
    for means to advance material of indefinite length.


CLS 401/56
TXT Implement under subclass 55 provided with one or more compartments in which
    spare pieces of material may be carried and means under the control of the
    user to move, or permit movement of, a piece from a particularly chosen
    compartment of such plurality of compartments, or a particularly chosen
    piece from such one compartment, so as to dispose said piece in proper
    alignment with the advancing means for movement thereby.

    (1)     Note.  A patent to an implement having two compartments, each of
    which may carry several spare pieces of coating material, and means to
    select the compartment for replenishing the feed guide will be placed in
    this subclass, even if the spare pieces are randomly or sequentially
    conveyed from the individual compartment to the feed guide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29+,    for an implement which houses several pieces of coating material
    (usually of different colors) each of which, with its individual carrier,
    may be selectively moved to an operative position; and see (1) Note under
    the definition of subclass 29 and (8) Note under the definition of subclass
    49 for the distinction between an implement including plural tools and an
    implement with spare pieces of material for replenishing a feed guide.

    85,     for an implement having material advancing means and only one
    storage chamber for a plurality of additional pieces, each of which pieces
    may be randomly conveyed or guided into alignment with the advancing means.


CLS 401/57
TXT Implement under subclass 55 provided with one or more compartments offset
    from the guide and in each of which one or more spare pieces of material
    may be carried, and means to move or permit movement of said pieces in
    predetermined order from said compartment(s) so as to dispose each piece so
    moved in proper alignment with the advancing means for movement thereby
    through the opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29+,    for an implement which houses several pieces of coating material
    (usually of different colors) each of which, with its individual carrier,
    may be selectively presented to an operative position; and see (1) Note
    under the definition of 29+ and (8) Note under the definition of subclass
    49 for the distinction between an implement including plural tools and an
    implement with spare pieces of material for replenishing a feed guide.

    85,     for an implement having material advancing means and only one
    storage chamber for a plurality of additional pieces which may be randomly
    conveyed or guided from the chamber to the feed guide; or for an implement
    with such advancing means and a storage chamber for a single piece, or a
    single row of aligned pieces, of additional material which may be conveyed
    or guided to the feed guide.


CLS 401/58
TXT Implement under subclass 55 including an additional element extending from
    the support#, axially of the feed guide# and of the opening, for receiving
    (as specifically disclosed) some of the lateral force which may be imposed
    on a portion of the coating material extending from the opening.

    (1)     Note.  The reinforcement may be a projection extending along the
    piece of coating material or within a hollow in the piece of coating
    material, as a core, or it may be a tube surrounding substantially all but
    the work contacting end portion of the piece.

    (2)     Note.  For original placement of a patent in this subclass, the
    reinforcement must be claimed as a permanent part of the support or feed
    means and movable with respect to the piece; and its function must be
    clearly disclosed.  A patent claiming a permanently reinforced piece of
    coating material will be placed as an original copy on the basis of other
    claimed subject matter and cross-referenced here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for an implement including an element extending from the support
    and with which the tool end of the piece is alignable to determine the
    extent of projection thereof from the support.

    91,     for an implement including a support for solid coating material
    including a retractable sleeve which may also serve to protect the tool in
    exposed operative position.

    96+,    for a piece of solid coating material with a coextensive,
    expendable sheath attached thereto which serves to reinforce the piece.


CLS 401/59
TXT Implement under subclass 55 having means permanently attached thereto to
    cover the opening, which means is shiftable from the opening and so linked
    to the material advancing means that movement of one of said means causes
    movement of the other means.

    (1)     Note.  The permanent attachment may be by means of a flexible
    strand which serves as the linkage between the cover and the advancing
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for a coating implement, including advancing means for a piece of
    solid material for rubbing contact, provided with a removable closure for
    the opening which is adapted to prevent operation of the advancing means.

    62,     for a coating implement utilizing solid material and including a
    removable closure adapted to serve as an exteriorly accessible manual
    actuator for a follower or material carrier#, and a separate retraction
    means (e.g., spring).

    82+,    for a coating implement utilizing solid material and having a
    removable closure for the opening adapted to serve as an exteriorly
    accessible manual actuator for the advancing means.

    86,     for a coating implement utilizing a piece of solid material for
    rubbing contact, including means for retaining a closure for any part of
    the implement.

    98,     for a holder# for a piece of solid coating material including a
    removable cap for the tool end of the piece.

    108,    for an implement in which means to project or retract a tool for
    applying fluent material is interengaged with a closure or
    closure-operating means.


CLS 401/60
TXT Implement under subclass 59 wherein the cover is manually engageable to
    cause movement of the advancing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82+,    for a coating implement utilizing solid material having a removable
    closure adapted to serve as an exteriorly accessible manual actuator for
    the follower or material carrier#.


CLS 401/61
TXT Implement under subclass 55 including a removable closure for the tool#
    opening which, when in place, precludes operation of the material advancing
    means by preventing access thereto, or by blocking or disengaging the feed
    mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59+,    for an implement having material advancing means interengaged with
    a movable closure which is permanently attached to the implement; and see
    the search notes thereto for loci of other types of relationship between an
    implement and a closure.


CLS 401/62
TXT Implement under subclass 55 having means, supplemental to or independent of
    the advancing means, by which the piece (with or without the advancing
    means) may be wholly withdrawn from its extended operative position to a
    housed inoperative position.

    (1)     Note.  A disclosure that mere reversal of advancing means (e.g.,
    turning screw feed means in the opposite direction) will pull material back
    into an implement will not suffice for placement of a patent in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17      and 19+, for a retractable tool of solid coating material for
    rubbing contact combined with another type of coating tool.

    29+,    for an implement comprising a plurality of units, each of which
    includes a piece of solid coating material and a carrier#, and wherein at
    least one of said units may be projectable and retractable.

    99+,    for an implement including a retractable coating tool and a supply
    means for fluent material.


CLS 401/63
TXT Implement under subclass 55 including a carrier# and a plunger adapted to
    move through the carrier to discharge the piece therefrom.


CLS 401/64
TXT Implement under subclass 63 in which the advancing means includes a member
    with a helical camming surface and in which the carrier# and the plunger
    are each provided with a cam follower element individually directly
    engageable with the camming surface so that each is axially displaceable
    relative to the member upon relative rotation between the member and each
    of such plunger and carrier elements and the plunger is axially
    displaceable relative to the carrier.

    (1)     Note.  Ejection of the piece of material occurs when the axial
    movement of the carrier ceases as a result of its disengagement from the
    camming surface while the plunger continues to be cammingly advanced
    through the carrier.


CLS 401/65
TXT Implement under subclass 55 wherein the advancing means includes an element
    that is adapted to be moved cyclically and means actuated by such cyclic
    movement for causing a corresponding series of intermittent and
    unidirectional movements of the piece of material along the guide# path and
    through the opening.

    (1)     Note.  The term "cyclically" is intended to mean that the element
    is adapted to be moved from an original point through a path of travel and
    returned to the original point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for an implement wherein advancing means, including a cyclically
    movable element and an associated means for causing movement of the piece,
    is operative only when the tool end of the piece of material is at a single
    predetermined location (e.g., aligned with a surface-contacting actuator)
    so that movement of the piece is limited to a single predetermined
    increment from the aligned position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 88, for means, per se, other
    than gearing, adapted to convert reciprocating or oscillating motion to
    intermittent unidirectional motion.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 120+, for
    apparatus comprising an intermittent material-mover for advancing material
    of indefinite length.


CLS 401/66
TXT Implement under subclass 65 wherein the element and the means for causing
    movement of the piece comprise two members, one of which members has a
    series of linearly aligned spaced abutments and the other of which carries
    a protrusion, such members being constrained to move along paths such that,
    during reciprocating motion of one of said members, the protrusion latches
    with an abutment in one direction of such reciprocating motion to effect an
    increment of feed and slides over one or more abutments in the other
    direction to permit latching with another abutment for a second increment
    of feed in the next cycle of the element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 126+, for an intermittent
    grip type mechanical movement, which may include a rack and pawl; and
    subclasses 527+ and 575+, for mechanism including a rack and pawl, per se.


CLS 401/67
TXT Implement under subclass 65 wherein the cyclic element and the means for
    causing movement of the piece comprise two devices that are (1) each
    reciprocable relative to the guide# and to each other along a common axis,
    (2) each capable of gripping and releasing either a piece of material or a
    force transmitting means for said piece, and (3) sequentially operative so
    that one device grips the piece or the force transmitting means and
    advances the piece while the other is in a release condition, and then the
    other device grips the piece or the force transmitting means while the one
    device releases the piece or the force transmitting means and retracts
    without moving the piece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65,     for an implement including a single chuck, axially aligned with and
    relatively movable toward and from a stationary resilient gripping member,
    to advance solid coating material past said gripping member; and see the
    search notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 147+, for
    apparatus comprising alternately acting chucks for advancing such material.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 107, 210, and 254, for mechanism, including alternately acting
    chucks or clutches, for moving a rod or bar in step-by-step fashion.


CLS 401/68
TXT Implement under subclass 55 wherein the advancing means comprises a first
    member with a substantially helical camming surface and a second member
    rotatable relative thereto and having a cam element engageable with said
    camming surface, so that relative rotation between the members will cause
    an axial displacement therebetween and a corresponding advance of the
    coating material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63+,    for an implement including screw-feed advancing means and an
    ejector for discharging a piece of material from a carrier.

    65,     and indented subclass 66, for an implement including a helical cam
    follower as part of a step-by-step advancing means.

    116,    for an implement including screw-feed means for projecting and
    retracting a tool relative to an enclosing member.

    172+,   for an implement including screw-feed mechanism to move a
    force-applying piston axially through a reservoir.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 429+ and 433,
    for an implement including a guide# and screw-feed means for advancing a
    piece of erasive material to and through an opening in the implement to use
    position.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses, and
    especially subclass 424.8, for a disclosure of a screw-and-nut mechanical
    movement.


CLS 401/69
TXT Implement under subclass 68 including in the train of the advancing means a
    third member carrying an element in screw-feed engagement with one of the
    first said members so that it is axially displaceable with respect to each
    of said first members by actuation of said screw-feed means.

    (1)     Note.  The drawing below illustrates one example of the subject
    matter of this subclass:

            The effect of the compound screw feed is additive, i.e., member B
    is screwed outwardly from member A, to the extent of their threaded
    engagement, and member C is simultaneously screwed outwardly from member B,
    to the extent of their threaded engagement, thus ultimately placing the
    axial lengths of the individual screw elements substantially in alignment
    end-to-end.  Member A is rotatable, but not movable axially, in sleeve D.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for an implement wherein the feed means includes a pin which is
    cammed by the cooperative action of oppositely oriented helical slots in
    concentric tubes, which tubes are not axially displaceable relative to each
    other.


CLS 401/70
TXT Implement under subclass 68 provided with means by which the cam element
    may be moved radially out of camming engagement with the helical camming
    surface so as to permit relative axial movement of the camming member
    independent of any relative rotation.

    (1)     Note.  Disengagement of the screw feed members, for this subclass,
    requires more than merely unscrewing the members until they reach the end
    of their threaded engagement.  The disengaging means must allow the members
    the same telescoping movement, without relative rotation, as is achieved by
    the relative rotation.

    (2)     Note.  A patent to a pencil with feed means comprising a split nut
    and a threaded rod, and means to open said nut and allow it to slide
    axially along said rod, will be placed in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for an implement having disengageable screw-feed means and
    additional means to retract the tool.


CLS 401/71
TXT Implement under subclass 68, provided with an additional member having a
    camming surface concentric with and rotatable, but axially immovable,
    relative to the first member, the two camming surfaces being of opposite
    inclination so as to converge at a point where they are in camming
    engagement with the cam element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for an implement with screw feed means including oppositely
    oriented helices which are axially displaceable relative to each other
    during relative rotation and form part of a compound screw feed.


CLS 401/72
TXT Implement under subclass 68 wherein the camming surface is adapted to
    engage directly with a surface portion(s) of the piece, which portion(s)
    serve(s) as the cam element.

    (1)     Note.  The camming surface may be adapted to remove portions from,
    or mold, the piece of solid coating material along its longitudinal axis,
    whereby a part of the coating material becomes the cam element.  For
    example, the camming member may function as a thread cutting nut which
    imparts threads to a stick of lead.  The coating material is generally of
    noncircular cross section so that it may be engaged for rotation relative
    to the camming member.


CLS 401/73
TXT Implement under subclass 68 provided with a second opening, at the end of
    the feed guide# opposite the first opening, through which a piece of solid
    coating material may be inserted for engagement by the advancing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for an implement with means to selectively replenish material in
    the guide means for storage, and which may include a breech-loading
    screw-feed advancing means.

    57,     for an implement with means to sequentially replenish material in
    the guide means for storage, and which may include a breech-loading
    screw-feed advancing means.

    72,     for an implement of this class with screw-feed means to advance the
    material, which uses the material as a threaded element and which implement
    may be breech-loading.


CLS 401/74
TXT Implement under subclass 68 provided with means to inhibit rearward
    movement of the piece of material into the support# in response to a force
    applied to the tool# end of the piece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for an implement with screw-feed means for advancing a piece of
    material, said means comprising oppositely oriented helices which may
    function to retard retrograde movement.

    80,     for an implement including means for advancing a piece of material
    against the action of a resilient brake, which brake may also serve to
    prevent retrograde movement of the piece.

    83,     for an implement including means for advancing a piece of material
    by direct manual actuation and a latch for the advancing means.

    84,     for an implement including means for advancing a piece of material
    by direct manual actuation and including means to prevent the piece from
    being pushed back into the housing.


CLS 401/75
TXT Implement under subclass 68 having an element coaxially coupled to one of
    said members by means which permits relative movement between said member
    in an axial direction only, during the operation of the screw-feed
    mechanism, so that said element may transmit torque to said member at any
    point along the path of travel of the latter.

    (1)     Note.  The drawing below illustrates one example of the subject
    matter of this subclass:

            The square bore in element C provides a coupling with the square
    shaft of member A to allow relative non-rotatable axial movement between A
    and C.  The member A may be rotated relative to member B, by the element C,
    to move A axially with respect to B.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, subclasses 162+ for a coupling, per se, effective to
    transmit rotary motion, and wherein coupled members are relatively axially
    movable.


CLS 401/76
TXT Implement under subclass 75 wherein said one of said members comprises a
    threaded shaft which (1) is of flattened shape, in whole or in part, having
    a cross-section of which one lateral dimension is greater than the other,
    of (2) has an end portion bent in the form of a loop which is coplanar with
    the shaft and has portions extending laterally on two sides of the axis of
    the shaft, and wherein the element has an axially extending bore conforming
    to and slidably coupled with the flattened part of the shaft or the loop.

    (1)     Note.  The widened portion may comprise a pinched crimped portion
    of the shaft whose cross-section is thereby changed from circular to ribbon
    like; or the end of the shaft may be bent into a hook or loop.


CLS 401/77
TXT Implement under subclass 75 wherein the element is tubular, is disposed
    coaxially about said members which are in camming engagement, and is
    provided with a longitudinal groove or aperture within which a slender,
    radially extending portion of the cam element is slidably received.

    (1)     Note.  The drawing below illustrates an example of the subject
    matter of this subclass:

            The members A and B are rotatably and axially movable relative to
    each other; the element C and member A are axially but not rotatably
    movable relative to one another; and the element C and member B are
    rotatably but not axially movable relative to one another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for a screw-feed means comprising concentric tubular members with
    oppositely oriented helical slots in which a cam follower is received.

    75,     for an implement in which one of the screw-feed members is provided
    with a longitudinal slot and the torque-transmitting element with a
    cooperating projection received in the slot.


CLS 401/78
TXT Implement under subclass 77 wherein the advancing means includes a carrier#.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63+,    for a patent to an implement as defined above and further including
    an ejector adapted to move through the carrier to discharge the piece
    therefrom.


CLS 401/79
TXT Implement under subclass 68 in which each member is camming engagement, or
    an element fixedly attached thereto, is immediately accessible to a hand of
    the user, or to a hand-manipulated actuating member which is not part of
    the implement, for relative rotation of the members.

    (1)     Note.  A patent to an implement comprising a deep cup for retaining
    a piece of solid coating material and a sleeve threadedly engaged thereon
    as an extension of the cup wall at the open end thereof, such that the
    sleeve can be screwed back toward the bottom of the cup to expose the tool
    end of the piece, will be placed here.


CLS 401/80
TXT Implement under subclass 55 having an elastic element disposed at any
    location along the guide# so as to be in continuous frictional engagement
    with a piece in use.

    (1)     Note.  Generally the braking means comprises a tip of resilient
    structure (rubber or slit metal are examples) defining the opening in the
    implement through which leads of different size may be advanced and which
    applies a lateral compressive forced on the piece sufficient to prevent it
    from falling out of the implement, but which is yieldable to permit the
    advancing means to move it as required.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65,     for an implement of this class with step-by-step advancing means
    which may include a resilient braking means.

    74,     for an implement including screw-feed advancing means and a
    retrograde-movement retarder which may be a resilient braking means.

    83,     for an implement including a manually actuated advancing means for
    solid material and a latch for the advancing means.

    84,     for an implement including a manually actuated advancing means for
    solid material and a retrograde-movement retarder.


CLS 401/81
TXT Implement under subclass 55 wherein the advancing means comprises a
    resilient member under stress for applying force against an end of the
    piece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for an implement including spring means to advance a piece of
    material and means engageable with the tool end of the piece to limit the
    extent of the projection of the tool (e.g., a cap which, when placed in
    tool-protecting position, provides an abutment for the tool end of the
    piece to determine the extent of projection of the piece upon removal of
    the cap).

    54,     for an implement including a spring for cushioning a piece of solid
    material against excess pressure which may be applied at its tool end.

    62,     for an implement including a resilient member to advance a piece of
    material and additional means to retract the piece.


CLS 401/82
TXT Implement under subclass 55, wherein each element of the advancing means is
    adapted to move in the same direction and to the same extent as the piece
    to be advanced, and said means includes a projection protruding exteriorly
    of the guide# so as to be accessible to the hand of the user for moving
    said means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for a similar implement which also includes a retraction spring.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 436 for a dip
    pen including a manual actuator for projecting and retracting the penpoint.


CLS 401/83
TXT Implement under subclass 82 having means to releasably secure the advancing
    means in a desired position along its path.

    (1)     Note.  The latch restrains the advancing means positively, i.e., it
    prevents both forward and rearward movement, and it must be released to
    allow movement of the advancing means in either direction. The latch may
    include, for example, a detent to engage the actuator or means to increase
    and to diminish the friction between said advancing means and a stationary
    part of the implement.

    (2)     Note.  A patent to a coating implement with advancing means for a
    piece of solid material and which includes resilient means to continually
    resist movement of a piece of material in either direction will be placed
    in subclass 80.

    (3)     Note.  A device which allows one way movement of an actuator and
    jams or otherwise prevents reverse movement of the actuator or the piece of
    coating material is not considered a latch but a retrograde-movement
    preventer as provided for in subclass 84, herebelow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     for a solid coating material implement with means to advance
    material and resilient braking means; and see (2) Note above.

    84,     for an implement including manually actuated advancing means and a
    retrograde-movement preventer; and see (3) Note above.


CLS 401/84
TXT Implement under subclass 82 provided with an element which permits the
    piece to move only in the direction of feed and inhibits its movement in
    the reverse direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for a solid material coating implement having screw-feed advancing
    means and provided with a retrograde-movement retarder.

    83,     for a solid coating material implement including a manual actuator
    and a latch for the actuator which prevents both forward and rearward
    movement.


CLS 401/85
TXT Implement under subclass 55 provided with a compartment in which a spare
    piece(s) of coating material may be carried.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for an implement having means to select and conduct a particular
    piece of coating material from a storage compartment, or a piece from a
    particular compartment, to the guide means to replenish the material as it
    is used up.

    57,     for an implement having means to sequentially conduct pieces of
    coating material arranged in predetermined order to the guide means to
    replenish the material as it is used up.

    89,     for a holder for a piece of solid coating material, without
    material advancing means, having a compartment for retaining a spare
    piece(s).


CLS 401/86
TXT Implement under subclass 55 including a particular joint or connection
    between two elements of the device.

    (1)     Note.  For placement of an original patent in this subclass, a
    detail of the joint or connection must be claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52+,    for a solid coating material implement having a joint or connection
    with a non-coating device.

    59+,    for a solid coating material implement having advancing means
    interengaged with closure operating means.

    75+,    for an axially slidable, torque-applying coupling between a
    screw-feed member and an element by which said member may be rotated.

    251,    for an element-coupling and/or retaining means in an implement
    comprising a bifurcate pointed nib pen.

    290,    for a coupling between a tool of the brush, broom or mop type and
    that part of the implement which supports the tool; and see the search
    notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, appropriate subclasses for joints between
    fluid conducting pipes or tubular sections.

    403,    Joints or Connections, appropriate subclasses for joints of general
    application.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, appropriate subclasses for a flexible coupling between a
    shaft and a driven member.


CLS 401/87
TXT Implement under subclass 55 including a particular carrier# or guide#.

    (1)     Note.  For placement of an original patent in this subclass, a
    detail of the carrier or guide must be claimed.

    (2)     Note.  A carrier for this subclass must be disclosed as
    specifically adapted to a part of, or in the train of, advancing means.  A
    similar fastening means for the piece which is not associated with
    advancing means will be considered a holder and proper subject matter for
    subclasses 88+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88+,    for a holder for solid coating material which may include means to
    fasten or attached a piece of coating material thereto.


CLS 401/88
TXT Implement under subclass 49 comprising a holder#.

    (1)     Note.  The material may be retained in the holder by adhesion or by
    a tight fit (e.g., conventional wooden pencil, cue stick chalker, etc.).

    (2)     Note.  A patent to a piece of solid coating material, per se,
    having a shaped end for contacting the work will be placed in subclass 49
    even if disclosed in combination with a holder but not so claimed.

    (3)     Note.  A patent to a holder, per se, for such typical coating
    materials as writing sticks, cosmetic sticks, soap sticks, etc., will be
    placed in this or an indented subclass.

    (4)     Note.  A patent for a holder of general utility, in which the tool
    is claimed broadly and disclosed alternatively as a solid coating material
    tool of this class or a tool classifiable in another class, will be placed
    in this or an indented subclass as an original copy, and cross-referenced
    in the class(es) providing for the other disclosed tool(s).

    (5)     Note.  A patent to the combination of a holder# and a unit
    consisting of a piece of material and an expendable sheath#, will be placed
    in this subclass, rather than in indented subclasses 97+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for a patent to a piece of solid coating material having a shaped
    end for contacting the work; and see (2) Note, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 430 for an
    implement comprising a piece of erasive material for rubbing contact and
    either a holder therefor or a guide within which the piece is manually
    adjustable.

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 108+, for a patent to a ring,
    cap or sleeve for reinforcing a pencil and which may claim a pencil by name
    only.

    184,    Lubrication, subclass 15.1, for a holder and a piece of solid stick
    lubricant for a named belt, cable or chain; and subclass 99, for a similar
    device adapted to be applied to a bearing.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, appropriate subclasses, for a
    wrapped package containing solid coating material.


CLS 401/89
TXT Implement under subclass 88 having a compartment for retaining a spare
    piece of material.

    (1)     Note.  The channel of a holder which co forms in cross-section to
    the piece and terminates in the opening from which the tool projects is not
    considered to be a storage chamber for additional material regardless of
    the number of end-to-end aligned pieces of material therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50+,    for an implement including an expendable sheath, successive
    portions of which are adapted to be removed to expose successive, aligned
    pieces of coating material for use; and see (1) Note, above.

    85,     for an implement with means to advance solid coating material and
    with a storage chamber for additional material; and see the search notes
    thereto.


CLS 401/90
TXT Implement under subclass 89 which includes a guide# and which further
    includes means to move or direct

    (1)     a piece of material from a particularly chosen compartment from
    among a group of compartments, or a particularly chosen piece from one
    compartment, or

    (2)     each of a plurality of pieces in a predetermined order from the
    compartment(s) so as to dispose said piece in alignment with the passage of
    said guide but not to advance it along the guide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56      and 57, for implements of the type of this subclass which include
    means to advance the piece of material along the guide.


CLS 401/91
TXT Implement under subclass 88 in which the holder is an expendable-sheath#
    provided with a tubular member open at one end to receive the sheath and
    having an opening at the other end and shaped to conform to the tool end of
    the piece of material so as to protect such end during use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for an implement having means to advance solid coating material and
    which includes a protective sleeve, or sleeve-like extension, extending
    from the opening for reinforcing the piece of coating material.

    82+,    for an implement including a point-protective member which is a
    tubular guide having an opening through which the tool end of a piece of
    material is retractable and projectable, which piece is part of a unit
    including a carrier protruding exteriorly of the guide so as to serve as a
    manual actuator.

    92+,    for an implement including a sleeve at the opening of a tubular
    guide, which sleeve constitutes part, at least, of a chuck for retaining
    the piece in the guide.

    98,     for an implement combined with a removable cap wholly enclosing the
    tool end of a piece of material during non-use; and see the search notes
    thereto.

    117,    for an implement for applying fluent coating material and including
    a manually movable tool-enclosing sleeve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 460 for a use-condition pencil-point protector
    which is combined with pencil sharpening structure.


CLS 401/92
TXT Implement under subclass 88 including a guide# and a releasable gripping
    means for retaining the piece with the tool portion thereof in exposed use
    position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65+,    and especially 67, for an implement with means to advance a piece
    of solid coating material step-by-step, which means may include a chuck.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 438+, for a
    dip pen including a chuck for releasably gripping the penpoint.


CLS 401/93
TXT Implement under subclass 92 in which the the releasable gripping means
    comprises resilient jaw members, and a cylindrical member removably or
    adjustably positionable about said jaw members to force them into gripping
    engagement with the piece or the unit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    279,    Chucks and Sockets, appropriate subclasses, for a chuck, per se,
    which comprises resilient jaws and a clamp to force the jaws into gripping
    engagement.


CLS 401/94
TXT Implement under subclass 93 in which resilient means is provided to
    maintain the clamp and the resilient jaw members in material-gripping
    engagement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for an implement having a spring-closed clutch and means
    determining the extent of projection therefrom of the tool end of the piece.

    65+     and especially 67, for an implement with means to advance a piece
    of solid coating material step-by-step, which means may include a
    spring-closed clutch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, appropriate subclasses, for a spring-closed
    clutch, per se.


CLS 401/95
TXT Implement under subclass 88 wherein the holder comprises an element, other
    than an expendable-sheath#, having an opening at one end from which the
    tool* end of the piece projects and at least one other element positionable
    rearwardly only of said opening and capable of being moved relative to the
    first element to extend the overall longitudinal dimension of the implement
    for use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for an implement comprising an expendable-sheath for a piece of
    material and an element removably attached to the end of the sheath to
    increase the effective length of the implement.

    98,     for an implement with a removable cap for the tool, which cap is
    positionable to extend from the end of the holder# opposite the tool to
    increase the effective length of the implement.


CLS 401/96
TXT Implement under subclass 88 wherein the holder# is an expendable-sheath#.

    (1)     Note.  A patent to a conventional wooden pencil which has to be
    sharpened to a point (or to a paper-wrapped crayon from which some of the
    wrapper must be torn) for use will be placed in this or the indented
    subclass.

    (2)     Note.  A patent to the combination of a unit consisting of a piece
    of material and an expendable-sheath and a second holder engaging the
    sheath will be placed in subclass 88 or some other appropriate subclass
    indented thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 28, for a pencil-wood manufacturing machine.


CLS 401/97
TXT Implement under subclass 96 wherein the sheath comprises a plurality of
    separable axially aligned annular or conical elements, or has lines or
    areas of lesser strength, to facilitate progressive manual separation and
    removal of portions of the sheath adjacent the tool* end.


CLS 401/98
TXT Implement under subclass 88, further provided with a removable tube
    substantially closed at one end for covering the tool when not in use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for an implement including a removable cap which serves to limit
    tool projection.

    59+,    for an implement including a closure interengaged with advancing
    means (e.g., subclass 60, for a closure which serves as an actuator for the
    advancing means).

    61,     for an implement including a cap which serves to inactivate means
    for advancing a piece of material.

    91,     for an implement including a point- protective sleeve which is
    apertured to permit only the tool end of a piece of material in an
    expendable-sheath to protrude therethrough.

    95,     for a tool-protecting cap which may also serve as an extension for
    the holder when in use as a coating implement.

    269,    for an implement including a removable cap for a tool of the brush,
    broom, or mop type; and see the search notes thereto relating to similar
    combinations with other species of tools for applying fluent coating
    material.


CLS 401/99
TXT Implement under the class definition including an enclosure surrounding the
    tool* and means to cause or permit substantially rectilinear relative
    movement between the tool and the enclosure, without complete separation,
    to the extent that the tool may occupy an exposed operative position,
    protruding from the enclosure, or an inoperative position wherein it is
    retained in concealed position within said enclosure.

    (1)     Note.  A patent for a holder for a retractable tool, in which the
    tool is claimed generically and disclosed alternatively as a coating tool
    of this class or a tool classifiable elsewhere will be placed in an
    appropriate subclass in this class (183) as an original, and
    cross-referenced in the class(es) providing for the other disclosed tool(s).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29+,    for an implement comprising a plurality of tools at least one of
    which is movable axially for selective projection and retraction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 436 for a dip
    pen including a projectable and retractable penpoint.

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 162+, for a similar device wherein the tool is
    a knife blade.


CLS 401/100
TXT Implement under subclass 99 which includes an element having the property
    of attracting iron, which element serves to cause, permit, or prevent the
    relative movement between the tool and the enclosure.


CLS 401/101
TXT Implement under subclass 99 including means, responsive to relative
    movement between the tool and the enclosure, to produce a change in
    pressure on the coating material whereby to move material into or out of
    the reservoir*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143+,   for an implement including means to apply material-moving force
    wherein the tool is not retractable.


CLS 401/102
TXT Implement under subclass 99 wherein the enclosure is provided with a cover
    which serves, in its application to the enclosure, to move the tool into
    the inoperative retracted position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for an implement wherein replacement of a removable cap causes
    retraction of a tool of solid coating material for rubbing contact.


CLS 401/103
TXT Implement under subclass 99 including means to cause exposure of the tool,
    which means is actuated in response to the application of substantially
    axial force on the tool or on a portion of the implement immediately
    adjacent the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65+,    for an implement including means to cause incremental advance of a
    solid-material tool in response to substantially axial pressure thereon.

    272+,   for an implement of the brush, broom or mop type wherein a
    flow-regulator* is actuated by pressure of the tool on a work surface; and
    see the search notes thereto.


CLS 401/104
TXT Implement under subclass 99 wherein the means for retracting or projecting
    the tool, or for retaining it in either the retracted or projected
    position, is structurally or functionally related to a fastener mounted on
    the implement for securing it to a support, such as the edge of a garment
    pocket.


CLS 401/105
TXT Implement under subclass 104 wherein the fastener has a surface confronting
    an exterior wall portion of the implement to define therebetween a passage
    for receiving the support and wherein the passage, or the entrance thereto,
    is substantially closed when the tool is moved to the operative position
    and is substantially unobstructed when the tool is retracted.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass will take a patent for an implement which
    includes latch means to prevent movement of the tool to the concealed,
    inoperative position, which latch means includes a movable latch component
    which shifts outward of the exterior wall portion of the implement to block
    the support-receiving passage of the fastener when the tool is exposed.


CLS 401/106
TXT Implement under subclass 105 in which a passage-defining portion of the
    fastener is shifted to a position within an opening in or through the
    exterior wall of the implement so as to close the entrance to the passage.


CLS 401/107
TXT Implement under subclass 99 provided with tool-blocking means permanently
    attached to the implement and aligned with the axis of the enclosure in
    position to block relative movement between the tool and the member when
    the tool is in the enclosed position; said tool-blocking means being
    movable from said aligned position to permit relative movement between said
    member and tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    for an implement including a chuck which is adapted to hold the
    tool in projected position, which chuck has jaws which lie in the path of
    the tool in its retracted position.


CLS 401/108
TXT Implement under subclass 107 wherein the closure or gate is so associated
    with the means for moving the tool between the operative and inoperative
    positions that movement of the one causes movement of the other.

    (1)     Note.  The interrelation is such as to prevent contact of the tool
    with the closure or gate at all times.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for an implement wherein displacement of a closure or gate from its
    position across the enclosing member is caused by direct contact of the
    tool with the closure or gate.


CLS 401/109
TXT Implement under subclass 99 which includes a resilient member biasing the
    tool toward the inoperative position and means for releasably holding the
    tool in exposed position against the bias of said resilient member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for a similar combination wherein the tool is a solid piece of
    coating material.


CLS 401/110
TXT Implement under subclass 109 wherein the retainer comprises wall structure
    defining an endless path, and a member constrained to move therealong; said
    path having an edge or edges of such configuration throughout its extent as
    to direct the member to successive stop portions of the path which are
    arranged to hold the tool alternately in the inoperative and the exposed
    position against the bias of the retraction spring.


CLS 401/111
TXT Implement under subclass 110 wherein the means for moving the tool into the
    exposed position further includes an element movable relative both to said
    member and a part, at least, of said wall structure, which last-named
    element contacts either said member or said part to move the tool into and
    out of engagement with the stop surface.


CLS 401/112
TXT Implement under subclass 109 wherein the projected-position retainer
    comprises an abutment and a member which is movable transversely of or
    about the longitudinal axis of the implement so as to engage the abutment
    and thus overcome the biasing force of the retraction spring and retain the
    tool in exposed position.


CLS 401/113
TXT Implement under subclass 112 further including an element capable of
    movement into contact with the retaining element and thereby disengaging
    said retaining element from said abutment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104+,   for a latch release member which is part of or associated with a
    pocket clip.


CLS 401/114
TXT Implement under subclass 113 wherein the keeper comprises a resilient
    element biased to engage the abutment, or is acted on by a resilient
    element (in addition to the retraction spring) urging it into engagement
    with the abutment and maintaining it thereagainst, and wherein said release
    element overcomes the biasing force of the resilient element so as to
    permit the tool to return to the inoperative position.


CLS 401/115
TXT Implement under subclass 99 wherein movement of the tool to the exposed
    position is caused by a change in position or orientation of the entire
    implement.

    (1)     Note.  Movement of the tool may be under the influence of gravity
    or inertia.


CLS 401/116
TXT Implement under subclass 99 which includes an element having a helical
    camming surface and a member having a follower movable along the surface so
    that relative rotation between the element and the follower causes the
    relative movement between the tool and the enclosing member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68+,    for an implement in which similar relative movements are utilized
    for feeding or positioning a solid material tool.

    172+,   for an implement including a screw mechanism for moving a
    force-applying piston axially within a reservoir.


CLS 401/117
TXT Implement under subclass 99 wherein the enclosure is a cylindrical sheath
    and the tool is rigidly connected with an integral unit longer than the
    sheath so that both the unit and the sheath are accessible to the grasp for
    accomplishing relative sliding movement between the exposed and housed
    positions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     for a holder solid coating material including a manually shiftable
    protective sleeve for the material.

    107+,   for a device of the construction of this subclass, further
    including a closure or gate for blocking the tool passage.

    116,    for a device wherein the tool and a sheath-type enclosing member
    are relatively movable by cooperating screw means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 430 for an
    implement in which the enclosure for an erasing tool is a manually
    manipulable sleeve encompassing the tool in telescopic, project-retract
    relation thereto.


CLS 401/118
TXT Device under the class definition which comprises either a reservoir* or a
    retainer for solid material, and an applicator* combined with the reservoir
    or retainer for receiving coating material by direct contact of the tool*
    with the material; and in which the applicator is completely separable from
    the reservoir or retainer for removal of material from such reservoir or
    retainer and for application of the removed material to a work surface.

    (1)     Note.  Complete separability is recognized when, for example, the
    applicator must be supported by one hand of the user while the source of
    material is supported in another way (e.g., by the other hand or by a
    surface), even though a tenuous connection, such as a flexible chain or
    strand, exists between the reservoir or retainer and the applicator.

    (2)     Note.  An applier which is manually removed from a reservoir for
    coating material in order to load the tool of an applicator is not
    considered to be a coating tool for this class when the applicator which it
    loads neither is claimed nor is disclosed as being part of a structural
    organization including both the applier and the applicator. However, means
    which is removed from a reservoir of coating material in order to load the
    tool of an applicator is considered to be supply means when the applicator
    which it loads either is claimed or is disclosed as being part of a
    structural organization including both the loading means and the applicator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for the combination of the subject matter of this subclass and
    further including means to agitate material in the reservoir.

    18,     for a device which includes diverse coating tools one of which is
    an applicator which is separable from the supply container for use.

    191,    for an implement wherein the tool is shiftable from a position in
    which it is in contact with a supply of material to an applying position
    entirely out of contact with the supply, by separation from and
    reconnection with, or while remaining connected to, the implement; and see
    the search notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 257.05+ for a
    supply container and means to facilitate loading an unclaimed tool.

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclass 26.2 for an
    inkwell which is attached to a horizontally disposed surface.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 264+ for a supply source which
    includes a porous or absorbent member which is adapted to be contacted by
    an unclaimed applicator, which applicator would then be removed from the
    supply source for transfer to a work surface.

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 216+ and 320 for the combination of the subject
    matter of this subclass in which the applicator is a cosmetic applier
    having a shape peculiarly adapted to put a coating on a part of the human
    body in a definite shape or pattern (e.g., a bow-shaped lip rouge
    applicator) subclass 218 for a mascara applier that has means to shape the
    eyelash, and subclasses 293+ for powder box and applicator (e.g., compact).

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 30, 110+ and 311+, for the
    combination of an applicator and a supply container for transferring
    coating material thereto by force-applying means within the container.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 69.2+, for the combination of an ink
    receptacle and a pen support.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, and 220, Receptacles, appropriate subclasses, for
    a receptacle of general utility disclosed as a container for coating
    material.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 205 and 576+, for a dispenser which includes
    a trap chamber from which coating material may be removed by an applicator;
    and see the search notes to subclass 576.

    312,    Supports: Cabinet Structure, subclass 232, for a cabinet structure
    including an inkwell.


CLS 401/119
TXT Implement under subclass 118 wherein the applicator includes wall structure
    forming a compartment for storage of material collected from the reservoir.

    (1)     Note.  The mere concavity of a spoon is not considered to be a
    compartment for this subclass; see instead, subclass 128 for a spoon-like
    applicator united with a closure for the supply container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126+,   for an applicator-closure unit in which the applicator has a
    groove, slit, or other surface feature constituting less than a complete
    enclosure for the material; particularly, subclass 126, for such a slit of
    a bifurcate-tool applicator, and indented subclass 128, for
    material-retaining surface features of other kinds of applicators; and see
    (1) Note, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 30, 110+ or 311+, for the
    combination of a supply container and an implement provided with a material
    receiver (e.g., fountain pen) which is filled by force-applying means which
    is part of the container structure.


CLS 401/120
TXT Device under subclass 118 including a reservoir which comprises a supply
    chamber, and a tool-receiving chamber in communication therewith and
    providing the sole access to the supply chamber, so that the supply chamber
    is otherwise air-tight; whereby, establishment of a level of material in
    the tool-receiving chamber serves to prevent further flow of material
    thereinto from the supply chamber, and whereby removal of material from the
    tool-receiving chamber by the tool serves to permit flow of a corresponding
    quantity of material thereinto from the reservoir.

    (1)     Note.  A supply container of this general structure will be
    recognized as barometric if a drawing thereof discloses the level in the
    tool receiving chamber as being lower than that in the supply with no means
    to effect this difference other than atmospheric pressure in the tool
    chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 453+, for a barometric liquid level
    responsive or maintaining system.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 437,
    457, and 585+, for a dispenser including barometric control.


CLS 401/121
TXT Device under subclass 118 including means, other than or in addition to the
    side wall of the container, for removing material collected by the tool
    which is in excess of that desired for application to the work surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 423, for a
    receptacle attachment for removing surplus material from the tool of an
    unclaimed applicator, and subclass 257.05, for such an attachment which
    shapes the tool.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 695+, for a receptacle attachment for
    removing surplus material from the tool of an unclaimed applicator.


CLS 401/122
TXT Device under subclass 121 wherein the material removing means comprises
    such a particularly shaped restriction in the path of the tool, as it is
    withdrawn from the supply container, that at least two opposed surface
    portions of the tool are simultaneously engaged thereby to effect removal
    of excess material.


CLS 401/123
TXT Device under subclass 118 including a physical obstacle for preventing
    contact of the tool with, or its access to, the material in the supply
    container.

    (1)     Note.  A patent for a device including a temporary seal or a valve,
    for keeping the tool out of communication with the supply, will be placed
    in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 69.2+, for the combination of an
    inkstand or ink receptacle and a support adapted to retain a pen at a
    location remote from the ink supply.


CLS 401/124
TXT Device under subclass 123 wherein the tool is enclosed by a detachable
    cover which is other than, or in addition to, the supply container
    structure.

    (1)     Note.  A patent for a device including a removable cap, which cap
    includes a compartment for storing the supply material out of communication
    with the tool, will be placed in subclass 123.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    269,    for an implement including a cap which encloses the filamentary
    elements of a brush; and see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 401/125
TXT Implement under subclass 123 in which the tool is contained within the
    confines of wall structure integral with the supply container or with a
    support for said container.

    (1)     Note.  Placement in this subclass will not be barred by a
    disclosure that the tool compartment also contains a (liquid) substance
    which is not the intended coating material but, rather, is a
    tool-conditioning substance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses, particularly subclasses 120, 140, 141+, 406, and 438+, for a
    package or assembly of a cleaning composition which may include means for
    applying and/or spreading the cleaning composition.


CLS 401/126
TXT Device under subclass 118 wherein the applicator comprises (1) a tool and
    an attached cover for the supply container,  or (2) a tool positioned to
    lie across the entire surface of the material in the container or across
    the opening(s) in an apertured partition between the material supply and
    the tool; and wherein the tool is in position to receiver material when the
    applicator is in effective container-closing or material-overlying position.


CLS 401/127
TXT Device under subclass 126 wherein the applicator includes an elongated
    member which is movable in the direction of its length relative to the
    closure while remaining secured thereto.


CLS 401/128
TXT Implement under subclass 126 wherein the applicator is of substantially
    incompressible material and either (a) is a slender, elongate member having
    only one work-contacting element, or (b) includes a work-contacting portion
    which is bowl-shaped.

    (1)     Note.  The work contacting portion of the applicator may be
    pointed, blunt, or bulbous.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126,    for a device comprising a supply container and an independent
    closure-attached bifurcate applicator (e.g., pen nib).

    130,    for a device comprising a supply container and an independent
    closure-attached applicator whose work-contacting portion is a straight
    blade.


CLS 401/129
TXT Implement under subclass 126 wherein the applicator comprises a plurality
    of filamentary work-contacting elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126,    for a supply container and an independent bifurcate, pointed-nib
    applicator.


CLS 401/130
TXT Implement under subclass 126 wherein the work-contacting portion of the
    applicator has an elongated edge or a substantially continuous surface of
    substantial length and width.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 293+ for a powder compact having a mirror or
    other Class 132 "kit" feature.


CLS 401/131
TXT Implement under the class definition intended to be supported upon a
    surface when not in use, which implement either is so shaped with relation
    to said surface, or is combined with retaining means so related to said
    surface, that contact of the tool* with the surface, or movement of the
    implement thereon, (such as tipping or rolling) is prevented.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass does not comprehend the
    mere combination of a protecting member (e.g., cap, sheath, container) with
    the tool unless there is some modification of the member relating it to a
    supporting surface for the implement.

    (2)     Note.  An appropriate support class may take the combination of the
    support with the implement when no significant implement limitation is
    claimed.  For example, a patent to the combination of an implement and a
    fastener will be placed in Class 24, Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc.,
    subclasses 10+ ,provided that no more of the implement is claimed than is
    necessary for the association of the fastener therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for an implement provided with means for supporting or stabilizing
    it while in use; and see the search notes thereto.

    118+,   for a supply container and a separable applicator wherein the
    applicator is supported by the container when not in use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 10+ for the provision of
    a fastener for securing a coating implement to a garment; and see,
    particularly, subclass 11 for a clasp type fastener.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 214 for a container for a
    plurality of stationery implements.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 69+ for a device designed to support a
    pen or pencil when not in use; particularly, subclasses 69.5+ for such a
    device which is socketed to receive the tool end of an implement.


CLS 401/132
TXT Implement under the class definition having (a) a wall portion or a seal
    which must be broken, cut, or torn to release coating material to the
    tool*, or (b) having a tool-supporting section connectable with a
    replaceable container having such a wall portion or seal, which section
    includes means to break, cut, tear or displace the wall portion or seal to
    release coating material to the tool.

    (1)     Note.  A patent for a material-containing capsule which is intended
    to be ruptured and applied directly to a work surface as a coating
    implement will be placed in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  A patent for a sealed cartridge including structure
    particularly adapting it for use with a coating implement cartridge
    receiver will be placed in an appropriate subclass indented hereunder;
    however, a mere sealed receptacle containing a supply of liquid coating
    material and having a rupturable wall will be considered a package for
    Class 206, Special Receptacle or Package.

    (3)     Note.  A patent disclosing an implement with a frangible,
    flow-preventing wall portion will not be placed in this or an indented
    subclass when claimed in seal-destroyed condition, with the coating
    material capable of reaching the tool; see, instead, subclasses 143+ or the
    subclass appropriate to the particular tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, appropriate subclasses for a mere
    sealed receptacle containing a supply of liquid material and having a
    rupturable wall, and see (2) Note above.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 47+ for a receptacle of the bottle,
    jar, or jug type, the neck of which is especially adapted to be broken (and
    usually must be) to dispense the contents; and subclasses 250+ for a
    frangible cap-closure (usually irremovably attached to such a receptacle).

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 260+ for a receptacle or receptacle closure
    particularly modified so as to permit the application thereto of an opening
    device; and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 401/133
TXT Implement as defined in part (2) of the definition under subclass 132.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for an implement including a spare supply cartridge, or a supply
    cartridge having compartments with individual dispensing outlets adapted to
    be individually connected by the user in feeding relation with the tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 80+, for dispensing structure of general
    utility combined with means for forming an opening in a supply container.


CLS 401/134
TXT Implement under subclass 133 wherein the material-releasing means is an
    element adapted to penetrate and cut, break, or tear the wall portion or
    seal to form a material releasing opening therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 329, for filling apparatus which includes piercing means to
    establish a flow path between the supply means and a receiver.

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 278 for a receptacle puncturing element which
    is carried by, or serves as a closure for, the receptacle.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 81+, for a similar combination in a
    dispensing device of general utility, but not including a coating tool; and
    see section 19 of the definition of that class.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 309, for a
    similar combination wherein the material is dispensed by sprinkling or
    spraying operation.


CLS 401/135
TXT Implement under subclass 134 including a passage for admitting air to the
    container, or to a casing surrounding the container, to control the flow of
    material; a flow-regulator*; or means by which pressure may be applied
    against the material in the container to cause or assist in its discharge
    to the tool.

    (1)     Note.  The air passage may be disclosed as an enlarged channel in a
    fountain pen feeder* alongside of and in longitudinal communication with
    the capillary ink feed groove.


CLS 401/136
TXT Implement under the class definition wherein means is provided, under
    control of the user, for directing flow of material* to the tool* or,
    optionally, for dispensing the material directly to a work surface.

    (1)     Note.  To be considered as discharging material directly to the
    work surface, for placement in this subclass, the discharge must be beyond
    the area circumscribed by the totality of the work-contacting portions of
    the implement (e.g., beyond the area within a ring of
    work-surface-contacting filamentary elements or a group of brushes).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for a similar implement including diverse tools.

    36,     for an implement including means for alternatively feeding coating
    material to each of a plurality of tools.

    43,     for an implement which includes a feeder* provided with means to
    direct material alternatively (a) to a work surface, independently of the
    tool, or (b) into contact with concentrated material and then, as an
    admixture or solution therewith, to the tool.

    44+,    for an implement including (a) a feeder and a plurality of
    reservoirs each of which is adapted to be placed selectively in supply
    relation with the feeder, or (b) a plurality of feeders each of which is
    separately communicable with a different one of a plurality of reservoirs,
    which feeder or feeders may alternatively conduct material to the tool, or
    directly to the work surface.

    284,    for an implement in which the feeder terminates at or beyond a
    lateral edge of a tool (of the brush, broom, or mop type) but releases
    material to said lateral edge only.


CLS 401/137
TXT Implement under the class definition including means for releasing material
    to a work surface in a zone which is near the area contacted by the tool*,
    or in a manner not requiring concurrent engagement of the tool with the
    work surface.

    (1)     Note.  For the purpose of this subclass the depositing means may
    release the material to the work surface only, or partly to the work
    surface directly and partly to the tool.

    (2)     Note.  To be considered as discharging material to the work
    surface, for placement in this subclass, the discharge must be beyond the
    area circumscribed by the totality of the work-surface-contacting portions
    of the implement (e.g., beyond the area within a ring of
    work-surface-contacting filamentary elements or a group of brushes).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for the combination of means for releasing material directly upon a
    work surface and adjustable means for regulating the thickness of the
    deposited material.

    27,     for a similar implement including diverse tools.

    44+,    for a similar device including a plurality of supply sources and
    means for depositing material from the supply sources, either optionally or
    simultaneously, adjacent the tool.

    136,    for an implement including means for releasing material
    alternatively either to the tool or directly to the work surface, e.g., in
    advance of the tool.

    284,    for an implement in which the feeder* terminates at or beyond a
    lateral edge of a tool (of the brush, broom, or mop type) but releases
    material to said lateral edge only.


CLS 401/138
TXT Implement under subclass 137 wherein a reservoir* is attached to and
    supported on an external portion of a graspable, tool-manipulating,
    rod-like portion of the implement, extending directly from the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140,    for an implement wherein the supply system is mounted on an
    elongated implement handle and feeds directly to the tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 191, for a patent disclosing the combination
    of this subclass, but wherein the claims are limited to the subcombination
    of a dispensing reservoir and an implement handle.


CLS 401/139
TXT Implement under subclass 137 wherein the tool has a substantially
    continuous surface or linear edge adapted to contact the work surface for
    spreading, scraping or squeegeeing the material deposited thereon.

    (1)     Note.  The combination of this subclass may include a tool of
    porous material having a blade-like or pad-like tool configuration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261+,   for a blade-like or pad-like tool with means for feeding material
    to or through the tool.


CLS 401/140
TXT Implement under the class definition including a reservoir* detachably
    connected to an exterior portion of a rod-like manually engageable
    manipulating element attached to and extending directly from the tool*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    for a similar combination wherein the coating material is deposited
    directly on the work surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 191, for a patent disclosing the combination
    of this subclass, but wherein the claims are limited to the subcombination
    of a dispensing reservoir and an implement handle.


CLS 401/141
TXT Implement under the class definition which includes a reservoir* and an
    element in the reservoir in contact with the free surface of the material,
    the element being movable with the material, either by force of gravity or
    adhesion with the material, and continuously conforming to the
    cross-sectional area of the reservoir.

    (1)     Note.  The follower usually serves the purpose of preventing
    leakage of the material at the end of the reservoir remote from the tool*,
    and may be a fluid (e.g., viscous) follower which prevents access of
    ambient air to the material in the reservoir.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171+,   for an implement wherein a follower within the reservoir is
    manipulated for movement relative to the level of material to produce force
    on the material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 216+ for a floating closure and subclasses
    578+ for an internal closure-like member which rests on the unused content
    of a container.


CLS 401/142
TXT Implement under subclass 141 in which the element is a liquid or viscous
    substance.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass will take a patent to a follower comprising:

    (a)     a solid element and a fluid substance, other than coating material,
    surrounding the element so as to be in contact with and to conform to the
    reservoir wall, or

    (b)     a porous mass impregnated with liquid or viscous material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    190,    for an Aerosol implement in which a gas under super atomspheric
    pressure is in contact with the material, or with a follower in contact
    with the material, in the reservoir; and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 401/143
TXT Implement under the class definition comprising a resilient wall
    reservoir*, or including a reservoir or feeder* and means to urge coating
    material into the reservoir, or along the feeder toward the tool*.

    (1)     Note.  The force-applying means must be other than, or in addition
    to, gravity or capillary flow.

    (2)     Note.  The force-applying means may be a gaseous or gas-producing
    propellant within the reservoir; see subclass 190.

    (3)     Note.  Subclasses 143+ will take a patent having guide means to
    permit adding or removing air by the operation of the user's mouth (e.g.,
    subclasses 187+, for a patent wherein such means may be found disclosed as
    facilitating addition or removal of gas to or from the reservoir; and
    subclass 157, for a patent wherein a flexible wall is collapsed by such
    means).  A mere air passage is not, otherwise, force-applying means for
    subclasses 143+.

    (4)     Note.  A nonresilient flexible wall which is permanently collapsed
    by direct digital engagement does not constitute force-applying means for
    subclasses 143+.  A patent including such structure will be placed in an
    appropriate subclass related to the type of tool claimed.  However, a
    patent wherein a resilient wall is collapsed by additional means provided
    therefor will be placed in subclasses 156+, and if collapsed by direct
    manual engagement will be placed in subclasses 183+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40+,    for an implement whose reservoir is subject to the action of
    material-moving force-applying means, which reservoir contains a liquid
    vehicle and receives dispersible or soluble material for interaction
    therewith, or which reservoir receives the product of such an interaction.

    101,    for an implement including a retractable tool and means for
    applying force on the material in the reservoir.

    135,    for an implement including a receiver for a sealed-cartridge
    reservoir and means to apply force on the material in the reservoir.

    223,    for an implement wherein the reservoir is filled solely by the
    action of capillary material contained therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 251+, 576, 577, and 578+, for a dispenser
    for fluent material including a force-applying  discharge assistant; and
    see the search notes thereto.


CLS 401/144
TXT Implement under subclass 143 provided with a hollow cylinder in flow
    relation to the reservoir and means to position said cylinder axially of
    the implement and outwardly of the working end of the tool for insertion in
    a replenishing supply.


CLS 401/145
TXT Implement under subclass 143 wherein the reservoir is essentially of
    inflexible wall structure but further includes a pliant or resilient
    membrane positioned at all times entirely within the confines of the wall
    structure, and means for deforming the membrane within the reservoir so as
    to increase or decrease the available material holding space in the
    reservoir and thereby produce the material-moving force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152+,   for an implement including a rigid wall and a flexible wall portion
    not limited in its range of movement to the confines of the rigid wall
    structure, and means for deforming or collapsing said wall portion.

    184+,   for an implement including a manually collapsible, flexible wall
    portion of otherwise rigid reservoir wall structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 581, for a dispensing inkwell which includes
    flexible diaphragm means for generating a force to move ink from the supply
    to a dip well.


CLS 401/146
TXT Implement under subclass 143 wherein a force-applying means is directly
    effective only in the feeder or at a locus which is directly contiguous to
    the feeder, but not in the reservoir.

    (1)     Note.  A pump chamber located between a reservoir and the feeder is
    considered to be not a part of the reservoir; even though the patent may
    refer to such a chamber as a 'reservoir' or 'reservoir portion'.  Such a
    chamber will be recognized in the disclosure by wall structure setting off
    the locus as being distinct from the reservoir space.  For example, wall
    structure which is contiguous to the feeder and so conforms to a piston
    moving therealong as to make the piston effective at said locus only will
    be recognized as defining a pump chamber and will not be considered as part
    of the reservoir, even though in direct communication therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for a patent including force-applying means at, or adjacent, the
    tool to withdraw excess material applied to a work surface back into the
    implement.

    151,    for an implement including a plurality of reservoirs or reservoir
    portions in series, one of which may be directly contiguous to the feeder,
    and including force-applying means to cause flow of material from one
    reservoir or portion to another.

    184+,   for an implement whose force-applying means is a manually
    engageable, resilient wall portion which may be at the discharge end of an
    otherwise rigid-wall reservoir.


CLS 401/147
TXT Implement under subclass 146 provided with a member in rolling contact with
    the work surface, which contact generates the material-moving force.

    (1)     Note.  The roller may be the tool or a member distinct from the
    tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220,    for a roller tool which actuates a flow-regulator.


CLS 401/148
TXT Implement under subclass 146 wherein the material-moving force is generated
    by the application of the toll to the work surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272+,   for an implement including a brush, broom or mop tool and a
    flow-regulator* which is actuated by pressure of the tool on the work
    surface; and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 401/149
TXT Implement under subclass 146 wherein the force-applying means comprises a
    substantially rigid movable member in direct contact with the material*.

    (1)     Note.  A patent within the definition of subclass 146 claiming a
    pump by name for moving the material will be placed in this or the indented
    subclass unless the disclosure clearly indicates that such moving means in
    contact with the material is liquid or gas in which case the patent will be
    placed in subclass 146.


CLS 401/150
TXT Implement under subclass 149 whose solid member is relatively movable in
    substantial sealing engagement with the wall of a tubular compartment so as
    to change the effective capacity of the compartment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171+,   for an implement including a reservoir and a force-applying piston
    whose range of movement is not limited to the discharge end portion of the
    reservoir.


CLS 401/151
TXT Implement under subclass 143 including a plurality of reservoirs or means
    dividing a reservoir into separate zones (e.g., reserve and immediate-use
    reservoirs or zones) for retaining portions of material out of contact with
    one another, and force-applying means to cause flow of material from one
    reservoir or zone to another.

    (1)     Note.  A chamber intended to serve merely as an air space (e.g.,
    squeeze bulb, filler tube), and not to contain coating material, will not
    be considered a reservoir section for this subclass even though the
    disclosure may allude to a possible entry of material therein; as by
    overfilling, for example.  A patent involving such air-space-containing
    structure will be found in an appropriate subclass indented under subclass
    143 (e.g., subclass 185).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40+,    for a reservoir having zones or compartments one of which is for
    retaining soluble coating material and the other for solvent.

    44,     and indented subclass 45, for plural reservoirs the coating
    materials from which merge in the feeder or at the tool, but which are
    otherwise nonintercommunicable.

    146+,   for an implement including a pump chamber between a feeder and a
    reservoir and directly contiguous to the feeder.

    225+,   for a bifurcate point nib implement which includes a compartment,
    within or adjacent the feeder, for receiving excess material discharge from
    the reservoir.

    230,    for an implement having a compartmented reservoir combined with a
    bifurcate nib pen, which implement has not claimed material-moving
    force-applying means.


CLS 401/152
TXT Implement under subclass 143 wherein a wall or wall portion of the
    reservoir*, or of a chamber communicating with the reservoir*, is
    deformable and wherein the force-applying means comprises means for
    deforming the wall to reduce the effective capacity of the reservoir or
    chamber.

    (1)     Note.  See (4) Note to subclass 143 concerning exclusion herefrom
    of a patent to an implement having a non-resilient permanently deformable
    flexible wall which is collapsed by direct digital engagement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143,    for an implement including a reservoir whose flexible wall is
    deformed to increase the volume of the reservoir.

    145,    for an implement in which a deformable member extends across an
    otherwise rigid-wall reservoir, deformation of which member produces the
    material-moving force.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 92+, for the subcombination of a dispenser
    which has a nonresiliently permanently deformable supply container wall;
    and, particularly, subclasses 95+, for such a dispenser which includes
    means for collapsing such a wall.


CLS 401/153
TXT Implement under subclass 152 wherein the wall has substantially parallel
    spaced fold lines or pleats along which collapse occurs.


CLS 401/154
TXT Implement under subclass 152 wherein the deformable wall is tubular and is
    collapsed by means which axially rotates one portion of the tube relative
    to another axial portion.


CLS 401/155
TXT Implement under subclass 152 wherein the reservoir or chamber is elongated
    and the wal-deforming means is movable relative to said wall in a direction
    parallel to the longitudinal axis of the reservoir or chamber so as to
    contact successive wall portions.

    (1)     Note.  The relative movement may result from the winding of the
    wall about the means for causing deformation.


CLS 401/156
TXT Implement under subclass 152 wherein the deformable wall is elastic and
    capable of recovery from deformation when the deforming force is removed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183+,   for a resilient wall reservoir against which a collapsing force is
    applied by direct digital engagement therewith.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 206+ or 581, for a dispenser which has a
    resiliently deformable wall of a supply container or communicating chamber;
    and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 401/157
TXT Implement under subclass 156 including means to force gas (e.g., air) under
    pressure against the outer surface of said wall of collapse said wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145,    for an implement in which the wall-collapsing means acts on a
    diaphragm within an otherwise rigid-wall reservoir.


CLS 401/158
TXT Implement under subclass 156 wherein the reservoir or chamber is an
    elongated tubular member and the wall-deforming means comprises an
    elongated member including a portion for contacting and applying pressure
    over a substantial portion of the wall longitudinally of said member.

    (1)     Note.  A patent for the common fountain pen type filler structure
    will be found in this or an indented subclass.


CLS 401/159
TXT Implement under subclass 158 wherein the presser bar is forced against the
    wall by movement of a pocket clip, or of a protective cover for the tool,
    which is associated with the implement.


CLS 401/160
TXT Implement under subclass 158 wherein the presser bar is arranged to swing
    or rock bodily about a stationary bearing (e.g., pivot pin, fulcrum).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162,    for an implement fixedly retaining a resilient end portion of a
    presser bar to provide a flexible hinge for swinging movement of a portion
    of said bar relative to said end portion.


CLS 401/161
TXT Implement under subclass 158 including means stationary with respect to the
    implement for directing the movement of the presser bar.


CLS 401/162
TXT Implement under subclass 158 wherein the presser bar is a one-piece member
    which is elastic at least in part so that it is capable of deformation,
    upon application of an actuating force, for the entire
    pressure-applying-contact movement, and of recovering from such deformation
    upon removal of said force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158,    for an implement including a rigid presser bar having a spring
    integrally joined thereto.

    167,    for an implement including a resilient member joined to a rigid
    presser bar to urge it to a return position.


CLS 401/163
TXT Implement under subclass 158 including a manually engageable member movable
    relative to the presser bar during actuation for forcing the presser bar
    against the wall.


CLS 401/164
TXT Implement under subclass 163 wherein the actuator includes an element
    having a helical camming surface (e.g., slot, thread, or groove) and
    another element having a cooperating cam follower (e.g., a cooperating
    thread or projection), relative rotational motion between the two elements
    causing the force-applying movement of the presser bar.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172+,   for an implement including screw means for moving a force-applying
    piston in a reservoir; and see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 401/165
TXT Implement under subclass 163 whose actuator includes a manually engageable
    member which is pivoted to engage and force the presser bar against the
    wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163,    for an implement including a manually engageable lever which does
    not directly engage the presser bar but, rather, actuates it by way of
    linkage terminating in a separate presser-bar-engaging member.

    168,    for an implement including a presser-bar actuator which is pivoted
    between latched and unlatched positions but whose actuating movement is
    nonpivotal.


CLS 401/166
TXT Implement under subclass 165 including detent means for holding the lever
    in either operative or inoperative position.


CLS 401/167
TXT Implement under subclass 165 including a resilient member for biasing the
    lever or presser bar toward operative or inoperative position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162,    for a similar device wherein the biasing spring is integral (i.e.,
    of one piece) with the presser bar.


CLS 401/168
TXT Implement under subclass 158 including means for moving the presser bar
    against the reservoir wall and means for holding said moving means in
    inoperative position.


CLS 401/169
TXT Implement under subclass 156 wherein the reservoir or chamber is elongated
    and wherein the force-applying means comprises a solid member movable in a
    direction along the longitudinal axis of the reservoir or chamber to cause
    deformation of the wall or wall portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145,    for an implement including means to flex a diaphragm axially within
    a reservoir.

    153,    for an implement including means engaging an end portion of an
    elongated flexible-wall reservoir or chamber to collapse the reservoir or
    chamber along axially spaced fold lines.

    157,    for an implement wherein gas under superatomospheric pressure
    produces a force in an axial direction against a flexible-wall reservoir to
    collapse said wall.


CLS 401/170
TXT Implement under subclass 143 including a reservoir* which comprises a
    hollow elongated member open, completely or partially, at one end, and the
    means to apply force on the material comprises a second hollow elongated
    member open at one end, and wherein the members are movable, one within the
    other, with their open ends facing in interior unbroken flow relation and
    in outwardly sealed relation with one another, so as to change the combined
    length of the structure and thus apply forced on the material* in the
    reservoir.

    (1)     Note.  The cylinder may serve as part of the reservoir or it may
    only be a gas-filled chamber for applying pressure or suction on the
    material in the container, but it cannot serve as a feeder*.

    (2)     Note.  A similar structure provided with a valved partition at the
    open end of either member, which interrupts communication between the two,
    will be found in subclass 151 or 187+.  However, where the partition is
    merely apertured to permit continuous communication therethrough, the
    patent will be placed in this subclass, even though the aperture may be
    temporarily blocked by closure means which is manually adjusted or removed
    prior to the force-applying actuation, so that the telescopic members are
    in fact, open toward one another all during the actuation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151,    for a similar structure wherein the open end of either member is
    obstructed by a valve for controlling flow of material therethrough, and
    telescopic movement of the members forces material through the valve.

    157,    for an implement wherein cylinders are telescoped to compress
    enclosed gas and thereby deform a flexible-wall reservoir.

    171,    for a reservoir and force-applying piston combination including a
    feeder extending through the piston.

    187+,   for a similar structure wherein the open end of either member is
    obstructed by a valve and relative movement of the members forces or sucks
    gas through the valve.


CLS 401/171
TXT Implement under subclass 143 including a reservoir* comprising a tubular
    wall defining an enclosure; and a member movable relative to, and in
    peripheral, substantially sealing engagement with, the wall; so as to cause
    a force-applying change in the density of air in, or the effective capacity
    of, the reservoir.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141,    for an implement including a follower which floats on the free
    surface of the coating material in the reservoir.

    143,    for a force-applying follower which is not substantially is sealing
    engagement with the reservoir wall.

    150,    for an implement including a piston and cylinder located in or at
    the feeder*.


CLS 401/172
TXT Implement under subclass 171 including a helical camming element (e.g.,
    slot, thread, or groove) and another element rotatable relative thereto and
    having a cooperating cam follower (e.g., a cooperating thread), relative
    rotational motion between the two elements causing the force-applying
    movement of the piston.


CLS 401/173
TXT Implement under subclass 172 wherein the cooperating screw elements are,
    respectively, on the periphery of the movable force-applying member and on
    the inner surface of the tubular wall.


CLS 401/174
TXT Implement under subclass 172 wherein one of said elements is directly
    connected to the piston for movement therewith and the other of said
    elements is in driven relation to a member which is accessible to the hand,
    so that movement of said member will effect the relatively rotational
    force-applying motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182,    for an implement including a piston whose actuating rod consists of
    threaded members and wherein the operation of the screw means serves to
    enlarge or diminish the combined overall length of the members before or
    after, but not during, the force-producing actuation.


CLS 401/175
TXT Implement under subclass 174 wherein one of the cooperating elements is
    formed in a wall which defines a central aperture through the piston and
    the other on a rod passing through said aperture, whereby rotation of the
    rod relative to the piston causes translatory movement of the piston.


CLS 401/176
TXT Implement under subclass 171 wherein the piston has a rectilinear,
    force-applying motion axially of the tubular wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141,    for an implement including a follower which floats on the free
    surface of the material in the reservoir.


CLS 401/177
TXT Implement under subclass 176 wherein a portion of the reservoir wall
    (usually adjacent the filling opening) is recessed or grooved so as to
    provide a zone in which the piston is out of sealing engagement with the
    cylinder wall.


CLS 401/178
TXT Implement under subclass 176 wherein the piston is provided with a
    flow-regulator* controlling a passage therethrough.


CLS 401/179
TXT Implement under subclass 176 provided with a manually engageable member so
    interconnected with the piston as to produce a motion in the latter which
    is different in kind, speed or direction from its own (e.g., rotary to
    linear).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses indented under MECHANICAL
    movements, for mechanical movements, per se.


CLS 401/180
TXT Implement under subclass 176 wherein the piston is resiliently urged into
    forceful contact with the coating material in the reservoir.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 341 or subclass 582, for a dispenser including
    a discharge assistant which is a spring-biased piston in the supply chamber.


CLS 401/181
TXT Implement under subclass 176 wherein the piston is movable by a manually
    operated member, which member is of articulated construction or of nonrigid
    material, or is arranged to rock about a hinged connection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182,    for a patent wherein an actuating member is separably connected to
    the piston by a hook-and-eye connection.


CLS 401/182
TXT Implement under subclass 176 wherein the piston is movable by a manually
    actuated elongated member which (1) is movable with respect to the entire
    piston for operatively disconnecting it from the piston and which is stored
    within or retained by the implement when so disconnected, or (2) comprises
    telescoping parts which may be interengaged in drawn out position so as to
    increase the effective length of the member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174+,   for an implement wherein the material-applying force results from
    the act of moving an operating rod relative to a piston by the operation of
    screw means.


CLS 401/183
TXT Implement under subclass 143 wherein the force-applying means is an elastic
    wall or wall portion which may be deformed by direct digital engagement and
    which is capable of recovery from such deformation when released.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146+,   for an implement including a manually engageable, resilient wall or
    wall portion which is connected to, or is part of, the feeder*.

    156+,   for an implement including a deformable resilient wall reservoir
    with means interposed between the finger of the operator and the wall for
    applying pressure to the wall.


CLS 401/184
TXT Implement under subclass 183 wherein the elastic wall or wall portion is
    part of or is associated with an otherwise relatively inflexible reservoir*
    (e.g., oil can type receptacle).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145,    for an implement including a flexible diaphragm within an otherwise
    rigid-wall reservoir and means to distend the diaphragm within the confines
    of the wall structure.


CLS 401/185
TXT Implement under subclass 184 wherein the elastic wall forms a hollow
    chamber extending from and in communication with the reservoir and is of
    such shape as to present opposing elastic wall elements which may be
    deformed in a direction toward one another.

    (1)     Note.  A squeeze bulb is recognized as an elastic wall of a
    reservoir when in continuous communication therewith or, if valved, capable
    of two-way communication.  A patent for an implement having a squeeze bulb
    communicating with a reservoir through a one-way valve which permits only
    the entry of pressurizing gas into, or only removal of gas from, the
    reservoir will be placed in subclasses 188 or 189, respectively.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184,    for an implement whose manually engageable, elastic wall portion is
    curved but no more than hemispherical in shape so that no opposed portions
    are available for engagement and deformation toward one another.


CLS 401/186
TXT Implement under subclass 183 provided with a flow-regulator*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270+,   for a coating implement including a brush, broom or mop tool and a
    flow-regulator; and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 401/187
TXT Implement under subclass 143 wherein the force applying means operates to
    vary the density of gas (e.g., air) in the reservoir*.

    (1)     Note.  A patent for an implement having means to permit adding or
    removing air to or from the reservoir by the mouth will be placed in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183+,   for an implement including a reservoir with a resilient wall
    portion on which force is applied by direct digital engagement with the
    container wall to deform the wall and compress gas in the reservoir.


CLS 401/188
TXT Implement under subclass 187 wherein the force-applying means comprises a
    device for irreversibly introducing gas into the supply chamber to provide
    super atmospheric pressure therein.

    (1)     Note.  The gas may be introduced by a pump, or from a remote source
    of compressed gas, through a valve which prevents reverse flow of the gas
    from the reservoir.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183+,   for an implement including a reservoir with a resilient wall
    portion on which force is applied by direct digital engagement with the
    container wall to deform the wall and compress gas in the reservoir, which
    implement may include one-way means for adding gas to the reservoir.


CLS 401/189
TXT Implement under subclass 187 wherein the force applying means includes a
    device for irreversibly removing gas from the reservoir to provide a
    subatmospheric pressure therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183+,   for an implement including a reservoir with a resilient wall
    portion on which force is applied by direct digital engagement with the
    container wall to deform the wall and compress gas in the reservoir, which
    implement may include one-way means for removing gas from the reservoir.


CLS 401/190
TXT Implement under subclass 143 including a reservoir and wherein the
    force-applying means consists of gas at superatmospheric pressure in direct
    contact with the coating material for propelling the material to tool*; and
    means for regulating flow of the material from the reservoir.

    (1)     Note.  A patent for the subcombination including a tool, per se,
    with means adapting it for attachment to an Aerosol container will be
    placed in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157,    for an implement including a resilient-wall reservoir which is
    collapsed by externally supplied superatmospheric pressure.

    187,    and indented subclass 188, for an implement including mechanical
    means for compressing gas in the reservoir.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 394+, for a dispenser from which material is
    discharge by fluid pressure; and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 401/191
TXT Implement under the class definition wherein the tool* and supply-means*
    are combined in a unitary device and are movable with respect to each other
    for transferring coating material from a first position, wherein a
    work-engaging portion of the tool may receive the coating material from the
    supply-means, to a second position, wherein the entire tool is spaced from,
    and out of communication with, the supply-means, for engaging the work
    surface and applying the coating material thereon.

    (1)     Note.  A patent for a device wherein the applicator*, which is
    initially in a concealed position in communication with the coating
    material, is disconnected from the implemented and reconnected in an
    exposed use position out of communication with the material will be placed
    in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for an implement having diverse tools one of which transports a
    quantity of coating material from a supply-means to the work surface.

    99+,    for an implement including a tool which is linearly retractable
    into its reservoir and is projectable therefrom for application of coating
    material to a work surface.

    118+,   for a device wherein the implement is completely separable from the
    reservoir* for transporting a quantity of coating material therefrom and
    applying it to a work surface.

    208+,   for an implement including a ball, roller or endless belt in
    communication with the supply-means for simultaneous reception and
    transportation of material therefrom and application to a work surface.


CLS 401/192
TXT Implement under the class definition wherein the supply means has a
    light-permeable portion.


CLS 401/193
TXT Implement under the class definition provided with means engageable with an
    edge or configuration of the work surface, or of a work associated member,
    so as to restrain movement of the tool* along a predetermined path relative
    to the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for an implement including a tool or tools shaped to conform to a
    curved surface or a plurality of tools arranged to engage plural
    noncoplanar work surface.

    48,     for an implement including means for supporting or stabilizing it
    on the work surface while in use.

    147,    for a device wherein a work engaging roller, which may serve as a
    guide by engagement with a configuration of the work surface, also serves
    to actuate a material-moving means between the supply and the tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 41.1+, for an implement
    including a scribing tool combined with a work-engaging guide.

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 216+ and 320 for a cosmetic applier having a
    shape peculiarly adapted to put a coating on a part of the human body in a
    definite shape or pattern (e.g., a bow-shaped lip rouge applicator).


CLS 401/194
TXT Implement under the class definition which includes means perceptible by
    one of the senses for determining (a) the amount, condition or other
    characteristics of the supply material, or (b) the condition of a means for
    controlling the flow of material to the tool*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142,    for an implement including a reservoir* and a liquid floating
    follower of a color distinct from that of the coating material so as to
    indicate the quantity of material in the reservoir, as by being the visible
    through a transparent reservoir or by emerging onto the work surface.

    233     and 256+, for an implement having a bifurcate, broad-face,
    adjustable gap tool, and indicating means for the degree of gap adjustment.


CLS 401/195
TXT Implement under the class definition claimed in combination with another
    tool or device which is, per se, classifiable in another class, which
    device is not so common a subcombination of a coating implement as to be
    included herebelow (e.g., cap) and which combination is not specifically
    provided for in any of the preceding subclasses or in any other class.

    (1)     Note.  Certain classes take precedence over Class 401 for the
    combination of a coating tool with material supply and a particular
    additional feature.  With respect to certain other classes, a patent to the
    combination of an implement of this class and a device classifiable in
    another such class will be placed in such other class, provided that no
    more of the implement structure is claimed than is necessary to establish
    its relationship with the other art device.  For a listing of such classes
    and their relationships to this class see section VB of this publication.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for an implement of this class which includes means to impart heat
    to the material.

    4,      for an implement of this class which includes means to agitate the
    material in the reservoir.

    14,     for an implement of this class with a surface-protecting bumper.

    15,     for an implement of this class with a splash guard or drip catcher.

    48,     for an implement of this class including work-engaging means (e.g.,
    wheels) to support or stabilize the implement while in use.

    50,     for an implement comprising a tool* for solid material for rubbing
    contact and a point sharpening or shaping device.

    52,     for an implement comprising a tool of solid material for rubbing
    contact and a device which has a function other than for coating.

    131,    for an implement of this class combined with means to support or
    stabilize it when not in use; and see (2) Note thereto.

    193,    for an implement of this class combined with a work-engaging guide;
    and see the notes thereto.

    194,    for an implement including a signal or indicator for determining a
    characteristic (e.g., the quantity) of the supply material or the condition
    of a flow-regulator*.

    SEARCH CLASS:
    See section VB of this publication.


CLS 401/196
TXT Implement under the class definition comprising a tool* whose work-engaging
    portion is formed of a previous layer(s) or mass having interstices of
    substantially capillary size through which the coating material must pass
    from one surface thereof to another and hence to the work surface.

    (1)     Note.  The supply means* may be structure defining a pocket within
    the tool, the interior wall of the pocket being considered one surface
    through which the material is required to flow. However, an implement
    comprising a plurality of layers, one or more of which is coated or
    impregnated with coating material but has no additional supply-means will
    not be considered subject matter for this class but will be placed in Class
    15, subclasses 104.93+, or Class 118, subclasses 264+; and see the search
    notes below.

    (2)     Note.  The previous layer(s) may be of porous textile fabric having
    a pile or nap, but not of a fabric which has elongated porous strands
    extending therefrom such as would be considered to be filamentary elements
    of a mop for subclasses 268+.

    (3)     Note.  A tool having a hole therethrough through which the material
    is intended to pass, even though it may be of porous material, is presumed
    to be an apertured tool.  A patent for an implement with such a tool will
    be placed in subclasses 261+ when there is nothing in the disclosure
    describing the passage of material through the tool to its work-engaging
    portion as occurring in any other way than through such holes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23+,    for an implement having diverse tools, one of which is porous.

    261+,   for an implement in which:  (a) the work-engaging portion of the
    tool includes a nonporous fabric having a pile or nap of ordinary length;
    or (b) the tool is perforated for passage of all the material which
    penetrates to the work-engaging surface (see particularly, subclasses
    265+); and see (3) Note, above.

    268+,   for an implement in which the work-engaging portion of the tool
    includes a fabric having elongated flexible strands extending from a porous
    backing; and see (2) Note, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 104.93+ for a
    tool of porous material coated or impregnated with supply material, but not
    including additional supply-means; and subclasses 118 for a
    machine-attachable porous pad tool combined with means for supplying
    coating material to the tool.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 264+ for a coating apparatus
    including a porous tool which is static, requiring that the work be applied
    thereto.

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 218 and 320 for a porous cosmetic applier having
    a shape peculiarly adapted to put a coating on a part of the human body in
    a definite shape or pattern (e.g., a bow-shaped lip rough applicator).


CLS 401/197
TXT Implement under subclass 196 wherein the tool is in the form of a hollow
    cylinder rotatably mounted on the implement and the material flows from the
    interior of the cylinder through interstices in its peripheral wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208+,   for an implement whose tool is a nonporous roller, or wherein the
    roller is of porous material but the material is supplied to the outer
    surface of the tool.


CLS 401/198
TXT Implement under subclass 196 wherein a substantial portion of the previous
    material forming the tool, or of a separate porous member in contact
    therewith, extends into a reservoir* for maintaining an uninterrupted
    supply of coating material to the tool by capillary movement through the
    interstices of the previous material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    283,    for a similar combination in which the tool is a brush, broom, or
    mop; and see the search notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 187 for a dispenser including a wick or
    absorbent material feed.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 145 for a
    device of that class having a porous or external wick discharge means.


CLS 401/199
TXT Implement under subclass 198 wherein the wick feeder is a porous member
    distinct from the tool.


CLS 401/200
TXT Implement under subclass 196 having a wall or wall portion which, as
    disclosed, is previous for the passage of finely divided solid material
    (e.g., powder).


CLS 401/201
TXT Implement under subclass 196 including a pocket or recess for containing
    solid material adapted to be dissolved by an externally applied liquid and
    carried through the interstices of the tool for application to a work
    surface.

    (1)     Note.  The device as a whole is intended to be contacted with
    liquid which enters through the previous material to contact and dissolve
    at least a portion of the solid material, the solution then passing through
    the same previous material to the work surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40+,    for an implement including both a compartment for solid material
    and a reservoir or a conduit couplable to an external supply, for supplying
    a solvent to the solid material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 104.93+ for a
    tool of porous material coated or impregnated with supply material, but not
    including additional supply-means.


CLS 401/202
TXT Implement under subclass 196 including a detachably mounted cover enclosing
    the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    269,    for a similar combination in which the tool is a brush, broom, or
    mop; and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 401/203
TXT Implement under subclass 196 whose supply-means* includes a feeder* having
    means for attachment to a source of supply which is not part of the
    implement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    289,    for a similar combination in which the tool is a brush, broom, or
    mop; and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 401/204
TXT Implement under subclass 203 including a flow-regulator*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270+,   for a brush, broom, or mop implement in combination with a
    flow-regulator; and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 401/205
TXT Implement under subclass 196 including a flow-regulator*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270+,   for a similar combination in which the tool is a brush, broom, or
    mop; and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 401/206
TXT Implement under subclass 205 including elastically deformable means for
    producing a force upon the flow-regulator to urge it to a predetermined
    regulatory condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273     and 278+, for a similar combination in which the tool is a brush,
    broom, or mop; and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 401/207
TXT Implement under subclass 196 including means to releasably secure the tool,
    or the tool together with its supporting structure, to that part of the
    implement which at least contains a reservoir*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290,    for a similar combination in which the tool is a brush, broom, or
    mop; and see the search notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 269 for a coating apparatus including a
    static tool which is reversible.


CLS 401/208
TXT Implement under the class definition whose tool* has an endless,
    peripheral, work-engaging surface some portion of which, in the operative
    condition of the implement, is in a position for receiving material from
    the supply-means* or from a supply of solid coating material, some other
    portion simultaneously is in position to engage the work, the tool being
    mounted for movement about an axis passing therethrough so that any surface
    portion thereof may occupy each of said position and transport coating
    material therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for an implement having diverse tools, of which one is a roller or
    an endless belt.

    191,    for an implement in which the entire tool occupies successive
    positions in the first of which it receives coating material from the
    supply-means, and is then completely displaceable to a second
    work-contacting position wherein no surface portion of the tool is in
    material-receiving position; and see the notes thereto.

    197,    for an implement wherein the tool is a porous roller.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclasses 328+ for a printing roller in combination with
    means for applying ink to a surface thereof; and see "(1) Note" thereunder
    stating the line between Classes 15, 101, and 401; and subclasses 375+ for
    a printing roller and support means therefor.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 401/209
TXT Implement under subclass 208 wherein the tool is a sphere freely mounted in
    a seat for rotation about any of an infinite number of axes passing
    therethrough.


CLS 401/210
TXT Implement under subclass 209 wherein the supply-means includes a reservoir*
    and wherein means is provided for changing the effective length of the
    reservoir so as to fit any one of a plurality of casings of different
    length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132+,   for an implement including a sealed reservoir which must be broken,
    cut, or torn to release coating material to the tool.


CLS 401/211
TXT Implement under subclass 209 wherein the means for holding the ball in its
    seat has the property of attracting iron.


CLS 401/212
TXT Implement under subclass 209 wherein the ball seat includes a plurality of
    friction-reducing spheres in rolling contact with the coating ball to
    facilitate its rotation when in use.


CLS 401/213
TXT Implement under subclass 209 provided with a cover enclosing the ball and
    in contact with the ball or the edge of the ball seat to close the space
    between said ball and seat against egress of coating material.

    (1)     Note.  The seal may be effected by the closure pressing the ball
    and seat into close-fitting engagement, with or without elastic deformation
    of the ball or seat, or by a portion of the closure coming into peripheral
    sealing engagement with the edge of the ball seat adjacent the ball.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    245,    for the combination of a bifurcate nib pen and a removable cap
    which has a protrusion contacting and sealing a feed or air passage.

    269,    for an implement including the combination of a brush, broom, or
    mop type tool and an enclosing cap; and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 401/214
TXT Implement under subclass 209 wherein the ball seat includes, or is
    connected to, an element which is deformable by pressure applied thereto
    and which has the ability to resile from such deformation when such
    pressure is released so as to permit movement of the ball relative to some
    part of the seat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272+,   for a similar combination whose tool is a brush, broom, or mop; and
    see the search notes thereto.


CLS 401/215
TXT Implement under subclass 209 including a ball or particular construction or
    material.

    (1)     Note.  Placement of an original patent into this subclass requires
    that a detail of the construction, or the material of the ball, be claimed.


CLS 401/216
TXT Implement under subclass 209 including a seat of particular construction or
    material.

    (1)     Note.  Placement of an original patent into this subclass requires
    that a ball-retaining detail of the construction, or the material of the
    retainer, be claimed.


CLS 401/217
TXT Implement under subclass 209 wherein the reservoir* includes a passage
    normally open to the atmosphere or valved so as to admit atmospheric air to
    the reservoir as needed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242,    for a bifurcate pointed nib pen including means to vent the
    reservoir through the feeder*.


CLS 401/218
TXT Implement under subclass 208 wherein the supply-means includes an
    additional roller which is disclosed for contacting and transferring
    material to the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147,    for an implement including a work-contacting roller for actuating a
    means to produce a material-moving force (e.g., pump), which means is
    located between the roller and a reservoir.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclasses 329+ for the combination of a roller inker and
    a rolling contact printer receiving ink therefrom.


CLS 401/219
TXT Implement under subclass 208 including a flow regulator*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270+,   for a similar combination whose tool is a brush, broom, or mop; and
    see the notes thereto.


CLS 401/220
TXT Implement under subclass 219 whose movable flow-regulator element either is
    the roller or is actuated by a movement of the roller.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272+,   for an implement whose tool is a brush, broom, or mop, which tool
    is a flow-regulator actuator; and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 401/221
TXT Implement under the class definition wherein the tool* terminates in only
    two elements, said elements being separated by a relatively narrow slit or
    interspace, to provide a capillary passage for material, and having closely
    adjacent work-engaging surfaces of relatively small dimension in either
    direction.

    (1)     Note.  The tool elements may be integral extensions from a common
    shank or separate members joined in cooperative relation by a separate
    fastening means.

    (2)     Note.  A patent for a bifurcate pointed nib pen wherein the sole
    material supply is retained in direct feeding relation to the tool by
    integral formations of the tool (e.g., infolded wings) will be placed in
    this subclass rather than in any subclass indented hereunder.

    (3)     Note.  An implement wherein the tool comprises a tubular feed
    channel and no more than one relatively thin and rigid work-engaging
    element (e.g., wire) extending therethrough will be considered a
    stylographic pen for subclasses 258+.  Where the number of elements
    extending from a feed channel exceeds two, the implement will be considered
    a brush for subclasses 268+.

            Where the element or elements so extending has significant length
    in one or more directions along its work-contacting surface, the implement
    will be considered to have a bladelike or padlike tool (e.g., lettering
    pin) for subclasses 261+; see, however, (2) Note under the definition of
    subclass 261.

    (4)     Note.  A patent for a bifurcate, pointed nib tool, per se, having
    no feature which adapts it particularly for association with supply means,
    will be placed in Class 15, subclasses 446 and 447.  However, a patent
    claiming such a tool in combination with a holder (e.g., "barrel") which
    holder is disclosed as containing or providing supply means, will be placed
    in this or an indented subclass, even though no detail of the supply means
    is claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118,    for the combination of an inkwell and a pen separable therefrom for
    use; and see the search notes thereto for the loci of patents to inkwells,
    per se.

    258+,   for an implement of this class including a stylus.

    261+,   for an implement of this class including a blade-like or pad-like
    tool.

    268+,   for an implement of this class including a brush type tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 134+, for an
    invention in the detail(s) of a bifurcate nib tool.


CLS 401/222
TXT Implement under subclass 221 including a reservoir* and a feeder*, as
    defined in the glossary of terms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198+,   for porous tool combined with a capillary material-retainer in the
    reservoir.

    221,    rather than any subclass indented thereunder, for a bifurcate nib
    tool which has integral portions (e.g., infolded wings) which provide a
    material-retainer feeding directly to the tool, rather than by way of a
    distinct feeder.

    252+,   for an attached ink retainer in direct communication with the tool,
    rather than by way of a feeder.

    282+,   for a feeder-and-tool combination in an implement of the brush,
    broom, or mop type, and see the notes thereunder; and particularly indented
    subclass 283 for an implement of the brush, broom, or mop type, including a
    porous feeder which functions as a coating material-retainer.


CLS 401/223
TXT Implement under subclass 222 wherein the reservoir is substantially filled
    by means (e.g., fibers, strands, particles) providing a plurality of minute
    interconnected tubes and/or interspaces of such small cross-section as to
    receive and hold coating material under the influence of its surface
    tension and its properties of cohesion and adhesion.

    (1)     Note.  The capillary material-retainer may serve to cooperate with
    the feeder to control movement of material to the tool and also to cause
    movement of material into the reservoir from an external source of supply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198+,   for a porous tool combined with a capillary material-retainer in
    the reservoir.

    224,    for a feeder which includes a strand or strands of material, which
    strand(s) may enter but not substantially fill the reservoir.

    252+,   for material-retainer feeding directly to the tool and consisting
    of or including capillary structure; see principal subclass 252, for such a
    retainer filled with capillary material and indented subclass 253 for such
    a retainer which includes transverse, capillary, ink retaining slots or
    grooves.

    283,    for an implement of the brush, broom, or mop type including a
    porous feeder which functions as a coating material retainer.


CLS 401/224
TXT Implement under subclass 222 including a wire or strand extending
    lengthwise in the feeder or along an air passage in the feeder, to control
    movement of material therealong.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258+,   for an implement wherein a filamentary conductor extending through
    a tubular channel terminates in a rod-like work-engaging portion.


CLS 401/225
TXT Implement under subclass 222 wherein the feeder device includes a
    specifically provided space, in addition to the necessary guide channel,
    for retaining surplus material discharged from the reservoir but unused by
    the tool.

    (1)     Note.  A patent to an implement including an air passage which may
    receive excess material discharge from the reservoir will be placed in
    subclass 242, unless the patent clearly discloses that the excess material
    is fed to the tool (rather than back to the reservoir) in order to clear
    the air passage, in which case the patent will be placed in this subclass
    (225).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242,    for a patent describing the discharge of material from a reservoir
    solely in terms of the balance thereof with counter-current intake of air,
    and see (1) Note, above.


CLS 401/226
TXT Implement under subclass 225 wherein the overflow receiver structure is
    part of, or is enclosed within, a casing portion, said portion encircling
    the tool elements so as to overlie at least part of the capillary slit or
    interspace therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248,    for an implement including a hooded nib but not including a claimed
    overflow receiver.


CLS 401/227
TXT Implement under subclass 225, wherein the overflow receiver comprises a
    plurality of elongated spaced surface indentations or crevices in or
    adjacent the feeder structure and substantially at right angles to the axis
    of the implement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    253,    for an implement having similar structure in direct feeding
    relation to the tool and constituting the sole material supply therefor.


CLS 401/228
TXT Implement under subclass 225 in which the overflow receiver is in direct
    communication with the ambient atmosphere through an uncovered surface of a
    side wall portion of the feeder structure projecting from the casing of the
    implement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227,    for transversely extending, overflow-material-receiving spaces,
    whether or not exposed, formed along the surface of a feeder.


CLS 401/229
TXT Implement under subclass 225 in which the overflow receiver intersects or
    is in direct unrestricted communication with the feeder so that surplus
    material leaving the reservoir may enter said space before reaching the
    tool.

    (1)     Note.  A patent for an implement in which surplus material may
    enter the overflow receiver by way of a communicating passage from the
    feeder will be placed in another appropriate subclass in subclasses 225+.


CLS 401/230
TXT Implement under subclass 222 wherein the reservoir comprises a plurality of
    structurally distinct zones arranged in sequence, whereby material may pass
    from one zone to the next and, ultimately, by way of a feeder, to the tool.

    (1)     Note.  A porous element (e.g., sponge) occupying a portion of a
    reservoir for storing a reserve supply of ink will be considered a distinct
    zone.

    (2)     Note.  An overflow-material-receiving zone within a feeder, even
    though the zone is of cross-section greater than capillary, (see subclasses
    225+, particularly subclass 229) will not be considered a distinct
    reservoir portion for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40+,    for a compartmented reservoir wherein one of the compartments is
    for retaining soluble coating material and the other is for solvent.

    44+,    for an implement including a plurality of supply zones in parallel
    feed relation to the tool.

    151,    for a compartmented reservoir provided with force-producing means
    to move material.

    225+,   particularly subclass 229, for an implement in which a zone located
    within a capillary feeder provides an overflow receiver.


CLS 401/231
TXT Implement under subclass 222 including means for adjustably varying the
    spacing between the tool elements or for adjustably limiting the degree of
    elastic deformation of the tool elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233     and 256+, for an implement including means regulating a distinct
    gap (rather than a mere slit) between broad face tool elements.


CLS 401/232
TXT Implement under subclass 222 including a flow-regulator*.

    (1)     Note.  The flow-regulator must be something other than or in
    addition to a flexible nib member which is movable relative to a capillary
    passage feeding to the nib, as ordinarily occurs during writing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99+,    particularly subclass 116, for an implement in which a
    flow-regulator is controlled by the movement of a tool unit, relative to an
    enclosing member, between point-projected and point-concealed positions.

    230,    for an implement including a flow-regulator in a passage between
    intercommunicable reservoir compartments; and see the search notes thereto.

    270+,   for an implement including brush, broom, or mop tool and a
    flow-regulator, and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 401/233
TXT Implement under subclass 232 wherein the tool elements have relatively wide
    surfaces in opposed spaced relation leading to the work-engaging surfaces
    so as to retain therebetween a quantity of coating material which is
    greater than that which would normally adhere to the surfaces, and wherein
    the flow-regulator operates to vary the space between the elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221,    for an implement having broad-face tool elements defining between
    them a gap which is unadjustable and a space which constitutes the sole
    supply means for the tool.

    256+,   for a broad-face, adjustable gap implement wherein the space
    between the tool elements constitutes the sole supply means for the tool.


CLS 401/234
TXT Implement under subclass 232 wherein the flow-regulator is operated by
    movement of a removable cover for the pen to or from point-protective
    position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    245,    for a bifurcate nib implement combined with a removable cap which
    includes a projection for directly closing a feeder or air passage.

    269,    for an implement of the brush, broom, or mop type in which a
    flow-regulator is actuated by movement of a removable cap to and from
    position for protecting the tool; and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 401/235
TXT Implement under subclass 232 wherein the flow-regulator is operated by the
    force generated in the application of the tool to a work surface.

    (1)     Note.  The flow-regulator must be something other than or in
    addition to a flexible nib member moving relative to a capillary passage
    feeding to the nib, as ordinarily occurs during writing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272,    for a similar actuated flow-regulator in an implement of the brush,
    broom, or mop type; and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 401/236
TXT Implement under subclass 232 in which the movable flow-regulator part is
    located in or at an end of, and variably limits, a flow passage in the
    feeder.


CLS 401/237
TXT Implement under subclass 236 in which the movable flow-regulator part has
    an opening registrable and directly communicable with the feeder passage so
    as to permit flow of material to the tool; or moveable out of registry, so
    as to inhibit flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280+,   for a similar combination wherein the apertured flow-regulator
    member controls a passage to the filamentary elements of a tool of the
    brush, broom, or mop type.


CLS 401/238
TXT Implement under subclass 222 wherein the feeder includes an extension
    located along the upper surface of the tool in its use position and in feed
    relation with the capillary slit or interspace of the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255,    for an implement having similar structure in direct feeding
    relation to the tool and constituting the sole material supply therefor.


CLS 401/239
TXT Implement under subclass 238 wherein the feed structure also includes a
    member or portion extending along the lower surface of the tool in its use
    position, and likewise in feeding relation with the capillary slit or
    interspace of the tool, which lower member or portion is laterally
    separated from the overlying extension at the side edges of the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226     and 248, for a bifurcate pointed nib pen including hood structure
    completely surrounding the tool.

    255,    for an implement having similar structure in direct feeding
    relation to the tool and constituting the sole material supply therefor.


CLS 401/240
TXT Implement under subclass 222 wherein the passage(s) in the feeder is(are)
    nonrectilinear, so as to require all of the material reaching the tool to
    have undergone at least one change of direction in movement thereto from
    the reservoir.

    (1)     Note.  The occurrence of even a single directly linear capillary
    feed path to the tool will bar placement herein of a patent which also
    includes other, devious feed path structure.  Such composite structures
    will be found in subclass 221 or some other appropriate indented subclass.


CLS 401/241
TXT Implement under subclass 222 wherein the feeder includes structure
    penetrating the material supply in the reservoir to the extent that
    appreciable side wall portions thereof are in contact with the material in
    the reservoir.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133+,   for a bifurcate nib type implement including a feeder having means
    to penetrate a sealed supply cartridge.

    224,    for a bifurcate nib type implement including a filamentary feeder
    element extending into the reservoir.


CLS 401/242
TXT Implement under subclass 222 including a channel or aperture in the feeder
    device separate, at least in part, from the material guide passage, for
    admitting air to the reservoir.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note under the definition of subclass 225 for the
    line between that subclass and the instant subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225+,   for a similar structure including an overflow receiver; and see (1)
    note thereto.


CLS 401/243
TXT Implement under subclass 222 including a detachably mounted cover for
    enclosing the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247,    for a fountain pen having a removable cap to which a fastener
    (e.g., pocket clip) is attached; and see the search note to Class 24, below.

    269,    for a similar combination including a brush, broom, or mop tool;
    and see the search notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 10+, for a patent to the
    combination of a pen cap and a fastener (e.g., pocket clip) where no more
    of the cap structure is recited than is necessary for the association of
    the clip therewith.


CLS 401/244
TXT Implement under subclass 243 wherein the cap and the implement casing are
    provided with interengaging locking parts for releasably retaining the
    cover in nib-protective position.

    (1)     Note.  A patent wherein the cap is retained merely by magnetic
    attraction, screw-threaded connection, or friction, will be placed in
    subclass 243.


CLS 401/245
TXT Implement under subclass 243 wherein the cap includes an internal
    protrusion for directly closing and end of a feeder* or of an air vent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99+,    particularly subclasses 116 and 117, for the combination of a
    removable cap with an implement wherein the tool is moved between
    point-concealed and point-exposed positions and wherein the cap includes an
    internal projection for sealing the opening at the end of the feeder or air
    passage in retracted position.

    213,    for the combination of a ball-point tool and a sealing cap which
    prevents egress of material from the space between the ball and the ball
    seat.

    234,    for a bifurcate nib implement combined with a removable cap for
    actuating a flow-regulator.


CLS 401/246
TXT Implement under subclass 243 wherein the cap includes an internal
    projection having a surface which faces toward the open end of the cap for
    contacting an end face of that portion of the casing which supports the
    tool, which end face extends at either a right or reentrant angle to the
    contiguous casing side wall or to the longitudinal axis of the implement.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass will also take a patent in which the internal
    cap projection contacts an edge of the casing which is defined by the
    intersection of the end face and contiguous side wall thereof.

    (2)     Note.  A patent wherein the cap engages a screw thread at the
    forward end of the casing will not be considered as coming within the
    definition of this subclass but will be placed in subclass 243.  Such
    structure is construed as pertaining to the casing side wall rather than to
    its end face.


CLS 401/247
TXT Implement under subclass 243 in which the cap constitutes an assemblage of
    a plurality of elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243,    for a pen cap consisting of a single shaped piece of material.

    246,    for a pen cap including an insert which provides a shoulder for
    abutting the outer end of the pen section.


CLS 401/248
TXT Implement under subclass 222 wherein a casing portion, or an extension
    thereof, encircles the tool elements so as to overlie at least part of the
    capillary slit or interspace there-between.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226,    for a hooded nib provided with or containing overflow-receiving
    structure.


CLS 401/249
TXT Implement under subclass 222 including a detail of means associating the
    tool* with the feeder*.

    (1)     Note.  For placement of an original patent in this or the indented
    subclass, the claim must recite the detail referred to in the definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99+,    for an implement in which a tool-and-feeder unit is axially
    movable, relative to an enclosing member, between concealed and exposed
    positions.

    132+,   for an implement in which a tool-and-feeder unit is removably
    associable with a sealed reservoir and includes means for establishing flow
    of material to the tool upon association of the unit with the reservoir*.

    207,    for the separable association of a porous-tool-and-feeder unit with
    a reservoir.


CLS 401/250
TXT Implement under subclass 249 in which the tool and feeder (1) are part of a
    single shaped piece of material, or (2) are permanently united, or (3) each
    include interengaging detent means retaining the tool and feeder against
    sliding separability.

    (1)     Note.  The principal subclass 249 will take a patent for an
    implement in which superposed tool and feeder elements are retained against
    separation solely by the clamping effect of a casing portion or other
    tubular element surrounding both.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290,    for an implement of the brush, broom, or mop type and including
    means for connecting the tool to the feeder.


CLS 401/251
TXT Implement under subclass 222 including a detail of means securing two parts
    of the device.

    (1)     Note.  For placement of an original patent in this subclass the
    detail of the retaining means must be claimed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, appropriate subclasses for joints between
    fluid conducting pipes or tubular sections.

    403,    Joints or Connections, appropriate subclasses for joints of general
    application.


CLS 401/252
TXT Implement under subclass 221 wherein the tool* cooperates with an
    additional element assembled therewith so as to provide a space for storage
    of a quantity of material* for delivery to the capillary passage in the
    tool, without requiring intervention of a feeder*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221,    rather than any subclass indented thereunder, for a bifurcate nib
    tool which has integral portions (e.g., infolded wings) providing a
    material retainer which is an integral part of the tool for supplying
    material directly thereto rather than by way of a distinct feeder.

    267,    for an implement having a blade-like, pad-like, or apertured tool
    and an attached material retainer feeding directly to the tool.


CLS 401/253
TXT Implement under subclass 252 wherein the retainer has at least on
    elongated, material-retaining rugosity, or spaced portions defining an
    opening therebetween, said rugosity or opening being at right angles to and
    communicating directly with the capillary passage in the tool.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass will take a patent to an implement wherein the
    attachment is a helix the turns of which are so close together as to permit
    the capillary retention of material in direct feeding relation to the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227,    for similar structure provided in a feeder from a reservoir to
    serve as an overflow receiver.


CLS 401/254
TXT Implement under subclass 252 wherein the attachment comprises broad-face
    ink-retaining means, said broad face being opposed to, and forming a
    material-retaining space jointly with, a surface of the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252,    for an implement having an attachment the wall structure of which
    alone forms a material-retaining pocket independently of the tool.


CLS 401/255
TXT Implement under subclass 254 wherein the attachment opposes and is spaced
    from the convex side of a transversely curved tool or the side of a flat
    tool which is opposite the side which normally confronts the work surface.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass will take a patent wherein the attachment
    entirely surrounds the tool or includes separate elements adjacent the
    opposite sides of the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226     and 248, for a bifurcate nib implement including a reservoir*, a
    distinct feeder, and a hood surrounding the tool elements.

    238,    for a bifurcate nib implement including a reservoir and distinct
    feeder structure overlying one side only of the tool elements, and indented
    subclass 239 for separate feed elements overlying and underlying opposite
    sides thereof.


CLS 401/256
TXT Implement under subclass 221 wherein the tool* elements have relatively
    wide surfaces in opposed spaced relation so as to retain there-between a
    quantity of coating material which is greater than that which would
    normally adhere to the surfaces; and wherein means is provided for varying
    the space between the elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221,    for an implement having tool elements of this character and which
    is similarly capable of retaining a volume of material, but which is not
    provided with gap-adjusting means.

    233,    for an implement having a tool of the description of this subclass,
    which implement also includes a feeder* from a reservoir.*


CLS 401/257
TXT Implement under subclass 256 wherein one of said tool elements is joined by
    a hinged connection for swinging movement relative to the other tool
    element.


CLS 401/258
TXT Implement under the class definition comprising a tubular member defining a
    flow channel for material, through which channel extends an elongated
    element (the stylus) terminating in a single-rod-like work-engaging portion.

    (1)     Note.  Since the tubular member may also engage the work, it and
    the elongated element together are considered to constitute a single tool*
    for this subclass; not diverse, individual tools for subclass 22.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196+,   for an implement wherein the stylus is of porous material.

    221+,   for a bifurcate nib pen in which the work is contacted by two
    elongated elements defining a capillary channel between them, which
    elements extend through a tubular member; subclasses 268+, wherein the
    number of elements contacting the work are greater in number than two; and
    subclass 292, for a stylus provided with supply means (e.g. grooves) on the
    outer surface thereof only.


CLS 401/259
TXT Implement under subclass 258 wherein the elongated element is bodily
    slidable in the tubular member by the force of application to the work
    surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195,    for an implement provided with motive power or gear means for
    reciprocating a stylus within a tubular member for performing a combined
    coating and perforating operation.

    272+,   for an implement having a tool of the brush, broom, or mop type
    which is slidable within a tubular member because of the force of
    application to a work surface; and see the search notes thereto for
    implements having other types of work-pressure-actuated slidable tools.


CLS 401/260
TXT Implement under subclass 259 wherein the elongated element is urged to
    work-engaging position by elastically deformable means.

    (1)     Note.  The resilient biasing means may be integral with the stylus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273,    for a similar combination in which the tool is of the brush, broom,
    or mop type; and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 401/261
TXT Implement under the class definition wherein the tool* is in the form of
    (1) an elongated edge; or (2) a substantially continuous surface of
    substantial length and width; or (3) an edge or surface which entirely
    surrounds an unobstructed opening at the end of a passage for the coating
    material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass will take a patent for an implement wherein
    the work-contacting portion of the tool has:



    (a)     edge slits or surface grooves, provided that the slits or grooves
    are so shallow as to divide the work-contacting surface into nothing more
    than mere irregularities.  (However, a tool wherein deep slots or slits
    divide the work-contacting portion into individual filamentary elements is
    considered to be a brush, classifiable in subclasses 268+); or

    (b)     a fabric pile or nap of ordinary length.  (However, unshorn hairs
    of a natural hide or fleece are considered to be filamentary elements and
    an implement having this kind of tool will be placed in subclasses 268+;
    and see, also, subclasses 196+, for a porous fabric tool having a pile or
    nap).

    (2)     Note.  A patent to a brush which, as disclosed, is intended to have
    its filamentary elements applied parallel to the work surface will,
    nevertheless, not be placed in this subclass but, rather, in subclasses
    268+, since the filamentary elements are not deemed to present a
    substantially continuous surface.  A brush, disclosed for use in the
    conventional manner will, of course, also be placed in subclasses 268+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for an implement including a blade-like or pad-like spreading tool
    for regulating the thickness of an applied coating.

    9+,     for a tool shaped to conform to a curved work surface or to
    angularly related work surfaces.

    13,     for an implement having a pad-like tool and including means to
    withdraw applied material from the work surface.

    25+,    for an implement having diverse tools, one of which is blade-like,
    pad-like, or apertured.

    39,     for an implement having at least two tools of the brush, broom, or
    mop type, of which one is an applying tool and the other a tool which
    treats material already applied to the work surface.

    130,    for a device including a supply container for coating material and
    a closure-attached bladelike, padlike, or apertured tool which is
    completely separable from the supply container to apply the material onto a
    work surface.

    139,    for an implement having a blade-like or pad-like tool which
    implement includes means for depositing material directly on the work
    surface.


CLS 401/262
TXT Implement under subclass 261 including a detachably mounted cover for
    enclosing the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    269,    for a similar combination including a tool of the brush, broom, or
    mop type; and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 401/263
TXT Implement under subclass 261 including a flow-regulator*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270+,   for a flow-regulator in an implement whose tool is a brush, broom,
    or mop; and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 401/264
TXT Implement under subclass 263 wherein the flow-regulator is actuated by the
    force generated in the application of the tool to the work surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272+,   for a similar flow-regulator in an implement whose tool is a brush,
    broom, or mop; and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 401/265
TXT Implement under subclass 261 whose work-engaging portion is in the form of
    an edge or surface which entirely surrounds an unobstructed opening at the
    end of a passage for the coating material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for an implement including diverse tools of which one is apertured.

    28,     for a device whose work-engaging surface has a plurality of
    openings and a plurality of projections.

    196+,   for an implement whose tool comprises a previous layer or mass
    having capillary interstices through which coating material may pass to the
    work surface from the supply-means*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 104.93+, for
    a porous tool, per se, coated or impregnated with supply material.


CLS 401/266
TXT Implement under subclass 265 whose work-engaging portion is in the form of
    an elongated edge or a surface having substantial length and width.


CLS 401/267
TXT Implement under subclass 261 wherein the tool is so configured, or so
    cooperates with an attached element, as to provide a cavity located
    entirely between the work-engaging end of the tool and the end opposite
    thereto, which cavity constitutes the sole supply-means*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221,    for a bifurcate-nib-type tool configured so as to provide a cavity
    which constitutes the complete supply-means, and see the notes thereto;
    indented subclasses 252+, for such a tool which cooperates with an attached
    element to constitute the entire supply-means; and indented subclasses
    256+, for a broad-face, adjustable gap ruling pen wherein the space between
    the nib elements constitutes the sole supply-means.


CLS 401/268
TXT Implement under the class definition including a tool* formed of a support
    and a plurality of elongated filamentary elements (e.g., bristles, strands,
    strand loops) joined to the support (e.g., core, back, or flexible backing)
    either individually or in groups (e.g., tufts) and projecting therefrom
    free of one another at their work-contacting ends.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24      and 27, for a device including diverse tools of which one is a
    brush, broom, or mop.

    129,    for a device comprising a supply container for coating material and
    a closure-attached brush which dips into and is removable from the supply
    container in order to receive, carry and apply coating material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 3+, for a
    machine having a work-contacting tool of the brush, broom, or mop type (See
    the definition of "machine" in Part IV of the Class 15 definition);
    subclasses 104.001+, for a tool, per se, of the brush, broom, or mop type;
    subclass 104.9 for a machine-attachable bottle-washing tool (which may be
    combined with supply-means*); and subclass 106 for a machine-attachable
    brush combined with means for applying coating material to the brush or to
    a work area circumscribed by the filamentary elements of the brush.


CLS 401/269
TXT Implement under subclass 268 including a detachably mounted cover for
    enclosing the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for an implement in which a tool is retracted within an enclosing
    member by application of a removable cap.

    124,    for the combination of (1) a device comprising a source of coating
    material and an independent applicator and (2) a removable cap for the
    applicator.

    202,    for an implement including a porous tool provided with a cap.

    213,    for a ball point implement provided with a cap.

    220,    for an implement wherein the tool is a roller other than a ball and
    wherein a flow-regulator* is actuated by the application of a removable cap
    to tool-enclosing position.

    234,    for an implement including a bifurcate nib tool and a cap which
    changes the condition of a flow-regulator when moved to or from
    tool-enclosing position.

    243+,   for an implement including a bifurcate nib tool provided with a cap.

    262,    for an implement having a blade-like, pad-like, or apertured tool
    provided with a cap.


CLS 401/270
TXT Implement under subclass 268 having a flow-regulator*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for an implement including a flow-regulator, or regulators, for
    proportioning flow between divergent feeder* portions, of which one portion
    conducts a liquid vehicle to a concentrate, for admixture therewith, and
    the other portion bypasses the material.

    44+,    for an implement including a flow-regulator for one, or each, of a
    plurality of feeders adapted to receive material independently from
    separate sources of supply.

    133,    for an implement having a replaceable supply cartridge and a
    flow-regulator which is actuated upon assembly of the cartridge with the
    tool-supporting section of the implement.

    136,    for an implement including means to regulate the flow of material
    optionally to the tool or to a work surface.

    137+,   for an implement including means to regulate the flow of material
    for discharge directly onto a work surface.

    178,    for an implement having means for regulating flow through a
    force-producing piston.

    188,    for an implement including a pump for adding gas to the reservoir
    and a flow-regulator.

    189,    for an implement including means to withdraw gas from the reservoir
    and a flow-regulator.

    190,    for an implement including a pressurized reservoir (e.g., Aerosol)
    and a flow-regulator.

    204     and 205+, for an implement, including a flow-regulator, wherein the
    tool is porous.

    219+,   for an implement, including a flow-regulator, wherein the tool is a
    roller other than a ball or is an endless belt.

    232+,   for an implement, including a flow-regulator, wherein the tool is a
    bifurcate nib pen.

    259+,   for an implement, including a flow-regulator, wherein the tool is a
    stylus.

    263,    for an implement, including a flow-regulator, wherein the tool is
    blade-like, pad-like, or apertured.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, appropriate subclasses, for a flow control system,
    per se.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses, for a dispenser disclosed for
    use with a coating tool and including a flow-regulator, particularly
    subclasses 576+, for a dispensing inkwell; and see the search notes to
    subclass 576.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, appropriate subclasses, for a valve,
    per se.


CLS 401/271
TXT Implement under subclass 270 wherein the flow-regulator is operated by
    pressure of the supply material* thereagainst.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143+,   for a flow-regulator, responsive to pressure of the supply
    material, combined with means to generate the pressure in the material.


CLS 401/272
TXT Implement under subclass 270 wherein the flow-regulator is put into
    operation by the sliding of the tool rectilinearly inwardly or outwardly of
    means surrounding or surrounded by the tool, or by force generated in the
    application of the tool to a work surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    234, and 269, for an implement wherein telescopic movement of a
    tool to regulate flow of material is actuated by the application or removal
    of a removable cap.

    220,    for a similar implement wherein the tool is a roller other than a
    ball.

    235,    for a similar implement wherein the tool is a bifurcate nib pen.

    259+,   for a similar implement wherein the tool includes a stylus.

    264,    for a similar implement wherein the tool is blade-like or pad-like.

    277,    for an implement wherein axial flow-regulating movement between a
    tool and structure surrounded by or surrounding the tool occurs by
    operation of screw thread means.


CLS 401/273
TXT Implement under subclass 272 wherein the flow-regulator is biased to flow
    inhibiting position by an elastic, solid-material member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206,    for a similar implement wherein the tool is porous.

    214,    for a similar implement wherein the tool is a ball point.

    260,    for a similar implement wherein the tool is a stylus.


CLS 401/274
TXT Implement under subclass 270 wherein the flow-regulator is so constructed
    that it is actuated by a change in the position or inclination of the
    entire implement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    for an implement in which a change in inclination results in the
    projection or retraction of the tool as well as actuation of a
    flow-regulator.

    272+,   for an implement including a brush, broom, or mop wherein a
    flow-regulator is actuated by movement of the implement against a work
    surface; and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 401/275
TXT Implement under subclass 270 wherein the flow-regulator part is moved by a
    change of position of the manipulating means for the implement relative to
    the tool.


CLS 401/276
TXT Implement under subclass 270 wherein the flow-regulator admits atmospheric
    air into the reservoir* for control of movement of coating material through
    a passage other than that which admits the air.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135,    for an implement including rupturable means to establish flow or a
    sealed-cartridge receiver, which implement includes vent control means.

    232+,   for an implement including the combination of a bifurcate nib pen
    and a regulatable vent.


CLS 401/277
TXT Implement under subclass 270 wherein the flow-regulator is actuated by
    rotation of a member threaded to the implement.


CLS 401/278
TXT Implement under subclass 270 including elastically deformable means adapted
    to produce a force upon the flow-regulator to urge it toward a
    predetermined regulatory condition.


CLS 401/279
TXT Implement under subclass 278 including manually movable means which has a
    law of motion (e.g., linear) different in kind or direction from that of
    the movable part of the flow regulator (e.g., rotary), and which is
    effective to deform the elastically deformable means and thereby change the
    regulatory condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277,    for a similar implement including screw means to actuate a
    resiliently biased flow-regulator.


CLS 401/280
TXT Implement under subclass 270 wherein the movable part of the flow-regulator
    has an opening therethrough alignable with the passage so as to permit flow
    of material to the tool, or disalignable so as to inhibit flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237,    for a bifurcate nib pen having a similar flow-regulator with a
    movable part which has an aperture alignable and disalignable with a
    feeder* passage.


CLS 401/281
TXT Implement under subclass 280 wherein movement of the movable part is about
    an axis.


CLS 401/282
TXT Implement under subclass 268 including a feeder*.

    (1)     Note.  The feeder may be a mere apertured wall between the
    reservoir and the tool elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for an implement which includes more than one coating tool and feed
    means which may be directed to either tool.

    41,     for an implement having dispersible or soluble solid material in
    the feeder.

    44+,    for an implement wherein the feeder receives material from a
    plurality of parallel supply sources.

    196+,   for an implement including a feeder and a porous tool.

    221+,   for a similar combination wherein the tool is a bifurcate nib pen
    and the feeder is of capillary dimension(s).

    258+,   for a similar combination wherein the tool includes a stylus.

    261+,   for a similar combination wherein the tool is blade-like, pad-like,
    or apertured; particularly subclasses 265+, wherein the feeder extends
    through the tool.

    270+,   for an implement including a feeder and means to regulate flow of
    material to filamentary tool elements; and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 401/283
TXT Implement under subclass 282 wherein the feeder comprises a liquid-previous
    body through which the coating material may move to the tool elements by
    surface tension.

    (1)     Note.  A patent for an implement including porous tool strands,
    portions of which extend into the reservoir for conveying material to the
    work contacting portions of the strands, will be placed in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23+,    for a porous tool combined with a porous feeder.

    223     or 224, for a bifurcate-nib implement including a feeder which is
    either a porous body or is a cluster of elements for conveying material by
    surface tension only.

    268,    for an implement of the brush, broom, or mop type wherein a porous
    element constitutes the sole material retaining means, which means
    transfers material by direct contact with the tool, and not through a
    feeder.

    282+,   (except the instant subclass), for an implement of the brush,
    broom, or mop type wherein a cluster of merely juxtaposed monofilaments of
    liquid-impervious material guides coating material to the tool elements by
    surface tension.


CLS 401/284
TXT Implement under subclass 282 wherein the discharge end portion of the
    feeder either (1) is at or slightly beyond the external lateral confines of
    the tool* or (2) releases material to a support for the tool elements;
    which material can then flow to an external lateral surface portion only of
    the entire plurality of filamentary elements which constitute the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136,    for an implement wherein the coating material may, selectively, be
    fed to the tool or directly to the work surface.

    137+,   for an implement wherein the coating material is fed directly to
    the work surface only.


CLS 401/285
TXT Implement under subclass 282 wherein the feeder includes a conduit, in
    addition to and distinct from the support for the filamentary tool
    elements, which conduit extends a substantial distance adjacent, and in a
    direction substantially perpendicular to, the filamentary elements, and
    which conduit has a plurality of apertures therealong which are oriented to
    release coating material among the filamentary elements.

    (1)     Note.  Such a claimed limitation as "apertured", "perforated", or
    "spray tube", will be construed as defining a plurality of discharge
    openings along the side wall of a feeder tube when such limitation is
    coupled with a disclosure of such a tube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136,    for an implement in which a perforated feeder tube extends
    perpendicular to, but adjacent the periphery of, the tool elements so as to
    discharge material alternatively to the periphery of the tool elements or
    to the work surface there adjacent.

    137+,   for an implement in which a perforated feeder tube extends
    perpendicular to, but adjacent the periphery of, the tool for discharging
    material to the work surface there adjacent.

    284,    for an implement in which a perforated feeder tube extends
    perpendicular to, but along the periphery of, the tool elements so as to
    discharge material to said periphery.

    291,    for an implement of the brush, broom, or mop type including feed
    perforations in the support located between the bristles or tufts.


CLS 401/286
TXT Implement under subclass 282 wherein the feeder end portion, which contains
    no filamentary elements projects from the support and is surrounded by the
    filamentary elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284,    for an implement in which the feed means terminates beyond the
    lateral confines of the tool, to release material thereagainst.


CLS 401/287
TXT Implement under subclass 286 including a plurality of mutually spaced
    feeder discharge portions projecting from the support.


CLS 401/288
TXT Implement under subclass 286 wherein the discharge end portion of the
    feeder is surrounded by (1) socket means providing a single, peripheral,
    tool-element-anchoring groove about said portion, or (2) a band retaining
    the tool elements about said end portion.


CLS 401/289
TXT Implement under subclass 282 wherein the feeder includes a flexible hose
    section, leading to a reservoir* which is not part of the implement, or
    means for attachment to a pipe or flexible hose leading to such a reservoir.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42+,    for an implement couplable to an external source of liquid for
    dissolving soluble solid material in the implement.

    143+,   for an implement having, in addition to the structure of this
    subclass, force-producing means for moving coating material to or through
    the tool; particularly, subclasses 146+, for an implement wherein
    material-moving force is applied between the reservoir and the tool; and
    subclass 188, wherein one-way operative means causes irreversible
    introduction of material-moving pressurizing gas.

    203+,   for an implement including a porous tool and conduit supply means.


CLS 401/290
TXT Implement under subclass 282 including a detail of a joint or connection
    between (1) the tool*, individual tool elements (e.g., brush, bristles, or
    mop strands), or a group of tool elements (e.g., a bristle tuft) and (2)
    that part of the implement which retains the tool or tool elements.

    (1)     Note.  For placement of an original patent in this subclass the
    detail of the joint or connection must be claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128+,   for a device of this class wherein the tool is attached to a supply
    container closure which is separable from the container for use of the tool
    as an independent applicator*.

    207,    for an implement including a detachable porous tool.

    249+,   for a connection between a bifurcate nib tool and a feeder.

    289,    for an implement wherein the support for the filamentary tool
    elements is attached directly to a supply conduit or nozzle; and see the
    search notes thereto.


CLS 401/291
TXT Implement under subclass 282 in which the common support for the
    filamentary elements is apertured to constitute or receive the discharge
    end portion of the feeder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280+,   for a similar implement in which the passage through the support is
    controlled by a flow-regulator* part having an opening which is alignable
    or disalignable therewith; and see the search notes thereto.

    282,    for a support with feed apertures and tool elements in all the
    apertures.

    283,    for a porous support which feeds material to the tool elements by
    capillarity, and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 401/292
TXT Implement under the class definition which does not fall within the
    definition of any of the preceding subclasses.

    (1)     Note.  A patent to a subcombination of the subject matter of this
    class, if not provided for in any other class, will be placed in an
    appropriate subclass above which provides for the combination to which it
    pertains.  See section IV under the class definition.


CLS 402/
TTL BINDER DEVICE RELEASABLY  ENGAGING APERTURE OR  NOTCH OF SHEET

CLS 402/
TXT



    I.      INTRODUCTORY NOTES

    II.     CLASS DEFINITION

    III.    GLOSSARY OF TERMS

    IV.     SCOPE OF THE CLASS

    V.      RELATION TO CERTAIN OTHER CLASSES

    VI.     STRUCTURE OF THE CLASS

    I.      INTRODUCTORY NOTES

    This class is restricted to the subject matter defined in section II of
    this Class Definition.  The definition set forth in section II should,
    however, be read in the light of further limitations imposed thereon by the
    other sections and by any SEARCH CLASS notes in the subclass definitions.

    Figure 1 appearing in connection with certain defined terms in section III
    is intended as an aid in comprehension of the limitations of the concepts
    incorporated in such term in the subclass titles and definitions.  The
    details illustrated in such figure are not to be considered as constituting
    a structural limitation on the subject matter defined.

    An asterisk (*) has been applied to certain terms throughout this Class
    Definition to indicate that such terms have specific limitations in this
    class as set forth in the definitions of such terms in section III, which
    see.  Where such asterisk is employed in a subclass definition, it will not
    be repeated in any subclass indented thereunder.

    II.     CLASS DEFINITION

    This class is the residual locus for:

    (1)     A device including a sheet retainer* in the form of means which
    passes through the thickness dimension of a sheet* or a group of sheets to
    secure the same in either geometrically congruent relation (see (1) Note
    below) or in haphazard arrangement and cooperates with structure (e.g.,
    hole, peripheral incised opening, etc.) of the sheet(s) to releasably
    retain such sheet(s) therein or thereto in such a manner that removal
    thereof, in the manner intended, from the means may be accomplished without
    mutilation (e.g., tearing, deforming, etc.) of any portion of either the
    means or the sheet(s).

    (2)     such sheet retainer, per se.

    (3)     a depository* or other perfecting feature intended for attachment
    to and serving to perfect a sheet retainer* and its proximate function as
    set forth under (1) above, or

    (4)     a sheet, per se, notched or apertured to accommodate a sheet
    retainer of this class.

    (1)     Note.  Such a device having structure limiting its use to, or
    combined with sheets disposed in a particular arrangement for exhibition
    (e.g., overlapped, side-by-side arrangement, etc.) see Class 40, Card,
    Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, or the appropriate container class (note
    listing under section V A).

    III.    GLOSSARY OF TERMS

    DEPOSITORY -

    an article adapted to include a sheet retainer*, of this class, for the
    retention of apertured sheets* and intended to receive both (1) the
    nonthickness surface (See Fig. 1) and (2) the thickness surface (See Fig.
    1) of the sheet or either (1) or (2) above.

    KEEPER -

    an element or mechanism which cooperates with a sheet retainer to
    releasably secure a sheet* thereon.

    SHEET -

    a three dimensional body having all opposed surfaces thereof disposed in
    substantially parallel relation each nonthickness surface (See Figure 1
    below) of which has a greater surface area than the area of any one surface
    of the two remaining pairs of opposed surfaces.



    (1)     Note.  A composite sheet including means such as an apertured or
    notched tab or strip attached thereto for cooperation with a sheet
    retention means is considered the equivalent of a one piece sheet likewise
    notched or apertured.  Note particularly subclass 500 for a device of this
    class employed to releaseably retain such composite sheet.

    (2)     Note.  A sheet-like body (e.g., "divider", "follower", "sheet
    lifter", etc.) serving as a component of a device (e.g., container,
    depository, etc.) will not be considered a sheet as defined above.  Such
    body is a component of the device rather than a sheet intended for
    temporary storage on or within the device.



    SHEET RETAINER -

    an elongated element which passes through the thickness dimension (See
    Figure 1 of section III) of a sheet* or a group of sheets to secure the
    same and cooperates with structure (e.g., hole, peripheral incised opening,
    etc.) of the sheet(s) to releasably retain such sheet(s) and may further
    cooperate with (1) another elongated element or (2) a keeper*, to so retain
    such sheet.

    IV.     SCOPE OF THE CLASS

    Class 402 is intended as the locus for devices and subcombination thereof
    the proximate function of which is the retention of sheets* by sheet
    retainer* means which passes through the thickness dimension* of the sheets
    to releasably retain the sheets.  The subject matter for the most part
    represents what is generally known as the loose-leaf binder "art".

    V.      RELATION TO CERTAIN OTHER CLASSES

    A.      Specific relation to certain combination classes:

    A combination of a specific sheet retainer* of the type provided for in
    this class (402) with a nominal depository* (e.g., "wall(s)" and "bottom",
    etc.) will be placed in this class (402), however, the combination of such
    sheet retainer with a particular depository (e.g., terraced receptacle;
    rack; compartmented receptacle; cabinet; pocketbook or other receptacle
    including a compartment which may accommodate a sheet retainer; etc.) will
    be placed in the appropriate class providing for such depository for which
    see the following classes:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, appropriate subclass for a
    device which retains two or more sheets or an assembly of sheets for
    display purposes, subclasses 377+ and 493+ for rotatable carriers and
    subclasses 388+ and 530+ for hinged sheets.

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, for a device of that class (190)
    which may include a sheet retainer.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 38+ for a combined pocket
    or personal use package; subclasses 39+ for a pocket case to hold tickets,
    cards, stamps, etc.; subclass 232 for a combined package including a record
    means, subclass 425 for a file for plural cards or sheets; subclasses 449+
    for a plate plural cards or sheets; or sheet package; subclass 560 for a
    tray-type container including a content latch means; and subclass 565 for a
    tray-type container including an article retainer means.

    211,    Supports:  Racks. Note particularly subclasses 7, 45+, 49.1+, 123+,
    125, and 170+ for a support rack which may include a sheet retainer
    providing either destructive or nondestructive recovery of a sheet.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, for a device of that class which may include a
    sheet retainer.

    220,    Receptacles.  See subclasses 600+ for a receptacle including a
    partition or movable wall (e.g., follower, etc.).

    248,    Supports.  Note particularly subclasses 441.1+ for support means
    (e.g., easel, etc.) which may incorporate a sheet retainer; subclasses 301,
    303, and 304+ for a bracket including a hook which may be used to retain a
    sheet.

    281,    Books, Strips, and Leaves.  Note subclasses 19.1 and 29+ for a
    sheet depository (e.g., book cover) provided with means to secure the
    subject matter of that class therein.

    283,    Printed Matter, for an article "the physical structure of which,
    except strips, books, and leaves, is not a part of the inventions or is
    deemed to be conventional, bearing indicia which primarily effect
    intellectual impressions other than the esthetic, and combinations of such
    strips, books and leaves with other things not classifiable elsewhere".

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 183+ for a device of this
    class (402) (1) positioned within a receptacle or enclosure, or (2)
    positioned upon an article support (e.g., drawer, rack, shelf, etc.) of
    that class (312) and disposed within an enclosure.

    462,    Books, Strips, and Leaves for Manifolding, subclasses 71+ for a
    sheet binder device facilitating a manifolding operation.


    B.      Specific relation to certain subcombination classes:

    This class provides for a device including means providing the retention of
    and the nondestructive removal therefrom of a sheet.  However, a device
    generally known as a clamp or fastener for holding a sheet or an assembly
    of sheets in assembled relation will be placed in that class providing for
    such subject matter for which see the following classes:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, appropriate subclasses for (1) a hinge, per
    se, including two or more hinge leaves with means to attach the leaves to
    adjoining bodies or (2) a hinge including two or more leaves in combination
    with nominally recited bodies.

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., for a device of that class which is
    of general utility. Note particularly subclasses 703.2+ which provides for
    a device which may penetrate the thickness dimension of a sheet or assembly
    of sheets which device is intended to permanently remain therewith.  A
    sheet retention device of the type provided for in this class (402) with
    additional means to clamp the sheet on the sheet retention means will be
    placed in this class (402).

    70,     Locks, subclasses 456+ for a key retainer (i.e., key ring) which
    may have structure similar to a sheet retainer of this class (402).



    VI.     STRUCTURE OF THE CLASS

    The first-line subclasses of the class are based on the mode of operation
    of the sheet retainer*, where possible, with the remainder of the
    subclasses based on the structure (generally static) of the device.

    There are provided in subclasses 500-503 cross-reference art collections
    based on disclosed use or particular characteristics as indicated in the
    titles and definitions thereof.  These collections of disclosures are not
    exhaustive but are intended as aids to a search based on ultimate function
    or use, as a supplement to a search of other subclasses in this class, or
    as an indication of further related fields of search inside or outside this
    class.


CLS 402/1
TXT Device under the class definition in accordance with section II part (1) or
    part (2) thereof including a discrete means for punching an opening through
    the thickness dimension of a sheet* for the purpose of mounting such sheet
    on the sheet retainer* means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for a sheet retainer which may serve to impale a sheet and insert a
    strand through the sheet.

    25,     for the combination of a means which cooperates with a sheet
    retainer to force a sheet on the sheet retainer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclass for a device for cutting (e.g.,
    punching, etc.), an aperture in a sheet.


CLS 402/2
TXT Device under the class definition in accordance with section II part (1) or
    part (2) thereof including a lock means (e.g., key-operated tumbler locks,
    etc.), serving to hinder or preclude access to the contents of such device
    by persons other than those possessing either a key or secret knowledge of
    how to release such lock means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 2 for a device specially
    adapted for the purpose of keeping an album or other book closed.

    70,     Locks, subclasses 67+ for a portfolio with a lock and subclasses
    158+ for a cover with a lock.


CLS 402/3
TXT Device under the class definition in combination with a label or label
    holder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 642.02+ for a check,
    label or tag holder.

    281,    Books, Strips, and Leaves, appropriate subclasses for a book or
    book cover in combination with a label or label holder.

    283,    Printed Matter, subclass 64 for a book or book cover bearing
    indicia.


CLS 402/4
TXT Device under the class definition which comprises devices or elements in
    addition to or combined with a sheet retainer* and (1) having functions
    other than retaining notched or apertured sheets or (2) which serve to
    perfect the sheet retainer for its intended purpose.

    (1)     Note.  See (2) Note under section II  for a device under class
    definition with a perfecting feature and Section V for a statement of the
    line between combinations provided for in this class (402), and
    combinations appropriate to other classes.


CLS 402/5
TXT Device under the class definition in accordance with section II part (1) or
    part (2) thereof including an elongated sheet retainer* made of a series of
    pivotally attached elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclasses 78+ for a chain or
    pivotal link assembly, per se.


CLS 402/6
TXT Device under subclass 5 including a mechanical movement (e.g., linkage
    system, spring, screw rod with nut, etc.) which retracts a portion of the
    length of the sheet retainer to reduce the sheet storage capacity of the
    device.


CLS 402/7
TXT Device under the class definition in accordance with section II part (1) or
    part (2) thereof wherein a first sheet retainer includes means for
    insertion of a pliant elongated element (e.g., cord, etc.), through the
    thickness dimension of a sheet*, which element may then serve as a sheet
    retainer* for the sheet upon removal of the sheet from the first sheet
    retainer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for a sheet retainer device which includes means to force a sheet
    upon a sheet retainer.


CLS 402/8
TXT Device under the class definition in accordance with section II part (1) or
    part (2) thereof which includes a sheet retainer* made up of a flexible,
    flaccid or readily deformable material and which is either a slender
    endless element (e.g., rubber band, etc.), or elongated element (e.g.,
    string, split prong fastener, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for a pliant sheet retainer in combination with a sheet retainer
    including means to insert the pliant retainer through a sheet.

    19,     for a device including a sheet retainer in the form of a resilient
    element requiring deflection for sheet removal which retainer springs back
    into position after deflection.

    57,     for a device including a coiled spring type sheet retainer where
    deflection of the retainer is not necessary for sheet removal.


CLS 402/9
TXT Device under subclass 8 in combination with a separate mechanism or element
    (e.g., rubber strip, etc.) disposed between the sheet retainer and some
    other component of the device to exert a pull upon the sheet retainer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for a device including a pivotal link type sheet retainer with
    means to apply tension thereto.


CLS 402/10
TXT Device under subclass 9 wherein the pliant sheet retainer is pulled taut by
    a drum-like element upon which the pliant sheet retainer is mounted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, appropriate subclass for a device
    of that class for winding flexible material upon support means such as
    reels, bobbins or spools for storage purposes.


CLS 402/11
TXT Device under subclass 9 wherein the pliant sheet retainer is pulled taut by
    a element in the form of (1) a series of notches or (2) a continuous
    helical groove.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52+,    for a device including telescopic sheet retainers which are secured
    together by means of a rack or screw.


CLS 402/12
TXT Device under subclass 8 wherein the sheet retainer is in the form of a
    slender element having no end (e.g., rubber band, etc.).


CLS 402/13
TXT Device under subclass 8 where the sheet retainer is in the form of a limp
    elongated element a portion of which is (1) wrapped upon itself or some
    adjacent body or (2) compressed within a restricted opening in a body to
    produce a releasable binding of such portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14+,    for a device including a pliant elongated element of metal a first
    portion of which serves as a sheet retainer and a second portion continuous
    with and folded relative to the first portion serving as a keeper*
    therefore which second portion may be intertwined, interlaced or wedged
    with some other body to secure the same.


CLS 402/14
TXT Devices under subclass 8 including an elongated sheet retainer which
    releasably secures a sheet by means of readily bendable distal portion of
    such retainer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 703.2+ for a similar
    device disclosed for plural uses one of which may be the retention of
    sheets with nondestructive recovery thereof.

    281,    Books, Strips, and Leaves, subclass 27.3 for a book including some
    metal element in the leaf securing means.


CLS 402/15
TXT Device under subclass 14 wherein the distal end portion fits within the
    confines of a "securing means (e.g., apertured keeper*) to" releasably
    secure the end portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60+,    for discrete holder or keeper* structure, per se, or in combination
    with a rigid sheet retainer*.


CLS 402/16
TXT Device under subclass 15 wherein the holder is in the form of a rotatable
    sheet-like body mounted upon an apertured body through which the folded
    portion extends.


CLS 402/17
TXT Device under subclass 15 wherein the holder may be moved along a
    rectilinear path to secure the folded portion.


CLS 402/18
TXT Device under subclass 14 wherein the sheet retainer is provided with
    supplementary means, usually projections, to impale or grip a rigid base
    for support.


CLS 402/19
TXT Device under the class definition in accordance with section II part (1) or
    part (2) thereof wherein the sheet retainer* is spring-like and temporary
    physical distortion thereof from its normal sheet retaining state is
    intended and necessary as a prerequisite to the removal of a sheet*
    disposed thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8+,     for a device including a flaccid, resilient or readily deformably
    sheet retainer which requires manipulation for removal of a sheet therefrom.

    57,     for a device including a coiled spring type sheet retainer where
    deflection thereof may be incidental to but not a prerequisite to removal
    of a sheet therefrom.


CLS 402/20
TXT Device under subclass 19 including a pair of elongated sheet retainers
    contralaterally disposed in either offset or aligned relation such that
    their distal ends cooperate to secure a sheet in the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31+,    for a device including opposed sheet retainer prongs where no
    physical distortion is required for removal of a sheet therefrom.


CLS 402/21
TXT Device under subclass 19 including means to disengageably secure the distal
    end portion of the sheet retainer, to a contralaterally disposed keeper*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for a device including a sheet retainer involving arcuate travel
    and having an opposed keeper cooperating therewith where no physical
    distortion is required, of the sheet retainer, for removal of a sheet
    therefrom.

    60+,    for a sheet retainer generally, with a releasable keeper.


CLS 402/22
TXT Device under subclass 21 wherein the sheet retainer is fixed or pivotally
    attached at one end thereof to a body, the end remote from such fixed or
    pivotally attached end being disengageably held by the keeper.


CLS 402/23
TXT Device under subclass 22 wherein the pivotally attached end of the sheet
    retainer is rotatably mounted on a separate and distinct pintle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42+,    for device including opposed sheet retainer prongs rotatable on
    discrete hinge pins where no physical distortion is required for removal of
    a sheet therefrom.


CLS 402/24
TXT Device under the class definition in accordance with section II part (1) or
    part (2) thereof including means cooperating with a peripheral edge portion
    of the sheet* to assist in the manipulation thereof on the sheet retainer*.


CLS 402/25
TXT Device under the class definition in accordance with section II part (1) or
    part (2) thereof including means which causes motion of a perforated or
    unperforated sheet* relative to the sheet retainer* in such a direction
    that the sheet retainer passes through the thickness dimension of the sheet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for a sheet retention device which includes a separate aperture
    making device no part of which cooperates with the sheet retainer to make a
    hole in the sheet.

    7,      for a device including a sheet retainer which penetrates and
    inserts a binder strand through a sheet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclass for a cutting device for forming an
    aperture in a sheet.


CLS 402/26
TXT Device under the class definition in accordance with section II part (1) or
    part (2) thereof wherein the physical structure of the sheet retainer* or a
    component thereof is such that movement of the retainer or a component
    thereof in a curvilinear path (e.g., pivotally mounted sheet retainer,
    etc.) is prerequisite to (1) insertion or removal of the sheet* or (2)
    manipulation of the sheet thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14+,    for a device including a pliant type sheet retainer wherein arcuate
    travel of a folded portion is prerequisite to sheet removal.

    61+,    for an elongated retainer (i.e., rod) which must be rotated about
    its own axis relative to a fixed keeper in order to release a sheet.

    73+,    for a depository (i.e., cover), per se, which may be adapted to a
    device of this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 388+ and 530+ for
    hinge mounted items.


CLS 402/27
TXT Device under subclass 26 wherein the sheet retainer or a component thereof
    pivots about an axis which axis lies in the same plane as does the major
    axis of the retainer or components.


CLS 402/28
TXT Device under subclass 27 wherein translation of the sheet retainer or a
    component thereof is prerequisite to the arcuate travel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19+,    for a similar device wherein a deflection of the sheet retainer or
    a component thereof is prerequisite to arcuate travel for sheet removal.


CLS 402/29
TXT Device under subclass 26 wherein the sheet retainer or a component thereof
    pivots about an axis disposed normal to a plane containing the major axis
    of the retainer or component.


CLS 402/30
TXT Device under subclass 29 wherein translation of the sheet retainer or
    component is prerequisite to the arcuate travel.


CLS 402/31
TXT Device under subclass 29 wherein the device includes a pair of sheet
    retainers contralaterally disposed with their distal ends either in offset
    or aligned relation, which retainers pass through the thickness dimension
    of the sheet and cooperate to releasably secure the sheet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 404 and 536 for
    retaining means engaging aperture in an item.


CLS 402/32
TXT Device under subclass 31 wherein the lateral distance between either
    opposed offset retainers or two spaced nonopposing retainers is changeable,
    the purpose of which may be to accommodate various hole patterns in a
    sheet(s).


CLS 402/33
TXT Device under subclass 31 wherein (1) the spacing between the distal ends of
    the aligned retainers or (2) the amount of overlap or spacing between the
    distal ends of offset retainers is changeable in predetermined amounts.


CLS 402/34
TXT Device under subclass 31 wherein one of the opposed retainers travels an
    arcuate path relative to its static second cooperating opposed retainer.


CLS 402/35
TXT Device under subclass 34 wherein the movable retainer is urged toward or
    away from its static counterpart by a discrete resilient element.


CLS 402/36
TXT Device under subclass 31 wherein the proximate end portion of a sheet
    retainer is pivotally mounted on an axis separate from the pivotal axis of
    an opposing sheet retainer.


CLS 402/37
TXT Device under subclass 36 wherein the oppositely disposed sheet retainer are
    acted upon by a toggle joint means to bias the retainers against rotational
    travel.

    (1)     Note.  The term TOGGLE JOINT as used in the above definition, is
    defined as two bodies jointed together end-to-end or edge-to-edge in a
    nonplanar relation (or the equivalent thereof), so that when a force is
    applied tending to bring the bodies into a coplanar relation, any member
    abutting or jointed to the distal end thereof will tend to be forced apart.


CLS 402/38
TXT Device under subclass 37 supplemented by a cam or lever element to force
    the oppositely disposed sheet retainers toward or away from one another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for a similar device with an actuator to open or close opposed
    retainers.


CLS 402/39
TXT Device under subclass 37 wherein the proximate end portions of the opposed
    sheet retainer are mounted upon complementary shaped bodies of a toggle
    mechanism which bodies are disposed in contact relation and pivot about a
    mutual axis at the point of contact.


CLS 402/40
TXT Device under subclass 39 wherein a first sheet retainer, a second sheet
    retainer and at least one body component of the toggle joint are made of a
    continuous, elongated member.


CLS 402/41
TXT Device under subclass 36 including separate means operable to force the
    oppositely disposed sheet retainers toward or away from one another.


CLS 402/42
TXT Device under subclass 31 wherein the proximate ends of the opposed sheet
    retainers or the body to which such retainers are mounted are rotatably
    mounted on a pintle or plural separate and distinct coaxial pintles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76,     for a depository*, per se, including a back member, made up of two
    components which may be hinged at their juncture on a discrete hinge pin.

    77,     for a back member in combination with a face member which back
    member is made up of two components and may be hinged at their juncture on
    a discrete hinge pin.


CLS 402/43
TXT Device under subclass 42 including at least two sets of contralaterally
    aligned or offset sheet retainers with one or both retainers of each set
    being separately manipulated between and overlapped or abutting closed
    relation to cooperatively secure at least a portion of a sheet and an open
    position permitting release of that portion.


CLS 402/44
TXT Device under subclass 42 wherein the longitudinal axis of the distal end
    portions of the opposed sheet retainers are in biaxial relation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 388+ and 530+ for
    hinge mounted items.


CLS 402/45
TXT Device under subclass 29 including means to releasably secure the distal
    end portion of a sheet retainer to a contralaterally disposed keeper*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for a device including a resilient sheet retainer releasably
    attached to a contralaterally disposed keeper.

    31+,    for a device including a first row of retainers disposed either in
    contralaterally offset or aligned relation to a second row of retainers
    which rows of retainers jointly serve to releasably secure a sheet.


CLS 402/46
TXT Device under the class definition in accordance with section II part (1) or
    part (2) thereof wherein a first sheet retainer cooperates with a
    contralaterally offset or aligned second sheet retainer to releasably
    secure the sheet* and wherein the structure or disposition of at least one
    of the retainers is such that a straight line motion thereof is
    prerequisite to the insertion, manipulation or removal of the sheet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26+,    for a device including a sheet retainer requiring both an arcuate
    motion and a rectilinear motion to insert or remove a sheet therefrom and
    especially subclass 30 where rectilinear motion of the retainer precedes a
    curvilinear motion thereof.


CLS 402/47
TXT Device under subclass 46 including means for engaging an aperture or notch
    of sheet disposed within the device and adapted to move the sheet to a
    location remote from the device which means may also constitute a sheet
    retainer of the device or be a separate entity.


CLS 402/48
TXT Device under subclass 46 wherein at least a portion of the first sheet
    retainer fits and is translatable within the confines of the second sheet
    retainer which device further includes means to translate or fix the
    position of the first retainer relative to the second retainer.


CLS 402/49
TXT Device under subclass 48 wherein the means to telescopically drive or
    secure the first retainer relative to the second retainer is in the form of
    a mechanism including rotatably mounted elongated members which directly or
    indirectly interconnect the first and second retainers.


CLS 402/50
TXT Device under subclass 48 wherein the means to telescopically drive or
    secure the first sheet retainer relative to the second sheet retainer is
    disposed on the device in a position spaced from the retainers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52+     and 54, for a similar device wherein the means to telescopically
    drive and/or secure also functions as a sheet retainer or a component
    thereof.


CLS 402/51
TXT Device under subclass 50 wherein the remote means to drive or secure is in
    the form of (1) a mechanism including a helically grooved elongated element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for a device wherein the means to telescopically drive or secure
    the first sheet retainer relative to the second sheet retainer includes a
    pivotal linkage system in combination with and directly acted upon by a
    screw threaded means.

    53,     for a similar device wherein the means to telescopically drive or
    secure also functions as a sheet retainer.


CLS 402/52
TXT Device under subclass 48 wherein the means to drive or secure the opposing
    telescopic first and second sheet retainers includes at least one recess or
    aperture in a surface of one of the sheet retainers and means associated
    with the other sheet retainer for engaging said recess or aperture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50+,    for a device including notched or grooved means to drive or secure
    the telescoped sheet retainers which means is located remoted from the
    retainers.

    61+,    for a device including a keeper* cooperating with a series of
    notches in a sheet retainer to secure a sheet thereon where motion of the
    sheet retainer is not intended in the removal of sheet therefrom.

    63,     for a device including a sheet retainer with a keeper secured
    thereto by means selectively engaging one or a series of notches in the
    sheet retainer.


CLS 402/53
TXT Device under subclass 52 wherein the recess is in the form of a continuous
    helical groove.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for a similar device wherein the screw threaded driving or securing
    means is disposed remote from the retainers.


CLS 402/54
TXT Device under subclass 48 wherein the means to telescopically drive or
    secure the first sheet retainer relative to the second sheet retainer
    includes a cam element which element applies force to at least one of the
    sheet retainers either by direct contact therewith or through an
    intermediate member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52+,    for a similar device wherein the cam element or such intermediate
    member selectively engages at least one of a series of notches in one of
    the sheet retainers.

    64+,    for a sheet retainer including a keeper secured thereto by means
    including a cam element.


CLS 402/55
TXT Device under subclass 46 wherein the first and second sheet retainers are
    in abutting co-axial relation when associated to jointly secure a sheet and
    such relation is changeable by means permitting movement of the first
    retainer to a position wherein the abutting portions of the retainers are
    in a bi-axial spaced relation in order to permit removal of a sheet.


CLS 402/56
TXT Device under subclass 46 wherein the first and second sheet retainers are
    in abutting co-axial relation when associated to jointly secure a sheet and
    such relation is changeable by means permitting movement of the first
    retainer to a position wherein the abutting portions of the retainers are
    then in a co-axial spaced relation to permit removal of a sheet.


CLS 402/57
TXT Device under the class definition in accordance with section II part (1) or
    part (2) thereof wherein the sheet retainer* is in the form of an elongated
    body including an elastic strand (e.g., wire, etc.), coiled about the
    longitudinal axis thereof which axis passes through the thickness
    dimension* of the sheet*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8+,     for a device including a flexible, flaccid or deformable sheet
    retainer.

    19+,    for a resilient sheet retainer requiring deflection for removal.


CLS 402/58
TXT Device under the class definition in accordance with section II part (1) or
    part (2) thereof wherein the sheet retainer* is in the form of an elongated
    composite the length of which is made up of a plurality of assembled
    components each of which serves as sheet retainers and from which one
    component may be readily detached to decrease sheet storage capacity of the
    device or to which a like element may be added to increase sheet storage
    capacity of the sheet retainer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5+,     for a sheet retainer comprising a plurality of pivotally attached
    elements (e.g., links, etc.).


CLS 402/59
TXT Device under subclass 58 wherein a keeper* engages the sheet retainer to
    releasably secure the sheet thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60+,    for a nonsegmental sheet retainer equipped with a keeper.


CLS 402/60
TXT Device under the class definition in accordance with section II part (1) or
    part (2) thereof which includes a sheet retainer* and a discrete keeper*
    selectively disengageable therefrom to secure the sheet on the sheet
    retainer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for a device including means to force a sheet upon a sheet retainer
    which means may also serve as a keeper.


CLS 402/61
TXT Device under subclass 60 wherein the keeper releasably engages an exterior
    surface of the sheet retainer, per se, which retainer has structure which
    changes along the length thereof either dimensionally or in shape.


CLS 402/62
TXT Device under subclass 61 wherein the variation in cross-section is in the
    form of an opening which (1) has a continuous periphery (2) extends through
    the sheet retainer and (3) is disposed at an angle to the longitudinal axis
    of the sheet retainers.


CLS 402/63
TXT Device under subclass 61 wherein the variation in cross-section is in the
    form of a series of grooves or a continuous helical groove (i.e., threaded,
    etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52+,    for a device including telescopic sheet retainers with means
    including plural notches to telescopically drive or secure such retainers;
    subclasses 50+, for such device where such means is disposed remote from
    the retainers.


CLS 402/64
TXT Device under subclass 60 wherein the keeper includes means to releasably
    secure it upon the sheet retainer, which means includes a cam element which
    applies force to the sheet retainer either by direct contact or through an
    intermediate member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for a device having telescopic sheet retainers with means to
    releasably secure one of the retainers relative to the other which means
    includes a cam element which acts directly or indirectly upon one of the
    sheet retainers.

    59,     for a segmental sheet retainer with a keeper.

    68+,    for a similar device where the keeper includes an aperture or
    recess to receive the distal end portion of the sheet retainer.


CLS 402/65
TXT Device under subclass 64 wherein the securing means or a portion thereof
    lies in a plane which is disposed at an acute angle relative to the
    longitudinal axis of the sheet retainer to produce a bias gripping action
    therebetween.


CLS 402/66
TXT Device under subclass 65 wherein the securing means consists of a
    sheet-like resilient body (e.g., leaf spring, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65,     for a similar device where the skew keeper is not of leaf spring
    material but is acted upon by a spring disposed remote from the sheet
    retainer.


CLS 402/67
TXT Device under subclass 64 in which the wedge-type securing means for the
    keeper is actuated by the rotation of a helically grooved member associated
    therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for screw threaded means which secure or drive telescopic retainers
    relative to each other.

    53,     for a sheet retainer which includes a screw threaded securing means.


CLS 402/68
TXT Device under subclass 60 wherein the keeper includes a body having a
    through opening or a cavity therein which receives the distal end portion
    of a sheet retainer.


CLS 402/69
TXT Device under subclass 68 wherein the keeper is urged toward or away from a
    secured position by a resilient force-transmitting element.


CLS 402/70
TXT Device under the class definition in accordance with section II part (1) or
    part (2) thereof including a sheet retainer* and either a support or a
    depository* therefore.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for a base or depository in
    combination with a broadly recited sheet retainer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73+,    for a depository, per se, adapted for use with a sheet retainer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., for a device including a base and
    means to clamp a sheet thereagainst.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, appropriate subclasses for a rack including a
    sheet retainer and especially subclass 57.1 for a device of that class
    including an impaling means for stacked sheets.


CLS 402/71
TXT Device under subclass 70 which includes an element adapted to cover and
    extend over the sheet retainer to prevent accidental engagement therewith
    or the displacement of sheet* therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  A guard differs from a keeper in that it is spaced from and
    acts to shield the sheet retainers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59      and 60+, for a sheet retainer equipped with a keeper.


CLS 402/72
TXT Device under subclass 70 wherein the sheet retainer* is rotated so as to
    lie in a plane parallel or substantially parallel with the support means.


CLS 402/73
TXT Article under the class definition in accordance with part (3) thereof
    wherein the article includes a member having a portion adapted to receive a
    sheet retainer*, of this class, or such member is combined by attachment
    (usually hinged) with one or more additional members, which members serve
    to at least partially cover, underlie or be disposed along the thickness
    surface (See Fig. 1 of section III) of a sheet* held by a sheet retainer.

    (1)     Note.  A depository* which, per se, is provided for in this
    subclass claimed in combination with a keeper* will be placed in this or an
    indented subclass.

    (2)     Note.  See section V of this Bulleting for other classes, not
    listed below, which provide for a depository including structure (e.g.,
    drawer with guide, etc.), for its attachment to or support upon a sustainer
    or for cooperation with a receptacle (e.g., cabinet, rack, etc.), in
    combination with a sheet retainer which sheet retainer, per se, is provided
    for in this class.

    (3)     Note.  A back member, per se, will be placed in this subclass
    whereas a member or members which are disposed along a thickness surface
    (See Fig. 1 of section III) and at least a portion of nonthickness surface
    (See Fig. 1 of section III) will be placed in subclasses 74+ (note
    especially subclass 76).

    (4)     Note.  Search the appropriate subclasses above for a device
    including a depository in combination with a specific sheet retainer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, appropriate subclasses, for (1) a hinge,
    per se, including two or more hinge leaves with means to attach the leaves
    to adjoining bodies or (2) a hinge including two or more leaves in
    combination with nominally recited bodies.

    281,    Books, Strips, and Leaves, subclasses 29+ for a book (see
    definition of the term "book" in Class 281 Class Definition) including a
    cover or a book cover, per se, and subclass 19.1 for similar subject matter
    where the cover necessitates some modification of the body of the book.

    283,    Printed Matter, subclass 64 for a book cover the physical structure
    of which is conventional but which bears indicia which primarily effects an
    intellectural impression other than the esthetic.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, appropriate subclasses for a cabinet
    adapted to house a sheet retainer.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet, especially subclasses 98+ for such a product with structure, (e.g.,
    fold at edge or aperture), subclasses 221+ for such a product embodying a
    structurally defined element or component (e.g., porous or structurally
    defined fiber) and subclasses 411.1+ for such a product in the form of a
    nonstructural composite web or sheet characterized solely by the
    compositions of the layers.


CLS 402/74
TXT A depository under subclass 73 which includes a first sheet-like member
    (i.e., "face" member), which is to be disposed along a nonthickness
    surface* of the sheet, in combination with a second sheet-like member
    (i.e., "back" member) which is to be disposed adjacent a thickness
    dimension (see Fig. 1 of section III) of the sheet.

    (1)     Note.  The face member and back member may constitute a continuous
    piece of single or plural layer material.

    (2)     Note.  A back member, per se, will be placed in subclass 73 whereas
    a member or members which are disposed along a thickness surface (see Fig.
    1 of section III) and at least a portion of a  nonthickness surface (see
    Fig. 1 of section III) will be placed in this or an indented subclass.


CLS 402/75
TXT Depository under subclass 74 including means to secure a sheet retainer of
    this class thereto.


CLS 402/76
TXT Depository under subclass 74 wherein the second member includes two
    portions thereof interconnected by a pliant or rotatable means which permit
    rotation of one portion relative to the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29+,    and especially subclasses 42+ for a sheet retainer requiring
    arcuate travel thereof in a plane perpendicular to its axis of rotation for
    sheet removal in combination with a depository which may have a back member
    including hinged portions.


CLS 402/77
TXT Depository under subclass 74 wherein the face and back members are
    interconnected adjacent marginal portions by a pliant or rotatable means.


CLS 402/78
TXT A depository under subclass 73 having a member which serves to partially
    cover or underlie only a nonthickness surface of a sheet or group of sheets
    to be associated therewith.


CLS 402/79
TXT Article under the class definition in accordance with section II part (4)
    thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 359 for a folder and
    subclass 360 for a sheet of that class including an aperture or notch which
    folder or sheet may be disclosed for use in a device of this class.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, appropriate subclasses, for (1)
    a single-layer, waterlaid, fibrous product, or (2) a plural-layer product
    including a layer of fibers applied to a second layer by a process provided
    for in that class (162); and particularly subclasses 141-181.1, which
    include any nonstructural fiber (or fiber-containing) product (e.g., a
    particular blend of fibers) regardless of whether waterlaid or not.

    281,    Books, Strips, and Leaves, subclass 51 for a leaf in some form
    other than stock material or as elsewhere provided for and subclasses 38+
    for a sheet element of a book.

    283,    Printed Matter, appropriate subclasses for a similar sheet further
    including indicia which primarily effects an intellectual impression other
    than the esthetic.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet, and especially subclasses 131+ for such a product including
    apertures.


CLS 402/80
TXT Device under the class definition not within the definition of any
    preceding subclass in this class.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 402/500
TXT Device under the class definition wherein a composite sheet consisting of a
    sheet* with a tab, continuous strip or other attachment means secured to
    one margin of the sheet is claimed or disclosed to be secured to the device
    by an elongated element of the device cooperating with an aperture or notch
    in the tab, continuous strip, or other attachment means to releasably
    secure the sheet by disengagement from the notch or aperture.

    (1)     Note.  The elongated element referred to in the above definition
    was considered a sheet retainer* in the development of this class and
    accordingly, a search for a sheet retainer having particular structure is
    provided for in the appropriate preceding subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    281,    Books, Strips, and Leaves, subclass 23 for a book including
    continuous strips to attach a signature or leaf holder including means
    cooperating with the fold of a folded sheet to secure the same thereto.


CLS 402/501
TXT Device under the class definition wherein the sheet retainer defined under
    section III part (1) also extends continuously from a point outside the
    confines of the sheet past the edge of the sheet and into an incised
    periphery (e.g., slit margin, notch) of the sheet.

    (1)     Note.  A device including a sheet retainer which retainer may be
    disclosed as securing a notched sheet but the structure of which does not
    meet the definition of this subclass will be placed in an appropriate
    subclass above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19+,    for a similar device wherein the sheet retainer is resilient and is
    to be deflected for sheet removal.

    26+,    for a similar device wherein the sheet retainer is moved in an
    arcuate path to accomplish sheet removal.

    46+,    for a similar device including a like sheet retainer opposed by a
    second sheet retainer and wherein at least one sheet retainer is moved in a
    rectilinear path to accomplish sheet removal therefrom.


CLS 402/502
TXT Device including a sheet retainer* disposed within a box-like receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73+,    for a binder cover intended for attachment to a sheet retainer*.


CLS 402/503
TXT Subject matter of this class including material having the property of
    magnetic attraction.


CLS 403/
TTL JOINTS AND CONNECTIONS

CLS 403/
TXT This is the generic class of connections between two or more rigid or
    semirigid members at substantially a single locus when (I) the members
    cooperate to form a utilitarian structure or assemblage; (II) either (a) an
    intrinsic property of at least one of the members is utilized in effecting
    the connection, (b) the members are related to each other in a particular
    manner (e.g., angularly), (c) a portion of one member reorients relative to
    a portion of the other member about the connection, or (d) all other
    connections between such members for which no other provisions have been
    made; and (III) the members constitute either (a) stock elements having
    such general and varied utility as to be identifiable with no particular
    art until connected (e.g., framework members which transmit force or torque
    to each other), (b) components of an assemblage which have the same utility
    before and after connecting but which, when connected, interact with each
    other to accomplish a common task and no longer have any independent
    operation (e.g., rigid, interconnected torque or thrust transmitting rods),
    (c) subcomponents of an assemblage, at least one of which has utility only
    when interacting with the other to accomplish a specific task (e.g.,
    windshield wiper and windshield), or (d) components having independent
    utility, but which, when connected, cooperate to change, enhance, expand or
    make interdependent their operation (e.g., articulated members).

    This is also the generic class of connections between the ends of a single
    rigid or semirigid member at substantially a single locus when (I) the
    connected member forms a utilitarian structure or assemblage; (II) either
    (a) an intrinsic property of the member is utilized in effecting the
    connection, (b) the ends of the member are related to each other in a
    particular manner (e.g., lapped), (c) portions of the member reorient
    relative to each other about the connection, or (d) a tool driven, tool
    deformed, or destructively releasable fastening means is utilized; and
    (III) the member constitutes either (a) a stock element having such general
    utility as to be identifiable with no particular art until connected or (b)
    a component of a larger assemblage which component has the same utility
    before and after connection, but which when connected accomplishes its task
    in a varied manner.

    This is also the generic class of connections between a flaccid member
    (e.g., cable) and a rigid or semirigid member at substantially a single
    locus when (I) the connected members form a utilitarian structure or
    assemblage, and (II) in effecting the connection either (a) an intrinsic
    property of the member is utilized or (b) a tool driven, tool deformed, or
    destructively releasable (i.e., the only method of releasing it is to
    destroy it) fastening means is utilized.

    In addition, this is the generic class for connecting or fastening means,
    per se, when the means is (I) disclosed as used solely with a connection
    proper for this class and (II) limited by either its structure (e.g., an
    L-shaped nail plate) or configuration (e.g., multiple fasteners in a
    specific pattern) to a very restricted range of use (i.e., the means lacks
    general utility).

    (1)     Note.  The term "member" as used in this class refers to the
    primary members which are connected and each may consist of one part or a
    plurality of parts.  Many connections involve the use of a plurality of
    elements each of which may be connected to a member or to another element.
    However, unless each of the connections involved is coordinate with the
    others in the system, the elements are not referred to as "members" but as
    "components".  For example, a bolt connecting two abutting members bridging
    the juncture of two packed members is not considered a member, but a bolt
    independently joined to each of two spaced members is itself a member.
    Likewise, a plurality of bolts joining the same two members at the same
    locus are not members but components.

    (2)     Note.  The expression "utilitarian structure or assemblage" denotes
    an entity which has a function and identity of its own apart from that of
    its individual members.  Connections between members which, when connected,
    do not form a utilitarian device but which are connected merely for
    convenience or storage are not classified in this class (403) and are found
    in the appropriate class which provides for the particular assemblage
    (e.g., Class 24, Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., Class 206, Special
    Receptacle or Package).

    (3)     Note.  Patents issued prior to 1931 have not in all instances been
    classified by their claimed disclosure, so the placement of these older
    patents does not necessarily indicate lines of classification.

    (4)     Note.  A claim which recites only as much of the structure of a
    member as is necessary to effect its connection may be included within this
    class, and, in general, the mere naming of a member will not cause
    classification outside this class.  However, if details of a member which
    go beyond those which are used in effecting the connection are included,
    classification will be based on the member unless specific provision is
    made in this class (403).  In the situation of a single member with
    connected ends, the broad recitation of a "loop" or equivalent terminology
    will not cause classification outside this class, since such configuration
    is necessary to align the ends to effect their connection.  However, a
    single member and means connecting its ends which allow the size of the
    closed member (i.e., loop) to be adjusted are elsewhere classifiable (e.g.,
    Class 24).

    (5)     Note.  In interpreting this definition, the following examples of
    intrinsic properties are given:

    1.      A modification, (e.g., threading) of at least one portion of a
    member at its connection point for other than mere reception of a fastener;

    2.      A particular shape or cross-section of at least one portion of a
    member at its connection point; and

    3.      A physical or chemical property of a member which has an effect on
    the connection either before or after the connection is effected, (e.g.,
    fusion, affinity for certain adhesives, resistance to electrolytic action,
    flexibility, etc).

    DEFINITIONS OF TERMS:

    Component:An element or a characteristic of a member used in effecting a
    connection.

    Connector:      A retainer which serves to hold the members against
    separation.

    Fastener: A retainer which serves to hold the members or one or more
    components against separation.

    Flaccid:        Structure, which when subjected to a distortion force less
    than or equal to earth's gravitational force, is incapable (in at least one
    of its orientations) of maintaining its previous formational shape or being
    self supporting over any appreciable dimension.

    Joint:  A connection between two or more members which utilizes an
    intrinsic property of at least one of the members or wherein the members
    are related to each other in a particular manner.

    Member: One of a plurality of structures which are connected.  (See 1 Note)

    Retainer:       A component comprising a discrete element which serves
    either to hold the members against separation or to hold another component
    in its proper position.

    Rigid: Structure which when subjected to a distortion force normally
    encountered within the environment (as defined by the disclosure), is
    capable of resisting this force if applied to the structure in any
    orientation and maintaining its previous formational shape thereafter.

    Semirigid: Structure which is both (a) capable of resisting distortion
    (i.e., maintaining its previous formational shape or being self-supporting
    over all appreciable dimensions) caused by a force applied to it in any of
    its orientation which is of a magnitude equal to or less than the earth's
    gravitational force, and (b) incapable of resisting distortion caused by a
    force applied to it which is normally encountered in its working
    environment (e.g., ductile or resilient structure).

    (1)     Note. Patents issued prior to 1931 have not in all instances been
    classified by their claimed disclosure, so the placement of these older
    patents does not necessarily indicate lines of classification.

    (2)     Note. The expression "utilitarian structure or assemblage" denotes
    an entity which has a function and identity of its own apart from that of
    its individual elements and subcomponents of such entity. Connections
    between elements which, when connected, do not form a utilitarian device
    but which are connected merely for convenience or storage are not
    classified in this class (403) but will be formed in the appropriate class
    which provides for the particular assemblage (e.g., Class 24, Buckles,
    Buttons, Clasps, etc., Class 206, Special Receptacle or Package).

    (3)     Note.  If otherwise proper for this class, a connection between two
    ends of a single member wherein no structure of the member which is not
    necessary to effect the connection will be placed in this class unless
    specific provision is made elsewhere. Inventions which include any
    structure of the member other than that necessary to effect the connection
    will be classified with the member or in a more general class (e.g., Class
    24).  The broad recitation of a "loop" or equivalent terminology will not
    cause classification outside this class (403) since such configuration is
    necessary to align the ends (i.e., to effect the connection).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., for details of a fastener and the
    joint between a member made of flaccid material (i.e., incapable of
    resisting a distorting force of the magnitude normally encountered over any
    substantial linear dimension without the aid of a reinforcing means) and
    another member.  Examples of flaccid material are ordinary fabric, chain,
    and cord or rope.  A member which is sufficiently stiff as to be capable or
    resisting such a force to the extent necessary to enable it to maintain a
    shape or to be self supporting over an appreciable length thereof is
    considered semirigid rather than flaccid and is proper for this class (403)
    if otherwise proper for Class 403.

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 237 for an apparatus for connecting or
    disconnecting a coupling and a conduit.

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 433+ for means for knotting the ends of a
    band which passes around a bundle.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 29+ for apparatus for tensioning a binder and
    securing spaced portions thereof together while so tensioned and subclass
    33 for apparatus for securing spaced portions of a binder together.

    104,    Railways, subclass 15 for apparatus for welding two sections of a
    railway track.

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 98+ for molds for forming a product having
    means for interconnection with a portion of a like product.

    289,    Knots and Knot Tying, subclasses 2+ and 17 for a device for forming
    a knot in an elongated cord, strand, or strip.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, appropriate subclasses for means for securing a
    closure element in locked or adjusted position.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 86.4+ for
    means for securing a load to a hoist line.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, appropriate subclasses for members joined by a
    fastener such as a bolt, screw, rivet, nail, etc., wherein the members are
    modified only to provide an accommodation for the fastener, e.g., a
    preformed aperture, etc.  See subclasses 81+ for a threaded fastener (i.e.,
    a bolt or nut) and means for restricting the rotation thereof relative to a
    coacting substructure; included therein are connections between two or more
    members (e.g., joints between sections of a railroad rail) wherein the only
    specificity as to the members relates to the manner in which they are
    adapted to serve as the coacting substructure for the bolts or nuts
    involved in the connection.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 108 for apparatus comprising means to shape fluent material
    against the juxtaposed terminal portions of tubular or rodlike preforms to
    unite the preforms.

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 180+ for denture to abutment tooth
    connections; subclasses 191+ for tooth to denture connections; and
    subclasses 208+ for tooth facing to backing connections.

    PROCESSES OF CONNECTING:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 592+ for processes of connecting in
    general.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 741.1+ for
    processes of connecting structural elements of that class.

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, subclasses 3+ for a
    process of intertwining strands.

    114,    Ships, subclass 86 for a process of filling or closing the seams
    between planking, etc., of a ship.

    140,    Wireworking, subclasses 111+ for processes of joining wire.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 344+ for a process of joining wooden
    members wherein a woodworking step is involved.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for processes of adhesive bonding.

    JOINTS OR CONNECTIONS IN OTHER CLASSES:



    5,      Beds, subclass 282.1 for means for connecting plural parts of a bed
    and subclasses 288+ for means for connecting a side rail with a corner part
    or the head board or footboard of a bed.

    14,     Bridges, subclass 14 for a connection between elements of a bridge
    truss and subclass 22 for a connection between a cable and another part of
    a suspension bridge.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 191.1+ for
    means to secure a tuft, knot, or bunch of brush or broom material in a
    socket or a hole, 250.31+ for an optical-member-attachable cleaner having a
    specific coupling or mounting for a driving means, or between a cleaning
    elment and means linking it to the driving means, 250.352 for an
    optical-member-attachable cleaner specific arm structure having a pivot
    between a hub and extended arm member, or a biasing assembly feature, or
    250.46 for an optical-member-attachable cleaner element articulated
    structure having a specific joint, hinge, or pivot within the articulated
    structure.

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., for details of a joint between a
    member made of flaccid material and another member when manually releasable
    fastening means connects them.  A member which is sufficiently stiff as to
    be capable of resisting a distorting force to the extent necessary to
    enable it to maintain a shape or  to be self-supporting over an appreciable
    length thereof is considered semirigid rather than flaccid and is proper
    for this class (403) if otherwise proper for Class 403.

    27,     Undertaking, subclass 17 means for joining the lid or cover to the
    body of a casket.

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 180 for an interlocking joint between
    components of metal stock, blanks, or indeterminate articles.

    30,     Cutlery, appropriate subclasses for means for joining plural parts
    of a cutting implement.

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, appropriate subclasses for means for
    joining plural parts of a geometrical instrument.

    42,     Firearms, subclasses 75.01+ for means for joining the stock and the
    barrel of a firearm.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses for a
    joint or connection peculiar to a building structure.

    54,     Harness, subclass 21 for means for fastening the ends of a horse
    collar together, subclasses 26+ for means for fastening hames together when
    in operative position, subclasses 30+ for means for fastening hames and
    tugs or traces, subclass 53 for means for attaching a trace to a
    whiffletree, subclass 59 for connecting means between a strap and a neck
    yoke, subclass 68 for means for fastening a pad to a harness part and
    subclass 85 for a metallic connecting piece employed on a strap halter.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclass 202 for a
    splice in strand structure wherein the splice is formed solely by a
    twisting or twining operation.

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclasses 84+ for a chain
    link and subclass 95 for a swivel for use with a chain or similar article.

    63,     Jewelry, subclass 4 for a bracelet comprised of a series of
    connected links or units and means for uniting the ends of said bracelet,
    subclasses 15.1+ for means for securing plural annular finger rings
    together and subclass 15.7 for a finger ring comprising a plurality of
    arcuate segments secured together to form an annular member.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 201 for means for connecting a
    volume or rate of flow meter into a pipe line or a meter box.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 470 for a resilient
    connection in a control lever or linkage system.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 698.11+ for a joint or connection between (1) a
    cutting tool and its support, (2) a plurality of cutting elements or (3)
    two portions of a cutting tool support.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 8.1+ for a yieldable or
    frictional connection between adjacent cars or elements of a train,
    subclass 40 for a flexible joint between boiler sections of a steam
    locomotive, subclass 47 for an articulate or flexible pipe connection
    between relatively movable parts of a steam locomotive, subclass 199.1 for
    a connection between a railway car body and a truck, subclasses 200+ for a
    connection between a truck bolster and a truck or between a truck bolster
    and a body bolster and subclass 424 for a freight car having special joint
    fixtures to prevent the leakage of granular material.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclass 79 for a
    joint or connection in the wall or panel of a safe or related device.

    114,    Ships, subclass 86 for means for filling or closing the seams
    between the planking of a ship, subclass 88 for means for uniting
    components of a ship and subclasses 97+ for connections between a ship spar
    and a mast or yard.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 365 for means for
    connecting a drum and a header or water tube and subclass 511 for couplings
    for tubes and flues and connections between tubes or flues and a boiler.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 98 for a joint between components of
    a stove and subclass 119 for a joint in a furnace or casing.

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 121.1+ for means for joining a pad to the pad
    carrier of a truss.

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 225 for a joint or connection between components
    of a tobacco user's appliance.

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclasses 29+ for means for
    connecting the ribs and stretchers to the notches and runners,
    respectively, of an umbrella.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 100+ for a tubular conduit
    comprising a plurality of tubular members connected in break joint
    relation, subclass 120 for a flexible tubular conduit comprising a
    plurality of jointed, relatively movable sections and subclass 155 for a
    tubular conduit comprising a plurality of rigidly joined sections.

    140,    Wireworking, subclass 101 for a wire knotting device and subclasses
    111+ for apparatus for joining or uniting wires.

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclasses 412 and 413 for a tire
    securing rim part connected to a wheel by a bayonet or threaded joint.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 229+
    for edge-to-edge connected strips, slats, or panels.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, appropriate subclass for
    means for joining a plurality of conductors and/or insulators wherein an
    electrical characteristic of either a member or the connection is involved.

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, subclasses 60+, 60.2, 60.3,
    60.4, and 60.5 for a joint between a trolley pole and head.

    213,    Railway Draft Appliances, subclasses 75+ for a draft coupling
    between a plurality of elements of a railway train.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclass 65 for a joint between components of a
    wooden box and subclass 96 for a joint between components of a wooden
    barrel.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 75+ for means for joining receptacle
    sections.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers and Paperboard Boxes, subclass 5.6 for a
    crimped seam between the end structure and side wall of a paper receptacle,
    subclass 5.7 for a side wall and end structure of a paper receptacle
    secured by separate fastening means and subclass 48 for seam between parts
    of a paper receptacle.

    231,    Whips and Whip Apparatus, subclass 6 for a joint between components
    of a whip.

    238,    Railways:  Surface Track, subclasses 151+ for a means for joining
    two sections of railway track and subclasses 310+ for fastening means for
    railway track structure.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 131 for a joint or connection peculiar to
    aircraft, or incorporated into aircraft structure.

    245,    Wire Fabrics and Structure, subclass 10 for edge, selvage or seam
    structures of wire fabrics.

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses for means for joining plural
    components of a support.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    appropriate subclasses for means for joining plural components of a pushing
    or pulling implement or means for joining a pushing or pulling implement
    with a device with which it is used.

    256,    Fences, subclasses 47+ for a connection between a strand of a wire
    fence and a post or upright and subclasses 65+ for a connection between a
    fence rail and an upright.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 54+ for a connection between the end of
    a leaf spring and another member and subclass 179 for means for joining a
    coil spring element and an end thrust member.

    278,    Land Vehicles:  Animal Draft Appliances, subclass 49 for a thill
    joint, subclasses 52+ for means for joining a thill to an axle, subclasses
    95+ for means for joining plural elements of a whiffletree or for joining a
    whiffletree to a pole, thill, or forward part of the vehicle and subclasses
    121+ for means for joining a neck yoke to a pole.

    279,    Chucks and Sockets, appropriate subclasses for means for joining a
    holder and an object such as a tool, workpiece, or rodlike body wherein the
    gripping means is on or within the holder.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 400+ for an articulate connection between
    two land vehicles.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, appropriate subclasses for a joint
    between two pipe sections or between a pipe and a plate.

    289,    Knots and Knot Tying, subclass 1.2 for an interlacement of portions
    of one or more elongated flexible elements.

    293,    Vehicle Fenders, subclasses 99+ for means for connecting the parts
    of a bumper assembly together or to a vehicle.

    295,    Railway Wheels and Axles, subclasses 15+ for means for securing a
    tire to the body of a railway wheel, subclasses 39+ for means for coupling
    plural sections of a railway axle for movement independent of each other
    and subclass 43 for means for joining a railway wheel to an axle.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 29+ for a joint in the
    frame of a land vehicle body and subclasses 121+ for means for securing the
    elements of a vehicle top to its body.

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclasses 11.1+ for means for
    securing a detachable tire carrying rim to a wheel body, subclasses 58 and
    67+ for a connection between the spoke and felly of a wheel, subclasses
    59+, 74+ and 80+ for a connection between the hub and spoke of a wheel,
    subclasses 87+ for means for securing a nonresilient tire to a wheel,
    subclasses 99+ for means for joining the adjacent ends of felly sections
    and subclasses 111+ for means for securing a wheel to an axle.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 111 for a joining or
    connecting means for securing sectional units of a cabinet together,
    subclass 140 for a joint or connection between glass walls of a show case.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 144+ for joint
    structure between components of a spark plug.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 98 for means
    involving electrical structure for connecting a plurality of wave guide
    components.

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 276 for a pivoted armature mounting means and see
    the notes thereunder.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 210 for an inductor core comprising
    plural parts and means for connecting the parts and see the notes
    thereunder.

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclasses
    140+ for means for joining plural parts of spectacles or eyeglasses.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclass 251 for means for
    joining plural parts of a coating implement such as a fountain pen having a
    reservoir and feeder.

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, subclasses 134+ for a thermal
    expansion joint in a rotary kinetic fluid motor or pump, subclass 140+ for
    a movably mounted blade portion,  runner or shaft of a rotary kinetic fluid
    motor or pump and subclasses 148+ for a selectively adjustable vane or
    working fluid control means of a rotary fluid motor or pump.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclass 2 for a
    frangible or fusible connection between an impeller and its support,
    subclasses 131+ for an articulate or flexible connection between an
    impeller and its support and subclasses 204+ for means for attaching a
    working member of an impeller to its hub or shaft.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 253+ for means for
    connecting a plurality of vanes in a rotary expansible chamber device.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for an electrically
    conductive connector between conductors of electricity.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 85+ for joints and connections
    between elements of constructions toys, connecting portions of forms or
    dolls.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, appropriate subclasses for a coupling between rotary torque
    transmitting members which facilitates relative movement between the
    members, or facilitates the coupling of rotary torque transmitting members
    having misaligned rotational axes.

    473,    Amusement Devices: Games, subclasses 305+ for a joint between the
    head and shaft of a golf club.


CLS 403/1
TXT Structure under the class definition comprising a freely rotatable
    connection and an alternatively engageable rigid connection between parts
    of an assembly joining a hub to a shaft wherein the rigid connection may be
    engaged to lock the hub and shaft against relative rotation or disengaged
    to permit the hub to free-wheel with respect to the shaft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 42, 49, 75, and 78 for floating axles.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, appropriate subclasses for similar
    subject matter which may be engaged or disengaged while the hub is rotating.


CLS 403/2
TXT Structure under the class definition wherein the members or the means
    connecting the members includes a distinct section or means having a
    characteristic by virtue of which the members or the means will fail ahead
    of any other part of the structure.


CLS 403/3
TXT Structure under the class definition comprising a plurality of components
    wherein (1) the components may be reassembled in a different relationship
    to provide a joint of a different type, or to change the relationship of
    the members, or (2) the components can selectively accommodate one of a
    plurality of dissimilar members.


CLS 403/4
TXT Structure under subclass 3 wherein the components can be reassembled to
    change the orientation of the members.


CLS 403/5
TXT Structure under the class definition wherein the connector comprises a
    closed chamber having at least one flexible wall and means to introduce
    fluid into said chamber to expand said wall into securing relationship with
    a member.


CLS 403/6
TXT Structure under the class definition comprising an opening to a recess in
    the joint assembly for permitting access to a connecting means or an
    operator therefor located within said recess.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    376+,   for an opening which merely allows for the insertion of a retainer
    and is essential to the joint.


CLS 403/7
TXT Structure under subclass 6 wherein the opening provides access to a
    threaded component of the joint, e.g., to a bolt or a threaded part of a
    member.


CLS 403/8
TXT Structure under subclass 7 wherein the opening is transverse to the axis of
    the threads of the threaded component.


CLS 403/9
TXT Structure under subclass 6 wherein the opening provides access to a joint
    component which is biased, either by inherent resiliency or by a separate
    means.


CLS 403/10
TXT Structure under the class definition comprising an opening with a closure
    or having one or more separate parts which permit access to the interior
    thereof without disassembly of the joint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6+,     for an opening which provides access to a connector or operator
    therefor.


CLS 403/11
TXT Structure under the class definition comprising a feature for facilitating
    the assembly or disassembly of the joint, for preventing improper assembly,
    for protecting the joint, or joint parts prior to or during assembly, for
    facilitating repair of the joint or for preventing broken parts of a
    damaged joint from scattering, wherein the function of the feature is
    dormant in the assembled joint.

    (1)     Note.  The structure of many joints, for example, screw and cam
    joints inherently serve to draw the members into position.  In order to be
    classified as an assembly or disassembly feature in this subclass, the
    feature must involve more than the structure essential to the assembling,
    or disassembling of the members.


CLS 403/12
TXT Structure under subclass 11 including a means for (a) temporarily
    supporting or holding in predetermined relation all or a portion of the
    joint components during assembly or disassembly, or (b) immobilizing a
    movable part to permit transportation, safe storage, assembly or
    disassembly, or (c) means protecting a joint component during assembly,
    disassembly, or transportation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17+,    for an integral or attached handle.

    19+,    for a joint combined with a tool or having means for engaging or
    accommodating a tool.


CLS 403/13
TXT Structure under subclass 11 comprising means for guiding the members to be
    joined into proper position or for guiding one or more joint components
    into proper relationship for completing the joint.


CLS 403/14
TXT Structure under subclass 13 wherein the means guides component, e.g.,
    connector, gasket, dowel, etc., into proper relation for completing the
    joint.


CLS 403/15
TXT Structure under subclass 11 wherein the feature utilizes fluid pressure in
    performing its function.


CLS 403/16
TXT Structure under subclass 11 including means for applying a force directly
    to a joint component to disengage it from operative engagement with the
    rest of the assembly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    321+,   for means to disengage a latch.


CLS 403/17
TXT Structure under subclass 11 comprising a portion modified for grasping with
    the hand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    321+,   for a handle to operate a latch.


CLS 403/18
TXT Structure under subclass 17 wherein the grasping means operate a retaining
    element or a means blocking a retaining element from disengagement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    321+,   for a manipulable latch.


CLS 403/19
TXT Structure under subclass 11 comprising (a) distinct means for coacting with
    or facilitating the use of a tool to assemble or disassemble the joint, or
    (b) a tool for assembling or disassembling the joint which tool is distinct
    from and dormant in the assembled joint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    274+,   for a deforming means used in effecting a joint wherein said means
    remains as a part of the joint or wherein said means or its equivalent is
    necessary to fabricate the particular joint.


CLS 403/20
TXT Structure under subclass 19 wherein the tool engaging means is associated
    with a latch or retainer.


CLS 403/21
TXT Structure under subclass 11 wherein a nut or bolt is separably secured in
    position on one of the members by means which holds it while it is being
    engaged with a complementary bolt or nut.


CLS 403/22
TXT Structure under subclass 11 including a bolt and a nut and means to prevent
    turning of either the bolt or the nut while the other is being turned.


CLS 403/23
TXT Structure under the class definition comprising means in addition to the
    joint for protecting the joint or one of the connected members at the locus
    thereof, or for preventing contact between the joint or members and an
    extraneous structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286,    for a joint comprising a first connection bridged by a diverse
    connector wherein the connector may inherently act as a protector for the
    first connection.


CLS 403/24
TXT Structure under the class definition comprising subject matter of this
    class forming a part of an assembly which also includes discrete subject
    matter of another class, only so much of the assembly being included as is
    necessary to associate the subject matter of the other class with that of
    this class.


CLS 403/25
TXT Structure under subclass 24 wherein one of the members is of polyhedral
    configuration, which configuration is utilized in construction of the joint.


CLS 403/26
TXT Structure under the class definition comprising a separate coupling
    connecting two members, said coupling being journaled in a bearing which is
    distinct from the connection between the members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52+,    for articulated connections in general.


CLS 403/27
TXT Structure under the class definition comprising means for showing the
    condition of the joint, e.g., alignment, etc., the condition or position of
    a component thereof, or means facilitating inspection of the joint or a
    component thereof.


CLS 403/28
TXT Structure under the class definition so constructed as to utilize a
    particular temperature response of a joint component in the forming of the
    joint or in the preservation of the joint under various temperature
    conditions.

    (1)     Note.  By particular temperature response is meant a characteristic
    which is peculiar to the material or configuration of the joint component
    under consideration and which is not common to material or structures in
    general.  Thus, mere expansion or contraction of a component under varying
    temperature conditions is not considered a particular temperature response,
    but a component which expands or contracts, preferentially in a given
    direction or differentially under varying conditions, or the combination of
    two components having differential coefficients of expansion, fall within
    the scope of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270+,   for a joint formed by the solidification of a fusible material.

    273,    for members connected by a shrunk fit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 317+ for electric
    lamp and electric space discharge devices provided with lead-in wires
    sealed into the envelope of the lamp or discharge device and subclasses
    334+ for the structure of nonmetallic electrodes or shields which are
    joined to a lead-wire or connector.


CLS 403/29
TXT Structure under subclass 28 wherein a component is interposed between and
    cooperates with members having diverse coefficients of expansion, said
    component having a coefficient of expansion intermediate those of the
    coacting members.


CLS 403/30
TXT Structure under subclass 28 wherein two members have different coefficients
    of expansion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 630 for
    composite metallic stock having an additional glass component.


CLS 403/31
TXT Structure under the class definition including either (a) a retaining means
    actuated by fluid pressure responsive means or (b) means forming a distinct
    fluid pressure chamber to balance fluid pressure forces at plural points in
    the joint assembly.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclass 926 for a seal having means to create a fluid pressure
    equilibrium at a joint or juncture.


CLS 403/32
TXT Structure under the class definition comprising means for sensing some
    condition of the environment of the connection and exerting a controlling
    operation on the connection in response thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28+,    for a connection utilizing a thermal characteristic.

    31,     for a connection comprising a fluid pressure responsive component.


CLS 403/33
TXT Structure under the class definition including means for moving one member
    relative to another, which means is independent of the connection between
    the members.


CLS 403/34
TXT Structure under the class definition comprising means for handling or
    directing fluid or an article such as cable, etc., wherein the means and
    the fluid are not essential to the joint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for a joint provided with fluid, e.g., lubricant, wherein there is
    no particular feature for retaining or conveying the fluid.

    265+,   for a molded joint wherein the fluid is essential to the joint.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, subclass 322 for bearings modified for lubrication and
    see search notes.


CLS 403/35
TXT Structure under subclass 34 comprising a fluid reservoir or container
    external of the joint assembly.


CLS 403/36
TXT Structure under subclass 34 comprising a fitting communicating between the
    interior and exterior of the joint, said fitting including pressure
    responsive means to permit fluid to flow into, but not out of the joint.


CLS 403/37
TXT Structure under subclass 34 including a port or reservoir for conveying
    fluid to the joint.


CLS 403/38
TXT Structure under subclass 37 comprising members which are connected for
    relative movement.


CLS 403/39
TXT Structure under subclass 38 wherein the port communicates directly with the
    joint interface.


CLS 403/40
TXT Structure under the class definition comprising a fluent material within
    the confines of the joint which material does not adhere securely to the
    members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34+,    for a joint provided with means for conveying fluid to the joint or
    a particular feature for storing or holding the fluid.


CLS 403/41
TXT Structure under the class definition comprising means in addition to the
    joint for preventing a sharp bend or kink in one of the members when
    subjected to a stress adjacent the joint by distributing the resulting
    curvature over a wide area thereby reducing the concentration of stress at
    any one point.


CLS 403/42
TXT Structure under the class definition combined with auxiliary means other
    than connecting means and serving no connecting function, said auxiliary
    means (a) preforming its function independently of the joint, or (b)
    serving to perfect the connecting means for its intended purpose.


CLS 403/43
TXT Structure under the class definition comprising a connector having a
    rotatable part adapted to move two connected members simultaneously in
    opposite directions, or in the same direction at different speeds.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 896.7 for a process of making a turnbuckle
    or of securing a tension member to a turnbuckle.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 204 and 231+ for similar structure in a tensioning apparatus
    which is removed after the tensioning operation is completed.

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclasses 92+ for similar
    structure for adjusting the length of a nonresilient tire.


CLS 403/44
TXT Structure under subclass 43 wherein the connector is provided with a handle
    or a particular means for engagement with a tool.


CLS 403/45
TXT Structure under subclass 43 wherein the rotatable part of the connector is
    rotated by an operating mechanism.


CLS 403/46
TXT Structure under subclass 43 wherein the connector is provided with a means
    for locking it in an adjusted position.


CLS 403/47
TXT Structure under subclass 43 wherein the rotatable part has two sets of
    threads for engagement with respective parts, the threads of each set being
    of the same hand but of different pitch.


CLS 403/48
TXT Structure under subclass 43 wherein the rotatable part has at least one set
    of external threads.


CLS 403/49
TXT Structure under the class definition wherein two side-by-side members are
    secured together by means of a latch.


CLS 403/50
TXT Structure under the class definition comprising a flexible diaphragm or
    bellows secured to each of the members.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 18+ for a flexible
    diaphragm or bellows including a mechanical movement or mechanism.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 634+ for a static contact seal for other than an
    internal combustion engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable that is a flexible
    sleeve, boot or diaphragm.


CLS 403/51
TXT Structure under subclass 50 comprising a connecting means or packing
    between the two members in addition to the diaphragm or bellows.


CLS 403/52
TXT Structure under the class definition comprising a connection between the
    members which comprises a particular feature which provides for relative
    movement of the members about a bearing surface.

    (1)     Note.  In order to be classified in this subclass the connection
    must comprise a feature which is peculiar to articulation.  A feature of
    general utility which will merely permit movement under certain conditions
    will not be classified here but will be classified below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38+,    for an articulated member associated with a fluid port or reservoir
    communicating with the joint.

    220+,   for two members connected for relative movement through a flexible
    connection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 466 and 467 for various
    articulated connections between parts of a straightedge.

    81,     Tools, subclasses 300+ for pliers having pivoted handles,
    particularly subclass 416 for pivotal joint details.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 372+ for an adjustable connection between
    an earth working means and a handle therefor.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 70, 122.1, 256, 257+, 265, 269+, 274.1+, and
    475+ for an adjustable bracket; subclasses 106, 157+, 161+, 177.1+, 188.2+,
    and 371+ for an adjustable stand; subclasses 59, 323+, and 495+ for an
    adjustable suspended support; subclasses 354+ for an adjustable prop;
    subclasses 448+ for an adjustable easel; subclasses 514+ for an angularly
    adjustable staff support; and subclasses 646+ for an adjustable machinery
    support.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 400+ for an articulated connection
    between two vehicles.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, appropriate subclasses for a flexible or articulated
    coupling between rotary torque transmitting members.


CLS 403/53
TXT Structure under subclass 52 wherein two members are connected for movement
    about two or more axes by plural joints or by a single joint having plural
    distinct bearing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 276.1+ for an adjustable bracket comprising
    plural articulations.


CLS 403/54
TXT Structure under subclass 53 comprising at least four members united by
    three distinct connections and movable about at least three parallel axes.


CLS 403/55
TXT Structure under subclass 53 comprising means for performing a single
    adjustment on plural articulation axes, e.g., tension or take-up, locking
    means, etc.


CLS 403/56
TXT Structure under subclass 53 comprising plural distinct ball and socket
    joints.


CLS 403/57
TXT Structure under subclass 53 including plural, nonparallel, rotary axes
    which together enable a member to be moved in more than one plane relative
    to another member.


CLS 403/58
TXT Structure under subclass 57 wherein at least two of the axes lie in
    different planes.


CLS 403/59
TXT Structure under subclass 53 comprising a rotary axis and a translatory or
    sliding axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 430, 454, 464-467, 471, 473,
    480+, and 485 for a sliding pivotal adjustment between parts of a
    straightedge.


CLS 403/60
TXT Structure under subclass 59 comprising a threaded connection and an
    independent swivel connection.


CLS 403/61
TXT Structure under subclass 59 comprising a pivot stud which extends through
    an elongated aperture in both pivotal and slidable relation.


CLS 403/62
TXT Structure under subclass 53 comprising serially arranged, parallel, rotary
    axes.


CLS 403/63
TXT Structure under subclass 53 comprising plural slidable connections.


CLS 403/64
TXT Structure under subclass 52 comprising three or more independent joints,
    one of which is nonserially related to the other two, wherein at least one
    joint provides for relative motion between the respective members.


CLS 403/65
TXT Structure under subclass 52 wherein a member is pivoted at the junction of
    two distinct intersecting surfaces.


CLS 403/66
TXT Structure under subclass 52 comprising an articulate joint and a distinct
    and independent static joint.


CLS 403/67
TXT Structure under subclass 66 comprising an assembly attached intermediate
    the ends of a rod, which assembly comprises at least one gudgeon pin or
    bearing for cooperating with a gudgeon pin on another structure.


CLS 403/68
TXT Structure under subclass 66 wherein one of the members is a plate or the
    side of a rod.


CLS 403/69
TXT Structure under subclass 68 wherein one member is a rod which extends
    through an opening in the plate.


CLS 403/70
TXT Structure under subclass 68 wherein the surface of the plate constitutes
    one of the relatively movable bearing surfaces.


CLS 403/71
TXT Structure under subclass 68 wherein a component of the articulate joint is
    secured to the plate by a clamping fastener.

    (1)     Note.  Included are fasteners such as bolts, screws and rivets.


CLS 403/72
TXT Structure under subclass 66 wherein the articulate joint is serially
    disposed intermediate two static joints.


CLS 403/73
TXT Structure under subclass 72 wherein the articulate joint is rotatable,
    whereby the angle between the articulated members can be varied.


CLS 403/74
TXT Structure under subclass 73 wherein the articulate joint provides for
    rotary motion in more than one plane.


CLS 403/75
TXT Structure under subclass 66 wherein the articulate and static joints are so
    related that two of the members are offset from each other or extend at an
    angle to each other regardless of the disposition of the articulate joint.


CLS 403/76
TXT Structure under subclass 66 wherein the articulate joint comprises a ball
    and socket joint which is capable of movement on more than one axis.


CLS 403/77
TXT Structure under subclass 76 wherein the static joint comprises a threaded
    connection.


CLS 403/78
TXT Structure under subclass 66 wherein the articulate joint comprises two
    members which are free to rotate indefinitely.


CLS 403/79
TXT Structure under subclass 66 wherein the articulate joint comprises arms or
    sides of a U-shaped or channel-shaped member which are traversed by a pivot
    pin and pivoted to another member thereby.


CLS 403/80
TXT Structure under subclass 66 wherein the articulate joint provides for
    translatory movement of the connected members.


CLS 403/81
TXT Structure under subclass 52 comprising an operator or handle for varying
    the relative position of the members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for an assembly feature comprising an operator or handle for moving
    one member relative to another which is independent of the connection.


CLS 403/82
TXT Structure under subclass 52 wherein one of the members is elongated and
    arcuate and moves in a guide which engages opposite sides of the member.


CLS 403/83
TXT Structure under subclass 52 including means to lock the members in one or
    more positions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 300+ for pivoted handle pliers, particularly
    subclasses 318+ for pliers having means to immobilize the jaws.


CLS 403/84
TXT Structure under subclass 83 wherein the members are lockable in an angular
    relationship.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 514+ for an angularly adjustable staff
    support; and subclasses 664+ for an angularly adjustable machinery support.


CLS 403/85
TXT Structure under subclass 84 provided with a movable brace associated with
    both members to maintain them in a selected position.


CLS 403/86
TXT Structure under subclass 84 comprising bearing components having contacting
    surfaces oblique to the axes of the members, whereby when the members are
    rotated the angularity of the members will change.


CLS 403/87
TXT Structure under subclass 84 comprising arcuate bearing surfaces which
    interfit with each other and a clamping screw which traverses the bearing
    interface to clamp the bearing surfaces together and lock the bearing
    components in a fixed position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for a screw traversing an elongated aperture in one component to
    provide distinct pivotal and translatory axes.


CLS 403/88
TXT Structure under subclass 84 comprising a component which partially or
    completely encompasses the members to retain them against separation, said
    component being spaced radially of the articulation axis.


CLS 403/89
TXT Structure under subclass 88 wherein the component is provided with a shank
    which is anchored to the joint assembly by a single threaded retainer which
    coacts with complementary threads on said shank.


CLS 403/90
TXT Structure under subclass 84 comprising a ball and socket connection between
    the members.


CLS 403/91
TXT Structure under subclass 84 including a pin or stud about which a member is
    pivoted.


CLS 403/92
TXT Structure under subclass 91 provided with a detent or latch means for
    locking the members in position, said means being located at a point
    radially spaced from the pivot point.


CLS 403/93
TXT Structure under subclass 92 wherein the detent or latch on one member
    enters a notch or opening in the periphery of a cooperating component on
    the other member.


CLS 403/94
TXT Structure under subclass 92 wherein the side of a rod enters a recess
    formed in a radial face of a component associated with the other member.


CLS 403/95
TXT Structure under subclass 92 wherein the detent or latch is pivotally
    mounted.


CLS 403/96
TXT Structure under subclass 92 wherein the detent or latch is adapted to
    engage a complementary recess in the radial face of another component.


CLS 403/97
TXT Structure under subclass 91 provided with one or more interengaging
    projections and recesses or slots to maintain the members in position.


CLS 403/98
TXT Structure under subclass 91 provided with an arcuate slot which is radially
    spaced from the stud and through which a bolt or other fastener passes to
    secure the joint in adjusted position.


CLS 403/99
TXT Structure under subclass 91 wherein the locking or unlocking action is
    effected by moving one of the members through at least two motions relative
    to the other.


CLS 403/100
TXT Structure under subclass 91 wherein the members are secured by a device
    which bridges the pivot and engages a component on each side thereof.


CLS 403/101
TXT Structure under subclass 91 wherein the relative position of two pivoted
    members is fixed by the interengagement of nesting parts associated with
    respective members.


CLS 403/102
TXT Structure under subclass 91 wherein the locking means is adapted to secure
    the members in axial alignment.


CLS 403/103
TXT Structure under subclass 84 wherein the locking means is adapted for
    selectively holding the members in a plurality of distinct positions.


CLS 403/104
TXT Structure under subclass 83 wherein one of the members is adapted for
    movement to a plurality of positions or orientations and the locking means
    secures said member in such positions or orientations.


CLS 403/105
TXT Structure under subclass 104 wherein the members may move freely in one
    direction, but are inhibited from movement in the opposite direction.


CLS 403/106
TXT Structure under subclass 104 wherein the lock means secures the members in
    at least one predetermined position.


CLS 403/107
TXT Structure under subclass 106 wherein one member is provided with a
    plurality of securing elements which permit adjustment of the members by a
    series of discrete steps.


CLS 403/108
TXT Structure under subclass 107 comprising recesses in the respective members
    and a retainer extending between selected recesses to hold the members in a
    selected position.


CLS 403/109
TXT Structure under subclass 83 wherein one member extends into the other and
    is longitudinally movable therein.


CLS 403/110
TXT Structure under subclass 83 wherein the members are secured by a clamping
    means.


CLS 403/111
TXT Structure under subclass 52 comprising resilient means for biasing a pair
    of rotatably engaged members toward one position.


CLS 403/112
TXT Structure under subclass 52 comprising means for limiting the relative
    motion of the members in at least one direction.


CLS 403/113
TXT Structure under subclass 112 wherein the members are pivotally connected
    and the means limits the angular motion about the pivot.


CLS 403/114
TXT Structure under subclass 113 comprising a ball and socket joint having
    means which limits angular motion along one axis to a greater degree than
    along another axis at ninety degrees thereto.


CLS 403/115
TXT Structure under subclass 114 wherein a rod or stud attached to the ball
    passes through a slot associated with the socket.


CLS 403/116
TXT Structure under 113 wherein the means are the ends of a slot which coact
    with a pin or equivalent movable within the slot to limit angular movement.


CLS 403/117
TXT Structure under subclass 13 comprising two angularly spaced stops on one
    member which limit the angular motion about the pivot in two directions.


CLS 403/118
TXT Structure under subclass 52 wherein the interface between the two
    articulated members comprises mutually threaded components.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    343,    for a threaded connection having no structural feature peculiar to
    articulation.


CLS 403/119
TXT Structure under subclass 52 wherein two members are connected for angular
    motion in a plane transverse to the axis of at least one member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65,     for a member pivoted at a rigid corner.

    91+,    for a connection comprising a pivot stud and means to lock the
    members at a selected angle.

    113+,   for a pivotal connection including limit means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 495-499 for a pivot between
    parts of a straightedge.

    114,    Ships, subclass 98 for a pivotal connection between gaffs, booms,
    etc., and a mast or other support.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 51 for a motion or direction
    indicator pivotally mounted on a vehicle.

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclass 62 for a pivotal
    connection between the tip and the shaft of a cane.

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, subclasses 60.2 and 60.3
    for a pivot between a trolley head and its support.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclasses 14-16 and 46-48 for a pivotal
    connection between components of a wooden receptacle.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 30+ for a pivotal connection between a
    closure and a receptacle.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 276 for a pivot between an armature and its
    mounting means and see the notes thereunder.

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 192+ pivot bearings where there is sliding or
    rolling contact between separate elements and see search notes.

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, subclass 141 for a pivotably
    mounted blade portion, and subclasses 160+ for individually pivoted vanes,
    in a fluid motor or pump of that class.


CLS 403/120
TXT Structure under subclass 119 comprising means to bias a member
    circumferentially about the pivot pin or to form a circumferentially acting
    abutment to dampen movement of a member.


CLS 403/121
TXT Structure under subclass 119 wherein the bearing surfaces are in line
    contact with each other which line constitutes an instantaneous axis about
    which the members pivot.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 107 for a telegraph key mounted by means of a
    knife-edge pivot.


CLS 403/122
TXT Structure under subclass 119 comprising members having mating surfaces, at
    least one of which is concave and one of which constitutes a ball or the
    equivalent, to permit limited relative movement of the members in more than
    one plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for plural ball and socket connections.

    75,     for a rigid joint and an angled or offset ball and socket joint.

    76+,    for a ball and socket joint and a rigid joint.

    90,     for a ball and socket joint which is lockable at a selected angle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclass 122 for a ball and socket connection between
    elements of a truss.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 181.1+ for a ball and socket joint associated
    with an adjustable article supporting head on a stand.

    278,    Land Vehicles:  Animal Draft Appliances, subclass 80 for a thill
    coupling including a ball and socket.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 511+ for a ball and socket connection
    between articulated vehicles.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 51, 135, 138.1, 146.1+, and
    261+ for similar structure associated with a pipe joint.


CLS 403/123
TXT Structure under subclass 122 comprising link or tie means within or passing
    through both the ball and socket members to hold them in coupled relation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286,    for diverse bridging connectors in general.


CLS 403/124
TXT Structure under subclass 122 comprising a plurality of distinct concave
    bearing surfaces associated with one member and complementary convex
    bearing surfaces associated with the other member, said concave surfaces
    having either different centers or different radii of curvature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for a ball and sock joint having a plurality of separate, movable,
    spherical bearings.


CLS 403/125
TXT Structure under subclass 124 comprising an element having a convex and
    concave surface interposed between and complementary to a ball and socket
    whereby said interposed element provides a socket and ball to cooperate
    with the first mentioned ball and socket respectively.


CLS 403/126
TXT Structure under subclass 124 wherein the outer surfaces of the assembly are
    concave.


CLS 403/127
TXT Structure under subclass 122 including (a) separate bearing means between
    ball parts or (b) a ball seat which has bearing surfaces on opposite sides
    such that the seat is readily movable relative to both the ball and an
    adjacent surface of the socket or other member.


CLS 403/128
TXT Structure under subclass 122 comprising a ball composed of a plurality of
    assembled segments which segments move relative to the socket or housing.


CLS 403/129
TXT Structure under subclass 128 wherein a spring acts between the ball
    segments.


CLS 403/130
TXT Structure under subclass 128 wherein at least one part of the ball is of
    nonmetallic material.


CLS 403/131
TXT Structure under subclass 128 wherein one of the segments is the end of a
    stud which extends into the ball.


CLS 403/132
TXT Structure under subclass 122 comprising (a) an elastomeric component which
    biases a seat into engagement with the ball or (b) a socket comprising an
    elastomeric component which forms a backing for a ball engaging part.


CLS 403/133
TXT Structure under subclass 122 comprising a ball seat made of elastomeric
    material.


CLS 403/134
TXT Structure under subclass 122 wherein the members are provided with a
    packing remote from the bearing faces.

    (1)     Note.  For packing at the bearing interface, search the subclasses
    below, particularly 135+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclass 635 for a static contact seal for other than an internal
    combustion engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable that is a flexible sleeve,
    boot, or diaphragm having a dome, cup, or bell shape, or is for a ball
    joint.


CLS 403/135
TXT Structure under subclass 122 comprising an element interposed between the
    members which element forms part or all of one bearing face.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclass 507 for a dynamic, circumferential contact seal for other
    than a piston that accommodates gyrating or oscillating motion using a
    spherical bearing surface.


CLS 403/136
TXT Structure under subclass 135 wherein a spring cuts between coacting wedge
    surfaces (a) on distinct parts of the interposed element or (b) on the
    element and the socket wall.


CLS 403/137
TXT Structure under subclass 135 comprising adjustable means for varying the
    compression or tension of a spring biasing the element.


CLS 403/138
TXT Structure under subclass 135 wherein a spring biases the seat into
    engagement with the ball on the side of the ball opposite to that from
    which a rod like member extends.


CLS 403/139
TXT Structure under subclass 135 wherein the interposed element is of porous
    construction.


CLS 403/140
TXT Structure under subclass 135 wherein the element completely separates the
    members from contact with each other at the bearing interface.


CLS 403/141
TXT Structure under subclass 122 wherein the socket comprises a coupling device
    which is axially divided to form two or more separate segments which are
    jointed together to secure the ball and socket in operative engagement.


CLS 403/142
TXT Structure under subclass 122 wherein the socket is formed in a bifurcated
    component, one half of the socket being in each furcation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141,    for a divided socket-type coupling.


CLS 403/143
TXT Structure under subclass 122 wherein the socket is composed of a plurality
    of parts which may be separated without destroying any part thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141,    for a divided socket-type coupling.


CLS 403/144
TXT Structure under subclass 122 wherein a resilient means urges the ball and
    socket members into engagement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135+,   for a directly biased packing or seat.


CLS 403/145
TXT Structure under subclass 119 wherein means is provided for exerting a force
    against the bearing interface or for taking up looseness or compensating
    for wear in the joint.


CLS 403/146
TXT Structure under subclass 145 comprising spring means interposed between two
    pivot parts and acting in the direction of the pivot axis, said spring
    means comprising (a) a single spring coaxial with the pivot or (b) a
    plurality of springs arranged symmetrically about the pivot.


CLS 403/147
TXT Structure under subclass 145 wherein the force exerted by the means is
    applied through a tapered surface on a bearing component whereby the
    bearing component is biased by a force acting in a direction other than
    that of the applied force.


CLS 403/148
TXT Structure under subclass 145 comprising means for varying the force
    manually.


CLS 403/149
TXT Structure under subclass 145 wherein the means is external of the bearing
    assembly.


CLS 403/150
TXT Structure under subclass 119 wherein a pivot pin is engaged at spaced
    points with an outer member and at an intermediate point with an inner
    member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 230 for a piston comprising a
    pin supporting boss encircled by an annular ring.


CLS 403/151
TXT Structure under subclass 150 wherein the pivot pin is rotatable with
    respect to both of the pivoted members.


CLS 403/152
TXT Structure under subclass 150 wherein the pin is integral or nonrotatably
    engaged with the inner member.


CLS 403/153
TXT Structure under subclass 150 wherein the pivot pin or an end thereof is
    expanded to secure the pin.


CLS 403/154
TXT Structure under subclass 150 comprising a distinct means for retaining the
    pin in operative position on one of the members.


CLS 403/155
TXT Structure under subclass 154 wherein the same comprises a unitary clip or a
    plug in the pin receiving part of the member.


CLS 403/156
TXT Structure under subclass 154 wherein the retaining means comprises a
    threaded end on the pin.


CLS 403/157
TXT Structure under subclass 150 wherein the outer member is bifurcated and the
    inner member comprises a part extending between the tines.


CLS 403/158
TXT Structure under subclass 157 wherein antifriction means is interposed
    either between the members or a member and a pivot pin.


CLS 403/159
TXT Structure under subclass 157 wherein the bifurcated portions are relatively
    movable in opposite directions along the axis of the pivot pin.


CLS 403/160
TXT Structure under subclass 119 wherein the pivot axis extends at an oblique
    angle to an axis of the member.


CLS 403/161
TXT Structure under subclass 119 wherein a pivot pin or stud is transverse to
    the longitudinal axis of both the members.


CLS 403/162
TXT Structure under subclass 161 wherein the pin extends through a separate
    facing means interposed between the members or between a member and the pin.


CLS 403/163
TXT Structure under subclass 161 wherein the pin is either integral with or
    fixedly secured to one of the members.


CLS 403/164
TXT Structure under subclass 52 wherein the members are rotatable with respect
    to each other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclass 9 for an apparatus
    for making a swivel for use with a chain or similar article and subclass 95
    for a swivel for use with a chain or similar article.


CLS 403/165
TXT Structure under subclass 164 comprising a rod rotatably secured in a socket.


CLS 403/166
TXT Structure under subclass 52 comprising a pair of coaxial members biased in
    an axial direction by resilient means.


CLS 403/167
TXT Structure under the class definition wherein two distinct spaced plate
    surfaces are structurally related to a rod which is transverse to at least
    one plate.


CLS 403/168
TXT Structure under subclass 167 wherein a rod is held to a plate by a
    retaining element which abuts or utilizes both plates.


CLS 403/169
TXT Structure under the class definition comprising three or more independent
    joints, one of which is nonserially related to the other two.

    (1)     Note.  Distinct connection between a rod and the respective ends of
    a looped rod are included.


CLS 403/170
TXT Structure under subclass 169 comprising at least three interconnected
    members having axes which radiate outwardly from a single point, which
    point may lie outside of the joint, and wherein none of the members
    continue beyond the point.


CLS 403/171
TXT Structure under subclass 170 wherein the members converge and at least one
    of the members is noncoplanar with respect to the others whereby the
    members define at least three intersecting planes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176,    for similar structure wherein at least one of the members continues
    beyond the point of intersection.


CLS 403/172
TXT Structure under subclass 171 wherein all of the members diverge on the same
    side of a plane containing the point.


CLS 403/173
TXT Structure under subclass 170 comprising at least two pairs of axially
    aligned members, the axes of the pairs intersecting at the point.


CLS 403/174
TXT Structure under subclass 170 wherein all of the members or their axes lie
    in a single plane.


CLS 403/175
TXT Structure under subclass 174 comprising an encompassed rod in addition to
    the coplanar members and juxtaposed therewith.


CLS 403/176
TXT Structure under subclass 169 comprising a plurality of members, the axes of
    which intersect at a single point and at least one of the rods lies in a
    different plane than the others to define at least three intersecting
    planes containing the point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171+,   for three members radiating from a single point to define three
    intersecting planes.


CLS 403/177
TXT Structure under subclass 169 comprising a plurality of members at least,
    three of which are parallel rods.


CLS 403/178
TXT Structure under subclass 169 comprising a plurality of members, which has a
    surface or an axis in a common plane with the respective parts of each of
    the others.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174+,   for three or more coplanar members which radiate from a single
    point.


CLS 403/179
TXT Structure under the class definition wherein two members of diverse
    materials are independently jointed to a coupling member comprising either
    (a) a third material necessary to form a joint with each of the members or
    (b) a combination of the diverse materials.


CLS 403/180
TXT Structure under the class definition comprising three or more serially
    connected joints, at least one being dissimilar to one or more of the
    others.


CLS 403/181
TXT Structure under subclass 180 wherein at least two of the joints have
    different axes.


CLS 403/182
TXT Structure under subclass 180 wherein at least one of the intermediate
    joints can be disassembled without destroying any of the components of
    another.


CLS 403/183
TXT Structure under subclass 182 wherein plural parts of the intermediate joint
    are drawn together by a connecting means which exerts an axial force
    thereon.


CLS 403/184
TXT Structure under subclass 182 wherein the intermediate joint comprises an
    axially acting cam or a threaded interface.


CLS 403/185
TXT Structure under the class definition wherein a plural layer rod is joined
    to a member, a plurality of layers of said rod being essential to the joint.


CLS 403/186
TXT Structure under the class definition comprising a plurality of laterally
    related rods independently connected to a transverse surface.


CLS 403/187
TXT Structure under the class definition including an intermediate member
    independently connected to a rod and to the transverse surface of another
    member, e.g., plate or rod side.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 28, for a
    rod-to-head type joint embodying specific structure of the head, (e.g., an
    ornament joined to a curtain rod, etc.).


CLS 403/188
TXT Structure under subclass 187 wherein the intermediate member is connected
    to the side of the rod.


CLS 403/189
TXT Structure under subclass 187 wherein the rod and intermediate member lie
    only on one side of a plane defined by the side surface, and no components
    extend as far as the opposite surface of the side.


CLS 403/190
TXT Structure under subclass 187 wherein the transverse member comprises a side
    of arcuate or polygonal shape.


CLS 403/191
TXT Structure under subclass 190 wherein the arcuate or polygonal side is
    completely encompassed by the intermediate member or its associated
    structure.


CLS 403/192
TXT Structure under subclass 187 wherein the intermediate member comprises a
    part which is of tubular cross-section.


CLS 403/193
TXT Structure under subclass 192 wherein either the side or the tubular part of
    intermediate member is deformed in effecting the joint.


CLS 403/194
TXT Structure under subclass 192 wherein the intermediate member extends
    through the side.


CLS 403/195
TXT Structure under subclass 194 wherein the tubular part is split or divided
    to provide spaced portions, and means acting upon these portions to force
    the same into gripping relation with the rod.


CLS 403/196
TXT Structure under subclass 194 wherein a clamping element is directed in a
    path transverse to the rod to secure the rod to the tubular part.


CLS 403/197
TXT Structure under subclass 194 wherein the rod which is connected to the
    intermediate member also extends through the side.


CLS 403/198
TXT Structure under subclass 192 wherein the portion of the rod which is joined
    to the intermediate member extends at an angel other than 905 or 1805  with
    the side.


CLS 403/199
TXT Structure under subclass 192 wherein the intermediate member is provided
    with a radial flange which is joined to the side.


CLS 403/200
TXT Structure under subclass 192 wherein the tubular part of the intermediate
    member is internally threaded for attachment to the rod.


CLS 403/201
TXT Structure under subclass 187 wherein the intermediate member passes
    completely through the side.


CLS 403/202
TXT Structure under the class definition comprising spaced inner and outer
    members joined by an intermediate connecting member, the connections
    between the intermediate member and each of the other members being
    independent of each other.


CLS 403/203
TXT Structure under subclass 202 wherein the intermediate connecting member is
    of flexible material.


CLS 403/204
TXT Structure under the class definition wherein an inner member is joined to
    an axially overlapping multipart outer member, said inner member coacting
    with at least two parts of said outer member in effecting the joint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    288,    for a packed joint between inner and outer members where a follower
    connected to a unitary outer member compresses the packing.

    373+,   for a joint between inner and outer members where a follower or
    actuator connected to the outer member is necessary to the joint.


CLS 403/205
TXT Structure under the class definition comprising a coupling member having
    means at the ends to join the ends of two members independently and
    distinctly and adapted to hold the ends in angular relation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 87 for a U-coupling between
    two fire tubes in a boiler.


CLS 403/206
TXT Structure under the class definition comprising a curved or bent rod
    wherein the curvature or bent portion is utilized in effecting the joint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229,    for a resilient, coiled spring for flexibly uniting two rigid
    members.

    291+,   for a joint between a member of flexible, coiled material and a
    rigid member where the only characteristic of the coil put to use is its
    flexibility.  If the curvature of the coil is utilized, as for example
    helical grooves in a member which receive the coil, the subject matter is
    here (subclass 206).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 115+ for a choker, i.e.,
    a freely enlargeable or contractable loop encompassing a member.

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 433+ for means for knotting the ends of a
    band which passes around a bundle.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclass 202 for a
    splice in strand structure.

    289,    Knots and Knot Tying, appropriate subclasses for the intertwining
    of one or more portions of a cord, strip or strand.


CLS 403/207
TXT Structure under subclass 206 wherein the curved portion of one rod forms a
    recess which receives an intermediate part of a transversely extending rod.


CLS 403/208
TXT Structure under subclass 206 wherein the curved or bent portion of the rod
    is joined at points spaced along the curvature thereof to a transverse
    surface which is related laterally thereto.


CLS 403/209
TXT Structure under subclass 209 wherein the curved or bent portion includes an
    arc of more than ninety degrees.


CLS 403/210
TXT Structure under subclass 209 comprising an element having a peripheral
    opening or channel about which the rod is adapted to be wrapped and
    fastened, the total structure forming an eye.


CLS 403/211
TXT Structure under subclass 209 wherein opposed portions of the bend are
    clamped together or to another component by a wedge element.


CLS 403/212
TXT Structure under subclass 209 provided with a collar which is crimped to
    opposed portion of the curved or bent rod.


CLS 403/213
TXT Structure under subclass 209 wherein the ends of the curved or bent rod are
    spaced apart.


CLS 403/214
TXT Structure under subclass 206 comprising a pair of flexible rods, the ends
    of which are twisted together.


CLS 403/215
TXT Structure under subclass 206 wherein an end of the rod is deflected
    transverse to its axis within a connector.


CLS 403/216
TXT Structure under subclass 206 wherein plural rods are deformed or flexed by
    a single element.


CLS 403/217
TXT Structure under the class definition wherein three or more members are
    connected at one locus by a single joint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169+,   for branched members which may intersect at a single locus.

    300+,   for two members joined by a coupler which may itself be a member.


CLS 403/218
TXT Structure under subclass 217 wherein all of the members are encompassed by
    a connecting means or by a part of a connecting means and another member.


CLS 403/219
TXT Structure under subclass 217 wherein each of the members contacts each of
    the others.


CLS 403/220
TXT Structure under the class definition wherein at least part of the joint is
    flexible and permits relative movement of the members.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 470 for a resilient
    connection in a control lever or linkage system.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 40 for a flexible connecting
    between boiler sections of a steam locomotive.

    114,    Ships, subclasses 213+ for various tension relievers.

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, subclasses 60.2 and 60.3
    for a resilient connection between a trolley pole and head.

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, subclass 141 for a blade
    having a resilient connection to its support in a rotary kinetic fluid
    motor or pump.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 591 for metallic
    stock having a feature which allows relative movement between the
    components thereof.


CLS 403/221
TXT Structure under subclass 220 wherein the members are connected by a means
    comprising a sleeve of rigid material and a flexible spacing member within
    the sleeve.


CLS 403/222
TXT Structure under subclass 221 wherein the sleeve is divided along an axial
    line.


CLS 403/223
TXT Structure under subclass 220 comprising a coupling of tubular cross-section
    made of a flexible material.


CLS 403/224
TXT Structure under subclass 220 wherein a pin or bolt connecting the two
    members extends through and is flexibly secured to one member by an
    elastomeric element surrounding said bolt.


CLS 403/225
TXT Structure under subclass 220 comprising radially spaced members secured
    together by an interposed elastomeric component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    365+,   for a radially interposed shim or bushing in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 625 for a
    metallic composite in which an additional component has an elastomer base.


CLS 403/226
TXT Structure under subclass 225 wherein the inner member comprises a shoulder,
    each radial side of which is engaged by the elastomeric element.


CLS 403/227
TXT Structure under subclass 225 comprising an axial compression means for
    loading the elastomer between the radially spaced members.


CLS 403/228
TXT Structure under subclass 225 comprising a bushing for insertion between the
    members, which bushing is made of a plurality of parts.


CLS 403/229
TXT Structure under subclass 220 comprising a helical spring connecting the two
    members.


CLS 403/230
TXT Structure under the class definition comprising a connection between the
    side of a member and the end of a rod transverse thereto wherein some
    characteristic of the side is utilized in effecting the joint.

    (1)     Note.  Included is a connection comprising a rod receiving opening
    which extends entirely through the member and wherein both sides of the
    member are involved in effecting the joint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186,    for plural rods joined to a side wherein the rods are independently
    secured to the side.

    187,    for serial connections between a rod, an intermediate member and a
    side.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 189+ for a pipe end joined to
    a plate.

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclasses 111+ for means
    securing a wheel to an axle combined with structure of either the wheel or
    axle in addition to that which cooperates to form the connection.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 28, for a
    rod-to-head type joint embodying specific structure to the head, (e.g., an
    ornament joined to a curtain rod, etc.).

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, appropriate
    subclasses, and particularly subclass 902 for a particular connection
    between the rim and hub; and subclass 903 for a particular connection
    between the hub and shaft of a pulley or guide roll.


CLS 403/231
TXT Structure under subclass 230 wherein the end of one rod is connected to the
    side of another adjacent its end to form an angular construction.


CLS 403/232.1
TXT Structure under subclass 230 wherein the rod is received in a generally
    U-shaped element associated with the side of the member.


CLS 403/233
TXT Structure under subclass 230 wherein the end of a first rod is joined to
    the side of a second rod by an attached element which encompasses more than
    1805 of the periphery of the second rod.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191,    for an intermediate member independently connected to a rod and to
    an arcuate side wherein the intermediate member encompasses the side.


CLS 403/234
TXT Structure under subclass 233 wherein the first rod has associated therewith
    an arcuate surface less than 1805  which is clamped to the side of the
    second rod.


CLS 403/235
TXT Structure under subclass 233 wherein the encompassing means comprises
    either a U-shaped or an annular component.


CLS 403/236
TXT Structure under subclass 235 wherein radially extending screw extends
    through the bight of the U-shaped or annular component for engaging the
    side of the second rod.


CLS 403/237
TXT Structure under subclass 230 comprising an arcuate or polygonal portion on
    one rod which straddles the side of another rod transverse thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    234,    for a clamped saddle.


CLS 403/238
TXT Structure under subclass 230 wherein the rod and side are connected by a
    short rod section coaxial with the rod and extending through an aperture in
    the side.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    187+,   for an intermediate member joining a rod and side wherein the
    connections between the intermediate member and the rod and side are
    independent.


CLS 403/239
TXT Structure under subclass 238 provided with clamping means which is so
    constructed as to grip both the side and rod simultaneously in response to
    a single movement of an actuator.


CLS 403/240
TXT Structure under subclass 230 comprising means cooperating with the radial
    edge of a hole in the side for clamping a rod therebetween.


CLS 403/241
TXT Structure under subclass 230 wherein the opposite walls of a side are
    engaged by a connecting means, said means extending over an open, or free,
    edge of the side.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247+,   for connecting means which engages opposite walls and an edge of a
    hole which passes through the walls.


CLS 403/242
TXT Structure under subclass 230 wherein the rod and side are interlocked by
    deforming the rod or side in situ.


CLS 403/243
TXT Structure under subclass 230 comprising a shim or bushing interposed
    between the rod and the edge of a hole in the side through which the rod
    passes, a part of said shim or bushing extending beyond the hole edge and
    engaging a surface of the side.


CLS 403/244
TXT Structure under subclass 230 wherein a part of the side is deformed or
    shaped to form a socket or part thereof for receiving the end of a rod, the
    deforming or shaping operation being accomplished without substantial
    removal of material.


CLS 403/245
TXT Structure under subclass 230 wherein the side is provided with a transverse
    integral projecting portion to which the rod is secured.


CLS 403/246
TXT Structure under subclass 245 wherein the projecting portion extends from
    the side of a rod.


CLS 403/247
TXT Structure under subclass 230 wherein opposed sides of the member are
    utilized in effecting the joint.


CLS 403/248
TXT Structure under subclass 247 wherein the rod extends from an opening in the
    member and the end of the rod is expanded by a component inserted therein
    from the side of the member opposite the side from which the rod extends.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277,    for similar structure wherein the side characteristics of a member
    are not utilized.


CLS 403/249
TXT Structure under subclass 248 wherein the inserted component is separate
    from both the rod and the member and is deformed upon insertion into the
    rod.


CLS 403/250
TXT Structure under subclass 248 wherein the inserted component comprises of
    coacting parts which contact each other when in assembled condition.


CLS 403/251
TXT Structure under subclass 248 wherein the inserted component is provided
    with a barb to act as a restraint against withdrawal.


CLS 403/252
TXT Structure under subclass 247 wherein the rod comprises a component for
    insertion through an aperture in the member, said component being adapted,
    after insertion, for engagement with the surface of the distal side,
    whereby the joint may be effected entirely from the proximal side of the
    member.


CLS 403/253
TXT Structure under subclass 247 wherein at least one side of the member is
    provided with a stepped or tapered recess which is used in effecting the
    joint.


CLS 403/254
TXT Structure under subclass 253 wherein a portion of the rod extends through
    the member and is provided with a retainer adjacent its end which engages
    the distal side of the member.


CLS 403/255
TXT Structure under subclass 254 wherein a part of the retainer is inserted
    into the rod.


CLS 403/256
TXT Structure under subclass 247 wherein the member is clamped between two
    joint components associated with the rod on opposite sides of the member.


CLS 403/257
TXT Structure under subclass 256 wherein one of the member clamping parts
    engages a recessed portion in a side of the member.


CLS 403/258
TXT Structure under subclass 256 wherein the rod is clamped to the member by a
    bolt passing through the member and threaded into the rod.


CLS 403/259
TXT Structure under subclass 256 wherein opposite sides of the member are
    contacted by a shoulder on the rod and a nut located proximally to the free
    end of the rod.


CLS 403/260
TXT Structure under subclass 256 wherein the rod is clamped to the member by
    one or more bolts passing through the member.


CLS 403/261
TXT Structure under subclass 256 wherein the rod is provided with a collar or a
    peripheral shoulder which is coaxial therewith and which forms one of the
    clamping components.


CLS 403/262
TXT Structure under subclass 230 comprising a flange on the rod secured to the
    side of the member by bolts, screws or the equivalent.


CLS 403/263
TXT Structure under subclass 230 wherein the side of the member is provided
    with a recess to receive the rod.


CLS 403/264
TXT Structure under subclass 230 wherein internal structure of the rod is
    utilized in effecting the joint.


CLS 403/265
TXT Structure under the class definition wherein the members are secured by,
    (a) an adhesive material, (b) a material which is applied in a liquid or
    plastic state and thereafter solidifies, or (c) the diffusion of one member
    into another, e.g., spot weld, cold weld.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179,    for two members joined by bonding to an intermediate member of
    diverse material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for processes of bonding by adhesion.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, appropriate subclasses for method or
    apparatus for metallurgical surface bonding.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 317+ for electric
    lamp and electric discharge devices provided with lead-in wires sealed into
    the envelope of the lamp or discharge device and subclasses 334+ for the
    structure of nonmetallic electrodes or shields which are joined to a
    lead-wire or conductor.


CLS 403/266
TXT Structure under subclass 265 comprising a nonmolded connection in addition
    to and independent of the molded joint.


CLS 403/267
TXT Structure under subclass 265 wherein the members are additionally secured
    together by means other than the adhesive, fusible, or diffusible material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266,    for a joint including a connection which is independent of the
    molded joint.


CLS 403/268
TXT Structure under subclass 265 wherein one member has a socket or open cup
    containing bonding material into which the other member extends.


CLS 403/269
TXT Structure under subclass 265 wherein a member is cast around a second
    member whereby it is simultaneously formed and joined to the second member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 83+ for a process of uniting a preform
    with a molding material during the molding operation.


CLS 403/270
TXT Structure under subclass 165 wherein the joint is effected by the
    solidification of a fusible material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, appropriate subclasses for method or
    apparatus for metallurgical surface bonding.


CLS 403/271
TXT Structure under subclass 270 wherein the fusible material is metallic.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 544+ for stock
    material, e.g., of indefinite length, which are all metal or have adjacent
    metal components.


CLS 403/272
TXT Structure under subclass 271 comprising fusible material in addition to the
    material of the members.


CLS 403/273
TXT Structure under the class definition wherein two members are joined by
    shrinking one onto the other, usually by heating the outer member and/or
    cooling the inner member prior to assembly.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclass 381.1 for a shrunk fit pipe
    joint.


CLS 403/274
TXT Structure under the class definition wherein the joint is effected by
    distorting at least one of the members beyond its elastic limit in situ.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242,    for a rod deformably interlocked with the side of another member.

    248+,   for a rod end to side connection wherein the rod is expanded by a
    component inserted from the distal side.

    405+,   for nails, screws, staples, etc., wherein there is no relationship
    between them and a member which goes beyond the relationship necessary in
    order for them to perform their function as fasteners.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 382+ for similar structure
    involving tubular members.


CLS 403/275
TXT Structure under subclass 274 wherein a deformed member comprises a
    plurality of strands which are separated by an element inserted
    therebetween.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 461 for a process of joining comprising the
    spreading of cable strands.


CLS 403/276
TXT Structure under subclass 274 comprising a separate element interposed
    between two members and in contact with the bottom of a socket for
    deforming one or more of the members.


CLS 403/277
TXT Structure under subclass 274 wherein a part of one member is encompassed by
    a part of another and the inner member is expanded by an element inserted
    longitudinally therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248+,   for a similar connection between a rod end and the side of a member.


CLS 403/278
TXT Structure under subclass 274 wherein the deformation of one of the members
    is effected by a separate distinct element which is itself deformed as an
    incident to the making of the joint.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclass 382.7 for a pipe joint wherein
    the pipe ends are deformed by a separate deformable element.


CLS 403/279
TXT Structure under subclass 274 wherein the deformation is effected
    simultaneously with and effected by, the action of a joint component which
    performs another function in the joint assembly in addition to the
    deforming function.


CLS 403/280
TXT Structure under subclass 274 wherein the members are connected by an
    inserted section which section is provided with means for deforming the
    members.


CLS 403/281
TXT Structure under subclass 274 wherein the deforming means is separated from
    each member and remains with the joint assembly after the joint is effected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11+,    for a joint provided with a deforming means which may or may not
    remain with the joint assembly after the joint is effected but which
    performs no function in the completed joint.

    275,    for a joint comprising an element which is inserted between the
    strands of a stranded member.


CLS 403/282
TXT Structure under subclass 274 wherein the deformation occurs as the members
    are assembled together.


CLS 403/283
TXT Structure under subclass 274 wherein the deformation of one member is
    effected by the penetration of a component and includes the separation of
    material at the surface of said member.


CLS 403/284
TXT Structure under subclass 274 wherein the members are of different
    resistance to deformation, e.g., diverse hardness, and are so arranged
    that, when both are simultaneously subjected to a lateral deforming force,
    one will be deformed to a greater degree than the other.


CLS 403/285
TXT Structure under subclass 274 wherein both members are deformed.


CLS 403/286
TXT Structure under the class definition comprising a pair of diverse,
    independent, spaced connecting means between two members each of the
    connecting means being secured to each of the members and being so arranged
    that one completely overlies the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123,    for an internal tie means between two members connected by a ball
    and socket joint.


CLS 403/287
TXT Structure under the class definition wherein a single joint between two
    members comprises a plurality of distinct, spaced, diverse connections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286,    for a joint bridged by a diverse connector.


CLS 403/288
TXT Structure under the class definition provided with means for sealing the
    joint, said means being distinct from the joint and unnecessary to the
    connection of the members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    for a ball and socket joint provided with packing at a point remote
    from the bearing interface.

    135+,   for a ball and socket joint provided with packing at the bearing
    interface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 345+ for a seal between relatively movable parts (i.e.,
    a dynamic seal).


CLS 403/289
TXT Structure under the class definition wherein an end portion of one of the
    members is split, the portions separated by the split being movable
    laterally into gripping engagement with another member to effect the joint.


CLS 403/290
TXT Structure under subclass 289 including a means for applying a force to the
    laterally movable portions to displace them into gripping relation.


CLS 403/291
TXT Structure under the class definition comprising relatively flexible and
    rigid members, the flexible and rigid characteristics being essential to
    the joint.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclasses 213+ for various tension relievers.

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 2+ for nonjoint, nonrotating fulcrum bearing
    where there is sliding or rolling contact between separate elements.


CLS 403/292
TXT Structure under the class definition wherein a connecting section is
    mounted between the ends of two juxtaposed members and extends into
    respective openings leading from the end faces of the members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280,    for an inserted section which deforms one of the connected members.


CLS 403/293
TXT Structure under subclass 292 including an external part which bridges the
    members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286,    for an inserted section and a separate external bridging piece
    wherein the inserted section and the external bridging piece serve to
    connect the members independently of each other.


CLS 403/294
TXT Structure under subclass 292 wherein the section is inserted transversely
    of the members.


CLS 403/295
TXT Structure under subclass 292 wherein the members extend at an angle to each
    other and the section has angularly extending portions which cooperate with
    the respective members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205,    for a rigid angle coupling having distinct, independent means for
    connection with two end members.


CLS 403/296
TXT Structure under subclass 292 wherein the section is threadedly engaged with
    at least one of the members.


CLS 403/297
TXT Structure under subclass 292 wherein the section is radially expansible
    into engagement with the openings.


CLS 403/298
TXT Structure under subclass 292 wherein the section is provided with axially
    extending grooves or ribs.


CLS 403/299
TXT Structure under the class definition comprising a member having threads at
    one end for connection to a threaded member and means at the other end for
    connection to either a nonthreaded member or to a member having threads of
    a different nature from those of the former threaded member.


CLS 403/300
TXT Structure under the class definition comprising an intermediate joining
    piece having a distinct connection with the respective ends of each of two
    members and bridging the ends of the members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for a coupler journalled to a structure other than the connected
    members.

    43,     for a turnbuckle.

    205,    for a coupler for connecting two members at a rigid angle.

    223,    for a flexible sleeve type coupler.

    229,    for a helical spring type coupler.

    292+,   for an inserted section.

    405+,   for a plate which bridges the ends of two members and is secured to
    each.


CLS 403/301
TXT Structure under subclass 300 wherein the connections of a different type
    and are serially related.


CLS 403/302
TXT Structure under subclass 301 wherein the joining piece is axially divided
    at one end.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141,    for a ball and socket joint comprising an axially divided coupling
    piece having a socket formed therein.


CLS 403/303
TXT Structure under subclass 300 wherein a single means engages or disengages
    each connection simultaneously.


CLS 403/304
TXT Structure under subclass 303 wherein the actuator biases axially movable
    end portions of the joining piece to engage or disengage the connections.


CLS 403/305
TXT Structure under subclass 300 wherein the joining piece is provided with a
    socket at each end, said sockets opening in opposite directions.


CLS 403/306
TXT Structure under subclass 300 wherein each member is connected independently
    to the joining piece by a separate screw or pin.


CLS 403/307
TXT Structure under subclass 300 wherein the joining piece is provided with an
    unbroken thread which engages both of the members.


CLS 403/308
TXT Structure under subclass 300 comprising separable caps or plugs which close
    the ends of the joining piece.


CLS 403/309
TXT Structure under subclass 300 wherein the outer periphery of the joining
    piece body is discontinuous along its entire length.


CLS 403/310
TXT Structure under subclass 309 wherein the joining piece is separable into
    longitudinal segments.


CLS 403/311
TXT Structure under subclass 310 wherein the segments are so constructed as to
    interfit with each other when assembled.


CLS 403/312
TXT Structure under subclass 310 wherein the segments are bolted together.


CLS 403/313
TXT Structure under subclass 309 wherein the joining piece comprises a unitary
    piece split along its length.


CLS 403/314
TXT Structure under subclass 300 comprising means for wedging or camming a
    member and the joining piece into engagement.


CLS 403/315
TXT Structure under the class definition wherein the joint is hampered against
    disconnection by a distinct means, which means either coacts with the joint
    or prevents access thereto, and which means does not constitute a part of
    the joint.


CLS 403/316
TXT Structure under subclass 315 wherein the hampering means prevents
    disengagement of a retaining means forming a part of the joint assembly.


CLS 403/317
TXT Structure under subclass 316 wherein the hampering means is hampered from
    being disengaged from the retaining means by a distinct means which means
    is unnecessary to the function of the hampering means.


CLS 403/318
TXT Structure under subclass 316 wherein the hampering means hampers the
    disassembly of two members retained by a key by blocking any movement of
    the key.


CLS 403/319
TXT Structure under subclass 315 wherein the hampering means comprises either a
    catch or a separate piece inserted between and positively engaging each of
    the members.


CLS 403/320
TXT Structure under subclass 315 wherein the hampering means prevents
    disassembly of two members secured together by a cammed or threaded
    connection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, subclasses 81+ for a threaded fastener (i.e., a
    bolt or nut) and means for restricting the rotation thereof relative to a
    coacting substructure; and subclasses 190+ for a threaded bolt and nut and
    means for coupling them against rotation relative to one another.


CLS 403/321
TXT Structure under the class definition comprising a manipulable latch means
    which secures the two members together by entering a notch or opening.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 308+ for similar structure in
    a pipe joint.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, appropriate subclasses for similar structure
    used to secure a closure in position.


CLS 403/322
TXT Structure under subclass 321 comprising two or more interrelated mechanical
    elements for operating the latch.


CLS 403/323
TXT Structure under subclass 321 wherein the latch comprises a bolt swivelled
    about its axis to one member and having a laterally extending projection
    for engaging the other member.


CLS 403/324
TXT Structure under subclass 321 wherein the latch comprises a transversely
    sliding pin.


CLS 403/325
TXT Structure under subclass 321 wherein the manipulator is spring biased.


CLS 403/326
TXT Structure under the class definition comprising means for securing two
    members together wherein an element biased into a recess or opening holds
    the members in assembled relation.

    (1)     Note.  The bias may result from the action of a distinct means for
    from the resiliency of one or more of the members.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 305+ for similar structure in
    a pipe joint.


CLS 403/327
TXT Structure under subclass 326 wherein the element is biased into operative
    position by a separate spring.


CLS 403/328
TXT Structure under subclass 327 wherein the spring biased element is slidably
    engaged with one member and is radially movable into engagement with the
    other member.


CLS 403/329
TXT Structure under subclass 326 wherein the element comprises a leaf spring.


CLS 403/330
TXT Structure under subclass 326 wherein the element is pivotally mounted.


CLS 403/331
TXT Structure under the class definition including colinear elongated members
    which must be slid transversely of the longitudinal axis of the members to
    assemble or disassemble the joint.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclass 67 for a side slide connection
    between two pipes whose ends define identical halves and subclasses 325+
    for a side slide connection between two pipes in general.


CLS 403/332
TXT Structure under the class definition wherein one member extends into an
    annular recess in another member, said recess being bounded by radially
    spaced surfaces of 360 degrees, said surfaces being either integral with
    the second member or formed by a distinct component joined thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 328+ for similarly joined
    pipes.


CLS 403/333
TXT Structure under the class definition wherein a member has an end, the
    entire periphery of which is longitudinally stepped or tapered, providing
    surfaces which are contacted by another completary member, forming a joint
    interface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 328+ for similarly joined
    pipes.


CLS 403/334
TXT Structure under subclass 333 wherein the diameter of the first mentioned
    member decreases uniformly toward the end of the member.


CLS 403/335
TXT Structure under the class definition wherein each member comprises an
    outwardly directed flange or shoulder adapted for connection to a
    corresponding flange or shoulder on the other member by a separate
    connecting element.


CLS 403/336
TXT Structure under subclass 335 wherein at least one of the flanges or
    shoulders is separate from but secured to its associated member.


CLS 403/337
TXT Structure under subclass 335 wherein the flanges are secured together by
    bolts or rivets extending parallel to the axis of the members.


CLS 403/338
TXT Structure under subclass 335 wherein the flanges are secured together by
    clamping means.


CLS 403/339
TXT Structure under the class definition comprising lapped rod ends having
    complementary engaging portions formed by halving, beveling, notching or
    otherwise cutting away the peripheries of the rods adjacent their ends in
    such a way as to maintain the configuration of the connected parts
    substantially the same as that of the adjacent parts of the respective rods.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401+,   for a miter joint.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    238,    Railways:  Surface Track, subclasses 230+ for a scarf joint between
    railway track sections.


CLS 403/340
TXT Structure under subclass 339 wherein the engaging portions of the
    respective rod ends are mirror images of one another.


CLS 403/341
TXT Structure under the class definition wherein the members comprise
    interfitting parts and an external component which bridges their interface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286,    for a means bridging a connection which means itself constitutes a
    connection between the same members.


CLS 403/342
TXT Structure under the class definition comprising an external sleeve having
    an internal threaded or cam surface to engage complementary external
    structure on one member and an inwardly extending flange for slidably
    engaging an abutment on the other member whereby rotation of the sleeve
    draws the members together.


CLS 403/343
TXT Structure under the class definition having interengaging parts comprising
    (1) screw threads on the members at the coupling interface, or (2) an
    axially inclined groove or shoulder on one member which engages a
    corresponding component on the other member, said interengaging parts being
    adapted to move the two members axially when the members are rotated.


CLS 403/344
TXT Structure under the class definition wherein one member is comprised of
    either separable segments or is split axially the entire length wherein the
    connection is effected by assembling the segments or closing the split.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    289+,   for a connection involving laterally movable opposed portions
    formed by splitting the end of a member.


CLS 403/345
TXT Structure under the class definition wherein each member comprises a part
    which interfits with a respective part of the other member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclass 547 for a dynamic, segmented ring circumferentially
    contacting seal for other than piston having interfitting projection and
    recess on its end structure or subclass 548 for a dynamic, segmented ring
    circumferentially contacting seal for other than piston having
    complementary interfitting adjoining rings.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 577+ for metal
    stock, blanks, or indetermnate articles which may include an interlocking
    joint between copnents thereof, and subclass 609 for metallic stock in
    which a macroscopic irregularity exists at the interface between components.


CLS 403/346
TXT Structure under subclass 345 wherein the members comprise a pair of
    angularly related rods which are connected at a point intermediate their
    respective ends.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207,    for crossed rods one of which interfits within a curved portion of
    the other.


CLS 403/347
TXT Structure under subclass 346 wherein the perimeter of one rod is completely
    encompassed by the other.


CLS 403/348
TXT Structure under subclass 345 wherein a protuberance on one member engages a
    complementary part on the other member, the engagement being effected by
    relative rotation of the two members.


CLS 403/349
TXT Structure under subclass 348 wherein the complementary part comprises a
    slot with longitudinal and circumferential portions for the protuberance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    343,    for a bayonet slot which comprises a screw or cam surface for
    biasing the members axially as they are rotated to effect the joint.


CLS 403/350
TXT Structure under subclass 345 wherein rotation of (a) one member with
    respect to the other member of (b) an actuator having the same axis as one
    of the members binds the two members together or caused a retainer to bind
    between the two members.


CLS 403/351
TXT Structure under subclass 350 wherein the binding action is effected by a
    relatively thin element or lining interposed in the space between the two
    members or between one member and an additional radially spaced component.


CLS 403/352
TXT Structure under subclass 351 wherein the relatively thin element comprises
    element of less than 1805 which is interposed between two arcuate
    peripheral surfaces.


CLS 403/353
TXT Structure under subclass 345 wherein the members are so configured that
    plural, distinct manipulations of one or more of the members are required
    in order to effect their connection or disconnection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52+,    for a joint wherein the members are relatively movable after they
    are assembled.

    99,     for an articulated joint which is lockable by plural motions of one
    member.

    349,    for a bayonet joint.

    350+,   for a rotary binding cam or wedge.


CLS 403/354
TXT Structure under subclass 345 wherein one member is provided with a
    diametric slot extending axially from one end thereof which slot is used in
    effecting the joint.


CLS 403/355
TXT Structure under subclass 345 including a component having means between and
    separably and nonrotatably engaging each of two telescoping members.


CLS 403/356
TXT Structure under subclass 355 wherein the means extends axially of one of
    the members.


CLS 403/357
TXT Structure under subclass 356 wherein the means is resilient.


CLS 403/358
TXT Structure under subclass 356 wherein the means is either stepped or tapered
    in a direction parallel to the axis of one of the members.


CLS 403/359
TXT Structure under subclass 345 wherein one of the members is a rod provided
    with (a) one or more longitudinal ribs of greater radial extent than the
    rest of the periphery of the rod or (b) a plurality of longitudinal grooves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    298,    for a fluted or splined inserted section.


CLS 403/360
TXT Structure under subclass 345 wherein one of the members is a rod having (a)
    a shoulder extending entirely around the periphery or (b) an enlargement on
    one end of the rod.


CLS 403/361
TXT Structure under subclass 345 wherein one of the members comprises a rod
    which is received in a recess in the other member and engages the bottom of
    the recess or a peripheral abutment therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165,    for a rod end rotatably received in a socket.

    244,    for a rod end associated with a socket formed by deforming or
    shaping a platelike member.

    268,    for a molded joint comprising a socket for receiving bonding
    material.

    276,    for a socket wherein a deforming element contacts the bottom
    thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    279,    Chucks and Sockets, subclasses 9.1+ for a connection between a
    holder and an object such as a tool, workpiece or rodlike body comprising a
    socket within the holder.


CLS 403/362
TXT Structure under subclass 345 wherein the members are radially related and
    one of the members has associated therewith a screw, which, when tightened,
    exerts a radial thrust against the other member.


CLS 403/363
TXT Structure under subclass 345 wherein the members comprise a pair of angle
    or channel shaped bars which are interfitted in face to face relation.


CLS 403/364
TXT Structure under subclass 345 wherein the ends of the members comprise a
    plurality of intermeshing projections.


CLS 403/365
TXT Structure under subclass 345 wherein a distinct component is interposed
    between two radially related members and separates a portion of one member
    from a portion of the other member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225+,   for a flexible joint comprising an elastomeric component interposed
    between two radially spaced members.

    243,    for a side engaging shim or bushing radially interposed between a
    rod end and an aperture in the side of a member through which the rod
    extends.

    350+,   for a similar component which also functions as a rotary binding
    cam or wedge.


CLS 403/366
TXT Structure under subclass 365 wherein the component biased into engagement
    with one of the members by a distinct transversely acting means.


CLS 403/367
TXT Structure under subclass 365 wherein the component is a wedge or cam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    351,    for similar structure associated with a rotary binding cam or wedge.


CLS 403/368
TXT Structure under subclass 367 wherein the wedge or cam is engaged by
    movement thereof in a direction axial of one of the members.


CLS 403/369
TXT Structure under subclass 368 wherein the wedge or cam comprises a plurality
    of circumferentially related segments.


CLS 403/370
TXT Structure under subclass 368 including a threaded component for actuating
    the wedge or cam.


CLS 403/371
TXT Structure under subclass 368 wherein the wedge or cam is a split or slotted
    bushing.


CLS 403/372
TXT Structure under subclass 365 wherein the component is resilient.


CLS 403/373
TXT Structure under subclass 345 comprising clamping means for securing the
    members together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    350+,   for a rotary binding cam or wedge.


CLS 403/374
TXT Structure under subclass 373 wherein the clamping means comprises a wedge
    or cam.


CLS 403/375
TXT Structure under subclass 345 comprising a protuberance, depression, or slot
    on the periphery of one member which is essential to the joint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    362,    for a flat or recessed portion on a rod for engaging a set screw.


CLS 403/376
TXT Structure under subclass 345 wherein the members are provided with
    additional means (a) to secure them together or (b) to retain them in
    interfitted relationship.


CLS 403/377
TXT Structure under subclass 376 wherein the members are in telescoping
    relation.


CLS 403/378
TXT Structure under subclass 377 wherein the additional means comprises a
    transverse pin.


CLS 403/379
TXT Structure under subclass 378 wherein the pin passes entirely through at
    least one member.


CLS 403/380
TXT Structure under subclass 376 wherein the members are interfitted in
    side-to-side relation.


CLS 403/381
TXT Structure under subclass 345 wherein one of the members comprises a tenon
    having a reduced neck portion and an enlarged head portion fitted in a
    correspondingly shaped recess in the other member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331,    for a side slide-type joint between elongated colinear members.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 181+ and 209 for dovetail or pin-head-type
    connections between artificial teeth or artificial tooth portions.


CLS 403/382
TXT Structure under subclass 345 wherein the members are disposed at an angle
    to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    347,    for interfitting crossing rods.

    400,    for crossing rods.


CLS 403/383
TXT Structure under subclass 345 wherein one of the members is a rod and a
    noncircular section of the rod is essential to the joint.


CLS 403/384
TXT Structure under the class definition comprising a joint between the side of
    a rod and the side of another rod or a plate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188,    for an intermediate member joining a rod side and another rod side
    or a plate by independent connections.

    230+,   wherein side characteristics of a rod are utilized in effecting a
    connection with the end of another rod transverse thereto.


CLS 403/385
TXT Structure under subclass 384 wherein two rods are joined by a connector
    having a pair of distinct clamping means each of which is attached to a
    respective rod.


CLS 403/386
TXT Structure under subclass 384 comprising means for gripping or encircling a
    rod which means is either integral with or is attached to the plate or the
    other rod side by a connection which is independent of the connection
    between the means and the first rod.


CLS 403/387
TXT Structure under subclass 384 comprising two rods wherein at least one of
    the rods is provided with a flange or groove which is used in effecting the
    joint.


CLS 403/388
TXT Structure under subclass 384 wherein the members are joined by a connector
    which extends through apertures in each.


CLS 403/389
TXT Structure under subclass 384 comprising a joint between two rods which are
    held in laterally spaced relation.


CLS 403/390
TXT Structure under subclass 389 wherein the rods are secured by a connector
    comprising a separable element to maintain the rods in space relation.


CLS 403/391
TXT Structure under subclass 389 wherein the rods are joined by a connector
    having plural channels formed therein, each channel receiving a respective
    rod.


CLS 403/392
TXT Structure under subclass 384 comprising a flexible strand which is twisted
    or bent about the rods or the rod and plate at their intersection to secure
    them together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206+,   for an axially curved or bent portion of a rod which forms a joint
    component.


CLS 403/393
TXT Structure under subclass 384 comprising two rods overlapped at their
    respective ends.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    339+,   for overlapped rod ends which are interfitted and maintain a
    constant cross-section throughout the joint.


CLS 403/394
TXT Structure under subclass 384 wherein the members are angularly related to
    one another and a connector extends diagonally across the members at the
    joint.


CLS 403/395
TXT Structure under subclass 384 wherein two rods are joined by a connector
    which is in the form of a yoke, and the legs of the yoke are provided with
    apertures through which one rod extends, the other rod being held between
    the bight of the yoke and the first mentioned rod.


CLS 403/396
TXT Structure under subclass 384 comprising two rods joined by a connector
    which completely encompasses both of them.


CLS 403/397
TXT Structure under subclass 384 wherein the two members are secured together
    by a resilient clip.


CLS 403/398
TXT Structure under subclass 384 wherein the members are connected by a
    U-shaped connector, at least one of the members being contained within the
    bight thereof.


CLS 403/399
TXT Structure under subclass 398 wherein the connector comprises an open
    channel which receives a rod.


CLS 403/400
TXT Structure under subclass 384 wherein the members comprise a pair of crossed
    rods.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    346+,   for interfitted crossing rods.


CLS 403/401
TXT Structure under the class definition wherein the ends of the members are
    beveled or angled and are joined so that the members extend at an angle to
    each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    339+,   for a scarf joint between two rods.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 657 for corner joints
    in openwork structures there provided there provided for.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclass 381 for
    corner structure of framed type panels there provided for.

    238,    Railways:  Surface Track, subclasses 230+ for a scarf joint between
    two railway track sections.


CLS 403/402
TXT Structure under subclass 401 wherein a part of a connecting element extends
    across the juncture of the members, said part being disposed on either the
    inner or outer peripheral surface of the members.


CLS 403/403
TXT Structure under the class definition wherein the members extend at an angle
    with respect to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205,    for a rigid angle coupling 383 for interfitted members joined at a
    rigid angle.

    401,    for a mit joint


CLS 403/404
TXT Structure under the class definition wherein at least one member is
    modified or particularly shaped at the locus of the connection or is made
    of a particular material and wherein the modification, shape, or material
    is essential to the connection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, appropriate subclasses for a member modified only
    to provide a preformed aperture to receive a bolt, screw, nail, rivet, etc.


CLS 403/405.1
TXT SEPARATE CONNECTOR, FASTENER OR RETAINER:

    Structure under the class definition wherein the members are joined by a
    connector which is separate from both.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes patents to a connector, per se, as
    well as patents to a connector in combination with the members.  However, a
    connector which is particularly adapted for use in a combination provided
    for in a subclass above, is classified with that combination rather than in
    this subclass 405.1.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., appropriate subclasses for members
    joined by a buckle, a button or a clasp including no more structure of the
    members than is necessary to cooperate with the connector to effect the
    joint.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 525.01+ for processes of joining by
    applying a separate fastener and see the notes thereunder.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, appropriate subclasses for members joined by a
    headed, threaded, or driven cooperate with the fastener to effect the joint.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 594 for
    composite metallic stock having components secured together at various
    spots by a weld or a mechanical fastener.


CLS 403/406.1
TXT Independently attached to one member:

    Structure under subclass 405.1 wherein the connector is secured to one
    member independently of the other member.


CLS 403/407.1
TXT Separable part independently attached to other member:

    Structure under subclass 406.1 wherein the connector comprises two
    separable parts, each part being independently connected to a respective
    member.


CLS 403/408.1
TXT Extending through openings in plural members:

    Structure under subclass 405.1 wherein the members each have an opening
    therethrough and the connector extends through the openings.


CLS 403/409.1
TXT Cam or wedge:

    Structure under subclass 405.1 wherein one part of the connector has a
    camming or wedging surface.


CLS 403/410
TXT Structure under the class definition.


CLS 404/
TTL ROAD STRUCTURE, PROCESS,  OR APPARATUS

CLS 404/
TXT CONTENTS


    I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    II.     GLOSSARY

    III.    LINES WITH OTHER CLASSES

    o-O-o



    I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    This class provides for (1) highway, pathway or walkway structure, per se,
    including the form or arrangement of such structure for vehicular or foot
    traffic; (2) processes for making, installing, repairing or maintaining
    such structure; and (3) apparatus for installing, making, repairing or
    maintaining such structure where such structure, apparatus or process is
    not otherwise classifiable as either (a) specifically provided for in other
    loci or (b) of such general utility as to be provided for elsewhere on the
    basis of such general utility.  (See III, for known collections of such
    nature and the particular lines of demarcation.)

    (1)     Note.  Claims not controlling in Patents prior to 1930.  Patents
    prior to 1930 have not necessarily been classified by claims so that the
    placement of these old patents does not necessarily indicate lines of
    classification.  Many of such old patents have been classified in
    accordance with their total disclosure. Most of the patents, however,
    regardless of their age have been assigned in accordance with their claimed
    subject matter.

    (2)     Note.  Class 404 does not provide for materials or compositions,
    per se, used in the construction, maintenance or repair of roads.  The
    identification of a specific road component, otherwise solely set forth in
    terms of its constituent materials, without significant structural
    description of said component is still not enough to effect classification
    in Class 404. See the search note, below, under III for the specific loci
    for such materials and compositions.



    II.     GLOSSARY

    AGITATION

    Brisk shaking, regular or motion, or to-and-fro movement of material or
    device to effect any one or several of many different purposes during road
    building, (e.g., vibration imparted to road aggregate for compaction,
    agitition of uncured road slab to provide a smooth upper surface or
    agitation of material to mix constituents).  Individual subclass
    definitions must be checked for possible special limitations imposed upon
    the use of this term - e.g., subclasses 113 and 133.

    DOWEL

    Rod or bar reinforcement-often relatively movable with respect to road,
    pavement or joint components-which reinforcement bridges, links or joins
    adjacent components so that load, stress or movement of one component is
    both inhibited by, and transmitted to, another component.

    FINISHING

    Treatment or working of material to either (1) modify the internal
    orientation of constituents of a mass of material (usually a mixture of
    road aggregate) or (2) provide a desired surface characteristic for such
    massed material.  The terms "finishing" has been loosely used in patent
    literature to cover many different processes and devices so long as the
    desired result is achieved.  For this reason the term has not been used in
    subclass titles.

    JOINT

    (1) Structure linking or uniting adjacent components, or (2) a gap between
    adjacent components or (3) a parting member or spacer between adjacent
    components.

    LAYER

    Stratum, course, lamina, coating or sheet which is sufficiently
    recogonizable as such regardless of the constituent material involved.
    Interface blending of otherwise distinct layers still leaves plural layers.

    MODULE

    Monolithic component such as brick, block, slab, panel, tile, sheet,
    precast or preformed member, etc. which may be utilized (1) in repetitious
    juxtaposition with similar components, (2) with nonmodular components or
    (3) alone to constitute road structure.

    PAVEMENT

    Hardened, treated or "finished" surface of a roadway-or an upper "layer"
    thereof-exposed to the wear of traffic.  This roadway portion may
    constitute either (1) the entire roadway with respect to untreated or
    unworked earth or (2) no more than an upper course of a multilayer
    structure.  In many instances, the "pavement" itself is made up of more
    than one distinct stratum.

    TOOL

    Material modifying or treating instrumentality actually contacting material
    (e.g., a roller or screed component of a road making machine) or the most
    proximate instrumentality guiding or directing modifying or treating energy
    against material (e.g., a nozzle of a soil stabilization device or a
    heating means of a road repair machine.

    III.    GENERAL LINES WITH OTHER CLASSES

    A.      Classification lines set forth in subclasses of this class:

    Class   Class 404 Subclass

    15              35,89, 93, 97

    29              122

    37              90

    40              9

    49              6, 25

    52              1, 2, 8, 19, 25, 34, 36,

                    37, 44, 45, 47, 70, 99,

                    134, 135

    70              25

    73              72, 84.05

    81              117, 133

    104             1

    116             9, 16

    118             93

    125             87, 90

    126             77, 95

    137             4, 25

    138             2

    156             72, 94

    172             85, 90, 117, 121,

                    124, 129-131

    173             133

    175             90, 133

    180             122

    182             19

    193             101

    209             81

    210             4

    219             77,

    221             94

    222             92, 95, 101, 107

    238             1, 10, 35, 47

    239             2, 9, 101, 111

    241             90

    249             2, 48, 87, 96

    252             76

    256             6

    264             75

    294             73, 99

    299             36.1

    340             9

    359             14, 16, 23

    362             9, 12, 14, 15, 22

    366             113

    401             94

    405             2, 76, 77, 91, 95, 133

    425             97, 114

    427             72, 75, 76

    428             17, 22

    451             20,112

    454             25

    520             19, 76

    523             9



    B.      Other Class Lines

    SEARCH CLASS:

    14,     Bridges, subclass 73 for floor or special roadway structure of
    bridges.

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 4+ for artificial turf
    fasteners.  In general the securement means for the amusement, exercise and
    game surfaces provided for in Class 472, Class 482, Class 473 are
    considered skin to carpet fasteners unless specific road structure is
    claimed, that is, more than mere ground support or an earth stake.

    37,     Excavating, appropriate subclasses, for apparatus and processes
    relating to digging, moving or handling earth; especially subclasses 381+
    for scraping or grading a roadbed.  (See reference to Class 172, below, for
    related subject matter).

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 541+ for illuminated
    signs, subclasses 584+ for signs in general, and especially subclass 612
    for highway signs which impart traffic information (e.g., "STOP", "OHIO
    AVE", "NO PARKING", etc.) whether permanently affixed to the road or
    pavement or merely mounted near the highway. Inclusion of significant road
    structure, other than required to accommodate the sign or sign support,
    will effect classification in Class 404.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses, for
    structure of such general utility as not to be limited to highway or
    walkway use; see particularly subclasses 174+ for the combination of
    vertical building structure and road or pavement features.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 375 and 422 for auxiliary floors
    and floors for railway rolling stock.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, for materials, per se,
    especially materials which set or harden to retain a given shape; e.g.
    concrete, asphalt, etc. -although specially designed for paving or
    roadways;  Included in Class 106, with the compositions, are processes of
    preparing such compositions where such process is not otherwise restricted
    to road building; e.g. (a) merely molding, laying or coating a Class 106
    composition to form a roadway combined with preparing the composition is
    classifiable in Class 106 while (b) preparing a Class 106 composition
    combined with treatment or handling relating either to characteristics of
    other road components or to another process step peculiar to road building
    is classifiable in Class 404.

    114,    Ships, subclass 85  for process of and apparatus for making ship
    decks.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses, for apparatus for
    surface coating or impregnating the earth, roadway or roadway portions
    (including striping or marking machines).  The combination of means to
    coat, or impregnate, and other means for in situ treatment of the earth,
    roadway or roadway portion, is classifiable in Class 404.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 271.2 for specific pavement heater
    structure (e.g., burners) and subclass 343.5 for furnaces for melting other
    than snow.

    172,    Earth Working, appropriate subclasses, for apparatus for and
    process of working the earth in situ.  While Class 404 provides for simple,
    smooth surfaced, compacting rollers and compacting rollers with blunt ended
    teeth (i.e., sheep's foot roller), which rollers are used both to compact
    the earth and roadways; Class 172 provides for other rolling, rotating or
    orbitally moving earth working devices (see particularly the types set out
    under subclasses 518+) and for devices classifiable in Class 404, combined
    with or convertible to, Class 172 devices.  In general, the area of overlap
    between these two classes-other than as indicted above-can only be resolved
    by a judgement decision based on large measure on (a) whether utility is
    general (for Class 172) or limited to road building (for Class 404) or (b)
    which of the two classes provides specific subclasses for the subject
    matter involved or (c) current placement of documents in both classes.
    Obviously, a search will in many instances be required in both classes.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 39 for road
    structure combined with and restricted to underground electrical
    installations.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclass 222 for platform or
    workman support structure.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses, for process of and apparatus for breaking up of road material,
    per se. The combination of roadway material comminution and distribution to
    form a new roadway is classifiable in Class 404.  (See reference to Class
    299, below).

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 1+ for in situ-type molds for forming
    roadways or roadway portions and not combined with means to work or treat
    the earth.

    252,    Compositions, appropriate subclasses, for compositions of matter
    though solely disclosed as useful in road making.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 31+ for processes of forming structural installions in situ;
    which include only the steps of molding monolithic uniform composition
    structure and/or compacting, treating, stressing or surface working the
    material to perfect the molding or curing of the molded body (forming parts
    by a molding operation and uniting in situ by a second molding operation is
    also classifiable in Class 264, subclasses 31+); subclass 69 for processes
    of molding which include the step of vibrating, agitating, or jarring; and
    subclass 349 for processes of molding which include the step of tamping.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, appropriate
    subclasses, for breaking up of roadway structure. The combination of
    roadway comminution and distribution to form a new roadway is classifiable
    in Class 404.

    366,    Agitating, appropriate subclasses (e.g., 241+) for specific
    agitating structure.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 15+ for foraminous mats
    used as erosion control; subclasses 36+ for specific drainage structure
    (e.g., pipe, culvert); subclasses 132+ for tunnels; subclasses 231+ for
    installation of a pier or pier shape; and subclasses 258, 270, and 271 for
    earth treatment other than for a roadbed.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    appropriate subclasses for apparatus involved in fabricating elements off
    site (precast elements formed then transported to the site).

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 136+ for methods of applying
    protective coatings on a pavement, and appropriate subclasses for applying
    a protective coating to components (e.g., rebar).

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Class 523, subclasses 132+ for a composition having utility in
    situ as a soil conditioner or stabilizer; subclass 150 for a friction
    element composition which imparts nonskidding or nonslipping properties to
    surfaces used in pedestrian or vehicular movement; and subclass 172 for a
    composition designed to be applied for marking pavements or roads, or for
    signs defining traffic lanes, pedestrian crosswalks, traffic instruction,
    or as an applied reflex-reflector.


CLS 404/1
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to the arrangement of
    (a) one road to another (e.g., multilevel cross-road interchange,) (b) one
    type of traffic way to another (e.g., vehicle roadway with separate
    sidewalk portion) or (c) a road to the earth (e.g., an elevated highway).

    (1)     Note.  A land-fill roadbed which raises a highway above the level
    of the terrain is not considered to be "elevated" for this subclass and is
    therefore classifiable in subclasses below on other features.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 174+ for the
    combination of a road structure with building a structure-e.g., multilevel
    building with a ramp.

    104,    Railways, appropriate subclasses, for a railway system.

    238,    Railways:  Surface Track, subclass 8 for highway crossings at grade
    over railways.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 114+ for a landing field arrangement.


CLS 404/2
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to a depression, swale
    or channel extending along a road, often at the juncture of a roadway and a
    curb, at the road surface, within the road or beneath the road for the
    purpose of guiding or limiting water flow.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is drainage structure for road
    joints and road beds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7+,     for curb structure, per se.  Curb and gutter combination is
    classifiable in subclass 2.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 11+ for a cover
    with an eave or vally gutter, subclasses 118+ for an enclosure with fluid
    guiding port to a usable space, subclasses 131+ for a burial vault with
    fluid guiding feature, subclass 210 for a flue with a fluid directing
    feature and subclass 219 for a flue connected to a building structure.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, appropriate subclasses for conduit
    structure, per se.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 202 for
    spraying means combined with street or road curb structure.

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 8 for curb and gutter molds, per se.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 36+ for subject matter
    relating to drainage means of general utility.


CLS 404/3
TXT Drain or gutter structure under subclass 2 with provision for holding or
    protecting pipe, cable, electrical wiring and the like.

    (1)     Note.  Much of the structure provided for in this subclass relates
    to combined curb-gutter components.


CLS 404/4
TXT Drain or gutter structure under subclass 2 with openings to lead water
    runoff into a drainage system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclass 510 for a pool
    drain.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 247.11+ for street curb drainage inlet
    devices including a liquid seal.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 153+, especially
    subclasses 163+ for structural installations including grated drainage
    inlets, and subclasses 532.1+ for heavier constituent catch basins
    comprising street curb inlets.


CLS 404/5
TXT Curb inlet structure under subclass 4 comprising a distinct hood portion
    fitted into the curb or gutter.


CLS 404/6
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to a controlling
    obstruction or barricade means for a road which physically determines the
    direction of, or stops, vehicular or pedestrian traffic.

    (1)     Note.  A barrier for this subclass includes "significant" road
    structure. Mere provision for mounting or supporting on or along a roadway
    without particular relationship to road configuration, road contour or
    pavement-base structural details is not considered "significant".  See
    reference to Class 256, below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9+,     for structural means on or in a road which, while providing for
    traffic control, does not impose an absolute control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 9, 33, 34, 35, 49, 131+,
    and 263+ for controlled barriers.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses for
    specific barrier structure or detail.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 114+ for aircraft barriers.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclasses 270+ for railroad
    crossings including a vehicular barrier.


CLS 404/7
TXT Guide or barrier structure under subclass 6 comprising an obstruction
    projecting above and along a road generally at the edges of, and
    coextensive with, said roadway and presenting a continuous extent except
    for crossing roads and driveways.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for curb structure combined with gutter or drain features.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclass 32 for a surface mounted barrier, bumper, or block
    which obstructs the passage of a vehicle wheel.

    256,    Fences, subclasses 1, 13.1, and 64 for an attenuated barrier (or a
    series of individual units which, as a group, form an attenuated-like
    barrier) which by its position, on or near a roadway, obstructs the passage
    of a vehicle or person.


CLS 404/8
TXT Curb structure under subclass 7 relating to embedded or fastened means for
    strengthening or shielding the nosing or lip-like portion of a curb.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 177+ for exposed
    embedded elements to enhance the wear characteristics of a traffic
    receiving surface.


CLS 404/9
TXT Subject matter under the class definition regulating the flow of vehicles
    or pedestrians by either modifying the pavement structure or by markers
    which extend above the pavement to guide vehicles, but do not provide
    specific information such as yield, stop, merge, etc.

    (1)     Note.  A sign, signal or reflector as such is not considered
    subject matter for Class 404, unless, road structure is modified beyond the
    mere mounting, holding or support for such component. For example, a "STOP"
    sign permanently fastened to a pavement or mid-island curb is not
    classifiable in Class 404, (see search note to Class 40, below); while the
    same sign counterbalanced within a recess in the roadway-ordinarily up and
    visible but capable of retraction into the recess when contracted by a
    vehicle wheel-classifiable in Class 404.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6+,     barrier means which physically determine the direction of, or
    stops, vehicular or pedestrian traffic.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 541+ for illuminated
    signs, subclasses 584+ for signs in general, and especially subclass 612
    for highway signs which impart information (e.g., "STOP", "OHIO AVE", "NO
    PARKING", etc) whether permanently affixed to a road or merely mounted
    nearby.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 103+ for a land
    marker.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 63, for moving-type street traffic
    indicators.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 158 and 160 for a traffic director.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, appropriate subclasses, for electrical
    signals.  Note particularly subclass 908.1 for barricade type.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    515+ for signal reflectors and subclasses 543+ for signal reflectors
    mounting means.  Class 359 provides for an optical feature, beyond the mere
    recitation of a lens or reflector, in combination with support structure;
    while Class 404 provides for an optical feature in combination with traffic
    barrier or traffic director means, e.g., a prismatic reflector set flush
    into a roadway is classifiable in Class 359, while a prismatic reflector on
    a small raised button-like member along a lane marker is classifiable in
    Class 404.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 153.1 for illuminating sources, and
    reflectors or supports therefore, adaptable to signaling.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclasses 28 and 29 for
    floating devices (e.g., buoys) which are ballasted to control their
    movement.

    523,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 172 for pavement
    marking composition.


CLS 404/10
TXT Traffic director structure under subclass 9 with means to resile after
    displacement by contact with traffic.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    238,    Railways:  Surface Track, subclass 381 for wheel depressable foot
    guards associated with rail structure.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclasses 28 and 29 for
    orienting yielding floatable devices.


CLS 404/11
TXT Yielding traffic director structure under subclass 10 including means,
    other than the director itself, urging said director into operative
    position which means is housed within the road.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are spring, gravity counterbalanced and
    elastomer means for biasing.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass are vibration inducing members
    with the capability to yield.


CLS 404/12
TXT Traffic director structure under subclass 9 extending along or across a
    road to channel the flow of vehicular or pedestrian traffic or to divide
    the flow into distinct separate paths.

    (1)     Note.  Generally the traffic directors in this subclass are
    elongated, or indefinite length, members.

     SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclass 153.1 for a pavement marker or strip with
    illuminating means.


CLS 404/13
TXT Lane marker structure under subclass 12 wherein the director is made up of
    a plurality of relatively short separate components inter nesting or
    interlocked one to the other.

    (1)     Note.  Included in these subclasses are concatenated director
    elements capable of establishing curved or angular traffic paths.


CLS 404/14
TXT Lane marking structure under subclass 12 in combination with a mirror-like
    component infused into or onto the surface of the director so as to cast
    back light from traffic and thus provide a visible as well as physical
    director.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for vibration inducing director members with reflecting
    characteristics.


CLS 404/15
TXT Traffic director structure under subclass 9 for means set in or on a road
    to jar or shake a vehicle passing over said means.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are single or plural members to
    configured or arranged as to set up repeated or rhythmic shaking.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this sublass is a single member which will allow
    a vehicle to pass over it without damage and primarily intended to serve as
    a visual director.

    (3)     Note.  Traffic directors whose upper surface is in the same plane
    as the pavement are classified in this class, subclass 9.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for a yieldable vibration inducing member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclass 153.1 for a pavement marker or strip with
    illuminating means which usually is detectable by a vehicle.


CLS 404/16
TXT Vibration inducing structure under subclass 15 in combination with a
    mirror-like component so as to cast back light from traffic and this
    provide a visible as well as a physical director.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for an attenuated lane marker impregnated with reflective material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 63 for moving-type street traffic
    indicators not combined with significant road structure, e.g., merely
    mounted in or along roadway.


CLS 404/17
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to a hardened surface to
    minimize the effects of wear of traffic.

    (1)     Note.  Substantially all roads and walkways include a pavement
    portion and the indented subclasses are distinguished from each other on
    the basis of either differences in pavement structure or in other component
    parts of the road or roadway.

    (2)     Note.  Attention is directed to the fact that while module
    construction of pavement is set out in subclasses 29 and 34+, below, many
    subclasses higher in the schedule include module structure distinguished by
    features characterized in the particular subclass title and definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 114 for a specialized landing field
    construction.

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, appropriate subclasses for a particular
    playing field surface.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer
    product, and see the reference to Class 404 in the definition of Class 428,
    section VI.

    472,    Amusement Devices, subclasses 85+ for a surface or turf structure
    used in amusement racetracks, subclasses 88+ for a surface structure used
    for the movement thereon of wheeled or gliding amusement vehicles (e.g., a
    slide surface in the form of artificial ski slope), and subclasses 92+ for
    a surface or turf structure of an arena, track, court, playing field, etc.
    which is intended to be used for athletic or exhibition events classifiable
    herein.

    473,    Game Using Tangible Projectile, for a particular playing field of
    court surface.


CLS 404/18
TXT Pavement structure under subclass 17 comprising (a) blocks, slabs or
    precast monoliths - not fabricated in situ on the road - united with, or
    by, (b) an in situ-formed surface layer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     for pavement bed having a layer of blocks.

    34+,    for pavement structure made up of preformed modules.  Many such
    preformed modular pavements include in situ material cast between modules.
    However, this may be distinguished from subclass 18 of Class 404 by the
    absence of any in situ cast surfaces equal to, or larger than, the extent
    of the modules being joined or united.


CLS 404/19
TXT Pavement structure under subclass 17 relating to characteristics which tend
    to reduce skidding or render the traffic surface nonslippery.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for rubber or rubber-like pavement which may or may not be
    anti-skid. Subclass 19 provides for structure clearly set out as providing
    an anti-skid function.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 177+ for a stairs
    or other building component of general application having a wear resisting
    or friction increasing traffic carrying surface.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 222 and 228.2 for
    anti-skid features.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Class 523, subclass 150 for a composition containing a
    synthetic resin having utility as a friction element to impart nonskidding
    or nonslipping properties to surfaces used in pedestrian or vehicular
    movement or to processes of preparing said composition.


CLS 404/20
TXT Anti-slip surface structure under subclass 19 characterized by gritlike
    grains or particles (natural or synthetic) embedded into the surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, for an
    abrasive material or composition, per se, and see the search notes
    thereunder.


CLS 404/21
TXT Anti-slip surface structure under subclass 19 characterized by the
    inclusion of exposed metal elements in the surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for a pavement including terrazzo-like components with exposed
    metal members at the surface disclosed as anti-slip in character.  Where
    the metal members are substantially coextensive with pavement thickness and
    also with either pavement width or length, such member is considered to be
    a reinforcement for subclasses 70, and 134+, for reinforcement structure,
    per se.


CLS 404/22
TXT Pavement structure under subclass 17 having a transparent or translucent
    element which allows light through the pavement.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are many devices wherein the light admitting
    means is mounted in a vault cover.  Because of the number and age of
    patents involved, no cross-reference is being made to subclasses 25+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 602 and 662+ for receptacles having
    transparent end and sidewalls respectively.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 326 for illumination refractors.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 67 for a stock
    material product which comprises an element embedded within a substrate and
    visible therein.


CLS 404/23
TXT Light admitting structure under subclass 22 wherein the light admitting
    element is replaceable without destruction of the supporting structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    642+ for lens elements, per se, and lens housings of general utility.


CLS 404/24
TXT Light admitting structure under subclass 22 wherein the housing or support
    for the light admitting means is Portland cement concrete.

    (1)     Note.  The term "frame" is here intended to signify more than a
    mere lens, glass setting or seal made of cement.


CLS 404/25
TXT Pavement structure under subclass 17 relating to movable means adapted to
    form part of the pavement surface while spanning an opening in said
    surface, which adaptation enhances the traffic bearing function of this
    pavement portion; e.g., inhibits tilting, rotation, "jumping", noise, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Nominal Reference to location in road or pavement, to
    strength, or details as to fit, will not require classification in Class
    404.

    (2)     Note.  A complete search for vault cover-closure must include
    subclasses 22+ above.  See (1) Note under subclass 22.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, appropriate subclasses for similar
    closures-even if called "manhole covers" or "vault closures" -which do not
    directly provide for traffic bearing characteristics subclasses 21, 34, 41,
    and 465 for manhole covers and frames and subclasses 504 and 505 for frames.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 19+ for a manhole.

    70,     Locks, subclasses 158+ for locking structure associated with a
    manhole cover.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 371 for a valve or water well cover.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 220+ for manhole cover structure.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, appropriate subclasses for securing devices for
    a manhole cover.

    454,    Ventilation, appropriate subclasses for a movable closure combined
    with means to supply, distribute, regulate, treat or direct air in a
    tortous path or to change the direction of flow of the air.


CLS 404/26
TXT Vault cover-closure structure under subclass 25 including means to vary the
    relative height or angularity of the cover structure with respect to the
    pavement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclass 505 for an expandable or
    contractable frame.


CLS 404/27
TXT Pavement structure under subclass 17 having specifics or tails of the
    substructure supporting said pavement.

    (1)     Note.  Mere nominal inclusion of a supporting substructure-e.g.,
    "roadbed", "base", or  "foundation"  will not result in classification in
    this subclass.  See subclass 71 for bed structure, per se.


CLS 404/28
TXT Bed structure under subclass 27 wherein at least one stratum consists of
    either one or more selected or fabricated film, lamina, webs or modules.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34+,    for modular road structure and see further search notes thereunder.


CLS 404/29
TXT Preformed, or selected, element layer structure under subclass 28 wherein
    the stratum is made up primarily of a plurality of uniform cuboid-like
    members; e.g., bricks, cobble stones, slabs, wooded billets, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for combined sheet and preformed module pavement.

    34+,    for preformed modules, per se, and see search notes thereunder.


CLS 404/30
TXT Preformed, or selected, element layer structure under subclass 28 wherein
    the stratum is made up primarily of a plurality of nonuniform cuboid-like
    members, e.g., natural field stones.

    (1)     Note.  Generally, the nonuniform members for this subclass where
    arranged in close rank and file still leave significant voids while the
    blocks of subclass 29 can be arranged, though  not necessarily, to
    virtually eliminate such voids.


CLS 404/31
TXT Bed structure under subclass 27 comprising two or more strata.

    (1)     Note.  The tendency of one stratum to merge into another will not
    exclude classification in this subclass where such separate strata are in
    fact set out or recognized.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    71 and 276 for road layers using an adhesive.


CLS 404/32
TXT Pavement structure under subclass 17 incorporating rubber, natural or
    synthetic, or a similar elastic-like material into the wearing surface of
    the roadway.

    (1)     Note.  While asphalt and similar bituminous pavement are somewhat
    elastic they are not considered "rubber" or "rubber-like" for this subclass
    and are classifiable on other characteristics in this class.


CLS 404/33
TXT Rubber or rubber-like structure under subclass 32 including a projecting
    portion which provides an interlock means with an undersurface or bed.


CLS 404/34
TXT Pavement structure under subclass 17 made up of a plurality of precast,
    preshaped or precut monoliths generally not fabricated in situ on the
    roadway.

    (1)     Note.  Included here, and in indented subclasses, are individual
    preformed module components of a pavement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for a pavement structure of preformed modules combined with an in
    situ sheet surface layer.

    29,     for bed structure including preformed blocks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 603+ for preformed
    stone-like modules of general utility and see notes thereunder for other
    related loci in Class 52.

     428,   Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 44+ for module
    or block composition (e.g., fiberglass reinforcement).


CLS 404/35
TXT Preformed module structure under subclass 34 wherein the individual module,
    while covering a relatively large area as compared to a single brick or
    flagstone, is designed for both rapid and repeated installations as well as
    ease of tranport.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass relates, in large part, to preformed modules
    for temporary aircraft landing strips or for military and temporary access
    roads.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 215 and 238
    for mats adapted for cleaning boots and shoes.

    238,    Railways, Surface Track, subclass 14 for a traction mat or pad
    adapted to facilitate the extraction of a vehicle from sand or mud.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 114+ for landing field blast deflector
    panels.


CLS 404/36
TXT Portable mat structure under subclass 35 of open lattice-like configuration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 633+ for openwork,
    trellis, grille or screen construction of general utility and see search
    notes thereunder for other loci of similar structure.


CLS 404/37
TXT Preformed module structure under subclass 34 with means to separate one
    module edge or face from another.

    (1)     Note.  This separation is usually for the reception of a binder or
    filler to secure individual modules in place.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 603 for stone-like
    modules of general utility with integral spacer means.  This subclass must
    be searched for this feature.


CLS 404/38
TXT Spaced means under subclass 37 which are formed, and unitary, with the
    module itself.


CLS 404/39
TXT Integral spacer structure under subclass 38 provided by an oblique or
    chamfered peripheral surface portion of the module so that the top planar
    surfaces of juxtapositioned modules are spaced from each other.


CLS 404/40
TXT Preformed module structure under subclass 34 wherein individual modules are
    united or held against relative movement by means of a discrete key.


CLS 404/41
TXT Preformed module structure under subclass 34 wherein individual modules
    include integral peripheral configurations adapted to mate with adjacent
    modules.


CLS 404/42
TXT Preformed module structure under subclass 34 wherein the individual modules
    are so configured, or so placed, as to form a decorative design.


CLS 404/43
TXT Preformed module structure under subclass 34 wherein the module rests on a
    member embedded in the road base, on a rail-like bar or both.


CLS 404/44
TXT Preformed module structure under subclass 34 comprising two or more
    distinct and dissimilar materials united to form a module.

    (1)     Note.  The dissimilar materials are not "mixed".  Rather, they form
    distinct molded or otherwise shaped portions of the module.

    (2)     Note.  Plural wood laminate or similar strips together with
    variations in the grain orientation is not considered composite structive
    for this subclass, see subclass 46.

    (3)     Note.  A reinforcement external of, or encasing, a module-and of
    dissimilar material is considered to constitute composite structure for
    this subclass. On the other hand, dissimilar material of grid, mesh, bar or
    rod form substantially embedded within the structure of a module is
    considered to be reinforcement for subclass 45.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     for a compound or composite parting strip for a road joint.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 612 for modules of
    general utility with layered stone-like components.  This subclass must be
    searched for this feature.


CLS 404/45
TXT Preformed module structure under subclass 34 characterized by the inclusion
    of a generally coextensive grid or network of attenuated elements to
    strengthen the module structure against failure induced by load stresses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for a pavement structure including reinforcement means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 600+ for a
    stone-like module with elongated reinforcing means. These subclasses must
    be searched for this feature.


CLS 404/46
TXT Preformed module structure under subclass 34 made of wood or wood products.


CLS 404/47
TXT Pavement structure under subclass 17 incorporating a component between or
    linking adjacent or contiguous pavement portions which component bridges
    the gap between or connects said portions.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this and indented subclasses are road portions
    including joint means though the road portion is not clearly identified as
    a "pavement".

    (2)     Note.  Included in this and indented subclasses is pavement
    structure with reinforcement structure extending from one pavement portion
    to another.

    (3)     Note.  Included here is road joint structure, per se, not elsewhere
    classifiable, either in some other class or higher in this class schedule.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for pavement structure including reinforcement.

    134+,   for road reinforcement structure, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 475.1+ for a closure seal
    (e.g., striker, gasket or weather strip) and see the search notes there
    under for the loci of other seals.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 393+ for relatively
    yielding preformed separator and subclasses 698+ for assembled in situ-type
    anchor or tie structure of general utility and see search notes thereunder
    for other pertinent loci.

    238,    Railways:  Surface Track, subclass 8 for a street crossing which
    includes an expansion joint.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 135 and 153 for a
    tunnel expansion joint.


CLS 404/48
TXT Joint structure under subclass 47 incorporating a removable component
    (e.g., mold element) utilized for in situ making of a joint, or part of a
    joint, which component is absent from the final completed pavement joint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for process of forming a joint.

    87+,    for apparatus used in forming a joint.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 1+ and 189+ for forms used for a road.


CLS 404/49
TXT Joint structure under subclass 47 provided with some open space within the
    joint itself, or within the ends of the ends of adjacent pavement portions,
    so that joint material may flow into such space when the joint is subjected
    to compressive forces.


CLS 404/50
TXT Joint structure under subclass 47 wherein the abutting peripheral
    configuration of adjacent pavement portions is modified to provide for
    mating or interengagement such portions generally to limit relative
    movement or transmitt stresses.


CLS 404/51
TXT Offset or keyed slab end structure under subclass 50 combined with other
    load transfer structure; e.g., plates, pins, rods, etc., that extend from
    one slab end to the contiguous slab end.

    (1)     Note.  See the subclass immediately below for the many variant
    forms of load transfer means used in conjunction with road pavement.


CLS 404/52
TXT Joint structure under subclass 47 wherein a load transmitting member
    extending from one pavement portion or slab to another is segmented to
    allow limited pivotal movement of one portion with respect to another.


CLS 404/53
TXT Joint structure under subclass 47 wherein a load transmitting member
    extending from one pavement portion to another includes means spaning the
    space between said portions and underneath the ends of said portions.


CLS 404/54
TXT Underlying bridge structure under subclass 53 provided with other means
    also spanning the space between pavement portions and resting on an upper
    surface of said portions.


CLS 404/55
TXT Underlying bridge structure under subclass 53 made up of at least two
    L-shaped elements back to back in opposite orientation.


CLS 404/56
TXT Joint structure under subclass 47 wherein a load transmitting member,
    extending from one pavement portion to another, includes means spanning the
    space between said portion which means extend into said portions
    intermediate the top and bottom of said portions.


CLS 404/57
TXT Mid-slab bridge structure under subclass 56 wherein spacing means includes
    at least two elements in flat surface contact within the joint space and
    free to slip  with respect to each other.


CLS 404/58
TXT Sliding plate structure under subclass 57 wherein the flat surfaces in
    slipping contact are in a plane normal to the thickness of the pavement.


CLS 404/59
TXT Mid-slab bridge structure under subclass 56 wherein a load transmitting
    support structure includes (a) means for yieldably bearing against the end
    of a load transmitting bar or rod or (b) means for reducing friction
    incident to movement of said bar or rod by providing a grease-like coating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for sleeved, at joint, dowel structure.

    63,     for slide tube at dowel end.


CLS 404/60
TXT Mid-slab bridge structure under subclass 56 wherein a load transmitting
    component is either (1) provided with housing or bushing structure to
    facilitate slipping of said component under stress or (2) made up of at
    least two parts interfitted or socketed one to the other, both housing or
    interfitting located at or in the juncture of adjacent pavement portions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59,     for lubricated dowel structure.

    63,     for slide tube at dowel end.


CLS 404/61
TXT Mid-slab bridge structure under subclass 56 including either (1) a means
    that holds and positions the load transmitting member (a plate, rod, bar,
    etc.) at one side of a joint, usually within one slab, with or without
    midpoint spacer or parting strip means or (2) a spacer or parting strip
    located between slab ends constituting the sole means to hold and position
    the load transmitting member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for strip structure plus supporting bracket or stake.


CLS 404/62
TXT Mid-bridge structure under subclass 56 provided with means for positioning
    or holding the outer extremity, of the load transmitting member.


CLS 404/63
TXT Dowel end support structure under subclass 62 which includes a bushing or
    sleeve ("whistle") to facilitate relative slipping of the dowel under
    stress.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59,     for lubricated dowel structure.

    60,     for sleeved, at joint, dowel structure.


CLS 404/64
TXT Joint structure under subclass 47 limited solely to a precast, preshaped or
    precut component or components other than metal (e.g., rubber, wood,
    plastic, bituminous mixes, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 396.04 for a
    nonmetallic spacer in a building.


CLS 404/65
TXT Preformed nonmetallic joint structure under subclass 63 wherein a component
    insertable, or prepositioned, between slab ends has a particular outer
    configuration.

    (1)     Note.  "Bar", "board", "strip", etc. is not considered a
    configuration for this subclass and classification would be elsewhere on
    some other characteristic.


CLS 404/66
TXT Preformed nonmetallic joint structure under subclass 64 comprising two or
    more distant and dissimilar material either (a) one surrounding the other
    or (b) in a contiguous layers or lamina.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are components referred to as "parting strips".


CLS 404/67
TXT Joint structure under subclass 47 comprising at least two parallel
    attenuated distinct and dissimilar materials united to form the component
    between pavement portions.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are components referred to as "parting strips"
    when such component includes a metal element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for a compound or composite preformed module, per se.

    66,     for a compound or composite nonmetallic preformed joint component.


CLS 404/68
TXT Joint structure under subclass 47 wherein a filler board, division
    component or demarcation barrier is provided with a sustainer, positioning
    member or substrata engaging fastener.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, Subclass:

    87,     for a support insertable with the expansion joint.


CLS 404/69
TXT Joint structure under subclass 47 wherein the joint structure itself, or a
    supplementary means, extends the full width of the contiguous pavement
    portions and serves either to shield the joint against foreign material or
    to sustain elastomeric material in the upper part of the space between
    contiguous pavement portions.


CLS 404/70
TXT Pavement structure under subclass 17 characterized by the inclusion of a
    general coextensive grid or network of attenuated elements-bars, rods,
    mesh, expanded metal, etc. to strengthen the pavement structure against
    failure induced by bending, compressive or tensional stresses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for a preformed module, per se, including reinforcement means.
    This subclass must be searched for this feature.

    47+,    for pavement structure including joint means and see (2) note.

    100,    for apparatus for reinforcement material placing.

    134+,   for reinforcement structure, per se. This subclass must be searched
    for this feature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate
    subclasses-particularly subclasses 633+ for open-work and 720+ for
    elongated structure-suitable for embedding in settable material to form a
    composite structure which strengthens the whole; and see search notes
    thereunder for the loci of related structure.


CLS 404/71
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to road structure and
    not provided for in the preceeding subclasses.


CLS 404/72
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to a method, or mode or
    procedure, for making a road or road components not elsewhere classified.

    (1)     Note.  See reference to Class 264 under the class definition of
    Class 404.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 105 and 146 for measurement of
    the road profile.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for a process of, and apparatus for, bonding or
    laminating of general utility.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for in situ pavement or for
    heating material during processing.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 136+ for a method of coating a
    pavement.


CLS 404/73
TXT Process under subclass 72 including a step of manipulating, placing, or
    modifying a prefabricated road component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 62+ for
    devices used in hoisting modules.


CLS 404/74
TXT Process under subclass 72 including a step of making or modifying a seam or
    gap in a roadway to accommodate relative movement of the roadway structure.

    (1)     Note.  Such relative movement is generally either temperature or
    road induced.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for joint structure with transitory installation means.

    87,     for means to install or form a joint.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    125,    Stone Working, subclass 14 for cutting a joint in a set or hardened
    pavement.


CLS 404/75
TXT Process under subclass 72 including a step of modifying or working the
    ground, pavement or roadbed in place.

    (1)     Note.  In situ treatment does not encompass on location removal of
    earth or roadway material for processing- even though such processing is
    contiguous to the original locale.  Such removal is classified on other
    bases.  See search notes to Classes 37 and 172 under the class definition
    of Class 404.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90+,    for apparatus which comminutes the earth or road surface, in situ.

    95,     for apparatus for heating the earth or road surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 105 and 146 for measurement of
    the road profile.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 31+ for forming a structural installation in situ.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 258+ for earth
    stabilization, per se.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 136+ for methods of coating a
    pavement.


CLS 404/76
TXT In situ treatment under subclass 75 including a step of conglomerating or
    combining minute surface particles or earth components into larger
    aggregate units or into a relatively firm mass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     for appratus to comminute earth or roadway in situ.

    92,     for apparatus for in situ material preparation.

    95,     for apparatus for heating the earth or road surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 88.1 for dust conglomerating compositions.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 263+ for general
    subject matter relating to the stabilization of an earthen formation by
    addition of a foreign substance (e.g., binder) to the formation.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 136+ for a method for coating the
    earth.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Class 523, subclasses 132+ for a composition containing a
    synthetic resin and having utility in situ as a soil conditioner or
    stabilizer or to processes of preparing said composition.


CLS 404/77
TXT In situ treatment under subclass 75 including the application of external
    means to raise the temperature of the ground or pavement.

    (1)     Note.  Processes whereby heat is generated by internal chemical
    reaction are classified elsewhere on the bases of other process steps.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79+,    for processes involving heating steps no limited to in situ
    application.

    95,     for a means to heat earth or road surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses
    for drying paving material.

    110,    Furnaces, appropriate subclasses for specific heating means.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 271.2 and 343.5 for specific
    pavement heaters and melting devices, respectively.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 600+ for inductive heating, subclasses
    678+ for microwave heating, and subclasses 764+ for capacitive dielectric
    heating.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 131 for a general process
    or apparatus for applying heat to an earth formation.


CLS 404/78
TXT Process under subclass 75 including a step of elevating or a depressed
    portion of a roadway.


CLS 404/79
TXT Process under subclass 72 including the application of external means to
    raise the temperature of road building material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for processes of in situ road heating (and see notes thereunder).

    95,     for apparatus to heat earth or road surface.


CLS 404/80
TXT Heating process under subclass 79 with a step or steps for the distinct
    manipulation or treatment for each of two or more dimensionally varied road
    constituents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     for separate handling of different sized aggregate without the step
    of heating.


CLS 404/81
TXT Process under subclass 72 relating to a step or steps for the distinct
    manipulation or treatment for each of two or more dimensionally varied road
    constituents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     for separate handling of different sized aggregate with heating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses for structure used in classifying and sorting materials.


CLS 404/82
TXT Process under subclass 72 including the successive formation of two or more
    distinct and different lamina.

    (1)     Note.  See references under the class definition to Classes 264 and
    427 for processes of general utility relating to coating and molding of
    plural layers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    71 and 276 for layers using an adhesive.


CLS 404/83
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to devices, machines or
    tools for constructing, repairing or maintaining roads.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus for Class 404 is generally special purpose
    equipment. That is, general purpose devices equally useful for buildings or
    other static structures are usually not classified in Class 404.  See the
    search notes under the class definition of Class 404 for the locus of such
    devices.


CLS 404/84.05
TXT Automatic control:
    Device under subclass 83 including a condition responsive control
    comprising a means to sense a condition or change of condition of the
    device, road, or road material which sensing means activates another means
    to regulate or to control the device according to the condition sensed.

    (1)     Note.  The term "automatic control", alone, in a disclosure is not
    enough to effect classification in this subclass, unless, the disclosure
    relates to sensing and control means as indicated in the definition above.

    (2)     Note.  See search notes under Class 72, subclass 6; Class 83,
    subclass 399; Class 171, subclass 9; Class 172, subclass 2; and Class 173,
    subclass 2 for the loci of other automatic control" devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 105 and 146 for determining
    pavement flaws.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 2+ for automatic power control.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 840+ for vehicle body leveling devices.


CLS 404/84.1
TXT Of material leveling means:
    Automatic control under subclass 84.05 wherein the sensor causes adjustment
    of a screeding or smoothing device.


CLS 404/84.2
TXT Adjusted to a predetermined path:
    Automatic adjustment of leveling means under subclass 84.1 in which the
    adjustment is made to track a physical guide, e.g., wire, rope, string.


CLS 404/84.5
TXT Adjusted to an acoustical or optical signal:
    Automatic adjustment of leveling means under subclass 84.1 wherein the
    adjustment is made to track an acoustical or optical signal, e.g., laser.


CLS 404/84.8
TXT Specific to a sloped or curved application:
    Automatic adjustment of leveling means under subclass 84.1 wherein the
    adjustment is made to create an inclined finished surface or a finished
    surface defined by a radius.


CLS 404/85
TXT Device under subclass 83 wherein a ground wheel (or wheel substitute such
    as a skid or runner) is so arranged that when said wheel is positioned to
    serve as a vehicular element, the road working tool does not contact the
    ground; and conversely, when said tool is operative with respect to the
    ground the wheel is inoperative as a vehicular element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 240 for similar structure and see notes
    thereunder for other loci.


CLS 404/86
TXT Device under subclass 85 wherein the road working instrumentality is
    fastened or mounted on an otherwise operative, but diverse, device such as
    a dump truck, scraper, tractor, etc., which other device serves only for
    traction purposes when said instrumentality is in road working position.


CLS 404/87
TXT Device under subclass 83 for constructing or cutting a seam or gap in a
    roadway to accommodate relative movement of the roadway and to assemble
    filler or parting strip structure in such gap.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for joint structure with transitory installation means.

    74,     for process of making a joint.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    125,    Stone Working, subclass 14 for cutting a joint in a stone-like
    material.

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 9 for joint forming mold.  See line between
    Classes 249 and 404 in Search Class Note thereunder.


CLS 404/88
TXT Device under subclass 87 including means to support load transfer structure
    extending from one pavement to another across the joint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for joint structure, per se, including load transfer means with
    dowel support, e.g., road chair; and

    100,    for positioning reinforcement means.

    136,    for road chair, per se.


CLS 404/89
TXT Device under subclass 87 for providing a slot or channel in road material
    prior to the setting or hardening or such material.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are devices which also insert material or
    joint structure into such slot after, or as, the slot is formed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93,     for apparatus to mark or groove plastic or uncured road material
    which does not form a joint as defined in subclass 87.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 235.3 for a
    motor-joint finisher, groover or simulater of general utility.  Class 15
    provides for a hand implement, Class 404 provides for more complex
    machine-like devices.


CLS 404/90
TXT With in situ means for both comminuting and treating; e.g., grading,
    oiling, stabilizing:

    Device under subclass 83 for cutting, scarifying or disintegrating the
    pavement plus structure; e.g., drag, tamper, roller, liquid dispenser to
    level, smooth or bind the pieces of the underlying surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76,     for process of in situ treatment of earth or roadway.

    92,     for means to work material placed on the earth or roadway.

    241,    Solid Material comminution or Disintergration, subclass 101.7
    having ambulatory support but the material is still brought to the
    comminuting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 381+ for scraping or grading a roadbed and
    see note thereunder for other loci in Class 37.

    125,    Stone Working, subclass 14 for cutting into a stone-like material.

    172,    Earth Working, appropriate subclasses, for apparatus for and
    process of working the earth in situ.  See note to Class 172 under III B of
    Class 404 class definition.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, appropriate subclasses for process
    or apparatus forming holes or enlarging holes in the earth by
    disintegrating, cutting, chipping, etc.  Generally, this dislocating
    relates to forming or enlarging a hole.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintergration, subclass 101.7
    having ambulatory support but the material is still brought to the
    comminuting means.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintergration of Hard Material, appropriate
    subclasses for breaking up of a roadway or earth crust, per se.


CLS 404/91
TXT Comminuting device under subclass 90 with means to collect the products of
    comminution and, after some treatment or further preparation, return the
    material to the road surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 179 for a pipe or cable
    laying apparatus having means to excavate a trench and redeposit the
    excavated material after the pipe or cable has been layed.


CLS 404/92
TXT Device under subclass 83 including means which act on or treat road
    building material lying on the road or right of way.

    (1)     Note.  "Material preparation" means does not include compacting or
    surface finishing means, for which see subclasses below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75+,    for process of in situ treatment of earth or roadway.

    90+,    for apparatus to comminute earth or road, in situ.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for specific structure for
    dispensing.

    366,    Agitating, appropriate subclasses for specific means for mixing
    material in a hopper or for directly agitating material.


CLS 404/93
TXT Device under subclass 83 for making a visual indicia in or on top of the
    pavement.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this and the indented subclass are grooving
    machines.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89,     for appropriate devices to form a joint in a roadway.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 235.3 for an
    implement for grooving plastic or uncured road material.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses, for apparatus for
    surface coating.  The combination of a means to coat with other means for
    in situ treatment of the earth or roadway is classifiable in Class 404.


CLS 404/94
TXT Surface marking device under subclass 93 wherein the indicia is made on or
    affixed to a firm or usable roadway as distinct from a plastic or unstable
    intermediate structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90,     for pavement grinding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    575, 577, and 578 for applying adhesive to an article or strip.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses, for specific structure
    to dispense an article.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, appropriate subclasses for
    a hand propelled device which applies a film or coating, to a surface and
    where the applicator or tool either (a) contacts the surface or (b) is no
    further removed from said surface than the film or coating thickness.  With
    respect to (b) it must be noted that a dumping device which then spreads or
    levels road material into a window-like formation or significant stratum of
    roadway is not considered a "coating" device for Class 401.


CLS 404/95
TXT Device under subclass 83 including means for applying heat, directly or
    indirectly, to the road base, roadway or material thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for processes of in situ heating the ground or roadway (and see
    notes thereunder).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 271.2 for pavement heaters and 343.5
    for melting other than snow.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 146.1 and 146.2 for a road material hopper
    with heating means.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 131 for apparatus in
    general for applying heat to an earth formation.


CLS 404/96
TXT Device under subclass 83 providing the road, or road portion, with a
    surface configuration, which configuration is other than the straight line
    made by a strike board or screed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118+,   for screed or drag means to level or strike road material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 1+ for in situ molds for roadways and
    roadway portion not combined with means to work or treat the earth.


CLS 404/97
TXT Profile shaping device under subclass 96 either hand held and guided or
    hand traversed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 235.3+ for
    manually guided profile shapers.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 458 for manually guided, substrate traversing shapers.


CLS 404/98
TXT Profile shaping device under subclass 96 configured to shape a raised edge
    of a road or a drainage path in a road.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 218 for female mold and shaping means.


CLS 404/99
TXT Device under subclass 83 for manipulating, placing or setting prefabricated
    road modules or components.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73,     for process of handling or treating preformed modular units.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 749.1 for bricklaying
    machines of general application.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 62+ for brick
    carriers.


CLS 404/100
TXT Device under subclass 83 for assembling or juxtaposing the bars, wires or
    mesh intended to strengthen the road against stress failure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for reinforced road structure combined with a pavement.

    88,     for means to position a dowel.

    134+,   for road reinforcement, per se.


CLS 404/101
TXT Device under subclass 83 for spreading, paving or sub-paving substance over
    the desired road area.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, appropriate subclasses
    for apparatus to disseminate material.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses, for process and apparatus for
    disseminating material.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 128+ for
    heating means combined with distributing apparatus and subclasses 146+ for
    merely spreading or distributing tar or asphalt or other liquid or a road
    or pavement.


CLS 404/102
TXT Material distribution device under subclass 101 wherein the spreading means
    is provided with means producing an additional active motion component
    serving to more firmly densify or pack down the substance being spread.

    (1)     Note.  The dynamic means of this subclass includes vibration means
    (for which see subclass 102 and notes thereunder) as well as rotary and
    recipricatory means, except that reciprocal or back and forth movement of
    screed (in a direction transverse to the extent of a roadway along which
    said screed is advanced) is not considered either "agitation" or "dynamic"
    for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113+,   120 and 133, for other devices that utilize means with active
    motion components to compress or pack down road material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 170+ for a tool of that class which is
    diverse and includes a smooth, leveling roller.


CLS 404/103
TXT Dynamic densifying device under subclass 102 of the rotating drum type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for other rotating-drum type compacting means with vibratory or
    impact features.

    122+,   for rotating-drum type compacting means without vibratory features
    (and see search notes thereunder).


CLS 404/104
TXT Material distribution device under subclass 101 particularly adapted for
    working the supporting flank of a roadway or extension portion at the side
    of a roadway.

    (1)     Note.  The means in this subclass provides some device modification
    relevant to working a road shoulder. In this instance, mere naming of the
    road area for intended use, without such modification, should be ignored
    for classification purposes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for slope, trench or shoulder roller means.


CLS 404/105
TXT Material distribution device under subclass 101 including storage means for
    paving material for delivery to transitory mold components along the road
    flanks which components are shiftable as the material distribution device
    advances.

    (1)     Note.  The device is advanced at a rate allowing for sufficient
    curing or set-up, of the distributed matter, as to retain the shape
    imparted by the transitory mold forms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     for apparatus for profile shaping with material supply means (and
    see search notes thereunder).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 63+ for progressive molding for a building.


CLS 404/106
TXT Material distribution device under subclass 101 including storage means for
    paving material for delivery to mold components along the road flanks,
    which mold components also serve as a supporting and guiding traceway for
    the entire device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     for apparatus for profile shaping with material supply means (and
    see search notes thereunder).

    119,    for screed or drag means supported on rail-type side forms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 64 for progressive molding for a building including charging means.


CLS 404/107
TXT Material distribution device under subclass 101 adapted for a distribution
    to a limited road portion, usually a seam, break or the space between
    contiguous road portions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses, for apparatus and process of
    dispensing of general utility and particularly subclasses 146.1+ for
    dispensing combined with heating or material being dispensed; also see
    section 14 under class definition for loci of art relating to dispensing
    and shaping by extrusion.


CLS 404/108
TXT Material distribution device under subclass 101 with storage means to
    provide a source of paving or road building material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     for profile shaping apparatus with material supply means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power Driven, appropriate subclasses for structure used
    to move material within a paver.

    298,    Land Vehicles:  Dumping, subclasses 24+ for a hopper type vehicle
    for unloading material.


CLS 404/109
TXT Material supply device under subclass 108 utilizing a hopper reciprocable
    along a pivotally mounted supporting beam.


CLS 404/110
TXT Material supply device under subclass 108 utilizing a hopper with a
    controlled bottom discharge, which is readily movable over the road area,
    to distribute material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for structure for discharging
    material.


CLS 404/111
TXT Material supply devices under subclass 108 wherein the material is in fluid
     but nongaseous, form.

    (1)     Note.  Powdered or aggregate material which is capable of handling
    as a fluent material is not considered as a "liquid" for this subclass; and
    is classifiable on other characteristics.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 146+, for
    merely spreading or distributing tar, asphalt or other liquid; and
    subclasses 128+, for heating means combined with the distributing
    apparatus.  Class 404 takes liquid distribution devices which includes
    other road treatment or the distribution of other than liquid material;
    e.g., combined distribution or road aggregate and tar.


CLS 404/112
TXT Device under subclass 83 wherein an earth or road working member moves in,
    and substantially on, the plane of the earth or roadway in a circular path.

    (1)     Note.  The working may include compacting or surface finishing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, subclass 353 for a floor surfacing rotary disk apparatus.


CLS 404/113
TXT Device under subclass 83 which shakes, or briskly moves, road material.

    (1)     Note.  The reciprocal or back and forth, movement of a screed (in a
    direction transverse to the extent of a roadway along which said screed is
    advanced) is not considered agitation for this subclass.  See subclasses
    119+, for such screed devices.

    (2)     Notes.  Repeated impacts or tamping blows substantially normal to
    and on the surface of road material is also not considered to be agitation
    for this subclass.  See subclass 133.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 1+ for concrete and bituminous mixers
    including heating and discharging means not peculiar or restricted to road
    building.


CLS 404/114
TXT Agitating device under subclass 113 with shaking or vibratory means
    fastened directly to the leveling or striker member that is drawn across
    the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118+,   for screed or drag means without additional agitating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 456 for a vibrating shaper.


CLS 404/115
TXT Agitating device under subclass 113 wherein the element for agitating the
    mass of material is substantially within or below the surface of said
    material.

    (1)     Note.  The vibrating mechanism itself may be anywhere, but the
    material contacting element is well within the mass of material.


CLS 404/116
TXT Immersed agitating device under subclass 115 wherein the immersed agitating
    element maintains a generally normal or perpendicular-like attitude
    respecting the earth or road surface.


CLS 404/117
TXT Agitating device under subclass 113 wherein the upper material surface is
    acted on by a rotary drum or cylinder which drum or cylinder includes means
    to jar or shake said drum while compacting the material surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for roller device with dynamic means to densify material while
    distributing said material.

    122+,   for roller device without agitating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 61 and 87 for specific
    vibrating structure.

    81,     Tools, subclasses 463+ for tools with impact-delivery means and see
    search notes thereunder for similar devices elsewhere classified.

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 40 for a vibrating tool.  See search note
    to Class 172 under class definition of Class 404.


CLS 404/118
TXT Device under subclass 83 comprising a bar, beam or striker means to level
    or smooth previously laid road material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96+,    for a contoured striker means which imparts a profile to the road.

    114+,   for screed means combined with a material agitating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 780 and 799.5 for a leveling device not
    specific to road building.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 218 for female mold and shaping means.


CLS 404/119
TXT Screed device under subclass 118 wherein the entire device is positioned
    and guided above a roadway by the side forms which also serve as a trackway.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    for material supply means supported on rail-type side forms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 218 for female mold and shaping means.


CLS 404/120
TXT Screed device under subclass 118 provided with means to move said screed
    back and forth along its extent while traversing the material.

    (1)     Note.  A significant number of the devices in subclass 119 relate
    to reciprocating screed devices and a complete search for this
    characteristic must include subclass 119.  Other than a few representative
    copies no patents have been cross-referenced from subclasses 119 to 120.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for a material distribution device with a reciprocating screed.

    114,    for an agitator fastened on a screed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 456 for vibrating shapers.


CLS 404/121
TXT Device under subclass 83 for working the earth or road material by rotating
    radially extending lugs or projections (generally blunt or flat shaped) on
    and into the material surface so that such lugs or projections move into
    and out of the material.

    (1)     Note.  This device is generally used to compact the material.

    (2)     Note.  Included here are devices specific to the details of the
    "sheep foot", per se.

    (3)     Note.  See search note to Class 172 under the class definition of
    Class 404.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 540+ for a rolling tool with
    circumferentially speed teeth or tines.


CLS 404/122
TXT Device under subclass 83 for working the earth or road material with one or
    more cylindrical members, which members roll across the material.

    (1)     Note.  This device is generally used to compact or "finish" the
    material.

    (2)     Note.  See search note to Class 172 under class definition of Class
    404.

    (3)     Note.  Included here are plural roller element which can shift
    bodily (that is, a translation of their axes) normal or substantially
    normal to the material surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for a material distribution device including a roller with dynamic
    means to compact material.

    117,    for an agitating device including a roller with vibrating or impact
    means.

    121,    for sheep foot roller means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 20 for a motor vehicle provided with one
    or more rollers for moving the vehicle.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 404/123
TXT Roller device under subclass 122 wherein a trio of rollers, with generally
    parallel axes, are arranged one behind the other.


CLS 404/124
TXT Roller device under subclass 122 including specific features of the outer
    drum-like surface, e.g., perforated, corrugated, toothed, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121,    for sheep foot rollers and details of the "sheep foot".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 537 for a corrugated surface roller and
    subclass 539 for a smooth roller with a groove.


CLS 404/125
TXT Roller device under subclass 122 including two or more rolls mounted to
    rotate in substantial axial alignment but capable of adjustment so as to
    vary from in-line (generally horizontal) relationship of the individual
    axes of rotation to an angular relationship with respect to each other and
    the horizontal.


CLS 404/126
TXT Roller device under subclass 122 including two or more rolls mounted to
    rotate in substantial axial alignment but capable of adjustment so as to
    vary from in-line relationship of individual axes to either spaced
    parallel, or angular, relationship in the same general horizontal plane.


CLS 404/127
TXT Roller device under subclass 122 designed to work the flanks or inclined
    portions of the road-way.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for material-distribution means for shoulder paving.


CLS 404/128
TXT Roller device under subclass 122 constituting either (a) an auxiliary or
    subsidiary means appended to a disparate type of apparatus or (b) part of a
    composite means made up of a roller device and a disparate device.

    (1)     Note.  The disparate apparatus or device may be of the type
    elsewhere provided for either in class 404 or some other class.


CLS 404/129
TXT Roller device under subclass 122 including means to care for or protect the
    roller periphery by providing a transient fluid coating or by removal of
    foreign material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 606 for earth working devices combined with
    means to clean or scrape.


CLS 404/130
TXT Roller device under subclass 122 provided with either (a) means to vary the
    effective weight of the roller on the surface or (b) allow the effective
    weight of the roller to shift according to roller position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 611 for earth working devices with weight
    means.


CLS 404/131
TXT Roller device under subclass 122 provided with means whereby an operator
    physically moves the roller across the roadway.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 329+ for a device guided and propelled by
    a walking attendant.


CLS 404/132
TXT Roller device under subclass 122 including two or more rolls constrained to
    single axis relationship.


CLS 404/133.05
TXT Tamper:
    Device under subclass 83 for imparting distinct blows or impacts to the
    road surface or road material.

    (1)     Note.  Rapid back and forth agitation (a) not substantially normal
    to the surface of road material or (b) by means immersed or submerged in
    the road material, is considered to be agitation (for which, see subclasses
    113+) or finishing (for which, see subclass 118) when such agitation is
    combined with means peculiar or restricted to road building.  See search
    note to Class 366 under subclass 113.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for a roller device with densifying and distributing means.

    117,    for a roller device with vibrating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 463+ for tools with impact delivery means and see
    search notes thereunder for similar devices elsewhere classified.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, appropriate subclasses for details of
    means to drive or deliver a blow to a tool.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 135 for means to impact
    in earth penetrating means.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 271 for residual methods
    or apparatus for compacting an earth formation (e.g., compaction of the
    earth within a bore or channel).

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 425+ for a female mold including tamping means and subclass 456
    for a shaper including powered virbrating means.


CLS 404/133.1
TXT Manually guided:
    Tamper under subclass 133 specifically adapted to be either hand held or
    hand traversed.


CLS 404/133.2
TXT Attached to a disparate device:
    Tamper under subclass 133 which is attached or attachable to an apparatus
    whose function is other than tamping (e.g., a backhoe or crane).


CLS 404/134
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising a grid or network of
    attenuated elements, bars, rods, mesh, expanded metal, etc., intended to
    strengthen road structure against failure induced by load and environment
    stresses.

    (1)     Note.  Reinforcement structure which bridges the gap or space
    between adjacent pavement portions is considered as joint structure for
    subclass 47.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for reinforced preformed module structure.

    47+,    for joint structure with load transfer components.

    70,     for reinforced pavement structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclasses 633+, for openwork and 720.1+ for elongated
    structure suitable for reinforcement use; and see the search notes
    thereunder for the loci of related structure.


CLS 404/135
TXT Reinforcement structure under subclass 134 including means to hold and
    position the reinforcement structure relative to the material it is
    intended to strengthen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62+,    for joint structure including load transfer means with a road
    chair, and

    136,    for road chair structure, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 677+, for a spacer
    positioner of general utility.


CLS 404/136
TXT Subject matter under the class definition relating to means to hold and
    position a road component relative to another road component.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 135 and search notes thereunder.


CLS 405/
TTL HYDRAULIC AND EARTH  ENGINEERING

CLS 405/
TXT This class provides for subject matter relating to the following when not
    provided for elsewhere:



    (1)     The control or treatment of water in open channels, naturally or
    artificially occurring bodies of water, or of water otherwise lying on the
    earth's surface.

    (2)     The control or treatment of earth material is situ, and the
    securement or stabilization of structures in the earth.

    (3)     Storage of fluid in underground cavities and disposal of waste in
    the earth.

    (4)     Tunnel construction or pipe or cable laying or retrieving.

    (5)     Apparatus and methods by which underwater work operations may be
    performed.

    (6)     Apparatus and methods for launching a marine vessel into or
    removing it from a body of water, transportation of a vessel across dry
    land, or exposing a normally wetted surface, e.g., a vessel's hull, to the
    atmosphere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    14,     Bridges, subclasses 75 and 77.3 for piers including structure
    peculiar to bridge construction.  Class 405 provides for piers or piles of
    general application and methods and apparatus for installing or
    constructing the same in situ.

    29,     Metal Working, for processes and apparatus for mechanical
    manufacture, repair or disassembly.  As between Class 405 and Class 29, an
    assembling, disassembling, or repair method or apparatus, when restricted
    to a marine environment or claimed in combination with an earth treating or
    handling step or means, is proper for Class 405 unless provided for
    elsewhere.  For example, assembly or tunnel lining panels, per se, will be
    found in Class 29, and Class 405 provides for an additional excavating step
    or means or a step or means for applying the panels to the earth.  The
    assembly or disassembly of pipe or cable is provided for in Class 405 when
    a step or means is recited for handling earth material, or for submerging
    or handling the pipe or cable beneath the surface of a body of water.

    37,     Excavating, appropriate subclasses for digging, removing, and
    handling of excavated material, per se, including hydraulic dredging.
    Class 405 provides for specialized excavating combined with an additional
    nonexcavating step or means (e.g., tunneling, pipe, and cable laying, etc.).

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses
    foundations having additional means which render the foundation peculiar to
    the support of a particular Class 52 structure (e.g., wall, shaft, etc.),
    and subclass 155 for piercing or expanding earth anchors. Class 405 takes
    methods of securing earth anchors or bolts in the earth when the character
    of the surrounding earth is altered Class 405 also provides for a Class 52
    structure recited in a marine environment (i.e., secured to a marine bed).

    114,    Ships, appropriate subclasses for floating or submerged storage
    vessels, floating harbors, landing areas, boat docks, etc., which are
    moored or anchored to the earth by a flaccid connecting member, and
    subclasses 312+ for submarine vessels without specific means for performing
    an underwater work operation, other than equipment necessary to effect
    docking with another active vessel.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 236.1 for fluid handling systems including
    or particularly related to some geographic feature (e.g., hill, river,
    ocean, etc.); and subclasses 544+ for means for separating material from a
    fluid mixture in a tank.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 97+ for a process or
    apparatus for repairing conduits.  This class (405) provides for methods
    and apparatus for raising a line of pipe or cable from the floor (subclass
    173) and apparatus and methods by which personnel may gain access to a
    submerged pipeline to repair the same.

    166,    Wells, for processes and apparatus relating to shafts or deep
    boring in the earth for the extraction of fluids therefrom.  Class 405 is
    generic with respect to Class 166 regarding earth treatment and handling,
    i.e., Class 166 takes earth treating and handling methods and apparatus
    peculiar to wells and the formation thereof.  Offshore drilling platforms
    and apparatus for repairing or assembling submerged pipeline to a submerged
    well are classified in Class 405 unless significant well structure is
    recited.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, appropriate subclasses for
    processes and apparatus for forming a bore in the earth for the reception
    of a structure. See the class definition, sections IV and V of Class 175
    for the line between Class 405 and Class 175.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses for means
    for separating water and foreign matter, particularly subclasses 154+ for
    flume screens.  Class 405 provides for apparatus and methods for containing
    the spread of a floatable material in a canal or body of water, and for
    structures which effect the setting of suspended matter in a canal or body
    of water by retarding the flow and allowing the material to settle by
    gravity.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses
    for terminal elements, per se, which discharge or project a fluid, and see
    the search note to Class 405 in the Class 239 main definition under section
    III regarding irrigation systems and devices.

    249,    Static Molds, appropriate subclasses for molds for forming
    hydraulic and earth control structures in situ and which are not combined
    with earthworking or treating means, and which do not become a permanent
    part of the structure.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses for a method of casting a hydraulic or earth-control
    structure, per se, without an earthworking or treating step.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, appropriate
    subclasses for a process or apparatus for recovering valuable material from
    the earth or disintegrating hard material in situ.  See section V of the
    class definition of Class 299 for the line.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    methods and apparatus for treating or otherwise working with the earth when
    limited to the making, installing, repairing, or maintaining of a highway,
    pathway, or walkway structure.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    appropriate subclasses for apparatus which include a molding surface which
    shapes a fluent or bulk material, particularly subclass 59 wherein a
    portion of the earth below the surface is employed as part of the molding
    surface.  Class 405 provides for the combination of molding and
    earthworking or treating means.

    507,    Earth Boring, Well Treating, and Oil Field Chemistry, subclasses
    100+ for earth boring and well treating compositions.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Class 523, subclasses 132+ for a composition containing a
    synthetic resin or natural rubber and having utility in situ as a soil
    conditioner or stabilizer or to processes of preparing said composition.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    249+ for earth burial of hazardous or toxic waste.


CLS 405/1
TXT MARINE VESSEL PORTAGE, LAUNCHING, OR REMOVING:

    Method or apparatus under the class definition (a) for introducing a vessel
    into or removing it from a body of water or for transporting the vessel
    across a body of land by means resting on or built into the earth, (b) for
    constructing an artificial vessel basin which is capable of having all the
    water removed therefrom, or (c) for subcombinations peculiar to such basins
    which are not provided for elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 61 for a vessel launching means or dry dock combined with a
    shaping or treating means of that class (425).


CLS 405/2
TXT Rail mounted carrier:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 1 wherein the vessel is transported
    across land or introduced into or removed from a body of water by a wheeled
    carriage which is supported by and moves along a trackway.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclass 375 for apparatus in the form of chutes on tracks
    for launching life craft from a ship.


CLS 405/3
TXT Lifting:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 1 wherein the vessel is raised or
    lowered in a substantially vertical manner.

    (1)     Note.  For placement in this subclass, the vessel should not be
    required to undergo any significant horizontal movement during the lifting
    or lowering operation, accordingly, the inclined plane type of launching
    structure will not be found herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86,     for subject matter relating to the lifting of a vessel in a canal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    212,    Traversing Hoists, appropriate subclasses for simple hoisting
    apparatus having means to raising a boat and shifting it horizontally.


CLS 405/4
TXT Dry dock:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 1 (a) for exposing the hull of a vessel
    to the atmosphere by placing the vessel into an artificial basin formed in
    or on the earth, which basin is capable of having substantially all the
    water removed therefrom, (b) for constructing such a basin, or (c) for
    subcombinations peculiar thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclasses 45+ for floating dry docks.


CLS 405/5
TXT Fabrication:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 4 for constructing an artificial basin
    into which the vessel to be removed from the water will be placed.


CLS 405/6
TXT Gate:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 4 for sealing the entrance into the
    basin through which the vessel passes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85+,    for locks associated with navigable canals.

    87+,    for water gates associated with other open topped waterways.


CLS 405/7
TXT Vessel support (e.g., bilge or keel block):
    Method or apparatus under subclass 4 wherein means are provided to bear the
    weight or to prevent tilting of a vessel when the water is withdrawn from
    the basin.


CLS 405/8
TXT PRESSURIZED CAISSON:

    Method or apparatus under the class definition relating to an open bottomed
    work chamber which is adapted to be placed below the surface of a body of
    water or the earth, which, while in place, has a portion which extends
    above said surface to allow access to the chamber and which is supplied
    with a compressed gas to elevate the pressure therein to prevent the
    ingress of flowable material.

    (1)     Note.  Diving bells are not found herein since they do not have a
    portion, e.g., a shaft extending above the surface of a body of water
    within which the bell is immersed, which portion allows workmen access to
    the interior of the bell.

    (2)     Note.  The caissons found herein provide a work chamber within
    which men operate while located below the surface of the earth or water,
    which chamber is pressurized while the men are therein to prevent the
    ingress of flowable material, e.g., water, muck, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193,    for diving apparatus which are pressurized to prevent ingress of
    water through an opening, but with no continuous access to the water
    surface.

    194,    for unpressurized diving apparatus having a continuous surface
    access.


CLS 405/9
TXT Having lifting cable:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 8 wherein a flexible, strandlike member
    is provided to move material between the submerged or below-ground working
    chamber and the surface.


CLS 405/10
TXT Movable relative to mobile support:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 8 wherein the caisson is mounted on and
    shiftable relative to an ambulant carrier.


CLS 405/11
TXT MEANS TO EXPOSE A NORMALLY WETTED SURFACE, E. G., COFFERDAM, ETC.:

    Method or apparatus under the class definition wherein means are provided
    to form a temporary removable enclosure about a portion of a submerged
    surface so that the water contained within the enclosure means can be
    evacuated to thereby expose the surface portion to the air.

    (1)     Note.  The type of structures to be found herein are removed once
    work on the submerged surface is completed. Thus, those caissons or
    cofferdams which physically become part of and are inseparable from a
    structure formed within such caissons or cofferdams will not be found in
    this or the indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  While the enclosing means found herein are usually used to
    expose a portion of a sea, lake, or river bed, those devices which are used
    to expose portion of a ship's hull or sea wall, so that work can be
    performed thereon will also be found herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222,    for foundations for marine structures wherein the enclosures used
    in casting the foundation become an integral part of the finished structure.


CLS 405/12
TXT Contoured to wetted surface, e.g., side hung ship caisson:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 11 wherein the enclosure means is
    provided with a specially configured face which coacts with an object
    having a complementary profile to effect a fluid tight seal therebetween.


CLS 405/13
TXT Having transport, placement, or dislodgement means:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 11 wherein means are provided (a) to
    move the enclosing means from one location to another, or (b) to effect
    either installation of an already formed enclosing means at the site at
    which it is to be used or its removal therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203,    for marine structures (i.e., working platform) which are floated to
    a work site.


CLS 405/14
TXT Connectable sections:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 11 wherein the enclosure means is
    composed of a plurality of segments having means which allow the segments
    to be readily joined together to form the enclosure.

    (1)     Note.  Sheet piling, per se, and methods of installing sheet piles
    to form a wall will not be found herein unless there is either specific
    structure limiting the pile to be used in water or a specific step of
    forming a cofferdam in an aquatic environment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    274+,   for sheet piles either used for form retaining walls or which are
    of general utility.


CLS 405/15
TXT BANK, SHORE, OR BED PROTECTION:

    Method or apparatus under the class definition pertaining to the
    preservation of shorelines or other areas subject to the erosive influence
    of water.

    (1)     Note.  Lining of canals, channels, etc., is considered to be
    impermeablization and patents relating to the same will be found in
    appropriate subclasses under EARTH TREATMENT AND CONTROL.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73,     for apparatus for or methods of creating or deepening a channel by
    concentrating a natural current.

    263+    and 270, for subject matter relating to an impermeable lining for a
    canal, channel, etc.


CLS 405/16
TXT Revetment:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 15 wherein erosion of a bank or shore is
    prevented by an object or material resting or and supported by the bank or
    shore and which is substantially co-extensive with the area that is subject
    to erosion.

    (1)     Note.  Whether a wall-like structure is a revetment or a retaining
    wall is determined solely by its support relationship to the earth.  If the
    earth is supported by the structure, then the structure is considered to be
    a retaining wall.  In those instances where the structure rests upon and
    covers the earth which is subject to erosion, it is a revetment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262     and 284+, for retaining walls.


CLS 405/17
TXT Revetment laying:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 16 for forming a revetment at the
    location in which it is to be used or the application of a revetment to the
    site of its intended usage.


CLS 405/18
TXT Continuous concrete or concrete filled bag: Apparatus under subclass 16
    wherein the object or material is in the form of an uninterrupted layer of
    cement or asphalt concrete or is in the form of a pliant receptacle which
    is filled with such material.


CLS 405/19
TXT Mattress:

    Apparatus under subclass 16 wherein the revetment includes a pliant member
    which allows the revetment, when laid, to conform to the surface being
    protected.


CLS 405/20
TXT Hinged concrete sections:

    Apparatus under subclass 19 wherein the mattress is a plurality of cement
    or asphalt concrete segments which are flexible interconnected.


CLS 405/21
TXT Wave to flow dissipation:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 15 wherein the kinetic energy of the
    water is controlled or selectively released or redirected.

    (1)     Note.  In order to be classified as an original in this and
    indented subclasses, patents relating to a vertical wall at the water-land
    interface (e.g., sea wall) must claim a step or means for wave or flow
    dissipation.  In the absence of wave or flow dissipating structure a patent
    claiming an earth-retaining sea wall or similar structure will be placed in
    subclass 262 or subclasses 284+.


CLS 405/22
TXT Fluid application:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 21 pertaining to contacting the water
    with a fluid such as air or oil to perform the dissipating function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for subject matter relating to the application of fluids for
    preventing ice formation.

    62,     for subject matter relating to the control of floating matter other
    than ice by fluid application.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclass 34 for buoys provided
    with means for distributing oil on the surface of waves.


CLS 405/23
TXT Floatable dissipator submerged at site:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 21 in which a wave or flow dissipating
    structure is floated to the site at which it is to be used and then sunk to
    assume its dissipating orientation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26+,    for wave dissipation structures which are floated to a site and
    continue to float in their operative position.

    203+,   for other marine structures which are floated to the site of use
    and sunk.


CLS 405/24
TXT Artificial seaweed:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 21 relating to a structure in the form
    of a plurality of upstanding elongate members anchored to the bed of an
    active body of water, which members flex in response to movement of the
    water.


CLS 405/25
TXT Bed supported subsurface dissipator:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 21 wherein wave or flow dissipation is
    effected by a structure which is mounted or resting on the bed of an active
    body of water and is completely beneath the surface of the water at all
    times.


CLS 405/26
TXT Floating:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 21 wherein wave or flow dissipation is
    effected by a member which is wholly supported by its buoyancy.

    (1)     Note.  Structures in this and indented subclasses may be anchored
    at a location and may even be anchored with rigid pilelike anchors as long
    as the anchor does not provide structural support for the dissipator.


CLS 405/27
TXT Openwork:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 26 wherein the floating dissipator is
    either perforated or is composed of a plurality of spaced apart structural
    elements and the water's energy is dissipated by flowing through the
    floating device.


CLS 405/28
TXT Flexibly suspended from or pivoted to support:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 21 wherein wave or flow dissipation is
    effected by a member which either flexibly depends from or is swingably
    attached to one or more stationary supports.

    (1)     Note.  Suspended or pivoted structures carried by a floating
    support will not be found in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26+,    for structures suspended from or pivoted to a floating support.


CLS 405/29
TXT Polypod:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 21 wherein wave or flow dissipation is
    effected by a structure which includes three or more legs or feet
    symmetrically radiating from a common center or body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 596+ for stonelike
    modules for building static structures.


CLS 405/30
TXT Openwork or concave face:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 21 relating to a structure which
    includes (a) a portion which dissipates wave or flow by allowing the water
    to flow therethrough, or (b) a groovelike depression on its wave or flow
    dissipation surface.


CLS 405/31
TXT Associated with solid wall:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 30 wherein the structure includes an
    impervious wall in combination with an openwork dissipation structure or a
    concave face.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262     and 284+, for an earth-retaining wall located at a land-water
    interface (e.g., sea wall) and without any specific wave dissipation
    features.


CLS 405/32
TXT With fabric:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 30 wherein the openwork portion of the
    dissipation structure is in the form of a textilelike structure, formed by
    the joining or intertwining of discrete intersecting strandlike structures.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes trees and branches (e.g., facines)
    placed in a body of water to dissipate flow.


CLS 405/33
TXT Interfitted or interleaved members:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 30 wherein the wave or flow dissipating
    structure includes (a) a plurality of members each of which has a
    particular configuration permitting interlocking or nesting in abutting
    fashion with an adjacent member, or (b) a plurality of staggered strata
    each of which is composed of a plurality of spaced apart members, the
    members of one stratum bridging the spaces in a juxtaposed stratum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273,    for interlocking or interleaved cribbing of general utility.


CLS 405/34
TXT Jetty:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 30 wherein the wave or flow is
    dissipated by a permeable structure extending outwardly from the shore into
    the body of water.


CLS 405/35
TXT Spaced members:

    Method and apparatus under subclass 30 wherein a plurality of elements are
    joined together in spaced array to form a unitary flow dissipating
    structure.


CLS 405/36
TXT DRAINAGE OR IRRIGATION:

    Method or apparatus under the class definition including a step or means
    for either (a) collecting and removing surplus water from the soil, (b)
    applying water to the soil for agricultural purposes, or (c) the
    installation of apparatus for collecting and removing water from the soil
    or applying water to the soil.

    (1)     Note.  For original placement in this and indented subclasses, a
    claim to a channel or ditch must include structure specific to irrigation
    or drainage, e.g., a drainage inlet or irrigation outlet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118,    for open channels with no irrigation outlet or drainage inlet.

    119+,   for open channels, above-ground fluid carriers (flumes) with no
    irrigation features (apertures, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 1.01 for installed irrigation systems
    having means to supply fertilizer to the irrigating water.

    166,    Wells, appropriate subclasses for methods and apparatus relating to
    wells for recovering fluids from the earth.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses
    for pressurized irrigating systems with above-ground terminal outlets
    (e.g., nozzles).

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 2+ for a drain or
    gutter combined with walkway or road structure.


CLS 405/37
TXT Control means responsive to sensed condition:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 36 wherein the drainage or irrigation
    takes place (a) in response to a sensed characteristic, e.g., soil moisture
    content, or (b) under the control of a timer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 78+ for miscellaneous fluid handling
    systems in which fluid flow is controlled in response to a change in an
    atmospheric condition.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 63 for fluid
    sprinkling systems responsive to ground moisture content and including an
    above-ground terminal outlet.


CLS 405/38
TXT Including subsurface moisture barrier:
    Method or apparatus under subclass 36 wherein an artificial layer of water
    impermeable material is provided below the soil surface and is positioned
    to prevent the passage of water from a region above the layer to a region
    therebelow.


CLS 405/39
TXT Having regulation to flow through channel: Method or apparatus under
    subclass 36 wherein means are provided to cause or control fluid flow
    within a flow confining passage.

    (1)     Note.  For placement herein, a patent must recite a flow controller
    used as part of an irrigation or drainage system.  Merely reciting a valve
    culvert associated with a levee or a water gate in a channel even though
    the disclosed utility is for irrigation or drainage is not sufficient for
    placement in this or indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87+,    for water gates and adjustable weirs associated with open channels.

    108,    for valved spillways or culverts associated with dams, dikes,
    levees, etc.


CLS 405/40
TXT At outlet or intake:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 39 wherein the control takes place at
    each point (a) of egress of water from a channel to the soil, or (b) of
    ingress of water from the soil to the channel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87+,    for water gates associated with open channels which do not have
    means to specialize them for irrigation.

    108,    for flow controllers in spillways for dams or levels.


CLS 405/41
TXT Riser or standpipe outlet or intake:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 40 wherein the point of egress or
    ingress is in a pipe which projects upwardly, usually perpendicularly from
    a main pipe.


CLS 405/42
TXT End cap:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 36 wherein a tubular member is provided
    for applying water to or removing it from the soil, which member has means
    associated with it to cover or to surround the terminal end of the member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for apertured pipes having shielded outlets.


CLS 405/43
TXT Porous or apertured pipe, flume, or tileway:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 36 wherein drainage or irrigation is
    effected by a structure having a water-conducting channel or passage formed
    therein and wherein the water is removed from or applied to the soil
    through (a) a port formed in the side wall of the channel or passage, (b) a
    foraminous side wall portion of the structure, or (c) the connection or
    joint between elements used to make up the water conducting structure.

    (1)     Note.  A mainfold which feeds a plurality of feed pipes which in
    turn supply water to or drain it from the soil will not be found herein
    unless the feed pipes themselves are apertured or formed of a foraminous
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154+,   for subject matter relating to the positioning of a conduit
    below-ground.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 48.5 for a container or cartridge which
    contains water or the like and is adapted to be placed in the ground,
    whereby the liquid is applied or allowed to diffuse into the soil through
    some special feature, such as perforations in the container.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, appropriate subclasses for pipes or
    tubes of general application.


CLS 405/44
TXT Uniform discharge:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 43 wherein the water-conducting member
    includes a feature which ensures that equal amounts of water will be
    applied to the soil throughout the length of the member.

    (1)     Note.  A common example of this feature is the variation in
    aperture size along the length of the member, with small apertures in high
    pressure areas and larger apertures in the low pressure areas.


CLS 405/45
TXT Porous:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 43 wherein the sidewall, a portion of
    the sidewall, or an aperture formed therein includes a foraminous material.


CLS 405/46
TXT Earthen bottom:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 43 wherein the water-conducting member
    is in the form of an inverted open channel.


CLS 405/47
TXT Flow through joint:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 43 wherein the water-conducting member
    is comprised of serially arranged segments, and the water is removed from
    or applied to the solid through a space between adjacent ends of said
    segments.


CLS 405/48
TXT Open seam or shielded outlet:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 43 wherein (a) the water-conducting
    member is a generally closed channel which has longitudinally extending
    juncture formed therein in which an exit or entrance passage is provided,
    or (b) the exit or entrance passage is provided with means overhanging the
    passage to preclude the entry of dirt, soil, or like clogging material.


CLS 405/49
TXT Corrugated:

    Method and apparatus under subclass 43 wherein the water-conducting member
    includes a series of alternate ridges and grooves extending about the
    entire periphery.

    (1)     Note.  The ridges and grooves must be both inside and outside of
    the conducting member for placement in this subclass.


CLS 405/50
TXT Porous waterway, e.g., sand drain, etc.:
    Method or apparatus under subclass 36 wherein a highly water permeable
    material is placed in a less permeable earthen formation to allow water to
    be conducted within or through the formation.


CLS 405/51
TXT Branched flow:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 36 wherein a flow draining or
    distributing system includes a plurality of streams which diverge from or
    converge on a manifold.

    (1)     Note.  The term manifold as used herein includes devices such as a
    pipe or flume having multiple passageways formed in its side wall, or a
    wall or tube sheet communicating a plurality of pipes with a body of water,
    etc.


CLS 405/52
TXT FLUID CONTROL, TREATMENT, OR CONTAINMENT:

    Method or apparatus under the class definition relating to (a) storing a
    fluid in an earth formation, (b) creating, regulating, or redirecting the
    flow of a moving body of liquid, (c) extracting energy from a moving body
    of liquid, (d) inhibiting the formation of an undesirable suspended
    material in a body of water, (e) redistributing suspended material in a
    body of water, or (f) containing the spread of an undesirable floatable
    material on a body of water.

    (1)     Note. Excluded from this subclass are liquid purification or
    separation process or apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, appropriate subclasses for devices for controlling
    water under pressure, particularly subclass 236.1 for distribution systems
    involving geographic features; and subclasses 247+ for liquid seal traps.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses for the
    separation from a liquid of any character of material, and for
    miscellaneous processes and apparatus for treatment of a liquid mixture for
    purification not specifically provided for in this class (405).

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus specifically adapted to produce an intimate contact between gases
    and liquids to exchange properties or mutually modify conditions.


CLS 405/53
TXT Fluid storage in earthen cavity:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 52 related to storing a fluid in a
    reservoir or underground chamber having walls of natural earth or such
    walls which are coated, lined, or otherwise made less permeable.

    (1)     Note.  For original placement in this subclass, a patent claiming a
    fluid storage reservoir must recite the same as a complete container (i.e.,
    including the bottom surface) formed in or on the earth's surface.  Patents
    claiming merely an enclosing wall or levee are excluded and will be found
    in subclasses 107+.

    (2)     Note.  The concept of storage includes the ability to retrieve the
    stored material.  Placement of a material in a cavity without retrieval
    ability is considered to be disposal.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass is not intended to take mere tanks buried in
    the earth without any other specific relationship thereto.

    (4)     Note.  This subclass does not include treatment of the material
    stored other than that which is incidental to the handling thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107+,   for subject matter relating to a fluid-impounding earthen wall
    without regard to the earth surface underlying the fluid.

    128+,   for waste disposal in an earth formation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, appropriate subclasses for processes and apparatus
    relating to digging, handling, and moving material.

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclasses 174+ for vessels for the
    storage of gas.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses for
    building constructions of more general application, particularly subclass
    20 for an enclosure with top entrance in cover section; subclasses 128+ for
    a burial vault; subclasses 169+ for a construction with a particular
    terranean feature; subclasses 192+ for a liquid or fluent material
    container with a material port; and subclasses 245+ for an intersecting or
    curvilinear construction, e.g., storage tanks.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 45.1+, and particularly subclass 53.1 for
    methods and apparatus for the handling of liquefied gas involving steps or
    means special to liquefied gas and more than required for any liquid or gas
    under pressure.

    137,    Fluid Handling, appropriate subclasses for methods and structure
    relating to the handling of fluids, especially subclasses 255+ for plural
    tanks with parallel flow; subclasses 343+ for fluid handling combined with
    static constructional installations; subclasses 386+ for liquid level
    responsive or maintaining systems; and subclasses 561+ for distribution
    systems.

    166,    Wells, appropriate subclasses for devices or processes relating to
    wells which extract fluids from their naturally occurring locations in the
    earth, see particularly subclass 305.1, for a process utilized in removal
    of a fluid from its naturally occurring location in the earth which
    includes the step of causing another fluid to enter the pores of the earth.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, appropriate subclasses for
    processes and means for forming bores in the earth, particularly subclasses
    65+ for processes of boring with fluid; subclasses 207+ for above-ground
    means for handling drilling fluid or cuttings; and subclass 424 and the
    search there noted for earth boring nozzles.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 59 for apparatus for forming a construction in situ employing a
    portion of the earth below-ground level as a mold.


CLS 405/54
TXT With indicator or alarm means:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 53 wherein means are included for
    sensing a characteristic of the fluid or a change therein and for providing
    a signal capable of being perceived by the senses.


CLS 405/55
TXT Cavity construction:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 53 for the formation of an underground
    storage chamber or reservoir, or for features of the chamber walls or the
    surrounding earth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132+,   for subject matter relating to shaft or tunnel construction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, appropriate
    subclasses for subject matter relating to recovery of valuable material in
    situ, and particularly subclass 2 for tunnel recovery of fluid material;
    and subclasses 3+ for in situ conversion of solid to fluid.


CLS 405/56
TXT Including cooling or heating of material surrounding cavity:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 55 including altering the temperature of
    the earth or water surrounding the cavity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130+,   for temperature modification of earthen formations not associated
    with fluid storage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 45 for a heat exchanger with a geographical
    feature.


CLS 405/57
TXT Earth treatment:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 55 wherein the reservoir or storage
    chamber is formed or has its walls or boundaries conditioned by application
    of a chemical composition to the earth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263+,   for earth treatment by chemicals which is not related to fluid
    storage.

    270,    for application of a structure to an earthen formation to render
    the same impermeable.


CLS 405/58
TXT Dissolving earth:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 57 wherein the reservoir or storage
    chamber is formed by disintegrating earthen material, usually by contacting
    the material with a solvent.


CLS 405/59
TXT Supply or recovery of stored fluid by separate fluid:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 53 wherein the storage fluid is
    discharged from or admitted to the reservoir or storage chamber by the
    addition or removal of a second fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 394+ for dispensing apparatus employing a
    pressure fluid to dispense another fluid from a supply.


CLS 405/60
TXT Floatable matter containment:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 52 wherein the formation of an undesired
    buoyant material        is inhibited or an already formed undesired buoyant
    material is confined or regulated to include the confinement or regulation
    of a hazardous or toxic waste.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses for
    residual subject matter relating to the separation from a liquid of any
    character of material.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or  Containment, subclasses
    249+.


CLS 405/60.5
TXT Logging device for guiding floating logs:

    Device under subclass 60 connected to a waterway bank and extending in the
    waterway, which directs logs or similar material around bends in the
    waterway or into holding areas.


CLS 405/61
TXT Ice:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 60 wherein the substance being confined,
    regulated, or whose formation is inhibited is ice.

    (1)     Note.  Devices, such as fenders, guides, comminutors, etc.,
    associated with marine structures to prevent ice formation on the structure
    or damage to such structures will not be found herein since such structures
    neither prevent the formation of floating ice nor do they confine a mass of
    floating ice.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211+,   for subject matter relating to the control of ice formation on
    marine structure.


CLS 405/62
TXT Barrier formed by fluid:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 60 wherein a gaseous or liquid medium
    confines the floatable matter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for wave or flow dissipation by fluid application.


CLS 405/63
TXT Floating barrier:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 60 wherein a buoyant structure with
    portions both above and below the water surface is provided to control the
    floatable matter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26+,    for floating wave dissipators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 242.1+ for buoyant
    devices for separating oil from a body of water.


CLS 405/64
TXT Submergible:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 63 wherein the barrier can be shifted
    from a floating orientation to a position completely beneath the water
    surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for wave dissipators.

    171,    for subject matter relating to submerging a line of pipe or cable
    by controlling the buoyancy of the same.

    205+,   for marine structures which are floated to a site and sunk into an
    operative position.


CLS 405/65
TXT With means to seal space between barrier and fixed structure:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 63 wherein provision is made to prevent
    passage of floatable matter between the end of the buoyant structure and an
    adjacent relatively stationary structure, e.g., dock.


CLS 405/66
TXT With barrier storage or deployment feature: Method or apparatus under
    subclass 63 wherein the buoyant structure includes a feature which
    facilitates its shifting from an operative floating matter control
    orientation to a more compact, nonuse orientation or vice versa.


CLS 405/67
TXT Quick release float:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 66 wherein the buoyant structure
    includes a floatation member which is readily separable from or attachable
    to a curtainlike barrier to facilitate storage or deployment.


CLS 405/68
TXT Inflatable or deflatable:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 66 wherein the barrier includes a float
    portion which is expanded when being deployed by a buoyancy producing
    medium, or is expandable to receive such a medium or when being stored is
    collapsed by the removal of the buoyancy producing medium contained therein.


CLS 405/69
TXT Self-inflating:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 68 wherein the medium which effects the
    inflation of the float portion of the buoyant structure is carried by the
    buoyant structure.


CLS 405/70
TXT Having joint detail:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 63 wherein means are provided for
    connecting adjacent ends of a plurality of barrier sections.


CLS 405/71
TXT Having hinged joint between rigid sections: Method or apparatus under
    subclass 70 wherein the connection allows movement in one or more planes
    between adjacent inflexible sections when the barrier is in its deployed
    condition.


CLS 405/72
TXT With reinforcing feature:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 63 wherein the buoyant structure is
    provided with a load carrying feature which bears the forces applied to the
    structure.


CLS 405/73
TXT Erosive scouring:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 52 relating to the removal or a sediment
    deposit by the concentration of a natural current.


CLS 405/74
TXT Settling of suspended matter in a specific location (e.g., at a scoured
    pier):Fluid control under subclass 52 for effecting precipitation by
    gravity of a nonbuoyant material suspended in a body of water at a site in
    need of this material to, e.g., protect underwater devices such as pipes or
    cables, redirect flow, or fill in undesirable trenches as a result of
    scouring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    for bank, shore, or bed protecting structures, such as jetties,
    groins, and breakwaters, especially subclasses 21+ for wave or flow
    dissipating structures which may cause the settling of suspended matter as
    a result of their retarding or calming action on the water.

    60+,    for the collection or containment of buoyant material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 307+ for dredgers which excavate material
    under a mass of liquid.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 170 and 747 of an in
    situ still or flowing liquid.


CLS 405/75
TXT Extracting power from moving fluid:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 52 for the extraction of energy from a
    moving body of water.

    (1)     Note.  Hydraulic power production and claims to the combination of
    water-channels with motors will be found in Classes 60, Power Plants; 91,
    Motors: Expansible Chamber Type; 290, Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants; and 415,
    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants, subclasses 43 and 54 for the combination
    of electric power producing means and a fluid current motor to drive the
    same.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), appropriate subclasses
    for unhoused water wheels or turbines, especially subclass 197 for Pelton
    wheels.


CLS 405/76
TXT Wave or tide:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 75 for the utilization of the energy
    present in the surface undulations or the tidal variations in the surface
    level of a natural water body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 497 for wave or tide motors having a buoyant
    working member.

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants, subclasses 42 and 53 for the combination
    of electric power producing means and a tide or wave motor to drive the
    same.


CLS 405/77
TXT With flow restrictor or ramp:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 76 which accelerates the flow by causing
    it to pass through a narrowed opening or elevates the water by causing it
    to flow up an inclined plane.


CLS 405/78
TXT Associated with dam:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 75 wherein the energy is extracted by
    means which is within or adjacent to an artificial barrier constructed to
    control the flow or raise the level of the body of water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107+,   for a dam, per se, without details relating to extracting energy
    from the water.


CLS 405/79
TXT Wave generation or enhancement:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 52 concerning the production or
    intensification of swells in water.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclass 491 for swimming
    pools with wave generating apparatus.

    472,    Amusement Devices, subclass 128 for portable wave generators.


CLS 405/80
TXT Flow control:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 52 for conducting a fluid through a
    predetermined path or for regulating or modifying the fluid's movement
    through such a path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    for subject matter concerned with controlling or altering a natural
    current to preserve a bank, shore, or bed.


CLS 405/81
TXT Fishway:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 80 to enable fish to pass an obstruction
    in a stream.


CLS 405/82
TXT Elevator:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 81 wherein the fish are mechanically
    raised or lowered to carry them around the obstruction.


CLS 405/83
TXT Closed channel:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 81 wherein the fishway is in the form of
    a pipe or other enclosed waterway.


CLS 405/84
TXT Navigable canal:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 80 relating to navigable waterways or
    miscellaneous appliances not otherwise classifiable for use therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    268,    for the mere lining of a canal bed with a cementitous material.


CLS 405/85
TXT Having lock:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 84 for shifting a vessel from one level
    to another in a canal.


CLS 405/86
TXT Movable lifting member:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 85 relating to a device for shifting a
    vessel from one level to another in a canal wherein some portion of the
    device moves with and lifts the vessel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for subject matter relating to the lifting of a vessel for the
    purpose of dewatering the same.


CLS 405/87
TXT Water gate or adjustable weir:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 80 relating to movable regulators which
    control the volume of water flowing through an open channel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for an artificial barrier (e.g., dam, levee, etc.) constructed to
    obstruct the flow of a natural body of water.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 215 for weirs and water gates in
    combination and metering means.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, appropriate subclasses for gates
    employed other than in a Class 405 environment.


CLS 405/88
TXT Center flow:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 87 wherein a hollow flow regulating
    member is movably mounted on a submerged takeoff whereby liquid flows in a
    controllable fashion across the perimeter of and through the hollow member
    into the takeoff.


CLS 405/89
TXT Uniform discharge:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 87 wherein the water gate passes only a
    specific or predetermined volume of liquid.


CLS 405/90
TXT Removable:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 87 relating to a water gate which opens
    and closes by removing and replacing the entire gate structure.


CLS 405/91
TXT Flexible:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 90 wherein the removable gate is
    composed of a pliant material.


CLS 405/92
TXT Condition responsive:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 87 wherein a characteristic or a change
    in a characteristic is effective to change the position of the water gate.


CLS 405/93
TXT To weight of liquid separated from a main body:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 92 wherein the water gate has associated
    therewith which receives liquid therein from the body of liquid controlled
    by the water gate which means responds to the weight of the received liquid
    to control the position of the gate.


CLS 405/94
TXT To pressure on pivoted water gate:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 92 wherein a variation in the head of an
    accumulated body of liquid acting against a swinging water gate is
    effective to open or close the gate.


CLS 405/95
TXT With latch for closed position:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 94 including a restraining means to
    retain the water gate in its closed position, wherein the water gate is
    opened by the pressure of the liquid only after the restraining means is
    released.


CLS 405/96
TXT Float:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 92 wherein a buoyant member is employed
    to sense the height of an accumulated liquid.


CLS 405/97
TXT Having separate float chamber:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 96 wherein the buoyant member is
    positioned within a container which is distinct from but in fluid
    communication with the flow path.


CLS 405/98
TXT Roller or flexible:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 87 wherein the water gate (a) is a
    cylindrical structure which rotates about its axis to open and close, or
    (b) is made of sections, flexibly interconnected which opens and closes by
    being rolled, folded, or bent out of its closed position plane.


CLS 405/99
TXT Swinging:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 87 wherein the water gate turns about a
    pivot.


CLS 405/100
TXT About horizontal axis:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 99 wherein the water gate pivots about
    an axis which is generally parallel to the horizon.


CLS 405/101
TXT Overflow:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 100 wherein the liquid flows over the
    top of the water gate when it is opened.


CLS 405/102
TXT Collapsible:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 101 wherein the water gate is provided
    with a support member extending from the water gate to a point
    longitudinally spaced therefrom on the bed of the flow path which gate and
    support contiguously fold downwardly onto the bed when the gate is opened.


CLS 405/103
TXT Sliding:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 87 wherein the movable member comprises
    an element which is movable in a generally rectilinear fashion.


CLS 405/104
TXT Vertical:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 103 wherein the movable member is raised
    or lowered to regulate flow there past.


CLS 405/105
TXT Gate unseating:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 104 wherein (a) means are provided for
    shifting the movable member out of contact with a cooperating sealing
    surface prior to or at the moment vertical movement begins, or (b) the
    movable member and the cooperating sealing surface are so configured that
    as the member is moved vertically from its sealing position, the member
    moves entirely off the sealing surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 157+ for valves having
    unseating mechanisms.


CLS 405/106
TXT With lift mechanism or latch:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 104 including means (a) to provide a
    mechanical advantage to raise the gate, or (b) to hold the gate in a
    predetermined position.


CLS 405/107
TXT Artificial water barrier (e.g., dam, levee, etc.):

    Method or apparatus under subclass 80 relating to a fixed artificial
    construction placed to obstruct the flow of a body of water so as to stop
    substantially all flow or to prevent lateral spreading of the body of water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87,     for apparatus for regulating the volume rate of fluid moving in an
    open channel.


CLS 405/108
TXT Having spillway:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 107 relating to channels for allowing
    surplus water to pass around or through the barrier at some point between
    its crest and base.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for subject matter relating to channels modified or arranged for
    the utilization of the power of the water flowing therethrough, and
    particularly subclass 78 for similar channels associated with dams.

    88,     for water impounding means having adjustable center flow weirs
    associated therewith.


CLS 405/109
TXT Having impervious core:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 107 in which an impermeable center is
    placed in the barrier to prevent seepage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263+    and 270, for impermeabilization of an earth formation, not
    associated with a dam, dike, or levee.


CLS 405/110
TXT Hollow or buttressed:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 107 in which the barrier is supported
    against the thrust of the water by some form of reinforcing structure
    either within or behind the barrier, or is made up of an empty shell closed
    front and rear.


CLS 405/111
TXT With ballast compartment or cavity:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 110 wherein the barrier includes or has
    attached thereto a hollow structure into which is placed water, rock,
    concrete, etc., to stabilize the barrier.


CLS 405/112
TXT Vertical wall buttress:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 110 wherein the barrier is provided with
    a plurality of spaced vertical partitionlike members extending
    perpendicularly outward on the downstream or backside of the barrier and
    which are vertically coextensive with the barrier.


CLS 405/113
TXT Tension stayed:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 107 wherein the barrier is supported
    against the thrust of the water by external load carrying members which
    tend to stretch under the force of the water.


CLS 405/114
TXT Connectable sections:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 107 wherein (a) a section of the barrier
    consists of preformed units assembled for use, or (b) the barrier is formed
    in sections with a connecting or sealing means between the adjacent
    sections.


CLS 405/115
TXT Flexible:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 107 wherein a portion of the barrier
    bends in response to forces exerted upon it by the obstructed stream.


CLS 405/116
TXT In situ construction:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 107 relating to building a barrier at
    the site of use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    267,    for the construction of an underground cementitious wall for the
    control or diversion of subterranean water.


CLS 405/117
TXT Earthen:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 116 concerning the deposition of soil or
    rock to form a barrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for subject matter relating to fluid storage in earth cavities.

    263+,   for chemical treatment of earth formations.

    270,    for impermeabilization of earth formations by other than chemical
    treatment.


CLS 405/118
TXT Open channel:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 80 wherein the flow path is in the form
    of a trough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264+,   for the treatment or coating of the earthen walls of the channel
    with an organic compound (e.g., asphalt) to impermeabilize the same.

    268,    for lining a channel with cementitious materials.

    271,    for the mere compacting of an earthen formation, e.g., a channel.


CLS 405/119
TXT Flume:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 118 wherein the trough is an artificial
    structure wholly disposed above the surface of the ground.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 11+ for a building
    roof with an eave or valley gutter.


CLS 405/120
TXT Elbow or tee:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 119 concerned with either (a) proving a
    flume with a bent section therein, or (b) providing an opening in the wall
    of a flume section for communication with another intersecting flume
    section.


CLS 405/121
TXT Joint:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 119 relating to the connection or seal
    between sections of a flume.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, appropriate subclass for joints in closed
    conduits.


CLS 405/122
TXT Including U-clamp:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 121 wherein the flume sections are
    connected by a mechanical fastening means which is similar in cross section
    to the flume.


CLS 405/123
TXT With crossbar:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 122 wherein the fastening means further
    comprises an element which bridges the top of the U-clamp.


CLS 405/124
TXT Culvert:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 80 relating to conducting water not
    under pressure within a closed fluid conduit through an embankment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184,    for a method or apparatus for advancing a length of conduit through
    an embankment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, appropriate subclass for pipe
    structure, per se.


CLS 405/125
TXT Terminal or head:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 124 including specific structure at the
    culvert inlet or outlet.


CLS 405/126
TXT Serially connected segments:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 124 wherein the culvert is comprised of
    a plurality of preformed sections of similar cross section connected in
    end-to-end fashion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 155 for similar structure in
    pipes of general utility.


CLS 405/127
TXT Intake:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 80 relating to a structure designed to
    act as a inlet for a submerged pipe line.


CLS 405/128
TXT WASTE DISPOSAL IN SOIL:

    Method or apparatus under the class definition concerning the treatment or
    elimination of a waste material involving its deposition in an earth
    formation.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is the remediation of soil.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Well, subclass 305.1 for a process utilized in the removal of a
    fluid from its naturally occurring location in the earth which includes the
    step of causing another fluid to enter the pores of the earth.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 749+ for a chemical
    treatment process.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    249+ for the containment of hazardous or toxic waste in earth formations.


CLS 405/129
TXT Landfill:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 128 wherein a predetermined amount of
    waste is deposited in a void in the earth and covered with soil.


CLS 405/130
TXT TEMPERATURE MODIFICATION OR CONTROL OF EARTHEN FORMATION:

    Method or apparatus under the class definition wherein the heat content of
    an earthen deposit is altered.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for temperature modification of the earth surrounding an
    underground storage cavity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 45 for a heat exchanger with a geographical
    feature.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 17 for process or
    apparatus for boring combined with a step or means to heat or cool within
    the bore.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 3+
    for subject matter involving mining and in situ conversion of solid
    material to fluid, including thawing earth when combined with excavating
    hard, solid material; and subclass 11 for a mining or in situ
    disintegration of hard material process including the stabilizing of
    underground earth structure.


CLS 405/131
TXT Heating:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 130 wherein the temperature of an earth
    formation is elevated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 11+ for processes or
    apparatus for boring or penetrating the earth by directly applying heat to
    fluidize or comminute.


CLS 405/132
TXT UNDERGROUND PASSAGEWAY, E.G., TUNNEL:
    Method or apparatus under the class definition relating to the formation of
    a subterranean or subaqueous corridor to permit passage of personnel,
    vehicles, or equipment therethrough.

    (1)     Note.  Patents relating to the subterranean or subaqueous placement
    of a conduit for conveying fluent material will be found in subclasses 154+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154+,   for subject matter relating to the placement of pipe or cable
    beneath the surface of the earth or a body of water.

    272+,   for subject matter relating to shoring and cave-in prevention.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, appropriate subclasses for a
    process or apparatus for forming a bore in the earth.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, appropriate
    subclass for a process or apparatus for excavating hard, solid material to
    form a tunnel. See section V of the class definition of Class 299 for the
    line.

    588,    Hazardous  or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    249+ for the containment of hazardous or toxic waste in underground areas.


CLS 405/133
TXT Vertical:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 132 wherein the passageway is generally
    perpendicular to the earth's surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8+,     for pressurized caissons.

    231+,   for a hollow pier or caisson, which may be subsequently filled,
    employed as a foundation structure.

    272,    for a temporary caisson or other shoring means employed in a
    shaftlike excavation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclasses 242.1+ for well casing not sunk by a caisson or
    the like; and subclasses 378+ and 381+ for methods of constructing or
    assembling a well involving more than merely sinking a shaft by a caisson
    or the like or using means for sinking a shaft other than a caisson or the
    like.


CLS 405/134
TXT Sectional:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 132 wherein the tunnel is formed of
    performed segments each of which is a circumferentially complete portion of
    the tunnel.


CLS 405/135
TXT Seal or joint:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 134 wherein means are provided to
    prevent material passing between adjacent tunnel sections or for coupling
    the sections to one another or the the completed tunnel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, appropriate subclasses for a pipe seal or
    joint.


CLS 405/136
TXT Subaqueous:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 132 wherein the tunnel is located
    beneath the surface of a body of water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158+,   for subaqueous placement of a pipeline or cable.


CLS 405/137
TXT Below bed:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 136 wherein the finished tunnel lies
    entirely below the surface of the earthen formation underlying the body of
    water.


CLS 405/138
TXT Boring:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 132 wherein a subterranean corridor is
    formed by penetrating an earthen formation without disturbing the overlying
    earth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 62 for a process of
    boring horizontal bores.


CLS 405/139
TXT With auxiliary tunnel:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 138 wherein a subsidiary passage is
    employed in the construction of the main corridor.


CLS 405/140
TXT By axially overlapped members:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 138 wherein a plurality of plates or
    poles are sequentially driven into the earth surrounding the corridor cross
    sections such that each plate or pole partially extends over the next
    longitudinally adjacent plate or pole.


CLS 405/141
TXT Shield:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 138 wherein a protective member movable
    with the progress of the work temporarily supports the walls of the
    corridor to prevent the surrounding material from falling into the corridor
    during excavation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    283,    for shield-type apparatus employed in trench forming.


CLS 405/142
TXT With transverse force application feature: Method or apparatus under
    subclass 141 wherein the shield is urged into contact with the walls of the
    corridor surrounding the shield.


CLS 405/143
TXT Direction control:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 141 wherein the course or rotation of
    the shield is regulated.


CLS 405/144
TXT Door or bulkhead:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 141 including either a movable closure
    for closing off a portion of the entrance into the shield or a partition
    adjacent the face of the tunnel which allows the face region to be
    pressurized.


CLS 405/145
TXT Discrete independently advanceable earth support segments:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 141 wherein each of a plurality of
    separate soil-sustaining sections is individually moved forward.


CLS 405/146
TXT Lining installation:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 141 wherein the shield includes means
    for erecting tunnel segments or for grouting the tunnel wall.


CLS 405/147
TXT Seal:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 141 including means which prevent the
    passage of material between a tunnel lining and the shield tail section.


CLS 405/148
TXT Work platform:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 138 wherein an artificial support for
    equipment or personnel is provided.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, appropriate subclasses for a work
    platform in general.


CLS 405/149
TXT Cut and cover:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 132 relating to a tunnel constructed by
    excavating a trench into the earth, forming the tunnel cross section in the
    trench, and covering the trench.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282+,   for temporary trench shoring.


CLS 405/150.1
TXT Lining:
    Method or apparatus under subclass 132 relating to constructing the
    finished cross section of a tunnel by forming a shell or cast in place wall
    structure inside a bored hole.

    (1)     Note. Patents placed as originals in this and indented subclasses
    must claim either a method or apparatus for constructing the shell or wall
    structure or the specific wall structure, per se.


CLS 405/150.2
TXT By spraying of settable material (e.g., concrete):
    Subject matter under subclass 150.1 wherein the wall, ceiling or floor
    structure is formed by projecting hardenable material onto the interior of
    said tunnel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 31+, for forming structural installations in situ.


CLS 405/151
TXT Panel:

    Method or apparatus under subclasses 150.1+ wherein a plurality of
    complementary, circumferentially arranged segments are assembled together
    to form the shell.

    (1)     Note.  Bricks are not considered to be panels for this or the
    indented subclasses.  Thus, a tunnel shell which is merely a brick wall
    will not be found herein.


CLS 405/152
TXT With sealing feature:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 151 wherein a gasket or a hardenable
    material is placed between or around the area of contact between adjacent
    segments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135,    for seals between circumferentially continuous tunnel sections
    placed end-to-end.

    275     and 279, for sheet piles with sealing features.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 628+ for a static contact seal for other than an
    internal combustion engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable.


CLS 405/153
TXT With separate fastening means between adjacent panels:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 151 wherein each platelike segment is
    assembled to each adjacent segment by a discrete securing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135,    for means to secure one circumferentially continuous tunnel section
    to another.


CLS 405/154
TXT PIPE OR CABLE LAYING, RETRIEVING, OR UNDERWATER MANIPULATION:

    Method or apparatus under the class definition comprising a step or means
    for placing a conduit or a string of relatively slender material beneath
    the surface of the earth or a body of water, recovering the same therefrom,
    or handling a string or conduit below the surface of a body of water.

    (1)     Note.  For classification under this definition either (a) a step
    or means for submerging the pipe or cable beneath the surface of a body of
    water must be claimed, or (b) a step or means for forming an earth opening
    or otherwise handling the earth material must be claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132+,   and see the notes thereto for subject matter relating to tunnels
    and construction thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, appropriate subclass for an assembling process or
    apparatus.

    37,     Excavating, appropriate subclass for a means to form a trench.

    111,    Planting, appropriate subclasses for a process or device for
    agricultural-type planting.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 97+ for a process or means
    for repairing a pipe or tubing, and including a step of excavating to reach
    the defective area of pipe or tube; subclass 108 for an underground pipe or
    conduit for pipe.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 376, 377, and 378+ for placing, removing,
    constructing, or assembling well elements.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 37+ for
    underground electrical installations; and subclasses 68.1+ for electrical
    conduit structure.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, appropriate subclass for a process
    or means for forming a bore.  The mere description that the tubing or the
    like which is used in the boring operation, is left in the earth, does not
    preclude classification in Class 175.  See the class definition of Class
    175 for the line between Class 405 and Class 175.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, particularly subclass 2 for
    conduits combined with pavement curb or gutter structure.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 745.4+ for apparatus for
    laying pipe without earth handling or excavating means.


CLS 405/155
TXT Cast in situ:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 154 including a step or means for
    forming at least a portion of the string or conduit by placing flowable
    material in approximately the position in which it is to be used, said
    flowable material thereafter setting or congealing into a stable mass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150.1+, for a cast in situ tunnel lining.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclasses 285+ for a process of cementing wells.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 31+ for methods of casting conduit in situ, without any earth
    handling.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 59 and 63+ for apparatus for casting pipes or conduits in situ,
    but without any handling of the earth.


CLS 405/156
TXT With forming or cutting of pipe or cable:
    Method or apparatus under subclass 154 including a step or means for either
    (a) serving or machining the string or conduit, or (b) either plastically
    shaping stock material into the form of a string or conduit or plastically
    shaping an already formed string or conduit so as to alter its cross
    sectional configuration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168.1+, for methods and apparatus for submerging a line of pipe or cable
    and controlling or causing the deformation of the same in a direction
    transverse to its longitudinal axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 48+ and 176+ for processes and
    apparatus for forming tubes by plastically deforming a strip of stock
    material.


CLS 405/157
TXT With protection or indication of pipe or trench:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 154 wherein a ditch is formed into which
    the conduit or string is to be laid, and wherein means is provided to guard
    against damage or injury either to the conduit or string or to people who
    may be in the ditch, or wherein means is provided to show where the conduit
    or string is subsequently buried under the surface of the earth.

    (1)     Note.  The protection means prevents the trench wall from caving in
    or protects the pipe from being damaged after it is covered by earth.  The
    indicator means may be positioned permanently or temporarily.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282+,   for trench shoring, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 104 for conduit combined with
    indicator means; and subclass 105 for conduit combined with a trench
    feature.


CLS 405/158
TXT Submerging, raising, or manipulating line of pipe or cable in or from
    marine environment:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 154 wherein the string or conduit is
    placed or manipulated beneath the surface of a body of water or retrieved
    therefrom.


CLS 405/159
TXT Entrenched or buried:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 158 wherein the string or conduit is
    positioned beneath the bottom earth surface of the body of water.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 307+ for dredgers for excavating beneath a
    body or water.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 5+, for subject matter
    relating to boring a submerged formation.


CLS 405/160
TXT Condition responsive:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 159 wherein the string or conduit is
    positioned beneath the bottom by a device having means for sensing a
    characteristic (e.g., tension in a line, surface contour of the bottom) or
    the occurrence of a predetermined event in the device, its environment, or
    the string or conduit, and regulating or modifying the operation of the
    device in accordance with said sensed characteristic or event.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175,    for condition-responsive apparatus for burying pipe or cable in the
    earth surface, but not under a body of water.


CLS 405/161
TXT Entrenching or burying apparatus guided by pre-positioned pipe or cable:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 159 wherein the string or conduit is
    initially positioned on and along the bottom of the body of water, and is
    subsequently positioned beneath the bottom by a device having means to
    engage the string or conduit and guide the device along the same.


CLS 405/162
TXT With apparatus buoyancy control:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 161 in which the device guided along the
    string or conduit includes variable ballast means whereby the attitude or
    the distance below the water surface of the device is controlled while the
    device is positioning the string or conduit beneath the bottom.

    (1)     Note.  A burying or entrenching device having the ballast means the
    sole purpose of which is to sink the device down to its working position
    and raise the same therefrom is excluded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205+,   for marine structures which are sunk or have their attitude
    controlled by ballasting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclasses 319+ for submarines with ballasting means.


CLS 405/163
TXT With bottom fluidizing means:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 161 wherein an initially relatively firm
    bottom material supporting the pre-positioned string or conduit is caused
    to assume a flowable state, thereby permitting the string or conduit to
    settle into a position beneath the bottom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for a box caisson or cofferdam employing fluidizing or jetting
    means to sink the same.

    226,    for subject matter relating to securing a marine structure to the
    bed by jetting.

    248,    for pile installation using fluid jets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 323 and 342+ for dredging by jetting.


CLS 405/164
TXT By towing submerged sled with attached plow and pipe or cable guide:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 159 wherein the string or conduit is
    positioned beneath the bottom by a device having means by which it may be
    connected to a vessel to pull the device along the bottom, and further
    comprising a digging tool having integral or attached means for restricting
    lateral movement of the string or conduit as the same travels from a supply
    to its final position beneath the bottom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180+,   for a trench forming tool with attached pipe or cable guide
    employed to bury the pipe or cable at other than a submerged site.


CLS 405/165
TXT With means to forcibly feed or to control tension in pipe or cable:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 164 wherein either (a) the string or
    conduit is in the form of an elongated flexible member and means are
    provided whereby a force transmitted along the member tending to pull the
    buried or entrenched portion of the same out of the bottom can be lessened
    or neutralized or (b) a motive force is provided to feed the string or
    conduit from a supply toward its final position beneath the bottom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177,    for land apparatus for burying pipe or cable provided with means to
    feed or control tension in the pipe or cable.


CLS 405/166
TXT Facilitated by extension from line-laying vessel:

    Subject matter under subclass 158 wherein the string of slender material or
    conduit is carried in a ship that releases the string or conduit so that it
    is placed as the ship moves through the water, and wherein the ship is
    provided with means protruding beyond the hull of the ship, which
    protruding means helps to support the string or conduit for proper
    placement of the same as it is released from the ship.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is an extension that extends above
    the deck of the line-laying ship.  The extension serving to facilitate
    assembly of the sections of pipe just prior to their being laid into the
    water.


CLS 405/167
TXT Articulated segments:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 166 wherein the protruding means
    comprises a plurality of serially connected distinct sections, each of
    which is swingably attached to an adjacent section.


CLS 405/168.1
TXT With causing or controlling the deformation of a line:
    Method or apparatus under subclass 158 wherein the conduit or string is in
    the form of an elongated member having a stress limit beyond which plastic
    deformation occurs, and a step or means is recited to either (a) ensure
    that the stress limit is not exceeded during placement of the string or
    conduit or (b) to straighten or otherwise alter the longitudinal
    configuration of the string or conduit as the same is transferred from a
    supply to its final position below the water surface.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is a step or means for bending a
    pipe from a coiled configuration to a substantially straight-line
    configuration or from a substantially straight-line configuration into a
    desired curved configuration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156,    for a step or means for altering or forming the cross-sectional
    configuration of a pipe or cable by machining or plastically deforming the
    same.

    168.3,  for pipe laying from a reel on a floating means.


CLS 405/168.2
TXT Buckle arrestor for pipe:
    Subject matter under subclass 168.1 comprising means to prevent a conduit
    which is being layed from floating means from bending, kinking or
    collapsing.


CLS 405/168.3
TXT Pipe laying from a reel:
    Subject matter under subclass 168.1 wherein a conduit which is wound on a
    reel and layed on, or under, the bed of a body of water from floating means
    carrying the reel.


CLS 405/168.4
TXT Pipe tensioner:
    Subject matter under subclass 168.1 comprising means to apply tensile force
    to a conduit, to control its configuration, as it is being layed from
    floating means.


CLS 405/169
TXT With assembling of line structure:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 158 wherein the string or conduit or a
    portion thereof is connected either to a fixed construction or to another
    string or conduit or portion thereof.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass is a pipe connected to a structure such as
    a well head, or to an anchor on the marine floor.


CLS 405/170
TXT By joining successive sections of line:
    Method or apparatus under subclass 169 wherein one portion of a string or
    conduit is connected to another portion of a string or length of conduit in
    end-to-end fashion.


CLS 405/171
TXT By control of buoyancy:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 158 wherein the string or conduit is at
    least partially floatable, and is properly placed by regulating the
    floatability thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The pipe may be made buoyant by using air trapped
    therewithin, or by attaching float members to the pipe, or ballast material
    may be added to the pipe to regulate the sinking thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200,    for use of a buoyant chamber to adjust the height of a work
    platform.

    205+,   for method or apparatus for sinking or orienting a marine structure
    in a body of water.


CLS 405/172
TXT With anchoring of line:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 158 wherein the conduit or string of
    slender material is secured to the bottom of the body of water into which
    said string or conduit has been placed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224+,   for subject matter relating to anchoring a marine structure to the
    bed.


CLS 405/173
TXT With raising of line from marine floor:
    Method or apparatus under subclass 158 wherein significance is attributed
    to the lifting of the conduit or string of slender material from the bottom
    of the body of water into which it has been placed.


CLS 405/174
TXT By means advancing along terrain and guiding pipe or cable into
    subterranean position:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 154 wherein a means is utilized which
    moves continuously substantially parallel to the axis of the placed string
    or conduit to guide or direct said string or conduit from a position above
    the earth surface to a final, substantially fixed position below the
    surface.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are method and apparatus wherein only a
    portion or portions of the length of the string or conduit is positioned
    below the surface.


CLS 405/175
TXT Condition responsive:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 174 wherein the string or conduit is
    positioned beneath the surface by a device having means for sensing a
    characteristic (e.g., tension in the string or conduit, surface contour) or
    the occurrence of a predetermined event in the device, its environment, or
    the string or conduit, and regulating or modifying the operation of the
    device in accordance with said sensed characteristic or event.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160,    for condition-responsive apparatus for entrenching a line of pipe
    or cable in the bottom earth surface of a body of water.


CLS 405/176
TXT Tape or strip:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 174 relating to the placement of an
    elongated, generally ribbonlike member beneath the surface of the earth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    111,    Planting, subclass 199 for similar structures relating to the
    placement of seed tapes in the ground.


CLS 405/177
TXT With positive feed or means to vary tension in pipe or cable:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 174 wherein either (a) the string or
    conduit is in the form of an elongated flexible member and means are
    provided whereby a force transmitted along the member tending to pull the
    entrenched or buried portion from below the surface can be lessened or
    neutralized, or (b) a motive force is provided to feed the string or
    conduit from a supply toward its final position below the surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165,    for apparatus or methods for entrenching pipe or cable in the
    bottom earth surface of a body of water, combined with feeding or
    tensioning means.

    168.1+, for submarine pipe laying apparatus having means to control tension
    and other stresses in the pipe as it is transferred from the surface to the
    bottom.


CLS 405/178
TXT Simultaneous laying of plural parallel pipes or cables:

    Methods or apparatus under subclass 174 relating to the concurrent
    placement of two or more parallel strings or conduits below the earth
    surface.


CLS 405/179
TXT With backfill or bedding material conveying or dispensing means:

    Methods or apparatus under subclass 174 wherein either (a) a bottom layer
    of material is placed in a trench prior to the placement of the string or
    conduit therein, or (b) a covering material is either dispensed from a
    supply hopper or conveyed from the point at which it was removed from the
    trench, and is deposited upon a string or conduit which has been positioned
    in the trench.

    (1)     Note.  A mere crowder for replacing excavated earth from the side
    of the trench is not considered to be a conveyor or dispenser as required
    above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 368+ for a ditching machine combined with a
    conveyor.


CLS 405/180
TXT Including trench forming plow with pipe or cable guide:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 174 wherein the means for placing the
    string or conduit below the surface includes a plowlike digging tool for
    forming a trench for receiving said string or conduit, and means integral
    with or attached to said tool for restricting lateral movement of the
    string or conduit as the same travels from a supply to its final position
    below the surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164+,   for underwater apparatus for entrenching a line of pipe or cable
    and including a plow with a pipe or cable guide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 366+ for a ditching plow.

    172,    Earth Working, for earthworking plows.


CLS 405/181
TXT With depth adjustment:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 180 wherein the plowlike tool can be
    adjusted relative to its supporting structure whereby the vertical
    dimension of the trench can be selectively varied.


CLS 405/182
TXT With plow vibrating or oscillating means:
    Method or apparatus under subclass 180 including means to move the digging
    tool to and fro to assist the same in penetrating the earth.


CLS 405/183
TXT Guide integral with or rigidly fixed to plow:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 180 wherein the means for restricting
    lateral movement of the string or conduit is either formed by machining
    part of the plowlike tool or is comprised of a separate part fastened to
    the tool in such a manner that it cannot be adjusted or moved relative to
    the tool.


CLS 405/184
TXT Advancing subterranean length of pipe or cable:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 154 wherein a means is utilized to
    positively advance the string or conduit through a bore or other excavation
    in the earth, usually by pushing or pulling said string or conduit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclass 370 for mole plows.

    166,    Wells, subclass 50 for a well with a lateral conduit which may have
    been inserted into a bore by pushing or pulling; subclass 71 for a well
    with a below-ground feature and an above-ground casing sinking means; and
    subclasses 77.1+ for above-ground apparatus for forcing tubing or cable
    into an existing well.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclass 141 for a tool drive means
    provided with an advance causing or controlling means.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, appropriate subclass for means to
    form a bore including a means to feed a drill string, and particularly
    subclasses 22+ for subject matter relating to boring without earth removal
    in which a special provision is included for forming a cased bore as a part
    of the boring operation; and subclass 171 for an above-ground tool drive
    combined with a means to install a casing as part of the boring operation.
    See the class definition of Class 175 for the line between Class 405 and
    Class 175.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    appropriate subclass for pushing or pulling devices, particularly
    subclasses 29+ for pipe or rod jacks; and subclasses 134.3+ for wire or
    strand placing in which a pushing or pulling device is utilized.


CLS 405/185
TXT Diving:

    Method or apparatus under the class definition wherein (a) means are
    provided within which personnel may be lowered into a body of water to
    perform a submerged operation, or (b) a  submersible means is provided
    which is either remotely controlled by personnel at the water surface or is
    operated or occupied by a diver to perform an underwater operation.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus which are solidly connected to the marine floor
    (e.g., marine drilling platform) and methods associated therewith are
    excluded, even though the apparatus may eventually be moved to another site.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes observation bells which are submerged
    by cable to a position under the water surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8+,     for a pressurized caisson with continuous surface access (land or
    water use).

    11+,    for means to expose a normally wetted surface to the atmosphere,
    especially subclass 12 for ship repair caissons.

    158+,   for method or apparatus for submerging, raising, or manipulating a
    line of pipe or cable in a body of water.

    195.1+, for a marine structure or method of constructing the same.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclasses 312+ for submarine vessels without specific means
    for performing an underwater work operation.


CLS 405/186
TXT Suits or accessory therefor:

    Apparatus under subclass 185 shaped to approximate the form of the body and
    limbs of a wearer, and accessories therefor which are not provided for
    elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 2.15+ for diving suit structure, per se.

    128,    Surgery, subclass 201.27 for diving or swimming apparatus.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclasses 56 and 102+ for
    diving suits not including hydraulic engineering apparatus, but equipped
    with buoyant structure or swimming feature.


CLS 405/187
TXT Rigid element:

    Apparatus under subclass 186 formed with a relatively inflexible material
    to protect the wearer from the pressure of the water.


CLS 405/188
TXT Underwater docking or mooring:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 185 wherein means are provided for
    temporarily attaching a diving apparatus to either the seabed, a submerged
    structure or vessel, or a submerged portion of a structure or vessel to
    restrain movement of said apparatus with respect to said structure or
    vessel.

    (1)     Note.  A cable by which a diving bell is lowered into the water or
    a tether connecting the bell to the mother ship are not "attaching means"
    as required by the above definition.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass are submersible apparatus which
    engage a portion of an underwater pipeline to be repaired.


CLS 405/189
TXT With communication between inhabitable enclosures:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 188 in which the diving apparatus
    comprises a compartment containing a breathable gaseous environment and a
    hatchway leading to the same, and means are provided for attaching said
    diving apparatus to a submerged vessel or structure which also includes a
    compartment, whereby the compartments of diving apparatus and the vessel or
    structure are in communication with each other via said hatchway.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclasses 330+ for submarines including a rescue feature.


CLS 405/190
TXT Remote control:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 185 wherein the underwater operation is
    performed at a site by a device which has its operation controlled by a
    person located in an environment isolated from said underwater site through
    manipulation of controls in said isolated environment which are
    interconnected with said device through motion transmission means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188+,   for a diving apparatus having means for attaching itself to a
    sunken vessel, and including a drill or tap operated from the interior of
    said apparatus.


CLS 405/191
TXT From surface:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 190 wherein the isolated environment is
    located at or above the water surface.


CLS 405/192
TXT With air lock:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 185 wherein the means with which
    personnel may carry on the underwater operation comprises an underwater
    enclosure having a gaseous environment in which a specific pressure
    condition is maintained, and wherein a chamber means is provided having a
    first sealable opening communicating with said enclosure, and a second
    sealable opening communicating with the underwater environment, whereby
    passage of material or personnel into or out of the enclosure can be
    accomplished while maintaining the pressure condition within the enclosure.


CLS 405/193
TXT With pressure equalization:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 185 wherein the means with which
    personnel may carry on the underwater operation comprises an enclosure
    confining a gaseous environment which is maintained at a pressure equal to
    or greater than the surrounding water pressure to prevent ingress of water
    through an opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8+,     for pressurized pneumatic caissons which have a portion extending
    above the surface of the body of water within which it is located, which
    portion allows access to the interior of the caisson.


CLS 405/194
TXT With continuous surface access:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 185 wherein the means with which
    personnel may carry on an underwater operation includes an uninterrupted
    passageway between the water surface and an underwater site.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8+,     for pressurized pneumatic caissons which have a portion extending
    above the surface of the body of water within which it is located, which
    portion allows access to the interior of the caisson.


CLS 405/195.1
TXT MARINE STRUCTURE OR FABRICATION THEREOF:
    Method or apparatus under the class definition relating to (a) a building,
    platform, foundation, or similar construction located in a body of water
    and which is supported by or solidly connected to an earthen formation or
    (b) the on-site erection of such a building, platform, foundation or
    similar construction in a manner not provided for elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  The term "solidly connected" as used herein includes hinged
    or universal-type joints.

    (2)     Note.  The earthen formation usually comprises the bed of the body
    of water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136+,   for subaqueous tunnels.

    299+,   for foundations not restricted to a marine environment.

     SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclasses 264+ for moored or anchored marine platforms
    which are not supported by or solidly connected to the seabed.  Class 405,
    however, includes structures connected to the marine bed by a continuous
    riser pipe (i.e., a conduit which serves to convey material from beneath
    the surface of the water) which may comprise a rigid segment over a
    substantial portion of its length and a relatively flexible segment.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 5+ for marine
    structures combined with features specialized for drilling such as a tool
    drive or means for guiding a tool from the drill rig to the marine floor.
    Nominal recitations of drilling means, details of a derrick or draw works
    or mere access spaces communicating with the surface of the water have not
    been considered to involve specialized drilling features.  Steps or
    apparatus relating to boring to form a foundation, anchor, etc., for the
    structure, combined with steps or means relating to the structure are
    classified in Class 405.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclass 250
    for containment of      hazardous or toxic waste in a marine environment to
    include securing the waste to the earthen formation.


CLS 405/196
TXT With work deck vertically adjustable relative to floor:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 195.1 wherein the construction includes
    a platform on which, or from which a work operation is to be performed,
    which platform is supported by one or more elongated columnar members that
    are secured to the bed underlying body of water, and which platform is
    movable up and down with relation to the member(s) and the bed.


CLS 405/197
TXT Sectional leg:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 196 wherein a columnar member is
    composed of a plurality of interconnected or nested segments.


CLS 405/198
TXT Longitudinally extending projections or recesses:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 196 wherein a plurality of regularly
    spaced protuberances, indentations, or apertures are arranged along the
    length of a columnar member and means are provided to co-operate with said
    protuberances, indentations, or apertures to effect raising or lowering of
    the platform.


CLS 405/199
TXT Frictional grippers:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 196 wherein the platform is provided
    with means which clamp against the generally smooth exterior of a columnar
    support, which means effects vertical movement of the platform relative to
    its support.


CLS 405/200
TXT By buoyancy control:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 196 wherein support for the platform is
    by way of a floatable chamber, the floatability of which a chamber is
    varied to cause the platform to be moved up and down with relation to the
    bed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205+,   for a buoyant chamber used to facilitate assembly of a structure.


CLS 405/201
TXT With horizontally movable work deck:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 195.1 wherein the construction includes
    a platform on which, or from which a work operation is to be performed,
    which platform is mounted so as to be shiftable relative to its support,
    the shifting occurring in a plane substantially parallel to the water
    surface.


CLS 405/202
TXT With pivotal connection between work deck and base:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 195.1 wherein the construction includes
    a platform on which, or from which a work operation is to be performed,
    which platform is attached by a shaft or bearing to a supporting portion of
    the construction such that a limited degree of oscillation between said
    supporting portion and the platform is permitted.


CLS 405/203
TXT Floatable to site and supported by marine floor:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 195.1 wherein the construction is itself
    buoyant in water or has attached thereto separate buoyant transport means,
    whereby the construction may be moved on the surface of a body of water
    until it is located in a position where the construction will be used, at
    which position the construction, or a portion thereof, is submerged into
    contact with the bottom of the body of water.

    (1)     Note.  The buoyant means may or may not be eventually disassociated
    from the rest of the organization.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for a cofferdam floatable to a work site.


CLS 405/204
TXT With assembly of sectional supporting structure at site:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 203 wherein the construction includes
    elongated supporting means adapted to extend between a work platform and
    the seabed, said supporting means comprising a plurality of separate
    sections that are assembled at the position where the platform will be used.


CLS 405/205
TXT With ballasting means to sink or position structure at site:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 203 wherein the construction includes or
    has attached thereto one or more buoyant compartments into which a material
    is selectively introduced to decrease the buoyancy of said compartment(s),
    whereby the construction can be submerged or its orientation can be
    regulated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for wave or flow dissipating structures which are floated to a site
    and sunk.

    171,    for submerging a line of pipe or cable by controlling the buoyancy
    thereof.

    200,    for marine platforms which are adjusted vertically through buoyancy
    control.


CLS 405/206
TXT Detachable from structure:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 205 wherein the buoyant compartment is
    distinct from and removably attached to the construction.


CLS 405/207
TXT Compartment in base:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 205 wherein the construction includes
    and is supported upon a foundation within which is located the buoyant
    compartment(s), which foundation, or one or more elongated columnar members
    suspended therefrom, contacts the earthen bed underlying the body of water.


CLS 405/208
TXT And leg depending from base:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 207 wherein the foundation includes
    elongated columnar members suspended therefrom that contact, and are
    secured to, the bed, which members help support the foundation on which the
    construction rests.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227,    for securing a marine structure to the bed by driving piles through
    sleeves provided in the structure.


CLS 405/209
TXT Separable transport means:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 203 including a step or means for
    floating the construction to the site on a separate buoyant conveyance.

    (1)     Note.  Since practically all nonbuoyant marine structures are
    presumably carried to a site on some type of buoyant transport means, some
    significance should be attributed to the method or means for transporting
    the structure for placement of a patent in this subclass.


CLS 405/210
TXT Storage container:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 195.1 wherein a product receiving
    receptacle is secured to and supported by the earthen bed of the body of
    water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for fluid storage in an earthen cavity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclasses 256 and 257 for semisubmersible or submersible
    product containing tanks that either are anchored in place or are towed
    through the water.

    220,    Receptacles, appropriate subclasses for a metallic storage
    container, per se.


CLS 405/211
TXT Structure protection:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 195.1 wherein means are provided that
    guard against damage to the structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for method or apparatus for confining, regulating, or inhibiting
    the formation of ice on a body of water in which a marine structure is
    located, which may comprise means on the structure itself.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    14,     Bridges, subclass 76 for bridge piers provided with ice removers.


CLS 405/211.1
TXT Corrosion prevention:
    Subject matter under subclass 211 comprising means for preventing
    deterioration of a structure by chemical action.


CLS 405/212
TXT Fender:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 211 wherein a shock absorbing structure
    is provided to lessen vessel impact.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    14,     Bridges, subclass 76 for bridge piers with fenders.

    114,    Ships, subclasses 219+ for shipboard fenders.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 139+ for shock-absorbing bumpers in
    general.

    293,    Vehicle Fenders, appropriate subclasses for a fender for a moving
    vehicle, and particularly subclasses 107+, 129, 131, and 132+ for vehicle
    bumpers having special means to absorb the force of impact.


CLS 405/213
TXT Roller type:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 212 wherein the shock-absorbing
    structure includes a freely turning cylindrical body.


CLS 405/214
TXT Having coil spring:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 212 wherein a helix of resilient
    material is provided to dampen vessel impact.


CLS 405/215
TXT Resilient block:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 212 wherein vessel impact is absorbed by
    a mass of elastomeric material.


CLS 405/216
TXT Sleeve or coating:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 211 wherein the structure is protected
    by a shell or facing constructed on or assembled to the exterior of said
    structure, or by a substance applied to the exterior to form a layer
    thereon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 721.1+, 736.3+, and
    738.1 for a shaft having a dissimilar shell or facing.

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 1 for apparatus for molding a protective
    coating on a pile.


CLS 405/217
TXT In or on frozen media:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 195.1 wherein the structure is located
    in an environment of ice, snow, or below-freezing temperature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130+,   for temperature modification or control of an earthen formation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTION 901 for a collection of
    subject matter relating to permafrost.


CLS 405/218
TXT Dock:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 195.1 relating to a mooring platform
    which either is solidly connected to or is carried by an earthen formation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclass 258 for floating landing platforms, per se, or
    where such platforms are anchored in place by a flexible chain, line, wire,
    etc.


CLS 405/219
TXT Floating:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 218 wherein the mooring platform
    includes a buoyant section which rides on the surface of the body of water.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclass 263 for floating boat docks not solidly connected
    to an earthen formation.


CLS 405/220
TXT Hinged:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 218 wherein the mooring platform is
    composed of a plurality of sections which are pivotally connected to one
    another.


CLS 405/221
TXT Vertically adjustable:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 218 wherein the height or the mooring
    platform can be varied with respect to the bed of the body of water.


CLS 405/222
TXT Cast in situ:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 195.1 wherein the construction or a
    portion thereof is formed by placing a cementitious material at
    approximately the position at which the construction is to be located, and
    then permitting or causing the material to set or congeal into a stable
    mass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257,    and see the search notes thereto, for cast in situ columnar
    structures not restricted to a marine environment.


CLS 405/223
TXT Installing means:

    Apparatus under subclass 222 employed in forming the cast in situ structure
    and which does not remain as part of the finished structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11+,    for temporary caissons used in forming concrete piers, which
    caissons are removed after the pier is formed.


CLS 405/223.1
TXT Tension leg platform:
    Subject matter under subclass 195.1 comprising an offshore platform which
    has depending members that are anchored to the bed of a body of water and
    hold the platform in position by being placed under tension.


CLS 405/224
TXT With anchoring of structure to marine floor:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 195.1 relating to the fixing of the
    construction to the earthen bed of the body of water.

    (1)     Note.  A patent claiming subject matter relating to a marine
    foundation (e.g., pile, pier) will be placed as an original in this and
    indented subclasses only if restricted to a marine environment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211+,   for a marine pile with means for protecting the pile against
    damage, especially subclass 216 for a pile with a protective sleeve or
    coating.


CLS 405/224.1
TXT Pressure holding or loosening means:
    Subject matter under subclass 224 comprising a suction means to hold the
    base of an offshore structure to the seabed or jet means to loosen the base
    from the seabed.


CLS 405/224.2
TXT By riser pipe:
    Subject matter under subclass 224 comprising a conduit that extends from
    the bed of a body of water to anchor a platform on the surface of the
    water, and which also serves to convey material from beneath the surface of
    the water, (e.g., oil, gravel, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158+,   for a process or apparatus for laying a pipe which serves to convey
    material from beneath the surface of the water, but does not anchor a
    structure to the bed of the body of water.

    195.1,  for riser pipes which do not anchor the structure to the bed of the
    body of water.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 236.1 for distribution systems involving
    geographic features and subclasses 356+ for static constructional
    installations.

    441,    Buoys, subclasses 4+ for liquid cargo transferring means.


CLS 405/224.3
TXT Having flexible segment:
    Subject matter under subclass 224.2 wherein the conduit comprises a section
    which is unable to resist a compressive force along its longitudinal axis.

    (1)     Note.  The flexible segment may be used to tether a floating means
    to the substantially rigid section of the riser pipe.


CLS 405/224.4
TXT Having tensioner:
    Subject matter under subclass 224.2 comprising means to apply tensile force
    to the conduit in order to control its geometric configuration.


CLS 405/225
TXT By grouting preformed structure:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 224 wherein a preformed construction is
    made secure to the bed by applying a cementitious material about a portion
    of said construction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    260+,   for a rock or earth bolt or anchor with a grouting feature.


CLS 405/226
TXT Including floor modifying means:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 224 wherein the configuration or
    character of the earthen bed to which the construction is secured is
    changed.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include the mere displacement or
    compaction of the earthen bed by a pile or portion of a construction which
    is forced or driven into the bed.

    (2)     Note.  The floor-modifying means may include means to impinge
    pressurized fluid against the surface, or subject it to vacuum, or means to
    dig into the surface.  It usually provides a more secure anchorage but may
    be used to loosen or decrease the anchoring effect.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163,    for pipe or cable entrenching by earth fluidizing means.

    248,    for methods and apparatus for sinking columnar members in the earth
    using fluid jets.


CLS 405/227
TXT By pile extending through sleeve in structure:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 224 wherein the construction includes a
    passageway or has attached thereto a tube, through which passageway or tube
    is passed an elongated member which is partially driven into the bed,
    thereby fixing the construction to the bed.


CLS 405/228
TXT Pile driving:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 224 including a step or means for
    sinking into the bed a member which is greatly elongated relative to any
    lateral dimension.


CLS 405/229
TXT FOUNDATION:

    Method or apparatus under the class definition relating to a preformed or
    cast in situ structure positioned or formed in contact with the earth to
    provide a stable base for supporting a superstructure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195.1+, for foundations peculiar to a marine environment.

    263+,   for a method or apparatus for stabilizing an earthen formation by
    applying a composition (e.g., cement) to the same.

    271,    for a method or apparatus for compacting an earthen formation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Building), subclasses 169+ for a
    construction there provided for with a terranean feature; subclass 274 for
    an intersecting construction with a foundation; and subclasses 292+ for a
    footing peculiar to the support of a wall or a shaft.


CLS 405/230
TXT Underpinning:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 229 wherein the stable base is formed or
    positioned under an existing construction after which the weight of said
    construction is transferred to said stable base.


CLS 405/231
TXT Columnar structure (e.g., pier, pile):
    Method or apparatus under subclass 229 wherein the stable base comprises a
    rigid member having a limited closed periphery and which is greatly
    elongated relative to any lateral dimension.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes bridge approaches with retaining wall
    type abutments (usually a reinforced wall).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195.1+, for a marine pile or a method of repairing the same.

    216,    for a marine pile with a protective sleeve or coating.

    274+,   for sheet piles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    14,     Bridges, subclasses 75 and 77.3 for piers specifically adapted to
    support bridge spans.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 720.1+ for shafts
    in general (e.g., utility pole).


CLS 405/232
TXT Process or apparatus for installing:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 231 including a step or means for
    positioning or forming the elongated member in the earth in the position in
    which it is to be used.

    (1)     Note.  The means for constructing or placing a pile is a device
    which is not a part of the completed pile.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, appropriate subclasses for processes and means for
    installing casing and other well structure.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, appropriate subclasses for means to
    impact an earth penetrating means which may be broadly claimed as a pile.
    Class 405 provides for a method of driving a pile.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, appropriate subclasses for forming
    a hole for the reception of a pile.


CLS 405/233
TXT Casting in situ hardenable fluent material: Method or apparatus under
    subclass 232 including a step or means for forming the elongated member or
    a portion thereof in approximately the position in which it is to be used
    by placing a flowable material (e.g., cement) and then permitting or
    causing the flowable material to set or congeal into a stable mass.

    (1)     Note.  Forming a foundation pile by mixing cementitious material
    with the earth in situ is considered earth treatment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222+,   for cast in situ marine foundations and method and apparatus for
    constructing the same.

    267,    for the formation of an underground construction by filling a
    subterranean cavity with cement, or by mixing cement with the earth in situ.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclasses 285+ for cementing, plugging, or consolidating in
    a well, or well conduit.

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 51 for a mold for forming a post in situ.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 31+ for a process of casting a structural installation in situ
    with no earth working claimed.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 59 for apparatus for casting a construction wherein a subterranean
    feature is employed as a shaping means.


CLS 405/234
TXT With heating, cooling, or explosion:

    Method apparatus under subclass 233 wherein the force generated by an
    explosive charge is utilized during installation of the elongated member,
    or a step or means is included for applying to or removing heat from the
    columnar member or an installing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130+,   for temperature modification or control of an earthen formation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclass 286 for a process of cementing a well including
    exploding; and subclass 288 for a process of cementing a well including
    heating.


CLS 405/235
TXT With subsequent moving:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 233 including a step or means for moving
    the elongated member of a portion thereof after it has been formed in situ.


CLS 405/236
TXT Subsurface dispensing of material for flow toward surface:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 233 in which the flowable material in
    being placed causes the preceding material to flow upward from the point at
    which it is introduced into the member being formed.


CLS 405/237
TXT Forming subsurface enlargement:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 233 in which the configuration of the
    formed in situ member is such that a cross-sectional area below the surface
    in which the member is being formed will be greater than the
    cross-sectional area at the surface (e.g., the formation of a subsurface
    bulb or bulge).


CLS 405/238
TXT Preformed enlargement cavity:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 237 including a step or means for
    forming an enlarged portion in an excavation prior to introducing a charge
    of flowable hardenable material therein to form the enlargement.


CLS 405/239
TXT Providing embedded metallic reinforcement: Method or apparatus under
    subclass 233 including a step or means for positioning metallic material in
    the flowable material prior to the setting or congealing thereof for the
    purpose of reinforcement.


CLS 405/240
TXT Dispensing fluent material while withdrawing dispenser:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 233 in which flowable material is
    delivered from an earth retaining form or a separate delivery means, and
    wherein the form or delivery means withdrawn from the earth as the flowable
    material is simultaneously placed therein.


CLS 405/241
TXT Dispensing auger:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 240 wherein the dispenser includes a
    helical rib along the length thereof for removing earthen material to form
    a pile cavity when the dispenser is rotated.


CLS 405/242
TXT Driven dispenser with separable tip:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 240 wherein the form or delivery means
    is initially provided at its lower end with means to facilitate penetration
    in the earth, which means remains in the cavity as the form or delivery
    means is withdrawn.


CLS 405/243
TXT Withdrawing form structure:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 233 in which the fluent material is
    placed in a form, and after the form is substantially filled, the form is
    withdrawn from the member, said withdrawal occurring before or after the
    setting or congealing of the member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclass 287 for a process of cementing a well including a
    step of removing the molding or forming means.


CLS 405/244
TXT With anchoring of structure:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 232 in which either (a) a protrusion or
    enlargement is provided to inhibit the settling or withdrawal of the member
    into or from the earth, or (b) the member is made secure to the earth by
    applying a cementitious material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224+,   for a method or means for anchoring a marine structure to the
    seabed.

    237+,   for casting a columnar structure in situ, wherein the same is
    provided with a subsurface enlargement.

    259.1+, and the search notes thereunder for subject matter relating to
    earth anchors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 155+ for piercing
    or expanding anchors which in use are buried in the earth.


CLS 405/245
TXT Driving removable wall supporting core:
    Method or apparatus under subclass 232 in which the elongated member
    comprises a hollow shell which is driven into the earth by means which is
    adapted to extend within the interior of said hollow shell to prevent the
    buckling in or collapsing of the walls thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclass 128 for an anvil to transmit
    impact from a hammer head to a tool or the like.


CLS 405/246
TXT Diametrically retractable core:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 245 in which the core is adapted to be
    readily reduced in diameter to facilitate removal or insertion of the core
    from or into the hollow shell.


CLS 405/247
TXT Fluid pressure actuated:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 246 wherein a liquid or gas under
    pressure is employed to change the diameter of the core.


CLS 405/248
TXT With subsurface fluid discharge:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 232 including a step or means for
    dispensing a fluid below the earth surface to assist in positioning or
    forming said columnar member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163,    for submerged pipe laying apparatus and methods employing fluid
    jets to entrench the pipe in the bottom.

    226,    for a method or apparatus for sinking a marine structure into the
    seabed using fluid jets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 67 for a process of
    boring by fluid erosion; and subclass 424 and the search noted for earth
    boring nozzles.


CLS 405/249
TXT Caisson or hollow shaft:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 232 wherein the cross section of the
    elongated member is initially in the shape of an annulus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8+,     for pressurized pneumatic caissons.

    133,    for subject matter relating to a vertical passageway in the earth.

    233+,   for methods or apparatus for casting a hollow pier or filling a
    caisson with concrete in situ.

    256+,   for a concrete hollow pier or caisson.


CLS 405/250
TXT Comprising series of connected longitudinal sections having diverse
    compositions: Elongated member under subclass 231 comprising two or more
    distinct sections serially connected in end-to-end fashion, and wherein at
    least one of said sections is made of a substance different than that of an
    adjacent section.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 721.1+ and 726.1+
    for composite shafts (e.g., utility poles).


CLS 405/251
TXT With joint or connection between sections of similar material:

    Elongated member under subclass 231 comprising a plurality of longitudinal
    sections of similar material and including means for connecting the
    sections end-to-end.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 726.1+ for shafts
    comprised of end-to-end connected sections.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for a connecting
    means, per se.


CLS 405/252
TXT Between concrete sections:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 251 wherein the connecting means is
    employed to join one concrete section to another concrete section.


CLS 405/252.1
TXT Pile having screw threads:
    Subject matter under subclass 231 comprising a pile having helical ribs
    thereon enabling said pile to be screwed into the ground.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224+,   for pile with screw threads in a marine environment.


CLS 405/253
TXT With driving or cutting tip:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 231 relating to the provision of means
    at the lower end of the elongated member to facilitate penetration of the
    member into the earth when an external force is applied to said member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 19+ for drive points
    for boring without earth removal; and subclasses 414+ for impact-type bits.


CLS 405/254
TXT Longitudinally ribbed:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 253 wherein the elongated member or
    driving tip is provided with a protruding ridge along its length or a
    portion thereof.


CLS 405/255
TXT With end cap:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 231 wherein a cover member is positioned
    at either end of the elongated member either before or after said columnar
    member is positioned or formed in the earth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 301 for an end cap
    for a shaft.


CLS 405/256
TXT Concrete:

    Elongated member under subclass 231 composed of concrete, plain or
    reinforced.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    275,    for concrete sheet piles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 722 for a concrete
    shaft (e.g., utility pole).


CLS 405/257
TXT With form or casing:

    Elongated member under subclass 256 which, when installed in the earth,
    comprises an elongated concrete body substantially enclosed by a distinct
    outer shell, which may also be concrete.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233+,   for methods and apparatus for forming concrete piles in situ.


CLS 405/258
TXT EARTH TREATMENT OR CONTROL:

    Method or apparatus under the class definition concerning the application
    of a force, substance, or structure to an earth formation to condition the
    formation or to prevent undesired movement thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130+,   for earth treatment including a step or means for adding or
    removing heat from an earth formation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    249+ for containment of hazardous or toxic waste in any manmade or natural
    cavity, in addition to any form of extraterrestrial storage.


CLS 405/259.1
TXT Rock or earth bolt or anchor:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 258 wherein a rodlike tension member
    penetrates the earth to either tie plural layers together and create
    compression stress within them, or secure a treating or control structure
    to the earth, or a method or apparatus for installing a rodlike member
    which resists withdrawal from the earth, and which includes a step or means
    for treating the earth (e.g., grouting).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232+,   for a method or apparatus for installing an elongated foundation
    member, e.g., pile, post, etc., adapted to support a superstructure thereon.

    259.5+, for rock or earth bolt or anchor with grouting feature.

    288+,   302.1, 302.2, and 302.3, for method or means to support a
    subterranean roof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 155+ for an
    expanding or piercing earth anchor, per se; subclasses 127.1+ for manually
    operated anchor positioning implement; or subclasses 741.11+ for a method
    of driving or positioning an earth anchor.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, appropriate subclasses for power-driven
    apparatus for driving a member, which may be an anchor, into the earth.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous threaded
    bolts of general utility.  See subclass 15 of Class 411 for the line
    between these classes.


CLS 405/259.2
TXT Frangible bolt:
    Subject matter under subclass 259.1 comprising a bolt having structure or a
    property such that it will break at a predetermined torque.

    (1)     Note.  The bolt is used with a grout in many cases.


CLS 405/259.3
TXT Expandable tube:
    Subject matter under subclass 259.1 comprising a device having means which
    permits it to expand after it is inserted into a hole in an earthen
    formation (e.g., a subterranean roof).


CLS 405/259.4
TXT Bolt having wedge expander:
    Subject matter under subclass 259.1 comprising a split shank for
    accommodating a wedge to expand the shank portion as the bolt is driven
    into a hole in an earthen formation.


CLS 405/259.5
TXT With settable material feature:
    Method or apparatus under subclass 259.1 wherein a congealable material
    (e.g., epoxy, resin, etc.) is applied to the earth surrounding the bolt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225,    for appropriate subject matter relating to a marine environment.

    266,    for grouting a pole or similar construction to the earth.


CLS 405/259.6
TXT Breaking canister or packet:
    Method or apparatus under subclass 259.5 wherein the insertion of the bolt
    into the earth destroys a container thereby releasing the settable material
    into the hole.


CLS 405/262
TXT With retaining wall:

    Method or apparatus under subclasses 259.1+ wherein the rodlike tension
    member supports a continuous earth confining barrier of indeterminate
    length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284+,   for a retaining wall ,per se.


CLS 405/263
TXT Chemical:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 258 wherein a substance which is to be
    used in or is formed by a chemical process is applied directly to an earth
    formation to either (a) form a coating on said formation, (b) impregnate
    the formation, or (c) fill a subterranean cavity within the formation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for treatment of the walls of an underground fluid storage cavity
    by a chemical composition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclasses 285+ for methods of cementing, plugging, or
    consolidating the earth around a well bore, usually under the surface of
    the ground.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 75+ for processes
    under that class definition including a step of treating in situ the earth
    or a roadway.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Class 523 subclasses 130+ for a composition containing a
    synthetic resin or natural rubber and having utility in sealing fissures or
    crevices in stone, rock, or other subterranean formations or in
    consolidating a formation in a well or in cementing a well or to processes
    of preparing said composition.


CLS 405/264
TXT Organic:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 263 wherein the composition of matter
    contains carbon.


CLS 405/265
TXT Bituminous:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 264 wherein the organic compound is a
    derivative of petroleum, coal tar, or similar compound.


CLS 405/266
TXT Cementitious (e.g., grouting):

    Method or apparatus under subclass 263 wherein the composition of matter is
    an inorganic hardenable fluent material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264,    for application of cement that includes an organic composition
    (e.g., filler).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 713+ for
    portland-type cements, per se.


CLS 405/267
TXT Filling subterranean cavity (e.g., underground wall):

    Method or apparatus under subclass 266 in which the settable material is
    introduced into a preformed or existing subterranean cavity to form a
    barrier or similar construction within the formation, wherein the walls of
    the cavity define the shape of the finished construction.

    (1)     Note.  The settable material must directly contact the earth.
    Hence, the use of a form to construct an underground concrete wall would
    preclude placement of a patent herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109,    for a dam or levee having an impervious core or a method of
    construction the same.

    229,    for a method of strengthening a deteriorated foundation by filling
    voids therein with cement.

    233+,   for methods and apparatus for casting foundation piles in situ.

    275,    for concrete sheet piles which are either precast or are cast in
    situ by using a shaping means (form) other than an earthen cavity.


CLS 405/268
TXT Lining:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 266 wherein the settable material is
    applied to an exposed surface of the earth formation to form a layer
    thereon.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter relating to the formation of a lining in a
    subterranean cavity is included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    for subject matter relating to the formation of a shaft, including
    lining the same with cement.

    150,    for a cast in situ tunnel lining. 257, for a cast in situ hollow
    pier or caisson employed as a foundation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for a
    method or apparatus for forming or repairing a highway, pathway, or walkway
    structure.


CLS 405/269
TXT Injector:

    Apparatus under subclass 266 for forcing the settable material into the
    earth.


CLS 405/270
TXT Impermeabilization:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 258 wherein a structure is applied to an
    earth formation to make the same resistant to the flow of liquids.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for a subsurface moisture barrier placed between two horizontal
    layers of earth for drainage or irrigation purposes.

    53+,    for a fluid storage cavity in or on the earth provided with a fluid
    impermeable barrier.

    267,    for a method or apparatus for placing a cementitious material in an
    excavation to form an impermeable barrier.

    268,    for a method or apparatus for coating an earthen formation with a
    cementitious material to render said formation impermeable.


CLS 405/271
TXT Compaction:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 258 concerning the application of a load
    or cyclic force to cause consolidation of the formation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, appropriate subclasses for details of
    means to drive or deliver a blow to a tool.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 122+ for rotating
    drum compacting devices, and especially subclass 127 for rotating drum
    compacting devices specific to slopes or trenches.  As between Class 404
    and Class 405, rotating drum compacting devices will be placed in Class 404
    regardless of the disclosed utility. Class 405 will take those patents
    which claim rotating drum compacting combined with an additional operation
    of the Class 405 type.  Further, see subclass 133 of Class 404 for tampers
    used to prepare a road bed.


CLS 405/272
TXT Shoring, bracing, or cave-in prevention:
    Method or apparatus under subclass 258 concerning prevention of earth
    movement by means of an external structural support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8+,     for a pressurized caisson.

    132+,   for a shoring method or apparatus combined with a step or means
    forming an underground passageway (e.g., tunnel) especially 133, for a
    caisson or other shoring means which remains in the earth as part of a
    finished shaft or which includes shaft excavating means.

    333,    for subject matter relating to a caisson which remains with a
    finished foundation.


CLS 405/273
TXT Cribbing:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 272 wherein the structural support is an
    earth confining barrier comprising a number of superimposed and juxtaposed
    elements arranged to define voids or interstices adapted to be filled with
    earth or other loose material to prevent undesired movement of the barrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for cribbing employed specifically as a wave or flow dissipator.


CLS 405/274
TXT Sheet piles:

    Method of apparatus under subclass 272 wherein the structural support is an
    earth confining barrier comprising a series of contiguous elongated members
    which are maintained in a substantially upright position solely by driving
    or otherwise positioning a substantial portion of the members below the
    earth surface.

    (1)     Note.  Since most sheet piles are of general utility (e.g.,
    retaining walls, foundation, cofferdams, caissons, etc.) all patents with
    claims not specifically limiting in regard to utility have been classified
    as original in this and indented subclasses.  Those patents claiming method
    or apparatus restricted to an area other than earth retaining have been
    placed in the appropriate subclasses above and cross-referenced here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231+,   for piles employed as foundations and methods and apparatus for
    installing the same.


CLS 405/275
TXT Concrete:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 274 wherein the elongated members are
    made of concrete, plain or reinforced.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    267,    for subject matter relating to the formation of an underground
    wall, wherein a cementitious material is introduced into and directly
    contacts the sides of an excavation.


CLS 405/276
TXT Metal:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 274 wherein the elongated members are
    made of metal.


CLS 405/277
TXT C or I sections:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 276 wherein the elongated members are
    individually or collectively of channel or I-shape in cross section.


CLS 405/278
TXT Head and claw interlock:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 276 wherein the elongated members have
    on each edge an enlarged "head" and a protruding "claw", as viewed in cross
    section, the "head" of each edge adapted to slip between the "head" and
    "claw" of the edge of the next member of the series.


CLS 405/279
TXT With separate fastening, reinforcing, or sealing means:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 276 wherein a separate means is provided
    which is adapted to be secured to the elongated members to either secure
    one member or another, prevent a member from deforming or yielding under
    stress, or make a juncture between members impervious to some material.


CLS 405/280
TXT Cellular:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 276 wherein the elongated members either
    singly or collectively define an enclosed space or compartment.


CLS 405/281
TXT Bulb and socket interlock:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 276 wherein an elongated member is
    joined to an adjacent one by an enlarged protuberance along an edge of one
    of the members captively engaged in a corresponding recess along the edge
    of the other member.


CLS 405/282
TXT Trench shoring:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 272 pertaining to a temporary bracing to
    prevent movement of the earthen walls of a longitudinal, horizontal, open
    topped excavation of indeterminate length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149,    for subject matter relating to tunneling by cut and cover method.


CLS 405/283
TXT Shield type:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 282 wherein the temporary bracing moves
    with the work as the excavation continues.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141+,   for a shield employed specifically in the formation of an
    underground passageway.


CLS 405/284
TXT Retaining wall:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 272 wherein the structural support
    comprises a substantially vertical barrier positioned to prevent earth
    lying against one side thereof from shifting.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes "sea walls" with no wave of flow
    dissipation feature.

    (2)     Note.  Bridge approaches with abutments comprising a retaining wall
    type structure (usually a reinforced wall) are generally classified in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16+,    for a revetment, and see the notes to the subclass definition for
    the distinction between a revetment and a retaining wall.

    21+,    for a retaining or "sea" wall with wave or flow dissipation
    features.

    262,    for the combination of a retaining wall and means to anchor the
    same to the earth.

    273,    for a crib-type retaining wall.


CLS 405/285
TXT Pile and panel:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 284 wherein the vertical barrier
    comprises a plurality of spaced elongated columnar members driven or
    otherwise positioned in the ground and between which are supported wall
    sections which serve to retain the earth lying against one side thereof.


CLS 405/286
TXT Concrete:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 284 wherein the vertical barrier or a
    portion thereof is composed of concrete, plain or reinforced.


CLS 405/287
TXT Cast in situ:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 286 wherein the barrier is formed of
    concrete in the position in which it is to be used.


CLS 405/287.1
TXT Cast in situ:
    Subject matter under subclass 272 wherein the structure for supporting a
    subterranean formation is made from a settable material which is allowed to
    congeal on-site.


CLS 405/288
TXT Roof support:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 272 wherein a tunnel or mine overhead is
    braced to prevent cave-in.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 351+ for props and braces of general utility.


CLS 405/289
TXT Inflatable:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 288 wherein the roof support includes a
    pliant receptacle which is filled with a fluid under pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling
    Force,subclass 93 for inflatable jacks of general utility.


CLS 405/290
TXT Jack:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 288 wherein an extensible, vertical prop
    supports the overhead.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclasses for
    hydraulic actuators in general.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    appropriate subclasses for jacks of general utility.


CLS 405/291
TXT Mobile:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 290 wherein the jack is provided with a
    means which allows it to be moved from place to place.


CLS 405/292
TXT Position restoring:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 291 for returning the prop to its
    initial attitude when it has been relieved of the roof load.


CLS 405/293
TXT With canopy extension:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 291 wherein the roof supporting section
    of the prop includes means associated therewith which can be projected
    outwardly from an edge of the section into a roof supporting orientation.


CLS 405/294
TXT Telescoping:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 293 wherein the extension is projected
    outwardly in a plane parallel to the roof contacting surface of the section.


CLS 405/295
TXT Cantilevered:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 291 wherein a connecting member is
    pivotally attached at one end to a roof supporting section of the prop and
    at the other end to the base of the prop and a force is applied to the
    connecting member to move the roof supporting section to its operative
    position.


CLS 405/296
TXT With rubble shield:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 291 wherein means secured to the prop
    provide protection from falling debris.

    (1)     Note.  The protection means provided for in this subclass must not
    provide support for the roof.


CLS 405/297
TXT With contour following feature:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 291 wherein the prop includes means
    permitting the base or roof supporting section to follow irregularities in
    the surface of the floor or roof as the prop is advanced.


CLS 405/298
TXT Under load advanceable:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 291 wherein the prop is advanced while
    the roof supporting section remains in its load bearing orientation.


CLS 405/299
TXT Self-advanceable:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 291 wherein the prop is self-propelled.


CLS 405/300
TXT Paired:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 299 wherein two props are laterally
    connected so that when one prop is in the roof supporting orientation it
    serves as an anchor for advancing the other prop.


CLS 405/301
TXT Nested:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 300 wherein one prop consists of two
    laterally spaced rigidly connected sections with the other prop received
    therebetween.


CLS 405/302
TXT Control system:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 291 for supply of motive energy to the
    prop via a regulating circuit to actuate the prop.


CLS 405/302.1
TXT Subterranean roof plate:
    Subject matter under subclass 288 comprising a plate, intended to be used
    in conjunction with a bolt, for supporting an overhead earthen formation
    (e.g., tunnel).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259.1+, for rock or earth bolt or anchor.


CLS 405/302.2
TXT Cable or strap support:
    Subject matter under subclass 288 comprising a cable or strap which is used
    to provide support for an overhead earthen formation in a subterranean
    cavity (e.g., tunnel).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259.1+, for rock or earth bolt or anchor.


CLS 405/302.3
TXT Mesh support:
    Subject matter under subclass 288 comprising a web of interlocked or
    intertwined elements or fabric which is secured to an overhead earthen
    formation in a subterranean cavity to support the roof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259.1+, for rock or earth bolt or anchor.


CLS 405/303
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition not provided for in any of the
    above subclasses.


CLS 406/
TTL CONVEYORS:  FLUID CURRENT

CLS 406/
TXT Apparatus and methods for conveying solid material or articles which are
    guided or supported to travel along a path by means of or with the
    assistance of a fluid current.

    GLOSSARY

    CARRIER

    An auxiliary device for use in a fluid current conveyor comprising a
    container for carrying material or articles while being conveyed through
    the fluid current conveyor.

    FLUID CURRENT CONVEYOR

    Structure which guides or supports the load from the fluid conveyor inlet*
    to the fluid conveyor outlet* and wherein the fluid current acts upon the
    load from the inlet* to the outlet*.

    FLUID CONVEYOR INLET

    The point at which the load is first guided or supported and is acted upon
    by the fluid current.  The inlet must also be subsequent to any structure
    (e.g., terminal, receptacle) for statically supporting the load at the
    entrance to the conveyor.

    FLUID CONVEYOR OUTLET

    The point at which the load is either no longer guided or supported, or is
    no longer acted upon by the fluid current.  The outlet must also be prior
    to any structure (e.g., terminal, receptacle) for statically supporting the
    load at the exit from the conveyor.

    RECEPTACLE

    A hopper or similar container for holding a quantity of load material or
    articles and having a discharge or intake opening therein.

    TERMINAL

    Structure at or adjacent the outlet or inlet of a fluid current conveyor
    for either (a) effecting intake or discharge or load articles individually
    into or from the conveyor, or (b) for accepting load articles as they are
    discharged individually from the conveyor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 3.5+ for
    means to pass a solid cleaning agent and a fluid carrier through tubular
    work; and subclasses 300.1+ for means to remove foreign material by air
    blast or suction.  Class 406 takes devices which are specifically adapted
    to transport material from a pile or stack on a surface or in a receptacle
    to another location.

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses 97.5, 105, and 205 for
    fiber preparation apparatus combined with a fluid current conveyor for
    feeding the fiber.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses
    for subject matter relating to the removal of liquids from solids by drying
    and for contacting of solids with gases or vapors for purposes other than
    or in addition to conveying.  See particularly subclasses 359 and 576+ for
    fluid current conveyors for conveying the treated solids.

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 202, 209+, 242+, and 244+ for snow blowers;
    and subclasses 307+ for dredgers.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 6.5 for a fish
    gathering or catching apparatus combined with a fluid current conveyor to
    the boat.

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 12.8+ and 30+ for harvesters having
    pneumatic conveyors.  Claims reciting only the conveying structure with no
    additional treatment are properly classified in Class 406.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, appropriate subclasses for processes of treating ores wherein the
    ore undergoing treatment is conveyed by or suspended in a gaseous medium.

    83,     Cutting, subclass 402 for cutting apparatus having fluid current
    means to convey work relative to the cutting station.

    89,     Ordnance, subclass 46 for an ordnance loader including a fluid lift.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, for processes of gas separation
    involving steps resulting in separation of a gas and solid particles
    entrained therein.  Fluid current conveyor methods which include a step for
    separating the solids from the fluid at the point of delivery are
    classified in Class 406.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, for apparatus used in separation of a
    gas and solid particles entrained therein.  Fluid current conveyors which
    include a device for separating the solids from the fluid at the point of
    delivery are classified in Class 406.

    99,     Food and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 406 for apparatus which
    convey food by a current of cooling liquid.

    104,    Railways, subclass 138.1 for tubular conduits having tracks adapted
    to be engaged by wheels on a carrier; and subclasses 154 and 155+ for
    hydraulic and pneumatic car propulsion systems, respectively, which
    comprise structure located along the trackway.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, appropriate subclasses for carriers having
    wheels with grooves or similar structure adapted to cooperate with track to
    guide the carrier.

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 104+ for furnace structure combined with means
    for feeding solid fuel to a furnace using an entraining fluid current.
    Class 406 provides for the feeding device, per se, or the feeding device
    and a nominally recited furnace (no structure recited).

    114,    Ships, subclasses 183+ for a device for expelling ash or other
    refuse from a ship by entraining the ash or refuse in a fluid current.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 308+ for coating apparatus which
    propel a solid particulate material by fluid current to apply the material
    to a base.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 844 for fluid current conveyors
    specifically adapted to convey livestock.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 23 and 24 for engines
    having means for feeding solid fuel by means of a fluid current.

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, subclasses 56+ for projectile
    throwing or propelling apparatus which utilize a working fluid to transmit
    force to the projectile.

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 110 for a cigar or cigarette machine provided
    with a suction device to assist the feeding operation.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses for
    subject matter relating to the contact of solids with liquids for various
    purposes other than conveying (e.g., cleaning).

    137,    Fluid Handling, appropriate subclasses for apparatus and processes
    relating to fluid handling (Class 137 is residual). See especially subclass
    268 for fluid handling devices which include a member for holding and
    bringing a fluid and a material to be dissolved or entrained into contact
    (no conveying involved).

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, appropriate subclasses for conduits in
    general and conveyor conduits having no claimed structure peculiar to fluid
    current conveying of solids.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 67+ for a fluid current conveyor claimed in combination with a
    separable receiver or structure associated with a separable receiver (e.g.,
    means to feed bags past the conveyor outlet).

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 252 for a woodworking machine having a dust
    conveyor.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 200+ for apparatus having a fluid
    current conveyor for projecting mold forming material against a shaping
    surface.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, appropriate subclasses for a
    method or apparatus for forming or enlarging an elongated hole in the earth
    and including a step or means for conveying material from the hole by a
    fluid current.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 380 for power-driven conveyors
    having pressurized fluid means for changing the attitude of the load
    articles; subclass 434 for air blast or suction diverters for arranging or
    rearranging streams of load articles on a conveyor; and subclass 493 for
    conveyors utilizing impinging fluid to feed, shift, or discharge the load,
    or to clean, sterilize, or lubricate the conveyor.  Class 406 takes all
    other combinations of a fluid current conveyor and a power-driven conveyor.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses  46+, 146+, and
    400+ for a method or apparatus for recovering or treating naturally
    occurring mineral oil wherein a solid material is elevated by a gaseous
    fluid current. Patents claiming such solids elevating structure and only
    nominally reciting the chemical process or apparatus (e.g., "a catalytic
    converter comprising...") have been classified in Class 406.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses for a method or apparatus for separating solid materials and
    assorting or segregating them in grades or classes according to physical
    characteristics. Class 406 takes subject matter relating to the control of
    the destination of the load in a fluid current conveyor having a plurality
    of paths, where the controlling code or characteristic is placed or formed
    on the load specifically for the purpose of controlling the destination
    thereof.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses for
    processes and apparatus for separating a solid from a solid-liquid mixture.
     Fluid current conveyors which include means for separating the solids from
    a liquid carrier at the point of delivery are classified in Class 406.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 278 for an apparatus which separates a
    discrete article from a source of supply of such articles and utilizes a
    fluid under pressure to separate or to move each article from the supply
    source toward a point of egress.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 61+ for automatically controlled dispensers
    with fluid pressure discharge assistance; subclass 617 for ambulant
    dispensers utilizing a fluid flow to discharge a material; subclass 630+
    for other dispensers utilizing a fluid flow to discharge a material from a
    supply; and subclass 195 for dispensers having means to agitate the
    contents by gas.

    Class 222 takes the following:

    (1)     Separating and dispensing a predetermined quantity or charge of
    material from a supply on demand (e.g., those devices wherein flow of
    discharging fluid is created by a reciprocating hand pump, squeezable bulb,
    etc.).

    (2)     Pressurized aerosol containers having a discharge-controlling valve.

    (3)     Discharging material from a receptacle by pressurized fluid acting
    on the top of the material to force the same through a discharge outlet
    (with no fluid current conveying claimed after the outlet).

    (4)     Discharging material from a receptacle by a stream of fluid which
    entrains the material and carries the same through a discharge outlet (no
    conduit or other guiding or supporting structure subsequent to the outlet
    being disclosed).

    (5)     Gas agitation of material in a receptacle to allow the material to
    flow through a discharge outlet.  Class 406 will take a well-defined fluid
    current conveyor inside of a receptacle, and which may move material
    through a discharge outlet (e.g., and inclined permeable member at the
    bottom of a receptacle).

    (6)     Dispensing of a nonsolid substance.



    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclass 7 for a method
    of or subclasses 97.1+ for an apparatus to advance material of
    indeterminate length by means of a fluid current.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 77+ for
    orchard-type mobile distributors which discharge material by means of a
    gaseous fluid current; and subclasses 654+ for apparatus for scattering
    solid material which include means generating a gaseous mixing current.
    Patents claiming specific nozzle structure or orientation whereby the
    material is sprayed or scattered in the air or over an extended surface
    area are properly classified in Class 239, except when discharge is to a
    localized pile or a receptacle.  See the class definition for Class 239 for
    further distinctions between that class and Class 406.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 15+ and
    38+ for method or apparatus including a step or means for comminuting solid
    material combined with fluid current conveying of the material.  See the
    Class 241 main definition, section 9, for statement of the line between
    Classes 241 and 406.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, for more than a nominal supply or
    take-up coil structure (e.g., a support for such a coil, a cooperative
    relationship between a tension or exhaust detector and reel driving or reel
    stopping means, etc.); subclasses 615.11+ a residual locus for a material
    fluid suspension guide or guard.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, appropriate subclasses for a valve in
    general.  Class 406 provides for valves when claimed structure is recited
    which is specific to fluid current conveying of solids.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 134.4 for a device for placing a wire or strand in a conduit by
    connecting a vane or similar fixture to the wire or strand and moving it
    through the conduit by a fluid current therein.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 121 for conveying and projecting particulate material by means of
    a fluid current onto a collecting surface to form an article.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclass 182 for apparatus which employ a
    fluid current to move solid material through a heating zone.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclasses 194+ for a pneumatic
    conveyor for individual flexible sheets.

    291,    Track Sanders, subclasses 3+ for fluid current conveying of sand or
    like material to vehicle wheel treads or vehicle tracks.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 18
    and 64+ for fluid current conveying of mined material.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 3+, 10+, and 101+ for agitation of material
    in a receptacle by the introduction of a gas under pressure, with no
    discharge outlet being claimed.  See also the search note to Class 222,
    Dispensing, for the distinction between agitating of that class and this
    class (406).

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 80+ for a method or
    structure for modifying or directing the flow of a river, stream, etc., to
    transport articles or vessels thereon. See specifically subclasses 119+ for
    flumes without specific structure which recognizes the conveying of solids.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 795.5 for removing articles
    from a stack by fluid blast; subclass 221 for apparatus for moving material
    between zones of different pressure separated by an air lock; subclasses
    288+ for a static receptacle and means for charging or discharging or
    facilitating the charging or discharging of the receptacle; and subclass
    676 for supporting an article by air or moving the article by mechanical or
    manual means.  Class 406 takes ambulant fluid current conveyors which would
    otherwise be classifiable in Class 414.

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, appropriate subclasses for
    rotary kinetic fluid pumps in general.  Class 406 provides for similar
    pumps (subclasses 98+) which include structure which recognizes a solid
    material entrained in the fluid (e.g., an attached solids receptacle or a
    separate opening in the casing for entry of the solid material).

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), appropriate subclasses
    for specific impeller structure for a fluid pump.

    417,    Pumps, appropriate subclasses for general subject matter relating
    to the pumping of fluids.  Class 417 provides for subject matter relating
    to the pumping of slurries, fluent solids, and the like if handled in a
    manner not inconsistent with the handling of fluids.  Patents claiming
    specific structure or steps indicating conveying of solids in a fluid
    current (e.g., "means for controlling the input of solids into a fluid
    stream in response to pump speed...") should be considered for Class 406.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclasses for
    rotary expansible chamber pumps in general.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 80.1+ for apparatus including means for depositing particles on
    a shaping surface from a gaseous suspension.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 14+ and 58+ for a method or apparatus,
    respectively, which includes a step or means for conveying or agitating
    solid material with a heating gas.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 38+ and 75+ for a sandblasting process or
    machine.  Mere conveying of sand by fluid current with an incidental
    disclosure of sandblasting is properly classified in this class (406).

    604,    Surgery, subclass 58 for powder despensers.


CLS 406/1
TXT SELECTIVE DELIVERY:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein either (a) a load path is
    optionally communicable via a flow diverter to any one of a plurality of
    specified conveyor outlets*, or (b) a flow diverter is controlled in
    response to destination information carried by the load.

    (1)     Note.  A switching means or load diverter, per se, is excluded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155+,   for a conveyor having plural outlets.

    181+,   for a load flow diverter, divider, or combiner, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclasses 88.01+ for selective delivery of a railway
    rolling stock.


CLS 406/2
TXT Destination controlled by operator at remote site:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein means are provided to enable a
    person at a location removed from the flow diverter to select the
    particular outlet*.


CLS 406/3
TXT Destination controlled by sensed condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the flow diverter is operated in
    response to the occurrence of a predetermined event, or a change in a state
    or property in any of the following:  the fluid conveyor* or an associated
    device, the conveying fluid, load, or the immediate environment of the
    conveyor affecting the operation thereof.


CLS 406/4
TXT Controlled by coded load:

    Subject matter under subclass 3 wherein the flow diverter is actuated in
    response to information carried by the load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for a coded carrier, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses for separation of loads having different inherent physical
    characteristics.


CLS 406/5
TXT Magnetic material on load:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 wherein the flow diverter is actuated in
    response to a magnetic inscription carried by the load.


CLS 406/6
TXT Electrical contact on load:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 wherein the destination information carried
    by the load is in the form of electrically conductive material adapted to
    complete a circuit which operates the flow diverter.


CLS 406/7
TXT Adjustable or changeable code on load:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 wherein the destination information carried
    by the load may be readily changed whereby the load may be sent to any one
    of a plurality of destinations.


CLS 406/8
TXT Presence or size of recess or protrusion on front of load:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 wherein the destination information carried
    by the load is in the form of either a concave or convex leading surface,
    or an indentation or protrusion on the foremost surface of the load that is
    perpendicular to its direction of travel.


CLS 406/9
TXT Protrusion:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 where the destination information is in the
    form of a convex leading surface, or a protrusion formed on the foremost
    surface of the load that is perpendicular to its direction of travel.


CLS 406/10
TXT WITH MEANS TO CONTROL CONVEYING FLUID OR MOVEMENT OF LOAD IN RESPONSE TO
    SENSED CONDITION:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a step or means is
    provided for:

    (a)     detecting any of the following characteristics: a state or property
    or change therein, or the random occurrence of a predetermined event in any
    of the following:  the fluid conveyor* or a device associated therewith,
    the conveying fluid, load, or the immediate environment of the conveyor*
    affecting the operation thereof,

    (b)     regulating a (a result of such detection) the movement of the load
    or conveying fluid.

    (1)     Note.  This definition requires a patent to claim at least 3
    discrete instrumentalities for original placement herein.  One of these
    must be a fluid conveyor*.  The other 2 are:



    (a)     a sensor (e.g., thermocouple, photocell system, etc.) to detect a
    condition as stated in (a) of the definition, and

    (b)     a controller (e.g., pump motor, valve, solenoid, etc.) to regulate
    movement of the load or conveying fluid.

    (2)     Note.  "Regulating" as used above includes initiating or
    terminating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for devices having a sensor which initiates a signal, but no
    claimed controller.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 61+ for automatically controlled dispensers
    having fluid pressure discharge assistance.


CLS 406/11
TXT Responsive to obstacle in system:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein the sensor detects the presence of
    an article or quantity of material which is lodged in the conveyor*.


CLS 406/12
TXT Control of conveying fluid:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein the controller regulates the
    conveying fluid current or pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177+,   for a gate which opens in response to the arrival of a load
    article, but does not alter the movement of the load or conveying fluid.


CLS 406/13
TXT Reversing of fluid current in single tube system:

    Subject matter under subclass 12 wherein the controller causes the
    conveying fluid current to reverse its direction of flow through the
    conveyor*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111     and 112, for other reversible single tube conveyors.


CLS 406/14
TXT Responsive to velocity or pressure change of conveying fluid:

    Subject matter under subclass 12 wherein the controller is regulated by a
    sensor which either detects changes in the speed of the conveying fluid
    current or detects variations in conveying fluid pressure.

    (1)     Note.  Sensors which detect the presence or absence of the load by
    detecting changes in conveying fluid velocity or pressure are included in
    this subclass.


CLS 406/15
TXT To initiate or terminate fluid current:

    Subject matter under subclass 14 wherein the fluid current conveyor*
    assumes a dormant condition in which the fluid current is stopped or is
    substantially reduced, and wherein the controller either starts the
    conveying current or stops the conveying current and returns the conveyor*
    to its dormant state.


CLS 406/16
TXT In response to introduction or discharge of load:

    Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein the sensor detects a change in
    pressure or velocity of a fluid current as the load is introduced into or
    discharged from the conveyor* to start or stop the conveying current.


CLS 406/17
TXT Discharge and introduction:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 wherein the sensor detects a change in
    pressure or velocity of the conveying fluid current as the load is
    introduced into and when it is discharged from the conveyor* to start and
    stop the fluid current, respectively.


CLS 406/18
TXT With timer to terminate fluid current:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 wherein the sensor detects a change in
    pressure or velocity of the fluid current as the load is introduced into
    the conveyor* and activates a controller to start the conveying current,
    and wherein a timing mechanism is also activated to stop the conveying
    current after a predetermined time interval.


CLS 406/19
TXT Responsive to presence or absence or quantity of load:

    Subject matter under subclass 12 wherein the controller which regulates the
    flow or pressure of the conveying fluid is regulated by a sensor which
    detects either the amount of the load or whether or not the load is at a
    particular location.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14+,    for devices wherein the presence or absence of the load is
    determined by a pressure sensor.


CLS 406/20
TXT With stepped reset for each load article introduced at intake:

    Subject matter under subclass 19 including load article sensors at the
    inlet* and outlet* of the fluid current conveyor*, wherein the conveying
    fluid controller is activated or deactivated by a mechanism which is
    incrementally advanced toward a conveyor deactivating position each time a
    load article is detected at the outlet*, and is incrementally retracted
    from the deactivating position each time a load article is detected at the
    inlet*.


CLS 406/21
TXT With load detector at outlet to terminate fluid current:

    Subject matter under subclass 19 wherein a sensor is provided at the
    conveyor outlet* to detect the discharge of the load and activate or
    deactivate a controller which stops the conveying fluid current.


CLS 406/22
TXT With timer to terminate current:

    Subject matter under subclass 19 wherein a sensor which detects the
    presence or absence of the load activates a timing mechanism which in turn
    causes a controller to stop the conveying fluid current after a
    predetermined time interval.


CLS 406/23
TXT Level or weight of load in receptacle:

    Subject matter under subclass 19 wherein a sensor detects the height or the
    amount of the load in a hopper or other container associated with the fluid
    current conveyor*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    177,    Weighing Scales, appropriate subclass for patents claiming details
    of the weighing scale, or a weigher combined with a conveyor for moving
    material only as much material as in necessary to the weighing operation.


CLS 406/24
TXT At intake:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein the load container discharges
    directly into the inlet* of the fluid current conveyor*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 58 for a dispenser controlled automatically by
    the weight of the material in a supply container.


CLS 406/25
TXT And control of load input to receptacle:

    Subject matter under subclass 24 wherein an additional controller which
    regulates the load supply to the container is operated in response to the
    height or the amount of the load in the container.


CLS 406/26
TXT Responsive to movement of gate to initiate or terminate fluid current:

    Subject matter under subclass 12 wherein a closure is provided at the
    inlet* or outlet* of the fluid current conveyor past which the load is
    introduced into or discharged from the conveyor*, and wherein the sensor
    detects movement of the gate to activate or deactivate the fluid current
    controller.


CLS 406/27
TXT To closure of intake gate to initiate fluid current:

    Subject matter under subclass 26 wherein the sensor detects movement of a
    gate at the inlet* to its closed position and activates the controller to
    start the conveying fluid current.


CLS 406/28
TXT Control of load input or output:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein the controller either regulates
    the introduction of the load through the inlet* of the fluid current
    conveyor*, or regulates the discharge of the load from the outlet*.

    (1)     Note.  The term "regulates" as used herein includes preventing or
    permitting the introduction or discharge of the load (e.g., control of a
    gate locking device at the intake is proper for this subclass).


CLS 406/29
TXT Input:

    Subject matter under subclass 28 wherein the controller regulates the
    introduction of the load through the inlet* of the fluid current conveyor*.


CLS 406/30
TXT Responsive to pressure or velocity change of conveying fluid:

    Subject matter under subclass 29 wherein the load input controller is
    regulated by a sensor which either detects changes in the speed of the
    conveying fluid current or detects variation in conveying fluid pressure.


CLS 406/31
TXT Responsive to presence, absence, or quantity of load:

    Subject matter under subclass 29 wherein the load input controller is
    regulated by a sensor which detects either the amount of the load or
    whether or not the load is at a particular location.


CLS 406/32
TXT Level or weight of load in receptacle:

    Subject matter under subclass 31 wherein the sensor detects the height or
    the quantity of the load in a hopper or other container associated with the
    fluid current conveyor*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    177,    Weighing Scales, appropriate subclass for patents claiming details
    of the weighing scale, or a weigher combined with a conveyor which merely
    perfects the weighing operation.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 58 for a dispenser controlled automatically by
    the weight of the material in a supply container.


CLS 406/33
TXT In receptacle at discharge:

    Subject matter under subclass 32 wherein the hopper or container receives
    the load directly from the outlet* of the fluid current conveyor*.


CLS 406/34
TXT WITH SIGNAL, INDICATOR, OR INSPECTION MEANS:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means to produce or to
    observe a perceptible manifestation of or transmit intelligence regarding
    the load, the conveyor* or device associated therewith, or of a
    characteristic of any of the above.


CLS 406/35
TXT Audible:

    Subject matter under subclass 34 wherein a signal is transmitted in the
    form of sound waves.


CLS 406/36
TXT With load motion observing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 34 wherein means are provided by which a
    person may view the load over at least a portion of its travel through the
    conveyor* or a device associated therewith.


CLS 406/37
TXT Coded carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 34 wherein a carrier* is provided with coded
    information to control its destination and includes means providing a
    visual cue indicating the particular terminal to which the carrier will be
    transmitted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4+,     for coded carriers claimed in combination with a flow diverter
    which is controlled in response to the code.


CLS 406/38
TXT AMBULANT OR PORTABLE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the fluid current
    conveyor* is either (a) provided with means to facilitate movement of the
    conveyor* from one location to another (e.g., wheels, skids), or (b) is
    specifically adapted to be carried by an operator to the location of use or
    during use of the conveyor*.


CLS 406/39
TXT Vehicle mounted:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 wherein the fluid current conveyor* has
    attached thereto or is supported on a transport means having means (e.g.,
    wheels, skids, etc.) to facilitate movement of the conveyor* over the
    surface upon which it is supported.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, appropriate subclasses for vehicle mounted excavating
    means.

    56,     Harvesters, appropriate subclasses for harvesters having pneumatic
    conveyors combined with means for severing the crops.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses
    for vehicle mounted pneumatic conveyors having means for scattering or
    spraying a fluent material over an extended surface area.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, appropriate
    subclasses for a vehicle mounted fluid current conveyor combined with means
    for disintegrating hard material in situ.


CLS 406/40
TXT Plural vehicles:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 wherein the fluid current conveyor* or a
    portion thereof, is supported on two or more discrete transport means each
    having means to facilitate movement of the conveyor* over the surface.


CLS 406/41
TXT Towed vehicle:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 wherein the conveyor* or transport means
    is provided with means by which it can be connected to a device (e.g., a
    motor vehicle, line, etc.) to pull the conveyor* over the surface on which
    it is supported.


CLS 406/42
TXT Power takeoff:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 wherein the fluid current conveyor* is
    carried on, pulled by, or pushed by a motor vehicle, and wherein the motor
    propelling the vehicle operates the conveyor* or device associated
    therewith via a power transmission.


CLS 406/43
TXT With storage means on vehicle for fluid conveyor components:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 wherein the fluid current conveyor*
    includes means whereby the same may be assembled or disassembled, and
    wherein the transport means includes a specified portion where the
    disassembled conveyor parts are stowed.


CLS 406/44
TXT With auxiliary supporting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 wherein means in addition to the movement
    facilitating means is provided which is deployed at the location of
    intended use to stabilize the conveyor*.


CLS 406/45
TXT WITH MEANS TO PREVENT PIPELINE SLUMPING:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein means are provided to
    prevent settling of the load from the fluid when the fluid current
    conveyor* is shut down.


CLS 406/46
TXT WITH ADJUNCTIVE SUBSTANCE ADDED:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a substance in addition
    to and different than the load and conveying fluid is introduced prior to,
    or during conveying, or at discharge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     if the adjunctive substance added prevents pipeline slumping.


CLS 406/47
TXT Liquid:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 wherein the substance added is in a liquid
    state.


CLS 406/48
TXT Water:

    Subject matter under subclass 47 wherein the substance added is water.


CLS 406/49
TXT Solid:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 wherein the substance added is neither
    fluid nor gaseous.


CLS 406/50
TXT SLUG CONVEYING:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the load in the fluid
    current conveyor* is conveyed in groups or batches, with the space between
    consecutive groups or batches containing fluid only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63+,    for a rotary conveyor having material carrying pockets which
    successively feed material through the inlet of a fluid current conveyor.

    85,     for a pulsing fluid current.


CLS 406/51
TXT WITH DIVERSE POWER-DRIVEN CONVEYOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a driven load moving
    means in addition to the fluid current conveyor*.

    (1)     Note.  Pumps, per se, are excluded from the above definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses for power-driven
    conveyors, per se.


CLS 406/52
TXT Rotary:

    Subject matter under subclass 51 wherein the additional conveyor includes a
    load moving surface, each point of which moves in a circular path through
    360 degrees about a central axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 803.16 for rotary conveyors,
    per se.


CLS 406/53
TXT Screw:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein the load moving surfaces is in the
    shape of a helix.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 467.1, 550.1, 550.6 for screw
    conveyors, per se.


CLS 406/54
TXT With material recirculating screw:

    Subject matter under subclass 53 wherein a second load moving helical
    surface is provided which serves to return at least a portion of the load
    from the discharge end of the first helix to the intake of the same.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 84+ for subject matter relating to the
    working of rubber or heavy plastic in parallel screw conveyors.


CLS 406/55
TXT Including means to fluidize material:

    Subject matter under subclass 53 wherein means are provided to cause the
    load to assume a flowable state while being moved by the helical surface.


CLS 406/56
TXT Feeding to fluid conveyor inlet:

    Subject matter under subclass 53 wherein the screw conveyor discharges the
    load at or adjacent to the inlet* of the fluid current conveyor.


CLS 406/57
TXT Feeds to inlet of blower or pump:

    Subject matter under subclass 56 wherein the screw conveyor discharges
    directly into a driven device which propels the conveying fluid through the
    fluid current conveyor*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     for an endless conveyor which feeds the load through the intake of
    a blower or pump.

    96+,    for a blower or pump, per se, having a load intake opening in its
    housing.


CLS 406/58
TXT Screw axis coaxial with axis of rotary blower or pump:

    Subject matter under subclass 57 wherein the fluid propelling device
    includes a fluid propelling surface, each point of which moves in a
    circular path about a central axis, which axis lies on a common line with
    the rotary axis of the screw conveyor.


CLS 406/59
TXT Plural screw:

    Subject matter under subclass 57 wherein the screw conveyor comprises two
    or more discrete helical load moving surfaces.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes screw conveyors having two or more
    discrete helixes on a common shaft.


CLS 406/60
TXT With check valve between screw and fluid current conveyor:

    Subject matter under subclass 56 wherein means are provided along the load
    path between the screw conveyor and fluid current conveyor* which allows
    the load to pass in only one direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127+,   for a check valve between a receptacle and a fluid current conveyor.


CLS 406/61
TXT Fluid jet at conveyor inlet:

    Subject matter under subclass 56 wherein a concentrated stream of conveying
    fluid is directed downstream in the fluid current conveyor* at the
    discharge end of the screw conveyor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93+,    for booster fluid jets.

    144,    for a fluid jet at a conveyor inlet being fed by a receptacle.

    153,    for a fluid jet downstream of the inlet for inducing suction at the
    inlet.

    194,    for a conduit having a fluid nozzle associated therewith.


CLS 406/62
TXT Successively registering pockets:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein the load moving surface comprises
    a plurality of circumferentially spaced members or depressions, each of
    which defines by itself or along with a surrounding housing a chamber or
    cavity which rotates about a central axis, and isolates a quantity of the
    load from a supply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for rotary throwers.

    74,     for reciprocating trap chambers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 636 for fluid flow discharged dispensers
    having rotary trap chambers; and subclasses 367+ for other dispensers
    employing rotary trap chambers.


CLS 406/63
TXT Input to fluid conveyor:

    Subject matter under subclass 62 wherein the rotating chambers or cavities
    discharge the load at or adjacent to the inlet* of the fluid current
    conveyor*.


CLS 406/64
TXT With venting of pockets:

    Subject matter under subclass 63 wherein a pressure or vacuum condition in
    the chamber or cavities is neutralized prior to or after the point when
    each chamber or cavity communicates with a load supply.


CLS 406/65
TXT Having radial blades:

    Subject matter under subclass 63 wherein the load moving surface comprises
    a series of radially extending members distributed circumferentially about
    the central axis, the cavities or chambers being defined by adjacent
    members and a surrounding housing.


CLS 406/66
TXT Rotatable about vertical axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 65 wherein the central axis is substantially
    perpendicular to the earth's surface.


CLS 406/67
TXT Fluid flow discharges pockets:

    Subject matter under subclass 65 wherein the load is discharged from the
    rotating chambers or cavities by a fluid stream which may be the fluid
    conveyor current, or may emanate from a nozzle in the rotating cavities or
    chambers or located adjacent to the path thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 636 for fluid flow discharged dispenser having
    rotary trap chambers.


CLS 406/68
TXT Peripheral pockets formed on rotating member:

    Subject matter under subclass 63 wherein the load moving surface comprises
    a plurality of load-receiving cavities on the surface of a rotating member.


CLS 406/69
TXT Brush:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein a plurality of flexible bristles
    are provided to advance the load.


CLS 406/70
TXT Roller:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein the load moving surface comprises
    the periphery of a rotating annular or cylindrical member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 780+ for live roller conveyors.


CLS 406/71
TXT Thrower:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein the rotary load moving surface is
    adapted to contact the load with sufficient force and speed to propel the
    load through the air or along a path solely by said contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62+,    for similar rotary conveyors having or forming rotating material
    pockets.

    96+,    for impellers that additionally generate a fluid current to propel
    the load after it passes therethrough.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 638+ for rotary throwers, per
    se.


CLS 406/72
TXT Magazine:

    Subject matter under subclass 51 wherein the additional conveyor comprises
    a rack having a series of stations therein for load articles which are
    received on or discharged from the rack as each station is indexed to an
    outlet* or inlet* of the fluid current conveyor*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 69+ for cellular magazine-type
    dispensers.


CLS 406/73
TXT Reciprocating or oscillating:

    Subject matter under subclass 51 wherein the additional conveyor comprises
    a load moving surface which is movable to-and-fro along the same path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 750.1+ for a reciprocating
    conveyor, per se.


CLS 406/74
TXT With pocket:

    Subject matter under subclass 73 wherein the load moving surface either (a)
    comprises a depression formed on a reciprocating or oscillating member, or
    (b) is enclosed by and defines a chamber within a stationary housing.


CLS 406/75
TXT Vibrating:

    Subject matter under subclass 73 wherein the load moving surface moves
    to-and-fro in reciprocations or oscillations of small amplitude and high
    frequency.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 752.1 for a vibrating
    conveyor, per se.


CLS 406/76
TXT Pusher:

    Subject matter under subclass 73 wherein the load moving surface contacts
    and moves the load along a supporting surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 736+ for a reciprocating
    pusher conveyor, per se.


CLS 406/77
TXT Endless:

    Subject matter under subclass 51 wherein the additional conveyor comprises
    a driven load moving means which is carried by or comprises a surface of
    continuous belt or band.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 804+ for an endless conveyor,
    per se.


CLS 406/78
TXT Permeable belt:

    Subject matter under subclass 77 wherein the load moving means comprises an
    endless belt or band formed of a material that is previous to fluids and
    not to the load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 471.1 and 689.1  for endless
    conveyors having permeable belts which utilize suction to hold the load on
    the belt.


CLS 406/79
TXT At inlet to fluid conveyor:

    Subject matter under subclass 77 wherein the endless conveyor discharges
    the load at or adjacent to the inlet* of the fluid current conveyor*.


CLS 406/80
TXT Feeds to intake of blower or pump:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 wherein the endless conveyor discharges
    directly into a driven device which propels the conveying fluid through the
    fluid current conveyor*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57+,    for a screw conveyor feeding to the intake of a blower or pump.

    96+,    for a blower or pump having a load intake opening in its housing.


CLS 406/81
TXT Pushers, buckets, or tines:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 the load moving surface comprises either,
    (a) a plurality of discrete members carried by the belt or band and which
    contact and move the load along a supporting surface, (b) a plurality of
    containers carried by the belt or band, or (c) a plurality of elongated
    members protruding outwardly from the surface of the belt or band.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 692+ for conveyors having load
    impalers; subclasses 701+ for conveyors having buckets; and subclasses 725+
    for endless conveyors having pushers.


CLS 406/82
TXT At outlet of fluid conveyor:

    Subject matter under subclass 77 wherein the endless conveyor receives the
    load as it is discharged from the outlet* of the fluid current conveyor*.


CLS 406/83
TXT WITH LOAD BRAKING OR RETARDING MEANS:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein means are provided which
    act on the load to decelerate the load.

    (1)     Note.  A barrier (e.g., valve), per se, that is manipulated to
    retard or block passage of the load is excluded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for gate at the conveyor outlet which causes the load to be
    decelerated by the compressed or rarefied air between the gate and a load
    article moving respectively toward or away from the gate.


CLS 406/84
TXT Utilizing a fluid:

    Subject matter under subclass 83 wherein the load is stopped or slowed by
    means which directs or alters the flow of a fluid at or adjacent the load.

    (1)     Note.  The fluid may or may not be the conveying fluid.


CLS 406/85
TXT PULSING FLUID CURRENT:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein means are provided to
    cause the conveying fluid to be forced intermittently in the fluid current
    conveyor* in successive bursts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     for slug conveyors using a pulsing fluid current for conveying the
    load at spaced intervals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 404 for vacuum
    cleaners which employ a pulsing air flow.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 191 for a
    pulsating treating gas or vapor flow.


CLS 406/86
TXT HAVING MEANS FOR MAINTAINING LOAD IN SUSPENSION ALONG FLOW PATH:

    Subject matter under the definition wherein the fluid current conveyor* is
    provided with means along a substantial portion of the load path to
    continuously direct fluid against the load as it is being conveyed to
    insure that a substantial portion of the load is surrounded and supported
    by fluid.

    (1)     Note.  The above fluid may or may not be the conveying fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136+,   for fluid agitation of the load in a receptacle at the intake of a
    fluid current conveyor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 359 and
    576+ for a method or apparatus for conveying or suspending material by
    means of a fluid current while drying or treating a solid material with the
    fluid.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 676 for means for
    pneumatically supporting an article while the article is being moved by
    mechanical or manual means.


CLS 406/87
TXT With load orienting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein load articles are conveyed along a
    predetermined path and means are provided to turn a load article to change
    its attitude with respect to said path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 373+ for load orienting means.


CLS 406/88
TXT By load supporting jets:

    Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein the fluid is continuously directed
    against the load by a series of closely spaced nozzles along a conduit or
    other means defining the load path, and wherein the load is moved and
    supported by the fluid issuing from the nozzles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94+,    for a conveyor* having plural spaced inputs along a conduit for
    introducing a booster fluid to compensate for decreasing pressure
    downstream.

    137,    for load agitating fluid jets in a receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 195 for agitation of material in a receptacle
    by fluid jets, but with no conveying within the receptacle by fluid.


CLS 406/89
TXT Including permeable member:

    Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein the fluid is continuously directed
    against the load through a section of foraminous material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 174 for
    similar subject matter wherein the gas passing through the permeable member
    heats or otherwise treats the material.


CLS 406/90
TXT In receptacle:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the load path is located within a
    hopper or similar container.

    (1)     Note.  The load must be conveyed along a path defining surface
    within the receptacle for placement in this and indented subclasses.  If
    the fluid moves the material in a random manner to stir or dislodge the
    same, then the fluid is considered to be agitating fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    for a receptacle at the intake of a fluid current conveyor and
    having a permeable member therein through which agitating fluid is passed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 195 for fluid agitation of material in a
    receptacle.


CLS 406/91
TXT Permeable member surrounding discharge opening or conduit:

    Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein the container has a conduit or
    opening therein through which the load is discharged, and the foraminous
    material is distributed through substantially 360 degrees about the conduit
    or opening to cause the load to flow along the material toward the conduit
    or opening.


CLS 406/92
TXT By fluid whirling action:

    Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein means are provided to cause the
    conveying fluid to eddy or form a vortex along the load path.


CLS 406/93
TXT HAVING MEANS TO INTRODUCE BOOSTER FLUID INTO CONVEYOR:

    Subject matter under the definition wherein means are provided downstream
    of the inlet* of the fluid conveyor at which additional conveying fluid is
    forced or drawn into the conveyor*.

    (1)     Note.  A fluid introduced into a receptacle* having plural fluid
    inputs is not a booster fluid.  A booster fluid must be introduced into the
    conveyor* after the load and primary fluid have left the receptacle*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for a fluid jet at a fluid current conveyor inlet being fed by a
    screw conveyor.

    86+,    for conveyors having means for directing fluid at the load along a
    substantial portion of the load path thereof.

    142+,   for a receptacle at the inlet of a fluid current conveyor and
    having a conduit therein through which the material is lifted out of the
    receptacle by lifting fluid entering the conduit at a plurality of spaced
    locations.

    144,    for a fluid jet at a fluid current conveyor inlet fed by a load
    receptacle.

    153,    for a fluid nozzle downstream of an inlet for inducing suction at
    the inlet.

    194,    for a conduit having a fluid nozzle associated therewith.


CLS 406/94
TXT Plural booster inputs:

    Subject matter under subclass 93 wherein the additional conveying fluid is
    supplied at two or more points spaced along the load path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for a fluid current conveyor having means for directing fluid jets
    against the load to support the same.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 41 for means
    for applying fluid to the same material at a plurality of spaced points in
    the apparatus.


CLS 406/95
TXT With parallel fluid supply conduit:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 wherein the additional conveying fluid is
    supplied at spaced points along the load path by a pipe or duct, wherein a
    substantial portion of the pipe or duct and the load path are an equal
    distance apart at every point.


CLS 406/96
TXT BLOWER OR PUMP HAVING LOAD INTAKE OPENING IN HOUSING:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a driven device is
    provided to propel the conveying fluid through the conveyor, which device
    includes a surrounding casing having a load inlet whereby the load passes
    directly through the fluid propelling device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57+,    for a similar pump combined with a screw conveyor which feeds the
    load to the pump.

    80,     for similar pump combined with an endless conveyor for feeding the
    load to the same.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, appropriate subclasses for
    rotary fluid pumps.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), appropriate subclasses
    for specific features of fluid pump impellers.

    417,    Pumps, appropriate subclasses for subject matter relating to the
    pumping of fluids.  Class 417 takes subject matter relating to the pumping
    of slurries, fluent material and the like if handled in a manner not
    inconsistent with the handling of fluids.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclasses for fluid
    pumps including a working member which moves as defined in the class
    definition.


CLS 406/97
TXT Including load or blower protecting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 96 wherein the fluid propelling device is
    provided with means to prevent damage to either itself or the load.


CLS 406/98
TXT Having separate opening in housing for conveying fluid input:

    Subject matter under subclass 96 wherein the surrounding casing is provided
    with a second inlet for conveying fluid only.


CLS 406/99
TXT Rotary:

    Subject matter under subclass 96 wherein the fluid propelling device
    includes a fluid impelling surface each point of which moves in a circular
    path about a central axis.


CLS 406/100
TXT Having radially extending blades:

    Subject matter under subclass 99 wherein the fluid impelling surface
    comprises a plurality of elongated members extending perpendicularly from
    said central axis.


CLS 406/101
TXT Mounted on axial face of a disc:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 including a flat circular member which
    carries the radially extending elongated members on a circular face.


CLS 406/102
TXT With load receptacle feeding to intake of blower or pump:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein a container discharges the load
    directly through the load inlet into the casing of the fluid propelling
    device.


CLS 406/103
TXT Blower or pump housing movably mounted relative to receptacle:

    Subject matter under subclass 102 wherein the casing of the fluid
    propelling device is adjustable or movable with respect to the container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, subclass 126 for a pump
    having a casing part selectively movable relative to fixed support.


CLS 406/104
TXT Plural blowers or pumps:

    Subject matter under subclass 102 wherein two or more fluid propelling
    devices are provided.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140,    for a receptacle located at the intake of a fluid current conveyor
    and carrying a plurality of blowers or pumps.


CLS 406/105
TXT HAVING LOAD BY-PASS AROUND BLOWER OR PUMP:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a driven device is
    provided for propelling the fluid current through the conveyor* and means
    is provided for shunting the load around the fluid propelling device.

    (1)     Note.  The shunt path must consist of a single fluid current
    conveyor section for placement in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109+,   for a shunt path which comprises a fluid current conveyor feeding
    to a second fluid current conveyor.


CLS 406/106
TXT ENDLESS FLUID CURRENT PATH:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a closed fluid path is
    provided and wherein the conveying fluid is propelled by a fluid current
    generating means (i.e., blower or pump) which is located along the path.


CLS 406/107
TXT MATERIAL-BACKFLOW DISCHARGE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein means are provided to
    discharge from the load path any portion of the load that moves backward by
    gravity against the intended flow.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include devices in which separation
    of heavier particles is effected by subjecting the material to a blast of
    such strength that only the lighter particles are conveyed away.  For such
    devices, see Class 55, Gas Separation, subclass 434 and indented
    subclasses; and Class 209, Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids,
    subclass 21 and indented subclasses; and subclass 133 and indented
    subclasses.


CLS 406/108
TXT INTAKE TO FLUID CURRENT CONVEYOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to structure prior to or
    at the point along the load path at which the load is first guided or
    supported and is acted upon by the fluid current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51+,    for fluid current conveyors having a driven load moving surface
    associated therewith for feeding the load to or through the inlet.


CLS 406/109
TXT Combined intake and discharge:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein either (a) the inlet* of a fluid
    current conveyor can also serve as the outlet*, or (b) means are provided
    at the inlet* of a fluid current conveyor to feed the load through the
    inlet*, which means also receives the load from the outlet* of a fluid
    conveyor.


CLS 406/110
TXT With terminal:

    Subject matter under subclass 109 wherein the means to receive and feed the
    load comprises structure which effects the intake or discharge of load
    articles individually into or from the fluid current conveyor.


CLS 406/111
TXT Captive carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein the load article is a carrier*
    which is not readily removable from the fluid current conveyor*.


CLS 406/112
TXT Single inlet-outlet:

    Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein the load article is fed from and
    discharged into the terminal* via the same opening.


CLS 406/113
TXT Movable inlet:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein the inlet* to the fluid current
    conveyor* is movably mounted relative to some supporting structure of the
    conveyor such that the inlet* either is adjustable or may be moved to the
    load to be conveyed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38+,    for apparatus wherein the entire conveyor is mounted for movement
    from one location to another.

    164+,   for a fluid current conveyor having a movable outlet.


CLS 406/114
TXT Follows load level:

    Subject matter under subclass 113 wherein the load is drawn into the inlet*
    from a receptacle* or open pile of load material and means are provided to
    move or allow movement of the inlet* to follow the boundary of a column or
    pile of load material.


CLS 406/115
TXT Reciprocating or swinging:

    Subject matter under subclass 113 wherein the inlet* is mounted for
    movement back and forth along a straight or arcuate path.

    (1)     Note.  An intake conduit which is carried by a receptacle and is
    moved relative to cooperating structure to control the amount of material
    entering the conveyor is considered to be a valve and is excluded from this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128+,   for an intake conduit which is carried by a receptacle and serves
    as a valve.

    164+,   for a reciprocating or swinging outlet.


CLS 406/116
TXT Having telescoping intake:

    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein the inlet* and structure
    contiguous therewith comprises a plurality of interconnected nested
    segments movable axially relative to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158,    for a telescoping deflector at the outlet of a fluid current
    conveyor.

    167,    for a telescoping outlet conduit of a fluid current conveyor.

    195,    for miscellaneous telescoping conveyor conduits.


CLS 406/117
TXT Conveyor having plural intakes:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein a fluid current conveyor* is
    provided with two or more distinct inlets* which feed to a common load path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181+,   for a load combiner, per se.


CLS 406/118
TXT From receptacle:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 wherein a hopper or similar container for
    holding a quantity of load material or articles is provided at or adjacent
    to at least one of the inlets* to feed the load therethrough.


CLS 406/119
TXT Having plural compartments:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein the hopper or similar container
    is divided into two or more distinct spaces, each holding a quantity of
    load and feeding the same through a different inlet*.


CLS 406/120
TXT Plural receptacles:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein a plurality of discrete
    containers are provided, each of which feeds to a different one of said
    plurality of inlets*.


CLS 406/121
TXT With sifter:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein a sieve is provided at or
    adjacent the inlet* to separate or reduce coarse lumps of load material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 21+ for
    operations of separating and grading or sorting solids employing both
    sifting and gaseous suspension; and subclasses 233+ for sifters in general.
     See especially subclasses 243+ for sifters combined with means for feeding
    solids to the same.


CLS 406/122
TXT Load receptacle type:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein a hopper or similar container for
    holding a quantity of load material or articles is provided at or adjacent
    to the inlet* to feed the load therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86+,    for a fluid current conveyor with a receptacle at the intake which
    includes means for maintaining the load in suspension along a flow path
    inside the receptacle.

    89+,    especially, for a receptacle that both receives the load from the
    outlet of a first fluid current conveyor and feeds the load to the inlet of
    a second fluid current conveyor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 268 for a device having a holder for solid
    material to be entrained in a fluid current.


CLS 406/123
TXT Having inlets to separate conveyors:

    Subject matter under subclass 122 wherein the receptacle* feeds the load to
    the inlets* of two or more distinct fluid current conveyors*.


CLS 406/124
TXT Plural receptacles in series:

    Subject matter under subclass 122 wherein the receptacle* at the fluid
    conveyor inlet* is fed by a second receptacle*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25      and 29+, for means to control the load input to a receptacle in
    response to a sensed condition.


CLS 406/125
TXT With gate valve between receptacles:

    Subject matter under subclass 124 wherein a plate like member is provided
    in the flow path between the receptacles* to regulate the load flow
    therebetween.


CLS 406/126
TXT With conical plug valve between receptacles:

    Subject matter under subclass 124 wherein a load flow regulator is provided
    between the receptacles* which includes a conical or frustoconical member
    to vary the cross-sectional area of the load flow path.


CLS 406/127
TXT With valve between receptacle and fluid conveyor:

    Subject matter under subclass 122 wherein means are provided in the flow
    path of the load between the receptacle* and fluid conveyor inlet whereby
    the flow of load entering the conveyor* can be controlled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, appropriate subclasses for a valve combined with a
    fluid handling system, or a valve, per se, which is automatic in operation.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, appropriate subclasses for valve
    structure, per se.


CLS 406/128
TXT Reciprocating, rotating, or swinging:

    Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein the means to control the flow of
    the load comprises a member having a surface mounted for movement across or
    along the flow path in either a back and forth manner or in a revolving
    movement about an axis.


CLS 406/129
TXT Rotatable hollow cylinder type:

    Subject matter under subclass 128 wherein the movable flow controlling
    member is a hollow cylinder having an opening in its side and which is
    rotated about its central axis to control the flow of the load from the
    receptacle* to the interior of the cylinder.


CLS 406/130
TXT Gate type:

    Subject matter under subclass 128 wherein the movable flow controlling
    member comprises a platelike member.


CLS 406/131
TXT Pivotable:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein the platelike member is swingably
    mounted.


CLS 406/132
TXT Vertically movable:

    Subject matter under subclass 128 wherein the movable flow controlling
    member is mounted for movement in a direction perpendicular to the earth's
    surface.


CLS 406/133
TXT Sleeve or conduit:

    Subject matter under subclass 132 wherein the vertically movable flow
    controlling member is in the form of a hollow cylinder or tube.

    (1)     Note.  The hollow cylinder or tube may be the intake conduit.


CLS 406/134
TXT With means to agitate load in receptacle:

    Subject matter under subclass 122 wherein means are provided to stir or
    dislodge the load in the receptacle*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for a receptacle having an
    agitator and a discharge outlet.

    366,    Agitating, appropriate subclasses for agitating in a receptacle
    which is not feeding to a fluid current conveyor (406) and has no claimed
    discharge outlet (222).  Class 366 provides for fluid current conveying to
    or from an agitating receptacle when the conveying is ancillary to the
    material agitation. See subclasses 150.1+ and 184+ for the above
    combinations.


CLS 406/135
TXT Rotary:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 wherein the means to stir or dislodge the
    load comprises a load contacting surface inside the receptacle* which
    rotates about an axis through at least 360 degrees.


CLS 406/136
TXT Fluid:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 wherein the load is stirred or dislodged
    by directing a fluid against the load inside the receptacle*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 195 for a receptacle that employs gas
    agitation to assist in dispensing the same.


CLS 406/137
TXT Jet:

    Subject matter under subclass 136 wherein a nozzle is provided to direct
    the fluid against the load in the receptacle* in a localized stream.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for serially arranged fluid jets along a load path inside a
    receptacle, wherein the fluid jets maintain the load in suspension to
    travel along the load path.


CLS 406/138
TXT Passed through permeable member:

    Subject matter under subclass 136 wherein the agitating fluid is directed
    against the load in the receptacle* through a foraminous material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90+,    for a receptacle having fluid current conveyor therein comprising a
    fluid permeable member which defines the load flow path.


CLS 406/139
TXT Blower or pump carried by receptacle:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 122 wherein a driven fluid propelling
    device is supported by the receptacle*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96+,    for a blower or pump through which the load and conveying fluid
    pass.


CLS 406/140
TXT Plural blowers or pumps:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 139 wherein two or more driven fluid
    propelling devices are supported by the receptacle*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for a receptacle which feeds the load through a plurality of
    associated blowers or pumps.


CLS 406/141
TXT Inlet conduit extending downwardly inside receptacle:

    Subject matter under subclass 122 wherein the inlet* is formed by a conduit
    protruding interiorly of the receptacle* and through which the load is
    lifted as it is conveyed out of the receptacle*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    for an inlet conduit in a receptacle which is reciprocated to
    control the quantity of the load passing therethrough.


CLS 406/142
TXT With conduit supplying lifting fluid to interior of receptacle:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the load is propelled upwardly
    through the inlet* defining conduit by pressure fluid entering the
    receptacle* through a pipe or duct.


CLS 406/143
TXT Fluid supplying conduit extends to inlet conduit:

    Subject matter under subclass 142 wherein the pipe or duct supplying
    pressure fluid to the interior of the receptacle* terminates at or inside
    the inlet* defining conduit.


CLS 406/144
TXT Conveying fluid velocity altered at load input:

    Subject matter under subclass 122 wherein means are provided at or adjacent
    the inlet* to accelerate or decelerate the conveying fluid as it flows by
    the inlet*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for apparatus employing a fluid jet at a fluid current conveyor
    inlet which receives the load from a screw conveyor.

    93,     for fluid current conveyors in which one or more fluid jets supply
    additional fluid downstream of the inlet.

    153,    for a fluid jet which induces suction at an inlet that is not fed
    by a receptacle.

    194,    for a conveyor conduit having a nozzle.

    195,    for a length of conduit having a varying cross section.


CLS 406/145
TXT Having connection for external suction or pressure source:

    Subject matter under subclass 122 wherein the receptacle* includes means
    specifically adapted to be detachably connected to a suction or pressure
    device to remove the load from the receptacle*.


CLS 406/146
TXT Conveying fluid introduced under pressure to interior of receptacle:

    Subject matter under subclass 122 wherein the load is propelled through the
    inlet* by either a pressure fluid in a closed receptacle*, or a fluid
    stream which moves through and entrains the load in the receptacle*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124,    for a plurality of pressurized receptacles in series.

    136+,   for a receptacle and means to introduce agitating fluid under
    pressure into the interior thereof.

    142+,   for a pressurized receptacle at intake from which the material
    enters the conveyor through an inlet conduit extending downwardly inside
    the receptacle.


CLS 406/147
TXT Terminal type:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein structure is provided at or
    adjacent to the inlet* for the feed of load articles individually
    therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110+,   for a terminal which serves as an inlet and an outlet.


CLS 406/148
TXT Intake gate:

    Subject matter under subclass 147 wherein the terminal* is provided with a
    movable closure member past which a load article to be transmitted is
    inserted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26+,    for an intake gate whose position controls the conveying fluid.


CLS 406/149
TXT Gate lock:

    Subject matter under subclass 148 wherein means are provided to prevent
    insertion of a load article past said closure until a previously inserted
    load article has been transmitted.


CLS 406/150
TXT Serially arranged gates:

    Subject matter under subclass 148 wherein the terminal* is provided with a
    second movable closure downstream of the first closure and past which a
    load article must move before being transmitted through the conveyor*.

    (1)     Note.  An air lock is typically formed by the two gates.


CLS 406/151
TXT Upstream of suction source:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein the load is drawn into the
    conveyor* by creating a vacuum at the inlet* by forcing or withdrawing
    conveying fluid into or from the fluid flow path at a point subsequent to
    the inlet*.


CLS 406/152
TXT Including specific intake nozzle structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 151 wherein significance is attributed to a
    particular feature (e.g., shape) of the inlet*.

    (1)     Note.  A constant cross-sectional conduit at the inlet* is excluded
    from this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 415.1+ for
    vacuum cleaner nozzles.

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 317+ for suction dredgers.


CLS 406/153
TXT Suction induced by pressure stream:

    Subject matter under subclass 151 wherein the vacuum at the inlet* is
    created by forcing conveying fluid into the fluid flow path at a point
    subsequent to the inlet*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for devices employing a fluid jet as a fluid current conveyor inlet
    which receives the load from a screw conveyor.

    93,     for a suction inducing fluid jet downstream of an inlet supplying
    additional fluid to the conveyor.

    194,    for a conveyor conduit with a nozzle.


CLS 406/154
TXT FLUID CURRENT CONVEYOR OUTLET MEANS:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to structure at or
    subsequent to the point along a fluid current conveyor* at which the load
    is either no longer guided or supported, or is no longer acted upon by the
    fluid current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109+,   for structure which serves as an outlet and an inlet of flow
    current conveyor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, for apparatus used in separation of a
    gas and solid particles entrained therein, per se.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses for
    subject matter relating to the separation of liquids and solids.


CLS 406/155
TXT Conveyor having plural outlets:

    Subject matter under subclass 154 wherein the fluid current conveyor* is
    provided with two or more distinct outlets* which are fed from a common
    load path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for a conveyor having a load path selectively communicable to any
    of a plurality of downstream paths.

    106,    for conveyors having an endless fluid current path and plural
    outlets along the load flow path.

    181+,   for a load flow diverter or divider, per se.


CLS 406/156
TXT Feeding plural receptacles:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 wherein at least two outlets* discharge
    the load into different receptacles*.


CLS 406/157
TXT Deflector:

    Subject matter under subclass 154 wherein means in addition to a conveying
    conduit is provided at or adjacent to the outlet* to alter the loads
    direction as it is discharged.

    (1)     Note.  Patents relating to outlets which are movable with respect
    to a supporting conduit have been placed as originals in subclasses 164+.

    (2)     Note.  This and indented subclasses include baffles located in a
    conduit prior to the outlet* to direct the load toward the outlet*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164,    for a movable conveyor outlet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses
    for subject matter relating to the scattering of fluids, or fluent solids
    in slurry or dry form, over an extended area on a surface or plant.  See
    particularly subclasses 8+ and 654+ for a method or apparatus for
    scattering a nonfluid material which includes a step or means for mixing
    the material with a gas or liquid.


CLS 406/158
TXT Telescoping:

    Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the deflector comprises a
    plurality of relatively movable interconnected nested segments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    for a telescoping intake conduit.

    167,    for a telescoping outlet conduit.

    195,    for a telescoping conveyor conduit in  general.


CLS 406/159
TXT Pivoted:

    Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the deflector is mounted for
    swinging movement about an axis through less than 360 degrees.


CLS 406/160
TXT Adjustable:

    Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein the deflector can be positioned
    by an operative in any of a plurality of selected positions about the pivot
    axis.


CLS 406/161
TXT From remote location:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein means are provided to enable an
    operator at a location beyond reach of the deflector to position the same
    remotely.


CLS 406/162
TXT Rotatable:

    Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the deflector at the outlet*
    revolves about an axis through 360 degrees.


CLS 406/163
TXT Carried by receptacle:

    Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the deflector is located within a
    receptacle*.

    (1)     Note.  The deflector must comprise means other than an interior
    wall or a filter in a receptacle*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168+,   for a load deflecting wall or filter in a receptacle.

    174,    especially for baffles or guides which act on the load as it falls
    through a receptacle after being discharged upwardly into the same.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 434 for solids-gases separating
    deflectors, per se.


CLS 406/164
TXT Movable outlet:

    Subject matter under subclass 154 wherein the outlet* is movably mounted
    relative to the remainder of the fluid conveyor*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113+,   for a movable inlet.

    157+,   for deflecting means at the outlet other than the conduit itself.


CLS 406/165
TXT Horizontally swinging:

    Subject matter under subclass 164 wherein the outlet* is mounted for
    curvilinear movement about a substantially vertical axis.


CLS 406/166
TXT And vertically swinging:

    Subject matter under subclass 165 wherein the outlet* is additionally
    mounted for curvilinear movement about a substantially horizontal axis.


CLS 406/167
TXT Telescoping:

    Subject matter under subclass 164 wherein the outlet* and structure
    contiguous therewith comprises a plurality of interconnected nested
    segments movable axially relative to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    for a telescoping intake conduit.

    158,    for a telescoping deflector at the outlet.

    195,    for miscellaneous telescoping conduits.


CLS 406/168
TXT With material separating receptacle:

    Subject matter under subclass 154 wherein a receptacle* is provided with
    means to remove particulate load material from the conveying fluid at the
    outlet* of the fluid current conveyor*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109,    for a load separating receptacle that feeds the load received to
    another fluid current conveyor.

    163,    for a receptacle having a load deflector carried thereby which does
    not comprise a receptacle wall or a filter.


CLS 406/169
TXT Having air lock:

    Subject matter under subclass 168 wherein the load passes through a chamber
    which is alternately communicated, through appropriate valving, with the
    conveyor* and the discharge environment.

    (1)     Note.  The chamber can be the receptacle itself.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62+,    for driven rotary air locks.


CLS 406/170
TXT Having plural inputs:

    Subject matter under subclass 168 wherein the load is fed into the
    receptacle* from two or more distinct fluid current conveyors*.


CLS 406/171
TXT Having filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 168 wherein the receptacle* is provided with
    means to remove load material from the conveying fluid at the outlet*
    comprising a member which is previous to the conveying fluid and impervious
    to load material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, for a filter, per se.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation,    subclasses 348+ for a filter,
    per se.


CLS 406/172
TXT And means to clean filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 171 wherein means are provided to remove load
    material collected on or inside the filter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 301+ for filter cleaning.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 407+ for filter
    cleaning.


CLS 406/173
TXT Cyclone separator:

    Subject matter under subclass 168 wherein a vessel is provided at the
    outlet* to remove particulate load material from the conveying fluid by
    accelerating the load material in a spiral path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 447+ for a cyclone separation, per se.


CLS 406/174
TXT Conveyor outlet conduit extending upwardly inside receptacle:

    Subject matter under subclass 168 wherein the outlet* is formed by a
    conduit protruding interiorly of the receptacle* such that the load is
    projected upwardly inside the receptacle as it is discharged from the
    conduit.


CLS 406/175
TXT And upstream pressure source:

    Subject matter under subclass 168 wherein conveying fluid is forced into
    the conveyor* at a point prior to the separating receptacle*.


CLS 406/176
TXT Having terminal:

    Subject matter under subclass 154 wherein structure is provided at or
    adjacent to the outlet* for effecting discharge of load articles
    individually from the conveyor, or for accepting load articles as they are
    discharged individually from the conveyor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110+,   for a terminal which serves as both an inlet and an outlet.


CLS 406/177
TXT With gate and means to open gate prior to article or carrier arrival:

    Subject matter under subclass 176 in which the terminal* is provided with a
    movable closure at the outlet* past which the load article moves as it
    exits the conveyor*, wherein means are provided to move the closure from
    the path of the article or carrier* as it approaches the closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12+,    for a gate which controls the flow of the conveying fluid and is
    operated in response to a sensed condition.

    28+,    for a gate at the outlet which controls the movement of the load
    and is operated in response to a sensed condition.


CLS 406/178
TXT Serially arranged gates:

    Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein the terminal* is provided with a
    second movable closure subsequent to the first closure and defining a
    chamber therebetween.


CLS 406/179
TXT Upward delivery:

    Subject matter under subclass 176 wherein the fluid current conveyor*
    includes a section of conduit just prior to the terminal* which transmits
    the article or carrier* vertically upward.

    (1)     Note.  The terminal* usually includes or is preceded by a guide or
    conduit in which the direction of movement of the article or carrier* is
    changed 180  degrees so that the article or carrier is assisted by gravity
    in discharging downwardly past a gate.


CLS 406/180
TXT Discharge gate:

    Subject matter under subclass 176 in which the terminal* includes a movable
    closure past which an article or carrier* is discharged.


CLS 406/181
TXT LOAD FLOW DIVERTER, DIVIDER, OR COMBINER:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein means are provided to
    either (a) selectively establish communication between a load path and one
    of a plurality of branched paths, or (b) simultaneously connect a load path
    with a plurality of paths, or vise versa.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for a load diverter combined with a fluid current conveyor having a
    plurality of outlets, or a load diverter which is controlled in response to
    destination information carried by the load.

    117+,   for a fluid current conveyor having a plurality of distinct inlets
    to a common load path.

    155+,   for a fluid current conveyor having a plurality of outlets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    111,    Planting, subclass 175 for a flow divider head claimed in
    combination with a planting device.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 305+ for a flow divider
    or combiner claimed in combination with a liquid heater or vaporizer.


CLS 406/182
TXT Movable conduit section:

    Subject matter under subclass 181 wherein an enclosed load path of limited
    length is provided which can assume various positions for selectively
    establishing communication between a load path and one of a plurality of
    branched paths.


CLS 406/183
TXT Movable valve in conduit:

    Subject matter under subclass 181 wherein a load path is selectively placed
    in communication with one of a plurality of branched paths by an adjustable
    closure member which can be positioned to block one of said branched paths.


CLS 406/184
TXT CARRIER:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to an auxiliary device
    for use in a fluid current conveyor* comprising a container for carrying
    material or articles while being conveyed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4+,     for a carrier having means for controlling a load diverter.

    37,     for a carrier having a destination indicator.

    111,    for a captive carrier.


CLS 406/185
TXT Wheeled:

    Subject matter under subclass 184 wherein the carrier* is provided with one
    or more rotatable annular or cylindrical members adapted for rotating
    contact with the wall of a conveying conduit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 138 for a carrier having wheels
    which cooperate with a rail or guide.


CLS 406/186
TXT Having side opening:

    Subject matter under subclass 184 wherein the carrier* is provided with an
    access opening in a surface that is generally parallel to the direction of
    its travel.


CLS 406/187
TXT Having end opening:

    Subject matter under subclass 184 wherein the carrier* is provided with an
    access opening in a surface that is generally perpendicular to the
    direction of its travel.


CLS 406/188
TXT With closure of end opening:

    Subject matter under subclass 187 wherein means are provided to selectively
    cover and uncover the access opening at the end of the carrier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 200 for closures for receptacles.


CLS 406/189
TXT Removable:

    Subject matter under subclass 188 wherein the closure is dissociated from
    the carrier to uncover the end opening therein.


CLS 406/190
TXT With conduit engaging seal or bumper structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 184 wherein the carrier* is provided with
    means protruding from its end or periphery adapted either to engage the
    walls of a conveying conduit to minimize loss of pressure across the
    carrier as the same travels through the conduit, or to guard against impact
    damage to the carrier* or other structure with which it comes into contact.


CLS 406/191
TXT CONDUIT:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to a pipe, duct, or
    channel for guiding the load as it travels through the fluid current
    conveyor*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86+,    for a conduit having means for maintaining load material traveling
    therethrough in suspension.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclasses 138.1+ for tubular ways; and subclasses 154
    and 155+ for fluid current propulsion railways.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular conduits, appropriate subclasses for conduits in
    general.


CLS 406/192
TXT With fluid valve or load spacer:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the conduit is provided with
    either (a) means to regulate the flow of conveying fluid, or (b) means to
    ensure a predetermined distance between two or more load articles which are
    conveyed concurrently.


CLS 406/193
TXT With wear protection means:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein means are provided to reduce the
    detrimental effect of contact between the load and conduit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclass 435 for wear liners or surface
    characteristics of deflectors.


CLS 406/194
TXT Having fluid nozzle:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein means are provided to direct a
    stream of conveying fluid into the interior of the conduit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for a fluid nozzle at the inlet of a fluid current conveyor fed by
    a screw conveyor.

    144,    for a fluid nozzle at the inlet of a fluid current conveyor fed by
    a receptacle.

    153,    for a nozzle downstream of the inlet of a fluid current conveyor
    for inducing suction at the inlet.


CLS 406/195
TXT Having changing cross section:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the cross-sectional area of the
    conduit varies along its length.

    (1)     Note.  Telescoping conduits, per se, can be found here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    for a telescoping intake conduit.

    158,    for a telescoping deflector at a conveyor outlet.

    167,    for a telescoping outlet conduit.


CLS 406/196
TXT Flexible:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the conduit either (a) is formed
    from a pliant material, or (b) is comprised of a plurality of flexibly
    connected rigid segments.


CLS 406/197
TXT PROCESSES:

    Miscellaneous methods under the class definition and not provided for in
    the preceding subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46+,    for processes in which an additional substance is added to the load
    or conveying fluid.


CLS 406/198
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Apparatus under the class definition which are not provided for in the
    preceding subclasses.


CLS 407/
TTL CUTTERS, FOR SHAPING

CLS 407/
TXT I.      CLASS DEFINITION

    Class 407 is the residual locus of the device to be attached to the driven
    spindle or to the stationary tool post of a machine intended to shape work
    by a sharp edge or point cutting that work to remove a chip therefrom;
    wherein, there is no relative movement between the sharp edge or point and
    the other claimed structure during cutting.

    II.     SCOPE OF THE CLASS

    Cutting tools for shaping (as distinguished from subdividing) generally to
    be used in a "milling, gear cutting, or planing" machine or in a lathe,
    will be found in this class unless specifically provided for in another
    class.  Included herein is all the structure normally replaced in changing
    from a first to a second tool, unless there is relative movement between
    part of the normally replaced structure and the cutting edge.

    III.    GLOSSARY

    Terms in the definition of this class followed by an asterisk (*) will be
    found to be defined in this section.  Terms frequently appearing will be
    accompanied by an asterisk only where the exact meaning of the term is
    deemed particularly important.

    CUTTER

    See Tool*.

    TOOL

    A distinct unitary piece of material or plurality of unitary pieces of
    material permanently affixed together having a sharp edge or point for
    penetrating work and thereby directly effecting the operation of this class
    either by itself or by cooperation with another tool.  A tool may have a
    plurality of edges or points for penetrating the work either concurrently,
    sequentially, or selectively and is adapted to be separably attached either
    directly or via a tool holder* to a machine*.

    TOOL HOLDER

    A device consisting of a single element or a plurality of elements having
    means to removably carry a tool* and adapted to be separably attached to a
    machine* for supporting the tool against gravity and against the reaction
    of working force.

    TOOL SEAT

    That part of the tool holder* that is in direct contact with the tool. The
    tool seat may be integral with the remainder of the support of may be
    separably carried thereby.

    MACHINE

    An assembly of components adapted to support work and a tool* and bring
    them together to perform a shaping operation by piercing the work with the
    tool and removing a chip therefrom.  Specifically, a machine for use with
    the cutter of this class will be a "milling, gear cutting, or planing"
    machine or a lathe.

    WORK

    Material which is intended to be subjected to an operation of this class.

    WORKPIECE

    An object which is intended to be subjected to an operation of this class.

    IV.     MISCELLANEOUS MAIN CLASS NOTES

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 76.1+ for a file or rasp (a file or rasp
    is a hard, smoothing implement having a cutting face sharply ridged to form
    cutting edges or teeth); and subclasses 90.01+ for a tool for cutting or
    burnishing, wherein burnishing is not done in conjunction with cutting.

    30,     Cutlery, for an implement including a shaping cutting edge and
    structure to make that implement capable of being work supported, hand
    held, or randomly manipulated.

    56,     Harvesters, for a cutter used to sever a vegetable product from a
    plant.

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, for a blank, process, or
    machine for making a cutter.

    82,     Turning, for a cutter for cutting rotating work wherein the cutter
    may be of this class type, combined with means relative to which that
    cutter moves during operation.

    83,     Cutting, for a method, machine or cutter for subdividing one
    workpiece into two distinct products of predetermined configuration.

    125,    Stone Working, subclass 36 for a cutter intended for the working of
    naturally occuring crystalline material.

    142,    Wood Turning, for a cutter intended to be used in cutting of
    rotating wood stock.

    144,    Woodworking, for a cutter or machine for shaping or subdividing
    wood stock.

    147,    Coopering, for a woodworking cutter to be used in the manufacture
    of a wood barrel.

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, for a holder of general utility which may be
    used to hold a cutter of this class.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 146 -
    240 for a cutter for engaging work in the manner of that class.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, for shaping means utilizing a
    cutter, including structure relative to which the cutter moves during
    operation.

    433,    Dentistry, subclass 165 for a shaping cutter intended to be used in
    the shaping of human teeth.

    451,    Abrading, for a tool for cutting by use of a naturally formed
    crystalline cutting edge.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, subclass 57 for structure for cutting screw threads other than
    that found in Class 408, Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool,
    and other than by use of a gear cutting hob found in subclass 24 of this
    class.

    483,    Tool Changing, generally for a process or apparatus including a
    tool transfer means combined with a tool support or storage means.

    606,    Surgery, subclasses 79+ for orthopedic cutting instruments,
    subclass 116 for cutting means for marking animals, subclass 131 for
    cutting of skin by dermatotome, subclass 137 for cutting means used in
    animal sterilization, 163 for cutting means used in bedeaking or dehorning
    animals, and subclasses 167+, for cutting instruments in general.


CLS 407/1
TXT INCLUDING NONCUTTING WORK MODIFYING MEANS:

    Device under the class definition including means to perform the class type
    operation; and including means to be attached to the driven spindle or to
    the stationary tool post of a machine intended to perform a work treating
    operation not provided for in this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 90.01+ for a tool for burnishing and
    cutting, wherein burnishing can be performed independently of the cutting
    (a tool for shaping by cutting and concurrently burnishing is to be found
    in this subclass); and subclass 566 for a machine for performing a cutting
    operation and another treating operation.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 199+ for
    a reamer having a guiding portion which may burnish, but which has a
    cutting edge which is necessarily used during such burnishing.


CLS 407/2
TXT INCLUDING CHIP BREAKER, GUIDE OR DEFLECTOR DETACHABLE FROM TOOL AND TOOL
    HOLDER:

    Device under the class definition including means to engage and control the
    movement of portions of material removed from the work during the shaping
    operation, which means (1) may act to cause the removed material to break
    apart, (2) may direct the removed portions to move in an intended
    direction, or (3) may divert the removed material away from an unintended
    direction; wherein the means to engage and control the portions is
    constructed to be removable from both the cutter* and the tool holder*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    for a chip breaker, guide or deflector that is part of a tool
    holder and is not removable therefrom.

    115,    for a chip breaker, guide or deflector that is part of a cutter and
    is not removable therefrom; and see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 407/3
TXT Adjustable relative to cutting edge:

    Device under subclass 2 wherein the means to engage and control the
    movement of portions of material is constructed to be placed in different
    positions with respect to the sharp edge of the cutter.


CLS 407/4
TXT Including adjusting means:

    Device under subclass 3 including active means to force the chip breaking,
    directing or diverting means to be repositioned relative to either the
    cutter or the tool holder.


CLS 407/5
TXT Attached to or integral with tool clamping jaw:

    Device under subclass 2 including a tool holder having relatively movable
    structure to engage the cutter and apply pressure thereagainst to removably
    secure the cutter to the tool holder; wherein the pressure applying
    structure includes, as a part thereof, the means to engage and control
    movement of portions of material removed during the shaping operation.


CLS 407/6
TXT Chip breaker:

    Device under subclass 2 comprising means to cause the removed portions of
    material to break apart.


CLS 407/7
TXT FREELY MOVABLE CUTTING EDGE:

    Device under the class definition including a cutter having the sharp edge
    thereof movable during cutting and with little resistance along its
    longitudinal extent to thereby present a fresh portion of the sharp edge to
    cutting position.

    (1)     Note.  The cutter of this subclass is usually circular with a
    peripheral cutting edge and is rotatable about its central axis, so that
    the action on the work is the same as if there was no rotation.


CLS 407/8
TXT YIELDABLE TOOL:

    Device under the class definition having a cutting edge or point supported
    for operation such that upon a predetermined condition, the apparatus will
    intentionally allow the cutting edge or point to move away from operational
    position.

    (1)     Note.  Since any device will yield upon sufficient overloading,
    this subclass is limited to only those devices having specific structure to
    allow the yield to take place at a predetermined location according to the
    design of the device.


CLS 407/9
TXT Resiliently mounted tool:

    Device under subclass 8 including means upon occurence of a predetermined
    condition, to allow the cutting edge or point to move away from operational
    position such that the means flexes within the elastic limit thereof and
    such that the means will restore the cutting edge or point to operational
    position upon removal of the condition.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are patents directed to structure having a
    part that flexes and thereby moves relative to another part, an exception
    to the general rule is that this class does not include relatively moving
    parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 220+ for a flexible connection,
    in general.


CLS 407/10
TXT Including yield stress or flexure limit adjusting means:

    Device under subclass 9 including means to vary the amount of force on the
    cutting edge or point required to initially move the cutting edge or point
    out of operational position, or including means to vary the distance that
    the cutting edge or point may move out of operational position.


CLS 407/11
TXT WITH MEANS TO APPLY FLUID TO CUTTING TOOL:

    Device under the class definition including means to feed, guide or place a
    liquid or gas into contact with the cutter*.

    (1)     Note.  The fluid may serve to lubricate, or cool the tool or the
    work, or may serve to remove chips from the cutting zone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, subclass 20 for a conduit drill socket.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclass 56 for
    cutting of that class combined with application of lubricating fluid to the
    work and/or cutting edge of the tool.


CLS 407/12
TXT ROTARY BROACH:

    Device under the class definition adapted to turn about an axis and
    including a plurality of cutting edges positioned peripherally about the
    axis and being of progressively greater distance from the axis, such that,
    as the device turns about that axis, a first cutting edge makes a cutting
    arc, followed by a second cutting edge that makes a cutting arc or larger
    radius; to shape work by a series of cutting arcs without relative movement
    between the axis about which it turns and the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for an elongated broach that moves along a straight line with
    respect to a workpiece and rotates so that the cutting edges thereof define
    a helical path.


CLS 407/13
TXT RECTILINEAR BROACH:

    Device under the class definition including a plurality of sequentially
    acting protuberances on each of which there is a cutting edge or point,
    adapted to move in a straight line with respect to the work so that a first
    protuberance makes a shaping cut into that surface of the work and is
    followed by a second protuberance which makes a deeper shaping cut into
    that surface of the work, so that the actions of sequentially acting
    protuberances is cumulative.

    (1)     Note.  A rod-like cutter which moves along the axis thereof is
    considered to move in a straight line even if the cutter rotates to cut a
    helical groove.

    (2)     Note.  The "protuberance" of this subclass may be blade-like
    extending across the lateral extent of the tool holder, may be ring-like
    extending entirely about the tool holder, or may be a single tooth, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 243+ for a machine,
    generally for broaching, and see the notes therein for other broaching.


CLS 407/14
TXT Hollow tool for surrounding workpiece:

    Device under subclass 13 including a central opening through which work is
    intended to pass during shaping thereof, and into which projects the
    sequentially acting cutting protuberances.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a "pot broach".


CLS 407/15
TXT Including holder having seat for inserted tool:

    Device under subclass 13 wherein the cutter is detachable from the tool
    holder and wherein the tool holder includes a pocket specifically intended
    to receive the cutter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for a hob comprised of a tool holder and inserted tool.

    33+,    for a rotary tool holder having a seat for an inserted tool.

    66+,    for a general purpose tool holder having a seat for an inserted
    tool.


CLS 407/16
TXT Annular tool:

    Device under subclass 15 including a cutter comprising a ring-like member
    adapted to cooperatively fit about a rod-like tool holder during operation
    thereof.


CLS 407/17
TXT Including single tooth:

    Device under subclass 15 including a cutter having only one protuberance to
    perform a shaping operation and including another cutter.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a cutter including a single tooth even
    though that tooth may be serrated so that a first tooth-like portion
    engages the work before another tooth-like portion, provided that all
    portions of the tooth cooperate to perform as a single tooth, once full
    penetration into the work has been achieved.


CLS 407/18
TXT Plural tooth groups:

    Device under subclass 13 including a first plurality of cutting
    protuberances for engaging the work in a first manner and including a
    second plurality of cutting protuberances for sequentially engaging the
    work in a second manner.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a broach including "roughing teeth" and
    "finishing teeth", as well as a broach with teeth for cutting progressively
    deeper into work followed by teeth for cutting a progressively wider groove.


CLS 407/19
TXT Including sequentially acting teeth of stepped cutting width:

    Device under subclass 13 wherein a first protuberance is to cut a groove of
    a first lateral dimension, and a second protuberance intended to follow the
    path of the first protuberance is to cut that groove to a greater lateral
    dimension.


CLS 407/20
TXT GEAR CUTTING TOOL:

    Device under the class definition particularly adapted to form an element
    on a body, which element is intended to intermesh with a similar element on
    another body, whereby motive force may be transmitted from one of the
    bodies to the other.

    (1)     Note.  A gear pump inner rotor is considered to transmit force to
    the outer rotor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 640+ for a gear formed by
    the apparatus of this subclass.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 1+ for a machine for
    forming integrating elements on a gear.


CLS 407/21
TXT Face mill gear cutting tool:

    Device under subclass 20 wherein the body on which the intermeshing element
    is being formed is adapted to turn about an axis; wherein the intermeshing
    element being formed projects axially outwardly from a plane intersecting
    the body axis; wherein the cutter* is adapted to rotate about an axis
    normal to that plane during formation of the intermeshing element; and
    wherein the cutter includes axially extending cutting teeth.


CLS 407/22
TXT Adjustable teeth:

    Device under subclass 21 including a tool holder* and a plurality of
    cutting edges mounted thereon wherein the cutting edges are adapted to be
    positioned at different positions relative to each other on the tool holder.


CLS 407/23
TXT Hob:

    Device under subclass 20 adapted to turn about an axis, including at least
    three radially outwardly directed teeth positioned spirally about the
    device, each tooth including a cutting edge formed by intersecting planes
    one of which is generally parallel to and radiates from the axis and serves
    to direct a chip formed by the cutting operation, which device is intended
    to form the integrating elements on a body by "hobbing".

    (1)     Note.  Forming a gear by "hobbing" involves a complex relationship
    between a workpiece* and a cutter* wherein the cutter is rotated at a first
    rate and wherein the workpiece is moved to cause the intermeshing elements
    to traverse the cutter at a second rate; wherein the cutting action of the
    cutter on the workpiece is such that the entire surface for rolling contact
    of the intermeshing elements is generated by a series of chip removing
    actions made by the cutting edges of the cutter; and wherein all the
    intermeshing elements of the gear body are generated as a continuous
    operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 11+ for a cutter for
    hobbing combined with drive structure or with work supporting structure.


CLS 407/24
TXT Thread cutting:

    Device under subclass 23 adapted to form an intermeshing element on a body,
    which intermeshing element extends helically along the body.


CLS 407/25
TXT Including holder having seat for inserted tool:

    Device under subclass 23 wherein the cutter is detachable from the tool
    holder, and wherein the tool holder includes a pocket specifically intended
    to receive the cutter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    for a broach comprised of a tool holder and an inserted tool.

    33+,    for a rotary tool holder and an inserted tool.

    66+,    for a general purpose tool holder having a seat for an inserted
    tool.


CLS 407/26
TXT For cutting involute gear tooth:

    Device under subclass 23 wherein the element formed is intended to
    rollingly intermesh with a similar element, and wherein the element is on a
    rotary gear and is formed with an imaginary line (root circle) about which
    the effective drive takes place, wherein the shape of the element is the
    same as would be generated by a point on a line tangent to the root circle,
    as the line is unwound from the root circle.


CLS 407/27
TXT Rotary, gear shaving cutting tool:

    Device under subclass 20 including a cutter adapted to intermesh with the
    teeth of a previously formed rotating gear, to rotate relative to that
    gear, and to move axially relative thereto so that the axially directed
    cutting edge engages and cuts away a small amount of material from the
    surface of the gear.


CLS 407/28
TXT Gear generating, revolving shaper cutting tool:

    Device under subclass 20 including a cutter adapted to be reciprocated to
    and fro across the work, which cutter is also intended to rotate between
    passes, for generating a tooth structure generally considered to be a gear.

    (1)     Note.  The cutting action utilized in gear generating is that of a
    cutter which makes several passes through a workpiece or group of cutters,
    each of which makes at least one pass through the workpiece, the cutting
    action of each pass being such that the cumulative total of all the passes
    cuts out a portion of a gear tooth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 10+ for a
    gear-generating machine, generally.


CLS 407/29
TXT Rotary, tooth form cutting tool:

    Device under subclass 20 including a cutter adapted to turn about an axis
    and including structure for supporting that cutter for rotation, which
    device is shaped to cut the entire surface of a gear tooth, or is shaped to
    cut the entire surface of the recession between two gear teeth, at a single
    cutting pass across the work.


CLS 407/29.1
TXT FILE OR RASP:

    Device under the class definition having a working surface sharply ridged
    by cutting edges or teeth, which device is used as a smoothing or forming
    tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 236.01+ for a
    scraper of general cleaning utility; see the notes thereto for
    miscellaneous scrapers of more specialized application.

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 346+ for a cutting blade, per se, for use with
    a hand-manipulated implement and subclasses 451+ for a static pencil
    sharpener.

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 75.6 and 76.4 for a file for use in manicuring.

    168,    Farriery, subclass 48.1 for a tool such as a file for cleaning or
    trimming the hoof in fitting it for the shoe.

    407,    Cutters, for Shaping, subclasses 12 and 13+ for a broaching tool.


    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 574 for a
    metallic stock material having a variation in both width and thickness
    which repeats longitudinally.

    433,    Dentistry, subclass 144 for a file particularly adapted for cutting
    tooth structure or bone and gum tissue adjacent to or in the mouth.


CLS 407/29.11
TXT Flexible blade or carrier therefor:

    Device under subclass 29.1 wherein (a) the working surface is attached to a
    pliable or bendable body or (b) a holder or retainer for (a).


CLS 407/29.12
TXT Tire rasp:

    Device under subclass 29.1 having a rough working surface of small points
    especially adapted for shaping or smoothing a vehicle tire.


CLS 407/29.13
TXT Rotary file or round disc:

    Device under subclass 29.1 which (a) rotates relative to the workpiece
    during use or (b) has a circular platelike shape.


CLS 407/29.14
TXT Composite, diverse sector or assembled:

    Device under subclass 29.1 which (a) is made of distinct components or an
    assemblage of parts or components or (b) includes two or more different and
    distinct file characteristics or shaping properties.


CLS 407/29.15
TXT Handle or holder, per se:

    Device under subclass 29.1 including (a) manual grasping or operating
    means, (b) retaining or supports means, or (c) means (a) or (b), per se,
    especially adapted for use with a file or rasp.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 340 for a handle  specific to a cutlery
    implement; see the notes thereto for a tool or implement handle elsewhere
    classified.

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclass 36 for a file holder
    for a saw sharpening file, which holder has a guide or indicator attached
    to and carried by the file in its movement which shows the operator the
    angle at which the file is being held.

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, subclasses 9.1+ for a socket-type handle which
    makes a permanent or temporary readily releasable connection between a
    holder and an object.

    403,    Joints and Connections, for means connecting a handle to a tool
    wherein only such part of the handle and tool is included as cooperates to
    effect the connection.


CLS 407/30
TXT ROTARY CUTTING TOOL:

    Device under the class definition including a cutter adapted to turn about
    an axis and including structure for supporting that cutter for rotation,
    wherein the cutter is intended to perform an operation of the class type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclasses 91+ for a rotary cutter head used
    in a sole and heel edge trimming machine.

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 347 for a blade per se, used in a hand
    manipulated implement wherein the blade is so constructed as to be rotated
    during the cutting operation, and see the notes thereto for other rotary
    implements or machines specialized to art uses.

    483,    Tool Changing, subclasses 31+ for a rotary spindle machine tool
    combined with a tool transfer means wherein structure of the tool or
    supporting structure thereof is of particular importance.


CLS 407/31
TXT Gang:

    Device under subclass 30 wherein the cutter adapted to turn about an axis
    is comprised of two or more generally disc-shaped members adapted to be
    stacked coaxially one upon the other and turn about the axis to perform a
    unitary cutting operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 11+ for means
    involving the adjustment of several milling cutters along their shaft.


CLS 407/32
TXT Composite body of diverse material:

    Device under subclass 30 comprising a member constructed of a plurality of
    separate structural materials such that the combined actions of the
    materials is different than would be the action of a member constructed of
    a single material.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a cutter constructed of a plurality of
    metals so that there is less sound generated during the cutting operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for similar structure wherein a second material is adapted to yield
    under load as in the case of a resiliently mounted tool.


CLS 407/33
TXT Including holder (i.e., head) having seat for inserted tool:

    Device under subclass 30 wherein the cutter is detachable from the tool
    holder and wherein the tool holder includes a pocket specifically intended
    for receiving the cutter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    for a broach comprised of a tool holder and inserted tool.

    25,     for a hob comprised of a tool holder and inserted tool.

    66+,    for a general purpose tool holder having a seat for an inserted
    tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclass 94 for a rotary cutter head used in
    a sole and heel edge trimmer in which the cutter is not integral with the
    cutter head, but is inserted therein.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 838+ for a detachable saw tooth and means to
    permit insertion or removal of such tooth from a saw.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 224 and 235 for a rotary woodworking cutter
    built up by attaching bits to a head.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 199+ for
    a tool of that class type including a removable cutting edge, and subclass
    713 for an art digest for a tool having a detachable cutting edge.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, for a threading tap made up of several pieces rigidly secured
    together instead of a single piece of metal, except such tap which rotates
    to cut, and see the note to Class 408 above.


CLS 407/34
TXT Face or end mill:

    Device under subclass 33 comprising a cutter having an axially extending,
    unsupported end adapted to move forwardly into the work along the cutter
    axis or transversely of the cutter axis such that the unsupported end of
    the cutter extends through the undisturbed portion of the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for a face or end mill, generally.


CLS 407/35
TXT Plural simultaneously usable separable tools in common seat or common clamp
    actuator for plural simultaneously usable tools:

    Device under subclass 34 wherein the pocket of the tool holder is intended
    to support more than one distinct cutter, or wherein a single securing
    means is intended to support a plurality of cutters that are usable at the
    same time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for a similar seat or clamp arrangement used in a rotary cutter.

    70+,    for a similar seat or clamp arrangement, generally.


CLS 407/36
TXT Tool adjustable relative to holder:

    Device under subclass 34 wherein the tool holder* is constructed to allow
    selective positioning of the cutting edge relative to other portions of the
    tool holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44+,    for a rotary cutter that is adjustable relative to the tool holder.

    77+,    for a cutter, generally, that is adjustable relative to the tool
    holder.


CLS 407/37
TXT Radially:

    Device under subclass 36 wherein the provision to allow adjusting movement
    of the cutter allows the cutting edge to move toward or away from the axis
    of the cutter relative to the holder.


CLS 407/38
TXT And axially:

    Device under subclass 37 wherein the provision to allow adjusting movement
    of the cutter also allows that cutter to move along the axis of the cutter
    relative to the holder.


CLS 407/39
TXT Selectively:

    Device under subclass 38 including provision to allow movement of the
    cutter either radially or axially only, as desired.


CLS 407/40
TXT With separate means to fasten tool to holder:

    Device under subclass 34 including detachable means adapted to secure the
    cutter to the tool holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47+,    for means to fasten a cutter to a rotary tool holder.

    102+,   for means to fasten a cutter to a holder, generally.


CLS 407/41
TXT Wedge clamp element:

    Device under subclass 40 wherein the securing means is comprised of a
    member having a surface adapted to slidably engage a portion of the tool
    holder and having another surface adapted to bindingly engage the cutter
    and cause the cutter to be gripped between the sliding member and a
    reaction surface of the tool holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49+,    for a wedge clamp element used to secure a cutter to a rotary tool
    holder.

    94+,    for a wedge clamp element used to secure an adjustable cutter to a
    tool holder.

    108,    for a wedge clamp element used to secure a cutter to a tool holder,
    generally.


CLS 407/42
TXT Specified tool shape:

    Device under subclass 34 wherein the particular shape of the cutter* is set
    forth in the claims.


CLS 407/43
TXT Plural simultaneously usable separable tools in common seat or common clamp
    actuator for plural simultaneously usable tools:

    Device under subclass 33 wherein the pocket of the tool holder is intended
    to support more than one distinct cutter or wherein a single securing means
    is intended to support a plurality of cutters that are usable at the same
    time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35+,    for a similar seat or clamp arrangement used in a face or end mill.

    70+,    for a similar seat or clamp arrangement, generally.


CLS 407/44
TXT Tool adjustable relative to holder:

    Device under subclass 33 wherein the tool holder* is constructed to allow
    positioning of the cutting edge relative to other portions of the tool
    holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36+,    for an adjustable cutter and tool holder comprising a face or end
    mill.

    77+,    for a cutter generally, that is adjustable relative to the tool
    holder.


CLS 407/45
TXT Radially:

    Device under subclass 44 wherein the provision to allow adjusting movement
    of the cutter allows the cutting edge to move toward or away from the axis
    of the cutter.


CLS 407/46
TXT With means to fasten tool seat to holder:

    Device under subclass 33 including structure to secure the cutter receiving
    pocket to structure supporting that pocket.


CLS 407/47
TXT With separate means to fasten tool to holder:

    Device under subclass 33 including detachable means adapted to secure the
    cutter to the supporting tool holder structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40+,    for means to fasten a cutter to a holder comprising a face or end
    mill.

    102+,   for means to fasten a cutter to a holder, generally.


CLS 407/48
TXT Apertured tool:

    Device under subclass 47 wherein the cutter includes an opening passing
    therethrough for use by the securing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103+,   for means to fasten a nonrotary apertured cutter to a tool holder.


CLS 407/49
TXT Wedge clamp element:

    Device under subclass 47 wherein the securing means is comprised of a
    member having a surface adapted to slidably engage a portion of the tool
    holder and having another surface adapted to bindingly engage the cutter
    and cause the cutter to be gripped between the sliding member and a
    reaction surface of the tool holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for a wedge clamp element used to secure a cutter to a face mill
    tool holder.

    94+,    for a wedge clamp element used to secure an adjustable cutter to a
    tool holder.

    108,    for a wedge clamp element used to secure a cutter to a tool holder,
    generally.


CLS 407/50
TXT Resilient clamp jaw:

    Device under subclass 49 wherein the means to secure the cutter to the tool
    holder includes a member adapted to flex within the elastic limit thereof
    and grip the cutter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for structure wherein a cutter gripping portion is adapted to yield
    under pressure to allow movement of the cutter away from the work under
    overload conditions.


CLS 407/51
TXT Peripherally spaced tools:

    Device under subclass 33 wherein the tool holder supports a plurality of
    independent cutters circularly spaced about the cutter axis.


CLS 407/52
TXT Sectional support:

    Device under subclass 51 wherein the tool holder is comprised of detachable
    segments adapted to individually support the independent cutters.


CLS 407/53
TXT Face or end mill:

    Device under subclass 30 comprising a cutter having an axially extending
    unsupported end adapted to move forwardly into the work along the cutter
    axis or transversely of the cutter axis such that the unsupported end of
    the cutter extends through the undisturbed portion of the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for a face or end mill comprised of a holder having a seat for an
    inserted cutter.


CLS 407/54
TXT With cutting edge entirely across end of tool (e.g., router bit, end mill,
    etc.):

    Device under subclass 53 including either a sharp edge or a plurality of
    sharp edges extending diametrically across the unsupported end of the
    device, so that upon axial advance the entire inscribed area of the work
    will be cut away.


CLS 407/55
TXT Compound tooth arrangement:

    Device under subclass 30 wherein the device is comprised of a plurality of
    cutters, each cutter acting in cooperation with an adjacent cutter to
    present a composite cutting surface that is the resultant of the addition
    of all the cutting edges.


CLS 407/56
TXT Having peripherally spaced teeth:

    Device under subclass 30 including a plurality of protuberances extending
    radially outwardly from the device, each protuberance including at least
    one cutting edge adapted to cuttingly engage the work, wherein the
    protuberances are spaced circumferentially about the radially outer limit
    of the device.


CLS 407/57
TXT Axially tapering tool:

    Device under subclass 56 wherein the protuberances extend axially along the
    device and are constructed such that the cutting edges progressively reach
    a greater radial distance from the axis at one end of the device than at
    the other.


CLS 407/58
TXT Circumferentially staggered:

    Device under subclass 56 wherein the protuberances spaced about the
    periphery of the device are also spaced axially along the device.


CLS 407/59
TXT Plural teeth spaced about a helix:

    Device under subclass 58 including at least three protuberances having
    sharp cutting edges, which protuberances are spaced about the tool in the
    form of a screw thread extending there-along.


CLS 407/60
TXT Varying in cutting edge profile:

    Device under subclass 56 wherein the cutting protuberances spaced about the
    device are of different cutting shape.


CLS 407/61
TXT Specified tooth shape or spacing:

    Device under subclass 56 wherein significance is attributed to the
    particular configuration of the protuberances or the particular separation
    or degree of separation of the protuberances.


CLS 407/62
TXT Arcuate cutting edge:

    Device under subclass 61 wherein that particular shape of the protuberances
    is a continuous curved shape.


CLS 407/63
TXT Helical tooth:

    Device under subclass 62 wherein the arcuate shape of the cutting edge is
    the shape of a helix or screw thread generated along the device.


CLS 407/64
TXT PROFILED CIRCULAR TOOL:

    Device under the class definition comprising a cutter of generally circular
    shape, wherein a cutting edge is provided at the periphery thereof, which
    cutter is intended to be held at the center of the circular shape in a tool
    holder such that the cutting edge can be presented to a workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  The device of this subclass is normally intended to be
    sharpened by grinding away the leading surface forming the cutting edge
    such that the device can be sharpened through a substantial portion of the
    circular shape.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    82,     Turning, subclass 13 for a cutter of the type found in this
    subclass, combined with lathe structure.


CLS 407/65
TXT ARC SEGMENT TOOL:

    Device under the class definition comprising a cutter including a sharp
    cutting edge and including a body portion which is arcuate in shape such
    that if the body were extended it would ultimately pass through a circle
    and back into engagement with itself.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for similar structure wherein the cutting element is part of a
    circular member fastened to a tool holder at the center of the curvature.


CLS 407/66
TXT INCLUDING HOLDER HAVING SEAT FOR INSERTED TOOL:

    Device under the class definition wherein the cutter* is detachable from
    the tool holder* and wherein the tool holder includes a pocket specifically
    intended for receiving the cutter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    for a broach comprised of a tool holder and an inserted tool.

    25,     for a hob comprised of a tool holder and an inserted tool.

    33+,    for a rotary tool holder and an inserted tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 40 for a rotatable tool holder (turret)
    comprising a device for securing a tool in the turret upon its carriage or
    upon a lathe bed.

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 329 for a device for detachably holding a cutting
    blade for hand manipulation.

    483,    Tool Changing, subclass 21 for a work rotating machine tool
    combined with a means for changing a turning tool insert.


CLS 407/67
TXT Plural spaced seats and common holder:

    Device under subclass 66 including a pocket for receiving a first cutter
    and including a similar pocket for receiving a second cutter, both cutters
    being removable and one being located in a position that is spaced away
    from the pocket for receiving the other cutter.


CLS 407/68
TXT Relatively adjustable seats:

    Device under subclass 67 including provision to allow positioning of one of
    the cutter receiving pockets relative to the other cutter receiving pocket.


CLS 407/69
TXT Simultaneously usable:

    Device under subclass 67 wherein both of the cutter receiving pockets can
    be used at the same time.


CLS 407/70
TXT Plural simultaneously usable separable tools in common seat or common clamp
    actuator for plural simultaneously usable tools:

    Device under subclass 66 wherein the pocket of the tool holder is intended
    to support more than one distinct cutter or wherein a single securing means
    is intended to support a plurality of cutters that are to be used at the
    same time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     for a similar seat or clamp arrangement used in a face or end mill.

    43,     for a similar seat or clamp arrangement used in a rotary cutter.


CLS 407/71
TXT Adjustable tool:

    Device under subclass 70 constructed to allow positioning movement of the
    cutter relative to the tool holder.


CLS 407/72
TXT With tool ejector:

    Device under subclass 66 including means to expel a cutter from operational
    position in the cutter receiving pocket.


CLS 407/73
TXT With separate means to adjust tool to and fro relative to holder:

    Device under subclass 66 including means carried by the tool holder to move
    the cutter either (1) to any one of a plurality of different positions with
    respect to the tool holder, or (2) about an axis that is fixed with respect
    to the tool holder wherein a cutter may be moved positively by said means
    in opposite directions along or about an axis that is fixed relative to the
    tool holder.


CLS 407/74
TXT With indicator:

    Device under subclass 73 including means to designate the relative position
    of the cutter with respect to the other structure.


CLS 407/75
TXT Plural provisions for adjustment:

    Device under subclass 73 including a first means to positively move the
    cutter to and fro relative to the tool holder in a first manner, and a
    second means to positively move the cutter to and fro relative to the tool
    holder in a different manner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79+,    for multiple means to permit movement of a tool relative to a tool
    holder in multiple manners.


CLS 407/76
TXT By moving tool seat:

    Device under subclass 73 wherein movement of the cutter is caused by moving
    of the pocket into which the cutter is positioned relative to the tool
    holder.


CLS 407/77
TXT Tool adjustable relative to holder:

    Device under subclass 66 wherein the tool holder is constructed to allow
    positioning of the cutting edge relative to other portions of the tool
    holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36+,    for an adjustable cutter and tool holder comprising a face or end
    mill.

    44+,    for a rotary cutter that is adjustable relative to the tool holder.


CLS 407/78
TXT With indicator:

    Device under subclass 77 including means to designate the relative position
    of the cutter with respect to the other structure.


CLS 407/79
TXT Plural provisions for adjustment:

    Device under subclass 77 including a first means allowing positioning of
    the cutter relative to the tool holder in a first manner, and a second
    means allowing positioning of the cutter relative to the tool holder in
    second manner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for multiple means to move a tool relative to a tool holder in
    multiple manners.


CLS 407/80
TXT Plural interfering seats:

    Device under subclass 79 including a first cutter receiving pocket and
    including a second cutter receiving pocket, wherein the pockets are so
    positioned on the tool holder that a cutter can be positioned in only one
    of the pockets at any given time.


CLS 407/81
TXT Including pivotable seat or tool:

    Device under subclass 79 wherein at least one of the directions of movement
    of the cutter relative to the tool holder is about an axis.


CLS 407/82
TXT With detent:

    Device under subclass 81 including physical means projecting from the tool
    holder in engagement with the cutter for limiting cutter movement relative
    to the holder.


CLS 407/83
TXT Pivotable seat:

    Device under subclass 81 wherein one manner of movement of the cutter
    relative to the tool holder is brought about by moving the cutter receiving
    pocket relative to other portions of the tool holder.


CLS 407/84
TXT And pivotable tool:

    Device under subclass 83 wherein the cutter is secured to the cutter
    receiving pocket and allowed to pivot relative to that pocket.


CLS 407/85
TXT By adjustable or replaceable stop:

    Device under subclass 77 wherein means is provided in the bottom of the
    cutter receiving pocket for limiting cutter movement into that pocket,
    which limiting means may be either intended to be adjusted in size or to be
    replaced by another limiting means of different size.


CLS 407/86
TXT Adjustable:

    Device under subclass 85 wherein the cutter movement limiting member is
    adapted to be modified in size.


CLS 407/87
TXT Screw:

    Device under subclass 86 wherein the cutter movement limiting means is
    adjusted by movement of a helically threaded member directly in engagement
    therewith.


CLS 407/88
TXT By movement of seat relative to holder:

    Device under subclass 77 wherein movement of the cutter relative to the
    tool holder is permitted by movement of the cutter receiving pocket
    relative to other portions of the tool holder.


CLS 407/89
TXT Pivoted seat:

    Device under subclass 88 wherein the cutter receiving pocket is adapted to
    be moved about an axis in order to relatively position the cutter with
    respect to the tool holder.


CLS 407/90
TXT Pivoted tool:

    Device under subclass 77 wherein the cutter is adapted to be positioned
    about an axis in order to relatively position the cutter with respect to
    the tool holder.


CLS 407/91
TXT Resiliently biased tool clamping jaw:

    Device under subclass 77 including a securing element for grippingly
    holding the cutter in the pocket, which securing element is normally urged
    toward the cutter by the inherent resilience of the securing element,
    wherein movement of the cutter relative to the tool holder is permitted by
    release of the securing element.


CLS 407/92
TXT Rectilinearly:

    Device under subclass 77 wherein movement of the cutter relative to the
    tool holder is permitted only in a straight line.


CLS 407/93
TXT Including rotatable cam clamp element:

    Device under subclass 92 including securing means comprised of a member
    pivotally secured to the tool holder, and including an eccentric surface
    adapted to slidably and bindingly engage the cutter and cause the cutter to
    be gripped between the eccentric surface and a reaction surface of the tool
    holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    for a rotatable cam clamp element used to secure a cutter that is
    not adjustable.


CLS 407/94
TXT Including wedge clamp element:

    Device under subclass 92 including securing means comprised of a member
    having a surface adapted to slidably engage a portion of the tool holder,
    and having another surface adapted to bindingly engage the cutter and cause
    the cutter to be gripped between the sliding member and a reaction surface
    of the tool holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for a wedge clamp element used to secure a cutter to a face mill
    tool holder.

    49+,    for a wedge clamp element for securing a cutter to a rotary tool
    holder.

    108,    for a wedge clamp element for securing a nonadjustable cutter to a
    tool holder.


CLS 407/95
TXT And guide or detent:

    Device under subclass 94 including means to cause the cutter movement
    relative to the tool holder to be along a fixed path, or including physical
    means projecting from the tool holder in engagement with the cutter for
    limiting cutter movement relative to the tool holder.


CLS 407/96
TXT Including detent:

    Device under subclass 92 including means projecting from the tool holder in
    engagement with the cutter for limiting cutter movement to the tool holder.


CLS 407/97
TXT Tool gripped directly by set screw:

    Device under subclass 92 including securing means comprised of a helically
    threaded member adapted to rotate and move axially relative to a
    cooperatively threaded tool holder, such that an axially facing portion
    thereof engages the cutter to cause the cutter to be gripped between the
    helical member and a reaction surface of the tool holder.


CLS 407/98
TXT Slidable jaw:

    Device under subclass 92 comprised of a member adapted to frictionally
    engage and move rectilinearly relative to the tool holder, and to engage
    the cutter and cause the cutter to be gripped between the moving member and
    a reaction surface of the tool holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94+,    for similar structure wherein a sliding member moves to wedgingly
    bind the cutter to the tool holder.

    112,    for a sliding jaw tool holder wherein the cutter is not adjustable
    relative to the tool holder.


CLS 407/99
TXT Holder adapted for tools of different shape:

    Device under subclass 66 wherein the means for receiving the cutter is of
    such physical configuration to accept a first tool of a first shape or a
    second tool of a second distinct shape.


CLS 407/100
TXT With chip breaker, guide or deflector:

    Device under subclass 66 with or including means specifically intended to
    cause the portion of material removed from the work to be subdivided into
    smaller pieces, with means to cause the material removed to pass in a
    prescribed path, or with means to divert the material removed away from a
    prescribed path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for structure including a chip breaker, guide or deflector that is
    detachable from the cutter or tool holder.

    115+,   for a chip breaker, guide or deflector not claimed in combination
    with a tool holder.


CLS 407/101
TXT With separate means to fasten tool seat to holder:

    Device under subclass 66 including means detachable from the tool holder
    intended to secure the cutter receiving pocket to the tool holder.


CLS 407/102
TXT With separate means to fasten tool to holder:

    Device under subclass 66 including means detachable from the tool holder,
    which means is intended to secure the cutter to the tool holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40+,    for means to fasten a cutter to a tool holder comprising a face or
    end mill.

    47+,    for means to fasten a cutter to a rotary holder.


CLS 407/103
TXT Apertured tool:

    Device under subclass 102 wherein the cutter is provided with an opening
    therethrough for receipt of the detachable structure for securing that
    cutter to the tool holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for means to secure a rotary, apertured cutter to a tool holder.


CLS 407/104
TXT With means projecting through aperture to force tool laterally against
    reaction surface:

    Device under subclass 103 wherein the structure is specifically adapted for
    the separate fastening means to pass through the opening in the cutter to
    force the cutter in a direction laterally of the opening through the cutter
    and into engagement with a reaction surface of the tool holder.


CLS 407/105
TXT Tilting clamp element and separate means to tilt same:

    Device under subclass 104 wherein the means passing through the opening in
    the cutter is an element adapted to change its axial extent by being leaned
    against the wall of the opening passing through the cutter, including means
    specifically intended to act aganist the element to bring about the leaning
    thereof.


CLS 407/106
TXT Rotatable cam clamp element:

    Device under subclass 102 including securing means comprised of a member
    pivotally secured to the tool holder and having an eccentric surface
    adapted to slidable and bindingly engage the cutter and cause the cutter to
    be gripped between the eccentric surface and a reaction surface of the tool
    holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93,     for a rotatable cam clamp element used to secure an adjustable
    cutter to a tool holder.


CLS 407/107
TXT Including tool holding clamp and clamp actuator:

    Device under subclass 102 including a jaw-like element adapted to
    grippingly engage the cutter, and including a member to force that member
    into engagement with the cutter.


CLS 407/108
TXT Wedge clamp element:

    Device under subclass 107 including securing means comprised of a member
    having a surface adapted to slidably engage a portion of the tool holder
    and having another surface adapted to bindingly engage the cutter and cause
    the cutter to be gripped between the surface of the sliding member and a
    reaction surface of the tool holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for a wedge clamp element used to secure a cutter to a face mill
    tool holder.

    49+,    for a wedge clamp element used to secure a cutter to a rotary tool
    holder.

    94+,    for a wedge clamp element used to secure an adjustable cutter to a
    tool holder.


CLS 407/109
TXT Resiliently biased clamp jaw:

    Device under subclass 107 wherein the member adapted to grippingly engage
    the cutter is urged by spring pressure either toward or out of engagement
    with the cutter.


CLS 407/110
TXT Integral with holder:

    Device under subclass 109 wherein the spring urged cutter gripping member
    is part of the same structure as other portions of the tool holder.


CLS 407/111
TXT Pivoted jaw:

    Device under subclass 107 wherein the member adapted to grippingly engage
    the cutter is secured to the tool holder to swing about an axis relative
    thereto.


CLS 407/112
TXT Slidable jaw:

    Device under subclass 107 comprised of a member adapted to frictionally
    engage and move rectilinearly relative to the tool holder, and to engage
    the cutter and cause the cutter to be gripped between the moving member and
    a reaction surface of the tool holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98,     for a sliding jaw structure wherein the cutter is adjustable
    relative to the tool holder.

    108,    for similar structure wherein a sliding member moves to wedgingly
    bind the cutter to the tool holder.


CLS 407/113
TXT INCLUDING TOOL HAVING PLURAL ALTERNATIVELY USABLE CUTTING EDGES:

    Device under the class definition including a cutter on which there is a
    first sharp edge adapted to perform a cutting operation of the class type,
    and on which there is a second sharp edge adapted to perform a cutting
    operation of the class type, which cutting edges are intended to be used at
    different times.


CLS 407/114
TXT With intergral chip breaker, guide or deflector:

    Device under subclass 113 including means intended to subdivide the
    material cut away from the work member, to direct that material in a
    certain path, or to divert that material away from a certain path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    for a chip breaker, guide or deflector on a cutter having only a
    single cutting edge, and see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 407/115
TXT WITH CHIP BREAKER, GUIDE OR DEFLECTOR:

    Device under the class definition including means intended to subdivide the
    material removed from the work, intended to direct that material in a
    certain path, or intended to divert that material out of certain path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for a chip breaker, guide or deflector that is detachable from the
    cutter and the tool holder.

    100,    for a chip breaker, guide or deflector claimed in combination with
    a cutter and tool holder.

    114,    for a chip breaker, guide or deflector claimed in combination with
    a cutter having plural alternatively usable cutting edges.


CLS 407/116
TXT Comprising concave surface in cutting face of tool:

    Device under subclass 115 wherein the means to subdivide, direct or divert
    the material removed from the workpiece comprises a hollowed out shape in
    that portion of the cutter adjacent to the cutting edge, over which the
    product of the cutting operation will pass during the cutting operation.


CLS 407/117
TXT INCLUDING CUT OFF TOOL:

    Device under the class definition including a cutter intended to subdivide
    a first workpiece from a second workpiece.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 651+ for similar structure wherein the cutting
    element is intended to subdivide one portion of the work material from
    another, but wherein there is no machining to shape the work.


CLS 407/118
TXT COMPRISING CUTTING EDGE BONDED TO TOOL SHANK:

    Device under the class definition including a cutter comprised of a portion
    including a sharp cutting edge adhesively or metallurgically secured to the
    adjacent portions of the cutter.


CLS 407/119
TXT COMPRISING TOOL OF SPECIFIC CHEMICAL COMPOSITION:

    Device under the class definition wherein significance is attributed to the
    chemical structure of the cutter.


CLS 407/120
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Device under the class definition not provided for above.


CLS 408/
TTL CUTTING BY USE OF ROTATING  AXIALLY MOVING TOOL

CLS 408/
TXT I.      CLASS DEFINITION

    Class 408 is the residual locus of methods and machines for penetrating
    material, without substantial reshaping flow of such material, by means of
    a solid tool that turns about an axis, and moves relative to a workpiece,
    along that axis during operation.

    (1)     Note.  The phrase "without substantial reshaping flow of such
    material" is intended to cover the noncutting deformation of material by
    forcing a tool into or through said material, which method or apparatus is
    provided for in Class 72, Metal Deforming.

    (2)     Note.  Class 408 is intended to ultimately include all cutting as
    defined above; however, not all classes have now been screened for such
    art. Included among such classes likely to include patents proper for Class
    408 and not yet screened are Classes 82, 142, 409, and 451.

    II.     SCOPE OF THE CLASS

    Class 408 is an elemental or basis class.  That is, its subject matter is
    restricted (so far as possible) to means for, or steps of, accomplishing
    the following functions; cutting something (the "work"); or cutting, and
    handling the work to be cut; or cutting and handling the product of the
    cutting operation.

    III.    GLOSSARY

    Terms in the definition of this class followed by an asterisk (*) will be
    found to be defined in this section.  Certain very frequently appearing
    terms such as Work, Tool, Product and Tool Axis are accompanied by the
    asterisk only where the exact meaning of the term is deemed particularly
    important.

    CUTTING EDGE

    a marginal portion of a tool comprising a line or point on the surface of
    the tool formed by the intersection of a plurality of planar surfaces,
    specifically adapted to perform a cutting function.

    INFEED

    the relative movement of the tool and work along the tool-axis* during the
    cutting operation.  (Compare work-infeed* and tool-infeed*).

    MACHINE-FRAME

    structure relative to which a tool moves during operation, which structure
    is of particular utility due to its physical configuration for supporting
    the weight of a tool or for counteracting the thrust of the tool, wherein
    the tool to be supported or the force of which is to be counteracted is
    adapted to perform an operation of this class type.

    PRODUCT

    material which has been treated by the cutting tool; the result of a
    cutting operation.  (Note:  Material which is "product" for one cutting
    operation may be "work" for an ensuing operation).

    TOOL

    the instrumentality that contacts the work for effecting directly the
    operation of the class, either by itself or by cooperation with another
    tool.

    TOOL-CYCLE

    the elapsed time between and all of the motions traced by the tool between
    the time the tool leaves any particular datum point in its approach to (or
    recession from) the work until it again leaves that point in its next
    succeeding approach to (or recession from) the work, the location of such
    datum point for a series of recurring cycles being determined without
    giving significance to mere positioning movements of the tool with respect
    to the work.  (Note:  Positioning movements of the tool are considered to
    be part of the cycle of motions constituting the tool-cycle, and the time
    they occupy is part of the span of the cycle.  They are disregarded only
    for the purpose of establishing the datum point of one cycle with respect
    to that of a preceding or succeeding cycle).

    TOOL-INFEED

    the motion of a tool relative to work and relative to the base of the
    cutting machine along the tool-axis toward the work during the cutting
    operation.

    TOOL-SUPPORT

    an element connected to the tool for supporting it against gravity and that
    partakes of all the movement of the tool and has no relative movement with
    respect to the tool except for purpose of adjustment.

    TOOL-AXIS

    the longitudinal center about which the cutting tool of this class rotates
    relative to the work and relative to the machine-frame structure during the
    cutting operation.

    WORK (n)

    article, material, or stuff to be treated (cut).  (Compare "product").

    WORK-INFEED

    the motion of work relative to the tool and relative to the base of the
    cutting machine along the tool-axis toward the tool during the cutting
    operation.

    IV.     MISCELLANEOUS MAIN CLASS NOTES

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, for a hand supported implement including a portion
    for performing an operation of this class (408) and including a portion for
    performing a noncutting operation.

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, for means or methods particular to the
    cutting of footgear.

    29,     Metal Working, for (1) a step of our machine for performing a
    cutting operation combined with or convertible to a step of or machine for
    performing a noncutting material treatment; (2) a cutting tool or
    tool-assembly physically limited to use with rotating work; or (3) a
    cutting tool or tool-assembly for use alternatively; A.  during rotary plus
    axial motion relative to the work, B.  during rotary plus radial motion
    relative to the work, or C.  during rotary plus lateral motion relative to
    the work.

    30,     Cutlery, for a cutting structure that is (1) operator supported,
    (2) work supported, (3) randomly manipulated, or (4) randomly manipulated
    and combined with a work-support wherein the cutter moves in a manner other
    than rotary and axial relative to the work during operation.  This class
    (408) is superior to Class 30; therefore, a tool alternatively usable in
    the structure of either class will be found in this class.

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, for a device for cutting work to measure
    physical characteristics of that work, and for a geometrical instrument to
    be used with a tool of this class.

    60,     Power Plants, for a prime mover to be used to drive a tool, in the
    absence of any work-contacting structure other than the tool or of frame
    structure of particular utility to support a tool.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, for the shaping of green ceramic material
    combined with cutting, in a single or a plurality of operations.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, for means or methods including cutting,
    particular to making leather articles.

    72,     Metal Deforming, for deforming combined with the cutting of metal.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, for a measuring device to be used with a
    cutting tool of this class.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, for structure for causing one machine
    element to move relative to another and thereby to cause a tool to move, in
    the absence of any work-contacting structure other than the tool or of
    frame structure of particular utility to support a tool.

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, for cutting in the manufacture
    of a tool.

    79,     Button Making, for the manufacture of a button by (1) an operation
    other than cutting by a rotating, axially moving tool; or, (2) a plurality
    of steps, one of which is material treatment other than cutting and another
    of which is cutting.

    81,     Tools, for a torque applying, hand-held device of general utility;
    including a device wherein one utility is to transmit torque to a rotary,
    axially advancing cutting tool.

    82,     Turning, for the cutting of rotating material, other than wood, by
    a tool engaging that material in a way affected by such rotation; and for
    the cutting of nonrotating material by a tool having a single cutting edge,
    wherein the operation is on generally circular cross-section material and
    wherein the tool turns about the axis of the material and has additional
    motion other than along that axis, so that the cutting is similar to the
    action of a nonrotating tool acting on rotating material.

    83,     Cutting, for all cutting not provided for elsewhere.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, for a motor of that class to be
    used to drive a tool, in the absence of any work-contacting structure other
    than the tool or of frame structure of particular utility to support a tool.

    101,    Printing, for a printing operation combined with cutting by a
    rotating, axially moving tool.

    111,    Planting, for cutting into the earth by a rotating, axially moving
    tool combined with means for depositing on object into the bore.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, for an engine of that class to be used
    to drive a tool, in the absence of any work-contacting structure other than
    the tool or of frame structure of particular utlity to support a tool.

    125,    Stone Working, for a step of or machine for cutting stone if the
    operation is other than by use of a rotating, axially moving cutter.

    128,    Surgery, for cutting operations particular to an operation on a
    live animal body.

    137,    Fluid Handling, for an operation of that class, combined with
    cutting in the manner of this class (408), except when the fluid handling
    is ancillary to the cutting operation.

    140,    Wireworking, for cutting of wire combined with other wireworking.

    142,    Wood Turning, for the cutting of rotating wood material by a tool
    engaging that material in a way affected by such rotation; and for the
    cutting of nonrotating wood material by a tool having a single cutting edge
    wherein the operation is on generally circular cross-section material and
    wherein the tool turns about the axis of the material and has additional
    motion other than along that axis, so that the cutting is similar to the
    action of a nonrotating tool acting on rotating material.

    144,    Woodworking, for cutting combined noncutting treatment of wood;
    and, for cutting of particular utility of wood, except for cutting of wood
    by a rotating axially moving tool.

    147,    Coopering, for machines which are used exclusively in the
    manufacture of wooden barrels, fruit boxes, baskets, or crates.

    157,    Wheelwright Machines, for structure for performing a noncutting
    material treatment combined with a cutting operation in the making of a
    wheel.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, for structure for moving a tool about an
    axis and toward a workpiece to effect cutting, in the absence of any
    work-contacting structure other than the tool or of frame structure of
    particular utility to support a tool.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, for cutting by a rotating axially
    moving tool particular to cutting into the earth.

    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, or Animal Powered, for a motor of that
    class to be used to drive a tool, in the absence of any work-contacting
    structure other than the tool or of frame structure of particular utility
    to support a tool.

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, for the application of tensile
    forces to a workpiece to cause that workpiece to be divided combined with
    cutting by a rotating, axially moving tool.

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), for a cutting device which
    includes a plurality of cutting tool pairs (including cutting structure of
    this class (408) type) and an actuating power train for each pair (one
    power train may be common to all), so that power may be delivered to any or
    all pairs for any cutting cycle, and wherein each and all of the tool pairs
    assembled in the machine are constantly available to be chosen for cutting
    or noncutting (in any desired number, from one to the total number
    available) by (1) a pattern, (2) combinational coding means, or (3) means
    not a part of the tool actuating power train and which does not partake of
    all the movements of either tool or the pair; which pattern or means
    conditions each pair so chosen to (a) enable or (b) prevent a cutting
    operation thereby when its driving power train is actuated.

    248,    Supports, for structure for supporting a machine, if the supporting
    structure is of general utility.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, for flame cutting apparatus; and subclass
    271 of that class for drilling or cutting the tap-hole plug of a
    metallurgical furnace.

    269,    Work Holders, for structure to be used to sustain material during a
    material treatment operation, such as cutting by a rotating axially moving
    tool, provided there is no tool-supporting structure, tool-guiding
    structure, tool-couple-element, or structure otherwise recognizing the tool
    of a machine for cutting.

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, for structure for the general utility of holding
    a tool.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, for processes,
    machines or tools for boring or penetrating into the earth to recover
    valuable cuttings from a borehole in desirable size or shape.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, for a coating implement
    combined with a cutting device (e.g., a pencil with a pencil sharpener).

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, for cutting by a rotating tool
    that moves either laterally or radially of the tool-axis relative to the
    material during the cutting operation; especially subclass 306 for the
    rifling of a gun barrel.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, appropriate subclasses for bringing
    work to or taking product from an unspecified cutting machine, generally;
    and subclasses 222+ for apparatus for charging a load holding or supporting
    element from a source, and means for transporting the element to a working,
    treating, or inspecting station.

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 75+ for drill guides; subclasses 103+ for
    machines; and subclass 165 for tool bits specifically adapted for dental
    operations.

    451,    Abrading, for abrading involving a tool composed of crystalline,
    material-removing particles, generally.  The combination of a Class 408
    cutter with a Class 451 abrading device is to be found in Class 408,
    subclasses 22+.  Note that cutting by a rotating tool that moves axially
    with respect to a workpiece is included in the definition of Class 408,
    even if the tool is an abrading tool, but that Class 451 has not been
    screened for such structure.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, for the manufacture of an article of that class by (1) an
    operation other than cutting by a rotating, axially moving tool; or (2) a
    plurality of steps, one of which is a material treatment other than cutting
    and another of which is cutting.

    483,    Tool Changing, generally for a process or apparatus including a
    tool transfer means combined with either a tool support or storage means,
    particularly subclasses 30+ for a tool transfer means which bodily
    transfers tools to or from a rotary spindle machine tool.



    V.      LISTING OF CLASSES REFERRED TO IN THE CLASS DEFINITION (PREVIOUS
    SECTIONS) AND IN THE SUBCLASS DEFINITIONS (WHICH FOLLOWS)

    Class   Section (of this        Subclass (in this
                    Class Definition)       Class Definition)



    7               IV

    10              IV

    12              IV

    29              IV      31, 73

    30              IV      20, 21

    33              IV      115

    60              IV

    65              IV

    69              IV

    72              IV      2, 8, 221

    73              IV      241

    74              IV      234

    76              IV

    79              IV

    81              IV      120, 121

    82              IV      20, 23

    83              IV      8, 19, 20, 22, 24,
                            85,186, 208, 214

    91              IV

    101             IV

    111             IV

    123             IV

    125             IV

    128             IV

    137             IV

    140             IV

    142             IV

    144             IV      131

    147             IV

    157             IV

    173             IV      8

    175             IV

    177                     2

    185             IV

    220                     154

    225             IV

    226                     8, 19

    234             IV

    248             IV      234

    266             IV

    269             IV

    279             IV      238

    299             IV

    308                     72, 115, 241

    401             IV

    409             IV      20, 44, 70, 73,
                            131, 146

    414             IV

    433             IV      16, 202

    451             I, IV   18, 27, 145

    483             IV      35


CLS 408/1
TXT Method under the class definition which includes a step of cutting.


CLS 408/2
TXT Device under the class definition combined with means to determine the
    weight or other characteristics of the material.


CLS 408/3
TXT Device under the class definition including structure for utilizing the
    characteristics (e.g., physical or electrical) of an element, that is
    separate from the work and is separate from the organized structure of the
    device, to infuence the operation of the device.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes machines for utilizing a prepared
    information supply that is to be removably placed in the machine.  This
    subclass does not include structure for utilizing the characteristics of a
    "permanent" part if the machine, such as a cam or gear to influence the
    operation of other parts of the machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72+,    for a "templet", which merely guides the tool and does not
    otherwise influence the operation of the device.

    124+,   for a "permanent" cam or gear used to regulate the operation of the
    device.


CLS 408/4
TXT Device under the class definition wherein two movable parts of the machine
    are related such that in at least one position of one of the parts movement
    of the other part is restricted by the first part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148+,   for releasable locking structure adapted to secure together two
    elements of a tool-holder.


CLS 408/5
TXT Device under the class definition provided with means to bring any or all
    of the moving parts of the device to a halt, the halting effect being
    accomplished in response to a signal or impulse caused by an abnormal
    occurrence during the operation of the device.

    (1)     Note.  A machine capable of stopping will not be placed here unless
    the stopping means operates as a result of an unplanned or unpredictable
    occurrence.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14+,    for stopping means effective on completion of a predictable or
    planned operation.


CLS 408/6
TXT Device under subclass 5 in which the signal or impulse is generated by a
    detector sensing a characteristic of the tool* or the tool-driving means.

    (1)     Note.  The detector may contact the tool or tool-driving means
    during the normal operation of the device in which case the stopping signal
    is generated by failure of the detector to make such contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for a similar device including control means that serves to
    influence the operation of the device in a manner other than by stopping
    the device randomly.


CLS 408/7
TXT Device under subclass 5 in which the signal or impulse is generated by a
    detector sensing a characteristic of the work* or product*.

    (1)     Note.  The sensed characteristic of the work or product may be
    shape, presence, absence or attitude.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for a similar device including control means that serves to
    influence the operation in a manner other than by randomly stopping the
    device.


CLS 408/8
TXT Device under the class definition including means for:

    a)      detecting any of the following characteristics:  a state or
    property, a change in a state or property, or the occurrence of a
    predetermined event, in any of the following:  the work, the product of a
    machine, the machine itself, or the environment of the machine affecting
    the operation thereof; and

    b)      initiating (as a direct result of such detection) a force or
    impulse other than that generated or transmitted by the detecting means; and

    c)      regulating or modifying (as a direct result of such initiation) the
    operation of said machine.

    (1)     Note.  The control systems of this and indented subclasses are
    similar in concept to control systems of other classes; particularly, Class
    72, Metal Deforming, especially subclasses 6+; Class 83, Cutting; Class
    173, Tool Driving or Impacting, especially subclasses 2+, and Class 226,
    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, especially subclasses 10+.  The
    total operations and the claimed combinations are, of course, different;
    but, the control systems, per se, found in these other classes are usually
    analogous to those herein and may be applicable to the machines of this
    class (Class 408).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for a templet responsive control means.

    5+,     for control structure adapted to stop the operation of the cutting
    machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 130+
    for data processing control systems wherein the control system is claimed
    generically, and subclasses 474.1+ for the application of a computer in the
    manufacturing of a product which includes cutting or punching.


CLS 408/9
TXT Device under subclass 8 provided with a mechanism to govern the angular
    velocity of the tool* about the tool-axis*.

    (1)     Note.  The structure for governing the angular velocity of the tool
    includes structure for;

    a.      increasing and/or decreasing the speed of rotation,

    b.      reversing the direction of rotation,

    c.      stopping the rotation or,

    d.      maintaining the speed of rotation  constant.


CLS 408/10
TXT Device under subclass 8 provided with mechanism to regulate or modify the
    infeed*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for a device including work-infeed* means for one of a plurality of
    tools.

    62+,    for work-infeed* means for a single tool.

    99+,    for tool-infeed* means adapted to move a tool toward an opposing,
    work-engaging surface.

    129+,   for other tool-infeed means.


CLS 408/11
TXT Device under subclass 10 wherein the detector senses a characteristic of a
    tool* or of a machine element normally connected to the tool for movement
    therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for similar device including structure to sense a tool and bring
    the device to a halt in an abnormal condition thereof.


CLS 408/12
TXT Device under subclass 10 wherein the detector senses a characteristic of
    the material subjected to the cutting operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for similar structure adapted to sense the work or product and
    bring the device to a halt in response to an abnormal condition thereof.


CLS 408/13
TXT Device under subclass 8 including a mechanism to cause relative movement
    between the tool* and work*, wherein the operation regulated or modified is
    that of a mechanism for causing relative movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10+,    for a device including control structure for regulating positioning
    of the work and the tool along the tool-axis.


CLS 408/14
TXT Device under the class definition including means to bring one or more
    parts of a machine to a halt after the machine or a part thereof has
    completed an intended operation.

    (1)     Note.  Only a device including structure of particular utility to
    bring about stoppage after the completion of an intended operation is
    placed herein.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass are those devices sometimes
    described as a unicyclic.


CLS 408/15
TXT Device under subclass 14 wherein when the intended operation is complete,
    the halting is effected by a characteristic of the work* or product*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for similar structure adapted to stop the device, which structure
    acts in response to the detection of an abnormal occurrence.


CLS 408/16
TXT Device under the class definition including, in addition to structure for
    performing a class-type operation, either (1) means to produce a
    perceptible (e.g., audible or visual) manifestation of a condition of a
    part (or all) of the machine or of the work; (2) means to designate a
    characteristic of the device, the work or the product; (3) means to
    increase the lighting intensity in the vicinity of the device or the work;
    or; (4) means to modify light waves to make characteristics of the device,
    the work or the product more readily discernable to the view of the
    operative.

    (1)     Note.  The additional structure may be calibrated quantitatively;
    however, mere calibration of a machine element, not in addition to
    structure for performing an operation of the class, is not considered
    proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    for a device of this class having provision to receive means for
    determining and designating a characteristic of the device, work or product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    433,    Dentistry, subclass 29 for dental drilling apparatus provided with
    means to illuminate the work.


CLS 408/17
TXT Machines under the class definition having structure for causing the tool
    or the tool-support to be fed intermittently or to be fed and withdrawn
    respectively in its approach relative to the work along the axis of tool
    rotation.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are devices known as "chip
    breakers" and devices with special provision to withdraw the tool to
    discharge chips.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124+,   for structure for causing a tool to move along the tool-axis during
    the cutting operation.

    143,    for means to impart, to the tool, a vibration characteristic
    different from the vibration characteristic imparted by the reaction of the
    tool and work to damp the energy of a vibrating tool.


CLS 408/18
TXT Device under the class definition in combination with means to treat the
    tool* and make that tool more suitable to perform its intended function.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is means to remove foreign matter from
    (e.g., clean), and means to prepare the tool by modifying or maintaining
    characteristics of the tool (e.g., sharpen).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56+,    for a tool of the class type combined with means to apply fluid to
    work to carry loose chips away from the tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, appropriate subclasses
    for cleaning means adapted to remove foreign material from a tool.

    451,    Abrading, for abrading means adapted to sharpen a tool of this
    class type, particularly subclass 420 for an abrading device adapted to be
    attached to a machine of this class type.


CLS 408/19
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means to impart an
    impermanent change of shape (i.e., within the elastic limit) to work and to
    hold the work in that shape during the cutting operation.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes devices which deform the work, as
    above defined, wherein such deformation is prerequisite to effect
    predetermined line of cut; that is to say, the desired cut could not be
    effected in the absence of the deformation while operating the machine in
    the intended manner.

    (2)     Note.  Means for compressing, or stretching, a resilient workpiece
    and subsequently cutting a circular opening in same to impart an elliptical
    product surface configuration thereto upon release of the deforming forces
    would be properly placed in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 176, for cutting means of general utility
    combined with means to temporarily deform the work.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclass 88, for means
    to deform material of indeterminate-length to facilitate feeding of the
    material.


CLS 408/20
TXT Device under the class definition which, by relative rearrangement of its
    parts or by the addition or omission of a part is so changed as to perform
    a cutting operation of a different type.

    (1)     Note.  The different type cutting function to which the structure
    of this subclass is convertible includes any means for cutting by a sharp
    edge except (1) another cutting device under the definition of this class;
    or, (2) a cutting device that utilizes the same tool used in the first
    modification to cut while rotating and moving radially of the tool-axis
    relative to the work. (See the search class notes below).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, for a handheld-implement for cutting material by a
    rotating axially moving tool convertible to an implement for using that
    same tool for cutting while rotating and moving radially or laterally of
    the tool-axis.

    144,    Woodworking, for a machine for cutting wood by a rotating axially
    moving tool convertible to a device for using that same tool for cutting
    wood while rotating and moving radially or laterally of the tool-axis.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, for a device for cutting of
    material not provided for elsewhere by a rotating axially moving tool for
    cutting such material while rotating and moving radially or laterally of
    the tool-axis.


CLS 408/21
TXT Device under subclass 20 including a single cutting tool that, depending on
    the arrangement of the parts of the device, can selectively be used to
    perform a cutting operation under the class definition or to performs a
    cutting operation of a different type.


CLS 408/22
TXT Device under the class definition combined with additional structure
    capable of performing a cutting operation of a different type.

    (1)     Note.  The different type cutting function with which the structure
    of this subclass is combined includes any means for cutting by a sharp edge
    except another cutting device under the definition of this class.

    (2)     Note.  A cutting tool or tool with support (see tool-support*) will
    be found in this subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder if it
    includes a portion operable to cut in the manner of this class and a
    portion operable to cut in a different manner. Such tools are referred to
    as "compound".

    (3)     Note.  Generally, the combination of cutting of this class (408)
    with noncutting work treatment will not be found in this class; but rather,
    will be found in the class of the other treatment or in a class providing
    for the combination.  (See section IV of this Class Definition and the
    search class notes hereunder for specific class lines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, for a randomly manipulated implement including a
    cutting edge for performing an operation of this class and including
    provision for performing a noncutting material treatment function.

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 26, for a machine including structure for
    performing a cutting function by a rotating, axially moving tool and
    including additional structure for performing another function, which other
    function is a material treatment other than cutting.


CLS 408/23
TXT Device under subclass 22 wherein the additional cutting device is adapted
    to operate on work turning about an axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    82,     Turning, for a rotating or a nonrotating cutting tool acting on
    rotating work.


CLS 408/24
TXT Device under subclass 22 including more than one additional structure
    capable of performing a cutting operation of a type other than provided for
    in this class.


CLS 408/25
TXT Device under subclass 24 wherein each of at least two of the additional
    structures includes a cutting instrumentality that turns about an axis and
    acts to engage work with its surface(s) farthest from the axis about which
    it turns.


CLS 408/26
TXT Device under subclass 22 wherein the additional cutting structure include a
    cutting tool that turns about an axis and acts to engage work with its
    surface(s) farthest from the axis about which it turns.


CLS 408/27
TXT Device under subclass 26 wherein the work-engaging surface(s) of the
    additional cutting tool is at least in part of material that is either a
    natural crystal or is of the character of a natural crystal.

    (1)     Note.  The "natural crystal" of this subclass definition is not
    intended to include a stone shaped as a cutting tooth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145,    for a crystalline cutting (or abrading) tool adapted to operate in
    the manner of this class (408).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, for a machine including a crystalline cutting
    instrumentality combined with additional work cutting or abrading
    structure, provided no tool operates in the manner of this class, or for a
    single abrading instrumentality that moves in a manner than about an axis
    and along that axis relative to a workpiece.  (Note that Class 451 has not
    been screened for art proper for Class 408.)


CLS 408/28
TXT Device under subclass 26 wherein the additional cutting instrumentality
    serves to cut all the way through a section of material to subdivide the
    material.


CLS 408/29
TXT Device under subclass 28 including a carriage for supporting the additional
    cutting instrumentality or including a work-supporting, advancing carriage,
    wherein the additional cutting instrumentality is adapted to slice through
    an entire cross-section of material at one stroke of the carriage
    supporting the instrumentality or of the work-supporting, advancing
    carriage.


CLS 408/30
TXT Device under subclass 22 wherein the additional cutting structure includes
    a cutting instrumentality that moves in a straight line toward the material
    to be cut and cuts that material in a single movement of the
    instrumentality by use of a cutting edge facing in the direction of tool
    movement.


CLS 408/31
TXT Device under the class definition including a first and second tool, each
    tool being for the purpose of performing an operation of the class type,
    wherein the tools are separate from each other (i.e., they are not fixed
    together) during the cutting operation(s), and including a work-contacting
    structure which moves relative to the tools along their axes-of-rotation
    during operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117+,   for a similar device lacking work-contacting structure.


CLS 408/32
TXT Device under subclass 31 wherein the work-engaging structure serves to move
    the work in a direction lateral of at least one tool-axis and wherein the
    tool-supporting structure serves to move that tool such that there is not
    relative lateral motion of that tool and the work during the cutting
    operation thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for similar structure including the use of a single tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 284+, for a cutter of that class, having a
    component of motion in the direction of moving work.


CLS 408/33
TXT Device under subclass 32 either (1) including means to move the tool along
    the tool-axis toward the work and including means to move the work along
    the tool-axis toward the tool during the cutting operation; or, (2) wherein
    the first and second tools turn about a common tool-axis* during operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for coaxial tools that do not move with work during operation.


CLS 408/34
TXT Device under subclass 32 including a plurality of work-supporting,
    work-engaging means for presenting independent portions of work to the
    tools.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43+,    for plural simultaneously operational tools adapted to successively
    engage plural workpieces.


CLS 408/35
TXT Device under subclass 31 including a turnable tool-carrying structure for a
    first and a second tool (or tool group) wherein the carrying structure
    about an axis to selectively present one or the other tool to operate on
    the workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  The first tool (or group of tools) of this subclass is not
    operational simultaneously with the second tool.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein are tools supported by a flexible belt or
    chain.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    483,    Tool Changing, subclasses 18 and 30+ for a rotary spindle machine
    tool combined with a tool transfer means for bodily transferring a tool to
    or from the spindle.


CLS 408/36
TXT Device under subclass 31 wherein the first and second tools turn about a
    common tool-axis during operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for similar structure, wherein the tool-axis travels laterally with
    moving work.


CLS 408/37
TXT Device under subclass 36 wherein the tools are adapted to be positioned on
    opposite sides of the work along the common axis and, during the cutting
    operation, move relative to the work and toward each other along the axis.


CLS 408/38
TXT Device under subclass 37 including another tool that moves during its
    operation toward a point on the axis of the coaxial tools, which point is
    within the work, during the cutting operation of the tools.


CLS 408/39
TXT Device under subclass 37 including another plurality of tools that are also
    adapted to be positioned on opposite sides of work, along a second common
    axis which additional plurality of tools move along the second common axis
    to engage the work and perform a cutting operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for structure meeting this definition, wherein the second common
    axis intersects the first.


CLS 408/40
TXT Device under subclass 37 including provision to relatively move first one,
    then the other of the opposing tools toward the work.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is intended to include a pair of tools, both
    of which are fixed against axial motion and a work-supporting infeed means
    adapted to move the work, first toward one then toward the other of the
    tools.


CLS 408/41
TXT Device under subclass 37 including structure constructed to feed both of
    the tools toward the work at the same time.


CLS 408/42
TXT Device under subclass 31 including structure causing the relative approach
    of more than one tool and the work to occur at the same time so that a
    plurality of cutting operations takes place concurrently.


CLS 408/43
TXT Device under subclass 42 including more than one work-supporting surface
    for presenting more than one piece of work to different tools at the same
    time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for similar structure wherein the tool axis moves with the work
    during operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 221+ for a milling
    machine including an indexable work support.


CLS 408/44
TXT Device under subclass 43 including means to reposition either the work or
    the tools between cutting operations, such that a piece of work is
    presented first to one, then to another of the tools.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70+,    for means to present a succession of workpieces to a single tool.

    88+,    for means to shift a tool position to present that tool to a
    succession of workpieces.


CLS 408/45
TXT Device under subclass 44 wherein the structure for presenting the work to
    the tools turns about an axis that extends in the same direction as at
    least one of the tool axes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for similar means to present a succession of workpieces to a single
    tool.


CLS 408/46
TXT Device under subclass 42 including means to allow the positional
    arrangement of one of the tools relative to another of the tools to be
    changed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for a tool that is shiftable relative to its support structure and
    relative to an opposing, work-engaging surface.


CLS 408/47
TXT Device under subclass 42 wherein one (or more) of the tools is caused to
    rotate by the action of an element which revolves so that any point thereon
    travels in a circular path within a plane normal to the tool-axis and no
    two points move in the same path, the driving force of the element being
    transferred directly to the tool or the tool-support by interengagement of
    a portion of the tool-support that is offset from the tool-axis with a
    portion of the element.

    (1)     Note.  The motion of the tool-driving means defined above is
    similar to that of a pencil writing the letter "O".


CLS 408/48
TXT Device under subclass 42 wherein rotary motion is transmitted to one (or
    more) tool either by (1) a driveshaft turning about an axis that intersects
    and is skewed with respect to the tool-axis, which driveshaft is rotatably
    connected to the tool at the point where the tool-axis and the
    driveshaft-axis intersect so that rotary effort is transmitted from the
    driveshaft to the tool; or by, (2) a shaft-like member connected to the
    tool to rotate therewith, which shaft-like member is adapted to bend and
    transmit rotary effort from a driveshaft turning about an axis other than
    the tool-axis directly to the tool; wherein the means to apply rotary
    effort is capable of functioning over a range of tool-axis driveshaft-axis
    angles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for flexible drive means for driving a single tool.


CLS 408/49
TXT Device under subclass 42 including a base for supporting the entire device
    against gravity and including structure for moving the work along a
    tool-axis relative to the base, toward the tool during the cutting
    operation of that tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62+,    for similar infeed structure for moving the work toward a single
    tool.


CLS 408/50
TXT Device under subclass 42 including structure for either moving, guiding or
    otherwise influencing the path along which the material to be subjected to
    the cutting operation travels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for work advancing structure to sequentially present the work to
    different tools.

    69+,    for means to influence the movement of work relative to a single
    tool.


CLS 408/51
TXT Device under subclass 42 with means engaging the work from the same side as
    the tool so that the work-engaging means tends to push the work along the
    tool-axis and away from the tool during the cutting operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95+,    for similar structure including a single tool and including a
    tool-opposing, work-engaging surface.

    112,    for similar structure including a single tool.


CLS 408/52
TXT Device under subclass 42 including structure to contact the work on the
    side directly opposite the side initially engaged by the operating cutting
    tool such that the work-contacting structure tends to resist movement of
    the work away from the tool, along the tool-axis during the cutting
    operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87+,    for similar structure, including a single tool.


CLS 408/53
TXT Device under subclass 31 with structure to support the tools so that the
    axes about which the tools turn extend in the same direction.


CLS 408/54
TXT Device under the class definition with provision for causing the tool to
    engage the work during less than 360o and to thereby merely notch the work.


CLS 408/55
TXT Device under the class definition with means to engage and move the work in
    a direction lateral of the tool-axis wherein tool-supporting structure
    serves to move the tool such that there is no relative lateral motion of
    the tool and the work during the cutting operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for similar structure including the use of a plurality of tools.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 284+, for a cutter of that class, having of
    motion in the direction of moving work.


CLS 408/56
TXT Device under the class definition including means for bringing a flowable
    substance temporarily into engagement with the work*, or product*, which
    substance may serve any purpose except treatment of the work or product in
    a manner provided for elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  Application of a flowable medium to the cutting edge of a
    tool is considered to be application of the material to the work.

    (2)     Note.  Means to apply a vacuum in the vicinity of the work, causing
    the atmosphere to flow over the work is considered to be means to apply
    fluent medium to the work.

    (3)     Note.  The coating of work, other than as provided for herein,
    combined with a tool of this class will be found either in the appropriate
    class for the coating device, or in a class proving for the combination.
    (See section IV of this class definition for specific lines).


CLS 408/57
TXT Device under subclass 56 wherein the means to apply the flowable substance
    includes a closed, tubelike passageway through the tool* which is used to
    carry the flowable substance either to or away from the work.

    (1)     Note.  A tool, per se, having a passage therethrough which passage
    is intended for application of fluent medium to the work is proper for this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204+,   for a tool having a passageway to receive an undisturbed core of
    the workpiece.

    207+,   for a tool having a chamber for receiving chips produced by the
    cutting action of the tool.


CLS 408/58
TXT Device under subclass 57 wherein the means for causing a substance to flow
    serves to create, at an area, a pressure that is lower than the ambient
    pressure, so that any surrounding gas is moved toward that area by the
    ambient pressure.


CLS 408/59
TXT Device under subclass 57 wherein the tool has a cutting edge at its axial
    tip, and wherein the closed, tube-like passageway includes a port at the
    tip of the tool.

    (1)     Note.  The port of a passageway visable in an elevation taken along
    the tool-axis toward the tool is considered to be at the tip of the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204+,   for a tool having a passageway extending to the tip thereof, which
    passageway is to receive an undisturbed core of the workpiece.


CLS 408/60
TXT Device under subclass 57 wherein the passageway through the tool terminates
    in an aperture specifically adapted to eject the flowable medium so that
    the medium flows beyond the aperture with no restriction, other than that
    impressed by inertia and/or gravity of the medium, into engagement with the
    work or the cutting edge of the tool.


CLS 408/61
TXT Device under subclass 56 having a passageway terminating in an aperture
    specifically adapted to eject the flowable medium so that the medium flows
    beyond the aperture with no restriction, other than that impressed by
    inertia and/or gravity of the medium, into engagement with the work or the
    cutting edge of the tool.


CLS 408/62
TXT Device under the class definition including a base for supporting the
    entire device against gravity and active means to move or carry the work
    relative to the base, toward the tool, along the tool-axis during the
    cutting operation.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a work- infeed* means, per se; which, as
    disclosed, cooperates with a tool to perform an operation of this class
    (408) type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99+,    for a tool, tool opposing work-engaging means and means to move the
    tool relative to the work-engaging means.

    111,    for a tool, work-engaging means and means to move the tool relative
    to the work-engaging means.

    129+,   for tool-infeed* means.


CLS 408/63
TXT Device under subclass 62 wherein the work-infeed means is forced to move by
    the action of a hydraulic or pneumatic prime mover.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99,     for structure of this class, including a fluid motor adapted to
    move a tool toward an opposing, work-engaging surface.

    130,    for similar structure including a fluid motor adapted to drive a
    tool.

    702,    for an art digest of pneumatic drive structure for use with a
    device of this class.


CLS 408/64
TXT Device under subclass 62 including a structure moving the infeed means
    which moving structure includes a surface adapted to contact the infeed
    means and move relative therewith to force the infeed means to function by
    a camming-type cooperation therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100+,   for similar structure adapted to move a tool relative to an
    opposing work-engaging surface.


CLS 408/65
TXT Device under subclass 62 including structure for moving the infeed means,
    which moving structure includes a rigid element pivotally connected to the
    infeed means.


CLS 408/66
TXT Device under subclass 62 including structure for moving the infeed means
    which moving structure includes an annular digitated element
    interdigitating with ridges on the infeed means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135,    for gear driven tool-infeed means.


CLS 408/67
TXT Device under the class definition including either means to move the
    product* means to contain the product, or product guiding means moving
    relative to the tool during operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200,    for chip-guiding structure that partakes of all motion of the tool
    during operation.

    207,    for a tool or tool with support wherein a portion that partakes of
    all motion of the tool during operation is a product-receiving chamber.


CLS 408/68
TXT Device under subclass 67 including means to move the product off of or out
    of the tool.

    (1)     Note.  A stationary device used to block movement of the product as
    a tool moves is not considered to be a product handling means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95+,    for a presser-foot similar to structure found herein combined with
    a tool-opposing work-engaging surface, but for purposes other than ejecting
    a product from the tool.

    112,    for structure similar to the ejector of this subclass, but for
    other purposes.


CLS 408/69
TXT Device under the class definition including structure for either moving,
    guiding or otherwise influencing the transportation of the work* from a
    position remote from the tool to a second position nearer than the first to
    the tool, or including structure for supporting the work in the vicinity of
    the tool and additional means to engage the work and move the work relative
    to the tool and work-supporting structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for similar structure including plural, simultaneously operational
    tools.

    89+,    for structure including a work-support shiftable about an axis from
    a first to a second position, both of which positions are within the
    vicinity of the tool.

    91,     for structure including a work-support shiftable rectilinearly from
    a first to a second position, both of which positions are in the vicinity
    of the tool.


CLS 408/70
TXT Device under subclass 69 including means to cause the work to move
    step-by-step from a first position remote from the tool, to a second
    position remote from the tool, and on to a third position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44+,    for similar structure adapted to sequentially present work to a
    plurality of tools.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 221+ for a milling
    machine including an indexable work support.


CLS 408/71
TXT Device under subclass 70 wherein the moving means is fixed to pivot about
    an axis so that the work that it moves turns about that axis as it is
    advanced toward the tool-station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44+,    for similar structure adapted to present work to a plurality of
    tools.


CLS 408/72
TXT Device under the class definition with a tool or tool-supporting or guiding
    structure and structure adapted to contact the work.

    (1)     Note.  The work-contacting structure of this and the subclasses
    indented hereunder usually serves to define a kinematic relationship
    between the tool and the work.

    (2)     Note.  The tool-supporting or guiding structure and the
    work-contacting structure may be fixed together to function as a single
    unit.  (See especially subclass 115 and this, the outdent, subclass).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241,    for a tool-guiding jig (or "Drill Bushing") lacking a
    work-contacting surface.


CLS 408/73
TXT Device under subclass 72 including a tool, tool-supporting structure,
    provision to secure the tool in a position to perform a cutting operation
    of the class type, and means to cause the securing provision to become
    ineffective so that the tool can move relative to the tool-supporting
    structure and relative to the work into an inoperative position; wherein
    the means to cause the securing provision to become ineffective includes a
    surface adapted to contact the work and thereby cause the means to function.

    (1)     Note.  The securing provision of this subclass includes a moving
    means as well as a means to permit movement of the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8+,     for similar structure including "control" means.

    142,    for structure to secure to a tool in position, having means to
    release the tool in response to movement of a splined shaft relative to the
    tool.

    148+,   for structure to secure a tool in position, having means to release
    the tool according to relative movement of machine parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    407,    Cutters, for Shaping, for a tool or tool-assemblage adapted to
    perform a cutting function while moving radially.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, for a cutting machine including
    a cutting tool which performs a cutting function while moving radially.


CLS 408/74
TXT Device under subclass 73 wherein the work-contacting surface that serves to
    cause the securing provision to become ineffective abuts the work at the
    tool-axis*.


CLS 408/75
TXT Device under subclass 72 including means adapted to be in the tool-support
    prior to the cutting operation so that the device can be precisely
    positioned, which means is to be removed from the tool-support so that the
    tool can be positioned therein to function in the cutting operation.


CLS 408/76
TXT Device under subclass 72 wherein the work is attracted to the work-engaging
    means by either, (1) the action on ferrous work of aligned molecules in the
    additional means; or, (2) by the reduction of atmospheric pressure in
    restricted areas between the work-engaging surface and the work to cause
    the work to be urged toward the surface by atmospheric pressure acting on
    other areas of the work.


CLS 408/77
TXT Device under subclass 72 wherein the work-contacting structure includes an
    annular member rotatably connected to the device at the central axis of the
    member, and adapted to rest upon the work to sustain thereupon at least a
    substantial portion of the device against gravity during the cutting
    operation.

    (1)     Note.  The annular work-contacting structure of this subclass is
    normally used to support and transport the device when the device is not
    being used to perform an operation of this class type.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is to receive cross-reference copies of
    portable, wheel-supported cutting machines wherein the wheels are not
    resting on the work at the time when the cutting operation is taking place.


CLS 408/78
TXT Device under subclass 77 wherein the central axis about which the annular
    member rotates extends in the same direction as the tool-axis* during the
    cutting operation.


CLS 408/79
TXT Device under subclass 72 wherein the work-contacting structure is adapted
    to be received by a passageway through or a recession in the surface of the
    work so that the work-contacting structure may contact the wall of the
    passageway or the recession to stabilize a portion of the device relative
    to the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93+,    for a structure that passes through a passageway in the work to
    secure a tool-opposing, work-engaging means to the device, wherein there is
    no disclosure of stabilization of the structure caused by engagement with
    the walls of the passageway.


CLS 408/80
TXT Device under subclass 79 wherein the work-contacting means is adapted to
    contact the wall of a cylindrical opening in the work, the axis of which
    opening is co-extensive with the tool-axis.


CLS 408/81
TXT Device under subclass 80 wherein the cutting tool is adapted to engage and
    modify characteristics of the passageway or recession contacted by the
    additional work-contacting means.

    (1)     Note.  The work-contacting means of this subclass may contact the
    wall of the passageway or recession at a point remote from the operating
    tool.


CLS 408/82
TXT Device under subclass 81 wherein the work-contacting structure is adapted
    to contact the wall of the passageway at a point that will be later
    subjected to the cutting action if the tool is allowed to continue to
    progress.


CLS 408/83
TXT Device under subclass 81 wherein the work-contacting structure is adapted
    to contact the wall of the passageway at a point that has been subjected to
    the cutting action of the tool, wherein the radius of the wall of the
    cylindrical opening contacted by the work-contacting means is the same as
    the radius being cut by the tool.


CLS 408/83.5
TXT Valve fitting:

    Apparatus under subclass 80 comprising structure particularly adapted to
    cut a shape on a workpiece to serve in cooperation with an opposing surface
    to selectively permit passage of fluid therebetween.


CLS 408/84
TXT Device under subclass 72 wherein the work-contacting structure includes a
    surface similar to the inside of a cone, which surface is specifically
    adapted to receive a projecting portion of the work to align that portion
    of the work relative to the device.

    (1)     Note.  The "conical" surface of this subclass is not necessarily
    circular in cross-section.  However, it must be three-dimensional.  For
    example, a simple notch adapted to align a rod is not considered to be
    similar to a cone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110+,   for a tool combined with a relatively movable work-engaging surface
    which may have a notch therein to align a rod.


CLS 408/85
TXT Device under subclass 72 in which the work-contacting structure penetrates
    the work surface at a point which has not been previously modified.

    (1)     Note.  The work-penetrating structure of this subclass is not to be
    confused with the device of Class 83, Cutting, or the device of Class 72,
    Metal Deforming.  To be placed herein, the penetrating means must solely
    facilitate the securing or aligning of a cutting instrumentality relative
    to work and the depression formed must be unused at any other time for any
    other purpose.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195,    for means to "form" a recession in the work that is not separate
    from the tool or the tool-support, wherein the tool is positionable
    relative to the tool-support.

    208,    for a tool of this class including a lead screw adapted to "form" a
    recession in the work, a product-receiving chamber, and a cutting edge.

    214,    for a tool of this class including a material penetrating lead
    screw and a cutting edge.


CLS 408/86
TXT Device under subclass 85 wherein the work-contacting structure penetrates
    the work-surface at the tool-axis*.


CLS 408/87
TXT Device under subclass 72 wherein the work-contacting structure is
    positioned to contact the work on the side directly opposite the side
    initially engaged by the operating cutting tool such that the
    work-contacting structure tends to resist movement of the work away from
    the tool, along the tool-axis during the cutting operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     for a tool-opposing, work-engaging surface that is part of a
    structure of this class including a plurality of tools.


CLS 408/88
TXT Device under subclass 87 including a base for supporting the device and
    structure for allowing the device to be modified in such a way that the
    axis about which the tool turns during the cutting operation is relocated
    relative to the base.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     for means to carry a plurality of tools and to selectively present
    one or another of the tools to the work.

    46,     for means to reposition one of a plurality of simultaneously
    operational tools.

    89+,    for structure including means for shifting the work-contacting
    structure about an axis relative to the tool-axis where it is not clear if
    the tool-axis or the work-engaging structure is shifted.

    91,     for structure including means for shifting the work-contacting
    structure laterally relative to the tool-axis where it is not clear if the
    tool-axis or the work-engaging structure is shifted.

    99+,    for an axially moving tool loosely mounted and freely positionable
    in a work-contacting structure, the work-contacting structure serving to
    merely counteract the thrust of the tool against the work and support only
    that part of the tool-supporting structure transmitting thrust thereto.


CLS 408/89
TXT Device under subclass 87 including structure allowing the work-contacting
    structure to be pivoted relative to the tool, about an axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for similar structure adapted to support a workpiece and move it,
    in a support, to bring the workpiece about an axis from a remote position
    to a position to be engaged by the tool.


CLS 408/90
TXT Device under subclass 89 wherein the axis about which the work-contacting
    structure is allowed to pivot extends in the same direction as the
    tool-axis.


CLS 408/91
TXT Device under subclass 87 including structure allowing the tool-opposing
    work-contacting structure to be moved, relative to the tool, in a direction
    other than parallel to the tool-axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70+,    for similar structure adapted to support a workpiece and move it,
    in a support to bring the workpiece from a remote position to a position to
    be engaged by the tool.


CLS 408/92
TXT Device under subclass 87 wherein the tool-opposing work-contacting surface
    is constructed either of plaint material or of a plurality of
    interconnected links and is connected to tool guiding or supporting
    structure at the lateral extremities thereof.


CLS 408/93
TXT Device under subclass 87 for modifying the bore of a previously existing
    passageway through the work wherein the work-contacting structure is
    secured to other parts of the device by means extending into and beyond the
    passageway.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80+,    for similar structures wherein the securing structure or the
    work-contacting structure is specifically adapted to frictionally engage
    the side wall of the passageway.


CLS 408/94
TXT Device under subclass 93 having an additional work-contacting structure
    adapted to cooperate with the first work-contacting structure to grip the
    work therebetween, wherein the first work-contacting structure engages the
    work on the side opposite the direction of tool approach resisting movement
    of the work away from the tool and the second work-contacting structure
    engages the work on the side initially engaged by the operating tool urging
    the work away from the operating tool to grip the work between the first
    and second work-contacting structures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95+,    for similar structure wherein the tool-opposing surface is
    connected to the tool than through the passageway being enlarged by the
    tool.


CLS 408/95
TXT Device under subclass 87 with a second work-contacting structure to engage
    the work from the same side as the tool so that this second work-contacting
    structure tends to push the work along the tool-axis, away from the tool
    and toward the first work-contacting structure during the cutting operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for a presser-foot used with a plurality of tools.

    68,     for a presser-foot adapted to fraction to move the product away
    from the tool.

    94,     for structure including a tool opposing work-engaging structure and
    a presser- foot connected together through the opening being enlarged by
    the tool.

    103+,   for other cooperating, work-gripping surfaces wherein neither is in
    tool-opposing position.


CLS 408/96
TXT Device under subclass 95 wherein the second work-contacting means includes
    a surface for engaging the work in the vicinity of the tool-axis as the
    tool sweeps in a circle extending radially beyond the second
    work-contacting structure and wherein the tool is void of a cutting edge in
    the vicinity contacted by the second work-contacting structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for a presser-foot encompassed by the tool, wherein the
    presser-foot also serves to eject a piece of product out of the confines of
    the tool.


CLS 408/97
TXT Device under subclass 95 including a tool-encircling structure advanced of
    any tool-driving structure along the tool-axis, which encircling structure
    is adapted to slidingly engage the tool and thereby restrict the tool from
    moving or flexing laterally.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for nonadjustable structure that is similar to the device found
    herein, but lacking a tool-opposing work-engaging structure.

    115,    for adjustable structure that is similar to the device found
    herein, but lacking a tool-opposing work-engaging structure.

    241,    for similar structure lacking any work-engaging structure.


CLS 408/98
TXT Device under subclass 95 supported by structure adapted to rest on a
    generally stationary surface remote from the tool during operation.


CLS 408/99
TXT Device under subclass 87 including structure to cause relocation of the
    tool with respect to the work-contacting structure in the direction
    parallel with the tool-axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62+,    for similar structure, including a machine-supporting base and
    means to move the work, relative to the base, toward the tool, along the
    tool-axis.

    92,     for similar structure wherein the tool-opposing work-contacting
    structure is flexible or concatenated.

    111,    for similar structure having a work-contacting surface that does
    not oppose the tool.

    129+,   for tool-moving structure lacking a work-engaging means in addition
    to the tool.


CLS 408/100
TXT Device under subclass 99 wherein the structure for causing relocation
    includes a surface adapted to contact either tool or work-contacting means
    and move relative thereto to cause relocation by a camming or wedging
    cooperation therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for similar structure adapted to move work toward a tool and
    relative to a base caring operation.


CLS 408/101
TXT Device under subclass 100 wherein the camming means includes a helically
    disposed inclined plane rotatable about an axis in alignment with the
    tool-axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137,    for a screw used to drive a tool to move axially in the absence of
    a work-contacting structure.


CLS 408/102
TXT Device under subclass 87 including a helically ribbed tool or tool-support
    adapted to interfit with nonrotating structure of the frame of the machine
    supporting the entire assemblage so that the tool moves axially relative to
    the nonrotating structure and the work-engaging structure as it rotates to
    perform a cutting function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    for similar structure lacking work-engaging means in addition to
    the tool.


CLS 408/103
TXT Device under subclass 72 including structure for supporting a pair of
    surfaces and means to move one of the surfaces toward the other to
    grippingly contact a workpiece held therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95+,    for a device including work gripping surfaces wherein one surface
    of the pair is a tool-opposing surface.


CLS 408/104
TXT Device under subclass 103 wherein the work-contacting surfaces are shaped
    to grip cylindrical work and hold that work so that the cylindrical axis
    thereof is in substantial alignment with the tool-axis.


CLS 408/105
TXT Device under subclass 104 including means to move both of the
    work-contacting surfaces simultaneously toward each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for oppositely moving clamps adapted to grip other than coaxially.


CLS 408/106
TXT Device under subclass 105 including more than two surfaces having means to
    cause them to simultaneously move to converge upon and grip the cylindrical
    workpiece.


CLS 408/107
TXT Device under subclass 104 wherein the work-contacting surfaces are
    supported by structure adapted to rest on a generally stationary surface,
    remote from the tool during operation.


CLS 408/108
TXT Device under subclass 103 including means to move both of the
    work-contacting surfaces simultaneously toward each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105+,   for oppositely moving clamps adapted to grip round work.


CLS 408/109
TXT Device under subclass 103 including means to permit the structure
    supporting the work-contacting surfaces to be repositioned laterally
    relative to the tool-axis.


CLS 408/110
TXT Device under subclass 72 including means to support the tool while
    permitting the tool to rotate relative thereto, which supporting means is
    fixed to travel axially with the tool as the tool travels relative to the
    work-contacting structure and the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92,     for similar structure combined with a work-encircling flexible or
    concaterated member.


CLS 408/111
TXT Device under subclass 110 including structure to cause relocation of the
    tool with respect to the work-contacting structure in the direction
    parallel to the tool-axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62+,    for tool-moving structure including a machine supporting base and
    means to move the work relative to the base toward the tool along the
    tool-axis.

    99+,    for tool-moving structure combined with a tool-opposing,
    work-engaging surface.

    129+,   for similar structure lacking a work-contacting surface in addition
    to the tool.


CLS 408/112
TXT Device under subclass 110 including yieldable means adapted to urge the
    tool along the tool-axis in the direction away from the work during the
    cutting operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for means to bias work away from a plurality of simultaneously
    acting tools.

    68,     for means to bias work away from a tool and eject the product of
    the cutting operation away from the tool.

    95+,    for a biased presser foot combined with a tool and a tool-opposing
    work-engaging surface.


CLS 408/113
TXT Device under subclass 72 including means to axially secure the
    work-contacting structure to the tool while permitting relative rotation
    therebetween so that for any axial advance of the tool, there is equal
    axial advance of the work-contacting surface.


CLS 408/114
TXT Device under subclass 113 wherein the portion of the work-contacting
    structure that meets the work is generally planar and is positioned such
    that one dimension thereof extends in the same direction as the tool-axis.


CLS 408/115
TXT Device under subclass 72 including a tool-encircling structure advanced of
    any tool-driving structure along the tool-axis, which encircling structure
    is adapted to slidingly engage the tool and thereby restruct the tool from
    moving or flexing laterally, which device includes provision to permit the
    work-contacting structure to be repositioned relative to the
    tool-encircling structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for similar structure lacking provision for adjustment.

    97,     for similar structure including a tool-opposing, work-engaging
    surface,

    241,    for a tool-guiding jig (or "drill-bushing") lacking a
    work-contacting surface.


CLS 408/116
TXT Device under the class definition including structure specifically provided
    to receive means for determining and designating a characteristic of the
    device, work or product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for the combination of a device of this class type with an
    indicator.


CLS 408/117
TXT Device under the class definition including structure adapted to sustain a
    plurality of separately formed tools, consisting of (1) a plurality of
    tools of this class type adapted to operate simultaneously, which are not
    fixed to move together during the cutting operation; or, (2) a plurality of
    independent tools adapted to be used separately.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31+,    for a complete machine (i.e., work-supporting structure in
    combination with tool-supporting structure, including a plurality of tools.

    188+,   for a device having a tool that is movable about an axis to expose
    different areas of the tool, which areas are to be used in the cutting
    operation, wherein only one cutting station is operatable at a given time.


CLS 408/118
TXT Device under subclass 117 wherein separately formed tools are mounted to
    simultaneously turn about a same tool-axis, which tools are not fixed to
    move together during the cutting operation.


CLS 408/119
TXT Device under subclass 118 including resilient means urging the tools to
    move together along the tool-axis.


CLS 408/120
TXT Device under the class definition including a tool or a tool-support and
    means fixed thereto, including means for supplying torque to the tool, and
    including means located between the tool and the means for supplying torque
    thereto for locking the tool to the torque-supplying means when torque is
    supplied in one direction, which locking means is inoperative for
    transmitting torque when attempt is made to transmit torque in the opposite
    direction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 60+, for ratchet structure of general utility,
    especially ratchet structure adapted to rotate a wrench or screwdriver.


CLS 408/121
TXT Device under subclass 120 including means acting to urge the tool along the
    tool-axis toward the work.

    (1)     Note.  A resilient member may be considered to "urge the tool" as
    required herein.

    (2)     Note.  A ratchet type, torque-applying means combined with means to
    apply thrust will be found herein, even if the device would otherwise be
    considered to be torque applying ratchet of general utility such as is
    found in Class 81, subclasses 60+.


CLS 408/122
TXT Device under subclass 121 including provision to allow the locking means to
    be operative to transmit torque selectively in either direction (and
    correspondingly to be inoperative in the respective opposite direction).

    (1)     Note.  A ratchet device that is simply turned over to reverse the
    output is not considered proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123,    for a reversible ratchet without a thrust-applying means.


CLS 408/122.5
TXT Device under subclass 121 including additional provision to cause the
    torque-supplying means to continue to act on the tool in the same direction
    when the supplying means is moved in the reverse direction.


CLS 408/123
TXT Device under subclass 120 including provision to allow the locking means to
    be operative to transmit torque selectively in either direction (and
    correspondingly to be inoperative in the respective opposite direction).

    (1)     Note.  A ratchet device that is simply turned over to reverse the
    output is not considered proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    for a reversible ratchet combined with thrust-applying means.


CLS 408/124
TXT Device under the class definition including tool-sustaining structure and
    means to move the tool axially and/or to rotate the tool against the work
    during the cutting operation wherein the moving means comprises either (1)
    structure that moves relative to the tool and relative to the
    tool-sustaining structure, or comprises (2) resilient stored energy means,
    electrical (e.g., magnet or solenoid) means, or hydraulic means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for drive structure particularly adapted to transmit to the tool
    reciprocating motion of increasing stroke length or of changing datum such
    that the tool is progressively advanced toward the work.


CLS 408/125
TXT Device under subclass 124 including a tool having a particular, claimed
    structure for performing an operation of this class type.

    (1)     Note.  Because of the placement of this subclass, it serves as a
    filter through which only drive means brought into this class by
    machine-frame* structure may pass.  (See the lines between this class and
    classes of drive structure expressed in section IV of the definition of
    this class).


CLS 408/126
TXT Device under subclass 124 wherein the means to drive the tool includes
    first and second rotatable members, each of which has a generally uniform
    surface of revolution, wherein the first member is supplied with rotary
    effort and the second member is connected to the tool, the two members
    being adapted to engage each other at a portion of their respective
    surfaces of revolution to transmit rotary effort from the first to the
    second (and thereby to the tool) in proportion with the pressure applied to
    force the surfaces into engagement with each other.


CLS 408/127
TXT Device under subclass 124 including either (1) a driveshaft turning about
    an axis that intersects and is skewed with respect to the tool-axis, which
    driveshaft is rotatably connected to the tool at the point where the
    tool-axis and the driveshaft-axis intersect so that rotary effort is
    transmitted from the driveshaft to the tool; or including (2) a shaft-like
    member connected to the tool to rotate therewith, which shaft-like member
    is adapted to bend and transmit rotary effort from a driveshaft turning
    about an axis other than the tool-axis directly to the tool; wherein the
    means to apply rotary effort is capable of functioning over a range of
    tool-axis/driveshaft-axis angles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for flexible drive structure for plural tools, combined with
    work-contacting structure.


CLS 408/128
TXT Device under subclass 124 wherein the tool driving structure includes an
    annular drum rotatable about an axis and includes an endless, flexible band
    adapted to be wrapped about the drum to transmit rotary effort from a
    remote rotating body to the drum by frictional engagement therewith.

    (1)     Note.  Because of the particular relationship of the band and drum
    of the device in this subclass, it is deemed that a device including a
    specific drum combined with a band that is merely implied is proper for
    placement in this subclass.


CLS 408/129
TXT Device under subclass 124 including structure to cause relocation of the
    tool in the direction parallel with the tool-axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62+,    for work-infeed* means similar in construction to the device of
    this subclass.

    99+,    for drive structure combined with a tool-opposing, work-engaging
    means.

    111,    for means to drive a tool along the tool-axis, combined with
    work-engaging means other than the tool.


CLS 408/130
TXT Device under subclass 129 wherein the structure to cause relocation of the
    tool includes a motor driven by hydraulic or pneumatic pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     for work-infeed means driven by a fluid motor.

    124,    for fluid means to cause a tool to rotate.

    702,    for a digest specific to pneumatic drive means.


CLS 408/131
TXT Device under subclass 129 including frame structure for supporting the tool
    and tool-drive structure against gravity and including provision to allow
    the tool to be selectively shifted relative to the frame, in a direction
    other than parallel to the tool-axis, so that the tool-axis is relocated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for a laterally adjustable tool combined with tool-opposing
    work-engaging surface.

    234+,   for adjustable machine frame structure lacking tool-drive means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    144,    Woodworking, for a device wherein a tool is shifted laterally
    during the cutting operation and wherein the material cut is wood.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, for structure including a tool
    shifted laterally during the cutting operation, generally.


CLS 408/132
TXT Device under subclass 129 including means for transmitting rotary effort to
    a driven shaft from a driving shaft, the transmitting means including a
    first part fixed to move with the driven shaft and a second part fixed to
    move with the driving shaft, the parts being arranged to selectively be
    connected together, so that rotary effort can selectively be transmitted
    from the driving shaft to the driven shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139+,   for structure of this class including a torque-applying clutch.


CLS 408/133
TXT Device under subclass 132 including an input means connected to a remote
    source of power and an output means adapted to transmit power from that
    source to the tool, wherein the drive means includes provision to change
    the velocity of the output means without a corresponding change in velocity
    of the input means.

    (1)     Note.  An "input" means is any moving part of a device to which
    power is applied; whereas an "output" means is any moving part of that
    device from which power is supplied to another device; therefore, the
    "output" of one device may be the input of the other device.


CLS 408/134
TXT Device under subclass 132 including provision to cause the means for
    transmitting rotary effort selectively to be triggered to function in
    accord to the position of the tool along the tool-axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for similar structure including control means.


CLS 408/135
TXT Device under subclass 129 wherein the tool or a portion of the tool-support
    includes an elongate, transversely grooved surface that is parallel with
    the tool-axis; which device includes a member rotatable about an axis
    generally parallel to the undulations of the grooved surface, having ribs
    adapted to interdigitate with the grooves of the surface of the tool or
    tool-support in order to cause infeed of the tool in reaction to rotation
    of the ribbed member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66,     for gear driven work-infeed* means.


CLS 408/136
TXT Device under subclass 129 including a generally elongated member having a
    portion at one end thereof adapted to be engaged by and receive force from
    the hand or foot of an operative, a portion at the other end of the member
    adapted to engage and receive force from the frame of the machine, and
    including a third portion intermediate the other two portions adapted to
    move the tool responsive to the applied forces.


CLS 408/137
TXT Device under subclass 129 wherein the structure which moves relative to the
    tool and relative to the tool-sustaining structure for causing relocation
    is rotatable about an axis in alignment with the tool-axis and includes a
    helically disposed, inclined surface adapted to contact either the tool or
    tool-sustaining structure and move relative thereto to cause relocation by
    a camming or wedging cooperation therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    for a drive screw coaxial with the tool, combined with a
    tool-opposing work-engaging surface.


CLS 408/138
TXT Device under the class definition including a helically-ribbed tool or
    tool-support adapted to interfit with nonrotating structure of the frame of
    the machine supporting the entire assemblage so that the tool moves axially
    relative to the nonrotating structure as it rotates to perform a cutting
    function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for similar structure including a tool-opposing, work-engaging
    surface.


CLS 408/139
TXT Device under the class definition including a tool or a tool-support
    combined with means for transmitting rotary effort to the tool from a
    driving shaft that is coaxial with the tool, the transmitting means
    including a first part fixed to move with the tool and a second part fixed
    to move with the driving shaft, the parts being arranged to selectively be
    connected together, so that rotary effort can selectively be transmitted
    from the driving shaft to the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124+,   for similar structure wherein the tool-axis and the axis of the
    driving shaft are not coextensive.

    129,    for a torque-applying clutch combined with tool-drive means.


CLS 408/140
TXT Device under subclass 139 wherein the first and second parts include
    generally planar surfaces that abut so that they yieldably rub against each
    other to transmit rotary effort, the rotary effort transmitted being
    proportional to the pressure used to force the part into abutment.


CLS 408/141
TXT Device under the class definition including a tool or tool-support combined
    with means for transmitting rotary effort to the tool from a driving shaft
    that is coaxial with the tool, the transmitting means including a rib,
    groove, or pin in either the tool-support or the driving shaft extending
    parallel to the tool-axis and including means on the other element to
    slidably interengage therewith, so that the shaft and tool-support are
    rotatably fixed together, but axially movable, one relative to the other.


CLS 408/142
TXT Device under subclass 141 including means actuated by movement of the
    driving shaft and the tool-support, the actuated means serving to permit
    the tool to move relative to the tool-support and out of operative
    relationship with the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73+,    for similar means actuated by contact with the work.

    148+,   for similar means actuated relative movement of machines parts.


CLS 408/143
TXT Device under the class definition including structure to sustain a tool
    against gravity and partake of substantially all of the tool motion during
    the cutting operation and including either (1) means to impart to the tool
    a vibration characteristic different from that vibration characteristic
    imparted by the reaction of the tool and work, such that the resultant
    vibration characteristic of the tool is less than that imparted by the
    reaction of the tool and work, or (2) means specifically to absorb the
    energy of a vibrating tool.

    (1)     Note.  The purpose of the device of this subclass is to reduce or
    eliminate resultant vibration of the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for a tool-carrier with means to cause the cutting edge of the tool
    to vibrate progressively toward the work.


CLS 408/144
TXT Device under the class definition including a tool composed of a plurality
    of particularly recited materials.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is intended to serve as the locus of devices
    including a tool for performing an operation of this class type, which tool
    is constructed of a plurality of materials which may be secured together by
    releasable means, bonded together, or welded together so that the resultant
    properties of such a composite tool are considered to be better than those
    of a tool made of a single material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    713,    for a digest of tools having a detachable cutting edge, which may
    be of different material than the tool body.


CLS 408/145
TXT Device under the class definition including a tool, the cutting edge of
    which is at least in part of material that is either a natural crystal or
    is the character of a natural crystal.

    (1)     Note.  The "natural crystal" of this subclass definition is not
    intended to include a stone shaped as a cutting tooth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, for a machine including a crystalline cutting
    instrumentality other than as provided for in the definition of Class 408.
    (Note that Class 451 has not been screened for art proper for Class 408.)


CLS 408/146
TXT Device under the class definition including structure to sustain a tool
    against gravity during the cutting operation, and mechanical means to
    displace the tool and hold the tool in position relative to the sustaining
    structure.

    (1)     Note.  It is to be understood that the "means to move" of this
    subclass requires merely that the structure reasonably may be utilized to
    force a tool to move relative to a tool-support.

    (2)     Note.  A simple spring or gravity-type tool-urging device is not
    considered to be "means to move" as required herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, for a machine including a
    rotating cutter that is moved laterally and/or radially of the tool-axis
    during operation.


CLS 408/147
TXT Device under subclass 146 wherein the mechanical means serves to displace
    the tool so that the cutting edge thereof is moved toward or away from the
    tool-axis.


CLS 408/148
TXT Device under subclass 147 including structure for moving the tool radially,
    structure for locking the tool in an extended (i.e., operatable) position
    and, including provision to release the locking means in response to the
    occurrence of an anticipated condition.

    (1)     Note.  In most of the patents herein the tool or the tool-moving
    means is resiliently biased against the locking device by a spring adapted
    to move the tool out of operative position upon movement of the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for locking structure similar to that found herein, but for
    interlocking one machine member and then releasing that member in response
    to the position of another machine element.

    5+,     for means for sensing condition and provision to terminate
    operation of a machine in response thereto.

    8+,     for control means energised by a detector.


CLS 408/149
TXT Device under subclass 148 including provision to activate the structure for
    locking the tool and provision to release the locking structure wherein the
    activating provision and the releasing provision are separate and
    independantly operating, so that the operation of either does not bring
    about a corresponding operation of the other.


CLS 408/150
TXT Device under subclass 147 wherein the tool is secured to the
    tool-sustaining structure so that actuation of the displacing means causes
    the tool to be moved relative to the tool-sustaining structure about an
    axis parallel to, but not concentric with the tool axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159,    for similar structure wherein the tool is displaced by the action
    of an axially slidable means and wherein the tool is displaced about an
    axis that is not parallel to the tool-axis.

    180,    for similar structure wherein the axis about the tool is displaced
    not parallel to the tool-axis.

    187+,   for similar structure lacking means to displace the tool.


CLS 408/151
TXT Device under subclass 150 including, in addition to the tool-sustaining and
    tool-displacing means, provision to permit the tool to be positioned
    relative to the tool-support.


CLS 408/152
TXT Device under subclass 147 wherein the tool or a portion of the tool-support
    contacting the tool includes an elongate, transversely grooved surface;
    which device includes a member rotatable about an axis generally parallel
    to the undulations of the grooved surface, having ribs adapted to
    interdigitate with the grooves of the surface of the tool or tool-support
    in order to cause the tool to move radially in reaction to rotation of the
    ribbed member.


CLS 408/153
TXT Device under subclass 147 in which the displacement of the tool is caused
    either (1) by a member comprising a first and a second face, the faces
    meeting at an acute angle, adapted to be actuated substantially parallel to
    the first face, so that a tool slidably engaging the second face is
    displaced; (2) by a member having a helically- ribbed surface rotatable
    relative to a cooperating surface so that the ribbed surface and the
    cooperating surface are relatively displaced along the axis about which the
    helically ribbed surface rotates; whereby, a tool connected to one of the
    surfaces is displaced; or, (3) by a member which oscillates or rotates
    relative to the tool about a center and carries a surface composed of fixes
    points of varying distance from the center, which surface imparts motion to
    a follower in contact therewith, which motion varies in accordance with the
    varying distances of the fixed points on the surface from the center of the
    member.


CLS 408/154
TXT Device under subclass 153 including an element adapted to yield without
    exceeding the elastic limit thereof, which element is operatively connected
    to the tool to project said tool in opposition to said displacing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    714,    an art digest, for similar structure lacking means to move the tool
    radially, but including resiliently yieldable structure to allow the tool
    to move relative to tool-support structure or relative to other portions of
    the tool.


CLS 408/155
TXT Device under subclass 154 wherein said tool is inwardly urged against the
    displacing means by an annular, tool-encompassing, resilient means which
    restrains said tool against radial expansion.


CLS 408/156
TXT Device under subclass 154 wherein the resilient member is a flexible
    portion of the tool or tool-support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    714,    an art digest, for a resilient tool lacking tool moving means.


CLS 408/157
TXT Device under subclass 153 including a pair of cutting tools, each mounted
    to be displaced radially outwardly from the tool-axis and axially toward
    the work, which tools are interconnected so that movement of one of the
    tools is accompanied by a similar movement of the other tool.


CLS 408/158
TXT Device under subclass 153 wherein the displacing member is actuated to move
    in a direction parallel to the tool-axis.

    (1)     Note.  The displacing member provided for in this subclass may
    rotate relative to the tool as it moves along the tool-axis, but otherwise
    is not to move other than parallel to the tool-axis.


CLS 408/159
TXT Device under subclass 158 wherein the tool is secured to the
    tool-sustaining structure so that actuation of the tool-displacing means
    causes the tool to be moved about an axis relative to the tool-sustaining
    structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150,    for similar structure wherein the tool is displaced about an axis
    that is parallel to the tool-axis.

    180,    for similar structure wherein the tool is displaced by means other
    than an axially slidable moving means.

    187+,   for a pivotable tool lacking means to displace the tool relative to
    the sustaining means.


CLS 408/160
TXT Device under subclass 158 wherein the displacing member includes a
    plurality of successive inclined surfaces adapted to correspond and coact
    with oppositely inclined surfaces on the tool to effect displacement of
    said tool.


CLS 408/161
TXT Device under subclass 158 including means to actuate the displacing member
    comprising a helically ribbed element adapted to mesh with helical grooves
    in the tool-support or in the displacing member so that rotation of the
    ribbed element relative to the grooved member serves to move the displacing
    member relative to the tool-support.


CLS 408/162
TXT Device under subclass 161 wherein the helically-ribbed element is adapted
    to turn about an axis that is parallel to, but not concentric with the
    tool-axis.


CLS 408/163
TXT Device under subclass 161 wherein said mechanism for displacing the tool
    comprises a ring member concentric with the tool-axis embracing the tool,
    adapted for movement along the tool-axis relative to the tool-sustaining
    structure to contact the tool with an inclined surface on the ring member
    and move the tool radially.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172,    for similar structure wherein the ring member is displaced by means
    other than a helically-ribbed element.


CLS 408/164
TXT Device under subclass 163 including a second ring member of structure and
    function similar to the first, which second ring member is adapted to
    simultaneously engage the same cutter in a different position along the
    tool-axis from the first ring member.


CLS 408/165
TXT Device under subclass 164 including, in addition to the ring members, a
    mandrel movable along the tool-axis having a tapered surface adapted to
    engage a cooperating surface of the tool and urge the tool toward the
    inclined surfaces of the ring members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168,    for similar structure including a traveling wedge but lacking
    axially-spaced tool-retaining wedge collars.


CLS 408/166
TXT Device under subclass 164 wherein the tool is provided with a recess to
    receive the ring member as the ring member moves axially into engagement
    with the tool.


CLS 408/167
TXT Device under subclass 164 wherein one of the ring members is provided with
    a secondary ring member in contact therewith and adapted to displace the
    primary ring member along the tool-axis.


CLS 408/168
TXT Device under subclass 161 wherein the tool-displacing member is a mandrel
    movable along the tool-axis including a tapered surface adapted to engage a
    cooperating surface of the tool and to thereby displace the tool radially.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165,    for a traveling wedge cooperating with axially-spaced wedge collars.


CLS 408/169
TXT Device under subcalss 168 wherein the axially- movable mandrel is shaped to
    conform to the shape of the tool so that a portion thereof interdigitates
    with a portion of the tool to restrict relative motion therebetween to
    motion along the tapered surface of the mandrel.


CLS 408/170
TXT Device under subclass 169 wherein the portion of the tool or mandrel which
    serves to restrict relative motion therebetween is detachable from both the
    tool and the mandrel.


CLS 408/171
TXT Device under subclass 168 wherein said displacing member includes a
    helically-grooved extension adapted to cooperatively mesh with a
    helically-ribbed actuating element or with a helically-ribbed portion of
    the tool-support so that relative rotation of the cooperatively meshing
    parts serves to move said displacing member.


CLS 408/172
TXT Device under subclass 158 wherein said mechanism for displacing the tool
    comprises a ring member concentric with the tool-axis embracing the tool,
    adapted for movement along the tool-axis relative to the tool-sustaining
    structure to contact the tool with an inclined surface on the ring member
    and move the tool radially.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163+,   for similar structure wherein the ring member is displaced by a
    helically- ribbed element.


CLS 408/173
TXT Device under subclass 153 in which displacement of the tool is caused by a
    member which oscillates or rotates relative to the tool about a center and
    carries a surface composed of fixed points of varying distances from the
    center, which surface imparts motion to follower in contact therewith,
    which motion varies an accordance with the varying distances of the fixed
    points on the surface from the center of the member.


CLS 408/174
TXT Device under subclass 173 wherein the displacing member turns about the
    tool-axis and carries first and second surfaces, parallel to one another
    and of fixed points of varying distance from the axis, which surfaces
    cooperate with a follower to impart motion to the follower and to restrict
    movement of the follower.


CLS 408/175
TXT Device under subclass 174 wherein the first and second surfaces extend
    through at least 3605 and progressively vary in distance  from the center.


CLS 408/176
TXT Device under subclass 174 with mechanical means to cause the displacing
    member to move about its said center.


CLS 408/177
TXT Device under subclass 174 including structure adapted to determine the
    extent of movement about a center that the tool-displacing member turns
    which determining structure can be regulated to vary the extend of movement
    of the tool-displacing member.


CLS 408/178
TXT Device under subclass 173 wherein the tool-displacing member is mounted to
    turn, relative to the tool-sustaining structure, about the tool-axis.


CLS 408/179
TXT Device under subclass 153 in which the displacment of the tool is caused by
    a member comprising a first and a second face, the faces meeting at an
    acute angle, adapted to be actuated substantially parallel to the first
    face, so that a tool slidably engaging the second face is displaced;
    wherein, the displacing member is moved radially relative to the
    tool-support in a plane normal to the tool-axis.


CLS 408/180
TXT Device under subclass 153 wherein the tool is secured to the
    tool-sustaining structure so that actuation of the tool-displacing means
    causes the tool to be moved about an axis relative to the tool-sustaining
    structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150,    for similar structure wherein the tool is displaced about an axis
    that is parallel to the tool-axis.

    159,    for similar structure wherein the tool is displaced by an
    axially-slidable moving means.

    187+,   for a pivotable tool lacking means to displace the tool relative to
    the sustaining means.


CLS 408/181
TXT Device under subclass 153 in which the displacement of the tool is caused
    by a member having a helically-ribbed surface rotatable relative to a
    cooperating surface so that the ribbed surface and the cooperating surface
    are relatively displaced along the axis about which the helically-ribbed
    surface rotates; whereby, a tool connected to one of the surfaces is
    displaced; wherein, the member having a helically-ribbed surface is
    rotatable about an axis that intersects and is normal to the tool-axis.


CLS 408/182
TXT Device under subclass 181 including a second tool adapted to be displaced
    by a second means as described under clause (2) of the definition of
    subclass 153 wherein the second member having a helically-ribbed surface is
    rotatable about the same axis as the first similar member.


CLS 408/183
TXT Device under subclass 182 wherein the first member having a
    helically-ribbed surface and the second similar member are fixed together
    so that rotation of one directly results in rotation of the other.


CLS 408/184
TXT Device under subclass 181 wherein the tool or tool-support includes a body
    portion having a creast formed in the peripheral surface thereof, said
    creast extending along a spiral path deflected along the tool-axis and
    serving to engage the work and to thereby guide the tool during cutting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215+,   for a tool or tool-support having spiral tool-guiding crests.


CLS 408/185
TXT Device under subclass 181 including movable means to grip and thereby
    secure the tool to the tool-sustaining structure and including mechanical
    means adapted to move the gripping means to effect the gripping action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    197,    for similar structure not including means to move the tool relative
    to the tool-support.


CLS 408/186
TXT Device under the class definition including structure to sustain a tool
    against gravity during cutting operation and including manually-operated
    securing or holding means which allows the tool to assume various positions
    relative to its sustaining structure prior to cutting operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146+,   for similar structure wherein the securing means may be used to
    move the tool relative to the tool-support; or for simlar structure
    combined with means to move the tool relative to the tool-support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    407,    Cutters, for Shaping, for an adjustable tool and support physically
    restricted to cut rotating work; and for an adjustable tool and support
    usable alternatively to cut while rotating and moving axially and moving
    laterally or radially of the tool-axis toward the work during operation.


CLS 408/187
TXT Device under subclass 186 wherein the sustaining structure includes a
    connection permitting movement of the tool about an axis allowing the tool
    to assume various preselected positions relative to the tool-sustaining
    structure prior to cutting operation.

    (1)     Note.  Included among the patents of this subclass is a device
    having a cutting tool that is positionable in a retracted, inoperatable
    state and in an extended, operatable state.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150+,   for an eccentrically-mounted tool with means to move the tool
    relative to the tool-support.

    159,    for a pivotable tool with an axially- slidable tool moving means.

    180,    for structure including a pivotally- mounted tool combined with
    means to move the tool relative to the tool-sustaning structure.


CLS 408/188
TXT Device under subclass 187 wherein the tool is movable about the axis to
    expose different areas of the tool, which different areas are to be used in
    the cutting action.


CLS 408/189
TXT Device under subclass 186 including a plurality of cutting edges disposed
    about the tool-axis and positioned at different radial distances from the
    tool-axis.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is not intended to include a reamer having a
    section wherein the cutting edge(s) is in a cylinder parallel with the
    tool-axis and a tapered lead section wherein the cutting edge(s) lie in a
    cone concentric with the tool-axis because it cannot be said that the
    cutting edges are different radial distances from the tool-axis.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein is a tool having a cutting edge(s) in a
    first cone concentric with the tool-axis and a cutting edge(s) in a second
    cone also concentric with the tool-axis, even if the cutting edges meet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206,    for a tool having stepped cutting edges and a core receiveing
    central portion.

    223+,   for a tool, per se, having stepped cutting edges.


CLS 408/190
TXT Device under subclass 189 including a first means to permit one of the
    cutting edges to be displaced radially toward or away from the tool-axis to
    modify the diameter of the circle described by that cutting edge and
    including a second means to permit the same cutting edge to be displaced
    longitudinally along the tool-axis.


CLS 408/191
TXT Device under subclass 189 in which said cutting edges can be displaced
    toward and from each other along the tool-axis without changing the radial
    sweep of the edge.


CLS 408/192
TXT Device under subclass 191 including means detachably positioned on the
    tool-support adapted to abut the surface of a workpiece after a
    predetermined amount of travel of the tool into the workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200,    for similar devices wherein there is no means to permit positioning
    of the tool relative to the tool-support.


CLS 408/193
TXT Device under subclass 191 wherein one of the cutting-edges is at the
    tool-axis and wherein manually-operated securing means allows the
    tool-element that supports that cutting edge to assume various positions
    along the tool-axis.


CLS 408/194
TXT Device under subclass 189 wherein one of the cutting edges of the tool
    diverges from the tool-axis radially outwardly in the direction in which
    the tool is advanced toward the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211+,   for a tool or tool with support including an inversely angled
    cutting edge.


CLS 408/195
TXT Device under subclass 186 including a work-contacting structure adapted to
    penetrate the work-surface at a point which has not been previously
    modified.

    (1)     Note.  The device of this subclass is not to be confused with the
    device of Class 83, Cutting, or the device of Class 72, Metal Deforming.
    To be placed herein, the penetrating means must be disclosed solely as
    means facilitating the securing or aligning of a cutting instrumentality
    relative to the work and the depression formed must be unused at any other
    time for any other purpose.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85,     for the combination of a tool of this class type with a
    work-penetrating means that is movable relative to the tool during the
    cutting operation.

    208,    for a tool of this class including a lead screw adapted to "form" a
    recession in the work, a product-receiving chamber, and a cutting edge.

    214,    for a tool of this class including a material-penetrating lead
    screw and a cutting edge.


CLS 408/196
TXT Device under subclass 186 including a work-engaging protuberance,
    concentric with the tool-axis, axially advanced of all cutting edges of the
    tool and specifically adapted to fit into an existing surface configuration
    of the work and thereby restrict the tool while in operation to move in a
    path according to configuration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     for similar structure wherein the central-lead pin does not partake
    of all the motion of the tool during the cutting operation.

    201,    for a non-adjustable tool including a removable central lead.

    209,    for a tool having a product receiving chamber and a central lead.

    225,    for a tool having axially spaced, stepped cutting edges and a
    central lead.


CLS 408/197
TXT Device under subclass 186 including movable means to grip and thereby
    secure the tool to the tool-sustaining structure and including mechanical
    means adapted to move the gripping means to effect the gripping action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185,    for similar structure including a screw perpendicular to the
    tool-axis to move the tool radially relative to the tool-support.


CLS 408/198
TXT Device under subclass 197 wherein the mechanical means serves to urge the
    tool-gripping means in a direction parallel with the tool-axis to effect
    the gripping action.


CLS 408/199
TXT Device under the class definition comprising a tool* or a tool combined
    with a tool-support*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    407,    Cutters, for Shaping, for a tool or tool with support physically
    restricted to cut rotating work; and for a tool or tool with support usable
    alternatively to cut while rotating and moving axially or to cut while
    rotating and approaching the work by moving radially or laterally of the
    tool-axis during operation.


CLS 408/200
TXT Device under subclass 199 including a member mounted on the tool-support
    adapted to contact the work and including a margin adapted to perform a
    cutting operation of the class type wherein either the work-contacting
    member or the margin is adapted to be removed from the tool-support.


CLS 408/201
TXT Device under subclass 200 wherein said removable member is axially advanced
    of all cutting edges of the tool and is specifically adapted to fit into an
    existing surface configuration of the work and thereby restrict the path of
    the tool while in operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196,    for an adjustable tool having a central lead.

    200,    for a tool having a removable central lead-screw.

    209,    for a tool having a nondetachable central lead and a product
    receiving chamber.

    225,    for a tool having axially spaced, stepped, cutting edges and a
    nondetachable central lead.


CLS 408/202
TXT Device under subclass 200 wherein the work-contacting member is
    specifically adapted to abut the surface of the work after a predetermined
    amount of axial advance of the tool relative to the work to thereby limit
    the cutting action of the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    192,    for similar structure wherein the tool is adjustable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    433,    Dentistry, subclass 75 for dental drills or broaches having a
    depth-limiting member.


CLS 408/203
TXT Device under subclass 200 wherein said work-contacting member can be
    repositioned relative to the cutting edge.


CLS 408/203.5
TXT Hollow milling tool:
    Device under subclass 199 including an axially facing recession, and
    including a cutting edge adapted to rotate about that recession and machine
    away the entire radially outer surface of a rod-like workpiece passing,
    undisturbed on its axial extent, into the recession.


CLS 408/204
TXT Device under subclass 199 having a forwardly projecting cutting end portion
    which delimits a longitudinally extending opening or groove coaxial with
    the tool-axis and having a diameter smaller than that of the cylinder of
    revolution generated by the rotating cutting end portion of the tool
    whereby a center section of work is undisturbed during operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    703,    for a digest of structure peculiar to the operation of the tool of
    this subclass.


CLS 408/205
TXT Device under subclass 204 wherein the longitudinally extending opening is
    connected to a radially extending passageway to the outside of the device,
    which passageway is adapted to permit passage or removal of the undisturbed
    center section from the opening.


CLS 408/206
TXT Device under subclass 204 including a plurality of cutting edges disposed
    about the tool-axis and positioned at different radial distances from the
    tool-axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189+,   for an adjustable tool having stepped cutting edges.

    223+,   for a tool having stepped cutting edges, but no core-receiving
    portion.


CLS 408/207
TXT Device under subclass 199 including a compartment completely enclosed, when
    viewed as a cross-section normal to the tool-axis, the function of said
    compartment being to store, temporarily, the product of the cutting
    operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     for a device of this class type, combined with a product receiving
    chamber that does not move with the tool during operation.


CLS 408/208
TXT Device under subclass 207 including a work-engaging protuberance positioned
    on the tool axis, having a sharp helically disposed edge, which
    protuberance is axially advanced of the cutting edges of the tool and
    specifically adapted to penetrate the work-surface and both stabilize the
    tool against lateral displacement and pull the rotating tool through the
    work.

    (1)     Note.  The device of this subclass is not to be confused with the
    device of Class 83, Cutting, or the device of Class 72, Metal Deforming.
    To be placed herein, the penetrating means must be disclosed solely as
    means facilitating the securing or aligning of a cutting instrumentality
    relative to the work and the depression formed must be unused at any other
    time for any other purpose.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85+,    for structure including means to "form" a depression in work, which
    means is movable relative to the tool during operation.

    195,    for similar structure wherein there is provision to permit the tool
    to be positioned relative to the tool-support.

    214,    for similar structure lacking a product-receiving chamber.


CLS 408/209
TXT Device under subclass 207 including a work-engaging protuberance,
    concentric with the tool-axis, axially advanced of all cutting edges of the
    tool and specifically adapted to fit into an existing surface configuration
    of the work and thereby restrict the tool while in operation to move in a
    path according to the configuration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196,    for an adjustable tool having a central lead.

    201,    for a tool having a central lead that is detachable from the
    tool-support.

    225,    for a tool having a central lead, but lacking a product receiving
    chamber.


CLS 408/210
TXT Device under subclass 199 consisting of a helical-coil element, the axis of
    which is co-extensive with the tool-axis, terminating at the axial
    extremity thereof in a cutting edge, so that the tool is constructed of a
    single, helically-wound element.


CLS 408/211
TXT Device under subclass 199 wherein a cutting edge* of the tool diverges from
    the tool-axis radially ourward and in the direction in which the tool is
    advanced toward the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194,    for similar structure including a tool having stepped cutting edges
    and means to permit positioning of one of the edges.


CLS 408/212
TXT Device under subclass 211 having an additional cutting edge extending
    axially at the radially outermost extremity of the leading portion of the
    tool, which cutting edge projects axially beyond the other cutting edges of
    the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213,    for similar structure lacking an inversely angled cutting edge.


CLS 408/213
TXT Device under subclass 199 having a first and a second cutting edge, wherein
    the first cutting edge extends at least somewhat radially of the tool-axis
    and wherein the second cutting edge extends axially at the radially
    outermost extent of the leading portion of the tool, which second cutting
    edge projects axially beyond the other cutting edge of the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212,    for similar structure including an inversely angled cutting edge.


CLS 408/214
TXT Device under subclass 199 including a work-engaging protuberance positioned
    on the tool-axis, having a sharp helically-disposed edge, which
    protuberance is axially advanced of the cutting edge of the tool and is
    specifically adapted to penetrate the work-surface and both stabilize the
    tool against lateral displacement and pull the rotating tool through the
    work.

    (1)     Note.  The device of this subclass is not to be confused with the
    device of Class 83, Cutting or the device of Class 72, Metal Deforming.  To
    be placed herein, the penetrating means must be disclosed solely as means
    facilitating the securing or aligning of a cutting instrumentality relative
    to the work and the depression formed must be unused at any other time for
    any other purpose.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85+,    for similar structure including means to "form" a depression in
    work, which means is movable relative to the tool during operation.

    195,    for similar structure wherein there is provision to permit the tool
    to be positioned relative to the tool-support.

    208,    for similar structure having a product receiving chamber.


CLS 408/215
TXT Device under subclass 199 wherein the tool or tool-support includes a body
    portion having a crest formed in the peripheral surface thereof, said crest
    extending along a spiral path deflected along the tool-axis, and serving to
    engage the work and thereby guide the tool during cutting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184,    for similar structure combined with a tool-adjusting screw that is
    perpendicular to the tool-axis.


CLS 408/216
TXT Device under subclass 215 including a surface for performing a class-type
    operation that is at a distance from the tool-axis different from the
    distance that the crest is from the tool-axis and is spaced from the crest
    so that there is a void in the cutting action between the crest and the
    operating surface.


CLS 408/217
TXT Device under subclass 215 having a plurality of cutting extremities adapted
    to follow one another in a common kerf wherein a subsequently acting
    extremity serves to make the kerf broader at a given level in the work than
    a previously acting extremity.


CLS 408/218
TXT Device under subclass 217 wherein the cutting extremities are formed at the
    surface of the tool and are disposed along the tool-axis so that the base
    of one extremity is at a distance from the tool axis different from that of
    another extremity.


CLS 408/219
TXT Device under subclass 215 including a plurality of crests, each of which is
    part of a cutting extremity or tooth wherein the teeth are positioned along
    the tool-axis and wherein the crest of the teeth nearest to the leading end
    of the tool are disposed to lie in a cone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217+,   for a tool having pitch stabilizing ridges on teeth of differing
    width, which teeth are disposed to lie in a cone.


CLS 408/220
TXT Device under subclass 219 wherein at least one of said crests is formed
    specifically so that the trailing portion thereof will either not touch the
    kerf of the cutting edge or will touch it only in a specified manner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 71, for a cutting device similar to that
    found in this subclass wherein the trailing portion of the crest serves to
    stress the work beyond its elastic limit.


CLS 408/221
TXT Device under subclass 219 wherein said tool body portion comprises cutting
    crests which are formed in the surface of said tool body portions and are
    inwardly directed toward the tool-axis.

    (1)     Note.  The device of this subclass is commonly called threading die.


CLS 408/222
TXT Device under subclass 215 wherein the crests are formed in the radially
    outer surface of the tool body portions and are outwardly directed,
    extending along a spiral deflected along the tool-axis.

    (1)     Note.  The device of this subclass is commonly called a threading
    tap.


CLS 408/223
TXT Device under subclass 199 including a plurality of cutting edges disposed
    about the tool-axis and positioned at different radial distances from the
    tool-axis.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is not intended to include a reamer having a
    section wherein the cutting edge(s) is in a cylinder parallel with the
    tool-axis and a tapered lead section wherein the cutting edge(s) lie in a
    cone concentric with the tool-axis because it cannot be said that the
    cutting edges are at different radial distances from the tool-axis.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein is a tool having a cutting edge(s) in a
    first cone concentric with the tool-axis and a cutting edge(s) in a second
    cone also concentric with the tool-axis, even if the cutting edges meet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189+,   for similar structure having means to permit positioning of the
    tool relative to the tool-support.

    206,    for a tool having stepped cutting edges and a core receiving
    central portion.


CLS 408/224
TXT Device under subclass 223 wherein said cutting edges are separated one from
    the other, when viewed as an elevation normal to the tool-axis.


CLS 408/225
TXT Device under subclass 224 including a bearing member axially advanced of
    said cutting edges and specifically adapted to fit into an existing surface
    configuration of the work and thereby restrict the path of the tool while
    in operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196,    for an adjustable tool having a central lead.

    201,    for a tool having a removable central lead.

    209,    for a tool having a central lead and a product receiving chamber.


CLS 408/226
TXT Device under subclass 199 including detailed characteristics of a portion
    of the tool or tool-support generally concentric with the tool-axis and
    adapted to be readily attached to or detached from a torque transmitting
    tool-supporting member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238,    for a tool-support having portions of configuration to supportingly
    engage a particular tool.

    713,    for an art grouping of patents reciting a separable tool and
    tool-support wherein the details do not include details of an element that
    is generally concentric with the tool-axis.


CLS 408/227
TXT Device under subclass 199 including a plurality of cutting-edges* disposed
    about the tool-axis and separated, one from the other, when viewed in a
    direction parallel to the tool-axis.


CLS 408/228
TXT Device under subclass 227 including a plurality of cutting edges each of
    which is formed by a pair of radially extending, planar faces, each of
    which planar faces is disposed on anangular attitude such that, when the
    tool is viewed along the tool-axis, both of the faces can be seen.


CLS 408/229
TXT Device under subclass 227 wherein the tool is provided with a void area of
    axial dimension to permit passage of product of the cutting operation
    therealong.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56+,    for a tool having a void for conveying fluid material to the work.

    204+,   for a tool having a void for permitting a portion of undisturbed
    work to inter into the tool.

    207+,   for a tool having a chamber for storage of chips.


CLS 408/230
TXT Device under subclass 229 wherein the void area is of axial dimension and
    of circumferential dimension so that it extends helically along the
    tool-axis.


CLS 408/231
TXT Device under subclass 227 including the combination of a tool-support*, a
    tool carried by said support and means for securing said support and said
    tool together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238+,   for a tool-support, per se, of particular utility of this class.


CLS 408/232
TXT Device under subclass 231 wherein the securing means comprises a member
    having a first and a second planar surface intersecting at an acute angle,
    which member serves to secure the tool to the tool-support by the first
    surface being slid along a cooperating surface on the tool-support so that
    the other surface of the member, by a camming action serves to bind the
    tool against movement relative to the tool-support.


CLS 408/233
TXT Device under subclass 231 wherein said securing means is separate from the
    tool and is a helically-ribbed member rotated about the axis of the helix
    to hold the tool in position by interengagement between the tool and the
    tool support.


CLS 408/234
TXT Device under the class definition comprising machine-frame* structure.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is the combination of
    machine-frame structure with means for moving or securing one element of
    the machine frame relative to another if this action does not cause a tool*
    to function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124+,   for similar structure in combination with means to move one machine
    element relative to another to cause a tool to function.

    199+,   for similar structure combined with a tool of this class type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses, for frame structure of general
    utility.


CLS 408/235
TXT Device under subclass 234 including weights and suspension apparatus for
    counter-balancing the weight of the tool and vertically-moving
    tool-sustaining structure.


CLS 408/236
TXT Device under subclass 234 including a member adapted to support the
    tool-carrying or tool-thrust counteracting structure and allow that
    structure to assume various angular positions relative to said member.


CLS 408/237
TXT Device under subclass 236 wherein the tool-carrying or tool-thrust
    receiving structure includes a radially extending arm adapted to support
    said tool and permit radial positioning of said tool therealong.


CLS 408/238
TXT Device under the class definition comprising structure to be connected to a
    tool for sustaining the tool against gravity; which sustaining structure is
    to partake of all movements of the tool and have no movement relative to
    the tool during the operation of the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199+,   especially subclasses 226 and 231+, for similar structure in
    combination with a tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, appropriate subclasses, for a tool-holding chuck
    or socket of general utility.  Examples of holding means of "general
    utility" are as follows; (a) a holding means having two or more separately
    classified, disclosed but unclaimed utilites, (b) a holding means having
    two or more separately classified utilities recited in the same claim, and
    (c) a holding means of no particular utility at all. A claim to a holding
    means of the specific utility of this class (408) will be found in this
    subclass even if the total disclosure is to a holding means of general
    utility.  (Usually a patent reciting a chuck having a plurality of jaws
    that converge on a common axis are deemed to be of general utility and
    therefore will be found in Class 279 while other type tool-holders are
    deemed to be specific to use with a tool of this class and are therefore to
    be found herein.)


CLS 408/239
TXT Device under subclass 238 having means mounted thereon to secure a tool to
    the sustaining structure.


CLS 408/240
TXT Device under subclass 239 including mechanical structure to move the
    securing means into engagement with the tool and to cause the securing
    means to grippingly engage the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    197,    for similar structure combined with a tool that is adjustable
    relative to the tool-support.


CLS 408/241
TXT Apparatus under the class definition which is not in conformance with the
    definition of any prior subclass in this schedule.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 104+, for apparatus for process
    for testing a cutting edge.

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 7+ for linear bearing which can guide a
    rotating shaft during linear movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for a miscellaneous process step for performing an operation of
    this class.

    72+,    especially the outdent subclass and subclass 115, for a
    tool-guiding jig similar to the tool-guiding jig in this subclass but
    adapted to contact a workpiece and establish a relationship between the
    tool and the workpiece.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS

            The following subclasses are collections of published disclosures
    pertaining to various specified aspects of the cutting by rotating, axially
    moving tool art which aspects do not form appropriate bases for subclasses
    in the forgoing classification (i.e., subclasses superior hereto in the
    schedule), wherein original copies of patents are placed on the basis of
    proximate function of the apparatus.  These subclasses assist a search
    based on remote function of the apparatus and may be of further assistance
    to the searcher, either as a starting point in searching this class or as
    an indication of further related fields of search inside or outside the
    class.  Thus, there is here provided a second access for retrieval of a
    limited number of types of disclosures. Disclosures are placed in these
    subclasses for their value as references and as leads to appropriate main
    or secondary fields of search, without regard to their original
    classification or their claimed subject matter.  The disclosures found in
    the following subclasses are examples, only, of the indicated subject
    matter and no instance do they represent the entire extent of the prior art.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77+,    for an art collection of all wheel mounted machines of this class
    type, collected in a subclass providing for devices normally supported on
    work by a wheel.


CLS 408/700
TXT A step of or apparatus for performing an operation of the class type by the
    application of vibrational energy at frequencies above the range of human
    hearing (i.e., over, 20,000 hz.).

    (1)     Note.  This digest subclass is intended as an aid to the searcher
    for locating structure for performing cutting operations by a tool of the
    class type, or for other operations similar in result, (e.g., drilling
    holes in a workpiece by application of ultrasonic energy without the use of
    a rotating, axially moving tool.)


CLS 408/701
TXT A step or apparatus for performing an operation similar to the class type
    by the application of energy emitted by molecules and atoms because of
    internal changes, which energy travels in straight lines with the speed of
    light.

    (1)     Note.  This digest subclass is intended to aid the searcher to
    locate structure for cutting operations similar in result to cutting of the
    class type such as cutting by the application of laser or maser rays.


CLS 408/702
TXT A step of or apparatus for performing an operation of the class type by use
    of a tool driven to operate by a motor powered by compressed air.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     for a fluid motor adapted to drive a work-infeed means.

    130,    for a fluid motor combined with a tool of the class type or with a
    machine frame structure of the class type wherein the motor is adapted to
    move the tool along the tool-axis.


CLS 408/703
TXT A step or apparatus under the class definition particularly for removing
    material from the work by forming an annular trench therein, which trench
    is made progressively deeper as the tool proceeds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204+,   for a tool, per se, for performing an operation of the type of this
    subclass.


CLS 408/704
TXT A step or apparatus under the class definition particularly adapted to cut
    openings into work, which openings are of unusually narrow cross-section.


CLS 408/705
TXT A step or apparatus under the class definition particularly adapted to cut
    openings into work, which openings have an exceptionally high ratio of
    depth to diameter.


CLS 408/706
TXT A step or apparatus under the class definition particularly adapted to cut
    openings in an article composed of friction material to be utilized to
    secure that article to a brake shoe.


CLS 408/707
TXT A step or apparatus under the class definiton particularly adapted to
    machine the wrist pin opening in the piston of a conventional reciprocating
    piston engine or particularly adapted to machine either the wrist pin
    opening or the crankshaft opening in the connecting rod of such an engine.


CLS 408/708
TXT A step or apparatus under the class definition particularly adapted to
    machine the bearings or the bearing supporting openings of a power plant,
    which bearings or openings are for supporting the primary power output
    shaft of such a power plant.


CLS 408/709
TXT A step or apparatus under the class definition particularly adapted to
    machine the portion of a conventional reciprocating piston engine through
    which the piston, during operation of the engine reciprocates.


CLS 408/710
TXT A step or apparatus under the class definition including structure or
    provision to make the operation less dangerous to the welfare of a man in
    the vicinity of the apparatus or for protecting a part of the machine
    against breakage or other damage.


CLS 408/711
TXT An accessory for use with a device of the class definition of particular
    utility to make a broken tool* serviceable by the addition of such
    accessory to the device.


CLS 408/712
TXT Device under the class definition including a work-support and including
    provision to support an integral unit consisting of a handle, a motor,
    output shaft and a tool-holding chuck as the tool support and power supply
    thereof, which integral unit is a conventional motorized hand-drill capable
    of operation independantly of the remainder of the structure.


CLS 408/713
TXT Device under the class definition including an assemblage having the
    general configuration of a tool, per se, wherein the cutting edge thereof
    is adapted to be removed from the remainder of the assemblage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144,    for similar structure wherein the portion of the assemblage
    including the cutting edge and the remainder of the assemblage are of
    different, claimed materials.


CLS 408/714
TXT Device under the class definition including a tool and tool-support
    assemblage which includes an element adapted to give sustaining effort to
    the tool and further adapted to yield without exceeding the elastic limit
    thereof and thereby allow the cutting edge of the tool to move relative to
    other portions of the assemblage; or including a tool, a portion of which
    is adapted to yield without exceeding the elastic limit thereof and thereby
    to allow the cutting edge of the tool to move relative to another portion
    of the tool.

    (1)     Note.  By the definition of a tool-support*, any motion of the
    cutting edge relative thereto must be at a time when the tool is not in
    operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124+,   for a resilient means connected at one end thereof to a tool or a
    tool-support, which resilient means is adapted to store energy therein and
    to release that energy to drive the tool.

    143,    for yieldable means which may be resilient and is particularly
    adapted to absorb vibration transmitted from the tool.

    154+,   for a tool, including means to move that tool radially and
    including resilient means adapted to act in opposition to the moving means.


CLS 409/
TTL GEAR CUTTING, MILLING, OR  PLANING

CLS 409/
TXT This class is the home for a patent directed to the method of or a machine
    for penetrating material without substantially reshaping the flow of such
    material by means of a solid tool whose edge defines a line of cut, where
    in the device is intended to:



    (a)     form a product from a workpiece, which product includes
    protuberances intended to interfit with pockets in a cooperating member,
    generally for the transmission of motive force from one of the members to
    the other (see subclasses 1+);

    (b)     cut by a rotating cutter that forms a shaped surface on the
    workpiece (see subclasses 64+), or

    (c)     cut by a cutter that reciprocates relative to a workpiece and forms
    a shaped surface on the workpiece (see subclasses 243+ and 288).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working,

    I.              Appropriate subclasses for gear cutting, milling, or
    planing combined with another work-treating operation, particularly
    subclasses 90.01+, when the other operation is burnishing.

    II.     Subclasses 1.01-179 (as appearing in the class schedule) for
    cutting to shape peculiar to the manufacture of a device provided for in
    that group of subclasses.  (This note may be applied to numerous classes
    not set forth in these search notes, i.e., a device peculiar to the
    manufacture of a certain article will be found in the class providing for
    the manufacture of that article.)

    30,     Cutlery, for a hand tool used to cut work to shape.

    82,     Turning, for cutting to shape of a rotating workpiece; and
    subclasses 46+ for cutting to subdivide by use of a cutter orbiting about
    an axis passing through the work.

    83,     Cutting, for subdividing of two portions of work, generally.
    Search subclasses 875+ for grooving with the removal of material by use of
    a cutter providing no intentional shape to the bottom of the groove.  As a
    practical matter, grooving of Class 83, subclasses 875+ is limited to the
    action of a saw blade.  Search subclass 879 for scoring of a workpiece with
    no removal of chips. A cutting maching or method or both cut to shape and
    cut to subdivide with the same or different tools will be found in class
    (409).

    144,    Woodworking, for cutting limited to the shaping of wood.  (This
    note may be applied to numerous classes not set forth in these notes, i.e.,
    a device peculiar to shaping of certain material will be found in the class
    providing for shaping of that material).

    157,    Wheelwright Machines, subclass 13 for apparatus for or method of
    treating the outer periphery of a rubber tire casing by a slitting or
    machining operation.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, for subject matter directed to driving
    or impacting a tool, when such subject matter includes combined features
    peculiar to tool driving, but does not include features limiting the
    subject matter to a specific tool art, such as specific shape of the work
    contacting portion of a tool, related tools, or an opposed work support.

    269,    Work Holders, the residual locus for a device for clamping,
    supporting, and/or holding an article(s) in position to be operated on or
    treated.  See the notes thereunder for other related loci.

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, for a work or tool holder of general utility
    adapted to approach the member being held by jaws converging thereupon.

    407,    Cutters, for Shaping, for a tool element adapted to be attached to
    a machine of this class.  A tool combined with any other work recognizing
    (engaging) structure or with means to drive or support the tool and move
    relative to the tool will be found in this class (409) rather than Class
    407.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, for a machine for
    or process of cutting by use of a tool turning about an axis and moving
    along that axis toward a workpiece wherein no additional motion is imparted
    to the cutting edge of the tool during operation; especially subclasses 26+
    for the combination of cutting in the manner of that class (408) with
    cutting in the manner of this class (409).  A device which may be converted
    from an operation of this class to an operation of Class 408 is to be found
    in this class (409).

    451,    Abrading, for shaping a crystalline cutting, particularly
    subclasses 67+ for abrading combined with cutting to shape.  Class 409 is
    considered to be superior to Class 451, so that a patent including a claim
    proper for this class and another claim proper for Class 451 will be
    classified in this class.  Similarly, a disclosure of both abrading to
    shape and cutting to shape with no claim specific to the type of cutting
    tool will be found in Class 409.

    483,    Tool Changing, generally for a process or apparatus including a
    tool transfer means combined with a tool support or storage means.


CLS 409/1
TXT GEAR CUTTING:

    Apparatus or method under the class definition particularly adapted to form
    an element on a workpiece body, which element is intended to intermesh with
    an element on another body whereby motive force may be transmitted from one
    of the bodies to the other.

    (1)     Note.  A gear pump rotor is considered to transmit force to the
    other rotor. Also, the drive element sprocket of a gear driven chain is
    considered to be similar to a gear tooth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 640+ for a gear formed by
    the apparatus or process of this subclass.

    407,    Cutters, for Shaping, subclasses 20+ for a cutting tool to be used
    in the apparatus or process of this subclass.


CLS 409/2
TXT With regulation of operation by use of templet, card or other replaceable
    information supply:

    Apparatus or method under subclass 1 for detecting the characteristics
    (e.g., physical, electrical, etc.) of a member carrying operating
    instructions for the apparatus, which member is separate from both the
    workpiece and the organized structure of the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes utilizing a prepared information
    supply that is to be removably placed in the apparatus.  This subclass does
    not include utilizing the characteristics of a permanent part of the
    apparatus, such as a cam or gear, to influence the operation of other parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     for similar control combined with a milling machine for generating
    a thread or helix.

    79,     for similar control combined with milling, generally.

    289,    for similar control combined with planing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclass 3 for
    similar control structure for a boring or drilling machine.


CLS 409/3
TXT Including follower for templet:

    Apparatus or method under subclass 2 including means for detecting the
    physical surface configuration of the separate information member.


CLS 409/4
TXT And burnishing simultaneously:

    Apparatus for or method of performing the operation of subclass 1 combined
    with condensing, compacting, smoothing, or polishing the surface of the
    workpiece usually by rubbing the workpiece with a smooth tool having a
    surface of greater hardness than that of the workpiece wherein forming and
    condensing, etc., are performed at the same time.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 90.01+ for gear cutting combined with
    burnishing wherein the operations can be performed independently.


CLS 409/5
TXT With compensation for backlash in drive means:

    Apparatus or method under subclass 1 including provision for tranmission of
    force to a workpiece or to a cutting tool wherein a first drive member
    transmits force and movement of a second drive member, including provision
    to adjust, eliminate, or make other allowance for undesired relative
    movement between the drive members and the workpiece or the cutting tool
    resulting from clearance between the drive member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146,    for compensation for backlash in the drive means of a milling
    machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 409 for means to eliminate
    backlash in an element of a gear train; and subclasses 440+ for means to
    eliminate backlash in sectional gears.


CLS 409/6
TXT With work or product advancing:

    Apparatus or method under subclass 1 including a work station and including
    means to move a workpiece to that station or including means to move the
    product that has been shaped at the work station away from that station.

    (1)     Note.  Means to transfer material from one work station to another
    work station is considered to be proper for this subclass since the
    material is the product of the first station and is the work of the second
    station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for thread or helix milling means combined with work or product
    advancing means.

    159+,   for a milling machine including means to infeed the work to the
    cutter and with means to advance the work or product.

    172+,   for a milling machine, broadly, combined with means to advance work
    or product.

    174,    for a milling machine, broadly, combined with means to manipulate
    the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    82,     Turning, subclasses 124+ for a lathe with work feeding and/or
    removing mechanism.

    221,    Article Dispensing, for a method of or apparatus for dispensing or
    feeding an article not otherwise classified; and especially subclasses 239
    and 294 for an article dispenser or feeder delivering to a clamp or
    holddown.  See the class definition of Class 221 for a statement of the
    lines between the classes and for the disposition of other related art.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, for a method of or
    apparatus for feeding material without utilizing the leading or trailing
    end to effect movement of the material.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, for work advancing, including single
    or multiple, nominal shaping stations. Generally, work handling to present
    a workpiece to a named shaping means will be found in Class 414.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, subclasses 164+ for a miscellaneous machine for feeding nail
    blanks, screw blanks, nut blanks, nail plates, or other stock specialized
    to performing the various steps in the manufacture of an article of that
    class.


CLS 409/7
TXT Utilizing transfer arm:

    Apparatus or method under subclass 6 including the utilization of means to
    advance a workpiece to the tool station comprising use of a horizontally
    extending cantilever structure adapted to carry and position the workpiece
    into operating position in the securing portion of the work holder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    901,    Robots, subcollection 6+ for a robot which cooperates with another
    machine.


CLS 409/8
TXT Gear chamfering or deburring:

    Apparatus or method under subclass 1 including a cutting tool to (a) form a
    generally straight surface intersecting two surfaces previously formed on
    an intermeshing element (gear tooth) or (b) sever off any protruding edge
    unintentionally formed on an intermeshing element during formation thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The apparatus or process of this subclass is somewhat
    different from that of the remainder of the subclasses under subclass 1 in
    that the cutting edge of the cutting tool of this subclass does not form
    the basic shape of the element for transmitting motive force, rather the
    apparatus or process of this subclass is for the ancillary treatment of
    such an element of removal of unwanted surface irregularities or
    protuberances.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 869 for chamfering, generally.


CLS 409/9
TXT Using relatively reciprocating or oscillating cutter:

    Apparatus or method under subclass 8 wherein the means to form or sever is
    a cutting tool adapted to move to-and-fro along a straight or arcuate line
    with respect to the workpiece during cutting.

    (1)     Note.  A rotary cutting on a reciprocating carriage is not
    considered to be "reciprocating or oscillating" for this subclass.


CLS 409/10
TXT Gear tooth shape generating:

    Apparatus or method under subclass 1 including formation of an
    intermeshable element by a cutting tool making several cutting passes
    through a workpiece with relative repositioning of the workpiece and the
    cutting tool between cutting passes so that a first portion of the final
    configuration of the intermeshable element is formed by a first cutting
    pass and a second portion is formed by a subsequent pass.

    (1)     Note.  Cutting a spline on a shaft is considered to be proper for
    this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65,     for similar formation of a thread or helix.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    407,    Cutters, for Shaping, subclass 28 for a cutting element to be used
    in the apparatus or process of this subclass.


CLS 409/11
TXT Hobbing:

    Apparatus or method under subclass 10 in which the cutting tool is adapted
    to turn about an axis, the cutting tool including at least three radially
    outwardly directed cutting teeth positioned spirally about the cutting tool
    axis, each tooth including a cutting edge formed by intersecting planar
    surfaces one of which surfaces is generally parallel to and radiates from
    the cutting tool axis, said surface directing a chip formed by the cutting
    operation away from the cutting edge wherein the cutting tool is rotated
    and the cutting tool and workpiece are moved relative to each other thus
    causing the cutting edge to form the intermeshable element on the
    workpiece, wherein all intermeshable elements of a gear are generated as a
    continuous operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    407,    Cutters, for Shaping, subclass 20 for a cutter element to be used
    in the machine or process of this subclass.


CLS 409/12
TXT Process:

    Method of forming a gear under subclass 11.


CLS 409/13
TXT Generating tooth for bevel gear:

    Method under subclass 12 wherein the body on which the intermeshable
    element is formed is adapted to rotate about an axis and wherein the
    intermeshable element is formed so that it extends to a greater radial
    distance at one axial end than at the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27+,    for apparatus for hobbing a bevel gear by milling with a radial
    faced tool.

    43+,    for apparatus for cutting a bevel gear by use of a reciprocating or
    oscillating cutter.


CLS 409/14
TXT Including means to shift hob between cutting passes:

    Apparatus under subclass 11 wherein the cutting tool is adjustable relative
    to the workpiece, when out of engagement with the workpiece, by being
    repositioned along the cutter axis.

    (1)     Note.  The adjustment of this subclass is usually to bring about
    more uniform wear of the teeth of the hob.


CLS 409/15
TXT With control means energized in response to activator stimulated by
    condition sensor: Apparatus under subclass 11 including means for:



    (a)     detecting any of the following characteristics; a state or
    property, a change in a state or property, or the occurrence of a
    predetermined event in any of the following:  the workpiece, the product of
    the apparatus, the apparatus itself, or the environment of the apparatus
    affecting the operation thereof; and

    (b)     initating (as a direct result of that detection) a signal other
    than that generated or transmitted by the detected means, and

    (c)     regulating or modifying (as a direct result of said initiation) the
    operation of the means to affect the cutting.

    (1)     Note.  The activator (or initiating means) of this subclass serves
    to trigger a source of energy other than energy of the sensed condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147,    for control means combined with a milling machine having work
    infeed.

    186,    for control means combined with a milling machine having axial
    cutter infeed.

    193,    for control means combined with a milling machine having cutter
    infeed, generally.

    207,    for control means combined with a milling machine having means to
    adjustably position the cutter.

    245,    for control means combined with a broaching machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclass 8 for
    similar structure for regulating the operation of a machine of that class
    type.


CLS 409/16
TXT Plural hobs:

    Apparatus under subclass 11 including a first cutting tool and a second
    cutting tool each for performing the operation of that subclass wherein the
    cutting tools are capable of relative movement as assembled in the
    apparatus with respect to each other during the shaping operation.

    (1)     Note.  A first cutting bit and a second cutting bit mounted on the
    same cutting tool holder are considered to be two edges of the same cutting
    tool rather than plural cutting tools.


CLS 409/17
TXT Including infeed means:

    Apparatus under subclass 11 including means to support the cutting tool and
    means to support the workpiece and including means to cause relative
    approach of the cutting tool and workpiece to effect the cutting operation.


CLS 409/18
TXT To infeed along axis of work rotation:
    Apparatus under subclass 17 including means to support the workpiece for
    rotation about an axis during cutting thereof wherein the relative approach
    effected has a component in the direction parallel to that axis.


CLS 409/19
TXT Infeed of cutter:

    Apparatus under subclass 18 including a support adapted to carry the
    cutting tool wherein the cutting tool is moved relative to the support and
    relative to the workpiece to effect the cutting operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for means for feeding a hob radially of the work axis.


CLS 409/20
TXT And infeed radially of axis of work rotation:

    Apparatus under subclass 19 wherein the relative approach effected also has
    a component in the direction toward or away from the axis about which the
    workpiece turns.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a cutter moving relative to the workpiece
    diagonally (to form a tapered product) as well as a cutter first moving
    directly radially toward the workpiece and then purely in the direction of
    the work axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22+,    for means to feed a gear-cutting hob relative to a workpiece toward
    an axis with no component in the direction of the work axis.


CLS 409/21
TXT Vertically:

    Apparatus under subclass 19 wherein the workpiece is supported to turn
    about an axis extending generally up and down with respect to the earth and
    wherein the cutting tool is moved relative to the support and relative to
    the workpiece along the axis to effect the cutting operation.


CLS 409/22
TXT To infeed radially of axis of work rotation:

    Apparatus under subclass 17 including means to support the workpiece for
    rotation about an axis during cutting thereof wherein the relative approach
    effected has a component in the direction toward or away from that axis.


CLS 409/23
TXT Infeed of cutter:

    Apparatus under subclass 22 including a support adapted to carry the
    cutting tool wherein the cutting tool is moved relative to the support and
    relative to the workpiece to effect the cutting operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for means for feeding a hob along work axis.


CLS 409/24
TXT And infeed tangentially of work axis:
    Apparatus under subclass 23 wherein the cutting tool is moved relative to
    the workpiece in a straight line that does not pass through the axis of the
    workpiece to effect the cutting operation.


CLS 409/25
TXT Milling with radial faced tool:

    Apparatus or method under subclass 10 for formation of an intermeshable
    element by use of a cutting tool adapted to rotate about an axis, the
    cutting tool including a planar surface normal to and extending across that
    axis from which surface extends a protrusion having a sharp cutting edge
    wherein the cutting tool is unsupported from the end having the planar
    surface and is supported for rotation from the opposite axial end.


CLS 409/26
TXT Process:

    Method of forming a gear under subclass 25.


CLS 409/27
TXT Adapted to cut bevel gear:

    Apparatus under subclass 25 wherein the body on which the intermeshable
    element is formed is adapted to rotate about an axis and wherein the
    intermeshable element is formed so that it extends to a greater radial
    distance at one axial end than at the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for the process of generating a bevel gear by hobbing.

    43+,    for apparatus for cutting a bevel gear by use of a reciprocating or
    oscillating cutter.


CLS 409/28
TXT With means to continuously rotate work and means to co-form all teeth of
    gear: Apparatus under subclass 27 including means to support and turn the
    workpiece about an axis relative to the cutting tool such that a first
    intermeshable element is partially formed, then a second intermeshable
    element is partially formed, then a third, etc., until all the
    intermeshable elements of the gear being formed are partially formed, then
    all the elements are further formed until all the elements have been
    completed during the final rotation of the workpiece.


CLS 409/29
TXT Bevel gear having nonparallel opposing tooth flanks:

    Apparatus under subclass 27 including means to relatively move the cutting
    tool and workpiece so that the resulting groove between adjacent
    intermeshable elements has walls that are deliberately formed so that if
    extended, they would meet.

    (1)     Note.  In the generation of a bevel gear by use of a radial face
    mill, normally, there will be more slight inherent variation in the spacing
    of the walls of the groove formed between adjacent intermeshable elements;
    included in this subclass is that structure wherein there is a deliberate
    effort to bring about additional taper of the groove.


CLS 409/30
TXT Including rotary cutter cradle:

    Apparatus under subclass 27 wherein the workpiece is supported for rotation
    about an axis and means are included to support the cutting tool for
    rotation during the cutting operation about an axis that is offset from the
    cutting tool to thereby cause the cutting tool to arcuately traverse the
    rotating workpiece and engage the perimeter of the workpiece so that the
    peripheral velocity of the workpiece equals the traversing velocity of the
    cutting tool.


CLS 409/31
TXT By relative axial movement between synchronously indexing or rotating work
    and cutter:

    Apparatus or method under subclass 10 including supporting the cutting tool
    having a cutting edge for continuous or intermittent rotation about a first
    axis and supporting the workpiece for continuous or intermittent rotation
    about a second axis and effecting relative movement between the cutting
    edge and the workpiece generally along the axis of the cutting tool,
    including controlling the continuous or intermittent rotation of the
    cutting tool and the continuous or intermittent rotation of the workpiece
    to cause the cutting tool to form the final configuration of the
    intermeshable element in more than one engagement by the cutting edge.


CLS 409/32
TXT Crowning:

    Apparatus or method under subclass 31 wherein the formed element is
    generally ridgelike and is generally higher in the central portion thereof
    than at the ends.

    (1)     Note.  The height of the ridgelike element is the distance from a
    base if the product is a rack, is the distance from the axis if the product
    is a spur gear, is the distance from the vanishing crest cone if the
    product is a bevel gear, etc.


CLS 409/33
TXT Displacing cutter axially relative to work (e.g., gear shaving, etc.):

    Apparatus or method under subclass 31 including means for moving the entire
    cutting tool relative to the workpiece generally along the axis of the
    cutting tool.


CLS 409/34
TXT Using gear shaper-cutter:

    Apparatus or method under subclass 33 including structure to support a
    workpiece and structure to support a cutting tool with provision to cause
    the cutting tool to be reciprocated to pass to-and-fro relative to the
    workpiece to effect the cutting operation, which cutting tool support
    structure also includes provision to cause the cutting tool to be turned
    about an axis generally parallel to the direction of reciprocation between
    passes, for generating an intermeshable element in a series of passes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    407,    Cutters, for Shaping, subclass 28 for a cutting tool to be used in
    the machine or process of this subclass.


CLS 409/35
TXT Plural distinct cutting edges:

    Apparatus or method under subclass 34 including a first and a second sharp
    edge for cutting to shape, wherein either (a) the first sharp edge is part
    of a cutting tool that is separate from the cutting tool of which the other
    sharp edge is a part or (b) the first and second sharp edges are members of
    the same cutting tool but are axially spaced along the axis about which the
    cutter is adapted to index or rotate.


CLS 409/36
TXT Cutting rotating work, the axis of which lies in a plane intersecting the
    cutter axis:

    Apparatus or method under subclass 34 wherein the workpiece is supported
    for movement about axis during cutting action relative to the cutting tool
    and wherein the cutting tool is adapted to be indexed between cutting
    passes about a second axis, in which apparatus to process the cutting tool
    axis is neither parallel to nor intersecting of the axis of the workpiece
    so that the two axes are not lying in a common plane.


CLS 409/37
TXT Gear shaving:

    Apparatus or method under subclass 10 including use of a finishing cutter
    to cut away a small amount of material from the surface of a previously
    formed gear tooth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for gear shaving by a cutter synchronously rotating with a
    workpiece.

    34,     for gear shaving by a cutter synchronously indexing with and
    reciprocating relative to a workpiece.

    49,     for gear shaving, generally.


CLS 409/38
TXT Using rotary cutter:

    Apparatus or method under subclass 10 including supporting of the cutting
    tool to turn about an axis through more than 3600 during cutting relative
    to the workpiece and relative to the base of the machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     for apparatus or method of using a rotary cutter to form a gear
    tooth, generally.


CLS 409/39
TXT Having axially directed cutting edge:
    Apparatus or method under subclass 38 including use of a sharp cutting edge
    intended to be brought into engagement with the workpiece by relative
    movement of the cutter and workpiece along the axis of the cutting tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for a similar cutter wherein the cutter includes a radial face and
    wherein the cutting edge is a part of a protuberance extending out of that
    radial face.


CLS 409/40
TXT Plural rotary cutters:

    Apparatus or method under subclass 38 including supporting a first cutting
    tool for movement through more than 3600 during cutting and including
    supporting a second cutting tool for movement throughmore than 3600 during
    cutting, wherein the first and second cutting tools are relatively movable
    as assembled in the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  A first cutting bit and a second cutting bit mounted on the
    same cutting tool holder are considered to be two edges of the same cutting
    tool rather than plural cutters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for use of plural rotary cutters to form gear teeth, generally.


CLS 409/41
TXT On reciprocating carriage:

    Apparatus or method under subclass 38 including support of the cutting tool
    to turn about an axis on a member and including moving that member and the
    cutting to-and-fro relative to the workpiece during the cutting operation.


CLS 409/42
TXT Using reciprocating or oscillating cutter:
    Apparatus or method under subclass 10 including supporting and guiding the
    cutting tool to move to-and-fro either along a straight or arcuate line
    with respect to the workpiece during cutting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for supporting of a cutting tool for rotation to-and-fro more than
    3600 during cutting.

    58,     for general forming of a gear by use of a reciprocating or
    oscillating cutter.


CLS 409/43
TXT Bevel gear cutting:

    Apparatus or method under subclass 42 wherein the body on which the
    intermeshable element is formed is adapted to rotate about an axis and
    wherein the intermeshable element is formed so that it extends to a greater
    radial distance at one axial end than the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for the process of generating a bevel gear by hobbing.

    27+,    for apparatus for hobbing a bevel gear by milling with a radial
    faced tool.


CLS 409/44
TXT Dual cutters:

    Apparatus or method under subclass 43 including the use of a first cutting
    tool for formation of an intermeshable element and the use of a second
    distinct cutting tool for formation of an intermeshable element, wherein
    the second cutting tool is of similar or generally allochiral shape to the
    first cutting tool and wherein the first and second cutting tools are
    relatively movable as assembled in the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  The second cutting tool of this subclass may cut the same
    workpiece as the first but at a different location, may cut a second
    workpiece in the same manner as the first cutting tool cuts the first
    workpiece, or may cut a surface cut by the first cutting tool.

    (2)     Note.  "Allochiral" may be defined as (a) reversely congruent, (b)
    mirror imagelike or, (c) similar but opposite, as the right hand is similar
    but opposite to the shape of the left hand.


CLS 409/45
TXT Double acting cutter:

    Apparatus or method under subclass 43 wherein the cutting tool is adapted
    to cut in the first direction of movement over the work and is adapted to
    cut in the return direction of movement over the work.


CLS 409/46
TXT Rectilinearly reciprocating cutter:
    Apparatus or method under subclass 42 wherein the cutting tool is limited
    to move to-and-fro along a straight path.


CLS 409/47
TXT Cutter comprising a rack:

    Apparatus or method under subclass 46 wherein the cutting tool is generally
    elongated in a first direction with a plurality of cutting teeth extending
    laterally from one long side thereof, which cutting tool is adapted to be
    moved laterally relative to the work so that in a cutting pass each tooth
    engages the workpiece without following another tooth.


CLS 409/48
TXT Making a noncircular gear, worm, rotor, or a planar-faced gear:

    Apparatus or method under subclass 10 wherein the intended product
    comprises:



    (a)     A rotary driving member including a plurality of intermeshable
    elements intended to sequentially engage similar elements on another
    similar member wherein the elements on the member being formed are
    positioned in a path that is other than circular about the axis of the
    rotary member;

    (b)     a rotary driving member including a ridge-like intermeshable
    element extending helically about the axis thereof, which member is
    intended to transmit rotary motion to another member;

    (c)     a rotary member including an element intended to intermesh with a
    similar element on another member, wherein the members are not actually
    intended to transmit force to one another, but rather are intended to
    transmit force to something else (as in the case of the rotary members of a
    gear-type pump), or

    (d)     a rotary driving member including a face normal to the rotary axis
    thereof and including an intermeshable element extending generally axially
    therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65+,    for generating a screw thread on a nongearlike member.


CLS 409/49
TXT Gear shaving:

    Apparatus or method under subclass 1 including use of a finishing cutter to
    cut away a small amount of material from the surface of a previously formed
    gear tooth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for gear shaving by generating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    407,    Cutters, for Shaping, subclass 27 for a rotary gear shaving tool.


CLS 409/50
TXT Using rotary cutter:

    Apparatus or method under subclass 1 including supporting of the cutting
    tool to turn about an axis through more than 3605 during cutting relative
    to the workpiece and relative to the base of the machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for apparatus or method for using a rotary cutter to generate a
    gear tooth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    483,    Tool Changing, subclass 18 for a rotating work machine tool
    combined with a means to transfer a tool to or from a rotary spindle tool
    support.


CLS 409/51
TXT Process:

    Method of forming a gear under subclass 50.


CLS 409/52
TXT End mill:

    Apparatus under subclass 50 including a cutting tool adapted to turn about
    an axis, which cutting tool has a distal end provided with a cutting
    protuberance terminating in an axially directed cutting edge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    407,    Cutters, for Shaping, subclass 21 for a cutting tool, per se, for
    cutting of a gear by an axially directed cutting edge.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, for structure for
    cutting by a rotating tool moving only axially relative to the work.


CLS 409/53
TXT Radially faced:

    Apparatus under subclass 52 wherein the cutting tool is provided at the
    distal end with a planar surface generally normal to the axis thereof from
    which the cutting protuberance extends.


CLS 409/54
TXT Using plural, selectively usable tools:
    Apparatus under subclass 53 including a first cutting tool and a second
    cutting tool, wherein only one of the cutting tools is intended to be used
    at a given time.


CLS 409/55
TXT Plural rotary cutters:

    Apparatus under subclass 50 including means for supporting a first cutting
    tool for movement through more than 3600 during cutting and including means
    for supporting a second cutting tool for movement through more than 3600
    during cutting, wherein the first and second cutting tools are relatively
    movable as assembled in the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  A first cutting bit and a second cutting bit mounted on the
    same cutting tool holder are considered to be two edges of the same cutting
    tool rather than plural cutters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for use of plural rotary cutters to generate gear teeth.


CLS 409/56
TXT Cutting action along work axis:

    Apparatus under subclass 50 in which the product is intended to turn about
    an axis during inter meshing, i.e., the work axis, and wherein during
    formation of the intermeshable element, the cutting edge of the cutting
    tool engages the workpiece and cuttingly moves along this axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, for a cutting
    machine or cutter per se adapted to cut by use of a tool that does not move
    other than about an axis and along that axis with respect to the workpiece
    during shaping thereof.


CLS 409/57
TXT Cutting action intersecting work axis:
    Apparatus under subclass 56 wherein as the cutting edge moves along the
    work axis it also moves toward or away from the work axis.

    (1)     Note.  The cutting tool of this subclass forms the teeth of a bevel
    gear.


CLS 409/58
TXT Using reciprocating or oscillating cutter:
    Apparatus or method under subclass 1 including supporting and guiding the
    cutting tool to move to-and-fro either along a straight or arcuate line
    with respect to the workpiece during cutting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for generating a gear by use of a reciprocating or oscillating
    cutter.


CLS 409/59
TXT Broach:

    Apparatus or method under subclass 58 including use of a cutting tool
    having a pluraltiy of sequentially acting protuberances on each of which
    there is a cutting edge, adapted to move in a path with respect to the
    workpiece so that a first protuberance makes a shaping cut into the surface
    of the workpiece and is followed by a second protuberance which makes a
    deeper shaping cut into that surface of the workpiece, so that the actions
    of sequentially acting protuberances is cumulative.

    (1)     Note.  A rodlike cutting tool which moves along the axis thereof is
    considered to move in a path even if the cutting tool rotates to cut a
    helical groove.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    407,    Cutters, for Shaping, subclass 13 for a broaching cutting tool
    without drive structure or work recognizing structure.


CLS 409/60
TXT Including circumferentially disposed cutting edges:

    Apparatus or method under subclass 58 for simultaneously forming multiple
    protuberances about the periphery of a generally circular workpiece,
    wherein the cutting tool includes a first cutting edge for forming a first
    intermeshable element and includes a second cutting edge spaced about the
    workpiece from the first cutting edge for forming a second intermeshable
    element.

    (1)     Note.  The gear formed by the cutting tool of this subclass may
    have radially outwardly or radially inwardly extending gear teeth.


CLS 409/61
TXT Work dividing or checking of work position or division:

    Apparatus or method under subclass 1 including (a) determining of the
    precise spacing of the intermeshable elements to be formed along the
    surface of the workpiece body, (b) determining the precise location of the
    workpiece in an intermeshable element forming machine, or (c) determining
    that the formed intermeshable elements are properly spaced about the
    surface of the body.


CLS 409/62
TXT With work clamping:

    Apparatus or method under subclass 1 including immobilization of the
    workpiece relative to a machine part.


CLS 409/63
TXT WITH FURBISHING OF CUTTER:

    Apparatus or method under the class definition including restoring the
    cutting tool to better operating condition.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is treatment of the tool, per se.  For
    example, sharpening of the tool is furbishing, adjustment of the tool is
    not.


CLS 409/64
TXT MILLING:

    Apparatus or method under the class definition comprising use of a cutting
    tool rotatably driven through more than 360o to form a shaped surface on a
    workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243+,   for a rotary broaching machine.  Note that a rotary broach normally
    turns through no more than 3600 to form a shaped surface on a workpiece and
    is therefore excluded from this and the indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, for a machine for
    cutting by use of a tool turning about an axis and moving along that axis
    toward a workpiece wherein no additional motion is imparted to the cutting
    edge of the tool during operation.  Especially subclasses 26+ for the
    combination of cutting in the manner of that class (408) with cutting in
    the manner of this class (409).  The use of a tool to cut in the manner of
    Class 408 and then in the manner of this class will be found in this class
    (409).

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 119+ for an abrading machine using a rotating
    tool which also has reciprocating motion and subclasses 177+ for an
    abrading machine using a rotating abrading tool in which the work is
    manipulated relative to the tool.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, subclasses 60+ for a machine for milling a driving slot in the
    head of a screw; subclass 107 for a machine for finishing the sides of a
    rough nut blank by means of a milling cutter; and subclass 161 for a
    machine for milling a slot in the shank of a rivet to from a split rivet.

    483,    Tool Changing, subclasses 30+ for apparatus including a rotary
    spindle machine tool combined with a tool transfer means.


CLS 409/65
TXT Thread or helix generating:

    Apparatus or method under subclass 64 for formation of a recess extending
    about and spirally along a rodlike or tubelike workpiece by a rotating
    cutting tool making several cutting passes through the workpiece with
    relative positioning of the workpiece and the cutting tool between cutting
    passes so that the cutting action of each pass is such that the final
    configuration of the recess is formed by more than one cutting pass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for similar formation of the intermeshing elements of a gear.

    48,     for generating a screw thread on a worm, i.e., a device for
    transmitting rotary movement to a gear.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 33+ for apparatus for thread or helix
    milling combined with nonmilling metal working.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 309 for a glass press-molding machine
    providing screw threads on a product, see the notes thereunder.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 88+ for thread rolling between
    "platens"; and subclasses 95+ and 102+ for forming a thread in a tube body
    by spirally corrugating the tube body.

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclasses 101.1+ for a process
    of making a tool, particularly subclasses 108.1+ for a process of making a
    drill bit.

    82,     Turning, subclasses 110+ for a screw cutting lathe.

    142,    Wood Turning, subclasses 23, 26+, and 35 for cutting a spiral
    groove in wood.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, for cutting a screw
    thread by a cutter that turns about an axis and moves along that axis
    toward a workpiece with no additional motion during operation.

    451,    Abrading, particularly subclasses 47 and 48 for a method of
    grinding to form a worm or screw thread and subclasses 95+ for the
    corresponding apparatus.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, subclasses 57+ for a machine for forming a thread on a bolt or
    screw.


CLS 409/66
TXT Process:

    Method of forming a thread or helix under subclass 65.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, subclass 48 for a process of grinding a thread or helical
    surface.


CLS 409/67
TXT With means to regulate operation by use of templet, card, or other
    replaceable information supply:

    Apparatus or method under subclass 65 for detecting the characteristics
    (e.g., physical, electrical, etc.) of a member carrying operating
    instructions for the apparatus, which member is separate from both the
    workpiece and the organized structure of the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes utilizing a prepared information
    supply that is to be removably placed in the apparatus.  This subclass does
    not include utilizing the characteristics of a permanent part of the
    apparatus, such as a cam or gear, to influence the operation of other parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for similar control combined with gear cutting apparatus.

    79,     for similar control combined with milling, generally.

    289,    for similar control combined with planing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclass 3 for
    similar control structure for a boring or drilling machine.


CLS 409/68
TXT Complete cycle:

    Apparatus under subclass 67 intended to move from an inactive or loading
    position through the intended operation and then return to the inactive or
    loading position of the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83,     for a cyclical machine used in the manufacture of a lock key.


CLS 409/69
TXT To regulate cutting depth (e.g., relief, taper, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 67 wherein, in response to the replaceable
    information supply, the degree of projection of the cutting tool toward the
    work is regulated.

    (1)     Note.  Variation in the degree of projection of the cutting tool
    may follow an axial pattern as in generating a thread or helix on a tapered
    surface or a circumferential pattern as in producing a relieved helical
    cutting tool.


CLS 409/70
TXT To regulate rate of motion (e.g., stopping, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 67 wherein, in response to the replaceable
    information supply, the velocity of the parts is regulated.

    (1)     Note.  To start or stop movement is considered to regulate the
    velocity of the parts.


CLS 409/71
TXT With nonthread or nonhelix generating, milling cutter:

    Apparatus under subclass 65 including a first rotating cutting tool for
    formation of a recess about, and spirally along, a rodlike or tubelike
    workpiece by several generating passes and including a second rotating
    cutting tool adapted to rotate and form a shaped surface on a workpiece
    wherein the second cutting tool is not intended to cut a recess about and
    spirally along a workpiece.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 33+ for a machine including a cutting
    tool of this class type combined with a cutting tool of another class type.


CLS 409/72
TXT With means to advance work or product: Apparatus under subclass 65
    including a work station and including means to move a workpiece to that
    station or including means to move the product that has been shaped at the
    work station away from that station.

    (1)     Note.  Means to transfer material from one work station to another
    work station is considered to be proper for this subclass since the
    material is the product of the first station and is the work of the second
    station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for gear cutting combined with work or product advancing.

    159+,   for a milling machine including means to infeed the work to the
    cutter and with means to advance the work or product.

    172+,   for a milling machine, broadly, combined with means to advance work
    or product.

    174,    for a milling machine, broadly, combined with means to manipulate
    the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    82,     Turning, subclasses 124+ for a lathe with work feeding and/or
    removing mechanism.

    221,    Article Dispensing, for a method of or apparatus for dispensing or
    feeding an article, not otherwise classified, and especially subclasses 239
    and 294 for an article dispenser or feeder delivering to a clamp or
    holddown.  See the class definition of Class 221 for a statement of the
    lines between the classes and for the disposition of other related art.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, for a method of or
    apparatus for feeding material without utilizing the leading or trailing
    end to effect movement of the material.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, for work advancing, including single
    or multiple, nominal shaping operations. Generally, work handling to
    present a workpiece to a named shaping means will be found in Class 414.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, subclasses 164+ for a miscellaneous machine for feeding nail
    blanks, screw blanks, nut blanks, nail plates, or other stock specialized
    to performing the various steps in the manufacture of an article of that
    class.


CLS 409/73
TXT Plural cutters or work holders:

    Apparatus under subclass 65 including a first cutting tool for formation of
    a recess extending about and spirally along a rodlike or tubelike workpiece
    with relative positioning of the workpiece between cutting passes and
    including a second cutting tool for formation of a recess extending about
    and spirally along a rodlike or tubelike workpiece by making several
    cutting passes through that workpiece with relative positioning of the
    workpiece between cutting passes; or, including a first means for
    grippingly engaging a first workpiece to present that workpiece to a cutter
    and including a second means for grippingly engaging a second workpiece to
    present that workpiece to a cutter.

    (1)     Note.  The first and second cutting tool may act on the same or
    different workpieces; the first and second gripping means may present the
    workpiece to the same or different cutting tools.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass is a thread milling machine having
    a tool turret or a blank turret.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for a machine including a thread or helix generating milling cutter
    combined with a nonthread of nonhelix generating milling cutter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 33+ for a machine which can perform
    diverse operations, frequently by utilizing a plurality of cutters or blank
    holders.


CLS 409/74
TXT With planetary cutter:

    Apparatus under subclass 65 including movable means to support the cutting
    tool for rotation about a first axis and including provision to allow
    rotation of the movable support means about a second axis, the second axis
    being generally coextensive with the central axis of the rodlike or
    tubelike workpiece, wherein the cutting tool is adapted to orbit about the
    workpiece during formation of the helical recess therein.


CLS 409/75
TXT With means to move work axially and means to interrelate work movement with
    cutter rotation:

    Apparatus under subclass 65 including means to cause the cutting tool to
    turn about an axis and including means to displace the workpiece relative
    to the cutting tool along the axis of the workpiece; also including means
    to cause the cutting tool to rotate a prescribed number of revolutions for
    a prescribed amount of axial displacement.


CLS 409/76
TXT With means to rotate work and means to interrelatedly infeed the work
    relative to the cutter:

    Apparatus under subclass 65 including a base, including means to cause the
    workpiece to rotate about the axis thereof relative to the cutting tool and
    relative to the base, and including means to cause relative motion between
    the rotating cutter and the workpiece to thereby bring about the cutting
    action, further including means to cause the cutting tool to approach the
    workpiece a prescribed distance for a prescribed number of revolutions of
    the workpiece.


CLS 409/77
TXT Means to infeed the cutter:

    Apparatus under subclass 76 wherein the means to cause relative approach of
    the cutting tool and the workpiece acts on the cutting tool so that it also
    moves relative to the base of the apparatus.


CLS 409/78
TXT With means to circumferentially adjust the position of the cutter with
    respect to the work:

    Apparatus under subclass 65 wherein means is provided to alter the position
    of the work relative to the cutting tool so that the location of the recess
    formed in the workpiece can be selected.


CLS 409/79
TXT With regulation of operation by use of templet, card, or other replaceable
    information supply:

    Apparatus or method under subclass 64 for detecting the characteristics
    (e.g., physical, electrical, etc.) of a member carrying operating
    instructions for the apparatus, which member is separate from both the
    workpiece and the organized structure of the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes utilizing a prepared information
    supply that is to be removably placed in the apparatus.  This subclass does
    not include utilizing the characteristics of a permanent part of the
    apparatus, such as a cam or gear, to influence the operation of other parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for similar control combined with gear cutting apparatus.

    67,     for similar control combined with a milling machine for generating
    a thread or helix.

    289,    for similar control combined with planing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclass 3 for
    similar control structure for a boring or drilling machine.


CLS 409/80
TXT With sensing of numerical information and regulation without mechanical
    connection between sensing means and regulated means (i.e., numerical
    control):

    Apparatus or method under subclass 79 including detection of information on
    the separate member which information is of a prescribed magnitude and is
    other than a physical shape or outline, wherein the detected information is
    transmitted to the apparatus for performing the shaping operation by means
    other than a mechanical linkage.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is the home for milling combined with
    "numerical control" using a tape, card, etc., as the replaceable
    information supply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    289,    for planing combined with numerical control.


CLS 409/81
TXT To cut lock key:

    Apparatus or method under subclass 79 intended to form the raised portions
    on a member used to precisely position lock tumblers and actuate a lock
    cyclinder.


CLS 409/82
TXT Using templet other than a key:

    Apparatus or method under subclass 81 including detecting the
    characteristics of a member not identical to the member being formed, i.e.,
    the member detected is not intended to be used to precisely position lock
    tumblers and actuate a lock cylinder.


CLS 409/83
TXT Complete cycle:

    Apparatus or method under subclass 81 intended to move from an inactive or
    loading position through the intended operation and then return to the
    inactive or loading position of the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for similar structure used in thread or helix generating.


CLS 409/84
TXT Process:

    Method of milling under subclass 79.


CLS 409/85
TXT Reproducing means:

    Apparatus under subclass 79 particularly adapted to generate substantially
    the form of a separate member, i.e., a pattern member, of the same or
    different size.

    (1)     Note.  An image on a planar element may be considered to be the
    form of the separate element for this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein is shaping in which the product corresponds
    to the shape of the pattern element in a relief or intaglio relationship or
    in which the shape of the pattern member is produced repeatedly on the same
    workpiece.

    (3)     Note.  Production of a mirror image of the pattern is included in
    this subclass.

    (4)     Note.  A change in part of the dimensions of the workpiece without
    a corresponding change in the remaining dimensions is included in this
    subclass, e.g., the reproduction of a peripheral surface on a flat plate
    without corresponding change in the thickness thereof.


CLS 409/86
TXT Including pantograph cutter-carrier:
    Apparatus under subclass 85 including four rigid links joined in
    parallelogram form for carrying the cutting tool and for carrying a
    follower adapted to trace over the surface of the pattern member and
    thereby reproduce the form of the pattern member on the workpiece.


CLS 409/87
TXT And means to move work at work station: Apparatus under subclass 86
    including a base adapted to support the apparatus and including means to
    cause the workpiece to change positions with respect to the base.


CLS 409/88
TXT About work axis:

    Apparatus under subclass 87 wherein the means to cause the workpiece to
    change positions acts to cause the workpiece to turn about a pivot point.

    (1)     Note.  The point about which the workpiece is moved may be within
    or outside the confines of the workpiece.


CLS 409/89
TXT Pivotally supported for vertical movement: Apparatus under subclass 86
    wherein the four rigid links are attached to the apparatus so that during
    operation the cutting tool and the follower are directed to move in a
    vertical plane.


CLS 409/90
TXT And means to counterbalance carrier:
    Apparatus under subclass 86 including means to counteract and lift against
    the weight of the four rigid links joined in parallelogram form to cause
    the rigid links to function as if their weight has been reduced.


CLS 409/91
TXT Including plural cutters:

    Apparatus under subclass 86 including a first cutting tool adapted to
    perform a shaping operation and including a second cutting tool adapted to
    perform a shaping operation, wherein the first and second cutting tools are
    relatively movable as assembled in the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  A first cutting bit and a second cutting bit mounted on the
    same cutting tool holder are considered to be two edges of the same cutting
    tool rather than plural cutters.


CLS 409/92
TXT By use of pivotally supported tracer:
    Apparatus under subclass 85 including a follower adapted to move over the
    surface of the pattern member and including means to support the follower
    to swing about a fixed point during operation thereof.


CLS 409/93
TXT Duplicating means:

    Apparatus under subclass 85 adapted to generate the form of the pattern
    member in substantially the same size.


CLS 409/94
TXT With means for operation without manual intervention:

    Apparatus under subclass 93 including provision to allow operation thereof,
    once started, to continue at least until completion of a prescribed
    operation, without any further input from an operative.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for a reproducing machine with provision for circumferential
    movement of the cutter with respect to the workpiece adapted to operate
    without manual intervention.

    116,    for a reproducing machine, generally, for operation without manual
    intervention.

    117,    for a milling machine with regulation by a replaceable information
    supply, generally, including means to permit operation without manual
    intervention.


CLS 409/95
TXT To make a double curvature foil:

    Apparatus under subclass 94 particularly adapted to form an elongated
    member having an upper smoothly formed surface and a lower smoothly formed
    surface wherein provision is made to establish that the curvature of the
    formed surfaces be related, but different, and not allochiral.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is formation of an aircraft wing, the
    propeller for an air or water vessel, or a turbine blade.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    for apparatus to mill a double curvature foil utilizing plural
    tracers or plural templets without duplicating.

    120,    for apparatus to mill a double curvature foil without plural
    tracers or plural templets and without duplicating.


CLS 409/96
TXT Including means to sense optical or magnetic image:

    Apparatus under subclass 94 including means to detect the form of the
    pattern member, which detector means is particularly adapted to note light
    waves of magnetic energy emanating therefrom.


CLS 409/97
TXT With means to support templet above or under work:

    Apparatus under subclass 94 with means to hold the pattern member and the
    workpiece against gravity and adjacent each other so that the pattern
    member is either directly above or directly below the workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for similar apparatus not in a machine for operation without manual
    intervention.


CLS 409/98
TXT Including tracer adapted to trigger electrical energy:

    Apparatus under subclass 94 including means having a follower adapted to
    ride over the form of the pattern member, which means is adapted to be
    connected to a supply of electricity to regulate the flow of the
    electricity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for a tracer adapted to trigger electrical energy in a reproducing
    means with provision for circumferential relative movement of cutter and
    work and adapted for operation without manual intervention.

    126,    for a tracer, per se, for a milling machine, adapted to trigger
    electrical energy.


CLS 409/99
TXT To actuate electrically driven work or tool moving means:

    Apparatus under subclass 98 including means utilizing electricity to
    reposition or drive the cutting tool or the workpiece, wherein the
    electricity regulated serves to control the movement of the repositioning
    or driving means.


CLS 409/100
TXT To actuate fluid driven work or tool moving means:

    Apparatus under subclass 98 including means utilizing hydraulic energy to
    reposition or drive the cutting tool or the workpiece, wherein the
    electricity regulated serves to control the movement of the repositioning
    or driving means.


CLS 409/101
TXT Including tracer adapted to trigger fluid energy:

    Apparatus under subclass 94 including means having a follower adapted to
    ride over the form of the pattern member, which means is adapted to be
    connected to a supply of gas or liquid to regulate the flow of that gas or
    liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for a tracer adapted to trigger fluid energy in a reproducing means
    with provision for circumferential relative movement of cutter and work and
    adapted for operation without manual intervention.

    129,    for a tracer, per se, for a milling machine, adapted to trigger
    fluid energy.


CLS 409/102
TXT To actuate fluid driven work or tool moving means:

    Apparatus under subclass 101 including means utilizing hydraulic or
    pneumatic energy to reposition or drive the cutting tool or the workpiece,
    wherein the gas or liquid regulated serves to control the movement of the
    repositioning or driving means.


CLS 409/103
TXT Including cutter and tracer fixed to move laterally together:

    Apparatus under subclass 102 including structure to support the cutting
    tool and structure to support the follower such that any movement of the
    follower is accompanied by a corresponding equal movement of the cutting
    tool supporting structure.


CLS 409/104
TXT And provision for circumferential relative movement of cutter and work:

    Apparatus under subclass 94 particularly adapted to shape a workpiece that
    is generally circular in cross section, wherein the cutting tool is
    supported for rotation about its axis and for arcuate translatory movement
    about the circumference of the workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111,    for similar structure in combination with a duplicating machine,
    generally.

    112,    for similar structure in combination with a reproducing machine.

    122,    for similar structure for use in a machine using a replaceable
    information supply, which machine is intended to operate without manual
    intervention.

    123,    for similar structure for use in a machine using a replaceable
    information supply.


CLS 409/105
TXT Including plural cutters:

    Apparatus under subclass 104 including a first cutting tool adapted to
    perform a shaping operation and including a second cutting tool adapted to
    perform a shaping operation, wherein the first and second cutting tools are
    relatively movable as assembled in the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  A first cutting bit and a second cutting bit mounted on the
    same cutting tool holder are considered to be two edges of the same cutting
    tool rather than plural cutters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     for plural milling cutters supported by a pantograph cutter-carrier.


CLS 409/106
TXT Including plural cutters:

    Apparatus under subclass 94 including a first cutting tool adapted to
    perform a shaping operation and including a second cutting tool adapted to
    perform a shaping operation, wherein the first and second cutting tools are
    relatively movable as assembled in the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  A first cutting bit and a second cutting bit mounted on the
    same cutting tool holder are considered to be two edges of the same cutting
    tool rather than plural cutters.


CLS 409/107
TXT Including cross-slide tool carrier:
    Apparatus under subclass 94 including a first guideway for supporting the
    rotating cutting tool allowing that cutting tool to move in a first
    straight line thereon and including a second guideway for supporting the
    first guideway and allowing that first guideway to move in a second
    straight line normal to the first straight line, so that the cutting tool
    can be moved in any direction within a plane by the cumulative action of
    the first and second guideways.

    (1)     Note.  The straight line movement of this definition is in addition
    to movement of the cutting tool about an axis and along that axis for
    presentation to the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCALSS:

    109,    for use of a cross-slide tool carrier  in a duplicating machine,
    generally.


CLS 409/108
TXT Including plural cutters:

    Apparatus under subclass 93 including a first cutting tool adapted to
    perform a shaping operation and including a second cutting tool adapted to
    perform a shaping operation, wherein the first and second cutting tools are
    relatively movable as assembled in the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  A first cutting bit and a second cutting bit mounted on the
    same cutting tool holder are considered to be two edges of the same cutting
    tool rather than plural cutters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     for plural milling cutters supported by a pantograph cutter-carrier.


CLS 409/109
TXT Including cross-slide tool carrier:
    Apparatus under subclass 93 including a first guideway for supporting the
    rotating cutting tool allowing that cutting tool to move in a first
    straight line thereon and including a second guideway for supporting the
    first guideway and allowing the first guideway to move in a second straight
    line normal to the first straight line, so that the cutting tool can be
    moved in any direction within a plane by the cumulative action of the first
    and second guideways.

    (1)     Note.  The straight line movement of this definition is in addition
    to movement of the cutting tool about an axis and along that axis for
    presentation to the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for use of a cross-slide tool carrier in a duplicating machine for
    operation without manual intervention.


CLS 409/110
TXT With means to support templet above or under work:

    Apparatus under subclass 93 with means to hold the pattern member and the
    workpiece against gravity and adjacent each other so that the pattern
    member is either directly above or directly below the workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97,     for similar structure in a machine for operation without manual
    intervention.


CLS 409/111
TXT With provision for circumferential relative movement of cutter and work:

    Apparatus under subclass 93 particularly adapted to shape a workpiece that
    is generally circular in cross section, wherein the cutting tool is
    supported for rotation about its axis and for relative arcuate translatory
    movement about the circumference of the workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for similar structure in combination with a duplicating machine for
    operation without manual intervention.

    112,    for similar structure in combination with a reproducing machine.

    122,    for similar structure for use in a machine using a replaceable
    information supply, which machine is intended to operate without manual
    intervention.

    123,    for similar structure for use in a machine using a replaceable
    information supply.


CLS 409/112
TXT With provision for circumferential relative movement of cutter and work:

    Apparatus under subclass 85 particularly adapted to shape a workpiece that
    is generally circular in cross section, wherein the cutting tool is
    supported for rotation about its axis and for relative arcuate translatory
    movement about the circumference of the workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for similar structure in combination with a duplicating machine for
    operation without manual intervention.

    111,    for similar structure in combination with a duplicating machine,
    generally.

    122,    for similar structure for use in a machine using a replaceable
    information supply, which machine is intended to operate without manual
    intervention.

    123,    for similar structure for use in a machine using a replaceable
    information supply.


CLS 409/113
TXT And means for operation without manual intervention:

    Apparatus under subclass 112 including provision to allow operation
    thereof, once started, to continue at least until completion of a
    prescribed operation, without any further input from an operative.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94,     for a duplicating machine for operation without manual intervention.

    116,    for a reproducing machine, generally, for operation without manual
    intervention.

    117,    for a milling machine with regulation by a replaceable information
    supply, generally, including means to permit operation without manual
    intervention.


CLS 409/114
TXT Including tracer adapted to trigger electrical or fluid energy:

    Apparatus under subclass 113 including means having a follower adapted to
    ride over the form of the pattern member, which means is adapted to be
    connected to (a) a supply of electricity to regulate the flow of the
    electricity or to (b) a supply of gas or liquid so as to regulate the flow
    of that gas or liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98,     for a tracer adapted to trigger electrical energy in a duplicating,
    milling means adapted to operate without manual intervention.

    101,    for a tracer adapted to trigger fluid energy in a duplicating,
    milling means adapted to operate without manual intervention.

    127,    for a tracer, per se, for a milling machine, adapted to trigger
    electrical energy.

    129,    for a tracer, per se, for a milling machine, adapted to trigger
    fluid energy.

    290,    for a tracer adapted to trigger electrical or fluid energy in a
    planing means adapted to operate by regulation from a replaceable
    information supply.


CLS 409/115
TXT For using planar templet in cutting profile (e.g., contour map from planar
    map, etc.): Apparatus under subclass 85 adapted to utilize a generally
    two-dimensional pattern member on which there are a plurality of forms
    wherein the apparatus is adapted to utilize a first form to guide the
    cutting tool to shape at a location on the workpiece and is adapted to
    utilize a second form to guide the cutting tool to shape at a depth in the
    workpiece, so that the final result of the workpiece is a three-dimensional
    figure.


CLS 409/116
TXT Including means for operation without manual intervention:

    Apparatus under subclass 85 including provision to allow operation thereof,
    once started, to continue at least until completion of a prescribed
    operation, without any further input from an operative.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94,     for a duplicating machine for operation without manual intervention.

    113,    for a reproducing machine with provision for circumferential
    movement with respect to the workpiece adapted to operate without manual
    intervention.

    117,    for a milling machine with regulation by a replaceable information
    supply, generally, including means to permit operation without manual
    intervention.


CLS 409/117
TXT Including means for operation without manual intervention:

    Apparatus under subclass 79 including provision to allow operation thereof,
    once started, to continue at least until completion of a prescribed
    operation, without any further input from an operative.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94,     for a duplicating machine for operation without manual intervention.

    113,    for a reproducing machine with provision for circumferential
    movement of the cutter with respect to the workpiece adapted to operate
    without manual intervention.

    116,    for a reproducing machine, generally, for operation without manual
    intervention.


CLS 409/118
TXT Including simultaneously usable plural tracers or including tracer adapted
    to simultaneously use plural templets: Apparatus under subclass 117
    including either (a) multiple followers adapted to ride over the form of
    the pattern member or (b) provision to use multiple pattern members,
    wherein the cutting tool is caused to move relative to the workpiece and
    yield a product that is the result of neither a follower nor a pattern
    member individually, but is the result of two followers or of two pattern
    members collectively.


CLS 409/119
TXT To make a double curvature foil:

    Apparatus under subclass 118 particularly adapted to form an elongated
    member having an upper smoothly formed surface and a lower smoothly formed
    surface wherein provision is made to establish that the curvature of the
    formed surfaces be related, but different, and not allochiral.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is formation of an aircraft wing, the
    propeller for an air or water vessel, or a turbine blade.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95,     for apparatus to mill a double curvature foil by duplicating.

    120,    for apparatus to mill a double curvature foil without plural
    tracers or plural templets, and without duplicating.


CLS 409/120
TXT To make a double curvature foil:

    Apparatus under subclass 117 particularly adapted to form an elongated
    member having an upper formed surface and a lower formed surface wherein
    provision is made to establish that the curvature of the formed surfaces be
    related, but different, and not allochiral.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is formation of an aircraft wing, the
    propeller for an air or water vessel, or a turbine blade.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95,     for apparatus to mill a double curvature foil by duplicating.

    119,    for apparatus to mill a double curvature foil utilizing plural
    tracers or plural templets, without duplicating.


CLS 409/121
TXT Including cutter and tracer fixed to move together:

    Apparatus under subclass 117 including a follower adapted to ride over the
    form of the pattern member, which follower is secured to structure carrying
    the rotating cutting tool so that any movement of the follower is
    accompanied by corresponding equal movement of the cutting tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124,    for a similar cutter and tracer fixed to move together but not in a
    machine for operation without manual intervention.


CLS 409/122
TXT With provision for circumferential relative movement of cutter and work:

    Apparatus under subclass 117 particularly adapted to shape a workpiece that
    is generally circular in cross section, wherein the cutting tool is
    supported for rotation about its axis and for relative arcuate translatory
    movement about the circumference of the workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for similar structure in combination with a duplicating machine for
    operation without manual intervention.

    111,    for similar structure in combination with a duplicating machine,
    generally.

    112,    for similar structure in combination with a reproducing machine.

    123,    for similar structure for use in a machine using a replaceable
    information supply.


CLS 409/123
TXT And provision for circumferential relative movement of cutter and work:

    Apparatus under subclass 79 particularly adapted to shape a workpiece that
    is generally circular in cross section, wherein the cutting tool is
    supported for rotation about its axis and for relative arcuate translatory
    movement about the circumference of the workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for similar structure in combination with a duplicating machine for
    operation without manual intervention.

    111,    for similar structure in combination with a duplicating machine,
    generally.

    112,    for similar structure in combination with a reproducing machine.

    122,    for similar structure for use in a machine using a replaceable
    information supply, which machine is intended to operate without manual
    intervention.


CLS 409/124
TXT Including cutter and tracer fixed to move together:

    Apparatus under subclass 79 including a follower adapted to ride over the
    form of the pattern member which follower is secured to the structure
    carrying the rotating cutting tool so that any movement of the follower is
    accompanied by corresponding equal movement of the cutting tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121,    for a similar cutter and tracer fixed to move together but in a
    machine for operation without manual intervention.


CLS 409/125
TXT Templet, tracer, or cutter:
    Subcombinational apparatus or method under subclass 64 comprising (a)
    pattern means or the use of pattern means that is separate from the
    workpiece and is separate from a milling machine, which pattern means is to
    be used to determine the operation of the milling machine; (b) a follower
    or the use of a follower to ride over the form of a pattern and thereby
    determine the operation of a milling machine; or (c) a cutting tool or the
    use of such a cutting tool adapted to shape the surface of the workpiece,
    wherein the subcombinational structure includes sufficient
    interrelationship to a milling machine as to exclude the apparatus or
    method from any class limited to the subcombination.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    234,    Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), subclass 89 for a pattern or
    pattern sensor usable with a pattern controlled selective cutting machine.

    407,    Cutters, for Shaping, for a cutting tool, per se, with limited
    features so as to be distinct from a milling machine.


CLS 409/126
TXT Tracer:

    Subcombinational apparatus or method under subclass 125 comprising a
    follower or the use of a follower to ride over the form of a pattern and
    thereby determine the operation of a milling machine, including sufficient
    interrelationship to a milling machine as to exclude the apparatus or
    method from any class limited to the subcombination.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     for a combined machine or process of milling including use of a
    templet.


CLS 409/127
TXT Adapted to trigger electrical energy:
    Subcombinational apparatus or method under subclass 126 in which the
    follower is adapted to be connected to a supply of electricity so as to
    regulate the flow of that electricity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98      and 101, for a tracer adapted to trigger electrical energy combined
    with a duplicating machine.

    114,    for a tracer adapted to trigger electrical energy combined with a
    reproducing machine.


CLS 409/128
TXT Photocell:

    Subcombinational apparatus or method under subclass 127 wherein the control
    of electricity is done in response to the degree of illumination.


CLS 409/129
TXT Adapted to trigger fluid energy:
    Subcombinational apparatus or method under subclass 126 in which the
    follower is adapted to be connected to a supply of gas or liquid so as to
    regulate the flow of that gas or liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    for a tracer adapted to trigger fluid energy in combination with a
    duplicating machine.

    114,    for a tracer adapted to trigger fluid energy in combination with a
    reproducing machine.


CLS 409/130
TXT Templet:

    Subcombinational apparatus or method under subclass 125 comprising pattern
    means or the use of pattern means that is separate from the workpiece and
    is separate from a milling machine and is to be used to determine the
    operation of the milling machine, including sufficient interrelationship to
    the milling machine as to exclude the apparatus or method from any class
    limited to the subcombination.


CLS 409/131
TXT Process:

    Method of milling under subclass 64.


CLS 409/132
TXT Including infeeding:

    Method under subclass 131 including causing relative translatory movement
    of a milling tool and a workpiece to effect the shaping operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145,    for a milling means including provision to infeed the workpiece.

    183,    for a milling means including provision to infeed the cutting tool.


CLS 409/133
TXT With means to weigh or test work or product:

    Apparatus under subclass 64 combined with means to measure the
    gravitational attraction of the workpiece or of the shaped article, or
    combined with means to determine another condition of the workpiece or of
    the shaped article.


CLS 409/134
TXT With means to protect operative or machine (e.g., guard, safety device,
    etc.): Apparatus under subclass 64 combined with means intended to
    physically prevent encounter of a man operating the apparatus or of an
    element of the apparatus with an undesirable particle or unsafe condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254,    for similar structure used in broaching.


CLS 409/135
TXT With means to control temperature or lubricate:

    Apparatus under subclass 64 combined with means intended to regulate the
    thermal condition of the apparatus or of the workpiece, or combined with
    means to apply a friction reducing fluent material to the apparatus or to
    the workpiece.


CLS 409/136
TXT Cutter or work:

    Apparatus under subclass 135 particularly adapted to regulate the thermal
    condition of the cutting tool or of the workpiece, or particularly adapted
    to apply a lubricating material to the cutting edge of the cutting tool or
    to the workpiece.


CLS 409/137
TXT With means to remove chip:

    Apparatus under subclass 64 combined with means adapted to move relative to
    the cutting tool to carry nonshaped material removed from the shaped
    material away from the milling station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    253,    for a broaching machine combined with means to remove chips formed
    thereby.


CLS 409/138
TXT Means to trim edge:

    Apparatus under subclass 64 particularly adapted to remove material from
    the perimeter bounding a generally planar area of a workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is an apparatus adapted to cut the
    edge portion of a workpiece into chips.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    303,    for a planing machine intended to trim the edge of a workpiece.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, for subdividing the edge portion from the remainder of a
    workpiece, particularly subclass 869, for edge trimming, e.g., bevelling,
    without specific shaping of the formed edge.


CLS 409/139
TXT Means to remove scale or raised surface imperfection:

    Apparatus under subclass 64 particularly adapted to remove a coating off a
    workpiece or particularly adapted to remove an undesirable, relatively
    small raised portion from the surface of a workpiece.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, for means to remove a
    coating off a workpiece by means other than a milling cutter.


CLS 409/140
TXT Means to remove flash or burr:

    Apparatus under subclass 139 particularly adapted to remove the extraneous
    material formed during a previous shaping, molding, or welding operation.

    (1)     Note.  Flash is the ridge formed at the abutment line of a pair of
    mold components or is formed by a weld line and is considered to be that
    portion of a product of the molding or welding operation that extends
    beyond the desired surface of the product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258,    for broaching apparatus to remove flash or burr.

    297,    for planing apparatus to remove flash or burr.


CLS 409/141
TXT With means to dampen vibration:

    Apparatus under subclass 64 including means to impart to the cutting tool a
    vibration characteristic that is different from that imparted by the
    reaction of the cutting tool and the workpiece such that the resultant
    vibration of the cutting tool is reduced, or including means specifically
    intended to absorb the energy of a vibrating cutting tool.


CLS 409/142
TXT Means to mill epitrochoidal shape:
    Apparatus under subclass 64 particularly adapted to form the shape on the
    workpiece that would be generated by a point fixed to a radius of a
    rotating, generating circle, which circle rolls without slipping over the
    surface of a fixed, base circle.

    (1)     Note.  The shapes formed by a milling machine of this subclass
    include that of the interior of the combustion chamber of a "Wankel" engine.


CLS 409/143
TXT Means for internal milling:

    Apparatus under subclass 64 particularly adapted to cutting on an inwardly
    facing surface of a generally enclosed or shell-like workpiece.


CLS 409/144
TXT With detachable or auxiliary cutter support to convert cutting action:

    Apparatus under subclass 64 including (a) means to hold the cutting tool
    against gravity and against the force of the shaping action, which means is
    adapted to be removed and repositioned to allow the cutting tool to be
    mounted to approach and engage the workpiece in a different manner, or
    including (b) a first means to hold the cutting tool against gravity and
    against the force of the shaping action and a second means to alternatively
    hold the cutting tool against gravity and against the force of a different
    shaping action.


CLS 409/145
TXT Including means to infeed work to cutter: Apparatus under subclass 64
    including a base upon which the apparatus is supported against gravity and
    including means to cause the workpiece to move relative to the axis of the
    cutting tool and relative to the base during a shaping stroke.

    (1)     Note.  "Infeed" is the relative approach of the cutting tool and
    the workpiece during a cutting stroke and is not intended to include the
    relative approach of these members at other times of the operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132,    for a milling method including infeeding.


CLS 409/146
TXT With compensation for backlash in drive means:

    Apparatus under subcalss 145 including means for transmission of force to a
    workpiece or to a cutting tool wherein a first drive member transmits force
    and movement to a second drive member, including provision to adjust,
    eliminate, or make other allowance for any undesired relative movement
    between the drive members and the workpiece or the cutting tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for compensation for backlash in the drive means of a gear cutting
    machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 409 for means to eliminate
    backlash in an element of a gear train; and subclasses 440+ for means to
    eliminate backlash in sectional gears.


CLS 409/147
TXT With control means energized in response to activator stimulated by
    condition sensor: Apparatus under subclass 145 including means for:

    (a)     detecting any of the following characteristics:  a state or
    property, a change in a state or property, or the occurrence of a
    predetermined event in any of the following:  the workpiece, the product of
    the apparatus, the apparatus itself, or the environment of the apparatus
    affecting the operation thereof; and

    (b)     initiating (as a direct result of that detection) a signal other
    than that generated or transmitted by the detecting means; and

    (c)     regulating or modifying (as a direct result of said initiation) the
    operation of the means to affect the cutting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for control means combined with a gear hobbing machine.

    186,    for control means combined with a milling machine having axial
    cutter infeed.

    193,    for control means combined with a milling machine having cutter
    infeed, generally.

    207,    for control means combined with a milling machine having means to
    adjustably position the cutter.

    245,    for control means combined with a broaching machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclass 8 for
    similar structure for regulating the operation of a machine of that class
    type.


CLS 409/148
TXT In response to cutter or cutter carriage:
    Apparatus under subclass 147 including means for detecting the
    characteristics of the cutting tool or structure supporting the cutting
    tool for movement, initiating as a result of that detection a signal and
    thereby regulating the operation of the apparatus.


CLS 409/149
TXT In response to work or work carriage:
    Apparatus under subclass 147 including means for detecting the
    characteristics of the workpiece or structure supporting the workpiece for
    movement, initiating as a result of that detection a signal and thereby
    regulating the operation of the apparatus.


CLS 409/150
TXT To control rate of infeed or return:
    Apparatus under subclass 149 including means to regulate the velocity of
    the workpiece as it moves relative to the cutting tool during the shaping
    stroke, or the velocity of the workpiece on the stroke back to the
    beginning point, in response to the sensed condition.


CLS 409/151
TXT To control limit of infeed:

    Apparatus under subclass 149 including means to establish the starting
    point, or the ending point of the cutting stroke, in response to the sensed
    condition.


CLS 409/152
TXT Adapted to hydraulically or pneumatically stimulate control:

    Apparatus under subclass 151 wherein the means for regulating the operation
    receives the initiating impulse from the transmission of fluid pressure.


CLS 409/153
TXT Adapted to electrically stimulate control:
    Apparatus under subclass 151 wherein the means for regulating the operation
    receives the initiating impulse from the transmission of electrical energy.


CLS 409/154
TXT To control rate of infeed or return:
    Apparatus under subclass 147 including means to regulate the velocity of
    movement of the cutting tool toward the workpiece during the cutting
    stroke, or the velocity of the cutting tool on the stroke back to the
    beginning point for the next cutting stroke, in response to the sensed
    condition.


CLS 409/155
TXT To effect stopping of infeed:

    Apparatus under subclass 147 in which means are provided to bring the means
    to infeed the workpiece to a halt.

    (1)     Note.  Means to cause the infeed means to reverse directions is not
    considered to halt the infeed means.


CLS 409/156
TXT With means to change rate of infeed:
    Apparatus under subclass 145 with specific provision to alter the speed of
    relative approach of the workpiece and the cutting tool during the shaping
    stroke.


CLS 409/157
TXT Means to mill indeterminate length work: Apparatus under subclass 145
    particularly adapted to shape a workpiece that is effectively infinite in
    length.

    (1)     Note.  The infeed means of this subclass engages the workpiece at
    the sides thereof, at the leading end, or at the trailing end, but, in no
    instance recognizes (i.e, engages) both ends of a single workpiece.  A
    workpiece formed in a closed loop intended to turn through a milling
    apparatus is considered to be of indeterminate length for this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Work infeed means for this subclass are those in the
    immediate area of the cutting tool; similar structure remote from the
    cutting tool is considered to be work advancing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, for similar work
    handling structure without a milling means.


CLS 409/158
TXT Multiple work station:

    Apparatus under subclass 145 including a first rotating cutting tool at a
    first location to form a shaped surface on a workpiece and including a
    second rotating cutting tool at a second location to form a shaped surface
    on a workpiece.


CLS 409/159
TXT With means to advance work or product: Apparatus under subclass 145
    including a work station and including means to move a workpiece to that
    station or including means to move the product that has been shaped at the
    work station away from that station.

    (1)     Note.  Means to transfer material from one work station to another
    work station is considered to be proper for this subclass since the
    material is the product of the first station and is the work of the second
    station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for gear cutting combined with work or product advancing.

    72,     for thread or helix milling means combined with work or product
    advancing means.

    172+,   for a milling machine, broadly, combined with means to advance work
    or product.

    174,    for a milling machine, broadly, combined with means to manipulate
    the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    82,     Turning, subclasses 124+ for a lathe with work feeding and/or
    removing mechanism.

    221,    Article Dispensing, for a method of or apparatus for dispensing or
    feeding an article not otherwise classified; and especially subclasses 239
    and 294 for an article dispenser or feeder delivering to a clamp or
    hold-down. See the class definition of Class 221 for a statement of the
    lines between the classes and for the disposition of other related art.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, for method of or
    apparatus for feeding material without utilizing the leading or trailing
    end to effect movement of the material.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, for work advancing, including single
    or multiple, nominal shaping operations. Generally, work handling to
    present a workpiece to a named shaping means will be found in Class 414.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, subclasses 164+ for a miscellaneous machine for feeding nail
    blanks, screw blanks, nut blanks, nail plates, or other stock specialized
    to performing the various steps in the manufacture of an article of that
    class.


CLS 409/160
TXT Vertically:

    Apparatus under subclass 159 including a base adapted to support the means
    for guiding or transporting the workpiece or the product against gravity,
    wherein the guiding or transporting means is adapted to direct the
    workpiece or product to move in a direction either up or down.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172,    for a milling machine combined with vertically acting work or
    product advancing means, generally.


CLS 409/161
TXT Endless or orbital work or product advancing means:

    Apparatus under subclass 159 comprising transport means including a surface
    adapted to carry a workpiece, which transport means is constructed of a
    flaccid, pliant belt or of a series of chainlike links and is adapted to
    move in a closed loop in a manner to carry the workpiece toward or away
    from the cutting station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173,    for a milling machine combined with an endless or orbital work
    carrier generally.


CLS 409/162
TXT To reciprocate or oscillate work:

    Apparatus under subclass 145 wherein the means to move the workpiece to
    effect the shaping stroke is also intended to cyclically return with the
    workpiece generally along the path of the shaping stroke to the starting
    point.

    (1)     Note.  The return movement of the workpiece may also be a shaping
    stroke.


CLS 409/163
TXT With work holder:

    Apparatus under subclass 145 combined with means to support the workpiece
    against the force of gravity and/or against the force of the cutting tool
    during the shaping stroke.


CLS 409/164
TXT And means to selectively position work:
    Apparatus under subclass 163 combined with means to shift the position of
    the workpiece from one predetermined position to another predetermined
    position between shaping strokes, to allow the cutting tool to engage a
    different portion of the workpiece on a subsequent shaping stroke.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174,    for a milling machine with means to reposition the workpiece,
    generally.


CLS 409/165
TXT Including means to support work for rotation during operation:

    Apparatus under subclass 163 wherein the structure for moving the workpiece
    toward the cutting tool to effect shaping of the workpiece is provided with
    means to hold that workpiece against gravity and against the force of the
    tool while allowing the workpiece to turn continuously about an axis when
    presented to be shaped by the rotating cutting tool.

    (1)     Note.  Rotation of the work support to cause the periphery of the
    workpiece to move past the cutting tool is considered to be "infeed" for
    this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    82,     Turning, for similar work supporting and rotating means combined
    with a nonrotary cutter.


CLS 409/166
TXT And including means to infeed cutter toward work axis:

    Apparatus under subclass 165 including structure to cause the rotating
    cutting tool to be displaced toward the axis about which the workpiece
    turns to effect the cutting action.

    (1)     Note.  Cutting may be effected by both the rotation of the
    workpiece and by the infeed of the cutting tool.


CLS 409/167
TXT With linear axial movement of work:
    Apparatus under subclass 165 wherein the work supporting structure is also
    intended to carry the workpiece axis.


CLS 409/168
TXT With angular movement of work:

    Apparatus under subclass 165 wherein the support structure is mounted to be
    pivoted from the first to a second position about an axis which is other
    than parallel to the workpiece axis to change the position of the workpiece
    for different presentation to the cutting tool.


CLS 409/169
TXT Including friction gearing drive:

    Apparatus under subclass 145 wherein the means to cause the workpiece to
    move toward the cutting tool during the shaping stroke includes a rotary
    driving member having a generally smooth circular or annular surface and a
    rotary driven member having a generally smooth circular or annular surface
    adapted to rollingly engage the corresponding surface of the driving
    member, whereby moving force is transmitted to the workpiece.


CLS 409/170
TXT Including fluid drive:

    Apparatus under subclass 145 wherein the means to cause the workpiece to
    move toward the cutting tool during the shaping stroke includes means
    adapted to be impelled by the force of flowing liquid or gas acting
    thereupon, whereby moving force is tranmitted to the workpiece.


CLS 409/171
TXT With means to effect stopping upon completion of operation:

    Apparatus under subclass 64 in which means is provided which is intended to
    bring movement of the apparatus to a halt upon completion of the shaping
    operation.

    (1)     Note.  All movement of the apparatus need not stop for
    classification in this subclass, only so much as is necessary to terminate
    shaping of the workpiece.


CLS 409/172
TXT With means to advance work or product: Apparatus under subclass 64
    including a work station and including means to move a workpiece to that
    station or including means to move the product that has been shaped at the
    work station away from that station.

    (1)     Note.  Means to transfer material from one work station to another
    work station is considered to be proper for this subclass since the
    material is the product of the first station and is the work of the second
    station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for gear cutting combined with work or product advancing.

    72,     for thread or helix milling means combined with work or product
    advancing means.

    159+,   for a milling machine including means to infeed the work to the
    cutter and with means to advance the work or the product.

    174,    for a milling machine, broadly, combined with means to manipulate
    the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    82,     Turning, subclasses 124+ for a lathe with work feeding and/or
    removing mechanism.

    221,    Article Dispensing, for a method of or apparatus for dispensing or
    feeding an article not otherwise classified; and especially subclasses 239
    and 294 for an article dispenser or feeder delivering to a clamp or
    hold-down. See the class definition of Class 221 for a statement of the
    lines between the classes and for the disposition of other related art.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, for a method of or
    apparatus for feeding material without utilizing the leading or trailing
    end to effect movement of the material.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, for work advancing, including single
    or multiple, nominal shaping operations. Generally, work handling to
    present a workpiece to a named shaping means will be found in Class 414.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, subclasses 164+ for a miscellaneous machine for feeding nail
    blanks, screw blanks, nut blanks, nail plates, or other stock specialized
    to performing the various steps in the manufacture of an article of that
    class.

    901,    Robots, subcollection 6+ for a robot which cooperates with another
    machine.


CLS 409/173
TXT Endless or orbital work or product advancing means:

    Apparatus under subclass 172 comprising transport means including a surface
    adapted to carry a workpiece, which transport means is constructed of a
    flaccid, pliant belt or a series of chainlike links and is adapted to move
    in a closed loop in a manner to carry the workpiece toward or away from the
    cutting station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161,    for a milling machine with an endless or orbital work carrier and
    with work infeed means.


CLS 409/174
TXT With means to precisely reposition work:
    Apparatus under subclass 64 combined with means to move the workpiece from
    a first position to a second exact position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164,    for a milling machine including an infeed means and including means
    to index the workpiece from one predetermined position to another between
    shaping strokes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    82,     Turning, subclasses 124+ for a lathe with work feeding and/or
    removing mechanism.

    221,    Article Dispensing, for a method of or apparatus for dispensing or
    feeding an article not otherwise classified; and especially subclasses 239
    and 294 for an article dispenser or feeder delivering to a clamp or
    hold-down. See the class definition of Class 221 for a statement of the
    lines between the classes and for the disposition of other related art.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, for a method of or
    apparatus for feeding material without utilizing the leading or trailing
    end to effect movement of the material.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, for work advancing, including single
    or multiple, nominal shaping operations. Generally, work handling to
    present a workpiece to a named shaping means will be found in Class 414.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, subclasses 164+ for a miscellaneous machine for feeding nail
    blanks, screw blanks, nut blanks, nail plates, or other stock specialized
    to performing the various steps in the manufacture of an article of that
    class.


CLS 409/175
TXT Randomly manipulated, work supported, or work following device:

    Apparatus under subclass 64 comprising:



    (a)     a cutting device which is capable of movement in a path
    instantaneously under the control of the operative during cutting,
    including a cutting device suspended or supported near the workpiece;

    (b)     a cutting device which as an entirety is disclosed as deriving from
    the work a substantial amount of its support against gravity during
    cutting, or

    (c)     a cutting device which is intended to move across the workpiece in
    a direction dictated by conditions of the workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  A cutting device mounted at one end of a flexible shaft
    whose other end is anchored to a table, or a cutting device mounted on a
    steerable vehicle is included under clause (a) of this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    296,    for similar structure used in planing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, for a randomly manipulated, work supported, or following
    cutting device generally.


CLS 409/176
TXT For machining commutator:

    Apparatus under subclass 175 particularly adapted to be used in shaping the
    surface of a segmented annular member to be utilized in an electromotive
    device to transfer electrical current from a stationary part to a rotary
    part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302,    for a planing device for machining a commutator.


CLS 409/177
TXT For cutting longitudinal groove in shaft (e.g., keyway, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 175 particularly adapted to cut a rod or rodlike
    workpiece that is generally elongated and circular in cross-section about a
    central axis, wherein the cutting tool is adapted to form a recess in the
    surface of the workpiece extending generally along the central axis.


CLS 409/178
TXT With work supported guide means:

    Apparatus under subclass 175 combined with means adapted to rest on the
    workpiece, which means includes a surface intended to direct the movement
    of the cutting tool when making the cutting stroke by engagement of the
    cutting tool supporting structure with the directing surface.


CLS 409/179
TXT To guide tool to move in arcuate path:
    Apparatus under subclass 178 particularly adapted to direct the movement of
    the cutting tool to be in a curved route during the stroke.


CLS 409/180
TXT With work follower:

    Apparatus under subclass 175 comprising a cutting device which is intended
    to move across the workpiece in a direction dictated by conditions of the
    workpiece.


CLS 409/181
TXT Randomly manipulated:

    Apparatus under subclass 175 comprising a cutting device which is capable
    of movement in a path instantaneously under the control of the operative
    during the cutting stroke, including a cutting device suspended or
    supported near the workpiece.


CLS 409/182
TXT End mill (e.g., router, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 181 including structure to support and rotate the
    cutting tool about an axis such that that axis passes through the
    workpiece, wherein no portion of the supporting structure engages the
    cutting tool axially beyond the work engaging (cutting edge) portion
    thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 134 and 136 for similar structure
    particularly adapted to the shaping of wood.

    407,    Cutters, for Shaping, subclasses 53+ for a cutting tool to be used
    in the apparatus of this subclass.


CLS 409/183
TXT Including means to infeed rotary cutter toward work:

    Apparatus under subclass 64 including a base and structure to support the
    cutting tool for rotation about an axis and including means to carry the
    tool and its support and to move the cutting tool relative to the base and
    relative to the workpiece to thereby effect the shaping stroke.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132,    for a milling method including infeeding.


CLS 409/184
TXT With means to limit penetration into work: Apparatus under subclass 183
    including means specifically intended to be used to physically restrict the
    depth of cut by the tool into the workpiece.


CLS 409/185
TXT Axially:

    Apparatus under subclass 183 comprising means to move the cutting tool and
    its support in the direction parallel to the axis of the cutting tool with
    respect to the base and the workpiece.


CLS 409/186
TXT With infeed control means energized in response to activator stimulated by
    condition sensor:

    Apparatus under subclass 185 including means for:



    (a)     detecting any of the following characteristics:  a state or
    property, a change in a state or property, or the occurrence of a
    predetermined event in any of the following; the workpiece, the product of
    the apparatus, the apparatus itself, or the environment of the apparatus
    affecting the operation thereof; and

    (b)     initiating (as a direct result of that detection) a signal other
    than that generated or transmitted by the detecting means; and

    (c)     regulating or modifying (as a direct result of said initiation) the
    operation of the means to affect the cutting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for similar control means combined with a gear hobbing machine.

    147,    for similar control means combined with work infeed in a milling
    machine.

    193,    for similar control means combined with nonaxial tool infeed in a
    milling machine.

    245,    for similar control means combined with a broaching machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclass 8 for
    similar structure for regulating the operation of a machine of that class
    type.


CLS 409/187
TXT In response to cutter condition:

    Apparatus under subclass 186 including means for detecting any of the
    following characteristics; a state or property, a change in a state or
    property, or the occurrence of a predetermined event in the cutting tool.


CLS 409/188
TXT In response to work condition:

    Apparatus under subclass 186 including means for detecting any of the
    following characteristics:  a state or property, a change in a state or
    property, or the occurrence of a predetermined event in the workpiece.


CLS 409/189
TXT With work holder:

    Apparatus under subclass 185 with means to support the workpiece against
    the force of gravity or against the force of the cutting tool during the
    shaping stroke.


CLS 409/190
TXT And laterally:

    Apparatus under subclass 185 wherein the means to move the cutting tool and
    its support in the direction parallel to the axis of the cutting tool also
    serves to move the cutting tool and its support in the direction normal to
    the axis of the cutting tool.


CLS 409/191
TXT Simultaneously:

    Apparatus under subclass 190 wherein the means to carry the cutting tool
    and its support moves in both the direction parallel to the tool axis in
    the direction normal to the tool axis at the same time, so that the
    resultant cutting tool movement during the shaping stroke is diagonal with
    respect to the cutting axis.


CLS 409/192
TXT Plural cutters:

    Apparatus under subclass 185 including a first cutting tool adapted to
    perform a shaping operation and including a second cutting tool adapted to
    perform a shaping operation, wherein the first and second cutting tools are
    relatively movable as assembled in the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  A first cutting bit and second cutting bit mounted in the
    same cutting tool holder are considered to be two edges of the same cutting
    tool rather than plural cutters.


CLS 409/193
TXT With infeed control means energized in response to activator stimulated by
    condition sensor:

    Apparatus under subclass 183 including means for:



    (a)     detecting any of the following characteristics:  a state or
    property, a change in a state or property, or the occurrence of a
    predetermined event in any of the following:  the workpiece, the product of
    the apparatus, the apparatus itself, or the environment of the apparatus
    affecting the operation thereof; and

    (b)     initiating (as a direct result of that detection) a signal other
    than that generated or transmitted by the detecting means; and

    (c)     regulating or modifying (as a direct result of said initiation) the
    operation of the means to affect the cutting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for control means combined with a gear hobbing machine.

    147,    for control means combined with work infeed in a milling machine.

    186,    for control means combined with axial tool infeed in a milling
    machine.

    245,    for control means combined with a broaching machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclass 8 for
    similar structure for regulating the operation of a machine of that class
    type.


CLS 409/194
TXT In response to cutter condition:

    Apparatus under subclass 193 including means for detecting any of the
    following characteristics:  a state or property, a change in a state or
    property, or the occurrence of a predetermined event in the cutting tool.


CLS 409/195
TXT In response to work condition:

    Apparatus under subclass 193 including means for detecting any of the
    following characteristics:  a state or property, a change in a state or
    property, or the occurrence of a predetermined event in the workpiece.


CLS 409/196
TXT With means to change rate of infeed:
    Apparatus under subclass 183 including means to selectively cause the
    shaping operation to occur at a first rate or at a second different rate.

    (1)     Note.  In the device of this subclass, the rate of cutter infeed
    may be changed during the cutting stroke or between cutting strokes.

    (2)     Note.  An idle return stroke is not considered to be part of the
    cutting stroke.


CLS 409/197
TXT With work holder:

    Apparatus under subclass 183 combined with means to support the workpiece
    against the force of gravity or against the force of the cutting tool
    during the shaping stroke.


CLS 409/198
TXT Indexable:

    Apparatus under subclass 197 including work supporting structure adapted to
    be fixed in a first definite position and adapted to be fixed in a second
    definite position to present the workpiece differently to the cutting tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221,    for similar structure without means to infeed a rotary cutter
    toward the work.


CLS 409/199
TXT Machining arcuate surface:

    Apparatus under subclass 183 wherein the movement of the cutting tool with
    respect to the workpiece is such as to give the workpiece a curved surface.

    (1)     Note.  To be proper for this subclass, the device must bring about
    the arcuate characteristics to the workpiece by relative movement of the
    work and cutting tool rather than by the arcuate shape of the cutting tool.


CLS 409/200
TXT With means to move cutter eccentrically:
    Apparatus under subclass 199 with means to support the cutting tool for
    rotation and means to move the cutting tool on the support about a second
    axis that is generally parallel to, but offset from, the cutter axis.


CLS 409/201
TXT Angularly adjustable cutter head:

    Apparatus under subclass 183 including structure adapted to support the
    cutting tool, which support structure is mounted on other structure in such
    a way that it can be pivotably repositioned thereon.


CLS 409/202
TXT Including gantry-type cutter-carrier:
    Apparatus under subclass 183 including an armlike structure and including a
    carriage adapted to rotatably support the cutting tool and be translated
    along the armlike structure to carry the cutting tool over the top of the
    workpiece and to thereby effect the shaping operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212,    for a gantry-type cutter-carrier used with a work infeed means.


CLS 409/203
TXT Plural cutters:

    Apparatus under subclass 183 including a first cutting tool adapted to
    perform a shaping operation and including a second cutting tool adapted to
    perform a shaping operation, wherein the first and second cutting tools are
    relatively movable as assembled in the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  A first cutting bit and a second cutting bit mounted in the
    same cutting tool holder are considered to be two edges of the same cutting
    tool rather than plural cutters.


CLS 409/204
TXT Including means to adjustably position cutter:

    Apparatus under subclass 64 including a base, including means to
    rotatatably support the cutting tool in a first position for presentation
    to the workpiece, and including provision to allow movement of the cutting
    tool and its support from the first position to a second position for
    different presentation to the workpiece.


CLS 409/205
TXT With work holder or guide:

    Apparatus under subclass 204 combined with means to support the workpiece
    against the force of gravity or against the force of the cutting tool
    during the shaping operation, or combined with passive means to physically
    limit movement of the workpiece to be along a prescribed path.


CLS 409/206
TXT Linear adjustment:

    Apparatus under subclass 204 wherein the support for the cutting tool is
    such that the cutting tool can be moved to at least three separate
    positions for presentation of the cutting tool to the workpiece, wherein
    the three positions are in a straight line.


CLS 409/207
TXT With control for adjustment means responsive to activator stimulated by
    condition sensor:

    Apparatus under subclass 206 including means for:



    (a)     detecting any of the following characteristics:  a state or
    property, a change in a state or property, or the occurrence of a
    predetermined event in any of the following:  the workpiece, the product of
    the apparatus, the apparatus itself, or the environment of the apparatus
    affecting the operation thereof; and

    (b)     initiating (as a direct result of that detection) a signal other
    than that generated or transmitted by the detecting means; and

    (c)     regulating or modifying (as a direct result of said initiation) the
    operation of the adjustment means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for control means combined with gear hobbing machine.

    147,    for control means combined with milling machine having work infeed.

    186,    for control means combined with a milling machine having axial
    cutter infeed.

    193,    for control means combined with a milling machine having cutter
    infeed, generally.

    245,    for control means combined with a broaching machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclass 8 for
    similar structure for regulating the operation of a machine of that class
    type.


CLS 409/208
TXT Responsive to position of cutter:

    Apparatus under subclass 207 including means for detecting the physical
    location of the cutting tool.


CLS 409/209
TXT And means to clamp cutter support in adjusted position:

    Apparatus under subclass 207 including structure to secure the means to
    movable means to rotatably support the cutting tool in a fixed position.


CLS 409/210
TXT With position indicator or limit means:
    Apparatus under subclass 206 including structure intended to designate to
    the operative the location of a portion of the apparatus, or including a
    repositionable device intended to physically abut the cutting tool or tool
    support structure and thereby restrict the location of the cutting tool in
    the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    214,    for similar structure with positioning of the cutter other than
    linearly.


CLS 409/211
TXT And angular adjustment:

    Apparatus under subclass 206 wherein the support for the cutting tool can
    be repositioned to present the cutting tool to the workpiece in at least
    three positions in a straight line and can be repositioned to present the
    cutting tool to the workpiece in a first position with the cutting tool
    turning about a first axis or selectively in a second position with the
    cutting tool turning about a second axis that is inclined (i.e., not
    parallel) to the first axis.


CLS 409/212
TXT Including gantry-type cutter-carrier:
    Apparatus under subclass 206 including an armlike structure and including a
    carriage adapted to rotatably support the cutting tool and be translated
    along the armlike structure to carry the cutting tool over the top of the
    workpiece and to thereby effect the shaping operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202,    for a gantry-type cutter-carrier used with a work infeed means.


CLS 409/213
TXT Plural cutters:

    Apparatus under subclass 206 including a first cutting tool adapted to
    perform a shaping operation, and including a second cutting tool adapted to
    perform a shaping operation, wherein the first and second cutting tools are
    relatively movable as assembled in the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  A first cutting bit and a second cutting bit mounted in the
    same cutting tool holder are considered to be two edges of the same cutting
    tool rather than plural cutters.


CLS 409/214
TXT With position indicator or limit means:
    Apparatus under subclass 204 including structure intended to designate to
    the operative the location of a portion of the apparatus, or including a
    repositionable device intended to physically abut the cutting tool or tool
    support structure and thereby restrict the location of the cutting tool in
    the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210,    for similar structure with linear positioning of the cutter.


CLS 409/215
TXT With right angle cutter device:

    Apparatus under subclass 204 including a first rotary shaft turning
    coaxially with the cutting tool to cause the cutting tool to turn and
    including a second rotary shaft adapted to engage the first rotary shaft
    and cause the first shaft to turn, wherein the second rotary shaft turns
    about an axis that is normal to the axis of the first rotary shaft.


CLS 409/216
TXT Compound angular adjustment:

    Apparatus under subclass 204 including means to allow movement of the
    cutting tool from a first to a second position about a first axis or to a
    third position about a second axis.


CLS 409/217
TXT Plural cutters:

    Apparatus under subclass 204 including a first cutting tool adapted to
    perform a shaping operation and including a second cutting tool adapted to
    perform a shaping operation, wherein the first and second cutting tools are
    relatively movable as assembled in the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  A first cutting bit and a second cutting bit mounted on the
    same cutting tool holder are considered to be two edges of the same cutting
    tool rather than plural cutters.


CLS 409/218
TXT With limit means to aid in positioning of cutter bit or work (e.g., gauge,
    stop, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 64 including a device intended to physically abut
    the cutting tool or tool support structure and thereby restrict the
    location of a portion of the cutting tool including the cutting edge or of
    the workpiece.


CLS 409/219
TXT Work support:

    Apparatus under subclass 64 including a device which, during a shaping
    operation, contacts a workpiece for the purpose of (a) supporting the
    workpiece against the force of gravity, (b) preventing movement of the
    workpiece in a particular direction or in all directions while such work is
    supported against the force of gravity, or (c) providing a surface
    juxtaposed to the workpiece for constraining the motion of the workpiece
    against the reaction of the cutting tool during the performance of a work
    shaping operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, for a work holder mount, per se.

    269,    Work Holders, for similar structure not combined wiht milling or
    not particularly adapted to use with a milling cutter.


CLS 409/220
TXT With position indicator or stop:

    Apparatus under subclass 219 including means to designate to the operative
    the location of the workpiece with respect to the apparatus or including
    means to abut the cutting tool or tool support structure and thereby
    prevent movement of the workpiece.


CLS 409/221
TXT Indexable:

    Apparatus under subclass 219 including work supporting structure adapted to
    be fixed in a first definite position and adapted to be fixed in a second
    definite position to present the work piece differently to the cutting tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     particularly subclass 61 for gear cutting which commonly includes
    indexing.

    198,    for indexing in a milling machine wherein the cutter is infed
    toward the work.

    224,    for a work support movable about an axis wherein holding positions
    are not definite, i.e., not predetermined.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 35.5+ for plural tool and/or plural work
    holding means provided with means to position the holding means.

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 19.1+ for a graduating scriber;
    and subclasses 501+ for a gauge to be used to establish desired angular
    position.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 813+ for an assembly with
    means to turn a shaft or rotatably mounted device about its axis to one or
    more selected loci including means to prevent or hold against rotation at
    such loci, and see (2) Note under subclass 813 for the line note.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 44+ and
    70+ for intermittently operating work advancing means to sequentially
    present work to a tool of that class type.


CLS 409/222
TXT Including dividing head:

    Apparatus under subclass 221 wherein the work supporting structure is
    supported to be pivoted about an axis from the first definite position to
    the second definite position, including an equally divided disk or cylinder
    (a) fixed to the work support so that movement of the work support is
    accompanied by a corresponding movement of the disk or cylinder relative to
    other structure, so that the divisions of the disk or cylinder serve to
    define the locations of the first and second positions of the work support
    or (b) fixed to nonpivoting structure such that the divisions of the disk
    or cylinder serve to define the locations of the first and second positions
    of the relatively movable work support.


CLS 409/223
TXT Multiple row dividing head:

    Apparatus under subclass 222 wherein the disk is divided differently at
    different distances from the axis thereof or the cylinder is divided
    differently at different axial positions therealong.


CLS 409/224
TXT With angular adjustment:

    Apparatus under subclass 219 including a work supporting structure adapted
    to be fixed in a first position and adapted to be turned to be fixed in a
    second position to present the workpiece differently to the cutting tool.


CLS 409/225
TXT With work holder or guide:

    Apparatus under subclass 219 including means to grippingly engage and
    immobilize the workpiece or including means to be slidingly engaged by the
    workpiece to direct movement of the workpiece therealong.


CLS 409/226
TXT Including cutter limited to rotary motion: Apparatus under subclass 225
    including a base on which the cutting tool is supported for rotation,
    wherein there is no relative movement, other than rotary, between the
    cutting tool and the base during the shaping operation.


CLS 409/227
TXT With means to adjust work support vertically:

    Apparatus under subclass 219 including a base to support the work
    supporting structure against gravity and including means to cause the work
    supporting to move relative to the base to thereby present the workpiece to
    the cutting tool differently.


CLS 409/228
TXT Including cutter limited to rotary motion: Apparatus under subclass 64
    including a base on which the cutting tool is supported for rotation,
    wherein there is no relative movement, other than rotary, between the
    cutting tool and the base during shaping.


CLS 409/229
TXT Cutter turning about vertical axis:
    Apparatus under subclass 228 wherein the cutting tool is supported for
    rotation about an axis extending up and down with respect to the base of
    the apparatus.


CLS 409/230
TXT Detachable or repositionable tool head:
    Apparatus under subclass 64 including a base and including means secured to
    the base to support the cutting tool for rotation, which means is adapted
    to either be readily removed from the base or be moved from one position to
    another with respect to the base.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    483,    Tool Changing, subclass 32 for a rotary spindle machine tool
    combined with means for transferring a tool head.


CLS 409/231
TXT Cutter spindle or spindle support:
    Apparatus under subclass 64 comprising means to support the cutting tool
    for rotation including a rotary shaft adapted to partake of all tool
    movement during the cutting operation; or comprising means to guidingly
    support such a rotary shaft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 91+ for bearing used for supporting a spindle.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, subclasses 179+ for a rotary torque transmitting shaft.


CLS 409/232
TXT With cutter holder:

    Apparatus under subclass 231 comprising structure including or engaging a
    cutting bit, which structure is intended to be fixedly secured to the
    cutting bit and to participate of all movement of the cutting edge during
    the cutting operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    234,    for a cutter holder without a spindle or spindle support.


CLS 409/233
TXT And draw bar:

    Apparatus under subclass 232 including means to fixedly secure the cutting
    bit to the supporting structure which is designed to be put in tension.


CLS 409/234
TXT With cutter holder:

    Apparatus under subclass 64 comprising structure including or engaging a
    cutting bit having a cutting edge, which structure is intended to be
    fixedly secured to the cutting bit and to participate of all movement of
    the cutting edge during the cutting operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232,    for a cutter holder with a spindle or spindle support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    407,    Cutters, for Shaping, subclasses 30+ for a cutting tool and/or
    cutting tool holder not including structure excluded from that class.
    (This subclass includes devices similar to those of Class 407, but
    including component parts of characteristics excluded from that class.)


CLS 409/235
TXT Machine frame:

    Apparatus under subclass 64 comprising structure supporting the weight of
    the cutting tool or the workpiece or for counteracting the thrust of the
    cutting tool, which structure is generally not in contact with the cutting
    tool or with the workpiece.


CLS 409/236
TXT Overarm harness structure:

    Apparatus under subclass 235 comprising structure for supporting a
    workpiece against gravity and including structure for cantilever support of
    the cutting tool above the workpiece which tool support includes an arm and
    a column connecting the arm to the work supporting structure.


CLS 409/237
TXT Including counterbalancing means:

    Apparatus under subclass 235 including means to counteract and lift against
    the weight of a portion of the apparatus, to cause movable structure to
    function as if lighter in weight.


CLS 409/238
TXT Including means to compensate for deformation:

    Apparatus under subclass 235 including provision to modify the appartus to
    overcome the strain of load on the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  Strain is mechanical deformation resulting from stress.


CLS 409/239
TXT Deflection of cutter spindle:

    Apparatus under subclass 238 including provision to modify the apparatus to
    overcome the strain of loading of the structure for supporting the cutting
    tool for rotation.


CLS 409/240
TXT Convertible from lathe:

    Apparatus under subclass 235 particularly adapted to be used as a machine
    frame for a milling machine or for a lathe, i.e., a machine in which the
    workpiece rotates and the cutting tool remains generally stationary.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    82,     Turning, for a lathe, generally.


CLS 409/241
TXT Including relatively movable components and means to relatively immobilize
    these components:

    Apparatus under subclass 235 wherein members thereof can be repositioned
    with respect to each other, including means to secure the otherwise movable
    members together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    343,    for similar frame and clamp structure for use as components of a
    planing machine.


CLS 409/242
TXT Tailstock:

    Apparatus under subclass 64 comprising passive means for supporting the
    workpiece for rotary presentation to a milling tool.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a tailstock with an angularly adjustable
    center, or other tailstocks particularly adapted to use with a milling
    machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    82,     Turning, subclass 148 for a lathe tailstock.


CLS 409/243
TXT BROACHING:

    Apparatus or method under the class definition (1) employing a multitoothed
    cutting tool characterized in that



    (a)     the functional edges of the tool teeth are so related to one
    another that the tip of one tooth extends further than that of an adjacent
    tooth from a datum line interior to the tool and paralleling the path of
    relative movement of tool and work (which extent is measured along the
    normal to such datum line through the tip); and

    (b)     the differences in such extent between adjacent teeth are
    progressive from tooth to tooth (or group of teeth to group of teeth) along
    such path of relative movement, resulting in a stair-step arrangement of
    teeth (or groups of teeth) along such path and relative to the datum line
    of reference; and (2) in whose operation or performance the teeth
    succesively engage the work in substantially overlying paths, each tooth
    removing a predetermined amount of material so that the work modification
    produced is congruent to the last acting tooth.

    (1)     Note.  Illustrative broach tools are shown in the accompanying
    drawings. (See accompanying drawings below).





    (2)     Note.  In the case of rotary tool motion, it will be noted that the
    normal to the datum line (referred to in the definition) is the radius
    extending through the tooth tip.

    (3)     Note.  As indicated by the parenthetical material in part (1,b) of
    the above definition, the progressive extent of differences between the
    tips (or outer cutting edges) and the datum line is intended to include a
    tool comprising a plurality of groups or units of several teeth each, the
    tooth elements of each group having the same extent from the datum line and
    extending further therefrom than the tooth elements of the next preceding
    group, so as to form a stair-step arrangement of such groups.

    (4)     Note.  A patent directed to a tool having a unit of tooth elements
    of uniform characteristic (such as described in (3) Note, above) but
    intended to perform another function (such as scraping or burnishing) will
    be found in the class relating to such other function(s).

    (5)     Note.  Included in this specific subclass, as at least a
    cross-reference copy, will be a patent claiming significant machine frame
    structure. Patents of this character are generally directed to
    adjustability of frame means for convertibility of the machine from or to a
    vertical or horizontal operation or for a push or pull operation, or to
    frame structure adapted to accentuate accessibility to machine parts, or to
    means for transferring broaching tool thrust to the machine bed.

    (6)     Note.  A patent wherein the work feed system imparts energy to the
    work support so as to absorb contemplated broach thrust will be found in
    subclass 269 below; an example of such will be a crank pin which positions
    a work table at the dead center position of such crank pin but wherein the
    drive force actuating the crank is above that necessary to obtain said dead
    center position.

    (7)     Note.  A single-edged cutter device for shaping work, though
    described as a broaching machine, is excluded from this and indented
    subclasses.  Such devices are classified in Class 409, Gear Cutting,
    Milling, or Planing, subclasses 288+ (for which see (1) Note thereunder)
    and Class 83, Cutting, subclasses 875+.

    (8)     Note.  A patent to apparatus for combined machining operations,
    including broaching, is generally found in Class 29, Metal Working,
    subclasses 33+, except in some instances where the combination is
    specifically provided for in the class schedule of the other (i.e.,
    nonbroaching) machining operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 90.01+ for a broacher combined with a
    burnisher where the former is intended only to allow the latter to perform
    its function; and subclasses 33+ for a combined machine which broaches and
    performs another metal working operation.

    83,     Cutting, the generic residual class of cutting.

    407,    Cutters, for Shaping, subclasses 12 and 13+ for a broaching tool,
    per se.


CLS 409/244
TXT Process:

    Method under subclass 243 including a step of broaching.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 592+ for a manufacturing process not
    otherwise provided for.


CLS 409/245
TXT With control means energized in response to activator stimulated by
    condition sensor: Apparatus under subclass 243 including means for:



    (a)     detecting any of the following characteristics:  a state or
    property, a change in a state or property, or the occurrence of a
    predetermined event in any of the following:  the workpiece, the product of
    the apparatus, the apparatus itself, or the environment of the apparatus
    affecting the operation thereof; and

    (b)     initiating (as a direct result of that detection) a signal other
    than that generated or transmitted by the detecting means; and

    (c)     regulating or modifying (as a direct result of said initiation) the
    operation of the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147,    for automatic control means combined with a milling machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, especially subclasses 58+ for cutting means combined with
    randomly acutated stopping means.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 663+ for similar control means
    applied to a coating device.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, for stopping means in general.


CLS 409/246
TXT Responsive to condition of work or product: Apparatus under subclass 245
    including means for detecting the characteristics of the workpiece or of
    the product of the broaching operation, initiating as a direct result of
    that detection a signal and thereby regulating the operation of the
    apparatus.


CLS 409/247
TXT With means to distribute cutter infeed force:

    Apparatus under subclass 243 wherein the stress developed in a cutting tool
    by a required broaching force is divided or split-up, as distinguished from
    concentrated, by broach drive means effective to impart such force through
    the simultaneous application of a plurality of force applicator heads,
    e.g., push and pull heads.

    (1)     Note.  For a patent to be placed originally in this subclass, a
    claimed teaching of "force distribution" must be clear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264     and 280+, for related structure wherein a second head engaged by
    the tool merely functions as a tool guide or antichatter device.


CLS 409/248
TXT With means to select cutter or to select or modify cutter drive:

    Apparatus under subclass 243 including (1) a plurality of drive means to
    power a broaching machine and means to provide a choice of which drive
    means is functional, (2) a plurality of cutting tools and means to provide
    a choice of which receives the driving force, or (3) means to significantly
    vary the drive of the broaching machine.

    (1)     Note.  Under clause (3) a significant variation may, for instance,
    involve (a) a choice of either continuous or unicyclic operation or (b)
    variation of the limits of broach acceleration or deceleration either
    during the cutting stroke or during the idle return stroke.

    (2)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass is a patent directed to variable
    pulley or gear shift transmission means limited to a straight-line uniform
    speed of tool operation.  Such a patent will be found in subclasses 280+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    483,    Tool Changing, subclasses 28+ for a reciprocating tool machine tool
    combined with a tool transfer means.


CLS 409/249
TXT With means to clean, lubricate, or modify temperature of work or cutter:

    Apparatus under subclass 243 including (a) structure to remove foreign
    material from the workpiece or from the cutting tool, (b) structure to
    apply a friction reducing fluent material to the workpiece or to the
    cutting tool or (c) structure to alter the thermal condition of the
    workpiece or the cutting tool.


CLS 409/250
TXT With product handling means:

    Apparatus under subclass 243 including means to move or affect the motion
    of broached material or scrap of a broaching operation.

    (1)     Note.  A single device to feed work to or remove product from a
    broaching station is considered to be work handling rather than product
    handling. However, similarly claimed apparatus disclosed as including a
    work handling means and a distinct product handling means will be found in
    this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Means for continuous or incremental advance of material from
    a first broaching station to a sequentially acting second broaching station
    is considered to be a product handling means for this subclass.


CLS 409/251
TXT Between plural broaching stations:
    Apparatus under subclass 250 comprising means to continuously or
    incrementally advance material from a first broaching station to a
    sequentially acting second broaching station.


CLS 409/252
TXT Means to eject broached product:

    Apparatus under subclass 250 comprising means to remove the broached
    material from the apparatus at the shaping station.


CLS 409/253
TXT Chip removal means:

    Apparatus under subclass 250 wherein the means to effect motion of the
    scrap material comprises means adapted to move relative to the cutting tool
    to carry nonshaped material removed from the shaped material away from the
    broaching station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137,    for a milling machine combined with means to remove chips formed
    thereby.


CLS 409/254
TXT With means to protect operative or machine (e.g., guard, safety device,
    etc.): Apparatus under subclass 243 combined with means intended to
    physically prevent encounter of a man operating the apparatus or of an
    element of the apparatus with an undesirable particle or unsafe condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    for similar structure used in milling.


CLS 409/255
TXT With safety means for overload or safety interlock:

    Apparatus under subclass 254 including a protective device for the machine
    operative or machine which (a) functions in repsonce to the development of
    operational stress that exceeds, or tends to exceed, the safe stress limit,
    to affect the operation of the apparatus of any machine component or (b)
    exercises a locking control over an element of the tool or motive system
    but is not itself a necessary part of such system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 116.5+ for the generic
    or residual interlock or safety device.


CLS 409/256
TXT With work immobilizer and means to activate work immobilizer interrelated
    with cutter infeed, work infeed, or work advance: Apparatus under subclass
    243 combined with means to secure the workpiece in a stationary condition,
    which securing means is coupled with means to cause the cutting tool to
    move to perform the cutting stroke, with means to cause the cutting the
    workpiece to move to perform the cutting stroke, or with means to cause the
    workpiece to be moved toward the working station, so that movement of the
    securing means is dependent on the coupled means.


CLS 409/257
TXT With work infeed or advancing means and means to clamp the work thereto,
    which clamping means is interrelated with work or cutter infeed:

    Apparatus under subclass 243 combined with means to cause the workpiece to
    move toward the cutting tool to effect the cutting stroke or with means to
    cause the workpiece to be moved toward the cutting station before the
    cutting stroke and with means to secure the workpiece to the moving means,
    wherein the securing action is dependent on the action of the cutting
    stroke effected by either movement of the workpiece or of the cutting tool.


CLS 409/258
TXT Means to remove flash or burr:

    Apparatus under subclass 243 particularly adapted to remove the extraneous
    material formed during a previous shaping, molding, or welding operation.

    (1)     Note.  Flash is the ridge formed at the abutment line of a pair of
    mold components or is formed by a weld line and is considered to be that
    portion of a product of the molding or welding operation that extends
    beyond the desired surface of the product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140,    for milling apparatus to remove flash or burr.

    297,    for planing apparatus to remove flash or burr.


CLS 409/259
TXT Means for cutting groove:

    Apparatus under subclass 243 intended to form an elongated recess in a
    generally uniform surface of a workpiece, which elongated recess is of a
    prescribed cross-sectional shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304,    for means for cutting a groove by planing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 875+ for cutting a groove in a workpiece where
    no particular cross-sectional shape is given to the groove.


CLS 409/260
TXT Arcuate groove in cylindrical surface:
    Apparatus under subclass 259 for forming an elongated recess that is curved
    into a surface that is generally circular and extends uniformly along the
    circular axis.


CLS 409/261
TXT Rifling:

    Apparatus under subclass 260 consisting of means for cutting a spiral
    groove in the inner surface of the barrel of a small arms or ordnance
    device.

    (1)     Note.  The tool of this subclass normally turns gradually about the
    axis of the work (usually through less than 360); however, it is considered
    to be a broaching tool rather than a milling tool because it is driven
    axially rather than rotatable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64+,    for milling by a rotating tool wherein the tool is driven to rotate.

    306,    for rifling a gun barrel by a planing tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 1.1+ for apparatus especially adapted for
    making a projectile throwing implement of metal, whether small arms or a
    large gun.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, for cutting by a
    rotatably driven cutting tool that moves axially through or about a
    workpiece with no other movement with respect to the workpiece, as in the
    case of cutting screw threads on a bolt.


CLS 409/262
TXT Orbital carrier for cutter:

    Apparatus under subclass 243 including means to support the cutting tool
    and move with the cutting tool wherein the movement is in a closed loop.

    (1)     Note.  A reciprocating cutter support that moves along a path in a
    first direction and then back along the same path is not considered to
    travel in a closed loop.


CLS 409/263
TXT Orbital carrier for work:

    Apparatus under subclass 243 including means to support the workpiece and
    move with the workpiece wherein the movement is in a closed loop.

    (1)     Note.  A reciprocating workpiece support that moves along a path in
    a first direction and then back along the same path is not considered to
    travel in a closed loop.


CLS 409/264
TXT With means to cyclically manipulate cutter or cutter support:

    Apparatus under subclass 243 comprising a machine intended to function
    through a series of operations so that normally the machine will return to
    the starting position, combined with cutting tool handling structure to
    function as a part of the normal series of operations to:



    (a)     transfer the cutting tool between machine parts;

    (b)     apply or remove a tool support;

    (c)     reorient a cutting tool relative to the subsequent and successive
    cutting path of such tool;

    (d)     remove or introduce a cutting tool (from or to operating position)
    between successive shaping operation; or

    (e)     reorient, or facilitate reorientation of, the cutting tool with
    respect to its path of cut.


CLS 409/265
TXT To reorient, introduce, or remove cutter:
    Apparatus under subclass 264 wherein the butting tool handling structure is
    effective to (1) realign the cutting tool between successive shaping
    strokes so as to follow a path of cut different from that of its prior
    cutting stroke or (2) either (a) position for a subsequent shaping
    operation a cutting tool not used in the last preceding shaping operation
    or (b) prepare for the next subsequent shaping operation by removing a
    cutting tool which has just performed its cutting function.


CLS 409/266
TXT Cutter released to interim support at termination of cutting stroke:

    Apparatus under subclass 264 including means functional at the end of a
    cutting stroke to permit transfer of the cutting tool to an inactive tool
    support.


CLS 409/267
TXT To remove and return cutter to cutter support:

    Apparatus under subclass 264 comprising means to disconnect the cutting
    tool from the member used to support the cutting tool during the cutting
    stroke and including means to reconnect the cutting tool to the supporting
    structure.


CLS 409/268
TXT With plural cutters:

    Apparatus under subclass 243 including a first cutting tool adapted to
    perform a shaping operation and including a second cutting tool adapted to
    perform a shaping operation, wherein the first and second cutting tools are
    relatively movable as assembled in the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  A first cutting bit and a second cutting bit mounted on the
    same cutting tool holder are considered to be two edges of the same cutting
    tool rather than plural cutters.


CLS 409/269
TXT With means to advance, infeed, or manipulate work:

    Apparatus under subclass 243 combined with a base and with means to move
    the workpiece relative to the base (a) from a remote location to a location
    closer to the working station, (b) past the cutting tool thereby effecting
    the cutting stroke, or (c) otherwise from a first to a second position.


CLS 409/270
TXT Interrelated with cutter infeed:

    Apparatus under subclass 269 wherein the cutting tool is moved relative to
    the base and relative to the workpiece to effect the cutting operation,
    wherein action of the workpiece moving means is dependent on such cutting
    tool movement.


CLS 409/271
TXT Including means supporting work and additional means opposing infeed force:
    Apparatus under subclass 270 including means to hold the workpiece against
    the force of gravity and including other means to act against the workpiece
    to counteract the force placed thereon by the action of the cutting tool
    during the cutting stroke.


CLS 409/272
TXT Including work indexing means for sequential cutting of different surfaces
    of a single workpiece:

    Apparatus under subclass 270 comprising means to move the workpiece from a
    first definite position to a second definite position between cutting
    strokes to thereby present a first portion of the workpiece to the cutting
    tool for a first cutting stroke and then present a second portion of the
    same workpiece to the cutting tool for a second cutting stroke.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263,    for plural broaching tools on an endless carrier.


CLS 409/273
TXT Including work indexing means for sequential cutting of surfaces of
    different workpieces:

    Apparatus under subclass 270 comprising means to support a first and a
    second workpiece in a fixed relationship and including means to move the
    support for a first definite position to a second definite position between
    cutting strokes to thereby present a portion of the first workpiece to the
    cutting tool for a first cutting stroke and then to present a portion of
    the second workpiece to the cutting tool for a second cutting stroke.


CLS 409/274
TXT With means to retract work from path of tool's idle return stroke:

    Apparatus under subclass 270 wherein, prior to a return movement of the
    cutting tool, the means to convey work also operates to withdraw the work
    supporting structure from a tool engagement position.


CLS 409/275
TXT To infeed work past cutter:

    Apparatus under subclass 269 comprising means to move the workpiece past
    the cutting tool thereby effecting the cutting stroke.


CLS 409/276
TXT With means to hold work during cutting: Apparatus under subclass 243
    including means to support the workpiece against movement and in the
    position to be operated on by the cutting tool.

    (1)     Note.  A device including an abutment work stop to position the
    workpiece for the broaching operation is included in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The nominal recitation of a "work support", "work holder",
    or "work table" is insufficient for placement of a device in this subclass
    unless additional support structure is claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256,    for means to hold work including a work immobilizer whose actuator
    is interrelated with tool or work infeed means.

    257,    for means to clamp moving work interrelated with tool or work
    infeed.

    269+,   for apparatus to hold work including work moving means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, the general locus of work holders regardless of kind
    of treatment.


CLS 409/277
TXT Including work clamping means:

    Apparatus under subclass 276 including a plurality of opposed elements that
    are effective by relative movement therebetween, to grip and hold the
    workpiece with respect to the cutting tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250,    for a device including structure which serves the dual functions of
    clamping a workpiece and stripping or otherwise handling the broached
    material.


CLS 409/278
TXT With means to adjust or facilitate adjustment of work or work holder:

    Apparatus under subclass 276 combined with means which effects or permits
    variable location of the workpiece or of the workpiece supporting means
    with respect to the cutting tool.

    (1)     Note.  The means herein permits direct manual adjustment of the
    workpiece or is manually actuated to translate such actuation directly to
    the workpiece, said means and said workpiece partaking of the same movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 55+ for a movable or an adjustable holder,
    respectively.


CLS 409/279
TXT With means on work or work holder to guide cutter during infeed:

    Apparatus under subclass 276 combined with means adapted to engage the
    workpiece or the work supporting structure to direct the path of the
    cutting tool during its cutting stroke.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass is a guide consisting solely of
    the mating portions of a uniform cross-sectioned tool and a work surface
    defining an aperture.


CLS 409/280
TXT Cutter infeed means:

    Apparatus under subclass 243 including means to effect movement of a
    cutting tool to, through, and away from cutting contact with a workpiece to
    thereby effect the cutting operation.


CLS 409/281
TXT Imparting rectilinear motion to cutter:
    Apparatus under subclass 280 wherein the means to cause the cutting tool to
    move to effect the cutting operation serves to cause the cutting tool to
    move in a straight path during the cutting stroke.


CLS 409/282
TXT And rotary motion to cutter:

    Apparatus under subclass 281 wherein means is provided to cause the cutting
    tool to turn about an axis in addition to the straight-line movement.

    (1)     Note.  The cutting tool of this subclass is rotated in a support,
    which support and cutting tool assembly is moved in a straight line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    260,    for similar structure used to form a spiral groove in an opening in
    a workpiece.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, for similar
    structure adapted to create or enlarge an opening, rath than shape the
    inner surface of such an opening as is found in this subclass.


CLS 409/283
TXT Fluid powered means:

    Apparatus under subclass 281 wherein the means to cause the cutting tool to
    move in a straight path to effect the cutting action is adapted to derive
    moving force from the action of a flowable medium acting against a surface
    thereof.


CLS 409/284
TXT Rack means:

    Apparatus under subclass 281 including a row of gear teeth arranged in a
    straight line extending generally along the workpiece and perpendicularly
    to the cutting edge of the cutting tool, also including a gear to engage
    the aligned gear teeth, the gear and row of aligned gear teeth intended to
    cooperate to cause the cutting tool to move toward the workpiece to effect
    the shaping operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    311,    for a planing machine including means for shaving by a wide blade
    and including a rack to cause infeed.

    323,    for a planing machine including a rack to cause work infeed.

    332,    for a planing machine including a rack to cause horizontal cutter
    reciprocation.

    335,    for a planing machine including a rack to cause cutter infeed,
    broadly.


CLS 409/285
TXT Screw means:

    Apparatus under subclass 281 wherein the means to cause the cutting tool to
    move in a straight path to effect the cutting action includes a member
    adapted to turn about an axis, which member has a helical thread adapted to
    engage a relatively movable member and force relative displacement upon
    rotation of the helically threaded member.


CLS 409/286
TXT Machine frame:

    Apparatus under subclass 243 comprising structure supporting the weight of
    the cutting tool or the workpiece or for counteracting the thrust of the
    cutting tool, which structure is generally not in contact with the cutting
    tool or with the workpiece.


CLS 409/287
TXT Cutter support or guide:

    Apparatus under subclass 243 comprising means to engage and move with the
    cutting tool during the cutting operation which means is adapted to support
    the cutting tool against gravity or the reaction from the workpiece, or
    comprising means to be engaged by the cutting tool and direct the cutting
    tool to follow the configuration of the means during the cutting operation.


CLS 409/288
TXT PLANING:

    Apparatus or method under the class definition for shaping by removal of
    surface material from work by a nonrotary cutting tool having a sharp
    cutting edge.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is (a) shaping by a cutting tool making a
    single cutting stroke across the workpiece, (b) shaping by a cutting tool
    making a series of cutting strokes across the workpiece, or (c) shaping by
    a series of cutting tools making sequential cutting strokes across the
    workpiece.

    (2)     Note.  The cutting tool of this subclass may be moved in a straight
    line or may be moved in an arcuate line relative to the workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58+,    for formation of a gear by a cutter moving in a line with respect
    to a workpiece.

    64+,    for shaping of a workpiece by a rotary cutter.

    243+,   for shaping of a workpiece by a cutting tool moving in a line with
    respect to a workpiece, which cutting tool includes a first and a second
    cutting edge adapted to be sequentially presented to the workpiece during a
    single cutting stroke.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    82,     Turning, for cutting to shape a workpiece turning more than 3600
    about an axis with respect to a cutting tool.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 861+ for theformation of a recess within a
    planar surface of a workpiece without formation of a particular shape to
    the surface of the area from which material has been removed.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 114-130 for planing of wood.

    483,    Tool Changing, subclasses 28+ for a reciprocating tool machine tool
    combined with a tool transfer means.


CLS 409/289
TXT With regulation of operation by use of templet, card, or other replaceable
    information supply:

    Apparatus or method under subclass 288 for detecting the characteristics
    (e.g., physical, electrical, etc.) of a member carrying operating
    instructions for the apparatus, which member is separate from both the
    workpiece and the organized structure of the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes utilizing a prepared information
    supply that is to be removably placed in the apparatus.  This subclass does
    not include utilizing the characteristics of a permanent part of the
    apparatus, such as a cam or gear, to influence the operation of other parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for similar control combined with gear cutting apparatus.

    67,     for similar control combined with a milling machine for generating
    a thread or helix.

    79,     for similar control combined with milling, generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclass 3 for
    similar control structure for a boring or drilling machine.


CLS 409/290
TXT Including use of tracer adapted to trigger electrical or fluid energy:

    Apparatus or method under subclass 289 including use of means having a
    follower adapted to ride over the form of the pattern member, which means
    is adapted to be connected to (a) a supply of electricity to regulate the
    flow of the electricity or to (b) a supply of gas or liquid so as to
    regulate the flow of that gas or liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98,     for a tracer adapted to trigger electrical energy in a duplicating,
    milling means adapted to operate without manual intervention.

    101,    for a tracer adapted to trigger fluid energy in a duplicating,
    milling means adapted to operate without manual intervention.

    114,    for a tracer adapted to trigger electrical or fluid energy in a
    milling machine adapted to operate without manual intervention.

    127,    for a tracer, per se, for a milling machine, adapted to trigger
    electrical energy.

    129,    for a tracer, per se, for a milling machine, adapted to trigger
    fluid energy.


CLS 409/291
TXT Including provision for circumferential relative movement of cutter and
    work: Apparatus or method under subclass 290 particularly adapted to shape
    a workpiece that is generally circular in cross section about the central
    axis thereof, wherein the cutting tool is supported for movement about the
    central axis of the workpiece, or whereon the workpiece is supported for
    movement about its central axis, which movement of the cutting tool
    relative to the workpiece is less than 3600.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    82,     Turning, for similar cutting wherein cutter movement relative to
    the work is through more than 3600 about the work axis.


CLS 409/292
TXT Including provision for circumferential relative movement of cutter and
    work: Apparatus or method under subclass 289 particularly adapted to shape
    a workpiece that is generally circular in cross section about the cental
    axis thereof, wherein the cutting tool is supported for relative movement
    about the central axis of the workpiece, or wherein the workpiece is
    supported for movement about its central axis, which arcuate movement of
    the cutting tool relative to the workpiece is less than 3600.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    82,     Turning, for similar cutting wherein cutter movement relative to
    the work is through more than 3600 about the work axis.


CLS 409/293
TXT Process:

    Method or planing under subclass 288.


CLS 409/294
TXT With means to lubricate:

    Apparatus under subclass 288 combined with structure to apply a friction
    reducing fluent material to the apparatus or to the workpiece.


CLS 409/295
TXT With product handling means:

    Apparatus under subclass 288 including means to move or affect the movement
    of material that has been planed or of scrap material of a planing
    operation.

    (1)     Note.  A single device to feed work to and remove product from a
    planing station is considered to be a work handling rather than product
    handling means.  However, similarly claimed means disclosed as a work
    handling means and a distinct product handling means will be found herein.

    (2)     Note.  Means for continuous or incremental advance of material from
    a first planing station to a sequentially acting second station is
    considered to be product handling for this subclass.


CLS 409/296
TXT Randomly manipulated, work supported, or work following device:

    Apparatus under subclass 288 comprising:



    (a)     a cutting device which is capable of movement in a path
    instantaneously under the control of the operative during cutting,
    including a cutting device suspended or supported near the workpiece;

    (b)     a cutting device which as an entirety is disclosed as deriving from
    the work a substantial amount of its support against gravity during
    cutting, or

    (c)     a cutting device which is intended to move across the workpiece in
    a direction dictated by conditions of the workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  A cutting device mounted at one end of a flexible shaft
    whose other end is anchored to a table, or a cutting device mounted on a
    steerable vehicle is included under clause (a) of this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175,    for similar structure used in milling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, for a randomly manipulated, work supported, or following
    cutting device, generally.


CLS 409/297
TXT Means to remove flash or burr:

    Apparatus under subclass 288 particularly adapted to remove the extraneous
    material formed during a previous shaping, molding, or welding operation.

    (1)     Note.  Flash is the ridge formed at the abutment line of a pair of
    mold components or is formed by a weld line and is considered to be that
    portion of a product of the molding or welding operation that extends
    beyond the desired surface of the product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140,    for milling apparatus to remove flash or burr.

    258,    for broaching apparatus to remove flash or burr.


CLS 409/298
TXT Elongated work:

    Apparatus under subclass 297 particularly adapted to be used on a workpiece
    having one dimension substantially greater than any other dimension.


CLS 409/299
TXT Flash or burr inside hollow work:

    Apparatus under subclass 298 particularly adapted to be used on a workpiece
    including an opening extending generally along the greatest dimension,
    wherein the apparatus is particularly adapted to remove only extraneous
    material within the opening.


CLS 409/300
TXT Transverse burr:

    Apparatus under subclass 298 particularly adapted to the rmoval of a
    previously formed sharp edge extending in a direction generally normal to
    the greatest dimension.


CLS 409/301
TXT Flat work:

    Apparatus under subclass 297 particularly adapted to be used on a
    three-dimensional workpiece having a first and a second dimension of
    substantially greater extent than the third dimension.


CLS 409/302
TXT Of commutator:

    Apparatus under subclass 288 particularly adapted to be used in shaping the
    surface of a segmented annular member to be utilized in an electromotive
    device to transfer electrical current from a stationary part to a rotary
    part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176,    for a randomly manipulated, work supported, or work following
    milling device for machining a commutator.


CLS 409/303
TXT Means for trimming edge (e.g., chamfering, scarfing, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 288 particularly adapted to remove material from
    the perimeter bounding a generally planar area of a workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is an apparatus adapted to cut the
    edge portion of a workpiece into chips.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    for a milling machine intended to trim the edge of a workpiece.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, for subdividing the edge portion from the remainder of a
    workpiece; particularly subclass 869 for edge trimming, e.g., bevelling,
    without specific shaping of the formed edge.


CLS 409/304
TXT Means for cutting groove:

    Apparatus under subclass 288 intended to form an elongated recess in
    generally uniform surface of a workpiece, which elongated recess is of a
    prescribed cross-sectional shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259,    for means for cutting a groove by broaching.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 875+ for cutting of a groove in a workpiece
    where no particular cross-sectional shape is given to the groove.


CLS 409/305
TXT Arcuate groove:

    Apparatus under subclass 304 particularly adapted to form an elongated
    recess in a curved surface of a workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is means for scoring the surface of a
    grinding or crushing roll, etc., with longitudinal, helical, sinuous, or
    other grooves.


CLS 409/306
TXT For rifling:

    Apparatus under subclass 305 consisting of means for cutting a spiral
    groove in the inner surface of the barrel of a small arms or ordnance
    device.

    (1)     Note.  The tool of this subclass normally turns gradually about the
    axis of the work (usually through less than 3600); however, it is
    considered to be a planing tool rather than a milling tool because it is
    driven axially rather than rotatably.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64+,    for milling by a rotating tool wherein the tool is driven to rotate.

    261,    for rifling a gun barrel by a broaching tool.

    307,    for apparatus for planing a straight line inside a gun barrel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 1.1+ for apparatus especially adapted for
    making a projectile throwing implement of metal, whether small arms or a
    large gun.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, for cutting by a
    rotatably driven cutting tool that moves axially through or about a
    workpiece with no other movement with respect to the workpiece, as in the
    case of cutting screw threads on a bolt.


CLS 409/307
TXT Inside hollow work:

    Apparatus under subclass 304 particularly adapted to cutting on an inwardly
    facing surface of a generally enclosed or shell-like workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143,    for apparatus for milling a groove inside a hollow workpiece.

    306,    for apparatus for planing an arcuate groove inside a gun barrel.


CLS 409/308
TXT Means for shaving by blade spanning work surface:

    Apparatus under subclass 288 adapted to remove a very thin layer of the
    surface of the workpiece at a single pass by use of a cutting tool
    extending substantially across the entire surface of the workpiece, the
    purpose of the cutting operation being to remove only surface imperfections
    from a previously shaped surface.


CLS 409/309
TXT Concave work surface (e.g., bearing, stereotype printing plate, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 308 particularly adapted to remove a very thin
    layer of the inside of an inwardly curved surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    901,    for an art collection of making of a stereotype printing surface by
    means other than planing.


CLS 409/310
TXT Circumferential surface:

    Apparatus under subclass 308 particularly adapted to remove a very thin
    layer of material from the outer surface of a rodlike or spherical
    workpiece.


CLS 409/311
TXT Including rack driven infeed means:
    Apparatus under subclass 308 including a row of gear teeth arranged in a
    straight line extending generally along the workpiece and perpendicularly
    to the cutting edge of the cutting tool, also including a gear to engage
    the aligned gear teeth, the gear and row of aligned gear teeth intended to
    cooperate and cause relative movement of the cutting tool and the workpiece
    to effect the shaping operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284,    for a broaching machine including a rack means to cause cutter
    infeed.

    323,    for a planing machine including a rack to cause work infeed.

    332,    for a planing machine including a rack to cause horizontal cutter
    reciprocation.

    335,    for a planing machine including a rack to cause cutter infeed,
    broadly.


CLS 409/312
TXT Including roller infeed means:

    Apparatus under subclass 308 including a circular member having a
    peripheral surface adapted to engage and cause the workpiece to move
    relative to the cutting tool to effect the shaping operation.


CLS 409/313
TXT Means for cutting arcuate surface:
    Apparatus under subclass 288 particularly adapted to form a surface of the
    workpiece into a curved shape.


CLS 409/314
TXT Cycloidal surface:

    Apparatus under subclass 313 particularly adapted to form a curved surface
    on the workpiece wherein a cross section through the surface would show the
    shape to be that generated by a point on the periphery of a circle, which
    circle is rolled over a planar surface.


CLS 409/315
TXT With work infeed and means to arcuately reposition the cutter:

    Apparatus under subclass 313 including a base intended to support the
    apparatus against gravity, including structure to cause the workpiece to
    move relative to the base and relative to a cutting edge of the cutting
    tool to effect the shaping operation, and including means to cause the
    cutting tool to move along a curved path relative to the base and relative
    to the workpiece to relocate the path of the cutting action with respect to
    the workpiece, so that a series of cutting passes yields an arcuate surface
    on the workpiece.


CLS 409/316
TXT With work infeed and means to arcuately reposition the work:

    Apparatus under subclass 313 including a base intended to support the
    apparatus against gravity, including structure to cause the workpiece to
    move relative to the base and relative to the cutting edge of the cutting
    tool to effect the shaping operation, and including means to cause the
    workpiece to additionally move along a curved path relative to the base and
    relative to the cutting tool to relocate the path of the cutting action
    with respect to the workpiece, so that a series of cutting passes yields an
    arcuate surface on the workpiece.


CLS 409/317
TXT With means to relatively infeed cutter and work:

    Apparatus under subclass 288 including structure to cause the approach of
    the cutting tool and the workpiece, which approach causes the shaping
    operation to be effected.


CLS 409/318
TXT And means to rotate work and cutter at same rate about converging axis:

    Apparatus under subclass 317 including means to support the workpiece
    against gravity and cause that workpiece to turn about a first axis and
    including means to support the cutting tool against gravity and cause that
    cutting tool to turn about a second axis inclined relative to the first
    axis such that as the workpiece is infed relative to the cutting tool there
    is no relative rotation between the workpiece and the cutting tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    82,     Turning, subclasses 1.2+ for similar structure wherein there is
    relative rotary movement between the cutting tool and the workpiece.


CLS 409/319
TXT With plural sequentially acting cutters or with double acting cutter:

    Apparatus under subclass 317 including (a) a first cutting tool adapted to
    make a first cutting pass through a workpiece and a second cutting tool
    adapted to follow the first cutting tool generally through the same portion
    of the workpiece to expand the cut of the first cutting tool, wherein the
    cutting tools are independent of each other, i.e., they are not on the same
    tool holder; or including (b) a cutting tool adapted to make a first
    cutting pass through a workpiece in a first direction and then make a
    second cutting pass in the opposite direction through the workpiece to
    expand the cut of the first cutting pass.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a chain of tool carriers connected
    together and pulled sequentially through the workpiece.


CLS 409/320
TXT And means to vary rate of infeed:

    Apparatus under subclass 317 including provision to cause the relative
    approach of the cutting tool and the workpiece during the shaping operation
    to be selectively at a first velocity or at a second velocity.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is not intended to include means to merely
    start and stop the infeed.


CLS 409/321
TXT Reciprocating work infeed means:

    Apparatus under subclass 317 including a base on which the apparatus is
    supported and including a carriage adapted to move cyclically to-and-fro to
    carry the workpiece and present that workpiece to the cutting tool to
    perform the shaping operation.


CLS 409/322
TXT With fluid-driven bed:

    Apparatus under subclass 321 including means to cause the carriage to move
    relative to the base to perform the shaping operation, which means is
    adapted to derive carriage moving force from the action of a flowable
    medium acting against a surface thereof.


CLS 409/323
TXT With rack-driven bed:

    Apparatus under subclass 321 including a row of gear teeth arranged in a
    straight line extending generally along the workpiece and perpendicularly
    to the cutting edge of the cutting tool and also including a gear to engage
    the aligned gear teeth, the gear and row of aligned gear teeth intended to
    cooperate to cause the work to move toward the cutting tool to effect the
    shaping operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284,    for a broaching machine including a rack means to cause cutter
    infeed.

    311,    for a planing machine including means for shaving by a wide blade
    and including a rack to cause infeed.

    332,    for a planing machine including a rack to cause horizontal cutter
    reciprocation.

    335,    for a planing machine including a rack to cause infeed, broadly.


CLS 409/324
TXT With screw-driven bed:

    Apparatus under subclass 321 including means to cause the carriage to move
    relative to the base to perform the shaping operation, which means includes
    a member adapted to turn about an axis, the member having a helical thread
    adapted to engage a relatively movable second member and force relative
    displacement of the second member upon rotation of the helically-threaded
    member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333,    for a planing machine having a screw-driven cutter infeed means.


CLS 409/325
TXT And means to permit repositioning of cutter laterally:

    Apparatus under subclass 321 including a guiding surface to carry the
    cutting tool transversely to the direction of infeed of the carriage
    adapted to permit the cutting tool to be selectively moved therealong.


CLS 409/326
TXT Reciprocating cutter infeed means:
    Apparatus under subclass 317 including provision to allow the cutting tool
    to cyclically move to-and-fro over a surface of the workpiece to perform
    the shaping operation.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes apparatus known in the art as a
    "slotter" or a "key seater".


CLS 409/327
TXT Reciprocating cutter horizontally:
    Apparatus under subclass 326 including means to support the workpiece and
    including means to allow the cutting tool to move to-and-fro over the upper
    or lower surface of the workpiece to perform the shaping operation.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is a device known in the art as a
    "shaper".


CLS 409/328
TXT With work support and lead screw to reposition work support:

    Apparatus under subclass 327 with means to hold the workpiece against the
    force of gravity and against the force of the cutting tool and including a
    helically-spiralled member adapted to interfit with the holding means to
    cause displacement thereof upon rotation of the helically-spiralled member.


CLS 409/329
TXT With fluid-powered means to drive cutter: Apparatus under subclass 327
    wherein the means to cause the cutting tool to move to-and-fro is adapted
    to derive the cutting tool moving force from the action of a flowable
    medium acting against a surface thereof.


CLS 409/330
TXT With pivoting link to drive cutter:
    Apparatus under subclass 327 wherein the means to cause the cutting tool to
    move to-and-fro includes a rigid connecting member pivotally secured to the
    tool and pivotally secured to a second member.


CLS 409/331
TXT Link driven by crank:

    Apparatus under subclass 330 wherein the second member causing the rigid
    connecting member to move is adapted to turn about an axis and is pivotally
    connected to the connecting member at a location offset from the axis so
    that rotation of the second member causes the end of the link connected
    thereto to orbitally swing and drive the cutting tool.


CLS 409/332
TXT With rack to drive cutter:

    Apparatus under subclass 327 including a row of gear teeth arranged in a
    straight line extending generally along the workpiece and perpendicularly
    to the cutting edge of the cutting tool, also including a gear to engage
    the aligned gear teeth, the gear and row of aligned gear teeth intended to
    cooperate and cause the cutting tool to move toward the workpiece to effect
    the shaping operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284,    for a broaching machine including a rack means to cause cutter
    infeed.

    311,    for a planing machine including means for shaving by a wide blade
    and including a rack to cause infeed.

    323,    for planing machine including a rack to cause work infeed.

    335,    for a planing machine including a rack to cause cutter infeed,
    broadly.


CLS 409/333
TXT With screw to drive cutter:

    Apparatus under subclass 327 in which the means to cause the cutting tool
    to move to-and-fro includes a member adapted to turn about an axis, the
    member having a helical thread adapted to engage a relatively movable
    second member and force relative displacement of the second member upon
    rotation of the helically-threaded member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324,    for a planing machine having a screw-driven work infeed means.


CLS 409/334
TXT With link or cam to drive cutter:

    Apparatus under subclass 326 wherein the means to cause the cutting tool to
    move to-and-fro includes (a) a rigid connecting member pivotally secured to
    the tool and pivotally secured to a second member or (b) a rotary member
    with a spiral or profiled surface adapted to slidingly engage a reaction
    surface upon rotation thereof.


CLS 409/335
TXT With rack to drive cutter:

    Apparatus under subclass 326 including a row of gear teeth arranged in a
    straight line extending generally along the workpiece and perpendicularly
    to the cutting edge of the cutting tool, also including a gear to engage
    the aligned gear teeth, the gear and row of aligned gear teeth intended to
    cooperate and cause the cutting tool to move toward the workpiece to effect
    the shaping operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284,    for a broaching machine including a rack means to cause cutter
    infeed.

    311,    for a planing machine including means for shaving by a wide blade
    and including a rack to cause infeed.

    323,    for a planing machine including a rack to cause work infeed.

    332,    for a planing machine including a rack to cause horizontal cutter
    reciprocation.


CLS 409/336
TXT Including means causing return stroke:
    Apparatus under subclass 317 including means to cause the direction of
    approach of the cutting tool and the workpiece to be reversed.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is a device wherein the direction
    of infeed is selective, i.e., the device is intended to be operated in one
    direction or the other.  See the search notes below for reciprocatory
    infeed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    321,    for planing apparatus including means to cause the work support to
    reciprocate to relatively infeed the cutter and the work.

    326,    for planing apparatus including means to cause the cutter to
    reciprocate to relatively infeed the cutter and the work.


CLS 409/337
TXT Machine frame:

    Apparatus under subclass 288 comprising structure supporting the weight of
    the cutting tool or the workpiece or for the weight of the cutting tool or
    the workpiece or for counteracting the thrust of the cutting tool, which
    structure is generally not in contact with the cutting tool or with the
    workpiece.


CLS 409/338
TXT Means to permit repositioning of cutter:
    Apparatus under subclass 337 including a base, including means to support
    the cutting tool in a first position for presentation to the workpiece, and
    including provision to allow movement of the cutting tool from the first
    position to a second position for different presentation to the workpiece.


CLS 409/339
TXT Laterally:

    Apparatus under subclass 338 wherein the allowed movement of the cutting
    tool relative to both the workpiece and the base is in the direction normal
    to the direction of movement caused to effect the shaping operation.


CLS 409/340
TXT Plural independently positioned cutters:

    Apparatus under subclass 339 including means to support a first cutting
    tool in a first position for presentation to a workpiece, and including
    provision to allow movement of the first cutting tool from a first position
    to a second position for different presentation to the workpiece, and
    including means to support a second cutting tool in a first position for
    presentation to a workpiece and including provision to allow movement of
    the second cutting tool from the first position to a second position for
    different presentation to the workpiece, wherein the repositional movement
    of the first cutting tool is not necessarily accompanied by the
    repositional movement of the second cutting tool.


CLS 409/341
TXT Including clutch:

    Apparatus under subclass 339 including means to cause repositioning of the
    cutting tool from the first to the second position and including means for
    coupling power, frictionally or positively, to the repositioning means
    before the beginning or after the end of infeed (the cutting stroke), and
    then disengaging during the remainder of the infeed.

    (1)     Note.  Including herein is a pair of frictionally engaging discs,
    one attached to a reversible drive shaft and the other attached to a feed
    rod, the pair adapted to oscillate so that one or the other causes the
    relative infeed of the cutting tool and the workpiece.


CLS 409/342
TXT Including repositioning means and means to effect stopping thereof:

    Apparatus under subclass 339 including means to cause movement of the
    cutting tool in the second direction and means to terminate that movement.

    (1)     Note.  Intermittent starting and stopping is not considered to be
    termination of positioning for this subclass.


CLS 409/343
TXT Including relatively movable components and means to relatively immobilize
    these components:

    Apparatus under subclass 337 wherein members thereof can be repositioned
    with respect to each other, including means to secure the otherwise
    relatively movable members together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241,    for similar frame and clamp structure for use as components of a
    milling machine.


CLS 409/344
TXT Work table:

    Apparatus under subclass 337 including a generally planar upwardly facing
    surface particularly adapted to support a workpiece against gravity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, for structure of general utility to support a
    workpiece for presentation to a tool.


CLS 409/345
TXT Tool head:

    Apparatus under subclass 288 for supporting the cutting tool of a planer.


CLS 409/346
TXT With selectively usable cutting edges:
    Apparatus under subclass 345 including a first means for supporting a first
    cutting tool of a planer and including a second means for supporting a
    second cutting tool of a planer, and including provision to allow use of
    one or both of the cutting tools during relative approach of the workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a device including a first cutting tool
    for engagement with the workpiece moving in a first direction and including
    a second cutting tool for engagement with the workpiece moving in the
    opposite or return direction.


CLS 409/347
TXT With means to permit repositioning of cutter for idle return stroke:

    Apparatus under subclass 345 including means to allow movement of the
    cutting tool out of the cutting position to permit relative movement of the
    cutting tool and the workpiece for return to the starting position for a
    subsequent approach and further shaping of the workpiece.


CLS 409/348
TXT Comprising pivotable cutter or cutter support:

    Apparatus under subclass 347 including means to limit the cutting tool to
    swing about an axis in moving out of cutting position.



        CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS

            The following subclasses are collections of published disclosures
    pertaining to various specified aspects of the cutting art which aspects do
    not form appropriate bases for subclasses in the foregoing classification
    (i.e., subclasses superior hereto in the schedule), wherein original copies
    of patents are placed on the basis of proximate function of the apparatus.
    These subclasses assist a search based on remote function of the apparatus
    and may be of further assistance to the searcher, either as a starting
    point in searching this class or as an indication of further related fields
    of search inside or outside the class.  Thus, there is here provided a
    second access for retrieval of a limited number of types of disclosures.

    (1)     Note.  Disclosures are placed in these subclasses for their value
    as references and as leads to appropriate main or secondary fields of
    search, without regard to their original classification or their claimed
    subject matter.

    (2)     Note.  The disclosures found in the following subclasses are
    examples, only, of the indicated subject matter, and in no instance do they
    represent the entire extent of the prior art.


CLS 409/900.1
TXT Machine button or locator:

    Aligning element used for positioning or orienting a machine part or a
    workplace relative to some reference system, which element is used in an
    apparatus of this class.


CLS 409/900.2
TXT Machine tool carriage clamp:

    A device used for joining, gripping or supporting a moving part of an
    apparatus of this class, which moving part holds or shifts another part.


CLS 409/901
TXT STEREOTYPE PRINTING PLATE:

    Making or modifying a stereotype printing plate by a process or apparatus
    of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    309,    for planing of a stereotype printing plate.


CLS 409/902
TXT TIRE MOLD:

    Making a mold to be used in the manufacture or vulcanizing of a rubber
    vehicle tire by a method or apparatus of this class.


CLS 409/903
TXT WORK HOLDER:

    Structure to be used with the apparatus of this class, which structure is
    intended to support a workpiece against gravity and/or against the force of
    the cutting tool.


CLS 409/904
TXT WITH HYDROSTATIC BEARING:

    Method or apparatus under the class definition including use of fluid to
    support one member relatively to another and thereby reduce the friction
    between the two members.


CLS 410/
TTL FREIGHT ACCOMMODATION  ON FREIGHT CARRIER

CLS 410/
TXT A term which is defined in this class (410) definition, and is limited to a
    single word, is identified by an asterisk.  Where a group of words defines
    the term, parentheses are used to identify the beginning and end of the
    term; and this is followed by an asterisk.



    I.      This is the generic class for the accommodation of discrete units
    of freight which have been loaded on board a freight carrier for
    transportation, the freight accommodation being to assure the integrity of
    the load unit against the hazards of dynamic forces incident to transit.

    A.      The class comprehends:

    Means, entitled "accommodating means" in direct contact with a load unit to
    inhibit untoward shifting relative to the carrier that would be hazardous
    to the integrity of the unit.  The term "accommodating means" is the
    generic term therefor; and see section IV, A (1), below, for elaboration on
    the more specific terms applied to some various types of accommodating
    means.

    Load unit accommodation on a freight carrier is recognized by the provision
    of:

    1.      An accommodating means detail in the construction of the
    load-supporting section of a freight carrier;

    2.      means, per se, installable or otherwise put to use on a freight
    carrier (like dunnage which is merely inserted between load units);

    3.      particular means on an exterior surface of the load unit (usually,
    of the load bearer type) itself; particularly provided, that is, to contact
    and thereby to cooperate with a corresponding construction of the freight
    carrier to achieve the accommodation of the load unit thereon;

    4.      an arrangement of an article of freight or the grouping of articles
    in such a way or to assure the integrity of the load against untoward
    shifting on board the freight carrier.  Accommodating means may, but need
    not necessarily be required nor used to effect the arrangement; or

    5.      freight accommodating methods, namely:

    (a)     Associating a load unit present on the freight carrier with the
    appropriate accommodating means; or

    (b)     arranging (e.g., grouping) a load unit on the freight carrier.

    Cautionary note:  A step of loading onto or of unloading a load unit from a
    freight carrier places the combinaton beyond the limits of this class; for
    which greater combination see Class 414, Material or Article Handling.

    B.      Present the critical element of load unit accommodation as herein
    defined, placement in the class is on a predominant disclosure basis.  An
    invention will be found herein when the subject matter of the invention,
    regardless of breadth is disclosed as:

    1.      A support or receptacle which has a use as a freight carrier
    vehicle body part, e.g., an on-and-off container or other load bearer
    provided with the accommodating means referred to above.

    2.      Article securing or bracing structure which in use is attached to,
    installed on, or even merely placed on board a freight carrier for freight
    accommodation (e.g., dunnage).

    3.      Structure concerning which the advance in the state of the art has
    caused to be recognized as uniquely suitable to freight accommodation on a
    freight carrier.  The emphasis in the disclosure of load unit accommodation
    on freight carrier for this class should be on a level equivalent to a
    principal embodiment description.  However, as to the state of the art
    test, a presumption of load unit accommodation on a freight carrier not
    negated in the disclosure will serve for inclusion of the document in this
    class (410).  In fact, except where clearly negated by the detailed
    description, this class is available as a depository for such state of the
    art structure as dunnage structures for load bracing and twist lock devices
    for load bearer retention even when not pinpointed in the description for
    use on a freight carrier.

    4.      A load bearer which is a shipping support on which a single article
    is secured for on-and-off stowage aboard a freight carrier.  This subject
    matter is provided for in this class, even when the shipping support load
    bearer does not include the accommodating means cooperating with the
    freight carrier.  This is so because the state of the art recognition of
    the equivalency in the art of the shipping support load bearer, whether or
    not provided with such cooperating means, has become so integrated at the
    time of the inception of this class (410) that the search for both has been
    quite merged.Cautionary note:  A shipping support lacking the accommodating
    means and supporting a group of articles on a freight carrier has not been
    classified in this class (410) but will be found instead in Class 206,
    Special Receptacle or Package; and see too, Class 220, Receptacles,
    subclass 1.5 for a freight container absent the accommodating structure
    cooperating between the container and the freight carrier.

    II.     RELATIONSHIP TO OTHER CLASSES

    A.      The vehicle classes:

    1.      The vehicle classes involved in the haulage of freight, absent the
    freight accommodation feature(s) as defined in section I, above, are:

            Class 105, Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 355+ for freight car
    bodies; and subclasses 404+ for freight car frames and other structure;
    Class 114, Ships, subclasses 72+ for freighters; Class 180, Motor Vehicles;
    Class 244, Aeronautics, subclasses 118.1+ for cargo planes; Class 280, Land
    Vehicles, for example, subclasses 423.1+ for semitrailers; Class 296, Land
    Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops; and see, too, Class 224, Package and Article
    Carriers, subclasses 400+ for (pleasure) vehicle mounted article carriers.

    2.  Excluded from this class are:

    (a)     Haulage of material in bulk, whether fluid, aggregate, particulate
    or in any bulk form.  This latter subject matter will be found in:

            Class 105, Railway Rolling Stock subclasses 239+ for dumping car
    bodies; and subclasses 358+ for tank cars; Class 114, Ships, subclasses 73+
    for bulk cargo freighters; and Class 298, Land Vehicles: Dumping.  However,
    a rigid-wall receptacle which contains fluent or other bulk material
    qualifies as a load unit (of the load bearer type) for this class (410),
    for which see subclasses 68 hereunder.

    (b)     Very short distance movement of articles on a vehicle propelled by
    a walking attendant handler (e.g., from a building to a moving van); for
    which see, for example, Class 280, subclasses 47.131+ (for a two-wheel or
    other type unstable vehicle), 47.17+, and 47.34+.

    3.      Securement means for articles on a pleasure vehicle for the
    pleasure or convenience of the occupant(s), particularly provided in Class
    224, Package and Article Carriers, subclasses 400+.

    B.      The receptacle and support classes:

    The receptacle and support classes include disclosures for the provision of
    securement or bracing of an object or of a group of objects intended for
    shipment together as a unit, but excluded from the instant class (410)
    because of absence of accommodating means cooperating with a freight
    carrier.

    1.      The receptacle classes of this description are:

            Class 206, Special Receptacle or Package, appropriate subclass,
    frequently according to the specifically provided for article; Class 220,
    Receptacles, see particularly subclass 1.5 for freight container, including
    invention in locking on-and-off containers to one another.

    2.      The support classes are:

            Class 108, Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, see,
    particularly, subclasses 51.11+ for pallets; Class 211, Supports: Racks;
    and Class 248, Supports.  The receptacle and support classes are in
    particular related to subclass(es) 52+ of the instant class (410) in that a
    receptacle or support is recognized as a load bearer when conforming to the
    limitations set forth in section I, A, 1; i.e., having means cooperating
    with a freight carrier to effect the accommodation thereof on the freight
    carrier.  Placement in the instant Class 410 is in no way barred because of
    further inclusion of details of receptacle or support structures.  This
    class is the appropriate locus too, for a receptacle or support disclosed
    as being, in fact (a) a freight carrier body part, and (b) provided with
    accommodating means for a stowed load unit, e.g., the particular article
    under subclasses 2+.

    C.      Article handling:

    Class 414, Material or Article Handling, is the generic article handling
    class.  The class provides for the means and method of loading and
    unloading freight on-and-off a freight carrier.  The relevant loci in that
    class (the article handling vehicle search areas) include subclasses 333,
    334+, 337, 338, 339, 340+, 349+, 352+, 354+, and 373+ for various
    combinations of one or more moving or stationary freight carrier(s) and an
    external means of some nature for loading or unloading, or cooperating in
    the loading or unloading thereof.

    Class 254, Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 199+ provide for means for tautening flexible material about a
    load of objects---absent the attachment of the load to the freight carrier.
     The more comprehensive combination (including freight accommodation on the
    freight carrier) is proper for the instant class (410), for which see
    subclasses 34+, when the load consists of a tautened group of particular
    articles; and subclasses 96+ for load lashing of indiscriminate articles of
    freight.

    Class 294, Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 81 provides
    for container lift loading and unloading devices of the spreader frame
    type.  This type lift device includes latch elements akin to the retainers
    of subclasses 77+ of the instant class (410), particularly akin to the
    twist lock type found in indented subclasses 82+.

    D.      Attachment device subcombinations, elements:

    Class 24, Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., include attachment devices used
    to secure objects to one another only, to make up a load unit found on a
    freight carrier, but which devices do not couple the load unit to the
    freight carrier.  The class includes, for example, fasteners for coupling
    containers to one another; for which see subclass 287 for
    container-to-container locking devices including those of the twist lock
    type which operate like those of subclasses 82+ of the instant class (410).

    Class 188 Brakes, subclass 32 is the generic locus for a wheel chock,
    recognized as a brake on the ground whereas the instant Class 410 is the
    locus for such a device used on board a freight carrier to stabilize
    freight; compare with instant Class 410, subclass 30 for a wheel chock for
    a stowed vehicle; and subclasses 49+ for a chock for stowed cylindrical
    article, generally.  Compare, too, with instant subclass 62 for
    fore-and-aft accommodation of a stowed vehicle where the aft-end
    accommodating means may be a wheel chock.

    E.      Stock material:

    Class 428, Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, is the locus for
    members of indeterminate shape, as for load bracing, e.g., dunnaging. When
    in fact of such a shape so as to be beyond the scope of that class, a
    bracing member will be found in the instant class (410) in subclasses 117+
    when of flexible (i.e., flexible wall) material; subclass 121 being the
    principal subclass for load bracing; and subclasses 154 and 155 for,
    respectively, edge around and honeycomb dunnage.  Section IV (IV A or IV C)
    of the definition of this class (410) is particularly relevant as a guide
    to the location of dunnage in the instant Class 410.

    III.    THE INTERNAL PLAN OF THIS CLASS

    A.      This class (410) consist of three major groupings, as follows:

    1.      PARTICULAR ARTICLE ACCOMMODATION, as defined in subclass(es) 2+;

    2.      LOAD BEARER ACCOMMODATION, under subclasses 52+; and

    3.      subcombinational subject matter, namely:

    (a)     LOAD LASHING, under subclasses 96+; and

    (b)     LOAD BRACING, i.e., YIELDABLE BRACE, under subclasses 117+, and
    LOAD BRACING (generally) under subclass 121.

    The accommodation to the shape of the particular article in this first
    group being of essence and the disclosure being almost inevitably to such a
    detail, inventions limited to the subcombination will nevertheless be
    uniformly classified in that superior locus (subclasses 2+) and will be
    found as a cross-reference only in the subcombinational loci, subclasses
    96+ or, in particular, subclasses 117+ and 121+.

    B.      Search time and storage economization: Search Units.

    1.      Economy in search time and retrieval efficiency and in search area
    storage space has been incorporated in the internal plan of this class.
    This was done by the abstraction from the more generalized art of some
    particular subclasses certain subjects matter meriting low priority as the
    depository of the original (as opposed to the cross-reference copy) of a
    document in the classification schedule.  As a result, subclasses of such
    low priority subject matter recur as indents under classified loci of
    higher priority (typically as subcombinations in different superior and
    separately classified combinations).  Recurring sets of extractions or
    "break outs" have thus been developed out of separate but mutually related
    indented subclasses.  They are usually quite small.  A one "break out"
    readily matches a second (sometimes also a third) freed from the
    disclosures in principal subclasses entirely extraneous to the particular
    search needs for which "search units" have been devised.

    2.      Search Units:  Where these "break out" pairs (or triplets) most
    closely coincide in extensiveness and analogousness further economy is
    achieved by emphatic discouragement of cross-referencing internally of one
    another but rather, are singled out and can be identified as constituting
    search units.  They are easily recognized and identifiable in the printed
    publication of the Class 410 schedule in the MANUAL OF CLASSIFICATION.

    IV.     ELABORATION OF TERMS AND PHRASES, E.G., GLOSSARY

    A.      Hierarchally arranged guide to existent definitions.

    Accommodating
    means and terms Found in
    thereunder:             definition of

    1.      Accommodating means Class:  Sec.
                    I, A.
    Retainer        Subclass 77
    ..Rigid or hold-        Subclass 77;
    down type       (1) Note
    ..Load lashing  Class:  sec.
    retainer        IV, B
    ...Wraparound   Subclass 97
    ...Tiedown      Class:  sec.
                    IV, B
    ...Tiepiece     Class:  sec.
                    IV, B
    .Brace  Subclass 121
    ..Yieldable brace       Subclass 117
    (i.e., flaccid
    or deformable)
    .Dunnage        Common
                    dictionary:
                    see subclasses
                    154 and 155
                    for species
                    thereof

            .Corner pedestal        Subclass 71
    Cushioning means        Class:  IV, B
    .fore-and-aft slide     Class:  IV, B
    cushioning



    2.      Terms for objects of freight and where definitively explained.

            Term                                  see definitionof



            Load unit       Class, sec. 1,B
    Particular article      Subclass 2
    Load bearer     Subclass 52



            This guide, or directory, is by no means complete but, rather, is
    used mainly for terms:

    (a)     constituting subject matter of subclasses appearing earlier in the
    classification schedule than the formal definition thereof in the basic
    subclass matter subclass therefor; or

    (b)     recurring in scattered and nondependency order in several
    subclasses.  This listing, then, makes it possible to avoid repetitive
    redefining.

    B.      Definition of terms initiated immediately herebelow:

    Cushioning means: fore-and-aft slide cushioning means:

    Load unit protection means supplementing load accommodation.  The effect of
    inadvertently inertial forces which could cause damage to the load unit is
    mitigated by means so supplementing accommodation as to permit such an
    extent of reactive movement of the load unit or the accommodating means, or
    both as to be adequate to prevent damage that could occur were the load
    rigidly fixed to the freight carrier.  When the forces guarded against and
    the reactive movement acts in the direction along the longitudinal axis of
    the freight carrier, this is recognized as fore-and- aft direction slide
    cushioning.  The effect of only mere compression-relaxation of a resilient
    block is not intended to be included in the cushioning concept.

    Load lashing retainer:

    Retainer which includes flaccid material accommodating means, the virtue of
    the flaccidity being in its infinite deflective capacity so that the means
    can (inter alia) (a) closely conform to exterior configurations of load
    units, (b) extend in guided changes in direction from the locus of
    securement to the freight carrier to that of the retentive engagement with
    the load unit, and (c) most particularly, under subjection to force
    multiplying means, be so tightly engaged with the load unit, and over such
    critical configurations of the load unit surface that the engagement of
    this nature constitutes load unit retention.

    A load lashing retainer may consist of a combination of rigid material and
    flaccid material elements provided that the flaccid material element (or
    member) is significant in the combination.  Significance is present when
    the flaccid material element member is used (a) to attach the load lashing
    retainer to the freight carrier or retentively to connect with the load
    unit, or (b) to extend between the freight carrier attachment member and
    load unit securement member (one or both of which members are rigid) to
    impart to the load lashing retainer made up of these members unique
    advantages of flaccidity described in the preceding paragraph.  Not all
    flaccid load unit accommodating relationships are, in fact, retentive.
    Tight encirclement of the load (i.e., wraparound lashing, defined in
    subclass 97), tautened engagement with the load under the effect of force
    multiplying means, and a tiedown (defined hereinbelow) do, however,
    invariably accomplish load lashing retention.

    Tie piece:

    The (subclasses 101+) anchor part which directly engages the end of a
    flaccid material member to secure that end at an anchor location whereby to
    define the point from which the member diverges from the freight carrier
    surface.  The term is used in the context of bi-partite construction in
    that the tie piece is an add-on (e.g., welded on) part, the other part of
    the anchor being the mounting for freight carrier attachment.  Commonly,
    the mounting is a one-piece member shaped or otherwise so constructed or
    arranged on a freight carrier as to define an array of anchor locations, at
    one or more of which the add-on tie piece is attached.  See subclass 107,
    and compare with principal subclass 106 for the anchor-array one-piece
    member shaped or arranged to require no tie piece.

    Tiedown:

    A load lashing retainer which diverges from the freight carrier surface
    whereat it is attached and extends and terminates at the point or localized
    area of attachment to the load units.

    C.      Alphabetic arrangement of terms treated in section IV, above, (with
    some occasional further elucidation):

    ACCOMMODATING   Class:  I, A
    MEANS

    (Accommodation and accommodating, respectively, the state of or the art of
    the association of accommodating means with a load unit)

    BRACE (and see yield-   Subclass 121 able brace, below

    CORNER PEDESTAL Subclass 71

    CUSHIONING MEANS        Class: IV, B

    DUNNAGE                 Generically,
                            any dictionary;
                            see subclasses
                            154   and   155
                            for species
                            there  of

    FORE-AND-AFT SLIDE      Class: IV, B CUSHIONING MEANS

    LOAD BEARER     Subclass 52

    LOAD LASHING    Subclass 96

    LOAD LASHING
    RETAINER                Class: sec.
                            IV, B

    LOAD UNIT               Class: sec. I

    PARTICULAR ARTICLE      Subclass 2

    RETAINER                Subclass 77

    RETAINER, RIGID OR      Subclass 77;
    HOLD-DOWN TYPE  (1) Note

    TIE PIECE               Class:  sec.
                            IV, B

    TIEDOWN         Class:  sec.
                            IV, B.

    WRAPAROUND      Subclass 97

    YIELDABLE BRACE Subclass 117

    A defined term consisting of a single word is identified by an asterisk in
    the subclass definitions and the class schedule in the MANUAL OF
    CLASSIFICATION.  A group of words which defines a defined term is both in
    parentheses and has an asterisk to avoid confusion with adjacent language.


CLS 410/1
TXT INCLUDING TURNTABLE FOR LOAD, E.G., FOR SEMITRAILER:

    Structure under the class definition in which the freight carrier has a
    supporting surface which is rotatable to turn lading which it underlies
    (typically, a semitrailer or other wheeled vehicle for transhipment)
    between positions (a) for loading and unloading, and (b) for transit aboard
    the freight carrier.


CLS 410/2
TXT PARTICULAR ARTICLE ACCOMMODATION:

    Structure under the class definition for accommodating, by direct contact,
    an article of the type which satisfies a particular need elsewhere (i.e.,
    is not merely a bearer for the load in shipment, like a container or
    pallet), which structure is designed, in its contact with the lading, to
    take advantage of a particular configuration of the lading, or one of its
    parts, to minimize a carrying problem arising from such particular
    configuration, e.g., tendency of a cylindrical article to roll.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein (see indented subclasses 31+) is the
    accommodation of articles by their having been grouped in a particular way
    or by having been otherwise so arranged on the freight carrier that a
    foreseeable problem in transit is minimized.

    (2)     Note.  The class definition portion of section III, A:  THE
    INTERNAL PLAN OF THIS CLASS relating to this and the indented subclasses is
    reviewed, as follows: placement in this and indented subclasses is on a
    predominant disclosure basis, which means that, in the absence of a
    controlling claim barring such placement or an overwhelming emphasis in the
    total disclosure to that same effect, this is the locus (subclasses 2+) for
    the original placement of an invention to accommodating means for the
    particular article.

            Accordingly:

    a.      A generic invention to structure disclosed as accommodating a
    semitrailer or container (ordinarily classified under subclasses 52+) and
    equally applicable to the accommodation of a particular article (a farm
    tractor in transit, for example) will be classified as an original in
    subclasses 2+ and will appear in subclass(es) 52+ only as a cross-reference
    where necessary.

    b.      Subclasses 2+ will take an invention to a load lashing means or
    load bracing means subcombination for a particular article or group of
    articles and only a cross-reference will be placed in subclasses 96+, LOAD
    LASHING---, or subclasses 121+, LOAD BRACING; the locus for the lashing or
    bracing subcombinations, respectively, of general freight.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     for a group of articles stowed on board a freight carrier together
    with an on-and-off base.

    46,     for a shipping support onto which a single article only has been
    secured for on-and-off storage on board a freight carrier.


CLS 410/3
TXT Wheeled vehicle:

    Structure under subclass 2 in which the freight carrier is particularly
    designed or equipped to accommodate that class of article which, in its
    normal use, moves along a land surface by means of its underlying
    supporting structure which rolls along that surface.

    (1)     Note.  This (the principal) subclass includes inventions for
    bicycle stowage.

    (2)     Note.  Semitrailers are presumed to be load bearers, not, in
    themselves, particular articles of freight.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56+,    for the stowage of freight-laden semitrailers.


CLS 410/4
TXT Four-wheeled vehicle accommodation:

    Structure under subclass 3 in which the freight carrier is particularly
    designed or equipped to accommodate such a wheeled vehicle as has sets of
    running gear from corner-to-corner across the forward and the rear ends.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 335 for a four-wheel
    vehicle or group of vehicles preassembled in an on-and-off container for
    shipment on a freight carrier, absent means for interengagement with the
    freight carrier for accommodation against the hazards of transportation.


CLS 410/5
TXT Overturned or on-edge vehicle arrangement: Structure under subclass 4 for
    retaining the stowed vehicle upon the carrier at an attitude substantially
    905 or 1805 from the road condition attitude.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      (the principle subclass) for an upended arrangement in the stowage
    of bicycles.

    13+,    for four-wheel vehicles stowage structure in which an end only of
    the stowed vehicle is raised to maintain it at an inclination of
    approximately 455.

    24+,    for slanted deck structure to support stowed vehicles at about a
    455 angle.


CLS 410/6
TXT Ramp becomes vehicle sustainer:

    Structure under subclass 5 including panel means constituting a vertical
    panel at the side edge of the freight carrier and mounted for swinging
    movement outboard thereof for rolling or placement of a vehicle thereonto
    for stowage, and means for securing the vehicle to the panel whereby, when
    the panel is then swung to its vertical position upward from the edge of
    the carrier the panel means further functions to sustain the stowed vehicle
    attached thereto at substantially 905 to its normal road use attitude.


CLS 410/7
TXT Vehicle retainer*.

    Structure under subclass 4 including a retainer*; i.e., member(s) secured
    to the carrier and particularly constructed for direct securement
    engagement with a part of the stowed vehicle.


CLS 410/8
TXT Multipositionable; i.e., along array strip or track:

    Structure under subclass 7 in which the carrier is further provided with an
    elongated mounting member which has retainer positioning locations
    therealong; and in which (a) the retainer engageable with the stowed
    vehicle part extends from the location selected as being the suitable one
    for retaining the vehicle on the freight carrier, or (b) the elongated
    mounting member is shaped to guide the vehicle retainer for sliding
    movement therealong to the selected location.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104+,   for a track to guide a load lashing anchor to the suitable location
    on the freight carrier.

    108+,   113+ and 115, for an array of anchors.

    150,    for a track to guide a brace bar along a freight carrier to its
    load bracing position.


CLS 410/9
TXT Wheel hub, or axle retainer*:

    Structure under subclass 8 in which the retainer* retentively engages that
    particular functional part of the stowed vehicle, i.e., a wheel, which
    rolls along the land surface in the normal road use of the vehicle; or that
    particular functional part which provides, or from which extends the
    road-use bearing axis for the rolling part.


CLS 410/10
TXT Tiedown*:

    Structure under subclass 9 in which the retainer* for the stowed vehicle is
    a tiedown*.


CLS 410/11
TXT Tiedown*:

    Structure under subclass 8 in which the retainer* for the stowed vehicle is
    a tiedown*.


CLS 410/12
TXT Including force-multiplying takeup or tensioning means:

    Structure under subclass 11 which includes tautening means effective to
    multiply the force applied to the tiedown and thence to the stowed vehicle
    over that of a mere straight-line pull, e.g., drum or winch, turnbuckle,
    jack strew, but not mere linkage.



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38+,    for force-multiplying means for forcing articles in a group into
    compactedly close proximity.

    103,    for a load-lashing anchor incorporating force-multiplying means.


CLS 410/13
TXT In arrangement in which the vehicle end, at least, is raised to hood
    section height: Structure under subclass 7 including means maintaining at
    least one end of a stowed vehicle supported at a level above the freight
    carrier floor a distance not less than the anticipatable conventional hood
    section height of a stowed vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  The arrangement of this subclass, typically, is for
    overlapping with another vehicle intended to be transported.


CLS 410/14
TXT Elevatable deck suspended from hoist line: Structure under subclass 13
    including support member(s) directly underlyingly engaging four-wheels of a
    stowed vehicle and mounted on the freight carrier for movement between
    raised transport position and lowered loading position; and means including
    a flexible member, e.g., chain, cable for raising the support member(s) and
    maintaining the member(s) higher than the carrier floor.


CLS 410/15
TXT Lift simultaneously erects pivoted prop:
    Structure under subclass 14 including leg means hinged at its ends to the
    carrier floor and to the vehicle-underlying support member(s) so as to be
    raised along with the elevatable deck members from prone position to an
    erect position to cooperate in sustaining the deck.


CLS 410/16
TXT Including wheel-straddling member which is a retainer* or retainer* adjunct:

    Structure under subclass 13 in which the member in direct securement
    engagement with the stowed vehicle is effective either (a) by engagement
    with the vehicle wheel, which engagement is uninterruptedly across a wheel
    dimension transverse to the circumference, i.e., substantially from
    sidewall to sidewall, or (b) by extension from wheel straddling structure
    to a location in securement engagement with another functional part of the
    stowed vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  Accommodating structure such as a straddle or cradle does
    not constitute retentive securement where only the lower wheel quadrant is
    engaged; whereas retention amounting to securement necessarily is effected
    when similar structure encompasses the upper wheel quadrant(s).


CLS 410/17
TXT Including suspended retainer* member or prop:

    Structure under subclass 13 in which the freight carrier is a walled
    vehicle and in which an elongate arm or flexible means depends from
    substantially the highest portion of the carrier interior either (a) to
    bring a retainer* member into its direct, retentive contact with a vehicle
    part, or (b) to abut and thereby brace either the retained vehicle or some
    part of the retainer*.


CLS 410/18
TXT Retainer* arm or prop extending from freight carrier wall:

    Structure under subclass 13 in which is included a rigid, elongate member
    extending from a vertical surface of the freight carrier either (a) to
    bring a retainer* member into direct retentive contact with a stowed
    vehicle part, the retainer member being at the distal end of said elongate
    member, or (b) to abut and thereby brace either the stowed vehicle or some
    part of the retainer* structure.


CLS 410/19
TXT For wheel, hub, or axle shaft:

    Structure under subclass 7 in which a retainer* member(s) is retentively
    attachable to the stowed vehicle functional part that rolls along the land
    surface in the normal road use of the vehicle; or to that particular
    functional part that provides or from which extends the road-use bearing
    axis for the rolling member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9+,     for a multipositionable (e.g., track-mounted) wheel, hub, or axle
    retainer.

    16,     for a wheel straddling retainer in a raised vehicle arrangement.


CLS 410/20
TXT Wheel wraparound*:

    Structure under subclass 19 in which the retainer* is a wraparound* in
    tight encirclement about the upper quadrants of a wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9+,     for a wheel, hub, or axle shaft retainer in a raised vehicle
    arrangement.


CLS 410/21
TXT (Load lashing retainer)*:

    Structure under subclass 19 in which the retainer* is a (load lashing
    retainer)*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for disclosed but not claimed hub or axle retainer structure quite
    commonly mounted on a "semi-decking" frame (an art term for the angularly
    propped vehicle sustaining deck).

    48,     for a rigid retainer effective by contact with the core or hub of a
    cylindrical article, e.g., reel, or wheel not mounted to a vehicle.


CLS 410/22
TXT Hub or axle shaft retainer*:

    Structure under subclass 19 in which a retainer* member is retentively
    attachable to that particular functional part of the stowed vehicle that
    provides, or from which extends the road-use bearing axis for the vehicle
    wheel.


CLS 410/23
TXT Tiedown*:

    Structure under subclass 7 in which the retainer* is a tiedown*.


CLS 410/24
TXT Raised vehicle arrangement:

    Structure under subclass 4 comprising means for supporting at least one end
    of the stowed vehicle above the freight carrier floor at a height at least
    that of the anticipatable conventional hood section height.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13+,    for a raised vehicle arrangement in which is included a retainer
    for the stowed vehicle.


CLS 410/24.1
TXT Including above-cab stowage:

    Structure under subclass 24 including means so located and constructed as
    to support at least one end section of a stowed vehicle directly over the
    compartment of the freight carrier operator.

    (1)     Note.  The support means may be, or may include the vehicle cab
    roof to provide elevated height stowage.


CLS 410/25
TXT Interrupted or recessed wheel support:
    Raised vehicle arrangement structure under subclass 24 in which spaced
    supporting portions or members engage respective lower quadrant portions of
    a stowed vehicle wheel perimeter, whereby the intervening perimetral
    portion, which normally sustains the vehicle mass, as during road use, is
    uncontacted by said member or portions.

    (1)     Note.  Another sunken and upwardly concave member may, however,
    span the space between the member or portions to substantially conform to
    and contact the lower half perimeter of the wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for a raised vehicle arrangement wherein the underlying support, in
    the raised vehicle arrangement, is planar so as to contact the vehicle
    wheel at that point at which it normally sustains the vehicle mass.

    30,     for wheel chock or cradle means to inhibit the rolling tendency of
    a vehicle wheel.

    49+,    for similar means to inhibit the rolling tendency of any other
    cylindrical article.

    57,     for the fore-and-aft accommodation of a semitrailer which could
    include similar sunken area structure for accommodating the rear wheels.

    65,     for a rear wheel accommodating sunken area accommodating the
    stowage of a semitrailer.


CLS 410/26
TXT Multilevel deck; i.e., four-wheel support:
    Structure under subclass 24 including one or more planar members supporting
    the stowed vehicle entirely above the carrier floor by direct underlying
    engagement with all four-wheels of said vehicle, whereby the freight
    carrier floor sustains a vehicle at the requisite height above a lower
    level.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 371+ for a railway freight
    carrier convertible to multideck structure for hauling indiscrimate freight.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 335 for a multilevel deck,
    on-and-off shipping container for delivery and shipment of vehicles on
    board a freight carrier.


CLS 410/27
TXT Including interdeck transfer way:

    Structure under subclass 26 including further structure underlyingly
    receiving the vehicle wheel(s) thereupon and constituting either an
    elevator or inclined ramp for transit of vehicles between the vertically
    spaced decks.

    (1)     Note.  Elevating structure, per se, and nothing more, is proper for
    this subclass only when, either in itself or together with another
    elevator(s), it provides a substantially continuous elevated support for a
    plurality of vehicles at least temporarily, for loading and unloading.  The
    elevator or ramp must be in addition to, and for service between, a
    plurality of decks level.  Absent the above, see principal subclass 26 for
    an inclined fixed height structure sustaining the four-wheels of a single
    stowed vehicle and subclasses 14+ for such a structure which is adjustable,
    e.g., elevatable.


CLS 410/28
TXT On dropped-center car:

    Structure under subclass 27 in which the freight carrier floor which
    underlyingly supports the vehicle wheels is of an extent to include a
    center area lower than the freight carrier running gear supports and
    another area extending therefrom to a level to support a part, at least, of
    a stowed vehicle directly above a running gear support.


CLS 410/28.1
TXT On dropped section freight carrier:
    Structure under subclass 26 in which the freight carrier floor includes
    longitudinally contiguous areas, namely, a relatively high area at an end
    section of the freight carrier and a relatively lower area longtitudinally
    inward thereof, whereby a vehicle may be towed athwart the areas at an
    incline with respective ends thereof supported at the corresponding floor
    areas.

    (1)     Note.  The freight carrier of this subclass is of the type which is
    wheeled and is for highway travel and includes a floor section inward of
    the running gear used to advantage in frieght haulage in being constructed
    lower than the running gear height.

    (2)     Note.  The stowed vehicle may be supported, front and rear,
    directly on respective floor sections, or on structure supported by and
    straddling the floor sections.


CLS 410/29
TXT Vertically swingable from hinge at freight carrier wall:

    Structure under subclass 26 in which the deck structure is pivotally
    mounted at the freight carrier wall for vertical swinging movement.

    (1)     Note.  The hinged deck structure may include a plurality of
    members, of which each, or a pair of each extends from opposite walls of
    the freight carrier for supporting corresponding pairs of the supported
    vehicle wheels.


CLS 410/29.1
TXT Higher level deck positioned, then sustained by power cylinder:

    Structure under subclass 26 in which the member which underlyingly supports
    the stowed vehicle by its wheels is vertically adjustable and in which
    piston and cylinder telescoping tube means has one end attached to the
    member and the other end to a point on the freight carrier, the telescoping
    tube means being subject to the influence of force from a fluid source to
    effect elongation thereof to position the wheel support member at the
    requisite height, or attitude at which the piston and cylinder means
    cooperates in retaining the vehicle support means.


CLS 410/30
TXT Wheel cradle, chock, or well:

    Structure under subclass 4 wherein the means to accommodate the stowed
    vehicle engages the wheel(s) thereof at location(s) extending to, but not
    beyond both lower quadrants of the wheel periphery; or along, but not
    beyond, a substantial perimetral length of a lower wheel quadrant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for cradle structure accommodating a cylindrical article other than
    a wheel mounted on a vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclass 32 for a chock, recognized as a brake on the
    ground for that class and subclass, and which may be used to chock a
    vehicle wheel on a surface other than that of a freight carrier.


CLS 410/31
TXT Grouped:

    Structure under subclass 2 particularly designed for accommodating a number
    of articles as a load unit, or an arrangement of such a number of articles.

    (1)     Note.  This (the principal) subclass includes inventions
    particularly designed for accommodation of groups of engines, also racks or
    hanging hooks for meat carcasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, appropriate subclass for a group of
    articles which is prepackaged possibly for stowage as a load unit on board
    a freight carrier.


CLS 410/32
TXT Group of articles which are, predominantly, regularly contoured; i.e., are
    rodlike, panel shaped, blocks, or analogous forms: Structure or arrangement
    under subclass 31 wherein the accommodated load unit consists of articles
    which are substantially the same in cross section throughout at least
    nearly all of their length.

    (1)     Note.  The article, under the instant definition, may have a
    localized irregularity (for which, see subclass 31, indented hereunder) but
    remains, on the whole, "predominantly" regularly contoured, as the title to
    this subclass phrases it.


CLS 410/33
TXT Articles with protuberance or flange:
    Structure or arrangement under subclass 32 particularly designed to
    establish a load unit of articles shaped with a localized right-angled
    extension from each of their otherwise regular contours.


CLS 410/34
TXT Grouped by load binder or press means: Structure under subclass 32
    including means firmly forcing the articles into compact proximity.

    (1)     Note.  The means of this subclass may be firmly forced against the
    group of articles by muscle power or by force multiplying means associated
    with said first-named means (for which latter, see indented subclasses 38+).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 16+ for a wraparound
    load binder for a group of articles having no parts connected to a freight
    carrier; see, too, indented subclasses 19+ wherein the load binder includes
    a tightener; and see subclasses 68+ for a tightener, per se.


CLS 410/35
TXT Grouped together with on-and-off base:
    Structure under subclass 34 further including underlying support structure
    for the load unit and united therewith by the load binder or press means
    for and throughout the loading and unloading sequences.

    (1)     Note.  A rigid member underlying a load unit may be merely an
    element of the press means of principal subclass 34 when its dimensions are
    not substantially different from the remaining (side and top) press means
    member; rather than being so substantially dimensioned as to be clearly
    recognizable as a supporting base for the load unit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 386 for a group of articles
    prepackaged on an on-and-off base for stowage for shipment on board a
    freight carrier, absent means in interengagement with the freight carrier
    for accommodation against the hazards of transportation.


CLS 410/36
TXT Cylindrical article group:

    Structure under subclass 34 in which the means firmly maintains or urges
    articles of substantially circular cross section into the compact proximity.


CLS 410/37
TXT Log load:

    Structure or arrangement under subclass 36 in which the load unit consists
    of hewn tree trunks in compact proximity.


CLS 410/38
TXT Press:

    Structure under subclass 34 comprising rigid means which contactingly
    bounds a side, at least, of the group and force multiplying means
    associated therewith whereby the rigid means is in itself adjustable for
    movement against the side of the group or includes an adjustable member for
    such movement under influence of means which multiplies the force of
    compaction against said group.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for force multipyling means used with a tiedown* for retaining a
    four-wheel vehicle on a freight carrier.


CLS 410/39
TXT Including spacer:

    Structure under subclass 38 further including means intervening between
    articles in the group or between and setting off one group of articles from
    another.


CLS 410/40
TXT Between groups:

    Structure under subclass 39 in which the intervening means is between and
    sets off one group of articles from another.




CLS 410/41
TXT Including angle overlay, e.g., corner guard:

    Structure under subclass 34 in which the articles of the group are of such
    shape that the group is configured as to provide an abrupt, substantially
    905 change of direction along the outside surface of the group; and in
    which a rigid member is of such shape as to be in overlying contact with
    said outside surface through said change in direction.

    (1)     Note.  In this way, frequently, the outside corner article is
    protected from the bend of a taut  lashing  member.




CLS 410/42
TXT Cylindrical article group:

    Structure under subclass 32 in which the accommodated load unit consists of
    articles of substantially circular cross section.




CLS 410/43
TXT Vehicle body part group:

    Structure or arrangement under subclass 31 particularly designed to
    accommodate articles consisting of frame or shell parts for vehicle
    manufacture  or  assembly.




CLS 410/44
TXT Accommodation of article which is massive relative to the freight carrier:

    Structure under subclass 2 particularly designed to accommodate a single
    article (a) of such dimensions as to occupy substantially the entire space
    of the freight carrier or to extend beyond an edge thereof (e.g., onto a
    second carrier), or (b) of such height as to require that the freight
    carrier load-support area surface area on which the article rests be
    between and lower than the height of the top of the carrier trucks.

    (1)     Note.  A truck is considered to be a freight carrier for this
    subclass so that an article bridging a pair of trucks are properly
    classifiable therein.  The article may in itself, or together with
    on-and-off base, be the sole structure bridging the pair of trucks; for
    which see indented  subclass  45.




CLS 410/45
TXT Stowed as a bridge between trucks, or across cars, or on drop-center
    (schnabel type) car:

    Structure or arrangement under subclass 44 (a) in which the article, either
    by itself alone or together with an on-and-off underlying support, is
    mounted at each end onto separate, spaced apart freight carrier running
    gear structures to constitute the sole connection between those structures
    while so mounted, or (b) in which the article staddles a plurality of
    horizontally swingingly related freight carriers, or (c) in which the
    freight carrier load-support area is between and lower than the height of
    the freight carrier running gear supports.

    (1)     Note.  With respect to part (b) of the above definition, each of
    the separate spaced running gear structures (i.e., trucks) constitutes, in
    itself, a freight carrier and the article, extending from the one to the
    other extends beyond either one of them.  The requirement for placement in
    subclass 44, under (1) Note of the definition thereof, is  there- by   met.



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for a load bearer, e.g., semitrailer, stowed as a bridge between
    trucks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    296,    Land Vehicles: Bodies and Tops, subclass 25 for a dropped center
    highway vehicle, e.g., semitrailer, absent the provision thereon of load
    accommodating structure.


CLS 410/46
TXT On supporting on-and-off base:

    Structure under subclass 2 comprising underlying structure for an article
    and means for effecting the immobilization of the article on the structure
    for and through the loading and unloading sequences of accommodation on a
    freight  carrier.



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     for an on-and-off base stowed together with its article load on
    board a freight carrier by the use of accommodating (usually retainer)*
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, appropriate subclass for an article
    preassembled on an on-and-off container to constitute a shipping unit, but
    lacking means interengageable with a freight carrier for accommodation
    against the hazards of transportation.

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 1.5 for a freight container.


CLS 410/47
TXT Cylindrical article accommodation:
    Structure under subclass 2 particularly designed to accommodate an elongate
    article of substantially circular cross section; i.e., to utilize a
    structural feature of, or nullify a particular problem inherent in, the
    shape of the article.




CLS 410/48
TXT Rigid retainer* acting as, or retentively contacting a core or hub:

    Structure under subclass 47 including rigid means retentively engaging the
    article along its longitudinal axis, or retentively engaging a member
    axially related to (generally, an axial part of)  the article.



CLS 410/49
TXT Cradle or chock:

    Structure under subclass 47 in which the accommodating means defines an
    upwardly facing concavity or upwardly diverging angle(s), whether
    continuous or interrupted, in either case to engage one or both lower
    quadrants of the cylindrical article periphery and thereby inhibit
    rolling.



    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclass 32 for a chock recognized as a brake on the ground
    for that class distinguishing over the instant subclass in that it is
    applied to a surface other than that of a freight carrier.


CLS 410/50
TXT And wraparound* lashing:

    Structure under subclass 49 further including a wraparound* (load lashing
    retainer)*  attached at its ends to the freight carrier and drawn securely
    about or through the artcile to secure it against a contour-complementing
    surface of the accommodating    means.



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for a wraparound for securing the wheel of a stowed four-wheel
    vehicle to the freight carrier; and subclasses 97+ for a wraparound for
    lashing a load unit to a freight carrier, generally.


CLS 410/51
TXT DRAFT (INCLUDING PUSHED) FREIGHT CARRIER, I. E., WAGON, HAND TRUCK:

    Structure under the class definition particularly designed to accommodate a
    load unit on a freight carrier the motive force for which is intended to be
    entirely biologically muscular.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are horse drawn wagons designed for such
    facile removal of the load bearer structure from running gear as is common
    to the more contemporary load carrier stowage technology of subclasses 52+.
     Because of such commonality that has been brought about by the advance in
    the state of the art, this type of support or container is classified with
    more contemporary on-and-off load bearers of this class (410).



    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 47.131+ for an inherently unstable
    vehicle to which an article may be attached, and which may be propelled by
    a walking attendant.  Transportation (a) for a insignificant distance, as
    within a supermarket or from a building to a curbside moving van, or (b) by
    a noncommerical user, e.g., a shopper or a boatsman trailering his own boat
    would be appropriate for that Class 280, subclass 47.131 rather than the
    instant class and subclass 51.


CLS 410/52
TXT LOAD BEARER ACCOMMODATION:

    Structure under the class definition particularly designed to accommodate
    an on-and-off freight support base or receptacle; i.e., such as underlying
    support or such an enclosure as presumably receives freight thereon or
    therein prior to being loaded on the carrier and is unloaded from the
    carrier together with the freight.

    (1)     Note.  A base (pallet) or enclosure (container), per se, is herein
    included when provided with externally carried means specifically for
    cooperation with mating means on the freight carrier for the accommodation
    of said base or enclosure and will be found in the particular subclass
    provided for that particular accommodation.  The means, per se,
    specifically for cooperation with mating means on the freight carrier for
    the accommodation of said base or enclosure and will be found in the
    particular subclass provided for that particular accommodation.  The means,
    per se, found in subclasses 96+ is also herein   provided.



    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 67.1+ for a
    frame or a load bearer particularly designed (as by being provided with
    corner fittings) for cooperating with hoist equipment for loading onto or
    unloading from a freight carrier.


CLS 410/53
TXT Stowed as a bridge between trucks:
    Structure or arrangement under subclass 52 in which the load bearer is
    mounted at each end onto separate spaced apart freight carrier running gear
    structures to constitute the sole connection   between  them.



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for a particular article so massive as to be accommodated as a
    bridge between trucks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 270+ for a tank pivoted between
    railway trucks in order to orient its outlet for pouring.


CLS 410/54
TXT Diverse load accommodation, e.g., convertible between semitrailer and
    container accommodation:

    Structure under subclass 52 in which the freight carrier is particularly
    designed simultaneously or alternatively to accommodate load units of
    diverse construction, e.g., container and/or pallet and/or semitrailer,
    and, therefore, necessitating mutually distinct stowage structures or
    arrangements to be present on or be assmbled to or arranged on the freight
    carrier.

    (1)     Note.  These subclasses (54+) require a positive structural detail
    of each of the accommodations; the plurality of accommodating means or, at
    least, structure particularly provided to cooperate with each of them.
    Mere retractability for getting accommodation means of a one type out of
    the way, and going no further than to prepare the freight carrier for an
    alternative accommodation is inadequate for this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The original document to structure designed to accommodate a
    particular article, as defined in subclass 2, and also, alternatively or
    additionally, a load bearer defined in principal subclass 52 will be
    classified in the superior subclasses 2+ and should be crossed in this
    instant subclass (54).




CLS 410/55
TXT Retainer including load lashing anchor capability:

    Structure under subclass 54 appropriate for retentive engagement with a
    load bearer is combined with (e.g., has attached thereto) or is convertible
    to structure for the attachment device used in load lashing.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 101 for the definition of a load lashing
    anchor, and search indented subclass 102 for other diverse use devices
    including an anchor.



CLS 410/56
TXT Semitrailer accommodation:

    Structure under subclass 52 in which the accommodated load bearer is of the
    type provided with running gear at a location limited to the rear portion
    thereof.

    (1)     Note.  An arrangement of wheels at the front end to facilitate
    stowage (e.g., guidance) on the carrier will bar placement in this
    subclass, even though the wheels are nonroadable and have no other use than
    said storage facilitation [See (1) Note in subclass 66].  Mere lowering of
    the semitrailer landing gear does not, however, constitute stowage (e.g.,
    guidance) facilitation to make said bar to placement herein operative.



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for the inclusion of a turntable mounted on a
    semitrailer-accommodating freight carrier for stowing the trailer on board
    the carrier.

    53,     for a semitrailer stowed as a bridge between railway trucks; in
    fact, constituting the sole structure linking the spaced trucks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 414.1+ for a boat carrying, articulated
    vehicle, e.g., semitrailer.


CLS 410/57
TXT Fore-and-aft accommodation:

    Structure under subclass 56 including accommodating means engaging forward
    and rear sections of the stowed semitrailer.



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58+,    for a stand collapsibly mounted on a freight carrier for
    accommodating a semitrailer at its front end.

    64,     for details of the kingpin retaining latch of such a stand.


CLS 410/58
TXT Collapsible and erectable stand:

    Structure under subclass 56 including a support to maintain the fore end of
    a stowed semitrailer raised above the freight carrier bed and means so
    linking the support to the freight carrier bed as to be extensible to a
    raised, supporting position and foldable to a lowered position on or below
    the   bed.



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for semitrailer stowage structure including the fore-end stand and
    means accommodating the rear end of the semitrailer.


CLS 410/59
TXT Tractor operated:

    Structure under subclass 58 wherein the supporting stand is provided with
    means engageable with a loading or unloading tractor so as to utilize the
    tractor force for the extensible raising or the collapsed  lowering
    operation.




CLS 410/60
TXT Cushioned:

    Structure under subclass 59 including recoverable means, other than merely
    a resilient block, which is yieldable under the influence of an excessive
    or inadvertent force whereby to interveningly receive and thereby ward off
    the undesirable effect of the force upon the stand or the stowed trailer;
    which means tends to be restored to its prior state upon, and as a
    consequence of, the cessation of that force.




CLS 410/61
TXT Jack screw erected:

    Structure under subclass 58 in which the mounting means for the fore-end
    stand includes threaded means operable to obtain a force multiplying
    advantage effective to facilitate raising of the stand and with it,
    presumably, the mass of the supported fraction of the load.




CLS 410/62
TXT (Fore-and-aft direction slide cushioning means)*:

    Structure under subclass 58 wherein the mounting means for the trailer
    support includes a base portion installed along the carrier floor for
    movement parallel to the longitudinal axis of the carrier under the
    influence of (fore-and-aft direction slide cushioning  means)*.




CLS 410/63
TXT Cushioned cylinder strut:

    Structure under subclass 58 wherein the mounting means for the trailer
    support comprises underlying leg means including a leg consisting of hollow
    interfitting parts which enclose means which render than yieldable for
    telescopic movement in response to inadvertent force incident to freight
    transportation and recoverable to the earlier state upon and as a
    consequence of cessation of  the  force.




CLS 410/64
TXT King pin latch:

    Structure under subclass 58 in which the trailer fore-end support includes
    means particularly designed for releasable retentive connection with a post
    extending downward from the underside of the fore end of the trailer, which
    post is analogously employed to join the trailer to the tractor during
    road  use.




CLS 410/65
TXT Accommodation means conforms to wheel sidewall during guidance or rest
    condition, e.g., rub rail or wheel well:

    Structure under subclass 56 in which the freight carrier support surface is
    provided with accommodation means of such configuration as to be in
    engagement with a sidewall of the semitrailer wheel during its movement
    along the freight carrier to a stowed location or when it is at that
    location, whereby lateral movement of the semitrailer is thereby prevented.

    (1)     Note.  The mere lowering of the wheeled landing gear on a deck
    surface is not considered to convert a semitrailer to a four-wheeled
    vehicle to bar placement in ths subclass in favor of lower subclasses 66+.
    However, additional (e.g., fore-end) wheels to facilitate guidance for
    stowage on the freight carrier, even though such additional wheels are
    nonroadable and have only that stowage facilitation use and capability, is
    subject matter for that inferior subclass and will be found therein rather
    than in the instant subclass.  See (1) Note in principal subclass 56.



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for a freight carrier provided with rub rail or sunken area
    structure accommodating the rear wheels of a stowed semitrailer and also
    with means accommodating the fore end of the semitrailer.

    67,     for rub rail or sunken area structure accommodating a four-wheeled
    load bearer.


CLS 410/66
TXT Wheeled load bearer accommodation:
    Structure under subclass 52 particularly designed to accommodate such a
    load bearer as includes rolling support means.

    (1)     Note.  The "rolling support means" commonly but not necessarily
    constitutes the running gear for road use; see indented subclass 67
    however, wherein are to be found four-wheel vehicles having roller support
    structure having utility for facilitating stowage, but impractical  for
    road  use.



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for a freight-carrier-mounted turntable for stowing a wheeled
    vehicle, typically a semitrailer, on board; and wherein wheel guide
    structure (e.g., track) is mounted on the turntable and wherein, moreover,
    mating guide (track) structure may further be mounted on the freight
    carrier.


CLS 410/67
TXT Including wheel guide:

    Structure under subclass 66 in which the freight carrier floor structure is
    provided with means contacting the rolling support members for guiding or
    for accommodating the supported load  unit to or at  its stowed  position.



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for a freight carrier provided with such structure and also with
    structure accommodating the fore end of the stowed semitrailer.

    65,     for wheel guides of the rub rail type for accommodating a
    semitrailer.


CLS 410/68
TXT Accommodation of rigid wall container for bulk material:

    Structure under subclass 52 particularly designed to accommodate such an
    enclosure as (a) is form sustaining, and (b) contains fluent, particulate,
    or aggregate material.



    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 270 for a container for fluids
    pivoted on its axis between railway trucks so as to reorient the outlet for
    pouring; and subclasses 358+ for tank cars.


CLS 410/69
TXT Load bearer tripped retainer*:

    Structure under subclass 52 including a retainer for the load bearer
    including a part so mounted and so positioned on the freight carrier as to
    be moved as a result of contact with a load bearer which is being stowed on
    the freight carrier.

    (1)     Note.  The contact-induced movement may be of the reset type; i.e.,
    undergoing displacement to permit the load carrier to move therepast to be
    finally positioned, provided that the displacement is followed by spring,
    gravity, etc., induced resetting for ultimate retentive engagement.




CLS 410/70
TXT Retainer* mounted on (corner pedestal)*: Structure under subclass 69 in
    which a load bearer retainer* is installed to extend and move through a
    wall of a (corner pedestal)* so as to be load tripped upon the load bearer
    corner(s) mating  therewith.




CLS 410/71
TXT Corner pedestal:

    Structure under subclass 52 including a horizontal member engaging the
    meeting edges of a corner of a load bearer and vertical members upstanding
    from the outer edges of the horizontal member in position to engage
    corresponding vertical surfaces of said load bearer meeting edges to
    inhibit horizontal displacement of the load bearer on the freight carrier
    in the direction both longitudinally and transversely of the freight
    carrier; the accommodating structure being positioned to maintain the load
    bearer somewhat raised from the freight carrier surface.

    (1)     Note.  The presence of the horizontal member merely upon the upper
    surface of the freight carrier floor is adequate to satisfy the "somewhat
    raised" requirement of this instant subclass definition.

    (2)     Note.  The disclosure is commonly directed, of course, to a set of
    four corner pedestals for the respective four corners of the load bearer.



CLS 410/72
TXT Vertically displaceable, e.g., on horizontal axis:

    Structure under subclass 71 including mounting means which permits
    displacement of the corner pedestal between an upper position to maintain
    the load bearer somewhat raised and a lower, generally  nonuse, position of
     the pedestal.




CLS 410/73
TXT Including male-female retainer*:

    Structure under subclass 72 in which the corner pedestal is provided with,
    or is constructed to mount a retainer*, which is effective within the
    confines of the vertical and horizontal pedestal members, to penetrate a
    load bearer corner aperture.


CLS 410/74
TXT Mounted on pedestal which is also slidable along track:

    Structure under subclass 73 in which the corner pedestal which is provided
    with or which mounts the retainer* is itself mounted on guide means for
    movement toward or away from the location the corner of a stowed load
    bearer is intended to occupy.


CLS 410/75
TXT And slidable along track:

    Structure under subclass 72 in which the freight carrier is provided with
    guide means constraining the corner pedestal for movement there
    along-toward and away from an intended location relative to the corner of a
    stowed load bearer.


CLS 410/76
TXT Including male-female retainer*:

    Structure under subclass 71 in which the corner pedestal is provided with,
    or is constructed to mount a retainer*, effective within the confines of
    the horizontal and vertical pedestal members, to penetrate within a load
    bearer corner recess.



CLS 410/77
TXT Retainer:

    Structure under subclass 52 in which the accommodating means is attached to
    the freight carrier and engages a part of the stowed load bearer adequately
    to effect securement thereto; i.e., to inhibit displacement of the load
    carrier on the freight carrier in both the lateral and vertical direction.

    (1)     Note.  Inhibition of displacement in the lateral direction is
    presumed when means inhibiting displacement in the vertical direction is
    brought into play.  However, merely inhibiting displacement in the lateral
    direction will not be assumed to constitute, in itself, retainer structure
    as herein defined but will be recognized only as generic accommodating
    means.  Rigid material hold-down structure of the hold-down type is
    predominantly the expedient by which to inhibit vertical displacement of a
    load--and, typically, lateral displacement as well (note, however, the load
    bearer (load lashing retainer)* in subclass 85).  The basics of a hold-down
    is paraphrased from the definition of Class 248, Supports, subclass 501, as
    follows:

            --form-sustaining structure having an undersurface portion for
    engaging an upwardly facing portion of a article to retain the article on a
    support surface--; to wit, in the instant context, a load bearer on a
    freight carrier surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for the accommodation of a semitrailer on a freight carrier by
    means cooperating with fore and with aft sections of the semitrailer, which
    means may be retainer*.

    64,     for the retention of a semitrailer on a freight carrier by latch
    means on a stand retentively engaging the king pin at the fore end of the
    semitrailer supported on the stand.


CLS 410/78
TXT Multiunit retainer:

    Structure under subclass 77 in which (a) the retainer includes parts
    particularly interrelated for retaining a corresponding plurality of stowed
    load bearers, or (b) there is further provided a common operator to
    associate or disassociate a plurality of retainers with respect to a
    corresponding plurality of load bearer units.

    (1)     Note.  Consonant with the scope thereof, the above definition does
    not comprehend the customary plurality of retainers which, in fact, act
    independently of one another in their engagement with load bearers.  Nor
    does this subclass include the plurality of retainers; however,
    interrelated in operation, for cooperating in retentively engaging
    different parts of but a single load unit.



CLS 410/79
TXT Oppositely directed latch pair to retain contiguous load bearers:

    Structure under subclass 78 in which the retainer is provided with lateral
    projections extending in opposite directions and parallel to the surface on
    which the load bearers are supported so as to be in retentive engagement
    with a respective pair of side-by-side load bearers.



CLS 410/80
TXT Load bearer understructure retention, e.g., leg engaging:

    Structure under subclass 77 including a part mounted on the freight carrier
    and retentively engaging such a load bearer part as is positioned or
    projects below the load-support surface therof.



CLS 410/81
TXT By insertion of completely separable retainer, e.g., bolt, through aligned
    aperture:

    Structure under subclass 80 wherein the retention is effected by the
    passage of a hitherto independent elongated fastener through coaxial
    apertures through each of the freight carrier and load bearer parts.

    (1)     Note.  The fastener was "hitherto independent" when carried upon
    the person for use as a retainer.  It is also considered "hitherto
    independent" when hung from a chain or the like at a convenient spot on the
    load bearer or freight carrier surface.



CLS 410/82
TXT Twist lock:

    Structure under subclass 77 comprising a flanged shift the flange of which
    enters a load bearer fitting past a restriction which partially blocks
    egress, the shaft being then rotatable about its axis whereby to turn the
    flange behind the engress-blocking restriction whereby to lock and retain
    the load bearer on the freight carrier.



    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 287 for a twist lock
    joining adjacent load bearers; frequently when on a freight carrier.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 81 for a
    handling device equipped with twist lock terminals to enter the corner
    fittings of a load bearer for the handling thereof, i.e., to load a load
    bearer on, or unload one from a freight carrier.


CLS 410/83
TXT Project-retract mounting:

    Structure under subclass 82 including means which is on, or parallel to the
    support surface of the load bearer on the freight carrier, which means
    mounts the retainer for displacement between (a) an operative position for
    entry into a load bearer fitting, and (b) a nonuse position locating the
    retainer flange below the level of that support surface.

    (1)     Note.  The load bearer support surface could be the floor or a
    bolster of the freight carrier or could be a floor- or bolster-attached
    housing for the twist lock flanged member.



CLS 410/84
TXT Load bearer mounts active retainer received by static freight carrier
    keeper:

    Structure under subclass 77 in which the freight carrier includes a fixed
    member and the load bearer is equipped with retainer structure including a
    part movable into retentive engagement with said carrier fixed member.



CLS 410/85
TXT Load bearer (load lashing retainer)*:
    Structure under subclass 77 in which the accommodating means is a (load
    lashing retainer)*.



CLS 410/86
TXT Including load bearer cushioning means:
    Structure under subclass 77 comprising means so retaining the load bearer
    or so related to the load bearer support or retaining structure as to
    impart thereto recoverable movability so as to be movably yieldable under
    an excessive or undesirable force and thereby ward off the undesirable
    effect of that force.

    (1)     Note.  The mere compression of a solid block is not herein provided
    for.




CLS 410/87
TXT Cushioned accommodation:

    Structure under subclass 52 comprising means so participating in the
    accommodation of the load bearer as to impart to the load bearer
    recoverable movability so as to be yieldable under an excessive or
    inadvertent force and thereby ward off the undesirable effect of that force
    upon the load   u nit.



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117+,   for a yieldable brace for a load unit, generally.


CLS 410/88
TXT (Fore-and-aft direction slide cushioning means)*:

    Structure under subclass 87 so related to the load bearer as to constitute
    (fore-and-aft direction slide cushioning means)* therefor.



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for (fore-and-aft direction slide cushioning means)* for
    semitrailer stand-support accommodation.


CLS 410/89
TXT Wall-to-wall socket-entering load bearer: Structure under subclass 52 in
    which a wall of the freight carrier is provided with means defining a
    recess, matched by a corresponding recess means on an opposed wall, and the
    load bearer is provided with a projection mating with said means for
    accommodation of the load bearer on the freight carrier.



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for a wall-to-wall socketed load bearer convertible to a brace
    panel by being repositioned to extend wall-to-wall, but vertically.

    132+    and 142, for a freight carrier having a wall-to-wall brace panel
    with pin-in-socket panel-to-wall association.

    144+,   for projection-in-aperture association of a wall-to-wall brace bar
    with the freight carrier wall.


CLS 410/90
TXT Load bearer accommodation by underside socketing:

    Structure under subclass 52 in which, at the common plane whereat the load
    bearer undersurface rests on the freight carrier floor, a projection
    extends from one of these and enters a recess of the other to inhibit
    lateral shifting of the load bearer on the floor.



CLS 410/91
TXT Pin-socket accommodation:

    Structure under subclass 90 in which the projection is a localized male
    post member and the recess is an aperture surrounding the member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     for a projection-in-fitting retainer* arrangement wherein both
    projection and fitting are apertured and wherein the apertures are
    alignable so as to receive a bolt or boltlike member to retain the load
    bearer unit on the freight carrier.


CLS 410/92
TXT Rollerway:

    Structure under subclass 52 including an assemblage of members each of
    which is so mounted along the load-supporting surface of the freight
    carrier as to be rotatable about its own individual axis, or center for a
    sphere, and so projecting or projectible from that surface as to be
    engageable with the undersurface of a load bearer to facilitate movement
    thereof to an appropriate location on the freight carrier.


CLS 410/93
TXT Drop side car, side converts to ramp:
    Structure under subclass 52 comprising a freight carrier component, usually
    side wall member, hinged at an outside edge of the freight carrier floor
    for swinging movement between (a) vertically upstanding position
    constituting a barrier to the shifting movement of the load unit past the
    freight carrier, and (b) a lowered position to permit loading or unloading
    of the load unit thereacross; the component being one in a parallel array
    along said edge to substantially coincide with the edge widths of load
    bearers intended to be arrayed along the freight carrier.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 118.3 for an aircraft closure panel swingably
    displaceable outwardly and downwardly to constitute an on-ground loading
    ramp.


CLS 410/94
TXT Load bearer abutment:

    Structure under subclass 52 comprising a rigid member connected to and
    upstanding from the floor of a freight carrier to engage and prevent
    lateral movement of a stowed load bearer there past.



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121,    154 and 155, for dunnage members; i.e., free standing and
    unconnected to the freight carrier to fill in spaces between load units.


CLS 410/95
TXT Between load bearer units:

    Structure under subclass 94 in which the rigid upstanding member spans the
    space between and thereby abuttingly separates adjacent load bearers on the
    freight carrier.



CLS 410/96
TXT LOAD LASHING RETAINER OR LOAD LASHING ADJUNCT:

    Structure under the class definition including (a) flexible member means to
    engage lading on a freight carrier to control the lading against
    inadvertent shifting during transportation, or (b) means attachable to the
    freight carrier for securement of the flexible member means thereto and,
    thereby, to the freight carrier, or (c) an arrangement of lading, including
    the use of flexible member means, to accomplish the purpose hereinabove
    defined.

    (1)     Note.  Attention is directed to the (1) Note proviso in the
    definition of indented subclass 101 that an anchor (or equivalent hardware)
    for a flexible member disclosed as merely bracing the lading (along only
    one edge, as under subclass(es) 117) is not barred from placement therein
    (subclasses 101+).



CLS 410/97
TXT Wraparound:

    Structure under subclass 96 wherein the flexible means encircles the lading
    to effect retention thereof on the freight carrier.

    (1)     Note.  2700 of encirclement will suffice for this subclass only
    when a wall or other car surface panel structure, e.g., bulkhead, or car
    side, completes the remaining 900 encirclement.



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for a wraparound*-type retainer consisting however, of an assembly
    of rigid material rod members (as opposed to chain links) joined angularly
    and end-to-end to tightly encompass a lading unit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclasses 309+ for wraparound means
    for securing an article, e.g., package, to the roof of a passenger vehicle.


CLS 410/98
TXT Method:

    Process under subclass 97 including the use of a wraparound* to retain
    lading on a freight carrier to control inadvertent shifting thereof during
    transportation.



CLS 410/99
TXT Including angular surface guard, e.g., edge-around:

    Subject matter under subclass 97 in which the encircled load unit has a
    rectangular or an arcuate dimension and, therefor, includes a corner or a
    curved outer surface location and in which the rigid material member
    protectively intervenes at that location either (a) between the lading and
    the flexible means encircling it, or (b) as a connector between adjacent
    ends of flexible means members.



CLS 410/100
TXT Including tightener or tensioner:

    Structure under subclass 97 including force-multiplying means to draw the
    flexible member means in tight encirclement about lading, e.g., winch,
    turnbuckle, jack screw, (but not mere linkage) or spring means connected to
    the flexible member means in intervening relation between the lading and
    the freight carrier to provide a force constantly urging the flexible
    member means into tight compaction about the lading.



CLS 410/101
TXT Anchor:

    Structure under subclass 96 comprising an attachment device secured to a
    freight carrier surface at a location (usually one of a number of
    locations) for securing an end of a flexible member thereto to leave the
    remainder thereof available for use in constraining lading against
    inadvertent shifting during transport on board the carrier.

    (1)     Note.  Disclosure that the attached flexible member is used merely
    for bracing, as defined in subclass 117, will not bar placement of the
    anchor subcombination in this locus (subclasses 101+).




CLS 410/102
TXT Multipurpose, e.g., combined, convertible: Structure under subclass 101 in
    which the anchor location is both the tie piece* locus and also the locus
    for structure which serves another purpose, e.g., hold down, bracket, brace
    bar receiver, even for retaining a second flexible member.

    (1)     Note.  The plural uses may be simultaneous or alternative and may,
    but need not necessarily, involve rearrangement, modification, or
    substitution of parts.



CLS 410/103
TXT Including winch or tensioner:

    Structure under subclass 101 in which the device is provided with
    tautenting means which is effective either by taking up a turn on the
    flexible member, e.g., drum, or by augmenting the force applied through the
    (tie piece)*

    .

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 199+ and 213+ for a cable tautening device, including a tie
    piece to retain the end of a load lashing or binding cable.


CLS 410/104
TXT Track-guided anchor:

    Structure under subclass 101 including an elongated member fixed to a
    surface of the freight carrier and constructed to mount a tie piece* for
    guided sliding movement to one of a plurality of locations along the length
    of said member most suitable for the instant load retaining arrangement.



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10      and 11, for tiedown structure to retain a four-wheel vehicle on a
    freight carrier, which structure includes track-guided anchor structure;
    and for track-guided anchor structure, per se, limited to this use.

    115,    for an elongated member which in itself provides an array of anchor
    locations or which is provided with an array of locations to which tie
    pieces are mounted; there being no guide structure for communication
    between the locations.


CLS 410/105
TXT Anchor-admitting cross-slotted track:
    Structure under subclass 104 in which the elongated mounting member is
    formed with passage means having at least one communicating side recess and
    the flexible-member-retaining device is formed at its end with a
    correspondingly relatively wide mounting portion receivable through said
    side recess but too large for entry or escape through any other part of the
    passage.



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150,    for a cross-slotted track for slidably guiding and selectively
    locating the end of a brace bar along a freight carrier wall.


CLS 410/106
TXT Mounted on exposed and bordering structural member:

    Structure under subclass 101 in which the device is affixed to or formed
    from a single elongated structural member, e.g., top chord or bulb angle,
    side sill of flat car, incorporated in and recognized as basic carrier
    structure for the framing of the cargo space available to the ambient, or
    to a door  post  of a  box car.



CLS 410/107
TXT Project-retract (tie piece)*:

    Structure under subclass 106 in which the device includes a (tie piece)*
    mounted for movement from a nonuse position within the bounds of the
    exposed surface configuration of the structural member to a position
    maintained exposed therepast, as by force exerted on the attached
    lading-engaging  flexible  member.




CLS 410/108
TXT In exposed array therealong:

    Structure under subclass 106 in which a row of (tie piece)* or anchor
    formations is mounted or arranged on the framing member at loci whereat all
    are substantially bordering the freight carrier contour and available to
    the ambient.



CLS 410/109
TXT And inboard-mounted anchor, e.g., recessed in car facing:

    Structure under subclass 108 further including another
    flexible-member-retaining device secured to the carrier within the confines
    (though not necessarily the plane) of the framework.



CLS 410/110
TXT Atop wall of open top freight carrier, e.g., bulb-angle mounted:

    Structure under subclass 108 in which a row of (tie pieces)* or anchor
    formations is arranged along, or adjacent and parallel to, the uppermost
    edge of the vertical body member of the freight carrier and thereby in an
    exposed and bordering array because the freight carrier has no top wall
    structure to thwart access thereto.



CLS 410/111
TXT Project-retract (tie piece)*:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 in which the (tie piece)* is mounted so
    as to be recessed within the bounds of the mounting structure in the nonuse
    position thereof and be shiftable to extend therebeyond and be maintained
    in that position under the force applied to the attached flexible, lading
    engaging  member.



CLS 410/112
TXT Recessed in car facing:

    Structure under subclass 101 in which covering material is so formed or so
    mounted on a surface of the freight carrier exposed to lading as to define
    an inset at or along that surface; and in which anchor structure, either
    the entire anchor or only the (tie piece)* thereof, is so mounted as to be
    available only at the inset and to be confined within the plane defined by
    the exposed surface of the covering  material.



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for such a project-retract tie piece on a bordening surface of a
    freight carrier open to the ambient.

    111,    for a project-retract tie piece which is recessed in freight
    carrier facing in its nonuse position.


CLS 410/113
TXT Recessed anchor array:

    Structure under subclass 112 in which the attachment device for the
    flexible material member essentially is, or includes elongated member means
    having a row of anchor locations therealong, the anchor locations being
    provided by (a) spaced formations shaped from (e.g., stricken from) the
    elongated member means to provide access thereto for the end of the
    flexible member, or (b) the arrangement of an elongated member and such
    backing, support, or other adjacent freight carrier interior structure as
    defines such spaced access formation, or (c) a spaced row of (tie pieces)*
    added on (e.g., welded on) to the elongated member means; the attachment
    device in any of these constructions or arrangements being so surrounded by
    adjacent structural details as to be accessible only at or within the plane
    defined thereby.



CLS 410/114
TXT Of attached (tie pieces)*, e.g., welded:
    Structure under subclass 113 in which the anchor locations are defined by a
    row of individual (tie pieces)* mounted along the elongated anchor array
    member means at the anchor intervals and contained within the exposed plane
    of the covering    means

    .

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    the principal subclass, for the anchor array provided by the
    elongated anchor member itself by means of formations therealong at the
    anchor intervals and unitary therewith; or by the way it is mounted and
    related to adjacent freight carrier structure.


CLS 410/115
TXT Array strip or formation:
    Structure under subclass 101 comprising elongated member means, e.g., bar,
    strip, post; and see (1) Note, below, fixed to the freight carrier surface
    and provided at intervals along the length thereof either (a) with the
    individual tie pieces*, or (b) with a row of unitary formations or
    arrangements for the direct connection thereto of the end of a lading
    engaging member.

    (1)     Note.  The "elongated member means" herein defined may be, in fact,
    part of wider panel structure (e.g., edge, flange; see subclass 108) only
    when it is unmistakably distinct from the rest of the panel and so narrow
    as hardly to permit more than a single anchoring to occur at a single
    location along the row (two would be rare and could occur only under the
    limitations of subclass 102).



CLS 410/116
TXT Including mounting means for facile assembly or removal of (tie piece)*:

    Structure under subclass 101 in which the attachment device includes a (tie
    piece)* provided with means mounting the device for ready securement to and
    disengagement from the freight carrier.

    (1)     Note.  The requirement for either facile securement or
    disengagement is met where either is disclosed and it is obvious that a
    reverse manipulation will complete both.  Facility in assembling and
    removal is presumably negated by the necessity to use a tool: but not
    necessarily.  Delivering a light blow to unwedge the device, for example,
    need not necessarily negate operational facility.

    (2)     Note.  Performance of facile assembly and removal may occur for the
    tie piece and anchor mounting as a unit; or by association and
    disassociation of the tie piece alone from the means which mounts it on the
    anchor receiver and remains with it.



CLS 410/117
TXT YIELDABLE BRACE:

    Structure under the class definition comprising accommodating means which
    (a) is in whole or in part of flaccid material so as to yield upon
    application against lading when the means is installed on the freight
    carrier, or (b) subsequent to positioning or installation on the freight
    carrier is in such direct engagement with the load unit and is of such
    deformable construction that it will undergo a change of shape upon
    receiving force from lading disturbed by untoward occurrence during
    shipment.



CLS 410/118
TXT Panel:

    Structure under subclass 117 in which the accommodating means is a
    deformable member of significant length and breadth conformingly to engage
    a surface area of the load unit.



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121+,   (e.g., 123+, indented thereunder), for load bracing panel means in
    which the member directly engaging a surface of the load unit is rigid and
    essentially nondeformable but is provided with yieldable means urging the
    panel into bracing augmentation with the load unit, compare, for example,
    subclass 119 indented hereunder, with subclass 125, indented under 123.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, subclasses 154+ for
    flexible covers for the protection of articles, generally.


CLS 410/119
TXT Inflated or inflatable:

    Structure under subclass 118 wherein the load unit engaging member is a
    wall of a bag which is filled with fluid or is in communication with a
    fluid source of reception of filling fluid for its accommodating function.



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    for a squeeze device; i.e., an inflated or inflatable bag for
    exerting lading-engaging force upon a pair of brace panels on opposite
    sides of the bag.

    128,    for pneumatic means including a bag between a brace panel and a
    freight carrier compartment wall for exerting lading-engaging force upon
    the panel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 728+ for a passenger restraint inflatable
    bag in a land vehicle.


CLS 410/120
TXT RIGID MEMBER RETAINER, E.G., WRAP-AROUND TYPE:

    Structure under the class definition comprising a rigid material retainer*,
    e.g., form-sustaining, elongate rod members, as opposed to chain links,
    articulatively or angularly joined to one another at their ends to pass
    over and to encompass a load unit in tight encirclement thereof.

    (1)     Note.  270 encompassment against a planar freight carrier surface
    is adequate for this subclass definition.



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97+,    for chain means for flexibly encircling lading or for the
    combination of flexible and rigid wraparound members, in either case to
    constitute a flexible (retainer)* (wraparound)*.


CLS 410/121
TXT LOAD BRACING MEANS:

    Structure under the class definition comprising a brace; i.e., rigid member
    means for contacting a vertical side of lading on a freight carrier to
    block inadvertent lateral shifting of the lading in transit.

    (1)     Note.  This (the principal) subclass contains dunnage members;
    i.e., freely insertable elements between and in contact with adjacent load
    units to fill the  intervening  space.



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154,    for honeycomb-shaped dunnage.

    155,    for dunnage elements shaped to contact angularly related load unit
    surfaces.


CLS 410/122
TXT Bifacial brace:

    Structure under subclass 121 in which the lading-engaging member means
    includes a pair of rigid lading-engaging panels or frames provided with
    means interconnecting them for movement away from one another and for
    maintaining them thus apart in either spaced parallelism or opposite
    divergence; the bi-member means thereby constituted being locatable in a
    space between adjacent load units with each member in blocking engagement
    with a respective confronting side of each  load  unit.



CLS 410/123
TXT Squeeze:

    Structure under subclass 122 further including fluid pressure, electrically
    powered or force-multiplying means, e.g., jack screw, ratchet, (but not
    mere linkage means) operative between the lading-engaging members to urge
    them apart for augmenting the blocking force on the lading.




CLS 410/124
TXT Powered or pressurized:

    Structure under subclass 123 wherein the means to urge the blocking member
    apart to augment the blocking force on the lading is fluid pressure or
    electrically powered means.



CLS 410/125
TXT Intervening squeeze bag:

    Structure under subclass 124 including a closed, flexible, fluid-filled
    container in intervening contact with and between the blocking members and
    of a dimension at least approaching that of the area or length of the
    members.



CLS 410/126
TXT Track guided:

    Structure under subclass 123 (a) including means installed on the freight
    carrier and extending longitudinally therealong, (b) and in engagement with
    a conformingly shaped edge portion or added-on part of at least one of the
    lading-engaging members, (c) to constrain longitudinal movement of a member
    along the freight carrier to a position effective for lading-blocking
    engagement.



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    for squeeze structure of the construction which includes an
    intervening squeeze bag and which may be track mounted.


CLS 410/127
TXT Brace panel with wall-to-lading adjustment means:

    Structure under subclass 121 comprising a rigid, planar-face lading
    engaging and bracing member and means at, or adjacent to the wall of a
    freight carrier so movably related to the member and to the wall as to
    displace the member, upon movement thereof, into load bracing contact
    therewith, or into enhancement of such contact



CLS 410/128
TXT Forcing, e.g., motorized, pressurized, or adjusted by force-multiplying
    means: Structure under subclass 127 further including means urged by fluid
    pressure or motive power or through the provision of force multiplying
    structure, e.g., turnbuckle, jack screw, but excluding mere linkage, to
    compel the shifting of the lading engaging and bracing member to its
    operative position abutting the lading.



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123     and 126, indented thereunder, for force multiplying means for
    urging the individual panels of a bifacial brace in the directions away
    from one another more tightly to brace load units at either side of the
    respective panels.

    124+,   indented under 123, for motor powered or fluid pressure means for
    effecting the same.


CLS 410/129
TXT Panel or frame, wall-to-wall:

    Structure under subclass 121 in which the rigid member means has a planar
    contour of such width and height dimensions as to be capable of
    substantially spanning the transverse dimension of the freight carrier, in
    the horizontal dimension of said means, and to extend to significant height
    vertically.

    (1)     Note.  Frame structure defining a substantially planar contour is
    considered to constitute a panel under the above definition.

    (2)     Note.  The rigid member means in this and the indented subclasses
    is referred to in disclosures classified hereunder as a bracing member, at
    other times as a bulkhead.  In either case the member is assumed to be
    effective for bracing a load unit, in any event, to be so similarly shaped
    and installed as to be classified together regardless of how referred to
    and, by implication, used. Some few such panel or frame members are herein
    classified even when not positioned wall-to-wall recognizing, for example,
    that dimensions appropriately "wall-to-wall" in a freight car do not aptly
    apply to the hold of a ship, where the panel member may be installed post
    to  post.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for a brace panel convertible to wall-to-wall socket-entering load
    bearer by being repositioned from the vertical bracing position to the
    horizontal load bearer supporting position.


CLS 410/130
TXT Track mounted:

    Structure under subclass 129 in which the planar-face member means is
    provided with a projection (usually roller equipped), and in which the
    freight carrier is equipped with means extending along the length thereof
    which is shaped to captively guide the extension for sliding or rolling
    movement therealong to position said member means at a selected one of a
    number of compartment-spanning positions intermediate the ends of the
    freight carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    for bifacial squeeze structure commonly track mounted and extending
    wall-to-wall, which latter squeeze structure includes an intervening air
    bag.

    126,    for a track mounted bifacial squeeze intervening, commonly
    wall-to-wall, between adjacent load units.


CLS 410/131
TXT Wall-to-wall pair, oppositely swinging:
    Structure under subclass 130 in which the planar face member means
    comprises a pair of planar members of a width substantially half that of
    the transverse dimension of the freight carrier interior, the members being
    turnably mounted on respective individual pivots between positions (a)
    defining a common plane transversely spanning said interior, and (b) spaced
    substantial parallelism to one another and adjacent parallelism to each
    respective freight carrier side wall.


CLS 410/132
TXT Including pin-in-aperture latch:

    Structure under subclass 130 in which the planar face member means is
    provided with a pin-shaped element extending or extensible from an edge
    thereof and the freight carrier is provided with a series of conformingly
    shaped openings; i.e., holes or slots, extending along the length thereof
    for the selective reception of the pin-shaped element to fixedly lock the
    planar member means at a selected position along the length of the freight
    carrier.



CLS 410/133
TXT Track is apertured to defined both (a) a sprocket wheel rack, and (b) a
    series of latch pin receivers:

    Structure under subclass 132 in which the guide for the movement of the
    planar face member means, or immediately adjacent structure fixedly secured
    to the guide, is provided with (a) a series of openings therealong to
    cooperate with sprocket means rolling therealong, and (b) with another
    series of openings to define lock pin receivers.


CLS 410/134
TXT Gang-operated latch pins:

    Structure under subclass 133 including operating means so linked to a
    spaced plurality of lock elements as sequentially or simultaneously to move
    them into or out of lock position with respective lock apertures.



CLS 410/135
TXT Panel movable to out-of-way position:
    Structure under subclass 132 in which the planar face member means is
    shiftable to a nonblocking position close to and substantially parallel to
    one of the freight carrier interior surfaces.



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131,    for panel structure constituted from a pair member which is
    positionable to complement one another for the wall-to-wall arrangement and
    are individually and oppositely swingable about respective hinges adjacent
    opposite freight carrier walls to out-of-way adjacency parallel to these
    walls.


CLS 410/136
TXT Winched:

    Structure under subclass 135 including cable and pulley means, the pulley
    being attached to the freight carrier and the cable extending from the
    pulley and attached adjacent the distal end of the pivoted panel or frame
    member for turning it about the pivot at its other end to an out-of-the way
    position adjacent and parallel to a freight carrier, usually the upper
    surface thereof.


CLS 410/137
TXT Gang-operated latch pins:

    Structure under subclass 132 including operating means so linked to a
    spaced plurality of lock elements as sequentially or simultaneously to move
    them into or out of locking engagement with the respective lock apertures.


CLS 410/138
TXT Including pin which latches into track aperture:

    Structure under subclass 137 in which the spaced plurality of members
    includes one which is movable into or out of lock engagement with one of
    the lock openings which is in a series formed along the
    panel-movement-controlling guide.



CLS 410/139
TXT Track is apertured to receive latch pin:
    Structure under subclass 132 in which the guide for the sliding movement of
    the planar face member means is provided with a series of openings along
    the length thereof for the selective reception of the pin-shaped lock
    element.



CLS 410/140
TXT Deployed structure or comprising individually installed parts:

    Structure under subclass 129 in which the planar face rigid member means
    consists of a number of parts (e.g., planking, linked members) and in which
    (a) each part is sequentially installed along a common vertical plane in
    wall-to-wall spanning arrangement to define, in the composite, the planar
    face panel structure, or (b) members are so pivotally linked to one another
    as to be installed by extending them from substantially side-by-side
    parallelism to compartment-spanning   configuration.



CLS 410/141
TXT Latched to side wall aperture or slot:
    Structure under subclass 140 in which the parts are installed by the
    reception of a projection at their ends into an opening of a receiver
    therefor mounted at or formed from a side wall of the freight carrier.

    (1)     Note.  The projection-receiving opening may be defined by an
    endless or discontinued wall configuration.


CLS 410/142
TXT Having aperature-entering latch pin:
    Structure under subclass 129 in which the planar face rigid member means is
    provided with a pin-shaped element extending or extensible from an edge
    thereof receivable in a conformingly shaped opening formed at a freight
    carrier surface to fixedly lock said member means in the substantially
    wall-to-wall position at a location intermediate the end walls of the
    freight carrier.


CLS 410/143
TXT Brace bar, wall-to-wall:

    Structure under subclass 121 for use in a freight carrier having opposed
    side walls between its ends; and in which the rigid member means
    constitutes an elongate compartment-spanning member provided with end means
    for securement to the opposed side walls of the freight carrier at the
    location where it abuts lading and inhibits shifting thereof during transit.

    (1)     Note.  A brace bar receiver either installed along or formed from
    the opposed side walls and cooperating with the end means of the spanning
    member for its securement is provided for hereunder (for which see indented
    subclass 152).

    (2)     Note.  The limitation "end means" is limited to one of the usual
    pair of structures under the subclass definition to function at one of the
    pair of brace bar ends.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129+,   for a wall-to-wall brace panel at times referred to as a "bulkhead".


CLS 410/144
TXT Aperature-entering wall-to-wall connection at the end:

    Structure under subclass 143 in which one of (a) the end means, or (b) the
    brace bar receiver is provided with a passage and the other includes a
    member (or members) which enters, substantially fills, and is blockingly
    bounded on all sides of the passage.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass has been defined to provide for such a passage
    as has an endless border completely to block movement of the contained
    member laterally therepast.  Hence, the passage is not a slot or any other
    formation which has a discontinuity negating such endless border
    configuration.  See subclass 150 for an end-fitting-receiving passage which
    is a cross slot in open communication with an elongated passage
    constituting a track; hence, not provided for in subclasses 144+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132+    and 142, for a brace panel installed wall-to-wall by the use of
    aperture-entering latch pin.


CLS 410/145
TXT Axially adjustable toward wall, e.g., telescopic:

    Structure under subclass 144 in which the compartment-spanning member
    includes a part which is shiftable relative to the remainder in the
    direction of the longitudinal axis of the whole to compensate for
    differences in space between opposed receivers therefor, or otherwise to
    facilitate compartment-spanning installation.

    (1)     Note.  The shiftable part is commonly an end fitting which mounts
    the end means or itself constitutes end means in that it includes a
    projection; i.e., pin or hook member, which enters the aperture of the
    brace bar receiver for installation between the freight carrier walls.


CLS 410/146
TXT Axially adjustable end fitting, with pivoted aperture-entering part:

    Structure under subclass 145 in which the projection (pin or hook) is
    swingably mounted on the end fitting for entry of the projection through
    the passage in the brace bar receiver mounted on the freight carrier wall.



CLS 410/147
TXT Aperture-entering duo:

    Structure under subclass 146 in which the swingably mounted projection is
    one of a pair of aperture-entering projections.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass (a) each aperture-ending projection of the
    pair may be mounted on its own swinging part, (b) both mounted on the same
    swinging part, (c) one of the pair not swingably mounted on the end fitting
    at all, or (d) any arrangement of an aperture-entering pair of projections,
    provided that one of the pair swingably enters the aperture, as hereinabove
    defined.  The projections may both enter the same aperture or each enter a
    separate aperture.



CLS 410/148
TXT Axially adjustable end fitting has integral aperture-entering part and
    pivotally mounted cooperating latch part:

    Structure under subclass 145 in which the end fitting is an attachment
    member which includes (a) a projecting part (pin or hook) shiftable as a
    unit therewith for entry into a receiver aperture, and (b) another part
    mounted adjacent thereto for swinging movement toward the free end of said
    first part to a position contiguous with the receiver surface to interfere
    with the removal of the said first part from the receiver aperture.


CLS 410/149
TXT Spring biased:

    Structure under subclass 145 including resilient means effective between
    the relatively shiftable parts to urge them apart or together and thereby
    toward or away from the freight carrier side wall.

    (1)     Note.  The direction in which the parts are urged is usually toward
    the freight carrier wall and the installed receiver; however, an opposite
    bias relation and effect (away from the wall and receiver) is herein also
    provided; to tighten an end part hook portion against an inside wall of a
    receiver aperture after installation of the hooked end  therein.


CLS 410/150
TXT Track mounted, for slidable adjustment along the car wall:

    Structure under subclass 143 in which the brace bar receiver extends
    longitudinally a substantial distance between the ends of the freight
    carrier and is configured to cooperate with the end means of the
    comparment-spanning member to guide the member for displacement within the
    freight carrier through said distance.



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8+,     for track-mounted structure for a retainer for a stowed vehicle.

    74      and 75, for a track-mounted corner pedestal on which a load bearer
    is retained or merely accommodated, respectively.

    104+,   for a track-mounted load lashing anchor.

    130+,   for track-mounted brace panel structure.


CLS 410/151
TXT Wall-to-wall force fit; or having wall-piercing end:

    Structure under subclass 143 in which the compartment-spanning member is
    retained between the side walls either (a) by the tightness of the
    engagement therewith, or (b) by means of a wall-penetrating prong or nail.



CLS 410/152
TXT Brace bar receiver:

    Structure under subclass 143 comprising means either installed along or
    formed from opposed side walls of the freight carrier for cooperating with
    the end means of the elongate spanning member for securement of one to the
    other.


CLS 410/153
TXT Brace post:

    Structure under subclass 121 in which the rigid member means is an
    elongated, vertically upstanding member, or group of members unattached to
    one another; and in which the freight carrier includes means or formations
    for the attachment or positioning of the member thereon in load
    accommodating juxtapositioning




    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 380+ for stakes for bracing
    lading at the edge of a freight car; and subclasses 390+ for stake pockets.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclass 43 for a land vehicle
    body having a stake to hold its load in place.


CLS 410/154
TXT Honeycomb:

    Structure under subclass 121 which is free-standing, i.e., unconnected to
    the freight carrier and abuts lading to fill otherwise unoccupied space,
    the structure defining a parallel array, or arrays, of formations of
    endless configuration constituted from interconnected sets of thin panel
    portions with faces spaced from one another except at their serially
    interconnected edges.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 116+ for
    nonmetallic honeycomb stock material; and subclass 593 for metallic
    honeycomb stock material.


CLS 410/155
TXT Edge-around dunnage brace:

    Structure under subclass 121 the unit of which is a member freely
    intervening, i.e., unconnected to the carrier, between load units of
    angular configuration, the member defining a part or spaced parts of
    complementing angular configuration whereby contactively to extend about
    both sides of the edge defining the angular configuration.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for an edge-around corner guard used in a lashed-together group of
    regularly contoured articles.

    90,     for the edge-around guard used in wraparound lashing of
    indiscriminate freight.


CLS 410/156
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Structure under the class definition not provided in for  in any other
    preceding subclass.


CLS 411/
TTL EXPANDED, THREADED, DRIVEN,  HEADED, TOOL-DEFORMED, OR  LOCKED-THREADED
    FASTENER

CLS 411/
TXT
    This class is the locus for the following types of fasteners when they are
    adapted for general use and are not sufficiently limited to use with
    special articles or structures as to require classification therewith:

    (a)     An anchoring-type or holding-type fastener which expands upon
    receiving a driven fastener or when driven by a tool;

    (b)     A tool driven externally threaded fastener (e.g., bolt, screw);

    (c)     A tool driven internally threaded fastener (e.g., nut);

    (d)     An impact driven fastener (e.g., nail, staple);

    (e)     A tool driven or discrete (i.e., not affixed to workpiece), headed,
    elongated-shank fastener adapted to be moved along its longitudinal axis
    into coaxial apertures in a workpiece, wherein the headed, elongated-shank
    fastener is secured by either (1) a deformable end (e.g., rivet), (2) means
    other than threads requiring rotation for engagement (e.g., Dzus-type or
    quarter-turn fastener), (3) pivotable securing means (e.g., toggle bolt),
    (4) retractable securing means (e.g., ball detent fastener), or (5) a
    separate retaining element; and

    (f)     A tool deformed or tool driven fastener (e.g., cotter pin) which is
    closely allied in use with the other fasteners of this class.

    This class is also the locus for a threaded bolt (i.e., externally threaded
    fastener) or a threaded nut (i.e., internally threaded fastener), either
    singly or interthreaded with one another, which bolt or nut, or a mating
    pair thereof, is not free to turn about the axis of its thread (i.e., its
    longitudinal axis), by virtue of being (a) combined with means which
    restrict its rotation relative to a coating structure, or (b) combined with
    means which prevent its rotation relative to its complementary nut or bolt,
    respectively, or (c) combined with means which both restruct its rotation
    as in (a) and prevent its rotation as in (b).  The bolt and the nut, either
    single or together, are associated with a fastening function.  This class
    also provides for devices (e.g., washers) which are used in conjunction
    with fasteners of this class and which perfects the fastening operation
    thereof.

    This class additionally provides for those subcombinations (e.g., fastener
    heads) of its subject matter for which no other locus exists.

    (1)     Note.  If otherwise proper for this class, fasteners capable of
    either manual or tool operation (e.g., tacks) are placed in this class and
    not in Class 24.


CLS 411/1
TXT TORQUE RESPONSIVE NUT OR BOLT DRIVING CONNECTION:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a holding device is
    either (a) provided with a driving section which is disconnectable from the
    holding device when a twisting force in excess of a predetermined limit is
    applied thereto or (b) yieldably urged into engagement with a cooperating
    element and moves into a noncooperating position upon the application of
    excessive torque.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402+,   for externally threaded fasteners (e.g., screws and bolts, etc.)
    having specific head driving structure.


CLS 411/2
TXT Frangible connection:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the holding device is joined to the
    driving section by a destroyable member or weakened portion which ruptures
    upon the application of excessive torque.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39+,    for a holding device or anchor provided with frangible portion.


CLS 411/3
TXT Between concentric elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the holding device and the driving
    section are coaxial.


CLS 411/4
TXT Shear pin connecting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 3 wherein the holding device and the driving
    section are joined together by a separate element usually disposed in
    aligned apertures therein which shears upon the application of torque in
    excess of a predetermined limit.


CLS 411/5
TXT Axially displaced:

    Subject matter under subclass 3 wherein the holding device and the driving
    section are arranged in axially spaced concentric relationship with respect
    to each other and are joined together by the member or weakened portion.


CLS 411/6
TXT Resilient connection:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a yieldable connection is provided
    between the holding device and the driving section by a connecting means
    carried by or formed on either the device or the section which connecting
    means either is capable of flexing within its elastic limit or includes a
    yieldable biasing means which urges the connecting means to an operative
    position, whereby the connecting means is movable to an inoperative,
    disconnect position upon the application of excessive torque.


CLS 411/7
TXT Racket:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the connecting means comprises a
    first tooth or toothlike member located on either the holding device or
    driving section and a second tooth or toothlike member, or other structure
    located on either the holding device or the driving section, the second
    tooth, member, or structure being yieldably engageable and relatively
    movable with the first tooth or toothlike member.


CLS 411/8
TXT WITH MEANS TO INDICATE APPLICATION OF PREDETERMINED STRESS-STRAIN:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a holding device includes
    a self-contained part which functions to permit measuring of, or to denote
    attainment or loss of a desired degree of, tension, compression, or torque
    in the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402,    for externally threaded fasteners (e.g., screws, bolts, etc.)
    provided with specific head driving structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for methods of
    measuring and testing stresses or strains in a bolt, and for measuring and
    testing apparatus not entirely a part of the fastener in situ, particularly
    subclasses 141+ for means for measuring a direct push or pull on a fastener.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 200+ for indicator devices not
    entirely a part of a fastener in situ to indicate tension or compression
    thereon.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 668 for electric signaling
    devices not entirely a part of a fastener in situ responsive to and
    controlled by the tension or stress in the fastener.


CLS 411/9
TXT Axially deformable member or portion:
    Subject matter under subclass 8 wherein the self-contained part includes
    means having a dimension which lies substantially parallel to the axis
    along which the holding device is advanced, which means is responsive to
    and indicative of a change in the loading condition of the holding means by
    variations in said dimension.


CLS 411/10
TXT Deformable washer:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein the self-contained part is in the
    form of an annular or cylindrical member which is altered in height to
    indicate the attainment, or loss of a desired degree of tension,
    compression, or torque.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    531+,   for washers, per se.


CLS 411/11
TXT Resilient:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein the annular or cylindrical member
    is axially resilient to allow an elastic reduction in height.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    544,    for axially resilient washers, per se.


CLS 411/12
TXT Coil spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 11 wherein the resilient member is in the
    form of a helically wound element which is axially compressed to indicate
    the attainment of a desired degree of tension, compression, or torque.


CLS 411/13
TXT Color indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 wherein the self-contained part carries a
    distinct color producing a visual indication of the measuring attainment or
    loss of a desired degree of tension, compression, or torque in the device.


CLS 411/14
TXT Including gauge means:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 wherein the self-contained part carries or
    contains a discrete means for measuring the degree of tension, compression,
    or torque in the device.


CLS 411/15
TXT HAVING SEPARATE EXPANDER MEANS:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the longitudinal extent
    of a holding device or an anchor can be increased and means are provided to
    effect this increase in dimension.

    (1)     Note.  The increasing means of this subclass includes but is not
    limited to a wedge-shaped mandrel, fluid pressure, a screw (tapered or
    straight shanked) for applying and expanding force to the holding device,
    cooperating sloped faces, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 157+ for an auger
    anchor insertable in the ground; and subclasses 698+ for an anchor embedded
    in a settable material, connected to a subsurface member or conformed to a
    specially modified base, and see the note in subclass 698 for the line.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, appropriate subclasses for
    expanding anchors or holding devices used with tunnels.  As between Classes
    411 and 405, Class 405 takes a rock bolt having means to grout it in place
    or earth anchors combined with retaining walls or like structures which are
    desired to be secured to the earth.  In addition, Class 405 takes rock
    bolts combined with specific roof-supporting systems or such bolts combined
    with support plates where the plates have a roof support, e.g.,
    load-bearing features, hangers, peculiar terrestrial coacting features,
    etc.  Class 405 is the repository for the support plates, per se, which are
    associated with rock bolts.  Class 411 takes expanding anchors, per se,
    even though they are solely disclosed as being rock bolts or such anchors
    associated with nominal roof support plates.


CLS 411/16
TXT Helical anchor:

    Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein the holding device or anchor
    includes a wound means forming a sleeve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 705+ for a socket
    type anchor having a helical feature on its exterior surface, and see the
    note in subclass 698 for the line.


CLS 411/17
TXT Mates with mandrel thread:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 wherein the means to effect the dimension
    increase includes a member having a helical rib formed on its exterior
    surface which member is inserted into and causes expansion of the spirally
    wound sleeve.


CLS 411/18
TXT With wedge-shaped expander:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 wherein a tapered member is provided for
    expanding the spirally wound sleeve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24+,    for an anchor or holding device provided with a double wedge
    oppositely acting expander.

    44+,    for a sleeve type anchor or holding device having a tapered
    expander.

    75+,    for an anchor or holding device provided with sliding wedge
    surfaces.


CLS 411/19
TXT Fluent pressure actuated:

    Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein the holding device or anchor has a
    chamber therein, and expansion is caused by fluent pressure applied within
    the chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    391,    for an externally threaded fastener element (e.g., a bolt or screw)
    having fluent pressure separating means.

    434,    for an internally threaded fastener element (e.g., a nut) having
    plural moveable parts moved by fluent pressure.


CLS 411/20
TXT Explosive:

    Subject matter under subclass 19 wherein the fluent pressure is created by
    the detonation of an explosive charge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    440+,   for an impact driven fastener having explosive driving means.

    532,    for a washer provided with explosive release means.


CLS 411/21
TXT Having securing element projecting through aperture in sleeve:

    Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein the holding device or anchor
    includes a member which bounds the remainder of the device or anchor and
    which is provided with a port through which a portion of the remainder of
    the device or anchor extends to effect or enhance the securement of the
    device or anchor in place.


CLS 411/22
TXT Deformable element:

    Subject matter under subclass 21 wherein the portion of the remainder of
    the device or anchor includes means which is bent or otherwise reshaped to
    bring it into an operative position to effect or enhance securement of the
    holding device or anchor.

    (1)     Note.  The term "deformable element" of this and the indented
    subclass is inclusive of a mass of flowable material, including granular
    material, which is caused to flow in a desired fashion when a force is
    applied to it.


CLS 411/23
TXT Flowable mass:

    Subject matter under subclass 22 wherein the means which is reshaped
    includes a body composed of either (a) a plastically yieldable material,
    the overall configuration of which is altered when a force is applied to
    the body or (b) a plurality of constituent particles which are free to move
    relative to each other when a force is applied to the body.


CLS 411/24
TXT Oppositely acting double wedge expander means:

    Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein the anchor or device includes a
    pair of oppositely disposed tapered elements which increase the
    circumferential extent of the holding device or the anchor by their
    relative movement axially toward or away from each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44+,    for an anchor or holding device in the form of a sleeve and tapered
    expander.

    75+,    for an anchor or holding device having sliding wedge surfaces.


CLS 411/25
TXT Outwardly moving:

    Subject matter under subclass 24 wherein the tapered elements are disposed
    within the holding device or anchor and effect expansion of the device or
    anchor by moving away from each other.


CLS 411/26
TXT Both wedges provided with thread cooperating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 24 wherein a threaded shaft extends between
    the tapered elements, and each of the elements either are provided with
    thread means which coact with the shaft or are engaged by a driving member
    which is provided with shaft coacting thread means such that upon rotation
    of the shaft the tapered elements move towards or away from each other.


CLS 411/27
TXT Having rotation preventing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 24 wherein cooperating means are provided on
    one of the tapered elements and on the remainder of the anchor or the
    holding device to prevent relative rotation therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49+,    for an anchor or device in the form of a sleeve and tapered
    expander having rotation prevention means.


CLS 411/28
TXT Groove and follower:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 wherein a tapered element and the
    remainder of the holding device or the anchor are each provided with either
    a groove means or a protuberance means which cooperate to prevent those
    members from turning relative to each other when the tapered elements move
    toward or away from each other.


CLS 411/29
TXT With hold forming means:

    Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein the anchor or holding device is
    provided with means to form an anchor or holding device receiving aperture
    in a medium within which the anchor is to be secured or in the elements or
    portions to be secured together.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 155+ for a device
    for that class having means to penetrate the earth.


CLS 411/30
TXT Formed on expansible sleeve:

    Subject matter under subclass 29 wherein the anchor or holding device
    includes a substantially cylindrical sleeve which has the aperture forming
    means carried at one end thereof.


CLS 411/31
TXT Serrated end:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein the aperture forming means is in
    the form of sharp teeth peripherally arranged about the end of the sleeve.


CLS 411/32
TXT Plural expansible segments or sections:
    Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein the anchor or holding devices
    includes either (a) a single portion or zone, composed of a plurality of
    separate, expansible members, which portion or zone can have its
    circumferential extent altered or (b) a plurality of spaced portions or
    zones each of which can have its circumferential extent altered.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    432+,   for multipart moveable internally threaded fastener element (e.g.,
    nuts).


CLS 411/33
TXT Identical segments:

    Subject matter under subclass 32 wherein the plurality of separate,
    expansible members are duplicates.


CLS 411/34
TXT Bulged by axially contracting ends:

    Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein the holding device or anchor is
    expanded by moving the ends thereof toward each other so as to collapse a
    sleeve structure thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57+,    for an anchor or holding device in the form of a tapered expander
    with a slotted sleeve or in 63+, with a plural sectioned sleeve.


CLS 411/35
TXT Having wedge-shaped section acting in slot: Subject matter under subclass
    35 wherein the holding device or anchor is in the form of a generally
    tubular member having an elongated opening in a wall thereof and including
    a portion having tapered edge surfaces adjacent an end of the elongated
    opening which act against the side edges of the elongated opening to
    facilitate bulging of the sleeve as the ends thereof are axially contracted.


CLS 411/36
TXT Twistable sleeve:

    Subject matter under subclass 34 wherein the holding device or anchor is in
    the form of a generally tubular member one end of which is caused to turn
    relative to its other end when the member is bulged.


CLS 411/37
TXT Bulged portion having additional gripping means:

    Subject matter under subclass 34 wherein the holding device or anchor
    includes means carried by and in addition to the expanded portion which
    means is forced into penetrating or frictional engagement with a part into
    which the holding device or anchor is inserted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71+,    for an anchor or holding device in the form of a tapered expander
    and a sleeve having external gripping means.

    451,    for an impact driven fastener having integral locking means on its
    shank.


CLS 411/38
TXT Bulged portion including bend line or reduced section:

    Subject matter under subclass 34 wherein the holding device or anchor is
    provided either with a deformed area or area having a decreased dimension
    such that during movement of ends toward each other expansion occurs at
    these areas.


CLS 411/39
TXT Frangible member:

    Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein a weakened area is provided on the
    holding device or anchor to facilitate its separation into discrete parts
    when sufficient force is applied.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    476,    for a multiple prong impact driven force fastener having a
    frangible portion.


CLS 411/40
TXT Frangibly connected expander:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 wherein a connection between the expander
    element and the remainder of the holding device or anchor defines a
    weakened area which fractures in response to a predetermined force.


CLS 411/41
TXT Projecting outwardly from head:

    Subject matter under subclass 40 wherein the holding device or anchor
    includes a head end opposite an insertion end thereof and wherein the
    expander projects axially outwardly.


CLS 411/42
TXT Sleeve including weakened portion:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 wherein the holding device or anchor
    comprises a substantially tubular element which includes a weakened area
    which fractures in response to a predetermined force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    449,    for an impact driven fastener provided an axially collapsible
    section provided to secure the fastener.


CLS 411/43
TXT Frangible mandrel:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 which includes a member for moving an
    expander element wherein the member is formed with a pull portion which is
    connected to the remainder of the member by a weakened section which
    fractures upon the application of a predetermined force thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    361,    for a headed fastener provided with nonexpanded deformed collar
    having a frangible mandrel.

    476,    for a multiple prong impact driven fastener provided with frangible
    portion.


CLS 411/44
TXT Including sleeve and tapered expander:
    Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein the holding device or anchor
    comprises a sleeve in the form of a tubular element having a bore which is
    engaged by an expander having a wedging surface to effect expansion of the
    tubular element.


CLS 411/45
TXT And means to captively retain expander:
    Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein means are provided for holding the
    expander in assembled relationship with the holding device or anchor prior
    to expansion thereof.


CLS 411/46
TXT Follower captive within groove:

    Subject matter under subclass 45 wherein the expander and the holding
    device or anchor are provided with mating protuberance and slot means
    having closed ends whereby the slot means act to hold the expander in the
    assembled condition.


CLS 411/47
TXT Bridge-type retainer:

    Subject matter under subclass 45 wherein the means for maintaining the
    expander in assembled relationship comprises a section of material spanning
    an open end on the holding device or anchor.


CLS 411/48
TXT Tongue-type retainer:

    Subject matter under subclass 45 wherein the means for holding the expander
    in assembled relationship comprises an inwardly extending projection
    carried by the holding device or anchor with the innermost extremity
    thereof being unattached.


CLS 411/49
TXT Relative rotation preventing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein means are provided for preventing
    rotative movement between the sleeve and the expander.


CLS 411/50
TXT Guide and follower:

    Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein the expander and the sleeve are
    each provided with either protuberance means or cooperating means to
    restrain the protuberance in a rectilinear fashion.


CLS 411/51
TXT Splines:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein the guide and protuberance means
    are in the form of a plurality of grooves and relatively long, narrow ribs
    mating with said grooves.


CLS 411/52
TXT Follower defined by corners of polygonal element:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein either the expander or a portion
    of the sleeve is of multisided cross section, and a corner of said cross
    section acts as the protuberance means.


CLS 411/53
TXT Expander type:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein either the cooperating means or
    the protuberance means includes wedging surfaces which effect or aid in the
    expansion of the sleeve.


CLS 411/54
TXT Expansible element moved relative to stationary expander:

    Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein expansion is effected by the
    expander being held in a fixed position as the sleeve is axially moved
    relative thereto.


CLS 411/55
TXT Expander threadedly engaged by mover:
    Subject matter under subclass 44 which includes a mover element wherein the
    mover element activates the expander by means of threaded engagement
    therebetween.


CLS 411/56
TXT Stepped expander:

    Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein the expander includes a plurality
    of sections of progressively increasing diameters to effect varying degrees
    of expansion of the sleeve.


CLS 411/57
TXT Slotted sleeve:

    Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein an elongated, narrow aperture is
    formed longitudinally of the sleeve.


CLS 411/58
TXT Both ends slotted:

    Subject matter under subclass 57 wherein the sleeve is provided with an
    elongated, narrow aperture at each of its ends.


CLS 411/59
TXT Slot spaced from ends:

    Subject matter under subclass 57 wherein the elongated, narrow aperture has
    its ends axially spaced from respective ends of the sleeve.


CLS 411/60
TXT Throughout longitudinal extent of sleeve:
    Subject matter under subclass 57 wherein the elongated, narrow aperture
    extends along the entire axial extent of the sleeve.


CLS 411/61
TXT Folded blank type:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 wherein the sleeve is formed from a single
    sheet of material bent into shape with free edges of the sheet defining the
    sides of the elongated narrow aperture.


CLS 411/62
TXT Slot angularly related to sleeve axis:
    Subject matter under subclass 60 wherein the elongated, narrow aperture is
    inclined with respect to the longitudinal axis of the sleeve.


CLS 411/63
TXT Plural-sectioned sleeve:

    Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein the sleeve comprises a plurality
    of discrete, laterally arranged sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    432+,   for multipart internally threaded fastener elements (e.g., nuts).


CLS 411/64
TXT Having section retainer:

    Subject matter under subclass 63 wherein retainer means is provided for
    securing the sections together.


CLS 411/65
TXT Ring or sleeve type:

    Subject matter under subclass 64 wherein the retainer means is in the form
    of a ring or sleeve which extends circumferentially of the sections.


CLS 411/66
TXT Destructible:

    Subject matter under subclass 65 wherein the ring or sleeve is destroyed
    during expansion of the sleeve.


CLS 411/67
TXT Bight type:

    Subject matter under subclass 64 wherein the retainer means comprises a
    strap element having its ends secured to the respective sections.


CLS 411/68
TXT Tongue and groove:

    Subject matter under subclass 64 wherein the retainer means comprises a
    projection on one section received in a corresponding recess in an adjacent
    section.


CLS 411/69
TXT Expander or sleeve extruded during expansion:

    Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein material of the expander or of the
    sleeve is caused to plastically flow during relative axial movement between
    the expander and sleeve.


CLS 411/70
TXT Expander having integral pull stem:

    Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein the expander includes an elongated
    section as a unitary part thereof to be gripped by puller means for moving
    the expander relative to the sleeve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    501,    for hollow rivets, per se.


CLS 411/71
TXT Sleeve having external gripping means:
    Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein the sleeve is provided with
    gripping means on its exterior surface which is adapted to engage walls of
    a hole in a part into which the sleeve is inserted which gripping means
    prevents rotative or axial movement of the sleeve.


CLS 411/72
TXT Circumferential rib:

    Subject matter under subclass 71 wherein the gripping means comprises a
    protuberance which extends around the sleeve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    455,    for an impact driven fastener provided with integral locking means
    in the form of a circumferential rib on its shank.


CLS 411/73
TXT And longitudinal rib:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the gripping means comprises the
    combination of a circumferential protuberance and a protuberance extending
    axially of the sleeve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    452+,   for an impact driven fastener provided with integral locking means
    in the form of a longitudinal rib on its shank.


CLS 411/74
TXT Struck from sleeve:

    Subject matter under subclass 71 wherein the gripping means is formed by
    being severed and bent out from the walls of the sleeve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    466+,   for a multiple prong fastener formed by cutting and forming prongs
    from sheet metal material.


CLS 411/75
TXT Relatively sliding wedge surfaces:

    Subject matter under subclass 15 which includes a holding device or anchor
    having a tapered surface thereon engaged by a mating surface on a second
    member wherein relative axial movement between the two surfaces results in
    a change in the transverse dimension of the device or anchor.


CLS 411/76
TXT Wedge received in transverse slot in holding device or anchor:

    Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein the second member is disposed
    within a longitudinal slot in the holding device or anchor.


CLS 411/77
TXT Double-faced wedge:

    Subject matter under subclass 76 wherein the second member includes a pair
    of opposed tapered surfaces which mate with surfaces on the holding device
    or anchor to produce expansion in laterally opposite directions.


CLS 411/78
TXT Having wedge retainer means:

    Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein discrete means are provided for
    securing the second member in assembled relationship with the holding
    device or anchor.


CLS 411/79
TXT Wedge surfaces act in single lateral direction:

    Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein the second member includes a
    single tapered  surface cooperating with a surface on the holding device or
    anchor to cause a change in dimension in a single lateral direction.


CLS 411/80
TXT Including discrete activating means for wedge:

    Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein distinct means are provided for
    moving the second member relative to the holding device or anchor in order
    to produce a wedging effect.


CLS 411/81
TXT THREADED FASTENER AND MEANS FOR RESTRICTING ROTATION THEREOF RELATIVE TO
    COACTING SUBSTRUCTURE:

    Device under the class definition comprising a fastener in the nature of a
    threaded bolt or a threaded nut, or an interthreaded bolt and nut, and
    means for either preventing or limiting the turning of the bolt or the nut,
    or both of them, about its longitudinal axis relative to a substructure
    (e.g., a base, a panel, a surface, an art device or, more generally, a
    workpiece) with which one or the other, or both, is associated.

    (1)     Note.  The substructure is involved with the bolt or the nut in
    performing a fastening function; for example, the substructure may be the
    recipient of an object which is attached to it by the bolt or nut, or the
    bolt or nut may be serving to fasten two or more substructures together,
    and so forth, in some instances the rotation restricting means, or a part
    thereof, is formed integrally with the substructure.

    (2)     Note.  The substructure may not be claimed; however, for purposes
    of classification herein, it should be treated as being present if it
    performs an indispensable function in restricting the rotation of the bolt
    or the nut.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    190+,   for a threaded bolt and nut and means for coupling them to one
    another against relative rotation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    238,    Railways:  Surface Track, subclass 262 for a railway track having
    one or more rails and wherein, at a butt joint between two sections of a
    rail, at least one splice bar is provided and further wherein bolts and
    nuts, and means for locking them against rotation, are included for
    connecting the splice bar to the abutting rail sections.  While this and
    the indented subclasses take such structure of the splice bar or rail
    section as relates to the locking thereto against rotation of one or more
    bolts or nuts utilized in joining a splice bar to one or more rail
    sections, the inclusion of, for example, a second, parallel rail, a tie, a
    tieplate, a roadbed feature, etc., is sufficient to require classification
    in Class 238.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for connections
    between two or more members which involve greater specificity of the
    members than merely the manner in which they are adapted to serve as the
    coacting substructure for restricting the rotation of one or more bolts or
    nuts which are included in the connection.


CLS 411/82
TXT Including settable material:

    Device under subclass 81 wherein the means comprises or includes a quantity
    of a substance which is hardenable from a soft or flowable, as-applied
    state into a state in which it serves to affix, or assist in affixing, a
    bolt or a nut, and, in some instances, one or more additional elements that
    are associated with the bolt or nut, to a substructure.

    (1)     Note.  Exemplary of the substances are (a) adhesives for exerting a
    force which tends to keep two or more parts from separating such as (1) a
    flowable as applied but air hardenable material in the nature of a glue,
    (2) a normally hard but heat-softenable and subsequently rehardenable
    material in the nature of solder, or (3) a predisposed film or layer of
    material which, while essentially set up by the time of its use, remains
    tacky on its surface, (b) compositions such as weld rod or a chemical
    solvent which, with or without, respectively, the assistance of heat,
    molecularly intermingle with and unite two or more parts, and (c) a
    material which may be flowable when applied but which undergoes an increase
    in volume upon setting up and thus forces two or more parts into relatively
    rigid engagement with one another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171,    for a threaded fastener (i.e., a bolt or nut) and means for
    restricting the rotation thereof relative to a coacting substructure
    wherein the means comprises the adapting of the bolt or nut to be fused
    directly to a substructure (i.e., without the use of additional material)
    (e.g., a weld nut).

    257,    for a threaded bolt and nut and means for coupling them against
    relative rotation wherein the means includes material which may be a
    metallic coating or a quantity of fusible metal.

    258,    for the coupled bolt and nut mentioned in the reference to subclass
    257 above, but wherein the means includes a settable material.

    376,    for a headed fastener with a nut, washer, securing means or cap and
    wherein the element which is in addition to the fastener is a cap which is
    attachable by fusion bonding.


CLS 411/83
TXT Including movable, separable, or nondistortably connected restricting
    member:

    Device under subclass 81 wherein the means for preventing or limiting
    turning of the bolt or nut relative to the substructure consists of or
    includes at least one other element, which element is related to the bolt
    or the nut or the substructure in one of the following ways:  (a) the
    element may be in loose engagement with the bolt, nut or substructure, or
    it may be connected thereto if the connection is one of a flexible nature;
    (b) the element may be fixedly connected to the bolt, nut or substructure,
    but the connection is of such a nature as to be (1) readily disconnected,
    or (2) reasonably contemplated to be intended to be capable of being
    disconnected; or (c) the element may be fixedly connected to the bolt, nut
    or substructure by a connection which, while offering no suggestion that
    disconnection might be contemplated, yet is not of a kind which results in
    a bonding or fusing of the element to the bolt, nut or substructure.

    (1)     Note.  In view of the large proportion of art in this area (83+)
    involving the preventing or limiting of turning of bolts and nuts which are
    disclosed as being utilized in the end-to-end connection of one railroad
    rail to another, and inasmuch as a connection of that nature almost
    invariably requires the use of at least one (usually two) "fishplates", it
    proved impractical to accord a fishplate the status of an additional
    element; accordingly, for the purpose of this subclass (83) and all the
    indented subclasses except subclass 94, a fishplate is treated as
    comprising only substructure; see the explanation in subclass 94 as to why
    it constitutes an exception.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     for a threaded fastener (i.e., a bolt or nut) and means for
    restricting the rotation thereof relative to a coacting substructure and
    wherein the means includes a settable material; included therein is the
    joining of a restricting member to the bolt, nut or substructure by bonding
    or fusing.

    132,    in regard to the reference to this subclass (83) which appears in
    (4) Note. thereof.

    166+,   for a threaded fastener (i.e., a bolt or nut) and means for
    restricting the rotation thereof relative to a coacting substructure, but
    wherein, in contrast with this area (83+), no additional element is present.


CLS 411/84
TXT Prefabricated assembly comprising strip or sheet member carrying plural
    similar fasteners:

    Device under subclass 83 wherein the other element, or at least one of a
    plurality thereof, comprises a member which either has a  significant
    longitudinal dimension (e.g., a channel) or else consists primarily of a
    planar surface (e.g., a plate) and which has connected thereto, in a manner
    which restricts their rotation relative to the member, a plurality of
    either nuts (usually) or bolts, the member and its nuts or bolts forming an
    assembly whereby the attachment of the member to a substructure serves to
    fasten the plurality of nuts or bolts thereto.

    (1)     Note.  It is commonplace in the art of this subclass to provide for
    a limited amount of movement of the nuts or bolts relative to the member,
    the purpose ordinarily being to enable a more precise alignment with their
    complementary bolts or nuts.


CLS 411/85
TXT Including element for holding fasteners against separation from member:

    Device under subclass 84 wherein the assembly is provided with one or more
    second, other (i.e., additional) elements for assuring that the nuts or
    bolts cannot move away from their rotation restricting relationship with
    the member.

    (1)     Note.  A single additional element may suffice to hold a plurality
    of nuts or bolts to the member, or, in the alternative, each nut or bolt
    may require such an element.  On the other hand, the holding of the nut or
    bolt to the member may require the cooperation of a set of two or more,
    dissimilar, additional elements, and, as in the previous example, one such
    set may hold a plurality of nuts or bolts to the member, or each nut or
    bolt may require such a set of elements.


CLS 411/86
TXT Including a series of elements, one element restricting two fasteners of a
    plurality, and the remainder each restricting one fastener:

    Device under subclass 83 wherein the means comprises a plurality of
    elements, serially arranged more or less parallel to an outwardly facing
    surface of the substructure, one of the plurality of elements serving to
    restrict two bolts or nuts against rotation, and another, or each other, of
    the plurality of elements serving to restrict one other bolt or nut against
    rotation.

    (1)     Note.  While the other element, or each of them, receives the shank
    of one bolt and engages the head of another (usually adjacent) bolt, or a
    nut on that bolt, the one element must engage the heads of two (usually
    adjacent) bolts, or the nuts on those bolts.  In order to engage the bolt
    heads or nuts, the element may be integrally so configured, or it may
    utilize an auxiliary portion to furnish the engagement with one of the two
    bolt heads or nuts; in the latter situation, the auxiliary portion may be
    hinged to its element, or it may be separable from its element and
    attachable thereto when utilized for its intended purpose.


CLS 411/87
TXT Elongate member extending between and interlocking plural bolts and nuts:

    Device under subclass 83 wherein the other element, or at least one of a
    plurality thereof, comprises a member which has a longitudinal dimension
    greatly in excess of any of its other dimensions (e.g., a bar, rod, strap,
    wire) and which spans the distance between, and is held in engagement with,
    two or more bolts or nuts, thus preventing relative rotation of any of the
    bolts or nuts which it interconnects.

    (1)     Note.  The member, in use, may retain the primarily rodlike
    configuration of the material from which it was made, or it may be looped,
    reversely bent, etc., which shaping frequently is for the purpose of
    engaging more than one flat side of a bolt head or a nut.


CLS 411/88
TXT Member engages inwardly facing surface and a flat side of bolt head or nut:

    Device under subclass 87 wherein the member is so located as to engage the
    substructure-confronting surface of the head of, or of a nut on, one or
    more of the bolts, and wherein the member is provided with an abutment or
    related structure for engaging at least one of the heads or nuts on a flat
    side thereof.


CLS 411/89
TXT Member extending between plural fasteners and restricting the rotation
    thereof in one direction more than the other (e.g., pawl and ratchet):

    Device under subclass 83 wherein the other element, or at least one of a
    plurality thereof, comprises a member which extends between two or more
    bolts or nuts and engages them in such a manner that rotation of the bolt
    or nut in one direction (e.g., unthreading) can be accomplished only by
    either the application of an excessive force or the disengagement of the
    member, or a portion thereof, from the bolt or nut, whereas rotation in the
    opposite direction e.g., threading) requires little, if any, more force
    than would be the case if the member was not there.

    (1)     Note.  Exemplary of the types of member-to-bolt-or-nut engagement
    are: (a) the member may engage merely a corner of a flat-sided bolt head or
    nut; (b) the bolt, bolt head or nut may be formed with one or more radial
    projections for engagement by the member; (c) the bolt head or the nut may
    be formed with an axial extension which carries one or more member-engaging
    projections; or (d) there may be present an additional element which is
    coupled against rotation to the bolt or nut and which includes one or more
    member-engaging projections.

    (2)     Note.  The member-engaging projections of (d) of (1) Note may be in
    the nature of a ratchet, in which event the member functions as a pawl.


CLS 411/90
TXT Member extending between and engaging flat formed on side of each of a
    plurality of flat sided bolts or nuts (e.g., side lock): Device under
    subclass 83 wherein the other element, or at least one of a plurality
    thereof, comprises a member in the nature of either a single piece of
    material or a plurality of pieces related in some fashion to one another,
    which member is positioned in such a manner that a principal surface
    thereof occupies a plane which parallels, or nearly parallels, that surface
    of the substructure with which it is in a facing relationship, and wherein
    the member includes a portion (e.g., an arm or lip extending normally to
    the principal surface of the member) for making contact with one or more
    planar regions formed on the exterior of, and extending parallel to the
    principal axis of, each of a plurality of bolts or nuts.

    (1)     Note.  In the instance of a bolt, the planar region ordinarily is
    located on the head, rather than the shank.


CLS 411/91
TXT And element on opposite face of substructure restricting rotation of a
    cooperating nut or bolt:

    Device under subclass 90 provided with a second, other (i.e., an
    additional) element which faces a region of the substructure that is
    opposite to the region faced by the member, and which element limits the
    turning of (a) a nut which is complementary to a bolt whose turning is
    limited by the member or (b) a bolt which is complimentary to a nut whose
    turning is limited by the member.

    (1)     Note.  Usually, the element is similar in appearance to the member.

    (2)     Note.  The bolts may each enter the substructure from one face
    thereof, or one or more may enter from one face and another one or more may
    enter from the opposite face.


CLS 411/92
TXT Having plural openings or notches engaging a bolt or nut on two sides:

    Device under subclass 90 wherein those portions of the member which engage
    the planar regions of the bolts or nuts are the radially inwardly facing
    edges or walls of two or more passages through the member, which passages
    are so located as to be either (a) entirely within the boundaries of the
    member or (b) along a boundary thereof and thus having a periphery which is
    not a closed figure, and wherein the edge or wall engages at least two of
    the planar regions of each bolt or nut.


CLS 411/93
TXT Having plural parts, one of which engages the inwardly facing surface of a
    bolt head or nut:

    Device under subclass 92 wherein the member consists of at least two
    coacting pieces, one or more of which has at least one area which is
    contacted by the inwardly facing (i.e., the working) surface of at least
    one of the bolt heads or nuts.

    (1)     Note.  In the instance of a bolt which is provided with both a
    primary and a secondary nut (i.e., a double nut), and the contact of the
    area of one of the pieces is made by the inwardly facing surface of the
    secondary, or outer nut, rather than by the inwardly facing surface of the
    primary, or inner nut, classification is not in this area (93+) but is in
    subclass 96 below, instead.

    (2)     Note.  In the case of an "undercut" nut, the inwardly facing
    surface frequently is the inwardly facing surface of the larger diameter
    portion, rather than the corresponding surface of the smaller diameter
    portion.


CLS 411/94
TXT Special fishplate engaging inwardly facing surface:

    Device under subclass 93 wherein that one of the pieces which has an area
    contacted by the inwardly facing surface comprises a fishplate associated
    with a joint between two railroad rails, which fishplate has been modified
    as to become, itself, one of the coacting pieces.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is an exception to the general rule stated in
    (1) Note of subclass 83 above to the effect that a fishplate is treated as
    comprising only substructure, because the fishplate modifications found
    herein could not be ignored.

    (2)     Note.  On the other hand, "modified" is not intended to include
    such commonly occurring fishplate features as (a) a cavity extending
    longitudinally of the rail-facing side of the fishplate or (b) a notch or
    equivalent provision, located along a tie-confronting lower lip of a
    fishplate, for receiving a hold-down spike.

    (3)     Note.  The alteration to the fishplate occasionally is merely the
    provision therein of a tapped opening for receiving a bolt which retains
    another one of the pieces to the fishplate.


CLS 411/95
TXT Elastically or plastically deformable part:
    Device under subclass 93 wherein one of the pieces is resiliently or
    yieldably deformable, either in whole or in part, and is deformed during
    its coaction with the one or more other pieces.


CLS 411/96
TXT Having plural parts, one comprising a keeper:

    Device under subclass 92 wherein the member consists of two or more
    coacting pieces, at least one of which functions merely to prevent another
    piece, or pieces, from moving out of operative engagement with the bolts or
    nuts.

    (1)     Note.  While some of the art of this subclass strongly resembles
    that of subclass 94 above, a closer examination will reveal that the
    fishplates of this art (96) are not "special" within the meaning of that
    subclass (94) and therefore are treated as comprising only substructure;
    see (1) Note of subclass 83 and (1) Note and (2) Note of subclass 94.

    (2)     Note.  The part which serves a holding function is, in some
    instances, no more than a spike for anchoring a disclosed rail assembly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93,     for the reference to this subclass (96) appearing in (1) Note
    thereof.


CLS 411/97
TXT Unitary member, deformable in whole or in part:

    Device under subclass 92 wherein the member consists of a single piece of
    material which is, at least in part, elastically or plastically deformable
    in nature and which undergoes deformation for the purpose of being placed
    into, retained in, or removed from operative engagement with the bolts or
    nuts.


CLS 411/98
TXT And engaging the inwardly facing surface of the bolt heads or nuts:

    Device under subclass 90 wherein the member includes, on its surface which
    is opposite to its substructure-facing surface, regions which engage
    against rotation, in at least one direction, the inwardly facing surfaces
    of two or more bolt heads or nuts.

    (1)     Note.  The engagement for restricting rotation may involve only
    frictional contact.

    (2)     Note.  The member may include a bendable portion (e.g., a tab) for
    deformation into engagement with a side of a bolt head or a nut subsequent
    to assembly of the bolt or nut with the member and the substructure.


CLS 411/99
TXT Including separable keeper for member:
    Device under subclass 90 provided with a second, other (i.e., an
    additional) element for preventing the member from moving away from that
    position in which it makes contact with the one or more planar, sidewardly
    facing regions of each of the bolts or nuts.


CLS 411/100
TXT Including element spacing member from substructure:

    Device under subclass 90 provided with a second, other (i.e., an
    additional) element for locating the member a slight distance apart from
    the substructure.

    (1)     Note.  The additional element sometimes functions as a carrier for
    the member, or sometimes to allow relative movement of the member, or, at
    other times, for a purpose not related to either of these two.


CLS 411/101
TXT Member engages the inwardly facing surface or a plurality of bolt heads or
    nuts: Device under subclass 83 wherein the other element, or at least one
    of a plurality thereof, comprises a member formed either of a single piece
    of material or a plurality of pieces so related to one another as to
    function as a single piece, which piece or pieces are positioned in such a
    manner that one principal surface thereof occupies a plane which generally
    parallels an outwardly facing surface of the substructure and wherein the
    opposite principal surface of the piece or pieces contains regions which
    engage against rotation, in at least one direction, the inwardly facing
    surfaces of two or more bolt heads or nuts.

    (1)     Note.  The engagement for restricting rotation may involve only
    frictional contact.

    (2)     Note.  Occasionally, the regions of the member and the inwardly
    facing surfaces of the bolt heads or nuts are provided with formations
    which are complementary to one another, and, in some instances, the
    formations are of the kind which resist rotation to a greater degree in one
    direction of turning than in the other.

    (3)     Note.  In some instances, the member engages an element which
    underlies the inwardly facing surface of a bolt head or a nut and thus
    intervenes between the member and the surface.


CLS 411/102
TXT Series of elements, each restricting a single fastener, cooperating to
    restrict a series of fasteners:

    Device under subclass 83 including two or more elements arranged
    successively along one or the other or both faces of a substructure, each
    element restricting one bolt or nut but being so associated with at least
    one other such element, either directly or by way of a bolt, nut or
    substructure, as to restrict two or more successively arranged bolts or
    nuts.

    (1)     Note.  Frequently, the number of elements in the series thereof
    equals the number of bolts or nuts in the series thereof.

    (2)     Note.  The art of this subclass is neither clearly plural within
    the sense of subclasses 84 to 101 above, nor strictly singular within the
    meaning of subclasses 103 to 165 below.


CLS 411/103
TXT Member preassembled with substructure at through-passage or recess for
    holding single bolt or nut in coaxial relation therewith:

    Device under subclass 83 wherein the other element, or at least one of a
    plurality thereof, comprises a member which is connected to, or otherwise
    held in contact with, the substructure adjacent to, at or within either a
    hole which penetrates the substructure or a pocket which enters the
    substructure to an extent less than its thickness and which member
    functions to locate and support a single bolt or nut in such a manner,
    relative to the substructure, that the longitudinal axis of the bolt or the
    nut is in alignment with the principal axis of the hole or pocket, the
    purpose of the arrangement being to place the bolt or nut in a proper
    position for receiving the nut or bolt, respectively, which is intended to
    be placed in threaded engagement with it.

    (1)     Note.  In a few instances, the member is an assembly of plural
    elements functioning as one.

    (2)     Note.  In locating and supporting the bolt or nut relative to the
    substructure, the member restricts, or assists in restricting, the bolt or
    nut against axial movement in addition to its usual function of
    restricting, or assisting in restricting, the bolt or nut against
    rotational movement.


CLS 411/104
TXT Through-passage or recess having laterally extending entry for inserting
    member and nut:

    Device under subclass 103 wherein the substructure additionally includes a
    cross passage which enters the hole or pocket from a side thereof, which
    cross passage is for the purpose of moving the member, and a nut held
    therein or thereon, into alignment with the axis of the hole or pocket,
    and, hence, into alignment with the bolt which will be placed into the hole
    or pocket.

    (1)     Note.  The "width" of the member-nut assembly is greater than the
    diameter of the hole or pocket, thus, necessitating the provision of a
    cross passage for inserting the assembly into bolt-receiving position.

    (2)     Note.  The member frequently holds the nut loosely in order to
    allow for limited realignment thereof when the bolt is introduced.

    (3)     Note.  The member-nut assembly hereof is often identified as a
    "barrel nut".


CLS 411/105
TXT And a second substructure and means for capturing a complementary nut or
    bolt thereto:

    Device under subclass 103 provided with an additional substructure and with
    means for attaching thereto against separation, but not against rotational
    or limited longitudinal movement, a nut, or a bolt, which is intended to
    mate with the bolt, or the nut, held to the first substructure by the
    member.

    (1)     Note.  The second substructure may be in the nature of a panel.

    (2)     Note.  Included occasionally herein is means (e.g., a thread lock)
    for coupling a bolt to its complementary nut.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    for the search notes therein pertaining to thread locks.


CLS 411/106
TXT Having means for coupling a bolt to a nut: Device under subclass 103 which
    includes means for restricting the turning of the bolt relative to the nut,
    or vice versa, which means may be the member or a portion thereof or may be
    the thread structures of the bolt or nut or the manner in which those
    structures interengage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    for the search notes therein pertaining to thread locks.


CLS 411/107
TXT Member anchors bolt in substructure with threaded portion exposed (e.g.,
    stud bolt): Device under subclass 103 wherein the member holds one part of
    a bolt in the hole or pocket in such relation to the surface of the
    substructure that another part of the bolt, which is threaded, extends
    outwardly therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  The first-mentioned part of the bolt may be the head or a
    portion of the shank, threaded or unthreaded, while the last-mentioned part
    is the shank, or the remainder thereof, and is threaded.

    (2)     Note.  The bolt of this subclass is commonly referred to as a "stud
    bolt".


CLS 411/108
TXT Nut-encompassing sleeve member engaged within through-passage or recess:

    Device under subclass 103 wherein the member is tubular in nature and has
    its external surface in contact with the sidewall of the hole or pocket,
    and wherein a nut is anchored to the substructure by being inserted into
    the hollow interior of the member and engaged therewith.

    (1)     Note.  In some instances, the exterior of the nut and the interior
    of the member are threaded, and the engagement of the one with the other is
    of a threaded nature.

    (2)     Note.  Occasionally, the external surface of the member is
    threaded, in which event the member may be turned into the substructure.


CLS 411/109
TXT Locking ring coaxially related to an elongated, externally threaded nut:

    Device under subclass 103 wherein the member is a circular band or loop and
    has, as its axis, the longitudinal axis of a nut, and wherein the nut has a
    significant longitudinal dimension and is provided with an outer surface
    which is threaded for engaging the sidewall of the hole or pocket, the
    circular band or loop supplementing the sidewall engagement in joining the
    nut to the substructure.

    (1)     Note.  The band or loop may encompass the nut or it may be
    outwardly of an end thereof.

    (2)     Note.  The sidewall of the hole or pocket may be plain or threaded.


CLS 411/110
TXT Member comprises a longitudinal key:

    Device under subclass 103 wherein the member comprises one or more
    elongated elements which extend generally parallel to the longitudinal axis
    of the bolt or nut and which engage the substructure at the hole or pocket
    formed therein and also engage whichever of the bolt or nut is held in the
    hole or pocket.

    (1)     Note.  Most typically, the nut takes the form of an internally
    threaded sleeve which is recessed into the substructure, and the key is at
    least one bar or rod inserted at the juncture of the outer surface of the
    sleeve with the wall of the hole or pocket; if two or more keys are
    utilized, they are spaced apart therearound.


CLS 411/111
TXT Member includes elastically or plastically deformable portion:

    Device under subclass 103 wherein the member includes one or more parts or
    regions which are movable, either resiliently or yieldably, to another
    position relative to the remainder of the member for either (a) supporting
    the bolt or nut in or on the member or (b) connecting the member to the
    substructure.


CLS 411/112
TXT Having elastically deformable portion for attaching member to substructure:

    Device under subclass 111 wherein the movable part or region is either so
    configured, or formed from such a material, or both, that, when released
    from the moving force, it will tend to return to its former position (i.e.,
    the part or region is resilient), which property is utilized for affixing
    the member to the substructure.


CLS 411/113
TXT Plastically deformable portion:

    Device under subclass 111 wherein the movable part or region is formed from
    such a material that, when released from the moving force, it remains more
    or less in the position into which it was moved (i.e., the part or region
    is nonresilient).

    (1)     Note.  Typical of the art of this subclass is a member provided
    with two or more locating tabs, the tabs being bendable into a position in
    which they grip the edge of an aperture formed in a platelike substructure.


CLS 411/114
TXT Recessed or toothed member receiving movable pawl carried by bolt head or
    nut: Device under subclass 83 wherein the other element comprises a member
    which engages the substructure in a rotation restricting manner and which
    has formed on or in it one or more holes, stepped surfaces, notches, etc.,
    which holes, etc., receive, at least momentarily as the bolt or the nut is
    turned, a pivotal (either about a defined axis or merely bendable) dog, a
    reciprocable pin, etc., which is mounted on or in the bolt head or the nut
    (e.g., a spring loaded pin slidable in a cavity formed in the nut
    eccentrically to the threaded hole thereof).

    (1)     Note.  The movable pawl most frequently comprises a second, other
    (i.e., an additional) element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    for the reference to this subclass (114) appearing in (2) Note
    thereof.


CLS 411/115
TXT Having discrete, reciprocably movable pawl: Device under subclass 114
    wherein the movable pawl is a second, other (i.e., an additional) element
    which is so mounted on or in the bolt head or nut that it may move back and
    forth relative thereto.


CLS 411/116
TXT Fastener, or coaxial adjunct therefor, having sidewardly facing flat or
    formation engaged by portion of member (e.g., side lock):

    Device under subclass 83 wherein the other element, or at least one of the
    plurality thereof, comprises a member which engages the substructure and
    which has at least one portion for contacting (a) either at least one
    planar, side surface of a plural-sided bolt head or nut or at least one
    formation (e.g., a corner formed by the junction of adjacent side surfaces,
    a tooth, etc.) on the side of a bolt head or nut or (b) a corresponding
    flat side or sidewardly facing formation on a second, other (i.e., an
    additional) element which is located on the axis of, and is caused to turn
    with, the bolt head or nut, which additional element substitutes for the
    bolt head or nut insofar as engagement with the member is concerned.

    (1)     Note.  The coaction of the member with the substructure is an
    essential aspect of the member's capability for restricting rotation of the
    bolt or nut relative to the substructure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90+,    for another body of art of this area (83+) which is directed to a
    "side lock", but wherein a plurality of bolts or nuts is involved.


CLS 411/117
TXT Adjunct carried flat or formation:

    Device under subclass 116 provided with a second, other (i.e., an
    additional) element, which has the one or more sidewardly facing surfaces
    or formations and is located on the axis of, and turns with, the bolt head
    or nut, and wherein those surfaces or formations, rather than the
    sidewardly facing surfaces or formations of the bolt head or nut, are
    engaged by the member.

    (1)     Note.  If the flats or formations are located on an extension of
    the member, rather than on a separate element which is coaxial with the
    member, classification is not here in subclass (117) but is elsewhere in
    this area (116+).

    (2)     Note.  Frequently, the sidewardly facing formations of the
    additional element comprise a plurality of teeth in the nature of a ratchet.


CLS 411/118
TXT And thread lock coupling complementary fasteners:

    Device under subclass 116 wherein the bolt and the nut which is threadedly
    engaged therewith are prevented from turning relative to one another by a
    locking action which results from either (a) the character of (1) the
    thread of one or both or (2) the interengagement of the thread of one with
    the thread of the other, or (b) the presence, in the threaded region, of
    another element which is neither the one other element, nor is it the
    additional element of subclass 116 above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    for the search notes therein pertaining to thread locks.


CLS 411/119
TXT Member having opening or notch engaging a bolt head or nut on two sides:

    Device under subclass 116 wherein that portion of the member which engages
    the one or more sides or formations of the bolt head or nut is the radially
    inwardly facing edge or wall of a passage through the member, the passage
    being located either (a) entirely within the boundaries of the member or
    (b) along a boundary thereof and thus having a periphery which is not a
    closed figure, the engagement, in either case, involving at least two of
    the sides or formations of the bolt head or nut.

    (1)     Note.  In the instance of a hexagonal bolt head or nut, the
    engagement of the member therewith usually involves at least three of the
    sides or formations.


CLS 411/120
TXT And element maintaining member in operative engagement with bolt head or
    nut:

    Device under subclass 119 provided with a second, other (i.e., an
    additional) element, which additional element either connects the member to
    the substructure or to the bolt head or nut or otherwise functions to
    retain the member in rotation restricting engagement with the bolt head or
    nut.


CLS 411/121
TXT Member elastically or plastically deformable for attaching it to bolt head
    or nut:

    Device under subclass 119 wherein the member, or a part thereof, is
    resiliently or yieldably deformable for enabling the member to grip or
    otherwise hold itself in contact with the bolt head or nut.


CLS 411/122
TXT Member having portion (e.g., tab) deformable in situ into engagement with
    flat or formation:

    Device under subclass 116 wherein that portion, or one or more of a
    plurality thereof, of the member which engages the one or more sides or
    formations of the bolt head or nut is a plastically deformable part of the
    member, which part is bent or otherwise deformed into contact with the side
    or formation after the member and the bolt head or the nut have been united
    with the substructure.


CLS 411/123
TXT And having specific structure to coact with substructure:

    Device under subclass 122 wherein the member also has, on or proximate to
    its region which confronts the substructure, means for engaging the
    substructure in such a manner that any tendency of the member to turn
    relative to the substructure is either eliminated or minimized.

    (1)     Note.  The means may be in the nature of pointed or otherwise
    sharpened projections which will tend to dig into the member-confronting
    surface of the substructure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134+,   for a member located at least in part between the substructure and
    the inwardly facing surface of the bolt head or nut, and wherein means is
    provided for retaining, prior to assembling two or more of the bolt, nut
    and substructure with one another, the member to one of those three
    components in approximately the position it will occupy subsequent to the
    assembly, and further wherein the means may comprise prongs or tabs on the
    member which extend more or less normally thereto and grasp the sides of
    the bolt head or nut.


CLS 411/124
TXT Projection on member and coacting formation in substructure:

    Device under subclass 123 wherein the means on the member is in the form of
    one or more teeth, ridges or the like, which form axial extensions of the
    member, and wherein the substructure has one or more recesses, grooves or
    the like for either receiving the teeth, etc., or otherwise cooperating
    with them to restrict rotation of the member relative to the substructure.


CLS 411/125
TXT Sheet metal member having resilient pawl distorted therefrom:

    Device under subclass 116 wherein that portion, or one or more of a
    plurality thereof, of the member which engages one or more of the flat
    sides or sidewardly facing formations of the bolt head or nut is a pawl
    which is elastic in nature and is formed by bending, cutting, punching,
    stamping, etc., a part of a sheet metal member away from the plane of the
    remainder of the member.

    (1)     Note.  Most typically, the nonplanar part is depressed and
    overridden by the corners of a bolt head or nut while the latter is turning
    in its tightening direction, subsequent to which the part springs back into
    a position whereby it blocks the path of a side of the bolt head or nut.

    (2)     Note.  In several respects, the art of this subclass presents a
    reversal of parts in contrast with the art of subclasses 114+ above, the
    latter art having the pawl carried by the bolt head or the nut.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114+,   as explained in (2) Note above.


CLS 411/126
TXT Member includes means which attempt to penetrate substructure:

    Device under subclass 125 wherein the sheet metal member includes, on its
    substructure-confronting region, means (e.g., one or more pointed
    protrusions, sharp edges, etc.) for digging into, or attempting to dig
    into, the surface of the substructure in order to either eliminate or else
    minimize turning of the member relative to the substructure.


CLS 411/127
TXT Member abuts coacting part on substructure: Device under subclass 125
    wherein the sheet metal member, or a part thereof, moves into engagement
    with, and is blocked by a particular region (e.g., an edge, a flange) of,
    or a specific formation (e.g., a lug) on, the substructure, in order to
    either eliminate or else minimize turning of the member relative to the
    substructure.


CLS 411/128
TXT Member, or portion thereof, comprises movable pawl:

    Device under subclass 116 wherein either the member, or one portion of a
    member which has a plurality of portions, comprises a dog, lug, pin, etc.,
    for blocking the turning of the bolt head or the nut in one direction by
    engaging one or more flat sides or sidewardly facing formations thereof,
    but which is pivotable, slidable, deflectable or otherwise repositionable
    by the bolt head or the nut to avoid blocking a turning movement in the
    opposite direction on the part of either of them.

    (1)     Note.  (2) Note of subclass 125 above is applicable here, also.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114+,   as explained in the Note referred to in (1) Note above.


CLS 411/129
TXT Member engages inwardly facing surface of bolt head or nut:

    Device under subclass 116 wherein the contact of a region on the outwardly
    facing surface of the member with all or part of the inwardly facing
    surface of the bolt head or nut is relied upon to contribute to the
    rotation restricting function of the one or more portions of the member.


CLS 411/130
TXT And is formed from plural, cooperating parts:

    Device under subclass 129 wherein the member consists of at least two parts
    which are discrete but which work with one another to perform the function
    of the member.


CLS 411/131
TXT And has specific structure to coact with substructure:

    Device under subclass 129 wherein the member has means (e.g., a flange, one
    or more linear segments on its perimeter, a projection, etc.) for engaging
    the substructure, or a particular part (e.g., an edge, a flange) thereof,
    or a formation (e.g., a groove, a recess) thereon, in such a manner that
    any tendency of the member to turn relative to the substructure is either
    eliminated or reduced.


CLS 411/132
TXT Member or portion thereof located between substructure and inwardly facing
    surface of bolt head or nut:

    Device under subclass 83 wherein the other element, or at least one of a
    plurality thereof, comprises a member which, or a part of which, lies
    between the substructure and that surface of the bolt head or nut which
    faces in the direction of the substructure for the purpose of resisting
    rotation of the bolt head or nut relative to the substructure.

    (1)     Note.  While the coupling, by the member, of the bolt head or the
    nut to the substructure obviously requires the mutual locking together of
    all three, the art of this and the indented subclasses is sometimes
    concerned only with the cooperative relationship of the bolt head or nut to
    the member or of the member to the substructure.  In such instances, it
    becomes necessary to assume that a suitable coupling exists at the other
    interface.

    (2)     Note.  The location of the member between the bolt head or nut and
    the substructure does not necessarily require that the member have two,
    oppositely facing, regions of contact but such is frequently the case
    (e.g., the member may be a washer).

    (3)     Note.  "Located between", in its broadest sense, has been construed
    to include the instance in which a member merely passes through, or only
    protrudes into, the region in which the substructure and the inwardly
    facing surface confront one another.  Indented subclass 140, for example,
    is predicated upon such a construction of that phrase; in addition, other
    art involving a somewhat similar, elongated element type of member, but
    wherein (a) the member may protrude from either the substructure or the
    inwardly facing surface of the bolt head or the nut, and (b) there is no
    significant entry of the member into the inwardly facing surface or the
    substructure, respectively, is found in this subclass (132).

    (4)     Note.  The structure discussed in (3) Note above sometimes is in
    the nature of a set screw.  On the other hand, subclass 83 above also
    contains a body of set screw art, which art is distinguishable from the set
    screws of this area (132+) on the following basis:  The set screw art of
    subclass 83 does not involve a traversing of, nor even an entry into, by
    the set screw, of the region in which the substructure and the inwardly
    facing surface confront one another.


CLS 411/133
TXT Member fixed to bolt shank, and member or bolt fixed to substructure:

    Device under subclass 132 wherein one or both of the member and the bolt
    are either limited in, or fixed against, turning relative to the
    substructure, and wherein means is provided, at least on the member, but,
    more commonly, on both the member and the shank of the bolt, whereby the
    two engage each other in such a manner that the turning of one relative to
    the other, at least in one direction, is either eliminated or severely
    limited.

    (1)     Note.  The member is sometimes a composite of two or more coacting
    elements, one of which elements engages the substructure and the other of
    which engages the shank of the bolt.

    (2)     Note.  The limiting or fixing of the member may involve, for
    example, substructure-penetrating formations on the member, while the
    limiting or fixing of the bolt may be predicated upon, for example, the
    squaring of a portion of the shank for engaging an opening complementary
    thereto in the substructure.

    (3)     Note.  The means on the shank of the bolt may comprise structure in
    the nature of a flat, a keyway, a thread, etc.


CLS 411/134
TXT Means holding member to bolt, nut or substructure prior to use:

    Device under subclass 132 which includes means for retaining the member to
    the bolt or the nut or the substructure in approximately the position it
    will occupy subsequent to the assembly of at least two of those three
    components with one another.

    (1)     Note.  Preassembly represents an effort to insure that the member
    (e.g., a washer) will be in the right place (e.g., on a bolt) at the right
    time.

    (2)     Note.  Preassembly with a bolt frequently is accomplished by
    forming, or completing the formation of (e.g., bringing the thread's crest
    to its full diameter), the bolt's thread after the member has been
    associated with (e.g., placed upon the shank, adjacent the head of) the
    bolt.

    (3)     Note.  While the member of this subclass is, in most instances,
    free to rotate relative to the bolt, nut or substructure with which it has
    been preassembled until such time as that bolt, nut or substructure is
    tightened against some other one of the components, occasionally it is
    found that the type of structural engagement involved in the preassembly is
    of a nature which precludes relative rotation.

    (4)     Note.  It is sometimes found in the art of this subclass,
    especially in the instance of the preassembly, with a bolt, of a member
    which has variations in its axial dimension, such as a lock washer with
    twisted teeth, that the bolt is so proportioned or structured that the
    maximum extent to which it can be tightened during assembly is somewhat
    less than the extent at which it would flatten the washer's teeth into the
    plane of the remainder of the washer, thus, avoiding the loss of locking
    efficiency on the part of the teeth.


CLS 411/135
TXT By discrete element:

    Device under subclass 134 wherein the means for holding the member to the
    bolt, nut or substructure comprises a second, other (i.e., an additional)
    element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137,    for a plural element member which may resemble somewhat the member
    and additional element of this subclass (135), but see the reference to
    this subclass appearing there (137) for an explanation of the fundamental
    difference.


CLS 411/136
TXT Member comprises looplike element (e.g., washer) interlocked with
    additional element, one of them engaging substructure or surface in other
    than planar, face to face contact:

    Device under subclass 132 wherein the member is made up of two or more
    elements which are so structured as to mechanically interengage,
    interconnect, interlock, etc., in a manner which limits, in at least one
    direction, the movement of one element with respect to at least one other
    element, and wherein one or more of the elements form a closed, or a more
    nearly closed than open, circle or polygon, the central axis of which is
    in, or approximately in, coincidence with the principal axis of the bolt or
    nut, and further wherein one or more of the elements makes contact with the
    substructure or with the inwardly facing surface of the bolt head or nut in
    a manner which involves more than that represented by engaging one flat
    face with another such face.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass (136), that element of the member which is
    in confronting relation with the inwardly facing surface frequently is
    provided with, on its surface-confronting portion, teeth or equivalent
    formations for increasing the resistance to turning, at least in an
    unthreading direction, of the bolt or nut.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146,    for the reference to this subclass (136) appearing in (2) Note
    thereof.


CLS 411/137
TXT Two looplike elements interlocked by laterally introduced key:

    Device under subclass 136 wherein the member is made up of two elements
    which form a closed, or a more closed than open, circle or polygon, and
    another element which is inserted between the two elements by movement
    toward, and more or less at right angles to, the axis of the bolt, the
    insertion of the other element serving to key the two elements against
    rotation relative to one another.

    (1)     Note.  The usual practice in the art of this subclass is to place
    the two elements on a bolt and then turn a nut tightly into place on the
    bolt.  The key is then inserted at the juncture of the two elements.
    Having eliminated any possibility of rotation of one of the two elements
    relative to the other, it is not expected that the nut will tend to turn in
    an unthreading direction.  To further insure the absence of any such
    tendency, the substructure-confronting element of the member often includes
    structure to restrict it in rotation relative to the substructure, and the
    element confronting the inwardly facing surface of the nut sometimes is
    provided with teeth or equivalent formations for enhancing its engagement
    with the nut.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135,    for another device of this area (132+) which occasionally utilizes
    two, more or less annular, elements; in that subclass, however, one of
    those elements constitutes the member, whereas the other element serves to
    retain the one element (i.e., the member) in place.


CLS 411/138
TXT Pawl element, movably carried by looplike element, coacts with ratchet on
    surface: Device under subclass 136 wherein the looplike element, or one of
    a plurality thereof, mounts, supports or otherwise holds another element
    which includes a portion for engaging the inwardly facing surface of the
    bolt head or nut, which portion is capable of some degree of movement
    relative to the surface, and wherein the surface has at least one, and
    usually a plurality of, steps or related formations, which formations
    constitute a ratchet, whereby the movable portion of the other element
    serves as a pawl for engaging the ratchet and restricting the rotation, in
    at least one direction, of the bolt or nut.


CLS 411/139
TXT Laterally introduced key locks looplike element to surface:
    Device under subclass 136 wherein an element of the member is a pin, rod,
    wedge, etc., which is inserted between, by movement toward and more or less
    at right angles to the axis of the bolt, the confronting regions of the
    looplike element and the inwardly facing surface of the bolt head or nut,
    the element penetrating, at least to some extent, each confronting region
    and serving to key the looplike element and the bolt head, or the nut, to
    one another.

    (1)     Note.  Frequently, both confronting regions are provided with a
    groove, recess, etc., for receiving the element; in the event, however,
    that only one region has such a groove, etc., then it is customary to
    utilize the element to cut (e.g., by providing it with a sharpened edge) or
    otherwise form a channel, notch, etc., for its reception in the other
    region.


CLS 411/140
TXT Elongate member moves in longitudinally extending opening in bolt head or
    nut to enter substructure:

    Device under subclass 132 wherein the member is a nail, pin, screw, or
    other element having length as its principal dimension, which element is
    contained by or passes through a recess, or an aperture, respectively, in,
    and extending more or less parallel to the principal axis of, the bolt head
    or nut, and further wherein the element is intended to be moved along its
    longitudinal axis to an extent where a portion of it enters the
    substructure while another portion remains in engagement with the bolt head
    or nut, and additionally wherein entry of the element into the substructure
    is by way of either (a) utilizing a recess provided therein for receiving
    it, or (b) having sufficient force applied to it to cause it to penetrate
    the surface of the substructure.

    (1)     Note.  Exemplary of the element of (a) of the definition is a
    spring-loaded plunger, while the element found most commonly in (b) is
    either a pointed, machine screw which is carried by an off-center, threaded
    bore in the bolt head or nut, or a threadless fastener which is impact
    driven into the substructure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132,    in regard to the reference to this subclass (140) which appears in
    (3) Note thereof.


CLS 411/141
TXT Locking dog or pawl carried by bolt head or nut and engaging substructure:

    Device under subclass 132 wherein the member is, in whole or in part, a
    tonguelike element which is accommodated in, attached to or otherwise held
    by the bolt head or nut and which is pivotably, yieldably, or otherwise
    movable, upon commencement of unthreading rotation of the bolt or nut, into
    a position in which it engages the substructure in such a manner as to
    either block or at least severely restrict movement in that direction.

    (1)     Note.  The tonguelike element assumes a substructure-penetrating
    attitude when called upon to block movement.

    (2)     Note.  While engagement of the tonguelike element with the
    substructure takes place somewhat prior to reaching the tightened position
    of the bolt head or nut, it does not, generally, offer significant
    resistance to rotation in the tightening direction.

    (3)     Note.  In some instances, a single bolt head or nut may be provided
    with more than one tonguelike element.


CLS 411/142
TXT Key introduced laterally at juncture of surface and substructure:

    Device under subclass 132 wherein the member is in the form of a pin, rod,
    wedge, etc., and is inserted between, by movement toward and more or less
    at right angles to the axis of the bolt, the inwardly facing surface of the
    bolt head or nut and that portion of the substructure which confronts the
    surface, and further wherein a portion of the pin, etc., lies within the
    surface and another portion thereof lies within the substructure, thereby
    serving to key the bolt head, or the nut, to the substructure.

    (1)     Note.  Most commonly, both the surface and the substructure include
    a provision (e.g., a groove) for receiving their respective portions of the
    pin, etc.; in some instances, however, at least one of them lacks such a
    provision, in which event the pin, etc., may be provided with a sharpened,
    longitudinally extending ridge (e.g., an edge) for forming a channel,
    notch, etc., as it is being moved into place.


CLS 411/143
TXT Formations on either member or surface, and cooperative, restricting means
    on the other:

    Device under subclass 132 wherein either the member or the inwardly facing
    surface of the bolt head or nut includes at least one formation (e.g., a
    groove, ridge, spur, etc.), and the other is provided with means for
    coactingly engaging the formation or formations, the engagement serving to
    prevent or limit rotation of the member and the surface relative to one
    another.

    (1)     Note.  The engagement may be selective in nature.

    (2)     Note.  A mere corner, edge, etc., of the member or the surface does
    not constitute a "formation" within the meaning of this subclass; a
    concavo-convex relationship, however, is considered to be proper for
    inclusion here.


CLS 411/144
TXT Formations on surface, means on member, one of which presents a sharp edged
    configuration:

    Device under subclass 143 wherein the one or more formations are located on
    the inwardly facing surface of the bolt head or the nut and the means is
    located on the member, and either the formations or the means, or both of
    them, has a sectional configuration which includes points or lines, which
    points or lines are formed by the angular intersection (usually at 90o or
    less) of regions of the surface or the member (e.g., a chisel edge, cone,
    corner, parallel-walled channel, rectangular tooth, ridge, V-groove, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143,    for related structure, but wherein none of the engagement is of,
    for example, the chisel-edge-to-V-groove type; in other words, the
    formations and structures of that subclass 143 tend to be rounded or
    otherwise gently undulating in cross section.


CLS 411/145
TXT Formations comprise ramplike teeth, means comprises a movable pawl:

    Device under subclass 144 wherein the formations on the inwardly facing
    surfaces of the bolt head or the nut are in the nature of successive teeth,
    each having a configuration consisting of an incline, followed by a
    decline, the latter usually being a sharp (e.g., a straight) drop, and
    wherein the means on the member, which means is movable in response to a
    force applied thereto in a particular direction by a moving tooth, may
    comprise (a) a protruding portion of the member, which portion either is in
    itself resilient or else is resilient by virtue of the nature (e.g., the
    material) of the member, or (b) an attachment to the member which is
    movable (e.g., pivotally) relative to the member.

    (1)     Note.  Exemplary of (a) above is a split washer having one of its
    free ends positioned to engage the teeth, which free end frequently is
    distorted or otherwise reshaped into a lip-like configuration.


CLS 411/146
TXT And substructure accommodation for member portion:

    Device under subclass 145 wherein the member includes structure (e.g., a
    surface protuberance, an arm, etc.) for entering or otherwise engaging with
    a cavity, slot, etc., provided in the substructure for receiving it, and
    which cavity, etc., is located, at least in part, below the surface of the
    substructure.

    (1)     Note.  In perhaps its most simplistic manifestation, this subclass
    adds, to the split washer example of (1) Note of subclass 145 above, a
    shoulder, inset into the substructure, for backing up the other free end of
    the washer.

    (2)     Note.  As an alternative to forming the cavity, etc., in the
    substructure, a separate plate, attached to the substructure, may be
    utilized for providing such a feature; however, patents disclosing and
    claiming such an alternative structure usually meet the limitations of
    subclass 136 above and so will be found there.

    (3)     Note.  It is occasionally disclosed in the art of this subclass
    that, if the substructure is of wood rather than metal, the requirement for
    a cavity, etc., in the substructure may be dispensed with and the
    protuberance, etc., merely be forced into the substructure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136,    as explained in the reference thereto appearing in (2) Note above.


CLS 411/147
TXT Member comprises washer formed as closed loop or apertured plate or as
    split ring: Device under subclass 132 wherein the member consists of at
    least one element in the form of an open-center figure having a principal
    axis which generally coincides with the longitudinal axis of the bolt or
    the nut and wherein the figure may either (a) form a closed path as in (1)
    a ring or (2) a disclike element having an opening more or less in its
    center and having axially facing regions of significantly greater area than
    in the instance of (1); or (b) form other than a closed path by having free
    ends which (1) fall short of meeting one another or (2) pass one another
    and extend therebeyond.

    (1)     Note.  In the absence of a locus elsewhere (i.e., in an area not
    involving a substructure relationship) for the member, per se, patents
    claiming only the member, as well as patents claiming the member in
    combination with the bolt, nut or substructure, are included in this and
    the indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  A member having some degree of compressibility, but which
    compressibility is achieved in a manner not provided for elsewhere in this
    area (147+), will be found in this subclass (147).

    (3)     Note.  Included herein is a collection of art wherein the outer
    periphery of the member is given some particular configuration (e.g.,
    rectangular, square, etc.), which configuration ordinarily might not be
    deemed to be particularly relevant to the member's description as "an
    open-center figure forming a closed or a nonclosed path".

    (4)     Note.  Also collected herein is a small amount of art disclosing a
    washer-to-bolt-thread relationship.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151,    for the reference to this subclass (147) appearing in (1) Note
    thereof.

    170,    for a nut and an apertured spacer therefor which are formed
    adjacent to one another in a strip of material and are then placed in axial
    alignment with one another by folding the strip about an axis located
    between the nut and the spacer portions thereof; while the spacer remains
    attached to the nut and therefore does not qualify as an additional element
    for this subclass (147) and the indented subclasses, it sometimes functions
    in a manner related thereto.

    531+,   for washer structure when the washer is not a part of a rotation
    restricting arrangement for a bolt or nut.


CLS 411/148
TXT Engaging side wall of counterbore in substructure:

    Device under subclass 147 wherein the substructure is provided with either
    a cylindrical or a conical enlargement of a portion of the bolt shank
    passage, which enlargement receives either a bolt head or a nut, and
    wherein the open-center figure, or one of a plurality thereof, makes
    contact with some portion of the inner surface of the enlargement.

    (1)     Note.  Frequently, the open-center figure is configured to embrace
    a bolt head which is formed with an upwardly and outwardly flared (e.g., a
    beveled), substructure-confronting surface.


CLS 411/149
TXT Plural, axially adjacent washers, or plural part washer:

    Device under subclass 147 wherein there are either (a) two or more
    open-center figures located next to one another along the axis of the bolt
    or nut, or (b) a single open-center figure which is made up of two or more
    different components, parts, substances, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a device of the kind wherein an
    open-center figure is formed in each of the two ends of a strip of material
    and the strip then folded about the mid portion of its length to place the
    figures in axial alignment.

    (2)     Note.  In the instance of the single, composite figure, the several
    components, parts, substances, etc., usually are readily discernible as
    such, even though they may be rather intimately associated with one another.


CLS 411/150
TXT Having one washer, or washer part, of a more yieldable nature than another
    washer, or part:

    Device under subclass 149 wherein either one of the two or more open-center
    figures, or one of the two or more different components, parts, substances,
    etc., of a single such figure, is, by composition or configuration, more
    bendable, compressible, etc., than another of the figures or another of the
    components, etc., of the single figure.


CLS 411/151
TXT Split ring having radially outwardly extending end:

    Device under subclass 147 wherein the open-center figure does not form a
    closed path, but, instead, has two, distinct ends, and further wherein one
    or both of the ends turn from the remainder of the figure in a direction
    away from its principal axis.

    (1)     Note.  Those loops which have free ends but which fail to meet the
    requirements of either this subclass (151) or subclasses 152+ below are
    classified elsewhere in this area on some other basis, if applicable, or,
    if not, then in subclass 147 above.


CLS 411/152
TXT Ends of split ring overlap in stressed condition:
    Device under subclass 147 wherein the open-center figure does not form a
    closed path, but, instead, has two, distinct ends, and further wherein
    those ends pass beyond one another to the extent that, when the figure is
    subjected to an axially directed load as the result of the tightening of
    the bolt or nut, they will be superposed relative to one another in a
    direction paralleling the principal axis of the figure.

    (1)     Note.  The "stressed condition" limitation is intended to rule out
    those open-center figures wherein, in a relaxed state, the ends appear to
    overlap, but which ends, upon the compressing of the figure by the
    tightening of the bolt or nut, move apart to the extent that there is no
    longer any overlap.

    (2)     Note.  An overlap in a radial sense, that is, where the ends pass
    beyond one another but one lies farther from the principal axis of the
    figure than the other, is not the type of overlap contemplated by this
    subclass.

    (3)     Note.  (1) Note of subclass 151 above is applicable here, also.


CLS 411/153
TXT Overlap of at least 180 degrees (e.g., coil): Device under subclass 152
    wherein the distinct ends of the figure, having passed beyond one another,
    continue along paths in which they are axially superposed until they have
    traversed a total path or about 540_ or more.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147,    for an open-center figure in the nature of a spiral, or a volute,
    spring.


CLS 411/154
TXT Apertured plate of uniform thickness having undulating contact surfaces:

    Device under subclass 147 wherein the open-center figure is in the nature
    of a plate penetrated by a hole, and further wherein the plate shows, in a
    section paralleling its outer periphery and taken before the figure has
    been subjected to the pressure generated by the tightening of the bolt or
    nut involved, a series of wavelike formations.

    (1)     Note.  The "prior to being stressed" limitation excludes those
    figures which have circumferentially spaced projections on each of their
    axially directed, oppositely facing regions, which projections, if formed
    alternately on the two regions, may cause the outer periphery to take on an
    undulating configuration upon the application of an axial force to the
    figure.


CLS 411/155
TXT Apertured plate having arched sectional configuration (e.g.,
    concavo-convex):

    Device under subclass 147 wherein the open-center figure is in the nature
    of a plate penetrated by a hole, the center of the hole ordinarily
    representing a point on the principal axis of the figure, and further
    wherein the plate is curved in cross section in at least one direction or
    is otherwise so configured in section as to place its central portion in a
    different plane than some or all of its periphery, in order that it may
    bend to resist a force applied more or less axially.


CLS 411/156
TXT Arched configuration circumscribes aperture: Device under subclass 155
    wherein the figure is annular in nature, and further wherein the sectional
    curvature is displayed twice by a section which contains the principal axis
    of the figure (i.e., the material on one side of the central opening
    presents, in section, a mirror image of the material on the other side of
    the opening).


CLS 411/157
TXT Split ring having opposed ends offset axially: Device under subclass 147
    wherein the open-center figure does not form a closed (i.e., a
    noninterrupted) path, but, instead, has two, distinct ends, which ends,
    although facing more or less toward one another, are misaligned from one
    another in a direction paralleling the principal axis of the figure at such
    time as the figure is not subjected to the axially directed loading imposed
    by the tightening of the bolt or nut.

    (1)     Note.  The misalignment results most frequently from the fact that
    the ends are not directed exactly toward each other; another example,
    however, is that of ends which are so formed as to have a surface area
    which exceeds the area of a section of the material and wherein, when
    forced into abutting contact, the end surfaces engage as to only a portion
    of their respective areas.

    (2)     Note.  The open-center figure of this subclass most commonly takes
    the form of a helix of slightly less than one full turn.

    (3)     Note.  The provision of means (e.g., the spacing of the ends, the
    configuration of the ends, etc.) for preventing the tendency, when handled
    in bulk, of two or more of the open-center figures to interlink with one
    another appears frequently in the art of this subclass.

    (4)     Note.  The open-center figure of this subclass is occasionally
    provided with a guard for confining the residue in the event of breakage of
    the figure.

    (5)     Note.  The open-center figure of this subclass is sometimes
    fabricated from twisted, rectangular or square, bar stock, thus providing
    the surface of the figure with upstanding ribs which wind about it
    throughout its circumference.


CLS 411/158
TXT Contact surface contains a plurality of generally radially extending ridges
    or grooves removed from the ends:

    Device under subclass 157 wherein the open-center figure is formed with two
    or more projections or recesses facing the bolt or nut or facing the
    substructure, or with at least one projection or recess facing the bolt or
    nut and at least one other projection or recess facing the substructure,
    and further wherein the projections or recesses have a length dimension
    whereby they traverse, in a direction generally paralleling that of a
    radian of the figure, that surface of the figure which faces the bolt or
    nut or that surface thereof which faces the substructure or both such
    surfaces, and additionally wherein the plurality of projections or recesses
    is in addition to any such projections or recesses as may be present at a
    location proximate to either of the free ends of the figure.

    (1)     Note.  The limitation which excludes projections or recesses at or
    immediately adjacent the free ends is necessitated by such extremely common
    practices as, for example, imparting a chisel-like shape to an end, bending
    an end slightly in an axial direction and thus forming a ridge at the axis
    of the bend, and so forth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157,    for an open-center figure proper for this area (157+) having
    projections in the nature of spirally wound ribs, as explained in (5) Note
    of that subclass.


CLS 411/159
TXT Cross section other than rectangular:
    Device under subclass 157 wherein the material from which the figure is
    fabricated displays, in section, something other than a four-sided polygon
    having 90_ corners.


CLS 411/160
TXT Closed loop having plural variations in the profile of a contact surface or
    a peripheral edge thereof:

    Device under subclass 147 wherein the open-center figure is a closed one of
    a more or less circular nature and has regions (e.g., contact surfaces)
    which face generally oppositely and which have a radial extent determined
    by the inner periphery and the outer periphery of the figure, and wherein
    at least one region, or at least one periphery, is formed with a pattern of
    recurring changes in the figure's dimension in an axial direction (i.e.,
    its effective thickness).


CLS 411/161
TXT Variations comprise generally radially extending ridges or grooves:

    Device under subclass 160 wherein the pattern of recurring changes in the
    figure's dimension in an axial direction is formed by a plurality of
    projections or recesses which traverse one or both regions from adjacent
    one periphery of such a region to adjacent the other periphery and, more
    often than not, along the shortest path (i.e., a radian) therebetween.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein also, for example, are projections or ridges
    which (a) are slightly askew to a radian or (b) describe a somewhat curved
    path between the peripheries.


CLS 411/162
TXT Variations comprise circumferentially spaced projections or recesses inset
    from both peripheries:

    Device under subclass 160 wherein the pattern of recurring changes in the
    figure's dimension in an axial direction is formed by a plurality of raised
    or depressed portions within one or both of the regions, which portions are
    spaced inwardly from the figure's outer periphery and outwardly from its
    inner periphery and are spaced from one another along an annular path.

    (1)     Note.  In the instance of a figure formed (e.g., stamped) from thin
    material, the structure which comprises a raised portion within one region
    usually comprises a depressed portion within the other region.


CLS 411/163
TXT Variations are teeth located along a periphery:

    Device under subclass 160 wherein the pattern of recurring changes in the
    figure's dimension in an axial direction is formed by a plurality of
    toothlike projections positioned at, in or on one or both of the
    peripheries of the figure.

    (1)     Note.  The teeth frequently owe the bulk of their axial dimension
    to being turned or twisted, each about its base.


CLS 411/164
TXT Both peripheries:

    Device under subclass 163 wherein the tooth like projections are at, in or
    on both the inner periphery and the outer periphery of the figure.


CLS 411/165
TXT Each twisted about its radial axis:

    Device under subclass 163 wherein the toothlike projections either are
    located along the outer periphery of the figure and extend radially away
    therefrom or are located along the inner periphery and extend toward the
    figure's longitudinal axis therefrom, and, in either instance, the
    toothlike projections each follow generally the path of a radian and are
    each given a twist about the axis of such a radian.


CLS 411/166
TXT Restricting means comprises structure of fastener or substructure:

    Device under subclass 81 wherein the means for either preventing or
    limiting turning of a specific bolt or nut relative to its substructure
    resides in one or more structural characteristics (e.g., configuration,
    composition, etc.) of one or another of the bolt, or the nut, or the
    substructure.

    (1)     Note.  If the structural characteristic of at least one of the
    cooperating members (bolt, nut or substructure) is something more than a
    flat (i.e., a bearing) surface, classification is here; however, if both of
    any two cooperating members afford no more than surfaces of a planar
    nature, and those surfaces are parallel to one other, classification is
    elsewhere (e.g., below, as an externally, or internally, threaded fastener,
    per se.)

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     for a collection of art wherein the means for preventing or
    limiting turning resides in a structural characteristic of a bolt, nut or
    substructure, as is provided for in this area (166+), but wherein a
    plurality of bolts and nuts are involved.

    83+,    for a threaded bolt or nut and means for restricting the rotation
    of one or both relative to a coacting substructure and wherein the means
    comprises at least one element which is in addition to the bolt, nut, or
    substructure and also is (a) movable relative to the bolt, nut or
    substructure or (b) separable therefrom or (c) connected without distortion
    thereto.

    190+,   for a threaded bolt and nut and means for coupling them against
    relative rotation.  It is appropriate to observe here that, while the
    instances of coupling (a) a bolt and a nut to a substructure, or (b) a nut
    to a substructure, clearly are provided for in this area (166+) and would
    not get to that area (190+), the instance of coupling (c) a bolt to a
    substructure sometimes presents a less straightforward proposition, because
    the "substructure" may have some attributes of a static structure (for
    166+), but may also, in other respects, appear to act very much in the
    nature of a nut (for 190+); accordingly, when a situation of that kind
    arises, consideration should be given to placing copies of the patent in
    both areas (166+ and 190+).


CLS 411/167
TXT And bolt to nut thread lock:

    Device under subclass 166 wherein there is also provided, on one or the
    other, or both, of the bolt or nut, thread structure of a kind which serves
    to couple one to the other to restrict rotation therebetween.

    (1)     Note.  The thread lock of this subclass ordinarily is separate from
    and not directly related to the means by which the bolt or nut is
    restricted in rotation relative to the substructure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    for the reference to a thread lock appearing in (2) Note thereof.

    106,    for a threaded fastener (i.e., a bolt or nut) and means for
    restricting the rotation thereof relative to a coacting substructure and
    wherein the means includes a restricting member and further wherein the
    member is preassembled with the substructure at a through-passage or a
    recess therein for holding a bolt or nut in coaxial relation with the
    through-passage or recess and additionally wherein means (e.g., a thread
    lock) is provided for coupling the bolt and the nut to one another.

    118,    for a threaded fastener (i.e., a bolt or nut) and means for
    restricting the rotation thereof relative to a coacting substructure and
    wherein the means includes a restricting member and further wherein the
    bolt or nut, or a coaxial adjunct therefor, has a sidewardly facing flat or
    formation engaged by a portion of the member (e.g., a side lock) and
    additionally wherein a thread lock is provided for coupling the bolt (or
    nut) to a complementary nut (or bolt).

    168,    for a device of this area (166+), but wherein the means includes or
    consists of a thread lock between a bolt and a substructure, the latter
    functioning as a nut insofar as the bolt is concerned.

    259+,   for a threaded bolt and nut and means for coupling them against
    relative rotation and wherein the means is proximate to and involves the
    region of their threaded interengagement (i.e., a thread lock).


CLS 411/168
TXT By or including bolt to substructure thread lock:

    Device under subclass 166 wherein the rotation restricting means either
    includes as a portion thereof, or else consists wholly of, thread
    structure, on one or the other or both of the bolt and the substructure
    with which it is in threaded engagement, of a kind which serves to couple
    one to the other.

    (1)     Note.  The substructure functions here as a nut insofar as the bolt
    is concerned.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    106, 118, and 259+, each as explained in the reference thereto
    appearing in subclass 167 above.

    167,    for a device of this area (166+), but wherein, in addition to the
    means for restricting the rotation of the bolt or nut relative to a
    substructure, there is also provided a thread lock for coupling the bolt to
    its nut.


CLS 411/169
TXT Mass of bolt head or nut offset radially to resist loosening:

    Device under subclass 166 wherein the mass of either the head of the bolt
    or of the nut is not centered on the longitudinal axis thereof, whereby,
    when that axis is horizontal or significantly so, there will be a tendency
    for the bolt or nut, if properly oriented, to both oppose turning in an
    unthreading direction and encourage turning in the opposite direction.


CLS 411/170
TXT Nut and apertured spacer formed in single strip of material and folded into
    axial alignment:

    Device under subclass 166 wherein the nut and structure (e.g., a washer)
    which will be axially aligned therewith and positioned between the nut and
    the substructure, but which remains integral with the nut, are formed in a
    more or less planar length of stock material and folded one over the other
    to place the aperture and the threaded opening of the nut in alignment with
    one another.

    (1)     Note.  The inherent resiliency of the "hinge" portion connecting
    the nut and apertured spacer is sometimes relied upon to increase the
    resistance of the nut to turning relative to the substructure.

    (2)     Note.  A plurality of spacers for the nut may be obtained by
    forming plural apertures in the stock material and then folding it over the
    appropriate number of times.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147,    for the reference to this subclass (170) appearing therein.


CLS 411/171
TXT Bolt or nut adapted to be fused directly to substructure (e.g., weld nut):

    Device under subclass 166 wherein a bolt or nut is so formed or shaped
    (e.g., with one or more flanges, projections, etc.) or otherwise adapted to
    be united by fusion, without the benefit of additional material, to a
    substructure, the weld involving a mutual melting and flowing together of a
    portion of the material of the bolt or nut and a portion of the material of
    the substructure.

    (1)     Note.  The art of this subclass may claim only the subcombination
    of the bolt or nut.

    (2)     Note.  Prominent in the art of this subclass is a "weld nut" which
    is, most commonly, a metallic nut having one or more projections (e.g.,
    lugs) which are intended to be fused (e.g., by spot welding) to the
    substructure to unite the nut therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     for a threaded fastener (i.e., a bolt or nut) and means for
    restricting the rotation thereof relative to a coacting substructure and
    wherein there is provided additional material which has a settable state;
    included therein is the fusible joining of a bolt or nut to a substructure
    if additional material (e.g., weld rod, chemical solvent) is utilized in
    doing so.

    257     and 258, each as explained in the reference thereto appearing in
    subclass 82 above.


CLS 411/172
TXT Nut, and means to engage substructure on its opposite faces for retaining
    nut at aperture therein, formed as unitary component:

    Device under subclass 166 wherein the structural characteristic comprises
    the formation of the nut, and of structure for retaining the nut in a
    particular relationship with an aperture that is formed in the substructure
    for the purpose of receiving the bolt, as a single element, and wherein the
    element makes contact with the substructure at one or more locations on
    each of its oppositely (i.e., outwardly) facing surfaces.

    (1)     Note.  Frequently, the substructure of the definition is one of two
    panels which are being joined in a facing relationship, the other panel
    having an aperture for receiving a bolt as it passes through that panel
    enroute to the first panel and its nut.


CLS 411/173
TXT Means to engage extends through aperture: Device under subclass 172 wherein
    the single element rests, in part, against one of the surfaces of the
    substructure and has a portion (e.g., an arm, tongue, etc.) which passes
    through the aperture for the bolt enroute to establishing contact with the
    other surface of the substructure.

    (1)     Note.  The provision and utilization of at least one opening in the
    substructure, which opening is in addition to the aperture for the bolt,
    for the passage of a portion which is the equivalent of the portion of this
    subclass, appears in subclass 172 above.


CLS 411/174
TXT Means to engage grasps an edge of substructure:

    Device under subclass 172 wherein the single element is, at least in part,
    U-shaped for the purpose of being forced over an edge portion of the
    substructure.

    (1)     Note.  "Edge" refers to an outer boundary of the substructure,
    which substructure usually is in the nature of a panel.


CLS 411/175
TXT And has projection contacting periphery of aperture:

    Device under subclass 174 wherein the single element includes, on one of
    the arms of the U, a detent, finger, lip, etc., directed toward the other
    arm for engaging the periphery of the aperture provided in the substructure
    for the bolt.

    (1)     Note.  The detent, etc., usually is for the purpose of anchoring
    the element until such time as the bolt can be threaded into the nut
    portion of the element.


CLS 411/176
TXT Structure includes region which is deformable or produces deformation or
    both: Device under subclass 166 wherein the structural characteristic
    comprises the inclusion in one or more of the bolt or the nut or the
    substructure of at least one region (e.g., area, portion, etc.) which is
    inherently capable of (a) undergoing a significant change (e.g., a
    distortion) in configuration or shape, which change may be either elastic
    or plastic in nature, (b) causing such a change in another of the bolt, nut
    or   substructure, or (c) causing such a change in another, and, either in
    reaction thereto or as a result of another force, undergoing a change in
    its own configuration or shape.

    (1)     Note.  The capability of one region for causing deformation in
    another region usually is a matter of the hardness of one relative to that
    of the other.


CLS 411/177
TXT Nut assembled to substructure utilizing cooperating regions on both:

    Device under subclass 176 wherein a nut and a substructure, each having a
    deformable/deformation-producing region, are joined to one another, and
    wherein, as a result of the joining, the region of one deforms, or is
    deformed by, or both, the corresponding region of the other.

    (1)     Note.  The assembly with which this and the indented subclasses are
    concerned is that of the nut to the substructure prior to the threading of
    a bolt with the nut.


CLS 411/178
TXT Nut is externally and internally threaded cylinder:

    Apparatus under subclass 177 wherein the nut is tubular in nature and is
    threaded on its outer surface, as well as internally, the outer thread
    serving to engage the nut with the substructure when the nut is inserted
    thereinto.

    (1)     Note.  Here, the nut is often the deformation-producing one of the
    cooperating members, and may, for example, deform the substructure by
    creating, in an untapped bore thereof, a thread mating with its own thread,
    or, if the bore is a tapped one, may be provided at some other location
    with a projection, such as a flange at its outermost end, for interfering
    with, and deforming, a region of the substructure.

    (2)     Note.  The external thread need not be continuous, and, in fact,
    may be fragmentary.


CLS 411/179
TXT Nut penetrates substructure and anchors itself thereto (e.g., pierce nut):

    Device under subclass 177 wherein the nut contains a deformation producing
    region which, when cooperating with a tool couple in the nature of a ram
    and anvil, is adapted to act as a cutter or die and move against the
    substructure, or have the substructure moved against it, with sufficient
    force to create an opening in the substructure, which opening may (a) have
    its periphery, or portions thereof, bent or otherwise distorted (e.g.,
    swaged) into a recess in an axially directed surface of the nut for holding
    the nut fast to an axially directed surface of the substructure, (b)
    provide an entrance to the bore of the nut for the bolt which is to be
    received by the nut, (c) be sufficiently large to receive the overall
    radial dimensions of the nut and have its periphery forced radially
    inwardly to fixedly engage the nut along its radially outwardly facing
    surfaces and thus hold the nut in more or less coplanar relationship with
    the substructure, or (d) otherwise serve in anchoring the nut to the
    substructure.

    (1)     Note.  The substructure frequently is in the nature of a panel
    whose thickness is less than the axial dimension of the nut.

    (2)     Note.  The terms "clinching" or "clinch nut" appear occasionally in
    the art of this subclass (179).  While the act of fastening a pierce nut to
    a substructure can properly be described as clinching, a clinch nut is
    distinguishable from a pierce nut on the basis that the former is intended
    to be anchored at a preexisting opening.  On the other hand, the term
    "pierce or clinch nut", when properly applied, denotes a nut which can be
    utilized either (a) to pierce an opening and be clinched thereat or (b) to
    merely be clinched at an existing opening.  Other collections of clinch
    nuts are found in subclasses 180 and 183 below.


CLS 411/180
TXT Nut deforms wall of preformed opening in substructure during assembly:

    Device under subclass 177 wherein the substructure is provided with an
    aperture for the entry, in an axial direction, of the nut, or at least a
    portion of the axial dimension thereof, and wherein the substructure has a
    deformable region which comprises the periphery of the aperture, which
    periphery undergoes a change in configuration, radially, or axially, during
    or subsequent to the introduction of the nut thereinto.

    (1)     Note.  The change in configuration may be, for example, (a) a
    shearing off of portions of the wall of the aperture by the forcing
    thereinto of a nut having a serrated, radially outwardly facing surface, or
    (b) a bending out, from the plane of the substructure, of the material
    surrounding the aperture (e.g., the substructure is a thin panel).

    (2)     Note.  The aperture in the instance of a substructure of greater
    thickness than the axial dimension of the nut may have an enlarged portion
    for the entry of the nut and another smaller portion for the passage of the
    bolt shank.

    (3)     Note.  It is not intended to include herein deformation of the
    substructure which takes place at a location removed from the periphery of
    the opening; e.g., by prongs or tangs depending from a radially outwardly
    extending flange formed on the nut.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179,    in regard to the reference to this subclass (180) appearing in (2)
    Note thereof.


CLS 411/181
TXT Both cooperating regions deformed:

    Device under subclass 177 wherein the nut and the substructure each include
    a region which is capable of undergoing a significant change in
    configuration or shape and wherein the regions coact to undergo such a
    change as a result of the joining.

    (1)     Note.  The two regions may undergo change simultaneously, or the
    change may be sequential.


CLS 411/182
TXT Nonmetallic nut, resiliently deformable during assembly:

    Device under subclass 177 wherein the nut is formed of other than metallic
    material (e.g., of an elastomeric composition) and is elastically
    distorted, momentarily or otherwise, while being joined to the substructure.

    (1)     Note.  The joining frequently involves the forcing of a mounting
    portion of the nut into an opening in the substructure which is somewhat
    smaller than the overall dimensions, radially, of that portion.


CLS 411/183
TXT Nut assembled to substructure by plastically deformable region on nut:
    Device under subclass 176 wherein a nut which contains a deformable region
    is joined to the substructure by the permanent distortion of that region or
    a portion thereof.

    (1)     Note.  (1) Note of subclass 177 above is applicable here, also.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179,    in regard to the reference to this subclass (183) appearing in (2)
    Note thereof.


CLS 411/184
TXT Region on inwardly facing surface of bolt head or nut:

    Device under subclass 176 wherein the deformable/deformation-producing
    region of either a bolt head or a nut occupies either a portion of or all
    of that surface thereof which confronts the substructure.


CLS 411/185
TXT Surface extends radially beyond flat sides of bolt head or nut:

    Device under subclass 184 wherein the bolt head or the nut includes a
    plurality of planar, sidewardly facing surfaces (e.g., for engagement by a
    wrench), and wherein the inwardly facing (i.e., the working) surface of the
    bolt head or the nut is given a radial dimension which is greater than the
    distance separating opposite ones of the sidewardly facing surfaces.


CLS 411/186
TXT And includes resilient flange:

    Device under subclass 185 wherein the greater radial dimension of the
    inwardly facing surface, or a portion of that dimension, is in the nature
    of an elastically deformable lip.


CLS 411/187
TXT Having axially directed projection or recess:

    Device under subclass 184 wherein the substructure-confronting surface of
    the bolt head or the nut includes at least one formation (e.g., a ridge,
    stud, groove, hollow) which is raised or depressed in a direction more or
    less normally thereto.


CLS 411/188
TXT Plural, radially extending, and generally equally spaced:

    Device under subclass 187 wherein the raised or depressed formations are
    two or more in number, are each located at, and extend along, a line which
    approximates a radian of the surface, and are spaced more or less the same
    distance apart around the surface.


CLS 411/189
TXT Surface deforms resiliently:

    Device under subclass 184 wherein the deformation which occurs in the
    surface is elastic in nature.


CLS 411/190
TXT THREADED BOLT AND NUT AND MEANS FOR COUPLING THEM AGAINST RELATIVE
    ROTATION: Device under the class definition wherein an externally threaded
    element and an internally threaded element are matingly engaged through the
    medium of their threads, and wherein means is provided to restrict (i.e.,
    limit or prevent) the rotation, in at least the unthreading direction, of
    one element relative to the other.

    (1)     Note.  The means may range from as much as a plurality of discrete
    members to as little as the configuration of the thread of one of the
    elements; in the case of a plurality of such members, only one of the
    members may be directly involved in the restriction of rotation, the other,
    or others, often serving only an auxiliary function (e.g., retaining the
    one in its operative position).

    (2)     Note.  Infrequently, the internally threaded element consists of at
    least two, more or less distinct, cooperating parts (e.g., an inner,
    internally threaded sleeve and, interengaged in some manner therewith, an
    outer shell, the latter ordinarily having flat surfaces for engagement by a
    wrench), in which instance the mating, threaded engagement required for
    this subclass is considered to be that of the inner part of the composite
    internally threaded element with the externally threaded element.

    (3)     Note.  Classification in this and the indented subclasses is not
    precluded by the absence of a combination of the two threaded elements, as
    long as it is clear that the coupling means is intended for use with such a
    combination.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81+,    for a threaded fastener (i.e., a bolt or nut) and means for
    restricting the rotation thereof relative to a coacting substructure.

    166,    in regard to the discussion therein of a peculiar kind of art for
    which classification in both areas 166+ and 190+ should be considered.


CLS 411/191
TXT By locking member contacting side flat on nut or bolt and engageable with
    other fastener element:

    Device under subclass 190 provided with one or more distinct members which
    restrict one of the threaded elements from rotating by bearing against or
    otherwise contacting at least one, more or less flat, radially outwardly
    facing surface of that threaded element, and which member, or at least one
    of them, also contacts the other threaded element in such a manner as to
    restrict it, too, from rotating.


CLS 411/192
TXT Member also engages side flat on other element:

    Device under subclass 191 wherein the other threaded element includes at
    least one, more or less flat, radially outwardly facing surface, and at
    least one of the distinct members rests against or otherwise contacts one
    or more of the surfaces.


CLS 411/193
TXT Utilizing a resilient characteristic of the member, or of a discrete
    element:

    Device under subclass 192 wherein either (a) an inherent property of
    resiliency on the part of at least one of the distinct members or (b) the
    presence of a distinct element having such a capability, is relied upon for
    either (1) moving the distinct member into or from its rotation restricting
    position or (2) keeping the distinct member from becoming separated from
    its operative association with one or the other of the threaded elements.


CLS 411/194
TXT With a discrete, resilient element:

    Device under subclass 193 provided with a distinct element or device of a
    resilient nature for positioning or retaining the member.


CLS 411/195
TXT Other element is a bolt, and member includes opening configured to engage
    side flat thereon:

    Device under subclass 192 wherein the other threaded element is the
    externally threaded one, and wherein at least one of the distinct members
    includes an aperture which is adapted by its configuration (e.g., a square
    hole) to contact one or more of the more or less flat, radially outwardly
    facing surfaces provided on the other threaded element.


CLS 411/196
TXT And further including spaced, axially extending legs for engaging side
    flats on the nut:

    Device under subclass 195 wherein at least one of the distinct members
    includes, also, portions extending more or less normally to a plane
    containing the aperture and having radially inwardly facing regions for
    complementarily contacting the more or less flat, radially outwardly facing
    surfaces of the one (i.e., the internally) threaded element.


CLS 411/197
TXT Locking member contacts nut:

    Device under subclass 191 wherein the one threaded element is the
    internally threaded one, and the at least one, more or less flat, radially
    outwardly facing surface is found on that threaded element.


CLS 411/198
TXT Utilizing a resilient characteristic of the member, or of a discrete
    element:

    Device under subclass 197 wherein either (a) an inherent property of
    resiliency on the part of at least one of the distinct members or (b) the
    presence of a distinct element having such a capability, is relied upon for
    either (1) moving the distinct member into or from its rotation restricting
    position or (2) keeping the distinct member from becoming separated from
    its operative association with one or the other of the threaded elements.


CLS 411/199
TXT Member comprises key movable laterally into engagement with threaded
    elements:

    Device under subclass 198 wherein at least one of the distinct members
    ordinarily comprises a pin, wedge, clip, dog, etc., which is inserted by
    movement from one side of the threaded elements toward, and more or less
    normally to, their longitudinal axis, which pin, etc., usually is received
    in part in each of the threaded elements and thus forms a positive
    interlock therebetween.


CLS 411/200
TXT Member comprises key movable laterally into engagement with threaded
    elements:

    Device under subclass 197 wherein at least one of the distinct members
    ordinarily comprises a pin, wedge, clip, dog, etc., which is inserted by
    movement from one side of the threaded elements toward, and more or less
    normally to, their longitudinal axis, which pin, etc., usually is received
    in part in each of the threaded elements and thus forms a positive
    interlock therebetween.


CLS 411/201
TXT Member includes plastically deformable portion:

    Device under subclass 197 wherein the distinct member, or one of them,
    includes at least one region which, when bent or otherwise reshaped, is
    adapted to remain in its changed configuration (i.e., the elastic limit of
    the material from which the member is formed has been exceeded).

    (1)     Note.  The reshaping may relate to the retaining of the member in
    its operative position, rather than to the member's function of restricting
    rotation.


CLS 411/202
TXT Utilizing a resilient characteristic of the member, or of a discrete
    element:

    Device under subclass 191 wherein either (a) an inherent property of
    resiliency on the part of at least one of the distinct members or (b) the
    presence of a distinct element having such a capability, is relied upon for
    either (1) moving the distinct member into or from its rotation restricting
    position or (2) keeping the distinct member from becoming separated from
    its operative association with one or the other of the threaded elements.


CLS 411/203
TXT With a discrete, resilient element:

    Device under subclass 202 provided with a distinct element or device of a
    resilient nature for positioning or retaining the member.


CLS 411/204
TXT By locking member coacting with an axially outwardly facing portion of nut:

    Device under subclass 190 provided with one or more distinct members having
    a capability of restricting the rotation of at least the internally
    threaded element, which member (or members) (a) is positioned outwardly, at
    least in part, of the internally threaded element (relative to the head end
    of the externally threaded element) and (b) cooperates with that outwardly
    facing portion of the internally threaded element to restrict the rotation
    thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The cooperation of the distinct member with the internally
    threaded element may involve anything from the engagement of a flat surface
    on one with a similar surface on the other to the interlocking of rather
    elaborate formations or both.  Infrequently, the engagement may be that of
    an axially directed extension on either the element or the member within an
    axially facing recess (e.g., an annular one) in the member or element,
    respectively.


CLS 411/205
TXT Member comprises key swingable (e.g., pivotal) into engagement with
    threaded elements:

    Device under subclass 204 wherein at least one of the distinct members
    ordinarily comprises a jointed pin, a hinged plate, a bendable rod, etc.,
    which is foldable or otherwise turnable into a position in which it usually
    is received in part in each of the threaded elements for locking one to the
    other.


CLS 411/206
TXT Utilizing a resilient characteristic of the key, or of a discrete element:

    Device under subclass 205 wherein either (a) an inherent property of
    resiliency on the part of the jointed pin, hinged plate, bendable rod,
    etc., or (b) the presence of a distinct element having such a capability,
    is relied upon for either (1) moving the jointed pin, etc., into or from
    its locking position or (2) keeping the jointed pin, etc., from becoming
    separated from its operative association with one or the other of the
    threaded elements.


CLS 411/207
TXT With a discrete, resilient element:

    Device under subclass 206 provided with a distinct element or device of a
    resilient nature for positioning or retaining the jointed pin, hinged
    plate, bendable rod, etc.


CLS 411/208
TXT And key engageable with aligned formations (e.g., grooves) in axially
    outwardly facing portion of each threaded element:

    Device under subclass 207 wherein the jointed pin, hinged plate, bendable
    rod, etc., when in its locking position, rests in a channel, recess, slot,
    etc., formed in the axially outwardly facing portion of the internally
    threaded element and also in a similar formation, representing a
    prolongation of the first formation, in the corresponding portion of the
    externally threaded element.


CLS 411/209
TXT Member comprises key movable laterally into engagement with threaded
    elements:

    Device under subclass 204 wherein at least one of the distinct members
    ordinarily comprises a pin, wedge, clip, dog, etc., which is inserted by
    movement from one side of the externally threaded and the internally
    threaded elements toward, and more or less normally to, their longitudinal
    axis, which pin, etc., usually is received in part in each of the threaded
    elements and thus forms a positive interlock therebetween.


CLS 411/210
TXT Utilizing a resilient characteristic of the key, or of a discrete element:

    Device under subclass 209 wherein either (a) an inherent property of
    resiliency on the part of the pin, wedge, clip, dog, etc., or (b) the
    presence of a distinct element having such a capability, is relied upon for
    either (1) moving the pin, etc., into or from its locking position or (2)
    keeping the pin, etc., from becoming separated from its operative
    association with one or the other of the threaded elements.


CLS 411/211
TXT With a discrete, resilient element:

    Device under subclass 210 provided with a distinct element or device of a
    resilient nature for positioning or retaining the pin, wedge, clip, dog,
    etc.

    (1)     Note.  Frequently, the distinct element is a coil spring.


CLS 411/212
TXT Including plastically deformable portion:
    Device under subclass 209 wherein the pin, wedge, clip, dog, etc., has at
    least one region which, when bent or otherwise reshaped, is adapted to
    remain in its changed configuration (i.e., the elastic limit of the
    material from which the pin, etc., is formed has been exceeded).

    (1)     Note.  The reshaping may relate to the retaining of the member in
    its operative position, rather than to the member's function of restricting
    rotation.


CLS 411/213
TXT Comprising an elongated element divided longitudinally (e.g., a cotter pin):

    Device under subclass 212 wherein the element is in the nature of a pin and
    is split along its longitudinal axis through a substantial portion of its
    length.


CLS 411/214
TXT Member comprises a screw, and bolt includes a generally axially extending,
    internally threaded bore for receiving the screw: Device under subclass 204
    wherein the member takes the form of a screw (e.g., a machine screw) and
    engages the axially outwardly facing portion of the internally threaded
    element either by way of a head formed on the screw or by way of an
    additional member located between, and cooperating with, the screw and the
    portion, and further wherein the externally threaded   element is provided
    with a bore which is internally threaded and extends more or less
    longitudinally of the element, which bore receives at least a portion of
    the shank of the screw.


CLS 411/215
TXT With an additional member between screw and axially outwardly facing
    portion:

    Device under subclass 214 provided with an additional member (e.g., an
    apertured plate, a washer, etc.) located in intervening relationship to the
    screw and the axially outwardly facing portion of the internally threaded
    element, thereby substituting for, or supplementing, the screw in engaging
    that portion.


CLS 411/216
TXT And the member including, as a substantial part thereof, an elongated,
    axially disposed key:

    Device under subclass 204 wherein at least one of the distinct members
    consists in large part of a portion resembling a dowel, pin, rod, etc.,
    which portion is positioned generally parallel to the longitudinal axis of
    the threaded elements and usually is received in part in each of them, thus
    tending to form a positive interlock therebetween.


CLS 411/217
TXT Key coacts with bolt by occupying an axially extending recess formed in the
    radially outward surface thereof:

    Device under subclass 216 wherein the externally threaded element receives
    the elongated portion of the member in a recess formed in its outer surface
    and extending longitudinally thereof.


CLS 411/218
TXT And includes a portion adapted to extend into a transverse opening provided
    in the bolt:

    Device under subclass 217 wherein the member includes a footlike portion
    extending at more or less a right angle to the remainder thereof for
    entering an opening formed into or through the

    externally threaded element at about 90_ to the longitudinal axis thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The footlike portion frequently performs a retaining
    function.


CLS 411/219
TXT And includes a portion adapted to engage a substantial part of the
    periphery of the bolt:

    Device under subclass 217 wherein the member includes a portion which is
    circular or partly circular in configuration, or can be shaped into such a
    configuration, for engaging the externally threaded element along a path
    representing the circumference, or a significant part of the circumference,
    thereof.


CLS 411/220
TXT And includes a region plastically deformable into engagement with the
    axially outwardly facing portion:

    Device under subclass 217 wherein at least that part of the member which is
    intended to engage the axially outwardly facing portion of the internally
    threaded element is bent or otherwise deformed beyond its elastic limit
    when moved into engagement with that portion.


CLS 411/221
TXT Member interlocks with an axially extending recess or slot in the bolt and
    a recess in the axially outwardly facing portion of the nut:

    Device under subclass 204 wherein the member includes a formation in the
    nature of a radially inwardly directed projection for entering a groove or
    related opening formed in the externally threaded element and extending
    parallel to the longitudinal axis thereof, and also includes another
    formation whereby it engages against rotation a depressed region in the
    axially outwardly facing portion of the internally threaded element.

    (1)     Note.  The first mentioned formation usually has only a minimal
    axial dimension.

    (2)     Note.  The second mentioned formation often comprises the
    configuration of the outer periphery of the member.


CLS 411/222
TXT Internally threaded locking member (e.g., jam nut):

    Device under subclass 204 wherein at least one of the distinct members
    comprises a second internally threaded element which is in threaded
    engagement with the externally threaded element and is located axially
    outwardly, at least in part, of the first (i.e., the primary) internally
    threaded element.

    (1)     Note.  While the thread gripping locking members of subclasses 246+
    below sometimes engage the thread of the externally threaded element in a
    manner similar to that of the member of this and the indented subclasses,
    the engagement there (246+) should be, at a maximum, somewhat less that
    360_.  If the threaded engagement of the member with the externally
    threaded element takes place through 360_ or more, classification in this
    subclass (222) and the indented subclasses is indicated.


CLS 411/223
TXT Including means associated with at least one of the nuts for restricting
    rotation therebetween:

    Device under subclass 222 which includes means (a) formed on or carried by
    one or both of the internally threaded elements, (b) consisting of another
    distinct member and located between the elements, or (c) otherwise
    associated with the elements, which means limits or prevents (*) the
    turning of one of the elements with respect to the other.

    (*) It should be observed that, in the jam nut art, the ceasing of further
    turning of the internally threaded elements relative to one another may
    mean that no greater degree of coupling can be attained than that which
    existed at the time that the two elements commenced to move as one.


CLS 411/224
TXT Key received in part in each of the nuts:
    Device under subclass 223 wherein the means comprises a distinct member,
    such as a pin, a portion of which resides in each of the internally
    threaded elements.


CLS 411/225
TXT Including a plastically deformable portion: Device under subclass 224
    wherein the member includes at least one region which, when bent or
    otherwise reshaped, is adapted to remain in its changed configuration
    (i.e., the elastic limit of the material from which the member is formed
    has been exceeded).

    (1)     Note.  The reshaping may relate to the retaining of the member in
    its operative position, rather than to the member's function of preventing
    relative rotation.


CLS 411/226
TXT Received in axially extending passages or recesses:

    Device under subclass 224 wherein one portion of the member occupies at
    least a portion of a groove, hole, slot, etc., which generally parallels
    the longitudinal axis of one of the internally threaded elements, and
    another portion of the member occupies a similar formation in the other
    element.


CLS 411/227
TXT Comprising one or more discrete members serving as a pawl and ratchet:

    Device under subclass 223 wherein the means comprises one or more distinct
    members of which (a) one is either a pawl (e.g., a biased arm, dog, finger,
    etc.) or a ratchet (e.g., a series of teeth of asymmetrical profile), in
    which event the counterpart ratchet or pawl, respectively, is an integral
    part of one of the internally threaded elements, or (b) one member is a
    pawl and another member is a ratchet and each is carried, at least in part,
    either by one of the elements or by yet another member cooperating with
    that element, and wherein, in either (a) or (b), the function of the pawl
    and ratchet is to restrict rotation to a greater degree in one direction
    than in the other.

    (1)     Note.  A pawl carried by, for example, a washer constitutes subject
    matter for this subclass.


CLS 411/228
TXT Inherently resilient pawl:

    Device under subclass 227 wherein the source of bias for the pawl is the
    use of material (e.g., sheet metal) having a significant degree of
    elasticity for fashioning the pawl.


CLS 411/229
TXT Axially directed, resiliently biased detent means:

    Device under subclass 223 wherein the internally threaded elements are
    secured against relative rotation by spring urged, depressible protuberance
    means which are carried by one of the internally threaded elements and
    which are adapted to be received in recess means in the other such elements.


CLS 411/230
TXT Canted element:

    Device under subclass 223 wherein either of the internally threaded
    elements or a washer in association therewith is wedge-shaped or has
    eccentrically arranged protuberance means thereon which causes the elements
    in the assembly to become tilted with respect to each other, thereby
    producing a binding of the mating threads.


CLS 411/231
TXT With means resiliently biasing the nuts apart:

    Device under subclass 223 wherein the internally threaded elements are
    urged in axially opposite directions by a springlike force to cause
    frictional binding with the threads of the externally threaded element.

    (1)     Note.  The resilient bias may be inherent in the material from
    which the elements are formed.


CLS 411/232
TXT Side lock:

    Device under subclass 223 wherein the internally threaded elements are
    secured against relative rotation by means cooperating with one or more
    sidewardly facing, substantially planar surfaces on at least one of the
    elements.


CLS 411/233
TXT Integral deformable means:

    Device under subclass 232 wherein the side lock comprises a portion of the
    unitary structures of one of the internally threaded elements, which
    portion is deformed beyond its elastic limit into engagement with a side
    surface of the other of the internally threaded elements.


CLS 411/234
TXT By a discrete element:

    Device under subclass 232 wherein the side lock comprises an element which
    is separate and distinct from the internally threaded elements.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a side lock which is spring biased into
    engagement with the elements.


CLS 411/235
TXT Periphery encompassing means (e.g., a sleeve):

    Device under subclass 234 wherein the side lock comprises an element which
    surrounds at least a part of each of the internally threaded elements.


CLS 411/236
TXT Including plastic deformation (e.g., bending) of the discrete element:

    Device under subclass 234 wherein the side lock element assumes its locking
    position by being deformed beyond its elastic limit.


CLS 411/237
TXT Having a part of one or the nuts extending into a circular, axially
    directed recess of the other, and further including, in the region of the
    recess, formations cooperating to restrict relative rotation: Device under
    subclass 223 wherein one of the internally threaded elements includes an
    axially directed portion which enters an axially directed enlargement of
    part of the axial dimension of the opening provided in the other internally
    threaded element for receiving the externally threaded element, and wherein
    the elements include, within the axial dimension common to both, structural
    features which coact to limit or prevent the turning, in at least one
    direction, of one of the elements with respect to the other.

    (1)     Note.  Infrequently, another distinct member (see subclass 223
    above) is located within the axial dimension common to both of the
    internally threaded elements and contributes to the limiting or preventing
    of turning.


CLS 411/238
TXT At least one of the formations comprises a surface eccentric to the
    longitudinal axis of the nuts:

    Device under subclass 237 wherein one of the structural features is a
    surface generated about an axis (or axes, if of varying curvature) which is
    offset from the longitudinal axis of the elements, and further wherein a
    slight rotation of one of the elements relative to the other brings that
    surface into binding engagement with a surface on the other element, which
    latter surface either is not eccentric or, if eccentric, is of a different
    eccentricity.

    (1)     Note.  The engagement of the member (here, the secondary internally
    threaded element) with the axially outwardly facing portion of the
    internally threaded element (here, the primary such element) required by
    subclass 204 may be somewhat remote in the art of this subclass (238);
    however, the eccentricity proposition involved appears sufficiently
    peculiar to the jam nut concept to warrant its inclusion with that art.


CLS 411/239
TXT Including cooperating formations on the axially opposing portions of the
    nuts: Device under subclass 223 wherein both of the internally threaded
    elements are formed with, on the portions thereof which occupy an axially
    confronting relationship, surface configurations which interact with each
    other to limit or prevent the turning, in at least one direction, of one of
    the elements with respect to the other.

    (1)     Note.  Infrequently, another distinct member (see subclass 223
    above) is located between the internally threaded elements and contributes
    to the limiting or preventing of turning (e.g., by providing one of the
    confronting sets of surface configurations).


CLS 411/240
TXT Comprising teeth of the ramp and buttress type:

    Device under subclass 239 wherein the surface configurations formed on each
    internally threaded element comprise a plurality of projections of the kind
    which, in profile, display a gradual slope leading to the outermost region
    of the projection followed by a sharp (e.g., a perpendicular) drop to a
    base line.


CLS 411/241
TXT Comprising surfaces of a curvilinear nature:

    Device under subclass 239 wherein the surface configurations formed on each
    internally threaded element are rounded or undulating in character.

    (1)     Note.  The interaction of the surface configurations may involve
    only certain portions thereof at any one rotational position of the
    elements relative to one another.


CLS 411/242
TXT Plastic deformation of at least one of the nuts:

    Device under subclass 223 wherein the means preventing rotation between the
    internally threaded elements comprises a portion of one of the elements
    being deformed beyond its elastic limit.


CLS 411/243
TXT Reversed internal and external threads on one of the nuts:

    Device under subclass 223 wherein one of the internally threaded elements
    is formed with external threads of a hand opposite to its internal thread
    which are adapted to be engaged by either the other of the internally
    threaded elements or by an extraneous locking means.


CLS 411/244
TXT Oppositely threaded:

    Device under subclass 223 wherein one of the internally threaded elements
    has a right-hand thread while the other has a left-hand thread, and the
    externally threaded element includes threaded portions mating with each of
    them.


CLS 411/245
TXT Intersecting threads on the bolt:

    Device under subclass 244 wherein the right-hand and left-hand threads on
    the externally threaded element are formed in overlapping relationship so
    as to define a crossed-threaded arrangement.


CLS 411/246
TXT By thread-gripping locking element:

    Device under subclass 204 wherein at least one of the distinct members
    comprises an element which exerts a tight holding action, usually at
    circumferentially spaced locations, upon the thread of at least one of the
    threaded elements.

    (1)     Note.  The thread which is gripped by the member ordinarily is that
    of the externally threaded element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222,    and see (1) Note thereof for the line between the member of that
    subclass (222) and the member of this subclass (246).


CLS 411/247
TXT Resilient grip:

    Device under subclass 246 wherein the locking member is urged into
    engagement with the threads by spring biasing means.

    (1)     Note.  The spring biasing means may comprise the inherent
    resiliency of the material from which the locking member is formed.


CLS 411/248
TXT Split ring:

    Device under subclass 247 wherein the locking member comprises a resilient
    element which defines the major portion, but less than all, of a normally
    closed figure such as an annulus or a polygon.

    (1)     Note.  The break in the figure sometimes serves to facilitate
    assembly of the element with the threaded elements.


CLS 411/249
TXT Including structure interfitting within a thread for less than a full turn
    thereof: Device under subclass 248 wherein the split ring includes a thin,
    radially inwardly facing projection which enters into a turn of the thread
    of the threaded element and follows that thread through something less than
    360_.

    (1)     Note.  The projection may be discontinuous (e.g., a series of
    inwardly directed prongs or tongues).


CLS 411/250
TXT Wire structure:

    Device under subclass 246 wherein the locking member is formed from a stock
    material in the nature of a thin, metal rod which is resiliently flexible.


CLS 411/251
TXT Helically coiled wire:

    Device under subclass 250 wherein the wire locking member is wound into a
    spiral element.


CLS 411/252
TXT Including a fee end in nonrotational engagement with the threaded element:
    Device under subclass 251 wherein the coiled wire locking member includes
    an end portion cooperating with means on the internally threaded element to
    prevent relative rotation between the locking member and said element.


CLS 411/253
TXT Gripping member includes a tapered section adapted to be axially depressed
    to cause radial movement of a portion thereof: Device under subclass 246
    wherein the locking member is formed with an axially extending portion
    which is inclined with respect to the axis of the threaded elements and
    wherein a free end of said portion is caused to be moved into engagement
    with the thread on one of the threaded elements upon the application of an
    axially directed force to said portion.

    (1)     Note.  The tapered section may include inwardly directed tang means.


CLS 411/254
TXT Gripping member is moved radially into engagement with the threads:

    Device under subclass 246 wherein the locking member assumes the thread
    gripping position upon being moved toward or from, and generally
    perpendicular to, the axis of the threaded elements.

    (1)     Note.  The member is sometimes moved into its gripping position by
    applying a radially inwardly directed force for constricting its periphery.


CLS 411/255
TXT Including discrete means to move or to lock the gripping member relative to
    the externally threaded element:

    Device under subclass 254 wherein an additional element is provided which
    either moves the locking member to cause it to grip the externally threaded
    element, or secures it in that position, or both.

    (1)     Note.  The means is sometimes applied by moving it in an axial
    direction.


CLS 411/256
TXT Gripping member is moved tangentially into engagement with the threads:

    Device under subclass 246 wherein the locking member assumes a holding
    position by being moved into engagement with the threaded element along a
    path which lies in planes both perpendicular and parallel to the axis of
    said element.


CLS 411/257
TXT Including material in the nature of (1) a metallic coating, (2) a quantity
    of fusible metal or (3) a discrete member formed of ductile material:

    Device under subclass 190 wherein the means comprises or includes either
    (a) a metallic composition which has been applied as a layer on the surface
    of at least a part of the interengaging portions of the threaded elements,
    (b) a supply, or a member, of a metal which is subjected to melting and
    rehardening or (c) a distinct member of a metal which is sufficiently soft
    (e.g., malleable) as to yield upon the application of a relatively small
    amount of force.


CLS 411/258
TXT Including settable material:

    Device under subclass 190 wherein the means comprises or includes a
    quantity of a substance which is hardenable from the relatively soft or
    flowable state in which it is applied to at least one of the threaded
    elements into a firm or rigid state in which it holds, or assists in
    holding, the threaded elements against rotation relative to one another.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein, for example, is the use of an adhesive to
    create a force tending to hold two parts together, or the use of a chemical
    solvent which, with or without the assistance of a physical treatment
    (e.g., heat) molecularly intermingles with and unites two parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257,    for a threaded bolt and nut coupled against rotation by means which
    may include metallic material of a fusible nature.


CLS 411/259
TXT Comprising a thread lock:

    Device under subclass 190 wherein the rotation restricting means comprises
    either the thread structure of one of the other of the threaded elements,
    or the interaction of the threads of one element upon the threads of the
    other element, or the action of an additional element upon the threads of
    one or the other or both of the threaded elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    for a threaded fastener (i.e., a bolt or nut) and means for
    restricting the rotation thereof relative to a coacting substructure and
    wherein the means comprises the structure of the bolt, nut or substructure
    and further wherein a bolt-to-nut thread lock is also provided; see also
    the search notes of that subclass for other subclasses of this class which
    include a thread lock.

    222+,   for a coupled bolt and nut which includes a rotation restricting
    member which coacts with the axially outwardly facing portion of the
    internally threaded element and wherein that member is an additional
    internally threaded element, in which art, it may be observed, the action
    of one internally threaded element upon the other, and the resultant
    reaction of each upon the thread of the externally threaded element, often
    is the basis for the coupling achieved.


CLS 411/260
TXT Including a distortable metallic washer or sleeve:

    Device under subclass 259 wherein the rotation restricting means includes a
    substantially annular member of more or less readily deformable metal which
    is disposed in concentric relationship with the threaded elements and
    moves, upon deformation, into tight engagement with the threads of at least
    one of the elements.


CLS 411/261
TXT In the nature of a dished washer:

    Device under subclass 260 wherein the member is a washer which is concave
    on one of its axially directed faces and is adapted (e.g., by having a
    convex, opposite face) to be axially collapsed by the application of a
    compressive force, thus causing its inner and outer peripheries to shift
    radially, at least one of them moving into engagement with the threads on
    one of the threaded elements.


CLS 411/262
TXT Including a coil spring:

    Device under subclass 259 wherein the rotation restricting means includes a
    helically wound resilient wire which grips the threads on one or both of
    the threaded elements.


CLS 411/263
TXT Differential thread means:

    Device under subclass 259 wherein a discrete locking member is provided
    with threads which engage complementary threads on either of the threaded
    elements causing the mating threads on said elements to be biased axially
    into tight, frictional engagement.

    (1)     Note.  The threads on the locking member may be of a different
    pitch and/or hand from those on the mating threaded elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312,    in regard to the reference to this subclass (263) appearing in (1)
    Note thereof.


CLS 411/264
TXT Rocking thread section on the externally threaded element:

    Device under subclass 259 wherein the externally threaded element includes
    a section of the threads which comprises a separate element, pivotal
    between a position wherein the leading threads thereon are within the
    confines of the adjacent threads on the element and a second position,
    initiated by engagement with the internally threaded element, wherein at
    least said leading threads extend radially beyond said adjacent threads.


CLS 411/265
TXT Including a tapered (e.g., conical) surface for wedging the internally
    threaded element against the externally threaded one:

    Device under subclass 259 wherein the rotation restricting means includes a
    surface which extends at an acute angle to the longitudinal axis of the
    threaded elements, which surface is engaged by the internally threaded
    element in such a manner that movement on the part of that element causes
    it to be forced into ever-tighter engagement with the externally threaded
    element.

    (1)     Note.  The surface is usually one of revolution, such as a cone,
    and may be either interrupted (i.e., a segmented cone) or continuous.

    (2)     Note.  The surface most often is smooth, but is, in some instances,
    threaded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237,    for a coupled bolt and nut which includes a rotation restricting
    member which coacts with the axially outwardly facing portion of the
    internally threaded element, and wherein that member is an additional
    internally threaded element, and further wherein there is included a means
    to restrict the rotation of one internally threaded element relative to the
    other one, and additionally wherein the latter means comprises the
    extending of a portion of one of the elements into a recess of the other
    element, which portion and recess, it may be observed, sometimes involve a
    conical interface.


CLS 411/266
TXT Segmented internally threaded element:
    Device under subclass 265 wherein wedging of the threads is facilitated by
    the internally threaded element being longitudinally split.

    (1)     Note.  The splitting may divide the element into segments which are
    separate and distinct.


CLS 411/267
TXT Discrete segments carried within a housing: Device under subclass 266
    wherein the internally threaded element is split into segments which are
    separate and distinct and are disposed within a hollow body member.


CLS 411/268
TXT Including a discrete, threaded member carrying the tapered surface and
    threadedly engaging one of the threaded elements: Device under subclass 266
    wherein the tapered surface is a portion of a distinct member, which member
    is threaded and is in threaded engagement with either the externally
    threaded element or the internally threaded element.


CLS 411/269
TXT Engaging a threaded exterior provided on the segmented element:

    Device under subclass 268 wherein the distinct member is in threaded
    engagement with a thread formed on the outer surface of the internally
    threaded element.


CLS 411/270
TXT Including a sleeve or washer type member for carrying the tapered surface
    and surrounding the segmented element:

    Device under subclass 266 wherein the tapered surface is a portion of a
    distinct member which is annular, is of a greater or a lesser axial
    dimension than the internally threaded element, and has an open, axially
    outwardly facing end to enable insertion and removal of that element.

    (1)     Note.  The tapered surface may be provided with means for engaging,
    against rotation, the openings which resulted from splitting the internally
    threaded element.


CLS 411/271
TXT Externally threaded element includes an axially extending opening in its
    free end for receiving an expander member:

    Device under subclass 259 wherein the externally threaded element includes,
    in that end which is opposite its headed end, a longitudinal bore, cavity,
    slot, etc., into which a distinct member of nonuniform thickness (e.g., a
    cone, a wedge, etc.) is moved for forcing a portion of the thread of that
    element generally radially outwardly against a corresponding portion of the
    thread of the internally threaded element.

    (1)     Note.  While the distinct member ordinarily is a component of the
    bolt and nut assembly, in rare cases it is a spreader tool (e.g., a chisel)
    which is associated with the assembly only momentarily.

    (2)     Note.  While the distinct member frequently is driven into the
    externally threaded element by axially directed blows, it is sometimes
    pulled or pushed thereinto by the turning of the elements into threaded
    interengagement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    325,    for a structurally similar opening and member, but wherein the
    expansion of the externally threaded element does not take place in the
    region of its threaded interengagement with the other element.


CLS 411/272
TXT Including camming surfaces on the threaded elements or on an additional
    member:

    Device under subclass 259 wherein eccentrically arranged surfaces on either
    the internally or externally threaded elements or on a washer element cause
    the mating threads to bind upon relative rotation between the elements.


CLS 411/273
TXT With a camming member having an eccentrically arranged recess for receiving
    the internally threaded element:

    Device under subclass 272 wherein a discrete camming member is provided
    having at least one end of the internally threaded element disposed therein
    and wherein the camming member and the threaded elements are provided with
    cooperating camming surfaces.


CLS 411/274
TXT Having an element, or with a discrete member, adapted to cant the assembly:
    Device under subclass 259 wherein either the internally threaded element,
    the externally threaded element, or an additional member in association
    therewith, is wedge-shaped, has eccentrically arranged protuberance means
    thereon, or is otherwise adapted to cause the elements in the assembly to
    become tilted with respect to each other, thereby producing a binding of
    the mating threads.


CLS 411/275
TXT With a discrete, canting member (e.g., a washer):

    Device under subclass 274 wherein an additional member is provided for
    effecting the canting of the assembly, which member may be in the nature of
    a washer.


CLS 411/276
TXT Having the internally threaded element distorted:

    Device under subclass 259 wherein the internally threaded element is
    physically deformed either before, during, or after its application to the
    externally threaded element to cause the mating threads to become lockingly
    engaged.


CLS 411/277
TXT Radially inward distortion:

    Device under subclass 276 wherein the internally threaded element is
    deformed in a direction toward, and generally perpendicular to, the
    longitudinal axis of the element.


CLS 411/278
TXT With discrete means carried by the element for producing the distortion:

    Device under subclass 277 wherein the internally threaded element carries a
    separate means by which the element is deformed.

    (1)     Note.  In the event the discrete means comprises an "additional
    internally threaded element" within the meaning of subclasses 222+ above,
    classification there is proper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222+,   as explained in the reference thereto appearing in (1) Note above.


CLS 411/279
TXT Threaded means:

    Device under subclass 278 wherein the distortion producing means comprises
    a threaded member which is received in a substantially radially extending,
    threaded aperture in the internally threaded element.


CLS 411/280
TXT Of cantilevered segments (e.g., castlelated end):

    Device under subclass 277 wherein the distroted portion of the internally
    threaded element comprises sections at one end thereof defined by
    circumferentially spaced, axially outwardly facing slots.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266+,   for an internally threaded element of this area (259+) which is of
    the segmented type and wherein a conical surface is provided for wedging
    the segments toward an externally threaded element.


CLS 411/281
TXT Of circumferentially spaced areas of continuous periphery:

    Device under subclass 277 wherein the internally threaded element is
    deformed inwardly at locations spaced about an uninterrupted periphery
    thereof.


CLS 411/282
TXT Defining a smooth curving, noncircular thread section (e.g., elliptically
    shaped): Device under subclass 281 wherein the spaced, deformed portions
    blend smoothly into the adjacent areas of the element to define the
    peripheral extent of the threads as a noncircular, curvilinear
    configuration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291,    and see the reference in (1) Note thereof to a noncircular,
    threaded opening.


CLS 411/283
TXT Impacted areas:

    Device under subclass 281 wherein the spaced, deformed portions are the
    result of impacts applied in the vicinity of each portion, thus causing the
    threads there to be forced inwardly.


CLS 411/284
TXT Located on the flats of a polygonally shaped element:

    Device under subclass 283 wherein the outer periphery of the internally
    threaded element is defined in cross section by a geometric figure
    comprising a plurality of angularly related flat sides and wherein the
    impacted areas are located on respective ones of those sides.


CLS 411/285
TXT Axial distortion:

    Device under subclass 276 wherein the internally threaded element is
    deformed in a direction generally parallel to its longitudinal axis.


CLS 411/286
TXT With discrete means carried by the element for producing the distortion:

    Device under subclass 285 wherein the internally threaded element carries a
    separate means by which it is deformed.

    (1)     Note.  In the event the discrete means comprises an "additional
    internally threaded element" within the meaning of subclasses 222+ above,
    classification there is proper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222+,   as explained in the reference thereto appearing in (1) Note above.


CLS 411/287
TXT By axially directed impacted areas:

    Device under subclass 285 wherein the distortion comprises areas of the
    endwalls of the element having the material thereof compressed in a
    direction substantially parallel to the longitudinal axis of said element,
    resulting in the convolutions of corresponding thread portions being moved
    closer together to define a reduced pitch in said portions.


CLS 411/288
TXT Of axially spaced threaded sections:

    Device under subclass 285 wherein the distortion is applied to portions of
    the thread which are spaced apart in a longitudinal direction by undeformed
    thread portions.


CLS 411/289
TXT Coiled spring:

    Device under subclass 288 wherein the distorted internally threaded element
    is in the form of a helically wound wire.


CLS 411/290
TXT Including a region displaceable generally axially relative to another part
    of the element:

    Device under subclass 285 wherein the internally threaded element includes
    at least one region which is shiftable (e.g., by bending into a void) in a
    direction more or less parallel to the longitudinal axis of the element
    with respect to another part (e.g., remainder) of the element for setting
    up a binding action between at least some of the threads of that element
    and the threads of the externally threaded element.

    (1)     Note.  In most instances, the region includes at least one thread
    for engaging the externally threaded element.

    (2)     Note.  The shifting sometimes results from the advancing movement
    of the externally threaded element through the internally threaded element,
    but may result, instead, from the region being collapsed as it is forced
    against a substructure.


CLS 411/291
TXT Having at least one region formed by a cut, slot, etc., across at least one
    sidewall of the element and extending generally radially into the element:

    Device under subclass 290 wherein at least one shiftable region is created
    by forming a generally planar void (e.g., by a saw cut, by a preformed lip,
    etc.) which starts in one or more of the sidewalls and extends into and
    part way through the element in a direction more or less normally to the
    longitudinal axis of the element.

    (1)     Note. While the art of this subclass emphasizes the binding action
    which results from the threads of the region being moved axially relative
    to the threads of another part of the element, it is occasionally disclosed
    that this movement (ordinarily by bending) results in the threads of the
    region presenting an other-than-exactly-circular opening for receiving the
    threads of the bolt.


CLS 411/292
TXT Including a longitudinal locking member:
    Device under subclass 259 which includes a member in the nature of a key
    which extends substantially parallel to the axis of the threaded elements
    and bites into or binds against the threads of one or the other of the
    elements.


CLS 411/293
TXT Having a toothed surface:

    Device under subclass 292 wherein that portion of the key which engages the
    threads is formed with protuberance means.

    (1)     Note.  The protuberance means may either mate with or bite into the
    threads.


CLS 411/294
TXT Including a radial locking member:

    Device under subclass 259 which includes a member in the nature of a key
    which is moved radially into engagement with the threads of the externally
    threaded element.


CLS 411/295
TXT Threadedly received in the internally threaded element:

    Device under subclass 294 wherein the key is threadedly carried in a
    radially disposed bore in the internally threaded element.


CLS 411/296
TXT Side clutch:

    Device under subclass 259 wherein a discrete locking member bites into the
    threads on either of the threaded elements with the locking action
    resembling that of a pawl and ratchet except that said threads have no
    cooperating notches.

    (1)     Note.  The engagement of the member of this subclass (296) with the
    threaded element hereof is somewhat similar to that of the member and
    element of subclass 300 below, except that here there is toothed contact
    while in subclass 300 there is only line contact.


CLS 411/297
TXT Roller:

    Device under subclass 296 wherein the locking member is substantially
    cylindrical or conical and is disposed in rolling engagement with a cam
    surface for moving the member into binding engagement with the threads.


CLS 411/298
TXT Ball:

    Device under subclass 296 wherein the locking member is spherical and
    cooperates with a cam surface for moving the member into binding engagement
    with the threads.


CLS 411/299
TXT Spring:

    Device under subclass 296 wherein the locking member is resilient in nature.


CLS 411/300
TXT Tangential locking member:

    Device under subclass 259 which includes a member in the nature of a key
    which is carried by the internally threaded element and engages the thread
    on the externally threaded element along a straight line disposed
    substantially parallel to the pitch of the thread.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    296,    in regard to the comparison in (1) Note thereof of the
    member-to-element contact in the respective subclasses.


CLS 411/301
TXT Elastic gripping action:

    Device under subclass 259 wherein at least one of the threaded elements or
    a member (e.g., a washer, sleeve, etc.) in combination therewith is
    composed wholly or partly of an elastomeric material which frictionally
    grips one of the threads.

    (1)     Note.  The elastomeric material may comprise a coating of such
    material on one or more of the threaded surfaces.


CLS 411/302
TXT Elastic insert:

    Device under subclass 301 wherein the elastomeric material comprises an
    element of that material carried by one of the threaded elements.


CLS 411/303
TXT Disposed in a counterbore in the internally threaded element:

    Device under subclass 302 wherein the elastomeric material is carried in a
    circumferentially extending counterbore which is concentric with the
    threaded bore of the internally threaded element.


CLS 411/304
TXT Disposed within an interruption of a threaded surface:

    Device under subclass 302 wherein the elastomeric material is carried
    within a recess or aperture which is within the threaded area thereby
    rendering the threads discontinuous.


CLS 411/305
TXT Externally threaded element adapted to be compressed radially inwardly:

    Device under subclass 259 wherein the externally threaded element is so
    formed (e.g., with a threaded portion which has a hollow core, with a
    threaded portion which is slotted longitudinally, etc.) that its engagement
    with a mating internally threaded element results in at least some
    displacement of its threaded surface in a direction toward its longitudinal
    axis.


CLS 411/306
TXT Resilient element:

    Device under subclass 305 wherein the externally threaded element, or at
    least the threaded portion thereof, is sufficiently resilient in nature
    (i.e., has a sufficiently high limit of elasticity) that, upon removal of
    the internally threaded element, it expands outwardly to its previous
    dimension.


CLS 411/307
TXT Having threads of different pitch, or a thread of varying pitch:

    Device under subclass 259 wherein the locking is occasioned by either (a)
    the use of a thread frequency on one of the threaded elements which is
    greater or less than the thread frequency of the other threaded element or
    (b) the use, on one of the threaded elements, of a thread frequency which
    is different in one longitudinal region of the element than in another
    longitudinal region thereof.


CLS 411/308
TXT Involving dissimilarities in the sectional configuration of the threads:

    Device under subclass 259 wherein the locking is occasioned by a sufficient
    departure, on the part of the thread of one of the threaded elements, from
    the shape, in cross section, of the thread of the other threaded element,
    that the two threads will no longer operatively engage with one another
    without binding to one degree or another.

    (1)     Note.  The cross-sectional shape is that displayed by a section
    containing the longitudinal axis of the elements.


CLS 411/309
TXT Resulting in the deformation of one thread by the other:

    Device under subclass 308 wherein one of the threads distorts the other
    thread to an extent which exceeds its elastic limit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277+,   for deformation of the thread of an internally threaded element
    (i.e., a nut) resulting from radially inwardly distortion of the element.

    285+,   for deformation of the thread of an internally threaded element
    (i.e., a nut) resulting from axial distortion of the element.


CLS 411/310
TXT By integral, interference-producing deviations from a standard thread
    shape: Device under subclass 309 wherein the distortion is produced by the
    presence, on at least one of the threads, of regions, integral with the
    material of the thread, which extend beyond, at one or more locations, the
    cross-sectional shape of a standard (e.g., a 60_) thread.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is art wherein the deviation comprises the
    use of different flank angles on the threads (i.e., the included angle of
    one of the threads is not the same as the included angle of the other
    thread).


CLS 411/311
TXT Located in the vicinity of the crest or the root of the thread:

    Device under subclass 310 wherein the regions occur either at the major, or
    the minor, diameter of the thread.


CLS 411/312
TXT Including means biasing the threads in axially opposed directions:

    Device under subclass 259 wherein the mating threads are forced into
    frictional engagement by means urging the respective threads in opposed
    longitudinal directions.

    (1)     Note.  The means is sometimes a discrete locking member as in
    subclass 263 above; if it is, however, it is not a threaded member, as is
    the case there (263).


CLS 411/313
TXT Washer having a deformable portion engageable with a threaded element:

    Device under subclass 190 wherein a washer element is provided having a
    portion which is bent or otherwise deformed into locking engagement with
    one of the threaded elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201,    for a coupled bolt and nut provided with one or more distinct
    member which restrict rotation by engaging at least one, more or less flat,
    radially outwardly facing surface of the internally threaded element, and
    wherein the member, or one of them, includes a region which is bent or
    otherwise reshaped, plastically, into engagement with such a surface, which
    member frequently is in the nature of a washer.


CLS 411/314
TXT Resiliently deformable portion:

    Device under subclass 313 wherein deformation of the washer is within the
    elastic limit of the material of said washer.


CLS 411/315
TXT With a member in the nature of a rotation preventing key movable laterally
    into engagement with the threaded elements: Device under subclass 190
    provided with one or more distinct members having a rotation restricting
    capability and ordinarily comprising a pin, wedge, clip, dog, etc., which
    pin, etc., is inserted by movement from one side of the threaded elements
    toward, and more or less normally to, their longitudinally axis and usually
    is received in part in each of the threaded elements, thus tending to form
    a positive interlock therebetween.


CLS 411/316
TXT And utilizing a resilient characteristic of the key, or of a discrete
    element:

    Device under subclass 315 wherein either (a) an inherent property of
    resiliency on the part of the pin, wedge, clip, dog, etc., or (b) the
    presence of a distinct element having such a capability, is relied upon for
    either (1) moving the pin, etc., into or from its locking position or (2)
    keeping the pin, etc., from becoming separated from its operative
    association with one or the other of the threaded elements.


CLS 411/317
TXT With a discrete, resilient element:

    Device under subclass 316 provided with a distinct element or device of a
    resilient nature for positioning or retaining the pin, wedge, clip, dog,
    etc.


CLS 411/318
TXT Comprising a spring of the coiled type:
    Device under subclass 317 wherein the distinct element comprises a length
    of resilient wire wound in the path of a helix or spiral.


CLS 411/319
TXT And including a plastically deformable portion:

    Device under subclass 315 wherein the pin, wedge, clip, dog, etc., has at
    least one region which, when bent or otherwise reshaped, is adapted to
    remain in its changed configuration (i.e., the elastic limit of the
    material from which the pin, etc., is formed has been exceeded).

    (1)     Note.  The reshaping may relate to the retaining of the member in
    its operative position, rather than to the member's function of restricting
    rotation.


CLS 411/320
TXT Comprising an elongated element divided longitudinally (e.g., a cotter pin):

    Device under subclass 319 wherein the element is in the nature of a pin and
    is split along its longitudinal axis through a substantial portion of its
    length.


CLS 411/321
TXT With an elongated member in the nature of a rotation preventing key
    disposed axially of the threaded elements:

    Device under subclass 190 provided with one or more distinct members having
    a rotation restricting capability and at least one of them ordinarily
    comprising a dowel, pin, rod, etc., which dowel, etc., is positioned
    generally  parallel to the longitudinal axis of the threaded elements and
    is usually received in part in each of them, thus tending to form a
    positive interlock therebetween.

    (1)     Note.  In a few instances, the member includes a portion which is
    adapted to extend into a transverse opening provided in the externally
    threaded element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216+,   for a threaded bolt and nut and means for coupling them against
    rotation relative to one another and wherein the means includes a discrete,
    rotation restricting member which confronts an axially outwardly facing
    portion of the nut and further wherein the member includes, as a
    substantial part thereof, an elongated, axially disposed portion in the
    nature of a key.

    292+,   for a member which may closely resemble the member of this subclass
    (321) as to appearance or orientation, but which member is an element of a
    thread lock.


CLS 411/322
TXT And utilizing a resilient characteristic of the key, or of a discrete
    element:

    Device under subclass 321 wherein either (a) an inherent property of
    resiliency on the part of the dowel, pin, rod, etc., or (b) the presence of
    a distinct element having such a capability, is relied upon for either (1)
    moving the dowel, etc., into or from its locking position or (2) keeping
    the dowel, etc., from becoming separated from its operative association
    with one or the other of the threaded elements.


CLS 411/323
TXT And including a plastically deformable portion:

    Device under subclass 321 wherein the dowel, pin, rod, etc., has at least
    one region which, when bent or otherwise reshaped, is adapted to remain in
    its changed configuration (i.e., the elastic limit of the material from
    which the dowel, etc., is formed has been exceeded).

    (1)     Note.  The reshaping may relate to the retaining of the member in
    its operative position, rather than to the member's function of restricting
    rotation.


CLS 411/324
TXT Elastic gripping action:

    Device under subclass 190 wherein at least one of the threaded elements, in
    a region apart from its threads, is composed of or otherwise includes
    elastomeric material or other resilient means for frictionally holding onto
    a region other than the threads of the other threaded element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301+,   for a threaded bolt and nut and means for coupling them against
    rotation relative to one another and wherein the means comprises a thread
    lock and further wherein one of the threaded elements, or a member in
    combination therewith, includes elastomeric material for frictionally
    gripping a threaded region.


CLS 411/325
TXT Externally threaded element includes an axially extending opening in its
    free end for receiving an expander member:

    Device under subclass 190 wherein the externally threaded element includes,
    in that end which is opposite its headed end, a longitudinal bore, cavity,
    slot, etc., into which a distinct member of nonuniform thickness (e.g., a
    cone, wedge, etc.) is moved for forcing a portion of that element generally
    radially outwardly, the internally threaded element being so located on the
    externally threaded element that the radial movement does not take place in
    the region of their threaded interengagement.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note of subclass 271 above.

    (2)     Note.  See (2) Note of subclass 271 above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    271,    for a structurally similar opening and member, but wherein the
    expansion of the externally threaded element takes place in the region of
    its threaded interengagement with the other element.


CLS 411/326
TXT Pawl and ratchet:

    Device under subclass 190 wherein the threaded elements are locked together
    by structure comprising a protuberance on one of the elements, or on an
    additional member, cooperating with a series of cam surfaces and stop
    shoulders on the other element, or on the member, whereby relative rotation
    of the elements is permitted in the tightening direction but prevented or
    restricted in the loosening direction.


CLS 411/327
TXT Pawl carried by the internally threaded element:

    Device under subclass 326 wherein the pawl is positioned on the internally
    threaded element and rotates therewith to interlock with ratchet teeth on
    the externally threaded element.


CLS 411/328
TXT Pivoted pawl:

    Device under subclass 327 wherein the pawl is mounted on the internally
    threaded element for rotation about a defined axis.


CLS 411/329
TXT Resilient pawl:

    Device under subclass 327 wherein the pawl is either inherently springlike
    or is under the influence of an additional member in the nature of a spring.


CLS 411/330
TXT Washer carried pawl:

    Device under subclass 326 wherein a substantially annular disc is provided
    having a central opening for receiving the externally threaded element and
    wherein the pawl is carried by the disc.


CLS 411/331
TXT Resilient:

    Device under subclass 330 wherein the pawl is either inherently springlike
    or is under the influence of an additional member in the nature of a spring.


CLS 411/332
TXT Including teeth of the ramp and buttress type on the axially inwardly
    facing portion of the internally threaded element:

    Device under subclass 190 wherein the means for limiting or preventing the
    turning of one threaded element with respect to the other threaded element
    includes, on the axially inwardly facing portion (e.g., surface) of the
    internally threaded element, a plurality of projections of the kind which,
    in profile, display a gradual slope leading to the outermost region of the
    projection followed by a sharp (e.g., a perpendicular) drop to a base line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227+,   240, and 326+, for rotation restricting means which include a
    ratchet, and with the further observation that a ratchet frequently has
    teeth which are of the ramp and buttress type.


CLS 411/333
TXT By deformation of a threaded element:
    Device under subclass 190 wherein the means comprises the altering of the
    initial condition of one of the elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242,    271, 276+, 305+, 309+, and 325, for other instances of deformation
    or distortion of a threaded element or the thread thereon.


CLS 411/334
TXT Plastic deformation:

    Device under subclass 333 wherein the threaded element is deformed beyond
    its elastic limit.


CLS 411/335
TXT Of an internally threaded element:

    Device under subclass 334 wherein the threaded element is one which is
    threaded internally.


CLS 411/336
TXT Into an interruption in the thread of the externally threaded element
    associated therewith:

    Device under subclass 335 wherein the deformation of the internally
    threaded element causes at least one portion of it to move into at least
    one recess within the threaded length of its complementary externally
    threaded element, which recess is the product of a discontinuance of the
    thread of that element.


CLS 411/337
TXT HEADED FASTENER ELEMENT WITH NUT, WASHER, SECURING MEANS OR CAP:

    Subject matter under the class definition drawn to an elongated fastening
    means provided at one end with an enlargement or related structure in the
    nature of a head defining a head and further provided with either a
    cooperating internally threaded means, a perforated disk or annular means,
    a securing means in the form of an unthreaded means designed to cooperate
    with and restrain the fastening means, or means for covering an end of the
    fastening means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81+,    for a threaded fastener (i.e., a bolt or nut) and means for
    restricting the rotation thereof relative to a coacting substructure.

    190+,   for a threaded bolt and nut and means for coupling them against
    rotation relative to one another.

    531,    for the search notes therein pertaining to other loci for washers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 305+ for combined
    fasteners all of which are of the Class 24 type.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 698+ for headed
    fasteners with in situ static structure assemblies.  See the Search Class
    reference to Class 411 of Class 52 for the line between Class 411 and that
    Class 52 subclasses.

    238,    Railways:  Surface Track, subclasses 251+ and 310+ for various
    types of headed fasteners specially adapted with or for joining railway
    elements.

    248,    Supports, subclass 239 for projecting pin shelf or scaffold bracket.

    278,    Land Vehicles:  Animal Draft Appliances, subclasses 60+ for headed
    fasteners specially adapted for use with animal draft land vehicles; and
    subclasses 96+ for whiffletree link or clevis connectors.

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclasses 9.1+ for detachable
    wheel connections.


CLS 411/338
TXT Lap bolt or fastener:

    Subject matter under subclass 337 wherein the fastening means contains a
    longitudinal cavity adapted to cooperate with and telescopingly receive a
    securing means.


CLS 411/339
TXT Interference fit type:

    Subject matter under subclass 338 where the fastening means and securing
    means are secured by the close tolerance fit between their mating surfaces.


CLS 411/340
TXT Securing means pivotable about axis transverse to fastener axis, e.g.,
    toggle bolt, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 337 wherein the headed fastening means is
    provided with an unthreaded cooperating restraining means capable of
    rotating about an axis which is at a right angle to the longitudinal axis
    of the fastener.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    402,    Binder Device Releasably Engaging Aperture or Notch of Sheet,
    subclasses 60+ for a device of that class which may include an elongated
    fastener with a pivoted end lock.


CLS 411/341
TXT And biasing spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 340 further provided with an elastic
    structure tending to return to its normal shape after being distorted.


CLS 411/342
TXT Spring engaging securing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 341 wherein the elastic structure physically
    contacts the unthreaded means.


CLS 411/343
TXT Spring at opposite end from securing means: Subject matter under subclass
    341 wherein the securing means is generally located on one end of the
    elongated fastening means and the elastic means is located on the opposite
    end of the fastening means.


CLS 411/344
TXT And discrete manual actuating means:
    Subject matter under subclass 340 further provided with means requiring
    manual intervention and causing the securing means to move from one
    position to another.


CLS 411/345
TXT And pivoted retention means:

    Subject matter under subclass 340 further provided with means for holding
    the securing means in its pivoted position.


CLS 411/346
TXT Channel shaped securing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 340 wherein the securing means comprises an
    elongated element of substantially U-shaped transverse cross section.


CLS 411/347
TXT Securing means having biasing spring:
    Subject matter under subclass 337 further provided with an elastic
    structure tending to return to its normal shape after being distorted.


CLS 411/348
TXT Ball detent securing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 347 wherein the securing means is in the form
    of a metallic sphere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 211+ for a ball-detent
    type fastener combined with a socket to receive the fastener.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 271+ for hand manipulatable tools used to
    align or center pipes or similar structures.


CLS 411/349
TXT Securing means pivotable about axis of fastener:

    Subject matter under subclass 347 wherein the securing means is capable of
    rotating about the longitudinal axis of the headed elongated fastening
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 221+ for mating head and
    socket separable fasteners wherein the head is rotatable.


CLS 411/350
TXT Securing means rotatable and axially movable, e.g., wear take-up means,
    etc.: Subject matter under subclass 349 wherein the securing means can
    rotate through one full revolution and further wherein means are provided
    for moving the securing means along the fastening means axis.


CLS 411/351
TXT With draw bar or draft key fastener:
    Subject matter under subclass 337 wherein the fastening means consists of
    an elongated bar having a substantially rectangular cross section and
    structured for particular use in securing locomotive couplings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    213,    Railway Draft Appliances, subclass 62 for cushioned drawbar and
    cushioned yoked drawbar connections.


CLS 411/352
TXT Metallic resilient securing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 337 wherein the securing means is composed of
    a springy metal material such that the fastening means is at least in part
    retained in its securing position by the resilient nature of the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    372,    for a headed fastener element provided with a washer or cap wherein
    a separate means is used to attach or retain the washer or cap to the
    fastener element.

    516+,   for a resilient metallic sheet or wire formed securing means, per
    se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 213+ for resilient
    mating head and socket separable fasteners.

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 457 and 458+ for resilient connections
    between scoop buckets and teeth.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 470 for resilient
    connections in control lever and linkage systems; and subclasses 500.5+ for
    resilient connections in hand operated flexible control systems.

    248,    Supports, subclass 74 for resilient ring, or clamp pipe, or cable
    supports.


CLS 411/353
TXT Retainer ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 352 wherein the securing means is in the form
    of a circular band of metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    517+,   for retainer rings, per se.


CLS 411/354
TXT Wedge-securing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 337 wherein the securing means comprise a
    tapered block structure.


CLS 411/355
TXT And apertured bolt:

    Subject matter under subclass 354 wherein the fastening means is provided
    with a transverse slot designed to receive the wedge-type securing means.


CLS 411/356
TXT Penetrating pin securing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 337 wherein the securing means is in the form
    of an elongated pinlike element which is driven through an aperture or a
    recess into the material in which the fastening means is used to secure the
    fastening means within said material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    439+,   for impact driven fastener, per se.


CLS 411/357
TXT Longitudinally inserted:

    Subject matter under subclass 356 wherein the pinlike element is disposed
    in a generally axial direction of the fastening means.


CLS 411/358
TXT Outwardly deflected:

    Subject matter under subclass 357 wherein means are provided for causing
    the pinlike element to be directed away from the fastening means and into
    the material in which the fastening means is used.


CLS 411/359
TXT Bifurcated:

    Subject matter under subclass 358 wherein an end of the pinlike element is
    formed with a longitudinal slot which permits element portions on either
    side of the slot to be deflected in opposite directions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    457+,   for multiple prong impact driven fasteners.


CLS 411/360
TXT Deformable securing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 337 wherein the securing means is designed
    for and capable of being plastically flowable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    447+,   for impact driven fasteners provided with deformable integral
    locking means.

    501+,   for plastically flowable or deflectable headed fastener elements.


CLS 411/361
TXT Swageable collar:

    Subject matter under subclass 360 wherein the deformable securing means
    comprises an annular metal structure.


CLS 411/362
TXT Securing means deflecting a portion of fastener end:

    Subject matter under subclass 360 wherein the securing means directly
    causes a portion of the end of the headed fastening means to radially
    deform.


CLS 411/363
TXT Plural end legs:

    Subject matter under subclass 362 wherein the end of the fastening means
    has plural deflectable end structures.


CLS 411/364
TXT Cotter pin fastener:

    Subject matter under subclass 363 wherein the fastening means consists of
    wire structure having semicircular cross section having two legs and
    further wherein the means outwardly deflects the legs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    513+,   for cotter pins fastener elements, per se.


CLS 411/365
TXT Circular deflector:

    Subject matter under subclass 363 wherein the securing means is round in
    shape.


CLS 411/366
TXT Threaded fastener and nut:

    Subject matter under subclass 337 wherein the headed fastening means is
    provided with external threads and further provided with a mating
    internally threaded means.

    (1)     Note.  If a "securing means", as provided for in subclass 337
    above, is found in this subclass (366) or the subclasses indicated
    hereunder, it will not be for the purpose of locking the fastener and the
    nut against relative rotation within their contemplated working range,
    since a securing means of that nature comprises subject matter for
    subclasses 190+ above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81+,    for a threaded fastener (i.e., a bolt or nut) and means for
    restricting the rotation thereof relative to a coacting substructure.

    190+,   for a threaded bolt and nut and means for coupling them against
    rotation relative to one another.

    378+,   for externally threaded fastener elements, per se.

    427+,   for internally threaded fastener elements, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 90.1+ for screw threaded
    buttons.


CLS 411/367
TXT Having stay bolt spacer sleeve type:
    Subject matter under subclass 366 wherein the fastening means is structured
    for and used in securing two or more plates or similar members in spaced
    relationship and further wherein the washer is in the form of a metallic
    cylindrical member which when in its assembled relationship substantially
    encloses the stay bolt while lying intermediate the plates or similar
    members.

    (1)     Note.  The fastener assemblage of this subclass is typically used
    to secure boiler plates.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370,    for a stay bolt with a bearing washer.

    379+,   for threaded stay bolt structure, per se.

    505,    for unthreaded stay bolt structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 496 for combinations of
    stay bolts and stay bolt structures with boiler structures.


CLS 411/368
TXT Having washer:

    Subject matter under subclass 366 further provided with a perforated disk.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    531+,   for washers, per se.


CLS 411/369
TXT Including sealing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 368 wherein either the internally threaded
    means or disk is provided with means or structure which cooperate to
    prevent the ingress of fluid between the internally threaded means or disk
    and the fastening means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    542,    for sealing washers, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclass 640 for a static contact seal for other than an internal
    combustion engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable including an anchoring
    means extending through the seal.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclass 307 for closure seal structure.


CLS 411/370
TXT Stay bolt bearing washer:

    Subject matter under subclass 369 wherein the fastening means is structured
    for and used in securing two or more plates or similar members in a spaced
    relationship and further wherein the washer is structured for and used to
    mount the head of the fastener element within or to a plate or similar
    member.

    (1)     Note.  The fastener assemblage of this subclass is typically used
    to secured boiler plates.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    379+,   for threaded stay bolt structure.

    505,    for an unthreaded stay bolt structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 496 for combination of stay
    bolts with boiler structures.


CLS 411/371
TXT Washer or cap:

    Subject matter under subclass 337 wherein the fastening means is provided
    with a perforated disk or means for covering an end of the fastening means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    429+,   for an internally threaded fastener element provided with a cap.

    531+,   for washer structure, per se.


CLS 411/372
TXT And separate attaching or retaining means: Subject matter under subclass
    371 provided with separate distinct means to join or maintain the washer or
    cap with the fastening means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    533,    for a washer provided with means capable of retaining the washer to
    a fastener.


CLS 411/373
TXT Attached cap structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 371 drawn to the configuration of the means
    for covering an end of the fastening means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    429+,   for internally threaded fastener element having a cap.


CLS 411/374
TXT By screw means:

    Subject matter under subclass 373 wherein the means for covering is
    attached by helical thread structure.


CLS 411/375
TXT By crimping:

    Subject matter under subclass 373 wherein attachment is produced by plastic
    deformation of a portion of the cap.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    430,    for an internally threaded fastener element having a cap crimped
    thereto.


CLS 411/376
TXT By welding:

    Subject matter under subclass 373 wherein attachment is produced by
    metallic fusion bonding.


CLS 411/377
TXT Formed by molding:

    Subject matter under subclass 373 wherein the end covering means is
    produced and attached to the headed fastener by use of shapable material.


CLS 411/378
TXT EXTERNALLY THREADED FASTENER ELEMENT, E.G., BOLT, SCREW, ETC.:

    Subject matter under the class definition drawn to an elongated fastening
    means provided with an exterior helical ridge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168,    for an externally threaded fastener driven into a substructure
    (i.e., a workpiece) and means consisting of, or including, a thread lock
    for restricting the rotation of the fastener relative to the substructure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclass 191 for end to side or plate
    bolt joint.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, subclasses 8+ for processes of making externally threaded
    fastener elements (e.g., screws, bolts, etc.).


CLS 411/379
TXT Stay bolt:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 wherein the fastening means comprises an
    elongated structure designed to have one end attached to a plate or wall
    structure with the opposite end attached to and reenforcing a second plate
    or wall structure.

    (1)     Note.  The bolts of this subclass are generally used to reenforce
    sheets in boiler structures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    505,    for an unthreaded stay bolt which has a plastically flowed or
    deflectable end.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 496 for combinations of
    stay bolts with boiler structure.


CLS 411/380
TXT Having spherical head:

    Subject matter under subclass 379 wherein one end is shaped in the form of
    a globe.


CLS 411/381
TXT And telltale bore:

    Subject matter under subclass 380 wherein the fastening means is provided
    with a longitudinal extending cavity.

    (1)     Note.  Telltale bores are provided to facilitate visual observation
    of a rupture in a stay bolt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    382,    for a threaded stay bolt without a spherical head but having a
    telltale bore.


CLS 411/382
TXT Having telltale bore:

    Subject matter under subclass 379 wherein the fastening means is provided
    with a longitudinal extending cavity.


CLS 411/383
TXT Multipart:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 wherein the fastening means is composed
    of a plurality of discrete sections wherein each section integrally
    includes a portion of a head and a shank or thread structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    469,    for multipart impact driven plural prong fasteners.


CLS 411/384
TXT Axially adjustable:

    Subject matter under subclass 383 wherein the sections include means
    cooperating therebetween to permit the longitudinal dimension of the
    fastening means element to be varied.


CLS 411/385
TXT Comprising longitudinal side-by-side sections:

    Subject matter under subclass 383 wherein the discrete sections comprise
    elongated elements which when mated in lateral side-by-side relationship
    form the fastening means.


CLS 411/386
TXT Pilot end having means enhancing fastening or installation:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 wherein the fastening means is provided
    with means either for penetrating the material, substructure or other work
    to be fastened or allowing the fastening means to be torqued at an
    insertion end.


CLS 411/387
TXT Drill tip:

    Subject matter under subclass 386 wherein the pilot end includes means for
    boring a hole into which the fastening means is to be secured.


CLS 411/388
TXT Double-ended:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 wherein the fastening means is provided
    with two distinct end configurations one of which is threaded.

    (1)     Note.  The fastener elements of this subclass usually have a boss
    or similar driving structure between the end configurations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    479,    for impact driven hollow or dowel type fasteners.


CLS 411/389
TXT Both ends threaded:

    Subject matter under subclass 388 wherein each end configuration of the
    fastening means is provided with a helical ridge.


CLS 411/390
TXT Single element having means facilitating or effecting separation:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 wherein an initially single piece
    fastening means includes means or structure allowing or producing its
    separation into plural segments.


CLS 411/391
TXT By fluent pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 390 wherein the means allowing or producing
    separation is adapted to operate by the application of a pressurized fluid
    or flowable substance.


CLS 411/392
TXT Resiliently flexible:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 wherein the fastening means is partially
    or entirely formed of a material which permits the bolt to be elastically
    deformed radially of the fastening means axis.


CLS 411/393
TXT Set screw:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 wherein the fastening means is provided
    with a thread throughout its length and with a cavity in one end adapted to
    receive a driving tool.


CLS 411/394
TXT Drive screw:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 wherein the fastening means is provided
    with a thread of a pitch or shape that allows the fastening means to be
    impact driven into the material, substructure or other work to be fastened.

    (1)     Note.  The thread of the fastener element allows it to be withdrawn
    by rotation.


CLS 411/395
TXT Having bore therethrough:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 provided with a longitudinal extending
    cavity.

    (1)     Note.  The bore is generally provided to allow for lubricating
    material to be passed from one area to another.


CLS 411/396
TXT Separate head element:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 wherein the fastening means is provided
    with a transverse projection or head and further wherein the head and the
    remainder of the fastener means are separately formed and the head is
    subsequently attached to the remainder of the fastener means.


CLS 411/397
TXT Threadedly attached to shank:

    Subject matter under subclass 396 wherein the attachment is by mating
    exterior and interior helical ridge structure.


CLS 411/398
TXT Head eccentric with respect to fastener axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 wherein the fastening means is provided
    with a transverse projection, i.e., a head and further wherein the head is
    radially offset from the longitudinal axis of the fastening means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169,    for a bolt which has the center of mass of its head offset from the
    longitudinal axis of its shank.


CLS 411/399
TXT Head having counter-sinking means:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 wherein the fastening means has a
    transverse projection, i.e., a head and further wherein the head includes
    means adapted to cut away the material into which the fastening means is
    driven so that the head may be sunk flush with or below the surface of the
    material.


CLS 411/400
TXT Hook head, e.g., J-bolt, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 wherein the fastening means is provided
    with a head defining an arcuately formed extension on its shank.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    485,    for a hook head impact driven fastener.


CLS 411/401
TXT Elongated head, e.g., hanger bolt, etc.:
    Subject matter under subclass 378 wherein the fastening means is provided
    with a head comprising a generally elongated portion extending transversely
    of the shank and being adapted to having a smaller dimension of its
    elongated portion received through a slot in an undercut portion of the
    slot upon rotating the bolt substantially 90_.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 59 for pipe or cable supports vertically
    adjustable.


CLS 411/402
TXT Head driving structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 wherein the fastening means is provided
    with a transverse projection, i.e., a head, which is further provided with
    head driving structure adapted to receive an impelling tool used to secure
    the fastening means and further wherein significance is attributed to the
    means to receive the tool.


CLS 411/403
TXT Socket or slot:

    Subject matter under subclass 402 wherein the head driving structure
    consists of a peripherally closed cavity or a groove.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 436+ for wrenches designed for insertion into a
    cavity, e.g., a slot, or socket, etc.


CLS 411/404
TXT Orthogonally arranged slots, e.g., phillips head, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 provided with a plurality of slots, two
    of which intersect at a right angle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclass 460 for wrenches having plural, noncollinear blades
    designed for insertion into a cavity.


CLS 411/405
TXT Opposed open ended plural slots, e.g., spanner, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 provided with a plurality of slots, two
    of which lie on opposite edges of the perimeter of the head driving
    structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 442+ for wrenches having relatively movable
    components insertable into a cavity.


CLS 411/406
TXT Dovetail:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 wherein the cavity or groove is in the
    form of a fan-shaped mortise adapted to interlock with a mating tenon tool.

    (1)     Note.  The tenon tool end interlocks with the bolt head by sliding
    transversely to the fastener axis into the mortise.


CLS 411/407
TXT Having driver retaining means:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 wherein the cavity or groove includes
    means for preventing inadvertent longitudinal movement of the tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclass 459 for wrenches provided with driver retaining
    means in the form of a threaded periphery.


CLS 411/408
TXT Frictional engagement:

    Subject matter under subclass 402 wherein the head driving structure
    consists purely of frictional resistance between mating surfaces of the
    head and impelling tool.


CLS 411/409
TXT Wing structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 402 wherein the head is provided with a
    radially extending generally flat gripping section.

    (1)     Note.  The heads of this subclass usually have two gripping
    sections which are generally designed to be engaged by the fingers of the
    user.


CLS 411/410
TXT Plural diverse driving structures:

    Subject matter under subclass 402 provided with a plurality of discrete
    different means adopted to engage with different driving tools.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclass 461 for wrenches provided with plural, separate,
    projections designed to be inserted into a cavity, e.g., a socket, or slot,
    etc.


CLS 411/411
TXT Thread or shank structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 wherein significance is attributed to
    either that portion of the fastening means between a head and the helical
    ridge, i.e., the shank or the helical ridge.


CLS 411/412
TXT Plural threads on single shank:

    Subject matter under subclass 411 wherein the helical ridge comprises
    plural distinct helical ridge means concentrically arranged on the shank of
    the fastening means with each of the helical ridge means lying between the
    adjacent convolutions of one or more of other of said helical ridge means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    245,    for a threaded bolt and nut and means for coupling them against
    rotation relative to one another and wherein the means includes a discrete,
    rotation restricting member which confronts an axially outwardly facing
    portion of the nut and further wherein the member is in the nature of
    another nut and additionally wherein means, associated with one or both
    nuts, is included for restricting the rotation of one of the nuts relative
    to the other and lastly wherein (a) the thread of one of the nuts is of a
    different hand than that of the other and (b) the bolt includes threaded
    portions mating with the threaded portion of each of the nuts.


CLS 411/413
TXT Of different pitch:

    Subject matter under subclass 412 wherein the pitch of one of the helical
    ridges differs from that of another of the helical ridges over at least a
    portion of its length.

    (1)     Note.  Pitch is defined as the distance between the crests of two
    adjacent thread or helical ridge convolutions.


CLS 411/414
TXT Buttress thread:

    Subject matter under subclass 411 wherein the cross section of the ridge
    comprises a gradual leading flank and an abrupt trailing flank which
    intersect to define a relatively pointed ridge crest.


CLS 411/415
TXT Of varying thread pitch:

    Subject matter under subclass 411 wherein the pitch of the ridge is not
    uniform throughout the length of the ridge.

    (1)     Note.  The variation in pitch may constitute a variance of any type
    over any portion of the thread.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    307,    for a threaded bolt and nut and means for coupling them against
    rotation relative to one another and wherein the means comprises a thread
    lock and further wherein the locking results from the use of (a) a thread
    of one pitch on the bolt (or nut) and thread of a different pitch on the
    nut (or bolt) or (b) a thread on either the bolt or the nut which has a
    particular pitch in one increment of its length and a different pitch in
    another increment thereof.


CLS 411/416
TXT Lobular thread:

    Subject matter under subclass 411 wherein the major diameter of the ridge
    varies along the circumference of the ridge.

    (1)     Note.  The major diameter consists of that distance from crest
    taken along a line transverse to the fastener axis. The variation of the
    major diameter will generally consist of alternating high and low points in
    the thread cross section.


CLS 411/417
TXT Circumferentially interrupted thread:
    Subject matter under subclass 411 wherein the helical ridge has a
    discontinuity of at least a portion of a depth of a ridge section with the
    ridge on either side circumferentially thereof being of full depth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221+    and 271+, for a threaded bolt and nut means for coupling them
    against rotation relative to one another and wherein the means includes an
    axially extending recess in the externally threaded element.

    437,    for an internally threaded fastener element having interrupted
    thread structure.


CLS 411/418
TXT By longitudinal slot:

    Subject matter under subclass 417 wherein the discontinuity which causes
    the ridge interruption comprises a relatively narrow groove extending
    axially of the fastening means.


CLS 411/419
TXT Shank bifurcated by slot extending entirely therethrough:

    Subject matter under subclass 418 wherein the groove passes transversely
    through and divides a shank of the fastening means into laterally spaced
    sections.


CLS 411/420
TXT Inclined slot:

    Subject matter under subclass 418 wherein the groove is at an angle to the
    fastening means axis.


CLS 411/421
TXT Helically oriented:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 wherein the groove slot traces a spiral
    path about the fastening means.


CLS 411/422
TXT By peripherally closed transversely extending aperture:

    Subject matter under subclass 417 wherein the ridge discontinuity comprises
    a peripherially closed cavity having an axis transverse to the fastening
    means axis.


CLS 411/423
TXT Truncated thread:

    Subject matter under subclass 411 wherein the crest of the ridge has its
    apex cut, or removed, and replaced by a planar surface.

    (1)     Note.  The planar surface is usually parallel to the fastener axis.


CLS 411/424
TXT Shank structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 411 wherein significance is attributed to
    that portion of the fastening means between a head and the helical ridge,
    i.e., a shank.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    487+,   for shank structure of impact driven fastener.


CLS 411/425
TXT Twisted:

    Subject matter under subclass 424 wherein the shank is formed by subjecting
    it to torsional plastic deformation.


CLS 411/426
TXT Tapered:

    Subject matter under subclass 424 wherein the shank defines a conical
    surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    489,    for impact driven fasteners having significant tapered shank
    structure.


CLS 411/427
TXT INTERNALLY THREADED FASTENER ELEMENT, E.G., NUT, ETC.:

    Subject matter under the class definition drawn to a fastening means
    provided with an internal helical ridge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    527,    for resilient sheet metal fastener securing elements having
    helically inclined tongues, e.g., speed nuts, etc., which act as an
    internally threaded fastener but wherein the ridge does not trace a
    complete helix.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 96 for internally threaded
    pipe and tube end protectors.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 386+ for a coupling comprising
    a screw thimble holding means; and subclasses 390+ for internally threaded
    sleeves.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus,  subclasses 18+ for process of making internally threaded
    fastener elements (e.g., nuts, etc.).


CLS 411/428
TXT Including lubricating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 427 provided with means having or supplying
    fluid for reducing friction between mating threads of the internally
    threaded fastener element and an externally threaded fastener element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 286+ for lubricating sleeves, or liners.


CLS 411/429
TXT Having cap:

    Subject matter under subclass 427 provided with means enclosing one end of
    the fastener element.

    (1)     Note.  The enclosing means or cap, usually an ornamental element,
    may comprise a separate member attached to the fastener element or may be a
    unitary part of the fastener element.


CLS 411/430
TXT Cap crimped onto nut:

    Subject matter under subclass 429 wherein attachment of the enclosing means
    is by the alteration of shape of the enclosing means onto the fastener
    element.


CLS 411/431
TXT Resiliently retained:

    Subject matter under subclass 429 wherein the enclosing means or fastener
    element is structured to, or is composed of, or provided with means of
    elastic material tending to return to its normal shape when distorted
    thereby securing the enclosing means and fastener element.


CLS 411/432
TXT Multipart:

    Subject matter under subclass 427 wherein the fastener means comprises a
    plurality of discrete sections.


CLS 411/433
TXT Including movable threaded segments:
    Subject matter under subclass 432 wherein the fastener means is adapted to
    be readily separated into its plural sections.


CLS 411/434
TXT Moved by fluent pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 433 wherein the fastener means is further
    adapted to separate by the use of a pressurized fluid or flowable substance.


CLS 411/435
TXT Wing:

    Subject matter under subclass 427 provided with driving means in the form
    of a radially extending generally flat gripping section.

    (1)     Note.  The wing means usually has two such sections and are
    generally designed to be engaged by the fingers of the user.


CLS 411/436
TXT Thread structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 427 where significance is attributed to the
    helical ridge.


CLS 411/437
TXT Interrupted:

    Subject matter under subclass 436 wherein the helical ridge has a
    discontinuity.


CLS 411/438
TXT Coil spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 436 wherein the ridge is defined by the
    convolutions of a helical resilient element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 240.5 for devices which assemble wire coil
    thread inserts by rotation.


CLS 411/439
TXT IMPACT DRIVEN FASTENER, E.G., NAIL, SPIKE, TACK, ETC.:

    Subject matter under the class definition drawn to a fastener provided with
    an impact receiving surface adapted to receive an axially applied force
    which causes the fastener to penetrate material, substructure, or other
    work to be fastened.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 71 for pipe or cable supports provided with
    penetrating means; and subclass 216.1 for specially mounted or attached
    brackets having piercing means.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 387+ for an electrical connector
    including a contact with a sharp, piercing or cutting edge.


CLS 411/440
TXT Having means to facilitate explosive driving:

    Subject matter under subclass 439 provided with means specially adapted for
    allowing the fastener to be driven by fluent pressure resulting from an
    explosive charge detonation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    532,    for washer provided with explosive release means.


CLS 411/441
TXT Discrete guide or centering means:

    Subject matter under subclass 440 wherein the specially adapted means
    comprises an alignment or guiding element mounted on a shank portion of the
    fastener wherein the element is structured to engage and cooperate with an
    interior surface of a bore of an explosively actuated driving tool.


CLS 411/442
TXT Plural attached fasteners:

    Subject matter under subclass 439 wherein two or more of the fasteners are
    secured together.

    (1)     Note.  The fasteners are secured in a strip to facilitate ease of
    handling, storage, and to render them suitable for use in automatic driving
    tools.

    (2)     Note.  See (1) Note., of subclass 77 of Class 59, Chain, Staple,
    and Horseshoe Making, for the distinction between a staple blank of that
    locus (59/77), and a staple package of subclasses 340+ of Class 206,
    Special Receptacle or Package, and a staple strip of this locus (411/442).


CLS 411/443
TXT Integral strip:

    Subject matter under subclass 442 wherein the fasteners are attached during
    their formation thereby producing a relatively long and continuous
    homogeneous fastener structure.


CLS 411/444
TXT Laterally attached only at head or bridge: Subject matter under subclass
    442 wherein the fasteners are connected together at ends thereof which are
    adapted to receive impact during driving.


CLS 411/445
TXT Attached end-to-end:

    Subject matter under subclass 442 wherein the fasteners are attached such
    that an impact receiving end of a fastener is connected to a penetrating
    end of an adjacent fastener.


CLS 411/446
TXT Including integral locking means:

    Subject matter under subclass 439 wherein the fastener is provided with
    means unitary thereto specially adapted to prevent or render difficult
    withdrawal subsequent to driving of the fastener.


CLS 411/447
TXT Comprising deformable portion:

    Subject matter under subclass 446 wherein the unitary means comprises a
    fastener portion alterable in shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    501+,   for a headed fastener having a flowable or deflectable end (e.g., a
    rivet).


CLS 411/448
TXT Expansible on impact:

    Subject matter under subclass 447 wherein the alterable portion is radially
    expandable in response to the axially applied force.

    (1)     Note.  The axially applied force will simultaneously cause radially
    expansion of the deformable portion while causing the fastener to penetrate
    the material, substructure, or other work to be fastened.


CLS 411/449
TXT Axially collapsible section:

    Subject matter under subclass 448 wherein the alterable portion is designed
    to collapse upon the application of a predetermined axial force thereby
    producing radial expansion of adjacent portions of the fastener.


CLS 411/450
TXT Having means engageable on underside of member being secured by fastener:

    Subject matter under subclass 446 wherein the fastener includes a portion
    which is adapted to be beneath a member being secured by means of a
    separate operation after the fastener has been driven.

    (1)     Note.  The separate operation, e.g., could be partial rotation of
    the fastener.


CLS 411/451
TXT Comprising protrusion or recess means on shank:

    Subject matter under subclass 446 wherein the fastener consists of a headed
    structure provided with a shank and end portions and further wherein the
    shank is provided with either an outwardly extending structure adapted to
    penetrate the material into which the fastener is driven or a cavity
    structure specially adapted to receive penetrated displaced material.


CLS 411/452
TXT Longitudinal rib:

    Subject matter under subclass 451 wherein the outwardly extending structure
    comprises a narrow ridge running lengthwise of the shank.


CLS 411/453
TXT Spiral rib:

    Subject matter under subclass 452 wherein the ridge extends in a helical
    path about the fastener shank.


CLS 411/454
TXT Defined by twisted shank:

    Subject matter under subclass 453 wherein the ridge rib is formed by the
    shank having been subjected to torsion about its axis.


CLS 411/455
TXT Circumferential rib:

    Subject matter under subclass 451 wherein the outwardly extending structure
    comprises a continuous narrow ridge extending about the periphery of the
    shank.


CLS 411/456
TXT Barb:

    Subject matter under subclass 451 wherein the outwardly extending structure
    comprises an isolated protrusion having a pointed part projecting
    rearwardly in the direction of the headed structure of the fastener.


CLS 411/457
TXT Multiple prong, e.g., nailing plate, staple, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 439 wherein the fastener is provided with a
    plurality of distinct connected penetrating ends.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 16 for strip type multiple prong
    carpet fasteners.

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclass 77 for staple blank
    structures and process of making staples.  See the notes or Class 59,
    subclass 77 for the line between that subclass and this class (411).


CLS 411/458
TXT Oppositely disposed prongs:

    Subject matter under subclass 457 wherein  two penetrating ends are
    situated 180_ apart.

    (1)     Note.  The fasteners of this and indented subclasses are intended
    to have a prong driven into a first workpiece and then have a second
    workpiece driven or forced onto another opposed prong.


CLS 411/459
TXT Having plural prongs on one end:

    Subject matter under subclass 458 provided with two or more laterally
    spaced penetrating ends facing the same direction.


CLS 411/460
TXT Having identical ends:

    Subject matter under subclass 458 wherein the penetrating ends are
    duplicates.


CLS 411/461
TXT Of sheet metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 457 wherein the fastener is formed from sheet
    metal.

    (1)     Note.  The fastener is usually formed by cutting or stamping.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    477+,   for single prong impact driven fasteners formed from sheet metal.

    503,    for sheet metal formed plural legged headed fastener elements.


CLS 411/462
TXT Including stiffening means:

    Subject matter under subclass 461 wherein stiffening means are provided or
    a portion of the fastener is shaped to increase the rigidity of the sheet
    metal.


CLS 411/463
TXT Rib:

    Subject matter under subclass 462 wherein the stiffening means comprises an
    elongated embossment in the sheet metal defining a protruding portion on
    one face of the fastener and a recessed portion on the opposing face
    thereof.


CLS 411/464
TXT Entire fastener having corrugations parallel to driving direction:

    Subject matter under subclass 463 wherein essentially the entire fastener
    surface includes elongated alternating ridges and grooves.


CLS 411/465
TXT Having sawtooth penetrating edge:

    Subject matter under subclass 464 wherein a penetrating edge of the
    fastener is defined by a series of lateral sharp points disposed in
    parallel relationship to the alternating ridges and grooves.


CLS 411/466
TXT Prongs cut and formed from body portion: Subject matter under subclass 461
    further wherein the penetrating ends are severed and bent from the sheet
    metal.


CLS 411/467
TXT Plural prongs from single opening:

    Subject matter under subclass 466 wherein two or more penetrating ends are
    punched from a single opening in the sheet.


CLS 411/468
TXT Including opposed prongs defining mirror image of each other:

    Subject matter under subclass 467 wherein a penetrating end is struck from
    each of a pair of opposed ends of a single opening with the two penetrating
    ends being identical to each other while being oriented 180_ apart with
    respect to the direction in which the respective identical surfaces of the
    penetrating end faces.


CLS 411/469
TXT Multipart:

    Subject matter under subclass 457 wherein the fastener is made of a
    plurality of discrete sections.


CLS 411/470
TXT Having prongs of different lengths:

    Subject matter under subclass 457 wherein the penetrating ends are of
    unequal length.


CLS 411/471
TXT Each prong bevelled from a single side toward its opposite side:

    Subject matter under subclass 457 wherein each of the penetrating ends
    includes a first side surface which lies substantially in a single plane
    and extends to the extremity of a penetrating point and includes a second
    side surface opposing said first surface and having a tapered portion
    thereof adjacent the penetrating point being tapered inwardly in the
    direction of said point and terminating at the extremity thereof.


CLS 411/472
TXT Bevel located on outside of prong:

    Subject matter under subclass 471 wherein the tapered portion of each
    penetrating end is located on an outer side surface of the penetrating end.


CLS 411/473
TXT Having distinct driving head:

    Subject matter under subclass 457 wherein significance is attributed to the
    impact receiving surface of the fastener.


CLS 411/474
TXT Plural heads:

    Subject matter under subclass 473 wherein the fastener is provided with
    more than one impact receiving surface.


CLS 411/475
TXT Having means to limit penetration short of bridge portion:

    Subject matter under subclass 457 wherein means connecting the plural
    penetrating ends comprises a bridge portion and further wherein spaced from
    the bridge portion is a shoulder means specially adapted to maintain the
    bridge portion at a distance from the material into which the fastener is
    driven.


CLS 411/476
TXT Having frangible portion:

    Subject matter under subclass 457 wherein the fastener includes a portion
    which is specially adapted to fracture during driving thereof or which
    fractures in order to permit removal of the fastener from the material in
    which it has been driven.


CLS 411/477
TXT Of sheet metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 439 wherein the fastener is formed from sheet
    metal.

    (1)     Note.  The fastener is usually formed by cutting or stamping.


CLS 411/478
TXT Folded or twisted:

    Subject matter under subclass 477 wherein the fastener is subjected either
    to bending or torsional forces.


CLS 411/479
TXT Hollow fastener:

    Subject matter under subclass 477 wherein the sheet metal is rolled or
    otherwise formed into a cylindrical shape.


CLS 411/480
TXT Separately attached head:

    Subject matter under subclass 439 wherein the impact receiving surface of
    the fastener is an initially discrete element which is subsequently secured
    to a shank portion.


CLS 411/481
TXT Head having central recess:

    Subject matter under subclass 439 wherein the impact receiving surface
    includes a cavity aligned with the fastener axis.

    (1)     Note.  The cavity may serve a number of functions, e.g., a nail
    set, etc.


CLS 411/482
TXT Plural axially aligned heads:

    Subject matter under subclass 439 wherein the impact receiving surface
    comprise multiple receiving surfaces attached end-to-end concentric to the
    fastener axis.


CLS 411/483
TXT Wire formed head:

    Subject matter under subclass 439 wherein the impact receiving surface
    comprises a wire element configured to produce a projection transverse to
    the fastener axis.

    (1)     Note.  The wire formed head is often a continuation of the shank
    portion of the fastener.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    543,    for wire formed washers.


CLS 411/484
TXT Domed head:

    Subject matter under subclass 439 wherein the impact receiving surface
    comprises a convexly curved surface defining substantially a segment of a
    sphere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    507,    for domed head fastener elements (e.g., a rivet).


CLS 411/485
TXT Hook head:

    Subject matter under subclass 439 wherein the impact receiving surface
    includes an angularly shaped portion adapted to be grasped or to attach an
    member thereto.


CLS 411/486
TXT Head forms segment of disk:

    Subject matter under subclass 439 wherein the impact receiving surface is
    configured into a portion of a circular band of material.


CLS 411/487
TXT Shank or penetrating end structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 439 wherein significance is attributed to a
    piercing end or the shank portion between the piercing end and the impact
    receiving surface.


CLS 411/488
TXT Flat-sided shank:

    Subject matter under subclass 487 wherein the shank is formed with a
    longitudinally extending planar surface.


CLS 411/489
TXT Tapered:

    Subject matter under subclass 488 wherein the planar surface is inclined
    with respect to the longitudinal axis of the fastener.


CLS 411/490
TXT Stepped shank:

    Subject matter under subclass 487 wherein the shank includes plural
    sections of progressingly decreasing diameters in the direction of the
    penetrating end of the fastener with each of said sections being of
    substantially uniform diameter throughout its length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    497,    for impact driven fasteners having a stepped end structure.


CLS 411/491
TXT Oval or lobular shank:

    Subject matter under subclass 487 wherein the shank portion is formed with
    a cross section defining a curved surface having maximum and minimum
    diameters which constitute alternating high and low points on the periphery
    of the cross section.


CLS 411/492
TXT Angular shank portion:

    Subject matter under subclass 487 wherein the shank portion has a polygonal
    cross section.


CLS 411/493
TXT End structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 487 wherein significance is attributed to the
    piercing end of the fastener.


CLS 411/494
TXT Pyramidal point:

    Subject matter under subclass 493 wherein the piercing end has the shape of
    a polyhedron having a polygonal base and triangular faces meeting at a
    common point.


CLS 411/495
TXT Slotted end:

    Subject matter under subclass 493 wherein the piercing end is formed with a
    relatively shallow transversely extending recess.


CLS 411/496
TXT Chisel point:

    Subject matter under subclass 493 wherein the piercing end has the shape of
    a prism.


CLS 411/497
TXT Stepped end:

    Subject matter under subclass 493 wherein the piercing end comprises a
    series of sections each successive one of which is of increased transverse
    dimension in the longitudinal direction towards the impact receiving
    surface.


CLS 411/498
TXT Conical point:

    Subject matter under subclass 493 wherein the piercing end in the shape of
    a surface generated by revolving a right triangle about one of its sides
    other than the hypotenuse.


CLS 411/499
TXT Having a curved surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 493 wherein the piercing end is in the shape
    of a continuous smooth arcuate three-dimensional figure boundary.


CLS 411/500
TXT HEADED FASTENER ELEMENT:

    Subject matter under the class definition drawn to an elongated fastening
    means provided at one end with an enlargement or related structure in the
    nature of a head.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 239 for projecting pin shelf or scaffold bracket.


CLS 411/501
TXT Having plastically flowable or deflectable end, e.g., rivet, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein either the head or an opposing
    end of the fastening means consists of a polycrystalline metallic grain
    structure which when subjected to an externally applied force is
    plastically flowable thereby producing a securing head structure or
    deflected end structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, subclasses 27+ for processes of making rivets.


CLS 411/502
TXT Plural end legs:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein the fastening means is provided
    with plural plastically flowable or deflectable ends.


CLS 411/503
TXT Sheet metal type:

    Subject matter under subclass 502 wherein the fastening means is made or
    formed from a planar piece of metallic material.


CLS 411/504
TXT Solid end type:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein the end is devoid of any cavity,
    gap or space therein.


CLS 411/505
TXT Stay bolt:

    Subject matter under subclass 504 wherein the fastener comprises an
    elongated structure designed to have one end attached to a plate or wall
    with the opposite end attached and reenforcing a second plate or wall
    structure.


CLS 411/506
TXT Both head and end flowable:

    Subject matter under subclass 504 wherein both the head and the opposing
    end are plastically flowable.


CLS 411/507
TXT Domed head:

    Subject matter under subclass 506 wherein the head is in the form of a
    hemisphere.


CLS 411/508
TXT Having resilient securing structure on shank:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 provided with an elastic configuration on
    a shank portion of the fastening means wherein the configuration is
    specially adapted to retain the fastening means in a secure position.


CLS 411/509
TXT Concentric ridge or flange:

    Subject matter under subclass 508 wherein the configuration is a raised
    crested portion or protruding edge on and concentric to the shank portion.


CLS 411/510
TXT Plural ridges or flanges:

    Subject matter under subclass 509 provided with two or more raised crested
    portions or protruding edges.


CLS 411/511
TXT FASTENER SECURING ELEMENT:

    Subject matter under the class definition drawn to element structure for
    use with fasteners or fastener elements of this class and wherein either
    the element structure operates by inherent resilience of at least a portion
    of its structure or is in the form of a relatively short piece of wire
    having a semicircular cross section.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclasses 111+ for fastener
    securing elements specially adapted for or with land vehicle wheels or
    axles.


CLS 411/512
TXT Having elastomeric material:

    Subject matter under subclass 511 provided with rubber or rubberlike
    substances having resilient properties.


CLS 411/513
TXT Cotter pins:

    Subject matter under subclass 511 wherein the wire is in the form of a
    relatively short piece of wire having a semicircular cross section.

    (1)     Note.  The wire is generally folded back onto itself and is adapted
    to be inserted into an aperture of a headed fastener.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     for a threaded fastener (i.e., a bolt or nut) and means for
    restricting the rotation thereof relative to a coacting substructure and
    wherein the means includes a restricting member and further wherein the
    member extends between and engages a flat formed on a side of each of a
    plurality of bolts or nuts and additionally wherein the member has plural
    openings, or notches engaging the bolts, or nuts, on two sides thereof, and
    lastly wherein the member consists of plural parts, one of which comprises
    a keeper.

    213,    for a threaded bolt and nut and means for coupling them against
    rotation relative to one another and wherein the means includes a discrete,
    rotation restricting member which confronts an axially outwardly facing
    portion of the nut and further wherein the member is in the nature of a key
    which is movable laterally into engagement with the threaded element and
    additionally wherein the key includes a plastically deformable portion and
    lastly wherein the key is an elongated element divided longitudinally
    (e.g., a cotter pin, etc.).

    320,    for a threaded bolt and nut and means for coupling them against
    rotation relative to one another and wherein the means includes a member in
    the nature of a key which is movable laterally into engagement with the
    threaded elements and further wherein the key includes a plastically
    deformable portion and additionally wherein the key is an elongated element
    divided longitudinally (e.g., a cotter pin, etc.).


CLS 411/514
TXT Having deformed resilient middle portion:
    Subject matter under subclass 513 wherein the wire has two legs, one having
    a resilient deformed portion extending transversely of the pin axis.


CLS 411/515
TXT Having folded back leg:

    Subject matter under subclass 513 wherein the wire has two legs and a
    loop-type head and further wherein one of the legs is bent 180_ so that the
    leg faces the head.


CLS 411/516
TXT Resilient metallic:

    Subject matter under subclass 511 wherein the element structure is composed
    substantially of metallic spring material such that the element structure
    is at least in part retained in its securing position by the resilient
    nature of that material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 213+ for resilient
    mating head and socket separable fasteners; and subclasses 255+ for
    resilient clasps not specially adapted for securing a fastener of class
    (411).

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 457 and 458+ for resilient connections
    between connections between scoop buckets and teeth.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 470 and 500.5+ for
    resilient connections in control lever and linkage systems particularly
    hand operated flexible systems.

    248,    Supports, subclass 74 for resilient ring, or clamp pipe, or cable
    supports.


CLS 411/517
TXT Retainer ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 516 wherein the element structure is in the
    shape of a band.


CLS 411/518
TXT Having gripper holes:

    Subject matter under subclass 517 wherein the element structure is provided
    with at least two holes to locate and coact with a tool used to assemble or
    disassemble the element structure.


CLS 411/519
TXT Plural radial sectioned:

    Subject matter under subclass 517 wherein the band of material consists of
    at least two engageable parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    539+,   for radially positionable washers.


CLS 411/520
TXT Sheet metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 516 wherein the element structure is formed
    from a substantially flat planar piece of metallic material.


CLS 411/521
TXT Circular:

    Subject matter under subclass 520 wherein the material is substantially in
    the form of a circle.


CLS 411/522
TXT Parallel legs, e.g., U-shaped, etc.:
    Subject matter under subclass 520 wherein the planar material is folded
    back thereby at least producing two parallel appendages or legs.


CLS 411/523
TXT Folded leg having fastener aperture or recess:

    Subject matter under subclass 522 wherein at least one of the folded
    parallel appendages is provided with an opening.

    (1)     Note.  The opening is generally provided to allow a portion of the
    headed fastener or piece to be fastened to extend therethrough.


CLS 411/524
TXT Plural folds:

    Subject matter under subclass 523 wherein the material is folded onto
    itself at least twice.


CLS 411/525
TXT Having plural longitudinal slits:

    Subject matter under subclass 520 wherein the material is provided with at
    least two long narrow cuts both of which are parallel to the longitudinal
    axis of the structure.


CLS 411/526
TXT And slit coincident with element axis:
    Subject matter under subclass 525 wherein the material is further provided
    with a long narrow cut lying in the longitudinal axis of the structure.


CLS 411/527
TXT And helically inclined tongues, e.g., speed nut, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 525 wherein the material is formed such as to
    produce a pair of promontory structures having deformed edges tracing a
    helical path.


CLS 411/528
TXT Having longitudinally slit coincident with element axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 520 wherein the material is provided with a
    long narrow cut lying in the longitudinal axis of the structure.


CLS 411/529
TXT Having longitudinal slot forming fastener engaging slide:

    Subject matter under subclass 520 wherein the material is formed such as to
    have a substantially large opening confined by the outer edges of the
    structure, the opening being designed to physically engage the fastener or
    piece being secured.


CLS 411/530
TXT Wire or rod formed:

    Subject matter under subclass 516 wherein the element structure is made
    from resilient spring wire or rod material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 261+ for wire formed
    clasps not specially adapted for securing a fastener or fastening means of
    this class (411).


CLS 411/531
TXT WASHER STRUCTURE:

    Subject matter under the class definition in the form of an annular element
    adapted to be placed beneath the bearing surface of a bolt head, nut, or
    the like.

    (1)     Note.  The washers of this and indented subclasses are provided for
    sealing, reducing friction, ornamenting, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132+,   for a threaded fastener (i.e., a bolt or nut) and means for
    restricting the rotation thereof relative to a coacting substructure and
    wherein the means includes a restricting member and further wherein the
    member or a portion thereof is located between the substructure and the
    inwardly facing surface of the bolt head or nut, and see especially
    subclasses 147+ thereunder wherein the member comprises a washer formed as
    a closed loop, or an apertured plate, or a split ring.

    260+,   for a threaded bolt and nut and means for coupling them against
    rotation relative to one another and wherein the means comprises a thread
    lock and further wherein the means includes a distortable metallic element,
    which element may be a washer.

    270,    for a threaded bolt and nut and means for coupling them against
    rotation relative to one another and wherein the means comprises a thread
    lock and further wherein the means includes a tapered surface for wedging
    the internally threaded element against the externally threaded one and
    additionally wherein the internally threaded element is segmented and
    lastly wherein a member, which may be a washer, is included for carrying
    the tapered surface and surrounding the segmented element.

    275,    for a threaded bolt and nut and means for coupling them against
    rotation relative to one another and wherein the means comprises a thread
    lock and further wherein one of the elements, or a discrete member, is
    adapted to cant the assembly and additionally wherein a discrete member,
    which may be a washer, accomplishes the canting.

    313+,   for a threaded bolt and nut and means for coupling them against
    rotation relative to one another and wherein the means comprises a washer
    having a deformable portion engageable with one of the threaded elements.

    318+,   for a threaded fastener with a nut, washer, securing means, or cap,
    and wherein the fastener is a threaded one and is provided with a nut and
    further wherein a washer is included.

    329+,   for a threaded bolt and nut and means for coupling them against
    rotation relative to one another and wherein the means comprises a pawl and
    ratchet and further wherein the pawl is carried by a washer.

    332+,   for a headed fastener with a nut, washer, securing means, or cap
    and wherein the element which is in addition to the fastener is limited to
    being either a washer or a cap.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 108+ for miscellaneous ferrules,
    rings, and thimbles.


CLS 411/532
TXT Including release means:

    Subject matter under subclass 531 wherein means are provided for permitting
    the element to become effectively disengaged from a fastener with which it
    is used without having to first remove said fastener.


CLS 411/533
TXT Including means for retaining washer to fastener:

    Subject matter under subclass 531 wherein discrete means are provided for
    maintaining the element assembled to a fastener.


CLS 411/534
TXT Including antifriction means:

    Subject matter under subclass 531 wherein the element includes means
    adapted to reduce the resistance to relative rotary motion between two
    parts of an assembly in which the element is being used.


CLS 411/535
TXT Including adjustable thickness means:
    Subject matter under subclass 531 wherein means are provided for altering
    the axial dimension of the element.


CLS 411/536
TXT Wear or lost motion compensating means: Subject matter under subclass 535
    wherein the element includes means which automatically increases the axial
    dimension of the element to compensate for excessive tolerance between the
    parts of an assembly in which the element is used.

    (1)     Note.  The excessive tolerances are produced by normal bearing load
    wear, lost motion, etc.


CLS 411/537
TXT Having leveling means:

    Subject matter under subclass 531 wherein the element includes means for
    compensating for differences in contour of opposing bearing surfaces on
    parts in an assembly in which the element is used.


CLS 411/538
TXT Inclined planar face:

    Subject matter under subclass 537 wherein the compensating means on the
    element defines a flat, angled surface which is adapted to mate with an
    equally angled and oppositely extending surface on a part in an assembly in
    which the element is used.


CLS 411/539
TXT Radially positionable:

    Subject matter under subclass 531 wherein the element includes means which
    permits the element to be moved laterally of a shank of a fastener with
    which the element is used.


CLS 411/540
TXT Pivotally hinged sections:

    Subject matter under subclass 539 wherein the means comprise plural
    connected segments rotatable about points where the segments are so
    connected.


CLS 411/541
TXT Secured by plastic deformation:

    Subject matter under subclass 539 wherein the element is altered in shape
    after being positioned about a shank of a fastener.


CLS 411/542
TXT Sealing:

    Subject matter under subclass 531 wherein the element serves to prevent the
    ingress of fluids between a fastener with which it is used and an adjacent
    part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclass 640 for a static contact seal for other than an internal
    combustion engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable including an anchoring
    means extending through the seal.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclass 307 for closure seal structure.


CLS 411/543
TXT Wire formed:

    Subject matter under subclass 531 wherein the element is fabricated from an
    elongated piece of metal stock having a circular cross section.


CLS 411/544
TXT Axially resilient:

    Subject matter under subclass 531 wherein the element is composed of
    elastic material and configured such that it can be axially compressed and
    will tend to return to its original shape.


CLS 411/545
TXT Corrugated:

    Subject matter under subclass 531 wherein the element is formed with folds
    defining a series of alternating grooves and ridges on the opposed faces
    thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161,    for a washer having ridges or grooves extending more or less
    radially across its axially facing surfaces, and wherein the washer is
    disclosed as being a component of a bolt-to-substructure, or a
    nut-to-substructure, locking arrangement.


CLS 411/546
TXT Spacer:

    Subject matter under subclass 531 wherein the element is in the form of a
    cylinder and is used to maintain parts of an assembly in spaced
    relationship.


CLS 411/547
TXT Of folded sheet material:

    Subject matter under subclass 546 wherein the element is formed of
    initially thin flat stock material, which is rolled or otherwise shaped
    into a generally cylindrical configuration having an axially directed
    opening therethrough.


CLS 411/548
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition not provided for elsewhere.


CLS 411/549
TXT Outwardly extending projection cooperates with socket member having ramp
    engagement means:Subject matter under subclass 349 wherein a portion of the
    securing means protrudes from the headed elongated fastening means shank
    along a line substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the
    headed fastening means and wherein the securing means further includes a
    socket member having in the form of a ramp surface adapted to mate with
    protruding portion.


CLS 411/550
TXT Including means providing axial adjustment:
    Subject matter under subclass 549 wherein the headed elongated fastening
    means or the means allowing the axial dimension between the head of the
    headed elongated fastening means and the surfaces on the socket member to
    be altered.


CLS 411/551
TXT Threaded adjustment:
    Subject matter under subclass 550 wherein the adjustment means are in the
    form of threaded surfaces.


CLS 411/552
TXT And discrete biasing spring:
    Subject matter under subclass 549 wherein separate means are provided for
    resiliently urging the securing means and the cooperating socket member in
    axially opposed direction to enhance the engagement therebetween.


CLS 411/553
TXT Similar, opposed ramp surfaces:
    Subject matter under subclass 549 wherein the ramp surfaces extend in a
    rectilinear manner on diametrically opposite sides of the headed elongated
    fastening means.


CLS 411/554
TXT Helically slotted securing means having cooperating engaging portion on
    socket member:Subject matter under subclass 349 wherein the securing means
    comprises an arcuate recess in the headed elongated fastening means shank
    which is generally spirally oriented about the axis thereof and wherein a
    mating to cooperate with the recess.


CLS 411/555
TXT Through-slot for engagement with crossbar:
    Subject matter under subclass 554 wherein the recess extends transverse to
    and entirely through the shank of the headed elongated fastening means and
    the cooperating structure on the socket member comprises a rod entirely
    transversing a shank receiving opening in the socket member.

                CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS

    The patents in the following collections have been placed without regard to
    their original classification or to their claimed subject matter and are
    therefore not exhaustive of the art subject matter but are only example of
    the art.


CLS 411/900
TXT FASTENER OR FASTENER ELEMENT COMPOSED OF PLURAL DIFFERENT MATERIALS:

    Art collection of fasteners or fastener elements made of plural distinct
    substances.


CLS 411/901
TXT Core and exterior or different materials:
    Art collection of fastener or fastener elements in which the interior and
    exterior portions are made of distinct different substances.


CLS 411/902
TXT Metal core:

    Art collection of fasteners or fastener elements having a metallic core.


CLS 411/903
TXT Resinous exterior:

    Art collection of fasteners and fastener elements having a metal core and a
    resinous exterior.


CLS 411/904
TXT Fastener or fastener element composed of nonmetallic material:

    Art collection of fasteners and fastener elements made of materials other
    than metal.


CLS 411/905
TXT Paper or wood:

    Art collection of fasteners or fastener elements composed of cellulose
    material.


CLS 411/906
TXT Leather or fabric:

    Art collection of fasteners and fastener elements made of a tanned or
    otherwise skin of an animal or of a woven, knitted, or felted cloth.


CLS 411/907
TXT Elastomeric:

    Art collection of fasteners or fastener elements composed of a rubber or
    rubberlike substance.


CLS 411/908
TXT Resinous material:

    Art collection of fasteners or fastener elements composed of a polymerized
    synthetic or chemically modified resin.


CLS 411/909
TXT Fasteners or fastener elements composed of thermo-responsive memory
    material:

    Art collection of fasteners or fastener elements composed of an alloy
    comprising materials having different coefficients of expansion whereby the
    fastener or element is capable of changing first from one configuration at
    a temperature to another configuration at a second temperature by
    subjecting the fastener or element to the second temperature.


CLS 411/910
TXT Anti-tamper means:

    Art collection of fasteners or fastener elements which includes means for
    preventing unauthorized removal thereof.


CLS 411/911
TXT One-way drive:

    Art collection of fasteners or fastener elements wherein the anti-tamper
    means includes tool engaging surfaces permitting rotation of the fastener
    in the direction of insertion but does not include surfaces facilitating
    rotation in the direction of removal.


CLS 411/912
TXT ANTI-SPLITTING FASTENER:

    Art collection of fasteners or fastener elements provided with means to
    prevent the material into which the fastener or element is driven from
    splitting.


CLS 411/913
TXT SELF-EXPANDING ANCHOR:

    Art collection of self-expanding anchors designed to be inserted into an
    opening of a part wherein an anchor is provided with flexible legs of
    inherently resilience, the legs being radially inwardly compressible to
    permit insertion in the opening and radially outwardly moveable upon
    release of the compressive force to thereby engage the wall of the opening
    or a distal face of the part.


CLS 411/914
TXT COATED BOLT:

    Art collection of bolt fasteners designed either to be passed through two
    or more pieces to be secured together and having a separate blocking
    device, e.g.; a nut, or those having a threaded or otherwise configured
    shank which engages a corresponding prepared recess in one of the pieces to
    be secured wherein a bolt fastener is provided with a coating.


CLS 411/915
TXT BOLT HAVING PACKING JOINT:

    Art collection of bolt fasteners designed either to be passed through two
    or more pieces to be secured together and having a separate locking device,
    e.g., a nut, or those having a threaded or otherwise configured shank which
    engages a corresponding prepared recess in one of the pieces to be secured
    and further wherein a bolt fastener is provided with a packing joint.


CLS 411/916
TXT BOLT HAVING TENSION FEATURE:

    Art collection of bolt fasteners designed either to be passed through two
    or more pieces to be secured together and having a locking device, e.g., a
    nut, or those having a threaded or otherwise configured shank which engages
    a corresponding prepared recess in one of the pieces to be secured and
    further wherein a bolt fastener is provided with a tension feature.


CLS 411/917
TXT NUT HAVING TENSION FEATURE:

    Art collection of nut fasteners designed to be attached to the ends of
    bolts having an opening which is either to correspond to the thread of a
    bolt or other similar corresponding structure to secure the bolt in place
    in the material to which it is applied and further wherein a nut fastener
    is provided with a tension feature.


CLS 411/918
TXT THREADLESS NUT:

    Art collection of nut fasteners designed to be attached to the ends of bolt
    having an opening wherein a nut fastener is provided with a cooperating
    structure to secure the bolt in place in material to which is applied by
    means other than an internal thread of the nut fastener.


CLS 411/919
TXT SCREW HAVING DRIVING CONTACTS:

    Art collection of screw fasteners which have a shank provided with threads
    adapted to produce a corresponding internal thread in material into which a
    screw fastener is inserted and provided with a head having means allowing
    the screw fastener to be engaged by a rotating device, the means being i
    the form of nicks, an angular head, or projecting ribs specially adapted to
    be engaged by a corresponding shaped driver to rotate the screw fastener.


CLS 411/920
TXT STAPLE:

    Art collection of double pointed staple fasteners substantially U-shaped
    and usually having legs of equal length designed to span and hold into
    place a separate piece or article wherein the legs pierce the material on
    opposite sides of the piece or article to be held.


CLS 411/921
TXT MULTIPLE-PRONGED NAIL, SPIKE OR TACK:

    Art collection of nail, spike or tack fasteners designed to be driven by
    repeated blows or by nailing machines and laterally displacing materials
    into which they are forced to thereby be retained either by friction,
    clenching, or additionally locking means wherein a nail, spike or tack
    fastener is provided with two or more prongs and further wherein the prongs
    of fastener are designed to enter material at or near the same point and to
    be distinquished from staples in that they are not adapted to span and
    secure between two of holding points and a separate piece of material.


CLS 411/922
TXT NAIL, SPIKE OR TACK HAVING LOCKING DEVICE:

    Art collection of nail, spike, or tack of fasteners designed to be driven
    by repeated blows or by nail machines and laterally displacing material
    into which they are force to thereby be retained by friction, clenching, or
    blocking means in which a nail, spike, or tack fastener is provided with a
    device attach to or made integral with the fastener to prevent or render
    difficult its withdrawal.


CLS 411/923
TXT NAIL, SPIKE OR TACK HAVING SPECIFIC HEAD STRUCTURE:

    Art collection of nail, spike or tack fasteners designed to be driven by
    repeated blows or by nailing machines and laterally displacing the material
    into which they are force to be retained by friction, clenching, or
    additionally locking means and in which significance is attributed to the
    head structure of a nail, spike, or tack fastener.


CLS 411/924
TXT COUPLED NUT AND BOLT:

    Art collections of assembled fasteners in the form of threaded nuts and
    bolts provided with special structures designed to prevent, or tending to
    prevent the rotation of a threaded nut and bolt, or relative rotation of a
    threaded nut and bolt, or endwise movement or separation of a threaded nut
    and bolt.


CLS 411/924.1
TXT Deformed:

    Art collection under are collection 924 in which either a nut or bolt is
    deformed.


CLS 411/925
TXT Top stop:

    Art collection under art collection 924 in which a special structure is
    provided in the form of a stop secured or locked to the bolt and in which
    the stop has a portion above the nut which locks the nut.


CLS 411/926
TXT Positive lock:

    Art collection under art collection 925 in which the stop prevents rotation
    of the nut on the bolt by a positive interlocking engagement with the nut.


CLS 411/927
TXT Side:

    Art collection under art collection 926 in which the nut is locked by a
    portion of the stop engaging a side of the nut.


CLS 411/928
TXT Thread Gripper:

    Art collection under art collection 925 in which the stop is locked to the
    bolt by its gripping action on the bolt threads.


CLS 411/929
TXT Thread lock:

    Art collection under art collection 924 in which the nut is locked to the
    bolt directly or indirectly by the action upon the threads.


CLS 411/929.1
TXT Coil Spring:

    Art collection under art collection 929 in which a nut or bolt are provided
    with a coil spring to lock the nut to the bolt.


CLS 411/929.2
TXT Distorted washer:

    Art collection under art collection 929 in which a nut and bolt are
    provided with a distorted washer to lock the nut to the bolt.


CLS 411/930
TXT Flowing metal or settable material:

    Art collection under art collection 929 in which the locking action between
    the nut and bolt is accomplished either by (a) melted metal or other
    material capable of harding into a solid state (e.g., cement), or (b) a
    part plastically formed by either the bolt shank, or the nut into which the
    shank is threaded, thereby coating between the threads of the shanks or
    those on the nuts to prevent relative rotation.


CLS 411/931
TXT Superposed Nuts:

    Art collection under art collection 929 in which more than one nut is
    placed on a bolt wherein the other nut having some special construction or
    adjunct whereby it is adapted to lock the other nut.

    (1)     Note.  Jam-nuts are included only when they are especially adapted
    to serve as jam-nuts.


CLS 411/932
TXT Oppositely threaded:

    Art collection under art collection 931 in which one nut has a right hand
    thread and the other nut has a left hand thread and the threads cooperating
    with a similarly threaded bolt.


CLS 411/933
TXT Key or pawl locked:

    Art collection under art collection 932 in which the nuts are locked
    together by a key or a pawl and ratchet mechanism.


CLS 411/934
TXT Side locked:

    Art collection under art collection 933 in which the nuts are locked
    together by a device engaging their sides.


CLS 411/935
TXT Cam or cone grip:

    Art collection under art collection 929 in which the threads of the bolt
    are gripped by a cam action between the nut or washer or another part or by
    the action of a cone and its collecting member forcing a part of the nut or
    washer against the bolt threads.


CLS 411/935.1
TXT Cam:

    Art collection under art collection 935 wherein the threads of the bolts
    are gripped by a cam action between the nut and washer and other parts.


CLS 411/936
TXT Canted nut:

    Art collection under art collection 929 in which the nut at its final
    position tends to bend the bolt at the base of the nut.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the nut or the washer is wedge shape.


CLS 411/937
TXT Distorted nut:

    Art collection under art collection 929 in which either the whole or a part
    of the nut is distorted or changed in shape before, during, or after its
    application to the bolt, so that the threads of the nuts grip the threads
    of the bolt.


CLS 411/937.1
TXT Predistorted thread pitch or diameter:

    Art collection under art collection 937 in which either the thread pitch of
    the nut or the diameter of the nut is distorted prior to the assembly of
    the nut to the bolt.


CLS 411/937.2
TXT Post-distorted thread pitch or diameter:

    Art collection of fasteners under subclass 937 in which either the nut
    thread pitch or its diameter is distorted after the nut has been applied to
    the bolt.


CLS 411/938
TXT Distorted thread:

    Art collection under art collection 929 in which the threads of the nut or
    bolt are during or after the application of the nut bent, crushed, or
    injured, so as to lock the nut and bolt from relative rotation.


CLS 411/939
TXT Longitudinal key:

    Art collection under art collection 929 in which a special structure is
    provided in the form of a key having its locking portion extending
    longitudinally of the bolt and biting or bending against the thread.


CLS 411/940
TXT Radial key or gib:

    Art collection under art collection 929 in which a special structure is
    provided in the form of a key or gib which is moved radially toward the
    bolt and engages its thread.


CLS 411/941
TXT Side clutch:

    Art collection under art collection 929 in which a special structure is
    provided in the form of a device, not an integral part of the nut or bolt,
    which clutched or bites the threads of the nuts or bolt.

    (1)     Note.  The locking action in most cases resemble that of the pawl
    and ratchet, except the part engaged by such device has no cooperating
    notches.


CLS 411/941.1
TXT Spring:

    Art collection under art collection 941 in which the device is in the form
    of a spring.


CLS 411/941.2
TXT Roller:

    Art collection under art collection 941 in which the device is in the form
    of a roller.


CLS 411/941.3
TXT Ball:

    Art collection under art collection 941 in which the device is in the form
    of a ball.


CLS 411/942
TXT Tangential key:

    Art collection under art collection 929 in which a special structure is
    provided in the form of a key in the nut which moves tangentially to the
    bolt and bites or binds against the threads thereof.


CLS 411/943
TXT Flexible washer:

    Art collection of fasteners under art collection 924 in which the fastener
    is provided with a washer secured to the bolt which washer has an
    interlastic portion turn against the nut after the nut is screwed on.


CLS 411/944
TXT Flexible key:

    Art collection under art collection 924 in which the nut and bolt are held
    together by a key which is bent after the nut is seated as to form a
    connection between notched or slots in the nut and bolt.


CLS 411/945
TXT Cross key:

    Art collection under are collection 924 in which the nut and bolt are lock
    together by a key which has its locking position lying transversely of the
    bolt.


CLS 411/946
TXT Spring-seated:

    Art collection under art collection 945 in which the key is forced to its
    seat by a spring.


CLS 411/947
TXT Elastic-gripping action:

    Art collection under art collection 924 in which the nut or a provided
    washer is composed wholely or partly of elastic material which grips the
    threaded or other part of the bolt.


CLS 411/948
TXT Longitudinal key:

    Art collection under art collection 924 in which the nut and bolt are
    locked together by a key whose locking portion extends longitudinally of
    the bolt.


CLS 411/949
TXT Ratchet and bolt-carried pawl:

    Art collection under art collection 924 in which a nut and bolt are
    interlocked by a pawl and ratchet mechanism which automatically locks the
    nut or bolt from movement in one direction but permits free movement in the
    other and further wherein the bolt carries or holds from rotation a pawl
    which interlocks with a ratchet teeth in the nut.


CLS 411/950
TXT Rachet and nut-carried pawl:

    Art collection under art collection 924 in which a nut and bolt are
    interlocked by a pawl and racket mechanism which automatically locks the
    nut or bolt from movement in one direction but permits free movement in the
    other and further wherein the nut carries the pawl which rotates with the
    nut and interlocks with ratchet teeth on the bolt.


CLS 411/951
TXT Flexible:

    Art collection under art collection 950 in which a flexible pawl interlocks
    with ratchet teeth carried by bolt or by a structure secured to the bolt.


CLS 411/952
TXT Pivoted.

    Art collection under art collection 950 in which the pawl carried by the
    nut moves on a pivot to lock and unlock.


CLS 411/953
TXT Washer-carried pawl:

    Art collection under art collection 924 in which a nut and bolt are
    interlocked by a pawl and rachet mechanism which automatically locks the
    nut or bolt from movement in one direction but permits free movement in the
    other and further wherein a washer is secured to the bolt and carries a
    pawl which interlocks with a special made ratchet surface of the nut.

    (1)     Note.  The corner of the ordinary nut are not regarded as forming a
    ratchet surface.


CLS 411/954
TXT Wedged slotted bolt:

    Art collection under art collection 924 in which the bolt has a slit or
    slot in which a wedge shape device moves to cause the bolt section to
    expand against the nut.

    (1)     Note.  The wedge type device may be removable from the bolt.


CLS 411/955
TXT LOCKED BOLTHEAD OR NUT:

    Art collection under the class definition wherein a bolthead or nut,
    hereinafter call a device, is fastened to an element, hereinafter called a
    substructure, so as to prevent rotation of the device.

    (1)     Note.  A fastening means may be part of the device or the
    substructure or it may include additional elements.


CLS 411/956
TXT Automatic base clutch:

    Art collection under art collection 955 wherein a face of the device
    adjacent the substructure is gripped thereto by the turning of the device
    into fastening position.


CLS 411/957
TXT Biting tooth:

    Art collection under art collection 956 wherein the gripping is affected by
    one or more projection deforming the surface of the substructure or the
    device.


CLS 411/958
TXT Coiled washer:

    Art collection under art collection 957 wherein the projections are carried
    by a washer which is not a closed annulus, surrounding the bolt shank.


CLS 411/959
TXT Bolt-or nut-carried:

    Art collection under art collection 957 wherein the projections are carried
    by the face of the device adjacent the substructure of the device, or by
    the bolt shank


CLS 411/960
TXT Friction:

    Art collection under art collection 956 wherein the device is held from
    rotation solely by the pressure between the substructure and the face of
    the device adjacent thereto.


CLS 411/961
TXT Pawl and ratchet:

    Art collection under art collection 956 wherein a resiliently urged dog
    locks the device against movement in one direction permitting free movement
    in another.


CLS 411/962
TXT Bolthead or nut-carried pawl:

    Art collection under art collection 961 wherein the dog is carried by the
    device and locks underneath the face adjacent the substructure.


CLS 411/963
TXT Yielding interlocking washer:

    Art collection under art collection 961 wherein the device has a tooth face
    adjacent the substructure which interlocks with a resilient washer carrying
    complimentary teeth.


CLS 411/964
TXT Detent:

    Art collection under art collection 956 wherein the interface of the device
    and either the substructure, or a washer mounted between the device and the
    substructure is provided with coacting means which are resiliently held
    interengage, but permit force relative turning in either direction.


CLS 411/965
TXT With retainer:

    Art collection under art collection 955 wherein the device has means other
    than cooperating threads on either the nut or substructure and the bolt to
    prevent its displacement from operative position on the substructure.


CLS 411/966
TXT Multiple (i.e., gang type):

    Art collection under art collection 965 wherein a plurality of devices are
    held by a single means.


CLS 411/967
TXT Deformable bolthead or nut:

    Art collection under art collection 965 wherein a portion of the device is
    changed in shape to contact the substructure and thereby prevent the
    separation of the device therefrom.


CLS 411/968
TXT Deformable base member:

    Art collection under art collection 965 wherein the substructure is changed
    into shape to prevent the separation of the device therefrom.


CLS 411/969
TXT Deformable retainer:

    Art collection under art collection 965 wherein in a separable holder is
    changed in shape to prevent the separation of the device from the
    substructure.


CLS 411/970
TXT Resilient retainer:

    Art collection under art collection 965 wherein a holder has yieldable part
    coacts with the substructure to prevent the separation of the device with
    the substructure.


CLS 411/971
TXT And side lock:

    Art collection under art collection 965 wherein a side surface of the
    device is locked to prevent rotation.


CLS 411/972
TXT Distorted:

    Art collection under art collection 955 wherein the device is locked by
    deforming a portion thereof to engaged the substructure.


CLS 411/973
TXT Gravity bolthead, nut or washer:

    Art collection under art collection 955 wherein (a) the device is heavier
    on one side than the other, or (b) the device is seated in or carried by a
    washer heavier on one side than on the other.


CLS 411/974
TXT Side lock:

    Art collection under art collection 955 wherein an exterior sides surface
    of the device is locked to prevent rotation.


CLS 411/975
TXT Rotatable washer:

    Art collection under art collection 974 having a washer which turns with
    the device as single piece, the locking action taking place between the
    washer and the substructure.


CLS 411/976
TXT Bent tongue-locked:

    Art collection under art collection 975 wherein the washer is locked to a
    side surface of the device and a nonelastic washer portion is deformed to
    engage a portion of the substructure.


CLS 411/977
TXT Pawl-locked:

    Art collection under art collection 975 wherein the washer and the
    substructure are interlocked by a resilient dog which locks the device in
    movement in one direction, permitting free movement in the other.


CLS 411/978
TXT Pawl and ratchet:

    Art collection under art collection 974 wherein the device is locked by a
    resilient dog against movement in one direction, permitting free movement
    in the other.


CLS 411/979
TXT Resilient:

    Art collection under art collection 974 wherein the locking means has a
    part which is yieldable to permit rotation of the device.


CLS 411/980
TXT Automatic:

    Art collection under art collection 979 wherein the locking mechanism
    engages and locks by the mere rotation of the device to the fastening
    position.


CLS 411/981
TXT Coiled washer:

    Art collection under art collection 980 wherein the device is locked by a
    washer coiled about the device and having a portion engaging a side surface
    of the device.


CLS 411/982
TXT Spring-tongued washer plate:

    Art collection under art collection 980 having a washer or plate, and one
    or more resilient dogs or tabs engaging the side surface of the device.


CLS 411/983
TXT Inelastic tongue:

    Art collection under art collection 974 having an element mounted between
    the inner face of the device and the substructure with a deformable portion
    bent against the side of the device after it is turned to the fastening
    position.

    (1)     Note.  The element must lock the device which is directly seated
    thereon.


CLS 411/984
TXT Longitudinal:

    Art collection under art collection 974 wherein the locking mechanism is
    brought to locking position by a final movement longitudinally of the bolt
    after the device is turned to the fastening position.

    (1)     Note.  The final locking position alone is considered whatever
    previous movement the device is received.


CLS 411/985
TXT Bolthead- or nut-held:

    Art collection under art collection 984 in which the locking mechanism is
    held in place by the device alone.


CLS 411/986
TXT Reversed bolthead or nut:

    Art collection under art collection 985 in which the device is locked by a
    backward, unfastening turn after moving to the fastening position.


CLS 411/987
TXT Side pin:

    Art collection under art collection 984 wherein a pin seated in the
    substructure is moved longitudinally of the bolts so as to stand against a
    side thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The side may have a groove for the reception of the pin.


CLS 411/988
TXT Spike-held locking plate:

    Art collection under art collection 984 in which the locking mechanism is
    of sheet form and is held against the device by a nail or other driven
    fastener extending into the substructure.


CLS 411/989
TXT Swinging:

    Art collection under art collection 984 wherein the locking mechanism is
    pivoted to a locking position against the side surface of the device.


CLS 411/990
TXT Washer tongue-held:

    Art collection under art collection 984 wherein the locking mechanism is
    held in position by an integral portion of a washer which, in locking
    position, extends above a portion of the device.


CLS 411/991
TXT Transversely sliding:

    Art collection under art collection 974 wherein the locking mechanism is
    finally reciprocated substantially parallel to the surface of the
    substructure after it is turned to the fastening position so as to lock a
    side surface of the device.


CLS 411/992
TXT Key, plate, or bar:

    Art collection under art collection 991 wherein the locking mechanism is a
    rod or thin member which passes astride or on one side of the device,
    parallel to the surface of the substructure.


CLS 411/993
TXT Bolthead- or nut-held:

    Art collection under art collection 992 wherein the locking mechanism is
    held in place by the device.


CLS 411/994
TXT Sliding washer:

    Art collection under art collection 992 wherein the locking mechanism is a
    washer which is reciprocated to locking position after the device is
    seated, the washer having a stop to lock the side surface of the device.


CLS 411/995
TXT Transversely swinging:

    Art collection under art collection 995 wherein the locking mechanism
    pivots on an axis parallel to the axis of the bolt so as to engage the side
    surface of the device.


CLS 411/996
TXT Transverse base-locking key:

    Art collection under art collection 955 wherein a key extends substantially
    parallel to the surface of the substructure between the base of the device
    and the substructure.


CLS 411/997
TXT Longitudinal fastener:

    Art collection under art collection 955 wherein means, parallel to the axis
    of the bolt, extends through the device and into the substructure to hold
    the device from rotation.


CLS 411/998
TXT WITH POSITIVE BOLT LOCK:

    Art collection under the class definition for fixedly, i.e.,
    nonfrictionally, fastening a bolt from rotation.


CLS 411/999
TXT WITH RETAINER (E.G., TETHER):

    Art collection under the class definition wherein a mass, other than the
    cooperating threads on the bolt-shank or the nut or substructure, is
    provided to prevent complete separation or loss of an assembled bolt, nut
    and substructure, as, e.g., by tethering means, or prevent their axial or
    endwise separation while permitting rotation.

    (1)     Note.  The retainer does not prevent the rotation of the bolt or
    nut and may even allow its complete withdrawal, the retainer merely
    preventing the bolt or nut from being lost by means as, e.g., a flexible
    connector.


CLS 412/
TTL BOOKBINDING:  PROCESS  AND APPARATUS

CLS 412/
TXT This is the residual class for processes and apparatuses for the
    manufacture of a book(*) its associated elements, including the assembly of
    any or all its elements to each other or to the book(*).  The term book(*)
    as well as its associated elements are defined in the Glossary of Terms.

    GLOSSARY OF TERMS



    The following words, terms, or phrases have been defined in an effort to
    maintain consistency as to their meaning and also to minimize space in the
    titles and definitions.  Each word, term, or phrase will be followed by an
    asterisk (*) to indicate that reference should be made to this glossary for
    its specific meaning.

    BOOK(*)

    A book consists of two or more sheets(*) secured together either:  (a) only
    at their margins; or (b) only at a restricted field within the margins; or
    (c) only at their margins and at a restricted field within the margins.
    When a margin of one sheet is attached to a margin of another sheet(*) to
    obtain in effect a single sheet(*) or greater area, the resulting article
    is still regarded as a sheet(*) rather than a book.  A folded sheet is not
    considered to be a book.  Book and bound book are synonomous terms and in
    both, a covering member has not yet been applied.  See this Glossary for
    the definition of the term completed book(*).

    BACK(*)

    The back is that portion of a book formed where and when the sections of it
    are united by sewing, stitching(*), or stapling.  The term back is
    sometimes erroneously used to describe the portion of the outer covering
    member which encloses the back, but the term spine(*) is preferred for this
    portion of the covering member.

    BACKING(*)

    The book making operation referring to the step for making the back(*) of
    the book(*), wherein the back(*) has been previously sewn and glued,
    whereby the back edge of the sheets(*), signatures(*), quires(*), etc.,
    which make up the book(*) are splayed outwards from the center of the
    book(*) and gives the back(*) a convex shape.  This adds to the permanence
    of the back and provides an abutment for the boards in the book(*) covering
    member.  Rounding and backing(*) are considered synonymous for purposes of
    the terms of this Glossary.

    COMPLETED BOOK(*)

    A book(*) which has had its covering member attached.

    CRASH(*)

    A loose weave binding cloth which is generally applied with adhesive to the
    back(*) of a bound book(*) as a reinforcing material prior to the
    application of the book(*) covering member.

    END SHEETS(*)

    The sheet(*) of paper at the front(*) and end of a book(*) overlaying the
    inner sides of the boards of the covering member serving with the
    linings(*) to secure the book(*) to its associated covering member.

    FRONT(*)

    The first page or first sheet(*) of a book(*).

    FREE EDGE(*)

    The edge or edges of the bound book(*) which are not involved with the
    fastening together of the sheets(*), etc., into the book(*).  The free edge
    is opposite the back(*) e.g., where the binding, stitching(*), sewing, etc.
    is located; the other edges are known as the head, i.e., the top edge and
    foot or bottom edge also known as the tail.

    JACKET

    A protective structure, e.g., dust cover, assembled to but not fastened to
    a completed book(*).

    LINING(*)

    The material used for or process of reinforcing the back(*) of a bound
    book(*) by gluing a strip of the material to the back(*) of the book.

    PAGE(*)

    A side of a sheet(*).

    QUIRE(*)

    A term of art meaning 24 sheets(*) of paper.

    SHEET(*)

    A body, usually paper, having two parallel surfaces both dimensions of
    which are large in comparison with the third dimension of the body.  Sheets
    can be printed on or blank.

    SIGNATURE(*)

    A book(*) section, composed of a plurality of sheets having a common fold;
    thus, the term signature is usually used synonymously in this class with
    sheets(*) and quires(*) to indicate printed or unprinted matter which is
    being fastened together at the edges to form a bound book(*).

    SPINE(*)

    The hollow or portion of the covering member which connects the boards.

    STITCHING(*)

    The process of fastening together sheets(*), signatures(*), or quires(*) at
    one edge thereof to form a bound book(*). Usually this is done by sewing
    with needle and thread, but this may be done by a similar fastening
    operation.

    (1)     Note.  The terms making and manufacturing appearing in the glossary
    terms, titles, or definitions of this class are considered synonymous and
    may be used interchangeably.


CLS 412/1
TXT PROCESS:

    Process under the class definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclass 395 for methods of making matchbooks.

    281,    Books, Strips, and Leaves, subclasses 3+ for books and leaves, per
    se; and subclasses 15+ for books, per se.


CLS 412/2
TXT Of making multiple books(*) from a single book(*):

    Process under subclass 1 for making a plurality of smaller books(*) by
    dividing a single larger book into smaller sections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    281,    Books, Strips, and Leaves, subclasses 16+ for multiple books, per
    se.


CLS 412/3
TXT Of making a case(*):

    Process under subclass 1 for making a paper, board, cloth, or leather
    covering member, formed by machine, intended to be fastened to a book(*).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for apparatuses for making a case(*).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    281,    Books, Strips, and Leaves, subclasses 29+ for covers, per se, in a
    book.


CLS 412/4
TXT Of applying a cover to a book(*):

    Process under subclass 1 for assembling a book(*) or a plurality of unbound
    sheets(*), signatures(*), or quires(*), etc., to a paper, board, cloth, or
    leather covering member.

    (1)     Note.  The assembly is permanent, e.g., it should involve some form
    of permanent fastening, such as stitching(*), gluing, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for apparatuses for applying a cover.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses for methods of molding plastic material.

    281,    Books, Strips, and Leaves, subclasses 29+ for covers, per se.


CLS 412/5
TXT Casing in:

    Processes under subclass 4 for assembling a book(*) to a paper, board,
    cloth, or leather covering member previously formed by machine.

    (1)     Note.  The assembly is permanent, e.g., it should involve some form
    of permanent fastening, such as stitching(*), gluing, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21+,    for apparatus for casing in.


CLS 412/6
TXT Of edge  fastening:

    Processes under subclass 1 for fastening together a plurality of sheets(*),
    signatures(*), or quires(*) along one edge.

    (1)     Note.  The fastening is usually by stitching(*), gluing, or similar
    methods and usually is permanent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33+,    for apparatuses for performing an edge binding operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    281,    Books, Strips, and Leaves, subclasses 21+ for bindings, per se, of
    a book.


CLS 412/7
TXT Marginally perforated sheet(*):

    Process under subclass 6 wherein the sheets(*), signatures(*), or quires(*)
    are provided with an aperture adjacent an edge thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for apparatuses for edge binding a marginally perforated sheet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    140,    Wireworking, subclasses 92.3+ for processes including the
    interlacing of a rotated helix with marginal perforations of a plurality of
    sheets.


CLS 412/8
TXT Of adhesive binding:

    Process under subclass 1 for fastening elements of a book(*) by the use of a

    sticky substance such as glue, cement, or paste.

    (1)     Note.  The elements can constitute such structures as sheets(*),
    signatures(*), quires(*), etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for apparatus for edge binding utilizing adhesive tape, lace, or
    ribbon.

    37,     for an apparatus for an edge binding operation just using adhesive
    material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for laminating operations per se not specialized to
    book making; especially subclasses 202 and 216 for pasting fabric coverings
    to boards with the edges turned over the boards.

    281,    Books, Strips, and Leaves, subclasses 21+ for bindings in books,
    per se.


CLS 412/9
TXT APPARATUS:

    Apparatus under the class definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclass 394 for apparatus for making matchbooks.

    81,     Tools, appropriate subclasses for vises intended to be used in
    making books.

    281,    Books, Strips, and Leaves, subclasses 3+ for books and leaves, per
    se; and subclasses 15+ for books, per se.


CLS 412/10
TXT Padding press:

    Apparatus under subclass 9 for assembling and holding a plurality of
    sheets(*) under pressure so that one edge of a stack of the sheets can be
    coated with adhesive.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22+,    for presses utilized in a finishing operation for making a book.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses for presses intended to be used in
    making books.


CLS 412/11
TXT With control means responsive to sensed condition:

    Apparatus under subclass 9 provided with means capable of altering an
    operation of the apparatus in direct response to sensing means which can
    perceive a characteristic or change in a characteristic of either the
    apparatus or of work being operated upon by the apparatus.


CLS 412/12
TXT And randomly actuated stopping or disabling means:

    Apparatus under subclass 11 further provided with means which automatically
    stops or interrupts an operation of the apparatus or a portion thereof upon
    the sensing of an abnormal or unpredicted occurrence of an event,
    condition, or state which can occur during any portion of the operation of
    the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  A typical abnormal condition could be a misfeeding of a
    workpiece, i.e., the workpiece does not properly register, or the workpiece
    is not of proper dimensions required, etc.


CLS 412/13
TXT With programmed, cyclic, or time responsive control means:

    Apparatus under subclass 9 wherein control means is provided with either
    (a) means for storing coded instructions or other data necessary to
    regulate an operation of the apparatus, (b) means repetitively regulating a
    sequence of operational steps performed in or by the apparatus, or (c)
    means for determining the time at which an operation occurs or length of
    time taken to perform such an operation in or by the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  The type of cyclic control under (b) above to be found
    herein, includes limit switch arrangements of the interlock type which
    control the sequence of operation based on the movement of apparatus
    elements to specific locations, e.g., the closing or opening of a door, etc.


CLS 412/14
TXT With measuring, testing, or inspection means:

    Apparatus under subclass 9 wherein means are provided with either (a)
    determines a dimension, quantity, or capacity of a characteristic or
    property of the apparatus, a part thereof or material therein, (b)
    determine the presence or existence of a characteristic or property of the
    apparatus, a part thereof or material therein, or (c) examines or verifies
    a characteristic or property of the apparatus, a part thereof or material
    therein.

    (1)     Note.  The measuring, testing, or inspecting means of this subclass
    may also provide a visual, audible, or other type of signal or indicator or
    a permanent record of the determined dimension, quantity, capacity,
    characteristic property, or examination or verification.


CLS 412/15
TXT Repair means:

    Apparatus under subclass 9 specifically designed for reclaiming or
    rebuilding damaged books(*) or elements of books.

    (1)     Note.  The reclamation or rebuilding of books(*) includes the
    rebinding of books.


CLS 412/16
TXT With cutter:

    Apparatus under subclass 9 provided with means for severing some portion of
    a book(*) or elements thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The cutter or severing means provided for in this subclass
    is typically used to trim pages or covering members, or perform similar
    operations on other elements of a book(*).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses for means for perforating sheets,
    preparatory to binding them, and saw means used in notching edges of sheets
    preparatory to binding.

    144,    Woodworking, for a clamp to be used in making a book or for means
    for notching the edges of sheets preparatory to binding them.

    408,    Cutting by the Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 72+
    for the combination of drilling means with a work support used in making
    books.


CLS 412/17
TXT Case maker:

    Apparatus under subclass 9 especially adapted for making a paper, board,
    cloth, or leather covering member intended to fastened to a book(*).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    281,    Books, Strips, and Leaves, subclasses 29+ for covers, per se.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 383+ for apparatus for reshaping a plastic sheet or web.


CLS 412/18
TXT Finishing apparatus:

    Apparatus under subclass 9 for performing an operation upon a previously
    assembled book(*) and its paper, board, cloth, or leather covering member
    or fastening together a book and a paper, board, cloth, or leather covering
    member.

    (1)     Note.  The typical operation, provided for herein, would be
    attaching a protective jacket(*), or decorating the pages(*).


CLS 412/19
TXT Cover applier:

    Apparatus under subclass 18 for fastening together a bound book(*) and a
    paper, board, cloth, or leather covering member intended to be fastened to
    a book.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    281,    Books, Strips, and Leaves, subclasses 29+ for covers, per se, of a
    book.


CLS 412/20
TXT And means simultaneously binding edge:

    Apparatus under subclass 19 wherein the book(*) is composed of a plurality
    of loose sheets(*), and further wherein means are provided to fasten the
    sheets, etc., at one edge and to apply a paper, board, cloth, or leather
    covering member in a single step.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33+,    for apparatuses for performing an edge binding operation.


CLS 412/21
TXT Means for casing-in:

    Apparatus under subclass 19 for fastening a paper, board, cloth, or leather
    covering member made by machine to a book(*).


CLS 412/22
TXT Presser or creaser:

    Apparatus under subclass 18 for performing the step of placing a book(*)
    with its fastened paper, board, cloth, or leather covering means cover(*)
    in a press or putting a crease along the hinge line of a paper, board,
    cloth, or leather covering means.

    (1)     Note.  The presses of this subclass are designed to set the applied
    glue to remove air pockets, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses for presses intended to be used in
    making books.


CLS 412/23
TXT Press board:

    Apparatus under subclass 22 provided with a rigid planar body having a
    first plane side and a second plane side, the first plane side being
    capable of physically engaging a flat area of a book(*), to transmit
    pressure applied to the second plane side through the planar body to the
    flat area of the book.

    (1)     Note.  The pressure being applied to the second plane side and
    being transmitted through the body is produced by a press apparatus and is
    intended to aid in properly forming the finished book(*) or to aid in the
    drying of a book after a casing-in operation.


CLS 412/24
TXT Jacketing means:

    Apparatus under subclass 18 specifically designed for applying a jacket(*).


CLS 412/25
TXT Book working apparatus:

    Apparatus under subclass 9 specifically adapted for operating upon a
    book(*) which has been secured together at one edge.

    (1)     Note.  This and intended subclasses are proper for apparatus for
    performing various operations on a book(*) prior to the application or
    assembly with a covering member.


CLS 412/26
TXT Reinforcement applying means:

    Apparatus under subclass 25 specifically adapted for assembling a member to
    the book(*) designed to give additional strength to the back(*) of the book.


CLS 412/27
TXT Lining(*) or crash(*) applying means:

    Apparatus under subclass 26 specifically adapted to apply lining(*) or
    crash(*) to the back(*) of the book(*).


CLS 412/28
TXT End sheets(*) attaching means:

    Apparatus under subclass 25 for fastening an end sheet(*) to a book(*).


CLS 412/29
TXT Smashing or nipping means:

    Apparatus under subclass 25 for expelling the air from between individual
    sheets of an edge bound book and for returning the book to a uniform size
    and thickness after an edge binding operation.

    (1)     Note.  The term nipping is used synonymomously with smashing in the
    book making art.


CLS 412/30
TXT Backing(*) means:

    Apparatus under subclass 25 for performing a backing(*) operation.


CLS 412/31
TXT Headbanding means:

    Apparatus under subclass 25 for applying decorative strips to the head and
    foot of a back(*) of an edge bound book(*).

    (1)     Note.  The head and foot of a back(*), respectively, are the top
    edge and the bottom edge of the back.  See in the glossary of terms, the
    definition of free edge(*), for a further description of head and foot
    relating to book making.


CLS 412/32
TXT Free edge(*) finishing means, e.g., marbling, gliding, etc:

    Apparatus under subclass 25 for working on the free edges(*) of a book(*).


CLS 412/33
TXT Edge binding apparatus:

    Apparatus under subclass 9 for fastening together along a common edge, a
    plurality of sheets(*), signatures(*), or quires(*).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    144,    Woodworking, for a clamp to be used in making a book or for means
    for notching the edges of sheets preparatory to binding them.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, appropriate subclasses and
    particularly subclasses 19+ for apparatus for assembling book leaves or
    signatures combined with means to apply a staple, etc.; and subclasses 99+
    for feeding preassembled book leaves or signatures combined with means to
    apply a staple, etc.

    270,    Sheet-Material Associating, for means for uniting leaves together
    into books by pasting, stapling, or stitching, provided there is included
    some means for folding the leaves or associating the leaves for signatures.
    This class (270) also provides for means for associating leaves or
    signatures and folding leaves in the making of books.

    281,    Books, Strips, and Leaves, subclasses 21+ for binding, per se, in
    books.


CLS 412/34
TXT Deformable strip applier:

    Apparatus under subclass 33 wherein the sheets(*), signatures(*), or
    quires(*) are fastened together by a bendable striplike-clamping member.


CLS 412/35
TXT Sewing means:

    Apparatus under subclass 33 wherein the sheets(*), etc., are fastened
    together using a needle and thread.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 21+ for apparatus for sewing books.


CLS 412/36
TXT Lace, ribbon, or adhesive tape applier:

    Apparatus under subclass 33 wherein the sheets(*), signatures(*), or
    quires(*) are fastened together either by (a) a lace or ribbon passed
    through notches or grooves cut across the thickness of the back(*) of the
    sheets, etc., or (b) by using a strip of adhesive tape applied to the back
    of the sheets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for means to apply a
    coating, usually an adhesive, in the making of books.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for laminating operations, per se, not specialized
    to bookmaking; and especially subclasses 461+ for apparatus for pasting
    fabric coverings to boards with the edges turned over the boards.


CLS 412/37
TXT Adhesive applier:

    Apparatus under subclass 33 wherein the sheets(*), signatures(*), or
    quires(*) are fastened together by an application of an adhesive material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for means for applying a
    coating, usually an adhesive, for the making of books.


CLS 412/38
TXT Perforated sheet(*) binder:

    Apparatus under subclass 33 specially adapted for applying a fastener to
    sheets(*), signatures(*), or quires(*) having a fastener receiving hole
    punched through their thickness dimension in an area other than the bound
    edge of the sheets, signatures or quires.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses for perforating sheets, preparatory
    to binding them, and saw means used in notching edges of sheets prepatory
    to binding.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 72+ for
    the combination of drilling means with a work support, used in the making
    of books.


CLS 412/39
TXT Wire comb applier:

    Apparatus under subclass 38 specially adapted for applying a fastener in
    the form of a thin integral toothed strip made of metallic material
    designed to be temporarily deformed for insertion through the fastener
    receiving hole of the sheets(*), signatures(*), or quires(*).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    140,    Wireworking, subclasses 92.3+ for apparatus for interlacing a
    rotated helix with marginal perforations of a plurality of sheets.


CLS 412/40
TXT Plastic comb applier:

    Apparatus under subclass 38 specially adapted for applying a fastener in
    the form of a thin integral toothed strip made of plastic material designed
    to be temporarily deformed for insertion through the fastener receiving
    hole of the sheets(*), signatures(*), or quires(*).


CLS 412/41
TXT And heat sealer:

    Apparatus under subclass 40 wherein the fastener is composed of
    thermoplastic material and further wherein the apparatus is provided with
    means capable of melting a portion of said thermoplastic material.


CLS 412/42
TXT Singular ring or ringlike element applier: Apparatus under subclass 38
    specially adapted for applying a fastener in the form of a single annular
    element limited for insertion into a single fastener receiving hole of the
    sheets(*), signatures(*), or quires(*).

    (1)     Note.  The fasteners of this subclass are restricted such that only
    one fastener can bind only one hole per fastener so that a multiple hole
    set of sheets(*), signatures(*), or quires(*) will require multiple
    fasteners to complete the binding operation.


CLS 412/43
TXT Singular post or postlike element applier: Apparatus under subclass 38
    specially adapted for applying a fastener in the form of a single elongated
    rodlike element limited for insertion into a single fastener receiving hole
    of the sheets(*), signatures(*), or quires(*).

    (1)     Note.  The fasteners of this subclass are restricted such that only
    one fastener can bind only one hole per fastener so that a multiple hole
    set of sheets(*), signatures(*), or quires(*) will require multiple
    fasteners to complete the binding operation.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS

    The following subclasses are collections of disclosures pertaining to
    various aspects of the book binding art which do not form appropriate bases
    for subclasses in the previous classification, i.e., subclasses higher in
    the schedule.  Documents are placed in these subclasses based on their
    disclosure other than or independent from their claims or claimed
    disclosure and in no instance do they represent the entire extent of the
    prior art or disclosure for the specified aspect.


CLS 412/900
TXT ACTIVATING PREVIOUSLY APPLIED ADHESIVE:

    Apparatus for performing a bookbinding operation which utilizes means which
    activate (through heat, wetting, or etc.) an adhesive which has been
    previously applied to one of the elements being joined together.


CLS 412/901
TXT PRESSURE SENSITIVE ADHESIVE:

    Apparatus for performing a bookbinding operation involving the use of
    elements which have had a pressure sensitive adhesive applied to them prior
    to the operation.


CLS 412/902
TXT HEATING AND PRESSING:

    Apparatus for performing a bookbinding operation which involves the
    application of heat and pressure to an element or completed book(*).


CLS 413/
TTL SHEET METAL CONTAINER MAKING

CLS 413/
TXT This Class contains:



    1.      Both apparatus and the process for affixing a sheet metal closure
    to a receptacle.

    2.      Machines and processes for shaping a metal lid and for performing
    the attendant operations for preparing such lid for final assembly to a
    receptacle.

    3.      The process and apparatus for forming or partial forming sheet
    metal into tubular stock to be used in container making.

    4.      Container subcombination making, per se, such as pull tab (pull
    ring) making, tear tab making plus assembly via fastener (rivet) to one
    another.

    GLOSSARY



    CONTAINER

    For purposes of this class is a closed can (e.g., soft drink, beer), full
    or empty.

    RECEPTACLE

    A tube closed at one end (e.g., drinking cup).

    CLOSURE

    A lid, bottle cap, the top of a can.

    PULL TAB

    A member operated by the users fingers and used to open the container.

    TEAR TAB

    The metal torn when the pull tab is activated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 700+ for the generic subclasses of
    assembly and/or metal shaping using plural diverse apparatus; and
    subclasses 700+ for means to assembly or disassemble.

    53,     Package Making, appropriate subclasses for the filling and closing
    of a receptacle.  Class 53 accepts the filling and closing of a receptacle
    in a pressure modifying atmosphere, in subclasses 79+, 266.1+, 403+, 420+,
    432+, and 485+.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 362+ for the body forming processes.
    See also subclasses 199+ for roller tool.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 54+ for receptacle closing that involves a
    compression of the receptacle or contents.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclass for means used to coat any
    part of the container.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    203, 218, and 465 to form a tube by edge joining one piece blanks.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, especially subclasses 200+ for closures for
    bottles or jars.

    220,    Receptacles, appropriate subclasses such as 200+ for closures, per
    se.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 101+ for the welding of a tube
    along its side seam.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 5.5+ for
    container end structure, per se.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes, for
    method of bonding plastic containers.

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclasses used in the coating of a
    container.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper;  or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, appropriate subclass if the can body is nonmetallic.


CLS 413/1
TXT METHOD:

    Process under the class definition for forming a complete sheet metal
    container or part of one, a complete sheet metal closure or part of one.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 374+ for open topped receptacle making
    which are intended to be closed or capped subsequently.


CLS 413/2
TXT Assembling receptacle with closure:

    Process under subclass 1 for attaching or uniting an end closure to an open
    topped container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26+,    for the apparatus for applying the closure to the receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 285+ for closing a package.


CLS 413/3
TXT Including work feeding:

    Process under subclass 2 wherein either the end closure or the open topped
    container is transported or conveyed to an assembly station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45+,    for the apparatus to feed closure or receptacle.


CLS 413/4
TXT End joint forming:

    Process under subclass 2 specific to the connection between the open topped
    container and the end closure.


CLS 413/5
TXT Metal to nonmetal:

    Process under subclass 4 wherein either the end closure or the open topped
    container is made of a nonmetallic material and the other element is
    metallic.


CLS 413/6
TXT Rolling:

    Process under subclass 4 including curling overlapping portions of the end
    closure and the open ended container into a toroidal bead that lies
    adjacent the upstanding wall portion of the said container to thereby form
    a fluid tight joint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31+,    for apparatus using a roller die to apply the closure to a
    receptacle.


CLS 413/7
TXT Applying sealant:

    Process under subclass 4 including the step of applying a sealing material,
    liquid or preform, between the end closure and the open topped container to
    form a tight joint therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19+,    for method of applying a liquid coating material to a closure.

    34+,    for the apparatus for applying the closure to the receptacle with
    means to apply a gasket or sealant.

    58+,    for the apparatus to apply a sealing means to the closure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclass 316 for a process of static sealing where the seal is
    formed in place (i.e., in situ).


CLS 413/8
TXT Forming or treating metallic closure preform:

    Process under subclass 1 wherein a previously shaped metallic component of
    an end closure is adhered to or assembled with another element, or is
    coated, impregnated or molded upon; or is otherwise conditioned to make it
    more usable as an end closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for apparatus for forming or treating closures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 700+ for the method of manufacture.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 239+ for shaping a plastic member.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 299+ for coating a container closure
    with pretreatment.


CLS 413/9
TXT By joining with preformed gasket or liner:

    Process under subclass 8 wherein a previously shaped seal or covering
    material is assembled with the metallic component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for the method of assembling the closure to the receptacle by end
    joint forming using a sealant.

    34,     for the apparatus for applying the closure to the receptacle with
    means to apply a gasket or sealant.

    58+,    for the apparatus to apply a sealing means to the closure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclass 316 for a process of static sealing where the seal is
    formed in place (i.e., in situ).


CLS 413/10
TXT Forming means to deter or detect tampering (e.g., child proof cap):

    Process under subclass 8 for fabricating on or attaching to the end closure
    either means preventing easy disengagement of the closure from the
    receptacle or means signalling such disengagement has occurred or has been
    attempted.


CLS 413/11
TXT Reshaping previously used crown cap:

    Process under subclass 8 wherein previously used end closure having a
    fluted and flared skirt is recycled by deforming it into its original shape
    thus enabling reuse.


CLS 413/12
TXT Fabricating or assembling member having frangible portion (e.g., tear tab
    forming):

    Process under subclass 8 for making a member having a weakened breakable
    portion thereabout in the end closure, or for attaching a member containing
    such a weakened portion to the end closure to thereby allow access to the
    containers when the weakened portion is broken.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for apparatus used in forming score lines about a cylindrical can
    body.

    67+,    for apparatus used in forming frangible zones in container lids.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, cross-reference art collection 917 for a seal including a
    frangible feature.


CLS 413/13
TXT Forming user lip guard:

    Processes under subclass 12 including providing a edge or portion to
    protect the user's mouth against injury from any rough edge produced when
    the weakened portion is broken.


CLS 413/14
TXT Assembling pull tab (e.g., ring) to tear tab:

    Process under subclass 12 wherein an actuator is secured to the member, by
    a element that is extending through an aperture in either the actuator or
    the member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66,     for apparatus for uniting pull tab to closure.


CLS 413/15
TXT Forming discontinuous frangible fracture line (e.g., push-in type with
    hinged tear tab):

    Process under subclass 12 for fabricating a member having a weakened
    peripheral portion which extends about only a portion of the member and
    wherein the container is opened by pushing the member downwardly.


CLS 413/16
TXT Having pull tab and hinged tear tab:

    Process under subclass 15 wherein the member is joined to the closure
    through a nonfranging section about which the member swings and wherein a
    manually actuated element is provided for effecting the franging and
    pivoting of the member.


CLS 413/17
TXT Scoring to form fracture line:

    Process under subclass 15 including forming a line of fracture by a scoring
    step which thins or partially cuts through the metal closure.


CLS 413/18
TXT Coating:

    Process under subclass 8 including the step of coating all or part of a
    closure, before or after forming, with a metal or nonmetal coating to aid
    in the assembly of the closure to the receptacle or to inhance its sealing
    capacity.


CLS 413/19
TXT Applying liquid to form gasket or liner:

    Process under subclass 18 wherein the metallic component is contacted with
    a liquid which adheres to the component and forms a seal or covering layer
    thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60+,    for apparatus that contacts the closure with a liquid seal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclass 316 for a process of static sealing where the seal is
    formed in place (i.e., in situ).


CLS 413/20
TXT By spraying:

    Process under subclass 19 wherein a stream of the liquid is projected
    against the metallic component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for apparatus to spray a liquid seal onto a closure.


CLS 413/21
TXT Solder applying:

    Process under subclass 8 wherein a fusable metal is applied to the metallic
    component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for apparatus to apply solder to the closure.


CLS 413/22
TXT Making or applying pouring spout or conical neck:

    Process under subclass 8 wherein the closure is formed with a converging
    neck or integral pouring spout.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for apparatus to assemble spout with container.


CLS 413/23
TXT Forming thread:

    Process under subclass 8 wherein a helical screw is formed on a skirt
    portion of a metallic end closure.


CLS 413/24
TXT Forming lug (e.g., twist-off cap):

    Process under subclass 8 wherein a inwardly directed projection is formed
    on a skirt portion of a metallic end closure.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains the "twist-off cap" type closure
    wherein the lug engages a thread or other lug formed on the contiguous
    receptacle.


CLS 413/25
TXT Making pull tab gripping means (ring end):

    Process under subclass 1 for forming the ring means used to pull a tear tab
    off a can top to open the can.

    (1)     Note.  The rivet that fixes the ring means to the tear tab may be
    found here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66,     for apparatus that unites a pull tab to closure.


CLS 413/26
TXT APPARATUS APPLYING CLOSURE TO RECEPTACLE:

    Apparatus under the class definition for placing either the top or bottom
    or both on the rectilinear can body in a manner that creates an air tight
    seal within the container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for method of assembling receptacle with closure.


CLS 413/27
TXT Seamer:

    Apparatus under subclass 26 wherein the end closure receptacle are united
    by means which folds an overlapping portion of the periphery of the end
    closure an edge of the receptacle body upon each other, to thereby form an
    air tight seal between the closure and the receptacle.


CLS 413/28
TXT No workpiece no seam type:

    Apparatus under subclass 27 wherein means are provided to stop the seaming
    operation if either the lid or receptacle does not arrive at the seaming
    station in time to be united with the other.


CLS 413/29
TXT With lubricating means:

    Apparatus under subclass 27 wherein a means is provided to ease the
    friction between the moving parts of the seaming apparatus or the parts
    being seamed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    184,    Lubrication, subclasses 14+ for lubricators.


CLS 413/30
TXT Progressive seaming stations:

    Apparatus under subclass 27 wherein the seaming is accomplished in
    successive operations in at least two separate, spaced locations.


CLS 413/31
TXT Roller die:

    Apparatus under subclass 17 wherein the seaming is done by a cylindrical
    means that rolls about the can lip periphery during the seaming operation.


CLS 413/32
TXT Irregular can:

    Apparatus under subclass 31 wherein the can is not round in cross section.


CLS 413/33
TXT Pattern cam:

    Apparatus under subclass 32 wherein the cylindrical means is constrained to
    follow a noncircular path approximating the shape of the finished can by a
    contoured cam.


CLS 413/34
TXT Gasket or seal applying means:

    Apparatus under subclass 31 wherein a means is provided for applying a
    sealing means between the can body and lid so that the lid and body are
    seamed together in an air tight.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for method of applying sealant.

    58+,    for apparatus that applies seal to  closure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclass 630 for a static contact seal for other than an internal
    combustion engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable having an installation,
    removal, assembly, disassembly, or repair feature.


CLS 413/35
TXT Lid feeding means:

    Apparatus under subclass 31 wherein said seamer and roller die means are
    provided for delivering can ends to the joining means separately from the
    receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45+,    for closure or receptacle feed.


CLS 413/36
TXT Rectilinear movement of seam head:

    Apparatus under subclass 31 wherein the cylinder means moves in a straight
    line joining the end closure to the receptacle during the seaming operation.


CLS 413/37
TXT Can holder or lock:

    Apparatus under subclass 31 wherein means are provided to clamp the
    receptacle in a fixed position during the seaming operation.


CLS 413/38
TXT Portably mounted or attached seamer:

    Apparatus under subclass 31 wherein said seamer can be easily moved from
    one point of use to another.  (This is not a hand held tool but a movable
    one.)


CLS 413/39
TXT Hand actuated:

    Apparatus under subclass 31 wherein manually operated means is used to move
    the cylindrical means to perform the seaming operation.


CLS 413/40
TXT Roller spreader:

    Apparatus under subclass 31 wherein plural cylinder means are provided and
    additional means are provided for moving the cylindrical means towards and
    away from each other so that the work to be seamed can be inserted or
    withdrawn from the apparatus.


CLS 413/41
TXT Cam actuated:

    Apparatus under subclass 40 wherein said cylinder means are moved radially
    outwardly by the action of a cam.


CLS 413/42
TXT Fluted chuck:

    Apparatus under subclass 27 wherein said seamer is a cylindrical member
    having longitudinal slits there in to facilitate its placement over the
    means to be seamed thus enabling the said means to be rotated and effect
    the seaming operation.


CLS 413/43
TXT Reciprocating die:

    Apparatus under subclass 27 wherein the seaming tool has at least one die
    that moves linearly in and out of engagement with the can body and can end
    to help forge a seam between the body and end.


CLS 413/44
TXT Geneva drive mechanism:

    Apparatus under subclass 27 wherein said seamer is actuated by a geneva
    gear.


CLS 413/45
TXT Closure or receptacle feed:

    Apparatus under subclass 26 wherein the closure or receptacle is fed to the
    station where the two are united to transport either an end closure or a
    receptacle to a station where the two are united.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for the method of feeding.


CLS 413/46
TXT Magnetic feed:

    Apparatus under subclass 45 wherein the feed is done by a magnet that
    drives or secures one or more components and carries it to the joining
    station.


CLS 413/47
TXT Storage means (e.g., magazine):

    Apparatus under subclass 45 wherein the closures or can bodies are retained
    in a storage means which supplies the transport means.


CLS 413/48
TXT Dropper type:

    Apparatus under subclass 47 wherein said storage means comprise mechanism
    that causes the closure or can body to free fall either directly into the
    uniting station or onto transport means which moves it into the uniting
    station.


CLS 413/49
TXT And pusher:

    Apparatus under subclass 48 wherein actuation is initiated by a force
    causing the lid or body to leave the magazine and free fall or slide a
    short distance to the joining area.

    (1)     Note.  Reciprocating means is provided for engaging the lower most
    end closure or receptacle in the storage means to remove the same from said
    storage means.


CLS 413/50
TXT And turret:

    Apparatus under subclass 48 wherein said dropper type storage means is
    constructed in a circular feeder fashion to release the lids or bodies
    after a turning indexing step to deliver the components to the joining
    station.


CLS 413/51
TXT Including pusher:

    Apparatus under subclass 47 wherein said storage magazine supply means has
    a forcing means therein to move a component from the magazine to the
    joining station.


CLS 413/52
TXT Closure and receptacle feed:

    Apparatus under subclass 45 wherein both the receptacle and the closure are
    transported to a point where both are joined together.


CLS 413/53
TXT APPARATUS FORMING POURING SPOUT OR ASSEMBLING SPOUT WITH CONTAINER:

    Apparatus under the class definition for shaping or otherwise fabricating a
    material flow guide normally used in pouring content material from a
    container or for uniting such a material flow guide with a container.


CLS 413/54
TXT APPARATUS UNITING KEY TO CONTAINER OR CLOSURE:

    Apparatus under the class definition having means for assembling a
    separable tear strip operator with either the container or the end closure
    for the container, said operator having a slot formed therein into which a
    portion of the tear strip is inserted.

    (1)     Note.  This type of tear strip operator usually operates by rolling
    the tear strip up into a wound mass as the operator is rolled around the
    periphery of the can.


CLS 413/55
TXT APPARATUS SCORING CONTAINER BODY:

    Apparatus under the class definition wherein means are provided for forming
    a pair of axially spaced, parallel cuts on the tubular portion of the can
    body which cuts substantially circumscribe the can body and define a tear
    strip therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12+,    for the method of tear tab forming.

    67+,    for apparatus to form a frangible zone on the closure.


CLS 413/56
TXT APPARATUS TO FORM CONTAINER CLOSURE (LID):

    Apparatus under the class definition for fabricating or partially
    fabricating a metallic end closure to be used with a receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8+,     for method to form or treat metallic closures.


CLS 413/57
TXT Having means to apply solid solder:

    Apparatus under subclass 56 wherein means are provided for assembling an
    easily fusible metal, e.g., solder, with the end closure while said fusible
    metal is in the solid state.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for method of solder applying.


CLS 413/58
TXT Having means to apply seal or liner:

    Apparatus under subclass 56 including means to assemble a gasket or similar
    sealing or lining member with an end closure or for applying a fluent
    sealing or lining medium to said end closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9       and 19+, for method of forming with or applying gasket or liner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclass 129.1 for sealing gasket.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclass 630 for a static contact seal for other than an internal
    combustion engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable having an installation,
    removal, assembly, disassembly, or repair feature.


CLS 413/59
TXT Having heating means:

    Apparatus under subclass 58 having means to elevate the temperature of the
    end closure assembly or of some component thereof.


CLS 413/60
TXT By means contacting closure with liquid:

    Apparatus under subclass 58 wherein said member brings the lid into contact
    with a liquid coating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19+,    for method of applying liquid to form a gasket or liner

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 200+ for applying a liquid to a
    workpiece.


CLS 413/61
TXT By spraying:

    Apparatus under subclass 60 having means to project a stream of liquid
    against the end closure.


CLS 413/62
TXT And metal deforming means:

    Apparatus under subclass 58 wherein additional means are provided to bend
    or otherwise distort a metallic component of the end closure, or some
    component thereof.


CLS 413/63
TXT With seal cutting means:

    Apparatus under subclass 58 including means to sever one portion of a
    sealing or lining medium from a source of stock material.


CLS 413/64
TXT And means to feed a web of material:

    Apparatus under subclass 63 wherein the stock material is supplied to the
    severing means in the form of a striplike continuum.


CLS 413/65
TXT Means ejecting seal or closure:

    Apparatus under subclass 58 having means for removing either the finished
    cap or a misaligned seal from the assembly apparatus after the completion
    of the assembly operation.


CLS 413/66
TXT Having means uniting pull tab on closure:

    Apparatus under subclass 56 including a means to join an actuating member
    to an end closure, which end closure has a frangible zone, such that the
    member is positioned to effect franging of said zone when desired.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for method of assembling the pull tab to tear tab.


CLS 413/67
TXT Having means forming frangible zone on closure:

    Apparatus under subclass 56 including means that weakens a linear portion
    of the lid so that this line will subsequently fail under pressure and an
    area within the weakened line can be bent or removed placing a hole in said
    lid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for method of fabricating or assembling a member having a frangible
    portion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclass 630 for a static contact seal for other than an internal
    combustion engine, or a pipe, conduit or cable having an installation,
    removal, assembly, disassembly, or repair feature.


CLS 413/68
TXT By means inserting ripper means into closure:

    Apparatus under subclass 67 wherein a cord or wire is inserted into the can
    top so that it can subsequently be pulled, ripping a line in the closed can
    top, thus opening the container.


CLS 413/69
TXT APPARATUS FOR CAN BODY MAKING:

    Apparatus under the class definition for forming a can body, per se.

    (1)     Note.  The hollow cylinder has no end closures attached.


CLS 413/70
TXT Blank feed:

    Apparatus under subclass 69 wherein means are provided to deliver preforms
    used to make can bodies to a can forming station.


CLS 413/71
TXT With bending:

    Apparatus under subclass 70 wherein means are provided to force a preform
    into a cylindrical shape.


CLS 413/72
TXT With seaming:

    Apparatus under subclass 71 wherein means are provided to longitudinally
    seam the bent preform.


CLS 413/73
TXT With body deforming (bending, flanging):

    Apparatus under subclass 72 wherein said seaming is done to the two
    longitudinal edges after they are bent in an overlapping manner to hold
    them together with seamer making the joint air tight as a condition
    subsequent.


CLS 413/74
TXT With seaming:

    Apparatus under subclass 70 wherein means are provided for seaming the bent
    preform along its longitudinal edges.


CLS 413/75
TXT With body deforming:

    Apparatus under subclass 74 wherein said seaming is done to the two
    longitudinal edges after they are bent in an overlapping manner to hold
    them together with seamer making the joint air tight as a condition
    subsequent.


CLS 413/76
TXT Body deforming:

    Apparatus under subclass 70 wherein said blank is bent at the two
    longitudinal edges in an overlapping manner to hold them together.


CLS 413/77
TXT With side seaming:

    Apparatus under subclass 69 wherein said cylindrical can body is
    longitudinally closed to form an air tight joint.


CLS 413/78
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Apparatus under the class definition not provided for elsewhere in the
    class.


CLS 414/
TTL MATERIAL OR ARTICLE HANDLING

CLS 414/
TXT

    Apparatus, device, implement or method for placing or displacing particular
    articles in a particular manner or with reference to a particular support,
    for loading or unloading vehicles with materials or objects in general,
    charging or discharging furnaces, bins, chambers, or other receptacles,
    stacking or piling articles or materials, also combinations of general
    types of carriers or forwarding mechanisms, which types, per se, are
    separately classified elsewhere, and general types of elevators, cranes, or
    hoists when associated with special means for handling the load to place it
    on the carrier or remove it therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  The miscellaneous subclass of this class is designed to
    receive any material-moving mechanism for which no place has been
    established elsewhere.

    (2)     Note.  The term "handling" in the title is intended to indicate in
    a general way those more or less complex and intricate movements, imparted
    to matter by instruments or mechanisms which are deemed analogous to
    nonshaping manipulations, or the varying movements imparted to matter or
    objects by hand.

    (3)     Note.  Treatment of matter to change its shape or condition is not
    included in this class.  As fabricating and material-conditioning apparatus
    have commonly associated with them means for bringing the material to the
    shaping or conditioning instrumentalities or carrying it therefrom,
    combinations of handling or conveying means with fabricating, shaping, or
    conditioning means are classified on the basis of the latter.

    (4)     Note.  Earthworking in general effects a change in the shape or
    form of matter and is classified on that basis; but the removing of earth
    by power scoops, shovels, and the like, which operate in the same manner
    whether removing a pile of loose coal or grain or the loose earth from an
    excavation, are classified on the basis of handling in this or other
    material-moving or transportation classes.  Otherwise stated, those
    inventions relating to the excavating art, including power scoops, shovels
    or the like in which movement is imparted to such scoops or shovels
    subsequent to or in addition to those movements deemed necessary to
    complete an excavating operation, which additional movement is usually for
    transporting the excavated material to a disposal point, are considered to
    include such handling of the excavated material as will provide a basis for
    classification in Class 414.  Even the teeth of scoops, commonly placed
    there for excavating hard earth, may be broadly claimed in combination with
    a handling-machine otherwise falling into this class without excluding the
    patent from this class, although the specific teeth if claimed
    particularly, would go to a class of excavating or earthworking.

    (5)     Note.  The separation of mixed solid materials by an operation
    depending on differences of size, form, mass, or other physical properties
    of the mixed materials or objects is deemed to be a highly-special form of
    moving or handling materials, and the classes of separating are deemed
    superior to this class.

    (6)     Note.  Regarding land or water vehicles supporting other
    load-handling devices, the vehicle is deemed to be a mechanism unless the
    handling mechanism is so combined with and related to the vehicle as to
    load or unload that vehicle or handle its load or cargo.

    (7)     Note.  For a thorough search in material-handling, all subclasses
    found in the index indicating by title a fabrication or material-treating
    class, with feeding, conveying, or other handling means, should be
    inspected.

    (8)     Note.  Combined conveyors, carriers, and forwarders of types now
    included under Class 198, Conveyors:  Power-Driven, are to be found in
    Class 198; but combined carriers, the separate elements of which are in
    different classes, are provided for in this class.

    (9)     Note.  Vehicles in which the body is merely moved or tilted to dump
    by gravity are classified in Class 298 or in Class 105, particularly,
    subclasses 238.1+; however, in regard to Class 298, see also the reference
    thereto in subclass 469 of this class (414).

    (10)    Note.  For handling where manipulation during the progress of
    manual work is involved or for handling including the engagement of more
    than one part to aid in manual assembly of such parts, see Class 269, Work
    Holders.  The fact that the article handled is assembled manually with an
    abutting receiver will not exclude a handling mechanism from Class 414.

    I.      VEHICLE LOADING AND UNLOADING

    This class has numerous subclasses devoted to the loading and unloading of
    vehicles of various types; see, for example, subclasses 137.1+, 140.1,
    333-402, 434+, 467+.  For vehicles charging and discharging in other
    classes, see "SEARCH CLASS" below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 304+ for self-loading vehicles.

    56,     Harvesters.

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses for presses which may, when used on
    a vehicle, inherently function to load or unload the vehicle.  (See class
    definition section V of Class 100).

    104,    Railways, subclasses 18+ for load transfer to or from moving
    trains; if external means is involved, see subclasses 334+, 337 and 338 of
    this class (414).

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 239+ for dumping car bodies.

    114,    Ships, subclasses 27+ for dumping and unloading scows, and
    subclasses 183+ for bilge discharge.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 185 for ambulant article dispensing
    devices including vehicular types.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 608+ for vehicular types.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 650+ for
    scattering nonfluid material from a container.

    244,    Aeronautics, particularly subclasses 136, 137.1, and 140+.

    258,    Railway Mail Delivery.

    291,    Track Sanders.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 1.1+ for bodies, and
    50+ for end gates.

    298,    Land Vehicles, Dumping.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclasses 39+ for vehicle mounted fluid
    current conveyors.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclass 428 for a toy vehicle having a
    tiltable receptacle for discharging its contents (e.g., dump truck).

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, subclasses 57+ for artificial body members with
    remote control.



    II.     EXCAVATING AND LOADING MACHINES

    For excavating and loading machines of the type having a scoop or rake
    delivering to an endless or rotary carrier, see "SEARCH CLASS" below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, appropriate subclasses.

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 345.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, particularly subclasses 31,
    60+, 63+ 89, 101, 110, 111+, and 138.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclasses 64+
    and see the search notes therein for mining or hard material disintegrating
    combined with material handling.



    III.    GENERAL TRANSPORTATION AND MATERIAL HANDLING

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock.

    114,    Ships.

    137,    Fluid Handling, for fluid handling not elsewhere provided for.

    180,    Motor Vehicles.

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven.

    212,    Traversing Hoists.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers.

    244,    Aeronautics.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force.

    280,    Land Vehicles.

    294,    Handling: Hand and Hoist-Line Implements.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops.

    298,    Land Vehicles:  Dumping.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices.



    IV.     SIMPLE HANDLING OF CERTAIN CLASSES OF MATERIAL IN A SPECIAL MANNER

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclasses 260+ for nuclear reactors including the handling of nuclear
    reactor components, particularly the nuclear fuel, but see also subclass
    146 of this class (414).

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, subclasses 164+ and see the notes thereto for feeding of blanks
    of stock material in the form of strips and rods, not otherwise
    specifically provided for, to (1) manufacturing machines, or (2) sorting or
    orienting devices.  Included is the feeding of strip or rod type blanks or
    stock material for other than bolts, nails, nuts, screws, rivets, and
    washers, when such blanks or stock material are substantially uniform in
    cross section.



    V.      MEANS CONTROLLING FLOW

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons.

    137,    Fluid Handling.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers.

    184,    Lubrication.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation.

    417,    Pumps.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices.

    454,    Ventilation.





    VI.     MISCELLANEOUS SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 81.1 and 83.1+.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 78+.

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 394+ for devices comprising a scoop and drag
    line to fill the same.

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 344+.

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 101+ and 165+.

    114,    Ships, subclasses 365+ for miscellaneous apparatus for handling
    life craft (e.g., aboard ships), and also analogous apparatus located on
    docks and seawalls.

    137,    Fluid Handling.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, appropriate subclasses for a means of
    general utility for driving or impacting a tool, particularly subclasses
    197+, and see the search notes therein for such means including a work
    cleansing feature.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclass 1 for horizontal step on
    pivoted ladder; subclass 2.1 for horizontal platform on pivoted booms;
    subclasses 10+ for carrier traveling along an inclined cable; subclasses
    12+ for horizontally traveling personnel supports with means to control or
    actuate said traveling; subclasses 36+ for personnel supports traversing
    the horizontal and riding on a track; subclasses 42+ for personnel carriers
    mounted on an endless conveyor; subclasses 48+ for chutes or towers for
    personnel use; subclasses 101+ for a vertically moving platform combined
    with a ladder; and subclasses 141+ for platforms combined with elevating or
    lowering means.

    186,    Merchandising.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 198-226 for
    electrode handling means specialized for electrolytic processes.

    211,    Supports:  Racks.

    221,    Article Dispensing.

    232,    Deposit and Collection Receptacles.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses for material handling claimed in combination with significant
    comminution.  See Section 9 of the class definition of Class 241 for a
    general statement of the line.

    258,    Railway Mail Delivery.

    300,    Brush, Broom, and Mop Making, subclass 18.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure,  subclasses 35+.

    452,    Butchering, subclasses 177+ for handling devices used in butchering
    operations.

    453,    Coin Handling.

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclasses 1+ for an amusement
    roundabout which may    carry a person or object along a circuitous path
    and subclass 2 for an amusement round about combined with elevator type
    structure.

    483,    Tool Changing, generally for a process or apparatus including a
    tool transfer means combined with either a tool support or storage means
    and particularly subclasses 58+ for a tool transfer means combined with a
    tool storage means.




    VII.    INDEX OF CLASSES REFERRED TO IN THE MAIN AND SUBCLASS DEFINITIONS
    OF THIS CLASS



    CLASS           REFERRED TO

                    HEREIN  AT



    4               V

    5               VI

    9               I; III; VI; 569; 680

    13              147

    14              139

    15              VI; 288; 314

    16              673

    29              VI; 14; 426; 431; 746;

                    747

    30              412

    34              147; 151; 156; 157

    37              I; II; VI; 140; 143;

                    467; 469; 507; 592;

                    604; 624; 643; 685;

                    697

    48              147; 205; 206

    52              10; 227

    53              28; 30; 105

    56              I; II; VI; 26; 44;

                    111; 439

    65              147; 165; 403

    72              431

    74              431; 434; 729

    82              14; 431

    83              14; 28; 677

    89              592; 673

    91              674

    99              288

    100             I; 267; 501; 679

    101             134

    104             I; III; 595; 611;

                    673

    105             M; I; III; 227;

                    467; 589

    108             467

    110             VI; 147; 161; 174;

                    190; 193; 198

    114             I; III; 140; 678

    116             148; 289; 698

    122             147

    126             147

    130             132

    133             VI; 675

    134             288; 411

    137             III; V; VI

    141             VI; 137; 418

    144             14; 431

    164             403

    166             616; 657

    169             V

    171             II; 439

    172             435; 438; 439; 680;

                    697; 699

    173             VI; 431

    175             22

    176             III; IV; 146

    177             21

    180             III; 676

    182             VI; 706

    184             V

    186             VI; 134; 592; 594

    187             III; 10; 592; 593;

                    595; 629; 631; 663;

                    673; 674; 678; 785

    192             674

    193             208; 299

    198             M; III; 14; 37; 121;

                    122; 133; 139; 140;

                    174; 193; 195; 222;

                    276; 304; 325; 413;

                    418; 431; 433; 502;

                    503; 523; 525; 526;

                    528; 565; 749; 754;

                    755; 757; 781

    201             147

    202             147; 163; 586

    204             VI

    209             28; 134

    211             VI; 22; 97

    212             II; 21; 23; 138-140;

                    147; 191; 439; 467;

                    560; 561; 569; 591;

                    618; 619; 624; 636;

                    674; 680; 718; 719

    221             I; VI; 14; 28; 37;

                    112; 132

    222             I; VI; 161; 189;

    219;            288; 304; 332;

                    412; 414; 419; 439

    224             III; 462-464

    226             IV; 14; 524; 525;

                    528

    232             VI

    238             12

    239             I; 301; 507

    240             569

    241             VI

    242             IV; 433

    243             VI; 134

    244             I; III; 373; 467

    248             419; 444; 448; 622;

                    673

    250             288

    251             V

    254             III; 11; 26; 385;

                    386; 426; 428; 429;

                    444; 460; 467; 589;

                    678; 778; 785

    258             I; VI; 593

    259             683

    266             147

    269             M; 222; 226; 589

    271             IV; 14; 28; 36; 37;

                    51; 97-99; 112; 123;

                    124; 129; 130; 330

    280             III; 23; 426; 444;

                    448; 467; 474; 490;

                    508; 622

    291             I

    294             III; 26; 70; 120-122;

                    128; 416; 444; 450;

                    453; 457; 616; 621;

                    623; 657; 729; 736;

                    737; 739; 741;

                    751-753; 785

    296             I; III; 227; 508; 519

    297             508

    298             M; I; III; 467; 469;

                    471; 519

    299             II

    300             VI

    302             288; 502; 524; 676;

                    754

    308             433

    312             VI

    314             431

    318             674; 729

    340             148; 289

    417             V

    418             V

    422             217

    432             147

    446             I

    451             431; 433

    452             VI

    454             V

    470             IV; 14

    472             VI

    483             VI; 222


CLS 414/1
TXT ARTICLE MANIPULATOR MOVES ANALOGOUS WITH HUMAN HAND, FINGER, OR ARM
    MOVEMENT:

    Apparatus under class definition having article supporting and moving means
    which is adapted to move said article in response to and in direct
    proportion to the movement in any direction of a means engaged and freely
    moved by a person's arm, finger, or hand, through a motion transmission
    means interconnecting the article supporting means and the arm, finger, or
    hand engaging means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 232, 291, 298, and 323 for cutting implements
    combined with hand or finger-attaching devices.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 95.2 for a
    hand-attachable blotting device.

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 258 for finger rings having cigar and cigarette
    supports.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 118.1+ for a hand-attachable support for a
    writer.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 80+ for
    robot arm control.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 7 and 8 for a
    coating implement including, respectively, a pocket or loop (e.g., strap)
    for attachment to a hand or part thereof (e.g., finger).

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, subclasses 57+ for artificial body members with
    remote control.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217     and 218, for article holding receivers attached to a finger or to
    the metacarpal portion of a hand, respectively.


CLS 414/2
TXT Motion of hand, finger, or arm member multiplied or reduced in its
    transmission to article manipulator means:

    Apparatus under subclass 1 having means whereby the ratio of the motion
    imparted to the article-supporting means is other than one to one relative
    to the motion imparted to the means engaged by a person's arm, finger, or
    hand.


CLS 414/3
TXT Having means to transmit motion through an imperforate barrier:

    Apparatus under subclass 1 wherein the motion transmission means between
    the article-supporting and moving means and the arm, finger, or hand
    engaging means comprises magnetic or other nonsolid conductor energy
    transmitting means.


CLS 414/4
TXT Electric or fluid motor drive for manipulator:

    Apparatus under subclass 1 wherein the means transmitting motion between
    the article-supporting and moving means and the arm, finger, or hand
    engaging means, comprises a pressurized fluid motor means or an
    electrically actuated motor means.


CLS 414/5
TXT Having means to transmit feedback signal from manipulator means to hand,
    finger, or arm:

    Apparatus under subclass 4 having means which is a part of, a function of,
    or is in addition to the fluid or electrically actuated motor means by
    which the position, motion, or force of the article-supporting and moving
    means is transmitted or otherwise communicated back to the person actuating
    the arm, finger, or hand engaging means.


CLS 414/6
TXT For grip force amplification:

    Apparatus under subclass 4 wherein the means Actuating the article
    supporting and moving means is specifically designed to multiply by some
    factor the force exerted on the article over that force imputed by the arm,
    finger, or hand.


CLS 414/7
TXT Having flexible motion transmission means:

    Apparatus under subclass 1 wherein the motion transmission means includes a
    cable, chain, belt, or other means adapted to flex or bend between its
    extremities.


CLS 414/8
TXT Having sealing or radiation shielding means:

    Apparatus under subclass 1 having means associated therewith to impede the
    flow of radiant energy.


CLS 414/9
TXT HUMAN BODY OPERATED EATING AID:

    Apparatus under the class definition having means to transfer material into
    or in the proximity of a person's mouth in response to and as the result of
    the movement of a part of said person's body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for article manipulators which move analogous with the human hand,
    finger, or arm movements.

    680+,   for vertically swinging load supports.


CLS 414/10
TXT APPARATUS FOR MOVING MATERIAL TO A POSITION IN THE ERECTION OR REPAIR OF A
    BUILDING:

    Apparatus under the class definition having means to reorient or reposition
    a unit of building material to a location where it may be secured in place
    on a building site, said means being capable of holding or supporting said
    unit in a given position while being so secured.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 122.1+ for building
    components having installed means for raising or lowering said components.

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclass 900 for a temporary construction elevator for lifting building
    material during the erection of a building.


CLS 414/11
TXT Flat wall or ceiling member manipulating means:

    Apparatus under subclass 10 wherein the means is designed to reorient or
    reposition a unit of material having a flat surface and which, when secured
    in place, will form a part or all of the wall or ceiling portion of a
    building.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus to move and support a door in place while being
    hung is not included in this definition, but is found above in subclass 10.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    appropriate subclasses for lifting apparatus, per se.


CLS 414/12
TXT Boxlike building module manipulating means:

    Apparatus under subclass 10 wherein the means is designed to reorient or
    reposition a building module and support the same while being secured in
    place at a building site.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    373+,   for roadway vehicles and means cooperable therewith to load or
    unload said vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    238,    Railways:  Surface Track, subclass 13 for rail mounted house moving
    means.


CLS 414/13
TXT LAUNDRY HANDLING DEVICE:

    Apparatus under the class definition having means to specifically
    manipulate articles, bundles of articles, or groups of articles which are
    in the nature of fabric or other flexible material sheets, apparel, etc.,
    from one place to another either prior to or subsequent to a laundering
    operation on said articles.


CLS 414/14
TXT STOCK PULLING OR PUSHING:

    Apparatus under the class definition for advancing or feeding elongated
    work relative to a device to treat or modify the work (e.g., lathe,
    puncher, etc.) by means which either (a) engages the work at its forward
    portion and draws it into position, or (b) contacts it at the rear surface
    and shoves it into position.

    (1)     Note.  The feeding means can be mounted on the tool turret of a
    manufacturing machine.

    (2)     Note.  The work may be delivered to a work holder (e.g., a chuck)
    which may be part of a work modifying means (e.g., a lathe or punch) and
    the work holder may be operated to grasp or clamp the work, provided that
    no more of the work modifying means is claimed than that necessary to
    receive and retain the work.  Means to start and stop the work modifying
    means or to move the work holder (a) during a step in which actual work
    modification occurs, or (b) in a direction other than a feeding direction
    are therefore excluded; such means claimed in combination with stock
    pushing or pulling means are also excluded.  For example, a nominally
    claimed means to rotate a chuck or to start or stop a lathe would be
    excluded and classified in the appropriate work modifying class; a means to
    start or stop the work feeding or remnant ejecting means, per se, is proper
    subject matter for this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, appropriate subclasses for devices for pushing or
    pulling metal stock having claimed in combination therewith a tool for
    working on the stock, or means producing a special motion of the stock for
    facilitating metal working.

    82,     Turning, subclasses 124+ for devices for pushing or pulling a
    workpiece to or from a lathe combined with means for effecting a relative
    rotation between the workpiece and the cutting element of the lathe.

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses for devices for pushing or pulling
    a workpiece having in combination therewith means to sever of cut off the
    work to predetermined lengths.

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 245 for feeding a wood workpiece to a cutter
    of the type provided in Class 144.

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 736+ for article transfer by a
    reciprocating pusher.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for article dispensing
    or feeding devices not otherwise provided for, and especially feeding
    devices combined with means for separating one or more articles from a
    stack which is comprised of more articles than are fed in any one feeding
    operation.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of and apparatus for feeding running and indefinite lengths of
    stock or work, without utilizing the leading or trailing end to effect the
    feeding motion.  See search notes in Class 226 for references to other
    feeding classes.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, appropriate subclasses for feeding of
    flexible sheets, especially feeding from a stack or to a receiver,
    predicated upon the flexible nature of the sheets.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, subclasses 164+ for feeding of work blanks or stock pieces
    specialized to the purpose of Class 470, or claimed in nominal combination
    with such machines.


CLS 414/15
TXT With means ejecting stock remnant:

    Apparatus under subclass 14 having means to positively discharge from the
    work handling device that portion of the stock which is too small to be fed
    to the work tool (e.g., cutter, puncher, etc.) for modification into a
    complete product unit.


CLS 414/16
TXT With additional diverse motion of stock:

    Apparatus under subclass 14 in which work which is pulled or pushed in one
    general feeding direction is additionally moved in a different direction
    relative to a disclosed tool which is maintained in nonwork contacting
    position while the work is moving.

    (1)     Note.  The additional motion may or may not be simultaneous with
    the motion in the general feeding direction.

    (2)     Note.  Feeding of the work in any manner into engagement with the
    tool to perform an art operation (e.g., punching, scoring) on the work is
    excluded.


CLS 414/17
TXT With fluid pressure actuated pushing or pulling means:

    Apparatus under subclass 14 employing a motor surface which is moved by the
    force of a confined gas or liquid.


CLS 414/18
TXT Stock end face pushers:

    Apparatus under subclass 14 in which the work is contacted at a surface
    which faces in a direction opposite to that in which the work is to be
    moved and is shoved into position.


CLS 414/19
TXT For sheet stock:

    Apparatus under subclass 18 in which the work is comprised of a single
    element, or a stack of single elements, each element being extremely thin
    in relation to its length and breadth.

    (1)     Note.  The individual elements in a stack must be held together
    only by the forces of gravity and friction.  For example, devices for
    pushing blocks comprised of laminated sheets, each joined to the adjacent
    sheet by means of an adhesive, would be classified in subclass 18 above.


CLS 414/20
TXT Sheet stock lead end pullers:

    Apparatus under subclass 14 for engaging the work at its forward portion
    and drawing it into position for subsequent contact by a tool, said work
    being comprised of a single element, or a stack of single elements, each
    element being extremely thin in relation to its length and breadth.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note to subclass 19 above.


CLS 414/21
TXT WITH WEIGHING:

    Material-handling devices under the class definition including a weighing
    feature wherein there is some moving of the material besides that necessary
    or incidental to the weighing operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclasses 52+ for means conveying and weighing
    successive receivers, subclasses 145+ for a weigher with loading or
    unloading means involving no modification of the material-handling
    structure other than for the purpose of weighing, and subclasses 161+ for a
    weigher combined with means for guiding the load onto the weigher.

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclasses 276+ for weight-responsive crane
    control systems and subclass 283 for cranes having a weight indicator


CLS 414/22.51
TXT WELL PIPE OR ROD RACKING MECHANISM:

    Apparatus under the class definition for moving a cylindrical member in the
    form of a pipe or rod from or to racked or storage position over a well.

    (1)     Note.  The device classified here are normally used in connection
    with the assembling or disassembling of strings of pipes or rods in well
    working operations.

    (2)     Note.  A stabber or a hoist is included herein if it could be used
    to move a pipe or rod to or from a rack.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for an apparatus for handling a pole or tree between prone and
    upright positions.

    24,     for an apparatus for lowering glass cylinders from an upright
    position.

    745.2,  for apparatus for moving or manipulating an elongated vertically
    oriented cylindrical bar, generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 85 for an earth boring
    means combined with orienting or racking means for unconnected tools or
    sections of shaft or casing.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 60.1 for pipe or tube racks, per se.


CLS 414/22.52
TXT With slope change:

    Apparatus under subclass 22.51 wherein the inclination of the cylindrical
    member is intentionally changed during manipulation thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Moving pipe from a horizontal rack on the ground is included
    herein if the inclination of the pipe is changed during transport.


CLS 414/22.53
TXT For nonvertical drilling:

    Apparatus under subclass 22.52 wherein inclination of the cylindrical
    member is changed to establish drilling direction other than toward the
    center of the earth.


CLS 414/22.54
TXT Horizontal to/from vertical:

    Apparatus under subclass 22.52 wherein the cylindrical member is moved all
    the way from level with to normal to the horizon or vice versa.


CLS 414/22.55
TXT Boom pivoting about horizontal axis:

    Apparatus under subclass 22.54 including structure engaging the cylindrical
    member and swinging therewith about an axis extending in the horizontal
    direction to move the member from the level to the vertical position or
    vice versa.


CLS 414/22.56
TXT Pivoting derrick:

    Apparatus under subclass 22.55 including a support structure which is
    intended to support the cylindrical member in a well, wherein the entire
    support structure is moved about an axis extending in the horizontal
    direction to move the member from the level to the vertical position or
    vice versa.


CLS 414/22.57
TXT Guided skate or pusher:

    Apparatus under subclass 22.54 including support structure for controlling
    movement of the cylindrical member generally axially thereof and including
    (a) a carriage riding along the  controlling structure and carrying the
    weight of one end of the member, or (b) a means riding along the
    controlling structure and engaging the end of the member and urge that
    member axially along the controlling structure.


CLS 414/22.58
TXT Pipe or rod guide:

    Apparatus under subclass 22.54 including support structure for controlling
    movement of the cylindrical member generally axially thereof, which
    structure is troughlike to guide the member as it slides therealong.


CLS 414/22.59
TXT Guided skate or pusher:

    Apparatus under subclass 22.52 including support structure for controlling
    movement of the cylindrical member generally axially thereof and including
    (a) a carriage riding along the controlling structure and carrying the
    weight of one end of the member, or (b) a means riding along the
    controlling structure and engaging the end of the member and urge that
    member axially along the controlling structure.


CLS 414/22.61
TXT Pipe or rod guide:

    Apparatus under subclass 22.52 including support structure for controlling
    movement of the cylindrical member generally axially thereof, which
    structure is troughlike to guide the member as it slides therealong.


CLS 414/22.62
TXT Horizontal rack:

    Apparatus under subclass 22.51 comprising means for moving a cylindrical
    member from or to racked  or storage position with the axis thereof
    extending in a direction parallel with the horizon.


CLS 414/22.63
TXT Vertical rack:

    Apparatus under subclass 22.51 comprising means for moving a cylindrical
    member from or to a racked or storage position with the axis thereof
    extending in a direction toward the center of the earth.


CLS 414/22.64
TXT Compensating for support shift (e.g., ship roll, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 22.63 including provision to maintain support of
    the cylindrical member in a vertical direction in spite of movement of the
    surface on which the apparatus is supported.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is apparatus to compensate for the movement
    of a ship under wave or tide action, or a device to compensate for
    vibration or earth tremor.


CLS 414/22.65
TXT Pivotal carriage:

    Apparatus under subclass 22.63 wherein the means to move the cylindrical
    member is supported to turn about a fixed axis.


CLS 414/22.66
TXT Carousel:

    Apparatus under subclass 22.65 wherein the means to move the cylindrical
    member includes plural circumferentially spaced supports for distinct
    members to be supported.


CLS 414/22.67
TXT Pivotal derrick:

    Apparatus under subclass 22.65 wherein the means to move the cylindrical
    member comprises the main support assembly.

    (1)     Note.  The apparatus of this subclass may comprise a derrick that
    pivots at the ground to move the pipe or rod, or one that pivots near its
    peak to effect such movement.


CLS 414/22.68
TXT With laterally guided pipe or rod support:

    Apparatus under subclass 22.63 wherein the means to move supports the
    cylindrical member against gravity and is controlled to move along a fixed
    path.


CLS 414/22.69
TXT On inclined derrick mounted track:

    Apparatus under subclass 22.68 wherein the supporting and moving means
    travels on a rail-like device which is fixed to the main support structure
    and is neither vertical nor horizontal.


CLS 414/22.71
TXT Both upper and lower pipe or rod holding and guiding means:

    Apparatus under subclass 22.68 including a first means for grippingly
    engaging, supporting and moving the cylindrical member at one location
    along the axis of the cylindrical member and a second means for grippingly
    engaging and moving the cylindrical member at a different location
    therealong.


CLS 414/23
TXT POLE OR TREE HANDLERS:

    Devices under the class definition for raising or lowering telegraph or
    like poles to or from standing position or for removing, transplanting, or
    setting trees in the operation of transplanting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclasses 242+, 251+, and 259+ for traversing
    hoists having a swinging boom and a specific engager for the load; and
    subclasses 343+ for ambulant traversing hoists and subclass 901, a
    collection of cross-referenced patents, for ambulant dolley-type hoists or
    cranes

    280,    Land Vehicles, appropriate subclasses for trucks adapted to be used
    to transport trees or poles.


CLS 414/24
TXT GLASS CYLINDERS:

    Mechanism under the class definition for handling or taking down glass
    cylinders either during or after the completion of the drawing process.


CLS 414/24.5
TXT ROUND HAY BALE HANDLING:

    Devices under the class definition for working on or with a circular bale
    of hay, the bale normally being a ribbon or layer of hay wound to form a
    compact coil.


CLS 414/24.6
TXT Unrolling:

    Devices under subclass 24.5 for unwinding a coil of hay.


CLS 414/25
TXT HAY DISTRIBUTORS:

    Devices under the class definition deemed to be particularly adapted for
    distributing hay or similar material in mows or on stacks and involving
    more than a mere chute.


CLS 414/26
TXT TOBACCO STRINGERS OR UNSTRINGERS:

    Apparatus under the class definition for piling or arranging devices for
    use in stringing tobacco leaves or hands upon sticks, hangers or other
    handling devices, or for unstringing tobacco therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 27.5 for such devices combined with harvesting
    apparatus.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 5.5 for tobacco
    sticks and hangers.


CLS 414/27
TXT APPARATUS FOR STRINGING ARTICLES ON A SUPPORT IN ABUTTING RELATION:

    Apparatus under the class definition wherein articles are strung in
    abutting relation on a supporting means to form a group, e.g., impaling
    articles on a spike or placing washer-shaped articles on a peg.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    798.2+, for means placing articles in mutually sustaining relation in a
    horizontally extending row.

    798.9,  for means for removing one or more articles from a row of mutually
    sustaining articles.

    908     and 911, for handling perforated articles and rolls, respectively.


CLS 414/111
TXT VEHICLE-CARRIED BALE ACCUMULATOR:

    Apparatus under the class definition having means whereby bales are
    accumulated on a vehicle in a substantially horizontally extending row.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    789.7,  for discharging a superposed group of bales from a bale accumulator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 474+ for a carrier in combination with a
    harvester.


CLS 414/132
TXT HAY STACK SHAPERS:

    Piling devices under the class definition for building stacks of hay and
    the like and usually consisting of a rack or frame and a hoist or other
    conveying means which deposits the material therein or arranges it thereon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 175+ for article dispensers not
    otherwise provided for, provided with stack forming means.

    460,    Threshing, subclass 905 for racks or frames merely, involving no
    moving or conveying means, upon which stacks may be built.


CLS 414/133
TXT COAL STORAGE TYPE:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising a storage floor, base, or
    other carrier upon which coal or similar material may be arranged in a
    pile, and handling means to place said material on said pile or to remove
    said material from said pile.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 506+ and 632+ and other
    subclasses for conveyors, under the definition of Class 198, or conveyor
    systems, likewise classified, which are specialized for collecting a load
    from a static support.


CLS 414/137.1
TXT MARINE LOADING OR UNLOADING SYSTEM:

    Apparatus under the class definition for charging or discharging a buoyant
    vehicle characterized by some peculiarity due to the fact that the vehicle
    floats on or in water.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    14,     Bridges, subclasses 2.4+ for the combination of a land vehicle with
    a bridge carried thereby, which land vehicle is to remain with the bridge
    as support structure therefor; and subclasses 71.1+ for a gangway,
    generally, including a gangway attached to a marine vessel.  However, a
    bridge or gangway for use with a buoyant vehicle including means to effect
    movement of cargo thereon (e.g., a windlass) or means ancillary to loading
    or unloading (e.g., an elevator for lifting cargo from a land vehicle that
    has boarded a buoyant vehicle) is to be found in Class 414, in this
    subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder.

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 394+ for a dragline scraper, generally,
    including a dragline scraper for digging from the earth combined with
    material handling means for loading a buoyant vehicle.  However, a dragline
    scraper digging from the hold of a buoyant vehicle combined with material
    handling means for unloading that vehicle will be found in Class 414, in
    this subclass and subclasses indented hereunder.

    104,    Railways, especially subclass 114 for a railway for transporting
    material from one ship to another, including a cableway; not including any
    provision to on- or off-load the material from a ship.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, especially subclasses 1.1-9 for a railway
    vehicle with or without a railway, not including any provision to on-or
    off-load material to or from a ship.

    114,    Ships, for the combination of a significantly recited buoyant
    vehicle with material handling structure, generally, unless such
    combination is specifically provided for elsewhere, e.g., a buoyant vehicle
    combined with means to load or unload that vehicle is provided for in Class
    414, in this subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder.  A buoyant
    vehicle combined with a bridge or gangway and additional material handling
    structure to effect movement of cargo (e.g., a windlass) or which is
    ancilliary to loading or unloading (e.g., an elevator for lifting cargo
    from a land vehicle that has boarded a buoyant vehicle) is to be found in
    Class 414, in this subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder.



    Search subclasses 27+ of Class 114, for a scow (or barge or "buoyant
    vehicle") intended to be loaded or unloaded by dumping its cargo into the
    water.  Dumping of Class 114 may comprise use of a door in the bottom of
    the scow.  The combination of a scow with a conveyor to transport the cargo
    over the side of the scow, or with means to bodily lift the scow and dump
    it into the water is to be found in Class 414 in this subclass and the
    subclasses indented hereunder.  Furthermore, the combination of a scow with
    means to load and with means to dump the scow is to be found in Class
    414,in this subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder.

    Search subclasses 258+ of Class 114, for a "mother" buoyant vehicle
    combined with specific means to lift a  "daughter" craft to or from the
    water.



    Search subclasses 264+ of Class 114, for a free floating platform (i.e.,
    structure having provision for buoyancy) generally.  A free floating
    platform with means to load or unload other marine structure is to be found
    in Class 414, in this subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder.



    Search subclass 362 of Class 114, for boarding aides, including a ladder or
    gangway, generally limited to use for loading or unloading personnel onto
    or off of a marine vessel.



    Search subclasses 365+ of Class 114 for means to lift a life boat to or
    from the water.



    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 899.2 for the combination of a buoyant
    vehicle with means to convey fluid material from one location to another
    thereon.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling With Receiver or  Receiver Coacting Means,
    for the combination of a buoyant vehicle with means to convey fluent
    material to or from to load or unload that vehicle.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 335+ for submerged well structure, generally, and
    for such well structure combined with means to load or unload a buoyant
    vehicle.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, for a powered conveyor, generally.  The
    combination of a conveyor with provision to load or unload a buoyant
    vehicle is to be found in Class 414, in this subclass and the subclasses
    indented hereunder.

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclasses 307+ for a floating traversing hoist,
    generally.  The combination of a floating traversing hoist with provision
    to load or unload a buoyant vehicle, e.g., with means attaching a portion
    of the hoist to an adjacent vehicle, is to be found in Class 414, in this
    subclass and the subclasses indented hereunder.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    especially subclasses 264+ for structure for applying force directly to an
    object to move it onto or off a buoyant vehicle, without additional
    material handling provision.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 1+ for buoyant vehicle
    portage, launching or removing, generally; and subclasses 195.1+ for a
    floating dock, i.e., a floating platform attached to land, generally.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, for means to transport generally
    particulate material in a fluid medium, generally, and for the combination
    of such transport means with a buoyant vehicle, including provision to load
    or unload that vehicle.


CLS 414/137.2
TXT Loading or unloading aircraft under marine conditions:

    Apparatus under subclass 137.1 for charging or discharging a flying vehicle
    while that vehicle floats on or in water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137.6,  for apparatus for loading a buoyant vehicle from an vehicle
    supported by the atmosphere.


CLS 414/137.3
TXT Underwater loading or unloading:

    Apparatus under subclass 137.2 for charging or discharging the flying
    vehicle through an opening therein that is entirely beneath the surface of
    the water on or in which the vehicle floats.


CLS 414/137.4
TXT With weather cover:

    Apparatus under subclass 137.1 having means to protect part or all thereof
    against the elements of the atmosphere.


CLS 414/137.5
TXT Marine vessel to/from well:

    Apparatus under subclass 137.1 particularly adapted to load or unload a
    buoyant vehicle from a tubular casing extending into the earth for passage
    of in situ minerals therethrough, including loading or unloading the
    component parts of the tubular casing.


CLS 414/137.6
TXT Marine vessel to/from air vessel:

    Apparatus under subclass 137.1 particularly adapted to load or unload a
    buoyant vehicle from another vehicle supported by the atmosphere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137.2+, for apparatus for loading or unloading aircraft while that aircraft
    is resting in the water.


CLS 414/137.7
TXT Marine vessel to/from water:

    Apparatus under subclass 137.1 particularly adapted to load or unload a
    buoyant vehicle directly from the water in or on which it floats.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139.4+, for means for marine vessel loading or unloading from the shore or
    from the sea bottom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 317+ for a dredge combined with handling
    equipment therefor.  Generally, the handling structure for lifting a dredge
    including details of the dredge guide will be found in Class 37 even
    without specific details to the dredge.  Search especially subclasses 315+
    for a shellfish dredge.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 8 for a fishing
    net combined with handling  equipment therefor.  Generally, the handling
    structure for lifting a fishing net including details of the net guide will
    be found in Class 43 even without specific details to the net.

    114,    Ships, subclasses 27+ for a scow (or barge or "buoyant vehicle")
    intended to be unloaded by dumping its cargo into the water.  ("Dumping"
    may comprise the use of a door in the bottom of the scow, use of a conveyor
    to transport the cargo over the side of the scow or use of means to bodily
    lift and dump it into the water.)  However, the combination of a scow with
    means to load and with means to dump the scow is to be found in this
    subclass of Class 414.


CLS 414/137.8
TXT Marine vessel to/from lighter to/from water:

    Apparatus under subclass 137.7 wherein the buoyant vehicle loaded or
    unloaded from the water serves to hold the cargo only temporarily, with
    provision to transport cargo with respect to a second buoyant vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  The term "lighter" is somewhat confused in the art, and is
    considered to refer to any buoyant vehicle intended to support and transfer
    material from a transport buoyant vehicle to a receiver and may comprise
    any of various structures, e.g., a small boat on which a material handling
    device is carried, or a large vessel having the purpose of transporting
    material from another vessel and the water at a single portage.  The
    lighter may include a hold for temporary storage of material.


CLS 414/137.9
TXT Marine vessel to marine vessel:

    Apparatus under subclass 137.1 particularly adapted to load or unload a
    buoyant vehicle from or to another buoyant vehicle.


CLS 414/138.1
TXT With means to effect relative vertical movement of marine vessel:

    Apparatus under subclass 137.9 combined with structure to cause one of the
    buoyant vehicles to move with respect to the surface of the water in or on
    which the vehicles float.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140.6,  for means to move cargo between a marine vessel and the shore with
    provision to effect vertical movement of the marine vessel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclasses 258+ for a "mother" buoyant vehicle combined with
    specific means to lift a "daughter" craft to or from the water.  Search
    subclasses 365+ for means to lift a life boat to or from the water.


CLS 414/138.2
TXT With means to compensate for relative marine vessel movement:

    Apparatus under subclass 137.9 combined with means to take into account and
    make adjustment for repositioning of one of the buoyant vehicles with
    respect to the other.

    (1)     Note.  Means intended to effect relative movement of the buoyant
    vehicles, a break-a-way feature or a simple friction holder is considered
    to be "means to make adjustment" for classification in this and the
    indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139.6+, for marine vessel loading or unloading with provision for movement
    of the vessel with respect to the shore.


CLS 414/138.3
TXT Including means to sense position of marine vessel:

    Apparatus under subclass 138.2 having a detector responsive to the location
    of one of the buoyant vehicles.


CLS 414/138.4
TXT Line tension control:

    Apparatus under subclass 138.2 having a taut line between the buoyant
    vehicles and having means to establish and maintain a desired tautness
    thereon.


CLS 414/138.5
TXT Marine vessel to/from lighter to/from marine vessel:

    Apparatus under subclass 137.9 including a third buoyant vehicle intended
    to load or unload the first buoyant vehicle and transfer the material to or
    from the second buoyant vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  The term "lighter" is somewhat confused in the art, and is
    considered to refer to any buoyant vehicle intended to support and transfer
    material from a transport buoyant vehicle to a receiver, and may comprise
    any of various structures, e.g., a small boat on which a material handling
    device is carried, or a large vessel having the purpose of transporting
    material between other vessels at a single portage.  The lighter may
    include a hold for temporary storage of material.  Such a vessel may also
    be referred to as a "tender" or and "oiler".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137.1+, especially 142.1+, 142.6, 142.7, and 142.9, for a "lighter" with
    handling structure, but without a ship to be loaded or unloaded.


CLS 414/138.6
TXT By use of endless belt conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 138.5 wherein the loading or unloading structure
    includes a pliable loop supported at its extremities by rollerlike members
    to allow the loop to travel along its extent which loop is configured to
    transport material being loaded on or unloaded from the buoyant vehicle.


CLS 414/138.7
TXT Marine vessel to/from lighter to/from shore:

    Apparatus under subclass 137.9 including a buoyant vehicle intended to load
    or unload another  buoyant vehicle and transport the material to/from the
    terra firma surrounding or beneath the water in or on  which the buoyant
    vehicle floats.

    (1)     Note.  The term "lighter" is somewhat confused in the art, and is
    considered to refer to any vessel intended to support such transported
    material which includes a small boat on which a material handling device is
    carried, a floating structure that is in effect an extension of a dock, or
    a large vessel having the purpose of transporting material to or from
    another vessel at a single portage.  The lighter may include a hold for
    temporary storage of material.  Such a vessel may also be referred to as a
    "tender" or as an "oiler".

    (2)     Note.  The term "shore" is intended to include the land surrounding
    the water as well as the sea bottom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137.1+, especially 142.1+, 142.6, 142.7, and 142.9, for a "lighter" with
    handling structure, but without a ship to be loaded or unloaded.


CLS 414/138.8
TXT With marine vessel holding or moving device:

    Apparatus under subclass 138.7 combined with structure to either immobilize
    or to effect movement of the buoyant vessel being loaded or unloaded.


CLS 414/138.9
TXT Serial marine vessels supporting conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 138.7 wherein the buoyant vehicle intended to load
    or unload the other includes a plurality of distinct buoyant vehicles for
    supporting the loading or unloading structure on the water.


CLS 414/139.1
TXT By use of endless belt conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 138.7 wherein the loading or unloading structure
    includes a pliable loop supported at its extremities by rollerlike members
    to allow the loop to travel along its extent which loop is configured to
    transport material being loaded on or unloaded from the buoyant vehicle.


CLS 414/139.2
TXT One marine vessel towing the other:

    Apparatus under subclass 137.9 intended to be used as one of the buoyant
    vehicles pulls the other through the water.


CLS 414/139.3
TXT By use of endless belt conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 137.9 wherein the loading or unloading structure
    includes a pliable loop supported at its extremities by rollerlike members
    to allow the loop to travel along its extent; which loop is configured to
    transport material being loaded on or unloaded from the buoyant vehicle.


CLS 414/139.4
TXT Marine vessel to/from shore:

    Apparatus under subclass 137.1 Particularly adapted to load or unload a
    buoyant vehicle and transport the material to/from the terra firma
    surrounding or beneath the water in or on which the buoyant vehicle floats
    or to/from structure supported by the terra firma.

    (1)     Note.  The term "shore" is intended to include the land surrounding
    the water as well as the sea bottom.

    (2)     Note.  Disclosure of a marine vessel and shore with a claimed
    conveyor structure is classifiable in this and the indented subclasses.


CLS 414/139.5
TXT Personnel loading or unloading:

    Apparatus under subclass 139.4 intended to be used for charging or
    discharging human beings to or from a buoyant vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  Handling of personnel is generally not included in this
    class (414) but of art of this subclass is closely related to the other art
    of this area and accordingly is collected herein.


CLS 414/139.6
TXT With means to compensate for marine vessel movement:

    Apparatus under subclass 139.4 combined with means to take into account and
    make adjustment of repositioning of the buoyant vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138.2+, for movement of cargo from one marine vessel to another with
    compensation for relative movement therebetween.


CLS 414/139.7
TXT Including means to sense vertical position of marine vessel (e.g., draft,
    etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 139.6 having a detector is responsive to the depth
    of the buoyant vehicle in the water.


CLS 414/139.8
TXT With marine vessel holding or moving device:

    Apparatus under subclass 139.4 combined with structure to either immobilize
    or effect movement of the buoyant vehicle being loaded or unloaded.


CLS 414/139.9
TXT Marine vessel to/from land or rail vehicle distinct from system:

    Apparatus under subclass 139.4 particularly adapted to load or unload a
    buoyant vehicle and transport the material to or from a vehicle riding
    directly on the terra firma, or on a rail supported by the terra firma, and
    which vehicle is a transportation device forming no part of the loading or
    unloading device.


CLS 414/140.1
TXT By use of marine vessel to/from shore gangway for land or rail vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 139.9 intended to be used with a bridgelike device
    to move material between the buoyant vehicle and the terra firma.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    14,     Bridges, especially subclasses 71.1+ for a gangway, generally,
    including a gangway attached to a marine vessel.  A bridge or gangway for
    use with a buoyant vehicle including means to effect movement of  cargo
    thereon (e.g., a windlass) is to be found in this subclass.


CLS 414/140.2
TXT By use of endless belt conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 139.9 wherein the loading or unloading structure
    includes a pliable loop supported at its extremities by rollerlike members
    to allow the loop to travel along its extent which loop is configured to
    transport material being  loaded on or unloaded from the buoyant vehicle.


CLS 414/140.3
TXT By use of laterally moving crane:

    Apparatus under subclass 139.9 wherein the loading or unloading structure
    includes an overhead beam having material transporting carriage means
    suspended therefrom for movement therealong wherein the beam is supported
    for movement bodily transversely to its extent, while remaining parallel to
    its original orientation.


CLS 414/140.4
TXT By use of swinging crane:

    Apparatus under subclass 139.9 wherein the loading or unloading structure
    includes an overhead beam having material transporting carriage means
    suspended therefrom for movement therealong wherein the beam is supported
    for movement about an axis normal to its longitudinal extent.


CLS 414/140.5
TXT By use of conveyor chute:

    Apparatus under subclass 139.9 wherein the loading or unloading structure
    includes an inclined trough vertically higher on its input end than its
    exhaust end for transportation of material therealong by the force of
    gravity.


CLS 414/140.6
TXT By lifting marine vessel or by changing water level:

    Apparatus under subclass 139.4 wherein loading or unloading is effected or
    influenced (a) by raising or lowering the buoyant vehicle with respect to
    the surface of the water on which it floats; (b) by changing the vertical
    height of the water on which the buoyant vehicle floats.

    (1)     Note.  Under clause (b), the height of the water may be changed
    naturally, as by tide, or may be changed artificially, as by a "lock".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138.1,  for means to raise or lower one marine vessel with respect to
    another to effect or influence the transfer of cargo therebetween.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclasses 258+ for a "mother" buoyant vehicle combined with
    specific means to lift a "daughter" craft to or from the water.  Search
    subclasses 365+ for means to lift a life boat to or from the water.


CLS 414/140.7
TXT By use of screw conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 139.4 wherein the loading or unloading structure
    includes a helically ribbed, rodlike member adapted to turn about its axis
    and force material being loaded or unloaded to move by the action of the
    helical rib.


CLS 414/140.8
TXT By use of endless belt conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 139.4 wherein the loading or unloading structure
    includes a pliable loop supported at its extremities by rollerlike members
    to allow the loop to travel along its extent which loop is configured to
    transport material being loaded on or unloaded from the buoyant vehicle.


CLS 414/140.9
TXT For "bulk" (e.g., granular, etc.) cargo:

    Apparatus under subclass 140.8 particularly adapted to transport material
    having no defined shape.


CLS 414/141.1
TXT Including orbiting bucket:

    Apparatus under subclass 140.9 including a defined compartment including a
    bottom and two (or more) sides comprising a part of, or secured to the
    pliable, elongated band for containment of the transported material.


CLS 414/141.2
TXT With grab bucket:

    Apparatus under subclass 140.9 combined with a compartment member comprised
    of a pair of cooperating, biting jaws particularly adapted to cut into a
    supply quantity of material and transport  that material to the pliable,
    elongated band.


CLS 414/141.3
TXT By use of laterally moving crane:

    Apparatus under subclass 139.4 wherein the loading or unloading structure
    includes an overhead beam having material transporting carriage means
    suspended therefrom for movement therealong, wherein the beam is supported
    for movement bodily transversely to its extent.


CLS 414/141.4
TXT Having swinging portion:

    Apparatus under subclass 141.3 wherein the overhead beam or a part thereof
    is also supported for movement about an axis normal to its longitudinal
    extent.


CLS 414/141.5
TXT On marine vessel:

    Apparatus under subclass 141.3 wherein the overhead beam is supported by
    the buoyant vehicle.


CLS 414/141.6
TXT By use of swinging crane:

    Apparatus under subclass 139.4 wherein the loading or unloading structure
    includes an overhead beam having material transporting carriage means
    suspended therefrom for movement therealong wherein the beam is supported
    for movement about an axis normal to its longitudinal extent.


CLS 414/141.7
TXT By use of hoist line:

    Apparatus under subclass 139.4 wherein the loading or unloading structure
    includes a tensile line(s) for lifting and transporting cargo.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141.3+, for a hoist line for loading or unloading a marine vessel by use of
    a hoist line wherein the hoist line is supported by a laterally moving
    crane.


CLS 414/141.8
TXT By use of conveyor chute:

    Apparatus under subclass 139.4 wherein the loading or unloading structure
    includes a trough vertically higher on its input end than its exhaust end
    for transportation of material therealong by the force of gravity.


CLS 414/141.9
TXT By use of screw conveyor on marine vessel:

    Apparatus under subclass 137.1 wherein the loading or unloading structure
    includes a helical ribbed, rodlike member adapted to turn about its axis
    and force material being loaded or unloaded to move by the action of the
    helical rib, and wherein that helically ribbed member is supported by the
    buoyant vehicle.


CLS 414/142.1
TXT By use of endless belt conveyor on marine vessel:

    Apparatus under subclass 137.1 wherein the loading or unloading structure
    includes a pliable loop supported at its extremities by rollerlike members
    to allow the loop to travel along its extent which loop is configured to
    transport material being loaded on or unloaded from the buoyant vehicle,
    and wherein the pliable loop is supported by the buoyant vehicle.


CLS 414/142.2
TXT For "bulk" (e.g., granular) cargo:

    Apparatus under subclass 142.1 particularly adapted to transport of
    material having no defined shape.


CLS 414/142.3
TXT Belt extending parallel to marine vessel beneath cargo hold:

    Apparatus under subclass 142.2 wherein the buoyant vehicle includes a
    chamber for holding the material, and wherein the run of the pliable loop
    is in the same direction as the keel of the buoyant vehicle and is
    physically lower than the bottom of the holding chamber  such that material
    in the chamber can flow onto the pliable loop, to be transported thereby.


CLS 414/142.4
TXT Sequential endless belts:

    Apparatus under subclass 142.3 including a first and a second pliable loop
    to transport material along its extend, wherein the material is first
    transported by the first loop and then that same material is further
    transported by the second loop.


CLS 414/142.5
TXT Including orbiting bucket:

    Apparatus under subclass 142.2 including a defined compartment having a
    bottom and two (or more) sides comprising a part of, or secured to, the
    pliable, elongated band for containment of the transported material.


CLS 414/142.6
TXT By use of laterally moving crane on marine vessel:

    Apparatus under subclass 137.1 wherein the loading or unloading structure
    includes an overhead beam having material transporting carriage means
    suspended therefrom for movement therealong wherein the beam is supported
    for movement bodily transversely to its extent, while remaining parallel to
    its original orientation, and wherein the overhead beam is supported by the
    buoyant vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  The beam of this subclass commonly extends transversely of
    the buoyant vehicle and such beam moves longitudinally with respect to the
    vehicle.


CLS 414/142.7
TXT By use of swinging crane on marine vessel:

    Apparatus under subclass 137.1 wherein the loading or unloading structure
    includes an overhead beam having material transporting carriage means
    suspended therefrom for movement therealong wherein the beam is supported
    for movement about an axis normal to its longitudinal extent, and wherein
    the overhead beam is supported by the buoyant vehicle.


CLS 414/142.8
TXT By use of hoist line:

    Apparatus under subclass 137.1 wherein the loading or unloading structure
    includes a tensile line(s) for lifting and transporting cargo.


CLS 414/142.9
TXT Scoop or scraper on marine vessel:

    Apparatus under subclass 142.8 wherein the loading or unloading structure
    includes (a) a compartment member suspended from the tensile line(s) having
    a digging edge for biting into a supply of material, or (b) a digging edge,
    per se, for biting into a supply of material wherein the compartment member
    or the digging edge, per se, is supported by the buoyant vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  A device for penetrating a supply of bulk material, e.g., a
    clam-shell bucket, is considered to have a digging edge for placement in
    this subclass.


CLS 414/143.1
TXT By use of conveyor chute:

    Apparatus under subclass 137.1 wherein the loading or unloading structure
    includes a trough vertically higher on its input end than its exhaust end
    for transportation of material therealong by the force of gravity.


CLS 414/143.2
TXT Stowage arrangement on marine vessel:

    Apparatus under subclass 137.1 including provision to retain loaded
    material on the buoyant vehicle.


CLS 414/146
TXT CHARGING OR DISCHARGING MEANS ADAPTED FOR USE IN A RADIOACTIVE ENVIRONMENT:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising means for moving material,
    usually of a radioactive nature, toward, to, into, within, out of, from,
    away from, etc., a nominally claimed radioactive container or structure
    intimately associated therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290,    for a receptacle which contains liquid in which a charge may be
    submergibly sealed, and means to move the charge thereto or therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclasses 261+ for the combination of nuclear reactor structure and a
    means for handling nuclear fuel, which means may be for loading or
    unloading the fuel into or from the reactor; and subclasses 268+ for
    nuclear reactor refueling machines.


CLS 414/147
TXT CHAMBER OF A TYPE UTILIZED FOR A HEATING FUNCTION AND MATERIAL CHARGING OR
    DISCHARGING MEANS THEREFOR:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising a receptacle-like structure
    (e.g., furnace, oven, etc.) of a kind adapted to be provided with means for
    heating it, and means for moving, or enabling gravity movement of, either
    (a) material in the nature of work which is to be heated in the structure,
    or (b) material in the nature of fuel which is to be consumed during a
    work-heating operation, to, adjacent to, into, out of, from, within, etc.,
    the structure.

    (1)     Note.  While the basic concept of this and the indented subclasses
    is that of the combination of the chamber and the means for charging or
    discharging material thereto of therefrom, rigid  adherence to that concept
    would have resulted in a considerable scattering of the art of the
    predecessor area (subclasses 18-37 of former Class 214). Accordingly,
    claims to the charging or discharging means are originally classifiable
    here (with the below-mentioned exception) if the claims make clear, or if
    such is the sole disclosure, that the destination of source of the material
    is a chamber of the kind under consideration. However, exceptions are made
    in the instance of a charging or discharging means which is proper for
    Class 198, or one which is proper for some other area of this class (414),
    in which event original classification is there and the patent is
    cross-referenced to this area (147+).

    (2)     Note.  The claiming of, for example, (a) a heating chamber and
    heating means therefor, with or without a charging or discharging means, or
    (b) structure of a heating chamber which relates only to its heating
    function (e.g., lining, configuration, etc.) or (c) discharging work which
    is molten in form, and is handled as a liquid (e.g., not merely as the
    contents of a receptacle), from a heating chamber, presents subject matter
    which is beyond the scope of this class (414).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146,    for charging or discharging means adapted for use with a nuclear
    reactor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses
    for such apparatus having charging and discharging means.

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclass 86 for means to feed fuel
    to cupola-gas generators.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 335+ for a glass furnace combined
    with furnace charging means.

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 101+, 196+, 235+, 267+, and 293+ for devices
    combined with furnace structure which feed fuel to furnaces, and subclasses
    165+ for ash discharging.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, appropriate subclasses for feeding
    fuel to such apparatus.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 223 for trash burning cooking stoves
    with feeding attachments, subclasses 7, 10, 68, 73, 107, and 501 for
    various types of stoves having fuel feeding magazines, and subclasses 242+
    for ash discharging.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 339.1+ for the combination of
    a conveyor of that class and means to facilitate the working, treating, or
    inspecting of a conveyed load at a station.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclass 40 for a
    thermolytic distillation process including the step of arranging the charge
    in the distillation zone.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclasses 262+ for means for introducing
    material into, or removing it from, a still, retort, or the like (e.g., a
    coke oven).

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclasses 221, 243 and 251 for hoists usable as
    charging devices.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 176+ for solid material
    charging apparatus combined with the structure of a metallurgical furnace.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 33+, 79+, 115, and
    142+ for charging devices.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 121+ for a work chamber having heating means
    and structure by which work is progressed or moved mechanically; and
    subclasses 239+ for a specialized heating furnace subcombination for
    feeding, agitating, conveying, or discharging work being heated.


CLS 414/148
TXT With alarm, indicator, or signal:

    Apparatus under subclass 147 wherein the chamber or the material moving
    means includes means to sense a condition therein or thereof and to react
    thereto by providing an indication of the status of the condition sensed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    289,    for an alarm, indicator, or signal responsive to a sensing means in
    a system involving a static receptacle and a charging or discharging means
    therefor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclasses for an alarm,
    indicator, or signal of a mechanical nature.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, appropriate subclasses for an alarm,
    indicator, or signal of an electrical nature.


CLS 414/149
TXT Driven, rotatable chamber:

    Apparatus under subclass 147 in which the heating chamber is rotatably
    driven through at least 3600 about an axis which passes through the chamber
    (e.g., a rotary-cement kiln).


CLS 414/150
TXT Including driven device and/or inclined flow path to carry or convey
    material into, within, and out of chamber:

    Apparatus under subclass 147 wherein the means for moving, or enabling
    gravity movement of, the material includes a driven device and/or an
    inclined flow path to carry or convey the material into, within, and out of
    the heating chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    298,    for a receptacle charging means which also serves to discharge the
    receptacle.


CLS 414/151
TXT In helical or tortuous path:

    Apparatus under subclass 150 wherein the driven device or inclined path for
    carrying or conveying the material within the chamber causes the material
    to follow a helical or tortuous path through the chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 203+ for
    conveyors providing plural or zigzag paths for treated material within
    kilns, houses, or containers.


CLS 414/152
TXT With means outside of chamber to carry or guide material to, or from,
    device or path:

    Apparatus under subclass 150 with means ahead of the chamber entrance, or
    beyond the chamber exit, to carry or guide the material to, or from, the
    driven device or inclined flow path.


CLS 414/153
TXT With driven means within chamber to manipulate or transfer material:

    Apparatus under subclass 150 provided with driven means within the chamber
    to manipulate the work with respect to the device or path, or to transfer
    the work to or from the device or path onto supporting structure within the
    chamber.


CLS 414/154
TXT Including track-guided, wheeled vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 150 wherein the means for moving the material
    includes a track-guided, wheeled vehicle.


CLS 414/155
TXT Having means to support material suspended therebelow:

    Apparatus under subclass 154 in which the material is supported on a member
    located below the wheels of the vehicle.


CLS 414/156
TXT Including reciprocating or vibratory conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 150 wherein the means for moving the material
    includes a conveyor of the reciprocating or vibratory type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 206 for
    pusher-type conveyors providing for moving treated material within kilns,
    houses, or containers.


CLS 414/157
TXT Including endless conveyor (e.g., apron, pusher type etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 150 wherein the means for moving the material
    includes a conveyor of the endless type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 207 and 208
    for endless conveyors for moving treated material within kilns, houses, or
    containers.


CLS 414/158
TXT Including screw, rotary, or rotating pusher, conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 150 wherein the means for moving the material
    includes a conveyor of either a screw type, a rotary type, or a rotating
    pusher type.


CLS 414/159
TXT Including roller conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 150 wherein the means for moving the material
    includes a conveyor comprised of a plurality of powered rollers.


CLS 414/160
TXT Charging of chamber:

    Apparatus under subclass 147 in which the means for moving, or enabling
    gravity movement of, the material carries or conveys it to, adjacent to, or
    into the chamber.


CLS 414/161
TXT With control system responsive to condition in chamber:

    Apparatus under subclass 160 wherein a system is provided for controlling
    the material-moving means, which system includes means for determining a
    condition (e.g., material level, location of material, etc.) which exists
    within the chamber and for responding thereto by causing the
    material-moving means to operate in a manner which will correct or
    otherwise change the condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    294+,   for the combination of a static receptacle and charging or charge
    distributing means therefor, and wherein the combination includes means for
    responding to a condition which exists in the receptacle or the charging or
    charge distributing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 101 for fuel feeders responsive to fuel bed
    conditions.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 56 for dispensers in which the discharge is
    controlled by the quantity in a receiver which is also discharging (e.g.,
    using).


CLS 414/162
TXT Through plural ports in top of chamber:

    Apparatus under subclass 160 wherein the material moving means and/or the
    means enabling gravity movement introduces the material into the chamber
    through plural entrances located in the top of the chamber.


CLS 414/163
TXT From vehicle-carried hopper located above ports:

    Apparatus under subclass 162 in which the material moving means includes a
    vehicle-carried hopper which is positioned above the entrances of the
    chamber while material is moving from the hopper to the chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, as explained in the reference thereto
    appearing in subclass 147 above.


CLS 414/164
TXT With closures for ports and means on vehicle to manipulate them:

    Apparatus under subclass 163 wherein the chamber entrances have closures
    and the hopper-carrying vehicle has means located thereon to operate (e.g.,
    open) the closures.


CLS 414/165
TXT By depositing material onto surface of glass melt:

    Apparatus under subclass 160 wherein the means for moving, or enabling
    gravity movement of, the material deposits it onto the surface of a glass
    melt located, at least in part, within the chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 335 for a glass furnace having
    charging means.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, for charging or discharging
    electric glass furnaces.


CLS 414/166
TXT With pushing device to move material therealong:

    Apparatus under subclass 165 in which a device is provided for pushing the
    material along the surface of the glass melt after it has been placed
    thereon by the charging means.


CLS 414/167
TXT By driven device for transporting material to a stationary, at least in
    part, accumulating means for subsequent release into chamber by gravity:

    Apparatus under subclass 160 wherein the means for moving material includes
    a driven, material-transporting device and a stationary, at least in part
    relative to the chamber, material accumulating means which receives the
    material from the device and then releases it into the chamber by gravity.


CLS 414/168
TXT Receptacle moved back and forth along inclined way (e.g., skip, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 167 in which the driven device is a receptacle
    which reciprocates along an inclined way between a load receiving point and
    the accumulating means.


CLS 414/169
TXT Accumulating means includes serially arranged closures:

    Apparatus under subclass 168 wherein the material accumulating means
    includes two or more serially-arranged closures (e.g., to inhibit change in
    pressure gradient), one of which releases the material into the chamber.

    (1)     Note.  While it is necessary that each closure occupy a
    flow-path-blocking position during some portion of a chamber-charging
    cycle, it is not necessary that more than one closure be in such a position
    (i.e., a position in which it stops incoming material) during the period in
    which a charge is being accumulated for release into the chamber.


CLS 414/170
TXT Each comprising bell of bell and hopper type accumulating means:

    Apparatus under subclass 169 wherein each of the closures comprises a bell
    of the kind found in a material accumulating means of the bell and hopper
    type.

    (1)     Note.  Most frequently, a plurality of bells is indicative of a
    plurality of hoppers; occasionally, however, a single hopper is provided
    with a plurality of bells (e.g., one at its outlet).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclass 184 for means for treating ores
    or for extracting metals wherein the means applies heat to the work (e.g.,
    the means is a furnace), and further wherein means is provided for moving
    the work through the heat applying means, and lastly wherein the moving
    means includes a storage chamber having a discharge port in the bottom
    thereof which port is closed by a valve member which is movable axially of
    the port (i.e., a bell and hopper arrangement).


CLS 414/171
TXT Conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 167 in which the driven device is a conveyor.


CLS 414/172
TXT By driven device for transporting material to and/or into, or into and
    within chamber:

    Apparatus under subclass 160 wherein the means for moving material includes
    a driven device for transporting material to, toward, into, or into and
    within the chamber.


CLS 414/173
TXT Plural, successive, driven devices:

    Apparatus under subclass 172 wherein the means for moving material includes
    two or more successive, driven material transporting devices (e.g.,
    successive conveyors, conveyor and carrier, etc.).


CLS 414/174
TXT Thrower and at least one feeder conveyor therefor:

    Apparatus under subclass 173 in which one of the driven devices comprises
    means for projecting material by exerting a force on said material to move
    the same and then causing said force to be released from said material,
    whereby said material will be projected and continue to move unsupported,
    in a trajectory, over a horizontal distance to, into, or within the
    chamber, and the other driven device comprises one or more conveyors which
    feed material to the former device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 104+ for a blower feeding fuel to a furnace.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 638+ for thrower-type
    conveyors.


CLS 414/175
TXT Including screw conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 174 wherein the feed conveyor is, or the feed
    conveyors include, a conveyor of the screw-type.


CLS 414/176
TXT Including pusher conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 174 wherein the feed conveyor is, or the feed
    conveyors include, a conveyor of the pusher-type.


CLS 414/177
TXT Two or more conveyors, one traversing open top, or opening in top of,
    chamber:

    Apparatus under subclass 173 wherein the driven devices include two or more
    conveyors in series, one of which traverses an opening in the top of, or an
    open top of, the chamber to distribute the material within.


CLS 414/178
TXT Receptacle moved back and forth along inclined way (e.g., skip):

    Apparatus under subclass 172 in which the driven device is a receptacle
    which reciprocates along an inclined way between a load receiving point and
    the chamber.


CLS 414/179
TXT Movably mounted conveyor traverses open top, or opening in top of, chamber:

    Apparatus under subclass 172 wherein the driven device includes a conveyor
    which traverses an opening in the top of, or an open top of, the chamber to
    distribute material within.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177,    for the combination of a device of this subclass and an infeed
    conveyor therefor.


CLS 414/180
TXT Including apparatus to advance a material-supporting element to a point
    within chamber, release material, and retract element:

    Apparatus under subclass 172 wherein the driven device includes apparatus
    to advance a material-supporting element to a point within the chamber,
    release material from the element, and retract the element from the chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150+,   for a driven device including a material-supporting element which
    moves material to a point within the chamber, and may (a) release the
    material, retract the element, and return to retrieve the material from the
    chamber, or (b) release the material onto a device or path which carries
    the material through and out of the chamber.


CLS 414/181
TXT With driven means to eject material from element:

    Apparatus under subclass 180 provided with driven means for ejecting the
    material supported by the element into the material heating or consuming
    portion of the chamber.


CLS 414/182
TXT Element comprises tiltable, material-underlying support:

    Apparatus under subclass 180 in which the element is a material-underlying
    support which tilts in its entirety to release by gravity the material into
    the material heating or consuming portion of the chamber.


CLS 414/183
TXT Receptacle separable from apparatus (e.g., for refilling):

    Apparatus under subclass 182 wherein the material-underlying support is a
    receptacle which is separable from the apparatus.


CLS 414/184
TXT Receptacle tiltable about axis parallel to direction of apparatus advance:

    Apparatus under subclass 182 wherein the material-underlying support is a
    receptacle tiltable about an axis parallel to the direction of the advance
    of the apparatus into the chamber.


CLS 414/185
TXT Element comprises receptacle having bottom outlet:

    Apparatus under subclass 180 wherein the material-supporting element is a
    receptacle which has an outlet in a lower portion thereof.


CLS 414/186
TXT Element comprises grab:

    Apparatus under subclass 180 wherein the material-supporting element is a
    grab which discharges the material by releasing its grip thereon.


CLS 414/187
TXT Material accumulating and holding structure, and driven conveyor therein
    serving to move (e.g., eject) material from structure to chamber:

    Apparatus under subclass 172 in which the driven device includes, or
    consists of, a material accumulating and holding structure and a driven
    conveyor located in, or forming a part of, the structure to remove material
    from the structure and direct it into the chamber.


CLS 414/188
TXT Including wheeled carriage for supporting the structure:

    Apparatus under subclass 187 in which the material accumulating and holding
    structure is mounted and supported on a wheeled carriage for movement
    relative to the chamber.


CLS 414/189
TXT Driven conveyor comprises rotatable, pocketed gate:

    Apparatus under subclass 187 wherein the driven conveyor comprises a
    rotatable, pocketed gate which forms part of the accumulating and holding
    structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 367+ for a dispenser having a discharge
    assistant in the form of a rotary conveyor-type trap chamber.


CLS 414/190
TXT Screw conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 187 wherein the driven conveyor comprises a
    conveyor of the screw type located, at least in part, within the
    accumulating and holding structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 110 for a screw conveyor which moves material
    from a hopper into a furnace.


CLS 414/191
TXT Traversing hoist having material-underlying support or material attracting
    or gripping means:

    Apparatus under subclass 172 wherein the driven device comprises a
    traversing hoist having means located thereon to attract or grip the
    material or an underlying member to support the material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    212,    Traversing Hoists, appropriate subclasses for a hoist of that class
    having means for handling a load.


CLS 414/192
TXT Carrier-mounted, tiltable receptacle:

    Apparatus under subclass 172 wherein the driven device includes a tiltable
    receptacle (e.g., bin, container, etc.) mounted on a driven carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    303+,   for charging a static receptacle by gravity flow from a portable
    load carrier.


CLS 414/193
TXT Thrower:

    Apparatus under subclass 172 wherein the driven device comprises means for
    projecting material by first exerting a force on said material to move the
    same and then causing said force to be released from said material, whereby
    said material will be projected and continue to move unsupported, in a
    trajectory, over a horizontal distance to or into the chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174,    for a similar device combined with a feeder conveyor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 104+ for a blower for feeding fuel to a
    furnace.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 638+ for a thrower type of
    conveyor.


CLS 414/194
TXT Reciprocating or oscillating:

    Apparatus under subclass 193 wherein the thrower includes a member which
    reciprocates or oscillates relative to the chamber and the material is
    projected to or into the chamber as a result of its contact with the member.


CLS 414/195
TXT Rotary:

    Apparatus under subclass 193 wherein the thrower includes a member which
    revolves about an axis and the material is projected to or into the chamber
    as a result of its contact with the member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 642 for a rotary thrower type of
    conveyor.


CLS 414/196
TXT Conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 172 wherein the driven device comprises a conveyor.


CLS 414/197
TXT Screw:

    Apparatus under subclass 196 wherein the conveyor is of the screw type.


CLS 414/198
TXT Reciprocating pusher or reciprocating conveying surface:

    Apparatus under subclass 196 wherein the conveyor comprises a reciprocating
    pusher or a reciprocating conveying surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 109 and 114 for reciprocating-type fuel
    feeders.


CLS 414/199
TXT By material-supporting structure movable, or having a movable component, to
    release material into chamber by gravity:

    Apparatus under subclass 160 wherein the means enabling movement of
    material includes material-supporting structure movable, or having a
    portion thereof movable, to release by gravity material into the chamber
    (e.g., gated hopper, tilting bin, etc.).


CLS 414/200
TXT Including serially arranged closures:

    Apparatus under subclass 199 wherein the supporting structure includes two
    or more serially arranged closures (e.g., to inhibit change in pressure
    gradient), one of which releases the material into the chamber.

    (1)     Note.  While it is necessary that each closure occupy a
    flow-path-blocking position during some portion of a chamber-charging
    cycle, it is not necessary that more than one closure be in such a position
    (i.e., a position in which it stops incoming material) during the period in
    which a charge is being accumulated for release into the chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169+,   for a similar device in combination with a receptacle movable back
    and forth along an inclined way.


CLS 414/201
TXT At least one comprising bell of bell and hopper type supporting structure:

    Apparatus under subclass 200 in which one or more of the closures comprises
    a bell of the kind found in a material supporting structure of the bell and
    hopper type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclass 184 as explained in the reference
    thereto appearing in subclass 170 above.


CLS 414/202
TXT With means to improve seal between mating surfaces:

    Apparatus under subclass 201 wherein means is provided on the bell or
    hopper to improve the seal between the mating surfaces of these members.


CLS 414/203
TXT Having bell and/or hopper mounted for rotation:

    Apparatus under subclass 201 wherein either the bell or the cooperating
    hopper is, or both are, mounted for rotation relative to the other portions
    of the supporting structure (e.g., to distribute material which is on the
    bell).


CLS 414/204
TXT Bell and hopper:

    Apparatus under subclass 199 wherein the supporting structure is a hopper
    with a closure in the form of a material-supporting bell.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclass 184 as explained in the reference
    thereto appearing in subclass 170 above.


CLS 414/205
TXT With means to distribute material after release from structure:

    Apparatus under subclass 204 provided with means to distribute the material
    after it has been released by the supporting structure into the chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300+,   for driven, charge distributing means in combination with a
    receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclass 85.2 for a cupola having a
    fuel agitating stirrer.


CLS 414/206
TXT With means to distribute material after release from structure:

    Apparatus under subclass 199 provided with means to distribute the material
    after it has been released by the supporting structure into the chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300+,   for driven, charge distributing means in combination with a
    receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclass 85.2 as explained in the
    reference thereto appearing in subclass 205 above.


CLS 414/207
TXT Comprising a tiltable material containing member:

    Apparatus under subclass 199 in which the supporting structure comprises a
    material containing member (e.g., bin, container, receptacle, etc.) which
    tilts to dump material into the chamber.


CLS 414/208
TXT By inclined flow path:

    Apparatus under subclass 160 in which the means enabling gravity movement
    includes an inclined flow path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, appropriate subclasses
    for gravity conveyors, per se.


CLS 414/209
TXT Discharging of chamber by driven device:

    Apparatus under subclass 147 in which the means for moving the material is
    a driven device which discharges the material out of, from, etc., the
    chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304+,   for nongravity discharging means for a static receptacle.


CLS 414/210
TXT With means beyond chamber exit to move or guide material discharged
    therefrom by the device:

    Apparatus under subclass 209 comprising an additional device for carrying
    or conveying, or structure for conducting, or supporting and conducting,
    the material upon its departure from the chamber.


CLS 414/211
TXT Means comprises endless or rotary conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 210 wherein the additional device is an endless or
    rotary conveyor.


CLS 414/212
TXT Means comprises portable (e.g., vehicle mounted, etc.) material receiving
    chute:

    Apparatus under subclass 210 wherein the conducting, or supporting and
    conducting, structure is a chute mounted for relocation.


CLS 414/213
TXT Device comprises screw conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 209 wherein the driven device is a conveyor of the
    screw type.


CLS 414/214
TXT Device comprises pushing or pulling mechanism:

    Apparatus under subclass 209 wherein the driven device comprises mechanism
    for pushing or pulling (e.g., pusher-type endless conveyor, reciprocating
    pusher, etc.) the material from the chamber.


CLS 414/215
TXT Mechanism repositionable for serving plural chambers:

    Apparatus under subclass 214 in which the mechanism is repositionable for
    discharging several different chambers.


CLS 414/216
TXT Discharging of chamber by gravity, and means beyond exit thereof to guide,
    move, or stop material:

    Apparatus under subclass 147 wherein the chamber is discharged by gravity
    and means is provided beyond the chamber exit to guide, move, or stop the
    material discharged from the chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    328+,   for the gravity discharge of a gated, static receptacle to one or
    more vehicle-mounted receivers.


CLS 414/217
TXT APPARATUS FOR MOVING MATERIAL BETWEEN ZONES HAVING DIFFERENT PRESSURES AND
    INHIBITING CHANGE IN PRESSURE GRADIENT THEREBETWEEN:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising means to move or enable
    gravity movement of material from a region having a particular pressure to
    a region having another pressure and prevent or significantly retard any
    change in the pressure differential between the regions.

    (1)     Note.  There may be one means for moving or enabling gravity
    movement of material and another for inhibiting pressure change, which
    means are separably identifiable, or there may be a means which
    accomplishes both functions but which does not consist of separate and
    distinct components or devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 129+ for apparatus of that class for
    carrying out a reaction in which a catalyst (e.g., solid material in
    granular form) is employed, which apparatus may include zones of different
    pressures.


CLS 414/218
TXT Including screw conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 217 wherein the moving and charge-inhibiting means
    includes a screw conveyor.


CLS 414/219
TXT Including trap chamber having horizontal axis of rotation:

    Apparatus under subclass 217 wherein the moving and change-inhibiting means
    includes an assembly comprising a disc- or spindle-like member having one
    or more pockets (e.g., recesses) in its periphery, and a housing in which
    the member is mounted for rotation about a horizontal axis, which assembly
    is located in the path of material movement for receiving, isolating and
    passing along a quantity of the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189,    for material supporting structure having a driven, rotatable,
    pocketed gate which moves material into a heating chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 367+ for a dispenser having a discharge
    assistant in the form of a rotary conveyor-type trap chamber.


CLS 414/220
TXT With means for changing pressure in trap chamber:

    Apparatus under subclass 219 wherein the device includes means for changing
    the pressure within the one or more chambers as they move between the
    regions.


CLS 414/221
TXT Including serially arranged valves in path having a vertical component
    (e.g., airlocks, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 217 wherein the enabling and inhibiting means
    includes two or more successive valves, located in a path wherein the
    material moves under the influence of gravity, which cooperate one with
    another to receive, isolate, and release a quantity of material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169+    and 220+, for material supporting structure having serially
    arranged closures which release material into a heating chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclasses 62+, 124+ and 169 for air
    locks associated with fluid current conveyors.


CLS 414/222
TXT APPARATUS FOR CHARGING A LOAD HOLDING OR SUPPORTING ELEMENT FROM A SOURCE,
    AND MEANS FOR TRANSPORTING THE ELEMENT TO A WORKING, TREATING, OR
    INSPECTING STATION:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising means for charging a
    load-grasping device, load-securing (e.g., impaling, suction, etc.)
    structure, or load-underlying surface, from a source of material supply,
    and means to move the device, structure, or surface to, or  translationally
    align it with, a nominal or unspecified work, treatment, or inspection
    station not classifiable elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  The device or structure may form all or part of the charging
    means if it removes an article or material from the source (i.e., a
    self-charging device or structure).

    (2)     Note.  The source may be a quantity of material or a plurality of
    articles or may be a single, continuously replaceable article (e.g.,
    articles supplied serially by a conveyor to the device, structure, or
    surface).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147+,   for related structure in apparatus for charging or discharging a
    chamber of a type utilized for a heating function.

    217+,   for apparatus that moves materials between zones (one or both of
    which may be a treatment chamber) of differing pressures and inhibits
    changes in the pressure gradient therebetween.

    749+,   for means for moving an article in a horizontal, linear path to a
    particular location, which path may be within a machine.  The means may
    also support the load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 339.1+ for a conveyor, or a
    system of conveyors, which transports material to a specifically claimed
    work, treatment, or inspection station along its path; however, if the
    station is not so claimed, the conveyor or system thereof, is classified
    elsewhere in the class (198).

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 55+ for related structure not involving a
    source of material supply for the load holding or supporting element.

    483,    Tool Changing, subclasses 14+ for apparatus including a tool
    transfer means combined with either a tool support or storage means, and
    further including a workpiece transfer means.


CLS 414/223
TXT Supply source includes member capable of 3600 revolution:

    Apparatus under subclass 222 wherein the supply source may rotate 3600
    about a support axis.


CLS 414/224
TXT Supply source includes a chute:

    Apparatus under subclass 222 wherein the supply source is an inclined flow
    path which conveys material to the charging position of the device,
    structure, or surface.


CLS 414/225
TXT Load holding or supporting element includes gripping means:

    Apparatus under subclass 222 wherein the device, structure, or surface
    includes means to grip the load.

    (1)     Note.  A means for gripping a load may form the load-grasping
    device or the load-securing structure in its entirety.


CLS 414/226
TXT Including pivoted jaw:

    Apparatus under subclass 225 wherein the load-gripping means includes at
    least one pivotably mounted jaw.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 86+ for work engaging and holding
    structure comprising movable jaws.


CLS 414/227
TXT APPARATUS PARTICULARLY ADAPTED FOR CHARGING OR DISCHARGING A FACILITY
    COMPRISING ONE OR MORE SITES FOR THE PARKING OF WHEELED VEHICLES:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising means for carrying, moving,
    placing, transporting, etc., one or more wheeled vehicles from, in, into,
    on, onto, off from, out of, within, etc., a facility where it may be
    allowed to remain for a period of time.  The facility may comprise only a
    site for parking one vehicle, or it may involve a plurality of parking
    sites; in the latter case, in particular, it may include building structure
    (e.g., as in a parking garage).  Any parking site, or any or all of a
    plurality of such sites, may be either (a) fixed in nature, or (b) of a
    kind which is occasionally or frequently subjected to being moved bodily
    (e.g., orbitally, laterally displaced, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  "Site", as used hereinafter, shall be understood to mean
    parking site.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structure (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 174+ for a structure
    of that class which may include means peculiar to the direction or control
    of vehicular, surface traffic.

    410,    Freight Accommodation on Freight Carrier, subclasses 4+ for the
    accommodation of a vehicle on a vehicle-transporting carrier of that class.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclass 101 for the accommodation
    of a vehicle on a vehicle-transporting carrier of that class.


CLS 414/228
TXT Facility includes structure (e.g., ramp, angularly related successive
    locations for a vehicle, etc.)  necessitating self-propellability or
    steerability of vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 227 wherein the facility is so constructed as to
    require that a vehicle, which is to move or be moved from one location to
    another at or in the facility, have a capability for propelling itself
    and/or of being steered.

    (1)     Note.  While it is commonplace in the parking facility art, usually
    as a matter of convenience or expediency, to drive a vehicle onto or off
    from a site, this and the indented subclasses are limited to providing only
    for those facilities which are so constructed that some or all of the
    movement of a vehicle is possible only if the vehicle possesses one or more
    capabilities of the nature described.  In other words, this subclass does
    not extend to include a mere forward or backward movement of a vehicle on a
    level surface because movement of that nature may be accomplished manually
    if necessary.

    (2)     Note.  A patent is proper for original placement here if there is
    any suggestion in the claims of structure which necessitates
    self-propellability, etc., on the part of the vehicle.

    (3)     Note.  A patent is properly cross-referenced here when it is clear
    that, in spite of the absence of structure for this subclass, an intention
    exists that an operator remain with the vehicle during at least a portion
    of the time while it is being moved to or from a site.


CLS 414/229
TXT Upwardly inclined, pivotable parking site for receiving driven vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 228 wherein the facility includes a site which
    comprises an upwardly inclined, pivotably mounted surface along which a
    vehicle moves under it own power.  The axis of pivot is horizontal and is
    perpendicular to the direction of travel of the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  Occasionally the purpose of making the site pivotable is to
    create space therebeneath for the parking of another vehicle.


CLS 414/230
TXT Caused to pivot by advancing vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 229 wherein the site pivots as a result of the
    movement of a vehicle along the surface thereof from a point on one side of
    the axis of pivot to a point on the opposite side thereof.


CLS 414/231
TXT With control system responsive to changeable operating instructions:

    Apparatus under subclass 227 provided with a system for controlling the
    movement of a vehicle to or from a site, which system has a capacity for
    accepting, comprehending, and responding to delivery, retrieval, etc.,
    instructions which are of a variable nature.

    (1)     Note.  The concept of this subclass is that of a control system
    which, as a minimum, is capable of accepting (by code or otherwise) the
    designation of a site, analyzing the location thereof, selecting a route
    thereto, causing a vehicle moving means to follow that route and either
    deposit or pick up a vehicle upon reaching the site, and then causing the
    moving means to return to its usual locus for receiving incoming vehicles
    or discharging outgoing ones, or to an alternative locus if so ordered.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252,    for a related but generally less complex system wherein the moving
    means, upon command, transports the vehicle along a predetermined route to
    a specified destination, and particularly, see (1) Note and (2) Note
    thereof.


CLS 414/232
TXT With means to sense condition of site:

    Apparatus under subclass 227 provided with means for investigating a site
    to determine its status (i.e., occupied or unoccupied) or any other
    characteristic thereof pertinent to its suitability for receiving a vehicle.


CLS 414/233
TXT Including one or more movable sites:

    Apparatus under subclass 227 wherein the facility includes at least one
    site which comprises a movable, vehicle-supporting device or element to
    which an incoming vehicle moves, or is moved, and on which the vehicle
    remains during its stay, or the predominant portion thereof, at the
    facility.  The site and its vehicle may move frequently relative to the
    facility (e.g., to permit the receipt or discharge by the facility of other
    vehicles), or their movement may be only that necessary for the site to
    move its vehicle to the specific location which they will occupy and to
    return it therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  The following observations may be made concerning the
    movable site concept:

      (a)   The phrase "device or element" embraces structures ranging from a
    driven carrier (e.g., conveyor, elevator, etc.) to a single supporting
    member (e.g., dolly, platform, pallet, etc.) so long as it is susceptible
    of moving, or being moved, while supporting a particular vehicle which will
    remain thereon for most of its stay at the facility.

      (b)   A movable site most frequently, but not always, is located on a
    translatably movable transporting member of one kind or another. Such a
    transporting member may be (1) a carrier which receives a single vehicle
    and which has some degree of independence of movement, as provided for in
    subclasses 236+ below, or (2) a plural-vehicle-accommodating carrier (e.g.,
    a conveyor), certain ones of which are provided for in subclasses 242+
    below, and see the definition of that subclass for certain arbitrary
    distinctions as to what constitutes a movable site therefor.


CLS 414/234
TXT Vehicle assigned to particular supporting member (e.g., platform, dolly,
    cage, etc.) having some degree of independence either as to means, time or
    direction of movement:

    Apparatus under subclass 233 wherein a movable site comprises a member
    which receives one vehicle and forms the supporting element on which it
    rests during all or a predominant portion of its stay in or at the
    facility, and which member exhibits a degree of independence, as evidenced,
    for instance, by (a) being carried by a transporting device, or driven by
    an external means, but being separable or detachable from either one to
    follow another path or remain stationary, (b) having its own drive means
    and moving independently in a prescribed path or at random or remaining at
    rest, or (c) otherwise exhibiting a degree of independence of time or
    direction of movement.

    (1)     Note.  A separate supporting member of the kind contemplated by
    subclass 239 below, but intended for manual movement and therefore lacking
    the drive means required for that subclass (239), is found here.


CLS 414/235
TXT Supporting member separable from endless, member-transporting carrier, or
    disengageable from endless drive means, and movable away therefrom for
    receiving, discharging or storing vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 234 wherein at least one supporting member is
    transported by an endless carrier, or is driven by an endless drive means,
    and is separable, or disengageable, respectively, therefrom for moving
    apart to a location at which it may receive or discharge a vehicle or to a
    fixed site where it and the vehicle will remain.


CLS 414/236
TXT Plurality of supporting member moved in recirculating fashion by succession
    of driving devices:

    Apparatus under subclass 234 wherein a plurality of supporting members are
    moved in a single, fixed path, or in a plurality of paths which share a
    common origin and terminus, and wherein the means for moving the member
    comprises a plurality of successively arranged driving devices.

    (1)     Note.  The successively arranged driving devices may be powered
    from a single source.


CLS 414/237
TXT Path of moving member describes generally rectangular loop:

    Apparatus under subclass 236 wherein the members move in a path which
    comprises a loop having two pair of opposite, parallel sides, one pair of
    which ordinarily is significantly greater in length than the other pair.


CLS 414/238
TXT Successive devices each include endless, member-driving element (e.g.,
    belt, cable, chain, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 237 wherein each of the successive driving devices
    includes an endless belt, cable, chain, etc., which engages and moves the
    member.


CLS 414/239
TXT One or more separate supporting members and means to impart independent,
    linear or partly linear, movement thereto:

    Apparatus under subclass 234 comprising at least one separate member for
    receiving and supporting a single vehicle and means to move any or all such
    members in an independent manner and in a path which is, at least in part,
    linear in direction.

    (1)     Note.  The moving means may be a self-contained drive means, or it
    may be an external drive means; if there are a plurality of supporting
    members, an external drive means moves only one member at a time.

    (2)     Note.  See (1) Note of subclass 234 above.


CLS 414/240
TXT Member moving from particular location to discharge and/or receive vehicle,
    and returning thereto:

    Apparatus under subclass 239 wherein a member is associated with a specific
    location in the facility and occupies that location when supporting a
    parked vehicle, the member leaving that location only to obtain a vehicle
    which is to be parked on it or to deliver such a vehicle.


CLS 414/241
TXT With means to transfer vehicle to or from supporting member:

    Apparatus under subclass 234 wherein means is provided for moving a vehicle
    to or from a supporting member.


CLS 414/242
TXT On driven, plural-site carrier initially receiving vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 233 wherein a movable site comprises any vehicle
    accommodating space on a driven carrier which is in excess of the space
    required for the carrier to transport a single vehicle, and wherein the
    carrier is the one to which the vehicle moves, or is moved, upon arriving
    at the facility.

    (1)     Note.  Vehicle accommodating platforms attached to an endless drive
    member, or mounted on a rotatable wheel, obviously constitute movable
    parking site.  Less clear, however, is the case of, for instance, a two-,
    three-, four-car, vertically and/or horizontally driven, carrier; while
    such a carrier frequently is intended to transport only one vehicle at a
    time, and often does only that, the fact that it is common practice in the
    parking facility industry to utilize, when operating at or near the
    capacity of the facility, all available vehicle-accommodating space
    therefore necessitates treating any space in excess of that required for
    one vehicle as a movable site, since a corresponding number of vehicles may
    be left thereon for as long a period as desired.


CLS 414/243
TXT With loading means, external to carrier, at facility entrance:

    Apparatus under subclass 242 wherein means which does not form a part of
    the structure of the initial carrier, is provided at or near the entrance
    to the facility for the purpose of moving (e.g., transferring) a vehicle to
    or from the initial carrier.


CLS 414/244
TXT Serving also movable site on subsequent driven carrier, or fixed site:

    Apparatus under subclass 242 wherein the driven, plural-site, initial
    carrier functions also to transport a vehicle to (a) a movable site on a
    driven carrier which is located beyond the initial carrier, or (b) a fixed
    site.


CLS 414/245
TXT By moving linearly in a horizontal direction:

    Apparatus under subclass 244 wherein the initial carrier moves along a path
    which is represented by a horizontal line.

    (1)     Note.  The movement of this subclass often is of a reciprocatory
    nature.


CLS 414/246
TXT And moving vertically (e.g., laterally shiftable elevator, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 245 wherein the initial carrier moves vertically
    as well as horizontally.


CLS 414/247
TXT By moving linearly in vertical direction or orbiting in vertical plane:

    Apparatus under subclass 244 wherein the initial carrier moves either along
    a path which is represented by a vertical line or in a closed path which
    lies in a vertical plane.


CLS 414/248
TXT Endless carrier having sites attached thereto (e.g., suspended therefrom,
    etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 247 wherein the initial carrier comprises an
    endless drive means having one or more sites attached to it.

    (1)     Note.  The sites may be attached between a pair of spaced,
    parallel, endless drive means, but frequently are suspended from a single
    such means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 793+ for a surface for
    conveying a unit load and means for driving the surface about an endless
    path.


CLS 414/249
TXT Moving linearly in vertical direction or orbiting in vertical plane:

    Apparatus under subclass 242 wherein the driven, plural-site, initial
    carrier moves either along a path which is represented by a vertical line
    or a closed path which lies in a vertical plane.


CLS 414/250
TXT Revolving about single, horizontal axis:

    Apparatus under subclass 249 wherein the initial carrier orbits in a
    circular path which has, as its center, a horizontal line.


CLS 414/251
TXT Endless carrier having sites attached thereto (e.g., suspended therefrom):

    Apparatus under subclass 249 wherein the initial carrier comprises an
    endless drive means having one or more sites attached to it.

    (1)     Note.  (1) Note of subclass 248 applies similarly here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 793+ as explained in subclass
    248 above.


CLS 414/252
TXT With vehicle storage or retrieval system responsive to manual designation
    of destination:

    Apparatus under subclass 227 provided with a system having means for
    manually specifying (i.e., by an operator) a particular site to which a
    vehicle is to be moved, either for the storage or the retrieval thereof,
    and for moving a vehicle thereto or therefrom over a route which usually
    (but see (1) Note) is predetermined and not subject to variation.

    (1)     Note.  The concept of this subclass is that of, for example,
    sequencing circuitry which, when energized (e.g., by closing a switch),
    causes the vehicle-moving apparatus to respond by moving the vehicle in a
    predetermined path to a particular, nonchangeable destination.  (A system
    of this nature is sometimes described in the art as an "automatic" one).

    (2)     Note.  The ability of a system to select the shortest one of
    plural, alternative routes to or from a site is considered to be within the
    capabilities of an apparatus of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231,    for a control system which has a capacity for responding to
    changeable operating instructions.


CLS 414/253
TXT With means to transfer, or facilitate transfer of, vehicle from carrier to
    site or vice versa:

    Apparatus under subclass 227 wherein means is provided to move a vehicle
    from a carrier to a site or from a site to a carrier, or, in the
    alternative, a means which does not in itself accomplish the movement of
    the vehicle, but which enables such movement to be performed more easily,
    more readily, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241,    for means to transfer a vehicle to or from a movable site wherein
    the site comprises a supporting member which receives and stays with a
    particular vehicle.

    243,    for means to transfer a vehicle to or from a movable site, which
    site is on an initial, receiving, driven carrier, and wherein the means is
    located at the entrance to the facility, externally of the carrier.


CLS 414/254
TXT Including sets of intermeshing support elements having relative vertical
    movement:

    Apparatus under subclass 253 wherein the transfer means includes
    interacting sets of spaced, load-supporting elements (i.e., fingers), the
    elements of one set being so aligned with and related to the elements of
    the other set that a vehicle which is resting on one set will pass to the
    other set upon vertical movement of one set relative to the other set.


CLS 414/255
TXT By exerting upward, in addition to generally horizontal, force:

    Apparatus under subclass 253 wherein the transfer means moves a vehicle by
    utilizing not only a lateral force, but also a lifting force.


CLS 414/256
TXT And forming sole support for vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 255 wherein the transfer means accepts the entire
    weight of the vehicle.


CLS 414/257
TXT Complementary, driven, vehicle-supporting conveyors on carrier and site:

    Apparatus under subclass 253 wherein the transfer means comprises at least
    one driven conveyor located on each of a carrier and a site, which
    conveyors cooperate in supporting and moving a vehicle from one to the
    other.


CLS 414/258
TXT Tiltable or inclined means for supporting vehicle, on carrier or site:

    Apparatus under subclass 253 wherein the transfer or transfer-facilitating
    means comprises a carrier- or site-located means for supporting the
    vehicle, which means is either (a) movable into a position where it is
    inclined with respect to the horizontal (and hence to the carrier or site),
    or (b) formed in such a manner as to be so inclined; in either instance,
    the resultant inclination of the vehicle gives it the inherent capability
    of moving relative to its support.

    (1)     Note.  The supporting means, particularly in (b) above, may be an
    integral portion of the carrier or site.


CLS 414/259
TXT By exerting generally horizontal force:

    Apparatus under subclass 253 wherein the transfer means moves the vehicle
    by applying thereto (e.g., by push-pull device) a lateral force.

    (1)     Note.  The movement of a vehicle by the application of a force of
    the nature contemplated by this subclass ordinarily requires that the
    wheels of the vehicle be free to turn.


CLS 414/260
TXT Comprising component of carrier having both horizontal and vertical paths
    of travel:

    Apparatus under subclass 259 wherein the transfer means travels with and
    operates from a carrier which undergoes movement in at least one horizontal
    path and at least one vertical path while supporting one or more vehicles.

    (1)     Note.  The carrier on which the means is located may be an
    auxiliary component of another carrier (e.g., the other carrier is a
    vertically moving elevator and the carrier having the transfer means
    travels therewith in a vertical direction and departs therefrom to move
    horizontally), in which instance it is the auxiliary carrier which fulfills
    the requirement of this subclass.


CLS 414/261
TXT Carrier-facility-site relationship:

    Apparatus under subclass 227 involving an operational, physical, spatial,
    or structural interrelationship of any of a carrier or a facility or a site
    to one or more of the other entities.


CLS 414/262
TXT Route to site utilizes plural carriers:

    Apparatus under subclass 261 wherein a vehicle, during the course of its
    movement either to or from a site, is transported on or by at least two,
    different carriers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    260,    for a plural carrier arrangement which is described in (1) Note of
    that subclass.


CLS 414/263
TXT Sites arranged radially of carrier rotatable in whole or in part:

    Apparatus under subclass 261 wherein the sites of a facility are arranged
    in peripheral relationship to a carrier, which carrier, or a component
    thereof, is movable about a vertical axis which passes through the carrier.

    (1)     Note.  The carrier frequently is movable in a vertical direction,
    also, and, in some such instances, may undergo both kinds of movement
    simultaneously.


CLS 414/264
TXT Sites arranged in superposed, longitudinal rows and in confronting
    relationship to carrier in intervening aisle:

    Apparatus under subclass 261 wherein two, spaced-apart groups of sites face
    each other across a passageway, each group having rows of sites which
    extend both horizontally and vertically along the passageway, and wherein
    at least one carrier is located in the passageway.

    (1)     Note.  The type of carrier most commonly found here is capable, in
    many instances, of being driven both horizontally and vertically at the
    same time, thus imparting to a vehicle being carried thereby a movement
    which is "diagonal" relative to the confronting rows of sites.


CLS 414/265
TXT GUIDED, WHEELED DEVICE FOR TRANSPORTING MAIL AND EXTERNAL MEANS
    CO-OPERATING THEREWITH FOR LOADING OR UNLOADING THE DEVICE:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising a wheeled, mail
    transporting device and structure (e.g., tracks, cable, etc.) to guide the
    device to a mail collection and/or delivery station where it loads or
    unloads the mail with the assistance of an external means.

    (1)     Note.  The patents of this subclass, subclass 39 of former Class
    214, involve subject matter in which there has been no activity in recent
    years. Accordingly, the subclass has merely been relocated to a point where
    the art can be kept intact.


CLS 414/266
TXT PLURAL STATIC STRUCTURES FOR SUPPORTING DISCRETE LOADS AND CHARGING OR
    DISCHARGING MEANS THEREFOR:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising a plurality of
    charge-supporting elements or charge-holding receptacles, which elements or
    receptacles are of a static (e.g., fixed, stationary, etc.) nature, and
    means for moving a charge toward, to, onto, into, from, away from, off, out
    of, etc., each of the elements or receptacles.

    (1)     Note.  Elements or receptacles which remain in a particular
    location, but which include means for moving (e.g., rotatably driving) them
    while in that location, as well as means for charging or discharging them,
    are classified elsewhere in this class (e.g., subclass 787).

    (2)     Note.  To be proper for the plural receptacles of this subclass,
    charges must be supported by the receptacles, not merely transported
    therewith or therethrough, and transferred from the charging means to the
    receptacles or from the receptacles to the discharging means.

    (3)     Note.  Charge-supporting elements or charge-holding receptacles
    which are disclosed as being portable, but for which neither movement nor
    means to allow movement (e.g., wheels, vehicle mounted, conveyor mounted,
    etc.) is claimed, are treated as being static.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331,    for the charging or discharging, by an external means, of a movable
    rack having superposed, charge-supporting elements.


CLS 414/267
TXT Load-underlying members (e.g., racks, receptacles (or a compartmented
    receptacle), shelves, troughs, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 266 wherein the plural structures comprise members
    which contact the discrete charges from below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    288+,   for the combination of plural receptacles and plural charging or
    discharging means therefor, but wherein each receptacle is charged or
    discharged solely by a particular one of the means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 196 for presses with plural pairs of opposing
    pressure surfaces, which surfaces are relatively movable to compress
    material  therebetween, and having means for placing the material thereon
    or removing it therefrom.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclasses 117+ and 155+ for a fluid
    current conveyor having plural inlets and plural outlets, respectively.


CLS 414/268
TXT With means for selectively charging a plurality of receptacles from a
    single source, or selectively discharging a plurality of receptacles to a
    single destination:

    Apparatus under subclass 267 wherein the load underlying members comprise
    receptacles and wherein means is provided whereby (a) a plurality of
    receptacles may be charged selectively (e.g., one at a time in such order
    as may be chosen) from one source of material, or (b) a plurality of them
    may be discharged selectively to one destination.


CLS 414/269
TXT Charging a plurality of receptacles:

    Apparatus under subclass 268 wherein the means is particularly adapted for
    charging a plurality of receptacles from a single source. 406, Conveyors:
    Fluid Current, subclasses 1+ for selective delivery.


CLS 414/270
TXT Condition responsive:

    Apparatus under subclass 269 wherein means is provided to sense a condition
    of the selective charging means, or the material, or one or more of the
    receptacles during the charging thereof, and additional means is provided
    to respond to the information obtained by the first means by initiating
    action on the part of the selective charging means to correct or otherwise
    change the existing condition if it is other than the desired or intended
    one.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclasses 3+ for condition-responsive
    selective delivery.


CLS 414/271
TXT By driven conveyor having gated discharging locations spaced therealong:

    Apparatus under subclass 269 wherein the means comprises a driven conveyor
    having a plurality of individually controllable outlets along its length,
    the location of each outlet corresponding with a charge-receiving opening
    of one receptacle of the plurality thereof.


CLS 414/272
TXT By conveyor movable (e.g., pivotable, etc.) to reposition outlet thereof:

    Apparatus under subclass 269 wherein the means comprises a conveyor, of a
    driven or a gravity type, which is so mounted that its discharge region may
    be moved (e.g., by swinging about an axis located in another region of the
    conveyor) to any particular one of a number of different discharge points,
    which points are each represented by the charge-receiving opening of one
    receptacle of the plurality thereof.


CLS 414/273
TXT With control system responsive to changeable operating instructions:

    Apparatus under subclass 267 wherein a system is provided for controlling
    the charge moving means, which system has a capacity for accepting,
    comprehending, and responding to instructions which are of a varying or
    variable nature.

    (1)     Note.  The concept of this subclass does not extend to include what
    is sometimes referred to as an "automatic" operation of the charge moving
    means; that is, the provision of a particular circuit, which is sequenced
    or programmed to always produce the same predetermined movement of the
    means to a particular destination, is not sufficient for inclusion herein.

    (2)     Note.  To be proper for this subclass, a system should be capable
    of, as a minimum, accepting (by code or otherwise) the designation of a
    destination, selecting a route for, and causing the means to move to, that
    destination, depositing thereat, or picking up therefrom, a charge, and
    returning to its original location--or to an alternative location if so
    ordered.  Further refinements of such a system might include (a)
    investigating, on the part of the means, of the status of its destination
    and, if found to preclude the execution of its mission, requesting an
    alternative  destination, (b) as in (a) but the assumption by the means of
    the responsibility for finding a suitable alternative destination, etc., or
    (c) identifying a particular article among a plurality of articles and
    retrieving that article.

    (3)     Note.  As long as a system for (2) Note is disclosed, the claiming
    of a specific component thereof is sufficient for classification here.


CLS 414/274
TXT With means on charging or discharging means to determine status of member:

    Apparatus under subclass 273 which has means located on the moving means
    for investigating the availability of the member.


CLS 414/275
TXT With means to detect obstruction and alter movement of charging or
    discharging means:

    Apparatus under subclass 273 with means for determining whether the path of
    the charge will cause undesired contact with an object (e.g., because of
    the path being blocked by a misaligned charge, because of improper
    clearance with a load-underlying member, etc.), and for altering the motion
    of the moving means to avoid, or to minimize the effect of, such contact.


CLS 414/276
TXT Inclined members:

    Apparatus under subclass 267 wherein the member is inclined and
    controllably retains the charge (e.g., gated gravity flow path).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 347.1+ for a conveyor system
    including at least two conveyor sections for moving a load between a source
    and a destination and having, located between those sections, one or more
    auxiliary conveyor sections for temporarily storing items, which auxiliary
    sections may be of the gravity flow path type.


CLS 414/277
TXT Charging or discharging means includes load-sustaining surface and device
    to transfer load, with horizontal component of movement, from or to surface
    or member:

    Apparatus under subclass 267 wherein the charge moving means includes a
    charge   sustaining surface and a device to transfer, with a horizontal
    component of motion, the charge from or to the member.

    (1)     Note.  The charge sustaining surface and the transfer device may
    consist of separate structures (e.g., a movable rack and a pusher car).


CLS 414/278
TXT Device comprises one or more conveyors of driven roller or endless apron
    type:

    Apparatus under subclass 277 wherein the transfer device comprises one or
    more conveyors of the driven roller or endless apron type which form part
    of the surface or the member.


CLS 414/279
TXT Device includes self-powered, track-guided car:

    Apparatus under subclass 277 in which the transfer device includes a
    self-powered vehicle which travels on and is guided by tracks which are
    located on the surface and the member.


CLS 414/280
TXT Device includes push-pull mechanism:

    Apparatus under subclass 277 wherein the transfer device includes driven
    means to push or pull a charge from or to the surface or the member.


CLS 414/281
TXT Charging or discharging means includes elevating device, movable in
    horizontal direction (e.g., portable, etc.), having load-sustaining surface:

    Apparatus under subclass 267 wherein the charge moving means is a device
    for raising and lowering a charge-sustaining surface, which device is
    movable horizontally from one location to another.


CLS 414/282
TXT Including additional means to move surface horizontally relative to device:

    Apparatus under subclass 281 and including additional means to impart
    another component of horizontal movement to the surface, which component
    consists of movement relative to the device.


CLS 414/283
TXT Pivotably or rotatably:

    Apparatus under subclass 282 in which the other component of horizontal
    movement comprises pivotable or rotatable displacement.


CLS 414/284
TXT With detachably associated auxiliary carrier for transporting device during
    portion of its horizontal travel:

    Apparatus under subclass 281 in which the shiftable raising and lowering
    device is carried along part of its horizontal travel by a separable,
    device-supporting means (e.g., interaisle transfer car).


CLS 414/285
TXT Charging or discharging means comprises plural endless conveyors or plural
    runs of single endless conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 267 in which the charge moving means includes
    plural endless conveyors or plural runs of a single endless conveyor.


CLS 414/286
TXT With load-supporting pallet:

    Apparatus under subclass 267 including a movable charge-supporting device
    in the nature of a platform (e.g., a pallet), which platform is transferred
    by the moving means to and from the member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 51.11+ for an
    industrial platform (e.g., a pallet or skid adapted to receive handling
    means).

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 386+ for a container of
    that class provided with a pallet feature.


CLS 414/287
TXT STATIC RECEPTACLE OF A MATERIAL CONDITIONING TYPE AND MEANS TO MOVE, OR
    FACILITATE MOVEMENT OF, MATERIAL TO, WITHIN, OR FROM THE RECEPTACLE:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising a fixed or stationary
    chamber (e.g., bin, vessel, container, receptacle, etc.) of a kind
    associated with an operation involving the treating of material, and either
    charge moving means, or charge-movement-related structure, for moving, or
    facilitating the movement of, a charge of material to, within, or from the
    chamber, which combination is not properly classifiable elsewhere (e.g., in
    the relevant treatment class).

    (1)     Note.  An example of the art found herein is a bin and a charging
    means therefor, which bin is intended to be used, at least in part, for the
    drying of grain and therefore is provided with structure enabling the
    passage of air.

    (2)     Note.  If a means to treat material is present, classification is
    in the appropriate treating class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217+,   for apparatus that moves material between zones (one or both of
    which may be a treatment chamber) of differing pressures and inhibits
    changes in the pressure gradient therebetween.

    222,    for related structure, but wherein is additionally provided means
    for charging a load holding or supporting element from a source of material
    or articles.


CLS 414/288
TXT STATIC RECEPTACLE AND MEANS FOR CHARGING OR DISCHARGING, OR FACILITATING
    THE CHARGING OR DISCHARGING OF, THE RECEPTACLE:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising a charge-holding receptacle
    which is of a fixed or stationary nature (e.g., a bin, silo, tank, etc.)
    and either charge-moving means, or charge-movement-related structure, for
    moving, or facilitating the movement of, a charge of material to or from
    the receptacle, and wherein the purpose of the movement is to charge or
    discharge material to or from the receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  A receptacle which remains in a particular location, but
    which includes means for moving (e.g., rotatably driving) it while in that
    location, as well as means for charging or discharging it, is classified
    elsewhere in this class (e.g., subclass 787).

    (2)     Note.  To be proper for this subclass, a charge must be supported
    by the receptacle, not merely transported therewithin or therethrough, and
    transferred from the charging means to the receptacle or from the
    receptacle to the discharging means.

    (3)     Note.  A receptacle which is disclosed as being portable, but for
    which neither movement nor means to allow movement (e.g., wheels, vehicle
    mounted, conveyor mounted, etc.) is claimed, is treated as being static.

    (4)     Note.  Where the combination of a tank or vat disclosed for holding
    liquids is claimed in combination with means for introducing and/or
    removing work therefrom for contacting the work with the liquids,
    classification is not in this class (414), but in some other class, of
    which Class 134, Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, is the generic
    class.  The notes to Class 134 set out the various classes having the noted
    combination.

    (5)     Note.  See (2) Note of the definition of subclass 104.05, in Class
    15, Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, for the line as to devices
    for removing the hardened material from retorts or other chambers, and for
    the classification where the device for removing hardened material is
    claimed as permanently associated with the chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    267+,   for the combination of a single receptacle which is divided into
    plural compartments and means for charging or discharging the compartments.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 104.05+ for
    devices for scraping or cutting material from the interior of a pipe.  See
    (5) Note above.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 360+ for charging a
    cooking chamber.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses.
    See (4) Note above.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses, and see subclass 166 for a
    dispenser which is tiltable to discharge its contents by gravity, and
    subclasses 608+ for a dispenser having a casing or a support which is
    ambulatory.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, appropriate subclasses for
    electron microscopes having means for inserting a specimen into the
    evacuated champer of the microscope without destroying the vacuum.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, appropriate subclasses for the
    combination of a fluid current conveyor and a receptacle.


CLS 414/289
TXT With alarm, indicator, or signal:

    Apparatus under subclass 288 wherein the receptacle or the charge-moving or
    charge-arranging means includes means to sense a condition therein or
    thereof and to react thereto by providing an indication of the status of
    the condition sensed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148,    for the combination of an alarm, indicator, or signal responsive to
    a sensing means in a system involving a chamber of the type utilized for a
    heating function and a charging or discharging means therefor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclasses for an alarm,
    indicator, or signal of a mechanical nature.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, appropriate subclasses for an alarm,
    indicator, or signal of an electrical nature.


CLS 414/290
TXT Receptacle contains liquid in which charge is submergibly sealed:

    Apparatus under subclass 288 wherein the receptacle contains liquid in
    which the charge is submerged to form a liquid seal around the charge to
    protect the atmosphere from the charge or vice versa.


CLS 414/291
TXT With means to handle (e.g., recirculate, remove, etc.) dust:

    Apparatus under subclass 288 wherein the receptacle includes means to
    dispose of or otherwise manage dust created incident to a loading or an
    unloading operation.


CLS 414/292
TXT With means to seal receptacle in vicinity of entrance for charging or
    discharging means:

    Apparatus under subclass 288 wherein the receptacle or the charge-moving
    means is provided with means to tightly join the charge-moving means to
    that region of the receptacle through which it passes.


CLS 414/293
TXT Charging or charge-distributing means:

    Apparatus under subclass 288 comprising means for either (a) moving a
    charge into a receptacle, (b) facilitating the charging by arranging or
    rearranging the charge within the receptacle, or (c) performing both
    functions.

    (1)     Note.  "Charging" and "charge-distributing" means frequently are
    not readily distinguishable from one another, either structurally or
    functionally, and therefore are treated together in this and the indented
    subclasses.


CLS 414/294
TXT Condition responsive:

    Apparatus under subclass 293 wherein means is provided to sense a condition
    of the receptacle, or the charge-moving or charge-arranging means, or the
    charge during a charging or a distributing operation, and additional means
    is provided to respond to the information obtained by the first means by
    initiating action on the part of the charge-moving or charge-arranging
    means to correct or otherwise change the existing condition if it is other
    than the desired or intended one.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161,    for the combination of a chamber of the type utilized for a heating
    function and charging or discharging means therefor, and wherein the
    combination includes a control system for responding to a condition which
    exists in the chamber.


CLS 414/295
TXT Position of charging means controlled by level of material in receptacle:

    Apparatus under subclass 294 wherein the condition sensed is the level
    (i.e., the height) of the material in the receptacle, and the additional
    means comprises a device for repositioning the charge-moving or
    charge-arranging means in accordance therewith (e.g., for the purpose of
    maintaining the level of material uniform throughout the receptacle).


CLS 414/296
TXT Drive means of charging conveyor controlled by level of material in
    receptacle:

    Apparatus under subclass 294 wherein the condition sensed in the level
    (i.e., the height) of the material in the receptacle, and the additional
    means comprises a device for controlling (e.g., starting, stopping, etc.)
    the driving arrangement of a charging means in the form of a conveyor
    (e.g., for the purpose of regulating the level of the material in the
    receptacle).


CLS 414/297
TXT With means to ream or cut, or with collapsible means to form, vertical
    discharge passage in material during charging:

    Apparatus under subclass 293 wherein means is provided to form a vertical
    opening through the material being loaded while its level is rising in the
    receptacle, which opening subsequently will serve as a discharge route for
    the material, the means comprising either (a) a means to remove or displace
    the material and thereby form a self-sustaining hole therein, or (b) a
    self-erecting or manually erected conduit to form a walled hole in the
    material, which conduit collapses or is otherwise removed as the level of
    material falls during an unloading operation.


CLS 414/298
TXT Serving also to discharge receptacle:

    Apparatus under subclass 293 wherein either the charge-moving means or the
    charge-arranging means acts also upon the charge to move it from the
    receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150+,   for means for charging a chamber of a type utilized for a heating
    function, which means also serves to discharge the chamber.


CLS 414/299
TXT Terminal portion of means comprises gravity flow path (e.g., chute, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 293 wherein either the moving means or the
    movement-related structure includes, at and/or immediately preceding its
    discharge outlet, material supporting and/or guiding structure in the
    nature of a gravity conveyor (e.g., a chute).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, appropriate subclasses
    for specific chute structure.


CLS 414/300
TXT Having charge distributing means of driven type:

    Apparatus under subclass 293 wherein the material arranging or rearranging
    means is provided with a means for driving it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205     and 206, for the combination of a chamber of a type utilized for a
    heating function and means for distributing material within the chamber.


CLS 414/301
TXT Rotary type:

    Apparatus under subclass 300 wherein the material arranging or rearranging
    means comprises an element, member or device which is rotatable about an
    axis for the purpose of scattering or otherwise spreading, including
    leveling the surface of, material which already is present therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 650+ for a
    container for nonfluid material and scattering means therefor.


CLS 414/302
TXT Having one or more conveyors rotatable about a vertical axis at an end
    thereof:

    Apparatus under subclass 301 wherein the rotary means comprises at least
    one driven conveyor, which conveyor is also driven in a traversing
    direction, whereby it is caused to rotate bodily about a vertical axis at
    one of its ends.


CLS 414/303
TXT Charging a static receptacle by gravity flow from a portable load carrier:

    Apparatus under subclass 293 wherein the charging means includes a portable
    charge carrier (e.g., a vehicle-mounted container) from which the charge is
    transferred by gravity from the carrier to the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    192,    for charging a chamber of a type utilized for a heating function by
    gravity flow from a carrier-mounted, tiltable receptacle.


CLS 414/304
TXT Nongravity discharging means:

    Apparatus under subclass 288 comprising means for moving (e.g., pushing,
    pulling, carrying, etc.) a charge from a receptacle by a force other than
    that of gravity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209+,   for the combination of a chamber of the type utilized for a heating
    function and a driven device for discharging it.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclass 550.01 for a receptacle-like
    member (e.g., bin, tank, etc.) having therein or thereon a driven conveyor
    for the purpose of discharging material contained in the receptacle.  [At
    such time as the overlapping projects involving these two classes (198 and
    414) are completed, it will be possible to resolve the conflict which
    apparently exists between the subject matter of this subclass (304) and
    that of subclass 550.01 of Class 198].

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 251+ for
    a dispenser having a discharge assistant.


CLS 414/305
TXT Including at least one discharge assistant of the compound motion type:

    Apparatus under subclass 304 wherein the charge-moving means includes one
    of more devices for moving the charge from the receptacle, at least one of
    which devices comprises a driven, material-transporting carrier (e.g., a
    conveyor), which carrier is driven also in a displaceable manner (e.g.,
    pivotably, translatably, etc.) relative to the receptacle for the purpose
    of increasing its effectiveness for removing material therefrom.


CLS 414/306
TXT Having compound motion assistant located proximate to bottom of receptacle
    and displaceable generally parallel thereto:

    Apparatus under subclass 305 wherein a compound motion discharge assistant
    is located near the bottom of the receptacle, is driven displaceably in a
    direction more or less parallel to the bottom, and initiates the moving of
    the charge from the receptacle by acting upon the lower portion of the
    charge.


CLS 414/307
TXT Condition responsive:

    Apparatus under subclass 306 wherein means is provided to sense a condition
    of the receptacle, or the charge-moving means, or the charge during a
    discharging operation, and additional means is provided to respond to the
    information obtained by the first means by initiating action on the part of
    a bottom-located discharge assistant to correct or otherwise change the
    existing condition if it is other than the desired or intended one.


CLS 414/308
TXT Assistant separable from receptacle:

    Apparatus under subclass 306 wherein the discharge assistant is located in
    the receptacle in such a manner that it may be removed therefrom (e.g., for
    placement in another receptacle).

    (1)     Note.  There may or may not be specific structure for attaching or
    joining the assistant to the receptacle.


CLS 414/309
TXT Pivotably displaceable assistant and member for shielding its fixed end:

    Apparatus under subclass 306 wherein the discharge assistant is mounted for
    pivotable movement about the center of the receptacle, and a member capable
    of supporting that portion of the contents of the receptacle which overlies
    it is located proximately above that end of the assistant about which the
    pivotable movement takes place.

    (1)     Note.  The member may be for the purpose of preventing the contents
    of the bin from descending into and clogging an outlet located centrally of
    the floor and into which the assistant discharges, or, in the event that
    the assistant discharges, instead, to another conveyor, it may be for the
    purpose of protecting an interconnecting drive means (e.g., a transmission)
    therebetween, etc.


CLS 414/310
TXT Comprising screw conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 306 wherein the discharge assistant consists of
    one or more conveyors of the kind having a material-moving element in the
    form of a helical thread.


CLS 414/311
TXT Including means for loosening packed material:

    Apparatus under subclass 310 wherein either the material-moving element of
    the screw conveyor, or a device which undergoes movement simultaneously
    with the conveyor, is provided with means (e.g., teeth) for penetrating and
    dislodging material in the receptacle, which material (e.g., ensilage)
    comprises particles which adhere sufficiently to one another to resist, at
    least in part, gravity-induced flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    321,    for a loosening means in the environment of a top-located, compound
    motion discharge assistant.


CLS 414/312
TXT Having receptacle-reacting element of displaceable-movement drive means
    located on conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 310 wherein the means for displaceably driving the
    conveyor includes an element which is mounted on the conveyor and moves
    therewith, which element engages the receptacle for the purpose of
    pivotably or translatably moving the conveyor.

    (1)     Note.  There also may be cooperating structure on the receptacle;
    for example, the element may be a toothed wheel which is rotated about the
    longitudinal axis of the conveyor and which drivingly engages a rack
    located on the receptacle adjacent its perimeter.


CLS 414/313
TXT Having compound motion assistant operating on top of material:

    Apparatus under subclass 305 wherein a compound motion discharge assistant
    is located in such a manner as to initiate the discharging of material from
    the receptacle by removing material from the upper portion or surface of
    the charge.


CLS 414/314
TXT Including wall cleaning means:

    Apparatus under subclass 313 including means for removing from a wall or
    walls of the receptacle material which accumulates thereon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 104.05+ as
    explained in the reference thereto appearing in subclass 288 above.


CLS 414/315
TXT Condition responsive:

    Apparatus under subclass 313 wherein means is provided to sense a condition
    of the receptacle, apparatus or material during a discharging operation,
    and additional means is provided to respond to the information obtained by
    the first means by initiating action on the part of a top-located assistant
    to correct or otherwise change the existing condition if it is other than
    the desired or intended one.


CLS 414/316
TXT To maintain material surface horizontal:

    Apparatus under subclass 315 wherein the condition sensed by the first
    means is the relation of the top surface of the material to the horizontal,
    and the additional means responds to a departure from the horizontal on the
    part of the top surface by causing the assistant to remove material in such
    a manner that the top surface is made horizontal or more nearly so.


CLS 414/317
TXT Route of material being discharged includes vertical segment through
    remainder of charge:

    Apparatus under subclass 313 wherein the material being removed from the
    top of the charge moves vertically downward in a path, structurally defined
    or otherwise, through the rest of the material in the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    297,    for a static receptacle having a charging means and provided also
    with means for forming a vertical discharge passage in the material during
    the charging thereof.


CLS 414/318
TXT With conveyor extending to discharge opening in sidewall of receptacle:

    Apparatus under subclass 313 provided with a driven conveyor for receiving
    material from the discharge assistant and moving it to an outlet in a side
    of the receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  The outlet may be in the form of a vertical slit having a
    plurality of successive, movable or removable, closure elements; in such an
    instance, the conveyor descends by gravity with the lowering level of
    material in the receptacle, and the closure elements are open successively
    in accordance with the descent of the conveyor.


CLS 414/319
TXT Screw-type pickup conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 313 wherein the discharge assistant consists of
    one or more conveyors of the kind having a material-moving element in the
    form of a helical thread.


CLS 414/320
TXT Including plural screw elements:

    Apparatus under subclass 319 wherein there are two or more screw conveyors,
    the axes of which are either parallel with, or angularly related to, one
    another, and which conveyors are, at least for the most part, coextensive
    with one another (e.g., side by side).


CLS 414/321
TXT Including means for loosening packed material:

    Apparatus under subclass 319 wherein the material-moving element of the
    screw conveyor, or a device which undergoes movement simultaneously with
    the conveyor, is provided with means for penetrating, scraping, or
    otherwise freeing material in the receptacle for movement, which material
    (e.g., ensilage) comprises particles having a tendency to adhere to one
    another.

    (1)     Note.  The material frequently is of a kind (e.g., ensilage)
    consisting of particles which tend to adhere to one another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    311,    for a loosening means in the environment of a bottom-located,
    compound motion discharge assistant.


CLS 414/322
TXT Means for displacing assistant involves driven, wheel-like, support member
    rolling on surface of material:

    Apparatus under subclass 313 wherein the discharge assistant is driven
    displaceably by a powered, rotating member (e.g., a wheel) which supports,
    at least in part, the conveyor, and which member is supported, in turn, by
    drivingly engaging the surface of the material in the receptacle.


CLS 414/323
TXT Condition responsive:

    Apparatus under subclass 304 wherein means is provided to sense a condition
    of the receptacle, apparatus or material during an unloading operation, and
    additional means is provided to respond to the information obtained by the
    first means by initiating action on the part of a nongravity discharging
    device to correct or otherwise change the existing condition if it is other
    than the desired or intended one.


CLS 414/324
TXT Including flail:

    Apparatus under subclass 304 wherein the unloading means includes at least
    one device consisting of a rotatably driven, vertical shaft having
    flexible, arm-like elements extending radially (i.e., in a generally
    horizontal plane) therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  The elements may serve in conjunction with other structure
    (e.g., a helical thread formed on the vertical shaft) in unloading the
    receptacle, or they may act alone in doing so.

    (2)     Note.  The device sometimes (e.g., when unloading ensilage) serves
    also to dislodge or loosen the material for movement.

    (3)     Note.  The elements may droop to a position alongside the shaft
    when the latter is not in motion.


CLS 414/325
TXT Including one or more driven conveyors located within or partly within
    receptacle for making initial pickup of material:

    Apparatus under subclass 304 wherein the unloading means comprises one or
    more conveyors of a driven nature, which are located wholly or partly
    within the receptacle, and which engage the material, put it in motion
    toward a desired point of release, and carry it thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 550.01+ explained in the
    reference thereto appearing in subclass 304 above.


CLS 414/326
TXT At least one of screw type:

    Apparatus under subclass 325 wherein the conveyor, or at least one of the
    conveyors, is of a kind consisting of a shaft having a helical thread
    thereon.


CLS 414/327
TXT At least one of endless type:

    Apparatus under subclass 325 wherein the conveyor, or at least one of a
    plurality of them, is of the kind which includes an endless member in the
    nature of an apron, band, belt, chain, etc.


CLS 414/328
TXT Gravity discharge of a gated, static receptacle to one or more
    vehicle-mounted receivers:

    Apparatus under subclass 288 in which the structure for facilitating the
    movement of the charge is a gate which controls the passage of the material
    from the receptacle into a receiver carried by a vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216,    for the combination of a chamber of a type utilized for a heating
    function, which chamber discharges by gravity, and a material guiding,
    moving, or stopping means beyond the exit thereof.


CLS 414/329
TXT Located on moving vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 328 in which the vehicle-mounted receiver is in
    motion during the transfer of the charge from the receptacle into the
    receiver.


CLS 414/331
TXT MOVABLE RACK HAVING SUPERPOSED, CHARGE-SUPPORTING ELEMENTS, AND EXTERNAL
    MEANS FOR CHARGING OR DISCHARGING THE ELEMENTS:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising a portable rack having
    superposed, interconnected load-supporting elements, and means supported
    externally thereof to place a load on or remove a load from an element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    564,    for the charging or discharging of one or more endless or rotary
    carriers by an elevator or hoist.

    567,    for the charging or discharging of one or more endless or rotary
    carriers by a vertically swinging load support.


CLS 414/332
TXT RECEPTACLE HAVING CHARGING OR DISCHARGING MEANS AND ADAPTED FOR RELOCATION
    FROM ONE OR ANOTHER OF A PLURALITY OF SITES OF INTERIM USE:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising a receptacle and means for
    charging or discharging it, which receptacle and means are intended to be
    used more or less temporarily at each of a plurality of sites and are
    accordingly adapted (e.g., by a provision for reducing the overall size to
    facilitate transport) to be relocated from one site to another.

    (1)     Note.  The relocating of the receptacle does not contemplate the
    use of the receptacle for the purpose of transporting a load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333     through 402, for the combination of a load-transporting type
    vehicle and an external means for loading or unloading the vehicle.

    467+,   for self-loading or unloading vehicle.

    919,    for a body of art relating to the transport and erection of a
    storage member (e.g., a portable silo).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 608+ for a dispensing device having a casing
    or support of an ambulant nature.


CLS 414/333
TXT LOADING OR UNLOADING A RAILWAY CAR BY UTILIZING THE TRACTOR OF A
    TRACTOR-TRAILER, LOAD-TRANSPORTING TYPE VEHICLE TO MANEUVER THE TRAILER, OR
    A PART THEREOF, ONTO OR OFF THE CAR:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising a railway car for receiving
    or relinquishing a load in the form of a trailer, or a component thereof,
    of a load-transporting type vehicle, and a tractor for the trailer, the
    tractor serving to back, turn, or otherwise manipulate the trailer for
    placing the trailer or a component thereof on, or removing it from, the car.

    (1)     Note.  See (2), (3), and (4) Notes of subclass 467.


CLS 414/334
TXT MOVING, WHEELED, LOAD-TRANSPORTING TYPE VEHICLE AND LOADING OR UNLOADING
    DEVICE THEREFOR, SUPPORTED AT LEAST IN PART INDEPENDENTLY OF THE VEHICLE
    AND TRAVELING THEREWITH DURING TRANSFER OF LOAD THEREBETWEEN:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising a moving, wheeled,
    load-transporting type vehicle and a device for traveling with the vehicle
    for the purpose of delivering a load to the vehicle or removing a load from
    it.  The device is not supported in its entirety by the vehicle, although
    it may receive a portion of its support therefrom.  The device may derive
    its movement from some form of interconnection with the vehicle (e.g., a
    separable coupling, an arm to contact the means and move it along with the
    vehicle, etc.); however, it is sufficient if their movement is coordinated
    in any other manner.

    (1)     Note.  See (2), (3), and (4) Notes of subclass 467.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    340+,   for the combination of a plurality of wheeled, load-transporting
    type vehicles and means external (in part, at least) thereto for
    transferring a load from one vehicle to another, and see the reference in
    that subclass (340) to this subclass (334).


CLS 414/335
TXT Loading device having capability for controlling direction of output
    therefrom:

    Apparatus under subclass 334 wherein the device is a vehicle loader and
    includes structure for regulating the direction in which material, intended
    to be loaded onto the vehicle, leaves the device.


CLS 414/336
TXT Suspendedly supported device:

    Apparatus under subclass 334 wherein the device receives its support from
    an overhead cable or track.

    (1)     Note.  The device may be a loader for a vehicle which is suspended
    from another cable or track (e.g., an aerial tramway car).


CLS 414/337
TXT WHEELED, LOAD-TRANSPORTING TYPE VEHICLE UTILIZES ITS UNINTERRUPTED, FORWARD
    MOTION TO CAUSE AN EXTERNAL, LOAD-ENGAGING STRUCTURE TO REMOVE ITS LOAD:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising a wheeled vehicle of a
    load-transporting type which is moving continuously in its normal direction
    of travel, and external, load-contacting structure which is so positioned
    relative to the vehicle as to extract a load therefrom as the result of the
    movement of the vehicle relative to the structure.

    (1)     Note.  See (2), (3), and (4) Notes of subclass 467.


CLS 414/338
TXT WHEELED, LOAD-TRANSPORTING TYPE VEHICLE UTILIZES ITS UNINTERRUPTED, FORWARD
    MOTION TO CAUSE AN EXTERNALLY SUPPORTED LOAD TO BE TRANSFERRED TO IT:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising a wheeled vehicle of a
    load-transporting type which is moving continuously in its normal direction
    of travel, and external structure in the nature of a load support or a
    device (e.g., a trip) for controlling the release of a load which is held
    by such a support, which structure or device is so positioned relative to
    the vehicle that the movement of the vehicle relative thereto results in
    extracting a load from the structure or in causing the device to release of
    a load for movement onto the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  See (2), (3), and (4) Notes of subclass 467.


CLS 414/339
TXT WHEELED, LOAD-TRANSPORTING TYPE VEHICLES FORMING A TRAIN, AND LOADING OR
    UNLOADING MEANS THEREFOR, LOCATED AT LEAST IN PART THEREON:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising two or more wheeled
    vehicles of a load-transporting type which are arranged tandemly to form a
    train, and means to load or unload one or more of the vehicles, which means
    derives at least a portion of its support from at least one of the vehicles
    but is external, at least in part, to at least one of the vehicles.

    (1)     Note.  Classification here is not excluded by the presence in the
    train of an additional vehicle of a nonload-transporting type, which
    vehicle supports, in whole or in part, the loading or unloading means.

    (2)     Note.  While the vehicles maintain a tandem relationship during a
    load-transporting operation, they may move relative to one another for
    loading or unloading.

    (3)     Note.  See (2), (3), and (4) Notes of subclass 467.


CLS 414/340
TXT WHEELED, LOAD-TRANSPORTING TYPE VEHICLES AND MEANS FOR TRANSFERRING, OR
    ENABLING TRANSFER OF, LOAD FROM ONE VEHICLE TO ANOTHER:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising two or more wheeled
    vehicles of a load-transporting type and means for moving, or facilitating
    the movement of, a load between two of the vehicles.

    (1)     Note.  The means is always external, totally or in part, to at
    least one of the load-transporting type vehicles.

    (2)     Note.  See (2), (3), and (4) Notes in subclass 467.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334+,   for the combination of a moving, wheeled, load-transporting type
    vehicle and a device which travels with the vehicle for the purpose of
    loading or unloading it.  While the device of that subclass (334) may
    possess certain vehicular aspects (e.g., wheels), it does not constitute a
    vehicle of the load-transporting type.


CLS 414/341
TXT By additional load-supporting vehicle for moving with load from one
    load-transporting type vehicle to the other:

    Apparatus under subclass 340 wherein the transferring means comprises a
    vehicle of a type which is capable of supporting a load for the purpose of
    moving with it between the load-transporting type vehicles.


CLS 414/342
TXT Additional vehicle comprises overhead traversing hoist:

    Apparatus under subclass 341 wherein the additional vehicle in one which is
    provided with means for raising or lowering a load and is supported, during
    its transfer of the load, at an elevation which is superior to that of at
    least one of the load-transporting type vehicles.


CLS 414/343
TXT With means on each vehicle cooperating to effect, or facilitate, transfer
    of load:

    Apparatus under subclass 340 wherein the transferring means consists of two
    components or portions, one being located on one vehicle and the second on
    the other vehicle, the two components or portions cooperating with each
    other to cause, or assist in, the movement of a load between the vehicles.


CLS 414/344
TXT With driven load-engaging device, supported at least in part externally of
    the vehicles, for moving load therebetween:

    Apparatus under subclass 340 wherein the transferring means comprises at
    least one powered device (hoist, winch, conveyor, etc.) which engages a
    load and moves it from one vehicle to the other, or at least part of the
    way from one to the other, the device being supported wholly or in part by
    one or more elements, structures, surfaces, etc., which elements, etc., are
    separate from either of the vehicles.


CLS 414/345
TXT Means is confined to one of the vehicles:

    Apparatus under subclass 340 wherein the transferring means is located
    entirely on either the vehicle which is giving up a load or the vehicle
    which is receiving that load.


CLS 414/346
TXT Means comprises tiltable load-supporting portion:

    Apparatus under subclass 345 wherein the means comprises a load-supporting
    member (e.g., bucket, dump body, platform, etc.), which member is mounted
    for movement about an axis.

    (1)     Note.  Most frequently, the member is the load body of a vehicle
    which is intended to discharge by gravity.


CLS 414/347
TXT Means comprises elevatable load-supporting portion traveling in path
    including vertical, rectilinear movement:

    Apparatus under subclass 345 wherein the means comprises a load-supporting
    member on one of the vehicles, which member travels in a path which is
    vertical and rectilinear, in whole or in part.

    (1)     Note.  The member often is an elevatable load body on one of the
    vehicles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    495+,   for a self-loading or unloading vehicle having an elevatable load
    body.

    540+,   for a self-loading or unload vehicle having a means to raise or
    lower a load in a path which includes vertical, rectilinear movement.


CLS 414/348
TXT Having portion suspended from vehicle on overhead way:

    Apparatus under subclass 347 wherein one vehicle travels on a track or
    surface which is above that on which the other vehicle is supported, and
    wherein the load-supporting member is positioned beneath the first-named
    vehicle and serves to lower a load to, or raise a load from, the
    second-named vehicle.


CLS 414/349
TXT WHEELED, LOAD-TRANSPORTING TYPE VEHICLE HAVING DRIVEN MEANS THEREON FOR
    REPOSITIONING LOAD-SUPPORTING PORTION OF VEHICLE TO CAUSE OR FACILITATE
    MOVEMENT OF LOAD TO OR FROM AN EXTERNAL COOPERATING MEANS:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising a wheeled vehicle of a
    load-supporting type which is provided with driven means for repositioning
    (e.g., tilting, elevating, etc.) that element, member, etc., of the vehicle
    by which its load is supported, and external means for cooperating in the
    loading or unloading of the vehicle by serving to either receive a load
    from the vehicle or relinquish a load thereto, the purpose of repositioning
    the element, member, etc., being to move, or aid in the movement of, the
    load from the vehicle to the means or from the means to the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  See (2), (3), and (4) Notes in subclass 467.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    468,    469+ and 495+, for a self-loading or unloading vehicle having a
    repositionable load-supporting portion.


CLS 414/350
TXT Load-supporting portion pivotable about horizontal axis:

    Apparatus under subclass 349 wherein the element, member, etc., is mounted
    for pivotable movement about an axis which lies in a horizontal plane.


CLS 414/351
TXT Cooperating means comprises or includes a conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 349 wherein the external cooperating means either
    comprises a conveyor of a driven or a gravity type or is a load-supporting
    structure which includes such a conveyor.


CLS 414/352
TXT WHEELED, LOAD-TRANSPORTING TYPE VEHICLE HAVING DRIVEN MEANS THEREON FOR
    ENGAGING AND MOVING LOAD HORIZONTALLY, OR WITH HORIZONTAL COMPONENT, TO OR
    FROM AN EXTERNAL COOPERATION MEANS:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising a wheeled vehicle of a
    load-transporting type which is provided with driven means for engaging and
    moving, either in a horizontal direction or in a direction having a
    horizontal component, a load to or from the vehicle, and external means
    cooperating in the loading or unloading of the vehicle by serving to either
    receive a load from the vehicle or relinquish a load thereto.

    (1)     Note.  See (2), (3), and (4) Notes of subclass 467.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    501+,   506, 507+, and 539+, for a self-loading or unloading vehicle having
    a driven means (except for some gravity conveyors in 529+ and 537) for
    moving a load to or from the vehicle, and see particularly subclasses 509+,
    541+, 549, and 559 for moving a load either in a horizontal direction or in
    a direction having a horizontal component.


CLS 414/353
TXT Cooperating means comprises or includes a conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 352 wherein the external cooperating means either
    comprises a conveyor of a driven or a gravity type or is a load supporting
    structure which includes such a conveyor.


CLS 414/354
TXT WHEELED, LOAD-TRANSPORTING TYPE VEHICLE AND EXTERNAL MEANS FOR SUPPORTING
    VEHICLE IN TOTO AND REORIENTING IT INTO LOAD-RELEASING ATTITUDE:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising a wheeled vehicle of a
    load-transporting type which is to be unloaded, and means external of the
    vehicle which supports the vehicle in its entirety and moves (e.g., tips,
    inverts, rotates, etc.) it bodily into an attitude in which its load will
    depart by gravity.

    (1)     Note.  See (2), (3), and (4) Notes in subclass 467.


CLS 414/355
TXT With driven carrier for receiving released load:

    Apparatus under subclass 354 wherein a load carrier of a driven nature is
    provided for receiving and taking away the load caused by the supporting
    and reorienting means to depart from the vehicle.


CLS 414/356
TXT Endless-type conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 355 wherein the driven carrier comprises a powered
    conveyor of the endless type.


CLS 414/357
TXT Vehicle of rail-guided type and track section having rails configured to
    tilt or invert vehicle as result of moving thereonto or progressing
    therealong:

    Apparatus under subclass 354 wherein the vehicle is of a kind which is
    guided by the engagement of its wheels with rails, and the supporting and
    reorienting means comprises a section of track onto or along which the
    vehicle moves, which track section includes rails which are so configured
    as to cause the vehicle to tilt or invert.


CLS 414/358
TXT Vehicle-holding member rollable along underlying support (i.e., axis of
    pivot of vehicle travels laterally):

    Apparatus under subclass 354 wherein the supporting and reorienting means
    comprises a vehicle-holding member in the nature of a cage or related
    structure which at least partially encompasses the vehicle and which member
    includes a peripheral element (e.g., a rim) whereby it may roll, while
    holding the vehicle, along the top of a supporting element which extends in
    a generally horizontal direction.


CLS 414/359
TXT Vehicle-holding framework rotatable about fixed axis passing through
    framework and parallel to longitudinal axis of vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 354 wherein the supporting and orienting means
    comprises a vehicle-holding member in the nature of a cage or related
    structure which at least partially encompasses the vehicle and which member
    is rotatable, while holding the vehicle, about an axis which is fixed and
    which passes through the member in a direction which is parallel to the
    longitudinal axis of the vehicle held therein.


CLS 414/360
TXT Including movable element to clamp vehicle to framework:

    Apparatus under subclass 359 wherein the framework includes at least one
    member which is relocatable into a position wherein it restrains the
    vehicle from shifting relative to the framework.


CLS 414/361
TXT With rotation responsive moving means:

    Apparatus under subclass 360 wherein means actuated by or otherwise
    coordinated with the rotatable movement of the framework is provided for
    moving the member.


CLS 414/362
TXT Pivotably movable structure, at least initially in underlying relation to
    vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 354 wherein the supporting and reorienting means
    comprises a member (e.g., a platform) mounted to swing about an axis
    (structural or mathematical) and wherein the member, prior to tipping,
    inverting, rotating, etc., the vehicle, forms an underlying support
    therefor.

    (1)     Note.  The axis usually lies in a horizontal plane.


CLS 414/363
TXT With means to agitate vehicle or its load:

    Apparatus under subclass 362 wherein means (e.g., a vibrator) is provided
    to shake or otherwise agitate a vehicle on the member and/or a load in the
    vehicle for the purpose of assisting or promoting gravity movement of the
    load from the vehicle.


CLS 414/364
TXT With means for shifting axis of pivot or tilt of structure in vertical
    direction:

    Apparatus under subclass 362 wherein means is provided for changing the
    elevation of the axis about which the member swings.


CLS 414/365
TXT With means to affect exit of load from vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 364 wherein means is provided for redirecting,
    slowing, stopping, etc., the movement of material as it is departing from a
    vehicle which is being tilted, inverted, etc., by the member.


CLS 414/366
TXT Axis of pivot parallels longitudinal axis of vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 364 wherein the axis about which the member swings
    is so located as to be parallel with the longitudinal axis of a vehicle on
    the member.


CLS 414/367
TXT With means to retard or stop vehicle approaching structure:

    Apparatus under subclass 362 wherein means is provided to slow or bring to
    a halt a vehicle which is moving toward the member.


CLS 414/368
TXT With means to guide departing load toward vehicle exit:

    Apparatus under subclass 362 wherein means (e.g., a deflector) is provided
    for directing material which is beginning to move from the vehicle to the
    doorway or other opening through which it is intended that the material
    shall leave the vehicle.


CLS 414/369
TXT With means to operate vehicle-mounted closure member:

    Apparatus under subclass 362 wherein means is provided to open, close, or
    otherwise change the position of a door, gate, etc., which is located on
    the vehicle and which governs the exit or entry of material from or to the
    vehicle.


CLS 414/370
TXT With nonaligned paths for approach and departure of vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 362 wherein a ramp, guide, trackway, etc., is
    provided for a vehicle entering the member and another, differently
    directed ramp, etc., is provided for a vehicle leaving the member.

    (1)     Note.  The entrance and exit ramps, etc., frequently are related to
    the member and to each other in such a manner that a vehicle can traverse
    both ramps with only the aid of gravity.


CLS 414/371
TXT Axis of pivot or tilt of structure parallels longitudinal axis of vehicle
    thereon:

    Apparatus under subclass 362 wherein the axis about which the member swings
    is so located as to be parallel with the longitudinal axis of a vehicle on
    the member.


CLS 414/372
TXT With movable element to clamp vehicle to structure:

    Apparatus under subclass 371 wherein at least one member is provided which
    is relocatable into a position wherein it restrains the vehicle from
    shifting relative to the member.


CLS 414/373
TXT LOAD-TRANSPORTING TYPE VEHICLE AND EXTERNAL MEANS COOPERATING IN THE
    LOADING OR UNLOADING THEREOF:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising a vehicle of a
    load-transporting type which is to be loaded or unloaded, and means
    external of the vehicle which either loads or unloads the vehicle or
    contributes in some manner thereto.

    (1)     Note.  For this particular subclass (373), the vehicle need not be
    of the wheeled kind.

    (2)     Note.  See (2), (3), and (4) Notes of subclass 467.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 137.1 for devices and arrangements for
    loading or unloading a vehicle of the aircraft type, which devices, etc.,
    may include means which is external of the aircraft for cooperating in the
    loading or unloading thereof.


CLS 414/374
TXT Means decelerates moving, wheeled vehicle, load continues to move and
    leaves vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 373 wherein the external means comprises a device,
    element, or member for applying a retarding force to a moving vehicle for
    slowing or stopping it, the retardation being of a degree such that a load
    on the vehicle (and not anchored thereto) will continue to move and thus be
    unloaded from the vehicle.


CLS 414/375
TXT Means agitates, shakes, or vibrates wheeled vehicle or load therein to
    loosen load for departure from vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 373 wherein the external means comprises a device
    for applying a force to the vehicle, or directly to a load of material
    therein, which force is of a kind intended to prevent the material from
    clogging (e.g., "bridging") or otherwise failing to move more or less
    readily from the vehicle.


CLS 414/376
TXT Involving movement of load by gravity from wheeled vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 373 wherein the external means comprises a device,
    element, or member for causing the vehicle or a component thereof to move
    into an attitude or a position whereby the load is no longer restrained
    from responding to the force of gravity and thus departing from the vehicle.


CLS 414/377
TXT Means initiates unloading of vehicle of type having load body, or other
    load holding means suspended therefrom:

    Apparatus under subclass 376 wherein the vehicle is of the kind which has a
    load containing portion, or a load supporting element, suspended below the
    running gear thereof, and the external means comprises a device, element or
    member which acts upon the vehicle or a part thereof to commence the
    unloading of the vehicle.


CLS 414/378
TXT Bottom unloading body:

    Apparatus under subclass 377 comprising a load containing portion which
    includes structure (e.g., door, gate, pivotable body section, etc.) for
    releasing its load from a lower region thereof.


CLS 414/379
TXT Bucketlike body having horizontal, reciprocable movement, and flexible
    strand means for driving it in at least one direction:

    Apparatus under subclass 378 wherein the load containing portion is in the
    nature of a receptacle which travels back and forth in a path which is
    generally horizontal, and wherein a driven cable, chain, rope, etc., is
    provided for moving the portion in at least one direction of its travel.


CLS 414/380
TXT Flexible strand means serves also as initiating means:

    Apparatus under subclass 379 wherein the driven cable, chain, rope, etc.,
    serves also as the device, element, or member which commences the unloading
    of the receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  The driven means may initiate unloading by merely reversing
    its direction of movement, or it may include additional structure (e.g., a
    projection to serve as a trip) for doing so.


CLS 414/381
TXT Tilting body:

    Apparatus under subclass 377 comprising a load containing portion which
    includes structure enabling it to be tipped into a load releasing attitude.


CLS 414/382
TXT About axis parallel to direction of vehicle travel:

    Apparatus under subclass 381 wherein the tipping of the portion takes place
    about a line which is parallel to another line representing the path of
    travel of the vehicle.


CLS 414/383
TXT Means cooperates with motion of vehicle to reorient load body, relative to
    wheels, into load releasing attitude:

    Apparatus under subclass 376 wherein the vehicle is in motion and the means
    comprises a device or structure which, as a result of the vehicle's
    movement, tilts, inverts or otherwise causes the load-holding portion of
    the vehicle to reposition itself, relative to the wheels of the vehicle,
    into an attitude whereby a load therein will fall therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 241.2 for a vehicle of that class
    which may include structure whereby it constitutes the vehicle
    subcombination of this subclass (383).


CLS 414/384
TXT By pivoting body about axis parallel to longitudinal axis of vehicle to
    unload from side:

    Apparatus under subclass 383 wherein the load body pivots about an axis
    which is parallel to the longitudinal axis of the vehicle, thus resulting
    in a sidewise departure of the load.


CLS 414/385
TXT Means comprises driven device for raising one end of vehicle upwardly
    relative to other end thereof:

    Apparatus under subclass 376 wherein the means comprises a device of a
    driven type for lifting or otherwise elevating one end of a vehicle body
    and undercarriage in order to cause a load therein to be shifted by gravity
    toward, and eventually pass out from, the opposite end of the vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    appropriate subclasses for pushing or pulling implements which may be
    particularly adapted to raising one region of a vehicle relative to another
    region thereof, the line between the implements of various areas of that
    class and the devices of this subclass (325) not being established at the
    time of this reclassification.


CLS 414/386
TXT Means comprises driven device for engaging and moving pivotable load body
    relative to remainder of vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 376 wherein the vehicle is of a kind which has a
    load holding portion which is mounted for moving pivotably relative to the
    rest (e.g., undercarriage) of the vehicle, and the means is a device of a
    driven type for causing the portion to pivot (e.g., tilt, invert, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 45+ for apparatus for lifting the body of a vehicle from the
    running gear or undercarriage thereof, which area has not been screened for
    art which may be in conflict with that of this subclass (386).


CLS 414/387
TXT Means comprises device or structure for cooperating with motion of vehicle
    to initiate relocation of body component (e.g., floor or floor section,
    gate, etc.) thereof:

    Apparatus under subclass 376 wherein the vehicle is in motion and the means
    comprises a device or structure which, as a result of the vehicle's
    movement relative thereto, causes one or more movable components of the
    vehicle's body to be repositioned relative to the remainder of the body in
    such a manner as to provide an exit for part or all of the load of the
    vehicle, or, in the alternative, releases a latching mechanism for enabling
    the component to be repositioned by the force of gravity acting on either
    the component or the load, or on both.

    (1)     Note.  It is not necessary that the motion of the vehicle continue
    for the duration of the movement of its load therefrom.

    (2)     Note.  The means of this subclass may serve also to return the
    component (or components) to its nonload-exiting position; in fact, in the
    absence of a more appropriate locus, patents limited to claiming means for
    performing only this operation are classified here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 241.2 for a vehicle of that class
    which may include structure whereby it constitutes the vehicle
    subcombination of this subclass (387).


CLS 414/388
TXT Component comprises oppositely swinging, operatively interconnected gates:

    Apparatus under subclass 387 wherein the component comprises at least one
    pair of pivotably mounted closure members, which members are interlinked
    with one another in such a manner that they swing in opposite directions as
    each moves from its closed to its open, or its open to its closed, position.


CLS 414/389
TXT Means comprises structure for cooperating with a maneuvering, wheeled
    vehicle to engage and acquire a load therefrom or to give up a load thereto:

    Apparatus under subclass 373 wherein the means comprises structure for
    supporting a load, which load will be removed from, or will be given up to,
    a vehicle which moves relative to the structure with other than continuous,
    unidirectional motion, the acquiring or relinquishing of the load being a
    direct result of the movement of the vehicle relative to the structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333,    for the loading or unloading of the trailer of a tractor-trailer
    type vehicle onto or from a railway car by utilizing the tractor to
    maneuver the trailer.

    337     and 338, for removing a load from, or transferring a load to,
    respectively, a load support external of a vehicle by utilizing the
    uninterrupted, forward motion of the vehicle.


CLS 414/390
TXT Of driven type, for unloading a wheeled vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 373 wherein the means comprises one or more driven
    devices (e.g., conveyor, elevator, hoist, etc.) for removing a load from
    one or more vehicles of the wheeled type.


CLS 414/391
TXT Including load raising or lowering device:

    Apparatus under subclass 390 wherein at least one device is of a type which
    imparts a change of elevation to the load.


CLS 414/392
TXT Having means for also moving load laterally:

    Apparatus under subclass 391 wherein the raising or lowering device
    includes means for also imparting movement to the load in either a
    horizontal direction or a direction which includes a horizontal component.


CLS 414/393
TXT With flexible, load-underlying element or surface:

    Apparatus under subclass 392 wherein the device has a load-engaging member
    in the nature of a flexible element or surface, which element or surface
    supports the load from beneath.


CLS 414/394
TXT With bucket or scoop-type holder:

    Apparatus under subclass 392 wherein the device has a load-engaging member
    of a receptacle-like nature.


CLS 414/395
TXT Including load pushing or pulling device:

    Apparatus under subclass 390 wherein at least one device is of a type which
    moves the load by applying thereto a force which is directed toward the
    intended destination of the load.


CLS 414/396
TXT With additional means for aligning vehicle and an external load support:

    Apparatus under subclass 395 wherein the external means comprises, in
    addition to the pushing or pulling device, means for aligning the vehicle
    with a load support (surface, member, etc.) which is external to the
    vehicle and to, or from, which a load is to be pushed or pulled from, or
    to, the vehicle.


CLS 414/397
TXT Means comprises repositionable supporting and/or guiding structure (e.g.,
    chute, etc.) for conducting load moving by gravity to a wheeled vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 373 wherein the means compresses structure (e.g.,
    an inclined chute, a vertical conduit, etc.) which forms a path for a load
    which is moving under the influence of gravity onto or into the vehicle,
    which structure is adjustable (e.g., to align it with the vehicle, to cut
    off the flow of the load, etc.).


CLS 414/398
TXT Power-driven conveyor for loading a wheeled vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 373 wherein the means comprises one or more
    conveyors of a driven type for moving a load onto or into one or more
    vehicles of the wheeled type.


CLS 414/399
TXT Raising or lowering device of driven type for loading a wheeled vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 373 wherein the means comprises one or more driven
    devices for imparting a change of elevation to a load for placing the load
    onto or into one or more vehicles of the wheeled type.


CLS 414/400
TXT Pushing or pulling device for loading a wheeled vehicle by exerting a
    generally horizontal force on load:

    Apparatus under subclass 373 wherein the means comprises one or more
    devices for placing a load onto or into one or more vehicles of the wheeled
    type by applying to the load a generally horizontal force having a bearing
    in the direction of the destination of the load.


CLS 414/401
TXT Means serves to align wheeled vehicle and load receiving or relinquishing
    structure:

    Apparatus under subclass 373 wherein the means comprises a device or
    structure (e.g., cooperating guide elements, device for shifting a vehicle,
    adjustable load-receiving platform, etc.) to align or improve the alignment
    of a vehicle of the wheeled type and a structure to, or from, which a load
    is to be moved from, or to, the vehicle.


CLS 414/402
TXT Means comprises stationary guide or fixed anchor for cooperating with
    loading or unloading means located, at least in part, on wheeled article:

    Apparatus under subclass 373 wherein the means comprises a stationary
    device or a fixed structure, either of which constitutes an indispensable
    element of a loading or unloading means located on a vehicle of a wheeled
    type which is to be loaded or unloaded.

    (1)     Note.  The means may consist, for example, of a post which serves
    to anchor the loading or unloading means, or it may be a guide pulley for a
    haulage cable of the means.

    (2)     Note.  Except for the device or structure, the loading or unloading
    means usually is confined to the vehicle to be loaded or unloaded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    352,    for a wheeled, load-transporting type vehicle having a driven means
    thereon for engaging and moving a load horizontally, or with a horizontal
    component, to or from an external cooperating means, and wherein the driven
    means may utilize a stationary guide or fixed anchor of the kind included
    in this subclass (402).


CLS 414/403
TXT DEVICE FOR EMPTYING PORTABLE RECEPTACLE:

    Devices under the class definition for engaging and emptying portable
    receptacles or containers.

    (1)     Note.  The patents in this and indented subclasses are primarily an
    art collection.  Normally, the minimum requirements of these subclasses is
    the inclusion of (a) means to receive a receptacle in the form of a cradle
    or the like, or (b) means to grasp a receptacle in the form of grasping or
    seizing means, each of which means is instrumental in dumping the
    receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183,    for the emptying of a separable receptacle utilized for charging a
    chamber of the heating type.

    333     through 402, for devices for unloading vehicles, which devices are
    external to the vehicles.

    639+,   for an elevator or hoist device in which the load carrier may be a
    container and is dumped similar to a portable receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 260 for glassworking apparatus having
    product take-out or transfer means mounted above a mold; see the search
    notes thereunder.

    164,    Metal Founding, appropriate subclasses for devices for removing
    molded metallic objects from their molds.


CLS 414/404
TXT For emptying contents thereof into portable receiving means:

    Apparatus under subclass 403 wherein the device engages the receptacle
    (e.g., a basket, bin, box, bucket, can, container, pail, etc.) and handles
    or moves it so as to cause it to be relieved of its contents, and wherein
    is provided a means to receive the contents, which means is of a kind which
    can be bodily relocated from one site to another.

    (1)     Note.  The handling of the receptacle may involve merely picking it
    up, dumping its contents and setting it down, or, on the other hand, there
    may be a significant transporting aspect involved if the receiver is at a
    remote location.


CLS 414/405
TXT By inverting both receptacle and receiving means in order to transfer
    contents from one to other:

    Apparatus under subclass 404 wherein the device juxtapositions the
    receptacle and the receiving means and then inverts both, thus causing the
    contents of the former to move or shift to the latter by the action of
    gravity.

    (1)     Note.  The receptacle and the receiving means often comprise
    receptacles of a like nature, in which instance the receiving means is
    placed upside down above the receptacle and the assembly then inverted to
    cause the contents to move from one receptacle to the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    754,    for means to reorient an article.

    758+,   particularly for means to invert an article.


CLS 414/406
TXT Having receiving means mounted on wheeled vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 404 wherein the receiving means is mounted upon a
    wheeled vehicle and derives its portability therefrom.


CLS 414/407
TXT With closure for receiving means and receptacle-responsive operating means
    for closure:

    Apparatus under subclass 406 wherein the receiving means is provided with a
    closure for that region of the means through which the contents of the
    receptacle passes, and means, responsive to a characteristic or function
    (e.g., attitude, location, movement, etc.) of the receptacle, is provided
    to move the closure from a content-blocking to a content-passing position
    and vice versa.


CLS 414/408
TXT Device includes vertically swinging arm and receptacle support pivotably
    attached thereto:

    Apparatus under subclass 406 wherein the device includes a
    receptacle-moving member which is pivotable about a horizontal axis and a
    receptacle-engaging element on, pivotably attached to, the member.


CLS 414/409
TXT Device includes track-guided, receptacle-supporting carrier:

    Apparatus under subclass 406 wherein the device includes a
    receptacle-engaging and moving member in the nature of a carriage, cradle,
    platform, etc., which is in guiding contact with an element in the nature
    of a track.


CLS 414/410
TXT Device includes haulage cable:

    Apparatus under subclass 406 wherein the device includes a
    receptacle-engaging and moving member in the nature of a flexible,
    strand-like element for pulling the receptacle.


CLS 414/411
TXT With container opening means:

    Emptying devices under subclass 403 including means for opening the
    receptacle prior to the emptying operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclass 62 for devices
    which empty receptacles combined with means for cleaning such receptacles
    subsequent to their being emptied.


CLS 414/412
TXT Rupturing or cutting type:

    Devices under subclass 411 in which the opening means comprises a sharp
    implement, e.g., knife, saw, etc., adapted to rupture or sever the
    receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 2 for carton openers, and subclasses 400+ for can
    openers, in which no structure for removing or handling the contents of the
    carton or can is involved.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 80+ for dispensers having means for cutting
    or punching a receptacle placed in the dispenser for causing emptying of
    the receptacle into the dispenser.


CLS 414/413
TXT Successive dumping from conveyed stack:

    Devices under subclass 403 which have combined therewith conveyor means so
    arranged as to move a stack of receptacles relative to said device in such
    manner as to feed successive receptacles into position to be emptied.


CLS 414/414
TXT With gate or closure-type discharge control means:

    Emptying devices under subclass 403 including a closure or gate member
    carried by the device for covering or partially covering the receptacle to
    prevent premature emptying of its contents.

    (1)     Note.  The expression "premature emptying" of the receptacle
    includes controlled discharge of its contents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    407,    for movable covers or gates controlling the discharge of material
    into a receiving bin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 165 for dispensers having a movably mounted
    container and including a dispensing feature.


CLS 414/415
TXT With jarring means:

    Emptying devices under subclass 403 including an abutment in the path of
    movement of the receptacle against which it is impinged to jar or shape
    loose the contents of the receptacle prior to or simultaneously with the
    discharge thereof.


CLS 414/416
TXT Nongravity type:

    Emptying devices under subclass 403 in which the means for removing the
    contents of the receptacle (a) engages and lifts the contents from the
    receptacle, or (b) forcibly removes it therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  Grapple devices for removing individual articles from
    containers are not classified here unless they are designed for mutual
    cooperation with the receptacle or have combined therewith means for
    handling the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    618     and 729+, for power moved grapples.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 86.4+ for
    miscellaneous hand grapples.


CLS 414/417
TXT Ejector:

    Devices under subclass 416 in which the means for removing the contents of
    the receptacle is designed to apply a force behind the contents so as to
    push or eject them from the receptacle.


CLS 414/418
TXT Orienting endless, roller, or gravity conveyor:

    Emptying devices under subclass 403 comprising endless, roller and/or
    gravity conveyor means so constructed or arranged as to advance and orient
    a receptacle carried thereby for gravity discharge of the contents thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Conveyors, here involved are any of the type classified in
    Class 193, Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, or Class 198,
    Conveyors:  Power-Driven.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 118 and 124 for filling devices combined with means for removing
    overfill of the receiver tilting or inverting type.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 373+ for a conveyor for
    changing the attitude of an item relative to its conveyed direction, which
    item may be a receptacle to be filled or emptied.


CLS 414/419
TXT Rotary cradle:

    Emptying devices under subclass 403 comprising a framework designed to
    receive a receptacle which framework is mounted for rotation about an axis
    so as to invert the receptacle to cause or assist discharge of the contents
    therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    354+,   for the combination of a wheeled, load-transporting type vehicle
    and external means for supporting the vehicle in toto and reorienting it
    into a load-releasing attitude.

    639+,   for an elevator or hoist having tilting carrier and means for
    tilting such carrier to cause discharge of its contents.

    680+,   for vertically swinging load-supporting members having means to
    load or unload said members.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 165 for changing cartridges in or refilling
    movably mounted supply containers.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 128+ for stands adapted to movably support a
    receptacle to dispense its contents.


CLS 414/420
TXT Nonfixed pivot:

    Rotary cradles under subclass 419 in which the pivotal axis of the cradle
    is movable rectilinearly and/or in an arcuate path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    354+,   as explained in subclass 419, and especially subclasses 364+
    thereunder for a pivotable supporting means, which means has a vertically
    shiftable axis of pivot.

    404+,   for a portable emptying device combined with a portable material
    receiver.


CLS 414/421
TXT Oscillated:

    Rotary cradles under subclass 419 in which the cradle has a to-and-fro
    motion about its axis of rotation, i.e., movable to a dumping position and
    reversible to load-receiving position.


CLS 414/422
TXT Elevator type:

    Receptacle dumping devices under subclass 403 comprising means for
    translating a filled receptacle upwardly prior to manipulating it to
    discharge its contents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    420,    for similar devices which include a cradle for receiving the
    receptacle.

    639+,   for elevator or hoist devices in which the load carrier may be a
    receptacle.


CLS 414/423
TXT Differentially operated cables:

    Devices under subclass 422 in which the elevating and inverting means
    comprises a plurality of receptacle suspending cables, all or some of which
    may constitute the means for elevating the receptacle, and certain one or
    ones of which may be moved relative to or at a speed different than the
    others to invert the receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  Since no specific home is provided in Class 254 for
    differentially operated hoist cables cooperating to rotate as well as
    elevate a load, patents showing such cable arrangement for dumping the
    contents of a receptacle but not claiming the receptacle-engaging means are
    included here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    560+,   for miscellaneous cable arrangements adapted to rotate as well as
    elevate a load, other than a receptacle, to orient it.

    639+,   for elevator or hoist type devices in which the load carrier is
    tilted by differentially operated cables.


CLS 414/424
TXT Coacting catch or support:

    Receptacle dumpers under subclass 422 comprising means for engaging a
    receptacle to elevate or lower it and stationary means in or adjacent to
    the path of movement of the receptacle with which the receptacle is
    engageable to cause rotation of the receptacle upon movement of the
    receptacle relative to the stationary means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    652+,   for an elevator or hoist having a tilting carrier actuated by a
    catch or abutment while in motion.


CLS 414/425
TXT Upending (e.g., rocking or tilting about end, etc.):

    Emptying devices under subclasses 403 comprising means engageable with an
    end and/or side of a receptacle and movable in such a direction as to cause
    rotation or tilting of the receptacle while in constant contact with a
    supporting surface upon which it is moved.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    385,    for the combination of a load-transporting type vehicle and
    external means of a driven type for raising one end of the vehicle relative
    to the other end thereof to cause a load to move therefrom by gravity.


CLS 414/426
TXT WHEEL AND WHEEL-TYPE ARTICLE HANDLER AND TRANSPORTER:

    Devices under the class definition comprising a mobile support having means
    for engaging the outer circumference of a wheel or wheel-like object to
    support and transport it in upright position and including (a) means to
    handle or manipulate it while in upright position, or (b) means to secure
    the load in upright position during transportation thereof, or (c) means
    for directing or loading a wheel onto said support.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses deal primarily with the problem
    of handling a wheel prior to or subsequent to its removal from an axle.
    The specialized use of these devices is considered sufficient reason to
    warrant classifying them together.

    (2)     Note.  These devices include structural features designed to engage
    the outer surface of a wheel or wheel-like object.  Reference to
    "wheel-engaging means" only is not sufficient to place the invention here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    458+,   for vehicles having elevating cooperating shelf-type article
    engaging means for general use.

    463,    for a vehicle having an auxiliary carrier of the rim, tire, or
    wheel type, which carrier is movable from the normal carrying position to a
    position to load or unload the same.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 244+ for wheel pulling devices.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 2+ for lift trucks, and other appropriate subclasses for
    wheel-lifting devices which include the wheel-engaging element by name
    only.  See particularly subclasses 120+ for single throw lever wheel
    positioning means.

    280,    Land Vehicles, appropriate subclasses for vehicular structures for
    carrying wheels in which the load-engaging feature is included by name only.


CLS 414/427
TXT Elevator-type engaging means:

    Devices under subclass 426 in which the wheel engaging means subsequent to
    engagement with the wheel is translated upwardly.


CLS 414/428
TXT Vertically swinging article engager:

    Devices under subclass 426 in which the wheel-engaging means comprises
    swinging or pivotally mounted means for engaging and elevating the wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 8+ for lift trucks having single throw lever means for elevating
    a load.


CLS 414/429
TXT Opposed horizontally reciprocable engaging elements:

    Devices under subclass 426 in which the wheel engaging means includes
    opposed horizontally reciprocable means designed to impart vertical
    movement to a wheel engaged therebetween.

    (1)     Note.  The vertical component imparted to the wheel is caused by
    antifriction means provided on the reciprocable means or rotation of the
    wheel being engaged.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 104 for lifting devices in the form of a wedge not limited to any
    specific art.


CLS 414/430
TXT Ramp-type truck:

    Devices under subclass 426 in which the mobile support has an inclined way
    associated with it for directing a wheel onto said support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    537+,   for a self-loading or unloading vehicle having a conveyor of the
    skidway type.


CLS 414/431
TXT ARTICLE ENGAGED BETWEEN ENDS FOR ROTATION AND ADVANCEMENT:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising a driven means for engaging
    an elongated article between its ends and causing said article to advance
    along its longitudinal axis and simultaneously to turn about said axis, no
    other movements being imparted to the article.

    (1)     Note.  The article must be longer than any individual engaging
    means in the direction of advancing movement.  See Class 198, Conveyors:
    Power-Driven, subclass 780 for live roll conveyors in which long rolls
    advance an article while turning it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14+,    for apparatus for stock pulling or pushing by means engaging the
    stock at its ends.

    433,    for roller-type apparatus for merely rotating an article.

    754+,   for handling apparatus for simply turning an article about an axis
    and means for imparting complex movements to an article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 2.1+, particularly subclasses 2.16+ for
    similar apparatus combined with bias cutting means.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 420+ for apparatus for feeding and/or
    rotating the work under a hammer.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses, especially
    subclass 22 for similar apparatus, which drives a shaft or tool forming
    part of a machine rather than an article to be handled.

    82,     Turning, appropriate subclasses for similar apparatus combined with
    a turning tool means.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 208.1+ for similar apparatus combined with
    means for removing bark from a log.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, appropriate subclasses, especially
    subclasses 145+ and 149 for tool advancing and rotating means.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 373+ for a conveyor for
    changing the attitude of an item relative to its conveyed direction.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, Consumable Electrodes,
    subclasses 41, 42, and 43 for electric lamp or discharge devices including
    means to advance and turn an electrode about its axis.

    451,    Abrading; e.g., subclass 189, apparatus similar to that of this
    subclass disclosed as advancing work while it is being abraded.


CLS 414/432
TXT Driven, canted roll or ring:

    Apparatus under subclass 431 in which the driven means (e.g., a roll or an
    annulus) has a surface of revolution for contacting the article with the
    inner or outer side of said surface, the axis of said means being adapted
    to be obliquely disposed with respect to the longitudinal axis of the
    article and said means being driven about its axis whereby to cause the
    article simultaneously to advance and turn about its axis.


CLS 414/433
TXT ARTICLE ROTATOR, ROLLER TYPE:

    Handling devices under the class definition for rotating a discrete article
    about an axis of rotation passing through such article by peripheral
    contact thereof with means having rotary motion about its own axis of
    revolution and without transfer of such article from such means to another
    similar means.

    (1)     Note.  A discrete article is one which is not a part of the
    apparatus and one which is of constant shape and moves as a whole without
    relative motion of its parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403+,   for a device for emptying a portable receptacle.

    426+,   for wheel and wheel-type handlers which include means for rotating
    same while being removed from or placed on an axle.

    431+,   for apparatus for rotating and advancing an elongated article along
    its axis by means engaging the article between its ends.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 373+ for a conveyor for
    changing the attitude of an item relative to its conveyed direction.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 541+ for a convolute
    winding machine with a particular peripheral roll drive, subclass 564.5 for
    an unwinding machine with a particular peripheral roll drive.

    384,    Bearings, subclass 548 for nonpowered roller anti-friction elements.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 397+ for a work holder for an abrading machine
    which rotates the workpiece.


CLS 414/434
TXT MOTION OR DRAFT RESPONSIVE LOAD HANDLER AND TRANSPORTER:

    Devices under the class definition comprising a mobile support having
    mounted thereon load handling means capable of transferring a load to or
    removing a load from the support, or capable of grasping and supporting the
    load while being transported by the device and in which (a) the
    load-handling mechanism is designed to function in response to travel of
    the mobile support, or (b) the support is so constructed that tractive
    force applied to it will cause relative movement between the parts thereof,
    which in turn will cause the handling means to function.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 13+ for wheel-type power
    take off.


CLS 414/435
TXT Movably connected vehicle sections (e.g., articulated, etc.):

    Devices under subclass 434 in which the vehicular support comprises movably
    connected frame sections, one of said sections carrying a load-handling
    means, and which sections are caused to move relative to each other by a
    tractive force applied to one of said sections to cause loading of the
    support or merely engagement of the load for transportation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 238, 467, 588, and 605 for a shiftable
    hitch between a tractor and a trailing implement which causes movement of
    an implement part.


CLS 414/436
TXT Vertically swinging:

    Device under subclass 435 in which the movable sections of the frame are
    connected for relative swinging movement in a vertical plane.


CLS 414/437
TXT Ground engageable means:

    Handling devices under subclass 434 including means engageable with or
    anchored to the ground to cause operation of the load handling means upon
    movement of the vehicle.


CLS 414/438
TXT Lifting leg type:

    Devices under subclass 437 in which the handling means comprises mechanism
    for elevating or lowering a load and has associated with it a rigid
    strut-like means engageable with the ground and reacting thereagainst to
    cause operation of the load-handling means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    498+,   for a self-loading or unloading vehicle having a separable load
    rack, and wherein the rack is sometimes provided with extensible, leg-like
    elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 205 and 236+ for earth working apparatus
    comprising a ground enagaging lever for manipulating a part of the
    apparatus.


CLS 414/439
TXT Wheel operated:

    Load handlers under subclass 437 in which the load-handling means is
    operated by a ground wheel which supports or aids in supporting the
    organization.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, for miscellaneous agricultural implements which are
    operated or driven from the wheels of the device, and see subclasses 327.1+
    for devices for collecting severed or harvested plants or portions of
    plants resting on the ground and which may be driven from a traction wheel.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclasses 63+ for apparatus
    for collecting small stones resting on or partially embedded in the soil
    and which may be driven by a tractor wheel, and subclass 108 for traction
    wheel driven apparatus for recovering and separating buried objects from
    the ground.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 105+, 402, 403+, 407-411, and 521 for
    earth working apparatus with means driven from a rolling ground wheel.

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclass 169 for traversing hoist devices driven
    by the wheels of the vehicular mount.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 614 for ambulant ground wheel operated
    dispensing means.


CLS 414/440
TXT Locked to wheel:

    Wheel operated devices under subclass 439 in which the load-handling means
    (a) is fixed to or constitutes part of the wheel of the vehicle or the axle
    therefor for rotation therewith; or (b) is capable of being coupled
    directly to the wheel for rotation therewith.


CLS 414/441
TXT Elevator type:

    Wheel operated devices under subclass 439 in which the load carrier is
    guided during rectilinear movement in a vertical or inclined path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    540+,   for a self-loading or unloading vehicle wherein the load or load
    holder moves in a path which includes vertical, rectilinear movement.

    592+,   for an elevator or hoist having a loading or unloading means.


CLS 414/442
TXT Vertically swinging support:

    Wheel operated devices under subclass 439 in which the load handling means
    comprises a vertically swinging member which includes load pick-up or
    discharge means and is adapted to move the load through an arcuate path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    680+,   for miscellaneous vertically swinging type load handlers.


CLS 414/443
TXT Cable and drum actuated:

    Wheel operated vertical swinging load-handling devices under subclass 442
    in which the power derived from the wheels is applied through a drum and
    cable arrangement to swing the member about a fulcrum.


CLS 414/444
TXT TILTING VEHICLE-TYPE HANDLER (I.E., PORTABLE GRAPPLE):

    Handling devices under the class definition consisting of a wheeled
    framework designed to be tilted or rocked in its entirety in a vertical
    plane about an axis of rotation of its wheels to function as a single throw
    lever in picking up a load for transportation thereby and having means
    mounted thereon for grasping or hooking a load to fix its position relative
    to the frame-work to facilitate picking up or elevating a load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    618+,   for elevating devices having means for grasping or seizing a load.

    729+,   for vertically swinging supports having load-grasping means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 500+ for similar devices used to hold a load
    down upon a supporting surface.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 120+ for miscellaneous single throw lever devices designed for
    applying a force to an object.  These devices may be supported on wheels
    for movement to or from a point of use.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 43.1 for a vehicle having vertically
    adjustable ground engaging means and which is unstable when in transporting
    position but which is stabilized by an attendant or an article to which the
    vehicle is temporarily attached, and subclasses 47.24+ for two-wheeled hand
    trucks, especially subclass 47.27 for warehouse-type trucks which have a
    shelf-like toe, which is not considered a load hooking means, and subclass
    100 for devices for merely securing a load to a vehicle.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, appropriate subclasses
    for miscellaneous hand or hoist line grapples.


CLS 414/445
TXT Article actuated engaging means:

    Tilting vehicle handlers under subclass 444 having means thereon which
    through engagement with the load, actuates the load-grasping mechanism.


CLS 414/446
TXT Separable load rack:

    Tilting vehicle handlers under subclass 444 in which the load-handling
    means is in the form of a rack or framework which is separable from the
    wheeled framework and designed to be readily engaged thereby.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    498+,   for self-loading or unloading vehicle having a separable load rack.

    608,    for elevator or hoist-type devices having a separable load rack.


CLS 414/447
TXT Successive engaging means:

    Devices under subclass 444 in which article engaging means are spaced apart
    on the framework and so related that rocking of the vehicle in opposite
    directions will permit or cause the engaging means to successively "lay
    hold" of the load for transportation.


CLS 414/448
TXT With band-type engager:

    Tilting vehicle handlers under subclass 444 in which the article engaging
    means is adapted to pass from one side of the vehicle continuously around
    the load to the other side of the vehicle to hold the same relative to the
    vehicle for movement therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    460,    for straddle-type handlers having band-type article engaging means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 500+ as noted in subclass 444 above.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 100+ for similar devices for securing a
    load to a vehicle.


CLS 414/449
TXT Flexible strand attached load gripper:

    Grappling devices under subclass 444 in which the load grasping means is
    attached to the running gear by means of a flexible strand.


CLS 414/450
TXT Opposed movable jaw grippers:

    Devices under subclass 444 in which the load grasping means comprises a
    plurality of load engaging jaw elements, each of which is mounted on the
    running gear for clamping movement toward another jaw portion to grasp the
    load therebetween.

    (1)     Note.  Movement of a jaw portion about an axis of the supporting
    wheels is not considered "clamping movement" as used above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 86.4+ for
    miscellaneous grapples, particularly subclasses 106+ for pivoted jaw type.


CLS 414/451
TXT Slidable:

    Grippers under subclass 450 in which the jaws are slidably mounted for
    translatory movement relative to each other to grasp an article.


CLS 414/452
TXT Toggle-type operator:

    Grippers under subclass 450 in which the means for actuating the jaws
    includes a toggle mechanism or has a toggle-like function.


CLS 414/453
TXT Single movable jaw gripper:

    Devices under subclass 444 in which the load seizing means comprises a
    single movable load-engaging jaw portion having clamping movement toward a
    fixed load-engaging portion on the running gear to clamp the load
    therebetween.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 103.1+ for
    hand or hoist line grapples having a fixed and movable jaw.


CLS 414/454
TXT With operating means:

    Devices under subclass 453 in which means are provided for mechanically
    manipulating, locking, or releasing the movable jaw.

    (1)     Note.  A rigid extension in the gripping jaw in the form of a
    handle is considered part of the jaw and therefore does not constitute a
    control means of the type here classified.


CLS 414/455
TXT Adjustable:

    Devices under subclass 453 in which the gripper jaw is so constructed
    and/or mounted on the wheeled framework as to adapt it for engagement with
    various sized objects.

    (1)     Note.  A pivotal mounting for a hook does not render it adjustable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    449,    for load-gripping or hooking means affixed to the wheeled framework
    by means of a flexible strand whose length may be varied.


CLS 414/456
TXT Slidable:

    Adjustable devices under subclass 455 in which the gripper jaw is capable
    of continuous bodily sliding movement lengthwise of the wheeled framework
    to different positions of adjustment.


CLS 414/457
TXT Rigid-type grapple engaging means (e.g., hooks, etc.):

    Devices under subclass 444 in which relatively rigid load-engaging means,
    usually a hook-like element or elements are carried by the running gear and
    arranged to hook or frictionally engage and support an article by merely
    engaging a collar or shoulder portion or entering an opening formed in the
    article.

    (1)     Note.  Handles or receptacles provide shouldered portions for
    engagement by the hook-like elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 90+ for
    collar engaging type grapples.


CLS 414/458
TXT OPPOSED SHELF-TYPE ELEVATOR AND TRANSPORTER:

    Devices under the class definition comprising an open mobile framework
    adapted to receive within its confines a load to be handled, and
    load-handling means comprising spaced load engaging elements positioned
    adjacent to opposed portions of said framework, which handling means
    provides oppositely positioned shelf-like load-engaging portions adapted to
    engage therebetween the load and elevate it for subsequent transportation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    426+,   for vehicles of this type adapted to engage, support, and transport
    wheel-type articles while in upright position.


CLS 414/459
TXT Load bridging vehicle:

    Devices under subclass 458 in which the mobile support for the handling
    means is arch-shaped and vertically disposed so as to be able to straddle
    the load from above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    460+,   for load bridging trucks having other than shelf-type load-engaging
    means.


CLS 414/460
TXT LOAD BRIDGING VEHICLE:

    Devices under the class definition comprising a rigid wheeled support
    having mounted thereon load handling means (a) in which the support is
    arch-shaped in a vertical direction to receive the load within its confines
    for engagement by the handling means, or (b) in which the support is
    mounted in an elevated position on its wheels and the handling means is so
    positioned on the support as to engage a load positioned therebelow for
    transportation thereby and usually having (a) means supplementing the load
    handling means for securing the load in fixed position relative to the
    wheeled support during transit, or (b) means for receiving the weight of
    the load from the handling means to support it during transportation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    447,    for tilting load-bridging vehicles which are rocked to engage a
    load.

    459,    for load-bridging vehicles with opposed shelves for handling the
    load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 2+ for hoisting trucks; and subclass 324 for a rotatably driven,
    cable-pulling drum mounted on a vehicle having an arch-shaped body for
    straddling a load.


CLS 414/461
TXT Removable transverse load support:

    Devices under subclass 460 in which the supplemental means is in the form
    of a load bearing support extending below and crosswise of the load from
    one side of the wheeled support to another in the form of a saddle, sling,
    or platform to receive the weight of the load during transit.


CLS 414/462
TXT VEHICLE ATTACHED AUXILIARY CARRIERS:

    Devices under the class definition in which a vehicle is provided with a
    carrier or support for an auxiliary load, the carrier or support being
    movable at least in part from its normal load carrying position to a
    loading or unloading position to thereby facilitate or permit placement of
    the load thereon or removal therefrom and the load being shifted from one
    position to the other while on the support.

    (1)     Note.  The vehicle must be capable of carrying the auxiliary load
    while also carrying or drawing the primary load. The primary load may be
    passengers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    467+,   for a self-loading or unloading vehicle.

    680+,   for vehicles having a vertically swinging load support for a
    primary load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclasses 277+ for vehicle attached
    carriers which may be movable for purposes other than loading or unloading.


CLS 414/463
TXT For rim, tire, or wheel:

    Devices under subclass 462 which are specially constructed to receive a
    wheel, rim and/or tire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    426+,   for mobile supports for holding a wheel by its outer circumference
    in an upright position for assembly with or disassembly from an axle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclasses 42.12+ for vehicle
    attached carriers for rims, tires, or wheels, and especially subclass 42.21
    for such carriers which are movably mounted for purposes other than loading
    or unloading.


CLS 414/464
TXT Plural:

    Devices under subclass 463 in which distinct means are provided for
    receiving each of a plurality of wheels, tires, and/or rims.

    (1)     Note.  The carriers may move individually or in unison.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclasses 42.15+ for plural vehicle
    attached carriers for rims, tires, or wheels which may be movably mounted
    for purposes other than unloading, as, for example, moving the first
    carrier for the sole purpose of gaining access to the second carrier.


CLS 414/465
TXT Movement about spaced pivot axes:

    Devices under subclass 463 in which the carrier or support is mounted to
    partake of independent pivotal movement about at least two axes which do
    not intersect.


CLS 414/466
TXT Simple arcuate or rectilinear movement:

    Devices under subclass 463 in which the carrier or support is mounted for
    simple movement about a fixed axis or is movably mounted in rectilinear
    guides.


CLS 414/467
TXT SELF-LOADING OR UNLOADING VEHICLES:

    Devices under the class definition in which a vehicle has a load receiving
    and transporting portion and handling means carried by such vehicle adapted
    (a) to deposit a load into or remove a load from said receiving portion, or
    (b) to transfer such load to a position for subsequent transfer into said
    receiving portion.

    (1)     Note.  Where the handling means is of the Class 193 or Class 198
    type, the load may remain on the handling means rather than be deposited
    into or removed from the load receiving or transporting portion.  This
    exception to the line has been permitted because of the similarity of these
    devices to those in which manual transfer of the load from the conveyor to
    the vehicle body is provided for in (b) of the subclass definition, and
    because no appropriate classification is available in Classes 193 and 198.

    (2)     Note.  The combination of a vehicle having a load receiving and
    transporting portion and a load therefor, which load is capable of moving
    itself to or from the vehicle, is found in this and the indented
    subclasses.  A combination of this nature is placed here, rather than in
    one of the areas commencing with subclass 333 and ending with subclasses
    373+, above, on the rationale that there is no means involved which is
    always external of the vehicle (i.e., after loading has been accomplished,
    nothing external of the vehicle remains).

    (3)     Note.  A vehicle having a loading or unloading means which is
    disclosed as relying on an external source of power to operate it, but
    which source is not claimed, is classified here (e.g., a  vehicle having a
    load moving means operated by a cable connected to an external pulling
    device, but wherein only the cable is claimed); however, if the external
    source of power is claimed as such, then classification is in one of the
    areas beginning with subclass 333 and concluding with subclasses 373+.

    (4)     Note.  Occasionally, the classification of a patent to a vehicle
    and a means external of the vehicle for cooperating in the loading or
    unloading of the vehicle may be in this area (467+) rather than in those
    subclasses beginning with 333 and concluding with 373+.  Consider the
    instance of a vehicle #1 for transporting a load, which vehicle has located
    thereon another vehicle #2 for transporting increments of the load of
    vehicle #1 while loading or unloading that vehicle - assuming that there is
    a means external to vehicle #2 (although not external to vehicle #1) which
    cooperates in the loading or unloading of vehicle #2, the apparatus
    nevertheless does not amount to more than a self-loading or unloading
    vehicle for this area (467+), which fact should not be obscured by
    classifying the patent in any of the superior subclasses previously
    mentioned.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333,    334+, 337, 338, 339, 340+, 349+, 352+, 354+, and 373+, for various
    combinations of one or more, moving or stationary, wheeled (except that
    subclass 373 omits this limitation), load-transporting type vehicles, and
    an external means of some nature for loading or unloading, or cooperating
    in the loading or unloading of, the vehicle.  Also see (3) Note, above for
    a further explanation of what may comprise an external means for these
    subclasses (333, etc.).

    430,    for a vehicle having a ramp for directing a wheel onto the vehicle.

    434+,   for a vehicle having a loading mechanism which is motivated by
    motion of the vehicle.

    444+,   for vehicles which have grasping or hooking means and tilt in order
    to pick up a load for transportation.

    458+,   for vehicles which receive a load within them and have
    load-handling means comprising spaced shelves.

    460+,   for vehicles which straddle the load for loading the vehicle.

    462+,   for a vehicle having a movable carrier or support for an auxiliary
    load, which load is in addition to the vehicle's primary load.

    618+,   for vehicle with an elevating carrier comprising a grab and in
    which there are no additional handling means for depositing or removing a
    load from the grab.

    680+,   especially 728, for vehicles with vertically swinging load supports
    which pick up and transport material without transferring it.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 304+ for a vehicle having means for
    excavating material and for loading itself with the material.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 239+ for railroad vehicles having
    means thereon for producing a gravity dump of the vehicle contents.

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 51.11+ for an
    industrial platform.

    212,    Traversing Hoists, appropriate subclasses for vehicles having a
    traversing hoist capable of transferring a load from one location external
    of the vehicle to another external location, and also capable of depositing
    a load on an extension of the mounting platform.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 137.1 for devices and arrangements for
    loading or unloading a vehicle of the aircraft type, which devices, etc.,
    may include means for moving a load to or from the aircraft.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 2+ for vehicles having a platform load support and mechanism for
    raising and lowering it; and subclasses 279+ and 325+ for vehicles having
    at least one rotatably driven drum for pulling on a load hauling or
    hoisting cable.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 401 for articulated vehicles so constructed
    that one section thereof is movable to a position upon another section for
    transportation thereby, and subclasses 47.12 and 47.17+ for vehicles loaded
    by mere tilting of the vehicle body as in the common hand truck.

    298,    Land Vehicles:  Dumping, appropriate subclasses for roadway
    vehicles in which the unloading is effected by mere tilting of the vehicle
    body, or by combined sliding and tilting, etc., or where effected by
    unlatching or withdrawing of gates or doors or other like gravity unloading
    means; see also the reference to Class 298 in subclass 469 of this class
    (414).


CLS 414/468
TXT With load-receiving portion comprising horizontally disposed, rotatable
    cylinder:

    Apparatus under subclass 467 wherein the load receiving portion is in the
    form of a cylinder which is located in a generally horizontal position and
    has means to rotate it about its longitudinal axis, and the handling means
    comprises one or more devices for moving material into, within, or out from
    the cylinder, at least one of which devices (a) derives its movement from
    the rotation of the cylinder and (b) imparts movement to the material in a
    direction longitudinally of the cylinder.

    (1)     Note.  The one device typically is a spiral vane affixed to the
    inner wall of the cylinder.

    (2)     Note.  The rotation of the cylinder frequently is reversible for
    the purpose of changing the direction of movement of the material moved by
    the one device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    467,    for a load-receiving portion which is rotatable, but for some other
    purpose than that of this subclass; e.g., to place a door, which is located
    in the periphery of the portion, in a position whereby a load within the
    portion may exit by gravity.


CLS 414/469
TXT With load-receiving portion, or significant section thereof, pivotable
    relative to horizontal:

    Apparatus under subclass 467 wherein the handling means comprises enabling
    the load-receiving portion, or at least a significant part of the portion,
    to move in an arcuate path relative to a generally horizontal plane, and
    thus impart a change in the attitude of the portion relative to that plane,
    for facilitating the loading or unloading of the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses constitute, principally, a
    reclassification of subclasses 501 and 505-511 of former Class 214
    (subclasses 502-504 of that class, now subclasses 471-473, having been left
    as they were, except for being screened for conflicting subject matter).
    While the art of the 501 and 505-511 area consistently included a
    load-receiving portion pivotable about a horizontal axis, as required by
    former subclass 501, it occasionally lacked the "handling means" of its
    outdent, former subclass 500, now subclass 467. Accordingly, in order to
    avoid a significant redistribution of the subclasses 501+ art, this
    subclass (469) has been defined in such a manner as to identify the
    pivoting of the load-receiving portion as constituting the handling means.
    In addition, certain of the subclasses indented hereunder were established
    in order to provide for specific types of devices which conventionally are
    construed to be "handling means".

    (2)     Note.  "Load-receiving portion", as used herein, denotes the one or
    more elements, members, etc., of a vehicle which supports a load during
    transit, as distinguished from an element, etc., which supports a load only
    during the loading or unloading of the vehicle.

    (3)     Note.  "Generally horizontal plane" usually is descriptive of the
    surface from or to which a load moves to or from the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    349+,   354+ and 373+, for the combination of a vehicle, or portion
    thereof, and means external of the vehicle for changing the attitude of the
    vehicle, or portion, for a vehicle loading or unloading purpose.

    495+,   for a vehicle having a raisable or lowerable load-receiving portion
    and wherein, but only for the purpose of facilitating its movement to or
    from an elevated position, the portion may undergo pivotable movement of
    the kind provided for in this subclass (469).

    545     and 556+, for a self-loading or unloading vehicle having other
    loading or unloading means, which means may be, in the former subclass, a
    vertically rectilinearly movable component of the load-receiving portion,
    or, in the latter subclass, a curvilinearly movable component of the
    load-receiving portion; also, see the latter subclass (556) for an
    explanation of the relationship between the art of that subclass and the
    art of this subclass (469).

    575+,   for an external means subcombination of the type of combination
    described in the search note above to subclasses 349+, 354+ and 373+.

    629,    631+, 641+, and 663+, for a portable (e.g., vehicle-mounted)
    elevator or hoist having a load carrier which is movable relative to the
    vehicle, which movement may include pivoting about a more or less
    horizontal axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 412+ for an excavating device in the nature
    of a scoop which is provided with ground engaging wheels and wherein the
    scoop may be mounted for moving pivotably about a horizontal axis for
    acquiring, or relieving itself of, a load.

    298,    Land Vehicles:  Dumping, appropriate subclasses for a vehicle of
    the kind proper for that class which is so constructed that, by
    manipulation of the vehicle or a portion thereof, a load will move by
    gravity from the vehicle.  It is not possible to state, at the time of this
    reclassification, a definitive line between Class 298 subject matter, on
    the one hand, and some of the art which appears in certain of the
    subclasses of this area, particularly in this subclass (469), on the other
    hand.


CLS 414/470
TXT Having axis of pivot parallel to longitudinal axis of vehicle for side
    loading or unloading:

    Apparatus under subclass 469 wherein the movement of the load-receiving
    portion takes place about an axis which is parallel to the longitudinal
    axis of the vehicle.


CLS 414/471
TXT Elevatable type:

    Pivoted load receivers under subclass 469 in which means are provided for
    elevating the load receiver and its pivotal axis so as to vary the point of
    charging and/or discharging.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    298,    Land Vehicles, Dumping, subclass 11 for gravity dump vehicles
    having means for elevating and tilting the vehicle load carrying body.


CLS 414/472
TXT Discharge gate-carried loading means:

    Devices under subclass 469 in which the loading or unloading means is
    carried by a discharge gate of the load receiver, and is movable therewith.

    (1)     Note.  The mount for the handling means is normally swung to clear
    the path of the material in the dumping operation.


CLS 414/473
TXT Interrelated movements or drives for load body and loading means:

    Devices under subclass 469 comprising (a) means preventing operation of the
    loading means during movement of the tilting body, (b) means controlling
    the operation of the tilting body by predetermined position of the loading
    means, or (c) means causing simultaneous operation of the tilting body and
    loading means.

    (1)     Note.  Valves, clutches and similar mechanism for providing a
    selective drive for either the tilting body or the loading means are not
    considered an "interlock" of the type classified here.


CLS 414/474
TXT By adjustably attaching element of running gear (e.g., wheel, axle, etc.)
    to load-receiving portion, or support member (e.g., chassis, frame, etc.)
    therefor, to enable relative movement therebetween:

    Apparatus under subclass 469 wherein the means enabling pivotable movement
    includes structure for connecting one or more elements of the running gear
    of the vehicle to the load-receiving portion, or to a member of the vehicle
    which serves to support the portion, in such a manner that the element may
    move relative to the portion (or member), or vice versa.

    (1)     Note.  "Adjustable", as used herein, is intended to include, as
    well, the removal of an element of the running gear.

    (2)     Note.  "Running gear" does not include a vehicle attachment (e.g.,
    dolly, truck, etc.) which is placed in a ground-engaging position only when
    it is desired to stabilize the vehicle  (e.g., a trailer) in its nontransit
    mode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 80.1+ for a wheeled vehicle of that class
    and its running gear.


CLS 414/475
TXT Element shiftable linearly toward front or rear of vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 474 wherein the adjusting of the element involves
    movement in a straight line forwardly or rearwardly of the vehicle from its
    usual position relative to the load-receiving portion.


CLS 414/476
TXT Pivotably:

    Apparatus under subclass 474 wherein the adjusting of the element involves
    movement of a curvilinear nature about an axis.


CLS 414/477
TXT Load-receiving portion also shiftable longitudinally:

    Apparatus under subclass 469 wherein the load-receiving portion is mounted
    for movement also in a direction parallel to the longitudinal axis of the
    vehicle, which movement may occur before, during, or after the pivotable
    movement of the portion.

    (1)     Note.  The weight of the load may cease to remain on the portion
    even though the load remains in proximity thereto (e.g., as in the instance
    of unloading a boat into a body of water).


CLS 414/478
TXT With driven means to move load relative to portion:

    Apparatus under subclass 477 wherein the vehicle includes means of a driven
    nature to move a load in relation to the load receiving portion.


CLS 414/479
TXT Means serves also to shift portion in at least one direction:

    Apparatus under subclass 478 wherein the powered means also is the drive
    means for moving the portion in one or the other, or both, of its
    directions of longitudinal movement.


CLS 414/480
TXT Load-receiving portion includes means which extends longitudinally
    therefrom to form ramp when portion pivots:

    Apparatus under subclass 469 wherein the load-receiving portion is provided
    with a means which can be extended (often telescopically) so as to be, when
    the portion is in its pivoted attitude, in close proximity to the surface
    from or to which a load is to be moved.

    (1)     Note.  Patents are placed herein without regard to whether the
    means continues to support the load after the means returns to its
    nonoperative position, since it is not always possible to clearly identify
    which structural elements are bearing the weight of the load after the
    vehicle has been loaded.


CLS 414/481
TXT Trailer-type vehicle and adjustable or removable tow-engaging structure
    associated therewith enabling lowering of forward end of vehicle for
    loading:

    Apparatus under subclass 469 wherein the vehicle is of a kind which is
    intended to be towed and has its wheels located in the vicinity of that end
    which is opposite to its usual direction of travel, and wherein there is
    provided structure (e.g., a separable connector of the "gooseneck" type, a
    reconfigurable forward extremity of the vehicle, etc.) for connecting the
    vehicle to a towing vehicle and pivotably lowering the forward end of the
    vehicle, relative to its rearward end, to facilitate the loading or
    unloading of the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  The towing vehicle ordinarily is of a "tractor" type and is
    provided with a "fifth wheel" for supporting the tow-engaging structure.

    (2)     Note.  The vehicle of this subclass, often a trailer of "low-boy"
    kind, ordinarily is intended to have a load driven, or otherwise move,
    thereonto or therefrom by way of its forward end when the latter is in its
    lowered position.


CLS 414/482
TXT Trailer-type vehicle having load-receiving portion pivotable relative to at
    least one other component of vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 469 wherein the vehicle is of a kind which is
    intended to be towed and wherein the pivotable movement of the
    load-receiving portion relative to the horizontal is relative also to one
    or more other elements of the structure of the vehicle; i.e., the vehicle
    is other than a simple, two-wheel trailer wherein the only manner in which
    the load-receiving portion can be pivoted is by raising or lowering the
    tow-engaging end of the vehicle.


CLS 414/483
TXT About joint or other connection in structure (e.g., drawbar, frame, etc.)
    normally extending linearly, or planarly, from tow-engaging end of vehicle
    to axis of wheels of vehicle, and relative to said end:

    Apparatus under subclass 482 wherein the structure which transmits pulling
    force from the forward (i.e., towing-vehicle-engaging) end of the vehicle
    to the region of its ground-engaging wheels, which structure appears as a
    straight-line or a plane when in a pulling mode, includes an axis of pivot
    within its length, whereby the load-receiving portion is pivotable relative
    to said forward end.


CLS 414/484
TXT About axis located between or adjacent to wheel sets of vehicle having
    plural, tandemly arranged sets of rear wheels, and relative to tow-engaging
    end of vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 482 wherein the vehicle has two or more sets of
    rearwardly-located, ground-engaging wheels, the axis of rotation of each
    set being spaced longitudinally of the vehicle from the corresponding axis
    of any other set, and wherein the load-receiving portion is pivotable,
    relative to the forward end of the vehicle, about an axis located either
    between two of the sets of wheels or adjacent to one such set.


CLS 414/485
TXT About axis of wheels of vehicle having two wheels, and relative to
    tow-engaging end of vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 482 wherein the vehicle has two laterally spaced
    wheels having a common axis of rotation, and wherein the load-receiving
    portion is pivotable, relative to the forward end of the vehicle, about an
    axis which is coincident with said axis of rotation.


CLS 414/486
TXT With means to raise load above load-receiving portion for deposit thereon
    or therein:

    Apparatus under subclass 469 wherein the vehicle includes means to lift,
    hoist, or otherwise elevate a load to a height where it can be released to
    move by gravity to the vehicle's load-receiving portion or otherwise moved
    thereto.


CLS 414/487
TXT Including receptacle-like (e.g., bucket, scoop, etc.) holder for load:

    Apparatus under subclass 486 wherein the means to lift etc., a load
    includes at least one member of a kind which partially encloses the load
    being moved thereby.


CLS 414/488
TXT Comprising driven conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 486 wherein the means to lift, etc., a load
    comprises a carrier of the driven conveyor type.


CLS 414/489
TXT With driven conveyor to receive load departing from pivoted load-receiving
    portion:

    Apparatus under subclass 469 wherein the vehicle includes a conveyor of the
    driven type to receive and carry away a load which is moving by gravity
    from the vehicle's load-receiving portion, which portion has moved to an
    attitude wherein it is inclined to the horizontal.


CLS 414/490
TXT Two wheel, manually propelled vehicle pivotable about axis of wheels (e.g.,
    hand truck, etc.) and provided with attendant-operated, load-handling means:

    Apparatus under subclass 469 wherein the vehicle comprises a load-receiving
    portion provided near one of its extremities with a pair of wheels spaced
    apart along a common axis of rotation and provided near an extremity with
    means (e.g., hand grip) to facilitate its movement by an attendant, and
    wherein the arcuate path of movement of the portion, or at least part of
    movement of the path, takes place about the axis of wheel rotation, and
    wherein the vehicle is further provided with means for operation by the
    attendant to assist in its loading or unloading.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370+,   for a vehicle of the hand truck type which is provided with means
    for grasping or hooking a load relative to the framework of the vehicle to
    facilitate picking up or elevating the load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 47.24+ for a tiltable vehicle, stabilized
    by an attendant, and having laterally spaced wheels.


CLS 414/491
TXT With driven means to move load relative to load-receiving portion:

    Apparatus under subclass 469 wherein the vehicle includes means of a driven
    nature to move a load in relation to the load-receiving portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    679,    for an explanation of the relationship between the subject matter
    of that subclass and some of the art of this subclass (491).


CLS 414/492
TXT Including pusher element:

    Apparatus under subclass 491 wherein the driven means includes an element,
    rigid or flexible, which element engages that portion or surface of a load
    which is opposite the leading portion or surface thereof, and to which
    element a pushing or pulling force is applied in order to push the load
    relative to the load-receiving portion.


CLS 414/493
TXT Pivotably mounted element:

    Apparatus under subclass 492 wherein the element is mounted for swinging
    about an axis and is driven (e.g., rotatably, oscillatably, etc.)
    thereabout.


CLS 414/494
TXT Including haulage cable:

    Apparatus under subclass 491 wherein the powered means includes an
    elongated, flexible element for pulling a load.


CLS 414/495
TXT Having elevating load body:

    Vehicles under subclass 467 in which the load-receiving portion of the
    vehicle is translated in a vertical or inclined path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    592+,   for an elevator or hoist and a loading or unloading means therefor,
    and see the search notes thereto for a discussion of the relationship of
    that subclass (592) and this one.


CLS 414/496
TXT With traversing hoist:

    Devices under subclass 495 in which the load handling means is in the form
    of a traversing hoist of the type classifiable in Class 212.


CLS 414/497
TXT With reciprocating conveyor (e.g., ejector type etc.):

    Devices under subclass 495 in which the load handling means is in the form
    of a reciprocating conveyor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    506,    for a self-loading or unloading vehicle having a winch and an
    idler-pulley-traversing haulage cable for ejecting a load from the vehicle.

    509+,   for a self-loading or unloading vehicle having a reciprocably
    movable conveying element for ejecting a load from the vehicle.

    659+,   for an elevator (including a portable one) or hoist and a loading
    or unloading means therefor, and wherein the means comprises a device on
    the carrier of the elevator or hoist for moving a load laterally thereto or
    therefrom.


CLS 414/498
TXT Separable load rack:

    Vehicles under subclass 467 having a separable load rack or the like in
    which means are provided on the vehicle or the rack to facilitate movement
    of the load carrying portion of the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  The rack is not integrated into the vehicle structure and is
    adapted to be completely separated from the vehicle when unloaded therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    446,    for tilting vehicle handlers having separable load racks.

    522,    for platform type conveyors movable into or out of a vehicle where
    the platform is normally part of the vehicle.

    608,    for elevator or hoist devices having separable load racks.

    728,    for vehicles having vertically swinging racks integrated therein
    which also have translatory movement.


CLS 414/499
TXT Conveyor operated:

    Devices under subclass 498 in which power operated conveyor means are
    provided on the vehicle for moving a separable load unit onto or off a
    vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  The conveying means found in this subclass is the type
    classified in Class 198.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    507+,   for a self-loading or unloading vehicle wherein the load-handling
    means comprises a conveyor.


CLS 414/500
TXT Cable operated:

    Devices under subclass 498 in which the means for moving the load rack to
    or from the vehicle body comprises a cable arrangement.


CLS 414/501
TXT Successive handling means:

    Self-loading vehicles under subclass 467 in which the charging or
    discharging means comprises a plurality of distinct powered handling
    mechanisms adapted to successively handle a load in transferring it to or
    from the load receiving body of a vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    507,    for plural conveyors arranged to jointly convey a load.

    564     through 571, for miscellaneous combined carriers not adapted to
    load or unload a vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses for presses which may, when used on
    a vehicle, inherently function to load or unload the vehicle.  See the
    class definition, section V of Class 100.


CLS 414/502
TXT Power-driven conveyors:

    Devices under subclass 501 in which the loading or unloading means includes
    a plurality of conveyors of the type classifiable in Class 198 and/or Class
    302, or any combination of two such conveyors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 570+ for a conveying system
    having plural power-driven conveying sections.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclasses 51+ for conveying systems
    including a fluid current conveyor and a diverse type conveyor.


CLS 414/503
TXT Movably mounted:

    Conveyor arrangements under subclass 502 in which at least one of the
    conveyors is movably mounted on the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    523,    for a self-loading or unloading vehicle wherein the load handling
    means comprises a conveyor which is shiftably or removably attached to the
    vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 586+ for a conveying system
    having plural power-driven conveying sections, and wherein the sections are
    relatively adjustable.


CLS 414/504
TXT Universally:

    Vehicles under subclass 503 in which the movably mounted conveyor is
    capable of swinging movement in more than one plane.


CLS 414/505
TXT Pivotally:

    Vehicles under subclass 503 in which the movably mounted conveyor has
    swinging movement about a fixed axis.


CLS 414/506
TXT Winch and idler-pulley-traversing haulage cable for ejecting load from
    vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 467 wherein the handling means comprises a winch
    and a strand-like or chain-like member having one of its ends attached to
    the winch and having its other end (a) passed around a pulley for reversing
    its direction of movement when the one end is wound upon the winch, and (b)
    attached to a load located on the load receiving portion, whereby the
    member serves to pull the load off the portion.

    (1)     Note.  The winch and member, but not the pulley, frequently are
    utilized to pull a load onto the portion.


CLS 414/507
TXT Conveyor:

    Vehicles under subclass 467 carrying some type of conveyor to load or
    unload them.

    (1)     Note.  In accordance with (1) Note under the definition of subclass
    467, vehicles which have conveyors or skids of the Class 193 or 198 type
    for loading or unloading them are classified in this or indented subclasses
    even though the load is not shifted from the conveyor or skid.

    (2)     Note.  This area represents a revision of subclasses 83+ of former
    Class 214 to the extent of adding subclasses 509+ (derived in large part
    from former subclass 82) and reclassifying subclass 529 (formerly subclass
    84).  While subclasses 518, 521, and 525 (formerly subclasses 83.14, 83.22
    and 83.3, respectively) have been screened for subject matter for
    subclasses 509+, subclasses 507, 508, 518 to 528, 537, and 538 are
    otherwise unchanged from their predecessor subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    491+,   for a self-loading or unloading vehicle having a load-receiving
    portion which is pivotable relative to the horizontal, and having also a
    driven means to move a load relative to the portion.

    502+,   for a self-loading or unloading vehicle wherein the load-handling
    means comprises two or more power-driven conveyors which engage the load
    successively.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 304+ for a self-loading vehicle of that
    class having a conveyor, and see the reference to that class (37) in
    subclass 467 above.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 672 for a
    container for nonfluid material and means to scatter or strew the material
    and having a conveyor or follower type unloader to feed or force the
    material to the scatterer from the container.


CLS 414/508
TXT With worker support:

    Vehicles under subclass 507 having a support for a person carried thereby
    in working relation to the conveyor.

    (1)     Note.  The supports are provided primarily to facilitate the
    placing of commodities on the conveyor by a person stationed on the support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 29 for combinations of seats and vehicles
    with running gear, especially subclass 32.5 for supports for persons
    engaged in manual labor adjacent to the ground.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclass 64 for combinations of
    seats and vehicle bodies.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclass 43 for a bottom and a back which fold
    laterally against a fixed standard.


CLS 414/509
TXT Comprising load-engaging element reciprocably movable parallel to generally
    horizontal load-supporting component of vehicle for ejecting load therefrom:

    Apparatus under subclass 507 wherein the conveyor comprises a load-engaging
    element (e.g., a pusher plate), which is caused to move back and forth in a
    direction, which is approximately parallel to a load-supporting component
    of a vehicle (e.g., the floor of a truck body), which component has a
    generally horizontal attitude, for the purpose of removing a load from the
    portion.

    (1)     Note.  While the claims of the art in this and the indented
    subclasses may not always bring out clearly the actual departure of the
    load from the vehicle, the disclosure should leave no doubt that the intent
    is to discharge, not merely reposition, the load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258+,   for apparatus for charging or discharging a facility comprising one
    or more sites for the parking of wheeled vehicles, which apparatus includes
    a means for exerting a generally horizontal force for transferring a
    vehicle to or from a carrier from or to a site.

    280,    for plural, static structures for supporting discrete loads and a
    charging or discharging means therefor, and wherein the structures comprise
    load-underlying members, and the means includes a load sustaining surface
    and a push-pull mechanism to transfer a load, with a horizontal component
    of movement, from one of the members to the surface or vice versa.

    374,    for the concept of unloading a moving vehicle by utilizing the
    momentum of the load.

    390+,   for a driven external means for unloading a wheeled,
    load-transporting type vehicle, especially subclass 393 for removing a load
    by means of a flexible, load-underlying member which raises the load and
    moves it laterally.

    395+,   for removing a load by a pushing or pulling means.

    417,    for a device for emptying a portable receptacle, which device
    includes means for pushing or ejecting the contents of the receptacle
    therefrom.

    491+,   for a self-loading or unloading vehicle having a load receiving
    portion which is pivotable relative to the horizontal, and wherein is
    provided a driven means for moving a load relative to the portion which
    movement may include removal from the portion.

    497,    for a self-loading or unloading vehicle having an elevatable load
    receiving portion and a load-handling means of the reciprocating conveyor
    type.

    539+,   for a self-loading or unloading vehicle having other loading or
    unloading means, and especially subclass 539 if the path of travel of the
    means represents an unprovided-for type of movement.

    585,    for the subcombination of a means, external to a vehicle, for the
    purpose of loading or unloading the vehicle, which means includes a
    load-engaging surface for pushing or pulling a load from the vehicle.

    661,    for an elevator or hoist which includes a carrier, and wherein the
    carrier includes a loading or unloading means in the nature of a push-pull
    device for moving a load laterally therefrom or thereto.

    679+,   for a vehicle having a load receiving portion, and a means for
    relocating a load of material therealong or therewithin.


CLS 414/510
TXT Three dimensional load-receiving portion includes movable load-underlying
    surface, and element comprises upright member attached to surface:

    Apparatus under subclass 509 wherein the load receiving portion has a
    significant depth dimension (e.g., by virtue of the provision of sidewall
    structure) and includes a movable floor upon which a load is supported, and
    wherein the load-engaging element is a member which is attached to the
    floor in an upright position and moves therewith.

    (1)     Note.  While the movable floor may constitute the primary means for
    ejecting the load, the upright member assists therein by removing any
    portion of the load which adheres to, or has its outbound movement
    interfered with, by the sidewall structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    527,    for a vehicle of the kind for this area having a flexible conveyor
    (e.g., a flexible platform) movable across a load bed of the vehicle, which
    conveyor is used in loading or unloading the vehicle.


CLS 414/511
TXT Pusher moved by ram movable to different positions along load-supporting
    platform:

    Apparatus under subclass 509 including a reciprocating ram which moves a
    load-pushing follower along said support means, and means for shifting said
    ram and follower to different positions on the support means.


CLS 414/512
TXT Plural pushers on same vehicles:

    Apparatus under subclass 509 including two or more load-pushing followers
    movable along said support means.


CLS 414/513
TXT Pusher guide means:

    Apparatus under subclass 509 including special means, such as tracks
    cooperating with rollers, for guiding a load-pushing follower along said
    support means.


CLS 414/514
TXT Pusher moved by flexible means:

    Apparatus under subclass 509 including a rope, cable, chain, or other
    flexible means connected to a load-pushing follower for moving the latter
    along said support means.


CLS 414/515
TXT Connected to winch:

    Apparatus under subclass 514 wherein said flexible means is connected to a
    winding means such as a rotatable drum.


CLS 414/516
TXT Connected to ram actuated by fluid pressure:

    Apparatus under subclass 514 wherein said flexible means is connected to
    the piston of a ram operated by fluid pressure, movement of said piston
    pulling said flexible means and said follower connected thereto.


CLS 414/517
TXT Pusher moved by ram actuated by fluid pressure:

    Apparatus under subclass 509 wherein the piston of a ram operated by fluid
    pressure is connected to a load-pushing follower, movement of said piston
    pulling or pushing the follower along said support means.


CLS 414/518
TXT Power-driven with cooperating handling means:

    Vehicles under subclass 507 having a power-driven conveyor and another
    material-handling means mounted on the vehicle, and so related to the
    material carrying portion of the vehicle as to coact with the conveyor to
    facilitate loading or unloading of the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  By "power-driven conveyor" is meant that type of conveyor
    which is normally classified in Class 198.

    (2)     Note.  Self-loading or unloading vehicles provided with (a) means
    for agitating the material, or (b) means for spreading material with the
    vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    502+,   for plural arrangements of conveyors which handle the load
    successively.

    567+,   for vertically swinging load supports combined with an endless
    conveyor.


CLS 414/519
TXT With gate means:

    Vehicles under subclass 507 having movable gate means for controlling the
    charging or discharging of material by the conveyor to or from the vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 50+ for vehicle body
    end gates.

    298,    Land Vehicles:  Dumping, subclass 7 for gravity unloading vehicles
    with load-delivering chutes; also, subclass 23 for gravity unloading
    vehicles having tilting bottoms with cover or end-gate control.


CLS 414/520
TXT Multiple gates:

    Vehicles under subclass 519 in which a plurality of gates are provided to
    control the flow of material to or from the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  The multiple arrangement normally provides selective
    discharge of material from the vehicle on to the unloading conveyor.


CLS 414/521
TXT With movable upright plate:

    Vehicles under subclass 507 having an upright plate secured to and movable
    with the conveyor within the vehicle body to load or unload the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    510,    for a self-loading or unloading vehicle having a conveyor for
    ejecting a load, which conveyor includes an upright member.


CLS 414/522
TXT Laterally movable rigid platform type:

    Vehicles under subclass 507 in which the conveyor comprises a rigid
    platform type of load support laterally movable to a loading or unloading
    position.

    (1)     Note.  The movement of the platform may be (a) from a position
    within the vehicle to a position projecting therefrom, or (b) from one end
    of the vehicle to the other.


CLS 414/523
TXT Shiftable or removable conveyor unit:

    Vehicles under subclass 507 in which the entire conveyor is shiftably
    and/or removably attached to the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes conveyors which may be variably
    positioned to load and/or unload the vehicle as well as those which may be
    placed in a storage position on the vehicle when not in use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    503+,   for a self-loading or unloading vehicle having a plurality of
    conveyors for successively handling a load, one of which conveyors is
    movably or shiftably mounted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 312+, 535+, 586+, 631.1+, and
    861.1+ for a conveyor of that class which is movably (e.g., adjustably)
    mounted.


CLS 414/525.1
TXT Reciprocating type:

    Vehicle under subclass 507 in which the conveyor includes a material
    engaging member that has a to-and-fro movement and moves the material a
    distance and then returns either for more material or for another
    engagement with the same material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    509+,   for a self-loading or unloading vehicle having means in the nature
    of a reciprocably movable, load engaging element for ejecting a load from
    the vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 736+ for a pusher conveyor of
    the reciprocating type, and subclasses 750.1+ for a conveying surface which
    reciprocates.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indefinite Length, subclasses 158+ for
    reciprocating means for advancing material of indefinite length.


CLS 414/525.2
TXT Compactor vehicle including compacting plate:

    Vehicle under subclass 525.1 including, as a component thereof, a container
    into which the conveyor member is intended to force the conveyed material
    tightly to eliminate void space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    519+,   for a gate member to prevent material from falling out of a
    container on a vehicle.  The compacting plate of this subclass is not a
    "gate" because it not only prevents material from falling out, but also
    serves to advance the material into the container.

    521,    for a movable upright plate within a container on a vehicle.


CLS 414/525.3
TXT Reverse-flow ejection:

    Vehicle under subclass 525.2 of the type wherein material is forced into
    the container from a first opening and is subsequently ejected through the
    same opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    509+,   for a self-loading or unloading vehicle having means in the nature
    of a reciprocably movable, load engaging element for ejecting a load from
    the vehicle.


CLS 414/525.4
TXT Sequentially acting compacting plates or with closure over compacting plate:

    Vehicle under subclass 525.3 including (a) a first reciprocating conveyor
    member also for forcing material into the container and a second,
    subsequently acting conveyor member also for forcing that material into the
    container, or (b) a reciprocating conveyor member and an openable cover
    limiting access to the reciprocating conveyor member.

    (1)     Note.  The successively acting conveyor members of clause (1) of
    this definition are considered to be part of the same conveyor assembly,
    and not to be "successive handling means".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    501+,   for a vehicle having successive handling means.


CLS 414/525.5
TXT Compacting plate movable along controlled arc:

    Vehicle under subclass 525.3 wherein the conveyor moves to-and-fro along a
    prescribed, nonrectilinear path when forcing and conveying material into
    the container.

    (1)     Note.  Movement of the compacting plate to allow removal of
    material is not done "when forcing and conveying material into the
    container" and therefore, does not effect classification herein.


CLS 414/525.51
TXT Including moving compacting plate pivot:

    Vehicle under subclass 525.5 wherein the conveyor member moves about a
    fixed axis with respect to a movable support, effecting resultant complex
    movement of the conveyor member.


CLS 414/525.52
TXT Plate pivot moves rectilinearly:

    Vehicle under subclass 525.51 wherein the pivot support moves along a
    straight-line with respect to the vehicle.


CLS 414/525.53
TXT With pivot-effecting hydraulic cylinder carried on pivot:

    Vehicle under subclass 525.52 including a piston and cylinder adapted to
    effect pivotal movement of the material engaging member, wherein the piston
    and cylinder are supported by the movable support.


CLS 414/525.54
TXT Pivot carried by arm turning about fixed second pivot:

    Vehicle under subclass 525.51 wherein the pivot support moves about a fixed
    axis with respect to the vehicle.


CLS 414/525.55
TXT Sequentially acting compactor plates or with closure over compacting plate:

    Vehicle under subclass 525.2 including (a) a first reciprocating conveyor
    member for forcing material into the container and a second, subsequently
    acting conveyor member also for forcing that material into the container,
    or (b) a reciprocating conveyor member and an openable cover limiting
    access to the reciprocating conveyor member.


CLS 414/525.6
TXT Rectilinearly reciprocating compacting plate:

    Vehicle under subclass 525.2 wherein the conveyor member moves to-and-fro
    in a straight-line to force the conveyed material into the container.


CLS 414/525.7
TXT Vibratory:

    Vehicle under subclass 525.1 wherein the conveyor member moves to-and-fro
    rapidly so as to establish a wave action in the material so as to cause the
    conveyed material to flow somewhat as a liquid.


CLS 414/525.8
TXT Detachable vibrator:

    Vehicle under subclass 525.7 wherein the conveyor member that moves
    to-and-fro is readily removable from the vehicle, so that it can be used on
    another such vehicle.


CLS 414/525.9
TXT Walking beam:

    Vehicle under subclass 525.1 including a first material engaging member
    that is elongated to bodily support and advance a portion of conveyed
    material and including a second material that also is elongated to bodily
    support and advance a portion of conveyed material, wherein the two members
    are generally parallel and coextensive and function such that one moves to
    engage and advance the material, then as it pulls away from the material,
    the other elongated member moves to engage and advance the material wherein
    the elongated members remain oriented parallel with each other and with the
    direction of material advance.

    (1)     Note.  The elongated members of this subclass may orbit while
    facing in a single direction, rather than move to-and-fro along a fixed
    path.


CLS 414/526
TXT Screw type:

    Vehicles under subclass 507 in which the loading or unloading means is a
    screw conveyor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 657+ for a conveyor of the
    screw type.


CLS 414/527
TXT Flexible conveyor type:

    Vehicles under subclass 507 in which the loading or unloading means
    comprises a flexible conveyor movable across the bed of a vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  Flexible platforms movable over a vehicle bed which are
    wound upon or unwound from drums carried by the vehicle are placed here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    510,    for a vehicle of the kind of this area having a conveyor for
    ejecting a load from the load-receiving portion of the vehicle, which
    conveyor includes a movable, load underlying surface.


CLS 414/528
TXT Endless:

    Conveyors under subclass 527 in which the flexible conveyor is endless.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 804+ for an endless conveyor.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 170+ for
    endless-belt-type feeders for material of indefinite length.


CLS 414/529
TXT Load-engaging roller or rollerway:

    Apparatus under subclass 507 wherein a load is guided or supported by at
    least one roller.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are cylindrical and spherical rollers.


CLS 414/530
TXT With means for locking roller against rotation:

    Apparatus under subclass 529 including means for preventing rotation of a
    roller.


CLS 414/531
TXT With separate means movable vertically between load supporting and
    retracted positions:

    Apparatus under subclass 529 including separate means which can be either
    (a) raised into engagement with a load resting on said roller to lift the
    load off the roller or to stabilize the load without removing it from the
    roller, or (b) lowered out of engagement with the load so that the latter
    is supported only by the roller.


CLS 414/532
TXT Shiftably or removably supported on vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 529 wherein said roller can be moved relative to,
    or is readily mountable on and removable from, a vehicle.


CLS 414/533
TXT Roller connected to support pivotally mounted on vehicle base:

    Apparatus under subclass 532 wherein a roller or plurality of rollers are
    attached to a support which pivots relative to the main frame or other base
    member of a vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include a roller or plurality of
    rollers carried by a trailer support frame which turns about the wheel axle
    of the trailer, unless the roller or rollers are connected to a separate
    support that pivots relative to said trailer support frame.

    (2)     Note.  Included here is a roller mounted on a shaft having
    eccentric trunnions at its ends, the shaft thus being swingable relative to
    bearings in which the trunnions are supported.


CLS 414/534
TXT Support pivotal about horizontal axis:

    Apparatus under subclass 533 wherein said support pivots about a horizontal
    axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    469+,   for a self-loading or unloading vehicle having a load handling
    means in the nature of a load-receiving portion which is pivotable realtive
    to the horizontal.


CLS 414/535
TXT Vertically shiftable:

    Apparatus under subclass 532 wherein said roller can be raised and lowered.


CLS 414/536
TXT With means for preventing movement of load relative thereto:

    Apparatus under subclass 529 including means which keeps a load from moving
    after it has been placed on said roller.


CLS 414/537
TXT Skidway:

    Vehicles under subclass 507 having inclined load-engaging ways of skids,
    for loading or unloading purposes.

    (1)     Note.  The skidway may or may not be permanently attached.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    430,    for wheel transporting trucks having ramps.

    480,    for a self-loading or unloading vehicle having a load receiving
    portion which is pivotable relative to the horizontal, and wherein the
    portion includes means which extends longitudinally therefrom to form a
    ramp.

    571,    for similar devices of general application.


CLS 414/538
TXT With haulage means (e.g., cable, etc.):

    Devices under subclass 537 having means for propelling a load over the
    inclined way or skid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    494,    for a self-loading or unloading vehicle having a load receiving
    portion which is pivotable relative to the horizontal, and having also a
    drive means in the nature of a haulage cable for moving a load relative to
    the portion.

    539+,   for elevators of the inclined type for loading a vehicle in which
    the skid or way provides a guide means for the elevating load carrier.

    571,    for combinations of skidways and hoist ropes not adapted for
    loading a vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 279+ and 325+ for apparatus for hauling or hoisting a load; the
    apparatus is mounted on a vehicle and includes a rotatably driven drum
    which pulls on a cable attached to the load.


CLS 414/539
TXT Loading or unloading by other carrier or mover means and the load movement
    thereof:

    Apparatus under subclass 467 wherein the load handling means comprises a
    carrier or mover of a kind not provided for above, and wherein the movement
    imparted to a load or a load holder by such a carrier or mover is utilized
    as a basis for subdividing the art.

    (1)     Note.  The art of this and the indented subclasses came, for the
    most part, from subclasses 75, 77-80, 82, and 85.5 of former Class 214.
    While most of those subclasses were superior to subclasses 506+ (former
    subclasses 83+), it appears advisable to move this area (539+) below that
    one until the art of that area (506+) can be reviewed.

    (2)     Note.  Inasmuch as the previously existing breakdown of the art of
    this area by the type of loading or unloading device (e.g., elevator,
    vertically swinging load support, etc.) did not appear to avoid the
    scattering of structurally related devices, it is considered that a more
    meaningful breakdown of the art may be achieved by giving primary
    consideration to the path of movement of the load or load holder.

    (3)     Note.  The movements referred to in this and the indented
    subclasses are those which are performed for an operational purpose, except
    where the contrary (e.g., for the purpose of storing the load holder) is
    indicated.

    (4)     Note.  Inasmuch as a carrier having track-guided wheels is not
    considered to be a conveyor-type carrier, it is placed in this and the
    indented subclasses rather than in subclasses 506+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    486+    and 491+, for a vehicle having a load receiving portion which is
    pivotable relative to the horizontal and wherein, in the former subclass,
    the vehicle includes means to raise a load above the portion for deposit
    thereon or therein, and, in the latter subclass, the vehicle includes
    driven means to move a load relative to the portion.


CLS 414/540
TXT Raising or lowering of load or load holder includes vertical, rectilinear
    movement:

    Apparatus under subclass 539 wherein the carrier or mover raises or lowers
    a load or load holder in a path which includes movement along a
    straight-line which is disclosed as being vertical.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    357,    for a load transporter having a load-handling (i.e., loading or
    unloading) means in the nature of an elevator, which means operates in
    response to movement of the transporter.

    592+,   for a load carrier in the nature of an elevator or hoist.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 279+ and 325+ for apparatus for hauling or hoisting a load
    including a rotatably driven drum which pulls on a cable attached to the
    load and which is mounted on a vehicle.


CLS 414/541
TXT And carrier or mover includes means enabling additional movement having
    horizontal component:

    Apparatus under subclass 540 wherein the carrier or mover is provided with
    means to also permit movement in a direction which is at least in part
    horizontal to be imparted to the load or load holder.

    (1)     Note.  The means of this subclass has been given an `enabling'
    context in order not to exclude a significant volume of art wherein the
    force to cause the movement is a manual one.

    (2)     Note.  The raising of a receptacle in a rectilinear manner,
    followed by the moving of it horizontally, or with a horizontal component,
    and the tipping of it to dump its contents, appears occasionally in the art
    of this subclass.


CLS 414/542
TXT Hoist having traversing (i.e., horizontal) movement:

    Apparatus under subclass 541 wherein the carrier or mover comprises a
    reelable (or otherwise retractable) cable type lifting device which is
    mounted, or constructed, in such a manner that it can impart movement in a
    horizontal direction, either by moving linearly or by pivoting about a
    vertical axis, to the load.


CLS 414/543
TXT Having boom pivotable about a vertical axis:

    Apparatus under subclass 542 wherein the device comprises or includes a
    laterally extending, cable-carrying member, which member is rotatable about
    a vertical axis.


CLS 414/544
TXT Elevator with laterally shiftable guides:

    Apparatus under subclass 541 wherein the carrier or mover is a
    load-underlying member in the nature of a platform which has guided,
    generally vertical movement, and wherein means is provided to enable the
    guide structure to move in a linear, generally horizontal direction.


CLS 414/545
TXT Carrier comprises movable component of load-receiving portion (e.g.,
    tailgate, section of floor, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 540 wherein the carrier comprises an element or
    segment of the load-receiving portion of the vehicle, which element or
    segment is movable relative to the remainder of the portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    539,    for a movable component of the kind found in this subclass, but
    wherein the movement thereof, while rectilinear in nature, is not limited
    to that along a vertical line.


CLS 414/546
TXT Raising or lowering of load or load holder includes curvilinear movement:

    Apparatus under subclass 539 wherein the carrier or mover raises or lowers
    a load or load holder in a path which includes movement along a line which
    represents an arc of either fixed or varying curvature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    442+,   for a load transporter having a load-handling (i.e., loading or
    unloading) means in the nature of a vertically swinging member, which means
    operates in response to movement of the transporter.

    680+,   for a load mover in the nature of a load-carrying member having
    means to swing it in a vertical plane.


CLS 414/547
TXT Pivotable, telescopic arm imparts path of plural radii:

    Apparatus under subclass 546 wherein the carrier or mover is an arm (e.g.,
    a boom) which is swingable about a generally horizontal axis and which
    changes its length by collapsing or extending within itself as it raises or
    lowers a load or load holder, thus imparting thereto a path which has a
    plurality (or an infinite number) of radii.


CLS 414/548
TXT Unloader actuated by gravity-influenced load:

    Apparatus under subclass 546 wherein the carrier or mover receives a load
    at a first elevation and is caused, by the weight of the load, to descend
    with the load to a second elevation.


CLS 414/549
TXT Carrier or mover includes means enabling additional movement of a
    rectilinear nature in a direction other than vertical:

    Apparatus under subclass 546 wherein the carrier or mover is provided with
    means to also permit straight-line movement in a nonvertical direction to
    be imparted to the load or load holder.

    (1)     Note. (1) Note of subclass 541 applies similarly here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    551+,   for related structure wherein a generally horizontal, rectilinear
    component is added to the movement of the load or load holder by movement
    of the vehicle, but not, however, that this is not movement of the load or
    load holder relative to the load-receiving portion.


CLS 414/550
TXT Carrier or mover includes means enabling additional movement about a
    vertical axis:

    Apparatus under subclass 546 wherein the carrier or mover is provided with
    means to also permit rotational movement about a vertical axis to be
    imparted to the load or load holder.

    (1)     Note.  (1) Note of subclass 541 applies similarly here.


CLS 414/551
TXT Load holder located relative to vehicle in such manner as to accrue load
    during travel of vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 546 wherein the load holder is so positioned with
    respect to the vehicle and its direction of movement that it obtains a load
    (e.g., of earth, cut grain, baled straw, etc.) as a result of the movement
    of the vehicle (e.g., by being driven beneath or into the load).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    442+,   is explained in the reference thereto in subclass 546.

    546,    for related structure, but wherein the load is placed on the load
    holder while the vehicle is stationary.


CLS 414/552
TXT Carrier or mover pivots about axis parallel to longitudinal axis of vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 551 wherein the arc through which the carrier or
    mover raises or lowers the load holder has its center on a line which is
    parallel to the longitudinal axis of the vehicle.


CLS 414/553
TXT Load holder or portion thereof has additional axis or pivot relative to
    swinging arm-type carrier or mover:

    Apparatus under subclass 551 wherein the carrier or mover is in the form of
    a swinging arm, and the load holder, or a part (e.g., a door) thereof, is
    pivotable relative to that member as well as to the support about which the
    member swings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    552,    for a carrier or mover which pivots about an axis which is parallel
    to the longitudinal axis of the vehicle and wherein a load holder thereon
    frequently is additionally pivotable relative thereto.


CLS 414/554
TXT Load holder pivotable about lower edge of opening in end of load-receiving
    portion:

    Apparatus under subclass 551 wherein the load holder, which serves also as
    the carrier, is pivotably mounted along the bottom side of an aperture
    formed in an end of the load receiving portion, the load holder frequently
    serving-- after it has been raised to cause its load to move into the
    receiving portion--to close the aperture therein.


CLS 414/555
TXT With means to grasp load:

    Apparatus under subclass 546 wherein the load holder comprises two or more
    members which are movable toward one another to grip or otherwise hold
    therebetween the load.


CLS 414/556
TXT Carrier comprises movable component of load-receiving portion:

    Apparatus under subclass 546 wherein the carrier comprises an element or
    segment of the load-receiving portion of the vehicle, which element or
    segment is movable relative to the remainder of the portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    469,    for a self-loading or unloading vehicle having a load receiving
    portion, or a significant section of the portion, which is pivotable
    relative to the horizontal.  In the instance where only a section of the
    portion is pivotable, and the movement of that section places a load on, or
    removes a load from, the vehicle, there may exist considerable similarity
    with some of the art of this subclass (556), the difference amounting
    primarily to what proportion of the load receiving portion is represented
    by the movable significant section of that subclass or by the movable
    component of this subclass.

    546,    for related structure, but wherein the carrier is in the nature of
    an attachment to the vehicle, rather than a component of the load-receiving
    portion.


CLS 414/557
TXT Tailgate:

    Apparatus under subclass 556 wherein the element is a generally planar
    surface which in its nonload-moving position forms the rear wall of the
    load-receiving portion or a significant part thereof.


CLS 414/558
TXT Carrier movable to storage position beneath vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 546 wherein the carrier is supported in such a
    manner that it may be pivoted or otherwise moved to a     nonoperating
    (i.e., storage) position in which it is located beneath the load-receiving
    portion or other portion of the vehicle.


CLS 414/559
TXT Loading by haulage cable imparting principally horizontal movement to load
    or load holder:

    Apparatus under subclass 539 wherein the mover is a reelable (or otherwise
    retractable) cable which imparts to the load or load holder movement which
    is principally in a horizontal direction in order to pull the load or load
    holder to the load receiving portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    538,    for a self-loading or unloading vehicle having a conveyor type
    loader comprising an inclined way and a means for moving a load thereover,
    which means may be a cable.

    539,    for a self-loading or unloading vehicle having a carrier or mover
    for loading or unloading which may involve a cable, but wherein a principal
    portion of the movement of the load or load holder is in a lifting (i.e.,
    nonhorizontal) direction.

    540,    for a self-loading or unloading vehicle having a carrier or mover
    of the kind noted above for subclass 539, but wherein at least part of the
    lifting movement is rectilinear in nature and vertical in direction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 279+ and 325+ for apparatus for hauling or hoisting a load; the
    apparatus is mounted on a vehicle and includes a rotatably driven drum
    which pulls on a cable attached to a load.


CLS 414/560
TXT TRAVERSING HOIST TYPE:

    Apparatus under the class definition of the type defined in Class 212,
    Traversing Hoists, with the addition of some element or qualifying
    characteristic, as for example, the addition of a chute, making a
    combination beyond the scope of the hoist class or other classes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    564,    for a nontraversing hoist or elevator in combination with an
    endless or rotary carrier adapted to receive the load from the hoist or
    elevator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    212,    Traversing Hoists, appropriate subclasses.


CLS 414/561
TXT Traveling crane:

    Apparatus under subclass 560 comprising a Class 212, Traversing Hoists,
    type traveling bridge means, a trolley thereon and a hoist on the trolley
    combined with a means whereby the resulting combination is beyond the scope
    of Class 212.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclasses 312+ for traveling bridges, per se.


CLS 414/562
TXT Switch system:

    Apparatus under subclass 561 in which the traveling bridge may be switched
    between rails upon which it is adapted to move.


CLS 414/563
TXT Tow truck type:

    Apparatus under subclass 560 wherein the hoist is supported on and caused
    to traverse by a land vehicle and adapted to be used to lift or pull a load
    removed from the vehicle.


CLS 414/564
TXT HOIST OR ELEVATOR AND ENDLESS OR ROTARY CARRIER:

    Apparatus under the class definition having a hoist or elevator in
    combination with an endless or rotary carrier arranged so that the load may
    be discharged from one to the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137.1+, for such combinations used to load or unload ships.


CLS 414/565
TXT VERTICALLY SWINGING SHOVEL AND AUXILIARY CARRIER:

    Apparatus under the class definition having a vertically swingable shovel
    or scoop combined with an auxiliary carrier whereby load may be delivered
    from the shovel or scoop to the auxiliary carrier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 506+ for means for collecting
    a load from a static support for delivery to an endless conveyor.


CLS 414/566
TXT Vertically swinging shovel having an orbital path:

    Apparatus under subclass 565 in which the shovel or scoop may move in a
    circuit.


CLS 414/567
TXT VERTICALLY SWINGING LOAD SUPPORT AND ENDLESS OR ROTARY CARRIER:

    Apparatus under the class definition having combined (a) a load-carrying
    device which is swingable in a vertical plane, and (b) a load-carrying
    means of the rotary or endless type.


CLS 414/568
TXT For handling bottles:

    Apparatus under subclass 567 in which said load-carrying means are
    particularly constructed to accommodate bottle-like articles as a load.


CLS 414/569
TXT VERTICALLY SWINGING LOAD SUPPORT AND HOIST OR DRAG LINE:

    Apparatus under the class definition having a vertically swinging load
    support member combined with a hoisting or handling cable which may run
    over said member, whereby said cable is usable to drag or hoist a load to
    said member whereupon the member may swing the load in a vertical plane.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclasses 373+ for similar devices intended for raising and
    lowering boats.

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclasses 169 for traversing hoists which
    function in a similar manner.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 285+ and 319+ for similar devices
    particularly designed for shifting lamps.


CLS 414/570
TXT ENDLESS OR ROTARY CARRIER AND DRAG LINE SCOOP:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising the combination of a scoop
    means adapted to be loaded by being dragged by a cable means in contact
    with the material it is to handle and an endless or rotary conveyor to
    which said material may be delivered by said scoop means.


CLS 414/571
TXT SKIDWAY WITH HOISTING ROPE:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising a guideway, either vertical
    or inclined, and a hoisting rope so arranged as to raise or advance
    material along the way.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    538,    for a self-loading or unloading vehicle having an inclined way or
    skid and a means (e.g., a haulage cable) to move a load over the way or
    skid.


CLS 414/572
TXT LOAD-TRANSPORTING TYPE VEHICLE TO BE LOADED OR UNLOADED, OR EXTERNAL MEANS
    FOR THE LOADING OR UNLOADING, OR FOR COOPERATING THEREWITH, OF SUCH A
    VEHICLE:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising either (a) a vehicle of a
    type used for transporting a load and particularly adapted to cooperate
    with a disclosed means external thereto for loading or unloading the
    vehicle, or (b) a means which is external of a disclosed vehicle and is
    particularly adapted to load, unload, or cooperate in the loading or
    unloading of (e.g., the means may comprise no more than a static structure
    which serves only to support the load before, after, or during the loading
    or unloading) the vehicle; provided that neither vehicle (a) nor means (b)
    is classifiable elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  The art of this and the indented subclasses comprises
    patents from subclasses 38+ of former Class 214, but wherein the claims
    were found to be limited to either the vehicle or the external means.
    Accordingly, although it was not readily establishable at the time of this
    reclassification, it is possible that a more appropriate locus exists
    elsewhere for certain of the patents presently classified herein.

    (2)     Note.  Cross-reference copies of the patents of this and the
    indented subclasses are found in the corresponding combination area,
    subclasses 333 to 402, when their subject matter sets forth part of a
    combination expressly provided for in that area (333-402).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333     and 402, for the use, in combination, of the two types of subject
    matter provided for, per se, in this (572) and the indented subclasses.

    467+,   for a vehicle having means thereon for loading or unloading itself.


CLS 414/573
TXT Means includes driven carrier for receiving a load from a vehicle at an
    unloading station:

    Apparatus under subclass 572 wherein the external means includes a carrier
    of a driven type for handling a load which is to be removed from a vehicle
    of a load-transporting type at a station.


CLS 414/574
TXT Endless apron-type conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 573 wherein the carrier comprises a powered
    conveyor of the kind having an endless, load underlying surface for moving
    a load.


CLS 414/575
TXT Means comprises device for changing the attitude of a vehicle, or its load
    body, relative to the horizontal for unloading by gravity:

    Apparatus under subclass 572 wherein the external means is a device for
    tilting, inverting, etc., a vehicle which is to be unloaded, or a
    load-holding component thereof which is to be emptied, in relation to the
    horizontal in order to cause a load carried thereby, or therein, to depart
    under the influence of gravity.


CLS 414/576
TXT Framework for holding a vehicle, pivotable about fixed axis through
    framework parallel to longitudinal axis of vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 575 wherein the device comprises a cage-like
    structure which extends around, or partly around, a vehicle supported
    therein, which structure is pivotable about an axis which is fixed and
    extends therethrough in a direction which is parallel to the longitudinal
    axis of the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359+,   for the combination of the framework of this subclass and a wheeled
    vehicle held therein.


CLS 414/577
TXT Pivotably movable structure for supporting a vehicle in toto, positioned,
    at least initially, in underlying relation thereto:

    Apparatus under subclass 575 wherein the device comprises a member (e.g.,
    platform) for supporting a vehicle, which member is mounted for movement
    about an axis, and wherein the member, at least at the time when the
    vehicle moves thereonto, occupies a position whereby it is supporting the
    vehicle from beneath.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    362+,   for the combination of the member of this subclass and a wheeled
    vehicle supported thereby.


CLS 414/578
TXT With means for adapting structure to accommodate more than one length of
    vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 557 wherein the structure is provided with means
    whereby it is adjustable or is otherwise enabled to receive and support,
    one at a time, vehicles of differing lengths.

    (1)     Note.  The means often comprises an auxiliary platform which is
    joined to the principal platform to extend it.


CLS 414/579
TXT With fluid or mechanical friction brake to regulate movement of structure:

    Apparatus under subclass 577 wherein the structure is provided with a brake
    of either a fluid type or a mechanical friction type for smoothing,
    slowing, or checking its pivotable movement.

    (1)     Note.  In the event that the movement is induced by gravity, the
    brake is responsible also for starting the movement.

    (2)     Note.  The checking may be of a repetitive nature (e.g., to induce
    a load to move from the vehicle).


CLS 414/580
TXT With means for limiting longitudinal movement of vehicle on structure:

    Apparatus under subclass 577 wherein the structure is provided with means
    (e.g., a stop) for reducing or eliminating movement, in a direction
    parallel to its longitudinal axis, of a vehicle supported thereon.


CLS 414/581
TXT Having axis of pivot parallel to longitudinal axis of vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 577 wherein the axis of pivot of the member is
    parallel to the longitudinal axis of a vehicle supported thereon.


CLS 414/582
TXT By raising one end of a vehicle relative to other end thereof:

    Apparatus under subclass 575 wherein the device (e.g., an elevator, hoist,
    jack, swinging arm, etc.) acts on one end of a vehicle to push, pull, or
    otherwise move it to a height which is superior to that of the other end of
    the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    385,    for the combination of a driven device for raising one end of a
    wheeled vehicle relative to the other end, and the vehicle.


CLS 414/583
TXT Including a vertically swinging lifting member:

    Apparatus under subclass 582 wherein the device includes a member which
    supports a portion of a vehicle adjacent to an end thereof and is driven
    about a horizontal axis of pivot to raise that end of the vehicle.


CLS 414/584
TXT Means comprises device or member for moving or causing movement of either a
    vehicle or load receiving or relinquishing structure for an alignment
    purpose:

    Apparatus under subclass 572 wherein the external means comprises a device
    or a member which changes, or results in changing, either the position of a
    vehicle which is to be loaded or unloaded relative to a structure which is
    to give up or receive the load of such a vehicle, or the position of such a
    structure relative to such a vehicle, the change in position being for the
    purpose of placing the vehicle and the structure in a directional
    relationship with each other which will aid the transfer of a load
    therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    396     and 401, for the combination of a wheeled vehicle and an external
    means in the nature of either a load support, or a load receiving or
    relinquishing   structure, respectively, and wherein is provided means for
    aligning the vehicle and the external means.


CLS 414/585
TXT Means includes a load-engaging surface or element for pushing load from
    vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 572 wherein the external means includes a surface
    or element for engaging the side of a load on a vehicle and causing the
    load to be pushed from the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    395+    and 400, for the combination of a wheeled vehicle and external
    means in the nature of a pushing or pulling device for either unloading, or
    loading, respectively, the vehicle.


CLS 414/586
TXT DEVICE OR ELEMENT ASSOCIATED WITH THE HANDLING OR MOVING OF A CHARGE FOR A
    HEATING-TYPE CHAMBER:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising (a) a device or element for
    handling a material charge within a receptacle-like structure of the kind
    adapted to be provided with means for heating it, or (b) a portion of a
    device for moving a material charge to or from a receptacle-like structure
    of the kind adapted to be provided with means for heating it.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclasses 239+ for an element used in
    connection with a still, retort, or the like (e.g., a coke oven), and
    subclasses 242+ for such an element if it is in the nature of a closure.


CLS 414/587
TXT Charge leveler:

    Apparatus under subclass 586 wherein the device comprises means for
    leveling the upper portion of the material charge after it has been
    deposited in the chamber.


CLS 414/588
TXT Of rotary type:

    Apparatus under subclass 587 wherein the leveling means is mounted for
    rotating about an axis.


CLS 414/589
TXT LOAD SUPPORT HAS LINEAR VERTICAL MOVEMENT AND ADDITIONAL MOVEMENT FOR
    ALIGNING AND MOUNTING LOAD AT A SPECIFIC LOCATION:

    Apparatus under the class definition having means constructed to move an
    article linearly in a vertical direction and means for moving said article
    additionally in other directions or into different attitudes for the
    purpose of establishing a specific positional relationship between the
    article and a means to which it is to be attached.

    (1)     Note.  A mere platform (e.g., forks of a fork lift truck) or bed
    means upon which any article may be placed are not included under the
    definition.  See, for example, subclasses 427+ for shovel or fork type
    vertically swinging load supports.

    (2)     Note.  Article position changing manipulators include any movement
    transmission means which, when activated by manual or other means, causes
    the article to move and change position.  A swivel mounted article support,
    per se, permitting the position of the article to be changed as a result of
    manual engagement with the article, is, for example, in subclasses 754+
    below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    540+,   for a self-loading or unloading vehicle having a load handling
    means which raises or lowers a load in a path which includes vertical,
    rectilinear movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 177 for rail mounted manipulators.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    appropriate subclasses for means to pull an article in a vertical direction.

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses for adjustable work holders.


CLS 414/590
TXT Additional movement is rotational:

    Apparatus under subclass 589 in which the other movement imparted to the
    article is swinging, rotary, or curvilinear.


CLS 414/591
TXT GUIDED HOIST WITH LOAD-SUPPORTING GRAB MEANS MOVABLE HORIZONTALLY BY MEANS
    WHICH SWINGS HORIZONTALLY OR MOVES LINEARLY:

    Apparatus under the class definition having a grab actuatable to engage a
    load to move the load between horizontally spaced positions by being moved
    in a vertical direction by a hoisting means which, when actuated, restricts
    lateral movement of said grab, and having means for conveying said hoisting
    means either linearly or in a horizontally swinging motion transversely of
    its vertical motion.

    (1)     Note.  The conveying means does not include a ground engaging
    vehicular support for the hoisting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    564,    for a hoist or elevator which may deposit its load on a rotary or
    endless carrier.

    589+,   for load supports which are capable of vertical linear movement and
    have an additional movement capability for the purpose of positioning a
    load for the mounting of the same at a specific location.

    618+,   for grabs hoisted by means having no significant transverse motion
    capability.

    629+    and 631+, for an elevator movable on an adjustably mounted guide
    and wherein the guide may be mounted on a vehicle.

    729+,   for a grab supported by a vertically swinging member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    212,    Traversing Hoists, appropriate subclasses for similar device having
    freely suspended hoist means.


CLS 414/592
TXT ELEVATOR OR HOIST AND LOADING OR UNLOADING MEANS THEREFOR:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising a ground-, structure-,
    vehicle-, or otherwise-supported elevator or hoist for raising or lowering
    a load, the load being raised, etc., on a load carrier (or, as sometimes
    identified herein, a carrier) in the form of a bucket, cage, car, grapple,
    hook, lifting fork, platform, etc., which load carrier moves in a vertical
    or inclined path, and a means for loading or unloading the carrier or for
    facilitating the loading or unloading thereof.

    (1)     Note.  A significant difference between an elevator and a hoist is
    that the former includes structure for guiding its load carrier.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass and subclass 95 of former Class 214,
    previously included the limitation "self" (as applied to the loading or
    unloading means) in its title.  While a significant portion of the art may
    meet such a limitation, the art seen in the reclassification of this
    subclass and those indented subclasses formerly numbered 660 (now 628+),
    670-674 (now 630+), 701 (now 640+), and 730, 731 (now 662+), as well as
    that seen in newly developed subclasses 659+, indicated that the limitation
    could not be retained.

    (3)     Note.  In the reclassification of the subclasses mentioned in (2)
    Note, it appeared appropriate, except in the case of subclasses 659+, to
    distinguish those elevators or hoists which claimed portability (e.g.,
    vehicle-mounted) from those which did not; however, it is pointed out that,
    (a) the art in the new "portability" subclasses has not been screened
    against the vehicular areas of the class, and (b) the establishment of the
    "portability" subclasses does not mean that there are not patents to
    vehicle-mounted elevators or hoists in other, non-reclassified subclasses
    which depend from subclass 592.

    (4)     Note.  The line between a material handling device proper for this
    Class (414) and an elevator or industrial lift truck proper for Class 187,
    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle, is as
    follows:



    (a)     Class 414 provides for load engaging structure in which the load
    support surface travels in a generally vertical primary lift direction and
    (1) is mounted for movement in a direction other than the primary lifting
    direction (e.g., tilting) or (2) has an additional load handling structure
    (e.g., conveyor) or (3) is constructed in such a manner that the load
    support surface is inherently self-charged or self-discharged along the
    primary lift direction; and

    (b)     Class 187, Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for
    Vehicle, provides for industrial lift trucks or components thereof when the
    load is shifted in its entirety in a primary lifting direction from one
    level to another vertically spaced level and may additionally include (1)
    mere pivoting or tilting of the load supporting structure for detachment or
    storage or (2) retaining of a received load on the support surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143.1,  for ship charging or discharging apparatus in the nature of a hoist
    line bucket.

    191,    for the charging of a chamber utilized for a heating function by
    means of a driven device for transporting material to and/or into, or into
    and within, the chamber and wherein the device comprises a traversing hoist
    having either a material underlying support or a material attracting and
    gripping means.

    246,    247+, 249+, 260, and 264, for a vertically moving vehicle carrier,
    which carrier is adapted for charging or discharging a facility for the
    parking of wheeled vehicles.

    281,    for a means for charging or discharging plural, static structures,
    and wherein the means includes a portable elevating device having a
    load-sustaining surface.

    364+,   for the combination of a pivotably or tiltably movable structure
    for supporting a wheeled, load-transporting type vehicle and reorient-the
    vehicle into a load-releasing attitude, and the vehicle being loaded
    thereby, and wherein the axis of pivot or tilt of the structure is
    vertically shiftable (e.g., by means in the nature of an elevator or hoist).

    385,    for the combination of a device external of a wheeled,
    load-transporting type vehicle for raising one end of the vehicle to
    promote movement of a load therefrom by gravity, and the vehicle being
    unloaded thereby.

    391+,   for the combination of a driven device external of a wheeled,
    load-transporting type vehicle for raising or lowering a load which is to
    be taken from the vehicle, and the vehicle being unloaded thereby.

    399,    for the combination of a device external of a wheeled,
    load-transporting type vehicle for raising or lowering a load which is to
    be moved to the vehicle, and the vehicle being loaded thereby.

    422+,   for a receptacle emptying device of an elevator type.

    427,    for a wheel and wheel type article handler and transporter having a
    wheel engaging means of an elevator type.

    441,    for a motion responsive load handler and transporter, wherein the
    handler is operated by a ground-engaging wheel and is guided for
    rectilinear movement in a vertical or inclined path.

    458+,   for a vehicle having load handling means in the nature of spaced,
    shelf-like load engaging portions, which portions engage the load from
    opposite sides and elevate it for transport.

    460+,   for a vehicle which straddles a load and elevates it.

    471,    for a self-loading or unloading vehicle having a load-receiving
    portion which is pivotable relative to the horizontal and wherein means is
    provided for also raising or lowering the portion and its axis of pivot.

    486+,   for a self-loading or unloading vehicle having a load receiving
    portion which is pivotable relative to the horizontal and wherein the
    vehicle has means to raise a load above said portion for deposit thereon or
    therein.

    495+,   for a self-loading or unloading vehicle having a load-receiving
    portion which is movable in a vertical or inclined path.  While that area
    (495+) does not exclude a vehicle-mounted elevator (e.g., an industrial
    truck), the placement of the art (in former Class 214) appears to have
    evolved in such a manner that a truck of the "roadway" type was considered
    proper for classification there (495+), whereas a truck of the industrial
    type was more likely to be classified here (592+) -- in spite of the fact
    that this area has not, in the past, provided recognition for the vehicular
    aspect of such a truck.

    540+,   for a self-loading or unloading vehicle having a load-handling
    means which raises or lowers a load in a path which includes vertical
    rectilinear movement.

    564,    for a combination of carriers, at least one of which is an elevator
    or hoist and another is an endless or rotary carrier.

    582+,   for a device for raising one end of a vehicle relative to the other
    end thereof in order to place the vehicle in an attitude whereby it will
    unload under the influence of gravity.

    589+,   for a load support which moves linearly in a vertical direction and
    has additional movement for aligning and mounting its load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 398+ for a scoop or bucket having separate
    lines to load and hoist.

    89,     Ordnance, subclass 46 for ordnance hoisting apparatus.

    186,    Merchandising, subclasses 51 and 22+ for a service type elevator
    for a dining room or store, respectively.

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    appropriate subclasses for an industrial lift truck or elevator having load
    handling means. (see above line note for distinction).


CLS 414/593
TXT Mail:

    Elevating devices under subclass 592 specialized for the handling of mail.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    265,    for a guided, wheeled device for transporting mail and an external
    means cooperating therewith for loading or unloading the device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyor:  Power-Driven, subclasses 349.1+ for systems including
    similar devices.

    258,    Railway Mail Delivery, for devices which transfer mail to and from
    moving trains.


CLS 414/594
TXT Load lowering, automatic return:

    Elevating devices under subclass 592 designed to lower a load, discharge or
    release it, and automatically return the carrier to receiving position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    186,    Merchandising, subclasses 4+ for gravity operated tilting track
    sections.


CLS 414/595
TXT Inclined track:

    Elevating devices under subclass 592 comprising an inclined track and a
    load-handling load carrier.

    (1)     Note.  If the device has both inclined and vertical track-sections,
    it is classified in one of the preceding subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168+    and 178, for receptacles moved back and forth along an inclined way
    in combination with a chamber of a type utilized for a heating function.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 135 for cars traveling on inclined planes.

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclasses 245+ for an inclined elevator which does not include structure
    or means to load or unload its load supporting structure.


CLS 414/596
TXT Ditching type:

    Devices under subclass 595 adapted for ditching or similar operations,
    typically comprising a portable and vertically adjustable trackway
    extending transversely of the ditch and a scoop operating on the trackway
    whereby the trackway serves as a templet to control the cross section of
    the ditch or excavation.


CLS 414/597
TXT Pivoted track:

    Devices under subclass 596 wherein the scoop or fork runs on a trackway
    pivoted for vertical on swinging and usually extending longitudinally of
    the excavation.


CLS 414/598
TXT Tilting carrier:

    Devices under subclass 595 wherein the carrier has a tilting movement at
    some portion of its travel for the purpose of loading or unloading.


CLS 414/599
TXT Tilting track section:

    Elevating handlers under subclass 598 in which there is a tilting section
    pivoted to the inclined trackway, which section receives the carrier and
    tilts with it.


CLS 414/600
TXT Running out from base:

    Tilting elevating devices under subclass 598 comprising a carrier, usually
    a fork or scoop, designed to move out from the inclined track at its lower
    end, ordinarily for the purpose of gathering a load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    605,    for similar devices not involving a tilting carrier.


CLS 414/601
TXT Return, buffer, or counterweight feature:

    Elevating devices under subclass 600 comprising some means tending to
    return the carrier from dumping position, a buffer of some kind, or a
    counterweight.


CLS 414/602
TXT Return, buffer, or counterweight feature:

    Tilting carrier devices under subclass 598 having some means tending to
    return the carrier from dumping position, a buffer of some kind, or a
    counterweight.


CLS 414/603
TXT Skeleton or fork:

    Tilting elevating devices under subclass 598 having a carrier of openwork
    construction, usually a fork.


CLS 414/604
TXT Outhaul feature:

    Elevating devices under subclass 595 having means to move the carrier out
    from the track at its lower end.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 394+ for cable operated excavators.


CLS 414/605
TXT Carrier running out from base:

    Elevating devices under subclass 595 comprising a carrier, usually a fork
    or scoop, designed to move out from the track at its lower end, ordinarily
    for the purpose of gathering a load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    600+,   for similar devices in which the carrier is tilted to load or
    unload.


CLS 414/606
TXT Magnet and grab:

    Elevating devices under subclass 592 wherein a magnet is arranged to first
    lift a plate or other object of magnetic material, and thereafter a grapple
    may seize it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    737,    for a vertically swinging load support provided with a
    load-grasping member which may be in the nature of a magnet.


CLS 414/607
TXT Convertible attachment:

    Elevating devices under subclass 592 comprising an elevating load
    supporting means and a mechanism readily attachable thereto to convert the
    load supporting means to a different type of handling mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  The devices here classified are, for the most part,
    industrial trucks having attachments for converting them into cranes,
    portable grapples and the like.


CLS 414/608
TXT Separable rack:

    Elevating devices under subclass 592 which comprise a frame or rack for
    receiving a load when not mounted on the elevator and means on the elevator
    for engaging or "laying hold" of the frame or rack to handle it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    446,    for tilting vehicle type handlers having separable load racks
    therefor.

    498+,   for vehicles having means for moving a separable load rack onto the
    carrying portion of the vehicle.


CLS 414/609
TXT With external cooperating movable feeding or discharging means:

    Elevator devices under subclass 592 having means separate from the carrier
    positioned adjacent the path of the carrier for receiving the load from the
    carrier or feeding the load thereto, and which means is movable to or from
    an operative position with respect to the carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    564,    for combinations of elevators and endless or rotary carriers.


CLS 414/610
TXT Elevator carrier movement responsive:

    Movable feeding or receiving means under subclass 609 which are operated by
    movement of the carrier with respect to said means.


CLS 414/611
TXT Vehicle handling:

    Devices under subclass 610 comprising means for moving cars onto or off the
    carrier.

    (1)     Note.  The load being placed upon or removed from the elevator, in
    this subclass, is in the form of a wheeled carrier, i.e., a car.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    253+,   for a facility for the parking of wheeled vehicles, wherein is
    provided means for moving a vehicle to or from a device which carries the
    vehicle within the facility, which device may be in the nature of an
    elevator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 128 for elevators for transferring cars to or
    from a track section which do not include external means for moving or
    controlling the movement of a car onto the elevator.


CLS 414/612
TXT Loading means:

    Devices under subclass 610 in which the movable means is constructed and
    arranged to load the carrier.


CLS 414/613
TXT Flow control mechanism (i.e., volume):

    Loading means under subclass 612 in which means are provided for measuring
    or controlling the flow of a predetermined amount of material into the
    carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for devices of this character in which the control of the amount of
    material is by weight.


CLS 414/614
TXT Trap chamber type:

    Flow control devices under subclass 613 in the form of a trap chamber
    adapted to receive a predetermined volume of material and subsequently
    discharge it into a carrier.


CLS 414/615
TXT Movable to feeding position over carrier:

    Devices under subclass 612 in which the movement of the loading means is
    into the path of movement of the carrier.

    (1)     Note.  These devices are, for the most part, chutes mounted for
    movement to a position in which the discharge end thereof is positioned
    above the carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    613+,   for similar devices including means for predetermining the quantity
    of material loaded into the carrier.


CLS 414/616
TXT Valved carrier:

    Devices under subclass 610 in which the carrier includes valve or gate type
    means for permitting gravity discharge of the load therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    414,    for a receptacle dumping device in which means are provided on the
    dumping mechanism for controlling discharge of material from the inverted
    receptacle.

    644,    for an elevator or hoist type device having a valved carrier which
    is tilted to assist in its loading or unloading.

    657,    for an elevator or hoist type device having a carrier which
    comprises a valved container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclasses 162+ for valved buckets especially adapted for
    use in a well.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 68.22+ for
    hoist-line buckets, per se, which may or may not be of the valved type.


CLS 414/617
TXT Adjustably mounted discharge guide:

    Devices under subclass 609 including a chute or the like adapted to receive
    material from the elevator and adjustably mounted for movement along the
    elevator structure so as to direct materials from various points of
    elevation.


CLS 414/618
TXT Grab:

    Apparatus under subclass 592 in which the load carrier is a seizing,
    grasping, or clamping means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    444,    for a tiltable or rockable vehicle having a load grasping or
    hooking means thereon.

    606,    for the combination of a magnet and grab load elevating means.

    729+,   for a vertically swinging load support having a load-engaging grab.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    212,    Traversing Hoists, pertinent subclasses entitled "grab", for hoists
    having a grab suspended from a support by a cable combined with means to
    swing or shift the grab laterally.


CLS 414/619
TXT Cantilevered type (e.g., industrial truck, etc.):

    Elevating grab devices under subclass 618 in which the load grasping means
    projects substantially in its entirety from one side of the elevator
    structure in cantilevered fashion so as to facilitate engagement of a load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    647     and 655, for cantilevered elevator or hoist devices in which the
    load support is not in the form of a grab means.


CLS 414/620
TXT Movable about horizontal axis:

    Devices under subclass 619 in which the grab is mounted for swinging or
    rotating movement as a unit about a horizontal axis provided by a pivot
    means located on the elevating support for the grab to shift the load after
    it is engaged by the grab.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    639,    for elevators not provided with grab means, which are mounted for
    swinging movement about horizontal axes.


CLS 414/621
TXT Movable rigid jaw clamping type:

    Grabs under subclass 619 in which the article engaging means comprises
    swingable of slidable rigid jaw means adapted to grasp an article for
    subsequent handling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    592,    having a carrier comprising spaced, elongated, horizontally
    coplanar members, and wherein one or more of the members is shiftable in a
    horizontal plane in a direction perpendicular to the axis of elongation.

    665+,   667, 669+, and 671, for an elevator or hoist of this heading.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 103.1+ and
    106+ for movable jaw-type hand and hoist line grapples.


CLS 414/622
TXT Horizontal support with coacting element or holddown:

    Grabs under subclass 621 having jaw portions, one of which provides a
    primary support in the form of a horizontal platform, fork, or the like
    arranged to normally pick up or receive a load and support it against
    gravity, and the other of which is movable relative to said primary support
    to secure the load on the latter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 362, 499, and 500+ for means to hold an
    element or article to its supporting surface.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 34+ for vehicles having load binders
    combined therewith.


CLS 414/623
TXT Multiple article or rack type:

    Jaw type grabs under subclass 621 in which the grasping means comprises (a)
    a plurality of grapples for engaging distinct and separated articles, or
    (b) a compartmented skeleton framework for receiving an article in each
    compartment and article grasping means associated with each compartment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 87.1+ for
    hand or hoist-type multiple grapples.


CLS 414/624
TXT Clamshell:

    Grab devices under subclass 618 having cooperating jaw portions similar in
    shape to the two halves of a clamshell which are relatively movable to
    provide a grapple type of bucket.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclass 340 or 341 for clamshell bucket type dredgers,
    and subclass 461 for clamshell buckets, per se.

    212,    Traversing Hoists, all subclasses entitled "grab", for clamshell
    bucket type of grabs constituting the load engaging portion of various
    types of traversing hoists.


CLS 414/625
TXT Guided:

    Clamshell bucket type of grab under subclass 624 in which means are
    provided for restraining the movement of the clamshell to a predetermined
    path of travel.


CLS 414/626
TXT Suspended:

    Devices under subclass 618 in which the grab means is supported solely from
    above by its raising and lowering mechanism and is free on all sides for
    readily engaging the load.


CLS 414/627
TXT Suction gripper type:

    Apparatus under subclass 618 having means to develop an area of reduced
    pressure between the load carrier and the load thereby adapting the carrier
    to support the load from movement.


CLS 414/628
TXT Elevator wherein means comprises guide mounted for relative movement, and
    tiltable carrier thereon:

    Apparatus under subclass 592 comprising an elevator, and wherein the means
    for loading or unloading the carrier thereof comprises means whereby the
    structure which guides the carrier in its vertical travel may be moved
    (e.g., repositioned, adjusted, etc.) relative to its support, and
    additional means whereby the carrier may tilt (i.e., pivot about an axis
    which is other than vertical) relative to the guide structure.


CLS 414/629
TXT Portable (e.g., vehicle-mounted, etc.) elevator:

    Apparatus under subclass 628 wherein the guide and carrier are components
    of an elevator which is supported in such a manner (e.g., as being mounted
    on a vehicle) that it may be moved readily from one location to another.

    (1)     Note.  See (3) Note of subclass 592.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclasses 222+ for a self loading or unloading industrial lift truck
    having a vertically moving load support which does not have either its load
    support mounted for movement in an additional direction (e.g., tilting) or
    an additional means to load or unload the load support (e.g., power roller).


CLS 414/630
TXT Elevator wherein means comprises guide mounted for relative movement:

    Apparatus under subclass 592 comprising an elevator, and wherein the means
    for loading or unloading carrier thereof comprises means whereby the
    structure which guides the carrier in its vertical travel may be moved
    (e.g., repositioned, adjusted, etc.) relative to its supporting structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    628,    for subject matter of the kind provided for in this subclass (630)
    and an additional loading or unloading means in the nature of a provision
    for pivotable movement of the carrier relative to the guide.


CLS 414/631
TXT Portable (e.g., vehicle-mounted, etc.) elevator:

    Apparatus under subclass 630 wherein the guide is a component of an
    elevator which is supported in such a manner (e.g., as by being mounted on
    a vehicle) that it can be moved readily from one location to another.

    (1)     Note.  See (3) Note of subclass 592.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclasses 222+ for a self loading or unloading industrial lift truck
    having a vertically moving load support which does not have either its load
    support mounted for movement in an additional direction (e.g., tilting) or
    an additional means to load or unload the load support (e.g., power roller).


CLS 414/632
TXT Having one or more axes of pivotable movement:

    Apparatus under subclass 631 wherein the relative movement of the guide is
    pivotable in nature and occurs about one or more axes.


CLS 414/633
TXT Including vertical axis:

    Apparatus under subclass 632 wherein part or all of the relative pivotable
    movement of the guide takes place about a vertical axis.


CLS 414/634
TXT Single axis, horizontal and fixed:

    Apparatus under subclass 632 wherein all of the relative pivotable movement
    of the guide takes place about a single axis, which axis lies on a
    horizontal line and is not displaceable therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  The movement about the axis is, therefore, swinging movement
    in a vertical plane.


CLS 414/635
TXT With fluid drive for movement thereabout: Apparatus under subclass 634
    wherein an actuating means of a fluid type is provided for moving the guide
    about the axis.


CLS 414/636
TXT And means for limiting the movement:

    Apparatus under subclass 635 wherein means is provided to limit the
    movement imparted to the guide by the fluid drive.

    (1)     Note.  The limiting means may act in response to a sensed condition
    (e.g., the measuring of a movement imposed upon the guide), or it may be
    merely a stop member (e.g., an abutment).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclass 280 for a rotary crane which is
    provided with an automatic stop.


CLS 414/637
TXT Having one or more axes of pivotable movement:

    Apparatus under subclass 630 wherein the relative movement of the guide is
    pivotable in nature and occurs about one or more axes.


CLS 414/638
TXT Single axis, horizontal and fixed:

    Apparatus under subclass 637 wherein all of the relative pivotable movement
    of the guide takes place about a single axis, which axis lies on a
    horizontal line and is not displaceable therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note of subclass 634.


CLS 414/639
TXT Tilting carrier:

    Elevating devices under subclass 592 wherein the load carrier as a whole
    has a tilting motion in a vertical direction (i.e., about a horizontal
    axis) at some point in its path of travel, usually for the purpose of
    loading or unloading.

    (1)     Note.  The inclusion of a load by name only, e.g., car, container,
    or the like, in the absence of any structure adapting the carrier to such
    load, does not exclude the device from this and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    422+,   for a receptacle emptying device of the elevator type.

    598+,   for an inclined elevator type of handler having a tilting carrier.

    620,    for an elevating grab in which the grab means is rotatable about a
    horizontal axis.

    628+,   for an elevator wherein the loading or unloading means comprises
    movably mounted, carrier-guiding structure, and wherein is included means
    whereby the carrier may pivot (e.g., tilt) relative to the structure.

    657+,   for an elevating device having a carrier in the form of a
    receptacle or the like, which carrier includes means for controllably
    releasing a load.


CLS 414/640
TXT With operator-controlled tilting means:

    Apparatus under subclass 639 comprising means for imparting the tilting
    motion to the carrier, which means is actuated by an operator whenever it
    is desired to tilt the carrier.


CLS 414/641
TXT On portable (e.g., vehicle-mounted, etc.) elevator:

    Apparatus under subclass 640 wherein the carrier is a component of an
    elevator which is supported in such a manner (e.g., as by being mounted on
    a vehicle) that it may be moved readily from one location to another.


CLS 414/642
TXT Tiltable about axis perpendicular to direction of travel of portable
    elevator (e.g., forwardly tiltable, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 641 wherein the tilting motion of the carrier
    takes place about an axis which extends at a right angle relative to a line
    representing the direction of travel of the elevator as it moves from one
    to another of its location.


CLS 414/643
TXT Sectional platform type:

    Tilting carriers under subclass 639 presenting a table or flat supporting
    surface having an articulated construction, and in which the sections are
    hinged for relative movement for purposes of loading or unloading.

    (1)     Note.  The usual type has two leaves hinged at their adjacent edges
    and swingable downwardly to dump the load between them.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 412+ and 444+ for elevatable scoops
    involving analogous constructions.


CLS 414/644
TXT Valved:

    Tilting carriers under subclass 639 in the form of a bucket skip box or
    similar container having movable means thereon for providing an opening or
    passageway through which the load may discharge by gravity when the carrier
    is tilted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    616,    for valved carriers of the type found here combined with movable
    material loading or unloading means which is operated by movement of the
    carrier.

    657+,   for elevator buckets or skips that discharge solely through a
    controlled port or outlet.


CLS 414/645
TXT Latch release:

    Tilting carriers under subclass 639 having readily releasable locking or
    latching means for preventing the carrier from swinging to dumping position
    relative to its support and means for releasing said means.

    (1)     Note.  Toggle linkage arranged to permit tilting of a carrier are
    classified in this and the indented subclasses.


CLS 414/646
TXT With carrier engaging cam means:

    Tilting carriers under subclass 645 in which guide or deflector means are
    provided in or adjacent to the path of movement of the carrier for causing
    or permitting tilting of the latter when the latch means is released to
    permit such tilting action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    648,    for similar devices in which no latch means is provided for
    preventing tilting of the carrier.


CLS 414/647
TXT Cantilevered carrier:

    Tilting carriers under subclass 645 in which substantially the entire load
    carrying portion of the carrier, as well as the pivot mounting therefor, is
    positioned to one and the same side of the upright guides of the elevator
    or hoist mechanism.


CLS 414/648
TXT Camming trackway:

    Tilting carriers under subclass 639 in which guide means are provided in or
    adjacent to the path of movement of the carrier, for causing or permitting
    tilting of the latter, and along which the latter moves as it is guided
    into a tilting position.

    (1)     Note.  The tilted position assumed by the carrier may be for the
    purpose of dumping a load or receiving a load.

    (2)     Note.  Cooperating rack and pinion arrangements on the carrier and
    guideway are placed here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    646,    for similar devices combined with latch means for controlling
    tilting movement of the carrier.


CLS 414/649
TXT Adjustable:

    Devices under subclass 648 in which the carrier guiding or tilting means is
    adjustable to permit varying of the point of discharge.

    (1)     Note.  These devices will permit selecting the lateral direction of
    discharge as well as the elevation.


CLS 414/650
TXT Yoke suspended carrier:

    Devices under subclass 648 in which the carrier is pivotally suspended
    within a yoke type elevating support to permit pivoting thereof by the
    tilting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    649,    for yoke supported carriers having adjustable cam means for tilting
    the carrier.


CLS 414/651
TXT Tethered type:

    Devices under subclass 639 in which an elongated member of predetermined
    length is secured at one end to the elevatable swingably mounted carrier
    and anchored at its other end to a relatively fixed support.


CLS 414/652
TXT Abutment or limit stop:

    Tilting carriers under subclass 639 comprising means positioned in the path
    of travel of the carrier, and engageable therewith, to cause it to tilt as
    it is moved relative to said means.


CLS 414/653
TXT Swinging:

    Devices under subclass 652 in which the carrier tilting means is movably
    mounted to permit joint movement of the carrier and its tilting means in a
    lateral direction to the elevating path of travel of the carrier to
    facilitate loading or unloading of the latter.


CLS 414/654
TXT Engageable upon reversal or lowering of carrier:

    Devices under subclass 652 in which the tilting means is in the form of an
    elevated support past which the carrier moves in its ascent and with which
    it engages upon descent, its position and construction being such as to
    cause tilting of the carrier as it is lowered while in engagement therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    424,    for similar arrangements for dumping portable receptacles.


CLS 414/655
TXT Cantilevered carrier:

    Devices under subclass 654 in which substantially the entire load carrying
    portion of the carrier, as well as the pivot mounting therefor, is
    positioned to one and the same side of the upright guides of the elevator
    or hoist mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    647,    for a cantilevered, tilting carrier having a readily releasable
    latching means for controlling its pivotable movement.


CLS 414/656
TXT Carrier and guide supported cooperating elements:

    Devices under subclass 652 in which means is provided on the carrier for
    cooperative engagement with means positioned on the elevator guide
    structure for causing tilting of the carrier.

    (1)     Note.  The means on the carrier and the guide structure are
    supplemental to both the carrier and guide structure.


CLS 414/657
TXT Valved:

    Devices under subclass 592 comprising an elevator in the form of a bucket,
    skip, box, or similar container having movable means thereon for providing
    an opening or passageway through which the load may discharge by gravity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    616,    for similar devices combined with movable external loading or
    unloading means.

    644,    for a tiltable carrier having a controllable discharge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclass 69 for well heads combined with a receptacle for
    insertion into the well, and subclasses 162+ and subclasses there noted for
    valved well receptacles.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 68.22+ for
    hoist-line buckets including valved type.


CLS 414/658
TXT Cam or abutment operated:

    Elevating receptacles under subclass 657 which include cam means or
    stationary abutment means in the path of movement of the receptacle to
    render the valve means effective.


CLS 414/659
TXT Comprising device on carrier to move or carry load laterally thereto or
    therefrom:

    Apparatus under subclass 592 wherein the loading or unloading means
    comprises at least one device (e.g., ejector, conveyor, swinging arm, etc.)
    located on the carrier, which device pushes, pulls, transports, etc., a
    load to or from the carrier in a direction generally at right angles to the
    primary path of travel thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    253+,   for a wheeled vehicle parking facility having a site for
    accommodating a vehicle and a carrier for moving the vehicle thereto or
    therefrom, and wherein the carrier or site is provided with means to move
    the vehicle from one to the other.

    277+,   for means for charging or discharging a plurality of static, load
    underlying members, which means includes a load-sustaining surface and a
    device to move the load in a direction which includes a horizontal
    component.

    281+,   for means for charging or discharging a plurality of static, load
    underlying members, which means comprises an elevating device movable in a
    horizontal direction (e.g., portable), and which has a load-sustaining
    surface.

    497,    for a self-loading or unloading vehicle having an elevatable load
    body, and wherein is provided a load handling means in the nature of a
    reciprocating conveyor.


CLS 414/660
TXT Device raises load relative to carrier prior to moving it laterally:

    Apparatus under subclass 659 wherein the device includes means for moving
    the load upwardly, relative to the carrier, before moving it to or from the
    carrier.

    (1)     Note.  The device may continue to support the load after moving it
    to the carrier; i.e., the load is not necessarily placed in supportive
    engagement with the carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255+,   as a specific locus under subclass 253; see the reference thereto
    in subclass 659 above.


CLS 414/661
TXT Push-pull device:

    Apparatus under subclass 659 wherein the device loads or unloads the
    carrier by pulling the load thereto or by pushing it therefrom, the
    movement of the load being relative to a supporting surface or member.

    (1)     Note.  The carriers of this subclass frequently include means for
    gripping an edge or side of a load pallet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277+,   as explained in subclass 659 above, and see particularly subclass
    280 thereof.


CLS 414/662
TXT Comprising means enabling additional movement of carrier or portion thereof
    relative to its support:

    Apparatus under subclass 592 wherein the loading or unloading means
    comprises a device for moving, or structure for facilitating the movement
    of, the carrier, or a part of the carrier, relative to its support in a
    direction which is in addition to the direction of its principal travel,
    which movement in an additional direction is primarily for a loading or
    unloading purpose.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277+,   for means for charging or discharging a plurality of static, load
    underlying members, which means includes a load-sustaining surface and a
    device to move the load in a direction which includes a horizontal
    component.

    282+,   for means for charging or discharging a plurality of static, load
    underlying members, which means includes a portable elevating device having
    a load-sustaining surface, and wherein there is also provided means to move
    the surface horizontally relative to the device.

    659+,   for a device located on the carrier for moving a load laterally to
    or from the carrier.  (The device may supplant the carrier as the element
    which underlyingly engages the load).


CLS 414/663
TXT On portable (e.g., vehicle-mounted, etc.) elevator:

    Apparatus under subclass 662 wherein the carrier is a component of an
    elevator or hoist which is supported in such a manner (e.g., as by being
    mounted on a vehicle) that it may be moved readily from one location to
    another.

    (1)     Note.  See (3) Note of subclass 592.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281+,   for a means for charging a plurality of, or discharging a plurality
    of, load underlying member, e.g., racks, receptacles (or a compartmented
    receptacle), shelves, troughs, etc.) and wherein the means includes a
    portable elevating device having a load-sustaining surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclasses 222+ for a self loading or unloading industrial lift truck
    having a vertically moving load support which does not have either its load
    support mounted for movement in an additional direction (e.g., tilting) or
    an additional means to load or unload the load support (e.g., power roller).


CLS 414/664
TXT Carrier comprises spaced, elongated, horizontally coplanar, load-supporting
    members, at least one being movable:

    Apparatus under subclass 663 wherein the carrier has a load-supporting
    structure which consists of two or more elongated members, which members
    are spaced apart but lie in a single horizontal plane (e.g., the forks of a
    fork lift truck), one or more of the members being movable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282+,   for a means for charging a plurality of, or discharging a plurality
    of, load underlying member, e.g., racks, receptacles (or a compartmented
    receptacle), shelves, troughs, etc., and wherein the means includes a
    portable elevating device having a load-sustaining surface, and wherein
    there is also provided means to move the surface horizontally relative to
    the device.

    785,    for the load-engaging elements, per se, of an elevator or hoist for
    which a loading or unloading means is provided.


CLS 414/665
TXT Pivotable in horizontal plane:

    Apparatus under subclass 664 wherein the movement of the member or members
    includes that of pivoting in the horizontal plane.


CLS 414/666
TXT And otherwise movable therein:

    Apparatus under subclass 665 wherein a pivotable member is additionally
    movable in another manner (e.g., shifting, sliding, etc.) in the horizontal
    plane.


CLS 414/667
TXT Shiftable in horizontal plane perpendicularly to axis of elongation:


    Apparatus under subclass 664 wherein the movement of the member or members
    includes that of moving sideways (i.e., at 900  to its longitudinal axis)
    in the horizontal plane.


CLS 414/668
TXT Carrier comprises spaced, elongated, horizontally coplanar, load-supporting
    members, at least one being movable:

    Apparatus under subclass 662 wherein the carrier has a load-supporting
    structure which consists of two or more elongated members, which members
    are spaced apart but lie in a single horizontal plane (e.g., the forks of a
    fork lift truck), one or more of the members being movable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    785,    as explained in the search note to this subclass (785) appearing in
    subclass 664 above.


CLS 414/669
TXT Pivotable in horizontal plane:

    Apparatus under subclass 663 wherein the carrier has a load-supporting
    structure which consists of two or more elongated members, which members
    are spaced apart but lie in a single horizontal plane (e.g., the forks of a
    fork lift truck), one or more of the members being movable.


CLS 414/670
TXT And otherwise movable therein:

    Apparatus under subclass 669 wherein a pivotable member is additionally
    movable in another manner (e.g., shifting, sliding, etc.) in the horizontal
    plane.


CLS 414/671
TXT Shiftable in horizontal plane perpendicularly to axis of elongation:


    Apparatus under subclass 668 wherein the movement of the member or members
    includes that of moving sideways (i.e., at 900  to its longitudinal axis)
    in the horizontal plane.


CLS 414/672
TXT Carrier comprises swingable or rotatable, load-underlying surface:

    Apparatus under subclass 662 wherein the carrier has a load-supporting
    structure in the form of a surface (e.g., a platform) upon which the load
    rests, and which surface is mounted upon an axis to which it is generally
    perpendicular and about which it may be pivoted, the angle of pivot being
    anything from a brief arc to a circle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    283,    for plural, static structures which support discrete loads and
    charging or discharging means therefor, said means including a portable
    elevating device having a pivotable or rotatable load-sustaining surface.


CLS 414/673
TXT Return, buffer, or counterweight feature:

    Elevating devices under subclass 592 comprising some means tending to
    return to carrier from dumping position, or a buffer of some kind, or a
    counterweight.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    601,    for returns combined with run-out carriers.

    602,    for returns or buffers combined with inclined elevators.

    719+,   for similar devices combined with a vertically swinging load
    support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 193+ and 216 for sash balancers
    and weights.

    89,     Ordnance, subclass 39 for gun mount counterpoises.

    104,    Railways, subclasses 249+ for buffers.

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclasses 404+ for counterbalance means for an elevator car.

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclasses 279, 178, and 195+ for cranes having
    counterweight or counterbalance features.

    248,    Supports, subclass 364 for counter-balance weights.


CLS 414/674
TXT Automatic stop:

    Elevating devices under subclass 592 comprising means to automatically cut
    off the power, usually controlled by the movement of the carrier, or to not
    only stop but reverse the movement of the carrier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 358+ and 392+ for
    expansible chamber motors having means to stop the motor by controlling the
    motive fluid therefor in response to the position of the working member
    (e.g., piston).

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclasses 282+ and 302+ for control means for the drive of an elevator car
    actuated by the car contacting a trip in the elevator shaft.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 125 for stop mechanism,
    per se.

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclasses 276+ for automatic stops for
    traversing hoists.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 286 for electric motor
    reversing control in response to movement or position of motor or device
    driven thereby; subclasses 466+ for electric motor starting and stopping in
    response to movement, position, or limit of travel of motor or other body
    or device.


CLS 414/675
TXT COUNTING AIDS:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising means for the reception and
    support of a plurality of articles to be counted and having indicia,
    particular configurations, barriers, etc., whereby the count of the
    articles received or a count of a portion of the articles received is
    readily ascertainable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    453,    Coin Handling, subclasses 58+ for devices for counting coins.


CLS 414/676
TXT ARTICLE SUPPORTED BY AIR AND MOVED BY MECHANICAL OR MANUAL MEANS:

    Apparatus under the class definition having means whereby an article is
    supported proximately to an underlying surface by a column or columns of a
    gaseous medium issuing from the surface, and wherein the article is moved
    laterally relative to the surface by mechanically or manually actuated
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 166+ for a collection of vehicles and
    art devices provided with means for maintaining a working fluid mass (e.g.,
    an air cushion) between the vehicle or device and a reaction surface
    therebeneath.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclasses 86+ for fluid current
    conveyors having fluid means for maintaining the load in suspension while
    it is being moved by fluid or by gravity.


CLS 414/677
TXT FEED TABLES FOR SHEARING MACHINES: Apparatus under the class definition
    comprising mechanisms for advancing a load to a device which is to remove,
    by shearing, a portion of said load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclass for the combination of a feed table
    and a cutting machine.


CLS 414/678
TXT LAND VEHICLE OR BOAT TILTING AND LIFTING DEVICES:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising a device having a boat or
    land vehicle supporting means, which may be moved relative to another part
    of said device, whereby said supported boat or land vehicle may be
    reoriented.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclasses 44+ for vessel raising and docking devices.

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclasses 203+ for a stationary lift for a roadway vehicle which only
    reciprocates along a linear path between two vertically spaced points.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    appropriate subclasses for a device which may raise a vehicle in a vertical
    direction.


CLS 414/679
TXT VEHICLE WITH LOAD-RECEIVING PORTION AND MEANS FOR RELOCATING A LOAD
    THEREALONG OR THEREWITHIN:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising a vehicle which has a
    portion for receiving and transporting a load and is provided with means
    for moving a load consisting of material in relation to that portion,
    within the confines or limits thereof, for redistributing or otherwise
    relocating the load.

    (1)     Note.  Material, as used herein, ordinarily comprises a commodity
    which is being handled in bulk; however, articles are within the scope of
    that term as long as they are not handled individually (i.e., as separate
    items).

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is an outgrowth of the reclassification of
    subclass 82 of former Class 214.  Since it is believed that similar art
    existed in, at least, subclasses 83+, 503, and 518+ of that class, now
    subclasses 507+ (other than 509+ thereof), 472 and 501+, respectively, the
    patents initially placed here may represent only a small portion of a
    potentially large body of art.

    (3)     Note.  Included herein, in the absence of a more appropriate locus,
    is a body of art wherein the relocating of the load is for the purpose of
    making it more compact (i.e., compressing it).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    491+,   for a self-loading or unloading vehicle having a load-receiving
    portion pivotable relative to the horizontal, and wherein is provided a
    driven means to move a load relative to the portion.  Included therein is
    art wherein the means may serve only to move the load along or within the
    portion (i.e., the function of moving the load off or on to the vehicle is
    accomplished by the pivotable movement of the portion, rather than by the
    driven means).

    508+,   for a self-loading or unloading vehicle having a load engaging
    element reciprocably movable parallel to a generally horizontal
    load-supporting component of the vehicle for ejecting a load therefrom,
    which element may be closely related to the moving means found herein.
    This subclass (679) includes patents formerly classified in that area
    (509+), but which patents lack any indication that moving the load off the
    load receiving portion is contemplated.

    754+,   for article reorienting which may include the repositioning, by
    movement about one of its principal axes, of an article located on a
    vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 100 for a portable (e.g., wheel-mounted) press.


CLS 414/680
TXT VERTICALLY SWINGING LOAD SUPPORT:

    Apparatus under the class definition including a load carrier swingable in
    a vertical plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    408,    for a device for emptying a portable receptacle into a portable
    receiving means, which device includes a vertically swinging arm having
    pivotable attached thereto a support for the receptacle.

    442,    for a vehicle having a load handling means responsive to the motion
    of the vehicle, and wherein the means is a vertically swinging member which
    is operated by a wheel of the vehicle.

    546+,   for a self-loading or unloading vehicle having a load-handling
    means which moves a load in a curvilinear path.

    565     through 569, for combinations of carriers, wherein one of the
    carriers involves a vertically swinging load holder or support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclasses 373+ for swinging davits.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 439+ and 452+ for apparatus comprising
    vertically swinging lift arms for lifting earth-working implements or any
    implement claimed by name only if the manipulation of the implement is
    consistent with its use as an earth-working implement.

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclasses 232+ and 255+ for vertically swinging
    load supports (booms) from which the load is suspended by a flaccid member.
     Class 212 is the residual locus for load handlers having a vertically
    swinging boom claimed without regard to a self-loading feature (see main
    definition, Class 212 and the search note to Class 414 thereunder).


CLS 414/681
TXT Track-supported rocker:

    Apparatus under subclass 680 including a horizontally extending track and a
    member having a curved surface which engages said track, said carrier being
    fixedly secured to said member and the latter rocking on said track to
    swing the carrier in a vertical plane.


CLS 414/682
TXT Horizontally swinging:

    Apparatus under subclass 681 wherein said track turns in a horizontal plane.


CLS 414/683
TXT Cement mixer loader:

    Apparatus under subclass 680 wherein the load supported by said carrier is
    discharged into a cement mixer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 36 and 39 for the combination of a concrete
    mixer and a movable skip for loading it, the movement of the skip
    frequently describing a vertical arc.


CLS 414/684
TXT Coil handler:

    Apparatus under subclass 680 wherein the load supported by said carrier is
    a roll.


CLS 414/684.3
TXT Door remover:

    Apparatus under subclass 680 wherein the load carrier is adapted to engage
    and open a door by removing it from the doorway.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes furnace door lifters previously
    classified in Class 212, Traversing Hoists.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 210 and 324+ for a door
    remover permanently attached to the door.

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 176 for a door lifter claimed in combination
    with a furnace.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclasses 262+ for a door lifter claimed
    in combination with a coke oven.

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclass 166 for a traversing hoist-type door
    remover.


CLS 414/685
TXT Shovel or fork type:

    Apparatus under subclass 680 wherein said carrier is a scoop, or is formed
    of tines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 411+ for a scoop of that class.


CLS 414/686
TXT With means to facilitate attachment of boom to vehicle:

    Apparatus under subclass 685 including an elongate, pivotally mounted
    member which supports said carrier for swinging motion in a vertical plane,
    said member or a support therefor being readily joinable to and detachable
    from a vehicle.


CLS 414/687
TXT Horizontally swinging:

    Apparatus under subclass 685 including means for swinging said carrier in a
    horizontal plane.


CLS 414/688
TXT Vertically adjustable:

    Apparatus under subclass 687 wherein said carrier is mounted on a member
    swingable in a vertical plane and adjustable bodily in a vertical direction.


CLS 414/689
TXT Trolley supported pivoted handle:

    Apparatus under subclass 687 wherein said carrier is mounted on a member
    swingable in a vertical plane and pivoted to a car or other structure
    guided on ways.


CLS 414/690
TXT Reciprocating handle:

    Apparatus under subclass 687 wherein said carrier is mounted on a member
    swingable in a vertical plane and capable of longitudinal reciprocation, as
    in the typical steam shovel.


CLS 414/691
TXT Link supported:

    Swinging devices under subclass 690 wherein the reciprocating member is
    attached to its support by links.


CLS 414/692
TXT Tilting:

    Apparatus under subclass 690 wherein said carrier is pivoted to said
    swingable member for tilting motion relative thereto.


CLS 414/693
TXT Single cable for crowding and hauling:

    Apparatus under subclass 690 having a cable means to cause the load carrier
    support member to swing in the vertical plane and to reciprocate
    longitudinally.


CLS 414/694
TXT Handle pivoted to boom:

    Apparatus under subclass 687 comprising a boom mounted to swing
    horizontally about an axis and having shovel or fork handle attached
    thereto by a fixed pivot.


CLS 414/695
TXT Adjustable horizontal swing axis:

    Apparatus under subclass 694 having means by which the axis about which the
    boom is mounted to swing horizontally may be adjusted or repositioned.


CLS 414/695.5
TXT Linear cylinder:

    Apparatus under subclass 694 provided with a reciprocating fluid-powered
    device for swinging the boom.


CLS 414/695.6
TXT Flexible connector:

    Apparatus under subclass 694 provided with an elongate pliant
    force-transmitting member, e.g., rope, chain, etc., for swinging the boom.


CLS 414/695.7
TXT Rack and pinion:

    Apparatus under subclass 694 provided with interengaging gearing, one gear
    of which is an elongate rigid member moving to or fro for swinging the boom.


CLS 414/695.8
TXT Rotary motor:

    Apparatus under subclass 694 provided with a rotatable fluid-powered device
    for swinging the boom.


CLS 414/696
TXT Guided:

    Apparatus under subclass 685 comprising means, such as a trolley and a
    track, for guiding said carrier or a vertically swingable support means
    therefor.


CLS 414/697
TXT Tilting:

    Apparatus under subclass 685 in which said carrier is tiltable relative to
    a vertically swingable member on which it is mounted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    37,     Excavating, subclasses 196+ for snow excavators, and subclasses
    411+, especially subclasses 444+, for scoops. A scoop disclosed as having
    at least some portion thereof between the confines of a vehicle, e.g.,
    located between the wheels, is classifiable in Class 37 even though mounted
    for tilting on a vertically swinging load support, but a scoop not limited
    by disclosure to use for snow excavating which is so mounted and is located
    clear of the vehicle is classifiable in these subclasses (697+) provided
    there are no specific features for excavating snow such as specifically
    claimed teeth.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 272+ for implements of that class with
    means to facilitate mounting them on a motor vehicle.


CLS 414/698
TXT Including indicator:

    Apparatus under subclass 697 including special information giving means
    (e.g., indicia, a light, bell, etc., for the purpose of indicating a change
    of condition or position of the apparatus or a part thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for apparatus under the class definition having weighing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 309+ for indicators attached to
    or associated with some movable or adjustable devices to indicate the
    movement or adjustment or position of such devices.


CLS 414/699
TXT Control means responsive to sensed condition:

    Apparatus under subclass 697 including a means to sense a condition or
    change of condition and a control means acting in response to the sensing
    to effect an operation of the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter in which the condition sensed is one which is
    caused by a human operator for the proximate purpose of operating a control
    is not included.  For example, if an operator pulls a rope for the purpose
    of operating a control (e.g., a latch) and the control (latch) acts in
    response to means sensing the tension on the rope, this is not included;
    but if a human operator pulls a rope for the member and the control (latch)
    acts in response to means sensing the tension on the rope which results
    from the swinging member reaching a certain position, this is included.

            However, the definition does include subject matter in which the
    condition sensed causes response of a control means for a device which
    caused the condition.  For example, the condition sensed may be the
    position of a latch which position causes response of a control means for a
    servo motor which has been operated for the purpose of moving the latch.

    (2)     Note.  Subject matter in which the condition sensed and the control
    means acting in response to the condition are mere cyclically recurring
    conditions of a machine (e.g., the valves of an internal combustion engine
    acting in response to the position of the cams on the cam shaft) is not
    included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    706+,   especially 708, for apparatus where one means acts in response to
    the condition of another means but the means acting in response is not
    considered a control but rather a principal part of the apparatus such as
    an extensible link.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 2+ for apparatus that works the earth in
    situ and has automatic control of power means for changing a condition of
    operation of the apparatus.


CLS 414/700
TXT To maintain pitch during swinging:

    Apparatus under subclass 699 having means to sense, as said swingable
    member pivots, a departure of said carrier from a predetermined attitude
    relative to the horizontal, and a control acting in response to the sensing
    to cause tilting of the carrier to return it to the predetermined attitude.


CLS 414/701
TXT To stop tilting at selected angle:

    Apparatus under subclass 699 having means which, as tilting proceeds,
    senses that a predetermined angular relation of said carrier to said
    swingable member has been reached, and a control acting in response to the
    sensing to halt the tilting.


CLS 414/702
TXT Overshot type:

    Apparatus under subclass 697 in which said carrier is movable by the motion
    of said swingable member through a position vertically above the center
    about which swinging occurs.


CLS 414/703
TXT Swinging member attached to rear mounted draft member:

    Apparatus under subclass 697 including a drawbar or draft link pivotally
    attached to the rear of a tractor, such drawbar or draft link being
    vertically swingable by means of a link connecting it to a crank arm
    actuated by a motor in the tractor and the swingable member including or
    forming a continuation of the drawbar or draft link for movement therewith.


CLS 414/704
TXT Including load ejector, striker, or retainer:

    Apparatus under subclass 697 having means movable relative to said carrier
    and contacting the load either (a) to tilt the carrier on said swingable
    member, or (b) to translate the carrier bodily sidewise.


CLS 414/705
TXT Laterally tiltable or shiftable shovel or fork:

    Apparatus under subclass 697 in which said carrier is selectively
    adjustable transversely of the plane of vertical swing of said swingable
    member and such movement is either (a) to tilt the carrier on the swingable
    member, or (b) to translate the carrier bodily sidewise.


CLS 414/706
TXT During swinging to stabilize pitch:
    Apparatus under subclass 697 including means requiring said carrier to keep
    or tend to keep a predetermined angular position relative to horizontal,
    while said swingable member pivots, by tilting the carrier relative to the
    swingable member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    700,    for such apparatus which have also a control for the tilting means
    which acts in response to a sensing of departure of the load engager from a
    predetermined attitude to return it.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 2.1+ for structures
    supported in spaced relation to the earth's surface for supporting a
    workman in which a platform is maintained level on an angularly movable
    support.


CLS 414/707
TXT On link mounted swinging support:

    Apparatus under subclass 706 in which the swinging member is pivotally
    supported on a link or lever which is pivoted on the base support of the
    apparatus.


CLS 414/708
TXT By hydraulic compensation:

    Apparatus under subclass 706 in which the means for tilting said carrier
    includes a liquid-actuated expansible chamber motor and means for changing
    the volume of liquid in the chamber of the motor in the amount required by
    the extent of motion of said swingable member.

    (1)     Note.  The motor in this definition must be other than a motor used
    to cause swinging of the swinging member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    700,    for such devices where the means to change the volume as necessary
    includes a flow control responsive to a sensed position change of the load
    engager.


CLS 414/709
TXT By tensioned flexible connector:

    Apparatus under subclass 706 in which the means for tilting said carrier
    includes a flexible component such as a cable or chain (a) extending along
    said swingable member, (b) connecting the carrier to the base support of
    the apparatus, and (c) held taut by the weight of the carrier.


CLS 414/710
TXT By linkage pivoting on base support:
    Apparatus under subclass 706 in which the means for tilting said carrier
    comprises a linkage connecting the carrier to the base support of the
    apparatus, the linkage being pivoted to the base support and at least a
    portion thereof also being vertically spaced from and extending along said
    swingable member and swinging with it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    709,    for similar apparatus in which a fixed length flexible component
    tilts the load engager to substantially maintain the load engager in the
    predetermined attitude.


CLS 414/711
TXT Yoke mounted shovel or fork:

    Apparatus under subclass 710 in which the linkage and the swingable member
    connect to the carrier through a carriage or intermediate support on which
    the carrier is secured for tilting relative to the swingable member and to
    which the carrier is pivotally connected for other tilting at a location
    spaced, when viewed in side elevation, from the connection of the linkage
    or the swingable member to the carriage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    707,    for apparatus in which the pitch stabilizing tilting of the load
    engager is relative to a swinging load support member which is intermediate
    a supporting link or lever and the load engager.


CLS 414/712
TXT Linkage extensible for other tilting:

    Apparatus under subclass 710 in which the linkage comprises a link which on
    activation changes in length to tilt the carrier from the position relative
    to the horizontal in which the linkage maintained it during motion of said
    swingable member.


CLS 414/713
TXT Swinging support mounted linkage:

    Apparatus under subclass 712 in which the linkage, at a location
    intermediate its connections to the carrier and the base support, is
    supported by said swingable member in a manner permitting relative movement
    of the latter and the linkage.


CLS 414/714
TXT Induced by swing of swinging support:

    Apparatus under subclass 697 including means whereby the motion of said
    swingable member causes tilting of said carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    706+,   for devices in which the swinging of the support causes tilting of
    the load engager to maintain the load engager in a predetermined attitude
    to the horizontal.


CLS 414/715
TXT By extensible link between load engager and swinging support:

    Apparatus under subclass 697 in which tilting of said carrier is caused by
    a change in length of a link connected between the carrier and said
    swingable member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    712+,   for a linkage which maintains the load engager in a predetermined
    attitude during swinging of the swinging member and is extensible for
    further tilting of the load engager.


CLS 414/716
TXT Holdable in different pitch positions during loading:

    Apparatus under subclass 697 having means by which said carrier can be
    selectively rigidly secured to said swingable member in different vertical
    angular positions relative thereto when the swingable member is in its
    lowest position, whereby the angle to horizontal which the carrier takes
    when it receives the load can be adjusted.

    (1)     Note.  The securement of the load engager in different positions
    must prevent movement in any direction relative to the swinging member in
    any one position of adjustment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    715,    for a load engager adjusted relative to the swinging member by an
    extensible link.


CLS 414/717
TXT On unlatching from swinging support:
    Apparatus under subclass 697 in which said carrier is fixed in position
    relative to said swingable member by a latch which, when operated to a
    release position, allows the carrier or a part thereof to tilt relative to
    the swingable member.

    (1)     Note.  A latch under this definition is considered to be a
    restraining member which acts directly on the load engager or a part
    rigidly secured to the load engager and is disengaged from said load
    engager or part when in release position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    716,    for a load engager released for tilting by a latch and also
    adjustably holdable in different vertical angular positions relative to the
    swinging member.


CLS 414/718
TXT Extensible support:

    Apparatus under subclass 685 comprising means for varying the distance
    between said carrier and the pivot of a vertically swingable member on
    which the carrier is mounted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 118 for a telescopic
    vertically swinging elongated shaft, per se.

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclasses 230+, 264, and 348+ for extensible
    booms claimed in combination with or having structure (e.g., cable passage
    or chaffing strip) peculiar to a crane.


CLS 414/719
TXT Return, buffer, or counterweight feature:
    Apparatus under subclass 685 comprising (a) special means for returning to
    its normal position a vertically swingable member on which said carrier is
    mounted, or (b) a buffer mechanism, or (c) a counterweight mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    673     and the subclasses there noted, for similar devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclasses 279, 178+, and 195+ for
    counterbalanced devices.


CLS 414/720
TXT Spring:

    Apparatus under subclass 719 having a resilient means which returns the
    vertically swinging member to its normal position.


CLS 414/721
TXT Hay retainers:

    Apparatus under subclass 685 comprising means for retaining hay and the
    like upon said carrier.


CLS 414/722
TXT Shovel, rake, handle, or boom structure:
    Apparatus under subclass 685 including details of the construction of (a) a
    scoop or tines forming said carrier, or (b) an elongate, pivotally mounted
    member which supports said carrier for swinging motion in a vertical plane.


CLS 414/723
TXT With means to facilitate attachment of shovel or rake to handle or boom:

    Apparatus under subclass 722 wherein said carrier is readily joinable to
    and detachable from said elongate member.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are swingable arms joined at their free ends
    to a crossbar having means for releasably attaching tines thereto to form a
    rake.


CLS 414/724
TXT Handling device releasably attached to bucket or rake:

    Apparatus under subclass 722 including a separate material or article
    handling device which is readily joinable to and removable from said
    carrier, e.g., a clamping device attachable to an excavating bucket so that
    the two members can be used together to lift logs, or a bucket attachable
    to tines.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    722,    for a material handling device permanently mounted on a shovel or
    rake and movable between operative and inoperative positions, e.g, tines
    swingably mounted on a scoop so that they are movable between a working
    position wherein they project from the loading edge of the scoop, and a
    retracted position wherein they are above the scoop.


CLS 414/725
TXT Means for ejecting load from shovel:
    Apparatus under subclass 722 including means for forcing a load out of said
    scoop.


CLS 414/726
TXT Shovel forming members pivoted relative to each other to dump load:

    Apparatus under subclass 722 wherein said scoop is formed of two members
    which swing apart to discharge a load.


CLS 414/727
TXT Handle body structure:

    Apparatus under subclass 722 including details of the construction of the
    wall plates, stringers, or like members which form the longitudinally
    extending body portions of said elongate supporting member.


CLS 414/728
TXT With rectilinear translation:

    Apparatus under subclass 680 having means whereby the vertically swingable
    load engaging carrier additionally is given a linear motion.


CLS 414/729
TXT Grab:

    Apparatus under subclass 680 in which the vertically swingable load carrier
    includes a seizing, grasping, or clamping means to engage and secure the
    load against movement relative thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for gripper means on the end of a remote control arm.

    555,    for a self-loading or unloading vehicle having a load handling
    means which raises or lowers a load in a path which includes curvilinear
    movement, and wherein the handling means includes means to grasp the load.

    618+,   for a grab associated with an elevator or hoist.

    744.8+, for gripper means associated with pipe handling means.

    796.9+, for gripper means for removing an article from a stack.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, for various gear and lever and
    linkage movements.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, for specific article
    gripping means.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, for electric motors and
    controls therefor.


CLS 414/730
TXT Programmable or condition responsive means controls grab operation:

    Apparatus under subclass 729 having means to activate said seizing,
    grasping, or clamping means into or from a load-engaging condition by or
    under the control of a preestablished sequencing means such as a template,
    cam, electromagnetic tape, etc., responsive to a condition which may or may
    not exist, etc.


CLS 414/731
TXT With auxiliary support for load:

    Apparatus under subclass 729 having means to assist the load seizing,
    grasping, or clamping means and removed therefrom to act on the load,
    either in terms of stabilizing the load or aiding in the support of the
    load.


CLS 414/732
TXT Grab movable relative to its supporting arm:

    Apparatus under subclass 729 having lever means pivotable in a vertical
    plane about an axis and which imparts a vertically swinging movement to
    said load seizing, grasping, or clamping means which is attached for
    relative movement to said lever means at a point removed from said axis.


CLS 414/733
TXT Grab orientation maintained during supporting arm manipulation:

    Apparatus under subclass 732 having means whereby the load seizing,
    grasping, or clamping means is maintained in a predetermined orientation
    during the time when it is caused to swing in a vertical plane by said
    lever means.


CLS 414/734
TXT Grab suspended to swing freely:

    Apparatus under subclass 733 wherein the grab is secured to the supporting
    arm by a free swivel or freely swingable joints so that orientation of said
    grab is maintained because of the effect of gravity thereon.


CLS 414/735
TXT Grab has swinging movement in plural planes:

    Apparatus under subclass 732 having means whereby the load seizing,
    grasping, or clamping means may rotate about an axis which lies in the
    vertical plane in which said lever means is pivoted to swing.


CLS 414/736
TXT Movable grab support has plurality of grabs attached thereto:

    Apparatus under subclass 729 having lever means pivotable in a vertical
    plane about an axis and which imparts a vertically swinging movement to a
    plurality of load seizing, grasping, or clamping means attached to said
    lever means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 87.1+ for
    multiple object grappling means.


CLS 414/737
TXT Grab is a suction or magnetic article engaging means:

    Apparatus under subclass 729 wherein the load is seized by magnetic force
    means or by the force resulting from the establishment of a region of
    unequal fluid pressures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    606,    for an elevator or hoist and loading or unloading means therefor,
    and wherein a magnet lifts an object of magnetically attractive material
    for seizure by a grapple.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 64.1+ and
    65.5 for vacuum and magnetic means associated with implements for handling
    articles.


CLS 414/738
TXT Grab supported and moved by a pivotably mounted member:

    Apparatus under subclass 729 in which a lever means comprising either a
    single unitary member or a plurality of pivotably interconnected members,
    is swingable in a vertical plane about an axis located at one point
    thereon, and said load seizing, grasping, or clamping means is attached to
    said single member at a point thereon removed from said axis.


CLS 414/739
TXT Grab has pivoted jaw member:

    Apparatus under subclass 738 in which the load seizing, grasping, or
    clamping means includes at least one pivotally mounted member which may be
    pivoted into engagement with the load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 106+ for
    handling implements having pivoted jaw grapples.


CLS 414/740
TXT With fixed jaw member:

    Apparatus under subclass 739 in which the load seizing, grasping, or
    clamping means also includes an immovably mounted jaw member which couples
    with the pivoted jaw member so that a load may be grasped between said two
    jaw members.


CLS 414/741
TXT Grab has reciprocating jaw member:

    Apparatus under subclass 728 in which the load seizing, grasping, or
    clamping means includes at least one member mounted to move linearly so as
    to be brought into engagement with a load to secure said load against
    relative movement therewith.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 86.4+, and
    particularly subclasses 92 and 103.1+, for implements having a rigid
    gripper or a gripper having a fixed and movable jaw.


CLS 414/742
TXT Nonfixed pivot:

    Apparatus under subclass 680 having a lever means pivotable in a vertical
    plane about an axis which may be moved from a given point, said lever means
    imparting a vertically swinging movement to said load carrier which is
    supported for movement by said means at a point on said lever means removed
    from said axis.


CLS 414/743
TXT Tilting carrier:

    Apparatus under subclass 680 having lever means pivotable in a vertical
    plane about an axis and imparting a vertically swinging movement to said
    load carrier, said load carrier being movable relative to said lever means
    and supported thereby at a point removed from said axis.


CLS 414/744.1
TXT HORIZONTALLY SWINGING LOAD SUPPORT:
    Apparatus under the class definition including means to hold material and
    transport that material along an arcuate path in a level plane.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclasses 35+ for turntable construction.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 803.16 for a rotary conveyor,
    generally.

    258,    Railway Mail Delivery, for means particularly adapted to transfer a
    mail bag, train orders, or the like to or from a moving vehicle.


CLS 414/744.2
TXT Swinging about pivot:
    Apparatus under subclass 744.1 wherein the means to hold and transport
    material turns about a vertical axis.


CLS 414/744.3
TXT And moving vertically:
    Apparatus under subclass 744.2 wherein the means to hold and transport also
    moves the material up or down.

    (1)     Note.  Vertical movement of the device of this subclass is
    generally rectilinear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    680+,   for apparatus to hold material and transport that material along an
    arcuate path in a vertical plane, including a load support that swings both
    vertically and horizontally.


CLS 414/744.4
TXT Moving pivot:

    Apparatus under subclass 744.2 wherein the vertical axis about which the
    material is transported is relocated horizontally.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    744.6,  for means to transport a load including a load support swinging
    about a vertical axis and moving radially with respect thereto.


CLS 414/744.5
TXT Pivot swinging about second pivot:

    Apparatus under subclass 744.4 wherein the means to hold and transport
    material turns about a first vertical axis and wherein that vertical axis
    is turns about a second vertical axis.


CLS 414/744.6
TXT And moving load support radially with respect to pivot:

    Apparatus under subclass 744.2 wherein the means to hold and transport
    material also moves toward or away from the vertical axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    680+,   for apparatus to transport material by swinging in a vertical plane.

    744.3,  for apparatus to transport material while moving about an axis and
    moving generally rectilinearly vertically.

    744.4+, for means to transport material including a load support that
    pivots about a moving axis.


CLS 414/744.7
TXT And vertically reorienting load support:

    Apparatus under subclass 744.2 including means to allow the means holding
    the material to turn about a nonvertical axis.

    (1)     Note.  The additional movement of this subclass may serve to dump
    the material, or may  make the material accessible.


CLS 414/744.8
TXT With means to actuate load gripper:

    Apparatus under subclass 744.2 including means to move toward the material
    and enhance friction therewith to secure the material to the holding means
    and including structure to effect such friction enhancing movement.


CLS 414/745.1
TXT CYLINDRICAL BAR HANDLING DEVICE:
    Apparatus under the class definition having means to move or manipulate an
    elongated member of circular cross-section.


CLS 414/745.2
TXT Vertical cylindrical bar:
    Apparatus under subclass 745.1 wherein the elongated member is oriented so
    that its axis extends normal to the horizon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22.51+,  for structure for moving a pipe or rod to or from racked or
    storage position over a well.


CLS 414/745.3
TXT Heat exchanger tube bundle handling device:
    Apparatus under subclass 745.1 particularly adapted to move or manipulate
    an assembly of hollow cylindrical bars used to transfer thermal energy from
    a fluid inside to a fluid outside the hollow bars.

     SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 726.5 for apparatus engaging to tube bundle
    and engaging a heat exchanger shell to bring them into assembly.


CLS 414/745.4
TXT Pipe laying:
    Apparatus under subclass 745.1 particularly adapted to placing a hollow rod
    in a particular horizontal alignment.

    (1)     Note.  Normally, the alignment of the pipe of this subclass is
    alignment with a string of pipes, but no intended contact is made by the
    means to move or manipulate with a coaxial pipe.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 237 for means to move or manipulate a pipe
    into alignment with a string of pipes, with means to engage the string and
    draw the manipulated pipe thereto.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 154+ for placing a
    string of conduit or slender material beneath the surface of water or the
    earth, claimed with manipulating the string under water or with opening or
    otherwise handling the earth.


CLS 414/745.5
TXT Vehicle having supporting wheel or wheel substitute:
    Apparatus under subclass 745.4 comprising a mobile device riding on a
    roller or on means function as a roller.

    (1)     Note.  A wheel substitute includes an orbiting tread, e.g., an
    endless track is considered to be a wheel substitute, a sled runner is not.


CLS 414/745.6
TXT Side boom supported hoist line:
    Apparatus under subclass 745.5 wherein the supporting wheel or wheel
    substitute and the vehicle generally are aligned parallel with the pipe
    including a tower member on and laterally extending from the vehicle from
    which a line is suspended to move or manipulate a pipe.


CLS 414/745.7
TXT Sequentially acting, diverse handling devices:
    Apparatus under subclass 745.1 comprising a first means to move or
    manipulate an elongated member of circular cross-section and a second,
    later functioning, means that functions differently to move or manipulate
    the elongated member.


CLS 414/745.8
TXT Changing orientation of cylindrical bar:
    Apparatus under subclass 745.7 including provision to change the direction
    of the member.


CLS 414/745.9
TXT Including ramp and elevator means:
    Apparatus under subclass 745.7 wherein one of the means to move or
    manipulate comprises a plane over which the elongated member is adapted to
    roll, and the other means to move or manipulate comprises means to engage
    and raise or lower the elongated member against the force of gravity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    745.1,  for a cylindrical bar handling device having a lifting means with
    an integral ramp.


CLS 414/746.1
TXT Oscillating or reciprocating elevator:
    Apparatus under subclass 745.9 wherein the elevator moves to and fro either
    along an arcuate or a straight path.


CLS 414/746.2
TXT Oscillating:
    Apparatus under subclass 746.1 wherein the elevator moves to and fro along
    an arcuate path.


CLS 414/746.3
TXT Including means to rotate or allow rotation of bar about its axis:Apparatus
    under subclass 745.7 including means to effect or permit movement of the
    elongated member about its cylindrical axis more than 360o.


CLS 414/746.4
TXT Including ramp and retractable stop or ejector:
    Apparatus under subclass 745.1 wherein the means to move or manipulate
    comprises a plane over which the elongated member is adapted to roll, which
    plane is provided with a movable barrier to block movement of an elongated
    member thereover.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    745.9,  for similar structure wherein the barrier device also raises the
    elongated member.


CLS 414/746.5
TXT Engaging interior surface of pipe:
    Apparatus under subclass 745.1 wherein the elongated member is hollow along
    its axis and wherein the means to move or manipulate comprises structure to
    engage the interior surface thereof.


CLS 414/746.6
TXT Comprising walking beam:
    Apparatus under subclass 745.1 including a first material engaging member
    that is elongated to bodily support and advance a portion of conveyed
    material and including a second material that also is elongated to bodily
    support and advance a portion of conveyed material, wherein the two members
    are generally parallel and coextensive and function such that one moves to
    engage and advance the material, then as it pulls away from the material,
    the other elongated member moves to engage and advance the material wherein
    the elongated members remain oriented parallel with each other and with the
    direction of material advance.

    (1)     Note.  The elongated members of this subclass may orbit while
    facing in a single direction, rather than move to-and-fro along a fixed
    path.


CLS 414/746.7
TXT Comprising roller or endless belt:

    Apparatus under subclass 745.1 including means in engagement with the
    elongated member comprising (a) an annular member having a peripheral
    surface that rollingly engages the member, or (b) a bandlike member that
    travels along its periphery to engage the member in the manner of a roller.


CLS 414/746.8
TXT Comprising carriage:

    Apparatus under subclass 745.1 including a member engaging holder that
    travels with the member.


CLS 414/749
TXT HORIZONTAL LINEAR MOVEMENT:

    Apparatus under the class definition having means to move an article or
    load in a horizontal plane from one location to a specific stopping place,
    said article being moved for the purpose of establishing a definite
    alignment between the article and its stopping place.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 373+ for conveyor means for
    moving an article along a predetermined path with means to change the
    posture of said article relative to the conveyed direction, and subclasses
    339.1+ for conveyors and means specifically provided for the purpose of
    aiding the working, treating, or inspecting of the load by separate means
    at a station situated along the conveying path.


CLS 414/750
TXT Having indexing means:

    Apparatus under subclass 749 having means whereby the article may be moved
    intermittently by cyclic or other specifically provided control means.


CLS 414/751
TXT Having gripper means:

    Apparatus under subclass 749 having an article or load-engaging means
    comprising a seizing, grasping, or clamping means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 86.4+ for
    handling implements having grappler means.


CLS 414/752
TXT By suction:

    Apparatus under subclass 751 wherein the article is grasped or seized by
    the article moving means by reducing the atmospheric pressure in the area
    between the article and the moving means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 64.1+ for
    handling implements adapted to employ the use of a vacuum.


CLS 414/753
TXT Gripper has pivoted jaw:

    Apparatus under subclass 751 having an article grasping means comprising a
    member adapted to be moved about an axis to a position where the article is
    engaged between said member and another member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 106+ for
    implements having pivoted jaw grippers.


CLS 414/754
TXT ARTICLE REORIENTING DEVICE:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising means the sole function of
    which is to move an article to affect a change in its orientation.

    (1)     Note.  The reorientation devices found in this and indented
    subclasses may cause the article being reoriented to move from one place to
    another. However, the movement is no more than the necessary manipulative
    function of the device needed to accomplish the desired reorientation of
    the article; or, the movement is to place or displace an article in a
    particular manner or with reference to a particular support.  The support
    may be a broadly claimed conveying means, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    431+,   for means to engage an article between the end thereof for rotation
    and advancement of the article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 373+ for conveyor systems for
    changing the attitude of items conveyed relative to the conveyed direction.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclass 87 for means to convey articles
    by a fluid current and to orient the articles.


CLS 414/755
TXT Article reoriented by contact with fluid means:

    Apparatus under subclass 754 wherein the article is reoriented because of
    its becoming engaged by or with a fluid material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 380 for conveyor systems having
    pressurized fluid means for changing the attitude of conveyed articles.


CLS 414/756
TXT Article reoriented by flexible sling means: Apparatus under subclass 754
    wherein said means includes an elongated flexible member adapted to bear
    against or to support said article whereby movement of at least a portion
    of said flexible member causes reorientation of the article.


CLS 414/757
TXT Article frictionally engaged and rotated by relatively movable means (e.g.,
    disc, endless belt, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 754 comprising a means driven to move relative to
    the article, and upon contact between the article and the driven means,
    said article may be reoriented.

    (1)     Note.  The driven means may or may not support the article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    433,    for roller-type article rotating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 415 for conveyor systems for
    reorienting a conveyed item by means of plural, unequal-speed members
    simultaneously contacting and conveying the item.


CLS 414/758
TXT Article inverting means (i.e., 1800  turnover):

    Apparatus under subclass 754 wherein the reorienting means is designed to
    rotate an article 1800  about any given axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403+,   for a device for emptying (e.g., by dumping) a portable receptacle,
    and in particular, see subclasses 405, 419+, and 425 thereunder.


CLS 414/759
TXT Plural, driven turning means coact sequentially to invert single article:

    Apparatus under subclass 758 wherein the inverting means comprises a
    plurality of article turning devices which cooperate to, in succession,
    turn a given article whereby the sum of the turning actions on the article
    of all said devices results in a complete inversion of the article.


CLS 414/760
TXT Article slidably traverses sloping surfaces on a plurality of pivotally
    mounted turning means:

    Apparatus under subclass 759 wherein each of the article turning devices
    are trough shaped members which are rotatable to cause an article supported
    therein to turn, and which further cooperate with one another whereby the
    article turned by one of the members will cause the article to slide to
    another of the members to be turned additionally.


CLS 414/761
TXT Inverter has plural means for receiving articles:

    Apparatus under subclass 758 wherein the inverting means is equipped to
    invert a first article and to receive another article for inversion before
    or simultaneously with the discharge or removal of said first article from
    said means.


CLS 414/762
TXT Having article inserting or discharging means:

    Apparatus under subclass 761 wherein the inverting means is provided with
    means which either assists in causing, or does in fact cause, the article
    to be properly placed on or removed from the inverting means.


CLS 414/763
TXT Having article gripping means:

    Apparatus under subclass 761 wherein means is provided whereby the article
    to be inverted is gripped for positive movement with the reorienting means.


CLS 414/764
TXT Encircling means inverts article:

    Apparatus under subclass 758 wherein the inverting means encircles the
    article, lying in at least one plane which passes completely through the
    article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    419+,   for a receptacle emptying device in the nature of a rotary cradle,
    which has a motion similar to the means of this subclass.


CLS 414/765
TXT Having article inserting or discharging means:

    Apparatus under subclass 764 wherein the inverting means is provided with
    means which either assists in causing, or does in fact cause, the article
    to be properly placed in or removed from the inverting means.


CLS 414/766
TXT Having securing means movable into engagement with the article:

    Apparatus under subclass 764 wherein the inverting means is provided with
    article engaging means movable relative to the inverting means.


CLS 414/767
TXT Encircling means moves about its transverse axis:

    Apparatus under subclass 764 wherein the inverting means is rotatable about
    an axis which extends through that portion of the inverting means which
    surrounds the article.


CLS 414/768
TXT Article turned about one end supported by a fixed or rotatable abutment or
    by a surface frictionally retarding movement of the supported end:

    Apparatus under subclass 758 wherein the inverting means comprises (a) a
    means to support the article, at a point about which it may pivot to be
    inverted, and simultaneously present a resistance to lateral movement of
    said article, and (b) a means to exert a force against a portion of the
    article other than the pivot point so that said article is caused to turn
    about said pivot point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    425,    for a receptacle emptying device having similar motion.


CLS 414/769
TXT Article turned about a rotatable abutment: Apparatus under subclass 768
    wherein the means forming the support and pivot point for the article to be
    inverted is a pivotally mounted member.


CLS 414/770
TXT Article turned about a fixed abutment means:

    Apparatus under subclass 768 wherein the means forming the support and
    pivot point for the article to be inverted is an immovable means which
    holds said article against all but pivoting movement.


CLS 414/771
TXT Including coacting opposed movable arms: Apparatus under subclass 758
    wherein the inverting means includes a plurality of members which cooperate
    to engage the article to be inverted.


CLS 414/772
TXT Article moved about perpendicular axes:
    Apparatus under subclass 758 having means whereby the article may be
    inverted and manipulated about perpendicular axes.


CLS 414/773
TXT Article received at one point and discharged at a different point:

    Apparatus under subclass 758 wherein the inverting means simultaneously
    performs the dual operation of (a) displacing an article from one point to
    another in a particular manner or with reference to a particular support,
    and (b) inverting the article so handled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+      and 729+, for swinging or movable crab means which may be used to
    reorient an article.


CLS 414/774
TXT Plural article turning members coact sequentially to reorient single
    article: Apparatus under subclass 754 wherein the reorienting means
    comprises a plurality of article turning means arranged so that one
    cooperates with another whereby an article is turned an increment by one
    turning means and is passed therefrom to another turning means to attain
    the final desired orientation of said article.


CLS 414/775
TXT Article deposited on stationary supporting surface intermediate sequential
    turning members:

    Apparatus under subclass 774 having means whereby the article being
    reoriented is staged on a fixed supporting means intermediate a plurality
    of said turning means between which said article is passed.


CLS 414/776
TXT Arm for orienting article is swingable about its traverse axis and is
    rotatable about its longitudinal axis:

    Apparatus under subclass 754 wherein the reorienting means includes an
    elongated means which supports said article and which is movable about
    perpendicular axes.


CLS 414/777
TXT Roller means circumferentially engages and supports orienter for rotation
    thereon:Apparatus under subclass 754 wherein the means engaging and
    reorienting the article is rotatably supported on a rotatable means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    433,    for roller-type means for rotating an article.


CLS 414/778
TXT Article support means rockable on fixed surface:

    Apparatus under subclass 754 having a supporting surface means upon which
    the reorienting means may be caused to move with a rocking motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 94 for rocking lifting devices.


CLS 414/779
TXT Article support means rotates about a shiftable pivot point:

    Apparatus under subclass 754 wherein the reorienting means causes the
    article to rotate about an axis which may be moved along a given path of
    movement.


CLS 414/780
TXT Fixed member provides support for article reoriented while in contact
    therewith:Apparatus under subclass 754 wherein the reorienting means
    comprises (a) a means to support the article, at a point about which it may
    pivot to be reoriented, and to simultaneously present a resistance to
    lateral movement of said article, and (b) a means to exert a force against
    a portion of the article other than the pivot point so that said article is
    caused to turn about said pivot point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    425,    for a receptacle emptying device having similar motion.


CLS 414/781
TXT Article reoriented while fully supported by stationary supporting surface:

    Apparatus under subclass 754 wherein the article is caused to roll or
    rotate on the surface which supports it for the purpose of reorienting the
    article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    433     and 749+, for transfer devices which cause an article to move in a
    particular manner to or from a particular support by rolling said article
    on its supporting surface.

    768,    for articles inverted about one end supported by a fixed or
    rotatable abutment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 717+ for conveying devices
    including pushing means for moving a load on a load-supporting surface.


CLS 414/782
TXT Article supporting carriage moved over fixed guideway to reorient
    article:Apparatus under subclass 754 wherein the reorienting means
    comprises a carriage means, which directly supports the article, and a
    guideway having a particular configuration such that, as the carriage is
    moved over the guideway, the article will be reoriented.


CLS 414/783
TXT Orienter has article gripping means:
    Apparatus under subclass 754 having means to grip the article while it is
    being reoriented.


CLS 414/784
TXT Orienter having article-supporting surface movable relative to article:

    Apparatus under subclass 754 in which the reorienting means includes a
    means which is (a) capable of directly supporting at least a portion of the
    article to be reoriented, and (b) movable relative to the article while
    said article is being supported by said reorienting means.


CLS 414/785
TXT LOAD-ENGAGING STRUCTURE OF ELEVATOR OR HOIST DEVICE WITH LOAD HANDLING
    FEATURE:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising those elements of a means
    for raising or lowering a load which are in direct engagement with the
    load, and in particular, the structural characteristics of such elements.

    (1)     Note.  The above-described subcombination is classifiable here only
    to the extent that it is not elsewhere provided for.

    (2)     Note.  The line between a material handling device proper for this
    Class (414) and an elevator or industrial lift truck proper for Class 187,
    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle, is as
    follows:



    (a)     Class 414 provides for load engaging structure in which the load
    support surface travels in a generally vertical primary lift direction and
    (1) is mounted for movement in a direction other than the primary lifting
    direction (e.g., tilting) or (2) has an additional load handling structure
    (e.g., conveyor) or (3) is constructed in such a manner that the load
    support surface is inherently self-charged or self-discharged along the
    primary lift direction; and

    (b)     Class 187, Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for
    Vehicle provides for industrial lift trucks or components thereof when the
    load is shifted in its entirety in a primary lifting direction from one
    level to another vertically spaced level and may additionally include (1)
    mere pivoting or tilting of the load supporting structure for detachment or
    storage or (2) retaining of a received load on the support surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    592+,   for the combination of an elevator or hoist and a loading or
    unloading means therefor, and wherein may be included specific,
    load-engaging structure. (The art of the newly reclassified portions of the
    subclass 592 area, i.e., subclasses 628+, 630+, 659+, 662+, and 785, has
    been cross-referenced here (785) where appropriate).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclasses 237 and 401+ for an industrial lift truck or elevator, having
    load engaging structure (See above line note for distinction).

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 35+ for vehicle pushers which may be used to move a vehicle to
    or from an elevator.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, appropriate subclasses
    for load-engaging means having hand or hoist line terminals.


CLS 414/786
TXT PROCESSES:

    Apparatus under the class definition claiming processes for handling
    articles.


CLS 414/787
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Apparatus under the class definition not otherwise classified above.


CLS 414/788
TXT APPARATUS FOR MOVING INTERSUPPORTING ARTICLES INTO, WITHIN, OR FROM
    FREESTANDING, ORDERLY LAYERED, OR MUTUALLY STABILIZING ORDERLY GROUP:

    Apparatus under the class definition for (a) placing an article in, (b)
    shifting an article relative to others within, or (c) removing an article
    from a particular location in an assemblage of contacting articles formed
    or taken apart at a site, wherein (A) each article of the assemblage must
    at least partially sustain, or must be at least partially sustained by, an
    adjacent article of the assemblage for a portion of the time the articles
    are in contact with each other and (B) the complete assemblage is either
    (i) capable of maintaining its shape without support in the horizontal
    direction on the articles from external confining structure (e.g.,
    receptacle walls, inclined shelf), (ii) transportable as a unit from the
    site and composed of plural articles located within each of at least two
    layers* forming it, or (iii) entirely composed of articles which would each
    be unsteady, or relatively unsteady (i.e., they have a more stable
    attitude), if placed by themselves in the particular predetermined location
    in which they are at least partially held by the sustaining force exerted
    thereon by adjacent articles.

    (1)     Note.  Glossary of Terms.





    Repetitive terms used in the titles or definitions of this subclass and its
    indented subclasses in a special or limited sense are set forth below with
    the meaning each is to have.  For economy of space, an asterisk (*)
    following a word located in the definition or notes indicates that
    reference should be made to this Glossary for the specific meaning thereof.

    LAYER*

    A series of equal (i.e., coplanar) articles having their bases located in a
    plane which extends across a stack* in a horizontal direction relative to
    the support surface of the stack*.

    LEVEL*

    An article within a single article wide stack* or a tier* having its base
    located entirely within a plane which extends in a horizontal direction
    relative to the support surface of the stack* or tier*.

    STACK*

    A freestanding or orderly assemblage of superposed or imbricated articles.

    TIER*

    A column of articles, a single article wide, located within a wider stack*
    and extending in a vertical direction relative to the support surface of
    the stack*.

    (2)     Note.  Apparatus for moving articles into, within, or from an
    assemblage in which the articles composing it are all used in their
    assembled form for the function they were manufactured (e.g., bricks
    stacked to form a wall) is not proper for this and the indented subclasses.
     The apparatus proper for this area forms assemblages to facilitate either
    the transporting of the articles as a unit between locations or the storage
    of the articles in a nonuse position.

    (3)     Note.  Articles in adjacent distinct levels* or layers* of a stack*
    must touch each other or an article supported separator therebetween to be
    considered proper for this and the indented subclasses.  Articles in a
    horizontally extending arrangement which have their bottoms touching a
    common supporting structure must be both touching and intersupporting each
    other to be proper for this and indented subclasses.  Moreover, if the
    articles in the horizontally extending arrangement utilizes verticles
    supporting or confining structure (e.g., walls) to maintain a stable
    arrangement, then to be proper for this and indented subclasses the
    arrangement must be composed entirely of articles which are in one of their
    less stable attitudes (e.g., a sheet on its edge) in the particular
    predetermined position they maintain while in the assemblage.

    (4)     Note.  The line between this class (414) and Class 198, Conveyors:
    Power Driven, relative to apparatus for placing articles into or removing
    them from an intersupporting group is as follows:

    (1)     Note.  Class 198 takes such apparatus when (a) it consist of a
    power driven or gravity conveyor, (b) the site on which the group is
    supported is a horizontally extended conveyor surface, and (c) the group is
    formed on the surface of the conveyor while the conveyor both moves and
    transports the articles in a horizontal direction; and

    (2)     Note.  Class 414 takes such apparatus even if it consist of a
    conveyor(s) proper for Class 198 when either (a) the site on which the
    group is supported is other than a conveyor proper for Class 198 (e.g., an
    elevator, a shelf) or (b) the site on which the group is supported is a
    conveyor surface which has been fully stopped while each article is added
    to the group.

    (5)     Note.  The line between this class (414) and Class 221 relative to
    article stacking, unstacking, or arranging is as follows:

    (a)     Class 221 takes article piling (stack* forming) where the pile thus
    formed is the supply source for a subsequent dispensing operation (not
    merely the reverse operation of the pile or stack* forming means) of the
    kind provided for in Class 221.

    (b)     Class 221 takes article unpiling (dispensing) coming within the
    scope of the class.

    (c)     Class 414 takes article piling apparatus which is disclosed as
    being capable of unpiling as well either by reverse operation of the piling
    apparatus or by reverse operation thereof together with some additional
    means.

    (6)     Note.  An intersupporting group having its articles both placed in
    and removed from the site as individual articles is not considered proper
    for this and the indented subclasses if the articles are (a) placed into
    the intersupporting group at one location, (b) sequentially travel in a
    stream in the order they are added to the group between this location and
    another horizontally spaced location while being moved by either (a) the
    force or gravity along a guiding or supporting structure (e.g., inclined
    shelf) or (b) driven conveying means, and (3) removed from the group at the
    second location.  Such art is classified elsewhere based on the type of
    supporting or guiding structure (e.g., 414-150, 414-276, 414-328) or
    conveying means (e.g., Class 198, 414-564) which exist between the two
    locations.  However, an intersupporting group wherein the articles therein
    travel sequentially in a stream between two vertically aligned spaced
    locations is proper for this and the indented subclasses when the group is
    composed entirely of articles  in a stable attitude (i.e., either the group
    is self supporting or could be self supporting).

    (7)     Note.  The line between this class (414) and Class 53, Package
    Making, relative to apparatus for arranging intersupporting articles into
    groups for packing is as follows:

    (1)     Class 53 takes the apparatus when (a) a group is formed within a
    final package, (b) a group formed is subsequently directed or placed within
    a claimed final package, or (c) a group formed is subsequently directed or
    placed onto claimed structure explicitly designed to engage a final package
    (e.g., a chute with bag supporting clip), and

    (2)     Class 414 takes the apparatus when (a) group formed is intended to
    be subsequently, placed into a nonclaimed final package or (b) the group
    formed is placed into or onto transport structure which is not a final
    package proper for Class 53 (e.g., shipping pallets).

    (8)     Note.  The line between the art for stacking or unstacking sheets
    found in this and the indented subclasses of Class 414 and that found in
    Class 271, Sheet Feeding and Delivering, was at best nebulous prior to this
    project (8603M9125).  During this project the classifier discussed the line
    with three examiners expert in the material handling arts (i.e., Mr.
    Valenza representing Class 198, Mr. Stoner representing Class 271, and Mr.
    Paperner representing Class 414) and establishing the following line:

    (1)     Class 271 provides for the stacking and unstacking of either (a)
    individual sheets of unfolded paper, (b) packets of similar sheets of paper
    attached together or   individual folded sheets of paper (e.g., signatures)
    when the thickness of each packet or folded sheet of paper is substantially
    uniform and any variation thereof is not utilized during the stacking or
    unstacking operation and (c) thin, substantially flat, nonfood articles
    when at least one of the articles to be stacked or unstacked is temporarily
    bent or flexed during the handling thereof;

    (2)     Class 414 provides for the stacking or unstacking of either (a)
    sheet-like food articles (b) nonpaper, sheet-like articles (e.g., glass
    sheets) which are not temporarily bent or flexed during their handling, and
    (c) packets of similar sheets of paper when the thickness of packet or
    folded sheet varies (e.g., wedge shaped) and this variation is utilized
    during the stacking or unstacking operation; and:

    (3)     Note.  Class 414 also provides for the stacking of paper sheets or
    sheet-like articles otherwise proper for Class 271 (i.e., la, lb, lc of
    this note) when the stack formed is subsequently handled as a unit and
    moved away from the location where it was formed by handling means other
    than an endless conveyor surface on which the stack was formed.

            All original patents within the scope of this project have been
    placed in compliance with this line.  However, the patents currently found
    in Class 271 have not been checked for compliance with this line and will
    be screened at a later date.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, appropriate subclasses for an apparatus utilizing
    plural feeding operations to form a group of articles subsequently placed
    as a unit in a final package.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 84+ for apparatus which cuts articles and then
    forms groups of the cut articles.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses for apparatus for sorting articles according to the physical
    properties of each particular article and not the number of articles.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses, for means to either
    place an article in a stack from which it is later dispensed by other means
    or dispense an article from a stack within the scope of the class (See (5)
    Note of this subclass for line).


CLS 414/788.1
TXT Stack forming apparatus:

    Apparatus under subclass 788 which constructs a stack* by placing one
    article above or below another in contacting relationship.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus which first places articles into a horizontally
    extending series and then tilts the series as a unit to form a vertically
    extending stack* or tier* is considered proper for this and the indented
    subclasses, since the articles are placed into an assemblage and do
    intersupport each other for a portion of the time they are together.  The
    mere tilting of an article series into a stack* is not considered proper
    for this area and is found in 414-754+, since the assemblage is only
    reoriented and not constructed.


CLS 414/788.2
TXT Stacking tapered or nestable articles:

    Apparatus under subclass 788.1 wherein each article placed within the
    stack* by the apparatus has either (a) one end smaller in size than the
    opposite end thereof or (b) a shape allowing it to interfit within another
    article of the stack*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    798.4,  for tapered or nestable articles in a horizontally extending series.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 142+ for apparatus for packaging tapered
    or headed articles.


CLS 414/788.3
TXT And varying orientation of tapered articles in stack:

    Apparatus under subclass 788.2 wherein the smaller end of articles having a
    large opposite end is placed by the apparatus on at least two different
    sides of the stack*.

    (1)     Note.  Included within this subclass are (a) a stack* in which two
    adjacent tapered articles have their smaller ends on opposite sides of the
    stack* and (b) a stack* in which one group of adjacent tapered articles
    have their smaller ends on one side of the stack* and another group of
    adjacent tapered articles have their smaller ends on the opposite side of
    the stack*.


CLS 414/788.4
TXT Takes articles for stack from another group:

    Apparatus under subclass 788.1 wherein articles placed into the stack* by
    the apparatus are first removed by it either individually or in small
    numbers (i.e., less than a complete group) from another distinct assemblage
    of articles (e.g., stack*).

    (1)     Note.  For the purposes of this and the indented subclasses an
    article separator inserted within a stack* of articles or a pallet for
    supporting a stack* of articles is not considered to be one of the stacked
    articles, unless the stack* is entirely composed of separators and pallets.
     See subclasses 789.5 and 927 for patents which remove a pallet or
    separator from a group and place them within a stack* of articles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    791,    for placing one stack* upon another.

    795.4+, for apparatus for unstacking articles.


CLS 414/788.5
TXT And turns article about horizontal axis:

    Apparatus under subclass 788.4 which revolves at least one of the articles
    moving from the assemblage into the stack* around a horizontal axis prior
    to placing it into superposed abutment with another article in the stack*.


CLS 414/788.6
TXT And turns plural articles as a unit about vertical axis:

    Apparatus under subclass 788.4 which revolves two or more articles removed
    together from the assemblage around a vertical axis prior to placing them
    together into superposed abutment with other articles of the stack*.


CLS 414/788.7
TXT And transports articles through working, treating, or inspecting station
    located therebetween:

    Apparatus under subclass 788.4 which also moves at least some of the
    articles to, within, past, or out of separate means situated along the path
    taken by these articles when traveling between the assemblage and the
    stack*, the means being intended to either (a) examine the articles or (b)
    change them by a chemical process, mechanical force, or physical action.

    (1)     Note.  Patents which claim more than a mere nominal recitation of
    the means are classified elsewhere on the basis of the structure of the
    working, treating, or inspection means.


CLS 414/788.8
TXT Including separate unstacking means:

    Apparatus under subclass 788.1 including means distinct from that forming
    the stack* which removes at least one article from the stack* after or
    while it is being constructed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    795.4,  for apparatus for unstacking articles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 347.1 for temporary storage of
    articles on a conveyor system.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 10+ and 174+ for forming a stack as
    a supply source for a subsequent dispensing operation.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclass 3.02+ for forming a stack of
    sheets and feeding therefrom.


CLS 414/788.9
TXT With means vertically aligning stack being formed:

    Apparatus under subclass 788.1 combined with means located at the site
    where the stack* is constructed for maintaining or adjusting the vertical
    alignment of the articles being stacked.

    (1)     Note.  Included within this subclass are means for keeping a
    vertically extending stack* from tipping over as it is being formed.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not include stack* aligning means which
    are merely named and not defined structurally (e.g., a "magazine",
    "holder").


CLS 414/789
TXT And acting as discharge gate:

    Apparatus under subclass 788.9 wherein the aligning means does not allow
    the stack* to be discharged from the site until it is shifted from its
    article aligning position which blocks the path along which the stack* is
    discharged to another position.


CLS 414/789.1
TXT Powered means (e.g., jogger, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 788.9 wherein the article aligning means is
    power-driven.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclasses 221+ for joggers.


CLS 414/789.2
TXT Forms layered stack or row and then upends it:

    Apparatus under subclass 788.1 which (A) either (a) constructs a stack*
    having plural layers* or (b) places plural articles into abutment with each
    other to construct one or more horizontal extending, single article wide,
    linear series and (B) thereafter tilts the previously constructed stack* or
    series about a horizontal axis to place it upon one of its ends and thus
    reorient or create a stack*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    469+,   for a self-loading or unloading vehicle having a pivotable load
    receiving portion.

    754+,   for article or stack* reorienting devices, per se.


CLS 414/789.3
TXT Tiers or layers formed and sequentially added to stack prior to upending:

    Apparatus under subclass 789.2 wherein the layered stack* is constructed by
    first placing within either a tier* or layer* all articles going therein
    and then moving each newly formed tier* or layer* as a unit into abutment
    respectively with another entire tier* or layer* until the stack* is
    finished and subsequently tilted.


CLS 414/789.4
TXT Includes means for crossing articles in layer:

    Apparatus under subclass 789.3 including means which places two or more
    articles into at least one layer* of the completed layered stack* with
    their longest horizontally extending sides at an angle to each other.


CLS 414/789.5
TXT Inserts separator into stack:

    Apparatus under subclass 788.1 wherein at least one of the "articles"
    placed within the stack* is (a) different from other articles in the stack*
    and (b) manufactured for the purpose of separating or supporting articles
    within a stack*.


CLS 414/789.6
TXT Plural article sources:

    Apparatus under subclass 788.1 wherein the stack* is constructed by the
    apparatus from articles supplied from different locations.


CLS 414/789.7
TXT Includes means on or linked with transporting vehicle for forming and
    discharging stack:

    Apparatus under subclass 788.1 including means mounted on or structurally
    connected to an article carrying vehicle which both places articles in a
    stack* and discharges the stack* from the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  The means proper for this subclass may include discrete
    means for accomplishing each function (i.e., stacking means and discharge
    means).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24.5+,  for stacked round Hay bales.

    111,    for bale accumulators in which the bales are placed in a
    horizontally extending series and are not superposed.

    467+,   for a self-loading or unloading vehicle, and particularly
    subclasses 497 and 509+ for specific kinds of load ejecting devices.

    789.2,  for forming the groups on that type of bale accumulators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 474+ for discharging carriers in combination
    with harvesters.


CLS 414/789.8
TXT Creates single stack by juxtaposing separately formed tiers:

    Apparatus under subclass 788.1 which constructs a multi-tier stack* by
    either (a) successively constructing plural, fully completed, discrete
    tiers* in abutment with each other or (b) placing plural, fully complete,
    discrete tiers* which have been already formed by it in abutment with each
    other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    791.6+, for an apparatus which builds a multi-tier stack* by placing
    articles side by side in one layer* of the stack* and then placing articles
    in a second layer* of the stack* so that the articles in the two layers*
    form vertical rows.


CLS 414/789.9
TXT With means for removing completed stack from stacking location:

    Apparatus under subclass 788.1 combined with means for discharging the
    stack* from the site where it is constructed, the stack* being in its final
    configuration and maximum height and not intended to form layers* or
    levels* of a larger stack*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    791,    for apparatus which forms a stack at one location and thereafter
    places this stack* in a larger stack* at another location.


CLS 414/790
TXT Interfingers with stack support moving vertically relative to removing
    means:

    Apparatus under subclass 789.9 wherein a stack* supporting structure which
    forms part of the apparatus or site interdigitates with the discharge means
    or an article support on the discharge means to transfer the stack*
    therebetween when the means and supporting structure move vertically
    relative to each other during the stack* discharging operation (e.g., a
    stack supporting platform movable downwardly between rollers, stack*
    supporting tines movable downwardly on opposite sides of an endless belt
    conveyor).


CLS 414/790.1
TXT Articles received and stack discharged at interfingering location:

    Apparatus under subclass 790 in which the stack* supporting structure
    acquires the articles which form the stack* at the same location where the
    stack* is transferred from the supporting structure onto the discharge
    means.


CLS 414/790.2
TXT Includes stack gripping device:

    Apparatus under subclass 789.9 wherein the discharging means includes a
    device to engage the stack* and exert a holding force thereon which
    prevents, or tends to prevent, either (a) the stack* from shifting relative
    to the device or (b) the articles within the stack* from shifting relative
    to each other while the stack* is being discharged from the site.


CLS 414/790.3
TXT Pusher:

    Apparatus under subclass 789.9 in which the discharge means exerts a
    generally horizontally directed force against the stack while the stack* is
    on a separate support at the site to push it therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a pusher which moves an unload pallet
    against a pallet on which a stack has been formed, thereby moving the
    loaded pallet from the site and moving the unloaded pallet into the site.


CLS 414/790.4
TXT Includes carrier having distinct supports each successively receiving a
    stack thereon:

    Apparatus under subclass 789.9 wherein the discharge means includes a
    plurality of separate stack* supports positioned on or linked to a common
    transporting device (e.g., powered conveyor, vehicle) which sequentially
    registers each support with the site where the stacks* are constructed and
    removes it from the site after a stack* is either placed on or constructed
    upon the support.


CLS 414/790.5
TXT Includes gravity unloaded movable support:

    Apparatus under subclass 789.9 wherein the discharge means includes
    structure located at the site where the stack* is constructed with (a)
    supports the stack* against gravity when in the position it receives the
    stack* and (b) then shifts to another position (e.g., retracts, tilts) to
    cause the stack to fall therefrom.


CLS 414/790.6
TXT And conveyor for receiving unloaded stack:

    Apparatus under subclass 790.5 wherein the discharge means also includes a
    power driven conveyor or a gravity conveyor which receives the stack* after
    it has fallen from the support and transports its.


CLS 414/790.7
TXT Includes driven conveyor whereon continuously supported stack is formed:

    Apparatus under subclass 789.9 wherein the discharge means includes a power
    driven conveyor which engages and constantly supports the stack* during its
    construction and discharges it from the site thereafter.


CLS 414/790.8
TXT With temporary support for incoming articles during discharge of stack:

    Apparatus under subclass 789.9 combined with means at the stack* forming
    site which (a) operates in conjunction with the stack* discharge means, (b)
    periodically interrupts the flow of and supports articles newly arriving at
    the site during the short time needed by the discharge means to remove a
    finished stack* from a primary support where it is formed, and (c) releases
    its held articles and allows normal article flow to the site's primary
    stack* support after discharge of the finished stack*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    271,    Sheet Feed or Delivering, subclass 218 for an auxiliary support for
    part of a stack of sheets.


CLS 414/790.9
TXT Stacks articles on different supports:

    Apparatus under subclass 788.1 which forms distinct stacks* upon two or
    more stack* supporting structures.


CLS 414/791
TXT And combines into single stack:

    Apparatus under subclass 790.9 which also moves one of the distinct stacks*
    from its original supporting structure and places it above or below another
    distinct stack* to form a larger stack*.


CLS 414/791.1
TXT Includes conveyor for feeding articles to sequentially formed stacks:

    Apparatus under subclass 790.9 including a power driven or gravity conveyor
    which (a) supplies a stream of articles to each stack* supporting structure
    and (2) constructs a completed stack on one supporting structure prior to
    redirecting its flow to the next supporting structure.


CLS 414/791.2
TXT Offsets or crosses adjacent articles in single article wide stack:

    Apparatus under subclass 788.1 which constructs a single article wide
    stack* and places at least two articles into contacting levels* of the
    stack* with either (a) their geometrical centers horizontally spaced from
    each other or (b) their longest horizontal dimensions at an angle to each
    other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    792,    for offset or crossed layers* of a stack*.


CLS 414/791.3
TXT Articles inverted in adjacent levels or layers:

    Apparatus under subclass 788.1 which places at least two similar contacting
    articles with reversed vertical orientations relative to each other (i.e.,
    one is turned upside down relative to the other) into different levels* or
    layers* of the stack*.


CLS 414/791.4
TXT Layers:

    Apparatus under subclass 791.3 wherein the articles are placed in layers*.


CLS 414/791.5
TXT Formed with sloped or stepped side:

    Apparatus under subclass 788.1 in which the stack* constructed has one
    vertically extending external surface which is either (a) inclined (i.e.,
    at an oblique angle) relative to the stack* supporting structure or (b)
    stairlike in shape.


CLS 414/791.6
TXT Sequentially forms or adds completed layers:

    Apparatus under subclass 788.1 which constructs a layered stack* by either
    (a) placing within a layer* all of its articles and then constructing
    another layer* in a similar manner above or below it and in contact
    therewith or (b) moving an entire layer* into superposed abutment with
    another entire layer*.


CLS 414/791.7
TXT Offsets circular articles within adjacent rows of layer:

    Apparatus under subclass 791.6 wherein the articles are (a) spherical or
    cylindrical in shape and (b) placed in one of two distinct parallel rows
    within the layer in such a manner that the geometrical centers of all
    contacting articles within the rows are spaced from each other
    longitudinally along the length of the rows (i.e., the curved periphery of
    an article located in one row contacts the curved peripheries of two
    articles in the parallel row).


CLS 414/791.8
TXT Leaves void between articles in layer:

    Apparatus under subclass 791.6 wherein two or more the articles placed
    within at least one layer* of the stack* have a gap or empty space left
    therebetween.


CLS 414/791.9
TXT To facilitate insertion of handling means:

    Apparatus under subclass 791.8 wherein the gap or space is provided to
    permit the insertion of stack* engaging means into the layer*.


CLS 414/792
TXT Crosses articles in adjacent layers:

    Apparatus under subclass 791.6 which places at least two contacting
    articles into distinct layers* of the stack* with their longest
    horizontally extending sides at an angle to each other.


CLS 414/792.1
TXT Includes swingable pusher for turning article shoved to layer:

    Apparatus under subclass 792 including a pivoting arm which both (a)
    contacts and pushes an article across a support and (b) changes the
    orientation of the longest extending side of the article relative to the
    stack* while the article is moved towards or placed into its layer*.


CLS 414/792.2
TXT With rotating stack support:

    Apparatus under subclass 792 combined with structure for supporting the
    stack* which turns about a vertical axis.


CLS 414/792.3
TXT Rotated between addition of completed layers:

    Apparatus under subclass 792.2 wherein the supporting structure is turned
    prior to each entire layer* being moved as a unit into superposed abutment
    with another previously supported layer* of the stack*.


CLS 414/792.4
TXT Turns completed layer about vertical axis before stacking:

    Apparatus under subclass 792 which reorients relative to the stack* the
    longest horizontally extending side of all articles within a layer* by
    revolving the entire layer as a unit about a vertical axis prior to placing
    it in superposed abutment with another layer* of the stack*.


CLS 414/792.5
TXT Offsets articles within parallel adjacent superposed rows:

    Apparatus under subclass 791.6 wherein some of the articles of the stack*
    are placed (A) within two parallel rows which (a) are positioned in
    different layers* of the stack*, (b) have coextensive widths, and (c) share
    a common border with each other, and (B) in such a manner that all
    contacting articles within the two rows have their geometrical centers
    spaced from each other longitudinally along the length of the rows.


CLS 414/792.6
TXT Adds rows of articles to layer:

    Apparatus under subclass 791.6 which constructs a layer* of the stack* by
    placing at least two previously formed horizontally extending, linear
    series of articles into abutment with each other.


CLS 414/792.7
TXT Positions lowest article of stack first:

    Apparatus under subclass 788.1 wherein the initial article placed within
    the stack* being constructed is the article which will be located at the
    bottom thereof and upon which all other subsequent articles are supported
    as the height of the stack* is increased.

    (1)     Note.  A stack which consist solely of imbricated (i.e., lapped)
    articles having their lowest portion with a common plane is excluded from
    this and the indented subclasses, since the height of the stack* is not
    increased by the addition of articles thereto.


CLS 414/792.8
TXT Includes horizontally shiftable, article elevating device:

    Apparatus under subclass 792.7 including a device which (a) moves as a unit
    in a horizontal direction to the stacking site from another location and
    (b) raises or lowers article  supporting structure forming a component
    thereof vertically when placing an article onto the top of the stack*.

    (1)     Note.  To be proper for this and the indented subclass the
    horizontal distance traveled by the elevating device (e.g., traversing
    hoist) must be longer than the mere width of the stack*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    793.8   and 794.1, for a vertically moving article support which shifts
    horizontally the width of its stack*.


CLS 414/792.9
TXT With article gripping means:

    Apparatus under subclass 792.8 in which the device is provided with means
    for engaging an article to be stacked and exerting a holding force thereon
    which prevents, or tends to prevent, the article from shifting relative to
    the means while the article is moved by the device to the stacking site.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, appropriate subclasses
    for specific article gripping means.


CLS 414/793
TXT Includes suction-type article gripping means:

    Apparatus under subclass 792.7 including means for exerting a holding force
    on an article to be stacked, wherein the force (a) is at least partially
    derived by reducing the air pressure over a surface of the article below
    the ambient pressure on the other surfaces of the article and (b) prevents,
    or tends to prevent, the article from shifting relative to the portion of
    the apparatus contacting the article while it is moved to the stacking site.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    627,    for a suction gripper mounted on an elevator or hoist.

    737,    for a suction or magnetic gripper mounted on a vertically swinging
    load support.

    744.1,  for a suction gripper mounted on a horizontally swinging load
    support.

    752,    for a suction gripper means mounted for horizontal linear movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 64.1+ for
    implements adapted to employ the use of a vacuum.

    901,    Robots, subclass 40 for an end effector utilizing a vacuum.


CLS 414/793.1
TXT And endless belt for transporting:

    Apparatus under subclass 793 which also includes a flaccid strap (e.g.,
    belt, chain) having its ends interconnected and traveling around a path
    defined by guiding and driving structure therefor, and wherein the means
    for exerting the article holding force either (a) directly engages the
    article and is mounted to the strap which moves both it and the article to
    the stacking site or (b) exerts its force through the strap and causes the
    article to be held thereon while the strap moves it to the stacking
    location.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:   Power-Driven, subclass 689.1 for a conveyor of that
    class having load adhering or friction enchancing means of a suction type.


CLS 414/793.2
TXT Includes magnetic-type article gripping means:

    Apparatus under subclass 792.7 including means for exerting a holding force
    on an article to be stacked, wherein the force (a) is at least partially
    derived from a magnetic attraction between the article and a component of
    the means and (b) prevents, or tends to prevent, the article from shifting
    relative to the portion of the apparatus contacting the article while it is
    moved to the site.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    606,    for magnet and grap  mounted on an elevator or hoist.

    737,    for a suction or magnetic gripper mounted on a vertically swinging
    load support.

    744.1,  for a magnetic gripper mounted on a horizontally swinging load
    support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 65.5 for
    implements adapted to employ magnetic means.

    901,    Robots, subclass 40 for an end effector utilizing magnetic force.


CLS 414/793.3
TXT And endless belt for transporting:

    Apparatus under subclass 793.2 which also includes a flaccid strap (e.g.,
    belt, chain) having its ends interconnected and traveling around a path
    defined by guiding and driving structure therefor, and wherein the means
    for exerting the article holding force either (a) directly engages the
    article and is mounted to the strap which moves both it and the article to
    the stacking site or (b) exerts its force through the strap and causes the
    article to be held thereon while the strap moves it to the stacking
    location.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 690.1 for a conveyor of that
    class having load adhering or friction enhancing means of a magnetic type.


CLS 414/793.4
TXT Includes support vertically alignable with stack then shiftable from
    beneath article:

    Apparatus under subclass 792.7 including an underlying support for an
    article to be stacked which is movable from (a) a first position where it
    is located underneath the article and directly over the stacking site to
    (b) a second position located out from underneath the article and not over
    the stacking site, wherein the article is added to the stack when the
    support moves to its second position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclasses 189+ for means temporarily
    interposed between a conveyor and receiver.


CLS 414/793.5
TXT Support carried or formed by endless belt conveyor:

    Apparatus under subclass 793.4 in which the support is attached to or
    consist of a flaccid strap (e.g., belt, chain) having its end
    interconnected and traveling around a path defined by rotatable strap
    guiding or driving structure, wherein the support attached thereto or
    consisting thereof engages the article and travels with it around a portion
    of the strap's path when the article is added to the stack.


CLS 414/793.6
TXT With belt and article moving vertically together above discharge:

    Apparatus under subclass 793.5 in which the strap moved support and the
    article to be stacked travel together along a generally vertical portion of
    the strap's path located immediately above the point on the path where the
    article leaves the support.


CLS 414/793.7
TXT And additional noncoaxial endless belt coacting therewith to support
    article above discharge:

    Apparatus under subclass 793.6 including another flaccid strap having its
    ends also interconnected which (a) travels around a different path defined
    by strap guiding or driving structure rotating around axes which are not
    colinear with those about which the other strap's guiding or driving
    structure rotate, (b) has an article support attached to or formed thereby
    which travels with the article along a generally vertical portion of the
    strap's path located immediately above the point where the article leaves
    the support and (c) jointly supports with the other strap the article to be
    stacked for a portion of the time the article is moved vertically towards
    the stack* or stacking site.


CLS 414/793.8
TXT Support adjusts vertically as height of stack increases:

    Apparatus under subclass 793.4 wherein the movable support is mounted in a
    manner that allows it to move as a unit in a vertical direction to
    compensate for changes in the size of the stack* as articles are added
    thereto.


CLS 414/793.9
TXT Support revolves around central axis during shifting and return:

    Apparatus under subclass 793.4 wherein the support turns completely around
    a central axis and follows a circular path when moving back and forth
    between its first and second positions.


CLS 414/794
TXT Support swings during shifting and return:

    Apparatus under subclass 793.4 wherein the support is pivotally mounted and
    pivots back and forth when moving between its first and second positions.


CLS 414/794.1
TXT Support travels vertically spaced paths during shifting and return:

    Apparatus under subclass 793.4 wherein the support moves along a horizontal
    extending path when going from the second to the first position with the
    article, moves vertically, and then goes along another distinct
    horizontally extending path after discharging the article and returning
    back to the second position.


CLS 414/794.2
TXT Plural coacting supports shifting in opposite directions:

    Apparatus under subclass 793.4 wherein at least two supports simultaneously
    contact the article prior to its addition to the stack* and move in
    directions opposed to each other when going to or from their first and
    second positions.


CLS 414/794.3
TXT And movable stop engaging article during shifting of support:

    Apparatus under subclass 793.4 also including a movable device which
    contacts and blocks the path of the article to prevent it from traveling
    with the supporting structure as it moves between positions.


CLS 414/794.4
TXT Includes endless belt for delivering:

    Apparatus under subclass 792.7 including a flaccid strap (e.g., belt,
    chain) having its ends interconnected which (a) travels around a path
    defined by rotatable strap guiding or driving structure and (b) has article
    supporting structure attached to or formed thereby which engages an article
    to be stacked and travels around a portion of the strap's path with this
    article while moving it onto the stacking site or stack*.


CLS 414/794.5
TXT Having discharge vertically shiftable:

    Apparatus under subclass 794.4 having the guiding or driving structure
    defining the portion of the strap's path where the article to be stacked
    leaves its supporting structure mounted in a manner allowing it to move
    vertically when the height of the stack* is increased.


CLS 414/794.6
TXT Having discharge vertically shiftable as stack grows:

    Apparatus under subclass 792.7 having the portion of the apparatus which
    last engages the article prior to its placement on the stack* or stacking
    site mounted in a manner allowing it to move vertically when the height of
    the stack* is increased.


CLS 414/794.7
TXT Includes pusher conveyor for delivering:

    Apparatus under subclass 792.7 including means which contacts and exerts a
    generally horizontally directed force against an end of the article to be
    stacked and shoves it across a separate supporting surface and onto the
    stack* or stacking site.


CLS 414/794.8
TXT Includes roller conveyor for delivering:

    Apparatus under subclass 792.7 including a rotatable element (e.g., wheel)
    having a perimeter which engages the article to be stacked while the
    element is rotating about its axis to either (a) transmit a driving force
    frictionally to or (b) reduce the friction on one of the surfaces of the
    article when it is moving towards and onto the stack* or stacking site.


CLS 414/794.9
TXT Positions highest article of stack first:

    Apparatus under subclass 788.1 wherein the initial article placed within
    the stack* being constructed is the article which will be located at the
    top thereof and supported upon all other subsequently position articles as
    the height of the stack* is increased.

    (1)     Note.  A stack* which consist solely of imbricated (i.e., lapped)
    articles having their lowest portion within a common plane is excluded from
    this and the indented subclasses, since the height of the stack* is not
    increased by the addition of articles thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclass 212 for a pack of sheets
    stacked from below.


CLS 414/795
TXT Includes rotary deliverer:

    Apparatus under subclass 794.9 including a rotatable element (e.g., wheel)
    having a perimeter which engages the article to be stacked while the
    element is rotating about its axis to either (a) transmit a driving force
    frictionally to or (b) reduce the friction on one of the surfaces of the
    article when it is moving towards and into the stack* or onto the stacking
    site.


CLS 414/795.1
TXT Coacting screws:

    Apparatus under subclass 795 wherein there are two rotary elements which
    (a) each have an article engaging perimeter with a helical shape and (b)
    jointly support the article to be stacked as it moves toward the stack* or
    stacking site.


CLS 414/795.2
TXT Includes means for raising highest article and lowering it upon newly
    delivered article:

    Apparatus under subclass 794.9 including means which (a) elevates the
    initially placed article and all additional articles already within the
    stack* above the site while another component of the apparatus delivers an
    article to the stacking site and (b) places (e.g., drops) the elevated
    article(s) onto the newly delivered article.


CLS 414/795.3
TXT Includes means raising article up to stack:

    Apparatus under subclass 794.9 including means which elevates an article
    and places it either onto the stacking site or against the bottom of the
    stack*.


CLS 414/795.4
TXT Unstacking apparatus:

    Apparatus under subclass 788 which reduces the size or height of a stack*
    by taking one or more articles from above or below another article in the
    stack*.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus which first tilts a stack* or tier* as a unit to
    "construct" a horizontally extending series and then removes articles from
    the series is considered proper for this and the indented subclasses, since
    the articles are removed from an assemblage and do intersupport each other
    for a portion of the time they are together.  The mere tilting of a stack*
    into a horizontally extending series is not considered proper for this area
    and is found in 414-754+, since the assemblage is only reoriented and not
    demolished by the removal of articles therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    788.8,  for a apparatus which both stacks and unstacks articles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for various means for
    dispensing articles from a stack.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclass 280 for separating a sheet
    from a moving assemblage of sheets.


CLS 414/795.5
TXT Utilizes fluid blast to remove article:

    Apparatus under subclass 795.4 which directs a gust or stream of fluid
    generated by it upon a surface of at least one article of the stack* to
    take it therefrom.


CLS 414/795.6
TXT Unstacking tapered or nestable articles:

    Apparatus under subclass 795.4 wherein each article taken from the stack*
    by the apparatus has either (a) one end smaller in size than the opposite
    end thereof or (b) a shape allowing it to interfit within another article
    of the stack*.


CLS 414/795.7
TXT With means vertically aligning stack:

    Apparatus under subclass 795.4 combined with means located at the site
    where the stack* is reduced for maintaining or adjusting the vertical
    alignment of the articles in the stack* prior to or during the period an
    article is taken therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    788.9,  for means to align a stack* in a stacking operation.


CLS 414/795.8
TXT With means replacing depleted stack:

    Apparatus under subclass 795.4 combined with means successively charging
    new stacks onto the site where they are to be reduced in size by the
    apparatus, each stack* being charged only when the stack* previously on the
    site has been completely reduced.


CLS 414/795.9
TXT Removes complete tier from multi-tier stack:

    Apparatus under subclass 795.4 which reduces a multi-tier stack* by first
    successively taking discrete entire tiers* from the stack and then reducing
    each tier* by taking articles from it.


CLS 414/796
TXT Separates stack into smaller stacks:

    Apparatus under subclass 795.4 which reduces the size of a large stack* by
    taking at least one smaller stack* of articles from it.


CLS 414/796.1
TXT Removes smaller stack from bottom:

    Apparatus under subclass 796 which takes at least one smaller stack* from
    beneath the article left in the remainder of the larger stack* upon which
    all other articles therein are supported.


CLS 414/796.2
TXT Removes layer as unit:

    Apparatus under subclass 795.4 which takes as a single entity an entire
    layer* of articles from a layered stack*.


CLS 414/796.3
TXT And changes position or orientation of articles within layer:

    Apparatus under subclass 796.2 which also either (a) varies the spacing
    between at least two of the articles or (b) alters the attitude of at least
    two of the articles relative to each other while the articles are still
    grouped together in a layer*.


CLS 414/796.4
TXT With means for reorienting article after unstacking:

    Apparatus under subclass 795.4 combined with means which contacts at least
    one article taken from the stack* to change the attitude thereof relative
    to a portion of the apparatus which supports the article during its removal.


CLS 414/796.5
TXT Removes highest article first from stack:

    Apparatus under subclass 795.4 which reduces the height of the stack* by
    initially taking the uppermost article from the remaining portion of the
    stack*.

    (1)     Note.  A stack which consist solely of imbricated (i.e., lapped)
    articles having their lowest portion within a common plane is excluded from
    this and the indented subclasses, since the height of the stack* is not
    reduced by the removal of an article therefrom.


CLS 414/796.6
TXT With means offsetting highest article prior to removal:

    Apparatus under subclass 796.5 combined with means for horizontally
    displacing the uppermost article of the stack* from its normal position in
    the stack* to a new position which is still in contact with the adjacent
    article of the stack* before the apparatus takes it therefrom.


CLS 414/796.7
TXT With stack elevating means:

    Apparatus under subclass 796.5 combined with means which supports and
    raises the stack* vertically towards the location where the uppermost
    article is taken from the stack*.


CLS 414/796.8
TXT Pusher separates article from stack after elevation:

    Apparatus under subclass 796.7 including means which contacts and exerts a
    horizontally directed force against an end of the uppermost article and
    shoves it completely off of the contacting supporting surface of the
    adjacent article of the stack* after the stack* has been raised.


CLS 414/796.9
TXT Includes article gripping device:

    Apparatus under subclass 796.5 including a device to engage the uppermost
    article and exert a holding force thereon which prevents, or tends to
    prevent, the article from shifting relative to the device while the article
    is being taken from the stack*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, appropriate subclasses
    for specific article gripping means.


CLS 414/797
TXT By suction:

    Apparatus under subclass 796.9 wherein at least a portion of the holding
    force is derived by reducing the air pressure over a surface of the article
    below the ambient pressure on other surface of the article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    627,    for a suction gripper mounted on an elevator or hoist.

    737,    for a suction or magnetic gripper mounted on a vertically swinging
    load support.

    744.1,  for a suction gripper mounted on a horizontally swinging load
    support.

    752,    for a suction gripper mounted for horizontal linear movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclass  689.1 for a conveyor of that
    class having load adhering or friction enhancing means of a suction type.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 64.1+ for
    implements adapted to employ the use of a vacuum.

    901,    Robots, subclass 40 for an end effector utilizing a vacuum.


CLS 414/797.1
TXT By magnetic force:

    Apparatus under subclass 796.9 wherein at least a portion of the holding
    force is derived from a magnetic attraction between the uppermost article
    and a component of the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    606,    for magnet and grab mounted on an elevator or hoist.

    737,    for a suction or magnetic gripper mounted on a vertically swinging
    load support.

    744.1,  for a magnetic gripper mounted on a horizontally swinging load
    support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 690.1 for a conveyor of that
    class having load adhering or friction enhancing means of a magnetic type.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 65.5 for
    implements adapted to employ magnetic means.

    901,    Robots, subclass 40 for an end effector utilizing magnetic force.


CLS 414/797.2
TXT Includes endless belt article separator:

    Apparatus under subclass 796.5 including a flaccid strap (e.g., belt,
    chain) having its ends interconnected which (a) travels around a path
    defined by strap guiding and driving structure and (b) has article engaging
    structure attached to or formed thereby which engages the uppermost article
    of the stack* and travels around a portion of the strap's path with this
    article while taking it away from the remainder of the stack* or site.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclasses 34+ for an endless belt
    separator which removes flexible sheet items from a stack*.


CLS 414/797.3
TXT Includes rotary article separator:

    Apparatus under subclass 796.5 including a rotatable element (e.g., wheel)
    which (a) is driven around its central axis by a power source and (b) has a
    perimeter which engages the uppermost article of the stack* while the
    element is rotating about its axis to frictionally transmit the driving
    force directly to one of the surfaces of the article and take it from the
    remainder of the stack*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclasses 109+ for a rotary separator
    which removes flexible sheet items from a stack*.


CLS 414/797.4
TXT Removes lowest article first from stack:

    Apparatus under subclass 795.4 which reduces the height of the stack* by
    initially taking the lowermost article from the remaining portion of the
    stack*.

    (1)     Note.  A stack* which consist solely of imbricated (i.e., lapped)
    articles having their lowest portion within a common plane is excluded from
    this and the indented subclasses, since the height of the stack* is not
    reduced by the removal of an article therefrom.


CLS 414/797.5
TXT Includes means for elevating remainder of stack therefrom:

    Apparatus under subclass 797.4 including means which supports and
    vertically raises the two or more articles in the stack* initially
    positioned above and supported on top of the lowermost article of the
    stack* thus separating or "taking" it from the stack*.


CLS 414/797.6
TXT Includes endless belt article separator:

    Apparatus under subclass 797.4 including a flaccid strap (e.g., belt,
    chain) having its ends interconnected which both (a) travels around a path
    defined by strap guiding and driving structure and (b) has article
    contacting structure attached to or formed thereby which engages the
    lowermost article of the stack* and travels around a portion of the strap's
    path with this article while moving it away from the remainder of the
    stack* or site.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclasses 34+ for an endless belt
    separator which removes flexible sheet items from a stack*.


CLS 414/797.7
TXT Includes rotary article separator:

    Apparatus under subclass 797.4 including a rotatable element (e.g., wheel)
    which (a) is driven around its central axis by a power source and (b) has a
    surface which engages the lowermost article of the stack* while the element
    is rotating about its axis to transmit the driving force directly to one of
    the surfaces of the article and carry it from the remainder of the stack*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclasses 109+ for a rotary separator
    which removes flexible sheet items from a stack*.


CLS 414/797.8
TXT Includes article separator with gripping device:

    Apparatus under subclass 797.4 including means which exerts a force on the
    lowermost article of the stack* directly through an interconnected device
    which moves therewith, the device exerting a holding force on the article
    which prevents, or tends to prevent, the article from shifting relative to
    the device while it is being taken by the means from the stack*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, appropriate subclasses
    for specific means for gripping articles.


CLS 414/797.9
TXT Includes pusher article separator:

    Apparatus under subclass 797.4 including means which contacts and exerts a
    horizontally directed force against an end of the lowermost article of the
    stack* and shoves it across, and out of contact with, both the stack*
    supporting surface and the contacting surface of the adjacent article.


CLS 414/798
TXT Includes movable stack support for gravity unloading article:

    Apparatus under subclass 797.4 including structure which supports the
    stack* against gravity when in the position it receives the stack* and then
    shifts to another position (e.g., retracts, tilts) to cause the lowermost
    article of the stack* to fall under the influence of gravity and be taken
    from the remainder of the stack*.


CLS 414/798.1
TXT And means for temporarily holding remainder of stack:

    Apparatus under subclass 798 also including means operating in conjunction
    with the stack* supporting structure for periodically holding the articles
    in the stack* which are located above the lowermost article during the
    short time period needed by the supporting structure to shift from, and
    return to, its initial stack* supporting position.


CLS 414/798.2
TXT Positions intersupporting article into row:

    Apparatus under subclass 788 which places one or more of the sustained or
    sustaining articles into a single article wide assemblage which extends in
    a generally horizontal direction.


CLS 414/798.3
TXT Takes article therefor from another spaced group:

    Apparatus under subclass 798.2 wherein at least one article placed within
    the single article wide assemblage by the apparatus is first removed by it
    either individually or with a small number of other articles from a second
    article assemblage which is not in contact with the first assemblage.


CLS 414/798.4
TXT Tapered or nestable articles positioned:

    Apparatus under subclass 798.2 wherein each article placed has either (a)
    one end smaller in size than the opposite end thereof or (b) a shape
    allowing it to fit within or over a portion of another similar article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 142+ for apparatus for packaging tapered
    or headed articles.


CLS 414/798.5
TXT Includes revolving or swinging handler:

    Apparatus under subclass 798.3 including an element which either (a) turns
    completely around a central axis or (b) pivots back and forth about a
    pivotal axis and applies a force to, or reduces friction on, one of the
    surfaces of the article when it is moving towards the single article wide
    assemblage.


CLS 414/798.6
TXT And pusher conveyor for delivering:

    Apparatus under subclass 798.5 including means which (a) receives an
    article directly or indirectly from the turning or pivoting element and (b)
    contacts and exerts a generally horizontally directed force against an end
    of the article to shove it across a separate supporting surface and into
    the single article wide assemblage.


CLS 414/798.7
TXT Includes pusher conveyor for delivering:

    Apparatus under subclass 798.2 including means which contacts and exerts a
    generally horizontally directed force against an end of the article to
    shove it across a separate supporting surface and directly into the single
    article wide assemblage.


CLS 414/798.8
TXT Includes nonpowered guide for delivering:

    Apparatus under subclass 798.2 including structure (e.g., tube, trough)
    which directs the article as it is moved by gravitational force, or force
    exerted on it by another portion of the apparatus, along a fixed course
    into the single article wide assemblage.


CLS 414/798.9
TXT Removes intersupporting article from row:

    Apparatus under subclass 788 which takes one or more of the sustained or
    sustaining articles from a single article wide assemblage which extends in
    a generally horizontal direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    746.4,  for apparatus including an inclined ramp means for conveying pipe
    or the like under the influence of gravity and means for removing pipe held
    against movement while supported by said ramp.  The disclosure may include
    a series of juxtaposed articles supported by the ramp.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, appropriate subclasses for means to
    remove sheets on edge from a support.


CLS 414/799
TXT APPARATUS FOR POSITIONING PLURAL ORDERLY ARTICLES ONTO PALLET:

    Apparatus under the class definition for placing two or more articles at
    specific predetermined locations upon a detached, nonwheeled, portable
    platform which travels with the articles thereafter to facilitate their
    additional handling as a unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403+,   for a device for emptying a portable receptacle in combination with
    means to place articles thereon.

    788.1+, for apparatus which forms a stack* of articles upon a site (e.g.,
    pallet).

    798.2+, for apparatus which forms a row of intersupporting articles upon a
    site (e.g., pallet).

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 414/900
TXT Adjust to handle articles or groups of different sizes:

    A collection of art under subclass 922 in which at least one component of
    the apparatus changes its configuration to handle or accommodate articles
    or article assemblages of varying sizes.


CLS 414/901
TXT Including article counter:

    A collection of art under subclass 922 including means for counting the
    number of articles placed in or removed from the assemblage.


CLS 414/902
TXT Including control for pattern of group:

    A collection of art under subclass 922 including means which (a)
    determines, or is encoded with, the proper relative position that the
    articles should have within the assemblage and (b) directs the operation of
    at least one component of the apparatus to position the articles properly
    therein.


CLS 414/903
TXT With article-supporting fluid cushion:

    A collection of art under subclass 922 in which either the apparatus or a
    supporting structure for the assemblage is provided with a fluid cushion
    upon which one or more articles are directly supported.


CLS 414/904
TXT With means to apply adhesive to article:

    A collection of art under subclass 922 in combination with means which
    coats a portion of the article with an adhesive either during placement in
    or while in the assemblage.


CLS 414/905
TXT Having geneva drive for apparatus:

    A collection of art under subclass 922 in which the apparatus for placing,
    adjusting, or removing the articles is driven through a transmission
    including two interengaging rotary members, one member having cam means
    symmetrically arranged about its axis of rotation and the other member
    having means offset from its axis of rotation, wherein the cam means and
    the offset means cooperate to convert constant rotary motion input to
    intermittent rotary motion output.


CLS 414/906
TXT With article flap deflector:

    A collection of art under subclass 922 combined with means which
    manipulates a closure flap of at least one carton- or box-type article in
    the assemblage.


CLS 414/907
TXT Including means pressing against top or end of group:

    A collection of art under subclass 922 including means which pushes on the
    top or side of at least one article of the assemblage to compress several
    articles within the assemblage against each other.


CLS 414/908
TXT PERFORATED ARTICLE HANDLING:

    A means to handle a perforated article.


CLS 414/909
TXT REMOTE CONTROL HANDLERS:

    Article handling apparatus having a means located remotely from the
    apparatus and through which a control instruction is input to the apparatus.


CLS 414/910
TXT HOLLOW CYLINDER HANDLERS:

    Apparatus for handling articles having a hollow cylinder configuration.


CLS 414/911
TXT ROLL HANDLERS:

    Apparatus for handling articles which comprise a roll of material.


CLS 414/912
TXT COMBINED OR CONVERTIBLE IMPLEMENTS:

    Article handling apparatus combined with other art devices.


CLS 414/913
TXT HANDLERS WITH SPRING DEVICES:

    Apparatus for handling articles by means of a resilient device.


CLS 414/914
TXT HANDLING VEHICLES WITH OVERHEAD GUARD FOR OPERATOR:

    Apparatus for handling articles comprising a vehicle having means to
    accommodate a human operator therefor and a means protecting the operator
    against injury to the head by falling objects.


CLS 414/915
TXT HANDLER-TYPE TOY:

    Apparatus for handling articles which is of a size whereby it is considered
    to be a toy.


CLS 414/916
TXT SHAFT MUCKING MACHINES:

    Mechanisms for removing muck from shafts.


CLS 414/917
TXT HANDLERS UTILIZING PARALLEL LINKS: Apparatus for handling articles by means
    of a parallel link motion transmitting means.


CLS 414/918
TXT TRANSMISSION-LINE GUIDE FOR A SHIFTABLE HANDLER:

    An apparatus for handling articles which apparatus is movable from on place
    to another and wherein a transmission line is provided to guide the
    apparatus in its movement.


CLS 414/919
TXT VEHICLE-CARRIED STORAGE MEMBER (E.G., PORTABLE SILO, ETC.) AND MEANS FOR
    ERECTING MEMBER FROM ATTITUDE DURING TRANSPORT TO POSITION OF INTENDED USE:

    A means for storing articles or material in combination with a vehicle
    having means adapted to transport said storing means in one orientation,
    e.g., horizontally, and means to reorient said storing means at the
    location where it is to be used into an orientation in which it is to be
    used, e.g., vertical.


CLS 414/920
TXT HANDLING DEVICE ON TRACTOR UNIT:

    A vehicle of the farm tractor type having an article handling means
    operatively mounted thereon.


CLS 414/921
TXT HANDICAPPED PERSON HANDLING:

    Devices specifically intended to be used to manipulate handicapped persons
    from one place or position to another.


CLS 414/922
TXT Associated with forming or dispersing groups of intersupporting articles
    (e.g., stacking patterns, etc.):

    A collection of art disclosing useful details of apparatus, methods, or
    products not specifically provided for elsewhere in other subclasses of
    this class (414) which (a) are utilized in or during the placement,
    adjustment, or removal of articles to, within, or from an assemblage of
    contacting intersustaining articles (e.g., stack) or (b) show an
    interesting characteristic of an intersustaining article assemblage (e.g.,
    stack shape).


CLS 414/923
TXT Including support for group:

    A collection of art under subclass 922 including structure for supporting
    the article assemblage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 49.1+ for a support for stacked
    articles, per se.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclasses 207+ for a receiver for
    sheets.


CLS 414/924
TXT Vertically shiftable:

    A collection of art under subclass 923 wherein the supporting structure is
    movable either upwardly or downwardly.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclasses 217+ for a lowering
    receiver for sheets.


CLS 414/925
TXT Shifted by change in weight thereon:

    A collection of art under subclass 924 in which the upward or downward
    movement of the supporting structure is caused by a variation in the weight
    of the assemblage due to either the addition or removal of an article
    thereto or therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclass 219 for a sheet receiver with
    a spring-loaded support.


CLS 414/926
TXT Shifted by article responsive means:

    A collection of art under subclass 924 in which the upward or downward
    movement of the supporting structure is caused by means responding to the
    placement or removal of an article to or from the assemblage.


CLS 414/927
TXT Including means for supplying pallet or separator to group:

    A collection of art under subclass 922 including means which moves a
    detached portable platform from a source and places it on the site where
    the assemblage if formed or within the assemblage, the platform receiving
    the articles as they are placed in the assemblage and traveling therewith
    to facilitate the handling of the assemblage when it is moved as a unit
    from the site.


CLS 414/928
TXT Recirculates emptied pallet or separator:

    A collection of art under subclass 927 wherein the means also returns the
    detached portable platform after the removal of the group therefrom to the
    site.


CLS 414/929
TXT Including means for collecting emptied pallet or separator:

    A collection of art under subclass 922 including means which removes a
    detached portable platform either from a site where the assemblage is taken
    apart or from the assemblage after the articles of the assemblage supported
    thereon have been removed.


CLS 414/930
TXT Manual step utilized:

    A collection of art under subclass 922 in which at least one operation
    utilized in or during the placement or removal of articles is done by hand.


CLS 414/931
TXT Bricks:

    A collection of art under subclass 922 wherein at least two of the articles
    of the assemblage are bricks.


CLS 414/932
TXT Audio or video cassettes:

    A collection of art under subclass 922 wherein at least two of the articles
    of the assemblage are audio or video cassettes.


CLS 414/933
TXT Group formed or dispensed by reversible apparatus:

    A collection of art under subclass 922 in which the articles of the
    assemblage are removed therefrom by reversing the operation of the
    apparatus which had previously placed them therein.


CLS 414/934
TXT Nonconforming article diverted:

    A collection of art under subclass 922 in which at least one operation or
    component of the apparatus takes an unacceptable or unwanted article either
    directly from the article assemblage, its supply of articles, or its
    discharge of articles.


CLS 414/935
TXT ASSOCIATED WITH SEMICONDUCTOR WAFER HANDLING:
    A collection of art disclosing useful subject matter utilized in the
    handling of flat, sheetlike semiconductor wafers.


CLS 414/936
TXT Including wafer orienting means:
    A collection of art under subclass 935 including means the sole function of
    which is to move a wafer or group of wafers to effect a change in the
    orientation thereof (e.g., to align a wafer flat, etc.).


CLS 414/937
TXT Including means for charging or discharging wafer cassette:
    A collection of art under subclass 935 including means used in charging or
    discharging a wafer into a portable rack having distinct supporting
    elements for plural wafers.


CLS 414/938
TXT Wafers positioned vertically within cassette:
    A collection of art under subclass 937 wherein the wafer is placed into a
    rack which has its supporting elements arranged in a manner that maintains
    the planar surface of the wafer in a vertical attitude.


CLS 414/939
TXT Including wafer charging or discharging means for vacuum chamber:A
    collection of art under subclass 935 including means for charging or
    discharging one or more wafers to or from areas having different
    pres-sures, one of which areas operates in a vacuum condition.


CLS 414/940
TXT Wafer cassette transporting:
    A collection of art under subclass 935 for bodily moving a portable rack
    which has distinct elements for supporting plural wafers (e.g., furnace
    charging, etc.).


CLS 414/941
TXT Includes means for gripping wafer:
    A collection of art under subclass 935 which includes means having seizing,
    grasping, or clamping structure for engaging the wafer during a handling
    operation.


CLS 415/
TTL ROTARY KINETIC FLUID MOTORS  OR PUMPS

CLS 415/
TXT INDEX TO CLASS DEFINITIONS AND NOTES



    I.      DEFINITIONS OF TERMS

    II.     SUBJECT MATTER OF THE CLASS

    III.    GENERAL RELATIONSHIP WITH OTHER CLASSES

    IV.     SEARCH CLASS (INCLUDES STATEMENTS OF THE LINES WITH OTHER CLASSES)

    V.      INDEX TO CLASS SEARCH NOTES IN CLASS DEFINITION SECTIONS AND
    SUBCLASSES OF THIS CLASS

    . . . .



    I.      DEFINITIONS OF TERMS

    The following terms or words, used throughout the titles and definitions,
    are set forth with the meaning each is to have in this class.  Throughout
    this bulletin an asterisk (*) following the work or term indicates that
    reference should be made to this glossary for the specific meaning thereof.

    BLADE
    A working member on the runner which contacts the working fluid.  This
    member may variously be called a bucket, vane, pocket or float in the art
    literature.

    CASING
    A member which cooperates with a runner member and provides a flow path for
    the working fluid.  This member may also be called a curb in the art
    literature.

    DISTRIBUTION MEANS
    At least one member positioned in the working fluid flow path and proximate
    to the runner to convey, guide, distribute or direct the fluid immediately
    prior or subsequent to its contact with the runner. Encompassed within this
    term is a pipe, nozzle or vane.

    MOTOR
    Generally, an apparatus in which one form of energy is changed so that
    mechanical power is obtained. Specifically for this class, an apparatus for
    obtaining mechanical power from the kinetic or potential energy in a fluid
    material contacting a rotary member of the apparatus, as further defined
    and limited herein.

    PUMP
    An apparatus used for adding energy to fluid material (gas or liquid).

    RUNNER
    A member which is or which supports a means contacting a working fluid, the
    member being mounted or supported so as to be capable of unidirectional
    rotational or orbital movement for at least one revolution or orbit (in the
    absence of control means for limiting movement to part of a revolution or
    orbit), the member being (1) caused to so move by the kinetic or potential
    energy of the working fluid, or (2) caused to move by some external force
    to increase the energy (velocity, pressure or potential) in the working
    fluid by transfer of kinetic energy from the member to the fluid.  This
    member may also variously be called a rotor, wheel, piston or bucket wheel
    in the art literature.

    SHAFT
    A member which supports or mounts the runner for unidirectional rotational
    or orbital movement, the member being itself supported in bearings for
    rotational motion and is connected to a work producing element when the
    runner is caused to rotate by working fluid impinging thereon or to a
    driving force so as to cause the runner to rotate and add energy to work
    fluid.

    VANE
    A static partition member (which however may be selectively adjustable to
    various positions) in the working fluid flow path and shaped (often as an
    airfoil) to guide or direct fluid flow. This vane member may also variously
    be called a nozzle, intermediate, diffuser or diaphragm in the art
    literature.

    WORKING FLUID
    A fluid material (gas or liquid) which contacts the runner and causes it to
    move, or has energy added thereto by a driven runner.



    II.     SUBJECT MATTER OF THE CLASS

    This is the class for apparatus, and corresponding methods of operating
    such apparatus, comprising a runner*, and in which a working fluid* is
    guided to, around, or from, the runner.

    A means for guiding or confining (e.g., casing*, distributing means*,
    etc.), the working fluid* must be present, at least by implication, in a
    claim for classification in this class unless specifically indicated
    otherwise, the mere recitation of the moving member or runner* being
    insufficient.  A reference in a claim to a control or regulating means for
    the working fluid* is considered to imply the presence of such guiding or
    confining means.  In such an instance, the claim will be classified in this
    class, despite the lack of an explicit inclusion in the claim of the
    guiding or confining means for the working fluid*.

    This class includes typically turbines, wind and water wheels, centrifugal
    pumps* and blowers; and such casings*, conduits, guide means and other
    elements peculiar to the subject matter of this class not otherwise
    classifiable.

    Also included is apparatus of the type described, but which has no shaft to
    transmit mechanical power output therefrom, unless the sole specific
    disclosure is for a flow meter of the turbine type, see section IV,
    reference to Class 73, Measuring and Testing.

    Also specifically included in this class is a device comprising a container
    or receptacle supported for orbiting movement and in which (1) a working
    fluid* flows into and out of the container to cause the orbiting motion or
    (2) the container is caused to move by a force to retain and raise a supply
    of working fluid* to a higher relative elevation before the fluid is
    discharged from the container.

    This class will not take an apparatus of the type described which includes
    an expansible chamber in which the working fluid* acts, i.e., a chamber
    which varies in volume by virtue of one wall moving towards or away from
    another wall. Examples of such devices are the sliding vane*-type rotary
    devices or the nutating axis-type rotary pump*.  See Classes 91, Motors:
    Expansible Chamber Type, 417, Pumps, and 418, Rotary Expansible Chamber
    Devices, appropriate subclasses, for such apparatus.

    This class will not take a pump of any type whose driving means, no matter
    how broadly recited, is controlled by a condition of the pumped fluid; see
    Class 417, appropriate subclasses, especially 1+ for such devices.

    This class will also take a "black box" motor which is clearly shown as
    rotary unless specifically described as of the expansible chamber type; see
    Class 418, for such expansible chamber motor.

    A "black box" pump clearly disclosed as rotary will be found in Classes 417
    and 418; see the respective line notes of these classes.

    III.    GENERAL RELATIONSHIP WITH OTHER CLASSES

    This class relates to apparatus of the type described usable as a pump* or
    as a motor* or as both alternatively.  It does not theoretically provide for

    (1)     the combination of a pump* and a motor* driving the pump*,

    (2)     the combination of a motor* and a load driven thereby, or

    (3)     the combination of a motor* and a source of working fluid* or an
    energy increasing means (e.g., pump*) for the working fluid*.

    However, all of the above combinations are common and are frequently
    mentioned broadly in the claims even though of substantially no
    significance for search purposes.

    Therefore where a motor* or a pump* is so claimed as to afford a basis for
    classification in this class, the mere nominal recitation in the claim of
    one of the above common combination features and also a mere nominal
    recitation of a relationship of such features with the motor* or pump* will
    not cause exclusion from this class.

    (1)     Note.  When the pumps* form the basis of classification for this
    class.

    A.      The following examples of terminology are considered to be mere
    nominal recitations of a drive means for the pump* which would not preclude
    classification in this class:

    (a)     drive means, or means for driving;

    (b)     motor* drive in which the motor* is disclosed as a well known type
    and identified merely by its generic name or merely as turbine, electric,
    magnetic, internal combustion, etc.

    B.      The following examples of terminology are considered to be minimum
    significant or specific recitations of a drive means for the pump* which
    would preclude classification in this class and indicate classification in
    Class 417, Pumps.

    (a)     language reciting enough of the driving structure to identify the
    type of motor* or to permit or cause cooling, (other than merely mounting
    the unit in a duct where it would inherently be cooled) lubricating or
    sealing the motor* elements or the motor* housing, e.g.

    (1)     for an electric motor*, the stator and rotor or a specific housing
    for sealing or cooling;

    (2)     for a turbine motor*, the runner* and a fluid distributing means;

    (3)     for a reciprocating motor*, the piston and fluid guiding or
    confinig means;

    (4)     for a magnetic motor*, the arrangement of the magnets around the
    rotor;

    (5)     for the appropriate motor*, the electric circuit or control
    therefor, or the fluid circuit or control therefor, including, in the case
    of a single blade*, part of which is used as the driving turbine and the
    remainder as the pumping element, the two fluid paths.

    (b)     an art device (door, vehicle part, etc.), recited as the driving
    means.

    (c)     a common supporting base for the pump* and motor*; the motor* or
    its housing supported on the pump* housing or vice versa; a motor* mounted
    on a tank, or a tank mounted on the motor*; details of the motor support*.

    (2)     Note.  When the motor* forms the basis of classification for this
    class;

    A.      The following examples of terminology are considered to be mere
    nominal recitations of a load driven by the motor* which would not preclude
    classification in this class:

    (a)     a propeller

    (b)     a rotary or reciprocating fan, pump* or impeller

    (c)     an electric generator

    (d)     indicating means

    B.      The following examples of terminology are considered to be specific
    or significant recitations of a load driven by the motor* which would
    preclude classification in this class and indicate classification in the
    class in which the load is classified:

    (a)     a three bladed propeller (Class 416, Fluid Reaction Surfaces,
    (i.e., Impellers)

    (b)     a centrifugal, positive displacement or gear pump* (Classes 417,
    Pumps, or 418, Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices)

    (c)     an electric generator in which is included any detail of the
    generator or any relationship between a generator part and a motor* part
    (Class 290, Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants)

    (d)     an electric generator in which, as claimed, part of the electricity
    is used for control purposes and part of power purposes (Class 290,
    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants)

    (e)     a dial and needle, number wheels, or other specific meter or
    register mechanism (Class 73, Measuring and Testing)

    C.      The following examples of terminology are considered to be nominal
    recitations of a source or energy level increasing means for the working
    fluid* for driving the motor* which would not preclude classification in
    this class:

    (a)     a boiler

    (b)     a flowing fluid stream

    (c)     a rotary or reciprocating fan or pump*

    (d)     a motor* (named) driven fan or pump*

    (e)     a plurality of pumps* in parallel

    D.      The following examples of terminology are considered to be
    significant or specific recitations of a source or energy level increasing
    means for the working fluid* for driving the motor*, which would preclude
    classification in this class and indicate classification in Class 60, Power
    Plants;

    (a)     a firetube or watertube boiler

    (b)     a dam or earthworks (nominally or broadly recited) bearing some
    physical relationship with the motor*

    (c)     a fan or pump* characterized as to type more specifically than
    rotary or reciprocating (e.g., centrifugal, positive displacement,
    pulsator, etc.), or reciting any detail thereof (e.g., piston, lobe, etc.)

    (d)     a motor* driven pump* in which a detail of the motor* is recited
    and by which the type of motor* can be identified (e.g., combustion
    chamber, armature, field, turbine rotor and flow means, etc.), or in which
    a specific motor housing is recited for sealing or cooling motor* elements

    (e)     a plurality of pumps* in series

    E.      If what appears to be a load (e.g., pump* or fan) on the motor* is
    actually disclosed for internal purposes only to affect a motor* condition
    or operation, (e.g., lubrication, sealing, control), then the load is
    considered to be a part of the motor* itself, no matter how specifically it
    is recited, and would not exclude a claim from this class.  If the load
    output is disclosed for external use only, classification is on the basis
    of the load in the appropriate class if the claimed recitations of the load
    warrant. If the load output is divided and part is used internally for
    affecting a motor* condition or operation, and another part used
    externally, classification is on the basis of the load.

    (3)     Note.  When a motor*-pump* combination is claimed so broadly so
    that the recitations applicable to either the pump* or motor* cannot form
    the basis for classification in this class, the combination is classified
    in the appropriate pump* class if the motor* drives the pump* or in Class
    60, Power Plants, if the pump* is an energy increasing means for the
    working fluid* for driving the motor*.

    IV.     SEARCH CLASS NOTES AND STATEMENTS OF LINES WITH OTHER CLASSES

    60,     Power Plants, appropriate subclasses for:

    (1)     the combination of a motor* and a specifically recited source of
    working fluid* or a means to increase the energy level of a working fluid*,
    see section III (2) Note, C and D;

    (2)     plural diverse motors*, each providing power for external use,
    either in series on the same shaft, or in parallel on separate output
    shafts;

    (3)     the combination of a pump* (no matter how broadly recited) which
    discharges to a fluid motor*, where a part of the motor* output is used to
    drive the pump*, or a fluid motor* driving a pump* which discharges at
    least part of the fluid to the motor* for driving the motor*;

    (4)     a motor* (even though disclosed as being for Class 415) which
    depends for operation on the buoyancy of a fluid, or on the vertical
    component of Tides and Waves;

    (5)     fluid operated reciprocating or oscillating motor* of the
    nonexpansible chamber type;

    (6)     all fluid operated motors* not otherwise classified, (e.g., "black
    box" not clearly shown as rotary);

    (7)     the combination of a fluid motor and exhaust fluid treating or
    handling. Exhaust fluid is considered to be that fluid downstream of a
    runner* after it leaves the final means which could affect operation of the
    motor (e.g., by affecting the back pressure on the runner); treatment or
    handling is considered to involve more than merely carrying away the
    exhaust fluid from the motor through a single constant diameter conduit.

    A valve in the outlet conduit affects back pressure on the runner and is
    proper subject matter for Class 415; an expanding outlet conduit, a
    specific physical spatial relationship of the exhaust conduit and the
    motor, or a plurality of outlet conduits are examples of fluid handling for
    Class 60; a heat exchanger is an example of fluid treatment for Class 60.
    An elbow, support or other fitting is considered to constitute a mere part
    of the exhaust conduit, unless the diameter of the conduit is altered
    thereby, which indicates classification in Class 60.

    (8)     the combination of a specifically recited runner for moving a fluid
    and a outlet for discharging the fluid, where the sole, specific disclosure
    is to obtain thrust and therefore translating motion of the apparatus with
    which the runner and outlet are associated.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 861.79+ for a rotary motor* in
    which the rotary member drives means which continuously determines,
    registers or indicates the volume or rate of flow of a fluid material, the
    motor* being positioned in the flow path of the material, and for a
    turbine-type meter which, as disclosed, is incapable of acting as a motor*.

    (1)     Note.  In many turbine meters, the runner* shaft extends no further
    than the bearings therefor.  Since no power output may be obtained from
    such an arrangement, such a meter is incapable of acting as a motor* and
    classification in Class 73 is indicated.

    Class 415 will take a turbine-type meter in which the runner* shaft is
    disclosed as connected to a nominal load (e.g., indicating mechanism), see
    section III, (2) Note, A and B; and the combination of a pump* or motor*
    for this class and a register or recorder giving information as to the
    amount of working fluid* passing through the system.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 5+, especially subclasses
    5.37, 5.43 and 5.7 for a gyroscope (see Class 74, subclass 5, (1) Note for
    definition and (2) Note for exception) comprising a mass rotating about a
    first axis, this axis supported for at least a limited amount of freedom to
    pivot about a second axis transverse to the first.

    A claim reciting the combination of a mass and fluent means to impinge on
    and cause the mass to rotate about an axis is classified in Class 415,
    unless there is claimed structure which permits freedom of motion of the
    mass about more than one axis, even though the sole specific disclosure is
    for a gyroscope mass with motion about two axes.

    (1)     Note.  A rotor which is claimed as spherical and a complementary
    bearing therefor has been considered as having the two degrees of freedom
    of motion required for gyroscopes, and accordingly, such a claim is
    classified in Class 74.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclasses for a
    motor which may be of the rotary type but which converts the energy of a
    simple pressure fluid in an expansible chamber, no energy being extracted
    except by expansion of the chamber by virtue of the fluid reacting against
    a fixed abutment, a mechanical force being produced by movement of a wall
    of the chamber.

    (1)     Note.  Classes 91,  Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, 417, Pumps,
    and 418, Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, all provide for an expansible
    chamber device (motor or pump) which may be rotary, the distinction being
    on the nature of the valving for the working fluid. For clear statements as
    to the differences among these classes see the line notes in each class to
    the others.

    137,    Fluid Handling,  the line between Classes 137 and 415 is generally
    that of combination and subcombination, with Class 137 providing for a
    fluid handling system which may include a pump and Class 415 providing for
    a rotary nonexpansible chamber type pump, per se.  However, certain areas
    of subject matter are considered peculiar to pumps and their operation and
    are considered to be exceptions to the general rule stated above.  These
    and other lines are set out below.

    454,    Ventilation, appropriate subclasses, for a gas pump* in combination
    with the enclosure to be ventilated and which is specifically recited or
    which bears a specific relationship with the pump*.

    A.      Pump-Tank Relationship

    The combination of a pump and a tank is generally classified in Class 137.
    However, a single, nominally recited tank, reservoir, chamber, pump or
    other similar fluid holding means will be considered as merely a flow line
    or conduit and will be classified in Class 415.  However, see Class 222,
    Dispensing, class definition, paragraph 91 regarding other pump-tank
    relationships.

    B.      Pump-Accumulator Relationship

    An accumulator or surge damping device is usually connected to a pump inlet
    or outlet for the purpose of maintaining a smooth flow to or from the pump.
     When disclosed for the purpose of surge damping or insuring smooth flow,
    the combination of an accumulator and pump is classified in Class 415.

    C.      Pump-Liquid Accumulation Control Relationship

    1.      A pump claimed in combination with a liquid accumulation controlled
    valve is classified in Class 137 except for the following which will be
    found in Class 415.

    When the liquid accumulation or level responsive valve which controls a
    liquid flow to the pump or a gas relief from the pump is for the
    specifically disclosed purpose of priming the pump, see Class 415, subclass
    24.

    2.      A pump claimed in combination with a drive transmission therefor
    which is controlled by liquid accumulation is classified in Class 415,
    subclasses 24 or 122.1+.

    D.      Pump-Plural Serial Valve Relationship

    A pump claimed in combination with plural serial valves in either or both
    the inlet and outlet flow path, and without any branched flow path is
    classifiable in Class 415, even though one or more of the valves is
    manually operated or condition responsive.

    E.      Pump-Main Flow Path and Branched Flow Path Relationship

    Generally a branched flow system having a main flow path and a branched
    flow path, with or without a pump is classifiable in Class 137.  However,
    several exceptions, which usually depend on the disclosure in the
    particular case, are set forth below:

    1.      A pump having plural branched flow paths, whether valved or not,
    communicating with a single source or receiver is classifiable in Class
    415. Where there is no specific disclosure of the sources or receivers for
    the flow paths, the disclosure will be considered as if there were a single
    source or receiver and will be classified in Class 415.

    2.      A pump having a main flow path and a branched flow path, each
    communicating with separate sources or receivers is classifiable in Class
    415, if:

    a.      The source or receiver for the main flow path is unclaimed or
    nominally claimed and

    b.      the branched flow path is specifically disclosed as a relief inlet
    or outlet to the pump a priming inlet to the pump, a bypass around the
    pump, or a vent, waste or drain outlet from the pump, and either

    (1)     the main flow path is uncontrolled or

    (2)     the main flow path is controlled and the branched flow line is (a)
    uncontrolled, (b) manually controlled or (c) controlled by a condition
    responsive valve responding to a condition in the main flow path which is
    sensed between the pump and the main flow path controller.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, appropriate subclasses, for a flow
    conductor of general utility there provided for, with or without a flow
    restrictor or guide means, even though disclosed for use in a motor* or
    pump* environment.  A housing or casing* which is of peculiar shape (spiral
    or volute) for coaction with a disclosed motor* or pump* runner*, even
    though claimed as the casing*, per se, will be classified in Class 415.

    184,    Lubrication  Appropriate subclasses, for a pump* forcing lubricant
    and a bearing member which receives the lubricant.

    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, or Animal Powered, appropriate subclasses,
    for a motor* which uses a discrete weight for operation thereof; a fluent
    material stream flowing into and out of a runner* bucket is considered a
    discrete weight for Class 185 and such devices will be found therein even
    though the operation is intermittent, i.e., the runner* stops while the
    bucket is filled, then rotates to another position where it may again be
    stopped for emptying the bucket.

    188,    Brakes,  subclasses 273 and 293 for a rotary member driven by
    fluid, and driving a fluid, respectively, in a conduit or casing and having
    a control for the exhaust fluid so that shutting off the exhaust develops a
    back pressure on the rotary member and thus increases its resistance to
    rotation.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses .03-.098 for the
    combination of a fluid rotary motor* and a clutch mechanism, in which there
    are interrelated controls for the motor* and the clutch, and subclass 3,
    for the combination of a fluid rotary motor* and a brake or lock applied to
    the motor* or its output shaft and having a mechanism for the joint control
    of the motor* and the brake or lock.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses, particularly 701+
    for a member mounted on a driven endless belt or on a driven rotating
    wheel, the member dipping into a source of fluent material and carrying a
    portion thereof to another station, the member working in the open or in a
    loose fitting casing* or having a flange or other means for retaining the
    material thereon while moving.

    (1)     Note.  A close fitting casing* around the member is considered to
    define with the member an expansible chamber device, and, when driven by or
    driving a fluid, indicates classification in Class 91, Motors:  Expansible
    Chamber Type, Class 92, Expansible Chamber Devices, or Class 418, Rotary
    Expansible Chamber Devices.

    222,    Dispensing,  subclasses 14+, 23+ and 71+ for a pump* with
    selectively preset means to control the quantity discharged or with
    totalizing or recording means, or with measuring means in addition to pump*
    structure:  and other appropriate subclasses for the combination of a
    supply container and a pump* in a dispensing system:  see the Main Class
    Definition of Class 222, section 9 for a complete statement of the line
    between the two classes.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses,
    for a nozzle, per se, which discharges a free jet of fluid and which is of
    general utility, even though disclosed for use with a fluid operated
    motor*, and for the combination of a pump* and a specific discharge nozzle;

    Subclasses 240+ for a turbine-type motor* driving a continuously moving
    fluid distributor or nozzle;

    Subclasses 251+ for an external fluid supply and a fluid distributor or
    nozzle which is continuously moved relative to a support by the reaction
    caused by discharge of the fluid from the distributor or nozzle (e.g.,
    reaction turbine) the fluid being discharged into the ambient atmosphere,
    in the absence of a disclosure that the moving distributor is
    aerodynamically shaped or has aerodynamic qualities, thus making the
    distributor an impeller properly classified in Class 416, Fluid Reaction
    Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), the reaction discharge being considered the
    driving motor* therefor;

    Subclasses 380+ for the combination of a fluid pump* and a discharge
    modifier downstream of the pump and external of the fluid confining or
    guiding means, which modifier is continuously moved by a motion
    transmitting means or by the fluid discharging thereon from the fluid
    system outlet.

    (1)     Note.  A claimed casing* or housing surrounding the moving
    distributor whereby the discharged fluid is collected indicates
    classification in Class 415; however, a claimed specific terminal fluid
    discharge element from the casing* to the atmosphere shifts the claim back
    to Class 239.

    (2)     Note.  A set of wheels driven by the moving fluid distributor is
    considered to be a specific load and is excluded from Class 415. Such
    devices will be found in various classes, depending on details claimed; for
    example, wheels on a rotary distributor discharging fluid into the
    atmosphere will be found in Class 239.

    (3)     Note.  A disclosure that the direction or rotation of the moving
    distributor may be alternated indicates classification in Class 415; this
    feature is entirely foreign to a lawn sprinkler type moving distributor.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses for a pump* and comminuting structure which is separate and
    distinct from the pump* runner or the surrounding casing* and causes
    comminution before or after impelling. A device in which the pump* runner*
    or the surrounding casing* is so made as to cause comminution of the
    material at substantially the zone of impelling the material is proper
    subject matter for Class 415; a structure in which the comminuting
    structure is arranged upstream or downstream of the pump* impeller, which
    may itself cause comminution, is classified in Class 241.

    248,    Supports,  subclasses 637+ for the combination of a support and a
    casing* claimed so broadly as to be of general utility, even though
    disclosed as the casing* of a motor* or pump*.  Thus, the recitation as a
    turbine or pump casing* will not serve to exclude the claim from Class 248.
     However, a claim which includes a runner* or a shaft* in the casing* is
    excluded from Class 248 and will be classified in Class 415 if no other
    basis for classification exists; a claim which includes the relationship
    between a support and a part (other than the casing*) of a motor* or pump*
    device is excluded from Class 248 and will be found in Class 415 unless
    classified elsewhere on another basis.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process (e.g., seal between a runner* and another relatively movable part,
    seal between the two relatively moving members, does not recite enough
    details of the rotary kinetic device, etc.), subclasses 345+ for a seal
    between relatively movable parts (i.e., a dynamic seal), especially
    subclasses 427+ for a dynamic close proximity seal (e.g., contactless,
    fluent, etc.) having an impeller or another rotating member to form a
    centrifugal liquid barrier.

    384,    Bearings, appropriate subclasses for a bearing which may include a
    runner or shaft supported formation with on details of the runner or shaft.

    403,    Joints and Connections,  appropriate subclasses, for means
    connecting a plurality of elements, even though the elements be disclosed
    as pump* or motor* elements, if the rotary device is recited nominally or
    by name only and cannot form the basis of classification in Class 415.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, appropriate subclasses for systems which
    transport solids by means of a fluid current, and which include a fluid
    pump for generating the current. Rotary pumps, per se, which include
    structure peculiar to the passage of solids as well as the conveying fluid
    through the pump are classified in Class 406, subclasses 96+.  See also
    subclasses 57+ and 80 for a screw conveyor or an endless belt conveyor,
    respectively, which feeds to the inlet of a blower or pump.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), appropriate subclasses,
    for the subcombination of a rotary member having a surface which is acted
    upon or sets upon a fluid, where the claims are silent in regard to a means
    for confining or directing a fluid to, from, or around the member, even
    though such confining means be disclosed; and for the subcombination of an
    impeller operable by the kinetic energy of a fluid medium, even though
    disclosed as operated by the potential energy or weight of the fluid,
    provided that no more than the working member is claimed, i.e., the claim
    must include only the minimum elements for an impeller as defined in Class
    416.

    417,    Pumps,  appropriate subclasses for a rotary pump* of the positive
    displacement type in which transportation of the working fluid* from a
    chamber or enclosure is caused by decreasing the volume of the enclosure,
    such pump* being claimed, per se, or combined with another pump* of any
    type; for a pump* in which the runner is mounted for rotary motion and
    cyclic axial reciprocation, even though it is of the rotary nonexpansible
    chamber type; for a "black box" pump shown as rotary if not of the
    expansible chamber type; for a rotary pump* and a specific driving means
    therefor; see section III, (1) Note, A and B; for a chain pump of the type
    comprising pistons mounted on a flexible or endless drive member and in
    which a casing or housing surrounds and tightly encompasses the pistons,
    thus forming an expansible chamber pump, and elements (e.g., pistons) of
    such a pump.

    (1)     Note.  Bucket Pumps (e.g., receptacles on an endless chain or belt)
    which retain fluent to be moved to another location will be found in Class
    198, Conveyors:  Power-Driven.

    (2)     Note.  Classes 91, Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, 417 Pumps, and
    418, Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, all provide for an expansible
    chamber device (motor or pump) which may be rotary, the distinction being
    on the nature of the valving for the working fluid. For clear statements as
    to the differences among these classes, see the line notes in each class to
    the others.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclasses for a
    rotary motor or pump in which the moving wall of an expansible chamber (1)
    produces a mechanical force because of expansion of a simple fluid in the
    chamber reacting against a fixed abutment, or (2) increases the energy of a
    fluid in the chamber.

    (1)     Note.  Classes 91, Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, 417, Pumps and
    418, Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, all provide for an expansible
    chamber device motor or pump, which may be rotary, the distinction being on
    the nature of the valving for the working fluid. For clear statements as to
    the differences among these classes see the line notes in each class to the
    others.

    V.      INDEX TO CLASS SEARCH NOTES IN CLASS DEFINITION SECTIONS AND
    SUBCLASSES OF THIS CLASS

    CLASS           SECTION
    SUBCLASS
    60,     Power Plants    III(2)  92, 178
                    Note D, (3)
                    Note; IV
    73,     Measuring       I; III(2)
            and Testing     Note B (e);     118
                    IV
    74,     Machine
            Element or
            Mechanism       IV      70, 110,
                            170.1+
    91,     Motors:
            Expansible      II, IV
            Chamber
            Type
    116,    Signals and
            Indicators              118
    137,    Fluid
            Handling                25, 84,
    138,    Pipes and
            Tubular
            Conduits        IV      148,
                            182.1+
    166,    Wells           121.1,
                            121.2,
                            121.3,
                                     169.1+181,      Acoustics
    119184, Lubrication     IV185,  Motors:
     Spring,        Weight,
    or      Animal  Powered IV188,  Brakes  IV192,  Clutches
    and    Power-Stop      Control V       18,
    123198,      Conveyors:      Power-Driven    IV      6,
    71222,  Dispensing      IV239,  Fluid Sprinkling,       Spraying,
    and   Diffusing       IV      63, 80,                   167,
                       182.1+,                 202241, Solid
    Material       Comminution or   Disintegration  IV248,  Supports
    IV251, Valves and       Valve Actuation         148227, Seal for a Joint or
    Juncture    IV 109,                     110,                    170.1,
                     230290, Prime-Mover     III (2)        Dynamo
    Plants   Note B (c)     10      and
    (d)340,     Communications: Electrical              118384, Bearings
    IV403,  Joints
    and  Connections     IV416,  Fluid Reaction     III (2) 2.1+,
    8,                         71,  Surfaces        (i.e.,  Note B (a);     90,
    91, Impellers)      IV      93,121.1,                   121.2,
                     121.3,                         169.1+,                 148

    417,    Pumps   II; III (1)
                    Note B, (2)     5, 26
                    Note B, (b);
                    IV
    418,    Rotary
            Expansible
            Chamber II; III (2)
            Devices Note B (b);
                    IV
    440,    Marine Propulsion       8
    454,    Ventilation     IV
    494,    Imperforate Bowl:
            Centrifugal
            Separators              89



CLS 415/1
TXT Process under the class definition of ACQUISITION PROCUREMENT PLAN.


CLS 415/2.1
TXT WITH MEANS FOR CONTROLLING CASING OR FLOW GUIDING MEANS IN RESPONSE TO
    NATURAL FLUID CURRENT FORCE OR DIRECTION:

    Device under the class definition comprising means for adjusting the
    position or effect of a casing* or other working fluid* flow directing
    member which means acts in accordance to the strength or orientation of a
    flowing, unconfined, and natural working fluid such as a wind or water
    stream.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    905+,   for a natural fluid current motor comprising a casing or flow
    guiding means which is not controlled in response to current force or
    direction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclasses 9+ for the
    combination of an uncased runner (e.g., windmill, etc.) and a guide vane
    attached thereto for adjusting the position of the runner in a wind or
    fluid stream, and subclasses 31+ for means for controlling an uncased
    runner in a wind or fluid stream in response to noncyclic condition sensing.


CLS 415/3.1
TXT Having specific features for water current:

    Device under subclass 2.1 comprising structure particularly adapted to a
    natural water current environment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for a device comprising a float supported or buoyant runner.


CLS 415/4.1
TXT Natural fluid current force responsive:

    Device under subclass 2.1 wherein the adjusting means for the casing* or
    other working fluid* flow directing member acts in accordance to the
    strength of the flowing, unconfined, and natural working fluid.

    (1)     Note.  A device comprising means for controlling a casing or other
    flow guiding member in accordance to runner* shaft* rotation speed is
    included in this and indented subclasses provided the shaft speed is
    dependent on the strength of the flowing natural current.  However, for a
    complete search for such subject matter, subclasses 30+ should be searched
    since those subclasses have not been screened for such subject matter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30+,    for a device comprising control means responsive to noncyclic
    condition sensing of runner shaft rotation speed;

    146,    for a device including working fluid force responsive vane* or flow
    control.

    148+,   for other devices having flow regulating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclass 41 for an
    uncased rotor with control means responsive to relative natural fluid
    current velocity.


CLS 415/4.2
TXT Vertical runner axis:

    Device under subclass 4.1 wherein the runner's* axis of rotation is
    generally parallel to the force of gravity acting on the working fluid*.


CLS 415/4.3
TXT Axial flow runner:

    Device under subclass 4.1 wherein the working fluid* path to, through, and
    from the runner* is predominantly parallel to the runner's axis of rotation.


CLS 415/4.4
TXT Vertical runner axis:

    Device under subclass 2.1 wherein the runner's* axis of rotation is
    generally parallel to the force of gravity acting on the working fluid*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.2,    for a device with means for controlling a casing* or flow guiding
    means in response to natural fluid current force, which device has a
    vertical runner axis.


CLS 415/4.5
TXT Axial flow runner:

    Device under subclass 2.1 wherein the working fluid* path to, through, and
    from the runner* is predominantly parallel to the runner's axis of rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.3,    for a device with means for controlling a casing* or flow guiding
    means in response to natural fluid current force, which device has an axial
    flow runner.


CLS 415/5
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the runner* comprises an
    endless, elongated flexible member, e.g., a chain or belt, which carries at
    least one blade* or which has a surface which functions like a blade.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 702, for a conveyor section of
    the bucket type which is particularly adapted to convey liquid; e.g., a
    water elevator.

    417,    Pumps, subclass 320 for an endless chain pump comprising serially
    arranged pumping chamber, i.e., an endless chain having pistons or similar
    extension in a tight fitting casing so that the space between each piston
    or other obstruction and the inlet or outlet of the casing forms in effect
    an expansible chamber.


CLS 415/6
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a container or conducting
    means for liquid which is so supported for motion that it sequentially (1)
    is immersed in a body of liquid, (2) retains a portion of such liquid, (3)
    is raised out of the body of liquid and (4) discharges such retained
    liquid, and repeats such sequence of steps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclass 638+ for an endless band or belt
    of material adapted to dip into a liquid source, retain the liquid thereon
    by capillarity or absorption, raise the liquid and then discharge it by
    centrifugal force; and subclasses 701+ for a device similar to that
    described above, except that discharge is by means other than by
    centrifugal force.


CLS 415/7
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a runner* or runner*
    sustaining means which is intended during use to be supported by a liquid
    and is buoyant in said liquid.

    (1)     Note.  A ship or boat recited so nominally as to preclude
    classification on its features is included under this definition of float.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 495+ for motors having a buoyant working
    member motivated by the vertical rise and fall of the surface of a body of
    fluid.

    417,    Pumps, subclass 61, for a pump which is buoyantly supported or
    which has its inlet or outlet buoyantly supported.


CLS 415/8
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a driven runner which is
    submerged wholly or partially in a fluid, and a means in the path of the
    fluid current to or from the runner to guide or direct the current, there
    being no conduit confining the fluid current at the location of said means.

    (1)     Note.  Included under this definition are outboard motor-type
    propellers having a deflector or guide in the path of the fluid from the
    propeller to change the course or direction of the fluid to control the
    speed or direction of the boat (e.g., trolling); also included are fan
    runners* having directional guide vanes* spaced therefrom.

    (2)     Note.  The means to guide and direct the current must be in
    addition to the usual rudder for steering a boat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148+,   for means to affect the direction, amount, velocity or whirl of the
    working fluid in a system where the fluid is confined.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers) appropriate subclasses
    for the runner, per se, in the absence of a directing means.

    440,    Marine Propulsion, appropriate subclasses, for ship structure
    combined with a propeller and a rudder.


CLS 415/9
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a member or element which
    is intended to be mutilated, torn, broken, melted or destroyed so that it
    can not be re-used, but must be replaced, while other members remain in a
    usable condition.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass usually are of the type where an
    element fails on overspeed, to prevent destruction of the entire unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173.4   and 174.4, for a bearing, seal, or liner member positioned between
    a portion of the runner* and a static part which bearing, seal, or liner is
    intended to be eroded, abraded or permanently deformed.


CLS 415/10
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a control means reacting to
    the force of the small generally circular fluid currents, or to the
    electrical or magnetic force generated by motion of the shaft* or an
    element associated there with in a fluid atmosphere or in a magnetic field.

    (1)     Note.  If any part of the generated fluid or electrical force is
    used for a purpose other than the control means (as claimed) it is
    considered to be specific load and is excluded from this Class, see Main
    Class Definition, section III, (2) Note, B.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for a control means reacting to the force exerted by a fluid whose
    velocity or pressure has been increased by the runner* or other shaft*
    associated member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants, subclass 4 for a prime mover dynamo
    plant comprising plural prime movers of the turbine type and having means
    to control operation of the turbines in response to electrical conditions,
    and subclasses 51-55 for a prime-mover dynamo plant comprising a turbine or
    other fluid motor and means to regulate the motor in response to electrical
    conditions.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 130+
    for data processing control systems wherein the control system is claimed
    generically, and subclass 509 for the application of a computer in the
    measuring of a fluid.


CLS 415/11
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a fluid system downstream
    of a pump* and having a branched passage leading back to the pump* inlet
    with a means responsive to a characteristic or condition of the fluid
    controlling the passage.

    (1)     Note.  The characteristic or condition may be that of the fluid
    upstream or downstream of the pump*.

    (2)     Note.  Typical examples of characteristic or condition of the fluid
    are pressure, velocity, density.


CLS 415/12
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a blade*, vane* or means to
    move the blade or vane relative to a fixed point made of a plurality of
    dissimilar metals to provide for movement of the blade or vane upon
    variation in temperature.


CLS 415/13
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising (1) means to sense a
    condition which may or may not occur, a change in such condition, a lack of
    such condition, or a result of such condition, and a separate control means
    for an apparatus part, the sensing means causing or permitting operation of
    the separate control means without the intervention of a human attendant,
    (2) means mounted so as to rotate and assume various radial positions in
    accordance with the rate of its rotation, and at a predetermined rate, to
    operate a control means for an apparatus part, or (3) means responding to a
    turning or twisting motion of a rotating member to impose a control on an
    apparatus part.

    (1)     Note.  A timer clockwork or cyclical mechanism which operates at
    predetermined intervals of time or motion is not included under this
    definition of automatic control; a float which has a portion thereof also
    acting as a valving element is included under this definition; a check
    valve or similar valve element which is directly responsive to fluid flow
    is not included; a valve having connected thereto a separate surface which
    responds to pressure is included.

    (2)     Note.  The centrifugally actuated element must be one in addition
    to the minimum required for the apparatus under the class definition, i.e.,
    a runner* and a means to direct working fluid* to, from or through the
    runner*.  Thus, a centrifugally moved blade* or connecting means between
    the blade* and its support is not proper subject matter under this
    definition and will be found in subclasses 140+.


CLS 415/14
TXT Apparatus under subclass 13 in which the control function is initiated when
    the runner, its housing or its supporting member has (1) made a
    predetermined part of a cycle or number of cycles or (2) moved to a
    predetermined point in space.


CLS 415/15
TXT Apparatus under subclass 13 in which the control function is initiated
    after a comparison between a reference signal from a separate source and
    the sensed condition.


CLS 415/16
TXT Apparatus under subclass 13 in which the control function is initiated at a
    predetermined speed of a runner* in combination with means which may be
    operated for testing purposes to initiate the control function when the
    runner* is not operating at said predetermined speed.


CLS 415/17
TXT Apparatus under subclass 13 in which the operation of the control means is
    caused or permitted by means which senses and responds to two different
    conditions.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of different conditions are:  speed, temperature,
    pressure, attitude.

    (2)     Note.  Speed of the moving motive member and the load thereon (or
    resistance to movement) are directly related; therefor speed and load are
    considered to be the same condition.

    (3)     Note.  Included under this definition is a sensing means comprising
    a single element which can respond to plural different conditions.


CLS 415/18
TXT Apparatus under subclass 13 comprising means to (1) cause an apparatus
    surface part which is associated with a separate and distinct moving
    surface to frictionally engage and control, retard or stop said moving
    surface or (2) cause two members to either engage or disengage to transmit
    or to prevent motion from one to the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123,    for clutch or brake surfaces which are manually actuated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    477,    Interrelated Power Delivery Controls, Including Engine Control, for
    interrelated control between a motor* and a transmission, clutch, or brake.


CLS 415/19
TXT Apparatus under subclass 13 comprising (1) a motor for initiating runner*
    rotation or (2) a member for adjusting runnr blade position, and in
    combination with (1) or (2) a control means which responds to a
    predetermined condition of operation to deactivate the starter motor or to
    move the runner blades from the initial starting position.


CLS 415/20
TXT Apparatus under subclass 13 comprising a control for the amount of working
    fluid flowing in a confined path and for adjusting the position of another
    element or part which does not affect such amount.

    (1)     Note.  The amount of fluid flowing may be controlled by a valve in
    the supply line, in a relief or bypass line, or in the discharge line or
    tailgate.

    (2)     Note.  Shifting the direction of discharge of the motive fluid, or
    imposing a deflector element in the path of the free jet, is not considered
    to be a control for the amount of motive fluid flow.


CLS 415/21
TXT Apparatus under subclass 20 in which the other element or part comprises
    (1) the runner*, (2) any part thereof, or (3) its connection or support
    means on a shaft.


CLS 415/22
TXT Apparatus under subclass 21 in which the element or part comprises a
    runner* which is positioned between two sets of vanes*, one set guiding
    flow to the runner*, the other set from the runner.*

    (1)     Note.  The fluid flow guide vanes may themselves be movable
    relative to a fixed member.

    (2)     Note.  Many patents herein disclose the use of the apparatus as
    either a turbine or a pump* the flow guide vanes being movable to various
    positions to vary the working fluid* velocity (turbine) or pressure (pump).


CLS 415/23
TXT Apparatus under subclass 13 in which the condition sensed is the angle at
    which the working fluid* leaves a blade* or vane*.


CLS 415/24
TXT Apparatus under subclass 13 in which the condition sensed is the level of a
    liquid or the weight effect of a mass of liquid to initiate the control
    function.


CLS 415/25
TXT Apparatus under subclass 13 comprising a runner* or shaft* and means to
    regulate flow of fluid in or through the runner* or shaft*, the regulating
    function started as a result of centrifugal force.

    (1)     Note.  The regulating means may be positioned within or without the
    shaft* or runner*.

    (2)     Note.  The regulating means may be subjected to the centrifugal
    force or may be operated by another device subjected to centrifugal force.


CLS 415/26
TXT Apparatus under subclass 13 in which the runner* or another means secured
    to and moving with the runner supporting shaft acts on a fluid to increase
    its velocity or its pressure and the sensing means responds to a force
    exerted by the fluid after being acted upon by the runner* or such other
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175,    for a separate, connected pump for circulating lubricant and not
    involving automatic control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 1+ for a rotary kinetic fluid pump comprising a
    working fluid condition responsive motor control; and subclasses 279+ for a
    rotary kinetic fluid pump with a working fluid condition responsive bypass.


CLS 415/27
TXT Apparatus under subclass 26 comprising a driven runner and a branched fluid
    conduit downstream of the runner, one branch leading to a point of use for
    the fluid, the other branch being valved and discharging to atmosphere when
    the valve is actuated as a result of the sensing means responding to the
    force exerted by the fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11+,    for pumps and recirculation passages leading back to the pump inlet
    in response to a means sensing or condition of the working fluid.


CLS 415/28
TXT Apparatus under subclass 26 comprising a plurality of runners or blade rows
    with a valve so arranged as to permit at least a portion of the working
    fluid either to pass through a runner or blade row or to be bypassed around
    so as not to be acted upon by a blade row, the valve actuated as a result
    of the sensing means responding to the force exerted by the fluid.


CLS 415/29
TXT Apparatus under subclass 26 comprising means to regulate the flow of
    working fluid* to the runner* of a motor*.

    (1)     Note.  Typical of the devices included under this definition is a
    motor* in which a small pump* driven by the shaft acts on a flud, the
    pressure of which acts on a means controlling flow of working fluid* to the
    motor.


CLS 415/30
TXT Apparatus under subclass 13 in which the control operation is initiated in
    response to a predetermined rate of movement of the runner* or to a rate
    proportional to such predetermined rate or to a twisting or turning motion
    of a rotating member associated with the runner* or shaft*.


CLS 415/31
TXT Apparatus under subclass 30 comprising a runner* having a blade* which is
    wrapped or

    coiled at least 360o around an axis.

    (1)     Note.  The blade* may extend longitudinally or the edges may all be
    in a plane.


CLS 415/32
TXT Apparatus under subclass 30 comprising in addition means actuated by a
    human attendant to return the control system to a datum, point, to override
    or prevent operation of the control system, or to otherwise selectively
    modify or affect the operation of the control system.


CLS 415/33
TXT Apparatus under subclass 30 in which a means for actuating a relatively
    movable runner*, blade*, runner* support or part in which the runner*
    support turns or revolves is controlled.


CLS 415/34
TXT Apparatus under subclass 33 in which the runner*, blade*, shaft* or part in
    which the shaft* turns or revolves is movable along the axis around which
    the runner* normally moves during operation.


CLS 415/35
TXT Apparatus under subclass 30 comprising a nozzle discharging working fluid*
    towards the runner* and in which the control means is a barrier movable
    into and out of a position intercepting and redirecting the working fluid*.


CLS 415/36
TXT Apparatus under subclass 30 in which the control operates a device which
    varies the quantity of working fluid* flowing in a confined path or the
    position of a vane* or other flow directing or guiding means.


CLS 415/37
TXT Apparatus under subclass 36 in which the means controlling the quantity of
    working fluid* flowing is located intermediate a plurality or rows or
    series of blades*, or within a passage which redirects the working fluid*
    back to the same blade* or series of blades* from whence it was discharged.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11+,    for means to recirculate fluid back to a pump runner and a control
    means therefor responsive to a condition or characteristic of the working
    fluid.

    52.1+,  for guide vanes or valves in re-entry or recirculation passages
    where no automatic control is involved.


CLS 415/38
TXT Apparatus under subclass 36 comprising control means for a plurality of
    passages for flow of working fluid*, said control means being operable to
    permit flow serially through the passages or to permit flow through one
    passage while shutting off flow through another.


CLS 415/39
TXT Apparatus under subclass 38 in which said control means comprise a
    plurality of regulators including one controlling the amount of working
    fluid* discharged towards the runner* and another controlling the amount of
    working fluid* discharged away from the runner* prior to action on the
    runner*.


CLS 415/40
TXT Apparatus under subclass 38 comprising a source of mechanical power caused
    to move by virtue of a fluid acting thereon to operate said control means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for other valve actuators comprising a fluid servomotor and pilot
    valve therefor controlled by a speed responsive means.


CLS 415/41
TXT Apparatus under subclass 36 including disabling means which prevents
    operation of a flow controlling means until the disabling means is moved or
    caused to move from its disabling position.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the patents in this subclass involve an emergency
    stop valve which is latched in open position and an emergency governor
    which at a predetermined speed, trips the latch and permits the emergency
    stop valve to close.


CLS 415/42
TXT Apparatus under subclass 36 in which the actuator for the means controlling
    the quantity of working fluid* or the position of a vane* includes the
    runner* or a distinct and independent source of mechanical power.


CLS 415/43
TXT Apparatus under subclass 42 in which the distinct and independent source of
    mechanical power is a fluid actuated means which supplements and which is
    actuated by fluid from a pilot valve controlled by the means reacting to
    the rate of movement of the runner*.


CLS 415/44
TXT Apparatus under subclass 36 comprising means to direct or conduct a
    plurality of distinct fluid streams onto the runner.

    (1)     Note.  Included under this definition is a single control
    regulating flow to a plurality of branches each of which discharges onto
    the runner.


CLS 415/45
TXT Apparatus under subclass 44 in which the means lie in a plane which is
    normal to the runner axis and passes through at least a portion of the
    runner blade.


CLS 415/46
TXT Apparatus under subclass 36 in which the flow controlling member or the
    vane* is located in the path of the working fluid* after the fluid has
    acted on the runner.


CLS 415/47
TXT Apparatus under subclass 13 in which the sensing means reacts to a
    predetermined force exerted by a fluid or to predetermined temperature.


CLS 415/48
TXT Apparatus under subclass 47 in which the sensing means controls means which
    positively moves or shifts the position of a runner, runner supporting
    shaft, blade, or vane relative to other apparatus parts.


CLS 415/49
TXT Apparatus under subclass 47 comprising sensing means which reacts to the
    force exerted by a fluid for controlling the flow of working fluid.

    (1)     Note.  The sensing means may react to the force of working fluid or
    another fluid for controlling working fluid flow.


CLS 415/50
TXT Apparatus under subclass 49 in which the sensing means reacts to fluid
    pressure to control the flow of working fluid relative to two or more
    separate and distinct runners.

    (1)     Note.  The control means may comprise a single valve, or a
    plurality of valves, for controlling flow to or from a plurality of runners.


CLS 415/51
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a means driven or actuated
    independently of the runner* to control the flow of working fluid* to or
    from the runner* (1) in accordance with a predetermined scheme of operation
    embodied in a physical form and not involving the intervention of a human
    being other than to set it in operation or (2) at a particular time of day
    or after a predetermined delay period.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 624.11 for similar control of a fluid
    distribution system but not involving a pump or motor runner.


CLS 415/52.1
TXT WITH MEANS FOR REENTRY OF WORKING FLUID TO BLADE SET (E.G., REENTRY TYPE
    DEVICE, PASSAGE, ETC.):

    Device under the class definition comprising means for directing working
    fluid* which has previously contacted a first runner* blade* or blade row
    back to the blade or blade row.  The means comprises an arrangement or
    shape of the blade(s) or an associated working fluid flow guide or casing*.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is a device wherein significance
    is attributed to its being of a particular type (e.g., regenerative
    turbine, side channel blower, cross flow pump, etc.) or configuration, if
    the type or configuration inherently operates to redirect working fluid
    back to a blade or blade row; working fluid reentry need not be
    specifically claimed in such instances.

    (2)     Note.  A row (set) of blades comprises at least two physically
    interrelated blades which cooperate with each other to form a single
    composite structure against which the working fluid may act.  The blades of
    a row may be arranged relative to each other to form any one of a variety
    of shapes (e.g., circle, spiral, etc.) but usually comprise a single
    circular annulus.

    (3)     Note.  A single runner may have thereon a plurality of rows (i.e.,
    sets) of blades.  For classification under this definition, the working
    fluid must be directed to the same row of blades it previously contacted.
    See subclasses 64, 66, 67, 93, 103, and 198.1+, for apparatus in which the
    working fluid is directed to another row of blades after contacting a first
    row.

    (4)     Note.  A device merely comprising a closed container with a pump
    which recirculates working fluid in the container is not included in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11+,    for a pump* comprising a passage means for the reentry of working
    fluid to a runner, which means includes a passage control means responsive
    to a condition or characteristic of the working fluid.

    37,     for a device comprising means for the reentry of working fluid to a
    runner, which means includes a working fluid controlling valve responsive
    to the runner's shaft speed or torque.

    225,    for a device having an exit chamber axially offset from the runner
    which may permit some working fluid reentry to a blade or blade set.


CLS 415/53.1
TXT Cross flow runner:

    Device under subclass 52.1 comprising a runner* blade* row which forms a
    hollow cylinder.  The working fluid* in the device flows from a position
    outside and on one side of the cylinder through the blade row to a position
    inside the cylinder and then again through the blade row to a position
    outside and generally on the other side of the cylinder.

    (1)     Note.  The working fluid* usually flows in a direction
    perpendicular to the runner's axis of rotation.

    (2)     Note.  Cross flow-type runners may also be referred to as
    transverse flow runners.


CLS 415/53.2
TXT Having vane or deflector within runner blade set:

    Device under subclass 53.1 comprising a working fluid* guiding vane* or
    other means which is positioned inside the blade row to guide working fluid
    inside the blade row.


CLS 415/53.3
TXT Having selectively adjustable vane or working fluid control means:

    Device under subclass 53.1 comprising a working fluid* guiding vane* or
    other means which may be moved positively and at will and may be retained
    in any one of a multiplicity of different positions to vary the direction
    or amount of working fluid flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53.2,   for a cross flow runner* device having a selectively adjustable
    vane or deflector within a runner blade* set.

    148+,   for a selectively adjustable vane or working fluid control means in
    a nonreentry device.


CLS 415/54.1
TXT To opposite face of blade:

    Device under subclass 52.1 wherein the working fluid* directed back to the
    blade* or blade row is directed to a surface (i.e., face) of the blade or
    blade row on the other (i.e., back) side of a surface previously contacted
    by the working fluid.

    (1)     Note.  In most instances, the arrangement under this definition is
    for the purpose of slowing down the runner since the redirected fluid acts
    on the blade in a direction opposite to that in which the working fluid
    originally acts.


CLS 415/55.1
TXT Turbine regenerative pump:

    Device under subclass 52.1 comprising a casing* having a ring shaped
    channel around the runner's axis of rotation within and which the first
    runner blade row rotates to add energy to working fluid* passing through
    the channel (i.e., pump*).  A (regenerative) portion of the channel lies
    between a circumferentially spaced working fluid channel inlet and outlet
    which portion (a) has a significantly greater cross section than does the
    blade row and (b) is configured to direct the working fluid along a helical
    path out of and back into contact with the blade row.

    (1)     Note.  The channel is usually perpendicular to and along an arc of
    constant radius centered upon the runner's axis of rotation.

    (2)     Note.  The working fluid must be directed back into contact with a
    blade row by design.  A device wherein working fluid is incidentally
    directed back into contact with a blade row (e.g., as in a centrifugal
    volute pump) is not included in this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  A regenerative turbine pump may also be referred to as a
    vortex pump, a side channel blower, a ring channel blower, etc.


CLS 415/55.2
TXT Having specific means to deflect working fluid in regenerative passage:

    Device under subclass 55.1 wherein particular significance is attributed to
    a working fluid* guiding vane* or other means which guides the working
    fluid passing within the (regenerative) channel portion.

    (1)     Note.  Working fluid flow guides positioned at the working fluid
    entrance or exit to the (regenerative) channel portion are included in this
    subclass.


CLS 415/55.3
TXT Means extends parallel to passage:

    Device under subclass 55.2 wherein the working fluid* directing or guiding
    means is located within the (regenerative) channel portion and generally
    extends coincidently with (i.e., parallel to) the channel portion.


CLS 415/55.4
TXT Positioned at passage end (e.g., stripper seal, etc.):

    Device under subclass 55.2 wherein the working fluid* conducting, guiding,
    or distributing means is positioned generally at a circumferential limit
    (i.e., end) of the (regenerative) channel portion.

    (1)     Note.  A device having a stripper seal which prevents or retards
    working fluid* from passing from the working fluid outlet of the channel
    portion to the working fluid inlet of the channel portion is included in
    this subclass.


CLS 415/55.5
TXT Having plural, rigidly related blade sets:

    Device under subclass 55.1 further comprising a second runner* blade* row
    which is fixedly or unitarily associated with the first blade row.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198.1+, for a nonreentry device having plural, rigidly related blade sets
    and see the search notes therewith.


CLS 415/55.6
TXT Acting serially but nonalternating (e.g., multistage, etc.):

    Device under subclass 55.5 wherein the working fluid* contacts the first
    and second blade* rows in sequence but wherein the working fluid* is not
    acted upon by the first blade row, then by the second blade row, and then
    again by the first blade row (i.e., alternating blade row contact).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199.1+, for a device having plural, serial, radial flow blade sets and an
    intermediate stationary flow diverter.


CLS 415/55.7
TXT In separate regenerative passages:

    Device under subclass 55.5 wherein the first and second blade rows pass
    through (regenerative) portions of different channels.

    (1)     Note.  The different channels may be interconnected at certain
    locations such as at a common working fluid* exit or entrance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55.6,   for a regenerative turbine pump* having serially acting, plural,
    rigidly related blade sets within separate regenerative passages.


CLS 415/56.1
TXT Pump priming means:

    Device under subclass 52.1 comprising means for directing a portion of
    liquid working fluid* to the first runner* blade* or row of blades, which
    liquid portion has previously been acted upon by the blade or row of blades
    (i.e., pump* devices).  The means acts to displace gaseous fluid (e.g.,
    air, etc.,) in the device replacing it with liquid working fluid (e.g.,
    water, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  The means usually functions exclusively during the startup
    of the device in order to facilitate reaching steady state operation.


CLS 415/56.2
TXT Vertical runner shaft:

    Device under subclass 56.1 comprising an axis about which the runner blade*
    or blade row rotates, which axis is generally parallel to the force of
    gravity acting on the working fluid.


CLS 415/56.3
TXT Having plural and arcuately arranged vanes around runner:

    Device under subclass 56.1 comprising  two or more vanes* or other working
    fluid* directing means positioned about and radially outward of the runner*.


CLS 415/56.4
TXT Reentry through working fluid discharge passage for runner:

    Device under subclass 56.1 comprising a conduit through which the (reentry)
    working fluid* portion is directed to the runner* blade* or blade row,
    which conduit also serves to guide the working fluid away from the runner
    blade or blade row.

    (1)     Note.  The conduit usually directs the working fluid reentry
    portion to the runner blade or blade row during pump* startup (priming) and
    directs working fluid away from the runner after priming has been completed.


CLS 415/56.5
TXT Reentry working fluid joins inlet working fluid upstream of runner:

    Device under subclass 56.1 wherein the means directs the (reentry) working
    fluid* portion to a location where working fluid flowing to the runner* has
    not yet been acted upon by the runner (i.e., upstream of the runner and
    prior to initial entry to the runner), at which location the (reentry)
    working fluid portion is merged with the working fluid flowing to the
    runner.


CLS 415/56.6
TXT Walled pumping chamber within liquid separation chamber:

    Device under subclass 56.1 wherein the means comprises one area in which
    the pump* runner* is located and a second area radially outward of and
    radially enclosing the one area.  The two areas are set apart by one or
    more casing* partitions or walls.  The second area comprises means to
    remove or separate gas from the liquid working fluid* discharged from the
    runner and means to return the discharged liquid working fluid to the
    blade* or blade row.


CLS 415/57.1
TXT Plural, independent, serially acting reentry means:

    Device under subclass 52.1 having two or more such (reentry) means each
    separately directing working fluid* which has previously contacted the
    first runner* blade* or blade row back to the blade or blade row.  The two
    or more means act in sequence (i.e., one after the other) on the working
    fluid flowing through the device.


CLS 415/57.2
TXT Having additional blade set in reentry path:

    Device under subclass 57.1 comprising a second blade* row which contacts
    the working fluid* after the first blade or blade row but before one of the
    reentry means has directed the working fluid back to the first blade or
    blade row.


CLS 415/57.3
TXT Reentry from opposite sides of blade face:

    Device under subclass 57.1 wherein two of the (reentry) means direct the
    working fluid* back to the first blade or blade row from separate locations
    which locations substantially confront (oppose) each other across the blade
    or the blade row.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54.1,   for a device comprising means for directing (reentry) working fluid
    to a face of the blade or blade row opposite that face which was first
    contacted by the working fluid.


CLS 415/57.4
TXT Reentry into blade in radial plane of blade:

    Device under subclass 57.1 wherein one of the (reentry) means directs the
    working fluid* into the blade* or blade row along a direction generally
    contained in a plane perpendicular to the runner's* axis of rotation which
    plane passes through the blade or blade row.

    (1)     Note.  The (reentry) flow directed back to the blade or blade row
    can be in any direction prior to being directed into the blade or blade row.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57.3,   for a device having plural, independent, serially acting means for
    the reentry of working fluid to a blade or blade row wherein reentry is
    from opposite sides of a blade face; such working fluid reentry may be in a
    radial plane which passes through the blade or blade row.


CLS 415/58.1
TXT Having additional blade set in reentry path:

    Device under subclass 52.1 comprising a second blade* row which contacts
    the working fluid* after the first blade or blade row but before the
    (reentry) means has directed the working fluid back to the first blade or
    blade row.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57.2,   for a device having plural, independent, serially acting reentry
    means one of which directs the working fluid through an additional blade
    set after the working fluid has contacted the first blade set but prior to
    the working fluid being returned to the first blade set.


CLS 415/58.2
TXT Radial flow runner portion guides reentry working fluid (e.g., hub, back
    plate, etc.):

    Device under subclass 52.1 wherein the working fluid* flows through the
    runner* in a direction predominantly inwardly toward or outwardly from the
    runner's axis of rotation.  The runner comprises a structure which assists
    in directing the working fluid which has previously contacted the blade* or
    blade row back to the blade or blade row.

    (1)     Note.  The structure which assists in directing the working fluid
    back to the blade or blade row may comprise a hub, back plate, shroud,
    etc., of the runner.

    (2)     Note.  A circumferential or transverse (i.e., cross) flow runner is
    not considered to be a radial flow runner for the purposes of this and
    indented subclasses.


CLS 415/58.3
TXT Runner inlet shroud:

    Device under subclass 58.2 wherein the runner* structure which assists in
    directing the working fluid* back to the blade* or blade row comprises a
    ring shaped rim member (shroud) centered about the runner's axis of
    rotation and located at a working fluid entrance to the runner.

    (1)     Note.  The rim member (shroud) is usually carried on or supported
    by a blade or blade row of the runner.


CLS 415/58.4
TXT Reentry working fluid joins inlet working fluid upstream of runner:

    Device under subclass 52.1 wherein the means directs the (reentry) working
    fluid* portion to a location where working fluid flowing to the runner* has
    not yet been acted upon by the runner (i.e., upstream of the runner and
    prior to initial entry to the runner), at which location the (reentry)
    working fluid portion is merged with the working fluid flowing to the
    runner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56.5,   for a pump device having priming means wherein reentry working
    fluid joins inlet working fluid upstream of the runner.


CLS 415/58.5
TXT Axial flow runner:

    Device under subclass 58.4 wherein the working fluid* flow to, through, and
    from the runner is predominantly parallel to the runner's axis of rotation.


CLS 415/58.6
TXT Open recirculation from and to blade set:

    Device under subclass 52.1 wherein the (reentry) means directs the working
    fluid* from and back to the blade* or blade row along a circulatory path
    which lies entirely within an unconfined and unobstructed (i.e., open,
    nonpassageway) area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53.1+,  for a cross flow runner incorporating a fluid vortex which directs
    working fluid to and from a blade set in open recirculation.

    55.1+,  for a turbine regenerative pump which has open recirculation of
    working fluid from and back to a blade set.

    57.1+,  for a device having plural, serially acting, and open recirculation
    means for the reentry of working fluid from and back to a blade or blade
    set.

    225,    for a device having an exit chamber axially offset from a runner
    which device may disclose structure which involves some open recirculation
    of working fluid from and back to a blade set.


CLS 415/58.7
TXT Axial flow runner:

    Device under subclass 52.1 wherein the working fluid* flow to, through, and
    from the runner* is predominantly parallel to the runner's axis of rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58.5,   for a device having an axial flow runner wherein reentry working
    fluid joins inlet working fluid upstream of the runner.


CLS 415/59.1
TXT Plural blade sets:

    Device under subclass 52.1 comprising two or more blade* rows.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55.5+,  for a turbine regenerative pump having plural, rigidly related
    blade sets.

    57.2,   for a device having plural, independent, serially acting working
    fluid reentry means for a blade or blade set and an additional blade set in
    one of the reentry paths.

    58.1,   for a device having working fluid* reentry means to a blade or
    blade set and an additional blade set in the reentry path.


CLS 415/60
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising at least two runners*, each
    capable of movement relative to the other on the same supporting member, or
    each fixed to its own supporting member and moving independently of the
    other.

    (1)     Note.  Included under this definition is a device comprising a
    plurality of runners*, any of which may be selectively and alternately
    connected to the shaft* at any one time, the other or others being held
    against rotation, thus in effect comprising a casing* or stator* assembly,
    or a pump* comprising a plurality of impellers, any of which can be
    selectively fixed to the shaft* for rotation therewith or left to free
    wheel on the shaft*, to vary the output and or discharge pressure.  For
    such a device as described above, see subclass 61.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for apparatus which may have a plurality of runners* and means to
    selectively connect and disconnect a runner* and its supporting shaft*.


CLS 415/61
TXT Apparatus under subclass 60 comprising an arrangement by which less than
    all the runners may at will be (1) contacted by the working fluid* or (2)
    drivingly associated with the input or output shaft.

    (1)     Note.  Typically the arrangement may include a valve for directing
    the working fluid* to or from a runner*, a clutch mechanism to connect any
    runner* to or from a shaft*, or a brake mechanism to frictionally engage
    and prevent the motion of any runner.

    (2)     Note.  Included under this definition is a pumping arrangement
    wherein the runners* may selectively be changed between a series and
    parallel system.


CLS 415/62
TXT Apparatus under subclass 60 comprising at least two distinct and different
    types of runners*, arrangements of blades* or directions of the working
    fluid* flow paths across the runner*.

    (1)     Note.  The different arrangements of blades may be on a single
    runner; for example there may be a radial flow blade system and an axial
    flow blade stream, both systems fixed to and rotating on a single runner
    disc or hub.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of different types of runners are: reaction,
    impulse, radial flow, axial flow, spiral or friction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     for a runner* in which there is an interior flow path for working
    fluid* extending to the periphery of the runner* and discharging through a
    stream modifying orifice to cause rotation due to reaction of the discharge
    and also having a set of blades* on which the fluid discharging from the
    orifice impinges.

    84,     for a runner* having radial flow along plural concentric annular
    blade* series or rows and a peripheral blade* row of the axial flow type.

    143,    for a device having a plurality of separate and distinct runners*,
    in which the working fluid flows in or along one runner* in a path
    distinctly different type than it follows in at least one other runner*.


CLS 415/63
TXT Apparatus under subclass 62 comprising at least one runner* having a
    interior flow path for working fluid* extending to the periphery of the
    runner* and discharging through a stream modifying orifice to cause
    rotation of the runner in a direction opposite, and as a result of the
    reaction to, the fluid discharge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for a reaction-type runner with a centrifugally, automatically or
    torgue actuated valve member for the fluid conduit.

    80+,    for reaction-type runners*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 251+ for a
    reaction-type device for sprinkling, spraying or diffusing the discharged
    fluid into the ambient atmosphere.


CLS 415/64
TXT Apparatus under subclass 60 in which the working fluid flow path is
    generally radial and contacts a plurality of annular blade* rows on said
    runners*, the rows having a common center, each annular blade* row having a
    radius different from the next adjacent annular blade* row.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83+,    for a single runner* having annular blade* rows on a common radial
    plane.


CLS 415/65
TXT Apparatus under subclass 60 in which the working fluid* flows along a path
    that is generally axial and contacts a plurality of blade* rows on said
    runners*, the rows having a common axis, the blades* of adjacent rows
    extending in opposite directions from their supports, the blades* of one
    row extending inwardly and the blades* of another row extending outwardly,
    at least one row of blades* extending into the spaces between the blades*
    of the two next adjacent rows extending in the opposite direction.


CLS 415/66
TXT Apparatus under subclass 60 in which the runners* are spaced in the path of
    the working fluid* and each succeeding runner* is acted upon by the fluid
    which has left the runner* next upstream thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for plural runners* supported for relative motion or on separate
    shafts*, with working fluid* passing serially from one to the other, the
    flow being radial through concentric, radially spaced blade rows.

    65,     for plural runners* supported on separate shafts* or for relative
    motion, the blades* being interdigitated, oppositely extending, coaxially
    and axially spaced, the working fluid* following an axial path.


CLS 415/67
TXT Apparatus under subclass 66 in which each runner* has applied thereto a
    working fluid* stream which has not acted on any other runner* these fluid
    streams then acting on the next runner in any, in the flow path.


CLS 415/68
TXT Apparatus under subclass 66 in which the runners* rotate about the same
    axis.


CLS 415/69
TXT Apparatus under subclass 68 in which one runner supporting member encircles
    or passes completely around another supporting member.


CLS 415/70
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a runner* (1) which moves
    around an axis while the axis is continuously moving its position relative
    to a fixed support, (2) whose transverse face is oblique or not
    perpendicular to the axis of the shaft* or (3) which rotates around its
    axis while continuously rotating around another fixed axis.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of such motion are planetary or nutating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 5+ for gyroscopes as
    defined in (1) Note therein.


CLS 415/71
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising (1) a blade* coiling around
    a runner* or (2) a working fluid* conduit in the peripheral wall or
    interior of a runner*, coiling around or through the runner*, the blade* or
    conduit, while coiling, approaching or receding from the runner* axis or
    advancing axially of the runner*, and passing at least once completely
    around the runner*.

    (1)     Note.  Under this definition the conduit must completely limit the
    peripheral extent of the working fluid*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for a device having a liquid conduit of spiral form and mounted in
    or on a runner* for sequential dipping into a fluid source, elevating the
    fluid to a higher level while retaining the fluid in the conduit and then
    discharging the fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 657+, 724, 756+, and 778 for a
    spiral conveyor in a loose casing so that no pressure increase is attained
    in moving fluent material.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclasses 176+ for the
    subcombination of the spiral blade* on a rotating shaft* where no means are
    provided (e.g., flange) for retaining material on the blade*.


CLS 415/72
TXT Apparatus under subclass 71 in which the blade* or conduit coils around the
    runner* axis while advancing in a direction axially of the runner*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168.3,  for a device including means for handling working fluid* leakage
    through a seal between a runner* or shaft* and a static part which means
    comprises a screw-type pumping seal.


CLS 415/73
TXT Apparatus under subclass 72 comprising a working fluid* conduit.


CLS 415/74
TXT Apparatus under subclass 72 comprising a surface, in addition to the coiled
    blade* or conduit, for impingement of the working fluid* thereon.

    (1)     Note.  The surface may be an integral part of the blade* or may be
    fixed to the casing*.


CLS 415/75
TXT Apparatus under subclass 72 comprising a motor runner* around which the
    blade coils.


CLS 415/76
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a runner* having a
    plurality of spaced surfaces, the working fluid* passing through the spaces
    and the surfaces being in the form of sinusoids or comprising alternate
    ridges and grooves.

    (1)     Note.  In order to qualify under this definition, the working
    fluid* must travel a tortuous path through or against the runner*.  A
    runner* made of a complementary corrugated or sinuous surfaces which,
    however, permits the working fluid* to pass therethrough in a path which is
    not tortuous, corrugated or sinuous is excluded under this definition.


CLS 415/77
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a runner* on which blades*
    are mounted and project in rows radially inwardly and outwardly from both
    circular peripheries of a ring member, the direction of projection of the
    blades* being along a radial plane passing between the member and the axis
    of a member supporting the ring member, the blades* being arranged for
    passage of working fluid* in a direction generally parallel to the axis of
    the support member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60+,    for a similar runner* in combination with another runner* of the
    same or different type and moving independently on the same or another
    shaft*.

    87,     for a runner* having a plurality of concentric annular series of
    blades* projecting axially from both sides of the runner* face which is
    transverse to the axis of a runner* supporting shaft*, working fluid* flow
    being generally in a radial direction along the face.


CLS 415/78
TXT Apparatus under subclass 77 comprising a means to chose at will the single
    row of inwardly or outwardly extending blades* for traverse of the working
    fluid*.

    (1)     Note.  Typically, included herein are turbines, the rotation of
    which is reversed by sending the working fluid* through one or another of
    concentric blade* rows.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for plural runners* supported for relative motion or on separate
    shafts* with means for selecting the runner* to which working fluid* is
    passed.


CLS 415/79
TXT Apparatus under subclass 77 comprising and arrangement on which the working
    fluid*, after passing axially though the blades* on one of said peripheries
    is passed to the blades* on the other of said peripheries for axial flow
    therethrough.


CLS 415/80
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a runner* having an
    interior flow path for working fluid* extending to the periphery of the
    runner* and discharging through a stream modifying orifice to cause
    rotation of the runner* in a direction opposite and as a result of the
    reaction to, the fluid discharge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for a similar reaction jet discharge runner* with means to control
    flow of working fluid* through the internal working fluid passage by
    automatic, centrifugally actuated or torque responsive, means.

    63,     for a similar runner* with another runner* of the same or different
    type moving independently on the same or a different shaft*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 251+ for
    similar-type reaction devices for sprinkling, spraying or diffusing the
    discharged fluid into the ambient atmosphere, unless reversing is diclosed
    and see section IV, Class 239 for further statement of the line.


CLS 415/81
TXT Apparatus under subclass 80 comprising a set of blades* mounted on the
    runner* and acted upon by the fluid discharging from the orifice.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     for apparatus comprising a reaction- type runner* and a set of
    fluid impingement blades* in an arrangement which includes a plurality of
    runners* mounted for movement relative to each other or on separate shafts*
    for movement independent of each other.


CLS 415/82
TXT Apparatus under subclass 80 including a means to vary selectively the
    direction, or rate of movement of the runner*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for a similar runner* and a centrifugally automatically or torque
    actuated, member for the control of the working fluid* and therefore the
    rate of movement of the runner*.


CLS 415/83
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a runner* having thereon a
    plurality of series or rows of blades* or passages, the plurality all lying
    on a common plane transverse to the runner* axis and having a common center
    and each series or row being on a radius different from the next adjacent
    series.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for a similar runner* in combination with another runner* of the
    same or different type and moving independently on the same or another
    shaft*.

    77+,    for a runner* having a plurality of concentric annular series of
    blades*, the working fluid* flowing along the blades* in a direction
    parallel to the axis of the support member, the blades* extending radially
    inward and outward from a common ring member.


CLS 415/84
TXT Apparatus under subclass 83 comprising a series of blades* on the
    peripheral edge of the runner*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for plural runners* supported for relative motion or on different
    shafts* in which there maybe a radial flow blade* system and an axial flow
    peripheral blade* system.


CLS 415/85
TXT Apparatus under subclass 83 having a means by which the direction or
    rotation of the runner* may be changed.


CLS 415/86
TXT Apparatus under subclass 83 comprising blades* projecting axially from the
    radial side wall extending inward of the peripheral rim of more than one
    runner* or from more than one side wall of a single runner inward from its
    peripheral rim.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     64 and 65, for plural runners* mounted for independent or relative
    motion and having similarly extending blades*, with or without the blades*
    of one runner* interleaving with those of another.


CLS 415/87
TXT Apparatus under subclass 86 in which the blades* extend axially from both
    sides of a common wall.


CLS 415/88
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a driven revolving runner*
    of tubular construction and having an open end which may be of funnel
    shape, submerged below the surface of a body of liquid.


CLS 415/89
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a driven rotating runner*
    comprising a hollow rotating fluid receptacle (e.g. drum, cylinder) having
    an inlet port or passage at or near its axis of rotation and an outlet port
    in its peripheral wall, the rotary motion of said receptacle causing the
    fluid to be inducted through the inlet port or passage into the interior of
    the receptacle and to leave said receptacle through the outlet port.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    494,    Imperforate Bowl:  Centrifugal Separators, appropriate subclasses,
    for apparatus and process for breaking up a mixture of fluids or fluent
    substances into two or more components by centrifuging within a generally
    solid-walled, receptacle-like member.


CLS 415/90
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a runner* wall having an
    even, substantially uninterrupted or bladeless* surface over which the
    working fluid* flows, the friction of the contact layer between the runner*
    and the fluid being the only cause of motion of the runner* or of the fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 643, for an endless belt or
    chain-like member adapted to lift a viscous fluid from a body thereof as a
    result of the property of the fluid to adhere to the member.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclass 4 or a rotary
    skin friction-type rotor having a smooth substantially uninterrupted skin
    surface which contacts fluid such that reaction between the rotor and the
    fluid occurs solely as a result of friction, in the absence of a claimed
    casing* or other fluid distributing means*.


CLS 415/91
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a runner* of annular form,
    having a blade* on the inner periphery of the annulus and extending
    inwardly radially.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are arrangements wherein the runner*
    surrounds the casing*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for a pump* runner* having a rotating inlet end immersed in the
    fluid to be pumped and which may comprise a rotating annulus with inwardly
    radially extending blade*.

    89,     for a centrifugal bowl pump comprising a rotating runner* bowl like
    form with inwardly radially extending blade*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclass 195 for a
    runner member comprising a peripheral rim connecting working members.


CLS 415/92
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which a runner* is caused to rotate
    by action of working fluid* thereon comprising a cavity or chamber in the
    runner* fully closed or bounded by walls (runner* or casing*) and trapping
    working fluid* delivered thereto until the pocket registers with an exhaust
    conduit to discharge the working fluid* therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 39.44 for a turbine of this type included in
    a power plant there classified.


CLS 415/93
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising an arrangement whereby the
    working fluid* enters or leaves the runner* member or members in a
    plurality of axially directed paths, at least two of such paths being
    towards each other or away from each other, in order that the force of
    fluid acting in an axial direction on the runner* be balanced or
    neutralized, at least in part, by the force of fluid acting in the opposite
    axial direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77+,    for devices in which the working fluid* travels axially along one
    set of blades* attached to a peripheral wall and may then return in the
    opposite direction along blades* attached to the opposite side of the same
    peripheral wall.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclass 199 for a fluid
    reaction surface (e.g., Impeller or runner) which comprises multiple
    axially spaced working members or blades and a radially extending plate or
    deflector which causes the working fluid to enter or leave the working
    members in axially opposed paths.


CLS 415/94
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93 comprising a means whereby the amount or
    direction of the working fluid* may be selectively changed or adjusted.


CLS 415/95
TXT Apparatus under subclass 94 in which the apparatus is a motor*.


CLS 415/96
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93 comprising an additional member connected to
    and moving with the runner* support, which member includes an area exposed
    and subjected to the force imposed by a fluid and acting to balance or
    neutralize, at least in part, the axial thrust transmitted to the runner*
    support by the force of the working fluid* acting on a runner*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104+,   for devices having shaft* connected surfaces subject to a fluid
    force to balance or neutralize end thrust, these devices not having axially
    opposed fluid paths to or from a runner* member or members.


CLS 415/97
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93 in which the runner* member is moved by a force
    and acts to increase the velocity, head or pressure of a fluid on which the
    runner* acts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for a pump* runner* in which the working fluid* enters radially and
    discharges axially.


CLS 415/98
TXT Apparatus under subclass 97 in which the runner* member comprises a
    substantially transverse radially extending wall encircling the shaft* and
    having one each side thereof a plurality of blades* which project in
    opposed directions along the axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77+,    for a runner* comprising an axially extending circular wall
    encircling the runner*, shaft*, said wall having runner* blades* extending
    radially from each side thereof.


CLS 415/99
TXT Apparatus under subclass 97 comprising two or more runner* members secured
    to a driven shaft*, each member in a separate radial plane through the
    shaft*.


CLS 415/100
TXT Apparatus under subclass 99 in which the fluid is directed in succession
    through two or more runner* members.


CLS 415/101
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93 in which the fluid is divided into at least two
    separate and distinct streams, each of which moves along and acts on the
    runner* member or members at the same time as the other.


CLS 415/102
TXT Apparatus under subclass 101 in which the fluid streams flow in axial paths
    that are directed towards each other and a single discharge opening, the
    streams combining in the discharge.


CLS 415/103
TXT Apparatus under subclass 101 in which each fluid stream traverses or
    impinges a plurality of blades* spaces in a direction along the axis.


CLS 415/104
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a member whose area is
    exposed and subjected to a fluid* force and so associated with a runner*
    support that the said force tends to balance and neutralize, at least
    partly, the axis thrust developed by the working fluid* on the supported
    runner*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     for similar devices having similar balancing surfaces acted upon by
    a fluid however, also having axially opposed fluid* paths to or from the
    runner* means, the fluid* paths also acting to counterbalance end thrust.


CLS 415/105
TXT Apparatus under subclass 104 in which the member is positioned in a chamber
    into which a fluid, separate and apart from that used as the working
    fluid*, is admitted.


CLS 415/106
TXT Apparatus under subclass 104 in which there is a fluid force acting in an
    axial direction on one side of a member, a blade* being supported on the
    other side of the member.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter under this definition typically includes
    radial flow-type runners* in which there are passages to communicate fluid
    to the rear side of the transverse blade* support disc to balance axial
    thrust acting on the front side of the disc.

    (2)     Note.  Excluded under this definition is a runner* having a blade*
    on each side of a common wall or shroud plate, for which search subclass
    198.1, unless a port transfers fluid from one side of the wall or plate to
    the other.

    (3)     Note.  To qualify under this definition, there must be provided
    means for conveying the fluid to the rear side of the runner*, e.g., a port
    conduit or axially moving runner*; the mere presence of leakage fluid on
    the rear side of the runner*, even though disclosed for thrust balancing,
    is excluded under this definition.


CLS 415/107
TXT Apparatus under subclass 104 in which the runner* support is that in a
    fluid motor*.


CLS 415/108
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a casing* and a shell or
    cover, the latter surrounding and spaced from the casing*, the working
    fluid* having access to the space between the casing* and shell.

    (1)     Note.  Typically the space between the casing* and shell permits
    thermal expansion of parts of the apparatus or heat exchange between the
    working fluid* in the space and parts of the apparatus.


CLS 415/109
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a chamber into which the
    shaft* entends and which is substantially sealed around the shaft* and
    which contains a fluid acting to prevent leakage of fluid along the shaft*,
    there being an abutment surface connected to and rotating with the shaft*
    and serving to maintain the sealing fluid in the chamber in motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process (e.g., seal between a runner* and another relatively movable part,
    seal between the two relatively moving members, does not recite enough
    details of the rotary kinetic device, etc.), subclasses 427+ for a dynamic
    close proximity seal (e.g., contactless, fluent, etc.) having an impeller
    or another rotating member to form a centrifugal liquid barrier.


CLS 415/110
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a fluid path between the
    normal working fluid* path and the interior part of an assembly which is
    positioned between two relatively moving apparatus parts (e.g., casing*,
    shaft*) the assembly service to (1) reduce or prevent unwanted working
    fluid* leakage between the parts, or (2) reduce the friction between the
    parts.

    (1)     Note.  If the fluid path originates outside of the system or with a
    nonsystem fluid, it must discharge into the working fluid* path; if the
    working fluid* is the source for the seal, packing, lubricating or bearing
    assembly, it may then discharge outside of the system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142,    170.1+ and 229+, for other types of bearing or seals but not having
    a connection with the working fluid* path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 5+ for runners supported
    in bearings for gyroscopic action and for a statement of the line see
    reference to Class 74 in section IV of the Main Class Definition of Class
    415.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process (e.g., seal between a runner* and another relatively movable part,
    seal between the two relatively moving members, does not recite enough
    details of the rotary kinetic device, etc.), subclasses 345+ for a seal
    between relatively movable parts (i.e., a dynamic seal).


CLS 415/111
TXT Apparatus under subclass 110 in which the assembly is positioned between
    the runner* support member (shaft*) and a relatively fixed member.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded under this definition is a conduit merely returning
    fluid which has leaked past a seal, bearing or packing to the working
    fluid*; such devices will be found in subclasses 168.1+ and 169.1+.


CLS 415/112
TXT Apparatus under subclass 111 in which the assembly is provided with two
    openings, one providing for ingress and the other for egress of the fluid.


CLS 415/113
TXT Apparatus under subclass 111 in which the assembly is provided with a part
    which is (1) acted upon and movable towards an extreme position by the
    force exerted by a fluid, (2) supported for movement to any of a plurality
    of selected positions, or (3) made of a yielding material which can regain
    its original shape after being deformed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132,    for a movable bearing on which an end of the shaft* is supported
    and which serves to axially adjust the shaft*.


CLS 415/114
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means for transferring heat
    to or from an apparatus part which means includes a container for a medium
    which is capable of changing its physical state from or to solid, liquid or
    gas and in so changing transfers heat between itself and the apparatus part.


CLS 415/115
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a fluid connection between
    the working fluid* path and a fluid conducting path in a runner* blade*, a
    stator vane*, the runner* support (shaft*) or a member turning in the
    working fluid* path and discharging fluid across substantially the entire
    area of the working fluid* path.

    (1)     Note.  The fluid* path in the blade*, vane*, shaft* or rotary
    member may be connected to a source of nonsystem fluid for passage into the
    working fluid* path.

    (2)     Note.  The fluid circuit may be for any purpose; included are
    devices for boundary layer control or for heating or cooling a runner*
    blade* or stator vane*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    for a device comprising a diversely oriented inlet or an additional
    inlet for diverse fluid, which may be for cooling fluid.

    180,    for a device in which cooling fluid contacts the exerior of a
    shaft*, seal or bearing.

    914,    for a device including means to control a working fluid boundary
    layer.


CLS 415/116
TXT Apparatus under the class definition provided with (1) means to admit a
    fluid differing from the working fluid* in some essential characteristic
    (e.g., temperature, pressure, composition), or (2) at least two inlet means
    admitting the same working fluid* into the apparatus, one inlet means
    different from the other in some essential characteristic, (e.g., size,
    attitude or position relative to a fixed point or axis).

    (1)     Note.  In order to qualify under this definition, the diverse
    inlets or the diverse fluid must enter the apparatus upstream of all
    disclosed runner* stages.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    for means including a passage in a runner* blade, stator, vane*,
    shaft* or rotary distributor for adding either working fluid* or a diverse
    fluid to the working fluid*.

    144+,   for a device in which one of a plurality of diverse fluid is caused
    to enter downstream of the initial runner* stage.


CLS 415/117
TXT Apparatus under subclass 116 comprising a motor* to which a plurality of
    diverse fluids are admitted upstream of all the disclosed runner* stages.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180,    for a device in which a diverse fluid cools the shaft*, seal or
    bearing by contact and in which the diverse fluid does not impinge on any
    of the runner* stages.


CLS 415/118
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means other than fixed
    exhibitors (e.g., signs) which determine, or give information about, a
    condition or characteristic of the apparatus, or permit viewing of a
    condition or extent of motion of the apparatus or a part thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 861.79+ for the subcombination of
    a rotary motor directly connected to a registering or indicating means and
    see section IV, the reference to Class 73 for a statement of the line.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclasses, for a mechanical
    device for giving a signal of the nature of either an alarm or an indicator.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, appropriate subclasses, for an
    electrical signal, per se.


CLS 415/119
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means or a disposition of
    parts to eliminate, reduce or prevent the formation or transmission of
    sonic or oscillatory waves from the apparatus to the environment or between
    parts of the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of such means are: sound traps, nozzle shapes,
    absorbent material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, appropriate subclasses, for a fluid motor* combined
    with means treating or handling the exhaust fluid for absorbing or damping
    sound or vibratory waves, see section IV, Class 60, Power Plants, (8).

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 200+ for the sound muffler or sound filter
    subcombination, per se.


CLS 415/120
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a pump* in which the
    working fluid* initially enters the casing* at the periphery and is
    discharged through a central opening in an axial direction, the runner*
    forcing the working fluid towards the center of the axis of rotation.

    (1)     Note.  In order for a multistage pump* to be included under this
    definition the working fluid* must, in at least one stage, enter the
    periphery of the runner* and leave at or near the center.


CLS 415/121.1
TXT WITH CUTTER OR COMMINUTOR FOR DEBRIS IN WORKING FLUID:

    Device under the class definition comprising means to chop, sever, grind,
    or otherwise pulverize or reduce in size, elements carried along by the
    working fluid*.

    (1)     Note.  The means usually acts on the elements to avert jamming of
    the device by the elements.

    (2)     Note.  The means may include part of a runner* or runner blade*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses, for a rotary pump* with comminuting structure which is separate
    and distinct from the pump runner and the surrounding casing*, such as
    subclass 46.012, for a comminutor in a dishwasher pump, or subclass 185.6,
    for a rotary striking member type comminutor with a pump.  Refer to the
    Class 415 Definition line notes for further explanation of class lines.


CLS 415/121.2
TXT WITH SEPARATING MEANS OR GUARD FOR SOLID MATTER IN WORKING FLUID (E.G.,
    DEBRIS, ETC.):

    Device under the class definition comprising (a) means to divide out solid
    elements carried along by the working fluid* from the working fluid or (b)
    means to shield or protect part of the device from solid elements in or
    carried along by the working fluid.

    (1)     Note.  Elements carried along by the working fluid which are
    separated from the working fluid may include dust, sand, pieces of the
    device which have entered the working fluid as a result of structural
    failure, etc.

    (2)     Note.  A means which shields a part of the device from human hands
    is included in this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  A means which merely separates moisture or condensate from
    working fluid in the device is not included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for a device having a destructible, nonreuseable part which may
    cause debris to enter the working fluid and further having means to guard
    the device against such debris.

    169.1+, for a device including means for handling a portion separated from
    the working fluid, particularly subclasses 169.2+ wherein moisture or
    liquid is separated from a gaseous working fluid (e.g., condensate removal).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclass 247 for an
    impeller having a protective screen or guard.


CLS 415/121.3
TXT COMBINED:

    Device under the class definition comprising a runner* in combination with
    features not provided for above or in any other subclass, such features
    excluding means for the device's associated working fluid* distribution or
    control, casing* or housing structure, motion transmitting structure to or
    from the runner and its support shaft*, packing, bearing, or sealing
    assembly structure, and heat exchanging structure.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of combined features include:  an art device (other
    than a conducting means for the working fluid) serving as a support means
    or otherwise associated with the apparatus, a portable torge, a well packer
    or plug sealing the outside of a pump* casing to a surrounding conduit, etc.

    (2)     Note.  See the main class definition for lines between this and
    other classes in regard to certain combined features.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122.1+, for a device comprising specific shaft* transmission train, brake,
    clutch, or attendant actuated drive means.

    169.1+, for a device including means for handling a portion separated from
    the working fluid, particularly subclass 169.2 wherein moisture or liquid
    is separated from a gaseous working fluid (e.g., condensate removal, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 101, 118+,
    141, 142+, and 173 for the subcombination of a packer, an expanding anchor
    or a well screen.  For a more detailed statement of the line, see the class
    definition of Class 166, Wells, section IV.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclass 5 for
    illumination means combined with a runner where no confining or directing
    means for the fluid is claimed.


CLS 415/122.1
TXT INCLUDING SHAFT TRANSMISSION TRAIN, BRAKE, CLUTCH, OR ATTENDANT ACTUATED
    DRIVE MEANS:

    Device under the class definition comprising (a) means to transmit motion
    between a runner* or runner shaft* and a driven or driving shaft and
    including means for causing or permitting relative motion or speed between
    the runner or runner shaft and the driven or driving shaft, (b) means to
    retard, stop, or prevent movement of a runner or its shaft, (c) means to
    connect or disconnect a runner or runner shaft with a driven or driving
    shaft, or (d) means operated by a human or animal to cause movement of a
    runner.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded under this definition are means whereby the motion
    between the shafts is transmitted without the possibility of relative
    motion.  Thus a flanged coupling is not included, but a flexible cone, spit
    pulley, belt gearing, universal joint coupling, and other such similar
    couplings or trains are included.

    (2)     Note.  Excluded under this definition is a mere shiftable nozzle or
    pipe for discharging a working fluid* onto the runner.  To qualify under
    this definition, the means for braking must be in addition to the means
    discharging working fluid onto the runner.


CLS 415/123
TXT Apparatus under subclass 122.1 comprising means to (1) connect or
    disconnect the runner* supporting shaft* to a driven or driving shaft* or
    (2) retard, stop, or prevent movement of the runner* or its supporting
    shaft*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for clutch or brake devices which are controlled by means
    responsive to non-cyclic condition sensing, centrifugal actuation, or
    torque.

    61,     for plural runners* mounted for relative or independent movement
    and means, which may be a clutch means, for connecting a runner* to the
    shaft*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    477,    Interrelated Power Delivery Controls, Including Engine Control, for
    interrelated control between a motor* and a transmission, clutch, or brake.


CLS 415/124
TXT Apparatus under subclass 122.1 in which a human or an animal actuates (1)
    an arm bent or keyed at right angles to a shaft to impart motion thereto,
    (2) a treadle connected to and imparting motion to a shaft, or (3) a ground
    engaging rotating member connected to and imparting motion to a shaft, the
    shaft in all cases ultimately imparting motion to the runner* shaft*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for an endless flexible member such as a chain on which there is
    mounted a blade* or a surface which acts like a blade* to pump* fluid, the
    chain operated by a human or an animal.


CLS 415/124.1
TXT Runner supported portion engages shaft transmission train (e.g., peripheral
    gear drive, etc.):

    Device under subclass 122.1 comprising a means to transmit motion between a
    runner* and a driven or driving shaft which means causes or permits
    relative motion or speed between the runner and the shaft.  The means
    includes a motion transmitting element which is carried on the runner.

    (1)     Note.  A runner shaft is not considered to be a portion of the
    runner for purposes of this subclass.  Thus, a shaft transmission train
    which merely incorporates a motion transmitting gear which is carried on a
    shaft* which supports the runner for rotation is not included in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     for a device having an annular runner* with an inwardly projecting
    blade* which may include peripheral gear drive means.


CLS 415/124.2
TXT Shaft transmission train having flexible means or coupling:

    Device under subclass 122.1 comprising means to transmit motion between a
    runner* and a driven or driving shaft* which means causes or permits
    relative motion or speed between the runner and the shaft.  The means
    includes (a) a motion transmitting means which, by design, bends or
    otherwise exhibits nonrigid properties or (b) a driving connection between
    two motion transmitting elements of the means which allows nonrigid
    movement of the two elements relative to one another (i.e., a fixed
    movement of one element does not continuously correspond to a fixed
    movement of the other element).

    (1)     Note.  A device wherein the means to transmit motion comprises a
    motion transmitting shaft which is coupled to another motion transmitting
    shaft by a flexible joint (e.g., U-Joint) is included in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  A friction, fluid, or magnetic coupling which connects two
    motion transmitting elements nonrigidly is included in this subclass
    provided the coupling does not serve to connect and disconnect the two
    motion transmitting means.  The latter coupling type is a clutch (see
    subclass 123).

    (3)     Note.  A driving connection between two motion transmitting
    elements which permits nondrive related movement between the elements is
    included in this subclass (e.g., two intermeshing gears rotating about
    parallel axes which are permitted to move axially relative to each other
    without affecting the drive relationship).

    (4)     Note.  A motion transmitting means comprising two conventional
    gears in direct driving relationship is not included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123,    for a device having means to connect and disconnect the runner
    supporting shaft with the driven or driving shaft.


CLS 415/125
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having a means to impart regularly
    recurring movement to an element of the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141,    for a runner* blade* portion which is pivotally mounted for
    regularly occurring self-feathering motion.


CLS 415/126
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means for positively and at
    will holding the runner* enclosing housing, or a part thereof, in a
    selected one of a plurality of different positions in relation to a means
    on which the apparatus is sustained.

    (1)     Note.  The sustaining or supporting means for the apparatus need
    not be claimed for this and the indented subclasses, if it is clear from
    the disclosure that the adjustment is relative to such a sustaining means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for control means responsive to the position of a casing*, runner*
    or shaft*.


CLS 415/127
TXT Apparatus under subclass 126 in which the runner* enclosing housing may be
    moved about an axis conincident with the runner* axis in order to position
    the inlet or outlet in any of a plurality of different angular positions.


CLS 415/128
TXT Apparatus under subclass 126 in which the member moved is on the inner
    periphery of the hosuing, such member being in addition to the normal wall
    of which the housing is comprised.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196,    for a nonadjustable casing casing* liner.


CLS 415/129
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means for positively and at
    will holding the runner* or a blade* in a selected one of a plurality of
    different positions in relation to the runner* enclosing housing during
    operation.

    (1)     Note.  Included under this definition is means to axially move the
    shaft* on which a runner* is fixedly secured.


CLS 415/130
TXT Apparatus under subclass 129 comprising a plurality of runners*, or a
    plurality of blades* on a single runner*, each member of such plurality
    movable selectively to different positions around an axis with respect to
    the remaining members, and retained in any of the positions.


CLS 415/131
TXT Apparatus under subclass 129 in which the runner* or blade* is moved along
    the axis to its new position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for devices in which the shaft* or bearing is adjusted along the
    runner axis by automatic speed or torque responsive means.


CLS 415/132
TXT Apparatus under subclass 131 in which an end of the runner* support shaft*
    is supported on a member on which it turns or revolves and the member may
    be adjusted to move the shaft* axially.


CLS 415/133
TXT Apparatus under subclass 129 comprising means to move the runner* shaft*
    along a plane transverse to the axis.

    (1)     Note.  Typically, this subclass includes bearings supporting the
    shaft* with means to adjust the bearings radially, the bearings carrying
    the shaft* to the adjusted position.


CLS 415/134
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which two or more apparatus parts
    are joined by means which allow at least one of said parts at the location
    of the joint to move in a selected direction (i.e., expand or contract) as
    a result of temperature change without being twisted or bent from its
    normal shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     for devices having a housing spaced from the casing*, the space
    open to working fluid, the housing and casing usually being free to move
    relative to one another as a result of temperature changes.


CLS 415/135
TXT Apparatus under subclass 134 in which the means comprises a member which
    may be deformed and which thereafter tends to return to its normal shape
    and size when the deforming stress is removed.

    (1)     Note.  Most of the patents under this definition include a spring
    or similar elastic member backing up a part subject to thermal expansion so
    that such expansion is taken up by the spring.


CLS 415/136
TXT Apparatus under subclass 134 in which the selected direction is transverse
    to the axis of the runner* shaft*.


CLS 415/137
TXT Apparatus under subclass 136 comprising an inner annulus, an outer annulus
    of greater radius, with a vane* fixed to one annulus and extending radially
    to the other, there being a complementary opening provided in the other
    annulus, through which the end of the vane* moves on expansion or
    contraction due to temperature changes.


CLS 415/138
TXT Apparatus under subclass 136 in which movement may also occur in a
    direction parallel to the axis of the runner* shaft* or angularly around
    such axis.


CLS 415/139
TXT Apparatus under subclass 134 comprising a plurality of portions of fluid
    directing members, said portions extending angularly around and radially
    spaced from the axis of the runner* support member, said portions having
    their edges normally spaced from each other whereby dimensional changes due
    to temperature changes cause such edges to approach or retreat towards or
    away from each other along the periphery.


CLS 415/140
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising (1) a blade* or a portion
    thereof which is formed or mounted so as to move relative to its support or
    a fixed position, (2) the runner* or its shaft* mounted to move in a
    direction parallel to the axis of rotation from one position to another,
    while in use and without the intervention of a human attendant.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of devices included under this definition are:  one
    which is buoyed up by the working fluid* (usually water acting on a surface
    associated with a turbine) to reduce friction on the lower step bearing,
    one in which a portion of the blade* has a fluid operated valve thereon and
    one in which the blade* is regularly and cyclically self-feathering.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    for a device in which the runner* is mounted for slight axial
    movement to vary flow into and out of balancing chamber to neutralize end
    thrust on the shaft*.

    125,    for a device having means to impart regular and cyclical movement
    to a blade*.

    126+,   for devices in which there are means provided to positively
    selectively move or hold in a selected position the blade*, runner* of
    shaft*.

    129+,   for a device having means for positively and selectively moving a
    runner* or runner supporting shaft*.


CLS 415/141
TXT Apparatus under subclass 140 comprising a blade* having a resilient
    connection to its support or having a pivot intermediate its length or
    formed of resilient material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    for a device having means to impart regularly recurring movement to
    a blade* or a portion thereof.


CLS 415/142
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a runner* supporting shaft*
    within and spaced from a casing* and having a member in which the shaft*
    turns or revolves and is supported, there being legs or other supports
    extending between the member and the casing* wall.

    (1)     Note.  Some of the legs or other support members may act to guide
    or direct the fluid.


CLS 415/143
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising two or more separate and
    distinct runner* members, the working fluid* passing through one of the
    runners* in a path of a distinctly different type than the path it assumes
    in passing through another of said runners* (e.g., axial and centrifugal
    working fluid* paths).

    (1)     Note.  The separate and distinct runner* member must be removed as
    a recognizable runner* subassembly handled as a unit during assembly of the
    whole device, leaving the other runner* to function as usual.  A
    centrifugal impeller, for example, having blades* which are formed to
    provide for flow in another path, but which blades* cannot be removed
    unless destroyed, is excluded under this definition.

    (2)     Note.  Centrifugal and Centripetal flows are considered to be the
    same type of flow path under this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for an apparatus comprising plural runners* mounted for independent
    or relative movement and in which there are at least two distinctly
    different runners*, arrangements of blades* or directions of the working
    fluid* flow paths.


CLS 415/144
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a path for a portion of the
    working fluid* from the inlet upstream of the runner* through the
    apparatus, which path includes less than all of the blade* row on the
    runner* (i.e., less than all runner* stages).

    (1)     Note.  In order to qualify under this definition, there must be
    means specifically provided to cause the bypass a device having a path for
    working fluid* which has leaked past a joint and does not include all of
    the runner* stages is not classified in this group of subclasses, but will
    be found in subclass 168.1.

    (2)     Note.  Included under this definition is a device comprising a
    plurality of runner* stages and (1) a plurality of diverse working fluids*,
    one of which is caused to enter at an intermediate stage, or (2) a single
    working fluid*, at least a portion of which is discharged at an
    intermediate stage.

    (3)     Note.  Included under this definition is a pump* comprising a
    plurality of blade* sets, a separate portion of the working fluid*
    impinging on each set and discharging separately from the other portion and
    at a different pressure.

    (4)     Note.  Included under this definition is a device in which a
    portion of the working fluid* bypasses completely all of the runner* stages
    and is combined in the outlet conduit with the working fluid* which has
    impinged on the runner.

    (5)     Note.  Included under this definition is a device having a pressure
    relief valve in an intermediate stage for exit of working fluid*.

    (6)     Note.  Included under this definition is a device in which working
    fluid* in passing to a lower runner* stage, is caused to stratify and only
    one layer is passed to the lower runner* stage, or both layers act on a
    plurality of runner* stages in parallel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for plural runners* mounted for independent or relative movement
    and means to bypass at least one of the runners*.

    115,    for a device in which working fluid* is bypassed around at least
    one runner* blade row by means of a passage in a vane*, blade*, shaft* or
    rotary distributor.

    116+,   for a device in which a plurality of diverse fluids or a plurality
    of diverse inlets enter the apparatus upstream of all disclosed runner*
    stages.


CLS 415/145
TXT Apparatus under subclass 144 comprising a movable regulating or
    distributing means* for selecting the quantity of working fluid* in the
    path including less than all the blade* rows.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for a valve bypassing a runner* stage, the valve activated by an
    automatic control means.


CLS 415/146
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a member in the working
    fluid* flow conduit which member guides or regulated the flow of working
    fluid* and is movable from a first position towards a second position by a
    force caused by the flow of working fluid* acting against the member and is
    biased or otherwise urged towards it first position when the working fluid*
    stops flowing or the direction of its flow reverses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.1+,   for a device with means for controlling casing* or flow guiding
    means in response to natural fluid current force or direction (i.e., water
    or wind current).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 455+ for line condition responsive
    valves and particularly subclasses 511+ for other check type or return flow
    preventing valves.


CLS 415/147
TXT Apparatus under subclass 146 in which the member is followed by the runner*
    in the direction of fluid flow.


CLS 415/148
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a vane* or other control
    means which may be selectively moved to different positions to vary the
    direction or amount of working fluid* flow.

    (1)     Note.  This group of subclasses will accept a claim which must be
    classified in this class, even though the runner* is not recited.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for a device comprising a driven runner* immersed in a fluid and an
    adjustable vane* in an unconfined fluid stream for selectively guiding the
    working fluid*.

    53.3,   for a device having a cross flow runner* and further including
    selectively adjustable vane* or working fluid* control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 37+ for a fluid conduit
    having baffles or other means for changing the direction or rate of flow of
    fluid in the conduit.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, appropriate subclasses for fluid flow
    controlling valves, particularly subclasses 118+ for fluid handling devices
    with baffles or other material guide structure.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), apropriate subclasses,
    for a runner* and continuously moving vanes* or deflectors with no fixed
    means to direct or confine the working fluid*.


CLS 415/149.1
TXT Separate means upstream and downstream of blade set:

    Device under subclass 148 comprising two such vanes* or other control
    means, one such vane or other control means directing the working fluid*
    onto a row of runner* blades* and a second such vane or other control means
    receiving working fluid from the same row or a different row of runner
    blades.

    (1)     Note.  The two means need not be positioned adjacently upstream and
    downstream of one row of runner blades.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not include a device merely comprising a
    single vane, vane row, or other control means which (a) directs the working
    fluid onto a row of runner blades when the working fluid is flowing through
    the device in one direction and (b) receives the working fluid from the row
    of runner blades when the working fluid is flowing through the device in an
    opposite direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151+,   for a device having a selectively adjustable vane or working fluid
    control means located upstream of the runner.


CLS 415/149.2
TXT Including axial flow blade set:

    Device under subclass 149.1 wherein the working fluid* path to, through,
    and from one of the rows of runner blades is in a direction predominantly
    parallel to the runner's rotational axis.


CLS 415/149.3
TXT Means to reverse flow through blade set:

    Device under subclass 149.2 comprising means to alter the flow of working
    fluid* to, through, and from the one (axial flow) row of runner blades to
    be in either of opposite directions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    910,    for a device reversible between pump and motor use.


CLS 415/149.4
TXT Plural, selectively adjustable, alternating vane assemblies and axial blade
    rows (A, B, A, B):

    Device under subclass 149.2 comprising (a) at least two rows of such (axial
    flow) working member blades* which rows contact the working fluid*
    sequentially and (b) at least two rows of such (selectively adjustable)
    static partition members (vanes*).  The blade (A) and static partition
    member (B) rows are configured to contact the working fluid by turns ("A,
    B, A, B" or "B, A, B, A") as the working fluid passes through the device.

    (1)     Note.  The working member blade rows need not be claimed for
    inclusion in this subclass provided it is understood that the rows are
    present in the described configuration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199.5,  for plural, serial, axial flow blade sets with one or more
    nonselectively adjustable intermediate stationary flow diverters.


CLS 415/150
TXT Apparatus under subclass 148 in which the vane* or other means is moved by
    the runner*, the shaft* or a separate and independent source of power.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42+,    for a vane* or valve controlling the working fluid* and actuated by
    the runner*, a separate motor* or the shaft* and in response to a
    predetermined speed.

    125,    for a device in which an apparatus part is given a regularly
    recurring motion.


CLS 415/151
TXT Apparatus under subclass 148 in which the vane* or other means is
    positioned ahead of at least one blade* row of a runner* in relation to the
    direction of flow of working fluid*.

    (1)     Note.  The working fluid* may contact one or more blade* rows
    before it contacts the vane* or other means.


CLS 415/152.1
TXT Motor runner with selective inlet paths for reversible rotation:

    Device under subclass 151 wherein working fluid* adds energy to and rotates
    the runner* (i.e., "motor*" runner).  The vane* or other (control) means
    varies the route of working fluid flow to the runner to rotate the runner
    unidirectionally in one direction when the vane or other (control) means is
    in one position and to rotate the runner unidirectionally in an opposite
    direction when the vane or other (control) means is in another position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for a device having means controlling working fluid to one of a
    plurality of runners which are on separate shafts* or mounted for relative
    rotation.

    82,     for a motor runner device motivated by a reaction-type jet
    discharge nozzle from an internal working fluid conduit which has means for
    controlling the runner directions.

    85,     for a device having a runner with annular blade rows or fluid
    channels spaced on a common radial plane which has means for reversing the
    runner's rotation.

    167,    for a device with a movable working fluid pipe or nozzle which is
    capable of directing working fluid to a runner from various directions.

    910,    for a device reversible between pump and motor use which may have
    means for reversible rotation of the runner.

    911,    for a device comprising a reversible pump runner and separate
    outlets for opposing directions of rotation.


CLS 415/152.2
TXT Runner includes radial flow blade set:

    Device under subclass 152.1 comprising a runner* having a blade* row
    wherein the working fluid* flow path through the blade* row is
    predominantly inwardly toward or outwardly from the runner's axis of
    rotation.

    (1)     Note.  A circumferential flow blade row is not considered to be a
    radial flow blade row for the purposes of this subclass.


CLS 415/153.1
TXT Separate runner blade set acted upon for reverse rotation:

    Device under subclass 152.1 wherein the runner* comprises at least two
    blade* rows.  The (selectively adjustable) vane* or other (control) means,
    when in one position, directs the working fluid* to one of the blade rows
    to rotate the runner unidirectionally in one direction and, when in another
    position, directs the working fluid* to a second of the blade rows to
    rotate the runner unidirectionally in an opposite direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     for a device comprising a runner having blades extending radially
    inward from a common annulus with means for selecting only one blade row
    for working fluid flow, usually for reversing runner rotation.


CLS 415/153.2
TXT Axial flow blade set:

    Device under subclass 153.1 wherein the working fluid* flow path to,
    through, and from one of the runner* blade* rows is predominantly parallel
    to the runner's axis of rotation.


CLS 415/154.1
TXT Plural inlets simultaneously discharging working fluid onto single blade
    set:

    Device under subclass 152.1 wherein one of the working fluid* (selective
    inlet) paths to the runner* includes at least two apertures or nozzles
    through which the working fluid is directed concurrently onto a runner
    blade row.


CLS 415/154.2
TXT Axial flow blade set:

    Device under subclass 154.1 wherein the working fluid* flow path to,
    through, and from the working member blade* row is predominantly parallel
    to the runner's axis of rotation.


CLS 415/154.3
TXT Including axial flow blade set:

    Device under subclass 152.1 wherein the working fluid* flow path to,
    through, and from a working member blade* row of the runner* is
    predominantly parallel to the runner's axis of rotation.


CLS 415/155
TXT Apparatus under subclass 151 comprising two or more distinct and
    individually operable means, all of which are positioned upstream of the
    same blade* row.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded under this definition is a device having a
    plurality of adjustable vanes* or other working fluid* control means, which
    operate simultaneously, but each of which is so arranged as to yield
    independently of the others when obstructed.  The only devices included
    under this definition are those where each of a plurality of vanes* or
    other working fluid* control means is selectively adjusted independently of
    the others.


CLS 415/156
TXT Apparatus under subclass 151 in which the means (1) comprise at least in
    part a material which is capable of being altered in shape and of returning
    or being returned to its original shape (e.g., elastic) or (2) is held in
    working position by means capable of recovering its original shape or
    position after being distorted or moved (e.g., spring).


CLS 415/157
TXT Apparatus under subclass 151 in which the means comprises a member of
    cylindrical or disklike configuration, shiftable along or in the direction
    of the runner* axis.


CLS 415/158
TXT Apparatus under subclass 157 in which the member is capable of being
    shifted to a position encircling or surrounding the runner*.


CLS 415/159
TXT Apparatus under subclass 151 comprising two or more means angularly spaced
    aroung and equidistant from the runner axis.


CLS 415/160
TXT Apparatus under subclass 159 in which each means comprises a vane* mounted
    for movement around its axis.

    (1)     Note.  In order to qualify under this definition, there must be
    some directing or guiding of the working fluid*.  See definition of "vane"
    in section 1 of the Main Class Definition.


CLS 415/161
TXT Apparatus under subclass 160 comprising in addition, a vane* or other flow
    guiding member nonadjustably supported in the flow path.


CLS 415/162
TXT Apparatus under subclass 160 comprising two or more distinct sets of
    vanes*, all the vanes* in one set being simultaneously movable.

    (1)     Note.  A set of vanes* comprises at least two physically
    interrelated vanes*, usually in a single circular annulus and which
    together controls the working fluid* at a particular zone or area of the
    path.  See (1) Note in subclass 52 for definition of a blade set.

    (2)     Note.  Each set of vanes* may control working fluid* flow to a
    distinct set of runner* blades*, or all sets of vanes* may control flow to
    a single set of runner* blades*.


CLS 415/163
TXT Apparatus under subclass 160 in which the pivot axis of each vane* is
    parallel to the runner* axis.


CLS 415/164
TXT Apparatus under subclass 163 in which the vanes* lie in a plane which is
    normal to the runner* axis and passes through at least part of the runner*
    blade*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for speed responsive means for controlling the flow of working
    fluid* to a runner* blade* through a plurality of inlets which are located
    on the same radial plane as said blade*.


CLS 415/165
TXT Apparatus under subclass 159 in which the means lie in a plane which is
    normal to the runner* axis and passes through at least a portion of the
    runner* blade*.

    (1)     Note.  Included under this definition is a control means which is
    movable into and out of the same radial plane as the runner* blade*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for speed responsive means for controlling the flow of working
    fluid* to a runner* blade* through a plurality of inlets which are located
    on the same radial plane as said blade*.

    164,    for adjustable vanes* laying in the same radial plane as part of
    the blade*, each vane* having a pivot axis parallel to the runner* axis.


CLS 415/166
TXT Apparatus under subclass 165 in which the means are selectively rotatable
    about the runner* supporting axis.


CLS 415/167
TXT Apparatus under subclass 151 in which the means comprises a working fluid*
    conduit shiftable to a plurality of positions relative the the runner*, and
    having a modified or unmodified discharge outlet.

    (1)     Note.  The working fluid* conduit may be shiftable to positions
    wherein the working fluid* bypasses or reverses the direction of rotation
    of the runner*, or acts as a braking medium to slow the velocity of runner*
    rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123,    for a device in which an additional nozzle or other means discharge
    working fluid* onto a runner* associated member for retarding or slowing
    the runner*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 587.1+ for a
    nozzle or general utility adjustably or shiftably mounted relative to its
    support.


CLS 415/167.1
TXT Convertible series-parallel pump:

    Device under subclass 151 comprising two blade* rows which each add energy
    (i.e., "pump"* blade rows) to working fluid* and further comprising means
    to selectively configure the device to direct the working fluid from a
    device inlet to an outlet either (a) along one path proceeding through the
    two blade rows in sequence (i.e., in-series flow path) or (b) along
    separate paths, a proceeding alone different ones of the through only one
    of the blade rows (i.e., in-parallel flow paths).


CLS 415/168.1
TXT INCLUDING MEANS FOR HANDLING WORKING FLUID LEAKAGE:

    Device under the class definition comprising means to treat, dispose of, or
    otherwise deal with a portion of the working fluid* which has passed
    through a flow preventing or retarding joint between two distinct elements
    of the device.

    (1)     Note.  Lubricating or other fluid not originating in the working
    fluid is not considered to be working fluid leakage under this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52.1+,  for a device comprising reentry means for working fluid which has
    passed through a joint between two distinct elements of the device.

    110+,   for a device comprising a seal, packing, or bearing having an
    internal working fluid connection which carries off any leakage from the
    seal, packing, or bearing.

    115,    for a device comprising means to discharge leakage fluid into the
    working fluid path by means of a passage in a blade*, vane*, or shaft.

    170.1+, for a device having a seal between a runner portion and a static
    part.


CLS 415/168.2
TXT Leakage through seal between runner or shaft and static part:

    Device under subclass 168.1 wherein the working fluid* has passed through
    at least a portion of a structure which prevents or retards the flow of
    working fluid between a runner* or shaft* and a fixed element (i.e., seal).

    (1)     Note.  The structure may be integral with the runner, shaft, or
    fixed element.


CLS 415/168.3
TXT Screw type pumping seal:

    Device under subclass 168.2 wherein the (seal) structure comprises a
    helical groove located at the interface between the runner* or shaft* and
    the fixed element, which groove rotates relative to the runner or the fixed
    element to drive the working fluid* between the runner or shaft and the
    fixed element in a direction parallel to the runner's axis of rotation.

    (1)     Note.  The groove may be part of the runner or the fixed element.


CLS 415/168.4
TXT Means specific to axial flow runner:

    Device under subclass 168.2 wherein particular significance is attributed
    to the runner* being of the type having working fluid* flow to, through,
    and from the runner predominantly parallel to the runner's axis of rotation.


CLS 415/169.1
TXT INCLUDING MEANS FOR HANDLING PORTION SEPARATED FROM WORKING FLUID:

    Device under the class definition comprising means to treat, dispose of, or
    otherwise deal with a part of the working fluid* which has been removed
    (i.e., separated) from the working fluid.

    (1)     Note.  The "part of the working fluid which has been removed from
    the working fluid" may comprise condensate, moisture, nonsolid particles
    suspended in the working fluid, a small quantity of the working fluid, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52.1+,  for a device comprising means for directing a portion of working
    fluid back to a blade set previously contacted by the working fluid,
    particularly subclasses 56.1+ wherein the means is used to discharge air
    and prime a pump.

    110+,   for a device comprising a seal, packing, or bearing having an
    internal working fluid connection which carries off any leakage from the
    seal, packing, or bearing.

    115,    for a device comprising means to discharge leakage fluid into the
    working fluid path by means of a passage in a blade*, vane*, or shaft.

    121.2,  for a device with means for separating or guarding against solids
    in the working fluid.

    144+,   for a device comprising means for handling a bypass portion of
    working fluid which has not leaked through a joint.

    168.1+, for a device comprising means for handling working fluid leakage
    through a joint.

    170.1+, for a device having a bearing, seal, or liner between a runner
    portion and a static part.


CLS 415/169.2
TXT Moisture or liquid separated from gaseous working fluid (e.g., condensate
    removal, etc.):

    Device under subclass 169.1 wherein moisture vapor or liquid carried in a
    gaseous state working fluid* is treated, disposed of, or otherwise dealt
    with separately from the gaseous working fluid.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes a device wherein a part of the
    working fluid which contains a higher proportion of moisture than the
    working fluid in general is removed from the working fluid.


CLS 415/169.3
TXT Vane having specific moisture or liquid directing surface:

    Device under subclass 169.2 comprising a vane* working fluid* directing or
    other means which includes an outer boundary (surface) which has particular
    features for guiding the flow of moisture vapor or liquid formed or
    deposited thereon.

    (1)     Note.  The moisture vapor or liquid on the outer boundary of the
    vane or other directing means is usually guided to a channel or duct which
    carries the moisture or liquid away.


CLS 415/169.4
TXT Axial flow blade set and area for collecting moisture or liquid thrown
    radially outward:

    Device under subclass 169.2 comprising a working member blade* row wherein
    the working fluid* flow path to, through, and from the blade row
    predominantly follows a path parallel to the runner's axis of rotation.
    The device further comprises a region radially outward of the blades which
    gathers moisture vapor or liquid projected outward by the blade row.


CLS 415/170.1
TXT BEARING, SEAL, OR LINER BETWEEN RUNNER PORTION AND STATIC PART:

    Device under the class definition comprising means located between a
    runner* and a fixed element which (a) reduces friction between the runner
    and the fixed element while providing a supporting or guiding function for
    the runner, (b) prevents or retards the flow of fluid between the runner
    and the fixed element, or (c) prevents or retards wear between the runner
    and the fixed element.

    (1)     Note.  A conventional runner rotating shaft* or shaft covering
    portion (i.e., sleeve) is not considered to be a part of a runner for the
    purposes of this and indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  Regarding (b) above, the fluid prevented or retarded from
    flowing is usually working fluid*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33+,    for a device having a bearing which automatically adjusts in
    response to shaft speed or torque.

    110+,   for a device with lubricating, sealing, packing, or bearing means
    having a fluid path between the normal working fluid path and an interior
    part of an assembly which fluid path is positioned between two relatively
    moving apparatus parts.

    115,    for a device with a passage in a blade*, vane*, shaft*, or rotary
    distributor communicating with the working fluid*.  Such a passage may
    direct fluid to a region between a runner* and a static part which fluid
    may act as a lubricant or seal.

    116+,   for a device with a diversely oriented inlet or an additional inlet
    for a diverse fluid, which fluid may be directed to a region between a
    runner and a static part to act as a lubricant or seal.

    126+,   for a device having a casing* which may have a seal, bearing, or
    liner attached to and moveable with the casing for adjustment.

    168.1+, for a device having a seal, liner, or bearing between a runner* and
    a static part and means to dispose of any leakage therethrough.  Note
    particularly subclass 168.3 for such a device with a screw-type pumping
    seal.

    175+,   for a device with means for causing or controlling fluid flow for
    reducing friction between two relatively moving parts other than a runner
    portion and a static part.

    196+,   for a device having a casing attached removable liner or wear
    member which lines or protects the casing at a location other than between
    a runner* or blade* and a static part.

    229,    for a device having a bearing, seal, or liner between a shaft or
    shaft sleeve and a static part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 5+ for devices for
    gyroscopic action which have bearings which may be between a runner or
    blade and a casing.  See the reference to Class 74 in section IV of the
    Class 415 definitions for a statement of class lines.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process (e.g., seal between a runner* and another relatively movable part,
    seal between the two relatively moving members, does not recite enough
    details of the rotary kinetic device, etc.), subclasses 345+ for a seal
    between relatively movable parts (i.e., a dynamic seal).

    384,    Bearings, for a bearing or guide in which the runner is supported
    for motion, where there is insufficient disclosure of the rotary device to
    serve as a basis of classification in Class 415.


CLS 415/171.1
TXT Dynamically created seal:

    Device under subclass 170.1 wherein the means prevents or retards the flow
    of fluid between the runner and the fixed element, wherein the means is
    formed by rotation of the runner, and wherein the means does not function
    when the runner is stationary.

    (1)     Note.  Such devices usually prevent or retard flow of working
    fluid* between the runner and the fixed element by establishing regions of
    differing fluid pressure which inhibit the flow by nature of the differing
    pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109,    for a device with a shaft* connected fluid abutment member in a
    fluid filled shaft sealing chamber.  The fluid in the chamber rotates with
    the shaft.

    168.3,  for a device with a screw-type pumping seal for handling working
    fluid leakage between a runner or shaft and a static part.


CLS 415/172.1
TXT Means to seal radial flow pump runner inlet from outlet:

    Device under subclass 170.1 wherein the working fluid* path through the
    runner* is predominantly inwardly toward or outwardly from the runner's
    axis of rotation and wherein the runner adds energy to the working fluid
    (i.e., "pump"* runner).  The means prevents or retards the flow of fluid
    between the runner's entrance and exit which flow does not pass through
    (i.e., is not acted upon by) the runner.

    (1)     Note.  A circumferential or peripheral flow runner is not
    considered to be a radial flow runner for the purposes of this subclass.


CLS 415/173.1
TXT Between blade edge and static part:

    Device under subclass 170.1 wherein the means is located between a
    peripheral part of a working member blade* on the runner* and the fixed
    element.

    (1)     Note.  A device having a bearing, seal, or liner located between a
    blade supported ring or shroud and a fixed element is not included in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55.4,   for a turbine regenerative pump* having a seal at an end of a
    regenerative passage which seal may oppose a blade edge of the runner.

    173.6,  for a device having a bearing, seal, or liner between a blade* tip
    ring or shroud and a fixed element.


CLS 415/173.2
TXT Selectively adjustable:

    Device under subclass 173.1 wherein the means (a) can be moved positively
    and at will and (b) can be retained in any one of a multiplicity of
    different positions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129+,   for a device having a runner* or blade* selectively adjustable
    relative to a casing* which adjustment may adjust a bearing, seal, or liner
    between a blade* edge and a static part.


CLS 415/173.3
TXT Resilient, flexible, or resiliently biased:

    Device under subclass 173.1 wherein the means (a) has a tendency to regain
    its original shape when bent, stretched, compressed, or otherwise deformed,
    (b) can be easily bent, twisted, or turned without breaking, or (c)
    comprises an element which urges, by spring-type force, the means toward a
    predetermined position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140+,   for a device having a resilient or moveably mounted blade* portion
    on an axially moveable runner* or shaft*.


CLS 415/173.4
TXT Erodable or permanently deformable:

    Device under subclass 173.1 wherein the means is worn away or forever
    altered in shape just subsequent to or during operation of the device.
    Wear or alteration in shape is by design and usually occurs during device
    set up, break in, or under particular (i.e., extreme) operating conditions.

    (1)     Note.  A wear surface which merely wears slowly over time due to
    the action of a working member blade and which is replaced when worn beyond
    a certain degree is not included in this subclass unless the surface has
    particular characteristics promoting wear under certain conditions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for devices including a destructible, fusible, or deformable
    nonreuseable part.


CLS 415/173.5
TXT Labyrinth seal:

    Device under subclass 173.1 wherein the means prevents or retards the flow
    of fluid between the peripheral part of the working member blade* and the
    fixed element.  The means comprises maze like or zigzag interconnecting
    passages formed by the opposing working member peripheral part and fixed
    element surfaces, through which passages the fluid must flow to pass
    between the peripheral part of the blade and the fixed element.


CLS 415/173.6
TXT Between blade supported radial tip ring and static part:

    Device under subclass 170.1 wherein the means is located between (a) an
    annulus or shroud centered about the runner's axis of rotation and
    supported by a runner blade* at a position predominantly at an outermost
    point of the blade as measured from the runner's axis of rotation and (b)
    the fixed element.

    (1)     Note.  The annulus or shroud usually comprises a blade ring which
    is supported by a multiplicity of runner blades, the ring being positioned
    at an outermost radial point of each blade as measured from the runner's
    axis of rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172.1,  for a radial flow pump runner having a seal between a runner (e.g.,
    ring supported shroud, etc.) and a static part which seals the runner's
    inlet from its outlet.


CLS 415/173.7
TXT Between axial flow runner and vane or vane diaphragm structure:

    Device under subclass 170.1 wherein the working fluid* path to, through,
    and from the runner* is predominantly parallel to the runner's rotational
    axis (i.e., axial flow).  The means is positioned between the (axial flow)
    runner and a partition member vane* or a structure which secures one or
    more such vanes in position relative to a casing*.

    (1)     Note.  A seal means which retards or prevents flow between a
    multiblade row axial flow runner and a vane or vane diaphragm structure
    which seal means is located between blade rows of the runner is included in
    this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The structure which secures one or more vanes in position
    relative to a casing usually secures the vanes arcuately about and in a
    radial plane perpendicular to the rotational axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173.1+, for a device having a seal between a runner* blade* edge and a
    static part, which static part may comprise a vane* or vane diaphragm
    portion.


CLS 415/174.1
TXT Selectively adjustable:

    Device under subclass 170.1 wherein the means (a) can be moved positively
    and at will and (b) can be retained in any one of a multiplicity of
    different positions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33+,    for a device having a bearing which automatically adjusts in
    response to shaft speed or torque.

    113,    for a device having a shaft* lubricating, sealing, packing, or
    bearing means comprising an assembly supported for movement to any of a
    plurality of selected positions and further comprising an internal working
    fluid* connection.

    126+,   for a device having a casing* which may have a seal, bearing, or
    liner attached to and movable with the casing for adjustment.

    129+,   for a device having a runner selectively adjustable relative to a
    casing which adjustment may alter a bearing, seal, or liner between the
    runner and a static part.

    132,    for a device having an axially movable bearing supporting the end
    of a shaft* to adjust the shaft.

    173.2,  for a device having a selectively adjustable bearing, seal, or
    liner between a blade* edge and a static part.


CLS 415/174.2
TXT Resilient, flexible, or resiliently biased:

    Device under subclass 170.1 wherein the means (a) has a tendency to regain
    its original shape when bent, stretched, compressed, or otherwise deformed,
    (b) can be easily bent, twisted or turned without breaking, or (c)
    comprises an element which urges, by spring-type force, the means toward a
    predetermined position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for a device having shaft sealing, packing, lubricating, or bearing
    means comprising an internal working fluid connection and a resilient
    portion.

    173.3,  for a device having a resilient, flexible, or resiliently biased
    bearing, seal, or liner between a runner* blade* edge and a static part.


CLS 415/174.3
TXT Seal lies against axial face of runner hub:

    Device under subclass 174.2 wherein the means prevents or retards the flow
    of fluid between the runner* and the fixed element.  The means contacts or
    abuts against a surface of the runner's central supporting structure (e.g.,
    hub, etc.), which surface is generally perpendicular to the runner's axis
    of rotation.

    (1)     Note.  "Central supporting structure" of the runner does not
    include a runner shaft or a runner blade* supported ring or shroud for the
    purposes of this definition.


CLS 415/174.4
TXT Erodable or permanently deformable:

    Device under subclass 170.1 wherein the means is worn away or forever
    altered in shape just subsequent to or during operation of the device.  The
    wear or alteration in shape is by design and usually occurs during device
    set up, break in, or under particular (i.e., extreme) operating conditions.

    (1)     Note.  A wear surface which merely wears slowly over time due to
    the action of a runner and which surface is replaced when worn beyond a
    certain degree is not included in this subclass unless the surface has
    particular characteristics promoting wear under certain conditions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for devices including a destructible, fusible, or deformable part.

    173.4,  for a device having an erodable or deformable bearing, seal, or
    liner between a runner* blade* edge and a static part.


CLS 415/174.5
TXT Labyrinth seal:

    Device under subclass 170.1 wherein the means prevents or retards the flow
    of fluid between the runner* and the fixed element.  The means comprises
    maze like or zigzag interconnecting passages formed by the opposing runner
    part and fixed element surfaces, through which passages the fluid must flow
    to pass between the runner and the fixed element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173.5,  for a labyrinth seal between a runner* blade* edge and a static
    part.


CLS 415/175
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a means specifically
    provided to positively move or prevent movement of a fluid which acts (1)
    to transfer heat between it and an apparatus part, (2) to reduce friction
    between two relatively moving parts or (3) as a sealing fluid to prevent,
    preclude or reduce unwanted flow of other fluid between two relatively
    moving apparatus parts.

    (1)     Note.  Included under this definition is an elevated tank
    containing lubricating, sealing or heat exchanging fluid for gravity flow
    of the fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109,    for apparatus having a chamber containing sealing fluid and a
    member connected to and rotating with the shaft* continuously causes motion
    of the sealing fluid.

    177+,   for apparatus having heat exchanging means, but having no means,
    such as a fan, pump or valve specifically provided to positively move or
    control movement of the heat exchanging medium.


CLS 415/176
TXT Apparatus under subclass 175 in which the means is acted upon and moved by
    the working fluid*.

    (1)     Note.  The means may be merely an interface between the working
    fluid* and the heat exchanging, sealing or lubricating fluid which is moved
    or whose movement is prevented.


CLS 415/177
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means (1) to interchange
    heat between an apparatus part or the working fluid* and another part or
    fluid or (2) in contact with an apparatus part to reduce the transfer of
    heat from the part through the means.

    (1)     Note.  Included under (1) of this definition is a fin or rib which
    increases the area of heat transfer, or direct contact of a part with a
    fluid for heating or cooling, or passage of working fluid* at different
    temperatures on both sides of a wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175,    for a device in which there is means specifically provided (e.g.,
    fan, pump, valve) to positively move or control movement of a heat exchange
    medium.


CLS 415/178
TXT Apparatus under subclass 177 comprising a solid barrier of form or
    arrangement to affect heat transfer therethrough, there being working
    fluid* on at least one side of the barrier, there being fluid at another
    temperature on the other side.

    (1)     Note.  Included under this definition is ambient air as the other
    fluid provided there is a solid barrier of special form or arrangement
    (e.g., coil, fins) between it and the working fluid*.  See also (1) Note in
    subclass 177.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for device having a space between the casing* and a surrounding
    housing with the space being full of working fluid* to permit heat exchange
    between the working fluid* and parts of the apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 690+ for fluid motor in which the exhaust
    fluid is heated or cooled, see section IV of the Main Class Definition,
    reference to Class 60, (8).


CLS 415/179
TXT Apparatus under subclass 178 in which the heat exchange barrier is
    intermediate two sets of blades*, the barrier serving to transfer heat to
    or from the working fluid* as it passes from one set to the next succeeding.


CLS 415/180
TXT Apparatus under subclass 177 comprising an arrangement to transfer heat
    from the shaft*, seal or bearing by direct contact of a cooling fluid with
    such part.

    (1)     Note.  This definition accepts only those devices in which a fluid
    other than the working fluid* is used as the coolant; for devices using the
    working fluid* for this purpose, see the search notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116+,   for a device in which the cooling fluid for contacting the shaft*,
    seal or bearing is then caused to enter upstream of all disclosed runner*
    stages and pass through at least one stage.

    144+,   for a device in which the cooling fluid is then caused to enter the
    working fluid* flow path at an intermediate runner* stage.


CLS 415/181
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising an element, member or
    arrangement of element or apparatus parts to provide for working fluid*
    velocity of greater than the speed of sound through some apparatus part.

    (1)     Note.  The speed of sound or the velocity of propagation of
    compressional waves in the working fluid* varies as the temperature and
    pressure of use; a clear disclosure in the specification that supersonic
    velocity is obtained is sufficient to qualify under this definition.


CLS 415/182.1
TXT WORKING FLUID PASSAGE OR DISTRIBUTING MEANS ASSOCIATED WITH RUNNER (E.G.,
    CASING, ETC.):

    Device under the class definition comprising means (e.g., casing*, etc.) to
    deliver, conduct, guide, direct, or distribute the working fluid* to,
    around, or from a runner*.

    (1)     Note.  A device need not explicitly claim a runner to be in this
    and indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  Patents in this and indented subclasses have been cross
    referenced to Class 416, Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers),
    appropriate subclasses, where particular runner structure has been
    disclosed.  See section IV of the Class 415 definitions for a discussion of
    class lines.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.1+,   for a device with means for controlling casing or flow guiding
    means in response to natural fluid current force or direction.

    108,    for a device having a casing and a spaced housing with the space
    vented to working fluid.

    126+,   for a device having a casing part selectively movable relative to a
    fixed support.

    134+,   for a device having a casing with a thermal expansion joint.

    144+,   for a device having means to guide or conduct at least a portion of
    the working fluid along a path which bypasses the runner.

    146+,   for a device including working fluid force responsive vane or flow
    control means.

    148+,   for a device having adjustable means to affect or control the flow
    of working fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 37+ for a fluid conduit
    having baffles or other means for changing the direction or rate of flow of
    fluid in the conduit.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses
    for means forming a free jet of fluid, the means not combined with runner
    structure.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), for particular runner
    structure.


CLS 415/183
TXT Apparatus under subclass 182.1 comprising a plurality of members (e.g.,
    vanes*, pipes, or nozzles) each of which has means to convey or direct a
    portion of the working fluid* directly onto the runner*.

    (1)     Note.  The working fluid* streams may be directed to the same set
    of blades*, or to different sets of blades* on the same runner*.

    (2)     Note.  A set of blades* or bucket comprises at least two physically
    interrelated blades* or buckets which cooperate with each other to form a
    single composite structure against which the working fluid* may act.  The
    blades* or buckets of a set may be arranged relative to each other to form
    any one of a variety of shapes (e.g., circle, spiral) but usually comprises
    a single circular annulus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52.1+,  for means to redirect working fluid* back to the same blade* or set
    of blades* which the fluid had previously contacted.

    93+,    for means to conduct or guide a plurality of working fluid* streams
    in opposed directions to a runner*.

    149.1+, for a device having selectively adjustable vane* or working fluid*
    control means upstream and downstream of a blade* set.

    151+,   for adjustable means to control the flow or working fluid* to a
    runner*.

    208.1+, for plural vanes* or deflectors for working fluid* which are not.
    immediately upstream of the runner*


CLS 415/184
TXT Apparatus under subclass 183 in which the members comprise a plurality of
    spirally or volute shaped casings* or one spirally or volute shaped casing*
    has a plurality of guide or conveying means supported therewithin.


CLS 415/185
TXT Apparatus under subclass 183 in which the members are spaced equidistant
    from the runner* axis in a plane which is normal to the axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159+,   for a plurality of movable vanes* arcuately or circularly spaced
    around the runner* axis and positioned upstream of and controlling working
    fluid* quantity or direction onto a runner*.

    208.2+, for a device having plural and arcuately or circularly arranged
    vanes* in a radial plane around the runner* axis, which vanes* are not
    immediately upstream of the runner*


CLS 415/186
TXT Apparatus under subclass 185 in which the members are positioned in the
    same plane as the runner* blade*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     for distributing means radially interior of a set of runner*
    blades* enclosed on its outer radial periphery.


CLS 415/187
TXT Apparatus under subclass 186 comprising a plurality of sets of members
    spaced along the axis, a set comprising a plurality of members lying in a
    single plane perpendicular to the axis, each set distributing working
    fluid* onto a runner* or a blade* set.


CLS 415/188
TXT Apparatus under subclass 186 in which the members are within, or on a
    smaller radius than that of, the runner* blade*.


CLS 415/189
TXT Apparatus under subclass 185 in which the working fluid* guides or
    conducting means are retained or fastened in operative position by means
    which permits them to be readily disassembled from the adjacent casing*
    structure without destruction of any parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209.2,  for a device having plural and arcuately or circularly arranged
    vanes* in a radial plane around the runner* axis but not immediately
    upstream of the runner*, which device further includes means for mounting a
    diaphragm or plural vane* holder to a casing*.

    209.3+, for a device having plural and arcuately or circularly arranged
    vanes* in a radial plane around the runner* axis but not immediately
    upstream of the runner*, which device further includes specific vane*
    mounting means.


CLS 415/190
TXT Apparatus under subclass 189 comprising retaining or fastening means for
    each of a plurality or working fluid* guides or conducting means spaced
    from each other in the direction of flow of the working fluid*.


CLS 415/191
TXT Apparatus under subclass 185 comprising a plurality of vanes*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for a device comprising a driven runner* immersed in a fluid and a
    vane* in an unconfined fluid stream for guiding the working fluid*.


CLS 415/192
TXT Apparatus under subclass 191 in which the vanes* are asymmetrically curved
    about an imaginary line extending substantially radially from the runner*
    axis.


CLS 415/193
TXT Apparatus under subclass 191 comprising a plurality of sets of vanes*
    spaced along the axis, a set comprising a plurality of vanes* lying in a
    single plane perpendicular to the axis, each set distributing working
    fluid* onto a runner* or a blade* set.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209.1,  for a device having plural, axially spaced vane* sets (a) acting
    successively or (b) having particular means for axially spacing the vane*
    sets; the vane* sets each comprise plural and arcuately or circularly
    arranged vanes* in a radial plane around the runner* axis.


CLS 415/194
TXT Apparatus under subclass 193 in which the vanes* of one of the groups are
    larger in length or width or are positioned further from each other than
    the vanes* in another set.


CLS 415/195
TXT Apparatus under subclass 191 in which the spacing between any two adjacent
    vanes* of one set is different than the spacing between any other two
    adjacent vanes* in the same set.


CLS 415/196
TXT Apparatus under subclass 182.1 comprising a member secured to the interior
    of a working fluid* conduit or casing* which member may be replaced and
    which acts to protect the conduit wall or casing* against the erosive or
    corrosive effect of the working fluid*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128,    for an adjustment liner for the inner periphery of a casing*.

    170.1+, for a similar lining or wear member attached to or for the
    transverse face or peripheral edge of a runner* disc or blade*.


CLS 415/197
TXT Apparatus under subclass 196 in which the member is made of a nonmetallic
    material.


CLS 415/198.1
TXT Apparatus under subclass 182.1 comprising a plurality of blade* sets
    fixedly or unitarily associated with each other for contacting the working
    fluid*.

    (1)     Note.  The blade* sets may be (a) on a plurality of runners*, i.e.,
    a set on each of at least two runners*, or (b) on opposite sides of a
    shroud plate to act on the fluid in series or in parallel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55.5+,  for a regenerative turbine pump* having plural, rigidly related
    blade* sets.

    57.2,   for a device having plural, independent, serially acting means for
    the reentry of working fluid* to a first blade* set and further having an
    additional blade* set in the reentry path which may be rigidly related to
    the first blade * set.

    58.1,   for a device having means for the reentry of working fluid* to a
    first blade* set and further having an additional blade* set in the reentry
    path which may be rigidly related to the first blade* set.

    59.1,   for a device having plural blade* sets and including means for the
    reentry of working fluid* to one of the blade* sets.

    62+,    for plural blade* sets in an arrangement of plural runners*
    supported for relative movement.

    64,     for a runner* having plural blade* sets on a common radial plane.

    83,     for a device having a runner* with annular blade* rows or fluid
    channels spaced on a common radial plane.

    93+,    appropriate subclasses indented thereunder, especially subclasses
    93 and 101+, for an arrangement in which end thrust is balanced by working
    fluid* flowing in at least two axial directions and comprising plural
    rigidly related blade* sets.

    106,    for a device comprising a blade* on each side of a common support
    wall or shroud plate in a runner* and a port transferring fluid from one
    side of the wall or plate to the other.

    143,    for plural runners* with diverse or different flow paths through
    the runners*.

    179,    for a device comprising plural serial stages of runner* blades* and
    a heat exchange apparatus intermediate two stages.


CLS 415/199.1
TXT Apparatus under subclass 198.1 which includes at least two blade* sets for
    contacting the working fluid* sequentially, and wherein the working fluid*
    moves predominately inwardly towards or outwardly from the runner* axis as
    the working fluid* moves through each blade* set, and which further
    includes immobile structure between the blade* sets for altering the
    direction of movement of the working fluid* as it passes from a preceding
    to a succeeding blade* set.


CLS 415/199.2
TXT Apparatus under subclass 199.1 wherein the flow directing structure
    includes stationary vanes* which form channels that extend between the
    blade* sets and cause the working fluid* to be separated into plural,
    generally parallel, flow paths as the working fluid* moves between the
    blade* sets.


CLS 415/199.3
TXT Apparatus under subclass 199.2 wherein a cross section of the channel
    forming vanes* taken in a plane perpendicular to the runner* axis forms a
    shape that, at least in part, includes a curved line that extends around
    the runner* axis at a radius that continually increases or decreases
    relative to the runner* axis.


CLS 415/199.4
TXT Apparatus under subclass 198.1 wherein the working fluid* moves through at
    least one of the blade* sets in a direction predominately parallel to the
    axis of the runner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for a device comprising plural rigidly related blade* sets, one of
    which is a spirally arranged blade* or fluid conducting passage of at least
    360o flight.

    77+,    for an axial flow runner* comprising blades* extending radially
    inwardly and outwardly from a common annulus.


CLS 415/199.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 199.4 which includes at least another blade* set
    for contacting the working fluid* sequentially and wherein said fluid moves
    in a direction predominately parallel to the runner* axis as the fluid
    moves through each blade* set and which apparatus further includes immobile
    structure between the blade* sets for altering the directional movement of
    the fluid as it passes from a preceding blade* set to a succeeding blade*
    set.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149.4,  for a device having plural selectively adjustable vane* or working
    fluid* control means alternating along a working fluid flow path with axial
    flow blade rows


CLS 415/199.6
TXT Apparatus under subclass 199.4 which further includes another blade* set
    arranged for contacting the working fluid* sequentially, and wherein the
    working fluid* path through said other blade* set is in a direction
    predominately inwardly towards or outwardly from the runner* axis.


CLS 415/200
TXT Apparatus under subclass 182.1 in which the material of the casings*, vane*
    of flow guiding means is specifically recited in a claim.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216.1,  for a specific recitation of the material constituting a shaft*.

    217.1,  for a specific recitation of a corrosion resistant or nonmetallic
    material constituting a runner*.


CLS 415/201
TXT Apparatus under subclass 182.1 in which a part of the casing* may be
    removed or moved to a different position to permit admittance to the
    interior thereof while the apparatus is otherwise in assembled condition.


CLS 415/202
TXT Apparatus under subclass 182.1 comprising a motor* runner* and a tubular
    member with a flow modifying orifice at the end thereof through which the
    working fluid* passes onto the runner*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     for a device with a motor runner motivated by a reaction-type jet
    discharge nozzle from an internal working fluid conduit.

    167,    for a nozzle adjustably or shiftably mounted to vary the direction
    of discharge of working fluid* onto the runner*.

    183+,   for a device having plural working fluid* distributing means
    immediately upstream of a runner*.

    185+,   appropriate subclasses preceding 191 for plural nozzles arranged
    circularly around the runner* axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses
    for nozzles, per se.


CLS 415/203
TXT Apparatus under subclass 182.1 comprising a housing in which the runner* is
    positioned, said housing having an inlet or outlet for the working fluid*,
    the longitudinal axis of the inlet or outlet being substantially
    perpendicular to a radius drawn to the housing wall.


CLS 415/204
TXT Apparatus under subclass 203 comprising a housing of spiral or volute form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212.1,  for a scroll or helical type casing with a specific exit nozzle.


CLS 415/205
TXT Apparatus under subclass 204 in which the spiral or volute housing conducts
    the working fluid* to the runner* and decreases in volume while approaching
    the runner*.


CLS 415/206
TXT Apparatus under subclass 203 in which the outlet is substantially
    perpendicular to a radius drawn to the housing wall and the inlet is
    directed parallel to the runner* axis.


CLS 415/207
TXT Apparatus under subclass 182.1 comprising a pump* runner* and, downstream
    of the blade*, a flow path increasing in area in the direction of working
    fluid* flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203+,   for a working fluid* path downstream of a runner*, expanding in
    area in the direction of fluid flow*, in a device in which the casing has a
    tangential inlet or outlet for the working fluid*.


CLS 415/208.1
TXT Vane or deflector:

    Device under subclass 182.1 wherein the means to deliver, conduct, guide,
    direct, or distribute the working fluid* to, around, or from the runner*
    comprises a static (nonrotating) partition member vane* or other working
    fluid directing means in the working fluid flow path.

    (1)     Note.  A device comprising mere working fluid conducting passage
    walls is not included in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  A device comprising plural vanes or other working fluid
    directing means immediately upstream of a runner is not included in this
    subclass.  See subclasses 183+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.1+,   for a device with means for controlling casing* or flow guiding
    means in response to natural fluid current force or direction which means
    may include a vane or deflector.

    8,      for a device having a driven, fluid immersed runner with a vane in
    an unconfined fluid stream.

    12,     for a device with a bimetallic vane or vane adjustment means.

    53.2,   for a device having a cross flow runner blade* set and a vane or
    flow guide inside the blade set.

    55.2+,  for a turbine regenerative pump* having means to deflect working
    fluid in a regenerative passage.

    142,    for a device comprising a shaft* bearing combined with or retained
    by a vane in a surrounding working fluid space.

    146+,   for a device comprising working fluid force responsive vane control.

    148+,   for a device comprising selectively adjustable vane or other
    working fluid control means.

    173.7,  for a device comprising bearing, sealing, or liner structure
    between a vane or vane diaphragm structure and an axial flow runner.

    183+,   for a device comprising plural vanes or deflectors immediately
    upstream of a runner.

    199.1+, for a device comprising serial, rigidly related, radial flow blade*
    sets and an intermediate stationary flow diverter.

    199.5,  for a device comprising serial, rigidly related, axial flow blade*
    sets and an intermediate stationary flow diverter.

    218.1,  for a device with a working fluid directing conical runner hub
    (integral with runner) having its small diameter facing upstream.


CLS 415/208.2
TXT Plural and arcuately or circularly arranged in radial plane around runner
    axis:

    Device under subclass 208.1 comprising at least two  such vanes* or other
    directing means which are equidistantly spaced from the runner's* axis of
    rotation and are positioned in a (radial) plane perpendicular to the axis.

    (1)     Note.  The guiding vanes or other directing means may intersect the
    runner's axis of rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56.3,   for a device with pump* priming working fluid reentry means which
    includes plural and arcuately arranged vanes around the runner.

    159+,   for a device comprising a plurality of vanes upstream of and
    arcuately or circularly arranged around the runner axis, at least one of
    which vanes is selectively adjustable to control the working fluid amount
    or direction.

    185+,   for a device comprising plural vanes arcuately or circularly
    arranged around a runner axis and located immediately upstream of the
    runner.


CLS 415/208.3
TXT Plane intersects with runner blade:

    Device under subclass 208.2 wherein the (radial) plane passing through the
    vanes* or other directing means also passes through at least a portion of a
    working member blade* of the runner*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164,    for a device comprising plural vanes which are upstream of a
    runner, individually pivoted parallel to the runner axis, and arcuately or
    circularly arranged around the runner axis in a radial plane which passes
    through a blade of the runner, at least one of which vanes is selectively
    adjustable.

    165+,   for a device comprising plural vanes which are upstream of a runner
    and arcuately or circularly arranged around the runner axis in a radial
    plane which passes through a blade of the runner, at least one of which
    vanes is selectively adjustable.

    186+,   for a device comprising plural vanes which are immediately upstream
    of a runner and arcuately or circularly arranged around the runner axis in
    a radial plane which passes through a blade of the runner.


CLS 415/208.4
TXT Plural, radially spaced vane sets:

    Device under subclass 208.3 comprising at least two groups of such vanes*
    or other directing means wherein each group (a) comprises at least two of
    the vanes or other directing means equidistantly spaced from the runner's*
    axis of rotation, (b) is positioned in the (radial) plane, and (c) is
    positioned at a different radius from the runner's axis of rotation.


CLS 415/208.5
TXT Nonradial flow runner:

    Device under subclass 208.3 wherein the working fluid* flow path through
    the runner* is in a direction other than predominantly inwardly toward or
    outwardly from the runner's axis of rotation.

    (1)     Note.  Circumferential and axial flow runners are considered to be
    examples of nonradial flow runners for the purposes of this subclass.


CLS 415/209.1
TXT Plural, axially spaced vane sets acting successively or having specific
    spacing means:

    Device under subclass 208.2 comprising first and second rows of such vanes*
    or other directing means positioned apart along the runner's* axis of
    rotation.  Each row comprises at least two of the vanes or other directing
    means positioned equidistant from the runner's axis of rotation and in a
    (radial) plane perpendicular to the axis of rotation.  The device further
    (a) directs the working fluid* through the two rows in sequence or (b)
    comprises particular means to position the two rows relative to one another
    along the axis of rotation.

    (1)     Note.  The device may include a runner blade* row positioned
    between the axially spaced rows of vanes or other directing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    187,    for a device comprising first plural distributing means immediately
    upstream of a runner, which first means are arcuately or circularly
    arranged around the runner axis in a radial plane with a blade of the
    runner, the device further comprising second plural distributing means
    axially spaced from the first plural distributing means.

    193+,   for a device comprising plural, axially spaced vane sets arcuately
    or circularly arranged around the runner's axis of rotation wherein one of
    the sets is immediately upstream of the runner.

    199.5,  for a device having plural, serial, axial flow blade sets with an
    intermediate stationary flow diverter.


CLS 415/209.2
TXT Having means for mounting diaphragm or plural vane holder to casing:

    Device under subclass 208.2 comprising a structure to which the vanes* or
    other directing means are attached and further comprising means for
    securing the structure in position relative to a casing*.

    (1)     Note.  The structure must be distinct from the vanes or other
    directing means for inclusion in this subclass.  Means for securing an
    integral single or double vane (e.g., nozzle block) to a casing is not
    included in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The device need not explicitly claim the presence of the
    vanes or other directing means provided the presence of such vanes or other
    means is clearly understood.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189+,   for a device comprising plural vanes which are immediately upstream
    of a runner*, arcuately or circularly arranged around the runner axis, and
    removably secured or mounted in a casing.

    209.3+, for a device comprising particular means for mounting vanes to a
    supporting structure.


CLS 415/209.3
TXT Having specific vane mounting means:

    Device under subclass 208.2 wherein particular significance is attributed
    to means for securing one of the vanes* or other directing means in
    position relative to a supporting structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189+,   for a device comprising plural vanes which are immediately upstream
    of a runner*, arcuately or circularly arranged around the runner axis, and
    removably secured or mounted in a casing.

    209.2,  for a device comprising means for mounting a diaphragm or plural
    vane holder to a casing.


CLS 415/209.4
TXT Vane fixed between radially separate surfaces:

    Device under subclass 209.3 wherein the vane* or other directing means is
    held intermediate two structures at opposite ends of the vane or other
    directing means, and wherein the two structures lie at different distances
    from the runner's* axis of rotation.

    (1)     Note.  Either or both of the two structures may consist of
    circumferentially extending segments connected together.


CLS 415/210.1
TXT Fixed between radially separate surfaces:

    Device under subclass 208.2 wherein the vane* or other directing means is
    held intermediate two structures at opposite ends of the vane or other
    directing means; the two structures lie at different distances from the
    runner's* axis of rotation.

    (1)     Note.  Either or both of the two structures may consist of
    circumferentially extending segments connected together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209.4,  for a device comprising plural and arcuately or circularly arranged
    vanes which lie in a radial plane around a runner axis, are fixed between
    radially separate surfaces, and which include specific vane mounting means.


CLS 415/211.1
TXT In radial plane with runner blade:

    Device under subclass 208.1 wherein the vane* or other directing means lies
    in a plane normal to the runner's* axis of rotation, which plane passes
    through at least a portion of a working member blade*.

    (1)     Note.  A device having a mere partition or wall with an orifice in
    which a runner* is positioned is not included in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  In axial flow devices, a "vane or other directing means"
    positioned about the periphery of a runner blade row is generally
    distinguished from a "casing" structure about the blade row in that a vane
    or other directing means (a) encloses the periphery of the blade row over
    less than half of the axial extent of the blade row and (b) does not act to
    support the runner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53.2,   for a device having a cross flow runner blade set and a vane or
    flow guide inside the blade set.

    55.2+,  for a turbine regenerative pump* having means to deflect working
    fluid* in a regenerative passage, which means lies in a radial plane with
    the runner blade.

    148+,   for a device comprising a selectively adjustable vane which may lie
    in a radial plane with a runner blade.

    208.3+, and see the search notes therewith, for a device comprising plural
    vanes arcuately or circularly arranged in a radial plane around the runner
    axis, which plane passes through at least a portion of a working member
    Blade.

    220+,   for a device having a casing with an axial flow runner which casing
    may include a portion which encloses the periphery of the blade set and
    lies in a plane passing through the blade set.


CLS 415/211.2
TXT Downstream of runner:

    Device under subclass 208.1 wherein the vane* or other directing means is
    located beyond the runner* in the direction of the working fluid* flow.


CLS 415/212.1
TXT Scroll or helical type casing with specific exit nozzle:

    Device under subclass 182.1 comprising a casing* of spiral or volute form
    and a discharge opening therefrom, wherein particular significance is
    attributed to the discharge opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204+,   for a device having a scroll type casing and a tangential inlet or
    outlet.

    208.1+, for a device having a vane* or deflector downstream of a runner*.


CLS 415/213.1
TXT Casing with mounting means:

    Device under subclass 182.1 wherein the means comprises a casing* and a
    means for securing or anchoring the casing to an external frame of
    reference.

    (1)     Note.  External frames of reference may include such items as the
    floor or another structure on which the device is anchored, for example.

    (2)     Note.  Devices comprising means to secure a casing to an outer
    housing (e.g., securing an inner casing to an outer casing) are included in
    this subclass if the space between the inner casing and the outer housing
    is not vented to the working fluid*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for a device comprising a casing and an outer housing wherein
    working fluid is vented to the space between the casing and housing.

    126,    for a device comprising a casing part selectively movable relative
    to a fixed support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses, for support structure, per se,
    particularly subclasses 637+ for the combination of a support and a casing
    claimed so broadly as to be of general utility.  See the Class 415
    definition line notes for a discussion of class lines.


CLS 415/214.1
TXT Casing having multiple parts releasably clamped (e.g., casing seal, etc.):

    Device under subclass 182.1 wherein the means comprises a casing* which
    includes a plurality of sections which are positioned with relation to one
    another by pressing or wedging means.

    (1)     Note.  Devices comprising multiple casing parts screwed, bolted, or
    riveted together are included in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  A seal positioned between two or more releasably clamped
    casing parts is included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126,    for a device comprising a casing part selectively movable relative
    to a fixed support.

    201,    for a device comprising a casing having an access opening through a
    portion of the casing or cover.


CLS 415/215.1
TXT Casing having multiple parts welded, cemented, or fused:

    Device under subclass 182.1 wherein the means comprises a casing* which
    includes a plurality of sections which are positioned with relation to one
    another by (a) liquefying or melting together by heat or (b) by adhesive
    bonding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 136+ for metal heating arc welding
    devices or processes.


CLS 415/216.1
TXT With runner shaft of specific shape or material:

    Device under subclass 182.1 comprising a shaft* for the runner* wherein
    particular significance is attributed to the surface configuration or
    physical substance of the shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124.2,  for a device including a shaft transmission train having flexible
    means which may include a flexible shaft or shaft coupling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclasses 244+ for
    runner support mounting carrier, or fairing structure which may include a
    runner shaft of a specific shape or material.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, subclasses 179+ for rotary shaft structure.


CLS 415/217.1
TXT With runner having corrosion resistant or nonmetallic portion:

    Device under subclass 182.1 wherein the runner* comprises (a) metal which
    tends to resist or inhibit wearing away by chemical action or (b) a
    nonmetallic substance.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of materials found under this definition include
    stainless steel, ceramics, porcelain, and glass.

    (2)     Note.  Although it includes subject matter better suited to Class
    416, Fluid Reaction Surface (i.e., Impellers), this subclass has been
    retained since the subject matter is not currently provided for in Class
    416.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141,    for a device having a flexible runner blade* which may be corrosion
    resistant or nonmetallic.

    170.1+, for a device having a runner with a lining or wear member attached
    to a runner portion.

    197,    for a device having a passage or casing* attached removable liner
    or wear member of nonmetallic material.

    200,    for a device with a casing* wherein particular significance is
    attributed to the casing or vane* material.

    216.1,  for a device comprising working fluid* passage or distributing
    means with a runner shaft* of a specific material which may be corrosion
    resistant or nonmetallic.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclasses 241+ for an
    impeller comprising a blade structure of a specific composition which may
    include corrosion resistant or nonmetallic materials.


CLS 415/218.1
TXT With runner having conical hub including small diameter facing upstream:

    Device under subclass 182.1 wherein the runner* comprises a rotating base
    member which support a blade*.  The rotating base member has sides which
    increase evenly in diameter with the lesser diameter portion facing against
    the direction of working fluid* flow so as to act somewhat as a guide to
    direct the flow toward the blade.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclasses 245+ for a
    runner comprising a coaxially mounted spinner or fairwater cap, subclass
    188 for a rotor comprising a flow confining or deflecting web or end plate
    which is circumferentially and radially continuous and which is conical.


CLS 415/219.1
TXT Casing with axial, conical flow runner:

    Device under subclass 182.1 wherein the means comprises a casing* and
    wherein the working fluid* flows to, through, and from the runner* along a
    path extending along the runner's axis of rotation.  The working fluid path
    has a ring like or annular cross section taken perpendicular to the axis of
    rotation, which cross section is centered about and which cross section
    decreases or increases in diameter along the axis of rotation.

    (1)     Note.  Working fluid flow to, through, and from a runner which flow
    is radial only to an extent necessary for the expansion or compression of
    working fluid passing axially through the runner is not considered to be
    axial, conical flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218.1,  for a casing with a runner including a working fluid directing
    conical hub having its small diameter facing upstream.

    220+,   for a casing with an axial flow runner.


CLS 415/220
TXT Casing with axial flow runner:

    Device under subclass 182.1 wherein the means comprises a casing* and
    wherein the working fluid* path to, through, and from the runner* is
    predominantly parallel to the runner's axis of rotation.

    (1)     Note.  In axial flow devices, a "casing" positioned about the
    periphery of a runner blade* row is generally distinguished from a vane* or
    deflector in that a casing (a) encloses the periphery of the blade row over
    more than half of the axial extent of the blade row or (b) includes means
    to support the runner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.3,    for a device comprising an axial flow runner with means for
    controlling a casing or flow guiding means in response to natural fluid
    current force.

    4.5,    for a device comprising an axial flow runner with means for
    controlling a casing or flow guiding means in response to natural fluid
    current direction.

    72+,    for a device comprising a casing with a runner having a spirally
    arranged blade or fluid passage which extends along the runner axis and may
    direct the fluid along an axial flow path.

    77+,    for a device comprising a casing with an axial flow runner having
    blades extending radially inward and outward from a common annulus.

    91,     for a device comprising a casing with an annular runner having an
    inwardly projecting blade which may direct the fluid along an axial flow
    path.

    170.1+, for a device comprising a bearing, seal or liner between an axial
    flow runner or runner blade and a static part.

    199.4+, for a device comprising a casing with a runner having plural
    rigidly related blade sets at least one set of which directs the fluid
    along an axial flow path.

    208.1+, for a device having a vane* or deflector for a runner which may
    include an axial flow blade set, particularly subclass 211.1 in which the
    vane or deflector is in the same radial plane as the blade set.

    908,    for a natural fluid current motor* having an axial flow runner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), appropriate subclasses,
    for impeller structure, per se.


CLS 415/221
TXT Having specific features for liquid flow:

    Device under subclass 220 comprising structure particularly adapted to
    working fluid* which is in the liquid (i.e., incompressible) state.


CLS 415/222
TXT Pump with casing narrowing to runner:

    Device under subclass 220 wherein the runner* rotates so as to increase the
    energy of the working fluid* (i.e., pump*); the casing* member directs the
    working fluid along a path decreasing in cross sectional area as it
    approaches the runner.

    (1)     Note.  A device comprising a casing member wherein the path
    decreases in cross sectional area in the region of a runner blade* row
    (i.e., in the plane of the blade row) is included in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  A device comprising an axial flow multistage runner casing
    which decreases slightly in cross section while guiding working fluid past
    several blade rows is not included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208.1+, for a device having a vane* or deflector which may form a passage
    which narrows to a pump runner; particularly subclass 211.1 wherein the
    vane or deflector is in a radial plane with a runner blade.


CLS 415/223
TXT Having runner in orifice of radially extending partition or casing element:

    Device under subclass 220 wherein the runner* is positioned in an opening
    (a) of a wall generally perpendicular to the runner's axis of rotation or
    (b) of a casing* member element which extends perpendicularly to the
    runner's axis of rotation.

    (1)     Note.  A device comprising a mere tube or pipe with a runner
    positioned inside is not included in this subclass.


CLS 415/224
TXT Casing with nonradial flow runner (e.g., circumferential flow etc.):

    Device under subclass 182.1 wherein the means comprises a casing* and
    wherein the working fluid* flow path through the runner* is in a direction
    other than predominantly inwardly toward or outwardly from the runner's
    axis of rotation.

    (1)     Note.  The flow path is often in a direction around the periphery
    of the runner (i.e., circumferential flow).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for a pump device comprising a casing with a runner having a
    rotating inlet end or scoop immersed in liquid.

    92,     for a device comprising a casing with a motor runner having a
    working fluid trapping pocket.

    202,    for a device comprising a casing with a motor runner and further
    comprising a nozzle discharging onto the runner.

    203+,   for a device having a tangential inlet or outlet and a nonradial
    flow runner.

    208.5   for a device comprising a nonradial flow runner having plural vanes
    or deflectors arcuately or circularly arranged around the runner's axis of
    rotation.

    219.1,  for a device comprising a casing with an axial, conical flow runner.

    220+,   for a device comprising a casing and an axial flow runner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 217+ for a device for measuring
    volume or rate of flow which is of the tank type with a rotary bucket, and
    subclasses 861.79+ for a device for measuring volume or rate of flow which
    uses a turbine which may be of a nonradial flow type.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclasses 223+ for
    specific blade structure of a runner which may be of the nonradial type.


CLS 415/224.5
TXT Radial flow casing having vaneless annulus diffuser:

    Device under subclass 182.1 comprising a casing* which guides working
    fluid* along a decelerating flow path having no vanes.  The path (a)
    extends in a plane perpendicular to the runner's* axis of rotation and (b)
    is predominantly inwardly toward or outwardly from the runner's axis of
    rotation.


CLS 415/225
TXT Exit chamber in radial plane axially offset from runner (e.g., sludge pump,
    etc.):

    Device under subclass 182.1 wherein the means comprises a working fluid*
    flow cavity or chamber which the working fluid enters after having been
    acted upon by the runner*.  The cavity (a) generally extends radially in a
    plane perpendicular to the runner's axis of rotation, and (b) is spaced
    from the runner in a direction parallel to the runner's axis of rotation.

    (1)     Note.  A device merely having a working fluid flow passage which
    conducts the working fluid axially away from a runner is not included in
    this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes many devices for pumping sewage or
    sludge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203+,   for a device comprising a casing* having a tangential inlet or
    outlet, which device may have a ring shaped flow cavity spaced from the
    runner in a direction parallel to the runner's axis of rotation.

    220+,   for a device comprising a casing* with an axial flow runner, which
    device may have a flow pipe or path of annular cross section which conducts
    the working fluid away from the runner.

    913,    for a device comprising an inlet and outlet with concentric
    portions.


CLS 415/226
TXT Annular exit chamber outward of runner:

    Device under subclass 182.1 wherein the means comprises a working fluid*
    flow cavity which the working fluid enters after having been acted upon by
    the runner*.  The cavity is (a) generally in the shape of a ring (annulus)
    extending around the runner and (b) located adjacent and at a radius
    greater than the outer periphery of the runner.

    (1)     Note.  The cavity is most commonly located in the same plane as the
    runner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203+,   for a device comprising a casing* having a tangential inlet or
    outlet, which casing may also have a ring shaped flow cavity around the
    runner's outer periphery.

    208.1+, for a vaned* device which may comprise a working fluid flow cavity
    located around the outer periphery of the runner.


CLS 415/227
TXT Runner having flow confining continuous passage:

    Device under subclass 182.1 wherein the runner* comprises an uninterrupted
    working fluid* pathway which extends from the runner inlet to the runner
    outlet and wholly confines the fluid while in working engagement therewith
    over at least a portion of the pathway.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass have been cross referenced to Class
    416 where particular runner structure has been disclosed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclasses 179+ for a
    rotor comprising a flow confining or deflecting web, shroud, or continuous
    passage, particularly subclasses 186+ for a runner comprising a
    circumferentially and radially continuous web or end plate, an opposed
    annular surface, and in-between adjacent blades.


CLS 415/228
TXT Runner having full circular shroud for blades:

    Device under subclass 182.1 wherein the runner* comprises at least two
    working member blades* extending from a working fluid* flow directing
    surface, which surface (a) extends generally perpendicular to and radially
    away from the runner's axis of rotation, (b) is continuous from the center
    to the radial periphery, and (c) has a radial periphery which lies, at all
    points, at a greater radial distance from the runner's axis of rotation
    than the radially outermost point of any of the blades.

    (1)     Note.  The blades usually extend from the flow directing surface in
    a direction parallel to the runner's axis.

    (2)     Note.  The runner under this definition may be referred to as a
    semi-open impeller.

    (3)     Note.  Patents in this subclass have been cross referenced to Class
    416 where particular runner structure has been disclosed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227,    for a device including a runner comprising a flow confining
    continuous passage which may include a full circular shroud for blades.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclasses 179+ for a
    rotor comprising a flow confining or deflecting web or shroud.


CLS 415/229
TXT BEARING, SEAL, OR LINER BETWEEN SHAFT OR SHAFT SLEEVE AND STATIC PART:

    Device under the class definition comprising means located between a shaft*
    or shaft covering portion and a fixed element which (a) reduces friction
    between the shaft or shaft covering portion and the fixed element while
    providing a supporting or guiding function for the shaft or shaft covering
    portion (b) prevents or retards the flow of fluid between the shaft or
    shaft covering portion and the fixed element, or (c) prevents or retards
    wear of the shaft or shaft covering portion.

    (1)     Note.  A runner* hub structure is not considered to be a shaft
    covering portion for the purposes of this and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33+,    for a device having a runner, blade*, shaft, or bearing which
    automatically adjusts in response to shaft speed or torque.

    109,    for a device with a shaft connected fluid abutment member in a
    sealing fluid filled chamber (sealing the shaft).

    110+,   for a device with lubricating, sealing, packing, or bearing means
    having an internal working fluid* connection.

    115,    for a device with a passage in a blade*, vane*, shaft, or rotary
    distributor communicating with the working fluid*.  Such a passage may
    direct working fluid to a region between a shaft and a static part.

    116+,   for a device with a diversely  oriented inlet or an additional
    inlet for a diverse fluid, which fluid may be directed to a region between
    a shaft and a static part.

    126+,   for a device having a casing* which may have a shaft seal, bearing,
    or liner attached to and movable with the casing* for adjustment.

    132,    for a device having a bearing supporting the end of a shaft which
    bearing is axially movable to adjust the shaft.

    142,    for a device having a shaft bearing combined with or retained by an
    arm or vane* in the surrounding working fluid* space.

    168.1+, for a device having a seal, liner, or bearing between a shaft and a
    static part and means to dispose of any working fluid* leakage.

    170.1+, for a device having a bearing, seal, or liner between a nonshaft
    runner portion and a static part, which bearing, seal, or liner may also
    interact with the shaft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 5+ for devices for
    gyroscopic action which have bearings which may be between a shaft and a
    casing.  See the reference to Class 74 in section IV of the Class 415
    definition for a statement of class lines.

    384,    Bearings, for a shaft bearing or guide, per se.


CLS 415/230
TXT Seal:

    Device under the subclass 229 wherein the means prevents or retards the
    flow of fluid between the shaft* or shaft covering and the fixed element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168.2+, for a device having means for handling working fluid* leakage
    through a seal between a runner* or shaft and a static part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process (e.g., seal between a runner* and another relatively movable part,
    seal between the two relatively moving members, does not recite enough
    details of the rotary kinetic device, etc.), subclasses 345+ for a seal
    between relatively movable parts (i.e., a dynamic seal).


CLS 415/231
TXT Resiliently biased:

    Device under the subclass 230 comprising an element which urges, by
    spring-type force, the (seal) means toward a predetermined position.


CLS 415/232
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Device under the class definition not provided for in the above subclasses.

    (1)     Note.  Patents directed to particular runner* structure but
    properly assignable to Class 415 have been placed in the Class 415
    schedule, where most appropriate (note, in particular, subclasses 182.1+),
    and have been cross referenced to Class 416.  See section IV of the Class
    415 definitions for a discussion of class lines.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182.1+, for a device comprising working fluid passage or distributing means
    for a runner* (e.g., casing*, etc.).  Note, in particular, subclasses 216.1
    with specific shaft* shape or material, 217.1 with runner having corrosion
    resistant or nonmetallic portion, and 218.1 with runner having conical hub
    including small diameter facing upstream.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), for particular runner
    structure.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS

    The following subclasses are collections of published disclosures
    pertaining to various specified aspects of the rotary kinetic fluid motor*
    and pump* art which aspects do not form appropriate bases for subclasses in
    the foregoing classification (i.e., subclasses superior hereto in the
    schedule).  Only cross-reference patent copies reside in the
    cross-reference art collection subclasses; these subclasses do not contain
    "original" patent copies.

    These subclasses may be of further assistance to the searcher, either as a
    starting point in searching this class or as an indication of further
    related fields of search inside or outside the class.  Thus, there is here
    provided a second access for retrieval of a limited number of types of
    disclosures.

    (1)     Note.  Disclosures are placed in these subclasses for their value
    as references and as leads to appropriate main or secondary fields of
    search, without regard to their original classification or their claimed
    subject matter.

    (2)     Note.  The disclosures found in the following subclasses are
    examples, only, of the indicated subject matter, and in no instance do they
    represent the entire extent of the prior art.


CLS 415/900
TXT ROTARY BLOOD PUMP:

    Rotary device which adds energy to working fluid* (i.e., "pump"* device)
    comprising blood.


CLS 415/901
TXT DRILLED WELL-TYPE PUMP:

    Rotary device which adds energy to working fluid* (i.e., "pump"* device).
    The device operates to draw working fluid through a well shaft usually
    bored into the earth.

    (1)     Note.  The working fluid usually comprises oil, gas, water, or
    brine.


CLS 415/902
TXT ROTARY PUMP TURBINE PUBLICATIONS:

    Published material, other than patents, relating to a rotary device which
    adds energy to working fluid* (i.e., "pump"* device) or which obtains
    mechanical power from kinetic or potential energy in a working fluid (i.e.,
    "motor"* device).  Such material includes magazine articles, company
    brochures, text excerpts, etc.


CLS 415/903
TXT WELL BIT DRIVE TURBINE:

    Rotary device which obtains mechanical power from kinetic or potential
    energy in a working fluid* (i.e., "motor"* device) to drive a boring cutter
    for drilling a well shaft, usually in the earth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    904,    for a motor device for driving a tool other than one for drilling a
    well (e.g., dental drill, etc.).


CLS 415/904
TXT TOOL DRIVE TURBINE (E.G., DENTAL DRILL, ETC.):

    Rotary device which obtains mechanical power from kinetic or potential
    energy in a working fluid* (i.e., "motor"* device) to drive an implement or
    tool other than one for drilling a well shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    903,    for a motor device for driving a boring cutter for drilling a well
    shaft.


CLS 415/905
TXT NATURAL FLUID CURRENT MOTOR:

    Rotary device which obtains mechanical power from kinetic or potential
    energy in a flowing, unconfined, and natural working fluid* such as a wind
    or water stream (i.e., "motor"* device).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.1+,   for a natural fluid current motor device with means for controlling
    a casing or other flow guiding means in response to natural fluid current
    force or direction.

    7,      for a natural fluid current motor device comprising a float
    supported or buoyant runner.


CLS 415/906
TXT Having specific features for water current:

    Device under subclass 905 comprising structure particularly adapted to a
    natural water current environment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.1,    for a pump* or motor* with means for controlling casing* or flow
    guiding means in response to natural fluid current force or direction which
    pump or motor has specific features for water current.

    7,      for a device comprising a float supported or buoyant runner.


CLS 415/907
TXT Vertical runner axis:

    Device under subclass 905 wherein the runner's* axis of rotation is
    generally parallel to the force of gravity acting on the working fluid*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.2,    for a rotary pump* or motor* with means for controlling casing* or
    flow guiding means in response to natural fluid current force, which pump
    or motor has a vertical runner axis.

    4.4,    for a rotary pump* or motor* with means for controlling casing* or
    flow guiding means in response to natural fluid current direction, which
    pump or motor has a vertical runner axis.


CLS 415/908
TXT Axial flow runner:

    Device under subclass 905 wherein the working fluid* path to, through, and
    from the runner* is predominantly parallel to the runner's axis of rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.3,    for a rotary pump* or motor* with means for controlling casing* or
    flow guiding means in response to natural fluid current force, which pump
    or motor includes an axial flow runner.

    4.5,    for a rotary pump* or motor* with means for controlling casing* or
    flow guiding means in response to natural fluid current direction, which
    pump or motor includes an axial flow runner.


CLS 415/909
TXT AIR STACK OR SHAFT HAVING NATURAL FLUID CURRENT MOTOR:

    Rotary device comprising a pipe, cylinder, column, or other conduit through
    which the working fluid* is nonmechanically induced to flow.  The working
    fluid flows through the pipe, cylinder, column, or other conduit to or from
    a natural body of air and the device obtains mechanical power from kinetic
    or potential energy associated with this flow (i.e., "motor"* device).

    (1)     Note.  The working fluid current is induced to flow by
    nonmechanical means such as by convection, by a naturally occurring
    pressure differential, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.1+,   for a natural fluid current motor device with means for controlling
    a casing or other flow guiding means in response to natural fluid current
    force or direction.

    905+,   for a natural fluid current motor.


CLS 415/910
TXT REVERSIBLE BETWEEN PUMP AND MOTOR USE:

    Rotary device which is adapted for use alternately to add energy to a
    working fluid* (i.e., "pump"* device) or to obtain mechanical power from
    kinetic or potential energy in the working fluid (i.e., "motor"* device).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21+,    for automatically controlled rotary devices many of which disclose
    similar convertibility.


CLS 415/911
TXT PUMP HAVING REVERSIBLE RUNNER ROTATION AND SEPARATE OUTLETS FOR OPPOSING
    DIRECTIONS OF ROTATION:

    Rotary device which adds energy to working fluid* (i.e., "pump"* device)
    and which comprises means to selectively rotate a runner* in one or an
    opposite direction.  The device further comprises a working fluid exit
    means which operates exclusively when the runner is rotated in one
    direction, and a different working fluid exit means which operates
    exclusively when the runner is rotated in an opposite direction.

    (1)     Note.  This collection is not intended to include a device having a
    working fluid flow path which is merely reversed when the runner's
    direction of rotation is reversed.


CLS 415/912
TXT INTERCHANGEABLE PARTS TO VARY PUMPING CAPACITY OR SIZE OF PUMP:

    Rotary device which adds energy to working fluid* (i.e., "pump"* device)
    and comprises pieces intended to be exchanged with other pieces within or
    separate from the device to change (a) the maximum or minimum working
    fluid* flow which can be handled by the device or (b) working fluid pumping
    characteristics of the device.


CLS 415/913
TXT INLET AND OUTLET WITH CONCENTRIC PORTIONS:

    Rotary pump* or motor* device comprising working fluid* entrance and exit
    passages which (a) extend along a common axis and (b) are positioned one
    within another.


CLS 415/914
TXT DEVICE TO CONTROL BOUNDARY LAYER:

    Rotary pump* or motor* device comprising particular means to influence
    working fluid* immediately adjacent a surface along which the working fluid
    flows.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    for a device with a passage in a blade*, vane*, shaft*, or rotary
    distributor communicating with the working fluid, which device may include
    boundary layer control means.


CLS 415/915
TXT PUMP OR PORTION THEREOF BY CASTING OR MOLDING:

    Rotary device which adds energy to working fluid* (i.e., "pump"* device).
    The device comprises a part which is constructed by pouring material into a
    mold or hollow form.


CLS 415/916
TXT PERPETUAL MOTION DEVICES:

    Rotary pump* or motor* device which claims to operate in a closed
    environment without a sustaining energy source.


CLS 416/
TTL FLUID REACTION SURFACES (I.E.,  IMPELLERS)

CLS 416/
TXT INDEX TO CLASS DEFINITION



    I.      DEFINITION OF TERMS

    II.     SUBJECT MATTER OF THE CLASS

    III.    GENERAL PLACEMENT OF PATENTS BASED ON A LINE APPLICABLE TO AN ART
    GROUP

    IV.     SEARCH CLASS NOTES INCLUDING CLASS LINES

    V.      INDEX TO CLASS SEARCH NOTES IN CLASS DEFINITION SECTIONS AND
    SUBCLASSES OF THE CLASS

    ....

    I.      DEFINITION OF TERMS

    The following terms or words, used throughout the titles and definitions,
    are set forth with the meaning each is to have in this class.  Throughout
    this bulletin an asterisk(*) following the first occurrence of the word or
    term in any title, definition or note that reference should be made to this
    glossary for the specific meaning thereof.



    Angle of Attack - The acute angle between the chord* of a working member*
    and the velocity vector of the working fluid* flow relative to the member.
    See Figure I.

    Blade - A working member* which has a thickness dimension substantially
    less than its width or length, the thickness being generally uniform from
    edge to edge.

    Blade Angle - The acute angle between the chord* of any section of a
    rotating working member* and its plane of rotation.  As the blade angle
    usually varies from the hub to the tip, the U.S. custom is to designate
    blade angle numerically as that angle occurring at 75% of the radial
    distance from the hub to the tip.  See Figures I and II.

    Carrier - A Load bearing structure (e.g., hub, etc.) which mounts one or
    more working members* and which, at least in part, partakes of the motion
    of the member.

    Chord - The straight line in a plane normal to the longitudinal axis of a
    working member* joining the leading and trailing edges of the member*.  See
    Figure I.

    Impeller - A device comprising at least one working member* which functions
    to react with a working fluid* such that action movement of the member
    causes reaction movement of the fluid or action movement of the fluid
    causes reaction movement of the working member.  In its simplest form, a
    single impeller is considered to comprise a working member or members and
    any parts rigidly connected therewith whereby the impeller is supported for
    movement.  In the case of an impeller having a working member which has
    relative movement with respect to another impeller part or another working
    member, the definition of impeller is considered to include those
    mechanical elements which permit or cause relative motion of the working
    members and at least partly partake of the motion of the working member and
    are closely associated therewith to form a unitary device having a unitary
    impelling function.

    In view of the many embodiments an impeller may have, it is not possible to
    more definitely define the concept, but in most cases it will be apparent
    which elements forms part of the impeller and which elements, on the other
    hand, comprise support* means for the impeller of means for transmitting
    power to or from the impeller.  In those subclasses in which the precise
    limits of the impeller, per se, are apt to be troublesome, an effort is
    made to define the impeller concept in more detail insofar as it concerns
    the concept of the particular subclass.

    Pitch (geometrical) _ The distance an element of a rotating impeller* would
    advance in one revolution if it were moving along a helix having an angle
    equal to the impeller blade angle*.

    (A)     Controllable pitch _ Comprises means for adjusting blade angle*
    during impeller* operation.

    (1)     Collective Pitch Change _ Wherein the blade angles of all working
    members* of a single impeller are adjusted simultaneously.

    (2)     Cyclic Pitch Change - Wherein the blade angle of each working
    member of an impeller is varied for only a predetermined limited portion of
    each working cycle, each working member being similarly adjusted in
    sequence as it, in turn, reaches the predetermined portion of the working
    cycle. though the impeller need comprise only a single working member.

    Support - A structure which bears the weight of an impeller* to maintain it
    in operative position.  The support does not partake of the working motion
    of the impeller (in this respect the support is different from the
    carrier*) but may be adjustable to various positions of use or have
    movement concurrent with the impeller movement as that of a rotatable or
    oscillating fan support.

    Working Fluid - An unconfined or undirected fluid which acts or reacts with
    a working member* such that movement of the fluid causes relative movement
    of the member or movement of the member causes relative movement of the
    fluid.  The fluid may be quiescent or flowing and either natural (e.g.,
    wind) or artificial (e.g., combustion gas).  A patent including claimed
    means for confining, guiding or directing the fluid to or from an impeller*
    will be classified in Class 415, Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps.  A
    waterfall has been determined to be directed fluid and an impeller claimed
    in combination therewith is classified in Class 415.

    Working Member - A unitary means of which at least one surface functions to
    act or react with a working fluid* such that movement of the means causes
    movement of the fluid or movement of the fluid causes movement of the
    means.  The working member is most commonly designated as a blade, bucket
    or vane.

    II.     SUBJECT MATTER OF THE CLASS

    A.      This class provides the locus for all fluid impellers* not
    elsewhere classifiable.

    1.      The working fluid*, which is acted on by or acts upon the impeller,
    may be a liquid or gas.

    B.      This class also takes miscellaneous subcombinations of impellers
    and accessory devices when the subcombination or accessory is limited in
    use to the combination or not elsewhere classifiable.

    III.    GENERAL PLACEMENT OF PATENTS BASED ON A LINE APPLICABLE TO AN ART
    GROUP

    Impellers* combined with structure or art devices are found in many classes
    wherein the impeller function is incidental or ancillary to the function of
    the combination.  In those instances where an impeller relates to
    combinations in a similar manner in more than one class, a single line has
    been established to determine the placement of art.

    No attempt has been made to review the classification of all patents found
    in classes which may involve an impeller as an element of the class subject
    matter.  Thus, it is to be noted that although the original classification
    of a patent may not be consistent with a line set out below, currently
    issuing patents will be classified on the basis of the stated lines and the
    various patents currently classified inconsistent therewith are to be
    transferred when noted.

    A.      Vehicle Propulsion _ This class provides for the combination of a
    vehicular device and an impeller* not otherwise classified wherein the
    impeller is arranged to propel the device and no more structure of the
    device is claimed than is necessary to mount the impeller inclusive of any
    impeller motor or drive means.  Any additional recitation of vehicle
    structure or any modification of the vehicular device will require
    classification in the proper vehicle class.

    (1)     Note.  The structure of the vehicle is considered to be
    significantly claimed in any instance wherein the impeller, its power
    plant, motor or drive mechanism is mounted or located (1) in a specific
    relation  with respect to the vehicular device as a unit (e.g.,
    perpendicular to longitudinal axis) or (2) on or in a relationship to a
    specific vehicle part (e.g.,wing or keel).

    (2)     Note.  Merely locating the impeller or drive means by broad
    reference to the vehicular device is not sufficient to exclude the patent
    from classification in this class (e.g., attached at side, front, rear,
    bow, stern, top, bottom, right, left, within or without the vehicle or at
    the water line). However, additional relationships will be sufficient for
    classification in the proper vehicle class (e.g., one impeller on each side
    or an impeller drive mounted within the vehicle rearwardly of the center of
    gravity).

    (3)     Note.  Terms such as deck, cabin, wing, fender, keel and gunwale
    are considered to be specific vehicle parts, per se, while fore, aft, bow,
    stern, hull or fuselage are not, of themselves, so considered.

    IV.     SEARCH CLASS NOTES INCLUDING CLASS LINES

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 495+ for a motor operated by the buoyancy
    of a fluid or by the vertical component of tides or waves.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, for the combination with a named
    impeller* which is recited as a nominal load, i.e., no detail of the
    impeller or its relationship with the gearing or transmission is recited.

    244,    Aeronautics, for the combination of impellers* and aircraft
    structure where more aircraft details are recited than is necessary to
    mount the impellers.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for the combination of a sealing
    means between relatively moving parts, one of which may be an impeller*
    shaft, where no specific details are recited of the impeller or other fluid
    reaction surface mounted on the shaft.

    366,    Agitating, appropriate subclasses for (1) the combination of an
    agitating impeller* and a confining means (e.g., mixing chamber, etc.), (2)
    the combination of an agitating impeller and means functionally related to
    confining means for a fluid being agitated (e.g., structure which scrapes
    chamber walls; support specialized for use in or on a mixing chamber or
    closure therefore feed or discharge means to point of agitation; etc.), or
    (3) am impeller per se which is disclosed solely for agitating viscous or
    particulate solids, such as dough or sand.

    384,    Bearings, for the combination of a broadly recited impeller* and a
    bearing element supporting the impeller shaft.  The recitation of a "blade"
    impeller is considered to be a detail sufficient to exclude a claim from
    Class 384 and classify it in Class 416.

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, for a fluid reaction surface
    (impeller*) and a means for guiding a fluid to, around or from the surface.

    The relationship between Classes 415 and 416 is that of combination -
    subcombination respectively.  However, patents in Class 415, subclasses
    182.1 and 208.1 - 232, which claim a nominally recited casing and
    particular runner structure have been cross referenced to Class 416.  For a
    complete search of runner or impeller structure, other appropriate
    subclasses in Class 415 should be considered.

    440,    Marine Propulsion  Appropriate subclasses for the combination of an
    impeller* and significant ship structure and see Class Definition III A of
    this class (416) for a detailed statement of the line with vehicle classes
    in general.

    (1)     Note.  As an exception to the line set out above, the collection of
    portable propellers (e.g., outboard motor type) in subclasses 53+ of Class
    440 has not been cleared at this time and such disclosures will continue to
    be there classified.

    V.      INDEX TO CLASS SEARCH NOTES IN CLASS DEFINITION SECTIONS AND
    SUBCLASSES OF THE CLASS

                                    CLASS 416

    CLASS                   SECTION  SUBCLASS

    29,     Metal Working                   1

    30,     Cutlery                 70

    43,     Fishing, Trapping,
            and Vermin Destroying           501

    52,     Static Structures
            (e.g., Buildings)                       227

    60,     Power Plants            IV      20, 34,120

    74,     Machine Element
            or Mechanism            IV      120

    160,    Flexible or Portable
            Closure, Partition,
            or Panel                        501

    178,    Telegraphy                      34

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-
            Driven                  176, 204

    244,    Aeronautics             IV      4,20,120,
                                    123

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture            IV

    297,    Chairs and Seats                        56

    384,    Bearings                IV

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power
            Systems                 34,120

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical
            Systems and Devices             34,120

    362,    Illumination                    5

    366,    Agitating               IV

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions

    440,    Marine Propulsion       IV      74,78,84
                       86,120,247

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid
            Motors or Pumps;                IIV     4,193,
                                    195,199,223


CLS 416/1
TXT Method under the class definition including a step relating to the
    operation or use of impeller* structure.

    (1)     Note.  This class does not provide for a claim relating to
    apparatus for manufacture or process of manufacture of an impeller.  Where
    a product of manufacture (i.e., impeller) claim and either or both an
    apparatus for manufacture claim or process of manufacture claim are
    contained in the same patent, the patent will be classified here in the
    appropriate article subclass and cross-referenced to the appropriate
    fabricating class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 23.51 and 889+ for apparatus and
    processes, respectively, for making impellers methods for making impellers.


CLS 416/2
TXT Apparatus under the class definition wherein some portion of an impeller*
    or the means connecting it to a support* comprises (1) a weakened zone or
    connecting part whereby destruction or separation of the apparatus due to
    external forces occurs in a predetermined manner or (2) a fusible zone or
    connecting part whereby excessive heat effects predetermined destruction or
    separation of the apparatus.


CLS 416/3
TXT Apparatus under the class definition wherein an impeller* is caused to
    operate by direct response of one or more working members* to an electrical
    or magnetic effect (e.g., the working member functions like the armature of
    an electric motor).


CLS 416/4
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a rotary working member*
    having a smooth substantially uninterrupted circumferentially continuous
    skin surface (e.g., cylinder) which contacts the working fluid* such that
    reaction between the member and the fluid occurs solely as a result of
    friction contact therebetween.

    (1)     Note.  The friction contact between the working member and the
    working fluid may be for the purpose of driving the member or pumping the
    fluid or, in the case of a magnus rotor exerting a lateral thrust on the
    apparatus by reason of the unbalanced or asymmetrical distribution of fluid
    pressures about the circumference of the working member (generally a
    cylinder) resulting from a layer of fluid which is more or less adherent to
    the surface of the member, moving at one side of the rotary member in a
    direction contrary to that of the flowing fluid and at the opposite side of
    the member in the same direction as the fluid flow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 643 for an endless belt or
    chain-like member adapted to lift a viscous fluid from a body thereof as a
    result of the property of the fluid to adhere to the member.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 10 and 21 for cylindrical rotor sustaining
    means combined with aircraft.

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, subclass 90 for similar
    apparatus having medium fluid confining or directing means.


CLS 416/5
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising an impeller* in combination
    with a light producing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, appropriate subclasses and the notes to the
    definitions of such subclasses, for the combination of an illuminating
    means with a device other than an impeller.


CLS 416/6
TXT Apparatus under the class definition wherein the impeller* is driven by a
    working fluid in an intermittent rhythmic flow, as ocean waves, or made up
    of two or more different flowing mediums, as wind and stream flow.


CLS 416/7
TXT Apparatus under the class definition wherein the carrier* of an impeller*
    comprises an endless, elongated flexible member (e.g., chain or belt,
    etc.), which supports one or more working members* through a path of
    operation.

    (1)     Note.  The working member, which generally comprises a bucket or
    blade-like* member supported on the endless carrier, may comprise an
    endless carrier having a surface configuration which functions like a blade
    or bucket.


CLS 416/8
TXT Apparatus under subclass 7 in which at least one working member is movable
    during operation to a different or inoperative position relative to support
    connection with the endless flexible member without intervention of a human
    operator.


CLS 416/9
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising an impeller* which is acted
    upon by a flowing working fluid* to produce a mechanical output and means
    for orienting the impeller, relative to the direction of flow.

    (1)     Note.  This definition does not include a mere nominal recitation
    of a tail vane or rudder.


CLS 416/10
TXT Apparatus under subclass 9 comprising means to cause or permit deflection
    of the impeller from a normal operative position aligned with the direction
    of working fluid flow to a position wherein the impeller is oriented at an
    angle to the direction of flow.


CLS 416/11
TXT Apparatus under subclass 10 wherein the impeller is mounted downstream of a
    vertical axis about which it swings, whereby it tends normally to be
    aligned with the direction of working fluid flow.


CLS 416/12
TXT Apparatus under subclass 10 wherein the impeller is oriented at an angle to
    the direction of working fluid flow in response to folding or feathering of
    a vane or rudder which tends to maintain a position aligned with the
    direction of flow.

    (1)     Note.  The vane or rudder folding or feathering includes shifting
    of a substantially flat vane or rudder surface from a vertical toward a
    horizontal plane or varying the extent of the effective flat surface.


CLS 416/13
TXT Apparatus under subclass 10 wherein the impeller is pivotally mounted to
    swing in a horizontal plane, the swinging movement being caused by movement
    of a vane or rudder relative to the impeller, which vane or rudder tends to
    maintain a position aligned with the direction of working fluid flow and
    thus urges the impeller to swing to an inoperative position.


CLS 416/14
TXT Apparatus under subclass 13 comprising means for retarding or ceasing
    impeller motion.


CLS 416/15
TXT Apparatus under subclass 13 wherein the impeller deflection is effected or
    controlled directly or indirectly by a reactive surface distinct from the
    impeller and normally arranged substantially transverse to the direction of
    working fluid flow when the impeller is headed transverse of the flow
    direction.


CLS 416/16
TXT Apparatus under subclass 13 wherein the impeller and the vane or rudder are
    so connected and arranged that they tend, by virtue of the weight of at
    least one of these elements, to seek one or the other of their extreme
    position of adjustment (i.e., operative or inoperative).


CLS 416/17
TXT Apparatus under subclass 9 wherein the impeller motion is regular and
    recurrent (e.g., oscillatory, rotary, etc.) and one or more working
    members* thereof assume a changed operative relationship to the flowing
    medium at a predetermined point in the cycle of operation, the point at
    which the cyclic working member motion occurs being maintained at a
    constant fixed relation to the direction of working fluid flow.


CLS 416/18
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a rotating inertial
    reference means which tends to remain in its own plane of rotation due to
    gyroscopic stability and is so linked to an impeller* or working member*
    which normally rotates in a parallel plane that angular displacement of
    either rotation plane relative to the other causes a corrective force or
    pitch change to occur so as to return the impeller or member to rotation in
    a plane parallel to that of the reference means.


CLS 416/19
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising an impeller consisting of a
    single working member and provided with a mass arranged to counter-balance
    the mass of the working member.


CLS 416/20
TXT Apparatus under the class definition wherein the impelling movement of a
    driven impeller* is effected in one direction by the expulsion of a working
    fluid from a working member* orifice in an opposite direction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 200.1+ for a jet reaction motors not
    significantly combined with an impeller.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 73+ for aircraft propelled by a jet motor.


CLS 416/21
TXT Apparatus under subclass 20 wherein the working member includes a
    combustion chamber mounted thereon or formed integral therewith.


CLS 416/22
TXT Apparatus under subclass 21 comprising a rotary impeller having one or more
    working members projecting radially from the rotation axis and wherein a
    unitary structure open at its ends is mounted at the outer tip of a working
    member, one opening admitting air and the other expelling working fluid.


CLS 416/23
TXT Apparatus under the class definition wherein a working member* comprises a
    fluid reaction surface having a part or a member mounted thereon for
    varying the flow of fluid to or from the working member and including
    positive means to move the flow varying member relative to the fluid
    reactive surface while the working member is being operated in its intended
    manner.

    (1)     Note.  A working member comprised of relatively movable parts
    movable merely for the purpose of increasing or decreasing the effective
    operative diameter or the apparatus is not included in this definition and
    is classified in subclass 88 below.


CLS 416/24
TXT Apparatus under subclass 23 wherein the working member impelling motion is
    regular and recurrent (e.g., oscillatory, rotary, etc.) and the working
    member or flowvarying member assumes a changed operative relationship to
    the working fluid at a predetermined point in the cycle of operation.


CLS 416/25
TXT Apparatus under the class definition wherein control means for operation or
    adjustment of an impeller* means and control means for operation or
    adjustment of means for driving or being driven by the impeller are so
    correlated that actuation of one control means causes actuation of the
    other or said control means comprise, at least in part, structure common to
    both operations or adjustments.


CLS 416/26
TXT Apparatus under subclass 25 wherein the impeller operation or adjustment
    control means comprises means for varying the blade angle* of an impeller
    and the control means for the impeller driving or driven means comprises
    brake or clutch means therefor.


CLS 416/27
TXT Apparatus under subclass 25 wherein the impeller operation or adjustment
    control means comprises means for varying the blade angle* of an impeller
    and the control means for the impeller driving or driven means comprises
    means for varying the flow or fuel or motive fluid to an impeller drive
    engine or motor, at least one of the controls being actuated by means which
    senses a condition.


CLS 416/28
TXT Apparatus under subclass 27 wherein the condition responsive control means
    is actuated by a means which senses a temperature state or variation.


CLS 416/29
TXT Apparatus under subclass 27 wherein the condition responsive control means
    is actuated by a means which senses a state or variation of the intake air
    flow to a drive engine for the impeller.


CLS 416/30
TXT Apparatus under subclass 27 wherein the control means and the condition
    sensing means, or both, comprise, at least in part, electrical apparatus.


CLS 416/31
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a means for controlling an
    apparatus part without the intervention of a human attendant in response to
    a condition that may or may not occur, a change in such condition, a lack
    of such condition or the result of such condition, the operation of said
    control means being caused or permitted by (1) a separate means which
    senses the condition (2) outward radial movement of the control means or an
    actuating mechanism where said means or mechanism is mounted for rotation
    and the radial movement due to centrifugal force occurs at a predetermined
    rate of rotation, or (3) direct or transmitted response of the control
    means to a turning, twisting or linear force on the apparatus or part
    thereof.


CLS 416/32
TXT Apparatus under subclass 31 wherein the controlled means comprises a brake
    or clutch in a transmission train driving or driven by the impeller.


CLS 416/33
TXT Apparatus under subclass 31 comprising control means for two or more
    impellers* wherein (1) the adjustment of one or more impellers is in
    response to a condition of another impeller or (2) two or more impellers
    are adjusted in response to a common condition sensing means.

    (1)     Note.  An impeller which is provided merely as an element is the
    control system for another is not considered to be a "distinct" impeller
    under this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for a device comprising automatic control in response to plural
    condition sensing and in which one of the conditions is atmospheric
    pressure (density or altitude).


CLS 416/34
TXT Apparatus under subclass 33 wherein at least two operatively related
    impellers are caused to function in a substantially identical manner to
    maintain a balanced condition.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes the synchronization of impellers in
    which the adjustment of one or more impellers is in response to a condition
    of another impeller (known as the master) or wherein plural impellers are
    so adjusted in response to a master control unit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 700+ for synchronizing of plural motors
    and see (2) Note in this class (416), subclass 120.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 41+ and 85 for
    synchronizing electric motors, and see (2) Note in subclass 120 of this
    class (416).

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 243+ and a
    synchronization of rotary shafts, and see (2) Note in subclass 120 of this
    class (416).

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 304+ for multiplex systems
    which include rotary distributors with means for synchronizing them.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 354+ for synchronizing
    the operation of a receiving and transmitting mechanisms.


CLS 416/35
TXT Apparatus under subclass 31 comprising means to manually select and fix a
    desired operating condition or characteristic or other state from which
    there should be no variation and an electrical system including (1) means
    to receive signals based on the desired and the actual condition,
    characteristic or state, respectively and to relate the signals to one
    another and (2) means to control the apparatus to reduce the variation
    between the actual and the desired state.

    (1)     Note.  Included under this definition of "electrical" are the well
    known electron devices, such as vacuum tubes, transistors, semi-conductors,
    etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for an apparatus comprising a drive motor and an impeller driven,
    thereby, interrelated controls for adjusting impeller pitch and drive motor
    throttle and an electrical system for sensing a condition or for actuating
    the controls.


CLS 416/36
TXT Apparatus under subclass 31 wherein operation of the control means for the
    apparatus part is caused or permitted in response to means which sense two
    different conditions.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of different conditions for this subclass are
    temperature, shaft speed, vehicle speed, etc.

    (2)     Note.  The sensing means need be nothing more than a single element
    capable of responding to plural diverse conditions.

    (3)     Note.  One control means may modify or control another control
    means.


CLS 416/37
TXT Apparatus under subclass 36 in which one condition sensed is a
    characteristic of the surrounding atmosphere.

    (1)     Note.  Relative air speed is considered to be wind force; altitude
    is considered to be characteristic of atmospheric density.  Both of these
    conditions are included under this definition.


CLS 416/38
TXT Apparatus under subclass 36 comprising a motor driving the impeller and in
    which one condition sensed is an operating characteristic of the motor, but
    not including rotational speed or torque developed by the motor shaft.

    (1)     Note.  A typical condition sensed for this subclass is manifold
    pressure, exhaust temperature or rate of consumption of fuel or working
    fluid for the motor.


CLS 416/39
TXT Apparatus under subclass 31 wherein the control means is actuated in
    response to means which senses (1) a temperature state or variation or (2)
    an accumulation of ice which adversely affects operation of the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for an apparatus having automatic control in response to a
    plurality of conditions and in which one condition is temperature of a
    drive engine part or of the ambient atmosphere.


CLS 416/40
TXT Apparatus under subclass 31 wherein the control means is operated in
    response to a means which senses the speed of the working fluid* relative
    to the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  The relative working fluid speed may be the measure of an
    impeller support (e.g., vehicle) movement through the medium, as commonly
    determined by a Pitot tube, or may be any other measurement of the relative
    working fluid flow either upstream or downstream of the impeller apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for a device comprising automatic control in response to plural
    condition sensing and in which one of the conditions is relative working
    fluid flow velocity, (relative air speed of the vehicle, or wind force).


CLS 416/41
TXT Apparatus under subclass 40 wherein the working fluid comprises natural
    fluid current.

    (1)     Note.  By "natural fluid current" is meant the flow of fluid due to
    atmospheric conditions or to normal water currents.  The flow of generated
    fluid (e.g., fan or blower forced), or of fluid past a moving body is not
    considered to be "natural fluid current" under this definition and devices
    having control means responsive to such flow will be found in the preceding
    subclass.


CLS 416/42
TXT Apparatus under subclass 31 wherein the control means is caused to operate
    in response to a means which senses (1) a condition of fluid pressure
    variation within the apparatus or the ambient or (2) the elevation of the
    apparatus relative to sea-level or ground-level.


CLS 416/43
TXT Apparatus under subclass 31 wherein the control means is caused to operate
    in response to a force acting on the apparatus or a part thereof which is
    sensed as the resistance to a rate or directional movement variation of the
    apparatus or part.


CLS 416/44
TXT Apparatus under subclass 31 comprising a rotating impeller* and control
    means which is caused to operate in response to a condition proportional to
    the rotational speed of the impeller.


CLS 416/45
TXT Apparatus under subclass 44 wherein the means which initiates the control
    operation comprises a valve member which is mounted so as to rotate about
    an axis and assume various positions directly in accordance with the rate
    of rotation, the control being initiated when the valve member reaches a
    predetermined position.


CLS 416/46
TXT Apparatus under subclass 44 wherein the apparatus includes means for
    retaining the impeller or working member in a selected position of
    adjustment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140,    for a mere centrifugally actuated stop means for preventing droop
    beyond a predetermined point of a resiliently mounted, articulated or
    self-shifting impeller, in the absence of automatic control means under the
    definition of this subclass 44.


CLS 416/47
TXT Apparatus under subclass 44 wherein the control means which acts on the
    apparatus part comprises a motor solely for that purpose actuable by the
    means responsive to the impeller rotation speed.

    (1)     Note.  A motor for this subclass does not include a mere spring or
    weight device but must comprise an energy conversion means such as a
    hydraulic, pneumatic or electric motor.


CLS 416/48
TXT Apparatus under subclass 47 wherein the motor is carried by and rotates
    with the impeller*.

    (1)     Note.  The motor may be carried by the working member*, the
    carrier* for the working member, the impeller shaft or any other part so
    closely associated with the impeller as to partake of the working member
    movement.


CLS 416/49
TXT Apparatus under subclass 44 including means actuated by a human attendant
    to (1) return the control system to a datum point or (2) override or
    prevent operation of the control system.


CLS 416/50
TXT Apparatus under subclass 49 wherein the means which initiates the control
    operation comprises a mass mounted so as to rotate about an axis and assume
    various radial positions in accordance with the rate of rotation, the
    control being initiated when the mass reaches a predetermined position.


CLS 416/51
TXT Apparatus under subclass 44 comprising a weight which rotates at a speed
    proportional to that of the impeller and moves towards and away from its
    axis of rotation in a straight line or is directed along a predetermined
    path by some means other than a pivoted mounting.


CLS 416/52
TXT Apparatus under subclass 44 wherein the control means which acts on the
    apparatus part comprises a mass which is caused to rotate in a varying
    radius dependent upon the speed of rotation about an axis coincident with
    the rotation axis of the shaft which supports and drives or is driven by
    the impeller.


CLS 416/53
TXT Apparatus under subclass 52 wherein the rotating mass is pivoted on an axis
    parallel to that of the axis of rotation of the impeller.


CLS 416/54
TXT Apparatus under the class definition wherein an impeller* is mounted on or
    proximate an "art device" and is powered by the relative motion of the
    device or parts thereof, the device being of special construction or
    adaptation to perform a particular function other than that directly
    related to the support or operation of the class subject matter.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in which more of the "art device" is claimed than is
    necessary to operate the impeller do not come within this definition, being
    properly classifiable with the art device, except in those cases in which
    there is no other suitable classification and the claim would be
    classifiable is subclass 146 as a "combined" apparatus in the absence of
    this or other pertinent superior subclass.

    (2)     Note.  A particular object may or may not be an "art device" for
    this subclass dependent upon the impeller relationship therewith.  For
    example, a vehicle may be an "art device" under the subclass definition
    when an attached impeller is arranged merely to cool the occupant but would
    not be so considered when arranged to propel the vehicle or to perform an
    essential function on some part thereof, as to cool the engine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146+,   for the combination of an impeller with an "art device" not
    involving operation of the impeller by the device and see (1) Note above
    for a general statement of the line with other classes.


CLS 416/55
TXT Apparatus under subclass 54 wherein the "art device" comprises a vehicle or
    like device.


CLS 416/56
TXT Apparatus under subclass 54 wherein the device comprises a contrivance
    which rocks upon a supporting runner, as a cradle or rocking chair.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclass 180.16 for a seat with means heating or
    refrigerating the seat or its occupant, said means being more than the mere
    attachment of a fan to an ordinary chair.


CLS 416/57
TXT Apparatus under subclass 56 wherein rocking of the device effects motion of
    an inertial mass which in turn transmits a drive motion to the impeller.


CLS 416/58
TXT Apparatus under subclass 56 wherein rocking of the device effects an
    uninterrupted, unidirectional, rotary movement of the impeller.


CLS 416/59
TXT Apparatus under subclass 54 wherein the device comprises a contrivance
    which swings about a supporting pivot, as a door or hammock.

    (1)     Note.  This definition does not include a swinging member which is
    merely a part of an "art device", such as a sewing machine treadle.


CLS 416/60
TXT Apparatus under subclass 54 wherein the impeller is adapted to be directly
    attached to, or may be formed as an integral part of, a rotary device such
    that rotation of the device effects impeller operation.


CLS 416/61
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means to perform quantity
    or condition measurements or observations so as to determine operating or
    structural characteristics of the apparatus or extent of motion or movement
    of some part thereof, including means of a visual or audible nature, (other
    than fixed exhibitors, e.g., signs) which give information about or permit
    viewing of (e.g., inspection window) a condition of the apparatus.


CLS 416/62
TXT Apparatus under the class definition wherein a working member* fluid
    reaction surface has supplementary means detachably mounted thereon, the
    working member being intended for operation with or without the
    supplementary means as a matter of choice.


CLS 416/63
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising (1) wheels, skids or other
    special means to facilitate movement of the apparatus, (2) means which
    specifically adapts the apparatus to be supported on some part of a human
    body or an animal or (3) hand or body engaging means to facilitate carrying
    of the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  The movement facilitating means for this definition must be
    for the purpose of facilitating movement other than that which is essential
    for the device to operate as an impeller and does not include vehicular
    structure when the impeller* comprises or is ancillary to the motive means
    thereof, classification in such instance being in the proper vehicle class.

    (2)     Note.  This definition is not intended to include a handle
    disclosed solely to facilitate support of the apparatus during operation.
    The carrying function should be specifically disclosed for classification
    here as an original.


CLS 416/64
TXT Apparatus under the class definition wherein a working member* moves in a
    straight line path as a proximate result of, or to directly effect,
    reaction between the member and the working fluid*.

    (1)     Note.  Included under this definition is a working member which
    undergoes other movements (e.g., rotary) concurrently with the straight
    line reaction motion.

    (2)     Note.  The straight-line movement for this definition must be that
    which is the immediate cause or effect of the fluid reaction and does not
    include mere adjustment (e.g., feathering) or support movement (e.g.,
    vehicular).


CLS 416/65
TXT Apparatus under subclass 64 wherein (1) the working member rotates about an
    axis simultaneously with the straight-line movement thereof, each movement
    being a proximate result of, or directly effecting, reaction between the
    member and the working fluid or (2) the apparatus includes a rotary working
    member distinct from and operative in conjunction with that member which
    moves in a straight line path.

    (1)     Note.  Included under this definition is rotary movement (other
    than for mere adjustment or of support) extending through less than 360_
    (e.g., oscillatory).


CLS 416/66
TXT Apparatus under subclass 64 wherein (1) the working member comprises
    pliable or elastic material so that it flexes during operation of the
    apparatus or (2) the working member or some portion thereof moves relative
    to the member support or other member portion during operation of the
    apparatus.


CLS 416/67
TXT Apparatus under subclass 66 wherein the movement of the working member or
    parts thereof are such to permit flow of working fluid through a defined
    aperture under predetermined operating conditions and to close off such
    through flow during other operating conditions.


CLS 416/68
TXT Apparatus under subclass 66 wherein the working member comprises a
    plurality of surfaces which pivotally move to or from one another in a
    related manner to form a unitary device wherein the various surfaces have a
    similar working fluid reactive function.


CLS 416/69
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising an impeller* which is hand
    powered and at least partially hand supported by the operator thereof.

    (1)     Note.  For this definition, hand powered or hand supported includes
    an arm or fingers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64+,    for similar devices wherein the working member reaction motion is
    along a straight line path.


CLS 416/70
TXT Apparatus under subclass 69 wherein the impeller is disclosed as being of
    the type held in and moved directly by motion of a user's hand to cause
    motion of a fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     for apparatus comprising a means which specifically adapts the
    apparatus to be supported on some part of a human body or an animal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 322+ and 324+ for tools of the fork or spoon
    type designed for the purpose of handling food.


CLS 416/71
TXT Apparatus under subclass 70 wherein the device (1) is so constructed as to
    resemble some object or being, (2) has writing or similar distinctive
    marking thereon, (3) has decorative embellishments associated therewith or
    (4) is combined with features other than impeller structure, supporting or
    attaching means therefor or impeller driving or driven means.

    (1)     Note.  For a more complete definition of a "combined" feature see
    notes under subclass 146.


CLS 416/72
TXT Apparatus under subclass 70 in which major portions of the impeller are
    movable with respect to each other while remaining connected.

    (1)     Note.  This definition does not include a mere indiscriminately
    flexible member.


CLS 416/73
TXT Apparatus under subclass 72 comprising a working member foldable into a
    more compact form by angular movement of different portions thereof about a
    common pivot normal to the member work surface.


CLS 416/74
TXT Apparatus under subclass 69 wherein the impeller is (1) caused to follow a
    predetermined path or operation by relatively fixed guide means or (2)
    supported for movement about a pivot in the manner of an oar.

    (1)     Note.  A claim to mere subcombination structure disclosed for use
    in supporting or connecting an oar in operative relation to a boat and not
    involving oar construction, blade features or feathering means is
    classified in subclasses 101+ of Class 440, Marine Propulsion.

    (2)     Note.  Classification of a claim to an oar is in Class 440, Marine
    Propulsion, regardless of impeller detail claimed, if specific boat
    structure or relationship is claimed and see the Class Definition III,A of
    this Class 416 and notes thereunder for a general statement of the line.


CLS 416/75
TXT Apparatus under subclass 69 wherein motion to the impeller is effected by
    imparting a reciprocatory motion to either component of a pin-slot
    connection.


CLS 416/76
TXT Apparatus under subclass 69 wherein motion is transmitted to the impeller
    by means of a manually operated crank handle.


CLS 416/77
TXT Apparatus under subclass 76 wherein at least two working members are so
    supported that during operation of the apparatus the moving members
    describe intersecting or overlapping paths.


CLS 416/78
TXT Apparatus under the class definition wherein a working member* or a rigid
    extension thereof is pivotally connected to a crank portion of a rotary
    shaft or a mechanical equivalent thereof and so guided or supported that
    the member has a motion resembling that of a conventional hand manipulated
    canoe paddle, sculling oar, rowing oar or stirring member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    440,    Marine Propulsion, subclasses 26+ for a marine vessel having crank
    paddle propulsion means and see Class 416, Definition, III,A, for a general
    statement of the line.


CLS 416/79
TXT Apparatus under the class definition wherein a working member* moves back
    and forth about an axis, or in an orbit, with an arc of movement of not
    more than 360_, the movement occurring as a proximate result of, or to
    directly effect, reaction between the member and the working fluid*.

    (1)     Note.  Included under this definition is a working member which
    undergoes other movements (e.g., rotary) concurrently with the oscillatory
    reaction motion, the resultant working member motion generally being
    undulatory or wave-like.

    (2)     Note.  The oscillatory movement for this definition must be that
    which is the immediate cause or effect of the fluid reaction and does not
    include mere adjustment (e.g., feathering) or support motion.


CLS 416/80
TXT Apparatus under subclass 79 comprising a weight arranged relative to the
    working member and acting as (1) a swinging member to regulate the motion
    of the working member or the drive motor (e.g., clock), (2) a mass to
    counterbalance the mass of the working member or (3) an inertia mass or
    flywheel to smooth out the oscillatory motion of the working member and
    permit it to continue its motion even after removal of the drive means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for an impeller consisting of a single working member and a weight
    positioned to counterbalance the mass of the working member.


CLS 416/81
TXT Apparatus under subclass 79 wherein the working member comprises pliant
    material.


CLS 416/82
TXT Apparatus under subclass 79 wherein the working member comprises a
    plurality of sections which move relative to one another.


CLS 416/83
TXT Apparatus under subclass 79 wherein the oscillatory working member
    concurrently undergoes some other diverse motion during the member
    operation.

    (1)     Note.  The additional motion may be somewhat distinct from the
    oscillatory motion such as cyclic feathering, or may be integral therewith
    such as continuous rotation concurrently with oscillation to produce a
    resultant wave-like motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     for a working member which oscillates in an elliptical path.


CLS 416/84
TXT Apparatus under the class definition wherein a working member* (1) is
    itself so constructed as to float in or on a working fluid or (2) has
    collapsible walls expandable to an operative shape by filling with a fluent
    material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 495+ for motors having a buoyant working
    member motivated by the vertical rise and fall of the surface of a body of
    fluid.

    440,    Marine Propulsion, subclasses 98+ for a marine vessel having a
    buoyant propeller.


CLS 416/85
TXT Apparatus under the class definition wherein an impeller* is supported in a
    working fluid by buoyant means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 495+ for motors having a buoyant working
    member motivated by the vertical rise and fall of the surface of a body of
    fluid.


CLS 416/86
TXT Apparatus under subclass 85 wherein the buoyant support means comprises a
    hub or peripheral annulus to which the impeller working members are
    directly attached.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    440,    Marine Propulsion, subclasses 98+ for a marine vessel having a
    buoyant propelling device.


CLS 416/87
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a rotating working member*
    and wherein the working member dimension normal to the rotation axis may be
    lengthened or shortened to change the effective operative diameter of the
    apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include mere cyclic radial movement
    of a working member wherein the overall diameter of the impeller remains
    unchanged.


CLS 416/88
TXT Apparatus under subclass 87 wherein (1) the working member surface area or
    configuration is alterable, as by collapsing or by telescoping parts, or
    (2) the working member is attached to a carrier or support solely by means
    which cannot sustain the member in a fixed position.


CLS 416/89
TXT Apparatus under subclass 87 wherein the blade angle* of the working member
    may be selectively varied.


CLS 416/90
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a working member* including
    conduit means for conducting a flow of fluid therethrough and wherein
    either the inlet or outlet to the flow conducting means is on the working
    member for the intake or discharge of fluid directly to or from the working
    fluid*.

    (1)     Note.  Impellers having means for modifying the aerodynamic action
    of the blades thereof by giving motion to the layer of fluid in contact
    with the blades by an intake or discharge of fluid adjacent the layer
    (i.e., boundary layer excitation) are here classified.

    (2)     Note.  A mere apertured, looped or foraminous working member
    wherein the medium fluid flows substantially uninterruptedly through the
    member is not included under this definition, being properly classifiable
    in subclasses 227+ or 231 below.


CLS 416/91
TXT Apparatus under subclass 90 wherein both the inlet and outlet to the
    passage are open to the working fluid, the flow within the passage
    comprised, at least in part, of working fluid.


CLS 416/92
TXT Apparatus under subclass 90 wherein the working member is supported for
    rotation on a shaft and the entire fluid flow out of the member conduit is
    at the periphery in a direction substantially perpendicular to the axis of
    rotation.


CLS 416/93
TXT Apparatus under the class definition wherein either a portion of the
    working fluid* encompassing the impeller* or the exhaust gas from an
    impeller* drive engine is caused to flow through (1) the impeller hub, (2)
    drag or head resistance reducing means such as a smooth outline member or
    covering supported on the impeller carrier* or (3) an enclosing cover for
    an apparatus part, such as a drive motor or transmission.


CLS 416/94
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93 wherein the working fluid or exhaust gas is
    caused to flow through an aircraft spinner or cowling.


CLS 416/95
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means associated therewith (1)
    to heat or cool the apparatus or working fluid* or to minimize the transfer
    of heat thereto or therefrom by shielding or structural arrangement.

    (1)     Note.  Insofar as many arrangements, structures and materials
    inherently function to heat, cool or insulate, the patent must disclose
    heating, cooling or insulation as a function of the claimed subject matter
    for classification in this subclass.


CLS 416/96
TXT Apparatus under subclass 95 comprising a working member* or carrier* having
    (1) a chamber therein containing a material which is capable of changing
    its physical state from or to a solid, liquid, or gas, thereby transferring
    heat between itself and the working member or carrier or (2) passage means
    therein through which a heat exchange fluid is caused to flow.


CLS 416/97
TXT Apparatus under subclass 96 wherein the heat exchange fluid (1) comprises
    working fluid* directed into the flow passage or (2) is exhausted into the
    working fluid.


CLS 416/98
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a working member* which
    rotates about a "fixed" axis and undergoes at least one different and
    distinct movement concurrently with the rotary motion.

    (1)     Note.  The different movements for purposes of this subclass may be
    any combination of differing types, as rotary and oscillating, the same
    type movement about different axes, as plural rotary.

    (2)     Note.  One of the movements may be of the unitary device such as a
    rotary fan supported* for oscillation, however, movement of an art device
    with which an impeller* may be combined does not comprise one of the
    motions for this subclass where such motion is incidental to, or the
    resultant of, impeller operation such as the motion of an impeller powered
    vehicle.

    (3)     Note.  An axis is considered "fixed" even though it may be movable
    for purpose of adjustment or support on a movable art device such as a
    vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     for an impeller guided along a trackway or cable.

    131+,   for an articulated working member or shiftable impeller movable
    during operation in response to dynamic forces exerted thereon.

    147+,   for manual or noncyclic means for adjusting an impeller or working
    member.


CLS 416/99
TXT Apparatus under subclass 98 comprising a working member supported* for
    rotation about a shaft carried by another rotating working member.


CLS 416/100
TXT Apparatus under subclass 98 comprising an impeller supported for rotation
    about an axis and wherein the support structure comprising the rotation
    axis is caused to partake of a continuous angular oscillating movement
    across the rotation axis concurrently with the impeller rotatory motion.


CLS 416/101
TXT Apparatus under subclass 98 wherein the rotary working member is supported
    or guided to move radially inward or outward with respect to the fixed
    rotation axis to assume a particular operative position at a predetermined
    point in each rotation cycle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87,     for a radially extensible or retractible working member wherein the
    effective operative diameter of the apparatus is changed.


CLS 416/102
TXT Apparatus under subclass 98 wherein the rotary member is supported for
    movement relative to the fixes rotation axis to assume a particular
    operative position at a predetermined point in each rotation cycle in
    response to tilting or inclining of the carrier*, as a unit, relative to
    the fixed rotation axis of the apparatus.


CLS 416/103
TXT Apparatus under subclass 98 comprising an impeller* of the type having one
    or more bladed working members which project radially outward from a
    rotation axis, such as a helicopter rotor, the inner radial end of each
    working member being pivotally attached to a carrier* for movement about an
    axis parallel to the rotation axis such that the member oscillates
    forwardly (in the direction of rotation) during a portion of the rotation
    cycle (lead) and oscillated rearwardly (opposite the direction of rotation)
    during another portion of the rotation cycle (lag).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141,    for "free blade" mountings not involving means for causing cyclic
    blade movement.


CLS 416/104
TXT Apparatus under subclass 103 wherein the lead-lag movement of the blade
    effects or is effected by additional movement, e.g., change of pitch, of
    the same or another blade.


CLS 416/105
TXT Apparatus under subclass 103 comprising mechanism for moving the blade
    about the lead-lag axis.


CLS 416/106
TXT Apparatus under subclass 103 provided with means to limit the extent or
    reduce the frequency of blade movement about the lead-lag axis.


CLS 416/107
TXT Apparatus under subclass 106 wherein the movement restraining means is of
    the resilient biasing or limit stop type.


CLS 416/108
TXT Apparatus under subclass 98 wherein the concurrent movement is effected by
    an actuating means which is caused to follow an orbital path of varying
    radius about the rotation axis of the working member.


CLS 416/109
TXT Apparatus under subclass 108 wherein the eccentric actuating means
    comprises a guide surface or track which is fixedly eccentrically supported
    relative to the rotatable working member.


CLS 416/110
TXT Apparatus under subclass 98 wherein the working member simultaneously and
    uninterruptedly rotates about two or more different axes.


CLS 416/111
TXT Apparatus under subclass 110 wherein the different axes are parallel to one
    another.


CLS 416/112
TXT Apparatus under subclass 98 wherein the concurrent movement is effected in
    response to engagement of the rotating working member, or means connected
    thereto, with a stationary guide means or a static obstruction in the path
    of movement.


CLS 416/113
TXT Apparatus under subclass 112 wherein the movement effecting means includes
    a surface axially inclined with respect to the impeller rotation axis
    (e.g., a helical cam).


CLS 416/114
TXT Apparatus under subclass 113 wherein the axially inclined surface is
    movable at will by a human attendant to various positions to change the
    concurrent movement of the working member.


CLS 416/115
TXT Apparatus under subclass 114 in which the concurrent movements of a
    plurality of impellers are varied at will.


CLS 416/116
TXT Apparatus under subclass 112 wherein the movement effecting means comprises
    a cam track or guide surface fixedly supported relative to the impeller
    rotation axis.


CLS 416/117
TXT Apparatus under subclass 98 wherein the working member concurrent movement
    occurs in response to the force of gravity or the working fluid acting on
    the working member or apparatus part directly connected thereto.


CLS 416/118
TXT Apparatus under subclass 117 including means actuated by a human attendant
    to modify or affect the operation of the apparatus.


CLS 416/119
TXT Apparatus under subclass 117 wherein the rotational movement and the
    concurrent movement are each about axes parallel to one another.


CLS 416/120
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising two impellers* which are
    independently supported* or which move relative to one another during use.

    (1)     Note.  Movement of one impeller relative to another comprises (1)
    different impelling movement (e.g., rotation in the opposite direction, in
    the same direction at variable speeds, or positive drive of one and free
    rotation of another), (2) relative pitch* adjustment, or (3) moving one
    impeller closer to or away from another impeller by means other than mere
    adjustment of securing means for the impeller.

    (2)     Note.  Synchronizing means for a plurality of motors driving
    individual impellers is in Class 318, Electricity: Motive Power Systems,
    subclasses 41+ where the motors have synchronizing interconnections, and
    subclass 85 where the motors have a synchronizing or phasing control; a
    synchronizer for plurality of shafts is in 361, Electricity: Electrical
    Systems and Devices, subclasses 243+ and a synchronizer for a plurality of
    nonelectrical motors is in Class 60, Power Plants, subclasses 700+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33+,    for apparatus having plural distinct impellers with an interrelated
    control actuated by (1) means sensing a noncyclic condition, (2)
    centrifugal force, or (3) torque or thrust.

    198+,   for plural impellers which are axially spaced on the same support*
    and which are not relatively movable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 700+ for synchronizing of plural motors,
    and see (2) Note above.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 640+ for gearing with
    impellers recited by name only, and subclasses 665+ for gear mechanisms for
    driving a plurality of impellers from a single driving means, and see (2)
    Note above.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 17.23 for plural gyroplane rotors combined
    with significant vehicle structure; subclass 55 for the arrangement of two
    or more power plants on an aircraft where more structure than that is
    necessary to mount the power plants is claimed; and subclass 65, for two or
    more impellers mounted on an aircraft where more structure than that
    necessary to mount the impellers is claimed.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 41+ and 85, and see
    (2) Note above.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 243+ for
    electrical synchronizers for rotary shafts and see (2) Note above.

    440,    Marine Propulsion, subclasses 79+ for ships having multiple screw
    propellers.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, appropriate
    subclasses, for planetary gearing to drive plural load devices.


CLS 416/121
TXT Apparatus under subclass 120 wherein the support for at least one of the
    impellers is movable as a whole to a different operative position relative
    to (1) at least one other impeller or (2) a common support for the plural
    impellers (e.g., vehicle body).

    (1)     Note.  The movement does not include that relative movement of a
    support which is inseparable from normal impeller operation (e.g.,
    reciprocating or eccentric shaft), nor is a mere mounting adjustment or
    tiltable carrier* included.


CLS 416/122
TXT Apparatus under subclass 120 wherein the impellers are so supported that
    during operation the moving members describe intersecting or alternately
    overlapping paths.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for working members having similar paths of operation and wherein
    the impeller is operator supported and manually actuated.


CLS 416/123
TXT Apparatus under subclass 120 in which the impellers have a common support
    and rotate about axes which are angular on skew to one another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 17.11+, and particularly subclass 17.21 for
    plural impellers having divergent axes and combined with significant
    aircraft structure.


CLS 416/124
TXT Apparatus under subclass 120 wherein the plural impellers are supported for
    rotation about a common axis.


CLS 416/125
TXT Apparatus under subclass 124 wherein the impellers are each driven by a
    separate power sources.


CLS 416/126
TXT Apparatus under subclass 124 wherein the coaxial impellers rotate one
    inward of the other on the same radial plane.


CLS 416/127
TXT Apparatus under subclass 124 in which the coaxial impellers are arranged to
    be adjusted simultaneously by positive means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128+,   for oppositely rotating "free blade" impellers in which an
    adjustment caused by aerodynamic forces may or may not be simultaneous.


CLS 416/128
TXT Apparatus under subclass 124 in which the direction of rotation of one of
    the impellers is contrary to the direction of rotation of another impeller
    supported coaxially therewith.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found two oppositely rotating
    coaxial impellers adjustable only by the dynamic blade forces thereon,
    e.g., "free blade" type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76+,    for oppositely rotating coaxial impellers which are operator
    supported and manually actuated.

    127,    for oppositely rotating impellers concurrently adjusted by positive
    means.


CLS 416/129
TXT Apparatus under subclass 128 comprising a source of mechanical power
    rotating the plural impellers.


CLS 416/130
TXT Apparatus under subclass 120 wherein one impeller is adjusted unequally or
    separately with respect to another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for plural impellers having coaxial axes of rotation and comprising
    means for adjusting the impellers concurrently, but which may be a
    differential adjustment.


CLS 416/131
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising an impeller* or working
    member*, or a part thereof mounted (1) on a support by means of a joint or
    a yielding or elastic connection or (2) as to be capable of self movement
    due to the effect of dynamic forces thereon (e.g., rotary motion or working
    fluid*).

    (1)     Note.  Mere working member composition of flexible material is not
    included; however, a flexible joint or connection permitting articulation
    or "controlled", shifting of a working member or part is included.

    (2)     Note.  This definition does not include mere direct movement
    between an operative and inoperative position of an impeller or working
    member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87+,    for a working member which moves radially outward relative to its
    rotation axis in response to dynamic forces exerted directly thereon.


CLS 416/132
TXT Apparatus under subclass 131 wherein the working member comprises (1) a
    plurality of relatively movable surfaces (2) a plurality of separate or
    divergent surfaces which react with the working fluid sequentially or (3) a
    surface which is nonself-supporting, such as a sail.


CLS 416/133
TXT Apparatus under subclass 131 in which a working member carrier* supported
    on a rotary drive shaft is axially movable relative to said shaft in
    response to dynamic forces exerted on the member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161,    for a shaft supported carrier axially displaceable by manual or
    power actuating means.


CLS 416/134
TXT Apparatus under subclass 131 wherein the impeller or working member is
    connected to the support means by a nonmetallic elastic element.


CLS 416/135
TXT Apparatus under subclass 131 wherein the impeller or working member
    movement is resisted by a resilient element which tends to restore the
    impeller or member to an original or predetermined position.


CLS 416/136
TXT Apparatus under subclass 135 comprising a working member supported for
    rotation and movable only about a radial axis in response to dynamic forces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89,     for an impeller comprising a rotary working member pivotable about
    its radial axis concurrently with a radial inward or outward movement of
    the member whereby the effective operative diameter of the impeller is
    increased or decreased.


CLS 416/137
TXT Apparatus under subclass 136 wherein the resilient element comprises a
    spiral spring coaxial with the impeller shaft.


CLS 416/138
TXT Apparatus under subclass 135 wherein the device includes mechanism whereby
    an operator may regulate the operation thereof.


CLS 416/139
TXT Apparatus under subclass 131 wherein the impeller or working member
    movement is either aided or resisted by a weight other than the impeller or
    working member itself.


CLS 416/140
TXT Apparatus under subclass 131 wherein means is provided to limit the extent
    or reduce the frequency of the impeller or working member movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106+,   for a rotor of the lead-lag type provided with movement restraining
    means.


CLS 416/141
TXT Apparatus under subclass 131 wherein the impeller or working member is
    supported for movement about plural pivots or for universal movement about
    one pivot.

    (1)     Note.  Impellers having a ball and socket mounting enabling the
    impeller to pivot about any axis of the mounting are included in this
    subclass.


CLS 416/142
TXT Apparatus under the class definition wherein an impeller* is adapted to
    assume a more compact form by folding, pivoting, collapsing or similar
    movement of a working member* so as to render the member inoperative or to
    facilitate storage.

    (1)     Note.  This definition does not include a mere adjustable (e.g.,
    feathering) working member wherein the inoperative position is no more than
    the terminal position of a plurality or range of operative positions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85+,    for an impeller selectively moveable to or from an operative
    position relative to a float support.

    87+,    for a rotating impeller which is adapted to assume a more compact
    form by shortening the effective operative diameter of the apparatus.


CLS 416/143
TXT Apparatus under subclass 142 comprising a rotary impeller wherein the
    folding, pivoting, collapsing or similar movement occurs in the plane of
    rotation.


CLS 416/144
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a working member* and
    arranged, or formed, having means to prevent or preclude imbalance thereof
    due to uneven mass distribution.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     for a working member mounted for oscillatory motion and provided
    with a weight mass which acts as a pendulum, a counterbalance or an
    inertial mass.


CLS 416/145
TXT Apparatus under subclass 144 in which the means comprises a mass of matter
    in any state and mounted so as to (1) move and assume various positions
    dependent on the rotation of the impeller, without the intervention of a
    human attendant or (2) be moved at will by a human attendant to various
    positions.


CLS 416/146
TXT Apparatus under the class definition (1) claimed in combination with
    features other than impeller structure, supporting or attaching means
    therefor or impeller driving or driven means and not provided for in
    preceding subclasses or (2) having means or parts capable of structural
    rearrangement or modification to selectively provide either an impeller
    organization having some other mode of operation or a device of some other
    description.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this definition as impeller driving or driven
    means includes transmission clutch or brake means insofar as such apparatus
    is part of the driving or driven means.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of a combined feature are:  a programmer, a timer,
    or check controlled apparatus to control operation, or a cleaner for the
    working member.  An example of a convertible feature is an oar which is
    relocated or rearranged to act as a sail or a mast.

    (3)     Note.  Excluded as combined features under this definition are the
    necessary appurtenances for any relatively moving surfaces (e.g.,
    lubricating, sealing, bearing or packing elements, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54+,    for the combination of an impeller with an "art device" wherein the
    device causes operation of the impeller.

    62,     for a device comprising an attachment attachable and detachable to
    the working surface, but which does not result in a "convertible" feature,
    i.e., does not result in a different mode of operation or in a device of
    some other description.


CLS 416/147
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising mechanism for moving an
    impeller* or working member* relative to a carrier* or support* means
    therefor in response to motor or manual actuation, such movement being
    other than that occurring as a proximate result of, or to directly effect,
    reaction between the impeller or working member and the medium fluid.

    (1)     Note.  The term "impeller" comprises a working member and any parts
    rigidly connected therewith, such as a hub  or drive shaft.  For a more
    comprehensive definition, see the Definitions of Terms, Main Class
    Definition.

    (2)     Note.  Excluded under this definition is a mere limit stop or lock
    adjustment which may only indirectly result in impeller adjustment.


CLS 416/148
TXT Apparatus under subclass 147 wherein the impeller carrier is caused to
    pivot a unit relative to a supporting shaft.


CLS 416/149
TXT Apparatus under subclass 147 wherein the impeller together with the
    carrier* and support means therefor is shiftable as a unit relative to a
    supporting surface or device.


CLS 416/150
TXT Apparatus under subclass 149 in which the shiftable carrier support moves
    along a straight line.


CLS 416/151
TXT Apparatus under subclass 47 wherein the impeller or working member movement
    is effected by power from a shaft which directly drives or is driven by the
    impeller.


CLS 416/152
TXT Apparatus under subclass 151 wherein the impeller or working member
    movement is effected in response to operation of an element which either
    removes or applies a force resisting movement of an apparatus part.

    (1)     Note.  Included under this definition is an impeller provided with
    a differential means between the adjusting means and the drive shaft and
    provided with brake means to cause relative rotation of the differential
    means.


CLS 416/153
TXT Apparatus under subclass 147 wherein the apparatus includes means for
    retaining the impeller or working member in a selected position of
    adjustment.

    (1)     Note.  The retaining means must be more than or in addition to a
    mere static condition of the positioning mechanism. For example, a pivoted
    hand lever is excluded, but a detent thereon is included under this
    definition.

    (2)     Note.  Excluded under this definition is a limit stop which shuts
    off the motor when a predetermined position of impeller adjustment is
    reached.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for means to retain the impeller or working member in a selected
    position of adjustment combined with control means responsive to impeller
    speed.


CLS 416/154
TXT Apparatus under subclass 153 in which the mechanism for moving the impeller
    or working member comprises a fluid motor.


CLS 416/155
TXT Apparatus under subclass 147 wherein the impeller or working member
    movement is effected by a motor mounted on and rotatable with the impeller*.


CLS 416/156
TXT Apparatus under subclass 155 wherein the motor is driven by fluid.


CLS 416/157
TXT Apparatus under subclass 156 wherein the fluid motor is coaxial with the
    axis of the impeller shaft and is rigidly connected therewith.


CLS 416/158
TXT Apparatus under subclass 156 wherein the fluid motor is mounted on or
    within the working member.


CLS 416/159
TXT Apparatus under subclass 147 wherein the impeller or working member
    movement is effected by a power or manual actuator mounted on a part which
    is fixed in position relative to the impeller or working member.


CLS 416/160
TXT Apparatus under subclass 159 comprising planetary gearing between an
    impeller adjusting element movable with the impeller and a part which is
    fixed in position relative to the impeller, which part controls the
    movement.


CLS 416/161
TXT Apparatus under subclass 159 wherein the power or manual actuator effects
    an axial movement of the impeller as a unit relative to a supporting shaft
    which directly drives or is driven by the impeller.


CLS 416/162
TXT Apparatus under subclass 159 wherein the mechanism for moving the impeller
    or working member is actuated by a motor.


CLS 416/163
TXT Apparatus under subclass 159 wherein the moving mechanism comprises a rod
    extending through the entire length of a shaft which directly drives or is
    driven by the impeller.


CLS 416/164
TXT Apparatus under subclass 159 comprising a sleeve, collar or rod on or in a
    shaft which directly drives or is driven by the impeller and is
    reciprocated relative thereto to effect the movement.


CLS 416/165
TXT Apparatus under subclass 164 wherein the sleeve, collar or rod is
    reciprocated by a screw which is coaxial with the shaft.


CLS 416/166
TXT Apparatus under subclass 164 wherein the adjusting movement is effected, at
    least in part, by a rack-pinion connection intermediate the reciprocating
    member and the working member.

    (1)     Note.  The reciprocating member may comprise either component of
    the rack-pinion connection.


CLS 416/167
TXT Apparatus under subclass 164 comprising a pin-slot, cam-slot or cam
    connecting means between the reciprocating member and the movable working
    member.


CLS 416/168
TXT Apparatus under subclass 164 comprising link connecting means between the
    reciprocating means and the movable working member.

    (1)     Note.  A mere crank arm extending between the working member and
    the reciprocating member, being rigidly attached at one end and pivotally
    connected at the opposite end, is not included by this definition,
    classification being in subclass 164 above.


CLS 416/169
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means which selectively (1)
    engages the impeller* with a driving or driven mechanism or (2) retards or
    stops rotary motion of the impeller*.


CLS 416/170
TXT Apparatus under the class definition wherein the claimed subject matter
    includes, by more than name only, (1) prime mover means for driving the
    impeller* or (2) driving or driven mechanism to or from the impeller*.

    (1)     Note.  Included under this definition is an articulated driving
    shaft, details of an engine or motor, etc., a member clearly recited as a
    crank or pedal to be actuated by an operator's hand or foot.  The recited
    details of the motor or engine must be such as to identify the prime mover;
    mere naming of the prime mover as an internal combustion engine, turbine,
    electric motor, etc., is not sufficient to cause classification herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for motion caused by direct response of the working member or
    impeller to an electrical or magnetic field or effect.

    120,    especially subclass 128 for specific transmission means between an
    engine and a plurality of separately supported or relatively moving
    impellers.


CLS 416/171
TXT Apparatus under subclass 170 wherein the prime mover means for driving the
    impeller comprises a device which converts fluid energy to mechanical
    energy.

    (1)     Note.  Included under this definition is an impeller which is
    driven by turbine blading directly connected to a working member of the
    impeller.


CLS 416/172
TXT Apparatus under subclass 170 wherein an impeller rotates in a reverse
    angular at regular intervals, the rotation in each direction extending
    through at least one complete revolution.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for operator supported manually actuated impellers having a similar
    operative motion.


CLS 416/173
TXT Apparatus under subclass 170 wherein the impeller is operated by a motion
    transmitting means which is actuated by movement of an operator's hand or
    foot.

    (1)     Note.  Included under this definition is a means actuated by an
    animal's extremity.


CLS 416/174
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a relatively fixed
    apparatus part against or in which an impeller* or its supporting shaft is
    intended to continuously move and (1) means to conduct to or retain between
    said fixed and continuously moving parts a friction reducing material (2)
    means to reduce or prevent undesired fluid flow into or out of the space
    between said fixed and continuously moving parts or (3) anti-friction fluid
    or solid means between said fixed and continuously moving parts to support
    said parts for relative movement.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded under this definition is a mere nominal recitation
    of the various means; a specific recitation of a particular* means as
    defined above is necessary for classification in this subclass.


CLS 416/175
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising at least two impellers* or
    working members* which differ significantly in structure other than by size
    or orientation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120+,   for a plurality of impellers mounted for relative motion or on
    independent supports, which impellers may differ significantly in structure
    (i.e., not mere size or orientation relative to a fixed point).

    203,    for working members which are unsymmetrical relative to a plane,
    i.e., they differ from each other in orientation or size.


CLS 416/176
TXT Apparatus under the class definition wherein the impeller* comprises a
    blade* projecting radially outwardly from a hub or shaft or a flow passage
    which wholly confines the working fluid while in working engagement
    therewith, the blade or flow passage extending circumferentially at least
    substantially one complete flight around the hub or shaft and the
    peripheral edge of the blade or flow passage defining a spiral path about
    the hub or shaft axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 625 and 657+ for similar
    impellers especially adapted for moving other- than-fluid materials.


CLS 416/177
TXT Apparatus under subclass 176 wherein the impeller comprises (1) a
    circumferentially continuous working fluid directing surface integral with
    the working members thereof or (2) a flow passage which wholly confines the
    working fluid while in working engagement therewith.


CLS 416/178
TXT Apparatus under the class definition wherein the impeller* comprises a
    plurality of blades supported solely at their axial ends by transverse
    annuli or rings.


CLS 416/179
TXT Apparatus under the class definition wherein a rotary impeller* comprises
    (1) a working fluid flow directing surface integral with the impeller* and
    circumferentially continuous about the rotation axis or (2) a flow passage
    which wholly confines the working fluid while in working engagement
    therewith.

    (1)     Note.  Included under this definition is a device in which a
    surface or part of the working member forms a portion of the
    circumferentially continuous flow directing surface.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this and indented subclasses is a device which
    would inherently confine fluid, as defined, even though not so specifically
    disclosed.


CLS 416/180
TXT Apparatus under subclass 179 wherein the flow directing surface comprises a
    concave annular member defining a semicircle in cross section.


CLS 416/181
TXT Apparatus under subclass 179 wherein the circumferentially continuous
    medium flow directing surface has one or more apertures therein.


CLS 416/182
TXT Apparatus under subclass 179 comprising a working fluid flow directing
    surface transverse to the axis of rotation and having a continuous
    peripheral edge.


CLS 416/183
TXT Apparatus under subclass 182 comprising blades extending axially from the
    transverse flow directing surface which are (1) discontinuous in radial or
    circumferential extent or (2) formed of intersecting, angular portions.


CLS 416/184
TXT Apparatus under subclass 182 in which the radially extending surface is
    positioned between the ends of a working surface, the working fluid
    simultaneously entering or leaving the working surface in two streams
    parallel to the axis of rotation, in directions towards or away from each
    other on both sides of the radially extending surface.


CLS 416/185
TXT Apparatus under subclass 182 in which the transverse surface is
    substantially solid or continuous from the hub to the edge thereof.


CLS 416/186
TXT Apparatus under subclass 185 comprising an additional working fluid flow
    directing surface, spaced axially from the transverse surface and of
    annular form, the working members being positioned between two surfaces.


CLS 416/187
TXT Apparatus under subclass 186 in which the working member* has a dimension
    along the axis of rotation which is substantially greater than the
    dimensions along a radius (transverse to the axis of rotation) or across
    the member (thickness), the plurality of such members arranged and spaced
    around the annular surface, the member being of substantially constant
    radial extent along its length and supported between the two surfaces
    distally from the axis of rotation.

    (1)     Note.  Typically, the working members are parallel to and
    equidistant from the rotational axis, i.e., drum type; however, included
    within this definition is an arrangement wherein the blades converge
    towards the axis, i.e., conical type.


CLS 416/188
TXT Apparatus under subclass 185 comprising a member of conical form extending
    axially from the transverse flow directing surface.

    (1)     Note.  The member need not be a cone; included under this
    definition is a member which varies in diameter but whose wall is concave
    from the large to the small diameter.


CLS 416/189
TXT Apparatus under subclass 179 wherein the flow directing surface comprises
    an axially extending member.


CLS 416/190
TXT Apparatus under subclass 189 wherein the flow directing surface includes
    means for damping impeller vibration or means which facilitate impeller
    expansion and contraction.


CLS 416/191
TXT Apparatus under subclass 189 wherein the flow directing surface comprises a
    continuous series of connected or adjacent elements.


CLS 416/192
TXT Apparatus under subclass 189 wherein the flow directing surface includes
    flange means extending transversely of the rotation axis.


CLS 416/193
TXT Apparatus under subclass 189 wherein the flow directing surface is spaced
    inwardly of the impeller periphery, as such resulting in an inner and an
    outer blade or series of blades arranged with reference to the rotation
    axis of the hub or shaft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, subclasses 77+ for a rotary
    kinetic fluid motor or pump in which the runner has blades extending
    inwardly and outwardly from a rotating annulus.


CLS 416/194
TXT Apparatus under the class definition wherein the impeller* includes means
    supplemental to the main attaching means for (1) securing the working
    members* to a hub or shaft or (2) attaching the working members to one
    another.

    (1)     Note.  The lashing or attaching means is usually of limited axial
    extent and the flow confining function thereof is questionable.  An
    attaching means which extends axially so that it would confine or direct a
    fluid is excluded from this subclass; see search note following.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179+,   for an axially extending shroud or web which confines fluid even
    though not so disclosed, but is inherent in the structure.


CLS 416/195
TXT Apparatus under subclass 194 wherein the supplemental means is connected to
    the radial extremities of the working members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189+,   for a flow confining rim or ring which inherently acts as lashing
    or connecting means between the working members; see the search notes in
    subclass 179.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, subclass 91 for an annular
    runner having inwardly extending working members.


CLS 416/196
TXT Apparatus under subclass 194 wherein the supplemental attaching means
    extends between working surfaces.


CLS 416/197
TXT Apparatus under the class definition wherein the blade* comprises a dished
    working fluid* impact surface which is arranged normal to the plane of
    rotation and to the fluid force direction.


CLS 416/198
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a plurality of working
    members* spaced longitudinally of a rotary shaft such that they rotate in
    different planes transverse of the shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175,    for a device comprising a plurality of working members* which
    differ from each other structurally, i.e., a characteristic other than size
    or orientation, and which may be spaced longitudinally along a shaft.


CLS 416/199
TXT Apparatus under subclass 198 wherein the working members direct the fluid
    from opposed axial sides to either an axially inward or outward direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184,    for an impeller comprising a radially extending plate intermediate
    the ends of a working surface, the working fluid entering or leaving the
    working surface on both sides of the plate in opposed axial directions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, subclasses 93+ for a rotary
    kinetic energy pump or motor comprising means to direct the working fluid
    to or from the impeller in axially opposed paths, usually for the purpose
    of end balancing the impeller.


CLS 416/200
TXT Apparatus under subclass 198 in which a portion on one working member is
    angularly offset relative to the corresponding portion on another working
    member spaced axially therefrom.


CLS 416/201
TXT Apparatus under subclass 198 wherein the longitudinally spaced working
    members are of unequal radial lengths.


CLS 416/202
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising one or more bladed* working
    member* surfaces projecting radially outward from a rotation axis and so
    arranged that the blade axis in a radially outward direction is
    significantly offset from a radius to the rotation axis.


CLS 416/203
TXT Apparatus under the class definition wherein the impeller comprises (1) a
    fluid reactive device which is asymmetrical relative to a plane, such as a
    plurality of blades* unequally spaced about a rotary carrier* or (2) a
    plurality of working members* which differ in size, shape or orientation.

    (1)     Note.  Included under (2) above are working members merely fixed in
    differing operative positions (i.e., pitch).


CLS 416/204
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means for attaching a
    working member to a mounting such as a hub or shaft.

    (1)     Note.  A specific recitation of the attaching means is required in
    a claim for placement in this and dependent subclasses, the mere claiming
    or "means for connecting the blade to the support" or similar broad
    recitation not being sufficient for original classification.

    (2)     Note.  Packing or sealing members, per se, between the blade and
    its mounting do not comprise blade attaching means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 643, for an endless belt or
    chain-like member adapted to lift a viscous fluid from a body thereof as a
    result of the property of the fluid to adhere to the member.


CLS 416/205
TXT Apparatus under subclass 204 wherein the means for attaching the blade to
    its mounting permits selectively fixing the blade in one of a plurality of
    different positions.


CLS 416/206
TXT Apparatus under subclass 205 comprising an aperture or well in the mounting
    into which a blade part is received and releasably secured by a spring
    element.


CLS 416/207
TXT Apparatus under subclass 205 wherein an impeller blade is secured to its
    mounting by a pressing or wedging means which may be manually loosened
    permitting repositioning of the blade in a different operative attitude or
    relationship.


CLS 416/208
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 wherein the impeller blade is releasably
    secured between the separable elements of a two-part hub.


CLS 416/209
TXT Apparatus under subclass 205 wherein an encasing jacket is secured to that
    blade part which is attached to the carrier.


CLS 416/210
TXT Apparatus under subclass 204 in which the blade is attached to a radial
    carrier arm or annular mounting member and spaced at some distance from the
    hub or shaft.


CLS 416/211
TXT Apparatus under subclass 210 wherein the blade projects from the carrier
    arm in a direction substantially parallel to the axis of the hub or shaft.


CLS 416/212
TXT Apparatus under subclass 204 wherein the impeller comprises a plurality of
    blades, any one blade provided with means interfitting or common to an
    adjacent blade to produce rigidity in one or more directions.


CLS 416/213
TXT Apparatus under subclass 204 wherein the blades are attached to the hub or
    shaft by fusion (e.g., welding, etc.) or adhesive bonding.


CLS 416/214
TXT Apparatus under subclass 204 wherein the blade is secured between two
    spaced surfaces which may be disassociated or disconnected from each other.


CLS 416/215
TXT Apparatus under subclass 204 wherein the mounting is provided with a
    circumferentially extending recess into which a portion of the blade is
    securely received.

    (1)     Note.  The circumferential slot may be disposed on the periphery or
    end wall of the carrier*.


CLS 416/216
TXT Apparatus under subclass 215 in which the blade portion and channel wall,
    or a packing or securing means therebetween, have a plurality of elongated,
    radially spaced, interfitting channels and ridges.


CLS 416/217
TXT Apparatus under subclass 215 in which the portion of the blade that is
    received by the mounting comprises a plurality of distinct fingers or
    projections extending from the main body of the blade.


CLS 416/218
TXT Apparatus under subclass 215 comprising a distinct and separate
    circumferentially extending member which secures or fastens a plurality of
    blades to each other or to the channel wall.

    (1)     Note.  The circumferentially extending member may be of rod or
    sheet configuration (e.g., wire, wedge, or packing or sealing means).


CLS 416/219
TXT Apparatus under subclass 204 wherein the mounting is provided with recesses
    or grooves which securely receive a blade portion.


CLS 416/220
TXT Apparatus under subclass 219 comprising a distinct fastening member for
    securing the blade to the mounting.


CLS 416/221
TXT Apparatus under subclass 220 wherein the fastening member comprises elastic
    or distortable material.


CLS 416/222
TXT Apparatus under subclass 204 in which the blade has attaching portions at
    the inward extremity thereof which depend on either side of a continuous
    supporting surface.


CLS 416/223
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the shape, composition or
    construction of an impeller blade* is specifically recited in a claim.

    (1)     Note. Patents from Class 415, Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps,
    subclasses 182.1 and 208.1 - 232, have been cross referenced to this and
    indented subclasses where particular runner blade structure is claimed.  To
    complete a search for blade shapes, structures, materials, attaching means,
    etc., appropriate subclasses in Class 415 excepting those noted above,
    should be considered.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 544+ for stock
    materials, e.g., of indefinite length, which are all metal or have adjacent
    metal components.


CLS 416/224
TXT Apparatus under subclass 223 wherein the blade has an abrasion resistant
    liner, sheathing or insert secured to a portion thereof normally subject to
    erosive deterioration.

    (1)     Note.  The abrasion resistant means must be supplemental to basic
    blade forming structure and a specifically claimed blade structure
    accompanied by a mere disclosure that the outer blade surface is resistant
    to wear is properly classified elsewhere on the basis of the particular
    blade structure defined.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229+,   for a laminated or encased material blade wherein the outer layer
    or covering may be disclosed as resistant to abrasion.

    241+,   for a blade coating or composition which may be disclosed as
    resistant to abrasion.


CLS 416/225
TXT Apparatus under subclass 223 wherein the blade includes reinforcing means
    extending longitudinally thereof serving to compress the blade parts and
    resist the action of longitudinal forces (e.g., centrifugal) thereon.


CLS 416/226
TXT Apparatus under subclass 223 wherein the blade is fabricated by securing
    portions thereof to a main member which extends longitudinally of the blade
    from the root end to the tip, said member supporting the weight of the
    blade and carrying the stress forces exerted thereon.


CLS 416/227
TXT Apparatus under subclass 223 wherein the blade (1) comprises plural parts
    held at spaced intervals, (2) is so shaped as to define or enclose an open
    area, or (3) comprises a solid member discontinuous in at least one
    direction.

    (1)     Note.  This definition does not include a mere apertured blade or
    one comprised or permeable material, such structure being classifiable in
    subclass 231 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69+,    particularly subclasses 76+ for operator supported manually
    actuated impellers, many of which comprise open work type reaction members.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 633+ for open work
    structures of general utility and see the search notes thereunder for
    similar structure elsewhere classifiable.


CLS 416/228
TXT Apparatus under subclass 223 wherein the impeller* (1) comprises a
    plurality of elongate rod-like working members* projecting from a common
    carrier* or (2) is so shaped as to define an edge outline which markedly
    deviates from a smooth configuration.


CLS 416/229
TXT Apparatus under subclass 223 wherein the impeller blade (1) is fabricated
    by bonding or fastening together a plurality of layers of material, (2)
    comprises a structural part, such as a stiffening member, set within a
    constituent part of the blade as by being molded therein, or (3) comprises
    blade forming material enclosed within a shell or casing.


CLS 416/230
TXT Apparatus under subclass 229 wherein the blade comprises, at least in part,
    individual elongated threadlike members of metal or other matter or such
    members twisted or woven together to form a rope, cable, cloth or like
    structure.


CLS 416/231
TXT Apparatus under subclass 223 wherein the working member (1) has one or more
    openings extending therethrough or (2) is made up of material which is
    intended to permit the flow of fluid therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90+,    for blades having fluid intake or discharge openings thereon and
    see (2) Note thereunder.

    227,    for blades of open work, or lattice or loop forms.


CLS 416/232
TXT Apparatus under subclass 223 wherein the blade comprises a shell which
    defines a blade cavity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90+     and 96+, for blades having fluid flow conducting passages therein.


CLS 416/233
TXT Apparatus under subclass 232 wherein the shell encloses ribs or like
    reinforcing means extending between opposing walls of the cavity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226,    for a hollow blade wherein the shell is fabricated about a main
    support.


CLS 416/234
TXT Apparatus under subclass 223 wherein the impeller blade is so shaped from
    or joined to carrier means therefor as to blend smoothly therewith.


CLS 416/235
TXT Apparatus under subclass 223 wherein the blade surface (1) deviates from a
    smooth symmetric shape, (2) has rib or rim means thereon or (3) is so
    configured as to form a channel.


CLS 416/236
TXT Apparatus under subclass 235 wherein the blade surface has rib means
    thereon or has grooves shaped therein.


CLS 416/237
TXT Apparatus under subclass 235 wherein the blade comprises two or more flat
    surfaces which (1) intersect in an angular relationship or (2) lie in
    different but substantially parallel planes united by a blade portion
    normal to the said surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183,    for an impeller comprising a radially extending flow directing
    surface and a blade having circumferentially or radially offset parts.


CLS 416/238
TXT Apparatus under subclass 223 wherein the blade axis is swept axially or
    circumferentially from the juncture of the blade with the carrier*.


CLS 416/239
TXT Apparatus under subclass 223 comprising (1) fairing structure supported
    adjacent the inner end of the blade or (2) the specific shape or
    construction of the lower portion of the blade intermediate the reaction
    surface and the root, as in Fig. II in the Class Definition of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    234,    for impeller blading integral with and smoothly blended into the
    carrier or which comprises, in effect, a shaped hub.

    248,    for subject matter directed to blade root structure or to a root
    block, the impeller blade being either nominally recited or not claimed.


CLS 416/240
TXT Apparatus under subclass 223 wherein the impeller blade comprises pliant
    material so that in its finished form it has a high degree of flexibility.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     for an oscillatory working member comprised of pliant material.

    84,     for a working member having collapsible walls expansible to an
    operative shape by filling with a fluent material.


CLS 416/241
TXT Apparatus under subclass 223 wherein (1) an initially fluent substance is
    applied to the blade surface so as to leave a residual film, layer or
    continuous deposit thereon or which penetrates the blade base material and
    is at least partially retained therein or (2) the material composition of
    the blade is specifically set forth or (3) a specific structural
    characteristic of the blade (other than shape) is set forth, such feature
    not being elsewhere classifiable.

    (1)     Note.  Under part (2) the mere recitation that the blade is formed
    of metal or wood is excluded since such subject matter is extremely common
    in this art.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    415,    Rotary kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, subclass 216.1 for a working
    fluid* passage or distributing means for a runner* has a specific shaft*
    shape or material, subclass 217.1 for a working fluid* passage or
    distributing means for a runner* has a corrosion resistant or nonmetallic
    portion.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, appropriate subclasses for a
    specific alloy.  Class 75 takes a nominally claimed impeller blade formed
    of a specific alloy.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for coated articles; Class 428 takes an impeller blade nominally claimed
    with a specific coating on a surface thereof, subclasses 551+ for stock
    material having plural adjacent metallic components, metal particles, and
    an additional nonmetal component.


CLS 416/242
TXT Apparatus under subclass 223 wherein a surface of the blade is curved in
    two or more directions, (e.g., sinuous).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235+,   for an impeller blade having an undulating or rippled surface.


CLS 416/243
TXT Apparatus under subclass 223 wherein a face of the blade comprises an
    inwardly curved surface.


CLS 416/244
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising impeller* having (1)
    support* structure, (2) securing means not provided for above, (3) carrier*
    structure or (4) drag or head resistance reducing means such as a smooth
    outline member or covering supported on the impeller carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85+,    for a float supported impeller.

    93+,    for hub, fairing or housing structure including means whereby
    ambient fluid or exhaust gas is caused to flow therethrough.

    234,    for impeller blading integral with and smoothly blended into the
    carrier or which comprises, in effect, a shaped hub.

    239,    for impeller blading having fairing structure supported at the
    inner end thereof or wherein the blade shank itself is so shaped.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, subclass 216.1 for a device
    comprising a runner* supported on a shaft of specific shape or material and
    further comprising working fluid* passage or distributing means for the
    runner, subclass 218.1 for a device including a runner comprising a conical
    hub having its small diameter portion facing upstream and further including
    working fluid passage or distributing means for the runner.


CLS 416/245
TXT Apparatus under subclass 244 comprising a conical member coaxially mounted
    on the impeller shaft or hub proximate the blading such that the apex of
    said conical member comprises either the upstream or downstream terminus of
    the impeller.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93+,    for hub, fairing or housing structure (which may be for aircraft)
    including means whereby ambient fluid or exhaust gas is caused to flow
    therethrough.


CLS 416/246
TXT Apparatus under subclass 244 wherein an impeller is mounted on a support
    for movement to various positions of use or to a nonuse position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85+,    for an impeller adjustably supported on a float.


CLS 416/247
TXT Apparatus under the class definition wherein an obstructing member or open
    frame structure is located adjacent or about the impelling means to prevent
    contact of the impelling means by foreign objects or by animals.

    (1)     Note.  Included under this definition of a protective screen or
    guard is a device to confine spray or splash caused by motion of the
    impeller and to prevent such spray or splash from impinging on adjacent
    surfaces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    440,    Marine Propulsion, subclasses 71+ for screw propeller guard means
    limited to vessel propulsion and see Class Definition III-A of this class
    (416) for a general statement of the line.


CLS 416/248
TXT Apparatus under the class definition not otherwise provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  For example, this subclass includes a part of member located
    intermediate the shank of an impeller blade* and a carrier* therefor, said
    part of member being commonly termed the blade root or root block and not
    classifiable elsewhere.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS

    The following subclasses are collections of published disclosures
    pertaining to various specified aspects of the Fluid Reaction Surfaces
    (i.e., Impellers), art which aspects do not form appropriate bases for
    subclasses in the foregoing classification (i.e., subclasses superior
    hereto in the schedule), wherein original copies of patents are placed on
    the basis of proximate function of the apparatus.

    These subclasses assist a search based on remote function of the apparatus
    and may be of further assistance to the searcher, either as a starting
    point in searching this class or as an indication of further related fields
    of search inside or outside the class.  Thus, there is here provided a
    second access for retrieval of a limited number of types of disclosures.

    (1)     Note.  Disclosures are placed in these subclasses for their value
    as references and as leads to appropriate main or secondary fields of
    search, without regard to their original classification or their claimed
    subject matter.

    (2)     Note.  The disclosures found in the following subclasses are
    examples, only, of the indicated subject matter, and in no instance do they
    represent the entire extent of the prior art.


CLS 416/500
TXT An impeller* or working member* which is so designed or includes means
    associated therewith for the purpose of reducing undesirable vibrational
    motion induced by the operation thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194+,   for means securing the working members to one another or to a hub
    or shaft for purposes of reducing vibration during normal operation.


CLS 416/501
TXT An impelling member formed of loose flexible material, usually in divided
    or sectional form, such that movement of the member produces a rustling
    sound effect in addition to a current of air scare or brush away flies and
    the like.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 132.1+ for
    insect destroying devices and processes in general.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, for subject
    matter of that class combined with a fly brush type impeller


CLS 417/
TTL PUMPS

CLS 417/
TXT GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT
    MATTER:



    I.      This is the general class for the pumping of fluids, and includes
    the pumping of slurries, fluent material and the like if handled in a
    manner not inconsistent with the handling of fluids.  With the exception of
    "gettering pumps" as discussed in paragraph III below, a pump is defined as
    means to move a fluid by taking it from one place or location and moving it
    to another place or location different from whence it came, the pump,
    therefore having an inlet and an outlet for the pumped fluid which are
    separate and distinct.

    II.     The pumping of the fluid is generally accomplished by action
    thereon of a mechanical member (e.g., piston) or by contact or entrainment
    with another fluid (e.g. jet pumps).  Also, the pumping may be accomplished
    by the direct action on the pumped fluid of an electric or magnetic force
    (e.g., electromagnetic pumps - subclass 50).  However, for the line with
    Classes 313, Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices  and 315, Electric Lamp
    and Discharge Devices:  Systems, with respect to "ion pumps", see subclass
    49 of this class.

    III.    VACUUM FORMATION BY GETTERING

    This class is the residual home for the formation of a vacuum in an
    enclosed space by a gettering action; a getter being a material which when
    placed in an enclosed space reduces the gas or vapor content of the space
    either by a chemical or physical action.  Also, included are those devices
    and processes in which the fluid is ionized to permit or enhance the
    gettering action. These devices are often termed "getter-ion pumps".  See
    the notes and search notes in subclasses 48 and 49 for a statement of the
    lines.

    Relationship to Class 91, Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type

    Refer to section III in the class definition of Class 91 for a statement of
    the line between Classes 91 and 417.

    Relationship to Class 92, Expansible Chamber Devices

    Class 92 is directed to expansible chamber devices, per se, and with
    respect to nonrotary expansible chamber pumps is related to Class 417 as a
    subcombination thereof.  Class 92 is limited to expansible chamber devices
    in which the working member has an oscillating or reciprocating motion to
    expand and contract the chamber.  Thus, Class 92 cannot take the
    subcombination of any rotary expansible chamber pump.  See the note below
    regarding the relationship of this class (417) and Class 418, Rotary
    Expansible Chamber Devices, for the disposition of this art.

    Set forth below are the lines between Class 92 and Class 417 as they relate
    to nonrotary expansible chamber pumps:

    (1)     WITH DRIVE MEANS

    (a)     MOTOR DRIVEN

    Class 92 excludes motor driven expansible chamber devices when the motor is
    significantly claimed.  See (2) Note in Class 417 subclass 321 for a
    statement of what constitutes a significantly claimed motor.

    (b)     OPERATED BY ART DEVICE

    Class 92 excludes an expansible chamber pump mounted upon or adjacent to an
    art device to be operated thereby.  See Class 417 subclasses 229+ for this
    subject matter and for a definition of an art device.

    (c)     OTHER DRIVE MECHANISM

    Other specific means to drive an expansible chamber pump such as gearing,
    linkage, etc., including disconnectable drives are not excluded from Class
    92.

    (2)     VALVING

    (a)     PUMP FLUID

    Class 92 excludes any expansible chamber pump which includes control of the
    pump fluid by a valving action.  Thus, any claimed valving of pump fluid of
    an expansible chamber pump is sufficient to preclude classification in
    Class 92 even though the valving claimed may not be all of the valving
    necessary to cause the pump to operate in the intended manner.

    (b)     NONPUMP FLUID

    Class 92 does not exclude valving of nonpump fluid as, for example, valving
    for lubricant, coolant, sealant, etc.

    (3)     WITH DIVERSE PUMP

            An expansible chamber pump in combination with another pump of a
    different type (i.e., which, per se, would not be classified in Class 92)
    is excluded from Class 92 unless the pump of a different type is a mere
    auxiliary of the expansible chamber pump (i.e., lubricant or coolant pump,
    etc.).

            Relationship to Class 137, Fluid Handling.  The line between
    Classes 137 and 417 is generally that of combination and subcombination.
    Class 137 generally provides for fluid handling systems and Class 417
    generally provides for motor driven pumps and pumps, per se. There are
    certain areas of subject matter which are considered to be peculiar to
    pumps and their operation and are considered as exceptions to the general
    rule stated above.  These exceptions and other detailed lines will be set
    out below.

    A.      Pump-Tank Relationship

    The combination of a pump and a tank generally will be classified in Class
    137.  However, a single nominally recited tank, reservoir, chamber, pump or
    other similar fluid holding means will be considered as merely a flow line
    or conduit and will be classified in Class 417.  See (9) Note in the Class
    Definition of Class 222, Dispensing, regarding other pump-tank
    relationships.

    B.      Pump-Accumulator Relationship

    An accumulator or surge dampening device is usually a device having a
    single fluid opening and is connected to a pump inlet or outlet for the
    purpose of maintaining a smooth flow to or from the pump.  Such devices
    when disclosed for the purpose of surge dampening or insuring smooth flow
    and claimed in combination with a pump are classified in Class 417.

    C.      Pump-Liquid Accumulation Control  Relationship

    (1)     A pump claimed in combination with a liquid accumulation controlled
    valve is classified in Class 137 with the following exceptions which are
    classifiable in Class 417:

    (a)     When the liquid accumulation responsive valve controls a liquid
    flow to the pump or a gas relief from the pump is for the specifically
    disclosed purpose of priming the pump, see Class 417, subclasses 200 and
    435.

    (b)     When the liquid accumulation responsive valve functions as a pump
    valve in a fluid displacement-type pump, see Class 417, subclass 65 in
    general and subclasses 126+ and 138 in particular.

    (c)     When the liquid accumulation responsive valve is the distributor of
    an expansible chamber-type pump, see Class 417, subclass 297.5.

    (2)     A Jet pump claimed in combination with liquid level responsive
    regulating means therefor is classified in Class 417, subclass 182.5.

    (3)     A pump claimed in combination with liquid accumulation-controlled
    drive transmission therefor is classified in Class 417, subclass 211.5.

    (4)     A pump claimed in combination with a liquid accumulation
    controlled-drive motor therefor is classified in Class 417, subclasses 36+.

    D.      Pump-Plural Serial Valve Relationship

    A pump claimed in combination with plural serial valves in either or both
    an inlet or an outlet flow path and without any branched flow paths is
    classifiable in Class 417.  The rule for serial valves applies even though
    one or more of the valves is manually operated or condition responsive, see
    Class 417, subclass 456 for serial pump distributors, subclass 441 for a
    manually operated valve in serial relationship with a pump distributor, and
    subclasses 279+ for a condition responsive valve in combination with a pump.

    E.      Pump-Main Flow Path and Branched Flow Path Relationship

    Generally a branched flow system having a main flow path and a branched
    flow path, whether including a pump or not, is classifiable in Class 137.
    However, there are a number of exceptions which usually depend upon the
    disclosure in the particular patent as set forth below.

    1.      A pump having plural branched flow paths, whether valved or not,
    communicating with a single source or receiver is classifiable in Class
    417.  Where there is no specific disclosure of the source or receiver for
    the flow paths, the disclosure will be considered as if there were a single
    source or receiver and will be classified in Class 417.

    2.      A pump having a main flow path and a branched flow path, each
    communicating with separate sources or receivers is classifiable in Class
    417 if:

    a.      the source or receiver for the main flow path is unclaimed or
    nominally claimed and

    b.      the branched flow path is specifically disclosed as a relief inlet
    or outlet for the pump, a priming inlet to the pump, a bypass around the
    pump, or a vent, waste or drain outlet from the pump, and  either(1) the
    main flow path is uncontrolled or (2) the main flow path is controlled and
    the branched flow line is (a) uncontrolled, (b) manually controlled or (c)
    controlled by a condition responsive valve responding to a condition in the
    main flow path which is sensed between the pump and the main flow path
    controller.

    F.      Condition Responsive Control of Pump Drive Motor

    A motor driven pump having a condition responsive control for controlling
    the operation of the motor is classifiable in Class 417, subclasses 1+.
    The combination of a pump and a disconnectable drive, clutch or variable
    transmission having a condition responsive control is classifiable in Class
    417, subclasses 212+.

    G.      Direct Response Valve-Pump Cylinder Relationship

    The combination of one or more direct response valves of the type
    classifiable in Class 137, subclasses 511+ and a nominally recited cylinder
    is classifiable in Class 137.  The specific recitation of a cylinder head
    is not considered to be a specific recitation of the cylinder.

    Relationship to Class 415, Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps

    Class 415 takes rotary, nonexpansible chamber-type pumps.  However, Class
    417 provides for rotary, nonexpansible chamber-type pumps in certain
    combinations as enumerated below.  Unless specifically excluded below, a
    patent to a rotary nonexpansible chamber-type pump, as defined in the class
    definition of Class 415, will be classified as an original in Class 415 as
    opposed to Class 417.

    (1)     WITH DRIVE MEANS

    (a)     MOTOR DRIVEN

    Class 415 excludes motor driven rotary nonexpansible chamber-type pumps
    when the motor-pump combination is significantly claimed.  For a detailed
    explanation of what constitutes a significantly claimed motor-pump
    combination see (2) Note in Class 417 subclass 321 of this class and
    section III, paragraph B of the Class 415 definition.

    (b)     OPERATED BY ART DEVICE

    A rotary, nonexpansible chamber- type pump operated by an art device is
    excluded from Class 415.  See Class 417, subclasses 229+ for this subject
    matter and the definition of an art device.

    (c)     OTHER DRIVE MECHANISM

    Other specific means to drive a rotary, nonexpansible chamber pump such as
    gearing, linkage, etc., including disconnectable drives (e.g., clutch) are
    not excluded from Class 415.

    (2)     WITH DIVERSE PUMP

            The combination of a rotary, nonexpan-sible chamber-type pump with
    another pump of a different type (e.g., recipro- cating, rotary expansible
    chamber, etc.), is excluded from Class 415 and is classified in Class 417
    unless the different type pump is a mere auxiliary of the rotary,
    nonexpansible chamber-type pump (e.g., lubricating or coolant pump).  In
    the latter case, classification in Class 415 is proper.

            Relationship to Class 418, Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices

            Class 418 takes rotary expansible chamber pumps even though the
    disclosure and claims may be restricted to pump use. In some ways Class 418
    may be considered to be less comprehensive than Class 417 and rotary
    expansible chamber-type pumps in certain combinations enumerated below will
    be classified in Class 417 rather than Class 418.  Unless specifically
    excluded below a patent to a rotary expansible chamber type as defined in
    the Class Definition of Class 418 will be classified as an original in
    Class 418 as opposed to Class 417:

    (1)     WITH DRIVE MEANS

    (a)     WITH MOTOR

    Class 418 excludes motor driven rotary expansible chamber devices when the
    motor is significantly claimed even if the motor is of the rotary
    expansible chamber type.  For a detailed explanation of what constitutes a
    significantly claimed motor; see (2) Note in Class 417 subclass 321.

    (b)     OPERATED BY ART DEVICE

    A rotary expansible chamber pump mounted upon or adjacent an art device to
    be operated thereby is excluded from Class 418.  See Class 417, subclasses
    229+ for this subject matter and the definition of an art device.

    (c)     OTHER DRIVE MECHANISM

    Other specific means to drive the pump such as gearing, linkage, etc.,
    including disconnectible drives (e.g., clutch) are not excluded from Class
    418 even if the drive is not reversible.

    (2)     VALVING

    (a)     CYCLIC OR POSITION RESPONSIVE

    Class 418 will take rotary expansible chamber pumps combined with valves
    for the pumped fluid which have a repetitive pattern or cycle of operation
    which is related to the rotation of the pump.  These may be termed cyclic
    or position responsive valving and include the opening and closing of inlet
    or exhaust ports by the movement of the rotor past same.  The adjustment of
    this type valving so as to provide, for example, early cutoff of supply is
    also included in Class 418.  The inclusion, however, of means to cutoff
    operation of the pump after a predetermined number of revolutions is
    excluded from Class 418, this being considered to be a dispensing feature
    for Class 222, Dispensing.

    (b)     IN-LINE

    An in-line valve is defined as one situated in the normal line of pumped
    fluid flow which acts in some way to control the flow in that line, but not
    by diverting the fluid to a second or subsidiary flow line (e.g., bypass).
    Class 418 will take all in-line valves combined with a rotary expansible
    chamber pump which are controlled by some means other than a condition of
    the pumped fluid (e.g., manual throttle) and will also take those which are
    actuated directly by the application of the pumped fluid thereto (i.e.,
    direct response valves).  Those devices including in-line valves which are
    controlled by a pumped fluid condition (e.g., pressure, flow) and in which
    said valves are not of the direct response type are excluded from Class 418
    and will be classified in Class 417 if otherwise appropriate.

    (c)     BRANCHED FLOW OR BY-PASS

    (1)     SEPARATE VALVE MEANS    Those rotary expansible chamber devices
    which include a separate valve means (as opposed to a movable chamber part
    as discussed in paragraph (2) immediately below) to divert or bypass all or
    a portion of the pumped fluid from its normal or first course of flow to a
    second or waste path are excluded from Class 418 regardless of whether the
    valve is manually or otherwise controlled unless the diverted fluid is used
    merely for a pump perfecting function such as lubricating, cooling, vane
    bias, etc.

    (2)     MOVABLE CHAMBER PART
    Many rotary expansible chamber pumps have expansible chamber parts which
    are in running contact with other chamber parts and which move from a
    "normal" or contacting position to a noncontacting position and in so
    moving allow passage or bypass of pumped fluid thereby. Exemplary of such
    parts are vanes, abutments, end plates, etc., and such parts are usually
    biased into contacting position by means such as a spring, pressure fluid
    conducted from the expansible chamber or the like.  Such devices are not
    excluded from Class 418 even though the yielding of the part may be
    considered to be performing a bypassing function.  However, if pumped fluid
    is conducted to the part for such a biasing function (e.g., behind end
    plate) and there is a controlled application of fluid to or release of the
    fluid from the bias area for the disclosed purpose of bypassing said fluid
    or conducting it to another point of use such devices are excluded from
    Class 418 and are classified in Class 417 if otherwise appropriate.  Also
    Class 418 excludes a pump having a movable chamber part whose movement is
    controlled in response to the pressure or flow of the pumped fluid of a
    second rotary expansible chamber device.


    (d)     REVERSIBLE OR UNIDIRECTIONAL FLOW

    Some rotary expansible pumps are provided with adjustable or self-acting
    means by which for a given direction of rotation of the pump the flow may
    be reversed in the line in which the fluid is being pumped, or upon
    reversal of the direction of rotation of the pump the flow will continue in
    the same direction in the pumped fluid flow line.  This, per se, will not
    serve to preclude classification in Class 418.

    (3)     WITH DIVERSE PUMP

            The combination of a rotary expansible chamber pump with another
    pump of a different type (centrifugal, reciprocation, etc.), is excluded
    from Class 418 and is classified in Class 417 unless the different type
    pump is a mere auxiliary of the rotary expansible chamber pump as, for
    example, a lubricating or cooling fluid pump, etc.  In the latter case
    classification in Class 418 is proper.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 55.5 for cold traps including those in
    which the sole disclosure is to act as a "pump" and for cold traps combined
    with a nominally claimed mechanical or roughing pump. Class 417, however,
    takes the combination of a cold trap and a significantly claimed device of
    this class (pump).

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 168 for means to test blowers and
    pumps.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 72+ for animal watering devices
    including animal operated pumps combined with a trough for receiving the
    pumped water.

    166,    Wells, appropriate subclasses for pumps combined with well
    processes or features especially, subclasses 369+ for well production
    processes including pumping steps, subclasses 53+ for automatic wells
    including control of a pump in response to a well condition, subclass 54.1
    for wells with means for separately pumping from plural sources in a well,
    subclasses 61 and 62 for heating, refrigerating or insulating means with an
    eduction pump or plunger in the well, subclasses 68+ for above and below
    ground structure including an eduction pump or plunger in the well,
    subclasses 105+ for a well with an eduction pump or plunger in the well,
    subclass 176 well brushing, scraping, cutting or punching-type cleaners on
    a pump sucker rod, subclasses 316+ for valves including well pump or tubing
    drain valves.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, appropriate subclasses for systems which
    transport solids by means of a fluid current, and which include a pump for
    generating the fluid current.  See particularly subclasses 10+ for control
    circuits for pump drives, which are responsive to a sensed condition, and
    subclasses 45 and 46+ for subject matter relating to the pumping and
    transportation of slurries.

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, for rotary fluid kinetic
    energy devices disclosed as a pump or a motor.  Class 415 will also take a
    plurality of such devices in which each is a pump or each is a motor.
    Class 417 will take a rotary fluid kinetic energy motor driving a rotary
    fluid kinetic energy pump if a claim sets out that one is a motor and one
    is a pump.  However, Class 415 will take this disclosed motor driven pump
    relation if a claim does not reflect that one is a motor and the other a
    pump.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), appropriate subclasses
    for motor driven fluid reaction surfaces (i.e., impellers) in which there
    is no claimed fluid confining or deflecting means, upstream or downstream
    of or encompassing the impeller.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, for rotary expansible chamber
    devices disclosed as a pump or a motor.  Class 418 will also take a
    plurality of such devices in which each is a pump or each is a motor.
    Class 418 will not take a rotary expansible chamber-type motor driving a
    rotary expansible chamber-type pump if a claim recites one as a motor and
    one as a pump.  However, Class 418 will take this disclosed motor driven
    pump relationship if a claim does not reflect that one is a motor and the
    other a pump.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 150+ for high temperature (Tc  30 K) superconducting devices,
    and particularly subclass 165 for pumps utilizing a suspension of
    superconducting particulate material, and cross-reference art collection
    910 for pumps utilizing superconducting materials.

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, subclass 3 for pumps solely disclosed as
    artificial hearts.


CLS 417/1
TXT Subject matter under class definition in which the pump is provided with
    (1) a motor to drive the fluid moving element thereof, (2) control means to
    control the motor in some manner and (3) a separate sensing means which is
    responsive to the occurrence of a condition or a change in condition of
    either the pump or the fluid being pumped and which causes operation of the
    control means to alter the operation of the motor.

    (1)     Note.  Sensing of the speed of a motor which is mechanically
    connected to the pump for driving same is considered as sensing a condition
    of the pump and is included under this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    187+,   for regulation of a jet pump by motive fluid control, jet pumps not
    being considered as motor driven.

    196+,   for diverse pumps having condition responsive control of a drive
    motor for one pump which is a mere priming pump for another.

    212+,   for condition responsive control of a pump drive transmission.

    321+,   for pumps which are cyclically driven by a cyclically operable
    motor and in which the control of the motor is caused to operate cyclically
    by a cyclically changing condition of the pump or pump fluid such that this
    change of condition and its control of the motor are the normal manner of
    operation.


CLS 417/2
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising at least two pumps which are
    either (1) independently driven by separate drive motors, (2) adapted to be
    supplied from separate sources, or (3) adapted to deliver to separate
    destinations.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this definition, a single cylinder having a
    pumping member (e.g., piston) which serves to divide the cylinder into two
    pumping chambers is considered to comprise plural pumps if the pump
    chambers are adapted to deliver fluid to separate destinations or receive
    fluid from separate sources.

    (2)     Note.  To be included under this definition, the plural pumps must
    supply fluid for external use (i.e., one may not be a mere auxiliary of
    another such as a lubricant, coolant, or priming pump).

    (3)     Note.  An entrainment-type pump (e.g., jet pump) has not been
    construed as motor driven and consequently the combination of a condition
    responsive motor driven pump and jet pump is not included under part (1) of
    the above definition and such combination would be classified here only if
    the motor driven pump and jet pump respectively deliver to separate
    destinations or receive fluid from separate sources.


CLS 417/3
TXT Subject matter under subclass 2 in which each of said plural pumps has its
    respective inlet or outlet connected to a single flow line so that fluid
    will flow either to or from said pumps through said flow line.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this definition, a common inflow or outflow
    line is defined as a conduit or tank in that portion of the system which
    handles fluid flow to or from two or more pumps.  Patents disclosing
    parallel flow paths in which a pressure condition is sensed in one path
    only, but for the disclosed purpose of indicating the common flow line
    pressure condition, have been placed in subclass 2, above, and
    appropriately cross-referenced into this subclass or those indented
    hereunder.


CLS 417/4
TXT Subject matter under subclass 3 in which sensing means is operative to
    sense a condition or change of condition occurring in the fluid in the
    common flow line joining either the pump inlets or pump outlets.


CLS 417/5
TXT Subject matter under subclass 4 in which each of said plural pumps is
    driven by separate drive motor and the control means is operative to
    simultaneously or relatively control the operation of each of said plural
    drive motors.


CLS 417/6
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5 in which there is an additional sensing
    means to sense a condition or change in condition in either (1) a fluid
    flow line which is peculiar to a single pump, or (2) a pump which is
    peculiar to a single flow line, said additional sensing means serving to
    effect operation of the same or different control means.


CLS 417/7
TXT Subject matter under subclass 5 in which the control means for the pumps
    comprise a start and stop device for the motor of each pump and which are
    related to one another in such a manner that the pumps will either be
    started or stopped in a certain order in response to changes in conditions
    sensed by the sensing means.


CLS 417/8
TXT Subject matter under subclass 7 having means related to the control means
    for cyclically changing the order of starting or stopping the pump drive
    motors.


CLS 417/9
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 in which there is means provided for
    accumulating or detecting leakage of pump fluid from the pump or system or
    leakage of an extraneous fluid into the pump or system and the control
    means acts in response to such leakage to stop operation of the pump motor.

    (1)     Note.  There must be a specific disclosure that the fluid which
    causes operation of the control means has leaked from the device.  The mere
    possibility of detecting leakage by some conventional means, such as a
    pressure responsive device, is not sufficient for classification in this
    subclass.


CLS 417/10
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 in which the drive motor comprises an
    engine in which fuel is burned in a chamber from which power is directly
    derived and the control means is operative to either (1) control actuation
    of a secondary motor which is utilized for initiating operation of the fuel
    burning engine or (2) control operation of the pump to cause same to be
    operated as a motor for initiating operation of the fuel burning engine.


CLS 417/11
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 in which the drive motor is of the
    reciprocating expansible chamber type and derives its power by the burning
    of fuel in the chamber and in which the piston or working member of the
    motor is free of any mechanical linkage or gearing which limits its
    movement to a fixed stroke during its cycle of operation.


CLS 417/12
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 having means related to the sensing means
    for either (1) causing the state of operation of the drive motor to be
    maintained for a specified period of time after a condition or change in
    condition is detected by the sensing means before allowing the state of
    operation to be changed in accordance with the sensed condition, (2)
    allowing the state of operation of the drive motor to be changed in
    response to a sensed condition and then causing said changed state of
    operation to be maintained for a specified period of time regardless of
    further condition changes, (3) causing the control means or sensing means
    to be ineffective for a specified period of time during motor start up, or
    (4) altering the effectiveness of the control means for a specified period
    of time after the sensing means has detected a change in condition.

    (1)     Note. A fluid dashpot or damper utilizing fluid independent of the
    pump fluid and which serves only to attenuate the effect of periodic
    condition fluctuations of short duration is not considered to be a delay or
    timing means under this definition.


CLS 417/13
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 including a means to supply lubricating,
    sealing, or cooling fluid to the pump and the sensing means senses a
    condition or change of condition of said lubricating, sealing, or cooling
    means and operates the motor control means in response thereto.


CLS 417/14
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 including an additional sensing means
    operatively connected to the control means, said additional sensing means
    being responsive to a condition or change of condition (e.g., ambient
    condition) of the surrounding environment.


CLS 417/15
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 in which there is additionally provided
    means for transmitting motion from the motor to the pump and control means
    for either (1) interrupting motion of the pump (e.g., clutch, lock, etc.),
    (2) varying the rate of motion of the pump (e.g., brake, adjustable
    gearing, etc.) or (3) changing the swept volume of pumping member or motor
    working member displacement of an expansible chamber-type pump or motor
    (e.g., stroke control).


CLS 417/16
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 in which the pump is driven by two or more
    individual motors, each of said motors having a motor working member for
    driving the same fluid moving element of the pump and in which at least one
    of the motors is controlled by the controlling means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for condition responsive control of a starter motor for an internal
    combustion engine.  The starter motor, even though it may incidentally
    drive the pump while cranking the combustion engine, is not considered to
    be a separate pump drive motor for this subclass.


CLS 417/17
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 in which the control means comprises two or
    more controlling elements which are capable of being separately actuated in
    response to the same or different conditions to separately control the
    drive motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for condition responsive control of a starter motor for an internal
    combustion engine, such apparatus usually incorporating a separate control
    means for terminating operation of the internal combustion engine.


CLS 417/18
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising a single drive motor controlling
    element which is caused to be operated in response to means sensing plural
    conditions which are (1) different in kind, e.g., pressure and flow rate,
    or (2) if of the same kind, different by the part of the system
    characterized by the condition, e.g., inlet and discharge pressures of the
    pump.

    (1)     Note.  The diverse condition may be a condition external of the
    pump or pump fluid system, e.g., a drive motor condition.


CLS 417/19
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 in which the sensing means responds to a
    condition or change of condition on the fluid inlet or intake side of the
    pump and a condition or change of condition on the fluid outlet or
    discharge side of the pump.


CLS 417/20
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 in which one of the plural conditions to
    which the sensing means responds is a change in rate of pump fluid flow to,
    or from the pump.


CLS 417/21
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 in which the drive motor is of the type
    which is motivated by a fluid and one of the plural conditions to which the
    sensing means responds is a condition or change in condition of the motor
    driving fluid.


CLS 417/22
TXT Subject matter under subclass 18 in which one of the plural conditions to
    which the sensing means responds for causing operations of the single drive
    motor control element is the rate of speed at which the pump is driven.


CLS 417/23
TXT Subject matter under subclass 22 having valve means for varying the flow of
    fluid being pumped, there being additionally provided a sensing means
    having a single sensing part for detecting a condition other than the rate
    of speed at which the pump is driven, the single sensing means causing
    operation of both the pump fluid valve means and the single drive motor
    control element.


CLS 417/24
TXT Subject matter under subclass 22 in which the means sensing the rate of
    speed at which the pump is driven comprises either a secondary pump or an
    electric generator which is mechanically driven by the pump drive motor for
    producing a fluid or electric signal, respectively, indicative of the rate
    of speed at which the pump is driven.


CLS 417/25
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising two or more pressure responsive
    sensing elements which either simultaneously, successively, or selectively
    respond to a change in pressure occurring in the same part of the system
    (e.g., both respond to pump discharge pressure) for effecting operation of
    a single motor control element.


CLS 417/26
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 including valve means for varying the flow
    of fluid being pumped, which valve means is operated by sensing the
    occurrence of a condition or change of condition in the fluid being pumped.

    (1)     Note.  This definition is not intended to include those devices in
    which there is a single sensing means operating a valve whose sole function
    is to divert a portion of the pumped fluid to cause operation of the drive
    motor control means, such devices have been considered to be merely pilot
    valves for the drive control means.

    (2)     Note.  A direct acting valve, e.g., a check valve which is
    responsive only to the direction of flow in a line is not included.
    However, a valve which diverts flow from one line to another, in a branched
    system, even though dependent only on the direction of flow in the lines is
    included.

    (3)     Note.  For purposes of this definition, pump fluid includes any
    fluid which is caused to be moved by the pump. Therefore, a gas vent valve
    for spoiling a liquid pump by allowing gas to enter the pump is included
    under this definition.  Also, a discriminating valve for allowing gas, but
    not liquid, to be vented from a liquid pumping system is included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for condition responsive control of pump fluid which is utilized as
    motive fluid for starting an internal combustion engine drive motor.


CLS 417/27
TXT Subject matter under subclass 26 in which means are provided for retarding
    or delaying actuation of the valve means for the purpose of preventing
    increase of pressure in the pump until a period of time after the drive
    motor control means has been adjusted to cause such increase, said valve
    actuation delaying or retarding means being separate and isolated from the
    motor control means and having no retarding or delaying effect thereon.

    (1)     Note.  Devices in which the pump fluid valve is caused to be
    operated in response to the motor control element having been adjusted to a
    predetermined motor controlling position are not included under this
    definition in the absence of a separate retarding or delaying means for the
    valve control means.


CLS 417/28
TXT Subject matter under subclass 26 in which the valve means and the control
    means for the drive motor are both caused to be actuated by a sensing means
    having a single sensing part for detecting the occurrence of a condition or
    change of condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for a common condition sensing element which causes operation of
    both a pump drive motor control element and a pump fluid control valve.


CLS 417/29
TXT Subject matter under subclass 26 in which the valve means is controlled in
    response to one condition of the system and the control means for the motor
    is responsive to a second condition which (1) differs in kind from the
    first, e.g., pressure and flow rate, or (2) if of the same kind, differs by
    the part of the system characterized by the condition, e.g., inlet and
    discharge pressures of the pump.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for a sensing means responsive to pump speed for causing operation
    of a pump drive motor control element and a sensing means responsive to a
    condition other than pump speed for causing operation of a pump fluid
    control valve.


CLS 417/30
TXT Subject matter under subclass 29 in which the fluid control means comprises
    a valve in the discharge of the pump which is farther from the pump, on the
    discharge side, than the sensing means for the drive controlling means,
    said valve being controlled in response to the collection of liquid in a
    receiver or receptacle located in the pump discharge line.


CLS 417/31
TXT Subject matter under subclass 30 in which the drive control means is
    responsive to the liquid pressure in the pump discharge line.


CLS 417/32
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 in which the condition sensed is a change
    in the temperature of either the pump or the fluid being moved by the pump.


CLS 417/33
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 in which the control means acts to stop
    operation of the pump by stopping the drive motor in response to a change
    of condition but will not again start the pump when the condition returns
    to normal; the control means requiring the intervention of a human operator
    to restore the pump to a running condition.


CLS 417/34
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 in which the drive motor comprises an
    engine in which fuel is burned in a chamber from which the power is
    directly derived and the control means includes means which acts on the
    engine to change some operating characteristic thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for system condition responsive control of a starter motor for an
    internal combustion engine driving a pump.

    11,     for system condition responsive control of a free piston-type
    internal combustion drive engine.


CLS 417/35
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 in which the drive motor is of the type
    which is driven directly by wind, (e.g., a windmill), and a receptacle is
    provided for receiving liquid which is to be pumped or which has been
    pumped by the pump and the sensing means is responsive to the quantity of
    liquid collected in the receptacle.


CLS 417/36
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 in which there is provided a receptacle for
    receiving liquid which is to be pumped or which has been pumped by the pump
    and the sensing means is responsive to the quantity of liquid in the
    receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     for control of a wind motor in response to liquid accumulation.

    182.5,  for means for controlling an entrainment-type pump (e.g., jet pump)
    in response to the level of pumped liquid, subclass 211.5 for means
    controlling a pump drive transmission (e.g., clutch, cam, etc.) in response
    to the level of pumped liquid and subclass 297.5 for liquid level control
    which modifies the operation of an expansible chamber pump distributor.


CLS 417/37
TXT Subject matter under subclass 36 in which the sensing means is responsive
    to movement of the liquid receptacle or an auxiliary liquid receptacle in
    communication therewith, said movement being caused by the weight of the
    liquid collected therein.


CLS 417/38
TXT Subject matter under subclass 36 in which the sensing means comprises a
    device which responds to liquid pressure changes and is either in fluid
    communication with or mounted within the receptacle in a manner such that
    the liquid must either reach a predetermined level before it may pass to
    the pressure sensing device or exert sufficient pressure on the sensing
    device to cause actuation thereof.

    (1)     Note.  A movable receptacle is not considered a pressure sensor
    under this definition, such devices being classified in subclass 37 above.

    (2)     Note.  The liquid pressure may be transmitted to the sensing means
    via another liquid (e.g., mercury column).


CLS 417/39
TXT Subject matter under subclass 36 in which the pump is driven by a fluid
    motor and the supply of motive fluid for the fluid motor is in fluid
    communication with the liquid collecting receptacle.


CLS 417/40
TXT Subject matter under subclass 36 in which the sensing means comprises a
    buoyant element which floats on the surface of the liquid collected in the
    receptacle.


CLS 417/41
TXT Subject matter under subclass 40 in which the pump is driven by a fluid
    motor and the control means acts to control the flow of fluid to said motor.


CLS 417/42
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 in which the sensing means senses the rate
    of speed at which the pump is driven.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22+,    for a single motor control element which is operated in response to
    means sensing diverse conditions, one of said diverse conditions being the
    speed of the pump.


CLS 417/43
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 in which the sensing means is responsive to
    variations in the rate of flow of the fluid flowing to or from the pump.


CLS 417/44.1
TXT By control of electric or magnetic drive motor:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 in which the motor is of the type having a
    working member (e.g., armature) which is motivated by electricity or a
    magnetic field.

    (1)     Note.  Collected in this subclass are patents directed to system
    condition responsive control of drive motors of the type commonly referred
    to as magnetic or electromagnetic clutches.


CLS 417/44.11
TXT Responsive to change in electrical operating characteristic:

    Apparatus under subclass 44.1 wherein the electric drive motor comprises a
    sensing means where an operating characteristic changes in response to a
    change in an electrical current drawn by the motor or a change in a voltage
    across the motor or a change in a phase shift of the motor.


CLS 417/44.2
TXT Responsive to pump fluid pressure:

    Apparatus under subclass 44.1 having a sensing means responsive to
    variation in pressure present in the fluid flowing to or out from the pump
    and which causes operation of the control means to alter the operation of
    the motor.

    (1)     Note.  The fluid pressure may be transmitted to the sensing means
    via another liquid (e.g., mercury column).


CLS 417/44.3
TXT Inlet pressure:

    Apparatus under subclass 44.2 wherein the sensing means is located at an
    inlet side of the pump.


CLS 417/44.4
TXT Low pressure stops motor from turning on pump:

    Apparatus under subclass 44.2 wherein the motor comprises an electrical
    contact having an opened position and a closed position and the contact
    remains in the opened position as long as the sensed pressure of the fluid
    remains below a predetermined value.


CLS 417/44.5
TXT Mercury switch:

    Apparatus under subclass 44.2 wherein the motor comprises an electrical
    circuit and the sensing means includes a device which contains mercury
    which is motivated by the variations in the fluid pressure; the said
    motivation triggers the electrical circuit of the motor to close or open.


CLS 417/44.6
TXT Dial-type sensor:

    Apparatus under subclass 44.2 wherein the motor comprises an electrical
    circuit and the sensing means includes a dial indicator which has a rotary
    movement responsive to the fluid pressure and a manually adjustable set
    point which causes the electrical circuit to open or close when the
    positions of the indicator and manual set point are properly aligned.


CLS 417/44.7
TXT Bellow-type sensor:

    Apparatus under subclass 44.2 wherein the motor comprises an electrical
    circuit and the sensing means includes a flexible structure which is
    capable of expanding to increase the volumetric capacity thereof, said
    structure comprising (a) a tube of flexible material having a
    circumferentially corrugated or pleated wall, (b) at least four plates,
    each plate having a central opening therein defining an edge inwardly of
    the outer peripheral edge thereof, said plates being arranged in superposed
    relation with adjacent plates secured along their inner and outer edges
    alternately, or (c) a pair of rigid platelike members pivoted together
    along a portion of their peripheral edges, the remaining peripheral edge
    portion of said plates being joined together by a flexible member which is
    pleated in some position of relative pivotal movement of the platelike
    members.


CLS 417/44.8
TXT Piston-type sensor:

    Apparatus under subclass 44.2 wherein the motor comprises an electrical
    circuit and the sensing means includes a plunger or a solid disk which fits
    snugly into a cylinder and wherein the plunger or the disk moves when
    subjected to the fluid pressure variation in the cylinder causing the
    electrical circuit of the motor to close or open.


CLS 417/44.9
TXT Diaphragm:

    Apparatus under subclass 44.2 wherein the motor comprises an electrical
    circuit and the sensing means includes a relatively thin membranelike
    member having a peripheral edge portion, said member being adapted to be
    associated with a surrounding or encompassing tubular rigid structure to
    extend transversely thereof to form a closing wall for said tubular
    structure, the outer peripheral edge of said membrane being in sealing
    relationship with the encompassing wall of said tubular structure; said
    member moves in response to the fluid pressure variation causing the
    electrical circuit of the motor to close or open.

    (1)     Note.  The membranelike member need not span the entire space
    within the encompassing wall of the tubular member, but may be in the form
    of a ring or frustum having the inner peripheral edge thereof in sealing
    engagement with a rigid element movable relative to and coaxial with the
    encompassing tubular member.


CLS 417/45
TXT Subject matter under subclasses 44.1+ in which the motor is electrically
    operated and the motor or electric supply circuit therefor includes an
    electrical component (e.g., resistance element, starting winding, etc.)
    which is either (1) adjustable to change its electrical value or
    characteristic or (2) capable of being included in or shunted out of the
    main motor circuit; and in which the control means acts to control the
    adjustment or shunting of the component in response to the sensed condition.


CLS 417/46
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 in which the motor drive means for the pump
    is of the type which includes a movable working member which is motivated
    by a fluid and the control means comprises means for controlling the flow
    of motive fluid to or from the motor in response to the sensing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for a single fluid motor control element which is operated in
    response to means sensing diverse conditions, one of said diverse
    conditions being a motive fluid condition.

    34,     for means for system condition responsive control of an internal
    combustion-type drive engine.

    41,     for means for controlling motive fluid to drive motor in response
    to float means which senses accumulation of pumped liquid in a receiver.


CLS 417/47
TXT Subject matter under subclass 46 in which the motor is of the type in which
    the drive element rotates about an axis and derives its power by the fluid
    impacting against the drive element.


CLS 417/48
TXT Subject matter under class definition in which (1) the fluid is pumped by
    or the pumping effect relies upon the direct action thereon of electrical
    means or a magnetic field, or (2) the fluid is "pumped" or trapped by means
    of a getter.

    (1)     Note.  This is the residual home for the creation of a vacuum in an
    enclosed space by means of a gettering action as defined in (2) Note below.
     This and indented subclasses include the combination of the chamber to be
    evacuated and the gettering means.  It also includes significant claimed
    containers holding getter material for disposition in a chamber to be
    evacuated.

    (2)     Note.  A getter is a material which, when placed in an enclosed
    space, reduces the gas or vapor content of the space either by a chemical
    or physical action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322,    for pumps having a chamber which is expanded and contracted by an
    electrical or magnetostrictive action on the walls thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures subclasses 255+ for a loose metal particle composition.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 108+ for solid sorbent
    apparatus for separating vaporous or gaseous constituents.  The subject
    matter classified in Class 96 may be intended to create a vacuum in an
    enclosed space, but must selectively separate one constituent from another.
     Thus, Class 96 does not take solid sorbent apparatus or any other means
    intended to sorb all of the gas or vapor constituents in a chamber.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 192.1+ for
    processes for coating or forming an article by cathode sputtering and
    subclass 298.01 for cathode sputtering apparatus to coat or form an article.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 181.1+ for getters and gas or vapor
    generating materials, per se, and also for such materials claimed as being
    in a container, but where no structure of the container is claimed.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 545 to 566 for
    electric lamps and space discharge devices which include a getter or gas or
    vapor generating material as a part thereof.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, appropriate subclasses for systems which
    transport solids by means of a fluid current, and which include a pump for
    generating the fluid current.  See particularly subclasses 10+ for control
    circuits for pump drives, which are responsive to a sensed condition, and
    subclasses 45 and 46+ for subject matter relating to the pumping and
    transportation of slurries.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    subclasses 38+, 53+ and 73 for methods and apparatus for evacuating
    electric lamp and space discharge devices and including some step or means
    limited to the manufacture or repair of electric lamp or space discharge
    device.


CLS 417/49
TXT Subject matter under subclass 48 in which the pumping action is effected by
    or relies upon the ionization of the pumped fluid by the action of
    electrical means and including a getter material for the ionized fluid or
    an additional pump of a different type (e.g., mechanical, diffusion, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  The line between this Class 417 and Classes 313, Electric
    Lamp and Discharge Devices and 315, Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:
    Systems, in the field of ionic pumps generally falls into two categories as
    follows:

    (a)     SPACE DISCHARGE AND GETTERING
    The distinction between Class 417 and Classes 313 and 315 in the field of
    creation of a high vacuum involving electrical space discharge with
    gettering is one of art.  Thus, a patent to a space discharge device
    combined with gettering means (the getter may be an electrode of the space
    discharge device) in which the sole disclosure is to act as a vacuum pump
    (i.e., the only disclosed use of the space discharge device is to ionize
    fluid to be trapped by the getter); or one in which all of the claims are
    limited to a pumping or vacuum creating function will be classified as an
    original in Class 417.  Conversely, those in which the disclosure is not
    limited to a vacuum pump function and having a claim not limited to pumping
    will be classified in Class 313 or Class 315 if otherwise appropriate.


    (b)     SPACE DISCHARGE WITHOUT GETTERING
    Those devices in which a fluid or fluid stream is ionized by a space
    discharge device and do not include gettering of the ionized fluid will
    generally be classified in Class 313 or 315 even though the sole disclosure
    relates to pumping or vacuum formation. However, if in addition to the
    ionization means an additional pump of the nonionization type is claimed
    the patent will be classified in Class 417.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses and see
    particularly subclasses 231.01+, 359.1+ and 545 to 566.  See (1) Note above.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses and see particularly subclasses 111.01+  See (1) Note above.


CLS 417/50
TXT Subject matter under subclass 48 in which the pumped fluid is electrically
    conductive, a current being caused to flow in the fluid while being
    subjected to a magnetic field, the result being a pumping action on the
    fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for the "pumping" of fluid or formation of a vacuum by ionizing the
    fluid to be pumped and subjecting the ionized fluid to a magnetic field and
    see the notes thereto for similar art classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 11 for
    dynamoelectric apparatus utilizing a conducting fluid.


CLS 417/51
TXT Subject matter under subclass 48 provided with getter means and in which
    means are provided to elevate the temperature of the getter, to change the
    state of the getter from a solid to a vapor or to renew the getter to
    perform its gettering function after having already operated as a getter.


CLS 417/52
TXT Subject matter under class definition in which the fluid to be pumped is
    isolated in a chamber, heated to expel a portion thereof from the chamber,
    this expelled portion constituting the pumped fluid, and the fluid
    remaining in the chamber then cooled so as to contract and establish a
    reduced pressure in the chamber to draw in a new charge of fluid.


CLS 417/53
TXT Processes of pumping under the class definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclasses 369+ for a process of producing a well including
    a significant manipulative step in addition to pumping.


CLS 417/54
TXT Processes under subclass 53 in which one fluid is pumped or motivated by
    direct contact or entrainment with another fluid, the motive fluid before
    contact or entrainment being separate from the pump fluid.


CLS 417/55
TXT Processes under subclass 54 in which the composition of the motive fluid is
    specified in a claim.

    (1)     Note.  The following are excluded under this definition as specific
    motive fluid:  water, air, steam, mercury. Oil is also excluded under this
    definition unless the composition is more specifically recited than mere
    "oil".


CLS 417/56
TXT Apparatus under class definition in which the pump has a piston which
    reciprocates within an elongated cylinder of uniform cross-sectional
    dimensions which is adapted to be positioned within a drilled well, said
    piston serving to separate the cylinder into respective motor and pump
    chambers, means providing either a restricted or a controlled flow path
    which provides communication between the pump and motor chambers (i.e.,
    between opposite sides of the piston), the induction of at least a portion
    of the fluid to be pumped flowing serially through the motor chamber, said
    restricted or controlled flow path, and thence into said pump chamber;
    motive fluid being subsequently applied to said motor chamber to drive said
    piston on an eduction stroke.

    (1)     Note.  The motive fluid under this definition may be derived either
    from the well itself or from an external source.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass and those indented hereunder are intended to
    include the subcombination of a valved or radially expansible piston for
    performing a valving function which is disclosed as having utility in the
    apparatus defined herein.


CLS 417/57
TXT Apparatus under subclass 56 in which there is provided means for
    controlling the flow of liquid from the pump chamber, said flow controlling
    means being operated in response to either (1) the sensing of a condition
    or change in condition or (2) the arrival of the piston at a predetermined
    position in the cylinder.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this definition, a mere check valve in the
    eduction flow conduit which opens in the direction of pump fluid eduction
    is not considered to be condition responsive control. Also, the mere
    passing of the eduction port by the free piston is not considered to be
    position responsive control of the type herein provided for.


CLS 417/58
TXT Apparatus under subclass 56 in which there is provided valve means for
    controlling the inlet of motive fluid to the motor chamber, said valve
    means comprising mechanical elements which are relatively moved in response
    to either (1) the sensing of a condition or change in condition or (2) the
    arrival of the piston at a predetermined position in the cylinder.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this definition, a mere check valve
    positioned within the motive fluid supply line which opens in the direction
    of motive fluid supply to the motor chamber is not considered to be
    condition responsive control.

    (2)     Note.  Supply of motive fluid which is controlled by well liquid
    level in which the well liquid serves to directly cover or uncover motor
    chamber supply ports is excluded under this definition.  However, a piston
    controlled cylinder port which is subsequently opened to allow the supply
    additional motive fluid is included hereunder.


CLS 417/59
TXT Apparatus under subclass 56 in which at least a portion of the piston is
    capable of expansion and contraction in a direction perpendicular to its
    axis of reciprocation to thereby provide a valving action with the chamber
    in which it reciprocates to allow or interrupt fluid communication between
    the pump and motor chambers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    555.1+, and see the search notes therein, for other fields of search for
    radially expansible and contractible pistons.


CLS 417/60
TXT Apparatus under subclass 56 in which the piston has a fluid flow passage
    formed therein which extends to opposite ends of said piston and valve
    means carried by the piston for controlling said passage, said valve means
    being positively mechanically moved by engagement of said valve (or an
    element associated therewith) with a stationary chamber portion.


CLS 417/61
TXT Apparatus under class definition in which the pump unit or the intake or
    discharge line thereof is buoyant or buoyantly supported so as to be
    capable of floating on a body of liquid, the pump not being operated by the
    rise and fall or flow of the liquid on which it or its intake or discharge
    line floats.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, subclass 7, for a float
    supported or buoyant runner.


CLS 417/62
TXT Apparatus under class definition comprising two pumping members or units,
    and means being provided by which the pumped fluid is successively acted
    upon by said members or units, and alternatively the members or units are
    arranged in separate or branched flow lines so as to take from a common or
    separate sources and deliver to a common or separate outlets.


CLS 417/63
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having (1) signals, indicators,
    registers, recorders, or gauges for indicating a condition of the pump or
    pumped fluid or the position of a pump part such as a piston, control
    member, valve, etc., such devices comprising relatively movable, changeable
    or audible information giving parts, or (2) transparent viewing means
    whereby the pump operation or the condition of some part thereof may be
    observed.

    (1)     Note.  For classification under part (1) of this definition there
    must be either an indicia or an audible or visual signal or a means whose
    sole purpose is to indicate a condition of the device.  Relative to indicia
    there must be graduations or markings disclosed.  Where it is indicated
    that the mere position of a pump part is indicative of a condition of the
    pump (e.g., valve handle position indicated direction of fluid flow)
    classification under the definition does not result unless some cooperating
    indicia are included.


CLS 417/64
TXT Apparatus under class definition having a cellular member rotatable about
    an axis with means to isolate therein and from its source a volume of gas
    to be pumped, transfer said volume to a position where a gaseous motive
    fluid may be admitted into said cellular member for the purpose of
    increasing the pressure of said volume while an interface is maintained
    between the two gases, and then permit the pumped gas and the motive gas to
    be exited from said cellular member each into a separate flow path.


CLS 417/65
TXT Apparatus under class definition in which one fluid is pumped or motivated
    by direct contact or entrainment with another fluid, the motive fluid
    before contact or entrainment being separate from the pump fluid.

    (1)     Note.  This definition does not include mere pulsation dampeners or
    accumulators, i.e., a trapped, confined compressible fluid which directly
    receives energy from another fluid and returns the energy to the other
    fluid from which it was received.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for gas pressure exchange devices using a rotary cellular member to
    transfer a gas to be pumped to a position where its pressure may be
    increased by being contacted directly by a gaseous motive fluid.


CLS 417/66
TXT Apparatus under subclass 65 in which a driven element is provided to
    continuously and unidirectionally move the motive fluid either as slugs or
    a complete ring about an axis at a relatively high rate of speed, said
    motive fluid directly contacting and imparting energy to the fluid being
    pumped while in said movement about an axis.


CLS 417/67
TXT Apparatus under subclass 66 in which the driven element is provided with a
    passage passing through the axis of rotation of the element at the point
    where it is supported for rotation and said passage is described as
    conveying motive fluid or fluid being pumped.


CLS 417/68
TXT Apparatus under subclass 66 in which the motive fluid is rotated by the
    driven member at such a speed and in such a manner as to form a peripheral
    ring around the driven member within a surrounding casing.


CLS 417/69
TXT Apparatus under subclass 68 including a second pump which is of a different
    basic type from the liquid ring pump.

    (1)     Note.  The liquid ring pump may be merely a priming pump for the
    second pump.


CLS 417/70
TXT Apparatus under subclass 66 in which a passage to supply motive fluid to be
    rotated by the driven element is provided, said passage being closely
    related to the axially remote portion of the rotary element.


CLS 417/71
TXT Apparatus under subclass 66 in which a passage is provided to bring fluid
    to be pumped into contact with motive fluid being moved about an axis, said
    passage being closely related to axis of the driven element.


CLS 417/72
TXT Apparatus under subclass 71 in which an outlet passage for pumped fluid is
    provided, said passage being closely related to the axially remote portion
    of the rotary element.


CLS 417/73
TXT Apparatus under subclass 65 comprising a pumping chamber into which pump
    fluid is alternately introduced and expelled, the pumping being effected by
    burning of motive fluid and application of the products of combustion to
    the chamber.


CLS 417/74
TXT Apparatus under subclass 73 having a separate ignition means to ignite the
    motive fluid, said ignition means being responsive to a condition of the
    pump fluid.


CLS 417/75
TXT Apparatus under subclass 73 including means to return a portion of the pump
    fluid to the pump chamber and utilize the momentum thereof to effect
    expulsion of a previously burned charge of motive fluid, and compress the
    next incoming charge of motive fluid.


CLS 417/76
TXT Apparatus under subclass 65 including a jet pump and an additional pump
    which includes a mechanical impelling member (e.g., piston, rotor, etc.) to
    generate the motive fluid supplied to the jet pump.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of a jet pump see this class subclass 151.

    (2)     Note.  The jet pump may have the sole disclosed use of priming the
    motive fluid generating pump.


CLS 417/77
TXT Apparatus under subclass 76 in which the motive fluid and the pumped fluid
    are of different states (i.e., liquid and gas) and after entrainment the
    two are separated and the motive fluid fed back to the entrainment area as
    recirculated motive fluid.

    (1)     Note.  This definition excludes a jet pump which primes the other
    pump of air but then acts to pump liquid when the other pump is primed.


CLS 417/78
TXT Apparatus under subclass 76 provided with a rotary impeller which acts to
    project motive fluid therefrom, the exit of the impeller acting as the
    motive fluid nozzle and being disposed in the area of entrainment.

    (1)     Note.  This definition excludes an impeller whose discharge is
    confined by a passage which acts as the motive fluid nozzle.  See subclass
    84.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66+,    for pumping one fluid by contact or entrainment with another
    wherein the contact or entrainment occurs within a rotary impeller.


CLS 417/79
TXT Apparatus under subclass 76 in which at least a portion of the output of
    the jet pump is supplied back to the intake of the motive fluid generating
    pump.


CLS 417/80
TXT Apparatus under subclass 79 in which the motive fluid generating pump
    comprises a pumping member which has unidirectional rotary motion about a
    fixed axis and acts to pump fluid by a centrifugal, centripetal or screw
    effect.


CLS 417/81
TXT Apparatus under subclass 80 in which the rotary nonexpansible chamber-type
    pump includes a plurality of rotary pumping members at least a portion of
    the pumped fluid passing successively from one pumping member to the next.


CLS 417/82
TXT Apparatus under subclass 80 in which the jet pump may be selectively placed
    in different positions with respect to the rotary pump, usually for
    adapting the apparatus to operate with a shallow well with the jet
    proximate the rotary pumping member or with a deep well with the jet
    positioned in the well remote from the rotary pumping member.


CLS 417/83
TXT Apparatus under subclass 80 in which the jet pump is located in close
    physical proximity to the rotary pumping member of the diverse pump and is
    contained within the housing structure (including inlet and outlet
    connections) thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     for combined jet and rotary nonexpansible chamber-type pumps in
    which the jet may be selectively located in the rotary pump casing or
    remote therefrom.


CLS 417/84
TXT Apparatus under subclass 76 in which the motive fluid generating pump
    comprises a pumping member which has unidirectional rotary motion about a
    fixed axis and acts to pump fluid by a centrifugal, centripetal or screw
    effect.


CLS 417/85
TXT Apparatus under subclass 65 comprising a plurality of discrete pumps of
    different basic types.

    (1)     Note.  This definition does not include a plurality of pumps of
    different basic types if one is a mere auxiliary or ancillary of the other
    (e.g., lubricant or cooling pump for main pump).  However, a pump whose
    sole disclosed function may be to prime the other pump is not considered a
    mere auxiliary and this combination is included in this definition.

    (2)     Note.  This definition includes as different basic-type pumps which
    may both be of the fluid contact or entrainment types such as, for example,
    jet pump and aerated column, pneumatic displacement and jet, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for diverse pumps one of which is the liquid ring type.


CLS 417/86
TXT Apparatus under subclass 85 in which one of the pumps is of the type having
    a chamber or container in which liquid to be pumped is collected and means
    to apply gas pressure from an external source to the surface of the liquid
    in said chamber or container to expel the liquid therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  The gas pressure may be merely atmospheric air admitted to
    the chamber which has been filled by applying vacuum thereto.


CLS 417/87
TXT Apparatus under subclass 85 in which one of the pumps comprises a jet pump.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of a jet pump see this class subclass 151.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76,     for a jet pump with a motive fluid generating pump.


CLS 417/88
TXT Apparatus under subclass 87 in which the diverse pump is driven by an
    internal combustion engine or fluid motor and the exhaust motive fluid or
    combustion products from the motor are directed to the fluid jet producing
    means of the jet pump to act as the motive fluid therefor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     for an aerated column pump and a diverse pump which is driven by an
    internal combustion engine or fluid motor the exhaust of which provides the
    aeration fluid.


CLS 417/89
TXT Apparatus under subclass 87 in which another of the pumps comprises a
    pumping member which has unidirectional rotary motion about a fixed axis
    and acts to pump fluid by centrifugal, centripetal or screw effect.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     for a jet pump with a rotary  nonexpansible chamber-type pump which
    generates the motive fluid for the jet.


CLS 417/90
TXT Apparatus under subclass 85 in which one of the pumps is of the aerated
    column type.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of an aerated column pump see this class
    subclass 108.


CLS 417/91
TXT Apparatus under subclass 90 in which the diverse pump is driven by an
    internal combustion engine or fluid motor, the exhaust motive fluid or
    combustion products from the motor constituting the gas which is injected
    into the liquid column.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for a jet pump in which the jet motive fluid is the exhaust from an
    internal combustion engine or fluid motor which drives a pump different
    from the jet pump.


CLS 417/92
TXT Apparatus under subclass 65 in which a fluid may be pumped by the direct
    action thereon of a compressing chamber or container and a liquid forming
    part of said compressing chamber or container, the body of liquid in effect
    constituting a piston in said container whereby relative movement between
    said liquid and said container varies the volume of a space in said chamber
    or container to pump the fluid.


CLS 417/93
TXT Apparatus under subclass 92 in which at least one wall of said chamber
    means is moved relative to a surface of said body of liquid to change the
    volume of said chamber and thus pressurize the fluid confined therein.


CLS 417/94
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93 in which said chamber has a wall means having a
    spiral configuration which extends along an axis, and upon rotation about
    said axis said wall means is caused to move relative to said liquid
    surface, move said fluid axially and change the pressure of said fluid to
    be pumped which is confined in said chamber.


CLS 417/95
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93 in which the movement of the chamber operates a
    cyclically operated valve or other cyclic control means for flow of the
    body of liquid to or from the chamber.


CLS 417/96
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93 in which the body of liquid is completely
    supported by the structure which forms the chamber, said structure being
    moved to cause said fluid to be pumped.


CLS 417/97
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93 in which a plurality of chamber means are
    provided, said chambers being moved relative to one another.


CLS 417/98
TXT Apparatus under subclass 93 in which the chamber means is moved to-and-fro.


CLS 417/99
TXT Apparatus under subclass 92 in which the liquid body comprises the element
    mercury.


CLS 417/100
TXT Apparatus under subclass 92 in which the body of liquid is moved by the
    natural tide or wave action of a large body of water in its natural
    situation.


CLS 417/101
TXT Apparatus under subclass 92 in which relative height of the surface of the
    body of liquid in said chamber cyclically operates a valve or other control
    means to effect cyclic pumping.


CLS 417/102
TXT Apparatus under subclass 101 in which a plurality of interrelated variable
    volume compressing chambers are provided.


CLS 417/103
TXT Apparatus under subclass 92 in which a plurality of contracting chambers
    are provided.


CLS 417/104
TXT Apparatus under subclass 92 in which the body of liquid is set in motion
    and the inertia of the body of liquid (i.e., the tendency to remain in
    motion or at rest) being effective to produce the pumping action.


CLS 417/105
TXT Apparatus under subclass 65 in which gaseous pumping fluid is reduced to
    the liquid state with a resultant pressure change, which change causes the
    pumped fluid to be motivated.


CLS 417/106
TXT Apparatus under subclass 105 comprising plural pumping chambers which are
    so interrelated as to produce alternate or successive pumping from the
    chambers.


CLS 417/107
TXT Apparatus under subclass 105 with means responsive to a condition of the
    pumping or pumped fluid, said means controlling the flow of the pumping or
    pumped fluid.


CLS 417/108
TXT Apparatus under subclass 65 comprising a vertical column into which the
    liquid to be pumped enters, with means to inject a gaseous motive fluid
    below the level of the liquid accumulated therein which effects a mixed
    mass of reduced specific gravity to elevate said liquid with said gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85+,    for means for pumping a fluid which employs a means to aerate the
    fluid to reduce its specific gravity in combination with another kind of
    pump means (e.g., jet, etc.).

    151+,   for jet pumps which employ a motive fluid moving at a greater
    velocity than the fluid to be pumped thereby creating a vacuum or reduced
    pressure area to motivate the pumped fluid and wherein the motive fluid may
    subsequently become entrained with the pumped fluid.


CLS 417/109
TXT Apparatus under subclass 108 wherein said injection means comprises valve
    means which opens and closes to control the gaseous motive fluid injected.


CLS 417/110
TXT Apparatus under subclass 109 having (1) fluid impinging means in the flow
    path of the liquid to be pumped, to be acted upon thereby, or (2), means
    responsive to the velocity of the moving liquid being pumped comprising a
    restricted passageway.


CLS 417/111
TXT Apparatus under subclass 109 wherein said valve means comprises plural
    valves mounted at vertically spaced levels along said vertical column, and
    having common mechanical or electrical actuating means to actuate or permit
    the actuation of the valves in a particular sequence.


CLS 417/112
TXT Apparatus under subclass 109 wherein said valve means is actuated by an
    associated flexible diaphragm or bellows-type sensing element which is
    responsive to the pressure of either the liquid to be pumped, or the
    gaseous pumping fluid.


CLS 417/113
TXT Apparatus under subclass 112 wherein said valve means comprises a pilot
    valve and a main valve, said pilot valve controlling actuating fluid to the
    main valve to control actuation thereof, and said sensing element
    controlling the actuation of said pilot valve.


CLS 417/114
TXT Apparatus under subclass 109 wherein said valve means comprises a pilot
    valve and a main valve, said main valve controlling the gaseous motive
    fluid injection and said pilot valve controlling actuating fluid to the
    main valve to control actuation thereof.


CLS 417/115
TXT Apparatus under subclass 109 wherein said valve means is actuated in
    response to the attainment of an absolute rate of flow, pressure or other
    absolute condition of the motive fluid to control the flow of motive fluid
    injected into the pumped fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109,    for devices having unbiased check valves in the gaseous motive
    fluid line which merely acts to prevent the flow of the liquid to be pumped
    back into the motive fluid line and which, by their nature, permit flow of
    motive fluid to flow therethrough whenever the pressure of the motive fluid
    exceeds that of the pumped fluid.

    110,    for those devices having motive fluid injection control valves
    which are controlled in response to the flow of the pumped fluid and which
    may also be influenced by a motive fluid condition.

    117,    for those devices having motive fluid injection control valves
    which are actuated to permit the flow of motive fluid into the pumped fluid
    in response to a static head build up of pumped fluid.


CLS 417/116
TXT Apparatus under subclass 109 comprising float means or other nonpressure
    sensitive means responsive to the level of liquid accumulated, which float
    means controls actuation of said valve means.


CLS 417/117
TXT Apparatus under subclass 109 wherein said valve means comprises a valve
    member, said valve member being biased closed by weight, spring, or other
    means, and having means exposed to the accumulation of liquid within said
    vertical column, which means, in response to the pressure of the
    accumulated liquid, opens or tends to open said valve member.


CLS 417/118
TXT Apparatus under subclass 65 in which the fluid which is to be pumped is a
    liquid, and the motive fluid is a gas, comprising a pumping chamber, a
    liquid inlet and a liquid outlet through which the liquid is pumped into
    and out of said chamber, means for supplying and exhausting the gas to
    effect the pumping of said liquid, and further having (1) pump means to
    supply or exhaust the gas or (2), liquid level float means to effect
    control of the gas or liquid entering or leaving said chamber or (3) means
    to effect repetitive or cyclic pumping into and from said chamber upon
    initiation of the pumping action.

    (1)     Note.  The pumps disclosed in the patents contained herein operate
    on a differential pressure principle, i.e., by withdrawing the gaseous
    motive fluid which is in contact with a portion of a confined liquid to be
    pumped, a higher pressure, e.g., atmospheric, acting upon another portion
    of said confined liquid effects movement and thus pumping thereof.

    (2)     Note.  Devices are included under this definition wherein the
    pumping chamber is provided with a single means by which both the liquid
    and the gas are exhausted.

    (3)     Note.  Devices are classified under this definition which have
    pumping chambers which are submerged in the liquid to be pumped whereby the
    liquid is introduced into the chamber by gravity.


CLS 417/119
TXT Apparatus under subclass 118 having a pump means to supply or exhaust the
    gas, said pump means comprising means to utilize a body of liquid, which
    body of liquid is in contact with the gas, to compress or expand said gas.


CLS 417/120
TXT Apparatus under subclass 118 having pump means for said motive fluid, and
    including condition responsive control means to directly control said pump
    means.


CLS 417/121
TXT Apparatus under subclass 118 comprising plural pumping chambers where the
    liquid output of one chamber is the liquid input for another.


CLS 417/122
TXT Apparatus under subclass 118 comprising plural pumping chambers
    interrelated by means to effect alternate pumping from said chambers.


CLS 417/123
TXT Apparatus under subclass 122 wherein said interrelated means is responsive
    to a condition of the motive fluid or the fluid which is pumped in a first
    chamber, to control the supplying or exhausting of motive fluid to a second
    chamber.


CLS 417/124
TXT Apparatus under subclass 123 wherein the condition is the weight of the
    fluid which is pumped which has accumulated in the first chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140,    for devices having a movably mounted means adapted to receive the
    fluid which is pumped and adapted to be moved in response to a quantity of
    fluid received to control the pumping operation.


CLS 417/125
TXT Apparatus under subclass 123 wherein the condition is the liquid level of
    the fluid which is pumped in the first chamber.


CLS 417/126
TXT Apparatus under subclass 118 having means buoyed by the fluid which is
    pumped and responsive to change in level thereof to control flow of the
    fluid which is pumped or of the motive fluid into or from the pumping
    chamber.


CLS 417/127
TXT Apparatus under subclass 126 having more than one buoyant means in a single
    pumping chamber.


CLS 417/128
TXT Apparatus under subclass 126 wherein the flow of the fluid which is pumped
    or the flow of the motive fluid is controlled by a valve means which is
    controlled by the buoyed means through a pilot valve means.


CLS 417/129
TXT Apparatus under subclass 126 wherein the flow to or from the pumping
    chamber of the motive fluid or of the fluid which is pumped is controlled
    by said buoyed means through an electrical actuating means.


CLS 417/130
TXT Apparatus under subclass 126 wherein the admission of the motive fluid to
    the pumping chamber is controlled by the buoyed means.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus having means to control the admission of
    atmospheric air to a pumping chamber adapted to be placed under a vacuum
    are classified in this and indented subclasses.


CLS 417/131
TXT Apparatus under subclass 130 wherein said buoyed means also controls the
    exhausting of the motive fluid from the pumping chamber.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus having means to control the flow of working fluid
    from the pumping chamber to a vacuum source are classified in this and
    indented subclasses.


CLS 417/132
TXT Apparatus under subclass 131 wherein said buoyed means also controls the
    pumped fluid ejected from the pumping chamber.


CLS 417/133
TXT Apparatus under subclass 131 wherein the float means initiates the
    operation of an over center (e.g., spring, weight, etc.) valve actuator to
    control the flow of motive fluid to and from the pumping chamber.


CLS 417/134
TXT Apparatus under subclass 126 wherein the flow of motive fluid from the
    pumping chamber is controlled by the buoyant means.

    (1)     Note.  Devices having means to control the flow of motive fluid
    from the pumping chamber to the vacuum source are classified in this and
    indented subclasses.


CLS 417/135
TXT Apparatus under subclass 134 wherein said buoyant means further controls
    the flow of fluid which is pumped from the pumping chamber.


CLS 417/136
TXT Apparatus under subclass 134 wherein said buoyant means further controls
    the flow of fluid which is pumped into the pumping chamber.


CLS 417/137
TXT Apparatus under subclass 118 wherein the pumping chamber alternately admits
    and ejects a fluid which is pumped by controlling flow of the pumped fluid
    or motive fluid by a mechanism motivated (1) in response to an ambient or
    external pumped fluid or motive fluid condition or (2) by the pumped fluid,
    motive fluid or other means.


CLS 417/138
TXT Apparatus under subclass 137 wherein said means for admitting or ejecting
    the fluid which is pumped to and from the pumping chamber comprises liquid
    level sensing means at predetermined liquid level(s).


CLS 417/139
TXT Apparatus under subclass 137 wherein the mechanism, by which the fluid
    which is pumped is admitted to or ejected from the pump chamber, is
    motivated in response to a condition of the pumped fluid.


CLS 417/140
TXT Apparatus under subclass 139 having a movably mounted means adapted to
    receive the fluid which is pumped and adapted to move in response to a
    quantity of fluid received to control the mechanism by which the fluid
    which is pumped is admitted to or ejected from the pump chamber.

    (1)     Note.  The pump chamber may be the movably mounted means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124,    for devices having plural interrelated pumping chambers which
    include a means to sense the weight received of fluid which is pumped to
    control the pumping operation of the chambers.


CLS 417/141
TXT Apparatus under subclass 139 wherein the mechanism, by which the fluid
    which is pumped is admitted to or ejected from the pumping chamber, is
    controlled in response to the rate of flow of the fluid which is pumped.


CLS 417/142
TXT Apparatus under subclass 139 wherein the mechanism, by which the fluid
    which is pumped is admitted to or ejected from the pumping chamber, is
    controlled in response to the pressure of the fluid which is pumped.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes those devices which have means which
    are described as sensing the "weight" of the pumped fluid but which, in
    fact, sense pumped fluid pressure at a given point in the pump chamber.
    However, a device which includes a container into which pumped fluid is
    placed and which measures a predetermined weight of fluid therein to
    control the pumping operation is classified in subclass 139.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143,    for devices wherein repetitive pumping is effected in response to a
    sensed motive fluid pressure or pressure differential.


CLS 417/143
TXT Apparatus under subclass 137 wherein the alternate admission and ejection
    of the fluid which is pumped into and from the pump chamber results from
    the alternate admission and withdrawal of the motive fluid to or from the
    pump chamber said motive fluid being controlled by valve means responsive
    to the motive fluid pressure.

    (1)     Note.  The pressure responsive means does not include a mere
    pressure responsive check valve in the motive fluid inlet or outlet of the
    pumping chamber.


CLS 417/144
TXT Apparatus under subclass 137 in which said means for effecting the
    admission and ejection of the pumped fluid from the pump chamber is a valve
    means for supplying or exhausting the gaseous pumping fluid to said chamber
    and having additional means correlating control of said valve means with
    the operation of a means generating said motive fluid.


CLS 417/145
TXT Apparatus under subclass 137 wherein said means for effecting the admission
    and ejection of the pumped fluid from the pump chamber comprises valve
    means which correlates the supplying and exhausting of motive fluid to and
    from the pumping chamber.


CLS 417/146
TXT Apparatus under subclass 145 which includes a pilot valve for controlling
    said valve means.


CLS 417/147
TXT Apparatus under subclass 145 wherein said valve means comprises a single
    valve member to control both supply and exhaust.


CLS 417/148
TXT Apparatus under subclass 118 having the pump means, (i.e., vacuum
    generator), to withdraw the gaseous motive fluid from the pumping chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    for a device having a vacuum generator comprising a liquid the
    surface of which communicates with the motive fluid.


CLS 417/149
TXT Apparatus under subclass 148 including a pump means (i.e., pressure
    generator), to supply pumping fluid to said pumping chamber.


CLS 417/150
TXT Apparatus under subclass 65 comprising a vertically disposed tube through
    which motive fluid drops freely under the influence of gravity, contact
    with or entrainment of the pumped fluid being made in the tube.


CLS 417/151
TXT Apparatus under subclass 65 in which motive and pumped fluids are brought
    into intimate contact in an enclosed flow path, the motive fluid having a
    higher velocity than the pumped fluid and imparting energy to the pumped
    fluid by the action of entrainment and frictional contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76+,    for jet pumps having a motive fluid generating pump.

    87+,    for diverse pumps one of which is a jet pump.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 888+ for systems having multiple inlets
    and a single outlet with means to promote mixing or combining of plural
    diverse fluids and subclass 842, for a "turbulence amplifier" having
    similar structure.  If the system is disclosed as one of the fluids acting
    to pump the other classification is in this class (417).

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 76+ for injector-type
    gas and liquid contact apparatus where there is a mutual exchange of
    properties between the fluids.


CLS 417/152
TXT Apparatus under subclass 151 in which the pump is adapted to be connected
    to or enclosed within a space which is to be evacuated to a high vacuum,
    the motive fluid being in the form of a vapor which acts to remove fluid
    diffusing out of said space, the motive fluid acting to remove the fluid by
    entrainment and condensation.

    (1)     Note.  The vapor is generally oil or mercury which is generated in
    a boiler.


CLS 417/153
TXT Apparatus under subclass 152 in which means are provided to cool the pump,
    usually the outer walls or nozzle thereof or heat insulation means are
    provided to prevent heat transfer from the motive fluid to the zone being
    evacuated.


CLS 417/154
TXT Apparatus under subclass 152 in which there is a vertically disposed
    conduit which the motive fluid vapor flows upwardly from a vapor generator
    (i.e., boiler) the motive fluid being reversed and directed transversely
    and downwardly from the conduit into the entrainment area, the motive fluid
    upon condensation flowing back to the generator.


CLS 417/155
TXT Apparatus under subclass 151 in which the combining tube of the jet pump is
    a flue or stack of a furnace and the jet acts to increase the draft effect
    of the flue or stack.

    (1)     Note.  Where the operation of the device necessarily involves a
    treatment of the flue gases, such as the entrainment of air or air and
    steam to effect combustion of unconsumed particles of fuel, or where any
    treatment of the fuel gases not merely a pumping effect is involved, or
    where the combination embraces elements of a furnace mechanism of greater
    scope than herein defined, the device is classified in appropriate
    subclasses of Class 110, Furnaces; see especially subclasses 150, 160, and
    indented subclass.  Compare Class 261, Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus,
    subclass 24, and indented subclasses.


CLS 417/156
TXT Apparatus under subclass 155 in which the pumped fluid contains sparks or
    cinders and means are provided to separate out or reduce the size of the
    sparks or cinders prior to discharge from the pump.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, appropriate subclasses for spark arresters, per se.
     When a spark arrester is combined with a jet pump it is considered to be a
    perfecting feature of the pump and is classified in Class 417.


CLS 417/157
TXT Apparatus under subclass 155 including means for controlling the operation
    of the jet pump or the flow of motive or pumped fluid to or from the jet
    pump by means of a valve or throttling action.


CLS 417/158
TXT Apparatus under subclass 151 including means to energize or motivate the
    motive fluid of the jet pump.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76+,    for a jet pump with a motive fluid generating pump.

    152+,   for vapor condensation vacuum diffusion-type pumps with motive
    fluid generating means.


CLS 417/159
TXT Apparatus under subclass 158 in which the means to energize or motivate the
    motive fluid is an internal combustion engine.

    (1)     Note.  The motive fluid may be fluid exhausted by the engine or
    drawn into the intake manifold or otherwise energized by the engine.


CLS 417/160
TXT Apparatus under subclass 151 provided with means to remove accumulated
    foreign material from the jet pump or its connected flow lines by means of
    applying motive fluid to the pump by a route other than its normal flow
    path to the entrainment area or by means of a fluid other than the motive
    or pumped fluid which is applied to the pump.


CLS 417/161
TXT Apparatus under subclass 151 in which the pumped fluid flows toward the
    entrainment area along a given path and motive fluid is projected radially
    of the given path in the form of a disc-like sheet, the pumped fluid being
    entrained by the disc-like sheet and during entrainment flowing outwardly
    from the given path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     for radial disc-type jet pumps in which the entrainment is at the
    exit of a centrifugal impeller.


CLS 417/162
TXT Apparatus under subclass 151 having a valved waste passage to conduct
    pumped fluid which has been entrained away from the device and is also
    provided with a valve to control flow of motive fluid to the jet, there
    being means provided which upon actuation of one of the valves causes or
    prevents actuation of the other.


CLS 417/163
TXT Apparatus under subclass 151 in which a first stream of motive fluid acts
    to entrain pumped fluid and then a second stream of motive fluid from the
    same or different sources as the first acts to entrain the combined motive
    and pumped fluid from the first entrainment.


CLS 417/164
TXT Apparatus under subclass 163 in which heat exchange apparatus is provided
    to remove heat from the combined motive and pumped fluid from the first
    entrainment before said fluid is acted upon by the second motive fluid
    stream.


CLS 417/165
TXT Apparatus under subclass 163 in which both the first and second streams of
    motive fluid are provided with separate and distinct valves to individually
    control the flow thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The separate and distinct valves may be unitary with one
    another so long as there are distinct valve portions which control each of
    the motive fluid flow paths.


CLS 417/166
TXT Apparatus under subclass 165 in which the separate and distinct valves are
    so related that upon actuation first one valve controls its motive fluid
    flow path and then the other controls its motive fluid flow path in
    sequence.


CLS 417/167
TXT Apparatus under subclass 163 in which one of the motive fluid streams is
    projected centrally so as to entrain an annular stream of pumped fluid
    outwardly thereof and another motive fluid stream is in the form of an
    annulus so as to entrain a stream of pumped fluid in the center of the
    annulus.


CLS 417/168
TXT Apparatus under subclass 163 in which one of the motive fluid streams is
    confined to a conduit terminating in a nozzle and the other motive fluid
    stream is directed around the circumference of the conduit at the point at
    which it entrains pumped fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154,    for vapor condensation vacuum diffusion-type pumps with reverse
    flow jets from a vertical stack rising from a motive fluid generator.


CLS 417/169
TXT Apparatus under subclass 163 in which the motive fluid streams in their
    flow to the entrainment nozzle are parallel and spaced laterally from one
    another.


CLS 417/170
TXT Apparatus under subclass 163 in which the first and second motive fluid
    flows at the points of entrainment are substantially in line with one
    another.

    (1)     Note.  The motive fluid streams may be of annular form with the
    annuli having a common central axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154,    for vapor condensation vacuum diffusion-type pumps with plural
    reverse flow jets from a vertical stack rising from a motive fluid
    generator.


CLS 417/171
TXT Apparatus under subclass 151 in which the motive fluid is introduced in a
    plane at right angles to and tangentially of the inflow of pumped fluid
    establishing a vortex-type entrainment within or without the rotating
    motive fluid.


CLS 417/172
TXT Apparatus under subclass 151 provided with a conduit for supplying motive
    fluid to the entrainment area and a conduit for conducting motive and
    pumped fluid from the entrainment area, one conduit being concentrically
    disposed within the other. The direction of flow of the motive fluid being
    opposite to the direction of flow of the combined motive and pumped fluid.


CLS 417/173
TXT Apparatus under subclass 151 combined with heat exchange means to reduce
    the temperature of the motive fluid or the pumped fluid or both other than
    by a mere direct interchange of heat between the motive and pumped fluids.

    (1)     Note.  This definition excludes the injection of one fluid into
    another fluid even though for the sole disclosed purpose of cooling if the
    injected fluid has a pumping effect on the other fluid by a jet or
    entrainment action (i.e., transfer or velocity energy).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153,    for vapor condensation vacuum diffusion-type pumps with cooling
    means.

    164,    for successive introduction of motive fluid into the pumped fluid
    with cooling means between the stages of pumping.


CLS 417/174
TXT Apparatus under subclass 151 in which motive fluid acts to entrain pumped
    fluid and then the combined motive and pumped fluid stream acts to further
    entrain additional fluid to be pumped at a point downstream of the first
    entrainment.


CLS 417/175
TXT Apparatus under subclass 151 in which an additional jet device is provided
    with discharges to waste and is so connected as to draw the pumped fluid
    into the first jet pump to prime same or to remove pumped fluid from an
    overflow or waste chamber of the first jet.


CLS 417/176
TXT Apparatus under subclass 151 having a plurality of motive fluid nozzles,
    the motive fluid from each acting to entrain pumped fluid, the combined
    motive and pumped fluid from each entrainment traveling in a separate
    downstream conduit or combining tube, the entrainments being in parallel
    with one another; i.e., each motive fluid stream is separate from the
    others and acts to entrain separate flows of pump fluid.

    (1)     Note.  The pumped fluid may originate in a common pipe or conduit
    and the outputs from the downstream conduits may combine into a single flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163,    for the successive introduction of motive fluid to a single pumped
    fluid stream.

    174,    for a single motive fluid stream which successively entrains pumped
    fluid.

    179,    for plural motive fluid jets for a single entrainment, i.e., with a
    single combining tube.


CLS 417/177
TXT Apparatus under subclass 151 in which the motive fluid is projected into
    the entrainment area in the form of a continuous annulus and pumped fluid
    is entrained both outwardly and inwardly of the motive fluid annulus.


CLS 417/178
TXT Apparatus under subclass 151 in which there is provided within the
    apparatus a plurality of alternate flow confining segments (e.g., nozzles,
    combining tubes, etc.) and means to permit one of the segments to be
    adjusted into use position to the exclusion of another from use position.


CLS 417/179
TXT Apparatus under subclass 151 in which in a single zone of entrainment of
    pumped fluid (i.e., single inflow of pumped fluid and single outflow of
    combined pumped and motive fluid) there is provided means to project a
    plurality of separate motive fluid streams or different sources of motive
    fluid are provided for delivery through the same motive fluid projecting
    means.

    (1)     Note.  The separate motive fluid streams or sources may be used
    simultaneously or alternately.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163,    for successive introduction of motive fluid into the pumped fluid
    along the path of flow of the pumped fluid.

    174,    for successive entrainment of pumped fluid by a single motive fluid
    flow.

    176,    for plural motive fluid jets having separate combining tubes from
    the jets.


CLS 417/180
TXT Apparatus under subclass 179 in which means are provided by which at least
    one of the motive fluid jets or sources may be individually controlled.


CLS 417/181
TXT Apparatus under subclass 151 in which the jet pump unit is adapted to be
    connected by a readily detachable means to a spigot or a flexible tube from
    which motive fluid for the jet is supplied.


CLS 417/182
TXT Apparatus under subclass 151 including means for controlling the operation
    of the jet pump or the flow of motive or pumped fluid to or from the jet
    pump by means of a valve or throttling action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118+,   for successive introduction of motive fluid into the pumped fluid
    with individually controlled motive fluid flows.

    157,    for jet pumps with regulation in which the combining tube is the
    flue or stack of a furnace for interrelated overflow and motive fluid
    valves.

    162,    for interrelated overflow and motive fluid valves.

    179,    for plural motive fluid jets or sources for a single entrainment
    with individual or relative control of the jets or sources.


CLS 417/182.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 182 in which the controlling means acts in
    response to the level of pump fluid.


CLS 417/183
TXT Apparatus under subclass 182 in which the control is effected by a change
    in the relative axial positions of the motive fluid nozzle and the conduit
    which receives the combined motive and pumped fluid from the entrainment
    area.


CLS 417/184
TXT Apparatus under subclass 183 in which the change in the relative axial
    positions of the nozzle and conduit is in response to variation in fluid
    pressure caused by the operation of the jet pump.


CLS 417/185
TXT Apparatus under subclass 182 in which the controlling means is located in
    the output flow line downstream from the entrainment area.

    (1)     Note.  The controlling means is in the main outflow line from the
    pumps and does not merely control a passage to waste.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    192,    for a pressure controlled overflow line downstream of the
    entrainment area.


CLS 417/186
TXT Apparatus under subclass 182 in which the motive fluid is directed into the
    entrainment area by a nozzle and valve means are provided which when
    actuated cause all or a portion of the motive fluid to be diverted from the
    nozzle.

    (1)     Note.  The diversion of the motive fluid may be merely around the
    nozzle to reenter the pump downstream of the normal entrainment area or the
    diversion may be away from the pump as, for example, into the normal pumped
    fluid inlet line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185,    for main line control downstream of the entrainment area which may
    cause an increase in motive fluid pressure so as to by-pass.


CLS 417/187
TXT Apparatus under subclass 182 in which the controlling means is positioned
    in the motive fluid inlet line upstream of the entrainment area or at the
    point of discharge into the entrainment area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162,    for interrelated motive fluid and overflow valves.

    165+,   for successive introduction of motive fluid into the pumped fluid
    with individually controlled motive fluid flows.

    179,    for plural motive fluid jets or sources for a single entrainment
    with individual or relative control of the jets or sources.

    186,    for controlling means to by-pass motive fluid from the entrainment
    nozzle.


CLS 417/188
TXT Apparatus under subclass 187 including controlling means in the pumped
    fluid inlet line upstream of the entrainment area, means being provided
    which interrelates the motive fluid and pumped fluid controlling means such
    that when one is actuated the other is necessarily controlled.


CLS 417/189
TXT Apparatus under subclass 187 in which the motive fluid controlling means
    acts in response to variation of fluid pressure which is incident to the
    operation of the jet pump.


CLS 417/190
TXT Apparatus under subclass 182 in which the controlling means is positioned
    in the pumped fluid inlet line upstream of the entrainment area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188,    for interrelated motive fluid and pumped fluid controls.


CLS 417/191
TXT Apparatus under subclass 190 in which the pumped fluid controlling means
    acts in response to variation of fluid pressure which is caused by the
    operation of the jet pump.


CLS 417/192
TXT Apparatus under subclass 182 in which the controlling means controls the
    flow to waste of the combined motive and pumped fluid downstream of the
    entrainment area, said controlling means acting in response to variation of
    fluid pressure caused by the operation of the jet pump.


CLS 417/193
TXT Apparatus under subclass 192 in which the controlling means comprises an
    axially movable section of the flow conduit or a movable wall portion of
    the conduit downstream of the entrainment area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184,    for a movable combining tube which shifts in response to fluid flow
    and in shifting varies the axial relationship between the motive fluid
    nozzle and the entrance to the combining tube.


CLS 417/194
TXT Apparatus under subclass 151 having means to impart to the pumped fluid a
    whirling or helical motion prior to its being entrained by the motive fluid.


CLS 417/195
TXT Apparatus under subclass 151 in which a claim includes a recitation of the
    material of which the jet pump or a part thereof is made.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for processes of pumping by contact or entrainment utilizing a
    specific motive fluid.


CLS 417/196
TXT Apparatus under subclass 151 in which some portion of the flow confining
    means of the jet pump is represented in a claim by a mathematical formula
    or equation or some specific proportions or dimensions of the parts are set
    forth.


CLS 417/197
TXT Apparatus under subclass 151 in which the motive fluid is supplied as an
    annular stream which entrains the pumped fluid centrally thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    for successive introduction of motive fluid to act on the pumped
    fluid, one of the motive fluid streams being peripherally supplied.

    177,    for an annular motive fluid stream which entrains pumped fluid both
    exterior and interior of the annulus.


CLS 417/198
TXT Apparatus under subclass 151 in which a claim includes details of the
    construction or shape of the nozzle from which motive fluid is projected
    into the entrainment area.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes specific nozzle shapes to provide a
    particular shape or pattern of motive fluid projection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179+,   for plural motive fluid jets into a single entrainment area
    including a nozzle which is subdivided to provide a plurality of distinct
    flow paths.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses
    for nozzle, per se.


CLS 417/199.1
TXT DIVERSE PUMPS:
    Apparatus under the class definition comprising a plurality of discrete
    pumps of different basic types.

    (1)     Note.  This definition does not include a plurality of pumps of
    different basic types if one is a mere auxiliary or ancillary of the other
    (e.g., lubricant or cooling water or condensate removal pump for main pump).

    (2)     Note.  This definition includes diverse pumps wherein one of the
    pumps is disclosed merely as priming another, the priming pump in this
    instance not being considered merely ancillary to the other pump.

    (3)     Note.  Mere difference in size or shape, etc., of the same basic
    type of pump is not included under this definition.

    (4)     Note.  The following are exemplary of different basic types of
    pumps:

    (a)     Rotary expansible chamber

    (b)     Rotary nonexpansible chamber

    (c)     Reciprocating working member (piston or cylinder)

    (d)     Collapsible chamber (e.g., diaphragm, bellows)

    (e)     Hydraulic ram

    (5)     Note.  A patent will be classified as an original in this or
    indented subclasses if the pumps are disclosed as diverse, but a claim
    recites only one of the pumps specifically. On the other hand a plurality
    of pumps which are disclosed as diverse but are claimed broadly will not be
    classified as an original under the definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for diverse pumps one of which is of the liquid ring type.

    76+,    for jet pumps with motive fluid generating pumps.

    85+,    for diverse pumps at least one of which is of the type in which
    fluid is pumped by contact or entrainment with another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 3 for diverse rotary
    expansible chamber-type pumps.


CLS 417/199.2
TXT Priming and venting:
    Apparatus under subclass 199.1 wherein one of the pumps supplies fluid to
    the pumping chamber of the main pump which is supplied with a valve to
    exhaust the fluid from the pumping chamber.


CLS 417/200
TXT Apparatus under subclass 199.1 in which one of the pumps is priming or
    maintaining the other pump primed and including means responsive to the
    level of pump fluid in some part of the system to control the pump fluid or
    modify the operation of at least one of the pumps.

    (1)     Note.  The operation of the pump is considered to be modified, for
    example, if the drive means is controlled, the capacity is varied, or a
    valve is operated to bypass the discharge, to draw from a different source,
    to deliver to a different place or vary the inlet or outlet.


CLS 417/201
TXT Apparatus under subclass 199.1 in which one of the diverse pumps comprises
    a pumping member which has unidirectional rotary motion about a fixed axis
    and acts to pump fluid by a centrifugal, centripetal or screw effect.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200,    for the combination of a centrifugal pump and a diverse pump for
    priming the centrifugal pump with liquid level responsive control of one of
    the pumps or the pump fluid.


CLS 417/202
TXT Apparatus under subclass 201 having means to modify the operation of
    another of the pumps in response to a condition of the rotary
    nonexpansible chamber-type pump.

    (1)     Note.  The operation of the pump is considered to be modified, for
    example, if the drive means is controlled, the capacity is varied, or a
    valve is operated to bypass the discharge, to draw from a different source,
    to deliver to a different place or vary the inlet or outlet.

    (2)     Note.  The condition of the pump to which the control responds may
    be, for example, pressure, flow, loss of prime, etc.


CLS 417/203
TXT Apparatus under subclass 201 in which the diverse pumps are arranged such
    that the entire or a substantial portion of the output of one is directed
    to the second so as to be serially acted upon thereby, the rotary
    nonexpansible chamber-type pump being upstream of the diverse pump so as to
    feed fluid thereto with the diverse pump acting as a second stage.


CLS 417/204
TXT Apparatus under subclass 199.1 in which one of the pumps is of the rotary
    expansible chamber type having a partition (i.e., vane or abutment) or
    cylinder which moves incident to rotation of the pump, the partition or
    cylinder constituting or being directly connected to a piston which
    reciprocates upon movement of the partition or cylinder, the piston
    operating within a chamber and forming therewith a reciprocating expansible
    chamber pump.


CLS 417/205
TXT Apparatus under subclass 199.1 in which the diverse pumps are arranged such
    that the output of one is directed to the inlet of the second so as to be
    serially acted upon thereby.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203,    for a centrifugal pump delivering fluid to a diverse pump in series
    therewith.


CLS 417/206
TXT Apparatus under subclass 205 in which the fluid is acted upon by a rotary
    expansible chamber- type pump and then by an expansible chamber- type pump
    having a pumping member which performs its pumping function by a
    reciprocating (including oscillating) motion.

    (1)     Note.  A rotary expansible chamber- type pump under this definition
    is as defined in Class 418.

    (2)     Note.  Flexible wall pumping members (e.g., diaphragm, bellows) are
    not considered to have reciprocating motion under this definition.


CLS 417/207
TXT Apparatus under class definition in which a pumping action is obtained by
    the direct application of heat to the fluid to be pumped.


CLS 417/208
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 in which the fluid to be pumped is a liquid,
    the application of heat to the liquid causing at least a portion thereof to
    vaporize, the vapor pressure then impelling the liquid through an outlet.


CLS 417/209
TXT Apparatus under subclass 208 which includes valve means which controls flow
    of the fluid which is pumped into a chamber means in which said fluid is
    vaporized, said valve means being closed by a buildup in pressure during
    vaporization of said fluid and opened by a decrease in pressure after the
    vapor or fluid has been expelled from said chamber.


CLS 417/210
TXT Apparatus under class definition in which there is provided biasing means
    movable relative to a reciprocating-type pumping member, said biasing means
    receiving energy from the pump fluid and serving to bias the pumping member
    in opposite directions over different portions of pumping member movement
    in one reciprocatory stroke direction.


CLS 417/211
TXT Apparatus under class definition in which the pump is adapted to be mounted
    upon or attached to a device which is subject to or adapted to produce
    motion or vibration, the pump having a relatively movable pumping member,
    the relative movement of which is caused by the inertia thereof and the
    motion or vibration of the device or by the inertia of a separate member
    which is connected to or operatively associated with the pumping member.

    (1)     Note.  The device is usually a vehicle.


CLS 417/211.5
TXT Apparatus under class definition in which the pump or means for
    transmitting motion to the pump from a source of power is provided with
    control means for either (1) interrupting motion of the pump (e.g., clutch,
    lock, etc.), (2) varying the rate of motion of the pump (e.g., brake,
    dashpot, adjustable gearing, etc.), (3) changing the swept volume of
    displacement of an expansible chamber-type pump, or (4) changing the
    volumetric capacity of an expansible chamber- type pump (e.g., clearance
    control); said control means being operable in response to the level of
    pump fluid.


CLS 417/212
TXT Apparatus under class definition in which the pump or means for
    transmitting motion to the pump from a source of power is provided with
    control means for either (1) interrupting motion of the pump (e.g., clutch,
    lock, etc.), (2) varying the rate of motion of the pump (e.g., brake,
    dashpot, adjustable gearing, etc.), or (3) changing the swept volume of the
    pumping member of an expansible chamber-type pump (e.g., stroke control);
    said control means being operable in response to a sensed condition of the
    pump or pumped fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211.5,  for liquid level responsive control of pump displacement,
    volumetric capacity or drive transmission.

    274,    for means for varying the volumetric capacity of an expansible
    chamber-type pump in response to a sensed condition, the capacity varying
    means not affecting pumping member displacement (e.g., clearance control).


CLS 417/213
TXT Apparatus under subclass 212 combined with fluid flow control means for
    varying the flow of pumped fluid to or from the pump or pump chamber, or
    controlling a relief or bypass which means is also operated by sensing the
    occurrence of a condition or a change in condition.

    (1)     Note.  See the definition and notes under subclass 279, which notes
    are also applicable to this subclass.


CLS 417/214
TXT Apparatus under subclass 212 in which the control means comprises a
    positive lock, friction brake, fluid retarder or similar device which will
    act to prevent or restrict movement of the pumping member by acting
    directly thereon or on a part directly connected thereto.


CLS 417/215
TXT Apparatus under subclass 212 in which the pump comprises an expansible
    chamber-type pump having a plurality of relatively movable pumping elements
    working in a single pump chamber and relatively movable driving elements
    are connected to the pumping elements so that they may be driven into the
    pumping chamber together, e.g., in phase, or at different times, e.g., out
    of phase, to vary the volume of fluid pumped; the control means acting to
    change the relationship, e.g., phasing, between the driving elements to
    vary the output of the pump.


CLS 417/216
TXT Apparatus under subclass 212 comprising a plurality of pumping units
    wherein the control means effects a change in the operating characteristics
    of one unit relative to another.


CLS 417/217
TXT Apparatus under subclass 212 in which the pump has a mechanical pumping
    member (e.g., rotor or piston) driven from a rotary driving element and an
    inlet and an outlet; means being provided to change the flow of the pumped
    fluid without altering the direction of rotation of the driving element,
    i.e., the inlet under one condition of operation becomes the outlet under
    the other condition of operation and vice versa; the control means acting
    on the reversing means to cause its operation.


CLS 417/218
TXT Apparatus under subclass 212 in which the pump is of the expansible
    chamber-type, i.e., having a relatively movable pumping member and chamber,
    and including a mechanical movement having relatively movable parts in
    which the driving relationship is varied by an adjustable element (e.g.,
    cam, eccentric, link, etc.,) which is moved relative to another part.


CLS 417/219
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 wherein the relatively movable pumping member
    and chamber comprise a rotor and an encompassing movable stator in which
    movement of the stator causes the pumping member to move radially of the
    axis of rotation of the rotor resulting in a change in the stroke of the
    pumping member or a change in displacement of the pump.


CLS 417/220
TXT Apparatus under subclass 219 in which the pump is a rotary pump of the
    expansible chamber type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 24+, for rotary
    expansible chamber motors or pumps in which the capacity is varied by a
    movable member (e.g., stator, etc.), the member being moved by the direct
    application of working fluid thereto, there being no condition responsive
    valving controlling the application or release of fluid to or from the
    member.


CLS 417/221
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 wherein the cam or eccentric forms a part of a
    rotary drive in which a cooperating cam follower or eccentric strap moves
    radially of the shaft on which the cam or eccentric is mounted or carried.

    (1)     Note.  A crankshaft having an adjustable throw on which a working
    member, a pitman, or member connected to the working member is mounted is
    included under this definition as the equivalent of an eccentric and strap.


CLS 417/222.1
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 in which the adjustable element is a cam which
    forms part of a rotary drive means and the camming face of the cam extends
    transversely of the axis of rotation of the rotary drive means so that the
    cam follower moves parallel to such axis.


CLS 417/222.2
TXT Apparatus under subclass 222.1 in which the adjustable element is operated
    in response to pressure introduced into the sump.


CLS 417/223
TXT Apparatus under subclass 212 including a mechanical movement having
    relatively movable parts comprising elements of the drive which can be
    engaged and separated to start and stop the pump while permitting the power
    source to operate continuously.


CLS 417/225
TXT Apparatus under class definition in which there is a source of fluid having
    an initial pressure or velocity head, and means are provided which utilize
    the energy of said source fluid to boost the head of a first portion
    thereof to a higher value, by reducing the head of a second portion of said
    source fluid.

    (1)     Note.  This definition does not include motor driven pumps which
    pump from an unconfined body of fluid in which the motor is driven by
    energy derived from the unconfined body of fluid (e.g., fluid current, tide
    and wave motor, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    330+,   for tide and wave motor driven pumps.

    334+,   for fluid current motor drive pumps.


CLS 417/226
TXT Apparatus under subclass 225 in which the source fluid has an initial
    velocity head, said means including plural fluid outlets, one of said
    outlets being a valve controlled waste outlet, whereupon the sudden closing
    of said valve effects discharge or a first portion of said source liquid
    through the other of said outlets at a higher head, while a second portion
    has passed to waste at a lower head.


CLS 417/227
TXT Apparatus under subclass 226 including two or more valve controlled waste
    outlets, the source fluid flowing to each waste outlet through a separate
    conduit.


CLS 417/228
TXT Apparatus under class definition in which the pump or some part thereof
    (e.g., cylinder, bearing, drive motor) is cooled or lubricated by the feed
    or circulation of a separate fluid (i.e., not the pumped fluid), and means
    to control the flow of or modify a condition of said separate fluid (e.g.,
    temperature), said means being operated by a separate sensing means which
    is responsive to a condition or a change of condition other than a manual
    control.


CLS 417/229
TXT Apparatus under class definition in which the pump is mounted on or
    proximate to an object and is powered by the relative motion of movable
    parts of the object or by motion of the object as a whole, the object being
    of special construction or adaptation to perform a particular function
    other than (1) a supporting function, or (2) the pumping which forms the
    basic subject matter of this class.

    (1)     Note.  This definition includes a pump operator in the form of a
    treadle, rail section, etc., which is actuated by the passing of a vehicle
    thereover.


CLS 417/230
TXT Apparatus under subclass 229 in which the object is a device for supporting
    the weight of a person in a seated position, wherein the pumped fluid is
    directed to elsewhere other than toward a body part of a seated occupant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclass 180.16 for chairs combined with pumps in
    which the pumped fluid is directed toward a body part of the occupant of
    the chair.


CLS 417/231
TXT Apparatus under subclass 229 in which the pump is mounted on or attached to
    a vehicle and is driven incident to movement of the vehicle or the relative
    motion of vehicle parts.

    (1)     Note.  The pump may be attached to the vehicle only when it is
    desired to operate the pump.  For example, this definition includes those
    devices in which a vehicle drive wheel is elevated and a pump attached
    thereto.

    (2)     Note.  The pump is considered to be combined with vehicle under
    this definition if it is driven by some part of the vehicle other than
    directly by the vehicle motor.  For example, this definition includes those
    devices in which the pump is driven by a vehicle wheel or axle,
    transmission, fly-wheel or tractor power take-off shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211,    for vehicle mounted pumps in which the pump has an inertia-type
    pumping member operated by the vibration or relative movement of parts of
    the vehicle.

    234,    for pumps supported on wheels or a wheeled frame for portability.

    364,    for pumps which are driven by internal combustion engines.


CLS 417/232
TXT Apparatus under subclass 231 in which the vehicle has attached thereto a
    scoop adapted to be immersed in a body of liquid located outside the
    vehicle, liquid being induced to flow through the scoop due to motion of
    the vehicle and the inertia of the body of liquid.


CLS 417/233
TXT Apparatus under subclass 231 in which the pump is driven by the rotating
    motion of a wheel or axle of the vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  This definition does not include those devices in which a
    ground engaging wheel is provided solely to drive the pump and has no
    support function for the vehicle.


CLS 417/234
TXT Apparatus under class definition having (1) wheels, skids or other special
    means to facilitate moving the pump over the surface on which it rests, (2)
    means which specifically adapts the pump to be supported on some part of a
    human body or animal, or (3) a handle by which the pump may be carried.

    (1)     Note.  To fall within part (1) of this definition the wheels, skids
    or the bike must be merely to make the pump ambulant or portable and may
    not be a vehicle or the like intended primarily for some other function
    with a pump incidentally mounted thereon (e.g., bicycle and tire pump
    thereon).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231+,   for a vehicle mounted or attached pump in which the pump is
    operated by some part of the vehicle (e.g., wheel or axle) and in which the
    vehicle serves some function other than mounting and driving the pump
    (e.g., automobile).


CLS 417/235
TXT Apparatus under subclass 234 in which the pump is driven to perform its
    pumping function as a result of being moved over the surface on which it is
    supported on the wheels, skids or the like.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231+,   for a vehicle mounted or attached pump in which the pump is
    operated by some part of the vehicle (e.g., wheel or axle) and in which the
    vehicle serves some function other than mounting and driving the pump
    (e.g., automobile).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 155+ for
    sprayers with mobile tank-type supply means in which the sprayer operating
    means is interconnected with the ground traverse means.


CLS 417/236
TXT Apparatus under class definition which by adjustment or relative
    rearrangement of its parts or by the addition or omission of a part is so
    changed as to become basic subject matter of another class.


CLS 417/237
TXT Apparatus under subclass 236 in which a device is operable under one
    condition as a pump and as a result of the adjustment, rearrangement of
    parts or addition or omission of a part is operable as a motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    364,    for a pump mechanically driven by an internal combustion engine
    including a pump mounted on an engine cylinder or head and mechanically
    driven by the piston of the engine.

    380,    for a pump having a motor driven by the products of combustion (or
    a component thereof) of an internal combustion engine including a pump
    mounted on an engine cylinder and operated by the pressure fluctuations in
    the cylinder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 408 and 629, for a convertible motor and
    pump with means for storing the fluid energized by the pump mechanism and
    utilizing such fluid as the motive fluid for the converted motor.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 319+ for internal
    combustion engines whose cycles are modified to produce a braking action by
    displacement of fluid and not being disclosed as capable of delivering
    fluid for a useful external purpose.


CLS 417/238
TXT Apparatus under class definition which by relative rearrangement of its
    parts or by the addition or omission of a part is so changed as to operate
    in a different way or change its function or enhance its operation in some
    way.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     for the combination of a rotary nonexpansible chamber-type pump and
    a jet pump in which the location of the jet pump is changeable by assembly
    or disassembly.

    236,    for pumps convertible to basic subject matter of another class.


CLS 417/239
TXT Apparatus under subclass 238 in which the rearrangement of parts or
    addition or omission of a part is accomplished in order to permit or
    accommodate the operation of the pump in a reverse direction of rotation or
    a reverse direction of flow of pump fluid through the pump.


CLS 417/240
TXT Apparatus under class definition in which the pumping is effected by a body
    of liquid which is at least partially confined and forms a liquid piston to
    act as a pumping member, either the liquid piston or the means confining
    the liquid or both being set into motion, the inertia of the liquid piston
    (i.e., the tendency to remain in motion or at rest) or the momentum thereof
    being effective to produce the pumping action.

    (1)     Note.  For a patent to be classified under this definition the pump
    must rely upon the inertia or momentum of the liquid for its operation.  In
    many pumps such as a reciprocating piston, expansible chamber type the
    momentum of liquid being expelled from a chamber might incidentally also
    produce additional pumping action over that produced by the expansible
    chamber effect.  However, such pumps are not included under this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for a momentum liquid piston used as a pumping means to pump a
    different fluid.


CLS 417/241
TXT Apparatus under subclass 240 in which the liquid is set in motion by the
    absolute movement of the means confining the liquid.


CLS 417/242
TXT Apparatus under class definition comprising two or more pump chambers there
    being provided means for separately controlling the inlet of fluid to each
    chamber and each chamber being provided with a relatively movable wall
    portion (e.g., piston) for changing the chamber volume; there being
    additionally provided a flow path for establishing intercommunication
    between said chambers which is distinct from the normal pump fluid inlet
    flow paths, said flow path being controlled as a result of the wall portion
    reaching a predetermined position in one of said pumping chambers.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this definition, the plural pumping chambers
    may be formed by a single cylinder having a single piston therein providing
    oppositely facing pumping faces for dividing the cylinder into plural
    chambers.


CLS 417/243
TXT Apparatus under class definition in which the pumped fluid is first acted
    upon by one pump or pumping member and subsequently acted upon by a second
    pump or pumping member and provided with heat exchange apparatus interposed
    between the pumps or pumping members to dissipate heat from the pump fluid
    generated by the pumping operation.

    (1)     Note.  To be classified under this definition there must be claimed
    some structure peculiarly adapted to cooling or heat exchange such as fins,
    cooling fan, etc., or a specific structural relationship of the intercooler
    to the pump.  A mere conduit between stages in which cooling might
    incidentally occur would be excluded.  The mere claiming of an
    "intercooler" or "cooler" is not sufficient to cause classification under
    this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164,    for successive stage pumps of the jet type with cooling means
    between the jet stages.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, for heat exchange, per se, and see particularly
    subclasses 120+ for heat exchangers with a pump or impeller for moving the
    exchanger material.


CLS 417/244
TXT Apparatus under class definition in which the pumped fluid is serially
    acted upon by a plurality of pumping units.

    (1)     Note.  This definition includes those expansible chamber pumps in
    which the fluid is pumped by being successively acted upon by opposed faces
    of a unitary pumping member provided valving is present in all three of the
    following locations; inlet valve means to the first chamber, valve means to
    control the flow from one face to the other (e.g., valved piston) and
    outlet valve means from the second chamber. It is not necessary that all of
    such valving be claimed, but all must be disclosed.  In the absence of the
    disclosure of any of said valving in combination with the unitary pumping
    member the patent is excluded from this definition.  See subclasses 437+.
    However, this definition does include those pumps in which the fluid is
    successively acted upon by different faces of a unitary pumping member if
    the faces move in the same direction to effect the pumping action.  In this
    case the valving for the three locations above noted is not required.

    (2)     Note.  This definition excludes those pumps having a unitary
    pumping member which includes a plurality of spaced serially arranged
    self-acting valves which simultaneously control the pumped fluid to or from
    a common expansible chamber; this not being considered to be a plurality of
    pumping units.  See subclass 459.

    (3)     Note.  Multi-stage rotary pumps of the expansible or nonexpansible
    chamber type are generally classified in Classes 415 and 418.  However,
    said pumps are included in this class in certain combinations such as when
    driven by a significantly claimed motor.  Such rotary pumps will be
    included under this definition only if they include a plurality of rotors
    or runners which have or are capable of relative movement during operation.

    (4)     Note.  Apparatus in which the pump fluid successively flows from a
    pump chamber and then through a motor working chamber to be expelled
    therefrom with exhausted motive fluid is excluded under this definition as
    constituting successive stages.  See subclasses 377+.

    (5)     Note.  Relatively movable pumping members which successively act
    upon the pumped fluid are included under this definition and do not require
    the disclosure of valves in the three locations as set forth in (1) Note
    above.


CLS 417/245
TXT Apparatus under subclass 244 in which one of the pumping units is driven by
    a fluid motor, the motive fluid for operating the fluid motor being
    provided from another of the pumping units in the series.


CLS 417/246
TXT Apparatus under subclass 244 in which the serial pumping units are provided
    with pumping members which are capable of or constrained to move relative
    to each other, said pumping members being driven by two or more working
    members which are capable of or constrained to move relative to each other.


CLS 417/247
TXT Apparatus under subclass 246 in which the pumping members and motor working
    members partake of a continuous, unidirectional, rotary movement about an
    axis.


CLS 417/248
TXT Apparatus under subclass 244 including a plurality of individual pumping
    members or units each of which handles a portion only of the total fluid
    pumped (i.e., operate in parallel flow paths) and a further single pumping
    unit or member which acts upon the total fluid handled by said plurality of
    pumping members or units, the single pumping unit or member acting upon the
    fluid either prior or subsequent to its being acted upon by said plurality
    of pumping members or units.

    (1)     Note.  A plurality of pumping members acting in a single expansible
    chamber are not considered to be parallel stages under this definition.
    However, a double acting pumping member is considered to be parallel stages
    under this definition.


CLS 417/249
TXT Apparatus under subclass 244 in which there is a chamber or reservoir
    intermediate said stages which is continually open to atmosphere, the prior
    stage delivering the pumped fluid to said chamber or reservoir and the
    subsequent stage removing the pumped fluid therefrom.


CLS 417/250
TXT Apparatus under subclass 244 in which in addition to the pump fluid intake
    to the prior stage and discharge from the subsequent stage there is
    provided (1) means in the fluid flow path intermediate the stages whereby
    fluid may be introduced to be acted upon by the subsequent stage which was
    not acted upon by the prior stage or (2) means to take additional pump
    fluid directly into the subsequent stage which was not acted upon by the
    prior stage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242,    for a controlled bypass between plural pump chambers which is in
    addition to the normal inlet flow paths to the chambers.


CLS 417/251
TXT Apparatus under subclass 244 in which in addition to the pump fluid intake
    to the prior stage and discharge from the subsequent stage there is
    provided (1) means in the fluid flow path intermediate the stages whereby
    pump fluid which was acted upon by the prior stage may be discharged
    without being acted upon by the subsequent stage or (2) means to permit
    discharge of pump fluid directly from the prior stage without being acted
    upon by the subsequent stage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242,    for a controlled bypass between plural pump chambers which is in
    addition to the normal inlet flow paths to the chambers.


CLS 417/252
TXT Apparatus under subclass 251 in which the discharge is between the stages
    and operates to discharge some or all of the fluid from the prior stage in
    response to the pressure of the pumped fluid at some point in the system.

    (1)     Note.  The discharge is considered to be between the stages if it
    is intermediate the discharge control means for the prior stage and the
    intake control means for the subsequent stage (e.g., check valves, etc.).


CLS 417/253
TXT Apparatus under subclass 244 in which the pumped fluid is controlled prior
    to, during or after being acted upon by the pumping units, the control
    operating in response to the occurrence of a condition or a change in
    condition.

    (1)     Note.  The fluid may be controlled by controlling an inlet or
    discharge valve (e.g., by holding an inlet or discharge valve open), a
    bypass valve or a clearance space.

    (2)     Note.  This definition includes direct acting relief valves and the
    like, but excludes a mere cyclic distributor valve (e.g., inlet or
    discharge check valve) of an expansible chamber pump.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252,    for multistage pumps with an interstage pressure responsive
    discharge for pumped fluid.


CLS 417/254
TXT Apparatus under subclass 244 in which the successive pumping units each
    include a rigid pumping member which partakes of a to-and- fro movement to
    perform the pumping function.

    (1)     Note.  The stages may be formed by the opposite faces of a unitary
    pumping member.

    (2)     Note.  This definition excludes pumping members of the flexible
    wall type.


CLS 417/255
TXT Apparatus under subclass 254 in which the successive reciprocating pumping
    members are driven by a rotary shaft having crank means or the like thereon
    connected to the pumping members, a housing (i.e., crankcase) in which the
    shaft operates and (1) the housing together with a pumping member
    constituting one of the pumping units or (2) at least a portion of the
    fluid acted upon by a prior stage passing into the housing before being
    acted upon by a subsequent stage.


CLS 417/256
TXT Apparatus under subclass 254 in which the pumping members are constrained
    to move in opposite directions, the pumping members containing valves and
    the pump fluid passing successively through the members.


CLS 417/257
TXT Apparatus under subclass 256 in which the axes of the oppositely moving
    pumping members form a common straight line.


CLS 417/258
TXT Apparatus under subclass 254 in which one of the pumping members comprises
    a piston which reciprocates in a fixed cylinder and another pumping member
    comprises a cylinder which moves with respect to a fixed piston encompassed
    thereby.


CLS 417/259
TXT Apparatus under subclass 254 in which at least one of the pumping units
    comprises a valved piston.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of valved piston see subclass 545 of this
    class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256,    for pumps including oppositely movable valved pumping members
    (usually pistons) which successively act on the pump fluid.


CLS 417/260
TXT Apparatus under subclass 259 in which the valved piston has (1) relatively
    movable valve members which form, respectively, the inlet and outlet valves
    for one of the pumping units or (2) has a movable valve member which forms
    the inlet or outlet valve for one of the pumping units and the piston
    itself acts as the outlet or inlet valve, respectively, for said unit
    (e.g., piston controlled port, etc.).


CLS 417/261
TXT Apparatus under subclass 259 in which the piston is provided with a
    plurality or relatively movable valves through which the pump fluid must
    flow serially enroute from one stage of pumping to the next stage of
    pumping.


CLS 417/262
TXT Apparatus under subclass 259 in which the valve in the piston is the intake
    valve to the first pumping unit of the series of pumping units which act on
    the pump fluid.


CLS 417/263
TXT Apparatus under subclass 259 in which in addition to the successive pumping
    units including the valved piston another pumping member is provided which
    pumps fluid in parallel with said units; i.e., the fluid pumped by the
    pumping member does not pass through the pumping units.

    (1)     Note.  The additional pumping member maybe an element of a second
    multistage pump unit.


CLS 417/264
TXT Apparatus under subclass 259 in which the pumping units are driven by a
    motor of the type which includes a movable working member which is
    motivated by a fluid.


CLS 417/265
TXT Apparatus under subclass 254 in which the successive pumping members are
    capable of or constrained to move relative to one another incident to the
    pumping operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256+,   for oppositely moving valved pumping members which successively act
    on the pump fluid.


CLS 417/266
TXT Apparatus under subclass 254 in which the pumped fluid is successively
    acted upon by three or more reciprocating pumping members.


CLS 417/267
TXT Apparatus under subclass 254 in which the pumping members which
    successively act upon the pump fluid are each of the type which act to pump
    separate streams of fluid in both directions of reciprocation, i.e., each
    pumping member of the series is of the double acting type.


CLS 417/268
TXT Apparatus under subclass 254 in which the successive pumping members are
    unitary with one another, and are operative in the same direction of motion
    for the pumping (i.e., discharging) stroke.


CLS 417/269
TXT Apparatus under class definition in which the pump comprises three or more
    cylinders, each cylinder being provided with a relatively reciprocating
    piston (include diaphragm) to thereby form a plurality of pumping chambers,
    the cylinders or a transmission element in common operative engagement with
    said cylinders or pistons being adapted to rotate about a fixed axis; said
    cylinders being physically arranged in a manner such that their
    longitudinal axes either (1) intersect at a common point or (2) extend
    parallel to said axis of rotation.

    (1)     Note.  Devices having three or more cylinders arranged in the above
    defined relationship are intended to be included hereunder only in those
    instances where the disclosed structure limits the device to a pumping
    function (e.g., check valve control of admission or discharge of pump fluid
    to or from the cylinders) or has structure claimed which has utility only
    in a pumping operation.  Therefore, plural cylinder devices of this
    arrangement which are in fact capable of operation as a motor and which
    have no features claimed of sole pump utility are classified in Class 91,
    Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, regardless of whether they are disclosed
    and claimed generically or solely as pump or motor.  However, intended to
    be classified in this class are plural cylinder devices of the above
    defined type which are disclosed solely or claimed solely as a pump and
    which in addition claim means separate from the pump for sensing a
    condition (excludes direct response via pumping member) to effect control
    of either (1) the pumped fluid (see subclass 270, indented hereunder) or
    (2) the pump drive transmission (see subclasses 212+).  Also, plural
    cylinder devices of this type having a significantly claimed motor drive
    therefor are intended to be classified in this class (see subclass 271,
    indented hereunder) provided the claims do not reflect control of the drive
    in response to a sensed pump condition which would cause classification in
    subclasses 1+.

    (2)     Note.  To fall within the scope of this definition the motor must
    be of the type which includes at least three cylinders and none of said
    three may be formed integral with the relatively reciprocating piston of
    another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses, for
    mechanical motion converting apparatus having no pump fluid valving or
    porting claimed and see especially subclass 22 for apparatus for converting
    rotary motion to reciprocating and rotary motion and subclass 55 for
    apparatus employing a cam and slide for converting rotary motion to or from
    reciprocating or oscillating motion.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 472+, for three or
    more cylinders arranged in parallel, radial, or conical relationship with a
    rotary transmission axis and which are generic to operation as either a
    pump or a motor.  See note above for the distinction between this subclass
    and subclasses 472+ in Class 91.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclasses, for expansible
    chamber devices having plural parallel, radial, or conical arranged
    cylinders in which there is no valving of the pumped fluid claimed and see
    especially subclasses 12.1+ for displacement control of plural cylinders
    arranged in parallel, radial, or conical relationship with a rotary
    transmission axis, 56+ for plural rotating cylinders, 68+ for relatively
    movable working members interconnected with a common rotatable shaft, and
    146+ for plural unitarily mounted cylinders.


CLS 417/270
TXT Apparatus under subclass 269 including fluid flow control means for varying
    the flow of the fluid being pumped, said means being operated by sensing
    the occurrence of a condition or change in condition.

    (1)     Note.  For a further definition of what constitutes the occurrence
    of a condition or a change in condition see the definition and notes of
    subclass 279 of this class.

    (2)     Note.  This definition does not include a distributor for the pump
    formed by relatively rotating parts (e.g., disc valve) in which the
    relatively rotating parts are biased into sealing engagement by springs or
    the like which could yield to allow separation of the valve ports and
    permit escape or by-pass of pump fluid.


CLS 417/271
TXT Apparatus under subclass 269 in which the pump is driven by a motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    321+,   for pumps other than the above defined type which are motor driven.


CLS 417/272
TXT Apparatus under subclass 269 in which there is provided fluid pressure
    responsive means located externally of the pumping chambers and associated
    with at least one of said plural cylinders or relatively reciprocating
    piston for exerting thereon a continuous force in one reciprocatory stroke
    direction to promote expansion or contraction of the pumping chamber
    associated with said one cylinder or piston.


CLS 417/273
TXT Apparatus under subclass 269 in which the longitudinal axes of said plural
    cylinders intersect at a common point from which they radiate and are
    contained within a common plane perpendicular to said axis of rotation.

    (1)     Note.  In some instances, the longitudinal axes of the cylinders
    move relative to the axis of rotation and devices of this type are intended
    to be included hereunder if the individual cylinder axes pass through the
    common point in at least one position of their movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses for mechanical
    motion converting apparatus having no pump fluid valving or parting claimed
    and see especially subclass 55 for apparatus employing a cam and slide for
    converting rotary motion to or from reciprocating or oscillating motion.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 491+, for three or
    more cylinders arranged in radial relationship with a rotary transmission
    axis which are generic to operation as either a pump or motor.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclasses, for expansible
    chamber devices having plural radial cylinders in which there is no valving
    of pump fluid claimed and see especially subclass 58 for plural rotating
    cylinders in which the axis of the cylinders intersect the rotation axis at
    a common point, subclasses 72+ for relatively movable working members
    interconnected with a common rotatable shaft and in which the shaft axis is
    intersected by the axis of the working members and subclass 148 for three
    or more unitarily mounted, radially arranged cylinders.


CLS 417/274
TXT Apparatus under class definition comprising condition responsive means to
    vary the clearance volume of the expansible chamber of an expansible
    chamber pump by sensing the occurrence of a condition or change in
    condition.

    (1)     Note.  Those expansible chamber devices which have a movable wall
    which is movable solely by the pressure of the fluid in the chamber acting
    directly on the wall or a separate fluid reaction surface connected to the
    movable wall are excluded from this subclass, see Class 92, subclass 60.
    The terms "acting directly" as used above mean that the fluid acts on the
    separate fluid section surface without being valved.  When there is
    disclosure of a valve between the chamber and the fluid reaction surface
    the patent is classifiable in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212+,   for variable displacement expansible chamber pumps provided with
    condition responsive drive control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 60 for a flexible or
    resiliently biased nonworking member movable wall which is in constant
    communication with the working chamber of a nonrotary expansible chamber
    device.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 16+ for a variable
    volume working chamber rotary expansible chamber device and subclasses 24+,
    in particular, for such devices having a spring or fluid biased movable
    member.


CLS 417/275
TXT Apparatus under subclass 274 in which the means to vary the clearance
    volume comprises a separate chamber for varying the capacity of the
    expansible chamber, and a valve means for isolating said separate chamber
    from the expansible chamber.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of an expansible chamber-type pump, see
    definition of subclass 437 below.


CLS 417/276
TXT Apparatus under subclass 275 in which the pump is of the double acting type
    having two pumping chambers, each of said pumping chambers being connected
    to a separate clearance chamber, and at least two of the separate clearance
    chambers being interconnected by valve means.


CLS 417/277
TXT Apparatus under subclass 275 wherein a single expansible chamber has two or
    more clearance chambers connected thereto.


CLS 417/278
TXT Apparatus under class definition comprising fluid flow control means for
    varying the flow of pumped fluid, and including means operated in response
    to a condition or change in condition occurring externally of the system
    other than a manually induced condition or change.

    (1)     Note.  Additional structure or modification of the pump structure
    to respond to or compensate for the external condition must be included and
    hence mere exposure of the pump or pump part to an external condition is
    excluded from this definition.

    (2)     Note.  Fluid flow control varying means under this definition is
    intended to include means for varying the volume or pressure of pumped
    fluid delivered by the pump.


CLS 417/279
TXT Apparatus under class definition comprising fluid flow control means for
    varying the flow of pumped fluid, and including means sensing the
    occurrence of a condition or change in condition of either the pump or the
    fluid being pumped to actuate the control means.

    (1)     Note.  The terms "bypass" and "relief" as used in subclasses
    indented hereunder are defined as follows: bypass, a flow line which
    connects the pump discharge passage directly to the pump intake passage,
    and relief, a flow line which connects the pump discharge directly to
    exhaust (e.g., a sump, atmosphere or the like).

    (2)     Note.  Valves which may ordinarily be considered to be fluid flow
    or condition responsive (e.g., check valves, etc.) are excluded from this
    and the indented subclasses if they normally are operated through a cycle
    every time the pump or pumping member with which they are associated is
    operated through its normal pumping cycle.  However, (1) spring biased
    valves which are solely disclosed as being bypass or relief valves even
    though they may operate cyclically and (2) normally cyclically operable
    valves which have their cycle or operation altered or modified by a change
    of condition have been included in this and indented subclass.  See
    subclasses 297+ for the latter type.  See subclasses 502 and 503 for
    multiple cyclic outlet and inlet paths, respectively, and subclass 504 for
    plural outlet paths to a single discharge line acting under different
    conditions.

    (3)     Note.  The control of an atmospheric air inlet to the pulsation
    dampening chamber of a pump is not included in this subclass.  See
    subclasses 540+ and the notes thereto for the classification of such
    devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270,    for pumps having three or more radial, parallel, or coaxially
    arranged cylinders having condition responsive control of the pump fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 115.01+ for a self-proportioning system
    having a by-pass or relief controlled by a main line condition.


CLS 417/280
TXT Apparatus under subclass 279 in which the pump is provided with a driving
    motor and the sensing means responds to a condition of the motor or the
    operating medium of the motor which is generated by a condition or change
    of condition of the pump.

    (1)     Note.  The condition sensed must be more than the manual operation
    for starting or stopping the drive means. See subclasses 316+ for
    correlated pump fluid and motor or clutch control.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    293+,   for pumped fluid control responsive to the speed of a driven pump
    part.


CLS 417/281
TXT Apparatus under subclass 279 comprising a pumping unit having means for
    lubricating a part of the unit which is so related to the flow control
    means that such means is controlled in response to a condition or change in
    condition of the means lubricating the pumping unit.


CLS 417/282
TXT Apparatus under subclass 279 in which the fluid flow control means
    comprises a single flow controlling element for a single fluid passage
    controlled by a plurality of separate sensing elements or signals, each
    responsive to a different condition or change in such condition.

    (1)     Note.  A bypass valve provided with means responsive to discharge
    pressure will not be classified in this subclass merely because the valve
    or controller is exposed to the fluid entering the pump.  Such a bypass
    valve is classified below on other features.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300,    for a flow generated pressure differential which is sensed and the
    high and low pressures determining such differential applied to opposite
    faces of an actuator controlling the fluid flow control means.


CLS 417/283
TXT Apparatus under subclass 279 comprising a pump which includes a movable
    part or portion other than the pumping member but which is normally in
    contact with the pumping member, the part or portion normally being biased
    against the pumping member by pumped fluid pressure acting thereon, and in
    which there is a bypass or relief valve for pumped fluid, the operation of
    the bypass or relief valve relieving the pressure bias on the part or
    portion such that it moves out of contact with the pumping member to permit
    fluid to pass around the pumping member from the pump discharge to the
    inlet.


CLS 417/284
TXT Apparatus under subclass 279 in which a movable pumping member is provided
    with a bypass or relief passage and the fluid flow control means
    controlling such passages is carried by the pumping member.


CLS 417/285
TXT Apparatus under subclass 279 comprising a pump of the nonrotary expansible
    chamber type having plural pumping chambers, one of which is caused to
    expand simultaneously with the contraction of another, and the fluid flow
    control means comprises valve means which controls the flow of fluid
    directly from the contracting chamber to the expanding chamber.

    (1)     Note.  The passage connecting the chambers may do so by branching
    from another flow line, but if it does so, the branching must be between
    the chamber and any pump distributor valve located in the other flow line.


CLS 417/286
TXT Apparatus under subclass 279 in which a plurality of pumping units are
    provided and wherein the fluid flow control means operated in response to a
    condition or change in condition individually controls the operating
    characteristics of one unit relative to another and comprises (1) means
    other than the valving required for the pumping function of such unit or
    (2) means to operate the necessary valving of a pumping unit in a manner
    inconsistent with the pumping function of such unit.

    (1)     Note.  To be considered plural pumping units under this definition
    each unit must operate in or comprise a pumping chamber separate and
    distinct from the pumping chamber of another unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    253,    for multistage pumps having condition responsive control of at
    least one of the stages.

    270,    for three or more cylinders arranged in parallel, radial or conical
    relationship with rotary transmission axis having condition responsive
    pumped fluid control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 111+ for self-proportioning systems
    having plural inflows including a flow line from plural pumps.


CLS 417/287
TXT Apparatus under subclass 286 in which the pumping units have different
    volumetric displacements to provide different rates of flow or different
    pressure heads.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    253,    for diverse capacity pumps of the multistage type having condition
    responsive control of at least one of the stages.


CLS 417/288
TXT Apparatus under subclass 286 in which the plurality of pumping units are
    each provided with a relief or bypass passage and the fluid flow control
    means comprises valve means which, in response to a condition, operates to
    serially open or close the passages.


CLS 417/289
TXT Apparatus under subclass 279 in which the pump includes an expansible
    chamber-type pump having a supply or discharge port controlled by the
    position of the pumping member and the position at which the pumping member
    covers or uncovers the port is varied in response to the sensed condition.

    (1)     Note.  For the purpose of this definition a pumping member
    controlled port includes the types set forth below in subclass 490.


CLS 417/290
TXT Apparatus under subclass 279 including means to cause or permit the fluid
    flow control means to operate or not to operate for a period of time after
    a change of condition has been sensed and then act to start, stop or change
    the mode of operation of the means.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this definition is a dashpot or damper whose
    control fluid is independent of the pumped fluid and which dashpot or
    damper is in combination with valve means which controls the pumped fluid
    flow.  Such combination is classified below on other features.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for condition responsive control of both the pump fluid and the
    pump drive motor with means for delaying operation of the pump fluid
    controlling valve.


CLS 417/291
TXT Apparatus under subclass 279 in which the pump is of the type in which the
    flow of fluid through the pump is caused to change direction and flow in
    the opposite direction when the direction of rotation of the pump element
    or the drive means is reversed and in which the fluid flow control means
    controls a bypass line or lines, the means being operable to direct fluid
    from the discharge to the inlet of the pump irrespective of the direction
    of the fluid flow through the pump.


CLS 417/292
TXT Apparatus under subclass 279 where the condition or change in condition is
    the temperature of the pump or pumped fluid.


CLS 417/293
TXT Apparatus under subclass 279 in which there is provided a sensing means
    responding to the speed of a driven portion of the pump means or the drive
    means for such means and which is related to the fluid flow control means
    to operate the latter when the pump portion or drive means attains a
    predetermined speed or changes speed.


CLS 417/294
TXT Apparatus under subclass 293 wherein the sensing means comprises
    centrifugally actuated means effecting operation of the fluid control means
    either (1) directly or (2) through a fluid control circuit.


CLS 417/295
TXT Apparatus under subclass 279 in which the fluid control means comprises
    valve means other than a distributor which valve means varies the flow of
    fluid entering the pumping means by restricting the size of, or closing the
    inlet passage of the pumping means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    298,    for an inlet distributor having means to modify its operation.


CLS 417/296
TXT Apparatus under subclass 279 in which the fluid flow control means
    comprises a bypass or relief valve which has at least one part thereof
    carried by a distributor of the pump which carries at least one part of a
    distributor of the pump.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of the term "distributor," see the notes
    under subclass 437.


CLS 417/297
TXT Apparatus under subclass 279 in which the fluid flow control means includes
    a cyclically operable pump valve and means for modifying the normal
    operation of said valve.


CLS 417/297.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 297 in which the means for modifying the normal
    operation of said valve acts in response to the level of pump fluid.


CLS 417/298
TXT Apparatus under subclass 297 in which the cyclically operable pump valve is
    the inlet or intake valve of the pump.


CLS 417/299
TXT Apparatus under subclass 279 in which there is a bypass or relief line
    controlled by the fluid flow control means, the bypass or relief line being
    normally open to permit flow therethrough and the control means operating
    to close the line when the flow rate through the pump or the pressure
    generated by the pump increases above a minimum value.


CLS 417/300
TXT Apparatus under subclass 279 in which the fluid flow control means is
    operated in response to the volume of fluid flowing through the pump or
    changes in the volume of fluid flowing through the pump.


CLS 417/301
TXT Apparatus under subclass 279 in which the fluid flow control means
    comprises a valve in a bypass passage around the pump, which valve is
    responsive to an increase in the inlet passage to permit fluid to flow from
    the inlet to the discharge side of the pump.


CLS 417/302
TXT Apparatus under subclass 279 in which the flow control means control flow
    in two or more pumped fluid flow paths.


CLS 417/303
TXT Apparatus under subclass 302 wherein one of the condition responsive fluid
    flow paths comprises a normally closed main line path in the pump inlet or
    outlet, and another comprises a normally closed path in a relief or bypass
    passage, said paths provided with valve means operated by the condition
    responsive means to open the main line path before the opening of the other.


CLS 417/304
TXT Apparatus under subclass 302 in which the condition responsive fluid
    control means comprises means located in a plurality of separate bypass or
    relief passages.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    287,    for plural diverse capacity pumps or chambers having sequentially
    controlled passages controlled by a single valve element.

    288,    for plural pumps or chambers having sequentially operated bypass or
    relief passages.

    308,    for plural relief or bypass valves having at least one responsive
    to pressure.


CLS 417/305
TXT Apparatus under subclass 279 in which the fluid flow control means is
    provided with a separate means under the control of a human operator for
    operating the flow control means independently of the condition sensed.

    (1)     Note.  The manual actuating means must be specifically disclosed as
    operating the fluid flow control means by an independent or overriding
    action of the condition sensing means.  The disclosure of a manual
    adjusting means, which might incidentally cause operation of the flow
    control, is not included.


CLS 417/306
TXT Apparatus under subclass 279 in which the flow control means controls a
    passage communicating with the atmosphere and the inlet of a pump or
    pumping chamber of a pump and is operative in response to a condition of
    such pump to admit atmospheric air to the pump inlet or pumping chamber to
    reduce or destroy the normal vacuum which exists in the inlet or in the
    pumping chamber during the intake stroke of the pump.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    307+,   for a pressure responsive bypass or relief valve which permits the
    discharge of pumped fluid to the inlet of the pump or to ambient in
    response to a pressure rise in the pumping chamber.


CLS 417/307
TXT Apparatus under subclass 279 in which the fluid flow control means controls
    a bypass or relief line.


CLS 417/308
TXT Apparatus under subclass 307 in which there is an additional relief or
    bypass path having an independent control means to control the flow of
    fluid in the path.


CLS 417/309
TXT Apparatus under subclass 307 in which the fluid flow control means is
    operated in response to a condition of the fluid in the intake or low
    pressure inlet of the pump.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301,    for an inlet pressure responsive bypass from the pump inlet to the
    pump discharge.


CLS 417/310
TXT Apparatus under subclass 307 wherein the pump is of the rotary expansible
    chamber type.


CLS 417/311
TXT Apparatus under subclass 307 in which the fluid control means comprises a
    valve which is biased to a closed position by means of a spring and means
    are provided for varying the bias of the spring.


CLS 417/312
TXT Apparatus under class definition including means to attenuate sound created
    by operation of the pump, said means acting upon the pump fluid to
    accomplish the attenuation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclass 403 for refrigerator compressor mufflers.


CLS 417/313
TXT Apparatus under the class definition claimed in combination with features
    other than the fluid impelling means or valving, the drive means or casing
    or support structure for the pump and not provided for in preceding
    subclasses.

    (1)     Note.  In view of the intimate relationship between Class 92,
    Expansible Chamber Devices, and this class with respect to nonrotary
    expansible chamber-type pumps some subjects matter which ordinarily would
    be considered to be combined when claimed in combination with nonrotary
    expansible chamber pumps of this class (417) are not considered to be
    combined herein and are excluded under this definition.  The following
    basis has been used to determine whether certain subject matter is to be
    considered as combined under this definition.  If Class 92 specifically
    provides a basis of classification for the subject matter of Class 92, then
    said subject matter combined with a nonrotary expansible chamber pump will
    be excluded from this definition.  The miscellaneous combined subclass of
    Class 92 (subclass 145) is not considered to specifically provide a basis
    of classification for any combined device.  For example, a nonrotary
    expansible chamber pump combined with fluid purifying means as provided for
    in Class 92 subclasses 78+ or with nonsealing cleaning means as provided
    for in Class 92 subclass 87 are excluded from this definition.

    (2)     Note.  Note the following subclasses providing for subject matter
    not considered to be combined under this definition; 496+, 432+, 434, 435,
    438, and 493+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    372,    for motor driven pumps having common or interrelated cooling means
    for the pump and motor.


CLS 417/314
TXT Apparatus under class definition comprising a reciprocating pumping member
    (e.g., piston) having opposed working faces disposed in a pair of pumping
    chambers, both of said chambers being effective to pump fluid under one
    condition of operation and means to alter the operation thereof so as to
    cause only one of the pumping chambers to be active during continued
    reciprocation of the pumping member.


CLS 417/315
TXT Apparatus under class definition in which the pump has a mechanical pumping
    member (e.g., rotor or piston) and an inlet flow line and means being
    provided to (1) change the flow of the pumped fluid without altering the
    movement of or direction of rotation of the pumping member, i.e., the inlet
    flow line under one condition of operation becomes the outlet flow line
    under the other condition of operation and vice versa or (2) change the
    direction of rotation of the pumping member or a driving element therefor
    without reversing the direction of flow of the pump fluid in the flow lines.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239,    for similar devices in which the reverse flow with unidirectional
    drive or the unidirectional flow with reverse drive is effected by a
    rearrangement of parts or the addition or omission of a part.

    291,    for a reversibly driven pump with a pressure responsive bypass
    operable in either flow direction.


CLS 417/316
TXT Apparatus under class definition in which the pump is driven by a motor or
    a selectively disengageable drive means (i.e., clutch), the motor or clutch
    having means (e.g., valve, switch, brake, starter-circuit, lever, etc.) for
    controlling its operation and the pump having control means associated
    therewith (i.e., pump fluid valve or displacement varying means), there
    being provided positive actuation means for both the motor or clutch
    control means and the pump control means, said motor or clutch control
    means and said pump control means being interrelated in a manner which
    causes or requires positive actuation of the pump control means upon
    actuation of the motor or clutch control means to at least one of its
    operative controlling positions, or vice versa.


CLS 417/317
TXT Apparatus under subclass 316 in which the valve means associated with the
    pump comprises a pump fluid distributor for cyclically controlling the flow
    of pump fluid to or from the pump.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note of subclass 437 for definition of distributor.


CLS 417/318
TXT Apparatus under subclass 317 comprising a motor of the type which is
    motivated by fluid (includes internal combustion engine type) and has valve
    means movable relative to the motor working member for cyclically
    controlling inlet or exhaust of motive fluid to and from the motor (i.e.,
    motive fluid distributor); said motor valve means and said pump fluid
    distributor being interconnected by a mechanical element (includes abutment
    or lost motion-type interconnection) such that movement of the motor valve
    means causes movement of the pump fluid distributor, or vice versa.


CLS 417/319
TXT Apparatus under class definition in which the pump has a driven pumping
    member, the driving means including (1) a friction or interlocking means to
    secure drive continuity between two rotating members of the driving means,
    but being releasable to interrupt the drive, or (2) a member or part so
    designed as to break or rupture on overload so as to discontinue the drive.


CLS 417/320
TXT Apparatus under class definition in which one or more pumping members act
    to form a progression of completely isolated variable volume pumping
    chambers by a unidirectional movement.

    (1)     Note.  Pumps comprising a series of pumping members or a single
    pumping member travelling unidirectionally through a fluid confining
    chamber are found here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 151, for motors having
    serially formed expanding working chambers.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 4, for a plurality of
    chamber partitions moving along a curved path, the distance between said
    partition members varying during their course of travel.


CLS 417/321
TXT Apparatus under class definition in which the pump is driven by a
    significantly claimed motor.

    (1)     Note.  This definition excludes motor driven pumps in which the
    pump is a mere accessory of or ancillary to the operation of the motor and
    such ancillary function is reflected in the claims.  For example, an engine
    driving a cooling water pump with no claimed connection of the pump to the
    engine would be included under this definition, but if a claim recites the
    connection of the cooling water pump to the engine this would be excluded.
    Such a combination would be classifiable in the appropriate motor class.

    (2)     Note.  In order for a patent to be classified under this definition
    there must be a significant recitation of both the motor and the pump.  A
    specifically claimed pump driven by a nominally claimed motor is classified
    in appropriate other subclasses of this class or other appropriate classes
    which include pumps (e.g., Class 415, Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps;
    Class 418, Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, etc.).  Likewise, a
    specifically claimed motor driving a nominally claimed pump is classified
    in the appropriate class providing for such motor (e.g., Class 91, Class
    415, Class 418, etc.).  Enumerated below are a number of examples for both
    pump and motor as to what is considered significant recitation and that
    which is not significant recitation.



    A.      Motor Recitation

    (1)     Significant motor inclusion

    (a)     A motor having any structural detail thereof recited, e.g., piston,
    rotor, runner, armature, etc., or designation of a turbine as to type,
    e.g., axial flow, two-stage, etc.

    (b)     Recital of details of motor crankcase structure, housing, base, or
    support for the motor.

    (c)     Recital of structure ancillary to the motor, e.g., fluid or
    electrical control circuit or power generating apparatus, cooling or
    lubricating structure, etc.

    (2)     Insignificant motor inclusion

    (a)     Means for driving or drive means.

    (b)     A motor specified as to some extremely common type, e.g., rotary,
    reciprocating, electric, fluid, expansible chamber, turbine, internal
    combustion engine, etc., or any combination of said types.

    B.      Pump Recitation

    (1)     Significant pump inclusion

    (a)     A pump having any structural detail thereof recited, e.g., piston,
    gear, screw, rotor or impeller within a recited casing, etc., or
    designation of rotary nonexpansible chamber as to type, e.g., axial flow,
    centrifugal, two-stage, etc.

    (b)     Recital of structure ancillary to the pump, e.g., cooling or
    lubricating structure for the pump.

    (c)     Recital of details of pump crankcase, structure, housing, base or
    support for the pump.



    (2)     Insignificant pump inclusion

    (a)     A pump specified by name or extremely common type, e.g., pump or
    pump means, blower, fan, compressor, rotary, reciprocating, expansible
    chamber, liquid, etc., or any combination of said types.



    C.      Pump and Motor Support or Spatial Relationship

    (1)     The following motor-pump relationships are considered significant
    for purposes of classification herein, even though neither pump nor motor
    is specifically recited.

    (a)     The claiming of a spatial relationship between the pump and motor
    or common support therefor, e.g., motor mounted on the pump, pump mounted
    on the motor, a common base, support, or housing for the pump and motor.

    (b)     The claiming of means for permitting or preventing heat transfer
    between the pump and motor or pump and motive fluids.

    (c)     The claiming of means common to the pump and motor for cooling or
    lubricating same.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for motor driven pumps with condition responsive control of the
    pump drive motor.

    91,     for diverse pumps in which one is fluid motor driven and the other
    is of the aerated column type, the motor exhaust comprising the aeration
    fluid.

    245,    for successive stage pumps in which one stage has a motor driven by
    fluid supplied from another stage.

    271,    for motor driven pumps in which the pump has three or more
    cylinders arranged in parallel, radial or conical relationships with a
    rotary transmission axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 533+ for a motor driven expansible chamber
    device disclosed solely as the master in a pulsator system,

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, for non-rotary expansible chamber
    devices disclosed as being of the pump or motor type.  Class 417 will take
    a motor-type expansible chamber device driving a pump-type expansible
    chamber device if a claim recites one as a motor and one as a pump.  Class
    92 takes plural expansible chamber devices including those in which one is
    of the motor type driving another of the pump type if no claim recites that
    one is a motor and the other a pump.


CLS 417/322
TXT Apparatus under subclass 321 in which the pump has an expansible chamber,
    at least some of the walls of which are of such a nature as to change
    dimension when subjected to a magnetic or electric force to change the
    volume of the chamber and means to subject the walls to such a force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    413.2,  for piezoelectric member attached to diaphragm.


CLS 417/323
TXT Apparatus under subclass 321 in which the pump has an inlet and outlet for
    fluid pumped for external use, at least a portion of the fluid either (1)
    prior to entry to the pump or (2) discharge from said pump outlet, being
    utilized either immediately or stored for later use, and without further
    addition of energy, under at least one phase or condition of operation, as
    a source of motive fluid for a fluid motor which is used to either drive
    the pump or provide motive power for starting a motor (usually combustion
    engine) which drives the pump.

    (1)     Note.  In part (2) of the above definition, the pumped fluid must
    have been discharged from the pump prior to its being used as motive fluid.
    Therefore, reciprocating expansible chamber pumps which utilized the
    pressure energy of the fluid existing within the pumping chamber or a
    chamber in nonvalved continuous communication therewith for reacting on the
    pumping member itself or a member connected thereto are excluded under this
    definition even though such an arrangement may be said to assist in driving
    the pump.  Also those devices which permit the pump fluid to continuously
    apply a force to a reciprocatory-type pumping member are excluded under
    this definition.

    (2)     Note.  The fluid motor of this definition, due to its particular
    relationship of receiving motive fluid from the pump which it is driving,
    will be a mere auxiliary of some other source of pump motivating power
    (e.g., primary motor, primary motive fluid source, or manual actuator)
    which may or may not be claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225,    for intensifiers of the type which utilize a portion of the pump
    fluid upstream of the pump for driving the pump motor to raise the
    remainder of said pump fluid to a higher head.


CLS 417/324
TXT Apparatus under subclass 321 in which the pump is driven by a prime mover,
    there being provided either (1) adjusting or converting means for
    conditioning the pump for operation as a motor or (2) a source of motive
    fluid selectively communicable with the pump for causing the pump to be
    operated as a motor; operation of the pump as a motor serving to start or
    aid in starting the prime mover drive.


CLS 417/325
TXT Apparatus under subclass 321 in which the motor is of the type which
    unidirectionally rotates to cause the pump to operate and upon starting the
    motor operates for a limited time in a direction of rotation opposite to
    the normal pump driving direction of rotation (usually to unload the pump)
    and having means which then reverses the direction of rotation so as to
    operate the pump in the normal manner.


CLS 417/326
TXT Apparatus under subclass 321 in which there is provided motor control means
    which is operable at the will of a human operator, said control means being
    effective upon operation thereof to either (1) change the rate of movement
    of a motor working member or (2) change the direction of working member
    rotation in a motor of the type having a rotating working member.

    (1)     Note.  The motor control means of this definition may be a
    reversible flow motive fluid generating pump, flow reversal of said motive
    fluid generating pump causing reversal or rotation of a rotary motor.


CLS 417/327
TXT Apparatus under subclass 321 in which the motor has a movable working
    member which receives its motive power as a consequence of the reactive
    force created by the discharge of motive fluid therefrom to the surrounding
    medium.


CLS 417/328
TXT Apparatus under subclass 321 in which the motor is of the type which
    includes a movable member which is motivated by either (1) the force of
    gravity or (2) a spring.

    (1)     Note.  To fall within the scope of this definition the motivating
    force produced by the spring or gravitational force must be controllable or
    variable in intensity or direction to cause operation of the movable
    member, i.e., a weight or spring for exerting a continuous unidirectional
    biasing force is excluded.


CLS 417/329
TXT Apparatus under subclass 328 in which a fluid material is utilized for
    causing motion of the movable member, the principle force applied to
    movable member being derived from gravitational force exerted thereon by
    the fluent material (i.e., weight).

    (1)     Note.  Exemplary of apparatus classified under this definition are
    devices comprising either a movable container or piston within an open
    ended cylinder which is alternately filled and emptied with liquid, the
    weight of the liquid causing movement of the container on the piston within
    the cylinder.


CLS 417/330
TXT Apparatus under subclass 321 in which the motor has at least one movable
    working member positioned and adapted to receive energy from the
    alternating, cyclic, surface movement of a fluid body which movement is the
    result of either tidal or wave action.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 495+ for motors having buoyant working
    members motivated by the vertical rise and fall of a surface of a body of
    fluid.


CLS 417/331
TXT Apparatus under subclass 330 in which the motor working member is buoyant
    so as to float in the water which is actuating it.


CLS 417/332
TXT Apparatus under subclass 331 in which the buoyant motor working member
    moves about a pivot point or fixed axis.


CLS 417/333
TXT Apparatus under subclass 331 in which the movement of the buoyant motor
    working member is restricted to a fixed path by a guiding and confining
    means, such as a slide or a track.


CLS 417/334
TXT Apparatus under subclass 321 in which the motor has a movable working
    member adapted to receive energy from an unconfined body of fluid, such as
    the wind or a river current.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus under this definition is limited to those devices
    in which motive fluid for the working member is completely nonconfined.
    Apparatus having stationary means for directing the flow of motive to the
    motor working member (e.g., trough, baffles, etc.) is thereby excluded
    under this definition.


CLS 417/335
TXT Apparatus under subclass 334 in which, in addition to the fluid current
    motor, there is provided additional means to impart driving energy to the
    pump.

    (1)     Note.  The additional means is usually one for manually operating
    the pump (e.g., handle).

    (2)     Note.  Patents have been classified in this subclass on a
    disclosure basis with many of the patents not claiming the fluid current
    motor or pump, but merely the mechanism for alternative drive.


CLS 417/336
TXT Apparatus under subclass 334 in which the motor working member moves
    unidirectionally about a fixed axis, said axis being substantially
    horizontal and oriented in a direction parallel to the flow of the moving
    fluid.


CLS 417/337
TXT Apparatus under subclass 321 in which the motor has a buoyant movable
    working member which member is positioned in a container for liquid, said
    container being alternately filled and emptied so as to move the buoyant
    member up and down or said buoyant member being alternately filled and
    emptied so as to move up and down.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331+,   for tide or wave actuated float which drives the pump.


CLS 417/338
TXT Apparatus under subclass 321 in which two or more pumping members which are
    capable of or constrained to move relative to each other are driven by two
    or more motor working members which are capable of or constrained to move
    relative to each other.

    (1)     Note.  The plural pumping members under this definition must each
    provide an output of fluid for external use. Therefore, a motor driven pump
    which is a mere auxiliary or ancillary of another motor driven pump (e.g.,
    supplies motive fluid or cooling fluid for another motor driven pump) is
    not included under this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246+,   for plural relatively movable pumping members driven by plural
    relatively movable working members wherein the pumping members serially act
    upon the pumped fluid.


CLS 417/339
TXT Apparatus under subclass 338 in which the motor working members are
    motivated by fluid (includes internal combustion engines) and in which said
    pumping and motor working members partake of alternate to-and-fro motion.

    (1)     Note.  The plural pumping members under this definition must each
    provide an output of fluid for external use. Therefore, a motor driven pump
    which is a mere auxiliary or ancillary of another motor driven pump (e.g.,
    supplies motive fluid or cooling fluid for another motor driven pump) is
    not included under this definition.

    (2)     Note.  Pumping members or working members of the flexible wall type
    or which partake of an oscillatory motion are included under this
    definition.

    (3)     Note.  Plural relatively movable common piston or common flexible
    wall type pump-motors fall within the scope of this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246,    for plural relatively movable pumping members driven by plural
    relatively movable working members wherein the pumping members serially act
    upon the pumped fluid.


CLS 417/340
TXT Apparatus under subclass 339 in which the relatively movable working
    members form opposite walls of a common expansible working chamber adapted
    to receive pressure or combustion working fluid, said working members
    moving toward and away from each other during expansion and contraction of
    the expansible working chamber.


CLS 417/341
TXT Apparatus under subclass 340 in which there is provided mechanical motion
    constraining means (e.g., linkage, gearing, etc.) for interconnecting the
    working members of said common expansible chamber in a manner which
    necessitates motion of one working member relative to another.


CLS 417/342
TXT Apparatus under subclass 339 in which the working members are
    interconnected by a body of fluid which is totally confined during at least
    a portion of working member movement, the confining means for said body of
    fluid being formed in part by said working members or portions connected
    thereto so that movement of one working member necessitates movement of the
    other.

    (1)     Note.  The fluid interconnection under this definition must be
    between faces or portions of the working members other than their fluid
    working faces or portions.

    (2)     Note.  Plural working members which are interconnected solely by a
    confined body of fluid are intended to fall within the scope of this
    definition, even though the disclosed normal mode of operation may not
    provide for relative working member motion.


CLS 417/343
TXT Apparatus under subclass 339 in which there is provided mechanical motion
    constraining means (e.g., linkage, gearing, etc.) for interconnecting the
    pumping or working members in a manner which necessitates motion of one
    working member relative to another or one pumping member relative to
    another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    341,    for mechanically interconnected, relatively movable working members
    which form opposite walls of a common expansible chamber.


CLS 417/344
TXT Apparatus under subclass 339 in which there is provided valve means for
    controlling motive fluid for one of said working members, said valve means
    being controlled in response to another working member attaining a
    predetermined position.

    (1)     Note.  The valve means under this definition which controls motive
    fluid for one working member may comprise a cylinder port controlled by the
    working member of another.


CLS 417/345
TXT Apparatus under subclass 344 in which the control valve means comprises
    either (1) a multiway valve or (2) plural valve means and a single element
    for actuating each of the valve means said control valve means controlling
    motive fluid for the plural working members or actuating fluid for fluid
    operated valves which control motive fluid for the plural working members,
    each of said working members, either jointly or successively, operating
    said single element or said multiway valve.


CLS 417/346
TXT Apparatus under subclass 344 having a separate motive fluid control valve
    for each working member and separate actuating means for each valve, and
    wherein each working member separately controls an actuating means for a
    valve controlling motive fluid for another of said working members.

    (1)     Note.  The motive fluid control valve for one working member and
    the actuating means therefor may comprise a cylinder port controlled by the
    working member of another.


CLS 417/347
TXT Apparatus under subclass 339 having control valve means comprising either
    (1) a multiway valve or (2) plural valve means and a single element for
    actuating each of the valve means, said control valve means controlling
    motive fluid for the plural working members or actuating fluid for fluid
    operated valves which control motive fluid for the plural working members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    345,    for relatively movable nonrotary working members driving relatively
    movable nonrotary pumping members having motive fluid control by a single
    member responsive to the position of each of the working members.


CLS 417/348
TXT Apparatus under subclass 321 in which there is provided a member which
    rotates more than 3605 about a fixed axis, at least one portion of said
    member, during different segments of each revolution thereof, serving
    alternately as both a pumping member and a fluid motor working member.

    (1)     Note.  The motor and pump under this definition may be of the
    rotary expansible chamber type as provided for in Class 418, Rotary
    Expansible Chamber Devices, or of the kinetic type as provided for in Class
    415, Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps.


CLS 417/349
TXT Apparatus under subclass 321 in which there is provided means forming an
    expansible and contractible chamber, said chamber serving both as an
    expansible motor chamber and an expansible pumping chamber.

    (1)     Note.  The pump fluid under this definition may comprise a portion
    or component of the combustible charge of an internal combustion engine,
    provided said charge is discharged from the chamber prior to combustion
    thereof.

    (2)     Note.  This definition excludes those pumps in which the fluid is
    pumped in a separate chamber and then discharged through the motor chamber
    even though the energy of the fluid may be increased in the motor chamber.
    See subclasses 377+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105+,   for apparatus in which one fluid is caused to be pumped by the
    condensation of a motivating fluid.

    348,    for rotary expansible chamber devices having a common pump and
    motor working member in which the common member defines a common rotating
    pump and motor chamber.

    377+,   see (2) Note above.


CLS 417/350
TXT Apparatus under subclass 321 in which the motor has a working member which
    is drivingly connected to and located between opposite plural pumping
    members, said motor working member and said plural pumping members having a
    rotary motion of more than 3600 in a single direction about a single common
    axis.

    (1)     Note.  A rotary fluid motor under this definition may be of the
    rotary expansible chamber type as provided for in Class 418, Rotary
    Expansible Chamber Devices, or of the kinetic type as provided for in Class
    415, Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps.


CLS 417/351
TXT Apparatus under subclass 321 in which the pump has a pumping member which
    is drivingly connected to and located between opposite plural motor working
    members, said pumping member and said plural motor working members having a
    rotary motion of more than 3600 in a single direction about a single common
    axis.

    (1)     Note.  A rotary fluid motor under this definition may be of the
    rotary expansible chamber type as provided for in Class 418, Rotary
    Expansible Chamber Devices, or of the kinetic type as provided for in Class
    415, Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps.


CLS 417/352
TXT Apparatus under subclass 321 in which the pump has a rotating pumping
    member and at least a portion of the motor or motor part (e.g., armature,
    runner, stator) is situated interiorly of the axial and radial limits of
    said pumping member.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this definition a mere drive shaft which
    connects the motor working member to the pumping member is not considered
    to be a portion of the motor.

    (2)     Note.  The motor or motor part situated within the pumping member
    is, in many instances, an integral or monolithic portion of the pumping
    member.

    (3)     Note.  The fluid motor under this definition may be of the rotary
    expansible chamber type as provided for in Class 418, Rotary Expansible
    Chamber Devices, or of the kinetic type as provided for in Class 415,
    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps.


CLS 417/353
TXT Apparatus under subclass 352 in which the portion of the motor situated
    within the pumping member is the rotor of an electric motor.

    (1)     Note.  Included under this definition are those devices in which
    the pumping member has an outer working face or pumping portion and is made
    of some specific material (e.g., magnetizable) so as to also function as
    the motor working member.


CLS 417/354
TXT Apparatus under subclass 353 in which the electric motor has a stator which
    is positioned radially interiorly of the rotor of the electric motor.


CLS 417/355
TXT Apparatus under subclass 321 in which the motor has a rotating working
    member and at least a portion of the pump or pump part (e.g., stator,
    runner, etc.) is situated interiorly of the axial and radial limits of said
    working member.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of the definition, a mere drive shaft which
    connects the motor working member to the pumping member is not considered
    to be a portion of the motor.

    (2)     Note.  The pump or pump part situated within the motor working
    member is, in many instances, an integral or monolithic portion of the
    motor working member.

    (3)     Note.  A rotary fluid motor under this definition may be of the
    rotary expansible chamber type as provided for in Class 418, Rotary
    Expansible Chamber Devices, or of the kinetic type as provided for in Class
    415, Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps.


CLS 417/356
TXT Apparatus under subclass 355 in which the rotating working member is the
    rotor of an electric motor.


CLS 417/357
TXT Apparatus under subclass 321 in which the pump is driven by an electric
    motor comprising rotatable armature and stator portions, said armature
    rotating in a chamber which is fluidly isolated from said stator, and in
    which the pumped fluid communicates with said armature containing chamber.

    (1)     Note.  Included under this definition are devices in which the
    armature containing chamber is either in open communication with the pumped
    fluid or in restricted communication with the pump fluid through a leakage
    path.


CLS 417/358
TXT Apparatus under subclass 321 in which the pump and motor are carried in or
    from unitary structure which is movable through a vertically disposed fluid
    conduit by fluid under pressure applied beneath the structure to elevate
    the pump and motor from a working position at the lower end of the conduit
    to an inoperative position at the upper end.


CLS 417/359
TXT Apparatus under subclass 321 in which (1) both the motor and pump are of
    the rotary type, the rotors of the motor and pump being connected to
    operate as a unit, there being means provided to adjust the running
    position of the rotor unit with respect to the pump casing or (2) the
    driving connection between the motor and pump includes generally aligned
    rotary pump and motor shafts, there being means provided to adjust the
    running position of one of the shafts relative to the other (e.g.,
    radially, axially, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Under section (1) of this definition the adjustment may
    include the entire motor (e.g., rotor and casing) or merely the rotor of
    the motor which is connected to the pump rotor.


CLS 417/360
TXT Apparatus under subclass 321 in which there is provided means designed to
    aid in securing or detaching the pump and motor to or from each other or to
    or from a supporting structure.

    (1)     Note.  This definition is not intended to include those devices in
    which a mere securing means is made easily accessible, for example, bolts
    for securing the pump to the motor which bolts are located so as to be
    readily removed with the proper tool.  Devices included under this
    definition are, for example, a motor driven pump combined with a tool or
    jig for assembling or disassembling one relative to the other, or
    cooperating means between a pump and motor for permitting ready assembly or
    disassembly without the use of a tool.  Despite the above limitations,
    however, if a claim emphasizes the feature of assembly or disassembly it is
    classifiable under this definition.


CLS 417/361
TXT Apparatus under subclass 321 in which the pump and motor are rigidly
    secured to each other to form an integral pump motor unit, the unit being
    adjustably secured to a stationary frame or base so as to be selectively
    movable relative thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359,    for a motor and pump rotor which are adjusted as a unit relative to
    the pump casing.


CLS 417/362
TXT Apparatus under subclass 321 in which the power transmitting connection
    between the motor and the pump includes a continuous flexible member, e.g.,
    belt, chain, etc., which moves in an endless path to transmit the driving
    power.


CLS 417/363
TXT Apparatus under subclass 321 in which the means for mounting the motor in
    driving relation to the pump includes vibration dampening means (e.g.,
    spring, rubber block, etc.) for either (1) resiliently supporting the pump
    or motor to a mounting (e.g., base, casing, etc.) on which they are
    commonly supported, or (2) resiliently attaching the motor to the pump or
    vice versa.


CLS 417/364
TXT Apparatus under subclass 321 in which the motor comprises a chamber having
    a movable wall portion (i.e., working member) cooperating therewith to form
    an alternately expansible and contractable chamber, expansion of said
    chamber being caused by the burning of a combustible fluid within the
    chamber, said chamber expansion causing movement of said movable wall
    portion, the movable wall portion being connected to the pump.

    (1)     Note.  The distinction between this subclass and subclasses 375+ is
    one of disclosure.  Thus, any patent which has at least one embodiment of
    the invention which is disclosed as an internal combustion engine, and
    which has a claim specific to such embodiment, is classified in this
    subclass even though the claimed apparatus is not limited to internal
    combustion engine operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for internal combustion engine driven pump having means for
    controlling the engine in response to a pump or pump fluid condition.

    237,    for internal combustion engines in which at least one cylinder is
    convertible to operation as a pump.

    324,    for internal combustion engine driven pumps wherein the pump is
    operated as a motor to start the internal combustion engine.


CLS 417/365
TXT Apparatus under subclass 321 in which the pump has a pumping member and the
    motor has a working member, each of said members rotating about a common
    axis, there being provided means for applying an axial force (i.e., in the
    longitudinal direction of said axis of rotation) to said pumping and
    working members in opposition to the combined net axial force produced by
    said pumping and working members.

    (1)     Note.  This definition does not include a mere design of the pump
    and motor rotors so as to provide zero axial thrust.  There must be
    provided some special means such as a separate fluid reaction surface or
    spring, etc., to be included under this definition.


CLS 417/366
TXT Apparatus under subclass 321 in which there is provided means for allowing
    at least a portion of the fluid which flows through the pump to either (1)
    contact a motor or motor part, (2) induce flow of or pressurize a secondary
    fluid which contacts a motor or motor part, or (3) transfer heat to a
    secondary fluid or element which contacts a motor or motor part; said means
    having as its disclosed function the augmentation of cooling, lubricating,
    sealing, or cleansing of the motor or motor part.

    (1)     Note.  This definition is limited to apparatus in which the fluid
    which cooperates with the means in the manner set forth in (1), (2), (3) of
    the above definition is that which flows through the pump.  Therefore,
    apparatus utilizing fluid for cooling or lubricating a motor is included
    under this definition only in those instances in which the cooling or
    lubricating fluid itself flows through the pump or is motivated to flow or
    in heat exchange relationship with fluid which flows through the pump.

    (2)     Note.  Apparatus comprising a pump which has as its sole function
    supplying cooling or lubricating fluid to its driving motor is considered
    to be an auxiliary of the motor and does not form subject matter for this
    class and will be found in the appropriate motor class.  To come within the
    scope of this definition, the pump must supply fluid to a point of external
    use as well as supplying fluid for cooling or lubricating its driving
    motor. Also, apparatus in which the mere positional relationship between
    the pump and motor causes the entire volume of pumped fluid to flow over or
    around the motor to thereby necessitate cooling or lubrication of the motor
    by reason of the positional relationship are not intended to be included
    under this definition, particularly those devices in which the entire motor
    unit is positioned within a conduit or tank for supplying pump fluid to or
    from the pump without design or modification of the conduit, tank, or motor
    for enhancing a cooling or lubricating function.  For example, in the above
    arrangement, the claiming of structure peculiar to cooling (e.g., heat
    conducting fins) or structure peculiar to lubricating (e.g., lubricant
    passages within a motor bearing) would cause classification under this
    definition.  Other examples of structure peculiar to cooling would be the
    recital of flow passages for directing all or a portion of the pumped fluid
    to or through the motor or motor part, or means for interconnecting the
    pumping and working members via a material having high thermal conductivity
    characteristics.

    (3)     Note.  For purposes of this definition, a bearing which aids in
    supporting a motor working member is considered to be a "motor part" as set
    forth in the above definition.  Therefore, apparatus utilizing pumped fluid
    for cooling or lubricating a motor bearing forms subject matter within the
    scope of this definition.

    (4)     Note.  A secondary fluid utilized for cooling, lubricating,
    sealing, or cleaning a motor or motor part forms subject matter to be
    included under this definition when the fluid is in heat exchange
    relationship with or caused to flow through the motor by the pumped fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    357,    for rotary electric motor driven pumps having pumped fluid
    circulation within an isolated motor armature containing chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 505 for a compressor-condenser-evaporator
    circuit in which there is provided means for cooling the compressor motor
    by the refrigerant.


CLS 417/367
TXT Apparatus under subclass 366 in which an intermediate fluid is utilized for
    cooling, lubricating or sealing the motor, said intermediate fluid being
    separate from and in heat exchange relationship with the pumped fluid.

    (1)     Note.  Included under this definition are motors of the type having
    a sealed casing for enclosing a secondary fluid therein and means for
    augmenting heat transfer between the secondary fluid and the pump fluid by
    way of the motor casing.


CLS 417/368
TXT Apparatus under subclass 366 in which there is provided means (e.g.,
    auxiliary pump) in addition to the pump driven by the motor, said
    additional means either (1) serving to cause or aid in causing flow,
    agitation, or pressurization of pump fluid which contacts the motor or (2)
    receiving energy from the pump fluid to cause or impart flow, agitation or
    pressurization of a secondary fluid which contacts the motor.


CLS 417/369
TXT Apparatus under subclass 366 in which there is provided a divided flow path
    or pump fluid which has been acted upon by the pumping member of said pump,
    one branch of said divided flow path serving to direct pump fluid to the
    motor or part thereof.

    (1)     Note.  To fall within the scope of this definition, flow passage
    means must be present for the express purpose of providing a divided flow
    path.  Mere accidental divided flow paths through or around a motor of
    conventional design, in the absence of passage means provided for such
    purpose, is excluded, e.g., one flow path between electric motor field coil
    and casing and another between the field coil and armature is not
    considered classifiable under this definition.


CLS 417/370
TXT Apparatus under subclass 369 in which the pump fluid which is directed to
    the motor or motor part by way of said downstream divided flow path is
    returned to the pump to be recirculated therethrough.


CLS 417/371
TXT Apparatus under subclass 366 in which the pump fluid is directed to the
    motor or part thereof upstream of and prior to engagement with the pumping
    member of the pump.


CLS 417/372
TXT Apparatus under subclass 321 in which both the pump and motor are cooled or
    lubricated by a common or interrelated cooling or lubrication means.

    (1)     Note.  The interrelated cooling means may include (1) a fan, or
    equivalent devices, which force cooling fluid over the pump and motor or
    (2) a cooling fluid which enters into heat exchange relation with separate
    fluid cooling circuits passing through the pump and motor.


CLS 417/373
TXT Apparatus under subclass 321 in which there is provided means which has as
    its particular function the prevention of heat transfer between the motor
    or part thereof and the pump or part thereof, or between motive fluid and
    pumped fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    366+,   for means providing for the cooling of the motor by the pumped
    fluid which serve the purpose of preventing transfer of heat between the
    pump and motor.

    372,    for motor driven pumps having interrelated cooling means which may
    serve the purpose of preventing the transfer of heat between the pump and
    motor.


CLS 417/374
TXT Apparatus under subclass 321 in which, in addition to the pump motor, there
    is provided secondary means adapted to impart driving energy to the pump,
    said secondary means comprising either (1) an element (e.g., handle, tool)
    which is adapted for selective manual operation at the will of a human
    operator, (2) a secondary motor for driving the pump which is of a
    basically different type, or (3) a mechanically driven element connected in
    driving relationship with the pump and receiving its driving energy from a
    source other than the working member of the pump motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323,    for an auxiliary motor for driving the pump, said motor receiving
    its driving energy from the pump fluid.

    335,    for a fluid current motor driven pump with alternative drive means.


CLS 417/375
TXT Apparatus under subclass 321 in which the motor is of the type which
    includes a movable working member (e.g., piston, turbine runner, diaphragm,
    etc.) which is motivated by a fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329,    for motors of the type which are motivated by the simple force of
    weight of a fluent material.

    364,    for fluid motors of the type which are motivated by the burning of
    a combustible mixture within an expansible chamber of the motor (i.e.,
    internal combustion engine).


CLS 417/376
TXT Apparatus under subclass 375 in which the fluid utilized for motivation of
    the fluid motor working member is steam, the steam, after having acted upon
    the motor working member, being directed into the pump or pump fluid flow
    line so as to commingle with the pump fluid.


CLS 417/377
TXT Apparatus under subclass 375 in which the fluid motor is of the expansible
    chamber or pulsator or fluid link type, the motor working member thereof
    driving a pumping member which cooperates with a pumping chamber to cause
    alternate expansion and contraction thereof to pump fluid therefrom, the
    fluid expelled from said pumping chamber flowing serially therefrom through
    the expansible motor working chamber or the pulsator or fluid link chamber.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of pulsator or fluid link see this class,
    subclass 383.


CLS 417/378
TXT Apparatus under subclass 377 in which the fluid motor is of the pulsator or
    fluid link type.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of a pulsator or fluid link see this
    class, subclass 383.


CLS 417/379
TXT Apparatus under subclass 375 in which there is provided significantly
    claimed motive fluid generating apparatus (e.g., pump boiler, etc.) for
    either (1) increasing the pressure or velocity of a fluid which is used to
    motivate the fluid motor or (2) decreasing the pressure of a fluid which is
    withdrawn from the fluid motor to allow atmospheric or ambient pressure
    fluid to cause motivation of the fluid motor.


CLS 417/380
TXT Apparatus under subclass 379 in which the motive fluid generating apparatus
    comprises an internal combustion engine which is motivated by a combustible
    mixture, the combustible mixture or a component thereof being additionally
    used, either prior to, during, or after combustion, as the source of
    motivating fluid for the fluid motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    364,    for an internal combustion engine which mechanically drives a pump.

    381,    for a pump motor driven by combustion products in which the
    combustion products generator is other than an internal combustion engine.


CLS 417/381
TXT Apparatus under subclass 379 in which the fluid which drives the fluid
    motor is the product of a combustion process and the means to form the
    combustion products is claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    380,    for a pump motor driven by combustion products in which the
    combustion products generator is an internal combustion engine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 39.01+ for the combination of a pump
    feeding to a combustion products generator, the combustion products driving
    a motor to drive the pump, the pump providing only the fluid utilized in
    the combustion products generator; and subclasses 226.1+ for reaction
    motors in which a pump is provided to supply air to a combustion products
    generator and additionally supply air for use in an air jet.


CLS 417/382
TXT Apparatus under subclass 379 including a plurality of pumping members which
    pump fluid for external use, one of said pumping members also additionally
    supplying motive fluid for a fluid motor which drives another pumping
    member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    245,    for serially arranged pump units in which the fluid output of one
    of the units provides motive fluid for a fluid motor driving another of the
    units.


CLS 417/383
TXT Apparatus under subclass 379 in which the means for increasing the pressure
    of the motive fluid comprises an enclosed chamber containing the motive
    fluid (i.e., pulsator fluid) the boundaries of said chamber being formed in
    part by a movable driving member (e.g., pulse pump piston) and the fluid
    motor working member (e.g., piston), said fluid being in a state of total
    confinement within the boundaries of said chamber during at least a portion
    of driving member movement, whereby movement of the driving member in one
    direction causes displacement of said fluid so as to transmit energy from
    the driving member through the medium of said fluid to said fluid motor
    working member, and at least a portion of said fluid returning from whence
    it came upon movement of the driven member in the opposite direction.

    (1)     Note.  A manually operated driving member is included under this
    definition.


CLS 417/384
TXT Apparatus under subclass 383 in which at least a portion of the confined
    fluid is compressible (e.g., air).

    (1)     Note.  Those devices in which only a portion of the confined fluid
    is compressible and the other portion is incompressible are included under
    this definition.


CLS 417/385
TXT Apparatus under subclass 383 in which means is provided to supply
    additional fluid to or exhaust fluid from the fluid confining chamber.

    (1)     Note.  Means for merely prefilling the chamber with fluid prior to
    operation of the device or means for emptying the chamber during inactivity
    are not included under this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    378,    for pulsator devices in which the pumped fluid flows serially
    through the pulsator fluid containing chamber. Such devices necessarily
    include means for allowing fluid flow to and from the pulsator chamber and
    have not been cross-referenced into this subclass or those indented
    hereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 543 for a self-cycling pulsator, per se, or
    driving a merely nominal load that has self-operated pulse fluid purge and
    quantity adjusting structure.


CLS 417/386
TXT Apparatus under subclass 385 in which the means for supplying or exhausting
    fluid is made effective in response to the attainment of a predetermined
    position by the fluid motor working member.


CLS 417/387
TXT Apparatus under subclass 385 in which the means for supplying or exhausting
    fluid is made effective in response to the attainment of a predetermined
    position by the driving member.


CLS 417/388
TXT Apparatus under subclass 385 in which the means for supplying or venting
    fluid is made effective in response to the existing pressure of the
    confined fluid.


CLS 417/389
TXT Apparatus under subclass 383 in which both the movable driving member and
    the fluid motor working member are fabricated of either (1) flexible
    material or (2) rigid members hinged or interfitted together so that the
    members are movable relative to each other; the flexing of the material or
    relative movement of the rigid members of the driven member serving to
    cause flexing of the material or relative movement of the rigid members of
    the fluid motor working members.


CLS 417/390
TXT Apparatus under subclass 379 in which the motive fluid generating apparatus
    comprises a fluid pump (e.g., centrifugal, expansible chamber, axial flow,
    etc.).


CLS 417/391
TXT Apparatus under subclass 375 in which the pump is of the type having an
    expansible pumping chamber, the exhaust motive fluid from the fluid motor
    being directed into the pumping chamber or into the pump fluid before the
    pump fluid enters the expansible pumping chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    377,    for a fluid motor driven pump in which the fluid discharged by the
    pump flows through the motor working chamber.


CLS 417/392
TXT Apparatus under subclass 375 in which there is provided a movable wall
    member which forms both the motor working member and the pumping member,
    said member comprising either (1) a piston which reciprocates within a
    single continuous working chamber of uniform internal cross-sectional
    dimensions to divide same into motor and pump chamber portions or, (2) a
    deformable or collapsible member (e.g., diaphragm, bellows, etc.) which has
    a portion thereof secured to a single continuous working chamber to divide
    same into motor and pump chamber portions; whereby, application of motive
    fluid to said motor chamber portion causes movement of said member for
    expanding said motor chamber portion and simultaneously contracting said
    pump chamber portion.

    (1)     Note.  Plural members with substantially identical external
    cross-sectional dimensions and which are in face-to-face contact or spaced
    with an interposed rigid element to form in effect a single unitary motor
    working and pumping member are included under this definition.  However,
    plural members which are spaced solely by a body of fluid enclosed
    therebetween which serves to transmit movement of one of the members to
    another form pulsator or fluid link devices and are excluded under this
    definition, such devices being classified in subclasses 383+, above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56+,    for drilled well-type pumps having a free piston common to both a
    pump and motor chamber.

    383+,   for pulsator apparatus comprising a movable wall separating a pump
    chamber from a motive fluid (i.e., pulsator fluid) chamber.


CLS 417/393
TXT Apparatus under subclass 392 in which the movable chamber dividing member
    is rigidly secured to a second movable chamber dividing member which
    separates a second single continuous chamber into a single motor and pump
    chamber portions.


CLS 417/394
TXT Apparatus under subclass 392 in which the movable member is deformable and
    comprises either a wall portion formed of flexible material or rigid
    members hinged or interfitted together so that the members are movable
    relative to each other; the flexing of the material or the relative
    movement of the members constituting the movement which effects the work
    function of the expansible pump and motor chambers.


CLS 417/395
TXT Apparatus under subclass 394 in which the deformable member comprises a
    relatively thin membrane like element having a peripheral edge portion,
    said member being adapted to be associated with a surrounding or
    encompassing tubular rigid chamber forming means and extending transversely
    thereof to form a separating wall for dividing said chamber into respective
    motor and pump chambers, the outer peripheral edge of said membrane being
    in sealing relationship with the encompassing wall of said tubular
    structure.

    (1)     Note.  The membrane like member need not span the entire space
    within the encompassing wall of the tubular member, but may be in the form
    of a ring or frustum having the inner peripheral edge thereon in sealing
    engagement with a rigid element movable relative to and coaxial with the
    encompassing tubular member.


CLS 417/396
TXT Apparatus under subclass 375 in which the pump has a movable pumping member
    which is driven by plural fluid motor working members, said working and
    pumping members having an alternate to-and-fro motion along a common
    longitudinal axis of reciprocation, the pumping member being located
    between said motor working members and connected thereto in a manner such
    that all of said members move in unison during the normal mode of operation
    (includes flexible wall type motors and pumps).

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus in which the fluid motor working members comprise
    movable pistons and the pumping member comprises a moving cylinder, or vice
    versa, is excluded under this definition; see subclass 400, below, for
    subject matter of this type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    393,    for plural unitarily movable common pump and motor working members
    of the type in which the pumping faces of the device are positioned
    intermediate the motor working faces.


CLS 417/397
TXT Apparatus under subclass 375 in which the fluid motor has a movable working
    member for driving plural pumping members, said working and pumping members
    having an alternate to-and-fro motion along a common longitudinal axis of
    reciprocation, the motor working member being located between said pumping
    members and drivingly connected thereto in a manner such that all of said
    members move in unison during the normal mode of operation; (includes
    flexible wall type motors and pumps).

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus in which the fluid motor working member comprises
    a movable piston and the pumping members comprise movable cylinders, or
    vice versa, is excluded under this definition; see subclass 400, below, for
    subject matter of this type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    393,    for plural unitarily movable common pump and motor working members
    of the type in which the motor working faces of the device are positioned
    intermediate the pumping faces.


CLS 417/398
TXT Apparatus under subclass 375 in which the fluid motor is of the type
    comprising a cylinder and a piston, one of which is the movable motor
    working member and cooperates with the other to form an expansible motive
    fluid working chamber, said working member partaking of an alternate
    to-and-fro motion in a straight line.


CLS 417/399
TXT Apparatus under subclass 398 in which the fluid motor drives a pump of the
    type comprising a cylinder and a piston, one of which is a movable pumping
    member and cooperates with the other to form an expansible pumping chamber,
    said pumping member partaking of an alternate to-and-fro motion in a
    straight line.


CLS 417/400
TXT Apparatus under subclass 399 in which (1) the motor piston is the movable
    motor working member and is drivingly connected to the pump cylinder which
    is the movable pumping member, or (2) the motor cylinder is the movable
    motor working member and is drivingly connected to the pump piston which is
    the movable pumping member.


CLS 417/401
TXT Apparatus under subclass 399 in which the motor piston is the movable motor
    working member and the pump piston is the movable pumping member, said
    motor piston being drivingly connected to the pump piston in a manner such
    that both of said pistons move together in unison during the normal mode of
    operation.

    (1)     Note.  Included under this definition are those devices in which
    there is provided a valved pump piston and the motor working member is
    connected to the pump piston valve to actuate same and to drive the pump
    piston through a lost motion connection.


CLS 417/402
TXT Apparatus under subclass 401 in which there is provided means (e.g.,
    spring) for continuously applying a force to the pump piston or part
    connected thereto for continuously urging the pump piston in a direction to
    contract the pumping chamber.

    (1)     Note.  The means for applying the continuous force may be a double
    acting differential area fluid motor in which fluid pressure is constantly
    applied to one piston working face.

    (2)     Note.  To be included under this definition the bias means must be
    other than a mere weight.


CLS 417/403
TXT Apparatus under subclass 401 in which the motor piston cooperates with a
    single continuous motor cylinder to divide same into a pair of opposed
    expansible working chambers, there being means provided for controlling the
    supply or exhaust of motive fluid to or from each of said opposed working
    chambers to drive the motor piston in opposite directions.


CLS 417/404
TXT Apparatus under subclass 403 in which the pump piston cooperates with a
    single continuous pump cylinder to divide same into a pair of opposed
    expansible pumping chambers, movement of said pump piston in opposite
    directions serving to alternately expand and contract said opposed pumping
    chambers, there being provided means for controlling the inlet or discharge
    of pumped fluid to each of said chambers which is not of the type which
    controls serial flow of pumped fluid from one chamber to the other.


CLS 417/405
TXT Apparatus under subclass 375 in which the movable working member partakes
    of a unidirectional rotary motion about a fixed axis.

    (1)     Note.  The fluid motor under this definition may be of the rotary
    expansible chamber type as provided for in Class 418, Rotary Expansible
    Chamber Devices, or of the kinetic type as provided for in Class 415,
    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps.


CLS 417/406
TXT Apparatus under subclass 405 in which the rotary motor working member is
    directly connected to or integral with a rotary pumping member such that
    the working member rotates the pumping member in unison therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    348,    for a fluid motor driven pump having a rotor, at least one portion
    of the rotor during different segments of a revolution thereof serving
    alternately as both a pumping member and a fluid motor working member.


CLS 417/407
TXT Apparatus under subclass 406 in which the pump and motor rotors are
    connected together by a shaft there being provided a central bearing means
    intermediate the rotors for supporting the shaft, there being no support
    means for the shaft outboard of either of the rotors; i.e., the shaft is
    cantilevered or overhung from both ends of the central bearing to carry the
    pump and motor rotors.


CLS 417/408
TXT Apparatus under subclass 406 in which the direction of flow of motive fluid
    through the motor rotor is substantially parallel to the axis of rotation
    while the fluid is acting on the rotor to produce work and the direction of
    flow of pump fluid through the rotary pumping member is also substantially
    parallel to the axis of rotation while being acted upon by the pumping
    member.


CLS 417/409
TXT Apparatus under subclass 406 in which the direction of flow of motive fluid
    through the motor rotor is substantially parallel to the axis of rotation
    while the fluid is acting on the rotor to produce work; the rotary pumping
    member producing a rotary movement of the pump fluid to utilize the
    centrifugal force developed thereby to effect the pumping action.


CLS 417/410.1
TXT Electric or magnetic motor:

    Apparatus under subclass 321 in which the motor is of the type which
    includes a movable working member (e.g., armature) which is motivated by
    electricity or a magnetic field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322,    for a pump having a chamber which is expanded or contracted by a
    magneto-strictive action.

    353+,   for electric motor driven pumps in which the armature of the motor
    is within a rotary pumping member.


CLS 417/410.2
TXT Having piezoelectric driven blade:

    Apparatus under subclass 410.1 wherein a pumping member includes a flat and
    thin, flexible member which is motivated to provide the pumping action by
    attaching to the flexible member a crystalline substance, and a mechanical
    stress is produced by subjecting the crystalline substance to an electrical
    voltage.

    (1)     Note.  The blade for this subclass is cantilevered.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    413.2,  for piezoelectric driven diaphragm.


CLS 417/410.3
TXT Rotary expansible chamber pump:

    Apparatus under subclass 410.1 wherein a pumping member is turning in a
    single direction about a fixed or movable axis thereby increasing and
    decreasing volume of an enclosed space which is adapted to receive and
    discharge a fluid.


CLS 417/410.4
TXT Interengaging rotary pumping members:

    Apparatus under subclass 410.3 wherein a plurality of pumping members
    rotating about fixed axes have surface portions disposed to maintain a line
    contact therebetween against which pressure fluid reacts to thereby form a
    boundary of the enclosed space.

    (1)     Note.  Interengaging rotary members include gears, helical screws,
    gerotors, etc.


CLS 417/410.5
TXT Helical pumping member having planetary movement (e.g., scroll):

    Apparatus under subclass 410.3 wherein the pumping member includes
    continuous working portions in the form of a spiral lying in the same plane
    and having increasing radius, and has circular translatory or oscillatory
    movement without rotation about its axis while the axis moves in an orbit.


CLS 417/411
TXT Apparatus under subclasses 410.1+ having means for storing electrical
    energy (e.g., battery, etc.), or for generating electrical power for use by
    the electric motor which drives the pump.


CLS 417/412
TXT Apparatus under subclasses 410.1+ in which the electric motor drives a pump
    of the type having an expansible and contractible pumping chamber, at least
    a portion of said pumping chamber being defined by a deformable wall which
    is formed either of flexible material or rigid members hinged or
    interfitted together so that the members are movable relative to each
    other; the flexing of the material or the relative movement of the members
    constituting the movement which effects the pumping function of the
    expansible and contractible chamber.


CLS 417/413.1
TXT Diaphragm type:

    Apparatus under subclass 412 in which the deformable wall comprises a
    relatively thin membranelike member having a peripheral edge portion, said
    member being adapted to be associated with a surrounding or encompassing
    tubular rigid structure to extend transversely thereof to form a closing
    wall for said tubular structure, the outer peripheral edge of said membrane
    being in sealing relationship with the encompassing wall of said tubular
    structure.

    (1)     Note.  The membranelike member need not span the entire space
    within the encompassing wall of the tubular member, but may be in the form
    of a ring or frustum having the inner peripheral edge thereof in sealing
    engagement with a rigid element movable relative to and coaxial with the
    encompassing tubular member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    381,    for a fluid motor driven pump in which a common diaphragm forms
    both the pumping member and motor working member.


CLS 417/413.2
TXT Piezoelectric driven:

    Apparatus under subclass 413.1 wherein the membranelike member is motivated
    to provide a pumping action by attaching to the membrane a crystalline
    substance, and a mechanical stress is produced by subjecting the
    crystalline substance to an electrical voltage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322,    for working chamber of the pump made directly from a material that
    expands and contracts when subjected to an electric or a magnetic force.

    410.2,  for piezoelectric driven blade.


CLS 417/413.3
TXT Of semiconductor material (e.g., silicon, germanium, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 413.1 wherein the membranelike member is made of a
    solid crystalline substance (e.g., silicon or germanium) that has an
    electrical conductivity greater than an insulator but less than a good
    conductor.

    (1)     Note.  The membrane is constructed from the material used in an
    electric printed circuit and produced by using the same technique (e.g.,
    etching, etc.) as used to produce the printed circuit.


CLS 417/414
TXT Apparatus under subclasses 410.1+ in which the motor has a sealed housing,
    means being provided to cause the internal pressure in said housing or some
    part thereof to be the same as or bear some selected relationship to the
    ambient pressure on the exterior of the housing.

    (1)     Note.  The "ambient" pressure on the exterior of the housing may be
    pump intake or discharge pressure.


CLS 417/415
TXT Apparatus under subclasses 410.1+ in which the pump is of the type
    comprising a rigid pumping member which alternately moves to-and-fro
    (includes oscillatory movement).


CLS 417/416
TXT Apparatus under subclass 415 wherein the working member of the electric
    motor alternately moves to-and-fro (includes oscillatory movement).

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus in which the electric motor armature or core is
    merely claimed by name as a pump plunger or piston is not sufficient to
    cause classification in this or indented subclasses.  However, the recital
    of a separate piston connected to the armature or any additional pump
    structure such as inlet or outlet ports will cause classification herein.


CLS 417/417
TXT Apparatus under subclass 416 wherein the working member of the pump and the
    working member of the motor are either formed as a single element or
    rigidly interconnected for unitary movement.


CLS 417/418
TXT Apparatus under subclass 417 in which the rigid pumping member is provided
    with a pair of oppositely directed pumping faces, said pumping member
    cooperating with a single pump cylinder to divide same into a pair of
    opposed expansible pumping chambers or with plural pump cylinders to form
    plural plural expansible pumping chamber; reciprocation of said pumping
    member in one stroke direction serving to expand one pump chamber and
    simultaneously contract another


CLS 417/419
TXT Apparatus under subclass 415 in which the pump comprises a plurality of
    rigid pumping members which move or are capable of moving relative to one
    another incident to the operation of the pump.


CLS 417/420
TXT Apparatus under subclasses 410.1+ in which there is provided a rotary
    magnetic driving element and a rotary magnetic driven element formed by or
    connected to the pumping member, the power being transmitted from the
    driving to the driven element by the magnetic attraction therebetween.


CLS 417/421
TXT Apparatus under subclasses 410.1+ in which the electric driving motor is
    sealed from the pump fluid by means of air trapped inside the motor casing,
    such as in a diving bell.


CLS 417/422
TXT Apparatus under subclasses 410.1+ in which a sealed, tubular means is
    connected to or formed integrally in a cover or casing enclosing the
    electric motor; the said means forming or containing a service conductor
    (e.g., electric conduit, lubricant conductor, etc.).


CLS 417/423.1
TXT Apparatus under subclasses 410.1+ in which the working members of both the
    pump and the motor perform their work by means of a unidirectional rotary
    motion; the pump working member acting to pump fluid by a centrifugal,
    centripetal or screw effect, i.e., not by positive displacement of the
    fluid by an expansible chamber effect.


CLS 417/423.11
TXT Apparatus under subclass 423.1 wherein there is provided a sealing means to
    prevent pumped fluid from leaving the pumping chamber and entering the
    motor chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 358+ for a relatively rotatable radially extending
    sealing face member (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.), subclasses 409+ for a
    dynamic close proximity seal (e.g., contactless, fluent, etc.) or
    subclasses 500+ for a dynamic circumferential contact seal for other than a
    piston.


CLS 417/423.12
TXT Apparatus under subclass 423.1 wherein there are provided a bearing to
    support the shaft of the motor or pump.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, for specific structure of bearings which can be of
    general use.


CLS 417/423.13
TXT Apparatus under subclass 423.12 wherein there is provided means to provide
    a fluid which is not the pumped fluid to reduce the friction in the bearing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    366,    for a means which provides pumped fluid to lubricate the bearing.


CLS 417/423.14
TXT Apparatus under subclass 423.1 wherein there is provided specific structure
    of the housing for the pump or motor.


CLS 417/423.15
TXT Apparatus under subclass 423.1 wherein there is provided a means to
    position and hold the pump and motor combination in its working environment.


CLS 417/423.2
TXT Apparatus under subclass 423.1 wherein the pump is specifically adapted to
    create a suction to clean a surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 300.1+ for a
    suction cleaner having means to contact the surface to be cleaned.


CLS 417/423.3
TXT Apparatus under subclass 423.1 wherein the pump and motor are constructed
    to operate when completely surrounded by the fluid to be pumped.


CLS 417/423.4
TXT Apparatus under subclass 423.1 wherein the pump has rapidly rotating fins
    to impart a high momentum to gas molecules to achieve a high vacuum.


CLS 417/423.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 423.1 wherein there is more than one pump and
    motor combination used together.


CLS 417/423.6
TXT Apparatus under subclass 423.1 wherein the motor shaft and pump shaft are
    not directly connected and there is a means to transmit the power from the
    motor shaft to the pump shaft which is not an elastomeric endless belt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    362,    for a pump and motor interconnected by and endless flexible
    transmission element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, for gearing and transmissions, per se.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclass 170 for an
    impeller with specific drive or transmission means.


CLS 417/423.7
TXT Apparatus under subclass 423.1 wherein there is provided specific details
    to the motor such as the armature, rotor windings, circuits, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    353+,   for an electric motor armature within a rotary nonexpansible
    chamber-type pumping member.

    356,    for a rotary nonexpansible chamber- type pumping member within an
    electric motor armature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, for electric motors with no
    significantly claimed pump.  See 417/321 for example of significantly
    claimed pump structure.


CLS 417/423.8
TXT Apparatus under subclass 423.1 wherein there is provided cooling means
    using fluid other than the pumped fluid in cool the pump or motor, or for
    materials surrounding the pump or motor to conduct the heat away from the
    pump or motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    366,    for a means to cool the motor using the fluid being pumped.


CLS 417/423.9
TXT Apparatus under subclass 423.1 wherein means are provided to block the
    entrance of foreign matter to the pump chamber or means to separate foreign
    material from the pumped fluid.


CLS 417/424.1
TXT Apparatus under subclass 423.1 in which the pump and motor unit is provided
    with support means such that when the unit is supported in operational
    position to perform the pumping function the rotation axis of the pump and
    motor is disposed vertically.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    421,    for a vertically disposed rotary motor pump unit in which the motor
    is sealed from a pumped fluid by means of a body or air trapped in the
    motor housing.


CLS 417/424.2
TXT Apparatus under subclass 424.1 wherein the pump is disposed above the motor.


CLS 417/425
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a plurality of separate
    pumping units each having a pumping member or a plurality of pumping
    members operable in a single pumping chamber one of said pumping members
    being operated by power means such as a motor or driven shaft and another
    of the pumping members being designed to be operated manually by an
    operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    374,    for a pump which is alternatively motor or manually actuated.


CLS 417/426
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a plurality of pumping
    units and control means to change the operating characteristics of one
    relative to another.

    (1)     Note.  To be considered plural pumping units under this definition
    each unit must operate in or comprise a pumping chamber separate and
    distinct from the pumping chamber of another unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5+,     for plural pumps with a common inflow or outflow path and means to
    control the drive means for said pumps individually in response to a sensed
    condition in the common inflow or outflow line.

    62,     for a plurality of pumps which may act alternatively in series flow
    or parallel flow relationship.

    250     and 251+, for multistage pumps with an interstage intake or
    discharge, respectively.

    286+,   for plural pumps with individual condition responsive control of at
    least one.


CLS 417/427
TXT Apparatus under subclass 426 in which at least one of the pumping units has
    a cycle of operation and a valve (distributor) which operates in a given
    manner or pattern in accordance with the cycle of operation and the control
    means is effective to modify or disable the pattern of operation of the
    valve.


CLS 417/428
TXT Apparatus under subclass 426 in which at least one of the pumps has means
    to bypass fluid from or around the pump to waste or back to supply and the
    control means is effective to control said bypass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    288,    for plural pumps or chambers with condition responsive control of
    sequential operation of separate bypass or relief passages for the pumps or
    chambers.


CLS 417/429
TXT Apparatus under subclass 426 in which the pumping units are driven by a
    single common drive member (e.g., shaft) and the control means is effective
    to change the relationship of at least one of the pumps with respect to the
    drive member.

    (1)     Note.  The change in relationship of the pump to the drive member
    may be disconnection therefrom.


CLS 417/430
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means for contact with or by
    the pump fluid effective to impart a continual motion to the pump fluid in
    a manner or direction other than that which is necessary to effect pumping
    of said fluid to cause solid material to remain suspended in, or become
    entrained with said pump fluid.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this subclass the means must be
    clearly disclosed as having an agitating or whirling function.  A mere
    projection on or configuration of a piston or a cylinder which would
    incidentally agitate or whirl the pump fluid is not classified in this
    subclass unless such projection or configuration is specifically disclosed
    to perform such function.

    (2)     Note.  Included under this definition are devices of the type
    having an expansible and contractible chamber other than that necessary to
    effect pumping into which pump fluid is drawn and subsequently expelled for
    the disclosed purpose of agitating the pump fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 173 for a piston having a
    rotation imparting fluid impinging surface thereon.


CLS 417/431
TXT Apparatus under subclass 430 in which said means comprises a fluid other
    than the pump fluid which is applied to or injected into the pump fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    432+,   for means to apply a separate fluid to a pump valve.


CLS 417/432
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the pump is provided with a
    valve to control the pump fluid and including means to apply or direct a
    fluid other than the pump fluid to some portion of the valve.

    (1)     Note.  The fluid may be applied to the valve for various purposes
    such as lubricating, sealing, cooling, flushing, etc.  However, a separate
    fluid applied to a pump valve portion for the sole purpose of actuating the
    valve is excluded under this definition.  See subclass 507, below, for such
    subject matter.

    (2)     Note.  The pre-filling of a chamber containing a valve to form a
    liquid seal for the valve is considered to be means to apply a fluid to the
    valve under this definition.

    (3)     Note.  A separate fluid which is injected in or entrained by the
    pump fluid upstream of the valve so as to intermingle with the pump fluid
    before contact with the valve is excluded from this definition.


CLS 417/433
TXT Apparatus under subclass 432 in which the fluid pumped is a gas and a body
    of liquid is provided which contacts the valve and through which the pumped
    gas passes, the liquid acting to prevent gas leakage through the valve when
    closed.


CLS 417/434
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the pump fluid is liquid, the
    pump including a port or valve other than the ports or valves necessary to
    the normal operation of the pump, said port or valve being positioned in
    the pump chamber or pump fluid conduit to allow pump fluid therein to flow
    through said port or upon actuation of said valve to drain said pumping
    chamber or conduits.

    (1)     Note.  When the drain means comprises a valve, the valve may not be
    of the type which cyclically controls the discharge of pump fluid as a
    consequence of operation of the pump and must be disclosed as for the
    purpose of draining the pump after termination of the use thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    435,    for a separate port or noncyclic valve for venting or filling a
    pump portion.

    440+,   for a separate selectively controlled noncyclic valve for a purpose
    other than draining a pump portion.

    443+,   for a pressure responsive distributor opened in response to pumping
    member position.

    446,    for means for selectively holding a pressure responsive distributor
    open.

    447,    for a pressure responsive distributor which is constantly biased
    open.

    493+,   for a pumping member controlled inlet or outlet port including
    plural cyclically controlled inlet or outlet flow paths.

    503,    for multiple cyclic outlet paths.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 570 for a valve means for draining a pump
    tube. Class 417 takes a valve designed to drain a pump tube or chamber
    where the pump is claimed or when some structure peculiar to a pump is
    claimed.  The mere claiming of a pump barrel or cylinder does not preclude
    classification in Class 137.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 316+ for well structure having a valve means
    associated therewith and operable to drain a portion of the well structure.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 142+ for a fluid flow path
    combined with a means to control the flow of fluid through said flow path,
    particularly subclasses 149.1+ for a valve operated by joining the flow
    path sections together and subclasses 145+ for a valve for controlling a
    port in a pipe side where the flow path sections or the pipe constitute an
    inlet or discharge pipe of a pump.


CLS 417/435
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the pump fluid is liquid, the
    pump including port or valve other than the ports or valves necessary to
    the normal operation of pump, said port or valve being positioned in the
    pump chamber or pump fluid conduit to permit the escape of gases from the
    pump or conduit or to permit the filling of the pump or conduit with liquid
    for priming purposes.

    (1)     Note.  When the venting or filling means comprises a valve, the
    valve may not be of the type which cyclically controls the supply or
    discharge of pump fluid as a consequence of operation of the pump.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199.1+, for diverse pumps one of which may be a priming pump for another.

    425,    for plural pumping members one of which is power driven and one
    manually operated.

    434,    for a separate port or noncyclic valve for draining a pump chamber
    or conduit.

    440+,   for a separate selectively controlled noncyclic valve for a purpose
    other than venting or filling a pump portion.

    443+,   for a pressure responsive distributor opened in response to pumping
    member position.

    446,    for means for selectively holding a pressure responsive distributor
    open.

    447,    for a pressure responsive distributor which is continuously biased
    open.

    493+,   for a pumping member controlled inlet or outlet port including
    plural cyclically controlled inlet or outlet flow paths.

    502,    for multiple cyclic inlet paths.

    503,    for multiple cyclic outlet paths.


CLS 417/436
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which there is provided a fluid
    conduit and a separate impelling member for propelling fluid through the
    conduit, the impelling member having motion or a component of motion which
    is transverse to the direction of fluid flow in the conduit said transverse
    motion or component of motion being effective to propel or aid in the
    propulsion of the fluid through the conduit.


CLS 417/437
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a chamber having a wall
    portion or pumping member movable to effect a change in volume of said
    chamber and means to control the flow of pump fluid into or out of said
    chamber.

    (1)     Note.  The term distributor as used in the titles and definitions
    under this subclass is defined as a means which comprises or includes a
    part which is movable relative to the pumping member of an expansible
    chamber-type pump to control a pump fluid port or passage in such a manner
    as to cyclically control supply or discharge of pump fluid to or from the
    pump.

    (2)     Note.  Collected in this subclass are original copies of patents
    directed to expansible chamber-type pumps in which the means for
    controlling flow of pump fluid into or out of the pump chamber is
    selectively controlled by a human operator (e.g., manually operated valve,
    finger obturated port), it being necessary for the operator to operate said
    fluid control means during each complete cycle of expansion and contraction
    of the pump chamber to enable the pump to perform its pumping function.


CLS 417/438
TXT Apparatus under subclass 437 in which the fluid pumped is a gas and means
    are provided to introduce a liquid into the gas while it is in the pump
    chamber or prior to its introduction into the chamber for the purpose of
    cooling the gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    432+,   for the application of a separate fluid to a pump valve for
    lubricating, cooling, etc.


CLS 417/439
TXT Apparatus under subclass 437 in which the expansible chamber in addition to
    the normal inlet for pump fluid is provided with a connection to a space in
    the pump which does not form a part of the expansible chamber or the flow
    path of pump fluid to or from the chamber so as to draw fluid from said
    space.

    (1)     Note.  The space may be one which expands and contracts incident to
    the operation of the pump (e.g., crankcase on the nonpumping side of a
    piston) or a leakage collection area, etc.  The connection may be directly
    into the expansible chamber or may be to the pump fluid intake line
    upstream of the intake valve.


CLS 417/440
TXT Apparatus under subclass 437 provided with valve means other than that
    necessary for controlling inlet and discharge of pumped fluid to the pump
    chamber during normal operation of the pump, said valve means being
    operable to control the flow of pumped fluid to or from the pump chamber or
    conduit therefor.

    (1)     Note.  A valve positioned to permit the independent flow of fluid
    around the pump from the inlet of the pump to the pump discharge is
    included under this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    279+,   for a pump fluid control valve which is responsive to a pump
    condition.

    434,    for a separate port or valve for filling or draining a pump portion.


CLS 417/441
TXT Apparatus under subclass 440 in which said valve means is effective to
    control the pump fluid in the line of normal flow to or from the pump
    chamber, i.e., a throttle or stop valve in the flow line, not a valve which
    diverts the pump fluid flow from the normal course.


CLS 417/442
TXT Apparatus under subclass 437 in which a plurality of inlet or a plurality
    of outlet distributors are provided in a single chamber and means are
    provided for selectively disabling at least one of the plural distributors
    such that fluid may be supplied to or discharged from the chamber through
    different distributors at different times.

    (1)     Note.  The use of all the distributors in one mode of operation and
    less than all the distributors in another mode of operation is included in
    this subclass.


CLS 417/443
TXT Apparatus under subclass 437 in which the means for controlling pump fluid
    to or from the pump chamber includes valve means of the type which normally
    opens or closes responsive to a pressure differential between the pump
    chamber and an inlet or discharge conduit for cyclically controlling pump
    fluid for the pumping operation and including means operable as a result of
    the pumping member being moved to a given position in the pump chamber for
    moving said valve to open position irrespective of said pressure
    differential.

    (1)     Note.  A pressure responsive distributor which can be selectively
    opened only when the pumping member is at a given position in the pump
    chamber is included under this definition, e.g., a pressure responsive foot
    valve which is capable of being opened by relative rotation of a
    reciprocating pumping member when same is at the end of its reciprocatory
    stroke.


CLS 417/444
TXT Apparatus under subclass 443 in which the pressure responsive distributor
    which is moved to open position is located on or carried by a piston-type
    pumping member (includes diaphragm-type pumping member).


CLS 417/445
TXT Apparatus under subclass 444 in which the expansible chamber pump is
    additionally provided with valve means located within a fixed wall portion
    of the pump chamber forming means (e.g., cylinder), said valve means being
    of the type which normally opens or closes responsive to a pressure
    differential between the pump chamber and an inlet or discharge conduit for
    cyclically controlling pump fluid for the pumping operation and including
    means operable as a result of the pumping member being moved to a given
    position in the pump chamber for moving said valve to open position
    irrespective of said pressure differential.


CLS 417/446
TXT Apparatus under subclass 437 in which the means for controlling pump fluid
    to or from the pump chamber includes valve means of the type which normally
    opens or closes responsive to a pressure differential between the pump
    chamber and an inlet or discharge conduit for cyclically controlling pump
    fluid for the pumping operation and includes means for moving and holding
    said valve in open position irrespective of said pressure differential.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    297+,   for an expansible chamber pump having a cyclically operated valve
    in which the operation of said valve is modified responsive to a pump
    condition.

    443+,   for a pressure responsive distributor which is moved to open
    position responsive to pumping member position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 522+ for a direct response line
    condition responsive valve having external means for biasing valve open.


CLS 417/447
TXT Apparatus under subclass 437 in which the means for controlling pump fluid
    to or from the pump chamber includes valve means of the type which normally
    opens or closes responsive to a pressure differential between the pump
    chamber and an inlet or discharge conduit for cyclically controlling pump
    fluid for the pumping operation and including means other than the pump
    fluid (e.g., spring, weight, float, etc.), for continuously exerting a
    force on said valve in the valve opening direction.


CLS 417/448
TXT Apparatus under subclass 437 in which the pumping member is provided with
    an operating rod and the pump as a whole is mounted in a vertically
    disposed pipe or tube for conducting fluid and the pump and its mounting in
    the tube are so related that the whole pump is removable from the tube
    solely by manipulation of the operating rod.


CLS 417/449
TXT Apparatus under subclass 448 in which the pump is provided with a piston
    which is fixed with respect to the pipe or tube and is stationary during
    operation of the pump, but is so mounted as to be removed with the pump
    unit.


CLS 417/450
TXT Apparatus under subclass 448 in which the means for mounting the pump in
    the tube includes relatively movable parts for positively holding the pump
    against movement in the tube; the release of the pump being effected by the
    movement of one of the parts by the operating rod for the pumping member.


CLS 417/451
TXT Apparatus under subclass 437 in which there is a valve structure located in
    a stationary wall of the expansible chamber and there are means carried by
    the valve structure which cooperates with the pumping member, to permit the
    removal of the valve structure along with the pumping member from the
    expansible chamber.


CLS 417/452
TXT Apparatus under subclass 451 in which the means on the valve structure
    which cooperates with the pumping member comprises portions on both the
    valve structure and the pumping member that are normally unconnected and
    are movable into engagement with each other to effect the removal of the
    valve structure.


CLS 417/453
TXT Apparatus under subclass 452 in which the engageable portions are formed by
    interengaging helical screw threads.


CLS 417/454
TXT Apparatus under subclass 437 comprising means designed to facilitate the
    removal or replacement of a valve of the pump or to facilitate access to a
    valve of the pump for inspection or repair, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this definition are mere securing means for
    parts which would permit the removal or replacement of a valve or access
    thereto unless said securing means is disclosed as being specifically
    designed for said purpose.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    448+,   for a pump mounted in a vertical tubular flow conduit removable as
    a unit by driving rod manipulation.

    451+,   for a valve element mounted in a fixed chamber wall and selectively
    removable with the pumping member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 128 for expansible chamber
    devices having assembly or disassembly facilitating means.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 454.4 for removable, pump-type valve head
    and seat unit in which no pumping member is claimed.


CLS 417/455
TXT Apparatus under subclass 437 in which the means to control the pump fluid
    is a valve means, said valve means having parts which in addition to their
    relative movement for the valving function are relatively movable for a
    nonfluid flow controlling function.

    (1)     Note.  The valve parts are usually to reduce static friction or
    cause uniform wear of a valve element and its seat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 330+ and the search there noted, for
    valves, per se, having a similar function.


CLS 417/456
TXT Apparatus under subclass 437 including two or more distributors through
    which the pumped fluid must pass serially in the course of flowing to the
    pump chamber or from the pump chamber to the point of use, each distributor
    having a cyclically moved flow controlling element which is capable of or
    constrained to move relative to the flow controlling element of another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    502,    for multiple cyclic outlet paths from a single pump chamber
    including a cyclically controlled bypass valve downstream of the discharge
    distributor from the chamber.


CLS 417/457
TXT Apparatus under subclass 456 in which a part of the pump chamber wall which
    is traversed by the pumping member (i.e., cylinder or liner) has an
    absolute motion and forms or carries a part forming the movable element of
    at least one of said serially arranged distributors.


CLS 417/458
TXT Apparatus under subclass 456 in which said two or more serially arranged
    distributors are of the type which move to an open or closed position in
    response to a pressure differential in the pumping chamber and the inlet or
    discharge conduit.


CLS 417/459
TXT Apparatus under subclass 458 in which said two or more serially arranged
    pressure responsive distributors are both located within or carried by a
    piston type pumping member and serves to control fluid flow through a
    passage formed in the piston.

    (1)     Note.  For definition of structure necessary to form a valved
    piston, see subclass 545 definition and (1) Note thereunder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261,    for a piston having relatively movable serial distributors between
    stages of successive stage pumping units.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 512+ for plural direct responsive type
    valves.


CLS 417/460
TXT Apparatus under subclass 437 in which the expansible chamber pump comprises
    a cylinder having a piston (includes diaphragm) movable therein and in
    which incident to the operation of the pump, the cylinder has an absolute
    movement.

    (1)     Note.  Those pumps in which it involves an obvious matter of choice
    or reversal of parts whether the piston is stationary and the cylinder
    movable or vice versa will not be classified under this definition even if
    the claims identify the cylinder as the movable element.  However, where
    the claims set forth a specific power transmission element (e.g., crank)
    for moving the cylinder, classification under this definition results.

    (2)     Note.  An open ended cylindrical member or sleeve in which the
    piston reciprocates and which has an absolute sliding, rotary, or
    oscillating motion on its longitudinal axis is not considered to be a
    moving cylinder under this definition and is classified in subclass 509,
    below.  However, if the cylindrical member carries or has formed as a part
    thereof the end wall of the expansible chamber (i.e., abutment) it is
    considered to be a cylinder and is included under this definition even if
    the sole disclosed purpose of the sliding, rotating, or oscillatory
    movement is for valving pumped fluid.

    (3)     Note.  A cylinder which has an absolute reciprocating, rotary or
    oscillatory motion on an axis other than the longitudinal axis thereof is
    included under this definition even if the sole disclosed purpose of such
    motion is for the valving of pumped fluid and regardless of whether the
    cylinder forms a portion of the chamber end wall (e.g., the entire abutment
    surface for the pumped fluid may be provided by a stationary valve element).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    269,    for pumps having three or more cylinders arranged in parallel,
    radial, or conical relationship with a rotary transmission axis which
    cylinders may move incident to the operation of the pump.

    449,    for a pump mounted in a vertical tubular flow conduit removable as
    a unit by driving rod manipulation and having a fixed piston and moving
    cylinder.

    457,    for an expansible chamber-type pump having serially arranged
    distributors for controlling inlet or discharge of pump fluid wherein one
    of the distributors is formed in part by a moving cylinder having a port
    cooperating with a stationary ported member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 472+ for motors or
    pumps having three or more parallel or radially arranged cylinders which
    may move incident to operation of the motor or pump and subclasses 196+ for
    an expansible chamber-type motor or a device disclosed and claimed
    generically as a pump or motor which has a moving cylinder.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 117+ for cylinders mounted
    for movement incident to expansion or contraction of the expansible chamber.


CLS 417/461
TXT Apparatus under subclass 460 in which the cylinder has an absolute
    rotational or oscillatory motion about the longitudinal axis thereof (i.e.,
    the axis of reciprocation of a piston therein) during operation of the pump.


CLS 417/462
TXT Apparatus under subclass 460 in which the cylinder is mounted on a fixed
    supporting structure for movement relative thereto, during operation of the
    pump, in a circular path of more than 3600 in a single direction about an
    axis other than the longitudinal axis of the cylinder (i.e., other than the
    axis of reciprocation of a piston therein), said cylinder and the piston
    therein being mechanically interconnected in a manner which causes
    reciprocation of the piston relative to said cylinder upon rotation thereof.


CLS 417/463
TXT Apparatus under subclass 462 in which the relatively reciprocating piston
    has a second pumping chamber formed integral therewith, said second pumping
    chamber being provided with a relatively reciprocating piston.


CLS 417/464
TXT Apparatus under subclass 460 in which either the cylinder or piston therein
    is pivotally mounted relative to a fixed support and the other is driven by
    a mechanism (e.g., crank or lever) in a manner which necessitates alternate
    to-and-fro motion of less than 3600 of the cylinder about an axis formed by
    said pivotal mounting, said axis being obliquely disposed (i.e., not
    parallel or coincident) relative to the longitudinal axis of the cylinder
    (i.e., the axis of working member reciprocation).


CLS 417/465
TXT Apparatus under subclass 464 in which either (1) the cylinder or (2) the
    piston or member rigid therewith (e.g., piston rod) is provided with a pump
    chamber communicating passage which terminates exteriorly thereof, the
    terminal portion of said passage (i.e., port) being in sliding engagement
    with and movable relative to a stationary element having at least one port,
    said relative sliding movement serving to change the relative alignment of
    said passage terminal portion and said stationary port for controlling the
    flow of pumped fluid to or from the pump chamber.


CLS 417/466
TXT Apparatus under subclass 460 in which the cylinder has an absolute
    to-and-fro motion along a fixed axis and is provided with an external
    portion forming a chamber communicating port, said port forming portion
    being in sliding engagement with and movable relative to a stationary
    element having at least one port, movement of said cylinder relative to
    said stationary element serving to change the relative alignment of said
    ports for controlling the flow of pumped fluid to or from the pump chamber.


CLS 417/467
TXT Apparatus under subclass 460 comprising two or more cylinders, each of said
    cylinders having an absolute movement and capable of or constrained to move
    relative to each other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 66 for relatively movable
    working members comprising or disposed within movably mounted cylinders.


CLS 417/468
TXT Apparatus under subclass 460 in which the movable cylinder has either (1)
    an external surface or (2) a member rigidly secured externally thereof;
    said surface or member forming a piston type pumping member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258,    for successive stage pumps having a reciprocating cylinder with an
    integral piston or external pumping face.


CLS 417/469
TXT Apparatus under subclass 460 in which both the cylinder and the piston have
    an absolute rectilinear to-and-fro motion along the same fixed axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    466,    for a cylinder and piston which reciprocate on a common axis with
    the inlet or discharge of pump fluid being controlled by cooperating ports
    in the cylinder and a fixed member.


CLS 417/470
TXT Apparatus under subclass 437 in which the expansible chamber pump is
    disclosed as being utilized for the purpose of producing pressure below
    that of the surrounding medium (i.e., vacuum pump), the pumping member of
    which is driven in a chamber collapsing direction by means of an element
    (e.g., cam) which is unsecured to, and adapted for abutment with the
    pumping member or portion rigid therewith to drive same, there being
    provided separate means, other than the pumped fluid, (e.g., spring)
    associated with the pumping member for continuously urging said pumping
    member in a chamber expanding direction.

    (1)     Note.  For classification under this definition, the pump must be
    positively disclosed as being utilized for the purpose of producing a
    vacuum. Expansible chamber type pumps having the above defined relationship
    between the pumping member, abutment drive, and biasing means, but which
    are not disclosed for use in vacuum production are classified below on
    other features.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 129 for an expansible chamber
    device having an abutment connection between the working member thereof and
    a power transmission element.


CLS 417/471
TXT Apparatus under subclass 437 in which the expansible chamber-type pump is
    disclosed as being utilized for the purpose of producing pressure greater
    than atmospheric the pumping member of which is driven in a chamber
    expanding direction by means of an element (e.g., cam) which is unsecured
    to, and adapted for abutment with the pumping member or portion rigid
    therewith to drive same, there being provided separate means, other than
    the pumped fluid, (e.g., spring) associated with the pumping member for
    continuously urging said pumping member in a chamber collapsing direction.

    (1)     Note.  Expansible chamber-type pumps having the above defined
    relationship between the pumping member, abutment drive, and biasing means
    are excluded under this definition if disclosed as being utilized for the
    purpose of producing a vacuum, such pumps being classified below on other
    features.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 129 for an expansible chamber
    device having an abutment connection between the working member thereof and
    a power transmission element.


CLS 417/472
TXT Apparatus under subclass 437 in which the expansible pump chamber comprises
    a flexible structure which is capable of expanding to increase the
    volumetric capacity thereof, said structure comprising (1) a tube of
    flexible material having a circumferentially corrugated or pleated wall,
    (2) at least four plates, each plate having a central opening therein
    defining an edge inwardly of the outer peripheral edge thereof, said plates
    being arranged in superposed relation with adjacent plates secured along
    their inner and outer edges alternately or (3) a pair of rigid plate like
    members pivoted together along a portion of their peripheral edges, the
    remaining peripheral edge portion of said plates being joined together by a
    flexible member which is pleated in some position of relative pivotal
    movement of the plate like members.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 34+, for bellows-type
    expansible chamber devices, per se.


CLS 417/473
TXT Apparatus under subclass 472 comprising a plurality of separate pump
    chambers each including a separate bellows.

    (1)     Note.  The separate bellows may have a common wall.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 37 for plural bellows-type
    expansible chamber devices, per se.


CLS 417/474
TXT Apparatus under subclass 437 comprising a relatively long pumping chamber,
    said chamber having one of its walls formed of flexible material and means
    for collapsing said flexible wall either progressively or sequentially in a
    direction along the length of the chamber, the collapsing of said chamber
    wall serving to control the inlet of pump fluid to or the discharge of pump
    fluid from said chamber.

    (1)     Note.  A flexible chamber wall pump which is directly deformed by a
    rigid element having a planetating or nutating motion is excluded under
    this definition, such subject matter being classified in Class 418.  For
    the definition of planetary or nutating motion, see Class 418, subclasses
    49 and 54, respectively.  A roller mounted on a rotating arm is not
    considered to comprise planetary movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 56 for a nonmetallic
    working member having planetary movement, and subclasses 153+ for a rotary
    expansible chamber pump or motor having a resilient, nonmetallic working
    member.


CLS 417/475
TXT Apparatus under subclass 474 comprising two or more distinct isolated
    relatively long pumping chambers, each of said pump chambers having one of
    its walls formed of flexible material, and means for progressively or
    sequentially collapsing each of said flexible walls.

    (1)     Note.  A single elongated flexible wall member which is collapsed
    by plural engagement elements at spaced locations along its length to
    divide the chamber formed by said flexible wall into progressively formed
    chamber portions is not considered to constitute plural chambers under this
    definition.  Also, excluded under this definition, are devices in which a
    secondary pump chamber is provided which has the sole function of enhancing
    the operation of another collapsible wall chamber (e.g., vacuum producing
    pump for restoring the shape of a flexible wall pump after deformation
    thereof).


CLS 417/476
TXT Apparatus under subclass 474 in which the means for collapsing the flexible
    chamber wall comprises an element which either directly contacts said wall
    or an additional flexible material member interposed between the wall and
    said element, the collapsing element having a rolling or sliding engagement
    with the flexible wall or interposed flexible material member in performing
    the wall collapsing function.


CLS 417/477.1
TXT Plural spaced engagement member or member portions:

    Apparatus under subclass 476 in which there is provided two or more
    elements or two or more portions of a common element which directly contact
    the flexible wall or interposed flexible member for rolling or sliding
    engagement therewith at spaced locations thereon, each of said elements or
    element portions serving to collapse the flexible wall.



CLS 417/477.11
TXT Adjustable backing:

    Apparatus under subclass 477.9 wherein the position of the backing member
    of the flexible wall is changeable.

    (1)     Note.  The change of position of the backing member accommodates
    different sizes of the flexible wall, or controls the degree of closure of
    the flexible wall, or eases the insertion or removal of the flexible wall
    or interposed flexible  member.


CLS 417/477.12
TXT Specific flexible wall or interposed flexible member:

    Apparatus under subclass 477.1 wherein significance is attributed to a
    shape or material of the flexible wall or interposed flexible member.

    (1)     Note. The interposed flexible member may include a particular means
    associated with the flexible wall to reduce wear on the flexible wall by
    the rolling or sliding elements.



CLS 417/477.13
TXT Flexible tube without backing member:

    Apparatus under subclass 477.1 wherein the flexible member is a tube, and a
    portion of the tube which comes in contact with the rolling or sliding
    members does not have a backing member.



CLS 417/477.14
TXT Endless chain or belt:

    Apparatus under subclass 477.1 wherein the rolling or sliding members are
    secured to an endless chain or a belt and driven thereby.



CLS 417/477.2
TXT Cassette:

    Apparatus under subclass 477.1 wherein the flexible wall or interposed
    flexible member is contained in a housing; said housing is interchangeable
    with similar housings.

    (1)     Note.  At least one housing is placed in a base unit in order to be
    activated by a drive.



CLS 417/477.3
TXT Specific rollers or slides structure:

    Apparatus under subclass 477.1 wherein a significance is attributed to the
    rolling or sliding elements (e.g., a specified shape, a specified
    positional relation, or a specified material constituents).



CLS 417/477.4
TXT Helical slide:

    Apparatus under subclass 477.3 wherein the sliding element is in the shape
    of a helix.


CLS 417/477.5
TXT Roller axes or slide contact surfaces at significant angle with drive axis:

    Apparatus under subclass 477.3 wherein axes of rotation of the rolling
    elements or contact surfaces of the slide elements are positioned at an
    angle to the axis of a shaft or rotor which moves the rolling or sliding
    elements.

    (1)     Note.  The angle is between 30 degrees and 90 degrees.

    (2)     Note.  The rollers or the slides which merely return the flexible
    wall or interposed flexible member to undeformed shape are also included in
    this subclass.

    (1)     Note.  The biasing can be caused by means such as a spring or
    weight or fluid pressure.

    (3)     Note.  The axes of the rolling elements or the contact surfaces of
    the slide elements which have adjustable angles with respect to the axis of
    the shaft or rotor are included in this subclass.



CLS 417/477.6
TXT Positively driven rollers:

    Apparatus under subclass 477.3 wherein the rolling members are directly
    driven by a rotating drive means, such as shaft or gear for rotation.

    (1)     Note.  The drive means causes the rolling numbers to rotate even if
    the flexible members were removed.

    (2)     Note.  The arrangement can be similar to a sun gear driving
    planetary gears.



CLS 417/477.7
TXT Biased rollers or slides:

    Apparatus under subclass 477.3 wherein the rolling or sliding elements are
    biased to engage or to disengage the flexible wall or interposed flexible
    member.


    (1)     Note.  The biasing can be caused by means such as a spring or
    weight or fluid pressure.



CLS 417/477.8
TXT Adjustable rollers or slides:

    Apparatus under subclass 477.3 wherein the position of the rolling or
    sliding elements are changeable.

    (1)     Note.  The change of position of the rolling or sliding elements
    accommodate different sizes of the flexible wall or interposed flexible
    member, or vary wear on the elements, or vary an output of the pump, or
    ease insertion or removal of the flexible member.



CLS 417/477.9
TXT Specific backing member for flexible wall:

    Apparatus under subclass 477.1 wherein the significance is attributed to a
    particular shape or position or material of the backing member for the
    flexible wall.


CLS 417/478
TXT Apparatus under subclass 437 comprising an elongated hollow member having
    walls thereof formed of flexible material, said member having an inlet
    valve at one end thereof for controlling flow of fluid into said member and
    an outlet valve at the opposite end thereof for controlling the flow of
    fluid out of the member.


CLS 417/479
TXT Apparatus under subclass 437 in which the movable wall portion of said
    chamber is formed of flexible material and in which the means for
    controlling pumped fluid into or out of said chamber is formed in part
    (e.g., movable distributor portion or seat therefor) by an integral portion
    of said flexible material.


CLS 417/480
TXT Apparatus under subclass 437 in which a wall portion of the expansible
    chamber is fabricated of flexible material or rigid members hinged or
    interfitted together so that the members are movable relative to each
    other, the flexing of the material or the relative movement of the members
    constituting the movement which expands and contracts the chamber and the
    means for controlling flow into or out of said chamber being located on or
    supported by said wall portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    472+,   for bellows-type pumping members which may have valve means
    supported on a movable portion thereof.


CLS 417/481
TXT Apparatus under subclass 437 in which the wall portion is a rigid member
    and moves to-and-fro in an arcuate path of less than 3600.


CLS 417/482
TXT Apparatus under subclass 481 in which the means for controlling the inlet
    of fluid into the chamber comprises a distributor positioned in a
    stationary wall of the chamber which lies in the path of travel of the
    pumping member at the end of the stroke thereof.


CLS 417/483
TXT Apparatus under subclass 482 including means for controlling the discharge
    of fluid from the chamber, said means comprising a distributor positioned
    in the pumping member.


CLS 417/484
TXT Apparatus under subclass 481 in which the means for controlling the inlet
    of fluid into the chamber or exhaust of fluid from the chamber comprises a
    distributor positioned in the pumping member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    483,    for a discharge distributor in an oscillating pumping member
    combined with an inlet distributor in an abutment wall for the pumping
    member.


CLS 417/485
TXT Apparatus under subclass 437 comprising a single pump chamber having a
    reciprocating pumping member therein and a plurality discharge outlets
    communicating therewith, and control means for successively establishing
    communication with said plural outlets upon successive discharge strokes of
    said pumping member.


CLS 417/486
TXT Apparatus under subclass 437 in which a single pump chamber includes two or
    more pumping members.

    (1)     Note.  The plural pumping members may act upon the pump fluid
    within the single chamber either simultaneously, successively, or
    selectively.

    (2)     Note.  For purposes of this definition, the pump chamber is
    construed as including only that chamber volume formed downstream of valve
    means controlling inlet of pump fluid to the chamber and upstream of valve
    means controlling discharge pump fluid from the chamber.

    (3)     Note.  The plural pumping members under this definition may be
    laterally spaced, coaxial, or concentric and each must be disclosed as
    positively driven to act upon fluid within the pump chamber.  However, in
    the case of concentric pumping members, the pumping faces thereof must be
    either axially spaced or relatively movable, e.g., a pumping member having
    a sealing ring or separable drive rod portion forming a portion of the
    pumping face is considered to be a single pumping member and is excluded
    under this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215+,   for plural pumping members in a single chamber with condition
    responsive control of a drive transmission to change the phase relationship
    of the pumping members.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 6 for a working member having
    a selectively variable end face area, and subclasses 60+ for a resiliently
    biased nonworking member movable wall in constant communication with a
    working chamber.


CLS 417/487
TXT Apparatus under subclass 486 having at least two pumping members within
    said single chamber which are adapted for to-and-fro movement upon a common
    longitudinal axis.


CLS 417/488
TXT Apparatus under subclass 487 in which the pumping members form opposing
    walls of said chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 501 for three or more
    cylinders arranged in parallel, radial or conical relationship with a
    rotary transmission axis with oppositely moving pistons in each cylinder.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 69+ for an expansible
    chamber device having relatively movable working members interconnected
    with a common rotatable shaft and forming oppositely movable walls of a
    common chamber, and subclass 75, for working members forming oppositely
    movable walls of a common chamber.


CLS 417/489
TXT Apparatus under subclass 437 in which the expansible chamber pump comprises
    a cylinder having a relatively movable piston therein, admission or
    discharge of pumped fluid to or from the expansible chamber occurring as
    the result of the piston being either (1) tipped or canted relative to the
    cylinder to provide a fluid flow passage between adjacent cylinder and
    piston sidewall portions or (2) withdrawn or extracted from the cylinder so
    as to provide open communication between the cylinder interior and the
    surrounding medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    320,    for apparatus having a pumping member which moves unidirectionally
    into and out of a chamber to form serial pumping chambers.


CLS 417/490
TXT Apparatus under subclass 437 in which the supply or discharge of pump fluid
    to or from the pump chamber is by way of a port which is controlled by
    opening or closing same upon movement (reciprocatory or rotary) of the
    pumping member relative to the pump chamber; said port being either (1)
    formed in a pump chamber wall (e.g., cylinder) and opened or closed
    directly by the pumping member (e.g., piston) or element integral with or
    movably carried thereby or, (2) formed in the pumping member and opened or
    closed directly by a pump chamber wall or element integral with or movably
    carried thereby.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this definition, an element which is movably
    carried by the pumping member for controlling a chamber wall port may be
    movable relative to the pumping member but must move with the pumping
    member over at least a portion of the stroke thereof, the element itself
    serving to directly control a chamber wall port.  However, a valve element
    which is mounted in a chamber wall portion and which is shifted by abutment
    or frictional engagement with pumping member is not considered to be
    movably carried by the pumping member and is excluded under this
    definition.  See subclass 520.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    489,    for a pump having an inlet or discharge path controlled by
    withdrawal or tilting of the pump piston relative to the cylinder therefor.

    520,    see (1) Note above.


CLS 417/491
TXT Apparatus under subclass 490 comprising two or more pumping chambers and in
    which a single unitary element forms the pumping members for said chambers,
    said element being effective to control the inlet of fluid into or the
    discharge of fluid from the several chambers by either (1) alternately
    covering and uncovering a port in a wall of each of said chambers, or (2)
    alternately covering and uncovering a single port which is common to and
    placed in communication with each of said chambers at different positions
    of the pumping member stroke.

    (1)     Note.  For a definition of plural chambers see the definition and
    notes of subclass 521.


CLS 417/492
TXT Apparatus under subclass 491 in which the pumping member rotates about its
    longitudinal axis to effect the covering and uncovering of said port.


CLS 417/493
TXT Apparatus under subclass 490 comprising a single pump chamber having either
    (1) an inlet flow path for pump fluid and at least two outlet flow path
    which are different from each other and from said inlet flow path or (2) an
    outlet flow path for pump fluid and at least two inlet flow paths which are
    different from each other and from said outlet flow path; each of said two
    flow paths being cyclically controlled (i.e., controlled each time during a
    single pumping member movement cycle) at different times in the pump cycle
    and at least one of said two paths being controlled by a pumping member
    controlled part.

    (1)     Note.  The plural inlet or outlet flow paths may be supplied from
    the same or different sources or deliver to the same or separate
    destinations. Therefore, a bypass of pump fluid to waste or back to supply
    or a vent to atmosphere is considered to be a flow path under this
    definition.

    (2)     Note.  A passage to which pumped fluid is delivered or from which
    fluid is drawn into the pump is not considered to be an inlet or outlet
    under this definition if the fluid is delivered to or drawn from a portion
    of the pump assembly and is utilized for an ancillary purpose of the pump
    such as cooling or lubricating a pump part.

    (3)     Note.  The flow paths are considered to be different under this
    definition if the pump fluid flows through one path at one time and flows
    through the same path and additionally through another path at another time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    485,    for a plurality of pumping member controlled outlet ports which
    sequentially discharge fluid on successive strokes of the pumping member.


CLS 417/494
TXT Apparatus under subclass 493 including means which may be selectively moved
    and held in different positions to effect control of said pumping member
    controlled port at different times in the pumping member stroke.


CLS 417/495
TXT Apparatus under subclass 493 including a piston type pumping member
    provided with a fluid passage extending from the end face thereof through
    the opposite end of the piston or through a side wall portion thereof, said
    passage being provided with a relatively movable valve means to control the
    flow of fluid through said passage.


CLS 417/496
TXT Apparatus under subclass 490 in which in addition to the control of pump
    fluid by a pumping member controlled port there is a separate means to
    control the pump fluid in either the inlet or outlet flow path for the
    pump; i.e., the pump fluid is serially controlled by both means either
    going to or coming from the pump chamber.

    (1)     Note.  The separate means may be a second pumping member controlled
    port. The disclosed use of many of the devices in this subclass is that the
    pumping member closes and seals an inlet or discharge port when idle to
    prevent leakage.


CLS 417/497
TXT Apparatus under subclass 490 in which the port through which pump fluid
    flows to or from the pump chamber is formed in an end wall of the pump
    chamber (i.e., that portion of the pump chamber not traversed by the
    pumping member), the pumping member or element carried thereby being
    effective to intermittently obstruct fluid flow through said port by
    alternately entering into and exiting from or abuttingly seating on same.


CLS 417/498
TXT Apparatus under subclass 490 comprising one port for providing inlet of
    pump fluid to the pump chamber and another port for providing discharge of
    pump fluid therefrom, each of said ports being formed in a pump chamber
    sidewall portion and longitudinally spaced from each other, said ports
    individually providing the sole path for inlet and discharge of pump fluid
    and being controlled by the covering or uncovering thereof by the pumping
    member or element carried thereby.


CLS 417/499
TXT Apparatus under subclass 490 including means which may be selectively moved
    and held in different positions to effect opening or closing of such port
    at different positions of pumping member stroke.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    494,    for a pump chamber having plural controlled inlet or outlet flow
    paths, control of one of said paths being effected by a pumping member
    controlled port which has means associated therewith for effecting the
    control thereof at different positions of pumping member stroke.


CLS 417/500
TXT Apparatus under subclass 490 in which the working member rotates about its
    longitudinal axis during reciprocation thereof to effect the covering and
    uncovering of said port.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    492,    for an inlet or exhaust control for plural chambers comprising a
    common working member movable about an axis.


CLS 417/501
TXT Apparatus under subclass 490 including a distributor positioned in facing
    relationship with the pumping member end face, the area of the movable
    portion of the distributor or the movable portion of the valve which seats
    on the nonmovable portion of the valve being substantially the same as the
    area of the pumping member end face.


CLS 417/502
TXT Apparatus under subclass 437 comprising a single pump chamber having a
    plurality of outlet passages for pumped fluid, each of said outlet passages
    being individually, cyclically controlled and either (1) delivering to
    separate destinations, or (2) if delivering to a common destination, the
    control means having different modes of operation or operating at different
    times in the pump cycle.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this definition, cyclic control of the
    outlet passages is not limited to control which is effected during each
    stroke of a reciprocating pumping member and includes control which is
    effected after a predetermined number of strokes of the pumping member.

    (2)     Note.  A bypass of pumped fluid back to supply or to waste is
    considered to be an outlet under this definition including those in which
    the bypass is downstream of the cyclic outlet from the pump chamber.
    However, a passage through which pumped fluid is delivered to a portion of
    the pump assembly (e.g., bearing) and is utilized for an ancillary purpose
    of the pump such as cooling or lubricating of a pump such as cooling or
    lubricating of a pump part is not considered to be an outlet under this
    definition.

    (3)     Note.  A pump chamber having one outlet through a valve in a piston
    operating therein and another outlet through a valve not in the piston is
    intended to form subject matter under this definition, said valves being
    considered as having different modes of operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251+,   for successive stage pumps having a pump fluid discharge path
    intermediate of the pumping stages.

    493+,   for plural controlled inlet or outlet flow paths, the control of at
    least one of said paths being effected by a pumping member controlled port.


CLS 417/503
TXT Apparatus under subclass 437 comprising a single pump chamber having a
    plurality of inlet passages for pump fluid, each of said inlet passages
    being individually, cyclically controlled and either (1) supplied from
    different sources or (2) if supplied from a common source, the control
    means having different modes of operation or operating at different times
    in the pump cycle.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this definition, cyclic control of the inlet
    passages is not limited to control which is effected during each stroke of
    a reciprocating pumping member and includes control which is effected after
    a predetermined number of strokes of the pumping member.

    (2)     Note.  A passage from which fluid is drawn from a portion of the
    pump assembly (e.g., bearing) for enhancing the function of said assembly
    portion (e.g., cooling, sealing) is not considered to be an inlet under
    this definition, this subject matter forming the basis of subclass 439.

    (3)     Note.  A pump chamber having one inlet through a valve in a piston
    operating therein and another inlet through a valve not in the piston is
    intended to form subject matter under this definition, said valve being
    considered as having different modes of operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242,    for a cyclically controlled bypass between plural pump chambers
    which is in addition to the normal inlet flow paths to the chamber.

    250+,   for successive stage pumps having a pump fluid inlet intermediate
    of the pumping stages.

    493+,   for plural controlled inlet or outlet flow paths, the control of at
    least one of said flow paths being effected by a pumping member controlled
    port.


CLS 417/504
TXT Apparatus under subclass 437 including a plurality of outlet valves or a
    plurality of different outlet flow paths controlled by a single valve
    element for a single expansible chamber, said outlet valves or flow paths
    discharging to a common outlet line and being designed to open in response
    to different conditions in the expansible chamber.

    (1)     Note.  Ordinarily one of the valves is a distributor and another is
    one which opens only in response to excess pressure, e.g., when a slug of
    water accumulates in an air compressor.  The distributor may be pressure
    responsive or mechanically actuated.  In a mechanically actuated
    distributor the condition is the position of the pumping member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    307+,   for a pressure operated relief or bypass which vents fluid to waste
    or back to supply.

    502,    for an expansible chamber having multiple outlets which are each
    cyclically operated and operate under different conditions or discharge to
    different lines.


CLS 417/505
TXT Apparatus under subclass 437 in which the means for controlling the flow of
    fluid into or out of the chamber comprises valve means which is actuated by
    an electric current or a magnetic field.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 275 for a cyclically
    operable expansible chamber-type motor having an electrically or
    magnetically actuated distributor.


CLS 417/506
TXT Apparatus under subclass 437 in which the control means comprises a
    distributor, and in which the extent or movement of said distributor toward
    open or closed position or the relation of the movement of the valve with
    respect to the pumping member may be varied by means which may be
    selectively moved and held in different positions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    297+,   for condition responsive means to vary the operation of a
    distributor for an expansible chamber pump.

    427,    for a plurality of pumps including means to adjust the distributor
    movement of one or more of the pumps.

    524+,   for separate means to bias a pressure responsive distributor to
    open position.


CLS 417/507
TXT Apparatus under subclass 437 in which the means to control the flow of
    fluid into or out of the chamber comprises a distributor, said distributor
    being at least partially moved cyclically by a fluid reactive surface
    formed on the distributor, or formed on an element adapted to contact the
    distributor means.

    (1)     Note.  The reactive surface excludes the areas of the distributor
    means which are subjected to pump pressures as the working fluid is moved
    to and from the working chamber.


CLS 417/508
TXT Apparatus under subclass 507 in which in addition to the fluid reactive
    surface for moving the distributor there is also provided means to move
    said distributor which is interconnected with or abutted by the pumping
    member or a drive transmission element associated therewith in a manner
    which causes the distributor to be mechanically shifted upon movement of
    the pumping member or transmission element through a pumping operation
    cycle.


CLS 417/509
TXT Apparatus under subclass 437 in which a part of the pump chamber wall which
    is traversed by the pumping member is movable and forms or carries a part
    forming a portion of a distributor which controls inlet or discharge of
    pump fluid to or from the pump chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 276, and see the search
    notes therein, for cyclically operable expansible chamber motors in which
    the valve means is formed by a movable portion of the working chamber wall
    traversed by the working member.


CLS 417/510
TXT Apparatus under subclass 437 in which the means for controlling flow of
    pump fluid into or out of the pump chamber comprises a distributor which is
    interconnected with or adapted to be abutted by the pumping member or a
    drive transmission element associated therewith in a manner which causes
    said distributor to be mechanically shifted upon movement of the pumping
    member or transmission element through a pumping operation cycle.

    (1)     Note.  A moving cylinder having a port which cooperates with a
    stationary member for controlling the flow of pump fluid to or from the
    pump chamber is not considered to be a mechanically actuated distributor
    under this definition, such subject matter being classified in subclasses
    460+, above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    443+,   for means for actuating a pressure responsive distributor to an
    open position responsive to pumping member position.

    456,    for an expansible chamber pump having relatively movable serial
    distributors in which one of said distributors is of the mechanically
    actuated type.

    460+,   for a moving cylinder which cooperates with a stationary member for
    controlling inlet and discharge of pump fluid to or from the pump chamber,
    and see (1) Note, above.

    490+,   for an inlet or discharge port formed in a pumping member or
    chamber wall which is controlled by an element carried by the other.

    508,    for a distributor which is moved by a separate fluid reactive
    surface as well as a mechanical means.

    509,    for a distributor which is formed in part by a traversed chamber
    wall portion, the wall portion usually being moved by interconnection or
    frictional engagement with the pumping member.


CLS 417/511
TXT Apparatus under subclass 510 in which the valve element is carried on or
    within the piston for axial movement relative thereto and either (1) the
    piston is in frictional contact with a pump chamber wall portion and is
    driven by a power transmission element which is rigidly connected to the
    valve element or (2) the valve element is in frictional contact with a pump
    chamber wall portion and the piston is driven by a transmission element
    rigidly connected thereto.


CLS 417/512
TXT Apparatus under subclass 511 in which the valve element comprises a single
    unitarily movable member which controls either the inlet to or discharge
    from two or more pump chambers.


CLS 417/513
TXT Apparatus under subclass 511 in which the valve element and piston have
    conical or frustoconical seating engagement to perform the valving function.


CLS 417/514
TXT Apparatus under subclass 510 in which the pumping member comprises a
    piston, said piston or an element rigid therewith (e.g., piston rod) having
    a pump fluid connecting passage formed therein, the mechanically actuated
    valve element being located within or carried by the piston and positioned
    in flow controlling relationship with said piston passage for performing
    the valving function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    511,    for a distributor carried by a piston in which either the
    distributor or piston frictionally engages a chamber wall and the pump
    drive rod is rigid with the other.


CLS 417/515
TXT Apparatus under subclass 510 comprising two or more pumping chambers.

    (1)     Note.  A device in which fluid is moved from one side of a pumping
    member to the opposite side thereof during movement of the pumping member
    in one direction of its stroke and then lifted out of the chamber during
    movement of the pumping member in the second direction of its stroke is not
    considered plural chambers and is excluded from this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  A pump including a plurality of pumping members acting upon
    a body of fluid, and in which the fluid acted upon by a first pumping
    member is in communication with the fluid acted upon by a second pumping
    member in all operative conditions of the pump, is not considered as
    constituting plural chambers and is excluded from this subclass.  Such
    subject matter is classified below on other features.


CLS 417/516
TXT Apparatus under subclass 515 in which the valve element comprises a single
    unitarily movable member which controls either (1) the inlet of pump fluid
    to two or more pump chambers or (2) the discharge or pump fluid from two or
    more pump chambers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    512,    for a single mechanically actuated distributor element which is
    located within or carried by a pump piston which controls pump fluid inlet
    to or discharge from plural pump chambers.


CLS 417/517
TXT Apparatus under subclass 516 in which the unitarily movable valve element
    controls both the inlet and discharge of pump fluid to and from two or more
    pump chambers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 472+ for pumps or
    motors comprising three or more cylinders arranged in parallel, radial, or
    conical relationship with a rotary transmission axis and in which motive or
    pump fluid flow is usually controlled by a single, unitary, mechanically
    actuated valve element.  For the line between Class 91 and Class 417
    concerning this type of pump, see the note in Class 417 subclass 269.


CLS 417/518
TXT Apparatus under subclass 510 in which the inlet and discharge valves
    comprise a single unitary element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    517+,   for a unitary inlet and discharge distributor for plural pumping
    chambers.


CLS 417/519
TXT Apparatus under subclass 518 in which the element partakes of a movement
    about an axis to effect control of the pump fluid.


CLS 417/520
TXT Apparatus under subclass 510 in which a portion of the valve element or a
    member connected thereto is either (1) frictionally connected with the
    pumping member or (2) is located in the path of pumping member movement and
    adapted to be moved by contact therewith at some portion of the pumping
    member stroke.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    443+,   for means for actuating a pressure responsive distributor to an
    open position responsive to pumping member position.

    490+,   for an inlet or discharge port formed in a pumping member or
    chamber wall which is controlled by an element carried by the other.


CLS 417/521
TXT Apparatus under subclass 437 comprising two or more pumping chambers.

    (1)     Note.  A device in which fluid is moved from one side of a pumping
    member to the opposite side thereof during movement of the pumping member
    in one direction of its stroke and then lifted out of the chamber during
    movement of the pumping member in the second direction of its stroke is not
    considered plural chambers and is excluded from this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  A pump including a plurality of pumping members acting upon
    a body of fluid, and in which the fluid acted upon by a first pumping
    member is in communication with the fluid acted upon by a second pumping
    member in all operative conditions of the pump, is not considered as
    constituting plural chambers and is excluded from this subclass.  Such
    subject matter is classified below on other features.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244+,   for a successive stage pump.

    473,    for plural bellows-type pumping chambers.

    480,    for a pump in which the fluid is moved from one side of a flexible
    wall pumping member to the other through a valved port in said flexible
    wall pumping member.

    486+,   for plural pumping members in one chamber having a single inlet or
    discharge distributor.

    491,    for plural pumping chambers in which the inlet or exhaust to each
    chamber is controlled by a pumping member which is common to all pumping
    chambers.

    515,    for plural pumping chambers in which the inlet or discharge valve
    for the chambers is mechanically actuated.

    545+,   for a pump in which fluid is moved from one side of a pumping
    member to the other through a valved port in the pumping member.

    555.1,  for fluid serially moved to opposite sides of a common pumping
    member.


CLS 417/522
TXT Apparatus under subclass 521 in which a conduit for the discharge of fluid
    from a first chamber is in direct communication with a nonpumping chamber
    containing a portion of the second pumping member other than the pumping
    face of said pumping member, said nonpumping chamber not constituting the
    inlet or outlet flow path for pump fluid to or from the pumping chamber
    containing the second pumping member so that the fluid discharged from said
    first chamber contacts such pumping member portion.


CLS 417/523
TXT Apparatus under subclass 521 in which at least one of the chambers is
    defined in part by a piston, said piston or element rigid therewith (e.g.,
    piston rod) having a pump fluid conducting passage formed therein and the
    means for controlling fluid flow into or out of the chamber including a
    movable valve member in flow controlling relationship with said passage,
    said valve member being located within or carried by said piston or element
    rigid therewith.

    (1)     Note.  For classification under this definition, the expansible
    chamber pump must be provided with a pump fluid conducting passage which is
    physically located within the piston or element rigid therewith.  A pump
    having relatively movable piston portions for controlling flow from one
    side of the piston to the other via a flow path formed between the piston
    and a cylinder sidewall (i.e., pump fluid flows around the piston) is
    excluded under this definition; see subclasses 555.1+, below, and the
    search note therein to Class 92 for such subject matter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    545,    for valved piston-type pumps not involving plural pumping chambers
    and see the search notes thereto for valved pistons elsewhere classified.


CLS 417/524
TXT Apparatus under subclass 523 in which said valve means in the pumping
    members comprises either (1) a single rigid unitarily movable valve member
    which moves from one position to another to alternately control the inlet
    to or discharge from said two or more chambers or (2) relatively movable
    inlet or discharge valve members which are mechanically interrelated in a
    manner such that movement of an inlet or discharge valve member for one
    pump chamber necessitates movement of an inlet or discharge valve member,
    respectively, for another pump chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    512,    for a single mechanically actuated distributor element located
    within or carried by a pump piston which controls pump fluid inlet to or
    discharge from plural pump chambers.


CLS 417/525
TXT Apparatus under subclass 523 in which a first pumping chamber extends in a
    direction axially of a second pumping chamber, the piston for said first
    and second pumping chambers comprising a rigid unitary element, said
    element having valves thereon for controlling fluid to or from each of said
    chambers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    524,    for unitary or interconnected inlet or discharge distributors in a
    common piston for plural pumping chambers.


CLS 417/526
TXT Apparatus under subclass 525 in which there is a single inlet or discharge
    conduit common to the plural chambers said conduit being mounted on and
    movable with the piston.


CLS 417/527
TXT Apparatus under subclass 525 in which the inlet or discharge conduit for
    the first pumping chamber extends axially through a portion of the second
    pumping chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    526,    for a common pumping member having valves for aligned pumping
    chambers and a conduit which forms a common inlet or discharge for the
    chambers mounted on the pumping member and extending through at least one
    of the chambers.


CLS 417/528
TXT Apparatus under subclass 523 in which the chambers are positioned in axial
    alignment and a conduit for conducting fluid to or from a first pumping
    chamber extends axially through a portion of a second pumping chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    526     and 527, for axially aligned pumping chambers and a common pumping
    member having valves for both chambers and a pump fluid conduit extending
    through one of the chambers.


CLS 417/529
TXT Apparatus under subclass 523 comprising two or more pistons which are
    capable of or constrained to move relative to each other, the longitudinal
    axis of one of said pistons being spaced from and parallel to the
    longitudinal axis of another of said pistons, said pistons being positioned
    in separate pumping chambers.


CLS 417/530
TXT Apparatus under subclass 523 in which the piston of at least one of the
    chambers is imperforate.


CLS 417/531
TXT Apparatus under subclass 521 in which the means for controlling pump fluid
    flow into or out of two or more chambers comprises either (1) a single
    rigid unitarily movable valve member which moves from one position to
    another to alternately control the inlet to or discharge from said two or
    more chambers or (2) relatively movable inlet or discharge valve members
    which are mechanically interrelated in a manner such that movement of an
    inlet or discharge valve member for one pump chamber necessitates movement
    of an inlet or discharge valve member, respectively, for another pump
    chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    491+,   for plural pumping chambers having a common pumping member, said
    pumping member controlling the inlet or discharge port of two or more of
    said chambers.

    512,    for a single mechanically-actuated distributor element located
    within or carried by a pump piston which controls pump fluid inlet to or
    discharge from plural pump chambers.

    516,    for a single mechanically-actuated distributor element which
    controls pump fluid inlet to or discharge from plural pump chambers.

    524,    for plural pumping chambers including a valved piston and in which
    a common element forms an inlet or discharge valve for two or more chambers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclasses 178+ for an expansible
    chamber-type motor having a single valve unit controlling plural working
    chambers.


CLS 417/532
TXT Apparatus under subclass 531 in which the means for controlling pump fluid
    flow into or out of said two or more chambers comprises a single valve
    member which moves as a unit about an axis.


CLS 417/533
TXT Apparatus under subclass 521 in which two or more pumping chambers are
    positioned in spaced parallel relationship including a conduit positioned
    between said pumping chambers and at least partially lying within the axial
    limits of the pumping chambers, said conduit being in communication with
    the controlled discharge of each of said pumping chambers, so that each of
    said pumping chambers discharge into and through said conduit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    539,    for other pumps having laterally spaced parallel pumping chambers.


CLS 417/534
TXT Apparatus under subclass 521 in which the plural pumping chambers are
    formed at opposite ends of a common pumping member which moves to-and-fro
    along a straight line (includes diaphragm), movement of said pumping member
    effecting expansion of one of said pumping chambers and simultaneous
    contraction of the other.

    (1)     Note.  Plural pumping chambers formed in separate cylinders are
    included under this definition if the cylinders are coaxial and contain
    pumping members which are rigidly interconnected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404+,   for a double acting pump piston driven by a rigidly attached double
    acting reciprocating fluid motor.

    418,    for a double acting pump piston driven by a rigidly attached
    reciprocating electric motor.

    491+,   for a common pumping member for plural pumping chambers in which
    the pumping member controls an inlet or discharge port for the chamber.

    525+,   for a common pumping member for plural aligned chambers wherein the
    pumping member includes valves for controlling pump fluid to or from the
    chambers.

    528+,   for plural pumping chambers wherein a fluid conduit for one of the
    chambers extends through a portion of another.


CLS 417/535
TXT Apparatus under subclass 534 in which there is provided inlet discharge
    valve means for controlling flow of pump fluid to and from the chambers,
    the discharge valves for the several chambers being located at a position
    radially spaced from the path of movement of the pumping member.


CLS 417/536
TXT Apparatus under subclass 535 in which the inlet and discharge valves for
    the several chambers are located at a position radially spaced from the
    path of movement of the pumping member.


CLS 417/537
TXT Apparatus under subclass 536 in which all the valves are positioned on one
    side of a plane parallel to and extending through the axis of the working
    member.


CLS 417/538
TXT Apparatus under subclass 521 in which said pumping chambers are coaxial
    with each other with one end of one chamber secured to the end of a second
    chamber, and in which the valve means for controlling the inlet and
    discharge of said chambers is positioned adjacent the secured ends of said
    pumping chambers.


CLS 417/539
TXT Apparatus under subclass 521 comprising two or more pumping members which
    are capable of or constrained to move relative to each other, the
    longitudinal axis of one of said pumping members being spaced from and
    parallel to the longitudinal axis of another of said pumping members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    269,    for three or more pump cylinders arranged in parallel relationship
    with a rotary transmission axis.

    529,    for parallel laterally spaced valved pumping members.

    533,    for spaced parallel pumping chambers having a common discharge
    conduit or chamber spaced therebetween in which the pumping members may
    have relative motion.


CLS 417/540
TXT Apparatus under subclass 437 comprising a fluid receiving or confining
    means positioned in open communication with the pump fluid either upstream
    of the means to control the flow of fluid into the chamber or downstream of
    the means to control the flow of fluid from the chamber to absorb
    pulsations initiated in said fluid incident to an operation of the pump.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 26+ for pressure
    compensators, per se.


CLS 417/541
TXT Apparatus under subclass 540 in which the fluid confining means is fixed to
    the pumping member for movement therewith.


CLS 417/542
TXT Apparatus under subclass 540 in which a fluid receiving or confining means
    is provided both upstream of the means to control the flow of fluid into
    the chamber and downstream of the means to control the flow of fluid from
    the chamber.


CLS 417/543
TXT Apparatus under subclass 540 in which said means comprises an enclosed
    space having a compressible fluid confined therein, said compressible fluid
    being in direct contact with the portion of the pump fluid entering said
    space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    541,    for a confined compressible fluid dampening chamber carried by the
    pumping member.

    542,    for combined inlet and discharge pulsation dampening chambers of
    the confined compressible fluid type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 207 for a surge suppressor of the type
    comprising a gas stored over a body of liquid.


CLS 417/544
TXT Apparatus under subclass 543 in which the space having confined
    compressible fluid is associated with a pump of the type which is manually
    operated, e.g., by a handle or treadle.


CLS 417/545
TXT Apparatus under subclass 437 in which the pumping chamber is defined in
    part by a piston, said piston or element rigid therewith (e.g., piston rod)
    having a pump fluid conducting passage formed therein and the means for
    controlling fluid flow into or out of the chamber includes a movable valve
    member in flow controlling relationship with said passage, said valve
    member being located within or carried by said piston or element rigid
    therewith.

    (1)     Note.  For classification under this definition, the expansible
    chamber pump must be provided with a pump fluid conducting passage which is
    physically located within the piston or element rigid therewith.  A pump
    having relatively movable piston portions for controlling flow from one
    side of the piston to the other via a flow path formed between the piston
    and a cylinder sidewall (i.e., pump fluid flows around the piston) is
    excluded under this definition; see subclasses 555.1+, below, and the
    search note therein to Class 92 for such subject matter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244+,   for successive stage pumps and particularly subclasses 259+ for
    those including a valved piston and see the notes in subclass 244 for the
    distinction between these subclasses.

    467,    for a valved piston in which the valve is mechanically actuated.

    484,    for a valved oscillating-type pumping member.

    495,    for a valved piston combined with pumping member controlled inlet
    or discharge ports.

    511,    for a piston carried distributor in which either the piston or
    distributor frictionally engages the pumping chamber wall and the
    distributor or piston, respectively, is integral with the drive rod of the
    pump.

    523+,   for a plural chamber pump having a valved pumping member.


CLS 417/546
TXT Apparatus under subclass 545 in which the piston is provided with
    relatively movable valve members which control flow of fluid into and out
    of the expansible chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    260,    for successive stage pumps having a valved piston which contains
    both the inlet and the outlet valve for one of the stages.

    486,    for a pumping chamber having two or more relatively fixed pumping
    members and in which the inlet valve is positioned in one working member
    and the discharge valve is positioned in a second pumping member.

    525,    for a common valved pumping member for plural pumping chambers in
    which both the inlet and discharge valves for the chambers are disposed in
    the pumping member.


CLS 417/547
TXT Apparatus under subclass 545 in which a conduit for the pump fluid is
    rigidly fixed to the valved piston.

    (1)     Note.  A device of the type disclosed as a hollow piston or plunger
    through which the pump fluid flows and in which such fluid is discharged
    from said piston or plunger through openings therein into a casing or space
    which slidably receives such piston or plunger, and in which an end face of
    said piston or plunger further acts upon said fluid to move the same from
    said casing or space, is excluded from this subclass.  Such device is
    classified below on other features.

            However, when the piston is also provided with a fluid conduit
    fixed thereto and the fluid is discharged by the said end face into the
    conduit for ultimate discharge, said device is included under this
    definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    528,    for a plural chamber pump provided with a valved pumping member
    having a fluid conduit secured thereto, said conduit extending through a
    portion of one chamber and conducting fluid to or from a second chamber.


CLS 417/548
TXT Apparatus under subclass 545 in which the valved piston is slidable within
    a tube (e.g., cylinder) and has rigidly attached thereto a wall member
    which is in sealing engagement with said tube or another tube aligned and
    in open communication therewith, said wall member having a face portion in
    contact with the pumped fluid downstream of the valved piston and said
    first tube being provided with a discharge for pumped fluid positioned
    between said valved piston and wall member.

    (1)     Note.  The discharge may be an annular passage surrounding the
    first or second tube.


CLS 417/549
TXT Apparatus under subclass 545 including means separate from the valve
    element and engageable therewith to continuously exert a force thereon in a
    direction toward its seat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    507+,   for a distributor which is moved by a separate fluid responsive
    element.


CLS 417/550
TXT Apparatus under subclass 545 in which the valve or part thereof (e.g.,
    hinge) is formed of flexible material and in which opening and closing of
    said valve is effected by the flexing of said material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    479,    for a flexible wall-type pumping member in which a portion of said
    flexible wall forms a pump fluid valve.


CLS 417/551
TXT Apparatus under subclass 545 in which the valve comprises a rigid member
    which is mechanically interconnected with the piston in a manner which
    constrains said member for movement about an axis.

    (1)     Note.  A movable rigid valve member which is connected to the
    piston by means of a flexible element (e.g., resilient material hinge)
    which flexes upon movement of the valve to constrain movement of the valve
    member about an axis is not classified under this definition, such subject
    matter being provided for in subclass 550, above.


CLS 417/552
TXT Apparatus under subclass 545 in which the valve comprises a member movable
    in a to-and-fro motion toward and away from its seat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 528+ for a reciprocating direct
    responsive valve.


CLS 417/553
TXT Apparatus under subclass 552 in which the valve comprises a ring like
    member.


CLS 417/554
TXT Apparatus under subclass 552 in which the valve comprises a member in the
    shape of a ball or sphere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 533.11+ for a ball-type reciprocating
    direct responsive valve.


CLS 417/555.1
TXT Fluid serially moved to opposite side of pumping member:
    Apparatus under subclass 437 having a reciprocating pumping member and in
    which fluid is moved from one side of the pumping member to the opposite
    side thereof during one reciprocatory stroke direction and then moved in
    the direction of movement of the pumping member during the other
    reciprocatory stroke direction.

    (1)     Note.  A piston having a cup shaped axially extending peripheral
    lip portion fabricated of flexible material and in direct contact with pump
    fluid which is radially movable relative to a cylinder sidewall responsive
    to pump chamber pressure to control fluid flow around the piston is not
    considered in itself to be a valve and, per se, does not form subject
    matter under this definition. However, such devices when claimed in
    combination with a valve for controlling fluid flow into or out of the pump
    chamber form subject matter under this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254+,   for a successive stage pump comprising pumping chambers on opposite
    sides of a pumping member in which the fluid is serially pumped from one
    pumping chamber to the next.

    545+,   for a pump in which fluid is serially moved to opposite sides of a
    valved piston.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 240+ for a piston having a
    sidewall portion including a peripheral axially extending flexible lip
    which may be disclosed as performing a valving function and see the search
    notes therein.


CLS 417/555.2
TXT Well swabs:
    Apparatus under subclass 555.1 wherein the reciprocating pumping member is
    located in a well and used to force fluid from the pumping chamber.


CLS 417/556
TXT Apparatus under subclass 555.1 in which the pumping member comprises a
    piston formed of plural relatively movable rigid side wall forming
    segments, said segments being movable to a first relative position during
    movement of the piston in one reciprocatory stroke direction to prevent
    fluid flow from one end of the piston to the other and movable to a second
    relative position during movement of the piston in the other reciprocatory
    stroke direction to permit such flow.

    (1)     Note.  For classification under this definition, the relatively
    movable piston side wall segments must be fabricated of rigid material and
    be relatively movable in a manner to control fluid flow either between the
    segments and a cylinder side wall or between relatively engageable segment
    portions.  The rigid segments may include resilient portions for sealing
    engagement with the cylinder side wall and such will not serve to exclude
    the device from classification under this definition provided that the
    relative movement of the segments themselves serve to control fluid flow
    rather than the mere flexing of a resilient piston portion responsive to
    relative movement of the segment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59,     for a radially expansible piston for controlling fluid flow in a
    drilled well free piston-type pump.

    489,    for a single unitary piston forming element which is tilted
    relative to a cylinder in which it reciprocates for the purpose of
    controlling inlet or discharge of pump fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 247 for a pair of axially
    spaced relatively movable rigid piston forming members having a radially
    movable element interposed therebetween wherein said radially movable
    element is either (1) flexible, or (2) has no disclosed valving function.


CLS 417/557
TXT Apparatus under subclass 437 in which the pumping chamber is always in
    communication with the inlet or the discharge to or from said chamber
    during all phases of operation of the pump.

    (1)     Note.  For classification under this definition the pump must be
    disclosed as of the type in which the inlet or exhaust are never completely
    closed under any condition of operation of the pump.  However, the
    constantly open line may be throttled so long as it is not completely
    closed.

    (2)     Note.  The subject matter in this subclass usually involves a
    restricted flow path either in the inlet or exhaust conduit which permits
    unimpeded flow in one direction, but restricts flow in a reverse direction.


CLS 417/558
TXT Apparatus under subclass 437 having both a distributor to control inflow
    and a distributor to control outflow of pumped fluid for said chamber, the
    movable valving part of one of said distributors forming the flow passage
    and seat for and carrying the movable valving part of the other distributor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    504,    for plural outlet valves for a single chamber in which one of the
    valves controls a passage through the other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 512.2 for plural check valves in which one
    valve carries the head and seat for another.


CLS 417/559
TXT Apparatus under subclass 437 in which the means for controlling the flow of
    fluid into or the discharge of fluid from the chamber comprises valve
    means, said valve means being of the type which moves to open or close
    position responsive to a pressure differential in the pumping chamber and
    the inlet or discharge conduits.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    297+,   for condition responsive means for modifying the operation of a
    cyclically operated valve (e.g., check valve).

    427,    for plural pumps having distributors which are individually
    adjusted.

    447,    for pumping chamber pressure responsive distributors with separate
    means to bias same open.

    458+,   for relatively movable serial pressure responsive distributors.

    479,    for a distributor formed from an integral portion of a flexible
    wall pumping member.

    480,    for a distributor in a flexible wall pumping member.

    482+,   for an oscillating pumping member with an inlet distributor in an
    abutment wall for the pumping member.

    483     and 484, for an oscillating pumping member having a distributor
    positioned therein.

    486+,   for a single inlet or discharge distributor for a chamber having
    plural pumping members.

    496,    for a chamber pressure responsive distributor in serial
    relationship with a pumping member controlled port.

    523+,   for plural pumping chambers including a valved pumping member.

    531+,   for plural pumping chambers with a common element which forms an
    inlet or discharge distributor.

    536+,   for plural pumping chambers at opposite ends of a reciprocating
    pumping member with inlet and discharge distributors positioned laterally
    of the pumping member path.

    538,    for aligned pumping chambers with inlet and discharge distributors
    at adjacent ends of the aligned chambers.

    545+,   for valved pistons and see the search notes thereto for other
    valved pistons.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 511+ for direct response valves, per se,
    and see subclasses 512+ for plural direct response valves.  The claiming of
    a direct response valve mounted in a cylinder or cylinder head or the like
    does not preclude classification in Class 137.  Also the claiming of both
    an inlet and outlet valve does not preclude classification in Class 137 if
    no pumping member is claimed.


CLS 417/560
TXT Apparatus under subclass 559 in which a single unitary movable valve member
    is so positioned relative to the conduits communicating with the chamber
    inlet and discharge as to form the sole means for controlling both the
    inlet of pump fluid into the chamber and the discharge of pump fluid from
    the chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    531,    for a single element controlling both inlet and discharge of pump
    fluid to and from plural pump chambers.


CLS 417/561
TXT Apparatus under subclass 559 in which means are provided to prevent
    movement of said valve means, said means being effective in response to the
    pumping member attaining a given position in the chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    446,    for selectively operable means for holding pressure responsive
    distributor open.


CLS 417/562
TXT Apparatus under subclass 559 in which a portion of the valve means or valve
    supporting means extends into the pumping chamber from a fixed wall thereof
    and in which a wall of the pumping member is provided with a groove, recess
    or indentation for receiving said valve means or valve supporting means
    during movement of the pumping member in the normal operation thereof in
    the pumping chamber.


CLS 417/563
TXT Apparatus under subclass 559 comprising an inlet valve and a discharge
    valve of substantially the same shape and having substantially the same
    mode of operation, a first said valve being either greater in some
    dimension than said second valve or being made of a different material than
    said second valve.


CLS 417/564
TXT Apparatus under subclass 563 in which said valves consist of ring-shaped
    members.


CLS 417/565
TXT Apparatus under subclass 559 having a fluid inlet conduit and a fluid
    discharge conduit, said conduits being linearly aligned and a pivoted inlet
    and discharge distributor being disposed in the aligned inlet and discharge
    distributors, respectively.

    (1)     Note.  The pivoting of the distributors may be accomplished by a
    flexing of the material thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    567+,   for nonpivoted inlet and discharge distributors seating in coaxial
    ports.


CLS 417/566
TXT Apparatus under subclass 559 in which the valve means is fabricated of
    nonmetallic material.

    (1)     Note.  A mere sealing portion of a metallic valve (e.g., o-ring)
    which is fabricated of nonmetallic material is not intended to be included
    under this definition.  Generally, for classification under this
    definition, the entire pump fluid contacting portion of the movable valving
    member or seat therefor must be formed of nonmetallic material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    479,    for a valve formed from an integral portion of a flexible wall
    pumping member.

    550,    for a valve piston having a valve formed of flexible material.


CLS 417/567
TXT Apparatus under subclass 559 comprising an inlet and discharge valve
    positioned in an inlet and discharge port, respectively, which form seats
    for said valves, the central axis of the inlet seat port coinciding with
    the central axis of the discharge seat port.

    (1)     Note.  Either or both of the ports may be annular so long as the
    axes of the ports coincide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    558,    for inlet and discharge distributors in coaxial ports in which the
    port (seat) for one is formed in the other; i.e., the one distributor is
    carried by and controls a passage in the other.


CLS 417/568
TXT Apparatus under subclass 567 in which said axis is perpendicular to the
    direction of movement of the pumping member.


CLS 417/569
TXT Apparatus under subclass 559 in which the inlet or discharge valve is
    positioned in a fixed wall of the working chamber which is opposite the end
    face of the pumping member when in operative position in the pumping
    chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    482+,   for an oscillating pumping member with a distributor in an abutment
    wall for the pumping member.


CLS 417/570
TXT Apparatus under subclass 569 in which the movable portion of the valve or
    the movable portion of the valve which seats upon the nonmovable portion of
    the valve is substantially the same area as the end face of the pumping
    member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    501,    for a coextensive distributor opposite a pumping member end face
    combined with a pumping member controlled inlet or discharge port.


CLS 417/571
TXT Apparatus under subclass 569 in which an inlet valve and a discharge valve
    are positioned in a wall opposite the end face of said pumping member.


CLS 417/572
TXT Apparatus under the class definition not otherwise provided for.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 417/900
TXT Pumps which are disclosed as pumping slurries; i.e., fluids which contain
    suspended solids, such as concrete.


CLS 417/901
TXT Pumps which are disclosed as pumping gases in the liquified state at very
    low temperatures, e.g., liquid oxygen.  This collection is not intended to
    include refrigerant compressors in which the refrigerant liquifies at a
    relatively high temperature when placed under compression.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 45.1+ for stored solidified or liquified
    gas handling.


CLS 417/902
TXT Pumps comprising a motor driving the pump, the motor and pump being
    disposed within a sealed casing such that no part of the motor-pump unit
    projects through the casing so as to require a running seal.


CLS 417/903
TXT Pumps which are operated by a treadle adapted to be operated by the foot or
    feet of a human or animal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229,    for pumps operated by a passing vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 76 for animal operated watering pumps
    delivering to a watering trough.


CLS 417/904
TXT WELL PUMP DRIVEN BY FLUID MOTOR MOUNTED ABOVE GROUND:

    A collection of patents disclosing a pump installed below ground to obtain
    subterranean fluids, and wherein the pump member is operated by a motor
    located above the ground surface, and the said motor has a reciprocating
    working member which is motivated by a fluid.


CLS 418/
TTL ROTARY EXPANSIBLE CHAMBER  DEVICES

CLS 418/
TXT This class relates to devices which include a working chamber the volume of
    which is progressively variable into which fluid alternately enters and
    exhausts and which is formed by a surface (or surfaces) of a moving solid
    member having relative movement with another solid surface (or surfaces), a
    portion of the working chamber boundary being substantially fixed, and in
    which:



    I.      The working member has rotary motion in a single direction about a
    fixed or movable axis thereby to expand and contract the volume of the
    working chamber, there being relative rotation between the said working
    member and surface at some time during the expansion and contraction of the
    working chamber.

    II.     The working member is circular and causes a change in the volume of
    the working chamber as it is progressively tilted in a single direction
    about a point on its axis to progressively contact said other surface, the
    central axis of the working member describing a cone whose apex is the
    point about which the working member oscillates or wobbles.

    III.    The working member causes a change in the volume of the working
    chamber but does not have absolute rotation, the working member being
    provided with means having an axis offset from and parallel to the central
    axis of the working member about which the central axis moves in an orbit
    whereby the working member has planetary movement within the working
    chamber.

    I.      COMBINATIONS WITH LOAD DEVICES

    Inasmuch as a mechanical force output of a rotary expansible chamber device
    within the definition of this class is to operate or move a load the
    inclusion of the load in the claim by name only or in general terms will
    not exclude a patent from this class.  An exception to this general rule
    exists where the load on the expansible chamber device is a valve.  The
    combination of a rotary expansible chamber device and a valve as the load
    moved thereby even if claimed by name only, is excluded from this class and
    will be found in Class 137, Fluid Handling, or Class 251, Valves and Valve
    Actuation.

    This line also applies where the load is a tool:  that is, a named tool
    moved by a rotary expansible chamber device will not exclude a patent from
    this class if no tool details are recited.  However, if a support for the
    work being acted upon by the tool is claimed, classification in the
    appropriate tool class results even though both the tool and the support
    are claimed by name only.  Also see Search Class, 173 Note, in section III
    below for the line with regard to a nominally claimed tool driven by a
    rotary expansible chamber device combined with other features such as work
    cleansing or tool feeding.

    No attempt has been made to review the classification of all patents found
    in classes relating to loads adapted to be moved by a rotary expansible
    chamber device.  Thus, it is to be noted that the original classification
    of all patents is not consistent with the above statement as to nominally
    claimed loads and this particularly applies as to classes not recently
    reclassified.  In those instances in which a body of art is known to exist
    in a given class in which the load adapted to be moved by the rotary
    expansible chamber device is claimed only nominally, and especially where
    the classification of that class provides for a fluid pressure actuator for
    the device, currently issuing patents will not be classified as original in
    Class 418 even though the load is only nominally claimed.

    The means which transmits power from the working member of the rotary
    expansible chamber device to the load to be moved (e.g., linkage, gearing,
    etc.), is not considered to be the load to be moved by the expansible
    chamber device.  Also see Search Class, 74 Note in section III below for a
    further discussion of this subject.

    II.     DEFINITION OF TERMS

    WORKING MEMBER - A movable member in a rotary expansible chamber device
    having a surface portion disposed to either receive the energy of a working
    fluid directed thereagainst for moving the member to thereby produce a
    mechanical force output, or which, may move a working fluid by the
    application of a mechanical force to the movable member whereby fluid is
    admitted into and exhausted from the expansible chamber.  The working
    member may include a movable vane thereon having a surface portion for
    either receiving energy from or energizing a working fluid passing through
    the expansible chamber.



    WORKING FLUID - The fluid (expansible or inexpansible) which is introduced
    into and withdrawn from the working chamber of the rotary expansible
    chamber device either to act upon or be acted upon by the working member.
    Fluid which is withdrawn from the working fluid supply for perfecting the
    operation of the device is considered to be working fluid even though it
    never enters the working chamber of the device.  A fluid combined with
    working fluid introduced into and exhausted with the working fluid from the
    working chamber of the device used merely to perfect the operation of the
    device (i.e., cooling, sealing, lubricating, etc.), is considered to be a
    nonworking fluid.



    CYLINDER - An external member having wall or surface portions forming part
    of the working chamber of the rotary expansible chamber device, the member
    being either fixed or movable and may surround a fixed reaction member to
    move or be moved by the working fluid and may also include an abutment or
    reaction surface against which working fluid acts.  However, the abutment
    or reaction surface for the rotary expansible chamber device need not
    necessarily be formed by the cylinder but may be formed by relatively
    movable opposed rotating members within the cylinder at least one of which
    is a working member.



    WORKING  CHAMBER - The space in an expansible chamber device which includes
    the working member and which is adapted to receive working fluid for acting
    upon the working member or for being acted upon by the working member, the
    chamber expanding and contracting incident to movement of the working
    member.



    VANE - A partition member which generally moves with the working member but
    also has movement relative to the working member incident to the expansion
    and contraction of the chamber.  The vane may be on the cylinder if the
    cylinder is the working member.



    ABUTMENT - A partition member having relative movement with a cylinder or
    reaction member of which it is a part and moving incident to the expansion
    and contraction of the working chamber, the cylinder or reaction member not
    constituting the working member in this case.



    PARTITION MEMBER - A member either fixed or movable on either the cylinder
    working member or other reaction member having a surface portion forming
    part of the working chamber to either (1) separate the working chamber into
    a plurality of working fluid compartments or (2) separate the inlet from
    the outlet of the rotary expansible chamber device.



    III.    SEARCH CLASS:  (INCLUDES STATEMENTS OF THE LINES WITH OTHER CLASSES)

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, for pumps claimed in
    combination with a work-contacting suction or blast nozzle.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 253+ for rotary cylinder or
    piston type expansible chamber devices used in volume or rate of flow
    meters.  Class 73 includes rotary expansible chamber meters combined with
    registering mechanism and meters incapable of general use as an expansible
    chamber device.  A meter is considered to be incapable of such general use
    if there is no disclosed means to take power therefrom for external use
    such as to a registering mechanism.  Therefore Class 418 takes a rotary
    expansible chamber device having means to take power therefrom such as for
    an unclaimed registering mechanism.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses for machine
    elements and mechanisms, per se, and in combination with a nominally
    claimed rotary expansible chamber device.  In general, gearing or linkage
    included as part of the power means either to drive or be driven by a
    rotary expansible chamber device is considered to be basic subject matter
    of the rotary expansible chamber device and would not preclude
    classification in Class 418.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, for the combination of a rotary
    expansible chamber device and a specifically claimed separator or filter
    not specifically disclosed for protecting the rotary expansible chamber
    device.  For a further statement of the line between Classes 96 and 418,
    see section III of the class definition to Class 96 for the line between
    Classes 96 and 417, the line between Classes 96 and 418 being the same.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, appropriate subclasses for a rotary
    piston and cylinder combination claimed with significant
    internal-combustion structure such as fuel injection means, ignition means,
    fuel charge treatment means, or compression means with transfer means to an
    expansion means.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, appropriate subclasses for a rotary
    expansible chamber device for operating an impact delivering means or for
    operating a tool combined with work cleaning or feed means.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses and
    especially subclasses 416.1+, for the combination of a rotary expansible
    chamber device and a specifically claimed filter not specifically disclosed
    for protecting the rotary expansible chamber device whether or not the
    filter is upstream or downstream of the device.  For a further statement of
    the line, see the search class note in the definition to subclass 416.1 of
    Class 210 for the line between Classes 210 and 417, the line between
    Classes 210 and 418 being the same.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses, for the combination of a pump
    and a significantly claimed supply container and see section 9 of the class
    definition to Class 222 for an elaboration of the line between Classes 222
    and 418.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process that may include a nominally claimed rotary expansible chamber
    device.  Class 277 takes a nominally claimed rotary piston and cylinder
    combination, or a nominally claimed rotary piston or cylinder, per se,
    where the claim is otherwise directed to a packing or sealing means between
    relatively movable surfaces of said cylinder and rotary piston or on said
    cylinder or rotary piston.  Class 418 takes such devices, where some
    details of the cylinder or rotary piston is set forth in the claim.
    However, structure of such device which is solely intended to cooperate
    with the packing or sealing means is not considered a detail of the device
    for Class 418, and is classified in Class 277.  A device including either a
    flexible cup or flange type sealing member combined with a supporting body
    structure is classified in Class 418 where such device is disclosed as a
    rotary piston for either a pump or a motor.

    417,    Pumps, appropriate subclasses for a rotary expansible chamber pump
    that is; (1) driven by a significantly claimed motor, (2) operated by an
    art device, (3) claimed in combination with another type of pump and (4)
    provided with valving other than in-line valving or valving operating
    merely to perfect the operation of some part of the pump and see the Search
    Class note to Class 418 in the class definition of Class 417 for an
    elaboration of the line between these classes.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, for planetary
    gearing per se, and in combination with a nominally claimed rotary
    expansible chamber device.  The line between Class 418 and Class 475 is the
    same as the line between Class 418 and Class 74.


CLS 418/1
TXT Methods under the class definition.


CLS 418/2
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having (1) signals, indicators,
    registers, recorders or gauges for indicating either a condition of
    operation of the device or the condition or position of a part thereof or
    (2) window means whereby the operation of the device or the condition or
    position of a part thereof may be readily observed.

    (1)     Note.  For classification under part (1) of this definition there
    must be either an indicia or an audible or visible signal.  Relative to
    indicia, there must be graduation or markings in the disclosure as claimed.
     Where it is indicated that the mere position of a part is indicative of a
    condition of the device (e.g., valve handle position corresponds to
    direction of working member rotation or position of a part of the device)
    classification under this definition does not result unless some
    cooperating indicia are included.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 232+ for expansible chamber type
    volume or rate of flow meters and see section III of the class definition
    of this class for a general statement of the line between this class and
    Class 73.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 1 for signals,
    indicators or inspection means for expansible chamber type motors.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 5 for signals, indicators or
    inspection windows for expansible chamber devices.


CLS 418/3
TXT Apparatus under the class definition provided with two or more dissimilar
    rotary expansible chamber devices.

    (1)     Note.  Plural rotary expansible chamber devices of like types
    differing only in size and shape are excluded from classification here.

    (2)     Note.  A rotary expansible chamber device differing from another
    but which merely supplies a coolant, lubricant, etc., to the other is
    excluded from classification here, and is classified in subclasses 83+.

    (3)     Note.  Ordinarily, a rotary expansible chamber device of the
    stationary cylinder type and a rotary expansible chamber device of the
    moving cylinder type are considered to be diverse and classifiable here.
    However, a rotary expansible chamber device in which there is provided a
    rotating member common to both types having surface portions forming part
    of the working chamber surface of each type is not considered proper for
    classification here.  See subclass 160 for such devices.

    (4)     Note.  The following are considered to be dissimilar rotary
    expansible chamber devices: 1.  Sliding vane or abutment type. 2.  Swinging
    vane or abutment type. 3.  Interengaging rotary members. 4.  Nested or
    internal-external gear type. 5.  Planetary. 6.  Moving cylinder. 7.
    Mutating. 8.  Other miscellaneous rotary expansible chamber devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, appropriate subclasses, for diverse pumps and motors wherein
    at least one pump or motor is not a rotary expansible chamber device.


CLS 418/4
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the working chamber comprises
    spaced partition members moving sequentially in curved and substantially
    straight line paths of travel, the distance between the partition members
    varying when moving in the curved path of travel to thereby expand and
    contract the working chamber.


CLS 418/5
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which there is provided a plurality
    of working chambers, at least one of the working chambers serially
    receiving its working fluid at least in part form one other working
    chamber, the working fluid either acting on or being acted upon by the
    working member in each working chamber.


CLS 418/6
TXT Apparatus under subclass 5 wherein a working chamber surrounds another
    working chamber with which it is in working fluid series flow relationship.


CLS 418/7
TXT Apparatus under subclass 5 in which a rotating working member in each
    working chamber includes means for permitting working fluid to flow
    substantially unimpeded therepast during a portion of a revolution thereof
    and for producing work during another portion of the revolution, a working
    member in one working chamber permitting unimpeded working fluid flow
    therepast while a working member in a prior or subsequent working chamber
    is in work producing relationship with the working fluid.


CLS 418/8
TXT Apparatus under subclass 5 in which there is provided a plurality of
    working chambers spaced about the periphery of the working member, at least
    two of the working chambers being serially connected so that a working
    member may sequentially act upon or be acted upon by the same working fluid.

    (1)     Note.  The space between adjacent vanes is not considered to be a
    working chamber.


CLS 418/9
TXT Apparatus under subclass 5 in which at least one of the working chambers is
    provided with a plurality of members rotating about fixed or substantially
    fixed axes having peripheral  surface portions disposed to maintain or
    substantially maintain line contact therebetween; at least one of the
    rotating members being a working member.


CLS 418/10
TXT Apparatus under subclass 9 having three or more rotating members at least
    one of which has a peripheral surface engaging the peripheral surfaces of
    two or more other rotating members.


CLS 418/11
TXT Apparatus under subclass 5 in which at least one of the working chambers
    includes an abutment member having an end surface normally maintained in
    sealing engagement with the working member peripheral surface and having
    side portions slidably received in the cylinder to have sliding movement
    therein incident to the expansion and contraction of the working member.


CLS 418/12
TXT Apparatus under subclass 5 in which at least one of the working chambers
    includes an abutment member having an end surface normally maintained in
    sealing engagement with the working member peripheral surface and is
    swingably mounted to the cylinder to have swinging movement therewith
    incident to the expansion and contraction of the working member.


CLS 418/13
TXT Apparatus under subclass 5 in which at least one of the working chambers is
    provided with a rotating working member having a vane member slidably
    mounted thereon and having an end surface normally maintained in sealing
    engagement with a peripheral cylinder surface forming a part of the working
    chamber; the vane member having sliding movement relative to the working
    member incident to the expansion and contraction of the working chamber.


CLS 418/14
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which upon start of the device an
    interval of time elapses after which the working member of the device
    produces work, the interval of time being the time required for working
    chamber parts responding to a condition of operation of the device to
    assume or acquire a normal working or sealing relationship to overcome a
    working fluid bypass condition present upon starting the device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 279+ for expansible chamber devices having
    condition responsive pumped fluid control means.


CLS 418/15
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which working fluid en route to or
    from the working chamber of the device is either supplied thereto or
    discharged therefrom by a plurality of passages separately communicating
    therewith, each passage being at least adapted to communicate with a
    separate fluid source or point of use.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are such devices in which working fluid is
    either introduced into or exhausted from the working chamber by a plurality
    of separate and distinct passages, each passage ordinarily being
    connectible to a separate working fluid source or place of use (or
    disposition) spaced from the rotary expansible chamber device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 21 for rotary expansible
    chamber type motors having plural working fluid passages for conducting
    working fluid to the working chamber thereof, at least one of the passages
    having either a separate, selectively adjustable fluid flow control member
    or a separate fluid flow control portion of a unitary flow control means
    for sequentially and selectively controlling fluid flow through at least
    one other passage.  However, a plurality of such passages sequentially
    controlled by the same portion of an adjustable fluid flow control member
    to merely control thereby the rate of fluid flow to the working chamber is
    not considered fluid flow through diverse paths for classification in Class
    91.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 565+ for a fluid system including a pump
    having plural exhausts, each of which is separately controlled and directed
    to a separate point of use.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 440+ for a significant pump having plural
    exhausts one of which being controlled and exhausting to waste.


CLS 418/16
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which in addition to the relative
    movement normally occurring between the working member and the other
    working chamber surfaces in the operation of a rotary expansible chamber
    device, the expansible chamber device has a portion thereof mounted for
    relative movement, and movement of which effects a change in a dimension of
    and therefore the voluminal space comprising the working chamber to thereby
    vary the amount of working fluid passing therethrough, no change occurring
    in the working member rotational speed.

    (1)     Note.  Those devices in which an adjustment is made to provide a
    better sealing arrangement or compensate for wear between cooperating parts
    and which may incidentally vary the volumetric capacity are not
    classifiable here under this definition and are classified either in
    subclasses 104+ or on other features.


CLS 418/17
TXT Apparatus under subclass 16 in which a dimension of the working chamber is
    variably controlled in response to the speed of rotation of the working
    member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 731.1 for gearing with fluid
    drive having speed and/or torque responsive change and see the search notes
    thereunder.

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 458 for expansible
    chamber motors having speed governor operated valves and see the search
    notes thereunder.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses .032 and .033 for
    interrelated power delivery controls automatically controlled by speed and
    see the search notes thereunder.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses 31+,
    for planetary gear transmission systems having fluid drive or control.


CLS 418/18
TXT Apparatus under subclass 16 including a plurality of members each of which
    is rotatable about a common axis substantially in a common plane and having
    working chamber surfaces rotating in the same path, movement in one
    direction of at least one of the members being alternately and relatively
    increased and retarded whereby to expand and contact the working chamber
    and at least one of the members producing work.


CLS 418/19
TXT Apparatus under subclass 16 comprising a plurality of rotating members
    having undulating or tooth-like surface projections disposed to maintain a
    substantially fixed straight line of contact therebetween against which
    working fluid reacts; at least one of the rotatable members being a working
    member.


CLS 418/20
TXT Apparatus under subclass 19 having three or more rotating members at least
    one of which has a peripheral surface engaging the peripheral surfaces of
    two or more rotating members.


CLS 418/21
TXT Apparatus under subclass 19 in which a dimension of the working chamber is
    changed by moving the cylinder or a part thereof or the working member in a
    direction along the axis of rotation of the working member.


CLS 418/22
TXT Apparatus under subclass 16 comprising two or more working chambers, a
    surface portion of at least one of the chambers being movable to vary the
    voluminal space thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Circumferentially spaced working chambers about a common
    working member are not considered plural working chambers under this
    definition and such devices are classified on other features.

    (2)     Note.  The plural chambers may be separated by a common intervening
    element having opposing surfaces each forming part of a respective chamber.

    (3)     Note.  A separate working fluid may be used for each working
    chamber.


CLS 418/23
TXT Apparatus under subclass 16 in which the effective volume of the working
    chamber is varied by adjustably restricting the limit of outward movement
    of a vane or abutment, from the working or cylinder member, respectively,
    in which it is mounted whereby to control the extent of sweeping contact of
    its outer edge with the peripheral working chamber surface of the other
    member.

    (1)     Note.  A vane or abutment adjustable merely for making a better
    seal is not considered proper subject matter for classification here and
    such devices have been classified in subclasses 105 and 106.


CLS 418/24
TXT Apparatus under subclass 16 provided with either a mechanical resilient
    means (e.g., spring) or a fluid pressure means other than that normally
    occurring within the working chamber in the operation of the device tending
    to move either the movable cylinder or portion thereof or the working
    member relative to one another to thereby vary the volumetric capacity of
    the working chamber.

    (1)     Note.  The cylinder or outer member may be the working member or it
    may be in the form of a ring or a segment thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 212+ and especially subclass 220 for rotary
    expansible chamber pumps in which the capacity is varied by a movable
    member (e.g., stator) the member being moved by the pump fluid and there
    being a condition responsive valve control of the pump fluid in its
    application or release to move the member.


CLS 418/25
TXT Apparatus under subclass 24 in which either the cylinder or portion thereof
    or the working member is urged to move in both a direction to enlarge the
    working chamber and a direction opposite thereto.

    (1)     Note.  Not included herein are variable capacity devices pressure
    balanced by fluid or other means, the pressure balancing thereof merely
    facilitating ease of adjustment of the device by other means to thereby
    vary the working chamber dimension.


CLS 418/26
TXT Apparatus under subclass 25 in which the cylinder or the working member is
    urged to move in at least one of the directions by the working fluid.


CLS 418/27
TXT Apparatus under subclass 24 wherein either the cylinder or the working
    member is positively urged in one direction by a resilient mechanical means
    to vary the volumetric capacity of the device.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are devices where the force exerted by
    pressures within the working chamber act against the force exerted by the
    resilient mechanical means.


CLS 418/28
TXT Apparatus under subclass 16 in which a dimension of the working chamber is
    changed by moving a part thereof in a direction along the axis of rotation
    of the working member.


CLS 418/29
TXT Apparatus under subclass 16 in which either the working member or other
    inner rotatable member forming a part of the working chamber is
    translatably adjusted with respect to an adjacent surface of the cylinder
    to thereby vary the volumetric dimension of the working chamber.


CLS 418/30
TXT Apparatus under subclass 16 in which the cylinder or segment thereof is
    hingedly connected for swinging movement to thereby vary the volumetric
    capacity of the working chamber.


CLS 418/31
TXT Apparatus under subclass 16 in which the cylinder or a segment thereof is
    movable in a direction normal to the working member rotational axis, that
    portion of the cylinder or segment thereof nearest the working member, when
    moved, having to or fro straight line movement with respect to the working
    member rotational axis.


CLS 418/32
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which there is provided a means
    movable to one of a plurality of positions in response to a condition of
    operation or a change in the condition of operation of the device to either
    (1) allow reverse rotation of the working member without reversing the
    direction of working fluid flow or (2) allow reverse working fluid flow
    without reversing the direction of working member rotation.


CLS 418/33
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a plurality of members each
    of which is rotatable about a common axis substantially in a common plane
    and having working chamber surfaces rotating in the same path, movement in
    one direction of at least one of the members being alternately and
    relatively increased and retarded whereby to expand and contract the
    working chamber and at least one of the members producing work.

    (1)     Note.  A rotary expansible chamber device having working member
    portions (e.g., vanes, etc.), undergoing relative acceleration and
    declaration only because of either the eccentricity of the device or the
    working chamber design is not deemed proper for classification here.


CLS 418/34
TXT Apparatus under subclass 33 in which one of the members comprises an outer
    movable cylinder having a surface against which motive fluid acts
    surrounding a member having a surface of substantially like dimension
    against which the motive fluid reacts.


CLS 418/35
TXT Apparatus under subclass 33 in which each one of the rotatable members
    produces work.


CLS 418/36
TXT Apparatus under subclass 35 in which the alternate relatively increased and
    retarded movement of each working member is controlled by connecting each
    working member to a separate member of an interengaging rotating member
    group.


CLS 418/37
TXT Apparatus under subclass 35 in which a rotating member rotating about an
    axis other than the rotatable (working) member axis is either, per se,
    connected to the working member or is  connected thereto by an intermediate
    member to rotate simultaneously therewith for alternately increasing and
    decreasing the speed of movement of the working member, a separate rotating
    member being associated with each working member.


CLS 418/38
TXT Apparatus under subclass 35 in which working member movement is controlled
    by coacting elements one of which has a surface or groove of irregular
    contour for controlling the movements of the other elements and the working
    member associated therewith.


CLS 418/39
TXT Apparatus under the class definition, (A) adapted to be rearranged to
    perform different functions or (B) adapted to be altered so as to operate
    in a different way or change its function or enhance its operation in some
    way by (1) disassembling the apparatus in some portion and then
    reassembling the apparatus with the same or different portion, (2)
    disassembling some portion from the apparatus, or (3) assembling some
    portion of the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  A mere adjustment of some part of the rotary expansible
    chamber device merely to perfect its cooperation with another part of the
    device is not considered proper for classification here.  Such devices will
    be found in subclasses 104+.

    (2)     Note.  A portion of a rotary expansible chamber device, such as for
    example a working chamber liner which is adapted to be reversed, replaced,
    removed or added to present a new working member engaging surface but which
    does not change the mode of operation of the device is excluded from this
    subclass, however, where such a change effects a change in the size or
    shape of the device, classification is in this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  A reversible device in which is provided either a plurality
    of vanes or a plurality of abutments, some of which are placed in a
    nonworking position while the remaining ones are in a working position and
    vice versa depending on the desired direction of rotation of the working
    member is not considered to be convertible for classification here.  Such
    devices are found in subclass 239.


CLS 418/40
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which means responsive to the speed
    of rotation of the working member is provided to govern the speed of
    rotation of the working member whereby an optimum speed of rotation thereof
    may not be exceeded.

    (1)     Note.  The means may be adjustable to adapt the working member of
    the device to operate at but not exceed any desired working member speed of
    rotation.


CLS 418/41
TXT Apparatus under subclass 40 in which the means comprises a mass of solid
    material subject to a centrifugal force commensurate with the speed of
    rotation of the working member and movable in a direction to, per se,
    impede working fluid flow through the expansible chamber device when an
    optimum speed of working member rotation tends to be exceeded.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this definition is an enlarged mass of solid
    material and any other element rigidly connected therewith.


CLS 418/42
TXT Apparatus under subclass 40 in which the means comprises a rotating mass of
    solid material which is mounted either (1) to an outer surface of the
    working member or (2) to the working member within the confines of its
    periphery.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185,    for a working member having an inlet or an outlet passage
    therethrough controlled by a movable flow restricting means positioned
    therein.


CLS 418/43
TXT Apparatus under subclass 40 in which the means comprises a mass of solid
    material which rotates about an axis either (1) coincident with or (2)
    parallel to the working member axis of rotation.


CLS 418/44
TXT Apparatus under subclass 43 in which the mass of solid material rotates
    about an axis other than the axis of rotation of the working member.


CLS 418/45
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the working chamber is formed
    at least in part by a flexible wall, said wall being progressively
    distorted by contact with a member external thereto having a surface
    substantially circumferentially coextensive therewith to expand or contract
    the working chamber.

    (1)     Note.  For a definition of collapsible wall, see Class 92,
    Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 89.

    (2)     Note.  A flexible coating material forming a surface of the working
    chamber disclosed merely for wear prevention, sealing, protection against
    corrosiveness, etc., of the coated part is not considered to be a flexible
    wall for classification here.  See this class, subclass 152 and the notes
    therein for rotary expansible chamber devices having parts either coated
    with or made of non-metallic material.


CLS 418/46
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the rotary expansible chamber
    device is provided with either (1) a trap or screen means to respectively
    collect or separate solid foreign material from the working fluid either in
    the working chamber or at the inlet or outlet thereto or (2) an enlargement
    of a working chamber part especially designed for allowing passage of solid
    foreign material laden working fluid through the working chamber of the
    device, the trap or screen means or the enlargement of the working chamber
    part enhancing the operation of the expansible chamber device.

    (1)     Note.  Not included under part 2 of this definition are devices
    wherein there is included a seal, wear or other coating means forming part
    of the working chamber surface which may either be moved by or absorb the
    abrasive effect of the working fluid and any solid impurities therein.  Nor
    are devices wherein the working member or the cylinder is made of
    nonmetallic material included here.  However, such devices provided with an
    additional enlarged means especially designed for coping with solid foreign
    material in the working fluid are deemed proper for classification here.

    (2)     Note.  The removal of foreign particles from between substantially
    contacting relatively moving surfaces of the device by flushing with either
    pressurized fluid or mere leakage fluid is not considered proper for
    classification here.  Such devices have been classified on other features.

    (3)     Note.  A working fluid may include solid particles not considered
    to be foreign material (e.g., cement, wood pulp, etc.).


CLS 418/47
TXT Apparatus under subclass 46 wherein there is provided a screen device to
    strain incoming working fluid.


CLS 418/48
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which a cylinder and a rotating
    working member of substantially like axial extent have interfitting
    internal and external helical surfaces of unlike pitch, rotation of the
    working member causing relative gyratory movement between the cylinder and
    the working member to thereby expand and contact the working chamber.

    (1)     Note.  Such devices wherein the cylinder is the working member are
    considered proper for classification here.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein are devices in which the cylinder is made of
    a tubular material, helical surfaces thereon being formed by the helical
    surfaces of the working member pressing thereagainst.


CLS 418/49
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the working member includes a
    working chamber forming surface having cyclic wobbling or undulating motion
    and having progressively moving line contact with a complementary working
    chamber forming surface of another member to thereby produce a rotating
    working chamber, the central axis of the working member describing a cone
    whose apex is the point about which the working member wobbles.


CLS 418/50
TXT Apparatus under subclass 49 in which the working member or other working
    chamber part is either made of or coated with a nonmetallic material.

    (1)     Note.  A mere seal means made of nonmetallic material is not
    considered proper for classification here.  See subclasses 104 for
    mechanical sealing and 152 for a nonmetallic working member, cylinder or
    partition.


CLS 418/51
TXT Apparatus under subclass 49 in which either the working member or the other
    member is provided with a movable, expandable, adjustable or deformable
    means for engaging the other of said members to oppose the passage of
    working fluid therepast to constrain the working fluid to move in a
    prescribed path of flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    and the subclasses thereunder for other rotary expansible chamber
    devices having sealing means.


CLS 418/52
TXT Apparatus under subclass 49 in which a single working member has opposed
    working surfaces, each of which forms a movable surface of a separate
    working chamber for expanding and contracting the working chamber.


CLS 418/53
TXT Apparatus under subclass 52 in which the working chambers are spaced in a
    direction generally along or parallel to the working member axis about
    which it wobbles.


CLS 418/54
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the working member either (1)
    rotates about its axis while the axis moves in an orbit or (2) has circular
    translatory or oscillatory movement without rotation or substantial
    rotation about its axis while the axis moves in an orbit.


CLS 418/55.1
TXT Helical working member, e.g., scroll:
    Apparatus under subclass 54 in which the working member includes continuous
    working portions in the form of a spiral either (1) lying in the same plane
    and having increasing radius or (2) extending axially.


CLS 418/55.2
TXT Having specific wrap or end plate, e.g., shape, material, coating:Apparatus
    under subclass 55.1 in which the end plate or wrap has a specific shape, or
    coating or is made out of a specific material.


CLS 418/55.3
TXT With specific rotation preventing or rotation coupling means:Apparatus
    under subclass 55.1 in which (1) a locking means prevents the moveable
    scroll from rotating and forces the moveable scroll to move in an orbital
    motion or (2) a connecting means joins both scrolls for relative movement
    about an eccentric axis.


CLS 418/55.4
TXT With mechanical sealing:
    Apparatus under subclass 55.1 in which a means is provided to prevent
    leaking of the working fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclass 398 for a relatively rotatable radially extending sealing
    face member (e.g., face, mechanical, etc.) that accommodates or exhibits
    eccentric, gyratory, or oscillatory motion or subclasses 399+ for a
    relatively rotatable radially extending sealing face member (e.g., face,
    mechanical, etc.) having a particular configuration.


CLS 418/55.5
TXT With biasing means, e.g., axial or radial:
    Apparatus under subclass 55.1 in which a means is provided to keep the
    scrolls in sealing engagement.


CLS 418/55.6
TXT With lubricant, liquid seal or nonworking fluid separation:
    Apparatus under subclass 55.1 in which a means is provided to remove a
    lubricant, liquid seal or nonworking fluid from the working fluid.


CLS 418/56
TXT Apparatus under subclass 54 in which the working member, cylinder or
    partition element is either made of or coated with a nonmetallic material.

    (1)     Note.  A mere seal means made of nonmetallic material is not
    classifiable here.  Classification of such devices will be made on other
    features.


CLS 418/57
TXT Apparatus under subclass 54 in which means is provided to either (1)
    selectively move the working member with respect to the cylinder wall
    surface or (2) positively urge the working member into sealing engagement
    with the cylinder wall surface by a spring or other biasing means as the
    working member moves incident to the expansion and contraction of the
    working chamber.


CLS 418/58
TXT Apparatus under subclass 54 in which there is provided either (1) a
    plurality of working members mounted to rotate in the same or different
    working chambers or (2) two or more working chambers.


CLS 418/59
TXT Apparatus under subclass 58 in which at least one working chamber surrounds
    another.


CLS 418/60
TXT Apparatus under subclass 58 in which at least one of the plurality of
    working members is spaced in the direction of or along the rotational axis
    of one other working member.


CLS 418/61.1
TXT Circumferentially spaced working chambers:

    Apparatus under subclass 58 in which there is provided a plurality of
    working chambers spaced about the periphery of the working member, the
    working chambers being successively alternately filled and exhausted by the
    oscillating rotating motion of the working member.


CLS 418/61.2
TXT Rotor has one more than cylinder (i.e., wankel type):

    Apparatus under subclass 61.1 wherein the working member has one lobe more
    than the number of working chambers.


CLS 418/61.3
TXT Rotor has one less lobe than cylinder (i.e., gerotor type):

    Apparatus under subclass 61.1 wherein the working member has one lobe less
    than the number of working chambers.


CLS 418/62
TXT Apparatus under subclass 54 in which a bladelike element is hingedly
    connected to both the working member and to the cylinder.


CLS 418/63
TXT Apparatus under subclass 54 in which there is provided a displaceable
    divider element mounted on either the cylinder member or the working member
    but engaging the other member and moving incident to the expansion and
    contraction of the working chamber to separate the low and high pressure
    zones of the working chamber.


CLS 418/64
TXT Apparatus under subclass 63 in which the divider element has reciprocal
    movement in the working member.


CLS 418/65
TXT Apparatus under subclass 63 in which the divider element is provided with a
    passage means to allow ingress or egress of the working fluid.

    (1)     Note.  A blade-like partition element having a passage for
    pressurized working fluid for biasing the blade-like partition element but
    not for intake or exhaust of working fluid to or from the working chamber
    is not classifiable here.  See subclass 249 for fluid biased abutments and
    subclasses 267 and 268 for fluid biased vanes.


CLS 418/66
TXT Apparatus under subclass 63 in which the divider element and the working
    member are either (1) inseparable component parts of a unitary structure or
    (2) are separable parts rigidly connected for concurrent movement.


CLS 418/67
TXT Apparatus under subclass 63 in which the divider element is hingedly
    connected to the working member.


CLS 418/68
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which in addition to rotary
    movement a rotating internal member has periodic to-and-fro movement
    incident to the expansion and contraction of the working chamber.


CLS 418/69
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which (1) there is provided in the
    working member drive a weakened member designed to break or rupture on
    overload of the working member to thereby discontinue the drive or (2) a
    releasable means is provided in the drive connected to the working member
    for interrupting the drive either in response to a condition of operation
    of the device or at the will of an operator.


CLS 418/70
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the device is made of
    detachably secured parts which are readily assembled or disassembled by
    manually operable securing means only and without the aid or use of a tool
    means.

    (1)     Note.  The manually operable securing means may include an enlarged
    portion or a portion so made as to provide a mechanical advantage to
    thereby facilitate manual assembly or disassembly of the device.


CLS 418/71
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which radial forces or bias acting
    on a rotating member periphery because of fluid pressure in a pressure area
    or zone comprising part of the working chamber is substantially
    counterbalanced by an opposing area or zone of substantially equal pressure
    acting either on the rotating member periphery or the mounting means
    therefor.

    (1)     Note.  A counterbalancing zone or force may be in a resultant
    direction substantially opposite a resultant zone or force.

    (2)     Note.  The mere filling of intervene or inter-tooth spaces which
    may also tend to counter-balance the radial forces caused by exhaust or
    inlet fluid pressure is not deemed proper for classification here; nor are
    opposing inlet or outlet zones, per se, considered proper for
    classification here.  Such devices are classified on other features.


CLS 418/72
TXT Apparatus under subclass 71 in which the opposing fluid zones are spaced
    about the rotating member periphery and are inter-connected by passage
    means extending through the rotating member.


CLS 418/73
TXT Apparatus under subclass 71 wherein at least one of the opposing fluid
    zones is at the journal means for the rotating member.


CLS 418/74
TXT Apparatus under subclass 71 in which at least one of the opposing fluid
    zones comprises a part of the working chamber and the counterbalancing
    fluid directed thereto pressurizes the space between adjacent vane or tooth
    surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180,    for similar devices wherein pressurized fluid at the high pressure
    working chamber zone is directed to a lower pressure working chamber zone.


CLS 418/75
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which there is provided an
    elongate, relatively shallow recess or depression of substantially the same
    cross-sectional dimension along its center line on at least one-side
    surface of either one of the adjacent substantially engaging cylinder or
    rotating member side surface, the recess or depression being other than the
    inlet or outlet or a part of the inlet or outlet of the device.

    (1)     Note.  The recess or depression may be fluidly connected to the
    inlet or outlet of the device or may be connected to a source of nonworking
    fluid or it may collect leakage pressure fluid only.

    (2)     Note.  The recess or depression enhances the operation of the
    device and may be used for lubricating, cooling, sealing, balancing,
    conducting fluid to or from a vane slot, etc.

    (3)     Note.  A mere port is not considered proper for classification
    here, however, a port having a flared mouth portion is considered
    classifiable here.  Otherwise, the elongate shallow recess or depression
    has substantially the same dimensions about its center line for a
    substantial portion of its length.


CLS 418/76
TXT Apparatus under subclass 75 in which fluid other than working fluid is
    positively directed to the shallow recess or depression.

    (1)     Note.  Devices having grooves receiving leakage fluid whether
    working non working or a mixture thereof are not considered proper for
    classification here.  See subclass 75 and subclasses 77 through 82 for
    similarly grooved devices.


CLS 418/77
TXT Apparatus under subclass 75 in which the working member is provided with
    the shallow recess or depression.


CLS 418/78
TXT Apparatus under subclass 75 in which the shallow recess or groove traverses
    a plurality of spaces formed in part by adjacent sides of adjacent vanes or
    tooth-like projections on a working member, one end of the shallow recess
    or groove terminating in zone of higher or lower fluid pressure to at least
    sequentially interconnect the spaces with the fluid pressure zone.


CLS 418/79
TXT Apparatus under subclass 75 in which the shallow recess or depression has
    parallel sides or edges parallel to a radial line therebetween extending
    from the axis of rotation of the working member.


CLS 418/80
TXT Apparatus under subclass 75 in which an abutting surface has a plurality of
    spaced shallow recesses or depressions of which at least two are spaced at
    unequal distances from the working member axis of rotation.

    (1)     Note.  Two or more members may combine to form the abutting surface.


CLS 418/81
TXT Apparatus under subclass 75 in which the abutting surface is provided with
    a ring-like recess or depression extending entirely around the working
    member axis of rotation.

    (1)     Note.  The recess or depression may be formed by surface portions
    of each of a plurality of members, one of which having a surface in
    abutting relationship with the adjacent working member surface.


CLS 418/82
TXT Apparatus under subclass 75 in which the elongated recess or depression
    lies in a path traversed by the vane slot of a rotating working member for
    fluid communication therebetween.


CLS 418/83
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which there is provided means to
    either (1) heat or cool either the working or the nonworking fluid or any
    part of the device, (2) direct a fluid other than working fluid to the
    device or to the working fluid to provide a film or coating between
    adjacent surfaces of a plurality of relatively moving parts to prevent
    direct rubbing contact therebetween or passage of working fluid therepast
    or (3) at least partially immerse the device in a nonworking liquid whereby
    to enhance the operation of the device.

    (1)     Note.  A lubricating or sealing agent comprising nonworking finely
    divided solids having flow characteristics of a fluid, performing a
    lubricating or  sealing function under part 2 of the above definition is
    considered proper for classification here.


CLS 418/84
TXT Apparatus under 83 in which there is provided means for sensing either a
    condition of operation or a change in a condition of operation of the
    device and for controlling nonworking fluid flow in response thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclass 228 for similar subject matter in which the pump is
    of the reciprocating type.


CLS 418/85
TXT Apparatus under subclass 83 wherein the nonworking fluid is itself heated
    or cooled by means specifically designed to either add or remove heat
    therefrom prior to its entry to the device or working parts thereof.


CLS 418/86
TXT Apparatus under subclass 83 in which the working fluid either prior to
    entering or upon leaving the working chamber is caused to follow a tortuous
    path thereabout for either giving off or absorbing heat in the operation of
    the device.

    (1)     Note.  Incidental heat exchange by working fluid entering or
    leaving the working chamber of the device by the most direct or expeditious
    path is not considered proper for classification here.  Also, diversion of
    a portion of the working fluid merely for lubrication purposes but which
    may incidentally cool is not considered proper for classification here and
    classification of such devices will be based on other features.


CLS 418/87
TXT Apparatus under subclass 83 in which the flow of nonworking fluid to the
    relatively moving surfaces may be varied by the adjustment of a movable
    flow restrictive means in the path of flow.


CLS 418/88
TXT Apparatus under subclass 83 in which nonworking fluid is positively applied
    to the device or part thereof by a fluid displacement device having a
    movable fluid displacing element for impelling the nonworking fluid thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    for devices in which a fan or other air impelling means directs air
    to an outer surface of the device to remove heat therefrom generated in the
    operation of the device.


CLS 418/89
TXT Apparatus under subclass 83 provided with porous means to remove physical
    impurities from the nonworking fluid.


CLS 418/90
TXT Apparatus under subclass 83 in which the nonworking fluid is fed by means
    of the capillary action of an element either to the incoming working fluid
    for contacting therewith the relatively moving parts of the device or
    directly to one of the relatively movable parts of the device.


CLS 418/91
TXT Apparatus under subclass 83 in which an inner working or reacting member is
    provided with a flow path or passageway for conducing nonworking fluid
    therethrough.

    (1)     Note.  The working and nonworking fluid may be intermixed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    for rotary expansible chamber devices having a central passage
    therethrough open to the atmosphere combined with ambient air impelling
    means to move the air through the passage for removing heat generated in
    the operation of the device.  However, similar devices in which the working
    member has at least one passage portion extending generally radially so
    that air passing therethrough is caused to approach the working member
    circumferentially periphery to remove heat therefrom are classified here.


CLS 418/92
TXT Apparatus under subclass 91 comprising a working member with a vane wherein
    the nonworking fluid flow path includes a passageway or duct means through
    the vane.


CLS 418/93
TXT Apparatus under subclass 91 in which the device includes a vane which is
    moved into cylinder wall engagement either by (1) pressurized nonworking
    fluid directed to the vane slot or (2) pressurized working fluid combined
    with a nonworking fluid directed to the vane slot.


CLS 418/94
TXT Apparatus under subclass 91 in which the flow path for the nonworking fluid
    includes a duct means in the drive shaft of the device.


CLS 418/95
TXT Apparatus under subclass 83 in which the working and nonworking fluids are
    in separate compartments of the device and including means intermediate the
    compartments to divert or vent away either fluid tending to move in a
    direction to mix with the other fluid.

    (1)     Note.  A mere seal means between the two compartments is not
    considered proper for classification here.  See subclass 104 for such
    subject matter.


CLS 418/96
TXT Apparatus under subclass 83 in which the device is placed in a liquid so
    that the cylinder thereof is at least partially covered thereby.


CLS 418/97
TXT Apparatus under subclass 83 in which the nonworking fluid enters the
    working chamber of the device to mix with the working fluid therein either
    (1) by directly conducting the nonworking fluid to the working chamber or
    (2) by the leakage or flow of the nonworking fluid thereto after being
    initially directed to another part of the device.


CLS 418/98
TXT Apparatus under subclass 97 in which the nonworking fluid is initially
    directed to impinge on the shaft trunnions or bearings of the device from
    whence it passes to enter into a zone of lower pressure of the working
    chamber.


CLS 418/99
TXT Apparatus under subclass 97 in which the nonworking fluid is initially
    directed to impinge against the working member from whence it passes to
    enter into a zone of lower pressure of the working chamber.


CLS 418/100
TXT Apparatus under subclass 83 in which the nonworking fluid is initially
    directed so as to unite with the working fluid prior to its entry into the
    working chamber of the device.


CLS 418/101
TXT Apparatus under subclass 83 in which there is provided either a means to
    produce and direct a current of air to a surface of the rotary expansible
    chamber device or a projection means on the cylinder surface for
    dissipating heat to the atmosphere whereby heat generated in the operation
    of the device is removed therefrom.


CLS 418/102
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which at least part of the working
    fluid is directed by means of a passageway to another part of the device to
    provide a film or coating between adjacent surfaces of relatively moving
    parts to prevent direct rubbing contact therebetween or passage of working
    fluid or ambient air therepast.


CLS 418/103
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the working member includes a
    plurality of parts having working chamber surface portions movable relative
    to each other in the direction of working member rotation as the working
    member rotates.


CLS 418/104
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which a working chamber part
    comprising either the working member, cylinder or partition member is
    provided with a movable, expansible, adjustable or deformable means having
    at least substantial engagement with another working chamber part to oppose
    the passage of working fluid therepast to constrain the working fluid to
    move in a prescribed path of flow.

    (1)     Note.  The means may include an adjustable working member or
    cylinder.

    (2)     Note.  A movable vane or abutment moved incident to the expansion
    and contraction of the expandable chamber is not considered to be sealing,
    however, if additionally to such a vane or abutment there is provided a
    movable, expandable, adjustable or deformable means enabling closer
    tolerances to be maintained between the relatively moving parts to thereby
    oppose the passage of fluid therebetween such is considered to be sealing
    and proper for classification here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179,    for rotary expansion chamber devices made of specific or diverse
    materials whereby sealing may be obtained or maintained solely by the
    difference in expansion characteristics of the material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclass 357 for a dynamic seal for a rotary piston.


CLS 418/105
TXT Apparatus under subclass 104 in which the abutment is movable and is
    provided with an adjusting means for repositioning the abutment to
    compensate for wear.


CLS 418/106
TXT Apparatus under subclass 104 wherein the vane is movable and is provided
    with an adjusting means for repositioning the vane to compensate for wear.


CLS 418/107
TXT Apparatus under subclass 104 in which the working member and the cylinder
    are bodily movable relative to each other for establishing or maintaining a
    line or arcuate surface of contact therebetween to oppose the passage of
    working fluid therepast.


CLS 418/108
TXT Apparatus under subclass 107 in which the working member and the cylinder
    are mounted for relative movement normal to the axis of rotation.


CLS 418/109
TXT Apparatus under subclass 108 wherein the working member is mounted for
    adjustment normal to its axis of rotation.


CLS 418/110
TXT Apparatus under subclass 104 wherein the working member comprises a
    plurality of axially movable portions of substantial dimension, each having
    a side surface movable into sealing relationship with a respective cylinder
    side.


CLS 418/111
TXT Apparatus under subclass 104 wherein a vane or an abutment comprises a
    plurality of axially movable portions of substantial dimension having end
    surfaces movable into sealing relationships with respective cylinder sides.

    (1)     Note.  A vane or abutment provided with axially movable seal means
    at its ends to engage the cylinder sides is not considered to comprise a
    plurality of axially movable portions of substantial dimension and is
    classified in the appropriate sealing subclasses below.


CLS 418/112
TXT Apparatus under subclass 104 in which the movable, expandable, adjustable
    or deformable means is mounted on the working member periphery to have
    wiping contact with the cylinder peripheral surface.


CLS 418/113
TXT Apparatus under subclass 112 wherein the working member includes a
    protruding (e.g., apex) portion on its periphery which is provided with a
    movable, expandable, adjustable or deformable means for engaging a cylinder
    working chamber surface to oppose the passage of working fluid therepast
    and wherein the movable, expandable, adjustable or movable means does not
    move or is a part of a member that moves incident to the expansion or
    contraction of the working chamber.


CLS 418/114
TXT Apparatus under subclass 113 wherein the working member includes a
    protruding part that is either (1) fixedly repositionable thereon or (2)
    integral therewith but extendable thereon, the part being movable to
    sealingly engage another working chamber surface.


CLS 418/115
TXT Apparatus under subclass 113 in which the movable, expandable, adjustable
    or deformable means is either (1) interconnected with a weight so that
    outward movement thereto because of centrifugal force is at least partially
    counterbalanced by the weight or (2) is fixedly attached to the working
    member and is adapted to be moved to at least one other fixed position
    thereon.


CLS 418/116
TXT Apparatus under subclass 113 in which the movable, expandable, adjustable
    or deformable means is at least in part, in the form of a circular band or
    loop and lies in a plane generally normal to the direction of working
    member rotation.


CLS 418/117
TXT Apparatus under subclass 113 in which there is provided at least two
    separate, movable, expandable, adjustable or deformable means on a
    protruding portion of the working member for engaging the cylinder working
    chamber surface.


CLS 418/118
TXT Apparatus under subclass 113 in which the deformable, expandable,
    adjustable or deformable means has an end portion pivotally secured to the
    working member, the other end being movably maintained in wiping contact
    with the cylinder working chamber peripheral surface to oppose the passage
    of working fluid therepast.


CLS 418/119
TXT Apparatus under subclass 113 in which the movable, expandable, adjustable
    or deformable means includes an elongate side portion integral or immovably
    fixed therewith of substantially greater radial dimension to depend
    therefrom for engaging the working chamber cylinder side surface.


CLS 418/120
TXT Apparatus under subclass 113 in which the movable, expandable, adjustable
    or deformable means is movable in a direction along or parallel to the
    working member rotational axis.


CLS 418/121
TXT Apparatus under subclass 120 in which the movable, expandable, adjustable
    or deformable means is positively urged to engage a cylinder working
    chamber side surface by means of a resilient, deformable, mechanical device.


CLS 418/122
TXT Apparatus under subclass 113 in which the means for urging the movable,
    expandable or deformable means includes a resilient mechanical device.


CLS 418/123
TXT Apparatus under subclass 122 in which the means for urging the movable,
    expandable or deformable means includes a pressurized fluid.


CLS 418/124
TXT Apparatus under subclass 113 in which the means for urging the movable,
    expandable or deformable means comprises a pressurized fluid.


CLS 418/125
TXT Apparatus under subclass 104 in which the movable, expandable, adjustable
    or deformable means is mounted on the cylinder to have wiping contact with
    the rotary member periphery to prevent leakage of fluid therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191,    for interengaging rotary members and see the search note to this
    subclass (125) in the definition thereto for the distinction between
    similar subject matter in these subclasses.


CLS 418/126
TXT Apparatus under subclass 125 in which the expandable, movable, adjustable
    or deformable means has wiping contact with the periphery of each of a
    plurality of rotary members.


CLS 418/127
TXT Apparatus under subclass 125 in which means is provided to selectively move
    the movable, expandable, adjustable or deformable means into sealing
    engagement with the rotary member surface.


CLS 418/128
TXT Apparatus under subclass 127 in which there is provided an elastic biasing
    means intermediate the selective moving means and the movable, expandable,
    adjustable or deformable means to urge the last mentioned means into
    engagement with the rotary member surface.


CLS 418/129
TXT Apparatus under subclass 125 in which there is provided an elastic biasing
    means to urge the expandable, movable, adjustable or deformable means into
    engagement with the rotary member surface.


CLS 418/130
TXT Apparatus under subclass 104 in which there is provided an axially movable
    cylinder member having an annular, axially extending lip portion abutting
    an adjacent cylinder surface portion to thereby oppose the passage of
    working fluid therepast, the axially movable cylinder member and the
    adjacent cylinder surface cooperating to produce a cavity in which a member
    having a peripheral surface forming part of the working chamber is housed.


CLS 418/131
TXT Apparatus under subclass 104 in which the cylinder comprises a side plate
    or end wall or a portion thereof having a face or surface axially movable
    into engagement with the adjacent working member side face or surface to
    oppose the passage of working fluid therepast.


CLS 418/132
TXT Apparatus under subclass 131 wherein the side plate or end wall is urged
    into sealing  engagement with the side of the working member, the urging
    thereof being in opposition to and at least substantially commensurate with
    the differing working fluid pressures within the working chamber as the
    working fluid moves from inlet to outlet thereof.


CLS 418/133
TXT Apparatus under subclass 131 wherein the side of the end wall engaging the
    working member has a portion abutting an adjacent face or surface portion
    of the cylinder which is coplanar with the working member face, the
    cylinder being either fixed or moving.


CLS 418/134
TXT Apparatus under subclass 131 in which means is provided to selectively move
    the end plate into sealing engagement with the adjacent working member side
    surface.

    (1)     Note.  An end plate or wall may consist of a ring-like plate member
    having a surface forming a complete wall of the working chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140+,   for ring-like members for providing a seal means between the
    working member and cylinder and which may incidentally form a surface
    portion of the working chamber.


CLS 418/135
TXT Apparatus under subclass 131 wherein a resilient mechanical means urges the
    end plate or wall into engagement with the working member side.


CLS 418/136
TXT Apparatus under subclass 104 in which the means is mounted on either the
    working member or the vane but engages the other to oppose the passage of
    working fluid therepast.


CLS 418/137
TXT Apparatus under subclass 136 wherein the means opposing the passage of
    working fluid is mounted on the working member.


CLS 418/138
TXT Apparatus under subclass 137 in which the means opposing passage of working
    fluid is rockable about its axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241,    for similar devices in which a seal element between the working
    member and the vane is not provided.


CLS 418/139
TXT Apparatus under subclass 104 provided with a movable abutment and means
    mounted thereon or on either the working member or the cylinder for
    engagement therebetween to oppose the passage of fluid therepast.


CLS 418/140
TXT Apparatus under subclass 104 provided with a means mounted on either the
    cylinder or the working member but either engaging the other or having
    slight clearance with the other to oppose the passage of fluid therepast.


CLS 418/141
TXT Apparatus under subclass 140 wherein the means opposing the passage of
    fluid comprises a succession of baffles having slight clearance with each
    other to impede the passage of fluid by the tortuous path made thereby.


CLS 418/142
TXT Apparatus under subclass 140 wherein the means opposing the passage of
    fluid is mounted or positioned on the working member.


CLS 418/143
TXT Apparatus under subclass 142 wherein the means opposing the passage of
    fluid is mounted or positioned on the working member circumferential
    surface.


CLS 418/144
TXT Apparatus under subclass 140 wherein the means opposing the passage of
    fluid is mounted or positioned on the side surfaces (i.e., end face) of the
    cylinder to engage the adjacent side surface of the working member.


CLS 418/145
TXT Apparatus subclass 104 in which the working member is provided with a
    movable vane having a movable, expandable, adjustable or deformable means
    mounted thereon for engaging the cylinder to oppose the passage of working
    fluid therepast.


CLS 418/146
TXT Apparatus under subclass 145 in which the means opposing the passage of
    fluid is mounted to extend beyond the side edge of the vane to engage the
    adjacent working chamber surface.


CLS 418/147
TXT Apparatus under subclass 145 in which the means opposing the passage of
    fluid is movable mounted or positioned on the vane.


CLS 418/148
TXT Apparatus under subclass 147 in which the means opposing the passage of
    fluid is movable and is biased into engagement or maintained in engagement
    with the cylinder surface by means other than an inherent property of the
    opposing means.

    (1)     Note.  For example, gravity, centrifugal force, and elasticity are
    deemed to be inherent properties of a sealing element.


CLS 418/149
TXT Apparatus under subclass 104 provided with means mounted or positioned on a
    cylinder portion to engage another cylinder portion to oppose the passage
    of fluid therepast.


CLS 418/150
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which either the cylinder or
    working member surface forming part of the expansible working chamber is
    represented in a claim by a mathematical formula or equation.


CLS 418/151
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the device is provided with a
    mass of material rotatable with the working member and positioned so that
    it at least partially opposes unbalanced forces of either (1) the rotating
    working member or (2) a movable part thereon moving incident to the
    expansion and contraction of the working chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210,    for devices in which axially spaced rotating working members
    counterbalance each other.


CLS 418/152
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the working member, cylinder,
    vane or abutment is either made of or coated with a nonmetallic material.

    (1)     Note.  A mere seal means made of nonmetallic material for the vane,
    abutment or working member is excluded here.  See subclass 104 for such
    seals.


CLS 418/153
TXT Apparatus under subclass 152 in which the nonmetallic material is a
    deformable elastic material.


CLS 418/154
TXT Apparatus under subclass 153 in which the working member is provided with a
    vane member thereon, the working member and the vane member comprising a
    resilient impartible unit of manufacture.


CLS 418/155
TXT Apparatus under subclass 154 in which the vane extends axially from a
    working member side to engage and be deflected by the undulating surface of
    the opposing working chamber side to expand and contract the working
    chamber.


CLS 418/156
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the working member, cylinder
    or a partition element on either the working member or the cylinder
    comprises a flexible working chamber portion flexing relative to the
    expansion and contraction of the working chamber.


CLS 418/157
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which a portion of either the
    cylinder or the working member peripheral working chamber surface comprises
    either a nonmetallic resilient segment or a resiliently biased segment to
    cushion either relatively moving parts of the device at a cyclically
    occurring, direction changing movement of a part thereof or to temporarily
    accommodate or relieve a working fluid condition tending to exceed the
    capacity of the working chamber.


CLS 418/158
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which a vane or an abutment is
    urged to move at least in one direction by a magnetic field.


CLS 418/159
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the cylinder includes a
    normally stationary working chamber surface portion or part that is
    selectively movable and when moved, an edge portion thereof adjacent either
    the working fluid inlet or outlet controllably modifies working fluid flow
    therepast.


CLS 418/160
TXT Apparatus under the class definition wherein the working chamber comprises
    an outer movable member surrounding a member of substantially like axial
    dimension, adjacent spaced surfaces of which form the working chamber; a
    boundary thereof against which working fluid reacts being formed by the
    convergence of the adjacent surfaces whereby line contact therebetween is
    substantially maintained and at least one of the members being a working
    member.


CLS 418/161
TXT Apparatus under subclass 160 in which the outer cylinder member revolves
    about its axis.


CLS 418/162
TXT Apparatus under subclass 161 in which there is provided a barrier member
    for separating the inlet from the outlet having surface portions forming
    part of the working chamber surface, the barrier member moving or having
    relative movement with a working chamber surface in a direction along or
    parallel to the axis of rotation of the working member incident to the
    expansion and contraction of the working member.


CLS 418/163
TXT Apparatus under subclass 162 wherein the inner member forming part of the
    working chamber surface rotates about an axis that is at an angle to the
    axis of rotation of the cylinder.


CLS 418/164
TXT Apparatus under subclass 161 wherein the inner member forming part of the
    working chamber is continuously rotatable about a fixed or movable axis.


CLS 418/165
TXT Apparatus under subclass 164 in which two or more rotating members each
    rotating about a separate axis are encompassed by the cylinder.


CLS 418/166
TXT Apparatus under subclass 164 wherein the rotating outer and inner members
    have matched projecting and recessed surface portions of substantially like
    dimension which interfit during at least a portion of their rotative
    movement.


CLS 418/167
TXT Apparatus under subclass 166 in which the internal reacting member is
    provided with an opening through which working fluid enters or leaves the
    working chamber.


CLS 418/168
TXT Apparatus under subclass 166 in which the recessed portion of the cylinder
    comprises a through passage.


CLS 418/169
TXT Apparatus under subclass 168 provided with a partition separating the
    cylinder and reacting member during a portion of their rotative movement,
    said partition generally being in the shape of a crescent.


CLS 418/170
TXT Apparatus under subclass 166 provided with a partition separating the
    cylinder and reacting member during a portion of their rotative movement,
    said partition generally being in the shape of a crescent.


CLS 418/171
TXT Apparatus under subclass 166 in which rotary internal reacting member is
    provided with five or more projecting portions.


CLS 418/172
TXT Apparatus under subclass 164 wherein either the outer rotating cylinder or
    the member forming the inner surface is provided with a movable divider
    member (e.g., vane or abutment) having a wall or portion thereof forming
    part of the expansible working chamber.


CLS 418/173
TXT Apparatus under subclass 172 wherein the member forming the inner surface
    includes a relatively movable member that slides back and forth therein in
    a direction that is generally radial thereof, said relatively movable
    member also cooperating with the rotating cylinder to form the working
    chamber.


CLS 418/174
TXT Apparatus under subclass 172 wherein the rotating cylinder includes a
    relatively movable member that slides back and forth therein in a direction
    that is generally radial thereof, said relatively movable member also
    cooperating with the inner rotating surface to form the working chamber.


CLS 418/175
TXT Apparatus under subclass 161 wherein the member forming the inner surface
    acting as an abutment against which the motive fluid reacts is stationary
    and is formed with an additional relatively movable member that moves back
    and forth in relation thereto, said relatively movable member also
    cooperating with the outer fluid actuated surface to form the working
    chamber.


CLS 418/176
TXT Apparatus under subclass 161 wherein the rotating cylinder includes a
    relatively movable member that is pivoted thereon to oscillate back and
    forth in relation to said cylinder, said relatively movable member also
    cooperating with the radially spaced inner surface to form the working
    chamber.


CLS 418/177
TXT Apparatus under subclass 161 wherein the rotating cylinder includes a
    relatively movable member that slides back and forth therein in a direction
    transversely of said cylinder, said relatively movable member also
    cooperating with the radially spaced inner surface to form the working
    chamber.


CLS 418/178
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which a part having a surface
    portion comprising a portion of the working chamber is provided at least in
    part with either (1) a coating of a material other than that making up the
    remainder of the part intimately forming an impartible part thereof or (2)
    is made of a single material which has been treated to provide the working
    chamber surface portion with specific properties which properties are
    different from the properties of the remainder of the part.


CLS 418/179
TXT Apparatus under the class definition relating to the particular metal or
    alloy or the properties of either of which the device is made.

    (1)     Note.  The mere recitation of iron or steel, per se, is excluded as
    being too common, however, specifying iron and steel or different types of
    iron and steel would be included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    and the subclasses indented thereunder for such devices having a
    nonmetallic material forming part of the working chamber.

    156,    for such devices in which a resilient metallic material is utilized
    to form a working chamber surface portion.

    178,    for a working chamber plated wear surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 544+ for
    metallic stock material or intermediate articles from which parts for a
    rotary expansible chamber device can be made.


CLS 418/180
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which a passage having an orifice
    conducts working fluid to or from a working chamber portion separate from
    and having a working fluid pressure intermediate the inlet and outlet
    pressures of the working chamber, inlet or outlet pressure communicating
    with the intermediate pressure zone via the passage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for similar devices wherein the pressurized fluid also radially
    balances the working member.


CLS 418/181
TXT Apparatus under the class definition claimed in combination with features
    other than drive means, valving or support structure and not provided for
    in preceding subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclass 321 and the subclasses indented thereunder for the
    combination of a motor driving pump.


CLS 418/182
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which there is provided a loose or
    compensation drive connection either between the working member and its
    drive shaft or between adjacent shaft end portions in the vicinity of the
    working member to allow for slight or temporary axial misalignment
    therebetween.


CLS 418/183
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the working member is
    provided with a fluid passage means through which working fluid passes
    enroute to or from the working chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189+,   for devices in which residual trapped working fluid may escape by
    way of a passage means in the rotating working member.


CLS 418/184
TXT Apparatus under subclass 183 in which the working fluid passage means
    provided in the working member comprises the slot in which a vane moves
    incident to the expansion and contraction of the working chamber.


CLS 418/185
TXT Apparatus under subclass 183 in which the fluid passage means is provided
    with a movable flow restrictive means for controlling the flow of working
    fluid to or from the working chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for a speed controlled flow restrictive means positioned on or
    within an inner rotating member to control working fluid flow.


CLS 418/186
TXT Apparatus under subclass 183 in which the working member is provided with
    passage means through which working fluid passes enroute to and from the
    working chamber.


CLS 418/187
TXT Apparatus under subclass 186 wherein the passage means includes at least
    one working fluid passage passing through or including the working member
    axis of rotation.


CLS 418/188
TXT Apparatus under subclass 183 wherein the passage means includes at least
    one working fluid passage passing through or including the working member
    axis of rotation.


CLS 418/189
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the rotating working member
    either engages another rotating member or a cylinder casing or part thereof
    thereby barring the passage of working fluid therepast and a relief passage
    is provided at the convergence of these elements for the removal of the
    unexhausted residual working fluid normally confined thereat in the
    operation of the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183,    and the subclasses thereunder for devices in which the working
    fluid enroute to or from the working chamber passes through at least a
    portion of the rotating working member.


CLS 418/190
TXT Apparatus under subclass 189 wherein at least one of the rotating members
    has peripheral lobed portions altered to allow for the escape of fluid when
    in meshing relationship with the other rotating member.


CLS 418/191
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which a plurality of members
    rotating about fixed or substantially fixed axes have surface portions
    disposed to maintain or substantially maintain line contact therebetween
    against which pressure fluid reacts to thereby form a boundary of the
    working chamber; at least one of the rotating members being a working
    member.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are rotating members rotating about spaced
    axes, each having portions thereof sweeping a separate one of intersecting
    channels which have radially inward and outward stationary working chamber
    surface, the chambers intersecting at a common line of tangency whereat
    each rotating member may act as an abutment for the other as the members
    rotate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125+,   for a roller means incidentally forming a part of the working
    chamber and functioning merely to perfect the seal relationship between the
    working member and the cylinder at the convergence of their surfaces
    whereby a boundary of the working chamber is formed thereby.

    189+,   for rotary expansible chamber devices of the interengaging rotary
    members type in which provision is made for relieving trapped fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 261, for expansible chamber rotary
    piston meters having interengaging pistons and see the search notes
    thereunder.


CLS 418/192
TXT Apparatus under subclass 191 in which in addition to the interengaging
    rotating members there is provided a relatively movable partition element
    having engagement with either (1) both rotating members or (2) with one of
    the rotating members and the cylinder, the partition element thereby
    forming a wall of the working chamber and moving incident to the expansion
    and contraction of the working chamber.


CLS 418/193
TXT Apparatus under subclass 192 wherein the displaceable partition element is
    moved in a direction along or parallel to the axis of rotation of the
    working member of which it is a part.


CLS 418/194
TXT Apparatus under subclass 101 in which each of the coacting rotating members
    comprises an elongate circumferential surface complementary to the other
    and progressively enlarged or reduced from end to end thereof.


CLS 418/195
TXT Apparatus under subclass 191 in which the axes of a working member and at
    least one other coacting rotating member are not parallel.


CLS 418/196
TXT Apparatus under subclass 191 having three or more rotating members at least
    one of which has a peripheral surface engaging the peripheral surface of
    two or more other rotating members.


CLS 418/197
TXT Apparatus under subclass 196 in which the peripheral surfaces of the
    interengaging rotary members are formed with intermeshing teeth or ribs and
    grooves either in the form of a helix or discontinuous, angularly related,
    straight line segments (i.e., herringbone shape).


CLS 418/198
TXT Apparatus under subclass 191 in which at least one of the rotating members
    partakes of a step by step rotary movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses, for
    mechanical movements providing for step by step rotation.


CLS 418/199
TXT Apparatus under subclass 191 comprising two or more spaced apart sets or
    groups of interengaging rotary members each set or group being, per se,
    capable of performing a pump or motor operation.


CLS 418/200
TXT Apparatus under subclass 199 including a plurality of sets of interengaging
    rotating members which are longitudinally spaced and at least one rotating
    member of each set rotating on a common axis.


CLS 418/201.1
TXT Helical or herringbone:

    Apparatus under subclass 191 wherein the surface portions of the
    interengaging rotary member are formed with intermeshing teeth or ribs and
    grooves, the teeth or ribs and grooves being in the form of a helix or
    discontinuous, angularly related, straight line segment (i.e., herringbone
    shape).


CLS 418/201.2
TXT With valve:

    Apparatus under subclass 201.1 wherein there is provided a means to
    regulate fluid flow.


CLS 418/201.3
TXT Having specific tooth shape:

    Apparatus under subclass 201.1 wherein the teeth or ribs and grooves have
    an explicitly set forth form.


CLS 418/202
TXT Apparatus under subclass 201.1 in which each rotating member includes
    axially spaced ribs or grooves extending thereabout in reverse directions.


CLS 418/203
TXT Apparatus under subclass 201.1 in which the device is provided with a means
    for applying an axial force to at least one of the members in opposition to
    an axial force produced by the member in the operation of the device.

    (1)     Note.  It is not considered that thrust bearings or the like are
    force applying means for classification here.  Such devices have been
    classified on other features.


CLS 418/204
TXT Apparatus under subclass 191 in which at least one rotating  member has a
    substantially circular periphery and is affixed to its shaft to rotate
    therewith on an axis other than its central or symmetrical axis.


CLS 418/205
TXT Apparatus under subclass 191 in which each of the interengaging rotary
    members has the same dimensions and configurations.


CLS 418/206.1
TXT Having each radial protuberance of like dimension:

    Apparatus under subclass 205 in which each tooth or toothlike projection of
    the interengaging rotary members has the same dimensions and configurations.

    (1)     Note. Teeth or projections having the same dimensions and
    configurations except that they are mirror images of each other are
    considered proper subject matter for inclusion here.


CLS 418/206.2
TXT With timing gear adjustment or arrangement:

    Apparatus under subclass 206.1 in which a means to coordinate the rotation
    of the interengaging members can be realigned or has a particular
    configuration.


CLS 418/206.3
TXT With heating or cooling:

    Apparatus under subclass 206.1 comprising means to vary the temperature of
    the apparatus.


CLS 418/206.4
TXT Having specific inlet or outlet port shape:

    Apparatus under subclass 206.1 in which the entrance or exit to a chamber
    has a particular configuration.


CLS 418/206.5
TXT Having specific rotor or tooth shape:

    Apparatus under subclass 206.1 in which the interengaging members have an
    explicitly set forth form.


CLS 418/206.6
TXT With sealing means:

    Apparatus under subclass 206.1 comprising means to prevent leaking of the
    working fluid.


CLS 418/206.7
TXT With bearings:

    Apparatus under subclass 206.1 comprising means to support, guide, and
    reduce the friction between moving parts.


CLS 418/206.8
TXT With lubrication:

    Apparatus under subclass 206.1 comprising a means for supplying a
    substance between moving parts that reduces friction.


CLS 418/206.9
TXT Using specific material:

    Apparatus under subclass 206.1 wherein the chamber or the rotary
    interengaging members are composed of a particular substance.


CLS 418/207
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which there is provided a plurality
    of circular paths or chambers each of which has movable member therein
    having movement relative thereto and relative to each other, the circular
    paths or chambers include a portion common to each and the working chamber
    being formed in part by a surface of one of the movable members and an end
    surface or face of another movable member as the movable members
    alternately move across the common path, or chamber portion.


CLS 418/208
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which there is provided a movable
    partition element having end portions in touching relationship with the
    peripheries of a plurality of spaced parallel working members thereby form
    a boundary of the working chamber or chambers against which working fluid
    react.


CLS 418/209
TXT Apparatus under class definition comprising two or more working chambers,
    each chamber being adapted to receive either a separate rotating working
    member or a separate working face or wall of a rotating member common to
    each working chamber.


CLS 418/210
TXT Apparatus under subclass 209 having a plurality of spaced members rotating
    about the same or different axis, at least one of the members being spaced
    in the direction of or along the rotational axis of another one of the
    rotating members.


CLS 418/211
TXT Apparatus under subclass 210 provided with either a vane or an abutment
    movable in a direction along or parallel to the axis of rotation of the
    rotating members and movable incident to the expansion and contraction of
    the respective working chambers or working chamber portions.


CLS 418/212
TXT Apparatus under subclass 210 in which a divider element is interposed
    between adjacent sides of the rotating members for engagement or
    substantial engagement therewith.


CLS 418/213
TXT Apparatus under subclass 212 in which there is provided three or more
    rotating members and a separate divider element is interposed between
    adjacent ends of adjacent rotating member pairs.


CLS 418/214
TXT Apparatus under subclass 212 in which there is provided at least one
    partition or abutment member for each of the spaced working members against
    which working fluid reacts and means is provided to engage a partition
    member of one working member with a partition member of another working
    member so that a movement of one of the partition members causes a
    concurrent movement of the other partition member.


CLS 418/215
TXT Apparatus under subclass 209 wherein the chambers are axially spaced.


CLS 418/216
TXT Apparatus under subclass 215 in which there is provided in each working
    chamber a working member or a working portion thereof

    in the form of a helix, the helix extending along or generally parallel to
    the working member axis of rotation.

    (1)     Note.  Devices in which a working chamber is partitioned by a
    member in the form of a helix so that a working chamber is formed on each
    side thereof are considered proper for classification here.


CLS 418/217
TXT Apparatus under subclass 215 in which either an abutment or a vane is
    movable along or parallel to the axis of rotation of the working member.


CLS 418/218
TXT Apparatus under subclass 217 in which the moving vane or abutment is
    mounted to move incident to the expansion and contraction of the working
    chamber about an axis other than either (1) the axis of rotation of the
    working member or (2) an axis parallel thereto.


CLS 418/219
TXT Apparatus under subclass 217 provided with a vane that is movable in a
    direction along or parallel to the axis of rotation of the rotating members.


CLS 418/220
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the working member is
    provided with a continuous circumferential working portion in the form of a
    helix extending from one end to the other end thereof.


CLS 418/221
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which there is provided a
    displaceable abutment and a displaceable vane, each of which moves incident
    to the expansion and contraction of the working chamber.


CLS 418/222
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which an abutment comprises a
    plurality of relatively movable elements or portions which part to allow a
    working portion of the working member to pass therebetween.


CLS 418/223
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having a vane or abutment which moves
    incident to the expansion and contraction of the expansion chamber, said
    vane or abutment having primary means and separate and distinct
    supplemental means to move the vane or abutment.

    (1)     Note.  Neither centrifugal force nor the weight of a vane or
    abutment is considered to be either a primary or a supplementary moving
    means.

    (2)     Note.  The supplementary moving means may concurrently with the
    primary moving means move the vane or abutment or it may move idly in its
    prescribed path of movement in lagging relationship with the primary moving
    means to move the vane or abutment only when the primary moving means fails.


CLS 418/224
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which there is provided a valve
    means mounted on a working fluid partition element of the device.


CLS 418/225
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which either an abutment or a vane
    comprises or includes a rotatable antifriction member to engage the working
    member or the cylinder respectively.


CLS 418/226
TXT Apparatus under subclass 225 in which the vane or abutment has rotation
    about an axis either other than the working member axis of rotation or an
    axis parallel thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195,    for interengaging rotating members having nonparallel axis of
    rotation.

    198,    for interengaging rotary members wherein at least one of the rotary
    members is intermittently rotated.


CLS 418/227
TXT Apparatus under subclass 225 wherein the abutment or vane is mounted for
    rotation on the cylinder or working member respectively and is urged to
    have relative rotation with the element (cylinder or working member) to
    which it is mounted by means other than the surface of the other element.


CLS 418/228
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which a vane or abutment moves or
    has a component of movement in a direction along or parallel to the axis of
    rotation of the working member incident to the expansion and contraction of
    the working chamber.


CLS 418/229
TXT Apparatus under subclass 228 wherein the vane or abutment has to-and-fro
    straight line movement along or parallel to the working member axis of
    rotation.


CLS 418/230
TXT Apparatus under subclass 229 in which the vane or abutment is positively
    moved in at least one direction by means other than the cylinder or working
    member surface respectively or another vane or abutment and is moved
    incident to the expansion and contraction of the working chamber.


CLS 418/231
TXT Apparatus under subclass 230 in which the vane or abutment is positively
    moved in both directions.


CLS 418/232
TXT Apparatus under subclass 231 in which the axially sliding vane or abutment
    is urged to move in one of the directions by either a resilient mechanical
    means or a nonsolid pressurized substance.


CLS 418/233
TXT Apparatus under subclass 228 comprising a movable vane which has
    oscillatory movement about an axis normal to and intersecting the working
    member rotational axis.


CLS 418/234
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a vane or abutment which
    has (1) nonparallel or (2) semi-circular surface portions to engage
    adjacent surface portions of a vane or abutment slot respectively, in which
    it moves incident to the expansion and contraction of the working chamber.


CLS 418/235
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the rotary expansible chamber
    device is of the sliding vane type and included in the vane slot thereof
    for engagement with the vane is either an insert of suitable material to
    absorb wear or a rolling means for the prevention of wear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for a biased insert providing a seal means between the vane and the
    vane slot.

    241,    for oscillating bearings mounted in walls of the working member
    through which vanes slide.


CLS 418/236
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which there is provided either a
    movable vane or abutment that slides relative to the working member or
    cylinder respectively in a direction generally toward or away from the axis
    of rotation and other than in a radial plane containing the axis of
    rotation of the working member.

    (1)     Note.  A sliding vane or abutment is considered to slide radially
    when a plane thereof including or parallel to the plane of a side face
    thereof is coincident with a radial plane of the working member.  Where the
    sliding vane or abutment has nonparallel sides, it is considered to slide
    radially if the median plane thereof is coincident with the radial plane of
    the working member.


CLS 418/237
TXT Apparatus under subclass 236 wherein the sliding vane or abutment moves in
    an arcuate path.


CLS 418/238
TXT Apparatus under subclass 236 in which the vane or abutment is urged to move
    at least in one direction in the operation of the device by means other
    than the surface of the cylinder or working member respectively, another
    vane or abutment or the weight of the vane or abutment and is moved
    incident to the expansion and contraction of the working chamber.


CLS 418/239
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which there is provided a plurality
    of partitioning members or partitioning member portions in which either (1)
    at least one of the partitioning members remains in a nonworking position
    while at least one other partitioning member performs work when the working
    member is rotating in one direction and vice versa or (2) a partitioning
    member having portions alternately movable to either one of two positions
    to perform work whereby the direction of working member rotation may be
    reversed.


CLS 418/240
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the cylinder is provided with
    a plurality of moving abutments thereon, one of said abutments being
    connected to at least one other abutment to move concurrently therewith.


CLS 418/241
TXT Apparatus under the class in which either a generally radially sliding vane
    or abutment is mounted respectively to the working member or to the
    cylinder to have simultaneous oscillating movement in the direction of
    rotation of the working member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    for similar devices in which there is an oscillating seal element
    between the vane and working member.


CLS 418/242
TXT Apparatus under the class definition provided with an abutment having
    spaced working member periphery engaging end portions rockable about an
    axis and in the plane of rotation of the working member, the abutment being
    moved in each direction by the abutment end portions incident to the
    expansion and contraction of the working chamber.


CLS 418/243
TXT Apparatus under the class having a moving abutment which is urged to move
    in at least one direction by means other than the working member surface,
    weight of the abutment or another abutment and is moved incident to the
    expansion and contraction of the working member.


CLS 418/244
TXT Apparatus under subclass 243 wherein the abutment is moved in at least one
    direction by coacting elements one of which has a surface or groove of
    irregular contour for controlling the movement of another element and the
    abutment associated therewith.

    (1)     Note.  A mere eccentric, i.e., a circular surface rotating about an
    offset axis is not a cam under this definition.  See subclass 247 for an
    abutment that is actuated by an eccentric.


CLS 418/245
TXT Apparatus under subclass 244 wherein the abutment is moved in each
    direction by the coacting elements.


CLS 418/246
TXT Apparatus under subclass 244 in which either a resilient mechanical device
    or a nonsolid pressurized substance sequentially urges the abutment to
    return to an initial position whereupon the abutment may again be moved by
    the irregularly contoured groove or surface.


CLS 418/247
TXT Apparatus under subclass 243 in which the abutment is urged to move in each
    direction.


CLS 418/248
TXT Apparatus under subclass 243 in which the abutment is urged into engagement
    with the working member by a resilient mechanical means.


CLS 418/249
TXT Apparatus under subclass 243 wherein fluid under pressure exerts a force
    upon the abutment to move it into engagement with the working member.


CLS 418/250
TXT Apparatus under subclass 249 wherein the abutment is provided with working
    member abuttable portions extending from a common pivot and oscillating in
    a common plane and each abuttable portion being adapted to engage the
    working member whereby the working member may be rotated in either
    direction.


CLS 418/251
TXT Apparatus under subclass 249 in which the abutment is provided with a fluid
    passage means through which working fluid passes enroute to or from the
    working chamber.


CLS 418/252
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the working member is
    provided with a vane and the cylinder encasing the working member is
    provided with either a normally closed port means through which the vane or
    a portion thereof may be replaced, the replacement of the vane being
    performed without dismantling the device.


CLS 418/253
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the working member is
    provided with a plurality of vanes thereon, one of said vanes being
    connected to at least one other vane to move concurrently therewith.

    (1)     Note.  Each vane may be an end portion of a common blade-like
    member.

    (2)     Note.  An element other than the working member, shaft or cylinder
    interposed between or encompassing a plurality of vanes or abutments and
    having an abutting or restraining relationship with adjacent ends of two or
    more vanes or abutments whereby to maintain the vanes in a desired spatial
    relationship is considered to connect the vanes or abutments and proper for
    classification here.


CLS 418/254
TXT Apparatus under subclass 253 in which two or more vanes are rigidly
    connected to each other for simultaneous movement.


CLS 418/255
TXT Apparatus under subclass 254 in which each of two vanes lies in a common
    plane passing substantially through the center of the working member.


CLS 418/256
TXT Apparatus under subclass 253 in which a plurality of radially movable vanes
    have their divergent end portions engageable by a movable element
    encircling the same to control outward movement of the vanes whereby to
    simultaneously maintain either a desired clearance or close fitting
    engagement of the blades with the cylinder wall surface.


CLS 418/257
TXT Apparatus under subclass 253 wherein an element is provided to engage
    adjacent inner ends of a plurality of vanes to simultaneously urge and
    maintain the vanes in cylinder wall engagement.


CLS 418/258
TXT Apparatus under subclass 257 wherein the interposed member is a resilient
    mechanical device.


CLS 418/259
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which a working member is provided
    with a vane moved in at least one direction by means other than the weight
    of the vane, centrifugal force or the cylinder wall surface and moving
    incident to the expansion and contraction of the working chamber.


CLS 418/260
TXT Apparatus under subclass 259 in which the vane is moved in at least one
    direction by coacting elements one of which has a surface or groove of
    irregular contour for controlling the movements of the other element and
    the vane associated therewith.

    (1)     Note.  A circular surface is not considered to have an irregular
    contour and is not a cam under this definition.


CLS 418/261
TXT Apparatus under subclass 260 in which the vane is positively moved in each
    direction.

    (1)     Note.  The vane movement in the opposite direction may be performed
    by the cam or by other positive vane moving means.


CLS 418/262
TXT Apparatus under subclass 261 in which the other element of the coacting
    elements comprises or includes a pivoted link member intermediate the first
    mentioned element and the vane.


CLS 418/263
TXT Apparatus under subclass 261 in which either a resilient mechanical means
    or a nonsolid pressurized substance urges the vane in the other direction.


CLS 418/264
TXT Apparatus under subclass 261 wherein the other element is provided with a
    rotatable antifriction means to engage the surface or groove of irregular
    contour.


CLS 418/265
TXT Apparatus under subclass 259 in which the vane is moved in both directions.


CLS 418/266
TXT Apparatus under subclass 259 wherein the vane is positively urged in one
    direction, usually into engagement with the cylinder wall surface, by a
    resilient mechanical means.


CLS 418/267
TXT Apparatus under subclass 266 wherein fluid under pressure assists the
    resilient mechanical means to urge the vane into cylinder wall engagement.


CLS 418/268
TXT Apparatus under subclass 259 wherein the vane is urged into engagement with
    the cylinder wall surface by pressure fluid.

    (1)     Note.  A vane having a lateral lip or flange portion at its
    cylinder surface contacting end which is acted upon by fluid pressure to
    maintain a vane in sealing engagement with the cylinder wall surface is not
    considered to be fluid urged and classification is based on other features.


CLS 418/269
TXT Apparatus under subclass 268 in which a plurality of vanes have their
    opposed inner surfaces continuously subject to fluid pressure in a zone of
    fluid pressure common to each to maintain the vanes in cylinder wall
    engagement.


CLS 418/270
TXT Subject matter under the class definition not otherwise provided for.


CLS 419/
TTL POWDER METALLURGY  PROCESSES

CLS 419/
TXT This is the generic class for producing metals, alloys or metal containing
    compositions in a solid or compact state from powdered or particulate
    material with or without heating.



    I.      GLOSSARY

    (1)     Note.  The meaning to be given to the various "art" terms appearing
    in this class, but which have not been included in the Glossary below, is
    the same as that generally accepted or in common usage.  However, certain
    terms employed in this class, which are included below, have been assigned
    definitions tailored to meet the needs of this class and therefore those
    may be more restricted or less limited or even altogether different from
    those in common usage.

    COMPACTING

    Forming of particulate material into a body or shape by the application of
    pressure to the particulate material without heating.

    CONSOLIDATION

    Forming of particulate material into a unitary body without heating.  This
    may or may not include the application of pressure to the particulate
    material (e.g., slip casting).

    SINTERING

    The term sintering includes the union of finely divided material or powder
    by the action of heat with or without pressure. The heat must result from a
    positive application of heat at some point in the process.  Heat resulting
    from the application of pressure alone is not considered to be a positive
    application of heat in these subclasses.  Some, but not all, of the
    ingredients may melt.  A chemical reaction such as reduction may occur
    during sintering.

    FUGITIVE MATERIAL

    A material which is incorporated in the powder admixture which is wholly
    destroyed or separated from the other materials in a subsequent step prior
    to or during the consolidation or sintering operation.

    II.     CLASSIFICATION LINES WITH AND SEARCH NOTES TO OTHER CLASSES

    The order of superiority among various metal, alloy, and metal stock areas
    and methods of manufacture involving them is as follows:

    1.      Class 419, Powder Metallurgy Processes.

    2.      Class 148, Metal Treatment, subclasses 22+, compositions for
    treatment of solid metal.

    3.      Class 75, Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use
    Therein, Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal
    Particulate Mixtures, subclasses 300, 301, and 303+, gaseous, liquid, or
    solid treating compositions for liquid metal or charges, and subclass 302,
    welding rod defined by composition.

    4.      Class 75, Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use
    Therein, Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal
    Particulate Mixtures, subclasses 228+, consolidated metal powder
    compositions and subclasses 255+, loose metal particulate mixtures.

    5.      Class 420, Alloys or Metallic Compositions, claimed as products.

    6.      Class 148, Metal Treatment, subclasses 95-122, 240-287, and
    500-714, in the schedule order, providing for certain processes of treating
    solid or semi-solid metal by modifying or maintaining the internal physical
    structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical property of metal, processes
    of reactive coating of metal or processes of chemical-heat removing (e.g.,
    flame-cutting, etc.) or burning of metal.  However, if metal casting, metal
    fusion bonding, machining, or working is involved, there is a requirement
    of significant heat treatment as described in section III, A, of the Class
    148 definition.

    7.      Class 148, Metal Treatment, subclasses 33+ barrier layer stock
    material and subclasses 400+, stock.

    8.      Class 75, Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use
    Therein, Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal
    Particulate Mixtures, subclasses 331+, processes of making solid
    particulate alloys directly from liquid metal and subclasses 343+,
    processes of producing or purifying alloys in powder form.

    9.      Class 75, Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use
    Therein, Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal
    Particulate Mixtures, subclasses 10.1+ and 10.67, processes of making
    alloys electrothermic, electromagnetic, or electrostatic processes.

    10.     Class 420, Alloys or Metallic Compositions, processes of
    manufacture.

    11.     Class 75, Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use
    Therein, Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal
    Particulate Mixtures, subclasses 330+, processes of making metal and
    processes of treating liquid metals and liquid alloys and consolidating
    metalliferous material.

    12.     Class 204, Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, processes.

    13.     Class 164, Metal Founding, subclasses 1+, processes.

    14.     Class 266, Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 44+, processes of
    operating metallurgical apparatus.

    This list is not complete and may be added to as the proper relationship of
    other areas is determined.

    A.      Lines with and search notes to compound, composition and material
    classes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 303+ for consolidated furnace charges (e.g.,
    briquettes, etc.) containing a free metal which are used as charges in
    Class 75 processes and for compositions which may contain metal powder
    which are used as fluxes in smelting and treating metalliferous ores,
    subclasses 228+ for consolidated metal powder compositions which may have
    been prepared by a Class 419 process, and subclasses 255+ for loose powder
    compositions containing a free metal.

    148,    Metal Treatment, particularly subclass 513 for processes of
    treating loose metal particles (e.g., powder, etc.) to modify or maintain
    the internal physical structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical property
    of metal and lacking a sintering or compacting operation.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 62.55 for magnetic compositions containing a
    free metal or alloy which may be in a particulate state, subclass 500 for
    electrically conductive or emissive compositions which may include a free
    metal in a powder state.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 539.5 for stock
    material having a metal continuous phase interengaged with a nonmetal
    continuous phase, subclasses 546+ for miscellaneous stock material
    containing particles of free metal, and subclass 570 for composite powders
    which may comprise a free metal.

    B.      Lines with and search notes to article or product classes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine  Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses, for machine
    elements defined by structure and/or function, which may have been made by
    a Class 419 process.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, appropriate subclasses for such
    elements of internal combustion engines as are provided for in that class,
    defined by structure/function, which may have been made by a Class 419
    process.

    128,    Surgery, appropriate subclasses, for surgical devices and
    instruments defined by structure/functions which may have been made by a
    Class 419 process.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, appropriate subclasses, especialy
    subclasses 327+, for earth boring or penetrating elements or devices
    defined by structure/function, which may have been made by a Class 419
    process.

    188,    Brakes, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 218-265, for
    braking apparatus or elements defined by structure/function, which may have
    been made by Class 419 process.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, appropriate subclasses, especially
    subclasses 106.1-115, for clutch and power-stop control apparatus or
    elements provided for in Class 122, defined by structure/function, which
    may have been made by a Class 419 process.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass .5 for processes of making nuclear fuel elements or charges not
    involving powder metallurgy, but powder metallurgy processes for making
    such products are in this class (419), appropriate subclasses; subclasses
    109+ for processes of forming articles by uniting randomly associated
    particles not including free metal particles.

    451,    Abrading, especially subclasses 540+, for abrasive tool which may
    have been made by a Class 419 process.

    623,    Prothesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, appropriate subclasses for artificial body
    members defined by a structure which may be made by a Class 419 process



    C.      Lines with and search notes to process classes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, appropriate subclasses for processes for
    manufacturing specific articles provided for in Class 29 by processes not
    involving powder metallurgy steps.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 331+ and 343+ for processes of making metal powders
    and subclasses 746+ for consolidating metalliferous material that is used
    in metallurgical processes.

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes for growing therein-defined
    single-crystal of all types of materials, including metal, and not
    including a Class 419 method step.  See Class 117 for guidance in placement
    of single-crystal related art.

    148,    Metal Treatment, particularly subclass 514 for processes of
    pre-treatment or post-treatment of a previously sintered or compacted
    consolidated powder metal starting material to modify or maintain the
    internal physical structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical properties
    of metal and wherein there is no actual step of sintering or compacting of
    the powdered metal recited.  However, Class 419 takes as original
    pre-treatment or post-treatment operations as long as the sintering or
    compacting operation is present.  See, also, Class 148, subclass 513 for
    treatment of loose metal powder by a Class 148 operation.


    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, for etching of all materials not
    otherwise provide for,  including a metal.



    D.      Line with and search notes to apparatus classes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for non-coating apparatus for growing
    therein-defined single-crystal of all types of materials, including
    inorganic or organic.  Coating apparatus are generally located in Class 118.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses,
    for electrical circuit makers and breakers defined by structure/function,
    which may have been made by a Class 419 process.

    245,    Wire Fabrics and Structure, appropriate subclasses, for wire
    fabrics defined by structure which may have been made by a Class 419
    process.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, appropriate subclasses, for valve
    apparatus provided for in Class 251, which may have been made by a Class
    419 process.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, appropriate subclasses, for sintering
    apparatus, per se.

    384     Bearings, appropriate subclasses, for bearing or bearing guides
    defined by structure/function which may have been made by a Class 419
    process.

    407,    Cutters, for Shaping, appropriate subclasses, for shaping cutters
    tools defined by structure/function which may have been made by a Class 419
    process.

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, appropriate subclasses for
    elements of rotary kinetic fluid motors or pumps provided for in Class 415,
    defined by structure/functions which may have been produced by a Class 419
    process.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces, (i.e., Impellers), appropriate subclasses,
    for elements of fluid reaction impellers provided for in Class 416, defined
    by structure/functions, which may have been made by a Class 419 process.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 78+ for means for molding powdered metal.


CLS 419/1
TXT POWER METALLURGY PROCESSES WITH HEATING OR SINTERING:

    Processes under class definition for producing metals, metalloys or metal
    containing composition in a solid state from powdered or particulate
    material including a heating or sintering operation, i.e., without melting
    all of the ingredients.

    (1)     Note.  The term sintering includes the union of finely divided
    material or powder by the action of heat with or without pressure.  The
    heat must result from a positive application of heat at some point in the
    process.  Heat resulting from the application of pressure alone is not
    considered to be a positive application of heat in these subclasses.  Some,
    but not all of the ingredients may melt.  A chemical reaction such as
    reduction may occur during sintering.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61+,    for similar processes which do not apply sufficient heat to effect
    sintering.


CLS 419/2
TXT Making porous product:

    Processes as defined in subclass 1 in which a porous or cellular mass is
    produced during sintering.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for processes of infiltration (i.e., impregnating) and producing
    the porous sintered product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclass 122 and see the note
    thereunder for other classes involving porous forming.


CLS 419/3
TXT Making articles of indefinite length:

    Processes under subclass 1 which produce a product having one dimension,
    its length, considerably greater than its other dimensions, but wherein the
    process does not establish a finite limit for the length.


CLS 419/4
TXT Filaments or fibers:

    Processes under subclass 3 which produce a product having a shape which is
    basically cylindrical with the length considerably greater than its
    diameter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 419.1, for processes of working a mass of
    fibered materials which (1) have been previously formed into a body or (2)
    which do not ultimately form a body as a result of the working step.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 500+ for electrically conductive or
    emissive compositions.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 171.1+ for processes of making indefinite length articles or
    preforms which may comprise a metallic conductor, not involving powder
    metallurgy.


CLS 419/5
TXT Making composite or hollow article:

    Processes under subclass 1 involving arranging one or more distinct powder
    material layers or portions in contact with one or more distinct layers or
    portions of powder or solid material and uniting the layers or portions by
    sintering, or processes under subclass 1 which produces an article which
    includes an internal hollow space or processes under subclass 1 which
    involve making a porous article and infiltrating (i.e., impregnating) it.

    (1)     Note.  Layers or portions of powder material are considered
    distinct if they differ with regard to chemical composition, particle size
    or degree of physical compaction, if they constitute individual preformed
    layers.

    (2)     Note.  Processes herein included are those involving two or more
    distinct layers as in (1) Note above, in which one or more powder layers
    are united with one or more solid layers by a sintering step.

    (3)     Note.  Processes for impregnating a sintered article by immersion
    or diffusion are excluded herefrom and are provided for in subclass 27.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for processes in which during the sintering operation one layer
    melts and becomes dispersed throughout the other layer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, for the use of etching in removing
    one substance from another or for removing a portion of a substance (work)
    not otherwise provided for.


CLS 419/6
TXT Powder next to powder:

    Processes under subclass 5 which produce a product in which two contiguous
    layers or portions are both formed from material which was originally in
    powder form.


CLS 419/7
TXT One or more components not compacted:

    Processes under subclass 6 in which at least one of the contiguous layers
    or portions is not compacted during the processing.


CLS 419/8
TXT Powder next to solid:

    Process under subclass 5 which produce a product in which one of the
    contiguous layers or portions is not produced from particulate material.


CLS 419/9
TXT Powder not compacted:

    Processes under subclass 8 in which a powder layer or portion is not
    compacted during the processing.


CLS 419/10
TXT Metal and nonmetal in final product:

    Processes under subclass 1 which have in the resulting product a free metal
    and various materials, such as elemental carbon, metal borides, carbides,
    nitrides, oxides or silicides, or mixtures of same.

    (1)     Note.  This is the generic place for the sintering of mixtures
    composed of (1) a free metal or a substance which changes chemically to
    release a free metal (e.g., a metal hydride which decomposes) and (2)
    nonmetallic materials such as those stated in the indented subclass
    definitions.

    (2)     Note.  For the purpose of this classification, elemental silicon is
    considered to be a metal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, subclass
    309 for abrasive tool making processes, amterials, and compositions
    comprising a free metal and metal oxides.

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclasses 107.1+ for processes
    of making dies.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, for a process of producing an
    alloy which contains a nonmetallic component by melting.


CLS 419/11
TXT Nonmetal is elemental carbon:

    Processes under subclass 10 in which the nonmetal is carbon in its
    elemental form, i.e., not in the form of a carbon compound.

    (1)     Note.  The carbon may be in the form of, e.g., graphite, diamond,
    etc.


CLS 419/12
TXT Boride containing:

    Processes under subclass 10 in which the nonmetal material consists of a
    boride.


CLS 419/13
TXT Nitride containing:

    Processes under subclass 10 in which the nonmetal material consists of a
    nitride.


CLS 419/14
TXT Carbide containing:

    Processes under subclass 10 wherein the nonmetal material includes a
    carbide compound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, subclasses 87+ for processes of making
    sintered ceramic compositions which include a carbide.


CLS 419/15
TXT Complex or multiple carbides:

    Processes under subclass 14 in which the nonmetal includes a mixture of
    different carbides or a complex phase which includes carbon combined with a
    metal and at least one more element which may be a metal or a nonmetal.


CLS 419/16
TXT With another nonmetal:

    Processes under subclass 15 in which in addition to the carbide there is
    present another nonmetal.


CLS 419/17
TXT Single binary carbide:

    Processes under subclass 14 in which a nonmetal material consists of a
    single binary carbide.


CLS 419/18
TXT Tungsten carbide:

    Processes under subclass 17 in which the carbide is a carbide of tungsten.


CLS 419/19
TXT Oxide containing:

    Processes under subclass 10 in which the nonmetal material includes an
    inorganic oxide compound.


CLS 419/20
TXT Rare earth oxide:

    Processes under subclass 19 wherein the oxide contained in the final
    product is a binary compound of oxygen and a rare earth element.

    (1)     Note.  For the purpose of this classification the term "rare earth"
    includes elements with atomic numbers 57-71 and 87+, i.e., lanthanum,
    cerium, praesodymium, neodymium, promethium, sam erium, europium,
    adolinium, terbium, dysprosium, holmium, erbium, thulium, ytterbium,
    lutecium, francium, radium, actinium, thorium, pratinium, uranium,
    neptunium, plutonium, americium, curium, berkelium, californium,
    einsteinium, fermium, mendeleyium, noblium and lawrencium.


CLS 419/21
TXT Silver metal with metal oxide:

    Processes under subclass 19 in which silver is present as a matrix material
    and the nonmetal is a metal oxide.


CLS 419/22
TXT Copper oxide:

    Processes under subclass 19 in which the nonmetal is a binary compound of
    oxygen and copper.


CLS 419/23
TXT Powder shape or size characteristics:

    Processes under subclass 1 in which one or more dimensions of or the
    configuration of the contour of the powder particles is recited in the
    claims.


CLS 419/24
TXT Filaments or fibers:

    Processes under subclass 23 in which the shape of the particles is
    basically cylindrical with the length considerably greater than the
    diameter thereof.


CLS 419/25
TXT Controlled cooling after sintering:

    Processes under subclass 1 in which the lowering of the temperature of the
    hot sintered product is regulated in some positive fashion.

    (1)     Note.  Cooling at a stated rate or in a stated atmosphere are
    examples of controlled cooling within the definition of this subclass.


CLS 419/26
TXT Post sintering operation:

    Processes under subclass 1 in which there is an additional positive step
    following the sintering operation other than controlled cooling.


CLS 419/27
TXT Impregnation:

    Processes under subclass 26 in which the interstices between the sintered
    particles are at least partially filled by an additional liquid or solid
    material which was not present during or prior to the sintering step.


CLS 419/28
TXT Subsequent working:

    Processes under subclass 26 in which the sintered compact undergoes an
    additional mechanical treatment.

    (1)     Note.  The working step may comprise, e.g., mechining, assembling,
    forging, peening, rolling or other shaping, cutting, etc.

    (2)     Note.  If the product is heated and held at such a temperature for
    an extended period of time, the presumption shall be that any pressing
    operating is a working step under this subclass definition.


CLS 419/29
TXT Subsequent heat treatment, (e.g., annealing, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 26 wherein the sintered compact is subjected to an
    additional heating step.

    (1)     Note.  The additional heating step may be for the purpose of, e.g.,
    annealing the sintered compact, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclass 126.1, for heat treating unsintered metal
    powder which is not eventually consolidated into a unitary body.


CLS 419/30
TXT Powder pretreatment (prior consolidation or sintering):

    Processes under subclass 1 which include preliminary significant treatment,
    preparation or manufacture of the powder or particulate material, prior to
    any compacting or sintering.

    (1)     Note.  Processes here provide for which in addition include such
    subsequent operations as provided for below are classified here and
    cross-referenced to the subclasses below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for processes which include a preliminary treatment of a "green
    body" prior to sintering or consolidation.


CLS 419/31
TXT Heat treatment of powder:

    Processes under subclass in which the powder is subjected to a temperature
    above the ambient temperature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, particularly subclass 513 for processes of
    treating loose metal particles (e.g., powder, etc.) to modify or maintain
    the internal physical structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical
    properties of the metal and lacking a sintering or compacting operation.


CLS 419/32
TXT Mechanical blending:

    Processes under subclass 30 in which the powders of different chemical
    constitution or physical characteristics are mechanically mixed together.

    (1)     Note.  The mixing may be performed by, e.g., tumbling, ball
    milling, etc.


CLS 419/33
TXT Comminuting:

    Processes under subclass 30 in which preliminary operation includes
    comminution, disintegration, abrasion or other mechanical method of
    producing a number of smaller solid masses by the division of a larger
    solid mass or masses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for sintering processes involving plural heating (sintering) steps
    in which the material is comminuted between sintering steps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 3 for
    processs involving mechanical comminution or disintegration preceded by
    solidifying, consolidating, shaping and/or sintering steps provided no
    chemical change is involved, and see section 2 of the main class definition
    of Class 241 for the lines between Class 241 and the chemical classes when
    a chemical change is involved.


CLS 419/34
TXT Chemical blending:

    Processes under subclass 30 in which the mixture which is consolidated is
    at least in part the product of a chemical reaction between other starting
    materials.


CLS 419/35
TXT Coating:

    Processes under subclass 30 in which at least some particles of powder or
    particulate material become covered by a layer of some other material,
    other than a fugitive material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, particularly subclass 514 for processes of
    pre-treatment or post-treatment of a previously sintered or compacted
    consolidated powder metal starting material to modify or maintain the
    internal physical structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical properties
    of metal combined with a coating operation and wherein there is no actual
    sintering or compacting operation present.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 80+ for electrolytic coating
    processes not claimed in combination with a specific sintering operation.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 212+ for processes of coating,
    flakes, particles, or granules, per se, especially subclass 216 when the
    base is metal.


CLS 419/36
TXT Addition of fugitive material:

    Processes under subclass 30 wherein a fugitive ingredient is incorporated
    in the powder admixture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for processes which use a fugitive liquid carrier vehicle to make a
    slurry. If the admixture uses a carrier vehicle and the produced preform is
    subjected to additional mechanical compaction, the patent is placed here
    (in subclass 36).


CLS 419/37
TXT Additional material is solid:

    Processes under subclass 36 wherein the additional material is in the solid
    state.


CLS 419/38
TXT Consolidating of powder prior to sintering: Processes under subclass 1
    which include consolidating a mass of the powder at some stage prior to
    sintering the particles therein.

    (1)     Note.  To be classified here the claimed process must recite the
    pressing or shaping in a significant manner, e.g., a specific pressure,
    pressure on all faces, pressure in increments, etc.


CLS 419/39
TXT Specific pressure or lack of pressure recited: Processes under subclass 38
    which recite a specific pressure during the compaction step or which recite
    that no nonambient pressure is imposed during the compaction step, i.e.,
    the quantity of pressure employed during the consolidation step is recited
    in the claims.

    (1)     Note.  A compacting reciting the use of ambient atmospheric
    pressure, which amounts to compacting by gravitation, is classified herein.


CLS 419/40
TXT Slip or slurry:

    Processes under subclass 39 wherein powder to be consolidated is suspended
    in a liquid medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     processes in which the admixture includes a carrier vehicle and the
    produced preform is subjected to additional mechanical compaction.


CLS 419/41
TXT Extruding:

    Processes under subclass 38 wherein the compaction is effected by forcing
    the powder through a restricted orifice under pressure.

    (1)     Note.  Extrusion processes as here contemplated are sometimes
    referred as die expressing or aquirting.


CLS 419/42
TXT Isostatic or hydrostatic:

    Processes under subclass 38 wherein the powder is compacted uniformly in
    all directions in a preformed flexible mold immersed in a fluid in a
    pressure vessel, or wherein the compaction is performed on a hydraulic or
    hydrostatic press.


CLS 419/43
TXT Rolling:

    Processes under subclass 38 wherein the compaction is effected by a
    generally cylindrical member, the roller, moving across the surface of the
    powder while revolving about an axis or repeatedly turning over.


CLS 419/44
TXT Pretreatment of consolidated powders:

    Processes under subclass 1 which include significant treatment of
    consolidated powder prior to sintering.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for pretreatment of powder prior to compacting.


CLS 419/45
TXT Sintering which includes a chemical reaction: Processes under subclass 1
    which include a chemical reaction which is effected by the conditions
    present during the sintering step.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     where it is recited that an alloy is formed.


CLS 419/46
TXT Alloying occurs during sintering:

    Processes under subclass 1 wherein more than one metallic element is
    present in the powder being treated and the conditions present during the
    sintering step cause an alloy to form from those metals.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of alloy see (1) Note in the definition
    of class (75), subclass 122.


CLS 419/47
TXT Liquid phase sintering:

    Processes under subclass 1 wherein it is recited that some portion but not
    all of the material melts during the sintering operation.


CLS 419/48
TXT Heat and pressure simultaneously to effect sintering:

    Processes under subclass 1 in which the particles are sintered by a
    combination of elevated temperature and pressure applied thereto at the
    same time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for processes in which the material to be sintered is pressed to
    shape prior to heating to effect sintering, and 31 for processes in which
    the sintered articles is pressed after heating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, subclass
    309 for similar processes involving the making of abrasive tools.

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclasses 101.1+ for similar
    processes involving making a tool blank.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 149, for apparatus for briquetting
    powder metal involving bonding of the metal particles by means of heat
    generated by an electric current.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 78 for apparatus for forming articles by uniting associated
    particles of metallic elements, alloys or amalgams.


CLS 419/49
TXT Hot isostatic pressing (hip):

    Processes under subclass 48 in which heat and pressure are simultaneously
    applied during the sintering step, and the pressure is applied uniformly
    from all directions.


CLS 419/50
TXT Hot rolling:

    Processes under subclass 48 in which the pressure is applied by a generally
    cylindrical member, the roller, moving across the surface of the powder
    while revolving about an axis or repeatedly turning over.


CLS 419/51
TXT Multiaxial (hot hiP):

    Processes under subclass 48 wherein the pressure is applied from more than
    one direction, but amounts to less than from all directions as is true in
    isostatic pressing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for processes of consolidating a powder using an isostatic pressing
    method.


CLS 419/52
TXT Heating by electrical means other than radiant energy:

    Processes as defined in subclass 48 in which the applied heat is produced
    by any method which employs electrical energy, other than radiant energy.


CLS 419/53
TXT Plural heating steps including sintering:

    Processes under subclass 1 which include a plurality of discrete heating
    steps, at least one of which must be a sintering step.


CLS 419/54
TXT Different temperatures:

    Processes under subclass 53 wherein at least two of the discrete heating
    steps are recited as occurring at specifically different temperatures.


CLS 419/55
TXT Additional operation between heating steps: Processes under subclass 53
    wherein at least one operation or step other than a heating step is
    performed between two of the heating steps.


CLS 419/56
TXT Special medium during sintering:

    Processes under subclass 1 in which the material is sintered while in a
    provided environment which may be a liquid, solid, or a vacuum gas to
    produce a desired condition during the sintering operation.

    (1)     Note.  Processes in which one of the material being treated
    decomposes or reacts to produce a material which becomes the desired
    environment are included in this and indented subclasses (e.g., a metal
    hydride, etc.).

    (2)     Note.  See Class 148, Metal Treatment, appropriate subclasses, for
    metal heat treatment in general in special environments.


CLS 419/57
TXT Special atmosphere:

    Processes under subclass 56 wherein the special medium present during the
    sintering operation is a special gas or vacuum.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, particularly subclass 514 for processes of
    pre-treatment or post-treatment of a previously sintered or compacted
    consolidated powder metal starting material to modify or maintain the
    internal physical structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical properties
    of metal combined with treatment in a controlled atmosphere and wherein
    there is no actual sintering or compacting operation present.

    373,    Industrial Electrical Heating Furnances, appropriate subclasses,
    for electric furnances adapted to carry out such processes.


CLS 419/58
TXT Hydrogen or hydrogen plus nitrogen (N257): Processes under subclass 57 in
    which the special atmosphere comprises hydrogen with or without nitrogen
    being present.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for the use of nitrogen as the special atmosphere without also
    using hydrogen.


CLS 419/59
TXT Hydrocarbon or derivative (e.g., ch4, etc.):
    Processes under subclass 57 herein the special atmosphere contains
    hydrocarbons or substances derived from hydrocarbons other than hydrogen.

    (1)     Note.  The atmosphere may comprise, e.g., methane (CH4) gas, etc.


CLS 419/60
TXT Vacuum:

    Processes under subclass 57 in which the special atmosphere is a vacuum.


CLS 419/61
TXT FORMING ARTICLES BY UNITING RANDOMLY ASSOCIATED METAL PARTICLES:

    Processes under the class definition for making articles by uniting powders
    or particulate materials including a free metal without the use of heat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for similar processes which employ heat, usually at a sufficient
    level to induce sintering.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 109+ for similar processes performed on materials not containing
    free metal particles.


CLS 419/62
TXT Powder pretreatment:

    Processes under subclass 61 which include preliminary significant
    treatment, preparation or manufacture of the powder or particular material,
    prior to any compacting or consolidation.


CLS 419/63
TXT Includes a chemical reaction:

    Processes under subclass 62 wherein during the pre-treatment at least one
    component of the powder undergoes a chemical change.


CLS 419/64
TXT Includes coating of particles:

    Processes under subclass 62 in which at least some particles of powder or
    particulate material become covered by a layer of some other material.


CLS 419/65
TXT Includes adding a binder material:

    Process under subclass 62 which include the incorporation in the powder of
    a material having the function of causing particles of the powder to adhere
    to each other.


CLS 419/66
TXT Consolidation of powders:

    Processes under subclass 61 which include a step of compacting or forming
    an article by the use of positive pressure.


CLS 419/67
TXT Extrusion:

    Processes under subclass 66 wherein the compaction is effected by forcing
    the powder through a restricted orifice under pressure.

    (1)     Note.  Extrusion processes as here contemplated are sometimes
    referred to as die expressing or squirting.


CLS 419/68
TXT Isostatic/hydrostatic pressing:

    Processes under subclass 66 wherein the powders is compacted or shaped by
    pressure exerted uniformly in all directions on a preformed flexible mold
    immersed in a fluid in a pressure vessel, or wherein the compaction is
    performed on a hydraulic or hydrostatic press.


CLS 419/69
TXT Rolling:

    Processes under subclass 66 wherein the compaction is effected by a
    generally cylindrical member, the roller, moving across the surface of the
    powder while revolving about the axis or repeatedly turning over.


CLS 420/
TTL ALLOYS OR METALLIC  COMPOSITIONS

CLS 420/
TXT

    I.      STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    This is the generic class for alloys containing metal or metallic
    compositions which contain a continuous phase of metal and methods of
    making same not provided elsewhere.  This class will also take "elemental"
    metal, per se.

    II.     GLOSSARY

    (Asterisked * terms are employed in section C, Chemistry and Metallurgy of
    the International Patent Classification (IPC) and have the same meaning
    herein).

    ALKALI METAL*

    A metal of the groups Lithium, Sodium, Potassium, Rubidium, Cesium and
    Francium.

    ALKALINE EARTH METAL*

    A metal of the group Calcium, Strontium, Barium and Radium.

    ALLOY

    A union, possessing metallic properties of two or more metallic elements,
    or of nonmetallic element(s) and metallic element(s) which are not pure
    compounds and which are miscible with each other, at least to a certain
    extent when molten, to form a more, or less homogeneous liquid having a
    metallic matrix and which do not separate into distinct layers when solid.
    Such combinations when solidified from a melt may consist of mechanical
    mixtures, entectics, entectoids, solid solutions, or in part of chemical
    compounds one, or more of which may exist at the same time.  Intermetallic
    compounds are considered alloys for purposes of classification.

    BASE

    A metal which is present in an amount of over 50 percent by weight in an
    alloy, or metallic composition.

    LANTHANIDE*

    An element of atomic number 57 to 71 inclusive.

    METAL*

    Element other than nonmetal (q.v.)

    METALLIC COMPOSITION

    A composition which contains a continuous phase of metal and no continuous
    phase of nonmetal.

    NOBLE METAL*

    A metal of the group Ruthenium, Rhodium, Palladium, Osmium, Iridium,
    Platinum, Gold and Silver.

    NONMETAL*

    An element of the group, Hydrogen, Boron, Carbon, Silicon, Nitrogen,
    Phosphorus, Oxygen, Sulfur, Selenium, Tellurium, Fluorine, Chlorine,
    Bromine, Iodine, Astatine, Helium, Neon, Argon, Krypton, Xenon and Radon.

    PRECIOUS METAL

    Synonym for Noble Metal*

    RARE EARTH*

    An element of the group Scandium, Yttrium and the Lanthanides*.

    REFRACTORY METAL*

    A metal of the group Titanium, Zirconium, Hafnium, Vanadium, Niobium,
    Tantalum, Chromium, Molybdenum and Tungsten.

    TRANSITION METAL*

    An element of atomic number 21-30, 39-48 or 57-80.

    Synonyms of names of metals used in this class (mostly obsolete)

    Synonym Names used herein

    Aldebaranium    Ytterbium

    Austrium        Gallium (ipure)

    Cassiopeium     Lutecium

    Celtium Lutecium

    Demonium        Dyprosium
    Didymium        Mixture of
                    neodymum and
                    paraseodymum

    Dwi-manganese   Rhenium

    Eka-aluminum    Gallium

    Eka-boron       Scandium

    Eka-cesium      Virginum

    Eka-Iodine      Astatine

    Eka-manganese   Technetium

    Eka-silicon     Germanium

    Eka-tantalum    Protoactinum

    Erythronium     Vanadium

    Florentium      Promethium

    Glucinum        Beryllium

    Illinium        Promethium

    Masurium        Technetium

    Neoytterbium    Ytterbium

    Niobium Columbian (Note:                                while niobium is
                                   the internationally
                                 standard name
                                 among chemist,
    co                          lumium is still
    wide                                ly used among               metal
    lurgist in the                          USA).

    Tungsten        Wolfram (Note:                                  while
    wolfram is the                  internationally
    stan                            dard name among
                                    chemists, tungsten is

                    still preferred                                 among
    metallurgists           in the USA).



    III.    RULES OF PATENT PLACEMENT

    Patents have been placed in this class employing the so called
    "genus-species" rule.  Following this rule as between a generic subclass
    and its indents a species unprovided for in any indented subclass is
    specifically classified in the generic subclass.  Thus a patent containing
    claims to both a provided for and an unprovided for species is placed as an
    original in the generic subclass as the first appearing subclass and
    cross-referenced to the indented subclass forthe provided for species.

    The primary basis of classification  in this class is the elemental
    composition of the alloy, or metallic composition without regard to the
    method of incorporation, or the state of the element in the product.  As to
    impurities, a substance which is recited as optionally present as an
    impurity, e.g., "up to a certain percent", or "not over a certain percent"
    has been disregarded for purposes of classification. Thus, when searching
    for an alloy, or metallic composition containing a very small quantity of
    an ingredient consideration should be given to the possibility that the
    ingredient might have been disclosed as being an impurity and classified as
    if it were not present.  If, however, an element is claimed as an impurity
    but is recited as being positively present in at least some minimum
    amountthis element is considered to be a positive constituent of the
    product and classified accordingly. In subclasses 8+ hereunder some
    subclasses contain limitations as to the percentages of an element present.
     When an alloy falls exactly on the recited percentage whether or not the
    alloy is included depends on the wording of the subclass limitation.  If
    the subclass recites "X percent or more" than exactly X percent is
    included, if the subclass recited "more than "X percent" then exactly X
    percent is  excluded.  As examples compare subclass 34, "9 percent or more
    chromium containing" with subclass 94 "over 10 percent nickel containing".
     An alloy containing exactly 9 percent chromium is included under subclass
    34 whereas an alloy containing exactly 10 percent nickel is excluded form
    subclass 94.

    IV.     CLASSIFICATION LINES AND SEARCH NOTES TO OTHER CLASSES.

    A.      Chemical compound and composition classes (nonmetallurgical). In
    general, a composition called an alloy and containing metal is prima facie
    proper for this class (420) unless other disclosure positively reveals it
    to be properly classified elsewhere.  A disclosure that nonmetallic
    particles are bonded by metal will be taken to denote a continuous phase of
    metal proper for Class 420 absent specific disclosure to the contrary.
    Cases of doubt as to whether a continuous phase of metal exists will be
    resolved in favor of placement in Class 420.  A so called alloy which
    contains no metal is excluded from Class 420 and classified as a
    composition based upon its use or function.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, for plastic compositions
    containing metal, or alloy fillers, or pigments and subclass 290 for
    pigment compositions containing metal alloy powders.  This class (420)
    however, provides for an alloy, or metallic composition, per se, in
    powdered form even though claimed as a pigment.

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, especially subclasses 334+ for electrolytic
    synthesis of an alloy or metallic composition.  If, however, the alloy or
    metallic composition is also claimed as such, the patent is placed
    originally in Class 420 and cross-referenced to Class 205.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 1 for miscellaneous compositions not having
    a utility provided for elsewhere in the composition classification;
    subclass 62.3 for barrier layer device compositions.  This class (420)
    however, provides for an alloy, or metallic composition, per se, which is a
    barrier layer composition; subclasses 62.51+ for magnetic compositions.
    This class (420), however, provides for an alloy, or metallic composition,
    per se, which is inherently magnetic, or is defined in terms of its
    magnetic properties.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, for methods of storage of
    hydrogen by combination with an alloy no matter by what mechanical, whether
    chemical reaction, or sorbtion, and whether or not a stiochrometric
    compound is formed. This class (420) provides for an alloy, or metallic
    composition, per se, disclosed, or claimed as useful for binding hydrogen
    for purposes of storage no matter whether by chemical reaction, or sorbtion.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, for an alloy, or metallic composition claimed, or solely disclosed
    as useful in a method of that class (430), particularly subclasses 85+ for
    alloys useful for use as photoconductors in electric photography, e.g.,
    xerography, etc.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, for so called alloys which contain no metal
    and which have the properties, e.g., hard refractory, etc., associated with
    ceramic compositions.

    523     and 524 Synthetic Resin or Natural Rubbers, for compositions
    containing a metal, alloy, or metallic composition as a pigment, or filler
    in a synthetic resin matrix, or continuous phase.



    B.      METALLURGICAL AND METALLIC STOCK CLASSES Class 420 provides for
    alloys, or metallic compositions which are intended to be of generally
    uniform character thought. While perfect uniformity is very difficult to
    achieve, this class (420) will take products which are not completely
    uniform where the intent is to produce a practically uniform product and
    any nonuniformity is accidental, or incidental and is not desired, or
    intended to give the product advantageous properties. Where a nonuniform
    product is desired, or intended, e.g., differing composition, or properties
    in different portions, etc., the product is considered to be stock and
    classified as appropriate in Classes 148, or 428 as discussed below.

    This order of superiority among various metal, alloy, and  metal stock
    areas and methods of manufacture involving them is as follows.

    1.      Class 419, Powder Metallurgy Processes.

    2.      Class 148, Metal Treatment, subclasses 22+, compositions for
    treatment of solid metal.

    3.      Class 75, Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use
    Therein, Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal
    Particulate Mixtures, subclasses 300, 301, and 303+, gaseous, liquid, or
    solid treating compositions for liquid metal or charges, and subclass 302,
    welding rod defined by composition.

    4.      Class 75, Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use
    Therein, Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal
    Particulate Mixtures, subclasses 228+, consolidated metal powder
    compositions and subclasses 255+, loose metal particulate mixtures.

    5.      Class 420, Alloys or Metallic Compositions, claimed as products.

    6.      Class 148, Metal Treatment, subclasses 95-122, 194-287, and
    500-714, in the schedule order, providing for certain processes of treating
    solid or semi-solid metal by modifying or maintaining the internal physical
    structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical properties of metal, processes
    of reactive coating of metal or processes of chemical-heat removing (e.g.,
    flame-cutting, etc.) or burning of metal.  However, if metal casting,
    fusion bonding, machining, or working is involved, there is a requirement
    of significant heat treatment as described in section III, A, of the Class
    148 definition.

    7.      Class 148, Metal Treatment, subclasses 33+ barrier layer stock
    material and subclasses 400+, stock.

    8.      Class 75, Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use
    Therein, Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal
    Particulate Mixtures, subclasses 331+, processes of making solid
    partiuclate alloys directly from liquid metal and subclasses 343+,
    processes of producing or purifying alloys in powder form.

    9.      Class 75, Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use
    Therein, Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal
    Particulate Mixtures, subclasses 10.1+ and 10.67, processes of making
    alloys by electrothermic, electromagnetic, or electrostatic processes.

    10.     Class 420, Alloys or Metallic Compositions, processes of
    manufacture.

    11.     Class 75, Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use
    Therein, Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal
    Particulate Mixtures, subclasses 330+, processes of making metal and
    processes of treating liquid metals and liquid alloys and consolidating
    metalliferous material.

     12.    Class 204, Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, processes.

     13.    Class 164, Metal Founding, subclasses 1+, processes.

    14.     Class 266, Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 44+, processes of
    operating metallurgical apparatus.

    This list is not complete and may be added to as the proper relationship of
    other areas is determined.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 303+ for solid treating compositions for liquid metal
    or a charge for producing metal or treating liquid metal.  The compositions
    in subclasses 303+ do not encompass alloys or metallic compositions, per
    se, even if used as treating agents.  Another ingredient utilized in
    producing or refining or metal must by present with the alloy or metallic
    composition to be acceptable to these composition subclasses.  An alloy or
    metallic composition made by consolidating base metal particles or a
    mixture or metal and nonmetal particles is proper for Class 75, subclasses
    303+ or subclasses 228+ unless (a) all the components are melted or
    dissolved or (b) a part of the components are melted and the mass is
    treated as a fluent liquid (e.g., stirring, pouring, etc.) in which
    instances the product is proper for Class 420.  Cases of doubt will be
    resolved in favor of placement in Class 75, subclasses 303+ or subclasses
    228+.  Class 75, subclasses 303+ or subclasses 255+ provide for
    compositions containing loose metal particles not elsewhere provide for.
    Class 420 provides for a free metal or a single ally or metallic
    composition in particulate form.  However, a blend of free metal particles
    or alloy or metallic composition particles with other particles whether
    another free metal, another alloy or metallic composition, or a nonmetal is
    proper for Class 75,  subclasses 303+ or subclasses 255+.  Class 420 also
    provides for patents claiming an article by name only without any positive
    structural limitation and reciting the metal or alloy metallic composition
    of which the article is made.


            Processes of making solid particulate alloys or metallic
    compositions directly from liquid metal will be found in Class 75,
    subclasses 331+ and processes of producing alloys or metallic composition
    in powder form will be found in Class 75, subclasses 343+.  In the
    instances in which the above mentioned processes are claimed and a process
    of making an alloy is claimed in generalized terms the patent will go as an
    original to Class 75 and a cross reference will be placed in Class 420.
    Processes of making an alloy by electrothermic, electromagnetic, or
    electrostatic steps will be found in Class 75, subclasses 10.1+ or subclass
    10.67.  In the instances in which the electrothermic, electromagnetic, or
    electrostatic steps are claimed and a process of making an alloy is claimed
    in generalized terms the patent will go as an original to Class 75 and a
    cross reference will be placed in Class 420.  In the instances in which the
    electrothermic, electromagnetic or electrostatic steps are claimed and an
    alloy or  metallic composition is claimed as a product the patent will go
    as an original to Class 420 and a cross reference will be placed in Class
    75.  The line between Class 75 and Class 420 is necessarily a difficult one
    since the metals produced by the processes of Class 75 are often impure and
    the Class 420 alloys are sometimes made from ores.  Therefor, the following
    lines will be observed.  A process of making an alloy of desired
    compositions for an end use will be classified in Class 420 even if made by
    reducing compounds or ore.  A method of reduction or smelting to yield
    metal without intent to obtain a particular alloy or metallic composition
    will be classified in Class 75, even if it is recognized that the product
    is impure.  Furthermore, methods of melting, refining, or purifying an
    existing  alloy will be placed in Class 75.

    148,    Metal Treatment, appropriate subclasses for processes of treating
    solid or semi-solid metal to modify or maintain the internal physical
    structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical properties of metal.  If metal
    casting, fusion bonding, machining, or working is involved, there is a
    requirement of significant heat treatment as defined in section III, A, of
    the Class 148 definition.  Note that Class 420 is superior and thus when
    both Class 420 claims to an alloy, or metallic composition, per se, and
    Class 148 process claims are present in the same patent, the original is
    placed in Class 420 with cross-reference in Class 148.  Class 148, subclass
    24, is the location for a mixture of a powdered alloy or metallic
    composition with particles of a flux.  Class 148, subclasses 400+, is the
    location for elemental metal, alloy or metallic compositions which (a) are
    the product of a process of Class 148, e.g., significantly heat treated,
    age hardened, etc., (b) are claimed in terms of specific magnetic
    properties, (c) are amorphous, (d) possess the property of shape memory,
    (e) are the product of a significant Class 164, Metal Founding step, e.g.,
    chill cast, directionally solidified, etc., or (f) are the product of the
    dispersion of particulate matter in molten metal, which, particulate mater
    retains its identity in the final product, e.g., dispersion strengthened,
    etc.  Class 420 provides for an alloy or metallic composition in which the
    claims include a recitation of physical, or chemical properties such as
    noncorrosiveness, hardness, of ductility which are inherent properties of
    the composition.  Since Class 420 is superior, a patent containing both
    types of alloy or metallic composition claims is classified originally in
    Class 420 and cross-referenced to Class 148, subclasses 400+.



    (1)     Note.  That in general no cross-references based on disclosures
    have been made from Class 148, subclasses 400+, stock, to Class 420 except
    from Class 148, subclasses 402, 403, and 404.  Thus, for a complete search
    of possible unclaimed disclosure of alloys by composition, consideration
    should be given to expanding the search to the appropriate areas of Class
    148, subclasses 300+ for magnetic stock material which is claimed as
    resulting from a Class 148 treatment or for stock material claimed in terms
    of a specified magnetic property, (e.g., coercive force, etc.).  Class 420,
    however, provides for alloys or metallic compositions defined only as
    "magnetic", "magnetized", or "permanent magnet" material even though
    disclosed as resulting from a Class 148 treatment as well as alloys, or
    magnetic compositions claimed, per se, which are inherently magnetic.

    164,    Metal Founding, for a method of casting molten metal including the
    step of alloying while teaming (pouring), or in the mold.  Otherwise a
    combined method of preparing an alloy followed by casting thereof is proper
    for Class 420.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, for apparatus useful in preparing a Class
    420 alloy. For related apparatus classified elsewhere see the search notes
    to Class 266.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, for structurally defined
    stock material or blanks made wholely, or partially of metal.  Consult the
    Class 428 definition for a detailed description of the structure proper for
    that class.  Particularly pertinent subclasses are:  Subclasses 544+, for
    stock which is all metal, or contains adjacent metals.  Subclass 545 for
    metallic stock which contains a continuous phase of metal interengaged with
    a continuous phase of nonmetal. Subclass 615 for composite metal stock
    having plural, adjacent spatially distinct metal components e.g., layers,
    welded joint, etc.  For this and indented subclasses there must be a sharp
    gradation between the plural components.  Where there is a gradual
    gradation of properties, e.g., differentially heat treated etc., see Class
    148, subclasses 400+.



    C.      Article Classes The former rule known as the alloy "rule" has been
    abolished.  Patents claiming an article by name only without any positive
    structural limitation and reciting the alloy, or metallic composition of
    which the article is made are properly classifiable in this class (420).
    This is true whether, or not the alloy, or metallic composition is claimed,
    per se, or whether it has specific properties making it particularly
    suitable for such article.  There are, however, some article areas which
    have not yet as of 1981 been brought into conformance with this line.  For
    these exceptions note is made to the list in the class definition of Class
    106, Composition:  Coating or Plastic, under (1) Note, section (b).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical Wave Energy, subclass 293 for electrodes for
    electrolytic devices claimed by name only and defined by the alloy, or
    metallic compositions of which they are made.


CLS 420/1
TXT Radioactive:

    Alloys or metallic composition under the class definition which is claimed
    as being radioactive, containing an isotope of an element of which is
    radioactive or containing an element of which all known isotopes are
    radioactive.

    (1)     Note.  The elements of which all known isotopes are radioactive are
    technetium, promethium and all elements of atomic number 84 and higher.


CLS 420/2
TXT Actinide base singly or in combination:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 1 in which contains over 50
    percent of a single metal of atomic number 89 to 103 inclusive, or wherein
    the total of all these metals taken together is over 50 percent of weight
    of the total alloy or metallic composition.


CLS 420/3
TXT Uranium base:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 2 which contains over 50
    percent uranium.


CLS 420/4
TXT Iron base:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 1 which contains over 50
    percent iron.


CLS 420/5
TXT Magnesium base:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass I which contains over 50
    percent magnesium.


CLS 420/6
TXT Nickel or cobalt base:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 1 which contains over 50
    percent nickel or over 50 percent cobalt.


CLS 420/7
TXT Aluminum base:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 1 which contains over 50
    percent aluminum.


CLS 420/8
TXT Ferrous (i.e., iron base):

    Alloy or metallic composition under the class definition containing over 50
    percent of iron.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses will take so called ferralloys
    e.g., ferrosilicon, etc., where the percentage of iron is not specified.
    Where there are indented subclasses hereunder which provide for different
    percentages of alloying ingredient e.g., chromium, the patent is classified
    in the subclass providing for the largest percentage of alloying ingredient
    in the absence of recitations that a smaller percentage is present.


CLS 420/9
TXT 1.7 percent or more carbon containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 8 which additionally contains
    1.7 percent or more carbon.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses contain patents drawn to
    graphitic steel.


CLS 420/10
TXT Six percent or more total group IV, V or VII transition metals containing:

    Alloys or metallic composition under subclass 9 which additionally contains
    6 percent or more total content of titanium, zirconium, hafnium, vanadium,
    niobium, tantalum, chromium, molybdenum, or tungsten, singly or in
    combination.

    (1)     Note.  Many patents in this and indented subclasses are so called
    "hard facing" alloys, which contain a high concentration of hard carbide
    precipitates.


CLS 420/11
TXT Eight percent or more chromium containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 10 which additionally contains
    8 percent or more of chromium.


CLS 420/12
TXT Molybdenum, tungsten or vanadium containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 11 which additionally contains
    one or more of molybdenum, tungsten or vanadium.


CLS 420/13
TXT 2.7 percent or more carbon equivalent containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 9 in which the total of the
    carbon content plus one third the silicon content plus one sixth the
    phosphorus content is 2.7 percent or more, i.e., cast iron.

    (1)     Note. The recitation "cast iron" shall be taken a indicating a
    carbon equivalent of 2.7 percent or more in the absence of a specific
    disclosure to the contrary.


CLS 420/14
TXT Boron containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 13 which additionally contains
    boron.


CLS 420/15
TXT Chromium containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition subclass 13 which additionally contains
    chromium.


CLS 420/16
TXT Nickel containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 15 which additionally contains
    nickel.


CLS 420/17
TXT Molybdenum:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 16 additionally contains
    molybdeum.


CLS 420/18
TXT Process of adding magnesium:

    Processes of preparing an alloy or metallic composition under subclass 13
    wherein magnesium is added to the alloy or metallic composition.

    (1)     Note.  The magnesium is usually added to cause carbon in the molten
    alloy to precipitate in spherical form, thus increasing the strength and
    ductility of the solid alloy, i.e., production of so called "nodular iron"
    or "spherulitic cast iron" etc.


CLS 420/19
TXT Adding magnesium as a liquid, vapor or as a solid agent entrained by a gas
    (e.g., fluidized):

    Process of adding magnesium to an alloy or metallic composition under
    subclass 18 where the magnesium is added in molten form as a liquid, is
    vaporized and added to the alloy metallic composition in the gaseous state
    or wherein a solid agent containing magnesium is entrained in a gas and
    added to the alloy or metallic composition while so entrained.

    (1)     Note.  The recitation that a solid magnesium additive is added in a
    "fluidized" state renders a patent appropriate for this subclass.


CLS 420/20
TXT Flowing molten iron alloy onto solid magnesium containing agent, or adding
    solid magnesium containing agent to molten stream of iron alloy:

    Process under subclass 18 wherein a molten stream of iron alloy is poured
    onto a solid magnesium containing agent, e.g., in the bottom of a vessel,
    or wherein a solid magnesium containing agent is added to a molten stream
    of iron alloy, e.g., by continuously adding particles of agent to the
    molten stream.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, appropriate subclasses for similar processes
    wherein the solid magnesium containing agent is placed in a mold, followed
    by pouring molten iron, or wherein the molten iron is recited as being
    treated by a solid magnesium containing agent while being poured into a
    mold.


CLS 420/21
TXT Mechanically plunging magnesium containing agent below surface of iron
    alloy melt:

    Processes under subclass 18 wherein the magnesium containing agent is
    mechanically forced below the surface of the iron alloy melt, e.g., by
    employing a plunging bell.


CLS 420/22
TXT Separate addition of plural agents, at least one containing magnesium:

    Process under subclass 18 wherein plural agents of different compositions
    are separately added to an alloy or metallic compositions under subclass
    13, at least one of the agents containing magnesium.

    (1)     Note.  The additions of plural agents may be separated by physical
    location or separated by time.


CLS 420/23
TXT Magnesium containing agent is coated, impregnated or compacted (e.g.,
    briquetted, coated particles):

    Processes under subclass 18 wherein the magnesium is contained in an agent
    which is coated, impregnated or compacted e.g., briquettes.


CLS 420/24
TXT Magnesium present in agent only as a compound with a nonmetal:

    Process under subclass 18 wherein the magnesium is added to the iron alloy
    only as a compound with a nonmetal and the additive contains no metallic
    magnesium or alloy thereof.



    (1)     Note.  To be classified in this subclass, there must be a positive
    disclosure that the magnesium compound decomposes or reacts to yield
    metallic magnesium in the iron alloy.  In the absence of such disclosure a
    patent is classified elsewhere under subclasses 13+ as appropriate.


CLS 420/25
TXT In agent also containing silicon, rare earth or alkaline earth metal:

    Processes under subclass 18 wherein magnesium in the iron alloy in an agent
    which additionally contain at least one of silicon, scandium, yttrium, a
    lanthanide metal, calcium, strontium or barium.


CLS 420/26
TXT Copper containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 13 which additionally contains
    copper.


CLS 420/27
TXT Nickel or molybdenum:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 13 which additionally contains
    at least one of nickel or molybdenum.


CLS 420/28
TXT Over .1 percent aluminum containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 13 which additionally contains
    more than 0.1 percent of aluminum.


CLS 420/29
TXT Processes:

    Processes of manufacturing an alloy or metallic composition under subclass
    13.


CLS 420/30
TXT Adding rare earth or alkaline earth metal:

    Process under subclass 29 which includes a step of adding one or more of
    scandium, yttrium, a lantanide metal, calcium, strontium or barium to the
    alloy or metallic composition.


CLS 420/31
TXT Adding sulfur, selenium or tellurium:

    Process under subclass 29 which includes a step of adding one or more of
    sulfur, selenium or tellurium to the alloy or metallic composition.


CLS 420/32
TXT Adding vanadium, titanium, niobium or zirconium:

    Process under subclass 29 which includes a step of adding one or more of
    vanadium, titanium, niobium or zirconium to the alloy or metallic
    composition.


CLS 420/33
TXT Adding silicon:

    Process under subclass 29 which includes a step of adding silicon to the
    alloy or metallic composition.


CLS 420/34
TXT Nine percent or more chromium containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 8 which additionally contains
    9 percent or more of chromium.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the alloys classified in this and indented
    subclasses are called "stainless steel" because the presence of 9 percent
    or more chromium makes an iron base alloy relatively resistant to
    corrosion.  The recitation that a ferrous alloy is a "stainless steel" will
    prima facie be taken is meaning that the alloy is properly classified in
    this or indented subclass in absence of a specific indication that the
    alloy does not contain 9 percent or more chromium.


CLS 420/35
TXT Noble metal containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 34 which additionally contains
    one or more of silver, gold, ruthenium, rhodium, palladium, osmium, iridium
    or platinum.


CLS 420/36
TXT Cobalt containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 34 which additionally contains
    cobalt.


CLS 420/37
TXT Molybdenum or tungsten containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 36 which additionally contains
    at least one of molybdenum or tungsten.


CLS 420/38
TXT Nickel containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 37 which additionally contains
    nickel.


CLS 420/39
TXT Copper containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 37 which additionally contains
    copper.


CLS 420/40
TXT Rare earth containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 34 which additionally contains
    at least one of scandium, yttrium or a lanthanide metal.


CLS 420/41
TXT Lead, bismuth, antimony, calcium, selenium or tellurium containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 34 which additionally contains
    at least one of lead, bismuth, antimony, calcium or tellurium.

    (1)     Note.  These materials are commonly added in small amounts to
    improve the machinability of the alloy.


CLS 420/42
TXT Over 0.05 percent sulfur, over 0.04 percent phosphorus or sulfur or
    phosphorus added in any amount to promote machinability:

    Alloys or metallic composition under subclass 34 which contains one or more
    of more than 0.05 percent sulfur or more than 0.04 percent phosphorus or
    which contain any amount of sulfur or phosphorus which is positively stated
    to be present to promote machinability of this alloy or metallic
    composition.


CLS 420/43
TXT Eight percent or more nickel containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 34 which additionally contains
    8 percent or more of nickel.

    (1)     Note.  This amount of nickel usually renders the alloy austenitic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for austenitic stainless steel which contains less than 8 percent
    nickel but which contains manganese instead to bring the total of the two
    elements to over 8 percent.


CLS 420/44
TXT Over 2 percent manganese containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 43 which additionally contains
    more than 2 percent of manganese.


CLS 420/45
TXT Copper containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 44 which additionally contains
    copper.


CLS 420/46
TXT Molybdenum or tungsten containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 44 which additionally contains
    one or more of molybdenum or tungsten.


CLS 420/47
TXT Group IV or V transition metal containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 46 which additionally contains
    one or more of titanium, zirconium, hafnium, vanadium, niobium or tantalum.


CLS 420/48
TXT Group IV or v transition metal containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 44 which additionally contains
    one or more of titanium, zirconium, hafnium, vanadium, niobium or tantalum


CLS 420/49
TXT Copper containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 43 which additionally contains
    copper.


CLS 420/50
TXT Over 1.5 percent silicon containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 43 which additionally contains
    more than 1.5 percent silicon.


CLS 420/51
TXT Group IV or V transition metal containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 50 which additionally contains
    one or more of titanium, zirconium, hafnium, vanadium, niobium or tantalum.


CLS 420/52
TXT Molybdenum containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 43 which additionally contains
    molybdenum.


CLS 420/53
TXT Group IV or V transition metal containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 52 which additionally contains
    one or more of titanium, zirconium, hafnium, vanadium, niobium or tantaium.


CLS 420/54
TXT Group IV or V transition metal containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 43 which additionally contains
    one or more titanium, zirconium, hafnium, vanadium, niobium or tantalum.


CLS 420/55
TXT Over 0.1 percent carbon containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 43 which additionally contains
    more than 0.1 percent of carbon.


CLS 420/56
TXT Eight percent or more total nickel plus manganese containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 34 which additionally contains
    a total quantity of nickel plus manganese of 8 percent or more.

    (1)     Note.  When the alloy contains 8 percent or more manganese, nickel
    may be completely absent.

    (2)     Note.  This amount of nickel plus manganese usually renders the
    alloy austentic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for authentic stainless steel which contains 8 percent or more
    nickel.


CLS 420/57
TXT Molybdenum or tungsten containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 56 which additionally contains
    one or more of molybdenum or tungsten.


CLS 420/58
TXT Copper containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 56 which additionally contains
    copper.


CLS 420/59
TXT Over 0.20 percent nitrogen containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 56 which additionally contains
    more than 0.20 percent nitrogen.


CLS 420/60
TXT Copper containing:

    Alloy on metallic composition under subclass 34 which additionally contains
    copper.


CLS 420/61
TXT Molybdenum or tungsten containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 60 which additionally contains
    one or more of molybdenum or tungsten.


CLS 420/62
TXT Over 0.1 percent aluminium containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition  under subclass 34 which additionally
    contains more than 0.1 percent aluminum.


CLS 420/63
TXT Molybdenum or tungsten containing:

    Alloy or metallic compositions under subclass 62 which additionally
    contains more of molybdenum or tungsten.


CLS 420/64
TXT Boron containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 34 which additionally contains
    boron.


CLS 420/65
TXT 0.25 percent or more nitrogen containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 34 which additionally contains
    0.25 percent or more nitrogen.


CLS 420/66
TXT Group IV or V transition metal containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 65 which additionally contains
    one or more of titanium, zirconium, hafnium, vanadium, niobium or tantaium.


CLS 420/67
TXT Molybdenum or tungsten containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 34 which additionally contains
    one or more of molybdenum or tungsten.


CLS 420/68
TXT Titanium, zirconium, or hafnium containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 67 which additionally contains
    one or more of titanium, zirconium or hafnium..


CLS 420/69
TXT Vanadium, niobium or tantalum containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 67 which additionally contains
    one or more of vanadium, niobium and tantalum.


CLS 420/70
TXT Group IV or V transition metal containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 34 which additionally contains
    one or more of titanium, zirconium, hafnium, vanadium, niobium or tantalum.


CLS 420/71
TXT Processes:

    Processes of producing alloys or metallic composition under subclass 34.

    (1)     Note.  While this subclass provides for processes of producing
    alloys under subclass 34 not specifically provided in the indents above,
    e.g., ferrochrome, it is also employed as a collecting point for
    cross-references to processes of general utility in preparing a wide range
    of alloys classified in different subclasses under subclass 34.


CLS 420/72
TXT Eight percent or more manganese containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 8 which additionally contains
    8 percent or more of manganese.

    (1)     Note.  The alloys classified in this and indented subclass are
    often referred to as "authenitic manganese steel" or "Hadfield steel".
    These recitations shall be considered prima facie sufficient for
    classification hereunder in the absence of an indication that the alloy
    does not contain 8 percent or more manganese.


CLS 420/73
TXT Nickel containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 72 which additionally contains
    nickel.


CLS 420/74
TXT Chromium containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass  72 which additionally
    contains chromium.


CLS 420/75
TXT Titanium containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 72 which additionally contains
    chromium.


CLS 420/76
TXT Copper containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 72 which additionally contains
    copper.


CLS 420/77
TXT Four percent or more aluminium containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 8 which additionally contains
    4 percent or more aluminium.


CLS 420/78
TXT Over 2 percent silicon containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 77 which additionally contains
    more than 2 percent silicon.


CLS 420/79
TXT Chromium containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 77 which additionally contains
    chromium.


CLS 420/80
TXT Nickel or cobalt containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 78 which additionally contains
    at least one of nickel or cobalt.


CLS 420/81
TXT Zirconium, vanadium or titanium containing alloy or metallic composition:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 77 which additionally contains
    one or more of zirconium, vanadium or titanium.


CLS 420/82
TXT Noble metal containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 8 which additionally contains
    one or more of silver, gold, ruthenium, rhodium, palladium, osmium, iridium
    or platinum.


CLS 420/83
TXT Rare earth metal containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 8 which additionally contains
    one or more of scandium, yttrium or a lanthanide metal.


CLS 420/84
TXT Lead, bismuth, selenium, tellurium or calcium containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 8 which additionally contains
    one or more of lead, bismuth, selenium, tellurium or calcium.

    (1)     Note.  These elements are usually added to ferrous alloys in small
    amounts to improve the machinability of the alloy.


CLS 420/85
TXT Processes:

    Processes under subclass 84 of incorporating one or more additional element
    under subclass 84 into a ferrous alloy.


CLS 420/86
TXT Adding lead:

    Processes under subclass 85 wherein the added elements under subclass 84
    includes lead.


CLS 420/87
TXT Over 0.05 percent sulfur, over 0.04 percent phosphorus, or sulfur or
    phosphorus added in any amount to promote machinability:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 8 which contains one or more
    of more than 0.05 percent sulfur or more than 0.04 percent phosphorus or
    which contain any amount of sulfur or phosphorus which is positively stated
    to be present to promote machinability of this alloy or metallic
    composition.


CLS 420/88
TXT Processes of making or treating alloy containing over 0.04 percent
    phosphorus:

    Processes under subclass 87 wherein an alloy containing over 0.04 Percent
    phosphorus is made or treated.


CLS 420/89
TXT Copper containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 8 which additionally contains
    copper.


CLS 420/90
TXT Chromium containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 89 which additionally contains
    chromium.


CLS 420/91
TXT Nickel containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 90 which additionally contains
    nickel.


CLS 420/92
TXT Nickel containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 89 which additionally contains
    nickel.


CLS 420/93
TXT Vanadium, zirconium, titanium or molybdenum containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 89 which additionally contains
    one or more vanadium, zirconium, titanium or molybdenum.


CLS 420/94
TXT Over 10 percent nickel containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 89 which additionally contains
    more that 10 percent nickel.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the alloys in this and indented subclasses are
    called "maraging" steels, which can be age hardened to very high levels of
    strength.


CLS 420/95
TXT Cobalt containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 94 which additionally contains
    cobalt.


CLS 420/96
TXT Molybdenum containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 94 which additionally contains
    molybdenum.


CLS 420/97
TXT Chromium containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 94 which additional contains
    chromium.


CLS 420/98
TXT Over 1 percent silicon containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 94 which additionally contains
    more that 1 percent.


CLS 420/99
TXT One percent or more carbon containing, but less than 1.7 percent:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 8 containing 1 percent or more
    carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Due to schedule superiority, alloys containing 1.7 percent
    or more carbon are classified above in subclasses 9+.  Patents classified
    in subclasses 9+ above are not cross-referenced to this or indented
    subclasses unless there is a positive disclosure of an alloy containing
    less that 1.7 percent carbon.


CLS 420/100
TXT Chromium containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 99 which additionally contains
    chromium.

    (1)     Note.  Many patents in this and indented subclasses are drawn to
    alloys which are sufficiently heat resistant to be used to cut metal at
    relatively high speed, i.e., "high speed" steel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104+,   for so called "high speed" steel alloys containing less that 1
    percent carbon.


CLS 420/101
TXT Molybdenum containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 100 which additionally
    contains molybdenum.


CLS 420/102
TXT Cobalt containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 102 which additionally
    contains cobalt.


CLS 420/103
TXT Over 0.1 percent aluminum containing, but less than 4 percent:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 8 which additionally contains
    more that 0.1 percent aluminum.

    (1)     Note.  Due to schedule superiority, alloys containing 4 percent or
    more aluminum are classified above in subclasses 77+.  Patents classified
    in subclasses 77+ above are not cross referenced to this subclass unless
    there is a positive disclosure of an alloy containing less that 4 percent
    aluminum.


CLS 420/104
TXT Chromium containing, but less than 9 percent:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 8 which additionally contains
    chromium.

    (1)     Note.  Due to schedule superiority, alloys containing 9 percent or
    more chromium are classified above in subclasses 34+.  Patents classified
    in subclasses 34+ above are not cross-referenced to this or indented
    subclasses unless there is a positive disclosure of an alloy containing
    less than 9 percent chromium.


CLS 420/105
TXT Molybdenum containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 104 which additionally
    containing molybdenum.


CLS 420/106
TXT Boron or beryllium containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 105 which additionally
    contains one or more of boron or beryllium.


CLS 420/107
TXT Cobalt containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 105 which additionally
    contains cobalt.


CLS 420/108
TXT Nickel containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 105 which additionally
    contains nickel.


CLS 420/109
TXT Vanadium, titanium or zirconium containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 108 which additionally
    contains or or more of vanadium, titanium or zirconium.


CLS 420/110
TXT Titanium, zirconium or niobium containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 105 which additionally
    contains one or more of titanium, zirconium or niobium.


CLS 420/111
TXT Vanadium containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 104 which additionally
    contains nickel.


CLS 420/112
TXT Nickel containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 104 which additionally
    contains nickel.


CLS 420/113
TXT Tungsten containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 112 which additionally
    contains tungsten.


CLS 420/114
TXT Tungsten containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 104 which additionally
    contains tungsten.


CLS 420/115
TXT Processes:

    Processes of preparing an alloy or metallic composition under subclass 104.

    (1)     Note.  While this subclass provides for processes of producing
    alloys under subclass 104 not specifically provided for in the indents
    above it is also employed as a collecting point for cross-references to
    processes of general utility in preparing a wide range of alloys classified
    in different subclasses under subclass 104.


CLS 420/116
TXT Including reducing a chromium compound:

    Process under subclass 115 wherein metallic chromium is introduced into the
    product by reducing a chromium compound.


CLS 420/117
TXT Two percent or more silicon containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 8 which additionally contains
    2 percent or more silicon.


CLS 420/118
TXT Titanium, molybdenum, tungsten or vanadium containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 117 which additionally
    contains one or more of titanium, molybdenum, tungsten or vanadium.


CLS 420/119
TXT Nickel containing, but 10 percent or less:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 8 which additionally
    containing nickel.

    (1)     Note.  Due to schedule superiority, alloys containing more that 10
    percent nickel are classified above in subclasses 94+.  Patents classified
    in subclasses 94+ above are not cross-referenced to this subclass unless
    there is a positive disclosure of any alloy containing 10 percent or less
    nickel.


CLS 420/120
TXT 1.5 percent or more manganese containing, but less than 8 percent:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 8 which additionally contains
    1.5 percent or more manganese.

    (1)     Note.  Due to schedule superiority, alloys containing 8 percent or
    more manganese are classified above in subclasses 72+.  Patents classified
    in subclasses 72+ above are not cross- referenced to this subclass unless
    there is a positive disclosure of an alloy containing less than 8 percent
    manganese.


CLS 420/121
TXT Boron containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 8 which additionally contains
    boron.


CLS 420/122
TXT Tungsten containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 8 which additionally contains
    boron.


CLS 420/123
TXT Molybdenum containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under  subclass 8 which additionally contains
    molybdenum.


CLS 420/124
TXT Vanadium tantalum or titanium containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 123 which additionally
    contains one or more of vanadium, tantalum, or titanium.


CLS 420/125
TXT Zirconium containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 8 which additionally contains
    zirconium.


CLS 420/126
TXT Titanium containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 8 which additionally contains
    titanium.


CLS 420/127
TXT Vanadium, tantanium or niobium containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 8 which additionally contains
    one or more of vanadium, tantalum or niobium.


CLS 420/128
TXT Nitrogen containing:

    Alloy or metallic composition under subclass 8 which additionally contains
    nitrogen.


CLS 420/129
TXT Processes:

    Processes of preparing an alloy or metallic composition under subclass 8.

    (1)     Note.  While this subclass provides for processes of producing
    alloys under subclass 8 not specifically provided for in the indents above
    it is also employed as a collecting point for cross-references to processes
    of general utility in preparing a wide range of alloys classified in
    different subclasses under subclass 8.


CLS 420/400
TXT ALKALI METAL BASE:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under the class definitions which contains
    over 50 percent of weight of a single metal selected from Lithium, Sodium,
    Potassium, Rubidium, or Cesium.


CLS 420/401
TXT Beryllium base:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under the class definitions containing over
    50 percent of beryllium by weight.


CLS 420/402
TXT Magnesium base:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under the class definition containing over
    50 percent magnesium by weight.


CLS 420/403
TXT Silver containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 402 which additionally
    contains silver.


CLS 420/404
TXT Manganese containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 403 which additionally
    contains manganese.


CLS 420/405
TXT Lanthanide containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 402 which additionally
    contains at least one of the metals lanthanum through lutetium, i.e.,
    atomic numbers 57 through 71.


CLS 420/406
TXT Zirconium containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 405 additionally containing
    zirconium.


CLS 420/407
TXT Aluminum containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 402 which additionally
    contains aluminum.


CLS 420/408
TXT Zinc containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 407 which additionally
    contains zinc.


CLS 420/409
TXT Manganese containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 408 which additionally
    contains manganese.


CLS 420/410
TXT Manganese containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 407 which additionally
    contains manganese.


CLS 420/411
TXT Zinc containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 402 which additionally
    contains zinc.


CLS 420/412
TXT Manganese containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 411 which additionally
    contains manganese.


CLS 420/413
TXT Manganese containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 402 which additionally
    contains manganese.


CLS 420/414
TXT Zirconium containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 402 which additionally
    contains zirconium.


CLS 420/415
TXT Alkaline earth metal base:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under the class definition which contains
    over 50 percent of calcium, over 50 percent of strontium, or over 50
    percent of barium.


CLS 420/416
TXT Rare earth metal base singly or in combination:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under the class definition which contains
    over 50 percent by weight of a single metal selected from scandium,
    yttrium, or lanthanum, through lutetium (i.e., atomic numbers 57 through
    71), or wherein the total of all these metals taken together is over 50
    percent by weight of the total alloy, or metallic composition.

    (1)     Note.  Because the rare earths often occur together naturally and
    are not easily separated, they are often used as crude, or partially
    purified mixtures which have their own names e.g., misch metal, didymium,
    etc.


CLS 420/417
TXT Titanium base:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under the class definition which contains
    over 50 percent of titanium by weight.


CLS 420/418
TXT Aluminum containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 417 which additionally
    contains aluminum.


CLS 420/419
TXT Tin containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 418 which additionally
    contains tin.


CLS 420/420
TXT Vanadium containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 418 which additionally
    contains vanadium.


CLS 420/421
TXT Chromium or molybdenum containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 417 which additionally
    contains at least one of the metals chromium, or molybdenum.


CLS 420/422
TXT ZIRCONIUM OR HAFNIUM BASE:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under the class definition which contains
    over 50 percent of zirconium or over 50 percent of hafnium.


CLS 420/423
TXT Copper containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 422 which additionally
    contains copper.


CLS 420/424
TXT VANADIUM BASE:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under the class definition containing over
    50 percent of vanadium.


CLS 420/425
TXT NIOBIUM BASE:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under the class definition containing over
    50 percent of niobium.


CLS 420/426
TXT Titanium, zirconium or hafnium containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 425 which additionally
    contains at least one of the metals titanium, zirconium, or hafnium.


CLS 420/427
TXT TANTALUM BASE:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under the class definition which contains
    over 50 percent of tantalum.


CLS 420/428
TXT CHROMIUM BASE:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under the class definition which contains
    over 50 percent of chromium.


CLS 420/429
TXT MOLYBDENUM BASE:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under the class definition which contains
    over 50 percent of molybdenum.


CLS 420/430
TXT TUNGSTEN BASE:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under the class definition which contains
    over 50 percent of tungsten.


CLS 420/431
TXT Carbon, boron or nitrogen containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 430 which additionally
    contains at least one of the elements, carbon, boron, or nitrogen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 230+ and 244 for particulate metal carbide (236+)
    boride, or nitrite (244) bonded with a metal (commonly cobalt), e.g., the
    so called "sintered carbides", etc.  See the class definition of this class
    for the distinction between the alloys and metallic compositions of this
    class and the consolidated metal powder composition for Class 75.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclass 409, for a pure,
    stoichiometric tungsten nitride, subclass 440, for a pure, stoichiometric
    tungsten carbide, subclass 297, for a pure, stoichiometric tungsten boride.


CLS 420/432
TXT Rhenium or noble metal containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 430 which additionally
    contains at least one of the metals, rhenium, ruthenium, palladium, osmium,
    iridium, platinum, silver, or gold.


CLS 420/433
TXT RHENIUM BASE:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under the class definition containing over
    50 percent of rhenium.


CLS 420/434
TXT MANGANESE BASE:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under the class definition which contains
    over 50 percent of manganese.


CLS 420/435
TXT COBALT BASE:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under the class definition which contains
    over 50 percent of cobalt.


CLS 420/436
TXT Chromium containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 435 which additionally
    contains chromium.


CLS 420/437
TXT Aluminum containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 436 which additionally
    contains aluminum.


CLS 420/438
TXT Titanium containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 437 which additionally
    contains titanium.


CLS 420/439
TXT Titanium containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 436 which contains titanium.


CLS 420/440
TXT Iron containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 436 which additionally
    contains iron.


CLS 420/441
TXT NICKEL BASE:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under the class definition which contains
    over 50 percent of nickel.


CLS 420/442
TXT Chromium containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 441 which additionally
    contains chromium.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses contain many patents to so
    called "superalloys" which retain considerable strength at high
    temperatures and which are therefor particularly useful as components in
    gas turbine engines.


CLS 420/443
TXT Rare earth, magnesium or alkaline earth metal containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 442 which additionally
    contains at least one metal selected from scandium yttrium, lanthanium
    through lutetium (i.e., atomic numbers 57-71), magnesium, calcium,
    strontium, or barium.


CLS 420/444
TXT Noble metal containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 442 which additionally
    contains at least one of the metals ruthenium, rhodium, palladium, osmium,
    iridium, platinum, gold, or silver.


CLS 420/445
TXT Aluminum containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 442 which additionally
    contains aluminum.


CLS 420/446
TXT Titanium containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 445 which additionally
    contains titanium.


CLS 420/447
TXT Tantalum, niobium, vanadium or hafnium containing:

    Alloy under subclass 446 which additionally contains at least one, or the
    metals tantalum, niobium, vanadium, or hafnium.


CLS 420/448
TXT Molybdenum or tungsten containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 447 which additionally
    contains at least one of the metals molybdenum, or tungsten.


CLS 420/449
TXT Zirconium or boron containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 446 which additionally
    contains at least one of the elements zirconium, or boron.


CLS 420/450
TXT Molybdenum or tungsten containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 446 additionally containing
    at least one of the metals molybdenum, or tungsten.


CLS 420/451
TXT Titanium containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 442 which additionally
    contains titanium.


CLS 420/452
TXT Iron or manganese containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 442 which additionally
    contains at least one of the metals iron, or manganese.


CLS 420/453
TXT Molybdenum or tungsten containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 452 which additionally
    contains at least one of the metals molybdenum, or tungsten.


CLS 420/454
TXT Cobalt containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 453 which additionally
    contains cobalt.


CLS 420/455
TXT Rare earth containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 441 which additionally
    contains at least one of the metals scandium, yttrium, or lanthanium
    through lutetum (i.e., atomic numbers 57 through 71).


CLS 420/456
TXT Noble metal containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 441 which additionally
    contains at least one of the metals, ruthenium, rhodium, palladium, osmium,
    iridium, platinum, silver, or gold.


CLS 420/457
TXT Copper containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 441 which additionally
    contains copper.


CLS 420/458
TXT Iron containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 457 which additionally
    contains iron.


CLS 420/459
TXT Iron or manganese containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 441 which additionally
    contains at least one of the metals iron, or manganese.


CLS 420/460
TXT Aluminum containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 441 which additionally
    contains aluminum.


CLS 420/461
TXT OSMIUM OR IRIDIUM BASE:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under the class definition which contains
    over 50 percent of osmium, or over 50 percent iridium by weight.


CLS 420/462
TXT RUTHENIUM OR RHODIUM BASE:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under the class definition which contains
    over 50 percent of ruthenium or over 50 percent of rhodium by weight.


CLS 420/463
TXT PALLADIUM BASE:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under the class definition containing over
    50 percent of palladium by weight.


CLS 420/464
TXT Copper containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 463 which additionally
    contains copper.


CLS 420/465
TXT Platinum containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 463 which additionally
    contains platinum.


CLS 420/466
TXT PLATINUM BASE:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under the class definition which contains
    over 50 percent of platinum by weight.


CLS 420/467
TXT Rhodium containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 466 which additionally
    contains rhodium.


CLS 420/468
TXT Nickel containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 466 which additionally
    contains nickel.


CLS 420/469
TXT COPPER BASE:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under the class definition which contains
    over 50 percent of copper by weight.


CLS 420/470
TXT Tin containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 469 which additionally
    contains tin.


CLS 420/471
TXT Aluminum containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 470 which additionally
    contains aluminum.


CLS 420/472
TXT Phosphorus containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 470 which additionally
    contains phosphorus.


CLS 420/473
TXT Iron, manganese or nickel containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 470 which additionally
    contains at least one of the metals iron, manganese, or nickel.


CLS 420/474
TXT Lead containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 470 which additionally
    contains lead.


CLS 420/475
TXT Zinc containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 474 which additionally
    contains zinc.


CLS 420/476
TXT Zinc containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 470 which additionally
    contains zinc.


CLS 420/477
TXT Zinc containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 469 which additionally
    contains zinc.


CLS 420/478
TXT Aluminum containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 477 which additionally
    contains aluminum.


CLS 420/479
TXT Nickel containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 478 which additionally
    contains nickel.


CLS 420/480
TXT Manganese containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 478 which additionally
    contains manganese.


CLS 420/481
TXT Nickel containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 477 which additionally
    contains nickel.


CLS 420/482
TXT Manganese containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 477 which additionally
    contains manganese.


CLS 420/483
TXT Noble metal containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 477 which additionally
    contains at least one of the metals ruthenium, rhodium, palladium, osmium,
    iridium, platinum, silver, or gold.


CLS 420/484
TXT Refractory metal containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 477 which additionally
    contains at least one of the metals titanium, vanadium, rhromium,
    zirconium, niobium, molybdenium, hafnium, tantalum, or tungsten.


CLS 420/485
TXT Nickel containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 469 which additionally
    contains nickel.


CLS 420/486
TXT Aluminum containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 485 which additionally
    contains aluminum.


CLS 420/487
TXT Iron or manganese containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 485 which additionally
    contains at least one of the metals iron, or manganese.


CLS 420/488
TXT Refractory metal containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 485 which additionally
    contains at least one of the metals titanium, vanadium, chromium,
    zirconium, niobium, molybdenum, hafnium, tantalum, or tungsten.


CLS 420/489
TXT Aluminum, gallium, indium or thallium containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 469 which additionally
    contains at least one of the metals aluminum, gallium, indium, or thallium.


CLS 420/490
TXT Silicon containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 469 which additionally
    contains silicon.


CLS 420/491
TXT Lead containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 469 which additionally
    contains lead.


CLS 420/492
TXT Titanium, zirconium or hafnium containing:

    Alloys, or metallic composition under subclass 469 which additionally
    contains at least one of the metals titanium, zirconium, or hafnium.


CLS 420/493
TXT Manganese containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 469 which additionally
    contains manganese.


CLS 420/494
TXT Beryllium, magnesium or alkaline earth metal containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 469 which additionally
    contains at least one of the metals beryllium, magnesium, calcium,
    strontium, or barium.


CLS 420/495
TXT Other refractory metal containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 469 which additionally
    contains at least one of the metals vanadium, chromium, niobium,
    molybdenum, tantalum, or tungsten.


CLS 420/496
TXT Iron or cobalt containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 469 which additionally
    contains at least one of the metals iron, or cobalt.


CLS 420/497
TXT Noble metal containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 469 additionally containing
    at least one of the metals ruthenium, rhodium, palladium, osmium, iridium,
    platinum, silver, or gold.


CLS 420/498
TXT Cadmium or mercury containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 469 which additionally
    contains at least one of the metals cadmium, or mercury.


CLS 420/499
TXT Phosphorus, arsenic, antimony or bismuth containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 469 which additionally
    contains at least one of the elements phosphorus, arsenic, antimony, or
    bismuth.


CLS 420/500
TXT Sulfur, selenium or tellurium containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 469 which additionally
    contains at least one of the elements sulfur, selenium, or tellurium.


CLS 420/501
TXT SILVER BASE:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under the class definition which contains
    over 50 percent of silver by weight.


CLS 420/502
TXT Copper containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 501 which additionally
    contains copper.


CLS 420/503
TXT Other noble metal containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 502 which additionally
    contains at least one of the metals ruthenium, rhodium, palladium, osmium,
    iridium, platinum, or gold.


CLS 420/504
TXT Zinc or cadmium containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 502 which additionally
    contains at least one of the metals zinc, or cadmium.


CLS 420/505
TXT Other noble metal containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 501 which additionally
    contains at least one of the metals ruthenium, rhodium, palladium, osmium,
    iridium, platinum, or gold.


CLS 420/506
TXT Zinc or cadmium containing:

    Alloy under subclass 501 which additionally contains at least one of the
    metals zinc, or cadmium.


CLS 420/507
TXT GOLD BASE:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under the class definition which contains
    over 50 percent of gold by weight.


CLS 420/508
TXT Palladium containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 507 which additionally
    contains palladium.


CLS 420/509
TXT Platinum containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 508 which additionally
    contains platinum.


CLS 420/510
TXT Platinum containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 507 which additionally
    contains platinum.


CLS 420/511
TXT Silver containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 507 which additionally
    contains silver.


CLS 420/512
TXT Iron, cobalt or nickel containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 507 which additionally
    contains at least one of the metals iron, cobalt, or nickel.


CLS 420/513
TXT ZINC BASE:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under the class definition which contains
    over 50 percent of zinc.


CLS 420/514
TXT Aluminum containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 513 which additionally
    contains aluminum.


CLS 420/515
TXT Copper containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 514 which additionally
    contains copper.


CLS 420/516
TXT Magnesium containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 515 which additionally
    contains magnesium.


CLS 420/517
TXT Tin containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 515 which additionally
    contains tin.


CLS 420/518
TXT Manganese, iron, cobalt or nickel containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 515 which additionally
    contains at least one of the metals manganese, iron, cobalt, or nickel.


CLS 420/519
TXT Magnesium containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 514 which additionally
    contains magnesium.


CLS 420/520
TXT Manganese, iron, cobalt or nickel containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 514 which additionally
    contains at least one of the metals manganese, iron, cobalt, or nickel.


CLS 420/521
TXT Copper containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 513 which additionally
    contains copper.


CLS 420/522
TXT Manganese, iron, cobalt or nickel containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 521 which additionally
    contains at least one of the metals manganese, iron, cobalt, or nickel.


CLS 420/523
TXT Cadmium containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 513 which additionally
    contains cadmium.


CLS 420/524
TXT Tin containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 513 which additionally
    contains tin.


CLS 420/525
TXT CADMIUM BASE:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under the class definition containing over
    50 percent of cadmium by weight.


CLS 420/526
TXT MERCURY BASE:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under the class definition which contains
    over 50 percent of mercury by weight.


CLS 420/527
TXT Silver containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 526 which additionally
    contains silver.


CLS 420/528
TXT ALUMINUM BASE:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under the class definition which contains
    over 50 percent of aluminum by weight.


CLS 420/529
TXT Copper containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 528 which additionally
    contains copper.


CLS 420/530
TXT Tin containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 529 which additionally
    contains tin.


CLS 420/531
TXT Zinc containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 529 which additionally
    contains zinc.


CLS 420/532
TXT Magnesium containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 531 which additionally
    contains magnesium.


CLS 420/533
TXT Magnesium containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 529 which additionally
    contains magnesium.


CLS 420/534
TXT Silicon containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 533 which additionally
    contains silicon.


CLS 420/535
TXT Titanium, zirconium, hafnium, vanadium, niobium, or tantalum containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 534 which additionally
    contains at least one of the metals titanium, zirconium, hafnium, vanadium,
    niobium, or tantalium.


CLS 420/536
TXT Cadmium, lead or bismuth containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 534 which additionally
    contains at least one of the metals cadmium, lead, or bismuth.


CLS 420/537
TXT Silicon containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 529 which additionally
    contains silicon.


CLS 420/538
TXT Iron, cobalt or nickel containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 529 which additionally
    contains at least one of the metals iron, cobalt, or nickel.


CLS 420/539
TXT Silver containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 529 which additionally
    contains silver.


CLS 420/540
TXT Zinc containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 528 which additionally
    contains zinc.


CLS 420/541
TXT Magnesium containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 540 which additionally
    contains magnesium.


CLS 420/542
TXT Magnesium containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 528 which additionally
    contains magnesium.


CLS 420/543
TXT Titanium, zirconium, hafnium, vanadium, niobium or tantalum containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 542 which additionally
    contains at least one of the metals titanium, zirconium, hafnium, vanadium,
    niobium, or tantalum.


CLS 420/544
TXT Silicon containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 543 which additionally
    contains silicon.


CLS 420/545
TXT Chromium containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 543 which additionally
    contains chromium.


CLS 420/546
TXT Silicon containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 542 which additionally
    contains silicon.


CLS 420/547
TXT Iron, cobalt or nickel containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 542 which contains at least
    one of the metals iron, cobalt, or nickel.


CLS 420/548
TXT Silicon containing:

    Alloys, or metallic composition under subclass 528 which additionally
    contains silicon.


CLS 420/549
TXT Alkali or alkaline earth metal containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 548 which contains at least
    one of the metals lithium, sodium, potassium, rubium, cesium, calcium,
    barium, or strontium.


CLS 420/550
TXT Iron, cobalt or nickel containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 528 which additionally
    contains at least one of the metals iron, cobalt, or nickel.


CLS 420/551
TXT Titanium, zirconium, hafnium, vanadium, niobim, or tantalum containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 550 which additionally
    contains at least one of the metals titanium, zirconium, hafnium, vanadium,
    niobium, or tantalum.


CLS 420/552
TXT Titanium, zirconium, hafnium, vanadium, niobium or tantalum containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 528 which additionally
    contains at least one of the metals, titanium, zirconium, hafnium,
    vanadium, niobium, or tantalum.


CLS 420/553
TXT Manganese containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 552 which additionally
    contains manganese.


CLS 420/554
TXT Cadmium, lead or bismuth containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 528 which additionally
    contains at least one of the metals cadmium, lead, or bismuth.


CLS 420/555
TXT GALLIUM, INDIUM OR THALLIUM BASE:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under the class definition which contains
    either over 50 percent of gallium, over 50 percent of indium, or over 50
    percent of thallium by weight.


CLS 420/556
TXT GERMANIUM BASE:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under the class definition which contains
    over 50 percent of germanium by weight.


CLS 420/557
TXT TIN BASE:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under the class definition which contains
    over 50 percent of tin by weight.


CLS 420/558
TXT Lead containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 557 which additionally
    contains lead.


CLS 420/559
TXT Antimony or bismuth containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 558 which additionally
    contains at least one of the metals antimony, or bismuth.


CLS 420/560
TXT Copper containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 557 which additionally
    contains copper.


CLS 420/561
TXT Antimony or bismuth containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 560 which additionally
    contains at least one of the metals antimony or bismuth.


CLS 420/562
TXT Antimony or bismuth containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 557 which contains at least
    one of the metals antimony, or bismuth.


CLS 420/563
TXT LEAD BASE:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under the class definition containing over
    50 percent of lead by weight.


CLS 420/564
TXT Alkali, alkaline earth metal or magnesium containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 563 which additionally
    contains at least one of the metals, lithium, sodium, potassium, rubidium,
    cesium, magnesium, calcium, strontium, or barium.


CLS 420/565
TXT Tin containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 564 which additionally
    contains tin.


CLS 420/566
TXT Silver containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 563 which additionally
    contains silver.


CLS 420/567
TXT Arsenic containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 563 which additionally
    contains arsenic.


CLS 420/568
TXT Tin containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 567 which additionally
    contains tin.


CLS 420/569
TXT Antimony containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 568 which additionally
    contains antimony.


CLS 420/570
TXT Tin containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 563 which additionally
    contains tin.


CLS 420/571
TXT Antimony containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 570 which additionally
    contains antimony.


CLS 420/572
TXT Antimony containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 563 which additionally
    contains antimony.


CLS 420/573
TXT Copper containing:

    Alloys, or metallic composition under subclass 563 which additionally
    contains copper.


CLS 420/574
TXT Zinc containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 563 which additionally
    contains zinc.


CLS 420/575
TXT Cadmium containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 563 which additionally
    contains cadmium.


CLS 420/576
TXT ANTIMONY BASE:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under the class definition which contains
    over 50 percent of antimony by weight.


CLS 420/577
TXT BISMUTH BASE:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under the class definition which contains
    over 50 percent of bismuth by weight.


CLS 420/578
TXT SILICON BASE ALLOY CONTAINING METAL:

    Alloy under the class definition which is so named in the patent which
    contains over 50 percent of silicon by weight and which further contains at
    least one element which is a metal under the definition of this class.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, e.g., ferrosilicon containing over
    50 percent silicon by weight, etc.


CLS 420/579
TXT ARSENIC BASE OR SELENIUM OR TELLURIUM BASE ALLOY CONTAINING METAL:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under the class definition containing over
    50 percent arsenic by weight, or an alloy under the class definition which
    is so named in the patent, which contains over 50 percent selenium, or 50
    percent tellurium by weight and which further contains at least one element
    which is a metal under the definition of this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereoft, subclasses 85+ for a selenium base alloy claimed, or solely
    disclosed as having utility as an image forming medium in electrical
    photography, e.g., xerography.


CLS 420/580
TXT CONTAINING OVER 50 PERCENT METAL BUT NO BASE METAL:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under the class definition which contains
    over 50 percent of total metal by weight but wherein each individual metal
    is present in an amount of not over 50 percent by weight.


CLS 420/581
TXT Iron containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 580 which contains iron in an
    amount which does not exceed 50 percent by weight.


CLS 420/582
TXT Copper containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 581 which additionally
    contains copper.


CLS 420/583
TXT Chromium containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 581 which additionally
    contains chromium.


CLS 420/584.1
TXT Nickel containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 583 which additionally
    contains nickel.


CLS 420/585
TXT Cobalt containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 584 which additionally
    contains cobalt.


CLS 420/586
TXT Titanium or zirconium containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 585 which additionally
    contains at least one of the metals titanium, or zirconium.


CLS 420/586.1
TXT Molybdenum containing:
    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 584.1 which additionally
    contains molybdenum.


CLS 420/587
TXT Copper containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 580 containing copper in an
    amount which does not exceed 50 percent by weight.


CLS 420/588
TXT Chromium containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 580 which contains chromium
    in an amount which does not exceed 50 percent by weight.


CLS 420/589
TXT Tin containing:

    Alloy, or metallic composition under subclass 580 which contains tin in an
    amount which does not exceed 50 percent by weight.


CLS 420/590
TXT PROCESS:

    Processes of preparing alloys, or metallic compositions under the class
    definition which are not claimed with sufficient particularity to be placed
    in any subclass above, e.g., no base metal is recited either individually,
    or as a particular group, e.g., refractory metals, etc.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is the collecting point for processes which
    are of general utility in preparing a wide variety of alloys.  Processes
    which prepare a specific alloy are placed therewith and are cross
    referenced here only if disclosed as having general utility.


CLS 420/591
TXT Miscellaneous:

    Alloys or metallic composition under the class definition not provided for
    in any subclass above.

    (1)     Note.  Specific subject matter found in this subclass includes
    e.g., alloys based on boron containing metal and alloys containing less
    than 50 percent of total metals, but at least some metal.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 420/900
TXT HYDROGEN STORAGE:

    Cross-reference art collection of alloys, or metallic compositions which
    are capable of taking up and releasing hydrogen for purposes of storage of
    hydrogen.

    (1)     Note.  This class takes alloys, metallic compositions which take up
    hydrogen for storage no matter what the mechanism.  Often the patent states
    that metal hydride is formed, but this is not always clear.  This class
    thus takes hydrogen storage alloys in preference to Class 252, subclass 184
    and Class 502, subclasses 400+ whether, or not the storage is stated to be
    by chemical reaction, or sorbtion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 644+ for metal
    hydrides, or hydrided alloys whether stoichiometric or not, or for methods
    of hydrogen storage and release by chemical reaction, or sorbtion.


CLS 420/901
TXT SUPERCONDUCTIVE:

    Cross-reference art collection of alloys, or metallic compositions which
    exhibit the property of practically no resistance to the flow of electric
    current.

    (1)     Note.  At this time (1981) this property has only been observed at
    very low temperatures of about 22o K, or below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 599 for a method of making an electrical
    device which includes a superconductor.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 126.1+ for
    electrical conductor structure which includes a superconductor.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 500 for electrically conductive compositions
    which may be superconductors.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 216 for magnets or electromagnets of the
    superconductive type.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 62+ for processes of producing a
    superconductive electrical product by coating.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 930 for metallic
    stock material which is superconductive.


CLS 420/902
TXT SUPERPLASTIC:

    Cross-reference art collection of alloys, or metallic compositions which
    exhibit property of being capable of great deformations of over 100 percent
    without "necking down", or rupturing.

    (1)     Note.  In some cases the alloy must be heated to exhibit this
    property.

    (2)     Note.  In most cases superplastic alloys are described as such in
    the patents found herein.


CLS 420/903
TXT SEMICONDUCTIVE:

    Cross-reference art collection alloys, or metallic composition whose
    resistivity at room temperature is in the range of 10-2 to 10-9 ohm-cm
    (which is between the range of metallic conductors and insulators).

    (1)     Note.  These compositions are usually employed in barrier layer
    devices, e.g., transistors, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 62.3 for barrier layer device compositions
    which are not merely alloys, or metallic compositions.


CLS 422/
TTL CHEMICAL APPARATUS AND PROCESS DISINFECTING, DEODORIZING, PRESERVING, OR
    STERILIZING

CLS 422/
TXT

    I.      STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    This is a generic class for (1) processes of disinfecting, deodorizing,
    preserving or sterilizing and (2) apparatus for (a) carrying out chemical
    reactions, (b) preparing or treating chemical compounds or compositions
    even though only a physical reaction is discernible, (c) performing an
    analysis which involves either a chemical reaction or a physical reaction
    not elsewhere provided, for and (d) carrying out the above processes not
    elsewhere provided for.

    II.     CLASSIFICATION LINES AND SEARCH NOTES TO OTHER CLASSES

    A.      Processes involving disinfecting, deodorizing, preserving or
    sterilizing (and apparatus when appropriate).

    1.      Treating a compound, composition, or by-product by any of the above
    processes, especially:

    (a)     Preserving by purification only is classified with the appropriate
    compound, composition, or physical separation class.  Where the
    purification involves a chemical reaction, see the appropriate compound or
    composition class, Class 423, Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses
    210+ having the generic art on gas purification involving a chemical
    reaction. Where there is purification by physical separation only, see the
    appropriate physical separation classification particularly:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids

    55,     Gas Separation

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, Class 422 has no preservative by
    either purification involving a chemical reaction or by physical separation.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing.

    494,    Imperforate Bowl:  Centrifugal Separators.

    533-570,        Organic Compounds, appropriate subclasses.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, particularly subclasses 2+ and
    800+.



    (b)     By coating, impregnating, or laminating:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, for
    preserving by laminating, and see search notes thereunder.

    427,    Coating Processes, for preserving a substance by coating, including
    the compounds, classified in Class 423, Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds
    and Class 260 Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, when the preserving is done by
    a coating operation which is, per se, classified in Class 427.



    (c)     By cleaning:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, for apparatus for
    brushing, beating, shaking, wiping, shotting, the use of a squeegee, or the
    removal of material by a draft or current of air, steam, or equivalent
    gaseous fluid.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, for cleaning processes
    (including those performed by the apparatus of Class 15 for cleaning
    apparatus not otherwise provided for).



    (d)     By heating, cooking, cooling, and/or drying only:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids

    99,     Foods and Beverages: Apparatus

    110,    Furnaces

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces

    165,    Heat Exchange

    219,    Electric Heating

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces

    426,    Food or Edible Material: Processes, Compositions, and Products

    432,    Heating



    B.      Art processes and apparatus are classified with the appropriate art
    even though the steps of, or means for, disinfecting, deodorizing,
    preserving, or sterilizing, are claimed in combination therewith. The
    disinfecting, deodorizing, preserving, or sterilizing subcombination should
    be cross-referenced to the appropriate place.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, particularly subclasses
    111.1, 111.4, 220+, 222+, 261, and 294.

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning

    27,     Undertaking, particularly subclasses 11 and 21.1+.

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing

    30,     Cutlery, particularly subclasses  124+ and 140.

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), particularly subclasses 101,
    130, 168, and 517 for in situ used building components with attached or
    built-in preserving features.

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 428+ for methods; and subclasses 111+
    for apparatus for packaging combined with contents treating.

    62,     Refrigeration, particularly subclasses 78, 264, and 331 for
    processes and apparatus for preserving by refrigeration, including such
    steps or means combined with sterilizing or antisepticizing the material or
    the space being cooled.

    101,    Printing

    119,    Animal Husbandry

    128,    Surgery

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means

    148,    Metal Treatment

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation

    166,    Wells

    169,    Fire Extinguishers

    241,    Solid Material, Comminution or Disintegration, for comminuting
    combined with physical preservation, sterilization, or disinfecting where
    the combined step or means is of the type provided for as a combination in
    that class (241).

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclass 258
    for storage to permanently contain hazardous or toxic waste in the form of
    pathogenic organisms.

    C.      Other disinfecting, deodorizing, preserving, or sterilizing, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 94.1+ for the preservation of hides, skins,
    feathers, and other animal tissues.

    27,     Undertaking, subclasses 21.1+ for embalming.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 124+ for
    process and apparatus for destroying macroscopic vermin visible to the
    naked eye.  This class (422) provides for process and apparatus generic to
    destruction of vermin and micro- organisms.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, when limited to treating living plants,
    particularly subclass 57.5 for injecting processes and apparatus.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 78 for refrigeration process involving
    deodorizing, antisepticizing, or providing special atmosphere.

    99,     Food and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 467+ for subjecting food
    to a modified atmosphere; and subclasses 518+ and 600+ for grain hulling
    which may involve the removal of smut and other organisms by substantial
    rubbing, abrading, etc.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 156 for antivermin treatment.

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 290, particularly subclasses 290 and 300.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 194+ for
    electrolytic apparatus, in general, including that used for preserving,
    disinfecting, or sterilizing, and other appropriate subclasses for
    electrical or wave energy methods for the production of chlorine, ozone, or
    other preserving, disinfecting, or sterilizing agents.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 334+ for electrolytic synthesis of
    chlorine, ozone, or other preserving, disinfecting, or sterilizing agents
    and subclasses 687+ for electrolytic material treatment processes,
    especially subclass 701 for electrolytic treatment of biological material
    (e.g., sterilizing, etc.).

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 600+ for processes;
    and subclasses 85 and 542 for apparatus for other liquid purification.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes,  Systems, and Elements,
    subclasses 340+ for generally treating materials within a nuclear reactor
    including for such purposes as preserving, disinfecting, and sterilizing.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 64+ for
    x-irradiation.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclass 452 for antiseptic protectors
    for telephones.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses for process involving mere use of the composition of that class
    (424).

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 312+ and 321+ for preservation of edible materials.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web.



    D.      Apparatus.

    1.      Analytical apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring, and Testing, for apparatus for making tests and
    measurements not otherwise provided for.  See particularly subclass 36 for
    testing illuminating fluids for flash point, vapor pressure, and end point.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 88+ for systems for controlling the
    mixture of a plurality of fluids in response to the sensing of a condition
    or characteristic of the mixture, note particularly subclass 93 in which
    the control is in response to a sensing of a chemical property.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclasses 132 and 141 for combinations
    of apparatus for making a test or measurement and means for controlling a
    reaction provided for in that class.

    204,    Chemistry:   Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 400-435 for
    apparatus specialized for the determination of hydrogen ion concentration
    of solutions.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclass 80 for automatic means with an
    analyzer.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus for testing an electrical property or condition of a material by
    electrical means, even though the results of the test may be used as an
    indication of some other physical or chemical property or condition.

    346,    Recorders, for recording apparatus, per se.

    366,    Agitating, subclass 142 for agitating means with a test, signal, or
    indicator means.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 8 for flammability testing;
    and subclasses 31+ for calorimetry.

    D10,    Measuring, Testing, or Signaling Instruments, for design patents
    pertaining to the subject matter of the class.



    2.      Material preparation or treating apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for making
    named type articles.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses
    for treating solid material by drying or with vapor contact.

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, appropriate subclasses for apparatus
    for preparing the subject matter of the class.

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, for apparatus for making heating
    and illuminating gas.

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 111+ for packaging apparatus with
    contents material treating.

    60,     Power Plants, appropriate subclasses for power plants using named
    chemical material.

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for cooling or
    freezing, especially subclass 330 for such apparatus with means for making
    the refrigerant.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for
    making glass including glass in the form of filaments or fibers.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 1 and 2 for waste
    reclaiming and carbonizing apparatus, respectively.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, for apparatus for gas separation not
    involving a chemical reaction.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, appropriate subclass for food
    making and treating apparatus.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 70+ for apparatus for pressing combined with
    means providing an additional treatment of the material being pressed.

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 235+ for apparatus for burning wet fuel,
    garbage and sewage, and refuse, respectively.

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for non-coating apparatus for growing
    therein-defined single-crystal of all types of materials, including
    inorganic or organic.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for coating apparatus
    combined with means to treat the work or coating.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 21 for boiler heated by
    chemical action other than combustion of fuel; and subclasses 379+ for
    boiler having means to clean same.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 263.01+ for means for creating heat
    by chemical action.

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, subclasses 1+ for apparatus for
    treating sugars, starches, and carbohydrates material.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 43+ for
    cleaning apparatus or liquid contact with solids apparatus.

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, appropriate
    subclasses for means for generating an electrical current.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 15.1+ for apparatus for handling fluids.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    345+ for etching adhesive bonding and various types chemical manufacture
    apparatus.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, for means concentrating solids held in a
    solution of suspension.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 232+ for apparatus
    for making paper or liberating fiber.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 139+ for apparatus for moulding metal.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, especially subclasses 6 and 7 for fire
    extinguishers operable as a result of chemical action.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 193+ for
    apparatus for that class.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass .5 for infusion containing
    receptacle; and subclasses 524.1+ for container with specified material or
    content.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 85+ for apparatus for
    purifying a liquid.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, appropriate subclasses for bottles, jars,
    closures, and attachments therefor.

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclasses for electrical heating
    devices.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for dispensing apparatus.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 2+ for fusion bonding apparatus.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 31+ for
    comminution apparatus combined with material treating means.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclass 5 for
    apparatus for in situ conversion of solid to fluid by dissolving or
    chemical action.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 31+ for cabinet structure
    support with gas or vapor treatment of material.

    366,    Agitating, appropriate subclasses for agitating apparatus.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 109+ for carbon
    treating apparatus.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    appropriate subclasses for apparatus for carrying out nuclear reactions.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 564+ for fluid-treating apparatus for
    photographic film.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, appropriate subclasses for article or
    material handling, usually of general utility.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    including apparatus for pelletizing, agglomerating, or granulating.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process, appropriate subclasses for means for producing electricity caused
    by a chemical reaction.

    431,    Combustion, for apparatus for burning material.

    432,    Heating, for heating apparatus.

    435,    Chemistry: Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 283.1+
    for apparatus for propagating, treating, or containing enzymes or living
    organisms or for fermenting.

    494,    Imperforate Bowl:  Centrifugal Separators.



    III.    INDEX TO CLASS LINES WITH CLASSES OR SEARCH NOTES TO CLASSES NOTED
    IN CLASS (422) SECTIONS AND SUBCLASSES

    CLASS   SECTION SUBCLASSES
    D10     IID1
    4       IIB     184, 306
    8       IIB, IIC
    15      IIA1(c), IIB
    23              3, 50
    27      IIB, IIC
    28      III
    29      IID2    245.1
    30      IIB
    34      IIA1(a), IIA1(c)
            IID2    255
    43      IIC
    44      IID2
    47      IIC
    48      IIB, IID2       305
    52      IIB
    53      IIB, IID2

    55      IIA1(a)
    60      IID2
    62      IIB, IIC, IID2  245.1
    65      IID2    245.1, 249
    68      IID2
    73      IID1    50, 70, 83,89
    75              255
    95      IIA1(a) 10, 22
    96      IIA1(a), IID2   48, 89, 186.04
    99      IIA1(d), IIC,
            IID2    295, 305,
                    307,
    100             255
    101     IIB, IID2
    102             305
    106             6
    110     IIA1(d), IID2
    116             55
    117     IID2    245.1
    118     IID2    245.1
    119     IIB, IIC
    122     IIA1(d), IID2   305
    126     IID2    295, 307
    127     IIA1(a), IID    245.1, 255
    128     IIB     44,129,148,131
            IIC
    134     IIA1(c), IID2   255, 261
    136     IIB, IID2
    137     IID1, IID2      50
    141     IIB
    148     IIB
    156     IIA1(b) 129
    159     IIA1(a), IID2   245.1
    162     IIB, IID2       185, 295, 307
    164     IID2    245.1
    165     IIA1(d) 307
    166     IIB
    169     IIB, IID2
    196     IID1, IID2,     50, 129, 201,
            IIA1(a) 245.1, 256
    202     IIA1(a), IID2   55
    203     IIA1(a)
    204     IIA1(a), IIC,   22, 50, 129,
            IID1, IID2      148, 150
    206     IID2    8, 61, 255
    208     IIA1(a) 129

    209             255
    210     IIA1(a), IIC,   245.1, 255, 267
            IID2
    211             300
    215     IID2
    219     IIA1(d), IID2   21, 307
    222     IID2
    228     IID2
    239     IID2    255
    241     IIB, IID2,
            IIA1(a) 184
    248             300
    249             245.1
    250     IIC, IID2       22, 129, 186
    252     IID2    5, 52, 55,
                             255260  IIA1 (a), IIA1 (b)     15261   IID2,
    IIA1(a)   45, 305264    IIB266  IIA1(d) IID1    255299  IID2312 IID2    8,
    9324 IID1    50346   IID1    50354   IID2362 IID1    52366   IID2    209,
    244, 255, 270,                  271373  IIA1(d), IID2374        IID1    50,
    51376       IIc, IID2379        IIC1401         129,
    255423     IIA1(b) 129424  IIC     5, 6, 34, 35, 36,
                               37425   IID2    245.1426        IIA1(d), IIC 22,
    40, 255427      IIA1(b) 6428            8429    IID2431 IID2432 IIA1(d),
    IID2   209435  IIA1(a), IIC,IID2        44, 129, 305493 IIB494  IIA1(a),
    IID2


CLS 422/1
TXT PROCESS DISINFECTING, PRESERVING, DEODORIZING, OR STERILIZING:

    Process under the class definition for maintaining a protective environment
    or counteracting destructive environment by disinfection, deodorizing,
    preserving, or sterilizing.

    (1)     Note.  Manufacturing articles or stock material to be resistant to
    deterioration in use, as by adding a stabilizer or by processes of
    manufacture, are classifiable, per se, in; e.g., Classes 156, 264, 427, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Manufacturing or processing steps classifiable, per se, in a
    class when combined with a step(s) proper for this class is classified in
    the, per se, class and crossed to this Class 422.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 78 for a refrigeration process involving
    deodorizing, antisepticizing, or providing special atmosphere.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclass 452 for antiseptic telephone
    protectors.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treatment Compositions, subclasses
    76.1+ for deodorant compositions which are not applied to the living body
    which function by destroying the odor-causing organism or by desensitizing
    the olfactory mechanism.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclass 258
    for the storage to permanently contain pathogenic organisms; e.g., virus,
    bacteria and medical waste.


CLS 422/2
TXT Step of warning or decreasing hazard of process:

    Process under subclass 1 including a step intended to increase the safety
    of or decrease the danger of the process or to warn persons away from an
    area where a dangerous process is being performed.

    (1)     Note.  The danger must be caused by the process itself.  Preserving
    against a hazard is placed below.


CLS 422/3
TXT Process control in response to analysis:

    Process under subclass 1 wherein the disinfecting, deodorizing, preserving,
    or sterilizing step is carried out in response to a step of chemical
    analysis.

    (1)     Note.  The analysis must be of the article or material which is
    acted upon, of the environment, or of an added agent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 1+ for
    analytical and analytical-control methods.


CLS 422/4
TXT A gas is substance acted upon:

    Process under subclass 1 where the substance being acted upon is a gas.

    (1)     Note.  There must be an intent to treat a gas.  Using a gas as a
    carrier for a disinfectant or other material, etc., is placed below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for treatment of gas to render it nondestructive to metal.


CLS 422/5
TXT Deodorizing:

    Process under subclass 1 wherein an offensive odor is destroyed or masked.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 65+
    for cosmetic containing a deodorant, and subclasses 76.1+ for nonbody
    treating deodorant compositions.  Class 424 provides for process of
    deodorizing involving only the mere application of a Class 424 composition.

    512,    Perfume Compositions, subclasses 1-27.


CLS 422/6
TXT Affecting structure, article, etc., submerged in marine environment:

    Process under subclass 1 for preserving structures, e.g., ships, docks,
    etc., used in open bodies of water, e.g., lakes, ponds, rivers, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclass 14 for antifouling
    paints of the type proper for that class and nominal methods of application.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclass 78.09
    for anti-fouling paints based on synthetic resins and nominal methods of
    application.

    427,    Coating Processes, for significant processes of coating or
    impregnating with a substance which prevents the attack of structures by
    marine organisms.


CLS 422/7
TXT Maintaining environment nondestructive to metal:

    Process under subclass 1 for modifying an environment in contact with metal
    in a manner that damage or destruction of the metal, by other than
    mechanical means, is decreased or eliminated.

    (1)     Note.  Articles or compositions and their mere method of
    manufacture are classified in the relevant classes even though they contain
    additives or features intended to prevent damage; e.g., corrosion, etc., to
    the metal which they come into contact with or which is part of the
    article.  However, processes which require a continued ongoing maintenance
    of a condition are considered more than mere methods of manufacture and are
    classified hereunder.

    (2)     Note.  Art processes combined with steps of preventing damage to
    metal; e.g, anti-corrosion, etc., are classified with the relevant process.
    However, this and indented subclasses provide for nominal art processes
    wherein the only positive steps recited are those of preventing damage to
    the metal; e.g., corrosion, etc.


CLS 422/8
TXT Using protective article (e.g., antitarnish fabric, etc.):

    Process under subclass 7 involving use of an article or stock material to
    protect metal other than by mere mechanical barrier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 205+ and 524.4 for
    subject matter of that class having antitarnish feature.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 31+ for structures of that
    class combined with gas or vapor treatment of material.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, for stock material or
    miscellaneous articles which do not contain metal protective feature; e.g.,
    anticorrosion, etc.


CLS 422/9
TXT Using gaseous preservative, preservative added to gaseous phase of
    environment, or maintaining gaseous phase nondestructive:

    Process under subclass 7 wherein (a) the agent used to prevent damage to
    metal is a gas, (b) a substance is added to the gaseous phase to prevent
    damage to the metal contacted by the gaseous phase, or (c) the gaseous
    phase is treated to prevent it from damaging the metal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 31+ for structures of that
    class combined with gas or vapor treatment of material.


CLS 422/10
TXT Manipulating gaseous environment for preservative purpose:

    Process under subclass 9 involving the step of handling the gaseous phase
    which is for the sole purpose of preventing damage to metal other than, per
    se, adding a substance to the gaseous phase.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, appropriate subclasses for gas
    purification, per se, not combined with the use of treated gaseous phase to
    preserve metal.


CLS 422/11
TXT Steam environment:

    Process under subclass 9 wherein the gaseous phase is essentially water at
    a temperature above its boiling point at the prevailing pressure.


CLS 422/12
TXT Aqueous acid environment:

    Process under subclass 7 for preventing damage to metal caused by an
    environment which contains water and a protonic acid as

    strong as H2S or stronger.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 13 definition for the definition of an aqueous
    alkaline solution as used therein.


CLS 422/13
TXT Aqueous alkali environment:

    Process under subclass 7 for preventing damage to metal caused by an
    environment which contains water and an alkali as strong as -HCO3 in
    aqueous solution or stronger.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 12 definition for the definition of an aqueous
    acid solution as used therein.


CLS 422/14
TXT Essentially pure water environment:

    Process under subclass 7 for preventing damage to metal by an environment
    which is essentially liquid water.

    (1)     Note.  "Essentially pure water" is defined as water of at least
    industrial purity, containing no significant intentional additive intended
    to perfect it for an art use not possessed by water, per se. It is
    recognized that industrial water contains many incidental impurities and
    even though the nature and amount are specifically stated, the presence of
    these substances will not prevent classification here hereunder, nor will
    impurities which build up in a water system during use; e.g., boiler, etc.
    The following are considered essentially pure water: carbonic acid
    solutions which are the mere result of operating in ambient air; boiler
    water and cooling water even if they contain small amounts of other
    intentional perfecting additives; e.g., biocides, etc.  Sea water is not
    considered essentially pure.


CLS 422/15
TXT Using organic compound having phosphorus:

    Process under subclass 14 wherein an organic compound containing phosphorus
    is employed to reduce damage to metal by essentially pure water.

    (1)     Note.  The term "organic" is used as defined in Class 260.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass are inorganic phosphorus acid
    salts of organic compounds; e.g., amine phosphates, etc.


CLS 422/16
TXT Using organic nitrogen compound other than ammonium salt:

    Process under subclass wherein an organic nitrogen compound is employed.

    (1)     Note.  The presence of the NH4 + ion in an organic salt will not be
    considered to make the compound nitrogen containing for purposes of this
    subclass.


CLS 422/17
TXT Using organic carboxylic acid or salt thereof:

    Process under subclass 14 wherein an organic carboxylic acid or salt
    thereof is employed.


CLS 422/18
TXT Using inorganic silicon or phosphorus compound:

    Process under subclass 14 wherein an inorganic silicon or phosphorus
    compound is employed.


CLS 422/19
TXT Using heavy metal or compound thereof:

    Process under subclass 14 wherein a metal of specific gravity of 4 or
    greater or a compound thereof is employed.


CLS 422/20
TXT Using sonic or ultrasonic energy:

    Process under subclass 1 including the step of treating the article or
    material with vibratory energy of the frequency of 10 cps or greater.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclass 1 for combination
    of cleaning and stabilizing, wherein ultra-sonic energy is employed.


CLS 422/21
TXT Using microwave energy:

    Process under subclass 1 including the step of treating the article or
    material with electromagnetic waves in the range of 3 X 109 Hz to  3 X
    1011Hz; i.e., the so-called "microwave" range.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 600+ for inductive heating, subclasses
    678+ for microwave heating, and subclasses 764+ for capacitive dielectric
    heating.


CLS 422/22
TXT Using direct contact with electrical or electromagnetic radiation:

    Process under subclass 1 including the step of treating the article or
    material with electrical energy or electromagnetic radiation.

    (1)     Note.  Ordinary radiant heating, e.g., as in an oven, is included
    herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 57+ for methods of gas
    separation involving electrostatic precipitation by ionization of air in
    which ozone may additionally be generated.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 687+ for electrolytic material
    treatment processes, especially subclass 701 for electrolytic treatment of
    biological material (e.g., sterilizing, etc.).

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 324+ for methods of corona irradiation;
    subclasses 432+ for the irradiation of contained, supported, or transferred
    fluent material; subclasses 453.11+ for methods of irradiating supported
    objects; subclasses 459.1+ for methods of irradiating fluorescent and
    phosphorescent materials, and subclasses 492.1+ for methods of irradiating
    objects or materials generally.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 237+ for process of treating edible material with electrical or
    wave energy.


CLS 422/23
TXT In atmosphere other than air:

    Process under subclass 22 wherein the treatment takes place in a specified
    atmosphere other than air.


CLS 422/24
TXT Ultraviolet:

    Process under subclass 22 wherein the electromagnetic radiation has a
    frequency in the range of 7 X 1014Hz to 3 X 1016Hz; i.e., the so-called
    ultraviolet range".

    (1)     Note.  X-rays having a frequency greater than 3 X 1016Hz are not
    included herein.


CLS 422/25
TXT Including additional step of preventing damage to sealed container:

    Process under subclass 1 wherein the article is a sealed container and
    wherein the process includes a step or condition intended to prevent
    physical damage to the container.


CLS 422/26
TXT Using direct contact steam to disinfect or sterilize:

    Process under subclass 1 wherein water vapor at a temperature above the
    boiling point of liquid water at the pressure employed is used to directly
    contact and destroy noxious organisms.


CLS 422/27
TXT And additional disinfecting or sterilizing agent:

    Process under subclass 26 wherein an additional agent is used to disinfect
    or sterilize in admixture with steam.


CLS 422/28
TXT Using disinfecting or sterilizing substance:

    Process under subclass 1 wherein an article or material is treated with a
    substance to disinfect or sterilize by more than the mere effect of heat.

    (1)     Note.  A treating substance used in a disinfecting or sterilizing
    process is considered to be a disinfecting or sterilizing agent unless its
    effect is disclosed to be merely that of heating.


CLS 422/29
TXT In situ generation of agent other than aldehyde or glycol:

    Process under subclass 28 wherein the agent is prepared at the site of the
    process for immediate use and is other than an aldehyde or glycol.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for process of generating an aldehyde in situ.


CLS 422/30
TXT And removing the agent by chemical reaction or sorption:

    Process under subclass 28 wherein the disinfecting or sterilizing substance
    is removed or destroyed after treatment by use of a chemical reaction,
    absorption, or adsorption.


CLS 422/31
TXT And recovering or reusing the agent:

    Process under subclass 28 wherein the substance is recovered for reuse or
    is recycled to another step of disinfecting or sterilizing.


CLS 422/32
TXT Treating bulk material:

    Process under subclass 28 wherein the material being treated is particulate
    matter handled in bulk of mass, e.g., sand as opposed to articles handled
    individually.


CLS 422/33
TXT With positive pressure or vacuum:

    Process under subclass 28 including a step of placing the material or
    article under pressure either below or above the ambient pressure.


CLS 422/34
TXT Using alkylene oxide:

    Process under subclass 28 wherein the disinfecting or sterilizing substance
    is an alkylene oxide; i.e., containing the group R- CH- CH2 wherein R is a
    hydrocarbon or hydrogen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    514,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 449
    and 475 for disinfecting compositions containing an alkylene oxide.


CLS 422/35
TXT Using cyanide:

    Process under subclass 28 wherein the disinfecting or sterilizing substance
    is a cyanide, i.e., contains the group -C N.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, especially
    subclasses  607+ for disinfecting and sterilizing composition containing a
    cyanide or nitrite (N) compound.

    514,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 112
    and 519+.


CLS 422/36
TXT Using  aldehyde:

    Process under subclass 28 wherein the disinfecting or sterilizing substance
    contains an aldehyde group; i.e.,  -CH.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also includes process wherein the disinfecting
    or sterilizing substance is an aldehyde yielding substance; e.g.,
    paraformaldehyde, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    514,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, especially
    subclasses 693+ for disinfecting or sterilizing compositions containing
    aldehyde.


CLS 422/37
TXT Using halogen or halogen-containing compound:

    Process under subclass 28 wherein the disinfecting or sterilizing substance
    contains a halogen or a halogen-containing compound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses for disinfecting or sterilizing compositions containing a
    halogen.


CLS 422/38
TXT Using fluent heat transfer medium other than air:

    Process under subclass 1 wherein the article or material is treated by
    heating the same with a fluent heat transfer medium other than air.

    (1)     Note.  When it cannot be determined whether a fluent medium is only
    for heat transfer or whether the medium is also a disinfecting or
    sterilizing agent, the patent is placed in subclass 28 and cross-referenced
    here.  See note in subclass 28.


CLS 422/39
TXT By sudden release of pressure:

    Process under subclass 1 wherein the article or material is subjected to a
    high pressure which is suddenly released.

    (1)     Note.  Most patents in this subclass are drawn to the destruction
    of micro- organisms; e.g., bacteria, etc.


CLS 422/40
TXT Process of storage or protection:

    Process under subclass 1 directed to residual processes of storage or
    protection of articles or materials provided for under the definition 1.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass requires a continuing or ongoing process.  A
    single uniform admixture with preserving agent is not included herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclass 418 for process of storing solid foods under controlled condition.


CLS 422/41
TXT Of liquid:

    Process under subclass 40 wherein the substance stored or protected is a
    liquid under the conditions employed.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is the storage in a molten state of a
    material solid at room temperature.


CLS 422/42
TXT By preventing evaporation:

    Process under subclass 41 wherein the liquid is protected against loss by
    evaporation.


CLS 422/43
TXT Of water:

    Process under subclass 42 wherein water is the liquid protected against
    evaporation.


CLS 422/44
TXT BLOOD TREATING DEVICE FOR TRANSFUSIBLE BLOOD:

    Apparatus under the class definition for treating blood externally of a
    blooded animal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 2 for
    process of maintaining blood cells in a viable state.

    494,    Imperforate Bowl:  Centrifugal Separators, appropriate subclasses,
    for apparatus and process for breaking up a mixture of fluids or fluent
    substances into two or more components by centrifuging within a generally
    solid-walled, receptacle-like member, and see especially subclasses 16+,
    for a separator of that class which includes a plurality of miniature bowls
    (e.g., test tubes) distributed about a rotatable carrier and readily
    removable therefrom, which latter design of separator, it may be observed,
    frequently is utilized for separating blood into two or more of its
    components.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 4+ for the treatment of blood and returning it
    to the body; subclass 7 for transfusion devices; and subclasses 8+ for
    devices for shunting body fluids from one area of the body to another.


CLS 422/45
TXT Oxygenator:

    Apparatus under subclass 44 having means for extracorporeal oxygenation of
    blood.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 75+ for devices for contacting a gas with a liquid.


CLS 422/46
TXT Including integral heat-exchange means:

    Apparatus under subclass 45 having means integrally connected with the
    oxygenator for heating or cooling.


CLS 422/47
TXT Bubble or foam producing:

    Apparatus under subclass 45 having means for producing a blood-oxygen
    mixture in the form of a foam or entrained bubbles.


CLS 422/48
TXT Membrane:

    Apparatus under subclass 45 wherein a membrane (e.g., semipermeable
    microporous, etc.) separates the blood from the oxygenating medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 4+ for apparatus for
    selective diffusion of gases (e.g., semipermeable membrane, etc.).

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 634+ for selective
    separation using septum selective to composition.


CLS 422/49
TXT INCLUDING MEANS FACILITATING PART REPLACEMENT OR REPAIR OTHER THAN SOLID,
    EXTENDED SURFACE, FLUID CONTACT MEANS:

    Apparatus under the class definition having structure disclosed as making
    it easier to repair or replace parts of the apparatus which deteriorated or
    is inoperative.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    171+, 190, and 211+, for this feature in a solid, extended surface,
    fluid contact means.


CLS 422/50
TXT ANALYZER, STRUCTURED INDICATOR, OR MANIPULATIVE LABORATORY DEVICE:

    Apparatus under the class definition for quantitative or qualitative
    chemical analysis and laboratory devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, for apparatus for making tests and
    measurement not otherwise provided for.  See particularly subclass 38 for
    testing illuminating fluids for flash point, vapor pressure, and end point.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 88+ for systems for controlling the
    mixture of a plurality of fluids in response to the sensing of a condition
    or characteristic of the mixture, note particularly subclass 93 in which
    the control is in response to a sensing of a chemical property.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclasses 132 and 141 for combinations
    of apparatus for making a test or measurement and means for controlling a
    reaction provided for in that class.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 400-435 for
    apparatus specialized for the determination of a hydrogen ion concentration
    of solutions.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus for testing an electrical property or condition of a material by
    electrical means, even though the results of the test may be used as an
    indication of some other physical or chemical property or condition.

    346,    Recorders, for recording apparatus, per se.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 8 for flammability testing;
    and subclasses 31+ for calorimetry.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 1+ for
    similar processes.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclass 260
    for the sensing, detecting, or monitoring of hazardous or toxic waste
    during storage or containment.


CLS 422/51
TXT Calorimeter:

    Apparatus under subclass 50 wherein the analyzer is a calorimeter; i.e., an
    analyzer using the measurement of thermodynamic parameters of the material
    being analyzed as the basis of the analysis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 31+ for a calorimeter not
    involving the determination of the amount of a constituent in a compound or
    means effecting a chemical reaction other than combustion.


CLS 422/52
TXT Chemiluminescent:

    Apparatus under subclass 50 comprising means using the measurement of light
    generated and emitted during a chemical reaction of the material being
    analyzed as the basis of the analysis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 182.11 for chemiluminescent compositions.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 34 for chemiluminescent lighting apparatus
    having light modifying structure.


CLS 422/53
TXT Corrosion tester:

    Apparatus under subclass 50 for measuring (a) the corrosivity of chemical
    agents or environments, (b) the corrosion resistance of materials, or (c)
    the effectiveness of corrosion-inhibiting agents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240+,   for chemical apparatus constructed of material to resist corrosion.


CLS 422/54
TXT Flame ionization detector:

    Apparatus under subclass 50 comprising an analyzer using the measurement of
    a change in the conductivity of a standard, usually hydrogen, flame due to
    the inclusion of another gas or vapor therein to detect the presence or
    amount of that gas or vapor in a sample.


CLS 422/55
TXT Structured visual or optical indicator, per se:

    Apparatus under subclass 50 comprising (a) a structured indicator; i.e., an
    indicator which is more than a composition, per se, and has structure, or
    (b) liquid crystals, per se, which give a visual or optical indication of
    the presence or amount of material to be tested in the sample.

    (1)     Note.  Visual or optical indicators, per se, include color
    indicators such as test papers or test strips and columns which give a
    visual or optical indication (e.g., color) of the presence or amount of
    material in the sample.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82.05+, for structured visual or optical indicators which include a
    standard referencing scale such as pipettes, burettes, color charts, and
    test strips including a standard colored chart.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 200+ for indicators of general
    utility.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 408.1 for indicating compositions.


CLS 422/56
TXT Having reagent in absorbent or bibulous substrate:

    Apparatus under subclass 55 wherein indicating reagent is contained in
    absorbent or bibulous carrier or substrate; e.g., a dip-stick, test paper,
    wick, etc.


CLS 422/57
TXT Having coated reagent:

    Apparatus under subclass 55 wherein the reagent is coated on the surface of
    a carrier or substrate.


CLS 422/58
TXT In holder or container having special form:

    Apparatus under subclass 55 wherein the indicator is contained in a holder
    or container having a special form or design; e.g., test plates, dish,
    tray, slide, etc.


CLS 422/59
TXT Column:

    Apparatus under subclass 58 in the form of a column-like structure.


CLS 422/60
TXT Having plural-layered material:

    Apparatus under subclass 59 having material consisting of multiple distinct
    layers.


CLS 422/61
TXT Test package or kit:

    Apparatus under subclass 50 comprising (a) a package containing reagents
    and all necessary ingredients to perform a test or (b) self-contained test
    kits for field testing, usually having dosage amounts of each material
    needed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55+,    for structured visual or optical indicators which may be a
    component of a kit or package.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, appropriate subclasses for packages
    and kits, especially subclasses 524.1+ for chemical package.


CLS 422/62
TXT Automatic analytical monitor and control of industrial process:

    Apparatus under subclass 50 having means for automatically analytically
    monitoring and controlling a chemical or physical industrial process; e.g.,
    measuring the carbon monoxide concentration in a flue gas and automatically
    changing the fuel/air ratio based on the measurement, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63+     and 81+, for automatic analytical system with specified transport
    means.

    105+,   for control element responsive to sensed operation.


CLS 422/63
TXT Sample mechanical transport means in or for automated analytical system:

    Apparatus under subclass 50 having self-operated analytical systems or
    components thereof wherein the sample to be analyzed is moved to treating
    stations by mechanical means.


CLS 422/64
TXT Means is turntable (circular):

    Apparatus under subclass 63 wherein the mechanical means includes a
    circular turntable for moving the sample from station to station.

    (1)     Note.  The presence of a circular turntable for feeding the sample
    to the analytical system is not included herein.


CLS 422/65
TXT Means is conveyor and rack:

    Apparatus under subclass 63 wherein the mechanical means includes a
    conveyor and sample supporting rack.


CLS 422/66
TXT Means is moving tape or band:

    Apparatus under subclass 63 wherein the mechanical means includes a moving
    band or tape having sample supports integral therewith.


CLS 422/67
TXT With specific analytical program control means:

    Apparatus under subclass 63 having means for providing specific analytical
    program control, including; i.e., command instructions, data correlation,
    sample location, coding of sample holder, etc.


CLS 422/68.1
TXT Means for analyzing liquid or solid sample:
    Apparatus under subclass 50 wherein the material to be analyzed is
    initially in the solid or liquid state, including the analysis of a gas
    contained in a liquid or solid sample.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 53.01+ for liquid analysis, per
    se; subclasses 152.18+ for a fluid analysis in testing a borehole, a
    casing, or a drill rigging wherein the test is not purely electrical or
    purely magnetic; and in particular subclass 152.42 for determining the
    relative proportion of fluid constituents wherein the test is not purely
    electrical or purely magnetic.


CLS 422/69
TXT Sorption testing:

    Apparatus under subclass 68.1 including means providing for the absorption
    or adsorption of the material being tested, usually on a solid material.


CLS 422/70
TXT Liquid chromatography:

    Apparatus under subclass 69 specifically designed or adapted for liquid
    chromagraphic analysis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 61.1 for liquid chromatography
    testing not involving a chemical reaction.


CLS 422/71
TXT With radioactive material:

    Apparatus under subclass 69 wherein the material being tested includes a
    radioactive tracer, including; e.g., apparatus for T-3 and T-4 tests.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159,    for apparatus for radioactive reactant or product.


CLS 422/72
TXT Including centrifuge:

    Apparatus under subclass 68.1 having centrifugal apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    494,    Imperforate Bowl:  Centrifugal Separators, appropriate subclasses,
    for apparatus for breaking up a mixture of fluids or fluent substances into
    two or more components by centrifuging within a generally solid-walled,
    receptacle-like member.


CLS 422/73
TXT With coagulometer for agglutination, clotting, or for particle (e.g., cell,
    etc.) counting, or volume or characteristics determination:

    Apparatus under subclass 68.1 for analyzing material by measuring such
    coagulation phenomena as agglomeration, agglutination, precipitation,
    clotting, prothrombin, etc., or for particle (e.g., cell, etc.) counting,
    or volume or characteristics determination.


CLS 422/74
TXT Dairy tester:

    Apparatus under subclass 68.1 for analysis of dairy products.


CLS 422/75
TXT Including titrator:

    Apparatus under subclass 68.1 which utilizes titration as a means of
    chemical analysis.


CLS 422/76
TXT Conductiometric type:

    Apparatus under subclass 75 having a conductiometric detector which
    measures ion concentration; e.g., pH, etc., by incremental volumetric
    additions of a titrant.


CLS 422/77
TXT With integrating or differentiating means:

    Apparatus under subclass 76 having differentiating or integrating means,
    usually to extrapolate mathematically to the desired titration end point.


CLS 422/78
TXT Including means for pyrolysis, combustion, or oxidation:

    Apparatus under subclass 68.1 having means for heating the substance to be
    analyzed either in the presence or absence of oxygen to cause a chemical
    reaction; e.g., oxidation, etc., or thermal decomposition of the material.


CLS 422/79
TXT Biological, chemical, or total oxygen demand (i.e., BOD, COD, TOD):

    Apparatus under subclass 78 for the analysis of water to determine its
    oxygen demand.


CLS 422/80
TXT And means directly analyzing evolved gas:

    Apparatus under subclass 78 having means for analyzing the gas which is
    produced as a result of the combustion or pyrolysis.


CLS 422/81
TXT Automated system with sample fluid pressure transport means:

    Apparatus under subclass 68.1 having self-operated analytical systems
    wherein the sample is moved to treating stations principally by fluid
    pressure.


CLS 422/82
TXT And means segmenting fluid material:

    Apparatus under subclass 81 having means for dividing the fluid into
    segments with bubbles or slugs of separating fluid.


CLS 422/82.01
TXT Measuring electrical property:
    Apparatus under subclass 68.1 having means for measuring an electrical
    property such as detecting the presence of electrical charge carrying
    substances (e.g., ions, electrolytes, etc.) in the material to be analyzed
    or detecting the effect of the material to be analyzed on an electrical
    circuit (e.g., change in voltage, current, electromotive force, potential,
    impedance, resistance, or conductivity).


CLS 422/82.02
TXT Resistance or conductivity:
    Apparatus under subclass 82.01 having means for measuring the resistance or
    conductivity of the material to be analyzed or having means for detecting
    an alteration or a change of resistance or conductivity due to the presence
    of an element (e.g., an ion) in the material to be analyzed.


CLS 422/82.03
TXT Ion selective electrode:
    Apparatus under subclass 82.01 having an ion selective or ion sensitive
    electrode to measure the presence of a particular substance in the material
    to be analyzed.

    (1)     Note.  An ion selective chloride electrode will measure only
    chloride ions as opposed to any negatively charged ion in a solution.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 416+ for ion
    selective electrodes, per se.


CLS 422/82.04
TXT Dissolved gas:
    Apparatus under subclass 82.03 wherein the ion selective electrode is
    specific for a dissolved gas; e.g., a pH sensitive electrode or an
    electrode specific for dissolved carbon dioxide.


CLS 422/82.05
TXT Measuring optical property by using ultraviolet, infrared, or visible
    light:Apparatus under subclass 68.1 having means for detecting an optical
    property of the material to be analyzed.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are apparatus which include some
    sort of referencing scale with which the sample can be compared by the
    human eye; e.g., graduations on a pipette, a burette, or a color chart.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55+,    for structured visual or optical indicators, per se, in the absence
    of a positive claimed recitation of an indicator with a referencing scale,
    even though the indicator could be used with a referencing scale.


CLS 422/82.06
TXT Optode or optrode:
    Apparatus under subclass 82.05 wherein the means for detecting an optical
    property is an optode or optrode; i.e., an optical detection apparatus that
    includes an optical indicator which is set apart from the material to be
    analyzed by a semipermeable membrane.

    (1)     Note.  In such apparatus, the substance to be measured in the
    material to be analyzed permeates through the semipermeable membrane
    reacting with the indicator to produce an optical response that is detected
    by an optical detector; e.g., a fluorescence detector or a color detector.


CLS 422/82.07
TXT Fluorescence:
    Apparatus under subclass 82.06 wherein the optode or optrode is such that
    it produces a fluorescent optical response which is detected by a
    fluorescence detector.


CLS 422/82.08
TXT Fluorescence:
    Apparatus under subclass 82.05 having means for measuring fluorescence or
    luminescence in the material to be analyzed; e.g., a fluorimeter or an
    oscilloscope.


CLS 422/82.09
TXT Absorbance or transmittance:
    Apparatus under subclass 82.05 having means for measuring the absorbance or
    transmittance of the material to be analyzed; e.g., a spectrophotometer, a
    colorimeter, or a spectro-optical digitizer.


CLS 422/82.11
TXT Waveguides:
    Apparatus under subclass 82.05 having a waveguide which is in contact with
    the material to be analyzed and through which light is passed, which light
    interacts with the material to be analyzed modifying the light which is
    detected after it leaves the waveguide.

    (1)     Note.  Such waveguides often have a coating thereon which reacts
    with a substance in the material to be analyzed to produce a change in the
    coating which in turn modifies the light passed through the waveguide.


CLS 422/82.12
TXT Measuring temperature:
    Apparatus under subclass 68.1 having means for measuring the temperature of
    the material to be analyzed; e.g., a thermocouple.


CLS 422/82.13
TXT Measuring pressure:
    Apparatus under subclass 68.1 having means for measuring the pressure in
    the material to be analyzed; e.g., a manometer.


CLS 422/83
TXT Means for analyzing gas sample:

    Apparatus under subclass 50 wherein the material to be analyzed is
    initially in the gaseous state.

    (1)     Note.  The analysis of a gas which is initially contained in a
    liquid or solid sample is not contained here (see this class, subclasses
    68+).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 23.2+ for gas analysis testing
    not involving a chemical reaction, particularly subclasses 23.35+ for
    chromatographic testing.


CLS 422/84
TXT Breath tester:

    Apparatus under subclass 83 having means for testing breath.


CLS 422/85
TXT Based on color change:

    Apparatus under subclass 84 wherein the analytical measurement is based on
    a color change.


CLS 422/86
TXT Including means reacting gas with color indicator:

    Apparatus under subclass 83 having means for reacting the gas with a color
    indicator.


CLS 422/87
TXT Strip indicator:

    Apparatus under subclass 86 in the form of a strip.


CLS 422/88
TXT Including means for adsorbing or absorbing gas into or onto liquid or solid
    media:

    Apparatus under subclass 83 having means for absorbing or adsorbing the gas
    sample or that portion to be tested into or onto liquid or solid media.


CLS 422/89
TXT Gas chromatography:

    Apparatus under subclass 88 wherein the analytical device is a gas
    chromatographic system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 23.35 for gas chromatographic
    apparatus not involving chemical reaction.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 101+ for chromatography type
    apparatus for gas separation.


CLS 422/90
TXT With conductiometric detector:

    Apparatus under subclass 88 having a conductiometric detector for analyzing
    the gas sample.


CLS 422/91
TXT With photometric detector:

    Apparatus under subclass 88 having a photoelectric detector for analyzing
    the sorbed gas sample.


CLS 422/92
TXT With volumetric detector:

    Apparatus under subclass 88 having means for making volumetric measurements
    following the sorption of the gas.


CLS 422/93
TXT Including means dividing sample stream into plural parallel segments having
    diverse treating means and the analytical result compared or combined:

    Apparatus under subclass 83 having means for dividing a gas stream into
    multiple, parallel segments having diverse treating means therefor and
    means uniting or comparing the analytical results obtained therefrom.


CLS 422/94
TXT Combustible gas detector:

    Apparatus under subclass 83 for determining the presence or concentration
    of flammable material in a gas sample, including means for combusting the
    gas sample and means to detect the presence of, or extent of, the
    combustion.


CLS 422/95
TXT With thermoelectric detector:

    Apparatus under subclass 94 including a temperature detecting means of the
    thermistor type, etc.


CLS 422/96
TXT Wheatstone bridge:

    Apparatus under subclass 95 having a resistance bridge circuit as a part
    thereof.


CLS 422/97
TXT With specific coating on bridge element:

    Apparatus under subclass 96 having a named material coating, usually a
    catalyst, on a bridge element.


CLS 422/98
TXT Analysis based on electrical measurement:

    Apparatus under subclass 83 wherein the sample is analyzed by measuring an
    electrical property thereof.


CLS 422/99
TXT Miscellaneous laboratory apparatus and elements, per se:

    Apparatus under subclass 50 specifically designed for use in a laboratory.


CLS 422/100
TXT Pipette or other volumetric fluid transfer means:

    Apparatus under subclass 99 having means for volumetrically transferring a
    fluid.


CLS 422/101
TXT Including means for separating a constituent; e.g., filter, condenser,
    extractor, etc.:

    Apparatus under subclass 99 having means for separating a constituent by
    filtration, condensation, extraction, etc.


CLS 422/102
TXT Container:

    Apparatus under subclass 99 having means for holding material.


CLS 422/103
TXT Valve or connector structure:

    Apparatus under subclass 99 having valve or connector structure or this
    structure, per se.


CLS 422/104
TXT Holder, support, housing, or hood:

    Apparatus under subclass 99 for supporting, maintaining in a desired
    relationship with other structure, or surrounding other laboratory
    structures.


CLS 422/105
TXT CONTROL ELEMENT RESPONSIVE TO A SENSED OPERATING CONDITION:

    Apparatus under the class definition having means for automatically
    modifying an operation of the system in response to a means sensing an
    operating condition or change of the same; e.g., automatic shutdown of the
    reactor responsive to excessive temperature, pressure, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, subclasses 202+ for non-coating apparatus
    combined with control element responsive to a sensed operating condition
    and with means for growing therein-defined single-crystal of all types of
    materials, including inorganic or organic.


CLS 422/106
TXT Responsive to liquid level:

    Apparatus under subclass 105 having a control element responsive to a
    sensed liquid level.


CLS 422/107
TXT Control element directly mechanically linked to separate sensor:

    Apparatus under subclass 105 wherein the control element is mechanically
    linked directly to a separate sensor.


CLS 422/108
TXT Control element responds proportionally to variable signal from a sensor:

    Apparatus under subclass 105 wherein the control element responds
    proportionally to a variable signal from a sensor.


CLS 422/109
TXT Controls heat transfer:

    Apparatus under subclass 108 wherein the control element regulates the
    degree of heat transfer in the system.


CLS 422/110
TXT Controls flow rate of a material to or from a contact zone:

    Apparatus under subclass 108 wherein the control element regulates the flow
    rate of material into or out of a contact zone.


CLS 422/111
TXT Material is an input to contact zone:

    Apparatus under subclass 110 wherein the control element regulates the flow
    rate of material into the contact zone.


CLS 422/112
TXT Control element is fluid pressure sensitive:

    Apparatus under subclass 105 wherein the control element is responsive to
    fluid pressure.


CLS 422/113
TXT Pressure-relief valve (e.g., pop-off valve) or check valve:

    Apparatus under subclass 112 wherein the fluid pressure sensitive control
    element is a pressure-relief valve; i.e., pop-off valve, or check valve.


CLS 422/114
TXT Control element is a binary responsive valve:

    Apparatus under subclass 105 wherein the control element is a binary
    responsive valve; i.e., a valve having but two operation positions; e.g.,
    open and closed, etc.


CLS 422/115
TXT Valve diverts flow from a contact zone:

    Apparatus under subclass 114 wherein the operation control is that of
    bypassing the reaction zone.


CLS 422/116
TXT Sensed condition is operating time and control is operation sequencer:

    Apparatus under subclass 105 wherein the sensed operating condition is the
    passage of operating time and the control element is an operation sequencer.


CLS 422/117
TXT WITH SAFETY FEATURE:

    Apparatus under the class definition having special means for protecting
    the operator or the environmental area surrounding the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for apparatus having pop-off valves.


CLS 422/118
TXT Preventing opening of closure of pressurized apparatus at unsafe pressure:

    Apparatus under subclass 117 wherein the safety feature prevents the
    opening of a movable or removable closure of the apparatus when the
    apparatus is at such pressure that the opening of the closure is an unsafe
    act.


CLS 422/119
TXT WITH INDICATING, SIGNALLING, RECORDING, SAMPLING, OR INSPECTION MEANS:

    Apparatus under the class definition having an indicator, signal, recorder,
    or inspection means.


CLS 422/120
TXT FOR DEODORIZING OF, OR CHEMICAL PURIFICATION OF, OR GENERATION OF,
    LIFE-SUSTAINING ENVIRONMENTAL GAS:

    Apparatus under the class definition for (a) taking the odor out or masking
    the odor of, or (b) chemical purification of a life-sustaining
    environmental gas (for breathing) or the chemical generation of the same.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168,    for waste gas purifier which usually releases the gas to the
    atmosphere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclass 202.26 for inhaling devices having means to
    regenerate the exhaled air so that it can be breathed again from the same
    device.


CLS 422/121
TXT With means exposing gas to electromagnetic wave energy or corpuscular
    radiation:

    Apparatus under subclass 120 having means for exposing the gas to
    electromagnetic wave energy (other than ordinary visible light) or
    corpuscular radiation; e.g., radioactive particles, etc.


CLS 422/122
TXT Including solid, extended surface, fluid contact reaction means (e.g.,
    Raschig rings, particulate or monolithic catalyst, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 120 having an extended surface contact reaction
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177+,   190+, and 211+, for this structure in a waste gas purifier, in
    plural stages, and a single stage, respectively.


CLS 422/123
TXT Including means adding material into environmental gas:

    Apparatus under subclass 120 having means for dispensing or injecting
    material into the gas.


CLS 422/124
TXT And mechanical means creating forced draft at addition site:

    Apparatus under subclass 123 having a mechanical means forcing an air
    current at the site wherein the material is introduced into the apparatus.


CLS 422/125
TXT With material-heating means:

    Apparatus under subclass 123 having means to increase the temperature of
    the material.


CLS 422/126
TXT Material is combusted:

    Apparatus under subclass 125 wherein the material is burned.


CLS 422/127
TXT SHOCK OR SOUND WAVE:

    Apparatus under class definition having means for creating sonic energy
    which is used to initiate or perfect a process. Included herein is
    apparatus for destroying organisms by the sudden release of high pressure.


CLS 422/128
TXT Including supersonic or ultrasonic energy generation means:

    Apparatus under subclass 127 wherein the energy produced travels faster
    than the speed of sound or it is ultrasonic; i.e., sound waves having
    frequencies on the order of or greater than 20,000 cps.


CLS 422/129
TXT CHEMICAL REACTOR:

    Apparatus under the class definition for the formation of a product by
    chemical reaction not otherwise provided for.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105+,   for apparatus having means for automatically modifying an operation
    of the system in response to a means sensing an operating condition or
    change of the same; e.g., automatic shutdown of the reactor responsive to
    excessive temperature, pressure, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for chemical manufacturing apparatus not elsewhere
    provided for producing articles of manufacture, and see especially subclass
    345 for differential etching apparatus.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for
    treating mineral oils.  Catalytic apparatus, even though employed for
    carrying out a catalytic-cracking process provided for in Class 208,
    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, is classified in this class (422).

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 193+ for
    apparatus employed in carrying out a process provided for in that class,
    which apparatus is not provided for in any other class.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 255 for apparatus for testing earth
    material samples involving, and in name only, chemical or physical
    separation and an invisible radiation test of the separated material;
    subclass 281 for ionic separation or analysis apparatus; subclasses 306+
    for the inspection of solids or liquids by charged particles and the
    detection of the particles modified by the solids or liquids; subclasses
    336.1+ for apparatus for analyzing material.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for organic compounds and process of
    manufacturing the same.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 40+ and 44+
    (particularly subclass 47) for a coating implement by means of which
    diverse materials are applied to a work surface.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, for inorganic compound and
    nonmetallic elements and processes for their manufacture involving chemical
    reaction.

    435,    Chemistry: Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 283.1+
    for apparatus for propagating, treating, or containing living organisms or
    for fermenting.


CLS 422/129.1
TXT Soap making:

    Apparatus under subclass 129 specifically designed for effecting a
    saponification reaction, i.e., conversion of a higher fatty ester or a
    natural resin ester into an alcohol and a salt by reacting an alkali with
    the ester.


CLS 422/130
TXT Bench scale:

    Apparatus under subclass 129 which is smaller than a pilot reactor and
    larger than a laboratory apparatus.


CLS 422/131
TXT Organic polymerization:

    Apparatus under subclass 129 for the chemical production of organic
    polymers.


CLS 422/132
TXT Closed loop:

    Apparatus under subclass 131 wherein the reactor is of the closed-loop
    type; i.e., one wherein substantially all of the reaction mass is
    continuously recycled during operation.


CLS 422/133
TXT Generating foamed plastic:

    Apparatus under subclass 131 wherein reactor is designed for the production
    of a foamed plastic or polymer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 162.4+ for a mixing apparatus that introduces
    materials into a mixing chamber in colliding jets, which materials may be
    disclosed as reactants for forming plastic foam.


CLS 422/134
TXT Including plural sequential reaction stages:

    Apparatus under subclass 131 having multiple, serially disposed reaction
    stages and means for subjecting the reaction mass successively to each of
    the stages.


CLS 422/135
TXT Including reactant agitating means in reaction chamber:

    Apparatus under subclass 131 having means located within the reaction
    chamber for mixing the reaction mass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224,    for apparatus having internal mixing or stirring means, and see the
    search notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 162.4+ for a mixing apparatus that introduces
    materials into a mixing chamber in colliding jets, which materials may be
    disclosed as reactants.


CLS 422/136
TXT And means rotatably mounting reaction chamber:

    Apparatus under subclass 135 having means to rotate the reaction chamber.


CLS 422/137
TXT Horizontal reaction chamber with screw or worm agitator:

    Apparatus under subclass 135 having a horizontally disposed reaction
    chamber and a mixing means in the form of a screw or worm.


CLS 422/138
TXT With heat exchanger for reaction chamber or reactants located therein:

    Apparatus under subclass 131 having means for modifying the ambient
    temperature disposed within or surrounding the reaction chamber and in
    heat-transfer contact therewith.


CLS 422/139
TXT Fluidized bed:

    Apparatus under subclass 129 wherein a bed of fluidizable solid particulate
    material, which may be a reactant, catalyst, or inert material, is disposed
    in a reaction chamber for the purpose of carrying out a chemical reaction
    in the formation of a product and including means for introducing a
    fluidizing medium into the bed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 576+ for
    similar fluidized bed structure for drying of particulate material.


CLS 422/140
TXT With liquid present:

    Apparatus under subclass 139 having a liquid present in the apparatus as
    either part of the reaction medium or part of the fluidizing medium.


CLS 422/141
TXT Plural reaction beds:

    Apparatus under subclass 139 comprising multiple reaction beds.


CLS 422/142
TXT Sequentially arranged:

    Apparatus under subclass 141 wherein the beds are serially disposed and
    having means for sequentially subjecting the reaction stream to multiple
    beds.


CLS 422/143
TXT Including specific wind box or particulate matter support grid:

    Apparatus under subclass 139 wherein the fluidizing medium introducing
    means includes a particulate matter support grid or a fluidizing inlet
    manifold chamber; i.e., wind box located within the reaction chamber,
    either structure being more than nominally recited.


CLS 422/144
TXT Including means to strip reaction mass from, or to regenerate, the
    particulate matter (including fluidized bed regenerators, per se):

    Apparatus under subclass 139 having means to remove the reaction mass from
    or renew the particulate material.


CLS 422/145
TXT And means providing flow of particulate matter into or out of reaction
    chamber:

    Apparatus under subclass 139 having means for flowing the particulate
    matter to or from the reaction chamber.


CLS 422/146
TXT With heat exchange means affecting reaction chamber or reactants located
    therein:

    Apparatus under subclass 139 having means for modifying the ambient
    temperature disposed within or surrounding the reaction chamber and in
    heat-transfer contact therewith.


CLS 422/147
TXT And means mechanically separating and removing particulate bed material
    from fluid effluent:

    Apparatus under subclass 139 having means for mechanically separating and
    removing the solid particulate material from the reaction product or
    fluidizing stream; e.g., fluidized bed in combination with upstream filter,
    cyclone, etc.


CLS 422/148
TXT Ammonia synthesizer:

    Apparatus under subclass 129 specifically adapted for the chemical
    synthesis of ammonia; e.g., a high pressure, catalytic ammonia synthesis
    reactor, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclass 202.26 for ammonia medicator.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclass 552 for electrolytic synthesis of
    ammonia.


CLS 422/149
TXT With means simultaneously carrying out conjugated reactions within single
    reactor:

    Apparatus under subclass 129 having means for simultaneously carrying out
    conjugated; i.e., sequential reactions within a single reactor; e.g., first
    reaction stage produces an intermediate product which is fed to a second
    reaction stage within the reactor wherein the intermediate product is
    converted into the final product, etc.


CLS 422/150
TXT Pigment or carbon black producer:

    Apparatus under subclass 129 wherein the reactor is specifically adapted
    for the chemical generation of pigmentary product; e.g., TiO2 etc., or
    carbon black.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 173 for chemical
    preparation of carbon by using an electrostatic field or electrical
    discharge.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 615+ for electrolytic synthesis of
    carbon or other nonmetal elements and subclass 768 for electrolytic
    treatment of a solid containing free carbon.


CLS 422/151
TXT With means injecting quench stream into reaction chamber downstream of
    reaction site:

    Apparatus under subclass 150 having means for injecting a stream of quench
    fluid into the reaction chamber at a location downstream of the reaction
    site.


CLS 422/152
TXT With particulate product collecting surface and means mechanically removing
    product therefrom:

    Apparatus under subclass 150 having a collecting surface for collecting the
    particulate material product of the reaction and means associated with the
    collecting surface for mechanically removing the product therefrom.


CLS 422/153
TXT Moving collecting surface:

    Apparatus under subclass 152 wherein the collecting surface is mounted for
    movement during use.


CLS 422/154
TXT Rotary collecting surface:

    Apparatus under subclass 153 wherein the collecting surface is rotatably
    mounted.


CLS 422/155
TXT Disk or plate:

    Apparatus under subclass 154 wherein the collecting surface is a rotatably
    mounted disk or plate.


CLS 422/156
TXT With plural sequential reaction zones or chambers:

    Apparatus under subclass 150 having multiple, sequentially arranged
    reaction zones or chambers.


CLS 422/157
TXT With movably or removably mounted plug means for converting reactor from
    (N) to (N+1) reaction stages:

    Apparatus under subclass 156 wherein the plural stages are located in (a) a
    single reaction chamber or (b) in plural reaction chambers and includes a
    movably or removably mounted plug means in a reaction chamber for
    selectively converting the same from (N) to (N+1) reaction zones therein.


CLS 422/158
TXT Vapor phase reaction type:

    Apparatus under subclass 150 wherein the product is produced by a vapor
    phase reaction.


CLS 422/159
TXT For radioactive reactant or product:
    Apparatus under subclass 129 for a radioactive reactant or producing a
    radioactive product.


CLS 422/160
TXT Inorganic sulfur acid or anhydride producing type:

    Apparatus under subclass 129 for producing an inorganic sulfur acid or
    anhydride thereof.


CLS 422/161
TXT Acid is final product:

    Apparatus under subclass 160 wherein an acid is produced.


CLS 422/162
TXT Inorganic hydrator:

    Apparatus under subclass 129 wherein water is a chemical reactant.


CLS 422/163
TXT Explosives synthesizer:

    Apparatus under subclass 129 for producing a product which is an explosive.


CLS 422/164
TXT Solid reactant type (i.e., absence of fluid reactants):

    Apparatus under subclass 129 specifically designed for nonfluid reactants
    wherein all of the reactants are in a nonfluid state (i.e., solid); e.g.,
    generation of oxygen from chlorate candles, etc.


CLS 422/165
TXT Including ignition means for reactant:

    Apparatus under subclass 164 having means for kindling the reactant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    431,    Combustion, appropriate subclasses for various types of ignition
    means.


CLS 422/166
TXT Electrically actuated:

    Apparatus under subclass 165 wherein the ignition means is electrically
    actuated.


CLS 422/167
TXT Including reactor cooling means surrounding reactor:

    Apparatus under subclass 164 having means for cooling the external surface
    of the reactor.


CLS 422/168
TXT Waste gas purifier:

    Apparatus under subclass 129 for the modification of a waste gas, prior to
    its discharge into the atmosphere, by chemical reaction to reduce the
    pollutant content thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120+,   for apparatus for purifying life-sustaining gas.


CLS 422/169
TXT Including means providing sequential purification stages:

    Apparatus under subclass 168 having means for subjecting the waste gas to
    multiple, succeeding purification stages, at least one being of the
    chemical reaction type.


CLS 422/170
TXT Plural chemical reaction stages:

    Apparatus under subclass 169 having multiple chemical reaction stages.


CLS 422/171
TXT Solid, extended surface, fluid contact type:

    Apparatus under subclass 170 wherein the reaction stages contain solid
    extended surface fluid contact reaction means (i.e., means providing a
    relatively large solid fluid contact surface area within the reaction zone).


CLS 422/172
TXT And means downstream of a stage for injecting a reactant into waste gas for
    interreaction in subsequent stage:

    Apparatus under subclass 170 having means located downstream of a reaction
    stage for injecting a reactant into the waste gas stream for reaction
    therewith in a subsequent reaction stage (e.g., a catalyst bed for reducing
    NOx in the waste gas followed by a catalyst bed for oxidizing CO in the
    waste gas, with means for injecting oxygen into the waste gas, as it passes
    between the two catalyst beds).


CLS 422/173
TXT With heat exchanger for reaction chamber or reactants located therein:

    Apparatus under subclass 168 having means for heating or cooling the
    reaction chamber or for heating or cooling the reactants located within the
    reaction chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182+,   for heat exchange means injecting a combustion fuel into reaction
    chamber and burning the same.


CLS 422/174
TXT Electrical type:

    Apparatus under subclass 173 wherein the heat exchange means includes an
    electrical heater.


CLS 422/175
TXT Regenerative heat sink:

    Apparatus under subclass 173 wherein the heat-exchange means includes a
    regenerative heat-sink means; e.g., a low heat capacity mass which absorbs
    heat from the hot waste gas and gives up the heat, upon reversal of flow,
    to colder waste gas to preheat the same upstream of the reaction site, etc.


CLS 422/176
TXT Including waste gas flow distributor upstream of reaction site and within
    reaction chamber modifying velocity profile of gas:

    Apparatus under subclass 168 having waste gas flow distribution means
    upstream of the purification reaction site and located within the reaction
    chamber for the purpose of equalizing or otherwise modifying the velocity
    profile of the waste gas at the upstream end of the reaction site.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183,    for claimed mixing means combined with means injecting combustion
    fuel in the reaction chamber.  The mixing means may inherently act as a
    distribution device.


CLS 422/177
TXT Including solid, extended surface, fluid contact reaction means; e.g.,
    inert Raschig rings, particulate absorbent, particulate or monolithic
    catalyst, etc.:

    Apparatus under subclass 168 including solid extended surface, fluid
    contact reaction means; i.e., means providing a relatively large solid
    contact surface area within the reaction zone wherein the large surface
    area presents multiple reaction sites for contact by the reaction mixture
    and, thereby, enhance the rate and/or the completeness of the purification
    reaction, including; e.g., inert Raschig rings, particulate absorbent, etc.


CLS 422/178
TXT And contact regenerating means or means for cleaning an internal surface of
    the reaction chamber:

    Apparatus under subclass 177 having either (a) means for renewing the spent
    extended surface contact means or (b) means for cleaning an internal
    surface of the reaction chamber.


CLS 422/179
TXT Fixed bed with resilient or differential thermal expansion compensating bed
    support means:

    Apparatus under subclass 177 wherein the solid extended surface, fluid
    contact means is in the form of a relatively fixed bed of contact material
    and including means for supporting the contact bed within the reaction
    chamber, said support means either itself being resilient or being
    resiliently mounted to provide for the absorption of mechanical shock or to
    maintain the contact material within the bed or being specifically designed
    to compensate for differences in thermal expansion of components in the
    reaction chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221,    for this structure generally in a chemical reactor.


CLS 422/180
TXT Unitary (i.e., nonparticulate) contact bed (e.g., monolithic catalyst bed,
    etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 177 wherein the extended surface contact means is
    in the form of a unitary (i.e., nonparticulate) contact bed; e.g., a
    monolithic honeycomb coated with a catalyst, catalyst-coated metallic
    screen, etc.


CLS 422/181
TXT Fixed annularly shaped bed of contact material and means directing gas
    therethrough substantially perpendicular to longitudinal axis of bed:

    Apparatus under subclass 177 wherein the extended surface contact means is
    in the form of a relatively fixed, annularly shaped bed of contact material
    and including means for directing the flow of waste gas through the contact
    bed in a direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of
    the contact bed.


CLS 422/182
TXT Including means injecting combustion fuel into reaction chamber in direct
    contact with waste gas:

    Apparatus under subclass 168 having means for injecting combustion fuel
    into the reaction chamber for direct contact of the fuel itself, or
    products of combustion thereof, with the waste gas.


CLS 422/183
TXT And means mixing combustion fuel with waste gas upstream of reaction site:

    Apparatus under subclass 182 wherein the fuel-injecting means includes
    means for injecting the fuel into the waste gas stream and for mixing the
    fuel therewith at a location upstream of the reaction site.


CLS 422/184.1
TXT For chemically destroying or disintegrating solid waste, other than burning
    alone:

    Apparatus under subclass 129 for destroying or breaking up solid waste
    utilizing a chemical reaction, other than burning alone.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is not intended to contain an apparatus
    related to composting.  Such matter is provided for in Class 435,
    subclasses 290.1+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 222+ for subject
    matter of that class combined with disinfecting means.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 38+ for
    apparatus of that class combined with means for applying a fluid to the
    material being worked upon.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 290.1+
    for composting apparatus.


CLS 422/185
TXT For chemical recovery of chemicals from waste paper making liquor:

    Apparatus under subclass 129 for chemically recovering chemicals for waste
    kraft or black liquors, e.g., waste liquor from a paper-making process.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 232+ for paper making
    apparatus.


CLS 422/186
TXT With means applying electromagnetic wave energy or corpuscular radiation to
    reactants for initiating or perfecting chemical reaction:

    Apparatus under subclass 129 having means for applying electromagnetic wave
    energy (other than visible light) or corpuscular radiation; e.g.,
    radioactive particles, etc., to the reactants for initiating or perfecting
    the reaction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21      and 22+, for process of using electromagnetic radiation for
    disinfecting, deodorizing, preserving, or sterilizing.

    121,    for apparatus for deodorizing, chemically purify, or generating a
    life sustaining environment (e.g., air, etc.)

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 245+ and
    266+ for processes and apparatus involving subjecting material to
    electrical or selected radiant energy.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclass 1 for processes
    of cleaning or liquid contact with solids, including application of
    electrical radiant or wave energy to work.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclasses for
    process which employ the apparatus of this subclass (Class 422, subclasses
    186+).

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 748 for processes of
    that class including the use of electrical or wave energy directly applied
    to the material being treated.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 600+ for inductive heating, subclasses
    678+ for microwave heating, and subclasses 764+ for capacitive dielectric
    heating.

    373,    Industrial Electric heating Furnaces, subclasses 18+ for plasma or
    combination furnaces; and subclasses 60+ for electric use furnaces.


CLS 422/186.01
TXT Magnetic:

    Subject matter under subclass 186 including means establishing a magnetic
    field in which the chemical reaction takes place.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 155 and 156 for
    corresponding processes; and subclass 193 for apparatus establishing a
    permanent or nonvarying magnetic field in which the reaction takes place.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 222+ for separators
    for separating solids from a liquid by magnetic action.


CLS 422/186.02
TXT Object protection:

    Subject matter under subclass 186.01 specialized for the protection of
    objects by the application of an electromagnetic field.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 196 and 197 for
    object protecting by electrolytic apparatus.


CLS 422/186.03
TXT With electrical discharge:

    Subject matter under subclass 186.01 including in addition to the
    electromagnetic field means to give an electric discharge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186.2+, for chemical reactor apparatus employing only an arc or spark
    discharge means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 156 for
    corresponding processes.


CLS 422/186.04
TXT Electrostatic field or electrical discharge:

    Subject matter under subclass 186 wherein an electrostatic field or
    electric discharge is included in the reaction zone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186.3,  for apparatus employing an electromagnetic field in addition to the
    electric discharge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 15+ for electric or
    electrostatic field separation apparatus for gas separation not involving
    conversion of constituents to other compounds by chemical reaction.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 164+ for
    corresponding processes.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses for
    electrical space discharge devices, including those for producing arcs or
    sparks.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for systems for supplying electric energy to electric space
    discharge devices of the gas vapor ionization type; especially subclass 111
    where the discharge device includes means to supply a fluent material to
    the discharge space.


CLS 422/186.05
TXT Treating surface of solid substrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 186.04 wherein the material being treated is
    a nonfluent solid and the treatment involves only the surface of the solid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 620+ for coating apparatus including
    means to apply electrical and/or radiant energy to a workpiece and/or
    coating material.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 457+ for coating processes including
    direct application of electric, magnetic, or wave energy to the workpiece


CLS 422/186.06
TXT Surface is metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 186.05 wherein the solid is a metal.

    (1)     Note.  Particularly included in this subclass is apparatus for ion
    nitriding (or other ion bombardment treatment) of metal workpieces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, appropriate subclasses for processes of heat
    treatment of solid metal to modify or maintain the internal physical
    structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical property of metal.
    Particularly, see subclass 222 for processes of carburizing or nitriding of
    metal from an external source of carbon or nitrogen and subclass 239 for a
    process of ion implantation of solid metal.  Also, see Class 148,
    subclasses 224, 525, and 565 for other processes which use electromagnetic
    wave energy, plasma, electron arcs, or beams to treat solid metal for
    purposes of that class.


CLS 422/186.07
TXT Ozonizers:

    Subject matter under subclass 186.04 specialized for the production of
    ozone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclass 202.25 for ozone inhalers.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 176 for
    corresponding processes.


CLS 422/186.08
TXT With preparatory or product-treating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 186.07 including means for the preparatory
    treatment of the material fed to the ozonizer, or means to treat the
    product thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Combination of an ozonizer and apparatus for the application
    of the ozone to material to be sterilized or otherwise treated are not here
    included unless not otherwise provided for in other classes.


CLS 422/186.09
TXT With drying means:

    Subject matter under subclass 186.08 in which the treatment means includes
    means to remove water or water vapor.


CLS 422/186.1
TXT With filtering or particle removal means:

    Subject matter under subclass 186.08 wherein the treatment means includes
    means to remove suspended solid or liquid particles.


CLS 422/186.11
TXT With cooling, compression, condensation, or liquefying means:

    Subject matter under subclass 186.08 wherein the treatment means effects a
    cooling, compression, condensation, or liquefying of the gas being treated
    or the treated gas.


CLS 422/186.12
TXT With subsequent use means:

    Subject matter under subclass 186.07 including means for the application of
    the ozone to the object or material to be sterilized or otherwise treated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 760 for processes of
    that class utilizing ozone.


CLS 422/186.13
TXT With electrode moving means:

    Subject matter under subclass 186.07 including means to move one or more of
    the electrodes.


CLS 422/186.14
TXT With fluent reactant flow control means:

    Subject matter under subclass 186.07 including means to control the
    direction or amount of a fluent reactant (e.g., oxygen, containing gas or
    liquid) flowing to or through the reaction zone.

    (1)     Note.  Such a means is frequently disclosed as one or more valves.


CLS 422/186.15
TXT With current control or special electrical supply means:

    Subject matter under subclass 186.07 including means to control the supply
    of electrical current to the treatment zone or which includes special
    electrical current supply means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for miscellaneous systems for controlling the current and/or
    voltage in a single circuit.


CLS 422/186.16
TXT With pulse generating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 186.15 wherein the voltage, current,
    frequency, or polarity of the power supply is changed regularly and
    deliberately overtime.

    (1)     Note.  Simple sine wave AC current is not included in this subclass.


CLS 422/186.18
TXT Cylindrical electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 186.07 in which one or more of the electrodes
    of the ozonizer is cylindrical.


CLS 422/186.19
TXT With heating or cooling means:

    Subject matter under subclass 186.18 in which the ozonizer is provided with
    a heating or cooling means.


CLS 422/186.2
TXT With heating or cooling means:

    Subject matter under subclass 186.07 including means to cool or heat the
    ozonizer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186.08, for the combinations of an ozonizer and a preparatory or subsequent
    cooling means.


CLS 422/186.21
TXT Arc or spark discharge means:

    Subject matter under subclass 186.04 specialized for the formation of the
    spark or arc type of electrical discharge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses for
    electric space discharge devices including those for producing arcs or
    sparks.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for electric space discharge devices of the gas or vapor type;
    note especially subclasses 111.01+ where the discharge device includes
    means to supply fluent material to the discharge device.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 60+ for arc
    furnaces in general.


CLS 422/186.22
TXT With electrode or reaction space heating or cooling means:

    Subject matter under subclass 186.21 including means to heat or cool the
    arc chamber or a portion thereof or one or more of the electrodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186.25, for combinations of arc or spark discharge means with heating or
    cooling means for preparatory treatment of the material fed to the chamber,
    or of the product produced thereby.


CLS 422/186.23
TXT With preparatory or product-treating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 186.21 including in addition to be arc or
    spark discharge means, a preparatory treatment means for the materials
    added to the arc or spark discharge chamber or means for treatment of the
    products from such chamber.


CLS 422/186.24
TXT With nitrogen fixation means:

    Subject matter under subclass 186.23 including means for separating
    nitrogen as nitrogen compounds from the other components of air.


CLS 422/186.25
TXT With cooling or pressurizing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 186.23 including means for cooling or
    increasing the atmospheric pressure in the arc or spark chamber.


CLS 422/186.26
TXT With electrode moving means:

    Subject matter under subclass 186.21 including means to move one or more of
    the electrodes.


CLS 422/186.27
TXT With current control means:

    Subject matter under subclass 186.26 including means to control the
    electrical current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for miscellaneous systems for controlling the current and/or
    voltage in a single circuit.


CLS 422/186.28
TXT With current control means:

    Subject matter under subclass 186.21 including means to control the
    electrical current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for miscellaneous systems for controlling the current and/or
    voltage in a single circuit.


CLS 422/186.29
TXT With RF input means:

    Subject matter under subclass 186.04 wherein the chemical reaction occurs
    under the influence of a radiant (e.g., microwave) electromagnetic field or
    "high frequency" AC current having a frequency greater that 60 KH.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 600+ for inductive heating, subclasses
    678+ for microwave heating, and subclasses 764+ for capacitive dielectric
    heating.


CLS 422/186.30
TXT With ultraviolet radiation generating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 186 utilizing wave energy in the ultraviolet
    range.

    (1)     Note.  The ultraviolet portion of the spectrum is considered to
    include 4,000-40,000 Ao or 1015-1017 HZ.


CLS 422/187
TXT Combined:

    Apparatus under subclass 129 combined with the subject matter of other
    class(es) not specifically provided for in this class.


CLS 422/188
TXT Including plural reaction stages:

    Apparatus under subclass 129 comprising multiple reaction means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141+,   for plural fluidized reaction beds.

    156+,   for plural pigment or carbon making apparatus.

    169+,   for waste gas purifier having plural stages.


CLS 422/189
TXT And means providing discrete sequential reaction stages, e.g., train, etc.:

    Apparatus under subclass 188 having means for subjecting the reaction
    stream to multiple separate successive reaction stages.


CLS 422/190
TXT Plural solid, extended surface, fluid contact reaction stages each
    containing; e.g., inert Raschig rings, particulate sorbent, particulate or
    monolithic catalyst, etc.:

    Apparatus under subclass 189 including solid extended surface fluid contact
    reaction means, i.e., means providing a relatively large solid contact
    surface area within the reaction zone wherein large surface area within the
    reaction zone wherein large surface area presents multiple reaction sites
    for contact by the reaction mixture and, thereby, enhance the rate and/or
    the completeness of the reaction, including; e.g., inert Raschig rings,
    particulate absorbent, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177+,   for this apparatus used in a waste gas purifier.

    211,    for this structure, per se.


CLS 422/191
TXT Superimposed reaction stages in single reaction chamber:

    Apparatus under subclass 190 wherein the reaction stages are located one
    over the other and within a single reaction chamber.


CLS 422/192
TXT At least one reaction stage formed of fixed, annularly shaped bed of
    contact material and means directing reaction stream therethrough
    substantially perpendicular to longitudinal axis of bed:

    Apparatus under subclass 190 wherein at least one of the extended surface
    contact means is in the form of a relatively fixed, annularly shaped bed of
    contact material and including means for directing the flow of reactants
    through the contact bed in a direction substantially perpendicular to the
    longitudinal axis of the contact bed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181,    for this structure in a waste gas purifier.


CLS 422/193
TXT Reaction stages located within single reaction chamber:

    Apparatus under subclass 189 wherein the reaction stages are located in a
    single confining means.


CLS 422/194
TXT And means downstream of a stage for internally injecting a reactant into a
    reaction stream for interreaction in a subsequent stage, or injecting an
    internal quench stream into reaction stream passing between stages:

    Apparatus under subclass 193 having means after a reaction stage for
    injecting either (a) a reactant into the reaction stream within the
    reaction chamber for reaction therewith in a subsequent reaction stage or
    (b) a quench stream into the reaction stream within the reaction chamber as
    the reaction passes between stages.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172,    for waste gas purifier having plural chemical stages and means
    downstream of a stage for injecting a reactant into the gas for interaction
    in a subsequent stage.


CLS 422/195
TXT Means within reaction chamber redistributing reaction stream as it passes
    between adjacent stages:

    Apparatus under subclass 193 having means within reaction chamber for
    redistributing the reaction stream; i.e., for equalizing or otherwise
    modifying the velocity profile of the reaction stream, as it passes between
    adjacent reaction stages.


CLS 422/196
TXT Including plural parallel reaction stages with each stage in form of a
    reaction tube:

    Apparatus under subclass 188 wherein the reaction stages are formed by
    parallel (i.e., nonsequential) reaction tubes; i.e., reaction zones with
    relatively high length-to-diameter ratios.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222,    for parallel passages through a monolithic mass; e.g., honeycomb
    catalyst, etc.


CLS 422/197
TXT Tubular stages in single reaction chamber:

    Apparatus under subclass 196 wherein the tubes are located within a single
    reaction confining area; e.g., a tube and shell reactor with the reactant
    flowing through the tubes.


CLS 422/198
TXT Including heat exchanger for reaction chamber or reactants located therein:

    Apparatus under subclass 129 having means for heating or cooling the
    reaction chamber or the reaction mass located within the chamber.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this and indented subclasses are heat-exchange
    means which generate a direct contact heat-exchange medium in situ (e.g., a
    fuel gas burner wherein the flame is produced within the reaction chamber,
    a catalyst bed used to generate heat via the maintenance of an autothermic
    reaction, etc.).


CLS 422/199
TXT Electrical type:

    Apparatus under subclass 198 having an electrical heating means.


CLS 422/200
TXT Indirect heat-exchange tube within reaction chamber with a nonreactant
    heat-exchange fluid passing therethrough:

    Apparatus under subclass 198 comprising an indirect heat-exchange means
    located within the reaction chamber and being in the form of a tube having
    nonreactant heat-exchange fluid pass therethrough, (e.g., a steam coil in
    the reaction chamber mass, etc.).


CLS 422/201
TXT Tube and shell type:

    Apparatus under subclass 200 in the form of a shell having inlet and outlet
    manifolds with plural tubes connected therebetween.


CLS 422/202
TXT Heat-exchange jacket surrounding reaction chamber:

    Apparatus under subclass 198 wherein the heat exchanger is in the form of a
    heat-exchange jacket surrounding at least a portion of the exterior of the
    reaction chamber.


CLS 422/203
TXT Including fluid-transfer means connecting chamber to heat-exchange jacket:

    Apparatus under subclass 202 having fluid-transfer means connecting the
    reaction chamber and the heat-exchange jacket whereby reactants or products
    from the reaction chamber are used as a heat-transfer medium.


CLS 422/204
TXT Means associated with jacket providing combustion gas as heat-exchange
    medium:

    Apparatus under subclass 202 comprising means associated with the jacket
    using a combustion gas as the heat-exchange medium within the jacket.


CLS 422/205
TXT Including baffle or stirring means disposed within jacket or chamber, the
    baffle means within chamber connected directly to wall thereof:

    Apparatus under subclass 202 comprising baffle or stirring means located
    within the heat-exchange jacket or the reaction chamber wherein the baffle
    means located within the chamber are attached directly to the wall of the
    chamber.


CLS 422/206
TXT Regenerative heat sink:

    Apparatus under subclass 198 wherein the heat-exchanger includes a
    regenerative heat-sink means; e.g., a low heat capacity mass which adsorbs
    heat from hot reaction products and gives up heat to colder reactants to
    preheat them, etc.


CLS 422/207
TXT Means injecting internal quench stream into reaction stream downstream of
    reaction stage:

    Apparatus under subclass 198 wherein the heat exchanger includes means
    located within the reaction chamber for injecting a quench stream into the
    reaction stream at a location downstream of the reaction stage.


CLS 422/208
TXT Apparatus operates at positive pressure:

    Apparatus under subclass 198 wherein the apparatus operates a pressure
    above that of the ambient environment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242,    for positive pressure reactor, per se.

    295,    for physical type positive pressure   reactor.


CLS 422/209
TXT Including means rotating reaction chamber during use:

    Apparatus under subclass 129 having means for revolving the reaction
    chamber during use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270,    for a rotating container in a liquid-solid contact apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 219+ for agitating by use of a rotating
    receptacle.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 103+ for a tumbler rotary-drum furnace.


CLS 422/210
TXT And means wiping or scraping interior surface of reaction chamber:

    Apparatus under subclass 209 having means contacting the inner surface of
    the reactor for removing material from the surface as a result of the
    contact.


CLS 422/211
TXT Including solid, extended surface, fluid contact reaction means; e.g.,
    inert Raschig rings, particulate absorbent, particulate or monolithic
    catalyst, etc.:

    Apparatus under subclass 129 including solid extended surface fluid contact
    reaction means, i.e., means providing a relatively large solid contact
    surface area within the reaction zone wherein large surface area presents
    multiple reaction sites for contact by the reaction mixture and, thereby,
    enhance the rate and/or the completeness of the reaction, including; e.g.,
    inert Raschig rings, particulate absorbent, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    for subject of this subclass for use in a life-sustaining gas
    treating apparatus.

    171,    for plural and 177 for single structures of this type used in a
    waste gas purifier.

    190+,   for plural structures of this type.


CLS 422/212
TXT With means removing and recovering product from extended surface contact
    material:

    Apparatus under subclass 211 having means for removing and reclaiming
    product material from the extended surface contact material.


CLS 422/213
TXT Particulate contact material type and means providing flow of particulate
    material into or out of reaction chamber with reactants or products:

    Apparatus under subclass 211 wherein the solid extended surface contact
    means is particulate material and the apparatus has means for flowing the
    material into or out of the reaction chamber along with reactants or
    products, respectively.


CLS 422/214
TXT Transfer line type reaction chamber:

    Apparatus under subclass 213 wherein the reaction chamber is in the form of
    a transfer line reactor; i.e., a relative narrow reaction chamber having a
    relatively high length-to-diameter ratio and means to flow the particulate
    contact material out of the reaction chamber with the reaction product
    stream.


CLS 422/215
TXT And internal mixing means:

    Apparatus under subclass 213 having means within the reaction chamber for
    maintaining the mixture of the material and reaction medium in a mixed or
    agitated state.


CLS 422/216
TXT Compact bed of particulate, fluid contact material and means providing
    gravity flow of material within bed:

    Apparatus under subclass 211 wherein the extended surface, fluid contact
    material is in the form of a compact bed of particulate material and having
    means providing flow of the material by gravity inside the bed.


CLS 422/217
TXT And means upstream of extended surface, fluid contact means removing
    particulate impurities from reactant stream:

    Apparatus under subclass 211 having means located before the contact means
    for taking particulate impurities from the reactant feed stream.


CLS 422/218
TXT Fixed annularly shaped bed of contact material and means directing reactant
    therethrough substantially perpendicular to longitudinal axis of bed:

    Apparatus under subclass 211 having a fixed annularly shaped bed of contact
    material and means directing the flow of the reaction stream through the
    bed substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the contact bed.


CLS 422/219
TXT And means loading contact material into, or unloading contact material
    from, reactor or means providing internal contact material reservoir:

    Apparatus under subclass 211 having means for either (a) loading the solid
    fluid contact material into the reaction chamber, (b) unloading the same
    from the reaction chamber, or (c) providing a contact material reservoir
    within the reaction chamber.


CLS 422/220
TXT And reactant flow distributor upstream of contact means and within reaction
    chamber modifying velocity profile of reactant flow:

    Apparatus under subclass 211 having reactant flow distributing means
    located within the reaction chamber and before the contact means for
    equalizing or otherwise modifying the velocity profile of the reactant
    stream at upstream contact face of the contact means.


CLS 422/221
TXT Fixed contact bed type with resilient or differential thermal expansion
    compensating bed support means:

    Apparatus under subclass 211 wherein the solid extended surface, fluid
    contact means is in the form of a relatively fixed bed of contact material
    and including means for supporting the contact bed within the reaction
    chamber, said support means either itself being resilient or being
    resiliently mounted to provide for the absorption of mechanical shock or to
    maintain the contact material within the bed or being specifically designed
    to compensate for differences in thermal expansion of components in the
    reaction chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179,    for this structure in a waste gas purifier.


CLS 422/222
TXT Unitary (i.e., nonparticulate) contact bed (e.g., monolithic catalyst bed,
    etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 211 wherein the extended surface contact means is
    in the form of a unitary (i.e., nonparticulate) contact bed (e.g., a
    monolithic honeycomb coated with a catalyst, catalyst coated metallic
    screen, etc.)

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180,    for this structure in a waste gas purifier.


CLS 422/223
TXT With contact material regenerating means, per se, or combined with reactor:

    Apparatus under subclass 211 having means for renewing the contact
    material, the means being recited either, per se, or in combination with a
    chemical reactor utilizing the contact material.


CLS 422/224
TXT Including internal mixing or stirring means:

    Apparatus under subclass 129 having means located within the reaction
    chamber for mixing or stirring the reaction mass therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131,    for agitating means in an organic polymerization reactor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    366,    Agitating, appropriate subclasses for agitators consisting of a
    receptacle and stirrer.


CLS 422/225
TXT Mechanical type stirring means:

    Apparatus under subclass 224 wherein the mixing and stirring means includes
    a mechanical-type stirrer.


CLS 422/226
TXT In positive pressure reactor:

    Apparatus under subclass 225 wherein pressure is maintained greater than
    the ambient pressure.


CLS 422/227
TXT Including a draft tube for internal recirculation:

    Apparatus under subclass 225 including a draft tube (i.e., a longitudinally
    extending tubular means open at both ends thereof) located within the
    reaction chamber and providing, in combination with the stirring means,
    fluid recirculation within the reaction chamber via fluid movement through
    the tube.


CLS 422/228
TXT Including flow directing baffle attached directly to reaction chamber wall:

    Apparatus under subclass 225 wherein the stirring means includes a flow
    directing baffle directly attached to the reaction chamber wall.


CLS 422/229
TXT Longitudinally extending spiral stirring means:

    Apparatus under subclass 225 wherein the stirring means is in the shape of
    a spiral extending in a direction parallel to the major axis of the
    reaction chamber.


CLS 422/230
TXT Thermosyphon or differential density mixing means; e.g., means internally
    recycling reaction mass via differential density pumping, etc.:

    Apparatus under subclass 224 having thermosyphon or differential density
    type mixing means; e.g., means internally recycling the reaction mass via
    differential density pumping through a draft tube, etc.


CLS 422/231
TXT Gas sparger type mixing means submerged in liquid reactant:

    Apparatus under subclass 230 wherein a gas sparger type mixing means is
    submerged in a liquid reactant.


CLS 422/232
TXT Including solid reactant and means charging solids into, or discharging
    solids from, reaction chamber:

    Apparatus under subclass 129 wherein the reactants include a solid
    particulate material and means for charging the solids to, or discharging
    the same from, the reaction chamber.


CLS 422/233
TXT Having both charge and discharge means along with means conveying solids
    therebetween located within reaction chamber:

    Apparatus under subclass 232 having means for conveying the solids into,
    through, and out of the reaction chamber.


CLS 422/234
TXT Including external recycle loop:

    Apparatus under subclass 129 having means located outside of the reaction
    chamber for recycling at least a portion of the product stream or reaction
    mass to the reaction chamber.


CLS 422/235
TXT And means heating or cooling loop or reaction mass located therein:

    Apparatus under subclass 234 having means for changing the temperature of
    the reaction mass within the external recycle loop.


CLS 422/236
TXT Including means separating reaction chamber into plural reactant-containing
    compartments and means moving reactant therebetween:

    Apparatus under subclass 129 having means dividing the reaction chamber
    into plural distinct reactant-containing compartments and means for
    transporting the reactants, or permitting such transportation of the
    reactants, between the compartments.


CLS 422/237
TXT Movably mounted container-type separating means and means moving same:

    Apparatus under subclass 236 wherein the separating means includes a
    movably mounted container having means for moving the same.


CLS 422/238
TXT Solid reactant containing perforated or porous container-type separating
    means:

    Apparatus under subclass 236 wherein one reactant is a solid material and
    the separating means includes a perforated or porous container for
    containing the reactant.


CLS 422/239
TXT Reaction chamber includes at least one perforated, porous, or semipermeable
    wall and is adapted for holding solid reactant:

    Apparatus under subclass 129 wherein the reaction chamber comprises at
    least one perforated or porous wall and is designed for holding a solid
    reactant.


CLS 422/240
TXT Including specific material of construction:

    Apparatus under subclass 129 wherein specific materials of construction for
    the reactor or components thereof are recited.


CLS 422/241
TXT Reactor liner:

    Apparatus under subclass 240 having a liner of a specified material of
    construction for the reactor chamber.


CLS 422/242
TXT Positive pressure type:

    Apparatus under subclass 129 having means for operating the same above the
    ambient pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208,    for apparatus having heat exchanger operating at a positive
    pressure.

    226,    for positive pressure apparatus with mixing means.

    295,    for physical type positive pressure reactor.


CLS 422/243
TXT PHYSICAL TYPE APPARATUS:

    Apparatus under the class definition for carrying out a physical process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105+,   for apparatus having means for automatically modifying an operation
    of the system in response to a means sensing an operating condition or
    change of the same; e.g., automatic shutdown of the reactor responsive to
    excessive temperature, pressure, etc.


CLS 422/244
TXT Including serially disposed vaporizing heating means (sublimer) and solid
    material deposition means maintained at a temperature lower than said
    heating means (condenser):

    Apparatus under subclass 243 having serially arranged vaporizing heating
    means and solid material depositing means being maintained at a temperature
    lower than the heating means.


CLS 422/245.1
TXT Crystallizer:

    Non-coating apparatus under subclass 243 for producing non-metal, non-glass
    crystalline material, with no clear intent to provide a shaped article, and
    with no intent to grow single-crystal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for the apparatus which operates to
    crystallize by only a physical (i.e., not chemical) reaction.

    (2)     Note.  Apparatus which involve removing heat to solidify a material
    are generally provided for elsewhere, for example in Class 62.

    (3)     Note.  Apparatus for coating or molding are generally provided for
    elsewhere, for example in Classes 117, 118, 164, 249, or 425.

    (4)     Note.  Apparatus which involve evaporating which causes
    crystallizing or precipitating, and involves no significant chemical
    change, are generally provided for in Class 159.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105+,   for non-coating crystallizing apparatus which further includes a
    means for automatically modifying an operation thereof in response to a
    means sensing an operating condition or a change of the same.

    129+,   for non-coating crystallization apparatus which includes means for
    a chemical reaction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, for apparatus peculiar to removing heat from a
    substance and apparatus peculiar to handling the resultant product,
    especially subclasses 123+ for apparatus having means to separate a
    constituent of a liquid mixture by cooling it and subclasses 317+ for
    apparatus having a filter or gravitational separator for the fluid cooled
    by refrigeration means.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, for apparatus making glass, especially
    subclasses 187+ and 193+ for  means for pulling glass from a melt.

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, subclasses 200+ for processes and
    non-coating apparatus for growing therein-defined single-crystal of all
    types of materials, including inorganic or organic.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, for apparatus for applying or obtaining a
    surface coating on a base, where it is not provided for in another class.
    See the Class 118 definition for guidance in the placement of coating
    apparatus art.

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, subclasses 15+ and 17+ for
    apparatus for crystallizing or treating crystals of class-defined materials.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, for apparatus for evaporating, including
    those which cause crystallization, absent defined vapor recovery means
    (except energy recovery), and absent significant chemical changes.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 139+ for apparatus for molding
    non-semiconductor metal.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 14.5 for apparatus to separate
    wax which may include chilling to solidify.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, for apparatus for crystallizing
    where the primary intent is a Class 210 defined purpose.  Since references
    are placed according to disclosed intent, cross-referencing is required
    where secondary intent is disclosed or evident.

    249,    Static Molds, appropriate subclasses for a static mold of fluent
    material not combined with a diverse art device.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 6+ for apparatus for making non-metal, non-glass powders, which
    may be crystalline, from liquid by means dividing or comminuting and
    allowing the liquid to solidify while in particulate form of a desired size
    or shape but with no shaping surface; subclass 77 for ultra-high-pressure
    generating apparatus; and appropriate subclasses for dynamic molding
    apparatus for other than metal or glass.


CLS 422/250.1
TXT Crucible-free zone refiner:

    Apparatus under subclass 245.1 having a refining zone which is free of
    contact with a solid shaping surface such as a crucible (wall).


CLS 422/251
TXT Including means separating and conveying crystals to a melting zone:

    Apparatus under subclass 245.1 having means for separating and transporting
    crystals to the melting zone.


CLS 422/252
TXT Hydraulic classifier with crystallizer:

    Apparatus under subclass 245.1 having hydraulic means to maintain a
    suspension for classification of crystals within the apparatus.


CLS 422/253
TXT Including feed compartment for introducing nutrient:

    Apparatus under subclass 245.1 having a feed section within crystallizer
    vessel for introducing a solute (per se, or in solution) during
    crystallization.


CLS 422/254
TXT Movable crystallizer or scraping means:

    Apparatus under subclass 245.1 having a movable crystallizer or scraping
    means acting on the wall of the crystallizer.


CLS 422/255
TXT Means separating or dissolving a material constituent:

    Apparatus under subclass 243 having means to segregate or liquefy at least
    one component of the matter being treated.

    (1)     Note.  The apparatus classified here carries out a process which
    generally leaves an insoluble residue.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, has drying processes
    and apparatus which remove extraneous liquids from solids even though there
    is subsequent condensation or recovery of vapors and also drying processes
    and apparatus in which solids are contacted with liquids to promote drying.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, appropriate subclasses for processes using nonmetallic material
    which is liquid under standard conditions.

    100,    Presses, subclass 90 for devices for pressing combined with means
    for separating materials.

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, subclasses 3+ for apparatus for
    leaching or dissolving sacchariferous material in the manufacture of sugar,
    starch, or carbohydrates.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclass 43 is the generic
    place for apparatus for contacting a solid with a liquid.  See the
    definition and notes to that class.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclasses 168 to 170 for leaching or
    extracting apparatus combined with distillation apparatus.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass .5 for infusion receptacles
    or packages.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 155+ for
    fluid suspension in a liquid; and subclasses 423 to 465 for stratification
    involving liquid treatment which may include treatment of the solids with a
    liquid.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 177+ and 198.1+ for
    apparatus for liquid purification or separation which involves the addition
    of a treating liquid.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 310+ for
    dissolvers and mixers combined with a fluid discharging element.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 625+ for radioactive compositions and
    methods of making them involving a mere blending of materials.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclass 101 for apparatus for
    metallurgical leaching and precipitating; subclasses 161+ and 168+ for
    extracting metal apparatus.

    366,    Agitating, for processes and apparatus for mere agitation of a
    solid in a liquid.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 40+ and 44+ for
    a coating implement having diverse materials which are mixed therein prior
    to application to a work surface.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 77+ for food infusion type containers, per se, or containing
    edible material.


CLS 422/256
TXT Liquid-liquid contact means:

    Apparatus under subclass 255 comprising liquid-liquid contact means for
    removing a constituent from a liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, appropriate subclasses, especially
    subclass 14.52 for apparatus limited to the extraction of mineral oils.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 198.1+ for apparatus
    for purifying liquid with means to add a treating material.


CLS 422/257
TXT Including pulsator, adjustable plates, or plural inlets; e.g., spraying,
    etc.:

    Apparatus under subclass 256 having pulsating means or adjustable plates or
    plural orifice inlets for the same liquid.


CLS 422/258
TXT Including rotating chamber or rotating member within chamber; e.g.,
    mixer-settler, etc.:

    Apparatus under subclass 256 having a rotatable containing means or a
    rotating means within the containing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    494,    Imperforate Bowl:  Centrifugal Separators, subclass 22, for a
    separator of that class and the introduction thereto of differing weight
    fluids for counter current flow therein.


CLS 422/259
TXT Having rotating member within chamber:

    Apparatus under subclass 258 wherein the rotating means is located within
    the containing means.


CLS 422/260
TXT Including heating and cooling means:

    Apparatus under subclass 256 having means for both elevating and lowering
    the temperature of the material being treated.


CLS 422/261
TXT Liquid-solid contact means:

    Apparatus under subclass 255 having means for liquid-contacting a solid or
    vice versa.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 43+ for the
    generic place for apparatus for contacting a solid with a liquid.  See the
    definition and notes to that class.


CLS 422/262
TXT Sulfur extraction:

    Apparatus under subclass 261 for the liquid extraction of sulfur from a
    solid material.


CLS 422/263
TXT Including monolithic nonporous body of solute:

    Apparatus under subclass 261 having the solid material in the form of a
    substantially nonporous body of solute, thereby restricting the
    liquid-solid contact to the outer surface of the body.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not preclude the existence of a flow
    conducting bore through the solute body to increase the "outer" surface
    contact area.


CLS 422/264
TXT Including means restricting solvent contact to one end of body of solute:

    Apparatus under subclass 261 having means restricting the liquid or solvent
    contact with a body of solute to substantially one end thereof.


CLS 422/265
TXT Buoyant holder:

    Apparatus under subclass 261 having solute-containing holder constructed to
    float on a liquid.


CLS 422/266
TXT Manual or mountable holder; e.g., soap holder, etc.:

    Apparatus under subclass 261 having a material holder that includes a
    handle or similar structure, or it is readily connectable to a structure.


CLS 422/267
TXT Including means to remove solids from a filter:

    Apparatus under subclass 261 having means for removing solids from a filter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification, or Separation, subclass 396 for scraper for
    cleaning a filter.


CLS 422/268
TXT Conveyor support for solid material during contact; e.g., bucket, etc.:

    Apparatus under subclass 261 having a support means for conveying the
    material.


CLS 422/269
TXT Including rotating member:

    Apparatus under subclass 261 having rotatable means.


CLS 422/270
TXT Member is container:

    Apparatus under subclass 269 wherein the rotating means is a receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 219+ for agitating by a rotating receptacle.


CLS 422/271
TXT Including internal rotating member:

    Apparatus under subclass 270 having a rotating means within the container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 244+ for agitating means comprising a
    receptacle and an internal rotating stirrer.


CLS 422/272
TXT Partitions divide container:

    Apparatus under subclass 270 where means are provided to separate the
    container into sections.


CLS 422/273
TXT Member conveys material into and out of container; e.g., screw propeller,
    etc.:

    Apparatus under subclass 269 wherein the member transports the solid
    material through the container.


CLS 422/274
TXT Including perforated member which is nonlinear or inclined with respect to
    the major axis of container:

    Apparatus under subclass 261 having a perforated member located at an angle
    other than parallel with the major axis of the container.


CLS 422/275
TXT Including parallel perforated members perpendicular to, or parallel to,
    major axis of container:

    Apparatus under subclass 261 having multiple parallel apertured members
    located perpendicular to, or parallel to, the major axis of the container.


CLS 422/276
TXT Side wall of holder perforated:

    Apparatus under subclass 261 wherein the side walls of a receptacle are
    apertured.


CLS 422/277
TXT Perforations of holder form inlet for solvent:

    Apparatus under subclass 276 where the apertures of the holder form inlet
    sites of the solvent.


CLS 422/278
TXT Including plural orifice inlet, or deflector adjacent inlet for solvent
    flow:

    Apparatus under subclass 261 having a solvent inlet either with plural
    orifices or with a deflector adjacent to the inlet for directing solvent
    flow.


CLS 422/279
TXT Having inlet submerged within body of a solid solute:

    Apparatus under subclass 278 wherein the inlet is submerged within the body
    of the solid solute.


CLS 422/280
TXT Solvent vapor condenser:

    Apparatus under subclass 261 having means to condense the solvent vapor.


CLS 422/281
TXT Means recirculating solvent:

    Apparatus under subclass 261 having means for conveying the solvent from
    and returning at least a part of it to the contact means.


CLS 422/282
TXT Including bypass:

    Apparatus under subclass 261 having a separate and distinct path through
    which a portion or all of the liquid solvent is passed out of contact with
    the solid being dissolved.


CLS 422/283
TXT Including dip tube for inlet or outlet of fluid solvent:

    Apparatus under subclass 261 having a tube inserted in a container at a
    point above the normal level of the liquid contained therein and
    terminating at a point below the normal liquid level.


CLS 422/284
TXT Internal heater; e.g., steam coil, etc.:

    Apparatus under subclass 261 having heating means located within the same.


CLS 422/285
TXT And heating means:

    Apparatus under subclass 255 having means to elevate the temperature of the
    apparatus or its contents.


CLS 422/286
TXT Including mechanical comminuting or conveying means:

    Apparatus under subclass 285 having mechanical means to subdivide or
    transport the material.


CLS 422/287
TXT Within treating vessel:

    Apparatus under subclass 286 wherein the mechanical means are located
    inside of the treating container.


CLS 422/288
TXT Including means removing vapor from treated material:

    Apparatus under subclass 285 having means for taking out gaseous matter
    from the material being treated.


CLS 422/289
TXT And direct contact heating fluid means within separating or dissolving
    chamber vessel:

    Apparatus under subclass 288 having means for directly contacting a heating
    fluid with the material being treated, the means being located within the
    chamber in which separation or dissolution occurs.


CLS 422/290
TXT And indirect contact heating fluid means in separating or dissolving
    chamber:

    Apparatus under subclass 288 having means for indirectly contacting a
    heating fluid with the material being treated and being located within the
    chamber wherein separation or dissolution occurs.


CLS 422/291
TXT Combined:

    Apparatus under subclass 243 combined with subject matter of other
    class(es) not specifically provided for in this class.


CLS 422/292
TXT Apparatus for treating solid article or material with fluid chemical:

    Apparatus under subclass 243 for treating a solid article or material with
    a "chemical" in a liquid, gaseous, or vapor state wherein the article or
    material is recovered essentially unchanged from the treatment.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this and indented subclasses, a "chemical"
    is defined as a substance which has a function beyond that of another
    class, per se, e.g., drying, heating, cleaning, etc.  A recitation that a
    substance disinfects, sterilizes, deodorizes, or preserves will cause the
    substance to be considered a "chemical" unless accompanied by positive
    disclosure that the disinfecting, sterilizing, deodorizing, or preserving
    is done only by a function provided for elsewhere; e.g., heating, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Steam is considered a "chemical" also when it disinfects,
    sterilizes, deodorizes, or preserves, since steam so used appears to have a
    function more than mere heating.  This and indented subclasses contain many
    patents to steam sterilizers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39+,    for similar processes.


CLS 422/293
TXT Fluid having simultaneous diverse function:

    Apparatus under subclass 292 wherein the treating fluid performs a
    simultaneous function other than disinfecting, sterilizing, deodorizing, or
    preserving; e.g., steam sterilizes and condenses to form distilled water,
    etc.


CLS 422/294
TXT Including flexible or collapsible treating chamber:

    Apparatus under subclass 292 having a treating chamber made of thin,
    flexible material; e.g., plastic film.


CLS 422/295
TXT Including pressure treating chamber (above ambient):

    Apparatus under subclass 292 having a compartment for treating the article
    or material with the compartment pressure being above normal pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28+,    for process of disinfecting or sterilizing using steam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 323.4+ for cereal
    puffing apparatus; subclasses 359+ for canned food processors; and
    subclasses 403+ for food boilers and fryers.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 19, 273, and 369+ for ovens or
    steaming apparatus.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 233+ for fiber
    digesters (for making paper pulp).


CLS 422/296
TXT Fluid pressure maintains closure or seal:

    Apparatus under subclass 295 wherein fluid pressure is used to close or
    seal the apparatus against the positive pressure therein.


CLS 422/297
TXT And rack, support or handling means:

    Apparatus under subclass 295 having a work holder functioning to hold
    article or material in a desired relation within the compartment or to
    place the same within, or remove the same from, the compartment.


CLS 422/298
TXT And vaporizer; e.g., boiler, etc.:

    Apparatus under subclass 295 having means to render the fluid gaseous.


CLS 422/299
TXT Constituting treating chamber:

    Apparatus under subclass 298 wherein the vaporizing means is the treating
    compartment.


CLS 422/300
TXT Including rack, support or handling means:

    Apparatus under subclass 292 having a work holder functioning to hold an
    article or material in a desired relation within the apparatus or place the
    same within or remove the same from the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    297,    for the same subject matter enclosed within a pressure chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, for rack type supports.

    248,    Supports, for supports of a general nature.


CLS 422/301
TXT Apparatus closure operates means immersing article or material in liquid
    chemical:

    Apparatus under subclass 300 including a means closing the apparatus and
    having means operatively connected therewith for immersing the article or
    the material in the liquid chemical.


CLS 422/302
TXT For treating containers or covers therefor:

    Apparatus under subclass 300 designed to support or handle containers or
    covers for containers.


CLS 422/303
TXT Container is inverted:

    Apparatus under subclass 302 wherein the container is supported or handled
    in an upside-down position.


CLS 422/304
TXT Including endless conveyer:

    Apparatus under subclass 302 wherein the support or handling means is a
    transporter of the endless type.


CLS 422/305
TXT Including gas generating means:

    Apparatus under subclass 243 having means for creating a gas including
    generating formaldehyde from a polymer thereof (e.g., paraformaldehyde,
    etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120+,   for apparatus for generating life-sustaining gas.

    129+,   for apparatus for gerating gas using chemical reaction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, for apparatus and processes of
    generating heating or illuminating gas.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 276 for generating gas in
    a beverage by fermentation.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives; e.g., subclasses 334, 363, 364+, 367+,
    and 530+ for gas-generating ammunition and explosives.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, for steam generator, per se.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, for apparatus involving
    carbonation when special arrangements for gas and liquid contact are
    claimed.

    435,    Chemistry: Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 283.1+
    for apparatus that includes means for generating gases by fermentation,
    particularly subclass 300.1 with means for trapping off-gases.


CLS 422/306
TXT Including means for adding a material to a gas:

    Apparatus under subclass 243 having means for adding material to the gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for process of adding material to a gas to treat the same.

    28,     for process involving the addition of a disinfecting or sterilizing
    agent to steam.

    123,    for apparatus for adding a material to a life-sustaining gas.


CLS 422/307
TXT Heat treating vessel with heating means:

    Apparatus under subclass 243 comprising container means for treating
    material at an elevated temperature and means operatively associated with
    the container for furnishing the elevated temperature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 359+ for canned food
    processors; and subclasses 403+ for food boilers and fryers.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 343.5 for a melting furnace; and
    subclasses 373+ for a heated water vessel.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 253+ for fiber
    digesters (for making paper pulp) combined with a heater.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for a container with
    heat-exchange means.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 385 for electric heater combined with a
    container for material to be heated.


CLS 422/308
TXT Including multiple stages:

    Apparatus under subclass 307 wherein multiple heat-treating means are
    formed by a single vessel being divided or plural vessels interconnected.


CLS 422/309
TXT Including comminuting, kneading, or surface-wiping means interior of vessel:

    Apparatus under subclass 307 having means within the vessel providing
    contact and relative movement between two or more apparatus elements for
    comminuting or kneading the material or wiping the surface of the vessel
    wall.


CLS 422/310
TXT ELEMENTS OR ADJUNCTS:

    Apparatus under the class definition providing for subcombinations not set
    out above.


CLS 422/311
TXT Bed support means (e.g., support grid or plate for supporting particulate
    bed or contact material, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 310 comprising a support means for material.


CLS 422/312
TXT Tube element containing extended surface contact reaction means (e.g., a
    tube internally coated or packed with a catalyst, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 310 comprising a tube element containing solid
    extended surface contact means.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTION
    RELATING TO SUBCLASSES 1 THROUGH 43


CLS 422/900
TXT DECREASING POLLUTION OR ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT:

    A cross-reference art collection under subclasses 1 through 43 comprising
    process of diminishing unclean conditions or detrimental conditions
    affecting the environment.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 422/901
TXT POLYMER DISSOLVER:

    A cross-reference art collection of apparatus specifically designed for the
    dissolution of a polymer.


CLS 422/902
TXT SODIUM CHLORIDE AND POTASSIUM CHLORIDE DISSOLVER:

    A cross-reference art collection of apparatus specifically designed for the
    dissolution of NaC1 or KC1.


CLS 422/903
TXT RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL APPARATUS:

    Apparatus for making or containing radioactive material.


CLS 422/904
TXT NITROGEN FIXATION MEANS:

    Art collection relevant to subclasses 186+ comprising documents disclosing
    the separation of nitrogen as nitrogen compounds from the other components
    of air.


CLS 422/905
TXT MISCELLANEOUS LIQUID STERILIZATION MEANS:

    Art collection relevant to subclasses 186+ comprising documents disclosing
    means for sterilization of miscellaneous liquids employing electromagnetic
    wave energy or corpuscular radiation.


CLS 422/906
TXT PLASMA OR ION GENERATION MEANS:

    Art collection relevant to subclasses 186+ comprising documents disclosing
    means for generating ions or plasma.


CLS 422/907
TXT CORONA OR GLOW DISCHARGE MEANS:

    Art collection relevant to subclasses 186+ comprising documents disclosing
    apparatus comprising means to produce a corona discharge or a glow
    discharge.


CLS 423/
TTL CHEMISTRY OF INORGANIC COMPOUNDS

CLS 423/
TXT

    I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    A.      Summary Statement of Class Subject Matter.

    This is the generic class for:

    1.      INORGANIC COMPOUNDS

    2.      NONMETALLIC ELEMENTS

    3.      PROCESSES . . . (a) Processes of producing or separating by a
    chemical reaction a product a product of 1. or 2. supra, (b) chemical
    reaction processes not elsewhere provided for, (c) processes of separating
    or purifying a gaseous mixture including a chemical reaction and (d)
    processes which are directed to extracting, leaching or dissolving a
    product or 1. or 2. supra from a mixture either, per se, or in combination
    with steps not otherwise provided for and for dissolving of such a product
    to make a water solution thereof.

    B.      Amplified Statement of Class Subject Matter.

    This class provides for what is generally termed the field of inorganic
    chemistry.  It includes inorganic compounds, nonmetallic elements and
    processes of producing the same involving a chemical reaction.  The
    products are generally in a relatively pure state but may be a mixture with
    no other utility than as a source material for an inorganic compound or
    element. This includes metal compound products useful in metallurgical
    processes of obtaining free metals, (note subclasses 1+).

    A mixture of an inorganic compound or nonmetallic element with a preserving
    agent whose sole function is to prevent physical or chemical change of such
    compound or element is provided for in this class, unless the mixture is
    disclosed or claimed as having a function or utility provided for in the
    composition classification, (note subclasses 265+).  Also, processes of
    merely incorporating a preservative are included in this class.

    This class also provides for processes of separating or purifying a
    normally gaseous mixture by a chemical reaction, unless the resulting
    mixture has a disclosed utility provided for in the composition
    classification.

    This class is also the residual class for all chemical reactions not
    provided for elsewhere, e.g., a reactive process where no specific product
    compound is disclosed.

    For this class, the nonmetallic elements are:  the halogens including
    astatine, the inert gases, hydrogen, boron, carbon, silicon, nitrogen,
    phosphorus, oxygen, sulfur, selenium and tellurium.

    This class is also the class for extracting, leaching or dissolving
    processes not provided for elsewhere (note subclass 658.5 in this class
    (423).

    (1)     Note.  An inorganic compound for this class must contain a
    nonmetallic element; intermetallic compounds, or union of metallic elements
    only are excluded and will be found in Class 420.

    (2)     Note.  Subclasses which recite nitrogen or hydrogen in their titles
    do not include the ammonium radical (NH4+) within their definitions; the
    NH4+ radical is considered to be, and is treated as, an entity or element,
    equivalent to Na, Ca, N, etc.

    (3)     Note.  When a radical is indicated in a subclass title, (e.g.,
    sulfide, carbonate, phosphate, etc.), all forms thereof (i.e., the acid
    forms, such as HSO3- , HCO3-, HPO42-, H2PO4-) are also included within the
    definition, unless specifically stated otherwise.  Generally, however, in
    the metal recovery area, subclasses 1+, only the radicals listed in the
    titles are involved and no other.  For example, in subclass 36, "sulfating"
    means that only the sulfate (SO42-) radical is intended.  In the remaining
    areas of the schedule all forms of the radical are generally intended.

    (4)     Note.  Use of a chemically reactive material, e.g., acid or base is
    considered to involve a chemical treatment for this class, unless there is
    evidence to the contrary or where otherwise stated, (see subclass 210,
    reference to Class 95, for example).

    (6)     Note.  Processes of purification which involve oxidation or
    chemical conversions of impurities, as well as those processes wherein the
    compound sought to be purified is first converted into some other form or
    derivative from which it is reverted to the original compound are also
    considered to be chemical treatment.

    (7)     Note.  Processes of preparation of an inorganic compound or a
    nonmetallic element which include chemical treatment or preparation are
    classified in the appropriate compound or element subclass, unless a
    process subclass is specifically provided therefor under the compound or
    element subclass, even though combined with a purely physical operation
    precedent, subsequent, or both.  However, a patent containing a claim to
    the product and a claim to the process of manufacture thereof, which
    process is indented under the product subclass, should be placed in the
    outwent (product subclass) and cross-referenced to the other.  A claim to
    the product of making it is considered to be a product claim and should be
    classified in the appropriate product subclass and cross referenced to the
    process, if any.

    (8)     Note.  Processes of preparation or treatment of inorganic compounds
    and nonmetallic elements which involve only physical treatment except for
    extracting, leaching or dissolving, per se, are classified in 23,
    Chemistry:  Physical Processes, subclasses 293+ unless specifically
    provided for in some other main class. When extracting, leaching or
    dissolving processes are combined with significant crystallization steps,
    see Class 23, Chemistry:  Physical Processes, subclasses 295+.  Also see
    Class 23, Chemistry:  Physical Processes, subclasses 293, 294 and 306 thru
    308 for extracting, leaching or dissolving which may be combined with
    physical steps therein provided for.  When patents include claims to a
    physical process and also claims to the compound or element treated, the
    original patent is classified in Class 423 in the appropriate subclass
    providing for the compound or element and cross-referenced to the
    appropriate process subclass in Class 23.

    (9)     Note.  Varying the amount of water of crystallization or hydration
    is considered to involve a chemical reaction; merely changing from one
    crystalline form to another or from or to a non crystalline form is not
    considered to be a chemical reaction.

    (10)    Note.  The combination of a nominal molding step and a chemical
    reaction is properly classified in Class 423.  See definition of Class 264
    for examples of "nominal" molding steps.

    (11)    Note.  The combinations of a chemical reaction and magnetic
    separation is in Class 423.

    (12)    Note.  A compound having water of hydration or crystallization
    attached thereto is classified with the basic compound unless there is a
    specific subclass provided for the hydrated compound.  In this respect, the
    water (H2O) is treated as a unit and the hydrogen and oxygen therein of
    themselves do not cause classification in the oxygen area (579+) or the
    hydrogen area (644+).

    (13)    Note.  A material or substance containing a metal or other element
    in a range of absolute values or mole ratios compared to another metal or
    other element, (e.g., 1.7-3.5 parts, mole ratio of M to X in the range of
    1.1-3.7, etc.), will be considered proper for a composition class; if the
    metal or other element is present in specifically defined whole integer
    values, (e.g., 1, 2 or 3 parts, etc.), it will be considered a compound
    properly classified in  Class 423. Similarly if atoms or molecules in a
    chemical formula are not present as whole small integer values or cannot be
    multiplied by a factor to yield integer values, then the substance
    represented by the formula will be considered to be a mixture or
    composition classifiable in a locus other than Class 423. However, see (1)
    Note in subclass 328 for exception to general rule stated above.

    (14)    Note.  A water solution (whether preserved or not) of a Class 423
    compound or element is classified in Class 423 unless its use is claimed or
    a single use is disclosed, in which case classification in the use class is
    indicated.

    (15)    Note.  When a patent includes (1) a single claim directed to the
    formation of 2 or more desired products, or (2) plural, equally
    comprehensive claims defining processes or products wherein the individual
    claims would be classified in separate classes, the following rules apply:

    1.      As between Class 423 and other classes providing for compounds the
    patent is placed in Class 423.

    2.      As between Class 423 and Class 75 the patent is placed in Class 75.

    3.      As between Class 423 and classes providing for compositions, the
    patent is placed in the composition class.

    (16)    Note.  Where a process includes a step of recovery of the energy in
    a fluid (e.g., expansion in a motor to produce mechanical or electrical
    power, use in a heat exchanger for utilization outside of the process,
    etc.) the intent of the patentee must be considered for proper
    classification. If the intent is to conduct the chemical reaction, make the
    product or purify a gas or separate a mixture as provided for in Class 423
    and recovery of the energy in the fluid is simply for economic reasons the
    classification is proper for Class 423.  If the intent of the chemical
    reaction, is to increase the energy level in the fluid for the purpose of
    producing the mechanical or electrical power, then classification in
    another main class is indicated.  If the power produced is used in the
    process, e.g., pumping, refrigeration, heat exchange, etc. classification
    in Class 423 in proper.

    II      GLOSSARY

    Terms used throughout the schedule and definitions are to have the meanings
    ascribed below.

    In some instances all the limitations found below may not have been
    included in the subclass definitions; all discrepancies should be resolved
    in favor of the following definitions.

    Absorption - The ability of a substance to retain or concentrate gases,
    liquids or dissolved substance (absorbate) within its bodies.

    Adsorption - The ability of a substance (usually a solid) to retain or
    concentrate gases, liquids or dissolved substances (adsorbate) upon its
    surface.

    Alkali Metals - The metal elements of the first group of the periodic
    system, consisting of Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs.

    Alkaline Earth Metals - The metal elements in Group II A of the periodic
    system, consisting of Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba.

    Binary Compound - A chemical compound consisting of 2 elements only with 2
    or more atoms; e.g., NaC1, FeC13, Fe304, etc.

    Chalcogen - Also known as chalcogenide(s), the elements oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, tellurium and polonium.

    Catalyst - A substance which either increases or decreases the speed of a
    chemical reaction without itself undergoing a permanent change.

    Complex Compound - A chemical combination of two or more compounds or ions;
    e.g., 4 KCN and Fe (Cn)2 give the complex compound K4Fe (Cn)6; 2 HF and Si
    F4give the complex acid H2 Si F6.  An electrically charged radical or group
    of atoms, e.g., Cu (NH3) 2+, is a complex ion.

    Compound - The elements or compounds comprising a material or produced from
    it by analysis.

    Compound - A substance whose molecules consist of unlike atoms, whose
    constituents cannot be separated by physical means, whose properties are
    entirely different from those of its constituent elements and which
    contains definite proportions of its constituent elements, depending on
    their atomic weights.

    Flotation - A process for the concentration of selective separation of
    components of ores by grinding the ores with a frothing agent, floating
    them on water and agitating the mixture with compressed air, causing the
    wet gangue (earthy portion of the ore) to settle and permitting the
    concentrated ore to be skimmed off.

    Fluidized Bed - A mass of solid particles maintained in a state of constant
    turbulent motion in a gas stream, resulting in a suspension of finely
    divided particles in a stream of gas thus increasing the surface area and
    therefor surface activity of the particles.

    Halogens - Also known as halogenides, the nonmetallic elements of the
    seventh group of the periodic system and consisting of F, C1, Br, I, At.

    Inert gases - The noble gases of the zero group of the periodic system,
    consisting of He, Ne, Ar, Kr, Xe, Rn, which have no valency and combine
    only with great difficulty, if at all, with other elements.

    Ion Exchange - A process in which ions are chemically transferred from a
    material to a liquid or solid separatory substance or exchanger which,
    because of its chemical structure of loosely bound ions, has an affinity
    for certain ions and gives up some of its own ions to the material.  The
    exchange occurs between ions of like charge; the exchanger substance can
    usually be regenerated by passing another material through it to elute the
    previously sorbed ions and replace them with the original kind of loosely
    bound ions.  These ion exchange substances are usually resins or zeolites
    or chelates.

    Iron Group Metals - Those metals in the central part of the third period of
    the periodic system consisting of Fe, Co and Ni, all of which form colored
    salts and 2 or more series of compounds.

    Leaching - The process of extracting or dissolving a soluble component from
    a mixture by contacting the mixture with a solvent, resulting in
    dissolution or solution of the solubles and leaving an insoluble material.

    Note.  Solution of a substance in a normally solid, molten material is not
    considered to be "leaching" as defined above.

    Liquid-Liquid Extraction - The process of transferring a substance (fluid
    or solid) from one liquid phase in which it is dispersed or dissolved to a
    second liquid phase which is immiscible with the first liquid.

    Nonmetallic Elements - The electronegative elements on the right of the
    periodic system, which generally exist in several stages of oxidation and
    whose oxides form acids.  See main class definition for list of nonmetals
    for this class.

    Organic Compound - A compound as defined in the definition of Class 260,
    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds as qualified by (34) Note.

    Platinum Metals - A group of noble metals that occur together in nature and
    form 2 groups in the periodic system, i.e., Ru, Rh, Pd, Os, Ir and Pt.

    Promoter - A substance which stimulates or aids the effect of a catalyst.

    Radioactive - Able to give off rays by spontaneous disintegration.  The
    radioactive elements are usually those having an atomic number of 84 or
    greater and the phenomenon of radioactivity is not affected by chemical or
    physical influences.

    Rare Earths - The oxides of the rare earth metals consisting of the
    elements having atomic numbers 21, 39, 57-71, inclusive.

    Recovery - The extraction or removal of a valuable constituent from a raw
    material, by-product or waste product.

    Refractory Metals - Those metals in Group IV B, V B and VIB of the periodic
    system, consisting of Ti, Zr, Hf, V, Nb, Ta, Cr, Mo and W, some of which
    are used in making bricks or cement which resist heat and are slow to
    soften.

    Ternary Compound - A chemical compound consisting of 3 elements only, such
    as NaOH, H2SO4, KCN, etc.

    Volatizing - Converting a normally solid or liquid material into a gas or
    vapor state; mere volatization of water or a solvent is excluded under this
    definition.

    III.    LINE AND SEARCH NOTES

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, for processes of preparing or
    treating inorganic compounds or nonmetallic elements which involve only
    physical treatments except for extracting, leaching, or dissolving, per se,
    and not specifically provided for in some other class; for processes for
    analysis which involve a chemical reaction.

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, for processes for making heating
    and illuminating gas in general and processes and apparatus for purifying a
    heating and illuminating gas; processes involving a chemical reaction for
    making or purifying heating or illuminating gas consisting of a single
    element or organic compound, per se, are classified in Class 423.

    53,     Package Making, appropriate subclasses especially subclasses 428+
    for methods of manufacturing chemical compounds followed by a subsequent
    packaging step.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, for a process or apparatus for chemically
    manufacturing silicon or silicon dioxide (arbitrarily considered to be
    glass for Class 65) combined with significant shaping or heat treating.

    71,     Chemistry:  Fertilizers, appropriate subclasses for compositions,
    and processes of making such compositions, having a nutrient action on
    plant growth.  See (1) Note in the definition of Class 71 and (13) Note and
    (15) Note in the definition of Class 423 for lines between these two
    classes.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, the line with the Class 75, Specialized Metallurgical Processes,
    Compositions for Use Therein, Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and
    Loose Metal Particulate Mixtures, is generally as follows:



            Class 75 provides for metals and processes for their manufacture.
    Class 423 provides for chemically modifying metal bearing compositions to
    form intermederiary products which comprise inorganic compounds even if
    intended for subsequent reduction to free metals.  When it is not clear
    from the claimed disclosure whether the product produced is an intermediary
    of a free metal, it is assumed to be intermediary.  A smelting process is
    assumed to produce a free metal unless otherwise stated.  Class 75 provides
    for ore beneficiating processes which claim a sintering or agglomerating
    step, even though the production of a free metal is not claimed, and
    compounding of ingredient to make a composition which is in better form for
    pyrometallurgy, even though some chemical reaction is involved.  Patents
    including claims classifiable in Class 423 and equally comprehensive claims
    classifiable in Class 75 are classified in Class 75 and cross-referenced to
    Class 423.  Processes resulting in the production or separation of
    undesired metallic material,e.g, impurities, during the manufacture of
    Class 423 compounds are classified in Class 423.  If the metal is a desired
    material, however, the patent is classified in Class 75.  See also the note
    to Class 420, Alloy or Metallic Composition below.



            As between Class 75 and Class 423, intermetallic compounds are in
    Class 75. Processes resulting in the production or separation of undesired
    metallic material, e.g., impurities, during the manufacture of Class 423
    compounds are classified in Class 423.  If the metal is a desired material,
    however, the patent is classified in Class 75.



    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, for processes of a purely physical
    nature involving steps resulting in separation of a gas from a fluid
    mixture comprising (a) a gas and solid or liquid particles entrained
    therein, (b) a liquid and gas entrained therein, or (c) a plurality of
    gases.  For patents to be placed in Class 423, a particular chemical must
    be claimed and the chemical reaction must be inherent or disclosed.
    Broadly reciting the separating material as a "chemical" or as "gas
    purifying material" does not exclude the patent from Class 95.  Absorption
    and adsorption are not considered chemical reactions in this respect.
    Processes for separating a gaseous fluid mixture having therein ammonia
    (NH3) or acid anhydrides (e.g., CO2, SO2, etc.) by contacting the gaseous
    fluid mixture with water and thus dissolving these gases out of the gaseous
    fluid mixture are in Class 95, notwithstanding the fact that a chemical
    reaction occurs in the solution and that ammonium hydroxide or the acids
    are formed.  See also, search class note to Class 95 in Class 423, subclass
    210.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses for
    coating or plastic compositions not otherwise provided for.  For the line
    between Classes 106 and 423.  In regard to materials and ingredients, e.g.,
    pigments, see the note to the definition of Class 106 under the heading
    "Materials or Ingredients". See also (13) Note and (15) Note in the
    definition of Class 423 and (4) Note in subclass 265 of that class.

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes and non-coating apparatus for
    growing therein-defined single-crystal of all types of materials, including
    inorganic or organic.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 2+ for the process of treating a mixture to remove
    foreign matter from the surface.  The line between this Class 134 and Class
    423 is as follows:  in Class 423 the intent is to recover a metal compound
    from a mixture thereof, while in Class 134, the intent is merely to clean
    the mixture, whether or not the removed foreign matter is later treated to
    recover valuable by-products.

    148,    Metal Treatment, for processes for making case hardened metals and
    the corresponding products (e.g., carbided or nitrided metals) in which a
    metal is treated so as to form the nitride or carbide of the metal in more
    or less as a layer thereon, but which layer varies in composition towards
    the inside, the intention being to form case hardened metal, not to form a
    definite compound for recovery thereof.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, appropriate subclasses for
    process of chemically preparing or recovering inorganic compound with a
    fiber liberation step, and especially subclasses 29+ for processes of
    regenerating, for purposes of reusing, a fiber treating liquor, even though
    a compound or nonmetallic element for Class 423 is recovered.  For the line
    between this Class 162 and Class 423 in regard to regeneration, the intent
    of the disclosure must be considered.  If there is an intent to regenerate,
    reconstitute, reclaim or recycle the waste or used liquor being treated,
    whether or not a Class 423 product is recovered, classification is in Class
    162.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, appropriate subclasses for a
    process of carbonizing solid carbonaceous material, or for calcining coke
    to produce a coke or other impure carbon containing material, not otherwise
    provided for.  A document having claims to both the process of coking and
    the additional steps of producing carbon black will be classified in Class
    423 and cross referenced to Class 201.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, for a process of separating a
    liquid mixture by vaporizing and condensing a portion thereof to isolate in
    the distillate or in the residue a relatively pure compound which was
    present as such in the original mixture, and for a process including a
    chemical reaction and a separatory distillation operation when the chemical
    reaction merely facilitates the isolation by the distillation process of a
    pre-existing substance in the original mixture.  Class 423, Inorganic
    Chemistry, takes a process of preparing a compound and isolating it by a
    separatory distillation process or vaporizing a mixture and contacting the
    vaporous mixture with a substance which purified the mixture and prepares a
    compound for that class.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, for processes of producing
    an inorganic compound or nonmetallic element by directly employing
    electrical or wave energy.  The general line between this Class 423, and
    Class 204 is as follows: Class 423 provides for (1) process steps falling
    within the definition of Class 204 wherein a simultaneous or subsequent
    chemical reaction takes place which modified the product of the Class 204
    to produce a different compound or element, and (2) branching processes
    wherein one of the branches comprises a process falling within the
    definition of Class 204 and at least one branch falls within the definition
    of Class 423.  Class 204 takes processes wherein an initial or preparatory
    reaction of the type provided for in Class 423 is followed by process step
    of the type provided for in Class 204 which modifies the product of the
    initial reaction.  In processes where a useful by-product is formed, the
    patent is classified accordingly.

    (1)     Note.  If electrolysis takes place in a reagent which immediately
    reacts with a product of the electrolysis to yield a Class 423 product,
    classification is proper for Class 423.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses, for processes of separating a mixture of compounds by magnetic
    action.  However, processes which include both a chemical reaction and a
    magnetic separation are classified in the appropriate chemical class, e.g.,
    Class 423, etc.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, for chemical processes where the
    main intent is to purify a liquid, not to purify or recover a compound or
    nonmetallic  element for Class 423, in regard to treatment of an effluent
    or waste liquor, the intent of the disclosure must be considered.  If it be
    the main intent to purify the effluent liquor for disposal, classification
    is in Class 210 even though a product for Class 423 is recovered as an
    incident to the purification.  If the main intent is to treat the effluent
    to recover a Class 423 product then classification in Class 423 is
    indicated.  If the disclosure contains both intentions and it cannot be
    determined which is the primary intention, then classification is in Class
    423 with cross reference to Class 210 where necessary.

    252,    Compositions, appropriate subclasses, for compositions of matter
    not otherwise provided for.  See the definitions of Class 252 for its scope
    and the notes thereto for classification of other compositions.  See also
    (13) Note and (15) Note in the definition of Class 423.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, appropriate subclasses, for claimed
    chemical processes in which an organic compound is the end result, even
    though the intent is to make an inorganic compound from this organic
    intermediate.  However, a process which results in several different
    chemical compounds, one of which is classifiable in Class 423 and another
    is classifiable in Class 260, is classified in Class 423 and cross
    referenced into Class 260, except where the compound classifiable in Class
    423 is only incidentally produced by the reaction, such as, for example,
    HC1 and is not an objective of the process.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements for
    appropriate subclasses for changes in the chemical nature of materials
    brought about by nuclear reactions; and subclasses 156+ and 323+ for
    production of materials, other than or in addition to the conversion of
    nuclear fuel, by means of nuclear reactions.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, appropriate subclasses for alloys,
    intermetallic compounds or compounds or composition containing a continuous
    phase of metal and methods of making them.  See the class definition of
    Class 420 for the line between Class 420 and Class 75 for processes fo
    making alloys.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 1-44 for processes for disinfecting,
    deodorizing, preserving, or sterilizing.  Inorganic compounds or
    nonmetallic elements claimed with an additive which only serves to preserve
    the product are in Class 423.  See also the notes in Class 423, subclasses
    265+ and subclasses 45+ for chemical reactors and apparatus for carrying
    out chemical physical processes.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses for a Class 423 product combined with an additive which is
    claimed or solely disclosed as having a Class 424 utility.  A Class 423
    product having combined therewith an additive which protects the product,
    itself against biological attack is proper for Class 423, see subclasses
    265+.

    426,    Food or Edible Material: Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 160+, for baking powder compositions, which in some cases are
    made to deliberately contain impurities to stabilize the same and to cause
    proper reaction rates.  In many instances, the compound is calcium acid
    pyrophoshate and the impurity is a calcium or aluminum compound.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for metallic compounds having specific outer structure, especially
    subclasses 379+ for a structurally defined or coated rod, strand, fiber or
    particle which may include a metal compound; subclasses 432 and 469+ for a
    non structural composite web or sheet including a layer of a metal compound.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process, subclasses 188+ for electrolyte compositions; subclass 247 for
    materials used to make a battery separator; and other appropriate
    subclasses having compositions combined with structure.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 1+, for a residual process of heating.  The
    line between Classes 423 and 432 is generally as follows:  Class 423 takes
    heating processes which involve a chemical reaction to produce an inorganic
    compound or nonmetallic element.  Materials identified by, terms such as
    "lime", "limestone" and "gypsum", are considered to be compounds for Class
    423, but terms such as "cement" and "clay" are not. Residual processes
    which do not include a chemical reaction or do not result in a compound are
    in Class 432.  The terms "calcining", "burning", "removing water of
    hydration", etc. are considered to involve a chemical reaction.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, for processes of
    making separating or purifying compounds or elements by operations that
    include fermentation, and compositions and apparatus that are specialized
    for use therein and processes of making such compositions for such use.

    504,    Plant Protecting and Regulating Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses for compositions, and processes of making such compositions,
    having a stimulating or regulating action on plant growth.  See (13) Note
    and (15) Note in the definition of Class 423 for lines between these two
    classes.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 100+ for high temperature (Tc  30 K) superconducting materials,
    per se, or subclasses 300+ for processes of producing same.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, appropriate subclasses for a
    claimed chemical process to synthesize a hydrocarbon.  When a process
    produces an inorganic compound for Class 423 and a hydrocarbon compound for
    Class 585, both of which are intended to be recovered, the patent is
    classified as an original in Class 423 and cross-referenced to Class 585.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the process of destruction of hazardous or toxic waste by
    way of incineration heating or other chemical reactions when the
    destruction of the waste is the intended purpose, Class 423 takes all
    intended production or recovery of marketable products in the form of
    inorganic compounds or elements.


CLS 423/1
TXT Processes under the class definition wherein a mixture is chemically
    treated to obtain or recover a compound of a metal contained in the
    original mixture as an element, a compound or a precursor transmutable to
    the metal.

    (1)     Note.  The chemical reaction need not involve the desired metal, it
    may be with another constituent of the mixture for easier separation of the
    desired compound.

    (2)     Note.  The following are assumed to be mixtures unless otherwise
    specifically disclosed or stated:  the slightly impure compound, ores,
    metalliferous materials, minerals, alloys, amalgams, scrap metal, clay,
    metals coated, plated or jacketed on other metals, or on other material,
    spent or waste liquors (regenerating, purifying or recovering from)
    limestone, flue dust, gypsum.

    (3)     Note.  It must be the inventor's intent that a metal in compound
    form be obtained, but it is not necessary that this compound be separated
    from the mixture.  For example, the process of changing Fe2 O3in ore to Fe3
    O4by magnetic roasting in order to obtain a better form for smelting is
    properly classified in this group of subclasses (151+).  Further the
    initial or starting material must be considered in order to determine
    whether or not the claimed process is for isolating a metallic compound
    from a mixture. Where two compounds are first mixed together, as disclosed,
    and subsequent to a chemical reaction, a separation is made, classification
    of such a process is not in this group of subclasses even though the
    initial step of mixing is not claimed; such a patent may be classified in
    other areas of this class on other features.  Also, where a mixture results
    from an intermediate step in a process for making a product and the mixture
    is separated, that is not considered as treating a mixture to obtain metal
    compounds for this group of subclasses.

    (4)     Note.  Changing the form of a compound to render it less effective
    as an impurity or to make it nondetrimental is not considered to be
    recovery under this definition.  Further, converting part of a mixture
    which is considered an impurity to the desired part is not considered to be
    recovery under this definition.  For example converting the Na2CO3 in a
    mixture with Na2S to Na2S, therefore resulting in all Ma2S, is not recovery.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, appropriate subclasses, for a process of (1) purifying mixtures
    and obtaining the free metal, (2) making agglomerates for metallurgical
    purposes, (3) smelting (which is assumed to result in the free metal unless
    otherwise specifically disclosed), (4) cementation of one metal on another,
    (5) deposition of a metal on another material (6) making an impure metal
    but in the elemental form.



            As between Classes 423 and 75, the claimed process which goes to
    the metallic compound indicates classification in Class 423, whether the
    purpose is to commercially use the compound or to later dissociate the
    compound to obtain the free metal, while the additional claimed step of
    yielding the free metal brings the claim to Class 75; in the situation
    where some of the claims recite the metal and others recite the metallic
    compound, the most comprehensive or combination claim controls (free metal)
    and the document is classified in Class 75; similarly if the intent is to
    obtain both the metal and the compound and both processes are claimed the
    patent goes to Class 75, as an original.  If a metal which is definitely
    only an impurity is removed as an element and the desired metal is in
    compound form, classification of the original is in Class 423.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 2+, for a
    process of removing foreign matter from a metallic substance, where the
    intent is merely for cleaning purposes, not to recover a metal containing
    compound.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses, for separating parts of a solid mixture where no chemical
    reaction is involved.

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, for etching of any material not
    otherwise provided for, and including composite substrates or mixtures.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, for ore crushing and
    physical separation.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, for in situ
    chemical separation.

    420,    Alloy or Metallic Compositions, appropriate subclasses for alloys,
    intermetallic compounds or composition containing a continuous phase of
    metal and methods of making them.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 1+, for a residual process of applying heat to
    a material.


CLS 423/2
TXT Processes under subclass 1 in which the compound comprises a metal which
    exhibits spontaneous nuclear disintegration with emission of radioactive
    particles, either as (1) the naturally unstable metal which has an atomic
    number of at least 84, or (2) a metal which has been treated to render an
    isotope thereof radioactive; see Glossary.

    (1)     Note.  Compounds of the trans-actinide elements, i.e., those having
    atomic numbers greater than 103 will be found in this group of subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  Patents wherein the claims are directed to making an element
    radioactive or to forming a different isotope of a radioactive element are
    classified in Class 376, Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems,
    and Elements, subclasses 156+ even when the element is in compound form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249+,   for a radioactive compound, element or isotope, per se.


CLS 423/3
TXT Processes under subclass 2 in which the radio-active compound comprises a
    metal of the actinide series, i.e., one having an atomic number of 89 or
    greater.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, for processes in general of obtaining pure metal values in a
    metallurgical process and particularly subclass 84.1 for pyrometallurgical
    processes for obtaining actinide and trans-actinide series metals.
    Production of the metal, e.g., uranium, plutonium, etc., compounds or
    concentrates as products even if disclosed for metallurgical purposes are
    classified in this and indented subclasses.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclasses for
    electrical or wave energy preparation, separation, or recovery of actinide
    series products.  Also, see section III of the Class 204 definition for the
    general class line between Class 204 and Class 423.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 43+ for electrolytic processes
    involving an actinide series element or compound, including preparation,
    separation, or recovery of actinide series products.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements, for
    processes of producing a reaction product by an impact or bombardment of a
    nucleus and in subclasses 189, 195, 198, and 201 for such processes
    followed by product treatment for recovery or separation.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, subclasses 1+ for alloys, metallic
    compositions or intermetallic compounds containing an actinide or
    transactinide series metal.


CLS 423/4
TXT Processes under subclass 3 in which the actinide metal comprises a nuclear
    fuel element and is obtained by treating the fuel element to remove the
    covering or casing material therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 625+, for processes producing a useful
    composition containing actinide series elements and such compositions.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclasses 409+ for the structure of the fuel element, per se.

    534,    Organic Compounds, for organic actinide compounds and methods of
    making the same, in particular subclasses 11+  for carbocyclic or acyclic
    actinide compounds.  See also main class definition of Class 260.


CLS 423/5
TXT Processes under subclass 3 in which the treatment includes the step of
    melting material or using molten material.


CLS 423/6
TXT Processes under subclass 2 which include (1) attracting and retaining a
    component of the mixture by contact with an ion exchange substance or (2)
    using a substance which has an affinity for and retains a selected
    component or portion of the mixture being treated; see Glossary.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 90+ for processes of gas
    separation using solid sorbents, per se.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 24+, for processes of
    separation in general by ion exchange or sorption.


CLS 423/7
TXT Processes under subclass 6 in which the substance is an organic synthetic
    resin.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of "synthetic resin", see Class 520,
    subclass 1.


CLS 423/8
TXT Processes under subclass 3 which include the step of selectively dissolving
    a compound in one of two contacting immiscible liquids for separation; see
    Glossary.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     54, 63, 70, 112, 139, 157, and 181, for processes of treating
    mixtures including a desired metal to form a compound of the metal, in
    which the step of liquid-liquid extraction if utilized.


CLS 423/9
TXT Processes under subclass 8 in which one of the immiscible liquids is an
    organic solvent containing nitrogen, e.g., amines, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    260,    Chemistry of Organic Compounds, appropriate subclasses for nitrogen
    containing organic solvents.


CLS 423/10
TXT Processes under subclass 8 in which one of the liquids is an organic
    solvent which contains phosphorus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    260,    Chemistry of Organic Compounds, appropriate subclasses for
    phosphorus containing organic solvents.


CLS 423/11
TXT Processes under subclass 3 wherein a liquid or slurry is treated to form a
    substance which is insoluble therein and comes out of solution, or wherein
    the composition of the liquid is changed so that one part of the mixture
    becomes insoluble therein, so the insoluble substance can be separated from
    the liquid and the materials which remain soluble in the liquid.

    (1)     Note.  Crystallization of a substance is included under this
    definition of insolubilization.


CLS 423/12
TXT Processes under subclass 11 in which another substance is caused to become
    insoluble and acts to carry out ions of the actinide series metal while
    coming out of solution.

    (1)     Note.  In some instances, the carrier compound acts to sorb the
    additional ions.


CLS 423/13
TXT Processes under subclass 12 in which the other compound comprises bismuth.


CLS 423/14
TXT Processes under subclass 12 in which the other compound comprises lanthanum.


CLS 423/15
TXT Processes under subclass 11 in which a compound formed contains the
    ammonium (NH4+) radical or another metal in addition to an actinide series
    metal.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass will be found, for example, double salts of
    uranium compounds, i.e., those containing at least two cations and which
    crystallize as a single substance but ionize as two substances, and
    compounds of uranic   acid (U2O72-).


CLS 423/16
TXT Processes under subclass 11 which include forming a peroxide such as UO4,
    etc.


CLS 423/17
TXT Processes under subclass 11 which include making a separation by using a
    carbonate as an active ingredient to leach, wash, or dissolve; see Glossary.


CLS 423/18
TXT Processes under subclass 11 which include making a separation by using an
    acid as an active ingredient to leach, wash, or dissolve; see Glossary.


CLS 423/19
TXT Processes under subclass 3 including the step of causing a normally liquid
    or solid substance in element or compound form to be changed into a gas or
    a vapor; see Glossary.

    (1)     Note.  Mere volatization of water or a solvent to concentrate a
    solution is not included under this definition; classification of such a
    process is based on other features.


CLS 423/20
TXT Processes under subclass 3 which include making a separation by using an
    acid as an active ingredient to leach, wash, or dissolve; see Glossary.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for similar processes which include acid leaching in combination
    with forming an insoluble substance in a liquid.


CLS 423/21.1
TXT Rare earth metal (At. No. 21, 39, or 57-71):

    Processes under subclass 1 in which the compound comprises one of the
    metals known as the "rare earth metals" and which has an atomic number of
    21, 39, or 57-71, inclusive.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the treatment of hazardous or toxic waste containing rare
    earth metals (atomic numbers 21, 39, or 57-71).


CLS 423/21.5
TXT Ion exchanging or liquid-liquid extracting: Processes under subclass 21.1
    which include the step of (a) attracting and retaining a compound of the
    mixture by contact with an ion exchange substance or (b) selectively
    dissolving a compound in one of two immiscible liquids to effect a
    separation; see Glossary.


CLS 423/22
TXT Processes under subclass 1 in which the compound comprises one of the
    metals known as the platinum group metals, i.e., ruthenium rhodium,
    palladium, osmium, iridium or platinum.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the destruction or containment of hazardous or toxic  waste
    containing platinum group elements (ruthenium, rhodium, palladium, osmium,
    iridium, or platinum).


CLS 423/23
TXT Processes under subclass 1 wherein the compound comprises copper, silver or
    gold.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 100, 117 and 118, for hydrometallurgical processes
    wherein the metal values recovered consist of copper, silver or gold in
    elemental form.

    556,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 110+ for organo-metallo compounds
    containing copper, silver or gold or the processes for preparing such
    compounds.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the destruction or containment of hazardous or toxic waste
    being volatilized or containing (Cu, Ag, or Au) halogens, oxygen sulfur, or
    nitrogen.


CLS 423/24
TXT Processes under subclass 23, which include the step of (1) attracting and
    retaining a component of the mixture by contact with an ion exchange
    substance or (2) selectively dissolving a component in one of two
    immiscible liquids to effect a separation; see Glossary.


CLS 423/25
TXT Processes under subclass 23 which include the step of attracting or
    retaining a component or portion of the mixture by means of magnetic lines
    of force or by selective adherence to the surface of a solid; see Glossary.


CLS 423/26
TXT Processes under subclass 23 which include the step of floating or causing
    concentrated metal values of the mixture to rise to the top and to be
    skimmed off while the earthy portions of the ore are permitted to settle;
    see Glossary.


CLS 423/27
TXT Processes under subclass 23, including a step of causing separation by
    leaching, washing or dissolving out; see Glossary.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 101+, for a process of obtaining a pure elemental
    metal and including the step of leaching with a chemical.


CLS 423/28
TXT Processes under subclass 27 which specify a particular particle size or
    range for the starting mixture, the intermediate or the final product.


CLS 423/29
TXT Processes under subclass 27 in which one of the active leaching ingredients
    is a cyanide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    371+,   for a cyanide compound, per se, or the process of preparing such a
    compound where the starting material is substantially a pure substance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclass 105 for the process of obtaining a pure elemental metal
    and which includes the step of leaching with a cyanide compound.


CLS 423/30
TXT Processes under subclass 29 in which a pressure above atmospheric is
    employed while the leaching is being effected.

    (1)     Note.  Included under this definition is the use of gas under
    pressure contacting the mixture either above the surface thereof or as a
    submerged blast.


CLS 423/31
TXT Processes under subclass 29, wherein the reaction mixture is subjected to
    stirring, vibration or mixing while being leached.

    (1)     Note.  The agitation of the mixture may be effected by any means,
    e.g., fluid, mechanical or sonic, etc.


CLS 423/32
TXT Processes under subclass 27 in which one of the active leaching ingredients
    is ammonia or an ammonium compound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclass 103, for a process of obtaining a pure elemental metal
    and which includes the step of leaching with ammonia or an ammonium
    compound.


CLS 423/33
TXT Processes under subclass 32 wherein a specified temperature or range
    thereof is recited.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes patents which specify a temperature
    preceding, during or following the leaching step.


CLS 423/34
TXT Processes under subclass 27 wherein a liquid or slurry is treated to form a
    substance which is insoluble therein, and comes out of solution or wherein
    the composition of the liquid is changed so that one part of the mixture
    becomes insoluble therein, so the insoluble substance can be separated from
    the liquid and the materials which remain soluble in the liquid.

    (1)     Note.  Included under this definition of insolubilization is that
    wherein a substance crystallizes out of solution due to temperature or
    concentration change.

    (2)     Note.  The compounds formed by the titles specifically set out in
    the indented subclasses need not be those which come out of the solution;
    they may remain soluble while others formed by the process precipitate out.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42+,    for a process of forming an insoluble substance in a liquid which
    process does not involve a leaching step.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 101+ for a process of obtaining a pure elemental
    metal, which includes the step of chemical leaching and which may involve
    precipitating a substance or causing it to come out of solution; and
    subclasses 106+ for a process of obtaining a pure elemental element by
    causing it or a compound thereof to come out of solution and which involves
    leaching with a cyanide compound.


CLS 423/35
TXT Processes under subclass 34 in which an oxide or carbonate is formed.


CLS 423/36
TXT Processes under subclass 34 which includes chemically forming a compound
    having the sulfate (SO42-) radical.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found disclosures to double sulfates
    of a monovalent metal and a tri-valent metal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 110 and 115+ for a process of obtaining a pure
    elemental metal and which involves the formation of a sulfate compound.


CLS 423/37
TXT Processes under subclass 34 which includes chemically forming a compound
    having the sulfide (S2-) ion.


CLS 423/38
TXT Processes under subclass 27 which include chemically forming a halogen
    containing compound.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this and the indented subclasses are methods of
    wet or dry chloridizing precedent to or subsequent to leaching.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 111+ for a process of forming a pure elemental metal
    which includes the step of chloridizing.


CLS 423/39
TXT Processes under subclass 38 in which a specific temperature or a range of
    temperatures is recited during at least part of the process either for the
    mixture or for a substance involved in the process.


CLS 423/40
TXT Processes under subclass 38 in which the halogen in the compound formed is
    chlorine and is provided by using as a reactant either chlorine gas or
    chlorinated water.


CLS 423/41
TXT Processes under subclass 27 which include chemically forming a compound
    having the sulfate (SO42-) radical.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for a process of forming a similar metal compound which includes
    the step of forming a sulfate as well as the steps of leaching or
    dissolution and causing a substance to become insoluble in, or precipitate
    out of a liquid or slurry.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 110 and 115+ for a process of obtaining a pure
    elemental metal which includes the step of sulfating.


CLS 423/42
TXT Processes under subclass 23 wherein a liquid or slurry is treated to form a
    substance which is insoluble therein and comes out of solution or wherein
    the composition of the liquid is changed so that one part of the mixture
    becomes insoluble therein, so the insoluble substance can be separated from
    the liquid and other materials which remain soluble in the liquid.

    (1)     Note.  Crystallization of a substance is included under this
    definition of insolubilization.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 108+ for a process of obtaining a pure elemental metal
    and which includes step of precipitation.


CLS 423/43
TXT Processes under subclass 42 in which specific alkalinity or acidity is
    employed during the process.


CLS 423/44
TXT Processes under subclass 23 including the step of causing copper, silver or
    gold in either the elemental or compound form to pass into the form of a
    gas or a vapor; see Glossary.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 111+ for a process of obtaining a pure elemental metal
    which may include a step of volatizing a substance.


CLS 423/45
TXT Processes under subclass 23 which include chemically forming a compound
    containing

    the (SO42-) sulfate radical.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for a process in which a similar sulfate compound is formed, but in
    which also a substance is caused to come out of solution in a liquid or
    slurry and in which leaching is effected.

    41,     in which a similar sulfate compound is formed and in which leaching
    effected.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 110 and 115+ for a process of obtaining a pure
    elemental metal and which involves the formation of a sulfate compound.


CLS 423/46
TXT Processes under subclass 23 which include chemically forming a halogen
    containing compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38+,    for a process of obtaining a similar metal compound in which a
    halogen containing compound is formed and in which the step of leaching or
    dissolution is included.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidatedr Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 110 and 111+ for a process of obtaining a pure
    elemental metal and which involves the formation of a chlorine containing
    compound.


CLS 423/47
TXT Processes under subclass 23 including the  removal of sulfur or of arsenic
    from the mixture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclass for a process of removing at least a portion of the
    sulfur or of the arsenic from an ore for the purpose of concentrating the
    metal values of the ores.


CLS 423/48
TXT Processes under subclass 23 which include forming a sulfide compound or a
    mixture of sulfides known as a matte.


CLS 423/49
TXT Processes under subclass 1 wherein the compound comprises manganese,
    technetium or rhenium.

    (1)     Note.  Technetium does not occur naturally; it is a fission product
    or uranium.  Compounds of technetium are known, however, e.g., Tc207,
    NH4Tc04, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for processes of treating mixtures to obtain radioactive group VIIB
    metal compounds and subclasses 249+ for the radioactive metal compound, per
    se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the destruction or containment of hazardous or toxic  waste
    containing (Mn, Tc, or Re) halogen, oxygen, or sulfur.


CLS 423/50
TXT Processes under subclass 49 wherein a liquid or slurry is treated to form a
    substance which is insoluble therein and comes out of solution, or wherein
    the composition of the liquid is changed so that one part of the mixture
    becomes insoluble substance can be separated from the liquid and the
    materials which remain soluble in the liquid.

    (1)     Note.  Crystallization of a substance is included under this
    definition of insolubilization.


CLS 423/51
TXT Processes under subclass 50 including the step of chemically forming a
    compound containing a halogen.


CLS 423/52
TXT Process under subclass 50 including the step of forming a compound
    containing the

    sulfate (SO42-) radical.


CLS 423/53
TXT Processes under subclass 1 wherein the compound comprises chromium,
    molybdenum, or wolfram (tungsten).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the destruction or containment of hazardous or toxic waste
    being volatilized or containing Cr, Mo, or W.


CLS 423/54
TXT Processes under subclass 53 which include the step of (1) attracting and
    retaining a component of the mixture by contact with an ion exchange
    substance or (2) selectively dissolving a component in one of two
    immiscible liquids to effect a separation; see Glossary.


CLS 423/55
TXT Processes under subclass 53 wherein a liquid or slurry is treated to form a
    substance which is insoluble therein and comes out of solution, or wherein
    the composition of the liquid is changed so that one part of the mixture
    becomes insoluble therein, so the insoluble substance can be separated from
    the liquid and the materials which remain soluble in the liquid.

    (1)     Note.  Crystallization of a substance is included under this
    definition of insolubilization.


CLS 423/56
TXT Processes under subclass 55 including the step of chemically forming a
    compound which contains the ammonium (NH4+) or nitrate (NO3-) radical.


CLS 423/57
TXT Processes under subclass 55 including the step of chemically forming a
    compound having the sulfate (SO42-) radical.


CLS 423/58
TXT Processes under subclass 55 including the step of chemically forming a
    compound which contains at least two metals.


CLS 423/59
TXT Processes under subclass 53 including the step of causing a normally solid
    or liquid substance in either elemental or compound form to be changed into
    a gas or a vapor; see Glossary.


CLS 423/60
TXT Processes under subclass 59 wherein the substance is a compound which
    contains chlorine.


CLS 423/61
TXT Processes under subclass 53 including the step of chemically forming a
    compound which contains at least two metals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for process of forming a plural metal containing compound
    containing a Group VIB metal from a mixture, which process also includes
    forming an insoluble substance in a liquid.


CLS 423/62
TXT Processes under subclass 1 wherein the compound comprises vanadium,
    niobium, or tantalum.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the destruction or containment of hazardous or toxic waste
    containing V, Nb, or Ta.


CLS 423/63
TXT Processes under subclass 62 which include the step of (1) attracting and
    retaining a component of the mixture by contact with an ion exchange
    substance, or (2) selectively dissolving a component in one of two
    immiscible liquids to effect a separation; see Glossary.


CLS 423/64
TXT Processes under subclass 62 wherein the compound is separated from liquids
    which are organic compounds, i.e., those nonpolar compounds consisting of
    carbon and hydrogen with or without other elements (except for those
    compounds in which carbon plays an unimportant part, as carbonates) e.g.,
    petroleum oils, etc.


CLS 423/65
TXT Processes under subclass 62 wherein a liquid or slurry is treated to form a
    substance which is insoluble therein and comes out of solution, or wherein
    the composition of the liquid is changed so that one part of the mixture
    becomes insoluble therein, so the insoluble substance can be separated from
    the liquid and the materials which remain soluble in the liquid.

    (1)     Note.  Crystallization of a substance is included under this
    definition of insolubilization.


CLS 423/66
TXT Processes under subclass 65 including the step of chemically forming a
    hydroxide or a hydrate.


CLS 423/67
TXT Processes under subclass 65 including the step of chemically forming a
    compound which contains the ammonium (NH4+) radical or the sulfate (SO42-)
    radical.


CLS 423/68
TXT Processes under subclass 62 which include leaching, washing, or dissolving
    out a portion of the mixture; see Glossary.


CLS 423/69
TXT Processes under subclass 1 wherein the compound comprises titanium,
    zirconium, or hafnium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, especially subclasses 84+ for a process in which Ti, Zr, or Hf is
    reduced to metallic state from a compound thereof after a treatment to
    separate such compounds from mixtures.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the treatment of hazardous or toxic containing Ti, Zr, or Hf.


CLS 423/70
TXT Processes under subclass 69 which include the step of (1) attracting and
    retaining a component of the mixture by contact with an ion exchange
    substance, or (2) selectively dissolving a component in one of two
    immiscible liquids to effect a separation; see Glossary.


CLS 423/71
TXT Processes under subclass 69 including chemically forming a compound which
    contains at least two metals.


CLS 423/72
TXT Processes under subclass 71 in which the compound also contains a halogen.


CLS 423/73
TXT Processes under subclass 69 in which the mixture contains at least two
    members from the group comprising Ti, Zr, and Hf, and in which one of these
    members is recovered separately from any other.


CLS 423/74
TXT Processes under subclass 69 in which solids are suspended in upward flowing
    gas or vapor, the upward force of the fluid on the solids being countered
    by gravity, resulting in the formation of a zone in which the particles are
    compacted into a dense phase; see Glossary.

    (1)     Note.  The particles are in a state of hindered settling and the
    dense bed resembles a boiling liquid and above this dense bed some solids
    may be suspended in a dilute or dispersed phase.


CLS 423/75
TXT Processes under subclass 69 which include the step of causing a normally
    solid or liquid substance in either elemental or compound form to be
    changed into a gas or vapor; see Glossary.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 28+ for a process which includes a chemical reaction
    solely for the purpose of facilitating the isolation by distillation of a
    component of the original mixture.



            A process which includes vaporizing an impure mixture and then
    chemically treating the impure vapor to recover or separate therefrom a
    desired metal compound is classified in Class 423; see also reference to
    Class 203 in section III, Line and Search Notes.


CLS 423/76
TXT Processes under subclass 75 in which titanium, zirconium or hafnium is
    volatized in elemental or compound form.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes processes where an impure chloride is
    purified by distillation of the Group IVB metal chloride.


CLS 423/77
TXT Processes under subclass 76 in which the vapor stream is treated to remove
    undesired materials, the Group IVB metal values remaining in vapor form
    during the separation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75      and 76, for a process in which either the undesirable material or
    the Ti, Zr, or Hf is volatilized, there being no separation of one from the
    other in the vapor stream.


CLS 423/78
TXT Processes under subclass 76 in which volatilization takes place using
    solids which have been given a claimed physical shape; e.g., briquettes,
    pellets, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses, for briquetting or otherwise shaping solid mixtures.


CLS 423/79
TXT Processes under subclass 76 in which the vaporization of the Ti, Zr, or Hf
    is effected during contact of a solid feed material with gaseous chlorine.


CLS 423/80
TXT Processes under subclass 69 in which a chemical reaction is performed upon
    the mixture to enable two solid components of the mixture, usually of
    different compositions, to be more readily separated from each other by
    nonchemical methods and while the components are still in a solid-state.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of solid-solid separation are:  magnetic, gravity,
    centrifugal, etc.  Solution (leaching) of one of the solids is not
    considered to be solid-solid separation for this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, for methods and
    apparatus for solid-solid separation, per se, especially subclasses 3+ for
    treatments, preliminary to a solid-solid separation, which do not involve a
    chemical reaction.


CLS 423/81
TXT Processes under subclass 69 which include the step of reacting or
    contacting the mixture with a compound which contains nitrogen, e.g.,
    nitric acid, ammonia, etc.


CLS 423/82
TXT Processes under subclass 69 which include the step of reacting or
    contacting the mixture with an acid which contains sulfur or a halogen,
    e.g., H2S, H2SO4, HC1, etc.


CLS 423/83
TXT Processes under subclass 82 which include the formation of iron in
    elemental form or of an insoluble iron containing compound.


CLS 423/84
TXT Processes under subclass 69 which include the step of reacting or
    contacting the mixture with a compound which contains an alkali metal or an
    alkaline earth metal.


CLS 423/85
TXT Processes under subclass 69 in which a liquid or slurry is treated to form
    a substance containing a Group IVB metal and which substance is insoluble
    in, and comes out of solution from, the liquid or slurry, or the
    composition of the liquid is changed so that the part of the mixture
    containing the Group IVB metal becomes insoluble therein, so the insoluble
    substance can be separated from the liquid and the materials which remain
    soluble in the liquid or slurry.


CLS 423/86
TXT Processes under subclass 69 which include the step of dissolving or
    leaching iron and thereby separating it from part of the original mixture;
    see Glossary.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150.3,  for general processes for chemically leaching iron values from
    iron-bearing ores.


CLS 423/87
TXT Processes under subclass 1 in which the compound comprises antimony,
    bismuth or arsenic.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this Class 423, arsenic is considered to be
    a metal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the destruction or containment of hazardous or toxic waste
    containing Sb, Bi, or As.


CLS 423/88
TXT Processes under subclass 87 which include the step of causing a normally
    solid or liquid substance in either elemental or compound form to be
    changed into a gas or a vapor; see Glossary.


CLS 423/89
TXT Processes under subclass 1 in which the compound comprises germanium, tin,
    or lead.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the destruction or containment of hazardous or toxic waste
    containing Ge, Sn, or Pb.


CLS 423/90
TXT Processes under subclass 89 in which the compound comprises tin and is
    obtained by treating an article or waste material of a mixture of metals
    which includes tin (e.g., terne plate, tin plate, cans, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 2+ for a
    process of treating articles or material for the purpose of cleaning or
    removing foreign matter therefrom, not to remove or strip a metal coating
    to recover the metal.


CLS 423/91
TXT Processes under subclass 90 in which the article or waste material is
    treated with a halogen which is either in the free state or combined with
    hydrogen as a halogen containing acid.


CLS 423/92
TXT Processes under subclass 89 in which a liquid or slurry is treated to form
    a substance which is insoluble in and comes out of solution, or wherein the
    composition of the liquid is changed so that one part of the mixture
    becomes insoluble therein, so the insoluble substance can be separated from
    the liquid and the materials which remain soluble in the liquid.

    (1)     Note.  Crystallization of a substance is included under this
    definition of insolubilization.


CLS 423/93
TXT Processes under subclass 92 in which a chemical reaction takes place while
    the pressure on the mixture is higher than atmospheric or while the mixture
    is agitated or vibrated.

    (1)     Note.  Agitation or vibration can be effected by any means, e.g.,
    mechanical, sonic, fluid, etc. Pressure increase can be effected by any
    means, e.g., submerged blast of a gas into a liquid or slurry mixture,
    pumping of the liquid or slurry mixture, increase in pressure of the gas
    space above a liquid surface, etc.


CLS 423/94
TXT Processes under subclass 92 which includes the step of chemically forming a
    compound containing a halogen.


CLS 423/95
TXT Processes under subclass 92 which include the step of chemically forming a
    compound which contains the nitrate (NO3-) radical or the sulfate (SO42-)
    radical.


CLS 423/96
TXT Processes under subclass 89 including the step of causing germanium or tin
    in elemental or compound form to be changed into a gas or vapor; see
    Glossary.


CLS 423/97
TXT Processes under subclass 89 including the step of causing lead in elemental
    or compound form to be changed into a gas or vapor; see Glossary.


CLS 423/98
TXT Processes under subclass 89 which include leaching, washing or dissolving
    out a portion of the mixture; see Glossary.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90,     for a process of destining scrap metal by forming and dissolving a
    tin compound.


CLS 423/99
TXT Processes under subclass 1 wherein the compound comprises zinc, cadmium or
    mercury.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the destruction or containment of hazardous or toxic waste
    containing Zn, Cd, or Hg.


CLS 423/100
TXT Processes under subclass 99 which include the step of (1) attracting and
    retaining a component of the mixture by contact with an ion exchange
    substance or (2) attracting and separating a component of the mixture from
    another component by means of magnetic lines of force; see Glossary.


CLS 423/101
TXT Processes under subclass 99 wherein a liquid or a slurry is treated to form
    a substance which is insoluble therein and comes out of solution, or
    wherein the composition of the liquid is changed so that one part of the
    mixture becomes insoluble therein, so the insoluble substance can be
    separated from the liquid and the materials which remain soluble in the
    liquid.

    (1)     Note.  Crystallization of a substance is included under this
    definition of insolubilization.


CLS 423/102
TXT Processes under subclass 101 in which a chemical reaction takes place while
    the mixture is agitated or vibrated.

    (1)     Note.  Agitation or vibration can be effected by any means, e.g.,
    mechanical, sonic, fluid, etc.


CLS 423/103
TXT Processes under subclass 101 including the step of chemically forming a
    compound which contains a halogen.


CLS 423/104
TXT Processes under subclass 101 including the step of chemically forming a
    hydroxide or a hydrate.


CLS 423/105
TXT Processes under subclass 101 including the step of chemically forming a
    compound

    having the carbonate (CO32-) radical.


CLS 423/106
TXT Processes under subclass 101 including the step of chemically forming a
    compound

    having the sulfate (SO42-) radical.


CLS 423/107
TXT Processes under subclass 99 including the step of causing zinc, cadmium or
    mercury in elemental or compound form to be changed into a gas or a vapor;
    see Glossary.


CLS 423/108
TXT Processes under subclass 107 wherein the mixture contains lead.


CLS 423/109
TXT Processes under subclass 99 which include leaching, washing, or dissolving
    out a portion of the mixture; see Glossary.


CLS 423/110
TXT Processes under subclass 99 including the step of removing at least some
    sulfur from the mixture.


CLS 423/111
TXT Processes under subclass 1 wherein the compound comprises beryllium,
    aluminum, gallium, indium or thallium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the destruction or containment of hazardous or toxic waste
    containing, Al, Ga, In, Tl, or Be.


CLS 423/112
TXT Processes under subclass 111 which include the step of (1) attracting and
    retaining a component of the mixture by contact with an ion exchange
    substance or (2) selectively dissolving a component in one of two
    immiscible liquids to effect a separation; see Glossary.


CLS 423/113
TXT Processes under subclass 111 wherein a separation is made by attracting and
    separating a component of the mixture from another component by means of
    magnetic lines of force; see Glossary.


CLS 423/114
TXT Processes under subclass 111 including the step of chemically forming a
    compound which contains the ammonium radical and a metal.


CLS 423/115
TXT Processes under subclass 111 including the step of chemically forming a
    compound which contains a plurality of metals.


CLS 423/116
TXT Processes under subclass 115 wherein the compound also contains a halogen.


CLS 423/117
TXT Processes under subclass 115 wherein the compound also contains sulfur.


CLS 423/118.1
TXT Aluminosilicate other than zeolite:
    Processes under subclass 115 wherein the compound is an  aluminosilicate,
    other than a zeolite, containing silicon, oxygen, aluminum, and another
    metal; e.g., sodium aluminosilicate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    700+,   for products and processes for producing zeolites.


CLS 423/119
TXT Processes under subclass 115 wherein the compound is an alkali metal
    aluminate, e.g., sodium aluminate (Na2Al204 or Na Al O2).


CLS 423/120
TXT Processes under subclass 119 wherein the mixture or source material
    includes the mineral alunite, which is naturally occurring K2SO4.Al2(SO4)3
    4Al(OH)3 or KAl3(OH) 6(SO4)3.


CLS 423/121
TXT Processes under subclass 119 wherein the mixture or source material is the
    mineral bauxite, which is naturally occurring

    Al2O(OH)4.


CLS 423/122
TXT Processes under subclass 111 wherein a liquid or slurry is treated to form
    a substance which is insoluble therein and comes out of solution, or
    wherein the composition of the liquid is changed so that one part of the
    mixture becomes insoluble therein, so the insoluble substance can be
    separated from the liquid and the materials which remain soluble in the
    liquid.

    (1)     Note.  Crystallization of a substance is included under this
    definition of insolubilization.


CLS 423/123
TXT Processes under subclass 122 wherein a chemical reaction takes place while
    the pressure on the mixture is either higher or lower than atmospheric; or
    while steam or water vapor is brought into contact with the mixture.

    (1)     Note.  Pressure increase, or decrease can be effected by any means,
    e.g., submerged blast of a gas into a slurry or liquid, pumping of the
    liquid or slurry, increase or decrease in pressure of the gas space above a
    liquid surface, etc.


CLS 423/124
TXT Processes under subclass 122 wherein a chemical reaction takes place while
    the mixture is agitated or vibrated.

    (1)     Note.  Agitation or vibration can be effected by any means, e.g.,
    mechanical, sonic, fluid, etc.


CLS 423/125
TXT Processes under subclass 122 including the step of chemically forming a
    compound having the nitrate (NO3-) radical.


CLS 423/126
TXT Processes under subclass 122 which include the step of chemically forming a
    compound having a halogen as part thereof.


CLS 423/127
TXT Processes under subclass 122 including the step of chemically forming a
    hydroxide or a hydrate.


CLS 423/128
TXT Processes under subclass 122 including the step of chemically forming a
    compound containing the sulfate (SO42-)radical.


CLS 423/129
TXT Processes under subclass 122 including the step of chemically forming a
    compound having the carbonate (CO32-) radical.


CLS 423/130
TXT Processes under subclass 111 in which the mixture contains an impurity
    which meets the definitions of an organic compound and the process includes
    a step of (1) removing the impurity from the mixture or (2) doing away with
    or breaking up completely the impurity.

    (1)     Note.  The organic impurity may be done away with or broken up
    completely by any means, as for example, chemical or flame oxidation, or
    combustion, etc.


CLS 423/131
TXT Processes under subclass 111 which include leaching, washing, or dissolving
    out a portion of the mixture; see Glossary.


CLS 423/132
TXT Processes under subclass 131 in which an acid is used as the leaching,
    washing or the solvent medium.


CLS 423/133
TXT Processes under subclass 111 including the step of causing a normally solid
    or liquid substance in either element or compound form to be changed into a
    gas or a vapor; see Glossary.


CLS 423/134
TXT Processes under subclass 133 in which the substance is beryllium.


CLS 423/135
TXT Processes under subclass 133 in which the substance is aluminum, gallium,
    indium or thallium.


CLS 423/136
TXT Processes under subclass 135 which include the step of reacting an
    uncombined halogen.


CLS 423/137
TXT Processes under subclass 111 in which include the step of using elemental
    carbon as a reducing agent.


CLS 423/138
TXT Processes under subclass 1 wherein the compound comprises one of the three
    metals in Period 4, Group VIII of the periodic system, i.e., iron, cobalt
    or nickel, commonly known as the iron group metals; see Glossary.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the destruction or containment of hazardous or toxic waste
    containing Fe, Co, and Ni.


CLS 423/139
TXT Processes under subclass 138 which include the step of (1) attracting and
    retaining a component of the mixture by contact with an ion exchange
    substance, or (2) selectively dissolving a component in one of two
    immiscible liquids to effect a separation; see Glossary.


CLS 423/140
TXT Processes under subclass 138 wherein a liquid or a slurry is treated to
    form a substance which is insoluble therein and comes out of solution, or
    wherein the composition of the liquid is changed so that one part of the
    mixture becomes insoluble therein, so the insoluble substance can be
    separated from the liquid and the materials which remain soluble in the
    liquid.

    (1)     Note.  Crystallization of a substance is included under this
    definition of insolubilization.


CLS 423/141
TXT Processes under subclass 140 wherein a chemical reaction takes place while
    the pressure on the mixture is either higher or lower than atmospheric; or
    while steam or water vapor is brought into contact with mixture.

    (1)     Note.  Pressure increase or decrease can be effected by any means,
    e.g., submerged blast of a gas into a slurry or liquid, pumping of the
    liquid or slurry, increase or decrease in pressure of the gas space above a
    liquid surface, etc.


CLS 423/142
TXT Processes under subclass 140 wherein the mixture is agitated or vibrated
    while a chemical reaction is taking place.

    (1)     Note.  Agitation or vibration can be effected by any means, e.g.,
    mechanical, sonic, fluid, etc.


CLS 423/143
TXT Processes under subclass 140 wherein a nitrogen containing compound is
    formed, reacted, or placed in contact with the mixture during part of the
    process.


CLS 423/144
TXT Processes under subclass 143 including the step of chemically forming a
    hydroxide, or a hydrate, or a compound having the carbonate (CO32-) radical.


CLS 423/145
TXT Processes under subclass 143 including the step of chemically forming a
    compound containing the sulfate (SO42-) radical.


CLS 423/146
TXT Processes under subclass 140 including the step of forming a compound
    containing the sulfate (SO42-) radical.


CLS 423/147
TXT Processes under subclass 146 including the step of chemically forming a
    hydroxide, or a hydrate or a compound containing a halogen element.


CLS 423/148
TXT Processes under subclass 138 in which solids are suspended in upward
    flowing gas or vapor, the upward force of the fluid on the solids is
    countered by gravity resulting in the formation of a zone in which the
    particles are compacted into a dense phase; see Glossary.

    (1)     Note.  The particles are in a state of hindered settling and the
    dense bed resembles a boiling liquid and above this dense bed some solids
    may be suspended in a dilute or dispersed phase.


CLS 423/149
TXT Processes under subclass 138 including the step of causing any of the iron
    group metals either as an element or a compound to be changed into a gas or
    a vapor; see Glossary.


CLS 423/150.1
TXT Leaching, washing, or dissolving:
    Processes under subclass 138 which include  removing or bringing into
    solution matter by leaching, washing, or dissolving out a portion of the
    mixture - see glossary.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140+,   for leaching processes which further include a step of forming an
    insoluble  substance in a liquid.


CLS 423/150.2
TXT Spent catalyst:
    Processes under subclass 150.1 that include   recovering values from
    catalysts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making,  subclasses  22+ for processes of treating in a liquid phase to
    regenerate or  rehabilitate a catalyst.


CLS 423/150.3
TXT Treatment of iron containing waste mixture:
    Processes under subclass 150.1  which  include treatment of iron containing
    product stream  that is a by-product or discarded product of another
    process (e.g., products of pickle liquor).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    531,    for removal or separation of impurities present in sulfuric acid or
    reactants that form sulfuric acid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclass 13      for
    treatment of mineral oil refining sludge.

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, particularly subclass 93 for
    methods of chemical etching including a step of recycling the etchant.


CLS 423/150.4
TXT Treatment of matte or nodule:
    Processes under subclass 150.1 in which  the  mixture is a matte or nodule
    containing material (i.e., in form of roasted or smelted ore) or relatively
    small lumps of mineral.


CLS 423/150.5
TXT Gas injected into mixture:
    Processes under subclass 150.4 which include a step of injecting matter
    that is gaseous at ambient temperature into the mixture.


CLS 423/150.6
TXT With electrolytic or magnetic separation:
    Process under subclass 150.1 which include a step of removing a component
    from the mixture by  electric current or magnetomotive force.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, appropriate subclasses for electrolytic
    processes.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses for processes of separating a mixture by magnetic action without
    a chemical reaction.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 222+ for processes of
    separation in liquids by magnetic attraction.


CLS 423/151
TXT Processes under subclass 138 including the step of changing a metal from a
    nonmagnetic to a magnetic form.

    (1)     Note.  Although many patents in this subclass are drawn to
    "magnetic roasting", i.e., roasting of Fe203 to form magnetic Fe304 (FeO.
    Fe203) other forms of conversion from nonmagnetic to magnetic forms may
    also be found.

    (2)     Note.  Magnetic separation may also be included in the processes
    classified in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148,    for similar processes wherein a fluidized bed is utilized.

    632+,   for patents wherein Fe3O4 is made from a relatively pure starting
    material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses, especially subclasses 38-40 and 212-232, for processes and
    apparatus for magnetic separating of materials, including ores, where no
    chemical change takes place.


CLS 423/152
TXT Processes under subclass 151 wherein the temperature or range thereof at
    which the conversion is made is recited specifically.


CLS 423/153
TXT Processes under subclass 138 including the step of removing at least some
    sulfur from the mixture.


CLS 423/154
TXT Processes under subclass 153 wherein the temperature or range thereof at
    which the sulfur removal takes place is specifically recited.


CLS 423/155
TXT Processes under subclass 1 wherein the compound comprises one of the metals
    belonging to the group known as the alkaline earth metals, i.e., magnesium,
    calcium, strontium or barium, or the Group 11A metals of the periodic
    system except for beryllium and radium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for a process of obtaining a radium compound from a mixture.

    111+,   for a process of obtaining a beryllium compound from a mixture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the destruction or containment of hazardous or toxic waste
    containing Mg, Ca, Sr, or Ba.


CLS 423/156
TXT Processes under subclass 155 which include the step of attracting a
    component or portion of the mixture by means of magnetic lines of force to
    effect a separation.


CLS 423/157
TXT Processes under subclass 155 which include the step of (1) attracting and
    retaining a component of the mixture by contact with an ion exchange
    substance or (2) selectively dissolving a component in one of two
    immiscible liquids to effect a separation; see Glossary.


CLS 423/157.2
TXT Phosphate rock or ore:
    Processes under subclass 155 wherein the initial mixture is a naturally
    formed aggregate material of earth in the form of rock or ore containing
    phosphate.


CLS 423/157.3
TXT Acid treatment:
    Processes under subclass 157.2  wherein the mixture is treated with an acid.


CLS 423/157.4
TXT Sulfating:
    Processes under subclass 157.3 in which the  treatment includes the step of
    chemically forming a compound containing the sulfate, (SO4)-2, radical.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are treatments with materials such
    as sulfuric acid and (SO4)-2 salts.


CLS 423/157.5
TXT Phosphorous or phosphorous compound containing waste as feed:Processes
    under subclass 155 wherein the mixture treated is a by-product or discarded
    product of another process.


CLS 423/158
TXT Processes under subclass 155 wherein a liquid or slurry is treated to form
    a substance which is insoluble therein and comes out of solution, or
    wherein the composition of the liquid is changed so that one part of the
    mixture becomes insoluble therein, so the insoluble substance can be
    separated from the liquid and the materials which remain soluble in the
    liquid.

    (1)     Note.  Cystallization of a substance is included under this
    definition of insolubilization.


CLS 423/159
TXT Processes under subclass 158 wherein a chemical reaction takes place while
    the pressure on the mixture is either higher or lower than atmospheric; or
    while steam or water vapor is brought into contact with the mixture.

    (1)     Note.  Pressure increase or decrease can be effected by any means,
    e.g., submerged blast of a gas into a liquid or a slurry, pumping of the
    liquid or slurry, increase or decrease on pressure of the gas space above a
    liquid surface.


CLS 423/160
TXT Processes under subclass 158 wherein the mixture is agitated or vibrated
    while a chemical reaction is taking place.

    (1)     Note.  Agitation or vibration can be effected by any means, e.g.,
    fluid, mechanical or sonic, etc.


CLS 423/161
TXT Processes under subclass 158 in which a specific particle size is either
    employed or formed.

    (1)     Note.  The particle size may be specified in any way, e.g., mesh
    size, dimension, etc., and may be formed or employed in any process step
    prior, during or subsequent, to a chemical reaction.


CLS 423/162
TXT Processes under subclass 158 including the step of chemically forming a
    compound which contains the nitrate (NO3-) radical or the ammonium (NH4+)
    radical.


CLS 423/163
TXT Processes under subclass 158 including the step of chemically forming a
    compound containing a halogen.


CLS 423/164
TXT Processes under subclass 158 including the step of chemically forming a
    hydroxide or a hydrate.


CLS 423/165
TXT Processes under subclass 158 including the step of chemically forming a
    compound having the carbonate (CO32-) radical.


CLS 423/166
TXT Processes under subclass 158 including the step of chemically forming a
    compound having the sulfate (SO42-) radical.


CLS 423/167.1
TXT Treating asbestos:
    Processes under subclass 155 wherein the  mixture treated has asbestos, a
    native  magnesium calcium silicate (e.g., chrysotile, crocidolite and
    amosite).


CLS 423/168
TXT Processes under subclass 155 wherein a combustible fuel material is mixed
    with the raw or original mixture.


CLS 423/169
TXT Processes under subclass 155 wherein the original mixture includes
    magnesium and calcium and wherein each is separated from the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158+,   for processes of separating magnesium and calcium from each other
    by forming an insoluble substance in a liquid.


CLS 423/170
TXT Processes under subclass 155 in which the original mixture contains a metal
    sulfate.


CLS 423/171
TXT Processes under subclass 170 wherein at least some of the water of
    hydration is removed from gypsum (CaSO4 2H2O) by applying heat.

    (1)     Note.  Usually gypsum or calcium sulfate dehydrate (Ca SO4.2H2O) is
    calcined to obtain plaster of Paris or calcium sulfate hemihydrate
    (CaSO4.1/2H2O).


CLS 423/172
TXT Processes under subclass 171 in which the heat for removing the water of
    hydration is supplied by steam or water vapor, or the particular heating
    temperature, or range thereof, is specified.


CLS 423/173
TXT Processes under subclass 155 wherein the original mixture contains the
    carbonate of an alkaline earth metal.

    (1)     Note.  Limestone, magnetite, oyster shells, etc., are assumed to be
    impure since they are naturally occurring carbonates.  Patents which claim
    treating calcium carbonate which is disclosed as being limestone, for
    example, are classified here. Processes for treating dolomite or oyster
    shells are classified here when no separation of the calcium and magnesium
    from each other is made.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169,    for treating impure carbonates, such as dolomite, to separate
    magnesium and calcium from each other, and subclass 167, for treating
    phosphate rock which contains some calcium carbonate.


CLS 423/174
TXT Processes under subclass 173 including the step of chemically forming
    calcium carbide (CaC2).


CLS 423/175
TXT Processes under subclass 173 which include the step of heating the impure
    carbonate.

    (1)     Note.  The end result of calcining an impure carbonate is usually
    the oxide due to driving off the carbon dioxide (CO2).


CLS 423/176
TXT Processes under subclass 175 wherein the mixture is subjected to a pressure
    below atmospheric or the heat is supplied by steam or water vapor.


CLS 423/177
TXT Processes under subclass 175 including the step of agitating or vibrating
    the mixture while it is being heated or in which a particular heating
    temperature or range thereof is specified.


CLS 423/178
TXT Processes under subclass 155 wherein the original mixture contains a
    halogen or sulfur.


CLS 423/179
TXT Processes under subclass 1 wherein the compound comprises one of the metals
    belonging to the group known as the alkali metals, i.e., lithium, sodium,
    potassium, rubidium or cesium or the metals of Group 1A of the periodic
    system except for francium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the destruction or containment of hazardous or toxic waste
    being volatilized and containing Li, Na, K, Rb, and Cs.


CLS 423/179.5
TXT Lithium:

    Processes under subclass 179 wherein the metal has atomic number 3.


CLS 423/180
TXT Processes under subclass 179 wherein the mixture is an amalgam or another
    alloy of two or more metals.

    (1)     Note.  Amalgams and alloys are considered mixtures for the purposes
    of this class.


CLS 423/181
TXT Processes under subclass 179 which include the step of (1) attracting and
    retaining a component of the mixture by contact with an ion exchange
    substance or (2) selectively dissolving a component in one of two
    immiscible liquids to effect a separations; see Glossary.


CLS 423/182
TXT Processes under subclass 179 in which the alkali metal is contained in a
    solution used in a process, and has become ineffective to properly function
    in such a process because of dilution, impurities or other reason, and the
    solution is then regenerated or rehabilitated to approximately its original
    state or condition.

    (1)     Note.  The purpose of the processes classified here is merely
    regeneration. A process for another purpose which includes the
    subcombination of regenerating a solution is classified with the more
    comprehensive process. The solutions treated here are generally those used
    to react with an organic substance such as wood pulp and petroleum.


CLS 423/183
TXT Processes under subclass 182 wherein the solution contains hydroxide (OH-)
    ions.


CLS 423/184
TXT Processes under subclass 179 wherein a liquid or slurry is treated to form
    a substance which is insoluble therein and comes out of solution, or
    wherein the composition of the liquid is changed so that one part of the
    mixture becomes insoluble therein, so the insoluble substance can be
    separated from the liquid and the materials which remain soluble in the
    liquid.

    (1)     Note.  Crystallization of a substance is included under this
    definition of insolubilization.


CLS 423/185
TXT Processes under subclass 184 including the step of (1) chemically forming a
    compound having fluorine therein, (2) using fluorine in any form as a
    reactant or (3) treating the mixture to remove fluorine therefrom.


CLS 423/186
TXT Processes under subclass 184 including the step of chemically forming a
    compound having the carbonate (CO32-) radical.


CLS 423/187
TXT Processes under subclass 186 wherein a compound containing nitrogen is
    formed, is reacted or is in contact with the mixture during at least part
    of the process.


CLS 423/188
TXT Processes under subclass 186 wherein a reaction takes place while the
    pressure on the mixture is either higher or lower than atmospheric, or
    wherein steam or water vapor is brought into contact with the mixture.

    (1)     Note.  Pressure increase or decrease can be effected by any means;
    e.g., submerged blast of a gas into a liquid or a slurry, pumping of the
    liquid or slurry, increase or decrease in pressure of the gas space above a
    liquid surface, etc.


CLS 423/189
TXT Processes under subclass 186 including the step of reacting carbon dioxide
    (CO2) with at least part of the mixture.


CLS 423/190
TXT Processes under subclass 189 wherein the original mixture contains a
    metallic chloride compound.


CLS 423/191
TXT Processes under subclass 186 including the step of chemically forming a
    compound containing a halogen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185,    for similar processes wherein the halogen is fluorine.


CLS 423/192
TXT Processes under subclass 186 including the step of chemically forming a
    hydroxide or a hydrate.


CLS 423/193
TXT Processes under subclass 186 including the step of chemically forming a
    compound containing the sulfate (SO42-) radical.


CLS 423/194
TXT Processes under subclass 184 wherein a compound containing nitrogen is
    formed, is reacted, or is in contact with the mixture during at least part
    of the process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    187,    above for similar processes including carbonation.


CLS 423/195
TXT Processes under subclass 184 wherein a reaction takes place while the
    pressure on the mixture is either higher or lower than atmospheric; or
    wherein steam or water vapor is brought in contact with the mixture.

    (1)     Note.  Pressure increase or decrease can be be effected by any
    means, e.g., submerged blast of a gas into a liquid or a slurry, pumping of
    the liquid or slurry, increase or decrease in pressure of the gas space
    above a liquid surface, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188,    above for similar processes which include carbonation.


CLS 423/196
TXT Processes under subclass 184 in which a chemical reaction takes place while
    the mixture is agitated or vibrated.

    (1)     Note.  Agitation or vibration can be effected by any means, e.g.,
    fluid, mechanical or sonic etc.


CLS 423/197
TXT Processes under subclass 184 including the step of chemically forming a
    compound containing a halogen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185,    above for similar processes wherein the halogen is fluorine and
    subclass 191 for similar processes which include carbonation.


CLS 423/198
TXT Processes under subclass 184 including the step of chemically forming a
    hydroxide or a hydrate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    192,    for similar processes which include carbonation.


CLS 423/199
TXT Processes under subclass 184 including the step of chemically forming a
    compound having the sulfate radical (SO42-).


CLS 423/200
TXT Processes under subclass 179 including the step of causing an alkali metal
    in either the element or compound form to pass into a vapor; see Glossary.


CLS 423/201
TXT Processes under subclass 179 wherein the mixture is agitated or vibrated
    while being heated or while a reaction is occurring.

    (1)     Note.  Agitation or vibration may be effected by any means, e.g.,
    fluid, mechanical or sonic, etc.


CLS 423/202
TXT Processes under subclass 179 including the step of using a compound which
    yields hydrogen (H+) ions in solution and gives a pH of below 7, such as an
    acid or acid salt, e.g., NaHSO4, etc.


CLS 423/203
TXT Processes under subclass 179 wherein the reaction or heating takes place
    while the pressure on the mixture is either higher or lower than
    atmospheric, or wherein steam or water vapor is brought in contact with the
    mixture.

    (1)     Note.  Pressure increase or decrease can be effected by any means,
    e.g., submerged blast of a gas into a liquid or slurry, pumping of the
    liquid or slurry, increase or decrease in pressure of the gas space above a
    liquid surface, etc.


CLS 423/204
TXT Processes under subclass 203 wherein the original mixture contains an
    organic impurity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182+,   for a process which includes a step of regenerating or
    rehabilitating a solution, usually containing an organic impurity to obtain
    or recover alkali metal.


CLS 423/205
TXT Processes under subclass 203 including the step of dissolving out part of a
    solid, or chemically forming a substance while is soluble in water; see
    Glossary for leaching.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202,    for processes which include the step of leaching with an acidic
    substance.


CLS 423/206.1
TXT Mixture contains organic or carbonaceous impurity:
    Processes under subclass 179 wherein the original mixture has an organic or
    a carbon containing impurity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182+,   for processes which include regeneration of an alkali metal
    containing solution which also contains an organic impurity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclass 30.11 for processes
    intended to treat paper making liquor.


CLS 423/206.2
TXT Alkali carbonate from trona:
    Processes under subclass 206.1 wherein the original mixture contains trona;
    i.e., an ore characterized by containing sodium carbonate.


CLS 423/207
TXT Processes under subclass 206.1 including combusting the organic or
    carbonaceous impurity.


CLS 423/208
TXT Processes under subclass 179 including the step of dissolving out a portion
    of a solid with water as a solvent, or forming a substance which is soluble
    in water; see Glossary for leaching.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179,    for processes which include the step of leaching with water
    containing other materials, e.g., brine etc.

    202,    for processes which include the step of leaching with an acidic
    substance.

    205,    for processes which include leaching or forming a water soluble
    substance and additionally employ pressure, vacuum, or steam.


CLS 423/209
TXT Processes under subclass 179 including the step of chemically forming a
    compound having the carbonate (CO32-) radical.


CLS 423/210
TXT Processes under the class definition in which an initial gaseous or
    vaporous mixture is treated so as to remove therefrom or change to a
    different chemical form at least one of the components therein, resulting
    in a heterogeneous composition.

    (1)     Note.  As between coordinate subclasses distinguished by specified
    chemical components, the original placement of a patent is in the first
    appearing subclass providing for a component which has been chemically
    modified.

    (2)     Note.  A chemical reaction must be involved in the process.

    (3)     Note.  Wherever the recovery of a definite chemical compound or
    element as a product is claimed, original classification of the patent is
    in the subclass following subclass 248 which provides for the compound or
    element. However, where the claim does not include the step of separating
    the modified component, the patent is classified here even (210+) even
    though disclosed intent is to ultimately effect separation of the component.

    (4)     Note.  The mixture need not be entirely gaseous; it may contain
    entrained solids or liquids.  It must however be handled and distributed as
    a gas and must be in this form at the onset of the treatment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264,    for rendering an impurity ineffective in a process in which either
    the starting mixture is not gaseous, or if gaseous, the intent is to make a
    compound; see preceding notes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, appropriate subclasses, for processes
    of purifying a gaseous mixture or separating a constituent therefrom where
    no chemical reaction is involved in the separation or purification, per se.
     In this respect sorption on a solid (e.g., silica gel, charcoal etc.) or
    in water even of gases such as NH3,SO3, etc. which may form alkalis or
    acids with the water is considered to be a nonchemical separation proper
    for Class 95. However, adsorption on a basic or acidic solid, or absorption
    in acid or a base is considered to be a chemical reaction and proper for
    Class 423, subclasses 210+, unless the acid or base is the solvent for
    itself, i.e., hydrochloric acid for gaseous hydrogen chloride, sulfuric
    acid for sulfur trioxide, etc.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosive, subclass 23, for blasting methods which
    include procedures for fume control.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, subclass 108.4 for
    subject matter of that class drawn to control of the smoke or gas produced.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, appropriate subclasses for
    preparation and treatment of organic materials.

    431,    Combustion, for processes of burning exhaust gases where the intent
    is to use the gas as a fuel primarily and not to separate or purify the
    gas.  Note subclass 224 in Class 423 where combustion is used to purify or
    separate a gas.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for treatment of gaseous, hazardous, or toxic waste.


CLS 423/210.5
TXT Processes under subclass 210 in which the treatment includes the direct
    contact between the gaseous mixture and a material in the molten state.

    (1)     Note.  Molten material for this defines only those substance, which
    are solid at ambient conditions but have been rendered liquid by a change
    in conditions.


CLS 423/212
TXT Processes under subclass 210 in which the initial gaseous mixture is the
    exhaust from an internal combustion engine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 272-308 for exhaust gas treatment in
    cooperation with engine function.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 168+ for apparatus for purifying
    exhaust gases from an internal combustion engine in which apparatus a
    catalyst is employed.


CLS 423/213.2
TXT Processes under subclass 212, in which the material used to treat the
    gaseous mixture is in the solid-state and comprises a transition element,
    or compound thereof, and which functions to (1) modify a component, or (2)
    attract and retain a component, or (3) react with and chemically change a
    component.

    (1)     Note.  The transition elements are those having atomic numbers of
    21 through 30, 39 through 48, 57 through 80, 89 through 103.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212,    for a process of treating the gaseous which the treating material,
    if a solid catalyst, sorbent or reactant, does not contain a transition
    element.


CLS 423/213.5
TXT Processes under subclass 213.2 in which the transition element is one which
    appears in Group VIII of the Periodic Table.


CLS 423/213.7
TXT Processes under subclass 213.2 in which there are at least two serial
    treatments of the gaseous mixture, each treatment modifying or removing a
    component different than that affected by the other.


CLS 423/215.5
TXT Processes under subclass 210 in which the component removed is in the
    solid-state in the gaseous mixture.

    (1)     Note.  The solid component is usually particulate in form and may
    be foreign matter (e.g., dust), or a chemical  element or compound.

    (2)     Note.  The usual method of removing a solid component from a gas
    stream is by physical means, e.g., filtering, washing, deflecting,
    electrostatic precipitating, etc.  However, a chemical reaction is required
    with the solid component for placement of a patent in this Class 423; see
    search note following for separating a gaseous mixture by physical means
    only.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, appropriate subclasses, for separating
    a gas mixture by mere physical means, e.g., filtering, deflecting,
    electrostatic precipitating, washing with liquid, etc. where no chemical
    reaction is involved.


CLS 423/219
TXT Molecular oxygen or ozone component:

    Processes under subclass 210 in which the component is oxygen in a
    molecular form or ozone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210,    for processes for removing ozone from a gaseous mixture.

    217+,   for processes for removing molecular oxygen from atmospheric air.


CLS 423/220
TXT Processes under subclass 210 wherein the component is carbon dioxide (CO2)
    or hydrogen sulfide (H2S).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, for processes of separating carbon
    dioxide (CO2) or hydrogen sulfide (H2S) from a gaseous fluid mixture by
    physical means only.  See particularly subclasses 43+ for selective
    diffusion of gases, subclasses 90+ for solid sorption, and subclasses 149+
    for liquid contacting.


CLS 423/221
TXT Processes under subclass 220 in which the material used to treat the
    gaseous mixture comprises a thionate or thiosulfate

    compound (S2O32-).


CLS 423/222
TXT Processes under subclass 220 in which the material used to treat the
    gaseous mixture comprises sulfur dioxide or a solution thereof or a sulfite
    (SO32-) or bisulfite (HSO3-) compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    574+,   for processes including the step of reacting hydrogen sulfide with
    sulfur dioxide.


CLS 423/223
TXT Processes under subclass 220 in which the material used to treat the
    gaseous mixture comprises arsenic, phosphorus or boron or compounds thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Catalysts containing arsenic, boron or phosphorus are not
    included under this definition of reactant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230+,   for a process in which the gaseous mixture is treated with a
    catalyst or sorbent which may contain arsenic, phosphorous or boron.


CLS 423/224
TXT Processes under subclass 220 in which the component is removed or changed
    by causing (1) it to combine with oxygen, or to produce a flame, or (2) the
    augmentation of the valence number of an ion or atom thereof as the result
    of the loss of negative charges as electrons thereby making it more
    electropositive.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass is a process in which a sorbent
    containing the removed constituent is revivified or regenerated by treating
    with an oxidizing gas.  For such a step, see subclasses 221, 222, or 233.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 2+ for processes of burning a gas for use as
    a fuel.


CLS 423/225
TXT Processes under subclass 220 in which the material used to treat the
    gaseous mixture comprises solid particles of an oxide or hydroxide of a
    metal dispersed throughout a liquid vehicle.


CLS 423/226
TXT Processes under subclass 220 in which the material used to treat the
    gaseous mixture comprises an organic compound, at least in part.

    (1)     Note.  An organic compound under this definition is as defined in
    the definition of Class 260, Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, as qualified by
    (34) Note therein.

    (2)     Note.  The organic part may be present as the organic radical part
    of a compound or as the organic portion of a mixture of organic and
    inorganic materials.


CLS 423/227
TXT Processes under subclass 226 wherein the compound has an aromatic nucleus
    in which at least one of the hydrogen atoms has been replaced by a hydroxyl
    group.


CLS 423/228
TXT Processes under subclass 226 wherein the organic compound is one derived
    from ammonia by substituting an organic radical for at least one of the
    hydrogens.


CLS 423/229
TXT Processes under subclass 228 in which an aminoalcohol substituent is
    ethanol.


CLS 423/230
TXT Processes under subclass 220 in which the treating material is in the
    solid-state and functions to (1) modify a component, (2) attract and retain
    the component, or (3) react with and chemically change the constituent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223,    for a process in which the reactant contains arsenic, phosphorus or
    boron and may be in the solid-state.

    225,    for a process in which the solid sorbent, reactant or catalyst is
    used in the form of a suspension in a liquid in the process.


CLS 423/231
TXT Processes under subclass 230 in which the solid treating material includes
    an oxide or hydroxide of iron.


CLS 423/232
TXT Processes under subclass 220 in which the treating material comprises a
    carbonate (CO32-) or bicarbonate (HCO3-) compound in solution.


CLS 423/233
TXT Processes under subclass 232 in which the material is revivified after
    being used by being contacted with a gas to cause the constituent to be
    separated or removed therefrom so that the material may again be used to
    treat the gaseous mixture.


CLS 423/234
TXT Processes under subclass 220 in which the gaseous mixture in contacted with
    a treating material comprising the hydroxide of a metal or of ammonium, is
    solution.


CLS 423/235
TXT Processes under subclass 210 in which the component is molecular nitrogen
    or a nitrogen-containing compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217,    for a process of removing molecular nitrogen from atmospheric air.


CLS 423/236
TXT Processes under subclass 235 in which the component is a compound
    containing nitrogen and carbon atoms.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of such carbon containing nitrogen compounds are
    cyanogen chloride or hydrocyanic acid.


CLS 423/237
TXT Processes under subclass 235 in which the component is ammonia (NH3).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236,    for processes of separating ammonia from a gas mixture which also
    includes a carbon containing nitrogen compound (e.g., a mixture of ammonia
    and hydrogen cyanide).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation: Processes, for processes of separating ammonia from
    a gaseous fluid mixture by physical means only.  See particularly
    subclasses 43+ for selective diffusion of gases, subclasses 90+ for solid
    sorption, and subclasses 149+ for liquid contacting.


CLS 423/238
TXT Processes under subclass 237 in which the ammonia is removed or changed by
    means of a reactant in the liquid state.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    279+,   286+, 305+, 352+, 396, 420, 470+, 517, 545+, 593+, for processes of
    preparing an ammonium compound from a gas where it is clear that the main
    intent is to use the gas as the feedstock source of the ammonia and not to
    purify the gas.


CLS 423/239.1
TXT Utilizing solid sorbent, catalyst, or reactant:
    Process under subclass 235 in which the treating material is a solid and
    functions to (a) modify a component, (b) attract and retain a component, or
    (c) react with and chemically change a component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212,    for processes which remove nitrogenous components from internal
    engine exhaust.

    230,    for processes using a solid sorbent, catalyst, or reactant to
    separate carbon dioxide or hydrogen sulfide in a gaseous mixture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, for processes of separating nitrogen
    (N2) or nitrogen containing compounds from a gaseous fluid mixture by
    physical means only; particularly, subclasses 90+ for solid sorption, per
    se.


CLS 423/239.2
TXT Zeolite:
    Process under subclass 239.1 in which the treating material contains a
    zeolite.


CLS 423/240
TXT Processes under subclass 210 in which the component is a halogen containing
    material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, for processes of separating a halogen
    from a gaseous fluid mixture by physical means only. See particularly
    subclasses 43+ for selective diffusion of gases, subclasses 90+ for solid
    sorption, and subclasses 149+ for liquid contacting.


CLS 423/241
TXT Processes under subclass 240 in which the component is free or molecular
    halogen.

    (1)     Note.  The constituent must be initially present in the gaseous
    mixture in the free or molecular form may be removed as such, or may be
    combined prior to removal or discharge.


CLS 423/242.1
TXT Sulfur or sulfur containing component:
    Processes under subclass 210 in which the component is sulfur or a compound
    thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   for separation and purification of a gaseous mixture in which the
    sulfur is present as hydrogen sulfide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, for processes of separating sulfur (S)
    or a compound thereof from a gaseous fluid mixture by physical means only.
    See particularly subclasses 43+ for selective diffusion of gases,
    subclasses 90+ for solid sorption, and subclasses 149+ for liquid
    contacting.


CLS 423/242.2
TXT Utilizing reactant having organic portion to remove or modify sulfur or
    sulfur containing component:Process under subclass 242.1 wherein the sulfur
    or sulfur containing component is removed or changed by treatment with a
    reactant, a portion of which is an organic compound radical.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, appropriate subclasses for processes of physically
    separating sulfur or a compound thereof from a gaseous mixture.


CLS 423/242.3
TXT Organic acid:
    Process under subclass 242.2 wherein the reactant is an organic acid (i.e.,
    a compound containing  -COOH).


CLS 423/242.4
TXT Alcohol, arylhydroxide, or polyol:
    Process under subclass 242.2 wherein the organic portion is an alcohol, an
    aryl radical, or an organic radical having one or a plurality of  hydroxyl
    groupings (i.e., (OH)-1).


CLS 423/242.5
TXT Sugar:
    Process under subclass 242.2 wherein the  organic portion is a radical from
    a sweet carbohydrate, having a general formula of CNH2NON or CNH2N-2ON-1
    (e.g., sucrose).


CLS 423/242.6
TXT Heterocyclic:
    Process under subclass 242.2 wherein the reactant contains an organic ring
    portion having a dissimilar atom (e.g., S or N) in the ring.


CLS 423/242.7
TXT Amine:
    Process under subclass 242.2 wherein the  nitrogen containing reactant is
    an amine (i.e., NR3  grouping wherein at least one  of the R groups is an
    organic radical).


CLS 423/243.01
TXT Utilizing aqueous reactant to remove or modify sulfur containing
    component:Process under subclass 242.1 wherein the sulfur or sulfur
    containing component is removed or changed by treatment with a reactant
    dissolved in or contained in water (e.g., solution or slurry).


CLS 423/243.02
TXT And addition of gaseous reactant:
    Process under subclass 243.01 wherein  a reactant is added that is in a
    gaseous state at ambient condition (e.g., NH3, Cl2).

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are those liquid reactants that
    have been formed by dissolved gases such as NH4OH that have no specifically
    recited undissolved  gaseous component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243.10, for those added components dissolved and forming ionic reactants,
    such as  NH4OHNH4+  OH- in alkali or alkaline earth slurry or solution.


CLS 423/243.03
TXT Oxygen:
    Process under subclass 243.02 wherein the  gaseous reactant includes
    elemental oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  Elemental oxygen includes oxygen combined only with itself,
    such as free oxygen (O2) and ozone (O3), but does not include oxygen
    chemically combined with any other elements or compounds such as carbon
    monoxide (CO).


CLS 423/243.04
TXT Ion separation step:
    Process under subclass 243.01 wherein the  treatment takes place by
    immediate reaction with a  product of an ionic separation process, (i.e.,
    dialysis, either by separation using a semipermeable membrane or by
    electrolysis).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 600+ for processes of
    ion separation where a reagent does not immediately react with a product of
    the separation wherein the intent is to  purify a liquid.


CLS 423/243.05
TXT With component added to inhibit corrosion or scaling of processing
    apparatus:Process under subclass 243.01 wherein the  treatment includes
    addition of a reactive component whose function is specified to restrain or
    stop corroding or scaling of processing equipment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 387+ for corrosion preventing or
    anti-corrosive agents.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 7+ for processes of maintaining an
    environment non-destructive to metal.


CLS 423/243.06
TXT Ammonium compound reactant:
    Process under subclass 243.01 wherein the reactant contains an ammonium
    (NH4)+1 radical.


CLS 423/243.07
TXT Transition metal or compound thereof reactant:
    Process under subclass 243.01 wherein the reactant is a transition metal or
    a compound thereof.


CLS 423/243.08
TXT Alkali or alkali earth compound reactant:
    Process under subclass 243.01 wherein the reactant is an  alkali or
    alkaline earth compound.


CLS 423/243.09
TXT Sulfite:
    Process under subclass 243.08 wherein the alkaline component contains a
    sulfite radical (SO3)-2.


CLS 423/243.1
TXT And additional ionic reactant:
    Process under subclass 243.08 wherein the reactant also contains a
    dissociated ionic reactant other than the alkali or the alkaline earth
    compound reactant.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are dissociated ionic components
    that take part in a reaction that removes or changes the sulfur containing
    component.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    265+,   for processes of using additives which do not take part in the
    reaction, but which serve to improve, protect, or  modify a product
    produced by a separate and distinct reaction.

    270+,   for additives specifically added when the product is sulfur
    trioxide.


CLS 423/243.11
TXT And subsequent reactive treatment to remove sulfur from spent
    reactant:Process under subclass 243.01 wherein the reactant, after removing
    or changing the sulfur or sulfur containing component from the gaseous
    mixture, is subjected to a further reactive treatment wherein sulfur or a
    sulfur containing component is removed from the reactant.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains processes for  removing or recovering
    a sulfur or sulfur containing component.

     SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, appropriate subclasses for processes of removing
    sulfur from a component which sulfur has been sorbed.


CLS 423/243.12
TXT Gaseous treatment:
    Process under subclass 243.11 wherein further reactive treatment is with a
    reactant in a gaseous state.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 59+ for denuding a solid by use of a
    non-reactive sweep gas.


CLS 423/244.01
TXT Utilizing solid reactant or catalyst to remove or  modify sulfur or sulfur
    containing component:Process under subclass 242.1 wherein the sulfur  or
    sulfur containing component is removed or changed by treatment with a
    reactant or catalyst that is in a solid-state.


CLS 423/244.02
TXT Reactant or catalyst on support:
    Process under subclass 244.01 wherein the  reactant or catalyst is
    positioned in contact with a supporting material.


CLS 423/244.03
TXT Carbonaceous support:
    Process under subclass 244.02 wherein the  support is composed of a carbon
    containing material (e.g., activated carbon).


CLS 423/244.04
TXT Aluminosilicate support:
    Process under subclass 244.02 wherein the support is composed of a material
    containing a compound of aluminum, oxygen, and silicon.


CLS 423/244.05
TXT Reactant added to fuel for reaction in gas mixture:
    Process under subclass 244.01 wherein the reactant is added to a mixture
    consumed to produce energy.


CLS 423/244.06
TXT Transition metal or compound thereof reactant:
    Process under subclass 244.01 wherein the  reactant is a transition metal
    or a compound thereof.


CLS 423/244.07
TXT Alkali or alkaline earth compound reactant:
    Process under subclass 244.01 wherein the reactant is a compound that
    contains an alkali metal or alkaline-earth metal.


CLS 423/244.08
TXT Carbonate:
    Process under subclass 244.07 wherein the compound contains a carbonate
    radical (i.e., (CO3)-2).


CLS 423/244.09
TXT Catalyst:
    Process under subclass 244.01 wherein the sulfur or  sulfur containing
    component is treated with a catalyst present.


CLS 423/244.1
TXT Transition metal or compound thereof catalyst:
    Process under subclass 244.09 wherein the catalyst includes a transition
    metal or a compound thereof.


CLS 423/244.11
TXT Zeolite containing:
    Process under subclass 244.09 wherein the catalyst contains a zeolite.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, appropriate subclasses for zeolites specifically structured to
    catalyze a component.


CLS 423/245.1
TXT Organic component:

    Process under subclass 210 wherein the component is an organic compound, at
    least in part.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 226 (1) Note for the structural requirement of
    an organic compound.

    (2)     Note.  The phase of the modifying or removing agent that reacts
    with the organic component is what determines whether classification is
    proper in subclass 245.1, subclass 245.2, or substrate wetted with an
    aqueous hydrogen peroxide removing agent is properly classified in subclass
    245.2.  Removing agents comprising gases or solids dissolved in liquids are
    considered to be liquid reactants.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, for processes of separating an organic
    compound from a gaseous fluid mixture by physical means only.  See
    particularly subclasses 43+ for selective diffusion of gases, subclasses
    90+ for solid sorption, and subclasses 149+ for liquid contacting.


CLS 423/245.2
TXT Utilizing liquid reactant:

    Process under subclass 245.1 wherein a liquid reactant is utilized to
    modify or remove the organic component.


CLS 423/245.3
TXT By burning or catalytically combusting component:

    Process under subclass 245.1 wherein the organic component is either burned
    or catalytically combusted using oxygen, air, ozone, or a mixture thereof.


CLS 423/246
TXT Processes under subclass 210 wherein the component is carbon monoxide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212+,   for a process for separating or removing constituents from the
    exhaust of an internal combustion engine, one of which constituents may be
    carbon monoxide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, for processes of separating carbon
    monoxide (CO) from a gaseous fluid mixture by physical means only.  See
    particularly subclasses 43+ for selective diffusion of gases, subclasses
    90+ for solid sorption, and subclasses 149+ for liquid contacting.


CLS 423/247
TXT Processes under subclass 246 in which the treating material is in the
    solid-state and functions to (1) modify a component, (2) attract and retain
    a component or (3) react with and chemically change a constituent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212+,   for a process in which a solid sorbent, catalyst or reactant is
    used to separate or remove carbon monoxide from the exhaust of an internal
    combustion engine.

    223,    for a process of treating a gaseous mixture to separate or purify
    carbon dioxide or hydrogen sulfide with a reactant containing boron,
    phosphorus or arsenic, which reactant may be in the solid-state.

    230+,   239 and 244 for processes for separating or purifying a gaseous
    mixture by using a solid catalyst, sorbent or reactant where a constituent
    is carbon dioxide or hydrogen sulfide, nitrogen or a nitrogenous compound
    or sulfur or a compound thereof respectively.


CLS 423/248
TXT Processes under subclass 210 wherein the component is hydrogen in molecular
    form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246+,   for processes of removing or separating carbon monoxide from a
    mixture thereof with hydrogen thus leaving pure hydrogen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, for processes of separating hydrogen
    from a gaseous fluid mixture by physical means only.  See particularly
    subclasses 43+ for selective diffusion of gases, subclasses 90+ for solid
    sorption, and subclasses 149+ for liquid contacting.


CLS 423/249
TXT Products under the class definition, or processes for making such products,
    which exhibit spontaneous nuclear disintegration with emission of
    radioactive particles and which comprises (1) the compound of an element
    which is naturally unstable and has an atomic number of at least 84, (2)
    compound of an element which has been treated to render an isotope thereof
    radioactive or (3) a nonmetallic element which is naturally or has been
    treated to make it or an isotope thereof radioactive; see Glossary.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass will be found radon, astatine, or compounds
    thereof.

    (2)     Note.  Compounds, of the trans-actinide elements i.e., those having
    atomic numbers greater than 103, will be found in this group of subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  Patents wherein the claims are directed to making an element
    radioactive or to making a different isotope of a radioactive element are
    classified in Class 376, Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems,
    and Elements, subclasses 156+ even when the element is in compound form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for a process of treating a mixture to recover therefrom a compound
    of a radioactive metal.


CLS 423/250
TXT Products or processes under subclass 249 in which the compound comprises an
    element having an atomic number of 93 or greater.


CLS 423/251
TXT Products or processes under subclass 250 in which the compound comprises
    plutonium.


CLS 423/252
TXT Products or processes under subclass 249 in which the compound comprises
    thorium.


CLS 423/253
TXT Products or processes under subclass 249 which the compound comprises
    uranium.


CLS 423/254
TXT Products or processes under subclass 253 in which the compound consists of
    uranium and only one other elements.


CLS 423/255
TXT Products or processes under subclass 254 in which the other element is
    hydrogen.


CLS 423/256
TXT Products or processes under subclass 254 in which the other element is
    carbon.


CLS 423/257
TXT Products or processes under subclass 254 in which the other element is
    chlorine.


CLS 423/258
TXT Products or processes under subclass 254 in which the other element is
    fluorine.


CLS 423/259
TXT Products or processes under subclass 258 in which the binary compound is
    uranium tetrafluoride (UF4).


CLS 423/260
TXT Products or processes under subclass 254 in which the other element is
    oxygen.


CLS 423/261
TXT Products or processes under subclass 260 in which the binary compound is
    uranium dioxide (UO2).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for a process of treating a mixture containing uranium to recover
    uranium tetraoxide or peroxide, UO4) which process includes the step of
    precipitating a compound out of solution.


CLS 423/262
TXT Products or processes under the class definition in which the product is a
    noble or inert gas having atomic nos. 2, 10, 18, 36, or 54, or a compound
    thereof; the gas being a member of the "zero" group of the periodic table,
    having no valency and combining with other elements only with difficulty.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249,    for radon (atomic no. 86), which is the radioactive member of the
    noble or inert gases, or a compound thereof.


CLS 423/263
TXT Products or processes under the class definition in which the product is a
    compound of a metal which is a member of the "rare earth" or lanthanide
    series and which has an atomic number of 21, 39, or 57 through 71.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21.1+,  for a process of treating a mixture containing a rare earth metal
    to obtain a compound of the metal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the destruction or containment of hazardous or toxic waste
    containing rare earth or lanthanide elements (atomic numbers 21, 39, or
    57-71).


CLS 423/264
TXT Processes under the class definition in which a compound whose color is, or
    would be, adversely affected by an impurity therein, is treated to
    chemically modify the impurity and thus improve the color.

    (1)     Note.  Sometimes it is not economically feasible to remove an
    impurity from a compound which is to be used as a pigment, and so the
    impurity is changed to a nondetrimental form.

            For example, Fe2O3 is changed to Fe O which does not effect the
    color characteristics of titanium dioxide as much as Fe2O3 does.


CLS 423/265
TXT Products or processes under the class definition comprising a compound or a
    nonmetallic element physically interrelated with another  substance which
    serves to improve, protect or modify the product, which substance does not
    take part in the reaction, which makes the product, but is added to the
    reaction or to the product or is made by a separate and distinct reaction.

    (1)     Note.  A catalyst or other reaction promoter is excluded under this
    definition of additive.

    (2)     Note.  If in a chemical reaction a reagent is added to combine with
    a portion of the reactants to form an additive by a reaction other than
    that which makes the desired product, classification is proper for this
    group of subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  A substance added to a feedstock to control or modify the
    product and is carried along in the reaction to be mixed with the product
    is considered to be additive for this group of subclasses.  The final
    mixture is not considered to be proper for Class 106, Compositions: Coating
    or Plastic, or Class 252, Compositions unless the disclosure is clear and
    specific that the product is intended to be a mixture or composition for a
    specific utility or use.  For example, in making carbon black various
    substances are added to the feedstock to be carried along to the final
    product and to modify the properties of the carbon black, e.g., oil
    absorption, crystal structure, etc. These patents are properly classified
    in this Class 423, subclasses 265+.  However, the modified carbon black
    when disclosed for use as a filler for rubber articles is proper for Class
    106, Compositions:  Coating and Plastic, subclasses 400+.

    (4)     Note.  Processes of preventing corrosion of metal containers or
    receptacles by a Class 423 product by admixing an anti-corrosion additive
    therewith are properly classified in Class 423, subclass 269, since this is
    the mere use of a product to which an anti-corrosion additive has been
    added, and since corrosion of the metal causes corrosion of the product.
    See (1) Note in Class 422, Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting,
    Deodorizing, Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 7.

    (5)     Note.  Mixing ingredients to form a composition which is in better
    form for pyrometallurgy, even though some chemical reaction is involved,
    excluded from this Class 423 and will be found in Class 75.

    (6)     Note.  Class lines A.  A Class 423 product, per se, is classified
    in Class 423 regardless of its utility.

    B.      A Class 423 product admixed with an additive whose sole function
    (claimed or disclosed) is to otherwise perfect the product is classified in
    Class 423.

    C.      The process of making a Class 423 product and adding a preservative
    thereto is classified in Class 423; the process of merely adding a
    preservative to a Class 423 product is also classified in Class 423.

    D.      A Class 423 product admixed with a substance which has one utility
    other than preserving attributed thereto is classified in the class
    providing for such utility if such class exists; otherwise classification
    is proper in Class 252, Compositions.

    E.      A Class 423 product admixed with a substance which has plural
    utilities other than preserving attributed thereto, all of which are
    unclaimed and such utilities are subjects matter for different classes, is
    proper for Class 252, Compositions.

    F.      A Class 423 product admixed with a preserving substance and the
    mixture is disclosed or claimed as having an art use is classified in the
    class providing for such use, e.g., table salt is properly classified in
    Class 426, Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    a fertilizer comprising a phosphate and a preservative is proper for Class
    71, Chemistry:  Fertilizers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 101+ for bleaching processes under the
    Class 8 definition, and especially Class 107 for processes using specific
    chemicals.

    71,     Chemistry:  Fertilizers, see (6) Note. Par. F. above.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating and Plastic, see (3) Note above.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 186.1+ for oxidative bleaching
    compositions, per se, and 397+ for anti oxidant and chemical change
    inhibiting compositions, per se.  See also (6) Note.  Par. E. above.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for (a) carbon compounds of known
    and undetermined constitution.  In the situation wherein it is uncertain
    whether the compound is prepared by reacting two or more reactants, the
    original will be classified in Class 260 in accordance with the rule set
    forth in the Class 260 Definition (Page 260-2) (b) essential oils of
    undetermined constitution and their reaction products.  See subclass 236.6.
    Single source essential oils of known constitution combined with plural
    ingredients having a claimed, or solely disclosed food use are classified
    in Class 426, Food or Edible Material: Processes, Compositions, and
    Products. (c) extracts of both plant and animal origin.  Same rule applys
    as in (b) above.  (d) proteins, oils and fats from a single source.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, see (6) Note, paragraph C above and definitions
    of Class 422.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body-Treating Compositions, subclass 62,
    for bleach compositions, per se, to be used on live hair or skin, and
    subclasses 613+ for compositions under the 424 class definitions containing
    peroxide as an active ingredient.


CLS 423/266
TXT Products or processes under subclass 265 in which the compound or
    nonmetallic element has a crystalline form and the substance serves to
    attain a desired crystal shape or size or to prevent change of the desired
    shape or size.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, subclasses 295+ for processes of
    crystallization which involve no chemical reaction, in particular,
    subclasses 300+ for those processes in which an additive is employed.


CLS 423/267
TXT Products or processes under subclass 265 in which the substance acts to
    prevent or reduce (1) the absorption of moisture into the mixture or (2)
    the cohering of individual particles into larger masses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 381+ for anti-caking agents in general.


CLS 423/268
TXT Products or processes under subclass 267 in which the substance is or
    includes an organic material.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 226 (1) Note for structural requirement of an
    organic compound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 384, for organic anti-caking agents, per se.


CLS 423/269
TXT Products or processes under subclass 265 which the substance prevents or
    inhibits the compound or non metallic element from eroding or eating away
    materials external to the product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating and Plastic, especially subclass 14.05, for
    compositions of the Class 106 type having a specific corrosion resisting
    effect beyond mere coating.

    148,    Metal Treating, especially subclasses 240+ for methods of
    inhibiting corrosion of metals which include coating the metal with a
    substance which reacts with the metal.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 387+, for corrosion inhibiting
    compositions, per se.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 1+ for processes of preventing
    corrosion not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 423/270
TXT Products or processes under subclass 265 in which the product is sulfur
    trioxide (SO3).

    (1)     Note.  The substance is usually added for the purpose of preventing
    polymerization of the SO3.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    532+,   for sulfur trioxide, per se, and processes for its manufacture.


CLS 423/271
TXT Products or processes under subclass 270 in which the substance is a metal,
    boron or silicon, or a compound thereof.


CLS 423/272
TXT Products or processes under subclass 265 which the product is hydrogen
    peroxide (H2O2).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    584+,   for hydrogen peroxide and methods for making it.


CLS 423/273
TXT Products or processes under subclass 272 in which the substance is a metal,
    boron or silicon, or a compound thereof.


CLS 423/274
TXT Products or processes under subclass 265 in which the substance is
    interrelated as a (1) covering over at least part of the surface of the
    product or (2) a binder causing the particles of the product to adhere to
    one another.

    (1)     Note.  The coating or binder generally does not interfere, to any
    undue extent, with the reactivity of the product when such reactivity is
    desired.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    for briquetting or otherwise shaping the compositions of this subclass.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body-Treating Compositions, subclasses 16+,
    for coated compositions meeting the Class 424 definition.

    427,    Coating Processes, for general processes of coating.  The process
    of making and coating a Class 423 product is properly classified in Class
    423 where the purpose of the coating is merely to preserve or stabilize the
    product.  The process of coating a Class 423 product is proper for Class
    427, and a coated Class 423 product is proper for Class 423.


CLS 423/275
TXT Products or processes under subclass 265 in which the substance is a metal,
    boron or silicon, or a compound thereof.


CLS 423/276
TXT Products or processes under the class definition wherein the product is
    boron or a compound thereof.


CLS 423/277
TXT Products or processes under subclass 276 wherein the boron compound
    includes oxygen.


CLS 423/278
TXT Products or processes under subclass 277 wherein the compound contains only
    the elements boron and oxygen.


CLS 423/279
TXT Products or processes under subclass 277 wherein the compound contains only
    boron, oxygen and either a metal or the ammonium radical.

    (1)     Note.  Under this definition the ammonium (NH4+) radical is
    considered as only 1 element of the ternary compound; see (2) Note of the
    main class definition.


CLS 423/280
TXT Processes under subclass 279 which includes the use of at least one
    reactant in the liquid state or in solution.

    (1)     Note.  Included under the definition of dissolved or liquid
    reactant is a slurry of solids in a liquid.


CLS 423/281
TXT Processes under subclass 280 in which the reactant comprises a peroxide.


CLS 423/282
TXT Processes under subclass 280 in which the reactant comprises a compound
    containing the element carbon.


CLS 423/283
TXT Products or processes under subclass 277 wherein the compound contains only
    the three elements, boron, oxygen and hydrogen.


CLS 423/284
TXT Products or processes under subclass 276 in which the compound also
    contains nitrogen and hydrogen.


CLS 423/285
TXT Products or processes under subclass 284 in which the compound contains
    only the three elements boro, hydrogen and nitrogen.


CLS 423/286
TXT Products or processes under subclass 276 in which the compound also
    contains hydrogen and either a metal or the ammonium  (NH4+).


CLS 423/287
TXT Processes under subclass 286 which include the use of a halogen containing
    compound as a reactant.


CLS 423/288
TXT Processes under subclass 286 which include the use of an oxygen containing
    compound as a reactant.


CLS 423/289
TXT Products and processes under subclass 276 in which the compound contains
    boron and only one other element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278,    for binary compounds containing boron and oxygen and methods of
    making such compounds.


CLS 423/290
TXT Products of processes under subclass 289 wherein the other element is
    nitrogen.


CLS 423/291
TXT Products or processes under subclass 289 wherein the other element is
    carbon.


CLS 423/292
TXT Products or processes under subclass 289 wherein the other element is a
    halogen.


CLS 423/293
TXT Products or processes under subclass 292 wherein the halogen is fluorine.


CLS 423/294
TXT Products or processes under subclass 289 wherein the other element is
    hydrogen.


CLS 423/295
TXT Processes under subclass 294 which include the step of reacting a metal
    containing hydride or an organic derivative thereof.


CLS 423/296
TXT Processes under subclass 294 which include the step of reacting elemental
    or uncombined hydrogen.


CLS 423/297
TXT Products or processes under subclass 289 wherein the other element is
    titanium, vanadium chromium, zirconium, niobium, molybdenum, hafnium,
    tantalum, or tungsten, commonly known as a refractory metal.


CLS 423/298
TXT Products or processes under subclass 276 wherein the product is elemental
    boron.


CLS 423/299
TXT Products or processes under the class definition wherein the product is
    phosphorus or a compound thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the destruction or containment of hazardous or toxic waste
    containing, halogen, oxygen, sulfur, metal, and phosphorus.


CLS 423/300
TXT Products or processes under subclass 299 wherein the product contains a
    halogen.


CLS 423/301
TXT Products or processes under subclass 300 wherein the halogen is fluorine.


CLS 423/302
TXT Products or processes under subclass 299 wherein the product contains
    nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  Nitrogen in the ammonium radical (NH4+) is not considered
    nitrogen for the purpose of this subclass; see (2) Note in the class
    definition.


CLS 423/303
TXT Products or processes under subclass 299 wherein the product contains
    sulfur.


CLS 423/304
TXT Products or processes under subclass 299 wherein the product contains
    oxygen.


CLS 423/305
TXT Products or processes under subclass 304 wherein the product also contains
    a metal or the ammonium (NH4+) radical.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237+,   for a process of preparing ammonium phosphate from the ammonia in
    gas where the mains intent is to purify the gas, the recovery of the
    product being of secondary importance.


CLS 423/306
TXT Products or processes under subclass 305 wherein the product contains two
    metals or a metal and the ammonium (NH4+) radical.


CLS 423/307
TXT Products or processes under subclass 305 wherein the product also contains
    hydrogen.


CLS 423/308
TXT Products or processes under subclass 307 wherein the product contains the
    orthophosphate (PO43-) radical.


CLS 423/309
TXT Processes under subclass 308 which include the step of reacting phosphoric
    acid or its anhydride.


CLS 423/310
TXT Processes under subclass 309 which include the step of reacting ammonia.


CLS 423/311
TXT Products or processes under subclass 305 wherein the product contains the
    orthophosphate (PO43-) radical.


CLS 423/312
TXT Products or processes under subclass 311 wherein the product contains
    lithium, sodium, potassium, rudidium, cesium or the ammonium (NH4+) radical.


CLS 423/313
TXT Processes under subclass 312 which includes the step of reacting phosphoric
    acid.


CLS 423/314
TXT Products or processes under subclass 305 wherein the product contains the
    meta-phosphate (PO3-), (P2O62-) or (P6O186) radical.


CLS 423/315
TXT Products or processes under subclass 305 wherein the product contains the
    triphosphate (P3O105-) or the tetraphosphate (P4O136-) radical.


CLS 423/316
TXT Products or processes under subclass 304 wherein the product contains
    phosphorus, oxygen and hydrogen, only.


CLS 423/317
TXT Products or processes under subclass 316 wherein the product is
    orthophosphoric acid (H3PO4).


CLS 423/318
TXT Processes under subclass 317 which include the step of reacting silicon or
    carbon, or a compound thereof.


CLS 423/319
TXT Processes under subclass 317 which include the step of reacting an acid
    with phosphate rock.


CLS 423/320
TXT Processes under subclass 319 in which the acid includes sulfuric acid
    (H2SO4).


CLS 423/321.1
TXT Purification or recovery:
    Process under subclass 317 wherein the product is separated from impurities
    or undesired foreign matter.


CLS 423/321.2
TXT Organic solvent extraction:
    Process under subclass 321.1 wherein separation is by dissolution in an
    organic liquid.

    (1)     Note.  Dissolution may be of product or impurity.


CLS 423/322
TXT Products or processes under subclass 299 wherein the product is elemental
    phosphorus.

    (1)     Note.  Changing yellow phosphorus to red phosphorus involves a
    chemical reaction since the water of hydration is changed, see (9) Note in
    the class definition.


CLS 423/323
TXT Processes under subclass 322 which include the step of reacting a material
    which contains a phosphate (PO43-) radical, e.g., phosphate rock, etc.


CLS 423/324
TXT Products and processes under the class definition wherein the product is
    silicon or a compound thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Silicon and silicon dioxide are arbitrarily considered to be
    glass.  A process of chemically manufacturing silicon or silicon dioxide
    combined with significant shaping or heat treatment will be found in either
    Class 438, Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, or Class 65, Glass
    Manufacturing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the destruction or containment of hazardous or toxic waste
    containing silicon, oxygen, and  metals.


CLS 423/325
TXT Products or processes under subclass 324 wherein the product contains
    oxygen.


CLS 423/326
TXT Products or processes under subclass 325 wherein the product also contains
    at least one metal.


CLS 423/327.1
TXT Aluminum containing:
    Products or processes under subclass 326 in which the metal is aluminum.


CLS 423/327.2
TXT Mullite:
    Products and processes under subclass 327.1 in which the product is mullite
    (i.e., 3Al2O3 2SiO2).


CLS 423/328.1
TXT Aluminosilicate:
    Product or processes under subclass 327.1 in which the product is an
    aluminum silicate in combination with a metal oxide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118,    for processes of treating mixtures to obtain an aluminosilicate.


CLS 423/328.2
TXT Crystalline:
    Products and processes under subclass 328.1 in which the products have
    geometrically arranged plane faces or surfaces and a symmetrical internal
    structure (e.g., pillared or phyllosilicates).

    (1)     Note.  Crystalline aluminosilicates, such as sorbents, are to be
    considered products for Class 423, unless mixed with an additive whose
    function is not solely to perfect the product.  See (6) Note to the
    definition of subclass 265.

    (2)     Note. Three dimension crystalline structural products that are
    zeolites are excluded from this subclass.  See (2) Note to the definition
    of subclass 700.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    700,    for products and processes wherein the product is a     zeolite.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, subclasses 141+ for ceramic compositions
    and processes for producing such.


CLS 423/328.3
TXT Mica:
    Products and processes under subclass 328.2  in which the geometrical
    arrangement has a lamina structure which can be split into thin sheets
    (e.g., biovite, muscovite, phlogopite, zinnwaldite).


CLS 423/329.1
TXT X-ray diffraction pattern:
    Products under subclass 328.1 wherein the aluminosilicate structure is
    identified by a  diffraction grating produced by  an X-ray passing through
    it.

    (1)     Note.  Original patents in this subclass require that an X-ray
    diffraction pattern be referenced in the claim.


CLS 423/330.1
TXT Gelling or precipitation:
    Processes under subclass 328.1 which include either forming a  gel or
    causing a substance to come out of solution.


CLS 423/331
TXT Products or processes under subclass 326 in which the product contains
    magnesium, calcium, strontium or barium (i.e., the alkaline earth metals).


CLS 423/332
TXT Products or processes under subclass 326 in which the product contains
    lithium, sodium, potassium, rubidium or cesium (i.e. an alkali metal).


CLS 423/333
TXT Processes under subclass 332 which include the step of causing a substance
    to become insoluble and come out of solution or to become a jelly like mass
    in a solution, the solution being that of the silicate of an alkali metal.


CLS 423/334
TXT Processes under subclass 332 which include the step of reacting the alkali
    metal with silica (silicon dioxide) while heating.


CLS 423/335
TXT Products or processes under subclass 325 in which the product is silicon
    dioxide (Si O2).


CLS 423/336
TXT Processes under subclass 335 which include the step of hydrolyzing a
    silicon compound while in the vapor phase.


CLS 423/337
TXT Processes under subclass 335 which include the step of causing (1) a
    volatile silicon compound to unite with oxygen or (2) an increase of
    electronegative elements or radicals in a volatile silicon compound.

    (1)     Note.  Combustion is a form of oxidation and is included under this
    definition.


CLS 423/338
TXT Processes under subclass 335 which include the step of gellation or forming
    a jelly like mass.


CLS 423/339
TXT Processes under subclass 335 which include the step of causing a substance
    to come out of solution or become insolubilized.


CLS 423/340
TXT Processes under subclass 335 which include the step of purifying silicon
    dioxide.


CLS 423/341
TXT Products or processes under subclass 324 wherein the product contains a
    halogen.


CLS 423/342
TXT Products or processes under subclass 341 in which the product is similar to
    a halogenated hydrocarbon in which a tetravalent silicon replaces the
    carbon atom; (silane is SiH4, trichlorosilane is SiHCl3).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    347,    for the binary silane compound.


CLS 423/343
TXT Processes under subclass 341 which include the step of causing a normally
    solid substance to pass into a gas or a vapor; see Glossary.


CLS 423/344
TXT Products or processes under subclass 324 wherein the product is a compound
    containing silicon and only one additional element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    335+,   for binary silicon and oxygen containing compounds.

    341+,   for halogen containing compounds which may be binary.


CLS 423/345
TXT Products or processes under subclass 344 wherein the additional element is
    carbon.


CLS 423/346
TXT Processes under subclass 345 which include the step of reacting carbon or a
    carbon containing compound with a silicon containing compound that is in
    the vapor phase.


CLS 423/347
TXT Products or processes under subclass 344 in which the additional element is
    hydrogen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    342,    for halogen derivatives of the binary silanes.


CLS 423/348
TXT Products or processes under subclass 324 wherein the product is elemental
    silicon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, especially subclasses 54+ for liquid phase
    epitaxial growth processes and subclasses 84+ for vapor phase growth
    processes.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing, particularly subclasses 478+
    for methods of depositing semiconductive silicon which is to function as an
    active region of a barrier layer device.


CLS 423/349
TXT Processes under subclass 348 wherein the starting materials include a
    silicon containing compound.


CLS 423/350
TXT Processes under subclass 349 which include the use of a reducing element,
    compound or composition to release the silicon from the compound.

    (1)     Note.  Heat is not a reducing "substance" for the purposes of this
    subclass.  If only heat is used to reduce the silicon containing compound
    the patent is classified in subclass 349 above.


CLS 423/351
TXT Products or processes under the class definition in which the product is
    nitrogen or a compound thereof, limited as follows: where the compound is
    an ammonium (NH4+) salt, the anion must contain a nitrogen atom.

    (1)     Note. Ammonium hydroxide (NH4OH) is included under this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217,    for the process of separating or obtaining nitrogen from
    atmospheric air where it is the intent to separate components of or purify
    the air.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the destruction or containment of hazardous or toxic  waste
    containing nitrogen, oxygen, halogen, and metals.


CLS 423/352
TXT Products or processes under subclass 351 wherein the product is ammonia
    (NH3), or ammonium hydroxide (NH4OH).


CLS 423/353
TXT Processes under subclass 352 in which the product is made from the nitride
    of a metal or of silicon.

    (1)     Note.  Where a metal or metal compound is contacted alternately
    with free nitrogen and free hydrogen and ammonia is produced, it is assumed
    that the nitrogen contact produces a nitride which is converted to ammonia
    in the later contact with hydrogen, and classification in this subclass is
    proper.


CLS 423/354
TXT Processes under subclass 352 in which an inorganic compound containing
    carbon and nitrogen is also made.

    (1)     Note.  The inorganic compound is usually a cyanide or cyanamide.

    (2)     Note.  The manufacture of the inorganic compound may precede or be
    similtananeous with the manufacture of the ammonia.


CLS 423/355
TXT Processes under subclass 352 which include the step of hydrolyzing an
    inorganic compound containing carbon and nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  The inorganic compound is usually a cyanide or cyanamide.

    (2)     Note.  The hydrolyzing agent is usually steam.


CLS 423/356
TXT Processes under subclass 352 in which the product is made from a compound
    containing the ammonium (NH4+) radical.

    (1)     Note.  The processes usually involve contact of the compound with
    steam.

    (2)     Note.  The nitrogen in inorganic salts such as NH4Cl and (NH4)2SO4
    is often referred to as "fixed nitrogen" in these patents.


CLS 423/357
TXT Processes under subclass 356 in which a compound containing the element
    calcium (Ca-+) is used.


CLS 423/358
TXT Processes under subclass 352 in which the product is made from a substance
    which contains nitrogen and is of organic structure.

    (1)     Note.  The organic material is frequently a waste product or of
    undetermined constitution.

    (2)     Note.  The reaction often is a steam hydrolysis.

    (3)     Note.  See subclass 226 (1) Note for structural requirement of an
    organic material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    550,    for processes wherein ammonia from waste gases is recovered as
    ammonium sulfate.


CLS 423/359
TXT Processes under subclass 352 in which the product is made from elemental
    hydrogen and nitrogen.


CLS 423/360
TXT Processes under subclass 359 including the step of exchanging heat values
    between a catalyst used in the process and the mixture of gases either
    prior to, or subsequent to, the reaction.


CLS 423/361
TXT Processes under subclass 359 which include the use of more than a single
    catalyst bed, or in which different portions of a single catalyst bed are
    subjected to different processing conditions, e.g., temperature, pressure,
    composition of reactant mixture, etc.


CLS 423/362
TXT Processes under subclass 359 in which a catalyst comprising a metal is
    utilized.


CLS 423/363
TXT Processes under subclass 362 in which the metal is lithium, sodium,
    potassium, rubidium, cesium, magnesium, calcium, strontium or barium.


CLS 423/364
TXT Products or processes under subclass 351 in which the product also
    comprises carbon.


CLS 423/365
TXT Products or processes under subclass 364 in which the product also contains
    oxygen.


CLS 423/366
TXT Products or processes under subclass 364 wherein the product also contains
    sulfur.


CLS 423/367
TXT Products or processes under subclass 364 wherein the product also contains
    iron.


CLS 423/368
TXT Products or processes under subclass 364 in which the carbon is combined
    with nitrogen as the cyanamide radical (CN2-1).

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass are found salts of cyanamide.  For hydrogen
    cyanamide see search note below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    369,    for processes of making hydrogen cyanamide or for chemically
    separating or purifying the product.

    371,    for processes producing carbonitrides having formulas wherein
    carbon and nitrogen atoms are present in the ratio of one carbon to two
    nitrogens, but are not clearly cyanamide compounds.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for cyanamide polymers such as
    dicyandiamide and melamine.


CLS 423/369
TXT Products or processes under subclass 368 wherein the compound contains
    hydrogen and is usually named cyanamide, but may also be called
    cyanogenamide or carbodiimide, and has the formula HN:CNH (H2CH2) or N:CNH2
    (H2NCH).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    368,    for processes of separating, purifying or manufacturing the
    cyanamide salt or a metal or the ammonium radical.


CLS 423/370
TXT Processes under subclass 368 which include the step of using a carbide as a
    reactant.


CLS 423/371
TXT Products or processes under subclass 364 in which the product consists of
    only one element in addition to the carbon and nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  The ammonium (NH4+!) radical is considered to be a single
    element, see (1) Note to the class definition.


CLS 423/372
TXT Products or processes under subclass 371 in which the product is hydrogen
    cyanide (HCN), which may also be designated as hydrocyanic acid, prussic
    acid, or formonitrile.


CLS 423/373
TXT Processes under subclass 372 including the use of formamide (HCONH2) or of
    a     compound containing the formamide (HCONH-) radical or of a compound
    containing the formate (HCOO-) radical.

    (1)     Note.  The formate is usually in the form of the ammonium salt.


CLS 423/374
TXT Processes under subclass 372 which include the use of free nitrogen or
    nitric oxide in a reaction.

    (1)     Note.  The presence of air in the reaction zone is not sufficient
    to classify a patent herein, unless clearly disclosed as the source of
    nitrogen.


CLS 423/375
TXT Processes under subclass 372 including the use of ammonia in a reaction.


CLS 423/376
TXT Processes under subclass 375 wherein a catalyst is used.


CLS 423/377
TXT Processes under subclass 372 including the use of a cyanide of a metal in a
    reaction.

    (1)     Note.  Solutions and solids which contain undefined "cyanides" and
    are acidified, thus producing the product, are presumed to be metal
    cyanides for this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 36 for process of sterilizing or
    disinfecting using cyanide.


CLS 423/378
TXT Processes under subclass 371 which include the use of cyanamide or a
    cyanamide salt in a reaction.


CLS 423/379
TXT Processes under subclass 371 which include the use of hydrogen cyanide
    (HCH) in a reaction.


CLS 423/380
TXT Processes under subclass 371 including the use of elemental or free
    nitrogen in a reaction.

    (1)     Note.  The presence of atompheric air in the reaction is not
    sufficient to classify a patent in this subclass, unless clearly disclosed
    as the source of nitrogen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    374,    for a process in which free or elemental nitrogen is used in the
    manufacture of hydrogen cyanide.


CLS 423/381
TXT Processes under subclass 380 which include the use of a catalyst.


CLS 423/382
TXT Processes under subclass 380 which also include the use of carbon in a
    reaction and which is further disclosed as originationg from a particular
    source, e.g., charcoal, a carbide, oil, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Where the reactant is described merely as "carbon" or
    "carbonaceous", this is not sufficient for classification herein.


CLS 423/383
TXT Products or processes under subclass 364 in which the product also contains
    a halogen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    371+,   for products and processes for making such products in which the
    halogen is one of three elements in a ternary compound.


CLS 423/384
TXT Processes under subclass 364 in which only nitrogen and carbon form the
    product, e.g., cyanogen (C2N2).


CLS 423/385
TXT Products or processes under subclass 351 in which the product also contains
    oxygen.


CLS 423/386
TXT Products or processes under subclass 385 wherein the product also contains
    a halogen.


CLS 423/387
TXT Products or processes under subclass 585 wherein the product also contains
    hydrogen.


CLS 423/388
TXT Products or processes under subclass 387 in which the product also contains
    sulfur.


CLS 423/389
TXT Products or processes under subclass 388 wherein the product is sulfamic
    acid or aminosulfonic acid, having one of the following formulas:
    HSO-3HN2, NH2SO3H or H2NSO3H.


CLS 423/390.1
TXT Nitric acid:
    Products and processes under subclass 387 in which the product is nitric
    acid; i.e., HNO3.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400,    for processes for the production of nitrogen oxides, per se.


CLS 423/391
TXT Processes under subclass 390.1 which include the step of contacting a salt
    and an acid for a reaction.


CLS 423/392
TXT Processes under subclass 390.1 which include the use of ammonia in a
    reaction.


CLS 423/393
TXT Processes under subclass 390.1 in which an oxide of nitrogen is used as a
    reactant.

    (1)     Note.  For this and the indented subclass the "reactant" may or may
    not be the starting material.  The "reactant" may be used to make an
    intermediate product which is then used to make the desired product or the
    "reactant" may be used to directly make the desired product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    392,    for processes in which ammonia is oxidized to form a nitrogen oxide
    as an intermediate product.


CLS 423/394
TXT Processes under subclass 393 in which the nitrogen oxide is nitrogen
    peroxide, (NO2 or N2 O4).


CLS 423/394.2
TXT Purification or recovery:
    Processes under subclass 390.1 wherein the nitric acid is separated from
    impurities or undesired foreign matter.


CLS 423/395
TXT Products or processes under subclass 385 wherein the product contains the
    nitrate radical (NO3-).

    (1)     Note.  Included under this definition are double salts of the
    nitrate    radical, such as NaNO3. CaSO4.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    396,    for processes wherein ammonium nitrate is made by reacting a
    nitrate.


CLS 423/396
TXT Products or processes under subclass 395 wherein the product contains the
    ammonium (NH4+) radical.


CLS 423/397
TXT Processes under subclass 395 which include the use of a nitrate compound
    containing a metal or the ammonium (NH4+) ion as a reactant.


CLS 423/398
TXT Processes under subclass 395 in which a compound containing a halogen is
    used as a reactant.


CLS 423/399
TXT Processes under subclass 398 which also include the use of nitric acid
    (HNO3) as as a reactant.


CLS 423/400
TXT Products or processes under subclass 385 wherein the product contains only
    nitrogen and oxygen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    390.1,  for processes for the production of nitric acid, which may include
    production of nitrogen oxides.


CLS 423/401
TXT Processes under subclass 400 which include the use of nitrosyl chloride
    (NOC1) as a reactant.


CLS 423/402
TXT Processes under subclass 400 in which a catalyst is used.


CLS 423/403
TXT Processes under subclass 402 which include the use of ammonia as a reactant.


CLS 423/404
TXT Processes under subclass 403 wherein the catalyst contains the oxide of a
    metal.


CLS 423/405
TXT Processes under subclass 400 wherein the product is nitric oxide (NO).


CLS 423/406
TXT Products or processes under subclass 351 wherein the product includes
    nitrogen and only one additional element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290,    for binary compounds containing nitrogen and boron and 400+ for
    binary compounds containing nitrogen and oxygen.


CLS 423/407
TXT Products or processes under subclass 406 in which the product is hydrazine
    (H2NNH2) or hydrazine hydrate (H2NNH2.H2O).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    388,    for hydrazine sulfate (NH2NH2.
    H2SO4).


CLS 423/408
TXT Processes under subclass 407 which include the use of a reactant containing
    sulfur or a halogen.


CLS 423/409
TXT Products or processes under subclass 406 in which the additional element is
    either a metal or the ammonium (NH4+) radical.

    (1)     Note.  The ammonium (NH4+) radical is considered to be a single
    element, see (1) Note to the class definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 16.6 and 317+ for processes of making
    case hardened (nitrided) metals and the corresponding products, the
    intention being to form such case hardened metal, not to form a definite
    compound for recovery thereof, see reference to Class 148 in Line and
    Search Note Section of the Class Definition (423).


CLS 423/410
TXT Products or processes under subclass 409 wherein the product includes the
    azide radical (-N3), with the metal or ammonium.


CLS 423/411
TXT Products or processes under subclass 409 wherein the metal is titanium or
    zirconium.


CLS 423/412
TXT Products or processes under subclass 409 wherein the metal is aluminum.


CLS 423/413
TXT Products or processes under subclass 351 in which the product contains
    hydrogen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds found in this subclass are:  Amides
    (-NH2) and imides (-NH).


CLS 423/414
TXT Products or processes under the class definition in which the product is
    carbon or a compound thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 236+ for consolidated metal power compositions
    containing a carbide.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for organic compounds and processes
    of making such compounds, meeting the structural requirements set out in
    the class definition thereof; see also (1) Note in subclass 226 of this
    class 423.

    419,    Power Metallurgy Processes, subclasses 14+ for processes of making
    articles from particulate material including a metal and a carbide compound
    comprising pressure and heat.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon, appropriate subclasses for compounds
    containing carbon and hydrogen only, methods for their synthesis and
    purification, and certain compositions containing hydrocarbons.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the destruction or containment of hazardous or toxic waste
    containing carbon, oxygen, sulfur, and metals.


CLS 423/415.1
TXT Oxygen containing:
    Products or processes under subclass 414 in which the product also contains
    oxygen.


CLS 423/415.2
TXT Percarbonate compound:
    Products or processes under subclass 415.1 wherein the compound has a
    percarbonate grouping; i.e., a (CO42-) radical.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281,    for processes of making perborates.

    513,    for processes of making persulfates.

    584,    for products and processes where the product is a peroxide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 181+ for bleaching agents.


CLS 423/416
TXT Products or processes under subclass 415.1 wherein the product contains the
    carbonyl group (CO) such as in iron penta carbonyl, Fe (CO)5, or carbonyl
    sulfide, COS.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, subclass 544 for carbonyl halide
    compounds or processes of making such compound.


CLS 423/417
TXT Products or processes under subclass 416 wherein the product contains a
    metal in addition to the carbonyl group.


CLS 423/418
TXT Processes under subclass 417 wherein at least one reactant is an organic
    chemical compound.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note in subclass 226 for structural requirements of
    an organic compound.


CLS 423/418.2
TXT Carbon monoxide:
    Products or processes under subclass 415.1 wherein the product is carbon
    monoxide; i.e., CO.


CLS 423/419.1
TXT Carbonate or bicarbonate:
    Products or processes under subclass 415.1 wherein the product contains a
    carbonate (CO32-) or bicarbonate (HCO3-) radical.

    (1)     Note.  A percarbonate may also be expressed as a carbonate in
    addition to a peroxide (e.g., Na2CO3 + H2O2); such compounds are assumed to
    have a percarbonate (CO42-) radical.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    for processes of treating mixtures to obtain a zinc (Zn), cadmium
    (Cd), or mercury (Hg) carbonate including (a) forming an insoluble
    substance in a liquid and (b) chemically forming a compound having the
    carbonate (CO32-) radical.

    415.2,  for products and processes wherein a compound has a percarbonate
    grouping.


CLS 423/420
TXT Products or processes under subclass 419.1 wherein the carbonate contains
    the ammonium (NH4+) radical.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237,    for a process of preparing ammonium carbonate from ammonia in waste
    gas, the carbonate being recovered as a by-product, where the main intent
    is to purify the gas.


CLS 423/420.2
TXT Plural metal containing:
    Products or processes under subclass 419.1 wherein the carbonate product
    contains more than a single metal.

    (1)     Note.  The plural metal of the carbonate compound may be multiple
    occurrences of the same metallic element in the compound.


CLS 423/421
TXT Products or processes under subclass 419.1 wherein the carbonate contains
    an alkali metal (lithium, sodium, potassium, rubidium or cesium).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186,    for processes of treating mixtures with a carbon containing
    compound to form an alkali metal carbonate or bicarbonate, including the
    step of forming an insoluble substance in a liquid.


CLS 423/422
TXT Products or processes under subclass 421 in which the radical contains
    hydrogen and is the bicarbonate (HCO3-) radical.


CLS 423/423
TXT Processes under subclass 422 which include the step of carbonating a
    solution of ammonia and a salt.


CLS 423/424
TXT Processes under subclass 422 which include the step of reacting a compound
    that contains a halogen.


CLS 423/425
TXT Products or processes under subclass 422 in which the product is a
    sesquicarbonate, i.e., a combination of a simple normal carbonate (e.g.,
    Na2CO3) and simple bircarbonate (e.g., NaHCO3).


CLS 423/426
TXT Processes under subclass 421 which include the step of compacting or
    compressing soda ash (crude sodium carbonate).


CLS 423/427
TXT Processes under subclass 421 which include the step of reacting a
    bicarbonate (HCO3-).


CLS 423/428
TXT Processes under subclass 421 which include the step of reacting a compound
    containing sulfur.


CLS 423/429
TXT Processes under subclass 421 which include the step of reacting a compound
    containing a halogen.


CLS 423/430
TXT Products or processes under subclass 419.1 wherein the carbonate contains
    magnesium, calcium, strontium or barium, i.e., the alkaline earth metals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165,    for processes of treating mixtures to obtain alkaline earth metal
    carbonates.


CLS 423/431
TXT Processes under subclass 430 which include the step of reacting a compound
    that contains sulfur or a halogen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165,    for processes of treating mixtures to obtain an alkaline earth
    metal carbonate, including the steps of (1) forming an insoluble substance
    in a liquid, and (2) chemically forming a  carbonate having the CO32-
    radical.


CLS 423/432
TXT Processes under subclass 430 which include the step of reacting an oxide or
    a hydroxide that contains the metal of the carbonate product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165,    for processes of treating mixtures to obtain an alkaline earth
    metal carbonate including the steps of (1) forming an insoluble substance
    in a liquid, and (2) chemically forming a carbonate having the CO32-)
    radical.


CLS 423/433
TXT Products or processes under subclass 419.1 wherein the carbonate contains
    lead.


CLS 423/434
TXT Processes under subclass 433 which include the step of reacting a compound
    that contains sulfur or a halogen.


CLS 423/435
TXT Processes under subclass 433 which include the step of reacting lead
    acetate or acetic acid.


CLS 423/436
TXT Processes under subclass 435 which also include the step of reacting
    elemental lead.


CLS 423/437
TXT Products or processes under subclass 415.1 wherein the product is carbon
    dioxide or a solution thereof in water.


CLS 423/438
TXT Processes under subclass 437 in which the product is made from a compound
    containing the carbonate (CO32-) or the bicarbonate (HCO3-) radical.


CLS 423/439
TXT Products or processes under subclass 414 wherein the product contains
    carbon and only one other element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    345,    for binary compounds which contain only carbon and silicon.

    415.1,  for carbon monoxide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 16.5 and 316+ for processes for making
    case hardened (carbided) metals and the corresponding products, the
    intention being to form such case hardened metal, not to form a definite
    compound for recovery; see reference to Class 148 in line and Search Note
    Section of the Class Definition.


CLS 423/440
TXT Products or processes under subclass 439 wherein the other element is
    chromium, molybdenum, tungsten, vanadium, niobium, tantalum, titanium,
    zirconium or hafnium, known as the refactory metals.


CLS 423/441
TXT Products or processes under subclass 439 wherein the other element is
    calcium.


CLS 423/442
TXT Processes under subclass 441 which include the step of reacting carbon with
    an inorganic compound containing calcium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174,    for processes of making calcium carbide from an impure calcium
    carbonate such as limestone.


CLS 423/443
TXT Products or processes under subclass 439 wherein the binary compound is
    carbon disulfide.


CLS 423/444
TXT Processes under subclass 443 which include the step of reacting elemental
    carbon.


CLS 423/445
TXT Products or processes under subclass 414 wherein the product is free carbon
    in substantially pure form.

    (1)     Note.  See the note in the Class 264 class definition II. A. (10)
    for the line between Class 264 and Class 423 subclasses 445+ concerning
    combined processes of molding and carbonizing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, appropriate subclasses, for
    a process of making coke.

    252,    Compositions, appropriate subclasses, for a composition comprising
    coke and another substance.  So called "activated carbon" is considered a
    composition for Class 252, see subclasses 421+, for processes of making
    catalysts or adsorbent including carbonizing and subclasses 444+, for
    catalyst or adsorbent compositions including elemental carbon.


CLS 423/446
TXT Products or processes under subclass 445 wherein the product is carbon
    crystallized in the isometric form, usually in octahedral shape.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, subclass 79 for processes for growing
    therein-defined single-crystal of diamond and subclass 929 for the art
    collection of carbon single-crystal references.  Class 423, subclass 446,
    is a mandatory search and cross-reference for patents directed to forming a
    free-standing single-crystal diamond even though properly placed in Class
    117 as an original.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 84 for the process of molding with a high pressure generated by an
    explosive force.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 1 for apparatus for molding with a high pressure generated by an
    explosive force; subclass 77 for making diamonds by applying ultra high
    pressure.


CLS 423/447.1
TXT Products and processes subclass 445 wherein the product is substantially
    pure carbon in the form of a slender threadlike structure (fiber) a woven,
    knitted or fetted sheet material (fabric) or a woven fabric or cloth
    (textile).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 115.51+ for processes and compositions for
    treating textiles and fibers to effect a chemical modification thereof,
    where the resulting product is other than an inorganic compound or element
    (e.g., carbon) as provided for in this class 423.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 367 for a carbon
    fiber structurally defined as provided for in the Class 428 definitions.


CLS 423/447.2
TXT Products under subclass 447.1.

    (1)     Note.  In order to be placed in this subclass as an original, a
    patent must contain a claim to an elemental carbon fiber, fabric or textile.


CLS 423/447.3
TXT Processes under subclass 447.1 wherein all the carbon forming reactant(s)
    are in the gaseous phase.


CLS 423/447.4
TXT Processes under subclass 447.1 wherein prior to a reaction to convert a
    fiber, fabric or textile article to carbon, the article is treated with a
    substance other than gaseous oxygen which substance either (a) chemically
    reacts with the article or (b) is retained in the article at least until
    the commencement of a reaction to convert the article to carbon.


CLS 423/447.5
TXT Processes under subclass 447.4 wherein the treating substance is a metal, a
    metal containing compound or a phosphorus containing compound.


CLS 423/447.6
TXT Processes under subclass 447.1 including a step of reaction with gaseous
    oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  Heating in air is considered to be reaction with gaseous
    oxygen only when it is positively disclosed that such a reaction takes
    place.


CLS 423/447.7
TXT Processes under subclass 447.1 including a step of reaction in a
    specifically recited atmosphere other than vacuum or air.


CLS 423/447.8
TXT Processes under subclass 447.1 wherein a carbonizing reaction is carried
    out by (1) varying the temperature over a given time span or by (2) heating
    to two or more distinct temperatures.

    (1)     Note.  Heating to cure binder or dry is not considered a
    carbonizing reaction without positive disclosure that carbonizing occurs
    under those conditions.

    (2)     Note.  Heating a temperature to cause a change in crystalline form
    of the carbon (e.g., graphitizing) is considered a step of carbonizing for
    this subclass.


CLS 423/447.9
TXT Processes under subclass 447.1 wherein the material carbonized is natural
    cellulose or its derivatives (e.g., esters, ether, regenerated cellulose,
    etc.).


CLS 423/448
TXT Products or processes under subclass 445 wherein the product is graphite,
    which is the crystalline allotropic form of carbon, characterized by a
    hexagonal arrangement of the atoms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    447,    for a fiber, textile or fabric which is made of graphite.


CLS 423/449.1
TXT Carbon black (e.g., lampblack):
    Products or processes under subclass 445  wherein the product is a finely
    divided carbon particulate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 84 for processes of molding with high pressure generated by an
    explosive force.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    subclass 77 for apparatus making diamonds by  applying ultra high pressure.


CLS 423/449.2
TXT Treating carbon black:
    Processes under subclass 449.1 wherein carbon    black is treated to change
    its characteristics.


CLS 423/449.3
TXT Treating  with acid, or gas which forms an acid in water:
    Processes under subclass 449.2  wherein the carbon black material is
    treated with a compound that is an acid or with a gas that in  an aqueous
    state would form an acid (e.g.,  H2S).


CLS 423/449.4
TXT Halogen or compound thereof:
    Processes under subclass 449.2 wherein the acid or the gas includes a
    halogen group element (e.g., HCl).


CLS 423/449.5
TXT Gaseous oxygen containing compound:
    Processes under subclass 449.2 wherein the treatment is with a gaseous
    compound including  oxygen (e.g., CO).


CLS 423/449.6
TXT Utilizing synthetic polymer as reactant:
    Processes under subclass 449.1 wherein a compound  that is a synthetic
    polymer (e.g., polyanylonitrite) is reacted or decomposed to form the
    product.


CLS 423/449.7
TXT Tire:
    Processes under subclass 449.6 wherein the polymer is obtained from tires
    or parts thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are polymeric material from scrap
    tires  composed of compounds that include those produced by vulcanization
    of natural or synthetic rubber.


CLS 423/449.8
TXT Solid material in feed:
    Processes under subclass 449.1 which include feeding  stock material that
    is in a solid-state, either homogeneous  or heterogeneous (e.g., wood or
    coke).


CLS 423/449.9
TXT Liquid feed only:
    Processes under subclass 449.1 wherein initial   feed stock is in a liquid
    state only.


CLS 423/450
TXT Processes under subclass 449.1 wherein the carbon is made from the direct
    pyrolysis, cracking or decomposition of a compound containing only carbon
    and hydrogen (i.e., hydrocarbon) which is normally in the liquid or gaseous
    state.

    (1)     Note.  Any "oil" or any "gas" (e.g., natural) is considered to
    qualify under this definition of hydrocarbon unless it is clear from the
    disclosure that an element other than carbon and hydrogen is present in the
    gas or oil.  However, impurities in the fluid are disregarded if they are
    not the source for the carbon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    449,    for a process which uses a halogen containing compound, e.g.,
    CHC13. as the feed stock for carbon black.


CLS 423/451
TXT Processes under subclass 450 wherein the carbon is formed from the
    hydrocarbon by rapid and discontinuous oxidation such as in an explosive
    reaction.


CLS 423/452
TXT Processes under subclass 450 wherein the carbon is deposited from a flame
    by causing the flame to directly contact a relatively cool surface.


CLS 423/453
TXT Processes under subclass 450 in which the decomposition takes place on
    contact between the hydrocarbon and (1) catalytic material or (2) a solid
    surface heated to a temperature at which the pyrolysis can occur.


CLS 423/454
TXT Processes under subclass 453 in which the contact is with a heated solid
    surface comprising particulate solids or the inner surface or firebrick of
    the zone in which the decomposition takes place.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    453,    for a process of making carbon by contact of a fluid hydrocarbon
    with a liquid catalyst or a bed of unheated particulate solids.


CLS 423/455
TXT Processes under subclass 450 in which the speed of entry into the reaction
    zone of any feed material associated with the process is specifically
    stated.

    (2)     Note.  The term "feed material" under this definition is not
    limited to the hydrocarbon being decomposed to result in the carbon; it
    also includes atomizing, heating, combustion or carrier gas, fuel, heat
    exchange medium, etc.


CLS 423/456
TXT Processes under subclass 450 in which the angle of entry into the reaction
    zone of any feed material associated with the process is specifically
    stated.

    (1)     Note.  The term "feed material" under this definition is not
    limited to the hydrocarbon being decomposed; it also includes any material
    associated in any manner with the process, e.g., atomizing, heating,
    combustion, or carrier gas, fuel, etc.


CLS 423/457
TXT Processes under subclass 456 in which at least one feed material enters the
    reaction zone in a direction which, if extended would intersect the
    longitudinal axis.


CLS 423/458
TXT Processes under subclass 450 in which the hydrocarbon feed consists of a
    fluid which is normally in the gas or vapor state.

    (1)     Note.  A normal gas or vapor is considered to be a compound having
    between 1 and 4 carbons only.

    (2)     Note.  Excluded under this definition is a process in which a
    liquid had been vaporized before entering the reaction zone.  The initial
    starting material must be a normal gas or vapor for this subclass; if
    liquid, classification is in subclass 450.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    450,    for a process in which the initial feedstock comprises a liquid, a
    mixture of gas and liquid or either gas or liquid, claimed generically as a
    fluid.


CLS 423/459
TXT Processes under 449.1 wherein the carbon is made from carbon monoxide.


CLS 423/460
TXT Processes under subclass 445 wherein carbon in the elemental state is
    treated to change its characteristics.


CLS 423/461
TXT Processes under subclass 445 wherein the carbon is separated from
    impurities.


CLS 423/462
TXT Products or processes under the class definition in which the product is a
    nonmetallic element of Group VII A of the periodic system having atomic
    numbers 9, 17, 35, or 53, or a compound thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249,    for astatine (Atomic No. 85), which is the radioactive member of
    the halogens, and compounds thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the destruction or containment of hazardous or toxic waste
    containing halogens, oxygen, sulfur, and metals.


CLS 423/463
TXT Products or processes under subclass 462 in which the product is a
    compound, which contains either (1) two or more diverse and distinct metal
    elements or (2) a metal and the ammonium (NH4+) radical.


CLS 423/464
TXT Products and processes under subclass 463 in which the halogen is fluorine.


CLS 423/465
TXT Products or processes under subclass 464 in which he product contains
    aluminum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    for processes of treating mixtures to obtain a plural metal and
    halogen containing compound, wherein one of the metals is aluminum.


CLS 423/466
TXT Products or processes under subclass 462 wherein the products includes two
    or more different halogens.


CLS 423/467
TXT Products or processes under subclass 462 wherein the product contains
    sulfur.


CLS 423/468
TXT Products or processes under subclass 467 wherein the product is a ternary
    compound and contains only oxygen in addition to the sulfur and halogen.


CLS 423/469
TXT Products or processes under subclass 467 wherein the product is a binary
    compound and contains only sulfur and a halogen.


CLS 423/470
TXT Products or processes under subclass 462 wherein the product consists of
    the ammonium (NH4+) radical and a halogen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    462,    for ammonium bifluoride (NH4F.HF).


CLS 423/471
TXT Products or processes under subclass 470 in which the ammonium halide is
    obtained by separation or purification from a mixture (usually waste
    material).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237,    for a process of preparing an ammonium halide from the ammonia in
    waste gas where the main intent is to purify the gas, the halide being
    recovered as a by-product and the recovery being of secondary importance.


CLS 423/472
TXT Products or processes under subclass 462 wherein the product is a ternary
    compound and consists of two elements in addition to the halogen.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this and indented subclasses, the ammonium
    radical is considered to be a single entity (element) and is classified as
    a ternary compound when combined with two other elements, but not as a
    hydrogen containing ternay compound; see also (1) Note in class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    for processes of treating mixtures to obtain a ternary compound
    wherein two of the elements are metals and the third is a halogen, one of
    the metals being beryllium or a Group III A element.


CLS 423/473
TXT Products or processes under subclass 472 which consist of oxygen and a
    halogen as the (XO-) radical in combination with a third element.


CLS 423/474
TXT Products or processes under subclass 473 in which the compound is calcium
    hypochlorite (Ca (OC1)2).


CLS 423/475
TXT Products or processes under subclass 472 which consist of oxygen and a
    halogen as the (XO3-) radical in combination with a third element.


CLS 423/476
TXT Products or processes under subclass 472 which consist of oxygen and a
    halogen as the (XO4-) radical in combination with a third element.


CLS 423/477
TXT Products or processes under subclass 462 wherein the compound is chlorine
    dioxide (C1O2).


CLS 423/478
TXT Processes under subclass 477 which include reacting a compound having the
    chlorate

    radical (C1O3-).


CLS 423/479
TXT Processes under subclass 478 wherein the chlorate is reacted with a
    compound containing either nitrogen or carbon.


CLS 423/480
TXT Processes under subclass 478 wherein the chlorate is reacted with sulfur
    dioxide

    (SO2).


CLS 423/481
TXT Products or processes under subclass 462 wherein the compound consists of
    hydrogen and a halogen.


CLS 423/482
TXT Processes under subclass 481 in which include reacting an alkali metal and
    halogen containing salt with sulfuric acid.


CLS 423/483
TXT Products or processes under subclass 481 in which the halogen is fluorine.


CLS 423/484
TXT Processes under subclass 483 wherein the hydrogen fluoride is formed from
    an initial mixture containing an impurity.


CLS 423/485
TXT Processes under subclass 484 wherein the impure initial material is the
    mineral fluorspar (calcium fluoride, fluorite, CaF2).


CLS 423/486
TXT Processes under subclass 481 wherein at least one of the reactants which
    forms the hydrogen halide is in elemental form.


CLS 423/487
TXT Processes under subclass 486 wherein both the hydrogen and halogen are
    supported in the elemental form and are reacted with each other.


CLS 423/488
TXT Processes under subclass 481 which include the step of removing an impurity
    either from the product or from the initial mixture, e.g., removing H2O,
    free halogen, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240+,   for a process of removing impurities from a gaseous mixture having
    a halogen or a compound thereof as a constituent therein.


CLS 423/489
TXT Products or processes under subclass 462 wherein the compound contains
    fluorine and only one other element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126,    for processes of treating a mixture to obtain a binary fluorine
    containing compound, including the step of forming an insoluble substance
    in a liquid, and 483+ for a binary compound which contains fluorine and
    hydrogen.


CLS 423/490
TXT Products and processes under subclass 489 in which the other element of the
    binary compound is lithium, sodium, potassium, rubidium, cesium, magnesium,
    calcium, strontium or barium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185,    for treating a mixture to obtain an alkali metal and fluorine
    containing compound by forming an insoluble substance in a liquid.


CLS 423/491
TXT Products or processes under subclass 462 wherein the compound contains only
    a halogen and a metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for processes of treating mixtures to obtain a Group II B metal
    halide including the steps of (1) forming an insoluble substance in a
    liquid and (2) chemically forming a halogen containing compound.


CLS 423/492
TXT Products and processes under subclass 491 in which the metal is of Group IV
    B, V B, or VI B, i.e., titanium, zirconium, hafnium, vanadium, niobium,
    tantalum, chromium, molybdenum or tungsten, commonly known as the
    refractory metals.


CLS 423/493
TXT Products or processes under subclass 491 in which the metal is iron,
    cobalt, nickel or copper.


CLS 423/494
TXT Products or processes under subclass 491 in which the metal is either
    germanium, tin or lead.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90,     for a process of forming salts of tin wherein the intent is to
    recover a tin compound by destining a mixture thereof.


CLS 423/495
TXT Products or processes under subclass 491 in which the metal is aluminum,
    gallium, indium, thallium or beryllium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126,    for processes of treating a mixture to obtain a metal containing
    compound, wherein the metal is beryllium or a Group III A metal, including
    the steps of (1) forming an insoluble substance in a liquid and (2)
    chemically forming a halogen containing compound.

    130,    for the process of recovering aluminum chloride catalysts from
    hydrocarbon waste materials by destroying or separating from the
    hydrocarbon.

    135+,   for the process of recovering aluminum halides by volatization.


CLS 423/496
TXT Processes under subclass 495 in which the compound is made by utilizing
    carbon or a compound thereof in a reaction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135+,   for the process of recovering aluminum halides by volatization
    wherein carbon or a carbon containing compound maybe utilized.


CLS 423/497
TXT Products or processes under subclass 491 in which the metal is magnesium,
    calcium, strontium or barium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163,    for processes of treating mixtures to obtain a compound containing
    a halogen and an alkaline earth metal, including the steps of (1) forming
    an insoluble substance in a liquid and (2) chemically forming a halogen
    containing compound.

    490,    for a binary compound consisting of fluorine and an alkali or
    alkaline earth metal.


CLS 423/498
TXT Products or processes under subclass 497 wherein the compound is anhydrous
    magnesium chloride.


CLS 423/499.1
TXT Alkali metal:
    Products or processes under subclass 491 wherein the metal is an alkali
    metal (i.e., lithium, sodium, potassium, rubidium, or cesium).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    197,    for treating mixtures to form an alkali metal and  halogen
    containing compound by forming an  insoluble substance in a liquid.

    490,    for a binary compound containing an alkali metal and fluorine.


CLS 423/499.2
TXT From carbonaceous compound:
    Products or processes under subclass 499.1 wherein the alkali metal is
    obtained from carbon containing compound.


CLS 423/499.3
TXT Lithium chloride:
    Products and processes under subclass 499.1 wherein the product is lithium
    chloride (i.e., LiCl).


CLS 423/499.4
TXT Sodium chloride:
    Products and processes under subclass 499.1  wherein the product is sodium
    chloride (i.e., NaCl).


CLS 423/499.5
TXT Purification:
    Products and processes under subclass 499.4  wherein purified sodium
    chloride is obtained.


CLS 423/500
TXT Products or processes under subclass 462 wherein the product is a halogen
    in elemental form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249,    for astatine (Atomic No. 85), which is the radioactive member of
    the halogen family, or a compound thereof.


CLS 423/501
TXT Processes under subclass 500 which includes the step of solvent-solvent
    extraction or ion exchange; see Glossary.


CLS 423/502
TXT Processes under subclass 500 which include the step of oxidation in the
    presence of a catalyst.


CLS 423/503
TXT Processes under subclass 500 which include the use of a sorbent; see
    Glossary.


CLS 423/504
TXT Processes under subclass 500 wherein the elemental halogen is derived from
    an initial mixture which contains lithium, sodium, potassium, rubidium,
    cesium, magnesium, calcium, strontium or barium.


CLS 423/505
TXT Processes under subclass 504 wherein a substance is formed in a liquid or
    slurry, which substance is insoluble therein and can be or is separated
    from the liquid and the other materials which remain soluble in the liquid;
    or wherein the composition of the liquid is changed so that one part of the
    mixture becomes insoluble therein.


CLS 423/506
TXT Processes under subclass 500 which include the step of reacting a compound
    of sulfur with the halide of lithium, sodium, potassium, cesium or rubidium.


CLS 423/507
TXT Processes under subclass 500 in which a hydrogen halide or an ammonium
    halide is utilized as a reactant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    502,    for a process of preparing elemental halogen by catalytically
    reacting the hydrogen or ammonium halide.


CLS 423/508
TXT Products and processes under the class definition wherein the product is
    either selenium or tellurium, or a compound thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the destruction or containment of hazardous or toxic  waste
    containing Se or Te.


CLS 423/509
TXT Products and processes under subclass 508 wherein the product is a binary
    compound which contains only one element in addition to the selenium or
    tellurium.


CLS 423/510
TXT Products and processes under subclass 508 wherein the product is elemental
    selenium or tellurium.


CLS 423/511
TXT Products or processes under the class definition wherein the product is
    sulfur or a compound thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the destruction or containment of hazardous or toxic waste
    containing sulfur, halogen, nitrogen, and metals.


CLS 423/512.1
TXT Oxygen containing:
    Products or processes under subclass 511 wherein the product also contains
    oxygen.


CLS 423/513
TXT Products or processes under subclass 512.1 wherein the product contains the
    peroxymonsulfate (SO52-) or the peroxydisulfate (S2O82-) radical.

    (1)     Note.  These radicals may also be identified as the permonosulfate
    or the perdisulfate, respectively.


CLS 423/514
TXT Products or processes under subclass 512.1 wherein the compound contains
    the thiosulfate radical (S2O32-).


CLS 423/515
TXT Products or processes under subclass 512.1 wherein the product is a
    dithionite having the radical (S2O42-).

    (1)     Note.  Dithionite is frequently incorrectly termed hydrosulfite in
    the patents.

    (2)     Note.  The term hyposulfite is generic to both dithionite and
    thiosulfate.


CLS 423/516
TXT Processes under subclass 515 wherein an alloy of mercury is employed as a
    reactant in the process of forming a dithionite.


CLS 423/517
TXT Products or processes under subclass 512.1 wherein the compound also
    contains both a metal and the ammonium (NH4+) radical in addition to sulfur
    and oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of the compounds included in this subclass are K
    NH4 SO4, (NH4)2 H2ZrO(SO4)3 and 5 K2SO4 (NH4)2SO4.

    (2)     Note.  Many of the ammonium and metal containing compounds belong
    to the class known as alums which are double salts of the general formula
    M'M" (SO4)2. 12H2O) where M' may be certain univalent cations (e.g., Na, K,
    NH4+, Li, Ag, etc.) and M''' may be certain trivalent cations (e.g., A1,
    Ga, Ti, Fe, Cr, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for recovery of compounds containing ammonium and aluminum where
    the starting material is a mixture or an ore.


CLS 423/518
TXT Products or processes under subclass 512.1, wherein the compound contains
    two or more different metals in addition to sulfur and oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of the compounds included in this subclass are
    K2SO4A12 (SO4)3 24 H2O, Na2A12 (SO4)4, and PbS BaO.

    (2)     Note.  Many of the plural metal containing compounds are known as
    alums, see (2) Note in subclass 517 for description of these compounds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for processes of treating mixtures to obtain a plural metal
    compound containing both oxygen and sulfur.


CLS 423/519
TXT Products or processes under subclass 512.1 wherein the compound contains
    the bisulfite or acid sulfite radical (HSO3-).


CLS 423/519.2
TXT Sulfite:
    Products and processes under subclass 512.1 wherein the compound is a
    sulfite; i.e., includes a (SO32-) radical.


CLS 423/520
TXT Products or processes under subclass 512.1 wherein the compound contains
    the bisulfate or acid sulfate radical (SO42-).


CLS 423/521
TXT Products or processes under subclass 512.1 in which the compound is ternary
    and consists of sulfur, oxygen and hydrogen only.


CLS 423/522
TXT Products or processes under subclass 521 in which the ternary compound is
    sulfuric acid

    (H2SO4).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for sulfuric acid (H2SO4) including
    fuming sulfuric acid which is sometimes termed oleum or Nordhausen acid for
    which sometimes the formula H2S2O7 may be designated. However, this
    compound is actually H2SO4 with SO3 dissolved therein and is classified in
    this subclass.


CLS 423/523
TXT Processes under subclass 522 in which during the manufacture of the
    sulfuric acid a compound of nitrogen is used as a catalyst or as a
    reactant, or is present as an impurity which requires removal.


CLS 423/524
TXT Processes under subclass 523 wherein sulfuric acid is produced from sulfur
    dioxide oxygen (air) and water or steam by means of nitrogen oxides
    (catalysts or reactants) in leaden chambers.

    (1)     Note.  The complete lead chamber process involves production of
    sulfur dioxide by burning sulfur or sulfur compounds.  Sulfuric acid is
    produced in the lead chamber from the sulfur dioxide, oxygen (air), and
    water or steam by means of nitrogen oxides (catalysts or reactants).  The
    gases leaving the reaction chamber contain practically the entire quantity
    of nitrogen oxides which have brought about the oxidation of SC2 to SO3.
    These nitrogen oxides are recovered by absorption in H2SO4 in so called
    Gay-Lussac towers.  The nitrous sulfuric acid produced in these towers is
    conveyed to the beginning of the system where it is denitrated in so called
    Glover towers by means of the entering hot gases containing sulfur dioxide.


CLS 423/525
TXT Processes under subclass 522 wherein at least one of the starting materials
    is a mixture having an organic or carbonaceous impurity therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    531,    for a process of purifying sulfuric acid of an impurity which is
    not an organic material or carbonaceous in nature; see (1) Note in subclass
    226 for structural requirements of an organic substance.


CLS 423/526
TXT Processes under subclass 525 wherein the pressure on the mixture of acid
    and impurities is caused to be increased to greater than atmospheric or is
    caused to be decreased below atmospheric.

    (1)     Note.  These processes necessitate use of an autoclave or enclosed
    chamber. If the mixture is merely contacted with a gas which is then free
    to expand classification is in subclass 528 below.


CLS 423/527
TXT Processes under subclass 525 wherein an organic compound is added to the
    impure mixture.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of the organic additives are:  solvent oils for
    dissolving impurities, fatty acids to reduce foaming, etc.

    (2)     Note.  See (1) Note is subclass 226 for structural requirements of
    an organic compound.


CLS 423/528
TXT Processes under subclass 525 including the step of bringing the mixture
    into contact with an external source of gas or steam.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for processes wherein gas is bubbled
    through or blown against the mixture. However, it does not include
    processes wherein mere contact with atmohpheric air is made nor wherein the
    only contact is with vapors rising from the mixture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    526,    for similar processes where the mixture is under pressure of vacuum.


CLS 423/529
TXT Processes under subclass 522 wherein the pressure on the reactants or
    sulfuric acid is caused to be increased to above atmospheric or to be
    decreased to below atmospheric, or water vapor from an external source is
    caused to contact the reactants or acid.

    (1)     Note.  Included under this definition is the step of causing the
    water vapor to discharge against the surface of the reactants or acid of of
    providing an atmosphere of water vapor above the reactants or acid.


CLS 423/530
TXT Processes under subclass 522 wherein one of the reactants or impurities is
    a compound of metal and the sulfate radical (SO42-).


CLS 423/531
TXT Processes under subclass 522 which include the removal or separation of
    impurities present in the reactants or in the acid.

    (1)     Note.  For the purposes of this subclass merely concentrating or
    dehydrating the acid to make the ratio of H2SO4 to H2O higher is not
    considered purification.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    523,    for sulfuric acid making or purifying processes which may involve a
    nitrogen containing impurity.

    525,    for sulfuric acid making or purifying processes wherein the
    original mixture includes an organic or carbonaceous impurity.


CLS 423/532
TXT Products or processes under subclass 512.1 wherein the compound is sulfur
    trioxide (SO3).


CLS 423/533
TXT Processes under subclass 532 wherein a catalyst is employed in a reaction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 410+ for specific catalysts.


CLS 423/534
TXT Processes under subclass 533 wherein a second different and distinct
    catalyst is employed in series with the first catalyst, or wherein a
    substance which increases the efficiency of the catalyst is utilized.


CLS 423/535
TXT Processes under subclass 535 wherein the catalyst or its support includes
    oxygen, vanadium, and another metal.


CLS 423/536
TXT Processes under subclass 533 wherein the catalyst is, or contains, platinum.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 472, for group VIII metals as catalysts.


CLS 423/537
TXT Processes under subclass 536 wherein the platinum catalyst is spread on or
    is supported by a sulfate (SO42-) or asbestos substance.

    (1)     Note.  The carrier is usually for the purpose of extending the
    surface of the catalyst.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 440 for sulfate (SO42-) containing catalysts.


CLS 423/538
TXT Processes under subclass 533 wherein the catalyst contains oxygen, usually
    as the oxide of a metal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 461+ for metal oxide containing catalysts.


CLS 423/539
TXT Products or processes under subclass 512.1 in which the compound is sulfur
    dioxide (SO2).


CLS 423/540
TXT Processes under subclass 539 which include as the initial feedstock sludge
    or other waste material resulting from the acid treatment of a substance.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the patents herein use a sludge which results from
    the acid treatment of an organic substance (e.g., paper).


CLS 423/541.1
TXT Utilizing metal sulfate as reactant:
    Processes under subclass 539 which include the step of using sulfate of
    metal as a reactant.


CLS 423/541.4
TXT Ammonium sulfate:
    Processes under subclass 541.1 which include the step of using sulfate of
    ammonium as a reactant.


CLS 423/542
TXT Processes under subclass 539 including the step of causing a compound of
    sulfur to be combusted with a flame or to be heated at high temperature or
    to be oxidized by heat in a current of air.


CLS 423/543
TXT Processes under subclass 539 including the step of causing the element
    sulfur to be combusted with a flame.


CLS 423/544
TXT Products or processes under subclass 512.1 wherein the compound contains
    the sulfate radical (SO42-).

    (1)     Note.  Included under this definition is a compound which contains
    another negative ion in addition to the sulfate radical, e.g., basic lead
    sulfate (PbSO4. PbO).  See search note below compounds containing different
    positive ions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    517,    for products, or processes of making such products containing
    sulfur, oxygen and a metal and ammonium.

    518,    for a product containing sulfur, oxygen and two different metals.


CLS 423/545
TXT Products or processes under subclass 544 wherein the compound contains the
    ammonium ion (NH4+).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    517,    for a compound, or process of making the compound, which contains a
    metal in addition to the ammonium (NH4+) radical and the sulfate (SO42-)
    radical.


CLS 423/546
TXT Processes under subclass 545 wherein a compound containing the
    thiocyanate(CNS-) radical is reacted or decomposed to form the product.


CLS 423/547
TXT Processes under subclass 545 wherein a sulfite (SO32-) or a bisulfite
    (HSO-) is one of the reactants employed to form the compound.


CLS 423/548
TXT Processes under subclass 545 wherein a metal sulfate (SO42-) is one of the
    reactants employed.


CLS 423/549
TXT Processes under subclass 545 wherein sulfuric acid (H2SO4) is one of the
    reactants.


CLS 423/550
TXT Processes under subclass 549 wherein sulfuric acid is contacted with waste
    gases containing ammonia to form ammonium sulfate.


CLS 423/551
TXT Products or processes under subclass 544 wherein the compound contains
    lithium, sodium, potassium, rubidium or cesium.


CLS 423/552
TXT Processes under subclass 551 which include the step of reacting a choride.


CLS 423/553
TXT Processes under subclass 551 wherein at least some of the water is removed
    from a hydrated compound containing the alkali metal and the sulfate
    (SO42-) radical.


CLS 423/554
TXT Products or processes under subclass 544 wherein the compound contains
    magnesium, calcium, strontium or barium.


CLS 423/555
TXT Products or processes under subclass 554 in which the metal is calcium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171,    for processes of calcining gypsum
    which is primarily calcium dihydrate (CaSO4.2H2O) to obtain plaster of
    paris which is primarily calcium    hemihydrate (CaSO4.1/2H2O).


CLS 423/556
TXT Products or processes under subclass 544 wherein the compound contains
    aluminum.

    (1)     Note.  Included under this definition are all forms of aluminum
    sulfate, as for example the hydroxy sulfate or the hydrosulfate, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128,    for processes of treating mixtures to obtain an aluminum sulfate,
    including the steps of (1) forming an insoluble substance in a liquid, and
    (2) chemically forming a compound having  the SO42- radical.


CLS 423/557
TXT Products or processes under subclass 544 in which the compound contains
    copper.


CLS 423/558
TXT Products or processes under subclass 544 wherein the compound contains iron.


CLS 423/559
TXT Products or processes under subclass 544 wherein the compound contains lead.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97,     for processes of treating mixtures to recover lead sulfate and in
    which the process includes the step of volatizing lead.


CLS 423/560
TXT Products or processes under subclass 511 wherein the compound consists of
    sulfur, hydrogen, and metal.

    (1)     Note.  These compounds are variously designated as hydrosulfides in
    the more recent patents and as sulfhydrates in other documents.


CLS 423/561.1
TXT Binary compound:

    Products or processes under subclass 511 in which the compound consists of
    sulfur and only one additional element.


CLS 423/562
TXT Products or processes under subclass 561.1 wherein the compound includes
    associated sulfur in addition to the amount normally present in a sulfide.

    (1)     Note.  For example, when additional sulfur is associated with
    sodium sulfide (Na2S) under certain conditions sodium polysulfide
    (Na2S5) is formed.

    (2)     Note.  It should be noted that a sulfide which merely has a
    plurality of sulfur atoms therein is not necessarily a polysulfide, as in
    aluminum sulfide (A12S3).  This compound has only the normal amount of
    sulfur to combine with the aluminum to form the aluminum sulfide.


CLS 423/563
TXT Products or processes under subclass 561.1 in which the binary compound is
    hydrogen sulfide (H2S).


CLS 423/564
TXT Processes under subclass 563 including the step of employing a catalyst
    during a reaction in which the product is formed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 410+ for catalyst compositions.


CLS 423/565
TXT Processes under subclass 561.1 including the step of reacting elemental
    sulfur in making the product.


CLS 423/566
TXT Processes under subclass 561.1 including the step of using a compound
    having the SO42- radical as a reactant.


CLS 423/566.1
TXT Sulfide of Cd, Zn or Hg:

    Product or process under subclass 561.1 in which the compound is a sulfide
    of zinc, cadmium or mercury.


CLS 423/566.2
TXT Sulfide of alkali metal:

    Product or process under subclass 561.1 in which the compound is a sulfide
    of an alkali metal.


CLS 423/566.3
TXT Sulfide of alkaline earth metal:

    Product or process under subclass 561.1 in which the compound is a sulfide
    of an alkaline earth metal.


CLS 423/567.1
TXT Elemental sulfur:
    Products and processes under subclass 511 wherein the product is sulfur in
    elemental form.


CLS 423/568
TXT Processes under subclass 567.1 which include the step of forming a compound
    that contains chlorine.


CLS 423/569
TXT Processes under subclass 567.1 which include the step of reducing the
    valence of the sulfur in sulfur dioxide from +4 with a material containing
    carbon to form the elemental sulfur having a valence of zero.


CLS 423/570
TXT Processes under subclass 569 which include the step of employing a catalyst
    in the reduction reaction.


CLS 423/571
TXT Processes under subclass 567.1 which include the step of using as a
    reactant a compound having the sulfide (S2-) ion.

    (1)     Note.  The sulfide may be provided from any source, e.g., ores
    (pyrites), gas streams, etc.


CLS 423/572
TXT Processes under subclass 571 which include the step of reacting water in
    its vapor or gaseous state with the sulfide to form the compound hydrogen
    sulfide (H2S) as an intermediary in the production of sulfur.


CLS 423/573.1
TXT Hydrogen sulfide:

    Subject matter under subclass 571 in which the sulfide reacted is hydrogen
    sulfide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210+,   for a process for treating a feed gas to remove a constituent
    therefrom when there is no recovery of a desired material stemming from
    that component, even though a hydrogen sulfide component of the feed gas is
    converted to elemental sulfur and its recovery requires further processing,
    that is, the "more comprehensive claim" rule does not apply within a class.

    220+,   for a process for treating a feed gas containing hydrogen sulfide
    to modify or remove this component without recovery of hydrogen or
    sulfur-containing material therefrom.

    572,    for a process in which a sulfide compound is reacted with water
    vapor to form hydrogen sulfide which is then reacted to produce sulfur.


CLS 423/574.1
TXT With sulfur dioxide:
    Processes under subclass 573.1 including a step of reacting the hydrogen
    sulfide with sulfur dioxide.


CLS 423/574.2
TXT In inorganic liquid:
    Processes under subclass 574.1 where the reacting step takes place in
    liquid media without an organic carbon compound as a principle constituent;
    e.g., in water.


CLS 423/575
TXT Processes under subclass 574.1 including the step of utilizing an organic
    compound as a solvent or abosorbent.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note in subclass 226 for the structural requirements
    of an organic material.


CLS 423/576
TXT Processes under subclass 574.1 which are carried out in the presence of a
    catalyst, its carrier or a promoter thereof, which contains aluminum or
    silica.


CLS 423/576.2
TXT With specified procedure for sulfur recovery or specified conditions for
    producing sulfur in more recoverable form:

    Subject matter under subclass 573.1 which includes a step for recovering
    elemental sulfur beyond merely "removing" or "recovering" the sulfur or in
    which conditions other than mere temperature regulation are specified for
    obtaining elemental sulfur in more recoverable form, for example, by
    employing an additive to assure sulfur in crystalline form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry: Physical Processes, subclasses 293 and 308 for processes
    of acting upon sulfur without a chemical reaction.


CLS 423/576.4
TXT By reacting gaseous feed stream with liquid aqueous mixture:

    Subject matter under subclass 573.1 in which a hydrogen sulfide-containing
    feed gas is contacted with a liquid which contains a significant amount of
    water, elemental sulfur being formed in such mixture.

    (1)     Note.  A "significant" amount of water is taken to mean more than
    commercial impurities or that provided by water of reaction.


CLS 423/576.5
TXT Transition metal-containing mixture:

    Subject matter under subclass 576.4 in which the water-containing mixture
    also contains a metal, in free or combined form, belonging to the
    transition group of metals.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of a transition metal, see (1) Note in
    the definition of Class 428, subclass 655.


CLS 423/576.6
TXT Chelated or sequestered transition metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 576.5 in which the transition metal is
    dissolved in the form of a complex which retards precipitation of that
    metal from solution.


CLS 423/576.7
TXT Organic compound-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 576.5 in which the water-containing mixture
    also contains an organic compound.


CLS 423/576.8
TXT By reacting gaseous feed with gas containing free oxygen:

    Subject matter under subclass 573.1 in which a hydrogen sulfide-containing
    feed gas is directly contacted and mixed with a gas containing oxygen in
    uncombined form, elemental sulfur being thereby formed, including a process
    wherein such gases simultaneously contact a solid catalyst.


CLS 423/577
TXT Processes under subclass 571 in which the sulfide is that of a metal and is
    reacted with sulfur dioxde (SO2).


CLS 423/578.1
TXT Purifying crude sulfur:
    Products or processes under subclass 567.1 including recovering or
    separating sulfur from impurities mixed therewith.


CLS 423/578.2
TXT From ore:
    Products or processes under subclass 578.1 wherein the crude sulfur is
    obtained from a natural mineral found mixed with earthy matter.


CLS 423/578.4
TXT From liquid or solid compound:
    Processes under subclass 567.1 in which the sulfur is obtained from a
    compound that is in a liquid or solid-state.


CLS 423/579
TXT Products or processes under the class definition wherein the product is
    oxygen or a compound thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the destruction or containment of hazardous or toxic waste
    containing oxygen, sulfur, halogen, nitrogen, and metals.


CLS 423/580.1
TXT Water:
    Products and processes under subclass 579 wherein the compound is water
    (H2O).


CLS 423/580.2
TXT Heavy water:
    Products and processes under subclass 580.1 wherein the water is in its
    heavy form; e.g., D2O where D is a deuterium isotopic hydrogen mass=2 or
    H218O where 18O is an oxygen mass=18.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249,    for heavy water that contains tritium and exhibits nuclear
    disintegration with emission of radioactive particles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements, for a
    combination of nuclear reaction and tritium removal.


CLS 423/581
TXT Products or processes under subclass 579 wherein the compound is a
    superoxide containing the (O2-) radical, or is ozone (O3).


CLS 423/582
TXT Products or processes under subclass 579 in which the compound is a
    peroxide containing the (O22-) radical.


CLS 423/583
TXT Products or processes under subclass 582 wherein the peroxide contains a
    metal of the alkaline earth group (magnesium, calcuim, strontium or barium).


CLS 423/584
TXT Products or processes under subclass 582 wherein the compound is hydrogen
    peroxide (H2O2).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272+,   for hydrogen peroxide with a stabilizer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, subclasses 293+ for processes for
    purifying hydrogen peroxide and aqueous solutions thereof not involving a
    chemical reaction and not otherwise provided for.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclasses, for
    processes for preparing hydrogen peroxide which involve the use of
    electrical or wave energy.


CLS 423/585
TXT Processes under subclass 584 wherein the preparation of hydrogen peroxide
    includes the use of permonosulfuric acid (H2SO5) or perdisulfuric acid
    (H2S2O8) or the corresponding sulfate salts.

    (1)     Note.  These acids may also be identified as peroxymonosulfuric or
    peroxydisulfuric, respectively.

    (2)     Note.  Included under this definition are processes describing the
    distillation of persulfuric acid or a persulfate compound to produce
    hydrogen peroxide.  However, there must first be a hydrolysis with water to
    form hydrogen peroxide which is then distilled from the mixture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, appropriate subclasses, for
    specific distillation processes for separating hydrogen peroxide from a
    mixture.


CLS 423/586
TXT Processes under subclass 584 wherein the preparation of hydrogen peroxide
    includes the use of an inorganic peroxide compound (e.g., Na2O2, BaO2, etc).


CLS 423/587
TXT Processes under subclass 584 wherein the preparation of hydrogen peroxide
    includes the use of an organic compound as reactant.


CLS 423/588
TXT Processes under subclass 587 wherein the preparation of hydrogen peroxide
    includes the step of oxidizing a reactant comprising a hydroquinone or an
    anthraquinone, or substituted forms thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are disclosures which describe
    cyclic processes in which hydroquinone or anthrahydroquinone is first
    oxidized to form hydrogen peroxide and a quinone or anthraquinone.  The
    latter two compounds are than reduced to the corresponding hydroquinone or
    anthrahydroquinone which is then oxidized to again form the hydrogen
    peroxide and the quinone or hydroquinone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    552,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 208+ for processes for reducing
    anthroquinone to anthroahydrouquinone; subclasses 291+ and 293+ for
    processes for reducing quinone to hydroquinone.


CLS 423/589
TXT Processes under subclass 588 in which a reactant is dissolved in a solvent
    comprising an ester.


CLS 423/590
TXT Processes under subclass 588 in which a reactant is dissolved in a solvent
    comprising alcohol.


CLS 423/591
TXT Processes under subclass 587 in which the preparation of hydrogen peroxide
    includes the step of oxidizing an alcohol or a hydrocarbon.


CLS 423/592
TXT Products or processes under subclass 579 wherein the product is a compound
    which contains oxygen and metal.

    (1)     Note.  In this and some indented subclasses there will be found
    older patents in which the term "peroxide" obviously means dioxde, since
    the required O22- for a peroxide is not present, and classification in
    subclasses 582 and 583 is therefore precluded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    581,    for superoxides which contains a metal.

    582     and 583, for peroxides which contain a metal.


CLS 423/593
TXT Products or processes under subclass 592 wherein the compound contains two
    or more metals or has a metal and the ammonium (NH4+) radical.


CLS 423/594
TXT Products or processes under subclass 582 which comprise iron, cobalt or
    nickel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for processes of treating mixtures to obtain aluminum hydroxide or
    hydrate of aluminum, including the steps of (1) forming an insoluble
    substance in a liquid and, (2) chemically forming an hydroxide or a hydrate.


CLS 423/595
TXT Products or processes under subclass 593 which comprises chromium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for processes of treating mixtures to obtain a plural metal
    compound wherein one of the metals is chromium, including the step of
    forming an insoluble substance in a liquid.


CLS 423/596
TXT Products or processes under subclass 595 wherein the compound also contains
    the ammonium (NH4+) radical or a metal of the alkali or a metal of the
    alkali or the alkaline earth groups.


CLS 423/597
TXT Products or processes under subclass 596 wherein the compound is in the
    form of a dichromate (Cr2O72-).


CLS 423/598
TXT Products or processes under subclass 593 wherein the compound contains
    titanium.


CLS 423/599
TXT Products or processes under subclass 593 wherein the compound contains
    maganese.


CLS 423/600
TXT Products or processes under subclass 593 wherein the compound contains
    aluminum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119+,   for processes of treating mixtures to obtain an alkali metal
    aluminate.


CLS 423/601
TXT Products or processes under subclass 593 wherein the compound contains
    arsenic.


CLS 423/602
TXT Products or processes under subclass 601 in which the arsenic has a valence
    of +5 and is in the form of arsenate [i.e., metal arsenate (AS O3-), ortho
    arsenate (AsO43-) and pyroarsenate (AS2O74-)].


CLS 423/603
TXT Products or processes under subclass 602 wherein the arsenate contains lead
    as the other metal.


CLS 423/604
TXT Products or process under subclass 592 in which the metal is copper, silver
    or gold (i.e., Group I B).


CLS 423/605
TXT Products or processes under subclass 592 in which the metal is from Group
    VII B (i.e., manganese, technetium or rhenium).


CLS 423/606
TXT Products or processes under subclass 592 wherein the metal is chromium,
    molybdenum or tungsten (Group VIB).


CLS 423/607
TXT Products or processes under subclass 606 wherein the metal is chromium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    595,    for compound which contain oxygen chromium and another metal or
    ammonium.


CLS 423/608
TXT Products or processes under subclass 592 wherein the metal in titanium,
    zirconium or hafnium (Group IV B).


CLS 423/609
TXT Products or processes under subclass 608 wherein the metal is titanium and
    the compound is the monoxide (TiO) or the sesquioxide (Ti2 O3 or Ti; (OH)3).


CLS 423/610
TXT Product or products or processes under subclass 608 wherein ,the, compound
    is titanium dioxide (T.O2).


CLS 423/611
TXT Processes under subclass 610 wherein the preparation of titanium dioxide
    includes the use of a titanium halide reactant.


CLS 423/612
TXT Processes under subclass 611 wherein the reactant is a titanium tetrahalide
    (e.g., TiFl4, TiBr4, etc.).


CLS 423/613
TXT Processes under subclass 612 wherein the tetrahalide is oxidized by a gas.


CLS 423/614
TXT Processes under subclass 613 wherein the oxidation takes place in a
    fluidized bed.


CLS 423/615
TXT Processes under subclass 610 in which the preparation of titanium dioxide
    includes the use of titanium sulfate as a reactant.


CLS 423/616
TXT Processes under subclass 615 in which an acid is associated with the
    process in any manner (e.g., as a solvent, as a reactant, etc.).


CLS 423/617
TXT Products or processes under subclass 592 wherein the metal is antimony,
    bismuth or arsenic (Group V A).

    (1)     Note.  Arsenic is defined as a metal for the purpose of this class.


CLS 423/618
TXT Products or processes under subclass 592 wherein the metal is germanium,
    tin or lead (Group IV A).


CLS 423/619
TXT Products or processes under subclass 618 wherein the metal is lead.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97,     for processes of treating mixtures to recover lead wherein the lead
    is recovered as lead oxide, by volatization.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process, subclasses 225+ for lead electrodes for batteries.


CLS 423/620
TXT Processes under subclass 619 including the step of utilizing lead in the
    elemental or metallic form as a reactant.


CLS 423/621
TXT Processes under subclass 620 in which the elemental lead is in the fused or
    liquid state.


CLS 423/622
TXT Products or processes under subclass 592 wherein the metal is zinc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101+,   for processes of treating mixtures to obtain a zinc containing
    compound, including the step of forming an insoluble substance in a liquid.


CLS 423/623
TXT Processes under subclass 622 which include the step of causing a normally
    solid or liquid substance comprising zinc in either its element or compound
    form to pass into a gas or vapor, see Glossary.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107+,   for processes of treating mixtures to obtain a zinc-oxy compound,
    including the step of volatizing a Group II B metal.


CLS 423/624
TXT Products or Processes under subclass 592 wherein the metal is aluminum,
    gallium, thallium or indium (Group III A) or beryllium.


CLS 423/625
TXT Products or processes under subclass 624 wherein the metal is aluminum.


CLS 423/626
TXT Processes under subclass 625 in which the preparation of the aluminum
    compound includes the use of an acid in any manner (e.g., as a solvent, as
    a reactant, etc.).


CLS 423/627
TXT Processes under subclass 625 in which the preparation of the compound
    includes a reaction between aluminum in elemental form and water in the
    liquid or vapor form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    657,    for processes of making hydrogen by reacting water and a metal.


CLS 423/628
TXT Products or processes under subclass 625 wherein the compound is
    alumina(A12O3) and in the process has become "activated" or has had its
    pore size adjusted for use in a catalyst or a sorbent.


CLS 423/629
TXT Products or processes under 625 wherein the compound is aluminum hydroxide,
    (A1 (OH)3).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for processes of treating mixtures to obtain aluminum hydroxide or
    hydrate of aluminum, including the steps of (1) forming an insoluble
    substance in a liquid and, (2) chemically forming an hydroxide or a hydrate.


CLS 423/630
TXT Processes under subclass 625 in which preparation of the aluminum compound
    includes the use of carbon or a compound thereof as a reactant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137,    for processes of reducing an ore with carbon to obtain an aluminum
    containing compound.


CLS 423/631
TXT Processes under subclass 625 in which preparation of the aluminum compound
    includes the use of a nitrogen compound as a reactant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    626,    for processes wherein the nitrogen containing compound reactant is
    nitric acid.


CLS 423/632
TXT Products or processes under subclass 592 wherein the metal is iron.

    (1)     Note.  Ferriferous oxide (Fe3O4) may be merely a mixture of one
    part ferrous oxide (FeO) and one part ferricoxide (Fe2O3).  Such a compound
    (Fe3O4) will be considered a compound for this Class 423 and will be
    classified in this subclass 632 and not in subclass 633 below.  However, if
    the ratio of the FeO to the Fe2O3 is other than one-to-one (stoichiometric)
    or if a range is given, the product will be considered a composition and
    the patent will be classified in the appropriate composition class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151,    for making magnetic Fe3O4 from impure starting materials such as
    ores or waste products.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 456+ for a pigment
    composition which may comprise a mixture of ferrous and ferric oxides, in
    which the oxides are present in other than one-to-one proportion
    (stoichlometric) or in which mixture one of the oxide is stated to be
    present in a range of parts (between 1 part and 3 parts, etc.).

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 62.51+, especially 62.56 and 410+,
    especially 472 for a magnetic composition and a catalyst or adsorbent
    composition, respectively, which may comprise a mixture of ferrous and
    ferric oxides, in which the oxides are present in other than a one-to-one
    proportion (stoichiometric) or in which mixture one of the oxides is stated
    to be present in a range of parts (between 1 part and 3 parts, etc).

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, subclasses 94+ for ceramic refractory
    compositions which may comprise a mixture of ferrous and ferric oxides, in
    which the oxides are present in other than a one-to-one proportion
    (stoichiometric) or in which mixture one of the oxides is stated to be
    present in a range of parts (between 1 part and 3 parts, etc.).


CLS 423/633
TXT Products or processes under subclass 632 wherein the compound is ferric
    oxide (Fe2O3).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    632,    for ferriferous oxide (Fe3O4) composed of a one to one mixture of
    ferrous oxide (FeO) and ferric oxide  (Fe2O3) and see (1) Note thereunder.


CLS 423/634
TXT Products or processes under subclass 633 wherein the ferric oxide is
    described as having cubic or gamma crystalline structure.


CLS 423/635
TXT Products or processes under subclass 592 wherein the metal is magnesium,
    calcium, strontium, or barium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164,    for processes of treating mixtures to obtain a hydrate or hydroxide
    of an alkaline earth metal, including the steps of (1) forming an insoluble
    substance in a liquid and (2) chemically forming a hydrate or a hydroxide.


CLS 423/636
TXT Processes under subclass 635 for making the compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158+,   for processes of treating mixture to obtain an alkaline earth metal
    oxygen containing compound, including the step of forming an insoluble
    substance in a liquid.


CLS 423/637
TXT Processes under subclass 636 in which a carbonate (CO32-) is utilized as a
    reactant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173+,   for processes of treating mixtures to obtain alkaline earth metal
    containing oxides.


CLS 423/638
TXT Processes under subclass 636 in which a compound of sulfur is utilized as a
    reactant.


CLS 423/639
TXT Processes under subclass 636 in which a compound of nitrogen or a halogen
    is utilized as a reactant.


CLS 423/640
TXT Processes under subclass 636 in which lime (CaO) is mixed with water to
    form the hydrate.


CLS 423/641
TXT Products or processes under subclass 592 wherein the metal is lithium,
    sodium, potassium, rubidium or cesium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179+,   for methods of obtaining alkali metal containing compounds wherein
    the starting starting materials are impure, i.e., mixtures.


CLS 423/642
TXT Processes under subclass 641 in which preparation of the compound includes
    the use of a compound of sulfur as a reactant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183,    for processes of treating mixtures to regenerate hydroxide
    solutions by reacting a sulfur containing compound to form an alkali metal
    hydroxide.


CLS 423/643
TXT Processes under subclass 641 in which preparation of the compound includes
    the use of a compound of nitrogen or a halogen as a reactant.


CLS 423/644
TXT Products or processes under the class definition wherein the product is
    hydrogen or a compound thereof.


CLS 423/645
TXT Products or processes under subclass 644 wherein the compound contains
    hydrogen and only one additional element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    347,    for binary compounds which contains only hydrogen and silicon.


CLS 423/646
TXT Products or processes under subclass 645 wherein the additional element is
    an alkali metal.


CLS 423/647
TXT Products or processes under subclass 645 wherein the additional element is
    an alkaline earth metal.


CLS 423/647.7
TXT Deuterium-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 644 concerned with a heavier, nonradioactive
    isotope of hydrogen; usually, the product is a hydrogen stream enriched in
    deuterium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249,    for a tritium compound or a method for recovering tritium or a
    tritium compound.

    580.2,  for deuterium oxide (heavy water), and a process of making.


CLS 423/648.1
TXT Elemental hydrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 644 wherein the product is hydrogen in
    elemental form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclasses 197+ for the manufacture
    of elemental hydrogen in association with other gases for use as a fuel.

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, for production of elemental
    hydrogen by a process included therein, especially subclasses 157.4+ for
    the synthesis of hydrogen by wave energy (e.g., photolysis, sonic or shock
    waves, etc.).

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, for production of elemental hydrogen by a
    process included therein, especially subclasses 628+, for the synthesis of
    hydrogen by electrolysis.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 372+, for the manufacture of elemental
    hydrogen, in association with other gases, for uses other than as a fuel,
    e.g., as a feedstock to a chemical reaction, etc.


CLS 423/649
TXT Processes under subclass 648.1 including the conversion of ortho hydrogen
    to para hydrogen (i.e., protons of molecules spin in same or opposite
    directions, respectively or vice versa).


CLS 423/650
TXT Processes under subclass 648.1 in which preparation of the hydrogen
    includes the step of decomposing a hydrocarbon (i.e., a compound consisting
    of only hydrogen and carbon).


CLS 423/651
TXT Processes under subclass 650 in which a catalyst is utilized in the
    decomposition; see Glossary.


CLS 423/652
TXT Processes under subclass 651 in which water is also decomposed.


CLS 423/653
TXT Processes under subclass 652 wherein any material which is part of the
    catalyst (e.g, catalyst, promoter, support, etc.), contains nickel in
    metallic or compound form.


CLS 423/654
TXT Processes under subclass 653 comprising another metal in addition to nickel
    as part of the catalyst structure (e.g., catalyst, promoter, support, etc.).


CLS 423/655
TXT Processes under subclass 648.1 in which preparation of the hydrogen
    includes the step of reacting water in any state with carbon monoxide.


CLS 423/656
TXT Processes under subclass 655 wherein a catalyst containing the oxide of a
    metal is utilized.


CLS 423/657
TXT Processes under subclass 648.1 in which preparation of the hydrogen
    includes the step of reacting water in any state or liquid water containing
    a solute with a metal or compound thereof.


CLS 423/658
TXT Processes under subclass 657 wherein the metal is iron.


CLS 423/658.2
TXT By direct decomposition of binary compound; e.g., chemical storage, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 648.1 wherein the elemental hydrogen is
    obtained directly from a compound of hydrogen containing only one other
    element, without intermediate transfer to a compound containing more than
    one other element.

    (1)     Note.  The other member of the binary hydrogen compound need not
    enter the elementary state for the process to be considered "decomposition".

    (2)     Note.  Where an alloy of two or more metals is hydrided and
    hydrogen is recovered from the hydride, the process is proper for placement
    in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 228+ and 251+ for a metal powder composition
    chemically reactive with hydrogen to form a hydride or hydrides, which
    hydrided metal composition can readily yield back hydrogen.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 0.7 for a gas storage
    receptacle containing an "absorbent".

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 188.25 and 188.26 for compositions
    chemically reactive with hydrogen to form a hydride or hydrides which
    hydrided composition can readily yield back hydrogen.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, appropriate subclasses for such
    compositions chemically reactive with hydrogen to form a hydride or
    hydrides which yielded composition can readily yield back hydrogen.


CLS 423/658.3
TXT By reaction of impurities in a stream containing elemental hydrogen:

    Subject matter under subject 648.1 wherein a stream containing elemental
    hydrogen is enriched in hydrogen by the chemical reaction of other
    substances to remove them from the stream.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248,    for a method of chemically purifying a gaseous stream containing
    hydrogen where recovery of the hydrogen is not contemplated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, for a process for enriching a hydrogen
    stream by nonchemical removal of impurities therefrom.


CLS 423/658.5
TXT Processes under the class definition for extracting, leaching or dissolving
    of a product not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is the locus for patents whose claims and
    disclosure are not limited to a particular product, i.e., inorganic
    compound or nonmetallic element provided for in Class 423.

    (2)     Note.  A patent in which the claims are not limited to extracting,
    leaching or dissolving a specific product will be classified on the basis
    of its disclosure as follows:



    (a) If the disclosure includes a product for this class as well one
    provided for in another class (e.g., Class 260, etc.), the patent will be
    classified above in the appropriate subclass providing for the specific
    product and cross reference in this subclass 658.5, as well as in the other
    class, if appropriate.

    (b) If the disclosure is limited to a product provided for in another class
    (e.g., Class 260 etc.), classification in the other class is proper.

    (c) If the disclosure does not include a product provided for in Class 423,
    but includes a product provided for in each of a plurality of other classes
    (e.g., Class 208 and Class 260), patent is properly classified in this
    subclass 658.5 with appropriate cross references as required.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      24, 54, 53, 70, 112, 139, 157, and 181, for processes utilizing
    liquid or liquid extraction to separate desired metallic compounds from
    mixtures.

    20,     27, 68, 86, 98, 109, 131, 150, and 208, for processes utilizing
    leaching, washing, or dissolving to separate desired metallic compounds
    from mixtures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, appropriate subclasses for
    extracting mineral oil fractions and subclasses 311+ for processes of
    extracting mineral oil to dissolve and remove desired portions therefrom.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 632 and 633+ for a
    process purifying a liquid by solute or liquid extraction.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, appropriate subclasses for
    extracting particular compounds and subclass 705 for processes of general
    application for extracting carbon compounds.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclasses 833+, for a process
    of purifying a hydrocarbon by solvent extraction.


CLS 423/659
TXT Subject matter under the class definition not provided for in any of the
    preceding subclasses.


CLS 423/700
TXT ZEOLITE:
    Products or processes of making  under the class definition wherein the
    product is zeolite.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are zeolites, as defined in Class
    502, having ion exchange  properties, generally represented by the
    following formula:

    0.8 - 1.0 M2O : Y2O3 : n XO2 : b H2O

    where
    M is an ion exchangeable cation;
    X is an element of valence +4;
    Y is an element of valence +3;
    n is a number greater than 1;  and
    b is the number of moles of water (typically in a range of 1-500).

    This class of compounds is considered to be particular enough so that the
    (13) Note in the main class definition does not apply, and these zeolite
    substances will be considered compounds for Class 423.

            The rationale behind this consideration is that zeolites may be
    interpreted either as a range of values or as specifically defined values,
    though in a form of decimal or fractional amounts, these formulas designate
    a definite compound or complex.

    This class of compounds, zeolites, are considered products for Class 423,
    unless mixed with an additive whose function is not solely to perfect the
    product, see (6) Note of subclass 265.

    (2)     Note.  Zeolites include crystalline structures having an additional
    property of being molecular sieves, i.e., having a uniform pore size;
    however, carbon based "molecular sieves" such as graphite intercalation
    compounds, coals, and polymers are excluded from this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  The term "zeolite" has also been used to designate other
    substances such as organic resins which ion exchange with other substances;
    comments of (1) Note are intended to apply only to crystalline inorganic
    compounds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327.1+, for amorphous and layered aluminosilicates, clays, and feldspars.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, appropriate subclasses for zeolites specifically structured to
    catalyze or sorb a component.


CLS 423/701
TXT Organic compound used to form zeolite:
    Processes under subclass 700 wherein an  organic compound is used in
    synthesizing the zeolite.


CLS 423/702
TXT Organic template used:
    Processes of making under subclass 701   wherein  the organic compound is
    used  as an agent for directing crystal lattice synthesis of the zeolite.


CLS 423/703
TXT Mixed template:
    Processes under subclass 702  wherein more than one  compound is used
    together in directing synthesis of the zeolite crystal.


CLS 423/704
TXT Nitrogen containing:
    Processes under subclass 702 wherein the template contains nitrogen.


CLS 423/705
TXT Amine:
    Processes under subclass 704 wherein the  template contains a compound
    having an amine grouping, i.e.,  NR3,  wherein at least one of the R groups
    is an organic radical.

    (1)     Note.  Inclusive in this subclass are primary amines (aminos),
    secondary amines (imines),  and tertiary amines (nitriles) all having an
    NR3   grouping wherein at least one of the R groups is an organic radical.


CLS 423/706
TXT Cyclic:
    Processes under subclass 705 wherein the amine is a ringed compound.


CLS 423/707
TXT Hydroxyl:
    Processes under subclass 705 wherein the amine  contains a hydroxy radical
    (-OH) group.


CLS 423/708
TXT Diamine:
    Processes under subclass 705 wherein the organic template contains two
    amine groups.


CLS 423/709
TXT Seed used:
    Processes under subclass 700 wherein the   zeolite is formed by providing a
    nucleus for zeolite crystal growth.


CLS 423/710
TXT Aging to induce zeolite formation from inorganic  mixture:
    Processes under subclass 700 wherein nuclei for the zeolite are allowed to
    form by passing of time during a period prior to crystallization.


CLS 423/711
TXT With physical treatment:
    Processes under subclass 710 including application of force or energy
    during aging.


CLS 423/712
TXT Synthesized from naturally occurring product:
    Processes under subclass 700 wherein the  zeolite is grown from materials
    that were not artificially produced or synthesized.


CLS 423/713
TXT Isomorphic metal substitution:
    Processes under subclass 700 wherein a  structural analogue of  zeolite is
    formed by substituting one or more elements into a zeolite  crystal, e.g.,
    partial or complete replacement of aluminum by silicon to form a silicon
    polymorph such as silicalite.

    (1)     Note.  This substitution may occur after or during zeolite
    synthesis.

    (2)     Note.  Not included in this subclass is precipitation of an element
    on a surface of the zeolite such as by ion exchange processes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 660+ for ion exchange
    processes.


CLS 423/714
TXT Acid treatment:
    Processes under subclass 713   wherein zeolite structural analogues are
    formed by treatment with acid.


CLS 423/715
TXT Halogen containing acid:
    Process under subclass 714 wherein the  treatment is with an acid having a
    halogen element (e.g., HCl).


CLS 423/716
TXT With change of synthesized zeolite morphology:
    Processes under subclass 700 wherein a synthesized zeolite of one
    structural type is converted to a different structural type.


CLS 423/717
TXT Physical treatment:
    Processes under subclass 716 including using mechanical force or energy.


CLS 423/718
TXT Structure defined by X-ray diffraction pattern:
    Products under subclass 700 wherein a  zeolite structure is identified by a
    diffraction grating produced by  an X-ray passing through it.

    (1)     Note.  Original patents in this subclass require an X-ray
    diffraction pattern referenced in the claim.


CLS 424/
TTL DRUG, BIO-AFFECTING AND BODY TREATING COMPOSITIONS

CLS 424/
TXT CONTENTS


    I.      STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    II.     CLASSIFICATION LINES WITH OTHER CLASSES

    A.      Index to lines in subclasses and sections of this class

    B.      General class lines

    C.      Lines with related composition classes

    D.      Lines with other classes

    III.    SEARCH NOTES

    A.      Compounds and Compositions

    B.      Processes of Use involving Class 424 subject matter

    C.      Other processes

    D.      Apparatus and Articles

    IV.     INDEX TO CLASSES NOTED IN CLASS DEFINITION SECTIONS AND SUBCLASSES
    OF THIS CLASS

    V.      GLOSSARY

    VI.     CLASSIFICATION GUIDELINES FOR THIS CLASS

    VII.    SUBCLASS DEFINITIONS

    I.      STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    This class includes the following subject matter, not provided for
    elsewhere, when a utility set forth below is either (a) claimed or (b)
    solely disclosed.

    A.      DRUG AND BIO-AFFECTING COMPOSITIONS which are generally capable of:

    1.      Preventing, alleviating, treating, or curing abnormal and
    pathological conditions of the living body by such means as:

    a.      destroying a parasitic organism

    b.      limiting the affect of the disease or abnormality by chemically
    altering the physiology of the host or parasite.

    2.      Maintaining, increasing, decreasing, limiting, or destroying a
    physiologic body function; e.g., vitamin compositions, sex sterilants,
    fertility inhibitors, growth promotors, etc.

    3.      Diagnosing a physiological condition or state by an in vivo test;
    e.g., X-ray contrast, etc.

    4.      Controlling or protecting an environment or living body by
    attracting, disabling, inhibiting, killing, modifying, repelling or
    retarding an animal or micro-organism.  For example:

    a.      Nonfood baits, attractants, and lures

    b.      Biocides including antibiotics of undetermined structure

    c.      Warfare gases such as lachrymators, sternutators, etc.

    d.      Chemical pest repellents and adhesive trapping agents.

    B.      BODY TREATING COMPOSITIONS generally intended for deodorizing,
    protecting, adorning, or grooming a body; e.g., cosmetics, dentifrices,
    embalming fluids, etc.

    C.      FERMENTATES (e.g., antibiotics, etc.), PLANT AND ANIMAL EXTRACTS,
    OR BODY FLUIDS OR MATERIAL CONTAINING PLANT OR ANIMAL CELLULAR STRUCTURE,
    PER SE, intended to be used for the purposes set forth in A and B above and
    whose chemical structure is not sufficiently known to be classified
    elsewhere.

    D.      COMPOSITIONS OF THIS CLASS DEFINED IN TERMS OF SPECIFIC STRUCTURE;
    e.g., layered tablet, capsule, etc.

    The lines generally prevailing between the composition classes and the
    article classes are applicable to Class 424, unless otherwise indicated,
    with the exception that Class 424 provides for a composition, per se,
    defined in terms of specific structure having a utility for Class 424 (see
    subclasses 400+).

    E.      PROCESSES OF USING the subject matter of A. - D. above or
    compounds, per se, for  the purposes set forth in A. and B. (See Process
    Section under III SEARCH NOTES for Use Processes involving Class 424
    subject matter classified elsewhere.)

    F.      PROCESSES OF PREPARING subject matter of A. - D.

    G.      ADJUVANT OR CARRIER COMPOSITIONS, PER SE, for perfecting
    compositions for this class.

    (1)     Note.  This class is the generic home for compositions for treating
    a living body and for controlling a pest.

    (2)     Note.  The terms "mere use" or "mere application" as employed in
    the definitions of Class 424 and the search notes in other classes which
    refer to Class 424 are defined to encompass only a single step process and
    include expressions such as applying, contacting, dipping, spraying,
    injecting, combusting, administering orally, etc., recited either along or
    with recitations such as dosage amount or the treatment of a specific
    environment, organism, or body part. Examples of expressions considered
    mere use or mere application are "injecting 3 cc. of compound x into a
    vein" and "burning 20 grams of a sulfur fumigant in a room".

    II.     CLASSIFICATION LINES WITH OTHER CLASSES

    A.      Index to lines in subclasses and sections of Class 424.

                    CLASS 424

    CLASS           SUBCLASS OR SECTION

    8,      Bleaching and   3, 62, 63,      II C,

            Dyeing; Fluid   70, 71, 75,     III A,

            Treatment and   78.02, 78.04,   III B,

            Chemical        401, 405, 429,  III C,

            Modification    520, 613        IV

            of Textiles

            and Fibers

    15,     Brushing,               II A,

            Scrubbing,              II D-2

            and General             IV

            Cleaning

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical    IV

            Processes

    43,     Fishing,        40, 77, 405     II D-1,

            Trapping, and           III B

            Vermin           III D-1,

            Destroying              IV

    71,     Chemistry:      93, 400,        II B-2,

            Fertilizers     405, 529        IV

    106,    Compositions:   48, 61, 63, 69, II B-2,

            Coating or      77, 78.08, 115, III A,

            Plastic 400, 401, 405   IV

    119,    Animal  40, 405 II C-1,

            Husbandry               II D-1,

                            III B,

                             III D-1,

                            IV

    127,    Sugar, Starch,          II C-1,

            and Carbohy-            III A,

            drates          IV

    128,    Surgery 2, 62, 73       II D-1,

                    78.06, 78.08,   III B,

                    115, 447, 451    III D-1,

                    464, 481, 529,  IV,

                    561

    131,    Tobacco         II C-1,

                             III D-2,

                            IV

    132,    Toilet  48, 62, 71,     II D,

                    73, 401 III B,

                            III D-2,

                            IV

    206,    Special Re-     48, 412,        III D-1

            ceptacle or     451     IV

            Package

    210,    Liquid Pur-     124, 520,       III B,

            ification or    529     III D,

            Separation              IV

    252,    Compositions    1.1, 2, 4, 6,   II B-2,

                    40, 43, 59,     IV

                    61, 62, 70,

                    73, 76.1,

                    76.3, 76.4,

                    78.04, 94.3.

                    115, 405,

                    429, 520,

                    613

    260,    Chemistry       5, 76.1, 115    II B-2,

            of Carbon       123, 197.1      III A,

            Compounds       405, 546        IV

    264,    Plastic and     490     II D-1,

            Nonmetallic             III C,

            Article Shaping         IV

            or Treating:

            Processes

    422,    Chemical        40, 65, 76.1    II D-1,

            Apparatus       78.04, 90,      III B,

            and Process     429      III D-1,

            Disinfecting,           III D-2,

            Deodorizing,            IV

            Preserving,

            or Sterilizing

    426,    Food or Edible  73.08, 92, 115, II C-1,

            Material: Pro-  410, 428, 520,  III A,

            cesses, Composi-        529, 535        IV

            tions, and Prod-

            ucts

    427,    Coating Pro-    1.1, 2, 75,     II D-1,

            cesses, 77, 78.08,      III B,

                    411, 490        IV

    428,    Stock Material  409, 411,       II D-1,

            or Miscella-    443, 490        IV

            neous Articles

    435,    Chemistry:      1.1, 2, 9, 85.1 II C-1,

            Molecular Biol- 85.8, 89, 90,   II D-1,

            ogy and Micro-  92, 93, 94.2    III A,

            biology 94.21, 94.3     III B,

                    94.4, 94.5,     IV

                    94.6, 94.61,

                    94.62, 94.63,

                    94.64, 94.66,

                    94.67, 115

                    123, 529,

                    561

    585,    Chemistry of    76.3, 77        II A,

            Hydrocarbon     520     II B-2,

            Compounds               II C

                            IV





    B.      General class lines

    1.      Compound Classes

    a.      Where a patent claims a composition in nominal terminology only;
    e.g., "A composition comprising a therapeutic amount of compound X", and
    there are no claims to a method of use, or true mixture, the original has
    been placed with the compound claimed.  Some examples of nominal
    terminology are: "comprising as an active ingredient", "containing an
    effective amount of", "containing a lethal amount of, etc.

    b.      Where a patent claims dosage units (in the absence of more
    comprehensive or controlling claims as indicated below); e.g., "a tablet
    comprising (or containing) 15 grains of compound X" and in the absence of
    any structural limitations, definite shape, surface deformation, etc., the
    original has been placed with the compound.

    c.      Where a patent claims a composition wherein (1) another ingredient
    is recited, however broadly, or (2) proportions are recited, the original
    has been placed in Class 424.  Some examples of claims reciting the
    following types of terminology are included herewith:  "with a carrier",
    "with a solvent", "with an adjuvant", "with an emulsifier", "wetting
    agent", "solubilizer", "surface active agent", "extending agent",
    "buffering agent", "from 5% to 90%", "at least .05%", "minor proportion of
    compound X and major portions of carrier", etc.

    d.      Where a patent contains at least one claim to a method of use, even
    if only nominally recited; e.g., "a method of killing insects by applying
    compound X", the original has been placed in Class 424 (except when another
    use is also claimed which is superior to Class 424).

    e.      Where the patent claims an animal or plant extract of undetermined
    constitution, which is solely disclosed as being suitable for a Class 424
    utility, the original will go to Class 424.  Processes for obtaining such
    extracts will also be classified in Class 424 unless specifically provided
    for elsewhere.

    1a.     Cross References From Compound Classes

    In most instances, cross-referencing from the compound classes into Class
    424 has been limited to those disclosures which provide (1) a specific
    composition; e.g., numerical values setting forth definite amounts for all
    ingredients of the composition having Class 424 properties, and (2)
    processes of using a compound for a Class 424 purpose wherein the process
    is significant in that it sets forth the administration of the active
    ingredient in more than just nominal terminology, i.e., it recites
    administering a specific amount of a compound to treat a specific condition
    in a specified host.  Patents containing a mere recitation that a compound
    may be administered; e.g., orally, in association with an unspecified
    pharmaceutical carrier will be excluded as cross-references.

    2.      Composition Classes

    The following general lines exist between Class 424 and the other
    composition classes or with classes containing patents wherein the claims
    recite a composition limited to an art use provided for in that class.

    a.      Compositions which are disclosed as having a plurality of uses,
    properties, or functions provided for in different main classes and only a
    single use, property, or function is claimed, are placed in the composition
    providing for such claimed use, property, or function and cross-referenced
    to other classes for disclosed uses, properties, or functions when
    desirable.

    b.      A list of superiority of composition classes appears in the main
    class definition of Class 252 Compositions (5) Note.  This note in Class
    252 explains classification of a generic composition with several disclosed
    uses.

    504,    Plant Protecting and Regulating Compositions

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions

    71,     Chemistry: Fertilizers,

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges

    508,    Solid Antifriction Devices, Materials Therefor, Lubricant and
    Separant Compositions for Moving Solid Surfaces, and Miscellaneous Mineral
    Oil Compositions

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions

    148,    Metal Treatment

    252,    Compositions, (special uses and functions) through subclass 88.2.


    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions.

    252,    Compositions, (special uses and functions) through subclass 194.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 1+

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds

    252,    Compositions, (nonspecial uses or functions).

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products.



    This superiority list is not intended as a complete list and will be
    expanded or added to as the relationship between other classes containing
    compositions and the above listed classes are determined.





    C.      Lines with related composition classes

    CLASS 504



    1.      Class 504 PLANT PROTECTING AND REGULATING COMPOSITIONS, provides
    for compositions having a stimulating, inhibiting (herbicides), or
    regulating action on plant growth and methods of using such compositions.
    Class 504 specifically provides for algicidal compositions in subclasses
    150+ and fertilizer compositions which contain an insecticide, fungicide,
    or deodorant in subclasses 101+.  Class 504 is superior to Class 424.  (See
    section II, B, 2, b, above).

    2.      If claims are drawn to a "pesticide" composition or method without
    specifically reciting the nature of the "pest" to be controlled or
    eradicated, the patent is placed as original in Class 424 when only a Class
    424 type of "pest" (e.g., fungi, insect, rodent, etc.) is revealed in the
    patent disclosure.  However, if both Class 504 and Class 424 types of
    "pest" are specifically disclosed or if no disclosure is made as to the
    specific type of pest, the patent is placed in Class 504 as original
               and cross-referenced to Class 424.

    CLASS 8



    1.      Class 8, BLEACHING AND DYEING; FLUID TREATMENT AND CHEMICAL
    MODIFICATION OF TEXTILES AND FIBERS, provides for processes of dyeing hair
    on a living animal, not provided for elsewhere, processes of depilating
    (i.e., removing hair, fur, or feathers) a living animal and for processes
    of chemical modification of hair not on a living body.  Class 8 also
    provides for compositions used in these processes.

    2.      Class 424 provides for a composition for treating hair (e.g.,
    waving etc.) on a living body, and methods of use which are no more than
    the mere application of the composition.  To be placed in Class 424, a
    patent must either specifically disclose or claim that the hair is on a
    living body; e.g., living hair, etc., or contain other disclosure which
    definitely indicates an intent to use the composition or process on a
    living body; e.g., not injurious to the person, etc.  Recitation that the
    hair is on the body; e.g., scalp, etc., will be presumed to indicate that
    the body is living in the absence of disclosure to the contrary.  The mere
    recitation "human hair" by itself is not enough to indicate that the hair
    is on a living body.

    CLASS 71



    1.      Class 71, CHEMISTRY:  FERTILIZERS, provides for compositions having
    a nutrient action on plant growth and methods of using such compositions.


    CLASS 426



    1.      Class 426, FOOD OR EDIBLE MATERIAL: PROCESSES, COMPOSITIONS, AND
    PRODUCTS, provides for compositions intended to nourish an animal by
    natural oral ingestion, which may contain an additive necessary to maintain
    the normal metabolism of the animal; e.g., vitamins, minerals, amino acids,
    etc.

    2.      Class 424 provides for compositions intended to nourish an animal
    when such compositions are designed to be administered to the animal by
    routes other than the oral cavity; e.g., by rectal or parenteral injection,
    or via a tube through the alimentary tract or stomach wall.

    3.      Class 424 provides for compositions containing a food or beverage
    when said compositions are claimed or solely disclosed as having a utility
    set forth in I above.  However, a food or beverage containing a biocide as
    a preservative therefore will be classified as original in Class 426.
    Class 424 also provides for methods of preserving Class 426 products when
    said methods are no more than the mere use of biocides.

    4.      Class 424 further provides for food or beverage compositions
    containing an animal growth regulator or other anabolic agents.  For
    purposes of classification, an animal growth regulator or anabolic agent is
    defined to include the following illustrative causative effects:

    a.      increase feed efficiency or weight gain

    b.      enhance color of egg yolks, combs, skin, or legs of chickens

    c.      enhance the hatchability of eggs

    d.      vary the fat-protein ratio or texture of flesh

    e.      chemically caponize an animal, etc.

    5.      Compositions wherein the nutritional ingredients fat, carbohydrate,
    or protein are varied to achieve a varied fat-flesh ratio in an animal or
    varied to meet the special nutritional needs of an abnormal metabolic
    condition; e.g., diabetes, etc., will not be considered as subject matter
    for Class 424.

    CLASS 106



    1.      Class 106, COMPOSITIONS:  COATING OR PLASTIC, provides for coating
    compositions which protect a base by forming a tough adherent film even
    though the composition also contains a biocide to protect the base against
    biological attack; e.g., marine antifouling paints, etc.

    2.      Materials or ingredients for coating and molding compositions
    (Class 106 appropriate subclasses) which are also useful as diluents or
    inert ingredients in pharmaceutical compositions are placed in Class 106
    unless a therapeutic or biocidal property is claimed. Surgical sponges
    claimed only as being made from Class 106 compositions are placed in Class
    106 if the sponge contains no active ingredient with a utility for Class
    424.  Patents claiming an ink suitable for coating or printing on
    pharmaceutical dosage units; e.g., tablets, etc., are placed in Class 106
    unless the coated or printed article is also claimed.

    3.      Class 424 provides for the following coating compositions:
    compositions intended to decorate or beautify the body; e.g., hair lacquer,
    fingernail polish, lipstick, etc.; coating compositions which do not
    protect the base by forming a tough, adherent film and whose sole function
    is as a carrier for a composition of Class 424 utility; e.g., "stickers"
    which adhere insecticides to plants etc., whether or not claimed in
    combination with an active ingredient; coating compositions applied to the
    body for therapeutic purposes even though a tough, adherent film is formed;
    and coating compositions which do not form tough, adherent films and which
    have a utility provided for in Class 424; e.g., salve, skin cream, or a
    solution of a material, for example, a mixture of phenols to protect wood
    against insect, etc.

    CLASS 119



    1.      Class 119, ANIMAL HUSBANDRY, provides for an animal litter
    composition, per se.

    2.      Class 424 takes litter compositions combined with a compound or
    composition having a Class 424 utility; e.g., a biocide, etc.

    CLASS 127



    1.      Class 127, SUGAR, STARCH, AND CARBOHYDRATES, provides for sugar,
    starch, and carbohydrates, per se, and their hydrolysis products, even if
    these materials have utility provided for in Class 424.

    2.      Class 424 provides for compositions containing sugar, starch, or
    carbohydrates; e.g., a blend of two carbohydrates, etc., having a claimed
    or solely disclosed utility provided for in Class 424.

    CLASS 131



    1.      Class 131, TOBACCO, provides for tobacco compositions to be
    employed to enhance the users' well-being or enjoyment when smoked, chewed,
    or inhaled including snuff, and takes these compositions even when they
    have a Class 424 utility; e.g., medicated smoking tobacco, etc.  Class 131
    also provides for tobacco substitutes or compositions intended to decrease
    the individual's need for tobacco and which are to be used in the same
    manner as tobacco; e.g., smoking, etc.

    2.      Class 424 takes a tobacco containing composition which is not
    intended to be smoked, chewed, etc. for the users' enjoyment; e.g., tobacco
    used as an insecticide, tobacco burned as a fumigant, etc., when said
    composition is claimed or solely disclosed for a Class 424 purpose.  If the
    tobacco containing composition has  plural functions with some functions
    provided for in Class 131 and some in Class 424, the patent will be placed
    in Class 131 as an original and crossed to Class 424.  Class 424 also
    provides for compositions intended to decrease a person's use of tobacco,
    but which are not intended to be smoked, chewed, etc., as tobacco; e.g.,
    ingested or injected, etc.

    CLASS 435



    1.      Class 435, CHEMISTRY:  MOLECULAR BIOLOGY AND MICROBIOLOGY, provides
    for enzymes, per se, which are not more specifically provided for
    elsewhere, and enzyme compositions containing a preservative unless a Class
    424 utility is recited in the claim or is the sole utility disclosed.
    Class 435 also takes a composition or method employing a line
    micro-organism for an in vitro  test.

    2.      Class 424 provides for fermentates; e.g., antibiotics, etc., of
    unknown chemical structure wherein the fermentate is claimed or disclosed
    to have a utility specified in Class 424.

    3.      Class 424 provides for compositions containing micro-organisms
    either alive, dead, or attenuated; enzymes or coenzymes; ferments or
    fermentates; antigens or antibodies which are claimed or solely disclosed
    to have a Class 424 utility and methods of using said compositions.

    4.      Class 424 provides for compositions for in vivo measuring, testing,
    or diagnosis and methods of using said compositions or a compound for in
    vivo measuring, testing or diagnosis. This includes in vivo testing
    compositions containing an enzyme.

    CLASS 252



    1.      Class 510, CLEANING COMPOSITIONS FOR SOLID SURFACES, AUXILIARY
    COMPOSITIONS THEREFOR, OR PROCESSES OF PREPARING THE COMPOSITIONS, provides
    for biocide containing cleaning and detergent compositions having a mere
    cleaning function.


    2.      Class 252 provides for compositions specifically classified therein
    protected against biological attack by a composition otherwise classifiable
    in Class 424.  Class 252, subclasses 380+ provides for stabilized
    compositions where the ingredients other than the stabilizers are claimed
    so broadly as not to furnish a basis of classification (e.g., a carbon
    compound, etc.).

    3.      See Class 512 for perfume compositions, per se.

    4.      Class 424 takes all other detergent or emulsifier containing
    compositions which are claimed or solely disclosed for a Class 424 purpose.

    CLASS 260



    1.      Class 260, CHEMISTRY OF CARBON COMPOUNDS, provides for a compound
    classified therein containing a preservative; e.g., to protect the compound
    against biological attack, etc., when there is no claim to an art use for
    the mixture.

    CLASS 585



    1.      Class 585, CHEMISTRY OF HYDROCARBON COMPOUNDS, provides for a
    composition which is a blend of hydrocarbon compounds only and for a blend
    of a hydrocarbon with a nonhydrocarbon preservative.

    CLASS 423



    1.      Class 423, CHEMISTRY OF INORGANIC COMPOUNDS, provides for
    compositions containing an element or an inorganic compound combined with a
    preservative; e.g., a substance which protects the element or compound
    against biological attack, etc.  However, a Class 423 element or compound
    containing a preservative, in which state it is claimed or solely disclosed
    as having a Class 424 utility, is placed as an original in Class 424.

    D.      Lines with other classes

    CLASS 43



    1.      Class, 43, FISHING, TRAPPING, AND VERMIN DESTROYING, provides for
    apparatus for trapping or destroying vermin; i.e., animals injurious or
    pestiferous to man. The apparatus may utilize a composition classifiable in
    Class 424; e.g., attractant, nonfood bait, poison, etc. Class 43 structural
    elements containing a Class 424 composition must have more structure than,
    for example, that represented by a mere coated or impregnated base; e.g.,
    flypaper of a particular shape or dimension, etc.  Class 43 also provides
    for fumigating candles used for destroying vermin claimed in terms of more
    structure than a compound or composition containing a nominal wick.

    2.      Class 43 provides for a process of trapping or destroying vermin
    which is more than the mere application of a compound or Class 424
    composition.

    3.      Class 424 takes methods of destroying vermin which are no more than
    a single step of mere application of a compound or a Class 424 composition.

    4.      Class 424 takes articles for trapping or destroying vermin claimed
    in terms of no more structure than a coating or impregnant on a base.
    Class 424 also takes fumigating candles of no more structure than compound
    or composition nominally containing a wick.

    CLASS 119



    1.      Class 119, ANIMAL HUSBANDRY, provides for the treatment of animals
    other than man to increase their growth rate, produce a superior quality or
    quantity of meat, control their sex or the killing of unwanted organisms
    which interfere with the growth or well-being of the desired animal if the
    method is more than the mere application or applications of a Class 424
    composition or compositions.

    2.      Class 424 takes a process of treatment of an animal with a compound
    or composition for a Class 424 purpose which process is a single step or a
    plurality of steps, each step individually being no more than a mere
    application of a compound or composition, and there is no manipulative step
    included.

    CLASS 128



    1.      Class 128, SURGERY, provides for bandages, body applicators or body
    dressings which contain a medicine and are claimed in terms of more
    structure than a randomly  distributed single layer on a base material or
    randomly impregnated base material.  For example, Class 128 takes a base
    material wherein certain portions thereof are impregnated with an adhesive
    and other portions are impregnated with a Class 424 medicine at those
    places where there is no adhesive backing on a gauze impregnated with a
    Class 424 composition, etc. Class 128 also provides for a bandage, body
    applicator, or body dressing containing a Class 424 composition and which
    is claimed in terms of specific structure; e.g., pore size, thickness,
    length, width, etc.

    2.      Class 424 takes a bandage, body applicator, or body dressing which
    contains a specific or nominally recited medicinal ingredient which is
    either randomly distributed in a single layer on a base material or
    randomly impregnated in a base material.

    3.      Class 128 provides for a process of use of a Class 424 composition
    which is more than single or plural steps of mere application of one or
    more Class 424 compositions; e.g., removal of a body fluid such as milk,
    adding medicine to the fluid and re-injecting the fluid, surgical
    implantation, etc.

    4.      Class 424 provides for a process of applying a compound or
    composition to a living body wherein said process is no more than the mere
    application of the compound or composition, or wherein said process is a
    combination of steps, each step individually being a mere application, and
    there are no manipulative steps included.  Class 424 takes; e.g., oral
    administration, injection, etc., even if the particular part of the body
    treated is recited.

    5.      Class 128 will take a capsule or pill, not specifically provided
    for elsewhere, that must be broken prior to use to empty its contents, even
    if said capsule or pill contains a specific medicine.  This includes an
    inhalant capsule.

    6.      Class 128 provides for a dosage unit; e.g., suppository, etc.,
    shaped to fit a particular body cavity, even if the active ingredients are
    claimed specifically.

    7.      Class 424 takes a medicine in the form of a capsule or pill that is
    ingested, as well as a method of using an inhalant capsule by squeezing
    said capsule to liberate the enclosed medicine.

    8.      Class 128 provides for methods of blood transfusion and
    insemination by artificial means.

    9.      Class 128 provides for catgut impregnated with a medicine.

    CLASS 132



    1.      Class 132, TOILET, provides for a process of treating the hair on
    the scalp (e.g., waving, etc.) which is more than the mere application of a
    Class 424 composition.  This includes plural treatments with more than one
    Class 424 composition (e.g., waving composition followed by neutralizing),
    and the application of a Class 424 composition combined with a hair
    treating step, per se, classifiable in Class 132, even if the Class 132
    step is only claimed broadly; e.g., application of Class 424 composition
    combined with "waving" or "shaping the hair" etc.

    2.      Class 132 provides for dental floss and toothpicks claimed in terms
    of their shape or structure and nominally recited toothpicks or dental
    floss which are not classifiable in Class 424.

    3.      Class 424 takes methods of treating hair on the living body (other
    than dyeing) which are no more than the mere application of a composition
    or compound to the hair.

    4.      Class 424 provides for toothpicks and dental floss which are
    claimed nominally and which contain a compound or composition having a
    utility for Class 424.

    CLASS 435



    1.      Class 435, CHEMISTRY:  MOLECULAR BIOLOGY AND MICROBIOLOGY, provides
    for methods of purifying, propagating or attenuating a micro-organism;
    e.g., a virus, bacteria, etc., except for propagating a micro-organism in
    an animal for the purpose of producing an antibody containing sera.

    2.      Class 435, provides for methods of propagating animal organs,
    tissues or cells; e.g., blood, sperm, etc., and culture media therefor.

    3.      Class 435 is the generic home for processes of (1) analyzing or
    testing which involve a fermentation step or (2) qualitative or
    quantitative testing for fermentability, or fermentative power.

    4.      Class 424 provides for methods of in vivo testing, measuring or
    diagnosis employing a Class 424 compound or composition.

    5.      Class 424 provides for methods of producing an antibody composition
    using a live micro-organism; e.g., virus or bacteria, etc., as the antibody
    inducing agent.  For example, injecting a horse with a virus to produce an
    antibody containing sera.

    CLASS 206



    1.      Class 206, SPECIAL RECEPTACLE OR PACKAGE, provides for a dosage
    unit made up of a therapeutic material or article and a container, where
    the container is intended to be physically removed from the therapeutic
    material or article; e.g., a wrapped pill or capsule, etc.

    2.      Class 424 takes a structured dosage unit which is intended to be
    used as a whole without disassembly or removal of a part; e.g., unwrapping.
     Examples of dosage units provided for in Class 424 are a capsule filled
    with coated particulate material intended to be swallowed whole, and a
    filled soluble, gelatin container intended to be dissolved into water or
    other liquid.

    CLASS 210



    1.      Class 210, LIQUID PURIFICATION OR SEPARATION, provides for a
    process for the separation from a liquid of any character of material and a
    process of a liquid mixture not elsewhere provided for.

    2.      Class 424 provides for a process of (1) merely adding a chemical to
    water to impart medicinal values thereto and the resultant treated water;
    e.g., the fluoridating of drinking water, etc., or (2) merely adding a
    biocide to water for preventing growth of animal matter or micro-organisms
    other than algae, where as to either (1) or (2) there are no other
    additional water treating steps defined.

    CLASS 422



    1.      Class 422, CHEMICAL APPARATUS AND PROCESS DISINFECTING,
    DEODORIZING, PRESERVING, OR STERILIZING, provides for a process of
    preserving, disinfecting, or sterilizing which is more than the mere
    application of a compound or Class 424 composition.

    2.      Class 422 also provides for fumigating apparatus including
    fumigating candles in which the shape of the wick or candle is claimed.

    3.      Class 424 takes a process of preserving against decay,
    deterioration by a living organism, including disinfecting or sterilizing
    to prevent the above by employing a compound or composition, which process
    is no more than the mere application of the compound or composition.  Class
    424 will also take a nominal product resulting from such a process, where
    structure sufficient for classification elsewhere is not recited.

    4.      Class 424 also takes a compound or composition, intended to be used
    for a Class 424 purpose, nominally recited as containing a wick.

    CLASS 264



    1.      Class 264, PLASTIC AND NONMETALLIC ARTICLE SHAPING OR TREATING:
    PROCESSES, provides for manufacturing dosage units by shaping; e.g.,
    molding, etc., a Class 424 composition.  The line between Class 424 and
    class 264 is that set forth in the main Class 264 definition section IIA.

    CLASS 427



    1.      Class 427, COATING PROCESSES, has the following line with Class
    424. For purposes of placement of a patent between Class 424 and class 427,
    the controlling claim will be determined according to superiority of
    invention as follows with regard to claims of equal comprehensiveness.

    (1)     Treating a living body

    (2)     Coating product

    (3)     Method of coating

    (4)     Composition

    2.      Class 427 provides for a claim to a significant coating process, as
    set forth in the Class 427 definitions, in which an inanimate base is
    coated with a compound or composition which may have a Class 424 utility.
    In placement of a patent directed to a process of coating a dosage unit;
    e.g., pill, tablet, etc., the line between Class 427 and the coating
    composition Classes is followed.

    3.      Class 424 provides for a claim to a process of treating the living
    body (as between Class 424 and Class 427) even though the method of
    treatment is a coating step.

    4.      Class 424 provides for a claim to a method of coating (not
    significant for Class 427) a base or substrate with a compound or
    composition having a Class 424 utility.

    CLASS 428



    1.      Class 428, STOCK MATERIAL OR MISCELLANEOUS ARTICLES, provides for a
    stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or sheet
    as provided for therein and which contains a biocide.

    2.      An article impregnated with a biocide and not containing structure
    (e.g., size or apertures) and not elsewhere provided (e.g., Class 428,
    subclasses 540+) will be classified in Class 424.

    3.      Class 428 provides for a claim to a coated or impregnated article,
    not otherwise provided for, which comprises a base preserved by a
    composition or compound which has a Class 424 utility, (e.g., mothproofed
    textile or termite proofed wood).

    4.      Class 424 provides for a claim to a base coated with a compound or
    composition which has a Class 424 utility and in which the base function as
    a carrier for the active material (e.g., medicated applicator or mosquito
    repellent fabric).  Class 424 also provides for a claim to a coated dosage
    unit containing a substance having a Class 424 utility.

    CLASS 935



    6.      Class 935 which provides a search collection for processes of
    altering the genetic structure of micro-organisms; genes and methods of
    modifying genes and their expression; vectors and methods of modifying
    vectors; methods of introducing DNA into a cell; micro-organisms, per se,
    which have had their genetic sequence altered by recombinant DNA techniques
    or by cell fusion or by uptake of DNA; testing; separation techniques;
    apparatus; and methods of use of vectors or of the genetically engineered
    micro-organisms; methods of gene therapy or genetic modification of living
    organisms.

    III.    SEARCH NOTES

    A.      Compounds and Compositions

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing:  Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 405+ for compositions for dyeing hair on a
    living animal; subclasses 94.16+ for depilating compositions; subclasses
    160 and 161 for compositions for depilating a living animal; subclass
    127.51 for compositions for chemically modifying human hair not on a living
    body.

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, for fuel containing an additive to
    protect it against decay or biological attack. Particularly note subclasses
    300+ for the combination of a mineral oil containing a nonmineral oil
    preservative disclosed for use as fuel or any light mineral oil fraction
    with a preservative not restricted to a particular art use. Also for smoke
    signal compositions.

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, for an
    abrasive composition, per se, including a composition useful in abrading
    teeth in a dental operation.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 255+ for loose metal particles which may have a Class
    424 utility.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 15.05+ for a coating
    composition provided for in Class 106 containing a biocidal or antifouling
    agent.

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, for sugar, starch and
    carbohydrates, per se, which may have a utility for Class 424.  Class 127
    also provides for a sugar, starch and carbohydrate composition protected
    against biological attack not having a utility provided for in another
    class.

    131,    Tobacco, for tobacco containing a bio-affecting compound or
    composition intended to be smoked, chewed, etc., for enjoyment.  Class 131,
    subclass 359 also provides for tobacco substitutes intended to be used in
    the same manner as tobacco for enjoyment.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, for explosive or
    thermic compositions.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclasses for
    compound which may possess a Class 424 utility and which are produced by a
    chemical change which is brought about by an electric current or wave
    energy and which can only be defined by its process of making.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 1 and 2 for
    biocidal mineral oil products and mixture thereof.  Subclasses 14+ for
    mineral oil products preserved against biological attack by a mineral oil
    additive.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 299.01 for liquid crystal containing optical
    filter compositions; subclasses 365+ for anti-ingestible or denatured
    compositions; subclasses 389.1+ for preservative compositions broadly not
    elsewhere provided for, and for a preservative mixed with a compound
    claimed so broadly as not to afford a basis of classification (e.g., "a
    carbon compound," etc.); and subclasses 582+ for other optical filter
    compositions.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, appropriate subclasses for an
    organic compound which is disclosed or claimed as having a Class 424
    utility, also for an organic compound with an additive to protect the
    compound against deterioration or biological attack.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, appropriate subclasses for an
    alloy or alloy powder which may have a Class 424 utility.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, for inorganic compounds and
    nonmetallic elements which may have a Class 424 utility.  Class 423
    provides inorganic compounds which include an additive, see especially
    subclass 265.

    426,    Food or Edible Material: Processes, Compositions, and Products, for
    food or edible Material for the nourishment of man and animals.  Class 426
    also provides for preserved foods and foods containing vitamin or mineral.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, for ferments not
    otherwise provided for either, per se, or preserved against biological
    attack, also for media for the culture of single celled animals or for
    living tissue and organs outside a living body.

    504,    Plant Protecting and Regulating Compositions, for a plant growth
    regulating composition; subclasses 101+ for a fertilizer composition
    containing an insecticide, fungicide, or deodorant; subclasses 150+ for an
    algicide composition.

    508,    Solid Antifriction Devices, Materials Therefor, Lubricant and
    Separant Compositions for Moving Solid Surfaces, and Miscellaneous Mineral
    Oil Compositions, particularly subclasses 110+ for a lubricant composition
    protected against biological attack. Subclasses 110+ provide for a mineral
    oil containing a nonmineral oil preservative when the composition is
    disclosed to be useful as a lubricant.

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 131+, 319,
    382+, and other appropriate subclasses for cleaning compositions containing
    a biocide, insecticide, or antiseptic component, which may function as a
    preservative for the cleaning composition or serve to perfect the cleaning
    process.  These compositions may be disclosed or claimed as useful in
    cleaning a living body (e.g., human skin, hair, etc.).

    512,    Perfume Compositions, subclasses 1-27 for perfume compositions, per
    se.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, for a synthetic resin or
    natural rubber, per se, which is disclosed or claimed as having a Class 424
    utility.  Also Class 523, subclasses 105+ for a nonmedicated composition
    designed to come into contact with the body and which is other than
    apparel; and subclass 122 for a resin or natural rubber composition
    preserved against deterioration by bacteria, fungi, or other organisms.

    536,    Organic Compounds,  appropriate subclasses for saccharides,
    polysaccharides, nucleosides, nucleotides, and polynucleotides like RNA and
    DNA compounds as well as chemical methods of synthesizing these compounds.
    Search specifically subclasses 23.1+ for fragments of RNA or DNA and
    subclasses 26.4+ for vitamin B-12 and its derivative.

    549,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 523+ for a preservative fat, fatty
    oil, ester-type wax or fatty acid.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclasses 1+ provides for a
    composition which is a blend of hydrocarbon compounds only and for a blend
    of a hydrocarbon with a nonhydrocarbon preservative.



    B.      Processes of use involving Class 424 subject matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 405+ for a process of dyeing hair on living
    animals; subclasses 94.16+ for a process of depilating a living animal body.

    27,     Undertaking, subclasses 22.1+ for a process of embalming or
    preserving a body which is more than the mere use of a Class 424
    compositions.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, for a process of killing
    vermin with a Class 424 biocide which is more than the mere application of
    the biocide to the vermin.  See the line note to this class in section II
    for examples of processes which are more than mere application.

    62,     Refrigeration, for processes of refrigeration combined with
    deodorizing or disinfecting with a Class 424 composition, also processes of
    preserving living tissue or organs outside the body by refrigeration.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 13+ for processes of shaving the living body,
    particularly subclasses 14+ wherein a Class 424 shaving preparation is used
    in preparatory treatment of the hair before shaving.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, for a process of treatment of domestic animals
    with a Class 424 composition which does not involve cutting the skin and
    which is more than the mere application of the composition to the animal.
    See subclasses 156+ for methods of topically applying a composition to an
    animal to heal sores, kill parasites, repel insects, etc., particularly
    subclass 160 for fumigating.

    128,    Surgery, for a process of treating an abnormal condition of a
    living body with a compound or a Class 424 composition which goes beyond
    one or more steps of mere application of a compound or composition(s);
    e.g., removal of a body fluid such as milk, adding a medicine to the fluid
    and re-injecting the fluid, surgical implantation, etc. Processes in Class
    128 are either placed in subclass 1 or classified below based on the
    particular appliance used.

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 202+ for a process of treating hair on the scalp
    which is more than the mere application of a Class 424 composition.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclass 161 for a process of
    paper making wherein a biocide is added during the process.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, for a process of liquid
    purification which is more than the mere application of a Class 424
    composition in particular see subclasses 749+ for processes of chemical
    treatment.

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, for optical
    methods of eye examination and vision correction.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 1+ for processes of disinfecting,
    deodorizing, preserving, or sterilizing using a compound or a Class 424
    composition which is more than the single step of mere application of the
    compound or composition.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 2.1+ for significant processes of
    coating wherein the product has a medical or dental utility.

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 215+ for a process of dentistry which is more
    than the mere application of a Class 424 composition.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, for processes of
    fermentation, including propagation and/or attenuation of a micro-organism,
    (e.g., bacteria and virus, etc.), and compositions for carrying out said
    processes.  Subclasses 235.1+ for virus propagation. Subclass 1 for
    propagating living organs, tissues or cells outside the body.  Subclasses
    240.1+ for fermentation processes wherein undesired micro-organisms are
    eliminated from the process by the use of a biocide.

    C.      Other Processes

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing;  Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclass 101 for processes of bleaching hair not on a
    living body; subclass 127.51 for processes of chemically modifying human
    hair not on a living body.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 283+ for a
    process of drying hair on the head.

    53,     Package Making, for methods of making and filling packages with a
    Class 424 composition.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 866.2 for methods of measuring the
    release rate of a sustained release dosage unit.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 3 for methods of filling aerosol or gas charged dispensers.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    for processes of making molded dosage units; e.g., pills, etc., from Class
    424 compositions by a Class 264 process.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 1+ for
    miscellaneous methods of chemical analysis.

    452,    Butchering, for methods of killing and dressing animals for use as
    food.

    D.      Apparatus and Articles

    1.      Bio-Affecting

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, for garment structures containing a Class 424 composition,
    particularly subclass 4 for insect repelling head guards and subclass 171.2
    for head coverings containing a medicament.

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 222+ for apparatus
    for disinfecting the subject matter of the class. Subclasses 245.1+ for
    sanitary covers for toilet seats.

    5,      Beds, subclass 641 for pillows; and subclasses 482+ for bed
    clothing, each protected against biological attack.

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, for boots, etc., or parts thereof which
    contain a Class 424 composition.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, for apparatus for
    trapping or destroying animals (other than micro-organisms) which are
    injurious or pestiferous to man; e.g., insects, etc., and which may use a
    Class 424 composition; subclasses 114+ for fly paper recited in terms of
    more structure than a coating on a base; subclasses 125+ for fumigators for
    destroying insects using a Class 424 composition.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, for apparatus provided for therein which may apply
    a Class 424 composition; e.g., insecticide, etc., to plants.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 129+ for a burial
    vault with means to treat the corpse or product thereof with a Class 424
    composition; subclass 517 for structurally defined static structures; e.g.,
    buildings, utility poles, etc., with a coating to repel biological attack.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 217, 221,
    223, 232+ and 258 for textile strands, having structural limitations,
    coated with a biocide.

    70,     Locks, subclasses 15+ for fetters useful in restraining living
    animals.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, for ammunition, per se, used for
    applying or delivering Class 424 compositions such as warfare gases,
    repellents, etc., particularly subclasses 367 for gas shells and other gas
    delivering ammunition, 368 for gas grenades, 369 for gas bombs, and 370 for
    gas cartridges.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclasses 20 and 29+
    for safes or bank protection devices with means to release, generate, or
    distribute a fluent Class 424 composition to repel attack.

    111,    Planting, subclasses 118+ for planting apparatus which treats the
    soil with a Class 424 composition.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 348 for artifically medicated nest eggs;
    subclasses 156+ for apparatus for topically applying a Class 424
    composition to a domestic animal, particularly subclass 160 for fumigators.

    128,    Surgery, for apparatus for treating abnormal conditions of the
    human body.  Class 128 also provides for medicated applicators; e.g.,
    bandages, etc., claimed in terms of more structure than a coating or a
    base; subclass 161 for paper containing a biocide to protect it against
    biological attack, which biocide was incorporated into the paper stock
    before it was made into a self-sustaining web.

    168,    Farriery, subclass 2 for medicating overshoes and subclass 26 for
    medicating sole pads used in treating the hooves of horses or cattle.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 68.1+ for
    electrical conductor structures containing a biocide or repellent (e.g., to
    repel rats, etc.).

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 213 for insect proof
    receptacles.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, for apparatus for liquid
    purification (e.g., water etc.) utilizing a Class 424 composition.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 87.1+ for a disinfecting device to be
    attached to the receptacles of that class.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 86 for insect repelling garment hangers.

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, for
    apparatus for eye examination and eye glasses.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, appropriate subclasses for bio-affecting
    apparatus employing a Class 424 composition.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 907 (a
    cross-reference art collection) for a product treated against attack by
    plant or animal life.

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 25+ for apparatus for the cleaning or
    replacement of teeth, especially subclass 80 for structurally defined
    dental applicators containing a medicament.

    449,    Bee Culture, appropriate subclasses for a bee hive or appliance
    therefor containing a biocide to protect be or honey, particularly
    subclasses 9+ for a bee hive having feeding provision, and subclass 48 for
    a free standing be feeder.

    452,    Butchering, for apparatus for killing and dressing animals for use
    as  food.

    504,    Plant Protecting and Regulating Compositions, subclass 100 for
    seeds coated with Class 424 biocidal compositions.

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, for the subject matter of that class title.

    2.      Other

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, for implements useful
    for applying Class 424 compositions, particularly subclasses 167.1+ for
    toothbrushes and 209.1+ for wipers, daubers and polishers; e.g., fabric
    puffs, per se, etc.

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 32+ for razors useful in shaving the living
    body.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 283+ for
    apparatus for drying hair on the head.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 866.2 for apparatus for measuring
    the release rate of a sustained release dosage unit.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, for apparatus useful in coating a base with a
    Class 424 composition.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 204+ for body warmers.

    131,    Tobacco, for smoking apparatus to be used with tobacco or a tobacco
    substitute intended for enjoyment.

    132,    Toilet, for miscellaneous apparatus for grooming or enhancing the
    appearance of the human body; e.g., combs, manicuring, toothpicks, dental
    floss, etc.

    219,    Electric Heating, for electrical apparatus for heating the body,
    particularly subclasses 526+ and 528+.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 394+ for the structure of pressurized
    containers useful for dispensing a Class 424 composition.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 34+ for slow
    diffusers useful in applying Class 424 compositions by evaporation.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    885+ for optical filters.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 901 for hot water bags, useful in heating
    the body.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, for implements under the
    class definition used to apply a Class 424 composition; e.g., lipstick,
    deodorant, etc.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 129+ for apparatus in general for
    performing chemical reactions; and subclasses 50+ for testing apparatus,
    including apparatus for performing a Class 424 test.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    subclass 2 for apparatus for molding plastic material against animal or
    plant body structure.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 288+ for a candle, per se.

    IV.     INDEX TO CLASS SEARCH NOTES IN CLASS DEFINITION SECTIONS AND
    SUBCLASSES OF THIS CLASS AND CLASS 514.  SUBJECT MATTER INDICATED BY AN
    ASTERISK IS CLASS 514

    CLASS 424


    CLASS           SECTION SUBCLASS

    2,      Apparel III D-1 76.4, 402

    4,      Baths, Closets, III D-1
            Sinks, and
            Spittoons

    5,      Beds    III D-1

    8,      Bleaching and   II C,   3, 62, 63,

            Dyeing; Fluid   III A,  70, 71, 75,

            Treatment       III B,  78.02,
    78.04,

            and Chemical    III C,  401, 405,

            Modification    IV      429, 520,

            of Textiles             613

            and Fibers

    15,     Brushing, Scrub-        II A,

            bing, and       II D-2,

            General Cleaning        IV

    23,     Chemistry:      II D-1,

            Physical Processes      IV

    27,     Undertaking     III B   75

    30,     Cutlery III D-2 73

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and       III D-1 402

            Leggings

    43,     Fishing, Trapping,      III B,  16, 18, 40
            and Vermin              77
            Destroying      III D-1

    47,     Plant Husbandry III D-1 40, 405,

                            443

    51,     Abrasive Tool   II B-2
            Making Process, III A   48
            Material, or
            Composition

    52,     Static Structures       III D-1 412
            (e.g., Buildings)

    53,     Package Making  III C

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning,    III D-1 412, 443
            Twisting, and
            Twining

    62,     Refrigeration   III B   561

    70,     Locks   III D-1

    71,     Chemistry:      II B-2  93, 400,
            Fertilizers     IV      405, 529

    73,     Measuring and   III C   1.5, 2
            Testing

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical       1.11
            Processes, Compositions for
            Use Therein, Consolidated Metal
            Powder Compositions, and Loose
            Metal Particulate Mixtures

    83,     Cutting III B,  73, 401,

                    III D-2 549

    102,    Ammunition and  III D-1

            Explosives

    106,    Compositions:   II B-2  48, 61, 63,

            Coating or      III A   69, 77,

            Plastic IV      78.08, 115,

                            400, 401,

                            405

    109,    Safes, Bank     III D-1

            Protection, or a

            Related Device

    111,    Planting        III D-1

    114,    Ships           40

    118,    Coating Apparatus       III D-2

    119,    Animal Husbandry        II C-1, 40, 405

                    II D-1,

                    III B,

                    III D-1,

                    IV

    126,    Stoves and      III D-2 2, 40

            Furnaces

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and      II C-1, 23*

            Carbohydrates   III A

    128,    Surgery II D,   1.11, 2, 62,

                    III B,  73, 78.06,

                    III D-1,        78.08, 115,

                    IV       447, 451,
                             464, 481,
                             529, 561

    131,    Tobacco II C-1,

                    III D-2,
                    IV

    132,    Toilet  II D,   48, 62, 71,

                    III B   73, 401

                    III D-2

                    IV

    141,    Fluent Material III C
            Handling, With
            Receiver or Re-
            ceiver Coacting
            Means

    149,    Explosive and   II B-2,
            Thermic III A
            Compositions
            or Charges

    156,    Adhesive Bonding                3
            and Miscellaneous
            Chemical Manufac-
            ture

    162,    Paper Making and        III B,  405, 443
            Fiber Liberation

    168,    Farriery        III D-1 402

    169,    Fire Extinguishers              44

    174,    Electricity:  Con-      III D-1 405
            ductors and Insu-
            lators

    204,    Chemistry:  Elec-       III A   1.11
            trical and Wave
            Energy

    206,    Special Recep-  III D-1 1.11, 48,
            tacle or Package        IV      412, 451

    208,    Mineral Oils:   III A   405, 464,
            Processes and           520
            Products

    210,    Liquid Purifica-        III B,  124, 520,
            tion or Separation      III D,  529

                    IV

    219,    Electric Heating        III D-2

    220,    Receptacles     III D-1 412

    222,    Dispensing      III D-2 43

    223,    Apparel Apparatus       III
    D-1                                 76.4, 402

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling,       III D-2
            Spraying, and Dif-
            fusing

    241,    Solid Material          92
            Comminution or
            Disintegration

    250,    Radiant Energy          1.11, 90

    252,    Compositions    II B-2, 1.11, 2, 4,

                    IV      6, 40, 43,

                            59, 61, 62,

                            70, 73, 76.1,

                            76.3, 76.4,

                            78.04, 94.3,

                            115, 405,

                            429, 520,

                            613

    260,    Chemistry
            of Carbon       II B,   1.11, 5,

            Compounds       III A,  76.1,115,

                    IV      123, 197.1,

                            405, 546

    264,    Plastic and Non-        II D,   490

            metallic Article        III C,

            Shaping or      IV

            Treating:

            Processes

    351,    Optics:  Eye    III B,  78.04, 429

            Examining, Vision       III D-1

            Testing and

            Correcting

    359,    Optics:  Systems        III D-2 59

            (Including Communication)
            and Elements

    376,    Induced Nuclear         1.11

            Reactions:  Processes,
            Systems, and
            Elements

    383,    Flexible Bags   III D-2

    401,    Coating Imple-  III D-2 78.03

            ments With

            Material Supply

    420,    Alloys or Metallic              1.11
            Compositions

    422,    Chemical        II D-1, 1.11, 40, 65,
            Apparatus       III B,  76.1, 78.04,
            and Process     III D-1,        90, 429
            Disinfecting,   III D-2,
            Deodorizing,    IV
            Preserving, or
            Sterilizing

    ---CDEF---423,    Chemistry of    II C,   1.11, 405,
            Inorganic       III A   520, 600
            Compounds

    425,    Plastic Article
            or Earthenward  III D-2

            Shaping or

            Treating:

            Apparatus

    426,    Food or Edible  II C-1  73.08, 92,

            Material:       III A   115, 410,

            Processes,      IV      428, 520,

            Composition,            529, 535

            and Products

    427,    Coating Processes,      II D-1, 1.11, 2, 75,

            for processes of        III B,  77, 78.08,

            coating in      IV      411, 490

            general.

    431,    Combustion      III D-2 18

    433,    Dentistry       III B,  48

                    III D-1

    434,    Education, and          2, 3, 76.4

            Demonstration,

    435,    Chemistry:      II C-1, 1.11, 2, 9,

            Molecular       II D-1, 85.1, 85.8,

            Biology and     III A,  89, 90, 92,

            Microbiology    III B,  93, 94.2,

                    IV      94.21, 94.3,

                            94.4, 94.5,

                            94.6, 94.61,

                            94.62, 94.63,

                            94.64, 94.66,

                            94.67, 115,

                            123, 529, 561

    436,    Chemistry:              1.11
            Analytical and
            Immunological
            Testing

    449,    Bee Culture,    III D-1 422, 457,
                            468

    452,    Butchering      III C,
                    III D-1

    494,    Imperforate Bowl:               413, 480,
               499

            Centrifugal

            Separators

    504,    Plant Protecting        II B-2, 76.1, 93,
            and Regulating  III A   400, 405
            Compositions

    520,    Synthetic Resins        II B,   59, 61, 63,

            or Natural Rubber       III A   77, 520

    530,    Chemistry:              1.11
            Natural Resins
            or Derivatives;
            Peptides or
            Proteins; Lignins

            or Reaction
            Products Thereof

    534,    Organic Compounds       1.11

    585,    Chemistry of    II A,   76.3, 77, 520
            Hydrocarbon     II B-2,
            Compounds       II C,

                    IV

    600,    Surgery         1.11

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e.,       III D-1 78.08,
            Artificial              402
            Body Members),
            Parts Therefor, or
            Aids and
            Accessories,
            Therefor


    V.      GLOSSARY

    Note.  The meaning to be given to the various "art" terms appearing in this
    class, but which have not been included in the glossary below, is the same
    as that generally accepted or is in common usage. However, certain terms
    employed in this class, which are included below, have been assigned
    definitions tailored to meet the needs of this class and therefore these
    may be more restricted or less limited or even altogether different from
    those in common usage.

    The expression active as used herein denotes a physiological,
    pharmacological or biological affect.

    The term amine denotes a compound in which one or more of the valences of a
    nitrogen atom have been satisfied by a covalently bonded carbon atom.

    The term aromatic denotes a compound which contains a benzene nucleus
    whether or not it is condensed with other rings.

    The term carboxylic denotes the presence of a moiety.



    The term fermentate denotes the final chemical compound, or compounds, that
    are produced by a fermentation process and includes compounds which are of
    known as well as unknown structure.

    The expression heavy metal denotes any metal having a specific gravity
    greater than 4 and as employed herein includes arsenic and antimony.

    The term heterocyclic denotes the presence of one or more carbon atoms
    covalently bonded in a closed ring with at least one atom of oxygen,
    nitrogen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium and having no other atoms in the
    ring.

    The term organic denotes compounds containing carbon, which are further
    characterized by the presence in a molecule thereof of two carbon atoms
    bonded together; or one atom of carbon bonded to at least one atom of
    hydrogen or halogen; or one atom of carbon bonded to at least one atom of
    nitrogen by a single or double bond.

    (1)     Note.  Compounds included within this definition, but not
    considered organic are hydrocyanic acid, cyanogen, isocyanic acid,
    cyanamide, dicyanamide, cyanogen halides, isothiocyanic acid, fulminic
    acid, and metal carbides.

    The term oxo denotes the presence of a carbonyl (C=O) bonded to hydrogen
    and/or carbon and is a term limited to ketones and aldehydes.

    The oxy denotes the presence of oxygen singly bonded to a carbon, which is
    not the carbon of a carbonyl group, and is further bonded to hydrogen,
    metal or an organic radical.  The term is generic to alcohols, phenols,
    alcoholates, phenolates, ethers and esters thereof.

    The term potentiator or synergist denotes an agent (A) which will
    cooperatively act with an active ingredient for this class (B) to the
    extent that the total effect (A+B) will be greater than the sum of the two
    effects taken independently.

    The expression, unitary dosage form, denotes that form of medication
    supplied in a manner requiring no further weighing or measuring to provide
    the dosage; e.g., tablet, capsule, etc.  Medicines in bulk form; e.g.,
    powder, syrup, etc., are not included.

    VI.     CLASSIFICATION GUIDELINES FOR THIS CLASS

    A.      In this class the chemical structure of the ingredient disclosed as
    having a utility set forth in section IA above, is used as the primary
    basis of classification.  Processes of using compositions or compounds, per
    se, and processes of making compositions, not provided for elsewhere, are
    classified in the first appearing subclass providing for the particular
    active ingredient being employed or prepared.

    Note.  Compositions containing a biologically or pharmacologically active
    ingredient which generally, for example, control, cure, disable, inhibit,
    kill, modify, protect, repel, retard, sterilize or stimulate a living
    animal body; or inhibit or kill micro-organisms other than algae, etc., are
    provided for primarily in subclasses 85.1 and Class 514 appropriate
    subclasses. Compositions, intended for topical application, containing
    ingredients having other utilities under the class definition; e.g.,
    grooming, enhancing, etc., which are not provided for in the Special
    subclasses 1.1-84, 125 and 126 have been classified in Class 514,
    appropriate subclasses.

    B.      The rule followed in classifying a patent having separate claims to
    several species of the active ingredient which fall into different
    subclasses is that the patent is placed as an original in the first
    appearing subclass, providing for the claimed subject matter and
    cross-referenced to the appropriate lower subclass, except where there is a
    compulsory search note between the subclasses.  Where there are one or more
    indents under the generic subclass and one of the claimed species is not
    provided for specifically by any of these indents, the patent is placed as
    original in the generic subclass, since this is the first appearing
    subclass providing for said individually claimed species.  In classifying a
    patent containing Markush type claims; i.e., "group consisting of X and Y"
    and no species claims, the original patent is placed in the first appearing
    subclass providing for the species (members) in the Markush group. If in
    addition to the Markush group, there are species claims, the first cited
    rule, governing a patent having separate specie claims, is followed.

    C.      A patent claiming a composition wherein the active compound or
    ingredient has not been specified, has been classified as original in the
    first appearing subclass providing for any one of the claimed ingredients
    and cross-referenced to appropriate lower subclasses providing for the
    remaining compounds or ingredients.

    D.      A patent claiming a composition resulting from a chemical reaction,
    wherein the chemical structure of the compounds or ingredients which make
    up the final composition are unknown or undetermined, is classified as
    original in the first appearing subclass providing for anyone of the
    reactants and cross-referenced to the lower subclasses providing for the
    other reactants.

    E.      Patents claiming synergistic or potentiated compositions have been
    classified as originals in the first appearing subclass providing for
    either the synergist, potentiator or active ingredient and cross-referenced
    to appropriate lower subclasses.

    F.      Patents claiming subject matter coming within the Special
    Subclasses 1.1-84, 125 and 126 have been classified on the basis of the
    disclosed or claimed function, or the particular subject matter provided
    for, in the first appearing subclass providing the same; e.g., Dentrifices,
    Embalming compositions, Solid synthetic organic polymer containing, etc.,
    and no distinction has been made between the Class 424 active ingredients
    and nonactive ingredients with the one exception being applied to solid
    synthetic organic polymers, namely subclasses 78.01, 78.02+, and 78.08+.
    These subclasses consider only those polymers which are bioactive as
    defined therein.

    G.      Patents to adjuvant or carrier compositions, per se, which are
    claimed or solely disclosed for perfecting a composition for this class are
    classified as original in the first appearing appropriate subclass
    providing for any one of the ingredients in Class 514, appropriate
    subclasses, except where the claimed composition possesses a functional
    property or other feature which has been provided for in the Special
    subclasses 1.1-84, 125 and 126; e.g., Free carbon containing, Corrosion
    inhibitor containing, etc.

    H.      A patent claiming a Class 424 active ingredient broadly in terms of
    its function in combination with a specific adjuvant or carrier; e.g., "A
    tranquilizer and as a carrier therefore sugar and gelatin" has been
    classified as original in the first appearing subclass providing for any
    one of the disclosed specific active ingredients and cross-referenced to
    all other subclasses providing for the remaining disclosed active
    ingredients.

    VII.    SUBCLASS DEFINITIONS - Class 424


CLS 424/1.11
TXT RADIONUCLIDE OR INTENDED RADIONUCLIDE CONTAINING; ADJUVANT OR CARRIER
    COMPOSITIONS; INTERMEDIATE OR PREPARATORY COMPOSITIONS:

    Compositions under the class definition containing a radionuclide or an
    element intended to be converted to a radionuclide (such as Boron-10 which
    may be neutron-activated for radio-therapy); methods of making such
    compositions; class defined methods of using such compositions; class
    defined methods of using compounds, per se, containing a radionuclide or an
    element intended to be converted to a radionuclide; adjuvant or carrier
    compositions for perfecting compositions of this class; and intermediate or
    preparatory compositions for compounds or compositions proper for Class 424.

    (1)     Note.  Radionuclide is an unstable isotope, capable of emitting
    radiant energy through a process termed decay.  Commonly used terms which
    are substantially synonymous include:  radiolabeled, radioactive, and
    radioisotope.

    (2)     Note.  An intended radionuclide is an element which is by
    disclosure or common knowledge intended to be converted to a radionuclide
    to take advantage of the property or properties exhibited by a
    radionuclide.  This subclass and indented subclasses should be read as
    incorporating the intended radionuclide embodiment in every instance.

    (3)     Note.  All elements have multiple isotopes; some radioactive, some
    not; some naturally occurring; and some man-made.  The recitation of a
    radionuclide will inherently encompass a mixture of isotopes; however, this
    is not sufficient for placement in Class 424.  For placement in Class 424,
    an intentional mixture of different compounds or different elements or one
    (or more) of each is required.

    (4)     Note.  Class 424 takes compounds mixed with a preserving agent when
    disclosed or claimed for a Class 424 function or utility.  Further, Class
    424 provides for a solution of a compound when disclosed or claimed for a
    Class 424 function or utility.

    (5)     Note.  The intermediate and preparatory compositions are provided
    for in this subclass and indented subclasses, even though the radionuclide
    or intended radionuclide may not be present in the claim.  The adjuvant and
    carrier compositions are provided for in this and indented subclasses, even
    though the radionuclide or intended radionuclide may not be present in the
    claim.  When there are also disclosed or claimed non-radionuclide uses of
    the intermediate, preparatory, adjuvant, or carrier composition,
    appropriate cross-references are necessary elsewhere in Classes 424 and 514.

    (6)     Note.  Subclass 1.11 is the appropriate residual location for those
    compositions, and the appropriate class defined uses, containing a per se
    radionuclide element or a per se intended radionuclide element (i.e., the
    elemental material).  For example, compositions and methods comprising
    radioactive Radon baths are found here.  Any indication of a compound;
    i.e., attachment (e.g., recitation of an ion), dictates that proper
    placement is in an indented subclass, even in the absence of a specifically
    disclosed compound.  In the case of an indicated, but not specifically
    disclosed compound, the original would be placed in subclass 1.61 and a
    cross placed in:  subclass 1.65 for metal radionuclide or intended metal
    radionuclide; subclasses 1.81+ for nonmetal radionuclide or intended
    nonmetal radionuclide; or both.

    (7)     Note.  The following rule adheres to the rule set forth in Class
    514, which statement in Class 514:

    (A)     This and indented subclasses do not provide for cross-reference
    patents which are originally classified in Class 260, compound areas, or in
    the Class 530-570 series or in Class 585.  Cross-reference patents that are
    originally classified in the Class 520 series are permitted.

    (B)     The cross-reference rule elaborated above means that a specific
    compound having a disclosed or even specifically claimed utility (i.e.,
    compound X having an attached radionuclide useful as an anti-cancer
    diagnostic or treatment agent) will be classifiable only in Class 260 or
    the Class 530-570 series or Class 585.

    (8)     Note.  The terminology "derivative thereof" means that the compound
    retains the biological activity of the compound from which the subclass
    provides and from which it is derived, or that the compound retains the
    structural characteristic that places it in the subclass.

    (9)     Note.  Kits.  Claims and disclosures to in vivo kits are classified
    according to the following guidelines.

            The use of nominal terms to identify the kit such as "kit," "vial,"
    "container," etc., are disregarded and placement is premised on the
    radiolabeled product intended for placement in the body even if the
    ingredients actually recited do not include all the necessary components to
    form the radiolabeled product (e.g., intermediate).  The presence of an
    accessory such as "instructions", "syringe", "filter", etc., have no effect
    on this aspect of placement.  Claiming of significant packaging or
    container structure will result in placement in Class 206 when the
    packaging requirements of that class definition is satisfied.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for in vivo diagnostic compositions not comprising a radionuclide
    or intended radionuclide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, appropriate subclasses for patents relative to the metallurgy of
    a radioactive metal element or alloy.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclasses for
    a chemical process making a compound or element and involving the class
    defined use of electrical or wave energy.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, for kits which meet the class
    definition, particularly subclass 438 for a container for an object or
    substance adapted for use in wound or disease treatment of the body,
    subclasses 216+ for container which is for two or more diverse articles or
    materials or which is structured so that at least a portion thereof is
    capable of rearrangement for a secondary purpose (especially subclasses
    568, 569, and 570) and subclasses 524.1+ for container wherein the cover or
    contents are specified in terms of chemical constituents.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 496.1+ for a radioactive source alone or
    with a shielded container to selectively shield or expose the source,
    subclass 432 for generators which also separate parent and daughter
    isotopes.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 625+ for a radioactive composition and
    methods of making and disposal thereof, not provided for elsewhere.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 413.26
    for methods processing data from radiation detection or treatment
    techniques.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions: Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    appropriate subclasses for apparatus and processes for the production
    and/or utilization of a radioactive material or composition, especially
    subclasses 156+ for bombardment of a material to produce an induced nuclear
    reaction (other than that resulting in the splitting of a nucleus); e.g.,
    transmutation, making radioactive material, producing isotopes of the same
    or different element.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, subclasses 1+ for radioactive
    alloys.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving or Sterilizing, subclasses 50+ for apparatus for in vitro
    quantitative or qualitative chemical analysis and laboratory devices,
    especially subclass 61 for in vitro test package or kit (e.g., radioassay).

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 2+ and 249+ for
    radioactive elements or inorganic compounds and class defined methods of
    making same.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 2.1+ for coating processes producing
    a medical or dental product (e.g., coated pills) and subclasses 5+ for
    coating a radioactive base or applying a radioactive coating.

    435,    Chemistry: Molecular Biology and Microbiology, see appropriate
    subclasses:  for processes in which a material containing an enzyme or
    micro-organism is used to perform a qualitative or quantitative measurement
    or test; for compositions or test strips for either of the stated
    processes; for the processes of making such compositions or test strips;
    for processes of using micro-organisms or enzymes to synthesize a chemical
    product; for processes of treating a material with micro-organisms or
    enzymes to separate, liberate, or purify a preexisting substance or to
    destroy hazardous or toxic waste; for processes of propagating
    micro-organisms; for processes of genetically altering a micro-organism;
    for processes of tissue, organ, blood, sperm, or microbial maintenance; for
    processes of malting or mashing; for micro-organisms, per se, and
    subcellular parts thereof; for recombinant vectors and their preparation;
    for enzymes, per se, compositions containing enzymes not otherwise provided
    for and processes of preparing and purifying enzymes; for compositions for
    microbial propagation; for apparatus for any of the processes of the class;
    for composting apparatus; and subclasses 4+ for in vitro processes in which
    there is a direct or indirect, qualitative or quantitative, measurement or
    test, by or of a material which contains an enzyme or micro-organism (for
    the purposes of Class 435, micro-organism includes bacteria,
    actinomycetales, cyanobacteria (unicellular algae), fungi, protozoa, animal
    cells, plant cells, and virus).  Class 424 definition contains controlling
    statements on the class lines.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, appropriate
    subclasses for processes which involve a chemical reaction for determining
    quantitatively or qualitatively the presence of a chemical element, a
    compound or a complex in a composition or a chemical compound, or an
    element or radical in a compound; for processes of measuring or testing the
    chemical properties of a sample, or chemically determining a physical
    property of a sample; for analytical compositions used in such processes
    (see Class 436, main definition, section III, A, for exceptions); for
    chemical test standards; and for combinations of tests or measurements with
    methods of regulating a chemical reaction not otherwise provided for in a
    chemical synthesis class or elsewhere.  See especially, subclasses 57+ for
    processes or compositions where the testing or a chemical reaction includes
    measurement of radioactivity; subclasses 500-548 for processes of in vitro
    measuring or testing which involve antigen-antibody, immunological, or
    protein binding interactions other than those involving an enzyme or
    micro-organism.  Class 436 provides for in vivo production (i.e., by
    treatment of a live animal with a virus or micro-organism) of immunological
    (e.g., anti-sera) material when intended for use in an in vitro test.

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives; Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, appropriate subclasses for, per se,
    compounds including those which have attached thereto a radionuclide, such
    as radiolabeled proteins, peptides, and polypeptides.

    534,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 10+ for an organic compound, per se,
    containing a radioactive metal.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 1+ for a device or process applying radioactive
    substance to or into the body for a therapeutic purpose and wherein more
    than one nominal step or a series of nominal steps is recited, subclasses
    431+ for diagnostic testing processes wherein the radioactive material is
    placed in the body, and subclass 436 for diagnostic testing processes
    involving nuclear radiation directed against and passing through or
    reflected from the body.


CLS 424/1.13
TXT In aerosol, fine spray, effervescent, pressurized fluid, vapor or gas, or
    complete composition therefor:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.11 which is contained in or part of an
    aerosol, a fine spray, an effervescent, a pressurized fluid, a vapor, a
    gas, or a composition intended for such use and not requiring any
    additional component to perfect it other than a pressurizing agent (e.g.,
    heat).

    (1)     Note.  Gaseous compositions and methods comprising radioactive
    Xenon for lung studies are found here.


CLS 424/1.17
TXT Attached to or within viable or inviable whole micro-organism, cell, virus,
    fungus or specified sub-cellular structure thereof (e.g., platelet, red
    blood cell):Subject matter under subclass 1.11 in which the radionuclide or
    intended radionuclide is attached (bonded, chelated, complexed) to, or
    contained within, a whole microbial organism, cell, virus, fungus, or
    specified sub-cellular structure thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of materials intended for placement in this
    subclass include:  platelet, red blood cell, mitochondria, and chloroplast.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is proper for cells, viruses, etc., which are
    live, attenuated, or dead.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.65+,  for cellular extracts of undefined or unspecified composition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 183+ for
    radiolabeled enzymes, per se, and processes of preparing them, subclasses
    243+ for, radiolabeled micro-organisms, per se, and processes of preparing
    them, subclass 262.5 for processes of utilizing an enzyme or micro-organism
    to destroy a toxic or hazardous waste or to convert it into an
    environmentally safe substance, and subclass 317.1 for radiolabeled
    subcellular parts of micro-organisms.


CLS 424/1.21
TXT Molecular bilayer structure (e.g., vesicle, liposome):
    Subject matter under subclass 1.11 which includes a structure typically
    characterized by molecules having a hydrophilic end or a hydrophobic end
    which are organized into a bilayer so as to produce an enclosed volume, an
    organized layer, or a coating.

    (1)     Note.  The radionuclide or intended radionuclide may be attached to
    the wall structure or may be enclosed within it or may be exterior to it or
    any combination thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.17,   for cells and sub-cellular structures which may have bilayer
    structures forming a part thereof.

    2+,     for liposome intended for testing or measuring a condition or
    substance and not containing a radionuclide.

    450,    for liposomes containing compositions of this class other than
    radionuclide containing, and other than intended for testing or measuring a
    condition or substance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    subclasses 4+ for generic, or not elsewhere provided for, processes of
    encapsulating a material which is a liquid (at ambient temperature and
    pressure) utilizing an emulsion or dispersion (e.g., making microsphere,
    liposome).

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 213.3+ for generic, or not elsewhere
    provided for, processes of encapsulating a solid material utilizing an
    emulsion or dispersion (e.g., making microcapsule, liposome).

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 402.2+ and
    402.24 for generic, or not elsewhere provided for, liposomes, per se.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclass 829 for
    in vitro antigen-antibody testing involving liposomes.


CLS 424/1.25
TXT Dissolving or eluting from solid or gel matrix (e.g., capsule,
    tablet):Subject matter under subclass 1.11 in which the composition
    comprises a physical form which includes a reticulated network of solid or
    gel material from which the radionuclide or intended radionuclide is
    eluted, or is released by dissolution of the network.

    (1)     Note.  Proper for placement in this subclass are compositions in
    which the radionuclide or intended radionuclide component is entrapped and
    compositions in which the radionuclide or intended radionuclide component
    is attached (bonded, chelated, complexed) to the matrix.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.29+,  for those particulate carriers which dissolve, bio-assimilate, or
    bio-degrade (e.g., in the host) only after the diagnostic or therapeutic
    process has been accomplished.


CLS 424/1.29
TXT Coated, impregnated, or colloidal particulate (e.g., microcapsule,
    microsphere, micro-aggregate, macro-aggregate):Subject matter under
    subclass 1.11 in which the composition comprises a coated, impregnated, or
    colloidal particle wherein the radionuclide or intended radionuclide may be
    present in any part of the particle, coating, or impregnant (e.g.,
    colloidal human serum albumin).

    (1)     Note.  The core of a coated particle may comprise a solid, liquid,
    or gas (e.g., gas-filled glass microsphere, liquid core microcapsule).
    However, solid or gel core particles from which the radionuclide or
    intended radionuclide is eluted or dissolved are classified in subclass
    1.25 above.

    (2)     Note.  A particle coated or impregnated with a composition provided
    for in this class and in which the composition functions only to preserve
    the particle from biological attack is generally classified with the
    particular particle protected, for example, a lyophilized radiolabeled
    monoclonal antibody impregnated or coated with a Class 424 biocide would be
    properly classified with the lyophilized radiolabeled monoclonal antibody,
    per se, in Class 530.

    (3)     Note.  The coating need not be continuous.  The coating material
    may be adsorbed, chelated, complexed, covalently bonded, ionically bonded,
    or hydrogen bonded.

    (4)     Note.  An emulsion is not proper for this subclass based solely on
    the "attachment" of the emulsifying agent to form a coating.

    (5)     Note.  Particulate or particle encompasses a form of solid material
    of such small size that it behaves in a fluid manner (e.g., microcapsule,
    but not unit dose pills).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.21,   for liposomes which may encapsulate or coat a particle.

    1.25,   for particulate material further comprising a reticulated network
    of solid or gel from which the radionuclide or intended radionuclide is
    eluted or is relased by dissolution of the network.


CLS 424/1.33
TXT Delivery to active site involves particle dissolving, degrading, or
    otherwise releasing of radionuclide:Subject matter under subclass 1.29 in
    which the particle dissolves, degrades, or otherwise releases the
    radionuclide or intended radionuclide in order to deliver it to the active
    site, such as a time release microcapsule.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is intended to take those compositions which
    release the radionuclide at a location distant from the target location.
    Compositions which release the radionuclide within a target cell in the
    body would not be proper for placement here on that basis.

    (2)     Note.  A particle designed to dissolve, degrade, etc., (e.g.,
    bio-degradable, bio-assimilable) after the diagnosis, treatment, etc., is
    not proper for placement here on that basis.


CLS 424/1.37
TXT Radionuclide or intended radionuclide in an organic compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.29 in which the radionuclide or intended
    radionuclide is attached (bonded, chelated, complexed) to or a part of an
    organic compound.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note in subclass 1.65 for definition of an organic
    compound.


CLS 424/1.41
TXT Attached to lymphokine, cytokine, or other secreted growth regulatory
    factor, differentiation factor, or intercellular mediator specific for a
    hematopoietic cell (e.g., interferon, interleukin, macrophage factor,
    colony stimulating factor, erythropoietin); derivative thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.11 in which the radionuclide or intended
    radionuclide is attached (bonded, chelated, complexed) to a lymphokine,
    cytokine, or other secreted growth regulatory factor, differentiation
    factor, or intercellular mediator specific for any type of hematopoietic
    cell; and the derivatives thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The term "growth regulatory factor" is meant to encompass
    any secretory factor that is growth-stimulatory or growth-inhibitory (i.e.,
    that will stimulate or inhibit cluneal expansion of cells).

    (2)     Note.  The term "differentiation factor" is meant to encompass any
    secretory factor that causes cells to progress from a relatively
    undifferentiated state to a more differentiated state, wherein said
    progression may include cluneal expansion.

    (3)     Note.  The term "intercellular mediator" is meant to encompass any
    secretory factor that affects cellular functions such as chemotaxis, etc.

    (4)     Note.  Included here are:  interferon (IF), interleukin, monokines,
    macrophage factors, lymphokines, migration inhibitory factor (MIF),
    lymphotoxin (LT), leukocyte migration inhibitory factor (CIF), eosinophil
    chemotactic factor-precursor substance (ECFp), eosinophil stimulation
    promoter, eosinophil chemotactic factor, monocyte tissue factor, mitogenic
    factor (MF), lymphocyte activity-factor (LAF), colony stimulating factor
    (CSF), skin reactive factor (SRF), macrophage cytotoxicity factor (MCF),
    leukocyte inhibition factor (LIF), vascular permeability factor (VPF), T
    cell growth factor (TCGF), B cell growth factor (BCGF), erythroid burst
    promoter, genetically related macrophage factor (GRF), fibroblast
    activating factor (FAF), tumor necrosis factor (TNF), and macrophage
    activating factor (MAF).

    (5)     Note.  Hematopoietic cells are considered to be bone marrow stem
    cells and cells derived from bone marrow stem cells, including cells at any
    stage of differentiation from progenitor cells to mature erythrocytes,
    granulocytes, lymphocytes, etc., both normal and neoplastic.


CLS 424/1.45
TXT Attached to cyclopentano-hydrophenanthrene (e.g., cholesterol, bile acid,
    steroids, cholane), hormone, or neurotransmitter, or other secreted growth
    regulatory factor, differentiation factor, or intercellular mediator (e.g.,
    T3, T4, insulin, human chorionic gonadotropin, intragonadal regulatory
    protein, Mullerian inhibiting substance, inhibin, epidermal growth factor,
    nerve growth factor, dopamine, norepinephrine); derivative thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 1.11 in which the radionuclide or intended
    radionuclide is attached (bonded, chelated, complexed) to a
    cyclopentano-hydrophenanthrene (e.g., cholesterol), hormone, or
    neurotransmitter, or any other secreted growth regulatory factor,
    differentiation factor or intercellular mediator, or derivative thereof,
    that targets cells other than hematopoietic cells; and the derivatives
    thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The term "growth regulatory factor" is meant to encompass
    any secretory factor that is growth-stimulatory or growth-inhibitory (i.e.,
    that will stimulate or inhibit cluneal expansion of cells).

    (2)     Note.  The term "differentiation factor" is meant to encompass any
    secretory factor that causes cells to progress from a relatively
    undifferentiated state to a more differentiated state, wherein said
    progression may include cluneal expansion.

    (3)     Note.  The term "intercellular mediator" is meant to encompass any
    secretory factor that affects cellular functions such as chemotaxis, etc.

    (4)     Note.  Cyclopentano-hydrophenanthrene or a derivative thereof means
    those compounds which do not destroy the 17 carbon atoms forming the
    four-fused-ring structure.  The four-fused-ring structure need not contain
    the same number of hydrogen atoms or double bonds to be proper for
    placement here.  The necessary requirement is that the 17 carbons atoms
    retain the relationship exhibited in the base compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.21,   for liposomes containing cholesterol and derivatives within the
    liposome or liposome bilayer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    552,    Organic Compounds, for per se cyclopentano-hydrophenanthrene and
    derivatives thereof.


CLS 424/1.49
TXT Attached to antibody or antibody fragment or immunoglobulin; derivative
    thereof:Subject matter under subclass 1.11 in which the radionuclide or
    intended radionuclide is attached (bonded, chelated, complexed) to an
    antibody, or an antibody fragment, or immunoglobulin (e.g. monoclonal
    antibody); and the derivatives thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Antibodies, per se, including those having attached thereto
    a radionuclide, such as monoclonal and polyclonal antibodies, are
    considered to be compounds and are classified in Class 530, subclasses
    387.1+.

    (2)     Note.  Proper for placement here are mixtures or compositions, such
    as an immune serum or an antiserum, which are disclosed or reasonably
    believed to have antibodies attached to radionuclide or intended
    radionuclide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, appropriate
    subclasses for in vitro test methods including those methods which include
    injecting a host animal to produce an antibody or antisera if the virus or
    micro-organism injected is dead.  Class 424 provides for such methods, when
    the virus or micro-organism is live.

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives; Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, particularly subclasses 391.3+ for
    the radiolabeled compound, per se.


CLS 424/1.53
TXT Attachment via an added element (e.g., bifunctional compound or coordinate,
    coupling agent, spacer compound, bridging compound, conjugated
    chelate):Subject matter under subclass 1.49 in which the radionuclide or
    intended radionuclide is attached (bonded, chelated, complexed) to an
    antibody, antibody fragment, immunoglobulin, or derivative thereof via an
    added, interposed linking means, comprising at least one atom, between the
    radionuclide and the antibody, antibody fragment, immunoglobulin, or
    derivative thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of terms used to describe the subject matter proper
    for placement in this subclass include:  bifunctional compound or
    coordinate, spacer compound, bridging compound, conjugated chelate,
    chelating group, coordination complex, coupling agent, and conjugation
    agent.

    (2)     Note.  In the absence of a disclosure of an added attachment means
    the reference is not properly placed in this subclass, and is proper for
    subclass 1.49, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives; Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, particularly subclasses 391.3+ for
    the radiolabeled compound, per se.


CLS 424/1.57
TXT Attached to antigen or hapten; derivative thereof:
    Subject matter under subclass 1.11 in which the radionuclide or intended
    radionuclide is attached (bonded, chelated, complexed) to an antigen or a
    hapten; and the derivatives thereof.

    (1)     Note.  An antigen is a compound which induces the formation of an
    antibody in the living body.

    (2)     Note.  A hapten is a compound that has little or no antigenicity
    unless coupled to a carrier molecule.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.49+,  for radionuclide or intended radionuclide attached to antibody,
    antibody fragment, or immunoglobulin.


CLS 424/1.61
TXT In an inorganic compound:
    Subject matter under subclass 1.11 in which the radionuclide or intended
    radionuclide is attached (bonded, chelated, complexed) to or a part of an
    inorganic compound.

    (1)     Note.  See Note (1) in subclass 1.65 for a definition of organic
    compound.  An inorganic compound is any compound that does not meet the
    definition of an organic compound.

    (2)     Note.  An inorganic compound does not mean the, per se, element,
    but does include homogenous compounds such as I2.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.11    through 1.37, as appropriate, for class defined compositions
    containing or methods using, an unattached radionuclide or an unattached
    intended radionuclide.


CLS 424/1.65
TXT In an organic compound:
    Subject matter under subclass 1.11 in which the radionuclide or intended
    radionuclide comprises an organic compound.

    (1)     Note.  An organic compound is defined by the following statement
    (which originated from the definition set forth in Class 260, Chemistry of
    Carbon Compounds, as qualified by Note (34)):

            Compounds containing carbon which are further characterized by the
    presence in a molecule thereof of two carbon atoms bonded together, or one
    atom of carbon bonded to at least one atom of hydrogen or halogen, or one
    atom of carbon bonded to at least one atom of nitrogen by a single or
    double bond; including dicyanamide, dicyandiamide and salts thereof, which
    compounds, per se, are classified in Class 260; and excluding hydrocyanic
    acid, cyanogen, isocyanic acid, cyanamide, cyanogen halides, isothiocyanic
    acid, fulminic acid and metal carbides, all of which compounds, per se,
    will be classified in Class 423.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is the proper residual location for those
    class-appropriate compositions and uses having organic compounds not
    appropriate above or for a hereinunder indented subclass and having a
    radionuclide or an element intended to be converted to a radionuclide
    attached (bonded, chelated, complexed) thereto which is a metal.  The
    analogous class-appropriate compositions and uses having organic compounds
    having attached thereto a nonmetal are proper for subclasses 1.81+, below.

    (3)     Note.  A metal is any element other than a nonmetal.  The nonmetals
    are:  Hydrogen, Boron, Carbon, Silicon, Nitrogen, Phosphorus, Oxygen,
    Sulfur, Selenium, Tellurium, Fluorine, Chlorine, Bromine, Iodine, Astatine,
    Helium, Neon, Argon, Krypton, Xenon, and Radon; (H, B, C, Si, N, P, O, S,
    Se, Te, F, Cl, Br, I, As, He, Ne, Ar, Kr, Xe, and Rn.)

    SEARCH CLASS:

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, see (1) Note above.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 174+ and
    183+ for radiolabeled enzymes, per se.


CLS 424/1.69
TXT Attached to peptide or protein of 2+ amino acid units (e.g., dipeptide,
    folate, fibrinogen, transferrin, sp. enzymes); derivative thereof:Subject
    matter under subclass 1.65 in which the radionuclide or intended
    radionuclide is attached (bonded, chelated, complexed) to a compound which
    contains one or more peptide bonds; and the derivatives thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The term peptide bond means an amide bond (the group
    N-C(=O)) between two alpha-amino acids or an alpha-amino acid and
    beta-alanine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.17,   for proteinaceous cells or viruses and sub-cellular structures.

    1.41,   for proteins which are hematopoietic cell specific, secreted growth
    regulatory factor, differentiation factor, or intercellular mediator such
    as lymphokine.

    1.45,   for proteins which are secreted growth regulatory factor,
    differentiation factor, or intercellular mediator not specific to
    hematopoietic cells.

    1.49+,  for proteins which are antibodies.

    1.57,   for proteins which are intended to perform as antigens or haptens.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 174+ and
    183+ for radiolabeled enzymes, per se.


CLS 424/1.73
TXT Attached to carbohydrate compound; derivative thereof (e.g., DNA,
    nucleotide, nucleoside, sugar, starch, tannin, saccharide, polysaccharide,
    cellulose, O-, N- and S-glycoside, vitamin B12):Subject matter under
    subclass 1.65 in which the radionuclide or intended radionuclide is
    attached (bonded, chelated, complexed) to a carbohydrate compound which is
    a saccharide and whose monomeric units are polyhydroxy mono-aldehydes or
    polyhydroxy mono-ketones, having the formula Cn(H2O)n, wherein n is five or
    six, or the corresponding cyclic hemiacetals thereof, or the reaction
    derivatives thereof in which the carbon skeleton and the carbonyl function
    or hemiacetal function of the saccharide unit are not destroyed; and the
    derivatives thereof.

    (1)     Note.  For proper placement here, the saccharide or the monomeric
    saccharide radical unit of a polysaccharide must contain at least five
    carbon atoms, and the derivatives or reaction products must not destroy the
    carbon skeleton of the saccharide or polysaccharide.


CLS 424/1.77
TXT Phosphorus-containing organic compound:
    Subject matter under subclass 1.65 in which the radionuclide or intended
    radionuclide is attached (bonded, chelated, complexed) to, or a part of, an
    organic compound having a phosphorus atom.

    (1)     Note.  An organic compound having a radioactive phosphorus atom is
    proper for placement in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.61,   for the inorganic phosphate, pyrophosphate, or polyphosphate.


CLS 424/1.81
TXT Nonmetal radionuclide or intended radionuclide (e.g., carbon):Subject
    matter under subclass 1.65 in which the radionuclide or intended
    radionuclide is a nonmetal and is attached (bonded, chelated, complexed) to
    an organic compound.

    (1)     Note.  A nonmetal is a member of the group:  Hydrogen, Boron,
    Carbon, Silicon, Nitrogen, Phosphorus, Oxygen, Sulfur, Selenium, Tellurium,
    Fluorine, Chlorine, Bromine, Iodine, Astatine, Helium, Neon, Argon,
    Krypton, Xenon, and Radon (i.e., H, B, C, Si, N, P, O, S, Se, Te, F, Cl,
    Br, I, As, He, Ne, Ar, Kr, Xe, and Rn).


CLS 424/1.85
TXT Halogen:
    Subject matter under subclass 1.81 in which the radionuclide or intended
    radionuclide is a halogen (i.e., F, Cl, Br, I, and At) and is attached
    (bonded, chelated, complexed) to an organic compound.


CLS 424/1.89
TXT Fluorine:
    Subject matter under subclass 1.85 in which the radionuclide or intended
    radionuclide is fluorine and is attached (bonded, chelated, complexed) to
    an organic compound.


CLS 424/9.1
TXT IN VIVO DIAGNOSIS OR IN VIVO TESTING:

    Subject matter under the class definition which includes compositions
    intended for use in in vivo testing or in vivo diagnosis and nominal
    methods of using compounds or compositions for in vivo testing or in vivo
    diagnosis.

    (1)     Note.  Claims which include in vivo diagnosis or in vivo tests as
    merely incidental to the treatment of a patient are classified in one of
    the appropriate treatment subclasses below.

    (2)     Note.  In vivo, for this and the indented subclasses, means the
    actual test or diagnosis step must occur in or on the living subject.

    (3)     Note.  In a plural step test procedure, if the actual analysis step
    takes place in vivo, the test method is classified in this or the indented
    subclasses.  If the actual analysis step takes place in vitro, no matter
    how many other steps in the method involve in vivo treatment or
    administration, the test method will be classified in another class
    appropriate for such an in vitro test method.

    (4)     Note.  Included herein are methods of determining the efficacy of a
    bioaffecting compound or composition.

    (5)     Note.  These subclasses (424/9.1+) provide for plural step in vivo
    diagnostic procedures which utilize bioaffecting compounds or compositions
    wherein one of the steps is no more than a mere statement of nuclear
    magnetic imaging, x-ray imaging, ultrasound imaging, etc. of a living body.
     Class 128 provides for such tests if a more detailed manipulative step of
    nuclear magnetic or ultrasound imaging is included.  Diagnostic x-ray
    imaging may be found in Classes 128 and 378 depending on the test details
    recited.  A reading of the definitions for those classes is recommended for
    proper placement of the subject matter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.11+,  for diagnostic radioactive compounds or compositions or nominal
    diagnostic methods of utilizing such radioactive compounds or compositions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, which is the generic class for making a
    measurement or test of any kind not provided for in other classes.

    250,    Radiant Energy, for methods of detecting radiant energy

    252,    Compositions, subclass 408.1 for compositions which do not
    chemically react in use and are specialized and designed for use in
    physical analysis, testing or indicating, or as a warning agent.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, as the residual home for
    measuring and testing electrical properties or the measuring, testing, or
    sensing of nonelectric properties by electric means, but only when absent a
    significant chemical reaction.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, provides for analyzing light to
    measure or test its characteristics, determining the optical or nonoptical
    properties of materials or articles by noting the effect produced by the
    materials or articles on light associated therewith, etc.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, for apparatus and
    corresponding processes involving the generation or use of electromagnetic
    radiation within the X-ray spectrum.  Mere use with or attachment to an
    X-ray device or recitation of an undefined X-ray test or analysis is not
    sufficient for classification in Class 378.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    provides for processes where a condition in preparing an edible is sensed
    by other than subjective means.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology, and Microbiology, subclasses 4+ for
    in vitro measuring or testing involving enzymes or micro-organisms,
    subclasses 7.1+ for blood typing, protein binding, ligand-receptor binding,
    and immunological assays, subclasses 29+ for testing involving a viable
    micro-organism, and subclasses 40.5+ for testing involving fixed or
    stabilized, nonliving microorganism, cell, or tissue.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 1+ for
    chemical test standards and their use and the qualitative or quantitative
    analysis of chemical compounds, complexes, and elements which at some point
    involve a chemical interaction (see Class 436, CLASS DEFINITION, I. for
    further explanation) and subclasses 500+ for in vitro immunological or
    protein binding assays other than those involving a micro-organism or
    enzyme.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 300+ for an appliance and its use to aid in the
    diagnosis of a disease or abnormal condition of the body and subclass 556
    for skin allergy tests.


CLS 424/9.2
TXT Testing efficacy or toxicity of a compound or composition (e.g., drug,
    vaccine, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 9.1 wherein the capacity of a compound or
    composition (e.g., drug, vaccine, etc.) to produce a desired effect or an
    injurious or harmful effect in a living subject is tested for.

    (1)     Note.  Claims which include in vivo diagnosis or in vivo tests as
    merely incidental to the treatment of a patient are classified in one of
    the appropriate treatment subclasses below.

    (2)     Note.  Testing for an individual subject's hypersensitivity or
    possible allergy to a medicament or chemical prior to administration which
    involves a visible immune reaction on the skin is proper for subclass 9.81.

    (3)     Note.  Methods of testing for the reduction of toxic side effects
    of a compound or composition would also be included herein.

    (4)     Note.  Compounds or compositions tested can include therapeutic
    compounds or compositions, vaccines, etc.

    (5)     Note.  Included in this subclass are methods of determining the
    potency of antigenic preparations in inducing immunity, determining the
    teratogenic or oncogenic potential of a chemical, determining the
    prophylactic ability of a medicament, etc.


CLS 424/9.3
TXT Magnetic imaging agent (e.g., NMR, MRI, MRS, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 9.1 wherein a compound or composition is
    adapted for use as an in vivo magnetic imaging agent in processes such as
    nuclear magnetic resonance imaging (NMR), magnetic resonance imaging (MRI),
    magnetic resonance spectroscopy (MRS), magnetometry, etc. and methods of
    using said compounds and compositions as agents in such processes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 307+ for MRI
    apparatus and methods of using MRI apparatus.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 1+,
    particularly subclass 173, for in vitro tests using MRI.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 410+ for dianostic testing using magnetic
    resonance imaging or spectroscopy.  (See Class 424, subclass 9.1 for a
    further explanation of the class line.).


CLS 424/9.31
TXT Clay or zeolite containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.3 wherein the agent contains a clay or a
    zeolite.

    (1)     Note.  Zeolites are crystalline, hydrated alkali-aluminum silicates.


CLS 424/9.32
TXT Particle containing a transition, actinide or lanthanide metal (e.g.,
    hollow or solid particle, granule, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 9.3 wherein the agent includes particulate
    matter (e.g., hollow or solid particle, granule, etc.) which contains a
    transition, actinide or lanthanide metal (Atomic Numbers 21 through 30, 39
    through 48, 57 through 80, and 89 through 106, inclusive).

    (1)     Note.  The particulate matter may be organic, inorganic, or a
    combination thereof and may be hollow, solid, or aggregates of molecules
    which are not covalently bound.  It may be in the form of granules,
    microspheres, coated metal cores, metal oxide crystals, etc.

    (2)     Note.  The metals included under transition, actinide, or
    lanthanide metals are Sc, Ti, V, Cr, Mn, Fe, Co, Ni, Cu, Zn, Y, Zr, Nb, Mo,
    Tc, Ru, Rh, Pd, Ag, Cd, La, Ce, Pr, Nd, Pm, Sm, Eu, Gd, Tb, Dy, Ho, Er, Tm,
    Yb, Lu, Hf, Ta, W, Re, Os, Ir, Pt, Au, Hg, Ac, Th, Pa, U, Np, Pu, Am, Cm,
    Bk, Cf, Es, Fm, Md, No, Lr, Unq, Unp, and Unh.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.11+,  for compositions or methods under the class definition which
    contain radioactive isotopes of metals, i.e., U, Tc, etc. including
    diagnostic or test compositions or methods.


CLS 424/9.321
TXT Liposome:

    Subject matter under the subclass 9.32 wherein the shell of the particle
    contains a lipid bilayer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    450,    for compositions or methods under the class definition containing a
    liposome with a therapeutic agent in it.


CLS 424/9.322
TXT Polymer containing (e.g., polypeptide, synthetic resin, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 9.32 wherein the particle includes a polymer,
    e.g., protein, dextran, starch, polyvinyl, polysilane, etc.

    (1)     Note.  The polymer must be attached to, coated on, or complexed to
    the particle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 402+, for
    coated or structurally defined particulate matter as defined under the
    Class 428 definitions.


CLS 424/9.323
TXT Metal is paramagnetic:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.322 wherein the transition, actinide, or
    lanthanide metal of the particle is paramagnetic.

    (1)     Note.  A paramagnetic metal is one which is capable of aligning
    with a magnetic field, but does not itself become magnetized.

    (2)     Note.  For the purposes of this subclass the term ``paramagnetic"
    is intended to include only substances which are stated to be paramagnetic,
    not those stated to be superparamagnetic or ferromagnetic.


CLS 424/9.33
TXT Nitroxide or nitroxide containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.3 wherein the agent is a nitroxide or
    contains a nitroxide.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a nitroxide compound or component provided for
    herein is:


CLS 424/9.34
TXT Polypeptide attached to or complexed with the agent (e.g., protein,
    antibody, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 9.3 wherein the agent contains a polypeptide
    (e.g., protein, antibody, etc.) attached to or complexed with it.

    (1)     Note.  For the purposes of this subclass, a polypeptide contains a
    sequence of at least three amino acids.

    (2)     Note.  The term ``polypeptide" may encompass polypeptides such as
    glycoproteins, lipoproteins, etc., which additionally contain other
    moieties.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    514,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclass 6 for
    polypeptides containing a heavy metal and used for therapeutic purposes.


CLS 424/9.341
TXT The region of the imaging agent responsible for binding to an in vivo
    target or the region of the target responsible for binding to the agent is
    specifically recited functionally or as a sequence of amino acids,
    carbohydrate residues, or nucleic acids:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.34 wherein the polypeptide attached to said
    imaging agent directs delivery of said imaging agent to a specific in vivo
    target and wherein the specific binding properties of either the in vivo
    target or the polypeptide are described by a sequence (e.g., a series of
    amino acids, carbohydrate residues of a glycoprotein, nucleic acids
    encoding a polypeptide, etc.) or wherein the particular region of binding
    is described functionally (e.g., a unique region of an imaging agent
    defined by the fact that it binds a specific region of a target cell, but
    does not cross react with another region on the target cell etc.).

    (1)     Note.  A mere recitation of a generic type of binding (e.g., ``an
    anti-myosin antibody", etc.) would be proper for subclass 9.34, but a
    recitation of multiple properties of the binding site would be proper for
    subclass 9.341.


CLS 424/9.35
TXT Carbohydrate or derivative thereof attached to or complexed with the agent:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.3 wherein the agent has attached or
    complexed to it a  carbohydrate or a derivative thereof such as a
    monosaccharide or polysaccharide (the monosaccharide radical units of which
    contain at least five carbon atoms) or their reaction products wherein the
    carbon skeleton of the saccharide or polysaccharide is not destroyed, e.g.,
    dextran, cellulose, glucose, etc.


CLS 424/9.351
TXT The region of the imaging agent responsible for binding to an in vivo
    target or the region of the target responsible for binding to the agent is
    specifically recited functionally or as a sequence of amino acids,
    carbohydrate residues, or nucleic acids:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.35 wherein the carbohydrate attached to
    said imaging agent directs delivery of said imaging agent to a specific in
    vivo target and wherein the specific binding properties of either the in
    vivo target or the carbohydrate are described by a saccharide sequence or
    wherein the particular region of binding is described functionally (e.g., a
    unique region of an imaging agent defined by the fact that it binds a
    specific region of a target cell, but does not cross react with another
    region on the target cell, etc.)


CLS 424/9.36
TXT Transition, actinide or lanthanide metal containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.3 wherein the agent contains a transition,
    actinide, or lanthanide metal (Atomic Numbers 21-30, 39-48, 57-80, and
    89-106, inclusive).

    (1)     Note.  The metals included under transition, actinide, or
    lanthanide metals are Sc, Ti, V, Cr, Mn, Fe, Co, Ni, Cu, Zn, Y, Zr, Nb, Mo,
    Tc, Ru, Rh, Pd, Ag, Cd, La, Ce, Pr, Nd, Pm, Sm, Eu, Gd, Tb, Dy, Ho, Er, Tm,
    Yb, Lu, Hf, Ta, W, Re, Os, Ir, Pt, Au, Hg, Ac, Th, Pa, U, Np, Pu, Am, Cm,
    Bk, Cf, Es, Fm, Md, No, Lr, Unq, Unp, and Unh.

    (2)     Note.  A complex of a metal and an organic compound is considered
    to be a compound per se and is classified based on the moiety (metal or
    organic compound) which occurs first in the classification schedule.

    (3)     Note.  The transition, actinide or lanthanide metal may be
    complexed to a chelating agent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.11+,  for compositions or methods under the class definition which
    contain radioactive isotopes of metals e.g., U, Tc, etc., including
    diagnostic or test compositions or methods.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    534,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 15+ for nonradioactive organic
    lanthanide or actinide complexes, per se.


CLS 424/9.361
TXT Heterocyclic compound is attached to or complexed with the metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.36 wherein the metal is attached to or
    complexed with a heterocyclic compound.

    (1)     Note.  A heterocyclic compound is a compound containing at least
    one hetero ring which is a ring having carbon and at least one atom from
    the group consisting of nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, selenium and tellurium as
    ring members; and contains no other element as a ring member.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 424/9.362
TXT Porphyrin or derivative thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.361 wherein the hetero ring in the
    heterocyclic compound is part of a porphyrin ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Porphyrins are compounds containing the following basic
    structure:


CLS 424/9.363
TXT Hetero ring contains at least eight members:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.361 wherein the hetero ring of the
    heterocyclic compound contains eight or more members.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 424/9.364
TXT Polyamino-polycarbonyl moiety attached to or complexed with the metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.36 wherein the metal is attached to or
    complexed to a compound, said compound containing at least two amino
    nitrogen atoms and at least two carbonyl groups.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:

    where M is a transition, actinide or lanthanide metal and X is a positive
    integer.


CLS 424/9.365
TXT Contains at least one -C(=O)-N- group:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.364 wherein the compound contains at least
    one-C(=O)-N- group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 424/9.37
TXT Imageable halogen containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.3 wherein the agent is or contains a
    halogenated compound wherein the halogen is responsible for the agent being
    imageable.


CLS 424/9.4
TXT X-Ray contrast imaging agent (e.g., computed tomography, angiography,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 9.1 wherein a compound or composition is
    adapted for use as an in vivo X-ray contrast imaging agent in methods such
    as computed tomography, angiography, etc.

    (1)     Note.  X-ray contrast imaging is based on the fact that the agent
    renders part of an animal body opaque (degree of opacity may vary) to
    X-rays.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 299.01+ for a liquid crystal containing
    composition and subclasses 582+ for other compositions specialized for use
    in optical filters, and subclass 478 for a composition specialized and
    designed for use as an X-ray shield or X-ray shielding material.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly 145+ for beam control devices.


CLS 424/9.41
TXT Barium containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.4 wherein the agent contains barium, e.g.,
    BaSO4, BaCl2, etc.


CLS 424/9.411
TXT Polymer containing (e.g., polypeptide, synthetic resin, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 9.41 wherein the barium containing agent
    includes a polymer e.g., dextran, starch, polyvinyl, polysilane, etc.

    (1)     Note.  The polymer may be an additional separate ingredient in the
    agent, it may be complexed or attached to the agent, or it may be a coating
    on the agent.


CLS 424/9.42
TXT Transition, actinide or lanthanide metal containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.4 wherein the agent contains a transition,
    actinide, or lanthanide metal (Atomic Numbers 21-30, 39-48, 57-80, and
    89-106, inclusive).

    (1)     Note.  The metals included under transition, actinide, or
    lanthanide metals are Sc, Ti, V, Cr, Mn, Fe, Co, Ni, Cu, Zn, Y, Zr, Nb, Mo,
    Tc, Ru, Rh, Pd, Ag, Cd, La, Ce, Pr, Nd, Pm, Sm, Eu, Gd, Tb, Dy, Ho, Er, Tm,
    Yb, Lu, Hf, Ta, W, Re, Os, Ir, Pt, Au, Hg, Ac, Th, Pa, U, Np, Pu, Am, Cm,
    Bk, Cf, Es, Fm, Md, No, Lr, Unq, Unp, and Unh.

    (2)     Note.  A complex of a metal and an organic compound is considered
    to be a compound per se and is classified based on the moiety (metal or
    organic compound) which occurs first in the classification schedule.

    (3)     Note.  The transition, actinide or lanthanide metal may be
    complexed to a chelating agent.

    (4)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.11+,  for compositions or methods under the class definition which
    contain radioactive isotopes of metals, including diagnostic or test
    compositions or methods.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    534,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 15+ for nonradioactive organic
    lanthanide or actinide complexes, per se.


CLS 424/9.43
TXT Carbohydrate or derivative thereof attached to or complexed with the agent:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.4 wherein the agent has attached or
    complexed to it a  carbohydrate or a derivative thereof such as a
    monosaccharide or polysaccharide (the monosaccharide radical units of which
    contain at least five carbon atoms) or their reaction products wherein the
    carbon skeleton of the saccharide or polysaccharide is not destroyed, e.g.,
    dextran, cellulose, glucose, etc.


CLS 424/9.44
TXT Hetero ring containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.4 wherein the agent contains or is a
    heterocyclic compound.

    (1)     Note.  A heterocyclic compound is a compound containing at least
    one hetero ring which is a ring having carbon and at least one atom from
    the group consisting of nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, selenium and tellurium as
    ring members; and contains no other element as a ring member.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 424/9.45
TXT Halogenated benzene ring containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.4 wherein the agent contains a benzene ring
    to which at least one halogen atom (F, Cl, Br, or I) is directly attached
    by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 424/9.451
TXT Two or more halogenated benzene rings in the same compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.45 wherein the agent contains at least two
    halogenated benzene rings in the same compound.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 424/9.452
TXT Three or more amide groups are attached directly to the same benzene ring
    by nonionic bonding:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.451 wherein at least three amide groups are
    directly attached to the same benzene ring by nonionic bonding.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 424/9.453
TXT Carbonyl of a carboxylic acid or salt thereof attached directly to the
    benzene ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.451 wherein the benzene ring has the
    carbonyl of a carboxylic acid or salt thereof attached directly to it.

    (1)     Note.  An example of compounds provided for herein is:


CLS 424/9.454
TXT Three or more amide groups are attached directly to the same benzene ring
    by nonionic bonding:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.45 wherein at least three amide groups are
    directly attached to the same benzene ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  For the purposes of this subclass either the amino or the
    carbonyl moiety of the amide group may be the point of attachment to the
    benzene ring.


    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 424/9.455
TXT Carbonyl of a carboxylic acid or salt thereof attached directly to the
    benzene ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.45 wherein the benzene ring has the
    carbonyl of a carboxylic acid or salt thereof attached directly to it by
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 424/9.5
TXT Ultrasound contrast agent:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.1 wherein a compound or composition is
    adapted for use as an in vivo ultrasound contrast agent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 173.1+
    for processes wherein a microorganism is subjected to sound waves.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 437+ for methods and apparatus for applying and
    detecting ultrasonic radiation as it relates to a medical evaluation of a
    condition of a living body.


CLS 424/9.51
TXT Liposome containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.5 wherein the agent contains hollow
    particles and the shells of said hollow particles include a lipid bilayer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    450,    for compositions or methods under the class definition containing a
    liposome with a therapeutic agent in it.


CLS 424/9.52
TXT Stable gas bubbles containing or intentional solubilized gas containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.5 wherein the agent contains intended
    gases, which gases may be either solubilized or in a suspension of fine
    bubbles.


CLS 424/9.6
TXT Diagnostic or test agent produces in vivo fluorescence:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.1 wherein the diagnostic or test compound
    or composition is adapted for use as a fluorescent contrast agent.

    (1)     Note.  Processes in this subclass include a) applying a reagent to
    the skin which will react with a chemical of interest which may be present
    and then, upon irradiating the skin with UV light, fluorescence can be
    measured, b) parenterally dosing a patient with a reagent, exposing the
    subject to UV light and then observing fluorescence of a tissue, blood
    flow, etc.


CLS 424/9.61
TXT Porphyrin or derivative thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.6 wherein the fluorescent contrast agent is
    or contains a porphyrin or a derivative thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Porphyrins are compounds containing the following basic
    structure:


CLS 424/9.7
TXT Diagnostic or test agent produces visible change in mouth:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.1 wherein the compound or composition is
    adapted to detect a condition in the mouth.

    (1)     Note.  Intended for this subclass are processes of indicating the
    presence of gingivitis, malignant lesions, pH, brushing time, etc.


CLS 424/9.71
TXT Plaque detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.7 wherein the agent indicates the presence
    of plaque.


CLS 424/9.8
TXT Diagnostic or test agent produces visible change on skin:

    Subject matter under subclass 9.1 wherein the diagnostic compound or
    composition is adapted to detect a condition through a visible change on
    the skin.


CLS 424/9.81
TXT Visible immune reaction (e.g., allergy test, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 9.8 wherein the agent, an antigenic substance
    or allergen, is applied to or injected into a subject in order to determine
    whether the subject is allergic or hypersensitive to the agent as indicated
    by a visible change on the skin (i.e., redness, swelling, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  The antigenic substance or allergen includes pollen, house
    dust, micro-organisms, chemicals, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Skin tests such as those to indicate an individual's
    sensitivity to penicillin or other medicaments, tuberculosis tests, etc.
    are included in this subclass.


CLS 424/10.1
TXT IDENTIFICATION OR WARNING FEATURE:

    Subject matter under the class definition which includes compositions which
    contain an additional substance or feature which functions to identify the
    composition, to distinguish the composition from other similar
    compositions, or to give a warning or alarm to the user.

    (1)     Note.  Compositions classified herein are intended to provide a
    combination of an active ingredient of this class together with a component
    or feature which will facilitate identification of the active ingredient or
    will prevent and/or warn of improper use of a dangerous aspect of a
    compound or composition.  Examples include a germicidal composition which
    includes a colorant to show which surfaces have been treated, a pesticide
    which is distinctly labeled to prevent accidental consumption, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass are compositions in which the
    warning or identification feature is a physical or mechanical one such as
    indicia on a pill or a peculiar shape which prevents the swallowing of a
    potentially harmful substance.

    (3)     Note.  The use of color merely to make a Class 424 or Class 514
    compound or composition more attractive is not considered a means of
    identification or warning proper for this or the indented subclasses.
    Therefore, pills, capsules, toothpastes, cosmetics, etc. which are colored
    merely for looks, are classified elsewhere in Class 424 or Class 514 based
    on their other significant features or their active ingredients.

    (4)     Note.  If no identification or warning feature is additionally
    claimed, the following are not included in this or the indented subclasses,
    but are considered a treatment and are classified based on the first
    appearing active ingredient.  Examples of such are:  (1) antidotal
    compositions or antidotal compositions claimed in combination with the
    toxicant; (2) compositions wherein the medicament is claimed in combination
    with another compound or composition intended to minimize the side effects
    or toxicity of the medicament as is often done in chemotherapy; (3)
    compounds or compositions claimed in combination with an emetic to prevent
    poisoning or overdose; (4) compositions with an additional substance to
    reduce their explosive nature or prevent their deterioration or oxidation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49+,    for dentifrices.

    59+,    for a sun or radiation screening composition.

    126,    for a composition with a corrosion inhibitor.

    400+,   for preparations characterized by a special physical form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 408.1 for compositions which do not
    chemically react in use and are specialized and designed for use in
    physical analysis, testing or indicating, or as a warning agent.


CLS 424/10.2
TXT Printed or embossed unitary dosage form:

    Subject matter under subclass 10.1 wherein the compound or composition is
    in a unitary dosage form and contains a surface which is deformed, printed,
    embossed, engraved, or contains an insignia for the purpose of
    identification or warning.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes indicia adapted to be attached to a
    pill for identification purposes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    467,    for tablets which are printed, embossed, grooved, or perforated for
    a purpose other than identification or warning, such as to permit the
    tablet to be divided easily.


CLS 424/10.3
TXT Color or color change feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 10.1 in which the identification or warning
    involves a color or color change.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are pills containing colored
    specks to identify toxic substances, biocides which show a temporary color
    when applied to indicate where application has occurred, drugs which change
    color to indicate a change in pH, etc.

    (2)     Note.  The use of color merely to make a Class 424 or Class 514
    compound or composition more attractive is not considered a means of
    identification or warning proper for this or the indented subclasses.
    Therefore, pills, capsules, toothpastes, cosmetics, etc. which are colored
    merely for looks, are classified elsewhere in Class 424 or Class 514 based
    on their other significant features or their active ingredients.


CLS 424/10.31
TXT Combined with animal or insect repellant or insecticide (e.g., shark, fish,
    roach, etc):

    Subject matter under subclass 10.3 wherein the color or color change
    feature is part of a composition for repelling animals or insects or part
    of a composition for actually killing insects.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are fish repellants colored to
    indicate areas of the water which have been treated, colored insecticides
    to prevent inadvertent consumption, etc.

    (2)     Note.  The use of color merely to make a Class 424 or Class 514
    compound or composition more attractive is not considered a means of
    identification or warning proper for this or the indented subclasses.
    Therefore, pills, capsules, toothpastes, cosmetics, etc. which are colored
    merely for looks, are classified elsewhere in Class 424 or Class 514 based
    on their other significant features or their active ingredients.


CLS 424/10.32
TXT Combined with ophthalmic or dentifrice preparation:

    Subject matter under subclass 10.3 wherein the color or color change
    feature is part of a composition used in association with the eye or the
    mouth.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is an opthalmological medicinal
    film colored to identify the active ingredients, color coded tooth powder
    to identify the ingredients, etc.

    (2)     Note.  The use of color merely to make a Class 424 or Class 514
    compound or composition more attractive is not considered a means of
    identification or warning proper for this or the indented subclasses.
    Therefore, pills, capsules, toothpastes, cosmetics, etc. which are colored
    merely for looks, are classified elsewhere in Class 424 or Class 514 based
    on their other significant features or their active ingredients.


CLS 424/10.4
TXT Taste or smell or chemical irritation to the eye, nose or mouth feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 10.1 in which the identification or warning
    feature involves a taste or smell signal or a chemical which causes
    irritation to the eye, nose, or mouth (e.g., burning, coughing, tearing,
    etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are compositions such as fumigants
    or other toxic gases with an added substance having an obnoxious odor or an
    irritant so that the presence of the fumigant or toxic gas is quickly
    noticed, poisons with exceedingly irritating tastes or odors to prevent
    mistaken use of such poisons, etc.


CLS 424/40
TXT Compositions under the class definition which under the conditions of use
    are burned, usually incompletely, or which involve a chemical reaction
    serving to act as a force to project the material desired into the air as a
    smoke, mist, or aerosol, the particles of which must be of colloidal size
    or larger.  This and indented subclasses also provide for processes which
    are no more than the mere use of the composition; e.g., burning the
    composition in the area to be treated.

    (1)     Note.  Compositions which are disclosed to be evaporable, per se,
    to yield smoke or to act as fumigants when left open to the air with or
    without application of external heat are classified elsewhere on the basis
    of the ingredients of the composition.  To be placed herein, the
    composition, per se,  must contain at least one combustible ingredient or
    there must be disclosed a chemical reaction taking place as a result of
    which some ingredient, component, or reaction product in particular form is
    dispersed into the air.

    (2)     Note.  A composition designed to be burned in order to produce an
    odorizing or deodorizing effect upon the atmosphere; e.g., incense, etc.,
    is classified here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for a candle with a wick.

    43,     for a composition in which a compressed gas or release, or a
    chemical reaction serves to produce bubbles or effervescence in liquid, or
    in which a pressurized fluid component which is part of a composition on
    release serves to project other components of the composition into the air
    as a foam or spray.

    53,     for an oxygen or chlorine releasing dentifrice.

    661,    for a chlorine releasing composition.

    667,    for an iodine releasing composition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 124+ for
    certain processes and apparatus for destroying or killing vermin utilizing
    a smoke, mist, or aerosol.

    44,     Fueled and Related Compositions, appropriate subclasses for a
    composition designed to be burned primarily for its ability to produce heat.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 2 for a method of frost preventing by
    smoke.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosive Devices, appropriate subclasses for a
    smoke generating ammunition; e.g., bombs, grenades, cartridges, etc.

    114,    Ships, subclass 15 for a warship smoke screen.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 677+ for  apparatus for fumigating an
    animal.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 59.5 for   a smudge pot.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 305 for smokes, or fogs and processes of
    making same. Subclasses 315.01+ for a general smoke producing composition.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, appropriate subclasses for fumigators and other
    smoke- or mist-producing apparatus.


CLS 424/41
TXT Compositions under subclass 40 which contain elemental sulfur.


CLS 424/42
TXT Compositions under subclass 40 which contain an organic or inorganic
    nitrate compound.


CLS 424/43
TXT Composition under the class definition:

    (1.)    in which bubbles or effervescence in a liquid are produced in situ
    by a chemical reaction, or wherein said bubbles are produced by pressure
    release on a liquid system in which a gas is dissolved under pressure or

    (2.)    in which a composition, per se, contains a pressurized fluid which
    produces sufficient force on release to serve as a propellent for
    projecting the other components into the air or through the air as a foam,
    spray, or mist.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this and indented subclasses are compositions
    which contain carbonated water or those producing carbon dioxide gas by
    chemical reaction on addition of water or wherein a pressurized fluid, such
    as Freon is employed as a propellant for projecting a preparation into the
    air as an aerosol or foam.

    (2)     Note.  Compositions which are disclosed as having a volatile
    ingredient, per se, or which merely by being in particulate or liquid form
    may be sprayed or diffused by the simple application of externally applied
    air pressure or heat are classified elsewhere on the basis of the active
    component or components in said composition.

    (3)     Note.  Included in this and indented subclasses are all shaving
    preparations within the subclass definition, including those containing
    soap or other components which have a detergent action.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 394+ for dispensing with a fluid pressure
    discharge assistant; e.g., aerosols, etc.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 305 for a fog, smoke, or gaseous primary
    dispersant and subclasses 372+ for a gaseous composition.


CLS 424/44
TXT Compositions under subclass 43 in which the gas producing the "bubbling" or
    "effervescence" is the result of an in situ chemical reaction.

    (1)     Note.  Oxygen and halogen releasing compositions are excluded from
    this and indented subclasses and are classified below according to:





    (1)     the function of the composition  or

    (2)     to the particular gaseous material being released or

    (3)     the particular compound which releases said gaseous material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for a composition in which a chemical reaction is employed for the
    production of a smoke, mist, or aerosol.

    700,    for a composition in which carbon dioxide is an active constituent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, especially subclasses 6+, 27+, and 78+ for a
    fire extinguisher using gas produced in situ by a chemical reaction to
    produce pressure.


CLS 424/45
TXT Compositions under subclass 43 in which the pressurized fluid is an organic
    compound.


CLS 424/46
TXT Compositions under subclass 45 in which the organic pressurized fluid
    serves to propel or project an ingredient which is in the form of a
    particulate solid; e.g., body powders, tooth powders, talc, silicas,
    powdered medicines, insecticides, etc.


CLS 424/47
TXT Compositions under subclass 45 in which the organic pressurized fluid
    serves to propel a grooming or adorning aid; e.g., hair spray,
    antiperspirant, skin tanning preparation, skin conditioner, sun screening
    agent, shaving cream, etc., intended for topical application to a living
    body.

    (1)     Note.  See (3) Note under the definition of subclass 43.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65,     for antiperspirants or perspiration deodorants, per se.

    69,     for face or body powder, per se, for grooming, adorning, or
    absorbing purposes.


CLS 424/48
TXT Compositions under the class definition which are specifically disclosed to
    be in a chewing gum form, that is containing a chewable ingredient
    generally insoluble in the saliva which is usually disclosed a function as
    the carrier or vehicle for the active ingredient.

    (1)     Note.  The gum base herein is usually a natural gum or resin.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400+,   for a chewing gum type of composition defined in terms of structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, for an
    abrasive composition, for abrading teeth in a dental operation; e.g.,
    forming a cavity for a filling, etc.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclass 35 for a dental coating
    or plastic composition.

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 321+ for a toothpick and subclass 323 in
    particular for a dental floss.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 63.5 for a dental supply
    package.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, appropriate subclasses for alloys.

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 25+ for dental equipment; and subclasses 226+
    for fillings.


CLS 424/49
TXT Compositions under the class definition which function primarily in the
    normal hygiene of the oral cavity; e.g., tooth pastes, mouth washes,
    gargles, etc.

    (1)     Note.  A composition intended to be employed regularly in normal
    mouth-care is placed herein even if the composition contains ingredients of
    specific value in killing micro-organisms or in the treatment or prevention
    of specific mouth diseases or malfunctions such as pyorrhea trench mouth,
    gingivitis, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Since a dentifrice or mouthwash is generally compounded of a
    plurality of ingredients, some of the significant kinds of ingredients have
    been set out in indented subclasses 50 to 58.  For a particular ingredient
    containing composition not specifically provided for by said indents, a
    search through this and the indented subclasses will be necessary.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    Appropriate subclasses for a composition disclosed to be useful for
    treating a specific oral disease or malfunction in which said composition
    is not disclosed for regular use as a mouthwash or dentifrice in normal
    mouth care.


CLS 424/50
TXT Compositions under subclass 49 which contain as an ingredient an enzyme or
    a living organism capable of causing or modifying a fermentation; e.g.,
    bacteria, fungi, papain, urease, diastase, etc.


CLS 424/51
TXT Compositions under subclass 49 which contain as an ingredient elemental
    iodine or an iodine containing compound.


CLS 424/52
TXT Compositions under subclass 49 which contain as an ingredient elemental
    fluorine or a fluorine containing compound; e.g., stannous fluoride, etc.


CLS 424/53
TXT Compositions under subclass 49 which contain an ingredient capable of
    releasing oxygen or chlorine under the conditions of use; e.g., chlorates,
    peroxides, perborates, etc.


CLS 424/54
TXT Compositions under subclass 49 which contain as an ingredient a nitrogen
    containing compound in the form of ammonia or an amine or derivatives
    thereof; e.g., urea, diammonium phosphate, etc.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes a heterocyclic nitrogen containing
    compound.


CLS 424/55
TXT Compositions under subclass 49 which contain as an ingredient an hydroxy
    carboxylic acid or derivative thereof, said derivative being one wherein
    the oxygen atom of the hydroxy group and the carbonyl of the carboxylic
    acid group are retained; e.g., citric acid, salicylic acid, etc.


CLS 424/56
TXT Compositions under subclass 49 which contain an organic sulfate or
    sulfonate compound.


CLS 424/57
TXT Compositions under subclass 49 which contain a phosphate compound.


CLS 424/58
TXT Compositions under subclass 49 which contain a compound or material derived
    from a plant, including reaction products thereof, wherein the chemical
    structure of said compound, material, or reaction product is not
    sufficiently known to be classifiable on a chemical basis; e.g., oil of
    sassafras, Orris root, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for hair or scalp treating composition containing a plant extract.

    195.1,  for a composition containing a plant extract or plant material as
    an active ingredient.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    514,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclass 783
    for a carrier or adjuvant composition containing a plant extract of
    undetermined constitution.


CLS 424/59
TXT Compositions under the class definition which are intended to be applied
    topically to the skin or lips:



    (1)     as a protective measure to prevent or lessen the harmful effects
    which generally result from exposure to the sun or other similarly acting
    radiant energy source; e.g., sun, ultraviolet, etc., or

    (2)     which tan the skin by a chemical reaction with an ingredient
    thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    Appropriate subclasses for a method or composition for treating a burn and
    see subclasses 63 and 64 for live skin and lip colorants.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 299.01+ for an optical filter composition,
    per se, containing a liquid crystal and subclasses 582+ for other optical
    filter compositions, per se.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    350+ for an infrared or ultraviolet filter.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Class 523, subclass 136 for a composition containing a
    synthetic resin or natural rubber which is resistant to, yet does not
    absorb, radioactive materials or cathode rays or to processes of preparing
    said composition.


CLS 424/60
TXT Compositions under subclass 59 which contain an aromatic acid or derivative
    thereof; e.g., p-amino benzoic acid, salicylic acid, benzene sulfonamide,
    etc.


CLS 424/61
TXT Compositions under the class definition which are applied topically to the
    nails of the hands or feet for the care thereof; e.g., lacquers, polishes,
    tints, cuticle protectors or removers, nail hardeners, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses for a
    coating composition which is disclosed to have utility as, for example, a
    lacquer and subclass 311 for a solvent useful as a vehicle for a coating
    composition.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 364 for a lacquer removing composition.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, particularly appropriate areas
    in Class 523 and 524 for a synthetic resin or natural rubber composition.

    523,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 105+ for a
    nonmedicated composition specifically intended for contact with living
    animal tissue, other than apparel.


CLS 424/62
TXT Compositions under the class definition which bleach or remove color from
    live skin or hair and which are applied topically.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are compositions for removing natural or
    artificial colors; e.g., dyes, birthmarks, freckles, and suntan, etc.

    (2)     Note.  A composition for merely covering one color with another is
    not deemed to be color remover for this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  Dirt is not considered a colorant for purposes of this
    subclass; see Class 510, Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces,
    Auxiliary Compositions Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the
    Compositions, for cleaning compositions which remove dirt.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fiber, subclasses 404+ for dyeing and subclasses 101+ for a
    bleaching process provided for therein which involves more than the mere
    application of a composition.

    132,    Toilet, subclass 203 for a method of bleaching live human hair on
    the scalp which is more than the mere application of a composition.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 186.1+ for a bleaching composition, per se.

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses, particularly subclasses 367+, for cleaning compositions which
    include a bleach component.


    604,    Surgery, subclasses 290+ for a method for applying or removing
    material to the human body.


CLS 424/63
TXT Compositions under the class definition which are applied topically for
    coloring the skin in either a limited or overall area; e.g., blemish cover,
    cheek rouge, eye shadow, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fiber, appropriate subclasses for dyeing compositions, per se.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 400+ for pigment
    compositions, per se.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 1+ for a synthetic
    resin or natural rubber composition containing a dye.


CLS 424/64
TXT Compositions under subclass 63 which are specifically applied to the lip;
    e.g., lip rouge, lipstick, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400+,   for lipstick composition having structural limitations.


CLS 424/65
TXT Compositions under the class definition which are intended to be utilized
    as a topical application to the human body and which function:





    (1)     to inhibit or decrease perspiration, or

    (2)     to neutralize, by other than a masking effect, the odor caused by
    perspiration or

    (3)     to neutralize perspiration odor by action on a micro-organism.

    (1)     Note.  Compositions classified herein and in the indented
    subclasses are those in which the active principle or ingredient is not,
    per se, a perfume.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for an aerosol antiperspirant or deodorant composition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 5 for process of deodorizing which is
    more than the mere use of a composition.

    512,    Perfume Compositions, subclasses 1- 27 for a perfume composition,
    per se.


CLS 424/66
TXT Compositions under subclass 65 which contain a zirconium compound.


CLS 424/67
TXT Compositions under subclass 65 which contain a zinc compound.


CLS 424/68
TXT Compositions under subclass 65 which contain an aluminum compound.


CLS 424/69
TXT Compositions under the class definition which are in the form of minute
    particles, dusts, or powders having absorbent, grooming, or adorning
    utility in topical applications to the face or body.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are; e.g., compositions for removing skin
    shine, smoothing the skin surface, lubricating the skin (for purposes of
    putting on gloves, etc.) and for absorbing perspiration, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for an aerosol composition containing a powder or dust.

    65+,    for anti-perspirant or perspiration deodorant powders.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclass 36 for friction
    compositions intended for use with machinery or apparatus; e.g., clutches,
    belts, etc.

    512,    Perfume Compositions, subclasses 8+ for a lubricant composition,
    per se, and appropriate subclasses for perfume compositions, per se.


CLS 424/70.1
TXT LIVE HAIR OR SCALP TREATING COMPOSITIONS (NONTHERAPEUTIC):

    Compositions under the class definition which have topical nontherapeutic
    utility for treating the hair or scalp of the living body; e.g. grooming or
    adorning aids, tonics, rinses, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    132,    Toilet, appropriate subclasses for a method of treating human hair
    on the scalp which is more than the mere application of a Class 424
    composition.  Examples of processes provided for in Class 132 are
    successive applications of a plurality of compositions; e.g. waving
    solution and neutralizing solution, or the application of a setting
    composition combined with a step of shaping the hair (before or after the
    application) even though the shaping step is only claimed broadly.

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 119+ for
    nonmedicated shampoos which have cleaning as their primary function and
    which may include a hair conditioning, antistatic, softening, etc.,
    component as a perfecting ingredient to compensate for any damage, such as
    dryness or tangling, resulting from the cleaning process.

    514,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses for compositions which have utility in promoting hair growth  or
    in treating specific diseases of the hair or scalp,e.g. anti-dandruff
    compositions for treating the cause of the dandruff rather than mere
    removal of dandruff as by a shampoo, etc.


CLS 424/70.11
TXT Polymer containing (nonsurfactant, natural or synthetic):

    Compositions under subclass 70.1 which contain either a natural or
    synthetic polymer, which polymer may be solid, wax, or liquid, and is not
    acting in the composition as a surfactant.


CLS 424/70.12
TXT Silicon containing:

    Compositions under subclass 70.11 in which the polymer contains silicon.


CLS 424/70.121
TXT Silsesquioxanes:

    Compositions under subclass 70.12 which are silsesquioxanes; i.e polymers
    containing the monomer unit RSiO1.5.


CLS 424/70.122
TXT Amino or amido containing:

    Compositions under subclass 70.12 in which the silicon polymer contains an
    amino or an amido group.


CLS 424/70.13
TXT Polysaccharide or derivative:

    Compositions under subclass 70.11 in which the polymer is a polysaccharide
    or a derivative.


CLS 424/70.14
TXT Protein or derivative:

    Compositions under subclass 70.11 in which the polymer is a protein or a
    derivative.


CLS 424/70.15
TXT Polyvinylpyrrolidone or copolymer thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 70.11 in which the polymer is
    polyvinylpyrrolidone or copolymer thereof.


CLS 424/70.16
TXT Poly(meth)acrylic acid, salt, or copolymer thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 70.11 in which the polymer is derived from
    acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, their salts, or copolymers thereof.


CLS 424/70.17
TXT Polyamine, polyamide, or derivatives thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 70.11 in which the polymer is derived from an
    amine, from an amide, or derivatives thereof.


CLS 424/70.19
TXT Two or more designated surfactant containing:

    Compositions under subclass 70.1 which contains two or more surfactants
    (i.e. compounds that lower the surface or interfacial tension including
    detergents, foaming or wetting agents, emulsifiers, solubilizers, or
    dispersants) which are either designated in the claims or are art
    recognized as such.


CLS 424/70.2
TXT Permanent waving or straightening:

    Compositions under subclass 70.1 which have utility in permanent waving or
    straightening (relaxing) the hair.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for a pressurized fluid containing a hair setting spray.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 94.1+ for hair treating compositions or
    processes of using such compositions, particularly subclasses 94.16+ for
    depilatory compositions or processes of using such depilatory compositions,
    and for a depilatory having no more structure than a random coating on an
    unspecified base.  Subclass 127.51 for compositions or processes of
    chemically modifying hair not attached to a living body; e.g., shaping
    wigs, etc.


CLS 424/70.21
TXT Amphoteric or zwitterionic surfactant containing:

    Compositions under subclass 70.1 which contain an amphoteric (zwitterionic)
    surfactant; e.g., CH3-NHCH(COO-)CH2CONH-(CH2)5N (CH3)(C2H5) Metal (+).


CLS 424/70.22
TXT Anionic surfactant containing:

    Compositions under subclass 70.1 which contain an anionic surfactant.


CLS 424/70.23
TXT Phosphorus containing:

    Compositions under subclass 70.22 which contains a phosphorous-type anionic
    surfactant.


CLS 424/70.24
TXT Sulfur containing (sulfates, sulfonates, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 70.22 which contains a sulfur-containing
    anionic surfactant; e.g. sulfonates, sulfates, sulfosuccinates,
    isethionates, sarcosinates, taurates, etc.


CLS 424/70.27
TXT Cationic surfactant containing:

    Compositions under subclass 70.1 which contain a cationic surfactant
    (including cationic surfactant material which acts by chemically combining
    with keratinaceous material to reduce static, untangle, etc.).


CLS 424/70.28
TXT Quaternary ammonium salts:

    Compositions under subclass 70.27 which contains a quaternary ammonium
    cationic surfactant.


CLS 424/70.31
TXT Nonionic surfactant containing:

    Compositions under subclass 70.1 which contain a nonionic surfactant.


CLS 424/70.4
TXT Metal salt containing:

    Compositions under subclass 70.2 which contain as an ingredient a metal
    salt.


CLS 424/70.5
TXT Sulfur compound containing:

    Compositions under subclass 70.2 which contain as an ingredient a sulfur
    containing compound; e.g. mercaptans, sulfites, etc.


CLS 424/70.51
TXT Cysteine, cysteamine, or derivatives thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 70.5 which contain as an ingredient cysteine,
    cysteamine, or derivatives thereof.


CLS 424/70.6
TXT Hair coloring (nondyeing):

    Compositions under subclass 70.1 which are nondying compositions having
    utility in coloring the hair.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for compositions having utility in bleaching the hair.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, appropriate subclasses for fluid treatment and
    chemical modifications of the hair, subclasses 404+ for a dye composition
    disclosed to be suitable for dyeing  keratinaceous material; e.g. hair,
    etc., subclasses 101+ for a method of bleaching hair not attached to a
    living body; e.g., wigs, etc.


CLS 424/70.7
TXT Mascara:

    Compositions under subclass 70.6 having utility as  mascara; i.e., for
    coloring eyelash hair.


CLS 424/70.8
TXT Astringent or sebum inhibiting:

    Compositions under subclass 70.1 having utility as an astringent or for
    inhibiting the production of sebum.


CLS 424/70.9
TXT UV protectant:

    Compositions under subclass 70.1 having utility in protecting the hair from
    ultraviolet rays.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59,     for topically applied compositions which act as UV protectants for
    the skin.


CLS 424/73
TXT Compositions under subclass 70.1 which have utility in preparing hair on
    the body for cutting or shaving or for facilitating the cutting or shaving
    thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are the so-called brushless shaving creams
    which function to "set up" the hair as well as to lubricate the intended
    cutting area.  This subclass includes shaving preparations, regardless of
    any soap or detergent content.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 32+ for a razor.

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses for a cutting method (shaving).

    128,    Surgery, appropriate subclasses for a surgical cutting instrument.

    132,    Toilet, subclass 203 for a significant hair treatment process on
    the human scalp.

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, for cleaning
    compositions, per se.


CLS 424/74
TXT Compositions under subclass 70.1 which contain as an ingredient a compound
    or material derived from a plant, including reaction products thereof, said
    compound, material, or reaction product having a structure which is not
    sufficiently known to be classifiable on a chemical basis; e.g., bay rum,
    capsicum, oil of bergamot, oil of rosemary, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for a dentifrice or mouthwash containing a plant extract of
    undetermined constitution.

    195.1,  for a composition containing a plant extract or plant material of
    undetermined constitution as an active ingredient.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    514,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclass 783
    for a carrier or adjuvant composition containing a plant extract of
    undetermined constitution.


CLS 424/75
TXT Compositions under the class definition which have utility in preserving
    and preventing decay and/or in enhancing the appearance of a corpse.

    (1)     Note.  A tissue filling composition is included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    Appropriate subclasses for a biocidal composition which functions as a
    preserving or decay preventing agent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 94.16+ for a composition or process for
    depilating and treating hides, skins, feathers, and other animal tissues.

    27,     Undertaking, subclasses 22.1+ for a significant or manipulative
    embalming or preserving methods.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 4+ for processes of coating a plant
    member or animal specimen.


CLS 424/76.1
TXT DEODORANTS (NONBODY):

    Subject matter under the class definition which are deodorants and are not
    directly applied, per se, to a living body and which function:  (1) by
    chemically combining with an odorous principle, or (2) by destroying the
    odor-causing organism, or (3) by desensitizing the olfactory mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclass 128 for a shoemaking form with a
    deodorant.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclass 310 for a process
    of deodorizing an organic compound by absorption.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclass 905 for a reel with a
    storage chamber which may contain a deodorant.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 305 for a mere (nonspecial use) aerosol
    composition.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 1+ for processes of disinfection,
    deodorizing, preserving, or sterilizing using a compound or a Class 424
    composition which is more than the single step of mere application of the
    compound or composition.

    504,    Plant Protecting and Regulating Compositions, subclasses 101+ for
    an insecticide, fungicide, or deodorant containing fertilizers.

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 131+ for
    cleaning compositions for human skin which include an antiseptic, biocidal,
    or deodorizing component.


    512,    Perfume Compositions, for, per se, perfume compositions.

    523,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 102 for a synthetic
    resin or natural rubber composition which is odor masked, odor reduced or
    perfumed as well as the process of preparing such composition.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclasses 823+ for a process
    of purifying a hydrocarbon by sorption removal of a chemically undetermined
    odorant.

    604,    Surgery, subclass 333 for a deodorant containing receptacle
    attached to a surgically constructed body opening; subclass 359 for a
    deodorant containing receptacle attached to a surgically constructed body
    opening; and subclass 359 for a deodorant containing absorbent pad.


CLS 424/76.2
TXT Deodorizing substance is evaporable, sublimable or gas (e.g., deodorization
    of air, aerosol spray compositions, etc.):Subject matter under subclass
    76.1 which are evaporatable, sublimable, or a gas.

    (1)     Note.  The compositions of this and the indented subclasses are for
    the removal, including chemical reaction, or masking of odors in the air.


CLS 424/76.21
TXT For chemical reaction with odor producing material or gas evolving
    composition:

    Compositions under subclass 72.2 which, (a) chemically react with the odor
    producing material (b) is a composition for the chemical evolution of gas.


CLS 424/76.3
TXT From a gel or solid matrix (e.g., retarded vaporization compositions, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 76.2 which is released from a gel of solid
    matrix.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes deodorant which evaporates or
    sublimes from a block of deodorizing substance.


CLS 424/76.4
TXT With odor masking substances (e.g., perfumes, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 76.3 which contain an odor masking substance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 171.2 for a head covering containing perfume.

    63,     Jewelry, digest 2 for perfumed jewelry.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 86 for a garment hanger containing
    perfume.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclass 377 for demonstrating
    apparatus involving a perfume.

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 101+ for
    perfume-containing cleaning compositions or their auxiliary compositions,
    such as fabric softeners or antistatic agents used in the laundry rinse or
    dryer cycle, etc.

    523,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 102 for a perfumed
    composition or the method of preparing a perfumed composition.

    D28,    Cosmetic Products and Toilet Articles, subclass 5 for a perfume or
    sachet.


CLS 424/76.5
TXT For application to waste materials, solid or liquid refuse or sewage:

    Subject matter under subclass 76.1 which are for application to waste
    materials, solid or liquid refuse or sewage.


CLS 424/76.6
TXT Waste includes fecal material or urine (e.g., feed lot or cage waste, pet
    litter, etc.):Compositions under subclass 76.5 which are used on waste
    including feces or urine.


CLS 424/76.7
TXT For toilet or urinal (e.g., recirculating toilet fluid, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 76.6 which are used in a toilet or urinal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes recirculating toilet fluids and
    additives as well as materials for adding to septic systems or cesspools to
    control odors.


CLS 424/76.8
TXT With bio-affecting material (i.e., biocide or biostat):

    Compositions under subclass 76.1 which contain materials which control or
    eliminate microbial growth.


CLS 424/76.9
TXT Inorganic only or containing plant or animal extract:

    Compositions under subclass 76.8 which are composed solely of inorganic
    materials or which contain an animal or plant extract.


CLS 424/77
TXT Compositions under the class definition which are intended to be utilized
    as an adhesive for trapping a pest which may come in contact therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    443+,   for a coated sheet, web, or filament.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, in particular subclasses
    114+ and 136 for an adhesive vermin trapping or destroying device.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses for an
    adhesive composition other than one containing a synthetic resin.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 207.1+ for processes of manufacturing
    an adhesive tape by a coating process.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Class 523 and 524 for adhesive compositions.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclasses 17+ for a nonsolid,
    greasy, or waxy hydrocarbon polymer.


CLS 424/78.01
TXT DIGESTIVE SYSTEM REGULATOR CONTAINING SOLID SYNTHETIC ORGANIC POLYMER AS
    DESIGNATED ORGANIC ACTIVE INGREDIENT (DOAI) (E.G., ANTI-DIARRHETIC,
    ANTICONSTIPATION, APPETITE SUPPRESSANT, LAXATIVE, ETC.):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the active ingredient is
    a solid synthetic organic polymer used to treat or regulate  the digestive
    system; e.g., diarrhea, constipation, etc.

    (1)     Note.  The term designated organic active ingredient (DOAI) denotes
    one which imparts a physiological, pharmacological, or biological effect.
    Please refer to Class 514, Main Class Definition, (3) Note, for further
    elaboration on this.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass provides for compositions  containing a solid
    synthetic polymer as a DOAI, methods of making such compositions, and mere
    methods of using such compositions.  A composition, for example, containing
    a laxative (DOAI) and a solid synthetic polymer used merely as a binder or
    as a slow release agent is not classified here, but is classified in
    subclasses 400+ when there is special structure or in Class 514, based on
    the laxative.

    (3)     Note.  See Class 520, subclass 1, (9) Note, for a more complete
    discussion of what is a solid synthetic polymer.  No weight is given to
    expressions designating molecular weight; e.g., 1,000, 40,000, etc., since
    these numbers can reflect solid, waxy, or liquid polymers alike.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    523,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 105+ for
    nonmedicated compositions specifically intended for contact with living
    animal tissue or processes of preparing other than apparel.


CLS 424/78.02
TXT TOPICAL BODY PREPARATION CONTAINING SOLID SYNTHETIC ORGANIC POLYMER AS

    DESIGNATED ORGANIC ACTIVE INGREDIENT (DOAI):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the designated organic
    active ingredient (DOAI) is a solid synthetic polymer used topically to
    treat a living  animal.

    (1)     Note.  The term designated organic active ingredient (DOAI) denotes
    a polymer which exhibits a physiological, pharmacological, or biological
    effect.  Also, a solid synthetic polymer will be classified here if it
    behaves as a synergist or potentiator, i.e., one which will cooperatively
    act with an active ingredient to the extent that the total effect will be
    greater than the sum of the two individual effects.  See (2) and (4) Notes
    below for further details on topical coatings.

    (2)     Note.  Topical preparations are those medications whose properties
    are designed either to treat superficial areas; e.g., mucosa of the eyes,
    nose, mouth (not throat), etc., or epidermis; e.g., skin rashes, burns,
    lesions, rectum, and other external body parts.  There are also
    medications, though applied topically, which are designed to be absorbed
    transdermally with the intention of being absorbed into the blood stream.
    For example, a scopolamine patch (a patch, per se, implies no structure) is
    used to treat motion sickness, a nitroglycerine patch is used to treat
    angina pectoris, and finally a clonidine patch is used to treat
    hypertension; likewise, nasal sprays to relieve sinus congestion or pain as
    well as rectal suppositories are all excluded from this subclass.  A drug
    parenterally administered; i.e., intramuscularly, subcutaneously, or
    intravenously injected, is also excluded from this subclass.  Patents
    placed here typically treat skin lesions, inflammations; e.g., iliac stoma,
    etc.

     (3)    Note.  See Class 520, subclass 1, (9) Note, for a more complete
    discussion on what is a solid synthetic resin.  No consideration is given
    to numerical expressions of molecular weight since these numbers can
    reflect solid, waxy, or liquid polymers.

    (4)     Note.  This note serves to distinguish this class (424), subclasses
    78.02 - 78.07 with Class 514, appropriate subclasses, and Class 523,
    subclasses 105+.  A pharmaceutical or cosmetic composition is always
    sufficient for placement in Class 424.  A composition containing a solid
    synthetic polymer, with or without a DOAI, used to form a barrier layer or
    film on living animals to ward off harmful or disturbing agents; e.g.,
    radiation, animals, insects, chemicals, allergens, etc., to promote
    healing; e.g., burns, etc., or to reduce inflammation or irritation, etc.,
    is proper herein.

            A surgical adhesive composition to be coated on a fabric, gauze,
    tape, etc., is classified in Class 523, subclass 111.  A surgical adhesive
    composition; e.g., alphacyanoacrylate, when applied directly to living
    animal tissues is classified herein.

    (5)     Note.  A topical body preparation appropriate for this class, whose
    composition contains a monomer, prepolymer, or other chemical intermediates
    which forms a solid synthetic polymer after being applied and without the
    aid of catalysis, other than heat or water, is properly classified herein.
    Otherwise, classification is in Class 514, subclasses 772+.  See this
    class, subclass 78.06 for examples to compositions containing moisture
    polymerizable alpha-cyano-acrylate to seal wounds and incisions.

    (6)     Note.  A composition containing a solid synthetic polymer as DOAI
    broadly disclosed or claimed as a germicide will be classified here since
    many of them are used topically.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclass 161 for processes of applying depilatory
    lotions or   creams  to the skin of living animals or compositions thereof.

    514,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 1+
    for a composition containing both a designated organic active ingredient
    (DOAI) and a nonactive solid synthetic polymer, subclasses 772.3, 772.2,
    and 788.1 for compositions devoid of a DOAI containing a solid synthetic
    polymer.

    523,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 105+ for
    nonmedicated compositions for contact with living animal tissue and
    especially subclass 111 for compositions used to protect wounds, lesions,
    etc.  The mere method of using these compositions for contact with living
    animal tissue is classified either in Class 424 or Class 514.  The
    following are examples of polymer compositions found in Class 523,
    subclasses 105+:

    1.     For manufacturing medical devices; e.g., blood bags, optical lenses,
    tubes,
    probes, cannulae, prostheses, catheters, surgical instruments, organs, etc.
    (e.g., from heparinized polyurethane, etc.).

    2.     For dental and body impressions.

    3.     Adhesive for bonding a textile to skin, surgical or medical
    dressings, etc.

    4.     As a dental adhesive or cement.

    5.     For absorbing body fluids other than by topical coating; e.g.,
    sanitary
    napkins, etc.

    6.     For manufacturing bandages.

    7.     As an osseous or bone cement for bone replacement or repair; e.g.,
    one
    which contains hydroxyapatite, bio-active glass ceramic powder, crushed
    bone or particles of demineralized bone, calcium phosphate, etc.

    8.     For slow release of pharmaceutically active agents (but not present).

    525,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses for a
    solid synthetic polymer which has been chemically aftertreated with a
    chemical or drug intended for topically treating a living body.

    604,    Surgery, subclass 290 for a significant method of applying a body
    treating material or removing material from the body surface.


CLS 424/78.03
TXT Skin cosmetic coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 78.02 wherein the composition contains a
    solid synthetic polymer used to coat the external body parts for cosmetic
    purpose; e.g., a skin peel to remove materials from the surface and the
    sebaceous follicles of human skin, etc.

    (1)     Note.  The meaning to the term "cosmetic" is essentially the same
    as that generally accepted or is in common usage.

    (2)     Note.  See subclass 78.02 for a discussion on the limitations of
    cosmetic compositions proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401,    for cosmetic, antiperspirant, and dentifrice for those compositions
    associated with some structural limitations; e.g., special form, specific
    dimensions or configurations, plural layers, etc.


CLS 424/78.04
TXT Ophthalmic preparation:

    Subject matter under subclass 78.02 wherein the composition is used for (1)
    disinfecting, sterilizing or preserving a contact lens or (2) manufacturing
    a contact lens using a polymer composition in admixture with a polymer from
    (1).  Such a composition normally would be classified in Class 523,
    subclass 106, but in most cases, said composition likewise reduces or
    eliminates eye injury or irritation to the contact lens wearer, or (3) for
    topically treating the eye of a living animal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    427,    in which the ophthalmic drug or ocular device is in a special
    physical form intended for and adapted to be placed between the surface of
    the eye and conjunctiva or between the surface of the eye and a lacrimal
    gland.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dying; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modifications of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclass 507 for the process of dyeing a contact lens
    or product thereof.

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, appropriate
    subclasses for methods of and instruments for fitting contact lenses and
    structural features and adaptations for contact lenses, such as coloring a
    portion of the lens to adsorb part of the visible spectrum; subclasses 160+
    for eye contact lens.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 1-43 for generic processes of
    deodorizing, preserving or sterilizing of contact lenses or compositions
    thereof.

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 112+ for
    compositions used for the mere cleaning of contact lenses.

    514,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses for (1) a contact lens composition which contains a nonbioactive
    polymer admixed with a medicament or (2) a composition with or without a
    non-bioactive polymer used to sterilize a contact lens composition to
    reduce or eliminate any eye injury.

    523,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 106 for a composition
    containing an inactive solid synthetic polymer intended for manufacturing
    contact lenses.  This subclass also provides for a contact lens composition
    containing its own preserving agent when it is clearly specified and
    restricted for that use.  The nominal method of using these compositions
    for contact with living animal tissue is classified either in this class or
    in Class 514.  See (3) Note in this class (424), subclass 78.02 for more
    information distinguishing between these two classes.

    604,    Surgery, subclass 290 for a method of applying a body treating or
    removing material or subclasses 294+ for a method of application to the eye
    or eye socket.


CLS 424/78.05
TXT Anti-inflammatory or anti-irritant (e.g., anti-arthritic, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 78.02 wherein a solid synthetic polymer is
    the active ingredient for topically treating or preventing an inflamed or
    irritated condition; e.g., an iliac stoma (intestinal opening), etc.

    (1)     Note.  Compositions which are classified here contain a solid
    synthetic resin which is considered active when:

    a.      The polymer, per se, exhibits anti-inflammatory or anti-irritant
    properties.

    b.      The polymer synergizes or potentiates an active agent.

    c.      The polymer is utilized for its film-forming properties to cover a
    portion of the surface on a living animal to establish a protective layer
    to either enhance the healing process, or prevent inflammation or
    irritation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400+,   especially subclasses 443+ for anti-inflammatory compositions which
    are structurally designed; e.g., via coating, laminating, encapsulating,
    etc., to cause slow release of the active agent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    514,    Drug Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 1+
    for an anti-inflammatory composition containing both a designated organic
    active ingredient (DOAI) as well as a nonactive solid synthetic polymer or
    subclasses 772.3+ for compositions which are proper for this class that do
    not contain a DOAI, but do contain a nonactive solid synthetic polymer.

    525,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, for a solid synthetic polymer
    which has been chemically aftertreated with an active agent intended for
    topically treating a living body.


CLS 424/78.06
TXT Skin burn or open wound treatment:

    Subject matter under subclass 78.02 wherein a solid synthetic polymer is
    the active ingredient for topically treating a skin burn or open wound;
    e.g., a composition containing sodium polyacrylate dissolved in a solvent
    system for application to a human or animal skin burn to enhance healing,
    etc.

    (1)     Note.  Search this class, subclass 78.02, for a further discussion
    on polymers classified herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    443+,   in which the anti-burn or open-wound-treating composition is in a
    special physical form; e.g., bandage, dressing, etc., or structurally
    designed; e.g., coating, laminating, encapsulating, etc., to affect
    controlled release of the active agent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, appropriate subclasses for a significant method of
    treating an open wound.

    514,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 1+
    for skin burn compositions containing an active ingredient (DOAI) and also
    containing a nonactive solid synthetic polymer or subclasses 772.3+ for
    compositions which are proper for this class containing a nonactive solid
    synthetic polymer and devoid of a DOAI.


CLS 424/78.07
TXT Anti-infective:

    Subject matter under subclass 78.02 wherein a solid synthetic polymer is
    the active ingredient for combatting topical infections; e.g.,
    polyvinylpyrrolidone-iodine complex, etc.


CLS 424/78.08
TXT SOLID SYNTHETIC ORGANIC POLYMER AS DESIGNATED ORGANIC ACTIVE INGREDIENT
    (DOAI):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the active ingredient is
    disclosed to be a solid synthetic polymer DOAI.

    (1)     Note.  The term designated organic active ingredient (DOAI) denotes
    a polymer which imparts a physiological, pharmacological, or biological
    effect.  Also, a solid synthetic polymer will be classified here, if it
    functions as a synergist or potentiator, i.e., one which will cooperatively
    act with an active ingredient to the extent that the total effect will be
    greater than the sum of the two individual effects.  This subclass also
    provides for both the nominal methods of making and using the composition.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 520, subclass 1, (7) and (8) Notes, for a more
    complete discussion of what is a solid synthetic polymer.  No weight is
    given to expressions designating molecular weight; e.g., 1,000, 40,000, or
    4,000,000, etc., since these numbers can reflect solid, waxy, or liquid
    polymers alike.

    (3)     Note.  Carbohydrates, polypeptides and cellulosic products and most
    of their derivatives are considered to be naturally occurring polymeric
    products.  The exceptions to this are those which are found in Class 527;
    See SEARCH CLASS below.  The synthesis of polypeptides in a random
    sequence; e.g., the use of N-carboxy-anhydrides of alpha-amino acids, etc.,
    results in one which is considered proper herein when it is the DOAI and in
    Class 514, subclass 772.3, when it is not.  The synthesis of polypeptides
    in an ordered sequence; e.g., the use of the Merrifield method, etc.,
    results in one which is considered proper for Class 514, subclasses 2+,
    when it is the DOAI and in Class 514, subclasses 773+, when not.  See Class
    530, subclass 300, (1) Note, for a further discussion on this.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400+,   for a pharmaceutical or cosmetic composition containing a solid
    synthetic organic polymer which possesses some form or shape, or a specific
    dimension or configuration, or its components are associated as layers or
    parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclass 35 for dental
    compositions devoid of a DOAI or a solid synthetic polymer.

    128,    Surgery, appropriate subclasses for appliances manufactured
    completely or partially from synthetic organic polymers.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 2.1+ for coating processes wherein
    the base or the coating has medical or dental utility.

    514,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 1+
    for a composition containing both a designated organic active ingredient
    (DOAI) and a non-active solid synthetic polymer, subclasses 772.2, 772.3,
    and 788.1 for compositions devoid of a DOAI containing a solid synthetic
    polymer.

    523,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 105+ for
    non-medicated compositions for contact with living animal tissue and
    especially subclass 111 for compositions used to protect wounds, lesions,
    etc.  The mere method of using these compositions for contact with living
    animal tissue is classified either in Class 424 or Class 514.  The
    following are examples of subject matter found in Class 523, subclasses
    105+:

    1.     For manufacturing medical devices; e.g., blood bags, optical lenses,
    tubes,
    probes, cannulae, prostheses, catheters, surgical instruments, organs,
    etc.; e.g., from heparinized polyurethane, etc.

    2.     For dental and body impression or filling compositions.

    3.     As an adhesive for bonding a textile to skin, surgical or medical
    dressings, etc.

    4.     As a dental adhesive or cement.

    5.     For absorbing body fluids; e.g., sanitary napkins, etc.

    6.     For manufacturing bandages.

    7.     As an osseous or bone cement for bone replacement or repair; e.g.,
    one
    which contains hydroxyapatite, bio-active glass ceramic powder, crushed
    bone or particles of demineralized bone, calcium phosphate, etc.

    8.     For slow release of pharmaceutically active agents (but not present).

    525,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses for a
    solid synthetic polymer which has been chemically aftertreated with a
    chemical or drug intended for medicinal use; e.g., reacting a polymer with
    heparin, a glucoside with anticoagulant properties, etc.

    527,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, for those synthetic resins
    which incorporate a naturally occurring material as a reactant; e.g.,
    protein, carbohydrate bituminous material, etc.

    604,    Surgery, appropriate subclasses for medical devices manufactured
    completely or partially from synthetic organic polymers.

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, appropriate subclasses for prosthesis
    manufactured completely or partially from synthetic organic polymers.


CLS 424/78.09
TXT Anti-fouling composition (e.g., paints, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 78.08 wherein a composition contains a
    synthetic organic polymer as an active ingredient which prevents the
    fouling of marine structures; e.g., ships, buoys, pilings, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses for a pest-repelling composition, per se, and for certain coated
    substrates wherein the substrate functions as an applicator or carrier for
    the composition and wherein the general intent is to provide a pesticidal
    or pest-repelling effect rather than a means to protect the carrier or
    substrate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    523,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 122 for compositions
    containing a biocide to prevent deterioration of the polymer present in the
    composition.


CLS 424/78.1
TXT Ion exchange resin:

    Subject matter under subclass 78.08 wherein the solid synthetic polymer is
    an ion-exchange resin; e.g., sodium acrylate-divinyl benzene copoly-mer,
    sodium salts of sulfonated polystyrene and sulfonated polystyrene-divinyl
    benzene, quaternized product of chloromethylated polystyrene-divinyl
    benzene, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Since many polymers possess ionic structures as exemplified
    above, classification is proper here only when the ion exchange properties
    are clearly disclosed or claimed; e.g., a patent claims the use of an ion
    exchange resin used to treat hypercholesteremia (i.e., reduction of serum
    cholesterol), etc.

    (2)     Note.  Ion exchange resins are those synthetic resins containing
    active groups (usually sulfonic, carboxylic, phenol, or substituted amino
    groups) that give the resin the property of combining with or exchanging
    ions between the resin and a solution.  Thus, a resin with active sulfonic
    groups can be converted to the sodium form and will then exchange its
    sodium ions with the calcium ions present in hard water.  "Amberlite"
    resins are of this type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    514,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses for ion exchange resins which are not considered designated
    organic active ingredients.

    521,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 25+ for ion
    exchange resins and processes of preparing.


CLS 424/78.11
TXT Plural ion exchange resins:

    Subject matter under subclass 78.1 wherein the composition contains two or
    more ion exchange resins as DOAI; e.g., an antihistaminic composition
    consisting of 10 percent chlorpheniramine sulfonic acid cation exchange
    resin and 90 percent phenyltoloxamine sulfonic acid cation exchange resin,
    etc.

    (1)     Note.  A single resin heated with a multiplicity of reagents; e.g.,
    calcium hydroxide and sodium hydroxide to impart both calcium and sodium
    ions to the resin is not a mixture of two resins.  The same resin treated
    in separate batches with the above reagents respectively then combined
    would be proper here.


CLS 424/78.12
TXT Adsorbate or treating agent contains nitrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 78.1 wherein the composition contains an ion
    exchange resin DOAI whose preparation involved either a nitrogen containing
    treating agent; e.g., the quaternization with dimethyl amine of
    chloromethylated polystyrene-divinyl benzene or the chemical addition
    (adsorbate) of an active agent; e.g., the aftertreatment of polyacrylic
    acid-divinyl benzene with oxytetracycline, etc.

    (1)     Note.  It is not essential that either the adsorbate or treating
    agent impart ion exchange capacity to the resin so long as the final
    product contains these characteristics.

    (2)     Note.  The adsorbate or treating agent can be regarded as such only
    with reference to a solid organic polymer, otherwise they must be construed
    as a reactant to form a solid organic polymer or precursor thereof.


CLS 424/78.13
TXT Oxygen or sulfur heterocycle:

    Subject matter under subclass 78.12 wherein the adsorbate or chemical
    treating agent contains an oxygen or sulfur heterocycle; e.g.,
    epichlorohydrin, dithiazanine, dihydrocodeinone (hydrocodone), etc.


CLS 424/78.14
TXT Nitrogen heterocycle:

    Subject matter under subclass 78.12 wherein the adsorbate or treating agent
    contains a nitrogen heterocycle; e.g., nicotinamide, pyrilamine, etc.


CLS 424/78.15
TXT Plural nitrogen heteroatoms or rings:

    Subject matter under subclass 78.14 wherein the adsorbate or treating agent
    either contains plural nitrogen atoms in the ring or plural nitrogen
    containing rings; e.g., histamine, phenobarbital, vitamin B-12, vincamine,
    CDP-choline, etc.


CLS 424/78.16
TXT Amine containing aromatic group:

    Subject matter under subclass 78.12 wherein the adsorbate or treating agent
    is an amine containing an aromatic group; e.g., amphetamine,
    oxytetracycline, Voltaren (registered trademark of diclofenac sodium), etc.


CLS 424/78.17
TXT Aftertreated polymer (e.g., grafting, blocking, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 78.08 wherein the solid synthetic polymer is
    subjected to an aftertreatment process wherein, though the most common
    process is chemical in nature, other aftertreatment processes likewise are
    proper herein; e.g., radiation, physical, heat, etc.; the one requirement
    being that a bond-breaking process occurs within the polymer molecule.

    (1)     Note.  The chemical aftertreatment of a solid synthetic organic
    polymer may be to remove or add a group or element or a combination of both
    procedures.  The following examples are given to illustrate the type of
    polymers which may be found here:

    a.      A therapeutic preparation for treating encephalomyelitis contained
    an active polymer which was derived from the N-carboxy-anhydrides of
    tyrosine, alanine, gamma-benzyl glutamate and
    epsilon-N-trifluoroace-tyllysine followed by the deblocking of the gamma
    carboxyl group of the glutamic acid and followed further by the removal of
    the trifluoroacetyl group from lysine.

    b.      An iron composition suitable for parenteral injection prepared by
    reacting ferric chloride with a polymer which is the reaction product of a
    hydroxy carboxylic acid, a polyhydric alcohol and a diepoxide.

    c.      A germicidal complex derived from the reaction of iodine with a
    polymer derived from the reaction of sucrose and epichlorohydrin, etc.

    (2)     Note.  The starting solid synthetic polymer may be subjected to a
    number of aftertreating steps the sequence or numbers of which will not
    affect classification.  The important criteria is that every reaction be
    considered in going from the starting solid polymer to the final product.
    This is consistent with the rules set out in the Class 520 Series.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    522,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, for the process of treating a
    solid polymer utilizing wave energy.

    525,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses for the
    aftertreatment of solid synthetic organic polymers.

    526,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, for the preparations of solid
    synthetic polymers derived from ethylenic monomers only; e.g., acrylic
    acid, etc.

    527,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, for the preparation of solid
    synthetic polymers derived from the reaction between a natural product and
    other chemical intermediates; e.g., a carbohydrate and polyisocyanate, a
    protein and an ethylenic reactant, etc.

    528,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 1+ for the
    preparation of a solid synthetic polymer derived from at least one
    saturated reactant; e.g., toluene diisocyanate and polyethylene glycol,
    etc.; subclasses 480+ for treating a solid polymer merely with heat to
    affect a chemical change and in the absence of a chemical reactant.


CLS 424/78.18
TXT Polymer derived from ethylenic monomers only:

    Subject matter under subclass 78.17 wherein the polymer being aftertreated
    is derived from ethylenic monomers only; e.g., hydrolysing  polyvinyl
    acetate to produce polyvinyl alcohol which is subsequently reacted with
    borax yielding a product proved to be an effective ruminant repellent to
    plant foliage, etc.

    (1)     Note.  An ethylenic monomer is defined as one which contains at
    least two carbon atoms bonded together by a double or triple bond, with the
    proviso that the double bond is not part of an aromatic system; e.g.,
    benzene, naphthalene, anthracene, etc.  Included herein are; e.g.,
    coumarone, indene, etc.  Also, compounds such as pyridine are regarded as
    ethylenic monomers since they lack the carbocyclic system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    525,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses for the
    aftertreatment of solid synthetic organic polymers.

    526,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, for the preparation of solid
    synthetic polymers derived from ethylenic monomers only; e.g., acrylic
    acid, etc.


CLS 424/78.19
TXT Heterocyclic monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 78.18 wherein the ethylenic monomer contains
    a heterocyclic ring; e.g., a copolymer derived from divinyl ether and
    maleic anhydride, etc.


CLS 424/78.2
TXT Maleic anhydride monomer copolymerized with hydrocarbon monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 78.19 wherein the maleic anhydride monomer is
    copolymerized with a hydrocarbon monomer; e.g., maleic anhydride
    copolymerized with octadecene-1, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    526,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 272 for the
    preparation of a copolymer of maleic anhydride with a hydrocarbon monomer.


CLS 424/78.21
TXT Ring-opened product thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 78.2 wherein the polymerized copolymer of
    maleic anhydride is subjected to a ring opening with a reactant; e.g.,
    alcohols, amines, mercaptans, water, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    525,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 54.1+ for the
    chemical aftertreatment of a solid synthetic organic polymer with a protein
    or biologically active polypeptide, subclasses 54.2+ aftertreatment with a
    carbohydrate or derivative, subclasses 327.4+ for a product derived from
    the aftertreatment of a polymer derived from a monomer containing a
    carboxylic acid anhydride, and other appropriate subclasses for a solid
    synthetic polymer which has been chemically aftertreated with a chemical or
    drug whose use is intended as a drug, bioaffecting or body treating
    composition.


CLS 424/78.22
TXT Nitrogen heterocycle:

    Subject matter under subclass 78.19 wherein the monomer is a nitrogen
    heterocycle; e.g., 5-ethyl-3-vinyloxazolidin-2-one.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    525,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 54.1+ for the
    chemical aftertreatment of a solid synthetic organic polymer with a protein
    or biologically active polypeptide, subclasses 54.2+ aftertreatment with a
    carbohydrate or derivative, subclasses 326.7+ for a product derived from a
    monomer containing a nitrogen heterocycle, and subclass 356 for the
    aftertreatment of a solid synthetic organic polymer derived from ethylenic
    monomers only with elemental halogen; e.g., the formation of the
    polyvinylpyrrolidone-iodine complex (well known antimicrobial agent), etc.

    526,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 258+ for the
    preparation of a polymer from ethylenic monomers only wherein the monomer
    contains a nitrogen heterocycle.


CLS 424/78.23
TXT Six-membered ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 78.22 wherein the nitrogen heterocycle is a
    six-membered ring; e.g., 1-acryloyl-4-methyl piperazine N-acryloyl
    morpholine, 2-methyl-5-vinyl pyridine, 4-vinyl quinoline, etc.


CLS 424/78.24
TXT N-vinyl-2-pyrrolidone:

    Subject matter under subclass 78.22 wherein the nitrogen heterocycle is
    N-vinyl-2-pyrrolidone.


CLS 424/78.25
TXT Complexed with molecular halogen or compound containing only halogen atoms:

    Subject matter under subclass 78.24 wherein the polyvinylpyrrolidone homo
    or copolymer is complexed with molecular halogen or a compound containing
    only halogen atoms; e.g., I(2), Br(2), I-Br, I-Cl, etc.


CLS 424/78.26
TXT Chemical treating agent contains element other than C, H, O, alkali, or
    alkaline earth metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 78.17 wherein the solid synthetic organic
    polymer is chemically aftertreated with a material containing an element
    other than carbon, hydrogen, oxygen, alkali, or alkaline earth metal; e.g.,
    aftertreating polyethylene with phosphorus oxychloride, etc.

    (1)     Note.  The chemical treating agent containing an element other than
    carbon, hydrogen, oxygen, alkali or alkaline earth metal need not
    necessarily impart that element to the solid polymer but must react with
    it; e.g., neutralizing sodium polyacrylate with dilute hydrochloric acid,
    etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    525,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 337+ for the
    chemical aftertreatment of solid polymers derived from ethylenic monomers
    only.


CLS 424/78.27
TXT Nitrogen or sulfur:

    Subject matter under subclass 78.26 wherein the chemical treating agent
    contains either nitrogen or sulfur; e.g., the chemical aftertreatment of
    polyhydroxyethyl methacrylate first with cyanogen bromide and then with
    heparin or antithrombin III, etc.


CLS 424/78.28
TXT Sulfur heterocycle:

    Subject matter under subclass 78.27 wherein the chemical treating agent
    contains a sulfur heterocycle; e.g., treating sulfonated polystyrene with
    thiamine, etc.


CLS 424/78.29
TXT Nitrogen heterocycle:

    Subject matter under subclass 78.27 wherein the chemical treating agent
    contains a nitrogen heterocycle; e.g., treating sulfonated polystyrene with
    codeine, morphine, etc.


CLS 424/78.3
TXT Heterocyclic monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 78.17 wherein the solid synthetic polymer
    being aftertreated is derived from a heterocyclic monomer; e.g., from the
    diglycidyl ether of bisphenol A, ethylene oxide, propylene oxide, etc.


CLS 424/78.31
TXT Polymer from ethylenic monomers only:

    Subject matter under subclass 78.08 wherein the designated organic active
    ingredient (DOAI) is a solid synthetic polymer derived from ethylenic
    monomers only; e.g., a fungicidal composition containing a solid polymer
    prepared from the condensation of 1, 4-bis-(dimethylamino)-2-butene and 1,
    4-dichloro-2-butene, a composition for decreasing urinary calcium content
    containing a solid polymer derived from vinyl benzenesulfonic acid, etc.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 78.17 for the definition of an ethylenic
    monomer.


CLS 424/78.32
TXT Heterocyclic monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 78.31 wherein the solid polymer is derived
    from a heterocyclic monomer; e.g., a composition to control the
    proliferation of bacteria contains a polymer derived from the condensation
    of 1, 4-dichloro-2-butene and 1, 4-bis-(N-homopiperidino)-2-butene, etc.


CLS 424/78.33
TXT Maleic anhydride monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 78.32 wherein the heterocyclic monomer is
    maleic anhydride; e.g., a composition to suppress plant virus growth
    contains styrene-maleic anhydride copolymer, etc.


CLS 424/78.34
TXT Heavy metal containing monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 78.31 wherein the solid polymer is derived
    from an ethylenically unsaturated monomer containing a heavy metal; e.g.,
    phenyl mercuric acrylate, alpha-tributyltin butyl itaconate,
    triphenylbismuth bismethacrylate, etc.


CLS 424/78.35
TXT Nitrogen or sulfur containing monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 78.31 wherein the polymer derived from
    ethylenic monomers only is derived from a monomer containing either a
    nitrogen or sulfur atom; e.g., ethyl-alpha-cyan-oacrylate, acrylamide,
    p-styrenesulfonic acid, etc.


CLS 424/78.36
TXT Nitrogen heterocycle:

    Subject matter under subclass 78.08 wherein the solid polymer is derived
    from a nitrogen heterocyclic monomer; e.g., an antivirally effective
    composition contains a polymer derived from the polycondensation of
    pentachloropyridine and liquid  polyethylenimine, etc.


CLS 424/78.37
TXT Monomer contains oxygen:

    Subject matter under subclass 78.08 wherein the solid polymer is derived
    from an oxygen containing monomer; e.g., a composition for treating animals
    suffering from either acute or chronic hepatitis or liver cirrhosis which
    contains a solid polymer derived from 3-trichlorogermylpropionic acid and
    water, etc.


CLS 424/78.38
TXT Oxygen heterocycle:

    Subject matter under subclass 78.37 wherein the monomer is an oxygen
    heterocycle; e.g., a composition used for insulating mucosal tissues from
    physical trauma which contains an ethylene oxide homopolymer, a composition
    for use in controlling osseous hemorrphaging which contains a polymer
    derived from the oxygen heterocycle, 2-keto- 1, 4-dioxane, etc.


CLS 424/84
TXT Compositions under the class definition which contain as an ingredient a
    component which, per se, would not be considered an animal food, but which
    is disclosed to have utility as an attractant or a lure operating through
    one of the senses, usually smell or taste.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclass 1, for a food bait, per se.


CLS 424/85.1
TXT LYMPHOKINE:

    Subject matter under the class definition including compositions containing
    soluble immune mediators produced by the cells of the immune system.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this and the indented subclasses interferon,
    interleukin and macrophage factors (monokines).

    (2)     Note.  Synonyms:  Lymphokines Monokines Migration inhibitory Factor
    (MIF) Lymplotoxin (LT) Leukocyte Migration Inhibitory Factor (CIF)
    Interferons (IF) Eosinophil Chemotactic Factor - Precusor Substance (ECFp)
    Eosinophil Stimulation Promoter Eosinophil Chemotactic Factor Monocyte
    Tissue Factor Mitogenic Factor (MF) Lymphocyte Activity-Factor (LAF) Colony
    Stimulating Factor (CSF) Skin Reactive Factor (SRF) Macrophage Cytoxicity
    Factor (MCF) Lenkocyte Inhibition Factor (LIF) Vascular Permeability Factor
    (VPF) T cell Growth Factor (TCGF) B cell Growth Factor (BCGF) Erythroid
    Burst Promoter Genetically Related Macrophage Face (GRF) Fibroblast
    Activating Factor (FAF) Tumor Necrosis Factor (TNF) Macrophage Activating
    Factor (MAF).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    520+,   for animal extracts of undetermined chemical constitution where the
    extracts are from parts of the reticuloendotheliel system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 68.1+
    for methods of producing lymphokines by the culture of a micro-organism or
    animal or plant cell.

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives; Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclass 351 for patents claiming a
    lymphokine, per se, the chemical modification of a lymphokine or the
    purification of a lymphokine.

    930,    Peptide or Protein Sequence, subclasses 140 - 145 for Lymphokine
    peptide or protein sequences.


CLS 424/85.2
TXT Interleukin:

    Subject matter under subclass 85.1 in which the immune mediator is a
    macrophage derived factor that promotes short term proliferation of T cells
    (IL1) or a lymphocyte derived factor that promotes long term proliferation
    of T cells in culture (IL2).

    (1)     Note.  Synonyms.  IL1:  LAF or leukocyte activating factor.  IL2:
    TCGF or T cell growth factor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    930,    Peptide or Protein Sequence, subclass 141 for interleukin peptide
    or protein sequences.


CLS 424/85.4
TXT Interferon:

    Subject matter under subclass 85.1 in which the lymphokine is a protein
    elaborated by infected host cells that protects noninfected cells from
    viral infection.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for patents which broadly claim
    interferon or a method of treatment of interferon where the classification
    of the interferon as alpha, beta or gamma interferon is impossible.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    514,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclass 889
    for interferon inducers.

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclass 351 for interferon, per se,
    and methods of chemically treating or purifying interferon.

    930,    Peptide or Protein Sequence, subclass 142 for interferon peptide or
    protein sequences.


CLS 424/85.5
TXT Gamma or immune:

    Subject matter under subclass 85.4 in which the interferon is gamma or
    immune interferon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    930,    Peptide or Protein Sequence, subclass 142 for interferon peptide or
    protein sequences.


CLS 424/85.6
TXT Beta or fibroblast:

    Subject matter under subclass 85.4 in which the interferon is beta or
    fibroblast interferon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    930,    Peptide or Protein Sequence, subclass 142 for interferon peptide or
    protein sequences.


CLS 424/85.7
TXT Alpha or leukocyte:

    Subject matter under subclass 85.4 in which the interferon is alpha or
    leukocyte interferon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    930,    Peptide or Protein Sequence, subclass 142 for interferon peptide or
    protein sequences.


CLS 424/93.1
TXT WHOLE LIVE MICRO-ORGANISM, CELL, OR VIRUS CONTAINING:

    Subject matter under the class definition involving a whole and living
    micro-organism, cell, or virus or its spore form.

    (1)     Note.  Utilities such as pest control, warfare, disease
    eradication, etc., are included in this subclass and indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  Included under the heading micro-organism, cell, or virus
    are bacteria, actinomycetales, fungus, protozoa, alga, plant cell, animal
    cell (includes a specified blood cell or tissue cell), and virus.

    (3)     Note.  If there is no clear disclosure to the contrary, lyophilized
    micro-organisms, cells, or viruses are considered alive and are therefore
    appropriate for this subclass or  indented subclasses.

    (4)     Note.  If there is no clear disclosure as to whether the whole
    micro-organism, cell, or virus is alive or dead, it shall be presumed to be
    alive and therefore appropriate for this subclass or indented subclasses.
    Placement of cross-references into other appropriate places in Class 424,
    such as subclass(es) 195.1 or 520+, is strongly recommended.

    (5)     Note.  For the purposes of this subclass and indented subclasses,
    protozoa and algae are considered to be micro-organisms, rather than animal
    or plant cells.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for bio-affecting or body treating compositions containing at least
    two microbial fermentates of known or unknown constitution.

    115+,   for bio-affecting or body treating compositions containing
    microbial fermentates of undetermined chemical structure.

    184.1+, for bio-affecting or body treating compositions or products
    containing live micro-organisms, cells, or viruses used as antigens in
    vaccines or bacterins.

    195.1+, for bio-affecting or body treating compositions which contain an
    active compound or material derived from a plant including reaction
    products thereof, said compound, material, or reaction products having a
    structure which is not sufficiently known to be classifiable on its
    chemical basis.

    520+,   for bio-affecting or body treating compositions or products
    containing dead bacteria, animal cells, and parts thereof, animal tissue,
    or other cell-containing or multiple cell containing compositions wherein
    the active ingredient is not specifically known.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    71,     Chemistry: Fertilizers, for fertilizers containing whole live
    micro-organisms.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, appropriate
    subclasses (2, 235.1+, 243+, 325+ and 410+) for a method of culturing
    micro-organisms, cells, or viruses and culture media therefor, and also for
    processes of maintaining the viability of sperm and blood cells and media
    therefor.

    504,    Plant Protecting and Regulating Compositions, for plant growth
    regulating compositions containing whole live  micro-organisms.


CLS 424/93.2
TXT Genetically modified micro-organism, cell, or virus (e.g., transformed,
    fused, hybrid, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 93.1 involving a micro-organism, cell or
    virus which (a) is a product of recombination, transformation, or
    transfection with a vector or a foreign or exogenous gene or (b) is a
    product of homologous recombination if it is directed rather than
    spontaneous or (c) is a product of fused or hybrid cell formation.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of subject matter included in this and the indented
    subclass are compositions containing micro-organisms, cells, or viruses
    resulting from (a) a process in which the cellular matter of two or more
    fusing partners is combined producing a cell which initially contains the
    genes of both fusing partners or (b) a process in which a cell is treated
    with an immortalizing agent which results in a cell which proliferates in
    long term culture or (c) a process involving recombinant DNA methodology.

    (2)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are products of unidentified or
    non-induced mutations; products of microbial conjugation wherein specific
    genetic material is not identified and controlled; and products of natural,
    spontaneous, or arbitrary conjugation or recombination events. These
    products are not considered genetically modified for this subclass and
    therefore will be classified as unmodified micro-organisms, cells, or
    viruses.


CLS 424/93.21
TXT Eukaryotic cell:

    Subject matter under subclass 93.2 involving an eukaryotic cell, such as an
    animal cell, plant cell, fungus, protozoa, or higher algae which has been
    genetically modified.

    (1)     Note.  An eukaryotic cell has a nucleus defined by a nuclear
    membrane wherein the nucleus contains chromosomes that comprise the genome
    of the cell.


CLS 424/93.3
TXT Intentional mixture of two or more micro- organisms, cells, or viruses of
    different genera:

    Subject matter under subclass 93.1 involving a mixture consisting of two or
    more different microbial, cellular, or viral genera.

    (1)     Note.  A mixture of E. coli and Pseudomonas or a mixture of
    Aspergillus and Bacillus would be considered proper for this subclass while
    a mixture of Bacillus cereus and Bacillus brevis would be classified under
    Bacillus rather than in this subclass since they are both in the genus,
    Bacillus.

    (2)     Note.  Rumen, intestinal, vaginal, etc., microflora mixtures are
    mixtures appropriate for this subclass unless mixture constituents are
    disclosed and are found to be contrary to the subclass definition.


CLS 424/93.4
TXT Bacteria or actinomycetales:

    Subject matter under subclass 93.1 involving bacteria or actinomycetales.

    (1)     Note.  Rickettsiae are considered proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 252.1+
    for subject matter involving bacteria or actinomycetales including
    processes and compositions for propagation, etc.


CLS 424/93.41
TXT Clostridium:

    Subject matter under subclass 93.4 involving a micro-organism from the
    genus Clostridium.


CLS 424/93.42
TXT Staphylococcus:

    Subject matter under subclass 93.4 involving a micro-organism from the
    genus Staphylococcus.


CLS 424/93.43
TXT Streptomyces:

    Subject matter under subclass 93.4 involving a micro-organism from the
    genus Streptomyces.


CLS 424/93.44
TXT Streptococcus:

    Subject matter under subclass 93.4 involving a micro-organism from the
    genus Streptococcus.


CLS 424/93.45
TXT Lactobacillus or Pediococcus or Leuconostoc:

    Subject matter under subclass 93.4 involving a micro-organism from the
    genus Lactobacillus, Pediococcus, or Leuconostoc.


CLS 424/93.46
TXT Bacillus:

    Subject matter under subclass 93.4 involving a micro-organism from the
    genus Bacillus.


CLS 424/93.461
TXT B. thuringiensis:

    Subject matter under subclass 93.46 involving a Bacillus micro-organism
    from the species thuringiensis.


CLS 424/93.462
TXT B. subtilis:

    Subject matter under subclass 93.46 involving a Bacillus micro-organism
    from the species subtilis.


CLS 424/93.47
TXT Pseudomonas:

    Subject matter under subclass 93.4 involving a micro-organism from the
    genus Pseudomonas.


CLS 424/93.48
TXT Enterobacteriaceae:

    Subject matter under subclass 93.4 involving a micro-organism from the
    family Enterobacteriaceae.

    (1)     Note.  Bacteria included in the family Enterobacteriaceae are those
    of the genera Escherichia, Enterobacter (Aerobacter), Proteus, Salmonella,
    Shigella, and Klebsiella.


CLS 424/93.5
TXT Fungus:

    Subject matter under subclass 93.1 involving a fungus which includes mold.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are cells from multicellular fungi
    such as mushrooms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 254.1+
    for subject matter involving fungi including processes and compositions for
    propagation, etc.


CLS 424/93.51
TXT Yeast:

    Subject matter under subclass 93.5 involving a yeast.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 254.2+
    and 255.1+ for subject matter involving yeast including processes and
    compositions for propagation, etc.


CLS 424/93.6
TXT Virus or bacteriophage:

    Subject matter under subclass 93.1 involving a virus or bacteriophage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 235.1+
    for subject matter involving virus and bacteriophage including processes
    and compositions for propagation, etc.


CLS 424/93.7
TXT Animal or plant cell:

    Subject matter under subclass 93.1 involving animal cells, per se, such as
    specific cells from tissue or blood, or plant cells, per se.

    (1)     Note.  While it is recognized that a protozoa is a single celled
    animal, for the purposes of this class, it will be considered a
    micro-organism rather than an animal cell and will therefore be proper
    subject matter for subclass 93.1 or subclasses 93.2, 93.21, or 93.3, if
    appropriate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 325+ and
    410+ for subject matter involving eukaryotic cells including processes and
    compositions for propagation, etc.


CLS 424/93.71
TXT Leukocyte:

    Subject matter under subclass 93.7 involving a leukocyte which includes
    lymphocytes, granulocytes, and  monocytes.


CLS 424/93.72
TXT Platelet:

    Subject matter under subclass 93.7 involving a platelet.


CLS 424/93.73
TXT Erythrocyte:

    Subject matter under subclass 93.7 involving a reticulocyte or red blood
    cell.

    (1)     Note.  A reticulocyte is a young red blood cell.


CLS 424/94.1
TXT ENZYME OR COENZYME CONTAINING:

    Subject matter under the class definitions which contain an enzyme or
    coenzyme.

    (1)     Note.  The bracketed numerals following the titles in the indented
    subclasses refer to the nomenclature system recommended by the Commission
    of Biochemical Nomenclature on the Nomenclature and Classification of
    enzymes.  The titles include the enzymes defined by the bracketed numerals.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass are enzyme adducts wherein the
    enzyme is intended to be subsequently released as the free enzyme.

    (3)     Note.  Enzymes described in terms of the micro-organism producing
    them should be placed in this and the intended subclass by disclosed
    enzymic activity.  Such patents should be cross-referenced to Class 435
    subclasses 183+.  Enzyme fragments and Proenzymes should be classified with
    the holoenzyme.

    (4)     Note.  CAS registry numbers. For individual enzymes see the Index
    Guide entries for the name or the E.C. number.

    For enzyme subclassifications see



            Hydrolase                                 (9027-41-2)

            Isomerase                                 (9013-19-8)

            Ligase
    (9080-13-1)

            Lyase
    (9055-04-3)

            Oxidoreductase                                   (9055-15-6)

            Transferase                                      (9047-61-4)



    For specific enzymes see inverted headings in the Index Guide under such
    classes as



            Aminotransferase                                (9031-66-7)

            Decarboxylase                           (9027-22-9)

            Dehydratase                             (9044-86-4)

            Dehydrogenase                         (9035-82-9)

            Isomerase
    (9031-19-8)

            Kinase (phosphory-

            lating)
    (9031-44-1)

            Oxidase
    (9035-73-8)

            Phosphatase
    (9013-05-2)

            Reductase
    (9037-80-3)

            Synthesaze                                               (9031-56-5)

    (5)     Note.  National Library of Medicine Mesh subject headings.  See the
    printed copy of section D8 for individual coenzymes and enzymes.

            Coenzymes       D8.176

            Hydrolase       D8.586.277

            Esterase         D8.586.277.352

            Peptide Hydrolases       D8.586.277.656

            Isomerase       D8.586.399

            Ligase  D8.586.464

            Lyase   D8.586.520

            Oxidoreductase  D8.586.682

            Transferase     D8.586.913

            Multienzyme

            Complexes       D8.586.277.656

    (6)     Note.  This subclass provides for compositions which contain
    coenzymes.

    (7)     Note.  A coenzyme is a nonprotein substance whose presence is
    required for an enzyme to exhibit its catylitic activity and which
    undergoes a chemical change during the catalytic cycle of the enzyme
    involved.  Regeneration of the original form of the coenzyme requires its
    participation in a separate reaction.

    (8)     Note.  Since coenzymes are no more than chemical compounds a search
    in the appropriate chemical class providing for the compound is recommended.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    930,    Peptide or Protein Sequence, subclass 240 for enzyme peptide or
    protein sequences.


CLS 424/94.2
TXT Multienzyme complexes or mixtures of enzymes:

    Subject matter under subclass 94.1 which contain two or more functionally
    different enzymes.

    (1)     Note.  Different Enzyme Commission numbers is conclusive proof of
    functional difference.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is intended to provide for intentional
    mixtures of enzymes for some therapeutic purpose.  Many enzymes isolated
    from natural sources have several enzyme functions.  These enzymes have not
    been placed have but below in the subclasses providing for the dominant
    enzyme activity.

    (3)     Note.  Where an isolate is described by an isolation technique or
    source and has several diverse enzyme actions it is presumed a mixture.
    Microbial source enzymes should be cross-referenced to Class 435 if the
    microbial source is claimed or described.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 175 for
    two or more functionally different enzymes immobilized on the same support
    material.


CLS 424/94.21
TXT Pancreatin:

    Subject matter subclass 94.2 in which the enzyme mixture is pancreatin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 186 for
    pancreatin, per se, and methods of producing pancreatin.


CLS 424/94.3
TXT Stabilized enzymes or enzymes complexed with nonenzyme (e.g., liposomes,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 94.1 in which (a) the enzyme is contacted
    with an extraneous material to impart to the enzyme a resistance to loss of
    activity, or (b) the enzyme is reacted with a nonenzymatic material to form
    a complex or a chemically modified enzymatic compound; e.g., conjugate,
    ligand, etc.

    (1)     Note.  An enzyme conjugate, enzyme ligand, enzyme adduct for the
    purpose of this subclass are deemed to enhance enzyme stability.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 302 for liposomes.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology subclass 188 for
    methods of stabilizing an enzyme by forming a mixture of adduct or
    composition.

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses for cleaning compositions which include an enzyme component and
    subclass 530 for enzyme compositions designed for use in cleaning
    compositions.


CLS 424/94.4
TXT Oxidoreductases (1.) (e.g., catalase, dehydrogenases, reductases, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 94.1 wherein the enzyme catalyzes an
    oxidation-reduction reaction between a donor and acceptor; e.g., AH2 +  B=A
    + BH2, etc.

    (1)     Note.  An oxidation-reduction reaction for the purpose of this
    classification involves the transfer of oxygen, hydrogen, or electrons from
    a donor to an acceptor.

    (2)     Note.  A water molecule is not considered to be an acceptor or a
    donor.

    (3)     Note.  Oxidoreductases which catalyze a reaction between a donor
    and acceptor are different portions of the same molecule, i.e., an
    intramolecular oxidoreductase, are considered to be isomerases and are
    excluded herefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 189+ for
    oxidoreductases and methods of isolating them.


CLS 424/94.5
TXT Transferases (2.), lyase (4.), isomerase (5.), ligase (6.):

    Subject matter under subclass 94.1 wherein

    (a)     the enzyme catalyzes the transfer of a functional group from one
    molecule to another;

    (b)     the enzyme catalyzes the nonhydrolytic cleavage of bonds;

    (c)     the enzyme catalyzes an isomerization reaction;

    (d)     the enzyme which catalyized the joining of two molecules and the
    concomitant hydrolysis of pyrophosphate bond in ATP, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 183 for
    ligases, subclass 193 for transferases, subclass 199 for ribonuclease and
    subclass 232 for lyases, and subclass 233 for isomerases and the
    transferases which catalyze the cleavage of a functional group from one
    part of a molecule and the transfer to another part of the same molecule.


CLS 424/94.6
TXT Hydrolases (3.) (e.g., urease, lipase, asparaginase, muramidase, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 94.1 wherein the enzyme catalyzes the
    following reaction; AB + H2O=AOH + BH.

    (1)     Note.  The compounds hydrolyzed are usually carboxylic esters,
    thiolesters, phosphoric esters, sulfuric esters, glycosides, ethers,
    peptides, amides, amidines, nitriles, acid anhydrides, organic halides, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Peptidases, esterases, glycosidases, and phosphatases are
    examples of hydrolases.

    (3)     Note.  Examples of the enzymes included here are lipase and
    ribonuclease.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 195+ for
    hydrolases and subclasses 196+ for esterases.


CLS 424/94.61
TXT Acting on glycosyl compounds (3.2) (e.g., glycosidases, lysozyme,
    nucleosidases, cellulase, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 94.6 wherein the enzyme catalyzes the
    hydrolysis of O-glycosyl bonds or N-glycosyl bonds or S-glycosyl bonds.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 200 for
    enzymes which hydrolyze the bonds in glycosyl compounds.


CLS 424/94.62
TXT Hyaluronidase or mucinase (3.2.1.35, 3.2.1.36):

    Subject matter under subclass 94.61 wherein the enzyme is hyaluronidase or
    mucinase.

    (1)     Note.  Enzymes which hydrolyze mucin are classifiable in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 201+ for
    enzymes which act on alpha 1,4 glucosidic bonds, including hyaluronidase.


CLS 424/94.63
TXT Acting on peptide bonds (3.4) (e.g., urokinease, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 94.6 wherein the enzyme catalyzes hydrolysis
    of amide bonds in proteins or peptides.

    (1)     Synonyms.  Peptidases, proteinases, proteolytic enzymes,
    endopeptidases, exopeptidases, peptidyl-peptide hydrolases.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 212+ for
    enzymes which act on peptide bonds and subclass 215 for urokinease.


CLS 424/94.64
TXT Serene proteinases (3.4.21) (e.g., trypsin, chymotrypsin, plasmin,
    thrombin, elastase, kallikrein, fibrinolysin, streptokinease, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 94.63 which contain enzymes with the Enzyme
    Commission classification of 3.4.21.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 213 for
    trypsin and chymotrypsin, subclass 214 for thrombin, subclass 217 for
    plasmin and subclass 218 for elastase.


CLS 424/94.65
TXT SH-proteinases (3.4.22) (e.g., papain, chymopain, bromelains, flcin, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 94.63 which contain enzymes with the Enzyme
    Commission classification of 3.4.22.


CLS 424/94.66
TXT Acid proteinases (3.4.23) (e.g., pepsin, renin, chymosin, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 94.63 which contain enzymes with the Enzyme
    Commission classification of 3.4.23.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 226 for
    pepsin and renin.


CLS 424/94.67
TXT Metalloproteinases (3.4.24) (e.g., collagenase, snake venom zinc
    proteinase, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 94.63 which contain enzymes with the Enzyme
    Commission classification of 3.4.24.


CLS 424/114
TXT Compositions under the class definition which contain at least two
    fermentates; e.g., antibiotics, etc., of known or unknown constitution.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass is that mixture of fermentates
    which is formed during a fermentative process employing a single
    micro-organism and a single set of fermentative conditions. A mixture of
    fermentates occurring as the result of a fermentation by a single species
    of micro-organism under a single set of fermentation conditions will be
    classified in the first appearing subclass providing for one of the active
    components of the mixture.  See especially subclasses 115+; e.g., a mixture
    comprising dihydrostreptomycin A, B, C, etc.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes mixtures of compounds (antibiotics)
    which have been produced by a nonfermentative synthesis and which have
    chemical structures corresponding to natural fermentates.

    (3)     Note.  Mixtures of simple lower alcohols e.g., ethanol and butanol,
    etc., are excluded from this subclass and placed in the appropriate lower
    subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, appropriate
    subclass for a fermentation method for producing a fermentate or antibiotic.


CLS 424/115
TXT Compositions under the class definition containing an active ingredent of
    undetermined structure and originally produced by a fermentation process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404,    for a structurally defined article or product which contains an
    antibiotic.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 15.05+ for a hard
    film forming coating composition which contains an antibiotic.

    128,    Surgery, appropriate subclass for apparatus or an article having
    significant structure which may be coated or impregnated with an antibiotic.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, appropriate subclasses for an
    antibiotic of known chemical structure.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    appropriate subclasses, for food composition containing an antibody
    intended to preserve the food.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, appropriate
    subclass for apparatus or process which employs a fermentation step for
    manufacturing an antibiotic.

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses, particularly subclasses 382+ for cleaning compositions which
    include an antiseptic or biocidal component.


CLS 424/116
TXT Composition under subclass 115 wherein the empirical formula of the
    fermentate is disclosed as known.

    (1)     Note.  Mixtures of antibiotics of unknown chemical structure
    obtained by the fermentation of a single micro-organism are classified in
    this and indented subclasses if the carbon percentage of at least one
    separable antibiotic is known; e.g., polymyxin wherein the carbon
    precentage of polymyxin B, is known.

    (2)     Note.  The percentage of carbon is based on the relative quantity
    of carbon is the pure unreacted antibiotic.   Derivatives; e.g., the
    antibiotic salts, etc., are classified with the pure unreacted antibiotic,
    even though the percent carbon of the derivative (e.g., salt) is different
    from the subclass definition.

    (3)     Note.  In view of the problem of experimental error, the disclosed
    carbon percentage of a fermentate may only be an approximation.  It is
    therefore advisable to search the adjacent subclass where a carbon
    percentage of the fermentate being sought is near the borderline between
    subclasses.  Where a disclosed carbon percentage range extends from one
    subclass into another, the patent is placed as an original in the first
    appearing subclass and crossed to the subadjacent subclass.


CLS 424/117
TXT Products under subclass 116 wherein the fermentate compound contains at
    least one sulfur atom.

    (1)     Note.  For sulfur containing derivatives of a nonsulfur containing
    antibiotic; e.g., sulfate salts, etc., see subclass 116 and the other
    indented subclasses.


CLS 424/118
TXT Products under subclass 116 wherein the fermentate contains 45 percent
    through 55 percent carbon.


CLS 424/119
TXT Products under subclass 116 wherein the fermentate contains over 55 percent
    through 58 percent carbon.


CLS 424/120
TXT Products under subclass 116 wherein the fermentate contains over 58 percent
    through 60 percent carbon.


CLS 424/121
TXT Products under subclass 116 wherein the fermentate contains over 60 percent
    through 62 percent carbon.


CLS 424/122
TXT Products under subclass 116 wherein the fermentate contains over 62 percent
    carbon.


CLS 424/123
TXT Processes under subclass 115 which are directed to the nonfermentative
    preparation, purification or recovery of a fermentate containing
    composition or a fermentate compound of unknown chemical structure, not
    more specifically provided for elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, appropriate subclass for a
    nonfermentative process of preparing or treating an antibiotic compound of
    known chemical structure.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, appropriate
    subclasses for a fermentative process of preparing or treating an
    antibiotic product.


CLS 424/124
TXT Processes under subclass 123 utilizing an ion exchange or chromatographic
    step.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78.01,  and see notes thereto, for an ion exchange type of solid synthetic
    organic polymer containing composition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 656+ and 660+ for a
    process under the class definition for purifying a liquid.


CLS 424/125
TXT Compositions under the class definition which contain carbon in its
    elemental state such as in charcoal, carbon black, coal, bone black, etc.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also provides for forms of elemental carbon
    solely disclosed or claimed as an adjuvant or carrier for a Class 424
    active ingredient.


CLS 424/126
TXT Compositions under the class definition which (1) contain a corrosion
    inhibitor intended for perfecting a Class 424 composition or (2) contain a
    Class 424 active ingredient in combination with a corrosion inhibitor.


CLS 424/130.1
TXT IMMUNOGLOBULIN, ANTISERUM, ANTIBODY, OR ANTIBODY FRAGMENT, EXCEPT CONJUGATE
    OR COMPLEX OF THE SAME WITH NONIMMUNOGLOBULIN MATERIAL:

    Subject matter under the class definition involving an immunoglobulin, an
    antiserum, an antibody, or an antibody fragment, except a conjugate or a
    complex of the same with a nonimmunoglobulin material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and indented subclasses provide for
    bioaffecting and body-treating compositions of immunoglobulins, antisera,
    antibodies, and antibody fragments.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass and indented subclasses also provide for
    bioaffecting and body-treating methods of using immunoglobulins, antisera,
    antibodies, antibody fragments, and compositions thereof.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass and indented subclasses also provide for
    methods of immunizing to produce antibodies for recovery, which antibodies
    are characterized as being useful as bioaffecting or body-treating agents
    (e.g., to provide passive immunity).

    (4)     Note.  Methods of immunizing to produce protective immunity in vivo
    (i.e., for vaccination purposes) are provided for in subclasses 184.1+.

    (5)     Note.  Monoclonal and polyclonal antibodies, per se, are considered
    compounds and are provided for in Class 530, subclasses 387.1+.

    (6)     Note.  Immunoglobulins are a class of globulins found in serum and
    other body fluids such as milk, saliva, tears, etc.  All antibodies found
    in these fluids are immunoglobulins and can be characterized as having
    particular antigenic binding specificities. In addition, all
    immunoglobulins are presumably antibodies, even if their antigenic binding
    specificities have not been characterized.

    (7)     Note.  An antigen is a substance that elicits the production of
    antibodies, which antibodies, in turn, have binding specificity for that
    antigen.

    (8)     Note.  Antibodies may be isolated from serum or the other body
    fluids in which they are found, or they may be isolated from the secretion
    products of cells grown in culture that express and secrete the products of
    antibody-encoding genes.

    (9)     Note.  An antiserum is a serum that contains antibodies.

    (10)    Note.  The major classes of immunoglobulins are IgG, IgM, IgA, IgD,
    and IgE.  Subclasses of immunoglobulins also exist, notably the IgG1,
    IgG2a, IgG2b, IgG3, and IgG4 subclasses comprising the IgG class.  IgY is
    similar to IgG and is found only in birds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.49    and 1.53, for methods of using radiolabeled antibodies or
    compositions thereof for bioaffecting or body-treating purposes and said
    compositions, per se.

    9.1+,   for methods of using antibodies or compositions thereof for in vivo
    testing or diagnosis and said compositions, per se.

    178.1+, for bioaffecting or body-treating methods of using antibodies or
    fragments thereof that are conjugated to or complexed with
    nonimmunoglobulin material; bioaffecting or body-treating methods of using
    compositions of antibodies or fragments thereof, which antibodies or
    fragments thereof are conjugated to or complexed with nonimmunoglobulin
    material; and said compositions, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclass 547 for
    compositions of polyclonal antibodies used in in vitro testing and subclass
    548 for compositions of monoclonal antibodies used in in vitro testing.

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives; Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclasses 387.1+ for immunoglobulins
    or antibodies, per se, processes of chemically modifying immunoglobulins or
    antibodies, and processes of separating or purifying immunoglobulins or
    antibodies.


CLS 424/131.1
TXT Anti-idiotypic:

    Subject matter under subclass 130.1 involving an antibody or an
    antigen-binding fragment thereof that binds another antibody at one of its
    idiotopes.

    (1)     Note.  An idiotope is an antigenic determinant in the variable
    region of the antibody.

    (2)     Note.  An idiotype is that set of idiotopes characteristic of a
    particular antibody.

    (3)     Note.  Internal image antibodies are a subset of anti-idiotypic
    antibodies that mimic an antigen in their ability to elicit antibodies that
    bind said antigen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145.1,  for non-anti-idiotypic monoclonal antibodies or fragments thereof
    under the class definition that bind immunoglobulins that are not bound to
    cells.

    153.1,  for non-anti-idiotypic monoclonal antibodies or fragments thereof
    under the class definition that bind immunoglobulins that are bound to
    hematopoietic cells.

    158.1,  for non-anti-idiotypic polyclonal antibodies or fragments thereof
    under the class definition that bind immunoglobulins that are not bound to
    cells.

    173.1,  for non-anti-idiotypic polyclonal antibodies or fragments thereof
    under the class definition that bind immunoglobulins that are bound to
    hematopoietic cells.


CLS 424/132.1
TXT Derived from transgenic multicellular eukaryote (e.g., plant, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 130.1 wherein the material is produced in a
    transgenic multicellular eukaryote.

    (1)     Note.  A transgenic multicellular eukaryote is a multicellular
    eukaryote  whose genome carries a stable, heritable genetic sequence
    derived from an exogenous source (e.g., another species).

    (2)     Note.  A multicellular eukaryote is a multicellular organism whose
    cells each contain a nucleus, defined by a nuclear membrane, wherein the
    nucleus contains chromosomes that constitute the organism's genome.
    Multicellular eukaryotes include multicellular plants and animals.

    (3)     Note.  It is suggested that the patents in this subclass be
    cross-referenced to the appropriate subclass(es) that provide for the
    binding specificities of the antibodies, if disclosed.


CLS 424/133.1
TXT Structurally-modified antibody, immunoglobulin, or fragment thereof (e.g.,
    chimeric, humanized, CDR-grafted, mutated, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 130.1 involving an antibody, immunoglobulin,
    or fragment thereof that is purposely altered with respect to its amino
    acid sequence or glycosylation, or with respect to its composition of heavy
    and light chains or immunoglobulin regions or domains, as compared with
    that found in nature; or wherein the antibody, immunoglobulin, or fragment
    thereof is part of a larger, synthetic protein.

    (1)     Note.  Structurally-modified antibodies may be made by chemical
    alteration or recombination of existing antibodies, or by various cloning
    techniques involving recombinant DNA or hybridoma technology.

    (2)     Note.  Structurally-modified antibodies may be chimeric (i.e.,
    comprising amino acid sequences derived from two or more nonidentical
    immunoglobulin molecules, such as interspecies combinations, etc.).

    (3)     Note.  Structurally-modified antibodies may have domain deletions
    or substitutions (e.g., deletions of particular constant-region domains or
    substitutions of constant-region domains from other classes of
    immunoglobulins).

    (4)     Note.  Structurally-modified antibodies may have deletions of
    particular glycosylated amino acids, or may have their glycosylation
    otherwise altered, which may alter their function.

    (5)     Note.  While expression of cloned antibody genes in cells of
    species other than from which they originated may result in altered
    glycosylation of the product, compared with that found in nature, this
    subclass and indented subclasses are not meant to encompass such antibodies
    or fragments thereof unless such cloning is a deliberate attempt to alter
    their glycosylation.  However, such antibodies or fragments thereof may
    still be classified here or in indented subclasses if they are
    structurally-modified in other ways (e.g., if they are single chain, etc.).


    (6)     Note.  It is suggested that the patents of this subclass and
    indented subclasses be cross-referenced to the appropriate subclass(es)
    that provide for the binding specificities of these antibodies, if
    disclosed.


CLS 424/134.1
TXT Antibody, immunoglobulin, or fragment thereof fused via peptide linkage to
    nonimmunoglobulin protein, polypeptide, or fragment thereof (i.e., antibody
    or immunoglobulin fusion protein or polypeptide):

    Subject matter under subclass 133.1 involving a fusion protein or fusion
    polypeptide that includes (a) an antibody, immunoglobulin, or fragment
    thereof fused directly via a peptide bond to a nonimmunoglobulin protein,
    polypeptide, or fragment thereof or (b) an antibody, immunoglobulin, or
    fragment thereof fused indirectly via a peptide linker to a
    nonimmunoglobulin protein, polypeptide, or fragment thereof, which fusion
    protein or polypeptide is the expression product of a gene fusion.

    (1)     Note.  A gene fusion is a nucleic acid sequence that encodes the
    complete or partial amino acid sequences of two or more proteins or
    polypeptides in contiguous fashion, or  in noncontiguous fashion, wherein
    the expressed sequence is ultimately processed to yield the desired fusion
    protein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    178.1+, for an immunoglobulin or immunoglobulin fragment joined to a
    nonimmunoglobulin material, which immunoglobulin or immunoglobulin fragment
    joined to a nonimmunoglobulin material is not the expression product of a
    gene fusion.


CLS 424/135.1
TXT Single chain antibody:

    Subject matter under subclass 133.1 wherein the material is a single
    polypeptide chain that has antigen-binding capability.

    (1)     Note.  Single chain antibodies may possess amino acid sequences
    homologous to the complementarity determining, or hypervariable, regions
    found in native antibodies, as well as their flanking framework regions.

    (2)     Note.  Single chain antibodies may be chimeric (e.g., having amino
    acid sequences homologous to complementarity determining regions and
    flanking framework regions, respectively, that are derived from different
    species).

    (3)     Note.  Single chain antibodies may possess an amino acid sequence
    homologous to the variable region of an immunoglobulin light chain and an
    amino acid sequence homologous to the variable region of an immunoglobulin
    heavy chain, which amino acid sequences are joined by a polypeptide linker
    via chemical coupling or via expression of a gene fusion.

    (4)     Note.  Single chain antibodies may be termed single chain binding
    proteins.


CLS 424/136.1
TXT Bispecific or bifunctional, or multispecific or multifunctional, antibody
    or fragment thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 133.1 involving an antibody or fragment
    thereof that is bispecific or bifunctional or multispecific or
    multifunctional.

    (1)     Note.  An unmodified antibody has one bivalent antigenic binding
    specificity.  A bispecific or bifunctional antibody has two nonidentical
    antigenic binding specificities, each of which may be monovalent, bivalent,
    or multivalent.  A multispecific or multifunctional antibody has more than
    two nonidentical antigenic binding specificities, each of which may be
    monovalent, bivalent, or multivalent.

    (2)     Note.  Bispecific or bifunctional antibodies, or multispecific or
    multifunctional antibodies, may be made by various techniques, ranging from
    chemical crosslinking of antibodies or fragments thereof having different
    binding specificities, to the preparation of quadromas, or fused
    hybridomas, that secrete bispecific antibodies, to the molecular cloning of
    the relevant genes, possibly followed by chemical coupling of the products
    produced thereby.


CLS 424/137.1
TXT Binds specifically-identified oligosaccharide structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 130.1 involving an antibody or
    antigen-binding fragment thereof whose antigen-binding site(s) will combine
    with a specifically-identified oligosaccharide structure.

    (1)     Note.  Some of the oligosaccharide structures disclosed in the
    patents of this subclass are expressed on the surfaces of cancer cells as
    components of glycoproteins or glycolipids, and are related to the A, B,
    Le, or H blood-group antigens.

    (2)     Note.  It is suggested that the patents in this subclass be
    cross-referenced to the appropriate subclass(es) that provide for
    antibodies that bind the cell(s) upon which the oligosaccharide structure
    is expressed, if such disclosure is present.


CLS 424/138.1
TXT Binds expression product or fragment thereof of cancer-related gene (e.g.,
    oncogene, proto-oncogene, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 130.1 involving an antibody or
    antigen-binding fragment thereof whose antigen-binding site(s) will combine
    with an expression product or fragment thereof of a cancer-related gene,
    such as an oncogene or a proto-oncogene.

    (1)     Note.  An oncogene is a genetic sequence whose expression
    transforms a normal cell into a cancerous cell.  A proto-oncogene is a
    genetic sequence found in non-cancerous cells which, when mutated or
    otherwise activated in a characteristic way, can become an oncogene.


CLS 424/139.1
TXT Binds antigen or epitope whose amino acid sequence is disclosed in whole or
    in part (e.g., binds specifically-identified amino acid sequence, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 130.1 involving an antibody or
    antigen-binding fragment thereof whose antigen-binding site(s) will combine
    with a protein, polypeptide, or peptide antigen or antigenic determinant
    whose amino acid sequence is disclosed in whole or in part.

    (1)     Note.  An antigen is a substance that elicits the production of
    antibodies, which antibodies, in turn, have binding specificity for that
    antigen.

    (2)     Note.  An epitope is a portion of an antigen to which an antibody
    binds.  An epitope is also called an antigenic determinant.

    (3)     Note.  It is suggested that the patents in this subclass be
    cross-referenced to the subclass(es) that provide for antibodies that bind
    the antigen whose amino acid sequence is disclosed in whole or in part.


CLS 424/140.1
TXT Extracorporeal or ex vivo removal of antibodies or immune complexes (e.g.,
    removal of autoantibodies, etc.); or extracorporeal or ex vivo removal of
    antigen by antibodies (e.g., removal of cancer cells from bone marrow by
    antibodies, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 130.1 involving the removal from the body,
    via separation techniques conducted outside the body, of antibodies or
    immune complexes; or the removal from the body, via separation techniques
    conducted outside the body, of antigenic substances by antibodies.

    (1)     Note.  Patents that claim treatment of blood and its return to the
    body should be classified in Class 604, subclasses 4+, wherein a specific
    detailed means for attaching a treating means to the patient is
    specifically claimed, or wherein said treating means includes a body
    sensing or monitoring means that controls the treating means, or wherein
    more than a nominal connection of a treating means to a patient is claimed,
    such as by the recitation of specific arteries or veins to be connected by
    a specific surgical connection.


CLS 424/141.1
TXT Monoclonal antibody or fragment thereof (i.e., produced by any cloning
    technology):

    Subject matter under subclass 130.1 involving an antibody or fragment
    thereof produced by a clone of cells or cell line, which clone of cells or
    cell line is derived from a single antibody-producing cell or
    antibody-fragment-producing cell, wherein said antibody or fragment thereof
    is identical to all other antibodies or fragments thereof produced by that
    clone of cells or cell line.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses provide for bioaffecting
    and body-treating compositions of antibodies or fragments thereof as well
    as bioaffecting and body-treating methods of using said compositions, said
    antibodies, or said fragments, which antibodies or antibody fragments are
    produced by any cloning technology that yields identical molecules (e.g.,
    hybridoma technology, recombinant DNA technology, etc.).

    (2)     Note.  Monoclonal antibodies, per se, are considered compounds and
    are provided for in Class 530, subclasses 387.2+, especially subclasses
    388.1+.

    (3)     Note.  Monoclonal antibodies are sometimes termed monoclonal
    receptors or immunological binding partners.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.49    and 1.53, for methods of using radiolabeled monoclonal antibodies
    or compositions thereof for bioaffecting or body-treating purposes and said
    compositions, per se.

    9.1+,   for methods of using monoclonal antibodies or compositions thereof
    for in vivo testing or diagnosis and said compositions, per se.

    178.1+, for bioaffecting or body-treating methods of using monoclonal
    antibodies or fragments thereof that are conjugated to or complexed with
    nonimmunoglobulin material; bioaffecting or body-treating methods of using
    compositions of monoclonal antibodies or fragments thereof, which
    monoclonal antibodies or fragments thereof are conjugated to or complexed
    with nonimmunoglobulin material; and said compositions, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 326+,
    for an animal cell, per se, which expresses immunoglobulin, antibody, or
    fragment thereof.

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives; Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclasses 387.2+, especially
    subclasses 388.1+, for monoclonal antibodies, per se.


CLS 424/142.1
TXT Human:

    Subject matter under subclass 141.1 involving a monoclonal antibody or
    fragment thereof derived from a human source or whose amino acid sequence
    is identical to that found in a human.

    (1)     Note.  It is suggested that the patents in this subclass be
    cross-referenced to the appropriate subclass(es) that provide for the
    binding specificities of the antibodies, if disclosed.


CLS 424/143.1
TXT Binds receptor:

    Subject matter under subclass 141.1 involving a monoclonal antibody or
    antigen-binding fragment thereof whose antigen-binding site(s) will combine
    with a free or cell-associated receptor.

    (1)     Note.  A receptor is a structure integral to a cell, or released
    into the surrounding milieu, that has binding specificity for a particular
    three-dimensional structural configuration of a molecule or portion
    thereof.

    (2)     Note.  For the purpose of this and the indented subclass, an
    antibody is not considered a receptor.  Patents disclosing
    non-anti-idiotypic monoclonal antibodies or fragments thereof that bind
    other immunoglobulins are proper for subclass 145.1, unless the monoclonal
    antibodies specifically bind hematopoietic-cell-bound immunoglobulins, in
    which case, the patents are proper for subclass 153.1.


CLS 424/144.1
TXT Receptor integral to or derived from a lymphocytic or lymphocytic-like cell
    (e.g., NK cell, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 143.1 involving a monoclonal antibody or
    antigen-binding fragment thereof whose antigen-binding site(s) will combine
    with a receptor integral to or derived from a lymphocytic or a
    lymphocytic-like cell.

    (1)     Note.  Lymphocytic cells are considered either B- or T-lineage
    cells.  Null cells, or K cells, and natural killer cells are considered to
    be ``lymphocytic-like" cells, since they have the morphology of
    lymphocytes, but not the antigenic markers of either B- or T-lineage cells.


CLS 424/145.1
TXT Binds hormone or other secreted growth regulatory factor, differentiation
    factor, or intercellular mediator (e.g., cytokine, etc.); or binds serum
    protein, plasma protein (e.g., tPA, etc.), or fibrin:

    Subject matter under subclass 141.1 involving a monoclonal antibody or
    antigen-binding fragment thereof whose antigen-binding site(s) will combine
    with a hormone or with any other secreted growth regulatory factor,
    differentiation factor, or intercellular mediator; or involving a
    monoclonal antibody or antigen-binding fragment thereof whose
    antigen-binding site(s) will combine with a serum protein, a plasma
    protein, or with fibrin.

    (1)     Note.  The term ``growth regulatory factor" is meant to encompass
    any secretory factor that is growth-stimulatory or growth-inhibitory (e.g.,
    that will stimulate or inhibit clonal expansion of cells).

    (2)     Note.  The term ``differentiation factor" is meant to encompass any
    secretory factor that causes cells to progress from a relatively
    undifferentiated state to a more differentiated state, wherein said
    progression may include clonal expansion.

    (3)     Note.  The term ``intercellular mediator" is meant to encompass any
    secretory factor that affects cellular functions such as chemotaxis, etc.

    (4)     Note.  Patents under the class definition with disclosures to
    monoclonal antibodies or fragments thereof that bind proteins, including
    enzymes, that are members of plasma ``activation systems"--including the
    clotting system, the fibrinolytic system, the bradykinin system, and the
    complement system--are proper for this subclass.

    (5)     Note.  Patents under the class definition with disclosures to
    non-anti-idiotypic monoclonal antibodies or fragments thereof that bind
    immunoglobulins are proper for this subclass, unless the monoclonal
    antibodies specifically bind hematopoietic-cell-bound immunoglobulins, in
    which case, they are proper for subclass 153.1.

    (6)     Note.  See patent classification definitions for Class 530,
    subclasses 380+, for examples of plasma and serum proteins.


CLS 424/146.1
TXT Binds enzyme:

    Subject matter under subclass 141.1 involving a monoclonal antibody or
    antigen-binding fragment thereof whose antigen-binding site(s) will combine
    with an enzyme.


CLS 424/147.1
TXT Binds virus or component thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 141.1 involving a monoclonal antibody or
    antigen-binding fragment thereof whose antigen-binding site(s) will combine
    with an integral or isolated part of a virus.


CLS 424/148.1
TXT Immunodeficiency virus:

    Subject matter under subclass 147.1 wherein the virus is one that is
    associated with an immunodeficiency syndrome such as AIDS in humans or an
    AIDS-related syndrome in animals.


CLS 424/149.1
TXT Hepatitis virus:

    Subject matter under subclass 147.1 wherein the virus is a hepatitis virus.


CLS 424/150.1
TXT Binds bacterium or component thereof or substance produced by said
    bacterium:

    Subject matter under subclass 141.1 involving a monoclonal antibody or
    antigen-binding fragment thereof whose antigen-binding site(s) will combine
    with an integral or isolated part of a bacterium or with a substance
    produced by a bacterium.


CLS 424/151.1
TXT Binds parasitic organism (i.e., parasitic protozoan, multicellular
    ectoparasite (e.g., flea, tick, mite, etc.), or multicellular endoparasite
    (e.g., parasitic worm, etc.)) or component thereof or substance produced by
    said parasitic organism:

    Subject matter under subclass 141.1 involving a monoclonal antibody or
    antigen-binding fragment thereof whose antigen-binding site(s) will combine
    with an integral or isolated part of a parasitic organism such as a
    parasitic protozoan, a multicellular ectoparasite, or a multicellular
    endoparasite; or will combine with a substance produced by a parasitic
    organism.


CLS 424/152.1
TXT Binds eukaryotic cell or component thereof or substance produced by said
    eukaryotic cell:

    Subject matter under subclass 141.1 involving a monoclonal antibody or
    antigen-binding fragment thereof whose antigen-binding site(s) will combine
    with an integral or isolated part of a eukaryotic cell or with a substance
    produced by a eukaryotic cell.

    (1)     Note.  A eukaryotic cell is one that has, among other
    characteristics, a nucleus defined by a nuclear membrane, which nucleus
    contains chromosomes that constitute the genome of the organism to which
    the cell belongs.  Eukaryotic organisms may be unicellular, such as yeast,
    or multicellular, such as higher animals and plants.


CLS 424/153.1
TXT Hematopoietic cell:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.1 wherein the cell is a hematopoietic
    cell.

    (1)     Note.  Hematopoietic cells are considered to be bone marrow stem
    cells and cells derived from bone marrow stem cells, including cells at any
    stage of differentiation from progenitor cells to mature erythrocytes,
    granulocytes, lymphocytes, etc., both normal and neoplastic.

    (2)     Note.  Monoclonal antibodies that bind hematopoietic-cell-bound
    immunoglobulins are proper for this subclass.


CLS 424/154.1
TXT T lymphocytic cell (e.g., T cell, thymocyte, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 153.1 wherein the cell is of the T
    lymphocytic lineage.


CLS 424/155.1
TXT Cancer cell:

    Subject matter under subclass 152.1 wherein the cell is a cancer cell.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137.1,  for a monoclonal antibody or fragment thereof under the class
    definition that binds a specifically-identified oligosaccharide structure
    derived from a cancer cell.

    138.1,  for a monoclonal antibody or fragment thereof under the class
    definition that binds the expression product or fragment thereof of a
    cancer-related gene (e.g., oncogene, proto-oncogene, etc.).


CLS 424/156.1
TXT Antigen characterized by name or molecular weight:

    Subject matter under subclass 155.1 wherein the monoclonal antibody or
    antigen-binding fragment thereof will combine with an antigen that is an
    integral or isolated part of a cancer cell, or that is produced by a cancer
    cell, and that is disclosed by name or molecular weight.

    (1)     Note.  The term ``name" does not necessarily define a chemical
    structure.


CLS 424/157.1
TXT Derived from, or present in, food product (e.g., milk, colostrum, whey,
    eggs, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 130.1 involving an antibody or fragment
    thereof isolated from, or present in, a food product.


CLS 424/158.1
TXT Binds hormone or other secreted growth regulatory factor, differentiation
    factor, or intercellular mediator (e.g., cytokine, vascular permeability
    factor, etc.); or binds serum protein, plasma protein, fibrin, or enzyme:

    Subject matter under subclass 130.1 involving an antibody or
    antigen-binding fragment thereof whose antigen-binding site(s) will combine
    with a hormone or with any other secreted growth regulatory factor,
    differentiation factor, or intercellular mediator; or involving an antibody
    or antigen-binding fragment thereof whose antigen-binding site(s) will
    combine with a serum protein, a plasma protein, fibrin, or an enzyme.

    (1)     Note.  The term ``growth regulatory factor" is meant to encompass
    any secretory factor that is growth-stimulatory or growth-inhibitory (e.g.,
    that will stimulate or inhibit clonal expansion of cells).

    (2)     Note.  The term ``differentiation factor" is meant to encompass any
    secretory factor that causes cells to progress from a relatively
    undifferentiated state to a more differentiated state, wherein said
    progression may include clonal expansion.

    (3)     Note.  The term ``intercellular mediator" is meant to encompass any
    secretory factor that affects cellular functions such as chemotaxis, etc.

    (4)     Note.  Patents under the class definition with disclosures to
    antibodies or fragments thereof that bind proteins, including enzymes, that
    are members of plasma ``activation systems"--including the clotting system,
    the fibrinolytic system, the bradykinin system, and the complement
    system--are proper for this subclass.

    (5)     Note.  Patents under the class definition with disclosures to
    non-anti-idiotypic antibodies or fragments thereof that bind
    immunoglobulins are proper for this subclass, unless the antibodies
    specifically bind hematopoietic-cell-bound immunoglobulins, in which case,
    the patents are proper for subclass 173.1.

    (6)     Note.  See patent classification definitions for Class 530,
    subclasses 380+,  for examples of plasma and serum proteins.


CLS 424/159.1
TXT Binds virus or component thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 130.1 involving an antibody or
    antigen-binding fragment thereof whose antigen-binding site(s) will combine
    with an integral or isolated part of a virus.


CLS 424/160.1
TXT Immunodeficiency virus:

    Subject matter under subclass 159.1 wherein the virus is one that is
    associated with an immunodeficiency syndrome such as AIDS in humans or an
    AIDS-related syndrome in animals.


CLS 424/161.1
TXT Hepatitis virus:

    Subject matter under subclass 159.1 wherein the virus is a hepatitis virus.


CLS 424/162.1
TXT Hog cholera virus:

    Subject matter under subclass 159.1 wherein the virus is a hog cholera
    virus.


CLS 424/163.1
TXT Binds antigens of multiple bacterial species (e.g., multivalent antiserum
    that binds antigens of multiple bacterial species, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 130.1 involving an antiserum or other
    combination of antibodies that binds antigens of multiple bacterial
    species, which antiserum or other combination of antibodies comprises a
    plurality of antibodies, each antibody having an individual bacterial
    binding specificity, which antibodies together comprise binding
    specificities for two or more bacterial species.

    (1)     Note.  Antisera or other combinations of antibodies that bind
    multiple strains of a single bacterial species are proper for the subclass
    comprising antibodies that bind that bacterial species.


CLS 424/164.1
TXT Binds bacterium or component thereof or substance produced by said
    bacterium:

    Subject matter under subclass 130.1 involving an antibody or
    antigen-binding fragment thereof whose antigen-binding site(s) will combine
    with an integral or isolated part of a bacterium or with a substance
    produced by a bacterium.


CLS 424/165.1
TXT Staphylococcus or Streptococcus (e.g., pneumococcus or Streptococcus
    pneumoniae, Streptococcus mutans, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 164.1 wherein the bacterium is of the genus
    Staphylococcus or of the genus Streptococcus.

    (1)     Note. Streptococcus pneumoniae bacteria may be termed pneumococci.


CLS 424/166.1
TXT Corynebacterium (e.g., Corynebacterium diphtheriae, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 164.1 wherein the bacterium is of the genus
    Corynebacterium.


CLS 424/167.1
TXT Clostridium (e.g., Clostridium tetani, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 164.1 wherein the bacterium is of the genus
    Clostridium.


CLS 424/168.1
TXT Mycobacterium:

    Subject matter under subclass 164.1 wherein the bacterium is of the genus
    Mycobacterium.


CLS 424/169.1
TXT Escherichia:

    Subject matter under subclass 164.1 wherein the bacterium is of the genus
    Escherichia.


CLS 424/170.1
TXT Pseudomonas:

    Subject matter under subclass 164.1 wherein the bacterium is of the genus
    Pseudomonas.


CLS 424/171.1
TXT Binds allergen or component thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 130.1  involving an antibody or
    antigen-binding fragment thereof whose antigen-binding site(s) will combine
    with an integral or isolated part of an allergen.


CLS 424/172.1
TXT Binds eukaryotic cell or component thereof or substance produced by said
    eukaryotic cell (e.g., honey, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 130.1 involving an antibody or
    antigen-binding fragment thereof whose antigen-binding site(s) will combine
    with an integral or isolated part of a eukaryotic cell or with a substance
    produced by a eukaryotic cell.

    (1)     Note.  A eukaryotic cell is one that has, among other
    characteristics, a nucleus defined by a nuclear membrane, which nucleus
    contains chromosomes that constitute the genome of the organism to which
    the cell belongs.  Eukaryotic organisms may be unicellular, such as yeast,
    or multicellular, such as higher animals and plants.


CLS 424/173.1
TXT Hematopoietic cell:

    Subject matter under subclass 172.1 wherein the cell is a hematopoietic
    cell.

    (1)     Note.  Hematopoietic cells are considered to be bone marrow stem
    cells and cells derived from bone marrow stem cells, including cells at any
    stage of differentiation from progenitor cells to mature erythrocytes,
    granulocytes, lymphocytes, etc., both normal and neoplastic.

    (2)     Note.  Antibodies that bind hematopoietic-cell-bound
    immunoglobulins are proper for this subclass.


CLS 424/174.1
TXT Cancer cell:

    Subject matter under subclass 172.1 wherein the cell is a cancer cell.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137.1,  for an antibody or fragment thereof under the class definition that
    binds a specifically-identified oligosaccharide structure derived from a
    cancer cell.

    138.1,  for an antibody or fragment thereof under the class definition that
    binds the expression product or fragment thereof of a cancer-related gene
    (e.g., oncogene, proto-oncogene, etc.).


CLS 424/175.1
TXT Binds hapten, hapten-carrier complex, or specifically-identified chemical
    structure (e.g., drug, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 130.1 involving an antibody or
    antigen-binding fragment thereof whose antigen-binding site(s) will combine
    with a hapten, a hapten-carrier complex, or with a specifically-identified
    chemical structure that is disclosed.

    (1)     Note.  A hapten is a substance that can bind an antibody, but which
    cannot induce production of an antibody unless it is coupled to a carrier
    that is immunogenic.  A hapten is usually, but not always, of low molecular
    weight.

    (2)     Note.  Antibodies that bind a specifically-identified amino acid
    sequence are proper for subclass 139.1.


CLS 424/176.1
TXT Free from infectious agents (e.g., viruses or bacteria removed or
    inactivated, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 130.1 involving an immunoglobulin preparation
    from which infectious agents, such as viruses or bacteria, have been
    removed or inactivated.


CLS 424/177.1
TXT Reduced antigenicity, reduced ability to bind complement, or reduced
    numbers of activated complement components (e.g., free from aggregated,
    denatured, fragmented, or polymerized immunoglobulins; free from
    proteolytic enzymes, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 130.1 involving an immunoglobulin preparation
    from which aggregated, denatured, fragmented, or polymerized
    immunoglobulins have been removed or prevented from forming; or from which
    plasma proteins, such as proteolytic enzymes, that contaminate an
    immunoglobulin preparation have been removed; or that has been treated to
    reduce the number of activated complement components.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for immunoglobulin preparations that
    are suitable for intravenous use, since they have been treated to remove
    aggregated, fragmented, or denatured immunoglobulins, or they have been
    treated to remove plasma proteins, such as proteolytic enzymes, that
    co-purify with immunoglobulins and which can denature immunoglobulins, or
    they have been otherwise treated to reduce the number of activated
    complement components.  Immunoglobulin preparations that are free from
    aggregated, denatured, fragmented, or polymerized immunoglobulins are less
    apt to be antigenic or  ``anticomplementary" in vivo (i.e., are less apt to
    bind complement, thus setting off the undesired consequences of the
    complement cascade).


CLS 424/178.1
TXT CONJUGATE OR COMPLEX OF MONOCLONAL OR POLYCLONAL ANTIBODY, IMMUNOGLOBULIN,
    OR FRAGMENT THEREOF WITH NONIMMUNOGLOBULIN MATERIAL:

    Subject matter under the class definition involving a monoclonal or
    polyclonal antibody, immunoglobulin, or fragment thereof that is coupled to
    a nonimmunoglobulin material via a single covalent bond or via a linking
    chemical group, or which is coupled to a nonimmunoglobulin material via
    noncovalent means (e.g., via chelation or adsorption).

    (1)     Note.  A conjugate is taken to mean a coupling of one substance to
    another  via covalent means, either directly via a covalent bond or
    indirectly via a chemical linking group.

    (2)     Note. A complex is taken to mean a coupling of one substance to
    another via noncovalent means (e.g., via adsorption).

    (3)     Note. This subclass and indented subclasses provide for
    bioaffecting and body-treating compositions of conjugates or complexes of
    monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies, immunoglobulins, or fragments thereof
    with nonimmunoglobulin materials.

    (4)     Note. This subclass and indented subclasses also provide for
    bioaffecting and body-treating methods of using conjugates or complexes of
    monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies, immunoglobulins, or fragments thereof
    with nonimmunoglobulin materials or compositions thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.49    and 1.53, for methods of using radiolabeled antibodies or
    compositions thereof for bioaffecting or body-treating purposes and said
    composition, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives; Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclasses 391.1+ for antibody
    conjugates, per se, and methods of making said conjugates.


CLS 424/179.1
TXT Conjugated via claimed linking group, bond, chelating agent, or coupling
    agent (e.g., conjugated to proteinaceous toxin via claimed linking group,
    bond, coupling agent, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 178.1 wherein a monoclonal or polyclonal
    antibody or immunoglobulin or fragment thereof is conjugated to a
    nonimmunoglobulin material via a linking group, a bond, a chelating agent,
    or a coupling agent that is specifically identified in the claim(s) by
    chemical name or chemical structure.


CLS 424/180.1
TXT Conjugate includes potentiator or composition comprising conjugate includes
    potentiator:

    Subject matter under subclass 179.1 wherein a component of the conjugate is
    a potentiator or wherein a component of a composition comprising the
    conjugate is a potentiator.

    (1)     Note.  A potentiator, for the purposes of this subclass, is a
    substance that enhances or prolongs the action of the conjugate.


CLS 424/181.1
TXT Conjugated to nonproteinaceous bioaffecting compound (e.g., conjugated to
    cancer-treating drug, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 179.1 wherein the nonimmunoglobulin material
    is a nonproteinaceous bioaffecting compound, such as a nonproteinaceous
    drug (e.g., a cancer-treating drug).


CLS 424/182.1
TXT Conjugate includes potentiator; or composition comprising conjugate
    includes potentiator:

    Subject matter under subclass 178.1 wherein a component of the conjugate is
    a potentiator or wherein a component of a composition comprising the
    conjugate is a potentiator.

    (1)     Note.  A potentiator, for the purposes of this subclass, is a
    substance that enhances or prolongs the action of the conjugate.


CLS 424/183.1
TXT Conjugated to proteinaceous toxin or fragment thereof (e.g., conjugated to
    diphtheria toxin, Pseudomonas exotoxin, ricin, gelonin, abrin, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 178.1 wherein the nonimmunoglobulin material
    is a proteinaceous toxin or fragment thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The toxins found here are generally derived from plant or
    bacterial sources.


CLS 424/184.1
TXT ANTIGEN, EPITOPE, OR OTHER IMMUNOSPECIFIC IMMUNOEFFECTOR (E.G.,
    IMMUNOSPECIFIC VACCINE, IMMUNOSPECIFIC STIMULATOR OF CELL-DIATED IMMUNITY,
    IMMUNOSPECIFIC TOLEROGEN, IMMUNOSPECIFIC IMMUNOSUPPRESSOR, ETC.):

    Subject matter under the class definition involving an antigen, an epitope,
    or another immunospecific immunoeffector, such as an immunospecific
    vaccine, an immunospecific stimulator of cell-mediated immunity, an
    immunospecific tolerogen, or an immunospecific immunosuppressor.

    (1)     Note.  An antigen is a substance that elicits the production of
    antibodies, wherein the antibodies then have binding specificity for that
    antigen.

    (2)     Note.  An epitope is a portion of an antigen to which an antibody
    binds.  An epitope is also called an antigenic determinant.

    (3)     Note.  An immunospecific immunoeffector, for the purposes of this
    subclass and indented subclasses, is a substance that induces a specific
    immunological effect (e.g., specific immunity to polio), whether it be
    immunospecific immunity, immunospecific tolerance, or immunospecific
    immunosuppression.

    (4)     Note. This subclass and indented subclasses provide for
    bioaffecting and body-treating compositions of antigens, epitopes, and
    other immunospecific immunoeffectors.

    (5)     Note. This subclass and indented subclasses also provide for
    bioaffecting and body-treating methods of using antigens, epitopes, and
    other immunospecific immunoeffectors and compositions thereof.

    (6)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses provide for methods of
    immunizing to produce protective immunity in vivo (i.e., for vaccination
    purposes).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93.1+,  for a nonimmunologic bioaffecting or body-treating composition
    containing a whole live micro-organism, cell, or virus.

    130.1+, for methods of immunizing with an antigen to produce antibodies for
    recovery, which antibodies are characterized as being useful as
    bioaffecting or body-treating agents (e.g., to provide passive immunity).

    538+,   for bee or other insect or arachnid venom for which there is no
    specific disclosure that it functions as an antigen.

    542,    for snake venom for which there is no specific disclosure that it
    functions as an antigen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 5+ for
    antigens involved in in vitro immunoassays involving an enzyme or a
    micro-organism.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 500+,
    for antigens involved in in vitro immunoassays not involving an enzyme or a
    micro-organism.


CLS 424/185.1
TXT Amino acid sequence disclosed in whole or in part; or conjugate, complex,
    or fusion protein or fusion polypeptide including the same:

    Subject matter under subclass 184.1 wherein an amino acid sequence
    specifying an antigen, an epitope, or another immunospecific immunoeffector
    is disclosed in whole or in part, wherein the disclosed amino acid sequence
    may be part of a conjugate, a complex, or a fusion protein or fusion
    polypeptide.

    (1)     Note.  A conjugate is taken to mean a coupling of one substance to
    another via covalent means, either directly via a covalent bond or
    indirectly via a chemical linking group.

    (2)     Note.  A complex is taken to mean a coupling of one substance to
    another via noncovalent means (e.g., via adsorption).

    (3)     Note.  A fusion protein or fusion polypeptide is taken to mean the
    expression product of a gene fusion.  A gene fusion is a nucleic acid
    sequence that encodes the complete or partial amino acid sequences of two
    or more proteins or polypeptides in contiguous fashion, or in noncontiguous
    fashion, wherein the expressed sequence is ultimately processed to yield
    the desired fusion protein.


CLS 424/186.1
TXT Disclosed amino acid sequence derived from virus:

    Subject matter under subclass 185.1 wherein the disclosed amino acid
    sequence is derived from a viral protein or fragment thereof.

    (1)     Note.  ``Derived from" in this context is taken to mean an amino
    acid sequence identical to that found in nature or modified in some respect.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    930,    Peptide or Protein Sequence, subclasses 220+ for a peptide or
    protein sequence homologous to that of a virus.


CLS 424/187.1
TXT Retroviridae (e.g., feline leukemia, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 186.1 wherein the virus belongs to the family
    Retroviridae.

    (1)     Note.  Retroviruses are RNA (ribonucleic acid) viruses that encode
    the enzyme reverse transcriptase and that are associated with acquired
    immune deficiency syndrome (AIDS) and related disorders, as well as with
    some forms of cancer, such as those caused by HTLV (human T-lymphotrophic
    virus) I and II, Rous sarcoma virus, MMTV (murine mammary tumor virus),
    feline leukemia virus, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    930,    Peptide or Protein Sequence, subclass 221 for a peptide or protein
    sequence homologous to that of a retrovirus.


CLS 424/188.1
TXT Immunodeficiency virus (e.g., HIV, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 187.1 wherein the virus is one that is
    associated with an immunodeficiency syndrome such as AIDS in humans or an
    AIDS-related syndrome in animals.


CLS 424/189.1
TXT Hepatitis virus:

    Subject matter under subclass 186.1 wherein the virus is a hepatitis virus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    930,    Peptide or Protein Sequence, subclass 223 for a peptide or protein
    sequence homologous to that of a hepatitis virus.


CLS 424/190.1
TXT Disclosed amino acid sequence derived from bacterium (e.g., Mycoplasma,
    Anaplasma etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 185.1 wherein the disclosed amino acid
    sequence is derived from a bacterial protein or fragment thereof.

    (1)     Note.  ``Derived from" in this context is taken to mean an amino
    acid sequence identical to that found in nature or modified in some respect.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    930,    Peptide or Protein Sequence, subclass 200 for a peptide or protein
    sequence homologous to that of a bacterium.


CLS 424/191.1
TXT Disclosed amino acid sequence derived from parasitic organism (e.g.,
    Dirofilaria, Eimeria, Trichinella, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 185.1 wherein the disclosed amino acid
    sequence is derived from a protein or fragment thereof of a parasitic
    organism.

    (1)     Note.  ``Derived from" in this context is taken to mean an amino
    acid sequence identical to that found in nature or modified in some respect.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    930,    Peptide or Protein Sequence, subclass 210 for a peptide or protein
    sequence homologous to that of a parasitic organism.


CLS 424/192.1
TXT Fusion protein or fusion polypeptide (i.e., expression product of gene
    fusion):

    Subject matter under subclass 184.1 involving a fusion protein or fusion
    polypeptide, which fusion protein or fusion polypeptide is taken to mean
    the expression product of a gene fusion.

    (1)     Note.  A gene fusion is a nucleic acid sequence that encodes the
    complete or partial amino acid sequences of two or more proteins or
    polypeptides in contiguous fashion, or in noncontiguous fashion, wherein
    the expressed sequence is ultimately processed to yield the desired fusion
    protein.


CLS 424/193.1
TXT Conjugate or complex:

    Subject matter under subclass 184.1 involving a conjugate or a complex.

    (1)     Note.  A conjugate is taken to mean a coupling of one substance to
    another via covalent means, either directly via a covalent bond or
    indirectly via a chemical linking group.

    (2)     Note.  A complex is taken to mean a coupling of one substance to
    another via noncovalent means (e.g., via adsorption).

    (3)     Note.  The conjugates and complexes provided for in this subclass
    and indented subclasses are often of the hapten-carrier type.  A hapten is
    a substance that can bind an antibody, but which cannot induce production
    of an antibody unless it is coupled to a carrier that is immunogenic.  A
    hapten is usually, but not always, of low molecular weight.  Common
    carriers, for vaccination purposes in humans, are tetanus toxoid and
    diphtheria toxoid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.57,   for methods of using radiolabeled antigens and compositions thereof
    for bioaffecting or body-treating purposes and said compositions, per se.


CLS 424/194.1
TXT Conjugated via claimed linking group, bond, or coupling agent:

    Subject matter under subclass 193.1 involving a conjugate wherein one
    component is coupled to another via a linking group, a bond, or a coupling
    agent that is specifically identified in the claim(s) by chemical name or
    chemical structure.


CLS 424/195.1
TXT PLANT EXTRACT OR PLANT MATERIAL OF UNDETERMINED CONSTITUTION:

    Compositions under the class definition which contain an active compound or
    material derived from a plant including reaction products thereof, said
    compound, material or reaction product having a structure which is not
    sufficiently known to be classifiable on its chemical basis.

    (1)     Note.  Pyrethrum, cube root, derris root or rotenone containing
    plant material is excluded herefrom and is classified in Class 514,
    subclasses 65 - 74.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    514,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclass 783
    for a carrier or adjuvant composition containing a plant extract of
    undetermined constitution.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for a dentifrice or mouth wash containing a plant extract of
    undetermined constitution.

    74,     for hair or scalp treating composition containing a plant extract.


CLS 424/195.11
TXT Conjugate or complex includes hormone or other secreted growth regulatory
    factor, differentiation factor, intercellular mediator, or fragment thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 193.1 wherein at least one component of the
    conjugate or complex is a hormone or other secreted growth regulatory
    factor, differentiation factor, intercellular mediator, or fragment thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The term ``growth regulatory factor" is meant to encompass
    any secretory factor that is growth-stimulatory or growth-inhibitory (e.g.,
    that will stimulate or inhibit clonal expansion of cells).

    (2)     Note.  The term ``differentiation factor" is meant to encompass any
    secretory factor that causes cells to progress from a relatively
    undifferentiated state to a more differentiated state, wherein said
    progression may include clonal expansion.

    (3)     Note.  The term ``intercellular mediator" is meant to encompass any
    secretory factor that affects cellular functions such as chemotaxis, etc.


CLS 424/196.1
TXT Pine oil, tar, gum, or resin:

    Compositions under subclass 195.1 which contains an oil, resin tar or gum
    derived from the various species of pine, or a reaction product thereof;
    e.g., turpentines, cedar oil, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Patents reciting broadly "pine oils", "pine tars" or  "pine
    gums" are placed herein even though it is realized that a terpene may
    constitute a significant fraction thereof.


CLS 424/196.11
TXT Conjugate or complex includes virus or component thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 193.1 wherein at least one component of the
    conjugate or complex is a virus or a component of a virus.


CLS 424/197.1
TXT Tobacco or tobacco extract:

    Compositions under subclass 195.1 which contain tobacco, per se, extracts
    of tobacco or a reaction product thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    546,    Organic Compounds, subclass 279.4 for tobacco alkaloids of known
    structure.


CLS 424/197.11
TXT Conjugate or complex includes bacterium or component thereof or substance
    produced by said bacterium:

    Subject matter under subclass 193.1  wherein at least one component of the
    conjugate or complex is a bacterium, a component of a bacterium, or a
    substance produced by a bacterium.


CLS 424/198.1
TXT Hormone or other secreted growth regulatory factor, differentiation factor,
    intercellular mediator, neurotransmitter, or fragment thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 184.1 involving a hormone or other secreted
    growth regulatory factor, differentiation factor, intercellular mediator,
    neurotransmitter, or fragment thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The term ``growth regulatory factor" is meant to encompass
    any secretory factor that is growth-stimulatory or growth-inhibitory (e.g.,
    that will stimulate or inhibit clonal expansion of cells).

    (2)     Note.  The term ``differentiation factor" is meant to encompass any
    secretory factor that causes cells to progress from a relatively
    undifferentiated state to a more differentiated state, wherein said
    progression may include clonal expansion.

    (3)     Note.  The term ``intercellular mediator" is meant to encompass any
    secretory factor that affects cellular functions such as chemotaxis, etc.


CLS 424/199.1
TXT Recombinant virus encoding one or more heterologous proteins or fragments
    thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 184.1 involving a virus into whose genome is
    integrated one or more nucleic acid sequences encoding one or more
    heterologous proteins or fragments thereof.

    (1)     Note.  A heterologous protein is one derived from another species
    (e.g., another viral species).

    (2)     Note.  Such genetically-modified viruses may be used as multivalent
    vaccines.


CLS 424/200.1
TXT Recombinant or stably-transformed bacterium encoding one or more
    heterologous proteins or fragments thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 184.1 involving a bacterium into whose genome
    is integrated one or more nucleic acid sequences encoding one or more
    heterologous proteins or fragments thereof; or involving a bacterium that
    carries stable, replicative plasmids that include one or more nucleic acid
    sequences encoding one or more heterologous proteins or fragments thereof.

    (1)     Note.  A heterologous protein is one derived from another species
    (e.g., another bacterial species).

    (2)     Note.  Such genetically-modified bacteria may be used as
    multivalent vaccines.


CLS 424/201.1
TXT Combination of viral and bacterial antigens (e.g., multivalent viral and
    bacterial vaccine, etc.)

    Subject matter under subclass 184.1 involving a combination of viral and
    bacterial antigens, such as that found in a multivalent viral and bacterial
    vaccine.


CLS 424/202.1
TXT Combination of antigens from multiple viral species (e.g., multivalent
    viral vaccine, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 184.1 involving a combination of antigens
    from multiple viral species, such as that found in a multivalent viral
    vaccine.

    (1)     Note.  A combination of antigens from multiple variants of the same
    viral species should be classified with that viral species.


CLS 424/203.1
TXT Combination of antigens from multiple bacterial species (e.g., multivalent
    bacterial vaccine, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 184.1 involving a combination of antigens
    from multiple bacterial species, such as that found in a multivalent
    bacterial vaccine.

    (1)     Note.  A combination of antigens from multiple variants of the same
    bacterial species should be classified with that bacterial species.


CLS 424/204.1
TXT Virus or component thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 184.1 involving a virus or a component of a
    virus.

    (1)     Note.  As a guide to classification, viruses represented in the
    indented subclasses are listed alphabetically herein below, together with
    the subclasses in which they have been placed.  This list is not exhaustive.

    Virus           Subclass

    adeno-like      233.1

    adenovirus      233.1

    Aujeszky's disease      229.1

    avian encephalomyelitis 216.1

    avian leukosis  207.1

    avian pox               232.1

    avian proventiculitis   215.1

    bluetongue      215.1

    bovine herpes virus

     type 1         229.1

    bovine leukemia         207.1

    bovine viral diarrhea   218.1

    canine coronavirus      221.1

    canine distemper        213.1

    canine parvovirus       233.1

    canine tracheobronchitis        211.1

    Colorado tick fever     215.1

    coxsackievirus  216.1

    cytomegalovirus 230.1

    dengue          218.1

    Virus           Subclass

    duck hepatitis  225.1

    echovirus               216.1

    egg drop syndrome       233.1

    Epstein-Barr    230.1

    equine encephalitis     218.1

    equine infectious anemia        207.1

    equine rhinopnemonitis  229.1

    equine viral arteritis  218.1

    feline herpesvirus      229.1

    feline infectious

      peritonitis   221.1

    feline leukemia 207.1

    feline panleukopenia    233.1

    feline rhinotracheitis  229.1

    flavivirus              218.1

    foot-and-mouth disease  216.1

    fowl plague     209.1

    fowlpox         232.1

    hemorrhagic enteritis   233.1

    hepatitis A     226.1

    hepatitis B     227.1

    hepatitis C     228.1

    herpes simplex  231.1

    herpes zoster   230.1

    hog cholera     220.1

    human T-lymphotrophic

      virus type I (HTLV-I) 207.1

    immunodeficiency virus  208.1

    infectious bovine

     rhinotracheitis        229.1

    infectious bronchitis   222.1

    infectious canine

      hepatitis     225.1

    infectious pustular

     vulvovaginitis 229.1

    influenza               209.1, 210.1

    Japanese B encephalitis 218.1

    laryngotracheitis       229.1

    Marek's disease 229.1

    measles         212.1

    Mengovirus      216.1

    mink enteritis  233.1

    mouse hepatitis 225.1

    mumps           212.1

    neonatal calf diarrhea  221.1

    Newcastle disease       214.1

    non-A, non-B hepatitis  228.1

    orbivirus               215.1

    Virus           Subclass

    parainfluenza   211.1

    poliovirus              217.1

    pseudorabies    229.1

    rabbit myxoma   232.1

    rabies          224.1

    reovirus                215.1

    respiratory syncytial   211.1

    rinderpest      211.1

    rubella         219.1

    rotavirus               215.1

    Rous sarcoma    207.1

    Sendai          211.1

    Sindbis         218.1

    smallpox                232.1

    transmissible

     gastroenteritis        223.1

    turkey rhinotracheitis  211.1

    vaccinia                232.1

    varicella zoster        230.1

    vesicular stomatitis    224.1

    yellow fever    218.1

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Immunology, subclass 173.3 for
    processes of attenuating a virus via irradiation and subclasses 236.1+ for
    processes of attenuating a virus via other means (e.g., serial passage,
    etc.).


CLS 424/205.1
TXT Reassortant or deletion mutant virus:

    Subject matter under subclass 204.1 involving a reassortant or deletion
    mutant virus.

    (1)     Note.  For the purpose of this subclass and the indented subclass,
    a reassortant virus is one whose genome combines genetic material from
    genotypically distinct viruses of the same viral species, resulting in a
    variant having certain desired antigenicity or attentuated virulence
    characteristics.  The term ``recombinant virus" has been used previously to
    describe such a mutant.

    (2)     Note.  For the purpose of this subclass and the indented subclass,
    a deletion mutant virus is one whose genome has been altered by recombinant
    DNA techniques so as to produce a variant that is lacking one or more
    specifically-identified active gene products, and thus has certain desired
    characteristics, such as non-reverting attentuated virulence.

    (3)     Note.  The mutant viruses disclosed in this subclass and the
    indented subclass may be useful in attenuated live vaccines.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199.1,  for a recombinant virus encoding one or more heterologous proteins
    or fragments thereof.


CLS 424/206.1
TXT Influenza virus:

    Subject matter under subclass 205.1 wherein the virus is an influenza virus.


CLS 424/207.1
TXT Retroviridae (e.g., feline leukemia virus, bovine leukemia virus, avian
    leukosis virus, equine infectious anemia virus, Rous sarcoma virus, HTLV-I,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 204.1 wherein the virus belongs to the family
    Retroviridae.

    (1)     Note.  Retroviruses are RNA viruses that encode the enzyme reverse
    transcriptase and that are associated with acquired immune deficiency
    syndrome (AIDS) and related disorders, as well as with some forms of
    cancer, such as those caused by HTLV(human T-lymphotrophic virus) I and II,
    Rous sarcoma virus, MMTV (murine mammary tumor virus), feline leukemia
    virus, etc.


CLS 424/208.1
TXT Immunodeficiency virus (e.g., HIV, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 207.1 wherein the retrovirus is one that is
    associated with an immunodeficiency syndrome such as AIDS in humans or an
    AIDS-related syndrome in animals.


CLS 424/209.1
TXT Orthomyxoviridae (e.g., influenza virus, fowl plague virus, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 204.1 wherein the virus belongs to the family
    Orthomyxoviridae.


CLS 424/210.1
TXT Subunit vaccine containing hemagglutinin or neuraminidase:

    Subject matter under subclass 209.1 involving a subunit vaccine containing
    hemagglutinin or neuraminidase derived from a virus that belongs to the
    family Orthomyxoviridae.

    (1)     Note.  A subunit vaccine of a virus is one that does not contain
    the whole virus, but rather, only part(s) of the virus.


CLS 424/211.1
TXT Paramyxoviridae (e.g., parainfluenza virus, respiratory syncytial virus,
    rinderpest virus, Sendai virus, canine tracheobronchitis virus, turkey
    rhinotracheitis virus, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 204.1 wherein the virus belongs to the family
    Paramyxoviridae.


CLS 424/212.1
TXT Measles virus or mumps virus:

    Subject matter under subclass 211.1 wherein the virus is a measles virus or
    a mumps virus.


CLS 424/213.1
TXT Canine distemper virus:

    Subject matter under subclass 211.1 wherein the virus is a canine distemper
    virus.


CLS 424/214.1
TXT Newcastle disease virus:

    Subject matter under subclass 211.1 wherein the virus is a Newcastle
    disease virus.


CLS 424/215.1
TXT Reoviridae (e.g., rotavirus, reovirus, orbivirus, avian proventriculitis
    virus, bluetongue virus, Colorado tick fever virus, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 204.1 wherein the virus belongs to the family
    Reoviridae.


CLS 424/216.1
TXT Caliciviridae or picornaviridae, except hepatitis A virus (e.g.,
    foot-and-mouth disease virus (FMDV), coxsackievirus, echovirus, avian
    encephalomyelitis virus, Mengovirus, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 204.1 wherein the virus belongs to the family
    Caliciviridae or to the family Picornaviridae, except a hepatitis A virus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226.1,  for subject matter under subclass 204.1 involving a hepatitis A
    virus.


CLS 424/217.1
TXT Poliovirus:

    Subject matter under subclass 216.1 wherein the virus that belongs to the
    Picornaviridae family is a poliovirus.


CLS 424/218.1
TXT Togaviridae or Flaviviridae, except hepatitis C virus (e.g., yellow fever
    virus, bovine viral diarrhea virus, dengue virus, equine viral arteritis
    virus, equine encephalitis virus, Japanese B encephalitis virus, Sindbis
    virus, flavivirus, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 204.1 wherein the virus belongs to the family
    Togaviridae or to the family Flaviviridae.


CLS 424/219.1
TXT Rubella virus:

    Subject matter under subclass 218.1 wherein the virus that belongs to the
    family Togaviridae is a rubella virus.


CLS 424/220.1
TXT Hog cholera virus:

    Subject matter under subclass 218.1 wherein the virus that belongs to the
    family Togaviridae is a hog cholera virus.


CLS 424/221.1
TXT Coronaviridae (e.g., neonatal calf diarrhea virus, feline infectious
    peritonitis virus, canine coronavirus, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 204.1 wherein the virus belongs to the family
    Coronaviridae.


CLS 424/222.1
TXT Infectious bronchitis virus (IBV):

    Subject matter under subclass 221.1 wherein the virus is an infectious
    bronchitis virus.

    (1)     Note.  This virus infects poultry.


CLS 424/223.1
TXT Transmissible gastroenteritis virus (i.e., TGE):

    Subject matter under subclass 221.1 wherein the virus is a transmissible
    gastroenteritis virus.

    (1)     Note.  This virus infects swine.


CLS 424/224.1
TXT Rhabdoviridae (e.g., rabies virus, vesicular stomatitis virus, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 204.1 wherein the virus belongs to the family
    Rhabdoviridae.


CLS 424/225.1
TXT Hepatitis virus (e.g., infectious canine hepatitis virus, duck hepatitis
    virus, mouse hepatitis virus, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 204.1 wherein  the virus is a hepatitis virus.

    (1)     Note.  The hepatitis viruses do not form a single family,
    morphologically, but rather, are grouped together here for their common
    ability to cause hepatitis (i.e., inflammation of the liver).


CLS 424/226.1
TXT Hepatitis A virus:

    Subject matter under subclass 225.1 wherein the hepatitis virus is a
    hepatitis A virus.


CLS 424/227.1
TXT Hepatitis B virus (e.g., hepatitis B surface antigen (HBsAg), pre-S region,
    hepatitis B core antigen (HBcAg), hepatitis B e-antigen, Dane particle,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 225.1 wherein the hepatitis virus is a
    hepatitis B virus.


CLS 424/228.1
TXT Non-A, non-B hepatitis virus or hepatitis C virus:

    Subject matter under subclass 225.1 wherein the hepatitis virus is a non-A,
    non-B hepatitis virus or a hepatitis C virus.


CLS 424/229.1
TXT Herpetoviridae (e.g., herpesvirus, Marek's disease virus, laryngotracheitis
    virus, infectious bovine rhinotracheitis virus (IBR), pseudorabies virus,
    infectious pustular vulvovaginitis virus, equine rhinopneumonitis virus,
    bovine herpes virus type 1, Aujeszky's disease virus, feline
    rhinotracheitis virus, feline herpes  virus, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 204.1 wherein the virus belongs to the family
    Herpetoviridae.


CLS 424/230.1
TXT Cytomegalovirus, varicella or herpes zoster virus, or Epstein-Barr virus:

    Subject matter under subclass 229.1 wherein the virus is a cytomegalovirus,
    a varicella or herpes zoster virus, or an Epstein-Barr virus.


CLS 424/231.1
TXT Herpes simplex virus (e.g., HSV-1, HSV-2, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 229.1 wherein the virus is a herpes simplex
    virus.


CLS 424/232.1
TXT Poxviridae (e.g., smallpox virus,  avian pox virus, fowlpox virus, rabbit
    myxoma virus, vaccinia virus, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 204.1 wherein the virus belongs to the family
    Poxviridae.


CLS 424/233.1
TXT Adenoviridae, adeno-like virus, or Parvoviridae (e.g., adenovirus, canine
    parvovirus, mink enteritis virus, hemorrhagic enteritis virus, feline
    panleukopenia virus, egg drop syndrome virus, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 204.1 wherein the virus belongs to the family
    Adenoviridae or to the family Parvoviridae, or is considered an adeno-like
    virus.


CLS 424/234.1
TXT Bacterium or component thereof or substance produced by said bacterium
    (e.g., Legionella, Borrelia, Anaplasma, Shigella, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 184.1 involving a bacterium, a component of a
    bacterium, or a substance produced by a bacterium.


CLS 424/235.1
TXT Transposon mutant or deletion mutant bacterium (e.g., produced by
    transposon mutagenesis, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 234.1 involving a transposon mutant or a
    deletion mutant bacterium.

    (1)     Note.  For the purpose of this subclass, a transposon mutant
    bacterium is a bacterium whose genome has been modified by the introduction
    of a transposon--a sequence of double-stranded DNA that is able to
    replicate and insert a copy of itself at another site--which transposon has
    inserted a copy of itself at a site in the genome such that a gene of a
    particular biosynthetic pathway has been inactivated, so as to produce a
    desired characteristic in the mutant bacterium, such as attentuated
    virulence.

    (2)     Note.  For the purpose of this subclass, a deletion mutant
    bacterium is one whose genome has been altered by recombinant DNA
    techniques so as to produce a variant that is lacking one more
    specifically-identified active gene products, and thus has certain desired
    characteristics, such as non-reverting attentuated virulence.

    (3)     Note.  The mutant bacteria disclosed herein may be useful in
    attenuated live vaccines.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200.1,  for a recombinant or stably-transformed bacterium encoding one or
    more heterologous proteins or fragments thereof, which recombinant or
    stably-transformed bacteria may also be a transposon mutant or a deletion
    mutant.


CLS 424/236.1
TXT Toxin or toxoid, except endotoxin (e.g., exotoxin, enterotoxin, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 234.1 involving a bacterial toxin or toxoid,
    except an endotoxin.


CLS 424/237.1
TXT Staphylococcus or Streptococcus:

    Subject matter under subclass 236.1 wherein the toxin or toxoid originates
    from a bacterium of the genus Staphylococcus or from a bacterium of the
    genus Streptococcus.


CLS 424/238.1
TXT Corynebacterium (e.g., Corynebacterium diphtheriae, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 236.1 wherein the toxin or toxoid originates
    from a bacterium of the genus Corynebacterium.


CLS 424/239.1
TXT Clostridium (e.g., Clostridium tetani, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 236.1 wherein the toxin or toxoid originates
    from a bacterium of the genus Clostridium.


CLS 424/240.1
TXT Bordetella (e.g., Bordetella pertussis, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 236.1 wherein the toxin or toxoid originates
    from a bacterium of the genus Bordetella.


CLS 424/241.1
TXT Escherichia (e.g., Escherichia coli, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 236.1 wherein the toxin or toxoid originates
    from a bacterium of the genus Escherichia.


CLS 424/242.1
TXT Pilus, fimbria, or adhesin:

    Subject matter under subclass 234.1 involving a bacterial pilus, fimbria,
    or adhesin.

    (1)     Note.  Adhesins are surface antigens found on pili and fimbriae,
    which are filamentous appendages of many gram-negative bacteria.


CLS 424/243.1
TXT Staphylococcus (e.g., Staphylococcus aureus, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 234.1 wherein the bacterium is of the genus
    Staphylococcus.


CLS 424/244.1
TXT Streptococcus (e.g., Group B streptococcus, pneumococcus or Streptococcus
    pneumoniae, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 234.1 wherein the bacterium is of the genus
    Streptococcus.

    (1)     Note. Streptococcus pneumoniae bacteria may be termed pneumococci.


CLS 424/245.1
TXT Corynebacterium (e.g., Corynebacterium diphtheriae, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 234.1 wherein the bacterium is of the genus
    Corynebacterium.


CLS 424/246.1
TXT Bacillus:

    Subject matter under subclass 234.1 wherein the bacterium is of the genus
    Bacillus.


CLS 424/247.1
TXT Clostridium (e.g., Clostridium tetani, Clostridium difficile, Clostridium
    perfringens, Clostridium botulinum, Clostridium chauvoei, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 234.1 wherein the bacterium is of the genus
    Clostridium.


CLS 424/248.1
TXT Mycobacterium (e.g., Mycobacterium tuberculosis, Calmette-Guerin bacillus
    (i.e., BCG), etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 234.1 wherein the bacterium is of the genus
    Mycobacterium.


CLS 424/249.1
TXT Neisseria (e.g., Neisseria gonorrhoeae, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 234.1 wherein the bacterium is of the genus
    Neisseria.


CLS 424/250.1
TXT Neisseria meningitidis:

    Subject matter under subclass 249.1 wherein the bacterium is of the species
    Neisseria meningitidis.


CLS 424/251.1
TXT Moraxella (e.g., Moraxella bovis, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 234.1 wherein the bacterium is of the genus
    Moraxella.


CLS 424/252.1
TXT Brucella (e.g., Brucella abortus, Brucella canis, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 234.1 wherein the bacterium is of the genus
    Brucella.


CLS 424/253.1
TXT Bordetella (e.g., Bordetella bronchiseptica, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 234.1 wherein the bacterium is of the genus
    Bordetella.


CLS 424/254.1
TXT Bordetella pertussis:

    Subject matter under subclass 253.1 wherein the bacterium is of the species
    Bordetella pertussis.


CLS 424/255.1
TXT Pasteurella (e.g., Pasteurella multocida, Pasteurella hemolytica, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 234.1 wherein the bacterium is of the genus
    Pasteurella.


CLS 424/256.1
TXT Hemophilus (e.g., Hemophilus influenzae, Hemophilus gallinarum, Hemophilus
    pleuropnemoniae, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 234.1 wherein the bacterium is of the genus
    Hemophilus.


CLS 424/257.1
TXT Escherichia (e.g., Escherichia coli, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 234.1 wherein the bacterium is of the genus
    Escherichia.


CLS 424/258.1
TXT Salmonella (e.g., Salmonella typhimurium, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 234.1 wherein the bacterium is of the genus
    Salmonella.


CLS 424/259.1
TXT Klebsiella (e.g., Klebsiella pneumoniae, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 234.1 wherein the bacterium is of the genus
    Klebsiella.


CLS 424/260.1
TXT Pseudomonas (e.g., Pseudomonas aeruginosa, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 234.1 wherein the bacterium is of the genus
    Pseudomonas.


CLS 424/261.1
TXT Vibrio (e.g., Vibrio cholerae, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 234.1 wherein the bacterium is of the genus
    Vibrio.


CLS 424/262.1
TXT Treponema (e.g., Treponema hyodysenteriae, Treponema pallidum, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 234.1 wherein the bacterium is of the genus
    Treponema.


CLS 424/263.1
TXT Chlamydia (e.g., Chlamydia trachomatis, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 234.1 wherein the bacterium is of the genus
    Chlamydia.


CLS 424/264.1
TXT Mycoplasma:

    Subject matter under subclass 234.1 wherein the bacterium is of the genus
    Mycoplasma.


CLS 424/265.1
TXT Parasitic organism or component thereof or substance produced by said
    parasitic organism (e.g., Schistosoma, Dirofilaria, Trichinella, Fasciola,
    Ancylostoma, Ascaris, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 184.1 involving a parasitic organism, a
    component of a parasitic organism, or a substance produced by a parasitic
    organism.


CLS 424/266.1
TXT Component characterized by molecular weight:

    Subject matter under subclass 265.1 wherein the component is characterized
    by molecular weight.


CLS 424/267.1
TXT Eimeria:

    Subject matter under subclass 266.1 wherein the parasitic organism is
    Eimeria.


CLS 424/268.1
TXT Plasmodium:

    Subject matter under subclass 266.1 wherein the parasitic organism is
    Plasmodium.


CLS 424/269.1
TXT Parasitic protozoan (e.g., Trypanosoma, Trichomonas, Leishmania, Entamoeba,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 265.1 wherein the parasitic organism is a
    parasitic protozoan.


CLS 424/270.1
TXT Babesia:

    Subject matter under subclass 269.1 wherein the parasitic protozoan is of
    the genus Babesia.


CLS 424/271.1
TXT Eimeria:

    Subject matter under subclass 269.1 wherein the parasitic protozoan is of
    the genus Eimeria.


CLS 424/272.1
TXT Plasmodium:

    Subject matter under subclass 269.1 wherein the parasitic protozoan is of
    the genus Plasmodium.


CLS 424/273.1
TXT Toxoplasma:

    Subject matter under subclass 269.1 wherein the parasitic protozoan is of
    the genus Toxoplasma.


CLS 424/274.1
TXT Fungus, except allergen, or component thereof or substance produced by said
    fungus (e.g., Trichophyton, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 184.1 involving a fungus, a component of a
    fungus, or a substance produced by a fungus, except a fungus that functions
    as an allergen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    275.1,  for a bioaffecting or body-treating composition involving a fungus
    that functions as an allergen.


CLS 424/275.1
TXT Allergen or component thereof (e.g., ragweed pollen, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 184.1 involving an allergen or a component of
    an allergen.


CLS 424/276.1
TXT Characterized by molecular weight:

    Subject matter under subclass 275.1 wherein the allergen or component is
    characterized by molecular weight.


CLS 424/277.1
TXT Cancer cell or component thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 184.1 involving a cancer cell or a component
    of a cancer cell.


CLS 424/278.1
TXT NONSPECIFIC IMMUNOEFFECTOR, PER SE (E.G., ADJUVANT, NONSPECIFIC
    IMMUNOSTIMULATOR, NONSPECIFIC IMMUNOPOTENTIATOR, NONSPECIFIC
    IMMUNOSUPPRESSOR, NONSPECIFIC IMMUNOMODULATOR, ETC.); OR NONSPECIFIC
    IMMUNOEFFECTOR, STABILIZER, EMULSIFIER, PRESERVATIVE, CARRIER, OR OTHER
    ADDITIVE FOR A COMPOSITION CONTAINING AN IMMUNOGLOBULIN, AN ANTISERUM, AN
    ANTIBODY, A CONJUGATE OR COMPLEX OF AN ANTIBODY OR FRAGMENT THEREOF, AN
    ANTIGEN, AN EPITOPE, OR OTHER IMMUNOSPECIFIC IMMUNOEFFECTOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition involving a nonspecific
    immunoeffector, per se, or a nonspecific immunoeffector, a stabilizer, an
    emulsifier, a preservative, a carrier, or any other additive for a
    composition containing an immunoglobulin, an antiserum, an antibody, a
    conjugate or complex of an antibody or fragment thereof, an antigen, an
    epitope, or any other immunospecific immunoeffector.

    (1)     Note.  In order for a patent to be placed here, it must recite a
    particular nonspecific immunoeffector, stabilizer, emulsifier,
    preservative, carrier, etc., in the claims.

    (2)     Note. Patents reciting in the claims a composition comprising (a) a
    particular antibody or fragment thereof, (b) a particular antiserum, (c) a
    conjugate or complex of a particular antibody or fragment thereof, or (d) a
    particular antigen, epitope, or other immunospecific immunoeffector have
    been placed as original references in that subclass providing for the
    composition comprising that particular antibody, etc., and cross-referenced
    to the subclass providing for any pertinent nonspecific immunoeffector,
    etc., that is recited in the claims.

    (3)     Note.  Patents having in the claims only a nominal recitation to a
    composition comprising ``an antigen" or ``an antibody," etc., but a
    recitation to a particular nonspecific immunoeffector, etc., have been
    placed as original references in this or the indented subclass that
    provides for that particular nonspecific immunoeffector, etc., and
    cross-referenced to that subclass that provides for a composition
    comprising any pertinent antigen, antibody, etc., that is disclosed.


CLS 424/279.1
TXT Synthetic or structurally-modified peptidoglycan or mucopolysaccharide or
    fragment thereof (e.g., derivative of N-acetyl-muramyl-L-alanyl-D-glutamic
    acid, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 278.1 involving a synthetic or
    structurally-modified peptidoglycan or mucopolysaccharide or fragment
    thereof.


CLS 424/280.1
TXT Synthetic polymer or copolymer:

    Subject matter under subclass 278.1 involving a synthetic polymer or
    copolymer.


CLS 424/281.1
TXT Virus (e.g., interferon-inducing virus, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 278.1 involving a virus.


CLS 424/282.1
TXT Bacterium or component thereof or substance produced by said bacterium:

    Subject matter under subclass 278.1 involving a bacterium, a component of a
    bacterium, or a substance produced by a bacterium.


CLS 424/283.1
TXT Lipid or oil:

    Subject matter under subclass 278.1 involving a lipid or an oil.


CLS 424/400
TXT PREPARATIONS CHARACTERIZED BY SPECIAL PHYSICAL FORM:

    Subject matter under the class definition which possess some form, or a
    specific dimension or configuration, or its components are associated as
    plural layers or parts.

    (1)     Note.  A composition in unit form; e.g., tablet, capsule, etc., of
    specific structure is classified in this and indented subclasses.  However,
    a composition claimed as an article (or product) and which is only defined
    in broad descriptive terms such as "pill", "tablet", "granule", "particle",
    "solid", etc., is classified in appropriate subclasses below on the basis
    of the composition thereof or other feature, since the recited descriptive
    terms, per se, are not regarded as defining "structure" for this and
    indented subclasses.  However, this and indented subclasses will take
    products of special form having reference to nominal structure; e.g.,
    "oval", "spherical", "rod", "tapering", "hollow", etc.

    (2)     Note.  This class provides for impregnated or layered substrates
    which function as a carrier or applicator; e.g., textiles, bandages
    filament, paper, etc., having minimum of two layers, wherein one layer (or
    the impregnant) is a composition for this class and the substrate is no
    more than a nominally recited single layered base.  Thus, this subclass
    will provide for an impregnant matrix.

    (3)     Note.  An article coated, or impregnated with a composition
    provided for in this class and in which the composition functions only to
    preserve the article from biological attack is generally classified with
    the particular article protected. Seeds coated with Class 424 biocidal
    compositions are an exception to this rule and are classified in Class 504,
    subclass 100.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    71,     Chemistry:  Fertilizers, provides for compositions having a
    nutrient action on plant growth and methods of using such compositions.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, provides for coating
    compositions which protect a base by forming a tough adherent film even
    though the composition also contains a biocide of product the base against
    biological attack,; e.g., marine antifouling paints, etc.



            Materials or ingredients for coating and molding compositions
    (Class 106 appropriate subclasses) which are also useful as diluents or
    inert ingredients in pharmaceutical compositions are placed in Class 106
    unless a therapeutic or biocidal property is claimed.  Surgical sponges
    claimed only as being made from Class 106 if the sponge contains no active
    ingredient with a utility for Class 424.  Patents claiming an ink suitable
    for coating or printing or pharmaceutical dosage units; e.g., tablets,
    etc., are placed in Class 106 unless the coated or printed article is also
    claimed.

            Class 424 provides for the following coating compositions:
    Compositions intended to decorate or beautify the body; e.g., hair lacquer,
    fingernail polish, lipstick, etc.; coating compositions which do not
    protect the base by forming a tough, adherent film and whose sole function
    is as a carrier for a composition of Class 424 utility; e.g., "stickers"
    which adhere insecticides to plants, etc., whether or not claimed in
    combination with an active ingredient; coating compositions applied to the
    body for therapeutic purposes even though a tough, adherent film is formed;
    and coating compositions which do not form tough, adherent films and which
    have a utility provided for in Class 424; e.g., salve, skin cream or a
    solution of a material, for example, a mixture of phenols to protect wood
    against insects, etc.

    504,    Plant Protecting and Regulating Compositions, provides for
    compositions having a stimulating, inhibiting (Herbicides), or regulating
    action on plant growth and methods of using such compositions.  Class 504
    specifically provides for algicidal compositions in subclasses 150+ and
    nutrient compositions which contain an insecticide, fungicide, or deodorant
    in subclasses 101+.  Class 504 is superior to Class 424.  If claims are
    drawn to a "pesticide" composition or method without specifically reciting
    the nature of the "pest" to be controlled or eradicated, the patent is
    placed as an original in Class 424 when only a Class 424 type of "pest"
    (e.g., fungi, insect, rodent, etc.) is revealed in the patent disclosure.
    However, if both Class 504 and Class 424 types of "pest" are specifically
    disclosed or if no disclosure is made as to the specific type of pest, the
    patent is placed in Class 504 as an original and cross-referenced to Class
    424.

    D24,    Medical and Laboratory Equipment, subclasses 100-104 for design
    patents for pharmaceutical products.


CLS 424/401
TXT Cosmetic, antiperspirant, dentifrice:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 in which the composition is a cosmetic,
    antiperspirant or dentifrice.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for a topical live body growing an adorning aid in aerosol form.

    49,     for dentifrices.

    59,     for sun tan or sun block preparations.

    61      through 76, for various body treatment compositions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing:  Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclassees 94.16+ for depilating compositions,
    subclass 127.51 for compositions for chemically modifying human hair not a
    living body, subclasses 160 and 161 for compositions for depilating a
    living animal and subclasses 405+ for compositions for dyeing hair on a
    living animal.

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, appropriate subclasses for fuel
    containing an additive to protect it against decay or biological attack.
    Particularly note subclasses 300+ for the combination of a mineral oil
    containing a nonmineral oil preservative disclosed for use as fuel or any
    light mineral oil.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 13+ for processes of shaving the living body,
    particularly subclasses 14+ wherein a Class 424 shaving preparation is used
    in preparatory treatment of the hair before shaving.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, provides for coating
    compositions which protect a base by forming a tough, adherent film even
    though the composition also contains a biocide to protect the base against
    biological attack; e.g., marine antifouling paints, etc.

            Materials or ingredients for coating and molding compositions
    (Class 106 appropriate subclasses) which are also useful as diluents or
    inert ingredients in pharmaceutical compositions are placed in Class 106
    unless a therapeutic or biocidal property is claimed.  Surgical sponges
    claimed only as being made from Class 106 Compositions, are placed in Class
    106, if the sponge contains no active ingredient with a utility for Class
    424.  Patents claiming an ink suitable for coating or printing on
    pharmaceutical dosage units; e.g., tablets, etc., are placed in Class 106
    unless the coated or printed article is also claimed.

            Class 424 provides for the following coating compositions:
    compositions intended to decorate or beautify the body; e.g., hair lacquer,
    fingernail polish, lipstick, etc.; coating compositions which do not
    protect the base by forming a tough, adherent film and whose sole function
    is as a carrier for a composition of Classs 424 utility; e.g., "stickers"
    which adhere insecticides to plants, etc., whether or claimed in
    combination with an act, ingredient; coating compositions applied to the
    body for therapeutic purposes even though a tough, adherent film is formed;
    and coating compositons which do not form tough, adherent films and which
    have a utility provided for in Class 424; e.g., salve, skin cream or a
    solution of a material, for example, a mixture of phenols to protect wood
    against insects, etc.



    132,    Toilet, subclasses 202+ for a process of treating hair on the scalp
    which is more than the mere application of a Class 424 composition and for
    miscellaneous apparatus for grooming or enhancing the appearance of the
    human body; e.g., combs, manicuring, toothpicks, dental floss, etc.


CLS 424/402
TXT Apparel, fabric, cloth:

    Subject matter under subclass 401 in which wearing apparel, fabric or cloth
    is coated or impregnated with a biocidal or pharmaceutical composition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, appropriate subclasses for garment structures containing a
    Class 424 composition, particularly subclass 4 for insect repelling head
    guards and subclass 171.2 for head coverings containing a medicament.

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, appropriate subclasses for boots, etc.,
    or parts thereof which contain a Class 424 composition.

    168,    Farriery, subclass 2 for medicating overshoes and subclass 26 for
    medicating sole pads used in treating the hooves of horses or cattle.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 86 for insect repelling garment hangers.

    604,    Surgery, subclass 292 for a glove for applying a body treating
    material and subclasses 358+ for clothing such as diapers and the extensive
    listing in Note 4 of other subclasses providing for similar subject matter.

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, for the subject matter of the class title.


CLS 424/403
TXT Insect repellent or mothproofed:

    Subject matter under subclass 402 in which the apparel fabric or cloth is
    claimed or disclosed as having insect repelling or insect killing
    properties.


CLS 424/404
TXT Antifungial or antibacterial:

    Subject matter under subclass 402 in which the apparel, fabric or cloth is
    claimed or disclosed as having antifungial or antibacterial properties.


CLS 424/405
TXT Biocides; animal or insect repellents or attractants (e.g., disinfectants,
    pesticides, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 400 in which the composition having a special
    physical form is claimed or disclosed as biocidal or repellent or
    attractant to animals or insects.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter included in this and the indented
    subclasses includes pesticides and disinfectants claimed broadly.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is not intended to provide for a
    pharmaceutical directed against a single group of pathogens but is intended
    to provide for a composition that is generally biocidal to all organisms in
    a given local area.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing:  Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 94.16+ for depilating compositions,
    subclass 127.51 for compositions for chemically modifying human hair not on
    a living body, subclasses 160 and 161 for compositions for depilating a
    living animal and subclasses 405+ for compositions for dyeing hair on a
    living animal.

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, appropriate subclasses for fuel
    containing an additive to protect it against decay or biological attack.
    Particularly not subclasses 300+ for the combination of a mineral oil
    containing a nonmineral oil preservative disclosed for use as fuel or any
    light mineral oil.

    71,     Chemistry:  Fertilizers, provides for compositions having a
    nutrient action on plant growth and methods of using such compositions.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, for apparatus for
    trapping or destroying vermin, i.e., animals injurious or pestiferous to
    man.  The apparatus may utilize a composition classifiable in Class 424;
    e.g., attractant, nonfood bait, poison, etc.  Class 43 structural elements
    containing a Class 424 composition must have more structure than, for
    example, that represented by a mere coated or impregnated base; e.g.,
    flypaper of a particular shape or dimension, etc.  Class 43 also provides
    for fumigating candles used for destroying vermin claimed in terms of more
    structure that a compound or composition containing a nominal wick.

            Class 43 provides for a process of trapping or destroying vermin
    which is more that the mere application of a compound or Class 424
    composition.

            Class 424 takes methods of destroying vermin which are no more than
    a single step of mere application of a compound of a Class 424 composition.

            Class 424 takes articles for trapping or destroying vermin claimed
    in terms of no more structure that a coating or impregnant on a base.
    Class 424 also takes fumigating candles of no more structure than compound
    or composition nominally containing a wick.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, appropriate subclasses for apparatus provided for
    therein which may apply a Class 424 composition; e.g., insecticide, etc.,
    to plants.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, for coating compositions which
    protect a base by forming a tough adherent film even though the composition
    also contains a biocide to protect the base against biologgical attack;
    e.g., marine antifouling paints, etc.

            Materials or ingredients for coating and molding composition (Class
    106 appropriate subclasses) which are also useful as diluents or inert
    ingredients in pharmaceutical compositions are placed in Class 106 unless a
    therapeutic or biocidal property is claimed.  Surgical sponges claimed only
    as being made from Class 106 compositions are placed in Class 106 if the
    sponge contains no active ingredient with a utility for Class 424.  Patents
    claiming an ink suitable for coating or printing on pharmaceutical dosage
    units; e.g., tablets, etc., are placed in Class 106 unless the coated or
    printed article is also claimed.  Class 424 provides for the following
    coating compositions:  compositions intended to decorate or beautify the
    body; e.g., hair lacquer, fingernail polish, lipstick, etc.; coating
    compositions which do not protect the base by forming a tough, adherent
    film and whose sole function is as a carrier for a composition of Class 424
    utility; e.g., "stickers" which adhere insecticides to plants, etc.,
    whether or claimed in combination with an act ingredient; coating
    compositons applied to the body for therapeutic purposes even though a
    tough, adherent film is formed; and coating compositions which do not form
    tough, adherent film is formed; and coating compositions which do not form
    tough, adherent films and which have a utility provided for in Class 424;
    e.g., salve, skin cream or a solution of a material, for example, a mixture
    of phenols to protect wood against insect, etc.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, appropriate subclasses for a process of treatment
    of domestic animals with a Class 424 composition which does not involve
    cutting the skin and which is more than the mere application of the
    composition to the animal.  See subclasses 156+ for methods of topically
    applying a composition to an animal to heal sores, kill parasites repel
    insect, etc., particularly subclass 160 for fumigating.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclass 161 for a process of
    paper making wherein a biocide is added during the process.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 68.1+ for
    electrical conductor structures containing a biocide or repellent (e.g., to
    repel rats, etc.).

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 1 and 2 for
    biocidal mineral oil products and mixture thereof.  Subclasses 4+ and
    mineral oil products preserved against biological attack by a mineral oil
    additive.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 9+ for a lubricant composition protected
    against biological attack.  Subclasses 9+ provides for a mineral oil
    containing a nonmineral oil preservative when the compositon is disclosed
    to be useful as a lubricant and for preserved mineral oil fractions,
    heavier than mapthas,   gasolines and kerosene which are not disclosed to
    be lubricants but are disclosed to have several, nonlimiting utilities.

            Subclasses 106+ for detergent cleaning compositions containing a
    biocide, insecticide or antiseptic.  These  compositions may be disclosed
    or claimed as useful in cleaning a living body; e.g., shampoo, etc.

            Subclasses 299.01+ for liquid crystal containing optical filter
    compositions.

            Subclasses 380+ for preservative compositions broadly not elsewhere
    provided for and for a preservative mixed with a compound claimed so
    broadly as not to afford a basis of classification; e.g., "a carbon
    compound", etc.

            Subclasses 365+ for antiingestible or denatured compositions.

            Subclass 8.6 for perfume compositions, per se.

            Subclasses 582,+ for other optical filter compositions.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, appropriate subclasses for an
    organic compound which is disclosed or claimed as having a Class 424
    utility, also for an organic compound with an additive to protect the
    compound against deterioration or biological attack.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses for
    inorganic compounds and nonmetallic elements which may have a Class 424
    utility.  Class 423 provides inorganic compounds which include an additive,
    see especially subclass 265.

            Class 423 provides for compositions containing an element or an
    inorganic compound combined with a preservative; e.g., a substance which
    protect the element or compound against biological attack, etc.  However, a
    Class 423 element or compound containing a preservative in which state it
    is claimed or solely disclosed as having a Class 424 utility, is placed as
    an original in Class 424.

    504,    Plant Protecting and Regulating Compositions, provides for
    compositions having a stimulating, inhibiting (Herbicides), or regulating
    action on plant growth and methods of using such compositions.  Class 504
    specifically provides for algicidal compositions in subclasses 150+ and
    nutrient compositions which contain an insecticide, fungicide, or deodorant
    in subclasses 101+.  Class 504 is superior  to Class 424.  If claims are
    drawn to a "pesticide" composition or method without specifically reciting
    the nature of the "pest" to be controlled or eradicated, the patent is
    placed as an original in Class 424 when only a Class 424 type of "pest"
    (e.g., fungi, insect, rodent, etc.) is revealed in the patent disclosure.
    However, if both Class 504 and Class 424 types of "pest" are specifically
    disclosed or if no disclosure is made as to the specific type of pest, the
    patent is placed in Class 504 as an original and cross referenced to Class
    424.  Class 504, subclass 100, also provides for seeds coated with Class
    424 biocidal compositions.


CLS 424/406
TXT Ingredients for reducing the noxious effect of the active substances to
    organisms other than pest (e.g., toxicity reducing compositions,
    selfdestructing compositions, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 405 in which the composition includes a
    component for reducing the toxic effects of the composition on insects,
    animals or plants that are not the target of the biocidal composition.


CLS 424/407
TXT Containing material to enhance the sticking of the active ingredients:

    Subject matter under subclass 405 in which the composition contains a
    component which enhances the ability of the composition to stick to the
    surface to which it is applied.


CLS 424/408
TXT Capsule or pelleted or tablet:

    Subject matter under subclass 405 in which the biocide, repellent or
    attactant is in a capsule or is pelleted or tableted.


CLS 424/409
TXT Solid as carrier or diluent:

    Subject matter under subclass 405 in which the composition is coated on or
    impregnated in a solid self sustaining nominally claimed article.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclass are intended to provide for
    articles by name only when coated by a biocidal or insect or animal
    attractant or repellent composition.

    (2)     Note.  If an article claim has structure claimed the article will
    usually be provided for in an article class rather than in this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    provides for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural
    layer web or sheet as provided for therein and which contains a biocide.

            An article impregnated with a biocide and not containing structure
    (e.g., size or apertures) and not elsewhere provided (e.g., Class 428,
    subclass 540) will be classified in Class 424.

            Class 424 provides for a claim to a base coated with a compound or
    composition which has a Class 424 utility and in which the base function as
    a carrier for the active material (e.g., medicated applicator or mosquito
    repellent fabric).  Class 424 also provides for a claim to a coated dosage
    unit containing a substance having a Class 424 utility.

            Class 428 provides for a claim to a coated or impregnated article,
    not otherwise provided for which comprises a base preserved by a
    composition or compound which has a Class 424 utility (e.g., mothproofed
    textile or termite proofed wood).


CLS 424/410
TXT Impregnated or coated food or edible simulative of food (e.g., bait,
    poison, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 409 in which the composition is an
    impregnated food or edible, a coated food or edible or a material made to
    simulate an edible or food.

            Class 424 provides for compositions intended to nourish an animal
    when such compositions are designed to be administered to the animal by
    routes other than the oral cavity; e.g., by rectal or parenteral injection,
    or via a tube through the alimentary tract or stomach wall.

            Class 424 provides for a compositions containing a food or beverage
    when said compositions are claimed solely disclosed as having a utility set
    forth in the Class Definition above.  However, a  food or beverage
    containing a biocide as a preservative therefore will be classified as
    original in Class 426.  Class 424 also provides for methods of preserving
    Class 426 products when said methods are no more than the mere use of
    biocides.

            Class 424 further provides for food or beverage compositions
    containing an animal growth regulator or other anabolic agents.  For
    purposes of  classification an animal growth regulator or anabolic agent is
    defined to include the following illustrative causative effects:



    a.      increase feed efficiency or weight gain.

    b.      enhance color of egg yolks, combs, skin or legs of chickens.

    c.              enhance the hatchability of eggs.

    d.      vary the fat-protein ratio or texture of flesh.

    e.      chemically caponize an animal, etc.

    426,    Foods or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    provides for compositions intended to nourish an animal by natural oral
    ingestion, which may contain an additive necessary to maintain the normal
    metabolism of the animal; e.g., vitamins, minerals, amino acids, etc.


CLS 424/411
TXT Impregnated or coated nominal articles (e.g., flea collars, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 409 in which the impregnated or coated
    material is an article by name only.

    (1)     Note.  The subclass is intended to provide for articles such as
    flea collars claimed as no more than coated or impregnated with an
    insecticide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 212 for a comprehensive listing of
    classes providing for coated and impregnated articles or materials.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 907 (a
    cross-reference art collection) for a product treated against attack by
    plant or animal life.


CLS 424/412
TXT Packaging, cordage building material or container:

    Subject matter under subclass 411 in which a product is impregnated or
    coated with a biocide or repellent which renders the surface of same toxic
    or repellent to a living organism and which are disclosed as being useful
    as a wrapping, packaging, lining or building material or a container.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are such products as an impregnated twine,
    bale band, wall paper, wall board, etc.

    (2)     Note.  The containers included herein are paper bags and tubes and
    the like.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 129+ for a burial
    vault with means to treat the corpse or product thereof with a Class 424
    composition.  Subclass 517 for structurally defined static structures;
    e.g., buildings, utility poles, etc., which a coating to repel biological
    attack.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 217, 221,
    223, 232, 232+, and 258 strands, having structural limitations, coated with
    a biocide.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, provides for a dosage unit made up
    of a therapeutic material or article and a container, where the container
    is intended to be physically removed from the therapeutic material or
    article; e.g., a wrapper pill or capsule, etc.  Class 424, Drug,
    Bio-Affecting a Body Treating Compositions, takes a structured dosage unit
    which is intended to be used as a whole without disassembling or removal of
    a part; e.g., unwrapping.  Examples of dosage units provided for in Class
    424 are a capsule filled with coated particulate material intended to be
    swallowed whole, and a filled soluble, gelatin container intended to be
    dissolved in toto in water or other liquid.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 87.1+ for a disinfecting device to be
    attached to the receptacles of that class.


CLS 424/413
TXT Cellulosic material or building material:

    Subject, matter under subclass 412 in which the material impregnated is
    cellulose or contains cellulose or is claimed or disclosed as a building
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    461,    for a sustained or differential release capsule containing discrete
    particles coated which cellulose or a cellulose derivative.

    480,    for a tablet coated which cellulose or a cellulose derivative.

    494,    for a cellulose or cellulose derivative coated particle.

    499,    for cellulose or cellulose derivative impregnated particles.


CLS 424/414
TXT Impregnated or coated paper or foil:

    Subject matter under subclass 409 in which the solid carrier is paper or a
    foil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    419,    for a biocidal particle coated with a synthetic resin.

    443,    for a synthetic resin web sheet or filament base, bandage or
    dressing with an incorporated medicament.

    462,    for a sustained or differential release capsule containing discrete
    particles coated with a synthetic resin.

    482,    for a tablet coated with a solid synthetic resin.

    497,    for a synthetic resin coated particle.

    501,    for a synthetic resin impregnated particle.


CLS 424/415
TXT Wrapping paper:

    Subject matter under subclass 414 in which the paper or foil is disclosed
    as intended to be used for wrapping.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for fruit wrappers and the like.


CLS 424/416
TXT Insecticidal paper or foil:

    Subject matter under subclass 414 in which the paper or foil is coated or
    impregnated with an insecticide.


CLS 424/417
TXT Coated particulate form (e.g., liposome, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 409 in which the composition is in the form
    of a coated or impregnated particle.

    (1)     Note.  Subclasses 418-420 provide for coated particles in which
    either the coating or the core is of the denominated compound.  Subclass
    421 provides for particles having inorganic cores.


CLS 424/418
TXT Protein or derivative or polysaccharide or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 417 in which the coating or core of the
    particles is a protein or derivative or a polysaccharide or derivative.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    440,    for candy, candy coated pharmaceuticals or chewing gum.

    456,    for a gelatin capsule.

    460,    for a sustained or differential release capsule containing discrete
    particles coated with a protein.

    461+    for a sustained or differential release capsule containing discrete
    particles coated with saccharide.

    477+    for a protein coated tablet.

    478,    for a gelatin coated tablet.

    479,    for a saccharide coated tablet.

    491,    for protein coated particles.

    492,    for gelatin coated particles.

    493,    for saccharide coated particles.

    499,    for protein or saccharide impregnated particles.


CLS 424/419
TXT Natural or synthetic resin:

    Subject matter under subclass 417 in which the coating or core is a natural
    or synthetic resin.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    414,    for a synthetic resin foil coated or impregnated with a biocide.

    443,    for a synthetic resin web sheet or filament base, bandage or
    dressing with an incorporated medicament.

    462,    for a sustained or differential release capsule containing discrete
    particles coated with a synthetic resin.

    482,    for a tablet coated with a solid synthetic resin.

    497,    for a synthetic resin coated particle.

    501,    for a synthetic resin impregnated particle.


CLS 424/420
TXT Waxes, fatty acids, etc. (e.g., liposome, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 417 in which the coating or core of the
    particles is a wax, fatty acid or ester type wax.

    (1)     Note.  Liposomes are provided for here.


CLS 424/421
TXT Inorganic particle:

    Subject matter under subclass 417 which the core of the particles is
    inorganic.


CLS 424/422
TXT Implant or insert:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 in which the composition is in a special
    physical form to adapt for implanting or inserting in the living body
    wherein the composition releases an active pharmaceutical ingredient in a
    sustained or differential manner.

    (1)     Note.  Where a patent claims dosage units (in the absence of more
    comprehensive or controlling claims); e.g., a tablet comprising (or
    containing) 15 grains of compound X", and in the absence of any structural
    limitations, definite shape, surface deformation, etc., the original has
    been placed with the compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    449,    for a transdermal or percutaneous bandage for sustained release of
    a drug.

    457,    for a sustained or differential release composition is a capsule.

    468,    for a sustained or differential release tablet.


CLS 424/423
TXT Surgical implant or material:

    Subject matter under subclass 422 in which the composition is claimed or
    disclosed as surgically implantable.


CLS 424/424
TXT Membrane or diffusion barrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 423 in which the sustained or differential
    release of active pharmaceutical takes place through a membrane or
    diffusion barrier.


CLS 424/425
TXT Diffusion barrier is matrix:

    Subject matter under subclass 424 in which the diffusion barrier is a
    matrix.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    469+,   for matrix containing tablets.

    484+,   for orally ingestable matrixes.


CLS 424/426
TXT Errodable, resorbable, or dissolving:

    Subject matter under subclass 423 in which the surgical implant or material
    is errodable, resorbable, or dissolving.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    428,    for an errodable, resorbable, or dissolving ocular depot or matrix.

    444,    for a web sheet or filament base or bandage that is resorbable by
    the body.


CLS 424/427
TXT Ocular:

    Subject matter under subclass 422 in which special physical form  is
    intended and adapted for placement between the surface of the eye the
    conjunctiva or between the surface of the eye and a lacrimal gland.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains therapeutic devices which are
    inserted into the opening of a lacrimal gland for the purpose of using the
    tears secreted by said gland to dispense the therapeutic material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    604,    Surgery, subclass 290 for a method of applying a body treating
    material or removing material from the body surface.  Subclasses 294+ for
    methods of application to the eye or eye socket.


CLS 424/428
TXT Bioerrodable, resorbable, or dissolving:
    Subject matter under subclass 427 in which the inserted is errobable,
    resorbable, or dissolving.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    426,    for an errodable, resobable, or dissolving depot or matrix.

    444,    for a web sheet or filament base or bandage that is resorbable by
    the body.


CLS 424/429
TXT Contact lens:

    Subject matter under subclass 427 in which the special physical form is a
    coated or impregnated lens designed to cover the cornea of the eye.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclass 507 for the process of dyeing a contact lens
    or product thereof.

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, appropriate
    subclasses for methods of and instruments for fitting contact lenses and
    for structural features and adaptations for contact lenses, such as
    coloring a portion of the lens to adsorb part of the visible spectrum;
    subclasses 160+ for eye contact lens.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 1-43 for generic processes of
    deodorizing, preserving, or sterilizing contact lenses or compositions
    thereof.

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 112+ for
    compositions used for the mere cleaning of contact lenses.

    514,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses for (1) a contact lens composition which contains a nonbioactive
    polymer admixed with a medicament or (2) composition with or without a
    nonbioactive polymer used to sterilize a contact lens composition to reduce
    or eliminate any eye injury.

    523,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 106 for a composition
    containing an inactive solid synthetic polymer intended for manufacturing
    contact lenses.This subclass also provides for a contact lens composition
    containing its own preserving agent when it is clearly specified and
    restricted for that use.

    604,    Surgery, subclass 290 for a method of applying a body treating or
    removing material or subclasses 294+ for a method of application to the eye
    or eye socket.


CLS 424/430
TXT Vaginal, urethral, uterine:

    Subject matter under subclass 422 in which the composition is in a special
    physical form intended to be inserted in the female reproductive tract or
    the urethra.


CLS 424/431
TXT Tampon:

    Subject matter under subclass 430 in which the special physical form is
    coated or impregnated tampon.


CLS 424/432
TXT IUD or ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 430 in which the special physical form is a
    structured article intended for insertion in the uterus.


CLS 424/433
TXT Depot, pellet, matrix, or suppository:

    Subject matter under subclass 430 in which the special physical form is a
    coated or impregnated depot, pellet, matrix or suppository.


CLS 424/434
TXT Mucosal (e.g., nasal, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 422 in which the special physical form is
    intended and adapted for application to a mucous membrane.


CLS 424/435
TXT Mouth:

    Subject matter under subclass 434 in which mucosal surface is in the mouth.


CLS 424/436
TXT Anal, rectal (e.g., suppositories, etc.):

    Subject matter under 5 subclass 434 in which the mucosal surface is in the
    anus or rectum.


CLS 424/437
TXT Otic:

    Subject matter under subclass 422 in which the special physical form is
    intended and adapted for placement in the ear canal.


CLS 424/438
TXT Specially adapted for ruminant animal:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 in which the special physical form is a
    coated or impregnated product that is claimed or disclosed as useful in the
    treatment of ruminant animals.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for tablets, capsules, etc., that are
    typically adapted to be retained in part of the ruminant animals digestive
    system in the rumino-reticular sac.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    442,    for animal food as a carrier for a pharmaceutical.


CLS 424/439
TXT Food or edible as carrier for pharmaceutical:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 in which the special physical form is a
    coated or impregnated food or edible which serves as a means of
    administering a pharmaceutical.

    (1)     Note.  Disposition of Foods:
    Class 426, Foods or Edible Material:
    Processes, Compositions, and Products, provides for compositions intended
    to nourish an animal by natural oral ingestion, which an contain an
    additive necessary to maintain the normal metabolism of the animal; e.g.,
    vitamins, minerals, amino acids, etc.

            Class 424 provides for compositions intended to nourish an animal
    when such compositions are designed to be administered to the animal by
    routes other than the oral cavity; e.g., by rectal or parenteral injection,
    or via a tube through the alimentary tract or stomach wall.  However, a
    food or beverage containing a biocide as a preservative therefore will be
    classified as original in Class 426.  Class 424 also provides for methods
    of preserving Class 426 products when said methods are no more than the
    mere use of biocides.

            Class 424 further provides for food or beverage compositions
    containing an animal growth regulator or other anabolic agents.  For
    purposes of classification an animal growth regulator or anabolic agent is
    defined to include the following illustrative causative effects:



    a.      increase feed efficiency or weight gain.

    b.      enhance color or egg yolks, combs, skin or legs of chickens.

    c.              enhance the hatchability of eggs.

    d.      vary the fat-protein ratio or texture of flesh.

    e.      chemically caponize an animal, etc.


CLS 424/440
TXT Candy, candy coated or chewing gum:

    Subject matter under subclass 439 in which the coated or impregnated food
    or edible is candy, candy coated or is chewing gum.

    (1)     Note.  This sublcass includes compositions under the class
    definition which are specifically disclosed to be in a chewing gum form,
    that is containing a chewable ingredient generally insoluble in the saliva
    which is usually disclosed to function as the carrier or vehicle for the
    active ingredient.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    418,    for a saccharide coated biocidal particle.

    459,    for a sustained or differential release capsule containing discrete
    particles coated with a natural gum or resin.

    461,    for a sustained or differential release capsule containing discrete
    particles coated with a saccharide.

    479,    for a saccharide coated tablet.

    481,    for a tablet coated with a natural gum or resin.

    493,    for saccharide coated particles.

    496,    for a natural gum or resin coated particle.

    499,    for saccharide impregnated particles.

    500,    for natural gum or resin impregnated particles.


CLS 424/441
TXT Chewable tablet or wafer:

    Subject matter under subclass 439 in which the coated or impregnated food
    or edible is in the form of a chewable tablet or wafer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    464,    for tablets intended to be swallowed.


CLS 424/442
TXT Animal food:

    Subject matter under subclass 439 in which the coated or impregnated food
    or edible is intended to be consumed by a nonhuman animal.


CLS 424/443
TXT Web, sheet or filament bases; compositions of bandages; or dressings with
    incorporated medicaments:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 in which the special physical form
    contains a coated, impregnated of two layer web, sheet, a filament or is a
    coated or impregnated bandage or dressing.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for physical forms wherein the coated
    or impregnated base or substrate is of a length or width which is
    proportionately larger than the thickness thereof; e.g., woven textile
    material, felted self sustaining mat, film, continuous or indeterminate
    length filament, synthetic resin film, leather, etc.  Fibers nominally
    recited are excluded from this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  A web sheet or filament base coated with a compound or
    composition merely to preserve the base against biological attack is
    excluded from this and indented subclasses (see SEARCH CLASS below).

    (3)     Note.  This and indented subclasses provide only for articles
    having a maximum of two layers and lacking sufficient structure to be
    placed in other classes based on structure (see SEARCH CLASS below).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    414+,   for a synthetic resin foil coated or impregnated with a biocide.

    419,    for a biocidal particle coated with a synthetic resin.

    462,    for a sustained or differential release capsule containing discrete
    particles coated with a synthetic resin.

    482,    for a table coated with a solid synthetic resin.

    497,    for a synthetic resin coated particle.

    501,    for a synthetic resin impregnated particle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclasses 23+ for a plant guard containing a
    biocide and subclass 56 for a seed tape containing a biocide, and subclass
    56 for a seed tape containing a biocide, claimed in terms of particular
    structure or shape, or claimed in combination with plants or seeds.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, especially subclasses
    200 and 241 for a yarn, cord or cable which is coated or impregnated with a
    compound composition to protect the yarn, cord or cable against biological
    attack.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclass 161 for a process of
    making paper wherein a biocide is used in the process and the resulting
    product containing a biocide wherein the biocide protects the product from
    biological attack.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet of the type therein provided, and for which there is no other
    provision and which is coated or impregnated with a compound or composition
    to protect the article against biological attack, see subclass 607 (a
    cross-reference art collection) for a product which has been treated to be
    resistant against plant or nasal attack.



    An article impregnated with a biocide and not containing structure (e.g.,
    size or apertures) and not elsewhere provided (e.g., Class 428, sublcasses
    540+) will be classified in Class 424.



    Class 428 provides for a claim to a coated or impregnated article, not
    otherwise provided for, which comprises a base preserved by a composition
    or compound which has a Class 424 utility, (e.g., mothproofed textile or
    termite proofed wood).



    Class 424 provides for a claim to a base coated with a compound or
    composition which has a Class 424 utility and in which the base function as
    a carrier for the active material (e.g., medicated applicator or mosquito
    repellent fabric).  Class 424 also provides for a claim to a coated dosage
    unit containing a substance having a Class 424 utility.



    Class 128, provides for bandages, body-applicators or body dressing which
    contain a medicine and are claimed in terms of more structure than a
    randomly distributed single layer on a base material or randomly
    impregnated base material.



    For example, Class 128 takes a base material wherein certain portions
    thereof are impregnated with an adhesive and other portions are impregnated
    with a Class 424 medicine at those places where there is no adhesive
    backing on a gauze impregnated with a Class 424 composition, etc.  Class
    128 also provides for a bandage, body applicator or body dressing
    containing a Class 424 composition and which is claimed in terms of
    specific structure; e.g., pore size, thickness, length, width, etc.



    Class 424 takes bandages, body applicator or body dressing which contains a
    specific or nominally recited medicinal ingredient which is either randomly
    distributed in a singly layer on a base material or randomly impregnated in
    a base material.


CLS 424/444
TXT Resorbable by the body:

    Subject matter under subclass 443 in which at least part of the dressing or
    bandage is resorbable by the body.


CLS 424/445
TXT Dressings:

    Subject matter under subclass 443 in which the web or filament base is
    intended to be used to cover an open wound but is without means to hold the
    base in place over the wound.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass consists primarily of older patents to
    materials used to cover wounds.


CLS 424/446
TXT Medicated gauze pads:

    Subject matter under subclass 445 in which the dressing is a gauze pad
    coated or impregnated with a drug.


CLS 424/447
TXT Bandages with incorporated medicaments:

    Subject matter under subclass 443 in which the bandage or dressing is
    coated or impregnated with a pharmaceutical material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for treating abnormal
    conditions of the human body.  Class 128, also provides for medicated
    applicators; e.g., bandages, etc., claimed in terms of more structure than
    a coating or a base.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 304-308 for subject matter of that class
    including a bandage pad or shield placed on the body for sustained
    treatment thereof.


CLS 424/448
TXT Pressure sensitive adhesive means:

    Subject matter under subclass 447 in which the bandage has a pressure
    sensitive adhesive as one layer on all or part of the bandage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    604,    Surgery, subclass 307 for subject matter of that class wherein the
    bandage pad or shield is adhesively secured to the body.  Subclasses 386,
    389 and 390 for adhesive sued to attach an absorbent pad during use.


CLS 424/449
TXT Transdermal or percutaneous:

    Subject matter under subclass 447 in which the bandage of dressing is
    designed to permit passage of a medicament through the skin of a living
    body by absorption through the skin without preliminary puncture or
    abrasion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    422+    for an implant or insert for sustained releases of a drug.

    457,    for a sustained or differential release composition in a capsule.

    468,    for a sustained or differential release capsule.


CLS 424/450
TXT Liposomes:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 in which the special physical form is a
    pharmaceutical substance contained in a lipid bilayer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclass 829 for
    an art collection of liposomes containing immunological materials.


CLS 424/451
TXT Capsules (e.g., of gelatin, of chocolate, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 400 in which the special physical form
    includes a capsule.

    (1)     Note.  A capsule is a preformed hard or soft, soluble container or
    shell which is filled with a pharmaceutical in particulate or liquid form.

    (2)     Note.  Where a patent claims dosage units (in the absence of more
    comprehensive or controlling claims as indicated below) e.g., "a tablet
    comprising (or containing) 15 grains of compound X", and in the absence of
    any structural limitations, definite shape, surface deformation, etc., the
    original has been place with the compound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, appropriate subclasses for a capsule or pill, not
    specifically provided for elsewhere, that must be broken prior to use to
    empty its contents, even if said capsule or pill contains a specific
    medicine.  This includes an inhalant capsule.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses take a medicine in the form of a capsule or pill that is
    ingested, as well as a method of using an inhalant capsule by squeezing
    said capsule to liberate the enclosed medicine.



            Class 128, provides for a dosage unit; e.g., suppository, etc.,
    shaped to fit a particular body cavity, even it the active ingredients are
    claimed specifically.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, appropriate subclasses provides for
    a dosage unit made up of a therapeutic material or article and a container,
    where the container is intended to be physically removed from the
    therapeutic material or article; e.g., a wrapped pill or capsule, etc.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses takes a structured dosage unit which is intended to be used as a
    whole without disassembly or removal of a part; e.g., unwrapping, etc.
    Examples of dosage units provided for in Class 424 are a capsule filled
    with coated particulate material intended to be swallowed whole, and a
    filled soluble, gelatin container intended to be dissolved in toto in water
    or other liquid.


CLS 424/452
TXT With claimed designated perfecting feature in contents (e.g., excipient,
    lubricant, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 451 in which there is claimed a feature which
    perfects the utility of the capsule which resides in the contents of the
    capsule.


CLS 424/453
TXT Telescoping two piece:

    Subject matter under subclass 451 in which the capsule consists of two
    sections, one slipping over the other, completely surrounding the drug
    formulation.


CLS 424/454
TXT With tamperproof, locking, or sealing feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 453 in which the telescoping two picece
    capsule has a feature indicating that the capsule has been opened after
    filling or a feature that prevents the capsule from being opened after
    filling without destruction of all or part of the capsule.


CLS 424/455
TXT Containing emulsions, dispersions, or solutions:

    Subject matter under subclass 451 in which the capsule contains an
    emulsion, dispersion or solution.


CLS 424/456
TXT Gelatin:

    Subject matter under subclass 451 in which the capsule is made of a gelatin
    containing composition.

    (1)     Note.  Typically sugar, water and sulfur dioxide are added to the
    gelatin of the capsule as an aid in manufacture, filling or as a
    preservative.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    418,    for a protein coated biocidal particle.

    460,    for a sustained or differential release capsule containing discrete
    particles coated with a protein.

    476,    for particles coated with gelatin.

    477+,   for a protein coated tablet.

    478,    for a pill or tablet coated with gelatin.

    491,    for protein coated particles.

    492,    for gelatin coated particles.

    499,    for particles impregnated with a protein.


CLS 424/457
TXT Sustained or differential release:

    Subject matter under subclass 451 in which the timing or spacing of
    administration or absorption of an active ingredient in a system, (e.g.,
    animal body) is regulated by the structure or physical arrangement of
    elements so that a single administration provides:

    (a)     a gradual but continuous feeding of the active ingredient to the
    system by slow release or (b) discontinuous feeding in two or more distinct
    stages.



    (1)     Note.  An enteric coated medicament, per se, is not considered to
    be within the scope of this or the indented subclasses.  Such a product,
    generally is a form, or with a coating designed to enable physical passage
    through or to resist the acid gastric juices for eventual dissolution or
    use through or in intestines, is classified elsewhere below, for example,
    on the basis of the particular disclosed enteric coating.  Patents placed
    in this subclass, however, may claim an enteric coating in addition to a
    sustained release or differential release mechanism as defined.

    (2)     Note.  An claimed composition which does not recite structure, but
    is disclosed to have a sustained release or differential release action, is
    classified elsewhere according to the nature of the ingredients therein,
    see, for example, subclass 78.01 which provides for the combination of an
    active ingredient bound to an ion exchange type synthetic resin or subclass
    48 in which active ingredients distributed homogeneously throughout a
    chewing gum base are released progressively therefrom by chewing and mixing
    with saliva.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    422+,   for an implant or insert for sustained release of a drug.

    449,    for a transdermal or percutaneous bandage for sustained release of
    a drug.

    468,    for a sustained or differential release tablet.


CLS 424/458
TXT Containing discrete coated particles, pellets, granules, or beads:

    Suject matter under subclass 457 in which the capsule contains discrete
    coated particles, pellets, granules or beads.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses are intended to provide for
    capsules filled with small fluent particles of relatively small size
    compared to the capsule.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass will provide for particles having an inorganic
    coating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    414+,   for a synthetic resin foil coated or impregnated with a biocide.

    419,    for a biocidal particle coated with a synthetic resin.

    443,    for a synthetic resin web sheet  filament base, bandage or dressing
    with an incorporated medicament.

    462,    for a sustained or differential release capsule containing discrete
    particles coated with a synthetic resin.

    482,    for a tablet coated with a solid synthetic resin.

    497,    for a synthetic resin coated particle.


CLS 424/459
TXT Organic coatings:

    Subject matter under subclass 458 in which the particles contained in the
    capsule are coated with an organic chemical containing material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass would provide for coatings containing natural
    gums or resins.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    440,    for a chewing gum containing a natural gum.

    481,    for a tablet coated with a natural gum or resin.

    496,    for a natural gum or resin coated particle.

    500,    for natural gum or resin impregnated particles.


CLS 424/460
TXT Containing proteins or derivatives thereof (e.g., gelatin, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 459 in which the particles contained in the
    capsule are coated with a protein or compositon containing a protein or a
    protein derivative.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    418,    for a protein coated biocidal particle.

    456,    for a gelatin capsule.

    477+,   for a protein coated tablet.

    478,    for a gelatin containing gelatin coated tablet.

    491,    for protein coated particles.

    492,    for gelatin coated particles.

    499,    for protein impregnated particles.


CLS 424/461
TXT Containing polysaccharide (e.g., cellulose sugars, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 459 in which the particles contained in the
    capsule are coated with a saccharide or a composition containing a
    saccharide.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for  cellulose and cellulose
    derivatives.

    SEARCH THE CLASS SUBCLASS:

    418,    for a saccharide coated biocidal particle.

    440,    for candy, candy coated pharmaceuticals or chewing gum.

    479,    for a saccharide coated tablet.

    493,    for saccharide coated particles.

    499,    for saccharide impregnated particles.


CLS 424/462
TXT Containing solid synthetic polymers:

    Subject matter under subclass 459 in which the particles contained in the
    capsule are coated with a solid synthetic resin.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    414,    for a synthetic resin foil coated or impregnated with a biocide.

    419,    for a biocidal particle coated with a synthetic resin.

    482,    for a tablet coated with a solid synthetic resin.

    493,    for a synthetic resin web sheet or filament base, bandage or
    dressing with an incorporated medicament.

    501,    for a synthetic resin impregnated particle.


CLS 424/463
TXT Coated capsules:

    Subject matter under subclass 451 in which the capsule is coated.


CLS 424/464
TXT Tablets, lozenges, or pills:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 in which the special physical form is a
    tablet, lozenge or pill.

    (1)     Note.  A tablet is made by compressing a drug and an inert binder
    such as starch  or lactose into a hard self sustaining mass.

            A pill is in obsolete dosage form made by rolling the drug and a
    binder into a sphere.

            A lozenge or troche is a flavored tablet intended to dissolve
    slowly when held in the mouth.

    (2)     Note.  In the indented subclasses tablet should be understood to
    include pills, lozenges or troches.

    (3)     Note.  Where a patent claims dosage units (in the absence of more
    comprehensive or controlling claims) e.g., "a tablet comprising (or
    containing) 15 grains of compound X", and in the absence of any structural
    limitations, definite shape, surface deformation, etc., the orignal has
    been placed with the compound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, appropriate subclasses provides for a capsule or pill, not
    specifically provided for elsewhere, that must be broken prior to use to
    empty its contents, even if said capsule or pill contains a specific
    medicine.  This includes an inhalant capsule.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses takes a medicine in the form of a capsule or pill that is
    ingested, as well as a method of using an inhalant capsule by squeezing
    said capsule to liberate the enclosed medicine.

            Class 128, provides for a dosage unit; e.g., suppository, etc.,
    shaped to fit a particular body cavity, even if the active ingredients are
    claimed specifically.



    208,    Mineral Oils: Processes and Products, appropriate subclasses
    provides for a dosage unit made up of a therapeutic material or article and
    a container, where the container, where the container is intended to be
    physically removed from the therapeutic material on article; e.g., a
    wrapped pill or capsule, etc.

            Class 424, takes a structured dosage unit which is intended to be
    used as a whole without disassembly or removal of a part; e.g., unwrapping.
     Examples of dosage units provided to in Class 424 are a capsule filled
    with coated particulate material intended to be swallowed whole, and a
    filled soluble, gelatin container intended to be dissolved in toto in water
    or other liquid.


CLS 424/465
TXT With claimed perfecting feature in contents (e.g., excipient, lubricant,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 464 in which there is claimed a feature which
    perfects the utility of the tablet, lozenge or pill which resides in the
    contents of the capsule


CLS 424/466
TXT Effervescent:

    Subject matter under subclass 464 in which a tablet is claimed or disclosed
    which is capable of producing bubbles or effervescence by a chemical
    reaction, a tablet or contains a pressurized fluid.

    (1)     Note.  Compositions which are disclosed as having volatile
    ingredient, per se, or which merely by being in particulate or liquid form
    may be sprayed or diffused by the simple application of externally applied
    air pressure or heat are classified elsewhere on the basis of the active
    component or components in said composition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43+,    for compositions which produce bubbles or effervescence or use a
    pressurized gas as a propellent.


CLS 424/467
TXT Printed, embossed, grooved, or perforated:

    Subject matter under subclass 464 in which the tablet is printed, embossed,
    grooved or perforated.

    (1)     Note.  Typically the tablets of this subclass have an indicia or
    are shaped to permit the tablet to be divided easily.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    D24,    Medical and Laboratory Equipment, subclasses 100-104 which provides
    for design patents for pharmaceutical products.


CLS 424/468
TXT Sustained or differential release type:

    Subject matter under subclass 464 in which the timing or spacing of
    administration or absorption of an active ingredient in a system (e.g.,
    animal body) is regulated by the structure or physical arrangement of
    elements so that a single administration provides:

    (a)     a gradual but continuous feeding of the active ingredient to the
    system by slow release or (b) discontinuous feeding in two or more distinct
    stages.



    (1)     Note.  An enteric coated medicament, per se, is not considered to
    be within the scope of this or the indented subclasses.  Such a product,
    generally is a form, or with a coating, designed to enable physical passage
    through or to resist the acid gastric juices for eventual dissolution or
    use through or in the intestines, is classified elsewhere below, for
    example, on the basis of the particular disclosed enteric coating.  Patents
    placed in this subclass, however, may claim an enteric coating.  Patents
    placed in this subclass, however, may claim an enteric coating in addition
    to a sustained release or differential release mechanism as defined.

    (2)     Note.  A claimed composition which does not recite structure, but
    is disclosed to have a sustained release or differential release action, is
    classified elsewhere according to the nature of the ingredients therein,
    see, for example, subclass 78.01 which provides for the combination of an
    active ingredient bound to an ion exchange type synthetic resin or subclass
    48 in which active ingredients distributed homogeneously throughout a
    chewing gum base are released progressiviely therefrom by chewing and
    mixing with saliva.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    422+,   for an implant or insert for sustained release of a drug.

    449,    for a transdermal or percutaneous bandage for sustained release of
    a drug.

    457,    for a sustained or differential release composition in a capsule.


CLS 424/469
TXT Discrete particles in supporting matrix:

    Subject matter under subclass 468 in which discrete soluble particles of
    the active ingredient are positioned or dispersed in a solid, generally
    insoluble matrix from which said particles are leached sequentially under
    conditions of use from the outside portions of the matrix inwardly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    458+,   for a capsule containing discrete coated particles.

    484+,   for a matrix containing a drug.

    489+,   for coated or impregnated particles carrying a drug.


CLS 424/470
TXT Where particles are granulated:

    Subject matter under subclass 469 in which the particles entrapped in the
    matrix are preformed granules.


CLS 424/471
TXT Plural concentric cores:

    Subject matter under subclass 468 which are composed of plural layers and
    the layers are plural concentric cores.


CLS 424/472
TXT Layered unitary dosage forms:

    Subject matter under subclass 468 in which the tablet contains at least one
    layer completely covering the core or is composed of multiple layers of
    differing release properties.


CLS 424/473
TXT With porous, perforated, apertured, or sieved layer (e.g., dialyzing layer,
    microporous layer, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 472 in which a sustained or differential
    release by means of a perforate or porous layer.


CLS 424/474
TXT Coated pills or tablets:

    Subject matter under subclass 464 in which the special physical form is a
    coated pill or tablet.


CLS 424/475
TXT Organic coatings:

    Subject matter under subclass 474 in which the coating is or contains an
    organic compound.


CLS 424/476
TXT Containing waxes, higher fatty acids, higher fatty alcohols, or derivatives
    thereof (e.g., chocolate):

    Subject matter under subclass 475 in which the coating is or contains a
    wax, higher fatty acid, higher fatty alcohol or derivatives thereof.


CLS 424/477
TXT Containing proteins or derivatives thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 475 in which the coating is or contains a
    protein or derivative thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    418,    for a protein coated biocidal particle.

    456,    for a gelatin capsule.

    460,    for a sustained or differential release capsule containing discrete
    particles coated with a protein.

    478,    for a gelatin coated tablet.

    491,    for protein coated particles.

    492,    for gelatin coated particles.

    499,    for protein impregnated particles.


CLS 424/478
TXT Gelatin containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 477 in which the protein is gelatin.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    418,    for a protein coated biocidal particle.

    456,    for a gelatin capsule.

    460,    for a sustained or differential release capsule containing discrete
    particles coated with a protein.

    477,    for a protein coated tablet.

    491,    for protein coated particles.

    492,    for gelatin coated particles.

    499,    for protein impregnated particles.


CLS 424/479
TXT Containing polysaccharide (e.g., sugar, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 475 in which the coating is or contains a
    polysaccharide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    418,    for a saccharide coated biocidal particle.

    440,    for candy, candy coated pharmaceuticals or chewing gum.

    461+,   for a sustained or differential release capsule containing discrete
    particles coated with a saccharide.

    493,    for saccharide coated particles.

    499,    for saccharide impregnated particles.


CLS 424/480
TXT Cellulose or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 479 in which the coating is cellulose of a
    derivative thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    413,    for cellulosic packaging or building material.

    461,    for a sustained or differential release capsule containing discrete
    particles coated with cellulose or a cellulose derivative.

    494,    for a cellulose or cellulose derivative coated particle.

    499,    for cellulose or cellulose derivative impregnated particles.


CLS 424/481
TXT Containing natural gums or resins:

    Subject matter under subclass 475 in which the coating is or contains a
    natural gum or resin.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    440,    for a chewing gum containing a natural gum.

    459,    for a sustained or differential release capsule containing discrete
    particles coated with a natural gum or resin.

    496,    for a natural gum or resin coated particle.

    500,    for natural gum or resin impregnated particles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for treating abnormal
    conditions of the human body.  Class 128 also provides for medicated
    applicators; e.g., bandages, etc., claimed in terms of more structure than
    a coating or a base.


CLS 424/482
TXT Containing solid synthetic polymers:

    Subject matter under subclass 475 in which the coating is or contains
    solid synthetic polymer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    414+,   for a synthetic resin foil coated or impregnated with a biocide.

    419,    for a biocidal particle coated with a synthetic resin.

    443,    for a synthetic resin web sheet or filament base, bandage or
    dressing with an incorporated medicament.

    462,    for a sustained or differential release capsule containing discrete
    particles coated with a synthetic resin.

    497,    for a synthetic resin coated particle.

    501,    for a synthetic resin impregnated particle.


CLS 424/483
TXT Ion-exchange resins:

    Subject matter under subclass 474 in which the material is an ion-exchange
    resin.


CLS 424/484
TXT Matrices:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 in which the special physical form
    includes a reticulated net work of material from which the drug is eluted
    or released by dissolution of the reticulated network physically holding
    the drug.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    469+,   for a tablet containing discrete particles in a supporting matrix.

    489+,   for coated or impregnated particles carrying a drug.


CLS 424/485
TXT Natural gums, resin or latex:

    Subject matter under subclass 484 in which the matrix is of a natural gum
    or resin or latex.


CLS 424/486
TXT Synthetic polymer:

    Subject matter under subclass 484 in which the matrix is of a solid
    synthetic polymer.


CLS 424/487
TXT Acrylic acid and derivatives:

    Subject matter under subclass 486 in which the solid synthetic polymer
    contains acrylic acid.


CLS 424/488
TXT Polysaccharides (e.g., cellulose, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 484 in which the matrix is of a
    polysaccharide.


CLS 424/489
TXT Particulate form (e.g., powders, granules, beads, microcapsules, and
    pellets):

    Subject matter under subclass 400 in which the special physical form is a
    coated or impregnated particle.

    (1)     Note.  Particle is intended to encompass any form which is solid
    but of sufficiently small size to behave in a fluid manner.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes any form denominated as powder,
    granule, bead, microcapsule or pellet.


CLS 424/490
TXT Coated (e.g., microcapsules):

    Subject matter under subclass 489 in which the particle is coated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 4.1-4.7 for processes of encapsulation of a material which is
    liquid involving the formation of microspheres.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 213.3+ for processes of forming a
    microcapsule or the processes of solid encapsulation utilizing an emulsion
    or dispersion to form a solid walled microcapsule.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 402 and indented
    subclasses 402.2+ for patents to coated or encapsulated products of general
    utility which recite a term; e.g., encapsulation, microencapsulation,
    sphere, microsphere, capsule microcapsule, etc., which give evidence for
    the product being a microcapsule.  Subclass 402 provides an extensive
    listing to other classes providing for coated or impregnated articles or
    materials.


CLS 424/491
TXT Containing proteins and derivatives:

    Subject matter under subclass 490 in which the particle is coated with a
    protein or derivative thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    418,    for a protein coated biocidal particle.

    456,    for a gelatin capsule.

    460,    for a sustained or differential release capsule containing discrete
    particles coated with a protein.

    477+,   for a protein coated tablet.

    478,    for a protein coated tablet.

    492,    for gelatin coated particles.

    499,    for protein impregnated particles.


CLS 424/492
TXT Gelatin:

    Subject matter under subclass 491 in which the protein is gelatin.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    418,    for a protein coated biocidal particle.

    456,    for a gelatin capsule.

    460,    for a sustained or differential release capsule containing discrete
    particles coated with a protein.

    477+,   for a protein coated tablet.

    478,    for a gelatin coated tablet.

    491,    for protein coated particles.

    499,    for protein impregnated particles.


CLS 424/493
TXT Containing polysaccharides (e.g., sugars):

    Subject matter under subclass 490 in which the particles are coated with a
    polysaccharide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    418,    for a saccharide coated diocidal particle.

    440,    for candy, candy coated pharmaceuticals or chewing gum.

    461,    for a sustained or differential release capsule containing discrete
    particles coated with a saccharide.

    479,    for a saccharide coated tablet.

    499,    for saccharide impregnated particles.


CLS 424/494
TXT Cellulose derivatives:

    Subject matter  under subclass 493 in which the polysaccharide is cellulose
    or a derivative thereof.


CLS 424/495
TXT Ethyl cellulose:

    Subject matter under subclass 494 in which the cellulose derivative is
    ethyl cellulose.


CLS 424/496
TXT Containing natural gums/resins:

    Subject matter under subclass 490 in which the particles are coated with a
    natural gum or resin.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    440,    for a chewing gum containing a natural gum.

    459,    for a sustained or differential release capsule containing discrete
    particles coated with a natural gum or resin.

    481,    for a tablet  coated with a natural gum or resin.

    500,    for natural gum or resin impregnated particles.


CLS 424/497
TXT Containing solid synthetic polymers:

    Subject matter under subclass 490 in which the particles are coated with a
    solid synthetic resin.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    414+,   for a synthetic resin foil coated or impregnated with a biocide.

    419,    for a biocidal particle coated with a synthetic resin.

    443,    for a synthetic resin web sheet or filament base, bandage or
    dressing with an incorporated medicament.

    462,    for a sustained differential release capsule containing discrete
    particles coated with a synthetic resin.

    482,    for a tablet coated with a solid synthetic resin.

    501,    for a synthetic resin impregnated particle.


CLS 424/498
TXT Containing waxes, higher fatty acids, higher fatty alcohols, or derivatives
    thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 490 in which the particle is coated with a
    coating containing a wax, higher fatty acid, higher fatty alcohol or
    derivative thereof.


CLS 424/499
TXT Contains proteins or derivative or polysaccharides or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 489 in which the particle is impregnated with
    a protein or derivative or a polysaccharide or derivative.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    418,    for a protein or saccharide coated biocidal particle.

    440,    for candy, candy coated pharmaceuticals or chewing gum.

    456,    for a gelatin capsule.

    460,    for a sustained or differential release capsule containing discrete
    particles coated with a protein.

    461+    for a sustained or differential release capsule containing discrete
    particles coated with a saccharide.

    477+    for a protein coated tablet.

    478,    for a gelatin coated tablet.

    479,    for a saccharide coated tablet.

    480,    for a tablet coated with cellulose or a cellulose derivative.

    491,    for protein coated particles.

    492,    for gelatin coated particles.

    493,    for saccharide coated particles.

    494,    for a cellulose or cellulose derivative coated particle.


CLS 424/500
TXT Contains natural gums and resins:

    Subject matter under subclass 489 in which the particles are impregnated
    with a natural gum or resin.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    440,    for a chewing gum containing a natural gum.

    459,    for a sustained or differential release capsule containing discrete
    particles coated with a natural gum or resin.

    481,    for a tablet coated with a natural gum or resin.

    496,    for a natural gum or resin coated particle.


CLS 424/501
TXT Contains solid synthetic resin:

    Subject matter under subclass 489 in which the particles are impregnated
    with a solid synthetic resin.


CLS 424/502
TXT Contains waxes, higher fatty acids, higher fatty alcohols:

    Subject matter under subclass 489 in which the particle is impregnated with
    a wax, higher fatty alcohol or derivatives thereof.


CLS 424/520
TXT EXTRACT, BODY FLUID, OR CELLULAR MATERIAL OF UNDETERMINED CONSTITUTION
    DERIVED FROM ANIMAL IS ACTIVE INGREDIENT:

    Compositions or products under the class definition wherein the active
    ingredient is an animal tissue extract, animal body fluid, or animal
    material containing cellular structure of undetermined chemical
    constitution, i.e., the chemical structure of said animal derived material
    has not been sufficiently established to classify said material elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  Patents are classified in this and indented subclasses on
    the basis of the first active ingredient in the composition and on the
    basis of the immediate source of the animal material; e.g., certain
    constituents of urine may originate in the kidney, however the fact that
    urine is the immediate source of the constituent is deemed of sufficient
    significance to place a patent to a urine constituent in the urine
    subclass. "Active" denotes an ingredient having a physiological,
    pharmacological, or biological effect.  In addition, since many active
    ingredients originate in various tissue sources, a search to be complete,
    should include the appropriate subclasses providing for the source of the
    active ingredient.

    (2)     Note.  The material derived from an animal may further be
    chemically modified or may be in a physical form different from that
    initially obtained; e.g., hydrogenated oil or butter derived from milk,
    etc. Classification is on the basis of the initial material derived from
    the animal.

    (3)     Note.  Cellular material derived from animal is defined as a
    naturally occurring material which still retains a certain amount of the
    original tissue structure of the animal.  Included within the term are
    materials which are chopped, cut, comminuted, pulverized, milled or sliced.

    (4)     Note.  An extract is a material considered to be devoid of original
    cellular structure.

    (5)     Note.  Specifically included in this subclass, with the exception
    of subject matter directed to arthropods, snakes, mollusks, fetuses and
    embryos, is subject matter directed to a whole animal or unspecified part
    thereof, i.e., a whole chopped up fish or a chopped up head of an animal.
    Though the whole body or general body part is known to contain multiple
    components such as muscle, bone, fat, blood, etc., the patents are not
    placed in subclasses directed to the individual components. They are
    considered to be general or unspecified cellular material derived from an
    animal.

    (6)     Note.  Many of the patents previously classified in this and the
    indented subclasses have been transferred to the part of Class 514 or Class
    530 providing for peptides and proteins. The patents remaining are patents
    which contain insufficient information to decide the chemical nature of the
    animal derived material.  Before classifying a patent in this and the
    indented subclasses standard reference works such as biochemical
    dictionaries and physiology texts should be consulted to decide if a named
    extract is not really a peptide, protein or saccharide or other chemical
    compound of known chemical structure.

    (7)     Note.  Class 530, subclasses 820-859 provide a breakdown of organs
    and materials which are sources for proteins and peptides.  No attempt has
    been made to cross-reference these patents here nor have the patents
    transferred to Class 530 been cross-referenced back to this and the
    indented subclasses.

    (8)     Note.  Disposition of Other Extracts:



    (A)     Class 512, Perfume Compositions, for plant or animal extracts or
    essential oils of unknown constitution which are disclosed as essences,
    aromatic oils, perfume essence, or odoriferous essential oils are
    considered to be compositions for perfumes even when they are from a single
    source.  Processes for extracting these mixtures, such as processes of
    enfleurage, are also classified in Class 512, unless provided for elsewhere.

    (B)     Class 424, Plant extracts of unknown constitution which are
    disclosed as having a medicinal use, with or without other disclosed uses,
    are classified in Class 424, subclasses 195.1+.

    (C)     Class 426, Extracts or essential oils of unknown constitution which
    have traditionally been employed as flavorings, flavor enhancers, seasoning
    agents, food acidulants or condiments are considered compositions and are
    classified in Class 426.  A specific example is citrus oil which has been
    used for centuries as a flavoring agent.  Processes for extracting such
    mixtures are classified in Class 426, unless provided for elsewhere, and
    are not provided for in the 532-570 Series of Classes.

    (D)     Class 530, Animal or plant extracts derived from a single source so
    long as identified as a protein or peptide, are classified in Class 530
    even if a Class 424 utility is disclosed  or claimed.  A plant or animal
    extract will be found in Class 424 if it is (a) a single source material
    and (b) is of undetermined chemical constitution, i.e., is claimed in terms
    of isolation technique or physical properties. A recitation as broad as
    "peptide" is enough to defeat placement in Class 424 on the basis of
    utility.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50      and 94.1+, for a composition containing an enzyme.

    195.1+, for a plant extract or plant material of undetermined constitution.

    538+,   for unspecified arthropod derived material.

    542,    for unspecified snake derived material.

    547,    for unspecified mollusk derived material.

    582,    for unspecified embryo or fetus derived material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 438, 439 and 646 for extracts which have
    been specifically prepared or treated to fit them for use as organic
    coloring material.

    71,     Chemistry:  Fertilizers, subclasses 15+ for a fertilizer which
    contains an animal extract.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclasses 50+ for extractive
    distillation processes, per se, that is, a distillation process carried out
    in the presence of a solvent for one or more components of the distilland.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 31 and 33+ for
    processes wherein waxes are dissolved from mineral oil containing
    substances; subclass 45 for the solvent extraction of asphalts, tars,
    pitches, or resins from mineral oils; subclasses 311+, 390+, and 400+ for
    processes wherein mineral oils are dissolved from mineral oil containing
    substances; and subclass 298 for processes of refining mineral oils by
    treating with liquid treating agents (washing, etc.).

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 634+ for a process of
    liquid- liquid extraction wherein one of the compounds purified is water or
    if the claims are broad as to the liquid being purified.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 319+ for a process of resolving a colloid.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, in particular subclass 658.5 and
    subclasses noted thereunder for a process of leaching, extracting, or
    dissolving when a process for purifying an inorganic or nonmetallic
    compound provided for in Class 423 is claimed, or when the claims are not
    limited and disclosure of purification of a compound for Class 423 and a
    compound or composition for that class is present, or a coclaimed
    extraction process produces products provided for in each of a plurality of
    other classes.

    426,    Food or Edible Material: Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    particularly subclass 425 and the noted subclasses thereunder for processes
    of making an extract having a Class 426 utility and not provided for
    elsewhere.

    435,    Chemistry: Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 41+ for
    obtaining an animal extract which involves a fermentation or culturing
    step, subclasses 262+ for processes of utilizing an enzyme or
    micro-organism to liberate, separate, or purify a preexisting compound or
    composition, and subclasses 325+ for methods of propagating or culturing
    animal cells.

    514,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclass 2 for
    a composition containing an active proteinaceous ingredient; subclass 23
    for a composition containing an active carbohydrate, and subclass 169 for a
    composition containing lanolin or a steroid as an active ingredient.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclass for a
    protein or biologically active polypeptide which is part of a synthetic
    resin or natural rubber.

    536,    Organic Compounds, subclass 21 for heparin.

    554,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 8-23 and 175-212 for processes and
    products thereof which are directed to the recovery, removal or extraction
    of fats, oils, waxes or higher fatty acids, or soaps thereof, from
    vegetable or animal substances or waste materials containing the same.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclasses 800+ for processes
    of separating hydrocarbons, particularly subclass 833 for forming a
    hydrocarbon extract as part of a separation process.


CLS 424/522
TXT Separated animal oil or solidified form thereof derived from animal flesh
    and other than from liver or dairy type:Subject matter under subclass 520
    in which the material is a separated animal oil or solidified form thereof
    and is other than derived from the liver of any animal or from a lacteal
    source.

    (1)     Note.  The term "separated animal oil" denotes an oil which has
    been physically or chemically extracted or removed from its original animal
    source.

    (2)     Note.  The term "wool fat" is the same as lanolin which is
    chemically a wax rather than a fat.  Subject matter under the class
    definition directed to lanolin as the active ingredient is proper for Class
    514, subclasses 169+.

    (3)     Note.  Included in this and the indented subclasses are neat's-foot
    oil, whale oil, mink oil, etc.

    (4)     Note.  Fat absent a rendering process is considered to be adipose
    tissue and see in particular, subclass 574.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    535,    for oils or solidified forms thereof which are derived from dairy
    products; e.g., butter, etc.

    554+,   for oil derived from liver.


CLS 424/523
TXT Fish oil or solidified form thereof:
    Subject matter under subclass 522 in which the material is or is derived
    from an oil or solidified form thereof of fish origin.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    554,    for fish liver oil.

    555,    for cod liver oil.


CLS 424/524
TXT Whale or porpoise oil or solidified form thereof:
    Subject matter under subclass 522 in which the material is or is derived
    from oil or solidified form thereof of whale or porpoise origin.


CLS 424/525
TXT Skunk, musk, or mink oil or solidified form thereof:
    Subject matter under subclass 522 in which the material is or is derived
    from an oil of skunk, musk or mink origin or solidified from thereof.


CLS 424/526
TXT Lard, rind, or tallow:
    Subject matter under subclass 522 in which the material is or is derived
    from an animal fat characterized as lard, rind or tallow.

    (1)     Note.  If the "fat" is not characterized as lard, rind, or tallow,
    and no rendering process is associated with it, placement is elsewhere, in
    particular subclass 574 for adipose tissue or fat absent rendering.


CLS 424/528
TXT Bile, bile acid, bile salt, amniotic fluid, or ascitic fluid:Subject matter
    under subclass 520 in which the material is or is derived from bile, bile
    acids, bile salts, amniotic fluid or ascitic fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    551,    for the gall bladder or bile duct.

    558,    for other extracts derived from the urogenital system.

    582,    for extracts from embryonic structures.


CLS 424/529
TXT Blood:
    Subject matter under subclass 520 in which the material is or is derived
    from blood.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are extracts of fetal blood.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85.1+,  for a composition containing an antibody derived from blood.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    71,     Chemistry:  Fertilizers, subclass 17 for a fertilizer composition
    which contains components derived from blood.

    128,    Surgery, for a method of blood transfusion.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclass for a
    significant process of liquid purification or separation; e.g., dialysis
    and centrifugal extraction, etc.; and for apparatus used in a
    blood-component separation method.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    appropriate subclasses for food compositions which contain blood or
    components thereof.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 4+ for a
    ferment compositionwhich is used in a blood clotting test; and subclass 2
    for a process or composition for maintaining the viability of blood.

    514,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 2,
    21 and 802 for a fibrinogen containing composition.

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives; Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclasses 380+ for blood proteins.


CLS 424/530
TXT Plasma:
    Subject matter under subclass 529 in which the material is or is derived
    from blood plasma.


CLS 424/531
TXT Serum:
    Subject matter under subclass 529 in which the material is or is derived
    from blood serum.


CLS 424/532
TXT Platelet:
    Subject matter under subclass 529 in which the material is or is derived
    from blood platelets.


CLS 424/533
TXT Erythrocyte:
    Subject matter under subclass 529 in which the material is or is derived
    from red blood cells.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are extracts of:



            ERYTHROBLASTS
            ERYTHROCYTE MEMBRANE
            ERYTHROCYTES, ABNORMAL
            ACANTHOCYTES
            ERYTHROCYTE INCLUSIONS
            HEINZ BODIES
            MEGALOBLASTS
            SPHEROCYTES
            RETICULOCYTES


CLS 424/534
TXT Leucocyte:
    Subject matter under subclass 529 in which the material is or is derived
    from leucocytes.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are extracts of:



            GRANULOCYTES
            BASOPHILS
            EOSINOPHILS
            NEUTROPHILS

            LYMPHOCYTES
            KILLER CELLS
            KILLER CELLS, NATURAL
            B LYMPHOCYTES

            T LYMPHOCYTES
            HELPER CELLS
            T LYMPHOCYTES, CYTOTOXIC
            T LYMPHOCYTES, REGULATORY
            SUPPRESSOR CELLS
            LYMPHOCYTES, NULL
            MONOCYTES


CLS 424/535
TXT Milk or colostrum (e.g., butter, whey, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 520 in which the material is or is derived
    from milk or colostrum; e.g., butter, whey, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    426,    Food Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 34+ for fermented milk products; and subclasses 580+ for lacteal
    derived products intended to be edible.


CLS 424/537
TXT Body fluid or exudate or transudate other than snake venom, feces, urine,
    or semen (e.g., lymph, saliva, honey, royal jelly, digestive juice, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 520 in which the material is or is derived
    from a body fluid, exudate, or transudate and is other than snake venom,
    feces, urine, or semen; e.g., lymph, saliva, honey, royal jelly, digestive
    juice, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are the following body fluids,
    exudates, or transudates:



            Beeswax
            .  Honeycomb
            Castoreum
            Cerebrospinal fluid
            Cerumen
            Gastric Juice
            Honeydew
            Intestinal Juice
            Lymph
              Chyle
            Mucus
            Opaline (molluskan secretion)
            Pancreatic Juice
            Pericardial fluid
            Peritoneal fluid
            Perspiration
            Pleural fluid
            Royal Jelly
            Sebum
            Sputum
            Suint
            Synovial fluid
            Tear
            Venom other than from snake
            Vernix caseose

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    542,    for snake venom or extracts thereof.

    543,    for feces or extracts thereof.

    545,    for urine or extracts thereof.

    561,    for semen or extracts thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    514,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclass 169
    for materials wherein lanolin is the active ingredient.


CLS 424/538
TXT Derived from arthropod (e.g., insect, spider, crustacea, etc.):Subject
    matter under subclass 520 in which the material is or is derived from an
    arthropod.

    (1)     Note.  An arthopod is an animal characterized by jointed chitinous
    exoskeleton and jointed legs. Included in this and the indented subclasses
    are extracts of the whole body or parts thereof of spiders; crustacea, such
    as lobsters, crabs, shrimps, and crayfish; and insects, such as fireflies,
    roaches, fleas, bugs, ants and beetles.


CLS 424/539
TXT Bee:
    Subject matter under subclass 538 in which the material is or is derived
    from a bee.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    537,    for honey or royal jelly.


CLS 424/541
TXT Cantharide:
    Subject matter under subclass 538 in which the material is an extract of
    dried beetles.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are extracts of cantharis
    vesicatoria.

    (2)     Note.  Synonyms:  Spanish fly; blistering fly; blistering beetle.


CLS 424/542
TXT Derived from snake (e.g., venom, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 520 in which the material is or is derived
    from a snake.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is snake venom.


CLS 424/543
TXT Waste or feces (e.g., slaughterhouse offal, chicken feet, horn, hair, hide,
    urine, etc.):Subject matter under subclass 520 in which the material is or
    is derived from waste or feces; e.g., slaughterhouse offal, chicken feet,
    horn, hair, hide, urine, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are fecal matter or waste parts of
    butchered animals, such as hooves, feathers, down, fur, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Hide is defined as a slaughterhouse by-product.  Where the
    term skin is used, it is considered proper for this subclass if it is not
    an intact and functioning piece of skin as is used for grafting purposes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    574,    for skin which is still intact and functioning, as that which is
    used in grafting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives; Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclass 357 for purified keratin.


CLS 424/545
TXT Urine:
    Subject matter under subclass 543 in which the material is or is derived
    from urine.


CLS 424/546
TXT Sex hormone:
    Subject matter under subclass 545 in which the material is characterized as
    a sex hormone.

    (1)     Note.  Classification here is proper only if the particular hormone
    is chemically unidentifiable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    514,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 2+
    for sex hormones which are proteins, and subclasses 169+ for those which
    contain a cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system with such hormones
    being used as body treating materials.

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives; Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, the appropriate subclasses for sex
    hormones which are proteins.

    552,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 502+ for sex hormones, per se, which
    are cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene compounds.


CLS 424/547
TXT Derived from mollusk:
    Subject matter under subclass 520 in which the material is or is derived
    from a mollusk.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are clams, mussels, octopus,
    oysters, snails, slugs and squid.


CLS 424/548
TXT Derived from musculoskeletal system, other than cardiac muscle (e.g.,
    cartilage, muscle, etc.):Subject matter under subclass 520 in which the
    material is or is derived from parts of the musculoskeletal system and
    wherein the muscle is other than cardiac muscle.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are cartilage, tendons, ligaments
    and synovial bursa.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    569,    for active material which is derived from cardiac muscle.


CLS 424/549
TXT Skeleton (e.g., bone, teeth, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 548 in which the material is or is derived
    from parts of the skeleton or teeth.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are extracts of epiphyses.

    (2)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are bone marrow cells isolated
    from the bone.  See subclass 577.


CLS 424/550
TXT Digestive system (e.g., salivary gland, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 520 in which the material is or is derived
    from a part of the digestive system; e.g., salivary gland, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this and the indented subclasses are:



            BILIARY TRACT
            BILE DUCTS

            GALLBLADDER
            ESOPHAGUS


CLS 424/551
TXT Gastrointestinal system (e.g., intestine, stomach, gall bladder,
    etc.):Subject matter under subclasses 550 in which the material is or is
    derived from part of the gastrointestinal system; e.g., intestine, stomach,
    gall bladder, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are the large and small intestines
    and parts thereof such as intestinal mucosa, the stomach, and parts thereof
    such as gastric mucosa, and bile ducts.


CLS 424/553
TXT Liver:
    Subject matter under subclass 551 in which the material is or is derived
    from liver.


CLS 424/554
TXT Fish liver oil or solidified form thereof:
    Subject matter under subclass 553 in which the material is an oil or
    solidified form thereof derived from fish liver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    514,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses for vitamins; e.g., A or D, etc., extracted or derived from a
    fish liver.


CLS 424/555
TXT Cod liver oil or solidified form thereof:
    Subject matter under subclass 554 in which the material is an oil or
    solidified form thereof derived from cod liver.


CLS 424/556
TXT Pancreas:
    Subject matter under subclass 551 in which the material is or is derived
    from pancreas.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are the Islands of Langerhans.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    514,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclass 3 for
    insulin containing medicinal compositions.

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives; Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclass 303 for insulin, per se.


CLS 424/557
TXT Respiratory system (e.g., lung, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 520 in which the material is or is derived
    from part of the respiratory system.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are lung, larynx, nasal cavity,
    paranasal sinuses, pleura and trachea.


CLS 424/558
TXT Urogenital system (e.g., kidney, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 520 in which the material is or is derived
    from part of the urogenital system.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this and the indented subclasses are kidney,
    bladder, genitalia, germ cells, etc.


CLS 424/559
TXT Genitalia (e.g., ovary, uterus, prostate, testis, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 558 in which the material is or is derived
    from the female or male genitalia, such as the ovary, uterus, prostate, and
    testis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    572,    for mammary gland.

    582,    for corpus luteum.


CLS 424/561
TXT Germ cells (e.g., ovum, spermatozoa, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 558 in which the material is or is derived
    from germ cells which are sexual reproductive cells.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    581,    for extracts or isolates of eggs with shells.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 62+ for methods of freezing ovum or
    spermatozoa.

    128,    Surgery, appropriate subclasses for methods of artificial
    insemination.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 2 for
    frozen ovum or spermatozoa.


CLS 424/562
TXT Endocrine system, other than the thymus gland (e.g., parathyroid gland,
    etc.):Subject matter under subclass 520 in which the material is or is
    derived from part of the endocrine system, parathyroid gland, etc., and
    other than material derived from the thymus gland.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are pineal body, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    580,    for the thymus gland.


CLS 424/563
TXT Adrenal gland:
    Subject matter under subclass 562 in which the material is or is derived
    from the adrenal gland.

    (1)     Note.  Suprarenal is another name for adrenal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    514,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclass 12 for
    compositions containing adrenocorticotropic hormone (ACTH).

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives; Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclass 306 for ACTH, per se.

    564,    Organic Compounds, subclass 361 for epinephrine type compounds;
    e.g., adrenaline, per se, etc.


CLS 424/565
TXT Pituitary gland:
    Subject matter under subclass 562 in which the material is or is derived
    from the pituitary gland.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for extracts which are either from
    whole pituitaries or parts of the pituitary.

    (2)     Note.  The pituitary is also known as the hypophysis.  The anterior
    pituitary is also known as the adenohypophysis.  The posterior portion is
    also called the interfundibular portion or neurohypophysis.


CLS 424/568
TXT Thyroid gland:
    Subject matter under subclass 562 in which the material is or is derived
    from the thyroid gland.


CLS 424/569
TXT Cardiovascular system, other than the umbilical artery or vein (e.g., blood
    vessel, heart, cardiac muscle etc.):Subject matter under subclass 520 in
    which the material is or is derived from part of the cardiovascular system
    and is other than material derived from the umbilical artery or vein.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are arteries, veins, capillaries,
    etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    583,    for umbilical artery or vein.


CLS 424/570
TXT Nervous system (e.g., brain, nerve, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 520 in which the material is or is derived
    from part of the central or peripheral nervous systems; e.g., brain, nerve,
    etc.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are extracts of the brain, spinal
    column, nerve tissue and myelin sheath.


CLS 424/571
TXT Sense organ (e.g., eye, taste bud, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 520 in which the material is or is derived
    from a sense organ; e.g., eye, taste bud, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are parts of the ear and olfactory
    mucosa.


CLS 424/572
TXT Tissue, other than lymphoid tissue (e.g., connective, etc.):Subject matter
    under subclass 520 in which the material is or is derived from a specific
    isolated tissue; e.g., connective, etc., and wherein said tissue is other
    than lymphoid.

    (1)     Note.  Improper for this subclass is subject matter directed to a
    collection of undefined tissues, i.e., a whole animal or body part which
    inherently contains skin, muscle, fat, blood, etc., such subject matter is
    found in subclass 520 of this class or in the subclass directed to the
    specific animal of interest.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    578,    for lymphoid tissue.


CLS 424/573
TXT Neoplastic, tumor, or cancer:
    Subject matter under subclass 572 in which the material is or is derived
    from neoplastic tissue, tumor tissue or cancer tissue.


CLS 424/574
TXT Adipose or epithelium:
    Subject matter under subclass 572 in which the material is or is derived
    from adipose tissue or epithelial tissue.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are patents directed to fat
    wherein the disclosure is silent as the rendering.

    (2)     Note.  An intact and functioning piece of skin is considered proper
    subject matter for this subclass.  Such skin is usually used in skin
    grafting procedures.

    (3)     Note.  Included in this subclass are endothelium, epidermis, and
    basement membrane.


CLS 424/577
TXT Hemic or immune system (e.g., hematopoietic system, bone marrow cells,
    etc.):Subject matter under subclass 520 in which the material is or is
    derived from part of the hemic or immune system; e.g., hematopoietic
    system, bone marrow cells, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this and the indented subclasses are lymphoid
    tissue, lymph nodes, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85.1+,  for medicinal composition containing lymphokines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives; Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclass 351 for lymphokines claimed
    as compounds regardless of medicinal disclosure.


CLS 424/578
TXT Lymphoid tissue (e.g., adenoid, lymph node, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 577 in which the material is or is derived
    from lymphoid tissue; e.g., adenoid, lymph node, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are tonsils, and Peyer's patches.


CLS 424/579
TXT Spleen:
    Subject matter under subclass 578 in which the material is or is derived
    from the spleen.


CLS 424/580
TXT Thymus gland:
    Subject matter under subclass 578 in which the material is or is derived
    from the thymus gland.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85.1+,  for medicinal compositions containing lymphokines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives; Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclass 351 for lymphokines claimed
    as compounds in spite of any disclosed or implied medicinal utility.


CLS 424/581
TXT Egg enclosed in shell or a part thereof (e.g., eggshell, egg yolk,
    etc.):Subject matter under subclass 520 in which the material is or is
    derived from an egg or part thereof; e.g., eggshell, egg yolk, etc., which
    is of the type which has a shell.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are bird eggs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    561,    for isolates prepared from human or animal ova.


CLS 424/582
TXT Embryonic structure (e.g., embryo or fetus, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 520 in which the material is or is derived
    from an embryonic structure, embryo, or fetus, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are amniotic sac, corpus luteum,
    and whole embryo or fetus.


CLS 424/583
TXT Placenta or umbilical cord:
    Subject matter under subclass 582 in which the material is or is derived
    from placenta or umbilical cord.


CLS 424/600
TXT INORGANIC ACTIVE INGREDIENT CONTAINING:

    Compositions under the class definition in which the active ingredient is
    disclosed to be an element or an inorganic compound.

    (1)     Note.  Anesthetic compositions which contain oxygen and an active
    anesthetic compound are classified with the active anesthetic compound.
    For example, a composition containing an ether and 02 is classified in
    Class 314 subclass 715 or its indents.

    (2)     Note.  A life supporting gaseous mixture; e.g., 02 and He, etc., is
    classified in Class 514, subclass 789.

    (3)     Note.  See section V Glossary for the definition of the term
    "active ingredient".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses for
    inorganic compounds, per se.


CLS 424/601
TXT Phosphorus or phosphorus compound:

    Compositions under subclass 600 which contain elemental phosphorus or an
    inorganic compound thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for a dentifrice or mouthwash containing a phosphate compound.


CLS 424/602
TXT Calcium containing:

    Compositions under subclass 601 which contain calcium and phosphorus.

    (1)     Note.  Synonyms/Examples:  Bone meal, phosphate of lime, calcium
    phosphate.


CLS 424/603
TXT Pyrophosphate:

    Compositions under subclass 602 which contain calcium pyrophosphate.


CLS 424/604
TXT Heavy metal containing:

    Compositions under subclass 601 which contain a heavy metal and phosphorus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    617,    for other heavy metal containing compositions.


CLS 424/605
TXT Phosphorus acid:

    Compositions under subclass 601 which include a phosphorus containing acid.


CLS 424/606
TXT Sodium containing or fluorine containing:

    Compositions under subclass 601 which include a sodium or fluorine
    containing phosphorus compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    632,    for compositions containing copper containing fluorine compounds.

    673+,   for compositions containing elemental fluorine or fluorine
    compounds.


CLS 424/607
TXT Hydrogen metal cyanide, cyanide, cyanate, or thio analog thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 600 which contain an inorganic compound having
    a NAC=N radical.


CLS 424/608
TXT Heavy metal containing (e.g., nitroprusside, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 607 which contain a heavy metal cyanide,
    cyanate, or thio analog.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 617 for a list of the elements considered to be
    heavy metals.


CLS 424/609
TXT Thiocyanates:

    Compositions under subclass 608 which contain compounds with the radical -
    SCN.

    (1)     Note.  Synonyms/Examples:  Thiocyanide, sulfocyanate, rhodanate,
    rhodanide.


CLS 424/610
TXT Potassium or lithium containing:

    Compositions under subclass 607 which contain potassium or lithium.


CLS 424/611
TXT Sodium containing:

    Compositions under subclass 607 which contain sodium.


CLS 424/612
TXT Hydrocyanic acid:

    Compositions under subclass 607 which contain hydrocyanic acid.

    (1)     Note.  Synonyms/Examples:  Prussic acid, hydrogen cyanide,
    formonitrile.


CLS 424/613
TXT Peroxide or compositions of or releasing gaseous oxygen or ozone:

    Compositions under subclass 600 which contain an inorganic compound having
    a bivalent -O-O-group; e.g., H2O2, BaO2, etc., or gaseous oxygen or ozone
    containing compositions, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Synonyms/Examples:  Superoxide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for a dentifrice or mouthwash containing an oxygen releasing agent.

    62,     for peroxide containing compositions intended for use on live skin
    or hair.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 101+ for a method of bleaching which is
    more than the mere use of a composition.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 186.1+ for a general bleaching composition.


CLS 424/614
TXT Zinc containing:

    Compositions under subclass 613 which include peroxide containing zinc
    compounds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    641,    for other compositions containing zinc.


CLS 424/615
TXT Sodium containing:

    Compositions under subclass 613 which contain compounds of sodium
    containing peroxides.


CLS 424/616
TXT Hydrogen peroxide:

    Compositions under subclass 613 which contain hydrogen peroxide.

    (1)     Note.  Synonyms/Examples:  Hydrogen dioxide auricome, perhydrol.


CLS 424/617
TXT Heavy metal or compound thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 600 which contain a metal having a specific
    gravity greater than 4 and wherein the metal is present in either its free
    elemental form or as part of an inorganic compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66,     for an antiperspirant containing a zirconium compound.

    67,     for an antiperspirant containing a zinc compound.


CLS 424/618
TXT Silver:

    Compositions under subclass 617 wherein the metal is silver.


CLS 424/619
TXT Nitrate:

    Compositions under subclass 618 which contain silver nitrate.


CLS 424/620
TXT Arsenic:

    Compositions under subclass 617 wherein the metal is arsenic.

    (1)     Note.  Synonyms/Examples:  London Purple.


CLS 424/621
TXT With elemental arsenic or arsenic containing compound:

    Compositions under subclass 620 which contain elemental arsenic or an
    inorganic arsenic compound and an organic compound which contains arsenic.

    (1)     Note.  Example:  Paris Green, etc.


CLS 424/622
TXT Copper compound of arsenic:

    Compositions under subclass 620 which include a copper containing compound
    of arsenic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    630,    for compositions containing other copper compounds.


CLS 424/623
TXT Oxygen compound of arsenic:

    Compositions under subclass 620 which include a oxygen containing compound
    of arsenic.

    (1)     Note.  Examples, arsenic acid, arsenic acid cahydride, arsenious
    oxide, white arsenic.


CLS 424/624
TXT Sodium compound of arsenic:

    Compositions under subclass 620 which contain a sodium compound of arsenic.


CLS 424/625
TXT Manganese containing arsenic compound or with added manganese compound:

    Compositions under subclass 620 which contain (1) elemental arsenic or an
    arsenic compound admixed with elemental manganese or a manganese compound
    or (2) arsenic chemically combined with manganese.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    639,    for compositions containing other manganese compounds.


CLS 424/626
TXT Chromium containing arsenic compound or with added chromium compound:

    Compositions under subclass 620 which contain (1) elemental arsenic or an
    arsenic compound admixed with elemental chromium or a chromium compound or
    (2) arsenic chemically combined with chromium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    655+,   for compositions containing other compounds of chromium.


CLS 424/627
TXT Lead compound of arsenic:

    Compositions under subclass 620 which contain arsenic chemically combined
    with lead; e.g., elad arsenate, lead arsenite, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    Appropriate subclasses for compositions containing other lead compounds.


CLS 424/628
TXT Calcium compound of arsenic:

    Compositions under subclass 620 which contain arsenic chemically combined
    with calcium; e.g., calcium arsenate, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    675,    678 and 682+, for compositions containing other calcium compounds.


CLS 424/629
TXT With added organic compound:

    Compositions under subclass 620 which contain in addition to the elemental
    arsenic or inorganic arsenic compound an organic compound.


CLS 424/630
TXT Copper:

    Compositions under subclass 600 which contain the heavy metal copper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    604,    for compositions containing compounds of copper containing
    phosphorus.

    608,    for compositions containing copper and cyanide.

    622,    for compositions containing copper compounds of arsenic.


CLS 424/631
TXT With cellulose-sulfur compound or lignin:

    Compositions under subclass 630 which contain elemental copper or an
    inorganic copper compound thereof and an organic compound which is either
    lignin sulfonate or a reaction product of cellulose with sulfur or a sulfur
    compound.


CLS 424/632
TXT Halogen containing:

    Compositions under subclass 630 which contain a compound of copper and a
    halide.


CLS 424/633
TXT Hydroxide:

    Compositions under subclass 630 which contain copper hydroxide.


CLS 424/634
TXT Carbonate:

    Compositions under subclass 630 which contain copper carbonate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    686+,   for compositions containing aluminum, calcium or magnesium
    carbonate.

    715+,   for other compositions containing a carbonate.


CLS 424/635
TXT Oxide:

    Compositions under subclass 630 which contain copper oxide.


CLS 424/637
TXT Sulfur containing:

    Compositions under subclass 630 which contain a compound of copper and
    sulfur.

    (1)     Note.  Synonyms/Examples:  For sulfates Blue or roman vitrol,
    Bordeaux mixture, Blue stone.


CLS 424/638
TXT With added organic compound:

    Compositions under subclass 630 which contain an inorganic copper compound
    with an added organic compound.


CLS 424/639
TXT Manganese:

    Compositions under subclass 617 wherein the heavy metal is manganese.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    625,    for compositions containing manganese and arsenic.


CLS 424/640
TXT Potassium permanganate:

    Compositions under subclass 639 which contain potassium permanganate.


CLS 424/641
TXT Zinc:

    Compositions under subclass 617 wherein the heavy metal is zinc.

    (1)     Note.  Synonyms/Examples:  White Vitrol.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass provides principally for compositions used to
    preserve substrates from biological attack; e.g., wood preservatives, etc.


CLS 424/642
TXT For topical application:

    Compositions under subclass 641 which are claimed or disclosed as for
    topical application to the living body.

    (1)     Note.  Synonyms/Examples:  Dental pastes, shampoo.


CLS 424/643
TXT Orally assimilable or injectable composition:

    Compositions under subclass 641 which are claimed or disclosed as orally
    assimilable or injectable.


CLS 424/644
TXT Mercury:

    Compositions under subclass 617 which contain the heavy metal mercury.

    (1)     Note.  Synonyms/Examples:  Red precipitate (mercuric oxide).


CLS 424/645
TXT Chlorine containing:

    Compositions under subclass 644 which contain an inorganic compound of
    mercury and chlorine.

    (1)     Note.  Synonyms/Examples:  Corrosive sublimate, calomel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    677,    for compositions containing alkali or alkaline earth metal
    chlorides.


CLS 424/646
TXT Iron, cobalt, nickel, vanadium, molybdenum or palladium:

    Compositions under subclass 617 which contain the heavy metal iron, cobalt,
    nickel, vanadium, molybdenum or palladium.


CLS 424/647
TXT Ferric:

    Compositions under subclass 646 which contain iron in the ferric form.

    (1)     Note.  Synonyms/Examples:  Venetian, red ocher or yellow ocher.


CLS 424/648
TXT Ferrous:

    Compositions under subclass 646 which contain iron in its ferrous form.

    (1)     Note.  Synonyms/Examples:  Copperas, green vitrol.


CLS 424/649
TXT Gold or platinum:

    Compositions under subclass 617 which contain the heavy metal gold or
    platinum.


CLS 424/650
TXT Tin, gallium, germanium, indium, or tellurium:

    Compositions under subclass 617 which contain gallium, germanium, indium,
    tin or tellurium.


CLS 424/651
TXT Antimony:

    Compositions under subclass 617 which contain the heavy metal antimony.


CLS 424/652
TXT Lead:

    Compositions under subclass 617 which contain the heavy metal lead.

    (1)     Note.  Synonyms/Examples:  litharge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    627,    for compositions containing compounds of lead and arsenic.


CLS 424/653
TXT Bismuth:

    Compositions under subclass 617 which contain the heavy metal bismuth.


CLS 424/654
TXT Cadmium:

    Compositions under subclass 617 which contain the heavy metal cadmium.


CLS 424/655
TXT Chromium:

    Compositions under subclass 617 which contain the heavy metal chromium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    626,    for compositions containing compounds of chromium and arsenic.


CLS 424/656
TXT Potassium dichromate:

    Compositions under subclass 617 which contain the chromium compound
    potassium dichromate.


CLS 424/657
TXT Boron:

    Compositions under subclass 600 which contain elemental boron or an
    inorganic compound thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Synonyms/Examples:  Borax.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    613+,   for perborates which generate hydrogen peroxide.


CLS 424/658
TXT Borax:

    Compositions under subclass 657 which contain borax.

    (1)     Note.  Synonyms/Examples:  Sodium Tetraborate (Na2B407).


CLS 424/659
TXT Boric Acid:

    Compositions under subclass 657 which contain boric acid.

    (1)     Note.  Synonyms/Examples:  Boracic Acid.


CLS 424/660
TXT Borates:

    Compositions under subclass 657 which contain a borate.


CLS 424/661
TXT Elemental chlorine or elemental chlorine releasing inorganic compound
    (e.g., chlorites, hypochlorites, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 600 containing elemental chlorine or an
    inorganic clorine releasing compound.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is not intended to include chlorine containing
    compounds which do not readily release free chlorine.  For such compounds,
    search other appropriate subclasses; e.g., Nacl, see subclass 666, for Hcl,
    see subclass 680, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Synonyms/Examples:  Hypochlorite, chlorite, chlorates
    perchlorates.


CLS 424/662
TXT Chlorate:

    Compositions under subclass 661 which contain a chlorate.


CLS 424/663
TXT Chloride:

    Compositions under subclass 661 which contain a chloride.


CLS 424/664
TXT Ammonium chloride:

    Compositions under subclass 663 which contain ammonium chloride.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    677+,   for compositions containing alkali or alkaline earth metal
    chlorides.


CLS 424/665
TXT Alkali metal or alkaline earth metal:

    Compositions under subclass 661 which contain an alkali metal or alkaline
    earth metal chloride.


CLS 424/666
TXT Hydrochloric acid:

    Compositions under subclass 600 which contain hydrochloric acid.

    (1)     Note.  Synonyms/Examples:  Muriatic acid.


CLS 424/667
TXT Elemental iodine or iodine compound:

    Compositions under subclass 600 containing elemental iodine or an iodine
    inorganic compound containing iodine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for a dentifrice or mouthwash which contains iodine or an iodine
    compound.


CLS 424/668
TXT Iodate:

    Compositions under subclass 667 which contain an iodate.

    (1)     Note.  Synonyms/Examples:  Compounds yielding the I03-ion.


CLS 424/669
TXT Iodide:

    Compositions under subclass 667 which contain an iodide.


CLS 424/670
TXT Potassium iodide:

    Compositions under subclass 669 which contain potassium iodide.


CLS 424/671
TXT Sodium iodide:

    Compositions under subclass 669 which contain sodium iodide.


CLS 424/672
TXT Iodophors:

    Compositions under subclass 667 which contain a bacteriacidal complex of
    iodine and a nonionic surface-active agent which releases iodine in water.

    (1)     Note.  A composition containing a surfactent and iodine is presumed
    to be an iodophor in the absence of a clear showing to the contrary.


CLS 424/673
TXT Elemental fluorine or fluorine compound:

    Compositions under subclass 600 which contain fluorine or an inorganic
    fluoride compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     for a dentifrice or mouthwash which contains fluorine or a fluorine
    compound.

    606,    for compositions containing fluorine and phosphorus.

    632,    for compositions containing copper compounds of chlorine.

    650,    for compositions containing tin compounds of fluorine.


CLS 424/674
TXT Silicofluoride:

    Compositions under subclass 673 wherein the inorganic fluoride compound is
    a reaction product of silica or a silica compound and fluorine or a
    fluoride compound.


CLS 424/675
TXT Calcium containing:

    Compositions under subclass 673 which contain a calcium compound of
    fluorine.


CLS 424/676
TXT Sodium containing:

    Compositions under subclass 673 which contain a compound of sodium and
    fluoride.


CLS 424/677
TXT Alkali or alkaline earth chloride (e.g., barium or lithium chloride, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 600 wherein the active ingredient is a chloride
    of a metal selected from the group consisting of Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs, Mg, Ca,
    Sr and Ba.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    469,    for a salt tablet comprising granules of Nacl in a solid matrix.


CLS 424/678
TXT Calcium chloride:

    Compositions under subclass 677 which contain calcium.


CLS 424/679
TXT Potassium chloride:

    Compositions under subclass 677 which contain potassium.


CLS 424/680
TXT Sodium chloride:

    Compositions under subclass 677 which contain sodium chloride.


CLS 424/681
TXT Magnesium chloride:

    Compositions under subclass 677 which contain magnesium.


CLS 424/682
TXT Aluminum, calcium, or magnesium element, or compound containing:

    Compositions under subclass 600 which contain aluminum, magnesium or
    calcium in a free metallic state or as part of an inorganic compound.

    (1)     Note.  Many compounds of aluminum calcium in magnesium are
    characterized as carriers or fillers in a medicinal composition while in
    other documents the same compound is described as an active ingredient.  In
    this and the following subclasses doubt should always be resolved in favor
    of classifying the compound as an active ingredient absent a clear showing
    to the contrary.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for an aluminum compound as part of an antiperspirant composition.


CLS 424/683
TXT Magnesium silicate:

    Compositions under subclass 682 which contain compounds of magnesium and
    silicon.


CLS 424/684
TXT Aluminum silicate:

    Compositions under subclass 682 which contain compounds of aluminum and
    silicon.

    (1)     Note.  Synonyms/Examples:  Kaolin Zeolites.


CLS 424/685
TXT Aluminum chloride or bromide:

    Compositions under subclass 682 which contain aluminum chloride or bromide.


CLS 424/686
TXT Carbonate or bicarbonate:

    Compositions under subclass 682 containing a compound wherein aluminum,
    calcium or magnesium is chemically combined with a carbonate (C03=) or
    bicarbonate (HC03) radical.

    (1)     Note.  Compositions containing a carbonate or bicarbonate compound
    in combination with a dry acid which will react in the presence of H2O to
    form as gas in subclass 44.

    (2)     Note.  Synonyms/Examples:  Dolomite.


CLS 424/687
TXT Calcium carbonate:

    Compositions under subclass 686 which contain calcium carbonate.

    (1)     Note.  Synonyms/Examples.  Precipitated chalk.


CLS 424/688
TXT Oxide or hydroxide:

    Compositions under subclass 682 which contain an oxide or hydroxide of
    aluminum calcium or magnesium.


CLS 424/689
TXT With stabilizer or suspending agent:

    Compositions under subclass 688 which contain in addition to the oxide or
    hydroxide of aluminum, calcium or magnesium a suspending agent which
    maintains the composition in the form of a suspension, or a stabilizing
    agent which preserves the activity of the active ingredient.


CLS 424/690
TXT Aluminum hydroxide:

    Compositions under subclass 688 which contain aluminum hydroxide.

    (1)     Note.  Synonyms/Examples.  Aluminum chlorhydride complex.


CLS 424/691
TXT Aluminum oxide:

    Compositions under subclass 688 which contain aluminum oxide.

    (1)     Note.  Synonyms/Examples.  Alumina, alpha-corundum.


CLS 424/692
TXT Magnesium hydroxide or oxide:

    Compositions under subclass 688 which contain magnesium hydroxide or oxide.

    (1)     Note.  Synonyms/Examples.  Milk of Magnesia.


CLS 424/693
TXT Calcium hydroxide:

    Compositions under subclass 688 which contain calcium hydroxide.


CLS 424/694
TXT Characterized as lime or slaked lime:

    Compositions under subclass 693 wherein the calcium compound is claimed a
    characterized as lime or slaked lime.

    (1)     Note.  Synonyms/Examples:  Lime is naturally occurring calcium
    carbonate.  Slaked lime is hydrated lime CaOH.  This subclass serves to
    collect older patents.  The presumption is made that the slaked product
    still contains some of the hydroxide.


CLS 424/695
TXT Lime-sulfur:

    Compositions under subclass 695 which contain (a) lime or slaked lime in
    admixture with free sulfur or (b) a reaction product of lime or slaked lime
    with sulfur or a sulfur containing compound.


CLS 424/696
TXT Calcium containing sulfur compound (e.g., calcium sulfate, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 682 which contain a calcium containing sulfur
    compound.

    (1)     Note.  Synonyms/Examples.  Calcium sulfate, Plaster of Paris,
    gypsum.


CLS 424/697
TXT Magnesium sulfate (e.g., epson salts, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 682 which contain magnesium sulfate.

    (1)     Note.  Synonyms/Examples.  Epson salts.


CLS 424/698
TXT Alum or burnt alum:

    Compositions under subclass 695 which contain alum or burnt alum.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is primarily a collection of older patents.


CLS 424/699
TXT Carbon disulfide, monoxide, or dioxide:

    Compositions under subclass 600 which contain carbon disulfide, carbon
    monoxide or carbon dioxide.


CLS 424/700
TXT Carbon dioxide:

    Compositions under subclass 699 which contain carbon dioxide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43+,    for an effervescent or pressurized composition containing carbon
    dioxide.


CLS 424/701
TXT Carbon disulfide:

    Compositions under subclass 699 which contain carbon disulfide.


CLS 424/702
TXT Selenium or compound thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 600 which contain elemental selenium in an
    inorganic selenium compound.


CLS 424/703
TXT Elemental sulfur or compound thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 600 containing elemental sulfur or an inorganic
    compound thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    Appropriate subclasses for a combustible or chemically reactive composition
    which contains elemental sulfur and produces a smoke, mist or aerosol;
    e.g., nominally recited sulfur candles, etc.


CLS 424/704
TXT With inorganic silicones material:

    Compositions under subclass 703 which contain in addition to elemental
    sulfur or an inorganic compound thereof, an inorganic silicon containing
    compound e.g., silica, bentonite, diatomaceous earth, etc.


CLS 424/705
TXT Sulfur, per se:

    Compositions under subclass 703 which contain elemental sulfur.

    (1)     Note.  Synonyms/Examples.  Flowers of sulfur, precipitated sulfur.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    708,    for fumigating compositions which produce hydrogen sulfide.

    712,    for fumigating compositions which produce sulfur dioxide.


CLS 424/706
TXT Sulfide:

    Compositions under subclass 703 which contain a sulfide.


CLS 424/707
TXT Disulfides:

    Compositions under subclass 706 which contain a disulfide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    701,    for carbon disulfide.


CLS 424/708
TXT Hydrogen sulfide:

    Compositions under subclass 706 which contain hydrogen sulfide.


CLS 424/709
TXT Sulfate:

    Compositions under subclass 703 which contain a sulfate.

    (1)     Note.  Synonyms/Examples.  Sulfuric acid salt.


CLS 424/710
TXT Ammonium sulfate:

    Compositions under subclass 709 which contain ammonium sulfate.


CLS 424/711
TXT Sulfites or thiosulfates:

    Compositions under subclass 703 which contain sulfites or thiosulfates.


CLS 424/712
TXT Sulfur dioxide:

    Compositions under subclass 703 which contain sulfur dioxide.


CLS 424/713
TXT With added organic compound:

    Compositions under subclass 703 which contain in addition to elemental
    sulfur, or an inorganic compound thereof an organic compound.


CLS 424/714
TXT Plant extract of undetermined constitution:

    Composition under subclass 713 wherein the organic compound is of
    undetermined constitution and derived from a plant.


CLS 424/715
TXT Carbonate:

    Compositions under subclass 600 which contain a carbonate.

    (1)     Note.  Synonyms/Examples:  Potash is presumed to be potassium
    carbonate in older patents.


CLS 424/716
TXT Ammonium carbonate:

    Compositions under subclass 715 which contain ammonium carbonate.


CLS 424/717
TXT Bicarbonate:

    Compositions under subclass 715 which contain a bicarbonate.

    (1)     Note.  Synonyms/Examples.  Sodium bicarbonate.


CLS 424/718
TXT Nitrates or nitrites or nitric acid or nitrogen oxides:

    Compositions under subclass 600 which contain inorganic nitrates or
    nitrites or nitric acid or nitrogen oxides.

    (1)     Note.  Synonyms/Examples.  Saltpeter, gunpowder.


CLS 424/719
TXT Ammonia or ammonium compound containing:

    Compositions under subclass 600 which contain either ammonia or an ammonium
    compound.


CLS 424/720
TXT Ammonium chloride:

    Compositions under subclass 719 which contain ammonium chloride.

    (1)     Note.  Synonyms/Examples:  Muriate of ammonia, sal ammoniac.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    Appropriate subclasses for ammonium chloride containing compositions
    described as releasing chlorine gas.


CLS 424/721
TXT Aqueous ammonia containing:

    Compositions under subclass 719 which contain aqueous ammonia.


CLS 424/722
TXT Alkali metal or alkaline earth containing:

    Compositions under subclass 600 which contain an alkali metal or alkaline
    earth or inorganic compounds thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Synonyms/Examples.  Sodium hydroxide.


CLS 424/723
TXT Elemental bromine or bromine compound containing:

    Compositions under subclass 600 which contain elemental bromine or an
    inorganic bromine compound.


CLS 424/724
TXT Silicon dioxide containing:

    Compositions under subclass 600 which contain silicon dioxide.

    (1)     Note.  Typically the patents in this subclass are pre-1920 patents
    containing animal plant and mineral extracts.  Silicon dioxide is typically
    the only identifiable inorganic constituents of the composition.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS
    RELATED TO SUBCLASSES 130.1 THROUGH 283.1


CLS 424/800
TXT ANTIBODY OR FRAGMENT THEREOF WHOSE AMINO ACID SEQUENCE IS DISCLOSED IN
    WHOLE OR IN PART:

    Subject matter under the class definition involving an antibody or fragment
    thereof whose amino acid sequence is disclosed in whole or in part.


CLS 424/801
TXT INVOLVING ANTIBODY OR FRAGMENT THEREOF PRODUCED BY RECOMBINANT DNA
    TECHNOLOGY:

    Subject matter under the class definition involving an antibody or fragment
    thereof produced by recombinant DNA technology.


CLS 424/802
TXT ANTIBODY OR ANTIGEN-BINDING FRAGMENT THEREOF THAT BINDS GRAM-POSITIVE
    BACTERIA:

    Subject matter under the class definition involving an antibody or
    antigen-binding fragment thereof that binds gram-positive bacteria.


CLS 424/803
TXT ANTIBODY OR ANTIGEN-BINDING FRAGMENT THEREOF THAT BINDS GRAM-NEGATIVE
    BACTERIA:

    Subject matter under the class definition involving an antibody or fragment
    thereof that binds gram-negative bacteria.


CLS 424/804
TXT INVOLVING IgG3, IgG4, IgA, OR IgY:

    Subject matter under the class definition involving immunoglobulin IgG3,
    IgG4, IgA, or IgY.

    (1)     Note.  IgY is similar to IgG and is found only in birds.


CLS 424/805
TXT INVOLVING IgE or IgD:

    Subject matter under the class definition involving immunoglobulin IgE or
    IgD.


CLS 424/806
TXT INVOLVING IgM:

    Subject matter under the class definition involving immunoglobulin IgM.


CLS 424/807
TXT Monoclonal:

    Subject matter under subclass 806 involving a monoclonal antibody that is
    IgM.


CLS 424/808
TXT Human:

    Subject matter under subclass 807 involving a human monoclonal antibody
    that is IgM.


CLS 424/809
TXT INVOLVING IMMUNOGLOBULIN OR ANTIBODY FRAGMENT (E.G., F(abi)2, Fabi, Fab,
    Fv, Fc, HEAVY CHAIN, LIGHT CHAIN, ETC.):

    Subject matter under the class definition involving an immunoglobulin or
    antibody fragment.


CLS 424/810
TXT INVOLVING AUTOIMMUNITY, ALLERGY, IMMEDIATE HYPERSENSITIVITY, DELAYED
    HYPERSENSITIVITY, IMMUNOSUPPRESSION, IMMUNOTOLERANCE, OR ANERGY:

    Subject matter under the class definition involving autoimmunity, allergy,
    immediate hypersensitivity, delayed hypersensitivity, immunosuppression,
    immunotolerance, or anergy.


CLS 424/811
TXT INVOLVING SEX SELECTION OR CONTRACEPTION:

    Subject matter under the class definition involving sex selection or
    contraception.


CLS 424/812
TXT LIPOSOME COMPRISING AN ANTIBODY, ANTIBODY FRAGMENT, ANTIGEN, OR OTHER
    SPECIFIC OR NONSPECIFIC IMMUNOEFFECTOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition involving a liposome comprising
    an antibody, an antibody fragment, an antigen, or another specific or
    nonspecific immunoeffector.


CLS 424/813
TXT VIRAL VACCINE FOR BOVINE SPECIES (E.G., CATTLE, ETC.):

    Subject matter under the class definition involving a viral vaccine
    designated for use in bovine species such as cattle.


CLS 424/814
TXT VIRAL VACCINE FOR  OVINE  SPECIES (E.G., SHEEP, ETC.):

    Subject matter under the class definition involving a viral vaccine
    designated for use in ovine species such as sheep.


CLS 424/815
TXT VIRAL VACCINE FOR PORCINE SPECIES (E.G., SWINE, ETC.):

    Subject matter under the class definition involving a viral vaccine
    designated for use in porcine species such as swine.


CLS 424/816
TXT VIRAL VACCINE FOR AVIAN SPECIES (E.G., POULTRY OR OTHER BIRDS, ETC.):

    Subject matter under the class definition involving a viral vaccine
    designated for use in avian species such as poultry or other birds.


CLS 424/817
TXT VIRAL VACCINE FOR FISH:

    Subject matter under the class definition involving a viral vaccine
    designated for use in fish.


CLS 424/818
TXT VIRAL VACCINE FOR CANIDAE OR MUSTELIDAE (E.G., DOGS, FOXES, MINKS, ETC.):

    Subject matter under the class definition involving a viral vaccine
    designated for use in species belonging to the family Canidae, such as dogs
    or foxes, or in species belonging to the family Mustelidae, such as minks.


CLS 424/819
TXT VIRAL VACCINE FOR FELINE SPECIES (E.G., CATS, ETC.):

    Subject matter under the class definition involving a viral vaccine
    designated for use in feline species such as cats.


CLS 424/820
TXT VIRAL VACCINE FOR EQUINE SPECIES (E.G., HORSES, ETC.):

    Subject matter under the class definition involving a viral vaccine
    designated for use in equine species such as horses.


CLS 424/821
TXT INVOLVING TEMPERATURE-SENSITIVE MUTANT VIRUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition involving a temperature-sensitive
    mutant virus.


CLS 424/822
TXT INVOLVING TK- VIRUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition involving a tk- virus, which
    produces no active thymidine kinase.


CLS 424/823
TXT BACTERIAL VACCINE FOR BOVINE SPECIES (E.G., CATTLE, ETC.):

    Subject matter under the class definition involving a bacterial vaccine
    designated for use in bovine species such as cattle.


CLS 424/824
TXT BACTERIAL VACCINE FOR OVINE SPECIES (E.G., SHEEP, ETC.):

    Subject matter under the class definition involving a bacterial vaccine
    designated for use in ovine species such as sheep.


CLS 424/825
TXT BACTERIAL VACCINE FOR PORCINE SPECIES (E.G., SWINE, ETC.):

    Subject matter under the class definition involving a bacterial vaccine
    designated for use in porcine species such as swine.


CLS 424/826
TXT BACTERIAL VACCINE FOR AVIAN SPECIES (E.G., POULTRY OR OTHER BIRDS, ETC.):

    Subject matter under the class definition involving a bacterial vaccine
    designated for use in avian species such as poultry or other birds.


CLS 424/827
TXT BACTERIAL VACCINE FOR FISH:

    Subject matter under the class definition involving a bacterial vaccine
    designated for use in fish.


CLS 424/828
TXT BACTERIAL VACCINE FOR CANIDAE OR MUSTELIDAE (E.G., DOGS, FOXES, MINKS,
    ETC.):

    Subject matter under the class definition involving a bacterial vaccine
    designated for use in species belonging to the family Canidae, such as dogs
    or foxes, or in species belonging to the family Mustelidae, such as minks.


CLS 424/829
TXT BACTERIAL VACCINE FOR EQUINE SPECIES (E.G., HORSES, ETC.):

    Subject matter under the class definition involving a bacterial vaccine
    designated for use in equine species such as horses.


CLS 424/830
TXT INVOLVING TEMPERATURE-SENSITIVE MUTANT BACTERIUM:

    Subject matter under the class definition involving a temperature-sensitive
    mutant bacterium.


CLS 424/831
TXT INVOLVING CAPSULAR POLYSACCHARIDE OF BACTERIUM (E.G., POLYRIBOSYL RIBITOL
    PHOSPHATE (PRP), ETC.):

    Subject matter under the class definition involving a capsular
    polysaccharide of a bacterium.


CLS 424/832
TXT INVOLVING BACTERIAL TOXIN THAT HAS MODIFIED AMINO ACID SEQUENCE:

    Subject matter under the class definition involving a bacterial toxin that
    has an amino acid sequence that differs from that found in nature.

    (1)     Note.  Such modification may render the toxin nontoxic, but still
    antigenic.


CLS 424/900
TXT In vivo diagnostic or in vivo test agent which contains an additional
    ingredient to reduce the toxicity or side effects of the active ingredient:

    Subject matter involving a diagnostic or test agent to be used in vivo
    which contains an additional ingredient to reduce the toxicity of the
    active diagnostic or test ingredient.


CLS 425/
TTL PLASTIC ARTICLE OR EARTHEN- WARE SHAPING OR TREATING:   APPARATUS

CLS 425/
TXT CONTENTS



    I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    II.     GLOSSARY

    III.    LINES WITH OTHER CLASSES AND MISCELLANEOUS SEARCH NOTES

    o-O-o



    I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    A.      This is the generic class for:

    (1)     Apparatus including a molding surface which either shapes a fluent
    or bulk material, which material has plasticity as a property, into a
    self-sustaining article or preform of desired shape or which reshapes or
    resizes a plastic or "green" preform or product, not provided for elsewhere.

    (2)     Apparatus for shaping of molten materials including metal, but
    excluding glass, where no molding surface is employed, e.g., by melt
    comminution or spheroidizing.

    (3)     Apparatus for treating (e.g., vulcanizing, etc.), a product made by
    the apparatus of this class, not provided for elsewhere.

    (4)     Apparatus for randomly depositing and bonding (uniting) particulate
    material, not provided for elsewhere.

    (5)     A combination of apparatus of this class with any diverse working
    or treating apparatus which combination is not provided for elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  Caveat relating to administration of this class. Only the
    assignment of "original" copies of patents issued after 1934 are to be used
    as evidence of appropriate classification within the class.

    (2)     Note.  Class 425 does not provide for a product made by the
    apparatus of the class.  A specific article is classified with the
    respective art class to which it belongs, (e.g., a rubber glove is provided
    for in Class 2, Apparel, subclass 168, etc.).

    II.     GLOSSARY

    AND

    When used in a subclass title indicates plural basic subject matter of this
    class.  And/or has not been used; see "OR".

    BLOWING

    Forming a plastic mass or preform by introducing gas under pressure within
    the mass or preform.

    BOND

    Uniting by adhesive means or fusion (a mechanical interlock is excluded).

    BRAKE

    A baker's kneading machine.  In bread making "braking" is kneading.

    BULK MATERIAL

    A mass or pile of stock material lacking any shape that contributes to a
    final shape after molding.  Bulk material may have a definite shape but it
    must not contribute its shape to a final desired form.

    CASTING

    Forming a preform by pouring fluent stock onto or into a shaping surface.
    Synonym:  Teeming.

    CLOSED SYSTEM

    Plural fluid containing elements in fluid tight relation when under
    pressure.

    COMPOSITE

    A preform or product made of diverse materials, each of which is
    identifiable, at least in part, in the final product.

    CONDENSATE

    Material derived by a change in physical state from a vapor to a liquid.

    CONVOLUTE

    To twist or to coil with one part of a preform overlapping another part.

    CORE

    A separable static male shaping surface providing a hollow portion in a
    casting.  A core is differentiated from a plunger in that a plunger moves
    during a shaping operation.

    CORRUGATE

    To shape a layer into parallel rows of wavelike folds extending along its
    width or length and transverse to the thickness.

    CULLET

    Waste or broken plastic.

    CURE

    A chemical or physical treatment to obtain a stable state of a preform or
    product, (e.g., by vulcanizing, drying, etc.).

    CYCLE

    A sequence of manipulative steps governed by a mechanism such as a cam,
    timer, program means, etc.

    DIE

    An apparatus part having a work contacting part for shaping or reshaping
    the work.

    DISTINCT

    An independent entity.

    DIVERSE

    Differing from one another.

    DOUGH

    A soft semi-solid mass capable of being kneaded or of being shaped into a
    self-sustaining form, (e.g., clay bread dough, etc.).

    DRUM

    A hollow cylinder, substantially circular in cross-section, which has a
    surface used as a shaping or working surface.

    DYNAMIC SUBJECT MATTER

    Apparatus in which motion of a part is essential to accomplish a desired
    function, (e.g., shaping, cutting, etc.).

    EARTHENWARE

    A product made of (1) slightly porous opaque clay fired at low heat; (2)
    inorganic settable ingredient containing, (e.g., Portland cement type,
    etc.), (3) powdered metal (4) ceramics other than glass or slag; (5) alkali
    metal silicate containing.

    EJECTOR

    Means to release or remove a product from a shaping surface.

    EMBOSSING

    Altering a surface configuration only.

    ENDLESS

    A closed loop, such as the peripheral surface of a roll, a cylinder or a
    drum.

    EXTRUDANT

    A shaped body of material formed by forcing the material through a
    confining, shaping orifice.

    FEMALE MOLD

    A receptacle having structure for imparting a desired configuration to a
    removable product formed therein from stock material.

    FLARE

    Reshaping a tubular portion by spreading a portion outwardly.

    FLUENT MATERIAL

    A material which lacks ability to retain a shape at working temperatures,
    but instead readily conforms in shape to the configuration of a surface
    upon or within which it is placed.

    GANG MOLD

    A single mold having plural shaping compartments in which plural articles
    are formed by one operation.

    "GREEN" PRODUCT

    Self-sustaining but not permanently set or cured, (e.g., unvulcanized
    rubber, etc.).

    INDEFINITE LENGTH WORK

    A self-sustaining body having a longitudinal dimension which is effectively
    infinite.

    IN SITU

    Remaining in the same place.

    INTERFACIAL BOND

    Cohesion among common boundaries of particles material without a mechanical
    interlock.

    KNEADING

    Working a material by intermittent squeezing and relieving a semi-solid
    material such as dough, rubber, etc.  Synonym:  BRAKING

    LAST

    A form for shaping a shoe.

    LAW OF A MACHINE

    Control of sequential operations of machine parts by electrical or
    mechanical program means with operator control reduced to mere starting or
    stopping of operation of the machine.

    MANDREL

    A shaping form over or around which material is shaped or a preform is
    resized.

    MECHANICAL-INTERLOCK BOND

    A joint made by random lapping of discrete pieces, (e.g., as in a bale of
    paper, etc.).

    MINERAL PLASTIC

    A naturally occurring mineral which can be formed into a stone-like product
    by grinding, wetting, shaping and burning.

    NECK RING

    The portion of a segmented mold which forms the neck portion of a hollow
    article.

    OR

    This conjunction is used in this class to indicate either the combination
    of two subcombinations or either one of the subcombinations.

    PALLET

    A supporting surface used as a mold bottom or as a green material handling
    device.

    PARISON

    An intermediate hollow preform from which a bottle or the like is made.

    PARTICULATE MATERIAL

    Minute separate particles which are handled as bulk and not as individual
    pieces.

    PARTING MATERIAL

    A material that prevents adhesion or sticking of work to the apparatus.

    PLASTIC ARTICLE OR EARTHENWARE

    This generic title embraces the types of material, which have the common
    property of plasticity under the working conditions of the apparatus and
    are shaped or reshaped by apparatus within the scope of the class.  These
    materials include the following:  (1) natural or synthetic resins or gums;
    (2) green ceramic compositions, (e.g., clay, etc.); (3) particulate
    material or powder including powdered metal; (4) melts of solids or
    softened solids except of glass or of metal where a shaping surface is
    used; (5) slurries except of paper pulp; (6) dough or paste, including
    edible types.

    PLASTICITY

    The property of a material to flow either in a fluent or conditioned solid
    state, whereby it may be shaped or reshaped into a self-sustaining preform
    or product.

    PLATEN

    Means providing a press-type shaping surface.

    PREFORM

    A self-sustaining intermediate object having a configuration that
    contributes in part to the shape or structure of a final product.

    PRODUCT

    The material or article which has been shaped, reshaped or treated by the
    apparatus; the result of a shaping, reshaping or treating operation. (Note:
     material which may be "product" for one shaping operation may be "work"
    for an ensuing operation).

    PROFILE

    Representation of an object in outline, (e.g., a shape obtain by
    sculpturing, etc.).

    REBEADING

    Restoring a bead or rim on a product, usually a tire.

    RECAPPING

    Restoring the wear surface on a tire casing.

    REGISTERING

    Providing an exact fit of mating parts.

    RESHAPING

    Changing the configuration of a preform to a desired shape (deformation
    involving a surface rather than an entire layer is included).

    RESIZING

    Changing a dimension but not the overall configuration.

    ROLL

    An endless shaping surface which has a substantially circular cross-section.

    SCREED

    An implement used to scrape off or smooth a surface of material which is
    being molded.

    SELF-SUSTAINING

    The capacity to retain an imparted shape.

    SETS

    A group of shaping couples each of which generally comprises plural
    coacting means.

    SEVER

    To separate a portion from a body by cutting or breaking or perforating.

    SINTERING

    The coalescence of parts into one solid mass through heating, generally
    with melting limited to a surface layer only of each particle.

    SPINNERET

    Means providing a shaping orifice of a size to produce pliable filaments.

    SPINNING

    Extrusion molding of indefinite length filaments.

    STATIC APPARATUS

    Apparatus having no relatively moving parts during the forming or shaping
    operation.

    STOCK

    A material being worked on or treated by apparatus.  Synonym:  WORK

    SUBSTRATE

    A workpiece to which a layer or coating of material is applied. Synonym:
    BASE

    SURFACE DEFORMATION

    A reshaping operation involving only a surface of a preform, i.e.,
    partially through the thickness of a layer.

    TAMP

    To compact by a series of blows and thereby eliminate air pockets or other
    voids.

    TEEMING

    See Casting.

    TEMPLATE

    A pattern used as a guide to the form of a piece being made.

    TRAP CHAMBER

    A compartment having means for providing a measured charge of material
    passing therethrough.

    TRAVELING

    A movement to or from a station, (e.g., shaping, feeding or ejecting
    station, etc.), as opposed to movement at a station essential to an
    operation, (e.g., mere mold opening or closing, etc.).

    TREATMENT

    Altering or actively maintaining some property or a product or preform.

    VEHICLE

    A fluid, generally a liquid, employed to carry stock material to a molding
    surface.

    WITH

    As used in a subclass title indicates the combination of basic subject
    matter of this class and that of a diverse class.

    WORK

    The material being shaped, reshaped or treated by the apparatus.  Synonym:
    STOCK

    III.    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, subclass 111 for a rolling pin either combined with
    or convertible to other apparatus.

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, appropriate subclasses for multioperation
    machines, for tools and adjuncts specialized to the making, assembling and
    repairing of foot coverings, (e.g., shoes, etc.), and parts thereof even
    though combined with a Class 425 means for molding or vulcanizing; see
    especially subclasses 21+ for a blank molding sole machine, subclass 53.1
    for a stretching last or former and subclass 128 for a shoe or boot last of
    general application.  Class 425 provides for the subcombination of a shoe
    last support and a female mold for casting a composite of a shoe preform
    and fluent material.

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses 144+ for a process or
    apparatus for assembling fibers bearing some relationship to each other or
    with some other material.

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclasses 71+, for apparatus for
    stretching or spreading a cloth or woven fabric including a fabric in the
    form of a plastic film.  Plastic film stretching devices are, per se, or
    with film treating means, provided for in Class 26.

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, appropriate subclass for apparatus
    producing textile products by involving mechanical interengagement of
    fibers, strands or strandlike strips and including auxiliary devices
    related thereto, especially subclasses 240+ for stretching apparatus for
    finishing thread including a monofilament type, (e.g., nylon, etc.).
    Further, see subclasses 118+ and 121 for the compacting of fibrous material
    into tampons or wads or for such compacting combined with additional
    treatments, e.g., drying, where not provided for elsewhere and see the
    search notes thereunder.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 33+ for miscellaneous manufacturing
    apparatus comprising diverse means for working material comprising (1) a
    metal working device combined with a Class 425 shaping or reshaping
    apparatus and not provided for elsewhere, or (2) means for shaping a
    nonmetal by slitting or cutting combined with assembly means not provided
    for elsewhere, or (3) diverse means for working metal.

    30,     Cutlery, appropriate subclasses for an implement type cutter which
    shapes a preform by cutting only, i.e., wherein material flow or removal is
    restricted to that inherent in the cutting; the combination of a Class 30
    device with a Class 425 means is provided for in Class 425.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses
    for drying apparatus, per se.  A combination of Class 34 drying apparatus
    and Class 425 apparatus is provided for in Class 425 unless the molding
    apparatus is recited by name only.

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus for producing a smooth appearance on a textile or fabric surface
    by pressing, stretching, etc.; see the notes under the class definition.

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclasses 634+, for shaping
    apparatus to form fuel briquets including means peculiar to the manufacture
    of a fuel composition.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses for a
    static building structure, especially subclasses 749.1+ for a machine or
    implement used in the construction thereof and not provided for elsewhere.

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 111+ for a packaging apparatus combined
    with means for reshaping package contents material either before, after or
    during the packaging operation; subclass 140 for packaging apparatus
    combined with means producing a cover material and subclasses 558+ for the
    combination of means forming or partially forming a receptacle and
    subsequent filling means.



    (1)     Note.  Class 425 provides for depositing material in a confining
    receptacle to impart shape to the material and in which the product
    therefrom is removed prior to marketing, shipping, etc.  Class 425 also
    provides for molding by depositing on a flate sheet divider even though the
    divider remains with the product.

    (2)     Note.  Means for encapsulating liquid droplets by simultaneous
    extrusion of a drop of liquid and a drop of fluent but hardenable
    encapsulating material is provided for in Class 425, subclass 5.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, appropriate subclasses
    for means for producing textile strands, yarns, threads, cords and other
    miscellaneous composites of filaments or fibers and the combination thereof
    with means for attenuating, drafting and drawing fibrous material, or the
    combination thereof with means upstream for covering cores.  Class 57
    provides for the combination of a Class 425 filament forming means recited
    by name only combined with a Class 57 means; otherwise the combination is
    provided for in Class 425.

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, appropriate subclasses for
    metal working specific to the products of this class, see especially
    subclasses 16+ for a combination of diverse working means combined in a
    machine for combination of diverse working means for producing a horseshoe.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 340+ for the combination of specific
    refrigeration producing means and coacting shaping surface means for
    shaping or retaining the shape of a material being congealed with or
    without a product release means; however, such a combination including
    additional manufacturing means, (e.g., a popsickle stick inserter, etc.),
    is provided for in Class 425, except where the additional means is a
    severing means for a congealed product.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, appropriate subclasses for processes and
    apparatus for molding or shaping glass after being melted or changed to a
    plastic or softened state.

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses for deformation of metal
    stock by application of mechanical stress to the stock while in a
    self-sustaining state, (i.e., not molten or powdered); Class 72 is not only
    the residual locus for such deformation of metallic stock (including a
    composite with a nonmetal, e.g., metal and paper laminates, etc.), but also
    is the residual locus for deformation of nondefinitive material or
    unspecified or unidentified material which is construed to be metal by use
    of art terms such as ingot, rail, axle blank, etc.  The combination of
    Class 72 apparatus and Class 425 apparatus is provided for in Class 29,
    Metal Working, subclasses 33+ unless directed to a specific article
    manufacturing class.

    79,     Button Making, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for making a
    button other than solely by molding apparatus provided for in Class 425.

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses for machine type apparatus for
    reshaping a green ceramic, earthenware or other preform of plastic material
    by mere cutting or severing without material flow other than that inherent
    in the cutting or severing.  The combination of means shaping or reshaping
    such material with a cutting or severing means is provided for in Class
    425.  In general, mere cutting other than by a means cutting off of flow by
    a valving action on fluent material is not, per se, provided for in Class
    425.  (See the collection of notes under the class definition of Class 83
    for various aspects of cutting, drilling, turning, etc.).

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, appropriate
    subclasses for apparatus for making textile strands or fabrics by means
    braiding, knotting or intertwisting strands.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 324+ for means for
    shaping or reshaping a fluent, (e.g., batter, etc.), or plastic, (e.g.,
    dough, etc.) type edible combined with means for cooking or baking, see
    especially subclasses 372+ for a waffle iron and subclasses 450.1+ for
    apparatus for making a composite edible by preform assembly means or by
    package making means where the container or wrapper is an edible, (e.g.,
    means filling a doughnut, cream puff, etc.).



    (1)     Note.  Class 425 provides for apparatus to make a composite edible
    within a female mold or extrusion cavity and for apparatus to shape a bulk
    fluent edible into a self-sustaining product, or to reshape an edible
    preform, with or without means for applying a coating.

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses for a press apparatus not provided
    for elsewhere.  Class 100 provides for a press, including means for
    compacting material into bale, of the type providing a mechanical
    interlock, (e.g., hay, scrap paper, etc.), to form a bale, etc.  Class 425
    provides for shaping or reshaping apparatus of the press forming type
    having a shaping surface including means for making a self-sustaining
    article by compacting a mass of powder, granules or dust where the article
    retains its shape by interfacial bonds among adjacent particles generated
    by pressing.

    (1)     Note.  Class 425, subclass 77 is the locus providing for an ultra
    high pressure generating device disclosed for use in changing or
    controlling chemical or physical properties of a material, (e.g., diamond
    maker, etc.).

    101,    Printing, subclasses 3.1+ for printing apparatus comprising
    embossing or penetrating means for deforming the material receiving the
    printing.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses for
    plastic compositions.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for coating
    a base including a machine controlled relationship between a coating
    applicator and the base, see especially subclass 44 for means temporarily
    deforming, (e.g., by unraveling, etc.), to enhance a coating operation.



    (1)     Note.  Class 425 provides for (1) the combination of a coating
    apparatus and means including a shaping surface for shaping or reshaping
    plastic-ware or earthenware, (2) means molding a facing type coating on a
    base by a stencil mold means confining a fluent material therein, (3)
    extrusion means applying a coating to a preform moving through the
    extrusion orifice, which orifice shapes the coating to a configuration
    other than that of the preform.  (Patents which disclose a wire coating
    extrusion device for Class 118 but claim no wire handling features are
    assigned to Class 118).

    (2)     Note.  A trowel for controlling coating thickness combined with a
    Class 118 coating apparatus is provided for in Class 118 as a perfecting
    feature.

    (3)     Note.  Class 118 provides for application of fluent gasket material
    in a bottle cap; however, the combination with a means for subsequent
    shaping of the gasket is provided for in Class 425.

    125,    Stone Working, appropriate subclasses for a tool or machine for
    working upon stone or stone-like material after quarrying from its native
    position. See the collection of search notes under the class definition for
    related subject matter.

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, subclasses 18+ for means treating
    crystals of materials of the class including purging and molding.

    131,    Tobacco, appropriate subclasses under subclasses 280+ for apparatus
    for making a cigar or cigarette including means for molding or forming and
    subclasses 111+ for an apparatus for making a tobacco plug or a compressed
    shaped tobacco product.

    140,    Wireworking, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for shaping or
    deforming wire or the assembly and uniting of wire with wire or nonwire
    material by twisting, bending, kinking, looping, etc.; see especially
    subclasses 3+ for apparatus for making wire fabric and subclasses 71+ for
    apparatus for making or forming an article from wire; see the search notes
    in the class definition.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    appropriate subclasses for a fluent material dispensing means having means
    providing a combination relationship with a receiver or a receiver coacting
    means; see the collection of notes in section III of the class definition
    in regard to filling apparatus combined with treating or manufacturing
    apparatus.

    144,    Woodworking, for a machine or process for working in wood not
    elsewhere classified; see the search notes in the class definition.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for laminating apparatus including means for
    assembling and uniting preforms, not elsewhere provided for, even though
    combined with an upstream or downstream separate and distinct shaping or
    reshaping apparatus, see especially subclasses 394.1+ for a tire body
    building type, subclasses 425+ for laminating apparatus comprising means
    for longitudinally progressive helical winding of uncured material such
    that the product is homogeneous with an exterior shape determined by a core
    or mandrel, subclasses 433+ for means for uniting flexible strands, and
    subclasses 500+ for a Class 156 laminating apparatus combined with distinct
    means for casting, plastic molding or extruding.  With respect to the line
    between Class 156 and Class 425, Class 425 provides for laminating
    apparatus comprising (1) means to make and to bond preforms within the same
    mold cavity (2) mold means uniting preforms and simultaneously shaping the
    joint formed by plastic flow of bulk or fluent bonding material or of
    plastic flow of at least one preform except in tire building apparatus, (3)
    means providing a mold frame sandwiched between spaced preforms, which
    frame shapes a bonding material therein, (4) mold means shaping fluent
    material and uniting the fluent material while in a moldable state in the
    mold to a preform, and (5) vulcanizing means including means for supporting
    an article being vulcanized, which supporting means conforms to the shape
    of the article.

    157,    Wheelwright Machines, subclasses 1.1+ for a tire mounting or
    demounting apparatus, subclass 8 for tire tighteners, subclass 11 for tire
    removers and subclass 13 for grooving, slitting or lacerating rubber tires.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, appropriate subclasses for an
    apparatus or process for making paper by deposition of fibers from a liquid
    suspension thereof to form an interfelted product, especially subclasses
    289+ for an apparatus to form a running length product and subclasses 382+
    for a foraminous forming mold to make discrete articles by pulp molding.

    163,    Needle and Pin Making, appropriate subclasses for multi-operation
    apparatus for the manufacture of crocheting,  knitting and sewing needles
    as well as garment-fastening pins either of the straight or safety type.

    164,    Metal Founding, appropriate subclasses for a metal founding process
    or apparatus, especially subclasses 159+ for apparatus to shape a forming
    surface, (e.g., sand molds, etc.), subclasses 272+ for means to shape
    molten metallic material against a shaping surface and subclasses 374+ for
    a foundry mold flask or flask section. Class 425 provides for shaping of
    molten metal without use of a shaping surface, (e.g., by molten metal
    comminution, speroidizing, etc.), and for shaping of powdered metal on a
    molding surface.  A disclosure of subject matter for both Classes 164 and
    425 is assigned to Class 425 unless the claims are restricted solely to the
    Class 164 subject matter.

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclasses 60+ for a dough dividing machine which
    weighs out a definite quantity; a dough dividing machine which merely
    measures a quantity by volume and simultaneously provides a shaped preform
    is provided for in Class 425.

    199,    Type Casting, appropriate subclasses for printing type forming
    means, see especially subclasses 47+ for casting mechanism for integral
    line type including a mold and subclasses 80+ for separate type casting
    mechanisms including a mold.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 281 for an
    electro-forming mold or strip plate and subclass 298.01 for means forming
    an object by cathode sputtering.

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclasses for electric heating
    devices, per se, or for certain specific combinations provided for therein;
    see especially subclasses 149+ for means heating metal electrically
    combined with forging or shaping means and see the search notes thereunder,
    and subclasses 420+ for an electrical heating device combined with a
    crucible or furnace adapted to hold meltable material.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for dispensing means, per se,
    some of which dispense semi-solids, (e.g., tooth paste, putty, etc.), where
    there is no intent that a dispensing orifice produces a self-sustaining
    preform having a shape that is reflected in a final product.  (See the
    notes under subclass 87 of Class 425).

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, is the generic class for machines and machine
    methods of making, except by knitting or weaving, repairing and maintaining
    in proper condition, apparel and analogous articles, (e.g., household
    linens, etc.), especially subclasses 12+ for a hat shaping press,
    subclasses 28+ for an apparel fluting press and subclasses 52+ for a device
    for pressing, forming, molding or stretching articles of apparel.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, especially subclasses 15.1+ for metal fusion
    bonding apparatus combined with means to deform work, or a filler or a flux
    portion before fusion bonding.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses for a comminutor for a solid of the extrusion type, (e.g., meat
    or vegetable grinder or "ricer", etc.), which produces a porous bulk mass
    of material comminuted rather than a self-sustaining shaped product.  The
    combination of a Class 425 shaping means and a comminutor is provided for
    in Class 425; a patent disclosing both types will be assigned to Class 425
    unless the claims are limited to a Class 241 type.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, appropriate subclasses for a
    combination of a nominal filament or web forming means combined with a
    Class 242 device; however, Class 425 provides for the combination whenever
    the forming means is define more specifically than by name only.

    249,    Static Molds, appropriate subclasses for static means for shaping
    fluent material; see especially subclasses 1+ for an in situ construction
    or building type form or mold, subclass 54 for a dental prosthodontic type
    of static mold, subclasses 117+ for a container type mold and subclasses
    175+ for a core.  Class 249 provides only for a static subcombination or
    element of Classes 164 and 425.  Class 249 does not provide for dynamic
    apparatus nor for a static mold combined with a diverse function means,
    except for a few specially provided for combinations with perfecting
    devices, where such device is also static and integral with mold or is
    essential thereto, (e.g., a tunnel core with a wheel or skid, etc.).  A
    female mold of a male-female press couple is provided for in Class 249.
    See the amplified line notes in the class definition of Class 249.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses for a process corresponding to an apparatus provided
    for in Class 425.  A patent containing process and apparatus claims of
    equal comprehensiveness will be classified as an "original" in class 264;
    otherwise, the general rule that the most comprehensive claim controls
    placement of the "original" copy will be followed between Class 264 and 425.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclass 249 for apparatus for treating
    and shaping solid metal; apparatus to press and sinter powdered metal is
    provided for in Class 425.  See subclass 160 for apparatus to pelletize or
    ball a metal bearing ore combined with means to sinter, indurate, reduce or
    otherwise metallurgically treat the ore prior to, during or after the
    shaping operation.

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses for a work holder, per se,
    especially subclass 302.1 for a work-underlying support for mixing or
    kneading.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 69+ for working and kneading apparatus for
    rubber or heavy plastics, such apparatus combined with discharge means
    which cooperate with a molding will be classified in Class 425.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 84+ for
    dynamic copying of a record.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, appropriate subclasses for
    a coating implement with a material supply including a former which is
    capable of shaping the coating in one dimension only.  Class 425 provides
    for similar structure having means for shaping a coating in plural
    dimensions.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 245.1+ for non-coating apparatus for
    crystallization of non-metal, non-glass material with no intent to provide
    a shaped article and with no intent to grow single-crystal.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 77+, for a heating furnace with work cooling
    structure; subclasses 120+, for a heating furnace or kiln; and subclasses
    258+, for structure supporting ceramic material during heat treatment.

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 25+ for dental apparatus including a shaping
    or reshaping means restricted to dental use.  See particular subclasses 34+
    for dental impression devices.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 81+ for a teaching device
    for sculpturing.

    452,    Butchering, subclasses 35+ for sausage stuffer and subclasses 46+
    for a sausage linkers.  Class 425 provides for dynamic meat briquetting
    other than stuffing comminuted meat into a sausage casing.

    483,    Tool Changing generally for a process or apparatus including a tool
    transfer means combined with either a tool support or storage means.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, for working previously made paper into an article of
    commerce (e.g., a bag, box, envelope, etc.) without thinning flow.  Class
    425 provides for such apparatus wherein there is thinning flow.  See the
    line note to Class 425 expressed under the definition of Class 493.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, appropriate subclasses for ceramic
    compositions, or process for preparation, including specific firing or
    crystallization or pore forming thereof.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    249+ for the enclosing or encapsulating of hazardous or toxic waste.

    INDEX TO SEARCH NOTES AND "SEARCH CLASSES"

    Class   Class 425 Subclass

    7       main, 184, 472

    8       445

    12      main, 119, 275, 317, 403

    15      87, 182, 225, 458, 460

    19      main, 80.1, 81.1, 82.1

    24      801, 807, 814

    26      main, 66, 335, 383

    28      main, 66, 80.1, 335, 445

    29      main, 6, 11, 48, 78, 181,324,
            387.1, 471, 472, 814

    30      main, 276, 277, 290

    34      main, 67, 73, 445

    38      main

    44      main

    52      main

    53      main, 5, 89, 317,
            447,456, 804

    57      main, 66, 67

    59      main, 317

    62      main, 6, 317

    65      main, 6, 7, 8 10,

            66, 74, 80.1, 90, 107,
            181,182, 183, 289,
            324.1, 326.1,332, 363,
            383, 387.1, 392,393, 394,
            400, 416, 425,436, 445,
            447, 450.1, 457, 461

    68      67

    69      317

    72      main, 3, 6, 72.1, 78, 174,
            317, 383, 436, 459, 461

    73      77, 135

    75      78, 470

    79      main, 801

    81      12

    82      263, 289, 804

    83      main, 140, 289, 290, 294,295,
            304

    87      main

    99      main, 110, 382

    100     main, 11, 15, 77,
            329, 330, 335, 338, 353,
            356, 363, 364, 367

    101     main, 105, 811

    106     main, 90, 470

    116     169

    118     main, 71, 87, 90, 91, 93,
            105, 110, 262, 269, 273,
            425, 435, 460, 461, 811

    125     main

    127     main

    128     456, 816

    131     main, 317, 324, 383

    132     391

    134     225, 445

    137     53, 86, 88, 146, 182,
            183, 447

    138     11, 27

    140     main, 805

    141     main, 447

    144     main, 805

    149     1

    152     11, 28

    156     main, 11, 28, 80.1, 89,
            108, 111, 174, 317,
            324, 336, 369, 382, 383,
            403, 470

    157     main, 28, 289

    159     6, 223

    162     main, 85, 269, 317, 376,
            425, 436, 457

    163     main

    164     main, 3, 74, 78, 90,
            107, 110,  126.1,135, 151,

            155, 169, 175, 182, 222, 233,

            289, 383, 387.1, 425, 432,

            436, 439, 447, 450.1, 451,

            453, 468

    165     223

    177     main, 140

    184     107

    188     214

    192     151

    198     471

    199     main, 317

    204     main, 6, 174

    219     main, 77

    221     254

    222     main, 86, 87, 140,  239,
            256, 376.1, 447,448, 458

    223     main, 317, 383, 391, 403

    225     289

    226     66

    228     main

    239     6, 8, 461

    241     main, 6, 317

    242     main, 67

    249     main, 2, 51, 59, 62, 63,64,
            84, 89, 108, 110, 174,182, 284,
            425, 436, 441,442, 443,
            446, 450.1, 453,468, 469

    250     174

    251     146

    252     6

    254     63

    264     main, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,  7, 8,
            10, 11, 28, 63, 76,78, 80, 84,
            89, 90, 111,130, 131.1, 174,
            175, 222, 224, 269, 317,
            383, 387.1, 425, 436, 445,
            447, 457, 461, 803, 814,
            817

    266     main, 78

    269     main

    279     27

    280     62

    285     27, 51, 447

    300     805

    340     169

    359     808

    366     main, 66, 208, 425,
            432

    369     main

    400     385

    401     main, 87, 287, 458

    405     59, 61, 62

    406     100

    414     452

    427     175, 470

    428     403

    432     main, 222, 445, 472

    433     main, 2, 175

    434     main

    452     main

    483     main

    493     main, 334


CLS 425/1
TXT Apparatus under the class definition which employs, as an essential element
    of the shaping force an explosive or thermic composition, charge or device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, appropriate
    subclasses, for explosive and thermic charges, per se. See Note 6 of the
    Class 149 definition for additional search notes.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 84, for the process of shaping a plastic or nonmetallic article by
    the use of an explosive force.


CLS 425/2
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which a portion of a plant or
    animal body structure is employed as an impression pattern to impart its
    shape to a molding material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175+,   for a mold forming means including a flask, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses 148+, for hat forming
    apparatus.

    249,    Static Molds, appropriate subclasses for static molds, per se.  The
    line between Classes 249 and 425 is as follows:  Class 249 will take only
    those female molds, per se, disclosed for shaping material around an
    anatomical body positioned therein. All other molds, (e.g., female molds
    disclosed for retaining material while the body member is pressed therein,
    female molds in which the body member constitutes at least a portion of a
    mold wall, or female molds including means for feeding material thereto,
    etc.), are proper for Class 425.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 222+, for the related process.

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 34+ for devices for taking impressions in
    plastic material inside the mouth.


CLS 425/3
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means to effect a direct
    application of magnetic force to the work or a shape imparting member to
    magnetically hold or manipulate said work or member and facilitate,
    perfect, or expedite a snaping or treating operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174+,   for means involving the direct application of electrical or wave
    energy to the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 54+, for process or apparatus for
    deforming metal by application of an energy field, especially subclass 56,
    wherein kinetic energy of a field is used to deform the metal.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 146+ for metal casting apparatus
    including means to directly apply magnetic force to work or to manipulate
    or hold shaping means.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 405+, for related process; see search notes there under.


CLS 425/4
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means specifically designed
    or modified to cause or aid the generation or expansion of pores within the
    work during or prior to shaping.

    (1)     Note.  To be included herein, the apparatus must include means to
    mechanically introduce a gas into the work, (e.g., gas injection means,
    beaters, gaseous pressure or vacuum chambers, (etc.).  Means causing of
    controlling a chemical reaction, (e.g., heating means, cooling means, means
    mixing reactive ingredients, etc.), are classified in appropriate
    subclasses below even though the reaction results in a formed or porous
    article.  Means injecting steam into an area confining partially expanded
    beads to cause further expansion is within the scope of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    387+,   for reshaping a preform or parison by fluid pressure; see the
    search notes thereto.

    817,    for an art collection of means designed to mold pore formable
    material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 41+, for process of forming pores in an article either
    mechanically or chemically.  See the notes and search notes under Search
    Class 41.


CLS 425/5
TXT Apparatus under the class definition for enclosing normally liquid
    materials within a capsule by forming or molding said capsule around
    discrete droplets or portions of said liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for apparatus for comminuting a liquid or melt materials which are
    normally solids, solidifying said materials and coating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 111+, for a packaging apparatus combined
    with means for shaping the contents material either before, after or during
    packaging, subclass 140 for packing apparatus combined with a cover
    production means, and subclasses 558+, for means forming a receptacle
    combined with downstream filling means; see the search notes in these
    subclasses of Class 5.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 4 for the related process of encapsulating a normally liquid
    material.


CLS 425/6
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means dividing or
    comminuting liquid material to form discrete particles and allowing the
    liquid to solidify while in particulate form.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this and indented subclasses are devices in
    which the particles are solidified while in contact with a shape imparting
    surface.

    (2)     Note.  Where the purpose of the comminution is to effect an
    operation on the material other than that to produce a product of a desired
    size or shape the patent is not included herein, but will be found in the
    class providing for said operation.

    (3)     Note.  Included herein is a machine for making cotton candy.  The
    fibers are of indeterminate length and thus are considered particles as
    opposed to strands or filaments.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 1.22+ for apparatus for making bullets,
    or shot usually involving a plurality of metal working operations, and
    subclasses 4.51+ for the production of metal shreds by a cutting operation.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 74 and 347 for processes and apparatus
    for congealing (freezing) material involving spraying, dripping or
    projecting.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 484, for fiber glass making apparatus
    and processes, subclasses 21.1+ for a process for making self-supporting
    particles from glass or glass-like material and subclass 141, for apparatus
    for disintegrating and solidifying a glass or glass-like melt with a
    cooling fluid.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 274+, for apparatus for extruding
    preformed metal.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, appropriate subclasses for spray type
    concentrating evaporators.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 298.01, for
    coating or forming by cathode sputtering.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses,
    for fluid sprinkling, spraying and diffusing apparatus.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 31+, for
    apparatus for comminuting solid material, even though combined with a prior
    comminuting and solidification of a melted material.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 302+ for process for forming a colloid.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 5+, for related process.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, subclasses 8+ for catalyst composition bead forming process.


CLS 425/7
TXT Apparatus under subclass 6 wherein the means for reducing the liquid or
    melted material comprises a forcible stream of an extraneous fluid directly
    against said material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 519+ and 526+ for apparatus
    utilizing a fluid blast means to form glass fibers or filaments.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 5+, for related process.


CLS 425/8
TXT Apparatus under subclass 6 in which the means for reducing the liquid or
    melted material comprises a member mounted for angular motion around an
    axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 518+ and 523+ for apparatus
    utilizing a slinger, rotating disc, or centrifuge to form glass fibers or
    filaments.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 214+, for
    slinger, splasher or rotary centrifugal fluid distributors.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 8, for related process.


CLS 425/9
TXT Apparatus under subclass 8 comprising means forming fibrous candy.


CLS 425/10
TXT Apparatus under subclass 6 including a separate fluid medium contacting and
    aiding the solidification or generation of formed particles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 141, for glass melt disintegrator and
    solidifer including fluid contact means.  See search notes thereunder.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Articles Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 14, for related process.


CLS 425/11
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means to renew, mend, fix
    or otherwise treat an article so as to put it into better or usable
    condition or to the state of newness as originally manufactured.

    (1)     Note.  To be included herein, the resulting article must be of the
    same general type as the article being repaired or restored.  Mere
    reclaiming of rubber from worn tires, for example, is not included herein
    but classified on some other basis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 402.01+, especially 402.18 for a process
    of reclaiming, renewing or repairing articles for reuse; see the search
    notes thereunder.

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses for presses of general utility,
    especially subclass 231, for a frame type reciprocating press.  As between
    Classes 100 and 156, all tire or tire tube patching presses are considered
    to be specialized and are proper for Class 156.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 97+ for tubular conduit
    repairing devices.

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclasses 367+ for patches for
    resilient tires.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    94+ and appropriate other subclasses for apparatus and process for
    repairing an article by laminating.  The line between Classes 156 and 425
    is as follows:  apparatus wherein no apparent shaping is involved, e.g.,
    opposed pressure members merely applying a patch, and/or valve member and
    vulcanizing same is properly classified within Class 156; apparatus
    utilizing opposed pressure members to give at least two dimensional shape
    or apparatus utilizing the work to afford a shaping cavity, e.g., fusing
    and vulcanizing repair plug with a toroidal preform, is properly classified
    within this or appropriate indented subclasses.  If it is impossible to
    determine whether shaping is involved those patents which disclose tire
    repair means including curved or configured platens are considered proper
    for this class and all patents which disclose tire repair means including
    flat platens are considered proper for Class 156.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 30 and 36 for related process for repairing or restoring a
    device.


CLS 425/12
TXT Apparatus under subclass 11 in which the repair means is both hand portable
    and hand operated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 15.2+ for repair tools for resilient tires.


CLS 425/13
TXT Apparatus under subclass 11 which includes means for introducing fluent
    molding material under pressure to the worn or damaged area.

    (1)     Note.  A cut or blemish in a tire wall or carcass is considered a
    molding cavity.


CLS 425/14
TXT Apparatus under subclass 11 which includes an enclosing form of (1) a
    bendable material (e.g., flexible channel) or (2) a flexible web wrapped
    under tension about the article for applying a force to the repair moldable
    material and the article repair area.


CLS 425/15
TXT Apparatus under subclass 11 in which there are means defining a generally
    "U" shaped pressure channel for only a portion of a tire type article being
    repaired said channel coacting with at least one pressure plate which
    applies a compressive molding force to the repair molding material and the
    repair area of the article.

    (1)     Note.  The pressure plate does not require a flat configuration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 240+, for a box and piston type press apparatus.


CLS 425/16
TXT Apparatus under subclass 15 wherein the pressure channel has at least one
    movable wall.


CLS 425/17
TXT Apparatus under subclass 11 comprising means by which the entire
    circumferential surface of either the tread, sidewalls or bead area of a
    tire type article is replaced.


CLS 425/18
TXT Apparatus under subclass 17 in which the apparatus performs the repair
    operation on two or more tires at the same time.


CLS 425/19
TXT Apparatus under subclass 17 including means to position or center the tire
    carcass with respect to the mold, or means to align the mold with respect
    to the tire or tire carcass.


CLS 425/20
TXT Apparatus under subclass 17 comprising a recapping mold so made as to
    completely encircle the circumference of the tire being repaired, but
    extending only partly across the width of the sidewall.


CLS 425/21
TXT Apparatus under subclass 20 including bead spreading means for reducing the
    diameter of the tire or to spread the tire in a manner to cause a proper
    fitting and force applying relationship with the tire and the recapping
    mold.


CLS 425/22
TXT Apparatus under subclass 20 including annular opposed movable pressure
    plates or platens coacting in a supporting and force applying relationship
    on the sidewalls of a tire being recapped.

    (1)     Note.  The pressure platens do not have to be acting on the tire
    sidewalls directly, but be acting on opposed annular mold sections
    supporting and molding a tire.


CLS 425/23
TXT Apparatus under subclass 20 in which the recapping is accomplished at least
    in part by means applying a force to the internal portion of the tire being
    recapped so as to afford a fitting and force applying relationship with the
    tire and recapping mold.


CLS 425/24
TXT Apparatus under subclass 23 wherein the force applying means is a fluid
    contacting the interior of the carcass.


CLS 425/25
TXT Apparatus under subclass 20 comprising a tire mold divided into
    complementary coacting  annular sections wherein one section is separable
    from another section by moving one section generally perpendicular to its
    diameter.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are devices wherein the mold sections are
    hinged and the motion employed in opening or closing is an arcuate motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for means extruding a material into a cooling or liquid reaction
    tank.

    89,     for means under the class definition utilizing sheet or web type
    parting material.

    108,    for means under the class definition used for rod end to rod end
    splicing or joining.

    130,    for means feeding fluent stock from plural sources to a common
    shaping means to form a composite product, see especially subclass 133.1
    for concentric extrusion shaping means encased within a common nozzle
    housing wherein a lamina is formed within the extrusion device.

    225+,   for cleaning means employing a liquid disclosed and claimed solely
    for cleaning.

    500+,   for the combination of means to bring preforms into assembled
    relation in combination with means to bond them together in means which
    causes a preform reshaping.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 169, for glass working apparatus
    including means to provide a coating or parting material.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclass 2, for a composition
    disclosed as a coating repellent (e.g., parting material, etc.); and
    subclasses 38.2+, for a mold or mold coating composition.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for coating apparatus but
    especially subclasses 14 and 18, for edible-base or coating type combined
    with coating decorating means or solid means acting on a coating after
    application, except where such instrumentalities are in the nature of molds
    or dies, which latter combination is in this Class 425, and subclass 44
    with coating apparatus combined with means to deform work.


CLS 425/26
TXT Apparatus under subclass 11 which comprises means adapted to contact only a
    segment of the circumference of a tire and to maintain that portion in
    condition or position for repair.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    for a channel box pressure applying means engaging only a segment
    of a tire.

    49+,    for internal support means for hollow toroids (e.g., tires) which
    support the entire circumference.


CLS 425/27
TXT Apparatus under subclass 26 wherein the supporting means is an internal
    member capable of extending in one or more directions to increase the
    outward pressure of the tire portion.

    (1)     Note.  Typically, this includes a fluid impermeable, closed, fabric
    bag with a shape similar to a segment of the interior of a tire, and
    generally called an "air bag".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 93 for inflatable pipe plugs.

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, subclasses 2.01+ for an expanding mandrel.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 95+ for fluid pressure seal in
    a pipe joint; subclass 196 for an expansible spigot type pipe to plate
    joint and subclass 346 for packing expanding means in a packed pipe joint
    of the friction clutch type.


CLS 425/28.1
TXT RESHAPING, RESIZING, OR VULCANIZING MEANS FOR TIRE, TIRE TUBE OR DRIVE BELT:

    Apparatus under the class definition uniquely adapted for manufacturing by
    means reshaping, resizing, or vulcanizing performs into (a) flexible or
    resilient doughnut shaped articles which are used on the periphery or rim
    of a vehicle wheel (generally to absorb shock and/or control  traction), or
    (b) endless flexible bands (e.g., drive belts, etc.) which are used to
    transmit power.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded under the definition are devices of general
    utility, even thought by disclosure they are for use in operating on a
    portion of a tire tube or belt.  For example, a device for holding two ends
    of a tube in assembled relationship for vulcanizing are not here but
    provided for below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for means for the repair of articles which may be toroidal, and
    which may include toroidal support means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, subclasses 151+ for resilient tires.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    394.1+ for an apparatus or subcombination thereof specifically adapted for
    assembling elements of a tire body either into the form of an endless
    article or an article which has a circular or horseshoe cross-section with
    means causing the associated parts to adhere one to the other; see
    especially subclasses 414+ for a tire building drum, per se.

    157,    Wheelwright Machines, appropriate subclasses for means for
    assembling wheels, especially subclass 13 for means for mechanically
    treating outer periphery of a rubber tire casing including means for
    removal of mold flash from a tire or means for the reclamation of materials
    from a tire which does not destroy the tire.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 299+, especially subclasses 315+ and 326 for processes of
    vulcanizing tires and belts.


CLS 425/29
TXT Apparatus under subclass 28.1 including means for sensing or detecting a
    variation in an operating sequence or condition and means responsive
    thereto to effect a change in operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135+,   for control means responsive to or actuated by means sensing or
    detecting a variable condition in apparatus other than for a tire, tire
    tube or drive belt.


CLS 425/30
TXT Apparatus under subclass 28.1 including time limiting means operating
    independently of the apparatus drive means, said means causing a change in
    the operation of the apparatus at the end of a selected time period.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155+,   for control means responsive to an independently operated timer in
    apparatus other than for a tire, tire tube or drive belt.


CLS 425/31
TXT Apparatus under subclass 28.1 including means for changing a band or drum
    (of green rubber) into a hollow toroid.


CLS 425/32
TXT Apparatus under subclass 31 including a female shaping or sizing means
    encasing the preform subsequent to conversion to a toroid.


CLS 425/33
TXT Apparatus under subclass 32 comprising means to place an expansible
    enclosure or bag within the hollow portion of a mold or housing.


CLS 425/34.1
TXT Plural female molds for plural preforms:

    Apparatus under subclass 28.1 comprising plural female mold means for
    simultaneously shaping or treating plural preforms.


CLS 425/34.2
TXT Forming belts (e.g., drive, transmission, endless):

    Apparatus under subclass 34.1 for forming plural belts (e.g., drive,
    transmission, endless, etc.


CLS 425/34.3
TXT Within separate vulcanizing chamber:

    Apparatus under subclass 34.1 wherein the plural female molds for plural
    preforms are enclosed within one separate vulcanizing chamber (e.g.,
    autoclave).


CLS 425/35
TXT Apparatus under subclass 28.1 which includes the combination of (1) a
    shaping means comprising a cavity of generally toroidal or annular shape
    and (2) means for holding preform material against said means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for similar structure in combination with means for converting a
    drum-shaped preform into a hollow toroid.


CLS 425/36
TXT Apparatus under subclass 35 which includes distinct means to support or
    maintain the bead portion of a tire casing.

    (1)     Note.  To be included herein the bead engaging means must be other
    than a unitary extension or part of the mold, (e.g., it must be separable,
    separately adjustable or movable, etc.).


CLS 425/37
TXT Apparatus under subclass 35 which includes plural means for forming
    sidewall openings in the solid rubber portion of a tire, the openings being
    parallel to the tread surface.

    (1)     Note.  These openings produce a more resilient tire, generally
    called a "cushion tire".


CLS 425/38
TXT Apparatus under subclass 35 comprising mechanism which either (1) places or
    positions preform material in the female mold prior to the shaping or
    treating operation, or (2) extracts the product from the mold after the
    operation.

    (1)     Note.  Included under this definition are means breaking the bond
    between the mold and the tire for subsequent removal of a tire from the
    mold area.


CLS 425/39
TXT Apparatus under subclass 35 in which the shaping means defining the cavity
    comprises resilient material capable of being extended or expanded during
    use.

    (1)     Note.  To be included herein, the mold surface must change size,
    not merely be designed for knockdown.


CLS 425/40
TXT Apparatus under subclass 35 comprising means to produce a temperature
    change on the preform material in the apparatus.


CLS 425/41
TXT Apparatus under subclass 40 in which the temperature change is produced by
    means of an electric current.


CLS 425/42
TXT Apparatus under subclass 40 in which the temperature change is applied or
    produced by means within the cavity encompassed by the walls of the preform.

    (1)     Note.  This includes, for example, the introduction of a hot gas
    into a tire or inner tube during shaping.


CLS 425/43
TXT Apparatus under subclass 35 in which the means confining the preform in the
    cavity comprises a member whose size may be varied to press or maintain the
    preform in position.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is an air bag comprising a fabric which does
    not itself stretch, when such bags change their overall size by changing
    the interior gas pressure.  Solid knockdown cores designed for insertion or
    removal, are not considered expansible.


CLS 425/44
TXT Apparatus under subclass 35 which includes means applying fluid under
    pressure into direct contact with an internal surface of a hollow preform.

    (1)     Note.  This includes, for example, the introduction of air under
    pressure into a tire or inner tube to hold it in contact with a female mold
    surface.


CLS 425/45
TXT Apparatus under subclass 44 in which the preform is a tire inner tube and
    the apparatus include either (1) valve stem means in the shaping or
    treating device itself adapted to admit fluid pressure thereinto or, (2)
    means to receive or maintain in position the valve stem of the preform
    being shaped or treated.


CLS 425/46
TXT Apparatus under subclass 35 wherein the tread shaping means is capable of
    being removed independently of the rest of the mold.


CLS 425/47
TXT Apparatus under subclass 28.1 comprising a shaping means comprising a
    plurality of sections provided with specific fastening means for securing
    the sections together.


CLS 425/48
TXT Apparatus under subclass 28.1 comprising (1) means on the inside of a tire,
    tube or belt to maintain it in position or (2) means to strip from or place
    into an article to be treated a bag or other member treating the article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182,    for other assembly or disassembly means combined with plastic
    working or treating apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 700+ for assembly and disassembly
    apparatus, per se, not elsewhere provided for, especially subclass 239 for
    such apparatus including means for spreading parts apart, and subclasses
    244+ for a puller or pusher type having a force multiplying operator.


CLS 425/49
TXT Apparatus under subclass 28.1 comprising an annular mold or form designed
    to be positioned interiorly of and to support a toroidal preform.


CLS 425/50
TXT Apparatus under subclass 49 including means to heat or cool the preform
    material or the support means.


CLS 425/51
TXT Apparatus under subclass 49 wherein the mold or form is capable of changing
    its size or dimension.

    (1)     Note.  To be included herein the mold or form surface must change
    in size, not merely be designed for knockdown to facilitate insertion and
    removal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 65 and 178+ for expansible cores of
    general utility for static molds.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 107, 196 and 338 for pipe
    joints having expansible or inflatable features; see the search notes
    thereunder.


CLS 425/52
TXT Apparatus under subclass 51 in which the mold or form comprises an
    impermeable flexible diaphragm or bag into which fluid under pressure is
    introduced to cause expansion.


CLS 425/53
TXT Apparatus under subclass 52 comprising a valve or conduit means through
    which the pressurizing fluid is introduced.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 223+ for an inflatable article filling
    chuck and/or stem; see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 425/54
TXT Apparatus under subclass 49 in which the annular form or mold comprises
    plural sections.


CLS 425/55
TXT Apparatus under subclass 54 in which one of the plural sections is capable
    of being removed or separated from the others.

    (1)     Note.  Generally, the section is removed by movement towards the
    axis of the toroid, that is, towards the center of the ring-shaped support.


CLS 425/56
TXT Apparatus under subclass 55 provided with a full-circle ring which engages
    the plural sections of the annular mold or form to hold them in an
    assembled relationship.


CLS 425/57
TXT Apparatus under subclass 55 comprising cams or wedges to secure the plural
    support sections in assemble relationship.


CLS 425/58
TXT Apparatus under subclass 49 comprising (1) annular means to complete the
    closing of a tubeless tire or to support an air bag within a tire casing or
    (2) means clamping the bead rechain of a tire against an internal support.


CLS 425/58.1
TXT Post cure inflator:

    Apparatus under subclass 28.1 comprising a post cure inflation means.


CLS 425/59
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means employing a portion
    of the earth below ground level as a shape imparting member to form a
    structure which is at least partially submerged in the earth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, appropriate subclasses for static molds or forms.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 150.1+ for method or
    apparatus for casting a tunnel lining in situ; subclass 223 for apparatus
    for casting a marine structure in situ; and subclasses 233+ for apparatus
    for casting a foundation pile or pier in situ.


CLS 425/60
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising molding apparatus mounted
    on a lever pivotally mounted at one end so as to rotate or oscillate around
    the pivot axis.

    (1)     Note.  At least the shaping or forming members must be mounted for
    such movement.  The feeding means may be stationary.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     for progressive molding apparatus.


CLS 425/61
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means to facilitate the
    flotation of a formed ship or boat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 1+ for dry docks and
    vessel apparatus, per se.


CLS 425/62
TXT Apparatus under the class definition wherein an entire molding or shaping
    device is supported in such a manner as to facilitate its movement from one
    location to another.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are molding devices mounted on tracks,
    trucks, skids, boats, etc.  The mere statement that it includes handles
    etc, will not being a patent here.  For portable devices see appropriate
    subclasses below and in Class 249, Static Molds; however, wheels and
    tracks, per se, in the absence of means to move the apparatus, would not
    indicate classification in Class 425, but in Class 249.

    (2)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are devices wherein one portion
    of an apparatus is mounted on a transportation means for the purpose of
    moving it with respect to another portion of the apparatus without
    relocating the entire molding apparatus to a different site.  Such devices
    are in appropriate subclasses below.  Also excluded are devices in which a
    mold is repositioned in such a manner that a newly formed structure will be
    connected to a previously formed structure.  For such devices see
    appropriate subclasses below, especially subclasses 63+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59,     for means utilizing a subterranean feature as a shaping means.

    63+,    for molds with repositioning means for progressive molding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, appropriate subclasses for a static mold of that
    class mounted on a vehicle and see especially subclasses 175+ for cores,
    e.g., tunnel molds, with wheels and tracks.

    280,    Land Vehicles, appropriate subclasses for land vehicles, per se.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 146 and 150.1+ for
    wheeled apparatus for lining tunnels; and subclass 155 for a mobile pipe or
    cable laying machine which includes means for casting a pipe or a
    protective.


CLS 425/63
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means molding a portion of
    a structural installation and means to incrementally transposition the mold
    to such a location that an additional portion may be molded and united to
    the previously molded portion.

    (1)     Note.  The term "structural installation" is intended to include
    those structures generally erected by civil engineering techniques, (e.g.,
    buildings, bridges, towers, tunnels, sewer, lines, retaining walls, etc.).

    (2)     Note.  To be included herein the patent must include more than a
    static mold mounted on wheels, skids, etc.  Means to advance or move the
    mold (e.g., hoists, pushing or pulling means etc.), are included herein;
    see (1) Note in subclass 62, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, for static molds mounted on wheels, skids, etc., so
    that they may be more easily moved from one location to another.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    appropriate subclasses for lifting or pulling devices, per se.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 33 for similar processes of forming structural installations in
    situ and repositioning the mold.


CLS 425/64
TXT Apparatus under subclass 63 combined with means to feed material to the
    molding means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 108, for a static mold combined with means
    to feed material thereto.


CLS 425/65
TXT Apparatus under subclass 63 wherein means supporting or assisting in the
    support of the mold device is embedded in previously formed material or
    otherwise adapted to penetrate the previously formed material.


CLS 425/66
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising either means forming a
    continuous thread-like product or a continuous film casting means, combined
    with means to advance and attenuate the thread or film.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76,     for varying the denier of filaments by altering orifice size or
    varying flow rate.

    326.1,  for means extruding a tube of indefinite length and means to
    inflate the tube to a cylinder or film.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclasses 71+ apparatus for stretching
    or spreading a fabric in the form of a plastic film even though combined
    with a film treating means.

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclasses 240+ for stretching apparatus
    for finishing a thread including a monofilament type (e.g., nylon, etc.).

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 287 and 310
    for twisting, twining, etc., of textiles combined with stretching.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 484+ for apparatus for glass fiber
    and filament making, particularly subclass 501 for means to align and draw
    filaments or fibers; subclasses 535+ for means to draw, advance, or
    attenuate glass fibers or filaments.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for feeding indeterminate lengths of material.

    366,    Agitating, subclass 70 for mixing means of the taffy puller type.


CLS 425/67
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising an extrusion die with its
    shaping outlet either submerged in a liquid or mounted in the path of a
    liquid material being discharged into space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for means advancing shaped work through a down stream liquid bath
    or shower means.

    404,    for shaping means in general with subsequent product treatment
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses
    for filament drying means combined with nominal filament forming means.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, appropriate subclasses
    for spinning, twisting or twining apparatus combined with nominally claimed
    filament forming means.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    filament treating apparatus combined with nominal filament forming means.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, particularly subclasses 18+ for
    winding, unwinding, tensioning, or running material guiding with nominal
    filament forming means.


CLS 425/68
TXT Apparatus under subclass 67 comprising additional distinct and separate
    means downstream of the initial liquid contact means for contacting and
    treating the formed product with a fluid.


CLS 425/69
TXT Apparatus under subclass 67 wherein the relative position of the extrusion
    die is changeable with respect to structure constituting the receptacle for
    the liquid, or to the means directing liquid against the product being
    extruded.


CLS 425/70
TXT Apparatus under subclass 67 comprising a tubular passageway positioned at
    least partially within a bath or shower means and means directing the
    extruded product through the tube.


CLS 425/71
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means feeding shaped
    material of indeterminate length through liquid treating means of the
    shower immersion or work confined pool type wherein the liquid is located
    such that it contacts the shaped work subsequent to the shaping operation.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are both combinations of shaping plus
    downstream liquid treatment, and downstream liquid treatment, per se,
    wherein the liquid treatment, per se, is within the scope of the basic
    subject matter of this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     for devices wherein a shaping orifice discharges directly into a
    liquid bath or shower means.

    72.1+,  for a shaping orifice and downstream gaseous treating means.

    90+,    for shaping means and means applying a coating to the shaped work.

    404,    for shaping means and subsequent product treatment means.

    445+,   for means treating shaped work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses
    325, 405, and 419+ for means applying a coating to running length work by
    spraying or in a work confined pool.


CLS 425/72.1
TXT SHAPING ORIFICE AND DOWNSTREAM WORK CONTACTING GASEOUS TREATING MEANS:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising means defining a shaping
    orifice and means causing a gaseous medium to contact work subsequent  to
    issuing from the shaping orifice to heat, cool, react or otherwise the
    shaped work.

    (1)     Note.  The means for contacting the formed product with a gas
    usually includes a means for forcing the gas past and in contact with the
    product; however, also included under this definition is a vacuum chamber
    or a means surrounding the product to retain or confine the atmosphere
    surrounding to product.

    (2)     Note.  An inflating gas used in a subsequent inflating type
    reshaping apparatus is excluded from this subclass except where additional
    means are provided to condition or handle that gas as a treating gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    326.1,  for an extrusion means followed by an inflating type reshaping
    means.

    461,    for shaping orifice, per se, see Search Notes thereunder relating
    to combinations thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 286 for apparatus for extruding a
    preformed metal work piece and heating or cooling means.


CLS 425/72.2
TXT Orifice for filaments or fibers:
    Apparatus under subclass 72.1 wherein the orifice is for shaping filaments
    or fibers (e.g., spinneret).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 423+ for continuous or semicontinuous
    filament or wire casting apparatus.


CLS 425/73
TXT Apparatus under the class definition combined with (1) means to manipulate
    material and (2) an atomospheric confining means enclosing or surrounding
    at least a portion of the material handling means, said atmospheric
    confining means having an exhaust or gaseous circulation feature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for a shaping orifice and downstream work-contacting gaseous
    treating means which may be a hood or chamber.

    445+,   for means treating shaped work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses
    for apparatus and processes for drying material.


CLS 425/74
TXT Apparatus under subclass 73 comprising means to collect or to recirculate
    vaporous material which is (1) part of that used during the molding
    operation or (2) driven off from the molding material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86,     for apparatus which includes means to handle waste liquid.

    215+,   for shaping means and means to gather excess or rejected material,
    especially subclass 217 which recycles the material.

    420,    for apparatus which includes means to remove entrained air without
    recovering or recycling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 157 for glass working or treating
    apparatus including means providing a special atmosphere.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 259 for metal founding apparatus including
    a means to provide an inert or reducing atmosphere.


CLS 425/75
TXT Apparatus under subclass 73 in which the material handler is an endless
    surface on which fluent material is deposited and shaped, subclasses 228+
    for a composition having a continuous phase of free metal made by
    consolidating metal particles, and subclass 256 for a consolidated furnace
    charge, e.g., a briquette, containing free metal.


CLS 425/76
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means producing filaments
    which are nonuniform in cross section throughout their length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66,     for forming irregular denier by stretching.

    319+,   for extruding followed by twisting.

    325+,   for a shaping orifice and downstream shaping means for forming
    other than irregular denier filaments.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 167 for processes of forming filaments of irregular denier.


CLS 425/77
TXT Devices under the class definition specifically designed to generate
    pressures of the order of approximately 100,000 psi or greater.

    (1)     Note.  The devices included herein are frequently for use in
    changing or controlling crystal structure, e.g., diamond formation, or for
    testing or studying the chemical or physical effect of ultra high pressures
    on a test sample of material.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein are press plungers, per se, disclosed for
    use in ultra high pressure type press.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for molding devices utilizing force from explosive or thermic
    compositions.

    78+,    for presses for molding powdered metal.

    406+,   for press molding apparatus in general under the class definition
    and see notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for a laboratory type
    press combined with means to measure or test the material being pressed.

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses, especially subclass 232 for
    multiple plunger presses not designed to generate ultra high pressure.

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for non-coating apparatus for growing
    therein-defined single-crystal of all types of materials and by use of all
    means including by high pressure or with shaping means.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 50 for reaction vessels, per se, and see
    especially Note 5 of that subclass definition.


CLS 425/78
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means forming products by
    uniting associated particles of metallic elements or alloys or amalgams.

    (1)     Note.  Means uniting particles comprising metallic compounds, e.g.,
    metal oxides, etc., are not included herein but are found in appropriate
    subclasses below.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this and indented subclasses are all devices
    including a disclosure of molding powdered metal elements, alloys,
    amalgams, even though the claims may not be so limited.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 419.1 for processes of shaping fibered
    material.

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses for processes and apparatus
    for deforming metal; see the line note in the class definition of Class 425.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 228+ for a composition having a continuous phase of
    free metal made by consolidating metal particles and subclasses 313 for
    consolidated solid treating compositions or charges.

    164,    Metal Founding, appropriate subclasses for a process or apparatus
    to manufacture metal articles by casting molten metal.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, for sintering apparatus, per se.
    Apparatus for forming and sintering is proper for this Class 425.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, appropriate subclasses for making
    articles from metal powder; e.g., subclasses 61+.


CLS 425/79
TXT Apparatus under subclass 78 wherein the particulate material is formed in
    an indefinite length article.

    (1)     Note.  An article is considered indefinite in length if it is
    formed in a continuous manner at the forming means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for means advancing continuous work through downstream liquid bath
    or shower means.

    376.1+, for extrusion shaping means.


CLS 425/80.1
TXT AIR FELTING TYPE SHAPING MEANS:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising means for depositing
    particles on a shaping surface from a gaseous suspension.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78+,    for means for molding powdered metal.

    100,    and 103, for pneumatic conveyor means for applying nonmoldable
    coating materials to apparatus, molding material, or preform material.

    223,    for devices comprising an endless casting surface and a cooperating
    harvesting means.

    224,    for means for casting fluent stock to form a product of indefinite
    length.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses 296+ for the formation of
    a nonwoven web from fibers or filaments, and see the notes and search notes
    in subclass 296, for the line between this class (425) and Class 19 and
    related fields of search.

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclasses 104+ for entwining filaments
    by air blast means.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 507 for glass filament or fiber
    making combined with means to form a nonwoven mat or batt.  See the search
    note to Class 425 in the III(B) Note of the class definitions of Class 65
    for a further statement of the line between the two classes.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    62.2+ for air felting followed by laminating the felted product to another
    preform.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 109+ for processes of forming products from randomly associated
    nonmetal particles.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, subclasses 61+ for processes for
    making articles from powders containing metal particles involving pressure
    without heat.


CLS 425/81.1
TXT Means forming stratified products:

    Apparatus under subclass 80.1 comprising means for sequentially depositing
    layers of similar particles in such a manner that a line of demarcation is
    presented between the deposited layers, or depositing diverse fibers in
    such a manner as to form distinguishable layers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclass 302 for the formation of a
    stratified nonwoven web of fibers, and see the search notes therein for
    related fields of search.


CLS 425/82.1
TXT With particle liberating means (e.g., cutting, carding, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 80.1 comprising means for (a) dividing solid
    nonparticulate material to form particles, or (b) separating particles from
    a bonded or interfelted mass of particle containing material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses 305+ for the formation of
    a nonwoven web with fiber liberation, and see the search notes in subclass
    305 for related fields of search.


CLS 425/83.1
TXT Means forming running length product:

    Apparatus under subclass 80.1 comprising means adapted to form an elongated
    product of indeterminate linear dimension.


CLS 425/84
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a work contacting element
    having pores or openings therein of such a size that a liquid component of
    the work can enter said pores or openings thus separating the liquid from
    the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86,     for devices including a handling means or other feature for a
    treating liquid, vehicle liquid, or condensate.

    404,    for shaping means and subsequent product treatment means.

    445+,   for means treating shaped work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 113 and 141, for static molds with this
    feature for removing a liquid component.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 86+, for the related process for  removing a liquid component
    through a porous mold surface.


CLS 425/85
TXT Apparatus under subclass 84 comprising means reducing pressure for
    facilitating removal of the liquid component of the material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, appropriate subclass for forming
    articles of paper utilizing a vacuum.


CLS 425/86
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a combination of molding
    apparatus or fluid handling parts which dispose of and collect a liquid
    (e.g., vapor condensate, utilized to treat a preform, etc.), generally
    after it has completed its function as a vehicle or treating material.

    (1)     Note.  A mere vent or sprue in a mold is insufficient for this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     for a foraminous or absorbent means arranged to remove a vehicle or
    stock-feed component during shaping or after shaping but in situ.

    401,    for preform reshaping or resizing press apparatus having a
    reciprocating plunger and mold with a sprue or vent.

    420,    for a male-female press couple for fluent stock with means for
    removing entrained gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 312+ for fluid handling system with
    leakage or drip collecting means.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 108+ for drip, leakage or waste catching or
    disposal in dispensing apparatus.  See the collection of search notes in
    the class definition of Class 222 for similar devices in other arts.


CLS 425/87
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which a shaping device is adapted
    to travel over a surface and deposit a layer of moldable material from a
    material supply, including means, shaping the material in more than one
    plane or dimension, the entire device and supply being designed to be
    either held in the hand during operation or manually guided or steered by
    an attendant as it traverses a surface against which the material is molded.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein, for example, are (1) devices for applying a
    layer of moldable material to a base including means controlling the
    thickness and edge structure of the applied layer or (2) devices for
    applying putty to windows in which a guide surface is attached to the putty
    smoothing surface in such a way as to slide along the window frame and
    shape the putty at a given angle or in a given configuration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    375,    for apparatus for depositing material on a casting surface
    including means causing the depositor to travel so as to deposit the
    material in a pattern.

    376.1+, for extrusion devices, per se, which may be hand held.

    458,    for similar hand held apparatus without a material supply.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, appropriate subclasses
    for hand tools for cleaning by means of a dry brushing, scraping, wiping or
    using a squeegee, and especially subclass 105 for compound tools where one
    of the tools is of the Class 15 type, subclass 236 for scrapers of the same
    shape as a putty knife, and subclass 243.5 for putty knives, per se.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for coating machines, per
    se; for the line between Classes 118 and 425, see subclass 90 of Class 425.

    222,    Dispensing, for dispensing, apparatus, per se.  For the line
    between Classes 222 and 401, see the definitions of these classes.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, appropriate subclasses,
    for base coating devices which are adapted to be hand held or steered by a
    walking attendant in which the device includes a member for contacting the
    coating during or after application, said member being spaced from the base
    a distance equal to the thickness of the coating.  The primary distinction
    between Classes 401 and 425 is that Class 401, only controls thickness
    while Class 425 shapes in plural dimension.


CLS 425/88
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a specific relationship
    between the molding device, and the structural installation housing or
    supporting the device.

    (1)     Note.  To be included herein factory structure or its environmental
    features must be claimed.  The recitation that a machine is bolted to a
    floor of the factory, for example, is not sufficient to place the patent
    herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 356+, for static constructional
    installations involving fluid handling.


CLS 425/89
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including, a removable sheet or web of
    flexible material having anti-stick properties disposed between the shaping
    surface and the material to be shaped.

    (1)     Note.  To be included herein the sheet must be flexible to the
    extent that it conforms to the mold surface and must not have any shape
    imparting structure of its own.

    (2)     Note.  Webs or sheets which serve to advance the work to or from a
    shaping station, e.g., belts, etc., are classified in appropriate
    subclasses below even though they also serve as parting means at the
    shaping station.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 113+, especially subclass 122 for means
    for making a package out of a web or sheet type parting means combined with
    means for shaping the material being packaged. For a more detailed
    statement of the line with Class 53 see the class definition of this Class
    425.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    392 for laminating apparatus with or without molding including pipe
    wrapping type work securing means.

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 112+, for static molds having a removable
    or movable liner.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Articles Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 219+ for a plastic article making  process including or
    comprising a step of making or shaping a mold and subclasses 313+ for a
    process of shaping against a forming surface utilizing a flexible,
    deformable or destructable mold surface or material.


CLS 425/90
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in combination with means to apply a
    liquid or fluent particulate solid material (1) to preformed work, (2)
    between a shaping member and the material being shaped or (3) to work
    contacting means.

    (1)     Note.  To be included in this and indented subclasses under (1) of
    the subclass definition the liquid or fluent particulate solid must be
    applied in such a way that no more than one dimension of the thickness or
    depth of the layer is controlled by the machine.  A means which controls
    the shape of the applied layer in two or more dimensions are considered
    molding means and are classified in appropriate subclasses below.

    (2)     Note.  To be included under (2) or (3) of the definition the
    material must be applied for the purpose of conditioning the work contact
    means or the product, (e.g., parting, release, or lubricating materials,
    etc.).  Means applying materials which are intended to adhere to the
    product and contribute to the overall shape and structure are considered
    molding means and are classified in appropriate subclasses below.

    (3)     Note.  Excluded from this and indented subclasses are patents
    claiming means for adding, blending or mixing a liquid, particulate, or
    pulverulent material within a feeding means or mixing means upstream of a
    shaping means.  Such devices are classified in appropriate subclasses
    below.  See especially subclasses 200+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for means extruding a material into a cooling or liquid reaction
    tank.

    89,     for means under the class definition utilizing sheet or web type
    parting material.

    108,    for means under the class definition used for rod end to rod end
    splicing or joining.

    130,    for means feeding fluent stock from plural sources to a common
    shaping means to form a composite product, see especially subclass 133.1
    for concentric extrusion shaping means encased within a common nozzle
    housing wherein a lamina is formed within the extrusion device.

    225+,   for cleaning means employing a liquid disclosed and claimed solely
    for cleaning.

    500+,   for the combination of means to bring preforms into assembled
    relation in combination with means to bond them together in means which
    causes a preform reshaping.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 169 for glass working apparatus
    including means to provide a coating or parting material.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclass 2 for a composition
    disclosed as a coating repellent (e.g., parting material, etc.); and
    subclasses 38.2+ for a mold or mold coating composition.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for coating apparatus but
    especially subclasses 14 and 18 for edible-base or coating type combined
    with coating decorating means or solid means acting on a coating after
    application, except where such instrumentalities are in the nature of molds
    or dies, which latter combination is in this Class 425, and subclass 44
    with coating apparatus combined with means to deform work.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 267+ for metal founding apparatus
    combined with a coating means.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 129+ for processes of coating combined with a molding step.


CLS 425/91
TXT Apparatus under subclass 90 including more than one coating material
    applicator wherein at least one applicator is different in kind from one
    other applicator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for diverse or plural
    coating applicators.


CLS 425/92
TXT Apparatus under subclass 90 having two or more separate and distinct
    coating material applying means with at least one means applying coating
    material to work and at least one means applying material to a work contact
    surface.


CLS 425/93
TXT Apparatus under subclass 90 wherein the work or work contacting apparatus
    to be coated is introduced or dipped wholly or partially into a bath,
    puddle, pile or other enclosed or restricted bulk supply of coating
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67+,    for immersed shaping orifice discharging directly into liquid bath
    or shower means.

    71,     for means advancing continuous length work through downstream
    liquid bath or shower means.

    269+,   for dipping type shaping means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 400+ for immersion apparatus for
    coating materials.


CLS 425/94
TXT Apparatus under subclass 90 wherein the means applies the coating material
    to a work conveyor, a re-shaping means or other apparatus acting on work
    subsequent to a shaping means.


CLS 425/95
TXT Apparatus under subclass 90 wherein the applicator means is secured to or
    contained within a male type shape imparting member.


CLS 425/96
TXT Apparatus under subclass 90 wherein the means applies a coating material to
    (1) a shape imparting surface or (2) between a shape imparting surface and
    material being shaped by said surface.

    (1)     Note.  Included under this definition of shape imparting surface is
    a dough divider trap chamber.


CLS 425/97
TXT Apparatus under subclass 96 wherein the means introduces the coating or
    parting material into an extrusion head or nozzle.


CLS 425/98
TXT Apparatus under subclass 96 wherein the means applies the material to a
    shape imparting cavity.


CLS 425/99
TXT Apparatus under subclass 98 comprising mold means mounted (1) for movement
    in an endless path or (2) on a moving carrier.


CLS 425/100
TXT Apparatus under subclass 99 wherein the means comprises a sprayer or a
    conveyor in which the coating material is carried in a current of air or
    other gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for a similar type applicator used with an upstream material
    handler.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, appropriate subclasses for fluid current
    conveyors in general.


CLS 425/101
TXT Apparatus under subclass 96 in which the shaping means comprises at least
    one body with a continuous shaping surface.


CLS 425/102
TXT Apparatus under subclass 90 comprising means to apply coating material to
    work manipulating means (e.g., conveyor means, charging means or support
    means, etc.), prior to contact with the shaping surface.


CLS 425/103
TXT Apparatus under subclass 102 wherein the means comprises a sprayer or a
    conveyor in which the material is carried in a current of air or other gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    for the same type applicator used with orbital or conveyor mounted
    molds.


CLS 425/104
TXT Apparatus under subclass 90 comprising means for applying the coating to
    the product subsequent to the shaping operation.


CLS 425/105
TXT Apparatus under subclass 104 comprising means for applying the coating in a
    desired configuration, i.e., striping or a definite pattern.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus using means having merely a roughened or other
    special configured surface, to cut, emboss, score or otherwise indent a
    product, are excluded.  Such devices are classified in appropriate subclass
    set forth below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, appropriate subclasses for printing devices.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 211 for coating apparatus, per se.


CLS 425/106
TXT Apparatus under subclass 104 comprising reshaping or cutting means
    positioned downstream of the coating means.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of the term reshaping see subclass 383.


CLS 425/107
TXT Apparatus under the class definition which include means for applying
    anti-friction material to cooperating, contacting, apparatus parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90+,    for devices including means to apply a coating to a work contacting
    surface of the device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 170, for glass working apparatus with
    lubricating.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 149 for means lubricating cooperating
    parts of metal founding apparatus.

    184,    Lubrication, for apparatus lubricating means, per se.


CLS 425/108
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means to shape fluent
    material against the juxtaposed terminal portions of tubular or rod-like
    preforms to unite the preforms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    383+,   especially 392+ for vulcanizing or curing spliced joints while
    confining in a mold.

    445,    for devices for supporting spliced joints and curing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    423 and 502+ for means laminating indefinite length preforms end to end.

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 89+ for static molds for uniting pipes and
    rod-like materials with a molding material.


CLS 425/110
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means for imparting shape
    to fluent or bulk moldable material and means especially adapted to
    position, transport, hold, or in any way handle a preform in such a manner
    that the preform and the fluent or bulk material will become united to form
    a composite product.

    (1)     Note.  To be included herein a portion of the fluent or bulk
    material which initially contacts the preform during the uniting must be in
    a moldable, plastic or unsolidified state or condition.

    (2)     Note.  To be included herein the preform must constitute a desired
    part of the final product.  Shaping elements, (e.g., cores, mold parts, pie
    pans, etc.) which may remain temporarily with the molded product are not
    included herein but are placed in appropriate subclasses below.

    (3)     Note.  For the general definition of the term "bulk stock" see the
    glossary. Within the scope of this and indented subclasses, however, are
    rubber charges, e.g., shoe soles and heels, etc., which are confined within
    a vulcanizing mold and take as their final shape the shape of the mold.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90+,    for means forming a composite by molding and coating.

    269+,   for a dipping type shaping means where the object is formed on a
    shaping mandrel from which it is stripped prior to use.

    383+,   for a preform reshaping means wherein the product may be a
    composite formed from plural preforms.

    500+    for a combination of means to bring preforms into assembled
    relation in combination with means to bond them together in means which
    causes a preform reshaping

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 450.1+ for apparatus
    for making a laminated edible product by assemble or preforms, especially
    subclass 450.2 for such apparatus combined with means for shaping or
    reshaping plural sheets or webs.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for means coating a
    preform. For the line between Class 118 and this class see the class
    definition of Class 425.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 332+ for metal founding apparatus
    including means to hold or position a preform in a shaping area to make a
    composite product.

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 83+ for a static mold means for uniting a
    preform with the material being cast.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 241+ for processes of uniting a preform with fluent material in
    a molding operation to form a composite product.


CLS 425/111
TXT Apparatus under subclass 110 comprising means to exert or maintain
    sufficient force on a preform to hold it under a tensile stress below its
    elastic limit during the molding operation.

    (1)     Note.  Merely holding a preform taut is not considered placing
    under stress.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    160+ and 494+ for processes and apparatus for laminating a preform while in
    a stressed condition.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 228 and 229 for processes of stressing a preform and uniting by
    a molding operation.


CLS 425/112
TXT Apparatus under subclass 110 which includes (1) Means to either form or
    shape the preform from bulk or fluent material or (2) means to reshape the
    preform.

    (1)     Note.  The preform may be reshaped either before, during, or after
    the composite formation.


CLS 425/113
TXT Apparatus under subclass 110 in which the fluent or bulk material shaping
    means comprises means defining a shaping orifice and means forcing the
    fluent or bulk material therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    376.1+, for extrusion forming apparatus, per se.

    461+,   for an extrusion nozzle, per se, and see the collection of search
    notes thereunder relating to combinations inclusive thereof.


CLS 425/114
TXT Apparatus under subclass 113 comprising (1) preform support or feed means
    adapted to support or feed at least two preforms or (2) at least two
    separate means to feed or support preforms.


CLS 425/115
TXT Apparatus under subclass 110 wherein the means shaping the fluent material
    comprises at least one endless shaping surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    363+,   for endless type press shaping, reshaping or vulcanizing means.

    471,    for an endless shaping surface, per se.


CLS 425/116
TXT Apparatus under subclass 110 in which the means imparting shape to the
    fluent or bulk material comprises a mold cavity in each of at least two
    members, each cavity having an open side so that when the members cooperate
    in face-to-face engagement, the open sides match and a complete female mold
    is formed to impart shape to the fluent material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233+,   for sets of press couples comprising registering coacting female
    molds.

    408,    for a press forming means with opposed coacting recessed mold
    cavities.


CLS 425/117
TXT Apparatus under subclass 110 comprising at least one walled cavity which
    acts to confine the fluent material and impart its shape thereto.

    (1)     Note.  Where the sole confining means is the preform body which
    becomes part of the united product the patent is classified in subclass 110.


CLS 425/118
TXT Apparatus under subclass 117 comprising a hand operated shaping surface
    which supports an edible receiver and is adapted to remove a portion of
    material from a bulk source and thereby shape the portion of material
    removed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221,    for ice cream scoops and pluggers having blade type excess removal
    or smoothing means.

    276+,   for ice cream scoops and plugger, per se.


CLS 425/119
TXT Apparatus under subclass 117 including a preform support having the same
    general shape as the interior of a boot or shoe.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclasses 128+, for shoe forms, per se.  See
    the search notes to Class 12 under class definition of Class 425.


CLS 425/120
TXT Apparatus under subclass 117 comprising at least two means to feed fluent
    material to the cavity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130+,   for means forming a composite from plural diverse fluent materials.


CLS 425/121
TXT Apparatus under subclass 117 comprising (1) plural cavities in spaced
    relation and (2) means to feed or support a single preform to or at both
    cavities.


CLS 425/122
TXT Apparatus under subclass 117 in which the preform is of indefinite or
    indeterminate length and there is means to advance the preform to the
    cavity.

    (1)     Note.  The product formed need not be of indefinite length.


CLS 425/123
TXT Apparatus under subclass 117 comprising means for supporting at least two
    preforms in spaced relation in or at a single cavity.


CLS 425/124
TXT Apparatus under subclass 123 wherein the preforms are flat thin ring
    members or perforated plates.


CLS 425/125
TXT Apparatus under subclass 117 comprising means to move either the cavity or
    support for the preform in a vertical direction.


CLS 425/126.1
TXT Means to convey preform to female mold:

    Apparatus under subclass 117 comprising means to move the preform to or
    deposit the preform at the cavity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 419 for continuous or semi-continuous
    metal casting means with means to convey a preformed product part to a mold.


CLS 425/126.2
TXT Stick inserter:

    Apparatus under subclass 126.1 comprising a means for inserting a stick
    preform into the fluent or bulk material.


CLS 425/127
TXT Apparatus under subclass 117 wherein the preform serves as either a
    pressing or a press reaction surface and cooperates with the walls of the
    cavity to shape the fluent or bulk stack.

    (1)     Note.  Devices wherein the entire female mold is made up of preform
    stock which remains with the product are classified in subclass 110.


CLS 425/128
TXT Apparatus under subclass 117 on which the cavity is formed by opposed
    coacting shaping surfaces which exert compressive force on fluent material
    to impart a desired configuration thereto.


CLS 425/129.1
TXT Means to charge fluent stock under pressure:

    Apparatus under subclass 117 comprising means to dispense fluent stock
    material under pressure to the cavity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    542+,   for a female mold with means to charge fluent stock under pressure
    thereto.


CLS 425/129.2
TXT Shoe or boot:

    Apparatus under subclass 129.1 wherein a shoe or boot is formed.


CLS 425/130
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising plural means delivering
    diverse fluent stock to a common shaping means to form a composite product.

    (1)     Note.  To be included herein the delivering means must include more
    than mere inlets to the shaping surface or mere conduits to which a single
    feed source may be attached.

    (2)     Note.  A homogeneous mixture of materials, e.g., concrete,
    aggregate, and water is not considered a composite.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90+,    for molding combined with a coating step.

    110+,   for forming fluent material and uniting with a preform.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 241+ for processes of forming a composite product.


CLS 425/131.1
TXT Apparatus under subclass 130 wherein the shaping means is an orifice.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113+,   for extrusion shaping means combined with preform handling means
    forming a composite article; see the search notes thereunder.

    461+,   for an extrusion nozzle, per se, and see the collection of search
    notes thereunder relating to greater combinations thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 171.1+ for processes of forming a composite product by extrusion.


CLS 425/131.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 131.1 wherein the orifice is particularly adapted
    to the formation of fiber(s).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, for treatment of fiber subsequent to
    formation thereof.


CLS 425/132
TXT Apparatus under subclass 131.1 comprising means to periodically interrupt
    and reestablish the feed of at least one of the fluent materials.


CLS 425/133.1
TXT Apparatus under subclass 131.1 comprising plural coaxial circular shaping
    outlets.


CLS 425/133.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 131 wherein the orifice is particularly adapted to
    the formation of a planar "film".

    (1)     Note.  In the patents of this subclass, the specification either
    sets forth that the extruded product is a film or sets forth that the
    extruded product is extremely thin; i.e., less than about 0.050 inch (or
    1.25 mm.) thick.


CLS 425/134
TXT Apparatus under subclass 130 wherein the shaping means includes a female
    mold and means to move the mold to or away from a shaping station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90,     for a shaping or reshaping means combined with a Class 15,
    Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, or Class 118, Coating Apparatus,
    coating apparatus which applies a coating of diverse material (e.g., a
    parting material, etc.) to a work press or work contacting means,
    especially subclasses 104+ for such a means for applying a coating to a
    preform after removal from a shaping means.


CLS 425/135
TXT Apparatus under class definition comprising (1) means to sense a condition
    which may or may not occur, a change in such condition, a lack of such
    condition, or a result of such condition, and a separate control means for
    an apparatus part, the sensing means causing or permitting operation of the
    separate control means without the intervention of a human attendant, or
    (2) means to control, actuate or initiate an element of the apparatus in
    proper relationship to the presentation of shaping surfaces or material to
    shaped.

    (1)     Note.  Control means which merely insure continuous or synchronous
    operation of a machine or part thereof without detecting a variable
    relationship are not here but are provided for in appropriate subclasses
    below on other features.

    (2)     Note.  Spring mounted or biased molding or pressing elements which
    yield after a given amount of force is applied are not considered to be
    control means for this subclass and are classified in appropriate
    subclasses below; see especially subclasses 151+ and 406+. Valves which are
    spring biased and designed to regulate flow of molding material by yielding
    to pressure are included herein, see especially subclasses 145+.  Spring
    biased valves as part of a hydraulic system for operating a mold system are
    not here unless part of a control system responsive to a sensing or
    detecting means.

    (3)     Note.  To be included under (2) of the definition it is necessary
    that the molds or work pieces be presented in a purely random manner and
    not spaced or positioned according to a law of the machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     for reshaping, resizing or vulcanizing means for tires, tire-tubes
    or belts in combination with control means responsive to means sensing a
    condition.

    151+,   for safety features, e.g., pop off valves, spring release
    mechanisms, etc.

    155+,   for control means responsive to an independently operated timer.

    162+,   for electrical control systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for sensing means,
    per se, or such means combined with measuring or testing means; see the
    collection of search notes in that class definition.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 154.1+ for metal founding apparatus
    including control means responsive to or actuated by means sensing a
    condition or variable.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 130+
    for data processing control systems wherein the control system is claimed
    generically, and subclasses 475.02+ and 476.01 for the application of a
    computer in the manufacturing of a product which includes molding or
    pressing.


CLS 425/136
TXT Apparatus under subclass 135 including both (1) means to sense an abnormal
    or unsafe condition and (2) means to stop operation of a machine due to
    said condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151+,   for safety features not involving automatic control.


CLS 425/137
TXT Apparatus under subclass 136 wherein the sensing means detects the presence
    of residual molding material, left in the molding cavity, from a previous
    molding operation.


CLS 425/138
TXT Apparatus under subclass 136 wherein the sensing means detects an improper
    relationship between the mold and a diverse part of the molding device or
    between the mold components.


CLS 425/139
TXT Apparatus under subclass 135 wherein the control means operates means to
    remove or release a formed article from a shaping means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    436,    for molding surfaces with ejector or stripper mechanism and see
    search notes thereto.


CLS 425/140
TXT Apparatus under subclass 135 wherein the control means is responsive to the
    sensed mass of size of the product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148,    for means responsive to weight of feed material to control passages
    of the feed material toward the shaping surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 77 for cutting means in combination with means to
    weight the product.

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclasses 60+ for a weigher responsive to
    material control including a nominal combination with a Class 425 shaping
    means, which is recited by name only.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 55 for automatic control of a dispenser by
    weight of material dispensed.


CLS 425/141
TXT Apparatus under subclass 140 wherein the control means is responsive to
    distance between opposed surfaces of the product.


CLS 425/142
TXT Apparatus under subclass 135 wherein the means controlled is a severing
    element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    289+,   for molding and cutting, per se.


CLS 425/143
TXT Apparatus under subclass 135 wherein the means controlled comprises a
    temperature regulating means.


CLS 425/144
TXT Apparatus under subclass 143 wherein the temperature regulating means
    controls the temperature of fluent molding material flowing toward a
    shaping or discharging orifice, or of a shaping cavity.


CLS 425/145
TXT Apparatus under subclass 135 in which the means controlled regulates the
    flowing or conveying of molding material to a shaping area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    447+,   for forming surfaces and means feeding fluent stock thereto; see
    search notes thereto.


CLS 425/146
TXT Apparatus under subclass 145 which regulates or controls the flow of
    molding material by the force exerted by the material upon a closure or
    upon the actuating means for a closure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 455+ for a valve, per se, responsive to
    the change in condition of a flow line.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 12+ for valves which are
    fluid actuated or retarded, but not by the fluid controlled.


CLS 425/147
TXT Apparatus under subclass 145 which controls or regulates the flow of
    molding material in response to a predetermined level of molding material
    in a receptacle or mold.


CLS 425/148
TXT Apparatus under subclass 145 wherein the control means is responsive to the
    weight of the molding material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140,    for control means responsive to product weight.


CLS 425/149
TXT Apparatus under subclass 135 comprising means responsive to the force
    applied to material during shaping for regulating, controlling or adjusting
    the pressure applying means.


CLS 425/150
TXT Apparatus under subclass 135 wherein the means controlled regulates the
    movement of a mold or its component parts.


CLS 425/151
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means adapted to stop,
    prevent, or modify the operation of a machine, or relieve a condition when
    an unguarded, abnormal or unsafe situation which would injure the operator
    or the machine occurs.

    (1)     Note.  Designing to prevent undue wear, breakage, leakage, dirt
    accumulation, etc., during normal operation, are not included herein but
    found in appropriate subclasses below.  Safety valves are included herein,
    see especially subclass 153.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135+,   especially 136+ for means to completely stop operation of the
    machine in response to a means sensing an abnormal condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 152+ for safety control means in metal
    founding apparatus.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 129+ for a safety
    device (e.g., hand protector, etc.) comprising a stop mechanism.


CLS 425/152
TXT Apparatus under subclass 151 comprising (1) two or more starting switches,
    wherein both switches must be depressed in order to actuate the devices or
    (2) means preventing motion of a mold element until a protective means is
    in the proper position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161,    for devices having interlocked diverse function elements not for
    safety purposes.


CLS 425/153
TXT Apparatus under subclass 151 comprising (1) an auxiliary means to hold an
    element in a given position upon failure of a primary holding means or (2)
    means to release excessive gaseous pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    812,    for a digest collection of venting means, per se.


CLS 425/154
TXT Apparatus under subclass 151 including means to modify the operation of a
    molding machine due to (1) the presence of extraneous matter or (2) an
    overloaded condition.

    (1)     Note.  Included within the scope of this subclass are shear pins.


CLS 425/155
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having a time period limiting means
    operating independently of the apparatus drive means, which time limiting
    means causes a change in the operation of the apparatus at the end of the
    selected time period.

    (1)     Note.  Mere cyclical or synchronous operation of complex apparatus
    is excluded under this definition.  The timing means must be independent to
    the extent, for example, that a change in apparatus drive speed will not
    change the period measured by the timing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for tire, tire tube, or drive belt reshaping, resizing or
    vulcanizing means in combination with a independently actuated timer
    control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 157 for metal founding apparatus with
    control means responsive to an independent timing means.


CLS 425/156
TXT Apparatus under subclass 155 in which the time period limited is that
    during which the forming means is closed or during which a pressure is
    maintained on the forming means, for shaping of the article.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass will be found, for example, devices having
    timers to limit the period during which an injection mold is closed while
    material is injected under pressure to be formed therein.


CLS 425/157
TXT Apparatus under subclass 156 in which the time period limited is that
    between the application of pressure on the molding material by opposed
    pressure surfaces and the release of the pressure for removal of the
    product.


CLS 425/158
TXT Apparatus under subclass 157 which includes additional time period limiting
    means for timing the period during which the molding material is heated
    prior to introduction into the pressing means.


CLS 425/159
TXT Apparatus under subclass 155 in which the time period limited is that
    during which the molding material is introduced into the mold.


CLS 425/160
TXT Apparatus under subclass 155 in which the time period limited is that
    during which heating or cooling occurs.


CLS 425/161
TXT Apparatus under the class definition which includes an element or
    arrangement of elements associated with a first part of a molding device
    and designed to prohibit or restrain a different part of the device from
    functioning until the first part has operated to release the restraining
    means.


CLS 425/162
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including an electrical control or
    power means for at least a part of the molding apparatus comprising more
    than just a single electrical power means or a single switch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135+,   for automatically controlled devices which may include electrical
    control means.

    151+,   for electrical controls which protect the machine or operator
    against injury.

    155+,   where the electrical control means includes independent electrical
    timing means, e.g., an electric clock or time-delay relay.


CLS 425/163
TXT Apparatus under subclass 162 in which the operations controlled include
    either (1) two or more independent different shaping operations, or (2) two
    or more spaced similar shaping operations performed by different
    work-forming means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324.1+, for diverse shaping means not having an electrical control.

    340+,   for plural reshaping means not having an electrical control.


CLS 425/164
TXT Apparatus under subclass 162 in which the electrical means controls a
    severing or cutting of an article from a formed body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142,    for controls for severing by means responsive to a condition or
    variable, which means may be electrical in nature.

    289+,   for forming plus cutting, per se.


CLS 425/165
TXT Apparatus under subclass 162 which includes electrical means regulating the
    separation or evacuation of the molded article from the molding surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139,    where the removal of the product is controlled by automatic means
    responsive to a variable, which means may be electrical in nature.


CLS 425/166
TXT Apparatus under subclass 162 in which electrical means regulates the
    periodic feed of fluent material to the shaping area.


CLS 425/167
TXT Apparatus under subclass 162 in which electrical means regulates the
    movement of a press platen or ram into or out of pressing engagement with
    the molding material.

    (1)     Note.  Included under this definition, for example, are multiple
    pressing contacts of varying force on a mold charge, and repeated pressing
    contacts with addition of incremental charges between strokes to ultimately
    form a single product.


CLS 425/168
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means for (1) changing the
    relative time or speed of operation of a moving element with respect to the
    time or speed of operation of a cooperating interdependent moving element
    or (2) modifying or adjusting the apparatus to maintain a desired operation
    despite wear.

    (1)     Note.  The replacement of worn parts are not included herein but
    may be found in subclasses 182+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135+,   where the means adjusting synchronization or compensating for wear
    responds automatically to varying conditions.


CLS 425/169
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means especially designed
    to enable an operator to (1) determine the occurrence or extent of a
    variation in an operating condition or (2) observe or determine the
    location or condition of an element or material by direct observation.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this and indented subclasses are, for example,
    meters, thermometers, warning signals, means permitting or aiding
    observation or normally concealed parts of objects, graduated marking on
    machine parts, means determining properties of the work either before or
    after shaping, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135+,   for control means responsive to means sensing or detecting a
    condition.

    151+,   for safety control means.

    155+,   for control means responsive to a timer.

    162+,   for electrical control system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclasses for mechanical
    devices for signalling in the nature of indicating or warning means.  Class
    116 does not provide for conventional signal or alarm devices combined with
    art devices where the latter structure is specifically claimed or is
    materially modified in order to cooperate with the conventional alarm or
    signal.  See the collection of search notes in the class definition of
    Class 116.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 150.1+ for a signal, indicator or
    inspection means combined with metal founding apparatus.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, appropriate subclasses for electrical
    signalling means, per se.


CLS 425/170
TXT Apparatus under subclass 169 comprising means to determine or record the
    temperature or amount of pressure employed during the forming operation.


CLS 425/171
TXT Apparatus under subclass 169 wherein the position of an adjustable part of
    a shaping or molding machine is determined, observed or recorded.


CLS 425/172
TXT Apparatus under subclass 171 wherein the adjustable machine element
    regulates the size of the product to be formed.


CLS 425/173
TXT Apparatus under subclass 169 comprising means which permits or facilitates
    visual inspection by an operator of the apparatus, the material or the
    product.


CLS 425/174
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means subjecting work to the
    influence of electrical, wave, or radiant energy by (1) means passing such
    energy through the work, (2) means establishing an energy field and
    positioning work therein or (3) means directing such energy against the
    work.

    (1)     Note.  To be included herein under part (3) of the definition the
    type of radiant or wave energy employed must be specified either by wave
    length or specific type, e.g., sonic ultra violet, corona discharge, etc.
    Generic terms such as heat, light, wave, etc., are not considered specified
    types within the scope of this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  In all cases, the energy form employed must be applied
    directly to the work.  Means converting energy into heat, for example, then
    applying the heat to the work is not included herein but found in
    appropriate subclasses below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for means involving the direct application of a magnetic force to
    work or shape imparting member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 54+, for process and apparatus for
    deforming metal by application of an energy field, especially subclass 56,
    wherein kinetic energy of a field is used to deform work.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    272.2+ and 380.2+, for processes and apparatus, respectively, for bonding
    laminae with the application of electrical or radiant energy to the work.

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 78, for a static mold having electric
    heating means.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 492.1+ for irradiation of plastics to
    cause physical changes in the plastic, subclass 495.1 for ray generators
    combined with means for generating heat or infrared rays.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 405+, for related processes of applying energy while shaping a
    material.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 186+ for apparatus affecting
    chemical change by means applying electromagnetic wave energy or
    corpuscular radiation to reactants for initiating or perfecting chemical
    reaction.


CLS 425/174.2
TXT Apparatus under subclass 174 wherein the wave energy is specified or
    identifiable (e.g., by a transducer or vibrator generating waves at a
    corresponding characteristic frequency or wave length) as being in the
    sonic (usually above 10 cycles per second) or supersonic range.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    73.1+ for processes of bonding laminae with the application of sonic or
    ultrasonic energy to the work.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 442 for analogous processes.


CLS 425/174.4
TXT Apparatus under subclass 174 wherein electrical energy rays which influence
    the work are emitted or transmitted by continuous or intermittent radiation
    or in the form of energy pulses.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is energy specified as infrared,
    ultraviolet, X-ray, electron, or ion bombardment, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 405+ for similar processes to effect heating of the work.


CLS 425/174.6
TXT Apparatus under subclass 174 wherein electrical energy is passed through
    the work, i.e., the work constitutes a portion of an electric circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    273.9+ for processes of bonding laminae wherein a portion of the work is a
    conductor which is to be used as a component of an electric circuit to
    which an electric current is to be directly applied.

    264,    Plastic or Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 405+ for similar processes to effect heating of the work.


CLS 425/174.8
TXT Apparatus under subclass 174 wherein the work is subjected to the influence
    of an electrical energy field specified or identifiable as of the
    electrostatic or inductive type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    273.1 for processes of bonding laminae is electrostatically charged in
    order to enhance the formation of a permanent bond in the work.

    264,    Plastic or Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 405+ for similar processes to effect heating of the work.


CLS 425/175
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising (1) means for forming a
    mold or shaping surface by utilizing molding means within the scope of this
    class or (2) any means manufacturing (e.g., laminating, metal casting,
    etc.) a shaping surface followed by means utilizing the shaping means for
    performing an operation of this class.

    (1)     Note.  Flasks, per se, for forming molds for use in this class are
    considered mold forming means and included herein.

    (2)     Note.  Mere assembly of parts to bring them together to form a mold
    is not considered to be manufacturing under this definition.  Such devices
    will be found in subclasses 436+ and 450.1.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 159+ for apparatus for making molds from
    sands, plastics or other materials wherein the molds are used for metal
    founding.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 219+ for a process including a step of making a mold.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 133+ for processes of coating a mold.

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 34+ for means for making dental molds.


CLS 425/176
TXT Apparatus under subclass 175 including means to remove the formed product
    from the material comprising the mold.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are sieves to separate molded products from
    mold forming material which material in many instances is starch or sand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    197+,   for molding means with screens or perforators when said molding
    means is not a mold forming means.


CLS 425/177
TXT Apparatus under subclass 175 in which the means forming the mold or shaping
    surface comprises means applying pressure to the mold forming material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327,    328, 335+, 352+, 357+, 363+, and 406+, for similar structure in
    which pressure is applied to form an article instead of a mold.


CLS 425/178
TXT Apparatus under subclass 175 including (1) a container for mold forming
    material and a rod or ram type feeder to supply molding material thereto or
    (2) means to remove, eject, or facilitate removal of a mold from a
    container which confines the mold forming material.


CLS 425/179
TXT Apparatus under subclass 175 wherein fastening means to secure in assembled
    relationship the sections of the container confining the mold forming
    material are integral with the container.

    (1)     Note.  Holes or openings through which fastening means (e.g.,
    bolts, pins, etc.) may be inserted are not considered fastening means
    within the scope of this subclass.


CLS 425/180
TXT Apparatus under subclass 175 wherein the internal walls of a container
    confining the mold forming material are made up of at least three parts.


CLS 425/181
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the apparatus may be changed
    to one in which a diverse shaping operation is effected or in which a
    nonshaping operation is performed by, disassembling and reassembling or by
    adding or omitting parts.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, means converting an
    injection molding machine to an extrusion machine or means converting a
    three-roll sheeting press to a two-roll gauging or finishing press.
    Combinations of diverse function apparatus with selective features which
    allow an operator to cause intentionally, a member of the combination to
    remain idle (ineffective) are provided for below in subclasses 182+, not
    here.

    (2)     Note.  Mere substitution of a die of a different size or shape
    (e.g., configuration of a shaping orifice) is not convertible unless the
    over-all function of the device is also changed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 560+ for convertible metal working
    machines.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 167 for convertible glass
    manufacturing apparatus.


CLS 425/182
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising (1) at least a portion
    thereof equipped with specific means (other than parts making up a shaping
    surface and means for associating them for a normal working cycle) to aid
    in assembly or disassembly of the apparatus for repair, cleaning, "set-up",
    "knockdown", etc., (2) a plurality of parts such as shaping members (e.g,
    material working means, etc.) having a community feature (e.g., a common
    handle or support to provide a compound implement or the like), which
    feature will allow an operator, at his discretion, to select parts to be
    used and those to remain idle even though by changing the law of a machine,
    or (3) selectively useable identical wear parts (e.g., opposite duplicate
    surfaces of a reversible unitary part).

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this and indented subclasses are means for
    opening and closing a mold or means for disassembling a component part of a
    device if such disassembly is essential to carry out each mold cycle of the
    device.

    (2)     Note.  Means to feed separable, distinct shaping means from a
    reservoir thereof into and out of an operational cycle are included, except
    for the "pallet" type which is provided for below in subclass 254.

    (3)     Note.  Plural shaping couples (either diverse or same) which are
    normally operated, simultaneously or sequentially in a cycle controlled by
    the law of a machine are classified below under appropriate first-line
    subclasses, e.g., see subclasses 357+ for plural female molds cooperating
    with a single press-shaping members.

    (4)     Note.  Excluded from this and indented subclasses are patents with
    claims broadly reciting elements which are constructed as to be "detachably
    mounted"; specifically claimed means to allow assembly or disassembly of
    the apparatus or elements thereof are required for patents to be properly
    classified within this subclass.

    (5)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, under part (2) of the
    definition, supra, means converting a three-roll sheet forming press to a
    two-roll finishing or gauging press, an extrusion device including a plate
    with plural, variegated extrusion die orifices which are selectively
    engageable with the extrusion feed means, and reversible wear elements.

    (6)     Note.  Excluded under this definition is a device having means to
    merely facilitate adjustment of parts thereof. Such a device may be found
    in the subclass involving the member made adjustable (e.g., see subclass
    367 for means to adjust the relative position of a roll).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for inserter, releaser or remover means for inflatable bags or
    cores in tire or tube making apparatus.

    110+,   for composite article forming means comprising means to support or
    manipulate preform stock in conjunction with means for shaping fluent stock
    to form a composite product.

    168,    for means adjusting the machine to compensate for wear or to
    maintain synchronism of coacting moving parts.

    253+,   for the combination of pallet handling means, a female mold and
    mold charging means.

    263+,   for a pottery wheel type support and work traversing profile tool
    combination, especially subclass 265 wherein profile tools of diverse
    configuration are operated in a given sequence to produce a given article.

    367,    for endless surface type forming means with means to adjust
    positions thereof.

    376.1+,for means pressuring stock through shaping orifices with movably
    mounted inner mandrels and flow controllers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 105.5 for a
    compound tool including a mortar-joint finishing implement.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 171 for glass working apparatus
    including repair, assembly or disassembly means.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 315+ for fluid handling apparatus
    including repair or assembly means.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 339+ for means to assemble molding
    apparatus of that class; see the search notes thereunder to other areas of
    Class 164.

    249,    Static Molds, appropriate subclasses for means permitting, but not
    positively performing, the assembly or disassembly of static molds.


CLS 425/183
TXT Apparatus under subclass 182 which includes a plurality of parts so
    associated with the apparatus that a choice of one or more is necessary for
    use in any given operation.

    (1)     Note.  The plural parts may be for example (1) two wear or shaping
    surfaces on a part, alternatively useable by reversing the part or (2) a
    plate having plural extrusion orifices, any one of which may be selectively
    chosen to be engaged with the extrusion machine material feed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 173 for glass manufacture apparatus
    with apparatus assembly means which provides for a choice of alternately
    used parts.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 329+ for fluid handling apparatus
    including means providing a choice of use of alternate wear parts; see the
    search notes thereunder.


CLS 425/184
TXT Apparatus under subclass 182 comprising a shaping surface and a severing
    device arranged such that either may be used in lieu of the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182,    for a compound tool comprising plural shaping means mounted on a
    common handle for alternative use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, appropriate subclasses for a compound tool of
    general application especially subclasses 111 for a combined or convertible
    rolling pin and 158+ for a cutter combined with other tools on implements;
    see the search notes therein.


CLS 425/185
TXT Apparatus under subclass 182 wherein means are provided to allow
    interchange or removal of an element of an apparatus during normal
    operation of the apparatus without interferring with or interrupting such
    operation.


CLS 425/186
TXT Apparatus under subclass 182 comprising (1) a means to sustain, hold or
    retain a part or element in its disassembled state or (2) means to align or
    direct a part or element while being assembled or disassembled.


CLS 425/187
TXT Apparatus under subclass 182 in which the device involved is designed to
    excavate material from a bulk source with simultaneous shaping.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    276+,   for excavating and shaping apparatus without assembly or
    dismantling means.


CLS 425/188
TXT Apparatus under subclass 182 wherein two parts or sections of an apparatus
    are pivotally joined or hingedly connected whereby opening of such parts or
    sections permits removal of an element of the apparatus enclosed by said
    sections.


CLS 425/189
TXT Apparatus under subclass 182 which includes means specifically designed to
    be grasped by the hand to aid in assembling or dismantling.


CLS 425/190
TXT Apparatus under subclass 182 wherein the dismantling means or the idle part
    is a part of an extrusion or injection type shaping means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    461+,   for an extrusion nozzle, per se, and see the collection of search
    notes thereunder.

    542+,   for injection molding devices and see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 425/191
TXT Apparatus under subclass 190 comprising an extrusion die attached to a
    holding means by threads or by a threaded casing.


CLS 425/192
TXT Apparatus under subclass 190 comprising a plurality of members capable of
    being separated one from an other and means to fasten the members to each
    other.


CLS 425/193
TXT Apparatus under subclass 182 in which the shaping apparatus comprises a
    pressure imparting shaping surface.


CLS 425/194
TXT Apparatus under subclass 193 in which the shaping comprises all or part of
    a roll, or a roll surface portion in a roll pressing machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    363+,   for molding devices including an endless shaping surface.


CLS 425/195
TXT Apparatus under subclass 193 in which the shaping apparatus comprises a
    container type shaping member.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are patents in which the walls
    of a mold cavity are moveable relative to one another in order to
    facilitate product removal or as a necessary step to complete each molding
    cycle.  Such patents are classified in appropriate subclasses below, see
    especially subclasses 412+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    412+,   for press forming devices including a male shaping member and a
    female mold.


CLS 425/196
TXT Apparatus under subclass 182 wherein the means being dismantled or the idle
    part consists of either a severing means or means for removing a product
    from a surface by a scraping-type operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    289+,   for molding plus cutting, severing, or scoring without the
    assembly-disassembly feature.


CLS 425/197
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a screen means or
    perforated plate to separate, filter or cause mixing, homogenization or
    agitation of material to be shaped.

    (1)     Note.  Perforated sleeves are considered "plate type" and are
    classified within this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Agitators, mixers, homogenizers or separators which are
    grooved and depend on cooperating surfaces to form a closure (thereby
    appearing as perforated) are not considered to be within the scope of this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     for an absorbent or foraminous means to remove a liquid during the
    molding operation.

    176,    for screens and perforated devices in combination with mold forming
    means.


CLS 425/198
TXT Apparatus under subclass 197 wherein the screen or perforated plate type
    separator is located upstream of a multi-orificed die in an extrusion type
    shaping apparatus.


CLS 425/199
TXT Apparatus under subclass 197 comprising a plurality of filter or perforated
    plates.

    (1)     Note.  Screens or perforated members in combination or in abutting
    relationship are found within this subclass.


CLS 425/200
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means ahead of a former for
    agitation, mixing, blending or kneading material to be shaped.

    (1)     Note.  Disclosure of apparatus for kneading of the material
    simultaneously with shaping into the desired shape, e.g., as in "balling"
    dough into loaves, are not included under this definition.  However, where
    such apparatus is combined with separate shaping means, the patent is
    included herein, e.g., kneading means downstream or upstream of sheeting
    means.

    (2)     Note.  Milling means in combination with the shaping or extrusion
    means are included within the scope of "agitating or kneading means" and
    are classified within this subclass or appropriate indented subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    366,    Agitating, subclass 70 for a mixer or kneader of the taffy puller
    type; subclasses 71-74 for roll type mixers and kneaders (e.g., rubber or
    clay mills), and subclasses 79+ for an auger type conveyor having structure
    to enhance mixing or kneading.


CLS 425/201
TXT Apparatus under subclass 200 wherein the agitating, mixing or kneading
    means are plural milling rolls adapted to work by forming, stripping and
    recycling of stock material.


CLS 425/202
TXT Apparatus under subclass 200 including means for dividing the material to
    be agitated or kneaded.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include screw mills or barrel mills,
    per se; however, discharge assistants (e.g., screws or pistons) which by
    configuration or attachments include means to divide and agitate, mix, or
    knead are properly classified in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The cutting or comminuting elements must be in addition to
    the kneading or mixing members.  That is, if the cutters are formed
    integral with the mixing members, they must be specifically provided for
    this function.  A mixing or kneading member which inherently also
    comminutes is not included under this definition.


CLS 425/203
TXT Apparatus under subclass 200 wherein the mixing means is located in a
    section or area designed for gas withdrawal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for mechanical means to cause a gas to be entrained in the stock
    material.


CLS 425/204
TXT Apparatus under subclass 200 in which there are a plurality of mixing or
    kneading means, at least two of which differ in type, one from the other,
    or are positioned one within the other or the mixing elements of one
    interengage or interdigitate with those of the other.

    (1)     Note.  Included under this definition of "diverse" are two similar
    means operating on nonparallel axes.


CLS 425/205
TXT Apparatus under subclass 200 which includes plural enclosures or
    receptacles positioned such that the material to be shaped passes from one
    enclosure or receptacle to another enroute to the shaping area, each
    receptacle or enclosure having a mixing or kneading means positioned
    therein.

    (1)     Note.  The receptacles or enclosures may be in the form of a
    unitary structure with partitions or baffles dividing the structure into
    plural chambers.


CLS 425/206
TXT Apparatus under subclass 200 comprising separate means to agitate, mix or
    knead plastic material on or within the forming or shaping means.

    (1)     Note.  Disclosure of apparatus for kneading of the material
    simultaneously with shaping into the desired shape, e.g., as in "balling"
    dough into loaves, are not included under this definition.  However, where
    such apparatus is combined with separate shaping means, the patent is
    included herein, e.g., kneading means downstream or upstream of sheeting
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    431,    for a device including a tamping rod to compact or densify the
    material in a mold.


CLS 425/207
TXT Apparatus under subclass 200 wherein the agitating or kneading means is
    within a receptacle or housing in which the pressure is increased.


CLS 425/208
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 wherein the agitating or kneading means
    comprises a rotatable shaft and a vane attached thereto, which vane
    continuously rotates around the shaft while advancing axially along the
    shaft.

    (1)     Note.  The vane may be either continuous or discontinuous.

    (2)     Note.  Included under this definition is a feed screw or discharge
    assistant peculiarly constructed to agitate as it feeds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202,    for an agitating or mixing means peculiarly constructed to also
    comminute or sever the material.

    376.1+,for a feed screw of similar type which only forces the material
    along.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 79+ for mixing or kneading means comprising a
    modified screw helix.


CLS 425/209
TXT Apparatus under subclass 200 in which the agitating or kneading means
    comprises a member rotating about a horizontal axis.


CLS 425/210
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means to remove
    objectionable matter (e.g., dust, particulate material, vapor, etc.) from
    the atmosphere surrounding a molding device to thereby clean and purify
    said atmosphere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73+,    for a molding apparatus or plant including a ventilating or
    drier-type hand or chamber encasing a material handler.

    225+,   for a molding machine or device combined with separate and distinct
    means to clean a part thereof.


CLS 425/211
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means to deaden or eliminate
    noise or audible vibrations resulting from operation of a molding device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 200+ for sound mufflers and filters of
    general application.


CLS 425/212
TXT Apparatus under the class definition which includes a control means for an
    operation designed such that upon completion of a cycle of the operation
    the operation will stop and not resume until reset or restarted at which
    time it will operate through a cycle and stop again.


CLS 425/213
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means to support the weight
    of a workman.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are for example scaffolds, walkways, seats,
    etc.


CLS 425/214
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means for retarding the
    motion of or stopping a moving element of the molding or shaping machine by
    friction, or by the internal resistance of a fluid or field or force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151+,   for safety devices which may include a braking means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, appropriate subclasses for brake means, per se.


CLS 425/215
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising the combination of means to
    shape fluent material (e.g., molten, plastic, particulate stock, etc.) or
    means to reshape a "green" preform (e.g., sheeted dough, etc.) and means to
    catch or collect an unusable or unused portion of the stock, which portion
    is not necessary to complete a product made by the shaping or reshaping
    means or is a reject "green" product.

    (1)     Note.  The gathering must be intentional and not merely inherent
    catching of undesirable matter associated with apparatus cleaning means
    (for which see subclass 225).

    (2)     Note.  A mechanical means (e.g., doctor blade, screed bar, etc.)
    spanning a work handler for the purpose of spreading and by its nature
    causing fluent material to build up behind and thereby maintaining a pool
    of fluent material behind said means is not considered a gatherer for the
    purposes of this class.

    (3)     Note.  Sprue of flash are considered excess or rejected stock
    within the scope of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176,    for recycling starch material used as a mold forming material.

    218+,   for blade or screed bar type excess stock removal or smoothing
    means for female molds.

    222,    for a device in which material which is transiently deposited on
    the interior of a drum as in a tumbling type agglomerating means for
    shaping particulate material is removed.

    223,    for blade type harvesting means for an endless surface type press
    forming means or endless surface type casting drum wherein the blade is
    removing a shaped product.

    225+,   for means to gather or catch dirt, impurities or extraneous
    material removed by a cleaning operation.


CLS 425/216
TXT Apparatus under subclass 215 in which the catching or collecting means is
    in motion during its operation.

    (1)     Note.  Fluid conveyor types or suction means conveying or catching
    excess stock material are considered "dynamic" gatherers and are properly
    classified within this subclass.


CLS 425/217
TXT Apparatus under subclass 216 including means to return the unused material
    back to a shaping or reshaping station for reuse.


CLS 425/218
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a shape imparting cavity
    having a charge opening and means (e.g., wiper blade) cooperating with the
    opening to remove surplus material or to smooth the outer surface of the
    material shaped and contained by the cavity.

    (1)     Note.  Devices in which the smoothing means is also a press surface
    are not here but placed in presses below.

    (2)     Note.  The wiper must be a means in addition to means pressurizing
    the stock to force it into a mold cavity (i.e., a feed hopper closure or
    valve that inherently smooths while cutting off the flow of material into
    the mold is included; see the notes under subclass 447.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    289,    for a cutting means to smooth the stock or to remove excess stock
    subsequent to shaping or forming.

    426+,   for a centrifugal or a moving female mold which forms a hollow
    article and in which a scraper or smoothing means is adapted to move
    relative thereto.

    458,    for a hand movable substrate traversing, plural dimension shaping
    means.


CLS 425/219
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 wherein the means to smooth or remove excess
    stock material is mechanically a part of, either removably attached to or
    fixed maintained by, a stock material feeding means.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded under this definition is a reciprocating feed means
    comprising a material confining side-wall which acts upon a return stroke
    thereof to remove excess material as an inherent function thereof.


CLS 425/220
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 comprising a female mold moved to and from or
    past a stationary stock smoothing or removing means, the mold moving means
    being an endless moving member or a roll.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223,    for wiper type harvesting means for endless surface type press
    forming means or endless surface type casting drum, wherein the wiper is
    removing a shaped product.

    231,    for apparatus cleaning means coacting with a traveling former.


CLS 425/221
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 wherein the female mold is mounted to permit
    scooping a portion of material from a bulk source with simultaneous shaping
    thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are the ice cream scoops and pluggers having
    blade type excess removal or smoothing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    276+,   for scoops and pluggers, per se.


CLS 425/222
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means for collecting
    particulate material into clusters (e.g., balls, etc.) by tossing or
    rolling the particles about to cause them to come into engagement with and
    join with each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332+,   for means imparting a balling action, whereby balls are formed, to
    a discrete charge of other than particulate material.

    425,    for means utilizing mold motion to distribute or compact fluent
    stock (e.g., particulate material, etc.) wherein the material assumes a
    shape determined by the mold (e.g., centrifugal casting).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 286 for apparatus to centrifugally cast
    molten material.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 310 for a process of molding an article by rotating the material
    or the shaping member.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 103+ for a tumbler type, rotary drum heating
    furnace.


CLS 425/223
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a continuous surface (e.g.,
    drum or endless belt, etc.) on which a stock material is coated, by pouring
    or immersion, combined with means (e.g., doctor blade, etc.) to remove the
    material as a product from the surface.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus comprising cooperating endless surfaces which form
    the product therebetween is excluded under this definition, and will be
    found in subclasses 335+ and 363+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84+,    for a foraminous endless shaping surface (e.g., filter-type drum or
    belt, etc.) and product removal means.

    201,    for mixing rolls which may use a doctor blade to prevent material
    being worked from adhering to the mixer surface.

    337,    for means between plural sets of endless surface type forming means
    not acting to harvest a formal product but to guide or convey material
    being shaped.

    363+,   for a press forming roll with means to strip a product therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclasses 5+, for apparatus of that
    class including means to form a film from a liquid being processed.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 89+, for a rotary drum type heat
    exchanger, especially subclass 91 when combined with a hollow stirrer or
    scraper.


CLS 425/224
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a forming surface upon which
    a film, sheet or filament of indefinite length is to be formed operately
    associated with means to deposit or cast a fluent stock material thereon to
    form the indefinite length product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67+,    for an immersed shaping orifice discharging directly into a liquid
    or shower bath means.

    447+,   for a shaping surface (e.g., mold, etc.) combined with means to
    feed fluent material thereto; see the collection of search notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes;
    subclasses 212+, for a process of casting liquid plastic on a solid shaping
    surface to form indefinite length work.


CLS 425/225
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means for removing dirt,
    impurities or extraneous matter from the apparatus or a part thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded under this definition is apparatus for cleaning
    material being shaped or already shaped.

    (2)     Note.  Apparatus disclosing and claiming and element of the
    apparatus which has the inherent function of cleaning while shaping or
    ejecting the product with no characteristic cleaning apparatus feature, is
    excluded from this subclass.  For example, a plunger wherein the edge
    thereof may act to scrape the mold sidewall on an ejection stroke with no
    particular configuration or attachment provided is excluded from this
    subclass.

    (3)     Note.  Means coating an apparatus part is not here, but found in
    subclasses 90+, even though it may have the dual function of coating and
    cleaning. Devices disclosing and claiming means cleaning an apparatus part
    with a liquid, and having no disclosure that the liquid also applies a
    coating to the apparatus are found here.

    (4)     Note.  Means removing a sprue from an apparatus part is considered
    a cleaning operation and classified in subclasses 227+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90+,    for means applying a nonmoldable coating material (e.g., parting or
    cleaning fluid) to a work contact means.

    107,    for means applying a lubricating fluid to apparatus elements.

    182+,   for means or apparatus features permitting disassembly for cleaning
    purposes.

    274,    for dipping type shaping means having stripper means for shaped
    work.

    436+,   for a shaping surface with means to release, or remove an article
    from a shaping surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, appropriate subclasses
    for mechanical cleaning means of the machine or implement type, per se, and
    see the search notes cited.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses for
    cleaning apparatus, per se, operative under a "law of the particular
    machine".


CLS 425/226
TXT Apparatus under subclass 225, wherein either (1) a single cleaning means or
    assembly cleans plural distinct apparatus parts in separate cleaning
    operations or (2) the device includes plural distinct cleaning means or
    assemblies.


CLS 425/227
TXT Apparatus under subclass 225 wherein the cleaning means acts on a shaping
    member or dough divider measuring compartment.

    (1)     Note.  A portion of an injection molding device to which a sprue is
    attached is considered a shaping member.


CLS 425/228
TXT Apparatus under subclass 227 wherein the cleaning means moves back and
    forth and on at least one trip moves across a plunger face.


CLS 425/229
TXT Apparatus under subclass 227 including means to move the cleaning means
    into operative engagement with forming means or measuring compartment in
    order to perform the cleaning operation.

    (1)     Note.  A cleaner positioned in one place and adapted to be rotated
    about its own axis (e.g., stationary rotary cleaners) are excluded from
    this subclass and are classified on some other basis.


CLS 425/230
TXT Apparatus under subclass 227 wherein the cleaning means acts on at least
    one body having a continuous forming surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223,    for endless surface type forming means with harvesting means to
    remove work or a product.


CLS 425/231
TXT Apparatus under subclass 227 wherein the cleaning means cleans a former
    adapted for movement other than movement necessary to perform a shaping
    operation.

    (1)     Note.  See glossary for definition of "traveling" as applied to
    subclass titles within the class.

    (2)     Note.  A moving "mold table" which is not mounted for endless
    movement, but moves into and out of a shaping engagement in a male-female
    relationship is included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218+,   for a combination of means for removing excess stock material
    cooperating with a charge inlet to a mold.

    223,    for an endless surface casting means and harvesting means.


CLS 425/232
TXT Apparatus under subclass 225 including a cleaner cooperating with means
    acting on or conveying work subsequent to the means performing a shaping
    operation.


CLS 425/233
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising devices having multiple
    press couples for press shaping, press forming or vulcanizing under
    pressure, wherein each press couple comprises means providing a set of
    opposed mold cavities which register, cavity to cavity, in cooperative
    pressing relationship.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    371+,   for coacting endless belts providing a single press cavity, (e.g.,
    for vulcanizing a continuous length of hose under press, etc.).

    387.1+, for preform reshaping apparatus of the blow type some of which
    include registering female mold cavities.

    408,    for press forming means including opposed registering, coacting
    mold cavities; see the collection notes thereunder.

    425+,   for cooperating, registering mold cavities in slush molding
    apparatus, see especially subclasses 429+.

    447,    for charging means combined with coacting endless belt means which
    cooperate to form a single shaping cavity.

    448,    for dough divider type apparatus including volumetric trap
    measuring chambers which incidentally impart shape to the measured charge.

    542+,   for cooperating, registering mold cavities in injection molding
    apparatus; see especially subclasses 567+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 427+, for similar structure in
    continuous metal casting apparatus, see especially subclass 430.


CLS 425/234
TXT Apparatus under subclass 233 wherein the plural sets of female mold
    sections are super-imposed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34.1+,  for plural sets of coacting female molds limited to reshaping,
    resizing or vulcanizing a tire, tire tube or drum belt.


CLS 425/235
TXT Apparatus under subclass 233 comprising cooperating severing edges on the
    coacting female molds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    289+,   for other apparatus comprising severing means, especially
    subclasses 292+ for a severing means coacting with the peripheral edge of a
    female mold.


CLS 425/236
TXT Apparatus under subclass 233 which comprises positive apparatus means,
    e.g., ejector pin or compressed air means, to eject the formed product.


CLS 425/237
TXT Apparatus under subclass 233 comprising cooperating rolls (e.g., drum,
    wheel, disc, etc.) wherein the mold cavities are formed in or mounted on an
    outer peripheral surface of at least one of the rolls.


CLS 425/238
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a measuring compartment for
    collecting a dough like material from a feeder and discharging the measured
    quantity of dough onto a receiver.

    (1)     Note.  See the glossary for a definition of the term dough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96+,    for dough dividers including means to apply coating to the trap
    chamber.

    227+,   for dough dividers including apparatus cleaning means.

    289+,   especially 298+, for cutting devices which divide a preform sheet
    of dough into shaped segments.

    447+,   especially 448 for measuring trap compartment feed means for
    material other than dough and see the search notes thereto.


CLS 425/239
TXT Apparatus under subclass 238 comprising a positive discharge assistant in
    the supply hopper for forcing the dough into the measuring compartment.

    (1)     Note.  Included under this definition is a discharge assistant
    comprising fluid pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 251+, for discharge assistant apparatus of
    general utility for discharging or dispensing material.


CLS 425/240
TXT Apparatus under subclass 238 which includes a reciprocating ram cooperating
    with the outlet from the dough supply and serving as a valve type pick up
    for transferring dough into a measuring compartment adapted for rotation
    about an external axis.

    (1)     Note.  Partial rotation, i.e., a pivoting action comprising less
    than a complete revolution, is included herein.


CLS 425/241
TXT Apparatus under subclass 238 in which the trap measuring compartment is
    mounted for rotation about an external axis.

    (1)     Note.  Partial rotation, i.e., a pivoting action comprising less
    than a complete revolution, is included herein.


CLS 425/253
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a combination of a female
    mold, means to deliver stock material to the mold either as fluent or as a
    preformed charge and dynamic means to position a pallet in or on the mold
    or which conveys a pallet or from a working area.

    (1)     Note.  The pallet may serve as a part of the mold (e.g., as its
    bottom, etc.)

    (2)     Note.  Means merely to vibrate a pallet or pallet-mold combination
    is not included whereas means merely changing the position of a pallet
    within the confines of a mold, is included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    452,    for the combination of a female mold and pallet handling means; see
    the search notes thereunder.

    470,    for a pallet, per se; see the collection of search notes thereunder.


CLS 425/254
TXT Apparatus under subclass 253 in combination with means to contain a
    plurality of pallets in a stacked relationship having means to dispense a
    pallet and convey same to or away from the female mold.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for article (e.g.,
    pallet, tray, etc.) dispensing means, per se, especially subclasses 289+,
    for a mechanical release or separation of articles.


CLS 425/255
TXT Apparatus under subclass 253 wherein the pallet means is positioned in and
    supported by means within mold sidewalls with the pallet means adapted to
    be moved vertically to eject molded material from the sidewalls.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    443,    for a shaping cavity having vertically movable bottom for releasing
    the product.


CLS 425/256
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a female mold and feed means
    wherein the feed means is especially designed to dispense a predetermined
    quantity of material to the mold.

    (1)     Note.  Devices designed to feed material until a mold is filled and
    where the amount dispensed is determined directly by the capacity of the
    mold and not by the operation of the feed device are excluded and are
    placed below on some other feature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145+,   for automatic control of feed means.

    159,    for mold filling means including an independent timer.

    162+,   especially 166 for electrically controlled feed means.

    238+,   for dough dividers of the trap chamber type.

    447+,   for forming means and means feeding fluent stock thereto,
    especially when only a feeding means including extrinsic limitations to the
    molding device is claimed.

    542+,   especially 557+, for means feeding fluent material under pressure
    to a female mold in a closed system relationship wherein the feeding means
    may include a measuring device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses, especially those having trap
    chamber in their titles (e.g., 344+ and 424.5+, etc.) for discharging or
    dispensing devices comprising means to dispense predetermined amounts of
    material.


CLS 425/257
TXT Apparatus under subclass 256 comprising multiple feed mechanisms which are
    independently actuated.

    (1)     Note.  The feed mechanisms may be associated with a single source
    or hopper.

    (2)     Note.  Unitary valve or pick up assemblies, (e.g., compartmented or
    perforated wheels or plates etc.), are not considered independent and are
    found in appropriate subclasses, below. Valve or feed assemblies connected
    by way of linkages to insure or provide synchronization are herein.


CLS 425/258
TXT Apparatus under subclass 256 comprising means to advance the feed means
    into operative relation with the female mold.

    (1)     Note.  Included within the scope of this and indented subclasses
    are devices which include a stationary hopper with a charge transfer
    mechanism moving between the hopper and the female mold.


CLS 425/259
TXT Apparatus under subclass 258 wherein the mold means in mounted for
    traveling movement, of the type other than that necessary to perform a
    shaping operation.

    (1)     Note.  See glossary for definition of "traveling".


CLS 425/260
TXT Apparatus under subclass 258 in which the feed means comprises a sliding
    chamber which translates between a feed supply where it is filled and a
    female mold into which the material is deposited, said female mold
    including a movable bottom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   for a transfer box type feeder including an agitating or kneading
    means.

    219,    for a feeder including an attached excess removal or smoothing
    means.


CLS 425/261
TXT Apparatus under subclass 256 wherein multiple molds are adapted to
    successively move past the feed means.


CLS 425/262
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising (1) a fluent material
    confining member which member imparts the extended shape to the fluent
    material and (2) a traveling type member adapted to be withdrawn axially
    from within the confining element and thus impart internal shape to the
    formed product.

    (1)     Note.  The patents generally found herein relate to pipe formers in
    which the traveling member smooths and compacts the internal surface of the
    pipe.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 105 for apparatus for coating (lining)
    a preformed pipe, which structure may be closely related to subject matter
    of subclass 262.


CLS 425/263
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a work support and a work
    traversing profile tool wherein the tool turns off, smoothes, or polishes
    the surface of the work by a relative motion between the tool and the work
    support.

    (1)     Note.  The profile tool traverse the work during shaping as a
    result of moving the support, the tool, or both.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262,    for an encasing shaping surface and a spaced travel type shaping
    member axially moveable therein.

    289+,   for apparatus under the class definition including cutting.

    418,    for a male-female shaping couple wherein the male member rotates,
    but does not traverse, i.e., travel along, the surface of the work.

    425+,   for a female mold and means utilizing the mold motion to distribute
    or compact stack therein.

    459,    for a profile tool or potter's wheel, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    82,     Turning, appropriate subclasses for turners, per se, disclosed for
    use in shaping soft clay like materials.


CLS 425/264
TXT Apparatus under subclass 263 which includes both a male type press shaping
    member and a work traversing profile tool.


CLS 425/265
TXT Apparatus under subclass 263 including two or more profile tools of
    different configuration each imparting its shape to the work.


CLS 425/266
TXT Apparatus under subclass 263 including multiple work supports.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    265,    for multiple tools of diverse configuration.


CLS 425/267
TXT Apparatus under subclass 263 wherein the profile tool turns about an axis.


CLS 425/268
TXT Apparatus under subclass 263 having a profile tool which engages and
    traverses the outer or external surface of a preform.


CLS 425/269
TXT Apparatus under the class definition which includes a shaping surface
    adapted to form an article when immersed in a bath containing a film
    forming substance.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are disclosures in which the coating on the
    form is intended to be removed as an article of manufacture.

    (2)     Note.  Subcombinations not elsewhere provided for, (e.g., forms,
    per se, product stripping means etc.), are included in this and indented
    subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    393,    for means rolling a bead on an article carried by a nominally
    recited dipping form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 400+ for coating means of the
    immersion type where there is no disclosure that the coating itself is the
    product after the coating itself is stripped from a base.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, for forming fibrous articles on
    a foraminous mold.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 301+, for process of shaping an article by dipping.


CLS 425/270
TXT Apparatus under subclass 269 which includes means to cause movement of the
    shaping means into contact with film forming material in a bath.

    (1)     Note.  Manual means for moving the form into the bath is excluded
    under this definition and will be found in subclass 269.


CLS 425/271
TXT Apparatus under subclass 270 comprising means to apply pressure or suction
    to the internal portion of the shaping surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    437+,   for shaping surfaces, and means to remove or release the article
    from the surface by gas means.


CLS 425/272
TXT Apparatus under subclass 270 including means to control or impart a motion
    to the dip form other than that motion essential to submerge and convey the
    form through the bath.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are devices which rotate, or impart other
    nontransitory motion to the shaping form, usually to control the
    distribution of the coating on the mold.


CLS 425/273
TXT Apparatus under subclass 270 combined with means imparting motion to the
    bath.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 421, for coating apparatus with means
    to move the coating tank.


CLS 425/274
TXT Apparatus under subclass 270 including means to separate the formed article
    from the shaping surface.


CLS 425/275
TXT Apparatus under subclass 269 which comprises the structure of the dipping
    form, per se.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass is a claim reciting any portion
    of the device other than that which is to be covered by molding material,
    (e.g., handles, means attaching the form to a machine, etc., are excluded).
     Such devices are found in subclass 269.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, appropriate subclasses for boot and shoe
    lasts, per se, when used for other than dipping.


CLS 425/276
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a shaping surface adapted
    to scoop out a portion of material from a bulk source and thereby shape,
    the portion of material removed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118,    for similar apparatus in combination with a preform support.

    187,    for similar apparatus including assembly or dismounting means.

    221,    for similar apparatus in combination with a blade type excess
    removal or smoothing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 124+, for a cutlery combination including a
    material holder, especially subclasses 128+ which also provides for a
    stripper or ejector therewith, and subclasses 324+ for a spoon or ladle of
    general application.


CLS 425/277
TXT Apparatus under subclass 276 including a receptacle or enclosure for fluid
    having a freezing point lower than the freezing point of the material to be
    removed by the shaping surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 140 for a cutlery combination with heater means
    and subclass 141 for a spoon with a fluid conductor.


CLS 425/278
TXT Apparatus under subclass 276 wherein the shaping surface comprises a
    plurality of components adapted to be brought into assembled relationship
    subsequent or during insertion of the shaping surface into the bulk source,
    but prior to removal therefrom.


CLS 425/279
TXT Apparatus under subclass 276 including means to separate the formed product
    confined within the shaping surface from the remaining bulk.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278,    for devices which assemble the shaping surface after penetration,
    thus separating the product from the bulk.


CLS 425/280
TXT Apparatus under subclass 276 including means to move the shaping surface or
    a portion thereof relative to the remaining apparatus to thereby aid
    insertion of the shaping surface in the bulk material.


CLS 425/281
TXT Apparatus under subclass 276 wherein the shaping surface is provided with a
    particular edge configuration adapted to cut.

    (1)     Note.  The cutting edge or particular configuration of the shaping
    surface edge must be claimed.  The fact that the entire shaping surface is
    extremely thin thereby providing a cutting edge is not enough.


CLS 425/282
TXT Apparatus under subclass 276 including means to separate the material,
    contained within the shaping surface from the shaping surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    436+,   for shaping surfaces with product release means.


CLS 425/283
TXT Apparatus under subclass 282 wherein the shaping surface comprises a
    plurality of surfaces adapted to be expanded or separated to facilitate
    removal of the formed product therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278,    for devices which assemble the shaping surface after insertion into
    the bulk, thus separating the product from the bulk.


CLS 425/284
TXT Apparatus under subclass 282 wherein the means to separate includes a blade
    adapted to move between the formed product and the shaping surface to
    thereby separate the product from the shaping surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 77 for a static mold having a scraper means
    to separate product from the mold.


CLS 425/285
TXT Apparatus under subclass 284 wherein the movable blade is pivotally
    fastened to the edge portion of the shaping surface.


CLS 425/286
TXT Apparatus under subclass 282 comprising means for entering or passing
    through the cavity defined by the shaping surface to expel the formed
    product therefrom.


CLS 425/287
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means defining a delivery or
    shaping orifice (e.g., nozzle having an internal concentric baffle means)
    and also combined with fluent stock material handling means compelling flow
    through the orifice to form a ring shaped relatively short article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87,     for caulking gun type applicators having distinct manual means for
    controlling a dimension in addition to the depth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, appropriate subclasses for
    mere caulking-type guns of the hand manipulable type.


CLS 425/288
TXT Apparatus under subclass 287 in which means defining the shaping orifice
    includes concentric internal and external members which are relatively
    movable and which cooperate with the orifice means to provide the shape
    imparting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    381,    for extrusion apparatus including a movable orifice or a movable
    mounted mandrel mounted within an orifice.


CLS 425/289
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means to (1) completely
    remove a portion of a preform from the remainder thereof, (2) form a hole
    or opening in a preform which extends completely therethrough or, (3)
    partially disjoin a portion of a preform from the remainder by severing the
    preform through its entire thickness in a direction extending from one edge
    toward another edge and allowing the severed portions to remain attached to
    each other.

    (1)     Note.  To be included herein under part (3) of the above definition
    the intent must be to disassociate the preform in the severed area and not
    merely to rearrange or reshape the preform by forming a depression or
    surface deformation therein.  For example, forming depressions or
    decorations in the edge of a brick or concrete building block without
    removing any material, even though done with a sharp knife-like element, is
    not severing.

    (2)     Note.  The severing need not be done by a sharp knife-like
    implement, but may be accomplished, for example, by breaking, heating,
    tearing, etc.

    (3)     Note.  Included herein are devices for severing and simultaneously
    reshaping as well as devices wherein the severing and the molding are
    accomplished sequentially.

    (4)     Note.  The severing of a parison prior to blow molding is not
    within the scope of this subclass; for such patents see subclasses 324+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94,     for means applying a parting or other nonmolding material to a
    cutter, harvesting blade or scores.

    106,    for molding and cutting combined with a coating means.

    142,    for cutter control means operated by means responsive to a
    condition or variable.

    164,    for electrical control of severing means for a product.

    202,    for cutting means in combination with means to agitate, knead or
    other wise mix the cut or comminuted material.

    218,    for a female mold and means to remove excess stock or to smooth
    stock prior to the stock being formed or set up.

    232,    for means for cleaning a cutter or knife element.

    238+,   for dough divider type devices including a trap chamber.

    806,    for a cross-reference collection of disclosures on flash removing
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 174+ for cutting means for glass
    preform or products.

    82,     Turning, subclasses 46+ for patents claiming cutter, per se, being
    brought into engagement with the exterior of a rotating workpiece or to
    trim or cut away portions of the work piece.

    83,     Cutting, especially subclasses 467+ for a cutter of the class type
    which cuts material to a desired length.

    157,    Wheelwright Machines, subclass 13 for grooving, slitting and/or
    lacerating of rubber tires.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 262, for metal founding apparatus
    including product severing or trimming means.

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, appropriate subclasses for a
    process or apparatus for severing by tearing or breaking.


CLS 425/290
TXT Apparatus under subclass 289 where the severing means is a perforator which
    includes means to (1) penetrate through one dimension of the work with the
    resulting perforation not intersecting an edge of the work other than the
    edges defining the dimension referred to or (2) effect a partial
    penetration of work by movement into a surface of the work and removal of
    material therefrom without any significant movement along the surface.

    (1)     Note.  To distinguish between this subclass, subclass 298 and other
    similar subclasses the intent of the inventor must be considered to some
    extent.  For example, the primary product of this subclass is a preform
    with holes therein, the excavated material being waste; in subclass 298 the
    product may be the excavated material while the waste is the preform with
    the holes therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    385,    for apparatus for molding or forming a preform in combination with
    a surface deformation of the preform.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 358+, for hand operated or material supported
    perforators; see the class definition thereof for statements of the lines
    with other classes.

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for perforating
    without molding.


CLS 425/291
TXT Apparatus under subclass 290 including additional means to cut, sever,
    score or scribe the preform or product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301,    for plural diverse severing means wherein none of the severing
    means is a perforator.


CLS 425/292
TXT Apparatus under subclass 289 wherein the cutting means (1) circumscribes a
    peripheral edge of a female mold while utilizing said edge as the cutter
    reaction surface.

    (1)     Note.  To be included herein the cutter may either traverse the
    edge of a female mold, or coact with the entire peripheral edge at one time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218+,   for wiper means (e.g., scraper, screed bar, etc.) which acts to
    remove excess stock materials from a female mold.

    263+,   for a pottery wheel type support and a profile tool.


CLS 425/293
TXT Apparatus under subclass 292 including means to cause a wavy or undulating
    configuration of the product or a portion thereof.


CLS 425/294
TXT Apparatus under subclass 289 wherein the severing means comprises (1) a
    rotating member having cutting edges extending radially in a
    circumferential direction coacting with (2) either another similar rotating
    member or a plate member having longitudinally extending grooves and ridge
    like projections whereby the ridges coact with the cutting edges on the
    rotating member.

    (1)     Note.  Devices of this type usually form rod like or ball like
    products.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233+,   for sets of press couples comprising registering female mold
    cavities.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses for similar cutting devices not
    combined with molding.


CLS 425/295
TXT Apparatus under subclass 289 wherein the cutting means or its support is
    mechanically connected, to a guide which transmits diverse movements to the
    tool by the nature of construction of the guide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 565 for a cutter which is template controlled or
    surface guided.


CLS 425/296
TXT Apparatus under subclass 289 comprising means to form a product from bulk
    material combined with means to reshape and sever the formed product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302.1+, for serially arranged cutting means and preform reshaping means.


CLS 425/297
TXT Apparatus under subclass 296 wherein the severing means is designed to
    operate prior to the reshaping means.


CLS 425/298
TXT Apparatus under subclass 289 wherein the configuration of the cutting means
    is such that the severed material is confined within a cavity outlined by
    the cutting means, said cavity serving to reshape the severed material.

    (1)     Note.  Severing to form a particular configuration, (e.g., disc,
    star, animal, etc.), is not included herein unless the severing means also
    reshapes.  For such cutting devices not involving reshaping, see Class 83,
    Cutting, appropriate subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233,    for sets of press couples comprising registering female mold
    cavities.

    276+,   for means excavating from bulk with simultaneous shaping.


CLS 425/299
TXT Apparatus under subclass 298 which includes means to score, emboss,
    inscribe or otherwise deform the surface of the material being shaped.


CLS 425/300
TXT Apparatus under subclass 298 wherein a plurality of cutting means, of
    cell-like construction, penetrate the confines of a mold or mold sidewalls
    to sever and shape material contained by said mold or mold sidewalls.


CLS 425/301
TXT Apparatus under subclass 289 comprising plural severing means wherein one
    severing means differs in kind from at least one other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291,    for diverse severing means where one severing means is a perforator.

    306+,   for plural similar severing means.


CLS 425/302.1
TXT Apparatus under subclass 289 comprising serially arranged severing means
    and preform reshaping means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    296+,   for forming from bulk, severing and preform reshaping.

    527,    for means for blow molding combined with means to trim the product.

    531,    for means to sever a parison combined with means to blow mold the
    parison to final shape.


CLS 425/303
TXT Apparatus under subclass 302.1 wherein the preform reshaping means forms
    alternate ridges and grooves or wrinkles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    396,    for corrugating means, per se; see search notes thereunder.


CLS 425/304
TXT Apparatus under subclass 302.1 comprising means in addition to the cutting
    element to score, emboss, inscribe or otherwise deform the surface of the
    performed material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    299,    for cutting implements having a shaping cavity and a surface
    deformation means.

    385,    for preform reshaping means wherein the reshaping means is acting
    to deform the surface of the preform material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 875+ and 879+ for grooving or scoring methods
    or means with product handling means wherein no shaping of the material or
    product is involved.


CLS 425/305.1
TXT Apparatus under subclass 302.1 in which the means to sever preform material
    is followed by means to reshape the severed preform material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    297,    for forming, cutting and reshaping product in that order.

    531,    for means to sever a parison combined with means to blow mold the
    parison into final shape.


CLS 425/306
TXT Apparatus under subclass 289 comprising multiple cutting means each of
    which has its own mounting or support.

    (1)     Note.  Plural similar cutters coacting or cooperating with the same
    stationary reaction surface (e.g., a stationary forming means) solely or
    one cutter coacting with one reaction surface (e.g., scissors type) are not
    considered "plural" and are not included within the scope of this subclass.
     However, plural like cutters cooperating with moving work or a moving
    reaction surface (e.g., plural like cutters, work conveyor, etc.), are
    considered properly classified herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291     and 301, for diverse severing means.


CLS 425/307
TXT Apparatus under subclass 306 wherein the severing means operate subsequent
    to the shaping means.


CLS 425/308
TXT Apparatus under subclass 289 comprising means to shape fluent or bulk
    material and means to sever said shaped material.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are molds with guides to guide a knife even
    though the knife is not claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    296+,   for means forming from bulk, severing, and reshaping.


CLS 425/309
TXT Apparatus under subclass 308 wherein the severing means includes a moving
    surface operated and supported by means extending from a shaping orifice or
    extrusion nozzle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    287+,   for similar devices disclosed as doughnut formers.


CLS 425/310
TXT Apparatus under subclass 308 wherein the severing is accomplished by a
    coaction between a forming surface and severing means by utilizing the
    forming surface as a cutter reaction surface.

    (1)     Note.  Devices wherein the cutter extends within a forming means,
    e.g., a female mold, are included herein provided some portion of the
    molding surface serves as a cutter reaction surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    292+,   for a cutter guided by or cooperating with the peripheral edge of a
    female mold.


CLS 425/311
TXT Apparatus under subclass 310 wherein the cutting is effected by moving the
    cutter with respect to a coacting stationary shaping means.

    (1)     Note.  A traveling cutter edge, e.g., a disc or chain type cutter,
    is not considered a moving cutter unless the support for the cutter is
    moved from one position to another.


CLS 425/312
TXT Apparatus under subclass 311 wherein the severing means is supported on a
    pliant continuous carrier.


CLS 425/313
TXT Apparatus under subclass 311 comprising a common mounting means for
    multiple cutting means.


CLS 425/314
TXT Apparatus under subclass 310 comprising an immobile severing means and
    multiple shaping means.


CLS 425/315
TXT Apparatus under subclass 308 comprising a product conveyor, positioning or
    support means downstream of the shaping means, said downstream means
    serving as a cutter reaction surface for a cutting means.


CLS 425/316
TXT Apparatus under subclass 315 comprising a unitary severing assembly means
    having multiple severing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    313,    for this apparatus with a moving cutter utilizing a stationary
    former as a cutter reaction surface.


CLS 425/317
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in combination with either (1) means
    to perfect basic subject matter of this class or (2) means for treating or
    working stock material wherein the means is other than that within the
    class definition.

    (1)     Note.  Transmitting intelligence by special design form-type
    printing involving surface deformation has been classified below on the
    basis of preform reshaping.  Features that are so common to a molding
    apparatus as to make it impractical to consider them as perfecting or
    combined features have been collected below on the basis of the basic
    subject matter: (a) heating or cooling means. (b) conveying or handling
    means.

    (2)     Note.  Subject matter listed at the end of this statement, although
    generally classified, per se, in other classes, is considered so essential
    or common to Class 425 apparatus that is considered basic subject matter of
    Class 425 and not combined; therefore, a combination of Class 425 therewith
    is assignable to subclasses below subclass 317 unless specifically provided
    for thereabove:



    a)      static or dynamic material handling means for feeding to, from or
    between shaping or reshaping or treating means.

    b)      static or dynamic apparatus supports or guides.

    c)      mechanical movement means.

    d)      power or pump means.

    e)      fluid handling means.

    f)      material or product treating means.

    g)      vibrating or tamping means.

    h)      heating means.

    i)      cooling means.

    (3)     Note.  The combination of pretreatment means with basic subject
    matter is here unless specifically provided for above in contrast to other
    treatment combinations which are provided for below this subclass.

    (4)     Note.  The following subjects matter are to be found in combination
    with apparatus under the class definition of this class throughout the
    schedule and have been considered either A+B or A+P types of subject,
    namely:



    1)      material (e.g., fluent, article, etc.) handlers-see subclass 403.1
    and notes thereunder;

    2)      mechanical movements or parts thereof see e.g., subclass 457 as a
    nonlimiting example;

    3)      treating means, heating or cooling means or the like see subclass
    445 as a nonlimiting example.

    (5)     Note.  Means to heat or cool the apparatus in the nature of a
    safety means therefor are included in this subclass.

    (6)     Note.  Apparatus including means for applying a liquid spray, or
    applying currents of air, per se, where air constitutes the normal
    atmosphere even when heated or cooled or air under pressure or vacuum, is
    not included within the scope of this subclass.

    (7)     Note.  Steam treating apparatus, due to its conventional use is not
    included herein.

    (8)     Note.  Examples of combined features found in this subclass are:
    comminuting devices upstream of the former, winding and reeling devices for
    filaments formed upstream thereof, pie crust crimpers, shipping crates, egg
    beaters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181,    for apparatus convertible to different species of this class or to
    apparatus of a different class by interchanging of parts or by addition or
    removal of parts.

    183,    for plural wear or shaping surfaces mounted for alternative use.

    184,    for a compound tool including a shaping and severing means mounted
    for alternative use.

    202,    for apparatus under the class definition combined with separate and
    distinct upstream agitating or kneading means and also cutting or severing
    or comminuting means.

    289+,   for apparatus under the class definition combined with severing
    means, especially 308+ for pellet mills comprising an extruder and a cutter
    or comminutor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, appropriate subclasses for boot and shoe
    making apparatus combined with molding apparatus.

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 113+, especially subclass 122 for
    package making means combined with shaping means for the material being
    packaged.

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclass 42 for apparatus for
    making horseshoes combined with a rotary die block.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 340+, for refrigeration means combined
    with means producing a shaped product.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclass 8, for apparatus for forming and
    pressing leather.

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses for metal deforming
    apparatus combined with molding apparatus.

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 78+ for cigar or cigarette making comprising
    molding or forming combined with disparate functions.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for methods and apparatus for laminating products,
    combined with means shaping the products or portions thereof.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 232+, for paper
    making and fiber liberation apparatus combined with molding apparatus.

    199,    Type Casting, appropriate subclasses for type casting apparatus
    combined with specific molding apparatus.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for making
    apparel combined with molding apparatus.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 101.01 for
    combined or convertible of that class.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses for processes of forming or shaping material
    combined with a non-molding step not otherwise classified.


CLS 425/318
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising coacting shaping surfaces
    adapted to be held in the hand and operated by manual movement during the
    shaping operation.

    (1)     Note.  In determining if a patent is proper herein the intent of
    the inventor must be considered.  The fact that a device is of such a size
    that it could be held in the hand is not sufficient to place a patent here.
     To be included here it must be intended that the device be held in the
    hand during use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for hand manipulable repair devices.

    276+,   for hand held devices for excavating from a bulk source with
    simultaneous shaping, (e.g., ice cream scoop, or plugger etc.).

    287+,   for extrusion apparatus limited to making doughnut shapes many of
    which are hand manipulable shaping couples.

    289+,   especially subclass 298 for cutting implements providing or shaping
    cavity, many of which are hand held and manipulated.


CLS 425/319
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means to shape fluent or
    bulk stock into a preform and means to reshape the preform by twisting or
    forming into a coil, helix or spiral.

    (1)     Note.  Means to shape stock followed by reshaping into rows of
    waves, i.e., corrugating is not here but found in appropriate subclasses
    below.  See especially subclasses 324.1+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323,    for pretzel bending devices which may disclose forming from bulk
    and twisting or convoluting.

    324.1+, for diverse shaping apparatus.

    334,    for sets of convoluting or twisting means.

    363+,   for preform reshaping, per se, utilizing and endless shaping
    surface.

    383+,   especially subclass 391 for preform reshaping, per se, by
    convoluting or twisting means.


CLS 425/320
TXT Apparatus under subclass 319 where the convoluting or twisting means
    includes at least one endless surface in direct contact with the material
    being reshaped.

    (1)     Note.  A mandrel which serves as a form around which a preform is
    wound to form an article containing a cavity corresponding to the shape of
    the mandrel, (e.g., tube or hollow cane forming, etc.), is not found here,
    but is proper for subclass 319.


CLS 425/321
TXT Apparatus under subclass 320 where the convoluting means includes tow or
    more endless surfaces in direct contact with the material being reshaped.


CLS 425/322
TXT Apparatus under subclass 320 where the convoluting means includes a roll in
    direct contact with the material being reshaped.


CLS 425/323
TXT Apparatus under the class definition for reshaping a preform stick or rod
    of pretzel dough by permanently distorting a portion of the preform
    throughout its entire thickness relative to a second portion thereof.


CLS 425/324.1
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising multiple shaping means for
    fluent material or for a preform, identifiable as separate and individual
    units, each unit performing a complete shaping operation of a kind
    different than that of the other (e.g., roll forming means and surface
    embossing means, press forming means and flow reshaping means, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are distinct different types of presses as
    well as different species of the same type of press, (e.g., roll presses
    and platen presses or diverse species of platen presses, etc.).  Excluded,
    however, are plural sequential shaping means of the same general type
    differing only in size or shape but not in mode of operation, and which are
    designed to act sequentially to progressively shape or alter the shape of
    the material being molded.  Such patents are placed below on other features.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66,     for a continuous filament forming means or film casting means with
    a stretching means consisting of work advancing means.

    112,    for a combination of diverse means of the class including means to
    make a composite stock and means to form or reshape a preform.

    163,    for diverse shaping means combined with a significant electrical
    control system.

    176,    for apparatus to form a mold combined with means utilizing the mold
    to produce a product.

    181,    for convertible apparatus.

    264,    for a potter's apparatus combined with a separate and distinct male
    plunger.

    290,    for a perforator combined with a   shaping or reshaping means,
    especially subclass 291 for such means combined with scoring means.

    296,    for a combination of means for forming from bulk, means for
    severing and means for reshaping.

    317,    for basic subject matter of this class in combination with other
    types of apparatus where the combination is not provided for elsewhere.

    323,    for diverse shaping means utilized in forming pretzels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 33+, for plural diverse manufacturing
    apparatus including metal shaping or metal assembly; see the search notes
    thereunder and the line note between Classes 29 and 425 in the class
    definition of Class 425.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 227+, for combinations of diverse
    glass working apparatus generally contributing to produce a given product
    (e.g., press and below machines used to make bottles).

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 280+ for cigar or cigarette making, especially
    subclasses 77+, for combined molding or forming.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for diverse manufacturing apparatus including
    laminating means of Class 156 combined with Class 425 apparatus (e.g.,
    subclasses 443+, etc.); see the line note in the class definition of Class
    425.


CLS 425/325
TXT Apparatus under subclass 324.1 having (1) a shape imparting opening through
    which fluent material is extruded and (2) means to stretch, shrink, or
    otherwise change the configuration of the extruded material, or vulcanizing
    means including a preform support generally to retain the shape of the
    product during vulcanization.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28.1+,  for tire, tire tube or drive belt type vulcanizers.

    160,    for vulcanizing means in combination with means for timing or
    heating cycle.

    461+,   for an extrusion nozzle, per se; see the collection of search notes
    thereunder to more comprehensive combinations which include a nozzle
    shaping means.

    542+,   for injection molding apparatus when the configuration of a
    charging nozzle or orifice does not contribute to the configuration of the
    product.


CLS 425/326.1
TXT Apparatus under subclass 325 wherein extruded material is reshaped by means
    establishing a fluid pressure different on one portion of the preform than
    that maintained on another portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    405.1+, for shaping means utilizing differential gas pressure in the
    shaping operation; see the search notes thereunder.

    532,    for apparatus for extruding a parison combined with apparatus for
    blow molding that parison.

    567+,   for an injection molding machine including fluid pressure means to
    expand the material against mold sidewalls.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 187+, for means for drawing tube
    stack from a molten glass bath including fluid pressure differential
    inflating means.


CLS 425/327
TXT Apparatus under subclass 325 wherein the means to change the configuration
    of the extruded material includes opposed coacting shaping surfaces
    exerting compressive force on material therebetween.


CLS 425/328
TXT Apparatus under subclass 324.1 having (1) press-shaping couple means
    comprising at least one body having a continuous pressure surface, i.e.,
    roller and (2) an opposed coacting shaping surface (other than roll means)
    exerting compressive force on material therebetween.


CLS 425/329
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including three or more continuous
    force applying surfaces grouped in such a manner that said surfaces form a
    shaping aperture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 158 for apparatus having rolls with intersecting
    or inclined axes.


CLS 425/330
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising three or more relatively
    movable coacting force applying surfaces grouped in such a manner that said
    surfaces are movable on crossing paths into a molding relationship to
    define a molding cavity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for ultra high pressure devices which include plural plungers.

    352+,   for a female mold and opposed co-axial dynamic press members.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 158 for press apparatus having rolls with
    intersecting or inclined axes, and subclass 232 for press apparatus with
    three or more pressure surfaces to co-compress material.


CLS 425/331
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising (1) a solid endless shaping
    surface (i.e., roll means) cooperating with an apertured shaping surface,
    or (2) an apertured endless shaping surface (i.e., roll means) cooperating
    with a solid shaping surface, to form shaped product by forcing fluent
    material through the apertures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310+,   for similar apertured structure in combination with a product
    severing means (e.g., a pellet mill, etc.).

    364,    for an endless belt coacting with stationary platen or
    reciprocating shaping means.

    382,    for an extruder machine having plural orifices and having means
    other than a roll forcing the work through such orifices.


CLS 425/332
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means forming ball like
    products by imparting rolling motions to discrete pieces of work material
    wherein the rolling motions imported are either in two or more intersecting
    paths or include two or more axes of rotations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222,    for a tumbling type agglomerating means for particulate material
    which inherently produces pellets that are approximately spherical in shape.

    294,    for rotating means comprising circumferentially extending cutting
    and shaping channels coacting with a roll or platen having complementary
    channels.

    363+,   for endless surface shaping means and see especially subclasses 364
    and 374 for an endless shaping surface cooperating with a stationary
    surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 228 for marvering means (rolling to
    shape a glob of glass) with blow means.


CLS 425/333
TXT Apparatus under subclass 332 wherein the balling means comprises curved
    members defining a curved pathway through which the material being shaped
    is rolled.


CLS 425/334
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising plural reshaping couples to
    (1) convolute plural preforms in paralled or (2) convolute a single preform
    a plurality of times in series.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    319+,   for means for forming a preform combined with means to convolute
    that preform.

    324.1+,for diverse shaping means in series.

    391,    for convoluting means to reshape one        preform at a time.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 303+ for
    a convoluting-type machine for making a paper tube.


CLS 425/335
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising multiple couples for press
    reshaping, press forming or vulcanizing wherein at least one shaping body
    of each press couple is a continuous traveling pressure surface.

    (1)     Note.  The combination of two rolls coacting with a common roll to
    provide two pressure areas is excluded see subclasses 363+, below.

    (2)     Note.  Feed means which may include one or more endless surfaces
    but which in no way contribute to the shape of the product are not
    considered a shaping couple for this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  Included within the scope of this subclass are devices which
    one endless surface cooperates with multiple shaping surfaces to provide
    plural press areas.  Also included are devices which feed a work back
    through a shaping couple including an endless surface to perform multiple
    press operations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329,    for three or more endless surfaces cooperating to define a shaping
    aperture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclasses 99+ for web stretching
    devices which may include sets of roll couples see, moreover, subclass 78,
    for roll couple nip control means responsive to the detection of the web
    condition.

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclasses 240+ for filament stretching
    devices which may include sets of roll couples.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 144+ for endless surface pressing device of
    general utility.


CLS 425/336
TXT Apparatus under subclass 335 comprising means for shaping an advancing
    length of work into ridges and grooves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    369+,   for endless type press forming a reshaping means, or vulcanizing
    means with preform corrugating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    459+ for corrugating in combinations with laminating.


CLS 425/337
TXT Apparatus under subclass 335 which includes means positioned between the
    sets of shaping couples to guide, convey or deflect material as it passes
    from one shaping couple to another.


CLS 425/338
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising three or more cooperating
    platens arranged in parallel fashion to provide multiple shaping areas each
    such area being separate and distinct from the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    383+,   for a preform reshaping or resigning means, or for a vulcanizing
    means including a conforming preform support, see especially subclasses
    394+ for coacting pressure surfaces.

    406,    for press forming apparatus having opposed press members; see the
    search notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 193+ for plural presses of general application;
    see the search notes under the class definition of Class 100.


CLS 425/339
TXT Apparatus under subclass 338 in which the shaping areas are used to reshape
    a previously formed product or comprise a support area similar shape of the
    preform or the shape desired and are used to vulcanize the previously
    formed product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    340+,   for plural reshaping or vulcanizing means generally.

    383+,   for single reshaping or vulcanizing means for a preform.


CLS 425/340
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a plurality of separate and
    distinct dynamic means, identifiable as separate units, each of which has a
    working (e.g., shaping) motion independent of the others to change the
    configuration of one or more preforms or (2) to vulcanize one or more
    preforms which are maintained in an operative position by a support of the
    same general configuration as the preforms.

    (1)     Note.  A press couple in which different parts thereof act
    sequentially on a common preform are included; whereas a "gang" mold type
    is classified under the appropriate main line subclasses appearing below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28.1+,  for apparatus especially adapted to reshape, resize or vulcanize a
    tire casing, tire inner tube or endless drive belt.

    263+,   especially subclass 265 for preform reshaping means of the pottery
    type which includes work traversing profile tools.

    363+,   for a press reshaping or vulcanizing means of the endless type,
    including a corrugating roll having plural ridges and the like.

    383+,   for a single preform reshaping means or vulcanizing means including
    a conforming preform support capable of working on plural preforms.


CLS 425/341
TXT Apparatus under subclass 340 comprising multiple means to feed preform
    material to a reshaping or vulcanizing area; e.g., plural magazine type
    dispensers to plural molds.


CLS 425/342.1
TXT Apparatus under subclass 340 comprising means for applying fluid under
    pressure to the preformed material either directly or indirectly.


CLS 425/343
TXT Apparatus under subclass 340 in which (1) a preform sequentially passes
    through spaced, serially arranged reshaping or vulcanizing stations or (2)
    diverse portions of a preform are individually reshaped by a separate and
    distinct reshaping or vulcanizing members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    325,    for similar apparatus combined with diverse shaping or reshaping
    means.


CLS 425/344
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising sets of devices, each set
    including a female mold having opposed movable plunger type press members
    positioned therein and means acting on the press members and causing them
    to move and apply pressure to material during the shaping operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    352,    for a single device of the type herein provided for.


CLS 425/345
TXT Apparatus under subclass 344 wherein either the mold or press members are
    adapted to move in a direction transverse to the direction of the pressing
    action.

    (1)     Note.  The traveling movement of the mold or press members may be
    either during or between molding operations.


CLS 425/346
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising plural sets of male-female
    molding means for forming plural articles.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein a unitary structure having a plurality of
    female mold cavities therein cooperating with press surfaces which project
    into the cavities to form plural articles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    357+,   for plural female mold cavities with a single press member which
    may or may not project into the cavities.

    406+,   for a single female mold and press member or for plural female mold
    cavities with plural press members, which plural press members do not
    project into the cavities.


CLS 425/347
TXT Apparatus under subclass 346 comprising female molding means mounted for
    movement other than that necessary to perform the molding operation.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded under this definition of traveling is motion caused
    by vibrating in situ or moving a limited yielding surface in the female
    mold.


CLS 425/348
TXT Apparatus under subclass 347 wherein the motion of the plural female
    molding means is in an endless path.


CLS 425/349
TXT Apparatus under subclass 348 wherein the female molding means move back and
    forth along a linear path and are brought into pressure engagement with
    male molding means which are stationary or move along a nonlinear path.


CLS 425/350
TXT Apparatus under subclass 348 comprising an element (e.g., pin, pressurized
    gas source, etc.) to positively expel the formed article from the mold
    cavity.


CLS 425/351
TXT Apparatus under subclass 346 comprising an element (e.g., pin, pressurized
    gas source, etc.) to positively expel the formed article from the mold
    cavity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    436+,   for means to positively expel a formed product from a forming
    surface and see the notes thereunder for a complete list of subclasses
    involving ejecting means.


CLS 425/352
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a tubular female mold having
    opposed movable plunger type press members positioned therein and means
    moving the press member to apply pressure to material in the female mold.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are devices in which the pressure applied is
    by means of a spring on which a press member is mounted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    415,    for a press mold comprising a female mold which is movably
    associated (e.g., floating, etc.) with opposed press surfaces positioned
    therein.


CLS 425/353
TXT Apparatus under subclass 352 wherein the mold or the plunger moves in a
    direction across the normal molding motion (i.e., a direction of motion of
    the press members).

    (1)     Note.  The cross motion need not be during the pressing operation,
    but can be any time during the cycle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 226-229 for a press construction having a
    transversely displaceable piston or platen.


CLS 425/354
TXT Apparatus under subclass 352 in which the press members are both mounted
    for movement in the same direction the pressing being effected by one press
    member moving less than the other member with the space between the members
    decreasing.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are devices in which one press member is
    spring mounted and the spring is depressed as the other press member
    applies pressure.


CLS 425/355
TXT Apparatus under subclass 352 in which each press member in turn moves to
    apply pressure while the opposing press member is stationary.


CLS 425/356
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a single female mold and a
    plurality of shape imparting plunger or roll means each of which is capable
    of coacting with the mold at a time or depth different from the other.

    (1)     Note.  Included under this definition is a device in which each of
    the shape imparting means is individually actuated, or a device in which
    the shape imparting means are integrally mounted on a crankshaft for
    simultaneous movement but sequential coaction with the mold.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for ultra high pressure devices which may include plural plungers.

    457,    for a plunger, per se, comprising a single carrier type support
    with plural projections thereon each of which produces a cavity in a
    material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 137+ for a
    press construction comprising a single platen and a plurality of plunger
    members coacting therewith.


CLS 425/357
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having two or more female molds and a
    single press member coacting with the molds.

    (1)     Note.  The press member may operate with the molds either
    sequentially or simultaneously.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220,    for a plurality of female molds mounted on a conveyor and a screed
    type smoothing means shaping fluent stock at an open side of the mold.

    369+    and 396, for a single female mold having plural corrugating
    depressions.


CLS 425/358
TXT Apparatus under subclass definition 357 wherein the press member is a male
    type plunger.


CLS 425/359
TXT Apparatus under subclass definition 358 wherein the female molds are
    adapted to move across the line of pressing motion of the male member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    353,    for apparatus comprising a female mold and opposed moveable
    plungers and means to move either the mold or the plungers across the
    normal motion of the plungers.

    575,    for a pressure charger for plural molds and means to move the molds
    past the charger.


CLS 425/360
TXT Apparatus under subclass definition 359 wherein the molds move about a
    horizontal axis in an endless path.


CLS 425/361
TXT Apparatus under subclass 359 wherein the molds move about a vertical axis
    in an endless path.


CLS 425/362
TXT Apparatus under subclass 357 wherein the press member is a roll and the
    female molds are defined by a continuous surface, e.g., web, roll, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220,    for apparatus comprising a plurality of female molds mounted on a
    conveyor and a screed type smoothing means shaping fluent stock at an open
    side of the mold.

    331,    for roll means associated with a perforated member.

    363+,   for endless surface press means in general.


CLS 425/363
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a press coupling, at least
    one part of which has a continuous pressure surface (e.g., roll, endless
    belt, etc.) which moves during an operation to reshape, resize, form, or
    vulcanize an article.

    (1)     Note.  Under the definition the endless surface must be a part of a
    shaping surface and not merely a moveable support for a male or female
    shaping member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28.1+,  for similar structure peculiar to use with a tire, tire tube or
    drive belt.

    66,     for apparatus comprising an endless surface used in forming a
    continuous filament and advancing and stretching the product; see the
    search notes thereunder.

    222,    for apparatus for shaping particulate material (e.g., pelletizing,
    etc.).    comprising a tumbling type agglomerating means which includes an
    endless surface.

    223,    for an endless casting surface and a cooperating means for
    harvesting the product.

    224,    for apparatus for forming an indefinite length product comprising
    fluent stock casting means operably associated with a shaping surface which
    may be endless.

    319,    for apparatus comprising means to form a preform combined with
    means to convolute or twist the preform, either of which means may be an
    endless shaping surface.

    327,    for an extruder and a downstream roll type reshaping or vulcanizing
    means.

    328,    for apparatus comprising diverse distinct type shaping means, one
    of which is a roll.

    335+,   for sets of shaping, reshaping or vulcanizing couples comprising an
    endless surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 196+ for glass sheet manufacturing
    apparatus which may include an endless surface.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 151+ for an endless conveyor type press and
    subclasses 155+ for a roll type apparatus which concurrently presses and
    conveys.


CLS 425/364
TXT Apparatus under subclass 363 including a stationary platen or a
    reciprocating forming means (e.g., plunger, etc) which coacts with an
    endless belt type conveying means so that the material being worked is
    carried bodily from one point to another while being compressed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    320+    and 334, for convoluting or twisting means including an endless
    surface.

    332,    for a device imparting a rolling motion to a discrete charge to
    form a ball and which may include an endless surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 151+ and 155+ for press means provided for
    therein and including an endless surface.


CLS 425/365
TXT Apparatus under subclass 363 comprising a tubular member and a roll means
    mounted therein to provide a press couple shaping area between the outside
    periphery of the roll and the inside periphery of the member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331,    for a traversing roll pressuring means operably associated with a
    downstream plate which plate may be an endless surface.

    426+,   for a female mold utilizing mold motion to distribute or compact
    stock therein including an internal shaping member other than a roll means.

    435,    for a female mold rotatably mounted for rotation about a horizontal
    axis for utilization of mold motion to distribute or compact stock therein.


CLS 425/366
TXT Apparatus under subclass 363 in which the pressure surface comprises a
    plurality of rolls having axes which intersect.


CLS 425/367
TXT Apparatus under subclass 363 including means to regulate the location of a
    roll relative to its opposed work contacting surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168,    for adjusting means comprising means to compensate for wear.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 168+ for a press means of the roll type
    provided for therein and comprising means to adjust the relative position
    of a roll.


CLS 425/368
TXT Apparatus under subclass 363 comprising a roll means including means to
    provide for adjustment of at least a portion of the diameter or length of a
    roll.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    417,    for press forming apparatus comprising an inflatable male shaping
    element (e.g., core, etc.); see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 425/369
TXT Apparatus under subclass 363 wherein a reshaping means creates
    accordion-like pleats or wrinkles or the like in a preform (generally a
    sheet or web) by distorting a section thereof transverse to its axis into a
    plurality of reversing curves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    336,    for sets of shaping couples comprising an endless surface which
    corrugates running length work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    461+ for laminating means combined with longitudinal bending means (e.g.,
    corrugating means, etc.) for running length work.


CLS 425/370
TXT Apparatus under subclass 369 wherein the corrugating means has at least one
    reaction surface in the form of a corrugating roller or endless belt band
    with a surface configuration defining a corrugating means.


CLS 425/371
TXT Apparatus under subclass 363 wherein the press couple is defined by
    cooperating endless bands arranged to coact with the stock material
    therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    320+    and 334, for cooperating endless bands arranged to convolute or
    twist a preform.

    329,    for three or more endless surfaces arranged to define a shaping
    aperture.

    332,    for means which may include cooperating endless belts to impart a
    rolling motion to a discrete charge to form a ball.


CLS 425/372
TXT Apparatus under subclass 371 comprising means to regulate the speed of one
    band relative to that of the other.


CLS 425/373
TXT Apparatus under subclass 363 wherein the press couple is defined by a roll
    coacting with an endless band.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    362,    for a roll type press member coacting with an endless surface which
    has shape imparting cavities therein.


CLS 425/374
TXT Apparatus under subclass 363 wherein the press couple comprises a roll
    coacting with a static forming surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332+,   for a similar combination modified to impart a balling action to
    the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, subclass 111 for a combined or convertible rolling
    pin.

    269,    Work Holders, subclass 302.1 for kneading boards, per se.

    492,    Roll or Roller, subclass 14 for a rolling pin, per se, not
    elsewhere provided for.


CLS 425/375
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a movable forming means
    (e.g., nozzle, plunger, etc.) and a means controlling the movement thereof
    to obtain an article of a predetermined shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    381,    for a movable orifice or a movably mounted inner mandrel within an
    orifice.

    461+,   for extrusion nozzles, per se, and see the search notes thereunder
    for combinations comprising nozzle type shaping means.


CLS 425/376.1
TXT Stock pressurizing means operably associated with downstream shaping
    orifice:

    Apparatus under the class definition including means defining a shaping
    orifice (e.g., a nozzle) combined with fluent stock material handling means
    comprising means ahead of the orifice to increase pressure on the material
    to force flow through the orifice.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204,    for apparatus in which the pressurizing means comprises plural
    diverse or parallel, intersecting means which may also agitate or knead the
    stock.

    461+,   for an extrusion nozzle, per se; see the search notes thereunder
    for special combinations including extrusion type forming means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclass 408 for injection
    molding apparatus for paper.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 92+ and 206+ for collapsible or resilient
    wall containers to force material through an outlet; subclasses 216+, 226+
    and 251+ for means forcing material from a supply to an outlet where no
    forming is involved.


CLS 425/377
TXT Apparatus under subclass 376.1 including distinct means for conveying,
    receiving or otherwise manipulating the material after extrusion.


CLS 425/378.1
TXT Including heating or cooling means:

    Apparatus under subclass 376.1 having means to heat or to cool the fluent
    stock.


CLS 425/378.2
TXT Spinneret:

    Apparatus under subclass 378.1 wherein the orifices are sized so as to
    produce pliable filaments.


CLS 425/379.1
TXT Plural spaced:

    Apparatus under subclass 378.1 comprising multiple heating or cooling
    means, each one a discrete distance from the other; (e.g., heating or
    cooling means at the injection cylinder and also at the feed hopper area).


CLS 425/380
TXT Apparatus under subclass 376.1 including additional means operatively
    associated with the extruding orifice, either in, part of, or connected
    thereto, to impart a definite shape to the extruded product.


CLS 425/381
TXT Apparatus under subclass 380 which comprises (1) auxiliary shaping means
    (e.g., a shaping mandrel) movably mounted within the confines of the
    orifice means, or (2) means supporting an orifice means to provide movement
    thereof.


CLS 425/381.2
TXT Apparatus under subclass 376.1 wherein the fluent material is subjected to
    shearing stress usually produced by relatively rotating feeding surfaces to
    cause a flow of the material in a direction towards a central shaping
    orifice.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   for similar apparatus used for agitation, mixing or kneading
    material to be shaped.


CLS 425/382
TXT Apparatus under subclass 376.1 comprising multiple downstream shaping
    orifices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331,    for apparatus comprising a plate having perforations therein
    associated with means upstream thereof to pressurize and force stock
    material through the perforations.

    463,    for plural shaping orifices, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:   Apparatus, appropriate subclass for food
    treating apparatus having plural orifices a part thereof.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    47+, 166+, 433+ for methods and apparatus for making and bonding together
    indefinite length filaments, comprising plural orifices.


CLS 425/382.2
TXT Apparatus under subclass 382 wherein the orifices are sized so as to
    produce pliable filaments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    461+,   for a spinneret, per se, and see the collection of search notes
    thereunder relating to combinations inclusive thereof.


CLS 425/382.3
TXT Including additional rotating means downstream of the primary pressurizing
    means:

    Apparatus under subclass 376.1 having an additional rotating means
    downstream of the primary pressurizing means and upstream of the shaping
    orifice; (e.g., a metering or mixing device).


CLS 425/382.4
TXT Including restriction upstream of shaping orifice and downstream of primary
    pressurizing means:

    Apparatus under subclass 376.1 having a constriction upstream of the
    shaping orifice and downstream of the primary pressurizing means.


CLS 425/383
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising (1) means to deform,
    stretch, shrink or otherwise change or control the configuration or size of
    a preform, or (2) means to vulcanize a preform which means includes a
    preform support having the same shape as the preform or capable of causing
    the preform to retain its shape.

    (1)     Note.  The first means does not necessarily include a preform
    support of the same shape as the preform.

    (2)     Note.  A shaped "charge" generally has not been considered a
    preform for this group.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17+,    for a tire recapping, retreading or sidewall replacing means.

    28.1+,  for apparatus under the class definition for reshaping, resizing or
    vulcanizing means especially adapted to a tire, tire tube or drive belt.

    108,    for apparatus comprising means for joining a rod-like preform end
    to end with another rod-like preform.

    112+,   for means to reshape a preform in a composite article making
    apparatus.

    181,    for apparatus convertible from a type of reshaper to another type
    of former or reshaper.

    233+,   for apparatus under the class definition comprising sets of press
    couples comprising opposed registering coacting female molds.

    263+,   for preform reshaping means of the pottery type which comprises a
    work traversing profile tool.

    289+,   for apparatus under the class definition including preform severing
    means, especially subclasses 290+ for a preform perforator, subclasses 296+
    for the combination of means for forming from bulk and means for severing
    and means for reshaping, and subclasses 302.1+ for serially arranged
    severing means and preform reshaping means.

    319+,   for means to convolute or twist a preform combined with upstream
    means to form the preform from bulk.

    324.1+, for the combination of shaping means and preform reshaping means.

    334,    for apparatus under the class definition comprising plural sets of
    convoluting or twisting means.

    340+,   for apparatus under the class definition comprising plural
    independent reshaping means or plural independent vulcanizing means
    including a preform support.

    363+,   for an endless surface type press reshaping or vulcanizing means,
    especially subclasses 369+ for such a means for corrugating a preform.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclasses 71+ for apparatus to stretch
    or spread a textile (e.g., a plastic film, etc.).

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, appropriate subclasses for preform reshaping
    in the glass manufacture art, especially subclasses 286+ for preform
    reshaping means, per se; see the search notes thereunder.

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses for article making
    apparatus or process involving a permanent deformation of the stock.

    131,    Tobacco, especially subclasses 77+ for cigarette or cigar making
    comprising molding or forming.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for a laminating means or step combined with
    reshaping means or step, especially subclasses 446+ for a laminating
    combination including a rotating mandrel or such a mandrel, per se.  See
    the class definition of this class for the line between Classes 156 and 425.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 332+ for metal founding apparatus
    comprising means to support or position a preform.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for shaping
    apparel, especially subclasses 12+ for hat shaping forms, subclasses 66+
    for other apparel forms.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclass for a process including reshaping of a plastic or
    nonmetallic preform.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 242 and 295+ for autoclaves
    including those having a disclosed use as a vulcanizing chamber.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, especially subclasses 405+ for sheet folding, per se.


CLS 425/384
TXT Apparatus under subclass 383 including separate and distinct heating means
    and cooling means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    407,    for apparatus comprising opposed press members and means to both
    heat and cool; see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 425/385
TXT Apparatus under subclass 383 comprising a means for altering only the
    surface configuration of a preform by creating a protuberance or a
    depression.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35+,    for surface deformation means combined with a shaping couple
    comprising a toroidal female mold and co-acting means for holding a preform
    thereagainst.

    290,    for a surface deformation means comprising a perforator.

    291,    for the combination of a shaping or reshaping means combined with a
    perforator and a scoring means or a diverse severing means.

    299,    for a preform severing means in which the cutting implement
    provides a shaping cavity (e.g., cookie cutter, etc.) and also having a
    surface deformation means.

    304,    for preform severing means serially arranged with a separate and
    distinct surface deformation means.

    324.1+, for surface deformation means combined with a diverse distinct
    shaping or reshaping means; see especially subclasses 325+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclasses 3.1+ for embossing or penetrating printing
    machines utilizing inking means or perforators shaped to impart
    intelligence.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 127+ for a typewriting machine of
    the embossing or penetrating type.


CLS 425/386
TXT Apparatus under subclass 385 especially designed to form a design or
    impression in sealing wax.


CLS 425/387.1
TXT Apparatus under subclass 383 in which the reshaping is accomplished at
    least in part by means applying fluid pressure directly upon at least one
    surface of the preform to effect shaping thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44+,    for a toroidal female shaping means and means to apply fluid
    pressure directly to a preform in a tire or tube reshaping, resizing, or
    vulcanizing apparatus.

    80.1+,  for an air felting type shaping means for forming self-sustaining
    webs or bodies of particulate material (e.g., mica flakes, spiny rubber,
    etc.); and see the search notes thereunder.

    326.1,  for diverse distinct shaping or reshaping means including a
    downstream preform reshaping means which utilizes a fluid pressure
    differential.

    342.1,  for means contacting work by fluid pressure in (1) plural reshaping
    means, or (2) plural vulcanizing means with a preform support.

    389,    for a preform reshaping means or vulcanizing means including
    shaping surface or shape retaining surface comprising a fluid pressure
    actuated flexible diaphragm.

    405.1+, for fluent or bulk material shaping means utilizing differential
    fluid pressure.

    503,    for preform reshaping means utilizing differential fluid pressure
    combined with means for bonding plural preforms.

    522+,   for blow molding by application of fluid pressure directly to move
    a tubular workpiece into engagement with a female mold.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 421.1+, for a process of mechanical
    manufacture comprising shaping by direct application of fluid pressure.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 484+ for apparatus used to form
    glass fibers or filaments, particularly subclass 490 for means to measure,
    control, indicate, time, or test fluid pressure utilized with the glass
    fiber or filament forming apparatus; subclasses 300+ for glass article
    making apparatus comprising means applying pneumatic pressure inside of a
    discrete charge (e.g., bottle blowing means, etc.); see the search notes
    thereunder.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 253+, for metal founding apparatus
    including means to apply vacuum directly to work or to hold or manipulate a
    shaping means of that class.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 500+, for plastic or nonmetallic article shaping or treating
    comprising direct application of fluid pressure differential to permanently
    shape, distort, or sustain work, and subclasses 320+, for a process of
    shaping by applying pressure fluid to work against a solid forming surface.


CLS 425/388
TXT Apparatus under subclass 387.1 in which the reshaping is accomplished at
    least in part by means creating a reduced pressure on at least one surface
    of the preform to thereby provide a differential pressure which is utilized
    as a shaping force.


CLS 425/389
TXT Apparatus under subclass 383 wherein the reshaping is accomplished at least
    in part by means of a flexible diaphragm, actuated by fluid pressure, which
    diaphragm contacts a surface of the preform to effect shaping thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Inflatable bags, etc., used to force a solid press member
    against the work are included (See subclasses 394+).

    (2)     Note.  The fluid pressure may be due solely to the weight of a
    super-imposed shaping surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for an "air bag" type fluid pressure actuated diaphragm as an
    expansible internal support in combination with means supporting a tire in
    tire repair apparatus.

    43,     for a toroidal female shaping means and a coacting fluid pressure
    actuated internal diaphragm in a tire or tube reshaping, resizing or
    vulcanizing apparatus.

    52+,    for an internal mold, form or support of the fluid pressure
    actuated diaphragm type in a tire or tube reshaping, resizing or
    vulcanizing apparatus.

    387.1+,for preform reshaping or vulcanizing apparatus comprising means to
    contact the work directly with fluid pressure.

    405.1+,for press molding machine utilizing differential fluid pressure in
    shaping bulk material; see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 425/390
TXT Apparatus under subclass 389 comprising means providing opposed cooperating
    shaping cavities having meeting portions of co-extensive area.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded under this definition is a device in which either
    cavity portion includes a protuberance that extends into the other cavity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for a similar combination limited to toroidal female molds for
    making a tire, tube or endless belt.

    408,    for a press couple means for shaping fluent stock; see the
    collection of search notes thereunder.


CLS 425/391
TXT Apparatus under subclass 383 comprising means to generate a product having
    complex circularity by a winding or twisting or turning operation whereby a
    preform is reshaped into a coil, helix, corkscrew, spiral or the like.

    (1)     Note.  Included under this definition is any means, no matter how
    simple, (e.g., mandrel, etc.) which has features provided specifically for
    this function.

    (2)     Note.  Corrugating, per se, is excluded; see subclasses 396+ below.

    (3)     Note.  Means generating less than a 3600 turn are included only if
    a projection of the motion would result in a product defined above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    319+,   for convoluting means downstream of means to form a preform.

    323,    for apparatus peculiar to pretzel bending action.

    334,    for sets of convoluting or twisting means.

    363+,   an endless belt or roll means which may convolute or twist material.

    372,    for reshaping means comprising cooperating endless belts operated
    at different speeds some of which are disclosed as convoluting means.

    393,    for means forming beaded edge on a tube by rolling an end portion
    back over the tube.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 226+ for toilet articles comprising hair
    crimpers or curlers.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 28+ for a machine or machine method
    for plaiting, fluting, and shirring of apparel articles.


CLS 425/392
TXT Apparatus under subclass 383 peculiarly adapted to reshape or size rod or
    tube like preforms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66,     for apparatus under the class definition combined with a stretching
    means comprising advancing means for continuous length work.

    76,     for a means imparting irregular denier to a filament.

    325+,   for a preform reshaping means downstream of an extrusion shaper,
    see especially subclass 326.1 for reshaping means to blow a tube into a
    receptacle.

    522+,   for means to blow a tube into a receptacle (e.g., bottle, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 276+ for the combination of
    reheating means and mechanical means to reshape tubular type glass preforms
    and subclasses 292+ for reshaping means for cylindrical preforms of glass.


CLS 425/393
TXT Apparatus under subclass 392 comprising a mandrel type supporting and
    shaping means placed within the preform and additional means exerting a
    force on at least a portion of the preform urging it against the mandrel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 296+ for glass manufacturing
    apparatus comprising forcing means both internal and external of a
    cylindrical glass preform reshaping.


CLS 425/394
TXT Apparatus under subclass 383 comprising cooperating shaping surfaces which
    confine a preform to retain a desired configuration thereof or which exert
    a compressive force to impart a change in configuration of a preform.

    (1)     Note.  A ball type impact member coacting with a preform support is
    considered to be a shaping surface under this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35+,    for similar devices specially adapted for the manufacture of tires,
    tubes or drive belts.

    327,    for an extruder in combination with down-stream press type
    reshaping or vulcanizing means.

    335+,   for sets of shaping couples including an endless surface for press
    reshaping or vulcanizing.

    339,    for a gang press comprising plural parallel leaves or platens for
    reshaping or vulcanizing preforms.

    363+,   for a press reshaping means or vulcanizing means including an
    endless surface type (e.g., roll, belt, etc.) reshaping surface.

    393,    for co-acting shaping surfaces comprising a mandrel inside of a
    tubular preform reshaping apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 229+ for diverse distinct glass
    working apparatus including a preform reshaping means, subclass 244 for
    spaced preform reheating means with reshaping means, subclasses 275+ for a
    mechanical means to reshape a glass preform combined with a reheating means
    and subclasses 286+ for press means to reshape a glass preform; see the
    search notes under subclasses 229+.


CLS 425/395
TXT Apparatus under subclass 394 comprising means providing opposed cooperating
    shaping cavities having meeting portions of co-extensive area.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded under this definition is a device in which either
    of the cavity forming means includes a protuberance which enters into the
    other cavity; such apparatus will be found in subclasses 398+ or 412+ for
    example.

    (2)     Note.  Included under this definition is a device comprising a
    mandrel sandwiched between mold halves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    408,    for a press couple means comprising opposed coacting female molds
    forming fluent material into a preform; see the collection of notes
    thereunder.


CLS 425/396
TXT Apparatus under subclass 394 wherein at least one of the opposed coacting
    shaping surfaces has furrowed and ridge-like configurations whereby a row
    of wave-like elements are formed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    303,    for a preform severing means and with a preform reshaping means of
    the corrugating type serially arranged therewith.

    336,    for corrugating means for running length work including sets of
    shaping couples comprising an endless surface.

    369+,   for preform corrugating means including an endless surface type
    reshaping means.


CLS 425/397
TXT Apparatus under subclass 394 comprising a combination of a reshaping or
    vulcanizing means and specific means of delivering or discharging a preform
    thereto or manipulating a preform at a shaping station (other than means
    for ejecting or stripping).


CLS 425/398
TXT Apparatus under subclass 394 comprising (1) cooperating male and female
    shaping members and (2) means for imparting relative reciprocation between
    the male and female members.


CLS 425/399
TXT Apparatus under subclass 398 wherein the male member is stationary and the
    female member reciprocates.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    349,    for a similar mold-plunger relationship in a machine having
    orbiting female mold members of sets of male-female press molds.


CLS 425/400
TXT Apparatus under subclass 398 comprising means for orienting a preform with
    respect to male and female members.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 323 for glass working apparatus
    comprising means for centering or positioning a product or preform.


CLS 425/401
TXT Apparatus under subclass 398 comprising, in addition to the inlet for the
    stock material, an additional opening to permit escape of fluids or excess
    stock material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84+,    for apparatus including foraminous or absorbent means for removal
    of vehicle or component in liquid form during, or after, shaping.

    86,     for apparatus including handling means or other features for
    treating liquid or vehicle liquid or condensate.

    420,    for forming apparatus comprising opposed press members and a vent
    or other means to remove or permit removal of entrained gas.


CLS 425/402
TXT Apparatus under subclass 383 providing means whereby a preform is rotated
    to effect shaping thereof or to enhance vulcanization thereof, e.g.,
    centrifugally shaping a preform.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263+,   for a pottery wheel type support and profile tool.

    425+,   for apparatus comprising a female mold and means utilizing the mold
    motion to distribute or compact stock therein, especially subclasses 425
    and 435 for means to rotate the mold.


CLS 425/403
TXT Apparatus under subclass 383 which comprises a shaping member, per se,
    against which a preform is shaped.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49+,    for an internal mold, per se, specialized to tire or tire-tube
    making.

    391,    for a mandrel structurally restricted to means for convoluting a
    preform.

    393,    for tubular stock reshaping means comprising a mandrel to
    interiorly support the work.

    470+,   for other shaping surfaces, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclasses 128+ for forms for boot and shoe
    making, especially subclasses 133+ for shoe last type.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    414+ for tire building drums, per se.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 66+ for a conforming preform support
    (i.e., a form) in apparel apparatus used for forming, pressing, molding or
    stretching.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, for a stock material
    product duct in the form of a single or plural layer web or sheet embodying
    a component of nonplanar uniform thickness material and having an
    ornamental design or indicia thereon, and subclasses 195+ for such a
    product which has a differential coating, impregnation or bond which may be
    in the form of an ornamental design or indicia.


CLS 425/403.1
TXT Including product handling means:
    Apparatus under subclass 383 including distinct means for subsequently
    conveying, receiving, or otherwise manipulating the reworked preform.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for means removing a product from toroidal female-shaping means.

    135+,   for automatic control of a product conveying means.

    165,    for apparatus under the class definition including an electrical
    control system for removal from a molding surface.

    315,    for a product handler utilized as a cutter and in a former-cutter
    combination.

    337,    for a preform handler intermediate sets of endless surface-shaping
    couples.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclass
    for a process or apparatus, per se, for forwarding continuous length
    material, especially subclass 88, for such apparatus combined with means to
    temporarily deform the material laterally for stiffening.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, appropriate subclass for material or
    article handling apparatus, per se, for bringing work to or removing a
    product from a forming surface.  See the search notes in Class 414 for
    classification of combinations of handling or conveying means and
    fabricating, shaping, or conditioning means for the material or article.


CLS 425/404
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means for forming a product
    and subsequent means for altering the physical or chemical nature of the
    product.

    (1)     Note.  When molding fluent material the product need not be removed
    from the mold prior to the treatment providing there is evidence that the
    product is self-sustaining prior to being subject to the treatment.

    (2)     Note.  When reshaping or vulcanizing utilizing a conforming preform
    support, the treatment must be performed after the preform has been removed
    from the shaping surface.

    (3)     Note.  The term treatment for the purpose of this subclass includes
    all procedures in which any chemical or physical property of a product is
    controlled or modified by other than mechanical shaping, i.e., causing a
    shaping force to be applied to the product.  Included under this definition
    of treatment are, for example, heating, cooling, washing, drying, etc.;
    however, heating of a product to release it from a mold is not considered
    to be treatment, and will be found in subclasses 436+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    289+,   for shaping followed by cutting. 326, for a downstream treating
    means in an extrusion nozzle type shaping means combined with a fluid
    pressure reshaping means.

    339,    for gang press vulcanizing means including a conforming preform
    support.

    363+    and 383+, for preform reshaping means or vulcanizing means which
    may include treating means, and specifically subclass 384 for such
    reshaping or vulcanizing means and including both heating and cooling means.

    378.1+, for extrusion apparatus including heating or cooling means.

    405,    for a press means and a treating means to perfect the press
    operation by using a fluid pressure differential.

    407,    for press having opposed members and including heating and cooling
    means.

    425+,   for female mold including tamping means.

    445+,   for simultaneous shaping and treating.

    456,    for vibrating means including mechanical movement or power means.


CLS 425/405.1
TXT Means to create a vacuum or apply fluid pressure within a press forming
    mold:Apparatus under the class definition comprising means utilizing
    differential fluid pressure to shape fluent or bulk material.

    (1)     Note.  Using a fluid pressure to cause movement of a press member
    is excluded, and will be found in other subclasses, for example 43, 389+
    and 457.

    (2)     Note.  The fluid pressure may directly contact the work, as in
    isostatic or hydrostatic shaping apparatus, or may effect shaping force to
    an intervening flexible pressure transmitting means which contacts the
    work, as in inflatable bag shaping apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for a toroidal female shaping means combined with a fluid pressure
    actuated internal diaphragm for holding a preform against the female
    shaping means.

    387.1+,for preform reshaping means by contacting work directly with fluid.

    389+,   for preform reshaping means by a fluid pressure actuated flexible
    diaphragm.

    406+,   for apparatus comprising press members which may be caused to move
    by hydraulic or other fluid pressure, and especially subclass 417 for an
    expansible male shaping member.

    437+,   for a shaping surface having means for ejecting the work with a
    differential gas.


CLS 425/405.2
TXT Isostatic type:
    Apparatus under subclass 405.1 comprising means utilizing an equal
    application of pressure to all sides of the quantity of material.


CLS 425/406
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising opposed cooperating shaping
    surfaces having relative movement for exerting compressive force on
    material therebetween to impart a desired shape thereto.

    (1)     Note.  Injection molding apparatus of somewhat similar structure
    are excluded; see the search notes below for such devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11+,    for product or preform repair devices utilizing a press.

    110+,   especially 128 for press shaping devices used in forming composite
    articles.

    175+,   for press means for forming a mold.

    193+,   for press means including an assembly or dismantling feature.

    218+,   for a female mold having a charge inlet and cooperating means to
    smooth or remove the fluent stock at the orifice.

    335+,   for sets of shaping couples including an endless surface.

    338+,   for gang-presses.

    346+,   for sets of male-female press molds.

    352+,   for a female mold and opposed co-axial dynamic press members.

    356+,   for a female mold coacting with plural plungers or rolls.

    357+,   for plural mold cavities and a single press member.

    363+,   for an endless surface press couple.

    383+,   for press means for reshaping a preform.

    450.1+,for means to open and close injection molding means.

    457,    for a dynamic male shaping member, per se.

    542+,   for injection molding apparatus including means to charge fluent
    stock under pressure thereto.


CLS 425/407
TXT Apparatus under subclass 406 comprising separate and distinct heating
    means, and cooling means.

    (1)     Note.  A disclosure of a molding apparatus combined with heating
    means alone or cooling means alone is classified in the subclass providing
    for the specific molding apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40+,    for a tire, tube or drive belt reshaping, resizing or vulcanizing
    means comprising a toroidal female shaping means and coacting means holding
    a preform thereagainst and including heating or cooling means.

    277,    for a shaping dispenser of the ice-cream scoop type including a
    fluid heat accumulator.

    378.1+, for an extrusion type shaping means including a heating or cooling
    means.

    384,    for a preform reshaping or vulcanizing means including both heating
    and cooling means.

    404+,   for a shaping means and downstream treatment means for a product
    which may be heating and/or cooling means.

    445+,   for means, per se, to treat shaped work, which may be heating
    and/or cooling means.

    548,    for plural distinct means for heating or cooling in injection
    molding apparatus.


CLS 425/408
TXT Apparatus under subclass 406 comprising facing shaping cavities which coact
    to press fluent stock into a a desired shape, the cavities having meeting
    portions of co-extensive area.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded under the definition is a device in which either of
    the cavity forming means includes a protuberance which enters into the
    other cavity. Such apparatus will be found in subclasses 398+ or 412, for
    example.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35+,    for coacting mold halves having a toroidal configuration in
    combination with internal means holding a preform thereagainst.

    47,     for a sectional female mold of toroidal configuration having a
    locking or clamping means.

    116,    for sets of opposed registering coacting female molds which not
    only shape fluent material but include a feature to form a composite
    article using a preform.

    233+,   for sets of press couples each set comprising registering coacting
    female molds.

    278,    for opposed coacting mold cavities serving as the ice cream scoops.

    296,    for a preform reshaping means comprising opposed female mold
    sections with cooperating, registering cutting edges.

    395,    for coacting shaping surface in preform reshaping or vulcanizing
    means comprising opposed, registered female cavities.

    425+,   for "slush" molding means for apparatus that is similar in
    structure, especially subclasses 433, 434 and 435, which are used to make
    hollow articles (e.g., a ball, doll-head, etc.).

    450.1+, for subcombinations of injection molding apparatus having similar
    structure but diverse operation.

    542+,   for similar structure in injection molding apparatus including
    means to charge fluent stock under pressure.


CLS 425/409
TXT Apparatus under subclass 406 comprising a force applying shaping surface
    moving in an arcuate path to apply pressure.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded under this definition of "arcuate path" is rotation
    (e.g., of male shaping member) about an axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    418,    for a rotating male member co-operating with a female member.


CLS 425/410
TXT Apparatus under subclass 406 comprising a female mold and a co-operating
    dynamic press member in which the movement of the press member toward or
    into the female mold is limited by a portion of the press member, or a
    member attached thereto, coming into contact with the peripheral edge of
    female mold.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175+,   for mold forming members including cover type press member, e.g.,
    flasks.

    218+,   for a female mold and a stock smoothing means (e.g., screed, etc.)
    or excess stock removing means co-operating with the charge opening of the
    mold.

    352,    for a female mold and opposed co-axial dynamic press members.


CLS 425/411
TXT Apparatus under subclass 406 comprising an assembly including opposed shape
    imparting press surfaces wherein said assembly is designed to be inserted
    between pressure applying surfaces of a press.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89,     for devices utilizing an interposed non-adhering web or sheet type
    parting means.

    175+,   mold forming flasks positioned in a press.

    182+,   for molding devices assembly or dismantling means.

    338,    for gang-presses including plural parallel leaves or platens.


CLS 425/412
TXT Apparatus under subclass 406 comprising a male shaping member adapted to
    penetrate within a female mold cavity to exert a compressive force on a
    plastic material contained therein.

    (1)     Note.  The device must include means to move either the male member
    or the female mold into an operative association.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23+,    for a female tire repair mold and a male shaping member.

    35+,    for a female tire mold and a male shaping member.

    117+,   for devices uniting a preform to a fluent material within a female
    mold which devices may include a male shaping member.

    195,    for a press shaping surface and a female mold including an assembly
    or dismantling means.

    346+,   for sets of male-female press molds.

    352+,   for a female mold and opposed co-axial dynamic press members.

    356+,   for plural female mold cavities and a single press member.

    398,    for reshaping presses including a plunger and a female mold.

    426+,   for a female mold and a relatively   moving internal reshaping
    member.

    542+,   for a discharge assistant which provides a shaping surface in a
    combination comprising a female mold and means to charge fluent stock
    thereto under pressure.


CLS 425/413
TXT Apparatus under subclass 412 which includes a pallet and means to move the
    pallet from one position to another or means to guide or assure proper
    positioning of the pallet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    452,    for a female mold with a pallet handling means; see the search
    notes thereto.


CLS 425/414
TXT Apparatus under subclass 412 which includes means to move a core member
    with respect to a mold cavity prior or subsequent to shaping a material
    within the cavity against the core.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11+,    for positioning a core in a tire repair mold.

    28.1+,  for positioning a core in a tire manufacturing mold.

    355,    for co-axial press members in a female mold and including a core
    member.

    468,    for a core and positioning means therefor.

    577,    for a female mold, means to charge fluent stock, and a core
    positioning means.


CLS 425/415
TXT Apparatus under subclass 412 which includes opposed or coacting press
    elements mounted or positioned within a female mold in which the female
    mold is designed to move with respect to the press surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    352,    for opposed dynamic press members in a female mold.

    423,    for a female mold moving into mating relationship with a male
    shaping member; see search notes thereto.


CLS 425/416
TXT Apparatus under subclass 412 comprising means reciprocating a male shaping
    member from a position below a mold into a pressing relationship with the
    mold.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 321, for similar apparatus for
    pressing glass.


CLS 425/417
TXT Apparatus under subclass 412 in which the male shaping member includes
    means to increase the area of its pressing surface while applying pressure
    to material being shaped within the female mold.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11+,    for especially subclasses 23+ and 27+ for expansible male shaping
    members designed for use in tire repair apparatus.

    28.1+,  for expansible male shaping members used in tire manufacture
    apparatus.

    283,    for expansible shaping members for excavating from a bulk source
    with simultaneous shaping.

    368,    for an expansible roll in a press couple.

    438,    for contractible shaping members for releasing products therefrom.


CLS 425/418
TXT Apparatus under subclass 412 including means to rotate a male shaping
    member about its own axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262,    for a trowel type member shaping the material as it is moved within
    a pipe forming mold.

    263+,   for pottery wheel and profile tool type shaping devices.

    272,    for rotating dipping molds.

    280,    for excavating tools or shaping members which rotate.

    383+,   for devices for reshaping a preform and which may include a
    rotating member.

    425+,   for devices utilizing mold motion to distribute or compact work.

    460,    for rotating trowels, per se.


CLS 425/419
TXT Apparatus under subclass 412 combined with means to change the compressive
    force applied to a material during a continuous pressure application.


CLS 425/420
TXT Apparatus under subclass 412 comprising means especially adapted to permit
    trapped gas to escape or be removed from within a mold cavity or the
    material being shaped.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153+,   for molding devices which including safety means to relieve gaseous
    pressure.

    203,    for molding devices which include a mixing chamber with a vent.

    401,    for devices for reshaping preforms including a sprue or vent.

    405.1+, for molding devices including means to apply a vacuum within a
    press form mold.

    812,    for a collection of means to vent molding devices in general.


CLS 425/421
TXT Apparatus under subclass 412 which includes means for disturbing the
    equilibrum of the particles of a fluent material by causing relative motion
    of its particles to cause the material to be compacted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    456,    for vibrators or tampers with mechanical movement of power means;
    see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 425/422
TXT Apparatus under subclass 412 comprising positive means to remove or expel a
    formed article from a shaping member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    352+,   for male-female press type mold wherein the bottom of the female is
    a dynamic plunger.

    436+,   for ejecting, per se; see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 425/423
TXT Apparatus under subclass 412 comprising a reciprocating female mold cavity
    adapted to move into a coacting relationship with a male shaping member to
    compress material therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    for forming a composite by moving a female mold toward a preform
    support.

    349,    for sets of reciprocating molds and stationary plungers.

    399,    for similar devices for reshaping a preform.

    415,    for a female mold movably associated with opposed press surfaces
    positioned therein.


CLS 425/424
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising (1) a shape imparting
    receptacle and (2) means to vibrate the shape imparting receptacle, or to
    contact and density the material therein, and (3) means to release the
    formed product from the shape imparting receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    425+,   for a female mold and means to vibrate the mold or to tamp the
    material therein.

    469,    for a tamp rod, per se.


CLS 425/425
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means defining a shaping
    cavity combined with (1) means to compact fluent stock therein by vibration
    or agitation (i.e., wherein the said means is a tamper, vibrator or means
    providing centrifugal force) or (2) means mounting a mold for motion to
    assist distribution of fluent stock within the cavity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200,    for apparatus combined with agitating or kneading means upstream of
    a forming means, especially subclass 206 which includes such a means within
    or at a forming means.

    218,    for a container type female mold having means removing or smoothing
    excess stock at the mouth of the mold.

    365,    for similar structure in a press forming or reshaping means of the
    endless type (e.g., roll, etc.) comprising a roll telescopically mounted
    within a cooperating drum.  See the notes thereunder.

    418,    for a press couple shaping means consisting of a shaping plunger
    and female mold including means to rotate the plunger.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 302 for centrifugal casting of glass
    articles.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 52+ for a coating apparatus utilizing
    means to centrifuge work.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclass 384 for pulp molding
    means utilizing a centrifuge.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 286+ for centrifugal metal casting
    apparatus.

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 137+ for a centrifugal mold, per se.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 311, for a process of shaping against a forming surface utilizing
    centrifugal force; see the search notes thereunder.

    366,    Agitating, for an agitator, per se.


CLS 425/426
TXT Apparatus under subclass 425 including means (e.g., core, etc.) to impart
    shape to an internal surface of the product formed in the shaping cavity
    and means to impart relative movement between the cavity defining means and
    the internal surface shaping means.

    (1)     Note.  Means for vibrating a shaping surface of the female or
    internal mold in situ are not here but are in subclass 432 unless there is
    other relative motion between the female and internal mold.


CLS 425/427
TXT Apparatus under subclass 426 wherein the internal surface shaping means
    moves with respect to a stationary cavity means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    365,    for a roll type press forming means telescopically mounted within a
    cooperating drum.

    398,    for preform reshaping means comprising a stationary female mold and
    a reciprocating plunger.

    416,    for press forming apparatus having a male member moving upwardly
    into cooperation with a female mold thereabove.


CLS 425/428
TXT Apparatus under subclass 426 including a bar type element movably mounted
    to poke into the fluent stock to eliminate voids (e.g., air pockets, etc.)
    therefrom.


CLS 425/429
TXT Apparatus under subclass 425 comprising plural means, each imparting a
    separate diverse motion to the shaping means, which motion contribute to a
    distributing or compacting function.

    (1)     Note.  Traveling support means for a mold which merely presents a
    mold to a shaping area are not here; see appropriate subclasses provided
    for plural molds or subclass 453 for a dynamic mold carrier, per se.

    (2)     Note.  When one of said means is a vibrator directly vibrating a
    shaping surface, the disclosure is here. However, a tamp rod acting on the
    stock is not considered means to impart motion to a shaping surface and has
    been collected in subclass 431. Further, the indiscriminate motion caused
    by a vibrator is not considered diverse motion for this subclass-thus, it
    follows that electrical or pneumatic vibrators which produce indiscriminate
    vibrating motion of a shaping surface are not here but are in subclass 432.


CLS 425/430
TXT Apparatus under subclass 429 wherein the shaping means comprises separate
    and distinct units each of which provides a shaping cavity.


CLS 425/431
TXT Apparatus under subclass 425 comprising a rod-like element to compact
    material within the female mold by a poking action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206,    for forming means or mold and an agitating or kneading means to mix
    the material in the forming means or mold.

    421,    for a tamper or vibrator in a female mold-plunger type press
    shaping couple.

    424,    for the combination of a female mold, tamper and release means for
    the product.

    428,    for a tamper in a female mold and core combination wherein there is
    relative rotation between the mold and core.


CLS 425/432
TXT Apparatus under subclass 425 including means to cause a shaping surface to
    shake or quiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    421,    for a tamper or vibrator in combination with a male-female press
    couple.

    424,    for the combination of a female mold, vibrator and release means.

    426,    for a female mold and core combination having relative motion
    therebetween and a vibrator for a shaping surface.

    429,    for the combination of a shaping surface, means to vibrate same and
    means to impart diverse motion to the surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 203+ for mold making apparatus and 260+
    for metal founding apparatus including vibrator means; see the search notes
    thereunder.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 108+ for a vibrating agitator of general
    utility.


CLS 425/433
TXT Apparatus under subclass 425 including an endless belt means supporting the
    mold on its external surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    365+,   for a roll type shaping means telescopically mounted within a
    cooperating drum.


CLS 425/434
TXT Apparatus under subclass 425 comprising multiple units each providing a
    shaping cavity.


CLS 425/435
TXT Apparatus under subclass 425 comprising means to rotate a shaping cavity
    about a horizontal axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 52+ especially subclass 55 for
    related structures adapted to a coating operation.


CLS 425/436
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising shaping members which are
    equipped with distinct means, other than those for associating or
    separating parts making up the shaping means, to remove or facilitate
    removing the product from the shaping surface.

    (1)     Note.  Means for retracting or withdrawing a mold surface from the
    molded material (e.g., segmented molds or cores) are not included herein
    but are classified on some other basis. Means moving a mold bottom to force
    the product out of a mold is considered a form of ejecting and not merely
    separating of mold parts and is included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for means for removing a product from a toroidal female mold.

    139,    for automatic control of an ejector or stripper.

    165,    for an electrical control system of a product removal means.

    176,    product removal means in a combination comprising mold forming
    means.

    223,    for an endless surface type shaping surface and associated means to
    harvest a preform therefrom.

    282+,   for a product release means in a shaping means of the ice-cream
    scoop or plugger type.

    346+,   for a machine comprising sets of male-female press molds including
    positive means to eject a product, see especially subclasses 350 and 351.

    363+,   for an endless surface type press couple which may include means to
    strip or eject a product from the surface.

    422,    for a male-female press couple including positive means to remove
    or eject a product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, appropriate subclasses for ejection means
    combined with glass forming means, especially subclasses 305+ for a press
    molding machine including an ejector.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 426+ for product handling means in
    metal deforming apparatus.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclass 410 for article
    ejecting means in a foraminous pulp molding mold.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 213+ for a stripping or ejecting means
    for separating a forming surface from a shaping means in an apparatus for
    making a forming surface; subclasses 344+ for ejection means in a means to
    shape metallic material; and subclasses 401+ for a stripper or ejector
    peculiar to metal founding.

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 66.1 for ejector means in a static mold.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 334+ for a process of ejecting or stripping in a plastic article
    shaping process.


CLS 425/437
TXT Apparatus under subclass 436 wherein the means to separate the molded
    article from its shape imparting surface includes a gas pressure
    differential across article.


CLS 425/438
TXT Apparatus under subclass 436 comprising a member around which the article
    is formed and means causing the article to be released from the member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    577,    for injection mold apparatus utilizing a core and means to release
    or remove the core from the product.


CLS 425/439
TXT Apparatus under subclass 436 wherein the mold containing the molded product
    is turned 1805 so that gravity aids in removing the product therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 409 for means to invent a pattern plate or
    mold in metal founding apparatus.


CLS 425/440
TXT Apparatus under subclass 436 in which at least one surface of a mold
    shaping surface is bent, reshaped or distorted to break the bond between
    the mold surface and the product.


CLS 425/441
TXT Apparatus under subclass 436 wherein the means to separate the molded
    article from its shape imparting surface includes a portion of the shaping
    surface which moves relative to the remainder of the shaping surface to
    release the molded article therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 161+, for movable mold sections in static
    mold.


CLS 425/442
TXT Apparatus under subclass 441 wherein the mold sections are pivotally
    movable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 170+, for hinged sections in a static mold.


CLS 425/443
TXT Apparatus under subclass 441 including means to cause relative vertical
    movement between the mold sections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 74+, for a static mold and force applying
    means to remove the product comprising means to move the mold bottom, and
    subclass 136 for a mold having a movable bottom.


CLS 425/444
TXT Apparatus under subclass 436 comprising a member which enters into the
    confines of a mold cavity and applies pressure to the molded product to
    break the bond between the product and the mold.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    443,    for similar structure but where the ejector comprises the mold
    bottom.


CLS 425/445
TXT Apparatus under the class definition wherein shaped material is subjected
    to an operation which controls or modifies the chemical or physical
    properties of the work by other than causing a shaping force to be applied
    to the work.

    (1)     Note.  Included under this definition are heating, cooling,
    washing, dying, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this and indented subclasses is both the
    treatment of fluent material which has been shaped but not yet solidified
    and the treatment of previously molded articles.  Apparatus for treatment,
    per se, are generally classified in the appropriate treatment classes but
    are included herein when so specialized as to be excluded from the
    definition of the other classes.

    (3)     Note.  Included in the indented subclass of this subclass is
    shaping means and concurrent treating means.

    (4)     Note.  Vibrating or tamping means are not considered to be treating
    means for this group but are provided for in subclasses 456+ below.

    (5)     Note.  Included under this definition are heating or cooling means
    which are necessary for the molding operation (e.g., thermosetting, etc.),
    not merely for treating the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86,     for means handling or treating liquid or vehicle condensate
    combined with shaping means.

    174,    for means applying radiant energy to a shaped product.

    317,    for means to heat or cool the apparatus in the nature of a safety
    means for the apparatus.

    404+,   for shaping followed by a subsequent treating.

    407,    for apparatus comprising press forming apparatus with opposed press
    members and having distinct means for heating and for cooling; see the
    search notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 115.51+ for process and composition for
    chemically modifying fibers, 130.1+, for process of swelling or
    plasticizing artificial fibers, 137+, for process of cleaning and
    laundering fibers, and 147+ for process of fluid treating fibers.

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclasses 219+ for thread finishing, per
    se.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses
    for process and apparatus for drying or contacting a shaped product with a
    gas or vapor.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 484+ for apparatus used to form
    glass fibers or filaments, particularly subclasses 509+ having forming
    means combined with glass fiber heating and shaping; subclasses 512+ having
    forming means combined with cooling; subclasses 531+ having forming means
    combined with coating or other treatment; subclasses 111+ and 348+ for
    processes and apparatus, respectively, for glass treatment.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses,
    for process and apparatus for cleaning or contacting a shaped product with
    a liquid.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 340+, for process of treating a shaped or solid article.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 901 for hot water bags.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 198+ for heating apparatus involving
    a chemical reaction; and subclasses 242 and 295+ for heating a shaped
    product with heat and pressure, e.g., vulcanizer, etc.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 120+, for a heating kiln of general utility.


CLS 425/446
TXT Apparatus under subclass 445 in which the treating of the work is
    accomplished while it is on or in the shaping surface thereto.

    (1)     Note.  The work support may be a mold if the chemical or physical
    modification is done concurrently with the molding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28.1+,  for means treating (e.g., vulcanizing, etc.) a toroid (i.e., a
    tire, tube or belt).

    407,    for press forming apparatus including both heating and cooling
    means; see the search notes thereunder.

    548,    for plural distinct heating or cooling means in injection molding
    type apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 78 and 79+ for a static mold having an
    electric heating means and means within a surface of a mold to confine a
    heat exchange medium, respectively.


CLS 425/447
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means providing a surface
    adapted to shape fluent material in combination with means to feed fluent
    stock thereto.

    (1)     Note.  A fluent material feeding means is here when specialized to
    Class 425 as evidenced by inclusion of extrinsic limitations thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for a boom mounted depositing and forming means.

    64,     for progressive molding apparatus including mold charging means.

    87,     for a hand movable, substrate traversing, plural dimension shaping
    means including a material supply.

    90,     for apparatus under the class definition combined with coating
    apparatus.

    130+,   for means feeding fluent stock from plural sources to a common
    shaping means to form a composite product.

    145+,   for automatic feed control of material en route to a shaping means.

    159,    for an independently operated timer controlling means filling a
    mold.

    166+,   for apparatus under the class definition combined with an
    electrical control system causing intermittent delivery of fluent charges
    to a shaping surface.

    178,    for means under the class definition for forming a mold including a
    ram type feed of the molding material.

    200+,   for shaping means under the class definition including means
    feeding fluent material thereto, which latter means also agitates or kneads
    the fluent material.

    224,    for a means casting fluent stock operably associated with a shaping
    surface to form indefinite length work.

    239,    for a positive discharge assistant in a supply hopper of a dough
    divider type forming means which includes a trap chamber.

    253+,   for the combination of a female mold, charging means and pallet
    handling means.

    256+,   for the combination of a female mold and means to feed measured
    charges thereto.

    276+,   for a means which simultaneously excavates and shapes stock
    material from a bulk source (e.g., ice cream scoop, etc.).

    464,    for a shaping nozzle or orifice having a single inlet and plural
    shaping outlet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, for encasing material in a cover, generally,
    especially subclasses 266.1+ for package making with means to fill and
    close a preformed receptacle.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 207+ for a gob charging means in
    combination with a female mold and subclasses 324+ for molten glass
    dispensing apparatus, per se.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 263 for a tank type manifold; see the
    search notes thereunder.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    appropriate subclasses for a dispensing means combined with a receiver,
    especially subclasses 311+ for a dispenser with a receiver coacting means.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 335+ for metal founding apparatus
    including a ladle or crucible type melt receptacle.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for fluent material dispensing
    means, per se, especially subclasses 145.1+ for a dispenser having plural
    sources with a common discharge; see the search notes under the class
    definition of Class 222.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses for a process of plastic article shaping including a
    step of feeding fluent stock thereto, see especially subclasses 298 and
    299+.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 125.1+ for a pipe felting of
    the manifold type.


CLS 425/448
TXT Apparatus under subclass 447 wherein the means to feed the material
    comprises means to isolate a predetermined volume thereof and to deliver it
    as a charge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238+,   for forming means comprising a dough divider type having a trap
    chamber.

    256+,   for a female mold and means to feed measured charges thereto.

    557+,   for a closed system comprising a female mold and means charging
    fluent stock thereto under pressure, said means including a trap chamber,
    (e.g., injection molding apparatus, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 251+ for a dispenser having a movable trap
    chamber and subclass 424.5 for a dispenser comprising a supply container
    with a trap; see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 425/449
TXT Apparatus under subclass 447 wherein the means to feed the fluent material
    utilizes means providing a positive force (e.g., piston, screw, vibrator,
    etc.) in lieu of or in addition to gravity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for means feeding fluent stock under pressure in a preform repair
    means.

    129.1+,for a composite article making apparatus under the class definition
    which utilizes means to charge fluent under pressure to a female mold
    containing a preform.

    130+,   for means feeding fluent stock from plural sources to a shaping
    means to form a composite product.

    145+,   for apparatus under the class definition including automatic
    control of fluent molding material en route to a shaping means.

    200+,   for apparatus under the class definition combined with a separate
    and distinct upstream agitating or kneading means within a fluent material
    feeding means.

    219,    for a cooperating stock smoothing means or excess stock removing
    means carried by or attached to means feeding a female mold.

    375,    for pattern control of a depositing type forming means.

    376.1+,for a stock pressurizing means in combination with a downstream
    shaping orifice.

    425+,   for the combination of a female mold and tamping means or means
    utilizing mold motion to distribute or compact stock therein.

    542+,   for the combination of a female mold and means to charge fluent
    stock thereto under pressure (e.g., injection molding apparatus, etc.).


CLS 425/450.1
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a female mold formed of
    separable segments and an associated mechanism that moves at least one of
    the segments relative to another into or out of mold forming relationship
    wherein the moving is sequential operation of the apparatus for forming a
    product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182+,   for apparatus comprising means for assembling and disassembling the
    shaping surface but for a purpose other than shaping an article.

    406+,   for dynamic means to force mold segments together under the
    resistance of work already within the mold cavity.

    436+,   for a shaping surface including means to release or remove a
    product therefrom, especially subclass 441 for such apparatus involving
    movable mold sections.

    451.9,  for dynamic means to hold previously closed mold segments together.

    542+,   for an injection molding apparatus including means to feed the
    stock material combined with means for opening and closing the mold parts,
    see especially subclasses 247+ for an injection molding type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 357+ for a mold to shape molten
    glass having mold separating means.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 339+, for means to assemble mold parts
    used to shape molten metal.

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 160+ for a static female mold comprised of
    plural sections.


CLS 425/451
TXT Apparatus under subclass 450.1 in combination with a dynamic type mechanism
    to carry the means providing a shaping cavity through space in other than a
    mold opening or closing operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    453,    for a female mold and a dynamic support or carrier; see the search
    notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 323+ for metal casting apparatus
    including translocating means for plural independent molds.


CLS 425/451.2
TXT Apparatus under subclass 450.1 including structure that moves one of the
    segments relative to the other at a first velocity and/or a first force and
    further includes provision for moving the segments during the same closing
    operation relative to each other at a second velocity and/or second force.


CLS 425/451.3
TXT Apparatus under subclass 450.1 wherein the segment moving structure
    includes an elongated member movable along the elongated extent, extending
    generally away from a mold segment attached thereto and includes an annular
    member rotatable about an axis normal to the direction of movement of the
    elongated member having a peripheral surface adapted to frictionally engage
    the elongated member and transmit moving effort thereto.


CLS 425/451.4
TXT Apparatus under subclass 450.1 wherein the segment includes a surface for
    receiving force and wherein the moving means includes a rotatable member
    having a periphery of differing distances from the rotational axis adapted
    to slidably engage the force receiving segment surface so that as the
    rotatable member is rotationally displaced the distance between the axis of
    the member and the force receiving surface of the segment is changed.


CLS 425/451.5
TXT Apparatus under subclass 450.1 wherein the segment moving means includes a
    first joint member pivotally connected to the mold segment so that there is
    relative pivotal movement of the members as the segment is moved.


CLS 425/451.6
TXT Apparatus under subclass 451.5 wherein the segment moving means includes a
    second joint member pivotally connected to supporting frame structure, the
    first and second joints intermediately pivotally connected to each other so
    that movement of the intermediate connection towards alignment between the
    other two pivotal connections causes movement of the segment relative to
    the frame structure.


CLS 425/451.7
TXT Apparatus under subclass 450.1 wherein the segment moving means includes a
    surface that is adapted to slide relatively to a corresponding surface on
    the segment, which moving means surface is inclined with respect to a fixed
    reference on the frame.

    (1)     Note.  The inclined surface may be on a member that turns about an
    axis (screw) or may be fixed to the frame (cam-track).


CLS 425/451.9
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a female mold of separable
    segments and dynamic means for securing the segments together during a
    shaping operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    450.1+, for dynamic means to bring mold segments together.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 357+, for a mold to shape molten
    glass having mold clamping means.

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 160+, for a static female mold comprised of
    plural sections.


CLS 425/452
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising (1) a shape imparting
    cavity and (2) means to handle or transport a pallet thereto or therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    439,    for means inventing a mold to release or remove a product therefrom.

    470,    for a pallet, per se; see the search notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, appropriate subclasses for individual
    handling of discrete articles (e.g., trays, etc.), especially subclasses
    788+ for article arranging apparatus.


CLS 425/453
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising (1) means providing a shape
    imparting cavity and (2) machine type mechanism to support or carry the
    shaping cavity or portions thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261,    for means to sequentially move female mold to a means delivering
    measured charges.

    425+,   for a female mold and means for supporting same to impart motion
    utilized in the molding function, see especially subclass 429 for diverse
    motions, subclass 433 for an endless belt type support and 435 for means to
    rotate a female mold about a horizontal axis.

    439,    for product removal means including means to invent a mold.

    441+,   for product removal means including movable mold sections.

    450.1+, for a segmented mold with mold operating or clamping means,
    especially subclass 451 for that combination with means to transport the
    mold from station to station.

    575,    for means to sequentially move molds past a charger in a closed
    system comprising a mold and pressure charging means (e.g., injection
    molding apparatus, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 323+ for metal casting apparatus
    including translocating means for plural independent molds.

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 139 for a female static mold including means
    for securing the mold to a detachable separate and distinct support.


CLS 425/454
TXT Apparatus under subclass 453 including means to lift or lower the shape
    imparting cavity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63+,    for a mold with repositioning means for progressive molding.


CLS 425/456
TXT Apparatus under the class definition which comprises a means (e.g., a
    vibrator or tamp rod, etc.) disturbing the equilibrum of particles of
    fluent material by causing relative motion thereof to cause the material to
    be compacted and means to supply energy to the disturbing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    424,    for a female mold, a vibrator, and a product release means.

    425+,   for a female mold utilizing mold motion, including vibrating or
    tamping to compact or distribute work therein.

    428,    for the combination of a relatively moving female shaping means, a
    male shaping means and tamping means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclass 525 for package making apparatus including
    agitating means for compacting the material being packed.

    601,    Surgery:  Kinesitherapy, subclasses 46+ for kinesitherapy apparatus
    comprising vibrators.


CLS 425/457
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a shape imparting member
    (e.g., male die plunger, etc.) adapted to co-operate with a shaping surface
    and means to actuate or impart motion to said male shaping means during the
    shaping operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157,    for a timer controlled press mold cycle.

    195,    for a male-female press couple distinguished by its assembly means
    or by an idle part.

    346+,   for sets of male-female press couples.

    352+,   for opposed co-axial dynamic press members coacting within the same
    cavity.

    356,    for plural shaping plungers coacting with a single mold cavity.

    358+,   for a single male press member coacting with plural mold cavities.

    398+,   for a preform reshaping apparatus including a male-female press
    couple.

    406+,   for a press forming apparatus having opposed press members,
    especially subclasses 412+ for a male-female press couple.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 305+ for a press molding machine in
    the glass art; see the search notes thereunder.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 396+ for press
    felting in a foraminous forming mold in pulp molding.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 319+ for a press molding process in plastic article
    manufacturing.


CLS 425/458
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising hand operable means for
    shaping in plural dimensions, e.g., thickness plus width or thickness plus
    the angle of a edge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87,     for similar apparatus in combination with a material supply.

    218,    for a female mold and nonpress means cooperating with a charge
    inlet thereof to shape (e.g., smooth, etc.) or remove protruding stock.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 105.5 for a
    combined tool (i.e., one with two or more working surfaces) where one tool
    is for a Class 15 purpose e.g., scraping, and another tool is for a Class
    425 purpose, e.g., shaping; subclass 235.3 for mortar joint finishing tool;
    and subclasses 236.01+ for putty knives, per se.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for mere dispenser of material,
    especially subclasses 323+ and 386+ for caulking gun type dispensers.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, appropriate subclasses for
    manually operated coating implements in combination with a material supply
    where the implement contacts the work surface and any shaping which may be
    done is limited to one dimension, e.g., thickness.


CLS 425/459
TXT Apparatus under the class definition especially adapted for shaping clay
    like materials and comprising either (1) a tool for shaping a clay like
    mass by a traversing action with respect thereto generally having a point
    or line contact between the tool and the mass while there is relative
    rotation therebetween or (2) means for rotating a mass to be shaped by a
    tool as defined in (1).

    (1)     Note.  The patents in this subclasses comprise an art group and
    placement herein is on a disclosure basis relative to potter's wheel,
    profile tool, jigger tool or pottery working.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263+,   for a pottery wheel type support and a profile tool.

    418,    for a female mold and a rotating male press member.

    425+,   for means using mold motion generally to shape work.

    460,    for trowel type shaping members for the interior of hollow work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses, especially 67+ for a
    similar profile or jigger tool used for deforming metal.


CLS 425/460
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means especially designed
    to contact the walls of a cavity in a work piece and impart a shaping or
    smoothing action thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262,    for an encasing shaping surface and a trowel axially movable
    therein.

    365,    for a press shaping couple comprising a roll mounted internally of
    a cooperating drum; see the search notes thereunder.

    418,    for a female mold and a rotating male shaping member.

    426+,   for a relatively moving female mold and internal shaping member.

    459,    for profile tools, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, appropriate subclasses,
    for means cleaning the interior of a hollow work and for trowels for
    shaping a flat or single dimension surface.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses, especially subclass 105
    for machines for applying and troweling a lining to hollow work.


CLS 425/461
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a shape imparting aperture
    through which material is forced.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67+,    for an extrusion die former discharging directly into a liquid bath.

    71,     for apparatus for extruding into a liquid bath or shower means.

    72.1+,  for extrusion shaping means with downstream gas-contact type
    treating means.

    113+,   for an extrusion type shaping means including means to unite with a
    preform for forming a composite product (e.g., insulated wire).

    133.1,  for extrusion die combinations in plural sources feeding stock to
    common means forming common means forming composite product.

    190+,   for means dismantling an extrusion nozzle from the rest of a
    mechanism.

    309,    for a shaping orifice and means extending within the orifice for
    cutting the product.

    325+,   for diverse formers including an extrusion nozzle.

    331,    for perforated plates having roll means to press material
    therethrough.

    375,    for an extrusion nozzle in combination with pattern control for
    directing travel thereof.

    376.1+, for the combination of a shape imparting orifice and means for
    pressurizing stock fed thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, appropriate subclasses for nozzles used in
    glass manufacturing.  See especially subclasses 492 and 524.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 253.1+ for metal deforming by extruding
    through an orifice; see the search notes thereunder; see also subclasses
    467 for an extrusion orifice, per se.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, especially subclasses 400+ for devices for
    coating a preform by advancing it through a nozzle.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses
    for spray nozzles; see subclass 601 for orifice shapes.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 165+ for methods of extruding articles.


CLS 425/462
TXT Apparatus under subclasses 461 wherein at least two separate and distinct
    feed inlets for fluent moldable material are provided for directing
    material to the shape imparting orifice.


CLS 425/463
TXT Apparatus under subclasses 462 comprising multiple shape imparting outlets.


CLS 425/464
TXT Apparatus under subclasses 461 comprising a single inlet having multiple
    shape imparting outlets.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198,    for plural orifices and upstream straining or filtering means.

    331,    for a plate having plural perforations therein and a roll forcing
    stock therethrough.

    382,    for means placing pressure on material to force it through a
    plurality of orifices.


CLS 425/465
TXT Apparatus under subclasses 461 which includes means for forming irregular
    shaped products by changing the size of configuration of the shaping
    orifice during the product formation.


CLS 425/466
TXT Apparatus under subclasses 461 comprising means for adjusting either the
    orifice opening or a shape imparting surface positioned with said orifice.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168,    for adjusting means to compensate for wear.

    465,    for an orifice provided with means to change the size of
    configuration thereof during shaping of the product to form products of
    irregular or varied shapes.


CLS 425/467
TXT Apparatus under subclass 461 in which a core, pin or other insert member is
    provided in the extrusion nozzle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    288,    for a die expressing former for making doughnut shapes including
    concentric members coacting with the shaping orifice means.

    465,    for shaping nozzles including relatively movable core members to
    form irregular shaped products.

    466,    for shaping nozzles with adjustable inserts.


CLS 425/468
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a core and means to move or
    maintain the position of said core.

    (1)     Note.  A core is distinguished from a dynamic shaping member in
    that a core is stationary during the shaping operation.  See the glossary
    for a definition of a core.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    275,    for a dipping core, per se.

    403,    for reshaping mandrel, per se.

    414,    for a press forming apparatus and core positioning means.

    457,    for dynamic male shaping member and means to cause movement.

    466,    for a shaping orifice and a core.

    577,    for a female mold, means to charge fluent stock, and a core
    positioning means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 340 for a core positioning means and
    subclasses 397+ for a core centering or supporting means in metal founding
    apparatus.

    249,    Static Molds, appropriate subclass, especially subclasses 63+, 142+
    and 175+ for static molds including cores. For the distinction between a
    static and dynamic molding device see the class definition of this class.


CLS 425/469
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means adapted to be
    associated with a female mold to compress, compact or distribute material
    therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403,    for preform reshaping surfaces, per se.

    456,    for a tamp rod including mechanical movement or power means.

    457,    for a male shaping means including mechanical movement or power
    means.

    468,    for a core and a positioning means therefor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 187.1 for static mold elements.


CLS 425/470
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a surface upon which a
    material shaped.

    (1)     Note.  Included under this definition is a mold bottom (e.g.,
    pallet) or other device such as a support which may serve as a shaping
    member or to which the product may be transferred.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    253+,   for a female mold, pallet handling means and means to charge the
    female mold.

    403,    for shaping surfaces for use in preform reshaping.

    413,    for a press forming apparatus and a pallet handling means.

    452,    for a female mold and a pallet handling means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclass 237 for a consolidated metal powder composition
    containing carbide and another nonmetal.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 38.2+ for a core film
    casting surface, matrice, mold or plunger claimed solely in terms of the
    composition of which they are formed.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 598 for building forms on
    which an article may be formed by laminating.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 133+ for processes of coating a mold.


CLS 425/471
TXT Apparatus under subclass 470 comprising a endless surface.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes a singular roll having male or female
    surface featured thereon which are limited by intent to shaping plastic
    material under the Class 425 definition. However, a roll having a smooth
    surface and identified as a "casting roll" is proper for Class 425.  A roll
    having a combination of cutting means and a region that shapes by plastic
    flow into a molding area; i.e., as found in certain briquetting rolls or
    cookie shaping rolls; is proper for Class 425.

    (2)     Note.  Also included herein are belts, casting drums, briquetters,
    pelletizing means, etc., when disclosed as a shaping surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194,    for an apparatus assembly or dismantling means or with an idler
    part having a press shaping surface including a calendar roll or roll face.

    223,    for a casting or felter type forming means and a harvesting means.

    224,    for means casting a fluent stock associated with a shaping surface
    to form an indefinite length product.

    363+,   for shaping couples which include an endless surface shaping
    member; see the search notes thereunder.

    374,    for a press couple wherein a roll coacts with an endless surface
    which has shape imparting cavities therein.

    375,    for a press couple comprising a roll coacting with a static forming
    surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 606+ and 804+ for endless
    conveyors.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the search notes provided under the general definition.


CLS 425/472
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising apparatus not provided for
    above.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of apparatus found under this definition are:  an
    end closure for a brick mold, a stencil for use in molding, a mold support,
    a fabric or other type cover for a dough forming surface, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, subclass 111 for a rolling pin combined with a
    diverse device or convertible to a diverse device.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 258+, for structure for supporting ceramic
    articles in a furnace during heat treatment.

    492,    Roll or Roller, subclass 14 for a rolling pin, per se, not
    elsewhere provided for.


CLS 425/500
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising handling or support means
    for bringing together individual preforms into contacting relationship and
    bonding means for causing the preforms to become united by adhesion, fusion
    or vulcanization, wherein (1) the bonding is accompanied by a reshaping of
    at least one preform in the bonding area, or (2) in the case of
    vulcanization, the shape of the assembled uncured preforms is maintained or
    retained through the use of a conforming support means.

    (1)     Note.  To be included herein, the handling or support means which
    bring the preforms together must be dynamic rather than static, e.g.,
    manual devices which aid the operator to assemble the preforms by hand are
    not included.  Also, mere reshaping of previously assembled preforms is not
    included even though there is a uniting of the preforms.

    (2)     Note.  A shaped charge which is handled as a discrete unit is
    considered a preform when it contributes to the final shape of the product.

    (3)     Note.  Included herein are also devices for assembling plural parts
    or portions of a single preform wherein the parts are handled individually
    in the same manner as plural preforms.

    (4)     Note.  Including herein is the forcible inserting or embedding of
    one preform into the plastic body of another preform even though the only
    reshaping is the displacement of material accompanying and resulting from
    the preform inserting, see subclass 517.

    (5)     Note.  Overlapping or contacting pieces of dough (e.g., by coiling,
    twisting or lapping, etc.) are not included herein unless particular means
    are provided to reshape the contacting areas subsequent to assembly to
    effect a uniting thereof.  Such patents are found in other appropriate
    subclasses.  All patents for uniting overlapping portions of pretzel dough
    are found in subclass 323.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for a means encapsulating a normally liquid material including
    means for making a package and comprising apparatus for assembling and
    bonding plural preforms involving preform reshaping.

    110+,   for means shaping fluent material and uniting the same to a preform
    to make a composite product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 36+ for processes of fusion bonding
    of a glass part to a preform; subclasses 152+ for fusion bonding apparatus
    uniting preforms and involving a glass working operation.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for means uniting plural preforms without reshaping
    at the joint.  See the class definition of Class 425 for a more detailed
    explanation of the lines concerning Class 156.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 241+ for processes of uniting plural preforms involving joint
    reshaping.


CLS 425/501
TXT Apparatus under subclass 500 comprising means to vulcanize or cure the
    assembled preforms which includes a support for the preforms having the
    same shape as the composite of preforms so as to maintain or retain the
    shape of the assembled preforms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    383+,   for preform vulcanizing means including a conforming support and
    see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 425/502
TXT Apparatus under subclass 501 including means to facilitate separation of
    the vulcanized or cured product from the conforming support.


CLS 425/503
TXT Apparatus under subclass 500 comprising means to deform, stretch, shrink or
    otherwise reshape the configuration or size of at least one of the preforms
    wherein the reshaping is accomplished by means of applying pressurized
    fluid directly upon a preform surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    387.1+, for means utilizing fluid pressure to reshape a preform and see the
    search notes thereunder.


CLS 425/504
TXT Apparatus under subclass 503 in which the reshaping is accomplished by
    means producing a reduced fluid pressure on at least one preform surface so
    as to provide a differential pressure utilized as a shaping force.


CLS 425/505
TXT Apparatus under subclass 500 comprising means for forming an elongated
    product or article having an indeterminate linear dimension.


CLS 425/506
TXT Apparatus under subclass 500 including means to subject the work or product
    to an operation which modifies or controls the chemical or physical
    properties of at least one of the preforms before, during or after the
    bonding operation other than by an operation which (1) brings the preforms
    together into assembled relation, (2) unites or joins the preforms, or (3)
    applies a shaping force thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    445+,   for means treating shaped work and see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 425/507
TXT Apparatus under subclass 506 including means to effect a change in the
    temperature of at least one of the preforms before, during or after the
    bonding operation.


CLS 425/508
TXT Apparatus under subclass 507 wherein a heating means is utilized to
    increase the temperature of the work.


CLS 425/509
TXT Apparatus under subclass 508 including a cooling means to reduce the
    temperature of the work.


CLS 425/510
TXT Apparatus under subclass 506 including means for cutting, tearing,
    separating, breaking, scoring or otherwise severing at least one of the
    preforms before, during or after the bonding operation.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of the term "severing" see subclass 289
    of this class and Notes 1-3 thereunder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    289,    for preform severing means and see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 425/511
TXT Apparatus under subclass 510 including means preceding the bonding
    operation, to form at least one preform from fluent or bulk material.


CLS 425/512
TXT Apparatus under subclass 510 comprising two or more separate and distinct
    cutting means or stations.


CLS 425/513
TXT Apparatus under subclass 512 wherein one of the cutting means or stations
    differs in kind from at least one other.


CLS 425/514
TXT Apparatus under subclass 510 wherein the severing means operates subsequent
    to the bonding operation.


CLS 425/515
TXT Apparatus under subclass 500 including means preceding the bonding
    operation to (1) form at least one preform from fluent or bulk material, or
    (2) deform, stretch, shrink or otherwise reshape the configuration or size
    of at least one of the preforms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    500+ for casting, plastic molding or extruding apparatus combined with
    laminating without reshaping at joint.


CLS 425/516
TXT Apparatus under subclass 515 wherein the shaping means has a shape
    imparting aperture or orifice through which work material is forced.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    461+,   for a shaping orifice, per se, and see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 425/517
TXT Apparatus under subclass 500 comprising means for forcibly inserting,
    embedding or otherwise press fitting a first preform into the plastic body
    of a second preform involving plastic flow or material displacement in at
    least one of the preforms accompanying or resulting from the press fitting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    303.1 for processes of inserting a lamina into a preformed plastic body.


CLS 425/518
TXT Apparatus under subclass 500 comprising two or more separate and distinct
    reshaping means or stations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    340+,   for plural reshaping means to change the configuration of one or
    more preforms and see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 425/519
TXT Apparatus under subclass 518 comprising facing, shaping cavities which
    coact to press work material into a desired shape, the cavities having
    meeting portions of co-extensive area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    395,    for preform reshaping means having opposed, registering coacting
    mold cavities and see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 425/520
TXT Apparatus under subclass 500 comprising opposed cooperating shaping
    surfaces having relative movement for exerting compressive force on work
    material therebetween so as to impart a shape thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    406+,   for opposed cooperating shaping surfaces and see the search notes
    thereunder.


CLS 425/521
TXT Apparatus under subclass 520 comprising a male shaping member adapted to
    penetrate within a female mold to exert a compressive force on the work
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    412+,   for a male-female press couple and see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 425/522
TXT Apparatus under the class definition particularly adapted to shape a
    preformed hollow workpiece including (1) a closed shaping surface facing
    radially inwardly adapted to be engaged by and to shape preformed material
    moving radially outwardly thereagainst, and (2) means to provide a fluent
    medium under pressure to the interior of the preformed workpiece, whereby
    the interior pressure exceeds the ambient pressure and causes the preformed
    workpiece to stretch and move radially outwardly into shaping engagement
    with the closed shaping surface.

    (1)     Note.  The closed shaping surface facing radially inwardly (female
    mold) of this subclass is stationary with respect to the molded product at
    the instant that molding is completed.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass is, for example, means to form a
    container such as a bottle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 110, for shaping a hollow, green
    glass preform by utilization of gas pressure.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    287, for process of laminating in which fluid pressure differential is
    applied in the lining of a hollow body; subclass 444, for means to bend a
    work part by pneumatic blast combined with means to laminate; and, subclass
    475, for means to bend a work part to the configuration of another part to
    which it is secured.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 512+ and 523+ for the process of blow molding.


CLS 425/523
TXT Apparatus under subclass 522 particularly adapted to shape a hollow
    preformed workpiece consisting of a first and a second layer of material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    503+,   for means to cause a preform to be bonded to work being reshaped by
    the application of fluent pressure; e.g., for the application of a label to
    a bottle being blow molded.


CLS 425/524
TXT Apparatus under subclass 522 wherein the fluent medium utilized to force
    the parison into engagement with the closed shaping surface is intended to
    remain with the product of the shaping operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, appropriate subclasses, for molding of a package
    combined with subsequent filling of that package.


CLS 425/525
TXT Apparatus under subclass 522 adapted to form a product of particular
    characteristics for a peculiar use.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is, for example, means for forming a handle
    on a container and means for forming prescribed baffles inside a container.


CLS 425/526
TXT Apparatus under subclass 522 including means to alter the thermal condition
    of the work or product.


CLS 425/527
TXT Apparatus under subclass 522 including means to divide one portion of the
    product of the blow mold operation from another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    289+,   for means to mold combined with means to sever the product,
    generally.

    531,    for means to divide one portion of a preform parison from another
    before blow molding of the parison.

    806,    for an art collection of patents directed to removal of flash from
    a molded article.


CLS 425/528
TXT Apparatus under subclass 522 including means to treat or condition the
    preformed hollow workpiece prior to final shaping thereof.


CLS 425/529
TXT Apparatus under subclass 528 wherein the means to treat or condition
    includes means to elongate the molecular structure of a preformed member
    and form that member into a preformed hollow workpiece.


CLS 425/530
TXT Apparatus under subclass 529 wherein the means to elongate the molecular
    structure of the member in the formation of a preformed hollow workpiece
    includes means to fill the member with fluid to cause the member to be
    enlarged.


CLS 425/531
TXT Apparatus under subclass 528 wherein the means to treat or condition
    includes means to divide one portion of the preformed hollow workpiece from
    another portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    527,    for blow molding means combined with means to sever the blow molded
    product.


CLS 425/532
TXT Apparatus under subclass 528 wherein the means to treat or condition
    includes means to form a hollow workpiece by forcing fluent material
    through a shaping orifice.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    376.1+, for a shaping orifice combined with means to force fluent material
    through the orifice.

    461+,   for a shaping orifice, per se.


CLS 425/533
TXT Apparatus under subclass 528 wherein the means to treat or condition
    includes means to form a hollow workpiece by forcing fluent material into a
    mold.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    542+,   for means to form a product by forcing fluent material into a mold.


CLS 425/534
TXT Apparatus under subclass 528 wherein the means to treat or condition
    includes means other than the mold structure adapted to move the preformed
    hollow workpiece from one location to another.


CLS 425/535
TXT Apparatus under subclass 522 including detailed structure of the means to
    provide a fluent medium under pressure to the interior of the preformed
    workpiece.


CLS 425/536
TXT Apparatus under subclass 535 including a slender tubular member adapted to
    pierce the wall of the preformed hollow workpiece and provide the fluent
    medium thereto.


CLS 425/537
TXT Apparatus under subclass 522 combined with structure intended to force the
    molded product from the closed shaping surface.


CLS 425/538
TXT Apparatus under subclass 522 including (1) a plurality of members, each
    including a closed shaping surface facing radially inwardly adapted to be
    engaged by and to shape preformed material moving radially outwardly
    thereagainst, and (2) a plurality of means to provide a fluent medium under
    pressure to the interior of the preformed workpiece.


CLS 425/539
TXT Apparatus under subclass 538 including means to permit continuous travel of
    preformed hollow workpieces and means to move the shaping surfaces and the
    fluent medium supply means in the same direction and at the same speed so
    that there is no relative movement between the preformed hollow workpiece
    and the corresponding shaping surface at the time of molding.

    (1)     Note.  The closed, radially inwardly facing, shaping surface
    (female mold) of this subclass is stationary with respect to the molded
    product at the instant that molding is completed.


CLS 425/540
TXT Apparatus under subclass 538 including means for supporting the members
    having inwardly facing shaping surfaces for movement from one position to
    another about a fixed axis.

    (1)     Note.  An endless belt supporting the molds is not considered
    proper for this subclass, even if at some time during movement, as when
    passing over a drive gear, the molds are moved about an axis.


CLS 425/541
TXT Apparatus under subclass 522 including (1) means to force portions of the
    inwardly facing shaping surface into operational position, or (2) means to
    secure the portions of the surface in operational position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    450.1,  for means to force a mold closed, generally.

    451.9,  for means to lock a mold closed, generally.


CLS 425/542
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means defining a shaping
    cavity structure (i.e., a female mold) and means to force fluent stock
    material along a passage into the shaping cavity thereof under pressure,
    the shaping cavity and the stock forcing means adapted to function as a
    closed hydraulic system.

    (1)     Note.  At the time of molding there is no movement between the
    molded article and the shaping cavity structure of this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this and the indented subclasses are means for
    "injection molding", "briquetting", etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117+,   for composite article making apparatus utilizing preform handling
    or support means; if the injection molding type, see especially subclass
    129.

    253+    and 256+, for a shaping cavity combined with means to supply fluent
    material thereto by gravitational flow.

    533,    for injection molding means combined with blow molding means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 145+, for auger conveyor type press means.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 303+, for injection type metal shaping
    apparatus.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 550.6, for a combination of a
    bin and screw conveyor; and subclass 625, for a screw conveyor, per se.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 251+, for apparatus for discharging or
    dispensing a material comprising a discharge assistant to pressurize a
    material.

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 105+, for an injection mold including a
    static filling means in contact with the work.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 79+ and 318+, for a mixer or kneader,
    including screw conveyor means in the working zone.


CLS 425/543
TXT Apparatus under subclass 542 including specific provision making that
    apparatus adapted to shaping of material which hardens by the application
    of heat.


CLS 425/544
TXT Apparatus under subclass 543 wherein the means to force the stock material
    to move comprises a chamber adapted to receive a substantially solid block
    of stock material and includes means to pressurize the block sufficiently
    to cause the stock material to flow as a liquid to the shaping cavity.


CLS 425/545
TXT Apparatus under subclass 542 comprising means to mold one of the component
    parts of a slide fastener.

    (1)     Note.  A slide fastener is an assembly of elements normally used to
    temporarily fasten together garment portions and is comprised of a pair of
    opposing stringers, (e.g., elongated members adapted to be each fastened
    permanently to a garment portion and adapted to detachably connect to each
    other by an interlocking fit), a slider (adapted to travel along the
    stringers and cause the stringers to connect or disconnect from each
    other), a lower stop (limiting the extent of travel of the slider in the
    opening direction of the stringers), and an upper stop (limiting the extent
    of travel of the slider in the closed direction of the stringers).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    814,    for an art collection of other means for shaping the component
    parts of a slide fastener.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 33.2, for apparatus for assembling a slide
    fastener combined with additional apparatus for shaping a work part, e.g.,
    for trimming a component; subclasses 766+ for apparatus for assembling the
    component parts of a slide fastener; and subclasses 408+, for a process of
    assembling a slide fastener.


CLS 425/546
TXT Apparatus under subclass 542 including means to assure the emptiness of the
    shaping cavity; or to regulate the atmosphere about the shaping cavity
    structure.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is means to clean the mold prior to
    operation and means to create a reduced atmosphere, i.e., vacuum of power
    vent means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    812,    for an art collection of patents directed to mold venting in
    general.


CLS 425/547
TXT Apparatus under subclass 542 including means to alter the thermal condition
    of the work, machine, or product.


CLS 425/548
TXT Apparatus under subclass 547 including a first means to alter the thermal
    condition of the work, machine, or product; and a second, independent means
    to alter the thermal condition of the work, machine, or product.


CLS 425/549
TXT Apparatus under subclass 547 including, along the stock material passage, a
    coupling between the forcing means and the shaping cavity wherein a
    projection is provided from the structure extending from the forcing means
    and a corresponding pocket is formed in the structure extending to the
    shaping cavity, such that the projection is adapted to sealingly fit into
    the pocket; and including means to alter the thermal condition of that
    portion including the projection.


CLS 425/550
TXT Apparatus under subclass 547 wherein the means to force fluent stock
    includes an exteriorly walled portion wherein the stock is kneaded and
    milled to become fluent, and including means to alter the thermal condition
    of the exterior wall.


CLS 425/551
TXT Apparatus under subclass 547 including a stock supply bin up stream of the
    stock pressurizing means, and including means to alter the thermal
    condition of the supply bin.


CLS 425/552
TXT Apparatus under subclass 547 comprising means to lower the thermal
    condition of the shaping cavity structure, which means is positioned
    outside the shaping cavity.


CLS 425/553
TXT Apparatus under subclass 542 combined with means to subdivide one portion
    of shape sustaining work or product from another, wherein the means to
    subdivide is independent from the shaping cavity structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    289,    for other molding, combined with means to sever a preform.

    531,    for severing means for a parison, combined with blow molding means.


CLS 425/554
TXT Apparatus under subclass 553 combined with structure intended to force the
    molded product from the shaping cavity.


CLS 425/555
TXT Apparatus under subclass 542 including provision to compensate for the
    normal reduction in size of the molded article brought about by cooling or
    setting of the article.


CLS 425/556
TXT Apparatus under subclass 542 combined with structure intended to force the
    molded product from the shaping cavity.


CLS 425/557
TXT Apparatus under subclass 542 wherein (1) volumetric compartment means is
    provided to receive and temporarily contain a specific portion of fluent
    stock material, or (2) plural valve means are sequentially arranged between
    a discharge assistant of the charging means and a shaping cavity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    448,    for a forming surface and means feeding fluent stock thereto
    comprising a trap chamber; see the collection of search notes thereunder
    for apparatus under the class definition with a charger for delivering a
    measured charge.


CLS 425/558
TXT Apparatus under subclass 557 including a volumetric compartment, and
    including means to change the capacity of the compartment.


CLS 425/559
TXT Apparatus under subclass 557 including a volumetric compartment, and
    including a valve means for permitting fluent stock to flow into the
    compartment, but preventing the stock to flow in the opposite direction.


CLS 425/560
TXT Apparatus under subclass 557 including means to alternatively cause fluent
    stock material to flow into a volumetric compartment or to flow directly
    into the female mold cavity without passing first through the volumetric
    compartment.


CLS 425/561
TXT Apparatus under subclass 557 including a volumetric compartment wherein
    reciprocating means is provided to transfer the fluent stock to the shaping
    cavity, which reciprocating means also functions to seal the volumetric
    compartment against flow of fluent stock from the shaping cavity or from
    the supply line coming into the compartment.


CLS 425/562
TXT Apparatus under subclass 542 including structure adapted to stop the flow
    of fluent stock to be molded, which structure is functionally located
    between the shaping cavity and the means to force the fluent stock therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146,    for an automatic valve actuated by differential pressure of fluent
    molding material en route to a shaping area.


CLS 425/563
TXT Apparatus under subclass 562 wherein the flow stopping means is resiliently
    urged out of stopping condition and wherein pressure of the fluent stock
    acts on a portion thereof to bring about the stopping condition thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135+,   for means to sense a pressure change of fluent stock and activate a
    stopping means in response thereto.

    146,    for an automatic valve actuated by differential pressure of fluent
    molding material en route to a shaping area.


CLS 425/564
TXT Apparatus under subclass 562 including, along the stock material passage, a
    coupling between the forcing means and the shaping cavity wherein a
    projection is provided from the structure extending from the forcing means
    and a corresponding pocket is formed in the structure extending to the
    shaping cavity, such that the projection is adapted to sealingly fit into
    the pocket; wherein the blocking means is positioned in the projection, in
    the vicinity of the portion to be received by the pocket.


CLS 425/565
TXT Apparatus under subclass 564 including means engaging a portion of the
    structure surrounding the shaping cavity to actuate the means to
    selectively block or permit passage of stock material to the shaping cavity.


CLS 425/566
TXT Apparatus under subclass 564 wherein the receiving pocket is constructed
    such that the projection extends at least as far as the inwardly facing
    wall of the shaping cavity.


CLS 425/567
TXT Apparatus under subclass 542 including as part of the closed hydraulic
    system a distinct member located between the shaping cavity and the forcing
    means, which distinct member includes a passage for permitting flow of
    fluent stock material therethrough from the forcing means to the shaping
    cavity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    450.1+, for a subcombination of means opening and closing or clamping a
    mold and an injection type mold.


CLS 425/568
TXT Apparatus under subclass 567 wherein the distinct member includes a
    projection extending therefrom toward the shaping cavity, which projection
    is adapted to detachably, sealingly interfit with a pocket in the shaping
    cavity structure such that the passage extends through the projection and
    continues in the pocket to the shaping cavity.


CLS 425/569
TXT Apparatus under subclass 568 including means, other than a primary power
    means, for securing the distinct member including a protuberance to the
    receiving structure of the shaping cavity or connected structure.


CLS 425/570
TXT Apparatus under subclass 568 including at least one distinct member and
    including more than one protuberance extending therefrom, adapted to permit
    passage of fluent stock to at least one shaping cavity.


CLS 425/571
TXT Apparatus under subclass 568 wherein the receiving pocket is constructed
    such that the projection extends at least as far as the inwardly facing
    wall of the shaping cavity.


CLS 425/572
TXT Apparatus under subclass 567 wherein the distinct member located between
    the shaping cavity and the forcing means is intended to supply fluent stock
    material to a plurality of such shaping cavities within the same structure
    including the cavities.


CLS 425/573
TXT Apparatus under subclass 567 wherein the distinct member is intended to
    supply fluent stock material to a shaping cavity via more than one path or
    runner.


CLS 425/574
TXT Apparatus under subclass 542 including means to relocate the shaping cavity
    structure or means to relocate the means to force fluent stock, such that
    the shaping cavity structure is relocated with respect to the means to
    force fluent stock thereto.


CLS 425/575
TXT Apparatus under subclass 574 comprising means to relocate the shaping
    cavity structure.


CLS 425/576
TXT Apparatus under subclass 575 comprising means to rotate the shaping cavity
    structure about an axis.


CLS 425/577
TXT Apparatus under subclass 542 wherein a movable core, sprue pin or
    compression pin is provided within a shaping cavity.

    (1)     Note.  Ejector pins are excluded; see the search notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    444,    for a shaping surface and movable ejector means (e.g., pin, etc.)
    which enters the shaping cavity after shaping.

    468     for a core and core positioning means combination; see the
    collection of search notes thereunder.

    522+,   for a blow mold including an internal mandrel used to inflate a
    parison.


CLS 425/578
TXT Apparatus under subclass 542 wherein the means to force fluent stock
    includes a supply vessel which is for holding the fluent material prior to
    transfer to the shaping cavity, and is open to the atmosphere during
    filling thereof.


CLS 425/579
TXT Apparatus under subclass 578 wherein the means to force fluent stock into
    the shaping cavity includes a surface adapted to serve as a portion of the
    shaping cavity wall and thereby impart shape to the product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    406+,   for similar structure wherein a portion of the mold surface moves
    inwardly to compress material, wherein the fluent material is not
    transported from a remote location by the moving mold surface.

    522+,   for a blow mold including transport means adapted to shape the
    parison.

    577,    for a movable core member adapted to provide shape to the inner
    surface of a workpiece being formed.


CLS 425/580
TXT Apparatus under subclass 578 including means to transfer fluent stock
    material from a remote location, usually the open supply vessel, to the
    means to force the fluent stock into the shaping cavity, wherein the fluent
    stock is composed of individual solid articles that flow en masse as a
    fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    585,    for similar structure not combined with an open supply vessel.


CLS 425/581
TXT Apparatus under subclass 580 including more than one shaping cavity.


CLS 425/582
TXT Apparatus under subclass 580 wherein the means to transfer fluent stock
    from a remote location turns about an axis.


CLS 425/583
TXT Apparatus under subclass 580 wherein the means to transfer fluent stock
    from a remote location moves along a straight line, to and fro.


CLS 425/584
TXT Apparatus under subclass 580 wherein the means to transfer fluent stock
    from a remote location includes means to apply positive atmospheric
    pressure upstream of the stock, or includes means to apply negative
    atmospheric pressure downstream of the stock.


CLS 425/585
TXT Apparatus under subclass 542 including means to transfer fluent stock
    material from a remote location to the means to force the fluent stock into
    the shaping cavity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    580,    for similar apparatus combined with an open supply vessel.


CLS 425/586
TXT Apparatus under subclass 585 wherein the means to transfer fluent stock
    material is constructed to transfer a specific, predetermined quantity of
    stock into the shaping cavity.


CLS 425/587
TXT Apparatus under subclass 585 wherein the transfer means is adapted to turn
    about an axis and is helically ribbed along that axis to transfer fluent
    stock material therealong upon rotation thereof.


CLS 425/588
TXT Apparatus under subclass 542 including more than one shaping cavity in the
    same or a plurality of shaping cavity structures.


CLS 425/589
TXT Apparatus under subclass 542 comprising a shaping cavity structure formed
    of separable segments and an associated mechanism that moves at least one
    of the segments relative to another into or out of cavity forming
    relationship.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    450.1,  for similar structure not claimed in combination with means to
    transfer fluent stock material into the shaping cavity as part of a closed
    system.


CLS 425/590
TXT Apparatus under subclass 589 including structure that moves one of the
    segments relative to the other at a first velocity or a first force and
    further includes provision for moving the segments during the same closing
    operation relative to each other at a second velocity or second force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    451.2,  for similar structure not claimed in combination with means to
    transfer fluent stock material into the shaping cavity as part of a closed
    system.


CLS 425/591
TXT Apparatus under subclass 589 including a hydraulic drive means to move the
    segments into cavity forming position and including a hydraulic drive means
    to pressurize the fluent stock material and force the material into the
    shaping cavity, wherein the two hydraulic drive means are subjected to
    hydraulic pressure from the same source, without an intermediate pressure
    change means.


CLS 425/592
TXT Apparatus under subclass 589 wherein the segment moving means includes a
    first joint member pivotally connected to the segment so that there is
    relative pivotal movement of the members as the segment is moved.


CLS 425/593
TXT Apparatus under subclass 592 wherein the segment moving means includes a
    second joint member pivotally connected to supporting frame structure, the
    first and second joints intermediately pivotally connected to each other so
    that movement of the intermediate connection toward alignment between the
    other two pivotal connections causes movement of the segment relative to
    the frame structure.


CLS 425/594
TXT Apparatus under subclass 589 wherein the means to move a cavity structure
    segment and the means to force fluent stock material to the mold cavity are
    physically located on the same side of the cavity structure.


CLS 425/595
TXT Apparatus under subclass 542 comprising a shaping cavity structure of
    separable segments and dynamic means for securing the segments together
    during a shaping operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    451.9,  for similar structure not claimed in combination with means to
    transfer fluent stock material into the shaping cavity as part of a closed
    system.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS

    The following subclasses are collections of published disclosures
    pertaining to various specified aspects of the shaping art which aspects do
    not form appropriate bases for subclasses in the foregoing classification
    (i.e., subclasses superior hereto in the schedule), wherein original copies
    of patents are placed on the basis of proximate function of the apparatus.
    These subclasses assist a search based on remote function of the apparatus
    and may be of further assistance to the searcher, either as a starting
    point in further related fields of search inside or outside the class.
    Thus, there is here provided a second access for retrieval of a limited
    number of types of disclosures.

    (1)     Note.  Disclosures are placed in these subclasses for their value
    as references and as leads to appropriate main or secondary fields of
    search, without regard to their original classification or their claimed
    subject matter.

    (2)     Note.  The disclosures found in the following subclasses are
    examples, only of the indicated subject matter, and in no instance do they
    represent the entire extent of the prior art.


CLS 425/801
TXT Apparatus for molding buttons.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290+,   for a means to perforate a preform which may be a button (i.e., to
    provide thread openings).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 90.1+ for the structure
    of the button.

    79,     Button Making, appropriate subclasses for making buttons other than
    of plastic material.


CLS 425/802
TXT Apparatus for uniting together portions of a tubular or rod-like member
    disclosed for wire cables.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for apparatus joining the end of one rod to the end of another.


CLS 425/803
TXT Apparatus for molding slender, relatively long, articles of the crayon or
    candle type.

    (1)     Note.  These articles are made usually by dipping a form into a
    pool of stock material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    269+,   for apparatus comprising a shaping means of the dipping type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 271.1+ for a process of making candles by surrounding a preform
    (e.g., wick, etc.) with plastic material.


CLS 425/804
TXT Apparatus disclosed for making capsules (i.e., a two part cylindrical
    article, each part having a closed and an open end, the two open ends
    telescoping one into the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    269+,   for apparatus comprising a shaping means of the dipping type.

    346+,   for sets of male-female press molds.

    412+,   for press apparatus having opposed press members of the male and
    female type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 266.1+ for filling and closing preformed
    receptacles of the capsule type.

    82,     Turning, subclasses 46+ for means to cut off or trim portions of a
    capsule preform by turning either the work or the tool.


CLS 425/805
TXT Apparatus for shaping toilet articles of the brush and comb type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    140,    Wireworking, subclass 100 for apparatus for making a wire comb.

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 26 for woodworking apparatus for making a
    wooden comb.

    300,    Brush, Broom, and Mop Making, appropriate subclasses for apparatus
    for making a brush by other than shaping a plastic means.


CLS 425/806
TXT Apparatus for removing flash (i.e., excess or unwanted material) from a
    shaped article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    289+,   for means severing or cutting a preform which may include removal
    of flash.


CLS 425/807
TXT Means for shaping a nonmetallic material on the end of a shoelace for ease
    in threading through apertures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110+,   for means to support, feed or manipulate a preform (e.g., lace,
    etc.) and means to shape fluent or bulk stock to form a united product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., appropriate subclasses, especially
    subclasses 715.4+ for a shoelace with covered tips.


CLS 425/808
TXT Means for making a lens (e.g., spectacle, telescope, etc.) using a mold for
    the lens.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175+,   for means to make a mold by apparatus of this class, which mold may
    be for a lens.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    642+ for lenses, per se.


CLS 425/809
TXT Apparatus for shaping gasket elements in caps for sealing bottles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110+,   for apparatus comprising means to feed, support or manipulate
    preform stock (bottle caps) and means for shaping fluent or bulk material
    (gasket) to form a united product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    413,    Sheet Metal Container Making, subclasses 19+, 37+, and 67 for a
    machine for can cap or head preparing and gasket applying; see the search
    notes thereunder.


CLS 425/810
TXT Apparatus for making discs or cylinders having grooves therein for
    reproducing sounds.


CLS 425/811
TXT Apparatus comprising a female mold with a top having an irregular opening
    and vertical walls defining the irregular opening so that fluent or bulk
    material pressed through the opening will form an article of irregular
    shape corresponding to that of the opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331,    for a traversing roll operably associated with a downstream
    perforated plate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclasses 114+ for printing devices using tools or
    members having designed areas through which ink pigments or other coating
    substance may pass to the surface to be printed thereon.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 213, 301, and 406 for coating
    apparatus utilizing a mask or stencil.


CLS 425/812
TXT Apparatus comprising means for removing or permitting removal of gases
    during the molding operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    420,    for press molding devices with vents.


CLS 425/813
TXT Apparatus for molding a receptacle usually of the type having a plugged
    opening and adapted to contain a fluid therein, commonly known as a hot
    water bottle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 399+ for a thermal applicator which is limited
    by claimed structure for therapeutic use.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 901 for a cross-reference art collection of
    bags intended to be used as a hot water bottle.


CLS 425/814
TXT Apparatus for making any part or all of a device (slider) which travels
    along rows of fastener elements to engage (interdigitate) or disengage the
    elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110+,   for apparatus for holding or manipulating a preform (e.g., tape)
    and means to shape bulk stock or material to form a united product
    (fastener elements).

    500+,   for apparatus assembling plural preforms involving preform
    reshaping (i.e., elements of a slide fastener).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 205+ for the structure
    of the slide fastener, per se.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 33.2, 766+ and 408+ for the apparatus and
    process of manufacture of slide fasteners.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 252 for process of shaping plastic slide fasteners by molding
    fastener elements along a tape edge.


CLS 425/815
TXT Apparatus in which the shaping operation is performed in chemical
    atmosphere which either inhibits or accelerates chemical reaction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73+,    for shaping apparatus including a ventilating type hood encasing a
    material handler.


CLS 425/816
TXT Apparatus for shaping a member to fit over and be complementary to the face
    of an animal and to prevent breathing except through a predetermined fluid
    handling system; these devices are commonly called gas masks or respirators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 200.24+ for respirators or gas masks, per se.


CLS 425/817
TXT Apparatus for shaping material in which pores or voids are formed during
    the material handling or shaping operations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for mechanical means to form or expand pores in the material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 41+ for the process of shaping plastic material including the
    step of forming pores in situ.


CLS 425/818
TXT BELT:

    Apparatus for forming curling or vulcanizing of belts (e.g., drive,
    transmission, endless, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34.2,   for plural female mold for making belts.


CLS 426/
TTL FOOD OR EDIBLE MATERIAL:   PROCESSES, COMPOSITIONS,  AND PRODUCTS

CLS 426/
TXT CONTENTS

    I.      STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    II.     CLASSIFICATION LINES WITH OTHER CLASSES

    A.      Index to class lines in sections of this class

    B.      Lines with related compound classes

    C.      Lines with related composition classes

    D.      Lines with related process classes

    (1)     General Treating Classes

    (2)     Special Treating Classes



    E.      Lines with product classes

    (1)     Package classes

    (2)     Amusement and music classes

    (3)     General article or product classes



    III.    SEARCH NOTES

    IV.     INDEX TO CLASS SEARCH NOTES IN CLASS DEFINITION SECTIONS AND
    SUBCLASSES OF THIS CLASS

    V.      GLOSSARY

    VI.     CLASSIFICATION GUIDELINES FOR THIS CLASS

    VII.    SUBCLASS DEFINITIONS

    I.      STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    This class provides in general for products and compositions in any
    physical form which are intended to be consumed by human being or lower
    animals in whole or part via the oral cavity.

    Food and edible will be used synonymously and interchangeable herein only
    in those situations where the edible is intended to be consumed and is not
    merely in a nontoxic form which is ancillary to its ultimate and intended
    purpose, e.g., adhesive for stamps, etc.  This class includes the following
    subject matter not provided for elsewhere.

    A.      EDIBLE PRODUCTS OR COMPOSITIONS

    1.      Products or compositions which historically have been considered to
    be a food, and products or compositions which contain a naturally occurring
    material (i.e., plant or animal tissue) which has been historically
    regarded as a food; e.g., milk, cheese, apples, bread, dough, bacon,
    whiskey, etc.

    2.      Products or compositions which are known to have or are disclosed
    as having  nutritional effect.

    3.      Products or compositions which are closed or claimed as being
    edible or which; perfect, modify, treat, or are used in conjunction with an
    edible such as (1) or (2) above or with another edible, so as to become
    part of the edible composition or product, or which converts a nonedible to
    an edible form.

    4.      Plural inorganic elements or minerals for fortification.

    5.      Mixtures of enzymes which are edible, per se, or which are used in
    preparing a product or composition proper for this class.

    6.      Products or compositions proper for this class which contain a live
    micro-organism which enhances or perfects the digestive action of the
    intestinal tract, e.g., Bacillus acidophilus milk, etc.

    7.      Edible bait.

    8.      Edible products or compositions which have structural
    characteristics.

    B.      EDIBLE FOOD PRODUCTS IN COMBINATION WITH NONFOOD MATERIALS WHICH
    ARE GENERALLY:

    1.      Products or compositions of A. above in combination with a package
    structure, inedible casing, a liner or base, an infusion bag, etc.

    2.      Compounds which have the same function as in (A. 1-3) in
    combination with an inedible material.

    3.      Potable water in a package.

    4.      Chewing gum and chewing gum bases, per se.

    C.      THIS CLASS IS THE GENERIC CLASS FOR:

    1.      Flavoring compositions wherein at least one of the ingredients is
    not a carbohydrate type material.

    2.      Sweetening compositions wherein at least one of the ingredients is
    a noncarbohydrate type material.

    D.      GRIT AND OTHER MATERIALS which are consumed so as to aid in
    mastication of a food.

    E.      PROCESSES OF ADMINISTERING the products or composition of A-D above
    to an animal via the oral cavity.

    F.      PROCESSES OF ADMINISTERING a compound having the same function as
    the compositions or products of A-D above to an animal via the oral cavity.

    G.      PROCESSES OF TREATING live animals with a product, compound, or
    ferment that perfects the food made from said animal in combination with a
    butchering operation, or processes of removing a food product from a live
    animal followed by a treatment of the removed food, or a butchering
    operation followed by an operation that is proper for this class.

    H.      PROCESSES OF PREPARING treating or perfecting the products or
    compositions of A-D.

    I.      SINGLE USE INFUSION containers or receptacles which are specific
    for preparing a food and which are devoid of structure which specifically
    cooperates with a food apparatus.

    J.      COMPOSITIONS and methods of use solely disclosed or claimed for
    treating or perfecting a food material.

    II.     CLASSIFICATION LINES WITH OTHER CLASSES

    A.      Indent to class lines in sections of this class

    CLASS                           SECTION

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing;
    Fluid Treatment and     II-D-2
    Chemical Modifi-
    cation of Textiles and Fibers

    23,     Chemistry:      II-D-1
    Physical Processes

    29,     Metal Working   II-E-3

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor II-D-1
    Contact With Solids

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin   II-E-3
    Destroying

    47,     Plant Husbandry II-D-2

    53,     Package Making  II-D-1

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting,  II-E-3
    and Twining

    62,     Refrigeration   II-D-1

    73,     Measuring and Testing   II-D-1

    83,     Cutting         II-D-1

    84,     Music   II-E-2

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes      II-D-2

    100,    Presses II-D-1

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or       II-C
    Plastic

    119,    Animal Husbandry        II-D-2

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbo-       II-B
    hydrates

    131,    Tobacco II-C

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact     II-D-1
    With Solids

    137,    Fluid Handling  II-D-1

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits      II-E-3

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving      II-E-3

    141,    Fluent Material Handling        II-D-1
    With Receiver or Receiver
    Coacting Means

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and    II-D-2
    Miscellaneous Chemical
    Manufacture

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators       II-D-1

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber
    Liberation      II-E-3

    165,    Heat Exchange   II-D-2

    201,    Distillation:  Processes,       II-D-2
    Thermolytic

    203,    Distillation:  Processes,       II-D-2
    Separatory

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and      II-D-2
    Wave Energy

    206,    Special Receptacles or  II-E-1
    Packages

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and    II-D-1
    Assorting Solids

    210,    Liquid Purification or  II-D-2
    Separation

    219,    Electric Heating        II-D-2

    221,    Article Dispensing      II-D-1

                    II-E-1

    222,    Dispensing      II-D-1

                    II-E-1

    241,    Solid Material Comminuting      II-E-1
    or Disintegration

    252,    Compositions    II-C

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic
    Article Shaping or Treating:    II-D-2
    Processes

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games       II-E-2

    422,    Chemical Apparatus      II-D-1
    and Process Disinfecting,
    Deodorizing, Preserving,
    or Sterilizing

    423,    Chemistry of    II-A
    Inorganic Compounds

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and  II-C
    Body Treating Compositions

    427,    Coating Processes,      II-D-2

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular    II-D-2
    Biology and Microbiology

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys        II-E-2

    452,    Butchering      II-D-1

    473,    Amusement Devices:  Games       II-E-2

    504,    Plant Protecting and    II, C, 1, C,
    Regulating Compositions II, C, 1, F

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural     II, C;
    Rubbers II, F

    935,    Genetic Engineering:  Recom-
    binant DNA Technology, Hybrid
    or Fused Cell Technology, and
    Related Manipulations of Nucleic
    Acids   II, B







    B.      Lines with related compound classes

    (1)     A compound, per se, is classified in the compound class regardless
    of utility.  However, a patent having only process claims for making a
    protein and reciting the step of texturizing or other food perfecting step
    will be classified in Class 426.  Further a texturized protein is proper
    for Class 426.





    (a)     Where a patent claims a composition in nominal terminology only,
    e.g., "a composition comprising an edible amount of compound X", and there
    are no claims to a method to use, the original has been placed in the
    compound class.

    (b)     Where a patent contains at least one claim to a method of use, even
    if the method refers only to a particular ingredient as being edible, the
    patent has been placed herein as original, (except when another use is also
    claimed which is superior to Class 426).

    (c)     Where a patent claims a composition wherein at least two materials
    are recited or wherein proportions are recited, the original has been
    placed in Class 426, e.g., at least X%, etc.



    Class 127, Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, subclasses  29-33 for (1)
    Sugars, Starches, and Carbohydrates including those claimed as being
    edible, (2) Impure forms of the above which originates from a single
    source, e.g., maple sugar, etc. (3) mixtures solely composed of any of the
    above even if claimed as being edible, (4) any of the above subject matter
    combined with a preservative, e.g., anti-caking, etc.

    Class 426, takes the combination of an edible nonpreservative, in Class 127
    type material combined with a Class 127 type material or mixture of
    compound so as to provide an edible composition e.g., sugar syrup mixed
    with an essential oil, etc.

    Class 426:  Provides for a Class 260 compound in admixture with a
    preservative when the mixture thus formed is claimed or solely disclosed as
    having a Class 426 utility.

    Provides for an extract solely disclosed or claimed as having a Class 426
    utility and not provided for elsewhere.

    Provides for an essential oil composed of a plurality of constituents
    solely disclosed or claimed as having a Class 426 utility.

    Provides for compositions solely disclosed or claimed as having a Class 426
    utility which are admixtures containing at least one Class 260 compound.

    Provides for a mixed product of reacted and unreacted components which is
    solely disclosed or claimed as having a Class 426 utility and which is
    produced by chemically reacting a Class 260 natural or single source
    product, which reaction only effects a reaction on certain of the
    components of the natural or single source product.

    Provides for a mixture which is solely disclosed or claimed as having a
    Class 426 utility and which is produced by removing a component from a
    Class 260 natural or single source product.

    Provides for a product which is solely disclosed or claimed as having a
    Class 426 utility and which is produced by first treating so as to separate
    a Class 260 natural or single source product into components and then
    reblended.  Provides for plant extracts and essential oils, including those
    from a single source which usually are treated as compounds, which have
    traditionally been used as condiments, flavor enhancers, seasoning or
    flavoring; such as citrus oil, etc.

    423,    CHEMISTRY OF INORGANIC COMPOUNDS, for inorganic compounds and
    nonmetallic elements and to methods of preparation thereof, not elsewhere
    provided for. Class 423, provides for inorganic compounds or nonmetallic
    elements claimed as having a Class 426 utility, and see in particular
    subclass 265 therein for the line between Class 423 and Class 426 regarding
    a preservative agent in combination with a Class 423 material.  Classes
    532-570 provide for organic compounds and processes or preparing such
    compounds, not provided for elsewhere, including those claiming a 426
    utility.  Plant extracts and essential oils, as well as processes for
    preparing them, when claimed, disclosed or historically considered to have
    use as a food or flavoring agent are not provided for in the 532-570 Series
    of Classes; they are provided for in Class 426 even when derived from a
    single source.

    935,    Genetic Engineering: Recombinant DNA Technology, Hybrid or Fused
    Cell Technology, and Related Manipulations of Nucleic Acids, which provides
    a search collection for processes of altering the genetic structure of
    micro-organisms; genes and methods of modifying genes and their expression;
    vectors and methods of modifying  vectors; methods of introducing DNA into
    a cell; micro-organisms, per se, which have had their genetic sequence
    altered by recombinant DNA techniques or by cell fusion or by uptake of
    DNA; testing; separation techniques; apparatus; and methods of use of
    vectors or of the genetically engineered micro-organisms; methods of gene
    therapy or genetic modification of living organisms.

    C.      Lines with related composition classes.

    1.      The following general lines exist between Class 426 and the other
    composition classes or with classes containing patents wherein the claims
    recite a composition limited to an art use provided for in that class.

    (A)     A composition having no art use claimed, but disclosed as having a
    single art use is classified with the art use.

    (B)     Compositions which are disclosed as having a plurality of functions
    provided for in different main classes and only a single use, property or
    function is claimed, are placed in the composition providing for such
    claimed use, property or function and cross-referenced to other classes for
    disclosed uses, properties or functions when desirable.

    (C)     A list of superiority of composition classes appears in the main
    class definition of Class 252 Compositions (5) Note.  This note in Class
    252 explains classification of a generic composition with several disclosed
    uses.

    504,    Plant Protecting and Regulating Compositions

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products

    71,     Chemistry:  Fertilizers

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges

    508,    Solid Antifriction Devices, Materials Therefor, Lubricants and
    Separant Compositions for Moving Solid Surfaces, and Miscellaneous Mineral
    Oil Compositions

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions,

    148,    Metal Treatment

    252,    Compositions (Special uses or functions)

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers -- Part of the Class 520 Series,

    252,    Compositions, nonspecial uses or functions)

    (E)     It is the general rule of classification to classify a process of
    preparing a composition along with the composition.  In these circumstances
    where only a method of preparing a composition is claimed and there is no
    claim to a composition, the claims would be classified identically as if
    there were a composition claimed (note A, B, and C above).

    (F)     This superiority list is not intended as a complete list and will
    be expanded or added to as the relationship between classes containing
    compositions and the above listed classes is determined.

    504,    PLANT PROTECTING AND REGULATING COMPOSITIONS provides for
    compositions having a stimulating, inhibiting (herbicide) or regulating
    action on plant growth and methods of using such composition.  Class 426
    provides for treating plants which have been separated from their habitat
    so as to prepare or to perfect an edible, e.g., ripening of fruit, etc.
    Class 504 is superior to Class 426. (See hierarchy list 2C1C).

    106,    COMPOSITIONS:  COATING OR PLASTIC, provides for a coating,
    impregnating, or plastic composition not provided elsewhere.  Class 426
    provides for a coating, impregnating or plastic composition which is solely
    disclosed or claimed as being edible.

    131,    TOBACCO, for a tobacco product or to a tobacco substitute intended
    to be smoked or chewed.  Class 426 provides for chewing gum and for
    flavoring compositions which may be used in tobacco or in a tobacco
    substitute.

    512,    PERFUME COMPOSITIONS, subclasses 302+ for compositions in the form
    of a colloid, gel or emulsion; subclasses 186+ and 188+ for oxidative and
    reductive bleachants, respectively; subclasses 380+ for a preservative
    composition not elsewhere provided for, and for a preservative mixed with a
    compound claimed so broadly as not to afford a basis of classification;
    subclasses 1-27 for a perfume composition, per se.

    520,    Synthetic Resins, or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Class 523, subclasses 100+ for a nonedible composition
    containing a synthetic resin or natural rubber and which is intended to
    come into contact with food or tobacco or to processes of preparing said
    composition.

    Class 426 provides for bleaching compositions specific for food; for edible
    compositions in the form of a gel, colloid, or emulsion; for preservatives
    which are edible; and for flavoring compositions not elsewhere classifiable.

    424,    DRUG, BIO-AFFECTING AND BODY TREATING COMPOSITIONS, provides,

    (a)     for an edible composition designed  to be administered to an animal
    by a route  which is other than the oral cavity.

    (b)     for an  edible composition which  contain an additive  in excess of
    the normal amount that is usually required of that additive so as to
    maintain the normal metabolism of the animal, e.g., vitamin, amino acid,
    etc.

    (c)     for compositions   solely composed of  vitamins with or  without a
    carrier

    (d)     for a nonlaxative additive in combination with a  natural edible
    which  protects the ultimate  consumer of the edible from deleterious
    effects  which are the natural in sequence of  consuming the edible, e.g.,
    high  cholesterol eggs,  etc.

    (e)     for a Class 426 composition containing an animal growth regulator
    or other anabolic agent. For purposes of classification an animal growth
    regulator or anabolic agent is defined to include the following
    illustrative  causative effects:



    1.      increase feed efficiency or weight gain

    2.      enhance color of eggs yolks, combs, skin, or legs of chickens

    3.      enhance the hatchability of eggs

    4.      vary the fat-protein ratio of texture or flesh

    5.      chemically caponize an animal

    6.      for an adjuvant or carrier composition, per se, solely disclosed or
    claimed as perfecting a Class 426 composition, e.g., flavor, sweetener, etc.

    Class 426, provides:

    (a)     for a composition or mere method for treating an abnormal metabolic
    condition of an animal by varying the nutritional ingredients, fat,
    carbohydrate, or protein, so as to meet the special nutritional needs of
    the abnormal metabolic condition, e.g., diabetes, etc.

    (b)     for a mineral composition, per se,

    (c)     for a flavoring composition not elsewhere provided for which
    contains at least one noncarbohydrate type flavor ingredient

    (d)     for a Class 426 edible preserved by the use of a Class 424 biocide

    (e)     for a significant method of treating a Class 426 composition or
    product with a Class 424 biocide or preservative.

    (f)     for a Class 426 composition containing a live micro-organism so as
    to treat the intestinal tract of an animal, so that the Class 426 function
    will be perfected, e.g., bacillus acidophilus lacteal product, etc.

    D.      Lines with related process classes.

    The following general rules only apply in those situations where the
    process claims are (1) equally comprehensive, (2) control ultimate
    classification, (3) and no specific note in Class 426 or some other class
    is applicable.

    (1)     General Treating Classes

    The following general classification rules apply between Class 426 and the
    General Treating Classes.

    (a)     The process claims are silent as to the material treated,
    disclosure is specific to an edible, claims are limited to a sole
    separation performed in one of the General Treating Classes, classification
    is proper in the appropriate General Treating Class.

    (b)     The process claims are silent as to the material treated,
    disclosure is specific to an edible, the claims are limited to combined
    operation provided for specifically in Class 426 and in a General Treating
    Class, classification is proper in Class 426, except for general treating
    Classes 241, Solid or Disintegration Material Comminution, subclasses 6+
    and Class 62, Refrigeration, subclasses 68+.

    (c)     The process claims are drawn to treating edibles and nonedibles, or
    are limited to edibles, the claims are limited to operation performed in
    one of the General Treating Classes, classification is proper in the
    appropriate General Treating Class.

    (d)     The claims are classified in Class 426 when the claims are limited
    to an edible and the treating involves an operation that is provided for in
    Special Treating Class, e.g., molding, dyeing, etc.; or are operations that
    are proper subject matter for Class 426, per se, e.g., preparing a
    composition, etc.; or are operations that are provided for in a General
    Treating Class that are in combination with a Class 426 operation, e.g.,
    drying and subsequently cooking, etc.; or are combinations of two or more
    General Treating Classes, e.g., cleaning and then cutting, etc., or are
    combinational operations that are specifically provided for in one of the
    General Treating Classes and in Class 426 as well, e.g., freezing and
    packaging, drying with cooling, except for Class 241, Solid Material
    Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 6+ and Class 62, Refrigeration
    subclasses 68+ which specifically provide for edible materials.

    (e)     The process claims are silent as to the material treated;
    disclosure includes both edibles and non-edibles; claims are not limited to
    subject matter for a single General Treating Class, classification is
    proper in the appropriate General or Special Treating Class that provides
    for the over-all combination.

    (f)     The process claims are drawn to treating edibles and nonedibles;
    claims are not limited to subject matter for a single General Treating
    Class; classification is proper in the appropriate General or Special
    Treating Class that provides for the over-all combination.

    (g)     In the event that an appropriate General or Special Treating Class
    is not available to handle the question of classification, then
    classification will be based on alternatives such as superiority of certain
    compositions over others (see the notes relating herein to compositions and
    to methods of preparing thereof, Section C) or will be based on superiority
    of types of technology (see Dupax section 326).



    Examples of General Treating Classes are:

    Classes:

            34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor
                    Contact With Solids

            53,     Package Making

            62,     Refrigeration

            73,     Measuring and Testing

            83,     Cutting

            100     Presses

            134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact
                    With Solids

            137,    Fluid Handling

            141,    Fluent Material Handling,
                    With Receiver or Receiver
                    Coacting Means

            159,    Concentrating Evaporators

            209,    Classifying, Separating, and
                    Assorting Solids

            221,    Article Dispensing

            222,    Dispensing

            241,    Solid Material Comminution
                    or  Disintegration

            422,    Chemical Apparatus and
    Pro-                             cess Disinfecting,
    Deodoriz-                           ing, Preserving, or Sterilizing

            436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and
                    Immunological Testing.

            452,    Butchering




    Class 452, BUTCHERING provides for:

    (1)     Killing or dressing mammalian meat, fowl, and seafoods, (e.g.,
    separating flesh and bone, removing hair or feathers, shelling skinning,
    deheading, trussing).

    (2)     Stuffing and/or linking sausages

    (3)     Encasing or casing removal

    (4)     Cleaning intestines

    (5)     Shirring casing both natural and artificial

    (6)     Mechanical or manipulative or electrical tendering of meat



            Class 426, provides for:

    (1)     Any of the above operations when combined with an edible perfecting
    operation, e.g., cooking, canning, mixing with a diverse edible, etc.



    Class 436       Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, provides
    for processes of performing a test or measurement on an edible involving a
    chemical reaction.

    Class 426,      provides for processes of performing a test or measurement
    on an edible combined with an additional operation for treating, preparing,
    or perfecting an edible, with the exception of an additional operation
    which is solely involved in perfecting the test or measurement.

    Class 34,       DRYING AND GAS OR VAPOR CONTACT WITH SOLIDS, provides for
    drying processes or the contacting of a solid with either or both a gas or
    vapor.

    Class 426,      provides for processes of treating edible materials which
    are subsequent to a Class 34 operation, and all edible perfecting
    operations which are precedent to or concurrent with a Class 34 operation,
    except for operations involved in perfecting the Class 34 operation; Class
    426 also provides for processes limited by the claims or disclosure to the
    roasting or cooking of an edible.

    Class 53,       PACKAGE MAKING, for methods of packaging contents including
    the packaging of an edible material.

    Class 426,      provides for the packaging of an edible when said packaging
    operation is in combination with additional steps for preparing, treating,
    or preserving the edible, said steps occurring either precedent to,
    concurrent with or subsequent to the packaging operation.

    Class 62,       REFRIGERATION, for refrigerating processes even though
    limited to treating an edible, subclass 58 for the separation of ice
    crystals so as to dry an edible; subclass 60 for packaging a general
    commodity involving refrigeration; subclasses 66+ and in particular
    subclasses 69+ therein for introducing air while congealing a flowable
    material, e.g., ice cream, etc.  Class 62 also provides for a refrigerated
    package of general commodity.

    Class 426,      provides for processes of refrigeration food (1) combined
    with an additional food working operation or (2) wherein the refrigerating
    agent becomes a part of the food (e.g., sugar refrigerant also sweetens the
    food).  Class 426, also takes a refrigerated package limited to containing
    a food and a frozen article if it is a food or used with a food for
    purposes other than cooling as with ice.  Claims to an article which
    functions as a food and some other function is classified as an original in
    Class 426 and cross-reference to Class 62.

    Class 73,       MEASURING AND TESTING, is the generic class for processes
    for performing a test or measurement on an edible.

    Class 426,      provides for processes of performing a test or measurement
    on an edible combined with additional steps for treating, preparing, or
    perfecting an edible, e.g., comminuting, forming, adding ingredients, etc.,
    except those  operations that are solely involved in perfecting the testing
    or measuring.

    Class 83,       CUTTING, for a mere method of cutting or severing an
    edible; wherein the cut portions are all of the same type of material.

    Class 426,      provides for methods of cutting or severing an edible
    combined with other operations for treating, making, or prefecting an
    edible except for those operations that are solely involved in perfecting
    the cutting or severing operation, as well as methods for cutting or
    severing an edible plastic which results in a molding or shaping of the
    edible by a flowing and reshaping of the plastic edible.

    Class 100,      PRESSES, for methods of compacting by a mechanical
    interlock.

    Class 426,      for a process of compacting an edible or for a method of
    expressing an edible liquid, combined with an additional operation for
    treating, making, or prefecting an edible, with the exception of an
    additional operation that is solely involved in prefecting the compacting
    or compressing operation.

    Class 134,      CLEANING AND LIQUID CONTACT WITH SOLIDS, for cleaning and
    liquid contact with solids including the cleaning of an edible by removing
    naturally occurring material therefrom.

    Class 426,      provides for processes of treating a solid edible with
    liquid material which is not elsewhere provided for.  Class 426, provides
    for all Class 134 processes which are combined with other operations for
    treating, making, or prefecting an edible, except for those that are
    involved in prefecting the Class 134 operation.  Class 426 also
    specifically provides for the removal of a pesticidal residue.

    Class 137,      FLUID HANDLING, in particular subclass 125 for handling
    processes involving a carbonated potable beverage prior to dispensing,
    Class 426 provides for methods of handling a carbonated potable beverage
    combined with additional steps for treating, preparing, or prefecting the
    beverage and which combination is not provided for elsewhere.

    Class 141,      FLUENT MATERIAL HANDLING, WITH RECEIVER OR RECEIVER
    COACTING MEANS, for a process for filling a container with fluent edible.

    Class 426,      provides for the filling of a receiver with a fluent
    combined with a step of treating, preparing, or perfecting the edible, with
    the exception of those operations that are involved in perfecting the
    filling operation.

    Class 159,      CONCENTRATING EVAPORATORS, provides for processes peculiar
    to the concentration of solids in solution or suspension, even if solely
    disclosed or claimed as being edible, by the evaporation of the liquid
    containing the solid and by the recovery of the concentrate.  The
    concentrate may be a liquid and need not be carried to the point of
    crystallization or dryness.

    Class 426,      provides for processes limited to concentration by
    evaporation and the recovery of an edible material, wherein said
    concentrating step is combined with other operations for treating, making,
    perfecting an edible, except for those operations that are solely involved
    in perfecting the concentrating operation.

    Class 376,      INDUCED NUCLEAR REACTIONS:  PROCESSES, SYSTEMS, AND
    ELEMENTS, for processes of subjecting an edible to nuclear radiation by a
    nuclear reactor provided that more than just a mere reference to a nuclear
    reactor is claimed.  Class 176 also provides for processes of irradiating
    an edible for the purpose of research or in preparing a specimen.

    Class 426,      provides for a process of subjecting an edible to a
    nonstructurally defined radiation device.

    Class 209,      CLASSIFYING, SEPARATING, AND ASSORTING SOLIDS, provides for
    methods of separating solid materials including an edible and assorting or
    segregating them in grades or classes according to physical
    characteristics, e.g., separation of grain, vegetables, flour, etc.

    Class 426,      provides for all processes of class treating an edible by a
    Class 209 operation in combination with an operation not provided for
    elsewhere and for combinations of operations provided for in Class 209
    which are limited to operating on an edible.

    Class 221,      ARTICLE DISPENSING, provides for processes of dispensing
    which may involve dispensing of an edible material.

    Class 426,      provides for methods of dispensing edible materials
    combined with additional steps of treating, preparing, or perfecting the
    edible other than those operations which are solely involved in perfecting
    the dispensing operation.

    Class 222,      DISPENSING, provides for processes of dispensing which may
    involve dispensing an edible material.

    Class 426,      provides for processes of dispensing edible materials
    combined with additional steps for treating, preparing, or perfecting the
    edible other than those operations which are solely involved in perfecting
    the dispensing operation, and for operations of dispensing where the
    material is shaped by the outlet of a dispenser so that the material
    delivered has a desired shape.

    Class 241,      SOLID MATERIAL COMMINUTION OR DISINTEGRATION, provides (1)
    for comminuting of solid cereal materials or other seed or seed parts, per
    se; (2) for comminuting plus physical steps which facilitate the
    comminuting of the material of (1) above; or (3) for additional steps
    involving these materials combined with comminuting, such as

    A.      Separation or classification of the material into grades or sizes,
    including the recombining of separated ingredients of a single starting
    material.

    B.      Separation of fluids from the material involving no chemical change
    in the material, e.g., filtering, drying, etc.

    C.      Heating or cooling the material.

    D.      Separating of comminuting aids from the material, which operation
    may involve dissolution or a chemical reaction.

    Class 426,      provides for all processes in preparing, treating, or
    perfecting an edible seed or seed part not provided for in Class 241 and
    for all operations involving comminuting or disintegrating of any other
    edible material.

    Class 422,      CHEMICAL APPARATUS AND PROCESS DISINFECTING, DEODORIZING,
    PRESERVING, OR STERILIZING, provides for processes of performing a test or
    measurement on an edible involving chemical reaction.

    Class 426,      provides for processes of performing a test or measurement
    on an edible combined with an additional operation for treating, preparing,
    or perfecting an edible, with the exception of an additional operation
    which is solely involved in perfecting the test or measurement.

    (2)     Special Treating Classes

    The following classification rules apply between Class 426 and the Special
    Treating Classes.

    (a)     The process claims are silent as to the material treated;
    disclosure is specific to a food, classification is appropriate in Class
    426.

    (b)     Claims are limited to an edible; classification is proper in Class
    426.

    (c)     The process claims are silent as to the material treated; the
    disclosure refers to edible and nonedibles; the claims are limited to
    operations performed in one special treating class; classification is
    proper therein.

    (d)     There are individual process claims to treating an edible and a
    nonedible; the claims whether drawn to the edible or nonedible are limited
    to operations performed in one Special Treating Class; classification is
    proper therein.

    (e)     The process claims are silent as to the material treated;
    disclosure includes both edibles and nonedibles; claims are not limited to
    subject matter for a single Special Treating Class; classification is
    proper in the appropriate General or Special Treating Class that provides
    for the overall combination.

    (f)     Some classification as in (E) above when claims are presented which
    are drawn to edible and nonedible species, and claimed subject matter is
    not limited to a single Special Treating Class.

    (g)     See 1 of this same section for a further discussion into the
    classification of processes between classes.

    Example of some of the Special Treating Classes are:

    Class:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing:  Fluid  Treatment and Chemical Modification
    of Textiles and Fibers

    47,     Plant Husbandry

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes

    119,    Animal Husbandry

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture

    165,    Heat Exchange

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic

    203,    Distillation:  Processes  Separatory

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical or Wave Energy

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation

    219,    Electric Heating

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing

    427,    Coating Processes.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology



    Class 8,        BLEACHING AND DYEING; FLUID TREATMENT AND CHEMICAL
    MODIFICATION OF TEXTILES AND FIBERS, is the generic home for dyeing
    processes, and for compositions for dyeing.  Class 8 is also the generic
    home for processes, for treating hides, skins, feathers, and animal tissues
    with chemical and fluids and for the compositions used in such treatments.
    Class 8 is also the generic home for processes of bleaching.

    Class 426,      provides for dye composition, e.g., artificial coloring,
    etc., process of dyeing and dyed material all limited to an edible.  Class
    426 also provides for methods of treating animal material to prepare an
    edible therefrom, e.g., casing, etc. and to the compositions used in such a
    treating operation.  Class 426 also provides for a method of bleaching an
    edible, e.g., flour, etc., bleachant used in such a method, and to the
    bleached product.

    Class 47,       PLANT HUSBANDRY, provides for processes of treating the
    earth and its products which are not provided for elsewhere and provides
    specifically for processes of treating agricultural products which have not
    been separated from their natural habitat.

    Class 426       provides for processes of treating agricultural products
    which have been separated from their habitat so as to prepare or perfect an
    edible therefrom.

    Class 95,       GAS SEPARATION:  PROCESSES, for processes involving steps
    resulting in separation of a gas from a fluid mixture comprising (a) a gas
    and solid or liquid particles entrained therein, (b) a liquid and gas
    entrained therein, or (c) a plurality of gases.

    Class 426       provides for the separation of a gas from an edible
    material when the separation is part of an operation in perfecting the
    edible nature of the material worked on or wherein the gas separation is
    utilized in a subsequent edible perfecting operation.  Operations designed
    to merely recover a gas from an edible, wherein the gas itself has no
    edible value, are proper in Class 95.

    Class 119,      ANIMAL HUSBANDRY, for a method of treating an animal other
    than man to improve its well being including the feeding of an edible
    thereto and for inventions applicable to the propagation, rearing,
    training, e.g., flavored catnip balls, etc, and care of living animals.
    Class 119, also provides for treating an animal to increase its growth rate
    or produce a superior quality of meat if the method is more than the mere
    application or applications of a class 426 compound or composition.

    Class 426,      provides for a mere method of feeding an edible to an
    animal; provides for converting inedible forms of an animal into an edible
    condition; provides for the treatment of an animal followed by a
    slaughtering operation; provides for grit and processes of preparing grit
    useful for mastication; provides for methods of feeding an animal and
    utilizing the waste material of the animal as an edible material.

    Class 427,      COATING PROCESSES, is the generic class for methods of
    coating in general.  Class 426 takes coating or impregnating methods which
    prepare, treat, or preserve a material which is wholly or partially edible,
    e.g., fat coated, inedible base, etc.

    Class 156,      ADHESIVE BONDING AND MISCELLANEOUS CHEMICAL MANUFACTURE, is
    the general home for processes of manufacturing an article involving a
    chemical reaction and for processes of bonding parts together utilizing a
    nonmetallic cement.

    Class 426,      for claims or claimed disclosure limited to the bonding
    together of a material which is partly or wholly edible, e.g., sandwich,
    cookie, etc.

    Class 165,      HEAT EXCHANGE, provides for processes relating to the
    transfer of heat from one material to another.

    Class 426,      provides for processes of heat exchange limited by the
    disclosure or claims to heating an edible.

    Class 426,      provides for fermentation processes that are solely
    disclosed or claimed in preparing an edible, and for mixtures of enzymes or
    ferments solely disclosed or claimed as edible or used in the preparation
    of an edible.  Class 426 provides for compositions and processes of
    preparation relating to compositions which have the capacity to ferment and
    produce an edible, but which are claimed as being in an inactive state, and
    also provides for compositions which are undergoing a fermentation to
    produce an edible product.

    Class 201,      DISTILLATION:  PROCESSES, THERMOLYTIC, provides for the
    heating of a solid carbonaceous material to cause a compound or compounds
    in the material to undergo a chemical decomposition to form different
    chemical substances, at least some of which are volatile under the
    conditions employed and unvaporized solid carbonaceous material.

    Class 426,      provides for a class 201 type distillation operation
    wherein the claims or claimed disclosure is limited to preparing or
    perfecting a food.

    Class 203,      DISTILLATION: PROCESSES, SEPARATORY, provides for processes
    of merely recovering alcohol from a fermented beverage by distillation
    without the preparation of the beverage.

    Class 426,      provides for separatory distillation processes limited to
    edible treating or perfecting. Class 426 also provides for processes of
    removing alcohol to prepare a distilled beverage by a distillation process.

    Class 204,      CHEMISTRY: ELECTRICAL AND WAVE ENERGY, for processes in
    general for treating or preparing materials involving the application of
    electrical, radiant, or wave energy; and for processes of preparing
    vitamins involving electrical or wave energy.

    Class 426,      provides for processes limited by a claim or by the
    disclosure to treating or preparing an edible by the application thereto of
    electrical, radiant, or wave energy.

    Class 210,      LIQUID PURIFICATION OR SEPARATION, for a process of the
    type classified in Class 210 not limited by a claim or by the disclosure to
    an edible; and for methods of purifying or separating water.

    Class 426,      provides for a process of purifying or separating a liquid
    other than water when the liquid is claimed or solely disclosed as being
    edible.

    Class 219,      ELECTRIC HEATING, provides for processes of electrically
    heating a material.

    Class 426,      provides for processes of electrically heating a material
    claimed or solely disclosed as being edible.

    Class 264,      PLASTIC AND NONMETALLIC ARTICLE SHAPING OR TREATING:
    PROCESSES, is the generic class for processes for molding, casting or
    shaping of nonmetallic materials. Class 264 provides for example, in
    subclass 4 for encapsulating normally liquid materials, subclasses 41+ for
    pore forming in situ, subclasses 73+ for random variegated coloring during
    molding, subclasses 109+ for forming articles by uniting randomly
    associated articles, subclasses 176+ for shaping by extrusion and in
    particular subclass 202 for protein shaping, and subclasses 239+ for
    mechanical shaping or molding to form or reform a shaped article.

    Class 426,      provides for processes of the type classified in Class 264
    when said processes are solely claimed or solely disclosed for the
    treatment of an edible material.

    Class 422,      Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, is the generic class for process of
    disinfecting, preserving, deodorizing, or sterilizing.  See Class 426, for
    claims or claimed disclosure limited to disinfecting, preserving,
    deodorizing, or sterilizing an edible material and not elsewhere
    specifically provided for.

    E.      Lines With Product Classes

    1.  PACKAGE CLASSES

    206,    SPECIAL RECEPTACLES AND PACKAGES, for special receptacles adapted
    to contain an edible and for packaged products not elsewhere provided for.

            Class 426, provides for (1) a package which is solely disclosed or
    claimed as containing an edible therein, or (2) a nonedible package
    containing packaged material, therein, which material is additive in
    nature, said material being solely disclosed for treating or perfecting an
    edible and wherein the edible is not claimed in the package.

    221,    ARTICLE DISPENSING

    222,    DISPENSING, for processes and apparatus for dispensing not
    elsewhere classified.

            Classes 221 and 222 provide for Class 206 subject matter having a
    significant dispensing feature.

    84,     MUSIC

    2.      AMUSEMENT AND MUSIC CLASSES

    273,    AMUSEMENT DEVICES: GAMES

    446,    AMUSEMENT DEVICES:  TOYS

    The above classes provide for subject matter of their class not limited by
    the claims or the disclosure to the use of an edible ultimate consumption.

    Class 426, provides for Classes 84,  273 and 446, subject matter limited by
    the claims or disclosure to utilizing a Class 426 material which is
    ultimately intended to be consumed.  Questions of doubt as to whether the
    article prepared from or containing a Class 426 material is ultimately to
    be consumed are to be resolved by classification into Class 426.

    473,    AMUSEMENT DEVICES:  GAMES

    3.      GENERAL ARTICLE OR PRODUCT CLASSES

    29,     METAL WORKING, for metallic or free-metal-containing materials
    either in the form of a single layer or a stock material laminate including
    at least two layers or components of such metalliferous material next to
    each other.  Class 426 provides for stock material of the type in Class 29
    in combination with a Class 426 edible.



    43,     FISHING, TRAPPING, AND VERMIN DESTROYING, for imitation or
    artificial bait with an emitting substance, e.g., flavor, etc., and for the
    combination of an edible bait and an inedible bait holder, etc., so as to
    conserve the bait.

    Class 426, provides for processes of treating an edible with biocide not
    elsewhere provided for, and for processes of treating and preparing an
    edible bait and the resulting product.

    57,     TEXTILES:  SPINNING, TWISTING, AND TWINING, for textile strands,
    having structural limitations which are coated or impregnated and where the
    coating or impregnation took place prior to assembly thereof to form the
    product.  Class 426 provides for a textile strand which is surface coated
    or impregnated with a Class 426 edible.

    138,    PIPES AND TUBULAR CONDUITS, provides for casings which are open
    ended and are not disclosed as being edible.



    Class 426, provides for all edible casings and all casings which are
    derived from animal material. Questions of doubt as to whether the casing
    is edible or inedible are to be resolved by classification into Class 138.
    Class 426 also provides for all edible tubular products and for their
    method of preparation.

    139,    TEXTILES: WEAVING, for a single or plural layer stock material
    product which is coated or impregnated and where the sole disclosure is
    that coating or impregnation took place prior to weaving.  Class 426
    provides for a woven product which is coated or impregnated which is a
    Class 426 edible.



    162,    PAPER MAKING AND FIBER LIBERATION, provides for paper impregnated
    with a nonfiber additive, said additive having been incorporated into the
    paper prior to being made into a paper stock.  Class 426 provides for a
    paper made by a Class 162 operation wherein the nonfiber additive is a
    Class 426 edible.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, is the residual Class for
    a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet and for articles of manufacture for which no other classification
    exists.  Class 426 provides for edible articles and for nonstructural
    laminates wherein one or more of the layers contains a Class 426 edible and
    wherein the product is designed for a Class 426 purpose.

    III.    SEARCH NOTES

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     CARD PICTURE, OR SIGN EXHIBITING, for indicia carried by a
    receptacle.

    99,     FOODS AND BEVERAGES:  APPARATUS, for apparatus used in particular
    or perfecting a food, in particular subclasses 275+, for beverage making
    apparatus and subclasses 324+, for cooking apparatus.  Also, the above
    subclasses for apparatus provided therein (which performs a mechanical
    operation on the food other than containing the same, e.g., package and
    related matter, etc.) when combined with a food in name only.

    Class 426 provides for processes and methods of using the apparatus of
    Class 99 in a food preparing or treating operation.

    Class 426 also provides for an infusion bag or receptacle, per se, of the
    single use variety which is specific to preparing a food and which is
    devoid of structure and which specifically cooperates with a Class 99
    apparatus, and for infusors having a soluble charge.

    215,    BOTTLES AND JARS, for bottles and jars adapted to contain an edible.

    217,    WOODEN RECEPTACLES, for receptacles made of wood adapted to contain
    an edible.

    220,    RECEPTACLES, for metal receptacles adapted to contain an edible and
    for all receptacles not elsewhere classified.

    229,    ENVELOPES, WRAPPERS, AND PAPERBOARD BOXES, for paper receptacles
    adapted to contain an edible.

    232,    DEPOSIT AND COLLECTION RECEPTACLES, see subclasses 41+ therein for
    milk receptacles.

    383,    FLEXIBLE BAGS, appropriate subclasses for a flexible, nonedible bag
    of that class type.

    428,    STOCK MATERIAL AND MISCELLANEOUS ARTICLES, subclasses 35+ for an
    inedible food casing having a closed end.

    IV.     INDEX TO CLASS SEARCH NOTES IN CLASS DEFINITION SECTIONS AND
    SUBCLASSES OF THIS CLASS

    CLASS 426

    CLASS           SECTION SUBCLASS(ES)

    4,              77

    8,              250,253

    15,             77

    23,             231, 285, 453

    29,             117, 126

    30,             76, 85, 122

    34,             321, 384, 467

    40,     III     87

    43,             1

    47,             7

    53,             77,109,122,383,

                    392

    62,             109,384,393,474

    73,             87,88,111,231

    83,             76, 518

    84,             104

    93,             122

    95,     IID2    474

    99,     III     77, 107, 447

    100,            453

    101,            383

    106,            250

    113,            122

    116,            88

    119,            2

    126,            109

    127,            549, 658

    128,            77, 117

    134,            77, 286, 506

    138,            85, 140

    141,            109

    150,            77, 81

    156,            237, 383

    159,            474, 490

    162,            383

    203,            474

    204,            236, 239

    206,            115, 119

    210,            7, 77, 491

    215,    III     87,109,117,122,

                    127

    217,    III     109

    219,            107, 241

    220,    III     81,109,111, 118,                                126,
       127

    221,            115, 122

    222,            87, 115, 122

    225,            76, 518

    229,    III     77,81,122,127

    232,    III

    239,            77, 85

    241,            518

    248,            117

    249,            76

    252,            88, 89, 231,

    253,            541, 650

    259,            519

    260,            313, 386,                               417,427,

                    541,601,650,658

                    427

    261,            312

    264,            276,285,                                383,445,

                    453,512

    273,            104

    312,            111

    317,            236

    422,            77, 321

    424,            1,2,7, 72,77,321,

                    383,390,532,654

    427             126,302,383

    435,            7,8,9.13,48,60

    446,            85, 104

    452,            2, 513, 518

    473,            104

    935     II      B,D,2

    Design Class D-1

    V.      GLOSSARY

    The meaning to be given to the various "Art" terms appearing in this class,
    but which have not been included in the glossary below, is the same as that
    generally accepted or in common usage.

    The term additive denotes a substance or a mixture of substances used
    primarily for purposes other than its nutritive value and added to a food
    in relatively small amounts to (1) impart or improve desirable properties
    (2) or suppress undesirable properties, and (3) may become a part of the
    food or be transitory in nature. (Compare ingredient below which in some
    instance may be an additive).

    The term basic-ingredient is the principal constituent (except added water)
    of a composition considered to be the fundamental part and by which the
    composition is (usually) identified. Usually the basic ingredient
    constitutes the major portion of the composition, e.g., chocolate milk-milk
    is the basic ingredient.

    NOTE.  In those instances wherein a plurality of percentages of the
    ingredients are given that ingredient which constitutes 50  of the total
    composition (excluding added water) is considered to be the basic
    ingredient.  The 50% may be determined by summing like ingredients, e.g.,
    lactose, whey and butter fat are all lacteal derived.

    The term carbohydrate denotes a compound, the monomeric units of which
    contain at least five carbon atoms, and their reaction products wherein the
    carbon skeleton of carbohydrate unit is not destroyed. Alcohols and acids
    corresponding to carbohydrates, such as, sorbitol ascorbic acid, or
    mannonic acid are not considered as being carbohydrates.

    The term dry denotes products which are as a complete product free or
    relatively free from water and under normal ambient conditions involve such
    characteristics, but not necessarily each and every one, as free flowing,
    dry to the touch, nontacky or sticky, nonadhesive, granular, powder,
    tablet, flake, flour, meal, particulate, pellet, finely divided, etc.

    The term ferment denotes any enzyme or any living organism that is capable
    of causing or modifying a fermentation.

    The term general treating class denotes a class that includes the treatment
    of an edible, per se.

    The term ingredient denotes a component part (usually a major one) of
    mixture that goes to make a food.  (Compare additive above which in some
    instance may be an ingredient).

    The term isolated triglyceridic fat or oil  denotes a fat or oil (as
    defined below) that is free of any of the plant or animal tissue from which
    it is derived.

    The term package denotes a mercantile combination of an edible material
    fully encased, encompassed, or completely surrounded by a solid material.

    The term special treating class denotes a class that does not include the
    treatment of an edible, per se.

    The term tissue denotes a material containing a certain amount of the
    original animal or plant as against an extract which is considered to be
    devoid of original cellular structure.  Included within the term are
    materials which are chopped, cut, comminuted, pulverized, milled, slice,
    etc.

    The term triglyceridic fat or oil denotes the esters of glycerol and a
    higher fatty acid (i.e., a monocarboxylic acid containing an unbroken chain
    of at least 7 carbon atoms bonded to a carbonyl group) wherein the three
    available hydroxyl functions of the glycerol are esterified by a same or
    different fatty monocarboxylic acid.  Triglycerides are the chief
    constituents of the naturally occurring fats and oils.

    VI.     CLASSIFICATION GUIDELINES FOR THIS CLASS

    (A)     Patents have been placed herein on the general rule of placing the
    patent as an original in the first appearing subclass of this class that
    provides for the claimed subject matter.

    (B)     This class regards all ingredients or additives that are involved
    in preparing an edible as being proper herein.

    Therefor each ingredient or additive used in food preparation, whether
    naturally occurring as a product of nature or synthetically produced, that
    becomes a part of an edible composition, or treats an edible composition or
    is either disclosed or claimed as being edible, is to be regarded as being
    edible.

    Ingredient or additive does not include packaging materials, containers,
    paper products, etc. or any other material which would not reasonably be
    regarded as being edible.  Further, water in any of its physical forms,
    carbon dioxide, nitrogen, the inert gases or mixtures composed thereof are
    not regarded as an additive or ingredient, except, wherein the same is
    specifically provided for by subclass title or definitions thereof, e.g.,
    ice coated, etc.

    VII.    SUBCLASS DEFINITIONS


CLS 426/1
TXT Subject matter under the class definition involving a food or the
    preparation of a food, adapted or designed by either the ingredients
    comprising the product, or by some other means to attract an animal, either
    for the purpose of feeding the animal or for the purpose of capturing the
    animal so that it can be used as a food.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, for a fishlore or
    trapping material which is more than a food.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, for baits or
    attractants which are not considered as animal foods and which are
    disclosed as having utility as an attractant or lure operating through one
    of the senses, usually smell or taste.


CLS 426/2
TXT Processes under the class definition involving the overt treatment of a
    live animal.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of methods within this subclass are mere methods of
    feeding animals, killing an animal followed by a food working operation,
    injecting animals with a material which modifies the meat characteristic of
    the animal followed by a slaughtering operation, milking cows followed by a
    treatment of the milk.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56+,    for processes of adding a proteolytic enzyme to a meat product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 212 for a crustacean-feeding method,
    subclass 230 for a fish-feeding method, and subclass 242 for a
    mollusk-feeding method.


    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, for
    compositions for curing or preventing a disease in an animal and for a
    process of using such a composition, and for a composition for maintaining,
    increasing, decreasing, limiting or destroying a physiologic body function
    and to a method of using such a composition.

    452,    Butchering, appropriate subclasses for butchering operations in
    general.


CLS 426/3
TXT Products under the class definition which are intended to be chewed and not
    ingested, or to methods of preparation of such products.

    (1)     Note.  Although a substantial mass of the original material is
    usually ingested by solvating with the saliva of the mouth during chewing,
    a substantial amount of the original mass is nonsoluble and is usually
    ejected from the mouth for disposal rather than being swallowed.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein are the nonsweetened or nonflavored chewing
    bases, per se.


CLS 426/4
TXT Subject matter under subclass 3 wherein the chewing material is of a type
    which possesses a low-adhesive or low tacky quality.

    (1)     Note.  The term low-adhesion or tackiness applies to materials
    within the mouth as well as to materials that possess these same qualities
    external to the mouth.


CLS 426/5
TXT Subject matter under subclass 3 which is either packaged or which possesses
    a structural or identifiable shape retaining form.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are coated or impregnated materials, bonded
    or laminated layers, and products which have a recognizable structure,
    e.g., tube, ring, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclass 87.07 for
    chewing gum wrapper, per se.


CLS 426/6
TXT Subject matter under subclass 3 therein at least one of the ingredients of
    the chewing base is a solid synthetic polymer which has been prepared
    through the polymerization of an ethylenic group of an unsaturated monomer.


CLS 426/7
TXT Processes under the class definition wherein an enzyme is employed
    bio-chemically to prepare a food or to perfect a food.

    (1)     Note.  The enzyme can be initially present, such as in autolysis or
    can be added.

    (2)     Note.  The enzyme can be in any active state, e.g., as in a
    micro-organism or plant material.

    (3)     Note.  Classification herein is on the basis of the first appearing
    material that is subjected to a fermentation reaction and is bio-chemically
    affected and not on the basis of the first appearing material, per se.  For
    instance, the fermentation of a milk product and subsequent addition
    thereto of a cereal product is classifiable in the milk area which is lower
    down in the schedule hierarchy than is the cereal area.  In the event that
    it is uncertain whether a fermentation reaction is occurring on a
    particular substrate classification in the first appearing area would be
    proper.

    (4)     Note.  Classification herein is based on the process of fermenting
    a particular food substrate to result in a desired food product rather than
    on the basis of culturing a micro-organism or in the preparation of active
    enzyme materials which are to be used in later food fermenting operations.

    (5)     Note.  Classification is proper herein if the claims are uncertain
    as to whether a fermentation reaction is occurring, but the specification
    discloses a fermentation reaction occurring within the bounds of the
    claimed process limitations.  An example of such a situation is in the
    failure of many patent claims to recite the use of yeast in dough working
    operation, while the disclosure recites yeast as being an inherent part of
    the dough manufacturing operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, for processes or apparatus for cultivating or
    culturing mushrooms, for sprouting or germinating seeds for planting or
    testing the sprouted or germinating power of seeds; articles or
    compositions that include seeds and either bacteria or other ferments, and
    processes of making such articles or compositions; processes of cultivating
    or culturing seed plants or other nonfungal plants that include
    fermentation.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 2+ for processes of
    treating impure liquids by a living organism, e.g., bacteriological
    digestion of sewage, etc.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, particularly
    subclasses 50, 93.1+ and 94 for a drug, bio-affecting or body treating
    composition containing an active enzyme, bacteria or other ferment.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, appropriate
    subclass, for processes that include food fermentation but are not claimed
    as peculiar thereto are in this class (435).  Culturing or propagating
    methods, per se, even though peculiar to food micro-organisms are also in
    this class (435).  Single enzyme systems are in class (435) while mixed
    organisms and mixed enzyme systems peculiar to food are in Class 426.


CLS 426/8
TXT Subject matter under subclass 7 which involves a food material and
    packaging the material for the overt purpose of carrying out a bio-chemical
    change of the food in the package or in preventing a bio-chemical change in
    the food while in the package.

    (1)     Note.  Consumption of oxygen in a packaged food by a living
    organism is included in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes alcoholic fermentation in a
    mercantile container such as in the preparation of sparkling wines.

    (3)     Note.  The package itself must be of the mercantile type.
    Fermentation in closed containers wherein the product is improved and then
    repacked into commercial packages is not the type of fermentation reaction
    intended to be placed herein.  See subclasses 392+ for a discussion of
    packaging and the scope of what is considered to be packaging.

    (4)     Note.  To be placed herein there must be an intent to have
    fermentation in the package.  However, the operative may include opening of
    the package subsequent to fermentation with the removal of unwanted
    contents and subsequent closure as well as sealing of foods in closed
    containers which have vent holes which must be closed after the
    fermentation reaction in order to complete a final mercantile package
    structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for the addition of a chill-proofing enzyme to an alcoholic
    beverage with subsequent bottling of the beverage after a fermentation
    reaction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 243+ for
    packages containing living fungi.


CLS 426/9
TXT Subject matter under subclass 7 involving the fermentation of a material in
    the presence of an added functional biocide or biostat.


CLS 426/10
TXT Processes under subclass 7 involving fermentation employing an enzyme
    capable of oxidizing glucose to gluconic acid and known generically as
    glucose oxidase.

    (1)     Note.  Deoxygenating of a glucose containing product employing a
    live micro-organism rather than an enzyme composition is to be found
    elsewhere in this class depending on the substrate employed.


CLS 426/11
TXT Processes under subclass 7 involving the fermentation of a substrate to
    yield an ethyl alcohol containing beverage or the fermentative treatment of
    a prepared alcoholic beverage wherein the final product is consumable in
    beverage form and still contains a portion of ethyl alcohol.

    (1)     Note.  Unless otherwise noted a dealcoholized substrate will be
    presumed to be partially devoid of its original alcohol content rather than
    being completely devoid of alcohol and will be proper herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 93,
    98-105, for the fermentation of carbohydrates.


CLS 426/12
TXT Processes under subclass 11 involving the addition of an enzyme or enzyme
    active material to an alcohol containing beverage to stabilize, purify, or
    prevent turbidity formation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for the addition of an enzyme or a bio-active material to a malt
    wort followed by a subsequent alcoholic fermentation or to a recited
    ongoing alcoholic producing fermentation.


CLS 426/13
TXT Processes under subclass 11 involving the fermentation of a substrate by
    two or more different enzymes from different sources, or two or more
    different micro-organisms functioning either simultaneously or sequentially.

    (1)     Note.  Malting followed by an alcoholic fermentation is considered
    proper subject matter for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     for the fermentation of a cereal product with malt as in the
    preparation of a malt wort.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 93 for
    processes that include diastatic mashing by malt or other means.


CLS 426/14
TXT Processes under subclass 11 involving an alcoholic fermentation followed by
    the removal of the alcohol, either by distillation or otherwise; or the
    fermentative treatment of a reduced alcohol or dealcoholized containing
    stock wherein the final product still contains some alcohol.

    (1)     Note.  Unless otherwise noted a dealcoholized substrate will be
    presumed to be partially devoid of its original alcohol content rather than
    being completely devoid of alcohol.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for a process of reducing alcohol concentration by converting the
    alcohol containing stock into vinegar utilizing an enzyme or bio-active
    containing material.

    493+,   for processes of distilling an alcoholic containing stock.


CLS 426/15
TXT Processes under subclass 11 wherein the substrate to be fermented is a
    fruit or fruit derived material.

    (1)     Note.  Wine, per se, will be considered as being derived from a
    fruit material.


CLS 426/16
TXT Processes under subclass 11 involving the use of malt wort as the substrate.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein but not limited as examples of products
    which are produced by malt wort fermentation are beer, lager, ale, stout
    and porter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for preparing a malt wort followed by an alcoholic fermentation.

    28+,    for the preparation of a beverage, beverage mash or beverage wort.

    477,    for methods of carbonating a fermented liquid food material.


CLS 426/17
TXT Process under subclass 7 involving the fermentative production of vinegar.

    (1)     Note.  Most of the patents herein utilize an alcohol containing
    substrate as the starting material.


CLS 426/18
TXT Processes under subclass 7 wherein the substrate contains some tissue
    derived from a farinaceous cereal or cereal product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for the fermentation of starches and carbohydrates, per se, derived
    from cereal type plant materials.


CLS 426/19
TXT Processes under subclass 18 which involves the preparation or treatment of
    a hydrated wheat flour system containing the yeast, i.e., Saccharomyces
    cerevesiae, wherein the preparation of treatment involves the combining of
    deverse food materials or the use of a permanent additive.

    (1)     Note.  Such unqualified terms as to the use of yeast type as yeast,
    per se,  baker's yeast, leaven, or unqualified processing steps as
    fermenting, leavening, proofing, proving, expansion, raising, adding a
    starter, are sufficient to bring a document within this or the indented
    subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The inclusion of an active enzyme in a process claim is
    regarded as being a fermentation reaction even if the claim fails to recite
    that a fermentation reaction is actually taking place.

    (3)     Note.  Flour unqualified is interpreted as wheat flour.


CLS 426/20
TXT Processes under subclass 19 wherein an active enzyme or active enzyme
    containing or producing material or micro-organism is added to a system to
    which a fermenting yeast has been added or will be added.


CLS 426/21
TXT Processes under subclass 19 wherein the active hydrated wheat flour system
    contains a different plant tissue material in addition to wheat.


CLS 426/22
TXT Processes under subclass 19 which involve either the mixing with or
    treatment of a hydrated wheat flour system with a peroxide containing
    compound, prior to or concurrent with, the yeast fermentation step.


CLS 426/23
TXT Processes under subclass 19 which involve the addition to or treatment of a
    hydrated dough system with an amino acid or compound containing two or more
    amino acids joined together by a peptide linkage, prior to or concurrent
    with, the yeast fermentation step, e.g., proteins, protein hydrolyzates,
    etc.

    (1)     Note.  Processes which employ protein containing material e.g.,
    meat, eggs, etc., in a nonseparated state are excluded herefrom and will be
    found below in the schedule.


CLS 426/24
TXT Processes under subclass 19 which involve the addition to and or treatment
    of a hydrated wheat flour formulation, prior to or concurrent with, the
    yeast fermentation step, with an organic ester compound other than a
    triglyceride and which is comparable in structure with a compound formed by
    replacing the hydroxyl group of an alcohol or phenol by an acid radical
    with the elimination of water and wherein the acid radical has the general
    formula

                             R--O.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are phosphatides and compositions containing
    sames.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331+,   for processes of preventing staling of nonyeast bread or nonyeast
    dough products utilizing carboxylic acid esters.


CLS 426/25
TXT Processes under subclass 19 which involve the addition to and or treatment
    of a hydrated wheat flour system with a carboxylic acid (R-COOH) or a salt
    thereof, prior to or concurrent with, the yeast fermentation step.

    (1)     Note.  Vinegar is regarded for purposes herein as being an organic
    acid.


CLS 426/26
TXT Processes under subclass 19 which involve the addition to or treatment of a
    hydrated wheat flour with an inorganic compound, prior to or concurrent
    with, the yeast fermentation step.

    (1)     Note.  Salt (Nacl) is not regarded as being an inorganic compound
    for this subclass and will be found in subclass 19.


CLS 426/27
TXT Processes under subclass 18 involving the nonadditive treatment of a
    hydrated flour system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    496+,   for processes of treating or preparing dough products wherein a
    fermentation process is not positively recited.


CLS 426/28
TXT Processes under subclass 18 involving the fermentation of a malted cereal,
    or a cereal utilizing malt as the active enzyme source, or the treatment of
    a cereal utilizing an amylolytic or diastatic type enzyme.

    (1)     Note.  Malting is the conversion of starches into simpler products
    such as dextrin and maltose.


CLS 426/29
TXT Processes under subclass 28 wherein the resulting fermented product is a
    beverage, per se, a beverage mash, or beverage wort.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for the preparation of a malt wort followed by an alocholic
    fermentation step.

    16,     for the alcohol fermentation of a malt wort.


CLS 426/30
TXT Processes under subclass 29 involving the fermentation of a substrate in
    two or more prescribed zones.

    (1)     Note.  The intentional fermentation of a material in a continuous
    manner, that is, into, through and out of a fermenting zone is found here.


CLS 426/31
TXT Processes under subclass 18 wherein the material fermented contains an
    isolated or separated cereal bran or husk, or is a cereal residue, e.g.,
    distillers residue, etc.


CLS 426/32
TXT Processes under subclass 7 wherein the substrate fermented is egg white,
    per se, gelatin, collagen, or animal blood or blood derived material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for the fermentative treatment of a fish derived protein.

    34+,    for the fermentative treatment of protein derived from a lacteal
    source.

    44,     for the fermentative treatment of a protein derived from a bean,
    seed or nut, and in particular subclass 46 for soy protein.

    47,     for the fermentative treatment of a whole egg or yolk.

    55,     for the fermentative treatment of a protein derived from a mammal
    or fowl source.


CLS 426/33
TXT Processes under subclass 7 wherein the fermentative substrate contains an
    isolated triglyceride other than those which are derived from a lacteal
    source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34+,    for fermentation reactions involving lacteal derived triglyceridic
    material.


CLS 426/34
TXT Processes under subclass 7 wherein the substrate fermented is milk or a
    lacteal derived source.


CLS 426/35
TXT Processes under subclass 34 involving the use of an enzyme which acts on
    the fats contained in lacteal derived materials and which will cleave a fat
    to a fatty acid residue.

    (1)     Note.  The type of enzyme materials which are proper herein are
    usually characterized as being, lipolytic, lipase type or fat breakdown
    enzyme.


CLS 426/36
TXT Processes under subclass 34 involving the preparation or treatment of a
    cheese curd, or cheese.

    (1)     Note.  Processes wherein curd formation occurs as an intermediate
    step and is subsequently destroyed, or where curd is treated so that the
    final product contains substantially no curd formation, are excluded
    herefrom and will be found under subclasses 34+ on some other basis.


CLS 426/37
TXT Processes under subclass 36 involving a bio-chemical change initiated by a
    live yeast or fungi.


CLS 426/38
TXT Processes under subclass 36 which involve the fermentation of a formed
    cheese or cheese curd by an added active bio-chemical agent.

    (1)     Note.  Processes which involve curing or aging of a cheese or
    cheese by ferments which are in the cheese or curd or which have been added
    prior to cheese curdling are not proper herein and will be found under
    subclasses 36+ on some other basis.


CLS 426/39
TXT Processes under 36 wherein an acid or acidic material separate from that
    which may be produced by fermentation is added prior to the onset of
    fermentation and wherein the acid or acidic material is derived from other
    than a lacteal source.


CLS 426/40
TXT Processes under subclass 36 which involve a physical treatment of the
    starting milk or the addition of a material to the milk prior to the onset
    of fermentation.

    (1)     Note.  Milk for purposes of this subclass includes whole milk, skim
    milk and buttermilk.


CLS 426/41
TXT Processes under subclass 34 wherein whey (i.e., the remainder of milk after
    the fat and casein have been removed) is subjected to a fermentation
    reaction.


CLS 426/42
TXT Processes under subclass 34 involving the fermentation of milk or a milk
    product with an added enzyme, enzyme producing material, or active
    micro-organism.


CLS 426/43
TXT Processes under subclass 42 wherein the added active micro-organism is a
    bacteria culture.


CLS 426/44
TXT Processes under subclass 7 involving the fermentation of a noncereal seed,
    bean or nut, or of a material derived therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18+,    for fermentation of a cereal product.

    48,     for the fermentation of starches and carbohydrates, per se, derived
    from seeds, beans or nuts.


CLS 426/45
TXT Processes under subclass 44 wherein a coffee or cocoa bean, or product
    derived therefrom, is subjected to a fermentation reaction, e.g., coffee
    extract, cocoa shells, etc.


CLS 426/46
TXT Processes under subclass 44 wherein the substrate is a legume or is derived
    therefrom, e.g., isolated soy protein, etc.


CLS 426/47
TXT Processes under subclass 7 involving the fermentation of whole eggs in or
    out of the shell or egg yolk, per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for the treatment of egg products with glucose oxidase.

    32,     for the treatment of egg white or egg albumen.


CLS 426/48
TXT Processes under subclass 7 involving the fermentation of an isolated or
    separated carbohydrate material.

    (1)     Note.  Included within the term isolated or separated carbohydrate
    and not limited to the specific examples recited are molasses, honey,
    starch, sugar beet material, maple syrup, sucrose mix syrup, and cellulose.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 93,
    98-105 for processes of fermenting, utilizing carbohydrates as substrate
    materials wherein the product produced is not limited to a food use.


CLS 426/49
TXT Processes under subclass 7 wherein the material subjected to a fermentation
    process is a plant or plant derived material.


CLS 426/50
TXT Processes under subclass 49 wherein the fermentation is effected by a
    pectolytic enzyme, e.g., pectase, pectinase, etc.

    (1)     Note.  The enzyme may be contained in the natural plant material or
    may be added to the plant material.


CLS 426/51
TXT Processes under subclass 49 wherein a fermentation reaction is (1) part of
    a total process which produces a fruit or vegetable juice or wherein a
    fruit or vegetable juice is subjected to a fermentation reaction and the
    final product is a fruit or vegetable juice; or (2) wherein the material
    subjected to fermentation is an aqueous solution of a plant material.

    (1)     Note.  Tea or a tea extract is excluded from this subclass and will
    be found under subclasses 49+ on some other basis.

    (2)     Note.  The final product may be in dry form reconstitutable by the
    addition of water.

    (3)     Note.  Purees are included herein.


CLS 426/52
TXT Processes under subclass 49 which involve the addition to plant materials
    of enzymes, enzyme containing or producing materials, or micro-organism.

    (1)     Note.  Processes involving separating a plant material into two or
    more fractions and culturing one of the fractions without the addition of
    extraneous enzymatic or enzyme containing or producing material followed by
    a remixing of the cultured product with one or more of the original
    fractions is not considered to be an addition within the confines of this
    subclass and will be found under subclasses 49+ on some other basis.


CLS 426/53
TXT Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein the food produced is specifically
    designed to feed animals other than human.


CLS 426/54
TXT Processes under subclass 49 wherein the fermentation of a plant product
    results in a food for the specific purpose to feed animals other than human.


CLS 426/55
TXT Processes under subclass 7 where the substrate involved in the fermentation
    process is derived from a mammal or fowl.

    (1)     Note.  An aging or tendering process for meat involving no added
    enzymes as in electrolysis is here.


CLS 426/56
TXT Processes under subclass 55 where fermentation is effected by an added
    enzyme, enzyme producing material, or micro-organism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for methods of treating a live animal with a ferment material.


CLS 426/57
TXT Processes under subclass 56 wherein the substrate treated is an animal
    derived casing.

    (1)     Note.  Processes wherein a meat or fowl product is subjected to
    fermentation and wherein the product is manufactured into a casing are
    excluded herefrom and will be found under subclasses 55+ on some other
    basis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for the fermentative treatment of collagen.


CLS 426/58
TXT Processes under subclass 56 wherein the enzyme is injected or otherwise
    forcefully introduced into an interior portion of a mammal or fowl product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for methods involving the injection of enzymes into live animals.

    281,    for additive processes to meat by injection or by external pressure.



CLS 426/59
TXT Processes under subclass 56 wherein the fermentation is effected on a
    product which is in a comminuted, ground, or in a finely divided state.


CLS 426/60
TXT Processes under subclass 7 wherein a yeast or mold is subjected to a
    fermentation reaction (e.g., propagation) and the final resulting product
    of the fermentation is to be used as a food, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, particularly
    subclasses 254.1+ for methods of propagating yeast or molds even though the
    yeast or mold is to be used in a later unclaimed food producing operation.


CLS 426/61
TXT Subject matter under the class definition wherein (A) the composition
    contains a ferment material either being in an activated condition as in a
    hydrated yeast flour system or (B) the composition contains an enzyme
    material in a dormant state which can be activated so that the ferment
    contained therein will function in a bio-chemical manner or (C)
    compositions which contain added live micro-organisms, generally, for the
    purpose of augmenting the digestive action of the intestinal tract, e.g.,
    Bacillus acidophilus milk, etc., or (D) processes of preparing or treating
    the compositions noted in Parts, A, B or C.

    (1)     Note.  Natural foods which contain enzymes but wherein the
    disclosure of the patent is silent as to the activation of the enzymes or
    the functioning of the enzyme therein for their bio-chemical activity are
    not proper herein and will be found in the product area of this class.

    (2)     Note.  Unless the patent disclosure indicates to the contrary that
    an added material to a food is not for the purpose of affecting a
    fermentation, material such as malt, malt extract, yeast type material,
    baker's yeast, leaven, a named enzyme material, or a live micro-organism,
    will be regarded as preparing a composition proper for this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  Unless the patent disclosure indicates to the contrary,
    terms such as wort, malt wort, malt liquor, malt beverage, cheese, bread,
    alcohol containing beverage and other food prepared through a fermentation
    reaction will be regarded as foods having no further active ferment
    material capable of carrying out an additional fermentation reaction and
    will be classified below on some other basis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for the processes which involve the treatment of live animals.

    7+,     for processes of preparing foods involving a fermentation step.

    531+,   for products which may contain a ferment in a permanently inactive
    state and in particular subclasses 549+ for a batter or dough product, 582
    for a cheese product, and 592 for an alcohol containing beverage.



CLS 426/62
TXT Subject matter under subclass 61 containing a composition which has as an
    ingredient, a yeast, or to methods of preparing such a composition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, particularly
    subclasses 254.1+ for methods of propagating yeast or molds even though the
    yeast or mold is to be used in a later unclaimed food producing operation.


CLS 426/63
TXT Subject matter under subclass 61 containing a composition which has as an
    ingredient an enzyme which is active on proteinaceous material.

    (1)     Note.  Included within the type of enzyme material proper herein is
    papin, ficin, bromelin, trypsin, pepsin, rennin, etc.


CLS 426/64
TXT Subject matter under subclass 61 containing a composition which has as an
    ingredient an enzyme material which is regarded as being diastatic, i.e.,
    converts starches to simpler products such as dextrins and maltose.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are malt and malt containing extracts.


CLS 426/66
TXT Subject matter under the definition involving (1) potable water in any of
    its physical forms in admixture with a material which is intended to
    permanently remain with the potable water and which perfects the water for
    an intended food use, and wherein the user still considers the admixture as
    being water, or (2) canned potable water and (3) methods of preparing the
    products of (1) and (2) above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass requires the final desired product to be a
    potable water composition.  Methods of preparing a potable water
    composition and then utilizing same are classified depending on the
    subsequent operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, for methods of purifying water.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclass 580.1 for potable water,
    per se.


CLS 426/67
TXT Subject matter under subclass 66 wherein the potable water is in admixture
    with a gas, e.g., carbon dioxide, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 437+ for carbonic
    acid, per se.


CLS 426/68
TXT Subject matter under class definition drawn to processes of surface coating
    a food with an ice glaze and to the product of such a process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89+,    for a food with a dissimilar edible material.

    302+,   for methods of coating a solid food with a liquid.


CLS 426/69
TXT Subject matter under the class definition comprising nitrogen containing
    compositions having an available source of nitrogen other than in a
    naturally occurring food form (i.e., protein), which nitrogen is available
    upon ingestion by an animal, which is usually a ruminant, and to the method
    of preparing such a composition.

    (1)     Note.  Compositions which contain nitrogen containing compounds
    which are not disclosed as being for nutritional purposes, e.g.,
    preservation, coloring, etc., are not proper in this subclass will be
    classified on some other basis.


CLS 426/71
TXT Subject matter under class definition formulated to aid the microflora in
    the intestinal tract of a human or animal.

    (1)     Note.  The material may either be food specifically designed for
    the microflora, or it may be food to enhance the effect of microflora.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61+,    for compositions containing a micro-organism intended for the
    intestinal tract of an animal.


CLS 426/72
TXT Subject matter under class definition wherein the product contains an added
    vitamin or derivative and wherein said vitamin or vitamin derivative is not
    a part of a naturally occurring food.

    (1)     Note.  Vitamins in the form of extracts are not considered as being
    part of a naturally occurring food.

    (2)     Note.  The vitamins or vitamin derivatives herein are those that
    are normally added to foods to fortify the foods and are normally added in
    a concentrated state.  Included to be excluded herefrom are whole foods
    which are claimed as having a vitamin content but which content is
    naturally occurring.  Included and proper within this subclass are the
    normally named vitamins as well as the fish liver oils which are known to
    contain high vitamin values.  Not included herein is the blending of
    different foods to increase or modify the vitamin contents therein.

    (3)     Note.  Vitamin derivatives are products that have essentially the
    same chemical structure and the same physiological effect as the natural
    vitamins.

    (4)     Note.  Vitamins which are added to foods for some other purpose
    than for supplementing or fortifying the food, will be found elsewhere in
    the schedule.  In particular see subclass 182 for a food in combination
    with vitamin C used as an anti-oxidant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, for vitamin
    compositions, per se.


CLS 426/73
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the vitamin is vitamin A and/or
    vitamin D or derivatives thereof.


CLS 426/74
TXT Product under class definition wherein a food contains two or more
    different added elements or inorganic compounds so that the food is
    nutritionally supplemented or fortified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    615,    for a nutritional or dietetic supplement, per se.


CLS 426/75
TXT Subject matter under class definition involving products of the type
    usually consumed by infants or children and incorporating or involving a
    nonedible safety feature which makes the product safe for consumption.

    (1)     Note.  The majority of patents in this subclass relate to safety
    sticks for handled confections.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein are those products which make the article
    safer for the user in the actual eating of the article, and not the type
    which protect the user in an operation ancillary to the eating of the
    article. For instance, an article which can be withdrawn from a hot oven
    without burning the user is not the type of safety feature contemplated in
    this area.

    (3)     Note.  The features proper herein are those that protect the health
    and well being of the user and are not of the type which protect the users
    clothing or which protect against dripping or splattering.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for a food contained within a baby bottle type dispenser.


CLS 426/76
TXT Subject matter under class definition wherein an edible contains defined
    score lines or a weakened portion for break away purposes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144,    for grooved or corrugated edibles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 164.9+, for hand tools and work supported tools
    for scoring (or marking) a material.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 6+, for scoring methods and machines.

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, subclasses 96+, for implements or
    machines for preliminarily weakening (as by scoring) and subsequently
    breaking a work piece.

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 52, for static means on a molding device to
    produce a groove or depression in the molded product to facilitate breaking
    or cutting of the product.


CLS 426/77
TXT Subject matter under class definition involving foraminous infusion
    receptacles or packages containing an infusible charge therein such as tea
    leaves, ground coffee, etc., and which is usually of the single use type.

    (1)     Note.  A number of patents have been placed in this and the
    indented subclasses which do not positively recite the combination of an
    infusible charge and infusor.  These patents, however, are of the type
    which would require the destruction of the infusor, as in an infusor
    package in order to incorporate an infusible charge therein, and for
    classification purposes these patents have been interpreted as calling for
    the defined combination.

    (2)     Note.  The line between this subclass and the indents thereunder
    and Class 99, Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 295, is that this
    class (Foods) will take the subcombination of a disposable infusor with a
    charge therein while Class 99, subclass 295, will take the subject matter
    defined above in combination with an infusor apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 226 and 228-231,
    for disinfecting chemical holders for use in the flush pipes and flush
    bowls of water closets.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 561+, for
    material applicators of general utility having a work contacting means and
    material supply wherein the material permeates the work contacting means.

    53,     Package Making, appropriate subclass for making tea bags and
    particularly subclasses 135+, for filling bags and closing by sewing.

    99,     Foods and Beverages: Apparatus, subclasses 279+, for infusion
    apparatus and particularly subclass 295 for infusing receptacle apparatus
    using a disposable container and subclass 323 for infusing receptacles.

    128,    Surgery, subclass 272, for receptacles designed to hold
    medicaments, especially containers facilitating the charging of medicating
    devices.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclass 93, for soap
    dissolving devices forming part of a cleaning apparatus.

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, for cloth bags in general
    and closures therefor.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Packages, subclass 0.5, for infusing packages
    and receptacles containing a material other than a food and wherein the
    substance contained may be infused directly from or through the walls of
    the receptacles or packages.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 282, for removable
    cartridges or hand manipulated containers for particulate material
    functioning as a separator, subclasses 314+ for spaced filters, subclasses
    323+, for plural distinct separators of more general utility, and subclass
    494, for a unit comprising a filter medium within a foraminous container.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclass 56, for
    compartmented paper bags and subclass 63, for paper bag closure cords.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 34+, for
    holders for slow diffusers.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 255+ for apparatus for dissolving,
    leaching, or extracting a soluble constituent of a nonbeverage material.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 16+,
    for medicated papers and fabrics.


CLS 426/78
TXT Subject matter under subclass 77 where in addition to an infusible
    material, another material is soluble or dispensable in the infusion liquid
    and is a part of the infusor as in the case of a mixture of materials, a
    soluble coating on the infusor, or absorted soluble material on the bag
    portion of a tea bag.

    (1)     Note.  A mixture of dried soluble instant coffee and coffee in
    normal beverage form is subject matter for this subclass.


CLS 426/79
TXT Subject matter under subclass 77 where the infusor contains two (2) or more
    compartments in single infusor structure and wherein the two (2) or more
    compartments are utilized together in the preparation of a single brew.

    (1)     Note.  A series of identical charges wherein a single charge is
    utilized in preparing a brew is not an infusor containing two (2) or more
    compartments.


CLS 426/80
TXT Subject matter under subclass 77 wherein the infusor includes means to
    force or urge an infusing liquid into contact with an infusible material,
    or with means to assist the separation of liquid from solid after the
    infusion period.


CLS 426/81
TXT Subject matter under subclass 77 wherein the infusor has the material at
    one or more end portions gathered together to form a neck and fastened with
    a fastening device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, subclasses 3+, for bag
    closures within the class definition (150).

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 24+, and see notes thereunder for closures
    in general.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 62+, for bag
    closures within the class definition (229).


CLS 426/82
TXT Subject matter under subclass 77 wherein there is associated with the
    infusor structure additional defined means to function as a support or
    handle for the infusor during infusion or to enable the manipulation of the
    infusor portion from the infusion liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 470+, for handled
    filters, per se.


CLS 426/83
TXT Subject matter under subclass 82 wherein the infusor is attached to a
    thread, string or string-like material of nonrigid character.

    (1)     Note.  Since the association of an infusor with a string with or
    without a tag portion is common in this art, the nominal recitation of a
    string with or without a tag portion and nothing more is not considered
    proper for this subclass but will be classified under subclasses 77+ on
    some other basis.


CLS 426/84
TXT Subject matter under subclass 77 wherein parts of the infusor material are
    defined in chemical terms.

    (1)     Note.  The total infusor material need not be defined.  It is
    sufficient if for instance, a specific coating is recited or, if a part of
    the total infusor is defined in terms of its chemical material.


CLS 426/85
TXT Subject matter under class definition wherein a consumable substance within
    the scope of this class is associated with a straw (or drinking tube).

    (1)     Note.  It is intended that in order for a patent to be in this
    subclass the drinking tube or straw should require a person to create a
    vacuum to raise the contents from a container rather than a squeeze type of
    container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 141, for spoons having a fluid conducting means
    therewith, usually arranged through the handle.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, various subclasses for tubular pipe
    wall structure of general utility.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 16+, and
    particularly subclass 33 for tubular devices having openings at each end
    and being adapted for conducting fluids for drinking, one end being placed
    in the mouth and the other end being placed in the liquid during use.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 115+, particularly subclasses
    119+ for straws and portable drinking tubes combined with fanciful figures
    or toys for amusement of the user of the straw while sipping.


CLS 426/86
TXT Subject matter under class definition wherein a soluble material is
    contained in a drinking cup or is impregnated or coated on the walls or
    bottom of a drinking cup.


CLS 426/87
TXT Subject matter under class definition wherein the edible product or an
    inedible feature associated therewith, (e.g., container, label, etc.),
    contains visual information desired to be communicated to the user
    concerning the product or the utilization of the product and said
    information is usually in the form of characters, numbers, symbols,
    representations of contrasting colors, or in a change in color.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106+,   for transparent films and windowed packages whereby food can be
    visually inspected.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 2+, 306+, for barrel,
    can or round box carried indicia, 310+, for bottle labels or mere
    modification of the bottle to receive a label and 312+, for box carried
    indicia.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 426+, for a device for measuring
    volume.

    215,    Bottles, and Jars, subclasses 7+, for receptacles of that class
    having means to indicate the contents of the receptacle have been tampered
    with or for indicating the quantity of the material in the receptacle, or
    means to physically indicate, e.g., spikes to note dangerous character of
    the contents.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 23+, for a dispenser in combination with an
    indicator.


CLS 426/88
TXT Subject matter under subclass 87 which includes positive means which
    indicates a condition by virtue of a change in temperature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 339+, for thermometers,
    particularly subclass 356, for qualitative and quantitative color-change
    indicators and subclass 358, for indicative devices wherein the fusible
    element constitutes the indicator.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 106 and 114.5, for fusible
    controls for non-electrical alarms and indicators.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 301.2, for compositions containing
    fluorescent or phosphorescent substances as analytical, testing, or
    identification agents and subclass 408, for compositions used for testing
    or indicating.


CLS 426/89
TXT Subject matter under class definition comprising a product (1) having a
    coating on the exterior thereof, (2) composed of a fluent material encased
    by another material or (3) composed of two or more solid self-sustaining
    materials integrally connected and wherein all of the above products are
    made up of distinct unlike edible materials.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for ice coated product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 302+ for compositions in microcapsule form
    and see the (1) note under the Class 252 definition.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 357+ for a
    structurally defined or coated cell or particle similar to a microcapsule.


CLS 426/90
TXT Subject matter under subclass 89 having a feature that is nonedible.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132+,   for other edible products having a nonedible feature.


CLS 426/91
TXT Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein the inedible feature is a stick.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    for other edible products having a stick feature.


CLS 426/92
TXT Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein one component of the product
    contains animal matter.


CLS 426/93
TXT Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein a component of the product
    contains whole seed, bean or nut material, or material derived therefrom,
    and wherein said derived material has at least some of the physical
    characteristics of the original material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 57.6 for a coated seed.


CLS 426/94
TXT Subject matter under subclass 93 wherein the material is of the type which
    is in the form of or is used to produce a dough or batter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    496+,   for processes of physically treating said product.


CLS 426/95
TXT Subject matter under subclass 94 wherein the product contains a frozen
    material.


CLS 426/96
TXT Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein a component is in the form of a
    dry flake, dry granular, or dry particulate material.


CLS 426/97
TXT Subject matter under subclass 96 wherein the base material is either
    mineral or inorganic.


CLS 426/98
TXT Subject matter under subclass 96 wherein a triglyceridic material is either
    coated or encapsulated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    601+,   for products and processes involving a fat or oil as the basic
    ingredient.


CLS 426/99
TXT Subject matter under subclass 96 wherein a triglyceridic material forms a
    thin skin or coating over the product.


CLS 426/100
TXT Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the product is in a frozen
    condition.


CLS 426/101
TXT Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the product is ice cream or a
    similar type product.


CLS 426/102
TXT Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein a component which is easily
    recognizable is made from either fruit or vegetable matter.


CLS 426/103
TXT Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein a component is a sugar or other
    carbohydrate.


CLS 426/104
TXT Subject matter under class definition formed or so structured in three
    dimensions as to be representative or in the likeness of manufactured or
    natural products in appearance, decorative type products, and products
    having a secondary use usually in the area of amusement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, 84, Music, and 273, Amusement Devices:
    Games, appropriate subclasses for subject matter of those classes not
    limited by claim or disclosure to an edible for ultimate consumption.  As
    between Classes 46, 84, and 273, supra and Class 426 takes subject matter
    of the above classes when limited by claims on disclosure as being made of
    edible material that is intended to be eaten.

    473,    Amusement Devices:  Games, for subject matter not limited by claim
    or disclosure to an edible for ultimate consumption.  Class 426 takes
    subject matter when limited by claim or disclosure as being made of edible
    material that is intended to be eaten.


CLS 426/105
TXT Subject matter under class definition wherein animal flesh material is
    encased in a container of the kind used in making sausage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92,     for meat filled casing wherein the product is coated, etc.

    138+,   for edible casings, per se, or other filled edible casings.


CLS 426/106
TXT Subject matter under class definition wherein an edible is encompassed,
    encased or completely surrounded by nonedible packaging material.

    (1)     Note.  The mere recitation of (1) such generically designated terms
    as packaged, wrapped, canned, bottled, hermetically sealed, etc., (2) a
    single layer of packaging material without some specific shape of said
    material or structural detail, e.g., square glass bottle, coated, or
    wherein the layer does not have any interaction other than packaging, e.g.,
    specific oxygen permeability, light permeability, etc. (3) insert gas
    packing, per se, without structure to contain the gas, (4) a closure
    closing a receptacle without specific structure, or (5) packaging made from
    specific claimed material, i.e., glass, tin, aluminum, metal foil, or
    plastic are not considered proper for this and indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  The food material itself must be enrobed or encased, whereas
    a nonedible associated with the food need not be.

    (3)     Note.  Aersol containers not withstanding the above limitations are
    proper for Class 426, subclass 116.

    (4)     Note.  A filled nonedible casing is considered proper for this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90,     for a coated or laminated food associated with a nonedible material
    which may be a package.

    104,    for an imitated, simulated, or child-oriented article having a food
    contained therein.

    105,    for a meat filled casing of the sausage type.

    132+,   for a food associated with a nonedible feature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacles and Packages, particularly subclasses 46+ for
    mercantile packages not limited to food as the content therein.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 87.08 - 87.11
    for a food wrapper, per se.


CLS 426/107
TXT Subject matter under subclass 106 involving food packages and having
    defined features making the food package particularly adaptable for the
    application thereto of electrical or wave energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages: Apparatus, particularly subclasses 253 and
    274, for apparatus peculiarly adapted for the preparation and preservation
    of foods and utilizing electrical heating devices such as the radiant type.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 678+ for microwave heating; note for
    claims citing both food (edible) and nonfood (nonedible) heating by an
    electric heating device or method, classification is proper for Class 219,
    and if the claims recited are limited to food (edible) heating  methods,
    composition, product, or processes, classification is proper for Class 426.
     Also, see subclasses 764+ for capacitive dielectric heating, note subclass
    771.


CLS 426/108
TXT Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein the exterior package structure
    encloses a multiplicity of discrete, same, packaged units.

    (1)     Note.  Packages which are formed from a carton which has a
    multiplicity of compartments wherein the top of one compartment acts as the
    base for an above compartment is not proper herein and will be found in
    subclass 119.  For the most part the package herein involves the use of a
    two-step packaging operation, e.g., wrapping a food and then enclosing
    multiples of the wrapped food in a larger exterior carton.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for multiple units involving filled baby bottles.


CLS 426/109
TXT Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein there is associated with the food
    package as an integral and separate component a material which has heat
    exchange properties, e.g., fuel, refrigerant, etc., and which is not
    primarily intended to become part of the final food product.

    (1)     Note.  Packaged frozen edible materials, per se, are not subject
    matter for this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  A significant number of the patents herein are drawn to the
    use of ice as a refrigerant for maintaining foodstuffs on transport.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for foodstuffs coated with ice.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, particularly subclass 127, for packaging not
    specialized to refrigeration and see the reference to Class 62 in that
    subclass (127).

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclass, for a refrigerated commodity
    containing package container or receptacle.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, appropriate subclasses for various receptacles
    having associated therewith various heaters and particularly subclasses
    261+ for heaters for warming and keeping warm articles of food.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 82, for the subject matter of that class combined with cooling not
    specialized to refrigeration.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclass 12, for a spaced wall or jacketed bowl
    or jar.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, especially subclasses 7+ for a compartmented
    box.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 9+, for a spaced wall or jacketed container.


CLS 426/110
TXT Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein the package has attached to it a
    member which facilitates handling and wherein the member may be rigid or
    flexible.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are lollipops or food materials wherein only
    the food portion is encompassed or covered with an inedible material.


CLS 426/111
TXT Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein the package structure is of such
    a design as to expand outwardly to cooperate with an expanding food
    contained therein, or wherein the container or package contains a plurality
    of sections which nest within each other to either expand or contract the
    exterior dimension of the package or container.

    (1)     Note.  Expansion of an interior portion of a package is not
    sufficient for placement of a document within this subclass.  For instance
    expansion of an interior liner without an increase in the dimensions of the
    exterior package would be classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 429, for measuring vessels with
    movable means to alter the size of the vessel.

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 8, for receptacles having telescoped sections
    whose relative positions may be adjusted.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 205, for subject matter of
    that class (312) in which the overall dimensions may be changed to provide
    for a plurality of volumes.


CLS 426/112
TXT Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein the package, per se, or a portion
    thereof is particularly suited as by its structure to perform a separate
    function, other than its packaging function, and wherein the function is
    effected by the user subsequent to the packaging step.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are containers which act as
    molds and thereby mold a plastic food; or containers which are made of
    transparent material so that the contents are clearly visible; also
    excluded are containers designed as by the materials of which they are made
    or by the use of mold release liners to dispense food materials, e.g.,
    nondrip bottles etc.


CLS 426/113
TXT Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein the package or packaging material
    is of such a design as to provide specialized means to cook or heat foods.

    (1)     Note.  The mere naming of a packaging material which has properties
    which are such that a food may be heated or cooked in a container is not
    sufficient for this subclass.  The container must be so structured to offer
    a specialized cooking or heating container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for a package which is particularly adapted for treatment with
    electrical or wave energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclasses 250+ for a flameless or
    glowless fuel composition, per se, and subclasses 901+ for collection of
    patents showing a combination of a fuel with a variety of objects and
    materials to be heated.


CLS 426/114
TXT Subject matter under subclass 113 involving foods which are generally not
    mixed together to form a combination but are consumed separately, e.g.,
    meat and vegetable combinations, etc.,


CLS 426/115
TXT Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein the package structure has
    peculiar means to serve or dispense foods.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacles and Packages, appropriate subclasses, for
    special receptacles and packages, particular attention being directed to
    subclasses 41.4+ and 56+ which have dispensing titles.  As between these
    subclasses and class (221), Class 221 takes article dispensers identifiable
    as such by sections I and II of the Class 221 definition, the "dispensers"
    in Class 206, subclasses 41.1 and 56+ being for fluent material and stick
    material and of various structures which while loosely considered to be
    dispensers in Class 206 do not come within the class limitation of Class
    221.

    221,    Articles Dispensing, appropriate subclasses, for article dispensers
    not otherwise provided for.  Class 221 is the residual article dispensing
    class and takes receptacles having means to eject or release articles
    therefrom where not otherwise provided for.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclass for receptacles combined with
    dispensing features.


CLS 426/116
TXT Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein the material packaged is a fluent
    which is to be dispensed by means of a gas under pressure and which are
    sold together as a single consumer unit.


CLS 426/117
TXT Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein the package serves as a dispenser
    to feed infants and is of the baby bottle type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 235.5, for apparatus for applying nipples
    to nursing bottles.

    128,    Surgery, subclass 252, for nipples, per se.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclass 11, for bottles intended for use in the
    feeding of infants.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 102+, for nursing bottle holders or supports.


CLS 426/118
TXT Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein the package structure has means
    to release food generated gas, i.e., valve, or has defined means to distort
    the package or container structure by food generated pressure (gas) in
    someway while still preserving consumer acceptability.

    (1)     Note.  A package which merely contains a food in a perforate
    wrapper, or in a wrapper which is gas permeable, or in a can which has a
    vent hole which will be subsequently sealed is not a package within the
    purview of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    395,    for methods of packaging in containers having structure which can
    cooperate with gas generated within the package.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Receptacles, subclasses 203.01+ for a receptacles closure
    comprising a pressure responsive vent or valve.


CLS 426/119
TXT Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein two (2) or more edible products
    are packaged as a single consumer unit completely out of physical contact
    with each other using a nonedible spacer to segregate the edible products.

    (1)     Note.  All the food products within the container must be
    segregated from each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for a multiplicity of individually wrapped food products contained
    in an exterior sealed container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacles and Packages, subclass 47, for packages
    "containing a plurality of materials which are employed together in
    combination to make any definite solution or composition or which are to be
    used successively in any operation, also packages of any two or more
    articles to be cooperatively used, such as covering material and fasteners
    and trimming to be used therewith".


CLS 426/120
TXT Subject matter under subclass 119 wherein the edible products are of a
    diverse nature.


CLS 426/121
TXT Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein the food is in sliced form and is
    so arranged that the opposite surfaces of edge portions of adjacent
    sections are in contacting overlapping relationship, e.g., bacon pack, etc.


CLS 426/122
TXT Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein the package is designed to be
    opened and its contents removed through the agency of a scored or
    perforated or weakened line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 3+, for can openers which operate by cutting.

    53,     Package Making, subclass 133, for apparatus for providing structure
    associated with a cover material which will facilitate the removal of at
    least a portion of the cover to expose the contents.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 46 and 55 for closure removing devices
    which are permanently attached to a bottle or jar type receptacle or are
    claimed in combination therewith.

    220,    Receptacles, appropriate subclasses such as 47+, 50 and 53+, for
    devices to open metallic receptacles by breaking through or ripping the
    soldered parts.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 30+, for article dispensing devices
    including or combined with a cutter or punch means to form an outlet
    opening in the supply receptacle or in the wrapper thereof.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 80+ for fluent material dispensing devices
    combined with cutters and/or puncher.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclass 51, for boxes
    having means to open same such as a tear cord or other device to facilitate
    ripping a portion of the box; subclass 66, for bags having devices for
    readily opening same; subclasses 85+, for envelopes provided with special
    means for facilitating their opening.



CLS 426/123
TXT Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein the opening device is a string,
    cord, tab, etc. which, when pulled, tears the package open.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    for packages designed to be opened via a scored, weakened, or
    perforated line and note the search class notes thereunder for other
    classes which may be pertinent to package opening.


CLS 426/124
TXT Subject matter under subclass 106 comprising an exterior food container or
    wrapper which contains in addition to the food a nonedible solid which is
    not laminated or coated onto the food container or wrapper and which is
    completely enveloped or encompassed within the confines of the container or
    wrapper.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are packages which are double bagged, e.g.,
    a bag within a bag or packages wherein a can is carried by an exterior
    container, or packages which contain liners which are not laminated or
    coated to the exterior packaging material; or packaged foods which are
    interleaved with a nonedible to facilitate separation of the foods.


CLS 426/125
TXT Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein a food product is in integral
    contact with a strippable nonedible membraneous covering.

    (1)     Note.  The covering herein is of the type wherein a coating is
    applied to the product and solidified hereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302+,   for methods of coating a food with a liquid.


CLS 426/126
TXT Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein the packaging material is
    composed of three or more different layers with at least one layer being
    metallic.

    (1)     Note.  Each and every layer disclosed, whether considered in the
    document as a base layer or an adhesive layer is construed to be a separate
    layer for purposes of placement in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  It is not a requirement that for the three minimum layered
    packaging material that there be three different layering materials.  It is
    sufficient for this subclass to have two layering materials arranged in the
    three layers. For instance  is proper herein.

    (3)     Note.  Not considered within the confines of this subclass are
    packages which are prepared from single layer packaging material which is
    in an overlapping relation along an edge with itself or rolled over itself
    to form a bag or container and which is autogenously or with an added
    adhesive bonded to itself.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 64, for coated metallic receptacles and other
    receptacles not provided for elsewhere.

    427,    Coating Processes, for processes of coating in general.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet, and especially 411+ for a nonstructure composite web or sheet
    characterized merely by the composition of the layers; and subclasses 544+,
    particularly subclasses 615+ for metallic stock materials which comprise at
    least two different contiguous metallic layers.



CLS 426/127
TXT Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein the packaging material is
    composed of three or more different layers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126,    for packaging material having three layers with at least one being
    metallic, and in particular check the notes relating thereto which are
    equally pertinent as well to this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, for coated bottles and jars and closures for use
    therewith.

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 64, for coated metallic receptacles and other
    receptacles not provided for elsewhere.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclass 3.1, for paper
    receptacles coated with some composition to render them impervious to a
    liquid.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet, and especially 411+ for a nonstructure composite web or sheet
    characterized merely by the composition of the layers.


CLS 426/128
TXT Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein the product packaged is dough,
    batter, or a dry mix for preparing a dough or batter product.  Included
    also is the product in the final form, e.g., baked, etc.


CLS 426/129
TXT Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein the product packaged is an animal
    derived flesh material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    for an edible package which contains an animal derived flesh
    material.


CLS 426/130
TXT Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein the product packaged contains a
    lacteal derived material.


CLS 426/131
TXT Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein the food is in a container which
    is hermetically sealed so as to preserve the food.


CLS 426/132
TXT Subject matter under subclass 70 wherein an inedible feature is associated
    with subject matter proper for this class.

    (1)     Note.  Included within this subclass and indents are nonedible
    carrying materials which later intentionally form part of the final
    consumable food, e.g., wrappers, casing, etc, carrying coloring for food,
    flavors for food, release agents for food, or any other materials which
    interact with the food and become a part thereof.

    (2)     Note.  Excluded herefrom as being nonedible are products which are
    normally the waste or discard of edible products, e.g., seeds, hulls,
    shells, husks, bones, etc.


CLS 426/133
TXT Subject matter under subclass 132 wherein a preservative agent is
    incorporated with the nonedible feature.


CLS 426/134
TXT Subject matter under subclass 132 wherein the nonedible feature is a stick
    integrally connected with a food so that the user can manipulate the food
    via the stick feature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     for a structurally defined composite food containing a stick
    feature.


CLS 426/135
TXT Subject matter under subclass 132 wherein the nonedible is a casing or
    container designed to be filled with an edible.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140,    for all casings or containers prepared from animal derived tissue,
    including those that may have an inedible feature associated therewith.


CLS 426/138
TXT Subject matter under class definition involving edible articles which are
    peculiarly designed so as to contain or hold an additional and different
    food, e.g., ice cream cone, frankfurter bun, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are products which are ultimately designed
    to function as edible containers but which are in an incomplete state of
    manufacture and require an assembly step to be put in their final desired
    configuration.

    (2)     Note.  All casings will be considered to be inedible in the absence
    of disclosure to the contrary.  An exception to this rule is animal derived
    casing which, per se, will be considered edible.


CLS 426/139
TXT Subject matter under 138 wherein the container is adapted to receive and
    hold material that is frozen, e.g., ice cream cone, etc.


CLS 426/140
TXT Subject matter under subclass 138 wherein the container is composed of
    animal derived material, e.g., casing, etc.

    (1)     Note.  A casing, per se, will be considered proper for this
    subclass if it is composed of animal derived material, even if it is
    associated with a known nonedible material.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein are shirred edible casings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    for a meat filled edible or inedible casing.

    277,    for the formation of an edible casing by extruding a composition
    into a reactive bath.

    278,    for the chemical modification or treatment of an edible casing.



    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 118+ for inedible artificial
    food casings with open ends and shirred products with open ends.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 85+ for a
    product having a pile or nap type surface comprising an animal skin which
    still retains the hair or fur, subclass 411 for a stock material product in
    the form of a composite web or sheet comprising plural layers adhered or
    cohered to each other, and especially subclass 473 in which one layer
    comprises an integral portion of animal skin.


CLS 426/143
TXT Subject matter under class definition wherein the edible contains an
    aperture or open ended cavity.


CLS 426/144
TXT Subject matter under class definition wherein the edible contains a
    plurality of discrete deviations in the parallel plane in a repetitive
    pattern.


CLS 426/231
TXT Processes under class definition where a condition in preparing subject
    matter of this class is sensed by other than by subjective means.

    (1)     Note.  Subjective evaluation is proper for this subclass if the
    matter evaluated is indirectly determined, that is for example if a
    measurement is made inanimately and then read or sensed by a human being
    e.g., reading a spectrophotometer, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Treating a material to a certain condition without a defined
    inanimate measurement, test, inspection, or control, e.g., temperature, PH,
    etc., is not proper subject matter for this subclass and classification of
    such a process will be accorded on some other basis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses, for measuring and
    testing of physical properties, especially subclass 169 for testing flour,
    dough or bread by physical means.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 408 for analytical, testing, or indicating
    composition.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 1+,
    for chemical and analytical control methods involving a chemical reaction,
    especially subclass 22 for dairy control methods.



CLS 426/232
TXT Subject matter under subclass 231 wherein the food material treated is in
    packaged form or wherein the process involves preparing food containing
    package.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61+,    for packages containing ferment indicating means.


CLS 426/233
TXT Subject matter under subclass 231 wherein the food material treated is
    heated at some stage of the process and the final product is in solid form.

    (1)     Note.  The material undergoing treatment need not be solid as long
    as the final product is in solid form.


CLS 426/234
TXT Processes under class definition which involve direct electrical or wave
    energy treatment of a food package.

    (1)     Note.  Treatments of special packages which are designed to allow
    transmittance of only certain wavelengths of the electromagnetic spectrum
    are proper for subclass.


CLS 426/235
TXT Processes under class definition wherein a gas and a food material contact
    each other under the influence of electrical or wave energy.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded herefrom are steam, nitrogen air, CO2 or the inert
    gases,or mixtures solely composed of any of the above.

    (2)     Note.  Gas for purposes herein includes a mist, smoke, or vapor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236,    for processes involving the treatment of a gas with electrical or
    wave energy and the subsequent application of the treated gas to a food,
    the application itself not involving wave or electrical energy.


CLS 426/236
TXT Processes under class definition wherein a gas is subjected to electrical
    or wave energy and is subsequently applied to a food.

    (1)     Note.  Mere heating in an oven wherein the air therein is heated
    and cooks a food within the oven is not the type of treatment of gas
    required for this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Gas for purposes herein includes a mist, smoke, or vapor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312+,   for the application of ozone to a food material wherein the claim
    fails to recite the mode of generation of the ozone material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 155+ for
    preparation of compounds or elements through chemical reaction brought
    about by electrical or wave energy in a magnetic field and subclasses 164+
    for chemical preparation of a compound or element by using an electrostatic
    field or electrical discharge, especially subclass 176 for the production
    of ozone by subjecting material to an electrostatic field or electrical
    discharge.


CLS 426/237
TXT Processes under class definition directed to applying electrical or wave
    energy directly to a food material.

    (1)     Note.  The energy must be applied directly as such to the food
    material in the form of electrical or wave energy.  Conversion of energy
    such as electrical to heat and the application of the heat to the food
    material is excluded from this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    272+ for a laminating process including direct application of electrical or
    radiant energy to the work, and see the "SEARCH CLASS" notes thereunder.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclasses for
    processes of treating material, in general, by electrical or wave energy.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, appropriate subclasses for electrolytic
    processes, in general.


CLS 426/238
TXT Process under subclass 237, wherein the wave energy is of the sonic or
    ultrasonic type which when applied to the food imparts impulses thereto
    which may cause a vibration or oscillation of a frequency corresponding to
    that of the particular sonic wave employed.


CLS 426/239
TXT Subject matter under subclass 237, wherein an applied electromotive force
    influences the movement of materials which usually effect a separation or
    purification but are not limited thereto e.g., electrodialysis,
    electroosmosis etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 450+ for
    electrophoretic or electro-osmotic processes, in general.


CLS 426/240
TXT Processes under subclass 237 wherein ions which are the result of
    electromagnetic or particulate radiation contact a food material, e.g.,
    gamma, X-rays, beta rays, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Beta radiation as used herein includes cathode rays or
    electron beams, the former being the common designation when the rays
    originate from a natural or artificial source, while the latter designation
    is employed to indicate rays produced in an electrical apparatus, e.g.,
    vacuum tube type, etc.  Beta and electron beams are particulate in nature.

    (2)     Note.  Gamma radiation as used herein includes X-rays.  Gamma rays
    are those that originate from a natural or artificial radioactive source,
    whereas X-rays as commonly used are rays that are produced by electron
    bombardment of suitable sources.  Gamma and X-rays are both electromagentic
    in character. Included with the term gamma ray are emissions from such
    sources as colbalt 60 and cesium 134.


CLS 426/241
TXT Processes under subclass 237 directed to heating food material with energy
    in the form of electromagentic waves e.g., infrared, radar, microwave, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 678+ for microwave heating; note for
    claims citing both food (edible) and nonfood (nonedible) heating by an
    electric heating device or method, classification is proper for Class 219,
    and if the claims recited are limited to food (edible) heating methods,
    composition, product, or processes, classification is proper for Class 426.
     Also, see subclasses 764+ for capacitive dielectric heating, note subclass
    771.


CLS 426/242
TXT Process under subclass 241 wherein the final product is normally in the
    dried state.


CLS 426/243
TXT Processes under subclass 241 where electro- magnetic wave energy effects a
    cooking operation, e.g., baking of food, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Partial cooking is proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    523,    for a cooking process where radiant energy or the like is not
    claimed.


CLS 426/244
TXT Processes under subclass 237 wherein (1) a food material is heated in a
    dielectric manner; or (2) wherein a food material constitutes a portion of
    an electric circuit and current is passed though said food material.

    (1)     Note.  Dielectric heating involves the placing of a low conductive
    food in an alternating electric field, the heating of the food involving
    the periodic loss of electrons from within the food caused by the
    alternating electric field.


CLS 426/245
TXT Processes under subclass 244 wherein a formless or flowable food material
    is made into a self-sustaining desired shape by either treating the food
    while confined in a mold by dielectric heating means or by passing an
    electrical current through the food.


CLS 426/246
TXT Processes under subclass 244 wherein the food material treated is animal
    derived flesh.


CLS 426/247
TXT Processes under subclass 244 wherein the food material treated is in fluent
    form, e.g., milk, juice, etc.


CLS 426/248
TXT Processes under subclass 237 wherein the wave energy is either visible
    light or ultraviolet light.

    (1)     Note.  Ultraviolet light is considered to have a wavelength of
    approximately 200 to 4000 Angstroms.

    (2)     Note.  Visible light is considered to have wavelength of
    approximately 4000-7700 Angstroms.

    (3)     Note.  Although a certain overlapping will occur at the lower
    wavelength of the ultraviolet spectrum and at the upper end of the visible
    spectrum, patents will be placed herein on the basis of the particular
    desired electromagnetic wave as noted in the specification.

    (4)     Note.  Included in this subclass are treatments with any of the
    wavelengths within the visible spectrum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241+,   for processes of heating using light as the heating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 42+ for ray treatment of general utility
    and see the "SEARCH CLASS" notes thereunder.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 1+ for disinfecting, deodorizing,
    preserving, or sterilizing processes of general utility.


CLS 426/249
TXT Processes under class definition wherein a frozen plastic edible or shaped
    plastic of differing external color is prepared or treated.

    (1)     Note.  Treatment requires that the ultimate desired product still
    be of contrasting colors.


CLS 426/250
TXT Processes under class definition involving the coloring of food wherein a
    substance having coloring properties is added to the food to impart the
    color of the added substance to the food.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is the in situ formation of a coloring
    material and the use of optical brighteners on foods.

    (2)     Note.  The coloring material must be added for the purpose of
    coloring the food.  For example, riboflavin (vitamin B2) which is orange
    yellow in color and which is used as a feed supplement rather than as a
    color would not be included in this subclass but would be found in subclass
    311.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    383,    for applying a decal or indicia to a food.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 1-94 and subclasses 162-180, particularly
    subclasses 3-13 for nontextile dyeing.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 400-506 for inorganic
    pigments, fillers, or aggregates.


CLS 426/251
TXT Processes under 250 wherein an unshelled nut or whole bean is treated with
    a coloring material.


CLS 426/252
TXT Inventions under subclass 250 wherein a whole citrus fruit is exposed to a
    coloring material.


CLS 426/253
TXT Processes under class definition wherein color is removed from a food by
    the addition of a material which decolorizes by a chemical reaction with
    the food.

    (1)     Note.  Addition includes any material other than air, CO2, water,
    nitrogen, the inert gases, or mixtures solely composed of the above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    342+,   for a process of extracting color material involving a chemical
    reaction where the intent of the process is to recover a coloring material
    rather than in effecting a color change.

    422+    and 478+, for physical processes of recovering color material for a
    purpose as noted in 342+ above.

    539,    for a food composition containing a bleachant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing, Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 101+ for bleaching processes generally.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 186+ and 188 for bleaching compositions in
    general.


CLS 426/254
TXT Processes under subclass 253 in which the color removal is preceded by
    treatment of the food with an ionic material and wherein the treatment does
    not involve a color removal step.


CLS 426/255
TXT Processes under subclass 253 in which food is exposed to two or more color
    removing operations performed by at least two different color removing
    agents.


CLS 426/256
TXT Processes under subclass 253 in which the process includes the application
    of fluid or mechanical pressure to the food material, or the conveying of
    the food material during the color removing operation, e.g., bleaching in a
    fluidized bed, etc.


CLS 426/257
TXT Processes under subclass 253 in which the color remover is an organic
    material.


CLS 426/258
TXT Subject matter under subclass 257 in which the organic agent is a peroxide,
    i.e., contains an O-O group.


CLS 426/259
TXT Processes under subclass 253 in which the color remover contains a sulfur
    atom.


CLS 426/260
TXT Processes under subclass 253 in which the color remover contains a nitrogen
    atom.


CLS 426/261
TXT Subject matter under subclass 253 in which the bleaching agent is a heavy
    metal containing compound or a peroxide compound.

    (1)     Note.  "Heavy metal" is defined as a metal having a specific
    gravity greater than 4.  This includes all of the metals having an atomic
    number of 22 (titanium) or greater, with the exception of the alkali metals
    and the alkaline earth metals.


CLS 426/262
TXT Processes under class definition which involve the use of additives which
    are not colors in themselves but are substances which react or otherwise
    modify food so as to attain a desired coloration or decoloration, or
    prevent or retard deterioration of food contained or added colors, or react
    with food components to form a desired color change, or prevent or inhibit
    undesirable color formation whether enzymatically catalyzed or otherwise.

    (1)     Note.  Additions of materials to food which affect the color of
    foods are known and are common as the addition of sugars which may result
    in a desired color in food, as for example, by carmelizing, or by
    condensing with amino acids or proteins.  A search, therefor restricted to
    this area for particular subject matter may not be complete.

    (2)     Note.  Additive is consistent with other uses of the term
    "additive" in the schedule and is meant to be other than H2O, N2, Air, CO2,
    the inert gases, and mixtures composed solely of any of the afore-mentioned.

    (3)     Note.  Coloring or Coloring modification by such operations as
    cooking, heating, cooling, roasting, browning, blanching, carmelizing,
    burning, charring or aging is not proper herein unless a material is added
    prior to the recited operation which will have an effect on the color.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302+,   for processes of coating food with a glossing agent.

    383,    for applying coloring material in the form of indicia or decal so
    as to readily identify the food.

    392+,   for processes of preserving color by packaging or wrapping.

    466+,   for preparing a dry product by roasting, toasting, or browning.

    496+,   for treating or preparing a farinaceous dough, batter, or pastry
    product.

    509+,   for cooking with added aqueous material.

    523,    for cooking, per se.


CLS 426/263
TXT Processes under subclass 262 wherein a gaseous medium is used.


CLS 426/264
TXT Processes under subclass 262 involving the use of additives which affect or
    modify the hemepigments including hemoglobin, myoglobin and cytochrome to
    result in a color change.


CLS 426/265
TXT Processes under subclass 264 in which an organic compound is added to the
    heme-pigmented food.


CLS 426/266
TXT Processes under subclass 265 involving the use of an inorganic nitrogen
    compound, e.g., potassium nitrate, sodium nitrite, etc.

    (1)     Note.  The majority of patents in this and the indented subclasses
    involve the use of compositions variously called curing or pickling
    compositions containing salt (sodium chloride) and nitrous oxide producing
    materials and such ingredients as sugars, spices, seasonings, ascorbic acid
    and its derivatives, various phosphate compounds, monosodium glutamate and
    hydrolyzed vegetable proteins.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332,    for a process of preserving meat utilizing a designated pickling or
    curing composition and not involving preserving or modifying color.


CLS 426/267
TXT Processes under subclass 262 in which a calcium compound is applied to a
    food material.


CLS 426/268
TXT Processes under subclass 262 in which an organic additive of known chemical
    structure is added to the food material.


CLS 426/269
TXT Processes under subclass 268 in which the organic agent contains sulfur or
    in which a sulfur compound as well as an organic agent is applied to the
    food.


CLS 426/270
TXT Processes under subclass 262 in which the color of a fruit or vegetable
    which still contains some original tissue and which is other than potato is
    contacted by an additive.


CLS 426/271
TXT Processes under class definition directed to (A) the chemical transference
    of ions from a material to a liquid or solid separatory substance or
    exchanger which, because of its chemical structure of loosely bound ions,
    has an affinity for certain ions and gives up some of its own ions to the
    material, or (B) forming a reversible complex molecule of a chemical agent
    and metallic ion which complex does not have all or most of the
    characteristics of the original metallic ion.

    (1)     Note.  It is sufficient for this subclass that the patent disclose
    that a material is an ion exchange, chelating, or sequestering agent.  The
    function of the material is assumed to be inherent in the process upon the
    admixture of ingredients.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 24+, for process of
    liquid purification or separation using an ion exchange system and see the
    "SEARCH CLASS" notes thereunder.


CLS 426/272
TXT Processes under class definition involving integrally uniting together two
    or more solid nondry, same or different food materials, utilizing at least
    a component of one which is found in the original material and which
    component acts as an adhesive, or modifying a portion of one of the
    original nondry, solid food materials, by either physical or chemical means
    so that a binding material is formed which will act as an adhesive to bind
    the food materials together.

    (1)     Note.  Not included within the confines of this subclass is the
    mere heating of a food in order to prepare a tacky surface, or the adding
    of water to a dry food material to dissolve a portion of the food so as to
    form a tacky surface which will act as an adhesive surface to adhere foods
    together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    285,    for processes involving agglomerating of dry food compositions.

    453+,   for preparing dry foods involving agglomerating a dry starting
    material.

    502,    for processes involving the assembling or laminating of dough
    sheets.


CLS 426/273
TXT Processes under class definition involving the coating of foods which are
    dry to the touch, and do not contain animal flesh, by a base supplied
    constituent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    489,    for a process of removing juice from a fruit or vegetable by
    pressing wherein exuded juice covers the fruit or vegetable and wherein the
    disclosure is silent as to the formation of a tenacious coating on the food.

    496+,   for processes solely involving skin forming on a dough form.


CLS 426/274
TXT Processes under class definition wherein two or more preforms, (e.g.,
    layers, fibers, etc.) which are of the same or different solid foods are
    bound to one another by the use of an extraneous binding material, which
    may also function as a ready release agent or food.


CLS 426/275
TXT Subject matter under subclass 274 wherein at least one of the preforms is
    made of dough.


CLS 426/276
TXT Processes under class definition wherein a food in liquid form is
    introduced into a fluid which is form a solid food substance through
    chemical interaction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating Processes,
    subclasses 183+ for processes of shaping by extruding into a reactive bath.


CLS 426/277
TXT Processes under subclass 276 wherein the material formed is to be used as
    an edible packaging material, e.g., casing, etc.


CLS 426/278
TXT Processes under class definition which involve the per se chemical
    modification of an animal derived packaging material by the use of a
    reactant which chemically reacts with the animal derived material, e.g.,
    casings, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 94.1+, for the treatment of hides, skins,
    feathers, and animal tissue; and 127.5+ for the chemical modification of
    proteinaceous fibers when such treatments are not specialized for use in
    preparing a food.


CLS 426/279
TXT Processes under class definition in which a plastic or fluent food is
    placed within a mold and while being held in the mold a cavity is formed by
    displacement of the food material, said cavity then being filled to a
    desired extent with a diverse food.

    (1)     Note.  "Displacement" requires a shifting of the food material from
    one volume of space to a volume of space outside the original volume
    occupied by the material.  It must be more than a mere compression wherein
    the material occupies a smaller volume.


CLS 426/280
TXT Subject matter under subclass 279 in which an inedible internal mold member
    is employed to form the cavity.


CLS 426/281
TXT Processes under class definition wherein a nontransitory fluent material is
    added to the interior portion of a solid edible either by injecting,
    forming of artificial pores, or by applying external pressure.

    (1)     Note.  External pressure is something more than the natural
    pressure exerted by a fluent due to its weight or height above the
    substrate to be treated.


CLS 426/282
TXT Processes under class definition in which an artificially formed cavity in
    an edible preform is provided with a diverse edible filling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    390+,   for processes of preparing an edible preform.


CLS 426/283
TXT Processes under subclass 282 wherein the edible preform is prepared from
    dough.


CLS 426/284
TXT Processes under subclass 282 in which the edible preform is tubular.


CLS 426/285
TXT Processes under class definition in which small dry particles of diverse
    food materials are formed into larger dry units or wherein dry small
    particles are admixed with a diverse binder and are formed into larger dry
    particles by treatments which cause coalescence of the particles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272,    for methods of building up units from a nondry starting food using
    a base supplied constituent.

    274+,   for methods of assembling plural edible preforms utilizing an
    extraneous binder, release agent, or diverse food as an adhesive material.

    453+,   for the preparation of a dry food product involving an
    agglomerating process.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 5+ for particle formation by liquid comminuting, particularly
    subclass 6, with uniting of said particles, and subclasses 109+ for
    processes of forming articles by uniting of particulate material.


CLS 426/286
TXT Subject matter under class definition involving a process of destroying or
    neutralizing a material (usually chemical) which has been added to protect
    the food from injury due to fungi, insects, bacteria, herbicides, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    478+,   for a process including the step of cleaning food.

    506+,   for a process including a step of cleaning food using water.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses for
    the process of cleaning foods, per se, by the removal of natural occurring
    material, e.g., dirt, smut, etc.


CLS 426/287
TXT Processes under class definition wherein the outer portion of plant
    material is chemically modified by the addition of a chemical which aids in
    the removal of said outer portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    353,    for treatment of bean, nut, or cereal seed including removal of
    outer covering.

    482,    for removal of outer covering of plant material.


CLS 426/288
TXT Processes under subclass 287 wherein the outer covering is removed from a
    nut or seed.


CLS 426/289
TXT Processes under class definition which include the coating or impregnating
    of an edible solid core by applying thereto an edible particulate material,
    e.g., breading, flouring, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    314+,   for processes of applying particles suspended in a smoke to a food
    which particles are the result of a combustion process.


CLS 426/290
TXT Processes under subclass 289 in which some or all of the particulate solids
    after application to the core are converted to a liquid, e.g., melting,
    dissolving, etc.


CLS 426/291
TXT Processes under subclass 289 in which the composite solid core and applied
    particulate solid material is surface coated with a liquid.


CLS 426/292
TXT Processes under subclass 289 in which edible particles are applied
    sequentially to the solid food core.

    (1)     Note.  "Sequential" for purposes herein requires an interruption of
    the coating operation, or a treatment of the coated food prior to the
    application of more of the same type of particulate material.


CLS 426/293
TXT Processes under subclass 289 in which the core surface is also coated with
    a fluent, e.g., liquid, plastic, etc.


CLS 426/294
TXT Processes under subclass 289 in which the particles applied to the core are
    suspended in a gaseous medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    314+,   for processes of applying particles suspended in a smoke to a food
    which particles are the result of a combustion process.


CLS 426/295
TXT Processes under subclass 289 which involve embedding of the particulate
    solid in the core, or a tumbling or rolling of the solid core, before,
    during or subsequent to applying the particulate material.


CLS 426/296
TXT Processes under subclass 289 in which the composite of particles and core
    is cooked.

    (1)     Note.  The cooking need not be complete, i.e., the core or portions
    of it may remain uncooked.


CLS 426/297
TXT Processes under class definition in which an edible plastic food is spread
    on an edible preform and wherein the shape or dimension of the preform is
    then modified by a shaping operation.

    (1)     Note.  Shaping includes for the most part rolling or folding, and
    does not include cutting or spreading.


CLS 426/298
TXT Processes under class definition wherein an unshelled egg is subjected to a
    chemical or physical treatment.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is the packaging of eggs as well as cracking
    or removing the contents of an egg.


CLS 426/299
TXT Processes under subclass 298 wherein an unshelled egg is subjected to a
    treatment wherein a portion of the shell is removed so that the egg
    material is still confined in its original natural container or wherein the
    entire egg shell is removed subsequent to a physical or chemical treatment
    of an unshelled egg, e.g., preparation of hard boiled eggs, etc.


CLS 426/300
TXT Processes under subclass 298 wherein an unshelled egg is subjected to a
    treatment by a fluent material.


CLS 426/301
TXT Processes under subclass 300 involving the treating of an unshelled egg
    with an unctuous material.

    (1)     Note.  "Unctuous" includes the mineral oils derived from petroleum
    and the fatty substances of plants and animals which are usually the
    glycerol esters of fatty acids.


CLS 426/302
TXT Processes under class definition in which a liquid is applied to the full
    or partial surface of a solid food so as to form a temporary or permanent
    layer on the solid food.

    (1)     Note.  The final product need not be in a coated state, nor does
    coating include impregnating, per se, without the formation of a surface
    layer affixed to the solid food base.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272,    for the affixing together of foods utilizing a base supplied
    constituent.

    273,    for coating of a nondry food utilizing a base supplied constituent.

    274+,   for assembling preforms using an extraneous binder or release agent.

    297,    for spreading a plastic on an edible preform and reshaping the
    preform.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, for processes of coating in general.


CLS 426/303
TXT Processes under subclass 302 wherein the edible solid surface is contacted
    with a coating liquid in at least two distinct coating operations.


CLS 426/304
TXT Processes under subclass 303 in which the same coating liquid is used in
    more than one distinct coating step.


CLS 426/305
TXT Processes under subclass 302 wherein the coating which is applied is
    subjected to a treating operation which is specific for the coating and
    does not normally affect the food base material.

    (1)     Note.  Methods limited to cooling, heating, or drying are not
    considered proper subject matter herein.


CLS 426/306
TXT Processes under subclass 302 in which the coating liquid is chocolate or is
    at least derived in part from the Theobroma cocoa plant.


CLS 426/307
TXT Processes under subclass 302 wherein a molten or melted coating material is
    applied to a food material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290,    for the application of a solid particulate material to a base with
    subsequent liquefaction of the applied particulate material.


CLS 426/308
TXT Processes under subclass 302 involving the surface coating of a normally
    inedible natural shell or rind.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    298+,   for methods of coating whole eggs with a fluent coating material.


CLS 426/309
TXT Processes under subclass 302 in which a whole isolated seed or bean is
    surface coated with a liquid material.


CLS 426/310
TXT Processes under subclass 302 wherein the coating functions to maintain the
    food base in a desired condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    296+,   for processes of treating unshelled eggs which may involve a
    preservation by a coating operation.

    321+,   for inhibiting chemical or physical change in a food by contacting
    with a chemical agent.


CLS 426/311
TXT Processes under class definition wherein the food is treated to enhance or
    maintain the vitamin content, e.g., preserving, adding, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are vitamin active materials which are
    active as vitamins, per se, as well as those that metabolize in the living
    body to form an active vitamin (e.g., carotene, etc).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for a vitamin containing product.


CLS 426/312
TXT Processes under class definition wherein an exteriorly produced gas
    contacts a solid or liquid food material for any purpose.

    (1)     Note.  "Gas" for purposes herein includes vapors, mist or smoke.

    (2)     Note.  Excluded herefrom are CO2, air, steam, nitrogen, the inert
    gases, or mixtures composed solely of any of the above; or the use of the
    above gases as carriers for nongaseous materials.  Absent any disclosure to
    the contrary "gas" will be taken to mean one of the gaseous materials
    excluded above.  Also excluded from this subclass is the production of a
    gas by an "in situ" reaction wherein the reacting medium is in physical
    contact with the food, as well as treatments of food with a gas derived
    from a similar food or from a food to which it is closely related.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235,    for processes of applying a gas to a food under the influence of
    electrical or wave energy.

    236,    for processes of treating a gas by electrical or wave energy and
    subsequently contacting a food with the treated gas.

    386+,   for processes of separating a volatile essence from a food and
    recombining the essence with a similar food.

    470,    for methods of preparing a dry food product from a foamed or
    gasified material.

    474+,   for methods of treating a liquid with a gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 282+, for
    processes not elsewhere classified for contacting or a gas or vapor with a
    solid.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, for processes not elsewhere
    classified of contacting a gas with a liquid.


CLS 426/313
TXT Processes under subclass 312 wherein the gas is hydrogen.

    (1)     Note.  Most of the patents herein relate to hydrogenation, i.e.,
    the addition of hydrogen across an unsaturated carbon to carbon bond in
    order to cause saturation of the bond.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, appropriate subclasses according to
    the product desired and in particular subclass 690 for hydrogenation
    processes.


CLS 426/314
TXT Processes under subclass 312 wherein the applied gas is formed as the
    result of a burning or combustion reaction.

    (1)     Note.  Smoking or the recitation that the applied material is the
    result of a burning or combustion reaction whether in the claims or in the
    specification is sufficient to place a patent within this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235,    for an electrostatic smoking operation.


CLS 426/315
TXT Processes under subclass 314 wherein the food material is in the form of
    animal flesh.


CLS 426/316
TXT Processes under subclass 312 wherein (1), a food material contacts a gas
    and is then packaged, or (2), a food within a gas permeable package is
    contacted by a gas through the apertures within the packaging material, or
    (3), the food is packaged with a material which under normal conditions of
    temperature and pressure returns to the gaseous state under conditions of
    packaging or storing.


CLS 426/317
TXT Processes under subclass 312 wherein the food material contacted is derived
    from a lacteal source.


CLS 426/318
TXT Processes under subclass 312 wherein the gaseous material is a halogen or
    halogen containing compound.


CLS 426/319
TXT Processes under subclass 312 wherein the gaseous material is a compound of
    nitrogen, or is sulfur, or a sulfur containing compound.


CLS 426/320
TXT Processes under subclass 312 wherein the applied gas is biocidal or
    disinfecting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, for methods
    involving the mere application of a gaseous biocide or disinfectant to a
    food material.


CLS 426/321
TXT Processes under class definition wherein a food material is contacted by a
    chemical agent which either by transitory or permanent contact effects a
    desired maintenance of the food.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded herefrom as being "chemical agents" proper for this
    subclass are air, nitrogen, CO2, water, and the inert gases, or mixtures
    solely composed of any of the above. Also excluded are NACL and
    carbohydrate materials, (e.g., sugars, gums, etc). However, mixtures of
    carbohydrates together with NACL are proper herein. Also excluded are the
    ordinary pickling or curling compositions when the claims are not limited
    to any particular composition.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of chemical agents proper herein are agents which
    prevent or protect against undesirable sprouting, loss of texture, foam,
    spreadability, oxidation, gravitational separation, coagulation,
    pesticides, clouding or turbidity, viscosity change, emulsion destruction,
    etc.

    (3)     Processes proper for this subclass include (A).  Inhibiting an
    ingredient which is later to be incorporated into a finished mercantile
    food; (B). Inhibiting for perfecting a further processing step; (C).
    Inhibiting a mercantile food, per se; (D). Contacting an ingredient which
    acts as a carrier with a chemical agent, which carrier is then added to a
    diverse food to effect inhibiting therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262+,   for processes for preserving or maintaining the color of a food by
    an additive process.

    302+,   for processes of coating a food base with a liquid in general, and
    subclass 310, in particular for coating to effect a preserving of a food
    base.

    378,    for processes of adding carbohydrate material to a plant tissue
    containing food.

    382,    for processes of adding a salt solution to a nondisruptive meat
    containing product.

    392+,   for processes of preserving a food by packaging or wrapping.

    418+,   for processes of storing solid foods under controlled conditions.

    425,    for processes of extracting a constituent which may be a
    contaminant.

    438+,   for processes of cooking or treating foods with a heated glyceridic
    fat or oil.

    443+,   for processes of preserving food by dehydrating.

    478+,   for processes of removing a constituent of a solid food which may
    act as a contaminent.

    506+,   for processes of preserving foods by blanching or cooking with an
    aqueous material.

    520+,   for preserving foods involving heating, including pasteurizing or
    sterilizing.

    524,    for preserving foods by freezing or cooling.



    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 1+ for disinfecting, deodorizing,
    preserving, or sterilizing processes of general utility.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, for mere
    methods of preserving a food product by the use of a biocide.


CLS 426/322
TXT Processes under subclass 321 wherein the food material is contacted with a
    heavy metal, or a compound thereof i.e., a metal having a specific gravity
    greater than four.


CLS 426/323
TXT Processes under subclass 321 involving a chemical agent which is either
    layered on, or impregnated into, an edible base.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    for an inedible feature associated with a preserving agent.

    393,    for packaging methods involving rigid liquid impermeable containers
    having plural layered walls.

    410+,   for packaging methods involving a flexible walled wrapper or
    container.


CLS 426/324
TXT Processes under subclass 321 which includes the step of packaging.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    392+,   for food packaging methods in general.


CLS 426/325
TXT Processes under subclass 324 wherein the package is subjected to a heat
    treatment.


CLS 426/326
TXT Processes under subclass 324 wherein the chemical agent is effective in
    destroying, controlling, or inhibiting extraneous noxious organisms or
    pests.


CLS 426/327
TXT Processes under subclass 321 including the step of lowering the temperature
    of the food to or below 32_ F either before, or subsequent to, the
    treatment with the chemical agent; or treating a food whose temperature is
    equal to, or less than, 32_ F with a chemical agent.

    (1)     Note.  Absent a specific temperature, the term "freezing" is
    sufficient to place a patent within this subclass.


CLS 426/329
TXT Processes under subclass 321 wherein a food foam is protected against
    deterioration, or wherein a food is protected against undesirable foam
    formation, or wherein a food is protected against undesirable gushing.


CLS 426/330
TXT Processes under subclass 321 wherein a food in liquid form is contacted
    with a chemical agent.

    (1)     Note.  The final desired product after the liquid contact step may
    exist in a different physical state than as a liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    422+,   for methods of removing haze from a liquid food by a nonchemical
    reactive process.


CLS 426/330.1
TXT Processes under subclass 330 wherein the treated liquid has egg material as
    the basic ingredient.


CLS 426/330.2
TXT Processes under subclass 330 wherein the treated liquid has lacteal
    material as the basic ingredient.


CLS 426/330.3
TXT Processes under subclass 330 wherein the liquid is intended for drinking
    purposes and may be in an undiluted form.


CLS 426/330.4
TXT Processes under subclass 330.3 wherein the liquid contains ethyl alcohol.


CLS 426/330.5
TXT Processes under subclass 330.3 wherein the liquid is the juice of a fruit
    or vegetable.


CLS 426/330.6
TXT Processes under subclasses 330 wherein the liquid has triglycerdic oil as
    the basic ingredient.


CLS 426/331
TXT Processes under subclass 321 wherein tissue containing animal derived
    flesh, citrus fruit, cereal seed, or bean material, is acted on by a
    chemical agent.


CLS 426/332
TXT Processes under subclass 331 wherein the chemical agent contacts animal
    flesh.


CLS 426/333
TXT Subject matter under subclass 331 wherein the chemical agent contacts a
    citrus fruit or a citrus fruit derived material.


CLS 426/334
TXT Processes under subclass 321 wherein a chemical agent contacts a lacteal
    derived material.


CLS 426/335
TXT Processes under subclass 321 wherein the chemical agent is effective in
    destroying, controlling, or inhibiting noxious organisms or pests.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses for biocidal compositions and for the mere application of a
    biocidal material to a food.


CLS 426/383
TXT Processes under subclass 665 involving the making of a decorative or
    distinctive marking on a food material or food containing package, or the
    treatment of an article containing indicia or ornamentation.

    (1)     Note.  The application of a score or break line is considered
    indicia for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250+,   for a method of coloring a food using a dye or pigment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, appropriate subclasses for a method of applying
    indicia to a package or the use of an indicia containing wrapper.

    101,    Printing, appropriate subclasses for printing processes, per se.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    277 for applying a design or character to a lamina.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclass 134 for processes of
    making paper combined with a printing step.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 132, for a method of applying a design or indicia.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 10.2
    for a printed or embossed unitary dosage form with an identification or
    warning feature and subclass 467, for other printed, embossed, grooved, or
    perforated tablets or pills.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 256+, for general processes of
    forming non uniform coatings.


CLS 426/384
TXT Processes under subclass 665 wherein a food which contains water in the
    frozen state is subjected to a treatment to remove some or all of the
    frozen water contained therein, e.g., freeze-drying, fractional
    crystallization, etc.

    (1)     Note.  The water removed may have been originally present in the
    food or may have been added to the food.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 284+ for
    processes wherein a frozen mixture is dried by subliming a constituent
    while the mixture remains frozen.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 58 for processes wherein a solution or
    mixture of constituents is cooled sufficiently to solidify a constituent
    which is then removed from the mixture.


CLS 426/385
TXT Processes under subclass 384 wherein the final desired product exists as a
    solid at ambient conditions.

    (1)     Note.  The final desired product is not necessarily in the same
    physical state as the product that remains after the freeze separation.


CLS 426/386
TXT Processes under subclass 665 which include separating a volatile fraction
    from an edible and combining the separated fraction with a edible.

    (1)     Note.  The entire amount of separated fraction need not be added to
    the food.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312+,   for a process of contacting an exteriorly produced gas with a good
    material.

    388,    for a process of combining a flavor fraction with a food involving
    no separation step prior to the combining step.

    478+,   for a separation process involving a volatile flavor fraction
    without a combining step.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, subclasses 236.5+ for a process of
    preparing an essence of undetermined constitution from a naturally
    occurring substance.


CLS 426/387
TXT Processes under subclass 386 wherein the edible treated for the removal of
    a volatile fraction is a liquid material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    475+,   for separation processes involving gas-liquid contact.


CLS 426/388
TXT Processes under subclass 665 which do not involve a separatory operation
    prior to the combining of several different materials from a single source.

    (1)     Note.  The removal of water, or the mere subdividing of a food
    prior to the combining operation is not considered a separatory operation.
    The type of separation that is excluded is to a separation of various
    constituents of a food, e.g., peeling, coring, pitting, extracting, etc.

    (2)     Note.  "Different" includes distinct treatments on the same type of
    food, (e.g., combining milks which have been heat treated at different
    temperatures, etc.) or combining distinct portions of food (e.g., large and
    small pieces, etc.)

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    425+,   for processes of using a liquid as an extracting medium.

    472+,   for processes of preparing a dry product by heating or dehydrating
    including the separation of a constituent.

    478+,   for processes that may involve separating a starting material into
    plural different constituents and which may involve a recombining operation.


CLS 426/389
TXT Processes under subclass 665 involving the, per se, removal of a molded
    food from a mold, or the, per se, removal of a food from a receptacle or
    container, e.g., package, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    392+,   for the treatment of a packaged food product.

    512+,   for the molding, shaping, or casting of a food.


CLS 426/390
TXT Processes under subclass 665 involving the preparation of a finished food
    which possesses a utility diverse to its normal food function, e.g., candle
    holder, ice cream cone, confectionary amusement device, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for an imitated, simulated, ornamental three dimensional product,
    or confectionary product having child-oriented utility.

    138+,   for an edible casing or container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    D 1,    Edible Products, various subclasses for products having a simulated
    form or motif.


CLS 426/391
TXT Processes under subclass 390 wherein the product is made from a dough or
    batter.

    (1)     Note.  Dough or batter products include those products that involve
    a dough or batter stage in the preparation of the final product.


CLS 426/392
TXT Processes under subclass 665 involving (1) completely enrobing a food with
    a nonedible packaging material which packaging material is solid at the
    time of packaging, or (2) the treatment of a food which is completely
    enrobed in an edible material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for methods of packaging of chewing gum.

    8,      for a fermentation process in a package.

    302+,   for the coating of a solid food with a strippable film forming
    liquid.

    389,    for the, per se, removal of food from a package or container.

    418+,   for the storage of a solid food in a nonconsumer container.

    420+,   for a process of preparing a food which may not be completely
    enrobed by an inedible wrapper.

    521+,   for sterilizing or pasteurizing a food in a nonmercantile container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclass 3, for a food packaging operation absent
    any food working operation, (e.g., cooking, comminuting, etc.)


CLS 426/393
TXT Processes under subclass 392 involving a step of lowering the temperature
    of the food to 32_ F, or of treating a food material with an agent whose
    temperature at the time of contacting the food is at a temperature equal to
    or less than 32_ F, or of treating a food package whose temperature is 32_
    F or less.

    (1)     Note.  The term "freezing" is sufficient for placement of a
    document herein.

    (2)     Note.  The cooling step may be prior, during, or subsequent to
    packaging.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration; subclass 60 for the freezing and packaging of food
    involving the absence of a food working or treating step, (e.g., cooking,
    comminuting, etc).


CLS 426/394
TXT Processes under subclass 392 wherein the package, per se, or a portion
    thereof is prepared which is particularly suited as by its structure to
    perform a separate function, other than its packaging function, and wherein
    this function is effected by the user subsequent to the packaging step.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are methods of preparing
    containers which act as molds and thereby mold a plastic food; or
    containers which are made of transparent material so that the contents are
    clearly visible; also excluded are containers designed as by the materials
    of which they are made or by the use of mold release liners to dispense
    food materials e.g., nondrip bottles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    418+,   for a process of keeping a prepared food warm by storing it in an
    insulated container.


CLS 426/395
TXT Processes under subclass 392 wherein the package structurally cooperates
    with gases naturally generated by the food, e.g., vented packages,
    expansion of packages, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    397+    and 410+, for a process involving a gas permeable container wall
    structure.

    403+,   for a process of heating a vented package.


CLS 426/396
TXT Processes under subclass 392 involving the association of a food with a
    rigid receptacle or rigid support, said rigid receptacle or rigid support
    being covered by a flexible wrap in whole or part, or by a container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    397+,   for a process involving the placement of a form retaining closure
    on a rigid container body.

    411,    for a process of packaging involving a food enclosed in a flexible
    wrap covered by a liquid pervious rigid container.


CLS 426/397
TXT Processes under subclass 392 involving packaging a food in a rigid, liquid
    impermeable, container body, (e.g., canning, bottling, etc).

    (1)     Note.  Paper receptacles which are rigid are not considered liquid
    impermeable unless there is a specific disclosure that they have been
    treated to render them liquid impermeable.


CLS 426/398
TXT Processes under subclass 397 involving a rigid liquid impermeable container
    wall, which is (1) either lined or coated with a nonedible either partially
    or completely; or (2) contains a nonedible in its interior which is other
    than a part of the container wall.

    (1)     Note.  The additional layer must be different in chemical structure
    than the container wall and it can be added after the food is enclosed in
    the container, e.g., sealing by coating of an irregularity in the container
    wall, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403,    for processes involving sealing of a vent hole in a rigid liquid
    impermeable container.


CLS 426/399
TXT Processes under subclass 397 involving the delivery of a pretreated food to
    a container and wherein said pretreatment has reduced the microbiological
    load of the food, e.g., pasteurization, commercial sterilization, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Sterilization includes within its meaning commercial
    sterilization which is the treatment of a food to the extent necessary to
    preserve it in a normal canning process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236,    for a method of treating a gas by electrical or wave energy and
    then contacting a food with said treated gas.

    237+,   for the direct application of electrical or wave energy to a food.

    312,    for contacting a food with an exteriorly applied gas, in particular
    subclass 316 for a packaging method or treatment.

    321+,   for a process for inhibiting chemical or physical change of a food
    by contacting the food with a change inhibiting chemical agent, in
    particular subclasses 324+ for a method involving packaging.

    521+,   for the heat treatment of a food to effect sterilization or
    pasteurization.


CLS 426/400
TXT Processes under subclass 399 wherein the treated food has water removed
    therefrom.


CLS 426/401
TXT Processes under subclass 399 involving the heat treatment of a filled,
    sealed container, wherein the heat source is other than from the contents
    of the container and the temperature of the sealed container is either
    maintained or raised above the sealing temperature.


CLS 426/402
TXT Processes under subclass 397 involving either (1) the intentional
    association of water together in a package with a normally solid foodstuff;
    or (2) the removal of nonadded water from a normally solid foodstuff.

    (1)     Note.  Sealing of a food in a can with water therein so that the
    water therein can be subsequently utilized to cook the food is proper for
    this subclass. Also proper herein is the addition of steam after an
    external vacuumizing operation if the intent is to package the steam with
    the food.

    (2)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass is, (A) the use of water to
    merely cook or clean a food; (B) a process of using steam to merely
    eliminate air or other gases; (c) An extraction method using water as the
    extracting means; (D) the removal of water from a solid food and the
    subsequent addition of an equal amount of water to the solid food; (E) the
    roasting of a food without an indication that a drying is being effected;
    (F) batter and other foods which are normally not solids.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    384+,   for a process of freeze-drying or freeze concentrating.

    426,    for a process of removing water from a solid using a nonglyceridic
    liquid as an extracting material.

    443+,   for a process of preparing or treating a dry material.

    506+,   for the treatment of a solid material with an aqueous material.

    519,    for a process of separating a starting material into plural
    different constituents.

    520+,   for a process of heating a food.


CLS 426/403
TXT Processes under subclass 397 involving the the heating of food in either a
    (1) specially designed container which vents outwardly when a positive
    pressure is attained in the container with the application of heat or (2)
    container having a restricted opening which is less than the normal opening
    for the introduction of the food material into the container so that
    contained gases can be removed in the heating process through this opening
    and the opening can be subsequently sealed.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded herefrom are processes of piercing a food package
    having no vent holes to relieve pressure build up therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    395,    for processes of packaging food in a package having structure which
    cooperates with a food generated gas, e.g., roasted coffee packages, etc.


CLS 426/404
TXT Processes under subclass 397 involving the step of mechanically vacuumizing
    the headspace of a container holding food, or otherwise associating with a
    food containing receptacle an exteriorly applied zone of reduced pressure
    which reduces the amount of air in the voided space of the container.

    (1)     Note.  Processes involving the step of exhausting the air from the
    headspace by steam generated from the heated contained food are excluded
    from this subclass.


CLS 426/405
TXT Processes under subclass 397 involving the agitation, vibrating, or violent
    mixing of a sealed container of food.

    (1)     Note.  The mere conveying of a sealed container of food from one
    location to another is not sufficient for this subclass.  There must be a
    positive disclosure of agitation, vibrating, or violent mixing of the
    contents within the sealed container.


CLS 426/406
TXT Processes under subclass 405 involving rolling the sealed container along
    its horizontal axis.


CLS 426/407
TXT Processes under subclass 397 involving the heat treatment of a filled
    sealed container wherein the heat source is other than from the contents of
    the container and the temperature of the sealed container is either
    maintained or raised above the sealing temperature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401+,   for a heat treatment of a sealed container containing a pasteurized
    or sterilized food.


CLS 426/408
TXT Processes under subclass 407 involving heat transfer to a filled sealed
    container through the use of materials which are other than water, per se,
    in any of its physical forms, nitrogen, CO2, air, the inert gases, or
    mixtures solely composed of any of the above.


CLS 426/409
TXT Processes under subclass 407 involving the treatment of lacteal materials.


CLS 426/410
TXT Processes under subclass 392 involving the encasing of a food within a
    pliant wrapper or container.


CLS 426/411
TXT Processes under subclass 410 involving a food encased in a flexible wrap
    located within a rigid container.


CLS 426/412
TXT Processes under subclass 410 involving the heat treatment of filled food
    containers.

    (1)     Note.  The heat treatment does not necessitate a sealed container.
    However, the final product must be completely enclosed in a packaging
    material.


CLS 426/413
TXT Processes under subclass 410 involving the filling of a preformed container
    or casing with a food, said container or casing having been formed into a
    physical shape such that it is designed to limit the movement of the food
    therein; or to the treatment of a food filled preformed container or casing.


CLS 426/414
TXT Processes under subclass 410 involving the shaping of a food in a mold, or
    the step of treating a food by a cutting operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    413+,   for the shaping of a food in a preformed container.


CLS 426/415
TXT Processes under subclass 410 involving the use of a specific packaging
    material defined in terms of either its properties, or the specific
    material which composes the wrapper or a part thereof, e.g., phosphoric
    acid impregnated wrapper, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132+,   for a wrapper or packaging material carrying food, food ingredient,
    or food preservative.


CLS 426/416
TXT Processes combined under subclass 665 having a step which is, per se, (1)
    not provided for in this class and (2) performs a function other than
    modifying the food.


CLS 426/417
TXT Processes under subclass 665 involving (1) the preparation or treatment of
    edible triglyceridic fats or oils; or (2) rendering processes to separate a
    triglyceridic fat or oil from a starting material.

    (1)     Note.  The rendering process to separate fat or an oil from a
    starting process includes the recovery of either or both of the separated
    fractions, i.e., (1) the fat or oil fraction, or (2) the residue of the
    rendering process.

    (2)     Note.  Cooking oil or shortening absent any other limitation will
    be regarded as glyceridic in nature and proper for this area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    362+,   for a process of preparing or treating an isolated glyceridic fat
    or oil by a chemical reaction or by a diverse permanent additive.

    429,    for an extraction process that may use a glyceridic fat or oil as
    an extracting medium.

    438+,   for a process of using a glyceridic fat or oil to heat treat a food.

    491,    for a method of separating cream from milk.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    554,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 2+ for the removal, recovery, or
    extraction of fats and oils.


CLS 426/418
TXT Processes under subclass 665 for:

    (1)     Storing a solid food in a nonmarketable nonconsumer container or
    environment closed to the atmosphere to either maintain the status quo of
    the food or to improve the food, e.g., insulated containers to keep heated
    food warm, etc.

    (2)     Storing a solid food with a nonfood which association improves the
    quality of the food, e.g., ripening of fruit, etc.

    (3)     Storing a solid food in a controlled nonpackage environment to
    either preserve or improve the food.

    (4)     Storing a solid food in specially treated containers.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are patents to a diversity of storage
    facilities including transportation tanks, silos, cold storage rooms, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    524,    for a process of freezing a food and maintaining the food in a
    frozen state.


CLS 426/419
TXT Processes under subclass 418 wherein the food material stored is either a
    fruit or vegetable product in its natural untreated state.


CLS 426/420
TXT Processes under subclass 665 involving the association of a food in its
    final marketable form with a nonedible feature.

    (1)     Note.  Certain patents herein are drawn to subcombinations of what
    are considered as being marketable items. For example, interleaved cheese
    slices having no exterior wrap, ice cream on a stick, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132+,   for a wrapper or packaging material carrying food, food ingredient,
    or food preservative.

    392+,   for encasing a food in a completely enclosed packaging material.

    418+,   for a process of treating a food under controlled conditions which
    may involve a nonedible feature.


CLS 426/421
TXT Processes under subclass 420 involving an inedible rigid member to support
    an attached food.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for food in association with a handle designed for safety on
    consumption.

    82+,    for a foraminous material infusion type, or foraminous container
    having a defined support means.

    134,    for a handle associated with a material proper for this class.


CLS 426/422
TXT Processes under subclass 665 involving the treatment of a liquid (other
    than water, per se, or a gas) which is subsequently removed from the
    treated liquid.

    (1)     Note.  Patents generally herein are concerned with removable of
    undesirables which cause turbidity, haze, or impair the transparency or
    translucency of a liquid.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass are methods involving the addition
    of a material to a solid food, conversion of the solid food to the liquid
    state (e.g., extract, etc.) and the removal of the added material.

    (3)     Note.  Processes of contacting of liquid foods with materials which
    are inert toward the food and which merely function as a physical barrier,
    e.g., mold, storage facility, container, receptacle, etc; or which contact
    the liquid so as to cool or heat; or which transport, e.g., pipe, tube,
    etc; or which manipulate, e.g., stirrer, centrifuge, etc, are excluded
    herefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7+,     for a fermentation method of treating a food.

    321+,   for a method of preventing a chemical or physical change in a food
    by using a change inhibiting chemical agent, and in particular subclass 330
    for treating a liquid food.

    342+,   for a method of treating a food involving a chemical reaction or
    the addition of a permanent additive.

    417,    for the treatment of a fat or oil with a transient additive.

    425+,   for a method of preparing an extract and then using said extract as
    an extracting medium.

    438+,   for a method of heat treating a dough or batter product by contact
    with a glyceridic fat or oil.


CLS 426/423
TXT Processes under subclass 422 involving the use of an inorganic silicon
    material, e.g., clay, hectorite, diatamaceous earth, bentonite, etc.


CLS 426/424
TXT Processes under subclass 422 involving the extraction of a constituent from
    a starting material utilizing a liquid as the extracting medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    425+,   appropriate subclass for an extraction process using a liquid as
    the extracting medium and for processes for treating a solid material which
    may contain a liquid component, in particular subclasses 431+, for a method
    of using water as the extracting medium and for a method of using an
    aqueous extract as the extracting medium for the same type of food
    material, e.g., aqueous coffee extract for use on coffee, etc.


CLS 426/425
TXT Processes under subclass 230 involving the extraction of a constituent from
    a starting material utilizing a liquid.

    (1)     Note.  The patents herein generally relate to the use of the
    solventizing action of liquids.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312+,   for the treatment of a food material with a gas which is other than
    air, CO2, Nitrogen, water, the inert gases or mixtures solely composed of
    these gases.

    422+,   for the treatment of a liquid extract with a solid or liquid proper
    for that subclass.

    438+,   for a method of removing water using a heated glyceridic fat or oil.

    442,    for the removal of adhering dirt or debris using an additive which
    is other than water.

    476,    for a separation process involving the contacting of steam with a
    liquid.

    506+,   for the removal of adhering dirt or debris, and for the treatment
    of a solid with steam.


CLS 426/426
TXT Processes under subclass 425 involving the treatment of a food with a
    nonglyceridic liquid to remove water therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    347,    for a method of frying a cereal dough or batter product involving a
    chemical reaction or diverse permanent additive.

    438+,   for the heat treatment of a food by a glyceridic fat or oil.


CLS 426/427
TXT Processes under subclass 425 for the treatment of a material to selectively
    remove a portion or substantially all of the caffein or tannin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, subclass 256 for caffein and
    derivatives thereof and subclass 473.5 for tannins and derivatives thereof.


CLS 426/428
TXT Processes under subclass 427 wherein an organic liquid is used as the
    extracting medium either alone or in admixture with an inorganic material.


CLS 426/429
TXT Processes under subclass 425 wherein an organic liquid is used as the
    extracting medium either alone or in admixture with an inorganic material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    417,    for a method of defatting involving an organic liquid.


CLS 426/430
TXT Processes under subclass 429 wherein the material treated is a seed or bean
    material having some of its original plant tissue.


CLS 426/431
TXT Processes under subclass 425 involving the treatment of a material using an
    aqueous liquid as the extracting medium.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes processes of using an aqueous extract
    of a food material as an extracting medium for the same type of food
    material; e.g., aqueous coffee extract for coffee, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    476,    for a separation process involving the contacting of steam with a
    liquid.

    506,    for the treatment of a solid with steam.


CLS 426/432
TXT Processes under subclass 431 where coffee is the material treated.


CLS 426/433
TXT Processes under subclass 432 involving the preparation of a coffee beverage
    of serving strength for immediate consumption, if desired, as contrasted to
    a product which may be marketed but which requires a further dilution or
    concentration.

    (1)     Note.  The patents in this subclass generally relate to methods of
    preparing a coffee brew in a specialized type of apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 279+ for coffee
    infusors.


CLS 426/434
TXT Processes under subclass 432 involving the extraction of coffee at at least
    two different temperatures.

    (1)     Note.  The temperature must be increased or decreased under
    controlled conditions so that the temperature is maintained for a definite
    period of time prior to the raising or lowering to another temperature.

    (2)     Note.  The mere recitation of a range of temperatures is not
    sufficient to be considered extraction at different temperatures.


CLS 426/435
TXT Processes under subclass 431 where tea, i.e., Camellia senesis, is the
    material treated.

    (1)     Note.  Tea, unqualified, as to species is within the scope of this
    subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Teas of the type included herein are congou, orange pekoe,
    souchong.


CLS 426/436
TXT Processes under subclass 431 involving the extraction of a cereal or a
    treated cereal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    478+,   for a method of lautering a cereal mash without a sparging
    operation.


CLS 426/437
TXT Processes under subclass 431 where animal meat, (e.g., fish, poultry,
    mammal, etc.) is the material treated.


CLS 426/438
TXT Processes under subclass 230 involving the heat treatment of a food by
    directly contacting the food with a glyceridic fat or oil.

    (1)     Note.  Fats or oils unqualified as to derivation or composition are
    considered as being glyceridic in nature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    342+,   for a method of cooking in a heated fat or oil so as to intentially
    incorporate a fat or oil into a food, in particular subclass 347 for the
    frying of a formed farinaceous cereal dough or batter product.

    426,    for a method of removing water by using a nonglyceridic material.

    520+,   for a method of heating a food by contacting a heated fat or oil
    against the exterior portion of a container holding a food.


CLS 426/439
TXT Processes under subclass 438 wherein the material treated is either a
    farinaceous cereal dough or batter product.


CLS 426/440
TXT Processes under subclass 439 wherein the direct contact with the glyceridic
    fat or oil effects an expansion or increase in the volume of the food.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    351,    for the puffing of a defined solid composition.

    445+,   for a process of preparing a dry product of increased size by a
    heating operation.


CLS 426/441
TXT Processes under subclass 438 involving a treatment of the food by the
    contact thereof with water, or the treatment of a food which has been
    prehydrated.

    (1)     Note.  For the most part, the water treating step is precedent to
    the step of contacting the food with the glyceridic fat or oil material.


CLS 426/442
TXT Processes under subclass 665 involving the contacting of foods with a
    chemical material which is diverse from the food and is other than water in
    any of its physical forms, nitrogen, air, carbon dioxide, the inert gases,
    or mixtures composed solely of these materials.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    Appropriate subclasses depending on the manipulate operative involved, for
    processes involving cooling, heating, molding, cutting, slicing,
    comminuting, separating, filtering, transporting, storing, pressing, etc.


CLS 426/443
TXT Processes under subclass 665 involving (1) an operation to reduce the
    moisture content of a food to produce a dry material, or (2) the addition
    of minute amounts of water to a dry food wherein the final product still
    retains its dry characteristics, or (3) the treatment of a dry food product
    wherein the dry characteristics are retained, or (4) the addition of water
    with its subsequent removal to result in a dry product.

    (1)     Note.  Within the scope of dry are products which are as a complete
    product free or relatively free from water and under normal ambient
    conditions involve such characteristics, but not necessarily each and every
    one, as free flowing, dry to the touch, nontacky or sticky, nonadhesive,
    granular, powder, tablet, flake, flour, meal, particulate, pellet, finely
    divided, etc.


CLS 426/444
TXT Processes under subclass 443 involving the step of exposing the food
    material to a temperature of 32_F or less.

    (1)     Note.  The term "freezing" is sufficient for placing a document
    into this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    384+,   for a process of freeze-drying or freeze concentrating.


CLS 426/445
TXT Processes under subclass 443 involving the heat treatment of a solid food
    to effect an expansion or increase in the volume of the food, e.g.,
    puffing, popping, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141,    for a solid edible in an expanded state.

    163+,   for a foam or foamable composition.

    351,    for a method of puffing a solid defined composition.

    453+,   for a method of uniting particulate material to form a larger unit
    which has voids between the individual particles.

    470,    for a method of drying a foamed or gasified material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 41+ for processes including the step of forming pores or voids
    in an article or material, said pore forming being effected internally by
    occluding or incorporating void forming or void producing elements or
    ingredients randomly throughout the plastic article forming material.


CLS 426/446
TXT Processes under subclass 445 involving the treatment of products initially
    in the dough form.


CLS 426/447
TXT Processes under subclass 445 involving the treatment of a material by
    subjecting the material to exteriorly applied pressure, whether gaseous or
    other, and then suddenly releasing the pressure to effect an expansion of
    the treated material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 238+ for cereal puffing
    apparatus.


CLS 426/448
TXT Processes under subclass 447 involving the movement of a moisture
    containing material through a zone and mechanically generating compressive
    forces and heat, and then releasing the compressive forces by moving the
    material to a zone of less pressure whereby moisture entrained within the
    treated material is vaporized to effect an expansion of the treated
    material.


CLS 426/449
TXT Processes under subclass 447 involving the treatment of a cereal.


CLS 426/450
TXT Processes under subclass 445 involving the treatment of cereal derived
    material.


CLS 426/451
TXT Processes under subclass 443 involving the preparation or treatment of
    nonready to eat food which is prepared from a starch containing dough and
    which is later put in a consumable form by heating or cooking in an aqueous
    liquid.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass alimentary products are
    considered as being dry unless from the total disclosure there is an intent
    to keep them wet or moist.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158,    for an alimentary paste product.

    496,    for a process of preparing a farinaceous dough, batter, or pastry
    product.


CLS 426/452
TXT Processes under subclass 443 involving the preparation and treatment of
    cereal material in the form of relatively slender threads, fibers or
    shreds, whose width and thickness are generally of the same magnitude, and
    whose length is substantially greater than the thickness or width, and
    composites of such threads, fibers, and shreds whose identity is retained
    in the final product, e.g., shredded wheat biscuits, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137,    for a dry edible filament or filament composite.


CLS 426/453
TXT Processes under subclass 443 directed to the bonding to each other of
    individual distinct particles which are initially dry and where the final
    bonded product is dry.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147,    for a dry edible in the form of a tablet, pellet, or agglomerate.

    272,    for a process involving the adhesion of nondry foods using a base
    supplied constituent as the adhering material.

    273,    for a method of coating a nondry food which is other than animal
    flesh by a base supplied constituent.

    285,    for a method of agglomerating dry diverse edible particulate
    material to form a dry product.



    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 35+ takes compacting by mechanical interlock
    including the baling of hay.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 109+ for processes of forming articles by uniting discrete bulk
    assembled particles.


CLS 426/454
TXT Processes under subclass 453 wherein the association of particles is
    effected by mechanical pressure.


CLS 426/455
TXT Processes under subclass 443 involving the treatment of solid materials
    with added water in any of its diverse physical forms to result in a dry
    product, e.g., hydration, etc.

    (1)     Note.  "Superheated Steam" is proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    506+,   for the treatment of a food with an added aqueous material wherein
    dry characteristics are not found in the final food product.


CLS 426/456
TXT Processes under subclass 455 involving (1) a subsequent treatment of the
    food separate from the treatment with the aqueous material, which treatment
    is at a temperature above that of the aqueous treatment, and results in the
    forming of a dry product (2) a dehydration of the food material to produce
    a dry product.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes two or more distinct treatments in
    the presence of an aqueous material wherein the second or subsequent
    treatment is at a temperature higher than the preceding treatment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    455,    for a process of allowing a water treated food to rise to ambient
    temperature.


CLS 426/457
TXT Processes under subclass 456 involving the preparation of foods which are
    in their final form thin flattened pieces or layers normally of the size
    that they are consumed or treated for food use in bulk rather than as
    individual pieces, e.g., corn flakes, rolled oats, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    458,    for a method of preparing a cooked dough form, e.g., cookie,
    cracker, etc.

    459,    for a process of preparing a product in chip form from a starting
    cereal material.


CLS 426/458
TXT Processes under subclass 456 involving, (1) preparation of a cereal dough
    by the addition of water to cereal flour, or (2) treatment of a cereal
    dough with an aqueous material, or (3) treatment of a cooked cereal dough
    product, e.g., bread to make dried bread crumbs, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    446,    for puffing of a dough.

    451,    for preparation of a dry alimentary paste product.

    452,    for preparation of a dry cereal filament or filament composite.

    496+,   for the preparation of a nondry farinaceous dough, batter, or
    pastry product.


CLS 426/459
TXT Processes under subclass 456 wherein the material treated is an isolated
    tissue containing cereal seed or bean material.

    (1)     Note.  Isolated herein does not include a whole bean or cereal
    which exists in its natural state and as such still contains its seed
    nonremoved from the residue of the tissue of the bean or cereal, e.g.,
    beans in pod form, corn on the cob, etc.


CLS 426/460
TXT Processes under subclass 459 wherein the material treated is a whole cereal
    seed or bean material.

    (1)     Note.  The water treating operation must be performed on a whole
    seed or bean.  The final product, however, need not exist in whole form.

    (2)     Note.  To be classified as a whole seed or bean the endosperm or
    interior portion must exist in essentially the whole form, but the seed or
    bean need not contain such parts as the husk, skin bran, or germ portion.


CLS 426/461
TXT Processes under subclass 460 involving the contacting of a whole seed or
    bean material with externally applied steam.


CLS 426/462
TXT Processes under subclass 460 involving the treatment of a cereal seed.


CLS 426/463
TXT Processes under subclass 459 involving the treatment of cereal derived
    material.


CLS 426/464
TXT Processes under subclass 455 involving the treatment of a food material at
    any stage of its preparation to reduce its particle size.

    (1)     Note.  Merely removing the husk or skin portion from a food is not
    considered size reduction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    473,    for a process involving a size reducing step in preparing a dry
    food.

    518,    for a process involving size reduction.


CLS 426/465
TXT Processes under subclass 443 involving the preparation of dry products
    including the steps of either (1) treating at a temperature above that at
    which the material treated is kept or stored or (2) a dehydration or drying
    of the material.


CLS 426/466
TXT Processes under subclass 465 involving the treatment of an essentially dry
    product under dry heat and such elevated temperature conditions so as to
    effect a parching or change in the color of the food treated, e.g.,
    browning, etc.

    (1)     Note.  The terms browning, roasting, toasting and parching, per se,
    are sufficient to place a patent in this subclass if the final product is
    dry.


CLS 426/467
TXT Processes under subclass 466 in which the material treated is moved or held
    suspended by a vapor or gas current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 359 and see
    the search notes relating thereto.


CLS 426/468
TXT Processes under subclass 466 involving the application of compression on a
    material or the application of externally applied pressure.


CLS 426/469
TXT Processes under subclass 466 involving the treatment of a food material to
    remove an unwanted solid constituent or unwanted solid matter, said removal
    being more than the mere inherent removal of a solid that may accompany the
    heat processing operation.


CLS 426/470
TXT Processes under subclass 465 involving the heat treatment or dehydration of
    a foamed or intentionally gasified material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163,    for a foam or foamable type composition.

    312+,   for the contacting of a material with a gas which is other than
    air, Co2, steam, nitrogen, the inert gases, or mixtures composed solely of
    these gases.

    329+,   for a method of stabilizing a foam by using a chemical agent.

    474+,   for a process involving gas-liquid contact.


CLS 426/471
TXT Processes under subclass 465 involving the treatment of a food which at the
    stage of dehydration is a liquid or in a liquified state.

    (1)     Note.  Materials characterized in such terms as semi-fluid or
    semi-liquid are proper subject matter for this subclass.


CLS 426/472
TXT Processes under subclass 465 involving the removal of a constituent
    material from a food.


CLS 426/473
TXT Processes under subclass 465 involving the treatment of a food material at
    any stage in its preparation to reduce its particle size.

    (1)     Note.  Merely removing the husk or skin portion from a food is not
    considered size reduction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    464,    for a process of size reduction in the preparation of a dry
    material and which process also involves contact with water.

    518,    for a process involving size reduction.



CLS 426/474
TXT Processes under subclass 665 involving the overt treatment of a liquid with
    a gaseous material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes only those treatments wherein there
    is a desired and intentional contact between a gas and a liquid, e.g.,
    whipping, aerating, foaming, carbonating, steaming, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    487+,   for a method of removing air, unwanted gas, or an unwanted
    odoriferous material from a liquid, wherein the liquid treated may contact
    air.

    489,    for a method of removing a desired liquid from a solid wherein the
    desired liquid may have contacted air.

    492+,   for the vaporization of a liquid to effect a separation.

    506+,   for a method of contacting a solid food with steam.

    519,    for a method of mixing or agitation wherein air or a different gas
    may be inadvertently incorporated into a food.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 69+ for processes including agitating of
    a confined body of a material during freezing wherein air or gas is
    introduced into a material being frozen; subclass 121 for processes
    specialized to cooling a material involving gas-liquid contact.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 149+ for processes of gas
    separation involving liquid contacting.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclasses 47+ for methods of drying
    liquids.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclass 49 for processes
    directed to passing a normally gaseous substance through a material being
    distilled.


CLS 426/475
TXT Processes under subclass 474 involving the separation of a naturally
    occurring component or foreign matter from a starting liquid food, said
    separation either being effected by the contact of the starting food with a
    gaseous medium, or wherein contact with the gaseous medium is part of the
    overall separatory operation.


CLS 426/476
TXT Processes under subclass 475 wherein the gaseous medium is steam.


CLS 426/477
TXT Processes under subclass 474 involving the intentional charging of liquids
    with carbon dioxide or another gas to effect effervescence.


CLS 426/478
TXT Processes under subclass 665 involving the treatment of a food material to
    result in two or more different fractions.

    (1)     Note.  The separation operation may be preformed on the whole food
    or may be on part of an already separated food.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    443+,   for a method of preparing or treating a dry product by an operation
    that may involve a water removing step.

    506+,   for a method of removing adhering dirt or materials which are not
    natural to the food by the use of water.

    518,    for a method of subdividing a food into plural same constituents by
    cutting or comminuting.


CLS 426/479
TXT Processes under subclass 478 wherein the separation is effected on a solid
    food material and the material desired to be recovered is also solid.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes converting a solid food into the
    liquid state and treating the liquid to effect a removal, e.g., grinding
    meat to emulsion form, etc.


CLS 426/480
TXT Processes under subclass 479 wherein the solid food is derived from a
    mammal, or fowl, e.g., beef, pork, lamb, chicken, etc.


CLS 426/481
TXT Processes under subclass 479 involving the treatment of plant material.


CLS 426/482
TXT Processes under subclass 481 involving the treatment of a plant material to
    effect a separation of an outer layer from the body of the material.

    (1)     Note.  The complete removal of the outer layer is not a necessity
    for this subclass.  Incomplete removal of one or more outer layers is
    included within the scope of this subclass.


CLS 426/483
TXT Processes under subclass 482 wherein the outer covering is removed by an
    abrasive operation.


CLS 426/484
TXT Processes under subclass 481 involving the removal of a seed, the stone
    from a drupaceous fruit, a stem, or a core from a plant material.


CLS 426/485
TXT Processes under subclass 484 wherein a pit from a drupaceous fruit is
    removed.


CLS 426/486
TXT Processes under subclass 478 involving the treatment of food to remove air,
    unwanted gas, or unwanted odoriferous components.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    496+,   for a treatment of a dough product which may contain entrained
    gases.


CLS 426/487
TXT Processes under subclass 486 wherein the treatment is effected on a
    material which is a liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS:

    490+,   for a separatory operation involving a liquid starting material.


CLS 426/488
TXT Process under subclass 487 involving the treatment of a liquid to remove
    unwanted odor constituents.


CLS 426/489
TXT Process under subclass 478 involving the treatment of a solid plant
    material, in either whole form or reduced form, to express a desired and
    recovered liquid therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    490+,   for the treatment of liquids without initial removal of solid
    materials therefrom.


CLS 426/490
TXT Processes under subclass 478 wherein the starting material treated is
    liquid.

    (1)     Note.  The starting material must be in a liquid state, however,
    the treatment to effect separation may be on a different physical state of
    the liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    443+,   for a method of preparing or treating a dry product, in particular
    subclass 471, for a method of drying a liquid or liquified material.

    487+,   for a method of removing air, unwanted gas, or an unwanted
    odoriferous material from a liquid.

    489,    for a method of separating a liquid from a solid plant material
    with a subsequent separation step on the liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclasses 47+ for processes peculiar to
    drying or concentrating of solids held in solution or in suspension in a
    liquid, by the removal of the liquid.


CLS 426/491
TXT Processes under subclass 490 wherein the liquid separated is lacteal
    derived.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    336+,   for a process of preparing or treating butter and in particular for
    processes of recovering butterfat from butter.

    417,    for the separation of butterfat from cream. or milk.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 513+ for gravational
    milk and cream separators.


CLS 426/492
TXT Processes under subclass 490 involving the separation of a component of a
    liquid starting material by vaporizing the component, and recovering either
    or both, the vaporized component or the unvaporized residue.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    476,    for a method of contacting a liquid with steam so as to effect a
    separation.


CLS 426/493
TXT Processes under subclass 492 where an alcohol containing material is the
    starting liquid.


CLS 426/494
TXT Processes under subclass 493 wherein at least a portion of the vaporized
    fraction is recovered and is the desired fraction.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes the reintroduction of part of the
    vaporized portion after condensation into the residue of the vaporizing
    mass.


CLS 426/495
TXT Process under subclass 490 involving the treatment of a liquid starting
    material to fractionate the liquid so as to result in a solid and a liquid
    fraction.


CLS 426/496
TXT Processes under subclass 665 involving the preparation or treatment of a
    farinaceous dough, batter, or pastry product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19+,    for the preparation of a hydrated wheat flour system containing
    Saccharomyces cerevesiae involving the combining of diverse material or the
    use of a permanent additive.

    27,     for a method of treating a hydrated wheat flour system containing
    Saccharomyces cerevesiae.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, subclasses 1+, for a method of
    tearing or breaking.


CLS 426/497
TXT Subject matter under subclass 496 involving the treatment of a cooked
    product.


CLS 426/498
TXT Processes under subclass 496 involving the overt incorporation of
    extraneous air or other gaseous material into a dough material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312+,   for a method of contacting a food material with a gas which is
    other than air, carbon dioxide, steam, nitrogen, the invert gases, or
    mixtures solely composed of any of these gases.

    474+,   for the incorporation of gases into liquid materials.


CLS 426/499
TXT Processes under subclass 496 involving the preparation of treatment of a
    dough or batter product having an open ended cavity which is usually
    annular or ringed shaped in its cooked form.


CLS 426/500
TXT Processes under subclass 496 involving the treatment of dough so as to
    prepare a dough product which in its final form is coiled or twisted.

    (1)     Note.  To twist is to unite by winding one or more strands or
    filaments around itself or around another strand or filament.

    (2)     Note.  To coil is to wind into a ring or a spiral.


CLS 426/501
TXT Processes under subclass 500 wherein the dough in its final form is a
    coiled sheet product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    502,    for a dough sheeting process.


CLS 426/502
TXT Processes under subclass 496 including or involving the preparation of
    dough sheets, or laminated, or folded dough forms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    275,    for a process of laminating dough sheets using an extraneous
    binder, release agent, or diverse food material interposed between dough
    preforms.


CLS 426/503
TXT Processes under subclass 496 involving the treatment of a dough mass to
    prepare individual pieces, or to treat a dough piece so as to slit or to
    incise.


CLS 426/504
TXT Processes under subclass 496 involving the process of associating dough or
    batter constituents and physically manipulating them together usually so as
    to develop desired characteristics in the dough or batter mass, and wherein
    the manipulation is more than a mere mixing operation.


CLS 426/505
TXT Processes under subclass 496 involving the heat treatment of a dough,
    batter, or pastry product (1) in a substantially completely closed
    container, or (2) utilizing a coated surface in contact with a food, or (3)
    utilizing a foraminous surface in contact with a food material.

    (1)     Note.  Foraminous includes one or more openings in a wall portion.


CLS 426/506
TXT Processes under subclass 665 involving the direct contact of externally
    applied water in any of its physical forms with a food, e.g., steam,
    superheated steam, etc.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes the use of water to remove material
    which are not natural to the food, as well as processes of reconstitution,
    cooking, steaming and blanching.  It also includes processes of controlling
    relative humidity and hydrating operations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    443+,   for the preparation of a dry product which may involve the
    association of food with water, and in particular subclasses 455+ for a
    process directed to contacting of a food with an aqueous material.

    474+,   for a method involving gas-liquid contact, and in particular
    subclass 476 for a separation process involving steam as the gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, for a food washing process.


CLS 426/507
TXT Processes under subclass 506 wherein the material treated is an isolated
    tissue containing seed or bean material.

    (1)     Note.  Isolated herein does not include a whole fruit or vegetable
    which exists in its natural state and as such still contains its seed
    nonremoved from the residue of the tissue of the fruit or vegetable, e.g.,
    potato, orange, beans in pod form, corn on the cob, etc.

    (2)     Note.  To be classified as a whole seed or bean the endosperm or
    interior portion must exist in essentially the whole form, but the seed or
    bean need not contain such parts as the husk, skin, bran, or germ portions.


CLS 426/508
TXT Processes under subclass 507 wherein whole isolated seeds or beans are
    contacted with water so as to effect a cooking, blanching, or gelatinizing
    of the seed or bean material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    431+,   for a process of blanching in the sense of color removing.

    481+,   for a process of blanching in the sense of removing the outer
    covering or skin of a plant material.


CLS 426/509
TXT Processes under subclass 506 wherein water contacts a food material so as
    to effect a cooking or blanching of the food.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    431+,   for a process of blanching in the sense of color removal.

    481+,   for a process of blanching in the sense of removing the outer
    covering or skin of a plant material.


CLS 426/510
TXT Processes under subclass 509 wherein the water is in the form of steam.


CLS 426/511
TXT Processes under subclass 506 wherein the water is in the form of steam.


CLS 426/512
TXT Processes under subclass 665 involving a step of molding, casting, or
    shaping of foods into their final desired physical form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    for processes of molding, casting, or plastic shaping not provided for
    elsewhere.


CLS 426/513
TXT Processes under subclass 512 involving the treatment of flesh from a living
    animal to result in a shaped product.


CLS 426/514
TXT Processes under subclass 512 involving molding, casting, or shaping to
    result in a hollow, tubular, or open ended cavity containing product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    390+,   for a process of preparing or treating a food having diverse
    utility.

    451,    for the preparation of a dry alimentary paste product.

    499,    for a process of preparing or treating a farinaceous dough, batter,
    or pastry product which has an open ended cavity


CLS 426/515
TXT Processes under subclass 512 involving the treatment of a food in an
    initially liquid state.


CLS 426/516
TXT Processes under subclass 512 involving the formation of a shaped food body
    by forcing a food material through a confining orifice whereby the
    cross-sectional area of the extruded portion of the final product
    essentially corresponds to the dimensions of the orifice.


CLS 426/517
TXT Processes under subclass 512 involving the preparation of a food in the
    shape of a rod, strand, sheet, filament, or strip.


CLS 426/518
TXT Processes under subclass 665 involving the treatment of a solid food
    material to reduce the food or a component thereof in size, or to slit or
    incise a solid food material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    478+,   for a process of separating a starting material into plural
    different constituents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 13+, for a process of cutting through
    thicknesses of dough and paste not involving any molding or plastic flow
    except that which is incidental to the cutting operation.

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, subclasses 1+, for a method of
    tearing or breaking.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, for processes of
    severing a solid material into a number of smaller solid masses wherein no
    particular desired shape is imparted to the initial solid mass or the
    resulting smaller solid masses.

    452,    Butchering, appropriate subclasses for a cutting, severing, or
    slitting operation peculiar to butchering.


CLS 426/519
TXT Processes under subclass 665 involving the treatment of a food to purposely
    mix or agitate, or otherwise to physically manipulate, usually so as to
    develop a desired characteristic such as uniformity or homogenity.


CLS 426/520
TXT Processes under subclass 665 involving the heating of a food or a part
    thereof to a temperature in excess of normal ambient room temperature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    506+,   for a process of contacting a food with water.

    524,    for a process of raising the temperature of a product in a cooled
    state up to and including normal ambient room temperature.


CLS 426/521
TXT Processes under subclass 520 wherein the heating effects a pasteurizing or
    sterilizing of the food material.


CLS 426/522
TXT Processes under subclass 521 wherein the food treated is lacteal in nature.


CLS 426/523
TXT Processes under subclass 520 wherein the heating effects a partial or
    complete cooking of the food material.


CLS 426/524
TXT Processes under subclass 230 involving (1) the lowering of the temperature
    of the food material to below ambient room temperature, or (2) the
    treatment of a food material whose temperature is below ambient room
    temperature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    393,    for the treatment of a package whose temperature is below 32_ F.

    418+,   for a cold storage method other than a method of storing a solid
    food in a frozen condition.


CLS 426/530
TXT Processes under the class definition for treating butter or a butter
    substitute to remove undesirable materials therein to bring the same to a
    usable condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    664+,   for processes of preparing or treating lacteal butter and the
    substitute therefor.


CLS 426/531
TXT Processes under class definition involving the compounding, treating, or
    preparing food materials which includes either, (1) specified chemical
    reaction, (2) the admixture of diverse food materials, or (3) the use of a
    permanent additive.  Also the materials, commodities, etc., produced by
    said processes or other products, per se.

    (1)     Note.  With the exception of subclasses 561-563, excluded herefrom
    as being an additive for this subclass, (or as a material that can cause a
    chemical reaction by addition), or as a diverse food material, are water,
    carbon dioxide, nitrogen, the inert gases, or mixtures solely composed of
    these materials.

    (2)     Note.  A process for preparing a mixture containing constituents
    derived from species of the same genus or plant or animal is considered a
    mixture proper for this subclass.  In this regard a mixture of Rome or
    Delicious apples or a mixture of milks derived from different species of
    cows would be proper herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    388,    for a process of combining same species food materials or wherein
    the disclosure is silent as to the derivation of the food.


CLS 426/532
TXT Products under subclass 531 having a material functioning to destroy,
    control or inhibit undesirable living organisms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    321+,   for processes, involving the use of a biocide or biostat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, for a biocide
    in combination with a food wherein the food acts as a carrier for the
    biocide or biostat, or a biocide or biostat, per se, or the mere
    application of a biocide or biostat to food.


CLS 426/533
TXT Subject matter under subclass 531 involving the reaction of two or more
    materials of known or unknown chemical constitution to obtain a flavor or
    unknown or unidentified chemical constitution, products of such reaction,
    and mixture of such reaction products with materials proper for this Class,
    426, e.g., food, carrier, etc.


CLS 426/534
TXT Subject matter under subclass 531 involving the association of a food
    product with an organic material of known chemical structure and which
    either flavors the food or improves its flavor.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes odor improvers.

    (2)     Note.  Not included within the confines of this subclass are the
    ordinary food acidulants, i.e., citric, adipic, fumaric, malic, and
    tartaric acids; sugars and carbohydrates, organic artificial sweetening
    agents of known chemical structure; and mono sodium glutamate (MSG).
    Compositions containing any of the above are classified below in the
    schedule on some other basis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    548,    for noncarbohydrate sweeteners.

    590+,   for beverage or beverage concentrated.

    600,    for hop derived ingredient.

    638,    for plant material in the form of a spice, herb, or condiments
    thereof.

    650,    for flavor, flavor adjunct, acidulent or condiment. 658, for
    carbohydrate materials.


CLS 426/535
TXT Subject matter under subclass 534 wherein the organic material contains a
    sulfur atom.


CLS 426/536
TXT Subject matter under subclass 534 the organic material contains a ring
    structure containing dissimilar composed of carbon atoms and one or more
    other atoms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    535,    for sulfur containing heterocyclic compound.


CLS 426/537
TXT Subject matter under subclass 536 wherein the ring structure contains a
    nitrogen atom.


CLS 426/538
TXT Subject matter under subclass 534 wherein the organic material consists of
    closed carbon chains in which the ring members are all carbon.


CLS 426/539
TXT Products under subclass 531 involving a food composition or additive
    therefor containing a decolorizing agent.

    (1)     Note.  A food composition where the decolorizing agent is in a
    reacted state, e.g., a bleached food.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    253+,   for processes involving bleaching.


CLS 426/540
TXT Products under subclass 531 involving a food composition or additive
    therefor containing a named dye or pigment.

    (1)     Note.  A food composition containing two or more additives which
    will react or later react with each other to form a dye or pigment is
    proper in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250,    for process of dyeing or pigmenting food material.

    652,    for additives for meat products which react with meat pigments to
    give desired colored results.


CLS 426/541
TXT Subject matter under subclass 531 involving the association of a food with
    a compound or composition which preserves or protects the food against
    deterioration due to the presence of air or oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  Placement of a patent herein requires (1) A claim which
    recites the added material to be an antioxidant or that the food material
    is subject to oxidation, or (2) disclosure that the added material
    functions as an antioxidant.

    (2)     Note.  A synergist or potentiator for an antioxidant is considered
    to be an active ingredient for this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 397+, for compositions specialized and
    designed for use as antioxidants.

    554,    Organic Compounds, for the subject matter of that class in
    association with a preservative, particularly subclasses 2+, for a fat or
    oil with a preservative.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclasses 1+ for a hydrocarbon
    mixed with a preservative, e.g., an olefin polymerization retarder, etc.


CLS 426/542
TXT Subject matter under subclass 541 wherein the antioxidant active material
    or at least one of a mixture of active antioxidant is a plant or animal
    material of undetermined chemical structure.


CLS 426/543
TXT Subject matter under subclass 542 wherein the material is derived from
    edible grain of the gramineous plants.


CLS 426/544
TXT Subject matter under subclass 541 wherein the antioxidant or at least one
    of a mixture of active antioxidants is an organic chemical compound of
    known chemical structure.


CLS 426/545
TXT Subject matter under subclass 544 wherein the active antioxidant compound
    contains a ring structure which is solely composed of carbon atoms and at
    least one atom of sulfur, nitrogen, oxygen, selenium, or tellurium and the
    salts thereof.


CLS 426/546
TXT Subject matter under subclass 544 which contains as an active antioxidant a
    known organic compound which is solely composed of the atoms of carbon,
    hydrogen, and oxygen.


CLS 426/547
TXT Subject matter under subclass 544 wherein the organic antioxidant contains
    at least one phosphorus or sulfur atom.


CLS 426/548
TXT Subject matter under subclass 531, involving compositions which do not have
    carbohydrate base and add a sweet taste to the food material or a food
    material containing same.

    (1)     Note.  Noncarbohydrate sweeteners and mixed with a carbohydrate
    e.g., cyclamate with lactose, in proper subject matter for this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    658+,   for a sweetener involving a sugar or carbohydrate containing
    material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, subclasses 29-23, for sweetening
    compositions composed solely of sugars or carbohydrates.


CLS 426/549
TXT Subject matter under Subclass 531 wherein the basic ingredient is amylum
    (i.e., a carbohydrate made from plant cells, seeds, tubers and other plants
    e.g., rice, corn, wheat, potatoes, and many vegetables) and in the form of
    a pourable mixture, a soft pasty mass, a finished baked product or any
    variations of any of the named forms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    496+,   for other processes of treating or preparing a farinaceous dough,
    batter, or pastry product,e.g., pie, etc.


CLS 426/550
TXT Subject matter under subclass 549 wherein the base material is derived from
    material other than edible grain form gramineous plants.


CLS 426/551
TXT Subject matter under subclass 549 containing chemical agents which under
    conditions of use will produce a gas.


CLS 426/552
TXT Subject matter under subclass 551 wherein the product produced at some
    stage of its manufacture was or capable of being in a pourable form.


CLS 426/553
TXT Subject matter under subclass 552 wherein the batter product contains fats
    or oils of the fatty acid type, e.g., lard, etc.

    (1)     Note.  The recitation of a "shortening", absent a specific
    statement to the contrary, will be regarded to be a triglycerdic material.


CLS 426/554
TXT Subject matter under subclass 553 wherein the product mixture is
    substantially free of moisture.


CLS 426/555
TXT Subject matter under subclass 549 wherein the product mixture is
    substantially free of moisture.


CLS 426/556
TXT Subject matter under subclass 549 made of paste of the pie crust type, etc.


CLS 426/557
TXT Subject matter under subclass 549 involving nonready to eat starch
    containing dough paste products which are put in a consummable form by
    cooking in a aqueous medium etc.


CLS 426/558
TXT Subject matter under subclass 549 containing egg material usually from
    domesticated fowl.


CLS 426/559
TXT Subject matter under subclass 549 which is in an expanded state.


CLS 426/560
TXT Subject matter under subclass 549 wherein the product is in the form of a
    flake, chip, filament, sheet or pellet.


CLS 426/561
TXT Subject matter under subclass 531 involving a product in the form of a
    gaseous mixture or gas generating agent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61+,    for dormant or active fermenting compositions which liberate a gas
    as the result of a fermentation reaction.


CLS 426/562
TXT Subject matter under subclass 561 consisting of materials having reactant
    components which contacted with water or other liquid react to form a gas.


CLS 426/563
TXT Subject matter under subclass 562 wherein at least one component contains a
    phosphorus atom.


CLS 426/564
TXT Subject matter under subclass 531 involving liquid compositions which are
    gasified or are to be gasified with air or any other gas so as to form a
    foam.

    (1)     Note.  A true foam is a two-phase system composed of gas or vapor
    as the dispersed phase and a liquid as the continuous phase.  For purposes
    of this subclass the noncontinuous phase can also contain a solid in
    addition to the gas.

    (2)     Note.  Materials which are liquid at ambient temperature but which
    attain a different physical state upon temperature fluctuation are regarded
    as liquids for this subclass.  An example of this is ice cream which is a
    liquid at ambient temperature.

    (3)     Note.  Liquid compositions which are described as being whippable,
    beatable, aeratable, fluffable, or which have already been whipped, beaten,
    aerated, or fluffed are proper herein.  Included within this subclass are
    meringues, souffles, chiffons and marshmallow.

    (4)     Note.  To be classified herein there must be a specific intent to
    have incorporated or to incorporate a gas into a liquid to form a foam.
    Products made by mere mixing of a liquid with air or any gas with no intent
    to incorporate a gas therein but merely to homogenize the liquid or to
    treat the liquid by contact with the gas are not proper for this subclass,
    and have been classified below, on some other basis.

    (5)     Note.  A dry composition wherein water or lacteal fluid or other
    aqueous fluid must be added so as to solubilize the dry composition and
    thereby prepare a liquid which can exist as the continuous phase of a foam
    is proper herein.


CLS 426/565
TXT Subject matter under subclass 564 involving products which are in a frozen
    state or which are intended to be frozen.

    (1)     Note.  Ice cream, per se, or ice cream mix is considered proper
    herein even when the claim is devoid of stating foaming or aerating.


CLS 426/566
TXT Subject matter under subclass 565 wherein the material contains a
    carboxylic acid ester other than a triglyceridic, e.g., monogly cerides,
    polyglycerol ester of fatty acids, etc., and usually functioning as an
    emulsifier.


CLS 426/567
TXT Subject matter under subclass 565 wherein the material contains a
    carbohydrate other than sugar, e.g., starch, gum, etc.


CLS 426/568
TXT Subject matter under subclass 564 wherein the composition contains an
    ingredient derived from a poultry or fowl egg.


CLS 426/569
TXT Subject matter under subclass 564 involving a beverage which has a desired
    foam characteristic.

    (1)     Note.  Most of the patents herein involve the stabilization of the
    foam of an alcoholic beverage.


CLS 426/570
TXT Subject matter under subclass 564 involving a composition of a dairy cream
    or topping, e.g., dried emulsion, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98,     dried emulsions wherein a fat is encapsulated with a solid
    material, e.g., milk solids, gelatin, carbohydrates, etc.


CLS 426/571
TXT Subject matter under subclass 564 wherein the material is a marshmallow or
    composition having a light delicate texture usually achieved by adding a
    whipped agent.


CLS 426/572
TXT Subject matter under subclass 564 which include cream filler, fondant,
    icing, and confections.

    (1)     Note.  Cream fillers are generally a mixture of a predominate
    amount of fat and sugar and may include milk, nuts, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    660,    for confection material which is not aerated or foamed.


CLS 426/573
TXT Subject matter under subclass 531 involving gellable mixes and the
    resulting gel.

    (1)     Note.  Compositions within the purview of the term "gel" are
    puddings, custards, jams, jellies, and marmalades.

    (2)     Note.  Classification in this subclass is on the base of (1) a
    claim to a gelled or gellable product, or (2) a teaching in the disclosure
    that the composition is a gellable material. The gellable material,
    however, must be in a state where only the gelling need occur or where an
    aqueous fluid, such as fruit juice, a water solution of sugar or water per
    se, must be added in order to form a gelled product.


CLS 426/574
TXT Subject matter under subclass 573 wherein the gel is or contains meat, meat
    extract or a meat analog, i.e., simulated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    802,    for cross-reference art collection of simulated animal flesh.


CLS 426/575
TXT Subject matter under subclass 573 originating from any of the plants (e.g.,
    algin, irish moss, carrageenan, agar, etc, and derivatives thereof, which
    grow in water, e.g., sea, ocean, etc.


CLS 426/576
TXT Subject matter under subclass 573 wherein the gellable ingredient is
    gelatin or a derivative thereof.


CLS 426/577
TXT Subject matter under subclass 573 wherein the gellable ingredient is pectin
    or derivative thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter containing a natural fruit gel or a gel
    containing natural fruit is proper subject matter for this subclass.


CLS 426/578
TXT Subject matter under subclass 573 wherein the gelling agent is a starch or
    a derivative thereof.


CLS 426/579
TXT Subject matter under subclass 578 wherein the composition is a pudding.


CLS 426/580
TXT Subject matter under subclass 531 wherein the basic ingredient is milk in
    any of its forms other than butter substitute in an emulsion form.

    (1)     Note.  Lactose and casein are regarded as lacteal material in the
    absence of any disclosure to the contrary.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    603+,   for butter substitute in the emulsion form.


CLS 426/581
TXT Subject matter under subclass 580 involving butter made from a lacteal
    source.


CLS 426/582
TXT Subject matter under subclass 580 wherein the lacteal derived material is a
    cheese in any of its forms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36+,    for the preparation or treatment of cheese products involving
    fermentation.


CLS 426/583
TXT Subject matter under subclass 580 wherein the lacteal derived material is
    in the form of usually fluid fractions, i.e., buttermilk, yogurt,
    sour-cream, whey, etc. However, they may be in a semisolid state or dry.


CLS 426/584
TXT Subject matter under subclass 580 wherein the lacteal material contains (1)
    a preparation of the seeds of cocoa in any of its forms or (2) a taste
    imparting agent and is intended to be used for drinking purposes.


CLS 426/585
TXT Subject matter under subclass 580 wherein the lacteal material contains a
    fat triglyceridic fat or oil other than that derived from an lacteal source.


CLS 426/586
TXT Subject matter under subclass 580 wherein the lacteal material is in the
    form of cream or butterfat.


CLS 426/587
TXT Subject matter under subclass 580 involving milk which has a substantial
    amount of water removed therefrom, but is still in a liquid form.


CLS 426/588
TXT Subject matter under subclass 580 wherein the lacteal product is milk in
    dry powdered form.


CLS 426/589
TXT Subject matter under subclass 531 wherein the product is (1) usually a
    liquid (or intented to be liquid) food made from protein or vegetable stock
    along with other ingredients by boiling, (2) a usually liquid or soft
    material eaten as a relish or appetizing accompaniment to food, (3) the fat
    and juices that drip from meat and usually thickened, and (4) the starting
    material for a food.


CLS 426/590
TXT Subject matter under subclass 531 involving liquid intended to be drunk or
    a concentrate which upon the addition of an aqueous material forms a liquid
    intended to be drunk.

    (1)     Note.  The materials generally herein are those that are prepared
    by the addition of a fluid such as water which either dissolves a solid or
    dilutes a liquid.  An exception to this is coffee or tea or other beverage
    material wherein the steeped product is not completely dissolved so that a
    solid residue is remains.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    569,    for beverages which form a foam.

    580,    for lacteal containing beverages.


CLS 426/591
TXT Subject matter under subclass 590 wherein the product is substantially free
    of moisture and will produce effervescence when it is contacted with an
    aqueous liquid.


CLS 426/592
TXT Subject matter under subclass 590 wherein the product contains ethyl
    alcohol.


CLS 426/593
TXT Subject matter under subclass 590 wherein the beverage material contains a
    preparation derived from of the seeds of cocoa in any of its form.


CLS 426/594
TXT Subject matter under subclass 590 wherein the beverage or beverage
    concentrate is made from the seeds of the coffee plant or a material which
    imitates the same.


CLS 426/595
TXT Subject matter under subclass 594 wherein the coffee is (1) whole or ground
    form or (2) has a additive combined therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    427+    and 432+, for extractive treatment of coffee.


CLS 426/596
TXT Subject matter under subclass 594 wherein the beverage material is similar
    to in one or more characteristics and is used in place of coffee.


CLS 426/597
TXT Subject matter under subclass 590 wherein the beverage or beverage
    concentrate is made from the leaves of the shrub Thea sinensis or a
    material which is similar to the same in one or more characteristics.


CLS 426/598
TXT Subject matter under subclass 590 wherein the beverage material is derived
    from seed, bean, or nut material, e.g., soybean milk.


CLS 426/599
TXT Subject matter under subclass 590 wherein the beverage material is the
    juice from a fruit or vegetable source.

    (1)     Note.  Flavored beverages e.g., lemonade, fruit drink, etc. are not
    proper subject matter for this subclass.


CLS 426/600
TXT Subject matter under subclass 531 wherein the material or material derived
    therefrom is made from the plant of the genus humulus.  Also included is
    the hopping of wort.


CLS 426/601
TXT Subject matter under subclass 531 wherein the basic ingredient is an
    isolated fatty acid triester glycerol.

    (1)     Note.  A fat or oil unqualified as to chemical constitution is
    considered proper subject matter for this and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    651,    for essential oil compositions used as flavors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, appropriate subclasses for
    glyceridic fat or oil derived from a single source even if claimed as
    having a food utility.


CLS 426/602
TXT Subject matter under subclass 601 wherein the composition exists in at
    least two phases one of which is a water containing phase and the other is
    fat or oil phase or combinations thereof.


CLS 426/603
TXT Subject matter under subclass 602 wherein the emulsion simulates one or
    more characteristics of butter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    663,    for nonadditive treatment of preparing a butter substitute.


CLS 426/604
TXT Subject matter under subclass 603 wherein the formulation includes an
    organic ester compound other than a fat or oil, i.e., triglycerdic ester
    with a fatty acid.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are organophosphatides such as lecithin.


CLS 426/605
TXT Subject matter under subclass 602 contain material derived from the egg of
    domesticated fowl.


CLS 426/606
TXT Subject matter under subclass 601 which is formulated to be in a flowable,
    e.g., pumpable, condition utilizing a triglycerdic portion which is solid
    at room temperature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    612,    for liquid shortening containing a carboxylic ester other than a
    fat or oil.


CLS 426/607
TXT Subject matter under subclass 601 wherein two or more different fats or
    oils having no other additives are formulated into a composition.


CLS 426/608
TXT Subject matter under subclass 601 wherein the animal derived fat or oil is
    the sole triglyceride(s).


CLS 426/609
TXT Subject matter under subclass 601 involving fats and oils which are in (1)
    ground, comminuted or powdered form or (2) the fat or oil is formulated to
    function to diminish adhesion of a food material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98,     for encapsulated shortening product.

    570,    for dried topping mixes.


CLS 426/610
TXT Subject matter under subclass 701 wherein a preservative e.g.,
    crystallization inhibitor, etc., is ingredient in the fat or oil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    321+,   for processes of preserving fats and oils by contacting with a
    chemical additive other than anti-oxygen type.

    541,    for other preservatives for fats and oils.


CLS 426/611
TXT Subject matter under subclass 601 wherein the formulation includes an
    organic ester compound other than a fat or oil, i.e., a triglyceridic ester
    with fatty acids.


CLS 426/612
TXT Subject matter under subclass 611 wherein the composition is flowable at
    room temperature.


CLS 426/613
TXT Subject matter under subclass 601 wherein the fat or oil is formulated with
    a sugar or flavor or a lacteal material or an egg material.


CLS 426/614
TXT Subject matter under subclass 531 wherein the basic ingredient of the
    product consists of eggs, from a domesticated fowl.


CLS 426/615
TXT Subject matter under subclass 531 wherein the basic ingredient is derived
    from plant material in any of its forms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    655,    for extracts including those of plants.


CLS 426/616
TXT Subject matter under subclass 615 wherein the plant material is derived
    from the genus citrus.


CLS 426/617
TXT Subject matter under subclass 615 wherein the plant material is derived
    from the meat of seed from the coconut palm tree.


CLS 426/618
TXT Subject matter under subclass 615 wherein the basic ingredient is made from
    edible grain from gramineous plants.


CLS 426/619
TXT Subject matter under subclass 618 wherein the cereal material is designed
    to be eaten as or with a breakfast type meal.


CLS 426/620
TXT Subject matter under subclass 619 wherein the cereal material requires
    little or no preparation for eating and does not require a cooking step.


CLS 426/621
TXT Subject matter under subclass 620 wherein the product is in the form of a
    flake or is in an expanded state.


CLS 426/622
TXT Subject matter under subclass 618 wherein the cereal material is comminuted
    and is in powdery form, e.g., meal, flour, bran, farina, grits, groats, etc.


CLS 426/623
TXT Subject matter under subclass 618 involving a feed formula for animals
    other than man.


CLS 426/624
TXT Subject matter under subclass 623 wherein the feed is derived from a
    distiller's or brewer's residue.


CLS 426/625
TXT Subject matter under subclass 618 wherein the material is either flaked or
    in an expanded state.


CLS 426/626
TXT Subject matter under subclass 618 involving the treatment of the material
    with either an acid or base.


CLS 426/627
TXT Subject matter under subclass 618 drawn to products which are prepared from
    a single source and does not contain extraneous material from any other
    source.

    (1)     Note.  The product may be in a modified form as by chemical
    reaction or selective type treatment.  The sole requirement herein is that
    no additional material has been added to affect or modify the natural
    constituents.  Excluded as being an additional material is air, CO2 in any
    of its forms, the inert gases, water in any of its forms, or mixtures of
    any of the above.


CLS 426/628
TXT Subject matter under subclass 615 directed to vegetable material in a cream
    form, e.g., creamed style corn, etc.


CLS 426/629
TXT Subject matter under subclass 615 wherein the plant material is derived
    from the edible seeds of various leguminous plants or the edible kernel or
    meat of seeds usually enclosed in a woody or leathery shell.


CLS 426/630
TXT Subject matter under subclass 629 involving a feed formulated for an animal
    other than man.


CLS 426/631
TXT Subject matter under subclass 629 involving a preparation from the seeds of
    cocoa in any of its forms.


CLS 426/632
TXT Subject matter under subclass 629 involving the edible kernel or meat from
    a woody or leathery shell.  Although a legume because of its name peanut is
    included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    634,    for plant material consisting of legumes.


CLS 426/633
TXT Subject matter under subclass 632 wherein the nut material is disrupted and
    spreadable.


CLS 426/634
TXT Subject matter under subclass 629 involving the pod or seed from the family
    leguminusae, e.g., soybeans, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    632+,   for peanut material.


CLS 426/635
TXT Subject matter under subclass 615 directed to feed for animals other than
    man.


CLS 426/636
TXT Subject matter under subclass 635 wherein the feed is derived from grass
    material or straw.


CLS 426/637
TXT Subject matter under subclass 615 involving material derived from an edible
    tuber, i.e., white potato, sweet potato and yam.


CLS 426/638
TXT Subject matter under subclass 615 involving material used primarily to
    flavor or relish a food.


CLS 426/639
TXT Subject matter under subclass 615 wherein sugar in any of its forms is
    added to the material.


CLS 426/640
TXT Subject matter under subclass 615 which is substantially free of moisture.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are the commonly identified dried foods,
    e.g., raisins, dried fruit, etc.


CLS 426/641
TXT Subject matter under subclass 531 wherein the material is derived from
    animals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    655,    for extract and 657 for protein made from animal material.


CLS 426/642
TXT Subject matter under subclass 641 wherein a covering is placed over the
    meat to effect some treatment other than packaging.


CLS 426/643
TXT Subject matter under subclass 641 wherein the material is derived from
    aquatic animals.


CLS 426/644
TXT Subject matter under subclass 641 wherein the material is derived from
    domestic fowl.


CLS 426/645
TXT Subject matter under subclass 641 wherein the material is derived from a
    single animal specie.


CLS 426/646
TXT Subject matter under subclass 641 wherein the material is reduced to small
    particles.


CLS 426/647
TXT Subject matter under subclass 641 wherein the material contains blood.


CLS 426/648
TXT Subject matter under subclass 531 which involves products which are
    normally added to a food to fortify the food or to impart thereto a desired
    effect in maintaining, sustaining, or increasing the normal well-being of
    an animal or human.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72+,    for a food containing vitamins or derivatives thereof for
    fortification.

    74,     for a food containing plural inorganic minerals or elements for
    fortification.


CLS 426/649
TXT Subject matter under subclass 648 directed to table salt type material or
    material used in place thereof.


CLS 426/650
TXT Subject matter under subclass 531 involving a composition in dry or liquid
    form adapted to be used as a seasoning, flavoring, acidulant, condiment or
    flavor enhancer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    533,    for reaction flavors.

    534+,   for flavor improvers of known organic constitutions and note
    exclusion thereunder.

    649,    for salt and salt substitutes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    512,    Perfume Compositions, subclasses 1 - 27 for perfume compositions.

    532     through 570, Organic Compounds, series of classes, for organic
    compounds which may function as flavoring agents.  However, plant extracts
    and essential oils which historically have been used for flavoring are not
    provided for in the Series, even when derived from a single source, but are
    classified in this Class, i.e., 426.


CLS 426/651
TXT Subject matter under subclass 650 involving an oleoresin or essential oil.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for essential oils which are claimed,
    disclosed or which historically have been used as flavoring agents, even
    when they have been derived from a single source.  For example, citrus oils
    are classified here rather than in the 532-570 Series of Classes even
    though the patent does not disclose their use as a flavoring agent.


CLS 426/652
TXT Subject matter under subclass 531 specific to a product used as an additive
    for meat, poultry, or seafood.


CLS 426/653
TXT Subject matter under subclass 531 specific to products intended to be used
    in a batter, dough or baked goods.


CLS 426/654
TXT Subject matter under subclass 531 involving a material which functions as a
    stabilizer, preservative or emulisifier other than organo-phosphatides.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    321+,   for use of biocidal and other preservative agent.

    532,    for products containing a biocide or biostal.

    541+,   for antioxidant compositions and use thereof.

    610,    for fats and oils having defined preservative other than
    antioxidant.

    662,    for organophosphatides.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Compositions, appropriate subclasses
    for biocidal compositions.


CLS 426/655
TXT Subject matter under subclass 531 involving a material which has been
    separated from plant or animal matter by distillation, treatment with
    solvents, etc., and is other than a protein, carbohydrate or
    organophosphatide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    425+,   for a nonadditive process of extracting.


CLS 426/656
TXT Subject matter under subclass 531 directed to food material containing an
    isolated or separated protein or a peptide an amino acid.

    (1)     Note.  Hydrolized proteins are proper subject matter for this
    subclass.


CLS 426/657
TXT Subject matter under subclass 656 wherein the source of the material is
    animal of all kinds.


CLS 426/658
TXT Subject matter under subclass 531 wherein the product contains carbohydrate
    or a derivative of the same.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, for carbohydrates of that class
    and for mixtures composed solely carbohydrates of that class, e.g., sugars,
    even for food purposes.

    536,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 1.11+, for a carbohydrate prepared by
    a synthesis other than hydrolytic conversion of a carbohydrate.


CLS 426/659
TXT Subject matter under subclass 658 wherein the carbohydrate usually is sugar
    and is used for toppings, candy, etc.


CLS 426/660
TXT Subject matter under subclass 658 wherein the carbohydrate is in the form
    of a confection, e.g., sweet material candy, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    564+,   for confection of the foam type.

    573,    for confections of the gel type.

    659,    for candy in form of a fudge.


CLS 426/661
TXT Subject matter under subclass 658 wherein the carbohydrate is in the form
    of a starch.


CLS 426/662
TXT Subject matter under subclass 531 wherein the product contains a
    phosphorous atom in its organic chemical makeup, e.g., lecithin, cephalin,
    etc.


CLS 426/663
TXT Subject matter under class definition for making or performing nonaddition
    treatment of butter or the substitute therefor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    581,    for butter products and methods for preparing butter compositions
    involving additives.

    603+,   for butter substitutes and process of preparing same.


CLS 426/664
TXT Subject matter under subclass 663, wherein the product treated is lacteal
    butter.


CLS 426/665
TXT Process under class definition of preparing or treating subject matter of
    this class.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS

    The following subclasses are collections of published disclosure pertaining
    to various aspects of the food art which aspects do not form an appropriate
    base fo subclass classification in the classification schedule.

    (1)     Note.  Disclosures are placed herein for value as a search aid and
    in no instance do they represent the entire extent of the prior art.


CLS 426/800
TXT Food products which are specifically designed for elderly or aged persons.


CLS 426/801
TXT Food products which are specifically designed for infants or persons of
    young age.


CLS 426/802
TXT Food products which simulate animal flesh.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for a three dimensional product which simulates animal flesh.


CLS 426/803
TXT Food products which simulate a fruit or vegetable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for a three dimensional product which simulates a fruit or
    vegetable.


CLS 426/804
TXT Food products which are specifically designed (1) to have a low caloric
    intake, (2) which are low in sodium intake, or (3) which are prepared so to
    preclude an allergic reaction by a living body upon oral ingestion.


CLS 426/805
TXT Food products which are specifically designed for household pets, i.e.,
    dogs, cats, birds, or fish.


CLS 426/806
TXT Food products which contain a salt or mineral substitute.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for a food containing two or more minerals or elements for
    fortification.

    218+,   for a nutritional or dietetic supplement.


CLS 426/807
TXT Food products which are specifically designed to feed a fowl or ruminant.


CLS 426/808
TXT Food products which contain a starch as a primary ingredient and which are
    known as a "snack type food".


CLS 426/809
TXT Food processes which include steps of harvesting, planting, cultivating,
    growing or other agricultural or other treatments which are not normally
    considered as food processing or perfecting operations proper for this
    class.


CLS 426/810
TXT Food products which are usually designed to be consumed in small quantities
    and which contain for their small volume or mass more than the expected
    amounts of either vitamins, minerals, or high caloric ingredients.


CLS 426/811
TXT Processes in preparing a food which involve materials which facilitate the
    release of food product either from another food or from an inedible
    material.


CLS 427/
TTL COATING PROCESSES

CLS 427/
TXT
    I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    A.      This is the generic class for applying or obtaining a coating on a
    surface. The coating may be hard or soft, permanent or transitory, supplied
    solely by extraneous materials or supplied wholly or in part by the base
    material.

    B.      This is the generic class for impregnating a base by causing a
    coating material to extend or penetrate into the base material, or into the
    intersticies of a porous, cellular or foraminous material.

    1.      Throughout this class the term "base" or "substrate" refers to the
    surface upon which a coating is formed except in those instances in which a
    surface has been previously coated and a second coating is applied, in
    which case the initial surface is considered the base or substrate.  In the
    case of laminated products the base or substrate is the surface upon which
    the coating is directly applied.

    2.      Throughout this class, the term "coating" is used in the generic
    sense to include both surface coating and impregnation.

    C.      This class also takes preparatory treatments of the base material,
    subsequent treatments of the coated base material and other ancillary
    noncoating operations claimed, per se, processes limited to etching for
    making a base more compatible with, or adherent to, the coating wherein the
    base is the substrate (work) onto which a coating is applied are included,
    when there is no class which specifically provides therefor.

    II.     NONSIGNIFICANT COATING PROCESSES

    A.      A patent containing a claim to a coating composition or compound,
    which claim is, per se, classified in Classes 106, 252, 260, 423, and 520,
    and also a claim to a nonsignificant process of utilizing the claimed
    compound or composition to coat a substrate, is classified with the claimed
    compound or composition.  The following guide lines are used to determine
    if a process step is significant.

    (a)     Any pretreatment or post-treatment of a base or applied coating is
    a significant process step; processes limited to etching or making a base
    more compatible with, or adherent to, the coating wherein the base is the
    substrate (work) onto which a coating is applied are included, e.g.,
    curing, drying, or smoothing a coating, or cleaning or drying a base.

    (b)     A specific recitation of how the coating is applied; e.g.,
    brushing, dipping, spraying, immersion, etc., is significant.  General
    statements of applying, covering, or coating, etc. are not significant.

    (c)     Processes resulting in plural coatings are considered significant.

    (d)     A process resulting in a coating having a specific thickness or
    lack of uniformity is considered significant.

    (e)     Specific recitation as to the condition of a coating being applied
    is generally significant except:

    1.      A condition also included in an independent composition claim,
    e.g., pH concentration, etc., is not significant.

    2.      Statements that a coating material is molten or in an organic,
    inorganic, or aqueous solution is not significant unless accompanied by a
    recitation of specific times or temperatures or chemically defined solvents.

    (f)     Structural limitations regarding the base to which the coating is
    applied are considered to render the process significant if the product
    produced is not classified in Class 428, Stock Material or Miscellaneous
    Articles.

    B.      Patents containing only claims to a process of coating a substrate
    wherein no significant process steps are recited, are classified in Class
    428, Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, according to the product
    produced by the process.

    (a)     Guidelines for use in determining if a process is significant are
    the same as set out under "A" note above.  Note especially the reference to
    structural limitations of the base being coated.

    C.      Patents containing (1) a claim to a compound or composition
    classifiable in Classes 106, 252, 260, 423, and 520 (2) a coated product
    claim which, per se, does not have significant structure for Class 428 and
    (3) a claim to a significant process which is, per se, classifiable in
    Class 427 is classified as an original in Class 428.

    III.    COATING PROCESSES CLASSIFIED ELSEWHERE

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers for:



    DYEING.

            Class 8 takes dyeing in general and combined processes of dyeing
    and coating in any sequence.  The application of a colored solidifiable
    coating to a surface is classified in this class (427).

            Class 427 takes the coating of a dyed article except where the
    coating is a mordant or fixing agent, a weighting agent for a textile or is
    reacted with a textile base to chemically modify the same.

            Treatments of textiles which are ancillary to or closely associated
    with dyeing such as, for example, mordanting, weighting, and fastness
    improving are also included in Class 8.

    BLEACHING.

            Class 8 takes bleaching in general, however, the bleaching of a
    base preparatory to the application of a coating or impregnating
    composition is in Class 427.  Where the coating or impregnant is merely
    employed as a mask to delineate areas to be bleached or for stabilizing or
    improving the whiteness of the treated material, the process belongs in
    Class 8.

            CHEMICAL MODIFICATION OF TEXTILES AND PAPER.

            Class 8, particularly subclasses 115.51+ takes reactive fluid
    treatments of textile materials and paper where there is chemical
    modification of the textile or paper base, even though combined with a
    coating operation with, per se, is classifiable in this class (427).

            CHEMICAL AND FLUID TREATMENT OF HIDES, SKINS, AND LEATHER.

            Class 8, subclasses 94.1+ takes the treatment of hides, skins,
    feathers, and animal tissues not elsewhere provided for.  For the line
    between this class and Class 8, in regard to such treatment, see the
    reference to Class 427 under "Search Class" in the notes to the definition
    of Class 8, subclass 94.1.

            CERTAIN NAMED FLUID TREATMENTS OF TEXTILES.

            Class 8 also takes special fluid treatments, namely, weighting
    mordanting, carroting, swelling or plasticizing artificial fibers,
    protection of textiles against the deleterious effect of agents used in the
    processes provided for in Class 8 and cleaning or laundering of textiles
    and fibers.

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclasses 169, 178+, 261, and 265+ for combinations of fluid treatments
    and significant textile operations.

    29,     Metal Working, provides for processes of making articles where the
    process includes a metal working operation and a coating operation, and is
    not provided for by Class 72, Metal Deforming.  Subclasses 17.2+ of Class
    29 provides for processes of making thin sheet metal and metal foil where
    the process of manufacture includes coating a form or base with metal and
    then removing the material of the form or base from the coating; subclasses
    400.1+ particularly subclasses 527.1+ provides for processes for
    manufacture of miscellaneous articles where the process includes a coating
    and a metal working operation; subclass 424 contains processes of coating a
    base with a protective layer, treating or shaping the coated base, and then
    removing the coating; subclass 458 provides for processes of assembling
    and/or joining preceded by a coating step, and subclass 460 contains
    processes followed by a coating step.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 307 for
    processes of drying wherein the object being dried is shielded by a
    coating, partial or complete, to retard the drying process. For the line
    between Classes 34 and 427, see the note to the main class definition of
    Class 34.

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, for a
    process of coating which is peculiar to abrasive tool making.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 362 for
    processes including coating in combination with the operations provided for
    in that class.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses
    45+ for glass molding combined with a coating step.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 46 and 47 for processes of plastic
    deformation of a metal workpiece including a coating step.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, etc., subclass 332 for processes of
    producing solid particulate free metal directly from liquid metal (e.g.,
    liquid comminuting, etc.) with subsequent coating of the particles.

    86,     Ammunition and Explosive-Charge Making, subclass 19 for coating
    processes peculiar to the treatment or preparation of ammunition and
    explosive devices.

    101,    Printing, for processes of printing and stenciling, except those
    processes utilizing a particular composition wherein the mere fact of
    printing or stenciling is stated, which are classified in this class (427).
    Processes which include specific manipulation of the stencils or the use of
    specific stencils are in Class 101, Printing, subclass 129.  See the Search
    Class 101 note under subclass 144 of this class.

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes for growing therein-defined
    single-crystal of all types of materials and by all techniques, including
    epitaxy.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 329+ for a process of coating wood combined
    with woodworking operations.

    148,    Metal Treatment, particularly subclasses 206+ for processes of
    coating a metal substrate with an external source of carbon, nitrogen, or
    both resulting in a coating that contains a combination of the carbon or
    nitrogen or both with a component from the metal substrate.  Class 148,
    also, takes as original processes of treating a metal substrate with an
    agent other than a carbon or nitrogen containing agent to form a coating on
    the metal by combination of the external agent with a component of the
    metal substrate, other than by a Class 204 operation. Combinations of
    coating operations with a process of heat treatment to modify or maintain
    the internal physical structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical property
    of metal, goes to Class 148 as original, unless metal casting, fusion
    bonding, machining, or working is involved.  If metal casting, fusion
    bonding, machining, or working is involved in the combination, placement
    goes to Class 148 only if the heat treatment is a significant heat
    treatment as defined in section III, A, of the Class 148 definition.  Since
    diffusion may be involved in a coating operation of metal and diffusion
    involves the microstructure of metal, per se, coating operations (i.e.,
    other than reactive coating operations) go as originals in Class 427 if the
    specified diffusion occurs during the coating step.  However, a heat
    treatment step of the solid metal, independent of the coating step which
    causes diffusion to affect the microstructure of the metal goes as original
    to Class 148.  See particularly, subclasses 516+ of Class 148 for
    combinations of coating with Class 148 operations.  Class 427 takes
    simultaneous ion implantation and diffusion as proper for Class 427 if
    coating is present.  However, inclusion of a separate step which by itself
    would be classifiable in Class 148 is enough to place the combination in
    Class 148.  Moreover, a combination of a metal working step proper for one
    of the metal working classes and ion implantation for coating purposes will
    be proper for Class 148.  See particularly subclass 239 of Class 148 for
    ion implantation of a metal substrate according to these distinctions.
    When limited to coating, per se, claims to coating by either reactive
    coating as in Class 148 or a coating process of Class 427 reside as
    original in the generic Class 427.  If there is a combined coating
    operation involving reactive coating (other than carburizing or nitriding)
    and an electro coating operation, that combination goes to Class 204.
    However, if an additional operation which by itself would be classifiable
    in Class 148 is included in the combination with reactive coating of Class
    148 and Class 204, electrocoating, this will go to Class 148. Reactive
    coating for Class 148 occurs on the metal substrate and not externally
    thereof.  Thus, Class 427 provides for coating a metal substrate with a
    resin composition in an immersion bath wherein metal ions leaching from the
    metal substrate enter the immersion medium and react or complex externally
    of the metal substrate to deposit a coating containing an element from the
    metal substrate.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, subclasses 3+ for
    processes of making explosives combined with a coating operation as well as
    patents for processes of coating, per se, of an explosive or with an
    explosive coating. Patents directed to coating of an explosive to merely
    protect or to completely desensitize it are in Class 427.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    particularly subclasses 278+ for laminating processes combined with a
    coating step.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, particularly subclasses 158+ for
    processes of applying a coating material to a web deposited from a liquid
    fibrous suspension prior to the final drying of the web, and subclasses
    135+ for paper making combined with coating after ultimate drying.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 14 for processes of making a mold and
    subsequently coating the mold, subclasses 72+ for metal casting processes
    including the coating of a mold surface with a treating agent, and subclass
    75 for processes of coating a preformed workpiece prior to compositing by
    metal casting.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 285+ for processes of cementing a well.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 155+ for a
    process of coating involving chemical preparation of a compound or element
    by application to a base of electrical or wave energy in a magnetic field
    (but without involving electrolysis as provided for in Class 205), where
    said base supplies a part or all of the coating (e.g., by conversion at the
    surface, etc.); subclasses 164+ for a process of coating involving chemical
    preparation of a compound or element by application of an electrostatic
    field or electrical discharge to a base which supplies a part or all of the
    coating; subclasses 471+ for a process of coating by electrophoresis or
    electro-osmosis; and subclasses 192.12+ for coating by glow discharge
    deposition (e.g., cathode sputtering, etc.).  See the subclass 450 (1) Note
    for the definition of "electrophoresis" as used in Class 204.  All
    combinations of plural coating methods (except in cases where electrolysis
    is involved) in which at least one coated layer is formed by
    electrophoresis, electro-osmosis, or cathode sputtering are classified in
    Class 204.  A patent with a claim to a coating process classifiable in
    Class 427 and a claim to a coating process classifiable in Class 204 will
    be placed as an original in Class 427 and cross-referenced to Class 204.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 80+ for electrolytic coating
    processes and subclasses 183+, 188+, 191+, and 198+ for processes involving
    plural coating steps, at least one but not all of which is electrolytic.
    Combinations of preparatory electrolytic processes, other than coating,
    with processes of coating falling within the scope of Class 427 are
    classified in Class 427.  A patent with a claim to a coating process
    classifiable in Class 427 and a claim to a coating process classifiable in
    Class 205 will be placed as an original in Class 427 and cross-referenced
    to Class 205.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 47-70,
    for processes of separating components of a mixture of solids by coating
    some of the components with a material.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 777+ for a separating
    process employing a precoat or filter aid.

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes,  appropriate subclasses for
    etching combined with a coating process where the etching is a
    manufacturing step and is not intended to improve the adherence of the
    applied coating to the substrate.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 101+ provides for the process of
    coating a base and then treating the coated base, as by rolling or forging,
    to effect or improve the bond between the base and coating; subclasses 101+
    also provides for soldering, brazing or welding independent self-sustaining
    parts together; and see particularly subclasses 208+ for bonding involving
    precoating with a bond facilitating metal.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate process
    subclasses for comminution combined with prior coating operations.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 18+, 370+, 520+, and
    550+ for a winding or unwinding device adapted to move an elongated
    material relative to an unclaimed coating station, and subclasses 18+ and
    520 for winding with a nominal wetting station that may temporarily cause
    windings to remain in position in a coil.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses, for processes of molding or shaping combined with
    coating.  For a detailed line between this class and Class 264, see section
    II F of the class definitions of Class 264 and the notes in subclass 129 of
    264.

    283,    Printed Matter, for processes of making fraud preventing printed
    matter or blanks therefor which include more than a coating process.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclass 57 for liquid control developing,
    subclasses 58+ for concentration control of developing material, subclasses
    168+ for charging, subclasses 246+ for sprayed liquid developing, subclass
    248 for immersion, and subclasses 265+ for application of dry developing.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, for processes of building
    roads or pavements combined with a coating step.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclass for a process of applying a composition of that class to an animal
    (including human) body.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    for processes of coating involving food and see the notes thereto for a
    detailed line between the classes.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, for:



    (a)     Processes of coating a base with a radiation sensitive material for
    the purpose of imaging by subsequent exposure to radiation.

    (b)     Applying a nonradiation sensitive coating to a radiation sensitive
    surface wherein the radiation sensitive surface is intended to be used in
    imaging when exposed to radiation.

    (c)     Processes of perfecting or protecting previously exposed images by
    a coating operation.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, for processes
    having a significant or nonsignificant coating step and otherwise proper
    for the class; see subclasses 4+ for processes of making measurement or
    test compositions, strips, or films; and for compositions for preparing
    micro-organisms, cells or tissues for microscopic examination and processes
    of applying said compositions to the micro-organisms, cells, or tissues to
    be examined subclasses 174+ for processes of making carrier-bound or
    immobilized enzyme or microbial cell, such as within a polymer or gel or
    absorbed on a resin; subclasses 183+ for methods of making a modified or
    stabilized enzyme or composition thereof (other than immobilized); and
    subclasses 243+ for methods of making a composition containing a
    micro-organism.  When there are only generic claims and multiply disclosed
    species or when there are equally comprehensive species claims and when the
    species are classifiable in Class 427 and in Class 435, placement of the
    original is in Class 435 with appropriate cross-references to Class 427.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    subclasses 1+ and 60+ for method and apparatus for manufacturing electric
    lamp and electric space discharge devices.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, for a  composition comprising a catalyst or sorbent, per se, or
    a process of making such a composition which may include a coating step.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 300+ for processes of producing high temperature (Tc > 30 K)
    superconductors, particularly subclasses 434, 446+, 452, or 470+.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    249+ for a coating or a covering process to contain hazardous or toxic
    waste.

    IV.     HAZARDOUS OR TOXIC WASTE PRODUCT IN COATING PROCESSES

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the destruction or containment of hazardous or toxic waste.


CLS 427/1
TXT Processes under the class definition of taking prints, impressions or
    patterns of human or other animal skin surfaces wherein the body member,
    per se, is the printing device or of making body member prints visible.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes processes of making fingerprints,
    footprints, noseprints, etc., usually for the purpose of identification.


CLS 427/2.1
TXT MEDICAL OR DENTAL PURPOSE PRODUCT; PARTS; SUBCOMBINATIONS; INTERMEDIATES
    (E.G., BALLOON CATHETER, SPLINT):

    Processes under the class definition in which the product is intended to be
    used for a medical or dental purpose, other than coating a living body,
    parts, subcombinations, or intermediates thereof or therefor.

    (1)     Note.  Subject to the limitations and caveats of Class 427
    definition, subject matter proper for this and indented subclasses includes
    the following:

    (a)     processes which make a medical or dental product and which product
    is proper for placement in, or which product is intended for use in a
    process proper for placement in, Class 128 (including Classes 600, 602,
    604, and 606), Class 424, Class 433, or Class 623;

    (b)     other processes which make a product which is intended for, or
    which is intended for use in a process having, a clearly medical or dental
    use.  For example, an in vitro diagnostic testing process or product (e.g.,
    for bodily fluids) such as a test color-change strip or an immunoassay
    device (Class 422 or Class 436), surgical gloves, gowns, or other apparel
    (Class 2 or Class 36).

    (2)     Note.  Coating of articles (not otherwise satisfying the definition
    of medical or dental products) are not proper herein when the coating is a
    biocide intended to preserve or protect the article; such is classified
    elsewhere in Class 427 if significant coating is claimed, and otherwise is
    classified according to the article or composition preserved or protected.

    (3)     Note.  Coating a living body is not proper for Class 427; see
    SEARCH CLASS notes hereinbelow, especially for Class 128, Class 424, and
    Class 433.

    (4)     Note.  Search various appropriate subclasses elsewhere in Class 427
    for significant coating of cosmetics, biocides, or other nonmedical,
    nondental compositions of Class 424.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164+,   for coating processes relating to optical lenses not intended to be
    implanted, such as corrective or contact.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, for garments such as surgical gloves, gowns, masks, etc.

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, for processes of dyeing, bleaching, chemical
    modification of textiles and paper, or chemical and fluid treatment of
    hides, skins, and leather.  See Class 427 definition for elaboration of the
    class line.

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, appropriate subclasses for foot
    coverings and foot devices; see subclasses 140+ for orthopedics.

    128,    Surgery, for (A) methods of treatment of the living body, (B)
    apparatus used in the inspection and treatment of diseases, wounds, and
    other abnormal conditions of the bodies of animals, including articles and
    stock-materials directed to products when (1) solely disclosed to be worn
    by or attached to the body (e.g., sanitary napkin, diaper) and to be a
    receptor for a body discharge, (2) solely disclosed as a shield or
    protective device to be worn on, or attached to, a body member or part
    (e.g., bandage, dressing) and having a therapeutic use, or (3) disclosed as
    having a Class 128 utility of (1) or (2) or in the class definition and a
    general utility for Class 428, but in which one claim is specific to the
    Class 128 disclosed use, and (C) methods and means for manufacturing
    surgical appliances not classified elsewhere.

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, for staffs, crutches, stilts,
    etc., used as aids to walking but not adapted to be secured to the limbs.

    351,    Optics: Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclasses
    41+ for spectacles and eyeglasses as aids to vision, and subclasses 160+
    for removable contact lens having specific optical characteristics for its
    use.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, for chemical apparatus which may have an in
    vitro medical use such as subclasses 50+ for analyzer, indicator, or lab
    device (subclasses 55+ for structured visual or optical indicators such as
    test papers, strips, or columns).

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, for:
    compositions (A) for preventing, alleviating, treating, or curing abnormal
    and pathological conditions of the living body, for maintaining,
    increasing, decreasing, limiting, or destroying a physiologic body
    function, for diagnosing a physiological condition or state by an in vivo
    test, for controlling or protecting an environment or living body by
    attracting, disabling, inhibiting, killing, modifying, repelling, or
    retarding an animal or micro-organism, (B) for deodorizing, protecting,
    adorning, or grooming a body, (C) for fermentates and extracts for use in A
    or B and not elsewhere provided for, and (D) such compositions defined in
    terms of specific structure; methods of making the above compositions;
    methods of using the class-defined compositions for purposes in A and B;
    and methods of using per se compounds for purposes in A and B.  Especially
    see subclasses 400+ for a composition defined in terms of specific
    structure having a utility for Class 424 and the methods of making which
    involve nonsignificant coating.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, for therein defined
    stock-materials (i.e., materials having no significant structure) of the
    subject matter of Class 433 or Class 623.

    433,    Dentistry, for methods, apparatus, implements, and devices relating
    to the treatment of teeth or gums or the replacement of teeth, or for
    methods normally performed by a dentist.  See subclass 217.1 for coating of
    natural teeth with adhesive or treating agent in the patient.  Class 433
    provides for the articles while Class 428 provides for the stock-materials.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, for apparatus and processes not
    elsewhere classifiable for providing instruction about a subject; or for
    means for displaying for purposes of comparison, contrast, or
    demonstration; or for demonstrating characteristics and advantages of
    apparatus, objects, or processes.  Particularly, see subclasses 262+ for
    class subject matter relating to human anatomy or physiology, to treatment
    of the human body to cure some disease or disorder, or to a cutting
    operation on the human body to correct some improper condition, and
    subclasses 295+ for class subject matter relating to organisms and vital
    processes or to the preparation, stuffing, and mounting of animal skins.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, for processes
    having a significant or nonsignificant coating step and otherwise proper
    for the class; see subclasses 4+ for processes of making measurement or
    test compositions, strips, or films; and for compositions for preparing
    micro-organisms, cells or tissues for microscopic examination and processes
    of applying said compositions to the micro-organisms, cells, or tissues to
    be examined subclasses 174+ for processes of making carrier-bound or
    immobilized enzyme or microbial cell such as within a polymer or gel or
    absorbed on a resin; subclasses 183+ for methods of making a modified or
    stabilized enzyme or composition thereof (other than immobilized); and
    subclasses 243+ for methods of making a composition containing a
    micro-organism.  When there are only generic claims and multiply disclosed
    species or when there are equally comprehensive species claims and the
    species are classifiable in Class 427 and in Class 435, placement of the
    original is in Class 435 with appropriate cross-references to Class 427.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, for in vitro
    processes of testing involving a chemical reaction or an immunological
    binding interaction (including those which may be medical or dental).

    523,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, for solid polymer containing
    compositions or process of preparing; see subclass 103 for compositions
    which have reduced health risks upon exposure thereto during incidental
    handling or body contact, such as a coating composition containing a bitter
    tasting component or a composition which reduces carcinogenicity (e.g.,
    coating composition of carbon black); and subclasses 105+ for nonmedicated
    composition or process of preparing, which is specifically intended for
    contact with living animal tissue (other than apparel), such as surgical
    related composition (e.g., suture, catheter, dilator), prosthesis
    composition, contact lens making composition, surgical tape adhesive
    composition, nonthrombogenic plastics composition (e.g., for making blood
    pouches, tubes, catheters), composition for use as tooth or bone
    replacement, restorative, or implant, or composition for dental or denture
    devices.

    528,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers,  cross-reference art
    collection 950 for synthetic resins of any type within the Class 520 series
    which is intended for use in replacing or restoring partially or wholly
    hard tissue as normally found in animals (e.g., dentures, bones), and
    excluding synthetic hair or skin and contact lenses. (Note that polymers
    which are a part of a composition are found in Class 523).

    600,    Surgery, for miscellaneous Class 128 subject matter; see subclasses
    1+ for radioactive substance applied to body for therapy; subclasses 9+ for
    magnetic field applied to body for therapy; subclasses 16+ for heart
    augmentation; subclasses 19+ for antigravitation systems; subclasses 21+
    for isolation treatment chamber; subclasses 23+ for speech correction;
    subclass 25 for surgically implanted vibratory hearing aid; subclasses 26+
    for sleep or relaxation inducing therapy; subclasses 29+ for body inserted
    urinary or colonic incontinence; subclass 36 for blood vessels or grafts;
    subclass 37 for internal organ support or sling; and subclasses 38+ for
    substituting for or enhancing human copulation.

    602,    Surgery:  Splint, Brace, or Bandage, for Class 128 subject matter
    relating to orthopedic bandages or to injury or wound bandages.

    604,    Surgery, for body treating and medicating methods and apparatus
    which includes the application, storing, collecting, introduction, or
    removal of materials from the body, including (1) medicators such as dosing
    device, hypodermic injector, syringe, depositor, or applicator, container,
    pump, or valve and (2) receptors such as aspirator, lacteal device,
    catamenial, diaper, absorbent pad, or material.

    606,    Surgery, for Class 128 subject matter relating to devices or
    appliances for use in operative surgery upon the body, or in preparation
    for operative surgery, or for devices designed to assist in operative
    surgery.

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, for artificial substitutes or parts for a human
    body particularly manufactured or adapted to replace (completely or
    partially) or assist a missing or defective natural body member, or part
    thereof, for functional or cosmetic reasons.  Class 623 provides for the
    articles (significant structure), while Class 428 provides for the
    stock-materials (i.e., articles in name only).


CLS 427/2.11
TXT Analysis, diagnosis, measuring, or testing product (e.g., specimen
    preparation, microscope slide smearing):

    Processes under subclass 2.1 in which the product is intended to be
    subjected to or is intended to be used in analysis, diagnosis, measuring,
    or testing, which may be in vivo or in vitro; parts, subcombinations, or
    intermediates thereof or therefor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, for apparatus used in the inspection and treatment of
    diseases, wounds, and other abnormal conditions of the bodies of animals
    and methods and means for manufacturing surgical appliances not classified
    elsewhere.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 244+ for sample,
    specimen, or standard holder or support (e.g., plate or slide) intended for
    optical inspection, measuring, or testing.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    396+ for transparent microscope slide in combination with a microscope.


CLS 427/2.12
TXT For contacting living body or transfusing bodily fluid (e.g., endoscope,
    electrode, thermometer, probe):

    Processes under subclass 2.11 in which the product is intended to contact
    the living body or to contact a transfusing bodily fluid, such as spinal
    fluid or blood, in order to accomplish its function; parts,
    subcombinations, or intermediates thereof or therefor.

    (1)     Note.  Transfusing bodily fluid is that which is being handled,
    processed, and/or maintained with the intent to return it to a living body.

    (2)     Note.  The living body includes the bodily fluids while they are in
    the living body, such as blood, bile, or urine in the bladder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, for apparatus used in the inspection and treatment of
    diseases, wounds, and other abnormal conditions of the bodies of animals
    and methods and means for manufacturing surgical appliances not classified
    elsewhere.


CLS 427/2.13
TXT Layer formed contains chemical reagent or chemically reacts with substrate
    (e.g., cell stain or fix, pH paper, immobilized antigen):

    Processes under subclass 2.11 in which the layer formed contains or is
    intended to receive a chemical reagent which causes or participates in a
    chemical reaction in order to accomplish its analysis, diagnosis,
    measurement, or test function; parts, subcombinations, or intermediates
    thereof or therefor.

    (1)     Note.  A chemical reaction here includes covalent bonding, ionic
    bonding, complexing, ion exchange, and ligand bonding.  Not included here
    are bonds which are no stronger than hydrogen bonding.

    (2)     Note.  Coating a microscope slide with a stain or with a specimen
    to be stained or staining a specimen are proper for placement here.

    (3)     Note.  Coating with a chemical reagent which does not primarily
    participate in an analysis, diagnosis, measurement, or test function is not
    proper for placement in this subclass (on that basis); thus, coating a
    microscope slide with heparin would be placed in subclass 2.11.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, and for
    compositions for preparing micro-organisms, cells or tissues for
    microscopic examination and processes of applying said compositions to the
    micro-organisms, cells, or tissues to be examined.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, for processes
    having a significant or nonsignificant coating step and otherwise proper
    for Class 427; see subclasses 4+ for processes of making measurement or
    test compositions, strips, or films; subclasses 174+ for processes of
    making carrier-bond or immobilized enzyme or microbial cell such as within
    a polymer or gel or absorbed on a resin; subclasses 183+ for methods of
    making a modified or stabilized enzyme or composition thereof (other than
    immobilized); and subclasses 243+ for methods of making a composition
    containing a micro-organism.  When there are only generic claims and
    multiply disclosed species or when there are equally comprehensive species
    claims and when the species are classifiable in Class 427 and in Class 435,
    placement of the original is in Class 435 with appropriate cross-references
    to Class 427.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, for in vitro
    processes of analysis involving a chemical reaction or an immunological
    binding interaction (including those which may involve a medical or dental
    purpose).


CLS 427/2.14
TXT Particulate or unit-dosage-article base (e.g., tablet, pill, pellet,
    capsule, liposome, powder, controlled-release implant, suppository;
    excluding transdermal patch):

    Processes under subclass 2.1 in which the coating is applied to a base
    which is a particulate or a unit-dosage-article and such that the coated
    product has a particulate or unit-dosage physical form; excluding
    transdermal patch.

    (1)     Note.  A unit-dosage-article is one which is provided as one or a
    few discrete, readily and independently handleable piece or pieces for the
    intended medical or dental use.  Any of the following terms are prima facie
    indicative of a unit-dosage-article:  tablet, capsule, dragee, pill, bead.

    (2)     Note.  A particulate is a small solid bit of matter which typically
    can be poured like a fluid when handled.  Any of the following terms are
    prima facie indicative of a particulate:  liposome, powder, microcapsule,
    granule, pellet, bead, flake, platelet, particle, grain, microsphere,
    granulate.

    (3)     Note.  Clathrates and intercalates (inclusion compounds) are not
    proper for placement here.  They are classified hierarchically and subject
    to the limitations set forth in the compound (element) classes based both
    on the encapsulant and encapsulate.  For example, a clathrate of urea and
    hydrogen peroxide is classified in Class 564, subclass 32; urea and an
    organic compound is classified in Class 260; dextran and iodine is
    classified in Class 536, subclass 112.  Where a patent does not state that
    a material is either a clathrate or an intercalate, the assumption is made
    that the material is either a coated or encapsulated product and properly
    classified as such, such as in Class 428, subclasses 402+.

    (4)     Note.  Skin patches or transdermal patches are not considered
    unit-dosage-articles; see subclass 2.31.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212+,   for coating or encapsulating of solid granules, pellets, beads,
    flakes, platelets, or other particles en masse; especially, subclasses
    213.3+ for such processes using an emulsion or dispersion to form a
    solid-walled microcapsule on a solid, such as a liposome; when other than a
    medical or dental product is produced.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 4.1+ for processes using an emulsion or dispersion to form a
    solid-walled microcapsule around a liquid, such as forming a liquid-core
    liposome.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, for class
    defined compositions, the nominal processes of making, and the nominal
    processes of using; see subclass 1.21 for radionuclide containing liposome;
    subclass 1.29 for radionuclide containing coated or impregnated
    particulate; and subclasses 400+ for preparations characterized by special
    form such as coated (notably, subclass 408 for biocide, repellant, or
    attractant in the form of a capsule, pellet, or tablet; subclass 417 for
    biocide, repellant, or attractant in the form of a coated particulate such
    as a liposome; subclasses 422+ for implant or insert such as surgical or
    suppository; subclasses 439+ for food as carrier for pharmaceutical such as
    candy coated; subclass 450 for liposome form; subclasses 451+ for capsule;
    subclasses 464+ for tablet, lozenge, or pill such as coated, printed, or
    sustained or differential release type; and subclasses 489+ for particulate
    form such as coated powder, granule, bead, microcapsule, or pellet).

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 89+ for coated food products and subclasses 302+ for processes
    of surface coating of a solid food with a liquid.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 402+ for
    coated grain, granule, or small bit of matter, such as microcapsule,
    liposome, or powder.  See (1) Note in Class 428, subclass 402 for rules of
    placement.


CLS 427/2.15
TXT Fluidized bed utilized:

    Processes under subclass 2.14 in which a bed or mass of particles or
    unit-dosage-articles is maintained in a state of fluidized suspension by
    passing a gas or vapor in a generally upward direction through the
    particles or unit-dosage-articles.

    (1)     Note.  Coating material may be introduced directly into the
    fluidized mass or along with the fluidizing gas or vapor.

    (2)     Note.  Placement here does not require that the particles or
    unit-dosage-articles be coated while in the fluidizing gas or vapor; they
    may be coated before entry to or after exit from the fluidized bed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213+,   for such processes acting on solid granules, pellets, beads,
    flakes, platelets, or other particles when other than a medical or dental
    product is produced.


CLS 427/2.16
TXT Retarded or controlled-release layer produced (e.g., enteric):

    Processes under subclass 2.15 in which the product is intended to provide
    retarded (or delayed), timed, differential, sustained, or intermittent
    administration (or delivery) of an active ingredient.

    (1)     Note.  Merely providing a product protected for storage or handling
    is not included here.  For placement here, the control layer must do more
    than protect against ambient conditions or against the conditions of the
    mouth.  Examples of types of products proper for placement here include the
    following:  continuous delivery by slow or slowed release; discontinuous
    delivery by two or more stages; enteric coating for protection from stomach
    conditions for product intended to be orally administered; sustained or
    differential release implant or insert such as a suppository.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.19,   for similar subject matter involving an en masse rotating means
    rather than a fluidized bed.

    2.21,   for similar subject matter not involving either a fluidized bed or
    an en masse rotating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, for
    pharmaceutical and diagnostic compositions which are defined in terms of
    specific structure such as coated so that the active ingredient is released
    in a retarded (or delayed), timed, differential, sustained, or intermittent
    manner; see subclasses 422+ for implant or insert; subclasses 457+ for
    sustained or differential release composition in a capsule; subclasses 468+
    for tablet, lozenge, or pill; and subclasses 474+ for enteric coated
    medicament.


CLS 427/2.17
TXT Significant color or other intended appearance altering layer formed (e.g.,
    shining, indicia):

    Processes under subclass 2.15 in which a layer is  formed or modified for
    the disclosed intent to alter the appearance and which is more than a
    nominally recited application of a dye or pigment.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass, differential or non-uniform
    color application, such as a strip or a printing of a symbol or a letter,
    is always significant and, therefore, proper for placement in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.2,    for similar subject matter involving an en masse rotating means
    rather than a fluidized bed.

    2.23,   for similar subject matter not involving either a fluidized bed or
    an en masse rotating means.


CLS 427/2.18
TXT En masse rotating means employed (e.g., rotating pan, tumbling):

    Processes under subclass 2.14 in which a bed or mass of particles or
    unit-dosage-articles is subjected to rotating means (i.e., rotating means
    acts en masse as opposed to acting on a particle or unit-dosage-article
    individually) and in which mechanical contact between the particles or
    unit-dosage-articles and the rotating means occurs and contributes to
    movement.

    (1)     Note.  Processes employing rotating means which create and/or
    maintain an emulsion or dispersion or colloid are not proper for placement
    here; see subclasses 2.14, 2.21, 2.22, or 2.23.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242,    for similar processes wherein other than a medical or dental
    product is produced.


CLS 427/2.19
TXT Retarded or controlled-release layer produced (e.g., enteric):

    Processes under subclass 2.18 in which the product is intended to provide
    retarded (or delayed), timed, differential, sustained, or intermittent
    administration (or delivery) of an active ingredient.

    (1)     Note.  Merely providing a product protected for storage or handling
    is not included here.  For placement here, the control layer must do more
    than protect against ambient conditions or against the conditions of the
    mouth.  Examples of types of products proper for placement here include the
    following:  continuous delivery by slow or slowed release; discontinuous
    delivery by two or more stages; enteric coating for protection from stomach
    conditions for product intended to be orally administered; sustained or
    differential release implant or insert such as a suppository.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.16,   for similar subject matter further involving a fluidized bed.

    2.21,   for similar subject matter not involving either a fluidized bed or
    an en masse rotating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, for
    pharmaceutical and diagnostic compositions which are defined in terms of
    specific structure such as coated so that the active ingredient is released
    in a retarded (or delayed), timed, differential, sustained, or intermittent
    manner; see subclasses 422+ for implant or insert; subclasses 457+ for
    sustained or differential release composition in a capsule; subclasses 468+
    for tablet, lozenge, or pill; and subclasses 474+ for enteric coated
    medicament.


CLS 427/2.2
TXT Significant color or other intended appearance altering layer formed (e.g.,
    shining, indicia):

    Processes under subclass 2.18 in which a layer is  formed or modified for
    the disclosed intent to alter the appearance and which is more than a
    nominally recited application of a dye or pigment.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass, differential or non-uniform
    color application, such as a strip or a printing of a symbol or a letter,
    is always significant and, therefore, proper for placement in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.17,   for similar subject matter further involving a fluidized bed.

    2.23,   for similar subject matter not involving either a fluidized bed or
    an en masse rotating means.


CLS 427/2.21
TXT Retarded or controlled-release layer produced (e.g.,  enteric):

    Processes under subclass 2.14 in which the product is intended to provide
    retarded (or delayed), timed, differential, sustained, or intermittent
    administration (or delivery) of an active ingredient.

    (1)     Note.  Merely providing a product protected for storage or handling
    is not included here.  For placement here, the control layer must do more
    than protect against ambient conditions or against the conditions of the
    mouth.  Examples of types of products proper for placement here include the
    following: continuous delivery by slow or slowed release; discontinuous
    delivery by two or more stages; enteric coating for protection from stomach
    conditions for product intended to be orally administered; sustained or
    differential release implant or insert such as a suppository.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.16,   for similar subject matter further involving a fluidized bed.

    2.21,   for similar subject matter not involving either a fluidized bed or
    an en masse rotating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, for
    pharmaceutical and diagnostic compositions which are defined in terms of
    specific structure, such as coated so that the active ingredient is
    released in a retarded (or delayed), timed, differential, sustained, or
    intermittent manner; see subclasses 422+ for implant or insert; subclasses
    457+ for sustained or differential release composition in a capsule;
    subclasses 468+ for tablet, lozenge, or pill; and subclasses 474+ for
    enteric coated medicament.


CLS 427/2.22
TXT Gelatin matrix layer produced:

    Processes under subclass 2.14 in which the formed layer comprises a matrix
    or continuous phase of gelatin.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.15,   for similar subject matter further involving a fluidized bed.

    2.18,   for similar subject matter further involving an en masse rotating
    means.


CLS 427/2.23
TXT Significant color or other intended appearance altering layer formed (e.g.,
    shining, indicia):

    Processes under subclass 2.14 in which a layer is  formed or modified for
    the disclosed intent to alter the appearance and which is more than a
    nominally recited application of a dye or pigment.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass, differential or non-uniform
    color application, such as a strip or a printing of a symbol or a letter,
    is always significant and, therefore, proper for placement in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.17,   for similar subject matter further involving a fluidized bed.

    2.2,    for similar subject matter further involving an en masse rotating
    means.


CLS 427/2.24
TXT Implantable permanent prosthesis (i.e., artificial body member) (e.g.,
    pacemaker, lens, cornea, glaucoma shunt, heart valve, muscle, spinal disc,
    breast, internal organ):

    Processes under subclass 2.1 in which the product is an implantable
    artificial body member or a part or subcombination thereof, which is
    intended to physically replace a missing or defective natural body member
    or part by insertion into the body or attachment onto epidermal tissue in a
    permanent manner; parts, subcombinations, or intermediates thereof or
    therefor.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and its indents are intended to provide for
    all appropriate processes under subclass 2.1 wherein the product would be
    found in Class 623 and which is intended to be inserted into the body in a
    permanent manner, unless proper for a subclass appearing above this one.

    (2)     Note.  Prosthesis herein means a replacement or assistant for a
    missing or defective part of a living body.

    (3)     Note.  Artificial skin intended to remain on the body; e.g., be
    absorbed, is placed here.

    (4)     Note.  In the case of generic claims and multiple disclosed
    utilities, multiple cross-referencing is required; for example, coating of
    a material disclosed for heart valve (427/2.24), vascular prosthesis
    (427/2.25), blood bag or IV tubing (427/2.3).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.1,    for similar subject matter which is not intended to be permanently
    implanted; e.g., splint.

    2.29,   for similar subject matter relating to dentistry which is not
    intended to be permanently implanted.

    164+,   for coating processes relating to optical lenses not intended to be
    implanted, such as corrective or contact.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclasses
    160+ for contact lens (i.e., removable) having specific optical
    characteristics for its use.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclass 429
    for coated or impregnated contact lens.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for lenses lacking structural limitations (i.e., stock-material).

    523,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, for solid polymer containing
    compositions or process of preparing; see subclasses 105+ for nonmedicated
    composition or process of preparing, which is specifically intended for
    contact with living animal tissue (other than apparel) such as prosthesis
    composition, composition for use as tooth or bone replacement, restorative,
    or implant.

    528,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers,  cross-reference art
    collection 950 for synthetic resins of any type of the Class 520 series
    which is intended for use in replacing or restoring partially or wholly
    hard tissue as normally found in animals (e.g., dentures, bones), and
    excluding synthetic hair or skin and contact lenses. (Note that polymers
    which are a part of a composition are found in Class 523).

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses 2+
    for electrical therapeutic systems; e.g., pace maker.

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, subclass 3 for corporeal (implantable) artificial
    heart or aid therefor;  subclasses 4+ for eye protheses structurally
    limited to the prosthetic use; subclass 7 for breast prothesis; subclass 8
    for implantable breast prothesis; subclass 9 for larynx, trachea,
    tracheobronchial, or combination thereof prothesis; subclass 10 for ear or
    nose prosthesis; subclass 12 for implantable hollow or tubular part or
    organ prothesis; subclass 13 for implantable ligament or tendon prothesis;
    subclass 14 for implantable muscle prothesis such as sphincter; subclass 15
    for implantable hair or skin prothesis; and cross-reference art collection
    901 for documents relating to a process for making an artificial body
    member.


CLS 427/2.25
TXT Liquid conveying (e.g., vascular, arterial, bile duct, urethra):

    Processes under subclass 2.24 in which the product is intended to replace
    or assist a missing or defective vessel, tubular part, duct, or other
    structure whose primary function is for conveying bodily liquids (e.g.,
    blood, lymph, or bile); parts, subcombinations, or intermediates thereof or
    therefor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.24,   for coating processes relating to an internal organ prosthesis
    (i.e., a kidney, heart valve,  or other structure) which may convey bodily
    fluids but whose primary function is some other type of processing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, subclass 1 for arterial blood (circulating)
    prosthesis and subclass 12 for hollow or tubular part or organ for
    conveying body fluids other than blood.


CLS 427/2.26
TXT For mineralized body part (e.g., bone, tooth, crown, hip):

    Processes under subclass 2.24 in which the product is an implantable
    prosthesis for a mineralized body part, such as bone or tooth replacement;
    parts, subcombinations, or intermediates thereof or therefor.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter here must be, at least in part, intended
    to replace or assist a missing or defective mineralized portion of the body.

    (1)     Note.  The prosthesis itself need not be composed of mineralized
    material.  Commonly used materials found herein include metal and synthetic
    resin.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.24,   for coating processes relating to implantable fingernail or toenail
    or hair prostheses and other implantable soft tissue, such as implantable
    eye or vision related prosthesis, cartilage, ligament, muscle, or internal
    organ.

    2.29,   for coating processes relating to non-permanently implantable or
    nonimplantable dental products, such as denture appliances or temporary
    orthodontia devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, for prostheses lacking
    significant structure (i.e., constituting stock materials).

    433,    Dentistry, for dental prosthesis or appliance or for methods
    normally performed by a dentist, especially subclasses 167+ for, per se,
    dental prosthesis article having significant structure (i.e., not merely a
    stock-material); and subclasses 215+ for repairing or treating natural
    teeth.

    523,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers,  for solid polymer containing
    compositions or process of preparing; see subclasses 105+ for nonmedicated
    composition or process of preparing, which is specifically intended for
    contact with living animal tissue (other than apparel), such as a
    prosthesis composition or a composition for use as tooth or bone
    replacement, restorative, or implant.

    528,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers,  cross-reference art
    collection 950 for synthetic resins of any type of the Class 520 series
    which is intended for use in replacing or restoring partially or wholly
    hard tissue as normally found in animals (e.g., dentures, bones), and
    excluding synthetic hair or skin and contact lenses. (Note that polymers
    which are a part of a composition are found in Class 523.)

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, subclass 10 for ear or nose prosthesis and
    subclasses 16+ for implantable bone prosthesis having significant structure
    (i.e., other than merely stock-material).


CLS 427/2.27
TXT Inorganic oxygen-containing compound containing layer formed (e.g.,
    hydroxyapatite, ceramic, glass):

    Processes under subclass 2.26 in which the layer formed contains an
    inorganic compound which contains an oxygen atom; the oxygen being present
    as an intended component, not merely as an impurity.

    (1)     Note.  The inorganic oxygen-containing compound containing layer
    does not have to comprise a continuous matrix of the inorganic
    oxygen-containing compound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    528,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, cross-reference art collection
    950 for synthetic resins of any type of the Class 520 series which is
    intended for use in replacing or restoring partially or wholly hard tissue
    as normally found in animals (e.g., dentures, bones), and excluding
    synthetic hair or skin or contact lenses. (Note that polymers which are a
    part of a composition are found in Class 523.)

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, subclass 10 for ear or nose prosthesis and
    subclasses 16+ for implantable bone prosthesis having significant structure
    (i.e., other than merely stock-material).


CLS 427/2.28
TXT Device for creating or holding open an unnatural opening in a membrane or
    organ (e.g., syringe, scalpel, drainage tube):

    Processes under subclass 2.1 in which the product is intended to pierce or
    cut an organ or a membrane so as to create an opening therein (e.g.,
    invasive devices) or to hold open a created (i.e., unnatural) opening in an
    organ or a membrane; parts, subcombinations, or intermediates thereof or
    therefor.

    (1)     Note.  Skin is an organ for purposes of this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The term catheter has been applied to devices which serve
    purposes other than what satisfies this subclass definition.  For coating
    processes relating to such other purpose devices, proper classification
    will usually be in subclass 2.1, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    604,    Surgery, for body treating and medicating methods and apparatus
    which include the application, storing, collecting, introduction, or
    removal of materials from the body; subclasses 19+ for means for
    introducing or removing material from the body for therapeutic purposes;
    subclasses 317+ for means and methods for collecting body fluids or waste
    material; and subclass 403 for container for blood or body treating
    material or for means used therewith (e.g., needle for piercing container
    closure).

    606,    Surgery, for Class 128 subject matter relating to devices or
    appliances for use in operative surgery upon the body or in preparation for
    operative surgery or for devices designed to assist in operative surgery;
    subclasses 79+ for orthopedic (bone, bonelike material, or cartilage)
    cutting; subclasses 110+ for tonsil, adenoid, or polyp removing; subclass
    166 for corneal cutter or guide for corneal cutter; subclasses 167+ for
    cutting, puncturing, or piercing not more hierarchically placed; subclass
    222 for suturing needle; and subclasses 228+ for suture or ligature.


CLS 427/2.29
TXT Dental product (e.g., floss, denture, orthodontia wire):

    Processes under subclass 2.1 in which the product is related to dentistry,
    including the treatment of teeth or gums or the replacement of teeth;
    parts, subcombinations, or intermediates thereof or therefor.

    (1)     Note.  The products here may be used by a dentist or by a
    non-dentist.

    (2)     Note.  Orthodontics which may be attached to the teeth are proper
    for placement here if the intent is impermanence.  Permanent dental
    prostheses are placed in subclasses 2.24+, especially subclasses 2.26+ if
    intended to replace mineralized portion of the body such as a tooth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.24+,  for permanent implantable tooth prostheses, especially subclasses
    2.26+ if intended to replace mineralized portion of the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    433,    Dentistry, for methods, apparatus, implements, and devices relating
    to the treatment of teeth or gums or the replacement of teeth, or for
    methods normally performed by a dentist, especially subclasses 2+ for
    orthodontics.  Class 433 provides for the articles while Class 428 provides
    for the stock-materials.

    523,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, for solid polymer containing
    compositions or process of preparing, especially subclasses 105+ for
    nonmedicated composition or process of preparing, which is specifically
    intended for contact with living animal tissue (other than apparel) such as
    composition for dental or denture devices.


CLS 427/2.3
TXT Fluid barrier or fluid transporting product, other than merely absorbing
    (e.g., surgical glove, condom, lined diaper, membrane filter, IV tubing,
    cannula, dialysis membrane, urinary catheter):

    Processes under subclass 2.1 in which the product contains a component
    which is intended to act as a barrier for a fluid or a fluid portion of a
    composition or which is intended to function as a fluid transporting means,
    other than a product functioning by merely sorbing the fluid; parts,
    subcombinations, or intermediates thereof or therefor.

    (1)     Note.  The product must be intended to function as defined, not
    just be incidentally a fluid barrier, for example, as might be the case for
    a simple plaster medical or surgical cast which may provide some liquid
    resistance but which is not formulated for liquid proofing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, for garments such as surgical gloves, gowns, masks, etc.,
    especially subclass 455 if to protect the wearer against unusual conditions
    (subclass 2.5 for penetration resistant apparel, subclass 9 for face
    protection, and subclasses 16+ for hand protection); subclasses 69+ for
    body garments (subclasses 93+ for coats and subclass 161.7 for gloves); and
    subclass 206 for surgical mask.

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 830+ for female reproductory tract shield and
    subclass 844 for male condoms.

    523,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, for solid polymer containing
    compositions or process of preparing, especially subclasses 105+ for
    nonmedicated composition or process of preparing, which is specifically
    intended for contact with living animal tissue (other than apparel), such
    as surgical related composition (e.g., suture, catheter, dilator), surgical
    tape adhesive composition, and nonthrombogenic plastics (e.g., for making
    blood pouches, tubes, catheters).


CLS 427/2.31
TXT Flexible web, sheet, film, or filament base (e.g., fabric, bandage, suture,
    transdermal patch, orthopedic cast tape):

    Processes under subclass 2.1 in which the product comprises a flexible web,
    sheet, film, or filament base; parts, subcombinations, or intermediates
    thereof or therefor.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of appropriate subject matter for this subclass
    include the following: filament; composed of multiple threads (cord); woven
    or unwoven fibrous material such as paper or gauze; nonporous sheet, foil,
    or film material such as metal foil or a synthetic plastic film.

    (2)     Note.  Flexible here means material that a person could normally
    fold with unassisted bare hands without destroying its functionality.
    Thus, a process which coats a thin metal foil may be appropriately
    classified here if it is normally foldable.

    (3)     Note.  Suture includes a product made of threads, cords, or
    filaments which is intended to be used to close a wound or to tie, bind, or
    constrict a portion of a body organ.

    (4)     Note.  Methods for making material useful for making a stiff body
    wrap, such as an orthopedic cast, are proper for placement here so long as
    the material in the claim is flexible: see subclass 2.3 if there is a
    liquid barrier feature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.24,   for artificial skin.

    2.29    for dental floss.

    2.3,    for coating processes related to products which may have a sheet or
    film base and which are intended to serve as a fluid barrier or fluid
    transporting product such as surgical glove, condom, lined diaper, membrane
    filter, IV tubing, cannula, or dialysis membrane.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, for garments such as surgical gloves, gowns, masks, etc.,
    especially subclass 455 if to protect the wearer against unusual conditions
    (subclass 2.5 for penetration resistant apparel, subclass 9 for face
    protection, and subclasses 16+ for hand protection); subclasses 69+ for
    body garments (subclasses 93+ for coats and subclass 161.7 for gloves); and
    subclass 206 for surgical mask.

    128,    Surgery, appropriate subclasses for bandages, body applicators, or
    body dressings; see Class 424 definition for the line between it and Class
    128.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 402+
    for wearing apparel, fabric, or cloth coated or impregnated with a biocidal
    or pharmaceutical composition; subclasses 411+ for nominal article
    comprising a solid carrier or diluent for a biocide, repellent, or
    attractant, such as wrapping, packaging, lining, or building material or a
    container (e.g., of, or containing, cellulose); subclasses 414+ for paper
    or foil comprising a biocide, repellent, or attractant; and subclasses 443+
    for web, sheet, film, filament, bandage, or dressing bases with a
    medicament coating or impregnant.  See Class 424 definition for the line
    between it and Class 128 for bandages, body applicators, or body dressings.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, for stock material
    product in the form of a single or plural layer, web, or sheet and which
    contains a biocide; or for an article not elsewhere provided for comprising
    a coated or impregnated base preserved by a composition or compound which
    has a Class 424 utility (e.g., moth-proofed textile or termite-proofed
    wood).

    523,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers,  subclasses 105+ for
    nonmedicated composition of the class or process of preparing, which is
    specifically intended for contact with living animal tissue (other than
    apparel), such as suture composition.

    602,    Surgery:  Splint, Brace, or Bandage, subclasses 41+ for means to
    prevent injury to a body portion, to protect or cover a wound upon or under
    body skin, or to promote healing of an injured body portion.  See Class 424
    definitions for the line between it and Class 128 for bandages, body
    applicators, or body dressings.

    606,    Surgery, for a composition used in sutures where the claim has
    either significant structure or a significant physical property
    characterizing said suture.  The mere use of the terms "filament" or
    "fiber" or ``suture" is considered significant structure, and use of
    numerical indices of tensile strength, handleability, sterility, density,
    or denier are examples of significant characteristic physical properties
    proper for Class 128.


CLS 427/4
TXT Processes under the class definition wherein a plant member or an animal
    specimen, near or in its natural state, is coated.

    (1)     Note.  The intent must be to preserve the member or specimen near
    to the way it would be in nature.  Coating for use as clothing or lumber is
    excluded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.1+,   for processes in which a medical or dental purpose product, a part
    thereof, a subcombination thereof, or an intermediate thereof, is coated or
    impregnated, for example, preparing a biological specimen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclass 94.11 for reactive treatment of biological
    specimens.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, for processes of preserving living plants which
    are more than a coating operation for this class (427).  Processes of
    coating living plants with compositions which do not have any effect upon
    the growth characteristics of the plant are classified in this subclass
    (Class 427, subclass 4).

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 299 and 300+ for processes of preserving,
    disinfecting and sterilizing tobacco.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, for coating a
    living body and read the notes for the line with this class.

    504,    Plant Protecting and Regulating Compositions, subclass 100 for
    seeds coated with agricultural chemicals other than fertilizers; e.g.,
    antidotes, plant growth regulators, fungicides, etc., and subclasses 116+
    for processes and compositions in which the coating material exerts an
    effect upon the growth of the plant.


CLS 427/5
TXT Processes under the class definition wherein the base or coating contains a
    radioactive element or isotope, or a compound thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Elements of atomic number 84 or higher are all considered
    radioactive.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 517 and 625+ for compositions containing
    radioactive material.


CLS 427/6
TXT Processes under subclass 5 wherein particles are coated en masse (i.e., not
    individually) or wherein nuclear fuel elements are coated.


CLS 427/7
TXT Processes under the class definition which impart fraud detecting
    characteristics to the base, or which make the alteration of indicia which
    may be applied thereto detectable even though application of such indicia
    is not claimed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclass 83 for
    envelopes having sealing flaps containing a dye to indicate unauthorized
    tampering.

    283,    Printed Matter, subclasses 72+, and indented subclasses, for safety
    paper or printed matter having fraud preventing characteristics wherein
    there are structural features other than the coating or impregnant.


CLS 427/8
TXT Processes under the class definition which include sampling, visually or
    audibly inspecting, chemically testing, or otherwise physically or
    mechanically determining some variable condition of the coating.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are processes for determining imperfections
    or for determining completeness of a reaction or manipulation as well as
    determinations of undesired variations. Recitations of optimum or desired
    temperatures or pressures are considered nominal where no measurement is
    made and are classified with the disclosed process on some other basis.
    Merely dispensing the coating material even if described as metering it out
    is excluded herefrom since it does not involve any specific measuring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for fingerprinting.

    7,      for a coating process which enhances detection of fraud or
    tampering.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, for testing, per se.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    64 for testing, measuring and inspecting when combined with a laminating
    step.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 40.1-40.7 for testing, measuring and inspecting when combined
    with a molding step.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 1+ for
    processes of chemical testing.


CLS 427/9
TXT Processes under subclass 8 wherein a determination is made as to the depth
    or variation in the depth of a coating on a base.


CLS 427/10
TXT Processes under subclass 9 wherein an electrical or optical test is used to
    determine the coating thickness.


CLS 427/11
TXT Processes under the class definition wherein a solid coating material is
    applied by moving it relative to and in contact with the base.

    (1)     Note.  The surface of the solid coating material may be heated to
    melt said surface making application possible with less force.

    (2)     Note.  Powder, granules or  paste are not considered solid coating
    material for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242,    for application of coatings by friction with rumbling or tumbling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 76+ for apparatus for rubbing
    transfer of solid coating material onto work.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    230+ for processes of transferring a solid coating from a carrier to a base.

    184,    Lubrication, for a solid stick lubricant for a named belt, cable or
    chain, and subclass 99, for a similar device adapted to be applied to a
    bearing.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 49+ for solid
    material for rubbing contact having a support or an end or surface shaped
    to contact the work.


CLS 427/58
TXT Processes under the class definition directed to the formation of a product
    which has a claimed or solely disclosed electrical function.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and indents hereunder provide for the
    formation of subcombinations of or incomplete electrical products, e.g.,
    metal coated paper claimed or solely disclosed to be used in a condenser,
    etc.

    (2)     Note.  For classification here the electrical function of coated
    product must be direct and not remote, and for example includes light bulbs
    but not lamp shades and telephone insulators but not telephone poles.

    (3)     Note. Antistatic coating processes, unless the product formed has
    an electrical function, are not provided for here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for formation of electrical products with a radioactive base or
    coating.

    127,    for magnetic base or coating where the article produced does not
    include an electrically conductive part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 25.01+ and the other classes mentioned in
    the search notes thereto for the manufacture of barrier layer devices.  See
    subclasses 592.1+ for processes of making various electrical devices by
    Class 29 operations or by operations not elsewhere provided for.

    148,    Metal Treatment, particularly subclasses 516+ for processes of
    coating metal combined with heat treatment of metal to modify or maintain
    the internal physical structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical property
    of metal. See subclasses 206+ of Class 148 for processes of carburizing or
    nitriding of metal or subclasses 240+ for processes of producing a reactive
    coating on solid metal, the coating being a metal compound in which an
    element of the same is furnished by the metal base.  See also section III
    of the Class 427 definition and section III, C, of the Class 148
    definition.  Class 148 contains processes of heat treating thoriated and
    similarly coated metal filaments to activate or reduce the coating.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    47+ for miscellaneous processes of making electric conductors, where the
    process involves more than a coating operation and no other class provides
    for the combination of operations claimed.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 192.1+ for
    forming electron emissive or conductive coatings by cathode sputtering.
    Class 204 also provides for bases provided with electron emissive or
    conductive coatings which are defined as being made by a process coming
    within the scope of Class 204 except products which comprise two or more
    contiguous metallic layers for which see Class 29, Metal Working. Such
    coated bases are classified in Class 204 in the subclass which provides for
    the process of producing the coated base. Where the sole disclosure of the
    patent is that the base is coated by a Class 204 process, but the base is
    not claimed as being coated by a Class 204 process, the patent is
    classified in Class 29 or 427. Also, see the reference to Class 204 in the
    class definition of this class (427).

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 80+ for processes of forming
    electron emissive or conductive coatings by electrolytic coating.  Class
    205 also provides for bases provided with electron emissive or conductive
    coatings which are defined as being made by a process coming within the
    scope of Class 205 except products which comprise two or more contiguous
    metallic layers for which see Class 29, Metal Working. Such coated bases
    are classified in Class 205 in the subclass which provides for the process
    of producing the coated base. Where the sole disclosure of the patent is
    that the base is coated by a Class 205 process, but the base is not claimed
    as being coated by a Class 205 process, the patent is classified in Class
    29 or 427. Also, see the reference to Class 205 in the class definition of
    this class (427).

    252,    Compositions, subclass 62.2 for the composition of electrolytes for
    electrical circuit components, and subclass 62.3 for barrier layer
    compositions, subclasses 500+ for electron emissive and conductive
    compositions.  The general line stated in the class definition of Class 427
    as to the line between Class 427 and the composition classes applies to the
    line between these subclasses in Class 427 and subclasses 500+ of Class 252.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses for processes within the class definition, of making
    electrodes from nonmetallic plastic material by a significant plastic
    working operation when combined with a coating operation.  The process of
    shaping broadly followed by coating is classified in Class 427, as is the
    process of coating a previously shaped body.  Also in Class 264, see
    subclasses 29.1+ and 171.1+ for patents which may disclose making of
    electrical conductors, and subclasses 104+ specifically for molding or
    shaping of electro conductive material.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 615+ provides
    for metal coated metal bases as compound metal stock, even though the
    coated product is claimed as being electrically conductive or emissive.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    subclasses 35+, 46+, and 60+ for other methods and apparatus for
    manufacturing electrodes of electrodes of electric lamp and electric space
    discharge devices.


CLS 427/59
TXT Processes under subclass 58 for coating processes producing electrodes used
    in electric welding.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the patents in this subclass are for processes of
    coating consumable metal electrodes with a flux coating.  Where the coated
    welding rod may be used in either electric or gas welding processes, the
    process of coating is placed in this subclass unless all the claims are
    limited to the use in gas welding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 145.1+ and 146.1+ for welding
    electrodes having significant structure other than a mere coating.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 560+ for
    welding rods having a coating which includes metal particles.


CLS 427/60
TXT Processes under subclass 59 wherein the coated welding rod is subjected to
    a post-treatment with a solid treating member such as a roller, die,
    grinder, etc., to remove excess or otherwise treat the coating.


CLS 427/61
TXT Processes under subclass 59 wherein the coating material includes a metal
    in elemental form or includes beryllium, magnesium, calcium, strontium, or
    barium in compound form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for coating with a material containing radium.


CLS 427/62
TXT Processes under subclass 58 for coating processes producing a
    superconductive electrical product; i.e., cryogenic device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 599 for processes of making superconductors
    involving manufacturing steps more than coating.

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 1+ for
    superconducting electronic digital logic circuits.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 186, 366+, and 527+ for miscellaneous superconductive
    circuits.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 160+ for a
    superconductive device with storage of signals.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 300+ for processes of producing high temperature (Tc > 30 K)
    superconductors, particularly subclasses 434, 446+, 452, or 470+.


CLS 427/63
TXT Processes under subclass 62 wherein the coating is (1) applied only to
    selected portions of a base (2) applied in such a manner as to produce a
    coating of nonuniform thickness or (3) varies from area to area as to
    physical or chemical properties.


CLS 427/64
TXT Processes under subclass 58 wherein the product produced is capable of
    emission of light when excited by electrons, ultraviolet radiation, or
    X-rays or after such excitation has been removed.

    (1)     Note.   This subclass provides for coating cathode-ray tubes,
    luminescent screens, etc., even though the patent does not state that the
    article has fluorescent or phosphorescent characteristics since such
    articles are assumed to have these characteristics. Further, it is not
    necessary that the coating being applied is the fluorescent or
    phosphorescent coating since such articles may have additional coatings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157+,   for processes of coating producing a fluorescent or phosphorescent
    product which is not an electrical product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 458.1+, for devices or bases having
    fluorescent or phosphorescent coatings which include structure other than a
    mere base with a coating thereon.  Devices, such as screens, which are
    merely bases having a fluorescent or phosphorescent coating are classified
    in this class (428).

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 301.16+ for compositions exhibiting
    fluorescent or phosphorescent effects.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 364+, for
    cathode-ray tubes  having a fluorescent or phosphorescent screen or target,
    and subclasses 483+ for other electric lamps and electronic tubes but which
    are provided with a fluorescent or phosphorescent material.


CLS 427/65
TXT Processes under subclass 64 wherein the electrical product is sensitive to
    X-rays.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 458.1+ for X-ray sensitive fluorescent
    or phosphorescent devices.


CLS 427/66
TXT Processes under subclass 64 wherein the product produced is a
    electroluminescent lighting device.

    (1)     Note.  In an electroluminescent lamp or device the luminescent
    coating is activated by means of contact with a conductive coating and not
    by means of an electron beam.


CLS 427/67
TXT Processes under subclass 64 wherein the product is a lamp with a
    fluorescent coating which can be activated by means of an electric
    discharge or excited gas.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes processes of making certain articles
    for lighting purposes wherein the coatings may be described as luminescent,
    fluorescent or phosphorescent, however, subclass 66 above provides for
    producing electroluminescent lamps.


CLS 427/68
TXT Processes under subclass 64 wherein the fluorescent or phosphorescent
    coating is in the form of a mosaic or pattern or is used for the production
    of color images.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 23+ for process of producing a cathode-ray tube element.


CLS 427/69
TXT Processes under subclass 64 in which a coating is produced on a base by
    absorption or condensation of, or reaction with, a vapor or gas.


CLS 427/70
TXT Processes under subclass 69 wherein a nonmetallic coating is formed on the
    base or on another layer by vapor deposition.


CLS 427/71
TXT Processes under subclass 64 wherein particles are applied to a base in free
    flowing condition.

    (1)     Note.  Particles suspended in a liquid or paste are not considered
    to be in a free flowing condition for this subclass.


CLS 427/72
TXT Processes under subclass 64 wherein the base is rotated during or after
    application of the coating.


CLS 427/73
TXT Processes under subclass 64 wherein the coating material is deposited on
    the base by settling out of a liquid medium.


CLS 427/74
TXT Processes under subclass 58 which result in a product which responds to
    visible, infrared, or ultraviolet illumination by (1) emitting electrons,
    (2) generating an electromotive force, or (3) varying electrical
    conductivity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclasses 243+ for
    photocells of the generator type.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 501.1 for compositions whose electrical
    conductivity varies with exposure to light.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 15+ for photocells of the
    resistive type.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, subclasses 57+ for
    methods of making photoresponsive semiconductor barrier layer-type devices
    (i.e., photovoltaic devices).


CLS 427/75
TXT Processes under subclass 74 wherein the coating is (1) applied only to
    selected portions of a base or (2) applied in such a manner as to produce a
    coating of nonuniform thickness or (3) varies from area to area as to
    chemical or physical properties.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are target electrodes for television pickup
    or camera tubes, etc.


CLS 427/76
TXT Processes under subclass 74 wherein the photo-sensitive coating applied is
    selenium, tellurium or a compound thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 508+ for manufacture
    of selenium and tellurium or compounds thereof.


CLS 427/77
TXT Processes under subclass 58 for coating processes which result in an
    electrical product which functions to emit or suppress emission of
    electrons into space.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for applying alkaline earth compound
    coatings on directly or indirectly heated cathodes or filaments for
    thermionic tubes, etc.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for producing products which
    emit electrons by arcing.  For arcing or sparking see subclass 580.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59+,    for processes which result in welding electrodes.

    74+,    for processes which result in a photo-emissive electrical product.


CLS 427/78
TXT Processes under subclass 77 in which a coating is produced on a base by
    absorption or condensation of, or reaction with, a vapor or gas; or in
    which the coating material is projected by mechanical force toward the base.


CLS 427/79
TXT Processes under subclass 58 wherein the product produced is intended for
    use in a device comprising two conducting surfaces separated by an
    insulating material or dielectric, the device being capable of storing
    electrical energy and controlling the flow of direct and alternating
    current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 25.41+ for processes of making condensers
    involving manufacturing steps beyond coating.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 271+ for
    nonelectrolytic condensers.


CLS 427/80
TXT Processes under subclass 79 wherein the condenser or capacitor either (a)
    comprises two conducting electrodes wherein the anode has a metal oxide
    film acting as a dielectric and the assembly is operable in the presence of
    an electrolyte or (b) wherein the depletion layer of a semiconductor is
    employed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 25.03 for processes of making electrolytic
    condensers involving more than coating.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 62.2 for the composition of electrolytes and
    subclass 62.3 for barrier layer compositions.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 503+ for
    electrolytic condensers.


CLS 427/81
TXT Processes under subclass 79 wherein gaseous pressures are established which
    are greater or less than ambient.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    294+,   for vacuum pretreatment in general.

    350,    for vacuum post-treatment in general.


CLS 427/96
TXT Processes under subclass 58 for coating processes producing an integrated
    circuit, printed circuit or circuit board (i.e., circuits in which
    conductive wire has been replaced by a conductive coating or a combination
    of interconnected circuit elements produced by coating).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79+,    for integrated circuits involving a condenser or capacitor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 846+ for miscellaneous methods of making
    printed circuits, etc., involving more than coating.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 250+ for
    printed circuits.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, appropriate subclass
    for methods of making semiconductor based integrated circuits.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 55+ for an electrical connector
    comprising or combined with a preformed panel circuit; e.g., a printed
    circuit board.


CLS 427/97
TXT Processes under subclass 96 wherein a coating is applied to the sides of a
    hole in a circuit board.

    (1)     Note.  Such coatings are generally for the purpose or providing a
    conductive path from one side of a circuit board to the other.


CLS 427/98
TXT Processes under subclass 96 wherein a metal coating is applied by immersing
    the base in a metal salt solution.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304,    for electroless deposition of metal on a pretreated base.

    437,    for electroless deposition of metal on a metal base.


CLS 427/99
TXT Processes under subclass 96 wherein the coating is produced on a base by
    adsorption or condensation of, or reaction with, a vapor or gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124,    for vapor deposition of metal to form electrical products.

    250+,   for vapor deposition of metal in general.


CLS 427/100
TXT Processes under subclass 58 for coating processes producing an electrical
    article having piezoelectric properties (i.e., the property of producing
    voltage under mechanical stress or vice versa).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 25.35 for processes of making a
    piezoelectric device.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 62.9 for piezoeletric compositions.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 311+ for
    piezoelectric devices.

    367,    Communications, Electrical: Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 157+ for piezoelectric devices for use underwater.


CLS 427/101
TXT Processes under subclass 58 wherein the product is intended for use in an
    electrical circuit to introduce a specified resistance.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass excludes processes of making resistor devices
    used for producing heat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 610.1+ for processes of manufacturing
    resistors involving more than coating.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 500+ for resistor compositions.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, for electrical resistors in general and the
    search notes for Class 338.


CLS 427/102
TXT Processes under subclass 101 wherein the coating is (1) applied only to
    selected portions of a base or (2) applied in such a manner as to produce a
    coating of nonuniform thickness or (3) varies from area to area as to
    physical or chemical properties.


CLS 427/103
TXT Processes under subclass 101 which include sequentially applying a
    plurality of dissimilar coating materials in superposed relationship on a
    base or applying diverse coating material to the coating on a previously
    coated base.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 615+ for a
    metallic composite defined in terms of the composition of its components.


CLS 427/104
TXT Processes under subclass 58 which result in a core for an electrical
    winding to be used in an induction device or which result in a motor stator.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for coating magnetic sheet material
    to be used in laminated transformer, motor, and generator cores but does
    not include making magnetic cores for memory or recording devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for processes resulting in magnetic cores for memory or recording
    devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, particularly subclasses 100+ for processes of
    coating magnetic metal material combined with a treatment that
    intentionally modifies the magnetic properties of the metal.


CLS 427/105
TXT Processes under subclass 58 wherein the product produced has an interior
    cavity or empty space.

    (1)     Note.  Materials such as foams, felts, etc., are not considered
    hollow even though they may contain voids.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230+,   for coating the interior of hollow articles which have uses other
    than electrical.


CLS 427/106
TXT Processes under subclass 105 wherein the hollow article is glass or quartz.

    (1)     Note.  Attention is directed to the definitions of Class 65, Glass
    Manufacturing, and Class 106, Compositions: Coating or Plastic, for a
    comprehensive definition of the term glass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64+,    for cathode-ray tubes and luminescent or fluorescent lamp bulbs.

    108,    for processes of coating a glass base which is not a hollow article.


CLS 427/107
TXT Processes under subclass 106 wherein the coating is produced on a base by
    absorption or condensation of, or reaction with, a vapor or gas.


CLS 427/108
TXT Processes under subclass 58 wherein the base is capable of transmitting
    light rays so that objects on the other side may be distinctly seen.


CLS 427/109
TXT Processes under subclass 108 wherein the coating is produced on a base by
    absorption or condensation of, or reaction with, a vapor or gas.


CLS 427/110
TXT Processes under subclass 108 wherein the coating material is projected or
    sprayed onto the base.


CLS 427/111
TXT Processes under subclass 58 wherein the coated product is a conductor which
    is heated by the passage of current therethrough and the intended use is in
    a lamp or tube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77+,    for processes of coating a filament with an electron emissive
    coating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 341+ for electric
    lamp filaments.


CLS 427/112
TXT Processes under subclass 111 wherein the filament comprises elemental
    carbon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113+,   for processes of coating a carbon base which is not a filament.

    226+,   for processes of carbonizing by heat decomposition.


CLS 427/113
TXT Processes under subclass 58 wherein the base on which a coating is applied
    is carbon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    for processes of coating carbon filaments.


CLS 427/114
TXT Processes under subclass 113 wherein the carbon substrate functions as a
    brush in an electric motor or as the electrical connection between the
    commutator of a motor or generator and the power source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 248+ and in
    particular subclass 253 for carbon brushes.


CLS 427/115
TXT Processes under subclass 58 which result in an element for use as a part of
    an electrochemical generator in which the chemical energy from the reaction
    of oxygen and a fuel is converted directly into electricity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 2 for a process or apparatus for making a
    battery grid, subclasses 623.1+ for a process of making an electric battery
    cell and subclass 763 for apparatus to assemble or disassemblem an electric
    cell or battery.

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, for a fuel cell or
    and electrode.


CLS 427/116
TXT Processes under subclass 58 wherein an electrical coil or winding is coated
    or impregnated.

    (1)     Note.  For classification here the article must require the coiled
    or wound condition to perform its electrical function.  A process resulting
    in an electrical wire coiled for storage purposes is not provided for here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 602.1+ for methods of making electrical
    coils or windings.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 430+ for a process or
    apparatus for forming an article by winding material onto a core,
    subclasses 18+ and 520+ for winding a storage package, per se, and
    subclasses 550+ for unwinding from a storage package, per se.

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 299+ for electromagnet coils.


CLS 427/117
TXT Processes under subclass 58 wherein the substrate is a solid or stranded
    group of slender flexible rod like conductors having a relatively low
    resistance to current flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    for making a wire in the form of a winding or coil.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    47+ for conductor covering processes therein provided for, which may
    include a coating step.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 110+ for
    insulated electric conductors which include electric conductor structure
    which is more than a mere coated wire, rod or filament.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 615+ for a
    metallic composite wire defined in terms of the composition of its
    components.


CLS 427/118
TXT Processes under subclass 117 wherein plural superposed coatings are applied
    or a coated wire is coated.

    (1)     Note.  The superposed coating may be either similar or diverse.


CLS 427/119
TXT Processes under subclass 117 wherein the coating comprises (1) the natural
    gum obtained from the latex or sap or "rubber" trees or (2) a material
    having small cavities randomly dispersed throughout.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    373,    for processes of producing a cellular or foam coating by heat
    treatment or drying of a coating.


CLS 427/120
TXT Processes under subclass 117 wherein the temperature of the base, coating,
    or coating material is raised to above ambient.


CLS 427/121
TXT Processes under subclass 58 wherein the base to which a coating is applied
    is either (1) a carbohydrate material derived from the structural matter of
    plant life or (2) a relatively short, slender, flexible element of
    macroscopic size and finite length and having a thickness and width of the
    same order of magnitude.

    (1)     Note.  The article formed by the coating process may be conducting,
    insulating, or form a part of an electrical device such as a battery
    separator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     for insulated paper for use in a condenser or capacitor.


CLS 427/122
TXT Processes under subclass 58 wherein free carbon or a free carbon containing
    coating is applied.

    (1)     Note.  Carbon compounds such as carbides or organic compounds are
    not considered as carbon coatings for this subclass unless additional
    carbon in the elemental state is present.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226+,   for processes of forming a carbon coating by carbonizing.

    249,    for processes of forming a carbon coating by vapor deposition.


CLS 427/123
TXT Processes under subclass 58 wherein a coating which contains metal in
    elemental form is applied.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96+,    for processes of applying metal coatings to form integrated or
    printed circuits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 615+ for a
    metallic composite defined in terms of the composition of its components.


CLS 427/124
TXT Processes under subclass 123 in which a coating is produced on a base by
    absorption or condensation of, or reaction with, a vapor or gas; or in
    which a vacuum is utilized.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251+,   for vapor deposition of metal coatings.


CLS 427/125
TXT Processes under subclass 123 wherein a silver, gold, palladium or platinum
    coating is applied.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 669 for a
    metallic composite in which a component has a precious metal base.


CLS 427/126.1
TXT Metallic compound coating:

    Processes under subclass 58 wherein the coating material includes a
    chemical compound which contains at least one atom of a metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108+,   for applying a metallic compound (e.g., tin oxide, etc.) to a
    transparent base to make an electrical product.


CLS 427/126.2
TXT Glass or ceramic base or coating:

    Processes under subclass 126.1 wherein the base coated or the coating
    material is glass or ceramic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    for coating of a hollow glass article such as a light bulb.


CLS 427/126.3
TXT Metal oxide, peroxide, or hydroxide coating:

    Processes under subclass 126.1 wherein the coating is an inorganic compound
    containing a metal atom directly bonded to oxygen.


CLS 427/126.4
TXT Metal is Al:

    Processes under subclass 126.3 wherein the metal bonded to oxygen is
    aluminum.


CLS 427/126.5
TXT Metal is Au, Ag, Pt, Pd, Ru, Rh, Os, Ir:

    Processes under subclass 126.3 wherein the metal bonded to oxygen is gold,
    silver, platinum, palladium, ruthenium, rhodium, osmium or iridium.


CLS 427/126.6
TXT Metal is Ni, Fe, or Co:

    Processes under subclass 126.3 wherein the metal bonded to oxygen is
    nickel, iron, or cobalt.


CLS 427/127
TXT Processes under the class definition wherein the base or the coating is
    disclosed as having magnetic properties.

    (1)     Note.  An iron base, for example, which has magnetic properties is
    only classified here if the patent states the base has magnetic properties.

    (2)     Note.  The term magnetic in these subclasses is intended to include
    magnetizable material, i.e., material to which the property of attraction
    for iron may be imparted as by stimulus of a magnetic field.

    (3)     Note.  Where the magnetic article is part of an electrical article
    or includes a conductive coating, for instance an insulated core for use in
    a transformer see subclasses 58+ above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58+,    for processes of coating wherein a product is produced which
    conducts electricity.

    599,    for processes of forming magnetic recording devices involving use
    of a magnetic field.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, particularly subclasses 100+ for processes of
    intentionally modifying the magnetic properties of metal.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Class 523, subclass 181 for a composition for magnetic
    purposes but which is devoid of magnetic material or to processes of
    preparing said composition.


CLS 427/128
TXT Processes under subclass 127 wherein the coating is disclosed as having
    magnetic properties.


CLS 427/129
TXT Processes under subclass 128 which include the step of physically or
    chemically modifying the base prior to the coating step.


CLS 427/130
TXT Processes under subclass 128 which include the step of physically or
    chemically modifying the coating subsequent to the coating step.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    547,    for post-treating a magnetic coating utilizing magnetic lines of
    force.


CLS 427/131
TXT Processes under subclass 128 which include sequentially applying a
    plurality of dissimilar coating materials or coating a previously coated
    base with a different coating material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 928 for
    composite metallic stock having magnetic properties.


CLS 427/132
TXT Processes under subclass 128 wherein the coating contains metal in
    elemental form, i.e., not chemically combined with another element.


CLS 427/133
TXT Processes under the class definition wherein a coated article is produced
    which is intended for use in shaping molten or plastic material.

    (1)     Note.  Shaping members such as cores, matrices, casting surfaces,
    etc., are considered proper for this subclass.


CLS 427/134
TXT Processes under subclass 133 wherein the shaping member is composed largely
    of sand.

    (1)     Note.  Patents classified herein are generally concerned with molds
    used in casting metal.


CLS 427/135
TXT Processes under subclass 133 wherein the shaping member is a metal, or an
    alloy or composition containing free metal.


CLS 427/136
TXT Processes under the class definition for coating a pavement or for coating
    the earth.

    (1)     Note.  Processes of coating the earth are usually for the purpose
    of making a road or sidewalk but may be for marking of a playing field for
    a sport such as football, etc.

    (2)     Note.  This class provides for making roadways by a coating
    process, which may include packing the coating. However, it does not
    provide for such a process which includes digging up the earth or an old
    pavement or other significant road building which is provided for in Class
    404, Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 97+ for repairing pipe by a
    coating process wherein some of the coating material impregnates the earth
    adjacent the pipe being repaired.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, for roadbuilding or pavement
    repairing by processes involving more than mere coating steps.


CLS 427/137
TXT Processes under subclass 136 wherein the coating forms stripes or
    indicative markings or wherein it contains material particularly adapted to
    reflect light.


CLS 427/138
TXT Processes under subclass 136 wherein the coating contains asphalt, bitumen,
    oil, or tar.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are any heavy oil or tar like material with
    properties similar to those materials specifically set out.


CLS 427/139
TXT Processes under subclass 138 which include traversing the coating with a
    roller to compress or compact the coating material.


CLS 427/140
TXT Processes under the class definition directed to the restoration or repair
    of coatings or surfaces of objects.

    (1)     Note.  A process, for example, of merely repainting a wall is
    excluded from this subclass.  However, if any pretreatment is set forth to
    ready the wall for recoating the process is provided for here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136,    for repairing or restoring a road by a coating process.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 97+ for repairing of pipe by
    a coating process.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 30 for furnace lining formation or repair and see the notes
    thereto.


CLS 427/141
TXT Processes under subclass 140 wherein the object restored or repaired is
    carbon paper or on inked ribbon.


CLS 427/142
TXT Processes under subclass 140 wherein a metal article is repaired or
    restored.


CLS 427/143
TXT Processes under the class definition directed to the production of blanks
    intended for use in the preparation of stencils.


CLS 427/144
TXT Processes under the class definition which are directed to the production
    of a base having a coating thereon for receiving the negative design in
    copy printing, usually by imbibition from an inked positive, and from which
    negative, positive copies may be made.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for uniformly coating a printing
    plate. However, applying a nonuniform coating to a planographic printing
    plate is provided for in Class 101.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, for processes of printing, and for processes of
    manufacturing printing members.  The line between Class 101 and Class 427
    for processes of making printing members, (e.g., lithographic plates, etc.)
    is as follows:  Class 427 will take coating processes wherein the resultant
    product is a substrate having a uniformly coated surface even when
    disclosed or claimed as a printing member, Class 101 provides for processes
    of coating wherein the process results in a nonuniform coating, (e.g.,
    providing an image) and the disclosed use is as a printing member.


CLS 427/145
TXT Processes under the class definition resulting in a product which has an
    indistinguishable image, pattern, or design in a coating which can be made
    visible by chemical or physical treatment; or a process of making the
    image, pattern, or design in such a product become visible.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes the use of invisible inks and color
    producing coatings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for developing latent images of fingerprints.

    7,      for producing fraud detecting devices which have latent images.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, for processes of developing latent images with
    infrared or heat rays.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, appropriate subclasses for process of imaging or developing a
    formed image.


CLS 427/146
TXT Processes under the class definition directed to the production of a base
    with a coating which is (1) transferable as a continuous or a discontinuous
    film; (2) transferable from the base to another surface by an inscribing
    operation, when not provided for in another class; or (3) capable of
    producing a copy of printed or graphic subject matter by heat or chemical
    reaction.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein or in subclasses indented hereunder are
    processes for making decalcomania and paper supports therefor, embossing
    foils, carbon paper, typewriter ribbons, and carbonless paper.

    (2)     Note.  This and indented subclasses also include patents directed
    to producing a stack or pile of sheets or bases provided with transferable
    coatings where no structure is defined in addition to a stack or pile.

    (3)     Note.  Processes directed to producing a coating which is intended
    to be completely transferred from its supporting base in the area contacted
    by the inscribing instrumentality are within the scope of this and indented
    subclasses.

    (4)     Note.  This subclass includes patents directed to exposing a
    normally colored but invisible coating by transparentizing or removal of
    the material which conceals the colored composition or ingredient.

    (5)     Note.  Inscribing is used in the broad sense to include hand-held
    writing instruments (e.g., pens or pencils) or machines (e.g., typewriters).

    (6)     Note.  Production of coated paper specifically adapted to receive
    designs or coatings to form transfers is provided for in this subclass and
    indents herein under.

    (7)     Note.  This subclass will take combinations of making and using a
    transfer where the transferred material is liquid or powder.  For transfer
    of a solid layer see Class 156, subclasses 230+.

    (8)     Note.  This subclass does not include the production or use of a
    roller, web or other transfer machine which is not an article of
    manufacture as a base with a transfer coating.

    (9)     Note.  Ordinary uncoated paper copy sheets are not copy sheets
    within the scope of this and indented subclasses when claimed alone.

    (10)    Note.  Processes for making carbon paper and typewriter ribbons are
    examples of transferable coated papers within the scope of this and
    indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for preparation of transfers containing means for identifying, or
    preventing reuse or counterfeiting of said transfer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 467+ for transfers containing dyes.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    230+ for processes of transferring laminae and, processes of transferring
    an adhered coating from a carrier to a base, per se, or combined with a
    step of coating a carrier with a transferable coating.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 36+ for recorders.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 52+ for electrolytic marking and
    subclass 68 for processes of electroforming recording devices.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 316.1+ for infrared or thermal pattern
    recording, and subclass 330 for infrared to visible imaging.

    346,    Recorders, subclass 135.1 for a base coated with a record receiving
    material which is more than a mere coated base.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 237+ for typewriter ribbons which
    are more than mere coated or impregnated bases.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, appropriate subclasses for radiation sensitive transfer material
    and process, especially subclasses 199+.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclass 425 for erasable surfaces of
    special materials.

    462,    Books, Strips, and Leaves for Manifolding, for carbon paper and
    similar manifolded articles which are more than mere stacks or piles of
    coated sheets.


CLS 427/147
TXT Processes under subclass 146 directed to producing a base having a coating
    which is intended to be transferred as a continuous film.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes a coating process which results in a
    decalcomania or embossing foil.

    (2)     Note.  Production of coated paper specifically adapted to receive
    designs or coatings to form transfers are provided for in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for preparation of transfers to be used for fraud or tamper
    detecting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 467+ for transfers containing dyes.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    230+ for processes of transferring laminae including using a decal.

    462,    Books, Strips, and Leaves for Manifolding, subclasses 69+ for
    carbon paper or the like which is more than a mere coated base.


CLS 427/148
TXT Processes under subclass 147 wherein the transfer is intended to be made
    with the aid of heat or wherein the transfer is intended to be placed on a
    base and heat then applied to make it adhere better to the base.


CLS 427/149
TXT Processes under subclass 147 wherein the coating is releasable from its
    carrier sheet by means of a fluid.


CLS 427/150
TXT Processes under subclass 146 in which a transferable coating includes a
    component reactable with a chemical reagent during the transferring
    operation to produce a color change in situ on the receiving surface or in
    which a base is coated with a component intended to react with another
    component to produce a color change.

    (1)     Note.  The reaction of color forming constituents may be initiated,
    for instance, by heat or pressure from a writing instrument.

    (2)     Note.  The source of heat utilized to effect reaction of the color
    forming constituents in the production of facsimiles is usually radiant
    energy. The particular process involved is usually referred to as
    thermographic duplication.

    (3)     Note.  The copy sheet may include components intended to react to
    produce a color in situ.

    (4)     Note.  The transferable coating may include a component intended to
    be treated with a chemical reagent during the transferring operation to
    produce a color change in situ on the receiving surface.

    (5)     Note.  The processes may be directed to superimposing at least two
    different coatings onto a base in which at least two of the coatings
    include a component intended to react with a component of a different
    coating to produce a color in situ.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146     and 152, for processes directed to exposing a normally colored but
    invisible coating by transparentizing or removal of the material which
    conceals the colored composition or ingredient and in which there is no
    reaction to produce a color.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclass 444 for dyeing processes involving the use of
    radiant energy.

    250,    Radiant Energy, appropriate subclasses for processes for the
    development, conversion, production, transmission and general utilization
    of rays of any type.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 408.1 for analytical, testing or indicating
    compositions.

    346,    Recorders, subclass 135.1 for a base coated with a record receiving
    material which is more than a mere coated base.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 1+ for
    analytical and analytical control methods.


CLS 427/151
TXT Processes under subclass 150 in which at least one of the reactive
    components is a heterocyclic organic compound.

    (1)     Note.  The reactive components are usually referred to as leuco, or
    colorless, color forming materials.


CLS 427/152
TXT Processes under subclass 146 which include (1) coating both sides of the
    base, (2) applying a plurality of diverse coatings to the base or (3)
    forming nonuniform coats on the base.

    (1)     Note.  Coatings containing essentially the same ingredients but
    differing in structure (e.g., thickness) or in the proportions of the
    ingredients are considered to be different coatings.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes processes for applying coatings on
    the opposed sides of a base or applying plural coats to the same side of a
    base.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209+,   for processes for applying coatings to the opposite sides of sheet
    or web.

    256+,   for processes for applying nonuniform separate coatings to the same
    surface of a base.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 237+ for typewriter ribbons which
    are more than mere coated or impregnated bases.


CLS 427/153
TXT Processes under subclass 146 for producing paper or film coated on one side
    with carbon or a similar dark-colored substance, which coated paper is
    intended to be placed between two sheets of paper so that the pressure of
    writing, drawing, typing etc., on the upper sheet makes a copy on the lower.

    (1)     Note.  The coating may be something other than carbon, e.g., dyes
    in a wax, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    462,    Books, Strips, and Leaves for Manifolding, especially subclass 69
    for carbon paper and similar manifolded articles which are more than mere
    stacks or piles of coated sheets.


CLS 427/154
TXT Processes under the class definition wherein the coating is intended as a
    temporary protective layer which is to be later removed.

    (1)     Note.  These coatings are usually employed to protect articles
    during storage, transit or handling and are usually stripped off before
    ultimate use of the object to which they are applied.

    (2)     Note.  Using a masking coating to shield part of the base for
    forming a nonuniform coating is excluded herefrom and classified according
    to the nonuniform coating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146+,   for transfer or decal making.

    259     and 272, for making a nonuniform coating by applying a mask or
    shielding coating which is removable.


CLS 427/155
TXT Processes 154 wherein the substrate is based on an organic material.

    (1)     Note.  Attention is directed to the definition of Class 260,
    Chemistry of  Carbon Compounds, for the distinction between the term
    "organic" and "inorganic".


CLS 427/156
TXT Processes under subclass 154 wherein the base comprises a metal in
    elemental form.


CLS 427/157
TXT Processes under the class definition wherein the coating material is
    capable of emission of light when excited by electrons, ultraviolet
    radiation, or X-rays or after such excitation has been removed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64+,    for coating processes which results in a electrical product having
    fluorescent or phosphorescent characteristics.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 458.1+ for devices or bases having
    fluorescent or phosphorescent coatings which include structure other than a
    mere base with a coating thereon.  Devices, such as screen, which are
    merely bases having a fluorescent or phosphorescent coating are classified
    in this class (427).

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 301.16- 301.6 for compositions exhibiting
    fluorescent or phosphorescent effects.


CLS 427/158
TXT Processes under subclass 157 wherein the coating is intended to brighten
    the base material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157,    for marking clothing to be laundered for identification.


CLS 427/159
TXT Processes under the class definition directed to preparing an incandescent
    mantle by coating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 492 for compositions for preparing or
    regenerating incandescent mantles, and for processes of making mantles
    which involve no more than preparing or regenerating the composition of
    which the mantle is composed.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 100+ for mantle structure and residual
    processes for making a mantle.


CLS 427/160
TXT Processes under the class definition of making a coated product wherein the
    X-ray, ultraviolet, or infrared qualities of the coated product are set
    forth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58+,    for processes wherein the coated product is an electrical product
    with X-ray, ultraviolet, or infrared properties.

    457+,   for processes wherein electrical, magnetic or wave energy is
    employed in the coating processes.


CLS 427/161
TXT Processes under the class definition wherein the coating increases the
    ability of the base to either transmit or diffuse light.


CLS 427/162
TXT Processes under the class definition wherein the coating of the base
    results in an optical element or wherein an optical element is coated.

    (1)     Note.  Merely stating reflective properties of a decorative screen
    or shade, for example, is not enough to place the patent in this subclass
    (162) or subclasses indented hereinunder.

    (2)     Note.  Coating a glass window to reduce glare is considered subject
    matter for the subclass or indents hereunder.

    (3)     Note.  Included herein are processes of making mirrors, optical
    filters, coated lenses, etc.


CLS 427/163.1
TXT Polarizer, windshield, optical fiber, projection screen, or retroreflector:

    Processes under subclass 162 wherein the optical element is a polarizer,
    windshield, optical fiber, rod, waveguide, projection screen, or
    retroreflector.

    (1)     Note.  Windshields and windscreens for boats, trains, aircraft, and
    automobiles are proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108+,   for applying an electrically conductive coating to a windshield.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    483+ for polarization, per se.


CLS 427/163.2
TXT Optical fiber, rod, filament, or waveguide:

    Processes under subclass 163.1 wherein the optical element is a fiber, rod,
    filament, or waveguide having light transmitting regions which transmit
    radiation (light) in the visible or near visible portions of the spectrum.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 413 and 430+ for processes of
    coating optical fibers, filaments, or waveguides which include a
    glassworking step.


CLS 427/163.3
TXT Projection screen:

    Processes under subclass 163.1 wherein the optical element is a projection
    screen.

    (1)     Note. Moving picture and stereopticon screens are considered as
    projection screens and proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communications) and Elements,
    subclasses 443+ for projection screens, per se.


CLS 427/163.4
TXT Retroreflector (e.g., light reflecting small spherical beads, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 163.1 wherein the optical element comprises (a) a
    reflecting substrate coated with small spheres or (b) small spheres coated
    with reflecting material which may be applied to a substrate.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for applying small spherical
    reflectors (e.g., balls, beads, microspheres, retroreflectors, etc.) to a
    base to make it reflective.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137,    for applying reflective material to a roadway.


CLS 427/164
TXT Processes under subclass 164 wherein the base is capable of transmitting
    light rays so that objects on the other side may be distinctly seen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for a process of coating a transparent base which results in an
    electrical product.


CLS 427/165
TXT Processes under subclass 164 wherein the transparent base is composed of a
    glass composition.

    (1)     Note.  Attention is directed to the definitions of Class 65, Glass
    Manufacturing, and Class 106, Compositions: Coating or Plastic, for a
    comprehensive definition of the term glass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    for coating a hollow electrical product such as a light bulb, etc.

    108+,   for coating a transparent base to make an electrical product.


CLS 427/166
TXT Processes under subclass 165 in which a coating is produced on a base by
    absorption or condensation of, or reaction with, a vapor or gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109,    for coating a transparent base by vapor deposition to make an
    electrical product.


CLS 427/167
TXT Processes under subclass 166 wherein a coating compound containing silicon
    and at least one other element is deposited.


CLS 427/168
TXT Processes under subclass 165 wherein the coating material is projected onto
    the glass base.


CLS 427/169
TXT Processes under subclass 165 wherein the coating is applied by submerging
    at least a portion of the base in a pool of coating material.


CLS 427/170
TXT Processes under the class definition wherein a fabric, filament, or yarn is
    treated to produce a matte or dull finish.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes treatment of artificial silk or rayon
    which possesses high sheen or luster with various salt solutions and
    dulling pigments.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not include processes of coating fabric
    with compositions which may inherently dull or deluster but in which no
    dulling or delustering is disclosed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing: Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclass 443, for luster modifying in connection with
    weighting, subclasses 129+, for luster modifying in connection with
    chemical modification, and subclasses 114+ and 127.5, for changing the
    luster of vegetable or animal fibers by chemical modification.

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, and 28, Textiles: Manufacturing, for
    luster modification of textiles not involving the use of fluids or
    chemicals.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    particularly subclasses 165+, for processes within the class definition,
    for forming continuous or indefinite length articles, which may disclose
    use of delustering agents in either a spinning solution or a precipitation
    bath.  Subclasses 187+, in particular, is pertinent to cellulose derivative
    article forming material and precipitating baths therefor.


CLS 427/171
TXT Processes under the class definition which include either (1) extending the
    base beyond its normal dimension in at least one direction or (2)
    maintaining the base in a taut condition.

    (1)     Note.  The tensioning or stretching incidental to feeding a fabric
    through a coating machine or broadly maintaining a surface taut during
    coating is not provided for here but in the appropriate subclass
    hereinafter.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass excludes stretching only small portions of the
    base such as in embossing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 33+ for coating apparatus combined
    with stretching means.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 410+ for tensioning a
    running material of general use.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 288.4+ and 291+ for stretching to reform work, such as for
    biaxial orientation, and for stretching a plastic material beyond its
    elastic limit; combined with coating.


CLS 427/172
TXT Processes under subclass 171 wherein the base is a piece of material
    handled at points intermediate its ends whereby the length is immaterial to
    the manner of handling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclasses 71+ for the structure for
    expanding a running web of cloth; i.e., subclasses 87+ for spreader
    structure.


CLS 427/173
TXT Processes under subclass 172 wherein at least part of the tensioning or
    stretching is toward the sides of the running length which tends to widen
    it.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclasses 87+ for structure for
    spreading (i.e., transversely stretching) a running length web of cloth.


CLS 427/174
TXT Processes under subclass 172 which include applying particles, fibers,
    granules, pellets, beads, flakes, platelets or powder to the base.

    (1)     Note.  The particle must be free flowing when applied but not
    suspended in a liquid.


CLS 427/175
TXT Processes under subclass 172 wherein the base is a relatively slender and
    flexible element having a width and thickness of the same order of
    magnitude.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    for stretching a plastic material beyond its elastic limit combined with
    coating.


CLS 427/176
TXT Processes under subclass 172 wherein the base is a material which has been
    formed by a textile operation.

    (1)     Note.  Textile operations include, for example, weaving, knitting,
    braiding, twisting, needling, etc.


CLS 427/177
TXT Processes under the class definition wherein the coating process is
    combined with forming a winding, ball, roll or coil of the coated base.


CLS 427/178
TXT Processes under subclass 177 wherein the base is of metal or glass.

    (1)     Note.  Attention is directed to the definitions of Class 65, Glass
    Manufacturing, and Class 106, Compositions: Coating or Plastic, for a
    comprehensive definition of the term glass.


CLS 427/179
TXT Processes under subclass 177 wherein the base is either a water laid
    fibrous material or a mat of intertangled fibers.


CLS 427/180
TXT Processes under the class definition wherein the coating material is in the
    form of small discrete pieces.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are powder, granules, fibers pellets, beads,
    flakes, and platelets, etc.

    (2)     Note.  The particles may form the coating, or become part of a
    coating as when applied over a layer of adhesive.

    (3)     Note.  For classification here the particles must not be in
    solution or in suspension in a liquid or paste while being applied.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252+,   for pack processes wherein a base is adjacent particles which
    particles are heated to form gas which coats the base.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 459 for processes of coating a base such as
    the interior of a tube with particulate material such as grit to increase
    the frictional characteristics of the base and then joining the base to
    another part.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, etc., subclasses 255+ for a loose
    mixture containing metal particles.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 308+ for coating apparatus in which
    particulate material is projected or flung against the work.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    279 for mass application of nonadhesive fibers or particles other than
    between laminae.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 112+ for processes under the class definition for forming
    stratified or layered articles which includes the step of uniting randomly
    associated particles.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 546+ for a
    metallic composite having metal particles in a component.


CLS 427/181
TXT Processes under subclass 180 wherein the particles or fibers are applied to
    the surface of a cavity or empty space interior of an article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for applying particles to form cathode- ray tubes, etc.

    133+,   for coating molds.


CLS 427/182
TXT Processes under subclass 181 wherein a bed or mass of solid coating
    particles are maintained in a state of fluidization by passing a gas in a
    generally upward direction through the particles.


CLS 427/183
TXT Processes under subclass 181 wherein the hollow article is rotated during
    or after application of the particles.


CLS 427/184
TXT Processes under subclass 180 which include motion of the base wherein (1)
    the rate of motion is not uniform regardless of the direction or character
    of motion or (2) the motion is other than in a straight line.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for vibratory motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183,    for rotating a hollow article while coating its interior with
    particles.

    600,    for vibrating a base by sonic or ultrasonic energy.


CLS 427/185
TXT Processes under subclass 180 wherein a bed or mass of solid coating
    particles are maintained in a state of fluidization by passing a gas in a
    generally upward direction through the particles.


CLS 427/186
TXT Processes under subclass 180 wherein the coated product produced is
    disclosed as useful for covering the top surface of buildings.


CLS 427/187
TXT Processes under subclass 186 which include cutting the base before or after
    coating.


CLS 427/188
TXT Processes under subclass 186 wherein particles are applied to localized or
    restricted areas of wherein particles are removed from localized or
    restricted areas.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for processes wherein the only
    difference in the areas is the color.


CLS 427/189
TXT Processes under subclass 180 which include treating the particulate coating
    to make it continuous with no discernible particles.

    (1)     Note.  Flame spraying is excluded from this subclass since it is
    assumed any particles being flame sprayed are not solid by the time they
    reach the base. Spraying molten particles is also excluded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252+,   for pack processes wherein a base is adjacent particles which
    particles are heated to form gas which coats the base.

    422,    for spraying molten particles onto a base.

    446+,   for flame spraying.


CLS 427/190
TXT Processes under subclass 189 wherein the particles applied comprise
    metallic compounds.

    (1)     Note.  The particles contain metallic compounds when they are
    applied. However, upon heating they may be reduced to elemental metal.


CLS 427/191
TXT Processes under subclass 189 wherein the particles contain metal in
    elemental form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    455,    for a flame spraying process resulting in a metal coating.


CLS 427/192
TXT Processes under subclass 191 wherein the particles are aluminum, copper, or
    zinc.


CLS 427/193
TXT Processes under subclass 189 in which the particles are changed into a
    glass or glasslike coating.


CLS 427/194
TXT Processes under subclass 189 wherein a cylindrical solid member rotating
    about an internal axis is employed to form the continuous coating.


CLS 427/195
TXT Processes under subclass 189 wherein synthetic resin particles are united.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 520, Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers,
    subclasses 1+ for a definition of the term "synthetic resin".


CLS 427/196
TXT Processes under subclass 180 wherein coating materials are applied to a
    base from a plurality of directions, or wherein particles and a binder are
    applied to a base simultaneously from different sources.


CLS 427/197
TXT Processes under subclass 180 wherein particles or fibers are applied to
    localized or restricted areas, or wherein particles or fibers are removed
    from localized or restricted areas.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for processes wherein the only
    difference in the areas is the color.


CLS 427/198
TXT Processes under subclass 197 which include reshaping the base, reshaping
    the coating or removing particles from localized areas.


CLS 427/199
TXT Processes under subclass 197 wherein the particles or fibers applied
    include a silicon containing compound, a metallic compound, or metal.


CLS 427/200
TXT Processes under subclass 197 wherein the coating material is in the form of
    relatively short, slender, flexible, elements of finite length and having a
    width and thickness of the same order of magnitude.


CLS 427/201
TXT Processes under subclass 180 wherein diverse particulate materials are
    applied to a substrate.

    (1)     Note.  The particles may be diverse as to color, chemical
    composition, overall average size, etc.

    (2)     Note.  The particles may be applied simultaneously or at different
    times.


CLS 427/202
TXT Processes under subclass 180 which include sequentially applying a
    plurality of dissimilar coating materials in superposed relationship on a
    base or applying diverse coating material to the coating of a previously
    coated base.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201,    for applying a plurality of diverse particulate materials to a base.


CLS 427/203
TXT Processes under subclass 202 which include applying a coating on a
    previously applied coating of particles or fibers.


CLS 427/204
TXT Processes under subclass 202 wherein the particles or fibers applied
    comprise a silicon containing compound.


CLS 427/205
TXT Processes under subclass 202 wherein the particles applied contain metal or
    a compound containing a metal atom.


CLS 427/206
TXT Processes under subclass 202 wherein the coating material is in the form of
    relatively short, slender, flexible elements of finite length and having a
    width and thickness of the same order of magnitude.


CLS 427/207.1
TXT COATING REMAINS ADHESIVE OR IS INTENDED TO BE MADE ADHESIVE:

    Processes under the class definition which result in a base with a coating
    having adhesive properties for adhering the base to another surface.

    (1)     Note.  The coating may be dry if it is intended to be made adhesive
    by the application of moisture, etc.


CLS 427/208
TXT Processes under subclass 207.1 wherein the coating is applied to opposing
    surfaces of the base.

    (1)     Note.  The opposite sides may be coated with the same or with
    different coating materials.


CLS 427/208.2
TXT Heat sensitive adhesive:

    Processes under subclass 207.1 wherein the applied coating is intended to
    become adhesive upon the application of heat.

    (1)     Note.  For classification here, the intent that the coating become
    adhesive upon the application of heat must be recited.


CLS 427/208.4
TXT Pressure sensitive adhesive:

    Processes under subclass 207.1 wherein the applied coating becomes adhesive
    when subjected to pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208.2,  for applying a coating which will become adhesive upon the
    application of both heat and pressure.


CLS 427/208.6
TXT Nonuniform coating (e.g., perforated, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 208.4 wherein the coating is nonuniform.

    (1)     Note.  See the definition and notes of subclass 256 in this class
    (427) for an explanation of "nonuniform coating".


CLS 427/208.8
TXT Applying superposed diverse coatings or coating a coated base:

    Processes under subclass 208.4 which include applying a plurality of
    dissimilar coating materials in superposed relationship on a base or
    applying diverse coating material to the coating on a previously coated
    base.

    (1)     Note.  See the notes to subclass 402 of this class (427) for
    further explanation.

    (2)     Note.  Although the last coating applied would not have to be
    adhesive, per se, the process must result in an article having an expressed
    adhesive utility.


CLS 427/209
TXT Processes under the class definition wherein a sheet, web, or strip is
    coated on opposite sides and wherein at least one side is coated other than
    by immersion.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for merely immersing a sheet,
    web, or strip to coat both sides but does provide for such a step combined
    with additionally coating at least one side by another method such as
    spraying, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206,    for coating both sides of a web with flock or fibers.


CLS 427/210
TXT Processes under subclass 209 for forming a coating wherein the coating (1)
    is applied only to selected portions of a base, (2) is applied in such a
    manner as to produce a coating of nonuniform thickness or (3) varies from
    area to area as to chemical or physical properties.

    (1)     Note.  See Notes to subclass 256 for a complete list of subclasses
    involving nonuniform coating.


CLS 427/211
TXT Processes under subclass 209 wherein a solid cylindrical member rotating
    about an internal axis is employed to apply the coating material.


CLS 427/212
TXT Processes under the class definition for coating or encapsulating solid
    granules, pellets, beads, flakes, platelets or other particles en masse
    (i.e., not individually).

    (1)     Note.  A process which specifies or is primarily concerned with the
    coating or encapsulating of solid particles is classified in this Class
    427, subclasses 212+.  However, there are numerous functional classes which
    provide for coating or encapsulating particles and the resultant coated or
    encapsulated particle or a composition containing said particle. Strictly
    speaking, Class 428 is not a composition class. It is included here only
    because it also provides for a coated or encapsulated particle.  See Class
    428, subclass 402, (1) Note for the distinction between Class 428 and those
    functional classes.  These classes, with the exception of Classes 118 and
    264, are listed below in decreasing order of superiority under SEARCH
    CLASS. Classes 118 and 264, though not composition or article classes, were
    included because of their close relationship to this coating class.

    (2)     Note.  Processes wherein an individual particle is independently
    coated are classified elsewhere in this class depending on the specific
    process employed.

    (3)     Note.  The classification of a patent reciting the encapsulating of
    a core material with no reference to the core being a solid or liquid, the
    assumption is a solid and therefore classified in this Class 427,
    subclasses 213.3+ as an original with a suggested cross to Class 264,
    subclasses 4.1+.

    (4)     Note.  Clathrates and intercalates (inclusion compounds), per se,
    are classified hierarchily and subject to the limitations set forth in the
    compound (element) classes based both on the encapsulant and encapsulate.
    For example, a clathrate of urea and hydrogen peroxide is classified in
    Class 564, subclass 32, urea and an organic compound in Class 564, subclass
    1.5, dextran and iodine in Class 536, subclass 112, etc.  Where a patent
    does not state that a material is either a clathrate or an intercalate, the
    assumption is made that the material is either a coated or encapsulated
    product classified in Class 428, subclasses 402.2+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2.14+,  for coating or encapsulating solid granules, pellets, beads,
    flakes, platelets, or other particles en masse, or individually, when the
    product has an intended medical or dental purpose, such as pharmaceutical
    preparations.

    6,      for coating particles wherein the base or coating includes
    radioactive material.

    242,    below for coating articles en masse by rumbling or tumbling them in
    contact with coating material wherein said articles are considered more
    than mere particles, flakes, or granules.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclass 526 for a dye in specified form other than
    mere powder.

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, see, for example, subclasses 542+,
    coated or impregnated material.

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition; e.g.,
    subclass 295 for a method of impregnating or coating an abrasive tool.

    71,     Chemistry:  Fertilizers (See subclass 64.11 for slow release forms).

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, for a filler or pigment for a
    coating composition which may include size or structure of the constituent
    particles or fibers which recitation does not serve to exclude from Class
    106.  See especially subclasses 31.14 (invisible inks), 36, 235, 241, 251,
    253+, 266, 272, 275, 276, 280, 281.1+, 400+, 600+, 714+, and 789  in Class
    106.

    118*,   Coating Apparatus, subclass 303, for apparatus for spray coating
    particulate material.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, subclasses 3+ for a
    coated component.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products.

    252,    Compositions (nonspecial uses or functions; i.e., subclasses 302+,
    363.5, 372+, and 378).

    252,    Compositions, (special uses or functions) to subclass 194.

    252,    Compositions, (special uses or functions), subclass 478 and those
    following, except subclasses 302+, 363.5, 372+, and 378.

    264*,   Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 4+ for processes of encapsulating liquid core materials.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, appropriate subclasses, especially
    subclass 35 for processes of making articles from metal containing
    particulate materials by use of pressure and heat wherein the particles are
    coated with another substance prior to compacting or sintering; and
    subclass 62 for similar processes not employing heat.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 400+
    for coated, impregnated or layered feature.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 89+ for products which are coated solid, encased fluent
    material, or two or more solid self-sustaining materials integrally
    connected, and subclasses 302+ for processes of coating a solid food with a
    liquid.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 402.2+ for a
    microencapsulated product, and subclasses 403+ for coated particles.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclass 138 for a microcapsule.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, subclasses 60+ and 527.

    504,    Plant Protecting and Regulating Compositions, subclass 100 for
    seeds coated with agricultural chemicals other than fertilizers; e.g.,
    antidotes, plant growth regulators, fungicides, etc.

    508,    Solid Antifriction Devices, Materials Therefor, Lubricant or
    Separant Compositions for Moving Solid Surfaces, and Miscellaneous Oil
    Compositions.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, see, for example, Class 523,
    subclasses 161 invisible ink composition and 200+ for a composition
    containing product in the form of surface-coated, impregnated,
    encapsulated, or surface-modified material.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, (mixture subclasses).

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    249+ for coating or covering of hazardous or toxic waste.



            *Not a composition class.


CLS 427/213
TXT Processes under subclass 212 wherein a bed or mass of particles are
    maintained in a state of fluidized suspension by passing a gas or vapor in
    a generally upward direction through the particles.

    (1)     Note.  Coating material may be introduced directly into the mass of
    fluidized particles or along with the fluidizing gas or vapor.

    (2)     Note.  The particles usually are coated while in the fluidizing gas
    or vapor but may be coated before entry or after exit therefrom.


CLS 427/213.3
TXT Solid encapsulation process utilizing an emulsion or dispersion to form a
    solid-walled microcapsule (includes liposome):

    Subject matter under subclass 212 wherein a medium in the form of an
    emulsion or dispersion is used to affect encapsulation of the solid; the
    medium may contain one or more polymers, polymer precursors, monomers or
    other encapsulating materials; e.g., gelatin wax, etc.

    (1)     Note.  The classification of a patent reciting the encapsulation of
    a core material with no reference to its  physical state, i.e., solid,
    liquid or gas, the assumption is made that the core material is solid and
    therefore classified in the Class 427 and a suggested cross into Class 264,
    subclasses 4+.

    (2)     Note.  Liposomes are formed of mesomorphic walls (i.e., a state of
    matter intermediate between crystalline solid and normal isotropic liquid)
    and are classified here based on their solid characteristics.


CLS 427/213.31
TXT With post-treatment of encapsulant or encapsulating material, (e.g.,
    further coating, hardening, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 213.3 wherein the solid-walled microcapsule
    is subjected to significant aftertreatment; e.g., contacting microspheres
    with a solvent to extract material from their surfaces, etc.

    (1)     Note.  The application of well known techniques for recovering,
    separating or isolating materials, e.g., filtering sieving, centrifuging,
    drying, precipitating, spray-drying, drum drying, freeze-drying,
    evaporating are not significant unless accompanied by process limitations,
    e.g., distillation performed at 650 mm Hg., sieving conducted with
    specified mesh size, etc.


CLS 427/213.32
TXT Hardening:

    Subject matter under subclass 213.31 wherein the after treatment comprises
    hardening of the microsphere, e.g., chilling, chemically crosslinking etc.


CLS 427/213.33
TXT Using crosslinking agent:

    Subject matter under subclass 213.32 wherein a crosslinking agent is used
    to harden the final product, e.g., chemically crosslinking gelatin
    microcapsules with compounds such as formaldehyde, glutaraldenhyde, etc.


CLS 427/213.34
TXT Solid-walled microcapsule formed by in situ polymerization:

    Subject matter under subclass 213.3 wherein the solid-walled microcapsule
    is obtained by the polymerization of one or more reactants contained in the
    colloidal emulsion or dispersion system.

    (1)     Note.  A patent which claims an in situ generated polymer which
    subsequently reacts with a material; e.g., a crosslinking agent is not
    classified here but in subclass 213.31.


CLS 427/213.35
TXT Solid-walled microcapsule formed from gelatin or derivative thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 213.3 wherein the solid-walled microcapsule
    is comprised of gelatin or derivative thereof.


CLS 427/213.36
TXT Solid-walled microcapsule formed from preformed synthetic polymer:

    Subject matter under subclass 213.3 wherein the microencapsulation process
    employed a polymer which was not prepared in situ.


CLS 427/214
TXT Processes under subclass 212 wherein a plurality of different coating
    materials are applied to a mass of particles in superposed relationship or
    wherein a coating material is applied to an already coated mass of
    particles.


CLS 427/215
TXT Processes under subclass 212 wherein the particulate base material being
    coated is inorganic.

    (1)     Note.  For the purposes of this subclass coal particles are
    considered to be carbonaceous inorganic material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for coating particles wherein the base or coating contains
    radioactive material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 570 for metal
    powder coated with a metal.


CLS 427/216
TXT Processes under subclass 215 wherein the inorganic base material is metal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, Etc. subclass 332 for processes of
    producing solid particulate free metal directly from liquid metal (e.g.,
    liquid comminuting, etc.) with subsequent coating of the particles.


CLS 427/217
TXT Processes under subclass 215 wherein the coating contains metal in
    elemental form.


CLS 427/218
TXT Processes under subclass 215 wherein the coating contains an insoluble
    finely divided solid powder intended to impart color.

    (1)     Note.  The colored particles produced are often intended to be used
    as roofing granules.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, for pigment materials.


CLS 427/219
TXT Processes under subclass 218 wherein the coating material includes a
    silicon containing compound.


CLS 427/220
TXT Processes under subclass 215 wherein the coating is based on an organic
    material.

    (1)     Note.  Attention is directed to the definition of Class 260,
    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for the distinction between the term
    "organic" and "inorganic".


CLS 427/221
TXT Processes under subclass 220 wherein the coating contains a material of the
    resinous, rubber or hardenable oil type.

    (1)     Note.  Linseed, tung, and other drying oils are considered
    hardenable.

    (2)     Note.  Paint is assumed to contain latex rubber or linseed oil
    unless otherwise specified.

    (3)     Note.  Shellac and varnish are examples of natural resins.


CLS 427/222
TXT Processes under subclass 212 wherein the base comprises an organic
    synthetic or natural resinous material.


CLS 427/223
TXT Processes under the class definition wherein a coating or surface to be
    coated is subjected to contact with a flame.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses exclude flame contact which may
    take place in flame spraying which is generally provided for in subclasses
    446+.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this and indented subclasses are processes in
    which decomposition of a base or coating takes place.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    446+,   for jet or plasma flame spraying.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 47 for coating apparatus including
    flame contact means.


CLS 427/224
TXT Processes under subclass 223 wherein any applied coating is subjected to
    flame contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    348,    for treatment of coating with a gas jet or blast which is not a
    flame.


CLS 427/225
TXT Processes under subclass 223 wherein a free metal coating is formed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191+,   for coating a base with particles and contacting the applied
    particles with a flame.


CLS 427/226
TXT Processes under the class definition wherein a coating which is on the base
    is decomposed by heat or wherein part of a base is decomposed by heat.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses exclude heat decomposition of a
    vapor or gas to form a coating.

    (2)     Note.  This and indented subclasses include carbonization of a
    substrate or coating or heat decomposition of a material in a coating such
    as a temporary binder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223+,   for heat decomposition produced by flame contact.

    246,    for coagulating a coating to form a microporous product.

    248.1+, for heat decomposition of a vapor or gas to form a coating.

    314+,   for a process which includes preheating a base and then applying a
    coating composition which is decomposed simultaneously with application.

    372.2+, for heat treatment of a coating without decomposition, for instance
    to evaporate a solvent or polymerize a resin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclass 140 for singeing or carbonizing of textiles,
    per se.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 47 for apparatus for subjecting a
    surface to a carbonizing treatment.


CLS 427/227
TXT Processes under subclass 226 wherein a substrate is carbonized or at least
    a part of the substrate is heat decomposed.


CLS 427/228
TXT Processes under subclass 226 wherein a liquid or solid coating is heat
    decomposed to form elemental carbon or a carbide, which remain as a coating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    for processes of forming electrical products including a carbon
    coating.

    226,    for decomposing a carbon compound coating completely where neither
    a carbon or carbide coating is formed.

    249,    for the heat decomposition of a gas or vapor to form a carbon or
    carbide coating.

    399,    for carbide coatings formed by reaction of a metal containing
    coating with a carbon substrate.


CLS 427/229
TXT Processes under subclass 226 wherein a liquid or solid coating is heat
    decomposed to form free metal coating.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for decomposition of a binder for
    metal which is already in elemental form as well as decomposition of metal
    compounds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228,    for the formation of metal carbide coatings.

    252,    for pack processes and for the decomposition of a gaseous or vapor
    metal compound to form a metal coating.


CLS 427/230
TXT Processes under the class definition wherein the coating is applied to an
    inner or concave surface of a cavity, bore, depression or hole in the work.

    (1)     Note.  Materials such as fabrics, foams, felts, etc., are not
    considered hollow even though they may contain voids.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64+,    for coating cathode-ray tubes and fluorescent lamps.

    105+,   for coating hollow electrical articles such as light bulbs and
    motor stators, etc.

    133+,   for coating molds.

    142,    for repairing articles, some of which are hollow such as radiators
    and boilers, etc.

    181,    for processes of coating the interior of a hollow article with
    particles or fibers.

    243+,   for coating processes wherein a foraminous product is produced.

    476,    for a process of coating a hollow article utilizing an
    electrostatic charge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 97+ for repairing pipe by a
    coating process.


CLS 427/231
TXT Processes under subclass 230 which include rotating or oscillating the
    article about an axis therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for applying a coating to a cathode-ray tube while rotating it.


CLS 427/232
TXT Processes under subclass 231 which include removing excess coating material
    from the article.


CLS 427/233
TXT Processes under subclass 231 wherein the coating material is projected by
    mechanical force onto the inside of the article.


CLS 427/234
TXT Processes under subclass 231 wherein the article comprises metal in
    elemental form.


CLS 427/235
TXT Processes under subclass 230 which include removing unwanted coating
    material from the article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232,    for similar processes which include rotating the article.


CLS 427/236
TXT Processes under subclass 230 wherein the coating material is projected by
    mechanical force onto the inside of the article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233,    for similar processes which include rotating the article.


CLS 427/237
TXT Processes under subclass 230 wherein a coating is produced on an article by
    absorption or condensation of, or reaction with, a vapor, gas, mist, or
    smoke.


CLS 427/238
TXT Processes under subclass 230 which include use of pressure above or below
    atmospheric.


CLS 427/239
TXT Processes under subclass 230 wherein the base being coated comprises metal
    in elemental form.


CLS 427/240
TXT Processes under the class definition which include the use of centrifugal
    force in coating the base or in post treating the coated base.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for utilizing centrifugal force in a
    post-treatment for removing excess coating, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Utilizing centrifugal force to ready the coating material
    for application, such as mixing it, is not provided for in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231,    for processes wherein a hollow article is rotated but no
    centrifugal force is defined.

    242,    for processes of applying coatings by rumbling or tumbling where
    the force employed is a hammering force supplied by gravity rather than
    centrifugal force.

    346,    for processes wherein a coated article is rotated, etc., but no
    centrifugal force is defined.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 52+ for means to centrifuge work.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    74 for processes of surface bonding with application of centrifugal force.


CLS 427/241
TXT Processes under subclass 240 wherein a coating which contains metal in
    elemental form is treated or applied.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    347,    below for manipulation of a metal coated article where centrifugal
    force is not defined.


CLS 427/242
TXT Processes under the class definition which include mechanically causing the
    base to be turned over and over during or after coating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240+,   for centrifugal force utilization in a coating process.


CLS 427/243
TXT Processes under the class definition which are peculiar to coating a base
    so that the resulting product is foraminous or porous.

    (1)     Note.  To be included herein the resulting product must be porous
    or foraminous.  Applying a porous coating to a nonporous base is not
    included herein but classified according to the coating process.

    (2)     Note.  To be included herein a specific technique for keeping the
    pores or openings from being filled must be included.  Thus coating
    substrates with large openings which are not easily filled are classified
    elsewhere on some other basis.  Coating of cloth, sponges, and filters,
    etc., are generally here since specific techniques are usually required to
    keep the substrate porous.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclass 150 for electrolytic coating of
    perforated, foraminous, or permeable substrates.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 566 for a
    consolidated metal powder product having an interconnected void structure,
    subclasses 596+ for apertured metallic stock, and subclass 613 for porous
    metallic stock.


CLS 427/244
TXT Processes under subclass 243 wherein the product is (1) a porous material
    through which a fluid is passed for the purpose of removing suspended
    matter, (2) the porous fibrous skeleton of a marine animal or (3) a
    cellular mass formed by solidifying a liquid in which gas bubbles are
    entrapped.


CLS 427/245
TXT Processes under subclass 243 wherein the coating includes openings or holes
    which are very small, generally microscopic in size.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for producing a vapor permeable
    coating on a base which is used, for example, to make breathable
    leatherlike material.


CLS 427/246
TXT Processes under subclass 245 wherein the coating is a colloidal solution
    which is caused to become a soft solid mass.


CLS 427/247
TXT Processes under subclass 243 wherein the base comprises metal in elemental
    form.


CLS 427/248.1
TXT COATING BY VAPOR, GAS, OR SMOKE:

    Processes under the class definition in which a coating is produced on a
    base by absorption or condensation of, or reaction with, a vapor, gas,
    mist, or smoke.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for coating by placing a base in a
    chamber filled with mist or smoke.  However, coating by spraying mist is
    excluded from this subclass and is provided for in subclasses 421+.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass provides for reaction of a base or previously
    applied coating with a gas.  However, it does not provide for decomposing a
    coating by heat and reacting it with a gas.  (See subclasses 226+).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for a vapor deposition process resulting in an electrical product
    having a fluorescent or phosphorescent base or coating.

    99,     for making a printed circuit by vapor deposition.

    124,    for producing an electrical product by vapor depositing a metal
    coating material.

    166,    for vapor depositing on glass to make an optical element.

    226+,   for decomposing a coating and reacting it with a gas.

    237,    for coating the interior of a hollow article by vapor, gas, mist,
    or smoke.

    421+,   for coating by projecting a mist against a base.

    587+,   for vapor deposition utilizing resistance heating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes for growing therein-defined
    single-crystal of all types of materials, including inorganic or organic,
    and by all techniques, especially subclasses 84+ for vapor or gas phase
    epitaxy.

    148,    Metal Treatment, particularly subclasses 206+ for processes of
    carburizing, nitriding, or both of a metal substrate with a gas or
    subclasses 240+ for processes of reactively coating a metal substrate
    utilizing a gaseous agent that combines with the metal substrate to form a
    coating thereon containing a constituent of the metal substrate therein.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or  Containment, subclasses
    249+ for coating of a   hazardous or toxic waste using a gas, vapor, or
    smoke.


CLS 427/249
TXT Processes under subclass 248.1 which result in a carbon or carbide coated
    base.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228,    for forming a carbon coating by heat decomposition of a solid or
    liquid.


CLS 427/250
TXT Processes under subclass 248.1 wherein the resulting coatings is metal in
    elemental form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 938 for
    composite metallic stock made by a process of this subclass.


CLS 427/251
TXT Processes under subclass 250 wherein the base is mechanically moved during
    the coating operation.


CLS 427/252
TXT Processes under subclass 250 wherein the metal is applied to the base by
    decomposition of a vaporous metallic compound of the coating metal.

    (1)     Note.  Within the scope of this subclass is the process of applying
    a metal coating or alloy formation on the surface of the base by an
    exchange of the metal base ions with the metallic ions of the coating
    compound; i.e., diffusion.


CLS 427/253
TXT Processes under subclass 252 wherein the metallic compound contains
    fluorine, chlorine, bromine, or iodine.


CLS 427/254
TXT Processes under subclass 248.1 wherein the base material is derived from
    the trunks or branches of trees or bushes.

    (1)     Note.  Wood particles or fibers which have been chemically changed;
    e.g., regenerated cellulose etc., or water layed to form a paper, are not
    considered to be wood.


CLS 427/255
TXT Processes under subclass 248 wherein the base includes an inorganic silicon
    containing compound or an inorganic metal containing compound.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes coating bases such as glass, ceramic,
    brick, stone, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Attention is directed to the definition of Class 260,
    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for the distinction between the term
    "organic" and "inorganic".


CLS 427/255.1
TXT Mixture of vapors or gases utilized:

    Processes under subclass 248.1 wherein a mixture of gases or vapors is
    contacted with the base to form a coating.


CLS 427/255.2
TXT The resultant coating is a mixture or a compound formed from the mixture
    utilized:

    Processes under subclass 255.1 wherein the resultant coating after
    application to the base comprises (a) a mixture of coating components from
    different sources, or (b) a compound formed from components supplied by
    different sources.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for coatings which are mere physical
    mixtures as well as coatings which are the reaction products of mixtures of
    gases or vapors.


CLS 427/255.3
TXT The mixture utilized contains oxygen:

    Processes under subclass 255.2 wherein at least one of the gases in the
    mixture of gases or vapors includes oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  The oxygen may be in any form; e.g., O2, H2O, etc.


CLS 427/255.4
TXT Base supplied constituent:

    Processes under subclass 248.1 wherein a nonmetal base reacts with the
    applied coating material to form a coating of the reaction product.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for reaction products wherein one of
    the reactants is a coating which was previously applied on a base.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226+,   for heat decomposition of a base.

    227,    for processes wherein a coating is formed by carbonizing or
    charring a base.

    301+,   for processes including a reaction between a coating and a
    preapplied chemical agent.

    333,    for processes including a reaction between two coatings.

    337+,   for processes including a reaction between a coating and a
    subsequently applied chemical agent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 115.51+ for the treatment of textiles and
    paper wherein the textile or paper base supplies a part or all of the
    coating, and subclasses 94.1+ for the treatment of hides, skins, feathers,
    and animal tissues wherein the base supplies a part or all of the coating.

    148,    Metal Treatment, particularly subclasses 240+ for applying a
    material to a metal base wherein the material and Assisted with metal base
    react to form a coating of the reaction product.


CLS 427/255.5
TXT Moving the base:

    Processes under subclass 248.1 wherein the base is mechanically moved while
    being coated by the vapor, gas, or smoke.


CLS 427/255.6
TXT Organic coating applied by vapor, gas, or smoke:

    Processes under subclass 248.1 wherein the final coating is based on
    organic materials from the vapor, gas, or smoke.

    (1)     Note.  Attention is directed to the definitions of Class 260,
    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for the scope of the term "organic".


CLS 427/255.7
TXT Plural coatings applied by vapor, gas, or smoke:

    Processes under subclass 248.1 wherein at least two different coating
    materials are applied by vapor, gas, or smoke to form superposed diverse
    coatings on a base.


CLS 427/256
TXT Processes under the class definition wherein the coating (1) is applied
    only to selected portions of a base, (2) is applied in such a manner as to
    produce a coating of nonuniform thickness or (3) varies from area to area
    as to chemical or physical properties.

    (1)     Note.  The intent has to be form a nonuniform coating; merely
    coating a rough base which automatically results in a nonuniform coating
    thickness is not provided for in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass provides for applying coatings wherein the
    only difference in composition of various areas in the color.

    (3)     Note.  A foamed coating is not considered to be nonuniform for the
    purpose of this subclass unless the disclosure specifically sets forth it
    is nonuniform.

    (4)     Note.  Merely drilling a hole in a coated base is not provided for
    here. However, drilling large numbers of holes in a coated base to obtain a
    nonuniform coating is provided for here.

    (5)     Note.  Partial immersion of a pole to impregnate only the end which
    will be underground is excluded from this subclass and its indents and is
    provided for in subclass 441.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     for a coating process which results in a superconductor having a
    nonuniform coating.

    68,     for a coating process resulting in a fluorescent or phosphorescent
    electrical product having a nonuniform coating.

    75,     for a coating process resulting in a photosensitive electrical
    product having a nonuniform coating.

    102,    for a coating process which results in an electrical resistor
    having a nonuniform coating.

    140+,   for restoring or repairing which may result in a nonuniform coating.

    143,    for stencil blank making.

    145,    for making a developable latent image.

    146+,   for transfer or copy sheet making, especially subclass 177.

    180+,   for applying particle to a base, especially subclass 222 where
    localized different areas are produced.

    197+,   for applying particles to localized areas of a base.

    230+,   for a nonuniform coating applied to a hollow article to form a
    gasket.

    466+,   for a coating process utilizing electrostatic attraction or
    projection which may result in a nonuniform coating.

    595+,   for a process of forming a nonuniform coating by selective
    irradiation or for a coating process wherein infrared energy or radiant
    heat is utilized to form a nonuniform coating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 467+, for processes of transferring a dye,
    usually in the form of a design, from a carrier base.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 211, 301 and 406, for apparatus for
    applying a coating in a nonuniform manner.


CLS 427/257
TXT Processes under subclass 256 in which an irregular surface coating is
    produced by intentionally employing coating materials which dry to a
    wrinkled appearance or which crack on drying to produce a "crackled" finish.


CLS 427/258
TXT Processes under subclass 256 which include sequentially applying a
    plurality or dissimilar coating materials in superposed relationship on a
    base or applying diverse coating material to the coating on a previously
    coated base.

    (1)     Note.  It is not necessary that all of the coatings be nonuniform
    for classification here.

    (2)     Note.  A partial coating is considered a nonuniform coating for the
    purpose of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    for a process of making a transfer having a nonuniform coating.

    273,    for a  process of treating a nonuniform coating with a fluid
    wherein the fluid does not form a coating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 601 for metallic
    stock having a discontinuous surface component.


CLS 427/259
TXT Processes under subclass 258 in which the base treated has applied to
    portions thereof a coating which masks or shields the portions so coated
    during further treatment of the exposed portions of the base.

    (1)     Note.  The masking coating may be applied to selected areas or the
    entire base may be coated with the mask-forming composition and selected
    portions of the coating, thus formed, removed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154,    for removable protective coatings not used as masks.

    272,    for processes utilizing preformed masks wherein there is surface
    deformation or selective removal of portions of a coating.

    282,    for other processes utilizing preformed masks to produce nonuniform
    coatings.

    300,    for processes of shielding entire surfaces during a coating
    operation wherein the shielding means is not a removable protective coating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    625+ for methods of etching and for combinations of etching and coating
    where the etching itself is intended as a manufacturing step and not merely
    a preparatory, perfecting step for the coating.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 215+ for processes of soldering,
    brazing or welding in which the metal parts have means for confining the
    fused filler metal to restricted areas.


CLS 427/260
TXT Processes under subclass 258 wherein the coating member is a hand-held
    applicator which comprises (1) bristles secured to a support or (2) a
    member capable of soaking up coating material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137,    for stippling a coating with a brush.

    428,    for applying a uniform coating with a roller applicator.

    429,    for a process of applying coating material with a brush or
    absorbent applicator which results in a uniform coating.


CLS 427/261
TXT Processes under subclass 258 wherein the outermost coating applied is
    nonuniform.

    (1)     Note.  See generic subclass 256 for the scope of the term
    "nonuniform".


CLS 427/262
TXT Processes under subclass 261 wherein a nonuniform coating applied varies in
    character or color from one area to another and wherein no repetitive
    pattern is discernible.

    (1)     Note.  Coatings considered to be variegated include marbleized,
    mottled, stippled, wood grained etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257,    for producing wrinkled or crackled coatings.

    267,    for a process of applying a variegated coating and applying a
    uniform coating thereover.

    274     and 280, for a process of applying a variegated coating to a base
    wherein said variegated coating is the only coating applied.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 478+ for marbleizing with dyestuffs.


CLS 427/263
TXT Processes under subclass 262 wherein the applied coating resembles stone or
    marble.


CLS 427/264
TXT Processes under subclass 261 which include intentionally deforming or
    removing portions of the surface of the base; or deforming or removing
    selective portions of the coating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270,    for a similar process wherein the final coating is uniform.

    271,    for a similar process wherein only a single coating is applied.


CLS 427/265
TXT Processes under subclass 261 wherein an additional nonuniform coating is
    applied.


CLS 427/266
TXT Processes under subclass 265 wherein the base is glass or a ceramic
    material.

    (1)     Note.  Attention is directed to the definitions of Class 65, Glass
    Manufacturing, and Class 106, Compositions: Coating or Plastic, for a
    comprehensive definition of the terms "glass" and "ceramic".


CLS 427/267
TXT Processes under subclass 258 wherein a nonuniform coating applied varies in
    character or color from one area to another and wherein no repetitive
    pattern is discernible.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257,    for producing wrinkled or crackled coatings.

    262,    for applying plural coatings wherein the final coating is
    variegated.

    274     and 280, for applying a single coating which is variegated.


CLS 427/268
TXT Processes under subclass 267 wherein the applied coating resembles stone or
    marble.


CLS 427/269
TXT Processes under subclass 258 wherein the base is glass or a ceramic
    material.

    (1)     Note.  Attention is directed to the definitions of Class 65, Glass
    Manufacturing, and Class 106, Compositions: Coating or Plastic, for a
    comprehensive definition of the terms "glass" and "ceramic".


CLS 427/270
TXT Processes under subclass 258 which include intentionally deforming or
    removing portions of the surface of the base; or deforming or removing
    selective portions of the coating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264,    for a similar process wherein a final uniform coating is applied.

    271+,   for a similar process wherein only a single coating is applied.


CLS 427/271
TXT Processes under subclass 256 which include intentionally deforming or
    removing portions of the surface of the base; or deforming or removing
    selective portions of the coating.

    (1)     Note.  For the general line between this subclass and Class 264,
    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes, with
    regard to the combination of processes of reshaping or deforming plus
    coating, see the notes to Class 264, subclass 129.

    (2)     Note.  The deformation or removal step, per se, is also included in
    this and the indented subclasses when not more specifically provided for in
    other classes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257,    wherein the coating is self-deforming.

    264     and 270, for similar processes which include applying a plurality
    of coatings.

    355+,   for utilizing a solid treating member on the coating which leaves
    the coating uniform.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 44 for coating apparatus combined with
    means to deform the base, and subclasses 100+ for coating apparatus having
    solid members acting on the coated base to modify the coating.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    625+ for methods of etching and for combinations of etching and coating
    where the etching itself is intended as a manufacturing step and not merely
    a preparatory, perfecting step for the coating.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 129, for processes of molding or shaping within the class
    definition plus a coating step.


CLS 427/272
TXT Processes under subclass 271 wherein a nonuniform coating is obtained by
    covering selected areas of the base being coated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259,    for applying a masking coating plus another coating.

    282,    for processes employing masks or stencils to obtain nonuniform
    coatings and not involving surface deformation or the selective removal of
    portions of the coating.


CLS 427/273
TXT Processes under subclass 271 wherein a portion of the coating is removed or
    deformed by contacting it with a gas or liquid.

    (1)     Note.  The liquid may be a solvent, swelling agent, or other liquid
    which treats the coating either physically or chemically.

    (2)     Note.  A gas or vaporized liquid may be used to give the coating a
    physical or a chemical treatment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    336+    and  337+, for treating a coating after its application wherein the
    coating remains uniform.


CLS 427/274
TXT Processes under subclass 271 wherein the nonuniform coating applied varies
    in character or color from one area to another and wherein no repetitive
    pattern is discernible.

    (1)     Note.  Coatings considered to be variegated include marbleized,
    mottled, stippled and wood grained.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257,    for producing wrinkled or crackled coatings.

    262,    for applying a plurality of coatings wherein the final coating is
    variegated.

    280,    for applying a variegated coating without any deformation of the
    base or coating.


CLS 427/275
TXT Processes under subclass 271 which include a mechanical or chemical
    treatment of the base to deform the surface thereof either before or after
    applying the coating material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    299+,   for processes which include pretreating a base prior to applying a
    uniform coating which pretreating may result in a nonuniform base.


CLS 427/276
TXT Processes under subclass 275 wherein the coating is deformed by the same
    operation which deforms the surface of the base.

    (1)     Note.  The process of this subclass can be carried out or an
    article wherein both the base and coating are uniform so long as the final
    article has a nonuniform coating.


CLS 427/277
TXT Processes under subclass 271 which include contacting the coating with a
    solid member to deform or remove a portion thereof.


CLS 427/278
TXT Processes under subclass 277 wherein the solid treating member is
    cylindrical and rotates about an axis.


CLS 427/279
TXT Processes under subclass 256 wherein the coating being applied contains
    glass-like material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193,    for a process of applying vitrifiable particles to a base.


CLS 427/280
TXT Processes under subclass 256 wherein the nonuniform coating applied varies
    in character or color from one area to another and wherein no repetitive
    pattern is discernible.

    (1)     Note.  Coatings considered to be variegated include marbleized,
    mottled and wood grained, coatings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257,    for producing wrinkled and crackled coatings.

    262,    for applying a plurality of coatings wherein the final coating is
    variegated.

    274,    for a coating process which includes deformation or removal of a
    portion of a coating which process results in a variegated surface.


CLS 427/281
TXT Processes under subclass 280 wherein the coating resembles stone or marble.


CLS 427/282
TXT Processes under subclass 256 wherein coating is applied to limited areas
    only on a base by covering the other areas.

    (1)     Note.  The mask or stencil may be temporarily adhered to the base
    during the step of applying the coating.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass provides for a process wherein a discontinuous
    cover is applied to a base and a different coating material is then applied
    to the base through the discontinuities. However, if the cover or mask
    coating is coated while coating through the discontinuities subclass 259 is
    indicated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259,    for applying plural superposed coatings including a masking coating
    and see (2) Note to this subclass 307.

    272,    for a coating process utilizing a mask which process includes
    deforming the base or coating or removing a portion of the coating.

    595+,   a process including irradiating selected areas of a coating by
    utilizing a mask.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclass 115 for treating a portion of a textile
    product which may utilizing a mask.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    247 for laminating processes involving stripping of an adhered lamina and
    subclass 280 for coating subsequent to a laminating step.


CLS 427/283
TXT Processes under subclass 256 wherein a coating contains material which
    crystallizes or solidifies in situ or reagents which precipitate solid
    matter in situ.


CLS 427/284
TXT Processes under subclass 256 wherein only the edge or border of a base is
    coated.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes processes for coating the edges of
    stacked or rolled sheets.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282,    for processes of bordering or edging using a mask.

    286,    processes of applying stripes to a base.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    107 for processes for sealing the edges of laminated glass.


CLS 427/285
TXT Processes under subclass 284 wherein the base is either (1) a water laid
    fibrous material or (2) a body comprising an assembly of interengaged
    fibers or filaments.


CLS 427/286
TXT Processes under subclass 256 wherein the coating is applied in long narrow
    lines.

    (1)     Note.  The strips are not required to be parallel or straight.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137,    for striping or roads or the earth.

    282,    for application of strips using a mask.


CLS 427/287
TXT Processes under subclass 256 wherein the base being coated is metal; glass
    or a ceramic material.

    (1)     Note.  Attention is directed to the definition of Class 65, Glass
    Manufacturing, and Class 106, Compositions: Coating or Plastic, for a
    comprehensive definition of the terms "glass" and "ceramic".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266     and 269, for nonuniform coating processes wherein a plurality of
    layers are applied to a metal, glass, or ceramic base.


CLS 427/288
TXT Processes under subclass 256 wherein the base being coated is either (1) a
    water laid fibrous material or (2) a body comprising an assembly of
    interengaged fibers or filaments.


CLS 427/289
TXT Processes under the definition wherein a coating step is combined with
    contacting the base with a solid member to (1) divide the base into plural
    parts or (2) remove a portion of the base material.

    (1)     Note.  Making holes in or removing part of the base by chemical
    action is excluded from this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Sandpaper is considered a solid member for the purposes of
    this subclass and thus sandpapering the base is provided for here.

    (3)     Note.  Pricking the base with a small needle like device is also
    provided for here.

    (4)     Note.  Injecting is assumed to involve severing the base and is
    provided for here, generally in indented subclass 291.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171+,   for processes which include stretching the base.

    198,    for applying a coating of particles to a base and deforming the
    base.

    275+,   for processes of forming nonuniform coatings which include
    deforming the base.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    153 for abrading or grinding of lamina.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 28+ for a method of abrading, generally.


CLS 427/290
TXT Processes under subclass 289 wherein the cutting, holing, abrading, or
    severing is performed before the base is coated.


CLS 427/291
TXT Processes under subclass 290 wherein the base is derived from the trunks or
    branches of trees or bushes.

    (1)     Note.  Wood particles or fibers which have been chemically changed;
    e.g., regenerated cellulose etc., or water layed to form a paper, are not
    considered to be wood.

    (2)     Note.  Injection is assumed to include making a hole in the wood
    base and therefore injecting is provided for here unless it is clear no
    hole is made through which the coating material or impregnant enters.  If
    hydraulic pressure is used to force liquid into the pores without utilizing
    an instrument to make a hole the patent is not here, but in subclasses 440+
    below.


CLS 427/292
TXT Processes under subclass 290 wherein the substrate is based on an inorganic
    material.

    (1)     Note.  Attention is directed to the definition of Class 260,
    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for the distinction between the term
    "organic" and "inorganic".


CLS 427/293
TXT Processes under subclass 289 wherein the base is merely cut to length after
    the coating has been applied.


CLS 427/294
TXT Processes under the class definition wherein the base is treated with a
    vacuum or subatmospheric pressure before coating or while the coating is
    being applied.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238,    for utilizing a vacuum to coat a hollow article.

    248.1+, for vapor deposition of a coating utilizing a vacuum.

    350,    for vacuum treatment of a coating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or  Containment, subclasses
    249+ for the use of a vacuum in a coating process to contain hazardous or
    toxic waste.


CLS 427/295
TXT Processes under subclass 284 wherein the base comprises metal in elemental
    form.

    (1)     Note.  For the scope of the term "base", see the class definition
    at I, B, 1.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 539.5, 545,
    and 567 for such materials having interengaged phases of different
    materials, usually made by impregnation.


CLS 427/296
TXT Processes under subclass 294 wherein the substrate is based on an organic
    material.

    (1)     Note.  Attention is directed to the definition of Class 260,
    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds for the scope of the term "organic".


CLS 427/297
TXT Processes under subclass 296 wherein the base material is derived from the
    trunks or branches of trees or bushes.

    (1)     Note.  Wood particles or fibers which have been chemically changed;
    e.g., regenerated cellulose etc., or water layed to form a paper, are not
    considered to be wood.


CLS 427/298
TXT Processes under subclass 297 wherein the coating is creosote, wax, oil,
    asphalt, or bitument containing.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are any heavy oil or tar like material with
    properties similar to those materials specifically set out.


CLS 427/299
TXT Processes under the class definition wherein prior to applying a coating,
    steps are taken to chemically or physically modify the base.

    (1)     Note.  "Base" is meant to be an uncoated substrate.  Pretreating
    the first coating prior to applying the second coating is not provided for
    here.  Such treating is considered a post-treatment.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein are such operations as washing, cleaning,
    drying, compressing, heating, etc.

    (3)     Note.  Processes limited to etching for making a base move
    compatible with or adherent to the coating, wherein the base is the
    substrate (work) onto which a coating is applied are included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129,    for pretreatment of a base prior to forming a magnetic coating.

    154+,   for applying a removable protective coating prior to applying the
    final coating.

    223+,   for flame contact processes.

    333     and 402+, for applying plural solid film forming coatings even
    though one of said coating may be in the nature of a preparatory treatment.

    444,    for a pretreating process without a claimed step of applying a
    coating.

    532+,   for a pretreatment involving the direct use of electrical,
    magnetic, or wave energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing;  Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 137+ and see the notes thereto for certain
    cleaning processes.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 72+ for coating apparatus combined
    with means to prepare the base to receive the coating.

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, for mere methods of
    use of such compositions claimed along with the cleaning composition, per
    se.


CLS 427/300
TXT Processes under subclass 299 wherein a base is provided with shielding or
    spacing means to facilitate or prevent coating.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, the coating of one side
    of a sheet only, by placing or securing two sheets in intimate contact
    whereby the contacting surfaces remain uncoated, and the coating of
    shingles in bundle form by employing spacer means therebetween.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass provides for a process which includes applying
    a masking coating uniformly to one side of a base so that only the other
    side is coated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154,    for processes of applying removable protective coatings where the
    coating is not a mask or shield to prevent application of another coating.

    272     and 282, for processes of utilizing a mask or stencil to protect
    selected areas on the same surface.

    284+,   for processes of coating edges only of stacked sheets or webs.


CLS 427/301
TXT Processes under subclass 299 wherein a material is applied to the base
    which will react with the coating, or promote a reaction or hardening of
    the coating, when said coating is applied.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333,    for applying a plurality of film forming coatings which react with
    each other.

    337+,   for applying a chemical agent to an applied coating and also for a
    process wherein the pretreating chemical agent supplies a substantial part
    of the final coating.


CLS 427/302
TXT Processes under subclass 301 wherein the coating contains a material of the
    resinous, rubber or hardenable oil type.

    (1)     Note.  Linseed, tung, and other drying oils are considered
    hardenable, for example.

    (2)     Note.  Paint is assumed to contain latex rubber or linseed oil
    unless otherwise specified.

    (3)     Note.  Shellac and varnish are examples of natural resins.


CLS 427/303
TXT Processes under subclass 302 wherein the base is a carbohydrate material
    derived from the structural matter of plant life.


CLS 427/304
TXT Processes under subclass 301 wherein a base is treated prior to applying a
    coating which contains metal in elemental form.


CLS 427/305
TXT Processes under subclass 304 wherein the coating contains nickel, copper,
    cobalt, or chromium in elemental form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 655+ for a
    metallic composite in which a component has a transition metal base.


CLS 427/306
TXT Processes under subclass 305 wherein the coating is based on an organic
    material.

    (1)     Note.  Attention is directed to the definition of Class 260,
    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds for the scope of the term "organic".


CLS 427/307
TXT Processes under subclass 299 wherein either a portion of the base is
    removed by contact with a chemical agent or a solvent for the base is
    absorbed into the base.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for processes where the base
    is merely cleaned of extraneous material or a material which is not a
    normal part of the base, but does provide for dissolving out of natural
    fats, oils etc., prior to coating.

    (2)     Note.  Leaching with a solvent or acid is considered etching for
    this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for pickling unless etching
    is set forth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322     and 327+, for cleaning by more than name only of a substrate prior
    to coating.

    336+,   for solvent, swelling or washing treatment of a coating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, appropriate subclasses for
    processes of etching where the etching is not to perfect a subsequently
    applied coating, and for processes of etching combined with a coating
    process where the etching is a manufacturing step and is not intended to
    improve the adherence of the applied coating to a substrate.


CLS 427/308
TXT Processes under subclass 307 wherein the base is a carbohydrate material
    derived from the structural matter of plant life.


CLS 427/309
TXT Processes under subclass 307 wherein the substrate is based on an inorganic
    material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include mere pickling unless etching
    of the base is set forth.

    (2)     Note.  Attention is directed to the definition of Class 260,
    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for the distinction between the term
    "organic" and "inorganic".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327+,   for pickling a metal base prior to coating.


CLS 427/310
TXT Processes under subclass 299 wherein a base is treated with a flux prior to
    coating, usually to prevent the formation of oxides.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 23+ for flux compositions.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 33+ and 203+ for means and
    process, respectively, of fluxing prior to metallurgical surface bonding;
    i.e., welding, soldering or brazing.


CLS 427/311
TXT Processes under subclass 310 wherein the flux floats on a molten metal
    coating bath and the base passes through the flux before contacting the
    molten metal.


CLS 427/312
TXT Processes under subclass 311 wherein the coating contains lead or tin in
    elemental form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 643+, 645, and
    646+ for a metallic composite in which a component has a tin or lead base.


CLS 427/313
TXT Processes under subclass 310 wherein the coating contains lead or tin in
    elemental form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 643+, 645, and
    646+ for a metallic composite in which a component has a tin or lead base.


CLS 427/314
TXT Processes under subclass 299 wherein prior to coating the temperature of
    the base is raised above ambient or liquid is removed from the base.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189+,   for heating to fuse a particle coating.

    223,    for flame contact prior to coating.

    226+,   for preheating a substrate to decompose a liquid or solid coating
    material.

    248.1+, for preheating a substrate to decompose a gaseous or vapor coating
    material.

    372.2+, for heat treatment of a coating.

    591,    for coating processes including dielectric heating or induction.

    592,    for coating processes including resistance heating.

    595,    for coating processes including infrared heating.


CLS 427/315
TXT Processes under subclass 314 wherein the base is preheated with steam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    377,    for processes of treating a coating with steam.


CLS 427/316
TXT Processes under subclass 314 wherein the substrate being coated is based on
    an organic material.

    (1)     Note.  Attention is directed to the definition of Class 260,
    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds for the scope of the term "organic".


CLS 427/317
TXT Processes under subclass 316 wherein the base material is derived from the
    trunks or branches of trees or bushes.

    (1)     Note.  Wood particles or fibers which have been chemically changed,
    e.g., regenerated cellulose etc., or water layed to form a paper, are not
    considered to be wood.


CLS 427/318
TXT Processes under subclass 314 wherein a base comprising metal in elemental
    form is heated or dryed prior to coating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, appropriate subclasses for processes of heat
    treating a metal to modify or maintain the internal physical structure
    (i.e., microstructure) or chemical property of the metal combined with a
    coating operation.  See section III of the Class 427 definition and section
    III, C, of the Class 148 definition for further clarification.


CLS 427/319
TXT Processes under subclass 318 which result in a coating of metal in
    elemental form on the base.


CLS 427/320
TXT Processes under subclass 319 wherein the coating contains aluminum in
    elemental form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 650+ for a
    metallic composite in which a component has an aluminum base.


CLS 427/321
TXT Processes under subclass 319 wherein the coating contains zinc in elemental
    form.


CLS 427/322
TXT Processes under subclass 299 wherein the substrate being treated is based
    on organic material.

    (1)     Note.  Attention is directed to the definition of Class 260,
    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds for the scope of the term "organic".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, appropriate subclasses for chemical modification of
    textiles and paper and for fluid treatment of textiles.


CLS 427/323
TXT Processes under subclass 322 wherein the base contains a natural protein.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein, for example, are silk, wool, hide, leather,
    fur, hair, etc.


CLS 427/324
TXT Processes under subclass 322 wherein the base is a carbohydrate material
    derived from the structural matter of plant life.


CLS 427/325
TXT Processes under subclass 324 wherein the base material is derived from the
    trunks or branches of trees or bushes.

    (1)     Note.  Wood particles or fibers which have been chemically changed,
    e.g., regenerated cellulose etc., or water layed to form a paper, are not
    considered to be wood.


CLS 427/326
TXT Processes under subclass 324 wherein the substrate is a water laid fibrous
    cellulosic material.


CLS 427/327
TXT Processes under subclass 299 wherein the base comprises elemental metal.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses includes pickling unless
    etching is set forth for subclass 309.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    318+,   for heating a metal base prior to application of coating material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 81.01+ for the removal of scale by
    scraping, flexing or treatment with water or steam.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, for metal cleaning or
    pickling processes in general, including those processes wherein the acid,
    alkali or detersive material employed contains an oil or lubricant whereby
    a film of oil or lubricant may be left on the metal surface after the
    cleaning treatment.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 240+ and the definitions thereof for
    reactive treatment of a metal base.


CLS 427/328
TXT Processes under subclass 327 wherein the coating contains metal in
    elemental form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191,    for metal coatings produced from powdered metal material which is
    fused or sintered on the substrate after application.

    310+,   for pretreating with a flux.

    319+,   for applying a metal coating to a metal base after heat treating
    the base.


CLS 427/329
TXT Processes under subclass 328 wherein the metal coating is applied by
    immersion of the base in a molten metal bath.


CLS 427/330
TXT Processes under subclass 327 wherein a glassy or porcelain enamel like
    material is applied to the pretreated base.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193,    for vitreous coatings produced from powdered vitrifiable material
    which is fused or sintered on the substrate after application.


CLS 427/331
TXT Processes under the class definition which include applying a coating
    material to a base and thereafter modifying the coating by changing its
    chemical or physical characteristics.

    (1)     Note.  Applying a second coating to a first coating wherein no
    modification of the coatings takes place is not here, but provided for in
    subclasses 402+.  Employing an inert atmosphere above a coating bath is not
    here, but in subclass 432.

    (2)     Note.  Removal of excess coating material is included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130,    for post-treatment of magnetic coatings.

    140,    for processes directed to the restoration or repairing of coating.

    206,    for excess removal of particulate or fibrous coating material.

    235,    for removal of excess coating material from a hollow or cylindrical
    article.

    289,    for cutting, holing or severing treatments.

    402+,   for applying superposed diverse coatings wherein the second coating
    does not specifically modify the first coating.

    444,    for post-treatment without a claimed step of applying a coating.


CLS 427/332
TXT Processes under subclass 331 in which the coating is treated to overcome or
    prevent odor.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for a process which includes applying
    perfume to a coated base.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 5 for process of deodorizing other
    than coating.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclasses 823+ for sorption
    removal from a hydrocarbon of a chemically undetermined odorant.


CLS 427/333
TXT Processes under subclass 331 in which a treating agent, such as a solvent,
    reactant, hardened or catalyst for one coating is applied as part of a
    contiguous film forming coating so that plural coatings are formed.

    (1)     Note.  The mere cooperative effect produced by two coatings, such
    as better corrosion resistance, etc., is not considered treatment for the
    purposes of this subclass.  One of the film forming coatings has to cause a
    change to take place in the other film forming coating for placement in
    this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The temperature of one coating affecting another coating is
    not considered enough for placement in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301+,   for applying an agent to a base before coating it wherein the agent
    does not form a permanent coating.

    336+,   for applying a solvent which does not form a film.

    337+,   for applying a chemical agent which does not form a film.

    402,    for applying coatings in which one coating does not include a
    treating agent for another coating.


CLS 427/334
TXT Processes under subclass 331 wherein the coating is contacted by an oil or
    by a wax to treat the coating.

    (1)     Note.  The oil usually floats on top of a molten metal coating bath
    and the base is withdrawn through the oil.  The base also contacts the oil
    when being dipped into the bath, but the purpose of the oil is for
    post-treatment and not pretreatment.

    (2)     Note.  The oil or wax must be used to treat the coating and not
    intended to be a second coating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    416,    for applying plural diverse coatings wherein one coating contains
    wax.

    417+,   for applying plural diverse coatings wherein one coating contains
    oil.


CLS 427/335
TXT Processes under subclass 331 wherein a solvent in vapor form is employed to
    treat the coating.

    (1)     Note.  Utilizing a solvent vapor zone above a coating bath is
    provided for here.


CLS 427/336
TXT Processes under subclass 331 which includes applying a chemical agent
    capable of dissolving or being absorbed into the applied coating.

    (1)     Note.  For classification here the solvent must be employed to
    treat the whole coating and not merely to clean it or dissolve out only a
    constituent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    335,    for treating a coating with a solvent vapor.

    352+,   for utilizing a liquid solvent to extract only a constituent of a
    coating or to clean a coating.

    372.2+, for heating or drying a coating which included a solvent when it
    was applied.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    83 for swelling of a lamina.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    particularly subclasses 341 and 343 for processes of solvent polishing or
    swelling shaped or solid articles.


CLS 427/337
TXT Processes under subclass 331 in which a coating is treated with a chemical
    agent to modify the coating.

    (1)     Note.  Chemical agents which themselves form a permanent coating
    are not considered treating agents.

    (2)     Note.  Utilizing a specific atmosphere to prevent a coating from
    undergoing a change; e.g., reducing to prevent oxidation, is not considered
    treating.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass provides for applying a first material and
    thereafter applying a second material which reacts with the first material
    to form a coating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246,    for forming a foraminous product by jelling or coagulating the
    coating.

    248.1+, for treating a coating with a gas wherein part of the gas becomes
    part of the final coating.

    332,    where the treatment functions to deodorize the coating.

    333,    where the treating agent is applied with a film forming material to
    form plural coatings.

    336,    for solvent, swelling or washing treatment of a coating.

    377,    for process of heating or drying a coating in a modified atmosphere.


CLS 427/338
TXT Processes under subclass 337 wherein the coating is a protein or protein
    derivative.


CLS 427/339
TXT Processes under subclass 337 wherein the coating is a carbohydrate material
    derived from the structural matter of plant life.


CLS 427/340
TXT Processes under subclass 337 wherein the coating contains (1) a material of
    the resinous, rubber or hardenable oil type or (2) a substance which
    precedes the formation of a material as set forth in (1).

    (1)     Note.  Linseed, tung, and other drying oils are considered
    hardenable, for example.

    (2)     Note.  Paint is assumed to contain latex rubber or linseed oil
    unless otherwise specified.

    (3)     Note.  Shellac and varnish are examples of natural resins.


CLS 427/341
TXT Processes under subclass 340 wherein the treating agent is based on
    inorganic material.

    (1)     Note.  Attention is directed to the definition of Class 260,
    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for the distinction between the term
    "organic" and "inorganic".


CLS 427/342
TXT Processes under subclass 340 wherein the base is either (1) formed by a
    textile operation or (2) a carbohydrate material derived from the
    structural matter of plant life.

    (1)     Note.  Textile operations include, for example, weaving, knitting,
    braiding, twisting, needling, etc.


CLS 427/343
TXT Processes under subclass 337 wherein the coating being treated is based on
    inorganic material.

    (1)     Note.  Attention is directed to the definition of Class 260,
    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for the distinction between the term
    "organic" and "inorganic".


CLS 427/344
TXT Processes under subclass 343 wherein the inorganic coating comprises a
    silicon containing compound.


CLS 427/345
TXT Processes under subclass 331 wherein excess coating material is
    recirculated to the place of application or where the excess coating
    material is regenerated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331,    where the excess coating material is recovered or removed, but
    recirculation or regeneration of the coating material is not defined.

    346+,   for removal of excess coating material by moving the coated base
    where neither recirculation nor regeneration is set forth.

    355+,   for removal of excess coating material with a solid member where
    recirculation or regeneration is not set forth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 61 and 600+ for coating apparatus
    with means to treat the coating material.


CLS 427/346
TXT Processes under subclass 331 wherein the coated work or article is moved in
    a certain position or direction, or is given a particular motion (i.e.,
    vibrated, rotated, etc.), to distribute the applied coatings, remove excess
    coating or otherwise treat the coated product.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for rotation of the base wherein the
    force of gravity acts to spread the coating material.  However if the base
    is rotated fast enough so that centrifugal force distributes the coating
    material the process is in subclasses 240+ above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232,    for processes where a hollow article is rotated to remove excess
    coating material.

    240,    for treatment of a coating by means of centrifugal force.

    331,    for processes wherein a coated article is positioned in a rack to
    drain, but is not moved in a specified manner.

    335,    for application of a coating by rumbling or tumbling.

    600,    for use of sonic or ultrasonic vibration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 56+, for apparatus for manipulating
    work after coating to distribute or remove excess coating.


CLS 427/347
TXT Processes under subclass 346 wherein a coating containing metal in
    elemental form is treated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241,    for treatment of a metal coated article by centrifugal force.


CLS 427/348
TXT Processes under subclass 331 wherein the coating is treated with a gas jet
    or blast so that the force of the gas modifies the coating.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include processes wherein the coated
    article is treated by or in an atmosphere or gas which does not apply a
    physical force to the coated article.  Merely drying with a jet of air is
    not provided for here.  Such processes are classified according to the
    process employed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223,    for flame contact after coating.

    377+,   for drying by gas movement where the physical force of the gas is
    not relied on to directly treat the coating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 62 and 63 for coating apparatus
    including means to treat the coated work by gas blast.


CLS 427/349
TXT Processes under subclass 348 wherein a coating which contains metal in
    elemental form is treated.


CLS 427/350
TXT Processes under subclass 331 which include utilizing vacuum or reduced
    pressure during the post-treatment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238,    for utilizing a vacuum or reduced pressure in a process of coating
    a hollow article.

    294,    for utilizing a vacuum or reduced pressure prior to or during a
    coating process.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 50 for coating apparatus having a
    vacuum chamber.


CLS 427/351
TXT Processes under subclass 350 wherein the base material is derived from the
    trunks or branches of trees or bushes.

    (1)     Note.  Wood particles or fibers which have been chemically changed;
    e.g., regenerated cellulose etc., or water layed to form a paper, are not
    considered to be wood.


CLS 427/352
TXT Processes under subclass 331 which include extracting a constituent of the
    applied coating material with a liquid or cleaning the coating.

    (1)     Note.  Washing which is set forth as being merely to cool or heat
    the coating is excluded from this subclass and is provided for in
    subclasses 372.2+ or 374.1+, respectively.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    337+,   for a process which includes applying a chemical agent to a coated
    base wherein said agent reacts with an undesired part of the coating to
    facilitate its removal.

    355+,   for processes wherein a solid treating member or material acts to
    remove excess coating material, but does not absorb solvent.

    372.2+, for washing a coating merely to heat it.

    374.1+, for  washing a coating merely to cool it.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 109 for coating apparatus including an
    absorbent or porous mass or pad member acting on the coating after
    application.


CLS 427/353
TXT Processes under subclass 352 which include utilizing relatively pure water
    in the post-treatment.

    (1)     Note.  In a process which sets forth that the coating is washed,
    without disclosing what it is washed with, it is assumed the washing agent
    is water.

    (2)     Note.  An aqueous solution of something used to wash the coating is
    not provided for in this subclass.


CLS 427/354
TXT Processes under subclass 353 wherein the coating is dryed after it has been
    treated with water.


CLS 427/355
TXT Processes under subclass 331 wherein the post-treatment is performed by
    contacting the coating with a solid member or solid material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and indented subclasses do not include the use
    of a solid treating member submerged in coating material in which the base
    is immersed or through which it passes.

    (2)     Note.  The coating may be buffed, smoothed, wiped, or polished, etc.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass and indented subclasses provides for removing
    excess coating material with a solid member or solid material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for post-treatment of a coated welding rod with a solid treating
    member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 100+ for coating apparatus including
    a solid member or material acting on the coating after application.


CLS 427/356
TXT Processes under subclass 355 wherein the solid treating member is a die,
    blade or sharp edged tool.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass will take coating processes in which the
    coating material is applied directly ahead of a knife or blade, that is
    "knife coating".

    (2)     Note.  For classification here the edge of the blade must be
    utilized to treat the coating.  If a thin curved member is employed to
    smooth the coating by contacting the coating with a curved surface of the
    member classification is not here even if the curved member is considered a
    blade.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    289,    for processes including cutting, holing or severing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 125 for coating apparatus including die
    passage.


CLS 427/357
TXT Processes under subclass 356 wherein a coating containing metal in
    elemental form is treated.


CLS 427/358
TXT Processes under subclass 356 wherein the coating is based on an organic
    material.

    (1)     Note.  Attention is directed to the definition of Class 260,
    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for the scope of the term "organic".


CLS 427/359
TXT Processes under subclass 355 wherein the solid treating member is generally
    circular in cross section and designed to rotate about an internal axis.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes rotary wipers, but not rotary
    brushes.  For rotary brushes see subclass 368 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139,    for applying a coating and rolling it to make a road surface.

    242,    for coating processes including rumbling or tumbling.

    428,    for roller application of the coating material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 110+ for coating apparatus including
    a rotary member acting on the coating after application.


CLS 427/360
TXT Processes under subclass 359 wherein a coating containing metal in
    elemental form is treated.


CLS 427/361
TXT Processes under subclass 359 wherein the base is a water laid fibrous sheet.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for calendering coated paper, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclass 136 for treatment of
    coated paper.


CLS 427/362
TXT Processes under subclass 361 wherein the coated paper is set while in
    contact with a casting surface such as a cylinder or drum.


CLS 427/363
TXT Processes under subclass 361 wherein the paper base is coated with a wax or
    oil containing coating.

    (1)     Note.  Materials such as heavy hydrocarbon, tars, etc., having
    properties similar to wax or oil are included in this subclass.


CLS 427/364
TXT Processes under subclass 361 wherein the coating being treated contains
    casein or starch.


CLS 427/365
TXT Processes under subclass 359 wherein the coating is treated by the action
    of a pair of cylindrical members, which each rotates about a longitudinal
    axis through itself, while passing therebetween.


CLS 427/366
TXT Processes under subclass 365 which include heating the coating before,
    after, or during treatment with the roller, drum, or cylinder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194,    for hot rolling a coating of particles to form a smooth coating.


CLS 427/367
TXT Processes under subclass 355 wherein a free metal coating is treated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    357     and 360, for treatment with certain solid treating members.


CLS 427/368
TXT Processes under subclass 355 wherein the solid treating member comprises
    bristles secured to a support.

    (1)     Note.  Rotary brushes are included in this subclass.


CLS 427/369
TXT Processes under subclass 355 wherein the solid treating member applies
    pressure to the coating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238,    for processes wherein pressure is used in coating a hollow or
    cylindrical article.

    331,    for processes wherein hydraulic or gaseous pressure is employed to
    post-treat a coating.

    355,    for processes wherein wiping, smoothing, polishing, sanding etc.,
    alone is defined even though some pressure is inherent.

    356,    for processes wherein pressure is applied by a die.

    359+,   especially 361+, for processes wherein pressure is applied by
    rollers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 35+ for methods of pressing not elsewhere
    classified.


CLS 427/370
TXT Processes under subclass 369 wherein heat and pressure are employed
    together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    366,    for a process wherein a heated roller is utilized to post-treat the
    coating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 60 and 101 for coating apparatus
    including heated treating members.


CLS 427/371
TXT Processes under subclass 355 in which the substrate is based on an organic
    material.

    (1)     Note.  Attention is directed to the definition of Class 260,
    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for the scope of the term "organic".


CLS 427/372.2
TXT Heating or drying (e.g., polymerizing, vulcanizing, curing, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 331 wherein the temperature of the coating is
    raised above ambient or the moisture content of the coating is reduced.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224,    for contacting a coating with flame.

    226+,   for heat decomposition of a coating.

    246,    for coagulating a microporous coating.

    366     and 370, for pressure and heat treating a coating.

    591,    for dielectric heating.

    592,    for resistance heating.

    595,    for infrared or radiant heating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, appropriate subclasses for processes of heat
    treating a metal to modify or maintain the internal physical structure
    (i.e., microstructure) or chemical property of the metal combined with a
    coating operation.  See section III of the Class 427 definition and section
    III, C, of the Class 148 definition for further clarification.


CLS 427/373
TXT Processes under subclass 372.2 wherein the coating is caused to foam or
    wherein bubbles or cells are formed in the coating during heating or drying.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244     and 245+, for the formation of microporous coatings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    77+ for pore forming or foaming a lamina in situ.

    521,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 51+ for
    pore-forming, per se, in a synthetic resin or natural rubber composition.


CLS 427/374.1
TXT And cooling:

    Processes under subclass 372.2 wherein a positive cooling step is set forth
    in addition to the heating or drying.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass excludes processes in which cooling is merely
    inherent and no cooling step is defined (e.g., allowing to cool, permitting
    to cool to room temperature, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 69 for coating apparatus including
    cooling means.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    80 for surface bonding with refrigeration or freezing.


CLS 427/374.2
TXT Heating after cooling:

    Processes under subclass 374.1 wherein a heating step takes place after the
    positive cooling step.


CLS 427/374.3
TXT Without intervening coating step:

    Processes under subclass 374.2 wherein a coating is not applied between the
    positive cooling step and the subsequent heating step.


CLS 427/374.4
TXT Fused or molten coating cooled:

    Processes under subclass 374.1 wherein the coating which is cooled is
    molten or heat fused.


CLS 427/374.5
TXT Liquid or solid cooling medium:

    Processes under subclass 374.4 wherein heat is transferred from the coating
    through a medium which is in solid or liquid form.


CLS 427/374.6
TXT Vacuum, vapor, or gas other than air utilized:

    Processes under subclass 374.4 wherein the cooling takes place in a vacuum
    or the cooling medium is a gas other than air.


CLS 427/374.7
TXT Vitreous or glazed coating:

    Processes under subclass 374.4 wherein the coating is glass or glasslike.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193,    for forming a vitreous coating by applying solid vitrifiable
    particles to a base and treating the particles to form a glass or glasslike
    coating.


CLS 427/375
TXT Processes under subclass 372.2 wherein the coating is fused or softened by
    heating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189+,   for the fusion of coatings applied as particles.


CLS 427/376.1
TXT Inorganic coating:

    Processes under subclass 375 wherein the coating is based on inorganic
    material.

    (1)     Note.  Attention is directed to the definitions of Class 260,
    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for the distinction between the term
    "organic" and "inorganic".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189+,   for fusion of inorganic solid particles which have been applied to
    a base to form a coating.


CLS 427/376.2
TXT Metal oxide- or silicon-containing coating (e.g., glazed, vitreous enamel,
    etc.):

    Processes under subclass 376.1 wherein the inorganic coating contains
    silicon or a metal oxide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    190,    for fusion of solid metallic compound particles which have been
    applied to a base to form a coating.


CLS 427/376.3
TXT Metal-containing coating (e.g., cermet, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 376.2 wherein the coating material also contains
    metal in elemental form.


CLS 427/376.4
TXT Metal base:

    Processes under subclass 376.2 wherein the base comprises metal in
    elemental form.


CLS 427/376.5
TXT Ferrous base:

    Processes under subclass 376.4 wherein the base comprises ferrous metal.


CLS 427/376.6
TXT Metal-containing coating:

    Processes under subclass 376.1 wherein the coating contains metal in
    elemental form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191+,   for fusion of solid metal particles which have been applied to a
    base to form a coating.


CLS 427/376.7
TXT Coating consists of metal:

    Processes under subclass 376.6 wherein the coating material contains
    nothing except the metal in elemental form.


CLS 427/376.8
TXT Metal base:

    Processes under subclass 376.7 wherein the base comprises metal in
    elemental form.


CLS 427/377
TXT Processes under subclass 372.2 wherein the atmosphere in which the coating
    is heat treated or dried is modified physically as by movement or includes
    a chemical composition or gas mixture other than the ambient air.

    (1)     Note.  Utilizing air to which humidity has been added or removed is
    included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    350+,   for post-treating a coating in a vacuum at a reduced pressure.


CLS 427/378
TXT Processes under subclass 377 wherein the atmosphere moves in a defined
    manner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    348+,   for mechanically treating a coating by the force of a blast of gas
    or air.


CLS 427/379
TXT Processes under subclass 372.2 which include a plurality of heating or
    drying steps.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for a process which includes a single
    heating step and a single different drying step.


CLS 427/380
TXT Processes under subclass 379 wherein the coating being treated contains
    free metal or a metallic compound.


CLS 427/381
TXT Processes under subclass 379 wherein the base is either (a) formed by a
    textile operation or (b) a carbohydrate material derived from the
    structural matter of plant life.

    (1)     Note.  Textile operations includes, for example, weaving, knitting,
    braiding, twisting, needling, etc.


CLS 427/382
TXT Processes under subclass 381 wherein the base is either a carbohydrate
    material derived from the structural matter of plant life or a water laid
    fibrous material.


CLS 427/383.1
TXT Metal coating:

    Processes under subclass 372.2 wherein a coating containing metal in
    elemental form is treated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191,    for processes wherein metal particles are fused to form a coating.

    224,    for processes wherein a metal coating is treated by flame contact.

    229,    for processes wherein a nonmetallic coating is decomposed by heat
    to form a metal coating.


CLS 427/383.3
TXT Inorganic base:

    Processes under subclass 383.1 wherein the base comprises inorganic
    material.


CLS 427/383.5
TXT Fused oxide-containing base (e.g., ceramic, glass, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 383.3 wherein the base contains fused oxide
    material.


CLS 427/383.7
TXT Metal base:

    Processes under subclass 383.3 wherein the base contains metal in elemental
    form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, appropriate subclasses for processes of heat
    treating a metal to modify or maintain the internal physical structure
    (i.e., microstructure) or chemical property of metal combined with a
    coating operation.  Since a diffusion may be involved in a coating
    operation involving metal and diffusion involves the microstructure of
    metal, per se, coating operations (i.e., other than reactive coating
    operations) go as original in Class 427 if the specified diffusion occurs
    during the coating step.  However, a heat treatment step of the solid
    metal, independent of the coating step which causes diffusion to affect the
    micro structure of the metal goes as original to Class 148.


CLS 427/384
TXT Processes under subclass 372.2 wherein the coating is based on organic
    materials.

    (1)     Note.  Attention is directed to the definition of Class 260,
    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for the scope of the term, "organic".


CLS 427/385.5
TXT Resin, resin precursor, rubber, or hardenable oil-containing coating:

    Processes under subclass 384 wherein the coating contains (a) a material of
    the resinous, rubber, or hardenable oil type, or (b) a substance which
    precedes the formation of a material as set forth in (a).

    (1)     Note.  Linseed, tung, and other drying oils are considered
    hardenable, for example.

    (2)     Note.  Paint is assumed to contain latex rubber or linseed oil
    unless otherwise specified.

    (3)     Note.  Shellac and varnish are examples of natural resins.

    (4)     Note.  Polymeric compounds are considered resins for the purposes
    of this subclass.


CLS 427/386
TXT Processes under subclass 385.5 wherein the coating contains a polyepoxide
    or epoxy resin.


CLS 427/387
TXT Processes under subclass 385.5 wherein the coating includes a silicon
    containing compound.


CLS 427/388.1
TXT Metal base:

    Processes under subclass 385.5 wherein the base comprises metal in
    elemental form.


CLS 427/388.2
TXT Cross-linked or infusible coating:

    Processes under subclass 388.1 wherein the applied coating, after
    post-treatment, is in a cross-linked or infusible state.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for applying a coating and treating
    it to cause it to become thermoset.


CLS 427/388.3
TXT Aldehyde-containing precursor:

    Processes under subclass 388.2 wherein the coating material applied
    contains or liberates an aldehyde.

    (1)     Note.  Urea formaldehyde and phenol formaldehyde are examples of
    resultant coatings formed by heating the applied coating material.


CLS 427/388.4
TXT Water-containing coating (i.e., aqueous dispersion, emulsion, or solution):

    Processes under subclass 388.1 wherein the coating material contains water.


CLS 427/388.5
TXT Nonaqueous dispersion:

    Processes under subclass 388.1 wherein the coating material is a nonaqueous
    dispersion.


CLS 427/389
TXT Processes under subclass 385.5 wherein the base contains protein.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are materials such as wool, leather, fur,
    hide, silk, etc.


CLS 427/389.7
TXT Glass base:

    Processes under subclass 385.5 wherein the base comprises glass.

    (1)     Note.  Attention is directed to the definition of Class 65, Glass
    Manufacturing, for a comprehensive definition of the term "glass".


CLS 427/389.8
TXT Fiberglass base:

    Processes under subclass 389.7 wherein the glass base is in fiber or
    textile form.


CLS 427/389.9
TXT Textile or cellulose base:

    Processes under subclass 385.5 wherein the base is either (a) formed by a
    textile operation, or (b) a carbohydrate material derived from the
    structural matter of plant life.

    (1)     Note.  Textile operations include, for example, weaving, knitting,
    braiding, twisting, needling, etc.


CLS 427/391
TXT Processes under subclass 389.9 wherein the substrate is a water laid
    fibrous material.


CLS 427/392
TXT Processes under subclass 389.9 wherein the base is a cellulose material
    which has not been chemically modified.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are materials such as cotton and wood
    fibers, etc.


CLS 427/393
TXT Processes under subclass 392 wherein the base material is derived from the
    trunks or branches of trees or bushes.

    (1)     Note.  Wood particles or fibers which have been chemically changed,
    e.g., regenerated cellulose etc., or water layed to form a paper, are not
    considered to be wood.


CLS 427/393.1
TXT Antistatic properties increased:

    Processes under subclass 389.9 wherein the applied coating increases the
    antistatic properties of the treated base.


CLS 427/393.2
TXT Wrinkle resistance or crease holding properties increased:

    Processes under subclass 389.9 wherein the flame resistant property of the
    base is increased.


CLS 427/393.3
TXT Flame resistance increased:

    Processes under subclass 389.9 wherein the flame resistant property of the
    base is increased.


CLS 427/393.4
TXT Antisoiling or water repellency increased:

    Processes under subclass 389.9 wherein the property of the base to resist
    soiling or to repel water is increased.


CLS 427/393.5
TXT Resin, rubber, or elastomer base:

    Processes under subclass 385.5 wherein the base comprises resin, rubber, or
    elastomer.


CLS 427/393.6
TXT Asbestos, ceramic, concrete, or masonry base:

    Processes under subclass 385.5 wherein the base comprises asbestos,
    ceramic, concrete, or a masonry material.


CLS 427/394
TXT Processes under subclass 384 wherein the base is either (1) formed by a
    textile operation or (2) a carbohydrate material derived from the
    structural matter of plant life.

    (1)     Note.  Textile operations includes, for example, weaving, knitting,
    braiding, twisting, needling, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    389.9+, for coating a textile or cellulosic base with a resin or rubber
    containing coating.


CLS 427/395
TXT Processes under subclass 394 wherein the base is a water laid fibrous
    material.


CLS 427/396
TXT Processes under subclass 394 wherein the base is a cellulose material which
    has not been chemically modified.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are materials such as cotton and wood
    fibers, etc.


CLS 427/397
TXT Processes under subclass 396 wherein the base material is derived from the
    trunks or branches of trees or bushes.

    (1)     Note.  Wood particles or fibers which have been chemically changed;
    e.g., regenerated cellulose etc., or water layed to form a paper, are not
    considered to be wood.


CLS 427/397.7
TXT Inorganic silicon-containing coating:

    Processes under subclass 372.2 wherein the resultant coating comprises
    inorganic silicon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    384+,   especially subclass 387, for processes in which the resultant
    coating comprises organic silicon.


CLS 427/397.8
TXT Alkali silicate:

    Processes under subclass 397.7 wherein the resultant coating is an alkali
    silicate.

    (1)     Note.  The coating before treatment may contain an organic
    silicate, such as alkyl silicate, but for classification here such must be
    present merely as a precursor for the ultimate inorganic silicate.


CLS 427/398.1
TXT Cooling:

    Processes under subclass 331 wherein a positive step is set forth.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass excludes processes in which cooling is merely
    inherent and no positive cooling step is defined; e.g., allowing to cool,
    permitting to cool to room temperature, etc., are not provided for here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    374.1.  for cooling and heating or drying.


CLS 427/398.2
TXT Utilizing solid member contacting base or coating (e.g., cooling roller,
    etc.):

    Processes under subclass 398.1 wherein the cooling is accomplished by use
    of a solid member contacting the base or the coating.

    (1)     Note.  For classification here the temperature of the solid member
    does the treating rather than the pressure, friction, buffing, wiping, etc.

    (2)     Note.  The solid cooling member may contact the base on the side
    opposite the coating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    355+,   for contacting a coating with a solid member wherein the solid
    characteristics of the member treat the coating such as in buffing,
    smoothing, wiping, polishing, etc.


CLS 427/398.3
TXT Liquid utilized (e.g., quenching, spraying, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 398.1 wherein the cooling treatment is
    accomplished by means of a liquid medium.


CLS 427/398.4
TXT Vacuum, vapor, or gas other than air utilized:

    Processes under subclass 398.1 wherein the cooling is accomplished in a
    vacuum or other nonatmospheric environment, or with a gas or vapor other
    than air.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    294,    for processes which include treating the base with a vacuum prior
    to or during coating.


CLS 427/398.5
TXT Movement of atmosphere:

    Processes under subclass 398.1 wherein the atmosphere is moved in a defined
    manner to cool the coating.


CLS 427/399
TXT Processes under the class definition wherein a nonmetal base reacts with an
    applied material to form a coating of the reaction product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226+,   for heat decomposition of a base.

    227,    processes wherein a coating is formed by carbonizing or charring a
    base.

    248.1+, for reacting a gas with a nonmetallic base for form a coating.

    301+,   processes including a reaction between a coating and a preapplied
    chemical agent.

    333,    processes including a reaction between two coatings.

    337+,   processes including a reaction between a coating and a subsequently
    applied chemical agent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 115.51+ for the treatment of textiles and
    paper wherein the textile or paper base supplies a part or all of the
    coating and subclasses 94.1+ for the treatment of hides, skin, feathers,
    and animal tissues, wherein the base supplies a part or all of the coating.

    148,    Metal Treatment, particularly subclasses 240+, for applying a
    material to a metal base wherein the material and metal base react to form
    a coating of the reaction product.


CLS 427/400
TXT Processes under subclass 399 wherein the base which supplies part of the
    coating contains a resinous or rubber type material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for a process of graft polymerization
    if is clear that only a portion of the base is polymerized to form a
    coating on the part of the base which is not polymerized.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, particularly Class 525 for
    processes of graft or graft-type polymerization wherein there is no clear
    disclosure that the resultant product is composed of distinct layers.


CLS 427/401
TXT Processes under the class definition combined with a step which is, per se,
    (1) not provided for in this class and which (2) performs a function other
    than that utilized to perfect the coating.

    (1)     Note.  A process wherein dye or pigment is mixed with coating
    material before application to the base is not considered a combined
    operation for this subclass, but is provided for in other subclasses of
    this class according to other features of the process.  Class 8 provides
    for the combination of coating and dyeing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8+,     for coating and measuring, testing, or indicating.

    171+,   for coating and stretching or tensioning.

    177,    for coating and winding, balling, rolling, or coiling.

    289+,   for coating and cutting, holing, or severing.

    299+,   for coating and pretreating the base.

    331,    for coating and post-treatment of the coating or coating material.

    457+,   for coating and direct application of electrical, magnetic, or wave
    energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, for coating combined with dyeing.


CLS 427/402
TXT Processes under the class definition which include applying a plurality of
    dissimilar coating materials in superposed relationship on a base or
    applying diverse coating material to the coating on a previously coated
    base.

    (1)     Note.  Coatings which contain essentially the same ingredients, but
    in different proportions are considered to be different coating materials.

    (2)     Note.  Impregnation is considered coating even where a distinct
    surface coat is not formed.

    (3)     Note.  Processes for applying several coats or layers of the same
    material are not provided for here and are classified in appropriate
    subclasses elsewhere in this class.

    (4)     Note.  Processes of applying a different coating to a previously
    coated article are classified in this and the indented subclasses as
    processes of applying different coatings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131,    for applying a plurality of coatings where at least one has
    magnetic properties.

    152,    for applying plural coats to form a transfer or copy sheet.

    154,    for application of a removable protective coating which may be
    applied with or without a subsequently applied coating.

    196,    201 and 202+, for applying plural coats where at least one is
    particles or fibers.

    214,    for applying plural coats or particles.

    258+,   for applying plural coats where at least one is nonuniform.

    301+,   for pre-applying a reaction promoter or hardener and subsequently
    applying coating material.

    333     and 337+, coating plus subsequently applying an agent to treat the
    coating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 240+, for coating a metal base with
    plural coatings where the metal base supplies a constituent to one of the
    coatings.

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 183+, 188+, 191+, and 198+  for
    applying plural coatings wherein at least one is applied by an electrolytic
    method.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 547 for a
    metallic composite having metal particles and differentially porous
    components, and subclasses 621+ for a metallic composite having an
    additional nonmetal component.


CLS 427/403
TXT Processes under subclass 402 wherein at least one of the coatings contains
    settable inorganic cementlike material.


CLS 427/404
TXT Processes under subclass 402 wherein at least one coating contains metal in
    elemental form.


CLS 427/405
TXT Processes under subclass 404 wherein the base is metal in elemental form.


CLS 427/406
TXT Processes under subclass 405 wherein zinc is the elemental metal in the
    coating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 658 for a
    metallic composite in which a component has a zinc base.


CLS 427/407.1
TXT Synthetic resin coating:

    Processes under subclass 402 wherein at least one of the coatings contains
    a synthetic resin.

    (1)     Note.  For the scope of expression "synthetic resin", see the
    definition of subclass 520, Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, and the
    notes thereto.


CLS 427/407.2
TXT Glass base:

    Processes under subclass 407.1 wherein the base comprises glass.

    (1)     Note.  Attention is directed to the definitions of Class 65, Glass
    Manufacturing, for a comprehensive definition of the term "glass".


CLS 427/407.3
TXT Fiberglass base:

    Processes under subclass 407.2 wherein the glass base is in fiber or
    textile form.


CLS 427/408
TXT Processes under subclass 407.1 wherein the base material is derived from
    the trunks or branches of bushes.

    (1)     Note.  Wood particles or fibers which have been chemically changed,
    e.g., regenerated cellulose etc., or water layed to form a paper, are not
    considered to be wood.


CLS 427/409
TXT Processes under subclass 407.1 wherein the base is metal in elemental form.


CLS 427/410
TXT Processes under subclass 409 wherein at least one coating comprises an
    epoxy resin or a polyepoxide.


CLS 427/411
TXT Processes under subclass 407.1 wherein the substrate is a water laid
    fibrous material.


CLS 427/412
TXT Processes under subclass 407.1 wherein the base is either the tanned skin
    of an animal or a body comprising an assembly of interengaged fibers or
    filaments.


CLS 427/412.1
TXT Nonfibrous organic base:

    Processes under subclass 407.1 wherein the base comprises organic material
    in nonfibrous form.


CLS 427/412.2
TXT Cellulose derivative base:

    Processes under subclass 412.1 wherein the base is a cellulosic derivative.


CLS 427/412.3
TXT Polyolefin base:

    Processes under subclass 412.1 wherein the base comprises a polyolefin.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for coating polyethylene, etc.


CLS 427/412.4
TXT Halogen-containing resin base:

    Processes under subclass 412.1 wherein the base comprises
    halogen-containing resin.


CLS 427/412.5
TXT Polyester or alkyd resin base:

    Processes under subclass 412.1 wherein the base comprises polyester or
    alkyd resin.


CLS 427/413
TXT Processes under subclass 402 wherein at least one of the coatings contains
    natural rubber or a derivative thereof such as, for example, halogenated
    rubber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    407.1+, for coatings containing synthetic rubber.


CLS 427/414
TXT Processes under subclass 402 wherein at least one of the coatings contains
    a protein or derivative thereof.


CLS 427/415
TXT Processes under subclass 402 wherein at least one coating contains a
    carbohydrate material derived  from the structural matter of plant life or
    a derivative of such carbohydrate material.

    (1)     Note.  Coatings containing a cellulose ester or ether or
    regenerated cellulose, etc., are provided for here.


CLS 427/416
TXT Processes under subclass 402 wherein at least one coating contains a wax.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are any material generally referred to in
    the art as wax whether natural or synthetic.


CLS 427/417
TXT Processes under subclass 402 wherein at least one coating contains natural
    resin, oil, or fat.

    (1)     Note.  Shellac and varnish are considered to contain natural resins
    unless it is set forth they are made from synthetic resins.

    (2)     Note.  Paints are assumed to contain oil unless described as being
    latex paint.


CLS 427/418
TXT Processes under subclass 417 wherein at least one coating contains a
    metallic compound.


CLS 427/419.1
TXT Metallic compound-containing coating:

    Processes under subclass 402 wherein at least one coating contains a
    metallic compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403+,   for applying plural coatings wherein at least one coating contains
    a settable inorganic cement-like material which contains a metallic
    compound.

    418,    for applying plural coatings wherein at least one coating contains
    resin, oil, or fat and at least one coating contains a metallic compound.


CLS 427/419.2
TXT Oxide-containing coating:

    Processes under subclass 419.1 wherein at least one coating contains a
    metallic oxide.


CLS 427/419.3
TXT Superposed diverse oxide coatings:

    Processes under subclass 419.2 which include applying a plurality of
    diverse metallic oxide coating materials in superposed relationship on a
    base, or applying a diverse metallic oxide coating material to a metallic
    oxide coating which has previously been coated on a base.


CLS 427/419.4
TXT Vitreous coating:

    Processes under subclass 419.3 wherein at least one of the metallic
    oxide-containing coatings comprises glasslike material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for coating a cellulose acetate film,
    etc.


CLS 427/419.5
TXT Organic coating:

    Processes under subclass 419.2 wherein at least one of the coatings
    comprises organic material.

    (1)     Note.  Attention is directed to the definitions of Class 260,
    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for the scope of the term "organic".


CLS 427/419.6
TXT Vitreous coating:

    Processes under subclass 419.2 wherein the metallic oxide-containing
    coating comprises glasslike material.


CLS 427/419.7
TXT Boride, carbide, nitride, phosphide, silicide, or sulfide-containing
    coating:

    Processes under subclass 419.1 wherein the metallic compound consists of
    metal combined with boron, carbon, nitrogen, phosphorus, silicon, or sulfur
    to form a binary compound.

    (1)     Note.  The coating material may contain additional ingredients but
    the metallic compound must consist of only metal and one other element.


CLS 427/419.8
TXT Organometallic or metal salt of organic compound-containing coating:

    Processes under subclass 419.1 wherein at least one of the coatings
    contains an organometallic compound or a metal salt of an organic compound.


CLS 427/420
TXT Processes under the class definition wherein the base is moved through a
    film or curtain of free falling coating material.


CLS 427/421
TXT Processes under the class definition wherein the coating material is
    projected by mechanical force toward the base.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for spraying a transparent base with coating material to form an
    electrical product.

    168,    for producing or coating an optical element by spraying.

    180+,   for applying solid particles to a base which may be by spraying.

    233     and 236, for coating the interior of hollow articles by spraying.

    240,    for processes of applying a coating material by centrifugal force.

    458+,   for coating processes wherein an electrostatic charge is employed.


CLS 427/422
TXT Processes under subclass 421 wherein the temperature of the coating
    material is raised to above ambient prior to application.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    561+,   for irradiating the coating material before application to the base.


CLS 427/424
TXT Processes under subclass 421 wherein the base is mechanically moved while
    being sprayed with coating material.


CLS 427/425
TXT Processes under subclass 424 wherein the base is rotated about an axis
    through itself or is inverted, while coating material is sprayed onto it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233,    for a process of rotating a hollow article while spraying its
    interior.


CLS 427/426
TXT Processes under subclass 421 in which plural materials are supplied from
    separate sources and are combined to make up a coating composition while
    being conveyed from their sources toward the base, said combining taking
    place (1) prior to discharge from a projecting apparatus or (2) after
    leaving the apparatus, but prior to contacting the base.

    (1)     Note.  At least two of the materials combined must constitute
    ingredients of the coating composition.  This subclass does not include
    combining a coating composition with a liquid or gas which is intended to
    function solely as a conveyor for the material to the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196,    for applying solid particles and a binder to a base simultaneously,
    but from different sources.

    402,    for applying superposed diverse coatings and read the notes and
    search notes thereto.


CLS 427/427
TXT Processes under subclass 421 wherein the coating is based on the inorganic
    material.

    (1)     Note.  Attention is directed to the definition of Class 260,
    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for the distinction between the term
    "organic" and "inorganic".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    422+,   for applying a molten metal or other heated coating.


CLS 427/428
TXT Processes under the class definition wherein coating material is applied to
    the base from the curved outer surface of a cylindrical applicator while
    said applicator is rotating about an internal axis.

    (1)     Note.  Padding coating material onto a base is assumed to involve
    using a roller and is provided for in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194,    for a process of applying particles to a base which includes
    utilizing a roller, usually a heated roller to fuse or soften the particles.

    359+,   for a coating process wherein a roller is utilized to treat the
    coating after it has been applied to the base.

    430.1+, for an immersion coating process wherein a roller may be submerged
    in the coating bath in which the base is immersed.


CLS 427/429
TXT Processes under the class definition wherein the coating member comprises
    (1) bristles secured to a support or (2) a member capable of soaking up
    coating material.

    (1)     Note.  Absorbent applicators include wicks, webs, sponges, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    260,    for applying a nonuniform coating with a brush or absorbent
    applicator.

    368,    for a coating process which includes brushing the coating after it
    has been applied to the base.


CLS 427/430.1
TXT IMMERSION OR PARTIAL IMMERSION:

    Processes under the class definition wherein the coating is applied by
    submerging at least a portion of the base in a pool of coating material.

    (1)     Note.  Reference to the use of a "bath" coating process is
    considered immersion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169,    for coating a glass base by immersion to produce an optical element.

    185,    for coating an article with particles by immersing it in a
    fluidized bed of particles.


CLS 427/431
TXT Processes under subclass 430.1 wherein the coating bath contains molten
    metal or a fused metallic compound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 939 for a
    metallic composite made by a process of this subclass.


CLS 427/432
TXT Processes under subclass 431 wherein an inert gas or a nonoxidizing
    atmosphere is employed adjacent the coating bath.


CLS 427/433
TXT Processes under subclass 431 wherein the coating contains lead, zinc, or
    tin in elemental form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 643+, 645,
    646, and 658+ for metallic composites in which a component has a tin, lead,
    or zinc base.


CLS 427/434.2
TXT Running lengths:

    Processes under subclass 430.1 wherein the base is a piece of material
    handled at points intermediate its ends whereby the length is immaterial to
    the manner of handling.


CLS 427/434.3
TXT Coating applied at surface of bath only:

    Processes under subclass 434.2 wherein only the surface of the bath is
    utilized to coat the base.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for floating the base on the surface
    of the coating material to be applied, etc.


CLS 427/434.4
TXT Base treated by solid member in bath (e.g., scraped, squeezed, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 434.2 wherein the base being coated is contacted
    and actively treated by a solid member while immersed or partially immersed
    in the coating bath.

    (1)     Note.  For classification here the base must specifically be
    treated (e.g., squeezed, scraped, etc.) and not merely conveyed by a
    contacting member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    335+,   for processes wherein the treating member contacts the coated base
    after removal from the immersion bath.


CLS 427/434.5
TXT Coating material moved (e.g., agitated, circulated, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 434.2 wherein the coating material is caused to
    move in a defined manner during the coating operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    345,    for treatment of the coating material after it leaves the coating
    bath.


CLS 427/434.6
TXT Cord, thread, yarn, wire, or rod:

    Processes under subclass 434.2 wherein the running length is in the form of
    a wire, rod, filament, cord, or strand.


CLS 427/434.7
TXT Extending through bath-containing wall:

    Processes under subclass 434.6 wherein the running length being coated
    enters the immersion bath directly through an opening in a wall of the
    container, which opening is below the surface of the bath.


CLS 427/435
TXT Processes under subclass 430.1 wherein the base is metal in elemental form.


CLS 427/436
TXT Processes under subclass 435 wherein a coating which contains metal in
    elemental form is applied.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 615+ for a
    metallic composite defined in terms of the compositions of its components.


CLS 427/437
TXT Processes under subclass 436 which include utilizing a reducing agent which
    is a chemical compound.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the bath contains a metallic compound which is
    reduced to deposit a metal coating on the immersed base.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98,     for electroless plating to make a printed circuit board.

    304+,   for an electroless deposition process which includes pretreating
    the base.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 936 for a
    metallic composite made by a process of this subclass.


CLS 427/438
TXT Processes under subclass 437 wherein the coating is free nickel.


CLS 427/439
TXT Processes under subclass 430.1  wherein the base is a carbohydrate material
    derived from the structural matter of plant life.


CLS 427/440
TXT Processes under subclass 439 wherein the base material is derived from the
    trunks or branches of trees or bushes.

    (1)     Note.  Wood particles or fibers which have been chemically changed,
    e.g., regenerated cellulose etc., or water layed to form a paper, are not
    considered to be wood.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291,    for injecting coating material into wood wherein a hole is made in
    the wood base.


CLS 427/441
TXT Processes under subclass 440 wherein the coating contains creosote, wax,
    oil, asphalt, pitch, tar, or bitumen.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are any heavy oil or tar like material with
    properties similar to those materials specifically set out.


CLS 427/442
TXT Processes under subclass 439 wherein the coating contains creosote, wax,
    oil, asphalt, pitch, tar, or bitumen.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are any heavy oil or tar like material with
    properties similar to those materials specifically set out.


CLS 427/443
TXT Processes under subclass 430.1 wherein the coating contains creosote, wax,
    oil, asphalt, pitch, tar, or bitumen.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are any heavy oil or tar like material with
    properties similar to those materials specifically set out.


CLS 427/443.1
TXT Chemical compound reducing agent utilized (i.e., electroless deposition):

    Processes under subclass 430.1 which includes utilizing a reducing agent
    which is a chemical compound.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the bath contains a metallic compound which is
    reduced to deposit a metal coating on the immersed base.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98,     for electroless plating to make a printed circuit board.

    304+,   for an electroless deposition process which includes pretreating
    the base.

    437,    for an electroless deposition process wherein the base comprises
    free metal.


CLS 427/443.2
TXT Inorganic base:

    Processes under subclass 430.1 wherein the base comprises inorganic
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    435+,   for similar processes wherein the base comprises free metal.


CLS 427/444
TXT Processes under the class definition for treating a base in preparation for
    coating it or treating an applied coating, wherein a coating step is not
    claimed and wherein the process is not provided for in another class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 137+, and see the notes thereto for certain
    cleaning process.

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, for mere methods of
    use of such compositions claimed along with the cleaning composition, per
    se.


CLS 427/445
TXT Processes under the class definition not provided for in any other subclass.

    (1)     Note.  Patents which contain claims to significant coating
    processes for this class, are placed in the appropriate subclasses above
    based on total disclosure if the claimed disclosure is not provided for in
    one of the above subclasses.


CLS 427/446
TXT SPRAY COATING UTILIZING FLAME OR PLASMA HEAT (E.G., FLAME SPRAYING, ETC.):

    Processes under the class definition wherein (1) a gaseous flame is used to
    heat and project a coating material toward a substrate or (2) a coating
    material is converted to or engulfed by a highly ionized gas composed of
    ions, electrons and neutral particles in which the positive ions and
    negative electrons are roughly equal in number, and projected on to a
    substrate

    (1)     Note.  Torch spraying is considered a form of flame spraying and is
    included in this and indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  Electric arc metal spraying is properly classified in this
    and indented subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  Explosive or detonation spray vaporization, wherein the
    vaporized coating is applied in the form of a spray is properly classified
    in this and indented subclasses.

    (4)     Note.  Thermal spraying is properly classified in this and indented
    subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    596,    for coating processes utilizing laser heat transfer, which are
    often referred to as explosive vaporization.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 192.38 for vacuum
    arc discharge coating, utilizing processes for the deposition of a coating
    onto a substrate within a vacuum environment by the action of an arc
    discharge between an anode and a cathode wherein the source material is the
    cathode, per se, or the source material is on the cathode.

    219,    Electric Heating, particularly subclasses 73.11, 73.21, and 76.1+
    for coating operations that involve a build-up of metal coating on a metal
    workpiece and wherein an arc between an electrode and the work is utilized.


CLS 427/447
TXT Organic containing coating:

    Processes under subclass 446 wherein the coating material applied has
    organic material in its composition.

    (1)     Note.  Attention is directed to the definition of Class 260,
    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for the distinction between the term
    "organic" and "inorganic."


CLS 427/448
TXT Nonuniform or patterned coating:

    Processes under subclass 446 wherein the coating is applied (1) to only
    selected portions of a base (2) in such a manner as to produce uneven,
    discontinuous or nonuniform thickness or (3) so that it varies from area to
    area as to physical or chemical properties.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256+,   for nonuniform coating processes without the use of electrical,
    magnetic, electromagnetic, or wave energy.

    466+,   for nonuniform or patterned coating processes utilizing
    electrostatic charge, field, or force.

    504,    for processes to polymerize an applied nonuniform or patterned
    coating utilizing high energy electromagnetic radiation or high energy
    particles.

    510,    for processes to polymerize an applied nonuniform or patterned
    coating utilizing low energy electromagnetic radiation.

    526,    for nonuniform or patterned coating processes utilizing ion plating
    or ion implantation.

    552,    for nonuniform or patterned coating processes involving pretreating
    a substrate or post-treating a coated substrate utilizing high energy
    electromagnetic radiation.

    555,    for nonuniform or patterned coating processes utilizing laser
    radiation in a thermal pretreatment of a substrate or a thermal
    post-treatment of a coated substrate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 31+ for radiation imagery involving coating using
    electric or magnetic energy.


CLS 427/449
TXT Continuous feed solid coating material (e.g., wire, rod, or filament, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 446 wherein the coating material fed to the flame
    or plasma is in the form of long, continuous, slender, solid matter.

    (1)     Note.  Generally the coating material is in the form of a wire,
    rod, or filament.


CLS 427/450
TXT Inorganic carbon containing coating, not as steel (e.g., carbide, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 446 wherein the coating material, excluding steel,
    contains inorganic carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Attention is directed to the definition of Class 260,
    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for the distinction between the term
    "organic" and "inorganic."

    (2)     Note.  Metal compounds, excluding steel, containing more than 1.7
    percent of inorganic carbon are properly classified in this subclass.

     (3)    Note.  Plasma or flame spraying processes utilizing inorganic
    carbon containing material to form diamond-like films are found here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, subclass 79 for processes for growing
    therein-defined single-crystal of diamond and subclass 929 for the art
    collection of carbon single-crystal references.  Class 423, subclass 446,
    is a mandatory search and cross-reference for patents directed to forming a
    free-standing single-crystal diamond even though properly placed in Class
    117 as an original.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclass 446, for diamonds and
    methods of making, which does not result in a coated product.


CLS 427/451
TXT Additionally containing nickel, cobalt, or iron as free metal or alloy:

    Processes under subclass 450 wherein the inorganic carbon containing
    coating also contains nickel, cobalt, or iron as an alloy or free metal.


CLS 427/452
TXT Silicon containing coating:

    Processes under subclass 446 wherein the coating material applied  contains
    silicon.


CLS 427/453
TXT Metal oxide containing coating:

    Processes under subclass 446 wherein the coating material applied contains
    metal oxide.

    (1)     Note.  For classification purposes in this subclass, ceramic is
    considered metal oxide.


CLS 427/454
TXT Superposed diverse or multilayer similar coatings applied:

    Processes under subclass 453 which include sequentially applying a
    plurality of dissimilar coating materials in superposed relationship on a
    substrate or applying a plurality of layers of similar coating materials in
    superposed relationship on a substrate or previously coated substrate.


CLS 427/455
TXT Metal or metal alloy coating:

    Processes under subclass 446 wherein the coating material is composed of
    pure metal or metal alloy.

    (1)     Note.  Metals and metal alloys containing less than one percent
    carbon are properly classified in this and indented subclasses.


CLS 427/456
TXT Aluminum, nickel, cobalt, or iron metal or alloy containing coating:

    Processes under subclass 455 wherein the metal or metal alloy coating
    contains aluminum, nickel, cobalt, or iron.


CLS 427/457
TXT DIRECT APPLICATION OF ELECTRICAL, MAGNETIC, WAVE, OR PARTICULATE ENERGY:

    Processes under the class definition wherein a substrate, coated substrate
    or coating material is treated at any stage in a coating process with
    electrical, magnetic, particulate, or electromagnetic wave energy or heat
    produced therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  The energy employed must be applied directly to the
    substrate, the coated substrate or the coating material as part of the
    total coating process (including pretreatment or post-treatment).

    (2)     Note.  Where the electrical energy is not applied directly to the
    base or coating, but is used to generate heat energy that is transferred to
    the base before, during, or after the coating operation, see other
    subclasses of this class or other appropriate heating or heat treatment
    classes.

    (3)     Note.  Utilization of radiant heat or infrared energy to vaporize
    the coating material in a vapor deposition process is not basis for
    classification in this and indented subclasses.

    (4)     Note.  The wave energy applied to the work may be light, sonic,
    supersonic, ultrasonic, gamma rays, infrared rays, X-rays, etc.
    Particulate energy includes charged particles and atomic emissions, such as
    alpha rays, beta rays, and neutrons.

    (5)     Note.  The mere sprinkling of particles is not considered coating
    for these and indented subclasses.  There has to be some attractive or
    adhesive force between the base and the particles that would tend to hold
    said particles fixed to the base.

    (6)     Note.  This and indented subclasses are proper for processes
    involving coating utilizing the combination of neutral and charged
    particles.

    (7)     Note.  Search subclasses 1, 2.1+, 4, 5+, 7, 8+, and 11 for subject
    matter of this and indented subclasses when also meeting the subclass
    definitions therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8+,     for processes wherein the electrical, magnetic, wave, or
    particulate energy is used for measuring, testing, or indicating.

    248.1,  for coating processes utilizing molecular beam, also for processes
    utilizing radiant heat or infrared energy to vaporize the coating material
    in a vapor deposition process.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclass 444 for dyeing processes utilizing wave
    energy; and subclass 103 for bleaching processes involving the use of
    corona irradiation.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 245+ and
    266+ for processes involving the use of corona radiation.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 358 and 451 for
    apparatus for subjecting foods and beverages to wave, radiant, and
    electrical energy.

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes for growing therein-defined
    single-crystal of all types of materials, including inorganic or organic,
    and by all techniques, especially subclasses 84+ for vapor or gas phase
    epitaxy.

    128,    Surgery, for electrical or wave energy treatment of the living
    human body and apparatus specialized therefor.

    148,    Metal Treatment, for coating a metal base combined with a Class 148
    treatment of the base (e.g., annealing, microstructure change, etc.) Class
    427 is proper for simultaneous ion implantation and diffusion.  However,
    inclusion of a separate step which by itself would be classifiable in Class
    148 is enough to place the combination in Class 148.  See subclass 239 for
    ion implantation with a subsequent Class 148 treatment.  If diffusion is
    involved in a coating operation involving metal, and the diffusion involves
    the microstructure of the metal (i.e., other than reactive coating
    operations) the original will be placed in Class 427 if the specified
    diffusion occurs during the coating step.  However, if there is a heat
    treatment step independent of the coating step, which causes diffusion to
    affect the microstructure of the metal the original goes to Class 148.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 155+, 157.15+,
    and 164+ for processes wherein electrical or wave  energy is used to effect
    chemical reaction. Treating a substrate or a coated substrate by electrical
    discharge, electrostatic charge, field, or force, lacking a coating step of
    externally supplied coating material is provided for in Class 204,
    subclasses 164+.  However, if there is a coating step present, supplying an
    external source of coating material (i.e., complete or in part) placement
    is proper in Class 427 even if there is a post treatment operation
    involving electrical discharge, electrostatic charge, field, or force.  See
    subclasses 192.1+ for methods specialized for coating or forming objects
    within a gaseous medium by the action of cathode sputtering.  Subclasses
    450+ provide for electrophoretic or electro-osmotic processes, in general;
    and subclasses 471+ provide for electrophoretic or electro-osmotic coating
    or forming of an object.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 80+ for electrolytic coating
    processes and subclasses 183+, 188+, 191+, and 198+ for processes involving
    plural coating steps, at least one but not all of which is electrolytic.
    Combinations of preparatory electrolytic processes, other than coating,
    with processes of coating falling within the scope of Class 427 are
    classified in Class 427.  A patent with a claim to a coating process
    classifiable in Class 427 and a claim to a coating process classifiable in
    Class 205 will be placed as an original in Class 427 and cross-referenced
    to Class 205.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 600+ for induction, electrostatic, or
    electromagnetic wave energy for heating, per se, employing this energy.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 3 for
    electrostatically charging material in order to obtain a desired spray,
    wherein the intent is not to coat.

    250,    Radiant Energy, all noncoating methods and apparatus for using,
    generating, controlling, or detecting radiant energy, particularly
    subclasses 492.1+ for methods of irradiation, per se, of a material with
    ions.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclasses 103+ for patents directed to processes involving induced nuclear
    reactions and structures which implement such processes.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 28+ for
    xeroradiography.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclass 57 for liquid control developing,
    subclasses 58+ for concentration control of developing material, subclasses
    168+ for charging, subclasses 246+ for sprayed liquid developing, subclass
    248 for immersion, and subclasses 265+ for application of dry developing.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, especially subclasses 22+ for processes of
    disinfecting, deodorizing, preserving, or sterilizing nonfoods; and
    subclasses  129+, especially  subclass 185 for apparatus using corona
    discharge or radiation for effecting chemical reactions.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 31+ for coating processes involving electric or
    magnetic imagery (e.g. xerography, etc.).

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, for methods of making
    a semiconductor device or coating a semiconductor substrate.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    subclasses 10 - 14, for coating electric lamps or electric space discharge
    devices wherein a combined process is intended to perform multiple
    processes are classified here (445), when one of the operations is
    specifically provided for in this class (445).

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process, for
    making or coating superconductors or superconductor material.

    522,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, for processes of preparing or
    treating a synthetic resin or natural rubber involving a chemical reaction
    brought about by the application of wave energy.


CLS 427/458
TXT Electrostatic charge, field, or force utilized:

    Processes under subclass 457 utilizing static electricity, that is an
    electrical charge at rest, to effect deposition or orientation of an
    externally supplied coating material.

    (1)     Note.  Electrostatic energy is a form of electrical energy which
    has the capability of attracting and holding small particles having an
    opposite electrical charge.

    (2)     Note.  An electrostatic charge is an electric charge stored in a
    capacitor or on the surface of an insulated object.

    (3)     Note.  An electrostatic field is the vector force field set up in
    the vicinity of non-moving electrical charges.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180,    for processes of applying particles or fibers to a substrate
    without the use of an electrostatic force.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, etc., subclass 255 for a loose
    mixture containing metal particles. Subclass 10.67 for electromagnetic or
    electrostatic processes.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 620+ for coating apparatus utilizing
    an electrostatic charge, force, or field.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 600+ for electrostatic heating, per
    se.  If there is a subsequent step of coating involved the original is
    classified in Class 427.  If there is other subsequent treatment involved
    the original is classified with the art to which the other subsequent
    treatment pertains.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 3 for processes
    of spraying wherein an electrostatic charge is employed and the intent of
    the sprinkling, spraying, and diffusing is not to coat.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 225+ and
    230+ for apparatus used to apply an electrical charge to materials, per se.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclass 57 for liquid control developing,
    subclasses 58+ for concentration control of developing material, subclasses
    168+ for charging, subclasses 246+ for sprayed liquid developing, subclass
    248 for immersion, and subclasses 265+ for application of dry developing.


CLS 427/459
TXT Fluidized bed utilized:

    Processes under subclass 458 wherein a bed or mass of solid coating
    particles is maintained in a state of fluidization by passing a gas in a
    generally upward direction through the particles which remain in a confined
    volume and is utilized in the coating of an article or substrate.


CLS 427/460
TXT Ionization or corona discharge utilized:

    Processes under subclass 459 wherein (1) the dissociation of an atom or
    molecule into electrons and ions, which facilitates the passage of current,
    or (2) the phenomena that occurs when an electric field is sufficiently
    strong to ionize the gas between electrodes and cause conduction, is used
    to assist in the deposition of the fluidized coating material.


CLS 427/461
TXT Heating or fusing applied coating:

    Processes under subclass 459 wherein the temperature of the applied coating
    is raised above ambient or the applied coating is liquified or reduced to a
    plastic state by heating.


CLS 427/462
TXT Flock or fiber applied:

    Processes under subclass 458 wherein the coating applied is in the form of
    finely powdered wool, cotton, or cloth material or relatively short,
    slender, flexible elements of finite length and having a width and
    thickness of the same order of magnitude.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206,    for applying flock or fiber to a substrate without the use of
    electrical or wave energy.


CLS 427/463
TXT Pile- or nap-type surface formed:

    Processes under subclass 462 wherein the coating applied to a substrate,
    web, sheet, layer, or element, results in a bristly, fuzzy, or resilient
    surface, with extended looped or free ended filamentary material.


CLS 427/464
TXT Heating, drying, or cooling adhesive surface:

    Processes under subclass 463 wherein the temperature of an adhesive coating
    is raised above or lowered below the ambient or the moisture content of the
    adhesive coating is reduced.

    (1)     Note.  Heating or drying often causes curing or hardening of the
    coating.


CLS 427/465
TXT Organic substrate specified (e.g., fabric, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 463 wherein the designated base or surface onto
    which the adhesive coating is applied is organic.

    (1)     Note.  Attention is directed to the definition of Class 260,
    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for the distinction between the term
    "organic" and "inorganic."

    (2)     Note.  For classification in this subclass the adhesive layer is
    not considered to be the base.


CLS 427/466
TXT Nonuniform or patterned coating (e.g., ink jet printing, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 458 wherein the coating utilizing electrostatic
    charge, field, or force is (1) applied only to selected portions of a base
    (2) applied in such a manner as to produce  a coating of uneven,
    discontinuous, or nonuniform thickness, or (3) varied from area to area as
    to physical or chemical properties.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256+,   for nonuniform or patterned coating processes without the use of
    electrical, magnetic, electromagnetic, or wave energy.

    448,    for nonuniform or patterned spray coating processes utilizing flame
    or plasma heat.

    504,    for processes to polymerize an applied nonuniform or patterned
    coating utilizing high energy electromagnetic radiation or high energy
    particles.

    510,    for processes to polymerize an applied nonuniform or patterned
    coating utilizing low energy electromagnetic radiation.

    526,    for nonuniform or patterned coating processes utilizing ion plating
    or ion implantation.

    552,    for nonuniform or patterned coating processes involving pretreating
    a substrate or post-treating a coated substrate utilizing high energy
    electromagnetic radiation or high energy particles.

    555,    for nonuniform or patterned coating processes utilizing laser
    radiation in a thermal pretreatment of a substrate or a thermal
    post-treatment of a coated substrate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    399,    Electrophotography, subclass 57 for liquid control developing,
    subclasses 58+ for concentration control of developing material, subclasses
    168+ for charging, subclasses 246+ for sprayed liquid developing, subclass
    248 for immersion, and subclasses 265+ for application of dry developing.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 31+ for coating processes involving electric or
    magnetic imagery.


CLS 427/467
TXT Edging or striping:

    Processes under subclass 466 wherein (1) only the edge or border of a
    substrate is coated or (2) wherein the coating is applied in long narrow
    lines.

    (1)     Note.  The stripes are not required to be parallel or straight.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137,    for the striping of roads or the earth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    107 for processes for sealing the edges of laminated glass.


CLS 427/468
TXT Mask or stencil utilized:

    Processes under subclass 466 in which the substrate treated has applied to
    portions thereof a coating or layer which masks or shields the portions so
    coated during further treatment of the exposed portions of the substrate.

    (1)     Note.  The masking coat may be applied to selected areas or the
    entire substrate may be coated with a mask-forming composition and selected
    portions of the coating, thus formed, removed.


CLS 427/469
TXT Coating material consists of charged particles (e.g., paint, pigment, dye,
    etc.):

    Processes under subclass 466 wherein the nonuniform coating is formed by
    deposition of charged particles to a substrate by utilization of
    electrostatic charge, field, or force to form a non-imaged coating on the
    base.

    (1)     Note.  The charged particles may be loose, free falling or
    suspended in a fluid for deposition thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 31+ particularly subclasses 117 and 120 for processes
    of electrostatically coating (1) if radiation is utilized to form an image,
    or (2) for finishing an image produced by radiation utilizing electrostatic
    deposition to complete the image.


CLS 427/470
TXT Superposed diverse or multilayer similar coatings applied:

    Processes under subclass 458 which include sequentially applying a
    plurality of dissimilar coating materials in superposed relationship on a
    substrate or applying a plurality of layers of similar coating materials in
    superposed relationship on a substrate or previously coated substrate,
    utilizing electrostatic charge, field, or force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258,    for processes wherein at least one of the superimposed coating
    layers are nonuniform and need not be applied with the use of electrical or
    wave energy.


CLS 427/471
TXT Applying coatings to opposite sides of a substrate (excluding processes
    where all coating is by immersion):

    Processes under subclass 458 wherein the coating material is applied to
    opposing surfaces of a base or substrate.

    (1)     Note.  The opposite sides may be coated with the same or different
    coating materials.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for merely immersing a
    substrate to coat both sides, but does provide for such an operation
    combined with additionally coating at least one side of the substrate by
    another method, such as spraying, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206,    for coating both sides of a substrate (web or work-piece) with
    flock or fiber without the use of electrical or wave energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    399,    Electrophotography, subclass 57 for liquid control developing,
    subclasses 58+ for concentration control of developing material, subclasses
    168+ for charging, subclasses 246+ for sprayed liquid developing, subclass
    248 for immersion, and subclasses 265+ for application of dry developing.


CLS 427/472
TXT Positioning, orientation, or application of nonsprayed, nonatomized coating
    material solely by electrostatic charge, field, or force:

    Processes under subclass 458 wherein a coating material, which may be fluid
    or discrete particles, is caused to move from a container or support
    surface to a substrate or have its relative alignment or placement
    influenced by using electrostatic charge, field, or force as the sole or
    principal source of energy.

    (1)     Note.  Mechanical projection is a form of spraying and thus
    excluded.

    (2)     Note.  Atomized refers to breaking up a liquid into a fine spray or
    fog.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 690+ for
    sprinkling or spraying material solely by use of electrostatic charge,
    field, or force with the expressed intent to distribute a material, not to
    coat.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 437 for shaping or treating processes in which electrical or wave
    energy is applied directly to fibers or other particulate material to move,
    align, or effect deposition of said fibers or particles.


CLS 427/473
TXT Inorganic substrate:

    Processes under subclass 472 wherein the substrate or base is inorganic.

    (1)     Note.  Attention is directed to the definition of Class 260,
    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for the distinction between the term
    "organic" and "inorganic."


CLS 427/474
TXT Solid particles applied:

    Processes under subclass 472 wherein discrete solid particles are applied
    to a substrate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, for a
    process of making an abrasive tool by coating.  Note that a generic process
    for coating material, generally (which material may comprise an abrasive
    tool) is found in Class 427.


CLS 427/475
TXT Solid particles or atomized liquid applied:

    Processes under subclass 458 wherein solid particles are sprayed or liquid
    particles are atomized and sprayed into the vicinity of the substrate and
    are electrostatically attracted thereto.

    (1)     Note.  The particles may form the coating, or become part of a
    coating as when applied over a layer of adhesive.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 690+ for
    claims drawn to processes for utilizing electrostatic spray devices
    (especially electrogasdynamic generators) to sprinkle, spray, or diffuse
    fluid material wherein the expressed intent is not to coat.


CLS 427/476
TXT Inside hollow articles:

    Processes under subclass 475 wherein the coating material is applied to an
    inner or concave surface of a cavity, bore, depression, or hole in the work.

    (1)     Note.  Materials such as fabrics, foams, felts, etc. are not
    considered hollow for purposes of this subclass even though they may
    contain voids.


CLS 427/477
TXT Articles or substrates sequentially moved past atomizing source:

    Processes under subclass 475 wherein individually supported objects to be
    coated are transported past a source of atomized coating material.


CLS 427/478
TXT Collection of off-target or fugitive coating material:

    Processes under subclass 477 wherein means is provided to recover (1)
    coating material which misses the target substrate or (2) elusive or
    runaway coating overflow.


CLS 427/479
TXT Utilizing multiple spray sources (e.g., atomizers):

    Processes under subclass 477 wherein a substrate is coated by using
    multiple atomizers or spray sources.


CLS 427/480
TXT Movable atomizer or spray source (e.g., spray source or atomizer rotates,
    reciprocates, oscillates, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 477 wherein the atomizer or spray source has a
    mobile mounting.

    (1)     Note.  Processes of utilizing mechanically mobile coating
    projectors capable of moving across the surface of the work to insure
    uniform deposition of a coating are provided for in this subclass.


CLS 427/481
TXT Rotatable base or support for substrate:

    Processes under subclass 477 wherein mechanical means are provided to
    convey the work (substrate or article) to be coated about a specified axis
    of rotation in which the path of every point of the moving work is an arc
    or circle, centered on that axis.


CLS 427/482
TXT Running or indefinite length substrate:

    Processes under subclass 475 wherein a base or web to be coated travels
    longitudinally of itself, the length of which is continuous or
    uninterrupted.

    (1)     Note.  Processes of coating running length substrates are
    distinguished from processes which coat the work as discrete units.


CLS 427/483
TXT Utilizing apparatus to atomize and electrostatically charge liquid coating
    material (e.g., charging electrode adjacent spray source, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 475 wherein an electrostatic charge, field, or
    force is used to assist in causing a liquid material to be reduced to small
    particles or fine droplets and deposited on a substrate.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass processes may be found wherein a charging
    electrode stationed adjacent the spray source or coating projector causes
    the coating liquid to be charged and reduced to fine liquid particles.


CLS 427/484
TXT Rotatable atomizer or spray source:

    Processes under subclass 483 wherein the motion of the atomizer or spray
    source is in a path in which every point of movement is a circle or
    circular arc centered on its own axis.


CLS 427/485
TXT Coating contains organic material:

    Processes under subclass 475 wherein the coating material applied includes
    organic material in its composition.

    (1)     Note.  Attention is directed to the definition of Class 260,
    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for the distinction between the term
    "organic" and "inorganic."


CLS 427/486
TXT Inorganic substrate:

    Processes under subclass 485 wherein the substrate upon which the coating
    is applied is inorganic.

    (1)     Note.  Attention is directed to the definition of Class 260,
    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for the distinction between the term
    "organic" and "inorganic."


CLS 427/487
TXT Polymerization of coating utilizing direct application of electrical,
    magnetic, wave, or particulate energy (i.e., including cross-linking,
    curing, and hardening of organics):

    Processes under subclass 457 wherein polymerization of the applied coating
    material (i.e., not the substrate) occurs as a result of direct application
    of electrical, magnetic, particulate, electromagnetic, wave energy or heat
    produced therefrom and at any stage in the coating process.

    (1)     Note.  The applied energy, most often in the form of heat or light,
    must be used in the polymerization step.

    (2)     Note.  For the purpose of classification here and in indented
    subclasses, the following terms will be understood to denote some form of
    polymerization:


    a.      cross-linking

    b.      curing

    c.      hardening of organic

    d.      addition polymerization

    e.      condensation polymerization

    f.      grafting

    (3)     Note.  A claim drawn to a process of irradiating an applied coating
    composition with or without a reaction promoter being present, where some
    form of polymerization reaction takes place is proper for this and indented
    subclasses.

    (4)     Note.  Processes involving coating utilizing neutral and charged
    particles is proper for this and indented subclasses.


CLS 427/488
TXT Plasma initiated polymerization:

    Processes under subclass 487 wherein polymerization of a coated substrate
    is induced by utilizing a plasma.


CLS 427/489
TXT Organosilicon containing coating:

    Processes under subclass 488 wherein an organic silicon compound is part of
    the applied coating composition.

    (1)     Note.  Attention is directed to the definition of Class 260,
    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for the distinction between the term
    "organic" and "inorganic."


CLS 427/490
TXT Fluorocarbon containing coating:

    Processes under subclass 488 wherein fluorocarbon compounds are part of the
    composition of the applied coating material.


CLS 427/491
TXT Organic substrate:

    Processes under subclass 488 wherein the composition of the base or
    substrate is organic.

    (1)     Note.  Attention is directed to the definition of Class 260,
    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for the distinction between the term
    "organic" and "inorganic."


CLS 427/492
TXT Multiple applications of identical radiation energy source to polymerize
    (e.g., pulse, flash lamp, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 487 wherein the polymerization of the coating is
    influenced by the duration of intermittently applied identical radiation
    energy.

    (1)     Note.  For the purpose of classification here and indented
    subclasses, the term "radiation energy" includes:


    a.      Electromagnetic Radiation
    1.      radio wave
    2.      microwave
    3.      visible
    4.      ultraviolet
    5.      X - rays
    6.      gamma ray
    7.      actinic

    b.      Acoustic Radiation
    1.      infrasonic
    2.      sonic
    3.      ultrasonic

    c.      Particle Radiation
    1.      alpha ray (helium atom, 2                       protons + 2
    neutrons)

            2.      beta ray (electrons)
    3.      electron (accelerated beam)
    4.      neutron

            This list is not intended to be exhaustive and is not limited to
    the above examples.

    (2)     Note.  Processes for using pulsed discharge devices or flash lamps
    to achieve polymerization of the applied coating may be found here.


CLS 427/493
TXT Application of plural diverse energy sources to polymerize (e.g.,
    electromagnetic wave plus resistance heat, ultraviolet wave plus infrared
    wave, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 487 wherein more than one type of energy source is
    utilized to influence the polymerization of the applied coating.

    (1)     Note.  The multiple energy applications may be used simultaneously
    or sequentially.

    (2)     Note.  The following is an example of the type of claimed subject
    matter which is proper for this subclass.

    a.      A claim drawn to a process of polymerizing a coating by employing
    (1) a form of radiation and  (2) resistance heat or (1) ultraviolet
    radiation and (2) infrared radiation.


CLS 427/494
TXT Gloss control (e.g., light scattering, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 487 wherein the degree of specular reflection
    (e.g., high, medium, or low gloss, etc.) of the coating is influenced.


CLS 427/495
TXT Polymerization involving the control of oxygen containing gas as an
    inhibitor (e.g., air, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 487 wherein means are provided to (1) alter or
    regulate the quantity of oxygen containing gas present including exclusion
    thereof or (2) purposely inhibit the polymerization step by the presence of
    oxygen containing gas.

    (1)     Note.  Processes utilizing a wax layer or some other barrier to
    prevent or control the oxygen containing gas from entering the
    polymerization area are properly classified here.


CLS 427/496
TXT High energy electromagnetic radiation or high energy particles utilized
    (e.g., gamma rays, X-rays, atomic particles, i.e., alpha rays, beta rays,
    electrons, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 487 wherein the energy used to effect the
    polymerization of the coating is high energy electromagnetic radiation or
    high energy particles.

    (1)     Note.  The term "high energy electromagnetic radiation or high
    energy particles", as employed here and in indented subclasses includes;
    e.g., X-rays, gamma rays, atomic particles, i.e., alpha particles, beta
    particles, and high energy electrons.  Electromagnetic wave energy measured
    below wavelengths of 100 Angstroms (10 to the minus 8 meters) will be
    considered "high energy electromagnetic radiation or high energy particle."
    This subject matter is often referred to as "high energy ionizing
    radiation."

    a.      gamma ray       .000 --- 1.40 A

    b.      X-ray                0.1  --- 100 A

    c.      atomic particle alpha ray; beta ray

    d.      high energy electrons accelerated

            This list is not intended to be exhaustive and is not limited to
    the above examples.


CLS 427/497
TXT Vapor deposition utilized:

    Processes under subclass 496 wherein a coating material is deposited as a
    gas, mist, smoke, or vapor.


CLS 427/498
TXT Immersion, partial immersion, spraying, or spin coating utilized (e.g.,
    dipping, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 496 wherein the article or substrate to be coated
    is (1) dipped or submerged, either partially or wholly, in the coating
    material, (2) positioned to have the coating material projected by
    mechanical means thereon or (3) conveyed about an axis of rotation, thus
    moving it in an arc or circle which spreads the coating material by
    centrifugal force.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, for processes wherein reactive coating occurs on
    the substrate and not externally thereof.  Class 427 provides for coating a
    metal substrate with a resin composition in an immersion bath, wherein
    metal ions leaching from the metal substrate enter the immersion medium and
    react or complex externally of the metal substrate to deposit a coating
    containing an element from the metal substrate.


CLS 427/499
TXT Natural cellulose substrate:

    Processes under subclass 498 wherein the coated article, base, or substrate
    is composed of natural cellulose, e.g., wood or cellulosic fibers.

    (1)     Note.  Paper is not considered proper for this subclass, as paper
    is a chemically treated unnatural product.


CLS 427/500
TXT Coating material includes colorant or pigment:

    Processes under subclass 496 wherein the applied coating material includes
    any dye, ink, paint, or coloring matter that inputs or modifies color.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    399,    Electrophotography, subclass 54 for color control developing,
    subclasses 168+ for charging, and subclasses 223+ for plural color
    developing.


CLS 427/501
TXT Textile, fiber, or wire coated or impregnated:

    Processes under subclass 496 wherein the coated or impregnated substrate is
    (1) formed by a textile operation, (2) a solid or stranded group of
    slender, flexible rodlike materials of indefinite length or (3) of
    relatively short, slender, flexible elements of finite length.


CLS 427/502
TXT Magnetic recording medium formed:

    Processes under subclass 496 which result in a device or material being
    produced which is used to store or record information by a magnetic means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500,    for processes forming magnetic recording media utilizing colorant
    or pigment.

    548,    for processes forming magnetic recording media which utilize
    magnetic field or force to treat a substrate prior to coating or to treat a
    previously coated substrate.

    599,    for processes forming magnetic recording media which utilize
    magnetic field or force for the direct application of the coating material.


CLS 427/503
TXT Organosilicon containing coating material:

    Processes under subclass 496 wherein the applied coating composition
    includes an organic silicon compound.

    (1)     Note.  Attention is directed to the definition of Class 260,
    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for the distinction between the term
    "organic" and "inorganic."


CLS 427/504
TXT Nonuniform or patterned coating (e.g., mask, printing, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 496 wherein the coating (1) is applied only to
    selected portions of a base (2) is applied in such a manner as to produce a
    coating of uneven, discontinuous, or nonuniform thickness, or (3) varies
    from area to area as to physical or chemical properties.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256+,   for nonuniform or patterned coating processes without the use of
    electrical, magnetic, electromagnetic, or wave energy.

    448,    for nonuniform or patterned spray coating processes utilizing flame
    or plasma heat.

    466,    for nonuniform or patterned coating processes utilizing
    electrostatic charge, field, or force.

    500,    for nonuniform or patterned coating processes utilizing colorant or
    pigment.

    510,    for processes to polymerize an applied nonuniform or patterned
    coating utilizing low energy electromagnetic radiation.

    526,    for nonuniform or patterned coating processes utilizing ion plating
    or ion implantation.

    552,    for nonuniform or patterned coating processes involving pretreating
    a substrate or post-treating a coated substrate utilizing high energy
    electromagnetic radiation or high energy particles.

    555,    for nonuniform or patterned coating processes utilizing laser
    radiation in a thermal pretreatment of a substrate or a thermal
    post-treatment of a coated substrate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 31+ for coating processes involving electric or
    magnetic imagery.


CLS 427/505
TXT Coating is adhesive or intended to be made adhesive (e.g., release sheet or
    coating, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 496 which result in an applied coating having
    adhesive properties for adhering a base to another surface.

    (1)     Note.  The coating material may become adhesive when it is
    contacted by high energy electromagnetic radiation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    503,    for adhesive coating compositions containing organosilicon.


CLS 427/506
TXT Benzene ring or nitrogen containing coating material:

    Processes under subclass 496 wherein the applied coating material contains
    at least one benzene ring or nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  The term "benzene ring" includes in all cases except where
    there are explicit limitations to the contrary, substituted benzene rings,
    including substitution in the form of an additional fused or bridged ring
    or ring system.


CLS 427/507
TXT Styrene or carboxamide group containing coating material (e.g., urea,
    urethane, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 506 wherein the applied coating material contains
    styrene or carboxamide group.


CLS 427/508
TXT Low energy electromagnetic radiation utilized (e.g., UV, visible, IR,
    microwave, radio wave, actinic, laser, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 487 wherein the energy used to effect the
    polymerization of the applied coating is low energy electromagnetic
    radiation.

    (1)     Note.  The term "low energy electromagnetic radiation" as employed
    here and indented subclasses includes, e.g., ultraviolet, infrared, visible
    light, actinic, microwave, and radio waves.  Electromagnetic wave energy
    measured above wavelengths of 100 Angstroms (10 to the minus 8 meters) will
    be considered low energy electromagnetic radiation.

    a.      ultraviolet    101 --- 4000 A

    b.      actinic light   includes both UV & visible

    c.      visible           4000 A --7000 A

    d.      infrared       above 7000 A

    e.      microwave      1mm --- 1m (includes 2.45 GHz)

    f.      radio wave13.56 MHz is permitted frequency

    g.      laser

            This list is not intended to be exhaustive and is not limited to
    the above examples.


CLS 427/509
TXT Vapor deposition utilized:

    Processes under subclass 508 wherein the coating material is deposited as a
    gas, mist, smoke, or vapor.


CLS 427/510
TXT Nonuniform or patterned coating (e.g., mask, printing, textured, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 508 wherein the coating (1) is applied only to
    selected portions of a base (2) is applied in such a manner as to produce a
    coating of uneven, discontinuous, or nonuniform thickness or (3) varies
    from area to area as to physical or chemical properties.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256+,   for nonuniform or patterned coating processes without the use of
    electrical, magnetic, electromagnetic, or wave energy.

    448,    for nonuniform or patterned spray coating processes utilizing flame
    or plasma heat.

    466,    for nonuniform or patterned coating processes utilizing
    electrostatic charge, field, or force.

    504,    for processes to polymerize an applied nonuniform or patterned
    coating utilizing high energy electromagnetic radiation or high energy
    particles.

    526,    for nonuniform or patterned coating processes utilizing ion plating
    or ion implantation.

    552,    for nonuniform or patterned coating processes involving pretreating
    a substrate or post-treating a coated substrate utilizing high energy
    ionizing radiation.

    555,    for nonuniform or patterned coating processes utilizing laser
    radiation in a thermal pretreatment of a substrate or a thermal
    post-treatment of a coated substrate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 31+ for coating processes involving electric or
    magnetic imagery.


CLS 427/511
TXT Printing ink utilized:

    Processes under subclass 510 wherein a coating composition applied to a
    substrate, specially designed for use as ink, to be used for producing
    characters or designs by means of writing, printing, or marking is cured by
    using low energy electromagnetic radiation.

    (1)     Note.  This class includes processes wherein printing ink is used
    to print patterns as in circuit designs or floor plans.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 445+ for textile printing pastes.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass .5 for infusion packages or
    receptacles containing ink.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 209+ for the
    combination of ball-point pen and ink particularly suitable for such an
    implement. (e.g., viscous ink).

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Class 523, subclass 160 for a composition containing a
    synthetic resin or natural rubber having utility as an ink for glass or for
    ceramic substrates, subclass 161 for a ball-point pen ink or a typewriter
    ink composition or to processes of preparing said composition.


CLS 427/512
TXT Immersion, partial immersion, spraying, or spin coating utilized (e.g.,
    dipping, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 508 wherein the article or substrate to be coated
    is (1) submerged or dipped, either partially or wholly, in the coating
    material (2) positioned to have the coating material projected by
    mechanical force thereon or (3) conveyed about an axis of rotation, which
    axis is external of the article or substrate, thus moving in an arc or
    circle which spreads coating material by centrifugal force.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, for processes wherein reactive coating occurs on
    the substrate and not externally thereof.  Class 427 provides for coating a
    metal substrate with a resin composition in an immersion bath, wherein
    metal ions leaching from the metal substrate enter the immersion medium and
    react or complex externally of the metal substrate to deposit a coating
    containing an element from the metal substrate.


CLS 427/513
TXT Textile or fiber coated or impregnated:

    Processes under subclass 508 wherein the coated or impregnated base is (1)
    formed by a textile operation, (2) a solid or stranded group of slender,
    flexible rodlike materials of indefinite length or (3) of relatively short,
    slender, flexible elements of finite length.


CLS 427/514
TXT Coating material includes colorant or pigment:

    Processes under subclass 508 wherein the applied coating material includes
    any dye, ink, paint, or coloring matter that inputs or modifies color.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    510,    for processes of applying nonuniform or patterned coating utilizing
    colorant or pigment.


CLS 427/515
TXT Organosilicon containing coating material:

    Processes under subclass 508 wherein the coating composition contains an
    organic silicon compound.

    (1)     Note.  Attention is directed to the definition of Class 260,
    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for the distinction between the term
    "organic" and "inorganic."


CLS 427/516
TXT Coating is adhesive or is intended to be made adhesive (e.g., release sheet
    or coating, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 508 which result in an applied coating having
    adhesive properties for adhering a substrate to another surface.

    (1)     Note.  The applied coating material may become adhesive when it is
    contacted by low energy electromagnetic radiation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    515,    for adhesive coating compositions containing organosilicon.


CLS 427/517
TXT Coating includes specified rate affecting material:

    Processes under subclass 508 wherein the applied coating composition
    includes a stipulated material which affects the rate of the polymerization.

    (1)     Note.  A rate-affecting material is a material which either affects
    the rate of reaction, permits reduced amounts of wave energy, increases or
    decreases the degree of polymerization, cure, cross-linking, grafting, or
    inhibits reaction. Included are photo initiators, photosensitizers,
    activators, accelerators, inhibitors, initiators, retarders, sensitizing
    auxiliaries, generators, or curing catalysts.

    (2)     Note.  The mere mention or recitation of use of an accelerator or
    rate - affecting material with no specific type designated is not proper
    for this and indented subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  Search subclass 514 for subject matter containing colorant
    or pigment.


CLS 427/518
TXT Inorganic substrate:

    Processes under subclass 517 wherein the substrate is composed of inorganic
    material.

    (1)     Note.  Attention is directed to the definition of Class 260,
    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for the distinction between the term
    "organic" and "inorganic."


CLS 427/519
TXT Keto or aldehyde containing group is part of the rate affecting coating
    material (e.g., benzoin, benzophenone, acetaldehyde, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 517 wherein a keto or aldehyde group is part of
    the rate affecting coating material.

    (1)     Note.  The following is a list of some keto or aldehyde group
    containing compounds that are found in this subclass.


    a.      benzophenone

    b.      acetaldehyde

    c.      benzoin isobutyl

    d.      camphor quinone

    e.      methyl isoamyl ketone

            This list is not intended to be exhaustive and is not limited to
    the above examples.


CLS 427/520
TXT Benzene ring or nitrogen containing coating material:

    Processes under subclass 508 wherein the applied coating material contains
    at least one benzene ring or nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  The term "benzene ring" includes in all cases except where
    there are explicit limitations to the contrary, substituted benzene rings,
    including substitution in the form of an additional fused or bridged ring
    or ring systems.


CLS 427/521
TXT Radiation as heat source (e.g., radiant energy,  etc.):

    Processes under subclass 508 wherein the heat energy utilized for
    polymerization of the applied coating is the result of or is assisted by
    radiation.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass excludes processes wherein infrared or radiant
    heat is used to vaporize the coating material in a vapor deposition process.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 31+ for imaging using radiant energy.


CLS 427/522
TXT Resistance or induction heat-initiated polymerization:

    Processes under subclass 487 wherein the polymerization step involving the
    applied coating is effected by using the applied coating or the substrate
    as the electrical energy conductor as in resistance or inductance heating,
    such that a current flows there through.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include processes wherein the
    electric current is passed through a heating filament, coil, susceptor,
    etc., which is not the substrate.

    (2)     Note.  Induction heating involves subjecting a conductive body to a
    variable electromagnetic field, usually at a frequency lower than that used
    for dielectric heating. Internal resistance in the conductive body then
    causes the conductive body to heat up.

    (3)     Note.  Processes wherein an electrical discharge is caused to pass
    through a coated substrate to initiate polymerization are found here and
    indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    540,    wherein an arc or electrical discharge is produced in resistance
    heating to pretreat a substrate or post-treat a coated substrate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 73.11, 73.21, and 76.1+ for metal
    coating buildup with the use of resistance heating.  Electric welding, has
    to have two preforms being joined, wherein coating is ancillary to the
    joining of the preforms.


CLS 427/523
TXT Ion plating or implantation:

    Processes under subclass 457 wherein (1) evaporating a coating material in
    the presence of an electrical discharge (arc, beam, etc.) in an energetic
    gaseous medium, which forms or is associated with a cathode polarized by a
    high negative voltage relative to the source of the coating material, and
    depositing the coating material onto the substrate, with simultaneous
    bombardment by ions which cause momentum transfer (sputtering) on the
    substrate to occur or (2) coating material is introduced into or penetrates
    the near-surface region of a substrate by directing an accelerated beam or
    stream of energetic (charged) ions including the coating material, toward
    the substrate.

    (1)     Note.  The term "ion plating" is applied to a combination of
    process  steps that include:

    (a)     sputtering of the surface of a substrate due to momentum transfer,
    and

    (b)     simultaneously or subsequentially depositing a coating on the
    substrate from a flux of ionic coating material (i.e., usually considered
    to be a high energy plasma with a small flux of ions and a much larger
    number of energetic neutrals).

    (2)     Note.  Ion implantation of the near surface region of a substrate
    to create a distinguishable layer differing in composition from the
    substrate will be proper for this Class 427, regardless of whether the
    implantation of this layer is limited to the microstructure or not.

    (3)     Note.  Ion plating, wherein the target material and the substrate
    are one and the same is proper for this subclass and indented subclasses.

    (4)     Note.  Processes utilizing ion bombardment or ion treating, that
    specifies neither implanting, etching, plating, etc., but merely recites
    some change as in the materials characteristic properties will be
    classified in this and indented subclasses with the proper crosses in
    Classes 156 or 204 as needed; however processes utilizing ion bombardment
    or ion treatment merely to treat a substrate surface, either before or
    after coating are found below, in this class, in the pretreatment and
    post-treatment area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    532+,   for pretreatment of a substrate or post-treatment of a coated
    substrate utilizing ion bombardment or ion treating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 715+ for ion plating apparatus
    utilizing means other than sputtering for providing the material to be
    deposited onto the substrate.

    148,    Metal Treatment, for microstructural change throughout a metal
    substrate involving the use of ion implantation to effect this change.
    Placement of the document in this class (427) is proper only when ion
    implantation is used to coat with incidental surface impregnation.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, for coating, forming, or
    etching by sputtering.  Class 427 is not proper for sputter etching, per
    se, which subject matter is classified in Class 204, however the
    combination of a 427 coating step combined with a 204 etching operation
    solely to perfect the coating is proper for this class (427).  In Class 204
    see subclass 192.11 for ion beam sputter deposition, subclass 192.3 for
    sputter etching, subclass 192.34 for ion beam sputter etching, and subclass
    192.12 for glow discharge sputter deposition (e.g., Cathode sputtering,
    etc.); see subclass 298.02 for apparatus including target means for
    providing coating material to be deposited onto the substrate by sputtering
    said target which additionally includes means for ionizing at least a
    portion of the coating material and applying a potential to the substrate
    whereby the substrate is simultaneously subjected to electrostatically
    aided deposition and sputter etching due to ionic bombardment.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 492.1+ for methods of irradiation, per
    se, of a material with ions.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, for processes
    utilizing ion implantation in the manufacture of semiconductor devices,
    particularly to form a PN junction.


CLS 427/524
TXT With simultaneous sputter etching of substrate:

    Processes under subclass 523 wherein the sputter etching of the substrate
    is executed at the same time the coating is being applied to the substrate,
    which etching serves only to perfect the coating.

    (1)     Note.  This class (427) is not proper for sputter etching, per se,
    which subject matter is classified in Class 204, however the combination of
    a 427 coating step combined with a 204 etching operation solely to perfect
    the coating is proper for this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  In a Class 204 sputter etching process, the coating material
    is the target.


CLS 427/525
TXT Organic material present in substrate, plating, or implanted layer:

    Processes under subclass 523 wherein (1) the plating or implanted material
    contains organic matter or (2) the substrate which is plated or implanted
    contains organic matter.

    (1)     Note.  Attention is directed to the definition of Class 260,
    Chemistry of  Carbon Compounds, for the distinction between the terms
    "organic" and "inorganic."


CLS 427/526
TXT Nonuniform or patterned ion plating or ion implanting (e.g. mask, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 523 wherein the ion plating or ion implanting (1)
    is applied only to selected portions of a substrate (2) is applied in such
    a manner as to produce a coating of uneven, discontinuous, or nonuniform
    thickness or (3) varies from area to area as to physical or chemical
    properties.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256+,   for nonuniform or patterned coating processes without the use of
    electrical, magnetic, electromagnetic, or wave energy.

    448,    for nonuniform or patterned spray coating processes utilizing flame
    or plasma heat.

    466,    for nonuniform or patterned coating processes utilizing
    electrostatic charge, field or force.

    504,    for processes to polymerize an applied nonuniform coating utilizing
    high energy electromagnetic radiation or high energy particles.

    510,    for processes to polymerize an applied nonuniform coating utilizing
    low energy electromagnetic radiation.

    552,    for nonuniform or patterned processes involving pretreating a
    substrate or post-treating a coated substrate utilizing high energy
    electromagnetic radiation or high energy particles.

    555,    for nonuniform or patterned coating processes utilizing laser
    radiation in a thermal pretreatment of a substrate or a thermal
    post-treatment of a coated substrate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 31+ for coating processes involving electric or
    magnetic imagery.


CLS 427/527
TXT Silicon present in substrate, plating, or implanted layer:

    Processes under subclass 523, wherein (1) the plating or implanted material
    contains silicon or (2) the substrate which is plated or implanted contains
    silicon.


CLS 427/528
TXT Metal or metal alloy substrate:

    Processes under subclass 523 wherein the substrate (base or work-piece)
    which is plated or implanted is a pure metal or metal alloy.


CLS 427/529
TXT Inorganic oxide containing plating or implanted material:

    Processes under subclass 523 wherein the plating material or the resulting
    implanted material contains inorganic oxide.

    (1)     Note.  Attention is directed to the definition of Class 260,
    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for the distinction between the terms
    "organic" and "inorganic".


CLS 427/530
TXT Inorganic metal compound present in plating or implanted material (e.g.,
    nitrides, carbides, borides, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 523 wherein the plating or the resulting implanted
    material contains inorganic metal compounds.

    (1)     Note.  Coating materials containing inorganic metal nitrides,
    carbides, and borides are some of the metal compounds found in this
    subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Processes wherein the implanting material may be a mixture
    of metals, nitrogen, carbon, or boron which may react in or on a base to
    form a distinct metal nitride, carbide, or boride layer are found here.

    (3)     Note.  Attention is directed to the definition of Class 260,
    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for the distinction between the terms
    "organic" and "inorganic."


CLS 427/531
TXT Metal or metal alloy as plating or implanted material:

    Processes under subclass 523 wherein the plating or implanting material is
    pure metal or metal alloy.


CLS 427/532
TXT Pretreatment of substrate or post-treatment of coated substrate:

    Processes under subclass 457 wherein (1) prior to a coating a substrate is
    chemically or physically modified or (2) after a coating is applied there
    is modification of the chemical or physical characteristics of the coated
    substrate utilizing electrical, magnetic, electromagnetic, or wave energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, for processes involving coating glass plus
    subsequent treatment thereof (e.g., including patents claiming the step of
    coating a glass substrate and reacting the coating with a constituent of
    the glass substrate).


CLS 427/533
TXT Ionized gas utilized (e.g., electrically powered source, corona discharge,
    plasma, glow discharge, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 532 wherein an energetic (charged) gaseous medium
    is utilized in the pretreatment of a substrate or the post-treatment of a
    substrate.

    (1)     Note.  Alpha rays (particles) are identical to the helium atom, and
    for classification purposes will not be considered as an ionized gas since,
    they are not in a naturally occurring ionization state under any normal
    earth conditions, except in nuclear processes.


CLS 427/534
TXT Cleaning or removing part of substrate (e.g., etching with plasma, glow
    discharge, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 533 wherein, prior to the coating, etching
    influenced by electrical, magnetic, electromagnetic, or wave energy, is
    utilized  to clean or remove part of the substrate.

    (1)     Note.  Plasma, glow discharge, and electron beam etching are some
    of the processes used to clean that are found here.

    (2)     Note.  In processes involving plural coating steps wherein
    electrical, magnetic, electromagnetic, or wave energy etching is used to
    clean a previously deposited coating with the intent to perfect a
    subsequent deposited coating will be considered proper for this class (427).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, especially subclasses 63+ for
    posttreatment etching utilizing high energy techniques.  Pretreatment
    etching of a substrate utilizing electric, electromagnetic, magnetic, or
    wave energy is proper for Class 427.


CLS 427/535
TXT Plasma (e.g., cold plasma, corona, glow discharge, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 533 wherein an ionized gas used is a plasma,
    having a concentration of negatively and positively charged carriers which
    are approximately equal.

    (1)     Note.  A plasma consists of a wholly or partially ionized gas
    composed of ions, electrons, and neutral particles.


CLS 427/536
TXT Organic substrate:

    Processes under subclass 535 wherein the composition of the base is organic.

    (1)     Note.  Attention is directed to the definition of Class 260,
    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for the distinction between the term
    "organic" and "inorganic."


CLS 427/537
TXT Metal containing coating:

    Processes under subclass 536 wherein the coating material contains a pure
    metal or metal alloy.


CLS 427/538
TXT Textile or fiber coated or impregnated:

    Processes under subclass 536 wherein the coated or impregnated substrate is
    (1) formed by a textile operation or (2) in the form of relatively short,
    slender, flexible elements of finite length (3) a solid or stranded group
    of slender, flexible rodlike material of indefinite length.


CLS 427/539
TXT Oxygen containing atmosphere:

    Processes under subclass 535 wherein plasma treatment of the base is
    conducted in a gaseous surrounding or environment which includes oxygen.


CLS 427/540
TXT Arc or electrical discharge:

    Processes under subclass 532 wherein a luminous discharge of electricity,
    through a gas or vapor is applied directly to the substrate, which may be
    in the form of an electrode.

    (1)     Note.  The arc discharge is a type of electrical conduction in
    gases characterized by high current density and low potential drop.  It is
    closely related to the glow discharge, but has a much lower potential drop
    in the cathode region, as well as a greater current density.  No sustained
    plasma is formed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    446,    for the use of an arc to plasma spray.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 73.11, 73.21, and 76.14 for coating
    operations that involve a build-up of a metal coating on a metal workpiece
    and wherein an arc between an electrode and the work is utilized.


CLS 427/541
TXT Drying:

    Processes under subclass 532 wherein the electrical, magnetic,
    electromagnetic or wave energy is used to effect the extraction or the
    elimination of moisture or liquids from the substrate or coating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 266+, 418,
    419+, and 519+ for processes utilizing radiant energy to dry, per se.
    Combinations of coating processes and drying operations are proper however
    for Class 427.


CLS 427/542
TXT Infrared or radiant heating:

    Processes under subclass 541 wherein the drying is directly influenced by
    electromagnetic waves longer than those of visible light and shorter than
    those of radio waves or by infrared radiation; e.g., black body radiation,
    from a body not hot enough to emit visible radiation.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for coating processes utilizing
    radiant heat only when "radiant heat" is specifically set forth.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass excludes processes wherein the infrared energy
    or radiant heat is utilized to vaporize the coating material in a vapor
    deposition process.

    (3)     Note.  Radiant rays pass through gases without warming them
    appreciably, but the rays increase the sensible temperature of a solid or
    liquid upon which they impinge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248.1,  for coating processes utilizing vaporized coating materials in
    vapor deposition processes.


CLS 427/543
TXT Induction or dielectric heating:

    Processes under subclass 532 which utilize induction or dielectric heating
    in treating a substrate before it is coated or treating a coated substrate.

    (1)     Note.  Induction heating involves subjecting a conductive body to a
    variable electromagnetic field, usually at a frequency lower than that used
    for dielectric heating.  Internal resistance in the conductive body then
    cause the conductive body to heat up

    (2)     Note.  Dielectric heating involves the method of raising the
    temperature of a nominally insulating material by sandwiching it between
    two plates to which an rf voltage is applied.  The material acts as a
    dielectric and its internal resistance causes it to heat up.


CLS 427/544
TXT Organic coating containing material:

    Processes under subclass 543 wherein a post-treated substrate has organic
    material in its coating composition.

    (1)     Note.  Attention is directed to the definition of Class 260,
    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for the distinction between the term
    "organic" and "inorganic."


CLS 427/545
TXT Resistance heating:

    Processes under subclass 532 wherein an electrical current is passed
    through a substrate before it is coated or an electrical current is passed
    through a coated substrate to produce heat by means of internal resistance.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include processes wherein the
    electric current is passed through a heating filament, coil, susceptor,
    etc., which is not the substrate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    540,    wherein an arc or electrical discharge is produced in resistance
    heating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 73.11, 73.21, and 76.1+ for metal
    coating buildup with the use of resistance heating. Electric welding has to
    have two preforms being joined, wherein coating is ancillary to the joining
    of the preforms.


CLS 427/546
TXT Metal or metal alloy containing coating:

    Processes under subclass 545 wherein the coating material contains a pure
    metal or metal alloy.


CLS 427/547
TXT Magnetic field or force utilized:

    Processes under subclass 532 wherein a magnetic field or force is used to
    treat a substrate before it is coated or to treat a coated substrate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    543,    for the use of a magnetic field or force to produce induction
    heating.


CLS 427/548
TXT Magnetic recording medium or device formed:

    Processes under subclass 547 wherein a device or tape is produced to store
    information by a magnetic means.

    (1)     Note.  For this and indented subclasses it is understood that
    magnetic recording media usually contain magnetizable particles, hence need
    not be subsequently crossed to the pertaining subclass of equal or lesser
    indentation below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128,    for methods of forming magnetic devices in general, not provided
    for above.

    502,    for magnetic recording medium formed using high energy ionizing
    radiation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Class 523, subclass 181 for a composition for magnetic
    purposes, but which is devoid of magnetic material or to processes or
    preparing said compositions.


CLS 427/549
TXT Running length substrate:

    Processes under subclass 548 wherein the magnetic medium to be coated
    travels longitudinally of itself, the length of which is continuous or
    uninterrupted.


CLS 427/550
TXT Magnetizable powder, flakes, or particles utilized:

    Processes under subclass 547 wherein the coating material containing
    powder, flakes, or particles are influenced by the magnetic field or force
    during the pretreatment of a substrate or the post-treatment of a coated
    substrate.


CLS 427/551
TXT High energy electromagnetic radiation or high energy particles utilized
    (e.g., gamma ray, X-ray, atomic particle, i.e., alpha ray, beta ray, high
    energy electron, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 532 wherein the substrate prior to coating or the
    coated substrate is treated with high energy electromagnetic radiation or
    high energy particles.

    (1)     Note.  The term "high energy electromagnetic radiation or high
    energy particles," as employed here and in indented subclasses includes;
    e.g., X-rays, gamma rays, atomic particles; i.e., alpha particles, beta
    particles, and high energy electrons. Electromagnetic wave energy measured
    below wavelengths of 100 Angstroms (10 to the minus 8 meters) will be
    considered "high energy electromagnetic radiation or high energy particle."
    This subject matter is often referred to as "high energy ionizing
    radiation."


    a.      gamma ray      .000 --- 1.40 A

    b.      X-ray               0.1  --- 100 A

    c.      atomic particle alpha ray; beta ray

    d.      high energy electrons accelerated

            This list is not intended to be exhaustive and is not limited to
    the above examples.

    (2)     Note.  Alpha rays are helium, and for classification purposes will
    not be considered as an ionized gas since, except in nuclear processes,
    they are not a naturally occurring ionization state under any normal earth
    conditions.


CLS 427/552
TXT Nonuniform or patterned coating:

    Processes under subclass 551 wherein the coating utilized in the
    pretreatment of a substrate or the post-treatment of a coated substrate (1)
    is applied only to selected portions of a substrate, (2) is applied in such
    a manner as to produce a coating of uneven, discontinuous, or nonuniform
    thickness or (3) varies from area to area as to physical or chemical
    properties.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256+,   for nonuniform or patterned coating processes without the use of
    electrical, magnetic, electromagnetic, or wave energy.

    448,    nonuniform or patterned spray coating processes utilizing flame or
    plasma heat.

    466,    for nonuniform or patterned coating processes utilizing
    electrostatic charge, field, or force.

    504,    for processes to polymerize an applied nonuniform or patterned
    coating utilizing high energy electromagnetic radiation or high energy
    particles.

    510,    for processes to polymerize an applied nonuniform or patterned
    coating utilizing low energy electromagnetic radiation.

    526,    for nonuniform or patterned coating processes utilizing ion plating
    or implantation.

    555,    for nonuniform or patterned coating processes utilizing laser
    radiation in a thermal pretreatment or a thermal post-treatment of a coated
    substrate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 31+ for coating processes involving electric or
    magnetic imagery.


CLS 427/553
TXT Low energy electromagnetic radiation (e.g., microwave, radio wave, IR, UV,
    visible, actinic, laser, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 532 wherein the substrate prior to coating or the
    coated substrate is treated with low energy electromagnetic radiation.

    (1)     Note.  The term "low energy electromagnetic radiation" as employed
    here and indented subclasses includes, e.g., ultraviolet, infrared, visible
    light, actinic, microwave, and radio waves.  Electromagnetic wave energy
    measured above wavelengths of 100 Angstroms(10 to the minus 8 meters) will
    be considered low energy electromagnetic radiation.

    a.      ultraviolet101 --- 4000 A

    b.      actinic light includes both UV & visible

    c.      visible4000 A --7000 A

    d.      infrared above 7000 A

    e.      microwave 1mm --- 1m (includes 2.45 GHz)

    f.      radio wave 13.56 MHz is permitted frequency

    g.      laser

            This list is not intended to be exhaustive and is not limited to
    the above examples.


CLS 427/554
TXT Laser:

    Processes under subclass 553 wherein a narrow beam of coherent light (light
    amplification by simulated emissions of radiation) is utilized to treat the
    substrate or coated substrate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 121.11+ for processes utilizing
    electric heat energy, per se, wherein the heat source is an electron beam,
    plasma, arc, laser, etc.  Documents should be placed in Class 427 as
    originals if a coating operation is claimed in combination with an electric
    heating step to treat a substrate before or after coating.


CLS 427/555
TXT Nonuniform or patterned coating:

    Processes under subclass 554 wherein the coating utilized in the
    pretreatment of a substrate or the post-treatment of a coated substrate (1)
    is applied only to selected portions of a base, (2) is applied in such a
    manner as to produce a coating of uneven, discontinuous, or nonuniform
    thickness or (3) varies from area to area as to physical or chemical
    properties.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256+,   for nonuniform or patterned coating processes without the use of
    electrical, magnetic, electromagnetic, or wave energy.

    448,    nonuniform or patterned spray coating processes utilizing flame or
    plasma heat.

    466,    for nonuniform or patterned coating processes utilizing
    electrostatic charge, field, or force.

    504,    for processes to polymerize an applied nonuniform or patterned
    plasma coating utilizing high energy electromagnetic radiation or high
    energy particles.

    510,    for processes to polymerize an applied nonuniform or patterned
    coating utilizing low energy electromagnetic radiation.

    526,    for nonuniform or patterned coating processes utilizing ion plating
    or implantation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 31+ for coating  processes involving radiation imagery.


CLS 427/556
TXT Metal or metal alloy substrate:

    Processes under subclass 555 wherein the nonuniform coating is applied to a
    pure metal or metal alloy substrate.


CLS 427/557
TXT Thermal processes (e.g., radiant heat, infrared, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 553 wherein the energy utilized to treat a
    substrate prior to coating or a coated substrate is heat producing wave
    energy.


CLS 427/558
TXT Ultraviolet light:

    Processes under subclass 557 wherein the wave energy utilized to produce
    the heat which treats the substrate or the coated substrate is ultraviolet
    light.


CLS 427/559
TXT Fusing, curing, or annealing (e.g., ceramics, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 557 wherein wave energy is utilized to produce
    heat which will fuse, cure, or anneal the coating in a post-treatment
    process.

    (1)     Note.  Annealing of metals is not classified here. Search the
    appropriate metal working and metal treating classes; e.g., Classes 29, 72,
    148, 164, 219, 228, 445, etc.


CLS 427/560
TXT Sonic or ultrasonic (e.g., cleaning or removing material from substrate,
    etc.):

    Processes under subclass 532 wherein sonic or ultrasonic energy is utilized
    to pretreat a substrate or to post-treat a coated substrate.

    (1)     Note.  Ultrasonic has a frequency above sonic; i.e., frequencies
    above 16,000 hertz and below radio waves.


CLS 427/561
TXT Pretreatment of coating supply or source outside of primary deposition zone
    or off site:

    Processes under subclass 457 wherein a coating material supply which is
    offsite or outside of the primary deposition region, zone, or chamber is
    treated with electrical, magnetic, electromagnetic, or wave energy and
    subsequently directed or reflected to the substrate to which it is applied.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are processes of producing a vapor for use
    in vapor deposition processes.

    (2)     Note.  Processes utilizing plural chambers, shutters, shields, or
    noncontiguous masks and some guides or separators are used to direct the
    pretreated coating supply found in this subclass.


CLS 427/562
TXT Electric discharge (e.g., corona, glow discharge, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 561 wherein an electric discharge is used to treat
    the coating material before it is applied.

    (1)     Note.  The arc discharge is a type of electrical conduction in
    gases characterized by high current density and low potential drop.  It is
    closely related to the glow discharge, but has a much lower potential drop
    in the cathode region, as well as a greater current density.


CLS 427/563
TXT Silicon containing coating material:

    Processes under subclass 562 wherein coating material applied to the
    substrate contains silicon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, particularly
    subclasses 788+ and 792+ for deposition of silicon oxide or silicon
    nitride, respectively, on a semiconductor substrate utilizing
    electromagnetic or wave energy.


CLS 427/564
TXT Metal, metal alloy, or metal oxide containing coating material:

    Processes under 562 wherein the coating material supply contains a pure
    metal, metal alloy, or metal oxide.


CLS 427/565
TXT Sonic or ultrasonic (e.g., vibratory energy, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 561 wherein sonic or ultrasonic wave energy is
    used to cause a continuously reversing change in the magnitude of waves
    (vibrations) to treat the coating material supply.


CLS 427/566
TXT Electron irradiation (e.g., e-beam evaporation, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 561 wherein the direct application of electrons is
    employed to treat the coating material supply.


CLS 427/567
TXT Silicon or metal oxide coating (e.g., glass, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 566 wherein the coating material contains metal
    oxide or silicon.


CLS 427/568
TXT Silicon containing coating supply or source:

    Processes under subclass 561 wherein the coating supply or source contains
    silicon.


CLS 427/569
TXT Plasma (e.g., corona, glow discharge, cold plasma, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 457 wherein a wholly or partially ionized gas,
    which has an activating source, is responsible for the deposition of the
    coating material.

    (1)     Note.  A plasma consists of a wholly or partially ionized gas
    composed of ions, electrons, and neutral particles.  The concentration of
    negatively and positively charged carriers are approximately equal.

    (2)     Note.  Processes utilizing corona, glow discharge, and cold plasma
    are found here, when utilized to cause disassociation or ionization of the
    vaporous reactants allowing a coating material (reaction product) to
    deposit on a substrate.

    (3)     Note.  In a cold plasma the temperature of the electrons is high
    wherein the temperature of the ions is relatively low, possibly room
    temperature.


CLS 427/570
TXT Utilizing plasma with other nonionizing energy sources:

    Processes under subclass 569 which utilize (1) a plasma and (2) a secondary
    energy source at any stage in the plasma coating process for any reason,
    other than initiating or generating the plasma.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes subject matter with dual activation
    (reaction energized sites) wherein one of the energy sources must be plasma
    (e.g., plasma plus infrared heat energy, etc.).

    (2)     Note.  Lacking an indication to the contrary, it will be assumed
    that a disclosed energy source is the plasma initiating source, unless it
    is specified that the energy source is utilized for a purpose other than
    initiating the plasma.


CLS 427/571
TXT With magnetic enhancement:

    Processes under subclass 570 wherein a plasma utilized having an activating
    energy source is confined or shaped by a magnetic field or force.


CLS 427/572
TXT Light as energy source:

    Processes under subclass 570 wherein the secondary energy used in
    conjunction with a plasma is electromagnetic wave energy.


CLS 427/573
TXT With heated substrate:

    Processes under subclass 570 wherein a substrate is heated using electrical
    or electromagnetic wave energy, including indirect heat as in the form of a
    susceptor.


CLS 427/574
TXT Silicon containing coating:

    Processes under subclass 570 wherein the coating material contains silicon.


CLS 427/575
TXT Generated by microwave (i.e., 1mm to 1m):

    Processes under subclass 569 wherein microwave energy is utilized to
    activate or initiate the plasma.

    (1)     Note.  The wavelength of microwave is measured as 1mm to 1m and its
    FCC allowed frequency is 2.45 GHz.

    (2)     Note.  Microwave is a term applied to electromagnetic waves which
    occupy a region in the electromagnetic spectrum which is bounded by radio
    waves on the side of longer wavelengths and by infrared waves on the side
    of shorter wavelengths.


CLS 427/576
TXT Metal, metal alloy, or metal oxide coating:

    Processes under subclass 569 wherein the coating material applied contains
    a pure metal, metal alloy, or metal oxide.


CLS 427/577
TXT Inorganic carbon containing coating material, not as steel (e.g., carbide,
    etc.):

    Processes under subclass 569 wherein the coating material, excluding steel,
    contains inorganic carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Attention is directed to the definition of Class 260,
    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for the distinction between the terms
    "organic" and "inorganic."

    (2)     Note.  Metal compounds, excluding steel, containing more than 1.7
    percent of inorganic carbon are properly classified in this subclass.


CLS 427/578
TXT Silicon containing coating material:

    Processes under subclass 569 wherein a coating material applied contains
    silicon.


CLS 427/579
TXT Silicon oxides or nitrides:

    Processes under subclass 578 wherein the silicon utilized in the coating
    material is silicon oxide or silicon nitride.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    577,    for coating material containing silicon carbide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, particularly
    subclasses 788+ and 792+ for deposition of silicon oxide or silicon
    nitride, respectively, on a semiconductor substrate utilizing
    electromagnetic or wave energy.


CLS 427/580
TXT Electrical discharge (e.g., arcs, sparks, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 457 wherein the deposition of the coating material
    involves the use a luminous discharge of electricity, through a gas or
    vapor, between two electrodes of which one may be the substrate.

    (1)     Note.  An arc discharge is a type of electrical conduction in gases
    characterized by high current density and low potential drop. It is closely
    related to the glow discharge, but has a much lower potential drop in the
    cathode region, as well as a greater current density, wherein no sustained
    plasma is formed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    446,    for the use of an arc to coat with plasma spray.

    562,    for the use of an arc to pretreat the coating supply or source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 73.11, 73.21, and 76.1+ for coating
    operations that involve a build-up of metal coating on a metal workpiece
    and wherein an arc between and electrode and the work is utilized.


CLS 427/581
TXT Chemical deposition from liquid contiguous with substrate via electron beam
    or light (e.g., photochemical liquid deposition, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 457 wherein the deposition of a liquid coating is
    driven by either light energy or an electron beam. The liquid coating
    material must be contiguous with the substrate during the energy
    application.


CLS 427/582
TXT Photoinitiated chemical vapor deposition (i.e., photo CVD):

    Processes under subclass 457 wherein  a chemical vapor reaction driven by
    the absorption of light occurs and a reaction product is deposited on a
    substrate.

    (1)     Note.  In processes involving photo initiated chemical vapor
    deposition, the wave length or the specific energy level of a photon are
    generally identified.


CLS 427/583
TXT Silicon containing coating:

    Processes under subclass 582 wherein an applied coating contains silicon.


CLS 427/584
TXT Metal, metal alloy, or metal oxide coating:

    Processes under subclass 582 wherein an applied coating material contains
    pure metal, metal alloy, or metal oxide.


CLS 427/585
TXT Chemical vapor deposition (e.g., electron beam or heating using IR,
    inductance, resistance, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 457 wherein a vapor phase precursor decomposes
    either in a gas or on a substrate, which reaction is effected by
    electromagnetic, electrical, magnetic, or wave energy which results in a
    coated substrate.

    (1)     Note.  Thermal chemical vapor deposition processes using infrared
    heating to effect  or assist in effecting the chemical reaction are found
    here.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass excludes processes wherein an  infrared energy
    is utilized merely to vaporize the coating material, e.g., where no
    chemical reaction takes place, in a vapor deposition process.

    (3)     Note.  Indirect heat transfer to a substrate as via convection is
    excluded from this and indented subclasses as a heat energy source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     99, 124, 166, and 248.1+, for vapor deposition processes which may
    include utilization of radiant heat.


CLS 427/586
TXT Pyrolytic use of laser or focused light (e.g., IR, UV lasers to heat, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 585 in which a chemical vapor deposition process
    utilizes heat generated by laser (UV, IR, or focused beam) radiation to
    drive the chemical reaction.


CLS 427/587
TXT Resistance or induction heating:

    Processes under 585 wherein resistance or induction heat is employed to
    effect the coating.

    (1)     Note.  Induction heating involves subjecting a conductive body to a
    variable electromagnetic field, usually at a frequency lower than that used
    for dielectric heating. Internal resistance in the conductive body then
    cause the conductive body to heat up.

    (2)     Note.  Resistance heating involves passing an electric current
    through a conductive body to produce heat by means of internal resistance.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass does not include processes wherein the
    electric current is passed through a heating filament, coil, susceptor,
    etc., which is not the substrate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    540,    wherein an arc or electrical discharge is produced in resistance
    heating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 73.11, 73.21, and 76.1+ for metal
    coating buildup with the use of resistance heating. Electric welding, has
    to have two preforms being joined, wherein coating is ancillary to the
    joining of the preforms.


CLS 427/588
TXT Silicon or semiconductor material containing coating:

    Processes under subclass 587 wherein coating matter applied to a substrate
    contains silicon or semiconductor material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, particularly
    subclasses 788+ and 792+ for deposition of silicon oxide or silicon
    nitride, respectively, on a semiconductor substrate utilizing
    electromagnetic or wave energy.


CLS 427/589
TXT Silicon carbide:

    Processes under subclass 588 wherein the silicon utilized in the coating is
    silicon carbide.


CLS 427/590
TXT Boron, nitrogen, or inorganic carbon containing coating:

    Processes under subclass 587 wherein the coating material contains boron,
    nitrogen, or inorganic carbon included in its composition.

    (1)     Note.  Attention is directed to the definition of Class 260,
    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for the distinction between the terms
    "organic" and "inorganic."


CLS 427/591
TXT Induction or dielectric heating:

    Processes under subclass 457 which utilize induction or dielectric heating.

    (1)     Note.  Induction heating involves subjecting a conductive body to a
    variable electromagnetic field, usually at a frequency lower than that used
    for dielectric heating.  Internal resistance in the conductive body then
    cause the conductive body to heat up.

    (2)     Note.  Dielectric heating involves the method of raising the
    temperature of a nominally insulating material by sandwiching it between
    two plates to which an rf voltage is applied.  The material acts as a
    dielectric and its internal resistance causes it to heat up.


CLS 427/592
TXT Resistance heating:

    Processes under subclass 457 wherein an electrical current is passed
    through the coating material or substrate to produce heat by means of
    internal resistance.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include processes wherein the
    electric current is passed through a heating filament, coil, susceptor,
    etc., which is not the substrate or the coating material.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass excludes indirect heat transfer to the
    substrate or coating material as via convection heat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248.1,  for processes involving direct heating of an evaporation pot, boat,
    or crucible containing coating material using resistance energy with the
    intent to vaporize said coating for application to a substrate.

    540,    wherein an arc or electrical discharge is produced in resistance
    heating to effect coating.

    580,    wherein an arc or electrical discharge is produced in resistance
    heating to effect coating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 73.11, 73.21, and 76.1+ for metal
    coating buildup with the use of resistance heating.  Electric welding has
    to have two preforms being joined, wherein coating is ancillary to the
    joining of the preforms.


CLS 427/593
TXT Vapor deposition employing resistance heating of substrate or coating
    material:

    Processes under subclass 592 wherein a substrate is resistively heated and
    a coating material is applied as a vapor or gas, or a source material for
    vapor deposition is resistively heated.

    (1)     Note.  Processes utilizing consumable electrodes to apply coating
    as vapor or gas, by resistance electrical energy are proper for this and
    indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  Explosive or detonation vaporization for deposition, via
    resistance heating is properly classified here.

    (3)     Note.  Processes wherein a rod, wire, or filament is wholly or
    partially vaporized and deposited on a substrate is proper for this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    446,    for explosive or detonation flame or plasma spray vaporization.

    587,    wherein a chemical vapor reaction occurs.


CLS 427/594
TXT Immersion or partial immersion:

    Processes under subclass 592 wherein the coating is applied by submerging
    at least part of the base in a pool or bath of coating material.

    (1)     Note.  Reference to the use of a "bath" coating process is
    considered immersion and proper for this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Fluidized bed processes will not be considered immersion for
    this subclass. Processes utilizing fluidized beds of solid particles or
    powder using resistance heating is found in this class, subclass 592.


CLS 427/595
TXT Electromagnetic or particulate radiation utilized (e.g., IR, UV, X-ray,
    gamma ray, actinic, microwave, radio wave, atomic particle; i.e., alpha
    ray, beta ray, electron, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 457 wherein the deposition of the coating material
    is assisted by electromagnetic or particular radiation, the propagation of
    energy through space or material.

    (1)     Note.  For the purpose of classification here and in indented
    subclasses, the term "electromagnetic or particulate radiation" includes
    the following:


    a.      Electromagnetic Radiation
    1.      radio wave
    2.      microwave
    3.      visible
    4.      ultraviolet
    5.      X - rays
    6.      gamma ray
    7.      actinic

    b.      Particulate Radiation
    1.      alpha ray (2 protons + 2
                           neutrons)2.     beta ray (electrons)3.   electron
    (accelerated beam)4.    neutron

            This list is not intended to be exhaustive and is not limited to
    the above examples.


CLS 427/596
TXT Laser or electron beam (e.g., heat source, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 595 wherein laser or electron beam is utilized as
    a heat source to assist in the deposition of the coating material.

    (1)     Note.  Processes wherein a narrow beam of coherent light (light
    amplification by simulated emissions of radiation) is utilized to assist in
    the deposition of the coating material are found here.

    (2)     Note.  Processes wherein a narrow stream of electrons moving in the
    same direction under the influence of an electric or magnetic field is
    utilized as a heat source to assist in the deposition of the coating are
    found here.


CLS 427/597
TXT Metal or metal alloy containing coating material applied:

    Processes under subclass 596 wherein the coating material applied contains
    a pure metal or a metal alloy.


CLS 427/598
TXT Magnetic field or force utilized:

    Processes under subclass 457 wherein a magnetic field or force is used to
    treat or coat or assist in the treatment or coating of a substrate or
    coated substrate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    543,    for the use of a magnetic field or force to produce induction
    heating.

    547,    for the use of magnetic field or force to pretreat or post-treat
    the substrate.


CLS 427/599
TXT Magnetic recording medium or device formed:

    Processes under subclass 598 wherein a device or tape is produced to store
    information by magnetic means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128,    for methods of forming magnetic devices in general, not provided
    for above.

    502,    for magnetic recording medium formed using high energy ionizing
    radiation.

    548,    for the formation of a magnetic medium which utilizes magnetic
    field or force to pretreat or post-treat the substrate.


CLS 427/600
TXT Sonic or ultrasonic:

    Processes under subclass 457 wherein the wave energy used to cause
    deposition of the applied coating is sonic or ultrasonic.

    (1)     Note.  Ultrasonic waves vibrate at frequencies beyond the hearing
    power of human beings (above 16,000 hertz). Sonic frequencies are
    vibrations which can be heard by the human ear (from about 15 hertz to
    approximately 20,000 hertz).


CLS 427/601
TXT Immersion bath utilized:

    Processes under subclass 600 wherein the coating is applied by wholly or
    partially submerging the base in a coating material and simultaneously
    applying sonic or ultrasonic energy to the base or the coating material
    supply.


CLS 428/
TTL STOCK MATERIAL OR MISCELLANEOUS ARTICLES

CLS 428/
TXT INDEX TO THIS CLASSIFICATION DEFINITION

    I.      INTRODUCTION

    II.     GLOSSARY OF TERMS

    III.    CLASS DEFINITION

    IV.     SCOPE OF THE CLASS

    V.      RELATION TO MATERIAL OR COMPOSITION CLASSES

    VI.     RELATION TO CERTAIN OTHER CLASSES

    VII.    FRAMEWORK OF THE CLASS

    VIII. ART TERM INDEX TO THE CLASS

    IX.     CRITERIA FOR PATENT PLACEMENT IN THIS CLASS

    X.      SUBCLASS DEFINITIONS

    I.      INTRODUCTION

    This class accommodates certain products of manufacture which are not
    provided for in classes devoted primarily to manufacturing methods and
    apparatus. The bulk of the documents are directed to stock material
    composites, that is, materials having two or more distinct components which
    are more ordered than a mere random mixture of ingredients.

    Certain finished articles, generally of an ornamental or readily disposable
    nature, are placed herein when this class specifically provides for them.
    Unfinished articles, e.g., blanks requiring further significant shaping to
    be suitable for ultimate use, and stock materials from which an indefinite
    number of usable portions may be cut, are placed herein unless specifically
    provided for elsewhere.  See section VI, A, 2, below. The determination
    whether a product is a finished article or a stock material is made on the
    basis of the amount of structure included in the body of the claims.

    A patent for this class is placed herein generally without regard to the
    process by which it is made, for example, without regard to whether the
    plural layer product was formed by extrusion, coating, or assembly of
    preformed layers.

    Therefore, unless otherwise clearly stated, the term "coating" or "layer"
    will include a preform as well as a layer formed by covering a base with a
    fluent material which then solidifies. A comprehensive search for processes
    of making the products of this class will be found in the manufacturing
    classes listed in section VI, C, below.

    An asterisk has been applied to certain terms throughout this bulletin to
    indicate that these terms have specific definitions in section II,
    Glossary, which should be consulted.

    The asterisk has been applied to identify the term in the first appearing
    definition which must be considered for the desired subclass title.

    It should be noted that there are two sections for the glossary.  The first
    one applies generally to the structural areas of the schedule; the second
    applies to materials (e.g., compound, composition, etc.).  It should
    further be noted, however, that the structural areas of the class also
    include some subclasses directed to materials.

    Both sections of the glossary should be consulted.

    II.     GLOSSARY OF TERMS

    A.      Structural

    (1)     Note.  Terms or phrases used in titles and definitions either
    repeatedly or in a special and limited sense are set forth below with the
    meaning each is to have in this class.  For economy of space, an asterisk
    (*) following a word indicates that reference should be had to this
    glossary for the specific meaning thereof while an asterisk following an
    hyphenated phrase, (e.g., strand-portion*, etc.) indicates that the entire
    hyphenated term, as such, has been defined in this glossary.

    (2)     Note.  Where appropriate throughout the definition, the
    alternatively singular or plural forms of a noun has been indicated by the
    addition of (s) immediately following the noun, (e.g., layer(s) to mean a
    layer or layers, etc.).

    ARTICLE

    A discrete determinate three dimensional thing substantially in its
    ultimate use form, as distinguished from stock material (e.g., sheet, etc.)
    from which such articles may be manufactured.  These articles are limited
    to subclasses 2 through 34.1, part of subclass 542 and subclass 576.

    BASE

    That substance or material which has been covered or saturated or
    permeated, either partially or completely by another material.  This term
    is synonymous with Substrate.

    BLANK

    See definition of intermediate-article*.

    BLOCK

    A relatively large piece of material whose thickness is many times that of
    a web* or sheet* compared with its width.

    CAVITY

    A hole or a hollow place in a body.

    CELL

    A closed cavity (which may be empty or full) in a component*.

    CLOTH

    A fabric* which for purposes of this class is considered to be made of
    mechanically intertwined, interlooped, interwoven, or intertangled
    strands*, strand-portions* or strand like strips*.  See Class 442, class
    definition.

    COMPONENT

    A distinct unitary element of a composite stock material* which is
    longitudinally coextensive therewith and which, if separated from the
    remainder of such stock material*, would be recognized as a web*, sheet*,
    rod*, strand*, tube or block by itself.

    A component may consist of plural layers* as in the folded component shown
    in Figure 1.  See also (2) Note under A, above.



    COMPOSITE

    A stock-material* comprising a plurality of components*.

    COMPOSITION

    A product having a plurality of constituents* or elements, none of which
    are in a defined spatial or ordered relationship to each other or to the
    surface or shape of the body in which they are contained, that is, a random
    mixture of elements.

    CONSTITUENT

    A discrete element* (e.g., strand*, fiber*, particle*, etc.) of a
    component* or product.

    CORE

    intermediate portion of a composite* product.  In a composite web* or
    sheet*, a core lies between two other components*; in a rod* or strand* or
    filament*, a core is the inner portion covered with another layer.  If a
    core is claimed, per se, it is to be assumed for purposes of this class
    that the other layer(s)* or component(s)* are included.

    ELEMENT

    See definition of constituent*.

    FABRIC

    A web*, sheet* or film disclosed as used in the manufacture of household
    furnishings (e.g., draperies, upholstery, etc) shoes, etc., roofing,
    clothing, tires, etc. and is claimed as a textile*, cloth* or fabric.  See
    Class 442, class definition.


    FIBER

    A relatively short, slender, flexible element of macroscopic size and
    finite length and having a width and thickness of the same order of
    magnitude.  A fiber is generally of staple length to facilitate its being
    spun, twisted or otherwise secured together into a composite strand but may
    be of shorter length requiring bonding, felting or matting to form a strand
    or layer.  It may be of animal (e.g., wool, rabbit hair), vegetable (e.g.,
    cotton, jute, hemp), or mineral (e.g., asbestos, glass, metal) origin and
    may be either natural, modified or synthetic.  See also Filament.

    FILAMENT

    A fine threadlike body or structure whose width and thickness are of the
    same order of magnitude. See also fiber.

    FLAKE

    A small thin mass having a width or length greater than its thickness.  The
    term flake is considered to denote structure and is classified accordingly.

    INTERMEDIATE-ARTICLE

    A fully shaped article, all three dimensions of which are definite, even
    though one or more of these dimensions may be negligible. The article is
    not suitable for functional use in the claimed condition, but must be
    subjected to one or more further significant shaping steps to do more than
    merely occupy space.

    The following operations have been regarded as not involving a further
    significant shaping:

    (a)     Assembling or uniting the article with other parts.

    (b)     Distorting the article during an assembly operation to cause the
    article to conform to discrepancies in the size or shape of a coacting part.

    (c)     Bonding or distorting those portions of the article which are to
    function as means for fastening the article to a coacting part, as, for
    example, the bending of ears or tabs.

    LAYER

    A single thickness of material(s) in the form of web* or sheet*, or a
    plurality of any of these in side-by-side coplanar relation; or particulate
    material arranged in continuity to constitute a distinct stratum.  A layer
    may include a plurality of components* as in Figure 2.  See also (2) Note
    under A, above.



    MASS

    A body of material of indefinite or indeterminate shape.

    METALLIC

    Composed entirely of metal* or having adjacent metal components. Since
    autogenous bonding of two metallic parts is thought to involve inherently
    either a diffusion or alloying between constituents of the two parts, this
    diffusion or alloy layer, even though of appreciable thickness, does not
    prevent the undiffused or unalloyed regions from being considered.

    NONTHICKNESS SURFACE

    The surface of a web, sheet, layer or component on which both its length
    and width may be measured.  See Figure 3.



    PARTICLE

    A very small quantity of matter, so small as to be considered without
    magnitude although possessing inertia and the force of attraction.

    PORE

    A tiny opening, usually microscopic, through which certain fluids may pass.
     Generally, the pore opening is of such irregular direction that light will
    not pass through it.

    POWDER

    A mass of particles, that is, portions of matter so small that they are not
    ordinarily handled as individual units.  According to Metals Handbook, 8th
    Edition, 1961, volume 1, page 28, powders currently used in powder
    metallurgy had a particle size within the range of 0.1 to 1000 microns in
    their largest dimension, as determined by screens or other suitable
    instruments.  Powder particles generally are distinguished from filamentary
    particles in that their shape and length-to-diameter ratio are such that in
    the dry state the particles will not hold together as a massive article
    without the application of pressure or heat.

    ROD

    A relatively rigid and slender element having a width and thickness of the
    same order of magnitude, a length which may be either indeterminate or
    finite, and a cross-section which may be of any shape.

    SHEET

    A portion of web* material of finite length, whose width is greater than
    its thickness, and which may be of any perimetric shape (e.g., triangle,
    circle, etc.).

    STOCK-MATERIAL

    A sheet*, web*, rod*, strand*, tube or block, mass or layer.

    STRAND

    A relatively slender and flexible element* having a width and thickness of
    the same order of magnitude and a length which is either (a) indeterminate
    or (b) coextensive with the length or width of a sheet* or layer* with
    which it may be associated.  A strand may be a monofilament or it may
    include either a plurality of filaments* or fibers* disposed in parallelism
    (e.g., tow) or constituent fibers* and/or filaments* knitted, plaited,
    braided, twisted, interlaced, interlocked or otherwise secured together to
    form a unit such as roving, thread, yarn, cord, rope or cable.

    STRAND-PORTION

    A strand* of finite length; or an unsevered but determinate length of a
    strand.

    STRIP

    A web* or sheet* or relatively narrow ribbon-like material.  A strip which
    is interwoven or intertangled with other strips or with strands, in the
    same manner as a strand, will be termed a "strand-like strip".

    SUBSTRATE

    See Base*.

    TEXTILE

    A fabric* which, for purposes of the class is considered to be cloth*. See
    Class 442, class definition.

    WEB

    A portion of material having length and width each greater than its
    thickness and with at least its longitudinal dimension indeterminate.

    A web may comprise (a) a single thickness of material or (b) a plurality of
    portions of a single piece of material folded on each other longitudinally
    or transversely, or (c) a plurality of individual web components* joined
    together in longitudinally coextensive face or edge contact to form a
    composite web.

    (1)     Note.  Unless clearly disclosed or claimed otherwise (e.g., as a
    rod*, mass*, filament*, etc.) a product will be placed in the appropriate
    web* or sheet* subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Included under the definition of component* or layer are the
    following:

    (a)     The skin formed on a porous layer* by curing (e.g., a foam, etc.).

    (b)     The "layer*" formed by impregnating a substrate to a defined depth
    which must be recited either relatively to the entire thickness or as an
    absolute dimension.

    (c)     Either of a pair of layers* of the same material cohered or adhered
    together by their own forces, if disclosed as plural separate layers*.

    (3)     Note.  For purposes of this class, paper* is limited to a waterlaid
    web* of interfelted cellulose* (natural) fibers*.  A waterlaid web* of
    resin, polymer or modified cellulose* (e.g., cellulose acetate) fibers is
    excluded from the paper* subclasses and will be classified on other
    features (e.g., composition, etc.).

    (4)     Note.  Where a subclass title includes a "coating" or "coat" or
    "coated layer*", a bonded or adhered component or layer* is intended to be
    included within the scope thereof.  Thus, a product formed by laminating or
    adhering two separate and distinct layers* is considered to be the
    equivalent of a product made by applying a coating of a material onto a
    base* or substrate*.

    WORKPIECE

    A stock-material* not suitable for functional use in the claimed condition,
    but requiring one or more further significant shaping steps to do more than
    occupy space.  Usually it is the cross-sectional configuration which is to
    be further shaped.  See the definition of intermediate-article* for a list
    of operations not considered to be significant shaping.

    B.      Nonstructural or Composition

    Addition polymer from unsaturated monomers - Any multiunit chain which is
    the product of the reaction of unsaturated bonds in the units.

    The product may be the result of interaction of molecules of the same
    compound (as polyethylene) or of different compounds (as
    acryronitrile-styrene).  Vinyl acetate and methyl methacrylate are included
    within the scope of the term because the monomeric units are linked through
    the reacted unsaturated bonds and the ester groups are pendant - i.e., the
    units are not linked through the ester groups.

    Aldehyde or ketone condensation product - A resin resulting from the
    reaction of an aldehyde or a ketone and a polyfunctional active hydrogen
    containing compound, which, with the elimination of water, produces a chain
    of alkylidene units alternating with the residue of the hydrogen supplying
    compound.

    Phenol formaldehyde, urea formaldehyde and polyamino (e.g., melamine)
    aldehyde or furfural resins are within the scope of the term.

    Animal membrane - Material derived from an animal and found there
    originally in film or layer form, e.g., bladder,skin or scale.

    Glue or gelatin in a film form is not included here because neither exists
    in the animal as a layer or foil.

    Asbestos - A native magnesium calcium silicate. Asbestos is not considered
    to be included in the term "metal compound" for purposes of this class, but
    is included in silicon containing, unless specifically stated otherwise in
    a title or definition.

    Bituminous or tarry residue - A composition or compound having the
    characteristics of a tar or pitch no matter what the origin.  This term
    includes all asphalts, bitumens, pitches and tars from coal, mineral oil,
    cotton seed pitch and the residue from the destructive distillation of
    wood, and natural oil distillations.

    Carbohydrate  1) polyhydroxy  mono-aldehydes and polyhydroxy mono-ketones,
    generally having the formula Cn(H2O)m and substances which are hydrolized
    to these.

    The term includes cellulose, starch dextran, dextrin, sugar and lignin.

    (1)     Note.  Wheat paste, which contains gluten, is considered polyamide.

    Carbon - Inorganic material.

    Cellulosic - A carbohydrate material derived from the structural matter of
    plant life, usually from the stems.

    The term includes lignocellulose (e.g., wood and bark) relatively pure
    cellulose (e.g., cotton and linen) and chemically modified forms of
    cellulose as cellophane, pyroxylin, viscose and rayon.

    While pyroxylin may be plasticized with minor amounts of camphor and/or
    castor oil, for purposes of classification, pyroxylin is considered
    cellulosic.

    Ceramic - Clay containing, therefore silicon containing.

    Cork - The outer bark of cork oak.

    The cork may be in the form of slabs or may be used as a filler in finely
    divided form.

    Ester - A compound which is identical to that obtained by the replacing of
    a hydroxy hydrogen of an alcohol or a phenol with an acid radical.

    Ester linkage - The chemical grouping obtained by replacing the hydroxy
    hydrogen of an alcohol or a phenol with an acid radical.

    Glass - An amorphous, hard, brittle, often transparent material comprising
    a fused mixture of the silicates of the alkali and alkaline earth, or heavy
    metals.  Glass is not considered to be included in the term "metal
    compound" for purposes of this class, unless specifically included in a
    title or definition.

    Graphite - Inorganic material as is carbon.

    Gum - See natural oil, gum, rosin or lac below.

    Lac - See natural oil, gum, rosin or lac below.

    Metal - A material having a continuous phase of any element of the periodic
    table except hydrogen, a noble gas, a halogen, a chalcogen (oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, tellurium), nitrogen, phosphorus, carbon and boron. Elemental
    silicon is considered to be a metal, but a silicon compound is not
    considered to be a metal compound on the basis of silicon content.  The
    term "metal compound" in a subclass title does not include glass or
    asbestos, unless specifically included by title or definition.  The metal
    may be a pure metal or an alloy as defined in Class 75, Specialized
    Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein, Consolidated Metal
    Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate Mixtures, subclass 122,
    (1) Note. An intermetallic compound of two or more metals, e.g., a metal
    silicide, aluminide, etc., is considered to be an alloy.

    Natural oil or gum, rosin or lac  Any oil, gum or resin that occurs in
    nature, as cottonseed, linseed and castor oils, rosin, mineral oil and the
    exudation of insects known as lac.

    These three classes of oil; drying, semidrying and nondrying oil are
    included within the scope of the term.

    Natural rubber - Containing the natural gum, know as caoutchouc, gutta
    percha, or balata obtained from the latex or sap of "rubber" trees.

    The word "rubber" standing alone is considered to denote natural rubber.

    Noble metals - Those metals not readily oxidized, i.e., silver, gold,
    platinum, polladium, mercury, iridium, rhodium, ruthenium, osmium.

    Oil - See natural oil, gum, rosin or lac, above.

    Paper - Unless otherwise specified, is a sheet or web of waterlaid felted
    cellulosic fibers.  May also be made of asbestos, mineral or synthetic
    fibers or blends of fibers, but must be so disclosed solely, or must be so
    claimed for placement in a subclass other than cellulosic or paper.

    Polyamide - A polymeric compound containing amide groups through which the
    monomers are linearly linked, except urea-aldehyde (for which see alddhyde
    or ketone condensation product).

    The term includes 1, the reaction products of polyamines and polybasic
    acids or 2, the polymer of amino acids (e.g., nylon, peptides and proteins).

    The manner in which the amide groups linearly link the monomers or
    moieties, of which the chain is built is graphically indicated by:



    (1)     Note.  Wheat paste, which contains gluten, is considered to be a
    polyamide.

    (2)     Note.  Polyamide also includes polyimide.

    (3)     Note.  Urea-aldehyde condensation product is not included within
    the definition of polyamide since the product is significantly different
    from other polyamide resins and are similar to phenol-aldehyde resins.
    Hence, urea-aldehyde products are placed in the subclass providing for
    aldehyde-ketone condensation products.

    Poly(amido-ester) - A compound which is a polymer of linearly recurring
    amide and ester linkages.

    The monomers do not have to have an equivalent number of amide and ester
    groups and they do not have to occur in a regular pattern.  The products of
    (1) a) polybasic acids b) polyhydric alcohols and c) polyamines or, (2) a
    mixture of hydroxy acids and amino acids or (3) polybasic acids and hydroxy
    amines are within the scope of the term.  (Polyurethane is exemplary):

    The manner in which the ester and amide groups linearly link the monomers
    or moieties, of which the chain is built, is graphically indicated by



    The ester groups need not be carboxylic esters but may be, e.g., sulfate
    ester groups.

    Polyimical - Included within the term polyamide.

    Polyester - A polymeric compound containing ester groups through which the
    monomers are linearly linked to each other.

    The manner in which the ester groups linearly link the monomers or
    moieties, of which the chain is built, is graphically indicated by



    The ester groups need not be carboxylic esters but may also be, e.g.,
    sulfate ester groups.

    Quartz - A fused silicon dioxide (silica).

    Refractory - Various materials, but usually clays or other cementitious or
    silicon containing.  Consider to be silicon unless clearly disclosed
    otherwise, as for example alumina.  The refractory metals are those in
    Groups IVB, VB and VIB of the Periodic System.

    Rosin - See natural oil, gum, rosin or lac.

    Wax or Waxy - A compound described as a wax (e.g., beeswax) or having the
    physical characteristics of a wax or is a recognized wax (as carnauba).

    Wood - The material of trunks and branches of trees or bushes, excluding
    bark.

    This term includes lumber and finely divided wood chips, fibers or flour.

    "Fiber board" from wood fibers or pulp will be considered wood or paper
    depending on the disclosure of the document in which this expression
    occurs.  Fiber board formed by compression of wood fibers with or without a
    binder (and utilized as wood) is considered wood.  Fiber board which is
    water laid (and, used as cardboard or paste board) is considered paper.

    An Art Index of Common Terms and Equivalent Terminology Used In The
    Schedule.

    The first appearing term, i.e., to the left of the colon, is the name used
    in the document and the term to the right of the colon is the corresponding
    name employed in the subclass titles of the schedule.

    The list provides an index to the schedule for laminates which are
    identified by trade names, trade marks and other terminology not employed
    in the schedule.

    The symbols # and 0 indicate that the term, on the right in the glossary,
    is an abbreviated form of that found in the subclass titles.

    "A" Stage:  - aldehyde#   (phenolic)

    ABS,

    acrylonitrile-butadiene-stryrene:-

    unsaturated0  (polyene)

    Acrylate, acrylic: - unsaturated0

    Airplane fabric - cloth*

    Alkyd:  - polyester

    Animal fiber or hair:  - polyamide

    Animal glue:  - polyamide

    Artificial silk:  - cellulosic (regenerated or modified)

    Asbestos:  - silicon containing; see definition

    Asphaltic:  - bituminous

    "B" Stage:  - aldehyde#   (phenolic)

    "Bakelite":  - aldehyde#   (phenolic)

    Balata:  - natural rubber

    Balsam:  - natural gum

    "Beetle", "Beetleware":  - aldehyde#

    Birdlime:  - natural gum

    #aldehyde or ketone condensation product 0 addition polymer from unsatured
    monomers.

    Buna S:  - unsaturated0

    Butadiene-styrene:  - unsaturated0 (polyene)

    Carbon Particles:  - inorganic

    "C" Stage:  - aldehyde#  (phenolic)

    Canadian Balsam:  - natural gum

    Caoutchouc:  - natural rubber

    Casein:  polyamide

    "Cellopane":  cellulosic (modified)

    "Celluloid":  - cellulosic (modified)

    Cement:  - silicon containing

    Ceramic:  - silicon containing

    Chloroprene:  - unsaturated0 (polyene)

    Clay:  - silicon containing

    Cotten seed pitch:  - bituminous or tarry residue.

    Coumarone, coumarone-indene:  -

    unsaturated0 (heterocyclic)

    Creosote:  - bituminous

    "Dacron":  - polyester

    Dextran:  - carbohydrate

    Dextrin:  - carbohydrate

    Dope (airplane):  - cellulosic, (modified)

    "Durez":  - aldehyde#

    "Dynel":  - unsaturated0 (halide)

    Enamel (not otherwise specified)  - pigment varnish:  - natural oil or gum

    Enamel, porcelain:  - silicon containing

    Enamel, synthetic:  - see under the appropriate synthetic resin

    "Ethoxylene":  - epoxy ether

    "Factice":  - natural oil (modified)

    Fiber (animal):  - polyamide

    Fiber (vegetable):  - cellulosic

    Fish glue:  - polyamide

    Fish paper:  - polyamide

    Fleece:  - nap surface

    Flour paste:  - polyamide unless specified as starch, which see

    "Formica":  - aldehyde

    Friction tape:  - bituminous or tarry residue.

    FR-S:  - unsaturated0 (polyene)

    Furfural:  - aldehyde

    Fur:  - polyamide

    Gelatin:  - polyamide

    "Geon":  - unsaturated0  (halide)

    Glass:  - silicon containing; see definition

    Glass, water (i.e., waterglass):  - silicon containing

    Giladen (protein):  - polyamide

    Glue:  - polyamide

    Glue, Fish or Animal:  - polyamide

    Glue, Synthetic:  - usually aldehyde

    "Glyptal":  - polyester

    Goldbeaters skin:  - animal membrane

    Graphite:  - inorganic

    GR-S:  - unsaturated0  (polyene)

    Gum plastic, ABS:  - unsaturated0 (polyene)

    Gutta percha:  - natural rubber

    Gypsum:  - calcium sulfate

    Hair:  - polyamide

    Haloprene:  - unsaturated0  (polyene) "Hetron":

    Hexamethylenetetramine as a source of formaldehyde:  - aldehyde#

    "Kel-F":  - fluorinated addition polymer

    Ivory:  - polyamide

    "Kodel":  - polyester

    "Koroseal":  - unsaturated0

    "Kynar":  - fluorinated addition polymer

    Latex:  - natural rubber

    Latex paint:  - unsaturated0  (either ester or polyene)

    "Leatheroid" (paper-rubber-sandarac): natural rubber

    Lecithin:  - waxy

    #aldehyde or ketone condensation product 0 addition polymer from
    unsaturated monomers.

    "Lexan":  - polycarbonate

    Linoleum:  - cork with natural oil, gum or rosin

    "Lucite":  - unsaturated0  (ester)

    Lycopodium:  - natural oil or gum

    Maleic acid or anhydride (used as a reactant):  - unsaturated (anhydride is
    heterocyclic)

    Maleic acid ester (from polyhydric alcohol):  - polyester (crosslinked)

    Maleic acid ester (from monohydric

    alcohol):  - unsaturated0  (ester)#

    Melamine:  - aldehyde

    Mica:  - silicon containing

    Modacrylic:  - unsaturated (halide)

    "Mylar":  - polyester

    Neoprene:  - unsaturated0  (polyene)

    "Neothane":  - poly(amido-ester)

    Nitro cellulose:  - cellulosic (ester or modified)

    Nylon:  - polyamide

    Oil cloth:  - see structural area (cross joined strands)

    "Orlon":  a cyrylic (unsaturated0 )

    Paper:  - a water laid web or interfelted natural celluloses fibers

    Phenolic(s):  - aldehyde

    Pitch:  - bituminous

    "Plexiglas":  - unsaturated0  (ester)

    "Pliofilm":  - natural rubber

    "Plioflex":  - unsaturated0  (polyene)

    Polyamine:  - aldehyde#   (unless otherwise specified)

    Polyethylene:  - unsaturated0

    Polypropylene:  - unsaturated0

    Polyurethane:  - see urethane

    Porcelain:  - silicon containing

    Porcelain enamel:  - see enamel, porcelain

    Portland cement:  - silicon containing

    Protein:  - polyamide

    PVA (Polyvinyl acetate):0

    -unsaturated (ester)

    "Pyrex":  - glass

    Pyroxilin:  - cellulosic (modified)

    Quartz:  - silicon containing

    Rayon:  - cellulosic (regenerated) (in strand or fiber form)

    Refractory:  - see definition above

    Rubber, pore:  - natural rubber

    Rubber, synthetic:  - unsaturated0 polyene

    Rubber, synthetic, sulfide:  - polythioether

    SBR:  - unsaturated0  (polyene)

    Sand:  - silicon containing

    Sandarac:  - natural gum

    "Saran":  - unsaturated0  (halide)

    Silk:  - polyamide

    Soya bean oil:  - polyamide

    Spandex:  - poly(amido-ester)

    Starch:  - carbohydrate

    Stone:  - silicon containing

    Stone Wood:  - cellulosic (wood)

    Suede:  - Pile or nap surface

    Synthetic glue:  - usually aldehyde#

    Synthetic rubber:  - unsaturated0 polyene

    Synthetic rubber:  sulfide:  - polythioether

    Talc:  - silicon containing

    "Telflon":  - fluorinated addition polymer

    "Terylene":  - polyester

    "Thiokol":  - polythioether

    Urethane:  - poly(amido ester)

    Varnish:  - natural oil or gum, lac

    Varnish, phenolic:  aldehyde#

    Varnish, synthetic:  - aldehyde or cellulosic (as disclosed)

    Vegetable ivory:  - cellulosic

    Vinyl:  - unsaturated0

    Vinyon:  - unsaturated0   (halide)

    #aldehyde or keytone condensation product

    0 addition polylmer form unsaturated monomers

    Viscose:  - cellulosic (modified)

    Vitreous:  glassy, silicon containing

    Vulcanized fiber:  - cellulosic (modified)

    Water glass:  - silicon containing

    Water soluble thermosetting resin:  -

    aldehyde#

    Wheat paste:  - polyamide, unless specified as starch (which see)

    Wood:  - cellulosic

    Wool:  - polyamide

    Zein:  - polyamide

    Zylonite (celluloid):  - cellulosic

    "Zytel" (nylon):  - polyamide

    aldehyde# or keytone condensation product

    0 addition polymer from

    unsaturated monomers.

    III.    CLASS DEFINITION

    This is the residual class for:

    A.      Stock material in the form of a structurally defined web*, sheet*,
    rod*, strand*, fiber*, filament*, cell*, flake*, particle* not provided
    elsewhere.

    B.      Stock material in the form of a web*, sheet*, mass* or layer* which
    consists of or contains a structurally defined constituent* or element* not
    provided elsewhere.

    C.      A nonstructural laminate defined merely in terms of the composition
    of one or more layers* not provided elsewhere.

    D.      An article* of manufacture not provided for elsewhere.

    E.      An intermediate-article* which is not provided for elsewhere and
    from which a final article is to be made.

    F.      A process for applying an impregnating material to a naturally
    solid product such as a wood beam, a sheet of leather or a stone, or for
    applying a coating to a base, and which process includes no significant
    method step.  Such a patent is placed in the schedule on the disclosed
    product produced, whether structural or nonstructural.  See section VI, C,
    6, below, reference to Class 427, Coating Processes, for guide lines which
    are to be followed in determining whether or not a process step is
    significant, for classification in Class 427, or not significant for
    placement in Class 428.

    IV.     SCOPE OF CLASS

    The scope of this class is defined by the residual state thereof as set
    forth in III (Class Definition) above.

    It must be clearly understood that all patents to stock material products
    have not been removed from all those classes which provide for such
    products on the basis of their ultimate function, See section VI below for
    an exemplary listing of such classes.

    As to composites (subclasses 411+ and 615+), the disclosures of this
    collection of art (i.e., adhered bodies defined in terms of their
    respective compositions or compounds) are subdivided generally on the basis
    of pairs of contiguous bodies (conveniently referred to as "layer"*).
    Thus, for instance, a laminate composed of layers* A, B, C, in that order,
    is visualized as comprising the pairs A-B and B-C, the laminated, A, B, C,
    D as comprising pairs A-B, B-C, and C-D-- and so on.  This arrangement is
    conceived of as facilitating the search for any multi- layered product,
    particularly for patent examination purposes.  Whereas a search for
    substance A joined to substance C by an intervening layer* of B, in a
    system based on paired layers*, may produce a disclosure of A-B in one
    document and of B-C in another, or may retrieve a disclosure of A-B-C in
    one document, it is thought that all such disclosures should be available
    to the examiner for his consideration, whether in a single document or a
    combination of documents.  The utility of such as approach is apparent in
    the search for products including five, six, seven, or more layer* pairs or
    interfaces.

    Additionally, it is believed that this concept of laminates as consisting
    of pairs of layers* may be incorporated readily into a machine retrieval
    system.  Having in mind the ubiquity of layer* interfaces in modern
    technology--appearing in both laminated and molded plastics, protective and
    decorative finishes, wood and paper products, metal stock--the technique of
    subdividing into layer* pairs all disclosures in the voluminous literature
    of interfacial bonding, is seen to offer an effectual starting point for
    the development of a schedule of descriptors or a dictionary of terms for
    mechanical search.

    It is an essential part of the considerations on which this paired-layer*
    schedule is based, that no weight is given to the alleged nature of any
    particular layer* as adherent or base.  The disclosure of two particular
    layers* in mutual contact will be available for the searcher's
    consideration regardless of whether either, both, or neither is taught as
    being adhesive, bonding material, glue, impregnant, etc.

    V.      CLASSES HAVING A DEFINED RELATIONSHIP WITH THIS CLASS

    Completed articles* of manufacture, except for those expressly provided for
    in the schedule, are excluded from this class. However, in many cases the
    claims of a patent are directed only to "nominal" articles, that is,
    articles claimed only in terms of the composition or stock-material* from
    which they are made.  It is the present policy of the Patent and Trademark
    Office to classify article patents, wherein the claims mention the article
    by name only and define it only in terms of the composition or material of
    which it is composed, in the appropriate composition or material class.
    The collection of these patents and reclassification thereof into the
    composition or material classes is under way, and as a corollary thereto,
    patents claiming a composition or material for an art use heretofore
    classified in the art classes are also being transferred to the appropriate
    composition or material class.  For articles* provided for in other
    classes, attention is directed to the "Index to Classification", and to
    section VI, below.

    The organization of section VI is as follows:

    A.      Intermediate-articles*

    1.  Packages

    2.  Blanks, etc.

    B.      Compounds and Compositions

    C.      Articles* and Stock-materials*

    1.      Life-science related

    2.      Textiles and related materials

    a.      Fibers, strands, rods, etc.

    b.      Interengaged fibers or strands

    c.      Belts, etc.

    d.      Associated fabrics

    e.      Textiles and their manufacture in general

    3.      Static objects and materials

    a.  Receptacles, chambers, etc.

    b.  Other hollow subject matter

    c.      Structures related to radiant or wave energy

    d.      Other structures and static objects

    4.      Electric and magnetic elements

    5.      Mechanical elements

    a.      Joints

    b.      Cutting, separating and related elements

    c.      Friction elements

    d.      Other machine elements

    6.      Coating and coated products

    7.      Assembling and/or shaping

    8.      Other manufacturing and treating

    9.      Miscellaneous devices

    In section VI, the symbol # is used, preceding a class number, to designate
    a class or part of a class which provides for certain stock-material*.
    Here follows the number and full title of classes which have been
    discovered as having a defined relationship with this class, as explained
    below in section VI, and in the subclass definitions:

                    Referred
                    to in
                    Sec. VI Class 428
    Class and Title Part No.        Subclass No.

    2       Apparel A,2; C, 3, 4,
                    2,d     364, 457,
                            911, 920

    3,      Artificial      C,1     166
            Body Members

    5,      Beds    C,1;C,2,        592, 544
                    C;C,2,d

    6,      Bee Culture     C,1     593

    8,      Bleaching and   C,2,e   229, 245,
            Dyeing; Fluid           297, 364,
            Treatment and           369, 375
            Chemical                397, 474
            Modification of
            Textiles and
            Fibers

    14,     Bridges         364

    15,     Brushing,       C,5,b   85, 156,
            Scrubbing, and          225, 364
            General         605
            Cleaning

    16,     Miscellaneous   C,      928
            Hardware

    19,     Textiles:       C,2,a   364
            Fiber
            Preparation

    23,     Chemistry:      C,3,a
            Physical Processes

    24,     Buttons,        A,2     17, 23,99,
            Buckles,                582
            Clasps, etc.

    26,     Textiles:       C,2,e   364
            Cloth
            Finishing

    28,     Textiles:       C,2,e   4, 364
            Manufacturing

    29,     Metal Working   C,5,b;C,         11, 357,
                    5,d;C,7 545, 546,
                            567, 570,
                            571, 574,
                            582, 592,
                            596, 599,
                            600, 601,
                            605, 607,
                            620, 684,
                            687, 901

    30,     Cutlery C,5 b   544, 573,
                            596, 600,604

    34,     Drying and Gas          6, 304
            or Vapor Contact
            With Solids

    36,     Boots, Shoes,   A,2;C,9 98, 297
            and Leggings

    40,     Card, Picture,  C,3,d   3, 7, 12,
            or Sign         13, 15,
            Exhibiting              21, 29

    44,     Fuel and        B       2, 576
            Related
            Compositions

    47,     Plant,  C,1     10, 13, 17,
            Husbandry               23, 27, 34.1

    49,     Movable or      C,3,d   595
            Removable
            Closures

    51,     Abrasive Tool   B;C,5,b 402, 544,
            Making Process,         550, 564,
            Material, or            565, 566,
            Composition             568, 610,
                            613, 687,
                            932

    52,     Static Struc-   C,2,a;C,        3, 15, 28,
            tures (e.g.,    3,d;C,5,        34, 99,
            Buildings)              544, 592,
                            593, 594,
                            595, 596,
                            597, 598,
                            603, 604,
                            615, 621,
                            630

    53,     Package Making          2, 573, 583

    55,     Gas Separation  C,5,b   131, 225,
                            550

    57,     Textiles:       C,2,a   10, 222,
            Spinning                225, 364,
            Twisting,               375, 377,
            and Twining             398,544,
                            549,592,
                            608

    59,     Chain, Staple,  A,1;A,2;        59
            and Horseshoe   C,2,b
            Making

    76,     Metal Tools     A,2;C,7 473, 544,
            and Implements          599, 602,
            Making          684

    79,     Button Making           C,7

    82,     Turning C,7

    83,     Cutting C,5,b   577, 596

    84,     Music   C,2,a   364

    85,     Driven, Headed  A,1;A,
            and Screw-      2;C,2,a 66.6, 399,
            Threaded Fast-          544, 572,
            enings          578

    87,     Textiles:       C,2,b   222, 225,
            Braiding, Net-          364, 375,
            ting, and Lace-         398, 592
            Making

    89,     Ordnance        C,3,b   911

    100,    Presses         546

    101,    Printing        A,2;C,  195
                    5,d

    102,    Ammunition      C,9
            and Explosive
            Devices

    104,    Railways                364

    106,    Compositions:   B       70, 304,
            Coating or              324, 357,
            Plastic         363, 364,
                            372, 397,
                            400, 401,
                            402, 403,
                            411, 426,
                            446, 546,
                            558, 613,
                            687, 919

    109,    Safes, Bank     C,3,d   544, 547
            Protection,             594, 609,
            or a Related            614, 615,
            Device          911

    112,    Sewing  C,2,d   4, 6, 37,
                            85, 98, 99,
                            102, 115,
                            122, 123,
                            124, 176,
                            181, 230,
                            232, 294,
                            364

    123,    Internal        C,3,a
            Combustion
            Engines

    125,    Stone Working   C,7

    126,    Stoves and      C,3,a   606

    128,    Surgery C,1     304, 364

    131,    Tobacco C,2,b;  4, 364, 372,
                    C,5,b   375

    135,    Tent, Canopy,           28, 919
            Umbrella, or
            Cane

    136,    Batteries:      C,4     615,616,
            Thermoelectric          641
            Photoelectric

    138,    Pipes and Tubular,      A,2;C,  12, 34.1, 37,
                    3,b     188, 222,
                            398, 583,
                            586, 592,
                            594, 598,
                            615, 920

    139,    Textiles: Weaving       C,2,b   10, 35, 37,
                            188, 222,
                            398, 583,
                            586, 592,
                            594, 598,
                            615, 920

    140,    Wireworking     C,2,e   225, 369

    148,    Metal Treat-    B;C,4;  411, 420,
            ment    C,6     450, 457,
                            546, 548,
                            553, 558,
                            570, 593,
                            610, 611,
                            615, 620,
                            621, 627,
                            628, 650,
                            651, 660,
                            661, 666,
                            674, 680,
                            681, 684,
                            685, 941

    149,    Explosive and   B       323, 357,
            Thermic Comp-           546
            positions or
            Charges

    150,    Purses, Wallets,        A,2     34.1, 912
            and Protective
            Covers

    152,    Resilient Tires C,5,d   196
            and Wheels

    156,    Adhesive Bonding        C,7     296,304
            and Miscellaneous               411, 413
            Chemical                600, 604,
            Manufacture             612, 614,
                            620, 686,
                            934

    160,    Flexible or     C,3,d   121, 131,
            Portable Closure,               189
            Partition, or Panel

    162,    Paper Making and        C,2,b   26, 174, 233,
            Fiber Liberation        C,2,c   239, 245,
                            293, 297,
                            299, 302,
                            411, 535,
                            537

    164,    Metal Founding  C,3,a;C,7       585, 591

    165,    Heat Exchange   C,9     613, 615

    169,    Fire Exting-    C,5,a   608, 920
            uishers

    174,    Electricity:    C,4     369, 372,
            Conductors and          375, 397,
            Insulators              573, 582,
                            592, 595,
                            601, 604,
                            608, 611,
                            615, 620,
                            621, 630,
                            901

    178,    Telegraphy              592

    180,    Motor   C,3,d
            Vehicles

    181,    Acoustics       C,3,c   131, 297,304

    188,    Brakes  C,5,c   64,245,564

    191,    Electricity:    C,4
            Transmission to Vehicles

    192,    Clutches and    C,5,c   64.1
            Power-Stop Control

    198,    Conveyors:      C,2,c   98
            Power-Driven

    200,    Electricity:    C,4     545, 617,
            Circuit Makers          618
            and Breakers

    204,    Chemistry:      C,4;C,6  245, 364,
            Electrical and          375, 544,
            Wave Energy             546, 547,
                            567, 570,
                            596, 606,
                            612, 615,
                            621, 626,
                            629, 643,
                            650, 658,
                            666, 670,
                            672, 673,
                            674, 678,
                            680, 933,
                            935

    206,    Special Re-     A,1;C,  2, 3, 17,
            ceptacle or     3,a     23, 34.1, 571,
            Package         576, 583,
                            588, 594,
                            906

    208,    Mineral Oils;   B
            Processes and
            Products

    210,    Liquid Puri-    C,5,b   233, 304,
            fication or             566
            Separation

    211,    Supports:               8, 23, 27
            Racks

    214,    Material or     A,1
            Article
            Handling

    215,    Bottles and     C,3,a   34, 34.1
            Jars

    217,    Wooden Re-      C,3,a
            ceptacles

    219,    Electric        C,4;C,7 385, 556,
            Heating         564, 594,
                            596, 650,
                            934, 939,
                            940

    220,    Receptacles     A,2;C,  34, 34.1, 615,
                    3,a     643,646,
                            648, 912

    222,    Dispensing              12

    223,    Apparel Appa-           4, 6
            ratus

    228,    Metal Fusion    A,2;C,  558, 576,
            Bonding 3,d;C,  615, 939
                    7;C,9   940

    229,    Envelops,       A,1;C,
            Wrappers, and   3,a     7
            Paperboard Boxes

    238,    Railways:       C,3,d   544, 595,
            Surface Track           598, 603

    239,    Fluid Sprink-   C,3,b   17, 905
            ling, Spraying,
            and Diffusing

    241,    Solid Mater-    C,5,b
            ial Comminution
            or Disintegra-
            tion

    242,    Winding,        A,1
            Tensioning,
            or Guiding

    245,    Wire Fabrics    C,2,b   225, 549,
            and Structure           592, 596,
                            608

    248,    Supports        A,2;C,  23, 27, 98
                    3,d

    249,    Static Molds    C,3,a   364, 544,
                            585, 602

    250,    Radiant Energy  C,3,c

    252,    Compositions    A,1;B   1, 15, 324
                            411, 546,
                            550, 570,
                            611, 620,
                            900, 920

    254,    Implements              585
            or Apparatus
            for Applying
            Pushing or
            Pulling Force

    256,    Fences  C,2,a;
                    C,2,b

    257,    Active Solid-   C, 4,
            State Devices
            (e.g.,Transistors,
            Solid-State Diodes)     620

    260,    Chemistry of    B       304, 357,
            Carbon Com-             364, 411,
            pounds          413, 419,
                            446, 470,
                            515, 546,
                            910

    261,    Gas and C,8
            Liquid Contact
            Apparatus

    264,    Plastic and     C,7     63
            Nonmetallic
            Article Shaping
            or Treating:
            Processes

    266,    Metallurgical   C,3,a
            Apparatus

    267,    Spring Devi-    C,9     582, 591,
            ces             592, 605

    269,    Work Holders    C,9

    273,    Amusement De-   C,9     11, 583
            vices: Games

    277,    Joint Packing   C,5,a   131, 364,
                            375, 580

    280,    Land Vehicles   C,9     544

    283,    Printed Mat-    C,3,d   927
            ter

    285,    Pipe Joints     C,5,a   578
            or Couplings

    289,    Knots and       C,2,b   4, 369
            Knot Tying

    292,    Closure Fast-           579
            eners

    293,    Vehicle Fen-            595
            ders

    301,    Land Vehicles:          31, 579
            Wheels and Axles

    310,    Electrical      C,4     546, 569
            Generator or
            Motor Structure

    312,    Supports:               3, 13
            Cabinet Structure

    313,    Electric Lamp   C,4     364, 369,
            and Discharge           375, 398,
            Devices         548, 554,
                            555, 560,
                            579, 592,
                            608

    318,    Electricity:    C,4
            Motive Power
            Systems

    333,    Wave Trans-     C,3,c
            mission Lines
            and Networks

    335,    Electricity:    C,4     611, 900
            Magnetically
            Operated
            Switches,
            Magnets, and
            Electromagnets

    336,    Inductor        C,4     592,
            Devices         621,900

    337,Electricity:        C,4     616
            Electrothermal-
            ly or Thermally
            Actuated
            Switches

    338,    Electrical      C,4     457, 592
            Resistors

    340,    Communicat-     C,4
            ions: Elec-
            trical

    343,    Communicat-     C,4     225
            ions: Radio
            Wave Antennas

    346,    Recorders       C,5,d   306, 307

    351,    Optics: Eye             38
            Examining Vis-
            ion Testing and
            Correcting

    355,    Photocopying            29

    359,    Optics:  Sys    C,3,c   1, 30, 364,
            tems (Including
            Communication)
            and Ele-                438, 473,
            ments           910, 918

    360,    Dynamic Mag-    C,4     900
            netic Informat-
            ion Storage
            Retrieval

    369,    Dynamic C,3,c   66.1, 908
            Information
            Storage or
            Retrieval

    374,    Thermal Meas-   VI,C,9
            suring and
            Testing

    376,    Induced C,9     558, 570,
            Nuclear Re-             649, 655
            actions:  Processes,
            Systems, and Ele-
            ments

    379,    Telephonic
            Communications  C,4

    383,    Flexible Bags   34.1

    400,    Typewriting     C,2,c   98
            Machines

    401,    Coating          364
            Implements With
            Material Supply

    403,    Joints and      C,5,a   411, 426,
            Connections             544, 591,
                            594, 609,
                            625, 630

    404,    Road Struct-    C,3,d
            ure, Process,
            or Apparatus

    405,    Hydraulic and   C,3,d   588, 595,
            Earth Engi-             598, 615
            neering

    406,    Conveyors:      C,3,b
            Fluid Current

    411,    Expanded,       C,5,d
            Threaded,
            Driven, Headed,
            Tool-Deform, or Locked-Threaded
            Fasteners

    413,    Sheet Metal             544
            Container
            Making

    416,    Fluid React-    C,5,d   344, 551
            ion Surfaces
            (i.e., Impel-
            lers)

    419,    Powder
            Metallurgy
            Processes               539.5, 548

    420,    Alloys or Metal-        VI,B    601, 650,
            lic Compositions                653, 658,
                            664, 671,
                            672, 673,
                            674, 678,
                            681, 684,
                            930

    422,    Chemical        B;C,3,a
            Apparatus
            and Process
            Disinfecting,
            Deodorizing,
            Preserving, or
            Sterilizing,

    423,    Chemistry of    B       366, 367,
            Inorganic               538, 539
            Compounds

    424,    Drug, Bio-      B       98, 907
            affecting and
            Body Treating
            Compositions

    425,    Plastic C,3,d   63
            Article or
            Earthenware
            Shaping or
            Treating:
            Apparatus

    426,    Food or Edi-    B       21
            ble Material:
            Processes, Com-
            positions, and
            Products

    427,    Coating Pro-    C,6     17, 155,
            cesses          192, 195,
                            301, 302,
                            357, 411,
                            446, 484,
                            485, 489,
                            546, 547,
                            548, 559,
                            560, 564,
                            615, 621,
                            643, 650,
                            656, 658,
                            659, 669,
                            680, 900,
                            901, 906,
                            915, 916,
                            917, 918,
                            919, 928,
                            933, 936,
                            937, 938,
                            939, 940

    429,    Chemistry:      C,4     566, 596,
            Electrical              613
            Current
            Producing
            Apparatus,
            Product, and
            Process

    431,    Combustion      C,3,a   364

    433,    Dentistry,      C,1     607, 93233,
                    C,9     195, 411

    434,    Education and           3, 12, 15,
            Demonstration,          29, 156, 187

    439,    Electrical
            Connectors.     C,4;C,5,a       901

    446,    Amusement
            Devices: Toys   C,9     7, 8, 11, 12,
                            16

    451,    Abrading        B       372, 544

    462,Books, Strips,
            and Leaves
            for Manifolding

    464,    Rotary  C,2,a
            Shafts, Gud-
            geons, Hous-
            ings, and Flex-
            ible Couplings
            for Rotary
            Shafts

    470,    Threaded,
            Headed Fastener,
            or Washer Making:
            Process and
            Apparatus,      A,2

    472,    Amusement Devices       13, 29

    474,    Endless Belt    C,2,c   196, 225
            Power Trans-            364, 397,
            mission Systems         544
            or Components

    520,    Synthetic       B       357, 364,
            Resins or Natural               396, 411
            Rubbers         413, 539.5,
                            546, 626

    585,    Chemistry of    B
            Hydrocarbon
            Compounds

    VI.     RELATION TO CERTAIN OTHER CLASSES

    A.      Intermediate-articles*

    1.      Packages, Class 206, provides, in general, for mercantile units in
    which a plurality of articles* are held together by an extraneous element
    which is discarded before the article is used.  A plurality of articles
    which are not yet detached from each other, being held together by material
    intrinsic to the material of which the articles are made, generally is
    classified in this class (428); however, Class 59, subclass 77 provides for
    a series of staple blanks which are partially shaped and integrally
    connected.  Class 229, subclass 75 provides for a plurality of envelope
    blanks integrally connected in strip form.  A package designed to be used
    or  disposed of in toto is generally classified herein; see subclasses 2
    and 576.  See also the references to Class 252 in part B, below.

    Stock material in roll or coil form, or wound in the form of a coil, will
    be classified in Class 428; however, any further limitations as to the
    roll, or coil or package, as for example, an overlapping roll edge, an edge
    or convolution taped or secured to an under layer*, or a detail as to the
    mandrel, etc., is considered to be significant structure for the roll and
    placement in Class 206, subclasses 389+ is indicated.

    A separate and distinct interliner or sheet* wound into the convolutions
    and which is not ordinarily part of the stock material is considered to be
    significant roll structure for Class 206.  A liner sheet adhered to a
    portion of a composite* sheet* or web* and rolled together therewith and
    removable is considered to be part of the stock material and proper for
    Class 428.

    Generally, a product or stock material falling within the definition of
    this class (428) and further modified by the bare recital that such product
    or material (a) is in the form of a roll, reel, drum, coil, stack, pile,
    bale, etc., or (b) is within a container or in the form of a package is
    classified in this class (428).

    For purposes of classification in Class 428, the coil, packaged or wound
    form is disregarded and placement is on the basis of the web*, sheet*, or
    other form of product or stock material.

    See Class 206, subclasses 45.31+ for a pouch adapted to receive an
    identification card (unless of the paper envelope type, see Class 229,
    Paper Receptacles).

    In regard to wall structure of Class 206-type receptacles, see part C,3,a,
    below.

    A wound strand package is in Class 242, subclasses 159+, which also has a
    search note setting out its line with Class 206.

    An intermediate-article* so shaped as to be suitable for handling is in
    this class (428); however, a claim to a pile or stack of such articles,
    when it does not form a work-piece* which is subsequently worked as a unit,
    is in Class 214, subclass 10.5.

    2.      Blanks, etc.

    A claim, even though stated to be a "blank" which describes or is readable
    on the structure of a completed article* is classified with the article*,
    for such a claim is either generic to both the blank and the article, and,
    therefore, considered to be best classified with the completed article, or
    is to a subcombination which is best classifiable within an appropriate
    subcombination class, or, if none, in the article class.

    Class 2, subclass 143 provides for blanks which are to be used in making
    collars for garments.

    Class 10, subclasses 11+ provide for bolt blanks, and subclass 62 provides
    for spike blanks.

    Class 24, subclasses 20+ provide for a package tie which is a metal band
    which is to be bent, cut, or formed up to make a connection.

    Class 36, subclasses 47+ provide for blanks used in the production of shoe
    uppers.

    Class 59, subclasses 8, 12 and 35 provide for chain blanks, subclass 62
    provides for horseshoe blanks, and subclass 77 provides for staple blanks
    which are partially shaped and integrally connected.

    Class 63, subclasses 15+ provide for a finger-ring blank which already is a
    ring.

    Class 76, subclasses 101.1+ provide for a metal tool or implement blank.

    Class 101, subclasses 404.1+ provide for blanks for printing plates and
    printing members.

    Class 138 provides for tube and ring blanks which are tubes which can hold
    fluid.

    Class 150, subclasses 127+ provides for blanks used in making pocketbooks.

    Class 220, subclasses 62+ provides for a can or other metallic receptacle
    blank.

    Class 229, Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 100+ for a
    blank for forming a paperboard box.

    Class 248, subclass 248 provides for a blank from which a sheet-material
    supporting bracket can be made.

    B.      Compounds and Compositions

    A patent claiming a single layer*, film, filament*, or fiber*, or a mass*,
    with a limitation to the material(s) of which it is comprised, but with no
    recitation of significant structure, will be placed in the appropriate
    compound or composition class.  The following are considered to be
    significant structure:

    1.      An external configuration which is not planar or cylindrical, e.g.,
    aperture, fold, varying thickness, etc.

    2.      The recitation of a numerical dimension or designation of metal as
    a foil or leaf

    3.      A product composed of at least three layers*.

    4.      A coated strand, wire, fiber, filament, rod or strand.

    5.      An interconnected void structure.

    6.      Porosity in a nonparticulate metal.

    The following are not considered to be significant structure:

    1.      Random distribution of elements* such as fillers or reinforcements
    (e.g., fibers*) within a product  or randomly disposed pores or cells
    (i.e., no particular pattern or arrangement) in a porous, cellular or
    foamed product, wherein the overall structure is neither limited nor
    influenced by these elements*, even though the elements* or pores
    themselves may have structural limitations.

    2.      Internal characteristics, such as crystalline form, molecular
    orientations, etc., when such characteristics have no relation to the shape
    of the product.

    3.      The presence of the composition as a coating on an unnamed
    substrate.

    A product described by a functional or chemical name only (e.g., table,
    wood, etc.) is not considered to have significant structure; however,
    limitations such as plywood (indicating layers*), tables with legs, etc.,
    are considered to define structural limitations.

    Also, a patent for a product where the presence of structure (e.g.,
    cellular) or the degree thereof is a mere manifestation of the material or
    composition will likewise be placed in the appropriate material or
    composition class.  Further, a product defined in terms of its properties
    (e.g., tensile strength, elongation) is not considered a "structurally
    defined" product, as provided for in this class.

    In regard to a patent which has a claim to a product which is classifiable
    in this class (428), subclasses 411+, but which recites no significant
    structural limitations, and a claim to a coating material compound or
    composition which is included in at least a part of the claimed product,
    and claim to a significant process of coating, the patent is classified
    according to the coating material.

    Compositions, except for those in Classes 75, 208, 260, 423, 520, 585, and
    portions of Class 252, are generally assigned to a class on the basis of
    disclosed or claimed use.  When classification is called for in different
    main classes, based upon the components of the composition or claims
    pertaining to a plurality of uses, properties or functions, a patent is
    assigned as an original to that class or portion of a class coming first in
    the list given in the main class definition of Class 252, (5) Note. This
    superiority list is not intended as a complete list and will be expanded or
    added to as the relationship between other classes containing compositions
    is determined.

    The enumeration of classes below, in general, follows the priority list of
    Class 252 and covers some additional classes.  Thus, this enumeration is
    not authoritative insofar as priority of classes is concerned.  The
    definitions of these classes should be studied to determine the proper
    placement of patents therein.

    Class 504, subclasses 116+ provide for plant growth regulating compositions
    and subclasses 101+ provide for a fertilizer containing an insecticide,
    fungicide, or deodorant.

    Class 424 provides for drug, bio-affecting and body-treating compositions.
    Subclasses 1.21, 1.25, 1.29+, and 14+ provide for some articles* and
    stock-materials* which contain a composition of that class.  A
    stock-material* suitable for this class (428), containing a Class 424
    composition to preserve the stock material itself from biological attack,
    is in this class (428).  Residual methods for preserving, disinfecting or
    sterilizing stock-materials are in Class 422.  See part 8, below.

    Class 426 provides for food, beverages and other edible compositions, and
    certain edible articles* and stock-materials*.

    Class 71, provides for fertilizers.

    Class 208, subclasses 14+ provide for compositions made up exclusively of
    mineral oil components.

    Class 585, subclasses 1+ provides for compositions made up exclusively of
    hydrocarbons or a hydrocarbon with a preservative, etc.

    Class 149 provides for explosive and thermic compositions and charges,
    subclasses 2+ providing for one in which at least one ingredient has a
    particular shape or structure, and subclasses 14+ for one having at least
    two separate and distinct superimposed or contiguous layers or forms of
    different components or of components having different properties.  The
    layers must be in direct contact and not be separated by a space or by a
    nonexplosive or nonthermic body.

    Class 508, subclasses 100+ provide for shaped lubricants and massive rigid
    solid bodies, including bearings, which carry a fluent lubricant, and
    subclasses 110+ provide for lubricant compositions generally.

    Class 44 provides for fuel compositions and some combustible fuel articles*
    and stock-materials*.

    Class 148, subclasses 240+ and 22+ provide for certain compositions for
    treating solid metal, and subclass 400.1 for certain stock-materials* and
    compositions produced by a process of that class (148).  See the references
    to this class in parts 4 and 6, below.

    Class 75, subclasses 228+ provide for consolidated metal powder
    compositions, in subclasses 251+ for loose metal powder compositions, and
    in subclasses 95, 256 and 257 for certain additives for molten metal.

    This class (428), subclass 576 provides for a shaped article* to be melted
    in a metallurgical furnace.

    Class 252, in subclasses other than those listed above or below, provides
    for special utility compositions.  In most cases, Class 252 provides for
    compositions having a random mixture of components, while stock-materials*
    are classified in this or another stock-material class.  However, it is
    noted that some subclasses in Class 252 provide for more than mere
    compositions; for example, subclass 176 provides for packages and
    heterogeneous arrangements of water-softening and related-function
    compositions, and subclass 447 provides for shaped catalysts.

    ---CDEF---Class 510 provides for cleaning compositions and auxiliary or
    perfecting
    compositions therefor, while certain subclasses therein, such as subclasses
    404, 438+, etc., provide for packages or heterogeneous arrangements, while
    subclasses 445+, etc., provide for solid, shaped macroscopic articles or
    structures.

    Class 106 provides for a composition which is in fluent or solid
    noncoherent form which is adapted for coating or impregnating and for
    change to a less fluent form, or solid coherent form, by setting (e.g.,
    concrete, plastic, etc.), by chemical reaction, by removal of solvent, by
    solidification from a molten state, etc.  In a patent directed to a filler
    or pigment for a coating composition, the recitation of size or structure
    of the constituent* particles or fibers is not sufficient to exclude said
    patent from Class 106. See especially subclasses 36, 117, 235, 241, 251,
    253+, 266, 272, 275, 276, 280, 281+, 288+, 636, 784, and 816.

    Class 51 provides for abrading composition or some stock material; see
    especially subclasses 294, 295, and 297 for other abrasive stock material,
    or for a method of making abrasive material such as ``sandpaper."

    Class 451 provides for abrading materials in usable form, as a ``tool"
    under that class definition.  For example, subclasses 526+ provide for
    ``sandpaper."

    Class 260, subclasses 2+ and 520 Classes provide for a synthetic resin or
    Natural Rubbers (spinnable, film-forming, etc.), and Class 260, subclasses
    709+ provide for a vulcanizable natural gum (e.g., rubber).

    Under certain circumstances, the relation between Class 260, 520 Classes
    and Class 428 shifts between combination and subcombination.  For example,
    the subcombination of a resin composition is in Class 260 and 520 Classes;
    a layered product structurally defined and containing the resin composition
    as a layer is now a combination which is classified in Class 428.  However,
    the combination of the layered product and a resin, when the layered
    product is used as filler for the resin is again classified in Class 260
    and 520 Classes as a resin composition.

    Class 252, subclasses 259.5, 299, 302, 363.5, 367.1, and 378+ provide for
    compositions on a nonfunctional basis.

    Class 423 provides for inorganic compounds, and in subclasses 265+ provides
    for compositions having an inorganic compound and an agent which improves
    the general utility of the compound.

    Class 430, Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, appropriate subclasses for stock material and products which are
    radiation sensitive and limited to use in imagery and a finished imaged
    article chemically defined.  A claim to a finished picture or photograph is
    classified in Class 428.

    Class 520 provides for synthetic resins, natural rubbers, compositions and
    modifications thereof.

    C.      Articles* and Stock-materials*

    1.  Life-sciences related materials.

    Classes 3, 47, 433, and 449 take articles*, but not stock-materials*.  A
    cut, natural plant, treated to prolong the characteristics of life, is in
    class 47, and that class (47) provides for the combination of a receptacle
    and a cut plant either treated or with means to prolong the characteristics
    of life.

    Class 128 is the locus for a patent directed to a stock-material* product
    when (1) solely disclosed to be worn by, or   attached to, the body (e.g.,
    sanitary napkin, diaper, etc.) and to be a receptor for a body discharge
    (2) solely disclosed as a shield or protective device to be worn on, or
    attached to, a body member or part (e.g., bandage, dressing, etc.) and
    having a therapeutic use or (3) a patent to a stock-material* product whose
    disclosure includes a Class 128 utility as set out above or in the class
    definition thereof, and a general utility for Class 428, but in which one
    claim is specific to the Class 128 disclosed use.

    2.      Textiles and related materials

    Certain textile manufacturing classes provide for their own products, and
    Classes 2, 5 and 245 provide for products only, while some other textile
    products are provided for in this class.

    a.  Fibers, strands, rods, etc..

    Class 19, subclasses 144+ provide for a process of, or means for,
    assembling fibers* together into a lap, sliver or web*, with some other
    material. Stock-material* products of a Class 19 process are classified in
    this class (428).

    Class 52, subclasses 720.1+ provide for a miscellaneous article* which is
    an elongated, rigid structure.  See also the reference to Class 52 in part
    3d, below.

    Class 57, subclasses 200+ provide for a stock-material* strand* consisting
    of, or comprising, a claimed twisted or twined constituent*; or for a
    stock-material* product (e.g., web*, sheet*, etc.) distinguished only by
    such twisted or twined strands* (as claimed) employed in the manufacture
    thereof, or a stock-material* product comprising coated or impregnated
    strands* in which the coating or impregnation took place prior to assembly
    of said strands* to form the product, no matter how the twist was made,
    whether by a Class 57 process or apparatus or otherwise.

    The "twist" or its equivalent term is applicable either to plural fibers*
    or filaments* which are twisted about each other, or to a monofilament
    which is turned or twisted about its longitudinal axis.  A crimped fiber is
    classifiable in Class 428, the crimp being out of the plane of the fiber.

    This class (428) does not exclude a yarn, strand*, or other constituent*
    unless the claim recites at least a "twist" or its equivalent; or a
    property due to, or resulting from, twisting a fiber* or filament*.  There
    are certain terms which have been accepted as denoting a twisting fiber* or
    filament*, and, if used in a claim, classification in Class 57 is
    indicated, provided all other requirements therefor are met.  Some of these
    terms are:

    (a)     plying, doubling, twining, twisting (all such terms are considered
    to be synonymous) and indicate turning about the longitudinal axes of the
    fiber* filament or yarn or bundles of yarns;

    (b)     filament looped upon itself;

    (c)     turns of twist per inch;

    (d)     false twist;

    (e)     twist to treat, followed by untwisting;

    (f)     spun staple fiber yarn e.g., wool, cotton, etc.;

    (g)     "Z" or "S" twists or piles;

    (h)     roving.

    In the event of a disclosure which includes (1) "twisted" strands, fibers,
    filaments for Class 57, and (2) nontwisted elements proper for Class 428,
    the following guidelines are to be followed in accordance with the claims:

    1.      A claim generic to both modifications will be classified in Class
    428 as an original with a cross-reference, if needed, to Class 57.

    2.      A claim specific to either the twisted or nontwisted fibers will be
    classified in Class 428 or Class 57, respectively, with a proper
    cross-reference to the other class as needed.

    3.      A claim to the twisted Class 57 modification and  a claim to the
    nontwisted product will be classified as an original in Class 428 with the
    proper cross-referencing.

    Class 84, subclasses 199 and 297+ provide for strings for musical
    instruments.

    Class 256, subclasses 6+ provide for barbed-strand fence stock-material*,
    and in subclass 46 for analogous nonbarbed stock-material*.

    Class 464, Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, subclasses 51+ provides for flexible shafting; and
    subclasses 179+ provides for rigid shafting.

    b.      Interengaged fibers or strands

    Class 59, subclasses 78+ provide for a chain formed of linked elements.

    Class 66, subclasses 69+ provide for a knitted article or stock-material*,
    and especially subclasses 190+ for stock-material* including knitted
    material with nonknitted material held in its loops.

    Class 87, subclasses 1 through 13, provide for (1) stock-material* which
    consists of, or includes, a braid, net, or lace component, or (2) a product
    resulting from an operation(s) within the scope of that class (87), which
    product is either coated or combined with a material which is the product
    of an operation beyond the scope of Class 87 (e.g., lamination, etc.).

    Class 131, subclasses 321+ provide for stock-material* specified as being a
    filter and of indeterminate shape (e.g., mass), or approximating the shape
    (e.g., coil, tube, cylinder, rod*, etc.), of the article or appliance with
    which it is intended to be used, requiring no further treatment than
    tearing or cutting to proper size* stock-material* of any other shape,
    recited so that some shape modification is required, is classified in Class
    428.

    Class 139, subclasses 383+ provide for a single or plural layer* woven
    stock-material* product made only by a Class 139 process and no other
    operation.  A patent directed to a woven product possessing deformed,
    coated or impregnated strands will be placed in Class 139 where the sole
    disclosure is that a coating, impregnation or deformation of the
    constituent strands took place prior to the weaving.

    Two layers woven together are classified in Class 139.  Two woven layers
    adhered together are classified in Class 428, one layer of woven material
    next to a layer of nonwoven material is classified in Class 428.

    Class 162 provides for a nonstructural (1) single-layer* waterlaid fibrous
    product, (2) plural-layer* product including a layer* of fibers* applied to
    a second layer* by a process provided for in that class (162), or (3) paper
    homogeneously impregnated throughout, even after the web* is formed, and
    note particularly subclasses 141-181.1+, which include any nonstructural
    fiber* (or fiber-containing) product (e.g., particular blend of fibers*),
    whether waterlaid or not.  Also, see notes in Class 162, referring to Class
    428, e.g., Class 162, subclasses 141 and 150 for examples of structural
    fibers.  This class (428), subclass 596, provides for metallic wire cloth
    formed by welding plural all-metal wires at their points of intersection;
    in subclass 605 for a mass of metal fibers, including plural layers of wire
    cloths joined by mechanical compression and sinter bonded into a fibrous
    mass, and in subclass 608 for a mass which includes metal wires, strands or
    strand portions mechanically intertangled, interwoven or interlooped,
    coated with a metal or a layer of metal or nonmetal fibers located between
    two metal layers.

    Class 245 provides for a wire fabric* which is the product of a bending or
    analogous wire-working operation.

    Class 256, subclass 5 provides for barbed-fence fabric*, and in subclass 45
    for analogous nonbarbed material.

    Classes 289, subclass 1.2 provides for an interlacement (knot) of portions
    of one or more elongated flexible elements (e.g., strand, rope) forming a
    tie or fastening and including any bend or hitch.

    c.      Belts, etc.

    Class 198, appropriate subclasses provide for an endless conveyor belt or a
    stock material* disclosed solely for use as a conveyor belt.

    Class 474, appropriate subclasses provide for an endless power transmission
    belt or a stock material* disclosed solely for use as a power-transmission
    belt.

    Class 162, subclasses 348+ provide for a flexible endless band-type
    paper-making mold of the Fourdrinier variety.

    Class 400, subclasses 237+ provides for an inked typewriter ribbon.

    d.      Associated fabrics

    Class 2 provides for a stock-material* product of that class, and
    especially subclasses 244 and 274, respectively, for an apparel trimming or
    binding, and 260 for coated stays or stiffeners.

    Class 5, subclass 500 provides for a stock-material* product solely
    disclosed for use as an underpad or cover pad for a mattress, and which
    protects the mattress by receiving discharges of the body, for example,
    infants or hospital patients.  Those cover pads are usually made of
    absorbent material.

    Class 112, subclasses 400+ provides for sewn stock-material*, except for
    sewn stock-material* which includes a discrete mechanical fastener(s), a
    coating, or an adhesive bond, for which see subclasses 102+ of this class
    (428).

    e.      Textiles and manufacture thereof in general

    Class 8 provides for a process of (1) dyeing or bleaching stock-material*;
    (2) treating hides, skins, feathers, or animal tissue with chemicals or
    fluids; (3) improving the felting properties of fibers*; (4) treating
    textile* fabrics* or fibers with fluids, with or without chemical
    modification of the treated material; or (5) a product resulting from any
    of the processes above, where not specifically provided for elsewhere.
    Structured stock is classified in Class 428, Stock Material or
    Miscellaneous Articles, or other appropriate class.

    Class 26 provides for mechanical, nonliquid treatment of textile* fabrics*
    (e.g., napping), subsequent to fabrication, which is not provided for
    elsewhere. Stock-material* products of a Class 26 process are provided for
    in this class (428).

    Class 28, subclasses 72+ provide for a mechanical textile* process not
    elsewhere provided for, a combination of such a process with another
    textile* operation or with a nontextile* operation provided for in some
    other textile* class with a nontextile* operation where such combination is
    not specifically provided for in the other textile* class. Stock-material*
    products of a Class 28 process are provided for in this class (428).

    Class 140 provides for processes of wire-working, e.g., uniting, shaping or
    deforming, but generally not for the products thereof.  For the line
    between Class 140 and the other textile classes, see the main class
    definition of Class 140.

    3.      Static objects and materials.

    a.      Receptacles, chambers, etc. Articles* in the form of receptacles or
    chambers are provided for in a number of classes and portions of classes,
    the most important of which are listed below.  Those which also provide for
    sheet* or web* material, claimed in terms of significant wall structure,
    are indicated by the symbol "#".  Significant wall structure includes seam
    structure (not merely the composition of the seam and adjacent portions),
    spaced wall components, etc.  Also significant for placement in the classes
    marked "#" is specified wall structure in relation to the container (e.g.,
    inside or outside). Thus, a coated or laminated wall in which the
    composition of a layer is recited as being on the inside (or outside) of a
    container is considered to be significant wall structure and placement in
    classes marked "#" is indicated.

    See reference to Class 138 in this section for examples of wall structure
    which would also be considered to be significant for placement in such
    classes, and for example which would not be so considered.

    Class 123 provides for certain chambers in an internal combustion engine.

    Class 126, subclasses 19+ provide for ovens.

    Class 164, subclasses 349+ provide for sand molds, and subclass 374 for a
    flask section to be used in a metal-casting operation.

    Class 206 provides for a special receptacle.

    Class 215 provides for bottles and jars.

    Class 217 provides for wooden receptacles.

    Class 220 provides for receptacles in general, and for metallic receptacles
    in particular.  Subclasses 415+ provide for linings for receptacles as
    specified therein.  It will be noted that similar structure, at present, is
    provided for in the appropriate subclasses of Class 428 and the above noted
    subclasses in Class 220.  As of the date of this order, no attempt has been
    made to screen and transfer the art to Class 428.

    Class 229 provides for paper receptacles.  See especially subclass 71 for a
    paper-like display envelope for receiving an identification card, and other
    appropriate subclasses for receptacle structure as provided for therein; a
    coated wall structure, where the coating is specifically defined to be
    either on the inside or outside of the bag or receptacle will be considered
    receptacle structure and will indicate placement in Class 229.  This
    coating may be for the purpose of acting as a vapor barrier, waterproofing
    layer, or antislide means, etc., and is especially related to the contents
    of the bag or receptacle.

    Class 249 provides for articles* which are static molds.

    Class 266, subclass 39 provides for articles* which are receptacles for
    treating molten metal.

    Class 432, subclass 247 provides for an article* which is a heating or
    heat-retaining chamber.

    b.      Other hollow subject matter.

    Class 89 provides generically for an article* which is a gun, shield or gun
    mount.

    Class 138 provides for an article* which is a tube and for tubular
    stock-material* in which the claims include a limitation regarding wall
    structure.  A claim which recites a particular composition as being the
    inside or outside wall of a tube is considered to be significant wall
    structure and placement in Class 138 is indicated. However, a claim which
    recites a tube or conduit having two or more layers* and then recites the
    compositions of the layers*, but does not specify which layer is inside or
    outside, is not considered to include significant wall structure and will
    be placed in Class 428.  Examples of significantly recited coated wall
    structure for classification are:

    1.      A tube having a wall comprising a layer of metal and on the outer
    (or inner) surface thereof a layer of polypropy lens.

    2.      A tube having a laminated wall of three layers, in order from the
    inside to the outside, comprising polyethylene, epoxy, and polypropylene.

    Examples of coated or laminated wall structure which are not significantly
    claimed and which indicate classification in Class 428.

    1.      A tube having a wall structure comprising a layer of metal and a
    layer of polypropylene.

    2.      A tube having a laminated wall of three layers comprising, in
    order, polyethylene, epoxy, and polypropylene.

    Class 239, subclasses 548+ provide for a unitary plural-outlet means, and
    subclass 589 for a rigid fluid-confining distributor for ejection of
    fluents and slurries by slinging, sloshing, centrifugally throwing, etc.,
    such material in the form of fog, mist droplets, etc.

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 276+ provide for an article* which is a
    bearing sleeve, or liner.  See also the reference to Class 508 in part "B",
    above.


    Class 406, subclass 191 provides for conduits for fluid-current conveying.

    c.      Structures related to radiant or wave energy

    Class 181, subclasses 33+ provide for an article* or a stock-material* with
    particular claimed structure (either internal or external) for the purpose
    of deadening, attenuating, or amplifying sound.

    Class 250, subclass 515.1 provides for an article* which is a radiation
    shield.

    Class 274, subclasses 41+ provide for a stock-material* having significant
    structure disclosed for receiving records of sound or having such records
    formed therein or thereon.

    Class 333 provides for an article* of use in an electrical wave
    transmission line or network.

    Class 343 provides, especially in subclasses 741+, an article*, e.g., an
    antenna, used in radio-wave communications.

    Class 359, subclasses 36+ provides for a liquid crystal device, per se,
    which controls light direction or intensity by (1) deforming or relatively
    displacing portions of, or changing the shape or size of an optically
    reflecting or transmitting medium, surface or interface, or (2) changing
    the composition, internal structure, or the physical or chemical properties
    of such a medium, surface or interface, and in subclasses 838+ for a mirror
    having claimed optically significant structure, e.g., concave, convex,
    polarizing, selectively absorbing, optically critical thickness, etc. A
    plural layer product, one layer of which merely acts as a support or base
    for a coating which affects the transmission of light therethrough, which
    one layer is uniformly opaque or transparent or translucent, is excluded
    from Class 359, and will be found in the appropriate subclasses of Class
    428, see especially subclass 426.

    Class 369 provides for a record of information which is to be reconstructed
    dynamically by other than magnetic means. See, in particular, subclasses
    272+.  A disc with/without grooves which does not include recorded
    information is classified in Class 428, subclasses 64.1; and see especially
    subclass 908 for a collection of stock materials having an impression
    retention layer.  Class 430 provides for a finished photograph which is
    chemically defined.  See the note to Class 428 in the main class definition
    of Class 430.

    Class 422, Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, appropriate subclasses for certain receptacles
    and chambers in which a chemical reaction takes place.

    d.      Other structures and static object.  A patent to a rigid laminate
    or stock-material* merely defined as a building component, e.g., floor,
    wall, stile, etc., will be placed in Class 428.

    Class 40, subclasses 39+ provide for a fluid-operated, rotatable-changeable
    exhibitor which may resemble a special occasion ornament for Class 428, and
    subclasses 7+ and 156 for a frame, as defined therein, with or without an
    identification card therein, and not having any specific printed indicia
    thereon; see also the reference to Class 283, below.

    Class 49, subclasses 440+ provide for a channel guide of stock-material*
    with specific structure to facilitate securing it to a support, and
    subclasses 475+ for a closure seal or striker gasket of stock-material*
    provided with means for attachment to a support.

    Class 52, provides for a product in the form of a web* or sheet* generally
    employed as a portion of a building structure and including (1) a stiffener
    or edging extending along a face thereof, or (2) means facilitating
    securement of the web or sheet to a support, e.g., a flange at the edge of
    a panel for receiving a nail, or fastener apertures at the edge of a panel.
     Class 52 also provides for:  a composite panel formed of separate sheets
    which are secured together by a mechanical fastener; a composite panel
    having spaced facing sheets with inturned, opposed flanges that form an
    edge of the panel; and a panel which interfits with a support such as a
    frame or shaft.  See, particularly, subclasses 98+ for a fracturable
    building component, subclass 105 for a component with indicia, subclass 177
    for a component having a specified wear or friction surface, subclasses
    311.1+ for an ornamental or decorative component, subclasses 393+ for a
    yieldable component, subclasses 474+ for a panel held by a preassembled or
    prepositioned frame or shaft, subclasses 596+ for a stone-like module,
    subclass 631 for a bent component, subclasses 633+ for an openwork
    component, subclasses 656 for a frame, per se, subclasses 716.1+ for an in
    situ attached-type channel or trim member, and subclasses 782.1+ for a
    composite laminate with a disparate edging or an imperforate face.

    Class 109 provides for safes and components thereof, bank protection and
    related devices, and in subclass 495 provides for a shield or protector for
    preventing a projectile, or knife or sword, or bomb fragment from
    contacting a person or thing.  This could be a portable device or one which
    attaches (i.e., has attaching means such as belts, straps, etc.) to a bomb
    for containing the fragments.

    Class 160 provides for a panel structure for use in a flexible or portable
    closure or partition, especially in subclasses 385+ for fabric having a
    modified edge (e.g., loops) for attachment to an elongated support.

    Class 180, subclass 68.6 provides for an article* which is a motor vehicle
    radiator protector.

    Class 228, subclass 56 provides for a metal article* useful as filler
    material in a metal fusion bonding operation.

    Class 238 provides for an article* which is a railroad rail.

    Class 248, subclass 248 provides for an article* which is a shelf support
    made from a single blank.  The blank itself is classified in this class
    (428).

    Class 283, subclasses 74+ provides for an identification card having
    printed matter thereon.

    Class 404 provides for a road or pavement which has structure peculiar for
    pedestrian or vehicular traffic.  A laminated or layered* product with no
    structure which peculiarly adapts it for use for vehicles or pedestrians,
    such as a crown, grading, contour, etc., is classifiable in Class 428.

    Class 405, subclasses 276+ provide for metallic sheet piling.

    Class 425, subclass 470 provides for a shaping or casting surface for
    nonmetal material.

    Class 588, provides for the production of articles made with or from
    hazardous or toxic waste to contain the waste.

    4.      Electric and magnetic elements. The classes listed below, with the
    exception of those marked with the symbol "#", do not provide for electric
    or magnetic stock-materials*.  The marked classes or portions of classes
    provide for stock-material* only when such material has a claimed internal
    or external structure which makes the material of utility only in a single
    class.  In general, an electrode is either an article* for the classes
    listed, a stock-material* for this class (428), or a composition for a
    composition class, notably Class 75, or Class 252, subclasses 500+.

    Class 136, subclasses 236+ provide for thermocouple junction
    stock-material*.

    Class 148, subclasses 33+ provide for P-N junction stock-material* made by
    a process of that class.

    Class 174 provides for stock-material* in the form of an electrical
    conductor with a covering of dielectric material wherein the conductor
    includes structure disclosed to be specially designed to conduct
    electricity, or the dielectric includes structure disclosed to be
    specifically designed to space the conductor from ground or from a device
    of otherwise different potential.

    Class 191, subclass 22 provides for conductive articles* specifically
    designed to transmit electricity to vehicles.

    Class 200, subclasses 262+ provide for electric switch contact elements
    which go beyond stock-materials*, e.g., by having two spaced conductors,
    etc.

    Class 204, subclasses 193-308 provide for articles* which are elements of
    an electrochemical cell.

    Class 219, subclasses 145+ and 552+ provide for articles* which are
    electric heating elements.

    Class 257, Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State
    Diodes), provides for electronic devices or components that are made up
    primarily of semiconductor materials which operate by the movement of
    charge carriers - electrons or holes - which undergo energy level changes
    within the material and can modify an electrical input to achieve
    rectification, amplification or switching action.  A mere named combination
    of doped semiconductor materials where the sole use of the device is
    disclosed as an active solid state device results in classification in
    Class 257.  Recitation of electrical contacts or leads is not necessary to
    classification in Class 257.

    Class 310, subclasses 248+ provide for articles* which are electric
    generator or motor brushes.

    Class 313, appropriate subclasses, especially subclass 326, provide for
    electrode structure for electric lamps and other discharge devices which
    are defined by their structure for in such devices.  A mere recitation of a
    wire, rod, strip, cylinder, etc., is not considered to be structure for
    Class 313, nor is a recitation only of the electrode composition or of a
    base and/or coating. Nonmetallic* rods, strands, fibers, etc., which are
    structurally defined, but do not include structure for use as electrodes
    for lamps, are found in Class 428, subclasses 357+; note especially
    subclasses 375+ for coated rods, strands, fibers, etc.  A plurality of
    electrodes, unless specifically related structurally to each other or to
    other structure, for use in a lamp or discharge device will be found in
    Class 428, appropriate subclasses.

    Class 317 provides for articles* of use in electrical applications not
    provided for elsewhere.

    Class 318 provides for articles* used in electric-motive power systems.

    Class 335, subclasses 296+ provide for a magnet or magnetic material
    (including structure, e.g., lamination of work at least two magnetic layers
    disclosed for use as a source of magnetic flux for performing external
    work).

    Class 336, subclasses 233+ provide for a core or magnetic body comprising
    superimposed bundles or layers of magnetic material in the form of sheets,
    rods, or wires, and for single sheets, punchings, rods, or wire which have
    such configuration that they have no utility except in building up of a
    core or coil for use in an inductor device within the class definition
    (e.g., transformer, etc.).

    Class 337, subclass 379 provides for an article* which is a bimetallic
    element of a thermally actuated switch.  This class (428), subclasses 616+
    provide for bimetal thermostat stock-materials*.

    Class 338 provides for electrical resistor stock-material* which is claimed
    in terms of its resistance characteristics.

    Class 340 provides for articles* used in electrical communications.

    Class 360 provides, especially in subclass 131 for a product, which may be
    layered or otherwise structured, which is particularly or uniquely designed
    or arranged to store or record information by a change or variation in the
    magnetic state of the device.  The line between Classes 360 and 428 is as
    follows:

    Class 379 provides for article* used in telephony.

    1.      A product recited as magnetic tape or storage will not suffice to
    place a patent in Class 360 in the absence of recitation of structure of
    the overall product or internal structure of the material, or function,
    unique to magnetic memory or recording.

    2.      Layered products of general utility or otherwise not provided for
    utility are classified in Class 428.  A patent disclosing both a Class 360
    and a Class 428 function, and in which the claims are generic to both
    disclosures on which has a claim specific to the Class 428 disclosure will
    be placed in Class 428 as an original.

    (1)     Note.  The following examples are set out to serve as guidelines in
    determining placement of patents:

    (a)     improved adhesion of magnetic layer to base, greater tensile
    strength of the layer (s) abrasion lubricated surface, improved
    flexibility, etc., are not considered to be be structure or properties
    peculiar to information recording or structure;

    (b)     structure which is directed to improved signal-to-noise ratio,
    signal stability, nondestructive readout (N.D.R.O.), nonprint through of
    signal, signal identity, hysteresis loop, orientation or packing density of
    magnetic signal is significant for Class 360, and patents claiming such
    structure or function will be so classified.

    Class 429, subclasses 40+ provide for a catalytic fuel cell electrode
    structure, subclasses 129+ and 247+ for a battery separator or retainer,
    subclasses 209+ for a battery electrode and subclasses 233+ for a battery
    grid.

    Class 439 provides for articles* which are electrical connectors. See the
    introduction to part 5 a, below.

    5.      Mechanical elements

    a.      Joints.  Those classes or portions of classes which provide for
    joints and connections, viz, Class 160, subclass 42, Classes 277, 285, 403,
    and 439 take a connection or seal between two or more members at
    substantially a single locus where the structure or shape (e.g., ring,
    flange, angular relationship, etc.) of at least one of the members is
    specifically recited.  For a mere joint or connection between two members
    defined merely by the compositions of the members, see this class,
    appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 630+ and 426+ where glass
    is one of the members.

    Class 15 provides, in appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 208+
    for stock-material* product disclosed solely for use as a wiper, dauber or
    polisher for brushing, scrubbing and general cleaning.

    Class 29, subclasses 76.1+ provide for an article* which is a file or rasp,
    and subclasses 95+ provide for an article* which is a cutter.

    Class 30 and Class 83 provide for articles* which are cutting implements
    appropriate to each class.

    Class 51 is referred to in part B, above.

    Class 55 and 210 provide for filters, especially subclasses 522+ of the
    former and 500+ of the latter for such filter product manufactured of or
    including a specific material (e.g., fiber*, coating, etc.), or possessing
    specific structure (e.g., weave, knit, etc.).  Class 55 takes its own
    stock-material* when it specifies that a gas separation takes place or is
    about to take place.  In Class 210 there must be claimed structure,
    internal or external, restricting the stock-material* to filter use. A
    filter generic to Classes 55 and 210 is placed in Class 210.

    Class 131 is discussed in part C, 2, b, above.

    Class 241, subclass 95 provides for a stationary comminuting surface having
    openings.

    c.      Friction elements

    Class 188, subclasses 250+, and Class 192, subclasses 107+ provide for a
    product with a frictional property, where said property is enhanced by
    claimed structure (external, such as disc surface configuration, or
    internal, such as discrete zones of friction material, particular
    arrangements of strands, fibers or layers), where the sole use disclosure
    is as a brake for Class 188, or as a clutch or brake for Class 192.  Where
    the use of the product goes beyond these classes, or there is no claim to
    brake or clutch/brake features, placement in Class 428 is indicated.  See
    also the reference to Class 52 in part C, 3, d, above.

    d.      Other machine elements

    Class 101 provides for a product which is disclosed as a printing plate and
    has significant structure for printing (see subclass 395), or a nonuniform
    (e.g., hydrophylic-hydrophobic) coating only for printing purposes (see
    subclasses 453+), or a hectographic surface (see subclass 473).

    Class 152, subclasses 151+ provides for a resilient tire, subclasses 548+
    for such tire formed of a particular material(s), and subclass 367 for a
    tire patch.

    Class 346, subclasses 134+ provide for a single or plural layer web or
    sheet which is disclosed as a record receiver solely for use with apparatus
    provided for in (1) and (2) of the definition of that class.

    (1)     Note.  A web or sheet disclosed as a record receiver of general
    utility, or for multiple uses, at least one of which is other than for a
    recorder apparatus provided for in Class 346, is classified in the
    appropriate subclass in Class 428, with a cross-reference to Class 346, if
    appropriate.

    (2)     Note.  A web or sheet which has chart graduations thereon will be
    assigned to Class 346, subclass 135.1, regardless of its disclosure.

    Class 411 provides for expanded, threaded, headed, or driven fasteners.

    Class 416, subclasses 223+ provides for an article* which is an impeller or
    turbine blade.

    Class 492, Roll or Roller, provide for rolls and rollers which claim enough
    of the surface and support structure to rotatably mount the roller. Hollow
    cylindrical rollers follow the line specified with regard to Class 138 in
    part C, 3, b, above.

    6.      Coating and coated products.

    Class 148, Metal Treatment, subclasses 206-238 provide for processes of
    carburizing, nitriding, or both (e.g., carbonitriding, etc.) of solid
    metal, and subclasses 316-319 for the resulting stock.

    Class 204, Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, provides for the
    manufacture of stock-material* products by chemical processes involving
    electrical or wave energy, and except for products classifiable in this
    class (428), subclasses 544+, for a stock-material* product disclosed
    solely as made by a process which, per se, would be classified in Class
    204.  A multiple disclosure that the product can be manufactured by either
    a Class 204 process or another process (e.g., spray coating,
    electroless-depositing, etc.) indicates original classification in another
    class (e.g., 428, etc.), with a cross-reference, as needed, to Class 204.

    Class 420 provides for alloys and compositions having a ontinuous phase of
    metal.

    Class 427 provides for the method of applying a coating or impregnation to
    a substrate.

    In relation above, section III F, the following guidelines are to be
    followed in determining whether a process step is significant for
    determining the classification of a patent containing only process claims
    in either Class 427 or Class 428:

    (a)     Any pretreatment or post treatment of a base or applied coating is
    significant, e.g., curing, drying or smoothing of the coating, or cleaning,
    drying or heating of the base, etc.  General statements such as applying,
    impregnating, coating, covering, etc., or allowing to cure, allowing to
    dry, etc., are not considered to be significant method steps.

    (b)     Any specific recitation of the manner in which the coating material
    is applied, e.g., brushing, dipping, padding, spraying, immersing, is
    significant.

    (c)     Any limitations regarding the thickness of a coating or
    nonuniformity of a coating resulting from a process is considered to be
    significant.

    (d)     Specific recitations as to the condition of the coating material
    being applied are significant, except for the following:

    (1)     Any condition also included in an independent composition or
    material claim, such as p4 concentration, etc.

    (2)     A general reference to the state of the coating material as molten,
    in solution, in an organic or inorganic solvent, etc., unless accompanied
    by specific limiting conditions such as time or temperature (even though
    recited as ordinary temperature or room temperature, etc.). However,
    specifically recited solvents such as benzene, carbon tetrachloride,
    sulfuric acid, etc., are considered to be significant.

    Any patent having only process claims in which at least one significant
    limitation is recited, examples of which are given above, is placed in
    Class 427.  All process claims having no significant limitation recited
    will be placed in Class 428.

    Special Note in relation to Class 427:

    As a general rule, specific subclasses in Class 427 are not pointed out as
    pertinent fields of search. Class 427 should be considered, in all
    instances, for the disclosure of a product made by the process in the
    appropriately titled subclass.

    7.      Assembling and/or shaping.  In general, the products of the
    following classes which provide for assembling and/or shaping methods are
    not classified in these classes, but in this class (428), or other
    appropriate product class: Classes 29, 65, 72, 76, 79, 82, 125, 156, 164,
    219, 228, 264, and 413.

    8.      Other manufacturing or treating.

    Class 261, subclasses 94+ and 100+ provide for apparatus under the class
    definition, including a porous mass* or porous sheet*, respectively, for
    providing intimate contact between a gas and a liquid.

    9.      Miscellaneous devices.

    Class 16, subclasses 221+ provide for hinges of indefinite length.

    Class 33, subclasses 12+ provide for stock-material* fabrics* with pattern
    lines (guide or gauge lines) thereon, and subclass 567 for a plural layer
    product disclosed solely for use as a gauge block.

    Class 36 provides for an article* which is specifically shaped or contoured
    to be part of a boot, shoe, or legging, e.g., heel, innersole, vamp, etc.

    Class 102 provides for an article* which is an explosive or ammunition
    device.

    Class 116, subclass 22 provides for an article* which is an animal
    frightening device.

    Class 165, subclass 185 provides for an article* which is a heat
    transmitter.

    Class 267 provides for an article* which is a spring device.

    Class 269 provides for an article* which is a work holder.

    Class 280, subclasses 11.18 and 28 provide for an article* which is a
    runner or runner base for a land vehicle.

    Class 288, subclasses 51-55 provide for articles* which are soldering irons.

    Class 374, subclasses 529+ provide for articles* modified over and above
    the material or composition thereof, to produce motion as the result of
    changes in the thermal condition of the devices or structures, and
    subclasses 205+ provide for articles* combined with additional structure to
    form an arrangement which provides an indication produced from motion
    resulting from changes in the thermal condition of the articles*.

    Class 376 provides for an article* which is a nuclear element and for
    stock-material* of such element having a unique adaptation for such use.
    For example, a jacketed material having passages for the escape of fission
    products is a unique adaptation, but a merely sheathed material is not.

    Class 446, Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 217+ for spinning type toys
    which are similar in construction to special occasion ornaments for Class
    428, subclasses 7+.

    Classs 473, Amusement Devices: Games, subclasses 316+ for an article* which
    is a golf club shaft.

    VII.    FRAMEWORK OF THE CLASS

    This class comprises several major subclass groups which can be identified
    by reading down the first-line indent subclasses, and a special category
    for metallic* materials which parallels the arrangement provided for
    nonmetallic* materials, insofar as this arrangement is applicable.  These
    major groups and parallel metallic* groups are:

    1.      Subclasses 1 through 39 and 576 provide for special articles*
    generally defined in all three dimensions, for which there is no provision
    elsewhere, and subclasses 542 and 577+ provide for intermediate-articles*.

    2.      Subclasses 40 through 84, 571 through 575 and 586 through 591
    provide for a special web* or sheet*.

    3.      Subclasses 85+ for special surface characteristics of the pile or
    nap type.

    4.      Subclasses 98+, 357+, 544-570, 592-604, 606-614, and 687 provide
    for stock material either in the form of a web* or sheet*, or an element*
    (e.g., rod*, fiber*, filament*, particle*, flake*, etc.), respectively,
    which of and by itself is structurally defined as claimed.

    Some examples of a structurally defined web* or sheet* are:

    (a)     particular shape, particular size, or other physical configuration.

    (b)     including an external mechanical fastener so as to be attached to
    another object.

    (c)     components* or elements* arranged relative to each other or to a
    surface.

    (d)     components* having same characteristic but in different degree.

    (e)     a discontinuous coating, impregnation or bond.

    (f)     variation in thickness or in planarity.

    (g)     attachment of components* by stitching and bond or coating.

    (h)     apertures.

    (i)     surface finish.

    (j)     any recitation of a measurable extent, no matter how wide, (e.g.,
    "up to .075 mil", "between 10 and 25 microns", etc.).

    Some examples of structurally defined elements* are:

    (a)     particular size or shape or other physical configuration (see (j)
    above).

    (b)     nonlinearity of a fiber or filament (e.g., crimped or coiled, etc.).

    (c)     specific depth of impregnation of a fiber or filament.

    (1)     Note.  As a special case, even though not structure, a coated or
    bonded fiber, filament, rod, strand is placed in subclasses 357+.

    5.      Subclasses 221+ provides for a web* or sheet* in which one
    component* or element* (e.g., fiber, filament, strand, particle, etc.) is
    structurally defined as claimed.

    Some examples of defined structure are:

    (a)     size or particular configuration or shape, either absolute or
    relative (e.g., weight* per unit area).

    (b)     interengagement of strands* or filaments* which means mechanically
    arranging one strand* or filament* alternately over and under other
    strands*, perpendicularly or angularly related thereto.  If all strands* in
    one direction are on only one side of the strands in the other direction,
    this is not interengagement.  Looping, intertwining, interweaving,
    intertangling are also included in the term interengaged.

    (c)     a composite* web* or sheet*, at least one component* being porous
    or cellular.

    (d)     a composite*, web* or sheet* having the outermost layer of adhesive
    characteristics so as to be adhered to another surface.

    6.      Subclasses 411+ and 615+ provide for a composite* web* or sheet*
    which is characterized solely by the composition of the layers*.

    7.      Subclasses 539.5 and 540+ provide for stock-material* having a
    continuous phase of one material interengaged with a continuous phase of a
    different material, usually made by permeation or saturation.  See the
    definitions and notes of these subclasses.

    In addition there are provided in subclasses 900-941 cross-reference art
    collections of product patents based on use or particular characteristics
    indicated in the titles and definitions thereof.  These collections of
    disclosures are not exhaustive but are intended as aids to a search based
    on ultimate function or use, as a supplement to a search in this class, or
    as an indication of further related fields of search inside or outside this
    class.

    VIII.   ART TERM INDEX TO THE CLASS

    The following index is provided for convenience in locating the principal
    subclasses containing patents related to certain terms generally employed
    in the art.

                    Principal
    Art term                subclass(es)

    artificial grass,               15
    sod or turf
    binding         121+
    blank           542, 577+
    bouquet         23
    carpet (pile)           85+
    camouflage              77+, 195+,
                    919
    cloth           175+, 193+,
                    196+
    corrugated              163, 167+,
                    182+, 603+
    decalcomania            40+, 77+,
                    411+, 914+
    expanded metal          596+
    fagot           588+
    fleece          85+
    fluted          163, 167+,
                    599+
    foam            158+, 304+,
                    613+
    grass, artificial               15
    ingot           585, 587, 599
    inlay           38+,67, 614+
    knitted
    mosaic          38, 44+, 53,
                    54+, 57+, 67
    nap             62, 91+
    pile            85, 588+
    piping          123
    pleated         75+, 181
    roofing         143+
    safety glass            438+
    scalloped               192+
    sod, artificial         15
    stained glass           38
    steel wool              605
    tassel          28, 115

    Thermopane              34
    turf, artificial                15
    wire glass
    woven           175+, 196



    For art terms relating to nonstructural laminates - see section II,
    Glossary of Terms, Part B.

    IX.     CRITERIA FOR PATENT PLACEMENT WITHIN THIS CLASS

    The general procedure for placement of a patent in a class is set forth on
    page II of the Manual of Classification (note the exception set forth in
    the last paragraph of this section).  Briefly, the basic principles which
    determine placement of the original copy of a patent in this class are:

    (1)     Only claimed subject matter is relied upon, when comparing
    coordinate "first-line indent" subclasses (e.g., subclasses 98 and 221),
    for placement of a patent.

    (2)     In subclass 1 through 223, 292.1 - 301.4, and 304.4 - 410,

    (a)     the original copy of said patent will be placed in the
    first-occurring "first-line indent" subclass (of this class) which provides
    for the claimed subject matter:  However, where said "first-line indent"
    subclass has a further indented subclass which specifically provides for
    either the claimed or disclosed more specific subject matter, the
    "original" copy will be placed in said further indented subclass;

    (b)     as between coordinate subclasses (e.g., subclasses 156 and 174)
    which are indented under a "first-line indent" subclass, the original copy
    of a patent will be placed in the first-occurring of the coordinate
    subclasses which provides for (a) the claimed subject matter, or (b) the
    disclosed subject matter (in the absence of a claim drawn to the more
    specific subject matter as provided for in such coordinate subclasses);

    (c)     further, the original copy of a patent will be placed in an
    indented subclass where the unclaimed but disclosed more specific subject
    matter is provided for in said indented subclass.

    (3)     In the subclasses relating to specified physical dimension (e.g.,
    215+, 220, 332+, etc.), a range thereof qualifies even though the work
    "absolute" may be used.

    Further, in a subclass which specifies the upper limit of a dimension, for
    example, subclass 334, in which the upper limit is specified as 5 mils (or
    equivalent), a range which transcends this limit is excluded therefrom and
    is placed in the appropriate higher subclass.  Thus, for example, a
    composite* sheet* in which the coated layer* is recited as being in the
    range of 3 mils to 7 mils, is excluded from subclass 334 and is placed in
    subclass 332, unless reason exists for placement in subclass 339.

    (4)     In subclasses 544+, the original is placed strictly on the basis of
    the claims.  Where an indented subclass is provided, the original is placed
    in the indented subclass only when all of the claims have the limitations
    of that indented subclass.

    (5)     The procedure for placement of a patent directed to a nonstructural
    laminate or composite will be that procedure now employed in the
    classification of classes of chemistry and is set forth under the
    definitions of subclasses 411 and 615 of this class (428). Procedures
    applicable to patent placement in the experimental "Markush"-type
    subclasses 643, 656, 661, 664, 669, 671, and 678 are given in the
    definition of subclass 643.

    Once placement of the original copy of a patent has been determined, a
    cross-reference copy of the patent is mandatory in every subclass in this
    class or any other which provides for other claimed subject matter, except
    in instances where the subclass which would normally receive such
    cross-reference copy contains a search class note to the subclass in which
    the original copy has been placed, in which case only exemplary
    cross-references are provided.  Cross-reference copies may be placed in any
    subclass where the disclosed subject matter is considered to render the
    document as useful reference.

    When the original of the patent is placed in the article* or structural
    subclasses, a cross-reference copy will be placed in subclass 411, or
    subclasses 615+, where the disclosed subject matter is considered to render
    the document as useful reference. Similarly, when the original copy of a
    patent is placed in subclasses 323+, a cross-reference thereof will be
    placed in a superior subclass where the disclosure warrants.


CLS 428/1
TXT Product under the class definition comprising a cholesteric or nematic
    composition (commonly known as a liquid crystal).

    (1)     Note.  Liquid crystals, on variation in pressure, temperature,
    electric current passing therethrough, etc, change their colors or light
    transmitting ability, the cholesteric type changing colors while the
    nematic type changes between transparency and opacity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    913,    for other products which respond or are sensitive to temperature or
    light to indicate a change in conditions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, subclass 23 for processes
    involving etching in the manufacturing of liquid crystal devices.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 299.01+ for the composition, per se, of
    liquid crystals.

    349,    Liquid Crystal Cells, Elements and Systems, appropriate subclasses
    for a liquid crystal, per se, which controls light direction or intensity
    by (1) deforming or relatively displacing portions, or changing the shape
    or size, of an optically reflecting or transmitting medium, surface or
    interface, or (2) changing the composition, internal structure or the
    physical or chemical properties of such a medium, surface or interface.


CLS 428/2
TXT Product under the class definition comprising the material usually
    discarded from a residence (e.g., table scraps, empty food packages, etc.)
    or from a business establishment (e.g., rags, paper, etc.) and which has
    been densified into a mass and handled as a unitary element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclass 541 for a fuel product
    which is bundled, wrapped or covered and subclasses 589+ for a fuel
    briquette containing vegetation or refuse.

    53,     Package Making, appropriate subclasses, for the method of making a
    package, which may identify the contents as trash or refuse.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, appropriate subclasses, especially
    subclass 83.5 for bales or bundles of material other than trash or refuse.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    249+ for containment of hazardous or toxic waste.


CLS 428/3
TXT Article* under the class definition which is symbolic in a system of theism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, appropriate subclasses; for an article of religious
    attire; especially clothing.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 124.5, for an
    exhibiting device to be used on a memorial tablet.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 103+ for an earth
    supported type monument, and 316 for an ornamental surface of a building
    type structure formed by relief or intaglio deformation of a surface.

    63,     Jewelry, appropriate subclasses, for a religious artifact which is
    also a distinct article of jewelry.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 19, for a receptacle
    specifically arranged for sacerdotal use.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 33, for cabinet structure
    designed solely for use in worship.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 245+ for an educational
    device or method which may involve religious symbolism.


CLS 428/4
TXT Article* under the class definition which comprises:



    (1)     ribbon or strand material doubled on itself about a transverse line
    of bend and knotted, or otherwise fastened to maintain the resultant looped
    structure; or

    (2)     feather or filamentary material formed loosely into a tuft or ball;
    or

    (3)     material gathered, pleated or looped about a central point or axis
    suggestive of the petals of a  flower seen in plan view but lacking
    sufficient floral fidelity or similarity to constitute a simulated or
    artificial flower; or

    (4)     plural strands, or portion of a single strand, knotted together.

    (1)     Note.  A patent to a bow, pom-pom rosette or knot combined with
    another article (i.e., as an embellishment thereon) is to be placed with
    patents to such other article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17+,    for an artificial plant or portion thereof; particularly,
    subclasses 24+ for an artificial flower.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 243+ and 300, for an apparel trimming or a
    garment supporter, respectively, comprising or including an ornamental bow.

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclass 147 for apparatus for binding
    thread or yarn in a bundle to form a tassel and/or tuft.

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 400+ for a stitched apparel trimming material
    not elsewhere provided for.

    132,    Toilet, subclass 47 for a bow-supporting hair fastener.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 46 for a machine or process for making
    a bow or tassel trimming.

    289,    Knots and Knot Tying, appropriate subclasses, for a method or
    apparatus for tying a bow knot and subclass 1.2 for a knotted strand.


CLS 428/5
TXT Article under subclass 4 wherein the ribbon or strand material is doubled
    on itself.


CLS 428/6
TXT Article* under the class definition comprising an embellished, treated or
    simulated feather or a group of feathers not elsewhere provided for.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes patents directed to (a) a
    reconstructed feather, i.e., a composite of feather element portions
    arranged to produce a desired configuration, (b) a simulated feather
    comprising artificial fibers or natural feather flues each extending
    laterally from a quill part; or (c) a cut of fur pelting in simulation of a
    feather or a group of feathers in the shape of a panache.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for a feather utilized in the construction of a product imitative
    of natural vegetation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 280+ for
    treatment of a feather, broadly; and see the search notes thereunder.

    112,    Sewing, subclass 404, for a feather sewn to a web or sheet.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 47 for a device or machine for working
    (preparing, curling, attaching, etc.) feathers for plumes, ornaments,
    apparel trim, etc., not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 428/7
TXT Article* under the class definition which has as its intended function only
    the temporary embellishment or adornment of a place or thing in connection
    with a particular event (e.g., Halloween, birthday party, Christmas, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  A patent directed to a disclosure of an obvious abstraction
    of a simulated or modified natural article (e.g., planar paper cutout,
    etc.) may be found in this or an indented subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The occasion may be festive or somber.

    (3)     Note.  Wreaths are considered to be special occasion ornaments for
    indented subclass 10.

    (4)     Note.  This subclass is the locus for artificial Christmas trees
    unless provided for in an indented subclass.

    (5)     Note.  A patent directed to an occasion ornament in the form of a
    web* or sheet* (e.g., festoon, streamer, etc.) will be placed in the
    appropriate stocks material subclasses of this class (428).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, appropriate subclasses, for
    related structure generally used in an advertising display; and see
    subclasses 446+ thereof, for a display ornament including a mobile element.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 116.1+ for a
    paperboard box including a decoration or novelty feature.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, appropriate subclasses for similarly
    constructed devices which are differentiated from ornaments by the intended
    interaction between the user and toy.


CLS 428/8
TXT Ornament under subclass 7 fabricated of plural parts which are completely
    separable as units without destruction thereof, for purposes of assembly
    and disassembly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for a knockdown type tree structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 189+ for a knockdown or collapsible
    support rack.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 85+ for a knockdown toy which
    is played with  by assembling and disassembling its component parts.


CLS 428/9
TXT Ornament under subclass 7 which is either articulated, or foldable, or
    inflatable and deflatable, or telescopic, for purposes of structural
    compactness (as for storage) and wherein said parts when so disposed retain
    a structural unity.

    (1)     Note.  Adjustability that achieves another display form only (e.g.,
    a figurine, the arm of which may be exhibited in either an extended or
    crooked position) is not considered to include the characteristics of
    collapsibility.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for some other miscellaneous collapsible article; and see the
    search notes thereunder.


CLS 428/10
TXT Ornament under subclass 7 comprising an annulus either simulating, or
    ornamented by ribbon or floral-like leaf material intertwined along the
    annular path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for frame work intended for a floral piece.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 41.01, for related structure including a
    moisture retaining core adapted to sustain the life-like characteristics of
    natural flora.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 200+, for a
    twisted or twined textile strand; especially subclass 203, for chenille
    type; see class definition, section VI, reference to Class 57.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 393+, for a woven chenille strand
    wherein the weft strands serve to form chenille.


CLS 428/11
TXT Ornament under subclass 7 which:

    (a)     approximates a sphere or spheroid; or

    (b)     is an inverted deep cup, typically   having a recurving brim and
    simulating a bell; or

    (c)     comprises radially disposed points (e.g., geometric starpolygon) or
    lines (e.g., asterisk) which constitute the conventionally accepted pattern
    suggestive of the luminous heavenly body- "star".

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for instance, the vari-shaped
    Christmas tree "ball".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 899.1, for a process of forming a hollow
    metal sphere.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 148+, for a bell, per se.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclass 76 for an ornamental container
    convertible to use as a toy.

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, subclasses 52+ for a ball adapted
    to be used in the game of billiards or pool, subclasses 125+ for a ball
    adapted to be used in the game of bowling, and subclasses 569+ for a game
    ball, per se.


CLS 428/12
TXT Article* under the class definition comprising parts which are either
    articulated, or foldable, or inflatable and deflatable, or telescopic, for
    purposes of structural compactness (as for storage) and wherein said parts
    when so disposed retain a structural unity.

    (1)     Note.  Adjustability that achieves another display form only is not
    considered to include the characteristic of collapsibility.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for a collapsible special occasion ornament.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 214, for a balloon with
    a sign thereon.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 118+, for a flexible tubular
    structure including a collapsible feature.

    222,    Dispensing subclasses 92+, for a collapsible wall type container;
    and see the search notes thereunder.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 220+ for an inflatable toy,
    subclass 388 for an animate figure formed from folded sheet material, and
    subclasses 487+ for other toys which are or collapsible.


CLS 428/13
TXT Article* under the class definition in the form of an exhibit piece which
    is:

    (a)     enclosed within a surrounding peripheral enclosure (separate or
    integral); or

    (b)     encased, either loosely or embedded, in a self-sustaining, light
    transmissive enclosure:  or

    (c)     a three dimensional scenic representation including an article of
    commerce and/or a product of nature or a replica thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81+,    for a product in the form of a sheet* including a modification or
    embellishment of the periphery thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, appropriate subclasses, for an
    advertising display; and subclasses 700+, for a picture mount where the
    picture is not an essential structural element of the combination.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 41.01, for a living flower in a
    transparent casing.

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclasses 57+ for a diorama
    related to an illusionary stage setting.


CLS 428/14
TXT Product under subclass 13 comprising an exhibit piece which is enclosed
    peripherally by a distinct element.


CLS 428/15
TXT Article* under the class definition wherein the primary structure is:

    (a)     a replica of an article of commerce or a product of nature; or

    (b)     a product of nature which is modified but retains the general
    structure and appearance of such a product.

    (1)     Note.  For placement herein, and indented subclasses, the
    disclosure of an article in the form of a reproduction does not require
    exactness of duplication; but a disclosure of a pictorial representation of
    a natural product, or a mere imitation of a material finish (e.g., grain,
    etc.), is excluded from this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7+,     for a simulated or modified natural product for a specific or
    special occasion, e.g., wreath, etc.

    13,     for a three dimensional object or a product of nature in a display
    casing.

    85+,    for a natural product having a pile type surface.

    141+,   for a web* or sheet* with a textured surface resembling a natural
    product (e.g., grained leather, etc.).

    195+,   for a web* or sheet* with a discontinuous or differential coating,
    impregnation or bond which may constitute a representation or imitation of
    a material finish.

    409+,   for a web* or sheet* with a surface feature not provided  for in a
    subclass superior thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 126, for an advertising
    display dummy.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 311.1 for an
    ornamental product for that class involving defined coloring, thickness
    variation or dissimilar elements forming a pattern.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 253+ for a three dimensional object or
    a product of nature used as aquarium ornamentation.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 1 for a composition for making artificial
    snow.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, appropriate subclasses, for a
    simulation used as an educational device.


CLS 428/16
TXT Article under subclass 15 in animal form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 268+ for a figure toy.


CLS 428/17
TXT Article under subclass 15 comprising either simulated, or treated
    nonliving, natural plant form.

    (1)     Note.  Artificial turf, sod or grass will be found in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for a plant in a transparent display housing.

    85+,    for a pile or nap type surface which is not an artificial or
    treated natural product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 5 and 6 for a plant with
    means to attach to an article of clothing.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, appropriate subclasses for a cut plant treated to
    prolong the characteristics of life, and especially subclasses 41.01+ for
    the combination of a receptacle and a cut plant either treated, or with
    means, to prolong the characteristics of life.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 423 for the combination of
    a receptacle or container and either a freshly cut plant or an artificial
    plant.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 34+ for an aromatized artificial flower.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 458+ for treating plants or flowers
    for preservation or ornamentation by a coating step.

    504,    Plant Protecting and Regulating Compositions, subclasses 114+ for
    compositions for treating a cut plant to maintain its freshness or to
    prolong the characteristics of life.


CLS 428/18
TXT Article under subclass 17 wherein the product simulated or treated is at
    least part of the woody portion of a woody perennial plant, which plant is
    generally distinguished by a substantially sized single or main trunk with
    attached branches and foliage.

    (1)     Note.  A patent restricted to a bush or shrub type plant is not
    considered to be directed to a tree structure.

    (2)     Note.  A patent to a simulated tree trunk or branch is included in
    this subclass, but not one to a tree leaf alone (for which see subclass 17).

    (3)     Note.  An artificial or natural tree used for a special occasion
    (e.g., Christmas, etc.) is considered to be a special occasion ornament and
    will be found in the appropriate subclass above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for an artificial or natural tree disclosed as being for a special
    occasion, (e.g, Christmas, etc.).


CLS 428/19
TXT Tree under subclass 18, either (a) in combination with a decorative article
    thereon or with an attachment whose function is to support another article
    (e.g., card or confectionery holder, etc.); or (b) embodying integral tree
    structure (such as a curved branch) specifically designed to function as an
    article supporting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7+,     for a special occasion ornament.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 122+ for a tree with a decorative electric
    light thereon.


CLS 428/20
TXT Tree under subclass 18 fabricated of a plurality of parts which are
    structurally completely separable for purposes of assembly or disassembly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for a knockdown type special occasion ornament; and see the search
    notes thereunder.


CLS 428/21
TXT Article under subclass 17 including; (a) any simulation of a fruit, or (b)
    an extended ribbon-like structure having a leafy configuration along a
    longitudinal edge thereof and intended to embellish a food display.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 126, for a simulation
    in the form of an imitation article (e.g., ice cream) intended for display
    purposes.

    426,    Food or Edible Material, Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    appropriate subclasses for an edible material intended for human or animal
    consumption.


CLS 428/22
TXT Article under subclass 17 constructed, at least in part, of a material
    which is a product of nature (animal, vegetable or mineral) and which at
    least broadly retains a form characteristic of such product.


CLS 428/23
TXT Plant form under subclass 17 either (a) in combination with means (e.g.,
    base or suspension structure) to support same other than an integral
    framework around which the plant form is constructed; or (b) a plurality of
    such forms e.g., bunched, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18+,    for an artificial tree combined with a base-support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 5 and 6, for a floral
    piece with clasp attachment.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclasses 41.01 and 55, for a cut flower holder
    and for a stem (usually of wire) for attachment to the short stem or calyx
    of a flower; and subclass 72, for a flower pot cover.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 423 for the combination of
    a receptacle and a floral decoration, whether growing, freshly cut or
    imitation.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, appropriate subclasses, for an open framework
    type of a support rack.

    248,    Supports, subclass 27.8, for a floral support structure, per se;
    and subclasses 44+ for a staff type stand or base support.


CLS 428/24
TXT Article under subclass 17 comprising either the bloom or blossom, or a leaf
    of such bloom or blossom, of a plant of the type that originates from seed.

    (1)     Note.  The bloom or blossom is that part of the seed plant which
    supports the reproductive spore in an envelope (corolla) that includes a
    calyx and petals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for a simulated flower constructed of a naturally occurring
    material.


CLS 428/25
TXT Flower under subclass 24 fabricated of:

    (a) lacework or knotted mesh fabric*, or an open wire mesh whose continuity
    and integrity derive from the wire's permanent set; or (b) free running
    strand lengths.

    (1)     Note.  Specifically excluded from this subclass, and included in
    subclass 26, is a patent to an artificial flower including filamentary
    material which is merely woven, knotted, or braided.


CLS 428/26
TXT Flower under subclass 24 fabricated from: (a) textile* fabric*, including
    ribbon; or (b) any of the paper* materials (e.g., crepe, Kraft, etc.); or
    (c) from any of the moldable, high molecular weight compounds whether
    manufactured by synthesis or chemical modication of naturally occurring
    high polymers (e.g., cellulose* acetate, polyvinyl* chloride,
    phenolformaldehyde resins, rubbers and urethane* foams, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  For a definition of paper, see the definition of Class 162.


CLS 428/27
TXT Means under subclass 17 restricted to the requisite structural skeleton
    integral with and around which a composite* floral-piece, or element*
    thereof, is or may be constructed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 41.01, for related structure including a
    moisture retaining core; and subclass 55, for a flower support designed to
    appear as the stalk thereof.

    211,    Supports: Racks, appropriate subclasses, for a frame-like support,
    in general.

    248,    Supports, subclass 27.8, for a support, per se, for a completed
    wreath, spray of flowers, etc. The framework onto which the natural or
    artificial vegetation is fixed, is proper subject matter for Class 428,
    subclass 27; however, such a framework combined with a hook for use in
    supporting the finished wreath, etc., or legs, which maintain the finished
    wreath off the ground is proper subject matter for Class 248, subclass 27.8.


CLS 428/28
TXT Article* under the class definition which is, or includes, an element* of
    decoration utilized in structural design to denote a termination of the
    structure to which it is applied, and which decoration is disposed on an
    end or at an edge of such structure.

    (1)     Note.  The final or pendent ornament may have a utilitarian
    function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7+,     for a special occasion ornament.

    19,     for an ornament in combination with a tree.

    115,    for a fringed web* or sheet*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 110+ for a handle including a
    tasselled knob.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 57 for a roof
    attached finial.

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclasses 65+ for an ornamented
    cane or stick end.


CLS 428/29
TXT Article* under the class definition comprising:

    (1)     a picture or design at least part of which is in an invisible or
    dimly visible state and is so constructed as to become, by intended use,
    preceptible, or more clearly so, upon appropriate treatment; or

    (2)     material intended to present apparent visible changes in an
    incorporated design or image when: (a) subjected alternatively to reflected
    or transmitted light; or (b) viewed on a single face thereof, along
    different sight lines; or (c) viewed alternatively on each face, and the
    included image or design is either completely light pervious or
    substantially identical on each such face.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199,    for a product comprising a discontinuous coating which may be
    latent and developable to indicate attempts at erasure or alteration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 106.51+ for a display
    including an illusion of motion; subclass 137, for a sign with a changeable
    reading; and other appropriate subclasses, for a latent image in a display
    device.

    355,    Photocopying, subclasses 78+ for contact printing.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, appropriate subclasses for radiation imagery compositions, a
    latent radiation image, and a process of developing an exposed image.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 327+ for a latent image the
    development of which involves the educative process.

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclasses 57+ for an amusement
    device producing either a physical or optical illusion.


CLS 428/30
TXT Product under subclass 29 including substantially parallel grooves or color
    bands, of minute width to effect a play of color.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    558+ and 615 for optical elements or systems for diffracting or dispersing
    light.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 326+ and 341+ for related structure
    specifically for use with artificial light.


CLS 428/31
TXT An article* under the class definition which is to be placed on a vehicle
    to provide a decoration or embellishment therefor.

    (1)     Note.  So-called "trim" panels, usually used in upholstering and/or
    decorating the inside of vehicles, are not included under this definition
    of article.  Such "trim" panels will be found below on other features, see
    for example, subclasses 156+ (embossed sheet material) or 355+ (sheet with
    cover or casing).

    (2)     Note.  Included herein, for example, are automobile hood ornaments,
    streamers or other similar devices to be attached to a vehicle body for
    embellishment thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7+,     for a special occasion ornament.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclasses 37.1+ for a wheel trim
    or protector member (e.g., wheel cover, streamer, etc.


CLS 428/32
TXT An article* under the class definition comprising as a portion only
    thereof, (1) a strand*, strand-portion* or strip* wound or coiled around
    the article or (2) a plurality of strands* or strand-like materials
    mechanically interlooped, interlaced, or intertwined on the article*, each
    of (1) and (2) above serving to ornament or embellish the article*.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of articles found in this subclass are; sword hilts
    or scabbards which are ornamented with the woven, braided or wound strands*.

    (2)     Note.  Excluded from this definition is a filament, rod or other
    indeterminate length and non three dimensional element having a wound or
    wrapped coating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for a spirally flat wound strand or strip (e.g., braided rug, etc.).

    222,    for a web* or sheet* having components* which are twisted or folded
    about one another, or a component* which is arranged in a series of
    mutually parallel convolution along the longitudinal axis of the web* or
    sheet*.

    377,    for a rod*, strand* or filament*, or a coating therearound,
    helically wound or twisted about an axis extending longitudinally thereof,
    the axis, in the case of the coating, being that of the core*, filament*,
    rod* or strand*.


CLS 428/33
TXT Article* under the class definition comprising a plurality of portions
    arranged with complementary areas to enable attachment of the portions to
    make different shapes, and to permit detachment of the portions at will.

    (1)     Note.  The portions herein are similar to jigsaw puzzle pieces and
    can be assembled and disassembled at will.  If any tool must be used, or a
    portion permanently deformed so as to be further unusable, the article is
    excluded from this subclass and will be found below, or elsewhere, on other
    features.


CLS 428/34
TXT Product under the class definition which comprises at least two light
    transmissive components secured in spaced relation and cooperating to
    create an airtight void.

    (1)     Note.  At least one of the components must be transparent in order
    that objects may be seen therethrough.

    (2)     Note.  The term "gas" includes a vacuum as well as gas under
    pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for a plural layer* sheet* of light transmissive material having an
    opaque border or frame, which layers* are not spaced from one another.

    426+,   for a nonstructural laminate including a layer* of glass and
    especially 438+ for automobile safety glass in which an intermediate
    layer*, usually of cellulosic material, bonds two sheets* of glass, thus
    leaving no space therebetween.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structure (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 171.3+ for a
    residual transparent panel with treating means, subclass 204.52 for a
    double pane panel with an open vent or plugged vent and subclasses 783.1+
    for a sandwich or hollow panel and see section VI, C 3d of the class
    definition of this Class 428.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 12.1+ for a hermetrically sealed
    bottle or jar.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 415+ for a metallic receptacle with spaced
    walls.


CLS 428/34.1
TXT HOLLOW OR CONTAINER TYPE ARTICLE (E.G., TUBE, VASE, ETC.):

    Article* under the class definition having an opening therethrough or
    having a cavity which may or may not be filled with another material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is the locus for patents which claim a tube or
    a container merely by name with no details recited of structure associated
    therewith such as wall structure, openings, etc.  For articles of this type
    which are more specifically claimed, see VI, C., 3 a., in the main
    classification definitions where significant wall structure is discussed as
    it relates to patent placement in other "container or tube" type classes.
    Also see search notes below.

    (2)     Note.  Since the classification lines between Class 428 and Classes
    138, 206, 215, 220, 229, and 383 are not always clearly defined, it is
    suggested that a search for a coated tubular object or container include
    pertinent subclasses in all of the above classes.

    (3)     Note.  Subclass 38.1 includes but is not limited to vessels, trays
    and annular articles not elsewhere provided for.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for a three dimensional artificial fruit article which may be in
    the form of a hollow or container type product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclasses 41.01+ for a receptacle, per se, which
    has structure or means for growing a live plant (e.g., drain hole, watering
    wicks, etc.) or for the combination of a receptacle and a freshly cut
    plant, treated, or with means, to prolong the characteristics of life.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, appropriate subclasses, for a tube or
    conduit which is defined in terms of its wall structure (e.g., spiral seam,
    coating on inner or outer wall, etc.) and not merely by its composition.
    See also section VI, B, of the definition of this Class 428, reference to
    Class 138.

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, appropriate subclasses, for
    an article of this type in which details of the receptacle are recited such
    as wall structure, mouth frame, compartments, etc.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 423 for a container for
    holding either freshly cut or artificial vegetation, either as the
    container, per se, or as the combination with the artificial plant.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, appropriate subclasses, for a glass article of
    this type which is claimed specifically as a bottle or jar by reciting
    details thereof such as the wall structure, neck, specific orientation of a
    coating on the inside or outside of a wall, filling opening, etc.

    220,    Receptacles, appropriate subclasses, for a container of the type
    which is claimed specifically as a receptacle by reciting details thereof
    such as wall structure, side, bottom, filling opening, or specific
    orientation of a coating on the inside or outside of a wall; see especially
    Class 220, subclasses 415+ and 454+.

    383,    Flexible Bags, appropriate subclasses for flaccid or flexible bags
    which are more than nominally claimed.


CLS 428/34.2
TXT Paper containing (e.g., paperboard, cardboard, fiberboard, etc.):

    Article* under subclass 34.1 containing paper* according to the class
    definition.

    (1)     Note.  Included are paper fibers, paperboard, cardboard,
    fiberboard, etc.


CLS 428/34.3
TXT Bag or tubular film  (e.g., pouch, flexible food casing, envelope, etc.):

    Article* under subclass 34.2 in the form of a flexible tubular film or
    bag-like product which contains paper.

    (1)     Note.  Tubular film includes products claimed or specified as such
    or tubes claimed or specified as made from such a film.


CLS 428/34.4
TXT Glass, ceramic, or sintered, fused, fired, or calcined metal oxide or metal
    carbide containing (e.g., porcelain, brick, cement, etc.):

    Article* under subclass 34.1 which contains glass*, ceramic*, or a metal
    oxide or metal carbide material which is sintered, fused, fired, or
    calcined.


CLS 428/34.5
TXT Contains fabric, fiber, particle, or filament made of glass, ceramic, or
    sintered, fused, fired, or calcined metal oxide, or metal carbide or other
    inorganic compound (e.g., fiber glass, mineral fiber, sand, etc.):

    Article* under subclass 34.4 which contains fabric*, fibers, particles, or
    filaments which are composed of glass, ceramic, metal oxide or metal
    carbide, or some other inorganic compound.

    (1)     Note.  Included are fiber glass, mineral fibers, sand, graphite,
    carbon, glass chips, etc.


CLS 428/34.6
TXT Multilayer (continuous layer):

    Article* under subclass 34.4 which has two or more distinct layers.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include as "multilayer",
    discontinuous layers (i.e., designs on a vase or nonwraparound label on a
    container), slightly overlapping single sheet or film, or a coating on the
    seam, edge, or rim only of a tubular article or container.  A glass
    container with a sleeve around a segment of or around the whole container
    can be found in this subclass. An impregnated single-layered article is
    considered multilayered only if the depth of impregnation is defined (see
    Main Definitions, II.A. WEB. Note (2)).  See subclass 34.4 for placement of
    articles not meeting the definition requirements of this subclass as stated
    herewith.

    (2)     Note.  If unable to determine whether the article is single or
    multilayered from the claims or the specification, place the original
    classification in the first appropriate subclass which will take either
    single or multilayers and generally cross to the specific subclass for
    single layer or multilayer, whichever is available.


CLS 428/34.7
TXT Polymer or resin containing (i.e., natural or synthetic):

    Article* under subclass 34.6 which contains any natural or synthetic
    polymer or resin.

    (1)     Note.  A polymer or resin in this subclass requires a repeat unit
    of an organic moiety.

    (2)     Note.  In addition to the well-known polymers or resins, also
    included are cellulose, cellulose derivatives and proteins.


CLS 428/34.8
TXT Flexible food casing (e.g., sausage type, etc.):

    Article* under subclass 34.1 which is a flexible casing for food products
    such as sausage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35.2,   for a tubular film with no reference to use as a food casing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 118.1 for nonedible food
    casings with more than nominal wall structure.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 802 for a Cross-Reference
    Art Collection of shirred casings.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 105, 135, and 138+ for edible food casings or casings containing
    a food product.


CLS 428/34.9
TXT Shrinkable or shrunk (e.g., due to heat, solvent, volatile agent, restraint
    removal, etc):

    Article* under subclass 34.1 which has the characteristic of being
    shrinkable or already shrunk by exposure to a special treatment.

    (1)     Note.  Treatments may include a temperature increase, the addition
    or removal of a solvent or other agent, or removal of a restraint holding
    the article or a part of the article in an expanded or unnatural state.


CLS 428/35.1
TXT Single layer (continuous layer):

    Article* under subclass 34.9 which is a single layer.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 34.6, Note (1) for an explanation of what makes
    a layer and Note (2) for situations where the number of layers is unclear
    from the claims or the specification.


CLS 428/35.2
TXT Nonself-supporting tubular film or bag (e.g., pouch, envelope, packet,
    etc.):

    Article* under subclass 34.1 which is a tubular film or bag-like container
    (e.g., pouch, sack, packet, envelope, butterfly pouch, pouch, pocket-like
    container, etc).

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 34.3, Note (1) for tubular film explanation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35.7+,  for self-supporting or rigid tubular object. If unclear from the
    claims or specification whether the tubular object is nonself-supporting,
    place the original in subclasses 35.7+ and generally cross to subclasses
    35.2+.


CLS 428/35.3
TXT Elemental metal containing:

    Article* under subclass 35.2 which contains elemental metal*.


CLS 428/35.4
TXT Contains vapor or gas barrier, polymer derived from vinyl chloride or
    vinylidene chloride, or polymer containing a vinyl alcohol unit:

    Article* under subclass 35.2 which contains a claimed vapor or gas barrier
    property and/or contains a polymer of vinyl chloride and/or vinylidene
    chloride, or a polymer containing a vinyl alcohol unit.

    (1)     Note.  If unclear as to whether vapor and gas barrier properties
    are present from the claims, but the specification recites the presence,
    place the original in the appropriate subclass according to the claims and
    generally cross to this subclass.


CLS 428/35.5
TXT Single layer (continuous layer):

    Article* in subclass 35.2 with a single layer.

    (1)     Note. A single layer, bag-like article is one with two layers or
    sheets sealed around the edges to form the bag-like structure.

    (2)     Note.  See subclass 34.6, Note (2) if unclear from the claims or
    the specification whether the article is single or multilayer.


CLS 428/35.6
TXT Cellular material derived from plant or animal source (e.g., wood, cotton,
    wool, leather, etc.):

    Article* under subclass 34.1 which contains a cellular material derived
    from a plant or animal source, but excludes fossilized matter.

    (1)     Note.  Cellular material includes naturally occurring material
    which still retains a certain amount of the original tissue structure of
    the plant or animal.  Such material includes wood, wool, cotton, bark,
    cork, leather, hair, etc.

    (2)     Note.  In the absence of information to the contrary, a cellulose,
    cellulose derivative, or protein is presumed devoid of cell structure
    unless indicated otherwise.


CLS 428/35.7
TXT Polymer or resin containing (i.e., natural or synthetic):

    Article* under subclass 34.1 which contains a polymer or resin of natural
    or synthetic origin.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 34.7, Note (1) for definition of polymer or
    resin and Note (2) for examples of polymers.


CLS 428/35.8
TXT Elemental metal containing (e.g., substrate, foil, film, coating, etc.):

    Article* under subclass 35.7 which contains elemental metal in the form of
    a substrate, film, coating, particles, etc.


CLS 428/35.9
TXT Three or more layers (continuous layer):

    Article* under subclass 35.8 which contains 3 or more layers.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 34.6, Note (1) for what a layer is and what it
    is not.  See Note (2) for what to do when the number of layers is unclear
    from the claims or the specification.


CLS 428/36.1
TXT Textile, fabric, cloth, or pile containing (e.g., web, net, woven, knitted,
    mesh, nonwoven, matted, etc.):

    Article* of subclass 35.7 which contains a textile*, fabric*, cloth*, pile
    fabric, felt, net, web, mesh, or the like.

    (1)     Note.  The textile, etc., can be woven or nonwoven, knitted,
    matted, etc.


CLS 428/36.2
TXT Textile, fabric, cloth, or pile is sandwiched between two distinct layers
    of material unlike the textile, fabric, cloth, or pile layer:

    Article* of subclass 36.1 which has a textile, fabric, cloth or pile layer
    sandwiched between two distinct layers of a material unlike the textile,
    fabric, cloth, or pile.

    (1)     Note.  An embedded textile, fabric, cloth, or pile is not
    considered to be a sandwiched layer.  It is considered a single layer and
    therefore is subclass 36.1 subject matter.  Also considered subclass 36.1
    subject matter is a multilayered article where the layers on either side of
    the textile, fabric, cloth, or pile layer are identical to the textile,
    fabric, cloth, or pile layers.


CLS 428/36.3
TXT Fiber or fibers wound around each other or into a self-sustaining shape
    (e.g., yarn, braid, fibers shaped around a core, etc.):

    Article* of subclass 35.7 which contains a fiber or multiple fibers which
    are wound around each other as in a braid or yarn or are wound or wrapped
    around a core or in such a way to form a self-sustaining structure or shape.


CLS 428/36.4
TXT Randomly noninterengaged or randomly contacting fibers, filaments,
    particles, or flakes:

    Article* of subclass 35.7 which contains fibers, filaments, particles, or
    flakes which are in random contact or random disarray with each other.

    (1)     Note.  The fibers, filaments, particles, or flakes do not
    themselves give the claimed article a structure.  They can, however, be
    oriented in a given direction.  These fibers, etc., are usually included
    for reinforcement or as fillers.


CLS 428/36.5
TXT Foam or porous material containing:

    Article* under subclass 35.7 which contains a foam or porous material.

    (1)     Note.  A porous material is cellular in that is has small open or
    interconnected voids.


CLS 428/36.6
TXT Contains vapor or gas barrier, polymer derived from vinyl chloride or
    vinylidene chloride, or polymer containing a vinyl alcohol unit:

    Article* under subclass 35.7 which contains a vapor or gas barrier
    property, contains a polymer derived from vinyl chloride and/or vinylidene
    chloride, and/or contains a polymer with a vinyl alcohol unit.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 35.4, Note (1) for cases where it is unclear
    from the claims whether vapor and gas barrier properties are present.


CLS 428/36.7
TXT Vapor or gas barrier, polymer derived from vinyl chloride or vinylidene
    chloride, or polymer containing a vinyl alcohol unit is sandwiched between
    layers (continuous layer):

    Article* under subclass 36.6 where the vapor or gas barrier, the polymer
    derived from vinyl chloride or vinylidene chloride, or the polymer
    containing a vinyl alcohol unit is found in a layer sandwiched between two
    other separate and distinct layers.


CLS 428/36.8
TXT Natural or synthetic rubber or rubber-like compound containing:

    Article under subclass 35.7 which contains a natural or synthetic rubber or
    rubber-like compound.


CLS 428/36.9
TXT Open-ended, self-supporting conduit, cylinder, or tube-type article:

    Article* under subclass 35.7 which is tubular or cylindrical, has openings
    at both ends, and which can hold its own structure without the aid of a
    filler or support.

    (1)     Note.  The difference between the products in this subclass and a
    hollow strand*, fiber* or filament in subclasses 364+ is as follows: the
    present subclass 36.9 is the locus for a conduit type article through which
    a fluid passes and is generally of substantially larger size (e.g.,
    3-dimensional) than the strand*, fiber* or filaments found in subclasses
    364+.  If it is difficult to determine from the disclosure whether the
    article is of the type which should be classified in this subclass or in
    the latter, all doubts should be resolved in favor of the strand*,
    filament*, or fiber* and placement made in those subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    364+,   for a structurally defined or coated filament*, fiber* or strand*
    which could be hollow or open at both ends, and see (1) Note above for the
    line between the two subclasses.


CLS 428/36.91
TXT Multilayer (continuous layer):

    Article* under subclass 36.9 which contains two or more layers.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 34.6, Notes (1) and (2) for what a layer is and
    is not and for what to do when the number of layers is unclear from the
    claims or the specification.


CLS 428/36.92
TXT Single layer (continuous layer):

    Article under subclass 35.7 which is a single continuous layer.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 34.6, Notes (1) and (2) for what a layer is and
    is not and for what to do when the number of layers is unclear from the
    claims or the specification.


CLS 428/37
TXT Product under the class definition wherein a strand* or strip* is arranged,
    and held in fixed coiled relation and lying in a common plane to constitute
    a unitary sheet*.

    (1)     Note.  A patent wherein the convolutions of a spirally flat-wound
    strand* or strip* are held in position by stitching will be found in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222,    for a web* or sheet* containing a helical component*.

    298.1,  for parallel strands* or strand-portions* joined to each other by
    adhesive.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, subclass 412, for parallel strands*, or strand-portions*,
    jointed to each other by sewing. a receptacle, per se, which has structure
    or means for growing a live plant (e.g., drain hole, watering wicks, etc.)
    or for the combination of a receptacle and a freshly cut plant, treated, or
    with means, to prolong the characteristics of life.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, appropriate subclasses, for a spirally
    wound product of the type provided for in that class.


CLS 428/38
TXT Article* under the class definition comprising at least two parts, the
    former permitting passage of light therethrough and the latter, preventing
    passage of light, forming a closed continuous frame or border on at least a
    portion of the former part.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is the locus for an artificial or natural
    stained glass window and for a safety glass auto windshield having a frame
    therearound.

    (2)     Note.  "Continuous" in the above definition is intended to include
    a frame or border made of separate and individual parts but abutting with
    each other to eliminate any space between the parts.

    (3)     Note.  Included in this definition is a light transmissive single
    or plural layer* sheet* having an opaque area forming a frame or border
    around a small portion of the sheet*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for an article in which overlying light transmissive masses are
    spaced from one another and sealed at their edges, which seal may be opaque
    to light.

    67,     for similar structure in which the former portion does not permit
    light to pass therethrough.

    426+,   for sheets* of glass laminated to each other by an intermediate
    layer* of light transmissive material but having no frame or other opaque
    portion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 323+ for a similar device, the
    sole disclosure of which is for use as a sight or inspection window or
    gauge glass.

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclasses
    41+ for similar subject matter in the form of a spectacle lens within an
    opaque frame.

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.), for a
    product in which the opaque frame or border comprises a netted or open-mesh
    component and there is no light transmissive or translucent mass.


CLS 428/39
TXT Product under the class definition which is assembled from a plurality of
    discrete parts which, taken together, give the appearance of, or
    representation of, a real object and is at least partially the result of
    the outline and contrast of the parts.


CLS 428/40.1
TXT Layer or component removable to expose adhesive:

    Product under the class definition comprising a composite*, web*, or sheet*
    having layers* or components* which are removable one from the other and
    one of which has an outermost coating comprising adhesive, exposed when the
    layers* or components* are separated, so as to enable the adhesive coating
    to be adhered to another surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    352,    for a composite web or sheet having a layer of adhesive as an
    outermost coating  and a release or antistick coating associated therewith,
    usually on the side of the base opposite to the adhesive layer.


CLS 428/40.2
TXT Capsule or particulate matter containing: (e.g.,        sphere, flake,
    microballoon, etc.)

    Subject matter under subclass 40.1 wherein the layer or component contains
    capsules and/or particulate matter that are solid, hollow, or filled with
    another material.


CLS 428/40.3
TXT Bituminous:

    Subject matter under subclass, 40.1 wherein the layer or component contains
    bitumen, asphalt, or a tarlike component.


CLS 428/40.4
TXT Ceramic, glass, glasslike, vitreous:

    Subject matter under subclass 40.1 wherein the layer or component contains
    a ceramic, glassy, or vitrified component.


CLS 428/40.5
TXT Wax containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 40.1 wherein the layer or component contains
    a natural or synthetic wax.


CLS 428/40.6
TXT Halogen containing compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 40.1 wherein the layer or component contains
    a halogenated compound.


CLS 428/40.7
TXT Fluorine:

    Subject matter under subclass 40.6 wherein the halogen is fluorine.


CLS 428/40.8
TXT Coloring agent containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 40.6 wherein the layer or component contains
    a material having tinctorial properties.


CLS 428/40.9
TXT Metal containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 40.1 wherein the layer or component contains
    free metal or combined metal and includes alloys and metal compounds.


CLS 428/41.1
TXT Aluminum:

    Subject matter under subclass 40.9 wherein the metal is aluminum.


CLS 428/41.2
TXT Coloring agent containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 40.9 wherein the layer or component contains
    a material having tinctorial properties


CLS 428/41.3
TXT Polymer derived from ethylenically unsaturated monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 40.1 wherein the layer or component contains
    a polymer derived only from ethylenically unsaturated monomer(s), i.e.,
    wherein the monomer contains a c=c which undergoes addition polymerization
    to form long c-c chains.


CLS 428/41.4
TXT Silicon:

    Subject matter under subclass 41.3 wherein the layer or component contains
    silicon as free element, combined element, or in a compound.


CLS 428/41.5
TXT Polymer derived from material having at least oneacrylic or alkacrylic
    group or the nitrile or amidederivative thereof: (e.g., acrylamide,
    acrylate ester,etc.)

    Subject matter under subclass 40.1 wherein the

    layer or component contains a polymer derived from at least one of the
    following reactants:



            R X     R

            /       //      /

    CH2=C-C-N-R,    CH2=C-C=N,



            R  X

            /       //

     CH2=C-C-OR



    and wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium)
    and R is hydrogen or alkyl.


CLS 428/41.6
TXT Coloring agent:

    Subject matter under subclass 40.1 wherein the layer or component contains
    a material having tinctorial properties.


CLS 428/41.7
TXT Protective layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 40.1 wherein the layer or component is
    covered by a resistant layer, e.g. resistant to heat, cold, oxidation,
    pollution, etc.


CLS 428/41.8
TXT Release layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 40.1 wherein the layer or component contains
    a bond inhibiting material or parting material used to prevent adhesion
    between lamina in areas that might otherwise bond in the absence of the
    material.


CLS 428/41.9
TXT Dissimilar adhesives:

    Subject matter under subclass 40.1 wherein the layer or component contains
    at least two adhesives differing in composition, or differing in tackiness


CLS 428/42.1
TXT Ornamental, decorative, pattern, or indicia:

    Subject matter under subclass 40.1 in which the layer or component contains
    a material that has an appearance or other psychological effect which
    conveys information or is designed to be esthetically pleasing.


CLS 428/42.2
TXT Sectional layer removable:

    Product under subclass 40.1 in which the layer which is removable comprises
    a plurality of components which are noncoextensive with either the length
    or the width of the other layer.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains for example a web or sheet on which
    there is positioned a plurality of serially arranged adhesively coated
    labels which are removed and then adhered to a surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    343+,   for a composite web or sheet in which there is anadhesive coating
    exposed and on the outside hereof.


CLS 428/42.3
TXT Adhesive is on removable layer:

    Product under subclass 42.2 in which the adhesive or sticky substance is on
    the part which has been removed.


CLS 428/43
TXT Product under the class definition comprising a sheet*, web* or layer*
    having a portion thereof made less strong so as to permit easy separation
    at this portion through the thickness portion either longitudinally or
    transverse or at an angle to the plane of the product.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of weakening are - perforating, scoring, or
    dissolving a portion of the web, sheet or layer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131,    for similar structures including perforations or apertures,
    however, not for the purpose of facilitating separation of two portions at
    the perforations.

    156+,   for similar structure including a score line, or variation in
    thickness, but not for the purpose of providing a tear line or weakened
    portion.


CLS 428/44
TXT Product under the class definition containing a single layer* of at least
    three separate, discrete and identifiable parts both laterally and
    longitudinally associated (i.e., in a nonthickness direction) so that it is
    impossible to draw a single straight line through the geometric center of
    all the parts of the single layer*.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded under this definition is a web or sheet having a
    perimeter structure which appears to meet the definition.  The identifiable
    parts in this subclass do not have any additional structure at the
    perimeter thereof.  A floor of tile squares is exemplary of the subject
    matter in this locus.


CLS 428/45
TXT Product under subclass 44 which has a border or other modification or
    embellishment of its entire perimeter, not of the individual sections.


CLS 428/46
TXT Product under subclass 44 comprising a part or layer which permits light to
    pass therethrough.

    (1)     Note.  Any layer or section may be transparent or translucent for
    purposes of this subclass, e.g., the sectional layer may be made of
    completely transparent sections or an opaque sectional layer may be
    adjacent to a continuous layer which is transparent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for a product which has a transparent or translucent part fitted in
    or over a through opening in another part or in a border therefor.


CLS 428/47
TXT Product under subclass 44 in which the sectional layer is adjacent to a
    unitary web* or sheet* which extends outwardly in both lateral and
    longitudinal directions up to or beyond the boundary of the sectional layer.


CLS 428/48
TXT Product under subclass 47 wherein the sectional layer has no voids or
    spaces in both longitudinal and lateral directions.

    (1)     Note.  The continuity of the layer may be due to edge abutment of
    the parts thereof, or, if there be spaces between the parts a material
    completely filling such spaces.


CLS 428/49
TXT Product under subclass 48 wherein the distinct parts are made of (1) free
    or alloyed metal, (2) glass* or (3) ceramic* material and the product is
    commonly known as tile.


CLS 428/50
TXT Product under subclass 48 in which the distinct parts comprise cellulose*
    in either its natural or modified state.


CLS 428/51
TXT Product under subclass 47 wherein at least one of the parts of the
    sectional layer has a periphery other than four sides and four right angles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64.1+,  for a circular sheet.

    80,     for a sheet which is nonrectangular.


CLS 428/52
TXT Product under subclass 44 in which the layer is made of parts at least two
    of which are united by a distinct mechanical connection extending over the
    edges thereof and so arranged as to permit movement between the parts.

    (1)     Note.  The motion may be due to (1) freedom in the mechanical
    connection between the fastener and the part or (2) free or lost motion in
    the fastener itself.


CLS 428/53
TXT Product under the class definition comprising at least three sheets* or
    webs*, all lying in a single plane and each connected to another by an edge
    portion which comprises at least two different planes and having means
    joining the sheets* or webs* together.

    (1)     Note.  The means for joining or securing may be either mechanical
    or chemical (i.e., adhesive, etc.).

    (2)     Note.  The different planes may be either in thickness, i.e.,



    or along a nonthickness surface*, i.e.,



CLS 428/54
TXT Product under the class definition formed of at least three parts joined at
    an end, forming a layer* in which the parts extends longitudinally, the
    longitudinal extent of each part being less than the overall length of the
    product.

    (1)     Note.  In the absence of a clear indication that the sections of
    the sectional layer are longitudinally coextensive with the longest
    dimension of the product, the sectional layer will be presumed to be
    longitudinally sectional for this and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44+,    for a product comprising a plurality of parts joined together both
    laterally and longitudinally.

    53,     for a product which may be sectioned longitudinally, but in which
    the separate parts interfit on complementary faces and have additional
    joining or securing means.

    189+,   for a product in which at least one side-edge of a layer or
    component of a composite product is laterally offset from the corresponding
    side edge of a second layer or component.


CLS 428/55
TXT Product under subclass 54 wherein the layer of joined parts is contiguous
    to a unitary web or sheet which extends outwardly in both directions (1) up
    to or (2) beyond the boundary of the layer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47+,    for a composite sheet or web comprising a layer sectional in two
    dimensions adjacent to another sheet or web of equal or greater size.


CLS 428/56
TXT Product under subclass 55 in which the layer has no voids or spaces between
    the joined parts in both directions of its plane.

    (1)     Note.  The continuity of the layer may be due to edge abutment of
    the parts thereof, or if there be voids or spaces between the parts, a
    material filling such spaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for a composite* sheet or web comprising a continuous layer
    sectional in two dimensions adjacent to another sheet or web of equal or
    greater size.

    77+,    for a composite product comprising two sheets, one of which is
    longitudinally noncoextensive with the other.


CLS 428/57
TXT Product under the class definition wherein two sheets* or webs* are joined
    in either edge abutting or edge overlapping relationship.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for a translucent portion or part joined at the edge or edges
    thereof in an aperture or frame.

    53,     for a product comprising at least three areas.

    189+,   for a product comprising a plurality of components* arranged edge
    to edge but not joined or spliced.


CLS 428/58
TXT Product under subclass 57 wherein the sheets or webs are joined together so
    as to lie in a single plane.


CLS 428/59
TXT Product under subclass 58 comprising a plurality of sheets or webs
    connected to each other and each sheet or web comprising a plurality of
    hills and valleys extending parallel to each other.

    (1)     Note.  The connection may be through the intermediary of a planar
    sheet associated with the hills and valleys, or the hills of one sheet may
    be directly connected to those of the other.

    (2)     Note.  An example of the products found herein is corrugated
    cardboard.


CLS 428/60
TXT Product under subclass 58 wherein the sheets or webs are joined along two
    or more planes or joined along one plane not perpendicular to the surface
    of the sheet or web.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for a product including at least three parts joined along two or
    more planes.


CLS 428/61
TXT Product under subclass 58 wherein the joint is reinforced by additional
    material which lies outside the plane of the connected sheets or webs.


CLS 428/62
TXT Product under subclass 61 wherein pile surfaced sheets or webs (e.g., rugs
    or carpets etc.) are connected.


CLS 428/63
TXT Product under the class definition which comprises an article*, sheet* or
    web* which has an aperture or indentation and material covering the
    aperture or fitting the indentation so as to attempt to restore the
    article, sheet or web to its original condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 30 and 36 for the process of repairing furnace lining, or for
    repairing or restoring articles for reuse, respectively by molding or
    shaping nonmetallic material.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 11+ for apparatus to repair or restore a product by molding.


CLS 428/64.1
TXT CIRCULAR SHEET OR CIRCULAR BLANK:

    Product under the class definition whose outer boundary is that of a single
    curved line every point of which is substantially the same distance from a
    point at the center thereof.


CLS 428/64.2
TXT Recording medium or carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 64.1 wherein the circular sheet or circular
    blank is a tangible object upon which an information signal is to be
    stored, the object having a characteristic which is, or may be, modified at
    positional increments in accordance with the time variation of information
    which is to be stored thereon.

    (1)     Note.  The recording medium or carrier for purposes of these
    subclasses need not be the specific layer that is intended to contain the
    information signal.  All layers of the medium or carrier are considered to
    be the recording medium or carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTION:

    900,    for a collection of magnetizable stock material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or  Retrieval, subclass 135
    for a disc having information recorded thereon in magnetic form.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 272+ for a
    disc having information recorded thereon in the form of grooves.


CLS 428/64.3
TXT Magneto optical recording medium or carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 64.2 wherein the recording medium or carrier
    is composed of a magnetic material and records information based on changes
    in magnetization and the recorded information is readable; e.g., by
    diffraction of polarized light through a magnetic field, etc.


CLS 428/64.4
TXT Optical recording medium or carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 64.2 wherein the recording medium or carrier
    is designed to undergo a chemical or  physical change; e.g., irradiating
    the medium with a laser beam to alter the optical characteristics of the
    medium or carrier in the irradiated area, etc.


CLS 428/64.5
TXT Tellurium containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 64.4 wherein the recording medium or carrier
    contains tellurium as a free element, combined element, or in a compound.


CLS 428/64.6
TXT Protective layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 64.5 wherein the tellurium containing
    recording medium or carrier is covered by a resistant layer; e.g.,
    resistant to heat, cold, oxidation, pollution, etc.


CLS 428/64.7
TXT Polycarbonate containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 64.4 wherein the recording medium or carrier
    contains linear polyesters containing plural carbonic acid ester groups.


CLS 428/64.8
TXT Coloring agent containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 64.4 wherein the recording medium or carrier
    contains a material having tinctorial properties.


CLS 428/64.9
TXT Thickness specified:

    Subject matter under subclass 64.8 wherein the thickness of at least one
    layer or the overall product of the recording medium or carrier is
    specified.


CLS 428/65.1
TXT Polymer derived from material having at least one acrylic or alkacrylic
    group or the nitrile or amide dervative thereof: (e.g., acrylamide,
    acrylate ester, etc.)

    Subject matter under subclass 64.4 wherein the recording medium or carrier
    contains a polymer derived from at least one of the following reatants:

                R  X                            R
    R  X             |    | |                             S
               S     XCH2=C-C-N-R,  CH2=C-CbN, or CH2=C-C-OR

    and wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium)
    and R is hydrogen or alkyl.


CLS 428/65.2
TXT Adhesive containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 64.4 wherein the recording medium or carrier
    contains a glue-like substance.


CLS 428/65.3
TXT Magnetic recording medium or carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 64.2 wherein the recording medium or carrier
    contains magnetizable material in the form of particles, film, coating,
    layer, or impregnant which is intended for the storage of more than a
    single bit of information to be read by a magnetic head.


CLS 428/65.4
TXT Lubricant containing:

    Subject matter under 65.3 wherein the recording medium or carrier contains
    a substance that reduces friction.


CLS 428/65.5
TXT Protective layer containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 65.3 wherein the magnetic recording medium or
    carrier layer is covered by a resistant layer; e.g., resistant to heat,
    cold, oxidation, pollution, etc.


CLS 428/65.6
TXT Aluminum containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 65.3 wherein the magnetic recording medium or
    carrier contains aluminum as a free metal, combined metal, and includes
    alloys and metal compounds.


CLS 428/65.7
TXT Chromium containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 65.3 wherein the magnetic recording medium or
    carrier contains chromium as a free metal, combined metal, and includes
    alloys and metal compounds.


CLS 428/65.8
TXT Lubricant containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 64.2 wherein the recording medium or carrier
    contains a substance that reduces friction.


CLS 428/65.9
TXT Fibrous material containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 64.2 wherein the recording medium or carrier
    is composed of relatively short, slender, flexible elements of finite
    length.


CLS 428/66.1
TXT Gear:

    Subject matter under subclass 64.1 wherein the circular sheet or blank is
    to be used as a toothed wheel, e.g., sprocket, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66.7,   for gears wherein the size and/or shape of the teeth may be recited.


CLS 428/66.2
TXT Frictional:

    Subject matter under subclass 64.1 wherein the circular D-5 sheet or blank
    is to be utilized as a means for stopping or reducing motion; e.g., brake
    or clutch, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, appropriate subclasses, for a product having frictional
    properties where said property is enhanced by claimed external structure
    (e.g., disc shape, surface configuration or internal structure such as
    discrete zones of friction material or particular arrangements of strands*,
    fibers* or layers* and where the sole disclosure is that the product is
    used as a brake.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, appropriate subclasses for a
    product as above described and in which the product is solely disclosed as
    used for a clutch, or as a brake or clutch alternatively.


CLS 428/66.3
TXT End closure:

    Subject matter under subclass 64.1 wherein the circular sheet or blank is
    to be used to plug or close an opening at the end of a container or conduit.


CLS 428/66.4
TXT Seal, gasket, or packing:

    Subject matter under subclass 64.1 wherein the circular sheet or blank is
    to be utilized between or around members or joints to prevent leakage there
    between or therefrom.


CLS 428/66.5
TXT Ornamental, decorative, pattern, or indicia:

    Subject matter under subclass 64.1 wherein the circular sheet has an
    appearance or other psychological effect which conveys information or is
    designed to be esthetically pleasing.


CLS 428/66.6
TXT Aperture containing:

    Product under subclass 64.1 which has a through opening.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threa-ded Fastener, subclasses 531+ for washers to be used with a
    fastener of Class 411.


CLS 428/66.7
TXT Edge structure:

    Product under subclass 64.1 in which the structure of the outer perimeter
    or boundary is recited.


CLS 428/67
TXT Article* under the class definition comprising a base* or substrate* and
    set within the surface thereof, or into an opening or depression therein,
    at least one element* which is larger than the size usually attributed to
    that of a particle* or granule*, the element* being visible and resulting
    in a composite* product or a mosaic*.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass is a roofing felt containing a
    layer of granules or particles which may be embedded in the felt.  Such a
    product will be found below on other features; see search notes, below.

    (2)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass is a product in which the
    embedded element is completely enveloped; see search notes, below.

    (3)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass is a product in which the
    element is "visible" only because it causes a variation in thickness, not
    because it is actually seen in the substrate.

    (4)     Note.  Included in this subclass are articles such as jewelry,
    mosaics, faucet handles having decorative inlays, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for a structure in which the embedded element permits light to pass
    therethrough and is set into an opening or casing therefor provided in a
    base or substrate.

    68+,    for a product in which one element is completely covered by another.

    87,     for a product having a pile or nap surface and which has particles
    which may be embedded therein.

    141+,   for a product having a surface or layer which is nonuniform or
    irregular and which comprises particles.

    323,    for a composite web or sheet in which one layer contains
    structurally defined particles or granules which may be embedded therein.

    338,    for a single layer web or sheet having a structurally defined
    particle or granule which may be embedded therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    appropriate subclasses for a woven or knitted fabric and particulate matter
    associated therewith and which may be embedded in the fabric.


CLS 428/68
TXT Product under the class definition comprising a base sheet* with a distinct
    layer* of material enclosing all the edges and at least one nonthickness
    surface*.

    (1)     Note.  The enclosing layer of material may either be unitary or may
    comprise a plurality of separate and distinct portions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126+,   for a sheet* having a fold at opposed marginal edges and forming an
    annular cover of the product.


CLS 428/69
TXT Product under subclass 68 which contains a nonliquid fluid which is (1)
    other than the usual atmosphere or (2) at less than normal atmospheric
    pressure.

    (1)     Note.  Foamed or expanded materials produced by introduction or in
    situ production of gas other than air will be placed in this subclass only
    when there is a specific disclosure or claim that the gas remains in the
    final product and has a desired useful function therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310+,   for a composite* web* or sheet in which at least one layer
    comprises foamed or expanded materials.


CLS 428/70
TXT Product under subclass 68 wherein an enclosed sheet comprises inorganic
    material which has been set to a solid product by hydration.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of settable inorganic materials are portland
    cement, gypsum, plaster of paris, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Composition:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 638+ for compositions
    containing ingredients which set up or solidify by hydration.


CLS 428/71
TXT Product under subclass 68 wherein the enclosed sheet comprised a
    heterogeneous mixture of a gas phase dispersed therethrough.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note and search note in subclass 69 above, regarding
    the placement of certain foamed or expanded products.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158+,   310+ and 423+, for other products containing foamed or expanded
    material, especially urethane.


CLS 428/72
TXT Product under subclass 68 comprising elements or portions of the layer or
    enclosure which act together to form closed compartments.

    (1)     Note.  The cells may be formed by a single enclosed layer which has
    apertures therethrough and which apertures coact with the casing or cover.

    (2)     Note.  The cells or compartments may be vacant or occupied with a
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    178,    188 and 304+, for other products in which at lease one layer
    comprises cellular material, or in which components* and/or layers
    cooperate to form cells.


CLS 428/73
TXT Product under subclass 72 wherein the compartments are perpendicular to a
    nonthickness surface of the product.

    (1)     Note.  The compartments need not be hexagonal or six sided as in
    the usual honeycomb; they may be of any shape but must have a continuous
    closed peripheral wall.


CLS 428/74
TXT Product under subclass 68 in which the sheet comprises noninterengaged
    strands* in the form of a self sustaining bat or mat (e.g., felt, etc.) or
    in the form of loose or free flowing or fluent material.


CLS 428/75
TXT Product under subclass 74 wherein the enclosing layer comprises free metal
    or an alloy.


CLS 428/76
TXT Product under subclass 68 wherein all surfaces and edges of the sheet are
    enclosed.


CLS 428/77
TXT Product under the class definition wherein one or more sheet* is attached
    to a nonthickness surface* of a base sheet* or web* in face to face
    relationship, the base sheet or web being of greater length than the
    attached sheet.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from under this definition is a print, design or
    indicia or other similar discontinuous or differential coating.  The
    present subclass (77) is intended to take only complete sheets with the
    adjacent base.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55+,    for a plurality of parts arranged longitudinally and next to a
    unitary sheet of greater extent.

    67,     for a product in which a sheet lies in a recess of another sheet.

    131+,   for a product in which a sheet lies entirely in a through aperture
    in a single layered product.

    195+,   for a sheet which has a discontinuous or differential coating,
    impregnation or bond, in effect yielding a composite layered coextensive
    with the lower.


CLS 428/78
TXT Product under subclass 77 wherein the base sheet or web is larger than the
    attached sheet in both length and width.


CLS 428/79
TXT Product under subclass 78 wherein the attached smaller sheet has an
    embellishment or adornment on the outline thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64.1+   and 80, for composite products of this type in which the smaller
    sheet may be of the circular or nonregular form and is so claimed.


CLS 428/80
TXT Product under the class definition which is a sheet having an outer
    perimeter other than rectangular (i.e., four sides with right angles
    between each two adjacent sides).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for a two-dimensional sectional layer in which the sections are
    nonrectangular.

    64.1+,  for a circular sheet.


CLS 428/81
TXT Product under the class definition which is a sheet* wherein the structure
    of at least three edges or at least two nonadjacent corners is recited.

    (1)     Note.  A sheet or web recited as "rectangular" is excluded from
    under this definition unless some specific perimeter or corner structure is
    also recited.


CLS 428/82
TXT Product under subclass 81 wherein the sheet has a pile or nap on at least
    one nonthickness surface*.


CLS 428/83
TXT Product under subclass 81 in which the corner or perimeter structure
    defines a channel or U-Shape.


CLS 428/84
TXT Product under subclass 81 comprising a sheet of paper*.

    (1)     Note.  The paper may be either single or plural layer*.


CLS 428/85
TXT Product under the class definition comprising a web*, sheet*, layer* or
    element* from the surface of which and attached thereto or integral
    therewith, extends looped or free ended filamentary* material, resulting in
    a bristly, fuzzy or resilient surface.

    (1)     Note.  Animal skin in which the fur remains intact is considered to
    be pile or nap surface and will be placed in this group of subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    for an imitation or treated natural product (other than animal skin
    in which the fur remains intact) which has a pile or nap type surface,
    especially subclass 17 for artificial grass or turf.

    623,    for two sections of a pile rug or carpet connected edge to edge by
    means of a binding tape or strip not co-planar with the sections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 208+ for a
    cleaning implement or applicator having a pile working face.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclasses 191 and 194 for a knitted fabric
    including a fleece or pile type surface.

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 410+ for a pile fabric in which the pile
    elements are attached to a base by a stitching operation.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 391+ for a woven pile fabric, per se.


CLS 428/86
TXT Product under subclass 85 in which the free ended or looped filamentary
    material is completely embedded in a layer or component* or is disposed
    between layers or components*.


CLS 428/87
TXT Product under subclass 85 in which the web, sheet or layer also has
    particles* associated therewith.


CLS 428/88
TXT Product under subclass 85 wherein (1) there is variation in the height,
    angles or type of the pile in different areas of the web or sheet, (2)
    spaced or interrupted arrangement of pile areas define a figured or
    sculptured design effect; or (3) the pile or nap structure at an edge of
    the web or sheet differs from the structure which exists over the remainder
    of the web or sheet.

    (1)     Note.  A patent to a product wherein the base web* is embossed so
    as to product a nonplanar pile surface will be placed in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Variation in type of pile may be based on use of different
    materials or the same material varying in a physical property (e.g.,
    coarseness of fiber, etc.). Mere difference in color will not be considered
    a difference in type of pile.

    (3)     Note.  A mere random variation in height or angle of pile which
    does not product a figured or sculptured design effect will not support
    placement of a patent in this subclass and will be classified below on
    other features.


CLS 428/89
TXT Product under subclass 88 in which (1) the height of the filamentary
    material from the surface of the web or sheet or layer is different in
    spaced areas or (2) the filamentary material differs in physical property
    (e.g., coarseness, proximity of filaments to each other, etc.) in different
    areas of the web, sheet or layer.


CLS 428/90
TXT Product under subclass 85 wherein the free-ended material comprises
    individual fibers*, either integral with a fibrous or fiber-containing base
    and extending outwardly therefrom, or randomly distributed and adhesively
    retained on a base.

    (1)     Note.  A patent for a fabric* having pile which has been treated
    additionally so as to separate individual fibers of the pile strands from
    each other will be placed here.


CLS 428/91
TXT Product under subclass 85 in which the fibers* are integral with a fibrous
    or fiber containing base and extend outwardly therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  Nap is generally raised mechanically by an element moving on
    a fibrous material to separate individual fibers* therefrom and cause the
    fibers to extend outwardly.


CLS 428/92
TXT Product under subclass 85 in which the form or arrangement of the free ends
    or loops of the filamentary material is defined.


CLS 428/93
TXT Product under subclass 92 in which the filamentary material comprises
    either reversely bent discrete strand-portions* or continuous strands*
    secured to the web or sheet at bights which engage the strands* or strand
    portions*.


CLS 428/94
TXT Product under subclass 93 in which the filamentary material comprises an
    indeterminate length or a continuous strand and is joined by an adhesive or
    cement to the web, sheet or layer or to another part associated with the
    web, sheet or layer.


CLS 428/95
TXT Product under subclass 85 in which is defined the arrangement or
    constituents of (1) the web, sheet or layer to which the filamentary
    material is attached or (2) an additional part attached to or associated
    with the web, sheet, or layer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310+,   for a foam material which may be used as the backing for a carpet
    or other pile or nap surface.


CLS 428/96
TXT Product under subclass 85 which is covered or saturated, at least in part,
    with extraneous material or is joined to another part by an adhesive
    substance.


CLS 428/97
TXT Product under subclass 85 in which the claim defines (1) the elements* or
    constituents* which form the filamentary material or (2) the ingredients
    which compose the adhesive associated with the web, sheet or layer.

    (1)     Note.  Only a single ingredient or constituents* need be recited to
    qualify for this subclass, but must be specifically recited. Thus:  a
    synthetic fiber* is not sufficient for placement in this subclass, but
    polyamide* or polyester* is sufficient; cement* or glue* does not qualify,
    but casein adhesive does.


CLS 428/98
TXT Product under the class definition comprising a single or plural layer*
    web* or sheet* in which (1) the overall web* or sheet* has a particular
    size, shape or other physical configuration; (2) components* or
    constituents* thereof are arranged in an orderly fashion relative to a
    surface of the product; (3) the product comprises at least two layers* or
    components*, each claimed as possessing a particular characteristic which
    is different from the other (e.g., hardness, density, etc.); (4) the
    product includes a particular characteristic claimed in relation to a
    surface thereof; (5) there is a nonuniform thickness, planarity, surface,
    coating, impregnation or bond; (6) there are apertures; (7) any other
    characteristic is present by which the overall web* or sheet* may be
    identified as having a particular structure or configuration.

    (1)     Note.  A patent directed to a plural layer stock material product
    identified solely in terms of the composition of at least one layer thereof
    will be placed in subclasses 411+ of this class (428).

    (2)     Note.  See the first paragraph of section IX of this definition for
    subject matter excluded from this class (428).

    (3)     Note.  Although a naturally occurring fibrous material such as wood
    is considerd to have "grain" direction (see subclasses 105 and 114) such
    material is not considered as a fiber-containing material in this or any
    indented subclass.

    (4)     Note.  Included under this definition of "significant size" is any
    recitation of a measurable extent or range thereof, no matter how wide
    (e.g., "up to .075 mils, etc.").

    (5)     Note.  Included under this definition of physical size is a
    recitation of a weight unit (e.g., grams, pounds etc.) spread over a unit
    of area (e.g., square feet, square meters, etc.).  See also section VII
    Framework of the Class for other examples of structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221+,   for a web* or sheet* containing a structurally defined element* or
    component*.

    357+,   for a structurally defined rod*, strand*, fiber*, particle* or
    other element* or constituent* thereof, or a mass thereof, and especially
    subclasses 364+ for a product having a width substantially equal to the
    thickness thereof (e.g., rod*, strand*, fiber*, filament*, etc.) and
    claimed in terms of its particular shape or size or the shape, size or
    arrangements of its constituents.

    411+,   for a nonstructural plural layer*, web* or sheet* wherein a second
    component* thereof is defined in terms of its molecular orientation or
    crystalline structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclasses 30 and 44 for a laminated
    shoe part.

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 400+ for a sewn web or sheet; and see section VI
    A1(a)(4) of this definition.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses for an endless
    belt or stock material including specific structure for carrying material
    in a horizontal plane.

    248,    Supports, for a vibration damping ring support.Also, see section VI
    of this definition for additional classes related to this subclass.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 237+ for an inking ribbons
    especially adapted for typewriting machines.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 443+
    for a web or sheet including a composition of that class.


CLS 428/99
TXT Product under subclass 98 in which the web or sheet has means secured
    thereto or integral with a surface or edge thereof for attachment and
    detachment at will to a surface or support or to cooperating fastening
    means.

    (1)     Note.  A buttonhole, nail hole or similar aperture is not
    considered an external fastening means within the definition of this
    subclass.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is the residual locus for a web or sheet
    including an external fastener.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223,    for a composite product in which plural layers are connected by a
    separate and distinct mechanical connecting member extending over the edges
    of and/or into a plurality of layers or components.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 572+ for
    separable-fasteners.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclass, for a
    building structure component with external fastening means.

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 406+ for a separable fastener secured to a base
    web or sheet by stitching; subclass 431 for a sewn buttonhole including a
    floating strand around its edge; and subclass 437, for a sewn buttonhole.


CLS 428/100
TXT Product under subclass 99 in which the fastener comprises a part which (1)
    is curved or otherwise bent back towards itself and has a free end on which
    another part may be caught or held or (2) has a point curving or projecting
    backwards therefrom and onto which another part may be caught or held.

    (1)     Note.  The hook or barb may be part of a fiber or filament or
    strand in a component so made as to catch or hold onto another component.


CLS 428/101
TXT Product under subclass 98 wherein layers or components are arranged in
    overlying relation and are permanently connected in such manner as to
    permit relative translational movement between them (i.e., in one plane
    only, vertical, horizontal or oblique).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223,    for a composite web or sheet in which the components are joined to
    each other by a fastener extending over the edges of and/or into a
    plurality of layers or components.


CLS 428/102
TXT Product under subclass 98 wherein the web or sheet is embellished by, or
    has portions joined, reinforced or held in position by, a strand* so
    disposed within the product that it must have been introduced therein by an
    eyed needle, and also has at least some portion thereof (1) held in
    position by a separate and distinct mechanical connecting member(s) (2)
    covered or saturated with extraneous material, or (3) joined to another
    portion by adhesion or cohesion.

    (1)     Note.  A patent for a product which includes individual stitch
    fastening elements, such as short pieces of wire, will be placed in this
    subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Needling is not considered to be a mechanical connection or
    a discrete fastener; therefore a patent to a product wherein portions are
    joined by sewing and needling (i.e., interlocking of fibers) will not be
    placed in this or the indented subclasses, but will be found below on other
    features, see Class 442, subclasses 402+, for example.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54+,    for a product which consists of 3 or more components not
    longitudinally coextensive, and which may have been made by stitching and
    another fastener, coating or bond.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 402+ for a sewn web or sheet, per se, and see
    section II of the definitions of that class (112) for the scope of that
    class and its relationship to other classes.


CLS 428/103
TXT Product under subclass 102 wherein the coating, impregnation or bond occurs
    in spaced zones, or over an area which is substantially less than the total
    area of the composite web, or is of a different character in different
    areas of the web.

    (1)     Note.  A patent for a product wherein a narrow tape is adhered over
    a line of stitching will be placed in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195+,   for a patent to a similar product which does not include stitching.


CLS 428/104
TXT Product under subclass 103 wherein the coating, impregnation or bond is
    limited to the areas where the stitches penetrate the web and, optionally,
    the area immediately adjacent thereto.


CLS 428/105
TXT Product under subclass 98 including a plurality of layers or components
    wherein at least two of said layers or components include substantially
    parallel, narrow, elongated elements* (such as strands*, strips* or
    fibers*), with those of one layer or component being arranged at an angle
    to those of another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for a product in which the elongated elements in respective layers
    or components are substantially parallel to each other.

    188,    for a product in which the longitudinal axis of a tubular
    element(s) of one layer or component is at an angle to the like axis of a
    tubular element(s) in a second layer or component.


CLS 428/106
TXT Product under subclass 105 which comprises layers or components of wood,
    wherein the elongated elements are fibers forming the natural grain of the
    wood, with the grain of one layer arranged at an angle to the grain of
    another layer.

    (1)     Note.  This is the locus for sheets of plywood.


CLS 428/107
TXT Product under subclass 105 in which the elemental structures are strands*
    or strand-portions*.

    (1)     Note.  A patent for a product comprising distinct layers of strands
    crossed and bonded at their junctions will be placed in this subclass, but
    where the angularly related strands are interengaged (e.g., interwoven,
    etc.) the patent will be placed in the subclass defining interengaged
    strands, etc. such as for example, subclasses 175+ and 196+, and Class 442,
    subclasses 181+, depending on the claimed features.


CLS 428/108
TXT Product under subclass 107 in which the Longitudinal axis of the strands or
    strand portion follows a curvilinear or multidirectional path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    362     and 369+, for a rod, strand fiber or filament whose longitudinal
    axis follows a multidirectional or curvilinear path.


CLS 428/109
TXT Product under subclass 107 in which there is at least one layer of material
    in addition to the layers or components which contain the strands or strand
    portions in angular relation.


CLS 428/110
TXT Product under subclass 109 in which there are at least two such additional
    layers, at least one of which is positioned on each side of the two layers
    of components which contain the strands or strand-portions in angular
    relation.


CLS 428/111
TXT Product under subclass 110 which includes a layer or component of
    mechanically intertwined, intertangled, interwoven or interlooped strand or
    strand-portion.


CLS 428/112
TXT Product under subclass 107 wherein the trands or strand-portions are at an
    acute angle with respect to the longitudinal axis of the web.


CLS 428/113
TXT Product under subclass 105 in which the elemental structures are fibers.


CLS 428/114
TXT Product under subclass 98 including a  plurality of layers or components
    having distinctly oriented elemental constituents (such as strands*,
    strips* or fibers*) all arranged in the same general direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105+,   for a product wherein the elemental constituents in some respective
    layers may be parallel to each other whereas those in other respective
    layer are in angular relation to each other.

    298.1+, for a web or sheet product in which strands, strand-portions or
    strips are not mechanically interengaged, but are parallel to one another.


CLS 428/115
TXT Product under subclass 98 having a plurality of strand-portions* or strand*
    loops extending freely in individual or grouped arrangement from an edge of
    the web, sheet or component.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded are fringed manufactures which are the result
    merely of a simple textile fabrication, such as weaving or braiding.For
    placement in this subclass, a patent must be directed to a product whose
    manufacture transcends the function of the textile producing apparatus
    (such as a loom or a knitting machine).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, subclass 409 for a web having a fringe secured thereto by
    sewing.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclass 385 for a woven fabric wherein loose
    unwoven ends of the constituent strands form a fringe.


CLS 428/116
TXT Product under subclass 98 comprising a layer or component including either
    discrete elements (e.g., tubular constituents) or components which form or
    cooperate to form, cavities the longitudinal axes of which are at an angle
    to the plane of the web or sheet.

    (1)     Note.  An integral layer (e.g., molded or apertured layer)
    including curvilinear or polygonal through openings therein is not
    considered to fall within the definition of this subclass.  See
    particularly subclasses 131+ below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131+,   for a web or sheet embodying an apertured component (e.g. layer
    with through openings, expanded metal, etc.) and particularly indented
    subclasses 132+ where such component comprises struck-out portions.

    156+,   for a web or sheet embodying a component of varying thickness
    (e.g., layer with open cavities) and especially subclass 161 for such
    component cooperating with a second component to form inter-laminar spaces.

    174+,   for a web or sheet embodying a nonplanar component and especially
    subclasses 178 and 180 where such component cooperates with a second
    component to form closed cells.

    188,    for a web or sheet including a longitudinally or transversely
    extending tubular cavity or cell.

    593,    for corresponding metallic* honeycomb stock-material*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 783.1+ for a
    sandwich or hollow panel having a discrete interlaminar fastener, and
    subclass 60 for a honeycomb-like layer not having mechanical connecting
    means between components.


CLS 428/117
TXT Product under subclass 116 in which the cavities contain a material other
    than the atmosphere.

    (1)     Note.  The cells need not be completely filled with the material.
    For example a coiled piece of foil within the cell is sufficient to qualify
    for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for a product comprising a sheet and cover therefor, the space
    therebetween being filled with a gas other than air.


CLS 428/118
TXT Product under subclass 116 in which the cavities are bounded by a
    continuous six sided wall.


CLS 428/119
TXT Product under subclass 98 having one or more components or sheets disposed
    with nonthickness surfaces* thereof at right angles to a nonthickness
    surface* of the composite product and nonintegral therewith.

    (1)     Note.  A patent for a product comprising a plurality of relatively
    narrow sheets or components assembled with their respective nonthickness
    surfaces in face-to-face contact and their edges forming the nonthickness
    surfaces of the composite web or sheet will be included in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  A patent directed to a product wherein the components lie in
    parallel planes which are at an acute angle to the nonthickness surfaces of
    the composite product will be placed in subclass 112.

    (3)     Note.  A patent directed to a product comprising a component having
    a portion integral with and disposed perpendicular to a second portion
    (e.g.,  L-shaped, channel shaped, etc.) will be placed in subclasses 121+
    on the basis of a particular edge feature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116+,   for a product including sheets or components disposed perpendicular
    to the plane thereof where said sheets or components form or cooperate to
    form a honeycomb layer.


CLS 428/120
TXT Product under subclass 119 in which the component or sheet is not at the
    edge of the base web or sheet but is disposed inwardly toward the center.


CLS 428/121
TXT Product under subclass 98 wherein a portion if the web or sheet, or of a
    component thereof, is turned out of the plane of the web or sheet along a
    longitudinal axis thereof and at a longitudinally extending marginal
    portion of the web or sheet.

    (1)     Note.  A corrugated web or sheet comprising a corrugation pattern
    which involves a fold at an edge thereof will be placed in subclass 179*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157,    for a web or component having an integral nonfolded edge thicker
    than the body of the web or component.

    174+,   for a nonplanar layer or component in general.

    176,    for a similar product comprising a folded strand-type fabric, cloth
    or textile.

    179+,   for a longitudinally corrugated web or sheet wherein the
    corrugation pattern involves a fold at an edge thereof; and see (1) Note
    above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 383+
    for a web or sheet with a folded edge to accommodate fastening to an
    elongated element (e.g., frame, etc.) and especially subclass 387 for a hem
    in such a web or sheet.


CLS 428/122
TXT Product under subclass 121 wherein the folded component is a relatively
    narrow trough-shaped strip with the walls thereof embracing a longitudinal
    edge of at least one other component of the web or sheet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85+,    for a product comprising a pile type surface in a U-shaped or
    channel shaped article.

    358,    for a strand type product having a channel shape.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, subclass 419 for a sewn channel-shaped binding.


CLS 428/123
TXT Product under subclass 121 wherein a strand* or strand-portion* lies
    between layers of the edge-folded web or sheet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 716.1+ for molding
    trim combined with attaching means.

    112,    Sewing, subclass 147 for a similar sewn product.


CLS 428/124
TXT Product under subclass 121 wherein the web or sheet is composite* and a
    longitudinally extending portion of a surface component is turned back upon
    itself or around an edge or a second component of the web.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 147+ for a sewn webor sheet including a reverse
    fold at an edge.


CLS 428/125
TXT Product under subclass 124 in which the folded portion of the surface
    component has a free end enclosed within the body of the web out of contact
    with the exterior surface of any face layer.


CLS 428/126
TXT Product under subclass 124 wherein the surface component has either an
    acute or reverse fold along each of the opposed edges of the product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68+,    for a sheet including a distinct layer of material enclosing all
    the edges and at least one nonthickness surface* of the sheet.


CLS 428/127
TXT Product under subclass 126 in which the reversely folded component is part
    of an enveloping means which forms the complete (or substantially complete)
    exterior of the web or sheet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68+,    for a sheet having another distinct layer of material enclosing all
    the edges and at least one nonthickness surface of the sheet.

    364+,   for a strand comprising a core with an annular cover.


CLS 428/128
TXT Product under subclass 127 wherein the reversely folded component, per se,
    constitutes the entire enveloping means.


CLS 428/129
TXT Product under subclass 128 wherein free ends of the enveloping component
    lie in adjacent edge-to-edge contact or overlie one another.


CLS 428/130
TXT Product under subclass 121 wherein the turned out portion has particular
    structure (e.g., perforations, shape, serrations, etc.) or is dimensionally
    related to an exterior of the composite web or sheet component.


CLS 428/131
TXT Product under subclass 98 wherein the web or sheet or a component thereof,
    has one or more discrete through openings with the peripheral wall or walls
    of each opening defined by either a line or closed loop passing through the
    thickness of the component while following a unidirectional or
    multidirectional rectilinar path.

    (1)     Note.  Reticulation (a form of apertures), may be mechanically or
    chemically produced (e.g., spinning a polymer in a net-like or web-like
    form, etc.).

    (2)     Note.  The periphery of said loop may vary in size while passing
    through the component or the loop may pass through the component edgewise
    to form a slit.

    (3)     Note.  A product including a component with openings the walls of
    which are defined by loops following a nonrectilinear (e.g., tortuous or
    haphazard, etc.) path through the thickness dimension of the component will
    be placed in subclasses 304+.

    (4)     Note.  A patent wherein the apertures are solely for the purpose of
    passing a stitching thread through the web will be found in Class 112,
    Sewing, subclasses 402+ and especially subclass 591.

    (5)     Note.  Woven, knitted or netted products are excluded under this
    definition of aperture, unless it is the intent that apertures be
    specifically provided, other than the usual and normal openings between the
    strands due to the nature of the weave, knit or mesh.  Generally a woven,
    knitted or netted product encompasses strands which lie above and below
    other strands in the same layer.  Apertures must be deliberately made to
    meet the definition of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for artificial turf having apertures in the base or substrate to
    permit draining.

    43,     for a web or sheet or layer which is perforated or apertured to
    permit separation of portions thereof at these weakened sections.

    119,    for a grill-like product comprising perpendicularly disposed
    components and intersecting strips*.

    155,    for a stock material with minute crevices extending thereinto, but
    not therethrough.

    188,    for stock material including a longitudinal or a transverse tubular
    cavity or cell*.

    304+,   for a product including a porous component.

    596,    for corresponding metallic* stock-material*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 633+ for an
    "openwork" product for that class, and especially subclass 660 for a
    "lattice" type product (grating, foraminous reinforcement, grille)
    primarily of use as a rigid component of a building structure and
    structurally similar structures of more general application.  See the
    search notes in subclass 660 for other classes providing for fabric or
    lattice openwork structures.

    55,     Gas Separation, subclass 525 for an apertured product with specific
    structure to facilitate gas separation.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 385+
    for stock material having an apertured edge disclosed for attachment to an
    elongated support.

    181,    Acoustics, appropriate subclasses for a web or sheet with either
    internal or external structure wherein said structure is disclosed to be
    provided for the purpose of deadening or amplifying sound, and especially
    subclasses 284+ where said structure is provided for the purpose of
    muffling or filtering sound.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a packing element comprising a
    web or sheet having (a) a definite peripheral shape, (b) a modified service
    opening, or (c) a configuration or feature particularly adapting the
    element as a packing, subclasses 935+ for a seal made of a particular
    material.


CLS 428/132
TXT Product under subclass 131 wherein the web or sheet, or a component
    thereof, has one or more portions which project or protrude from a
    nonthickness surface of the component and form at least a part of the
    periphery of a through opening therein.


CLS 428/133
TXT Product under subclass 132 in which the component with struck-out portions
    is within a layer or the struck-out portions of said component extend into,
    interlock with, enmesh or clench an adjacent layer.


CLS 428/134
TXT Product under subclass 131 in which the wall defining a through opening is
    of a shape other than a continuous curved line at a constant distance from
    a central point.


CLS 428/135
TXT Product under subclass 134 in which the aperture is shaped as (1) a four
    sided closed figure in which two opposite angles are acute and the other
    two are obtuse or (2) a six sided closed figure.


CLS 428/136
TXT Product under subclass 134 in which the aperture is elongated in relation
    to its width.


CLS 428/137
TXT Product under subclass 131 wherein the web or wheel comprises a plurality
    of components of which at least one is apertured.


CLS 428/138
TXT Product under subclass 137 containing at least one apertured component and
    one imperforate component.


CLS 428/139
TXT Product under subclass 138 wherein a protruding portion of one component
    enters into and engages the periphery of an aperture in another component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77+,    for a panel of sheet attached to a surface of a base sheet or web
    and having a portion extending into an aperture in the base.

    222,    for a product embodying a component threaded through spaced
    apertures in another component.


CLS 428/140
TXT Product under subclass 139 wherein the apertured component is disclosed
    between two components with portions of each of said two components
    entering the aperture or wherein the apertured component is completely
    embedded within the thickness dimension of a layer.


CLS 428/141
TXT Product under subclass 98 in which an area of the web or sheet has a
    structure which extends substantially across the area but which is made up
    of pits, depressions, furrows or other such irregularities of no regular
    design or pattern, so as to give the surface a design or pattern, so as to
    give the surface a desired feel or texture and which area may be (1)
    exposed or (2) covered with a layer designed to permit light to pass
    therethrough and render the area visible or (3) covered with a material
    which is opaque but designed to protect the area from injury.

    (1)     Note.  The difference between this subclass and 156+ is that in the
    latter, the layer is desired to vary in thickness, while in the present
    subclass there is no substantial variation in thickness except merely that
    necessitated by virtue of the surface irregularities.

    (2)     Note.  Excluded from this and the indented subclasses are products
    which are knitted, braided, woven, etc.  The surface characteristics of
    such products are considered to be uniform and regular or patterned, not
    irregular, as required by subclasses 141+.

    (3)     Note.   Excluded from this and the indented subclasses are products
    in which the textured surface is provided solely for bonding two layers to
    one another through the textured surface. This will be classified below on
    other features such as the compositions of the layers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85+,    for a surface which is made up of looped filamentary material or
    free ended material extending from and integral with the surface of a web
    or sheet, resulting in a bristly, fuzzy or resilient surface.

    156+,   for a web or sheet in which a layer or component varies in
    thickness across its width or length.


CLS 428/142
TXT Product under subclass 141 comprising an additional layer over the textured
    or irregular surface which (1) permits the passage of light so as to make
    the surface visible, or (2) guards against marring or spoiling of the
    surface.


CLS 428/143
TXT Product under subclass 141 in which the irregularities comprise small
    pieces or granules of matter.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are products which are used as
    roofing or siding on homes.  To complete the search for such products the
    appropriate subclasses in Class 52, Static Structures (e.g., Buildings),
    should be considered.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses
    especially subclasses 518+ for shingles particularly provided for therein.


CLS 428/144
TXT Product under subclass 143 in which each of the pieces or granules is
    previously covered at least partially with a material before placing on the
    web or sheet.


CLS 428/145
TXT Product under subclass 144 in which the material contains the elements
    silicon in either the elemental or combined state.


CLS 428/146
TXT Product under subclass 143 in which the pieces or granules comprises a
    carbohydrate.

    (1)     Note.  Flour, starch and cellulose are examples of carbohydrates
    which may be found in this subclass.


CLS 428/147
TXT Product under subclass 143 in which the pieces or granules comprise either
    a natural or synthetic resin or polymer.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of the resins or polymers found herein are:
    natural rubber, polyamide (either natural or synthetic), polyethylene.


CLS 428/148
TXT Product under subclass 143 in which the pieces or granules comprises either
    a metal in its elemental state or a compound of a metal.


CLS 428/149
TXT Product under subclass 143 in which the pieces or granules comprises the
    element silicon in either its uncombined or compound state.


CLS 428/150
TXT Product under subclass 149 in which the silicon containing bits or granules
    are in the form of sand, clay or comminuted ordinary rock or that known as
    slate.


CLS 428/151
TXT Product under subclass 141 in which the surface irregularities resemble or
    are made to be similar to the arrangement of fibers*, particles* or layers
    forming the natural lines in lumber or natural animal skin.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    473,    for a laminated product comprising a layer of natural animal skin
    or membrane.

    904,    an art collection for an artificial leather product.


CLS 428/152
TXT Product under subclass 141 which contains furrows, ridges, nonrectilinear
    wrinkles, creases or crinkles.


CLS 428/153
TXT Product under subclass 152 wherein the web, sheet or component, is made of
    paper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155,    for stock material which is cracked, crazed or slit and which may
    be made of paper.


CLS 428/154
TXT Product under subclass 153 wherein there are a plurality of such paper
    components which are ridged, crinkled, creased or creped.


CLS 428/155
TXT Product under subclass 141 in which the web, sheet or component contains
    crevices of relatively small lateral dimension extending thereinto but not
    therethrough.

    (1)     Note.  A slit extending completely through a layer or component is
    considered an aperture and a disclosure of such product will be found in
    subclasses 131+ above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 90 for a wrinkled or crackled coating.


CLS 428/156
TXT Product under subclass 98 wherein the distance between the nonthickness
    surfaces of a web or sheet or a component thereof, deviates from point to
    point along the transverse or longitudinal axis of the product.

    (1)     Note.  As implied in the subclass definition, variation in total
    thickness (or bulge) caused by overlapping components, is excluded from the
    concept of this subclass.  See search notes below to subclasses 88, 174+
    and 189.

    (2)     Note.  A patent directed to a component with minute surface
    irregularities in the form of very small pits or projections will be placed
    in subclasses 141+.

    (3)     Note.  The presence of either a plain or countersunk through hole
    in a layer is not considered to provide a variation in thickness of an
    otherwise uniform thickness layer.  See subclasses 131+.

    (4)     Note.  Under the definition of this subclass, the sheet or web may
    be either single or plural layer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for a web or sheet which has a tear line or other weakened portion
    caused by a variation in thickness, to permit separation of the sheet or
    web through its thickness.

    77+,    especially 78+ for a composite web or sheet, one layer of which is
    smaller than the other and also one layer of which may vary in thickness.

    88+,    for a "sculptured" pile surface of varying height.

    121+,   for a web whose thickness varies by virtue of a fold at its edge.

    139+,   for a variation in thickness in the form of a projection which
    enters an aperture in a mating component.

    174+,   for a product comprising a folded component in which pleats are
    formed by the folds.

    189,    for a composite web or sheet whose total thickness varies due to
    the overlapping of laterally noncoextensive components.

    397+,   for a rod or strand which varies in thickness.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 238+ for a
    floor mat including blade-like elements for cleaning purposes.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 716.1+ for a rigid
    channel or trim member with a feature for attaching to an in situ erected
    type structure.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 112+ for a reading device
    for the blind as an embossed product (i.e., Braille).


CLS 428/157
TXT Product under subclass 156 wherein the difference occurs only at or in the
    area adjacent, an edge of the web, sheet or component; or in which the
    thickness variation at or adjacent the edge differs substantially from that
    which exists over the remainder of the web, sheet or component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177,    for similar marginal nonuniformity in nonplanar uniform-thickness
    material.

    192,    for a product with marginal characteristic of more general nature.


CLS 428/158
TXT Product under subclass 156 including a component which contains (1) open or
    interconnected voids throughout which have been made by means of a gas or
    other agent (blowing agent or heat, etc.) enlarging the voids or the
    material of the component so as to occupy more space or (2) closed cavities
    (empty or filled).


CLS 428/159
TXT Product under subclass 158 which comprises a compound of relatively large
    molecules and high molecular weight, whose molecules consist of recurring
    smaller chain structural units.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of polymers under this definition are:  natural or
    synthetic rubber, polyester, polyamide, etc.


CLS 428/160
TXT Product under subclass 159 in which the polymer comprises poly (amido
    ester) or polyisocyanate, commonly known as polyurethane.


CLS 428/161
TXT Product under subclass 156 wherein the component of nonuniform thickness
    has a nonplanar surface and a second component is in continuous interfacial
    contact with said surface.


CLS 428/162
TXT Product under subclass 161 in which the opposite surface of the nonuniform
    thickness component is also nonplanar and a third component is in
    continuous interfacial contact with such opposite surface.


CLS 428/163
TXT Product under subclass 161 in which the nonplanar face of the nonuniform
    thickness component is in the form of ridges and/or furrows of substantial
    length and width extending along or across the component and in mutual
    parallelism.


CLS 428/164
TXT Product under subclass 161 in which one of the components comprises a free
    metal or a compound thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are glass*, asbestos,
    porcelain*, ceramic*, etc., which, though containing a metal are not
    ordinarily included therewith.


CLS 428/165
TXT Product under subclass 161 in which one of the components contains a
    natural rubber or a cellusosic* material in its natural or modified state.


CLS 428/166
TXT Product under subclass 156, wherein a nonplanar surface of a variable
    thickness layer comes into contact with an adjacent layer (or a component
    thereof) in such a manner as to define therebetween individual or
    interconnected three-dimensional zones, either separate or interconnected.

    (1)     Note.  The spaces may be empty or occupied, in whole or in part, by
    a filler material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158,    for a product in which the interlaminar spaces take the form of
    cells* in a foamed material.

    178,    for a web or sheet embodying a component of a nonplanar
    uniform-thickness material which forms or cooperates with an adjacent
    component to form cells*.

    182+,   and especially subclass 186 for web or sheet embodying a nonplanar
    uniform-thickness component of sinuous wave form secured to an adjacent
    planar component so as to provide spaces therebetween.

    188,    for a longitudinal or transverse cavity* or cell* within a layer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 449+ and particularly subclasses 455+ for a
    compartmented air mattress.


CLS 428/167
TXT Product under subclass 156 in which the variation in thickness occurs in
    the form of parallel ridges and/or furrows of substantial length and width
    extending along or across the product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for a striated surface which exhibits in irridescent effect.

    163,    for a similar product having a component of nonplanar surface with
    a nonplanar and a second component is in continuous interfacial contact
    with said surface and in which there are also ridges or furrows extending
    along or across the component.


CLS 428/168
TXT Product under subclass 167 containing small bits or pieces of solid matter.


CLS 428/169
TXT Product under subclass 167 in which the ridges and/or furrows lie at an
    acute angle to the longitudinal axis of the web or sheet.


CLS 428/170
TXT Product under subclass 156 wherein the mass per unit volume of the web,
    sheet, or component also varies.

    (1)     Note.  This density usually varies with the thickness of such
    product as in a layer with compressed zones.


CLS 428/171
TXT Product under subclass 170 comprising a component which consists of or
    includes fibers.


CLS 428/172
TXT Product under subclass 156 comprising at least two layers.


CLS 428/173
TXT Product under subclass 172 in which an outer surface of the composite*
    sheet or web has dents or depressions and there is an extraneous material
    in at least one such dent or depression, lying beneath the topmost rise of
    the walls defining such dent or depression.


CLS 428/174
TXT Product under subclass 98 wherein the web or sheet, or a component thereof,
    has nonthickness surfaces* which are (1) defined other than by two parallel
    planes and (2) equidistantly spaced at all points.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this definition of nonplanar is a roll or coil
    of material; the product itself must be nonplanar, not the manner of
    packaging or storing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121+,   for a product wherein the nonplanarity is in the form of a fold at
    a longitudinal edge of the web.

    161+,   for a nonplanar uniform thickness component following the nonplanar
    surface of a layer or component of varying thickness.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclass 386 for a nonplanar, woven, web or
    sheet product of a process provided for in that class.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 109+ for a
    nonuniform, irregular or configured product of a paper making process.


CLS 428/175
TXT Product under subclass 174 comprising a layer, or component consisting of
    strands*, strand*portions* or relatively narrow ribbon like elements,
    mechanically interwoven, intertangled, intertwined or interlooped.

    (1)     Note.  This defines a textile or other woven or knitted material
    which is then treated to form embossments or other nonplanarities, but
    retaining the uniform thickness.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152+,   for a product which does not consist of a weave or knit fabric, but
    which has numerous irregular, nonrectilinear ridges or creases.


CLS 428/176
TXT Product under subclass 175 wherein the nonplanarity comprises integral
    substantially flat portions of the layer or component disposed in face
    abutting relation or in substantially equi-distantly spaced relation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181,    for a nonstrand web, sheet or layer embodying a component with
    pleats or otherwise parallel adjacent folds.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, subclass 427 for a pleated and sewn web.


CLS 428/177
TXT Product under subclass 174 in which the nonplanarity occurs only at or in
    the area adjacent, an edge portion of the total product; or in which the
    nonplanarity at or adjacent the edge of the product differs substantially
    from that which exists over the remainder thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121+,   for a product wherein the marginal nonplanarity is in the form of a
    fold.


CLS 428/178
TXT Product under subclass 174 wherein the nonplanar component (1) is so shaped
    as to form closed compartments, either vacant or occupied, the walls of
    which are an integral part of said nonplanar component or (2) cooperates
    with an adjacent component to produce closed compartments, which are either
    vacant or occupied by a material not integral with either component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72+,    for a sheet including a cover or casing in which there are elements
    which cooperate to form cells*.

    166,    for spaces between layers, one of which varies in thickness.

    188,    for a product which includes a longitudinal or transverse cavity*
    or cell*, in general.

    304+,   for a cellular layer, in general.


CLS 428/179
TXT Product under subclass 174 wherein there is a plurality of discrete
    deviations of the nonthickness surfaces* of the web, sheet or component
    from the parallel plane condition in a repetitive pattern and said
    deviations are arranged in one or more rows or are elongated and extend
    generally in the same direction.


CLS 428/180
TXT Product under subclass 179 wherein the Nonplanarity is in the form of a
    regular geometrical pattern of polygonal protuberances and/or depressions,
    each having a centrally located flat land portion.


CLS 428/181
TXT Product under subclass 179 wherein the deviations include planar portions
    which are either substantially in face contact or spaced from one another
    in mutual parallelism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102+,   for a pleated product including stitching and coating,
    impregnation, or adhesion.

    175+,   for a pleated strand-type fabric.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, subclass 427 for a sewn web or sheet which is pleated or
    tucked.


CLS 428/182
TXT Product under subclass 179 wherein the nonplanarities are elongated and are
    arranged to extend generally in the same direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163     and 167, for a product embodying a component of varying thickness
    and including ribs and/or grooves.

    178,    for a product wherein a ribbed, uniform-thickness, component forms
    or cooperates to form closed cells*.


CLS 428/183
TXT Product under subclass 182 wherein the peaks of the corrugations are
    indented at spaced zones therealong or wherein there are two series of
    corrugations in one layer with those of one series crossing or extending
    between and at an angle to those of the second series.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    178,    for a product wherein the deformations of the peaks of the
    corrugations engage an adjacent layer and thereby form closed cells*.

    180,    for a product wherein crossing ribs or grooves form a waffle
    pattern.

    185,    for a product wherein ribs or grooves in respective components of a
    composite web cross in plan projection.


CLS 428/184
TXT Product under subclass 182 which includes two or more corrugated components.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    178,    for plural corrugated components cooperating to form cells*.


CLS 428/185
TXT Product under subclass 184 wherein the corrugations of one component cross
    the corrugations of a subjacent or superjacent component at an angle.


CLS 428/186
TXT Product under subclass 184 having in addition another component each of
    whose nonthickness surfaces* lies in a single plane (i.e., planar).

    (1)     Note.  The planar component may be bonded to either or both
    corrugated components.


CLS 428/187
TXT Product under subclass 174 wherein the nonplanarity is in the form of a
    figured pattern or a presentation of information.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     for a composite sheet* in which one layer is smaller than the other
    and has a decorative outline.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 112+ for reading devices
    for the blind in the form of embossed sheets (Braille writing).


CLS 428/188
TXT Product under subclass 98 wherein the web or sheet has one or more
    elongated hollow spaces of substantially uniform cross-section located
    between and lying with their axes substantially parallel to, the
    nonthickness surfaces* of the web or sheet and being either open or closed
    at their ends.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72+,    for a sheet including a cover or casing and in which there are
    elements* which cooperate to form cells*.

    116+,   for a honeycomb-like web or sheet wherein the cavities or cells are
    arranged with their axes at an angle to the nonthickness surface of the
    structure.

    166,    for a product including a component of varying thickness with
    interlaminar spaces.

    178,    for cells* formed by one or more nonplanar components.

    181,    for tubular cavities* formed by two components, at least one of
    which has parallel folds.

    184+,   for a similar structure wherein the cavities* or cells* are formed
    by a wave-form component cooperating with another component.

    304+,   for a composite web or sheet including a cellular component in
    which the cell* do not lie longitudinally or transversely of the web or
    sheet.

    338,    for a single layer product including structurally defined cells*
    which do not lie longitudinally or transversely of the nonthickness
    surface*.

    357+,   for a mass including structurally defined cells* of any shape.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, appropriate subclass for a tubular
    product of specific structure as provided for therein and see the
    definition of this Class 428, section VI B, reference to Class 138.


CLS 428/189
TXT Product under subclass 98 wherein at least one side edge of a layer* or
    component* of a composite web is laterally offset (in either spaced or
    overlapping relation) relative to a corresponding edge of a second layer*
    or component* of the product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44+,    for a two dimensionally sectional layer in which two components are
    laterally noncoextensive.

    54+,    for a composite layer comprising at least three parts in which each
    part has a longitudinal extent less than the longest dimension of the layer.

    57+,    for webs and/or sheets joined in edge to edge relation to form a
    sectional web or sheet.

    188,    for a product including components, separated by elongated spacers
    to form a longitudinal or transverse cavity* therebetween.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 123+
    for plural hanging or drape type devices hung from a single support in side
    by side overlapping relation, subclasses 130+ for interconnected flexible
    strips, slats and/or panels and also for a plurality of rigid strips, slats
    and/or panels which are connected for relative motion and form a single
    unit, and subclasses 330+ for a sectional fabric which hangs suspended
    (e.g., drape, etc.).


CLS 428/190
TXT Product under subclass 189 in which one of the components is a cloth*,
    fabric* or textile*.


CLS 428/191
TXT Product under subclass 189 in which one of the components is a cellulosic*
    material in any of its natural or chemically modified forms (e.g., wood,
    paper, rayon*, viscose*, etc.).


CLS 428/192
TXT Product under subclass 98 having structure at an edge thereof or in the
    area adjacent an edge thereof which differs from that of the remainder of
    the web.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44+,    for a two dimensional sectional layer having perimeter or edge
    structure.

    66.7,   for a circular sheet having defined edge structure.

    81+,    for a sheet having complete perimeter structure or corner structure.

    88,     for a pile or nap type surface component having particular edge
    structure.

    115,    for a web or sheet having a fringed edge.

    121+,   for a web or sheet having a folded edge.

    157,    for a web or sheet having a differential nonuniformity in thickness
    at a margin.

    177,    for a web or sheet of nonplanar uniform thickness having a
    differential nonplanarity at a margin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 284+ for a process of coating a
    product along an edge or border.


CLS 428/193
TXT Product under subclass 192 comprising a layer of material having strand*,
    strand-portions* or relatively narrow ribbon like elements mechanically
    intertangled, interwoven, intertwined or interlooped.

    (1)     Note.  A product of this type of mechanical interengagement of such
    elements is commonly known as a weave, knit or mesh.


CLS 428/194
TXT Product under subclass 192 in which the structure at the edge comprises a
    saturation of fluid thereinto or an adhesion to another component, which
    saturation or adhesion is not continuous along the edge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189+,   for a web or sheet having at the edge thereof a continuous and
    longitudinally coextensive coating.


CLS 428/195
TXT Product under subclass 98 wherein at least one component or layer has
    spaced areas, substantially less than the total area of the involved
    surface of the layer or component, which are either, (1) faced or saturated
    with fluent or plastic material or (2) joined to other portions of the
    layer or components or to another layer or component by adhesion or
    cohesion; or wherein the facing, saturation or junctures set forth in
    clauses (1) and (2) above is of a different character (e.g., strong bond
    next to weak bond) in different areas of the web or sheet.

    (1)     Note.  A design or printed matter or indicia of any sort will be
    considered as a discontinuous coating for this subclass unless clearly
    disclosed as uniform.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103+,   for a composite sheet or web which includes a differential or
    discontinuous coating or impregnation or bond and a zone or stitching.

    178,    for a nonplanar layer or component bonded to a planar component at
    discrete zones.

    187,    for a nonplanar uniform thickness material which has a design or
    other indicia thereon.

    189,    for a web or sheet including laterally noncoextensive components
    wherein said components may constitute a discontinuous or differential
    coating or impregnation.

    411+,   for a laminate including one component having a continuous and
    coextensive surface coating, impregnation or bond.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 12+ for a fabric with pattern
    lines thereon.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 427+ for artwork, or
    a photograph having an enhanced visual effect.

    101,    Printing, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 368+ for a
    product having a nonuniform coating thereon when disclosed solely for use
    as a printing member.  See also definition of this Class 428, section VI B,
    reference to Class 101.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 1 for a process of providing a print,
    impression or pattern of animal skin, (e.g., human fingerprints, etc.) on a
    base and subclass 256 for the process of producing a nonuniform coating on
    a substrate.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 9+ for a chemically defined photograph.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 81+ for inventions in
    teaching or demonstrating visual arts and crafts.


CLS 428/196
TXT Product under subclass 195 in which at least one layer comprises strands*,
    strand-portion* or relatively narrow ribbon like elements which are
    mechanically intertwined, intertangled, interwoven or interlooped.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175+,   for a similar product in which the web or sheet or layer or
    component thereof has nonthickness surfaces which are defined other than by
    two parallel planes and are equidistant at all points.

    192,    for a similar product which has particular structure at an edges or
    adjacent thereto which is different from that of the remainder of the web.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, especially subclasses 548+ for a tire
    carcass including a layer of noninterengaged strands.

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 181+ generally for a product having mechanically interengaged
    strand and other features.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 237+ for a friction drive belt, or for stock material disclosed
    solely for use as a drive belt, which may include noninterengaged strands,
    such as for reinforcing elements, in the body of the belt.


CLS 428/197
TXT Product under subclass 196 in which the strand type component comprises
    interlocked loops of strand material and the strand at spaced areas is
    adhered or cohered to itself or to another strand forming the loop.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196,    for a web or sheet or component of interengaged strands (other than
    knitted) in which the strands may be adhered to others in the same layer,
    or to another adjacent component.

    198,    for a web or sheet or layer adhered to another component or web or
    sheet at spaced areas.


CLS 428/198
TXT Product under subclass 195 in which components are joined to each other in
    discrete spaced areas of relatively small extent.


CLS 428/199
TXT Product under subclass 195 in which the discontinuous or differential
    coating or impregnation comprises (1) normally nonvisible indicia or (2)
    portions which are dissolvable and, in both (1) and (2) above, when treated
    in other than normal use, would become visible.

    (1)     Note.  This is the locus for so-called safety or bank paper, which,
    when an erasure or eradication is attempted, clearly indicates such attempt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     for an article having a latent image which is visible or barely
    visible and must be treated to become more visible on intended use.

    915     and 916, for cross reference art collections of documents which are
    treated to indicate alterations or erasures or other fraud attempts.


CLS 428/200
TXT Product under subclass 165 including a layer which is activated by an
    increased temperature to adhere to another surface or to be removed from
    cohesion with an adjacent component.


CLS 428/201
TXT Product under subclass 195 in which the component or layer having the
    spaced areas of saturation or facing lies between and adjacent to other
    layers or components.


CLS 428/202
TXT Product under subclass 201 in which one of the adjacent layers lies on the
    outermost surface of the web or sheet and is removable from the web or
    sheet or is so made as to prevent adhesion to a surface in contact
    therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200,    for a product which must be heated in order to destroy the adhesion
    or cohesion of a layer to an adjacent layer or component.


CLS 428/203
TXT Product under subclass 201 in which one of the adjacent layers lies on the
    outermost surface of the web or sheet and permits light to pass
    therethrough.

    (1)     Note.  The translucent layer is usually for the purpose of
    protecting or viewing the layer there-beneath.


CLS 428/204
TXT Product under subclass 203 in which the middle layer has small particles of
    solid material in its facing or saturation.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the patents in this subclass have a design or image
    made with particles* of colored material and are covered with a transparent
    layer to permit viewing of such design.

    (2)     Note.  The material may be white, black or any color.


CLS 428/205
TXT Product under subclass 203 in which the translucent layer include natural
    oil*, a wax* or waxy material*, a resin*, gum* or the polyamides* known as
    glue or gelatine.


CLS 428/206
TXT Product under subclass 195 which includes small particles* of solid matter.


CLS 428/207
TXT Product under subclass 206 in which the small particles* comprise coloring
    material.

    (1)     Note.  The coloring material may be white, black or any color.

    (2)     Note.  The particles* themselves may be the coloring matter (i.e.,
    pigment) or the particles may have a dye coating thereon.


CLS 428/208
TXT Product under subclass 206 in which the small grains or bits of matter
    include a free metal* or a natural, mined compound.


CLS 428/209
TXT Product under subclass 195 which includes a layer of free metal*.


CLS 428/210
TXT Product under subclass 195 in which one of the layers contains fused clay*
    (ceramic*), a fine, white, translucent hard earthenware (porcelain*), or
    the fused mixture of the silicates of the alkali and alkaline earth or
    heavy metals (glass*).

    (1)     Note.  Included under this definition of glass is glassy or
    crystalline silica or quartz*.


CLS 428/211
TXT Product under subclass 195 in which one of the layers contains fibers* of
    paper*.


CLS 428/212
TXT Product under subclass 98 wherein two components of a web, sheet or layer
    possess the same physical property but in different amount or intensity and
    are so claimed.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass porosity or cellularity is not
    considered to be a physical characteristic; a product having plural
    components which differ in this characteristic will be found in subclasses
    304+ see search note below.

    (2)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass, a component in which the
    physical characteristics of an element (e.g., fiber*, filament*, particle*,
    etc.) is defined and it is this characteristic which varies in another
    component, will not be included in this subclass, but will be found below,
    see subclasses 292.1+ and 323+.

    (3)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass and its indents, if a
    composite sheet is claimed as having the same physical characteristic
    (e.g., thickness, etc.) this is considered to be a special case of
    "differing" degree and the patent will be classified in this group of
    subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    292.1+, for a composite web or sheet in which at least one component has
    structurally defined fibers which may be compared to the characteristics of
    the fibers in another component.

    304+,   for a web sheet layer of or containing components differing in
    degree of porosity.

    323+,   for a web, sheet layer of or containing components which differ in
    variations of structurally defined particles.

    332+,   for a composite web or sheet in which the thickness of only one
    component is specified.


CLS 428/213
TXT Product under subclass 212 in which the physical property relates to
    thickness of the components.


CLS 428/214
TXT Product under subclass 213 in which the components are layers which act as
    bonds between two other layers.


CLS 428/215
TXT Product under subclass 213 in which absolute dimensions of two components
    are specified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213,    for a product in which the relative thickness, or the ratio of the
    thickness, between two components is specified.


CLS 428/216
TXT Product under subclass 215 in which the thickness of each layer or
    components as specified does not excess 5 mils or the equivalent.


CLS 428/217
TXT Product under subclass 212 in which the physical property relates to
    resistance to deformation or fracture by pressure.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are recitations relating to units
    of measurement of hardness (e.g., Brinnell hardness, etc.).


CLS 428/218
TXT Product under subclass 212 in which the physical property relates to a
    weight per unit volume of the component or the degree of compactness
    thereof.


CLS 428/219
TXT Product under subclass 98 in which a physical characteristic of the overall
    web or sheet is recited in terms of its weight per unit area of the product.

    (1)     Note.  Since weight per unit area and a physical dimension are
    related, cross-referencing between this subclass and the succeeding one has
    been minimized.  Both subclasses should be considered in the search.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220,    for a product in which the absolute dimension of the overall
    product is specified.


CLS 428/220
TXT Product under subclass 98 wherein the size of the overall web or sheet is
    claimed as an absolute dimension.

    (1)     Note.  The difference between this subclass and 332+ is that in the
    latter the size of only a component* or layer* is claimed*, whereas in this
    subclass the size of the overall web or sheet is recited.

    (2)     Note.  The preceding subclass 219 contains many patents in which
    the physical dimension of an overall web or sheet is disclosed and/or
    claimed.  To complete the search for such a feature, the preceding subclass
    must be considered since the cross-referencing between the two subclasses
    has been minimized.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212+,   for a composite* web or sheet wherein the size of one component*
    relative to another is claimed.

    219,    for a sheet or web in which the physical dimension is indicated in
    a weight per unit area but in which an absolute dimension may be disclosed
    and/or claimed.

    332+,   for a composite* web or sheet in which the absolute size of an
    element* or component* is claimed.

    357+,   for a rod*, strand*, fiber*, filament*, particle* or other element*
    claimed as having a specific dimension.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses, for a
    modular building panel with a physical configuration for interengagement
    with an abutting panel.


CLS 428/221
TXT Product under the class definition comprising a single or plural layer*
    web*, or sheet* which contains a component* or an element* (e.g., fiber*,
    strand*, filament*, particle*, etc.), the size or some structural feature
    of which is claimed, (e.g., orientation or relation to another element or
    component, bond at intersecting points, weave or knit, cellularity or
    porosity, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this group of subclasses, a disclosed
    fabric, textile or cloth will be considered to be included under
    "structurally defined element or component".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98+,    for a web or sheet (single or plural layer) in which the web (1)
    has a particular overall shape, significant size or other particular
    configuration such as an edge feature or (2) the components are arranged in
    an orderly fashion relative to a surface of the product or (3) the product
    comprises plural layers with each layer thereof claimed as possessing a
    particular characteristic such as density or hardness or thickness or (4)
    the product includes a particular characteristic claimed in its relation to
    a surface or edge thereof, all to an end that the overall web or sheet may
    be identified as having a particular structure.

    360,    for a mass (not a sheet or web) of staple length fibers bonded at
    their intersections only.


CLS 428/222
TXT Product under subclass 221 wherein (1) components are twisted or folded
    about one another or (2) a web or sheet, or a component thereof, is
    arranged in a series of mutually parallel convolutions extending along the
    longitudinal axis of the web or sheet.

    (1)     Note.  The product formed by (1) above, must be the result of
    twisting or folding (e.g., braiding) of components; where the product is
    formed by braiding strands, classification is proper in Class 87, Textiles:
     Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making; see search note below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131+,   for a product formed by threading one component through spaced
    longitudinal openings or apertures in another component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 259 and 260
    for a strand structure made up wholly or in part of twisted tape as claimed.

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, subclasses 3+ for a
    fabric of intertwisted strands and subclasses 8+ for a fabric of braided
    strands as claimed.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 129+ and 154 for a
    solid-wall tubular structure which includes helically arranged convolutions
    of web or strand material as claimed.


CLS 428/223
TXT Product under subclass 221 in which a plurality of layers or components are
    connected by a separate and distinct mechanical connecting member extending
    over the edges of and/or into a plurality of layers or components.

    (1)     Note.  Stitching is not considered to be a mechanical fastener.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99+,    for a product in which there is a mechanical fastener for attaching
    the product to an external surface or another product.

    101,    for a similar product having plural components which are relatively
    movable.

    198,    for a similar product in which a plurality of components are spot
    bonded to one another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 782.1+ for a
    sandwich or hollow panel including a discrete interlaminar fastener.


CLS 428/292.1
TXT Noninterengaged fiber-containing paper-free web or sheet which is not of
    specified porosity:

    Product under subclass 221 wherein a fiber-containing web or sheet
    comprises of one or more structurally defined fibers embedded in or on the
    surface of a matrix wherein the fibers are not interengaged with one
    another or formed into a fabric having structural integrity prior to
    association with the matrix material, the fiber-containing web or sheet
    being neither paper nor of specified porosity.

    (1)     Note. Matrix materials containing fiber as a filler material do not
    belong in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    311.11, 311.31, 311.51, 311.71, and 311.91, for articles of specified
    porosity wherein the article comprises solely a continuous matrix of fibers
    (e.g., porous paper, etc.).

    317.9,  for articles of specified porosity wherein the article contains
    fibers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 100 through 231, for
    paper products, per se.


CLS 428/292.4
TXT Fiber-containing wood product (e.g., hardboard, lumber, or wood board,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 292.1 wherein the web or sheet comprises at
    least one layer in the form of a wood product such as hardboard, lumber, or
    wood board.


CLS 428/292.7
TXT Including paper layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 292.4 wherein the web or sheet is in
    association with a paper layer.


CLS 428/293.1
TXT Fiber embedded in a metal matrix:

    Subject matter under subclass 292.1 wherein the web or sheet comprises a
    metal matrix having fibers embedded therein.


CLS 428/293.4
TXT Fiber embedded in a ceramic, glass, or carbon matrix:

    Subject matter under subclass 292.1 wherein the web or sheet comprises a
    ceramic, glass, or carbon matrix having fibers embedded therein.


CLS 428/293.7
TXT Fibers are aligned substantially parallel:

    Subject matter under subclass 293.4 wherein the fibers are oriented in a
    particular direction, the fibers being parallel to one another.


CLS 428/294.1
TXT Fiber is precoated:

    Subject matter under subclass 293.7 wherein the fibers are coated with a
    material prior to incorporation in the matrix material.


CLS 428/294.4
TXT Free metal or alloy fiber:

    Subject matter under subclass 293.4 wherein the fiber is metal in elemental
    or alloy form.


CLS 428/294.7
TXT Fiber embedded in a layer derived from a water-settable material (e.g.,
    cement, gypsum, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 292.1 wherein the web or sheet comprises a
    water-settable material (e.g., cement, gypsum, etc.) which forms a distinct
    layer having fibers embedded therein.


CLS 428/295.1
TXT Fibers embedded in or on the surface of a natural or synthetic rubber
    matrix:

    Subject matter under subclass 292.1 wherein the web or sheet comprises a
    rubber matrix, the rubber being natural or synthetic rubber and having
    fibers embedded therein or on the surface of the matrix.


CLS 428/295.4
TXT Fibers are aligned substantially parallel:

    Subject matter under subclass 295.1 wherein the fibers are oriented in a
    particular direction, the fibers being parallel to one another.


CLS 428/295.7
TXT Fiber is nonlinear (e.g., crimped, sinusoidal, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 295.4 wherein the fibers, per se, are
    specifically stated to be crimped, sinusoidal, coiled, etc., or the
    orientation of the fibers in the matrix material is nonlinear.


CLS 428/296.1
TXT Fiber is precoated:

    Subject matter under subclass 295.4 wherein the fibers are precoated with a
    material prior to being embedded in the matrix or affixed to the matrix
    surface.


CLS 428/296.4
TXT Fiber is precoated:

    Subject matter under subclass 295.1 wherein the fibers are coated with a
    material prior to incorporation in the matrix material or being affixed to
    the matrix surface.


CLS 428/296.7
TXT Composite or conjugate fiber (e.g., fiber contains more than one chemically
    different material in monofilament or multifilament form, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 295.1 wherein the embedded or surface fibers
    contain at least two chemically different materials in monofilament or
    multifilament form.


CLS 428/297.1
TXT Two or more layers:

    Subject matter under subclass 295.1 wherein the fiber-containing rubber
    matrix is associated with one or more additional layers.


CLS 428/297.4
TXT Fiber embedded in or on the surface of a polymeric matrix:

    Subject matter under subclass 292.1 wherein the web or sheet comprises a
    polymeric matrix having fibers embedded in or on the surface thereof.


CLS 428/297.7
TXT Fiber is on the surface of a polymeric matrix having no embedded portion:

    Subject matter under subclass 297.4 wherein the fibers are affixed to a
    surface of the polymeric matrix.


CLS 428/298.1
TXT Fibers are aligned substantially parallel:

    Subject matter under subclass 297.4 wherein the fibers are oriented in a
    particular direction, the fibers being parallel to one another.


CLS 428/298.4
TXT Fiber is nonlinear (e.g., crimped, sinusoidal, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 298.1 wherein the fibers, per se, are
    specifically stated to be crimped, sinusoidal, coiled, etc., or the
    orientation of the fibers in the polymeric matrix is nonlinear.


CLS 428/298.7
TXT Fiber is precoated:

    Subject matter under subclass 298.1 wherein the fibers are coated with a
    material prior to incorporation in the polymeric matrix.


CLS 428/299.1
TXT Carbon or carbonaceous fiber:

    Subject matter under subclass 298.1 wherein the embedded fibers are carbon
    (graphite) or carbonaceous fibers.


CLS 428/299.4
TXT Glass fiber:

    Subject matter under subclass 298.1 wherein the embedded fibers are glass
    fibers.


CLS 428/299.7
TXT Polymeric fiber:

    Subject matter under subclass 298.1 wherein the embedded fibers are
    polymeric fibers.


CLS 428/300.1
TXT Fiber is precoated:

    Subject matter under subclass 297.4 wherein the fibers are coated with a
    material prior to being incorporated in the polymeric matrix or being
    affixed to a surface of the polymeric matrix.


CLS 428/300.4
TXT Two or more chemically different fibers:

    Subject matter under subclass 297.4 wherein the fibers include at least two
    chemically different fibers.


CLS 428/300.7
TXT Two or more layers:

    Subject matter under subclass 297.4 wherein the fiber-containing polymeric
    matrix is associated with one or more additional layers.


CLS 428/301.1
TXT Including a free metal or alloy constituent:

    Subject matter under subclass 300.7 wherein the layers comprise a metal in
    elemental or alloy form (i.e., other than in the form of a chelate, salt,
    or compound resulting from the chemical reaction of a metal).


CLS 428/301.4
TXT At least one thermosetting synthetic polymeric material layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 300.7 wherein the layers comprise a
    thermosetting synthetic polymeric layer.


CLS 428/304.4
TXT Composite having voids in a component (e.g., porous, cellular, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 221 which consists of at least two
    components, at least one of which has internal spaces either containing at
    least a gas and/or devoid of identifiable contents.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and its indented subclasses have been
    established to provide a search field for those inventions in stock
    material in which the void-containing nature of a component is the essence
    of the invention; thus, to be classified in this group of subclasses, the
    void-containing nature of the component must either (a) be expressed
    explicitly in a claim, (b) be necessary for a claimed utility of the
    product or (c) be disclosed in the specification and be incorporatable into
    the claims to resolve an ambiguity in the claims.

    (2)     Note.  The designation of a component as porous, cellular or
    permeable will be construed as void-containing.

    (3)     Note.  A porous layer or component having an impervious skin
    thereon will be considered to have two components for purposes of this
    subclass, the skin being one of the components or layers.

    (4)     Note. An impregnated material is assumed not to contain voids and
    must be disclosed or claimed as still containing porosity in order to
    warrant placement in this or indented subclasses.  Thus, paper is not
    considered to be a void-containing component unless it is specified as
    being porous or permeable.

    (5)     Note.  The inclusion in a component of hollow or porous fibers or
    particles will be assumed to make the component a void-containing component
    only when it is clearly disclosed that the fibers or particles maintain
    their hollowness or porosity after being compounded into the component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131+,   for a web, sheet or layer with rectilinear through openings
    (apertures) which may render the product inherently porous.

    188,    for a web or sheet including an elongated tubular cell located
    between and lying with its axis substantially parallel to the nonthickness
    surfaces of the web or sheet.

    320.2+, for a composite having a component which includes filled "voids".

    323+,   for a composite sheet or web including a particulate layer.

    357+,   for a mass or single layer of or containing, elements which may by
    inherently porous or cellular or wherein the disposition of the elements
    renders the product porous or cellular but wherein such porosity is not
    claimed.

    550,    566 and 613, for similar subject matter which is all metal or
    comprises adjacent metals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 95+ for a
    drying device (e.g., blotter) which includes a porous and therefore
    liquid-adsorbent sheet.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses for a
    porous or void-containing composition of that type, even in the form of a
    single layer sheet or web which lacks any other definite structural
    features. See particularly subclasses 40+, 122, 601+, and 672+.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    77+ for a method of forming pores in a lamina during or subsequent to
    lamination.

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 284+ for a web or sheet with either internal
    or external structure, which structure is disclosed as provided for the
    purpose of muffling sound.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 500.1+ for material
    peculiarly adapted for use as a liquid separation filter and see section V
    of the definition of this class (428).

    252,    Compositions, subclass 62 for heat or sound insulating compositions.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, subclasses 39 and 80+ for pore-forming
    compositions.

    521,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 50+ for methods of
    making a cellular resin product and such products, even in the form of a
    single layer web or sheet, which lack definite structural features.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 358+ for diapers and absorbent pad materials.


CLS 428/305.5
TXT With chemically effective material or specified gas other than air, N, or
    carbon dioxide in void-containing component:

    Subject matter under subclass 304.4 wherein the voids of a component
    contains a gas specified to be other than air, nitrogen or carbon dioxide;
    or where the void-containing component contains also a material which is
    susceptible to a ready chemical reaction in use of the product, e.g., to
    decomposition at an elevated temperature, etc.

    (1)     Note.  The chemically effective material often is incorporated in
    the product for fire or flameproofing purposes.

    (2)     Note.  Removal of water of hydration from a hydrated compound is
    considered to be a chemical reaction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    321.1,  for a composite product having a decomposable liquid impregnated in
    a previously void-containing component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 2+ and 601 for fire-extinguishing and
    fire-proofing compositions, per se, respectively.


CLS 428/306.6
TXT Void-containing component partially impregnated with adjacent component:

    Subject matter under subclass 304.4 wherein a void-containing component is
    partially impregnated with the material which constitutes an adjacent
    component of the composite.

    (1)     Note.  The impregnating material may itself be void-containing,
    e.g., a foam, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Ordinarily the void-containing component is in a solid,
    self-sustaining form during the impregnation, while the impregnant is in a
    fluent form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    309.9,  for a product made by commingling some material of two adjacent
    foam layers, usually in fluent or uncured form, to make an intermediate
    layer.


CLS 428/307.3
TXT Void-containing component is inorganic:

    Subject matter under subclass 306.6 in which the matrix of the
    void-containing component is inorganic, e.g., carbide, metal, graphite,
    refractory, ceramic, glass, etc.


CLS 428/307.7
TXT Inorganic impregnant:

    Subject matter under subclass 307.3 in which the impregnant also is
    inorganic, e.g., glass, hydraulic cement, etc.


CLS 428/308.4
TXT Void-containing component is synthetic resin or natural rubbers:

    Subject matter under subclass 306.6 in which the void-containing component
    is identified as a synthetic resin composition and claimed as such, e.g.,
    polyvinyl chloride, polyurethane, acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene, etc.

    (1)     Note.  A synthetic resin is the material described in the
    definition of Class 520, subclass 1.


CLS 428/308.8
TXT Void-containing component is wood or paper:

    Subject matter under subclass 306.6 wherein the void-containing component
    is cellulosic and is claimed as wood or paper.


CLS 428/309.9
TXT With internal element bridging layers, nonplanar interface between layers,
    or intermediate layer of commingled adjacent foam layers: Subject matter
    under subclass 304.4 wherein an interface between layers of a composite is
    claimed in such fashion that a wavy, keyed or otherwise nonflat function of
    the layers is required to meet the terms of the claims or an intermediate
    layer is created by commingling some material of two adjacent foam layers,
    usually in fluent form or wherein an element of the composite such as a
    fiber, etc., passes from one layer to another of the composite.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    609     and 612, for similar subject matter which is all metal or has
    adjacent metals.


CLS 428/310.5
TXT With gradual property change within a component:

    Subject matter under subclass 304.4 wherein a component has a property,
    e.g., density, composition, pore size, hardness, concentration of
    ingredients, etc., which varies gradually from one surface to another
    surface of the same component.

    (1)     Note.  The change of property usually is so gradual that no area
    within the component can be identified as an interface between components.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    547     and 610, for similar subject matter which is all metal or has
    adjacent metals.


CLS 428/311.11
TXT Void-containing component has a continuous matrix of fibers only (e.g.,
    porous paper, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 304.4 wherein a component of the composite is
    one which depends solely upon fibers for its continuity.


CLS 428/311.31
TXT And a force disintegratable component (e.g., stencil sheet, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 311.11 wherein a component of the composite
    may be locally disintegrated by the application of a sudden force thereto;
    for example, by a typewriter key.

    (l)     Note.  Where the product is designated as having a  stencil sheet,
    wherein an ink is to pass through  the product in its final use, it is
    assumed that the nondisintegrated component is porous.  See the definition
    of subclass 304.4, (1) Note, (b).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    321.1+, for a composite which includes liquid.

    488.1,  for so-called "carbon paper", comprising not necessarily porous
    paper and a waxy component having pigment, dye, or color forming reagent.


CLS 428/311.51
TXT Fibers of defined composition:

    Subject matter under subclass 311.11 wherein the chemical makeup of the
    fibers is specified, as, for example, natural leather, polypropylene, etc.


CLS 428/311.71
TXT Cellulosic:

    Subject matter under subclass 311.51 wherein the fiber is made of cellulose
    or a cellulose derivative (e.g., paper, etc.).


CLS 428/311.91
TXT Plural cellulosic components:

    Subject matter under subclass 311.71 wherein the composite comprises two or
    more layers of fibrous cellulose material.


CLS 428/312.2
TXT Inorganic matrix in void-containing component:

    Subject matter under subclass 304.4 in which the void-containing component
    has a continuous phase of material, e.g, porous cermic, etc., which is free
    from carbon atoms or contains carbon atoms only as elemental carbon, as a
    carbide, carbonate, cyanide or cyanate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    317.9,  for a composite wherein the void-containing component contains an
    organic matrix with inorganic fibers or particles distributed
    discontinuously therein.


CLS 428/312.4
TXT Of hydraulic-setting material:
    Subject matter under subclass 312.2 wherein the inorganic material is
    cementitious and is set or hardened by hydration or hydrolysis, e.g.,
    concrete, plaster, etc.


CLS 428/312.6
TXT Of silicon-containing material (e.g., glass, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 312.2 wherein the inorganic matrix comprises
    elemental silicon or a compound formed of silicon, e.g., quartz, glass,
    silicon carbide, etc.


CLS 428/312.8
TXT Of metal-containing material:

    Subject matter under subclass 312.2 wherein the inorganic material is
    specified as being elemental metal, an alloy or a metal compound, e.g., a
    ceramic, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312.6,  for a similar composite having quartz or glass as the continuous
    phase.


CLS 428/313.3
TXT Preformed hollow element-containing:
    Subject matter under subclass 304.4 wherein voids of the component result
    from the incorporation therein of a filler, aggregate, etc., which itself
    is hollow, rather than merely from voids, the walls of which constitute the
    material of the continuous matrix.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    320.6+, for a composite having in a component preformed capsules containing
    a color forming material.


CLS 428/313.5
TXT Resin or rubber element:

    Subject matter under subclass 313.3 wherein the preformed hollow element is
    composed of resin or rubber, e.g., a hollow resin capsule containing air,
    etc.

    (1)     Note.  A synthetic resin is the material described in the
    definition of Class 260, subclass 2.01.


CLS 428/313.7
TXT Mineral element:

    Subject matter under subclass 313.3 wherein the preformed hollow element is
    a mineral which is naturally void-containing or which has been treated to
    create voids, e.g., by heating, etc., such minerals including expanded
    vermiculite, perlite, mica, clay, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 378 for exfoliated or intumesced
    compositions in general.


CLS 428/313.9
TXT Metal- or silicon-containing element:
    Subject matter under subclass 313.3 wherein the element contains metal or
    silicon in free or combined form, e.g., refractory, ceramic, glass, etc.


CLS 428/314.2
TXT Void shape specified (e.g., crushed, flat, round, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 304.4 wherein the geometric configuration of
    the voids, whether regular or irregular, is specified in the claims.

    (1)     Note.  Use of the term "crushed", designated a foam which has been
    treated, usually by pressure, to reduce the size of the foam cells and give
    the cell walls a broken and/or irregular configuration, is sufficient to
    place a patent in this subclass.


CLS 428/314.4
TXT Voids specified as closed:

    Subject matter under subclass 304.4 wherein the voids in the
    void-containing component are specified as being closed, rather than
    forming a series of interconnected voids, e.g., closed-cell foam, etc.


CLS 428/314.8
TXT Specified thickness of void-containing component (absolute or relative),
    numerical cell dimension or density:

    Subject matter under subclass 314.4 in which either the thickness of the
    void-containing component is claimed in terms of numbers or in relation to
    the thickness of another component, e.g., thicker, thinner, etc.), a
    numerical cell size (microns, etc.) or density (pounds per cubic foot,
    etc.) is claimed.


CLS 428/315.5
TXT Voids specified as micro:

    Subject matter under subclass 304.4 wherein the voids of the
    void-containing component are claimed as being invisible to the naked eye.

    (1)     Note.  Where the voids are described using the word or prefix
    "micro", the voids are assumed to be invisible to the naked eye.


CLS 428/315.7
TXT Specified thickness of void-containing component (absolute or relative) or
    numerical cell dimension:

    Subject matter under subclass 315.5 in which the thickness of a
    void-containing component is claimed in terms of numbers or in relation to
    the thickness of another component, e.g., thicker, thinner, etc. or a
    numerical cell size is claimed, usually expressed in terms of microns,
    angstroms, etc.


CLS 428/315.9
TXT Composite has more than two layers:

    Subject matter under subclass 315.5 in which the composite comprises at
    least three layers.


CLS 428/316.6
TXT Plural void-containing components:

    Subject matter under subclass 304.4 having more than one component
    containing voids.


CLS 428/317.1
TXT With component specified as adhesive or bonding agent:

    Subject matter under subclass 304.4 having a component which is claimed as
    having an adhesive function serving to bond other components together, etc.

    (1)     Note.  The void-containing component may serve as the bonding
    component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40+,    for a composite in which an outer layer is removable in order to
    expose an adhesive, e.g., certain  protected pressure-sensitive adhesive
    tapes, etc.


CLS 428/317.3
TXT As outermost component:

    Subject matter under subclass 317.1 wherein the adhesive or bonding
    component is an outermost layer of the composite, that is, the composite is
    designed to be adhered to a material or object outside of the composite.


CLS 428/317.5
TXT Adhesive or bonding component contains voids:

    Subject matter under subclass 317.1 wherein the bonding or adhesive
    component itself contains voids, e.g., a poromeric, cellular, foam, etc.,
    component itself is used to bond nonvoid component together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    316.6,  for a composite in which a void-containing component is used to
    bond another void-containing component.


CLS 428/317.7
TXT Composition of adhesive or bonding component specified:

    Subject matter under subclass 317.1 wherein the void-containing component
    is identified in the claims by its chemical makeup, e.g, a resin, asphalt,
    etc.


CLS 428/317.9
TXT Void-containing component contains also a solid fiber or solid particle:

    Subject matter under subclass 304.4 in which a solid particle or solid
    fiber is dispersed in the void-containing component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305.5,  for such subject matter where the fiber or particle is of a
    chemically effective material.

    311.11+, for such subject matter where fibers are present in such amount
    and arrangement as to constitute a continuous matrix.


CLS 428/318.4
TXT With nonvoid component of specified composition:

    Subject matter under subclass 304.4 wherein the composite has a layer
    without voids which is claimed in terms of its composition.

    (1)     Note.  A mere statement of that the nonvoid component is "a
    substrate", "a layer", "a film", etc., is not sufficient for placement in
    this subclass, but identification of the component as "metal", "organic",
    etc., is sufficient.


CLS 428/318.6
TXT Of about the same composition as, and adjacent to, the void-containing
    component:

    Subject matter under subclass 318.4 wherein a void-containing component
    has, next to it, a component without voids which varies not more than about
    10% in the proportion of its solid constituents from the composition of the
    void-containing component.

    (1)     Note.  Insofar as synthetic resins, per se, are concerned, the 10%
    permissible variation is to be applied to the monomer residue content of
    the finished polymer; differences in molecular weight, crystallinity, etc.,
    are not considered to be differences in composition.


CLS 428/318.8
TXT Integrally formed skin:

    Subject matter under subclass 318.6 in which the nonvoid component is
    identical in composition to the composition of the void-containing
    component and is formed simultaneously with the void-containing component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    521,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 51 for a process of
    preparing a cellular resin product having an integral skin.


CLS 428/319.1
TXT Inorganic:
    Subject matter under subclass 318.4 in which the nonvoid component is free
    from carbon atoms or contains carbon atoms only as elemental carbon, as a
    carbide, carbonate, cyanide or cyanate.


CLS 428/319.3
TXT Synthetic resin or natural rubbers:

    Subject matter under subclass 318.4 in which the nonvoid component is a
    synthetic resin.

    (1)     Note.  A synthetic resin or natural rubbers is the material
    described in the definition of Class 260, subclass 2.01.


CLS 428/319.7
TXT Linear or thermoplastic:

    Subject matter under subclass 319.3 wherein the nonvoid component is a
    synthetic resin without cross-linkages, that is, one which softens
    reversably under the influence of heat.


CLS 428/319.9
TXT Hydrocarbon polymer:

    Subject matter under subclass 319.7 wherein the resin contains carbon and
    hydrogen only.


CLS 428/320.2
TXT Composite having a component wherein a constituent is liquid or is
    contained within performed walls (e.g., impregnant-filled, previously
    void-containing component, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 221 consisting of at least two components, at
    least one of which contains liquid or has a constituent trapped inside
    walls made before combination with the other constituent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    408,    for an impregnated, self-sustaining, carbon mass.

    439.5,  for a consolidated metal powder product impregnated with a nonmetal.

    540+,   for an impregnated natural product.


CLS 428/321.1
TXT Constituent is in liquid form:

    Subject matter under subclass 320.2 wherein a component contains a material
    which is a liquid at ambient temperature or is a liquid at the conditions
    under which the product is used.

    (1)     Note.  A liquid for purposes of this subclass is a material of
    definite volume which takes the shape of its container at ambient
    temperature or temperature of use of the claimed product.  It includes
    collodial dispersions in which liquid is the continuous or dispersant phase.


CLS 428/321.3
TXT Ink in pores:

    Subject matter under subclass 321.1 wherein the liquid is claimed as ink
    and is trapped within pores of a carrier material.

    (1)     Note.  Generally, the ink is extrudable from the pores under the
    influence of pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 20+ for ink
    compositions, per se.


CLS 428/321.5
TXT Encapsulated liquid:

    Subject matter under subclass 321.1 wherein the liquid has been
    encapsulated in a solid material before incorporation into the component in
    question.

    (1)     Note.  A statement that the liquid is in the form of
    "microcapsules" is sufficient for placement of the patent in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    313.3,  for composite stock materials containing "empty" microcapsules.


CLS 428/322.2
TXT Indefinite plurality of similar impregnated thin sheets (e.g., "decorative
    laminate" type, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 320.2 comprising an unspecified number,
    greater than two, of sheets bonded together, each sheet being of similar
    material to the others and having at least one negligible dimension, each
    sheet having once been porous but having lost its porosity by being
    impregnated with a fluid material before or after assembly of the stack.

    (1)     Note.  The impregnant usually is a nonfully, polymerized resin and
    the bonding usually includes completion of polymerization, i.e., curing, of
    the resin.

    (2)     Note.  The products usually are "decorative laminates", such as
    those used for counter-tops, dishes, etc., sold under trade names such as
    Formica, Melmac, etc.


CLS 428/322.7
TXT Differentially filled foam, filled plural layers, or filled layer with coat
    of filling material:

    Subject matter under subclass 320.2 wherein the structure of a foamed
    material bridges two or more distinct components, wherein a solidified
    impregnant permeates two or more adjacent previously porous components of
    an assembled composite or wherein such an impregnant permeates a previously
    porous component and also coats an outside surface of the component.


CLS 428/323
TXT Product under subclass 221 which comprises at least two components, one of
    which consists of or includes grains or extremely small pieces or fragments
    of material claimed in terms of (1) their particular size or shape (natural
    or fabricated) or (2) an orderly arrangement relative to one another or (3)
    their particular interengagement within the component, or (4) their
    engagement with the material of an adjacent component.

    (1)     Note.  A web, sheet or layer claimed as having a haphazard
    arrangement of its particulate constituents is not considered as possessing
    an orderly arrangement of its particulate constituent within the definition
    of this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  A composite web or sheet in which its particulate
    constituents are claimed as being in an orderly arrangement relative to a
    surface of the web or sheet is considered to be a structurally defined web
    or sheet and will be found in subclasses 98+.

    (3)     Note.  Coated particles* are considered to be structurally defined
    and therefore, a composite web in which one layer or component contains
    coated particles will be placed in this or an indented subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304+,   for a web or sheet comprising a component embodying porous or
    cellular particles so claimed.

    357+,   for a mass of or containing oriented or structurally defined
    particles.

    411+,   for a nonstructural laminate incorporating particulate material
    neither oriented nor structurally defined.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, subclasses 110+ for
    a product of that class (149) embodying particulate material of a certain
    size(s).


CLS 428/324
TXT Product under subclass 323 in which the particles* comprises any of the
    group of mineral silicates commonly called "mica".

    (1)     Note.  The term "mica" will be construed as connoting flakes of
    flat configuration and therefore structurally defined unless the disclosure
    clearly contradicts such an interpretation; see (1) Note in subclass 454.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    363,    for a mass or single layer of or containing mica flakes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 415+ for a
    composition of that class (106) including mica.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 378 for a composition containing exfoliated
    or intumesced material.


CLS 428/325
TXT Product under subclass 323 wherein the particles are of material made from
    clay*, usually by the agency of fire.

    (1)     Note.  Included under this definition of ceramic* are those
    materials termed as glass*, pottery, enamel, cement, refractories*,
    porcelain* or quartz.


CLS 428/326
TXT Product under subclass 323 wherein the particles comprise carbohydrate
    material derived from the structural matter of plant life, usually from the
    stems thereof.

    (1)     Note.  This carbohydrate is commonly termed cellulose* and may be
    further treated to yield esterified, modified or regenerated substances
    such as rayon* or viscose*.


CLS 428/327
TXT Product under subclass 323 in which the particles comprise an organic
    substance which is synthetically produced by union (polymerization or
    condensation) of a large number of molecules of one or more relatively
    simple compounds.

    (1)     Note.  Particles of naturally occurring polymeric material or
    reaction products thereof, e.g., carbohydrate, polypeptides and cellulosic
    products, are excluded from this definition of polymer and will be found in
    other subclasses on other features, e.g., subclass 326 for carbohydrates,
    etc.


CLS 428/328
TXT Product under subclass 323 in which the particles comprise (1) a free
    metal* having a specific gravity or density greater than 4, or (2) the free
    metal* aluminum or (3) a compound having the metal* of either (1) or (2)
    above in its molecule.


CLS 428/329
TXT Product under subclass 328 wherein the metal is iron or aluminum and is
    present as the oxide.


CLS 428/330
TXT Product under subclass 323 in which the particles comprise a metal*
    selected from the group consisting of Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs, Mg, Ca, Sr and Ba
    (i.e., the alkali or alkaline earth metals) in either the free form or
    combined with other elements and forming either an inorganic or organic
    compound.


CLS 428/331
TXT Product under subclass 323 in which the particles comprise the element
    silicon (Si) in either its free or combined form.


CLS 428/332
TXT Product under subclass 221 in which the size of an element, constituent, or
    component of a web or sheet is claimed.

    (1)     Note.  The difference between 212+ and this subclass and indents
    (332+) is that in the former the thickness of two components* are recited,
    while in the latter the thickness of only the base or layer is specified.
    Where the dimensions of two components* are specified so that one can be
    compared to another, classification in 212+ is indicated.

    (2)     Note.  In this and the indented subclasses a size in units of
    length must be specified in the claim.  A recitation of weight per unit
    area is excluded from this group of subclasses and will be found in
    subclasses 340+ below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212+,   for a composite web or sheet in which the thickness of two
    components is claimed either in terms of their relative thickness or in
    absolute dimensions.

    220,    for a product in which the absolute dimension of a web* or sheet*
    is claimed.

    340+,   for a recitation of a weight per unit area which can be calculated
    to yield a physical dimension, if another parameter, such as density, is
    known.


CLS 428/333
TXT Product under subclass 332 in which the claimed size is defined in terms of
    molecules of the material or of wave length of light.

    (1)     Note.  Included within this definition are recitations setting
    forth (1) a certain number (one or more) molecules thick or (2) a portion
    of a wave length of any color of light.


CLS 428/334
TXT Product under subclass 332 in which the absolute physical dimension
    specified is the thickness of a coating layer* and which does not exceed 5
    mils or the equivalent thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of equivalents are:

            1 mil=.001 inch=.0254 mm (milli- ter)=25.4 u or mu(micron)=254,000
    A (Angstroms)

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332,    for a product in which a coating layer is recited in a range which
    starts at less than 5 mils but transcends this figure (e.g., 4-17 mils,
    etc.).


CLS 428/335
TXT Product under subclass 334 in which the thickness does not exceed 3 mils or
    its equivalent.


CLS 428/336
TXT Product under subclass 335 in which the thickness does not exceed 1 mil or
    its equivalent.


CLS 428/337
TXT Product under subclass 332 in which the absolute size of the base* or
    substrate* of a composite web or sheet is claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220,    for a web or sheet in which the size of the entire sheet or web is
    claimed.


CLS 428/338
TXT Product under subclass 332 consisting of a single layer of material in
    which the dimension of an element (e.g., particle*, etc.) is claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220,    for a product in which the absolute size of the web or sheet is
    defined.


CLS 428/339
TXT Product under subclass 332 in which there is a component comprising a man
    made resin or polymer.


CLS 428/340
TXT Product under subclass 221 in which is recited the weight of a material
    related to its area.

    (1)     Note.  The "material" may be a web, sheets component, base*,
    coating, layer or element.

    (2)     Note.  Some examples of terms used are: pounds per square meter,
    grams per square centimeter, pounds per square foot, grams per quire of
    certain size paper, etc.

    (3)     Note.  This is excluded from subclasses 332+ even though the
    thickness can be calculated if the density of the material be known.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332+,   for an element or component recited in terms of its actual physical
    dimension in units of length (e.g., mils, inches, microns, etc.).


CLS 428/341
TXT Product under subclass 340 in which it is the weight of a coating over a
    given area which is specified.


CLS 428/342
TXT Product under subclass 341 in which the specified coating is on the surface
    of a cellulosic* material.


CLS 428/343
TXT Product under subclass 221 comprising a composite* web or sheet in which an
    outermost layer is capable of sticking to a surface to which it may be
    applied or of being activated to have such capability.

    (1)     Note.  The adhesive layer need not be applied to an extraneous
    surface; it could be applied to and caused to adhere to itself or to
    another portion of the composite* web or sheet, as in heat sealable
    packaging films.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40+,    for a product which comprises at least two layers or components,
    one of which must be removed to expose an adhesive coating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 59+ for a product comprising mechanically interengaged strands
    or strand portions, etc., having an adhesive coating or impregnation
    associated therewith.


CLS 428/344
TXT Product under subclass 343 in which the adhesive layer is adjacent a metal*
    layer.


CLS 428/345
TXT Product under subclass 343 in which at least one of the components of the
    composite sheet has been subjected to a source (1) of ultraviolet
    radiation, especially wavelengths of 250-300m u, or (2) energy transmitted
    by various mediums.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of irradiation or wave energy devices are:  light
    or electron emitters, sonic devices, electric glow discharges, etc. and the
    term wave energy includes radiations, electromagnetic waves, neutron,
    proton, deutron and other corpuscular radiations.


CLS 428/346
TXT Product under subclass 343 in which the adhesive is caused to become
    capable of adhering to a surface by virtue of having been contacted with a
    material which causes at least a portion of the adhesive to be dissolved or
    otherwise activated, or by having its temperature increased, usually by
    contact with a heated surface.


CLS 428/347
TXT Product under subclass 346 in which the adhesive is caused to adhere by
    increase in temperature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200,    for a product which comprises a nonuniform (i.e., differential or
    discontinuous) coating and in addition an adhesive layer which is caused to
    either adhere or delaminate by means of increase in temperature.


CLS 428/348
TXT Product under subclass 347 in which the adhesive contains a compound which
    is described as a wax (e.g., beeswax or paraffin, etc.) or having the
    physical characteristics of a wax or is a recognized wax* (e.g., carnauba,
    etc.).


CLS 428/349
TXT Product under subclass 347 in which the adhesive contains a man-made resin
    or polymer.


CLS 428/350
TXT Product under subclass 346 in which water is the material which contacts
    the adhesive to cause it to adhere to another surface.


CLS 428/351
TXT Product under subclass 343 in which a component has been made hydrophobic
    or less hydrophilic (i.e., waterproof or moistureproof or resistant).


CLS 428/352
TXT Product under subclass 343 which contains an additional layer or component
    of such characteristics that it does not permanently adhere to a surface
    (which may be another layer of the product) with which it may come into
    contact.

    (1)     Note.  A release or anti-stick coating such is that under this
    definition is usually provided on the side of the base* opposite that which
    supports the adhesive, in order to prevent adherence when stacked or rolled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40+,    for a product in which a release layer is removed to expose another
    layer or component having an adhesive coating thereon.


CLS 428/353
TXT Product under subclass 343 comprising a three layered product in which
    there is a layer between the adhesive and the substrate, which layer is
    used to increase the cohesiveness between the adhesive layer and the
    substrate.

    (1)     Note.  The intermediate layer may be called by various names, e.g.,
    primer or bonding layer, or anchor coat, etc.


CLS 428/354
TXT Product under subclass 343 in which three or more layers are claimed either
    in the form of plural coatings on a substrate or a laminate of two or more
    layers having an adhesive layer therebetween.


CLS 428/355
TXT Product under subclass 343 in which the adhesive composition is recited.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this or the indented subclass, at
    least one of the ingredients of the adhesive must be recited specifically,
    for example as "gum arabic", "linseed oil", etc., not nominally, as for
    example, "oil", "gum", etc.


CLS 428/356
TXT Product under subclass 355 in which an ingredient of the adhesive
    composition comprises (1) rubber* from a natural source or (2) a metal* in
    either its free or combined state.

    (1)     Note.  The term "reclaimed" rubber is considered to be natural for
    purposes of this subclass unless it is clear from the disclosure that a
    synthetic rubber is intended, in which case classification in subclass 355
    is indicated.

    (2)     Note.  If it is not clear whether natural or synthetic rubber is
    intended from either the disclosure or claims, then classification is in
    subclass 355 on the basis of synthetic rubber, with a cross reference, if
    necessary, to subclass 356.


CLS 428/357
TXT Product under the class definition containing, or consisting of, at least
    one strand*, strand-portion*, macroscopic fiber*, grain, small bit of
    matter, cell*, particle* or any other substance, claimed in terms of (1) a
    particular size or shape (natural or fabricated), (2) a plurality of such
    elements* claimed in terms of an arrangement relative to one another, (3) a
    particular interengagement of a plurality of such elements* or (4) a
    coating associated therewith.

    (1)     Note.  The molecular orientation or crystalline structure of a
    product is considered a mere manifestation of the nature of the material
    thereof; accordingly, the recitation of either is not considered structure
    within the meaning of that word as used in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  A patent directed to a single layers or mass* of a
    particular composition which is further defined as "cellular",
    "particulate" or "porous" (by name only), will be placed in the appropriate
    composition class in the absence of defined structure (see above clauses in
    the definition of this subclass).

    (3)     Note.  A patent to a structurally defined particle will be placed
    in this, or the appropriate indented subclass as a subcombination of the
    subject matter provided for herein, unless specifically provided for
    elsewhere.

    (4)     Note.  Excluded from this or indented subclasses is a rod, strand,
    fiber or filament which is merely impregnated with or has associated
    therewith a material, without any specified indication as to the depth of
    the impregnation, or without any other recited structure; such a
    combination is classified on the basis of the composition, e.g., for
    Classes 106, 260, 520, etc.

    (5)     Note.  The term "sizing" or "sized" will be construed to be a
    coating for this group of subclasses unless it is clear that only an
    impregnation is intended; see (4) Note above.

    (6)     Note.  A mass of fibers merely bonded together with no recitation
    of structure, is excluded from this Class 428 and will be found in the
    appropriate composition class; see search notes below.

    (7)     Note.  The term "flake" is construed as structure, indicating a
    flat piece of matter.

    (8)     Note.  Included under this definition of "significant size" is any
    recitation of a measurable extent, no matter how wide (e.g., up to 0.5
    mils, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221,    for a web* or sheet* of fibers or filaments* which are claimed as
    being bonded at their intersections.

    292.1+, for a composite* web or sheet in which one component* contains
    fibers.

    323+,   for a composite* web or sheet in which one component contains
    particles which are structurally defined.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses, for a
    composition provided for in that class (106) which may include structurally
    defined particles or fibers; and see II Note under the class definition of
    that class (106) with regard to the elements, per se, for use in such
    composition; and see (4) Note above.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, subclasses 21 and
    110+ for an explosive or thermic composition or charge including
    structurally characterized particles.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 378 for a composition containing exfoliated
    or intumesced material.

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclasses, for coating a rod,
    strand fiber or particle, or for coating with flakes, granules or
    particulate matter.

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.), for a
    textile*, cloth* or fabric* in which the strands, fibers, or other
    constituents* thereof are structurally defined, as set forth therein.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for,
    especially subclass 48 for a roll cover, per se, and see the notes
    thereunder.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, for a synthetic resin or
    natural rubber composition containing an ingredient which may be coated,
    impregnated, or has a defined size or shape.

    521,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 50+ for a synthetic
    resin composition (or single layer) in cellular form.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    249+ for containment of  hazardous or toxic waste.


CLS 428/358
TXT Product under subclass 357 comprising a substantially U-shaped groove or
    slot.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the patents herein disclose weatherstripping of
    strand* form having a U-shaped groove in which a pane of glass usually fits.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85+,    especially subclasses 89 and 95 for a channel shaped product
    including pile structure and acting as window pane channel.


CLS 428/359
TXT Product under subclass 357 comprising a fiber which is approximately 1 1/2
    to 2 inches in length, (i.e., the usual staple length).

    (1)     Note.  A claim which recites a "staple" fiber or "staple" length
    fiber will be classified in this subclass; a claim which calls for "short"
    or other similar term, which, by sole disclosure, is staple length will be
    classified in this subclass.


CLS 428/360
TXT Product under subclass 359 comprising a plurality of staple length fibers
    which are intertangled and which are bonded only at their cross-over or
    contact points.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    197,    for a textile* or cloth* product comprising knitted strands*,
    filaments* or strips* and which are bonded to each other only at selected
    points.

    221,    for a web* or sheet* comprising fibers* or filaments which are
    bonded at their intersections only.

    292.1+,  for a composite web* or sheet* in which one component comprises
    fibers* which are structurally defined in some manner and which may be
    bonded at their intersections only.


CLS 428/361
TXT Product under subclass 359 in which the staple length fiber is permeated,
    saturated, or covered with an extraneous material.


CLS 428/362
TXT Product under subclass 359 in which the longitudinal direction of the
    staple length fiber follows a curvilinear or multi-directional path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    369+,   for a fiber of greater than staple length which is nonlinear.


CLS 428/363
TXT Product under subclass 357 comprising a grain or small bit of material
    (i.e., particle*) which is a flat platelet of any of the group of mineral
    silicates commonly called "mica"*

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    454,    for a nonstructural laminate including mica* in nonflake form
    (i.e., as ground or pulverized).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 415+ for a product
    provided for in that class (106) embodying shells, scales, micaceous
    material or similar lamellate material.


CLS 428/364
TXT Product under subclass 357 comprising a rod, strand, fiber or filament*.

    (1)     Note.  A solid rod, fiber or strand product of uniform circular
    cross-section and extending in a straight line without deviation will not
    be considered for placement in this or an indented subclass.  However, such
    a product, when coated will be considered as sufficient for subclass 375
    even in the absence of structure.  An impregnated fiber, strand,
    strand-portion, etc., unless qualified by structure (e.g., size, shape,
    etc.) will be considered as composition for the appropriate class (e.g.,
    106, 520, etc.; see (4) Note in subclass 357 and (2) Note below.

    (2)     Note.  A patent to a rod, strand or fiber distinguished solely by
    its composition will be placed in the appropriate  composition class.  See
    particularly Class 106, Compositions:  Coating or Plastic; see also; Class
    520, Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, for a synthetic resin or natural
    rubbers filament.  For the purpose of patent placement in this subclass,
    the recitation of molecular orientation or crystalline structure in a fiber
    is not regarded as a structural limitation and patents claiming such fibers
    with no additional structure will be placed in the appropriate composition
    class. Also, a patent for a fiber where the presence of structure or the
    degree thereof is a mere manifestation of the composition will be placed in
    the appropriate composition class.  A fiber defined in terms of its
    properties or other descriptors (e.g., tensile strength, per cent
    elongation) is not considered a structurally defined fiber.

    (3)     Note.  A patent directed to a rod, wire or filament of
    indeterminate length will be placed in Class 204, Chemistry: Electrical and
    Wave Energy, where a process under the definition of Class 204 appears to
    be a necessary limitation to the product. A product of a 157.15+ process
    will be classified as in the (2) Note above.

    (4)     Note.  A patent for a strand consisting of woven constituents is
    provided for in subclasses 383+ of Class 139, Textiles: Weaving and a
    patent claiming a strand consisting of knitted constituents is provided for
    in subclasses 169+ of Class 66, Textiles:  Knitting; however, a patent for
    a composite strand including either of such strands in combination with
    another unlike constituent (e.g., knit core with woven sheath) will be
    placed in this subclass 364 where not provided for elsewhere.

    (5)     Note.  A patent for a composite rod or strand reciting or claiming
    at least one twisted or twined constituent will be placed in Class 57,
    Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, or Twining, but where said constituent is a
    preformed coiled spring element, the patent will be placed in subclasses
    369+ below.  See section VI Relation to Certain Other Classes, in the main
    class definition, reference to Class 57 for guide lines relating to
    placement of "yarns", "cords", etc.

    (6)     Note.  Excluded from this and indented subclasses are patents to
    one or more transparent elongated structures (e.g., rods, fibers or pipes)
    used to transmit light rays from one point to another within the confines
    of their outer surface, and involving internal reflections or modal
    transmission.

    (7)     Note.  See (1) Note in the definition of subclass 36 for the
    distinction between a hollow strand, fiber or filament and a conduit type
    article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34.1+,  for an article* (e.g., 3 dimensional or of substantial size) which
    is a cylinder or a conduit open at both ends and disclosed to conduct
    fluids and, disregarding the size, may be similar to a hollow fiber,
    filament or strand.

    98+ and 221+, appropriate indented subclasses, especially subclasses 175+,
    193 292.1+, 323+, and 332+ for a structurally defined rod, strand, fiber,
    or filament serving as a constituent* or element* of a web*, Sheet*, or
    layer*.

    196+, for a strand with structure and disposed in interengaged relation to
    other strands or strandlike elements of web o sheet.

    292.1+, for a strand with structure and disposed in noninterengaged
    relation to other elements of a web or sheet.

    544+,   for corresponding metallic* stock-material*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 256+ for strand or elongated rod-like element
    used as a stiffening or stay means for garments.

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, appropriate subclasses, for a monofilament of fiber
    which is the product of an operation provided for in that class.

    14,     Bridges, subclass 22 for cable peculiar to the suspension of a
    bridge.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 208+ for an
    implement which includes rods, strands or fibers having particular shape,
    size or arrangement.

    19,     Textiles:  Fibers Preparation, appropriate subclasses for drawing,
    carding or other fiber preparations involving no twisting.

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, appropriate subclasses for treatment of
    the constituents of a textile subsequent to fabrication of the product to
    obtain a better marketable condition.

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, appropriate subclasses for methods and
    apparatus for the mechanical interengagement of fibers.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 720.1+ for an
    elongated rigid member specialized to use as or in in situ erected
    structures.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 200+ for a
    product reciting twisted or twined rod(s), strand(s) or fiber(s) and see
    (5) Note above.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclasses 169+ for a knitted product not
    elsewhere provided for.

    84,     Music, subclasses 199 and 297+ for a musical instrument string.

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, subclasses 1-13 for
    a product embodying braided, knotted or intertwisted strands.

    104,    Railways, subclass 240 for railway traction cable.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses for a
    structurally defined fiber strand as provided for in that class (106) and
    see II under the class definition note of that class (106).

    112,    Sewing, subclass 400 for a sewn strand (e.g., strand with stitches
    along its length).

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 331 for stock material specified as being a
    filter and of indeterminate shape (e.g., mass) or approximating the shape
    (e.g., coil, tube, cylinder, rod) of the article or appliance with which it
    is intended to be used, requiring no further treatment than tearing or
    cutting to proper size; stock material of any other shape, recited so that
    some shape modification is required is classified in Class 428.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 383+ for a web or sheet claimed in
    terms of the particular arrangement or material(s) of the warp and/or weft;
    subclass 395, for a woven chenille strand; subclasses 457+ for method and
    apparatus for weaving a tubular or circular fabric; and subclasses 420+ for
    a woven textile possessing a certain texture resulting from the nature or
    form of the strands or fibers employed in the manufacture thereof.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, especially subclasses 450+
    for electrophoretic or electro-osmotic processes.  Also, see the (3) Note
    above..

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 76+, 138+, and 152+ for a rod, wire,
    or filament formed by electrolytic coating processes.

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 213 for tie rods.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, appropriate subclasses, for a rod,
    strand or fiber, by name only, of a particular composition provided for in
    that class (260) and see (1) and (2) Notes of this subclass.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, subclasses 536+ for a dynamic seal of
    fibrous composite construction contained or compressed by a gland member in
    a packing box, subclass 937 for a seal made of a composite material
    including glass particles or filament, or subclas 938 for a seal made of a
    composite material including cartoon or graphite particle or filament.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 357 for an electrode
    in the form of a rod.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, appropriate subclasses for light transmitting
    rod, fiber, or pipe, of the type provided for in that class.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, appropriate subclasses for
    a rod or strand which is adapted to coat or leave a mark on a surface by
    virtue of its shape (e.g., point or taper, etc.), whether or not the rod or
    strand itself is coated.  For example, a pencil having a paper wrapping
    therearound is in Class 401, whereas a similar rod or strand with a paper
    wrapping, but with no coating implement feature would be proper for
    subclass 377 below.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 325 for a strand structure employed as a
    burner wick.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 237+ for a friction drive belt which may be formed of or include
    strand structure.

    606,    Surgery, subclasses 228+ for filamentary material used as a suture
    or ligature.  See section VIA5 of this definition.


CLS 428/365
TXT Product under subclass 364 which comprises textile*, cloth* or fabric*.

    (1)     Note.  The textile*, cloth of fabric may be in the form of a
    tubular cover for a core or may itself be covered with another material or
    may be the only element claimed, in which case it must be structurally
    defined.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222,    for a sheet* or web* of textile*, cloth* or fabric* which is, or
    has a component* which is, helically wound either around itself or another
    component*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.), for
    textile*, cloth*, or fabric* in the form of a sheet* or web*.


CLS 428/366
TXT Product under subclass 364 in which the rod, strand, filament or fiber
    comprises the element boron in either the free or combined state.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass is a rod, strand, filament or
    fiber which is composed of steel or other alloy or an intermetallic
    compound having boron as a constituent thereof; such products of sheet or
    other alloy will be found in subsequent subclasses on other features (see
    especially subclasses 379+).  This subclass 366 is intended to be the locus
    for the high modulus boron filament or fiber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 276+ for a process of
    making free boron or a compound thereof or the product, per se, which does
    not claim structure enough to be placed in this Class 428.


CLS 428/367
TXT Product under subclass 364 in which carbon, as either the element or as a
    compound thereof, comprises the rod, strand or fiber or filament or is
    present as a covering on a rod, strand, fiber or filament of another
    material.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass is a product in which the carbon
    or its compound is a minor constituent of steel or other alloy; fibers,
    filaments, etc., of steel or other alloy will be found in other subclasses
    below on other features (see subclasses 379+).  This subclass 367 is
    intended to be the locus for the high modulus carbon fiber or filament.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 414+ for a process for
    making free carbon or a compound thereof or the product, per se, (e.g.,
    rod, fiber, etc.) where no significant structure is recited.


CLS 428/368
TXT Product under subclass 367 in which the free carbon or the compound thereof
    forms a covering for a rod, strand, filament or fiber.


CLS 428/369
TXT Product under subclass 364 wherein the longitudinal axis of the rod, strand
    or fiber, considered as a unit, follows a curvilinear or multi-directional
    path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for a 3 dimensional object part of which has a winding or coil or
    braid of a strand, usually for decorative purposes, as for example, on the
    hilt or scabbard of a sword.

    37,     for a product comprising a spirally flatwound strand or strip,
    e.g., in the form of a braided rug.

    108,    for a product in which strands or strand-portions in a plurality of
    layers* are angularly related to one another and in which the longitudinal
    axis of the strands or strand-portions follows a multi-directional or
    curvilinear path.

    222,    for a composite* web* or sheet* in which one of the components* is
    helical.

    292.1+, for a composite* web* or sheet* in which one of the components*
    comprises structurally defined fibers which may be nonlinear in extent
    (e.g., crimped or coiled).

    362,    for a fiber of staple length which is nonlinear in extent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, appropriate subclasses, for a fiber or monofilament
    with nonlinear shape wherein said shape is disclosed as resulting from one
    or more of the bleaching, dyeing, fluid treatment or chemical modification
    operations provided for in that class (8); subclass 114.5 for a product
    with differential creping, and subclass 117 for a wool-like or crinkled
    article.

    140,    Wireworking, appropriate subclasses, for a methods or apparatus for
    the working of wire products, especially subclass 105 which is directed to
    the forming of crimps or kinks in wire or wire fabrics.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 69 for a conduit,
    cable or conductor which is nonlinear to render the product extensible; and
    subclasses 108+ for a conductive strand or other elongated conductive
    element applied spirally about one or more insulated conductors.

    289,    Knots and Knot Tying, subclass 1.2 for a strand(s) with a
    portion(s) thereof intertwined and forming or cooperating to form a knot.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 341 for a filament
    with a nonlinear axis designed to be heated by the flow of electric
    current, and especially indented subclass 344 for a coiled filament.


CLS 428/370
TXT Product under subclass 369 in which the filament of fiber is made up of at
    least two different compositions of matter, (e.g., polyester-cotton,
    cellulose-polyamide) (polyamides of different compositions, etc.).


CLS 428/371
TXT Product under subclass 369 in which the curvilinear or multi-directional
    path comprises a helix- i.e., made by a point rotating around an axis while
    advancing along the axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370,    for a product comprising a composite or bifilar or collateral
    filament in the form of a spiral or helix or coil.


CLS 428/372
TXT Product under subclass 364 having in addition particulate matter (e.g.,
    chips, powder, granules, small grains, etc.) which is defined in some
    structural manner (e.g., shape, size, arrangement, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  See definition of subclass 357 for meaning and intent of
    "structurally defined".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87,     for a pile or nap type product including particulate matter which
    may be structurally defined.

    143+,   for a sheet* or web* which has a continuous but nonuniform surface
    finish caused by particulate matter which may be structurally defined.

    195+,   for a web* or sheet* which has a discontinuous or differential
    coating, impregnation or bond and which may contain particulate matter, and
    especially subclasses 206+ for a product as above and also having as part
    thereof particulate matter which may be structurally defined.

    292.1+ and 323+, for a composite* web* in which one component* includes
    structurally defined fibers which may be small enough to qualify for
    particles and structurally defined particles, respectively.

    306+,   for a composite* web* or sheet* in which a component* includes
    particles which may or may not contain adhesive.

    403+,   for coated particulate matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 400+ for composition of particles, grains, etc., as
    provided for therein.

    132,    Toilet, subclass 93 for a strand impregnated with an abrasive
    material (e.g., dental floss).

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclass 425 for a woven fabric including metal
    particles in the texture.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, appropriate subclasses for
    a conduit, cable or conductor insulated with powdered or granular material.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 526+ for a strand including an abrasive
    material.


CLS 428/373
TXT Product under subclass 364 comprising a plurality of fibers or filaments
    which have been simultaneously formed by being forced through separate
    openings in a die or spinneret, and in which (1) the individual fibers or
    filaments are side-by-side with a connecting web therebetween or (2) one
    fiber or filament is substantially enclosed in the other (sheath-core type).

    (1)     Note.  The fibers are usually of different composition so that on
    cooling or heating the crimp or nonlinearity may be controlled due to the
    differing rates of expansion or contraction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370,    for a composite, bifilar, conjugate or collateral fiber or filament
    whose longitudinal axis follows a curvilinear or multidirectional path
    (e.g., helical, crimped, etc.).


CLS 428/374
TXT Product under subclass 373 in which the axis of the fibers or filaments do
    not coincide, i.e., one is laterally spaced from the other.


CLS 428/375
TXT Product under subclass 364 in which the rod, strand, fiber or filament is
    (1) partially or completely covered with a material or (2) is structurally
    defined as set forth in the definition of subclass 357 and, in addition,
    may also be partially or completely saturated or permeated with a material
    or adhered to another material or strand, fiber or filament or rod or
    contain a central portion.

    (1)     Note.  A patent directed to a product including a wrapped
    constituent* will be placed in this subclass; however, a patent directed to
    such product will be placed in subclasses 139+ of Class 57, Textiles:
    Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, where it is claimed that said constituent
    is wrapped progressively along the length thereof (i.e., coiled)

    (2)     Note.  A patent for a strand formed by a knitting or weaving
    operation and coated, impregnated or covered after completion of said
    operation will be placed in this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  A patent directed to a strand including a twisted or twined
    constituent and further including an encircling sheath formed by an
    extrusion process will be placed in this subclass (375).

    (4)     Note.  The term "sized" or "sizing" will be construed as a coating
    and will be placed in this group of subclasses, unless it is clear than
    only an impregnation is intended.

    (5)     Note.  Attention is directed to section V of the class definition:
    Guidelines for Placement of Patents Having no Significant Structure.  A
    patent having a claim to a coating material and also a claim to a product
    of a rod, strand or fiber coated with this material and in which the
    product claim includes details of the coating material, is classified in
    the appropriate composition or compound class in the absence of recited
    structure (e.g., dimension, shape, etc.). Cross-referencing into this Class
    428 of such patents from the appropriate compound or composition class
    (e.g., Class 106, Class 260, etc.) has been kept to a minimum.  For a
    complete search, the other pertinent class should be considered.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98+     and 221+, especially the subclasses so entitled for a coated or
    impregnated web* or sheet* comprising rods, strands or fibers or for coated
    rods, strands or fibers forming elements* of a web or sheet.

    615+,   for corresponding metallic* stock-material*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, for a fiber product of a process provided for in that
    class and especially subclasses 114+ and 115.51+ for a product of the
    chemical modification of a textile or organic fiber; subclass 115.6 for
    such product which further includes a coating, size or lubricant, and
    subclasses 495+ for a fiber dyed and impregnated.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, 258+ especially
    subclasses 258+ for a coated or impregnated rod or strand comprising a
    twisted or twined constituent (as claimed) and including such product
    regardless of whether the constituents thereof are coated or impregnated
    before, during or after assembly thereof to form the product.

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, subclass 1 for a
    strand product of that class, whether the constituents thereof are coated
    or impregnated before, during or after the braided strand with a core.
    Also See section VI A 1 a (3) of this definition.

    132,    Toilet, subclass 93 (dental floss), for strand structure
    impregnated with an abrasive material(s).

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, for a product which
    conducts electricity and is coated or covered with a dielectric, where the
    product includes (1) some structure of the conductor specifically designed
    to conduct electricity or (2) some structure of the dielectric especially
    designed to space conductor either from ground or from a device of
    different electric potential.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 450+ for
    electrophoretic or electro-osmotic processes.  Also, see section VI, B, of
    the class definition of Class 428.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, subclass 537 for a dynamic seal of
    composite construction, having a distinct sheath or covering, contained or
    compressed by a gland member in a packing box, or subclasses 652+ for a
    static contact seal for other than internal combustion engine, or pipe,
    conduit or cable having a distinct sheath or covering.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 345 for a coated
    filament or electrode; and subclasses 352+ for a cored, coated or laminated
    composite electrode.


CLS 428/376
TXT Product under subclass 375 having a central or inner portion which contains
    one or more voids.

    (1)     Note.  The void or voids may be either coextensive or
    noncoextensive with the longitudinal extent of the central portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34.1+,  for a tube type or cylindrical article* open at both ends, similar
    in form, but of substantially greater size than the hollow products of this
    subclass 376.


CLS 428/377
TXT Product under subclass 375 having (1) a central or inner portion which is
    wound about itself or (2) a layer* or material wound or wrapped about a
    central or inner portion, both (1) and (2) being in the form of a spiral or
    helix.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for an article* having as an ornamental portion thereof, a strand
    which is wound, woven or braided around a part.

    37,     for a spirally flat-wound strand or strip (e.g., braided rug, etc.).

    222,    for a web* or sheet* including a helical component*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 200+ for
    similar strand products in which there is a layer of material wound or
    wrapped about a core portion but in which the core or wrapping also is
    twisted or plied or doubled, as required by the class definition thereof.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 159+ for a storage
    package of material made particular by the manner by which it is wound.


CLS 428/378
TXT Product under subclass 375 comprising a plurality of rods, strands, fibers
    or filaments, each of which is (1) permeated or saturated with, (2) covered
    with or (3) bonded to, an extraneous material.


CLS 428/379
TXT Product under subclass 375 in which either (1) the fiber, strand, filament
    or rod or (2) a coating or impregnation or bond or core therefor, comprises
    a free metal* or an alloy or a compound of a metal.

    (1)     Note.  The metal compound may be organometallic.

    (2)     Note.  See (4) Note of subclass 375 above for placement of patents
    having no significant structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    621+,   for stock-material* having adjacent metal components in addition to
    a nonmetal (including a metal compound) component.


CLS 428/380
TXT Product under subclass 379 in which the fiber, filament, rod or strand has
    a least two distinct coating layers thereon.

    (1)     Note.  At least the substrate or one of the plural coating layers
    must comprise a metal, alloy or a compound of the metal.


CLS 428/381
TXT Product under subclass 380 in which at least one of the coating layers
    comprises free metal or an alloy.


CLS 428/382
TXT Product under subclass 380 in which at least one of the coating layers
    contains a latex* from a natural source.


CLS 428/383
TXT Product under subclass 380 in which the plural coating layers comprise man
    made resins* or polymers*, each of which differs from at least one other in
    composition (e.g., polyester, polyamide, polyolefin, etc.).


CLS 428/384
TXT Product under subclass 380 in which at least one of the plural coating
    layers comprises (1) a fused mixture of the silicates of the alkali and
    alkaline earth or heavy metals, (2) fused or burned clay* or (3) the
    compound formed by the union of oxygen and a metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    389     and 390, for a rod, strand, fiber or filament with a coating
    containing silicic material or a metallic oxide.


CLS 428/385
TXT Product under subclass 379 in which the substrate is a free metal and the
    coating therearound comprises a composition which affects the seam formed
    when two pieces of metal are joined by heating or melting the substrate and
    permitting it to flow into the joint between the metals (i.e., fusion
    welding).

    (1)     Note.  When welding is performed, the molten metal tends to oxidize
    and therefore the seam or joint is weakened.  The coating composition
    around the weld rod metal tends to prevent this oxidation by (1) generating
    a gaseous atmosphere around the fusion bond, (2) producing a slag which
    will not oxidize, etc.  It is in this manner that the coating "affects" the
    weld to form a better joint or seam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclass 302 for a welding rod or electrode defined by
    composition only and without significant structure.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 145.1+ and 146.1+ for similar welding
    rods defined by structure and not merely as a coated rod or by the
    composition.


CLS 428/386
TXT Product under subclass 385 in which the coating contains the element
    titanium in either its free or combined state.


CLS 428/387
TXT Product under subclass 385 in which the coating contains the element
    silicon in either its free or combined state.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    390,    for a rod, strand fiber or filament having a coating which does not
    modify a weld, but which may contain silicic material.


CLS 428/388
TXT Product under subclass 379 comprising a substrate of the (1) fused mixture
    of the silicates of the alkali and alkaline earth or heavy metals (glass
    composition) or (2) free element silicon or its compounds, such substrate
    being in the form of a fiber or filament, and a coating of a free metal or
    alloy coating on the substrate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    392,    for a fiber or filament of glass, which may be structurally defined
    or which may have a coating thereon of other than free metal or an alloy.


CLS 428/389
TXT Product under subclass 379 comprising a fiber, rod, filament or strand of
    any character having thereof a layer* of metal* or a compound thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    381     and 384, for a rod, strand, fiber or filament having plural
    coatings, at least one of which may include a metal or alloy thereof, or
    metal oxide, respectively.


CLS 428/390
TXT Product under subclass 379 comprising a rod, fiber, filament or strand and
    a layer* thereof of natural latex* or synthetic rubber*, free silicon or a
    compound thereof or the carbohydrate known as cellulose (whether natural or
    modified).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    384,    for a rod, strand, fiber or filament having plural coatings, at
    least one of which contains a silicic material (e.g., glass or ceramic,
    etc.).

    387,    for a metal rod, strand, fiber or filament which is coated with a
    weld modifying composition including a silicic material.


CLS 428/391
TXT Product under subclass 375 in which the coating comprises (1) a compound
    similar to hydrocarbon in which tetravalent silicon replaces the carbon
    atom as Si H4 monosilane or silicomethane, (2) an elastomer in which the
    carbon linkages of a polymerized hydrocarbon are replaced by Si-O linkages
    or (3) any of a class of compounds that contain alternate silicon and
    oxygen atoms in either a linear structure (as H3Si(O Si H2)nO Si H3) or a
    cyclic structure as H2(Si O)n and that may also contain methyl, phenyl or
    other organic radicals in place of some or all of the hydrogen atoms and
    are made by hydrolysis of chlorosilanes or alkoxy-silanes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    405,    for particulate matter which is coated with silane, silicone or
    siloxane.

    429,    for a silicone, silane or siloxane layer next to quartz or glass.

    447,    for a layer of silicone, silane or siloxane next to a layer of any
    other composition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 81 and 99 for a fabric which has an organosilicon coating or
    impregnation thereon.


CLS 428/392
TXT Product under subclass 375 comprising a substrate of fiber or filament
    which is coated or is structurally defined - which fiber or filament is not
    a natural product, but is man made.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    388,    for a glass or silicic fiber or filament with a coating of free
    metal thereon.

    415,    417 and 426+, for a nonstructural laminated product in which one
    layer is glass or quartz.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclass 180 for a coated or impregnated glass fiber fabric.


CLS 428/393
TXT Product under subclass 392 in which the synthetic fiber or filament
    comprises cellulose (e.g., rayon, viscose, etc.).


CLS 428/394
TXT Product under subclass 392 in which the synthetic fiber or filament
    comprises a man-made resin or polymer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    383,    for a rod, strand, fiber, filament or fiber containing plural
    coatings, each being a different polymer or resin.

    405,    412, 413+, 421+, 423+, 430+, 435, 436+, 441+, 447, 451, 458+, 460,
    461, 473.5, 474.4+, 480+, 494+, and 500+ for nonstructural laminated
    products, in which one layer* comprises a synthetic resin or polymer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 164+ for a coated or impregnated synthetic organic fiber fabric
    (e.g., nylon, etc.).


CLS 428/395
TXT Product under subclass 394 in which the resin or polymer comprises (1) a
    polymeric compound containing amide groups through which the monomers are
    linearly linked and includes the reaction products of polyamines and
    polybasic acids or the polymer of amino acids (e.g., nylon, peptides and
    protein) or (2) a polymeric compound containing ester groups through which
    the monomers are linearly linked to one another.

    (1)     Note.  Urea-aldehyde is not considered to be a polyamide or
    polyimide for purposes of classification in this schedule and will be found
    in the subclass providing for condensation products of aldehyde and ketone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327,    for a product comprising a composite web or sheet including a
    second component which contains structurally defined particles of polymetic
    or resinous material which may be polyamide or polyester particles.

    430+,   435, 458, 473.5, 474.4, and 480+, for a nonstructural laminate in
    which one layer includes polyamide, polyimide or polyester.


CLS 428/396
TXT Product under subclass 375 in which the fiber, strand, rod or filament is
    either partially or completely saturated with an extraneous material.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass is a rod, strand, fiber or
    filament which is merely impregnated with or has associated therein or
    therewith a material without any specified indication as to the depth of
    impregnation or other structure; such a combination is classified on the
    basis of the composition e.g. for Classes 106, 520, etc.


CLS 428/397
TXT Product under subclass 364 claimed in terms of the particular shape of a
    section transverse to the longitudinal axis thereof or wherein the
    particular shape or arrangement of the constituent thereof is claimed and
    wherein the transverse section is other than circular and of uniform
    diameter.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note under subclass 364 for placement of a coated
    rod, strand, fiber, etc.

    (2)     Note.  A rod, filament or fiber with surface deformities, e.g.,
    ridges, furrows, etc., is included under this definition and will be found
    in subclass 400.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    373+,   for a conjugate or composite or collateral fiber or filament of
    side-by-side or other nonuniformly circular configuration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, for the process provided for in that class for
    preparing a fiber or monofilament of particular cross section; subclass 112
    for the process of treating a strand or fiber to improve its felting
    properties; subclasses 114+ for a process of treating a rod or strand to
    produce an ornamental effect (e.g., creping, etc.); subclasses 115.51+ for
    the process of chemically modifying a fiber and the corresponding product
    and subclass 130.1 for the process of swelling or plasticizing a synthetic
    strand or fiber and the corresponding product.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses for a
    structurally defined rod or fiber product provided for in that class (106).

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators for a conduit, cable or
    conductor of noncircular cross-section.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 237+ for a friction drive belt which may be in the form of a
    strand having a particular cross section.


CLS 428/398
TXT Product under subclass 397 containing one or more voids which are either
    coextensive or noncoextensive with the longitudinal extent of the product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34.1+,  for a similar, hollow rod or strand which however is of much larger
    size usually and is disclosed as being used to conduct a fluid.

    376,    for a rod, strand, fiber or filament (1) coated, (2) impregnated or
    (3) with core wherein the constituents of the product form one or more
    tubular passageways lengthwise therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, appropriate subclasses
    for a tubular rod or strand wherein at least one constituent thereof is
    either twisted or wound, as claimed.

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, subclass 9 for a
    tubular braided strand.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits for a tubular product which has claimed
    structure relating the product to its use as a conduit; e.g., specific
    inner and outer wall composition, (particular seams, etc.).  In the absence
    of claimed limitations as to wall structure, such a tubular stock material
    is classified in Class 428.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 387+ for a woven tubular strand or
    fabric.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 356, for a tubular or
    hollow sleeve type electrode.


CLS 428/399
TXT Product under subclass 397 wherein the cross section of a rod, strand or
    fiber changes along the length thereof either dimensionally or in shape.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, subclasses 442+ for a string of connected impact
    driven fasteners (e.g., nails, staples, etc.).


CLS 428/400
TXT Product under subclass 397 wherein an exposed face thereof or region
    immediately adjacent said face, has a particular claimed physical property
    or structure.

    (1)     Note.  A product including grooves extending longitudinally thereof
    is included in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Included under this definition is a variation in the
    composition in the surface region of the product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141+,   for a web* or sheet* having small indentations or crevices in a
    surface thereof.

    372,    for a rod, strand or fiber having structurally defined particulate
    matter.

    409+,   for a web, sheet or block having a particular surface property or
    characteristic.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses for a
    delustered product provided for in that class (106).


CLS 428/401
TXT Product under subclass 364, which is claimed to be of specified size in at
    least one direction or whose constituents are of specified size (absolute
    or relative).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220,    for a web* or sheet* whose overall physical dimension is recited.

    332+,   for a composite* web or sheet* wherein the physical dimension of a
    component* or constituent* is claimed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses for a
    dimensioned rod or fiber product provided for in that class (106).


CLS 428/402
TXT Product under subclass 357 comprising structurally defined or coated small
    grains or bits of matter.

    (1)     Note.   A patent reciting a coated or encapsulated material with
    claimed utility (ies) or solely disclosed utility is classified with the
    composition classes.  A similar patent with (a) multiply disclosed
    utilities or (b) undisclosed utility is classified in this Class 428,
    subclasses 402.2+.  However, in the latter two cases (a) and (b) above,
    when the coating or encapsulating material stabilizes a compound against
    physical or chemical degradation, classification is appropriate for and
    subject to the limitations set forth in one of the compound (element)
    classes.  The order of superiority of the composition classes are listed
    below under SEARCH CLASS.  Those classes with an asterisk, are not
    composition classes but deemed appropriate for further search.

    (2)     Note.   The recitation of any term, e.g., encapsulation,
    microencapsulation, sphere, microsphere, capsule, microcapsule, etc. which
    describes or gives evidence for a microencapsulated product is adequate for
    placement herein.  Lacking such description or evidence the particle will
    be considered a "coated" particle and therefore appropriate in this class,
    subclass 403.  For example, a patent reciting the encapsulated product of
    eugenol with dextrinized corn starch is sufficient for placement in this
    subclass.  However, a "clathrate" of the some product would be classified
    in Class 536, subclass 103.  (See (3) Note, below on clathrates and
    intercalates).

    (3)     Note.  Clathrates and intercalates (inclusion compounds), per se,
    are classified hierarchically and subject to the limitations set forth in
    the compound (element) classes based both on the encapsulant and
    encapsulate.  For example, a clathrate of urea and hydrogen peroxide is
    classified in Class 564, subclass 32, urea and an organic compound in Class
    260, subclass 96.5, dextran and iodine in Class 536, subclass 112, etc.
    Where a patent dows not state that a material is either a clathrate coated
    or encapsulated product classified in this Class 428, subclasses 402.2+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    504,    Plant Protecting and Regulating Compositions. (See subclass 100 for
    seeds coated with agricultural chemicals other than fertilizers.)

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Composition, subclasses 16+
    for coated, impregnated or layered feature.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 89+.

    71,     Chemistry:  Fertilizers (See subclass 64.11 for slow release forms.)

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, subclasses 3+ for a
    coated component.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclass 138 for a microcapsule.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 9+.

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions; see, for example, subclass 6, coated
    or impregnated material.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 22+ for composition and 31.5 for a
    coated stock-material.

    252,    Compositions (special uses or functions) to subclass 194.

    502,    Catalys, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process of
    Making, subclasses 60+ and 527.

    252,    Compositions (special uses or functions), subclass 478 and those
    following, except subclasses 302+, 363.5, 372+, and 378.

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification or
    Textiles and Fibers, subclass 526 for a dye in specified form other than
    mere powder.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic for a filler or pigment for a
    coating composition which may include size or structure of the constituent
    particles or fibers which recitation does not serve to exclude from Class
    106.  See especially subclasses 31.14 (invisible inks), 36, 84, 97+, 103,
    108, 117, 235, 241, 251, 253+, 266, 272, 275, 276, 280, 281+, 288+, and 308
    (coated material) in Class 106.  See also V, above in definition.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition; e.g.,
    subclass 295 for impregnating or coating an abrasive tool.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, (Alloys).

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, (rest of class).

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers; see, for example, Class 523,
    subclasses 161, invisible ink composition and 200+ for a composition
    containing product in the form of surface-coated, impregnated, encapsulated
    or surface-modified materials.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, subclasses 709+.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products.

    252,    Composition (nonspecial uses or functions i.e., subclasses 302+,
    363.5, 372+, and 378).

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds (mixture subclasses).

    118*,   Coating Apparatus, subclass 303 for apparatus for spray coating
    particulate material.

    264*,   Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 4+ for processes or encapsulating liquid core materials.

    427*,   Coating Processes, subclasses 213.3+ for processes of encapsulation
    solid core materials.


CLS 428/402.2
TXT Microcapsule with fluid core (includes liposome):

    Subject matter under subclass 402 wherein the microcapsule is comprised of
    a Fluid core (at ambient temperatures) encapsulated by a solid wall or
    shell.

    (1)     Note.  Liposomes are formed of mesomorphic walls (i.e., a state of
    matter intermediate between crystalline solid and normal isotropic liquid)
    and are classified here based on their solid characteristics.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 4.1+, for the process of encapsulating a liquid.

    521,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, in particular subclass 76,
    preparing a cellular product or precursor thereof utilizing a stated
    ingredient which is a solid particle containing a fluid encapsulated
    therein.  See also (4) Note under subclass 50 in conjunction with this.


CLS 428/402.21
TXT Solid-walled microcapsule from synthetic polymer:

    Subject matter under subclass 402.2 wherein the microcapsule wall contains
    at least one synthetic polymer (see Class 520, subclass 1 for a definition
    to synthetic polymer).

    (1)     Note.  The chemical modification of a natural product does not
    constitute a synthetic resin, e.g., the reaction of cellulose with toluene
    diisocyanate, etc. However, the addition of certain specified reactants,
    e.g., a polyol to the cellulose and a diisocyanate would constitute a
    synthetic resin.  See Class 527, subclass 100 for a definitive explanation.


CLS 428/402.22
TXT Addition polymer from unsaturated monomers only:

    Subject matter under subclass 402.21 wherein the synthetic polymer is
    derived only from ethylenically unsaturated reactants.

    (1)     Note.  The term "ethylenically unsaturated" includes
    acethlenic-type compounds but excludes homocyclic aromatic compounds, i.e.,
    benzene-type compounds.  Compounds, such as pyridine, diazine, pyrrole
    would be ethyienically unsaturated.


CLS 428/402.24
TXT Microcapsule with solid core (includes liposome):

    Subject matter under subclass 402 wherein the microcapsule contains solid
    core, e.g., a microcapsular opacifier containing titanium dioxide
    encapsulated with urea-formaldehyde polymer shell, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Liposomes are formed of mesomorphic walls (i.e., a state of
    matter intermediate between crystalline solid and normal isotropic liquid)
    and are classified here based on their solid characteristics.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 213.3+ for solid encapsulation, e.g.,
    microencapsulating a solid with a microcapsule wall derived from a
    synthetic polymer, etc.  However, if the core material is disclosed to be
    an expanding (blowing) agent see Class 521, subclass 50, (4) Note for
    limitations to those subclasses.


CLS 428/403
TXT Product under subclass 402 comprising small pieces of matter, granules,
    grains or the like with a coating thereon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 255+ for a loose composition containing metal
    particles.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 400+ for a compositions including coated particulate
    matter provided for in that class.


CLS 428/404
TXT Product under subclass 403 in which the particulate matter comprises (1)
    silicon or (2) a material containing a metal* from Group IV B, V B or VI B
    of the periodic system, known as refractory metals and consisting of Ti,
    Zi, Hf, V, Nb, Ta, Cr, Mo and W.

    (1)     Note.  The silicon or the refractory metal* can be present as
    either the free element or as a compound containing the element.

    (2)     Note.  The silicic or refractory material can be present as either
    the base* (substrate*) or the coating.


CLS 428/405
TXT Product under subclass 404 in which the coating comprises (1) a compound
    similar to hydrocarbons in which the tetravalent silicon replaces the
    carbon atom, as Si H4- monosilane or silicomethane, (2) an elastomeric in
    which the carbon linkages of a polymerized hydrocarbon are replaced by Si-O
    linkages or (3) any of a class of compounds that contain alternate silicon
    and oxygen atoms in either a linear structure (such as H3 Si (O Si H2) O Si
    H 3) or a cyclic structure as H2(Si O)n and that may also contain methyl,
    phenyl or other organic radicals, in places of some or all of the hydrogen
    atoms and are made by hydrolysis of chlorosilanes or alkoxy-silanes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    391,    for a rod, strand, fiber or filament which is coated with a silane,
    siloxane or silicone.

    429,    for a laminated structure comprising a layer of glass* or quartz*
    next to silane, siloxane or silicone.

    447,    for a laminated product including a layer of silane, siloxane, or
    silicone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 81 and 99 for a fabric which has organosilicon coating or
    impregnation thereon.


CLS 428/406
TXT Product under subclass 404 in which the particulate matter comprises pieces
    of the fused mixture commonly known as glass* and as defined in subclass
    426.

    (1)     Note.  The glass* particles or spheres may have been enlarged or
    foamed or may contain channels or voids.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312,    for a composite product in which one component is either porous or
    cellular and may comprise glass* foam.

    404,    for particulate matter in which glass* is present as the coating
    thereon.


CLS 428/407
TXT Product under subclass 403 in which the particulate matter comprises a
    man-made resin or polymer, either as the substrate* or as the coating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    394+,   for a rod, strand, fiber or filament make of a synthetic resin or
    polymer and having a coating thereon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 164+ for a coated or impregnated synthetic organic fiber fabric
    (e.g., nylon, etc.).


CLS 428/408
TXT Product under the class definition which comprises a web*, sheet* or shape
    retaining body of free carbon in any of its allotropic forms and which is
    saturated, permeated or covered with extraneous material.

    (1)     Note.  Typical of the products found herein is a carbon brush for
    an electric motor or a carbon rod for an arc lamp, which rod may be
    permeated or impregnated with an extraneous material and not structurally
    defined as set forth in the definition of subclass 357.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    367+,   for a structurally defined or coated fiber, rod, strand, filament
    of carbon.


CLS 428/409
TXT Product under the class definition comprising a web*, sheet* or block* in
    which an exposed area of the product or the region immediately adjacent
    thereto has a particular claimed physical property or structure.

    (1)     Note.  The surface characteristic must not be that of a web, sheet
    or component* of different composition applied as a layer* or coating or
    laminate; the characteristic must be due to treatment of the surface of a
    material of generally the same composition throughout so that if the
    superficial outermost area is removed, the result is a product of the same
    composition, but of different surface characteristic.

    (2)     Note.  Treatment of the surface by a chemical (e.g., etching, etc.)
    or by wave or other form of energy which yields the desired characteristic
    is placed in this or the indented subclass; however treatment by a coating
    which reacts with and forms a layer of totally different composition is
    excluded and will be found below on other features, such as composition of
    the layers, (see especially subclass 420).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40+,    for a product comprising a plurality of separable parts, at least
    one of which must be removed to expose an adhesive coating.

    141+,   for a web or sheet which has a continuous but nonuniform or
    irregular finish which may be a coating and need not be on the outermost
    surface.  The main difference between subclasses 141 and 409+ is that in
    the latter, the surface characteristic is that obtained by treating or
    modifying the surface without adding a layer.    The superficial surface
    must have the same composition as the remainder of the sheet; in the former
    the finish may be due to a coating.  In subclasses 141+ the surface must be
    textured or irregular; in subclasses 409+ the surface can be smooth but
    must have some characteristic not present in the remainder, e.g.,
    smoothness, hardness, temper, etc.


CLS 428/410
TXT Product under subclass 409 comprising the composition commonly known as
    glass* in which the surface has been treated and so altered to yield a
    physical proper different from the portion adjacent thereto.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of surface modifications are:  tempering or
    strengthening, crystallizing, etc.


CLS 428/411.1
TXT Stock material under the class definition comprising plural layers* or
    surfaces, adhered or cohered to each other, identified by the composition
    of the layers*, and not elsewhere provided for.

    (1)     Note.  Each and every layer disclosed, whether considered in the
    document as a base* layer* or an adhesive layer, is construed to be a
    separate layer for purposes of placement in this or indented subclasses.
    No distinction is made in consideration of whether a layer is an adhesive,
    prime coat, thin film or base*; each is considered to be an individual
    layer.  For a detailed explanation of the principles used as the basis of
    classification of the group,  i.e., the "layer-pair" concept see section IV
    of this definition of this class (428).

    (2)     Note.  A claimed pair of layers is read in the light of the
    disclosure.  A patent claiming merely metal* adhered to glass*, and
    disclosing that the metal* and glass* are actually bonded by an epoxy*
    resin, is placed on the basis of the two pairs, glass* -epoxy* and metal*
    -epoxy*.    Thus, the "original" copy of this patent is placed in subclass
    415 and a copy is cross-referenced in subclass 416.

    (3)     Note.  In each of the indented subclasses, the layer is identified
    by an ingredient, sole or otherwise; i.e., such layer includes, but need
    not be solely composed of, the material by which the layer is identified.

    (4)     Note.  A disclosure of a layer* which is comprised of copolymerized
    material is placed in the first appearing subclass in the schedule which
    provides for the polymer, e.g., a patent claiming a laminate of a copolymer
    of styrene (addition polymer from unsaturated monomers*) and alkyd*
    (polyester*) is placed under polyester*.  A patent to a laminate including
    a layer containing mixtures is placed as an original on the basis of the
    ingredient provided for in the first appearing subclass and
    cross-referenced in all other subclasses which provide for the other
    ingredients.

    (5)     Note.  In this group of subclasses, the "original" copy of a patent
    claiming several pairs will be placed in the first appearing subclass
    providing for a claimed pair and other copies cross-referenced to all other
    subclasses providing for other claimed pairs.  In the case of disclosed but
    not claimed pairs, only those disclosures which add to the broad general
    concept of a particular subclass will be cross-referenced to that subclass.
     As an example of this discretionary use of cross-references, a disclosure
    of phenol-formaldehyde* next to paper* (admittedly old) would not be
    cross-referenced in subclass 531, but a disclosure of a resin comprising
    83% phenol-formaldehyde and 17% cresol-formaldehyde next to paper would be
    cross-referenced in subclass 531 (provided it was not known that a
    disclosure of the specific layer* pair already existed therein).

    Briefly, the basic principles which determine placement of the original
    copy of a patent in this or an indented subclass are:  (1) only claimed
    subject matter is relied upon when comparing coordinate "first-line indent"
    subclasses (e.g., subclasses 98 and 411) of this class; (2) such original
    copy will be placed in the first-occurring "first-line indent" subclass
    which provides for the claimed subject matter; however, where such
    "first-line indent" subclass has a further indented subclass which
    specifically provides for more specific claimed subject matter, the
    original copy will be placed in the further indented subclass; (3) an
    original copy containing, for example, two claims where one such claim is
    provided for in a subclass which is indented under a superior subclass
    which provides for the other claim, will be placed in such superior and
    generic subclass (since it is first occurring) and crossed into the
    indented subclass; (4) as between coordinate subclasses (e.g., subclasses
    435 and 436) which are indented under the same "first-line indent"
    subclass, the original copy of a patent will be placed in the
    first-occurring of the coordinate subclasses which provides for the claimed
    subject matter.  Once placement of the original copy of a patent has been
    determined, a cross-reference copy of the patent is mandatory in every
    subclass in this group (411+) (or in any other class) which provides for
    other separately claimed subject matter.  Cross-reference copies may be
    placed in any subclass where the disclosed subject matter is considered to
    render the patent a useful reference, for example in subclasses superior to
    subclass 411 in this class.

    (6)     Note.  To be considered a "laminate" for inclusion in this class at
    least two layers of surfaces must be indicated by name or composition.  The
    laminate may include surfaces which are bonded solely by molecular
    attraction as e.g., vinylidene chloride to another material or to a second
    layer of vinylidene chloride, provided an interface can be detected.
    Where a particular "layer" of the composite is identified in the claims in
    only functional terms, e.g., only as a "substrate", the patent is
    classified as an original in the first appearing subclass provided for a
    material named in the claims, and may be cross-referenced to those
    subclasses providing for materials only disclosed and not claimed; see the
    rule of thumb elaborated on in (5) Note.  above.

    (7)     Note.  Exceptions to the general scheme of the nonstructural
    schedule are:



    (a)     urea-aldehyde is not classified with polyamide* but with aldehyde
    or ketone condensation product*.  See notes to subclasses 474+ and 524.

    (b)     a patent directed to a laminate of pyroxylin* (which usually is
    plasticized with camphor and/or castor oil) is placed as a cellulosic* or
    broadly carbohydrate* layer rather than natural oil or natural gum*.  See
    notes to subclasses 497 and 532.

    (c)     an acetal of polyvinyl alcohol is both an addition polymer from
    unsaturated monomers* and an aldehyde condensation product* and
    consequently is classified in the subclass which appears first in the
    schedule.  A patent to a laminate including a layer of an acetal of
    polyvinyl alcohol will be placed in the appropriate first appearing
    subclass directed to an addition polymer from unsaturated monomers* or to
    an aldehyde or ketone condensation* product as explained in (4) Note above.

    (8)     Note.  All layers or surfaces as claimed in the patents of these
    subclasses (411+), are coextensive.  If a layer is claimed in terms of
    sized relative to another layer, such limitation is regarded as structural,
    so that the patent will be placed in the appropriate subclass above; (see
    especially subclasses 44+, 77+, 189+, 195+, and 212+).

    (9)     Note.  In the subclasses directed to papers, indented under this
    subclass (411 nonstructural laminates), the product is a laminate which
    incorporates as the paper* layer a finished paper* product.  For purposes
    of placement in the indented subclasses, the term paper*, standing alone
    and without further elaboration, in a patent will be construed to mean a
    self-sustaining layer of cellulosic* fibers*, as exemplified by paper, per
    se, cardboard, pasteboard or water laid wood pulp.  This class (428) has
    the same residual relation to Class 162, Paper Making and Fiber Liberation,
    as it has to other stock material classes.   Thus, a patent to a
    paper-including laminate, produced by a process provided for in Class 162,
    will be placed in that class.

    (10)    Note.  A patent to a web, sheet or single-layer product, of
    material described in nonstructural terms, is placed in the appropriate
    material or composition class.  This rule holds even where a single layer
    of one material is completely impregnated with a second material,with only
    a few exceptions.  (See subclass 539.5, 540 and 541 of this class 428).
    Relative thereto, alloys and other compositions of free metal are found in
    Classes 75 and 420; Inorganic chemical compounds and nonmetal elements such
    as carbon fabric are found in Class 423; hydrocarbon products are found in
    Class 585; Synthetic Resins are found in Classes 520-529; other organic
    (carbon) compounds are found in Class 260 and its daughter Classes 530-570;
    other coating and plasted compositions are in Classes 106 and 501;
    medicinal or biocidal or hair or skin treating compostions are found in
    Class 424; compositions of general use are found in Class 252.  The
    superiority of these and other material or composition classes is set forth
    in (2) Note under the class definition of Class 106.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77+,    189+, 195+, and 614, for a laminate comprising layers that are not
    coextensive and see (8) Note above.

    85+,    for a laminate including a layer a layer or component* which has a
    pile or nap or flock surface.

    98+,    for a laminate stock material that is claimed in terms of its
    structure.

    221+,   for a laminate stock material that is claimed in terms of the
    structure of one of its components* or textile*.

    304.4+, for a composite having a porous layer.

    615+,   for a composite having two or more adjacent layers of free metal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 567 for plural layer product
    disclosed solely for use as a gauge block*.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses for a
    coating composition.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    325+ for the use of a particular adhesive in laminating process.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, especially subclasses 100+ for a
    laminate including paper*, which laminate is produced by a process provided
    for in that class (162); and see Search Class note under IV in the class
    definition of this class (161) and (9) Note above.

    252,    Compositions, appropriate subclasses, for a single layer or mass of
    a composition of general use; and especially subclasses 9+ for a lubricant;
    subclass 62 for an insulating composition; subclass 62.3 for a barrier
    layer composition; subclass 478 for an X-ray shield composition; and
    subclasses 301.2+ for a fluorescent or phosphorescent composition; and see
    (12) Note above.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for a connection or
    seal between two members at substantially a single locus, where the
    structure or shape (e.g., ring, flange, angular) relation of at least one
    of the members is specifically recited.

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclasses for the method of coating
    a base* with a nonpreformed layer.

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    appropriate subclasses for a laminate including a fabric layer.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, for a resin or natural rubber
    adhesive or composition containing same used as an adhesive in a laminate,
    and see the (11) Note, above.


CLS 428/412
TXT Product under subclass 411.1 in which at least one layer contains linearly
    recurring diester linkages of carbonic acid and a polyhydric alcohol.

    (1)     Note.  The linearly recurring ester linkages of carbonic acid
    require that at least a single carbonyl oiety (C=O) be linked to two
    different oxygen atoms, each of which is further linked to carbon atoms.
    The term "diester" used here, does not include the reaction product of two
    carbamic acid molecules with a glycol (i.e., the term does not include
    polyurethane*).  The reaction product of carbamic acid and a glycol is
    considered a poly (amido ester*) and a patent claiming a laminate
    comprising such a product will be placed in subclass 190 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    423+,   for a laminate comprising a layer including poly (amido ester*)
    e.g., esters of carbamic acid; and see (1) Note above.


CLS 428/413
TXT Product under subclass 411.1 in which one layer contains a resin produced
    by polymerization of an epoxide (e.g., vic-alkylene oxide or
    epichlorohydrin) with a dihydric compound.

    (1)     Note.  Epoxy resins are usually thermosetting characterized by good
    adhesiveness, resistance to chemicals and are generally made from a
    diphenol, as bis phenol A.

    (2)     Note.  A patent in which a layer of a laminate is disclosed as an
    "epoxy", "Araldite", "Epon" or the glycidyl ether of bis phenol A will be
    placed in this or an indented subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    60+, for a process of laminating using an epoxy resin as adhesive; and
    especially subclass 330.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses for an
    epoxy resin or natural rubber, per se, or for an epoxy resin containing
    composition.


CLS 428/414
TXT Product under subclass 413 comprising at least three layers, the epoxy
    ether resin layer lying between the other two.


CLS 428/415
TXT Product under subclass 414 in which one of the other two layers contains
    glass* or quartz*.

    (1)     Note.  See definition of glass or quartz in subclass 426.


CLS 428/416
TXT Product under subclass 414 in which one of the other two layers contains
    free metal*.


CLS 428/417
TXT Product under subclass 413 in which the layer, contiguous with the epoxy
    ether layer, contains quartz* or glass* (both defined in subclass 426).


CLS 428/418
TXT Product under subclass 413 in which the layer, contiguous with the epoxy
    ether layer, contains metal*.


CLS 428/419
TXT Product under subclass 411.1 in which one layer comprises a compound which
    contains a plurality of C-S-C linkages in the molecular chain.

    (1)     Note.  A layer containing polysulfide synthetic rubber (e.g., the
    reaction product of dihaloalkylene and alkali polysulfides) is considered a
    polythioether and a patent claiming a laminate of such a layer will be
    placed in this subclass.


CLS 428/420
TXT Product under subclass 411.1 comprising three layers in which the inner
    layer is disclosed as the inter-reaction product of the other layers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 240+ for processes of reactive coating
    of a metal substrate wherein an external agent combines with a component in
    the metal substrate to form a coating thereon containing a component of the
    metal substrate.


CLS 428/421
TXT Product under subclass 411.1 in which a layer includes an (addition polymer
    from unsaturated monomers*) which contains fluorine.

    (1)     Note. The fluorinated addition polymer is usually obtained from
    fluoro-alkenes and fluoro-halo alkenes e.g., difluoro-chloro-ethylene.

    (2)     Note.  Patents claiming a laminate containing a layer of a
    halogenated addition polymer from unsaturated monomers, where no fluorine
    is present, will be placed in the appropriate subclasses directed to
    addition polymer from unsaturated monomers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    Appropriate subclasses below for example, 442, 463 and 514 for a laminate
    containing a layer of a halogenated addition polymer from unsaturated
    monomers, where no fluorine is present.


CLS 428/422
TXT Product under subclass 421 in which the unsaturated monomers are completely
    saturated with halogen.

    (1)     Note.  Two or more halogens may be present in the polymer, at least
    one of which must be fluorine.Thus, examples of polymers found in this
    subclass are:  tetrafluorethylene, trichlorofluorethylene, etc.


CLS 428/422.8
TXT Of polyisocyanurate:
    Product under subclass 411.1 in which one layer contains a polymer derived
    from an isocyanurate, that is, a cyclic trimmer of an isocyanate having the
    generalized formula



    (1)     Note.  If the connecting chain between the isocyanurate rings also
    contains ester linkages, the patent should be cross-referenced to
    subclasses 423.1+.


CLS 428/423.1
TXT Of polyamidoester (polyurethane, polyisocyanate, polycarbamate, etc.):

    Product under subclass 411.1 in which one layer contains a polymer
    characterized by both amide and ester linkages in the polymer chain in any
    combination or ration.

    (1)     Note.  A patent claiming a laminate including a layer containing
    polyurethane, or the polymerized reaction product of isocyanates and
    alcohols, will be placed in this subclass or its indents.

    (2)     Note.  Polyamidoester includes Polyimidoester.

    (3)     Note.  The term polyisocyanate is sometimes used to designate
    polyurethanes and it is not always clear what is intended by the term in
    some patents.   The use of any of the following terms:  polyisocyanate,
    polyurethane, urethane resin, polycarbamate or the disclosure of the
    reaction products of disocyanate with any glycols, diamines, amino
    alcohols, amides, or esters will be deemed a sufficient disclosure of
    polyamidoester or polyisocyanate to meet the definition of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     158+ and 310+, for other products containing a foamed material as a
    component thereof, especially urethane.

    474.4+, for a product having a layer of polymer comprised solely of amide
    linkages in the polymer chain, including a polyamide with ester linkages in
    a side chain.

    480+,   for a product having a layer of polymer comprised solely of ester
    linkages in the polymer chain, including a polyester having amide linkages
    in a side chain.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 59+ for a coated or impregnated fabric which may include a
    polyamidoester coating.


CLS 428/423.3
TXT Next to second layer of polyamidoester:

    Product under subclass 423.1 in which a second contiguous layer is a
    polyamidoester.


CLS 428/423.4
TXT Next to animal skin or membrane:

    Product under subclass 423.1 in which a second contiguous layer is an
    animal skin or membrane, e.g., leather, etc.


CLS 428/423.5
TXT Next to polyamide (nylon, etc.):

    Product under subclass 423.1 wherein a second contiguous layer is a polymer
    characterized bylinkages.


CLS 428/423.7
TXT Next to polyester (polyethylene terephthalate, etc.):

    Product under subclass 423.1 in which a second contiguous layer is a
    polymer characterized by linkages.


CLS 428/423.9
TXT Next to natural rubber:

    Product under subclass 423.1 wherein a second contiguous layer is a natural
    rubber.


CLS 428/424.2
TXT Next to addition polymer of ethylenically unsaturated monomer:

    Product under subclass 423.1 wherein a sec contiguous layer is a polymer
    derived from an ethylenically unsaturated monomer, and characterized by a
    hydrocarbon backbone.


CLS 428/424.4
TXT Ester monomer type (polyvinylacetate, etc.):

    Product under subclass 424.2 wherein the addition polymer contains ester
    groups not in the polymer chain, such as dependent acetate groups.


CLS 428/424.6
TXT Halide monomer type (polyvinyl chloride, etc.):

    Product under subclass 424.2 wherein the addition polymer contains atoms of
    chlorine, bromine, or iodine such as chlorinated polyethylene,
    polychloroprene, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    421+,   for a fluoropolymer next to a polyamidoester.


CLS 428/424.7
TXT Nitrile monomer type (polyacrylonitrile, etc.):

    Product under subclass 424.4 wherein the addition polymer contains nitrile
    moieties, e.g., polyacrylonitrile, etc.


CLS 428/424.8
TXT Hydrocarbon polymer (polyethylene, polybutadiene, etc.):

    Product under subclass 424.2 wherein the addition polymer contains only
    carbon and hydrogen.


CLS 428/425.1
TXT Next to cellulosic:

    Product under subclass 423.1 wherein a second contiguous layer is
    cellulosic (e.g., wood, paper, cellophane, etc.).


CLS 428/425.3
TXT Next to aldehyde or ketone condensation product (phenol-aldehyde, etc.):

    Product under subclass 423.1 wherein a second contiguous layer is the
    condensation product of an aldehyde or ketone.


CLS 428/425.5
TXT Next to silicon-containing (silicone, cement, etc.) layer:

    Product under subclass 423.1 wherein a second contiguous layer contains
    silicon in any form.


CLS 428/425.6
TXT Quartz or glass:

    Product under subclass 425.5 wherein the polyamidoester layer is adjacent
    to a quartz or glass layer.


CLS 428/425.8
TXT Next to free metal:

    Product under subclass 423.1 wherein the layer adjacent the polyamidoester
    layer is a free metal layer.


CLS 428/425.9
TXT Particulate metal or metal compound-containing:

    Product under subclass 423.1 wherein the polyamidoester layer contains a
    particulate metal or a metal compound, e.g., metal oxide, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    900,    for a collection of patents directed to stock materials having a
    magnetic feature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 62.51+ for a magnetic composition and
    nonstructured products, e.g., "a tape," etc., having a magnetic coating on
    an unnamed substrate.


CLS 428/426
TXT Product under subclass 411.1 in which at least one layer contains fused
    silica (i.e., quartz), or a mixture of (1) fused silica, and (2) alkali and
    alkaline silicates, commonly known as glass.

    (1)     Note.  The glass may be in the form of fibers or as a fiber glass
    mat.

    (2)     Note.  Such materials as waterglass, isinglass and plexiglass are
    not considered as glass.

    (3)     Note.  Vitreous enamel or vitreous ceramic, per se, is considered
    to be glass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for stained glass elements in an aperture or frame.

    49,     for a unilayer of plural glass sections extending in both lateral
    and longitudinal directions.

    174+,   for corrugated fiber glass web or sheet.

    312,    317, 325, 392, 406+, 415, and 417, as appropriately entitled, for
    other products containing glass, in the form of particles, a layer, foam,
    or fibers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, appropriate subclasses, for glass making.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses, for a connection or
    seal between two members at substantially a single locus where the
    structure or shape (e.g., ring, flange, angular relationship, etc.) of at
    least one of the members is specifically recited, and one of the members is
    glass or quartz.

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    appropriate subclasses for a glass fiber fabric in a laminate and subclass
    180 for a coated or impregnated glass fiber fabric.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, subclasses 11+ for glass compositions
    capable of forming lamina.


CLS 428/427
TXT Product under subclass 426 in which a second layer contiguous with the
    quartz or glass layer contains boron in either its free or chemically
    combined state.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    366,    for a rod*, strand* filament* or fiber* including boron or a
    compound thereof either as a coating or as the fiber*.

    902,    for a cross-reference art collection of high modulus filaments* or
    fibers* which may be of or include boron.


CLS 428/428
TXT Product under subclass 426 in which a second layer contiguous with quartz
    or glass contains the element silicon in either the free or chemically
    combined state.

    (1)     Note.  A patent claiming a second glass layers in which there is a
    difference in the glasses (e.g., composition or physical properties) such
    as to  indicate two different glass layers, will be placed in this subclass.


CLS 428/429
TXT Product under subclass 428 in which the second layer comprises (1) a
    compound similar to a hydrocarbon in which the tetravalent silicon replaces
    the carbon atom, as SiH4n monosilane or silicomethane, (2) an elastomeric
    in which the carbon linkages of a polymerized hydrocarbon are replaced by
    Si-O linkages or (3) any of a class of compounds that contain alternate
    silicon and oxygen atoms in either a linear structure (such as H3Si (O Si
    H2)n O Si H3) or a cyclic structure as H2(Si O)n and that may also contain
    methyl, phenyl or other organic radicals in place of some or all of the
    hydrogen atoms and are made by hydrolyses of chlorosilanes or
    alkoxy-silanes.


CLS 428/430
TXT Product under subclass 426 in which a layer contiguous with quartz or glass
    contains polyester*.


CLS 428/431
TXT Product under subclass 430 in which some of the acid and/or the alcohol
    moieties, from which the polyester is derived are at least trifunctional,
    permitting a cross-linking of the linear polyester chain.

    (1)     Note.  A patent claiming a laminate including a polyester layer
    derived from an acid(s), which is at least tri-basic, or from an
    alcohol(s), which is at least tri-hydric or in which either the poly basic
    acid or polyhdric alcohol is unsaturated, will be placed in this subclass.


CLS 428/432
TXT Product under subclass 426 in which a layer adjacent the glass or quartz
    contains a metal* either in the free or combined state.


CLS 428/433
TXT Product under subclass 432 in which the metal* is in the free or elemental
    state or in the form of an alloy*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    630+,   for a glass laminate which includes a pair of adjacent metal layers.


CLS 428/434
TXT Product under subclass 433 in which the metal* comprises silver, gold,
    platinum, pallodium, mercury, iridium, rhodrium, ruthernium or osmium, that
    is, those metals* which are not easily oxidizable and are recognized as the
    "noble" metals*.


CLS 428/435
TXT Product under subclass 426 in which the layer adjacent the quartz or glass
    contains a polyamide* or polyimide*.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for placement of patents claiming
    glass glued to other surfaces or adhered directly to nylon* or protein*,
    e.g., a gelatin* layer.

    (2)     Note.  Urea-aldehyde is not considered polyamide for purposes of
    classification is this schedule and patents claiming glass-to-urea-aldehyde
    laminates are placed in subclass 436.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    436,    for quartz or glass next to a layer containing a urea-aldehyde
    condensation* product; and see (2) Note above.


CLS 428/436
TXT Product under subclass 426 in which a layer Next to the quartz or glass
    contains an aldehyde or ketone condensation product*.


CLS 428/437
TXT Product under subclass 436 in which a layer contiguous with the quartz or
    glass contains the di-ether reaction product of an aldehyde with the
    hydroxy groups of an (addition polymer from unsaturated monomers)*, e.g.,
    acetal of polyvinyl alcohol.

    (1)     Note.  The usual source of polyvinyl alcohol is a hydrolyzed
    polyvinyl ester. Such terms as the reaction of an aldehyde with polyvinyl
    acetate- or the reaction of an aldehyde with hydrolyzed polyvinyl acetate-
    will be sufficient to place a patent in this subclass.


CLS 428/438
TXT Product under subclass 426 in which a layer Next to the quartz or glass
    contains a cellulosic* material.

    (1)     Note.  The majority of patents claiming safety glass in which
    cellulosic material is an inner layer, or in which glass is bonded to an
    inner layer by cellulosic material, will be placed in this and the indented
    subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Patents claiming significant polarizing structure or
    composition of a layer or laminate will be placed in Class 359, Optics:
    Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses 483+.  Patents
    claiming significant optical filtering structure will be placed in Class
    359, subclasses 885+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for coextensive light-transmissive sheets* which are hermetically
    sealed at their edges and confine a gas therebetween.

    38,     for a laminated plural layer* sheet* including glass, but which has
    an opaque frame or border over at least a portion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    483+ for a laminated polarizer and subclasses 885+ for optical filters.
    See (2) Note above.


CLS 428/439
TXT Product under subclass 438 in which the cellulosic material has been
    esterfied by reaction with an acid.

    (1)     Note.  A patent claiming glass laminated to nitro-cellulose or
    cellulose nitrate, cellulose chromate or cellulose sulfate, as well as
    cellulose acetate, butyrate etc., will be placed in this subclass.


CLS 428/440
TXT Product under subclass 426 in which a layer Next to the quartz or glass
    contains natural rubber*, natural gum*, natural oil*, rosin*, wax* or
    (bituminous or tarry residue*).

    (1)     Note.  A patent claiming a laminate containing a layer comprising a
    synthetic rubber will usually be found in the subclass directed to an
    addition polymer from unsaturated monomers* or the indented subclasses or,
    in the case of polysulfide synthetic rubber, will be found in the
    polythioether subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    419,    for polysulfide synthetic rubber next to glass and see (1) Note
    above.

    441+,   for synthetic rubber next to glass; and see (1) Note above.


CLS 428/441
TXT Product under subclass 426 in which a layer Next to quartz or glass
    contains an (addition polymer from unsaturated monomers*).

    (1)     Note.  A patent claiming a layer of glass next to one of vinyl,
    acrylic or a polyalkylene compound or isoprene or neoprene rubber, will be
    placed in this or the indented subclass.


CLS 428/442
TXT Product under subclass 441 in which the addition polymer is an ester,
    halide or nitrile.

    (1)     Note.  The addition polymer may be derived from monomers which
    include esters, halides or nitriles or the addition polymer may be treated
    to introduce ester, halide or nitrile radicals.

    (2)     Note.   The ester moieties are pendant, i.e., in a long chain
    polymer, the ester groups branch out from the main chain and the chain is
    not linked through a plurality of ester linkages.   If the chain were
    linked through the ester groups, as in alkyd or polyethylene terephthalate,
    a patent claiming such laminate would be placed in subclass 430 or 431.

    (3)     Note.  Patents claiming partially hydrolyzed polyvinyl ester next
    to glass will be placed here. If, however, the ester is completely
    hydrolyzed the patent will be placed in subclass 441 unless an acetal if
    formed therefrom, in which latter case the patent would be placed in
    subclass 437.  The word "hydrolyzed", without qualification in a patent
    will be deemed to mean completely hydrolyzed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    421,    for glass next to a fluorinated addition polymer of unsaturated
    monomers.

    430,    for glass next to a layer of units linked together through the
    ester moities; and see (2) Note above.

    437,    for glass next to an acetal of hydrolyzed polyvinyl alcohol; and
    see (3) Note above.

    441,    for glass next to a completely hydrolyzed polyvinyl ester; and see
    (3) Note above.


CLS 428/443
TXT Product under subclass 411.1 in which at least one layer includes a fibrous
    mineral of a magnesium, calcium or iron silicate (e.g., amphibole,
    serpentine and anthophyllite, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  For the purposes of this subclass, the following terms, as
    well as the word "asbestos*" itself, are deemed to be definitive of a layer
    as asbestos - containing:  uralite, tremolite actinolite crocidolite,
    chrysotil amosite or pyrozene.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclass 137 for a coated or impregnated asbestos fabric and appropriate
    subclasses for a laminate comprising fabric made from inorganic fibers such
    as asbestos.


CLS 428/444
TXT Product under subclass 443 in which there is a layer of metal* in the free
    state in addition to the layer of asbestos*.


CLS 428/445
TXT Product under subclass 443 in which there is a layer of cellulosic*
    material (either natural or modified) in addition to the layer of asbestos*.


CLS 428/446
TXT Product under subclass 411.1 with at least one layer having as an
    ingredient a material which contains the element silicon in any form, i.e.,
    elemental or in a compound.

    (1)     Note.  A product comprising an alloy or an intermetallic compound
    which has silicon as an element thereof is excluded from this definition
    and will be found in subclasses 457+.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass and its indents, especially subclass 454 will
    take a patent to a nonstructural laminate claiming clay*, cement*, sand* or
    vitreous* substances which do not fit the definition of glass*, but are
    silicon containing.

    (3)     Note.  A patent claiming mica* (as a constituent of a second layer)
    will normally be considered to claim mica flakes (flat) and as such is
    considered to define structure of such flakes and will be placed in
    subclass 324.  If the mica is disclosed as ground or pulverized and is a
    constituent of a second layer, and structurally defined, such a patent will
    also be placed in subclass 324.  If no structure of the ground or
    pulverized mica recited, a laminate containing such mica will be placed in
    subclass 454.

    (4)     Note.  Special exception in regard to silicon and metallic stock
    material in Class 29.  For purpose of Class 29, subclasses 180+ silicon is
    considered to be a metal. See also section II, Glossary of
    Terms-B-Non-Structural or Composition-definition of Metal and section VI,
    B-reference to Class 29.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144+    and 149+, for a product comprising a continuous, but nonuniform or
    irregular surface made by a layer of particulate matter which could be a
    silicon containing material such as crushed stone, etc., or as a coating on
    particulate matter.

    204,    206+, 308, 331, 387, 404+, and 428, for other products containing
    silicon in elemental or compound form, either in the form of particulate
    matter, (e.g., pigment, etc.) or as glass, or as a coating or impregnant,
    as appropriately titled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 39+ for
    silicon-containing material adapted to form a lamina.

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclasses, especially those having
    "silicon", "glass" or "vitreous" in their title for the process of making a
    silicon containing multi-layer product by a process of that class.

    526,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 279 for a
    silicon-containing resin, per se.

    528,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 10-43 for
    silicon-containing resin, per se.


CLS 428/447
TXT Product under subclass 446 in which the silicon comprises (1) a compound
    similar to hydrocarbons in which the tetravalent silicon replaces the
    carbon atom, as Si H4  monosilane or silicomethane, (2) an elastomeric in
    which the carbon linkages of a polymerized hydrocarbon are replaced by Si-O
    linkages, or (3) any of a class of compounds that contain alternate silicon
    and oxygen atoms in either a linear structure (such as H3Si(O Si H2)nO Si
    H3 ) or a cyclic structure as H2(Si O)n and that may also contain methyl,
    phenyl or other organic radicals in place of some or all of the hydrogen
    atoms and are made by hydrolysis of chlorosilanes or alkoxy-silanes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    391     405, and 429, for other products in which silane, silicone or
    siloxane is contained in a coating or impregnant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 81 and 99 for a fabric which has an organosilicon coating or
    impregnation thereon.


CLS 428/448
TXT Product under subclass 446 in which the silicon containing layer lies in
    between and adjacent to two other layers.

    (1)     Note.  In many of these patents, the intermediate layer comprises
    sodium silicate which acts as an adhesive.


CLS 428/449
TXT Product under subclass 448 in which each of the other layers comprises
    paper*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    453,    for a product in which sodium silicate is next to a cellulosic
    layer and may act as an adhesive therefor.


CLS 428/450
TXT Product under subclass 446 in which a layer, contiguous with the
    silicon-containing layer, contains metal*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 33+ for electrically semiconductive
    stock under the Class 148 definition which is essentially homogeneous and
    has at least two contiguous layers differing in the number of unbound
    electrons and/or differing in energy gap levels, which exhibit a junction
    between the layers.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses for such devices, wherein the solid-state material
    is typically a semiconductor.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, particularly
    subclasses 570+ for methods of making a Schottky contact to a semiconductor
    and subclasses 597+ for methods of making an ohmic contact to a
    semiconductor.


CLS 428/451
TXT Product under subclass 446 in which a layer adjacent the silicon-containing
    layer contains either an (addition polymer from unsaturated monomers*) or
    an (aldehyde or ketone condensation product*).


CLS 428/452
TXT Product under subclass 446 in which a layer adjacent the silicon-containing
    layer comprises a cellulosic* material.


CLS 428/453
TXT Product under subclass 452 in which the silicon-containing layer comprises
    sodium silicate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    448+,   for a composite product in which sodium silicate may be the
    intermediate layer and especially subclass 449 in which sodium silicate, as
    the intermediate layer is the adhesive between two paper layers.


CLS 428/454
TXT Product under subclass 446 in which the silicon ingredient is sand*, clay*
    or mica*.

    (1)     Note.  A patent claiming mica (as a constituent of a layer) will
    normally be considered to claim mica flakes* (flat) and will be placed in
    this class, subclass 324.  Patents to a laminate of ground or pulverized
    mica will be placed in this subclass 454, unless the ground or pulverized
    mica is structurally defined to indicate placement in subclass 324.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145     and 149+, for a product comprising a continuous but nonuniform or
    irregular surface, made by a layer of particulate matter which could be
    sand, silica or clay.

    324,    for a laminate comprising mica flakes; and see (1) Note.   above.


CLS 428/455
TXT Product under subclass 411.1 in which at least one layer contains the bark
    of the cork oak.

    (1)     Note.  Bark of trees other than the cork oak is considered
    "cellulosic*", thus patents claiming a laminate of bark will be placed in
    the appropriate cellulosic subclasses, especially subclasses 532+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    532+,   for a laminate including a layer containing bark not specified as
    cork and see (1) Note above.


CLS 428/456
TXT Product under subclass 455 in which the cork is admixed with (natural oil,
    natural gum or rosin*).

    (1)     Note.  Linoleum usually is a composition comprising cork and
    linseed oil.  Unless it is clear than the term is distorted in a patent,
    the word linoleum, in the description of a laminate or layer thereof, will
    be sufficient to place a patent to such laminate in this subclass.  An
    obvious distortion would be the use of the word linoleum for vinyl floor
    covering.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500+,   for a vinyl containing laminate which is similar to linoleum; and
    see (1) Note above.


CLS 428/457
TXT Product under subclass 411.1 in which at least one layer contains metal*.

    (1)     Note.  For inclusion here, a disclosure need not limit the entire
    composition of a layer to metal or alloy; an elemental metal or an alloy,
    among constituents of such layer, is sufficient.

    (2)     Note.  Steel, solder, Wood's metal - etc., are considered metals,
    and may be present as a sheet or foil or as filler in some other substance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for a unilayer of metal sections extending both laterally and
    longitudinally.

    148,    408, 209, 312, 313, 317, 328, 330, 344, 356, 379+, 416, and 418,
    for a product which includes a metal layer, metal foam, metal particle, or
    a fiber including a metal which may be a coating thereon as appropriately
    titled.

    416,    for a product comprising a metal laminated to a layer comprising
    epoxy ether either by itself or as a mixture.

    553+,   for stock-material* having metal particles in a component next to a
    nonparticulate metal component.

    621+,   for corresponding stock-material* having a second metal component
    adjacent a first metal component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 260+ for a laminated stay, one layer of which
    is metal.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclass 33 for a semiconductor stock material,
    especially a metal-silicon or a metal-germanium laminate.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, appropriate subclasses for a laminate
    including a metal layer and other resistor structure such as spaced lead or
    terminals, at the minimum.

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    appropriate subclasses for a fabric including a free metal or alloy
    constituent.


CLS 428/458
TXT Product under subclass 457 in which a layer adjacent the metal layer
    contains a polyamide*, polyimide* or polyester*.

    (1)     Note.  Urea-aldehyde is not considered to be a polyamide or
    polyimide for purposes of classification in this schedule and will be found
    in the subclass providing for condensation products of aldehyde and ketone*.


CLS 428/459
TXT Product under subclass 458 in which the layer comprises a polyamide and is
    derived from a natural source, e.g., glue*, from milk or a vegetable, or
    albumin or gelatin from animal tissue.


CLS 428/460
TXT Product under subclass 457 in which the layer adjacent the metal layer
    contains an (aldehyde or ketone condensation product*).


CLS 428/461
TXT Product under subclass 457 in which a layer adjacent the metal layer
    contains an (addition polymer from unsaturated monomers*).

    (1)     Note.  This is the locus for products in which the addition polymer
    is substituted with heterocyclic or nitrogeneous radials, but see (2) Note
    below.  Included under this definition are acrylamide, coumarone or vinyl
    pyridine polymers and patents claiming a layer of such material will be
    classified here.

    (2)     Note.  A laminate of metal and a nitrile of an addition polymer
    from unsaturated monomers is classified with the ester and halide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    463,    for a laminate of metal and a nitrile of an addition polymer from
    unsaturated monomers; and see (2) Note above.


CLS 428/462
TXT Product under subclass 461 in which the addition polymer is derived from
    monomers which include polyunsaturated monomers (e.g., butadiene or
    cyclopentadiene).

    (1)     Note.  A patent which claims metal next to "a synthetic rubber"
    (e.g., Buna S.* neoprene or G. R. S.*) will be placed in this subclass;
    unless the synthetic rubber is a thio rubber for which see (3) Note below.

    (2)     Note.  A layer claimed as "rubber" will be considered natural
    rubber, unless the disclosure indicates other than a natural rubber is
    intended.

    (3)     Note.  Thio rubber is considered polythioether and a patent to a
    laminate including thio rubber will be placed in subclass 419.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    419,    for metal next to a "thio" synthetic rubber and see (3) Note above.

    465+,   for metal next to natural rubber; and see (2) Note, above.


CLS 428/463
TXT Product under subclass 461 in which the addition polymer is an ester,
    halide or nitrile.

    (1)     Note.  The addition polymer may be derived from monomers which
    include esters, halide or nitrile or the addition polymer may be treated to
    introduce ester, halide or nitrile radicals.

    (2)     Note.  Addition polymers of unsaturated monomers which contain
    fluorine are unique in properties, differing from the other halogenated
    polymers and patents claiming such laminates are collected in subclasses
    421+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    421+,   for a fluorinated addition polymer of unsaturated monomers next to
    metal; and see (2) Note above.


CLS 428/464
TXT Product under subclass 457 in which a layer, adjacent the metal layer,
    contains cellulosic* material.


CLS 428/465
TXT Product under subclass 457 in which a layer adjacent the metal layer
    contains natural rubber*.

    (1)     Note.  Synthetic rubber is usually derived from polymerized dienes
    and acrylonitriles and patents claiming these in a metal laminate are
    collected in subclasses 462 or 463.  Patents claiming metal next to
    polysulfide synthetic rubber are collected in subclass 419.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    419,    for metal next to sulfide (Thiokol) rubber; and see (1) Note above.

    462,    for metal next to chloroprene, neoprene, Buna S* or G. R. S.*
    rubber; and see (1) Note above.

    463,    for metal next to acrylonitrile rubber; and see (1) Note above.


CLS 428/466
TXT Product under subclass 465 in which a natural rubber* containing layer is
    disposed between and adjacent both a metal containing layer and a natural
    rubber* containing layer.

    (1)     Note.  The two rubber layers must be different in some physical or
    chemical aspect, e.g., degree of vulcanization, other ingredients including
    vulcanizers or accelerators; or a rubber containing layer may be treated on
    the surface.

    (2)     Note.  A patent claiming a rubber layer, treated so as to form a
    surface of rubber hydro-chloride and which is laminated with a metal
    containing layer, will be placed here.

    (3)     Note.  A patent to a laminate in which the two rubber layers are on
    the opposed faces of a metal layer will not be placed here.  Such a patent
    will be placed in subclass 465.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    465,    for a metal layer with two single rubber layers on each of opposed
    surfaces.


CLS 428/467
TXT Product under subclass 457 in which a layer adjacent the metal containing
    layer contains natural gum*, natural oil*, rosin*, lac* or a wax*.

    (1)     Note.  Patents claiming painted metal stock in which linseed oil is
    the vehicle will be placed in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Paints with an alkyd base or the synthetic rubber commonly
    known as "latex base" are not considered to contain natural oil* or gum*
    unless so disclosed and a patent to metal with a layer of any of these
    paints will not be placed here; see search notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    458,    for metal stock painted with an alkyd paint.

    461,    for metal stock painted with a synthetic rubber base called "latex
    base" paint.


CLS 428/468
TXT Product under subclass 457 in which a layer contiguous with the metal layer
    comprises (bituminous or tarry residue*).


CLS 428/469
TXT Product under subclass 457 in which a layer contiguous with the metal
    comprises a salt or a compound of a metal and oxygen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    450,    for a metal next to a silicon salt.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 316+ for metallic stock which is
    coated with a salt or metal oxide as a result of a process of that class.


CLS 428/470
TXT Product under subclass 469 in which the contiguous layer comprises a
    compound made by the combination of a metal and an organic acid.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 260, Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for definition
    of organic acid.


CLS 428/471
TXT Product under subclass 469 in which the contiguous layer comprises the
    compound formed by the combination of oxygen with a metal from Groups I A
    or II A of the periodic system (i.e., Lithium, Sodium, Potassium, Rubidium,
    Cesium, Magnesium, Calcium, Strontium and Barium).


CLS 428/472
TXT Product under subclass 469 in which the contiguous layer comprises a
    compound formed by the combination of an inorganic acid or oxygen with a
    metal from Groups IV B, VB or VI B of the periodic system (i.e., Titanium,
    Zirconium, Hafnium, Vanadium, Niobium, Tantalum, Chromium, Molybdenum,
    Tungsten).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    386,    for a rod*, strand* or fiber* coated with a titanium compound.

    404,    for a particle* coated with the oxide of a refractory metal (i.e.,
    Ti, Zr, Hf, V, Nb, Ta, Cr, Mo, W).

    432,    for a laminate of glass* or quartz* next to a metal or a compound
    thereof which metal may be a refractory.

    457+,   for a laminated product including a metal which may be a refractory
    metal.

    539,    for a laminated product which may include a layer of a refractory
    metal compound.

    920     and 921, for art collections of a product which has a fire, flame
    or heat protection feature and which may include a refractory metal or a
    compound thereof.


CLS 428/472.1
TXT Formed in situ:

    Product under subclass 472 in which the contiguous layer is formed in situ
    by reaction with the metal of the metal layer.

    (1)     Note.  The compound maybe formed by a reactive coating process
    classified in Class 148, Metal Treatment, subclasses 6+.


CLS 428/472.2
TXT Aluminum or iron salt or oxide formed in situ:

    Product under subclass 469 in which the contiguous layer comprises an
    aluminum or iron solt or oxide formed in situ by reaction with the metal of
    the metal layer.

    (1)     Note.  The salt or oxide maybe formed by a reactive coating process
    classified in Class 148, Metal Treatment, subclasses 6+.


CLS 428/472.3
TXT Phosphorus containing metal salt formed in situ:

    Product under subclass 469 in which the contiguous layer comprises a
    phosphorus containing metal salt formed in situ by reaction withe the metal
    of the metal layer.

    (1)     Note.  The phosphorus containing metal salt maybe formed in situ by
    a reactive coating process classified in Class 148, Metal layer.


CLS 428/473
TXT Product under subclass 411.1 in which one layer comprises at least an
    integral portion of a layer of animal origin which existed in the layer or
    film form; see (2) Note below.

    (1)     Note. Patents claiming a laminate including glue* or gelatin* in a
    film form are not included in this subclass because neither exists in the
    animal as a layer or foil.  A patent claiming a glue* or gelatin* laminate
    would be placed in subclasses 474.4+.

    (2)     Note.  Animal skin in which the fur remains intact is considered
    pile or nap type and patents to a laminate including such skin will be
    placed in subclasses 85+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85+,    for a fur laminate and see (2) Note above.

    151,    for a web or sheet made to simulate leather grain surface.

    474+,   for a laminate including a film manufactured from animal protein*;
    and see (1) Note above.

    540,    for a single layer of animal skin (e.g., leather, etc.) which is
    impregnated or saturated with an extraneous material.

    904,    for a cross-reference collection of artificial leather products.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclasses 81+ for leather
    laminates in the form of a strop.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    885+ for an optical filter system comprising more than plural layers
    defined merely by the composition of the layers.


CLS 428/473.5
TXT Of polyimide:
    Product under subclass 411.1 in which a layer contains a polymer having an
    imide groupin the polymer chain.


CLS 428/474.4
TXT Of polyamide:
    Product under subclass 411.1 in which a layer contains a polymeric
    compound, comprising recurring amidegroups through which

            the monomer residues are linearly linked, except urea-aldehyde

    (1)     Note.  A patent claiming a laminate comprising a layer of the
    reaction product of a polyamine and a polybasic acid (e.g., nylon), or
    other condensation polymer of an amino acid such as caprolactam, will be
    placed in this or an indented subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Urea-aldehyde condensation products are significantly
    different from other polyamide resins and are similar in spatial structure
    to phenol-aldehydes.  Hence, patents claiming a laminate of only
    urea-aldehyde are collected with aldehyde or ketone condensation* products
    in subclasses 477.4 and 524+ and see the subclasses referred to in the
    notes to subclass 524.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    395,    for a coated fiber, filament, rod or strand made of polyamide.

    435     and 458, for a laminate of polyamide next to quartz or glass or
    metal, respectively.

    473.5,  for a laminate having both polyamide and polyimide, in the same or
    different layers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclass 168 for a coated or impregnated synthetic polyamide fiber fabric
    and subclass 291 for a fabric with a preformed polyamide sheet or film.


CLS 428/474.7
TXT Next to second layer of polyamide:
    Product under subclass 474.4 in which two polyamide layers, neither of
    which is urea-aldehyde, are adjacent to each other.


CLS 428/474.9
TXT At least one layer is nylon type:
    Product under subclass 474.4 in which at least one of the polyamide layers
    contains a polymer having a chain of four or more carbon atoms between its
    carbonamide groups.


CLS 428/475.2
TXT Next to polyester:
    Product under subclass 474.4 in which the polyamide-containing layer is
    next to a polyester-containing layer.


CLS 428/475.5
TXT Nylon type:
    Product under subclass 474.4 in which the polyamide is a polycarbonamide
    having a chain of four or more carbon atoms between each of its carbonamide
    groups, e.g., etc.,



    where X=2 or more and a molecular weight in excess of 100,000.


CLS 428/475.8
TXT Next to addition polymer from unsaturated monomer(s):

    Product under subclass 475.5 wherein the polycarbonamide layer is next to a
    layer of a polymer formed by linkage of the double bonds of ethylenically
    unsaturated monomer(s), e.g., a vinyl polymer, an acrylic polymer,
    polybutadiene, etc.


CLS 428/476.1
TXT Polymer of monoethylenically unsaturated hydrocarbon:

    Product under subclass 475.8 where the unsaturated monomer is a
    monoethylenically unsaturated hydrocarbon, e.g., ethylene, propylene, etc.


CLS 428/476.3
TXT Next to addition polymer from unsaturated monomer(s):

    Product under subclass 474.4 where the polyamide is adjacent to a layer of
    a polymer formed by linkage of the double bonds of ethylenically
    unsaturated monomer(s).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    475.8,  for a similar product where a polyamide is nylon-type.


CLS 428/476.6
TXT Natural source-type polyamide:
    Products under subclass 476.3 where the polyamide is or is similar in
    structure to a polyamide from a natural source, e.g., gelatin, etc.

    (1)     Note.  See the definition of subclass 478.2 for a description of
    the structure of polyamides from natural sources.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    478.2,  for natural source-type polyamides next to other than addition
    polymers.


CLS 428/476.9
TXT Polymer of monoethylenically unsaturated hydrocarbon:
    Product under subclass 476.3 where the unsaturated monomer is a
    monoethylenically unsaturated hydrocarbon, e.g., ethylene, propylene, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    476.1,  for a similar product where the polyamide is nylon-type.


CLS 428/477.4
TXT Next to aldehyde or ketone condensation product:
    Product under subclass 474.4 where the polyamide is adjacent to a layer of
    a polymer formed by removal of the oxo oxygen from an aldehyde or ketone
    and interaction of the carbon, from which removed, with another molecule.


CLS 428/477.7
TXT Inorganic-containing or next to inorganic-containing:
    Product under subclass 474.4 where the polyamide layer contains an
    inorganic material (an element or inorganic compound) or is adjacent to a
    layer which contains an inorganic material.


CLS 428/478.2
TXT Natural source-type polyamide (e.g., casein, gelatin, etc.): Product under
    subclass 474.4 wherein the polyamide is characterized by a structure
    obtained by polymerization of an alpha-amino acid, that is, having a single
    carbon, usually substituted, between the carbonamide groups which make up
    the polymer backbone.


CLS 428/478.4
TXT Next to cellulosic:
    Product under subclass 478.2 wherein the natural source-type polyamide is
    next to a layer containing cellulose (including modified or regenerated)
    such as wood.


CLS 428/478.8
TXT Paper:
    Product under subclass 478.4 wherein the cellulose layer is a sheet of
    unwoven water-laid cellulose fibers.

    (1)     Note.  The term "paper"* includes cardboard, kraft paper, etc.


CLS 428/479.3
TXT Next to cellulosic:
    Product under subclass 474.4 in which the polyamide layer is adjacent to a
    layer containing cellulose, including modified or regenerated cellulose.


CLS 428/479.6
TXT Paper or wood:
    Product under subclass 479.3 in which the cellulosic material is wood* or a
    sheet of unwoven water-laid cellulose fibers.

    (1)     Note.  The term paper* is construed to include cardboard,
    pasteboard, and water-laid wood pulp; and see (9) Note under subclass 411.


CLS 428/480
TXT Product under subclass 411.1 in which a layer comprises a polymeric
    compound containing ester groups through which the monomers are linearly
    linked to each other.

    (1)     Note.  To be considered polyester*, the chain of units must be
    attached to each other through ester linkage, such as the product formed by
    esterification of a polyhydric alcohol with a polybasic acid or the
    polymeric self-esterification of a hydroxy acid. A polymer which has
    multiester groups and whose units are not linked through these ester groups
    but by means of some other method (e.g., reaction of double bonds) is not
    considered polyester. thus, a patent claiming a polyvinyl acetate or a poly
    methyl acrylate laminate will be found in subclasses 500+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for an artificial flower or flower petal which may be made of
    polyester.

    395,    for a rod*, strand*, filament* or fiber* having a coating thereon
    or being structurally defined and made of polyester.

    430     and 458, for a laminate including a layer of polyester next to
    quartz* or glass*, or metal* respectively.

    500+,   and especially 514, 520 and 522 for a laminate of an addition
    polymer from unsaturated monomers which is an ester; and see (1) Note,
    above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclass 164 for a coated or impregnated polyester fiber fabric and
    subclass 395 for a fabric with a preformed polyester sheet or film.


CLS 428/481
TXT Product under subclass 480 in which a layer adjacent the
    polyester-containing layer comprises a cellulosic* material.


CLS 428/482
TXT Product under subclass 480 in which some of the acid and/or the alcohol
    moieties, from which the polyester is derived, are at least trifunctional,
    permitting a cross-linking of the linear polyester chain.

    (1)     Note.  A patent claiming a laminate comprising a polyester layer
    derived from an acid which is at least tribasic or an alcohol which is at
    least trihydric or in which either the poly basic acid or polyhydric
    alcohol is unsaturated, will be placed here.


CLS 428/483
TXT Product under subclass 480 in which a layer adjacent the polyester layer
    comprises an (addition polymer from unsaturated monomers*).


CLS 428/484
TXT Product under subclass 411.1 in which one layer is a wax* or has waxy*
    properties.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    319,    for a composite product in which at least one component is porous
    and contains fibers and a waxy coating or component.

    348,    for a composite web or sheet having an adhesive outermost coating
    which is heat sealable and which contains a wax.

    440,    for a layered product comprising a wax adjacent to quartz* or
    glass*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 416 and 443 for a wax containing
    layer stock material which is produced by a coating process.

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 84, 90, and 100 for a coated or impregnated fabric that contains
    wax.


CLS 428/485
TXT Product under subclass 484 in which a layer adjacent the wax or waxy layer
    comprises a cellulosic* material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 416 and 443 for a coating process for
    producing a wax layer on a base which may be a cellulosic material.


CLS 428/486
TXT Product under subclass 485 in which the cellulosic material is paper*.


CLS 428/487
TXT Product under subclass 486 in which the paper is made from well beaten
    chemical wood pulp, is highly calendered, and is hard, thin and almost
    transparent.


CLS 428/488.1
TXT With pigment or dye (e.g., carbon paper hectograph paper, etc.):

    Product under subclass 486 including coloring material comprising (a)
    small, solid free particles* of coloring matter, (b) coloring material
    which has been chemically attached to another substance (dye).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, subclasses 200+ for a recording sheet having a colorless
    color-former.


CLS 428/488.4
TXT Having layer over transferable material or on carrier opposite transferable
    material layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 488.1 in which a layer of the composite
    material or selected portions of such layer nay be transferred form the
    carrier layer to another material (e.g., carbon-paper type), the composite
    being provide with at least a third layer outward of the transferable layer
    or directly of the carrier layer, opposite the transferable layer.


CLS 428/489
TXT Product under subclass 411.1 in which at least one layer contains (a
    bituminous or tarry residue*).

    (1)     Note.  The residue from distillation of mineral oil and/or coal and
    from the destructive distillation of wood is considered to be a pitch; and
    a patent claiming a laminate including a layer of such material will be
    placed in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The mere identification in the disclosure, of a material in
    a layer as an asphalt, tar, pitch or bitumen will be sufficient for
    placement of a patent in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141+,   and especially 143+ for a product, usually a roofing material which
    includes a layer or component saturated or coated with a bituminous or
    tarry material (including asphalt).

    440     and 468, for a layered or composite product comprising bituminous
    or tarry material next to quartz or glass, or metal respectively.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 138+  for a process of coating a
    pavement or the earth with asphalt, tar, bitumen or oil, subclasses 186+
    for a process of producing a roofing element, usually including asphalt and
    subclass 443 for a process of coating, utilizing asphalt, bitumen, oil or
    wax.

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 258, 282, and 298 for a fabric including a bituminous material
    layer.


CLS 428/490
TXT Product under subclass 489 in which a layer adjacent the bituminous or
    tarry residue layer is cellulosic*.


CLS 428/491
TXT Product under subclass 490 in which the cellulosic layer is paper*.

    (1)     Note.  The term paper* is construed to include cardboard,
    pasteboard and water laid wood pulp; and see (9) Note under subclasses
    411.1+


CLS 428/492
TXT Product under subclass 411.1 in which at least one layer contains natural
    rubber*.

    (1)     Note.  The rubber may be modified by chemical treatment and/or
    admixed with other natural or with synthetic, resin(s).

    (2)     Note.  A patent claiming a laminate comprising a layer of rubber,
    without indication of a synthetic origin, will be placed here.

    (3)     Note.  Synthetic rubber is usually derived from addition polymers
    of polyene monomers and, unless the synthetic rubber is disclosed as a
    polysulfide rubber, laminates containing such a layer will be classified
    with addition polymers. "Thio" or polysulfide rubber is considered
    polythioether.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310+,   for a composite* web* or sheet* in which one component* is porous
    or cellular and is made of foamed or expanded material, which may be
    natural rubber and subclass 316, for a similar composite* web* or sheet* in
    which the porous component* may be natural rubber.

    356,    for a composite* web* or sheet* having an outer layer of adhesive
    material and in which natural rubber is part of the adhesive composition.

    382     and 390, for a rod*, strand*, fiber* or filament* in which natural
    rubber is a coating, either as one of plural coatings or as a single
    coating.

    419,    for a laminate which contains a polysulfide synthetic rubber and
    see (3) Note above.

    440     and 465, for a natural rubber layer next to quartz or glass or
    metal, respectively.

    500+,   for a laminate which contains synthetic rubber (other than
    polysulfide) and see (3) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 84, 90, 100, and 159 for a coated or impregnated fabric that
    contains natural oil, gum, or rosin.


CLS 428/493
TXT Product under subclass 492 in which adjacent layers, each containing
    natural rubber*, are disclosed or claimed to differ in composition or
    properties.

    (1)     Note.  The rubber layers may "differ" in degree of vulcanization,
    kind or relative amounts of vulcanizers, accelerator or additives or in
    other disclosed physical properties.

    (2)     Note.  A patent claiming plural layers of rubber, identical in
    composition, directly adhered to each other (e.g., by molecular attraction
    or static electricity) and in which an interface can be detected, will be
    placed in subclass 492.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    492,    for plural layers of rubber, identical in composition and physical
    properties, which are directly adhered to each other and see (2) Note above.


CLS 428/494
TXT Product under subclass 492 wherein a layer adjacent the rubber containing
    layer comprises either an (aldehyde or ketone condensation product*) or an
    (addition polymer from unsaturated monomers*).

    (1)     Note.  Polyvinyl acetal, being an aldehyde condensation product, a
    patent claiming such acetal next to rubber will be placed here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500+,   for a laminate including a layer of (addition polymer from
    unsaturated monomers) and especially subclasses 501+ for a layer of
    (aldehyde or ketone condensation product) next to the (addition polymer
    from unsaturated monomers).

    524+,   for a laminate including a layer of an (aldehyde or ketone
    condensation product).


CLS 428/495
TXT Product under subclass 494 in which the addition polymer is derived from
    monomers which include polyunsaturated monomers, e.g., butadiene or
    chloroprene.

    (1)     Note.  Patents to a laminate of natural rubber and synthetic rubber
    (e.g., ABS*, Buna S*, or GRS*) will be placed in this subclass.


CLS 428/496
TXT Product under subclass 492 in which a layer adjacent the rubber layer
    comprises cellulosic* material.


CLS 428/497
TXT Product under subclass 411.1 in which at least one layer contains a
    (natural gum or oil, rosin or lac*).

    (1)     Note.  A patent which claims a laminate comprising a layer of, or
    containing, mineral oil, shellac, oil based paint, gum arabic, cottonseed
    oil etc., will be placed here.

    (2)     Note.  Modification of a natural drying oil, e.g., boiled linseed
    oil, will be considered natural oil.

    (3)     Note.  Pyroxylin* has a minor amount of camphor and/or castor oil
    as a plasticizer, but for purposes of classification in this schedule is
    considered a cellulosic* material. Thus, patents claiming a laminate of
    pyroxylin will be placed in appropriate subclasses of this class based upon
    the presence of a cellulosic layer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205,    for a composite web or sheet in which a translucent layer of
    natural gum, lac, rosin or oil covers a layer which is discontinuous in
    extent.

    440,    456 and 467, for natural gum, rosin, natural oil or lac as a layer
    or associated with glass, cork or metal, respectively.

    484+,   for a product comprising a layer comprising wax* or waxy* material
    combined with a natural gum, rosin, natural oil or lac; many of the
    products in subclasses 484+, especially subclasses 485+ combine a wax and a
    gum, lac, rosin etc., as a coating on a cellulosic base.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 84, 90, 100, and 159 for a coated or impregnated fabric that
    contains natural oil, gum, or rosin.


CLS 428/498
TXT Product under subclass 497 in which a layer next to the oil, gum or lac,
    comprises cellulosic* material.


CLS 428/499
TXT Product under subclass 498 in which the layer next to the cellulosic
    material comprises an oil which occurs in nature.


CLS 428/500
TXT Product under subclass 411.1 in which at least one layer contains a
    compound which is an (addition polymer from unsaturated monomers*).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for an article resembling a natural flower or flower petal and
    which may be made of chemically plastic matter such as an addition polymer.

    147,    159, 315, 327, 339, 349, 373+, 383, and 407, for products
    comprising an addition polymer from unsaturated monomers used as a coating,
    impregnation or bond, as part of a composite* web* or sheet* or as a
    synthetic fiber* or filament*, as appropriately titled.  See below for more
    specific notes.

    355+,   for a product including an adhesive outer layer and in which the
    adhesive composition includes an addition   polymer from unsaturated
    monomers, and especially subclass 349 in which the polymer is heat sealable.

    413+,   for a composite product in which one layer comprises an epoxy ether
    which may be mixed with an addition polymer from unsaturated monomers.

    421,    for a laminate including a layer of fluorinated addition polymer
    from unsaturated monomers.

    437     and 441+, for a laminate including a layer of an addition polymer
    from unsaturated monomers, next to a glass* layer.

    451,    for an addition polymer from unsaturated monomers next to a silicon
    containing layer.

    461+,   for an addition polymer from unsaturated monomers next to a metal*
    layer.

    494+,   for an addition polymer from unsaturated monomers next to a natural
    rubber* layer.


CLS 428/501
TXT Product under subclass 500 in which a layer adjacent to the layers of
    addition polymer from unsaturated monomers, comprises an (aldehyde or
    ketone condensation product*).

    (1)     Note.  An acetal of polyvinyl alcohol is an (aldehyde or ketone
    condensation product); hence, a patent claiming a product of such an acetal
    next to another layer which comprises an addition polymer from unsaturated
    monomers will be placed in this subclass.


CLS 428/502
TXT Product under subclass 501 wherein the condensation product is the reaction
    product of melamine and an aldehyde.


CLS 428/503
TXT Product under subclass 502 wherein the melamine-aldehyde condensation
    product is incorporated within the interstices or applied to the surface of
    a material comprising cellulose* or a derivative thereof, and, if on the
    surface, is contiguous to the addition polymer.


CLS 428/504
TXT Product under subclass 501 in which the condensation product is one
    resulting from the reaction between an amide and an aldehyde.


CLS 428/505
TXT Product under subclass 504 wherein the amide is urea or a modification
    thereof, (e.g., butylated urea, etc.).


CLS 428/506
TXT Product under subclass 501 in which the condensation product is one
    resulting from the reaction between an aldehyde and a hydroxy benzene
    (i.e., a compound containing one or more hydroxyl group attached to an
    aromatic or carbon ring and commonly known as a phenol).


CLS 428/507
TXT Product under subclass 500 in which a layer comprising a cellulosic*
    material is adjacent to the addition polymer.


CLS 428/508
TXT Product under subclass 507 in which the cellulosic material is chemically
    modified (e.g., esterified, etc.) or precipitated from a solution (i.e.,
    regenerated).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of modified or regenerated cellulose are:
    viscose*, cellophane*, cellulose*, acetate, cellulose* nitrate and
    pryoxylin*.


CLS 428/509
TXT Product under subclass 508 wherein the addition polymer is made from one or
    more monomers in which only carbon and hydrogen appear, (e.g.,
    polyethylene*, polyproxylene, polystyrene, butadiene styrene copolymer
    (SBR)*, ethylenepropylene copolymer, etc.


CLS 428/510
TXT Product under subclass 508 wherein the addition polymer is an ester or a
    halide.

    (1)     Note.  The addition polymer may be obtained from a monomer which
    includes an ester or a halogen or the addition polymer itself may be
    treated to introduce an ester or a halide radical.


CLS 428/511
TXT Product under subclass 507 in which the cellulosic material is paper* or
    wood*.


CLS 428/512
TXT Product under subclass 511 in which the addition polymer is made from a
    monomer in which only carbon and hydrogen appear, (e.g., butadiene-styrene
    copolymer (SBR)*, butyl rubber, etc.).


CLS 428/513
TXT Product under subclass 512 wherein the hydrocarbon monomer(s) contain a
    single ethylenic

    groupnot a part of an aromatic ring, e.g., polyethylene*, polypropylene,
    polystyrene, ethylene-propylene copolymer, etc.


CLS 428/514
TXT Product under subclass 511 in which the addition polymer is an ester,
    nitrile or halide.

    (1)     Note.  The addition polymer may be obtained from monomers which
    include an ester, halide or nitrile; or the addition polymer may be treated
    to introduce ester, halide or nitrile radicals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    421+,   for a laminate of fluorinated addition polymer of unsaturated
    monomers next to paper or wood.


CLS 428/515
TXT Product under subclass 500 comprising a plurality of contiguous layers,
    each of which is an addition polymer from unsaturated monomers, with the
    respective layers disclosed as differing in some respect.

    (1)     Note.  The "differing" may be in degree of polymerization, kind or
    amount of additive, vulcanization, or physical property.

    (2)     Note.  Two identical layers which are fused together so as to
    eliminate the interface are considered as constituting a single layer and,
    in the absence of any claimed structure a patent claiming such a layer will
    be placed in the appropriate composition class.

    (3)     Note.  Two identical layers of addition polymer which cohere
    through molecular attraction or other bonding force, e.g., static
    electricity, are not considered to differ.  Thus, patents claiming such
    layers will be placed in subclass 500.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212+,   for layers or components having the same physical characteristics
    in differing degree.

    500,    for plural layers of addition polymer, identical in composition and
    physical properties, which are directly cohered to each other; and see (3)
    Note above.


CLS 428/516
TXT Product under subclass 515 wherein at least one layer contains a polymer of
    one or more aliphatic, open chain, monoethylenically unsaturated (i.e.,
    monomers of the formula CnH2n).


CLS 428/517
TXT Product under subclass 516 wherein a layer next to the olefin
    polymer-containing layer comprises a polymer derived from a
    poly-unsaturated monomer (e.g., butadiene, etc.).


CLS 428/518
TXT Product under subclass 516 in which the olefin polymer layer is next to a
    layer of a polymer of one or monomers selected from the class of vinyl
    chloride and vinylidene chloride.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    421+,   for a laminate including a layer of fluorinated addition polymer of
    unsaturated monomers.


CLS 428/519
TXT Product under subclass 515 in which at least one of the contiguous addition
    polymer layers is derived from a poly-unsaturated monomer (e.g., butadiene,
    cyclopentadiene, etc.).


CLS 428/520
TXT Product under subclass 515 in which at least one of the contiguous addition
    polymer layers contains an addition polymer from an unsaturated monomer
    which is in the form of an ester, a nitrile, or a halide.

    (1)     Note.  The addition polymer* may be derived from a monomer which
    includes an ester, halide or nitrile; or the polymer* itself may be treated
    to introduce an ester, halide, or nitrile radical.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    421+,   for a laminated product including a layer of fluorinated addition
    polymer of unsaturated monomers.


CLS 428/521
TXT Product under subclass 500 in which the addition polymer layer is derived
    from a polyunsaturated monomer (e.g., butadiene, cyclopentadiene, etc.).


CLS 428/522
TXT Product under subclass 500 in which the addition polymer from unsaturated
    monomer is an ester, halide or nitrile.

    (1)     Note.  The addition polymer may be derived from a monomer which
    includes an ester, halide or nitrile; or the polymer itself may be treated
    to introduce an ester, halide or nitrile radical.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    421+,   for a laminated product including a layer of fluorinated addition
    polymer of unsaturated monomers.


CLS 428/523
TXT Product under subclass 500 in which the addition polymer is derived from a
    monoethylenically unsaturated hydrocarbon only, i.e., the unsaturation is
    present as the group:



CLS 428/524
TXT Product under subclass 411.1 in which at least one layer comprises a resin
    resulting from the reaction of an aldehyde or a ketone and a polyfunctional
    active hydrogen containing compound, which, with the elimination of water,
    produces a chain of alkylidene units alternating with the residue of the
    hydrogen supplying compound.

    (1)     Note.  Phenol formaldehyde, urea formaldehyde, polyamino (e.g.,
    melamine) formaldehyde, and furfural are exemplary of compounds within the
    scope of the term, "Aldehyde or ketone condensation product*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for an article* resembling a flower or flower petal made of an
    aldehyde or ketone condensation product.

    355+,   for a product including an adhesive outer layer in which the
    adhesive may contain an aldehyde or ketone condensation product in its
    composition.

    436+,   451, 460, and 494, for an aldehyde or ketone condensation product
    as a coating or layer of a composite* web* or sheet*.

    501+,   for an (addition polymer from unsaturated monomers*) next to an
    aldehyde or ketone condensation product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 160+ and 176+ for a coated or impregnated fabric that includes
    an aldehyde or ketone condensation product.


CLS 428/525
TXT Product under subclass 524 in which adjacent layers, each comprising an
    aldehyde or ketone condensation product, are disclosed to differ in some
    aspect.

    (1)     Note.  The two layers may contain different condensation products,
    or the same condensation product with different additives or physical
    properties.

    (2)     Note.  Two identical layers of an aldehyde or ketone condensation
    product directly cohered to each other, but with an interface which is
    detectable, are nor considered to differ.  Thus, a patent claiming such a
    laminate will be placed in subclass 524.  Such layers may cohere through,
    e.g., molecular attraction or static electricity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212+,   for layers or components having the same physical characteristic in
    differing degree.

    524,    for plural layers of an aldehyde or ketone condensation product,
    identical in composition and physical properties, which are directly
    cohered to each other; and see (2) Note above.


CLS 428/526
TXT Product under subclass 524 in which a layer adjacent the
    condensation-product layer comprises a cellulosic* material.


CLS 428/527
TXT Product under subclass 526 in which the cellulosic material is chemically
    modified (e.g., esterified) or precipitated from a solution.

    (1)     Note.  Viscose, cellophane, cellulose acetate, cellulose nitrate
    and pyroxylin are exemplary of modified or regenerated cellulose.


CLS 428/528
TXT Product under subclass 526 in which the cellulosic material is wood*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    541,    for a block or single layer of wood which has been impregnated or
    permeated with a substance.


CLS 428/529
TXT Product under subclass 528 in which the aldehyde or ketone is condensed
    with a phenolic compound.


CLS 428/530
TXT Product under subclass 526 in which the cellulosic material is paper.

    (1)     Note.  The term paper is construed to include cardboard, pasteboard
    and water laid wood pulp; and see (9) Note under the definition of subclass
    411.1.


CLS 428/531
TXT Product under subclass 530 in which the aldehyde or ketone is condensed
    with a phenolic compound.


CLS 428/532
TXT Product under subclass 411.1 in which at least one layer contains either a
    polyhydroxy mono-aldehyde or a polyhydroxy mono-ketone, generally having
    the formula i.e., Cn(H2O)n or one of the multi-unit anhydrides which are
    hydrolizable to such aldehyde and/or ketone.

    (1)     Note.  Patents claiming a laminate including a layer of starch*,
    glycogen, dextran*, lignin, etc., will be collected here.

    (2)     Note.  Pyroxylin has a minor amount of camphor and/or castor oil as
    a plasticizer, but for purposes of classification is considered
    carbohydrate (specifically cellulosic*) rather than a natural gum or oil,
    and patents claiming a laminate of such a layer will be placed in this and
    indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for a three dimension imitation or treated natural product
    resembling a flower and made of paper.

    50,     for a single layer of cellulosic sections arranged in both lateral
    and longitudinal directions.

    84,     for a paper sheet having specific perimeter or corner structure.

    146,    for a surface containing carbohydrate particles to give a textured
    feel.

    153+,   for a web* or sheet* comprising crinkled or creped paper.

    165,    for a composite* web* or sheet* in which one of the layers* or
    components* varies in thickness and at least one component* comprises
    cellulosic material.

    191,    for a web* or sheet* comprising plural components*, noncoextensive
    laterally and in which one component is cellulosic material.

    211,    for a paper sheet* having a discontinuous or differential coating,
    bond or impregnation.

    314,    for a composite*, web* or sheet*, one component* of which is porous
    or cellular* and is made of expanded or foamed material and is adjacent to
    a cellulosic layer.

    318,    for a similar composite*, web* or sheet* in which the porous or
    cellular* component* contains fiber* and as paper.

    326,    for a composite*, web* or sheet* in which one component* contains
    structurally defined particles* of cellulosic material.

    342,    for a web* or sheet* in which the weight of a coating on a
    cellulosic substrate is recited in terms of an area covered thereby.

    393,    for a coated or structurally defined rod* strand*, fiber* or
    filament* of cellulosic material.

    411+,   appropriate subclasses with cellulosic or carbohydrate set out in
    the titles for a composite* web* or sheet* including a cellulosic or
    carbohydrate component.

    455+,   for a laminated product including cork* (the outer bark of cork
    oak).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 153 for a coated or impregnated cellulosic fiber fabric and
    subclass 257 for a fabric including a wood or cork layer.


CLS 428/533
TXT Product under subclass 532 in which each of contiguous layer contains
    carbohydrate, at least one of which layers contains a cellulosic* material.


CLS 428/534
TXT Product under subclass 533 in which both such contiguous layers comprise
    cellulosic material.


CLS 428/535
TXT Product under subclass 534 in which at least one of the cellulosic layers
    is paper* or wood*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    541,    for a single layer of wood which has been impregnated or permeated
    with a substance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, for a multilayer paper web or
    sheet which is produced by a process of that class; and see (9) Note under
    the definition of subclass 411.1 of this class (428).


CLS 428/536
TXT Product under subclass 534 in which at least one of the adjacent cellulosic
    layers is chemically modified or precipitated from solution.

    (1)     Note.  Patents claiming a laminate of cellulose acetate, cellulose
    nitrate, cellulose ether or pyroxilin* will be collected here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    439,    for cellulosic ester next to glass and subclass 527 for modified or
    regenerated cellulose next to an aldehyde or ketone condensation product.

    535,    for a product in which regenerated or modified cellulose may be
    adjacent to a layer of wood or paper.


CLS 428/537.1
TXT Of wood:

    Product under subclass 532 in which the carbohydrate layer is wood..


CLS 428/537.5
TXT Of paper:

    Product under subclass 532 in which the carbohydrate layer is paper.

    (1)     Note.  Cardboard, pasteboard and water-laid pulp are considered
    exemplary of paper.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, for a multi-ply paper web or
    sheet which is produced by a process of that class; and see (9) Note, under
    the definition for subclass 411.1 of this class (428).


CLS 428/537.7
TXT Next to layer of metal salt (e.g., plasterboard, etc.):

    Product under subclass 537.5, in which the paper is adjacent to a metal
    salt, such as calcium sulfate, etc.


CLS 428/539.5
TXT Products under the class definition in which a continuum (matrix or
    continuous phase) of elemental metal is interengaged with a continuum of
    nonmetal material.

    (1)     Note.  These products are most usually obtained by the impregnation
    of a metal or nonmetal composition, having an interconnected void
    structure, with a nonmetal or metal composition, respectively, in a fluent
    form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    540,    for products having interengaged nonmetal continuous phases.

    545,    for the product which results when a consolidated metal powder
    material having an interconnected void structure is only partially
    impregnated with a nonmetal.

    550,    for the product which results when a consolidated metal powder
    material having an interconnected void structure is impregnated with a
    different metal material.

    566,    for consolidated metal powder stock-material* having an
    interconnected void structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 314+ for a consolidated composition containing free
    metal that is to be used as a charge for a metallurgical process and
    subclasses 230+ for consolidated metal powder compositions containing a
    nonmetal ingredient.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, subclass 27 for processes of sintering
    powdered metal followed by impregnation.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 440+ for immersion-type coating
    processes which may result in the impregnation of coating material into the
    pores of a substrate.

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 228+ and 376+ for a fabric including a free metal or alloy
    constituent.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, for ceramic compositions containing metal
    particles in a nonmetal matrix without a continuous metal phase.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, in particular, classes 523 and
    524 for a synthetic resin or natural rubber composition containing a
    nonreactant material, but without a continuous metal phase.


CLS 428/540
TXT Product under the class definition comprising a block* or other solid
    mass*, or a single layer*, sheet* or web* which is found in nature in
    substantially the same form and is saturated or permeated with an
    extraneous material substantially throughout.

    (1)     Note.  If recited to specify a specific depth of penetration of the
    saturating material so that a definite interface can be determined,
    classification is above this subclass on other features such as for example
    212+ or 411.1+.

    (2)     Note.  Where no specifically recited depth of penetration is
    recited as for example, 1/4 inch, half-way through, etc., the product will
    be considered to be impregnated substantially throughout and will be placed
    in this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  Where a claim includes a solid block or piece of wood, and
    alternatively wood pulp or wood flour or wood chips and no structure of the
    particles, the original classification will be in this or the indented
    subclass with a cross reference to the appropriate composition or other
    classes, e.g., 106, 162, 252, 260, etc.

    (4)     Note.  Unless disclosed otherwise, wood and leather will be
    considered as in the solid-state and proper for this or the indented
    subclass.

    (5)     Note.  Rubber is not a natural solid and is excluded from this
    group of subclasses.

    (6)     Note.  Unless otherwise described or identified (as for example as
    particles*, chips, etc.) cork will be considered to be a natural solid and
    will be classified in subclass 541 indented hereunder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    473,    for a plural layer product in which one of the layers is leather or
    other animal skin.

    511+,   528+, 535, and 537, for plural layer products in which one layer
    may be a wood product.


CLS 428/541
TXT Product under subclass 540 in which the natural solid comprises a wood or
    lumber product which is of substantial size as a sheet, web, block, etc.,
    that is the wood product has not been comminuted into particles or small
    bits or pieces.


CLS 428/542.2
TXT DECORATIVE ARTICLE:
    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a fully shaped article
    which has as its only utility merely the adornment, or embellishment of a
    place or thing and not provided for elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  When any function other than mere appearance is ascribed to
    an article in the specification or claims of a patent, the patent is placed
    in the class and subclass which provides for that other function.

    (2)     Note.  See Designs Classes D1 to D99 for inventions in the
    decorative appearance of articles of commerce which have a main function
    other than that of being decorative.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3       through 31, for ornaments characterized by special structural
    features, or times, or places of use, particularly the definition of
    subclass 7 for the location of decorations and ornaments classified
    elsewhere; subclass 12 for a hanging ornament; and subclass 17 for a
    treated piece of wood which looks like wood.

    156+,   for a sheet, or web having decorative or informative elements
    embossed therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 175.3 for a decorative trimming for a hat and
    subclasses 244+ for decorative trimming for other clothing.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 427 for a display
    having an enhanced visual effect.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 311.1+ for an
    ornamental building component and subclasses 718.01+ for a decorative trim
    strip for a building, or building component.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 362+ for a decorative housing for an
    illuminating device, e.g., a globe for an electric lamp, etc.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 9+ for a chemically defined photograph.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 81+ for inventions in
    teaching, or demonstrating visual arts and crafts, especially subclasses 83
    for a model made of filaments and 86 for an animal, or human body model
    having movable parts.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 115+ for a sculpture designed
    to be handled, or manipulated frequently.


CLS 428/542.4
TXT Trophy or memento (e.g., preserved artifact, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 542.2 the appearance of which is designed to
    call to mind a person, or event.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    913.3   for a collection of patents drawn to memorial plaques.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 103+ for a land
    marker, or monument, and subclass 134 for a mausoleum.


CLS 428/542.6
TXT Constructed from filamentary or flat sheet material:

    Subject matter under subclass 542.2 deriving its appearance mainly from
    originally flat sheet material and/or wire, cord, slender rods, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34.1+,  for a hollow article, e.g., a container defined only in terms of
    the composition from which it is made, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 633+ for an
    openwork building component.


CLS 428/542.8
TXT ARTICLE OF INTERMEDIATE SHAPE (E.G., BLANK, PARISON, PREFORM, ETC.):Subject
    matter under the class definition comprising a fully shaped article which
    is not suitable for functional use in the claimed condition, but must be
    subjected to one or more further significant shaping steps to do more than
    merely occupy space.

    (1)     Note.  The following operations have been regarded as not involving
    a further significant shaping:



    (a)     Assembling, or uniting the article with other parts.

    (b)     Distorting the article during an assembly operation to cause the
    article to conform to discrepancies in the size, or shape of a coacting
    part.

    (c)     Bonding, or distorting those portions of the article which are to
    function as means for fastening the article to a coacting part, as, for
    example, the bending of ears, or tabs.

    (d)     Completely destroying the identity of the article as by
    disintegrating, melting, etc.

    (2)     Note.  See the main definitions of this class (428), section VI, A,
    2, for a listing of classes of subject matter which provide for their own
    blanks.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43+     and 571, for a series of blanks connected together by a weakened
    portion intrinsic to the material of which the blank is made.

    81,     for a sheet having a defined perimeter structure.

    105,    for a plural component web having grain elements in an angular
    relationship.

    577+,   for an intermediate article which is all metal or has adjacent
    metal layers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 55 for a blanking process.

    264,    Plastic or Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses for methods of deforming nonmetal blanks.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    838+ for a mirror or portion of same.


CLS 428/543
TXT Product or stock material not provided for in any preceding subclass in
    this class or where no other classification exists.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of products found in this subclass are:  a mass of
    filaments of no definite structure, mixtures of strands or strips of no
    definite structure, etc.

    (2)     Note.  A surface modified so as to form a chemical composition or
    compound is classified in the appropriate compound or composition class,
    e.g., 106 or 260.

    (3)     Note.  No patent should be placed in this subclass before
    consulting the "Index to U.S. Patent Classification" for a more appropriate
    class and subclass.

    (4)     Note.  The search notes below indicate classes and subclasses
    frequently overlooked in mistakenly deciding that an article is
    "miscellaneous".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    409+,   for a web, sheet or block claimed in terms of a surface
    characteristic.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclass 110 for a handle, per se, and the
    definitions thereto for the location of other handles.

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 225 for the loop-type eye
    of a hook-and-eye fastener.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, for a single-layer material for
    building construction, claimed in terms of its composition, even though
    described or nominally claimed as an "article".

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 63+ for a street traffic marker.

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclass 65 for a handle for a
    cane or umbrella.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 235+ for a patterned mold for molten
    metal or a part of such mold.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, subclass 50 for a means for isolating a person
    or nonburning thing from a fire, e.g., a fire-barrier, or shield.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 32+ for
    anti-inductive structures, especially subclass 35 for devices which shield,
    or protect structures from magnetic, or electrical interference.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclasses 200+ for a closure for a bottle.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 201+ for an article containing an
    electric heating wire, or other element for heating the article.

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 429 for dunnage, that is, a layer or
    assemblage of fluent solid material which can be placed between the walls
    of a container to absorb shocks.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclass 44.1 for a holder, or pusher for a
    metal part to be welded to another part by fusion bonding.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclass 79 for a radiator heat shield.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 637+ for a machinery support.

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 187+ for an element for such a mold.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 515+ for devices, e.g., shields for
    absorbing invisible radiation.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 136+ for a device for absorbing shocks,
    e.g., a resilient dunnage element, etc.

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclass 146 for a game playing die, and
    subclasses 293+ for a game playing card or tile.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 27 for a
    receptacle handle, subclass 61 for spears and subclass 131 for shields.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 187+ for a land vehicle
    body wall or a component thereof.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 600 for a
    potted electrical device.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclass 30 for a joint between two objects
    having different coefficients for expansion.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, and Tool-Deformed or Locked
    Threaded Fasteners, subclasses 378+ for an externally threaded fastener.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclass 5 for a mask to be used in photography.

    521,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 50+ for a single
    layer of foamed synthetic resin claimed in terms of its composition; even
    though described, or nominally claimed as an "article".


CLS 428/544
TXT Subject matter under the class definition drawn to stock-material* or an
    intermediate-article* which is metallic* or to a shaped metal configuration
    designed for melting.

    (1)     Note.  The article or stock-material* may also contain nonmetal
    material when it meets the requirements of this subclass for containing
    spatially distinct portions of different metals or distinct forms of a
    metal, contiguous to each other.

    (2)     Note.  Metallic* products made up of a mere random mixture of
    ingredients, whether or not such ingredients are structurally defined, are
    generally considered to be compositions, and are classified in the
    appropriate composition class (including Class 148 "stock").  However,
    where the product is characterized by its dimensions, as in subclasses 606+
    or by a particular internal structure, due to a particular
    interrelationship among its elements, or in subclasses 566 and 605 it is
    considered to be a stock-material*.  See the definition of this class
    (428), section VI, B.

    (3)     Note.  A manufacture which comprises an indefinite series of
    articles, whether intermediate or finished, still joined to each other, as
    their precursor material was joined in the workpiece from which the
    manufacture was made, is generally considered to be a stock-material* and
    such manufactures coming within the scope of this mainline subclass are
    generally found in indented subclasses 571 to 575.  See also the class
    definition of this class (428), section VI, A.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 345 for cutlery implements in which the invention
    lies in the material from which made, subclass 346.54, directed
    specifically to razor-blade material, and subclass 350, directed to the
    metallurgical features of a blade.

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition,
    particularly subclass 309 for a process of making or material for making a
    metallic abrasive tool.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 712+ for sheet or
    wire ties.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 200+ for
    strand structures of that class, and subclass 362 for wire-rope-making
    processes.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 362+ for processes of changing the size
    or shape of self-sustaining metal work.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 588 for connecting rods
    fabricated from sheet metal.

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclasses 101.1+ for blanks
    for processes of that class.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclass 78 for safes,
    safe walls and safe plates which may be made of metal.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 90.51 for the composition of
    a tappet of that class, and subclasses 188.1+ for valves of that class
    which may be made of metal.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclass 425 for a fabric of that class which
    includes metal.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 262+ for
    contacts of that class which are of specific materials, e.g.,
    metal-containing.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 292+ for
    electrodes having a free-metal-containing composition, useful for carrying
    out the processes of that class.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 76+ for an electroforming process
    directed to the production of sheets, webs, wires, and filaments.

    238,    Railways:  Surface Track, subclass 4 for metallic highway track,
    subclass 26 for longitudinal metal rail-supporting beams, subclasses 30+
    for railway ties which may be metal, subclass 111 for a pot-type rail
    support made of cast metal, subclass 112 for a wrought plate support,
    subclass 150 for materials for rails, subclasses 269+ for cast rail seats,
    and subclasses 272+ for wrought rail seats.

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 213 for a mold adjunct in the form of a
    sheet-metal tie for maintaining mold elements in spaced relation.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 28 for a device of that class in which the
    sliding portion of a base is claimed.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 271+ for a molded joint
    comprising metal fusion material.

    413,    Sheet Metal Container Making, subclasses 1+ for processes and
    machines for shaping and seaming sheet metal hollow articles and machines
    for  forming and compressing the seams of roofing sheets.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclasses 223+ for
    specific impeller blade structures, e.g., shapes, materials, etc.

    451,    Abrading, subclass 553 for a metallic abrading tool.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, appropriate
    subclasses for a friction or positive drive pulley, guide roll, or belt
    which may be formed of cast or sheet metal.

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous articles
    animal body parts, elements and accessory to such parts which may be used
    of metal.


CLS 428/545
TXT Subject matter under subclass 544 directed to composite (e.g., multilayer)
    material in which a component (e.g., a single layer) has a continuum
    (matrix or continuous phase) of elemental metal and also a continuum of
    nonfluent nonmetal interengaged or interenmeshed with the metal continuum.

    (1)     Note.  To be included within the definition of interengaged, the
    two phases must be related in an interlaced, reticulated, interwoven, etc.,
    fashion.

    (2)     Note.  A mere dispersion of particles in a matrix does not come
    within the purview of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    539.5,  for noncomposite (e.g., single layer) stock-material* having a
    metal continuum interengaged with a solid nonmetal continuum.

    548+,   for composite metallic stock which contains metal particles.

    615+,   for composite metallic stock in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 230+ for a consolidated metal particle composition
    containing nonmetal.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 264 for a
    contact comprising an infiltrated porous substance.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, subclass 28 for processes of
    mechanically working particulate metal subsequent to sintering.

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 228+ and 376+ for a fabric including a free metal or alloy
    constituent.


CLS 428/546
TXT Subject matter under subclass 544 which contains free (elemental) metal
    particles.

    (1)     Note.  This and its indented subclasses include stock-material*
    made by sintering, that is, a process in which a portion of a metal
    particle is alloyed, bonded, brazed, coalesced, partly fused or welded to a
    portion of an adjacent metal particle due to the application of heat, or
    heat and pressure.  Reference:  Everhart, J. L., et al, "Mechanical
    Properties of Metals and Alloys", Circular of the National Bureau of
    Standards, C447, 1943, p, 16.

    (2)     Note.  The particulate metal component may contain particles of
    nonmetal material and a component is deemed to contain metal particles if
    made from a starting mixture of metal and nonmetal particles, even though
    all of the metal may have melted in the process.  Thus, "cemented" carbides
    are assumed to contain metal particles.

    (3)     Note.  In this and its indented subclasses, the particulate nature
    of the metal in the product may not always be explicit.  When the product
    is manufactured from metal powder, it is presumed that some of the
    particulate nature of the starting material is preserved, at least in the
    grain structure of the product.  This presumption holds even where the
    shape of the particles is changed, e.g., from rounded to flattened.  Where
    the particles are disclosed as being fully molten during the process, and
    solidified in a mass, e.g., as in conventional metal spray coating, this
    presumption does not hold.

    (4)     Note.  Mere mention of the grain structure or crystalline
    configuration or a metal component does not justify placement in these
    subclasses (544+).

    (5)     Note.  Mere porosity, even when a percentage figure is claimed, or
    reference to an ingredient as a metal powder, is not sufficient for
    classification as stock-material*, recitation of an interconnected void
    structure in an article is sufficient. See subclass 566.

    (6)     Note.  The metal particles need not be joined, or even adjacent, to
    one another; rather, when a product is defined as having a portion or
    component which has a metal matrix, that is, continuous phase of free
    (elemental) metal, next to a portion or component which contains metal
    particles, even in a matrix of a nonmetal, it is assumed that
    metal-to-metal contiguousness exists, and the patent is properly placed
    here (subclasses 546+).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148,    208, 309, 328, and 330, for a nonmetallic sheet or web containing
    particles which may be free metal.

    403+,   for a coated particle or a mass thereof, which particle or coating
    may be of free metal.

    570,    for a metal particle coated with a metal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 314+ for consolidated solid treating compositions for
    molten metal or consolidated charges that contain free metal, subclasses
    228+ for metal compositions made from random mixtures which include metal
    powder, and subclasses 255+ for loose metal powder compositions.

    100,    Presses; 266, Metallurgical Apparatus; and 425, Plastic Article or
    Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus; for apparatus for forming
    compacts from powdered metal.  For the line between these classes, see the
    class definition of Class 425.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 403+ for pigments,
    fillers, and aggregate containing metallic powder.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, especially
    subclasses 37+ and 108.2 for such compositions containing particulate
    metals.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 280 for an
    electrode which may contain particles of free metal.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 63.2 for electrical resistance elements
    distinguished only by their composition, and subclasses 181.1+ for "getter"
    compositions.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 5+ for liquid or melt comminuting of metals, and subclass 111
    for processes of uniting metal particles without sintering.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 214 for coil
    retainers or slot closures which may contain particles of free metal.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, appropriate subclasses for processes
    of making articles from metal particles using pressure with without
    heating, especially subclasses 5+ for such processes to produce composite
    articles which may have plural adjacent powder or solid metal layers or
    components.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, appropriate subclasses for
    elemental metal or alloys in particulate form.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 180+ for methods of applying solid
    particles or fibers to a base, and subclasses 202+ for application of
    superposed diverse coatings, one of which is particulate.

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 228 and 376 for a fabric including a free metal or alloy
    constituent which may be metal particles.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, for ceramic compositions having metal
    particles in a nonmetal matrix without a continuous metal phase.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, in particular, Classes 523 and
    524 for a synthetic resin or natural rubber containing composition
    containing a nonreactant material.  In these compositions, the nonreactant
    material may be metal particles, which are dispersed in a continuous
    nonmetal phase, without a continuous metal phase.


CLS 428/547
TXT Subject matter under subclass 546 in which the porosity in one portion of
    the material or article differs from the porosity in another portion of the
    material or article or in which the composition or density of the
    stock-material* varies gradually from being of one composition or density
    to being another composition or density, without the formation of distinct
    layers during the variance, or wherein such variation takes place within a
    single component of a composite.

    (1)     Note.  The gradual nature of the composition or density variation
    must be explicit for the patent to be classified herein on the basis of a
    composition or density gradient.

    (2)     Note.  The presence of a "diffusion layer" between metal components
    does not place a patent in this subclass; such a patent is classified on
    the basis of the layers.  See the definition to subclass 544.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170,    for a nonmetallic sheet, web, or a component thereof varying in
    thickness and wherein its density also varies and which may or may not
    contain metal particles.

    305,    for a nonmetallic composite sheet or web, a component of which has
    differential or varying porosity or density, which may or may not contain
    metal particles.

    545,    for the product which results when a consolidated metal powder
    material having an interconnected void structure is only partially
    impregnated with a nonmetal material.

    550,    for the product which results when a consolidated metal powder
    material having an interconnected void structure is only partially
    impregnated with a different metal.

    610,    for nonparticulate products in which the composition or density
    varies gradually within a single layer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclasses 80+ for
    wall and panel composites having composition or density gradient or
    differential porosity.

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 471+ for
    processes directed to the coating of forming of metal layers or objects by
    electrophoresis or electro-osmosis.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 402+ for plural superposed diverse
    metallic coating methods.


CLS 428/548
TXT Subject matter under subclass 546 which comprises at least two different
    contiguous layers or portions, which can be seen to be in different
    locations, both of which are, at least to some extent, of elemental metal,
    at least one of which has a continuous metallic matrix and at least one of
    which contains metal particles.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass (548) is the locus for patents having two or
    more contiguous layers, all of which are of consolidated metal powder.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass (548) includes a consolidated metal powder
    product, a portion of which has been impregnated with one metal, and
    another portion of which has been impregnated with a different metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    411+,   for corresponding nonmetallic* stock-materials*.

    615+,   for corresponding nonparticulate metallic stock.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 228+ for a consolidated composition of metal powder
    and subclasses 255+ for unconsolidated metal powders.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 516-537 for processes of treating
    layered solid or semi-solid metal stock or article to modify or maintain
    the internal physical structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical
    properties of metal.  If metal casting, fusion bonding, machining, or
    working is involved, there is a requirement for significant heat treatment
    as described in section III, A, of the Class 148 definition.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 143+ for
    laminated electrodes designed to generate X-rays in which at least one
    layer contains metal particles.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, for processes of sintering powdered
    metal.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 191 for processes of applying metal
    particles to a base to form a continuous coating, and subclasses 202+ for
    processes of applying superposed diverse coatings, at least one of which is
    particulate.


CLS 428/549
TXT Subject matter under subclass 548 in which the composite contains fibrous
    material, whether metal or nonmetal, asbestos or cellulose, in next to the
    component which contains the metal particles.

    (1)     Note.  The metal particles may be contained within an interengaged
    fibrous matrix, for example, a textile.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34.1+,  47, 50+, 5+, 60+, 88+, 141, 150, 151+, 169+, 200+, 205, 209+, 220+,
    and  608, for other fiber, cellulose and/or asbestos-containing
    stock-materials*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 200+ for
    stock-material* comprising metal or nonmetal strand, web or sheet
    structures having a claimed twisted or twined constituent and made by the
    machines and processes of that class (57).

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclass 229 for a consolidated metal powder composition having a
    fibrous component or a fibrous grain structure.

    245,    Wire Fabrics and Structure, subclasses 2+ for metallic wire fabric
    and miscellaneous wire fabric joints formed by bending at least one
    intersecting or connecting element about the other.

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 228+ and 376+ for a fabric including a free metal or alloy
    constituent.


CLS 428/550
TXT Subject matter under subclass 548 in which a component has pores*.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are those products having pores or
    interconnected voids which are filled in only a portion of the product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    566,    for particulate metal stock-material* having an interconnected void
    structure.

    613,    for nonparticulate porous metallic* stock-material*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition,
    particularly subclass 296 for an abrasive tool making process including the
    step of forming pores or voids in the finished article, or compositions
    which form pores or voids therein.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 434 for porous metallic
    rotary bodies of that class.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 12 for a porous bearing containing a fluent
    lubricant described by composition.


CLS 428/551
TXT Subject matter under subclass 548 in which a component is composed of
    nonmetal, containing no free metal.

    (1)     Note.  The nonmetal component is in addition to the two contiguous
    metal-containing portions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    539.5,  for single layer material having a continuous metal phase and an
    interengaged or interenmeshed nonmetal phase.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclass 241 for an
    impeller blade characterized by a specified structure other than shape
    which is not elsewhere classifiable; or a blade having a residual surface
    film, layer or continuous deposit, or, at least, partial impregnation; or a
    blade whose material composition is specifically set forth.


CLS 428/552
TXT Subject matter under subclass 551 in which the nonmetal component contains
    no organic material.

    (1)     Note.  Where the nonmetal component is functionally defined and is
    generic to both organic and inorganic materials, e.g., "an insulating
    layer", the patent is placed in subclass 551 and is not-cross-referenced
    here.

    (2)     Note.  "Enamel" without a further description, is presumed to be
    inorganic; "paint" is presumed to be organic.


CLS 428/553
TXT Subject matter under subclass 548 in which the product includes a component
    which contains metal powder and another component which is of metal which
    does not show any origin as metal particles.

    (1)     Note.  The particles in the powder portion may not be consolidated
    enough to form a coherent article or material without the presence of the
    nonparticulate portion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 240+ for processes and compositions
    employing agents which react with a metal substrate to form a coating
    thereon.


CLS 428/554
TXT Subject matter under subclass 553 having two or more components which show
    no origin as metal powder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    615+,   for composite metallic stock-material* having no powder component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 345 for filament and
    resistance-heated electrodes which are composites.


CLS 428/555
TXT Subject matter under subclass 554 in which the plural nonparticulate
    components are adjacent each other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 355 for composite
    electrode and shield structures of a plurality of laminations.


CLS 428/556
TXT Subject matter under subclass 555 in which a particulate component, e.g., a
    layer, contains nonmetal.

    (1)     Note.  The nonmetal may be the continuous phase of the component
    which contains metal particles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 146 for an electric arc heating
    electrode, e.g., a metal rod having a core of a fluxing composition and
    having more structure than a mere stock-material*.


CLS 428/557
TXT Subject matter under subclass 553 having two or more spatially distinct
    components, each containing metal particles.


CLS 428/558
TXT Subject matter under subclass 553 in which the nonparticulate metal
    component serves to enclose, completely or partially, the particulate metal
    component.

    (1)     Note.  The metal particles often are distributed in a nonmetal
    matrix of fluxing agent to make a "solder stick".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208,    328 and 330, for a plural layer nonmetallic* sheet or web in which
    one layer contains metal particles.

    559+,   for other metallic* composites having metal particles mixed with
    nonmetal fluxing components.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 303+ for flux compositions, per se, containing metal
    particles, without a binder.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclass 1 for metal depositing,
    e.g., "hard facing", compositions containing metal particles and a nonmetal
    binder or carrier fluid, with or without a fluxing component.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclass 24 for flux compositions, per se,
    containing metal particles and a binder or carrier fluid.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 146 for an electrode for arc heating of
    metal, having a core of a fluxing composition.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclass 56.3 for an article adapted to be
    applied to work as filler material, subclass 214 for a process of
    surface-bonding metallic parts using a flux, subclass 244 for such methods
    using an unfused (e.g., particulate) metal filler, and subclasses 262.1+
    for such method wherein the work component, temperature, or pressure is
    critical.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclasses 412+ for nuclear fuel component structure in layered, channel or
    jacketed form, encased together with a nonfuel component.


CLS 428/559
TXT Subject matter under subclass 553 in which the metal particles of the
    particulate component are not joined to each other.

    (1)     Note.  The particles may be loose, that is, adjacent to each other,
    but not permanently fastened to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    558,    for materials similar in their ultimate composition and functions
    to those contained herein and the search notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 197 for processes of applying particles
    to localized different areas of a base.


CLS 428/560
TXT Subject matter under subclass 553 in which metal particles are held in
    discontinuous array by a nonmetal material which functions as a binder or
    matrix for the particles.

    (1)     Note.  Contrary to the general rule for patent placement in these
    subclasses (544+), a patent is not placed in this subclass when the
    nonparticulate component is generically claimed, if such component is
    disclosed as being confined to those materials specifically provided for in
    the subclasses indented hereunder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208,    328 and 330, for a plural layer nonmetallic* sheet or web in which
    one layer contains metal particles.

    556,    for a composite having plural adjacent nonparticulate metal
    components and a particulate component which includes a nonmetal.

    558,    for materials similar in their ultimate composition and function to
    those contained herein, and the search notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 326+ for electrode
    and shield structures which are more than mere stock materials.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 59+ for coating processes for
    producing electrodes used in electric welding, and subclass 196 for
    processes of applying particles and a binder from different sources upon a
    base.


CLS 428/561
TXT Subject matter under subclass 560 in which a nonparticulate component is
    more than 50% nickel, copper or zinc, or a combination of two or three of
    these metals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    558,    for materials similar in their ultimate composition and function to
    those contained herein, and the search notes thereto.


CLS 428/562
TXT Subject matter under subclass 560 in which a nonparticulate component is
    more than 50% iron.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    558,    for materials similar in their ultimate composition and function to
    those contained herein and the search notes thereto.


CLS 428/563
TXT Subject matter under subclass 562 in which the particulate component
    contains iron in element or combined form.


CLS 428/564
TXT Subject matter under subclass 553 in which a particulate metal component
    contains dispersed nonmetal particles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    539.5,  for a metal matrix interengaged with a nonmetal matrix.

    545,    for a composite having a component in which a metal matrix is
    interengaged with a nonmetal matrix.

    556,    for a composite having plural adjacent nonparticulate metal
    components and a particulate component which includes a nonmetal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition,
    particularly subclass 309 for an abrasive tool composition containing metal.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 230+ for a consolidated metal powder composition
    containing nonmetal.

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 251+ for composite brake shoes characterized by
    more than the composition of the layer.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 146 for structured electrodes of that
    class with fluxing or arc-shielding means.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 201 for methods of applying plural
    particulate materials to a base.


CLS 428/565
TXT Subject matter under subclass 458 in which a component contains nonmetal
    particles.

    (1)     Note.  The inclusion in a component of metal particles which
    themselves contain a dispersed nonmetal, e.g., steel with carbon content,
    is not sufficient for placement in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    556,    for a composite having plural adjacent nonparticulate metal
    components and a particulate component which includes a nonmetal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition,
    particularly subclass 309 for process of making an abrading tool involving
    metal or metal oxide composition.


CLS 428/566
TXT Subject matter under subclass 546 specified as having pores which are
    interconnected with each other and unfilled.

    (1)     Note.  Mere porosity in the product or a density less than
    theoretical is not sufficient for placement of a patent in this subclass;
    however, where the product is defined as "permeable" or a porosity of
    greater than 40% (density less then 60%) is claimed, it is assumed that the
    product has an interconnected void structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    539.5   and 567, for similar products in which the interconnected void
    structure is filled with a nonmetal substance or a different metal,
    respectively.

    547,    for a particulate metallic stock-material* in which the porosity
    varies.

    613,    for metallic stock-material* partially or wholly porous, which does
    not contain consolidated metal powder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition,
    particularly subclass 296 for a process or tool defined thereby including
    the step of forming pores of voids in the finished article, or abrading
    tool compositions including one or more materials which form pores or voids
    therein.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 510.1 for a filter in
    the form of a porous unitary mass which is peculiar to that class (210).

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product and
    Process, subclass 145 for a battery separator having plural layers of
    defined porosity.


CLS 428/567
TXT Subject matter under subclass 546 containing elongated elements in a
    defined relationship to each other (e.g., parallel) or in which matrix or
    continuous phase of one metal (usually a consolidated powder material
    having an interconnected "void" structure) is interengaged with a matrix or
    continuous phase of a different metal.  The different metal is usually a
    nonparticulate, impregnating metal.

    (1)     Note.  An elongated element is one having one dimension
    significantly larger than its other dimensions, e.g., fibrous, needle-like,
    rod-like, etc.

    (2)     Note.  A mere elongation of the entire product is not sufficient
    for placement herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    539.5,  for stock-material* having a metal continuous phase interengaged
    with a nonmetal continuous phase.

    545,    for the product which results when a consolidated metal powder
    material having an interconnected void structure is only partially
    impregnated with a nonmetal material.

    550,    for the product which results when a consolidated metal powder
    material having an interconnected void structure is only partially
    impregnated with a different metal.

    556,    for stock-material* of consolidated metal powder having an
    interconnected void structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 527.2 for processes of applying or shaping
    of fluent coating material upon a base with an additional mechanical
    manufacturing step.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclass 229 for a consolidated metal powder composition
    containing elongated elements in a random disposition.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclass 150 for electrolytic coating processes
    for a metal powder compact.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, subclass 24 for processes for making
    articles from metal powder using pressure and heat wherein at least some of
    the metal particles are in the form of filaments or fibers.

    427,    Coating Processes, for impregnation processes, per se, especially
    subclasses 243+, 250+, 295, and 435+.


CLS 428/568
TXT Subject matter under subclass 567 containing one of the following, in free
    or combined solid form:  a noble gas, a halogen, a chalcogen (oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium or tellurium), nitrogen, phosphorus, carbon or boron.

    (2)     Note.  If, in the claims as a whole, the presence of a nonmetal is
    optional, the patent is placed in another subclass of 567+ and is not
    cross-referenced in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, for a tool
    making process involving the use of metallic or metal compound materials.


CLS 428/569
TXT Subject matter under subclass 567 in which the product contains molybdenum
    or tungsten.

    (1)     Note.  Where molybdenum and/or tungsten is not necessary in all of
    the claims, the patent is placed in another subclass of 567+ and is not
    cross-reference to this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 231 for rotary
    structures of that class.


CLS 428/570
TXT Subject matter under subclass 544 comprising unconsolidated (loose)
    composite metal powder.

    (1)     Note.  See the definition of subclass 615, below, for an
    explanation of the term "composite".

    (2)     Note.  While a loose mass of particles, each of which comprises a
    particular metal or alloy, coated with a different particular metal or
    alloy, is considered to be a stock-material* for this class and subclass, a
    consolidated mass of such particles or a mixture of such particles with
    other particles is considered to be a composition, and is classified in a
    composition class. See, in particular, the definition of Class 75, subclass
    251.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403+,   for nonmetallic* coated particles. 924+, for a collection of
    patents which disclose the physical dimensions of composite metal
    stock-materials*, including composite powders.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 255+ for loose metal particle compositions and the
    definitions and notes thereto for the location of other patents which
    concern metal particles.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclass 513 for processes of treating loose metal
    particles and subclass 514 for processes of treating previously
    consolidated metal particles and having no sintering of compacting step,
    for purposes of modifying or maintaining the internal physical structure
    (i.e., microstructure) or chemical properties of metal.

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 80+ for electrolytic coating
    processes.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes,  Systems, and Elements,
    subclass 411 for coated nuclear fuel particles in a jacket or can.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 212+, especially 216 and 217 for
    methods of coating particles.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent or Support Therefor:  Product or Process of
    Making, for a composition composing a catalyst or sorbent, per se, and see
    especially subclasses 300+ for a catalyst which may contain a metal powder.


CLS 428/571
TXT Subject matter under subclass 544 in which the material is provided,
    usually along its length, with portions of reduced tensile or fracture
    resistant properties, e.g., perforations, or with a machine-sensible
    configuration, at or near an edge, to permit ready or automatic
    disassociation of the material into smaller units.

    (1)     Note.  In general, claimed recitation of an individual lead frame,
    per se, with or without electrical leads/connections thereto will not be
    classified herein, but in Class 257.  To be classified in Class 428, the
    stock material will have to be claimed either as an individual lead frame
    without being labeled "lead frame", or the lead frame structure will have
    to be a strip of interconnected lead frames prior to separation into
    individual lead frames.  Claimed recitation of any electrical
    leads/connections (nominally or in detail) in addition to the lead frame,
    or of electrical components (nominally or in detail) in addition to the
    lead frame, per se, will result in the subject matter being classified
    elsewhere, e.g., Classes 174, 257 or 361.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43+,    for a nonmetallic sheet, web or layer weakened to permit separation
    through its thickness.

    131+,   for a nonmetallic sheet or web including an aperture.

    573,    for materials of regular variation in width or thickness where the
    variations are not provided specifically for purposes of disassociation.

    596,    for perforated stock where the perforations are not provided
    specifically for purposes of disassociation or indexing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 413 for processes of obtaining plural
    pieces from a unitary piece by breaking through a weakened portion.

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclass 77 for staple blanks
    integrally connected by the metal from which they are made, which require
    further significant shaping in addition to severing to produce a single
    fastener.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 52.4 for lead
    frames combined with a housing for electrical components.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 83.5 for a set of articles
    put up as a mercentile unit.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 666+ for lead frames, per se, or combined with active
    solid-state electronic devices.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 421, for
    lead frames with plural diverse electrical components.


CLS 428/572
TXT Subject matter under subclass 571 in which the intended disassociation is
    in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the material.


CLS 428/573
TXT Subject matter under subclass 544 wherein, an indeterminate number of
    times, at regular intervals, along the length of the material, the width or
    thickness varies or cuts are provided along a margin.

    (1)     Note.  The mere provision of apertures or a roughened surface is
    not considered to be a variation in thickness.

    (2)     Note.  A merely twisted structure is not considered to have a
    variation in width or thickness.

    (3)     Note.  In general, claimed recitation of an individual lead frame,
    per se, with or without electrical leads/connections thereto will not be
    classified herein, but in Class 257.  To be classified in Class 428, the
    stock material will have to be claimed either as an individual lead frame
    without being labeled "lead frame", or the lead frame structure will have
    to be a strip of interconnected lead frames prior to separation into
    individual lead frames.  Claimed recitation of any electrical
    leads/connections (nominally or in detail) in addition to the lead frame,
    or of electrical components (nominally or in detail) in addition to the
    lead frame, per se, will result in the subject matter being classified
    elsewhere, e.g., Classes 174, 257 or 361.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156+,   for nonmetallic sheet or web material varying in thickness.

    596,    for metallic* stock-material* having one or more discrete through
    openings or cuts which may or may not be marginal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 346.56 for a toothed or waved-edge razor blade,
    and 355 for other toothed blades.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 314 for structure in
    which the exposed face gives the appearance of being formed of multiple
    units, this effect being gained by deformation or marking of the base
    material.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 421 for articles of that class (73)
    which are samplers or tollers.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 52.4 for lead
    frames combined with a housing for electrical components.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 666+ for lead frames, per se, or combined with active
    solid-state electronic devices.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 421, for
    lead frames with plural diverse electrical components.


CLS 428/574
TXT Subject matter under subclass 573 in which both the width and thickness
    vary regularly.

    (1)     Note.  The width variation need not follow the same rhythm as the
    thickness variation.

    (2)     Note.  Wire or bar stock which varies regularly, along its length,
    in the diameter of its cross section, is placed in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    399,    for a nonmetallic* rod, strand, filament or fiber whose cross
    section area varies along its length.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 76.1+ for files and rasps.


CLS 428/575
TXT Subject matter under subclass 573 having along its side edges, and
    extending to said edges, openings which are smaller in their longitudinal
    extent than they are in another dimension.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    571,    for stock-material* having a marginal feature designed for
    calculating the length of the stock-material* or   number of units into
    which it is to be divided, or for facilitating such division by automatic
    means.


CLS 428/576
TXT Subject matter under subclass 544 drawn to articles* comprising metal, with
    or without a nometal component, having a described configuration suitable
    for use in a particular process where the article is melted or fused.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for other "packages" suitable for in toto disposal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclasses 530+ for a fuel product
    of defined shape or structure and subclass 541 for a bundled, covered or
    wrapper fuel composition.

    53,     Package Making, for methods and apparatus for making packages.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 303+ for a flux composition which may be defined in
    terms of its shape, and subclasses 314+ for a consolidated composition
    (e.g., a briquette) which is to be used as a charge for a metallurgical
    furnace, the composition containing free metal dispersed in a nonmetal.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 83.5 for bales, including
    bales of metal scrap.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclass 56.3 for an article adapted to be
    applied to work as a filler material.


CLS 428/577
TXT Subject matter under subclass 544 comprising an intermediate-article*.

    (1)     Note.  If opposite surfaces of an article are defined as converging
    toward each other at one end, the length of the article is considered
    definite, for placement in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  "Recited end structure" means that a structural feature must
    be pointed out for at least two intersecting thickness surfaces of the
    article.  Where "end" structure is recited without a recitation of "side"
    structure, the defined "ends" are considered "sides".

    (3)     Note.  See the main definitions of this class (428), section VI, A,
    2, for a listing of classes of subject matter which provide for their own
    blanks.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34.1+   and 571, for a series of blanks connected together by a weakened
    portion intrinsic to the material of which the blank is made.

    542,    for nonmetallic* blanks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses for methods of deforming
    metal blanks.

    83,     Cutting, subclass 55 for blanking processes.


CLS 428/578
TXT Subject matter under subclass 577 in which the article has a length and a
    width each of which is greater than its thickness, has a finite perimeter,
    and has a margin which is other than four straight sides meeting each other
    at right angles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80+,    for other nonrectangular sheets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 656.1+ for a frame,
    per se.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclass 424 for coupling stock-material*
    originally in sheet form.


CLS 428/579
TXT Subject matter under subclass 577 in which the panel has a substantially
    circular edge configuration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64.1+,  for other nonmetal* circular sheets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 434+ for structure and
    details of rotary bodies, per se, constituting gearing elements.

    292,    Closure Fasteners, subclass 357 for doorknob rose plates.

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclasses 5.1+ for wheels.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 346 and 355 for
    coated or laminated electrodes or shields having structures peculiar to
    Class 313.


CLS 428/580
TXT Subject matter under subclass 578 having a plane of symmetry and a
    correspondence in size, shape and relative position of parts such that if a
    plane mirror is placed in the plane of symmetry, parallel to a thickness
    surface or perpendicular to a nonthickness* surface of the article, half
    the object, plus the mirror image of this half, appears the same as the
    entire object.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, subclass 325 for a radially actuated
    segmented seal (e.g., ram type, etc.) for  a well overpressure control
    device (e.g., seal for a blowout preventer, etc.), subclass 344 for a
    segmented radially actuated packer (e.g., oil saver, gas saver, etc.) for
    above ground apparatus of a well, subclass 493 for a segmented piston ring,
    subclass 533 for a dynamic segmented seal having a wedging surface
    contained or compressed by gland member in a packing box, or subclasses
    543+ for a dynamic segmented circumferential contact seal for other than a
    piston.


CLS 428/581
TXT Subject matter under subclass 580 in which the mirror can be placed in only
    one position to reveal the symmetry.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 607 for an axle and torque
    tube casing having structure limited to uses of that class.


CLS 428/582
TXT Subject matter under subclass 577 which is (1) provided with a rim, collar
    or other flat projection which stands out beyond the main body of the
    article, or (2) provided with means for holding the article, e.g., during
    late processing, or (3) having a configuration which provides for
    interlocking among a plurality of identical articles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for an article made of plural parts interlocking or temporary
    attachment means.

    81+,    121+ and 192+, for a sheet or web having an edge feature which may
    be a projection.

    99+,    for a sheet or web having a fastener for attachment to an external
    surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 428 for assembly and/or joining of metal
    parts by bending of flanges, etc.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 73 and 74 for
    cables, conduits and conductors combined with attaching means at a joint or
    end structure.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 260+ for a leaf spring having a
    connecting feature at an end.


CLS 428/583
TXT Subject matter under subclass 577 in which (1) article is held together by
    a separate and distinct mechanical fastener extending over the edge of the
    article, or into a plurality of layers of the article, or by bonding only
    the edges of the article, or (2) in which the article is distinguished by a
    configuration, within one-third of its either end, which differs from its
    configuration in its central one-third, or (3) opposite surfaces of the
    article tend to converge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83      and 122, for a nonmetallic* sheet or web with a channel-shaped edge
    component.

    88      and 194, for a nonmetallic* sheet or web with an edge feature, or a
    configured or discontinuous surface.

    157,    for a nonmetallic* sheet or web wherein the difference occurs only
    at, or in the area adjacent, an edge of the sheet or web.

    594,    for indefinite length metallic* material held together in the same
    manner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, appropriate subclasses for methods and apparatus
    for tying metal scrap into bundles.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 156+ for longitudinally
    seamed tubing.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 83.5 for bales, including
    bales of metal scrap.

    473,    Amusement Devices; Games, subclasses 316+ for a golf club shaft.


CLS 428/584
TXT Subject matter under subclass 583 in which the end feature is qualitatively
    the same at both opposite ends of the article.

    (1)     Note.  The feature need not be quantitatively the same, e.g., both
    ends may taper, but at different angles.


CLS 428/585
TXT Subject matter under subclass 583 in which the end feature is one in which
    either the thickness surfaces or the nonthickness surfaces, or both, of the
    article, approach each other towards an end.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    582,    for ingots having a feature for interlocking with each other.

    599,    for ingots which are not defined as tapering, but which may have
    fluted sides or similar features.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 271+ for means to shape a metallic ingot.

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 174 for container-type molding device for
    forming an ingot.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 104 for a wedge, per se.


CLS 428/586
TXT Subject matter under subclass 544 drawn to stock-material* which is to be
    worked upon in a metal-working or similar operation, which contains therein
    an empty longitudinal passageway insufficient to form a conduit or a
    material, usually nonmetal, which is resistant to bonding to the adjacent
    metal when subjected to heat and/or working.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34.1+   and 188, for nonmetallic* stock-material* having a longitudinal or
    transverse tubular or cavity.

    595,    for stock-material* having a channel shape.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 54+ for effecting mechanical treatment
    of metal work by the development of pressure within a granular or
    particulate or soft metal material which may be confined within said metal
    work, e.g., a hollow workpiece.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, appropriate subclasses for tubular
    stock-material* and for tube and ring blanks which are themselves tubes
    which can conduct a fluid.


CLS 428/587
TXT Subject matter under subclass 544 comprising stock-material* which (a) is
    of irregular cross-section, that is, not a circle or a regular polygon, (b)
    is to be modified in its cross-sectional shape by a manufacturing
    operation, and (c) produces a finished stock-material* which has a
    cross-sectional shape irregular in the same fashion as the starting
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    573+,   598, 599, and 600+, for other stock-material* of nonregular cross
    section.


CLS 428/588
TXT Subject matter under subclass 544 comprising a web or sheet made of
    longitudinally parallel layers or components, at least some of which are
    not fastened to any other component.

    (1)     Note.  Generally a subsequent manufacturing operation bonds the
    layers or component together.

    (2)     Note.  Provision for gravity alone to hold the pile together is not
    considered fastening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54+,    for a longitudinally arranged layer of three or more sections,
    which may or may not be fastened to each other.

    77+,    for a sheet facing and longitudinally noncoextensive with a web or
    other sheet.

    105     and 114, for a sheet or web, including elements in different layers
    or components which are in angular or parallel relation to each other and
    in which some of the layers or components may or may not be fastened to
    each other.

    184+,   for a plurality of nonplanar uniform-thickness sheets or webs which
    need not be fastened to each other.

    576,    for an article or similar stock-material* so shaped as to
    facilitate melting.

    594,    for similar stock-material* tied into bundles or spot-welded.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 83.5 for bales, including
    bales of metal scrap.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 231+ for columnar
    structures of that class also called "piles".

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 10.5 for piles or other
    arrangements of articles designed to promote efficient handling.


CLS 428/589
TXT Subject matter under subclass 588 in which at least one component is so
    gripped by one or more other component(s), usually all along its length,
    that lateral displacement of the one component (usually during subsequent
    processing) is prevented or minimized.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44+,    for a layer of three or more discrete and identifiable parts which
    may or may not be fastened.

    54+,    for a product formed of three sections joined so as to extend
    longitudinally, which may or may not be fastened.


CLS 428/590
TXT Subject matter under subclass 588 in which a web or sheet is made of
    composite* stock.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    615,    for composite* metallic stock distinguished only by the composition
    of its components*.


CLS 428/591
TXT Subject matter under subclass 544 having plural components and means for
    one component to move, relative to another component.

    (1)     Note.  The motion is generally limited to that necessary to provide
    flexibility in the material or to prevent breakage due to installation or
    temperature change in the material.

    (2)     Note.  The means must be a physically distinct means, not merely
    another component, definable merely in terms of its composition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    for nonmetallic* stock-material* having superposed movably attached
    layers or components.

    617,    for temperature deflectable composite* stock-material* provided
    with a component, generally a layer, of temperature-expansive
    characteristics such as to prevent separation of the main components.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 90 for processes of that class for forming
    a product having interconnected movable parts.

    267,    Spring Devices, appropriate subclasses for devices of that class
    having parts which are relatively movable.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 220+ for flexibly connected
    rigid members of that class.


CLS 428/592
TXT Subject matter under subclass 544 which is regularly curled, twisted, or
    flat-wound, or which contains a twisted or flat-wound component, inside or
    outside another component.

    (1)     Note.  A mere statement that the entire stock-material* is a "coil"
    is not sufficient for placement in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     222, 371, and 377, for nonmetallic* sheet, web, rod, strand,
    filament or fiber that is of spiral form or includes a spirally coiled
    component.

    906,    for a collection of patents which concern coiled stock-material*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 239+, 246+ and 254+ for springs of that class.

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 20.1 for spiral cutting of flat stock, and
    subclass 173 for manufacture of springs.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 740.8 for an
    elongated rigid structure of the sinuous curve type, and subclasses 740.6+
    for an axially twisted-type elongated rigid structure.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 200+ for
    twisted stock-materials* of indefinite length, made from filamentary or
    fibrous material, e.g., metal fibers, filaments or wires, or
    stock-materials* made by helically wrapping a cover about a filamentary or
    fibrous core.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 135+ for processes of that class
    directed to forming a helical coil or tube, and subclasses 146+ for forming
    a spiral coil.

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, appropriate
    subclasses, for stock-material* made by a process of that class, even when
    the braided material is only a component of a composite; it should be
    noted, however, that stock-material* which is made by a process which goes
    significantly beyond Class 87, e.g., which includes steps for bonding the
    braided fibers to each other or to another component, are generally
    classified in this class (428).

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 154 for spirally seamed tubing.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 29 for conduits,
    cables and conductors of the coaxial or concentric type with spiral
    spacers, subclass 108 for such materials having spirally applied conductive
    armor or sheathing, and subclass 128.1 for a plural-strand conductor.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 45+ for wave-transmission systems having
    conductors or lines loaded with inductance coils.

    245,    Wire Fabrics and Structure, subclass 6 for fabrics comprising a
    plurality of connected helical coils.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 166+ for coil springs.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 344 for coiled
    filament or resistance-heated electrodes.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses
    255+ for helical components of that class.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 296+ for a helical or
    wound-resistance element.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 207, for a bimetallic
    thermometer having a helical member.

    492,    Roll or Roller, subclass 43 for a roll having a spiral member, and
    subclass 44 for a roll having a helical member.


CLS 428/593
TXT Subject matter under subclass 544 including a plurality of layers or
    components (a) wherein at least two of said layers or components include
    substantially parallel, narrow, elongated elements, such as strips, strands
    filaments, corrugations, grain fibers, grain crystals, etc., with such
    elements of one layer or component being arranged in defined angular
    relationship to those elements of the other, or (b) including discrete
    elements (e.g., tubular constituents) or component which form, or cooperate
    to form, cells, including filled cells, having longitudinal axes which are
    at an angle to the nonthickness surface of the stock-material.

    (1)     Note.  Curvilinear or polygonal openings in an otherwise integral
    layer of material are not considered elongated elements for this subclass.
    See particularly subclasses 596+, below.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not include mere plural layers of textile
    material without a specific description of the angular relationship between
    the fibers of the different layers or components.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73      and 116+, for other honeycomb-like materials.

    105,    for a sheet or web including grain, strips or filamentary elements
    in respective layers or components in angular relation.

    114,    for a sheet or web including grain, strips or filamentary elements
    in different layers or components parallel.

    178,    for a nonplanar, uniform-thickness material forming or cooperating
    to form, cells.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 782.1+ for a
    composite building panel having a disparate edging, and subclasses 720.1+
    for a building component having an elongated rigid structure.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 400+ for a metallic* material having a
    grain structure brought about by a treatment of that class.

    449,    Bee Culture, subclasses 44+ for honey comb to be used in a bee hive.


CLS 428/594
TXT Subject matter under subclass 544 in which at least one component or layer
    has spaced areas, substantially less than the total area of the involved
    surface of the layer or component, which are joined to another layer or
    component by adhesion or cohesion or by a separate and distinct mechanical
    connection member(s) extending over the edges of, and/or into, a plurality
    of layers or components.

    (1)     Note.  This definition is not applicable to merely interengaged
    fibrous constituents which are bonded at their points of interengagement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102     and 223, for a nonmetallic* composite* web or sheet in which a
    plurality of layers or components are joined to each other by a plurality
    of spaced mechanical fasteners.

    103+,   194 and 198, for plural-layer nonmetallic* material in which layers
    are joined to each other by discontinuous or spaced bonds.

    576,    for a shaped configuration or package of metal parts designed for
    melting.

    583,    for an intermediate-article* having a discrete fastener or marginal
    fastening.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 782.1+ for a
    composite panel having a mechanical fastener holding the facing sheets in
    assembled relationship, and subclasses 726.1+ for an elongated rigid
    structure comprising axially aligned sections with a fastener at the
    junctions.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclasses 58+ for
    wall and panel structures, closures and closure adjuncts, especially
    subclasses 59+ and 79 for such devices including a fastening means.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 147 for subject matter of that
    class having mechanical means to hold layers in contact.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 83.5 for a bale of scrap
    metal, and subclass 442 for a package of bale ties.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 86+ for spot-bonding methods of that
    class.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 405+ for a separate connector or
    fastener between two or more members at substantially a single locus.


CLS 428/595
TXT Subject matter under subclass 544 wherein sheet or web material of uniform
    thickness is turned back upon itself through an angle of greater than 90o,
    or in which equal, longitudinal margin portions are bent perpendicular to
    the plane of the connecting portion.

    (1)     Note.  The description of a stock-material* merely as "arcuate" is
    not enough for placement in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121+,   for nonmetallic* sheet or web material having a fold at its edge.

    603,    for metallic* stock-material* having a V-shaped or L-shaped cross
    section.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 475.1+ for weatherstrip
    devices.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 782.1+ for a
    composite building panel having a disparate edging.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 126.1+ for
    conductor structure peculiar to that class.

    238,    Railways:  Surface Track, subclasses 56, 59+ and 62+ for a railroad
    tie having a channel-shaped configuration.

    293,    Vehicle Fenders, subclasses 102+ for an automobile bumper.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 277 for sheet-piling made
    up of C-shaped sections.


CLS 428/596
TXT Subject matter under subclass 544 wherein the stock-material* or a
    component* thereof has one or more discrete through openings, with the
    peripheral wall or walls of each opening defined by either a line or closed
    loop passing through the thickness of the material or component in a
    undirectional rectilinear path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66.6    and 131+, for corresponding nonmetallic* material, and the notes to
    subclass 131 for an explanation of the above definition.

    546,    605 and 613, for porous stock-material*.

    609,    for metallic* stock-material* in which an aperture in one layer is
    filled with material integral with another layer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 6.1 for processes of manufacturing other
    multiperforate metal.

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 346.61 for blades which are apertured or notched.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 633 and 660+ for
    fabric or lattice articles, usually used in the construction trades,
    especially subclass 670 for expanded metal and subclass 673 for perforated
    metal.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 325 for methods of piercing by a compound
    tool.

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses, especially subclass 30 for
    puncturing methods.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    7+ for differential etching processes, and subclasses 510+ for surface
    bonding or assembling means with cutting, punching, piercing, or tearing
    means.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 283 and 284 for
    perforated or foraminous electrodes.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclass 75 for electroforming of perforated or
    foraminous articles.

    219,    Electrical Heating, subclass 384 for arc-type devices with
    perforating means.

    245,    Wire Fabrics and Structure, subclasses 2+ for analogous
    stock-materials* made by bending wires.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process, subclasses 241+ for an open mesh or perforated plate battery grid.


CLS 428/597
TXT Subject matter under subclass 596 wherein the web or sheet or a component
    thereof, has one or more portions which project or protrude from a
    nonthickness surface of the component and form at least a part of the
    periphery of a through opening therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132+,   for a corresponding nonmetallic* sheet, web or component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 740.6+ for a rigid
    elongated structure with struck out projections.


CLS 428/598
TXT Subject matter under subclass 544 wherein the material has a variation in
    thickness representable by an alphabetical symbol having a crossbar more or
    less perpendicular to another stroke of the letter, e.g., E, F, H, I, K, T,
    X or Y.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156+,   for corresponding nonmetallic* sheet or web materials, and
    subclasses 397+ for rods of particular cross section.

    595,    for C- or U-shaped cross-section stock.

    603,    for stock-material* appearing, in cross section, like the letters,
    G, J, L, N, S, V, W, or Z.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 311.1+ especially
    subclass 316 for a structure of that class having a relief or intaglio
    surface deformation, subclass 719 for crossed reinforcing rods with a
    connector, and subclass 729 for a shaft or elongated rigid structure of
    I-shape cross section.

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses for processes and apparatus
    for changing the shape or size of metal work mechanically, without removal
    of material therefrom.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, appropriate subclasses for
    stock-material* appearing in cross section like the letters A, B, D, O, P,
    Q and R.

    238,    Railways:  Surface Track, subclasses 57 and 65+ for railroad ties
    of I-shape cross section, subclasses 58 and 67 for ties of T-shape cross
    section and subclass 130 for T-shaped rails.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 277 for metallic
    sheet-piling having I-shaped sections.


CLS 428/599
TXT Subject matter under subclass 544 drawn to stock-material* in which the
    surface configuration of at least two nonopposite surfaces or an angle
    therebetween, is defined.

    (1)     Note.  Wires, rods and tubes of uniform circular cross section are
    specifically excluded from this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177+,   for nonmetallic* rods for particular cross section.

    577,    for ingots of definite length, e.g., tapered.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclasses 101.1+ for processes
    and blanks of that class.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclass 142 for a surface bonding process of
    that class involving mitering the corners of a workpiece.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, subclasses 1+ for powder metallurgy
    processes which include sintering.


CLS 428/600
TXT Subject matter under subclass 544 wherein the distance between the
    nonthickness surfaces of the stock-material* varies or the cross-sectional
    shape or area of a rod or wire varies along its length.

    (1)     Note.  A mere outer fibrous layer is not covered by this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156+,   for a nonmetallic* sheet or web which varies in thickness.

    573,    for a metallic* stock-material* having a thickness variation which
    regularly repeats longitudinally.

    609,    for a metallic* stock-material* in which an individual component of
    a composite may vary in thickness in order to make up for thickness
    variation in another component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 457 for processes of mechanical manufacture
    involving ribbing.

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 346+ for blades of that class.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 362+ for a process which may involve
    varying the thickness of metal work.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    7+ and 18+ for etching processes which may result in an article having a
    variation in thickness.


CLS 428/601
TXT Subject matter under subclass 600 in which the thickness variation of the
    material is due, at least in part, to the presence at the surface of the
    material of a component which does not cover the entire surface of the
    material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass only provides for the metal preform to be
    subsequently used in a printed circuit.  If such a preform is labeled a
    "printed circuit" in a claim, but only the preform structure is positively
    recited, proper classification is in Class 428.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141+,   for nonmetallic* stock-material* having a nonuniform layer or
    component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 846+ for methods of making a printed
    circuit on a planiform insulator.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 250+ for
    structured conductors, conduits and cables in a preformed panel circuit
    arrangement, and subclasses 126.1+ for conductor structures peculiar to
    that class.


CLS 428/602
TXT Subject matter under subclass 600 devoid of irregularities (projections or
    depressions) along its length, and having a plane of symmetry.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    577,    for intermediate articles, e.g., blanks, which are symmetrical and
    may be longitudinally smooth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclasses 101.1+ for blanks
    and processes of that class.

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 174 for an ingot-forming container-type mold.


CLS 428/603
TXT Subject matter under subclass 544 wherein the stock-material* or a
    component thereof has nonthickness surfaces where are (a) defined other
    than by two parallel flat planes and (b) equidistantly spaced at all points
    or comprising a strand of uniform diameter having portions laterally
    displaced from other portions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130,    for a nonmetallic* sheet, web or component thereof which has a
    particular fold at its edge, e.g., L- shaped.

    174+,   for nonmetallic*, nonplanar, uniform-thickness material.

    362     and 369+, for a nonmetallic* rod, strand or fiber which, in the
    longitudinal axis, follows a curvilinear or multidirectional path.

    592,    for metallic strands which are curled, twisted or flat-wound.

    612,    for stock-material* having a rough interface between layers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 631 for a component
    of that class which is a laminate with a bent facing.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 127+ for processes of curving or
    troughing material during movement.

    238,    Railways:  Surface Track, subclass 58 for railroad ties having an
    angle cross section.


CLS 428/604
TXT Subject matter under subclass 603 having elongated nonplanarities which
    intersect, or having projections through not all of which a single line can
    be drawn.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179+,   especially subclasses 180, 183 and 185 for nonmetallic*
    stock-material* having intersecting corrugations or nonaligned dimples.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 355 for a blade of that class of waved
    configuration.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    462 for indefinite-length flexible webs including corrugating means.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 106+ for a
    corrugated composite conductive armor or sheath.


CLS 428/605
TXT Subject matter under subclass 544 of overall indeterminate shape having as
    its only continuum, network of flexible, narrow elongated constituents,
    usually intertangled or interengaged.

    (1)     Note.  See the main class definition, section VI, C, 2, a and VI,
    C, 2, b for the locus of patents to fibrous materials having an ordered
    interengagement of fibers, e.g., metal textiles, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Patents classified herein are not cross-referenced to
    subclass 606.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    606,    for individual filaments smaller than 6 mils.

    608,    611 and 614, for metallic webs or sheets having other continual and
    containing fibers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 209 for
    steel-wool implements of that class.

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 415 for apparatus and processes for
    manufacturing metal wool.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclass 147 for a device of that class comprising
    compressed wire mesh, and subclass 148 for a device comprising a fibrous
    metallic body.


CLS 428/606
TXT Subject matter under subclass 544 consisting of flexible material having a
    claimed entire dimension of 6 mils (0.006 inches; 0.01524 cm; 152.4 micron;
    152,400 angstroms) or less, or greater gauge than 34.  Reference:  Metals
    Handbook, 8th Edition, Volume 1 (1961), page 18.

    (1)     Note.  An article or material defined as a metal foil, leaf or
    film, without any numerical reference to its thickness is placed in these
    subclasses (606+).

    (2)     Note.  A patent is not placed in this subclass because of a mere
    component which meets the definition of the subclass.

    (3)     Note.  See the main class definition of this class (428), section
    VI, C, 2, a, for loci of other subject matter relating to filaments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220,    for a nonmetallic* sheet or web where the entire dimension is
    claimed for the complete product, which may or may not be smaller than 6
    mils.

    401     and 903, for a structurally defined nonmetallic* filament which may
    or may not be smaller than 6 mils.

    605,    to complete a search for metal filaments.

    923,    for a collection of metallic and stock-materials* having specified
    dimension.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 17.1+ for foil and thin sheet-metal
    making.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 19 for foil or film components in an
    oven part.

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 76+ for electroforming of films.

    433,    Dentistry, subclass 227 for a dental filling made of foil.


CLS 428/607
TXT Subject matter under subclass 606 in which the foil or filament is a
    composite.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    615+,   for composite* metallic* stock-material* which may have a foil
    component.

    924+,   for a collection of composite* metallic* stock-material* products
    in which a dimension is specified.


CLS 428/608
TXT Subject matter under subclass 544 which includes a layer or component
    comprising fibers, strands, etc., mechanically intertangled, interwoven,
    intertwined or interlooped, or included between other layers.

    (1)     Note.  See the main class definition of this class (428) for loci
    of other subject matter relating to interengaged fibers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85+,    175, 190, 193, 196, 197, 222, and 365, for a nonmetallic*
    stock-material* in which a component has interengaged fibers, or in which a
    fibrous layer is between other layers.

    605,    for a mass or layer consisting entirely of interengaged fibers.

    614,    for similar stock-material* where the fibers, strands, etc., are
    not interengaged, e.g., are parallel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 200+ for
    twisted strand structures.

    63,     Jewelry, subclasses 3+ for an ornament in the form of a bracelet,
    which may embody metal fibers.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, subclass 42 for an article* of that class
    comprising a plurality of interengaging elements held in position by a
    fusible substance.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 128.1+ for
    plural-strand conductors.

    245,    Wire Fabrics and Structure, subclasses 1+ for a fabric of that
    class.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 343+ for filaments
    and electrodes composed of a plurality of interengaged wires or strands.

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.), for a
    fabric containing layer.


CLS 428/609
TXT Subject matter under subclass 544 comprising a plurality of layers or
    material having an interface between layers which is (1) nonplanar and
    noncylindrical, and (2) apparent to the naked eye.

    (1)     Note.  Both contiguous layers or other components must conform to
    the irregularity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138+,   for a sheet or web containing at least one apertured component and
    one imperforate component.

    171+,   for a nonmetallic* sheet or web which varies in thickness, and
    which has a component conforming to the contours of a nonplanar surface.

    567,    for a stock-material* made by impregnating a metal into a
    consolidated metal powder composition having an interconnected void
    structure.

    588,    for a workpiece which may have an irregular interface between
    parallel nonfastened components.

    612,    for similar subject matter where the irregularity is merely a
    defined roughness or wave-form not apparent to the naked eye.

    614,    for a metallic* stock-material* having a component complete
    embedded within another component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclass 85 for
    metallic composite walls and panels of that class, plural parts of which
    are secured together along a common interface.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 345+ for interfitted members of
    that class.


CLS 428/610
TXT Subject matter under subclass 544 wherein the composition of the
    stock-material* varies gradually from being one composition to being
    another composition, without the formation of distinct layers, or wherein
    such variation takes place within a single layer of the material, or
    wherein such a variation occurs in the density of the material or layer.

    (1)     Note.  The gradual nature of the composition variation must be
    explicit for the patent to be classified herein.

    (2)     Note.  In regard to a "diffusion" layer in a metallic composite,
    see the definition to subclass 615, (6) Note.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170,    for a nonmetallic* sheet, web or component which varies in
    thickness and density.

    217     and 218, for a nonmetallic* stock-material* product having distinct
    layers of differing hardness or density.

    547,    for particulate metal stock having a composition, or density
    gradient.

    941,    for a collection of patents which concern metallic stock produced
    by a method which includes solid state diffusion of metals to the
    disappearance of an original layer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, for an
    abrasive tool making composition comprised of metal or metal oxide.

    148,    Metal Treatment, appropriate subclasses for processes of treating
    metal to modify or maintain the internal physical structure (i.e.,
    microstructure) or chemical properties of metal and which may result in a
    gradual variation in composition with or without formation of distinct
    layers but identified in terms of the separate compositions.  See Class
    148, subclasses 206+, for processes of carburizing or nitriding metal;
    subclasses 240+ for reactively coating of metal; or subclasses 516 for
    processes of treating layered metal stock or article.  If metal casting,
    fusion bonding, machining, or working is involved, there is a requirement
    of significant heat treatment as described in section III, A, of the Class
    148 definition.


CLS 428/611
TXT Subject matter under subclass 544 in which a shaped stock-material* has the
    direction of preformed fibers which have been incorporated into the article
    or magnetic coordinated with its shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105+,   114 and 593, for a composite* having grain, strips or filamentary
    material in different layers, or components in an angular relation, e.g.,
    parallel, etc.

    910,    for a collection of patents drawn to nonmetallic* materials having
    molecules oriented in a particular direction.

    928,    for a collection of metallic* magnetic stock-materials*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 40+ for metal compositions of defined
    grain structure or magnetic properties produced by a process of that class,
    subclasses 100+ for certain processes of developing, improving, modifying
    or preserving magnetic properties in magnetic materials, and subclass 404
    for directionally solidified alloys which may have precipitates in the form
    of long fibers.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 129+ for plural
    strand assemblies of that class, having noncircular cross sections, and
    subclasses 133+ for other noncircular strand sections.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 62.55 for a nonmetal magnetic composition
    containing some free metal.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 296+ for magnet structure.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, appropriate subclasses for alloys
    which are defined broadly as "magnetized" or "permanent magnet" as well as
    alloys which are inherently magnetic.


CLS 428/612
TXT Subject matter under subclass 544 comprising a plurality of layers of
    material having an interface which is greater in area than would be
    obtained by the mating of two smooth surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    609,    for an interface with macroscopic irregularities.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    2+ for processes of etching resulting in a roughened surface.

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 640+ for electrolytic erosion of a
    workpiece to change its shape or surface configuration and subclasses 687+
    for electrolytic material treatment, in general.


CLS 428/613
TXT Subject matter under subclass 544 comprising at least in part, a
    nonfibrous, nonparticulate material which contains tiny openings, often
    microscopic, through which certain fluids may pass.  Generally the pore
    opening is of such irregular direction and small dimension that light will
    not pass through the porous component without distortion or diffusion.

    (1)     Note.  An originally porous material, the pores of which have been
    filled, is not considered to be porous.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155,    for a nonmetallic* sheet, web or component which contains crevices
    of relatively small lateral dimensions extending thereto, but not
    therethrough.

    158+,   for a nonmetallic* sheet or web varying in thickness and having a
    foamed or cellular component.

    304+,   for a nonmetallic* sheet or web with a second component that is
    either porous or cellular.  See especially subclasses 310+ for foamed or
    expanded material.

    539.5,  for the product which results when a metal or nonmetal composition,
    having an interconnected void structure, is impregnated with a nonmetal or
    metal composition, respectively, in a fluent form.

    546+,   for stock-material* of or containing consolidated metal powder,
    which materials often are porous, especially subclass 550 for such
    materials specified as having a porous component.

    596,    for stock-material having apertures, that is, openings which
    generally permit the passage of undiffused light.

    605,    for fibrous masses which generally are porous.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, subclass
    296 for a tool making process or composition involving pore-forming.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 228+ for consolidated metal powder compositions, which
    compositions often are porous.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 601+ for porous
    articles comprising alkali metal silicate; subclasses 672+ for porous
    cement, slag, and plaster compositions; and subclass 122 for porous organic
    compositions within the class (106) definition.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 79 for a process of that class employing a
    pore-forming agent.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product and
    Process, subclass 145 for a battery separator having plural layers of
    defined porosity.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, subclasses 39 and 80+ for pore-forming
    compositions.


CLS 428/614
TXT Subject matter under subclass 544 in which at least one side edge of a
    layer or component of a composite sheet or web is laterally offset relative
    to a corresponding edge of a second layer or component of the product.

    (1)     Note.  The mere provision of a coating on a thickness of the
    surface, as well as a nonthickness surface of bar stock is not sufficient
    to place such stock-material* in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Specifically excluded from this subclass are wires, rods and
    tubes of uniform circular cross section, having a core and one or more
    outer layers, each outer layer, in a cross section perpendicular to the
    long dimension, being a complete, continuous annulus of uniform thickness.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77+     and 189+, for composite nonmetallic* stock-material* having
    laterally noncoextensive components.

    592,    for composite materials having helical rods or filaments embedded
    therein.

    608,    for composite material having interengaged rods or filaments
    embedded therein.

    609,    for composite material having an apertured component embedded
    therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    63,     Jewelry, subclasses 26+ for articles of that class having means for
    holding gems.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclasses 80+ for
    wall and panel composite structures.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    298 for surface bonding by embedding of a lamina within the face of an
    additional lamina.


CLS 428/615
TXT Subject matter under subclass 544 which comprises at least two different,
    contiguous* layers or portions, each having a matrix or continuous phase of
    free metal.

    (1)     Note.  Neither a disclosure of, nor a product claim containing a
    lamination to a particular process for producing or uniting two or more
    metallic layers or portions will exclude an invention from this subclass;
    however, see the search notes to Classes 148 and 427, below.

    (2)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses provide for wire and
    filaments, greater than 6 mils in diameter, or of unspecified diameter,
    made by joining two or more different metals. Metal wire coated with a
    different metal is also classified in this and the indented subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  Included in this and indented subclasses are soldered,
    brazed or welded joints, claimed as joints, which are characterized only by
    the composition of the metal parts joined and/or of the filler metal. Where
    merely a "weld deposit" is claimed, the claimed subject matter is
    considered to be merely a composition for a composition class, e.g., Class
    420, subclasses 122.1+.

    (4)     Note.  The term "base-metal", as used in the subclass titles
    indented hereunder, means a content of a particular metal or group of
    metals of more than 40 percent.

    (5)     Note.  The term "alternative", as used in the subclass titles
    indented hereunder, means that the base metal of a component may be either
    one of the metals or metal groups of the title, or may be a combination of
    such metals. Further, the alternativeness need not be expressed in a single
    claim or "Markush" group, but may be based upon different claims; thus, a
    patent having one claim to a lead-coated iron composite and another claim
    to a tin-coated iron composite is proper for classification in subclass 644
    and need not be cross-referenced elsewhere on the basis of these two claims.

    (6)     Note.  Where a "diffusion" layer or portion is claimed, made by
    interdiffusion during heat treatment of materials from two adjacent metal
    layers or portions, the diffusion layer or portion is ignored in
    classifying the patent.

    (7)     Note.  Placing of original and cross-reference patents.

    I.              It is necessary to provide an original or cross-reference
    copy of a patent in this or the subclasses indented hereunder, for, at
    most, only each interface of the composite material; thus, a two-layer
    composite is provided for completely in the first-appearing subclass which
    provides for either layer.Where a three-layer material is claimed (e.g.,
    two pieces of aluminum alloy soldered together with a tin-lead solder) and
    the composition of the central layer is provided for in the schedule ahead
    of the subclasses provided for the composition of either outer layer,
    placement of the patent original or cross-reference in the first-appearing
    subclass (e.g., 643) will suffice.

    II.     Where a composite not suitable for placement in subclasses 616+,
    620 or 621+ is described in the claims only on the basis of the functional
    characteristics of the components, e.g., "solder",  "hard metal", etc., it
    is placed as an original in subclass 686 and may be cross-referenced
    elsewhere, when desired, on the basis of the disclosed composition of its
    components.

    III.    Where the entire composite is claimed as being deflectable by a
    temperature change, it is classified as an original in subclasses 616+ and
    cross-referenced below only when the subclasses indented under subclass 616
    do not specifically provide for the interfaces claimed or otherwise of
    interest.

    IV.     Where the metal composite, in addition, has a layer or portion
    composed of a nonmetal composition, that is, a composition having a
    continuous nonmetal phase, it is placed as an original in subclasses 621+
    and cross-referenced below on the basis of the metal-to-metal interface(s).

    V.      Where only one component of a composite is claimed in terms of its
    composition, or a name which is equivalent to a composition, e.g.,
    "stainless steel", the patent is placed as an original in the
    first-appearing subclass which provides for that composition and may be
    cross-referenced elsewhere on the basis of the disclosed composition of the
    other components.

    (8)     Note.  This subclass (615) is the locus for composite*
    stock-material* in which one of the components* has an alkali-metal base,
    that is, lithium, sodium, potassium, rubidium, cesium or francium, or in
    which only a minor ingredient of a component is identified.

    (9)     Note.  For guidance purposes only, the following is a list of
    elements, along with an identification for each nonmetal, and/or the
    principal subclass locations which concern locations which concern that
    element:

    Actinium (Ac)           655, 656
    Aluminum (Al)           650+
    Americium (Am)          655, 656
    Antimony (Sb)           642
    Argon                   nonmetal
    Astatine (At)           nonmetal
    Arsenic (As)            642
    Barium (Ba)                     649
    Beryllium (Be)          649
    Berkelium (Bk)          655, 656
    Bismuth (Bi)            642
    Boron (B)                       nonmetal, 627
    Bromine (Br)            nonmetal
    Cadmium (Cd)            656, 657
    Calcium (Ca)            649
    Californium (Cf)                655, 656
    Carbon (C)                      nonmetal, 627,
                            634
    Cerium (Ce)             655, 656
    Cesium (Cs)                     615
    Chlorine (Cl)           nonmetal
    Chromium (Cr)           651, 656, 661,
                            664, 666+
    Cobalt (Co)                     637, 648, 652,
                            656, 667, 668, 675,
                            678, 679
    Columbium (Cb)          see Niobium
    Copper (Cu)             618, 637, 647,
    652, 656, 669, 671,             674+
    Curium (Cm)             655, 656
    Dysprosium (Dy)         655, 656
    Einsteinium (Es)                655, 656
    Erbium (Er)                     655, 656
    Europium (Eu)           655, 656
    Fermium (Fm)            655, 656
    Fluorine (F)                    nonmetal
    Francium (Fr)           615
    Gadolinium (Gd)         655, 656
    Gallium (Ga)            642
    Germanium (Ge)          620, 641
    Gold (Au)                       637, 647, 652,
                            656, 669, 671, 672
    Hafnium (Hf)            651, 656, 660, 661
    Helium (He)             nonmetal
    Hydrogen (H)            nonmetal
    Holmium (Ho)            655, 656
    Indium (In)                     642
    Iodine (I)                      nonmetal
    Iridium (Ir)                    637, 648, 652,
                            656, 669, 670
    Iron (Fe)                       619, 638, 644,
                            648, 653, 656, 659,
                            667, 676+, 679+,
                            681+
    Krypton (Kr)            nonmetal
    Lanthanum (La)          655, 656
    Lawrencium (Lw)         655, 656
    Lead (Pb)                       643+, 645
    Lithium (Li)                    615
    Lutetium (Lu)           655, 656
    Magnesium (Mg)          649
    Manganese (Mn)          655, 656
    Mendelium (Md)          655, 656
    Mercury (Hg)            657
    Molybdenum (Mo)         651, 656, 663,
                            664
    Neodymium (Nd)          655, 656
    Neptunium (Np)          655, 656
    Neon (Ne)                       nonmetal
    Nickel (Ni)                     637, 648, 652,
                            656, 667, 671, 675,
                            678, 679, 680
    Niobium (Nb)            651, 656, 661, 662
    Nitrogen (N)            nonmetal, 627
    Nobelium (No)           655, 656
    Oxygen (O)                      nonmetal, 629,
                            632+, 639+
    Osmium (Os)             637, 648, 652,
                            656, 669, 670
    Palladium (Pd)          637, 648, 652,
                            656, 669, 670
    Platinum (Pt)           637, 648, 652,
                            656, 669, 670
    Phosphorus (P)          nonmetal
    Plutonium (Pu)          655, 656
    Polonium (Po)           655, 656
    Potassium (K)           615
    Prseodymium (Pr)                655, 656
    Protactinium (Pa)               655, 656
    Promethium (Pm)         655, 656
    Radium (Ra)             649
    Rhenium (Re)            655, 656
    Rhodium (Rh)            637, 648, 652,
                            656, 669, 670
    Rubidium (Rb)           615
    Ruthenium (Ru)          637, 648, 652,
                            656, 669, 670
    Samarium (Sm)           655, 656
    Scandium (Sc)           655, 656
    Seleium (Se)            nonmetal
    Sodium (Na)             615
    Silicon (Si)                    620, 641
    Silver (Ag)                     637, 647, 652,
                            656, 669, 671, 673
    Strontium (Sr)          649
    Sulfur (S)                      nonmetal, 639
    Tantalum (Ta)           651, 656, 661,
                            662
    Technitium (Tc)         655, 656
    Tellurium (Te)          nonmetal
    Terbium (Tb)            655, 656
    Thallium (Tl)           642
    Thorium (Th)            655, 656
    Thulium (Tm)            655, 656
    Tin (Sn)                        643+, 646+

    Titanium (Ti)           651, 656, 660,
                            661

    Tungsten (W)            651, 656, 664,
                            665
    Uranium (U)             665, 656
    Wolfram                 (see Tungsten)
    Xenon (Xe)                      nonmetal
    Ytterbium (Yb)          655, 656
    Yttrium (Y)                     655, 656
    Zinc (Zn)                       658+
    Zirconium (Zr)          651, 656, 660,
                            661

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    411+,   for analogous nonmetallic* stock-material*.

    548     and 553, for composite* metallic* stock-material* having a portion
    derived from metal powder.

    570,    for metallic* composites* in form of powder.

    590,    for a metallic* composite* in the form of a workpiece of parallel
    nonfastened components*.

    607,    for a composite* metallic* foil of filament smaller than 6 mils.

    924+,   for collections of patents which define composite* metallic*
    stock-materials* in terms of physical dimension.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 782.1+ for a
    composite building panel having a disparate edging.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclass 85 for
    composite metallic walls and panels.

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclasses 236+ for
    thermocouples identified by the composition of at least one member of the
    junction.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 140 for material of that class
    having more than one layer in the wall make-up.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 400+ for single-layer metal
    stock-material* having a surface into which another material has been
    diffused, e.g., "case-hardened", and subclasses 33+ for essentially
    homogeneous electrically semiconductive stock having at least two
    contiguous layers differing in the number of unbound electrons (P-N-type
    materials).

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 91 for processes of that class directed to
    formation of multilayered articles by forming a metal into a preform or
    casting two or more metals in contact with one another, and subclass 94 for
    forming a composite article by sequentially casting molten metal.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 196 for
    conductively contacting components or a composite conductive armor or
    sheath.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 290+ for
    laminated or coated electrodes.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 85.1 for pressure bonding methods
    directed to brazing or soldering, subclasses 104+ for brazing or soldering
    by arc, and subclasses 136+ for other welding.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 454+ for devices of that class having
    coated linings, and subclasses 660+ for such devices comprising the
    construction of a receptacle wall.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclass 56.3 for an article* to be used as a
    filler in joining juxtaposed or otherwise engaged metal work portions.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclass 329 for devices of that class
    wherein the free ends which constitute the joint interface are of different
    metals cooperating to produce a desired result, e.g., corrosion prevention.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 405 for a resilient
    support for a cathode-ray tube, which is bimetallic.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 276+ for metallic sheet
    piling.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 58+ in which an electrical product is
    formed, especially subclasses 89+, 103, 118, and 123, subclasses 404+ for
    applying superposed diverse coating involving metal coatings and/or bases,
    and subclasses 436+ for applying a metal coating to a metal base by
    immersion.


CLS 428/616
TXT Subject matter under subclass 615 having the property of bending or
    lengthening in a circular fashion in response to an increase in temperature.

    (1)     Note.  A patent is placed in this subclass (616) because of the
    ability of a composite to respond, shape-wise, to a temperature change.
    Responses to other  phenomena, e.g., magnetostrictive properties, are not,
    in themselves, relevant to this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    686,    for other composite material defined by the function of adjacent
    components.

    913,    for a collection of nonmetallic* stock-material* designed to be
    responsive to temperature, light, moisture, etc. Patents classified in
    subclass 616 should not be cross-referenced to subclass 913 on the basis of
    temperature-responsive characteristics.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 529 for thermostatic devices which include,
    besides the bimetallic element, significant structure designed for
    temperature responsiveness, such as the mounting for an end of the strip or
    the shape given the strip to constitute the device.

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclasses 200+ for
    thermocouple (junction-type) stock-material* which produces an electric
    current in response to heat.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches,
    subclasses 333+ for such switches having a bimetallic element, and the
    notes thereto for the location of other devices having bimetallic elements,
    and subclass 379 for an article* which is a bimetallic element for such
    switch.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 205 for a thermometer
    having a bimetallic sensor.


CLS 428/617
TXT Subject matter under subclass 616 in which the composite has three or more
    layers.

    (1)     Note.  The third layer often is a buffering layer designed to
    prevent separation of the two main layers during flexure.

    (2)     Note.  Patents placed in this subclass are not cross-referenced to
    subclass 916.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    591,    for stock-material* composites having discrete means, more than
    merely a buffering component, to allow relative motion between components.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 269 for contact
    material which constitutes three or more layers.


CLS 428/618
TXT Subject matter under subclass 616 in which one component of the composite
    is copper or an alloy containing more than 40% copper.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter classified herein is not cross-referenced to
    subclasses 656, 699, 671, or 674.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 268 for contact
    material which constitutes two layers, each one being different from the
    other.


CLS 428/619
TXT Subject matter under subclass 616 in which both components of the composite
    are of an alloy containing 40 percent or more of iron and 10  or more of
    nickel.

    (1)     Note.  Patents classified herein are not cross-referenced to
    subclasses 681+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    617,    to complete a search for this subject matter.


CLS 428/620
TXT Subject matter under subclass 615 in which one of the components is
    described as being an electrical semiconductor, that is, a material with an
    electrical conductivity between that of a conductor and an insulator.

    (1)     Note.  Claimed recitation of electrical conductor means or
    electrical components, even nominally, will result in the subject matter
    being classified elsewhere, e.g., in Classes 174, 257 or 361, appropriate
    subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    641,    for a composite having a silicon- or germanium-base component which
    is not described as a semiconductive component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 33+ for electrically semiconductive
    stock under the Class 148 definition which is essentially homogeneous and
    has at least two contiguous layers differing in the number of unbound
    electrons and/or differing in energy gap levels, which exhibit a junction
    between the layers.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 102+ for armor
    or sheath devices of that class which may be semiconductive.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 62.3 for barrier layer compositions, and
    subclasses 500+ for other semiconductor compositions.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses for such devices, wherein the solid state material
    is typically a semiconductor.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Processes, particularly
    subclasses 570+ for methods of making a Schottky contact to a semiconductor
    and subclasses 597+ for methods of making an ohmic contact to a
    semiconductor.


CLS 428/621
TXT Subject matter under subclass 615 having a nonmetal component, that is, a
    spatially distinct continuum which is not a metal, an alloy, or an
    intermetallic compound.

    (1)     Note.  To be classified in this subclass, the article or
    stock-material* must be classifiable in this class, subclasses 615+ in the
    absence of the nonmetal component, that is, it must have at least two
    different contiguous metal layers or portions.

    (2)     Note.  Nonmetals are the elements designed as such in the
    definition of subclass 615, (9) Note, the compounds of these
    elements.Silicon is considered to be metal and intermetallic compounds are
    considered to be alloys.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    344,    385 and 444, for a laminate including a single layer of metal
    adjacent a nonmetal layer.

    545,    for composites* having a component* in which a nonmetal continuum
    is interengaged with a metal continuum.

    551,    for a composite* of the type classifiable in these subclasses
    (621+) where a metal component* is particulate.

    560+,   for composites* having metal particles dispersed in a nonmetal
    matrix component which is adjacent a metal component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 759 for a bonded
    metal to nonmetal joint of that class.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 206-238 for processes of carburizing,
    nitriding, or both (e.g., carbonitriding, etc.) of solid metal, and
    subclasses 316-319 for resulting stock.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 171+ and 316+ for a single metal
    layer coated with a nonmetal by a process of that class.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclass 234 for a laminated magnetic core.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 271+ for
    electrostatic condensers.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 258+ and 402+ for application of
    plural diverse coatings or coating a coated base.


CLS 428/622
TXT Subject matter under subclass 621 having two or more spatially distinct
    components, each of which has a nonmetal matrix.


CLS 428/623
TXT Subject matter under subclass 622 in which the components having nonmetal
    matrices are next to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    411+,   for the specific combinations of nonmetal components.


CLS 428/624
TXT Subject matter under subclass 621 in which the component* having a nonmetal
    matrix is an organic material.

    (1)     Note.  See the main class definition of Class 260, Chemistry of
    Carbon Compounds, for the scope of "organic".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    459,    464, 467, and 468, for a composite product having an organic
    component next to a single metal layer.

    608,    for paper or other organic fibrous material interengaged or between
    metal layers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 105+ for plural
    insulated conductive armors or sheaths, subclasses 110+ for insulated
    devices of that class which may have an organic component, and subclasses
    126.1+ for conductor structure.


CLS 428/625
TXT Subject matter under subclass 624 in which the organic material is rubber
    or a similarly stretchable and reboundable polymer or gum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    419,    462 and 465, for a composite* in which one layer comprises a
    rubber-like synthetic polymer and another layer comprises a metal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 225+ for flexibly connected
    rigid members having an elastomer interposed between radially spaced
    members.


CLS 428/626
TXT Subject matter under subclass 624 in which the organic material is a
    synthetic resin.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 520, Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass
    1 for the meaning of "synthetic resin".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    457+,   for a composite having a single metal layer next to a synthetic
    resin layer.

    625,    for a composite* having a stretchable and reboundable synthetic
    resin component*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 183+, 188+, 191+, and 198+ for
    electrolytic coating combined with another coating method involving a
    synthethic resin.


CLS 428/627
TXT Subject matter under subclass 621 in which the nonmetal component is a
    binary compound of boron, carbon, or nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  Stock-material* having a boride, carbide, or nitride surface
    layer is placed here unless it is specified that the treatment with the
    nonmetal element is insufficient to produce a continuous phase of the
    nonmetal.

    (2)     Note.  See the main class definition of this class (428), section
    VI, C, 6, for the loci of other subject matter related to coating and
    coated products which may contain a boride, carbide, or nitride component*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 236+ for a consolidated metal power composition
    containing a carbide, and subclass 244 for such composition containing
    boron or nitrogen.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 206-238 provide for processes of
    carburizing, nitriding, or both (e.g., carbonitriding, etc.) of solid
    metal, and subclasses 316-319 for the resulting stock.


CLS 428/628
TXT Subject matter under subclass 621 in which the nonmetal component is a
    compound of a metal which is adjacent to the nonmetal component.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, but is not restricted to, so-called
    "conversion coatings".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 240+ for processes of coating solid
    metal with a material that reacts therewith.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 171+, 199+, and 324+ for
    electrolytic methods of forming a conversion coating on solid metal, e.g.,
    anodizing, and for the resulting products.


CLS 428/629
TXT Subject matter under subclass 628 in which the component is an oxide of the
    adjacent metal, e.g., an "anodizing coating".


CLS 428/630
TXT Subject matter under subclass 621 in which the nonmetal component is an
    amorphous material consisting of silica or a mixture of oxide or a
    mixed-metal oxide, e.g., sodium silicate.

    (1)     Note.  The mere designation of a component as "glass" is sufficient
    for classification herein.

    (2)     Note.  See the main class definition of this class (428), section
    VI, C, 6, for loci of other coating and coated products.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    432,    for a nonmetallic* composite* in which one component* is glass or
    quartz and another component may be a metal.

    632,    for a metallic* composite* having a crystalline (ceramic) component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 759 for other
    metal-to-glass joints.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 50.61 for boxes
    and housings with a bonded seal for a conductive member, e.g.,
    glass-to-metal.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclass 30 for joint structure wherein two
    members have different coefficients of expansion.


CLS 428/631
TXT Subject matter under subclass 630 in which the nonmetal component is so
    thin as to be like a coating on the metal component material.

    (1)     Note.  In most patents of this subclass the product is made by a
    coating process.


CLS 428/632
TXT Subject matter under subclass 621 in which the nonmetal is, or contains, an
    oxide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    469+,   for a composite product wherein the layer adjacent the metal layer
    contains a metal salt or an oxide.


CLS 428/633
TXT Subject matter under subclass 632 in which the oxide is of more than one
    metal or consists of two or more oxides.

    (1)     Note.  A patent claiming a nonmetal component merely as "a ceramic"
    is placed here. Where the ceramic is claimed in terms only of a single
    oxide constituent, e.g., "a high-alumina ceramic", the patent is placed in
    subclass 632, or 629, if appropriate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    636+,   for a metallic composite having a vitrified ceramic component.


CLS 428/634
TXT Subject matter under subclass 621 in which the nonmetal component is
    uncombined carbon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclass 243 for a consolidated metal powder composition
    containing elemental carbon.


CLS 428/635
TXT Subject matter under subclass 615 in which the composite has four or more
    spatially distinct components, e.g., layers, in which two types of
    components appear alternately in the same sequence in a visual scanning of
    the composite cross section; for example, a sequence of components are
    exemplified by A, B, A, B.

    (1)     Note.  A "symmetrical" sequence of the type A, B, C, B, A is not a
    basis for placement in this subclass.


CLS 428/636
TXT Subject matter under subclass 615 comprising adjacent components having an
    identical composition.

    (1)     Note.  The components, while having identical chemical
    compositions, often will have different physical properties because of a
    difference in their manufacturing history, e.g., one component may be a
    substrate, while the other is a coating.

    (2)     Note.  Where the claims of a patent are such that adjacent
    components may be the same or different in their composition, e.g., due to
    overlapping in the claimed ranges of alloying ingredients, generic
    claiming, etc., the patent is placed in this subclass (636) as an original,
    and is cross-referenced to the appropriate subclass below. Where the
    components are always identical, patents classified herein are not
    cross-referenced below, e.g., to subclass 654.


CLS 428/637
TXT Subject matter under subclass 636 in which the identical adjacent
    components contain more than 40% of one or more metals from Group VIII or
    IB of the periodic table, that is, cobalt, copper, gold, iridium, iron,
    nickel, osmium, palladium, platinum, rhodium, ruthenium and/or silver.

    (1)     Note.  Where the adjacent components are always identical, e.g.,
    are not described in terms of overlapping ranges or constituents, patents
    classified herein are not cross-referenced to subclass 675.


CLS 428/638
TXT Subject matter under subclass 637 in which the metal is iron and the
    components contain 0.01 to 1.7% carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Patents classified herein are not cross-referenced to
    subclass 683 where the components are necessarily identical.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    682+,   for composite metallic stock-material* having adjacent iron-base
    components of differing composition.


CLS 428/639
TXT Subject matter under subclass 615 in which a component of a composite has
    oxygen, sulfur, or an organic material dispersed in its metal matrix.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    539.5,  for stock-material* comprising a metal matrix interengaged with a
    nonmetal matrix.

    545,    for composite materials having as a component a metal matrix
    interengaged with a nonmetal matrix.

    567,    for a composite having a particulate component with nonmetal
    dispersed therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 230 and 951 for consolidated metal powder compositions
    having a nonmetal dispersed therein.


CLS 428/640
TXT Subject matter under subclass 639 in which the dispersed nonmetal is the
    oxide of aluminum or a transition metal.

    (1)     Note.  See the definition of subclass 655 for the scope of
    "transition metal".


CLS 428/641
TXT Subject matter under subclass 615 in which a component contains 40 percent
    or more of silicon, germanium, or both.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    620,    for similar materials where the Si- or Ge-base component is
    described as an electrical semiconductor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclass 239 for
    thermoelectric devices of composition containing a Group IV element.


CLS 428/642
TXT Subject matter under subclass 615 in which a component comprises 40 percent
    or more of arsenic, antimony, bismuth, gallium, indium or thallium, or a
    combination of these metals.


CLS 428/643
TXT Subject matter under subclass 615 in which a component* having 40 percent
    or more of tin is adjacent a component* having 40 percent or more of lead,
    or in which a component* of the composite* may be either lead-base or
    tin-base or a combination of lead and tin which makes up 40 percent or more
    of the component, e.g., 30 percent lead and 30 percent tin.

    (1)     Note.  This is an experimental "Markush"- type subclass designed to
    provide, for classification and search purposes, the kind of convenience
    and compactness offered by "Markush" claiming in patents, primarily by
    reducing the amount of cross-referencing which is required. So far as
    patent placement is concerned, a patent placed in a "Markush" subclass is
    not cross-referenced to subclasses which provide for species covered by the
    generic "Markush" subclass, although it may be desirable to cross-reference
    the patent to indented subclass on the basis of the combination of layers.
    Thus, a patent placed in this subclass (643) is not  placed also in
    subclasses 645 or 646, although placement in subclasses 647 and/or 648 may
    be desirable for subject matter not covered by subclass 644.

    As concerns search purposes, a search for an invention restricted to a
    species has its primary search field in the subclass devoted to the
    species, while the "Markush" subclass is a secondary search field; a search
    of which is mandatory when the primary field does not provide satisfactory
    documentation. Conversely, an invention involving a "Markush" group
    comprising two or more members, all of which are provided for in a
    "Markush" subclass, has its primary search field in that subclass and
    subordinate search fields in the subclasses providing for the species.

    (2)     Note.  The alternativeness of the species must be according to the
    claims, but not be stated in a single claim; that is, a patent having one
    claim to a composite with a component having a base of one species, and a
    substantially identical claim to a composite with a component having a base
    of a second species, both species being provided for in the same "Markush"
    subclass, is classified in the "Markush" subclass.

    (3)     Note.   The designation of a component* as a "type-metal" or
    "tin-led solder" is sufficient for classification in this subclass (643),
    however, a designation merely as "solder" is not. Subclasses 686 and
    927-933 have been provided as collection places for components designated
    in such merely functional terminology.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 252+  for coating from an aqueous
    bath with a lead- or tin-base alloy.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 454+ for a "tin" can lined with a coating.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 312 and 313 for treating a lead or
    tin coating with a flux, and subclass 423 for immersion-type coating with
    tin, lead or zinc.


CLS 428/644
TXT Subject matter under subclass 643 in which a lead- or tin-base component is
    adjacent a component having 40 percent or more of copper or iron, or a
    combination of the two.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass are not cross-referenced to
    subclasses 674 and 681+ on the basis of the Pb-Sn/Cu-Fe interface.


CLS 428/645
TXT Subject matter under subclass 615 in which a component has 40 percent or
    more of lead.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    643,    to complete a search for lead-base components.


CLS 428/646
TXT Subject matter under subclass 615 in which a component has 40 percent or
    more of tin.

    (1)     Note.  Nb3Sn is a niobium (columbium)-base alloy and a composite
    with such a component is provided for in subclass 662.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    643,    to complete a search for tin-base components.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 454+ for coated receptacle linings.


CLS 428/647
TXT Subject matter under subclass 646 in which the tin-base component is
    adjacent a component having 40 percent or more of copper, gold and/or
    silver.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass are not cross-referenced to
    subclasses 671, 672, 673, or 674+ on the basis of the Sn/Group IB-metal
    interface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    643     and/or 644, to complete this search.


CLS 428/648
TXT Subject matter under subclass 646 in which the tin-base component is
    adjacent a component containing 40 percent of one, or a combination of,
    cobalt, iron, nickel, or a platinum metal.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass are not cross-referenced to
    subclasses 670, 678, 680, or 681+ on the basis of the Sn/Group VIII-metal
    interface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    643     and/or 644, to complete a search for this subject matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    220,    Receptacles, various subclasses for miscellaneous receptacles of
    that class.


CLS 428/649
TXT Subject matter under subclass 615 in which a component has 40 percent or
    more of barium, beryllium, calcium, magnesium, radium or strontium, or a
    combination of two or more of these metals.

    (1)     Note.  The mere designation of a base component as an "alkaline
    earth metal" is sufficient for placement in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The term "light metal" is interpreted to mean a
    magnesium-base alloy, an aluminum-base alloy, or an alloy comprising 40
    percent or more of these two metals. In not further explained in the
    claims, a patent claiming a "light-metal" component is placed here and in
    the proper subclass included in 650+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclass 455 for nuclear fuel components in layered form.


CLS 428/650
TXT Subject matter under subclass 615 in which a component contains 40 percent
    or more of aluminum.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclass 275 for coating an aluminum or aluminum
    alloy with a liquid reactive coating composition.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 139, 153, 172+, 190, 201+, 213+,
    233, 237, and 323+ for electrolytic coating processes in which either the
    substrate or an electrolytically coated layer is predominantly aluminum.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 118 for methods directed to the electric
    welding of a dissimilar metal to aluminum.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, subclasses 528+ for an aluminum
    base alloy.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 320 for treatment of a metal substrate
    preparatory to coating aluminum.


CLS 428/651
TXT Subject matter under subclass 650 in which the aluminum-base component is
    adjacent a component containing 40 percent or more of one or more of the
    metals in Groups IVB, VB, or VIB.

    (1)     Note.  For a listing of metals contained in the above-listed
    groups, see the definitions of subclasses 660, 662 and 663.

    (2)     Note.  Patents classified herein are not cross-referenced to
    subclasses 660+ on the basis of the Al/refractory-metal interface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclass 133 for a heat treatment of that class
    involving a refractory-metal-base component.


CLS 428/652
TXT Subject matter under subclass 650 in which the aluminum-base component is
    adjacent a component having 40 percent or more of a Group VIII or IB metal.

    (1)     Note.  Patents classified herein are not cross-referenced to
    subclasses 688+ on the basis of the Al/Group VIII-IB interface.


CLS 428/653
TXT Subject matter under subclass 652 in which the Group VIII metal is iron.

    (1)     Note.  Patents classified herein are not cross-referenced to
    subclasses 681+ on the basis of the Al/Fe interface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, subclasses 77+ and 103 for
    iron-aluminum alloys.


CLS 428/654
TXT Subject matter under subclass 650 in which the aluminum-base component is
    adjacent another component having 40 percent or more of aluminum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    636,    for composites having aluminum-base components of identical
    composition adjacent each other.


CLS 428/655
TXT Subject matter under subclass 615 having a component which contains 40
    percent or more of a transition metal or a combination of transition metals.

    (1)     Note.  The transition elements, as defined in the "Condensed
    Chemical Dictionary", 7th Edition, Reinhold Publishing Company, 1966, page
    958, are:

    "Elements in which an inner electron shell, rather than an outer shell, is
    partially filled. In the periodic table they include elements 21 through 30
    (scandium through zinc), 39 through 48 (yttrium through cadmium), 57
    through 80 (lanthanum through mercury), and 89 through 103 (actinium
    through lawrencium). They are all metals and most possess colored ions,
    variable valency, have a tendency to form complexes, and have large
    magnetic moments."

    Thus, the transition elements include the metals of the periodic table
    groups listed in the subclasses indented hereunder, as well as those
    covered in (2) Note below.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass (655) is the locus for composite materials
    having a component which is 40 percent or more of the Group IIIB metals
    (Sc, Y, the lanthanides and the actinides) and/or the Group VIIB metals
    (Mn, Tc, and Re).

    (3)     Note.  "Franklinite" is considered to be a Mn-base alloy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 245+ for consolidated metal powder compositions in
    which the base metal is one or more transition metals.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclass 455 for a structured, layered, canned or jacketed nuclear fuel
    component.


CLS 428/656
TXT Subject matter under subclass 655 in which a component of a composite
    comprises 40 percent or more of a metal which is permitted by the claims to
    be selected from more than one of the following diverse categories:



    Category A:  Group IIB metals Category B:  Group IIIB metals Category C:
    Refractory (Groups IVB, VB, VIB metals) Category D:  Group VIIB metals
    Category E:  Group VIII or IB metals

    (1)     Note.  Where the selection of the base transition metal is
    restricted to one of the above categories, the patent is not placed here.

    (2)     Note.  Where the composite has a component made of at least three
    metals, none of which is present as more than 40 percent by weight of the
    component, and no combination of metals provided for in a single category
    above is present as more than 40 percent by weight, but in which the total
    of transition metals is 40 percent or more, by weight, it is classified in
    this subclass (656).

    (3)     Note.  This subclass follows the classification and search rules
    for "Markush"- type subclasses set forth in the definition of subclass 643,
    (1) Note and (2) Note.

    (4)     Note.  When a patent is proper for classification in this subclass,
    such classification provides fully for all interfaces between
    transition-metal-base components; however, it may be desirable, when a
    particular metal, alloy, or combination of components, specifically
    provided for in a subclass below, is emphasized, to place a copy of the
    patent in such subclass. Exemplary of such emphasis is the restriction of a
    nonalternative component to a specific alloy or grain structure, a claim to
    only one preferred species of the alternative component, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 305 for treatment of a metal base
    preparatory to coating with nickel, copper, cobalt or chromium.


CLS 428/657
TXT Subject matter under subclass 655 in which a component of the composite
    comprises 40 percent or more of the Group IIB metal(s).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass (657) is the locus for composites having a
    cadmium-base or mercury-base component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    656,    to complete a search for Cd- and Hg-base components.


CLS 428/658
TXT Subject matter under subclass 657 in which the composite has a component
    which is 40 percent or more of zinc.

    (1)     Note.  Although brass is sometimes defined as containing up to 40
    percent zinc, a component described merely as "brass", without a recitation
    that it contains 40 percent or more zinc, is not suitable for
    classification is subclasses 658+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    656,    to complete a search for Zn-base components.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 305+  for coating electrically with
    zinc from an aqueous bath.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, subclasses 513+ for a zinc base
    alloy.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 406 for methods of applying superposed
    diverse coatings or coating a coated substrate involving a zinc coating on
    a metal substrate, and subclass 433 for a method of applying a molten zinc
    coating by immersion.


CLS 428/659
TXT Subject matter under subclass 658 in which the zinc-base component is
    adjacent to a component having 40 percent or more of iron.

    (1)     Note.  The mere designation of a composite as "galvanized" is
    sufficient for placement in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Patents classified herein are not cross-referenced to
    subclasses 681 or 933 on the basis of the Zn/Fe interface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    933,    for composites other than zinc-iron having a sacrificial component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 433 for galvanizing a base by immersion
    into a molten metal bath.


CLS 428/660
TXT Subject matter under subclass 655 in which the composite has a component
    which is 40 percent or more of one or more metals from Groups IVB, VB or
    VIB of the periodic table.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass (660) is the locus for components having a
    base of one or more Group IVB metals (titanium, hafnium or zirconium).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    656     and 661, to complete a search for Ti-, Zr-, and Hf-base components.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclass 133 for heat treatment methods of that
    class directed to refractory metals.


CLS 428/661
TXT Subject matter under subclass 660 in which a component having 40 percent or
    more of Group IVB metal(s), or Group VB metal(s) or Group VIB metal(s) is
    adjacent a component having 40 percent or more metal from another of these
    groups, or in which the claims permit a component base to be selected from
    metals belonging to more than one of these groups.

    (1)     Note.  Patents classified in this subclass are not cross-referenced
    to subclasses 660, 662 or 663.

    (2)     Note.  The mere designation of a component base as a "refractory
    metal" is sufficient for placement in this subclass (661).

    (3)     Note.  This subclass follows the classification and search rules
    for "Markush"- type subclasses set out in the definition of subclass 643,
    (1) Note and (2) Note.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    656,    to complete a search for refractory metal-base components.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclass 133 for a heat-treatment process of that
    class directed to a refractory solid metal or solid alloy.


CLS 428/662
TXT Subject matter under subclass 660 in which a composite has a component
    comprising 40 percent or more of one or more of vanadium, niobium
    (columbium), or tantalum.

    (1)     Note.  Niobium stannite is a niobium-base alloy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    656     and 661, to complete a search for Group VB metal-base components.


CLS 428/663
TXT Subject matter under subclass 660 in which the composite has a component
    containing 40  or more of a Group VIB metal.

    (1)     Note.  This is the locus for patents having a molybdenum-base
    component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    565,    661 and 664, to complete a search for Mo-based components.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclass 245 for a consolidated metal powder composition which
    may be Mo-based.


CLS 428/664
TXT Subject matter under subclass 663 in which a component having 40 percent or
    more of chromium, molybdenum or tungsten is adjacent a component having 40
    percent or more of another of these metals, or in which the claims permit a
    component base to be selected from two or more of these metals, or a
    combination of any two or three of them.

    (1)     Note.  Patents classified in this subclass are not cross-referenced
    to subclasses 663, 665 or 666.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass follows the classification and search rules
    for "Markush"-type subclasses set out in the definition of subclass 643.
    (1) Note and (2) Note.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    656     and 661, to complete a search for Group VIB metal-base components.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, subclass 428 for a chromium base
    alloy, subclasses 430+ for a tungsten base alloy and subclass 429 for a
    molybdenum base alloy.


CLS 428/665
TXT Subject matter under subclass 663 in which the Group VIB metal is tungsten
    (wolfram).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    656,    661 and 664, to complete a search for W-base components.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclass 248 for a consolidated metal powder composition in which
    the base metal is tungsten.


CLS 428/666
TXT Subject matter under subclass 663 in which the Group VIB metal is chromium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    613,    for composite materials having a "microcracked" chromium component
    between other components.

    656,    661 and 664, to complete a search for Cr-based components.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 264+ for processes of reactively
    coating a metal substrate wherein a chromium containing liquid external
    agent combines with a component of the metal substrate to form a coating
    thereon containing a component of the metal substrate.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 178+ for methods of electrolytically
    coating multiple layers, at least one of which is chromium, from an aqueous
    bath, and subclasses 283+ for coating a single Cr layer from such a bath.


CLS 428/667
TXT Subject matter under subclass 666 in which the chromium-base component is
    adjacent a component having 40 percent  or more of cobalt, iron or nickel,
    or a combination of two or more of these metals.

    (1)     Note.  Patents classified in this subclass are not cross-referenced
    to subclasses 668, 678, 680, or 681+ on the basis of the Cr/Co-Fe-Ni
    interface.


CLS 428/668
TXT Subject matter under subclass 655 in which the transition metal is from
    Group VIII or IB of the periodic table.

    (1)     Note.  For a list of metals included in this grouping, see the
    definition of subclass 637.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is the locus for patents having a cobalt-base
    component which are not properly placeable in subclasses 675, 678 and 679.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    657,    678 and 679, to complete a search for cobalt-base components.


CLS 428/669
TXT Subject matter under subclass 668 in which a component of a composite
    comprises 40 percent or more of a metal which may be either a Group IB
    metal or a platinum-group metal.

    (1)     Note.  See the definition of subclass 670 for the scope of
    "platinum-group metal".

    (2)     Note.  Where the selection of the base metal is restricted to a
    metal within a Group IB or within the platinum group, the patent is not
    placed here.

    (3)     Note.  Where a composite has a component made of at least three
    metals, none of which is present as 40 percent or more, but in which a
    combination which necessarily includes a Group IB metal and a platinum
    group metal does total 40 percent or more, the patent is classified here.

    (4)     Note.  Patents classified here are not cross-referenced to
    subclasses 670+, 672, 673, or 674.

    (5)     Note.  The designation of the base metal as merely a "precious
    metal" or a "noble metal" in any claim is sufficient for classification
    here, despite (2) Note and (3) Note.

    (6)     Note.  The classification and search rules for this subclass are
    the same as the "Markush"-type subclass rules set out in the definition of
    subclass 643, (1) Note and (2) Note.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    656,    to complete a search for components having a base of Group IB or
    platinum metals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    63,     Jewelry, appropriate subclasses for articles, generally composed of
    precious metals, intended to be worn upon the person as ornaments.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 125 for a process of coating a base
    with silver, gold, platinum, or palladium to produce an electrical product.


CLS 428/670
TXT Subject matter under subclass 668 having a component comprising 40 percent
    or more of one or more metals from Group VIII, periods 5 or 6 of the
    periodic table, that is, platinum, iridium, osmium, palladium, rhodium,
    and/or ruthenium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    656     and 669, to complete a search for platinum metal-base components.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclass 264  for a process directed to
    electrolytically coating a substrate with platinum from an aqueous bath.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, subclasses 466+ for a platinum
    base alloy.


CLS 428/671
TXT Subject matter under subclass 668 in which a component may contain 40
    percent or more of copper, or, alternatively to the copper, 40  or more of
    gold, nickel, or silver.

    (1)     Note.  Copper must be one of the alternative metals for placement
    in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Where the component contains some, but less that 40 percent
    copper, less than 40 percent total gold and silver, and less than 40
    percent nickel, but where the total of these four metals is 40 percent or
    more, the patent is classified here.

    (3)     Note.  Patents classified here are not  cross-referenced to
    subclasses 672, 673, 674, or 680.

    (4)     Note.  The classification and search rules for this subclass are
    the same as the "markush"-type subclass rules set out in the definition of
    subclass 643, (1) Note and (2) Note.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    656,    to complete a search for a component having a base of copper, gold,
    nickel, or silver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, subclasses 507+ for a gold base
    alloy.


CLS 428/672
TXT Subject matter under subclass 668 in which a component contains 40 percent
    or more of gold.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    656,    669 and 671, to complete a search for gold-base components.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 247+ for methods of electrolytically
    coating a substrate with a gold-base alloy from an aqueous bath, and
    subclasses 266+ for coating with gold, per se, from such a bath.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, subclasses 507+ for a gold base
    alloy.


CLS 428/673
TXT Subject matter under subclass 668 in which a component contains 40 percent
    or more of silver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    656,    669 and 671, to complete a search for Ag-base components.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclass 71 for processes of making mirrors and
    reflectors by electro-forming, and subclass 116 for the production of
    mirrors and reflectors by electrodeposition of metallic silver upon a
    substrate of specific form or configuration.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, subclasses 501+ for a silver base
    alloy.


CLS 428/674
TXT Subject matter under subclass 668 in which a component contains 40 percent
    or more of copper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    618,    656, 669, and 671, to complete a search for copper-base components.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, appropriate subclasses for processes of treating
    solid or semi-solid metal to modify or maintain the internal physical
    structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical properties of metal.  If metal
    casting, fusion bonding, machining, or working is involved, there is a
    requirement of significant heat treatment as described in section III, A,
    of the Class 148 definition.  Class 148, subclasses 240+, for processes of
    reactively coating a metal substrate wherein an external agent combines
    with a component of the metal substrate to form a coating thereon
    containing a component of the metal substrate.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 239+ for coating a substrate with an
    alloy of copper from an aqueous bath, and subclasses 291+ for such a
    coating process with copper, per se.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, subclasses 469+ for a copper base
    alloy.


CLS 428/675
TXT Subject matter under subclass 674 in which the copper-base component is
    adjacent a component which contains 40 percent or more of cobalt, copper,
    or nickel.

    (1)     Note.  Where the adjacent component contains less than 40 percent
    cobalt or copper, but the combination of these two metals is 40 percent or
    more, the patent is classified in this subclass (675); where this same
    situation exists with regard to the combination of copper with nickel, see
    subclass 671.

    (2)     Note.  Patents classified herein are not cross-referenced to
    subclasses 668, 678, or 680 on the basis of the Cu/Co-Ni interface.


CLS 428/676
TXT Subject matter under subclass 674 in which the copper-base component is
    adjacent a component containing 40 percent or more of iron.

    (1)     Note.  Patents classified herein are not cross-referenced to
    subclasses 678 or 681 on the basis of the Cu-Fe interface.


CLS 428/677
TXT Subject matter under subclass 676 in which the iron-base component contains
    0.01-1.7 percent carbon.

    (1)     Note.  The mere designation of the iron-base component as "steel"
    is sufficient for classification herein.


CLS 428/678
TXT Subject matter under subclass 668 in which the claims permit a component
    base to be selected from more than one of iron, nickel or cobalt, or in
    which neither of these three metals is present as 40 percent or more of the
    component, but a combination of any two or the three of them is.

    (1)     Note.  Patents classified here are not cross-referenced to
    subclasses 668, 680, or 681.

    (2)     Note.  A component base designated merely as "an iron-group metal"
    is classified herein.

    (3)     Note.  The rules for classification and search of this subclass are
    the same as those set for "Markush"-type subclasses in the definition of
    subclass 643, (1) Note and (2) Note.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions,  subclasses 255+ for processes of
    electrolytically coating a substrate with a Group VIII metal-base alloy
    from an aqueous bath, and subclasses 269, 270 and 271+ for the same type
    process directed to a single metal selected from the iron group.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, subclasses 8+ for an iron base
    alloy, subclasses 435+ for a cobalt base alloy, subclasses 580+ for alloys
    in which no single metal exceeds 50 percent of the composition.


CLS 428/679
TXT Subject matter under subclass 668 in which a component having 40 percent or
    more of cobalt, iron, or nickel is adjacent a component having 40 percent
    or more of iron.

    (1)     Note.  Patents classified herein are not cross-referenced to
    subclasses 668, 681m or 684+ on the basis of the Co-Ni/Fe interface.


CLS 428/680
TXT Subject matter under subclass 668 in which a component of the composite
    comprises 40 percent or more of nickel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    656,    671, 678, and 679, to complete a search for Ni-base components.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclass 675 for processes of treating solid or
    semi-solid metal to modify or maintain the internal physical structure
    (i.e., microstructure) or chemical properties of nickel.  If metal casting,
    fusion bonding, machining, or working is involved, there is a requirement
    for significant heat treatment as described in section III, A, of the Class
    148 definition.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 271+ for electrolytically coating a
    substrate with nickel from an aqueous bath.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 438 for electroless deposition of a
    nickel coating on a metal base.


CLS 428/681
TXT Subject matter under subclass 668 in which a component has 40 percent or
    more of iron.

    (1)     Note.  A component designated merely as a "ferrous base metal" is
    classified in this subclass (681).

    (2)     Note.  To complete a search for a Fe-base component, subclasses 656
    and 678 must be searched, as well as the appropriate subclasses selected
    from subclasses 619, 644, 648, 653, 659, 667, 676+, and 679+.

    (3)     Note.  The patents classified in this subclass (681) and subclasses
    684 and 685 as originals are those claiming composite materials, wherein a
    component is defined as a Fe-base component and adjacent components are
    metals of unspecified composition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 206-238 for processes of carburizing,
    nitriding, or both (i.e., carbonitriding, etc.) of solid metal, and
    subclasses 316-319 for the resulting stock.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, subclasses 8+ for iron base alloys.


CLS 428/682
TXT Subject matter under subclass 679 in which both adjacent components are
    iron-base.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    619     and 638, to complete a search for adjacent iron-base components.


CLS 428/683
TXT Subject matter under subclass 682 in which both components contain 0.01 to
    1.7 percent carbon.

    (1)     Note.  The mere designation of the components as "steel" is
    sufficient for classification herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    619,    638 and 682, to complete a search for this subject matter.


CLS 428/684
TXT Subject matter under subclass 681 in which the iron-base component contains
    0.01 to 1.7 percent  carbon.

    (1)     Note.  The mere designation of a component as "steel" is sufficient
    for classification in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    619,    to complete a search for this subject matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 4.51+ for shredding metal or metal wool
    article making.

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclass 84 for butcher's steel.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 543-545 and 612-618 for processes of
    treating solid iron based alloys containing greater than 1.7 per cent
    carbon to modify or maintain the internal physical structure (i.e.,
    microstructure) or chemical properties of metal.  If metal casting, fusion
    bonding, machining, or working is involved, there is a requirement of
    significant heat treatment as described in section III, A, of the Class 148
    definition.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Composition, subclasses 8+ for iron base alloys
    which may contain carbon, e.g., steel.


CLS 428/685
TXT Subject matter under subclass 684 in which the iron-base component also
    contains more than 10 percent of other material.

    (1)     Note.  The mere designation of a component as "stainless steel" or
    "high alloy steel" is sufficient for classification herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    619,    to complete a search for this subject matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 433+ for producing Iron(Fe) or treating molten metal
    that contains over 50 per cent by weight Iron.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 542, 592, 597, and 605-611 for
    processes of treating solid iron based alloys containing greater than 9
    percent chromium to modify or maintain the internal physical structure
    (i.e., microstructure) or chemical properties of metal.  If metal casting,
    fusion bonding, machining, or working is involved, there is a requirement
    of significant heat treatment as described in section III, A, of the Class
    148 definition.


CLS 428/686
TXT Subject matter under subclass 615 in which adjacent components of a
    composite are claimed, not in terms of their composition, but in terms of
    the properties of the components, their past histories, etc., e.g., "a
    solid layer", etc.


CLS 428/687
TXT Subject matter under subclass 544 wherein an exposed surface of the
    material has a particular claimed physical configuration or structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    409     and 543, for a nonmetallic* sheet or web having a particular
    claimed surface property or characteristic.

    564,    for stock-material* having a nonparticulate metal component and a
    particulate component which contains nonmetal particles, e.g., abrasive
    particles.

    927,    for a collection of patents concerning metallic* stock-material*
    having a surface which is decorative or informative.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 90.01+ for burnishing processes.

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, for such
    invention.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclass 231 for consolidated metal powder compositions
    containing a functionally defined component, e.g., an abrasive.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclass 32.5 for a composition
    of that class having an erasable surface, and subclass 36 for a composition
    having a friction or tractive surface.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    18 for etching of a metal base.


CLS 428/688
TXT Of inorganic material:

    Subject matter under subclass 411.1 in which at least one layer is
    comprised of inorganic material(s).

    (1)     Note.  Organo-metallic compounds are not considered inorganic
    compounds and are not a basis for classification in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    432+,   for a laminate having a quartz or glass layer.

    466+,   for a silicon-containing layer other than glass or quartz.

    469+,   for a laminate of a free metal or alloy next to a metal salt or
    oxide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses for an
    inorganic compound, per se.


CLS 428/689
TXT Metal-compound-containing layer:
    Subject matter under subclass 688 in which at least one layer comprises a
    compound of a metal.

    (1)     Note.  The following elements are defined as nonmetals in Class
    423:  the inert gases, boron, the halogens, hydrogen, nitrogen, carbon,
    oxygen, phosphorus, silicon, sulfur, selenium, and tellurium; all other
    elements are considered to be metals.


CLS 428/690
TXT Fluorescent, phosphorescent, or luminescent layer:

    Subject matter under subject 689 in which a layer or component thereof
    exhibits natural or artificially induced fluorescence, phosphorescence or,
    luminescence metallic.


CLS 428/691
TXT Halogen-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 689 in which the product contains fluorine,
    chlorine, bromine, or iodine in free or combined from.


CLS 428/692
TXT Defined magnetic layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 689 in which a layer or component thereof has
    disclosed properties which include magnetic susceptibility.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    900,    for an article having a magnetic feature.


CLS 428/693
TXT Next to second metal-compound-containing layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 692 wherein the magnetic component is in a
    metal-compound-containing layer next to another metal-compound-containing
    layer.


CLS 428/694
TXT Dynamic recording medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 692 which has a use as a recording medium,
    e.g., tape, disc, etc., which is "read" by using relative motion between
    the medium and the reading device and wherein the composition of a backing
    or support material is not defined in the claims.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 134 for
    a recording tape having material recorded thereon.


CLS 428/695
TXT With lubricant in or on layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 694 which has, either in or on the magnetic
    layer, a material disclosed a shaving a lubricant function.


CLS 428/696
TXT Halogen-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 689 containing halogen in any form, e.g.,
    chloride, oxyfluoride, etc.


CLS 428/697
TXT Layer contain compound(s) of plural metals:

    Subject matter under subclass 689 om which a single
    metal-compound-containing layer comprises two or more different metal
    compounds or two or more metals within a single compound.


CLS 428/698
TXT Carbide-, nitride-, or sulfide-containing layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 689 in which a layer contains a carbide,
    nitride, or sulfide compound.


CLS 428/699
TXT Next to second metal-compound-containing layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 689 in which two different
    metal-compound-containing layers are adjacent to each other.


CLS 428/700
TXT Single crystal:

    Subject matter under subclass 699 in which at least one
    metal-compound-containing layer is claimed as comprising a single crystal.


CLS 428/701
TXT O-containing metal compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 699 in which at least one layer contains a
    metal compound having oxygen in any form, e.g., oxide, sulfate, carbonate,
    etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    702,    for an oxygen-containing metal compound layer not next to a second
    metal-compound-containing layer.


CLS 428/702
TXT O-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 689 containing oxygen in any form.


CLS 428/703
TXT Water-settable material (e.g., gypsum, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 702 in which the oxygen-containing layer is a
    water-setting material such as gypsum, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 638+ for a
    water-settable composition, per se.


CLS 428/704
TXT Of B, N, P, S, or metal-containing material:  Subject matter under subclass
    411.1 wherein the composite contains boron, phosphorus, or sulfur in free
    or combined organic form, an organic nitrogen compound or an organic metal
    compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304.4+, for a composites material containing elemental nitrogen or another
    gas.

    457+    and 615+, for composites having a layer of free metal.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS

    The following subclasses are collections of published disclosures
    pertaining to various specified aspects of the stock material art which
    aspects do not form appropriate bases for subclasses in the foregoing
    classification (i.e., subclasses superior hereto in the schedule), wherein
    original copies of patents are placed on the basis of the structure or
    chemical composition of a layer* or layers*. These subclasses assist a
    search based on remote function or physical characteristic of the stock
    material and may be of further assistance to the searcher, either as a
    starting point in searching this class or as an indication of further
    related fields of search inside or outside the class.Thus, there is here
    provided a further path of access for retrieval of a limited number of
    types of disclosures.

    (1)     Note.  Disclosures are placed in these subclasses for their value
    as references and as leads to appropriate main or secondary fields of
    search, without regard to their original classification or their claimed
    subject matter.

    (2)     Note.  The disclosures found in the following subclasses are
    examples, only, of the indicated subject matter, and in no instance do they
    represent the entire extent of the prior art.


CLS 428/900
TXT Stock material product which (1) produces magnetic of force and due to such
    lines of force is acted upon, or acts upon another part or object, to
    produce an effect, or (2) is acted upon by magnetic lines of force produced
    by another object.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 62.51 for magnetic compositions.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 296+.

    336,    Inductor Devices, subclasses 233+ for a magnet, or magnetic
    material including structure, (e.g., lamination of at least two magnetic
    layers) disclosed as a core for a coil, i.e., transformer or inductor
    device.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, appropriate
    subclasses, for a layered product which is uniquely designed to store or
    record information by a change or variation in magnetic state of the device.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 152+ for the method of making a
    product having magnetic features by applying a magnetic coating to a base
    or by applying a coating to a magnetic base.


CLS 428/901
TXT Stock material product which is an electric circuit formed by applying
    conductive material in a predetermined pattern onto an insulating sheet as
    printing with electrically conductive ink, by electroplating, by etching,
    coating, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 846+ for miscellaneous methods of making
    printed circuits.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 250+ for a
    preformed circuit on a planiform insulator.

    216,    Etching a  Substrate:  Processes, subclasses 13+ for processes not
    otherwise provided for involving etching in the manufacturing of electric
    circuits.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 96 for a process of making a printed
    circuit including a coating step.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 55+ for an electrical connector
    comprising or combined with a panel circuit arrangement, e.g., a printed
    circuit board.


CLS 428/902
TXT Stock material product comprising a fiber* or filament* specifically
    designed to have a high tensile or breaking strength.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    366     and 367+, for a filament* or fiber* made of boron or a compound
    thereof or of carbon or a carbide (usually silicon carbide), which fiber*
    or filament* is generally of the high-modulus type.


CLS 428/903
TXT Stock material product comprising a fiber* or filament* having a diameter
    less than 100 microns or approximately 4 mils.


CLS 428/903.3
TXT RECYCLED MATERIALS:

    Patents disclosing stock materials made, at least in part, from material,
    or articles previously used, or salvaged from scrap, or waste.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for trash, or refuse which has been compacted for ready disposal.

    576,    for a package of metal scrap suitable for melting.


CLS 428/904
TXT Stock material product which comprises a manmade web* or sheet* which looks
    and feels like a natural tanned animal skin (leather).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151,    for a web or sheet having an artificially made leather grain
    surface.

    473,    for a laminated product comprising a layer* of natural animal skin
    or membrane.


CLS 428/904.4
TXT WALL AND SHELF COVERING:

    Patents disclosing stock materials specially adapted to be used for
    covering vertical surfaces, or horizontal surfaces not subject to floor, or
    vehicle traffic.


CLS 428/905
TXT Stock material which is, or incorporates therein a material which
    disseminates or distributes into the ambient an aroma or scent either by
    diffusion or unhurried vaporization or by fracturing a capsule containing
    the aromatic or scent material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    307,    for a composite* or sheet* in which one component* is porous or
    cellular* and in which there is a liquid (which may be aromatic or scented)
    in encapsulated form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 34+ for a
    slow diffuser, per se, i.e., one which spreads or disperses material into
    the ambient by (1) vaporization from an open container or holder (2)
    capillary porous or wick type feed, (3) by mere drip through the air, or
    (4) by sublimation, all due to being exposed to the ambient air without the
    use of forced draft; see the search notes in that subclass (239/34*) for
    other similar art.


CLS 428/906
TXT Stock material product which has been rolled or coiled upon itself as in
    the case of a coil of wire or roll of pressure sensitive tape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    343+,   for a composite*, sheet*, web* or tape which has an adhesive
    outermost layer (e.g., pressure sensitive tape) and may be in the form of a
    roll.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 389+ for a stock material
    in the form of a roll or coil which has a feature significant for a roll,
    e.g., mandrel structure, cover structure, modified outer layer, etc; see
    Search Note to Class 206 in class definition, VI, Relation to Certain Other
    Classes.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 177 for a process of applying a coating
    or impregnation to a material, combined with the step of rolling or coiling
    the material on itself.


CLS 428/906.6
TXT EMBROIDERY:

    Patents disclosing stock material having decorative needlework.


CLS 428/907
TXT Stock material product which has been treated so as to minimize it being
    affected by germs, fungus, rodents or other animals (land, air or sea).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses, for a named product or article treated by a specific
    composition, or by a method of that class where no structure is recited for
    classification elsewhere. An article treated, coated or impregnated with a
    Class 424 composition and which composition functions only to preserve the
    article from biological attack, is generally classified with the particular
    article protected.


CLS 428/907.7
TXT LAYER OR ARTICLE RENDERED LIGHT-TRANSMISSIVE BY PRESSURE (E.G., BLUSHED,
    ETC.):

    Collection of patents which disclose subject matter of this class wherein
    an article or a layer of a composite can be changed from an opaque state to
    a transparent or translucent state by the application of pressure.


CLS 428/908
TXT Stock material product which is susceptible of deformation and which will
    maintain said deformation, due to either the structure of the product or
    the material(s) employed in its manufacture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 272+ for
    records having dynamic information modulated groove structure.


CLS 428/908.8
TXT WEAR-RESISTANT LAYER:

    Patents disclosing stock material having an outer surface specially
    formulated to stand up under conditions of severe abrasion.


CLS 428/909
TXT Stock material product which is susceptible of deformation when a load is
    applied and which will recover its original shape when said load is
    removed, due to either the structure thereof or the material(s) employed in
    its manufacture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304+,   especially 310+ for a composite* sheet* or web* comprising a porous
    or cellular* component* which is usually a foam and is resilient.


CLS 428/910
TXT Stock material product in which long chain polymeric molecules have been
    realigned in a material while in the solid state.

    (1)     Note.  The term, "stock material product includes web(s)*,
    sheet(s)*, non-structural laminate(s), fiber(s)*, strand(s)*, etc.

    (2)     Note.  The physical treatment generally employed for molecular
    orientation is: applying tension under controlled conditions to a polymeric
    composition (consequently such products are also called "stretch-oriented").

    SEARCH CLASS:

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, appropriate subclass indented under
    subclass 2, for a synthetic organic resin, which may include
    stretch-oriented molecules or have been molecularly oriented.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    483+ for an optical system (e.g., filters, etc.) in which the molecules
    oriented for an optical purpose (e.g., polarization, etc.).


CLS 428/911
TXT Stock material product which includes structure and/or material adapted to
    prevent passage therethrough of an alien object.

    (1)     Note.  This collection will receive disclosures of bullet-proof
    glass, material for bullet-proof vests, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34.1+,  for a container type article which may have a layer* resistant to
    penetration.

    912,    for a disclosure of puncture-healing stock material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 2.5 for an article of clothing which is
    penetration-resistant and subclasses 410+ for guards and protectors for the
    head; especially, subclasses 6.6+ for a soldier's helmet.

    89,     Ordnance, subclass 36 for a deflecting or penetration-resistant
    shield not elsewhere provided for; and see the search notes to that
    subclass.

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclasses 78+ for
    armored walls and panels.


CLS 428/912
TXT Stock material product so constructed as to tend to close or seal any
    opening which might be made in it by a pointed object, such as a bullet or
    nail.

    (1)     Note.  The "self-sealing" function is usually provided by a layer*
    of material which tends to flow or swell so as to fill the opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34.1+,  for a container type article which may have a puncture healing
    layer*.

    911,    for disclosures relating to penetration resistant stock material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers,  subclass 55 for
    "self-healing" receptacles made of flexible material such as cloth, rubber
    or plastic.

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 415 for a spaced wall metallic receptacle
    including puncture-healing structure, and subclass 900 for a lined metallic
    receptacle having such property.


CLS 428/912.2
TXT MIRROR:

    Patents disclosing stock material specially designed to reflect light
    images.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    838+ for mirror structure.


CLS 428/913
TXT Stock material in which at least one constituent* is disposed to respond to
    a stimulus in a predetermined manner to produce a desired result.

    (1)     Note.  The result may be due to the cooperative responses, to their
    respective stimuli, of several constituents of the stock material occurring
    either simultaneously or consecutively (e.g., a chain reaction).

    (2)     Note.  This collection is not intended to receive a disclosure
    which merely indicates a melting or softening at a particular temperature;
    but as exemplary of the disclosures to which this collection is restricted
    are:  a layer which becomes opaque or transparent when subjected to light
    or heat to vary transmission of the light, a constituent which evolves CO2
    gas when heated to a certain temperature in order to extinguish fire, or an
    adhesive which releases its bond between layers and allows insulating air
    spaces to form when the stock material is heated to a certain temperature.

    (3)     Note.  Excluded from this collection are light sensitive materials
    of the type found in Class 430: a heat or light polymerizable material of
    the type found in Class 260, subclasses 2+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for a stock material product comprising a liquid crystal which
    usually responds to varying temperature, light or electrical potential to
    produce a change therein.


CLS 428/913.3
TXT DECORATIVE ARTICLE FOR VIEWING FROM ONE SIDE ONLY (E.G., PLAQUE, ETC.):

    Patents disclosing decorative articles having clearly defined thickness and
    nonthickness surfaces, the decorative aspects of the article generally
    being confined to one of the nonthickness surfaces.


CLS 428/914
TXT Stock material product which comprises a portion capable of being removed
    therefrom and moved to and adhered to another surface either as small
    pieces or as a complete film.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    462,    Books, Strips, and Leaves for Manifolding, subclasses 69+ for a
    system comprising plural sheets one of which is a transfer sheet and the
    other a record receiver.


CLS 428/915
TXT Stock material product under the definition of subclass 914 in which the
    purpose of the transfer or decalcomania is to indicate whether or not it or
    something else (1) has been touched without authority or (2) is genuine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199,    for a product having a coating or impregnation which will indicate
    attempts at erasure or alteration.

    488,    for a product comprising a layer of paper and a transferable
    substance containing a pigment, dye or a color forming reagent, e.g.,
    carbon or hectograph paper.


CLS 428/916
TXT Stock material product which provides means for determining whether it or
    something else (1) has been touched without authority or (2) is genuine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29+,    for an article having a latent image which must be treated in some
    way to develop or bring out the image.

    199,    for a product having a nonuniform coating or impregnation which
    will indicate attempts at erasure or alteration.

    915,    for a transfer or decalcomania useful for preventing or indicating
    fraud or for indicating unauthorized use of a product.


CLS 428/917
TXT Stock material product which emits light due to passage of an electric
    current therethrough or in contact therewith, and is usually produced by a
    phosphor treated surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, subclass 25 for processes
    involving etching in the manufacturing of phosphor devices.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 66 for a coating process which produces
    an electro-luminescent lamp.


CLS 428/918
TXT Stock material product in which at least a portion contains a substance
    which is normally nontransparent but which in this product has been made
    transparent

    (1)     Note.  Exemplary of the disclosures in this collection are paper,
    impregnated with a material of such refractive index that the paper becomes
    transparent; ground glass* or glass fibers*, embedded in a material with a
    refractive index such that the composite mass is rendered transparent; and
    a metal foil or layer thin enough to see through.

    (2)     Note.  Materials, as glass*, cellophane and the product sold under
    the trade mark "Lucite*" or "Plexiglas*" are normally transparent and would
    not be appropriate for this collection. If, however, any of the
    aforementioned (or other) normally transparent materials are disclosed in
    an opaque form with further treatment to restore transparency (e.g, the
    embedded ground glass of (1) Note above), placement of the disclosure in
    this subclass would be proper.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    580+ for optical elements having a metallic coating which produces
    interference effects.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 161 for a coating process which
    increases the transparency of a material.


CLS 428/919
TXT Stock material product which is caused to be invisible or indistinguishable
    at a distance by a particular combination of colors or paints or through
    its resemblance to the surroundings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195+,   for a product which has a discontinuous or nonuniform coating
    similar to a camouflaged article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses, for
    compositions used to camouflage an article.

    114,    Ships, subclass 15 for a warship so rendered invisible or
    indistinguishable.

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclass 115 for canopies which
    may be camouflaged to hide articles thereunder.

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclasses containing "nonuniform"
    or "variegated" in their titles as for example subclasses  261+, 280+, 299,
    448, 466+, 504, 510+, 526, 552, 555+, etc.,     for processes of coating an
    article, which may result in camouflage.


CLS 428/920
TXT Stock material product which is made so as to afford some defense against
    heat or fire, such as insulation or fire retardation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35+,    for a tube type article of heat insulation not otherwise provided
    for.

    386,    407, 432+, 457+, and 539, for other products which include a
    refractory metal or compound thereof which have a fire, heat or flame
    proofing feature.

    443,    for a laminated product comprising asbestos which acts to protect
    against heat or fire.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 5, 7, and 8 for a heat resistant head covering
    for a person.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, for an insulation in the form of pipe
    covering of specific structure.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, appropriate subclasses for apparatus which acts
    to extinguish fires, or which act in anticipation of fire conditions to
    prevent fires.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 2+ for a composition which may be used to
    extinguish fires or as a coating or impregnation to act as a defense
    against fire or flame.


CLS 428/921
TXT Stock material product under subclass 920 in which the product prevents
    fire or a flame from passing therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34.1+,  for a tube type article of heat insulation not provided for
    elsewhere.

    386,    404+, 432+, 457+, and 539, for other products which include a
    refractory metal or a compound thereof and which thus possess a fire, heat
    or flame protection feature.

    442,    for a laminated stock material product including asbestos which
    acts to protect against fire or heat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 141+ for a textile, cloth, or fabric impregnated with a
    phosphorus containing material which protects against fire or flame.


CLS 428/922
TXT Stock material product which contains a free metal element therein or
    associated therewith to discharge harmlessly any accumulated static
    electricity charge or to prevent such charge from accumulating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85+,    for a pile or nap type surface article (e.g., carpet, etc.) which
    may contain other types of static electricity bleed off or antistatic
    material.


CLS 428/923
TXT This and the indented subclasses are collections of published disclosures
    pertaining to physical dimensions of metallic* stock-materials*.

    (1)     Note.  The physical dimensions may be recited in terms of a
    standard unit of measurement or in terms of relative amounts. Also, the
    recitation may be in terms of weight or other parameter which can be
    converted mathematically into a dimension.

    (2)     Note.  Disclosures are placed in these subclasses for their value
    as references, without regard to their original classification or their
    claimed subject matter.

    (3)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses should not be considered
    complete collections of patents relating to their subject matter.

    (4)     Note.  Patents should not be cross-referenced to this or its
    indented subclasses on the basis of the physical dimension of a nonmetal
    component*, but rather, should be cross-referenced to subclasses mentioned
    in the search notes which provide for nonmetallic* stock-materials*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219     and 220, for nonmetallic* stock-material* in which weight or an
    overall physical dimension is specified.

    606+,   for foils and filaments smaller than 6 mils in overall dimension.


CLS 428/924
TXT Disclosures under subclass 923 which recite a physical dimension, usually
    thickness, of composite* metallic* stock.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219     and 220, for nonmetallic* composite* stock-material* in which
    weight or an overall dimension is specified.


CLS 428/925
TXT Disclosures under subclass 924 wherein the dimension recited is a
    quantitative relationship between one layer and another layer, or between
    one layer and the entire stock-material*, e.g., one layer is one-half the
    thickness of a second layer, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213+,   332+, and 340+, for a nonmetallic* composite* in which the
    dimension or weight of a component is recited.


CLS 428/926
TXT Disclosures under subclass 923 in which the dimension of one or more layers
    is recited relative to a standard measure of quantity, e.g., one layer is
    0.002 inches thick, etc.

    (1)     Note.  If one layer is recited as "a foil", cross-referencing here
    is proper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215+,   332+, and 340+, for a nonmetallic* composite* in which the absolute
    dimension or weight of a component is recited.


CLS 428/927
TXT Cross-reference collection concerned with metal stock-materials* disclosed
    as having an appearance or other psychological effect which conveys
    information or is designed to be esthetically pleasing.

    (1)     Note.  See the notes to the main class definition of this class
    (428), section VI, C, 3, d, for the loci of other related subject matter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for an article having ornamental wound or woven strands.

    141+,   156+, 175+, and 195+, for a sheet or web having a textured surface,
    varying thickness, nonplanarity or discontinuous or differential coating,
    impregnation or bond, and which may have an ornamental design or indicia,
    in particular, subclass 187.

    687,    for metallic* stock-material* having a defined surface
    characteristic.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    283,    Printed Matter, appropriate subclasses for books, strips, leaves
    and articles of conventional structure bearing indicia.


CLS 428/928
TXT Cross-reference collection in which the metallic* stock-material* or a
    component* thereof is ferromagnetic, that is, has a high magnetic
    permeability which varies with the magnetizing force upon it.

    (1)     Note.  See the notes to subclass 611 of this class (428) for loci
    of related subject matter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    900,    for a nonmetallic* product having a magnetic feature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 131 for processes of applying
    superposed diverse coatings, or coating a coated base, either base of
    coating being magnetic.


CLS 428/929
TXT Cross-reference collection in which the metallic* stock is designed for use
    in electrical switches or other make-and-break electric circuit components.

    (1)     Note.  See the notes in the definition of subclass 616 of this
    class (428), and the main class definition, section VI, C, 4, for loci of
    other related subject matter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    616,    for bimetallic contact stock which is deflectable by a temperature
    change.


CLS 428/930
TXT Cross-reference collection in which the metallic* stock or a component
    thereof has the property of abnormally low or absent electric resistance at
    temperatures which approach absolute zero.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    662,    for composites having a niobium stannite component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, subclass 901 for a cross-reference
    collection of superconductive alloys.


CLS 428/931
TXT Cross-reference collection of composite* metallic* materials in which the
    components of the material differ from each other in their electrical
    conductivity.

    (1)     Note.  See the main class definitions of this class (428), section
    VI, C, 4, for loci of other related subject matter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    686,    for composites which are defined in terms of the function of
    adjacent components.


CLS 428/932
TXT Cross-reference collection in which the metallic* stock-material* has
    properties particularly suiting the material for use as a cutting or
    abrading medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    600+,   for metallic* stock having a tapering, knifelike edge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 346 for cutlery materials.

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, for an
    abrading composition in general.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclass 231 for consolidated metal powder compositions
    containing an abrading component.

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 125, 141, and 166 for dental abrading devices.


CLS 428/933
TXT Cross-reference collection of metallic* composites having a component which
    is consumed or consumable in preventing electrolytic corrosion of another
    component.

    (1)     Note.  Patents classified in subclass 659 are not cross-referenced
    here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 80+ for electrolytic coating
    methods.


    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 437 and the definitions thereto, for
    electroless metal plating processes.


CLS 428/934
TXT Cross-reference collection in which metallic* stock-material* is made by a
    process which employs electricity, e.g., electric arc welding, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    273.1 for surface bonding methods with direct application of electrical or
    radiant energy to work.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 50+ for welding by electric heating.


CLS 428/935
TXT Cross-reference collection under subclass 934 in which electrolysis is the
    process involved and the electrolysis results in coating one metal with
    another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 80+ for processes of electrolytic
    coating.


CLS 428/936
TXT Cross-reference collection in which the metallic* stock is manufactured by
    reduction of a metal compound contained in a solution, and precipitation of
    the resulting free metal on a substrate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 437 for an immersion-type coating
    method directed to the electroless deposition of a free metal onto a metal
    base.


CLS 428/937
TXT Cross-reference collection in which the metallic* stock is made by spraying
    metal, in molten form, onto a substrate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 223 for a process in which a coating or
    a substrate to be coated is subjected to a flame and subclass 446+ for
    spraying utilizing a flame or plasma.


CLS 428/938
TXT Cross-reference collection in which metallic* stock is made by depositing
    metal onto a substrate from a gas or vapor containing the metal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 99 for vapor deposition coating an
    integrated or printed circuit and subclass 124 for vapor deposition using a
    vacuum.


CLS 428/939
TXT Cross-reference collection in which the metallic* stock is made by
    contacting a substrate with a molten mass of a coating metal, e.g.,
    welding, soldering, dipping, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 50+ for methods of that class
    resulting in melting and fusion of a metal.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 101+ for nonelectric welding and
    soldering processes.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 431 for an immersion-type coating
    process utilizing a molten metal.


CLS 428/940
TXT Cross-reference collection in which a composite metallic* stock-material*
    is made by pressure, that is, without the application of enough heat, as
    heat, to cause bonding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 95 for percussive bonding methods of
    that class.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 107+, 110.1+, 112.1+, and 115+ for
    corresponding methods of that class.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 587 and 593 for a process in which
    sonic or ultrasonic energy is applied directly to the work.


CLS 428/941
TXT Cross-reference collection in which a metallic* stock is made by heating a
    layered stock-material* for a time and at a temperature sufficient to cause
    one of the original layers to disappear by diffusion into an adjacent layer
    or layers of the stock.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    547     and 610, for metallic* stock-materials* having a composition
    gradient, often due to a diffusion process.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 516+ for processes of treating layered,
    bonded, welded or mechanically engaged solid metal stock or article to
    modify or maintain the internal physical structure (i.e., microstructure)
    or chemical properties of metal.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, for alloy or metallic compositions

    FOREIGN ART COLLECTIONS

    The definitions for FOR 100-FOR 116 below correspond to the definitions of
    the abolished subclasses (292-303, 311.1, 311.3, 311.5, 311.7, 311.9) under
    Class 428 from which these collections were formed.  See the Foreign Art
    Collection schedule for specific correspondences.  [Note:  The titles and
    definitions for indented art collections include all the details of the
    one(s) that are hierarchically superior.]


CLS 428/FOR100
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product wherein (1) one or more
    strands or strand-portions* are attached to or incorporated in the body of
    the web or sheet in such a manner as to be independent of entanglement with
    contiguous strands or strand-portions* or (2) wherein such strands or
    strand-portions*, when so disposed, constitute the web or sheet.


CLS 428/FOR101
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product wherein the web or sheet
    comprises a fiber containing layer or component.


CLS 428/FOR102
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product wherein the strands or
    strand-portions lie in a single layer either in side-by-side or
    equidistantly spaced relation throughout their length.


CLS 428/FOR103
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product in which the strips, strands
    or strand-portions are covered or saturated with fluent or plastic material
    or are joined to each other or to another part of the web by an adhesive
    and the saturant, coating or adhesive comprising rubber or rubber-like
    material.


CLS 428/FOR104
TXT Foreign art collection for a product consisting of or containing
    fibers secured to other fibers thereof by means of an inherent adhesive or
    cohesive property of the fibers.


CLS 428/FOR105
TXT Foreign art collection for a product which consists of plural
    components, at least one of which comprises macroscopic fibers claimed in
    terms of (1) their particular shape (natural or fabricated) or (2) an
    orderly arrangement thereof relative to each other, (3) their particular
    interengagement within a layer, (4) their engagement with an adjacent layer
    or (5) their particular size.


CLS 428/FOR106
TXT Foreign art collection for a product which comprises two or more
    layers consisting of or including fibers, at least one such layer
    comprising the above characterized structurally defined fibers.


CLS 428/FOR107
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product wherein fibers of mutually
    engaging layers are interengaged and/or compacted together so as to hold
    the layers in assembled relation.


CLS 428/FOR108
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product wherein the interlocking of
    the fibers, as disclosed, is accomplished by the passage of barbed needles
    through the layers.


CLS 428/FOR109
TXT   Foreign art collection for a product in which any part of the
    product has been covered or saturated with fluent or plastic material, or
    in which layers are joined to each other by an adhesive.


CLS 428/FOR110
TXT   Foreign art collection for a product in which at least one of
    the layers has been covered or saturated with fluent or plastic material or
    in which layers are joined to each other by an adhesive.


CLS 428/FOR111
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product in which the absolute size
    (width, thickness, etc.) of a component or fiber is recited.


CLS 428/FOR112
TXT  Void-containing component has a continuous matrix of fibers only
    (e.g., porous paper, etc.):

    Foreign art collection wherein a component of the composite is one which
    depends solely upon fibers for its continuity.


CLS 428/FOR113
TXT  And a force disintegratable component (e.g., stencil sheet,
    etc.):

    Foreign art collection wherein a component of the composite may be locally
    disintegrated by the application of a sudden force thereto, for example, by
    a typewriter key.


CLS 428/FOR114
TXT  Fibers of defined composition:
    Foreign art collection wherein the chemical makeup of the fibers is
    specified, as, for example, natural leather, polypropylene, etc.


CLS 428/FOR115
TXT  Cellulosic:

    Foreign art collection wherein the fiber is made of cellulose or a
    cellulose derivative, e.g., paper, etc.


CLS 428/FOR116
TXT  Plural cellulosic components:

    Foreign art collection wherein the composite comprises two or more layers
    of fibrous cellulose material.


CLS 429/
TTL CHEMISTRY:  ELECTRICAL CURRENT PRODUCING APPARATUS, PRODUCT, AND PROCESS

CLS 429/
TXT

    I.      STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    This class is the generic class for devices which produce an electrical
    current by means of a chemical reaction or change in physical state (e.g.,
    from liquid to gas, etc.).  Also included are the following subject matter
    not provided for elsewhere.

    A.      Structural combinations of the device, subcombinations and elements
    thereof.

    B.      Electrolyte, compositions of the same, and process of preparation.

    C.      Process of operating the device.

    D.      Miscellaneous process involving the device.



    II.     GLOSSARY

    (1)     Note.  The meaning to be given to the various "art" terms appearing
    in this class, but which have not been included in the glossary below, is
    the same as that generally accepted or in common usage. However, certain
    terms employed in this class, which are included below, have been assigned
    definitions tailored to meet the needs of this class and therefore those
    may be more restricted or less limited or even altogether different from
    those in common usage.

    ACTIVE MATERIAL

    The element, chemical compound, or composition which chemically reacts to
    produce a transfer of electrons through an external circuit.

    BATTERY

    A cell or group of cells.

    CELL

    Two spaced electrodes provided with means to transfer an ionic current
    therebetween.

    ELECTRODE

    The electron current carrying material or structure at which the current
    producing chemical reaction takes place.

    ELECTROLYTE

    A material capable of passing an ionic current.

    FUEL CELL

    A device used to produce an electrical current wherein one of the reactants
    is fed to the cell.

    REACTANT

    The material which includes an active material as one of its components.

    SEPARATOR

    A material used to space or maintain a pair of electrodes out of contact.
    This includes material which function only to stop dendritic growth
    (treeing) between the electrodes.

    III.    CLASSIFICATION LINES AND SEARCH NOTES TO OTHER CLASSES

    A.      Lines with and search notes to compound, composition, and material
    classes.

    1.      A compound, per se, is classified in a compound class regardless of
    utility.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses for
    inorganic compounds and nonmetallic elements having a Class 429 utility.

    2.      A composition or material, per se, (except for electrolyte) for
    Class 429 subject matter is classified in the appropriate composition or
    material class.  Further, a Class 429 article or product mentioned by name
    only (except for separator) without any inclusion of structure and defined
    only in terms of its composition or material is classified in the
    appropriate composition or material classes, particularly those listed
    below in the SEARCH CLASS  note.

    A list of superiority of some composition classes appears in the main class
    definition of Class 252, Compositions, (5) Note.  This note in Class 252
    explains classifications of a generic composition with several disclosed
    uses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, etc., subclasses 228+ for a
    consolidated metal particle composition.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses for a
    composition which is in fluent or solid noncoherent form and which is
    adapted for coating or impregnating and for change to a less fluent, or a
    solid coherent, form by setting (e.g., concrete, plastic, etc.), chemical
    reaction, removal or solvent, solidification from a molten state, etc.  In
    a patent directed to a filler or pigment for a coating composition, the
    recitation of size or structure of the constituent particle or fibers is
    not sufficient to exclude said patent from Class 106.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 400+ for metal stock material which is
    (a) produced by a process of that class (148); or (b) distinguished by (a)
    internal structure (e.g., crystalline, etc.), or (b) characteristics (e.g.,
    semiconductor, etc.) of the metal.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, appropriate subclasses for a
    nonstructural (a) single-layer waterlaid fibrous product, (b) plural-layer
    product including a layer of fibers applied to a second layer by a process
    provided for in that class (162), or (c) paper homogeneously impregnated
    throughout.  Note particularly subclasses 141 - 181.1+ which include any
    nonstructural fiber.

    252,    Compositions, appropriate subclass for a general utility and
    subclass 62.2 for electrolyte compositions for electrical devices.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Class 523, subclass 134 for a composition specialized for use
    as a battery container or battery cover composition.



    a.      The following guidelines are to be followed in determining whether
    or not structure is present in any of the above-named subject matter:

    (1)     A recitation of any numerical dimension of the product is deemed
    structure;

    (2)     a product composed of two (2) or more layers is deemed structure;

    (3)     randomly disposed pores or cells in a porous, cellular or foamed
    product is deemed structure; and

    (4)     internal characteristics such as crystalline form, molecular
    orientation, etc., is not considered structure.



    b.      Once the determination has been made that structure exists in the
    composition or material noted above and it is singly disclosed or claimed
    for a battery, the patent is classified in this class (429).

    B.      LINES AND SEARCH NOTES TO ARTICLE OR PRODUCT CLASSES

    1.      As a general rule an article is classified, the class providing
    specifically for the same or a generic class which can take the same.

    An exception to this rule is an article mentioned in name only and defined
    in terms of its composition or material is classified in one of the
    composition or material classes.  (See section A 2.)

    Class 429, Chemistry, Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product and
    Process, provides for a battery combination comprising a casing, electrodes
    and a separator. Also various subcombinations of the above.

    Usually the application or use of a current-producing device (battery) in
    combination with other devices is classified in appropriate classes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, appropriate subclasses for subject matter
    of that class adapted for use with battery structure.

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, appropriate subclasses for closures
    of that class.

    60,     Power Plants, for power plants combined with battery or fuel cell
    structure.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for apparatus adapted
    for use with a battery for making a measurement or test of any kind.  The
    combination of such apparatus and a battery is proper subject matter for
    Class 429.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives Devices, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 200+ for fuses, primers, and igniting devices
    utilizing electrical energy.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 51 for battery holders for electric
    locomotives.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses for
    articles of general utility defined by compositions for Class 106 and see
    (1) Note of Class 106 for a listing of classes having articles defined by
    the composition.

    114,    Ships, subclass 20.1 for the combination of torpedo and battery
    structure.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclasses for mechanical
    indicators adapted for use with batteries.

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclasses 200+ for
    thermoelectric batteries, subclasses 243+ for photoelectric batteries.

    137,    Fluid Handling, for process and apparatus for handling a fluid
    usually of general utility; and especially subclasses 260+ for structure
    for battery or electrolytic cell replenishment.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 32+ for apparatus and subclass 111 for process for pasting
    (filling) battery grids.  Other appropriate subclasses for the filling of a
    battery with fluent material, i.e., electrolyte.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, for apparatus for that class adapted for use
    with battery structure.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, appropriate
    subclasses, especially  subclasses 149+ for battery elements which function
    by reason of being contacted by the body. Also, batteries especially
    constructed to be implanted in the body.



    The combination of a battery and filling device is subject matter for class
    (429).

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 100+ for paper stock
    material of general utility.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, appropriate subclasses for
    subject matter of that class not limited to battery structure, per se.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, appropriate subclasses for subject matter of that
    class combined with battery structure and especially subclass 68.5 for
    battery mountings or holders combined with significant motor vehicle
    structure.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclass for
    circuit makers-breakers (e.g., switch, etc.) adapted for use with
    batteries.  The combination of a battery or significant battery structure
    and a circuit maker or breaker integral with the battery is subject matter
    for class (429).

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, for products solely
    disclosed as made by a process of Class 204 except for (1) products which
    comprise two contiguous metallic layers and (2) products of processes
    classifiable in subclasses 157.15+ and 450+.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclass 50 for a product made by electrolysis
    involving electrolytic marking, battery electrode active material forming,
    electroforming, or electrolytic coating.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, appropriate subclasses for special
    receptacles or packages, especially subclasses 524.1+ for acid-proof
    receptacles, and subclasses 601+ for receptacles or packages for an
    electrical article and subclasses 603+ for battery package.  Class 206
    takes special receptacles and packages of general utility. Class 429 takes
    special receptacle having battery structure.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 200+ for heating device adapted for
    use with batteries or heaters combined with batteries.

    220,    Receptacles, appropriate subclasses for metallic receptacles of
    general utility or metallic receptacle adapted to hold batteries.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for dispensing apparatus adapted
    for use with battery structure.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, cross reference art
    collection 903 for hand-held battery carriers.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for electric connections with batteries.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, subclass 55 for
    combination of load device (electric current generator) and electrical
    circuit structure.

    320,    Electricity:  Battery and Condenser Charging and Discharging,
    subclass 3 for battery charging or discharging including the batteries.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 425+ for battery
    testers.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 500+ for
    electrolytic devices not elsewhere classified and especially for capacitors
    and coulometers.  See these subclasses for combinations and subcombinations
    of the same.

    362,    Illumination, appropriate subclasses for the combination of
    illumination means and a battery.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 73+, 107+,
    and 203+ for battery-operated time devices.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, appropriate subclasses for telephones
    combined with batteries.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, appropriate
    subclasses for hearing aids and the like combined with a battery.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, appropriate subclasses for alloys
    of general utility and not having structure.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for stock materials of general utility and appropriate subclasses for
    electrodes without any structure.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclass 18 for buoys combined
    with batteries.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 484+, for electric toys having
    a self contained voltage source, and see the Search Notes thereunder for
    related loic.

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, appropriate subclasses for battery systems used
    with artificial body parts.



    C.      LINES WITH AND SEARCH NOTES TO PROCESS AND APPARATUS CLASSES

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 2 for apparatus and process for making
    metallic battery grids; subclasses 730+ for apparatus, and subclasses
    623.1+ for process of making a battery not including the use of the same.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses
    for processes and apparatus for treating a battery or part thereof by
    drying or gas/vapor contact with the same.

    53,     Package Making, appropriate subclasses for methods of and apparatus
    for encompassing or encasing goods or materials with a separate cover or
    band which serves as means for identifying, protecting, or unit handling
    the goods or materials.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, appropriate subclasses for process or
    apparatus for making a battery part of glass by a glass working
    operation(s).

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for testing processes
    and apparatus in general.

    106,    Compositions, Coating or Plastic, for processes of making subject
    matter of that class.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 43 for nonspill vents for batteries,
    subclasses 260+ for battery replenishment apparatus and subclasses 386+ for
    automatic liquid level control devices of general application even though
    disclosed for batteries.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    appropriate subclasses for processes and apparatus for filling batteries,
    particularly subclasses 1.1+ for grid pasting process and subclasses 32+
    for grid pasting apparatus.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for processes of apparatus for making batteries by
    operations of that class.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, appropriate subclass for process
    and apparatus for making battery part; especially subclass 138 for process
    of making paper product having specified electrical products.

    164,    Metal Founding, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for metal
    casting and processes of casting metal grids, and subclass 109 for uniting
    battery plates by casting.

    166,    Wells, subclass 248 for process of applying electrical current
    through the earth for treating a well.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 194+ for
    electrolytic apparatus and other appropriate subclasses for subject matter
    involving the use of electrical or wave energy (e.g., short-circuited
    battery, internal battery, cathodic or anodic protector devices, testers
    which use an electrochemically produced current only to operate an
    indicator such as a meter (especially subclasses 400+), etc.).  In cases
    where the combined subject matter of both Class 204 and Class 429 is
    claimed or disclosed, classification will be based on the proximate
    function, (e.g., current production is provided for in Class 429,
    production of a product is provided for in Class 204, etc.).  Generic
    claims are properly classified in Class 204.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, appropriate subclasses for electrolytic
    processes, in general.  In cases where the combined subject matter of both
    Class 205 and Class 429 is claimed or disclosed, classification will be
    based on the proximate function (e.g., current production is provided for
    in Class 429, electrolytic production of a product is provided for in Class
    205, etc.).  Generic claims to electrolysis are properly classified in
    Class 205.



    Wherein structure or process is common to both classes, the following line
    is to be observed. Where combined subject matter of both Class 204 and
    Class 429 is claimed or disclosed, classification will be based on the
    proximate function, e.g., current production, (Class 429) and the
    production of a product (Class 204).  Generic claims are to be classified
    in the generic class (204).

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclass for apparatus and process of
    making, repairing, etc., batteries by electric heating, e.g., welding, etc.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, appropriate subclasses for bonding battery
    structure, especially subclass 58 for cross reference art collection on
    batteries.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning or Guiding, subclasses 430+ for a method or
    apparatus for making a composite article which may include a wound battery
    component.

    249,    Static Molds, appropriate subclasses for static molds for forming
    battery parts, especially subclass 60 for molding a grid.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses for shaping and treating plastic material,
    especially subclasses 614+ for composite electrical article involving
    vitrifying or sintering of preform to make inorganic natural and subclasses
    104+ for process of forming electrical articles by shaping
    electroconductive material.

    320,    Electricity:  Battery and Condenser Charging and Discharging, for
    electrical systems and the corresponding methods of battery charging and
    discharging; subclass 57 having the structural combination of a battery and
    an electrical rectifier, regardless of whether the electrical
    interconnections between the battery and rectifier are claimed or not.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, for process and apparatus for
    measuring or testing batteries including the battery a part of the claimed
    combination.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for an electrical
    connector, per se; and subclasses 726 and 754+ for a battery post
    clamp-type connector.



    Class 429 takes the combination of clamp with significant battery structure
    or the combination is constructed in such a manner that the connector is
    inseparable from battery.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, appropriate subclass for systems of
    imparting communications (intelligence), a part of which has electrical
    components, (e.g., batteries), especially subclass 636 wherein the system
    is responsive to a battery condition.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses for
    process of making inorganic chemical compounds useful in batteries.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus, for
    molding apparatus useful in making batteries.



    IV.     INDEX TO CLASS LINES WITH OR SEARCH NOTES TO CLASSES NOTED IN CLASS
    (429) SECTIONS AND SUBCLASSES

    CLASS   SECTION SUBCLASSES
    16      III B
    29      III C
    34      III C
    49      III B
    53      III C
    60      III B
    65      III C
    73      III B; III C    61; 90
    75      III A - 2
    102     III B
    105     III B   96
    106     III A - 2; III B; III C
    114     III B   71
    116     III B   90

    136     III B   5; 111; 112
    137     III B   63; 72; 80;
                    84
    141     III B; III C    72
    148     III A - 2;
    156     III C
    162     III A - 2; III B; III C
    164     III C
    166     III C
    174     III B
    180     III B   96
    200     III B   97; 150
    204     III B; III C    208
    206     III B   176
    219     III B; III C
    220     III B
    222     III B
    228     III C
    242     III C
    249     III C
    252     III A - 2       188; 250
    264     III C
    294     III B   96
    307     III B   97; 99; 149
    315     III B
    320     III B; III C    49; 61; 62
    324     III B; III C    90
    340             61
    361     III B   97
    362     III B
    368     III B
    379     III B
    381     III B
    423     III A - 1; III C
    425     III C
    427             40
    428     III B - 1       145; 241; 255
    439     III C   65; 121
    441     III B
    446     III B
    520     III A - 2
    623     III B


CLS 429/1
TXT Apparatus under this class definition having structural means to connect
    the terminals in a desired polarity relationship.


CLS 429/2
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having bacteria or other living
    organism(s) as an integral part thereof and the related process.


CLS 429/3
TXT Apparatus under the class definition capable of producing periodic
    electrical output and the related process.


CLS 429/4
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having periodic motion applied to the
    same by sonic or ultrasonic means and the related process.


CLS 429/5
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having material which emits atomic
    radiation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclass 202 for a
    thermoelectric battery-nuclear energy type.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 301 for
    electrical generators involving a nuclear reaction.


CLS 429/6
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means to equalize the pressure
    between the inside of a casing and the surrounding liquid environment when
    the apparatus is immersed.


CLS 429/7
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having a nonelectrochemical current
    producing electrical component within a battery casing in combination with
    conventional components.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90+,    for battery having testing or indicating means.


CLS 429/8
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having a function other than or in
    addition to that of producing electricity and the function is foreign to
    the electrical production.


CLS 429/9
TXT Apparatus under the class definition consisting of multiple different types
    of electrical cells or a support means having different types of cells at
    least one of which is removable from the support.


CLS 429/10
TXT Apparatus under the class definition which makes use of a magnet or a
    magnetic field in any of its forms and the related process.


CLS 429/11
TXT Apparatus under the class definition wherein the electrical current is
    produced by maintaining a pair of electrodes at different temperatures and
    the related process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for a battery having heat exchange means.


CLS 429/12
TXT Apparatus under the class definition for producing an electrical current
    having an active material supplied to a cell from an external source, e.g.,
    fuel cell, metal/air cell, etc., subcombination of the apparatus and the
    process of operating the same are also included.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for tape or flexible batteries having means to sequentially or
    continuously move active electrode material into position to produce an
    electrical current.


CLS 429/13
TXT Process under subclass 12 of operating the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50+,    for process of operating a tape cell.


CLS 429/14
TXT Process under subclass 13 having a step of circulating the electrolyte of
    feeding the same into or within the cell.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     for battery having means to provide relative motion between
    electrode and electrolyte.

    72+,    for battery having feeding or circulating structure.


CLS 429/15
TXT Process under subclass 14 including the step of supplying active material
    which is dissolved in, introduced into, or carried by the electrolyte.


CLS 429/16
TXT Process under subclass 13 having the step of maintaining the electrolyte in
    a fused or molten stall during cell operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102+,   for active material in the molten state.


CLS 429/17
TXT Process under subclass 13 including the step of generating the active
    material before use in the cell, regenerating the same from by-products of
    the cell or recycling unused active material through the cell.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19+,    for corresponding apparatus.

    49,     for battery having regeneration features.

    51,     for process of cell operation involving electrolyte circulation.


CLS 429/18
TXT Apparatus under subclass 12 comprising a plurality of cells having a common
    electrolyte connection and means combined with the cell structure
    functioning to reduce or prevent ionic current from passing through the
    common electrolyte between the cells.


CLS 429/19
TXT Apparatus under subclass 12 having means to generate a material used in a
    cell, to generate a material in situ, or to regenerate a material from the
    cell by-products.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for corresponding process.


CLS 429/20
TXT Apparatus under subclass 19 having means providing a temperature
    differential.


CLS 429/21
TXT Apparatus under subclass 19 having means which allows electrical
    regeneration of the active material.


CLS 429/22
TXT Apparatus under subclass 12 having automatic control means for regulating
    some operational feature of the cell.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61+,    for battery having control means responsive to a condition sensing
    means.


CLS 429/23
TXT Apparatus under subclass 22 wherein the control is responsive to the
    electrical output of the cell, either current or voltage.


CLS 429/24
TXT Apparatus under subclass 22 wherein the control is responsive to
    temperature.


CLS 429/25
TXT Apparatus under subclass 22 wherein the control is responsive to pressure.


CLS 429/26
TXT Apparatus under subclass 12 having means to provide a temperature
    differential.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for battery having heat exchange feature.


CLS 429/27
TXT Apparatus under subclass 12 having an electrode containing an active
    material or the subcombination of said electrode.


CLS 429/28
TXT Apparatus under subclass 27 wherein the cathode surrounds or envelopes the
    anode and subcombinations thereof.


CLS 429/29
TXT Apparatus under subclass 27 wherein the electrolyte material is chemically
    specified.


CLS 429/30
TXT Apparatus under subclass 12 having a solid material which functions as an
    electrolyte.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191+,   for solid battery electrolytes.


CLS 429/31
TXT Apparatus under subclass 30 wherein the electrolyte is tubular in form.


CLS 429/32
TXT Apparatus under subclass 30 wherein the electrolyte is constructed of
    plural disc or modules.


CLS 429/33
TXT Apparatus under subclass 30 wherein the electrolyte material is chemically
    specified.


CLS 429/34
TXT Apparatus under subclass 12 comprising separate elements having a utility
    in or are in combination with a fuel-type cell to provide housing, sealing,
    spacing of fluid distribution or fluid direction of the cell.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     27+, 41, and 46, for a matrix or support used to space electrodes
    and hold electrolyte therein.

    27+     and 40+, for matrix or support which is an integral part of the
    electrode.


CLS 429/35
TXT Apparatus under subclass 34 having a sealing feature specifically set forth
    as a part of the combination.


CLS 429/36
TXT Apparatus under subclass 35 wherein the sealing feature is composed of an
    integral bond between elements.


CLS 429/37
TXT Apparatus under subclass 35 wherein the sealing feature is of the
    mechanical pressure type produced by a clamping means.


CLS 429/38
TXT Apparatus under subclass 34 wherein the housing member support or spacer is
    provided with means to allow the fluid reactants or electrolyte to enter or
    exit therefrom.


CLS 429/39
TXT Apparatus under subclass 38 wherein the support or spacer directs the fluid
    flow along the face of the electrode.


CLS 429/40
TXT Apparatus under subclass 12 having a catalytic electrode which is
    structurally or chemically specified.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 115 for method of producing fuel cell
    electrode by coating.


CLS 429/41
TXT Apparatus under subclass 40 having an electrolyte matrix or barrier layer
    positioned between or in contact with a catalytic electrode.


CLS 429/42
TXT Apparatus under subclass 40 wherein the electrode has an organic component.


CLS 429/43
TXT Apparatus under subclass 42 wherein the organic component is part of or is
    the catalysis of the electrode.


CLS 429/44
TXT Apparatus under subclass 40 having distinct inorganic materials functioning
    as the matrix, substrate or support in the electrode.


CLS 429/45
TXT Apparatus under subclass 44 composed of sintered particles.


CLS 429/46
TXT Subject matter under subclass 12 where the electrolyte composition is
    chemically defined.


CLS 429/47
TXT Apparatus under the class definition wherein a portion of the earth
    constitutes a part of the battery.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    for sea water-type battery.


CLS 429/48
TXT Process and apparatus under the class definition for maintaining a battery
    in storage.


CLS 429/49
TXT Apparatus or process under the class definition having means for or the
    step of restoring, or aid in restoring the battery to its former condition
    after decay, injury, or partial destruction.

    (1)     Note.  Since the addition of electrolyte, per se, to and the
    charging of a battery are such a conventional way to regenerate the same,
    classification on these features are not included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     for process of operating, battery including step of adding an
    electrolyte.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 92.1 for process of repairing or restoring
    article, for use.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass for electrically charging or rejuvenating (e.g.,
    depolarizing, etc.) a battery.


CLS 429/50
TXT Process under the class definition involving the operation of a battery (to
    provide electricity) and includes starting the battery and adding or using
    a specified electrolyte.


CLS 429/51
TXT Process under subclass 50 including the step of circulating the electrolyte.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14+,    for process of circulating electrolyte in a fuel cell.


CLS 429/52
TXT Process under subclass 50 involving the step of starting up a dormant cell.


CLS 429/53
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means to release an internal
    gas pressure to the exterior of a closed cell.


CLS 429/54
TXT Apparatus under subclass 53 wherein the release means is either an (a)
    elastic, (b) resilient, or (c) spring, biasing valve structure.


CLS 429/55
TXT Apparatus under subclass 54 having an elastic band or O-ring in the valve
    structure.


CLS 429/56
TXT Apparatus under subclass 53 wherein the release means functions upon
    reaching a predetermined pressure thereby preventing damage to the
    apparatus.


CLS 429/57
TXT Apparatus under the class definition wherein the device is completely
    closed and has means within the same for preventing formation of or
    eliminating gas pressure.


CLS 429/58
TXT Apparatus under subclass 57 wherein the prevention means functions to
    control an auxiliary device, e.g., a charge disconnect, etc.


CLS 429/59
TXT Apparatus under subclass 57 wherein the gas control means is electrically
    connected to an electrode.


CLS 429/60
TXT Apparatus under subclass 59 wherein the electrodes have diverse total
    capacities or one electrode has a charge or discharge reserve.


CLS 429/61
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means sensitive to variations
    in a cell condition and a regulating means, functioning in response thereto
    to effect an operation or change.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for condition sensing
    means, per se, and see the "SEARCH NOTES" under Class 73 definition.

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass for controlling charging or discharging of a battery
    or capacitor in response to a battery or capacitor condition.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 635+ for electrical
    apparatus condition responsive system, and subclass 636 for battery
    condition responsive apparatus.


CLS 429/62
TXT Apparatus under subclass 61 wherein the temperature is regulated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    320,    Electricity: Battery or Capacitor Charging or Discharging,
    appropriate subclass for controlling charging or discharging of a battery
    or capacitor in response to a battery or capacitor condition, especially
    subclasses 150+ for detection of a thermal condition.


CLS 429/63
TXT Apparatus under subclass 61 wherein the feeding of the electrolyte is
    regulated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72+,    for nonautomatic feeding of the electrolyte.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 386+ for automatic liquid level control
    devices of general utility.


CLS 429/64
TXT Apparatus under subclass 63 having valve means as a part of the sensing or
    control means.


CLS 429/65
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means to protect the terminal
    or a terminal projector, per se, other than that which forms a seal between
    the casing and the terminal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses especially subclasses
    190+ for an electrical connector having a retainer or a passageway for
    fluent material; subclasses 519+ for an electrical connector with provision
    to restrict environmental effects; subclass 726 for an insulated clamp-type
    connector for a storage battery post; and subclasses 745+ for a metallic
    clamp-type connector for a storage battery terminal, generally.


CLS 429/66
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means permitting enlargement of
    the electrode.


CLS 429/67
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means which provide mechanical
    motion functioning to produce relative motion between the electrode(s) and
    the electrolyte.

    (1)     Note.  Means to activate the cell only is not considered proper for
    this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12+,    for fuel cell fluid circulation.

    113+,   for a deferred action battery activated by movement of electrode or
    contained electrolyte.


CLS 429/68
TXT Apparatus under subclass 67 wherein the movable mechanical means provides
    motion to the electrode.


CLS 429/69
TXT Apparatus under subclass 68 wherein the electrode is caused to revolve.


CLS 429/70
TXT Apparatus under subclass 67 wherein the movable mechanical means causes
    motion of the electrolyte outside of the electrode compartment.


CLS 429/71
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means to move a ventilating
    fluid to or from the battery.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclass 20.1 for torpedoes having batteries.


CLS 429/72
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means for manipulating a fluid
    in a battery structure to (a) vent, (b) feed, or (c) circulate the same.

    (1)     Note.  Since a filler opening of a battery is so conventional and
    will inherently function to allow feeding and venting, said filler opening
    is not considered proper for this and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110+,   for deferred action-type battery wherein feeding and venting are
    common.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 260+ for battery replenishment apparatus.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 18 for filling devices useful in filling batteries.


CLS 429/73
TXT Apparatus under subclass 72 having one filling opening and structure
    functioning to equalize the liquid level in all sections of the battery.


CLS 429/74
TXT Apparatus under subclass 72 having means to regulate the liquid level of
    the electrolyte when it is added to the battery.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     for a battery having measuring testing or indicating means for a
    liquid level including a visual reference point.


CLS 429/75
TXT Apparatus under subclass 74 wherein means are provided to control more than
    one liquid level.


CLS 429/76
TXT Apparatus under subclass 74 wherein the control means is a valve operable
    by reason of it being buoyant.


CLS 429/77
TXT Apparatus under subclass 74 wherein the control means functions by creating
    an airlock.


CLS 429/78
TXT Apparatus under subclass 77 wherein a liquid seal only causes the airlock.


CLS 429/79
TXT Apparatus under subclass 77 wherein a movable valve structure is provided
    in the filler opening.


CLS 429/80
TXT Apparatus under subclass 72 having manual means to store the electrolyte
    and feed the same to the battery.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 160 for battery replenishment system.


CLS 429/81
TXT Apparatus under subclass 72 having stationary structure functioning to aid
    fluid circulation in the battery structure, i.e., circulation between
    electrolyte and electrodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67+,    for movable means providing circulation in a battery structure.


CLS 429/82
TXT Apparatus under subclass 72 providing an opening for ingress or egress of a
    fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for battery having means to release internal gas pressure.


CLS 429/83
TXT Apparatus under subclass 82 having different opening for ingress and egress
    of a fluid.


CLS 429/84
TXT Apparatus under subclass 82 wherein the vent contains structure functioning
    to prevent the spilling of the electrolyte when the apparatus is tilted,
    upended, or placed in a position other than that which is normal for
    operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 43 for structure of this type of general
    utility.


CLS 429/85
TXT Apparatus under subclass 84 comprising a weight means functioning as a part
    of a valve means to render the apparatus operative.


CLS 429/86
TXT Apparatus under subclass 82 wherein the vent contains structure or
    materials which react with, absorb or diffuse the fluid passing
    therethrough.


CLS 429/87
TXT Apparatus under subclass 82 wherein the plural vents have a community
    feature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     wherein means are provided to remove from or supply a fluid to
    plural vents.


CLS 429/88
TXT Apparatus under subclass 87 wherein the community feature is a manifold.


CLS 429/89
TXT Apparatus under subclass 82 having a stopper, cap or plug-type venting
    means other than those in subclasses 62, 83, 84, and 86.


CLS 429/90
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means to measure, test or
    indicate a condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for pressure release control.

    61+,    for control means responsive to a    condition sensor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for process or
    apparatus for making a measurement or test.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclasses for signalling and
    indicating devices, per se.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus for measuring and testing electrical properties.


CLS 429/91
TXT Apparatus under subclass 90 wherein the battery charge or liquid level is
    measured, tested, or indicated.


CLS 429/92
TXT Apparatus under subclass 91 wherein the battery has electrical circuitry
    other than that normally used in the same.


CLS 429/93
TXT Apparatus under subclass 92 wherein the electrical circuit is located
    outside of the battery.


CLS 429/94
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a battery having coiled or
    plural concentric electrodes, or coiled or plural concentric electrodes,
    per se.


CLS 429/95
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means other than the filler
    opening providing egress of the electrolyte.


CLS 429/96
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising support means providing for
    removal of the cell(s), or a cell support, per se, for a removable cell(s).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 50+ for battery supports combined
    with subject matter of that class.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 68.5 for battery support combined with
    subject matter of that class.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, cross reference art
    collection 903 for hand-held battery carriers.


CLS 429/97
TXT Apparatus under subclass 96 having (a) a device to turn on/off the
    operation of the battery, or (b) a means to control the flow of current
    to/from the battery depending upon some other operation, e.g., the opening
    of a door, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses
    for electrical switches.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 326
    for systems designed to protect the individual; and subclass 150 for
    power-pack systems.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, appropriate
    subclasses for systems designed to protect the apparatus.


CLS 429/98
TXT Apparatus under subclass 96 having named support structure which has a
    function other than primarily supporting the cell(s).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for battery apparatus having a function other than that of
    primarily producing electricity.


CLS 429/99
TXT Apparatus under subclass 96 wherein the support holds plural removable
    cells which are a group of separate cells, or the cells are capable of
    being separated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 150
    for power-pack systems.


CLS 429/100
TXT Apparatus under subclass 96 comprising means, per se, for holding or
    supporting the cell(s).


CLS 429/101
TXT Apparatus or materials under the class definition wherein the active
    material or material for use as the active material in the apparatus is in
    a fluid state, or an apparatus which specifically defines a two-fluid
    electrolyte combination.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12+,    for fluid active material which is supplied from an external
    source, e.g., fuel cell.


CLS 429/102
TXT Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein the active material is in its
    molten state when it is being used to produce a current in an apparatus.


CLS 429/103
TXT Subject matter under subclass 102 wherein the molten active material is in
    combination with a fused or molten electrolyte when the combination is in
    operable current-producing relationship.


CLS 429/104
TXT Subject matter under subclass 102 wherein the molten active material is in
    combination with a solid state ionic transfer or exchange-type electrolyte.


CLS 429/105
TXT Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein the active material is in a
    dissolved state in a liquid solvent forming a solution.


CLS 429/106
TXT Subject matter under subclass 105 wherein the active material is a solution
    of copper sulfate.


CLS 429/107
TXT Subject matter under subclass 105 wherein the active material is a solution
    of dissolved iron, or where an active material is iron in combination with
    an active material in solution.


CLS 429/108
TXT Subject matter under subclass 105 wherein the active material in solution
    is a dissolved nitrogen-containing compound, or is a solution of nitric
    acid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203,    for nitrogen containing electrolyte which is not the active
    material.


CLS 429/109
TXT Subject matter under subclass 105 wherein the active material in solution
    is a dissolved chromium-containing compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203,    for nitrogen containing electrolyte which is not the active
    material.


CLS 429/110
TXT Apparatus under the class definition wherein the action of the battery is
    (a) started by bringing active components of the same into operative
    relationship, or (b) depended upon light or heat to cause a chemical
    reaction.


CLS 429/111
TXT Apparatus under subclass 110 wherein the battery is activated or
    reactivated by light which causes a chemical reaction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric   and  Photoelectric, subclasses 243+
    for photoelectric batteries whereby electricity is produced without the aid
    of a chemical reaction.


CLS 429/112
TXT Apparatus under subclass 110 wherein the battery is activated or
    reactivated by heat which causes a chemical reaction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclasses 200+ for
    thermoelectric batteries.


CLS 429/113
TXT Apparatus under subclass 110 wherein the battery is activated by bringing
    together the contained electrolyte and electrodes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     for movable means providing relative motion between the electrode
    and electrolyte.


CLS 429/114
TXT Apparatus under subclass 113 wherein the activation of the battery is
    caused by (a) a turning (centrifugal, centripetal) force, or (b) a rapid
    abrupt acceleration of deceleration.


CLS 429/115
TXT Apparatus under subclass 113 wherein the activation is caused by an
    explosive charge attached to or within the battery.


CLS 429/116
TXT Apparatus under subclass 113 wherein the battery has a breakable means
    separating the electrolyte from other components.


CLS 429/117
TXT Apparatus under subclass 113 wherein the activation of the battery is
    caused by turning the same to a direction other than its normal position.


CLS 429/118
TXT Apparatus under subclass 110 wherein the battery is activated by the
    addition of a liquid which may be the electrolyte, per se, or water or
    other solvent functioning to dissolve the electrolyte materials.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72+,    for apparatus for feeding fluid materials to the battery for
    purposes other than activating the same.


CLS 429/119
TXT Apparatus under subclass 118 wherein the battery is activated by submerging
    the same in a liquid.


CLS 429/120
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means functioning to (a)
    heat/cool the same, or (b) allowing heating/cooling of the same, e.g.,
    special construction, passageway, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for battery having heat exchange means for producing a temperature
    differential between electrodes.

    26,     for fuel cell with heat exchange feature.


CLS 429/121
TXT Apparatus under the class definition which are in combination with or are
    designed to be connected to an electric current carrying member located on
    an external portion of a cell or a plurality of cells for purposes other
    than protecting a battery terminal.  Also cell connectors, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for connectors which
    attach to battery terminals.


CLS 429/122
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means for producing an
    electrical current, subcombination of the same and related compositions.


CLS 429/123
TXT Apparatus under subclass 122 wherein the cell has means (1) to join plural
    cells interchangeable with one and another, or (2) to join and support the
    same with some apparatus which uses current from said cell.


CLS 429/124
TXT Apparatus under subclass 122 wherein the cell is made in the manner as a
    printed circuit.


CLS 429/125
TXT Apparatus under subclass 122 wherein the cell is either the standard or
    counter electromotive force type.


CLS 429/126
TXT Apparatus under subclass 122 having means forming a protective surface on
    the electrolyte.


CLS 429/127
TXT Apparatus under subclass 122 wherein the cell is in the form of a long thin
    strip or it is very pliable.


CLS 429/128
TXT Apparatus under subclass 122 having an electrode composed of plural
    tablets, pellets, or discs.


CLS 429/129
TXT Apparatus under subclass 122 comprising a structure positioned between or
    for use between cell electrodes to physically or functionally separate the
    electrodes. Included in this subclass are separator, retainer, or spaced
    structures such as rods, buttons, frames, etc., which merely space the
    electrodes; separators which physically and functionally separate the
    electrodes and which enclose or envelop the electrodes or a portion thereof
    in any manner; structures having plural components; and sheet materials
    which have projection thereon.

    (1)     Note.  To constitute structure for this and indented subclasses,
    there must be claimed (disclosure) subject matter involving:



    (a)     More than a single porous sheet.

    (b)     Plural layers.

    (c)     Any of the structures specifically set out in the indented
    subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247,    for separator, retainer, or spacer structures of porous flat sheet
    materials including impregnated or coated support materials which form a
    single flat sheet material having essentially uniform porosity.  See the
    search notes thereunder.


CLS 429/130
TXT Apparatus under subclass 129 directed to only a spacer such as a rod,
    button, strip, or frame which physically separates, or for separating and
    maintaining a pair of electrodes in a spaced relationship.


CLS 429/131
TXT Apparatus under subclass 129 which encloses or is adapted for enclosing an
    electrode to physically separate an active material from an opposing
    electrode and to functionally retain or hold the active material in
    position to stop transfer of an active material to the opposing electrode.


CLS 429/132
TXT Apparatus under subclass 131 wherein the insulating material in bulk form
    surrounds the electrode.


CLS 429/133
TXT Apparatus under subclass 131 in combination with or for use in unit
    cell-type batteries either cylindrical or flat.  Also porous cup-type
    separators which generally are of carbon and are used to separate two
    distinct fluids in the apparatus.


CLS 429/134
TXT Apparatus under subclass 133 having material in the form of a paste or gel
    and usually contains an electrolyte.


CLS 429/135
TXT Apparatus under subclass 134 having a layer of material or spacing means
    which either supports the paste material, retains an active material in
    position, or physically separates opposing electrodes.


CLS 429/136
TXT Apparatus under subclass 131 having means to enclose or are for use with
    plate-type electrode and covers both sides of the plate electrode.


CLS 429/137
TXT Apparatus under subclass 136 wherein the envelope is a coated material.


CLS 429/138
TXT Apparatus under subclass 136 wherein the envelope includes a supporting
    frame or cover combined with separator layers.


CLS 429/139
TXT Apparatus under subclass 136 wherein the envelope is formed by sealing or
    bonding the edge portion.


CLS 429/140
TXT Apparatus under subclass 131 which are tubular in form and functions in an
    electrode tubular-type plate to hold the active material around a current
    collector spine or rod.


CLS 429/141
TXT Apparatus under subclass 140 wherein the tubular structure is composed of
    multiple laminae, at least two of which are from different materials.


CLS 429/142
TXT Apparatus under subclass 129 having multiple distinct parts.


CLS 429/143
TXT Apparatus under subclass 142 having ribs or projections attached to a sheet
    material layer.


CLS 429/144
TXT Apparatus under subclass 142 having multiple layers.


CLS 429/145
TXT Apparatus under subclass 144 wherein the porosity characteristic of at
    least one layer has been specifically defined.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 566 for metallic
    stock material containing metal particles and having an interconnected void
    structure.


CLS 429/146
TXT Apparatus under subclass 129 having projections separating an electrode
    from the base sheet of the material and are other than ribs which have been
    attached to the base sheet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143,    for sheet material having attached ribs or projections.


CLS 429/147
TXT Apparatus under subclass 146 wherein the projections are portions of the
    base sheet which have been deformed from the general plane of the base
    sheet.


CLS 429/148
TXT Apparatus under subclass 122 wherein a plurality of battery housings are
    spaced from each other by some means which provides space for air to
    circulate therebetween, whereby the drying action of the air prevents
    shorts from forming between external terminal of the cells.


CLS 429/149
TXT Apparatus under subclass 122 comprising more than one cell.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for plural diverse cells or plural diverse removable cells in a
    support.

    99,     for cell support for or with plural cells.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 150
    for power packs.


CLS 429/150
TXT Apparatus under subclass 149 having switch means integral with the cell(s)
    structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97,     for removable cells having a support or support, per se, having
    switch means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses
    for electrical switches of the type used with the cells of this class.


CLS 429/151
TXT Apparatus under subclass 149 wherein the casing has means to interjoin one
    part thereof with another.


CLS 429/152
TXT Apparatus under subclass 149 comprising single cells joined in repeating
    touching laminae units.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162,    for single cells of this type.


CLS 429/153
TXT Apparatus under subclass 152 having a housing encasing the individual cells
    either as a single unit or multiunits forming in effect a single casing.


CLS 429/154
TXT Apparatus under subclass 153 wherein the housing is divided into parts.


CLS 429/155
TXT Apparatus under subclass 154 wherein the housing parts are in the form of a
    (a) tray, (b) cup, or (c) dish shape, all of which are in a nested or
    telescopic relationship.


CLS 429/156
TXT Apparatus under subclass 149 wherein individual cells have all components
    self-contained, and could, if separated, function as a single cell.


CLS 429/157
TXT Apparatus under subclass 156 wherein the cells are arranged in such a
    manner that one end of a cell contacts the end of another cell, e.g., in a
    vertical plane, side-by-side, etc.


CLS 429/158
TXT Apparatus under subclass 156 wherein the cells have means to electrically
    connect the same.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160,    for plural cells having electrical connecting means between the
    cells.

    161,    for a single cell unit made of plural plates (electrodes) having
    means to electrically connect the same.


CLS 429/159
TXT Apparatus under subclass 158 wherein the cells have a common external
    support means in the form of a casing, tray, or clamp.


CLS 429/160
TXT Apparatus under subclass 149 having electrical connecting means between the
    cells.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158,    for plural complete cells having intercell connector.

    161,    for a single cell unit made of plural plates (electrodes) having
    means to electrically connect the same.


CLS 429/161
TXT Apparatus under subclass 122 comprising plural electrode components
    electrically connected to form a single cell unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158,    for plural complete cells having an intercell connector.

    160,    for plural cells having an intercell connector.


CLS 429/162
TXT Apparatus under subclass 122 wherein a single cell is formed of flat
    components which are usually used in a group.  Also components specifically
    designed for use with the same.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152+,   for a group of flat cells formed as an integral unit.


CLS 429/163
TXT Apparatus under subclass 122 comprising means functioning to confine cell
    structure.


CLS 429/164
TXT Apparatus under subclass 163 comprising a single cell generally round in
    shape.

    (1)     Note.  The enclosure portion of the apparatus may be one of the
    cell electrodes or the active material of the cell.


CLS 429/165
TXT Apparatus under subclass 164 having a positive electrode located in the
    center thereof.


CLS 429/166
TXT Apparatus under subclass 164 wherein the cell has a container-type
    electrode which is chemically reactive.


CLS 429/167
TXT Apparatus under subclass 166 having a chemically inactive container or
    cover outside of the reactive electrode.


CLS 429/168
TXT Apparatus under subclass 167 having a metallic or electrically conductive
    casing on the outside of the nonreactive housing, casing, jacket, etc.


CLS 429/169
TXT Apparatus under subclass 168 having an electrical connection between the
    outer casing and the reactive electrode.


CLS 429/170
TXT Apparatus under subclass 169 having an electrical contact terminal plate or
    cap, clamped to or embedded in a portion of the housing.


CLS 429/171
TXT Apparatus under subclass 166 having means preventing either ingress or
    egress of a fluid.


CLS 429/172
TXT Apparatus under subclass 171 wherein the seal is of the mechanical clamping
    pressure type.


CLS 429/173
TXT Apparatus under subclass 172 having a sealing mass or compound which, at
    some stage of the battery manufacture, said mass or compound was in a
    fluent or bulk form.


CLS 429/174
TXT Apparatus under subclass 164 having means preventing either ingress or
    egress of a fluid, i.e., sealing material.


CLS 429/175
TXT Apparatus under subclass 163 directed only to a means for closing an
    opening in the container or casing.


CLS 429/176
TXT Apparatus under subclass 163 directed only to the container portion of the
    battery case.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, especially subclasses 524.1+ for
    acid proof containers of generally utility or not having structure which
    makes them readily adapted for battery use.


CLS 429/177
TXT Apparatus under subclass 163 wherein the housing or casing has more than
    one cover.


CLS 429/178
TXT Apparatus under subclass 163 having an electrical terminal.


CLS 429/179
TXT Apparatus under subclass 178 wherein the terminal is located on or
    protruding through the housing.


CLS 429/180
TXT Apparatus under subclass 178 wherein the terminal has a sealing sleeve
    embedded in or molded in the cover.


CLS 429/181
TXT Apparatus under subclass 178 wherein the terminal has means preventing
    ingress or egress or a fluid.


CLS 429/182
TXT Apparatus under subclass 181 having means functioning to prevent rotary
    movement between the cover and terminal.


CLS 429/183
TXT Apparatus under subclass 181 wherein the terminal has a threaded
    compression means.


CLS 429/184
TXT Apparatus under subclass 181 wherein the seal includes a sealing mass or
    compound which, at some stage of battery manufacture, said mass or compound
    was in a fluid or bulk form.


CLS 429/185
TXT Apparatus under subclass 163 having means preventing either the egress or
    ingress of a fluid.


CLS 429/186
TXT Apparatus under subclass 163 having means to support a cell assembly.


CLS 429/187
TXT Apparatus under subclass 163 having means facilitating the manipulation of
    the cell, i.e., a handle or lifting means, etc.


CLS 429/188
TXT Apparatus under subclass 122 having materials which function as an
    electrolyte and are chemically specified.  Included also are the materials,
    per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     33 and 46, for electrolyte materials having utility in fuel cells,
    and subclass 112 for fused salt or molten electrolyte materials.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 62.2 for electrolyte compositions for
    electrical devices other than batteries.  An electrolyte disclosed or
    claimed generally, e.g., battery and/or condenser, will be classified in
    Class 252 and crossed to 429.  A sole disclosure or claim to a battery
    electrolyte will be classified in Class 429.


CLS 429/189
TXT Subject matter under subclass 188 which is or has a substance that proceeds
    the formation of an electrolyte.


CLS 429/190
TXT Subject matter under subclass 188 in the form of a semirigid colloidal
    dispersion of a solid with a fluid or gelled materials.


CLS 429/191
TXT Subject matter under subclass 188 which are solid in form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for solid electrolytes in or for fuel cells.


CLS 429/192
TXT Subject matter under subclass 191 containing an organic compound.


CLS 429/193
TXT Subject matter under subclass 191 having an oxide of a metal as a portion
    thereof.


CLS 429/194
TXT Subject matter under subclass 188 having a dissolvent other than water.


CLS 429/195
TXT Subject matter under subclass 194 containing water.


CLS 429/196
TXT Subject matter under subclass 194 wherein the dissolvents are an inorganic
    material.


CLS 429/197
TXT Subject matter under subclass 194 having more than one nonaqueous
    dissolvent.


CLS 429/198
TXT Subject matter under subclass 188 having organic material which mixes with
    or dissolves in a solvent.


CLS 429/199
TXT Subject matter under subclass 188 having a halogen atom as a part of
    chemical makeup.


CLS 429/200
TXT Subject matter under subclass 199 containing hydrogen other than that
    present in the water which helps form the solution.


CLS 429/201
TXT Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein ammonia is combined with the
    halogen.


CLS 429/202
TXT Subject matter under subclass 188 having a chromium atom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109,    for fluid active material containing chromium.


CLS 429/203
TXT Subject matter under subclass 188 having an acid containing a nitrogen or
    phosphorus atom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for active material containing the nitrogen atom.


CLS 429/204
TXT Subject matter under subclass 188 containing sulphuric acid.


CLS 429/205
TXT Subject matter under subclass 204 containing a salt of sulphuric acid.


CLS 429/206
TXT Subject matter under subclass 188 which is a chemical base.


CLS 429/207
TXT Subject matter under subclass 206 having either a salt or acid as a part
    thereof.


CLS 429/208
TXT Apparatus under subclass 122 for suspending or otherwise supporting the
    electrode in a battery structure, e.g., casing, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 297 for electrode
    supports and work holders.


CLS 429/209
TXT Apparatus under subclass 122 directed to electrode structure.


CLS 429/210
TXT Apparatus under subclass 209 comprising an integral unit electrode wherein
    cathodic and anodic active material is electrically connected and bonded or
    adhered to opposite sides of a carrier.


CLS 429/211
TXT Apparatus under subclass 209 having a tab or electrical current contacting
    means.


CLS 429/212
TXT Apparatus under subclass 209 having active material containing an organic
    component.


CLS 429/213
TXT Apparatus under subclass 212 wherein the organic material is the active
    material.


CLS 429/214
TXT Apparatus under subclass 212 wherein the organic material functions to
    retard deterioration by oxidation.


CLS 429/215
TXT Apparatus under subclass 212 wherein the organic material is an expander or
    addition agent for perfecting the electrode capacity, performance, or
    plating characteristics.


CLS 429/216
TXT Apparatus under subclass 215 having a material which prevents any
    arborescent crystalline growth.


CLS 429/217
TXT Apparatus under subclass 212 wherein the organic material functions as a
    binding agent.


CLS 429/218
TXT Apparatus under subclass 209 having active material which is inorganic and
    defined by its chemical components.


CLS 429/219
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 having silver as a component thereof.


CLS 429/220
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 having copper as a component thereof.


CLS 429/221
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 having iron as a component thereof.


CLS 429/222
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 having cadmium as a compound thereof.


CLS 429/223
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 having nickel as a component thereof.


CLS 429/224
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 having manganese as a component thereof.


CLS 429/225
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 having lead as a component thereof.


CLS 429/226
TXT Apparatus under subclass 225 having one or more other metals forming a
    mixture.


CLS 429/227
TXT Apparatus under subclass 225 in the form of either lead sulphate or lead
    carbonate.


CLS 429/228
TXT Apparatus under subclass 225 wherein the lead is combined with oxygen.


CLS 429/229
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 having zinc as a component thereof.


CLS 429/230
TXT Apparatus under subclass 229 amalgamated with mercury or otherwise combined
    with mercury.


CLS 429/231
TXT Apparatus under subclass 229 wherein the lead is combined with oxygen.


CLS 429/232
TXT Apparatus under subclass 209 having material with an inorganic component
    which functions to bind other particles together or to impart an electrical
    conductivity to the material.


CLS 429/233
TXT Apparatus under subclass 209 comprising electrically conductive means for
    supporting the active material (e.g., grids, holders, etc.) of the
    electrode.


CLS 429/234
TXT Apparatus under subclass 233 wherein the grid or holder for the active
    material includes a component which is not electrically conductive.


CLS 429/235
TXT Apparatus under subclass 233 wherein the grid or holder for the active
    material is a mass of particulate or fibrous particles which are formed or
    bonded into a porous structure.


CLS 429/236
TXT Apparatus under subclass 235 wherein the particulate or fibrous particles
    are coated throughout the porous mass.


CLS 429/237
TXT Apparatus under subclass 235 wherein the mass of particulate or fibrous
    particles are in combination with a supporting or reinforcing structure.


CLS 429/238
TXT Apparatus under subclass 233 wherein the grid or holder consists of
    longitudinal tubes or cores of an electrical conductive material.


CLS 429/239
TXT Apparatus under subclass 233 wherein the holder is an electrical conductive
    receptacle for the active material or wherein a mechanical means is defined
    to lock the active material within a grid or holder.


CLS 429/240
TXT Apparatus under subclass 239 where the grid or holder is provided with
    projections which are bent or may be bent for the expressed purpose of
    locking or holding the active material in position in the grid or holder.


CLS 429/241
TXT Apparatus under subclass 233 wherein the grid is in the form of a plate
    having an open mesh or perforated structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 596+ for
    metallic stock material having an aperture or cut.


CLS 429/242
TXT Apparatus under subclass 241 where the open mesh or perforations of the
    grid have been formed by expanded metal technique.


CLS 429/243
TXT Apparatus under subclass 241 wherein the open mesh or perforation design
    defined by the elements in a face plane does not coincide with the design
    defined by the opposite face plane elements.


CLS 429/244
TXT Apparatus under subclass 243 wherein distinct elements or members not
    coextensive with either set of members in a face plane are intermediate of
    the face members.


CLS 429/245
TXT Apparatus under subclass 233 wherein the chemical composition of the grid
    or holder is specifically defined.


CLS 429/246
TXT Subject matter under subclass 209 directed to electrode in combination with
    insulating spacer or retainer means, i.e., separators, membranes, etc.  The
    insulating material functions to physically and electronically separate the
    electrodes, to hold the active material into its desired position and to
    permit an ionically conduction of current when used in a battery.


CLS 429/247
TXT Apparatus under subclass 122 comprising structure to be used as a
    separator, retainer, or spacer between the electrodes in a cell.

    (1)     Note.  To constitute structure for this and indented subclasses
    there must be claimed (disclosure) subject matter involving:



    (a)     A recitation of numerical dimension.

    (b)     A coating on a substrate.

    (c)     Structural connotations such as sheet, mat, fiber, filament,
    porosity, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129,    for separator, retainer, or spacer which is (a) more than a single
    porous sheet, (b) plural layers, or (c) contains any of the structures
    specifically set out in the indented subclasses of subclass 129.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 500.21, (2) Note.  for
    the lines between this class and other classes with respect to membranes
    defined by composition.


CLS 429/248
TXT Apparatus under subclass 247 combined with an additive material or
    component which functions to specifically change the properties such as the
    charge capacity of the plates or the life of the cell, etc.


CLS 429/249
TXT Apparatus under subclass 247 composed of or contains an organic component.


CLS 429/250
TXT Apparatus under subclass 249 in combination with a wetting agent or
    surfactant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 351 for wetting agent or surfactant
    compositions, per se.


CLS 429/251
TXT Apparatus under subclass 249 combined with inorganic material.


CLS 429/252
TXT Apparatus under subclass 251 wherein the inorganic is or contains silicon.


CLS 429/253
TXT Apparatus under subclass 249 wherein the organic component is either a
    phenolic or thermosetting resin.


CLS 429/254
TXT Apparatus under subclass 249 wherein the organic component is rubber
    (natural or synthetic) or a thermoplastic.


CLS 429/255
TXT Apparatus under subclass 249 wherein the organic component is either a
    portion (in cross section) of a natural plant or a portion of a natural
    plant which has been nondestructively treated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for stock material made of natural plant material not otherwise provided
    for.


CLS 430/
TTL RADIATION IMAGERY CHEMISTRY: PROCESS, COMPOSITION, OR PRODUCT THEREOF

CLS 430/
TXT

    CLASS DEFINITION


    I.      STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    II.     GLOSSARY

    III.    CLASSIFICATION LINES AND SEARCH NOTES TO OTHER CLASSES

    A.      Lines with and search notes to compounds, compositions, and
    material classes.

    1.      Compounds

    2.      Compositions or material

    B.      Lines with and search notes to article or product classes.

    C.      Lines with and search notes to process and apparatus classes.

    1.      General relation with process and apparatus classes

    2.      Relation with special classes involving radiation imagery.

    D.      Lines and search notes to special classes.

    I.      STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    This is the generic class for:

    A.      Forming the likeness of an object, or an instrumented or
    discernible phenomenon, in a chemically defined receiver or in a receiver
    wherein radiation produces a chemical reaction, by use of radiation.

    B.      Finishing the image formed by (A) with post imaging processing.

    C.      Finishing an image by chemical processing regardless how formed.

    D.      A radiation sensitive receiver, composition, or product disclosed
    (claimed) solely for radiation imagery chemistry, and process of making
    same.

    E.      A nonradiation sensitive-receiver, composition, or product
    (disclosed or claimed for receiving an image from a radiation sensitive
    product) and disclosed (claimed) solely for radiation imagery chemistry,
    and process of making same.

    F.      An imaged product by a process of A, B, or C above or employing a
    receiver, composition, or product of D or E above.

    II.     GLOSSARY

    (1)     Note.  The meaning to be given to the various "art" terms appearing
    in this class, but which have not been included in the Glossary below, is
    the same as that generally accepted or in common usage.  However, certain
    terms employed in this class, which are included below, have been assigned
    definitions tailored to meet the needs of this class and therefore those
    may be more restricted or less limited or even altogether different from
    those in common usage.

    ADDITIVE COLOR A

    color (red, green, blue) when added to the other two additive colors
    produce white.

    CARBOHYDRATE A

    polyhydroxy mono-aldehyde and a polyhydroxy mono-ketone, generally having
    the formula C (H2O) and substances which are hydrolyzed to these.  The term
    includes cellulose, starch, dextran, and sugar.

    CHEMICAL PROCESS A

    process involving a chemical reaction or the recitation of chemical
    composition, compound, etc., in the claims which are involved in a chemical
    reaction during the process.

    COLOR IMAGE IN OR ON AN IMAGE RECORD

    At least a portion of the image record absorbs only part of the light in
    the visible electromagnetic spectrum, excludes black image on white
    background, or vice versa, includes black image on green background.

    EXPOSURE

    Application of radiation to form or perfect an image.

    HETEROCYCLIC

    Organic compound containing a ring composed of carbon and at least one
    element from the group consisting of nitrogen, sulfur, selenium, tellurium,
    and oxygen.

    IDENTIFIED

    A substance, layer, or product is considered identified when it is claimed
    in terms of its chemical constitution instead of merely its function.  The
    terms "organic" and "inorganic" are not considered identified, but any
    other positive chemical identification is considered sufficient even if
    generic, e.g., heterocyclic, synthetic resin, hydrocarbon, etc.  Negative
    definition, per se, e.g., nonaqueous, etc., is not considered
    identification, but if combined with sufficient other material, e.g.,
    nonaqueous alcohol.  The term acid or base or their equivalents are
    considered identification.  The identification of any ingredient of a layer
    is sufficient to make the layer identified.

    IMAGE

    The likeness or reproduction of (a) an object, or (b) an instrumented or
    discernible phenomenon.

    IMAGING

    The application of radiation to form an image.

    IMAGE RECORD

    A record, made using an imaging process, where the image is located, e.g.,
    the image may be in or on a radiation conductor containing element or may
    be in or on receptor element, etc.

    MONOCHROME IMAGE

    An image which absorbs only part of the light in the visible
    electromagnetic spectrum.

    RADIATION

    The propagation of energy through space or through a material.  It may be
    in the form of electromagnetic waves, corpuscular emissions, or sound
    waves.  The format is usually categorized according to frequency, e.g.,
    Hertzian, infrared, (visible) light, ultraviolet, X-rays, gamma rays, etc.,
    corpuscular emissions are categorized as alpha, beta, or cosmic.

    RECEPTOR ELEMENT

    An element which receives a transferred image from another element.

    STRUCTURALLY DEFINED

    Defined in terms of:  (a) numerical or relative dimension; e.g., 5 microns
    thick, twice as long as wide, etc.  As applied to products or layers, it is
    the overall exterior dimension of either the completed product or an
    individual layer; (b) plural, non-coextensive layers, e.g., leader strip,
    etc., however, nonuniform or non-coextensive images are not considered
    structure; (c) overall mechanical shape, except mere rectangular or planar,
    e.g., roll of film sprocket holes, etc.

    STRIPPING LAYER

    A layer or layers which are part of a combination of plural layers which
    layer or layers are strippable from a layer immediately adjacent to it or
    are capable of separating by internal cohesive failure.

    SUBTRACTIVE COLOR

    A color (cyan, magenta, and yellow) which when combined with another
    subtractive color produces an additive color (red, green, blue).

    III.    CLASSIFICATION LINES AND SEARCH NOTES TO OTHER CLASSES

    A.      Lines with and search notes to compound, composition, and material
    classes.

    1.      A compound, per se, is classified in a compound class regardless of
    utility.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclasses for
    processes and synthetic resins or other products solely disclosed as made
    by a Class 204 process (except for (1)  products which contain two or more
    contiguous metallic layers and (2) products of processes classifiable in
    subclasses 157.15+ and 450+).

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, appropriate subclasses for electrolytic
    processes and products produced thereby (especially subclass 50) in which
    the products are solely disclosed as made by a Class 205 process (except
    for (1)  products which contain two or more contiguous metallic layers and
    (2) products of processes classifiable in subclasses 640+).

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for an organic compound having a
    Class 430 utility.  This portion of Class 260 is being reclassified into
    the 530-570 series of Classes.  See the search notes below.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses for an
    inorganic compound or nonmetallic element having a Class 430 utility.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, for a synthetic resin, per se,
    having a Class 430 utility, and for compositions containing a synthetic
    resin and not solely disclosed as having a Class 430 imaging use.

    530-570,        Classes, Organic Compounds, especially Class 542, which
    provide for heterocyclic cyanine dyes, many of which are useful as
    sensitizers in Class 430 silver halide emulsions.

    2.      Composition or Material

    a.      The following general lines exist between Class 430 and other
    composition or material classes or with classes containing patents wherein
    the claims recite a composition limited to an art use provided for in that
    class.

    (1)     A composition having no art use claimed, but disclosed as having a
    single art use is classified with the art use.

    (2)     Compositions which are disclosed as having a plurality of functions
    provided for in different main classes and only a single use, property, or
    function is claimed, are placed in the composition class providing for such
    claimed use, property, or function and cross-referenced to other classes
    for disclosed uses, properties, or functions when desirable.

    (3)     Compositions which are disclosed as having a plurality of uses,
    properties, or functions provided for in different main classes, and there
    are claims to a plurality of such several uses, properties, or functions,
    are placed in the composition class coming first in the following order of
    superiority.

    504,    Plant Protecting and Regulating Compositions.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products

    71,     Chemistry:  Fertilizers

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof

    508,    Solid Antifriction Devices, Materials Therefor, Lubricant and
    separant Compositions for Moving Solid Surfaces, and Miscellaneous Mineral
    Oil Compositions

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions

    148,    Metal Treatment

    252,    Compositions (special uses or functions)

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon  Compounds, subclasses 709+

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, 252, Compositions  (nonspecial
    uses or functions)



    (4)     Compositions which are disclosed as having a plurality of uses,
    properties, or functions provided for in different main classes noted in
    (3) above and there are no claims to any use, property, or function are
    placed in Class 252, Compositions, or in Class 520, Synthetic Resins or
    Natural Rubbers, when the composition contains a synthetic resin.

    (5)     It is the general rule of classification to classify a process of
    preparing a composition along with the composition.  In these circumstances
    where only a process of preparing a composition is claimed and there is no
    claim to a composition, the claims would be classified identically as if
    there were a composition claimed (notes 1, 2, 3, and 4 above).

    (6)     This superiority list is not intended as a complete list and will
    be expanded or added to as the relationship between classes containing
    compositions and the above listed classes is determined.

    b.      A composition disclosed for forming an image by a Class 430 process
    as one of plural uses but is not claimed as having a Class 430 imaging use
    is placed as an original in another class based on its general utility and
    crossed to Class 430.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclasses for
    a composition which is resinifiable or polymerizable under the influence of
    radiation and is of general utility or is not disclosed as useful for
    imaging.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 182.11 and 364 for chemical agents or
    materials and solvents which are not solely disclosed or claimed for
    treating images in a Class 430 process.

    520,    Synthetic Resins,  or Natural Rubbers, for synthetic resin
    compositions disclosed as having a Class 430 imaging use but not limited
    thereto.

    c.      A composition which is not an imaging composition but which is
    disclosed or claimed as useful as a part of a Class 430 product is
    classified in Class 430 only when claimed in conjunction with a Class 430,
    imaging composition or layer. Otherwise such composition, per se, is
    classified on some other basis depending on its ingredients or function.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, for metal and alloys useful as a backing for radiation sensitive
    compositions, e.g., photoresists, etc.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, for compositions therein
    provided not containing a synthetic resin, subclasses 168.01+ for cellulose
    ester or salt thereof and 172.1+ for cellulose ether or salt thereof.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 582+ for optical filter compositions which
    may be useful as a component of a radiation sensitive element.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, for synthetic resin
    compositions useful as a component of a radiation sensitive element, e.g.,
    backing, overcoat, subing, etc.

    536,    Organic Compounds, for cellulose or its derivative, per se, useful
    as an ingredient in a radiation sensitive element, e.g., cellulose ester
    suitable for a film base, etc.

    d.      A composition solely disclosed or claimed for radiation imagery is
    classified in Class 430.

    e.      For a general search.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, for radiation sensitive dye compositions of general
    utility.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 122+ for alloy compositions.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, for coating or plastic
    compositions disclosed for use with radiation imagery and other arts.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclasses for
    a composition produced by a 204 process (except for (1)  products which
    contain two or more contiguous metallic layers and (2) products of
    processes classifiable in subclasses 157.15+ and 450+). A patent containing
    claims or disclosure to both an imagery and nonimagery use will be
    classified as an original in Class 204 and cross-referenced to Class 430.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, appropriate subclasses for electrolytic
    processes and products produced thereby (especially subclass 50) in which
    the products are solely disclosed as made by a Class 205 process (except
    for (1)  products which contain two or more contiguous metallic layers and
    (2) products of processes classifiable in subclasses 640+).

    252,    Compositions, for radiation affected compositions whose use are not
    limited to radiation imagery by claims or disclosures and not provided by a
    Class 204 process.  Subclass 600 is the residual subclass for radiation
    compositions not containing a synthetic resin for which see Class 520.



    B.      Lines with and search notes to articles or product classes.

    1.      As a general rule, a product (article) is classified with the class
    specifically providing for the same or a generic class which can take the
    same.

    2.      Class 430, Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Compositions, or
    Product Thereof, provides for a product (article) which is (a) imaged and
    defined by its composition, (b) radiation sensitive and limited by claims
    or disclosure for use in radiation imagery, and (c) products of radiation
    imagery not elsewhere classified.

    3.      An article or product defined by section 2 combined with
    significant structure for another class will be classified in the class
    providing for the structure and crossed to Class 430.

    4.      Cases involving multiple claimed subject matter, i.e., claims for
    both Class 430 and class(es) mentioned in section 3 will be classified in
    Class 430 and crossed to the other class(es).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, appropriate subclasses for
    subject matter of that class having images.

    101,    Printing, subclasses 127+ for stencils; subclasses 463.1+ for
    printing plates; and subclass 40 for blanks.  But Class 430 provides for
    printing plates having radiation sensitive material.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 31+ for products of the class in the
    form of stock, especially subclasses 33+ for nonferrous barrier layer
    material, p-n type.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 101+ for products of
    that class disclosed for use in radiation imagery.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 111+ for sensitized and chemically prepared
    tapes adapted to receive or transmit a record.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclasses for
    products solely disclosed as made by a Class 204 process (except for (1)
    products which contain two or more contiguous metallic layers and (2)
    products of processes classifiable in subclasses 157.15+ and 450+).

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, appropriate subclasses for products produced by
    electrolytic processes (especially subclass 50) in which the products are
    solely disclosed as made by a Class 205 process (except for (1)  products
    which contain two or more contiguous metallic layers and (2) products of
    processes classifiable in subclasses 640+).

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 316.1+ for an container
    optical or photographic means; subclasses 454+ for a container for fragile
    or sensitive type i.e., photo film or plate, specimen, or sheet slide,
    etc.; subclasses 484+ for laminate or photo slide, etc.; subclasses 524.1+
    for package or special receptacle with specified material for the container
    or content, and subclass 578 for combined or convertible type assemblage
    kit for photography.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 92+ for dispensing collapsible wall-type
    containers; and Digest 1 for xerography.

    250,    Radiant Energy, for nonchemically defined radiation sensitive
    product or a chemically defined product having significant apparatus
    structure; and subclasses 475.1+ for photographic type products adapted to
    be used with invisible radiation.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 10, 11, 21, 53-56, 72, 113-118, 184-189, 225-234, 257, 258,
    290-294, and 414+ for radiation responsive active semiconductor devices.

    283,    Printed Matter, appropriate subclasses for subject matter of that
    class in the form of an image.

    313,    Electrical Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 153 for device
    having means for generating a magnetic field; subclass 329 for mosaic
    electrode; subclasses 359.1+ for device with positive or negative ion
    acceleration; subclasses 483+ for device with luminescent solid or liquid
    material, especially subclasses 498+ for solid-state type; and subclasses
    523+ for photosensitive device.

    346,    Recorders, for a nonchemically defined radiation sensitive record
    receiver used in a Class 346 recorder and a chemically defined radiation
    sensitive record receiver having significant Class 346 apparatus structure.
     Subclasses 134+ for a laminated, impregnated, or coated record receiver
    having structure provided for in Class 346.

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclasses
    163+ for ophthalmic lenses or blanks with filtering means.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 232+ for motion picture
    carrier, per se, or having cooperating apparatus structure (see search
    notes thereunder).

    353,    Optics, Image Projectors, subclass 84 for color filters; and
    subclass 120 for picture carrier.

    355,    Photocopying, appropriate subclasses for copies produced or used by
    subject matter of the class and subclasses 122+ for frame structure.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    478+ for relief illusion device; subclasses 885+ for nonchemically defined
    filter; subclass 893 for screen or mask; subclasses 36+ for elements using
    liquid crystal material; subclasses 1+ for holographic element; and
    subclasses 483+ for polarizers.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 131+
    for record medium, especially subclass 134 for tape; subclass 135 for disk;
    and subclass 136 for drum.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 272+ for an
    element having dynamically stored information (e.g., sound) thereon,
    particularly subclasses 284+ for an optical information storage element not
    chemically defined.  Class 430 provides for such a storage element when it
    is chemically defined.

    396,    Photography, appropriate subclasses for photographic apparatus.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics, subclasses 38+
    for controls, subclasses 130+ for image formation, subclasses 168+ for
    charging, subclasses 177+ for exposure, subclasses 222+ for development,
    subclasses 297+ for transfer, subclasses 320+ for fixing, subclasses 343+
    for cleaning, and subclasses 361+ for document handling.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 1 for a stock
    liquid crystal; subclasses 29+ for an article having a latent image formed
    by means other than radiation imagery; and appropriate subclasses for
    nonradiation sensitive stock material disclosed for use in radiation
    imagery.



    C.      Lines with and search notes to process and apparatus classes.

    1.      General relation with process and apparatus classes.

    Class 430, Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, is the residual class for forming an image by use of radiation or
    finishing such image by post imaging treatment, and the process of making a
    composition or product solely disclosed or claimed for use in radiation
    imagery.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 73+ for after-treatment of dyed material;
    subclasses 81+ for dye recovery; subclasses 101+ for bleaching, especially
    subclass 103 for bleaching using wave energy; subclasses 442 and 446+ for
    textile printing involving use of a resist in finishing a design; subclass
    444 for dyeing process or composition involving wave energy; and Digest 12
    for wave energy treatment of textiles.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 1.51+ for
    electrostatic cleaning; and appropriate subclasses for general cleaning.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 33+ for plural diverse manufacturing
    apparatus including metal shaping or assembly of a printing plate;
    subclasses 592.1+ for process of mechanical manufacture of electrical
    devices.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 266+ for
    process involving selected radiation energy and subject matter of the
    class; and subclasses 444+ for process of gas or vapor contact with sheets,
    webs, or strands.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 447+ for changing
    exhibitor with alpha-numeric device; especially subclass 448 for liquid
    crystal; subclasses 542+ for illuminated sign luminescent type; and
    subclasses 625+ for permanent identification devices.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, appropriate subclasses for radiation imagery
    combined with glass working; and Digest 2 for photosensitive glass.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    fluid treating sheet and web textile material.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclass 118 for hydro-metallurgy for obtaining silver from
    photographic materials.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 1.05+ for metal
    depositing compositions or substrate, sensitizing compositions for metal
    depositing compositions; subclass 2 for coating repellent compositions;
    subclass 14.5 for nonradiation sensitive hectographic or copying
    compositions; subclass 160.1 for gelatin, glue, or derivative compositions;
    and subclasses 400+ for pigments; fillers, or aggregates.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclass 1 for process of
    cleaning including application of electrical, radiant, or wave energy to
    work; subclass 3 for chemical stripping a radiation sensitive material from
    a base; subclass 9 for cleaning longitudinally travelling work, of bar,
    strip, strand, sheet, or web; and subclass 64 for the corresponding
    apparatus.

    137,    Fluid Handling, appropriate subclasses for fluid handling systems.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 100+ for treating magnetic materials;
    and subclasses 240+ for processes of coating solid metal with a material
    that reacts therewith.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,  subclass
    58 for contour or profile photography to reproduce three-dimensional
    objects; subclass 59 for producing relief or intaglio representations of
    three-dimensional objects (e.g., relief modeling of photographs); subclass
    108 for mounting transparent lamina over window opening (e.g.,
    slide-mounting); subclasses 230+ for direct contact transfer of adhered
    lamina from carrier to base; subclass 246 for surface bonding or assembly
    therefor involving lamina formation by molding or casting on a temporary
    planar support, e.g., film casting; subclass 247 for stripping of adhered
    lamina; subclasses 272.2+ for process involving direct application of
    electrical or radiant energy to work.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclass 134 for paper making
    with printing or variegated coloring; subclasses 135+ for paper making and
    coating after drying; subclass 138 for electrical or magnetic product
    characteristic; subclass 193 for lead strip forming; and subclass 197 for
    paper making with stretching, tensioning, decurling, flexing, or breaking.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 2+ for printing plate forming.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 15 for automatic photographic recorder system;
    subclass 90 for photographic code recorder receiver; and subclass 94 for
    pyrographic code recorder receiver.

    181,    Acoustics, appropriate subclasses for sound generators.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 157.15+ for
    chemical reactions brought about by wave energy; subclasses 164+ for
    chemical production of compounds or elements by using an electrostatic
    field or electrical discharge; subclasses 450+ for electrophoretic or
    electro-osmotic processes, especially subclasses 471+ for electrophoretic
    or electro-osmotic coating or forming of an object; subclasses 292+ for
    metallic electrode compositions useful in an electrolytic apparatus; and
    subclasses 600+ for electrophoretic or electro-osmotic apparatus,
    especially subclasses 622+ for apparatus used for electrophoretic or
    electro-osmotic coating or forming of an object.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 52+ for electrolytic marking,
    subclasses 67+ for electro-forming, subclass 68 for recording device,
    subclass 69 for printing plate or electrotype, subclass 72 for ornamental
    article, subclasses 118+ for coating selected area, subclasses 120+ for
    design or ornamental article, subclass 127 for printing member.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses for
    process and apparatus of treating a liquid to render the same pure.

    219,    Electric Heating,  subclasses 600+ for inductive heating,
    subclasses 678+ for microwave heating, and subclasses 764+ for capacitive
    dielectric heating.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 430+ for composite
    article winding made particular by the process or apparatus by which
    elongated material is placed on a core to form a composite article, and
    subclasses 18+ and 47+ for strand winding, and subclasses 520+ for
    convolute winding.

    252,    Composition, appropriate subclasses for the process of making
    hereinafter named radiation affecting compositions (not limited by claim or
    disclosure for use in radiation imagery chemistry); subclasses 62.3+ for
    barrier layer device; subclasses 62.51+ for magnetic; subclass 62.9 for
    piezoelectric; subclasses 63+ for dielectric or electrically insulating;
    subclasses 79.1+ for etching or brightening; subclass 88 for sweeping or
    dust particle adherent; subclasses 299.01+ for liquid crystal; subclasses
    582+ for optical filter; subclasses 301.16+ for organic luminescent
    material containing; subclass 301.36 for inorganic luminescent composition
    with organic nonluminescent material; subclasses 301.4+ for inorganic
    luminescent; subclass 478 for X-ray or neutron shield; subclasses 500+ for
    electrically conductive or emissive, especially 501.1 for light sensitive
    type; and subclass 600 for radiation sensitive.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for processes of making an organic
    compound having a Class 430 utility and the product of such a process.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    subclass 21 for shaping or treating luminescent material.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave, subclass 17 for means to produce an
    image from radio waves.

    348,    Television, subclasses 32+ for pseudo color; subclasses 40+ for
    holography; subclasses 739 + for image reproducer, especially subclasses
    755, 764, and 770+ for deformation medium having specific composition. Also
    cross-reference art collection 902 for photochromic.

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 75+ for natural color facsimile; subclasses
    296+ for recording apparatus, especially subclass 289 for halftone;
    subclass 300 for electrostatic; subclass 301 for magnetic; and subclass 303
    for photographic.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 225+ for
    electric charging of objects or materials.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 2 for daylight lighting including selective
    wavelength modifier; subclasses 3+ for photographic lighting; subclass 34
    for chemiluminescent lighting; subclass 84 for light source or light source
    support and luminescent material; subclasses 257+ for light source (or
    support therefor) and modifier, especially subclass 259 for laser type;
    subclass 260 for fluorescent type; subclasses 261+ for carbon arc type;
    subclasses 263+ for ionized gas or vapor light source; subclass 266 for
    nonelectric type; and subclasses 317+ for light modifiers.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 100+ for
    optical information recording or reproduction.

    386,    Television Signal Processing for Dynamic Recording or Reproducing,
    subclasses 31+, 42+, and 128+ for photographic television recording,
    subclasses 45 and 125+ for recording or reproducing television on disc, and
    subclass 127 for thermoplastic record.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics, subclasses 38+
    for controls, subclasses 130+ for image formation, subclasses 168+ for
    charging, subclasses 177+ for exposure, subclasses 222+ for development,
    subclasses 297+ for transfer, subclasses 320+ for fixing, subclasses 343+
    for cleaning, and subclasses 361+ for document handling.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 7 for coating to detect fraud or
    tampering; subclasses 457+ for direct application of electrical, magnetic,
    wave, or particulate energy, especially subclasses 487+ for polymerization
    of applied coating utilizing direct application of electrical, magnetic,
    wave, or particulate energy; subclasses 523+ utilizing ion plating or ion
    implantation; subclasses 569+ for deposition coating processes utilizing
    plasma deposition; subclasses 580+ for deposition coating processes
    utilizing electrical discharges; subclass 581 for deposition coating
    processes utilizing chemical liquid deposition; 582+ for deposition coating
    processes utilizing photo initiated chemical vapor deposition; 585+ for
    deposition coating processes utilizing chemical vapor deposition; subclass
    591 for deposition coating processes utilizing induction or dielectric
    heating; subclass 592 for deposition coating processes utilizing resistance
    heating; subclass 595 for deposition coating utilizing electromagnetic or
    particulate radiation; subclasses 598+ for deposition coating processes
    utilizing magnetic field or force, 600+ for deposition coating processes
    utilizing sonic or ultrasonic energy; subclass 143 for stencil blank
    making; 145 for formation of latent image or developing the same and
    subclass 146 for transfer or copy sheet making.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 9+ for process of heating or heater operation
    involving treating an article, container, batch, or body as a unit.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 1+ for
    analytical control methods.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, appropriate subclass
    for methods of making semiconductor devices; see the search notes therein.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 29+ for finishing a workpiece by abrading,
    especially using a stencil or shield.

    462,    Books, Strips, and Leaves for Manifolding, subclasses 69+ for
    manifolding process wherein printing is transferred from one sheet to
    another by use of carbon or some other transferable material.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, for synthetic resins mixtures
    which may be radiation sensitive, and which utility is not provided
    elsewhere.


    2.      Relation with special classes involving radiation imagery.

    (a)     As a general rule the below listed classes provide for: (1)
    apparatus, per se, (2) apparatus with chemical material, (3) process of
    operating the apparatus, and (4) nonchemical process.

    b.      Cases involving multiple claimed subject matter, i.e., claims for
    both Class 430 and class(es) hereinafter stated will be classified in Class
    430 and crossed to the other class(es).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, for stencils, printing plates, and blanks made by a Class
    430 process or such products chemically defined with apparatus structure
    for Class 101.

    250,    Radiant Energy, for (a) forming an image using invisible radiation
    wherein neither a chemical reaction nor a chemically defined radiation
    sensitive receiver is involved, and (b) finishing (postimaging processing)
    the image by a nonchemical operation.  Subclass 271 for coded record and
    receiver; subclass 315.1 for source with charged plate-type detector;
    subclasses 316.1+ for infrared or thermal recording with photographic
    detector; subclasses 324+ for corona irradiation; subclasses 330+ for
    infrared-to-visible imaging; subclasses 423+ for ion generation; subclasses
    458+ for luminophor irradiation; subclasses 472+ for devices other than
    electrical responsive to invisible radiation, especially subclass 473 for
    methods; subclass 475.1 for photographic type; subclasses 483+ for
    luminescent device; subclasses 492.1+ for irradiation of object or
    material; subclasses 493+ for radiant energy generation; and subclasses
    505+ for radiation controlling means.

    346,    Recorders, for forming a record of movement or phenomenon not
    involving a chemical reaction or a chemically defined radiation sensitive
    receiver and a recording apparatus having chemical material.  Subclasses 2+
    for phenomenal apparatus and process recording; subclass 74.2 for magnetic
    pictorial or graphic means; subclass 76.1 for pyrographic and
    thermochemical means; subclass 107.1 for recorder with photosensitive
    record receiver; and subclasses 150.1+ for electric recording (apparatus
    and process).

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, subclasses 112+ for
    electrostatic marking, particularly subclasses 129+ for photo scanning by
    beam of charged particles or light,  subclasses 171+ for thermal marking,
    and subclasses 224+ for light or beam marking apparatus or processes.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, for process not involving a chemical
    reaction or a chemically defined radiation receiver for recording and
    exhibiting motion pictures, using motion pictures and of nonchemical
    treating and working a motion picture carrier.  Subclass 5 for producing or
    reproducing motion pictures with synchronized sound; and subclasses 38+ for
    motion picture process not having sound accompaniment.

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, subclasses 30+ for projector for
    composite image; and subclass 120 for process involving the class subject
    matter.

    355,    Photocopying, for the generic locus for apparatus (per se, or
    significant apparatus combined with chemical material) and process (not
    involving a chemical reaction or a chemically defined radiation receiver)
    for photographically copying, certain nonchemical combinations,
    subcombinations, and perfecting features pertaining to same, e.g., film
    developing, holders for original or photosensitive paper, etc.  Search
    subclass 2 for holographic copying; subclasses 3+ for electric photographic
    apparatus and process of copying; subclasses 18+ for projecting printing
    and copying camera; subclass 77 for the related process; subclasses 78+ for
    contact printing copying; subclass 132 for the related process; and
    subclasses 122+ for frame structure.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    1+ for holographic systems; subclasses 36+ for apparatus utilizing a liquid
    crystal material; and subclasses 290+ for device for controlling light by
    changing optical or physical properties of a light control surface or
    interface and subclass 900 for a cross-reference art collection of optical
    methods.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, for general
    dynamic magnetic recording or reproducing which includes specific structure
    of a record carrier.  Subclasses 1+ for recording or reproducing from an
    element of diverse utility, especially subclass 3 for motion picture film;
    subclass 15 for record copying; subclasses 55+ for general recording or
    reproducing; and subclass 59 for thermomagnetic.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, for imparting information
    in a nonchemically defined radiation sensitive receiver using radiant
    energy.  Subclasses 106+ for use of radiant energy to alter a storage
    material which is usually read out electrically, especially subclass 107
    for chemical fluids; subclass 108 for liquid crystal; subclass 109 for
    photoconductors and ferroelectric; subclass 110 for electroluminescent and
    photoconductive; subclass 111 for electroluminescent; subclass 113 for
    amorphous; subclasses 114+ for semiconductor; subclass 117 for
    ferro-electric; subclass 118 for electron beam affected material; and
    subclass 119 for color center (radiation responsive).

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 100+ provide
    for the dynamic storage of information by radiation modified chemical
    action to the storage medium.  Class 430 provides for radiation imagery
    process of chemically forming a sound record or the product of the process
    chemically defined.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, appropriate subclasses.
    Note the class lines described in the reference to Class 250.

    396,    Photography, for the generic locus for photographic apparatus,
    fluid treating (post imaging) apparatus, subcombinations of such apparatus,
    accessories related to photography, and related nonchemical processes or
    process of operating the apparatus. Subclasses for apparatus and process
    include subclasses 1+ for studio structure; subclasses 30+ for developing
    cameras; subclasses 305+ for color using monochrome film; subclasses 322+
    for plural image recording; subclasses 429+ for combined or convertible
    devices; subclasses 549+ for phototype composing; and subclasses 564+ for
    post imaging fluid treatment.

    399,    Electrophotography, for apparatus (per se, or significant apparatus
    combined with chemical material) and process (not involving a chemical
    reaction or a chemically defined radiation receiver) for
    electrophotographically reproducing information in the form of an image,
    certain nonchemical combinations, subcombinations, and perfecting features
    pertaining to same, search subclasses 9+ for diagnostics, subclasses 38+
    for controls, subclasses 130+ for image formation, subclasses 168+ for
    charging, subclasses 177+ for exposure, subclasses 222+ for development,
    subclasses 297+ for transfer, subclasses 320+ for fixing, subclasses 343+
    for cleaning, and subclasses 361+ for document handling.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 132+ for
    implement including rupturable means or sealed-cartridge receiver.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, the following subclasses for
    inorganic elements (compounds of same) used in radiation imagery chemistry:
     subclasses 23+ for treating mixture to obtain Group IB metal (Cu, Ag, or
    Au); subclasses 99+ for Group IIB metal (Zn, Cd, or Hg); subclass 508 for
    selenium or tellurium or compound thereof; and subclass 622 for zinc oxide
    compound.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, provides for radiation imagery process of forming a sound record
    or the product chemically defined.

    D16,    Photographic and Optical Equipment, appropriate subclasses for
    designs pertaining to subject matter of the class.


    D.      Lines and search notes to special classes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclass 440 for bleaching using wave energy;
    subclasses 442 and 446+, for textile printing involving use of a resist in
    finishing a design; subclass 444 for dyeing process or composition
    involving wave energy; subclasses 489-493 for aftertreatment of a dyed
    material; and Digest 12, for wave energy treatment of textiles.  Class 430,
    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product Thereof,
    provides for (a) forming an image using radiation involving a dyeing or
    bleaching procedure, (b) finishing an image (using a dyeing or bleaching
    procedure), (c) a combination of (a) and (b), (d) compositions limited by
    disclosure or claim to use in radiation imagery described under (a) and (b)
    above, and (e) recovery of dye or bleach when combined with radiation
    imagery processes.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, provides for the
    process of drying or gas or vapor contact with solids, per se, when so
    treating a product of this class (430).  Class 430, Radiation Imagery
    Chemistry: Process, Composition, or Product Thereof, provides for the
    combination of a Class 430 step(s) and drying or gas or vapor contact with
    a product of Class 430.

    101,    Printing, provides for (a) the process of making a printing surface
    which is more than a Class 430 process or (b) more than a mere use of a
    surface made by a Class 430 process, and (c) stencils, blanks, and printing
    surfaces made by a Class 430 process but having structure for Class 101.
    Class 430, Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, provides for process of (1) making printing surfaces, e.g.,
    stencil, stencil lithographic plate, blanks, planographic and relief
    plates, etc., which (a) involves the use of radiation imagery, or (b) the
    finishing (post imaging processing, e.g., developing, etc.) of the image
    formed by (1a) including the mere application of ink to the surface or
    printing; (2) the combination of (1a) or (1b) having the step of mere
    application of ink and printing the ink on a receptor surface, and product
    for printing which is (a) made using a Class 430 process wherein it is
    defined by its chemical composition and (b) radiation sensitive wherein it
    is to be used in a Class 430 process.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, provides for the
    combination of Class 430 subject matter and Class 204 subject matter,
    especially when the Class 204 subject matter does more than ordinarily
    perfect the post imaging processing.  Class 430, Radiation Imagery
    Chemistry: Process, Composition, or Product Thereof, provides for
    electrophoretic imaging, electrostatic image transfer and electrolysis
    imaging.

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, for disclosure (nonclaimed) of
    forming an image by radiation imagery and involving a claimed post imaging
    etching process.

    250,    Radiant Energy, provides for (a) forming an image using invisible
    radiation wherein neither a chemical reaction nor a chemically specified
    receiver is involved, (b) finishing (post imaging processing) the image by
    nonchemical processing (operation of machine), and (c) a nonchemically
    defined product or a chemically defined product having significant
    apparatus structure.

    252,    Compositions, provides for the hereinafter named radiation
    affecting compositions not limited by claim or disclosure for use in
    radiation imagery, subclasses 62.3+ for barrier layer device; subclass
    62.51 for magnetic; subclass 62.9 for piezoelectric; subclasses 63+ for
    dielectric or electrically insulating; subclasses 79.1+ for etching or
    brightening; subclasses 88.1 and 88.2 for dust suppressant or particle
    adherent compositions, respectively; subclasses 299.01+ for liquid crystal;
    subclass 301.16 for organic luminescent material containing; subclass
    301.36 for inorganic luminescent composition with organic nonluminescent
    material; subclasses 301.4+ for inorganic luminescent; subclass 478 for
    X-ray or neutron shield; subclasses 500+ for electrically conductive or
    emissive, especially subclass 501.1 for light sensitive type; subclasses
    582+ for optical filter; and subclass 600 for residual place for radiation
    sensitive composition.  Dual disclosures [radiation sensitive composition
    for use with radiation imagery and other use(s)] except those containing a
    synthetic resin (see Class 520) will be classified in Class 252 and
    cross-referenced to Class 430.

    346,    Recorders, for (a) forming a record of movement or phenomenon not
    involving a chemical reaction or a chemically defined radiation sensitive
    receiver, (b) a nonchemically defined radiation sensitive record receiver
    used in Class 346, Recorder, (c) a chemically defined radiation sensitive
    receiver having significant Class 346 apparatus structure, and (d)
    recording apparatus with chemical composition.



    A patent disclosing (claiming both (a) above and forming an image record
    involving a chemical reaction a chemically defined radiation sensitive
    receiver, or (b) a chemically defined radiation sensitive record receiver
    will be classified in Class 430 and cross-referenced to Class 346.  A
    patent claiming (c) or (d) will be classified in Class 346 and crossed to
    Class 430.  When subject matter of both classes is presented in the same
    patent, Class 430 is considered superior.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 100+ for
    dynamic storage by a radiation induced chemical change; and subclasses 272+
    for storage elements, particularly subclasses 284+ for a nonchemically
    defined photosensitive surface.  This class (430) provides for a radiation
    imagery process of information storage, or a chemically defined storage
    element.

    427,    Coating Process, takes the process of coating:  (a) not combined
    with radiation imagery process, (b) involving use of radiation during
    coating which does not involve a chemical reaction (Class 204 subject
    matter), and (c) resulting in a product (composition) for other than
    radiation imagery. Class 430, Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process,
    Composition, or Product Thereof, provides for a process of:  (1) coating a
    base with a radiation sensitive material alone or combined with a
    nonradiation sensitive material to make a radiation imaging receiver, (2)
    utilizing radiant energy (a) to form an image, or (b) to finish an image so
    formed; either (a) or (b) alone combined with a coating operation, (3) post
    imaging process utilizing coating operation to finish an image, and (4)
    perfecting or protecting a finished image by a coating operation.  Dual
    disclosures will go to Class 427.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, provides for stock-liquid
    crystal, an article having a latent or developable image formed other than
    by use of radiation, and nonradiation sensitive stock material disclosed
    for use in radiation imagery.  Class 430, Radiation Imagery Chemistry:
    Process, Composition, or Product Thereof, provides for a product (article)
    which is either (a) imaged and defined by its composition, (b) radiation
    sensitive and limited by claims or disclosure for use in radiation imagery,
    or (c) a product of radiation imagery (not elsewhere classified).


CLS 430/1
TXT HOLOGRAPHIC PROCESS, COMPOSITION OR PRODUCT:

    Composition or product under the class definition involving a hologram.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 40+ for use of holographic techniques for
    processing color information.

    355,    Photocopying, subclass 2 for holographic copying.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    1+ for holographic system or element.


CLS 430/2
TXT Composition or product or process of making the same:

    Composition or product under subclass 1, also the process of making the
    same.


CLS 430/3
TXT USE OF SOUND OR NONDIGITAL COMPRESSIVE FORCE:

    Processes under the class definition for using sound waves or a compressive
    force (wherein the means producing the compression does not touch the image
    receiver) to form or otherwise perfect the image.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 570+ for vibration measuring and
    testing, especially subclasses 632+ for sonic wave apparatus.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 2 for the use of ultrasonic device
    for diagnostic purposes which may include taking a picture with sound.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 7+ for electro acoustic imaging systems.


CLS 430/4
TXT RADIATION MODIFYING PRODUCT OR PROCESS OF MAKING:

    Products under the class definition chemically defined which functions to
    modify the radiation during imaging and is in the form of a photomask,
    screen, etc., or the process of making same or like products.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    510+,   for antihalation or filter layer containing product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 131+
    for record medium, especially subclass 134 for tape; subclass 135 for disk;
    and subclass 136 for drum.


CLS 430/5
TXT Radiation mask:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 wherein the light modifying means is in the
    form of a radiation mask.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, for disclosure (nonclaimed) of
    forming an image by radiation imagery and involving a claimed post imaging
    etching process.


CLS 430/6
TXT Screen other than for cathode-ray tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 wherein the light modifying means consist
    of sets of opaque lines crossing each other on a transparent substrate, the
    substrate consist of a series of small holes or some other similar
    structure which breaks up the radiation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for the so-called cathode-ray tube screen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 461+ for
    cathode-ray tube screens.


CLS 430/7
TXT Color:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 used to produce color.


CLS 430/8
TXT MICROGRAPHY, PROCESS, COMPOSITION, OR PRODUCT OTHER THAN MICROELECTRONIC
    DEVICE MANUFACTURE:

    Processes under the class definition wherein an image of the order of less
    than a few microns in size of an object, or of an instrumented or
    discernible phenomenon is produced in a medium, such as images produced in
    microfilm or microfiche, etc.; radiation sensitive or image receiving
    compositions and products manufactured, or specially adapted for use in
    obtaining images less than a few microns in size; and processes of making
    the composition or product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

      56+,  154+, 264+, 270.1+, 338+, 367+, and 495.1+ for radiation-sensitive
    compositions and products disclosed to have general utility in micrography,
    but not specially adapted or made for use in micrography.

    311+,   for microelectronic device manufacture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 701+, especially
    subclass 703 for aperture cards with image carrying microfilm; and
    subclasses 361+ for microfilm views.

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, for microfilm viewers with image
    projection on screen.

    355,    Photocopying, subclasses 18+ for photocopying apparatus used in
    micrography; and subclass 1 for apparatus used in micrography combined with
    fiber optics.


CLS 430/9
TXT IMAGED PRODUCT:

    Products under the class definition containing an image defined in terms of
    its chemical composition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 427+ for a display of
    art having an enhanced visual effect, which work may include a photograph
    not defined in terms of its composition.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 195+ for a
    photograph not defined in terms of its composition.


CLS 430/10
TXT Antifraud or antitampering:

    Products under subclass 9 having a material or feature which prevents or
    makes known an attempt to use the imaged product in a fraudulent manner or
    to tamper therewith.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is an imaged product containing an
    ingredient which upon exposure to the strong light typically employed in
    electric photographic copying equipment, causes the image to become blurred
    or otherwise obscured.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    194,    Check-Controlled Apparatus, subclasses 97+ especially subclass 100
    for a material test in a fraud preventive apparatus.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 271 for invisible radiant energy record
    and receiver.

    283,    Printed Matter, subclasses 72+ and 902 for fraud preventing or
    detecting in printed matter.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 7 for coating process involving fraud
    or tamper detecting.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Article, cross-reference art
    collection 916 for fraud or tampering subject matter.


CLS 430/11
TXT Structurally defined:

    Product under subclass 9 defined in terms of its mechanical structure.

    (1)     Note.  The term "structurally defined" is defined in the Glossary.


CLS 430/12
TXT Nonuniform or noncoextensive layer added to finished imaged product:

    Products under subclass 11 wherein after an image has been finished to its
    desired final state another layer has been added to the product which layer
    is either nonuniform in physical dimensions or physical or chemical
    properties or which layer is not coextensive with the imaged product.  The
    nonuniformity may, e.g., be in thickness or color, or the added layer may
    be added to only a part of the imaged product.  The nonuniformity may be as
    a wrinkled, stippled, marbleized, or wood grain effect.  There must be
    intent to produce a nonuniform layer, thus coating a previously roughened
    imaged product which necessarily results in a nonuniform coating is not
    included.

    (1)     Note.  Addition of a layer by a step or metal working mechanical
    manufacture is placed in the appropriate class for the mechanical
    manufacturing step.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, for an imaged product combined
    with structured exhibiting devices for that class.


CLS 430/13
TXT Image contained within transparent base:

    Products under subclass 9 wherein the image is contained in transparent
    component, e.g., plastic, glass, etc.


CLS 430/14
TXT Multilayer:

    Products under subclass 9 which contain an identified layer in addition to
    an identified image layer and one identified backing or protective layer.

    (1)     Note.  Included in the indented subclass hereunder are products
    containing two or more identified image layers even if no base or support
    layer is identified.


CLS 430/15
TXT Plural image layers:

    Products under subclass 14 containing two or more layers each containing an
    image provided for in this class.


CLS 430/16
TXT Deposited metal coating on image:

    Products under subclass 9 wherein a metal is deposited on the already
    formed image. Typically, a metal is deposited on a silver image by a
    so-called electroless plating process.


CLS 430/17
TXT Nonsilver image:

    Products under subclass 9 in which the image is not a metallic silver
    image. This subclass includes, for example, products in which the image
    composed of a dye or pigment or of a metal other than silver, or the image
    is formed by the edges of layers of a radiation sensitive colloid layer
    which has been imagewise exposed and developed.


CLS 430/18
TXT Including resin or synthetic polymer:

    Products under subclass 9 containing a resin or synthetic polymer.


CLS 430/19
TXT ERASABLE  IMAGING:

    Processes under the class definition wherein a visible or retrievable image
    is at least partially removed by a specified processing procedure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     31+, 532, and 962, for radiation-sensitive compositions and
    products and methods of using those compositions and products for unclaimed
    functions and features of erasing images.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, subclass 21 for recorders combined with record deleting
    means.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 25,
    57, and 66 for partial or complete erasure of information in a dynamic
    magnetic storage medium.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 655+ for photographic retouching apparatus.


CLS 430/20
TXT LIQUID CRYSTAL PROCESS, COMPOSITION, OR PRODUCT:

    Processes under the class definition wherein an image is produced in or
    defined by a liquid crystal material, radiation-sensitive composition or
    product of a liquid crystal material used in the process, and process of
    making the radiation sensitive composition or product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for liquid crystal used in holographic process, composition, and
    product involving use of a chemically named receiver or wherein a chemical
    reaction results in formation of hologram.

    19,     for liquid crystal used in process wherein an image made using
    radiation chemistry is erased.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 331 for non-chemical infrared to visible
    imaging including liquid crystal detector.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 299.01+ for liquid crystal composition and
    article defined by such composition not disclosed or claimed for use in
    imagery; and subclasses 582+ for liquid crystal composition, and article
    defined by such composition used as optical filter.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, subclasses 544+ for cholesteremic
    liquid crystal compound.

    349,    Liquid Crystal Cells, Elements and Systems, appropriate subclasses
    for a liquid crystal material and especially subclass 24 for radiation
    sensitive excitation in liquid crystal devices and subclasses 182+ for a
    particular composition of a liquid crystal material.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    1+ for liquid crystal used in nonchemical holographic process and in
    holographic device.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, of liquid
    crystal used to store or retrieve dynamic information stored magnetically.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 108 for liquid
    crystal used to store or retrieve static information.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 1 for liquid
    crystal stock material not especially adapted or made for use in imaging.


CLS 430/21
TXT RETRIEVING IMAGE MADE USING RADIATION IMAGERY:

    Processes under the class definition wherein a specified process step of
    retrieving an image, such as by optically projecting the image upon a
    screen, from an image carrying chemically identified receiver or from an
    image formed by a chemical reaction.  Included procedures for retrieving
    the image are optical, magnetic, or electrical in nature.  Merely viewing
    the image with the eye is not considered a specified process for the
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for holographic process combined with retrieving the hologram.

    5,      for image carrying optical mask capable of optically reproducing
    the image upon a radiation-sensitive product.

    20,     for the retrieval of image in liquid crystal material.

    31,     97, 139, and other process subclasses wherein a latent or visible
    image is finished or perfected by producing an invisible or visible image
    and for disclosed but not specified (unclaimed) image retrieval process.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, appropriate subclasses for nonchemical devices and
    process of this type; subclass 271 for device and process used for
    nonchemical detection of invisible radiation or conversion to electrical
    signal of information in symbolic or nonphotographic form; subclasses 336+
    for device or process wherein nonchemical invisible radiant energy imaging
    of a medium produces an electrical potential difference or a current flow;
    subclasses 199+ and 458+ for device or process wherein a nonchemical image
    is retrieved or detected using light-wave communication such as with a
    photocell; and subclasses 472+ for device or process wherein nonchemical
    invisible radiant energy imaging of a medium produces a nonelectrical
    response.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 1+ for nonchemical sound
    recording or reproduction combined with motion pictures.

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, subclasses 25+ for process and system
    involving selective retrieval of information; and subclass 121 for methods
    of optically retrieving information by projection wherein the information
    is in the form of a nonchemical image.

    355,    Photocopying, subclass 5 for electric photocopying apparatus
    combined with means to project reproduced image onto a screen or display
    means for viewing.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    290+ for optical retrieval of nonchemical image wherein a means is used to
    change the optical properties of the medium during retrieval.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, for nonchemical
    magnetic dynamic information storage and retrieval process and system,
    especially subclasses 1+ for process and device used to store or retrieve
    the image wherein the device has an additional utility than as a magnetic
    record carrier such as a photographic image medium; and subclasses 131+ for
    specific structure of magnetic record card other than mere magnetic
    coatings on a substrate.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, for nonchemical magnetic,
    electrical, or optical static information storage and retrieval process or
    system, especially subclasses 185.01+ for floating gate memory storage
    (e.g., flash memory), subclasses 185.01+ for floating gate memory storage
    (e.g., flash memory), subclasses 106+ and 120+ wherein radiant energy and
    information masking are utilized.


CLS 430/22
TXT REGISTRATION OR LAYOUT PROCESS OTHER THAN COLOR PROOFING:

    Processes under the class definition having a step recited for registering
    one or more images with each other or with the radiation-sensitive medium
    to be imaged.

    (1)     Note.  Color proofing is provided for elsewhere in the class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143     and 358, for color proofing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, subclasses 14, 54, 60, 61, and 94+ for registration
    feature for that class.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 46, 51, and 97 for features
    involving registration.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 390 and 399+ for
    alignment features.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics, subclasses 38+
    for controls, subclasses 130+ for image formation, and subclasses 361+ for
    document handling, particularly subclass 372 having registration of
    original, subclass 385 for cutting copies, and subclass 394 for
    registration with image of copy.

    552,    Organic Compounds, subclass 653 of Vitamin D compounds,
    cholecalciferols, dihydrotachysterols, 3-5 cyclovitamin D compounds, etc.
    which contain only carbon and hydrogen.


CLS 430/23
TXT PRODUCING CATHODE-RAY TUBE OR ELEMENT THEREOF:

    Processes under the class definition for making a cathode-ray tube or
    components thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4+,     for photomask, screens, etc., for having use other than with a
    cathode-ray tube and process of making same.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 364+ for
    cathode-ray tube and its components, especially subclasses 365+ for image
    pickup tube; subclasses 402+ for shadow mask, support, or shield,
    subclasses 461+ for screen structure; subclasses 523+ for photosensitive
    lamps, and especially subclasses 541 and 544 for cathode tube having
    photosensitive material on the tube wall.

    348,    Television, subclasses 805+ for a cathode-ray tube as a television
    display device.


CLS 430/24
TXT Using specific control or specific modification of exposure, i.e., by
    manipulation of radiation source or exposure through elements other than
    shadow mask:

    Processes under subclass 23 involving control or modification of the
    exposure through a shadow mask.

    (1)     Note.  The control or modification of the exposure is made by,
    e.g., an optical element, a faceplate, or relative movement during the
    exposure between the light source, shadow mask, and faceplate, etc.


CLS 430/25
TXT With light-absorbing matrix on faceplate:

    Processes under subclass 23 wherein the contrast of the phosphoric screen,
    e.g., is improved by surrounding the phosphoric dots or stripes with a
    light absorbing faceplate.


CLS 430/26
TXT With faceplate of phosphorus stripes:

    Processes under subclass 23 wherein a faceplate is produced composed of
    phosphoric stripes.


CLS 430/27
TXT With filter material on finished faceplate:

    Processes under subclass 23 wherein the contrast of the finished faceplate
    is improved by incorporating filter material which is colormetrically
    related to the phosphor areas on the faceplate.


CLS 430/28
TXT Using specified radiation-sensitive composition other than a nominal
    sensitized polyvinyl alcohol:

    Processes under subclass 23 involving the use of a named
    radiation-sensitive composition other than a sensitized polyvinyl alcohol
    which does not have a specified additive.


CLS 430/29
TXT Using specified post-imaging process composition:

    Processes under subclass 23 involving use of a named composition which
    treats the exposed radiation-sensitive material.


CLS 430/30
TXT INCLUDING CONTROL FEATURE RESPONSIVE TO A TEST OR MEASUREMENT:

    Subject matter under the class definition including the step of regulating
    a condition as a result of test or measurement to maintain or effect a
    change of the same.


CLS 430/31
TXT ELECTRIC OR MAGNETIC IMAGERY, E. G., XEROGRAPHY, ELECTROGRAPHY,
    MAGNETOGRAPHY, ETC., PROCESS, COMPOSITION, OR PRODUCT:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the electrical
    conductivity of, the electrical charge on, the magnetic condition of, or
    the electrical emissivity of a medium is selectively altered by the action
    of electromagnetic radiation during imaging, and wherein a visible image is
    formed on the medium or latent image thereon which persists after imaging
    based upon difference in electrical or magnetic property described above;
    and when the visible or latent image is not formed by the action of
    electro-magnetic radiation, the image is finished as by development,
    fixing, transferring, or cleaning the surface, etc.; radiation-sensitive
    composition and product used in the process, process of making the
    composition and product, and finishing process, composition, and product
    used in the process.

    (1)     Note.  The processes, compositions, and articles herein classified
    generally involve the application of a uniform electrostatic charge to a
    radiation-sensitive medium comprising a conductive support with a
    photoconductive insulator, which medium is then selectively exposed to
    radiation after the charge in accordance with the exposure and thereby
    produces an electrostatic image or latent image or the radiation-sensitive
    medium. Alternatively, the electrostatic charge, in image pattern, may be
    formed during the exposure to radiation.  This image may be developed or
    rendered visible by applying particulate material or liquid droplets,
    charged or uncharged, to the electrostatic image. The particulate material
    may be caused to permanently adhere, by overcoating, fusion, or coalescence
    to the exposed medium or it may be transferred to another surface and
    caused to adhere thereto, and the radiation-sensitive medium be cleaned and
    reused.  These processes are sometimes referred to as "Xerography" and
    "Electrofax" processing.

    (2)     Note.  Subcombinations of electric imagery directed to developing,
    transferring, or adhering alone or in combination with an imaging operation
    are classified herein to include compositions and articles used in
    developing fixing, transferring and adhering.  Subcombinations of electric
    imagery directed to charging or cleaning, alone or in combination (without
    an imagery operation using radiation) are not classified herein, for which
    see the search notes below. However, subcombinations directed to charging
    or cleaning when combined with the imagery operation are classified herein.


CLS 430/32
TXT Electrophoretic imaging, process, composition, or product:

    Processes, compositions, and products under subclass 31 wherein particles
    suspended in an insulative liquid carrier between electrodes, migrate in an
    imagewise configuration in response to both an electrical potential
    difference between electrodes across the suspension, and imaging radiation.
     The pigments are usually colored and light absorbing.  The pigments can be
    radiation-sensitive to the imaging radiation and are sometimes referred to
    as electrically photosensitive pigments.  The migration of particles
    usually forms an image or an electrode.


CLS 430/33
TXT Post treatment process to fix or transfer image, or collect or remove
    electric radiation sensitive pigment:

    Processes under subclass 32 including a step of making permanent the
    particle image and of transferring the particle image after imagewise
    configuration migration, or of collecting or removing electrically
    photosensitive pigments after imagewise configuration migration.


CLS 430/34
TXT Pretreatment process to change the physical properties of electrophoretic
    suspension or specified imaging feature exposure:

    Processes under subclass 32 including a step which changes the physical
    properties of the insulative suspension prior to imaging such as by
    liquefying a solid medium to form a liquid suspension, or wherein an
    imaging exposure step includes a specific feature such as the wavelength
    and intensity of the imaging radiation, or location of the source used for
    imaging radiation.


CLS 430/35
TXT Specified electric field applied or electric charging step:

    Processes under subclass 32 wherein the electrical potential difference is
    applied using a specified feature other than a general application of a
    continuous externally applied field to the electrodes applied during the
    exposure to imaging radiation such as when an electrode is electrically
    charged, or when the amount of the potential difference is named.


CLS 430/36
TXT Manipulation of electrode:

    Processes under subclass 32 wherein an electrode used in electrophoretic
    imaging is in motion relative to the liquid suspension during the exposure
    to imaging radiation such as when a nip of liquid suspension is formed by
    movement of the electrode.


CLS 430/37
TXT Electric radiation sensitive pigment:

    Processes, compositions, and products under subclass 32 wherein the
    electrically photosensitive pigment is identified by a description of its
    chemical composition, e.g., a phthalocyanine pigment, etc.


CLS 430/38
TXT Material used to modify electrophoretic suspension response:

    Processes under subclass 32 wherein an additional material modifies the
    response of the electrophoretic suspension during imaging, e.g., the
    material may be a radiation-conductive layer, a dark exchange, or injector
    material, or an ingredient in the suspension itself, etc.


CLS 430/39
TXT Magnetic imaging:

    Process under subclass 31 wherein a magnetic force is used to form the
    image.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 620+ for apparatus for applying a
    magnetic coating.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 62.51 for magnetic compositions not limited
    to use in radiation imagery.

    346,    Recorders, subclasses 74.2 for magnetographic recorders.

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 301 for magnetic recording apparatus for that
    class.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 131+
    for magnetic records claimed in terms of significant structure.  (See note
    under 252/62.51 page 14B).

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics, subclasses 38+
    for controls, subclasses 130+ for image formation, subclasses 168+ for
    charging, subclasses 177+ for exposure, subclasses 222+ for development,
    subclasses 297+ for transfer, subclasses 320+ for fixing, subclasses 343+
    for cleaning, and subclasses 361+ for document handling.


CLS 430/40
TXT Manifold imaging, process, composition, or product:

    Processes, compositions, and products under subclass 31 wherein an
    electrical potential difference is applied across a manifold sandwich which
    has a cohesively weak, structurable, fracturable layer or a substrate and a
    receiver in contact with the layer, the sandwich is imaged in the presence
    of an electrical potential difference to form an image in the
    radiation-conductive layer (e.g., by exposure of a cohesively weak,
    structurable, fracturable radiation-conductive layer to radiation in an
    imagewise configuration), and the receiver is separated from the substrate
    in the presence of an electrical potential difference across the sandwich
    which causes the layer to fracture along the image boundaries to produce an
    image on the receiver and on the substrate.  The compositions and products
    always have a radiation-conductor ingredient and a radiation-conductive
    layer, respectively.


CLS 430/41
TXT Migration imaging, process, composition, or product, e.g.,
    electrosolography, etc.:

    Processes, compositions, and products under subclass 31 wherein a latent
    electrical image formed on an element having particulate marking material
    embedded in or overlying a softenable insulating material and wherein the
    element is subject to a softening treating step which causes the particles
    to migrate in an imagewise configuration in the softened material to
    produce an image.  Usually, the particulate marking materials are
    electrically radiation-sensitive particles and the latent electrical image
    is formed by electrically charging and imaging the element with radiation.
    The compositions and products always contain electrically
    radiation-sensitive particles.  These processes are sometimes referred to
    as electrosolography.


CLS 430/42
TXT To produce a color reproduction, i.e., color named, or more than one color
    specified:

    Processes under subclass 31 wherein a color image in or on an image record
    is formed, e.g., a monochrome image such as a green image, or a multicolor
    such as made up of subtractive or additive colors, etc.


CLS 430/43
TXT Color correction:

    Processes under subclass 42 wherein the color in the color image is
    modified by an after treatment step.


CLS 430/44
TXT Manipulation of color separation image to obtain a multicolor image in
    registration: Processes under subclass 42 wherein the color separation
    images are physically manipulated to register them such that a multicolor
    image is produced (e.g., subtractive color images are manipulated to
    produce a full natural color image), etc.


CLS 430/45
TXT Identified developing composition or identified developing feature:

    Processes under subclass 42 wherein a named developing composition or a
    named developing process feature is used to produce a color image.


CLS 430/46
TXT Identified radiation-conductive element or composition:

    Processes under subclass 42 wherein a named radiation-conductive element or
    composition is used to produce a color image.


CLS 430/47
TXT Identified receptor or named image transfer feature:

    Processes under subclass 42 wherein a named receptor element (i.e., for
    receiving transferred or induced charge, or transferred developing
    composition), or named image transfer process feature is used to produce a
    color image.


CLS 430/48
TXT Electrostatic image transfer:

    Processes under subclass 31 wherein a latent electrostatic image in or on a
    first member is transferred to or reproduced on a separate second member by
    either (a) conduction of electrical charges across an air gap between
    members, or (b) when the members are in surface contact by direct charge
    transfer between the members or by the influence of the electrical charges
    of the image.  The latent electrostatic image is usually obtained by
    uniformly charging, and imaging a radiation-conductive layer with radiation
    to form an image of electrostatic surface charge on the layer.


CLS 430/49
TXT To produce printing surface:

    Processes under subclass 31 wherein the imaged medium is used to form a
    member having a surface capable of accepting ink with intended use in a
    printing process wherein multiple copies are produced.  The additional step
    of applying ink to the surface or printing is in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97+,    especially 126, for xerox printing processes wherein multiple
    copies are produced as recharging or redeveloping the image medium.

    204+    and 300+, for other imaging processes than electric or magnetic
    imaging utilized to manufacture printing plates.


CLS 430/50
TXT Deformation imaging, e.g., frost imaging, etc.:

    Processes under subclass 31 wherein the imaged medium is used to form a
    deformation image usually in the form of a relief or frost pattern by
    deforming a compliant layer or film.  The deformation of the compliant
    layer is mostly performed by heating or solvent treatment.  Sometimes the
    imaging and deformation of the compliant layer are done simultaneously.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for deformation image formation which additionally uses a charge
    transfer step to a separate member.

    290,    for light-scattering images not involving electric or a magnetic
    imaging.


CLS 430/51
TXT Persistent internal polarization imaging:

    Processes under subclass 31 wherein the simultaneous application of an
    electric field and electromagnetic irradiation upon a medium produces a
    persistent internal polarization within the radiation conductive insulator
    of the medium in the form of a separation of positive or negative charges
    for a finite time.  The application of electromagnetic irradiation is
    oftentimes done in an imagewise configuration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 130+ for image formation.


CLS 430/52
TXT Electrolysis imaging:

    Processes under subclass 31 wherein a radiation-conductive plate having a
    latent conductivity image is used as an electrode to form a deposited image
    thereon when an electrical potential difference is applied across an
    electrolyte in electrical contact with the electrode and the plate.  The
    deposition usually occurs subsequent to the formation of the latent
    conductivity image and is sometimes referred to as photoconductography.


CLS 430/53
TXT Using ion or particle flow modulation:

    Processes under subclass 31 wherein an image is formed by modulation of ion
    or particles directed upon the medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics, subclasses 38+
    for controls, subclasses 130+ for image formation, subclasses 168+ for
    charging, subclasses 177+ for exposure, subclasses 222+ for development,
    subclasses 297+ for transfer, subclasses 320+ for fixing, subclasses 343+
    for cleaning, and subclasses 361+ for document handling.


CLS 430/54
TXT To produce multiple image on medium or plural radiant energy exposures of
    medium, e.g., image intensification using two images, or two exposures of
    same image, etc.:

    Processes under subclass 31 wherein either multiple images are formed on
    the medium, or at least two radiant energy exposures are used to produce an
    image on the medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97+,    especially 126, for producing more than one image record (e.g., a
    duplex image record wherein the image is on both sides of the record) on a
    material other than the radiant energy image receiving medium and 125 for
    producing an image record of different image carrying originals to be
    copied, especially when a cleaning feature is included between imaging
    procedures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics, subclasses 38+
    for controls, subclasses 130+ for image formation, and subclasses 177+ for
    exposure, particularly subclass 194 for composite.


CLS 430/55
TXT Charging simultaneous with imaging:

    Processes under subclass 31 wherein the surface of the medium is
    simultaneously electrically charged and subject to radiant energy imaging.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics, subclasses 38+
    for controls, and subclasses 168+ for charging.


CLS 430/56
TXT Radiation-sensitive composition or product: Radiation-sensitive composition
    or product under subclass 31 wherein the composition or product includes a
    radiation-conductive material which has the conductivity of, the magnetic
    condition of, or the electrical emissivity of the material altered by the
    action of radiation.


CLS 430/57
TXT Multiple radiation conductive layers:

    Subject matter under subclass 56 having plural layers which will conduct a
    charge under action of radiation.


CLS 430/58
TXT Charge transport layer:

    Product under subclass 57 containing a charge transporting material, e.g.,
    compound, polymer, or resin, etc., specifically identified by chemical or
    physical structure.


CLS 430/59
TXT Amino or substituted amino group containing:

    Products under subclass 58 where the material includes an amino or
    substituted amino group.


CLS 430/60
TXT Product having layer between radiation-conductive layer and base or support:

    Products under subclass 56 wherein said specifically named or identified by
    chemical or physical product contains a layer between a
    radiation-conductive layer and a base or support.


CLS 430/61
TXT Sensitizing layer:

    Products under subclass 60 containing a layer specifically named or
    identified by chemical or physical structure which extends the range of the
    spectral response of a radiation-conductive layer or increases the
    radiation sensitivity of a radiation conducting layer in the spectral
    region of inherent sensitivity or regions to which said layer is spectrally
    sensitized between a radiation-conductive layer and a base or support.


CLS 430/62
TXT Conductive layer:

    Products under subclass 60 containing a conductive layer specifically named
    or identified by chemical or physical structure between a
    radiation-conductive layer and a base or support.


CLS 430/63
TXT Inorganic containing:

    Products under subclass 62 wherein the conductive layer is nonorganic or
    contains nonorganic material.


CLS 430/64
TXT Blocking or barrier layer:

    Products under subclass 60 containing a blocking or barrier layer, e.g., a
    layer which retards dark decay, specifically named or identified by
    chemical or physical structure between a radiation-conductive layer and a
    base or support.


CLS 430/65
TXT Inorganic containing:

    Products under subclass 64 wherein the blocking or barrier layer is
    nonorganic or contains nonorganic material.


CLS 430/66
TXT Product having overlayer on radiation-conductive layer:

    Products under subclass 56 containing an over-layer, i.e., a top coat
    layer, specifically named or

    identified by chemical or physical structure on a radiation-conductive
    layer relative to the position of a radiation-conductive layer and a base
    or support.


CLS 430/67
TXT Electrically insulating overlayer:

    Products under subclass 66 containing an electrically insulating overlayer
    specifically named or identified by chemical or physical structure.


CLS 430/68
TXT Including radiation-conductive screen:

    Products under subclass 56 having grid or screen portions and interstices
    with the radiation-conductive layer on the grid or screen portions only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6+,     for screens, per se, and method of making the same.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics, subclasses 38+
    for controls, subclasses 130+ for image formation, subclasses 168+ for
    charging, and subclasses 177+ for exposure, particularly subclass 181 for
    halftone image.


CLS 430/69
TXT Including conductive base or support:

    Products under subclass 56 containing a substrate specifically named or
    defined by chemical or physical structure and is conductive.


CLS 430/70
TXT Radiation-conductive composition contains carbocyclic ring only:

    Compositions under subclass 56 containing an organic radiation-conductive
    material specifically named or identified by chemical structure and which
    is a compound, polymer, or resin, etc., having only homocyclic ring(s) in
    which all ring atoms are carbon.


CLS 430/71
TXT Polycyclo ring system:

    Compositions under subclass 70 wherein the homocyclic ring containing
    compound, etc., is


    polycyclic with at least two rings having two carbon atoms in common, e.g.,



CLS 430/72
TXT Substituted:

    Compositions under subclass 71 wherein the polycyclic ring containing
    compound, polymer, resin, etc., is substituted, i.e., has an atom replaced
    by another atom or radical, on the ring.


CLS 430/73
TXT Containing amino or substituted amino group:

    Compositions under subclass 70 wherein the homocyclic ring containing
    compound, polymer, or resin, etc., includes an amino or substituted amino
    group.


CLS 430/74
TXT Alkyl amino group:

    Compositions under subclass 73 wherein the amino or substituted amino group
    is an amine containing alkyl group attached to an amino nitrogen atom.


CLS 430/75
TXT Radiation-conductive composition contains hetero ring:

    Compositions under subclass 56 containing an organic radiation-conductive
    material, e.g., compound, polymer, or resin, etc., having a ring which
    contains an atom other than carbon in its nucleus, i.e., a hetero atom.


CLS 430/76
TXT The hetero ring has at least nitrogen as a ring hetero atom:

    Compositions under subclass 75 wherein at least one hetero atom present is
    N atom.


CLS 430/77
TXT Additional diverse ring hetero atom in the hetero ring:

    Compositions under subclass 76 wherein the N-hetero atom ring containing
    compound, etc., contains a hetero atom other than nitrogen, e.g.,


CLS 430/78
TXT Polycyclo ring system having the hetero ring as one of the cyclo systems:

    Compositions under subclass 76 wherein the N-hetero atom containing
    compound, etc., are

    polycyclic with at least two rings having two atoms in common, e.g.,


CLS 430/79
TXT Carbazole:

    Compositions under subclass 78 wherein the polycyclic ring containing
    compound, etc., contains a carbazole moiety.


CLS 430/80
TXT Polymer or synthetic resin only:

    Compositions under subclass 79 wherein the carbazole moiety containing
    compound, etc., is part of a polymer or synthetic resin only.


CLS 430/81
TXT Sensitized or doped:

    Compositions under subclass 79 wherein the carbazole moiety containing
    compound, etc., contains a material which is specifically named or
    identified by chemical structure which extends the range of spectral
    response or increases the radiation sensitivity in the spectral region of
    inherent sensitivity or regions to which said compound, etc., is spectrally
    sensitized.


CLS 430/82
TXT Dye or pigment:

    Compositions under subclass 81 in the form of a dye or pigment.


CLS 430/83
TXT Sensitized or doped organic radiation conductor:

    Compositions under subclass 56 containing a material specifically named or
    identified by chemical structure which extends the range of spectral
    response or increases the radiation sensitivity in the region of inherent
    sensitivity or in regions to which said composition is spectrally
    sensitized.


CLS 430/84
TXT Inorganic radiation conductive composition: Compositions under subclass 56
    containing an inorganic radiation-conductive material specifically named or
    identified by chemical structure.


CLS 430/85
TXT Alloy:

    Compositions under subclass 84 in the form of a mixture of two metallic or
    nonmetallic elements having a metallic appearance and being a molecular or
    colloidal mixture.


CLS 430/86
TXT Having more than two constituents:

    Compositions under subclass 85 containing more than two metallic or
    nonmetallic elements in the mixture.


CLS 430/87
TXT Zinc containing:

    Compositions under subclass 84 wherein a zinc material is the radiation
    conductor.


CLS 430/88
TXT And other radiation-conductor material:
    Compositions under subclass 87 containing a radiation-conductive material
    other than zinc material.


CLS 430/89
TXT And nonsensitizing additive other than binder:

    Compositions under subclass 87 containing a material, specifically named or
    identified by physical or chemical structure, which does not extend the
    range of spectral response of the zinc material other than a binder
    material.


CLS 430/90
TXT Sensitized or doped:

    Compositions under subclass 87 containing a material specifically named or
    identified by chemical structure which extends the range of spectral
    response or increases the radiation sensitivity in the region of inherent
    sensitivity or in regions to which said composition is spectrally
    sensitized.


CLS 430/91
TXT Dye or pigment:

    Compositions under subclass 90 in the form of a dye or pigment.


CLS 430/92
TXT Intercyclic-acyclic -CH= or Intercyclic-acyclic chain which contains -CH=:

    Compositions under subclass 91 containing


    intercyclic-acyclic -CH= or intercyclic-acyclic chain which contains -CH=,



CLS 430/93
TXT Cyanine dye:

    Compositions under subclass 92 in the form of a compound which contains two
    distinct heterocyclic rings, each individual heterocyclic ring containing
    at least one nitrogen atom, said nitrogen atoms of the individual rings
    being joined through a resonating acyclic carbon chain which contains -CH=
    or a conjugated chain which contains -CH=, e.g.,


CLS 430/94
TXT Cadmium containing:

    Compositions under subclass 84 containing a cadmium material as the
    radiation conductor.


CLS 430/95
TXT Sensitized or doped:

    Compositions under subclass 84 containing a material specifically named or
    identified by chemical structure which extends the range of spectral
    response or increases the radiation sensitivity, in the region of inherent
    sensitivity or in region to which said composition is spectrally sensitized.


CLS 430/96
TXT Binder for radiation-conductive composition:

    Compositions under subclass 56 containing a material specifically named or
    identified by chemical structure and functioning to hold the composition
    together.


CLS 430/97
TXT Post imaging process, finishing or perfecting composition or product:


    Processes under subclass 31 wherein the latent or visible image in or on a
    medium is subject to a finishing or perfecting procedure, and finishing or
    perfecting composition and products used in the process.


CLS 430/98
TXT Fixing image by pressure only:

    Processes under subclass 97 wherein the image is made permanent by only
    applied pressure.


CLS 430/99
TXT Fixing image by heated metal roller:

    Processes under subclass 97 wherein the image is made permanent by applying
    heated metal roller thereto.


CLS 430/100
TXT Reversal development:

    Processes under subclass 97 wherein the finishing procedure or the medium
    being imaged is modified to reverse the location of the developed image.
    Usually the developed image is a positive print.


CLS 430/101
TXT Impression development:

    Processes under subclass 97 wherein the latent image is developed by direct
    surface-to-surface transfer of dry powder toner to the medium.  Usually the
    toner need not carry an electrical charge.  Such developing procedures as
    roller, contact, touchdown, donor, and transfer developing techniques are
    included.


CLS 430/102
TXT Selective toner release:

    Processes under subclass 97 wherein a member carrying a uniform layer of a
    toner is selectively released to a separate donor member based upon
    differences in the amount of radiation received by the medium.


CLS 430/103
TXT Using development electrode:

    Processes under subclass 97 wherein the image is developed using a separate
    electrode which is either electronically shortened to the image carrying
    medium or has an electrical potential different from the image during
    development.


CLS 430/104
TXT Finishing or perfecting composition or product:

    Compositions and products under subclass 97 useful in finishing or
    perfecting an image medium.  Includes such finishing and perfecting
    processes as developing, fixing, and transferring of the image.


CLS 430/105
TXT Developing composition or product:

    Compositions or products under subclass 104 used to develop the image
    medium.


CLS 430/106
TXT Identified colorant, i.e., dye, dye former, pigment, etc.:

    Compositions under subclass 105 having chemically named ingredient that
    provides or is capable of providing a colored image when it deposits upon
    the imaged medium during development.


CLS 430/106.6
TXT Magnetic or iron-containing component:

    Subject matter under subclass 105 containing iron in free or combined form,
    or other material having an active magnetic susceptibility.


CLS 430/107
TXT Dry powder:

    Subject matter under subclass 105 wherein the composition or product is in
    a dry powder form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106.6,  for a dry powder developer which contains a magnetic active
    component or iron.


CLS 430/108
TXT Identified carrier:

    Compositions under subclass 107 having chemically named ingredient which
    tribo electrically charges a toner ingredient, and is not deposited upon
    the imaged medium during development.


CLS 430/109
TXT Identified toner:

    Compositions under subclass 107 having chemically named ingredient that
    deposits upon the imaged medium during development, e.g., a heat fixable
    agent, etc.


CLS 430/110
TXT Identified adjuvant, i.e., charge control agent, etc.:

    Compositions under subclass 107 having additional chemically named
    ingredient that modifies the chemical, physical, or electrical properties
    of the developing composition, e.g., charge control agent.


CLS 430/111
TXT Identified structure, i.e., size, shape of carrier or toner particle, etc.:

    Compositions under subclass 107 wherein an ingredient in the developer
    composition is described in terms of a physical dimension such as when the
    ingredient is a particle having an identified size or shape.


CLS 430/112
TXT Liquid:

    Compositions under subclass 105 wherein material from a liquid medium is
    applied to develop the imaged medium.


CLS 430/113
TXT Multiple phase liquid carrier medium, i.e., emulsion:

    Compositions under subclass 112 wherein the liquid carrier of the
    composition is in the form of more than one phase during development such
    as an emulsion.


CLS 430/114
TXT Identified toner, i.e., identified resin coated pigment, etc.:

    Compositions under subclass 112 having a chemically identified ingredient
    that deposits upon the imaged medium during development, e.g., a novolak
    resin coated pigment.


CLS 430/115
TXT Identified adjuvant, i.e., surfactant, etc.:

    Compositions under subclass 112 having an additional chemically identified
    ingredient that modifies the chemical, physical, or electrical properties
    of the developer composition, e.g., a surfactant.


CLS 430/116
TXT Identified liquid carrier:

    Compositions under subclass 112 wherein the liquid ingredient (which
    usually electrically insulated, carries the toner, and is not deposited
    upon the imaged medium during development) is chemically identified.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics, subclasses 38+
    for controls, and subclasses 222+ for development, particularly subclasses
    237+ for electrophotographic apparatus employing this type of subject
    matter.


CLS 430/117
TXT Liquid development:

    Processes under subclass 97 wherein the image is developed by a liquid
    medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics, subclasses 38+
    for controls, and subclasses 222+ for development, particularly subclasses
    237+ for electrophotographic apparatus employing this type of subject
    matter.


CLS 430/118
TXT Wetting development:

    Processes under subclass 117 wherein the liquid medium only wets the image
    carrying medium when an electric field is applied during development, i.e.,
    surface tension forces are overcome by the electric field of the image.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics, subclasses 38+
    for controls, and subclasses 222+ for development, particularly subclasses
    237+ for electrophotographic apparatus employing this type of subject
    matter.


CLS 430/119
TXT Charged solid particles deposited out of insulating liquid carrier:

    Processes under subclass 117 wherein electrically charged solid particles
    dispersed in an insulating liquid develops an image.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics, subclasses 38+
    for controls, subclasses 130+ for image formation, subclasses 168+ for
    charging, subclasses 177+ for exposure, and subclasses 222+ for
    development, particularly subclass 239 for electrophotographic apparatus
    employing this type of subject matter.


CLS 430/120
TXT Dry powder developing:

    Processes under subclass 97 wherein the application of dry powder to an
    image develops that image.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics, subclasses 38+
    for controls, and subclasses 222+ for development, particularly subclasses
    252+ for electrophotographic apparatus employing this type of subject
    matter.


CLS 430/121
TXT Cascade:

    Processes under subclass 120 wherein a toner adhered to a carrier bead
    based upon triboelectricity properties develops the image by flowing or
    cascading it upon the image carrying medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics, subclasses 38+
    for controls, and subclasses 222+ for development, particularly subclass
    294 for electrophotographic apparatus employing this type of subject
    matter.


CLS 430/122
TXT Using magnetic brush:

    Processes under subclass 120 wherein a magnetic in combination with a toner
    attached to the magnetic by magnetic attraction develops the image.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics, subclasses 38+
    for controls, and subclasses 222+ for development, particularly subclasses
    267+ for electrophotographic apparatus employing this type of subject
    matter.


CLS 430/123
TXT Using fur brush:

    Processes under subclass 120 wherein a toner adhered to brush fibers based
    upon triboelectricity properties develops the image carrying medium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics, subclasses 38+
    for controls, and subclasses 222+ for development, particularly subclass
    287 for electrophotographic apparatus employing this type of subject
    matter.


CLS 430/124
TXT Fixing image:

    Processes under subclass 97 wherein the image is made permanent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics, subclasses 38+
    for controls, subclasses 130+ for image formation, subclasses 168+ for
    charging, subclasses 177+ for exposure, subclasses 222+ for development,
    and subclasses 297+ for transfer, particularly subclasses 320+ for
    electrophotographic apparatus employing this type of subject matter.


CLS 430/125
TXT Cleaning radiation-conductive surface:

    Processes under subclass 97 wherein the procedure removes undesired
    particles from a radiation-conductive surface so that the
    radiation-conductive element may be reused.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics, subclasses 38+
    for controls, and subclasses 343+ for cleaning.


CLS 430/126
TXT Transfer of image to different surface:

    Processes under subclass 97 wherein an image is transferred from one
    surface to another surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics, subclasses 38+
    for controls, and subclasses 297+ for transfer.


CLS 430/127
TXT Processes of making radiation-sensitive product:

    Processes under subclass 31 drawn to the manufacture of a
    radiation-sensitive product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, particularly subclasses 74+ for coating methods
    which result in a photoconductive product.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, for methods of making
    photoresponsive semiconductor barrier layer-type devices (i.e.,
    photovoltaic devices).


CLS 430/128
TXT Coating by vacuum deposition:

    Processes under subclass 127 wherein the radiation-sensitive product is
    manufactured using a vacuum deposition procedure.


CLS 430/129
TXT Extrusion coating:

    Processes under subclass 127 wherein the radiation-sensitive product is
    made using an extrusion coating procedure.


CLS 430/130
TXT Thermal or energy treatment of radiation-sensitive layer, e.g, fusing
    annealing, or solvent aftertreatment of radiation-sensitive layer, etc.:

    Processes under subclass 127 wherein the radiation-sensitive layer is made
    or modified by the use of heat, cold, or radiant or electrical energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 9+ for diagnostics, subclasses 38+
    for controls, subclasses 130+ for image formation, and subclasses 177+ for
    exposure, particularly subclasses 218 through 221.


CLS 430/131
TXT Applying subbing layer:

    Processes under subclass 127 wherein there is a specified procedure for
    producing a layer between the backing or base and the radiation-sensitive
    layer.


CLS 430/132
TXT Applying overlayer:

    Processes under subclass 127 wherein there is a specified procedure for
    producing a layer upon the radiation-sensitive layer.


CLS 430/133
TXT Applying radiation-sensitive layer:

    Processes under subclass 127 wherein there is a specified procedure for
    producing a radiation-sensitive layer upon a backing or base.


CLS 430/134
TXT Heterogeneous:

    Processes under subclass 133 wherein the radiation-sensitive conductor
    ingredient is dispersed heterogeneously or nonhomo-generously throughout an
    insulating medium of the layer.


CLS 430/135
TXT Process of making radiation-sensitive composition:

    Processes under subclass 31 drawn to the manufacture of radiation-sensitive
    compositions.


CLS 430/136
TXT Utilizing high temperature, e.g., by fusing, etc.:

    Processes under subclass 135 wherein the radiation-sensitive compositions
    are made using a high temperature procedure, such as by fusing or annealing
    the ingredients of the compositions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 320+ for fixing, particularly
    subclasses 335+.


CLS 430/137
TXT Process of making developing composition: Processes under subclass 31
    wherein the developing composition, useful in developing the imaged medium,
    is made.


CLS 430/138
TXT MICROCAPSULE, PROCESS, COMPOSITION, OR PRODUCT:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a preformed microcapsule,
    which is made prior to the manufacture of the product useful in radiation
    chemistry imagery, is added to the product, process of making and using the
    product, composition, or product.

    (1)     Note.  The definition of microcapsule for this subclass includes
    any gas liquid or solid material which is completely surrounded by a
    different solid material with its largest dimension size being less than a
    few microns.

    (2)     Note.  The use of microporous containing composition useful in
    processes under the class definition such as spongelike microporous
    structures or molecular sieves (zeolite) with/without absorbed or adsorbed
    ingredient therein are not subject matter for the subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for use of microcapsules in electric or magnetic imagery.

    32      and 41, especially, for electrophoretic and migration imagery.

    70,     for radiation-conductive compositions in microcapsule form.

    105,    for developer compositions in microcapsule form; and appropriate
    product, process, and composition subclasses wherein (a) use of
    microcapsules is disclosed, but is an unclaimed feature; and (b)
    microporous compositions, products, and uses (see Note 2 above).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 601+ and 672+ for
    specialized micropore formation; and subclass 122 for general micropore
    formation for the class.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 62.51 for microcapsules for use in magnetic
    compositions; subclasses 315+ for general microcapsule use (see Note (1) in
    subclass 316 for microcapsule formation).

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, subclasses 722+ for micropore
    formation in natural rubber or natural rubber in a microporous form.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 4 for microencapsulation of normally liquid material; subclass 7
    for formation of coated solid particulate material directly from molten or
    liquid mass.

    427,    Coating Processes, for nonimaging processes involving use of
    microcapsules, especially subclasses 212+ for the coating of microparticles.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, for nonimaging use of
    microcapsules in structurally defined products, especially subclasses
    313.3+ for cellular or por  ous component such as microcapsule combined
    with web or sheet; and subclasses 403+ for coated particulate matter which
    is usually structurally defined.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, subclasses 39 and 80+ for pore-forming
    compositions.

    521,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, for processes of forming
    micropores in synthetic resins.


CLS 430/139
TXT LUMINESCENT IMAGING:

    Processes under the class definition whereby an image is obtained by reason
    of using material which emits light not due to incandescence and at a
    temperature below that of incandescent bodies.  Included herein are
    phosphorescence, fluorescence, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, for indicia forming a display
    device including a fluorescent substance to cause illumination of the
    indicia.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 361+ (362 for method) for apparatus
    involving invisible radiant energy responsive to electric signalling with
    or including a luminophor; subclasses 458+ (459 for processes) for
    illuminophor irradiation devices; subclasses 483+ for an invisible
    radiation responsive nonelectric signalling luminescent device.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 188.11 for chemical luminescent
    compositions; and subclasses 301.16+, 301.36, and 301.4+ for fluorescent
    and phosphorescent compositions.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 483+ for
    electroluminescent devices.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 157+ for coating processes in general
    wherein a fluorescent or phosphorescent coating is used and where no
    radiation properties or multilayered luminescent coatings are claimed.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet which may have luminescent properties, and especially subclass 917 (a
    cross-reference art collection) for products which are electroluminescent.


CLS 430/140
TXT PRODUCT HAVING SOUND RECORD OR PROCESS OF MAKING:

    Products under the class definition having in addition to an image a sound
    record and process of making same.


CLS 430/141
TXT DIAZO REPRODUCTION, PROCESS, COMPOSITION, OR PRODUCT:

    Compositions and products under the class definition having a
    radiation-sensitive diazo compound, i.e., a compound having at least two
    directly attached nitrogen atoms which are attached by double or triple
    bonds other than a chromophore group, e.g., diazonium, azide, quinone
    diazide, diazo sulfonate, or triazene compound, etc.; process wherein the
    radiation-sensitive diazo compound on or in a medium is imaged with
    radiation to produce a visible image being developed to produce a visible
    image of an original; process wherein the visible or latent image is not
    formed by the action of radiation is finished or perfected as by
    development, fixing, or transferring; process of making the composition and
    product, finishing or perfecting process such as development, or
    composition or product used in the finishing or perfecting process.

    (1)     Note.  When the claimed radiation- sensitive compounds is defined
    functionally such as "light-decomposable agent", and all the identified
    radiation-sensitive compound in the claimed disclosure are diazo compounds,
    the patent is classified in this subclass or indented subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    269,    for processes of using radiation-sensitive diazo material for
    nonvisible image formation wherein imaging affects physical property of the
    material.

    302,    especially, for making lithographic printing plates.

    322,    for forming a relief image.


CLS 430/142
TXT Process producing multiple image:

    Processes under subclass 141 wherein more than one image is formed in a
    medium.


CLS 430/143
TXT Color proofing, colloid transfer, or pigment development:

    Processes under subclass 142 wherein the multiple images are (a) separate
    monochrome images disclosed or claimed for use in color proofing, (b)
    formed by transferring a colloid or polymer image to a separate medium
    whereby a visible image is obtained, or (c) formed by contacting a pigment
    developer to develop latent multiple images.


CLS 430/144
TXT Powder development of tacky surface:

    Processes under subclass 141 wherein a tacky latent image on the surface of
    a medium is developed with a powder or pigment developer.


CLS 430/145
TXT Photomechanical dye image prepared:

    Processes under subclass 141 wherein a dye image is formed based upon
    solubility differences caused by the action of electromagnetic radiation
    upon the medium. The solubility differences may be caused by the removal of
    portions of the medium.


CLS 430/146
TXT Diazo-type process, i.e., producing dye image by reacting the diazo or the
    imaged reaction product of the diazo:

    Processes under subclass 141 wherein a dye image is formed by the reaction
    of the diazo compound or the imaged reaction product of the diazo compound.
     Usually an azo or azomethioine dye image is formed.


CLS 430/147
TXT Negative image prepared:

    Processes under subclass 146 wherein the image is formed in portions of the
    medium subject to electromagnetic radiation or in direct proportion to the
    amount of electromagnetic radiation received.


CLS 430/148
TXT To make diazo-type intermediate, black-line image, or continuous-tone image:

    Processes under subclass 146 wherein the dye image is an intermediate to be
    used for subsequent imaging, is a black-line copy, or is a continuous tone
    reproduction.


CLS 430/149
TXT Liquid development, e.g., aqueous solution with coupler, etc.:

    Processes under subclass 146 wherein the dye image is formed by contacting
    the imaged medium with a liquid.  Usually a positive azo dye image is
    obtained by reaction of the diazo compound with a coupler which may be in
    the medium or in the liquid.


CLS 430/150
TXT Gaseous development, e.g., ammonia vapor, etc.:

    Processes under subclass 146 wherein the dye image is formed by contacting
    the imaged medium with a gas or vapor such as ammonia vapor.  Usually the
    coupler is in the medium and the vapor such as ammonia provides a pH which
    produces an azo dye image.


CLS 430/151
TXT Heat development:

    Processes under subclass 146 wherein the dye image is formed by the
    application of heat.  Usually the dye components are brought together with
    the heat, or the heat catalyzes a dye forming reaction such as by producing
    a coupler or a basic ingredient such as ammonia.


CLS 430/152
TXT Vesicular process:

    Processes under subclass 141 wherein an image in the form of radiation
    scattering vesicles is produced by the decomposition of the diazo compound
    into a volatile product.


CLS 430/153
TXT Physical development:

    Processes under subclass 141 wherein  a metal image formed by reaction of
    the diazo compound or the product produced by radiation exposure of the
    diazo compound in a medium is modified by replacing a more chemically
    active latent metal or metal of the image with a less active metal or metal
    ion.


CLS 430/154
TXT Composition or product which contains radiation sensitive compound having
    moiety of nitrogen double or triple bonded directly to nitrogen other than
    chromophore moiety, e.g., triazene containing product, etc., process of
    making, and composition or product used to finish or develop a diazo
    reproduction:

    Compositions or products under subclass 141 having a radiation-sensitive
    diazo compound, and processes of making same and composition or product
    used to finish or develop a diazo reproduction.


CLS 430/155
TXT Product with at least two named layers:

    Products under subclass 154 having at least two named layers.  The base is
    considered a layer for this subclass.  The named layers are each
    significantly identified to exclude other layers.  For example, a
    transparent or paper support having a diazo compound containing coating is
    considered a product.  However, a support having a coating of a diazonium
    salt is not.


CLS 430/156
TXT At least two radiation-sensitive layers:

    Products under subclass 155 having at least two radiation-sensitive layers
    or coatings, one of which contains a radiation-sensitive diazo compound.


CLS 430/157
TXT Diazonium compound containing layer:

    Products under subclass 155 having a radiation-sensitive layer or coating
    containing a diazonium compound or salt.


CLS 430/158
TXT Including subbing layer:

    Products under subclass 157 having a layer between base or support, and the
    radiation-sensitive layer.


CLS 430/159
TXT Silicon, nitrogen, or sulfur compound containing subbing layer:

    Products under subclass 158 wherein the subbing layer contains a compound
    having a silicon, nitrogen, or sulfur atom.


CLS 430/160
TXT Polymer containing subbing layer:

    Products under subclass 158 wherein the subbing layer contains a polymer.
    Often, the polymer is identified as a resin binder.


CLS 430/161
TXT Acid, salt, or ester moiety ingredient containing subbing layer:

    Products under subclass 158 wherein the subbing layer contains a compound
    having an acid, salt, or ester moiety.


CLS 430/162
TXT Including overlayer or backing layer:

    Products under subclass 157 having a layer or coating upon the
    radiation-sensitive layer, or a layer or coating on the side of the base or
    support opposite the side having the radiation-sensitive layer.


CLS 430/163
TXT Diazonium salt with anion specified:

    Products under subclass 157 wherein the anion of the diazonium salt is
    named, for example, the zinc chloride double salt or the
    hexafluorophosphate salt.


CLS 430/164
TXT Diazo-N-sulfonate containing layer:

    Products under subclass 155 having a radiation-sensitive layer or coating
    containing a diazo-N-sulfonate compound.


CLS 430/165
TXT Quinone diazide containing layer:

    Products under subclass 155 having a radiation-sensitive layer or coating
    containing a quinone diazide compound. Quinone diazides are sometimes
    called diazo ketones or diazo oxides.  Iminoquinone diazides are considered
    quinone diazides for the purpose of this subclass.


CLS 430/166
TXT Including additional layer:

    Products under subclass 165 having a radiation-sensitive layer and an
    additional layer or coating.


CLS 430/167
TXT Azide containing layer:

    Products under subclass 155 having a radiation-sensitive layer or coating
    containing an azide compound.


CLS 430/168
TXT Process of making diazo product:

    Products under subclass 154 of making a diazo product having at least two
    named layers.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 155 for a more specific definition of a diazo
    product.


CLS 430/169
TXT Using specific adjuvant other than radiation-sensitive diazo compound:


    Processes under subclass 168 wherein a specific ingredient other than the
    radiation-sensitive diazo compound is used in the manufacture of the diazo
    product or is used to finish or perfect the diazo product.


CLS 430/170
TXT Radiation-sensitive composition:

    Compositions under subclass 154 which are sensitive to radiation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    914,    for diazo compounds functioning as cationic or anionic initiators
    in radiation activated polymer forming reactions.

    919     and 920, for diazo compound functioning as free-radical initiators
    in radiation activated polymer forming reactions.

    927,    for diazo compounds functioning as cross-linking agents in
    radiation activated polymer forming and modifying reactions.


CLS 430/171
TXT Diazonium compound containing:

    Compositions under subclass 170 wherein the radiation-sensitive diazo
    compound is a diazonium compound or salt.


CLS 430/172
TXT At least two diverse diazonium compounds: Compositions under subclass 171
    containing at least two different radiation-sensitive diazonium compounds
    or salts.


CLS 430/173
TXT At least two couplers:

    Compositions under subclass 171 containing at least two different compounds
    which function as couplers for dye formation. The coupler compounds have
    auxochromic groups or are capable of producing auxochromic groups.  Often
    times, the auxochromic group is a hydroxy substituent directly attached to
    an aromatic nucleus.


CLS 430/174
TXT Includes additional adjuvant other than acidic stabilizer:

    Compositions under subclass 173 wherein an additional ingredient is present
    in the composition other than an acidic stabilizer or a coupler which is
    used to finish or perfect the image.

    (1)     Note.  Ingredients having an acid moiety or acid function are
    excluded from this subclass.


CLS 430/175
TXT Polymeric diazonium compound:

    Compositions under subclass 171 wherein the diazonium radical is an
    integral part of a polymer, for example, a condensation product of a
    diazonium compound and an aldehyde or ketone, commonly referred to in the
    art as a diazo formaldehyde resin or a diazonium condensate resin.


CLS 430/176
TXT Polymeric mixture:

    Compositions under subclass 171 wherein the radiation-sensitive diazonium
    compound and a polymer are present together in admixture, e.g., a diazonium
    salt and polyvinyl alcohol, etc.


CLS 430/177
TXT Processing ingredient other than coupler or carboxylic acid compound:

    Compositions under subclass 171 which additionally contain a processing
    ingredient other than a coupler, which ingredient finishes or perfects the
    image.


CLS 430/178
TXT Metal salt ingredient:

    Compositions under subclass 177 wherein the processing ingredient is a
    metal salt.


CLS 430/179
TXT Nitrogen atom containing organic ingredient:

    Compositions under subclass 177 wherein the process ingredient is a
    nitrogen atom containing organic compound.


CLS 430/180
TXT Naphthol coupler included:

    Compositions under subclass 171 which additionally contain a compound,
    having a hydroxy substituent directly attached to a naphthalene nucleus,
    which functions as a coupler for dye formation.


CLS 430/181
TXT Phenol coupler included:

    Compositions under subclass 171 which additionally contain a compound,
    having a hydroxy substituent directly attached to a benzene nucleus, which
    functions as a coupler for dye formation.


CLS 430/182
TXT Aceto-aceto or heterocyclic coupler included:

    Compositions under subclass 171 which additionally contain a compound,
    having an active methylene group between two carbonyl groups or a
    heterocyclic residue, which functions as a coupler for dye formation.
    Examples of the former are acetoacetanilide and cyclohexylacetoacetic acid
    amine, and of the latter are pyrazolones, hydroxy pyridones and
    thiobarbituric acid.


CLS 430/183
TXT P-amino or p-thio benzene diazonium compound:

    Compositions under subclass 171 wherein the diazonium compound or salt has
    an amino or thio group attached to a benzene nucleus in the para position
    relative to the diazonium radical.


CLS 430/184
TXT 2,3 substitution of benzene nucleus:

    Compositions under subclass 183 wherein the diazonium compound or salt has
    additional substituents attached to the benzene nucleus in the 2 and 3
    positions relative to the diazonium radical.


CLS 430/185
TXT Additional substituent on benzene nucleus: Compositions under subclass 183
    wherein the diazonium compound or salt additionally has only one other
    substituent on the benzene nucleus.


CLS 430/186
TXT P-substituent is p-heterocyclic amine:

    Compositions under subclass 183 wherein the group attached to the para
    position of the benzene nucleus relative to the diazonium radical is a
    heterocyclic amino group, such as morpholino, piperadine, and piperazino
    group.


CLS 430/187
TXT 2, 5 substitution of benzene nucleus:

    Compositions under subclass 183 wherein the diazonium compound or salt
    additionally has substituents attached to the benzene nucleus in the 2 and
    5 positions relative to the diazonium radical.


CLS 430/188
TXT Diazo-N-sulfonate containing:

    Compositions under subclass 170 wherein the radiation-sensitive diazo
    compound is a diazo-N-sulfonate compound.


CLS 430/189
TXT Quinone diazide containing:

    Compositions under subclass 170 wherein the radiation-sensitive diazo
    compound is a quinone diazide compound.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 165 for the definition of quinone diazides for
    the purposes of this class.


CLS 430/190
TXT Polymeric quinone diazide:

    Compositions under subclass 189 wherein the quinone diazide moiety is an
    integral part of a polymer such as when the moiety is appended to a
    polymeric backbone with linking sulfonamide groups as in the reaction
    product of a p-aminostyrene polymer and an o-quinone diazide sulfonic acid.


CLS 430/191
TXT And monomeric processing ingredient:

    Compositions under subclass 189 which additionally contain a monomeric
    processing ingredient that finishes or perfects the image.


CLS 430/192
TXT Polymeric mixture:

    Compositions under subclass 189 wherein the radiation-sensitive quinone
    diazide compound and a polymer are present together in admixture, e.g., an
    o-naphthoquinone diazide compound, and a phenolformaldehyde resin such as
    novolak resin.


CLS 430/193
TXT O-quinone diazide:

    Compositions under subclass 189 wherein the radiation-sensitive quinone
    diazide is an ortho substituted quinone diazide.


CLS 430/194
TXT Azide containing:

    Compositions under subclass 170 wherein the radiation-sensitive diazo
    compound is an azide moiety containing compound, such as aromatic compounds
    having the azide moiety attached directly to the aromatic nuclei.


CLS 430/195
TXT Polymeric azide:

    Compositions under subclass 194 wherein the azide moiety is an integral
    part of a polymer such as when the moiety is linked to a polymeric backbone
    by linking aromatic nuclei as in vinyl polymers having azidostyrene units.


CLS 430/196
TXT And monomeric processing ingredient:

    Compositions under subclass 194 which additionally contain a monomeric
    processing ingredient that finishes or perfects the image.


CLS 430/197
TXT Polymeric mixture:

    Compositions under subclass 194 wherein the radiation-sensitive azide
    compound and a polymer are present together in admixture, e.g., an aromatic
    azide compound and synthetic rubbers such as isoprene.


CLS 430/198
TXT VISIBLE IMAGING INCLUDING STEP OF FIRING OR SINTERING:

    Processes under the class definition producing a visible image and
    including the step of applying heat to fuse or coalesce a material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    432,    Heating, subclass 13 for process of heating or heating operation
    including melting, vaporizing, sintering, expanding, comminuting, or
    classifying work material.


CLS 430/199
TXT TRANSFER PROCEDURE BETWEEN IMAGE AND IMAGE LAYER, IMAGE RECEIVING LAYERS,
    OR ELEMENT CONTAINING AN IMAGE RECEIVING LAYER OR AN INGREDIENT FOR FORMING
    AN IMAGE RECEIVING LAYER:

    Processes under the class definition forming an image, including a latent
    image, in a first layer by imagewise exposure of the first layer to
    radiation and the formation of an image in and/or on image receiving record
    layer during and/or after the exposure of the first layer by transfer of a
    material from the first layer to the record layer as a function of the
    imagewise exposure.  Elements for use in the above processes which contain
    the image record receiving layer or compositions for the same.

    (1)     Note.  For purpose of this and indented subclasses, an element can
    be a single layer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256,    for the stripping of an entire layer containing an image from one
    layer and transferring it to another layer and product therefor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 15+
    for record copying involving contact transfer.


CLS 430/200
TXT Imagewise heating, element or image receiving layers therefor or imagewise
    vapor and gas transfer process, element or image receiving layer therefor:

    Processes under subclass 199 wherein imagewise pattern of heat is applied
    to a layer to produce an image therein or to modify a previously formed
    image therein. Also, a process of imagewise vapor or gas transfer of the
    image to a receiving layer. Element or image receiving layer for use of any
    of the above processes are also included.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 318 for non-chemical thermal recording
    involving image transfer.


CLS 430/201
TXT Imagewise vapor or gas transfer process, element or image receiving layer
    therefor:

    Processes under subclass 200 wherein vapor or gas is transferred from the
    radiation-sensitive layer to an image receiving layer as a function of an
    exposure of the radiation-sensitive layer to an imagewise pattern of
    radiation and element or image receiving layer for use in the process.


CLS 430/202
TXT Diffusion transfer process, element, or identified image receiving layers
    therefor:

    Processes under subclass 199 wherein the image is formed in and/or on the
    image receiving layer by permeation of a nongaseous material from a
    radiation-sensitive layer in conjunction with and during the processing,
    e.g., exposure, developing, fixing, etc., of the radiation-sensitive layer.
     Also included are the element and identified image receiving layers for
    the above process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200,    for thermal recording processes and elements employing diffusion
    transfer of a material.


CLS 430/203
TXT By uniform application of heat, element, or image receiving layer therefor:

    Processes under subclass 202 wherein heat is applied in a uniform manner to
    the radiation-sensitive layer and/or image receiving layer at a time
    intermediate or during the imagewise exposure of the radiation-sensitive
    layer and the development of the image in the image receiving layer.  Also
    included are the element and the image receiving layers for the above
    process.


CLS 430/204
TXT Making printing plate:

    Processes under subclass 202 for producing a printing surface in and/or on
    the image receiving layer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300,    for other processes for making printing plates, and see the search
    note thereunder.


CLS 430/205
TXT Including imagewise removal of image receiving layer or portion thereof:


    Processes under subclass 204 wherein a portion or portions of the image
    receiving layer are removed as a function of the imagewise exposure of the
    radiation-sensitive layer.

    (1)     Note.  Removal, e.g., diffusion, etc., of a material from a portion
    of the record layer without substantially changing the thickness of the
    record layer is not included herein.


CLS 430/206
TXT Web processing of radiation-sensitive layer or imbibition of image
    receiving layer or image receiving element with processing composition
    prior to contact with the radiation sensitive element or layer:

    Processes under subclass 202 wherein (a) the exposed radiation-sensitive
    layer is processed by contacting it with a web containing a processing
    ingredient, or (b) the image receiving layer (or element) is imbibed with a
    processing composition for the radiation-sensitive layer prior to
    contacting the radiation-sensitive layer with the image receiving layer.


CLS 430/207
TXT Element structurally defined other than containing nominal processing
    composition container or trap, or containing processing composition
    container or trap made of identified material:

    Element under subclass 202 having a specified structural feature other than
    layer arrangement or broadly defined processing composition container or
    trap for excess processing composition.


CLS 430/208
TXT Having specified processing composition retaining means:

    Element under subclass 207 having more than a broadly recited container for
    retaining a processing composition prior to application of the composition.


CLS 430/209
TXT Having specified trap:

    Element under subclass 107 having more than a broadly recited trap for
    retaining excess processing composition after application of the processing
    composition.


CLS 430/210
TXT Having separable carrier sheet with processing composition container or
    trap permanently attached thereto:

    Element under subclass 207 wherein a carrier sheet having either a
    container or trap for the processing composition permanently attached
    thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256,    for stripping process and element.


CLS 430/211
TXT Element or identified image receiving layers for dye image formation:

    Element or identified image receiving layers under subclass 202 adapted for
    forming dye image, e.g., element containing a dye forming compound or dye
    mordant as a function of imagewise exposure of the radiation-sensitive
    layer.

    (1)     Note.  The dye image may be formed in the image receiving layer or
    the radiation-sensitive layer.


CLS 430/212
TXT Element containing silver salt sensitizer or either element or image
    receiving layer for use therewith:

    Element or image receiving layers under subclass 211 either containing
    radiation sensitive silver salt or a dye image receiving layer adapted to
    receive a diffusible dye or dye intermediate, transferred by diffusion from
    an element or layer comprising radiation sensitive silver salt.


CLS 430/213
TXT Having either an identified dye mordant or image receiving layer binder
    other than nominal gelatin:

    Element or receiving layers under subclass 212 containing an identified dye
    mordant, i.e., ingredient which mordants diffusible dyes or dye precursor
    or an identified dye image receiving record layer binder other than nominal
    gelatin.


CLS 430/214
TXT Having either a nonradiation sensitive scavenger layer, or an ingredient
    for forming scavenger or barrier layer, or an identified developing agent
    scavenger:


    Element under subclass 212 containing a nonradiation sensitive scavenger
    layer, other than the image receiving layer, which is not capable of
    preventing the diffusion therethrough of some diffusible ingredient,
    including water, hydrogen, and hydroxyl ions, present in the element during
    processing but is capable of preventing the through diffusion of at least
    one other diffusible ingredient present in the element before, during, or
    after processing, or containing an ingredient during the processing
    operation which forms a scavenger or barrier layer, other than the image
    receiving layer, or containing an identified ingredient, other than a dye
    image forming compound, which reacts with silver halide developing agent or
    derivatives thereof to scavenge or render radiant graphically innocuous
    excess or undesired developing agent.

    (1)     Note.  Layers impermeable to water, hydrogen ions or hydroxyl ions
    prior to processing the element which contains the same are not considered
    to be scavenger layers and ingredients for forming same.


CLS 430/215
TXT Identified synthetic polymeric binder contained in nonradiation sensitive
    processing composition permeable layer other than an image receiving or
    neutralizing layer:

    Element under subclass 212 which contains a nonradiation sensitive
    processing composition permeable layer having an identified synthetic
    polymeric binder therein and is not an image receiving or a neutralizing
    layer.


CLS 430/216
TXT Identified neutralizing layer or ingredient containing or dye stabilizer
    containing:

    Element under subclass 212 containing an identified neutralizing layer or
    ingredient adapted to adjust the pH of the processing composition during
    processing to more neutral pH, or containing an ingredient which stabilizes
    a dye image.


CLS 430/217
TXT Silver halide identified-grain, identified emulsion binder other than
    nominal gelatin, or identified sensitizer or identified desensitizer
    containing:


    Element under subclass 212 containing a silver halide identified grain of
    specified form, e.g., size, crystal habit, etc., or a silver halide
    identified binder other than a nominal gelatin or a silver halide
    identified ingredient which performs the function of, e.g.,
    hypersensitizing, latensifying, optical sensitizing or desensitizing, etc.


CLS 430/218
TXT Identified nondye image forming developing agent, silver halide development
    accelerator or retarder, or dye image forming accelerator or retarder
    containing:


    Element under subclass 212 containing a silver halide identified developing
    agent which is not an image forming dye or dye precursor, containing an
    identified ingredient functioning to accelerate, retard, or inhibit
    development of silver halide or containing an identified ingredient which
    effects the dye image density by accelerating or retarding the formation of
    a dye image forming compound or diffusion transfer rate of a diffusible dye
    image forming compound.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are, e.g., auxiliary developing
    agents, antifoggants, silver halide development accelerators or retarders,
    dye solvents or gelatin softeners which accelerate dye transfer and color
    development accelerators.


CLS 430/219
TXT Silver halide developing retarder or antifoggant:

    Subject matter under subclass 218 containing an ingredient functioning to
    retard the development of exposed silver halide or an ingredient which
    retards or prevents the formation of fog in a radiation-sensitive layer.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass, fog is defined as the
    formation of silver density in areas of the radiation sensitive silver
    halide layer not imagewise exposed to radiation.


CLS 430/220
TXT Identified light absorbing, whitening, brightening, or reflecting agent
    other than

    nominal TiO2:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 containing an identified ingredient which
    functions to absorb, filter, or reflect radiation and includes whiteners or
    brighteners and precursors thereof other

    than nominal TiO2.


CLS 430/221
TXT pH sensitive:

    Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein the ingredient is capable of
    substantially changing its radiation reflecting or absorbing properties
    with a change in the pH of its environment.


CLS 430/222
TXT Identified dye image forming compound other than colorless color developer
    or dye mordant containing or identified organic solvent for an incorporated
    ingredient:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 containing an identified image forming
    compound which is a dye or a dye precursor compound, e.g., leuco dye or
    color coupler, other than a dye mordant or a compound consisting
    essentially of a silver halide developing moiety which is not a dye or
    leuco dye moiety.  Also containing an identified organic solvent for at
    least one ingredient incorporated into a layer of an element.


CLS 430/223
TXT Redox cleavable dye or dye precursor releaser:

    Subject matter under subclass 222 wherein the dye image forming compound
    comprises a dye or dye precursor moiety and at lest one other moiety and
    which upon oxidation or reduction in a medium cleaves to separate the dye
    or dye precursor moiety from the other moiety and wherein the separated dye
    or dye precursor moiety has a degree of diffusibility in the element during
    processing substantially different from the degree of diffusibility of the
    uncleaved dye image forming compound in the element during processing.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from herein are elements containing, as the only
    redox cleavable dye or dye precursor releasing compound, dye image forming
    compound which may be oxidized during a condensation reaction with another
    compound and which cleaves off a dye or dye precursor moiety at their
    condensation reaction sites during the condensation reaction


CLS 430/224
TXT Dye developer or leuco dye developer:

    Subject matter under subclass 222 wherein the dye image forming compound
    comprises both a silver halide developing moiety and a dye or leuco dye
    moiety as the same or distinct moieties.

    (1)     Note.  A leuco dye moiety is considered to be a moiety which
    becomes a dye moiety after its oxidation or reduction.


CLS 430/225
TXT Azo:

    Subject matter under subclass 224 wherein the dye image forming compound
    comprises an azo moiety (-N:N-).


CLS 430/226
TXT Coupler with coupling-off ballast, dye or dye precursor moiety:

    Subject matter under subclass 222 wherein the dye image forming compound
    comprises a coupler moiety substituted at its coupling site with at least
    one other moiety selected from dye, dye precursor or ballast moieties and
    which is capable upon a coupling, i.e., condensation reaction, at its
    coupling site with another compound of cleaving the other moiety from the
    coupler moiety.

    (1)     Note.  The coupler moiety need not be a color coupler moiety, i.e.,
    a coupler moiety that forms a dye by a coupling reaction.


CLS 430/227
TXT Element or image receiving layers for silver salt or silver complex
    transfer:

    Subject matter under subclass 202 comprising an image receiving layer
    adapted to receive an imagewise distribution of diffusible silver salt or
    diffusible silver complex transferred by diffusion from the
    radiation-sensitive layer.


CLS 430/228
TXT Having lenticular or color screen:

    Subject matter under subclass 227 containing a lenticular or color screen.


CLS 430/229
TXT Permanent laminate:

    Subject matter under subclass 227 having a laminate adapted to be processed
    without delamination of the laminate intermediate the radiation-sensitive
    layer and image receiving layer and is adapted to form a transfer image in
    and/or on the image receiving layer which is viewable without delamination
    of the laminate intermediate the radiation-sensitive layer and the image
    receiving layer.


CLS 430/230
TXT Identified silver halide grain, silver halide emulsion, binder other than
    nominally defined gelatin, or silver halide sensitizer or desensitizer
    containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 227 containing a radiation sensitive silver
    halide layer having silver halide grains of a specified form, e.g., size,
    crystal habit, etc., containing an identified silver halide binder other
    than broadly defined gelatin, or containing an identified sensitizing,
    e.g., optical, latensifying, or desensitizing ingredient.


CLS 430/231
TXT Identified precipitation nuclei or image receiving layer binder containing
    other than nominal gelatin:

    Subject matter under subclass 227 containing an identified ingredient which
    causes, aids, or increases precipitation of silver from diffusible silver
    salts or diffusible silver complexes, or an identified binder other than a
    broadly defined gelatin, in an image receiving layer.


CLS 430/232
TXT Identified organic polymeric image receiving layer binder other than
    nominal gelatin:

    Subject matter under subclass 231 containing an identified organic
    polymeric binder other than broadly defined gelatin.


CLS 430/233
TXT Identified toning or silver transfer image stabilizing ingredient
    containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 227 containing an identified ingredient
    capable of reacting with a silver image to change the color of the image,
    including black, or containing an identified ingredient capable of
    stabilizing, e.g., preventing discoloration, etc., of an image formed in
    and/or on an image receiving layer by diffusion of a silver salt complex.


CLS 430/234
TXT Identified developing agent or silver salt complexing agent containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 227 containing an identified silver halide
    developing agent or containing an identified ingredient capable of forming
    a diffusible complex or salt with silver or radiation sensitive silver salt.


CLS 430/235
TXT Dye image formation process:

    Processes under subclass 202 for forming a dye image as a function of the
    imagewise exposure of the radiation-sensitive layer.


CLS 430/236
TXT Using silver salt sensitizer:

    Processes under subclass 235 wherein a radiation sensitive silver salt is
    used in the radiation-sensitive layer.


CLS 430/237
TXT Using identified neutralization layer or ingredient or separate post
    transfer treatment of dye image:

    Processes under subclass 236 employing an identified neutralization layer
    or ingredient which adjusts the pH of a processing composition used in
    forming the dye image to a substantially more neutral pH or treating a
    formed dye image.


CLS 430/238
TXT Using identified dye mordant or binder other than nominal gelatin:

    Processes under subclass 236 employing an identified dye mordant or an
    identified dye image receiving layer binder other than a broadly defined
    gelatin.


CLS 430/239
TXT Using identified nondye image forming developing agent, silver development
    accelerator or retarder, or dye image formation accelerator or retarder:

    Processes under subclass 236 using an identified developing agent which is
    not an image forming dye or dye precursor, using an identified ingredient
    which effects dye image density by accelerating or retarding the formation
    of a dye image forming compound or the diffusion transfer rate of a
    diffusible dye image forming compound or employing an identified ingredient
    which accelerates, retards, or inhibits development of a silver halide.


CLS 430/240
TXT Development retarder or antifoggant:

    Processes under subclass 239 wherein an identified ingredient is used which
    retards development of silver halide including an antifoggant.


CLS 430/241
TXT Using identified dye forming compound other than colorless color developer
    or dye mordant or using identified organic solvent:

    Processes under subclass 236 using an identified dye image forming compound
    which is a dye or dye precursor, e.g., leuco dye or coupler, etc., other
    than a dye mordant or a compound consisting essentially of a silver halide,
    developing moiety which is not a dye or leuco dye moiety or using an
    identified organic solvent.


CLS 430/242
TXT Redox cleavable dye or dye precursor releaser:

    Processes under subclass 241 wherein the dye image forming compound
    comprises a dye or dye precursor moiety and at least one other moiety which
    after being oxidized or reduced in a medium is cleaved separating the dye
    or dye precursor moiety from the other moiety to form a dye or dye
    precursor moiety having a substantially different diffusibility from the
    uncleaved dye image forming compound.


CLS 430/243
TXT Dye developer or leuco dye developer:

    Processes under subclass 241 wherein the dye image forming compound
    comprises both a silver halide developing moiety and a dye or leuco dye
    moiety either as the same moiety or distinct moieties.


CLS 430/244
TXT Silver salt transfer process:

    Processes under subclass 202 forming an image in or on the image receiving
    layer by imagewise transferring, by diffusion, a silver salt, or a silver
    complex from the radiation-sensitive layer to a second receiving layer.

    (1)     Note.  The layer receiving the diffusing silver salt or complex
    need not be the final image receiving layer in or on which the image is
    formed.


CLS 430/245
TXT Exposing through color filter element:

    Processes under subclass 244 forming a multicolor image record by exposing
    the radiation-sensitive layer to radiation from at least one color filter
    element.


CLS 430/246
TXT Processing permanent laminate:

    Processes under subclass 244 comprising the processing of a permanent
    laminate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229,    for definition of permanent laminate.


CLS 430/247
TXT Using identified precipitation nuclei or identified image receiving binder
    other than nominal gelatin:

    Processes under subclass 244 employing an identified ingredient functioning
    to cause, aid, or increase precipitation of silver, etc., from diffusible
    salts or diffusible complexes or using an identified binder, other than a
    broadly defined gelatin, for the image receiving layer.


CLS 430/248
TXT Including silver transfer image toning or stabilizing, or separate post
    transfer treatment of element or layer containing silver image:

    Processes under subclass 244 employing an identified ingredient which
    reacts with a silver image formed during processing to stabilize the silver
    image or to change the color of the silver image, including changing it to
    black, of treating a layer containing a formed silver image.


CLS 430/249
TXT Developing with an identified silver halide developing agent:

    Processes under subclass 244 employing an identified silver halide
    developing agent.


CLS 430/250
TXT Hydroxylamine:

    Processes under subclass 249 employing hydroxylamine to include substituted
    analogs as the developing agent.


CLS 430/251
TXT Processing with identified silver or silver salt complexing agent:

    Processes under subclass 244 employing an identified ingredient which forms
    a diffusible salt or diffusible complex when reacted with silver or
    radiation sensitive silver salt.


CLS 430/252
TXT Image layer portion transfer and element therefor:

    Processes under subclass 199 wherein the image is formed in the
    radiation-sensitive layer and a substantial continuous or discontinuous
    portion of the radiation-sensitive layer containing the image is
    transferred to the image receiving layer and the elements for use in the
    process.

    (1)     Note.  Processes wherein the thickness of the radiation-sensitive
    layer is not substantially reduced in either a continuous or discontinuous
    manner are not included herein.


CLS 430/253
TXT Separating exposed areas from unexposed or underexposed areas of image
    layer by transfer, element or receiving layer therefor:

    Processes under subclass 252 wherein portions of the radiation-sensitive
    layer exposed to a first quantity of radiation are at least partially
    separated from portions of the radiation-sensitive layer not exposed to
    said quantity of radiation, e.g., unexposed or underexposed portions, by
    transferring at least a part of one of said portions to an image receiving
    layer. Elements or image receiving layers for the process are also included.


CLS 430/254
TXT Transfer process with uniform heat application and element therefor:

    Processes under subclass 253 wherein heat is uniformly applied to the
    radiation-sensitive layer during transfer and the element used for the same.


CLS 430/255
TXT Using silver salt sensitizer and element therefor:

    Processes under subclass 253 wherein a radiation sensitive silver salt is
    used in the radiation-sensitive layer, and the element used for the same.


CLS 430/256
TXT STRIPPING PROCESS OR ELEMENt:

    Processes under the class definition of forming an image in a strippable
    layer, e.g., a radiation-sensitive layer, and the removal of such layer(s)
    by stripping the same from another layer or element to which it is
    (directly or indirectly) adhered, or the stripping, per se.  Also, an
    element adapted for use in the above process.

    (1)     Note.  The image may be formed in the stripping layer after the
    layer has been stripped.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    247 for process of direct contact transfer of adhered lamina from carrier
    to base with stripping of adhered lamina.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 202 for
    structurally defined web or sheet having intermediate discontinuous or
    differential layer with an outer strippable or release layer.


CLS 430/257
TXT Forming composite image, e.g., multiple stripped image layer, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 256 wherein plural strippable layers which
    have been stripped from layers or elements to which they were adhered are
    superimposed on each other.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes the formation of multicolor images by
    the superimposition of stripped layers containing different color images.


CLS 430/258
TXT Forming nonplanar image:

    Processes under subclass 256 for forming nonplanar image in the strippable
    layer either before or after the stripping operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    269,    for process of forming a nonplanar surface.


CLS 430/259
TXT Element:

    An element under subclass 256.


CLS 430/260
TXT Stripping layer having radiation polymerizable or cross-linkable
    composition:

    Elements under subclass 259 containing a radiation-sensitive composition
    which forms an image by polymerization or cross-linking which is a
    stripping layer.


CLS 430/261
TXT Strippable between two radiation-sensitive layers:

    Elements under subclass 259 adapted to be stripped between two
    electromagnetic sensitive layers.


CLS 430/262
TXT Stripping layer containing specified synthetic nonradiation sensitive
    polymer:

    Element under subclass 259 wherein the stripping layer, i.e., a layer
    adapted to be stripped at its interface with another layer, comprises a
    specified synthetic polymer.


CLS 430/263
TXT From ethylenically unsaturated monomer:

    Element under subclass 262 wherein the polymer is derived from
    ethylenically unsaturated monomers, e.g., vinyl polymers, etc.


CLS 430/264
TXT SILVER HALIDE COLLOID TANNING PROCESS, COMPOSITION, OR PRODUCT:

    Processes under the class definition wherein a radiation sensitive silver
    halide and polymer containing medium is imaged with radiation to (a)
    decrease the solubility to a developing solvent in imaged areas, (b)
    increase the oleophilic property in imaged areas, or (c) to produce a high
    contrast, viz, gamma significantly above unit gamma such as a gamma of 2.0
    silver image, in radiation exposed areas of the medium; radiation sensitive
    composition and product used in the process and used solely after image
    processing, as a printing plate or electrical device; also a finishing or
    perfecting composition and product used in the process.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are those processes wherein an oleophilic
    radiation insolubilized image is formed in radiation exposed areas of the
    medium.


CLS 430/265
TXT Process using lithographic infectious developer:

    Processes under subclass 264 wherein the imaged radiation medium is
    finished or perfected with a composition having a reducing agent for a
    latent silver image which produces a silver image, a printing plate, or an
    electrical device, etc.


CLS 430/266
TXT And polymer or nonpolymer condensation reaction product:

    Processes under subclass 265 wherein a polymer or nonpolymeric condensation
    reaction product is used during the finishing or perfecting procedures.


CLS 430/267
TXT And heterocyclic additive:

    Processes under subclass 265 wherein a heterocyclic compound is used during
    the finishing or perfecting procedure.


CLS 430/268
TXT Infectious developer composition:

    Compositions under subclass 264 having a reducing agent for latent silver
    image used to finish or perfect the imaged radiation sensitive medium by
    producing a silver image, a printing plate, or an electrical device, etc.


CLS 430/269
TXT IMAGING AFFECTING PHYSICAL PROPERTY OF RADIATION SENSITIVE MATERIAL, OR
    PRODUCING NONPLANAR OR PRINTING SURFACE - PROCESS, COMPOSITION, OR PRODUCT:

    Processes under the class definition wherein an image (a) is produced in an
    imaged medium based upon physical property (e.g., hardness, tackiness,
    solubility, swellability, vaporization, refractive index) difference in the
    medium caused by the amount of type or radiation received by the medium,
    and when the physical property difference in the medium is not caused by
    the amount or type of radiation received by the medium, the image is
    finished or perfected as by developing or fixing, (b) formed in a medium is
    a nonplanar image, i.e., image areas of the medium are elevated or lowered
    relative to the rest of the medium, or (c) formed in a medium and is used
    as or to form a printing surface; radiation-sensitive composition and
    product used in the process; process of making the radiation-sensitive
    composition and product; or finishing or perfecting composition or product
    used in the process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    408,    for photosolubilization processes involving a positive image.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Class 523, subclass 136 for a composition containing a
    synthetic resin which is resistant to, yet does not absorb, radioactive
    materials or cathode rays or to processes of preparing said composition.


CLS 430/270.1
TXT Radiation sensitive composition or product or process of making.

    Radiation sensitive composition or product under subclass 269 and the
    process of making the composition or product.


CLS 430/270.11
TXT Optical recording nonstructural layered product having a radiation
    sensitive composition layer claimed or solely  disclosed as optically
    recordable and optically machine readable.

    Subject matter under subclass 270.1 wherein a non-structural plural layered
    product having a radiation sensitive composition containing layer is
    claimed or solely disclosed for use as a carrier of optically recorded and
    optically machine readable information.

    (1)     Note. This subclass expressly excludes products designated as
    resists or printing plates.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    945,    a cross-reference art collection for materials recorded upon using
    a laser.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders; particularly, subclasses 134+ for a single or plural
    layer web or sheet which is disclosed as a record receiver solely for use
    with apparatus provided for in (1) and (2) of the definition of that class.

    (1)     Note.  A web or sheet which has chart graduations (e.g., graph,
    etc.) thereon is assigned to Class 346, subclass 135.1, regardless of its
    disclosure.


    365,    Static information storage and retrieval; for apparatus or
    corresponding processes for the static storage and retrieval of
    information, particularly subclasses 106+ for radiation altering of a
    condition or state of a memory material or element in accordance with the
    information stored.

    369,    Dynamic information storage or retrieval; particularly subclasses
    272.1+, for a  record carrier, per se, having specific information storage
    structure.

    (1)     Note.  The characteristic variation is one which must be
    retrievable by a transducer. Such variation producing only a directly
    perceptible indication (e.g., a graph) is classified in Class 346.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, provides for stock-liquid
    crystal, an article having a latent or developable image formed other than
    by use of radiation, and nonradiation sensitive stock material disclosed
    for use in radiation imagery.

    (1)     Note.  A web or sheet disclosed as a record receiver of general
    utility, or for multiple uses, at least one of which is other than for a
    recorder apparatus provided for in Class 346, is classified in the
    appropriate subclass in Class 428, with a cross-reference to Class 346, if
    appropriate.

    (2)     Note.  A disc with or without grooves which does not include
    recorded information is classified in Class 428, subclasses 64.1+.


CLS 430/270.12
TXT Having read-write layer of 100 per cent inorganic  composition:

    Subject matter under subclass 270.11 wherein the radiation sensitive
    composition containing layer contains only inorganic material.


CLS 430/270.13
TXT Which changes phase during recording:

    Subject matter under subclass 270.12 wherein at least some of the inorganic
    material is capable of undergoing a phase change upon optical recording
    (e.g., crystalline to amorphous, etc.).


CLS 430/270.14
TXT Having read-write layer of 100 per cent organic or organometallic
    composition or mixtures thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 270.11 wherein the radiation sensitive
    composition containing layer contains only organic material or a metal
    complex of organic material or mixtures thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The term "organic material" as used herein means a material
    within the main Class definition of Class 260, Chemistry of Carbon
    Compounds.


CLS 430/270.15
TXT Containing non-polymeric chromophore:

    Subject matter under subclass 270.14 wherein the radiation sensitive
    composition containing layer contains a chromophore which is not attached
    to a polymer.


CLS 430/270.16
TXT Organometallic containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 270.15 wherein the non-polymeric chromophore
    is a metal complex of an organic material.


CLS 430/270.17
TXT Naphthalocyanine:

    Subject matter under subclass 270.16 wherein the organometallic is a metal
    complex of naphthalocyanine (i.e., a compound containing four
    isobenzoindole rings linked in a sixteen membered ring of alternating
    carbon atoms and nitrogen atoms around a central metal atom).


CLS 430/270.18
TXT Having methine linkage:

    Subject matter under subclass 270.15 wherein the nonpolymeric chromophore
    has a methine linkage   (i.e.,  -CH=).


CLS 430/270.19
TXT And containing quencher or stabilizer:

    Subject matter under subclass 270.18 wherein, in addition to the
    non-polymeric chromophore, the radiation sensitive composition containing
    layer contains material which prevents fading or degradation thereof.


CLS 430/270.2
TXT Cyanine chromophore:

    Subject matter under subclass 270.18 wherein the methine linkage containing
    non-polymeric chromophore is a compound which contains two distinct
    heterocyclic rings, each individual heterocyclic ring containing at least
    one nitrogen atom, said nitrogen atoms of the individual rings being joined
    through a resonating acyclic carbon chain which contains the methine
    linkage (i.e., -CH=) or a conjugated chain which contains the methine
    linkage (i.e.,-CH=).


CLS 430/270.21
TXT Indolenic cyanine chromophore:

    Subject matter under subclass 270.2 wherein at least one of the
    heterocyclic rings of the cyanine is a substituted or unsubstituted indole
    moiety (i.e., 2,3-benzopyrrole).


CLS 430/271.1
TXT Identified backing or protective layer
    containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 270.1 wherein a backing or protective layer
    of the medium is specifically named.


CLS 430/272.1
TXT Silicon containing backing or protective layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 271.1 wherein the backing layer or the
    protecting layer contains silicon.


CLS 430/273.1
TXT Identified overlayer on radiation-sensitive
    layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 271.1 wherein the radiation-sensitive layer
    is provided with an identified overlayer.


CLS 430/274.1
TXT And radiation-sensitive chromium compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 271.1 wherein the medium includes a
    radiation-sensitive chromium compound.


CLS 430/275.1
TXT Metal as backing or protective layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 271.1 wherein the backing or protective layer
    is metal.


CLS 430/276.1
TXT And another backing or protective layer other than aluminum oxide:

    Subject matter under subclass 275.1 wherein a different layer is included
    in the medium other than a metal backing or protective layer.

    (1)     Note. See subclass 525 for a more specific definition of another
    backing layer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278.1,  for aluminum oxide used in a backing layer.


CLS 430/277.1
TXT Copper:

    Subject matter under subclass 275.1 wherein the metal is copper.


CLS 430/278.1
TXT Aluminum:

    Subject matter under subclass 275.1 wherein the metal is aluminum.

    (1)     Note.  Aluminum backing with aluminum oxide or oxide surface or
    layer are included herein.


CLS 430/279.1
TXT Zinc or magnesium:

    Subject matter under subclass 275.1 wherein the metal is zinc or magnesium.


CLS 430/280.1
TXT Radiation sensitive composition comprising oxirane ring containing
    component:

    Subject matter under subclass 270.1 wherein the radiation sensitive
    composition includes an ingredient containing a three membered ring having
    two carbons and one oxygen atom.


CLS 430/281.1
TXT Radiation sensitive composition comprising ethylenically unsaturated
    compound;

    Subject matter under subclass 270.1 wherein the radiation sensitive
    composition includes an ethylenically unsaturated ingredient.


CLS 430/282.1
TXT N-vinylidene:

    Subject matter under subclass 281.1 wherein the ethylenically unsaturated
    ingredient is an n-vinylidene compound (HC=C=).


CLS 430/283.1
TXT Amide:

    Subject matter under subclass 281.1 wherein the ethylenically unsaturated
    ingredient has an amide moiety.


CLS 430/284.1
TXT Urethane:

    Subject matter under subclass 283.1 wherein the ethylenically unsaturated
    ingredient has a urethane moiety.


CLS 430/285.1
TXT Polyester:

    Subject matter under subclass 281.1 wherein the ethylenically unsaturated
    ingredient is a polyester.


CLS 430/286.1
TXT Resin or prepolymer containing ethylenical unsaturation:

    Subject matter under subclass 281.1 wherein the ethylenically unsaturated
    ingredient is a resin or prepolymer with ethylenic unsaturation in the main
    chain of the resin or prepolymer (see (1) Note in subclass 287.1).


CLS 430/287.1
TXT Ethylenic unsaturation within the side chain component:

    Subject matter under subclass 286.1 wherein the ethylenically unsaturated
    ingredient is a resin or prepolymer with ethylenic unsaturation in the side
    chain of the resin or prepolymer.

    (1)     Note. Prepolymer for this subclass definition excludes monomer
    compounds having no recurring units.


CLS 430/288.1
TXT Plural, terminal unsaturation:

    Subject matter under subclass 281.1 wherein the ethylenically unsaturated
    ingredient has plural, terminal unsaturation.


CLS 430/289.1
TXT Radiation sensitive chromium compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 270.1 wherein the radiation sensitive
    composition includes a radiation sensitive chromium compound.


CLS 430/290
TXT Light scattering or refractive index image formation:

    Processes under subclass 269 wherein the image produced in the medium is
    light scattering or in the form of a refractive index differential in the
    medium.


CLS 430/291
TXT Post imaging treatment with particles:

    Processes under subclass 269 wherein the image medium is contacted with a
    dry particulate material to form an image.


CLS 430/292
TXT Readily visible image formation:

    Processes under subclass 269 wherein the image produced in the medium is
    readily discernible to the viewer.

    (1)     Note.  Many images produced in processes under subclass 269 may be
    visible as disclosed in the patent specification such as lithographic or
    relief printing plate.  However, unless the patent claims expressly pertain
    to including a visible color forming ingredient in the medium, a readily
    discernible image to the viewer is not obtained for classification purposes
    in this and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300+,   for images that may be visible but the claimed image is specific to
    some use, such as printing plate use.


CLS 430/293
TXT Color proofing or multicolor image formation:

    Process under subclass 292 wherein the image is used for color proofing or
    is a multicolor image.

    (1)     Note.  A multicolor image is one in which the color-forming
    ingredient, layer, or element absorbs light in different areas of the
    visible light spectrum, e.g., absorbs magenta and cyan or red and green.


CLS 430/294
TXT By solvent removal:

    Process under subclass 291 wherein the readily discernible image is
    produced by removing a portion of the imaged medium.


CLS 430/295
TXT Making ornamental design:

    Processes under subclass 292 wherein the image is in the form of an
    ornamental design, such as an adornment placed on an article.


CLS 430/296
TXT Electron beam imaging:

    Processes under subclass 269 wherein the radiation used for imaging the
    medium is in the form of an electron beam.


CLS 430/297
TXT Simultaneous radiation imaging and etching of substrate:

    Processes under subclass 269 wherein radiation imaging of a
    radiation-sensitive layer of the medium is performed simultaneously with
    removal of portions of the medium beneath the imaged radiation-sensitive
    layer.

    (1)     Note.  Simultaneously, for this subclass definition means that the
    radiation imaging and etching (removal) are performed concurrently in time.


CLS 430/298
TXT Simultaneous radiation imaging and deposition of material on substrate:


    Processes under subclass 269 wherein radiation imaging of a
    radiation-sensitive layer of the medium is performed simultaneously with
    deposition of material on portions of the medium beneath the image
    radiation-sensitive layer.

    (1)     Note.  Simultaneously, for this subclass definition means that the
    radiation imaging and deposition are performed concurrently in time.


CLS 430/299
TXT Simultaneous developing a resist image and etching a substrate:

    Processes under subclass 269 wherein the image radiation-sensitive layer of
    the medium is developed to remove portions of the layer simultaneously with
    removal of portions of the medium beneath the imaged radiation-sensitive
    layer.

    (1)     Note.  Simultaneously, for this subclass definition means that the
    developing and etching (removal) are performed concurrently in time.


CLS 430/300
TXT Making printing plates:

    Processes under subclass 269 wherein the image is used as or to form a
    printing plate.


CLS 430/301
TXT Multicolor:

    Processes under subclass 300 wherein the printing plate is used to produce
    a multicolor reproduction.


CLS 430/302
TXT Lithographic:

    Processes under subclass 300 wherein ink adheres to the surface of the
    printing plate based upon oleophilic and oleophobic, or hydrophilic or
    hydrophobic differences at the surface of the plate which ink is capable of
    transfer onto a surface to be printed producing a reproduction.


CLS 430/303
TXT Driography:

    Processes under subclass 302 wherein prior to adhering ink to the surface
    of the printing plate, a fountain solution is not used to increase the
    differences.


CLS 430/304
TXT Coating over colloid image and removal of colloid image to leave reversed
    image in coating, i.e., deep etch:

    Processes under subclass 302 wherein the image is obtained by overcoating
    an imaged and developed radiation-sensitive layer with a material which
    remains after removal of the image and developed layer.

    (1)     Note.  The processing procedure of this subclass produces a
    reversal of the location of the image used as or to form a printing plate.


CLS 430/305
TXT Continuous tone or collotype:

    Processes under subclass 302 wherein the reproduction is a continuous tone
    image.


CLS 430/306
TXT Relief:

    Processes under subclass 300 wherein the printing plate produces a
    reproduction based on ink transfer onto a surface to be printed from the
    heights of an imaged medium having raised areas.


CLS 430/307
TXT Intaglio or gravure:

    Processes under subclass 300 wherein the printing plate produces a
    reproduction based on ink transfer onto a surface to be printed from the
    valleys of an imaged medium having lowered areas.


CLS 430/308
TXT Stencil:

    Processes under subclass 300 wherein the printing plate produces a
    reproduction by forcing ink through an impervious perforated material onto
    a surface to be printed.


CLS 430/309
TXT Post imaging process:

    Processes under subclass 300 wherein a process procedure after imaging is
    used to finish or perfect the printing plate.


CLS 430/310
TXT Including etching of substrate:

    Processes under subclass 309 wherein the process procedure is removal of
    portions of the medium beneath the imaged radiation-sensitive layer.


CLS 430/311
TXT Making electrical device:

    Processes under subclass 269 wherein the image is used as or to form an
    electrical device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, appropriate subclass
    for methods of making semiconductor devices; see search notes therein.


CLS 430/312
TXT Including multiple resist image formation:

    Processes under subclass 311 wherein the imaged medium is developed to form
    more than one resist image.

    (1)     Note.  A resist image is an image formed by removal of portions of
    the imaged radiation-sensitive layer of the medium.

    (2)     Note.  Processes found in this subclass include those wherein there
    are multiple imaging and developing steps; a single imaging and multiple
    developing step; or multiple imaging and single developing steps.


CLS 430/313
TXT With formation of resist image, and etching of substrate or material
    deposition:

    Processes under subclass 311 wherein the image is developed to form a
    resist image in the medium, and portions of the medium not covered by the
    resist image are removed or have material deposited thereon.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note in subclass 312 for the definition of resist
    image.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, for disclosure (nonclaimed) of
    forming an image by radiation imagery and involving a claimed post imaging
    etching process.


CLS 430/314
TXT Etching of substrate and material deposition:

    Processes under subclass 313 wherein portions of the medium are removed and
    material is deposited on the medium.


CLS 430/315
TXT Material deposition only:

    Processes under subclass 313 wherein only material is deposited on the
    medium not covered by the resist image.


CLS 430/316
TXT Multiple etching of substrate:

    Processes under subclass 313 wherein portions of the medium are removed
    using more than one etching procedure.


CLS 430/317
TXT Insulative or nonmetallic dielectric etched:

    Processes under subclass 313 wherein the portion of the medium being
    removed is an insulative or dielectric (nonmetal) material.


CLS 430/318
TXT Metal etched:

    Processes under subclass 313 wherein the portion of the medium being
    removed is a metal.


CLS 430/319
TXT Named electrical device:

    Processes under subclass 311 wherein the electrical device is specifically
    identified, e.g., a printed circuit or a mesa transistor, etc.


CLS 430/320
TXT Making named article:

    Processes under subclass 269 wherein the imaged medium is used for making a
    specifically identified article.


CLS 430/321
TXT Optical device:

    Processes under subclass 320 wherein the article is an optical device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for optical devices which are useful for imaging, such as a photo
    mask, and process of making those devices.

    SEARCH CLASS

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, for disclosure (nonclaimed) of
    forming an image by radiation imagery and involving a claimed post imaging
    etching process.


CLS 430/322
TXT Forming nonplanar surface:

    Processes under subclass 269 wherein imaged areas of the medium are
    elevated or lowered relative to the rest of the medium.


CLS 430/323
TXT Including etching substrate:

    Processes under subclass 322 wherein portions of the medium beneath an
    imaged layer in the medium are removed.


CLS 430/324
TXT Including material deposition:

    Processes under subclass 322 wherein portions of the medium beneath an
    imaged layer in the medium have material deposited thereon.


CLS 430/325
TXT Post image treatment to produce elevated pattern:

    Processes under subclass 322 wherein the imaged medium is treated to
    produce an image in the form of raised pattern, e.g., by removal of soluble
    material in radiation unexposed areas of a radiation layer, etc.


CLS 430/326
TXT Pattern elevated in radiation unexposed areas:

    Processes under subclass 325 wherein the imaged medium is treated to
    produce an image in the form of an elevated pattern in radiation unexposed
    areas of the medium, i.e., by removal of soluble material in radiation
    exposed areas of a radiation-sensitive layer.


CLS 430/327
TXT Processing feature prior to imaging:
    Processes under subclass 269 wherein there is a perfecting procedure prior
    to imaging the medium.


CLS 430/328
TXT Post imaging radiant energy exposure:
    Processes under subclass 269 wherein there is a perfecting or finishing
    procedure subsequent to imaging the medium.


CLS 430/329
TXT Removal of imaged layers:

    Processes under subclass 269 wherein the imaged and developed layer of the
    medium is removed subsequent to development.


CLS 430/330
TXT Including heating:

    Process under subclass 269 wherein heat is used to image, perfect, or
    finish an image in the medium.


CLS 430/331
TXT Finishing or perfecting composition or product:

    Composition or product under subclass 269 used to finish or perfect an
    image in the medium.


CLS 430/332
TXT DYE IMAGE FROM RADIATION SENSITIVE DYE OR DYE FORMER BY DRY PROCESSING,
    COMPOSITION, OR PRODUCT:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a radiation sensitive dye
    or dye former in a medium is imaged with electromagnetic radiation to
    produce a print out dye image, bleach out dye image, or latent image which
    is developed to a visible image by dye processing, e.g., photochromic
    dyestuff, print out dyestuffs, photo bleachable dyestuff, leuco dyestuffs,
    etc., also radiation sensitive composition and product used in the process,
    and process of making the same.

    (1)     Note.  A dye for the purpose of this and indented subclasses is any
    colored (including black) organic compound.


CLS 430/333
TXT Multiple image formation, multiple image exposure, or simultaneous radiant
    energy exposure:

    Processes under subclass 332 wherein more than one image is formed in the
    medium, more than one imaging exposure of the medium is employed, or the
    radiant energy utilized during the imaging exposure is from different
    portions of the electromagnetic spectrum.


CLS 430/334
TXT Positive image formation from radiation sensitive dye former:

    Processes under subclass 332 wherein the image is formed in portions of the
    medium not subject to electromagnetic radiation or inversely proportional
    to the amount of electromagnetic radiation received.


CLS 430/335
TXT Pretreatment processing before imaging, e.g., overall radiant energy
    exposure, etc.:

    Processes under subclass 332 wherein the medium to be imaged is subject to
    a processing procedure prior to imaging.


CLS 430/336
TXT Developing latent image using radiant energy or heat:

    Processes under subclass 332 wherein the latent image is developed with
    radiant energy such as infrared radiation or heat such as by contact with a
    hot body.


CLS 430/337
TXT Fixing or stabilizing image:

    Processes under subclass 332 wherein the image is made permanent or
    temporarily permanent, viz, only a special procedure would remove the
    image, etc.


CLS 430/338
TXT Composition or product:

    Composition and product under subclass 332 made by the process of the class
    and the process of making the same not otherwise provided.


CLS 430/339
TXT Radiation sensitive bleachable dyestuff:
    Compositions under subclass 338 containing a compound having a chromophore
    group such as an azo moiety, which upon exposure to electromagnetic
    radiation becomes colorless or less brightly colored.


CLS 430/340
TXT Identified sensitizer containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 338 containing a radiation sensitizer which
    is itself not a dye or dye former.


CLS 430/341
TXT Metal salt or complex:

    Subject matter under subclass 340 containing a radiation sensitive metal
    salt or complex.


CLS 430/342
TXT Sulfur compound:

    Compositions and products under subclass 340 containing a radiation
    sensitive compound having a sulfur atom.


CLS 430/343
TXT Heterocyclic:

    Compositions and products under subclass 340 containing a radiation
    sensitive compound having a heterocyclic ring.


CLS 430/344
TXT Halogen compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 340 containing a radiation sensitive compound
    having a halogen atom.


CLS 430/345
TXT Spiropyran dye or dye former:

    Subject matter under subclass 338 containing a radiation sensitive
    spiropyran compound, e.g., benzospiropyran, etc.


CLS 430/346
TXT VISIBLE IMAGING USING RADIATION ONLY OTHER THAN HEATING BY SURFACE CONTACT
    OR CONVECTION:

    Processes under the class definition using only radiation to produce a
    visual image by either forming the same or rendering a latent image visible
    (developing).

    (1)     Note.  The term "heat" in a claim without further limitation will
    not place a patent in this subclass, but rather in subclass 348 below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 330+ for nonchemical infrared to visible
    imaging.

    346,    Recorders, subclass 76.1 for pyrographic or thermochemical recorder
    for recording phenomenal information.

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, subclasses  224+ for
    radiation marking apparatus, and subclasses 129+ for electrostatic marking
    apparatus including photo scanning device.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 542, 557+ and 595+ for infrared or
    radiant heat rendering a coating visible.


CLS 430/347
TXT COMBINED:

    Subject matter of this class not provided for below combined with subject
    matter of another class.


CLS 430/348
TXT THERMOGRAPHIC PROCESS:

    Processes under the class definition wherein radiant heat (heat applied by
    means which does not touch the radiant sensitive receiver) is used to form
    the image or heat is used in some phase of the process of image formation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99,     for fixing an electric or magnetic image by a heated metal roller.

    151,    for heat development of diazo-type process.

    198,    for visible imaging including firing or sintering.

    203,    for diffusion transfer process using heat.

    330,    for imaging affecting physical property of radiation sensitive
    material, or producing nonplanar or printing surface including heating.

    346,    for forming a visible image or rendering visible a latent image by
    use of radiation only.

    363,    for laser exposure in a color process.

    616,    for composition for visible imaging by radiation only.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 316.1+ for infrared or thermal pattern
    recording.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 70 for thermostatic or thermophoric
    compositions.

    346,    Recorders, subclasses 76.1 for phenomenal recorders wherein heat is
    involved in the recording operation.

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, subclass 113 for
    electrostatic recorders in which a latent image is made visible by applying
    heat to cause a plastic deformation of a charged medium,    subclass  114
    for electrothermographic, subclasses 171+ and  224+ for thermal and
    radiation marking apparatus and processes.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 59 for
    thermomagnetic recording.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 542, 557+ and 595+ for infrared
    energy or radiant heating applied to a coating.


CLS 430/349
TXT Heat applied before imaging:

    Subject matter under subclass 348 including the step of applying heat prior
    to imaging, e.g., for sensitizing, after coating, etc.


CLS 430/350
TXT Heat applied after imaging:

    Subject matter under subclass 348 including the application of heat
    subsequent to imaging, e.g., sensitize or perfect the image, etc.


CLS 430/351
TXT Color development:

    Processes under subclass 350 wherein an elevated temperature (includes gas
    or vapor treatment) is applied in the formation of a color image.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    357+,   for the production of a colored image.


CLS 430/352
TXT During stabilization:

    Processes under subclass 350 wherein an elevated temperature is applied to
    stabilize the image.


CLS 430/353
TXT During dry development:

    Processes under subclass 350 wherein an elevated temperature is applied
    during development and no solutions are used. Radiation thermographic
    process systems are included herein.


CLS 430/354
TXT Including generation of vapor, moisture, etc.:

    Processes under subclass 353 wherein a vapor, moisture, gas, etc., is
    produced during the development, but the final product is dry to touch
    after processing.


CLS 430/355
TXT During solvent development:

    Processes under subclass 350 wherein an elevated temperature is applied
    during development in which solution is used.


CLS 430/356
TXT ACHROMATIC IMAGE PRODUCED FROM CHROMATIC REPRODUCTION IMAGE:

    Processes under the class definition for producing achromatic, i.e., black,
    white, or grey images from chromatic, i.e., color reproduction images,
    e.g., preparation of color separation records from multicolor reproduction
    materials.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401,    for achromatic image preparation wherein chromatic reproduction
    images are not used as an original.


CLS 430/357
TXT COLOR IMAGING PROCESS:

    Processes under the class definition for producing chromatic from
    nonspecified radiation sensitive material and either named or unnamed
    colorant or color producing material.

    (1)     Note.  The image must be chromatic (colored) and not achromatic
    (black, white, or grey).

    (2)     Note.  Free metal image, per se, as the final image is not included
    herein as a color image.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for holographic color process, composition, or element.

    9+,     for colored image product.

    31+,    for electric or magnetic imagery color process, composition, or
    product.

    141+,   for diazo color process, composition, or element.

    211+,   for transfer color process.

    269+,   for photopolymer color process, composition, or element.

    332+,   for radiation-sensitive dye and dye former process, composition, or
    element.

    348+,   for thermographic color process.

    449+,   for nonradiation-sensitive compositions used to form either
    chromatic or achromatic images or both.

    495+,   for radiation-sensitive color element.

    541+,   for named radiation-sensitive compositions.


CLS 430/358
TXT Color proofing:

    Processes under subclass 357 for producing color proofs or colored
    facsimile of a colored print or design.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for registering one or more images with the radiation sensitive
    medium to be imaged.

    143,    for color proofing of a diazo color image.


CLS 430/359
TXT Color correcting:

    Processes under subclass 357 for correcting unwanted spectral absorption by
    color images, e.g., preventing color mixing in a reversal process, etc.


CLS 430/360
TXT Correcting by silver image:

    Processes under subclass 359 for using a silver image to correct unwanted
    spectral adsorption.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    364,    for the production of a final color and silver image where the
    silver image is not for the purpose of color correction.


CLS 430/361
TXT Correcting by color image produced by oxidizing bath treatment:

    Processes under subclass 359 for using a colored image produced by
    treatment in an oxidizing medium, e.g., reaction of residual coupler with
    oxidized developer, etc., to correct unwanted spectral adsorption.


CLS 430/362
TXT Correcting by interimage effect:

    Processes under subclass 359 for using an interimage effect, e.g., by
    adding a compound to an interlayer, etc., to correct unwanted spectral
    adsorption.


CLS 430/363
TXT Laser or radiation exposure other than visible light:

    Processes under subclass 357 for exposing material with a laser or forms of
    radiation other than visible light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200,    for imagewise heat exposure in a transfer process.

    348+,   for imagewise heat exposure.


CLS 430/364
TXT Forming combined chromatic and achromatic images:

    Processes under subclass 357 for forming both a chromatic and achromatic
    image as the final image.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    356,    for the production of achromatic images from chromatic reproduction
    images.

    360,    for the use of an achromatic image to correct a chromatic image.

    367,    369 and 370, for the production of chromatic images from achromatic
    reproduction images.


CLS 430/365
TXT Forming multicolor image in a single layer: Processes under subclass 357
    for producing images having more than one color in a single layer.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is the production of color in a multilayered
    material wherein one or more layers contain two or more color images.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    383,    for the production of a multicolor image from color couplers
    wherein the layers of a multicolor material contain only one color.

    549,    for silver compound radiation sensitive compositions containing two
    or more couplers.


CLS 430/366
TXT Resensitizing:

    Processes under subclass 357 for producing second and subsequent color
    images from resensitized radiation sensitive materials, e.g., by
    rehalogenation or coating a radiation sensitive material onto an imaged
    layer, etc.


CLS 430/367
TXT Chromatic image produced from achromatic reproduction image:

    Processes under subclass 357 for producing a colored image from a visible,
    finished achromatic image.  This process may involve coloring of the
    achromatic image itself, e.g., by hand painting or the use of an achromatic
    image in a process of reproduction to yield a colored image.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is the production of color images by using
    metal images other than silver when used in the silver dye bleach or color
    reversal process.


CLS 430/368
TXT Blue or brown print forming:

    Processes under subclass 367 wherein a radiation sensitive iron compound
    containing medium is imaged to produce a blue or blue-like image, or a
    brown or brown-like image.


CLS 430/369
TXT Viewing through either a colored filter or a colored light:

    Processes under subclass 367 including the step of observing the achromatic
    image through either a colored filter or a colored light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    245,    for step exposing through filter to produce an achromatic image in
    the diffusion transfer process.


CLS 430/370
TXT Toning:

    Processes under subclass 367 for producing the chromatic image by reacting
    a metal or metal salt achromatic image with an inorganic colorant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248,    for toning a silver image formed by diffusion transfer.

    367,    for toning a metal image with an organic colorant.


CLS 430/371
TXT Mordanting:

    Processes under subclass 357 for forming a final colored image by
    mordanting a dye to the image site.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213,    for dye mordanting in a diffusion transfer process.


CLS 430/372
TXT Stabilizing:

    Processes under subclass 357 for stabilizing a dye image against the
    fogging or staining effect of heat ultraviolet, storage, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216,    for dye image stabilization in a diffusion transfer process.


CLS 430/373
TXT Intensifying:

    Processes under subclass 357 wherein the density of the dye image is
    increased.


CLS 430/374
TXT Using identified radiation sensitive composition in the formation of color
    image:

    Processes under subclass 357 for producing a colored image using identified
    radiation sensitive materials, e.g., titanium dioxide, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    357,    for process using generic radiation sensitive materials.

    541,    for radiation sensitive compositions used in the process.


CLS 430/375
TXT Silver compound sensitizer:

    Processes under subclass 374 using a silver compound radiation sensitive
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    542,    for the silver compound radiation sensitive compositions.


CLS 430/376
TXT And coupler:

    Processes under subclass 375 including the use of color coupler (which can
    be located in the composition, element, or processing medium).

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are couplers which produce dyes wherein the
    color is not named or dyes wherein the color is other than cyan, magenta,
    or yellow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402,    for achromatic images from couplers.

    543,    for radiation sensitive compositions used in this process.


CLS 430/377
TXT And binder, coating aid, solvent, emulsifier, hardener, chemical
    sensitizer, or optical sensitizer:

    Processes under subclass 376 using identified binder, coating aid, solvent,
    emulsifier, hardener, hypersensitizers or optical sensitizers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    378,    for process involving use of optical desensitizer in fogged silver
    halide emulsion.

    382,    for process using dye or development inhibitors.

    543,    for compositions used in this process.


CLS 430/378
TXT Direct positive process:

    Processes under subclass 376 for producing a direct positive color image.
    Included herein are processes involving radiation sensitive silver compound
    compositions which form direct positive images on exposure and development
    which images are used in the formation of color images.  The unexposed
    portions rather than the exposed portions are developed during initial
    development.  Also, processes involving couplers which react with oxidized
    developer in the exposed areas to form colorless products and which are
    oxidized in unexposed regions to form color images.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359,    for the direct positive color image which is used for color
    correction.

    379,    for positive color images formed by reversal processing.

    547,    for compositions used in the process of this subclass.


CLS 430/379
TXT Reversal process:

    Processes under subclass 378 wherein the radiation sensitive silver
    compound left after the first negative development is used for forming a
    positive color image.

    (1)     Note.  The couplers used in the process can be in the emulsion
    layers or in the developing compositions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    378,    for production of direct positive color image.


CLS 430/380
TXT And developer other than or in addition to p-phenylenediamine or derivative
    thereof:

    Processes under subclass 376 including the use of a developer other than or
    in addition to a compound containing the p-phenylenediamine or derivatives
    or combinations thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    379,    for use of plural developers in a reversal process.


CLS 430/381
TXT Polymeric or bis coupler:

    Processes under subclass 376 wherein the coupler contains two or more
    coupling moieties or the coupler is a polymeric compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    548,    for compositions used in this process.


CLS 430/382
TXT And either developing or dye inhibition:

    Processes under subclass 376 wherein the coupler either functions as a
    developer or dye inhibitor or is combined with a noncolor image forming
    developing or dye inhibitor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    374     and 375, for color image formation using noncolor image forming
    developing inhibitors and components other than couplers.

    543,    for compositions used in this process.


CLS 430/383
TXT Forming multicolor image:

    Processes under subclass 376 for forming multicolor image with only one
    color image in any single layer of a multilayered material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    365,    for the formation of multicolor images wherein a single layer
    contains plural images.

    378,    for the formation of direct positive color images.

    379,    for the formation of multicolor images by the reversal process.


CLS 430/384
TXT Identified cyan dye color:

    Processes under subclass 376 involving use of a cyan-dye forming coupler
    (usually phenolic or naphtholic compounds).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    376,    for all other specified or nonspecified color image formation.

    384     through 389, for specified cyan, magenta, or yellow color image
    formation.

    552,    for radiation sensitive compounds used in this subclass.


CLS 430/385
TXT Substituted at coupling position with other than hydrogen:

    Processes under subclass 384 involving the use of couplers containing a
    group other than hydrogen attached to the coupling position which is
    removed during processing, usually two-equivalent couplers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    553,    for radiation sensitive compositions used in this process.


CLS 430/386
TXT Identified magenta dye color:

    Processes under subclass 376 involving the use of magenta-dye forming
    coupler, usually a 2-pyrazolin-5-one compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    554,    for radiation sensitive composition used in this process.


CLS 430/387
TXT Substituted at coupling position with other than hydrogen:

    Processes under subclass 386 involving use of couplers containing a group
    attached to the coupling position which is removed during processing,
    usually two-equivalent couplers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    555,    for radiation sensitive compositions used in this process.


CLS 430/388
TXT Identified yellow dye color:

    Processes under subclass 376 involving use of a yellow-dye forming coupler
    usually open chain ketomethylene type compounds, e.g., benzoylacetanilide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    556,    for radiation sensitive composition used in this process.


CLS 430/389
TXT Substituted at coupling position with other than hydrogen:

    Processes under subclass 388 involving use of couplers containing a group
    other than hydrogen attached to the coupling position which is removed
    during processing, usually two-equivalent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    557,    for radiation sensitive compositions used in this process.


CLS 430/390
TXT And dye:

    Processes under subclass 375 involving use of a radiation sensitive silver
    compound composition containing a preformed dye before exposure such dye
    usually being of the azo, anthraquinone, indigo, phthalocyanine, etc., type
    and the process usually is the dye-bleach process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199+,   for process involving dye to developers in diffusion transfer
    process.

    376,    385, 387, and 389, for processes involving two-equivalent couplers
    containing a dye moiety attached to the coupling position.

    559,    for radiation sensitive compositions used in this process.


CLS 430/391
TXT Forming multicolor image:

    Processes under subclass 390 for forming multicolor image with only one
    color image in any single layer of a multilayered material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    365,    for the formation of multicolor images wherein any single layer
    contains plural images.


CLS 430/392
TXT And dye catalyst:

    Processes under subclass 390 wherein a dye catalyst is used and may be
    located in the element or processing both.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    559,    for radiation sensitive composition used in this process.


CLS 430/393
TXT Silver bleach or bleach-fix:

    Processes under subclass 375 wherein in the formation of the color image a
    silver image is bleached or bleached and fixed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    374,    where a metal other than silver is bleached or bleached-fixed.

    430,    for silver bleach or bleach fix process in the formation of
    achromatic images.

    461,    for silver bleach compositions.


CLS 430/394
TXT PLURAL EXPOSURE STEPS:

    Processes under the class definition involving multiple imaging or
    treatments with radiation.


CLS 430/395
TXT USING REFLECTED RADIATION, E.G., REFLEX COPYING, ETC.:

    Processes under the class definition employing radiation cast back after
    having struck a surface.


CLS 430/396
TXT EFFECTING FRONTAL RADIATION MODIFICATION DURING EXPOSURE, E.G., SCREENING,
    MASKING, STENCILING, ETC.:

    Processes under the class definition employing some means interposed
    between the radiation source and the image receiver which changes the
    quantity or quality of radiation reaching the receiver, e.g., a mask,
    stencil, screening, vignetting, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Use of a diaphragm or lens are so commonplace, they are not
    included herein.


CLS 430/397
TXT Involving motion during exposure, e.g., dodging, etc.:

    Processes under subclass 396 wherein the radiation modification means is
    caused to move during exposure.


CLS 430/398
TXT REGENERATING IMAGE PROCESSING COMPOSITION:
    Processes under the class definition wherein spent radiation graphic
    processing composition is reconstituted or made in a better form for reuse.

    (1)     Note.  Class 430 takes the above subject matter even when recovery
    of material is involved.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    449,    for nonradiation sensitive processing compositions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclass 440 for dye recovery process.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, for recovery of metal, especially subclasses 417, 635, and 713
    for recovering metal from photographic materials.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, for recovery of inorganic
    compounds or nonmetallic elements.


CLS 430/399
TXT Developer:

    Processes under subclass 398 wherein developer composition is regenerated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    464,    for developer compositions.


CLS 430/400
TXT Bleach-fix:

    Processes under subclass 398 wherein bleach-fix composition is regenerated.


CLS 430/401
TXT POST IMAGING PROCESSING:

    Processes under the class definition (a) of treating a radiation imaged
    radiation sensitive product to finish or perfect the image, or (b) treating
    an image by chemical processing to finish or perfect the image regardless
    of how the image was formed.


CLS 430/402
TXT Achromatic image from organic compound: Processes under subclass 401
    wherein a black organic compound is created in the product in an imagewise
    manner.

    (1)     Note.  These patents generally form a black dye by a coupling
    reaction similar to that which is used to form a colored dye in color
    photography.


CLS 430/403
TXT With structural limitation:

    Processes under subclass 401 wherein physical structure, e.g., thickness of
    a layer, particle size, etc., is recited.


CLS 430/404
TXT Using web or gel:

    Process under subclass 401 involving use of a web, a nonpourable gel, or
    viscous material as a treating medium.


CLS 430/405
TXT Containing developer in element:

    Processes under subclass 401 involving use of an element which has
    developer agent(s).


CLS 430/406
TXT Positive:

    Process under subclass 401 for producing a positive image.


CLS 430/407
TXT Reversal:

    Processes under subclass 406 wherein a negative image is produced which is
    treated (usually bleached away leaving undeveloped radiation sensitive
    material) to form a positive image.


CLS 430/408
TXT Photosolubilization:

    Processes under subclass 406 wherein radiation sensitive material is
    dissolved leaving the unexposed material to be processed.


CLS 430/409
TXT Emulsions fogged during processing:
    Processes under subclass 406 including the step of fogging.


CLS 430/410
TXT Identified nucleating or fogging agent:
    Processes under subclass 409 involving use of a fogging or nucleating agent.

    (1)     Note.  Fogging and nucleating are synonymous terms.


CLS 430/411
TXT Using fogged emulsion:

    Processes under subclass 406 including use of a radiation sensitive product
    which has been fogged prior to imaging.


CLS 430/412
TXT Identified electron acceptor or desensitizer containing:

    Processes under subclass 411 involving use of compound capable of receiving
    electrons. An electron acceptor is defined as a substance having a
    polarographic reduction potential less negative than minus 1.0 and a
    polarographic oxidation potential more positive than plus 0.4.


CLS 430/413
TXT Physical developing:

    Processes under subclass 401 wherein the image produced by radiation on a
    radiation sensitive product is contacted with reducible metal ions and a
    reducing agent to cause reduction of the metal ions to free metal in image
    areas.  The radiation sensitive material cannot itself be a significant
    source of metal ions and must be a material different in some way from the
    material which is the source of metal ions.

    (1)     Note.  The source of reducible metal ions or reducing agent may be
    either in the product itself or in a post imaging composition used to treat
    the product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    477,    for physical developers.


CLS 430/414
TXT Amplifying:

    Processes under subclass 413 including an additional deposition of metal
    from solution onto a previously developed image to increase the density of
    the image.

    (1)     Note.  The first development step may be of any type and the
    developed image need not be visible.


CLS 430/415
TXT With processing ingredient in element:
    Processes under subclass 413 involving use of a product having a component
    used in processing.


CLS 430/416
TXT Silver halide as radiation sensitive medium:

    Processes under subclass 413 involving treatment of image formed by imaging
    a silver halide radiation sensitive medium.


CLS 430/417
TXT Radiation reducible metal compound directly produces catalytic metal nuclei
    in image area:

    Processes under subclass 413 wherein the image treated is found by a
    radiation sensitive metal compound which is directly decomposed by
    radiation to yield free metal nuclei which catalyze the further deposition
    of metal in the image area by physical development as defined in subclass
    413.


CLS 430/418
TXT Disparate function simultaneous process step:

    Processes under subclass 401 wherein plural diverse processing functions
    are carried out at the same time.


CLS 430/419
TXT Develop-fix:

    Processes under subclass 418 wherein the functions are the development and
    fixation of the image.


CLS 430/420
TXT Develop-harden:

    Processes under subclass 418 wherein the functions are developing the image
    and hardening the product produced.


CLS 430/421
TXT Using plural sequential baths of same type: Processes under subclass 401
    involving use of multi-same function baths one after the other.


CLS 430/422
TXT Treating with processing composition prior to imaging and then developing:

    Processes under subclass 401 including treating the radiation sensitive
    production with a composition for perfecting the post imaging processing
    before exposure and subsequently developing the same after imaging.


CLS 430/423
TXT Treating with processing composition after imaging prior to developing:

    Processes under subclass 401 involving treatment of a radiation sensitive
    product after imaging prior to developing the same.


CLS 430/424
TXT Desensitizing:

    Processes under subclass 423 involving treating the imaged radiation
    sensitive medium with a composition to reduce its sensitivity to radiation
    prior to developing the same.


CLS 430/425
TXT Sensitizing:

    Processes under subclass 423 involving increasing the sensitivity of the
    imaged radiation sensitive product to development.

    (1)     Note.  In the art, this term is often called latensification.


CLS 430/426
TXT Prehardening:

    Processes under subclass 423 wherein the post imaging step hardens the
    product.


CLS 430/427
TXT Treating with process composition between standard develop and fix-wash:

    Processes under subclass 401 involving treating the imaged radiation
    sensitive product with a process composition after development and prior to
    the fix-wash operation, e.g., use of shortstop, buffer, etc.


CLS 430/428
TXT Stabilizing:

    Processes under subclass 401 wherein the imaged radiation sensitive product
    is treated to render the same stable.


CLS 430/429
TXT Containing additive:

    Processes under subclass 428 wherein an ingredient in addition to the
    stabilizing agent is used to treat the radiation sensitive product.


CLS 430/430
TXT Bleaching:

    Processes under subclass 401 involving rendering the imaged radiation
    sensitive product white or colorless in whole or in part or reduces the
    density of the same.


CLS 430/431
TXT Using silver and dye bleach:

    Processes under subclass 430 involving use of a silver and dye bleaching
    agents in a color process.


CLS 430/432
TXT Including post developing step:

    Processes under subclass 401 involving treating the developed radiation
    sensitive product, e.g., toning, coating, etc.


CLS 430/433
TXT Developing in acid medium:

    Processes under subclass 401 wherein the image in a radiation sensitive
    product is rendered visible in a medium having a pH of less than 7.


CLS 430/434
TXT Developing:

    Processes under subclass 401 for rendering visible the image in the
    radiation sensitive product.


CLS 430/435
TXT Using identified developer:

    Processes under subclass 434 wherein a specified developing agent is used.


CLS 430/436
TXT Plural identified developers:

    Processes under subclass 435 involving use of multiple identified
    developers.


CLS 430/437
TXT Three or more identified developers:
    Processes under subclass 436 wherein at least three developers are
    identified.


CLS 430/438
TXT Containing hydroquinone:

    Processes under subclass 436 wherein one of the developers is hydroquinone
    or derivative thereof.


CLS 430/439
TXT And amino substituted carbocyclic compound: Processes under subclass 438
    wherein in addition to hydroquinone derivative thereof, an amino
    substituted carbocyclic compound is used, e.g, p-aminophenol,
    p-phenylenediamine, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    380,    for p-phenylenediamine + another developer used in color processes.


CLS 430/440
TXT Heterocyclic:

    Processes under subclass 435 wherein the identified developer is of a
    heterocyclic nature, a ring structure containing at least one N, O, S,
    atom, etc., e.g., pyrazolidones, etc.


CLS 430/441
TXT Carbocyclic:

    Processes under subclass 435 wherein the identified developer is of a
    carbocyclic nature, i.e., ring structure containing only carbon.


CLS 430/442
TXT Amino substituent on carbocyclic ring:
    Processes under subclass 441 wherein the identified developer contains at
    least one amino substituent on the carbocyclic ring, e.g., p-aminophenol,
    p-phenylenediamine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    374,    for a p-phenylenediamine developer used in a color process.


CLS 430/443
TXT Having developer releasing compound:
    Processes under subclass 435 involving use of an agent which releases
    during development a processing ingredient, e.g., block, restrained, or
    inactive developers, development inhibitor, etc.


CLS 430/444
TXT Using polymer or condensation reaction product:

    Processes under subclass 434 including use of a relatively high molecular
    weight substance which is made from the combination of smaller molecules.


CLS 430/445
TXT Using mercapto or thione compound:
    Processes under subclass 434 involving the

    use of a compound containing the SH, -, or  the  group.


CLS 430/446
TXT Using heterocyclic compound:

    Processes under subclass 434 including treating the imaged radiation
    sensitive product with a ring compound which contains at least one carbon
    atom along with one or more atoms of N, O, S, Se, or Te.


CLS 430/447
TXT Using inorganic or organometallic complex: Processes under subclass 434
    involving use of an inorganic complex or an organometallic complex.


CLS 430/448
TXT Using processing ingredient in element:
    Processes under subclass 434 involving use of an ingredient which aids in
    the post imaging processing, and is contained in the radiation sensitive
    product.


CLS 430/449
TXT NONRADIATION SENSITIVE IMAGE PROCESSING COMPOSITION OR PROCESS OF MAKING:
    Compositions under the class definition which are not reactive when exposed
    to radiation and are part of or applied to a radiation sensitive product.
    Also included is the process of making the compositions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, for nonradiation sensitive compositions of general
    utility.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for nonradiation sensitive organic
    compounds.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, for inorganic nonradiation
    sensitive compounds.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, for nonradiation
    sensitive products, e.g., a coated nonradiation sensitive photographic
    stock material, etc.


CLS 430/450
TXT Process of preparing composition from plural preformed concentrates:

    Processes under subclass 449 for making a composition wherein two or more
    concentrates are mixed and diluted to the desired concentration when used.


CLS 430/451
TXT Hardener:

    Compositions under subclass 449 containing an ingredient intended to harden
    the radiation sensitive product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, subclass 117 to harden gelatin, per
    se.


CLS 430/452
TXT Develop-harden:

    Compositions under subclass 451 functioning to render visible the image and
    to harden the product.


CLS 430/453
TXT Fix-harden:

    Compositions under subclass 451 which fix and harden the imaged product.


CLS 430/454
TXT Shortstop:

    Compositions under subclass 449 which stop the developing process at the
    desired time.


CLS 430/455
TXT Fixer:

    Compositions under subclass 449 which remove or otherwise inactivate the
    radiation sensitive material rendering the image permanent.


CLS 430/456
TXT And developer:

    Compositions under subclass 455 for rendering the image visible and making
    same permanent.


CLS 430/457
TXT Forming dye image:

    Compositions under subclass 456 wherein the ingredient which renders the
    latent image visible produces a dyed image which is usually a colored image.


CLS 430/458
TXT Dry or concentrated:

    Compositions under subclass 455 in a form dry to the touch or in a solution
    stronger than ordinarily used in processing.


CLS 430/459
TXT Plural fixers:

    Compositions under subclass 455 containing multifixing agents.


CLS 430/460
TXT And bleach:

    Compositions under subclass 455 which reduce the density of the imaged
    product.


CLS 430/461
TXT Bleach or intensification:

    Compositions under subclass 449 which either reduce or increase the density
    of the image.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 186.1+ for oxidative bleaches; and
    subclasses 188.1+ for reductive bleaches of general utility.


CLS 430/462
TXT Dye bleach for color image:

    Compositions under subclass 461 functioning to reduce the density of this
    dye image only.


CLS 430/463
TXT Wash or aftertreat:

    Compositions under subclass 449 employed for washing or treating the
    radiation sensitive product after development and the other conventional,
    e.g., fix, harden, etc., steps.


CLS 430/464
TXT Developer:

    Compositions under subclass 449 functioning to render visible a latent
    image in a radiation sensitive product.


CLS 430/465
TXT Solid or dry:

    Compositions under subclass 464 which are in the form of a very dense
    material or dry to the touch.


CLS 430/466
TXT Concentrated or viscosity increasing agent containing:

    Compositions under subclass 464 having ingredients either concentrating the
    same greater than in normal use or functioning to render the developer
    thick.


CLS 430/467
TXT Color developer:

    Compositions under subclass 464 which renders visible a latent image in
    color.


CLS 430/468
TXT Additional developer containing:
    Compositions under subclass 467 having substance which renders the latent
    image visible as well as a substance which develops a color image.


CLS 430/469
TXT Including developing accelerator:
    Compositions under subclass 467 containing an ingredient which increases
    the speed of the developing process.


CLS 430/470
TXT Coupler containing:

    Compositions under subclass 464 having an ingredient which reacts with the
    oxidation product of the color developer during development to produce a
    colored dye.


CLS 430/471
TXT And additional reactive compound containing:

    Compositions under subclass 470 having at least one other reactive
    ingredient to form color.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are mixed couplers, competing couplers, etc.


CLS 430/472
TXT Substituted at coupling position with other than hydrogen:

    Compositions under subclass 470 containing a group other than hydrogen
    attached to the coupling position which is removed during processing,
    usually two-equivalent.


CLS 430/473
TXT Phenol or naphthol coupler:

    Compositions under subclass 470 wherein the coupler contains a hydroxyl
    group on a benzene ring not fused to any other ring or on a benzene ring
    fused to another single benzene ring.


CLS 430/474
TXT Pyrazolone coupler:

    Compositions under subclass 470 wherein the coupler contains the structure



CLS 430/475
TXT Open-chain keto methylene coupler:
    Compositions under subclass 470 wherein the coupler contains the -CH2 C-
    structure.


CLS 430/476
TXT Heterocyclic coupler:

    Compositions under subclass 470 wherein the coupler contains a ring
    structure having different types of atoms.


CLS 430/477
TXT Reducible metal compound including reducing agent, i.e., physical
    developer: Compositions under subclass 464 having a reducible metal
    compound and a reducing agent functioning to reduce metal ions to free
    metal in the image areas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    413,    for physical developing processes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 1.05+ for
    compositions which deposit a free metal coating.  These compositions may
    contain a reducible metal compound and a reducing agent, and are of general
    utility.


CLS 430/478
TXT Plural developer agents containing:
    Compositions under subclass 464 having multi-ingredients functioning to
    render the image visible.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    436+,   for process of using plural developers.


CLS 430/479
TXT Heavy metal organic or inorganic:
    Compositions under subclass 478 having an organic compound containing a
    metal with a density greater than 4 or an inorganic compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    447,    for process of using inorganic or organometallic complex developers.


CLS 430/480
TXT Heterocyclic developer:

    Compositions under subclass 478 wherein at least one developer contains a
    ring structure having diverse types of atoms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    440,    for process of using an identified heterocyclic.

    446,    for developer having a heterocyclic compound as a part thereof.


CLS 430/481
TXT And hydroquinone:

    Compositions under subclass 480 containing dihydroxybenzene or substituted
    p-dihydroxy benzene.


CLS 430/482
TXT Methyl-p-aminophenol and dihydroxy benzene:
    Compositions under subclass 478 containing at least methyl-p-aminophenol
    and dihydroxy benzene.  Derivatives of these compounds are also included.


CLS 430/483
TXT Heterocyclic developers:

    Compositions under subclass 464 containing a ring structure having
    different type atoms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    440,    for process of using identified heterocyclic developer.


CLS 430/484
TXT Amine developer:

    Compositions under subclass 464 which contain as the developer a derivative
    of ammonia wherein at least one hydrogen atom thereof is replaced by a
    carbon atom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    442,    for use of plural identified developers one of which is an amino
    substituent on a carbocyclic ring.


CLS 430/485
TXT Hydroxy developer:

    Compositions under subclass 464 wherein the developer contains a compound
    having an -OH group, e.g., hydroquinone, etc.


CLS 430/486
TXT Processing additive containing:
    Compositions under subclass 464 having additional ingredient(s) which do
    not develop a latent image but perfects the developing action.


CLS 430/487
TXT Accelerator:

    Compositions under subclass 486 containing an additive which increases the
    rate of the developing action.


CLS 430/488
TXT Antisludgant:

    Compositions under subclass 486 wherein the additive prevents or decreases
    the formation of undesirable precipitates in the composition or the result
    of use.


CLS 430/489
TXT Antifoggant:

    Compositions under subclass 486 wherein the additive reduces fog or
    stabilizes radiation sensitive material to fog.


CLS 430/490
TXT Stabilizer-preservative:

    Compositions under subclass 486 wherein the additive prevents undesired
    decomposition or change of the other ingredients during storage or use,
    e.g., antioxidant, antistain, etc.


CLS 430/491
TXT Sequestrant:

    Compositions under subclass 486 wherein the additive reacts with metal ions
    to provide a stable, soluble complex, thereby preventing the metal ions
    from taking part in undesirable reactions.


CLS 430/492
TXT Buffer:

    Compositions under subclass 486 wherein the additive functions to maintain
    the pH of the composition at a relatively constant level.


CLS 430/493
TXT Surfactant, emulsifier, or solvent:
    Compositions under subclass 486 wherein at least one additive is a
    surfactant, emulsifier, or solvent for another component of the composition
    except water.


CLS 430/494
TXT INCLUDING EXPOSURE STEP OR SPECIFIED PRE-EXPOSURE STEP PERFECTING EXPOSURE:
    Processes under the class definition including the step of applying
    radiation to a radiation sensitive product or a step prior to (and
    positively tied to) the application of radiation to the radiation sensitive
    product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    346,    for visible imaging using only radiation.

    348,    for heat exposures.

    363,    for laser or radiation other than visible light in color imaging.

    395,    for use of reflected radiation.

    396,    for process of screening, masking,    stenciling etc.


CLS 430/495.1
TXT Radiation sensitive product:

    Compositions or elements under the class definition which are affected by
    radiation to form an image.  An element is a complete self-sustaining
    product which can be mechanically handled and is in a state ready to be
    used in an imaging apparatus to produce an image by a process of this class.

    (1)     Note.  An element may be classified in an appropriate composition
    subclass if no previously appearing subclass is proper.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Class 523, subclass 136 for a composition containing a
    synthetic resin which is resistant to, yet does not absorb, radioactive
    materials or cathode rays or to processes of preparing said composition.


CLS 430/496
TXT Structurally defined:

    Subject matter under subclasses 495.1+ defined in terms of its mechanical
    structure, e.g., sprocket holes, thickness of a layer, particle size, etc.


CLS 430/497
TXT With processing ingredient container or trap:

    Subject matter under subclass 496 wherein the structure has a container for
    processing ingredients or a trap for processing ingredients.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208,    for elements having either processing composition container.

    209,    for processing ingredient trap, both of which are used in a
    diffusion transfer process.


CLS 430/498
TXT Container or trap intended to remain in finished product:

    Subject matter under subclass 497 wherein the structure remains in the
    finished article.


CLS 430/499
TXT With feature to control spreading of processing ingredient:

    Subject matter under subclass 497 having structure to control the spreading
    of the processing ingredient.


CLS 430/500
TXT Roll film:

    Subject matter under subclass 497 in the form of a cylindrical or round
    film mass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    501,    for roll film, per se.


CLS 430/501
TXT Roll film:

    Subject matter under 496 in the form of a cylindrical or rounded film mass
    along with its related structures, e.g., paper backing, spool, etc.

    (1)     Note.  This is the residual place for roll film even though the
    chemical aspects of the same are remote.


CLS 430/502
TXT Two or more radiation-sensitive layers containing other than that
    characterized by the composition of a single sensitive layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 495.1 containing plural radiation-sensitive
    layers other than a single radiation-sensitive layer claimed, per se. and
    also claimed in conjunction with another sensitive layer which is not
    identified in more detail than nominal silver halide.

    (1)     Note.  Patents not included in this subclass are placed below based
    on the first provided for feature claimed.

    (2)     Note.  This and indented subclasses provide for patents wherein all
    claims recite plural radiation-sensitive layers whether these layers are
    identified or not.


CLS 430/503
TXT Layer sensitive to different spectral regions:

    Subject matter under subclass 502 wherein two or more radiation-sensitive
    layers respond to different portions of the electromagnetic spectrum.


CLS 430/504
TXT Ingredient for color compensation or correction containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 503 having ingredients that compensate for
    undesired colors in the final image or to correct color of that desired.


CLS 430/505
TXT Developing inhibitor or processing ingredient containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 503 having an ingredient which prohibits
    development or aids in the production of a visible image.

    (1)     Note.  The ingredients may be anywhere in the layers and may be
    precursors which react under or are released by subsequent processing steps.


CLS 430/506
TXT And containing plural layers sensitive to the same spectral region:

    Subject matter under subclass 503 further containing at least two layers
    which respond to the same portion of the electromagnetic spectrum.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass necessarily contain at least three
    sensitive layers, two responsive to differing spectral regions, and a third
    layer of the same sensitivity as one of the first two.


CLS 430/507
TXT Filter layer containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 503 which contains a layer which selectively
    blocks part of the spectrum of the incident radiation.  The filter layer
    may also be a sensitive layer or may be an additional layer.


CLS 430/508
TXT Sensitive to portion only of visible spectrum or of widened spectral
    response: Subject matter under subclass 502 which is sensitive to only a
    portion of the visible spectrum or which is sensitized to increase
    receptivity to both infrared and ultraviolet.


CLS 430/509
TXT Sensitive layers differ in speed:

    Products under subclass 502 wherein the sensitive layers differ in
    sensitivity to radiation.


CLS 430/510
TXT Antihalation or filter layer containing:
    Subject matter under subclass 495.1 having a layer which either selectively
    absorbs a part of the spectrum of incident radiation, or reduces reflection
    from within.


CLS 430/511
TXT Filters differing spectral regions in different areas of the filter, e.g.,
    color screen:

    Subject matter under subclass 510 wherein diverse selection absorption of
    radiation is provided for in different areas of the layer.


CLS 430/512
TXT Filters ultraviolet radiation:

    Subject matter under subclass 510 containing a layer which selectively
    blocks the passage of radiation in the ultraviolet portion of the spectrum.


CLS 430/513
TXT Dissolvable or removable:

    Subject matter under subclass 510 wherein the antihalation or filter layer
    is designed to be removed from the element during subsequent processing,
    e.g., by dissolution in a processing bath, etc.

    (1)     Note.  The filter layer must be removable itself, bleaching or
    destruction of a dye in a layer is excluded.


CLS 430/514
TXT Synthetic resin containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 513 wherein  the dissolvable or removable
    layer contains a synthetic resin.


CLS 430/515
TXT Carbohydrate or derivative containing:
    Subject matter under subclass 513 wherein the dissolvable or removable
    layer contains a carbohydrate.


CLS 430/516
TXT Contains carboxyl groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 515 wherein the carbohydrate derivative
    contains the

    carboxyl -CO2H group.


CLS 430/517
TXT Organic dye or pigment containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 510 containing an organic dye or pigment in a
    layer separate from the sensitive layer which functions to selectively
    absorb a part of the incident radiation or prevent internal reflections
    within the layer.


CLS 430/518
TXT And mordant:

    Subject matter under subclass 517 wherein the organic dye containing layer
    also contains a substance which reacts with or adsorbs the dye to make it
    more difficult for the dye to dissolve out or migrate from the layer.


CLS 430/519
TXT Azo:

    Subject matter under subclass 517 wherein the organic dye or pigment
    contains the -N=N- group bonded to two different carbon atoms, which atoms
    are in direct organic radicals not bonded together by other covalent bonds.


CLS 430/520
TXT Triarylmethane:

    Subject matter under subclass 517 wherein the organic dye or pigment
    contains three discrete aryl nuclei bonded through nuclear carbons thereof
    to a methane carbon.


CLS 430/521
TXT Anthraquinone or quinhydrone:

    Subject matter under subclass 517 wherein the organic dye or pigment
    contains the anthraquinonyl nucleus, i.e., diphenylene-orthodiketone not
    having any benzene nucleus fused thereon, or is a quinhydrone, i.e., the
    complex equilibrium mixture of products resulting from the interaction of
    an equimolar mixture of a quinone and a hydroquinone.


CLS 430/522
TXT Intercyclic methine or azomethine and cyclic ring containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 517 wherein the organic dye or pigment
    contains either the methine, i.e., -HC= or the azomethine, i.e., -N=
    linkage in a straight chain connecting to a distinct cyclic ring.


CLS 430/523
TXT Identified backing or protective layer containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 495.1 having a layer which is identified in a
    claim by its chemical constitution in addition to a radiation-sensitive
    layer.  The chemically identified layer must either be on the side of a
    radiation-sensitive layer opposite the incidence of radiation, or overlie
    the radiation-sensitive layer to protect it from damage.

    (1)     Note.  Any identification by chemical constitution is sufficient,
    e.g., resin, synthetic resin, paper, etc. Mere functional identification,
    e.g., base, support, etc., will not cause placement in this or indented
    subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  Patents are placed in the indented subclasses hereunder in
    the first subclass providing for any base or support layer.  If none of the
    identified base or support layers are provided for in the indented
    subclasses, the patent is placed in this subclass.  In classifying in this
    and indented subclasses only identified layers as set forth in (1) Note
    will be considered, except that a functionally defined layer between two
    identified layers will be considered identified by disclosure for purposes
    of identification.

    (3)     Note.  A lubricant layer which smooths the passage of the product
    through the apparatus is included as a protective layer.

    (4)     Note.  In the case of a product used in a reflex process, all
    nonradiation-sensitive layers will be considered support or backing layers.


CLS 430/524
TXT Metal:
    Subject matter under subclass 523 wherein the backing or protective layer
    contains a distinct, identified layer in which elemental metal is the
    continuous phase.


CLS 430/525
TXT And another backing layer other than aluminum oxide:
    Subject matter under subclass 524 wherein the metal layer is associated
    with another backing layer other than aluminum oxide. The other layer may
    also be metal or some other material such as plastic.


CLS 430/526
TXT Aluminum:
    Subject matter under subclass 524 wherein the metal is aluminum.

    (1)     Note.  Anodized aluminum is included herein.


CLS 430/527
TXT Antistatic agent containing:
    Subject matter under subclass 523 wherein a layer in the product other than
    the radiation-sensitive layer contains an ingredient intended to decrease
    the build up of static electrical charge or to discharge a static
    electrical charge.


CLS 430/528
TXT Ammonium salt:
    Subject matter under subclass 527 wherein

    the antistatic agent contains a NR4+ anion group.


CLS 430/529
TXT Organic carboxylic, sulfur or phosphorus acid or salt:

    Subject matter under subclass 527 wherein the antistatic agent is an
    organic compound containing the -CO2H group or an organic acid wherein the
    acidic group contains sulfur or phosphorus, or salts of these acids.


CLS 430/530
TXT Elemental metal or metal salt:

    Subject matter under subclass 527 wherein the antistatic agent is an
    elemental metal or a metal salt.


CLS 430/531
TXT Synthetic resin or cellulose derivative containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 523 wherein the protective or backing layer
    contains a synthetic relatively high molecular weight film forming resin or
    a derivative of cellulose.


CLS 430/532
TXT Subjected to radiation, flame, or corona discharge:

    Subject matter under subclass 531 wherein a layer has been subjected to
    treatment with radiation, flame, or corona discharge.

    (1)     Note.  The purpose of the treatment usually is to increase adhesion
    of the subsequently applied coating.


CLS 430/533
TXT Polyester or polycarbonate:

    Subject matter under subclass 531 wherein the synthetic resin is a ploymer
    containing periodic recurring ester groups in the main polymer chain.


CLS 430/534
TXT Next to polymer of unsaturated monomer: Subject matter under subclass 533
    containing an additional nonradiation-sensitive layer next to the polyester
    layer which contains the addition polymer of an unsaturated monomer.


CLS 430/535
TXT Polymer of unsaturated ester or halide:
    Subject matter under subclass 534 wherein an unsaturated monomer
    polymerized contains an ester group or a halogen atom.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes copolymers of ester or halogen
    containing monomers with other monomers, e.g., vinylidene chloride,
    acrylonitrile compolymer, etc.


CLS 430/536
TXT Polymer of unsaturated monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 531 wherein the synthetic resin is the
    addition polymer of an unsaturated monomer.


CLS 430/537
TXT In nonradiation-sensitive layer including gelatin:

    Subject matter under subclass 536 wherein the synthetic resin containing
    layer also contains gelatin.

    (1)     Note.  Since this layer is a backing or protective layer it may not
    be radiation sensitive.


CLS 430/538
TXT Fibrous, e.g., paper, textile, etc.:
    Subject matter under subclass 523 containing a base or protective layer
    which is produced by association of discrete fibers, e.g., paper, cloth,
    etc.


CLS 430/539
TXT Gelatin other than radiation sensitive type:

    Subject matter under subclass 523 containing a backing or protective layer
    which is not radiation sensitive.


CLS 430/540
TXT Iron compound sensitizer containing:
    Subject matter under subclass 495.1 having an iron compound sensitizer.


CLS 430/541
TXT Identified radiation sensitive composition with color producing substance:

    Composition under subclass 495.1 containing an identified radiation
    sensitive material and a color producing substance.

    (1)     Note.  The radiation sensitive material may be capable of producing
    a color image, per se, by wet processing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332,    for composition for producing print-out dye images, bleach-out dye
    images, or latent images which are developed visible dye images by dry
    processing.

    374,    for process involving the exposed compositions of this subclass.

    502,    for radiation sensitive elements having compositions of this
    subclass.


CLS 430/542
TXT Silver compound sensitizer:

    Subject matter under subclass 541 wherein the radiation sensitive material
    is a silver compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    375,    for process involving exposed compositions of this class.

    449,    for nonradiation sensitive compositions applied to exposed
    compositions of this subclass.

    495.1,  for radiation sensitive elements comprising compositions of this
    class.


CLS 430/543
TXT Coupler containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 542 containing a color producing substance in
    the form of a color coupler.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    376,    for process involving exposed composition of this subclass.

    449,    for nonradiation sensitive compositions applied to exposed
    compositions of this subclass.

    495.1,  for radiation sensitive element having compositions of this
    subclass.


CLS 430/544
TXT And development inhibitor or development inhibitor releasing agent:

    Subject matter under subclass 543 containing an ingredient which prohibits
    development or releases a development prohibiting ingredient.


CLS 430/545
TXT And identified binder:

    Compositions under subclass 543 containing an identified binder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    377,    for process involving the use of a binder in color imaging.

    449+,   for nonradiation sensitive compositions applied to compositions of
    this subclass.

    495.1,  for radiation sensitive element containing the composition of this
    class.


CLS 430/546
TXT And solvent or emulsifier or coating aid: Compositions under subclass 543
    containing a dissolving or emulsifying agent or coating aid.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are solvents or emulsifiers which are used
    as an aid in dispersing couplers in the composition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    377,    for process involving the exposed compositions of this subclass.


CLS 430/547
TXT Direct positive:

    Compositions under subclass 544 which form a direct positive dye image, on
    exposure and development.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are fogged silver halide emulsion containing
    desensitizing agents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    378,    for process involving exposed compositions of this subclass.


CLS 430/548
TXT Polymeric or bis coupler:

    Compositions under subclass 543 wherein the coupler contains two or more
    coupling moieties, or the coupler is a polymeric compound.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are bis and polymeric couplers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    381,    for process involving exposed compositions of this subclass.


CLS 430/549
TXT Mixture of couplers:

    Compositions under subclass 543 containing plural couplers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    365,    for process involving exposed compositions of this subclass.


CLS 430/550
TXT And chemical or optical sensitizer:
    Compositions under subclass 543 containing an ingredient which increases
    the sensitivity of the silver compound, e.g., a chemical sensitizer or a
    hypersensitizer, or an ingredient which imparts its radiation absorption to
    the silver compound e.g., an optical sensitizing dye.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    377,    for process involving the exposed compositions of this subclass.


CLS 430/551
TXT And antifoggant or color stabilizer:
    Compositions under subclass 543 containing an ingredient or a treatment is
    applied to same to stabilize the silver compound against fog or to
    stabilize the dye image against color fog, fading, stain, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    372,    for process of stabilizing dye images.


CLS 430/552
TXT Phenol or naphthol coupler:

    Compositions under subclass 543 containing a coupler in the form of a
    phenol or naphthol.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    384,    for process involving exposed compositions of this subclass.


CLS 430/553
TXT Substituted at coupling position with other than hydrogen:

    Compositions under subclass 552 containing coupler having a group attached
    to the coupling position with other than hydrogen which is removed during
    processing, usually two-equivalent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    385,    for process involving exposed compositions of this subclass.

    449,    for nonradiation sensitive compositions applied to compositions of
    this subclass.


CLS 430/554
TXT 2-pyrazolin-5-one coupler:
    Compounds under subclass 543 containing a coupler in the form of
    2-pyrazolin 5-one.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    386,    for process involving exposed composition of this subclass.

    449,    for nonradiation sensitive compositions applied to exposed
    compositions of this subclass.


CLS 430/555
TXT Substituted at coupling position with other than hydrogen:

    Compositions under subclass 554 containing a coupler having a group
    attached to the coupling position with other than hydrogen which is removed
    during processing, usually two-equivalent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    387,    for process involving exposed compositions of this subclass.


CLS 430/556
TXT Open chain keto-methylene coupler:
    Compositions under subclass 543 containing a coupler in the form of an open
    chain ketomethylene compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    388,    for process involving yellow dye formation.

    449,    for nonradiation sensitive compositions applied to exposed
    compositions of this subclass.


CLS 430/557
TXT Substituted at coupling position with other than hydrogen:

    Compositions under subclass 556 containing a coupler having a group
    attached to the coupling position other than hydrogen which is removed
    during processing, usually two-equivalent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    381,    for process involving exposed compositions of this subclass.


CLS 430/558
TXT Heterocyclic coupler:

    Compositions under subclass 543 containing a coupler having a ring
    structure composed of different type atoms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    376,    particularly 384, 385, 386, 387, 388, and 389 for process involving
    exposed compositions of this subclass.

    449,    for nonradiation sensitive compositions applied to exposed
    compositions of this subclass.

    554,    for compositions containing a heterocyclic coupler in the form of
    2-pyrazolin-5-one.


CLS 430/559
TXT Dye containing:

    Compositions under subclass 542 containing a preformed dye before exposure.

    (1)     Note.  Such dyes are usually azo dyes, anthroquinone dyes, indigo
    dyes, phthalocyanine dyes, etc., and are usually used in a
    silver-dye-bleach process and in dye diffusion transfer process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199,    for dye image diffusion transfer process.

    390,    for other processes involving exposed compositions of this subclass.

    543,    553, 555, and 557, for compositions containing two-equivalent
    couplers containing a dye moiety attached to the coupling ring.


CLS 430/560
TXT And optical sensitizer:

    Compositions under subclass 559 containing an optical sensitizing dye.


CLS 430/561
TXT Azo dye:

    Compositions under subclass 559 containing a preformed azo dye.


CLS 430/562
TXT Monoazo:

    Subject matter under subclass 561 wherein the azo dye is monoazo.


CLS 430/563
TXT Diazo:

    Compositions under subclass 561 wherein the azo dye is diazo.


CLS 430/564
TXT Silver compound sensitizer containing:
    Subject matter under subclass 495.1 having radiation sensitive silver
    compound or processes not otherwise provided for making such compositions.


CLS 430/565
TXT Achromatic image forming organic compound:
    Products under subclass 564 containing an organic compound which reacts
    with suitable developing material to form a black organic compound in image
    areas.

    (1)     Note.  These patents are usually to organic compounds which couple
    with a developer to form a black dye in a manner analogous to the reactions
    used to form cyan, magenta, or yellow dyes in color photography.


CLS 430/566
TXT Developing or fixing agents containing for liquid processing:

    Products under subclass 564 containing an ingredient which develops a
    latent image or fixes the image against further change when the product is
    treated with a liquid.  The developing or fixing agent may be, e.g.,
    activated by the liquid or may cooperate or react with other ingredients in
    the liquid to develop or fix.


CLS 430/567
TXT Silver compound having specified crystal form, habit, particle size or
    particle size distribution:

    Subject matter under subclass 564 wherein the silver compound has a
    specified crystal form, e.g., isometric, hexagonal, etc., crystal, e.g.,
    presence or disposition of 100, 110, 111 planes, etc., or particle size and
    process of making.


CLS 430/568
TXT Having particle size of 100 millimicrons or less, e.g., lippmann type, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 567 wherein the silver compound particles
    have an average grain size of less than 100 mm or process of making the
    composition.


CLS 430/569
TXT Including manipulative emulsification step: Processes under subclass 564
    including the step of preparing a dispersion of a solid radiation sensitive
    silver compound in a liquid medium.  This includes, e.g., the reaction of
    silver nitrate with halogen ion in a medium to produce an AgX dispersion,
    or the dispersion of preformed AgX in a liquid.

    (1)     Note.  Mere addition of an additive to an existing AgX dispersion
    is excluded and placed below on some other feature, such as the composition
    made.


CLS 430/570
TXT Spectral sensitizing:

    Subject matter under subclass 564 containing a material, e.g., cyanine dye,
    etc., which imparts its radiation adsorption to the silver compound thereby
    increasing the radiation sensitivity of the silver compound containing
    emulsion to that portion of the spectrum absorbed by the dye.

    (1)     Note.  A cyanine compound as herein included contains two distinct
    heterocyclic rings, each of which contains at least one nitrogen atom, with
    nitrogen atoms of the individual rings being joined through a conjugated
    acyclic chain of methine groups, the heterocyclic rings themselves being
    linked through an acyclic chain which contains at least one methine group.

    (2)     Note.  Methine denotes a -C= group.

    (3)     Note.  The term heterocyclic denotes the presence of one or more
    carbon atoms covalently bonded in a closed ring with at least one atom of
    oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium and having no other atoms
    in the ring.

    (4)     Note.  This and indented subclasses include a precursor which will
    later be reacted to produce an optical sensitizer.


CLS 430/571
TXT Mixed grain:

    Subject matter under subclass 570 which includes a mixture of at least two
    groups of optically sensitized silver compound particles, which groups each
    have different spectral sensitivity.


CLS 430/572
TXT Multiple sensitizers or supersensitizing:
    Subject matter under subclass 570 in which plural materials are added to an
    optically sensitive silver compound containing composition to increase the
    optical sensitivity thereof.  The plural materials (a) being capable of
    sensitizing the silver compound individually, or (b) which cooperate with
    each other to the extent that the total optical sensitizing effect of the
    added materials is greater than the sum of the optical sensitizing effects
    of the added materials taken independently, i.e., there is a synergistic or
    potentiating effect.


CLS 430/573
TXT Polyheteronuclear sensitizer:

    Subject matter under subclass 572 in which at least one of added materials
    is a compound having at least three distinct heterocyclic nuclei.

    (1)     Note.  Heterocyclic groups which are fused together to form a
    multicyclic grouping are considered to be a single distinct heterocyclic
    nucleus.  Thus and are each regarded as being a single heterocyclic nucleus.


CLS 430/574
TXT Two or more cyanine sensitizers:

    Subject matter under subclass 572 in which at least two of the added
    materials are cyanine compounds.


CLS 430/575
TXT Inorganic material containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 572 in which at least one of the added
    materials is an inorganic compound.


CLS 430/576
TXT Cyanine sensitizer:

    Subject matter under subclass 572 in which one of the added materials is an
    cyanine compound.


CLS 430/577
TXT Merocyanine compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 576 in which one of the added materials is a
    merocyanine, i.e., a compound having two cyclic nuclei joined through a
    straight chain linkage containing at least one methine group, which chain
    has an equal number of alternating single and double bonds, of which one
    terminal carbon atom is in a heterocyclic ring and attached to an extra
    cyclic carbonyl O, and the other terminal carbon atom is in another
    heterocyclic ring and is attached to a heterocyclic N.


CLS 430/578
TXT Polyhetero nuclear containing at least three heteroCYCLIC nuclei:

    Subject matter under subclass 570 wherein the added material contains at
    least three distinct heterocylic nuclei.

    (1)     Note.  See the definition of subclass 573 for the definition of
    distinct heterocyclic nuclei.


CLS 430/579
TXT Four or more distinct heterocyclic nuclei:
    Subject matter under subclass 578 in which the added material contains at
    least four distinct heterocyclic nuclei.


CLS 430/580
TXT Styryl sensitizer:

    Subject matter under subclass 570 in which the added material comprises a
    compound containing a heterocyclic ring of five or more members including
    at least one nitrogen atom, said heterocyclic ring being joined through an
    unsaturated acyclic carbon chain to an aryl nucleus wherein one of the ring
    carbons of that nucleus is bonded to a nitrogen atom so that the nitrogen
    bonded to the aryl nucleus and the nitrogen of the heterocyclic group are
    linked to each other through a conjugated chain of carbon atoms, e.g.,



CLS 430/581
TXT Cyanine sensitizer:

    Subject matter under subclass 570 in which the added material comprises a
    cyanine compound.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note under subclass 570 definition for the
    definition of a cyanine compound.


CLS 430/582
TXT Methine linked six-membered heterocyclic rings:

    Subject matter under subclass 581 in which each of the heterocyclic groups
    of the cyanine compound linked by the acyclic methine chain consists of six
    atoms.


CLS 430/583
TXT Containing odd number of methine groups: Subject matter under subclass 581
    in which the intercyclic acyclic methine chain linking the heterocyclic
    groups of the cyanine compound contains an add number of methine groups.

    (1)     Note.  In view of the scope of indented subclasses 584 (five or
    more methines) and 585 (three methines), this subclass takes only those
    compositions in which the cyanine compound has a single methine in the
    intercyclic acyclic methine chain or broadly disclosed odd numbered chains
    not falling in any indented subclass.


CLS 430/584
TXT Five or more methine groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 583 in which the cyanine compound has five
    methine groups in the intercyclic acyclic methine chain, i.e., a
    dicarbocyanine, tricarbocycanine, etc., compound.


CLS 430/585
TXT Three methine groups, i.e., carbocyanines:
    Subject matter under subclass 583 in which the cyanine compound has three
    methine groups in the intercyclic methine chain.


CLS 430/586
TXT Linking six-membered hetero to five-membered hetero:

    Subject matter under subclass 585 in which the carbocyanine compound
    contains a six-membered heterocyclic group linked by an acyclic trimethine
    chain to a five-membered heterocyclic group.


CLS 430/587
TXT Hetero ring bridged or fused to hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 585 in which at least one of the nitrogen
    containing heterocyclic groups linked by the trimethine chain is bridged or
    fused to a second heterocyclic moiety which has its own hetero atom or
    which shares at least one of the hetero atoms of the trimethine linked
    heterocyclic ring, e.g.,


CLS 430/588
TXT Hetero rings bridged or fused to carbocyclic rings:

    Subject matter under subclass 585 in which both of the nitrogen containing
    heterocyclic rings linked by the trimethine chain are fused or bridged to
    carbocyclic rings, e.g.,


CLS 430/589
TXT Direct positive:

    Subject matter under subclass 588 which produces a positive image when
    subjected to a post-imaging development (finishing) process without the
    intermediate production of a separate negative image.


CLS 430/590
TXT Only one hetero ring fused or bridged to carbocyclic ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 585 in which one and only one of the two
    heterocyclic rings linked by the trimethine chain is fused or bridged to a
    carbocyclic ring, e.g.,


CLS 430/591
TXT Two or more separate ring structures:
    Subject matter under subclass 570 in which the added material comprises a
    compound containing at least two distinct cyclic nuclei, e.g.,

    (1)     Note.  Many of the sensitizers in this and indented subclasses are
    merocyanines.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    577,    for similar compositions containing with a cyanine compound and a
    merocyanine compound.


CLS 430/592
TXT Intercyclic methine chain sensitizer:
    Products under subclass 591 in which the two distinct cyclic nuclei are
    linked by an acyclic carbon chain which contains at least one methine
    group, e.g.,


CLS 430/593
TXT Methine linked hetero ring with hetero group bridged or fused thereto:

    Subject matter under subclass 592 in which at least one of the distinct
    cyclic nuclei is a heterocyclic nucleus which is fused or bridged to a
    second heterocyclic moiety which has its own hetero atom or which shares at
    least one of the hetero atoms of the methine-linked heterocyclic ring,
    e.g.,


CLS 430/594
TXT One or both methine linked rings carbocyclic:

    Subject matter under subclass 592 in which at least one of the separate
    ring structures linked by the acyclic carbon chain is a carbocyclic ring,
    e.g,


CLS 430/595
TXT Odd number of carbons in acyclic methine chain:

    Subject matter under subclass 592 in which the unsaturated acyclic chain
    linking the two cyclic nuclei contains an odd number of carbons e.g,


CLS 430/596
TXT Fogged direct positive:

    Products under subclass 564 which have been fogged by addition of a fogging
    agent or by overall exposure to radiation so that upon imagewise exposure
    to radiation the density of the fog is decreased by exposure thereby
    resulting in a positive image.


CLS 430/597
TXT Identified desensitizer or electron acceptor containing:

    Products under subclass 596 containing a desensitizer or electron acceptor.
    Substances of this function are defined as having a polarographic reduction
    potential less negative than minus 1.0 and a polarographic oxidation
    potential more positive than plus 0.4.


CLS 430/598
TXT Fogging or nucleating agent containing:
    Products under subclass 564 containing a substance disclosed as having a
    fogging or nucleating effect.


CLS 430/599
TXT Hypersensitizing or latensifying ingredient containing:

    Products under subclass 564 wherein an ingredient or treatment other than
    mere digestion or ripening is applied to the composition to raise its
    general radiation sensitivity, or for intensifying the latent image
    produced therein or process of preparing such composition.


CLS 430/600
TXT Heterocyclic N, O, S, Se, or Te compound containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 599 containing a heterocyclic compound
    containing in a hetero ring at least one atom of N, O, S, Se, or Te.


CLS 430/601
TXT Phosphorus compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 599 containing a compound of phosphorus.


CLS 430/602
TXT Polyoxyalkylene compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 599 containing a polyoxyalkylene compound.


CLS 430/603
TXT S, Se, or Te or compound thereof:

    Products under subclass 599 wherein the hypersensitizing or latensifying
    ingredient includes elemental sulfur, selenium, or tellurium or a compound
    thereof.


CLS 430/604
TXT Heavy metal or compound thereof:

    Products under subclass 599 wherein the hypersensitizing or latensifying
    ingredient includes an elemental metal with a density greater than 4 or a
    compound thereof.


CLS 430/605
TXT Noble metal or compound thereof:

    Products under subclass 604 wherein the metal is Ru, Rh, Pd, Os, Ir, Pt,
    Au, or Ag.


CLS 430/606
TXT Desensitizing ingredient containing:
    Products under subclass 564 containing an ingredient designed to reduce the
    sensitivity of the radiation sensitive composition to at least a portion of
    the spectrum by a chemical or combined chemical-optical action on the
    silver compound.

    (1)     Note.  Mere light absorbing effects, e.g., use of filter dyes,
    etc., are not included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    424,    for processes in which a desensitization step is performed
    subsequent to exposure, but prior to development.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, subclasses 240+ for intercyclic
    acyclic methine linkage containing compounds, per se.


CLS 430/607
TXT Stabilizing or fog inhibiting ingredient containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 564 containing an ingredient disclosed as
    having the effect of maintaining its characteristics constant during
    storage or for preventing adverse effects in post imaging processing or
    processes for making such compositions in which a step is performed which
    is disclosed as having such effect.


CLS 430/608
TXT Inorganic material:

    Subject matter under subclass 607 containing an inorganic substance.


CLS 430/609
TXT Synthetic organic polymer:

    Subject matter under subclass 607 containing a synthetic organic polymer.


CLS 430/610
TXT Phosphorus compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 607 containing a compound of phosphorus.


CLS 430/611
TXT Mercaptan, thioether, thione, disulfide or organic bisulfite:

    Subject matter under subclass 607 containing a compound which includes any
    of these groups:

    R-SH, R-S-R, R-S-S-R, R-SO3 H, or water-soluble salt thereof.

    (1)     Note.  R-S-R or R-S-S-R may be in the open chain form or may form
    part of a heterocyclic ring.

    (2)     Note.  The salts contemplated are those wherein the H of an R-SH or
    R-SO3 H has been replaced by a salt forming moiety such as an alkali metal
    radical.


CLS 430/612
TXT Organic metal compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 607 containing an organic compound of a
    metal, e.g., an organometallic compound of a heavy metal, etc.


CLS 430/613
TXT Heterocyclic compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 607 containing an organic heterocyclic
    compound.


CLS 430/614
TXT Polyhetero atom ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 613 in which heterocyclic ring contains more
    than one atom other than carbon.


CLS 430/615
TXT Polyhetero atom ring fused to another ring having polyhetero atoms:

    Subject matter under subclass 614 containing a compound in which two
    heterocyclic ring which each contain more than one atom other than carbon
    are fused to each other, e.g., tetraaza-or pentaazaindanes, etc.


CLS 430/616
TXT Composition for visible imaging by radiation only:

    Subject matter under subclass 564 containing a radiation sensitive material
    for use in processes wherein exposure to radiation of the product results
    in a visible image without the necessity of a separate chemical development
    step.

    (1)     Note.  Included are compositions which provide visible images
    directly upon imagewise exposure as well as compositions wherein a latent
    image is developed by further exposure to radiation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    346+,   for process of visible imaging using radiation only other than
    heating by surface contact or convection.

    596+,   for composition which yields a direct positive by radiation only.


CLS 430/617
TXT Silver compound other than halide, per se, or composition for thermographic
    process: Products under subclass 564 containing a silver compound other
    than a silver halide, per se, i.e., a silver containing product other than
    a silver and a halogen atom, e.g., silver nitrate, silver chlorate, etc.,
    or intended for use as the radiation sensitive composition or element in a
    thermographic process, i.e., a process classified in this class, subclass
    198 or 348.

    (1)     Note.  The classification of a composition which is prepared by the
    reaction of a nonhalide silver compound in greater than equimolar quantity
    with a halide containing salt to produce a composition containing light
    sensitive silver halide along with the unreacted nonhalide silver compound
    is as follows:  If no mention is made as to the extent of reaction it is
    assumed that the patentee is primarily concerned with producing a silver
    halide rather than a mixture and that reaction is complete.  In such a
    situation, classification is made on the basis of the halide.
    Classification in this subclass is proper when a statement is present in
    the disclosure as to the extent of reaction and/or it is apparent from the
    total disclosure that the patentee is concerned primarily with preparing a
    composition composed of a silver compound and a nonhalide silver containing
    compound.

    (2)     Note.  The radiation sensitive product contains at least one
    radiation sensitive silver compound.


CLS 430/618
TXT Organic silver compound containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 617 containing an organic compound of silver.


CLS 430/619
TXT And inorganic silver compound:

    Products under subclass 618 containing an inorganic silver compound, e.g.,
    a silver halide in addition to the organic silver compound.


CLS 430/620
TXT Silver salt of organic acid:

    Products under subclass 618 in which the organic silver compound is a
    silver salt of an organic acid.


CLS 430/621
TXT Hardening ingredient containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 564 containing an organic colloid and an
    agent which tans or hardens the colloid.


CLS 430/622
TXT Vinylidene compound:

    Products under subclass 621 wherein the hardening ingredient contains the
    structure:


CLS 430/623
TXT Heterocyclic compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 621 containing an organic heterocyclic
    compound.


CLS 430/624
TXT Epoxide, i.e., oxirane:

    Subject matter under subclass 623 in which the heterocyclic compound
    contains the group:


CLS 430/625
TXT Aziridine:

    Subject matter under subclass 623 in which the heterocyclic compound
    contains the group:


CLS 430/626
TXT Triazine including hydrogenated triazine:
    Subject matter under subclass 623 in which the heterocyclic compound
    includes the group:

            or its hydrogenates derivatives.


CLS 430/627
TXT Resin or synthetic polymer containing:
    Subject matter under subclass 564 containing a synthetic resin or polymer
    or a natural resin.


CLS 430/628
TXT Protein or other natural colloid or derivative containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 627 containing a protein or carbohydrate or
    derivative thereof in addition to the natural or synthetic resin or polymer.


CLS 430/629
TXT Sulfur or sulfur compound containing:
    Subject matter under subclass 627 including sulfur or a sulfur compound,
    other than a sulfur containing natural protein.


CLS 430/630
TXT Heterocyclic compound containing, e.g., heterocyclic monomer, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 627 containing a heterocyclic compound, e.g.,
    a synthetic resin or polymer made from a heterocyclic monomer.


CLS 430/631
TXT Film or film coating improvement ingredient containing, e.g., wetting
    agent, coating aid, plasticizer, antistatic agent, etc.: Subject matter
    under subclass 564 containing an ingredient which aids in the application
    of the composition to the surface of a support (e.g., to enhance uniformity
    of coating, or freedom from streaks, bubbles, or other defects), reduces
    the tendency of a coated product from cracking or decreases a tendency to
    generate a static charge.


CLS 430/632
TXT Rosin acid or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 631 containing any of the acids found in
    rosin, e.g., abietic or pimaric acid, or derivative thereof.


CLS 430/633
TXT Higher fatty acid or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 631 containing a higher fatty acid or
    derivative thereof, e.g., a salt, ester, or amide of a higher fatty acid.

    (1)     Note.  "Higher fatty acid" means a monocarboxylic acid containing
    an unbroken chain of at least 7 carbon atoms bonded to a carboxyl group.
    Where there are several unbroken chains of carbon atoms bonded to the
    carboxyl group, one of the chains must contain at least carbon atoms.


CLS 430/634
TXT Polycarboxylic or polysulfoxy acid or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 631 containing an ingredient which includes
    plural carboxylic or sulfoxy acid groups or derivatives thereof, e.g.,
    esters or amides of such acid groups.


CLS 430/635
TXT Carboxylic acid or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 631 containing an ingredient which has a
    -COOH group or a derivative thereof, e.g., an ester, amide, or acid
    chloride, etc.


CLS 430/636
TXT Sulfoxy compound or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 631 containing an ingredient in which oxygen
    is

    directly bonded to S, e.g., S=O, SO3X, or _SO4, etc.


CLS 430/637
TXT Polyglycidol, polyglycol, polyoxyalkylene oxide, or ether or ester thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 631 containing an ingredient which is a
    polyglycidol, polyglycol, polyoxyalkylene oxide, or an ether or ester
    thereof.


CLS 430/638
TXT Alkyl or cycloalkyl alcohol or ether or ester thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 631 containing an alkyl alcohol, a cycloalkyl
    alcohol, or an ester or ether thereof.


CLS 430/639
TXT Carbohydrate or derivative containing:
    Subject matter under subclass 564 containing a carbohydrate or its
    derivative.


CLS 430/640
TXT Gelatin or derivative containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 639 containing gelatin or a gelatin
    derivative in addition to the carbohydrate or its derivative.


CLS 430/641
TXT Cellulose or derivative, e.g., regenerated cellulose, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 639 which contains cellulose or its
    derivative, e.g., regenerated cellulose, etc.


CLS 430/642
TXT Gelatin or derivative containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 564 containing gelatin or a gelatin
    derivative.


CLS 430/643
TXT Casein or derivative containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 564 containing casein or a casein derivative.


CLS 430/644
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition not otherwise specifically
    provided for.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 430/900
TXT Donor-acceptor complex photoconductor:

    Art collection related to subclasses 31+ involving a radiation-conductor
    having a donor-acceptor complex.


CLS 430/901
TXT Photoconductor powder:

    Art collection relating to subclasses 31+ involving a radiation conductor
    in the form of a pulverized material.


CLS 430/902
TXT Electrically charging radiation-conductive surface:

    Art collection relating to subclasses 31+ involving the charging of a
    radiation-conductive surface with electricity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for process of charging simultaneously with imaging.


CLS 430/903
TXT One component toner:

    Art collection relating to subclasses 31+ involving a single coloring
    material.


CLS 430/904
TXT Polymer in developer:

    Art collection relating to subclasses 31+ involving a developing material
    containing a polymer.


CLS 430/905
TXT Binder containing:

    Art collection relating to subclasses 270.1+ involving a binder, i.e., a
    film forming substance which holds a composition together and adheres it to
    a substrate if any.  The binder is not, per se, radiation sensitive,
    although it may react with other substances which have been rendered
    reactive by exposure to radiation.


CLS 430/906
TXT Polyamide or polyurethane:

    Art collection involving binder containing

    plural amide  or urethane -0         groups in a polymeric chain.


CLS 430/907
TXT Polyolefin or halogen containing:

    Art collection involving a binder which is a polymer of an open chain
    aliphatic monoolefin or the binder molecule contains a halogen.


CLS 430/908
TXT Polyester:

    Art collection involving a binder containing
    recurring ester - - O groups.


CLS 430/909
TXT Vinyl alcohol polymer or derivative:

    Art collection involving a binder which is a polymer containing the vinyl
    alcohol unit in the polymer chain or OH derivative wherein the hydrogen of
    the -OH group is replaced by another substituent.

    (1)     Note.  Since monomeric vinyl alcohol does not exist, per se, these
    polymers are generally prepared by hydrolysis of vinyl acetate polymers to
    give free -OH groups in the chain.  The derivatives of this art collection
    must contain at least some free -OH groups in the vinyl alcohol polymer.


CLS 430/910
TXT Polymer of unsaturated acid or ester:

    Art collection involving a binder which is a polymer of an unsaturated acid
    or ester.


CLS 430/911
TXT Cellulosic:

    Art collection involving a binder which is cellulose or a derivative
    thereof wherein the cellulose polymer chain remains intact, e.g.,
    regenerated cellulose, cellulose acetate, etc.


CLS 430/912
TXT With plasticizer:

    Art collection involving a binder containing an ingredient to increase
    flexibility.


CLS 430/913
TXT Initiator containing:

    Art collection relating to subclasses 270.1+ involving a substance or
    composition which upon radiation initiates the polymerization of a
    polymerizable substance in the subclasses 270.1+ product.  The initiator
    may cause polymerization of a substance inactive in its absence or may
    increase the rate of a polymerization which would otherwise occur.


CLS 430/914
TXT Cationic or anionic:

    Art collection involving an initiator in the form of material having either
    positively or negatively charged atoms or radicals.


CLS 430/915
TXT Redox or dye sensitizer:

    Art collection involving an initiator which is a mixture of an oxidizing
    agent and a reducing agent which reacts under radiant energy to produce
    free radicals or a dye which absorbs radiant energy to activate the
    polymerization system.


CLS 430/916
TXT Free radical:

    Art collection involving an initiator which releases free radicals upon
    irradiation.


CLS 430/917
TXT With inhibitor or stabilizer:

    Art collection involving an initiator containing an ingredient functioning
    to inhibit polymerization or stabilize a composition in storage.


CLS 430/918
TXT Hydroxyl or carbonyl group containing as sole functional groups:

    Art collection involving an inhibitor or stabilizer which is a compound
    containing hydroxyl or carbonyl as the sole functioning group therein.  The
    hydroxyl and carbonyl groups may not be in such a relationship that they
    form carboxylic acid.


CLS 430/919
TXT Nitrogen compound containing:

    Art collection involving a free radical initiator containing a compound
    having nitrogen.


CLS 430/920
TXT Nitrogen in heterocyclic ring:

    Art collection involving a free radical initiator compound containing
    nitrogen as a part of a heterocyclic ring.


CLS 430/921
TXT Sulfur compound containing:

    Art collection involving a free radical initiator containing a compound
    having sulfur.


CLS 430/922
TXT Sulfur in heterocyclic ring:

    Art collection involving a free radical initiator containing sulfur as a
    part of a heterocyclic ring.


CLS 430/923
TXT Carbonyl compound containing:

    Art collection involving a free radical initiator containing a compound
    having a carbonyl group.


CLS 430/924
TXT Carbonyl in heterocyclic compound:

    Art collection involving a free radical initiator containing a compound
    having a carbonyl group as a part of a heterocyclic ring.


CLS 430/925
TXT Halogen compound containing:

    Art collection involving a free radical initiator containing a compound
    having a halogen atom.


CLS 430/926
TXT Spectral sensitizer containing:

    Art collection relating to subclasses 270.1+ involving a substance or
    compositions which are added to products to increase the sensitivity of the
    product to radiation of a portion of the electromagnetic spectrum as
    against other portions of the spectrum.


CLS 430/927
TXT Radiation-activated cross-linking agent containing:

    Art collection relating to subclasses 270.1+ involving substances or
    compositions which upon irradiation release materials which cause
    cross-linking of other materials present other than by reaction of
    ethylenic unsaturation.


CLS 430/928
TXT AERIAL FILMS OR PROCESSES SPECIFICALLY ADAPTED FOR AERIAL RADIATION IMAGERY:

    Art collection involving radiation sensitive receivers used to take aerial
    images and processes particularly adapted for such receivers.


CLS 430/929
TXT ANITBRONZE AGENT OR PROCESS:

    Art collection involving a material which prevents silver from turning to a
    red or copper color and the process of using such material.


CLS 430/930
TXT ANTICURL LAYER:

    Art collection involving the use of a layer to prevent coiling of the
    product.


CLS 430/931
TXT ANTI-ULTRAVIOLET FADING:

    Art collection involving the prevention of discoloration of the product or
    composition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    512,    for radiation sensitive product having a layer for filtering
    ultraviolet radiation.


CLS 430/932
TXT BINDER-FREE EMULSIONS:

    Art collection involving a composition or product containing an emulsion
    free of a binder.


CLS 430/933
TXT BRIGHTENER CONTAINING:

    Art collection involving a composition or product containing a material
    which tends to render the same lighter in color.


CLS 430/934
TXT CINE FILM:

    Art collection involving film used in cinematography, i.e., movies.


CLS 430/935
TXT COATING PROCESS MAKING RADIATION SENSITIVE ELEMENT:

    Art collection involving a coating procedure in making a radiation
    sensitive product.


CLS 430/936
TXT COBALT COMPLEX CONTAINING:

    Art collection involving a composition or product having a cobalt complex.


CLS 430/937
TXT CORONA DISCHARGE PROCESS:

    Art collection involving use of corona irradiation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    532,    for subjecting a synthetic resin or cellulose derivative containing
    layer to a corona discharge.


CLS 430/938
TXT DEFECT COATING:

    Art collection involving the use of a coating material which minimizes
    defects in the product.


CLS 430/939
TXT DIMENSIONALLY STABLE MATERIAL:

    Art collection involving the use of a material which renders the product
    stable with respect to its dimensions.


CLS 430/940
TXT DIRECT POSITIVE MATERIAL:

    Art collection involving a composition or product having material used to
    make a direct positive image.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    596,    for a fogged direct positive.


CLS 430/941
TXT DYE MORDANT:

    Art collection involving a dye mordant.


CLS 430/942
TXT ELECTRON BEAM:

    Art collection involving the use of an electron beam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    296,    for electron beam imaging.


CLS 430/943
TXT HYDROGEN PEROXIDE TREATMENT:

    Art collection involving the use of hydrogen peroxide.


CLS 430/944
TXT INFRARED:

    Art collection involving the use of infrared radiation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    346+,   for visible imaging using radiation only.

    348+,   for thermographic process.


CLS 430/945
TXT LASER BEAM:

    Art collection involving use of a laser beam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    363,    for use of a laser beam in a color imaging process.


CLS 430/946
TXT LENTICULAR:

    Art collection involving the use of a lenticular surface.


CLS 430/947
TXT LIGHT SENSITIVE TITANIUM COMPOUND CONTAINING:

    Art collection involving the use of a radiation sensitive titanium compound.


CLS 430/948
TXT LIPPMANN:

    Art collection involving a lippmann composition or product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    568,    for product containing a sensitized silver compound having a
    particle size of 100 millimicrons or less.


CLS 430/949
TXT LITHOGRAPHIC EMULSION:

    Art collection involving emulsion used in lithographic-type process.


CLS 430/950
TXT MATTING OR OTHER SURFACE REFLECTIVITY ALTERING MATERIAL:

    Art collection involving the use of a material which modifies the surface
    reflectivity of the product.


CLS 430/951
TXT MAKING CAMERA COPY, E.G., MECHANICAL NEGATIVE, ETC.:

    Art collection involving making a negative other than by radiation imagery
    or art work type of preparing a make up, e.g., model, diagram, etc., to be
    imaged.


CLS 430/952
TXT MULTIPLE IMAGE PRODUCING ON SINGLE RECEIVER:

    Art collection involving the production of plural images on a single image
    receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     333 and 394, for plural image formation.


CLS 430/953
TXT NEUTRON BEAM:

    Art collection involving the use of a neutron beam.


CLS 430/954
TXT NONRESINOUS ADDITIVE TO PROMOTE INTERLAYER ADHESION IN ELEMENT:

    Art collection involving the use of a nonresinous additive to cause layers
    to adhere one to another.


CLS 430/955
TXT PRECURSOR COMPOUND:

    Art collection involving use of a substance which precedes the formation of
    another compound.


CLS 430/956
TXT Interlayer correction coupler (ICC):

    Art collection involving the use of an interlayer correction coupler
    precursor.


CLS 430/957
TXT Development inhibitor releaser (DIR):

    Art collection involving the use of a precursor functioning to release a
    development inhibitor.


CLS 430/958
TXT Development dye releaser (DDR):

    Art collection involving the use of a development dye releaser precursor.


CLS 430/959
TXT Blocked developers:

    Art collection involving the use of precursor functioning to block
    developing.


CLS 430/960
TXT Blocked restrainers:

    Art collection involving the use of precursor which restrains blocking.


CLS 430/961
TXT PROTECTIVE OR ANTIABRASION LAYER:

    Art collection involving a protective or anti-abrasion layer.


CLS 430/962
TXT RADIATION-CHROMIC COMPOUND:

    Art collection involving compounds which change color upon being exposed to
    radiation.


CLS 430/963
TXT RAPID ACCESS PROCESSING:

    Art collection involving posting image processing in a time period much
    shorter than normal.


CLS 430/964
TXT THERMAL IMAGING COMPOSITION:

    Art collection involving composition wherein the image is produced by heat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141+,   338, 616, 617, 618, 619, and 620, for compositions affected by heat.


CLS 430/965
TXT TONER CONTAINING:

    Art collection involving product having a color altering substance.


CLS 430/966
TXT X-ray:

    Art collection involving the use of X-rays.


CLS 430/967
TXT X-ray exposure process:

    Art collection involving X-ray irradiation.


CLS 431/
TTL COMBUSTION

CLS 431/
TXT
    This is the residual class for processes of combustion or combustion
    starting, and for apparatus peculiarly adapted to burn or ignite materials.

    (1)     Note.  A fuel discharge nozzle is a subcombination of basic subject
    matter of this class if it is specialized for use in combustion solely (1)
    by discrete means transmitting flame between distinct fuel discharge areas;
    (2) by flashback preventing or controlling structure (3) by an incandescing
    component; (4) by means maintaining a reigniting flame; or (5) by flame
    enclosing, protecting or stabilizing structure.

    (2)     Note.  Patents issued prior to 1940 have not in all instances been
    classified by their claimed disclosure so the placement of these patents
    does not necessarily indicate lines of classification.

    GLOSSARY



    BURNER

    Term generic to "burner assembly", "burner head" and "flame holder".

    BURNER ASSEMBLY

    A unitary device or fixture including a flame holder and associated feeding
    or supporting elements.

    BURNER HEAD

    A device by which fluent fuel is passed to a combustion space where it
    forms a flame projecting from the device.

    CLEANING

    The dislodging of extraneous matter or incrustations.

    COMBUSTION

    The direct combination of oxygen gas and a burnable substance.

    FLAME HOLDER

    Generic term for the part of a combustion device confining the flame or
    supporting the base of a flame.  It includes burner heads, the flame
    supporting portion of wicks, the pots of pot type burners, etc.

    FLASH BACK

    The spread of flame from a combustion area into a feed passage of a burner
    head.

    FLINT

    A body of material that produces igniting sparks when struck.  It is
    generally made of an alloy of iron and cerium.

    PILOT BURNER

    A small auxiliary unit used to ignite a principal flame holder.

    PURGING

    The removal of unwanted material.

    RETARDER

    A device that provides for the delay of completion of performance of an
    operation after its initiating signal has been given, e.g., dashpot, time
    delay switch, etc.

    SCAVENGING

    The flushing out of unwanted gas or gas mixture by another gas or gas
    mixture.

    SHUTDOWN

    The term is used in this class to indicate that a combustion device has
    been stopped and that it cannot be made to operate except by manual
    intervention.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclasses 507+ for a match
    structure; subclass 643 for a residual match striking surface, per se;
    subclasses 530+ for fuel product of defined shape or structure; and
    subclasses 542+ for fuel products coated or impregnated for easier ignition.

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, appropriate subclass, for an
    apparatus or process for the manufacture, purification, mixing,
    distribution or storage of heating or illuminating gas without combustion
    thereof.  Also, when a portion of the generated gas is burned to generate
    the gas and another portion of the generated gas is purified, fixed or
    stored, classification is in Class 48.

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 39.01+ for a combustion product generator,
    per se, or subcombination thereof peculiarly adapted for power generation,
    or solely disclosed for such purpose; and appropriate subclasses for a
    residual device producing mechanical power or thrust from fuel.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 283+ for a shaped thermic or
    explosive charge; subclasses 335+ for a device other than a photographic
    flash device burning a packaged charge containing both fuel and oxidizer
    for display, amusement flashlight or signal purposes, e.g., flare, etc.;
    subclasses 335+ for an explosive or thermic charge within a casing; and
    subclasses 464+ for a fuse, primer or igniter for igniting a thermic or
    explosive charge.  See (1) Note of the class definition of Class 102 for a
    statement of the types of material used in the devices of this class.

    110,    Furnaces, appropriate subclass for process of burning solid fuel
    even though the solid fuel be combined with a gas or liquid fuel, the line
    between Classes 110 and 431 relative to combustion apparatus is:  Class 110
    takes solid fuel burners that have a feature specialized to the burning of
    such fuel, e.g., a grate,  solid fuel preparer or treater other than a mere
    preheater, a slag or ash remover, a mechanical feeder such as a conveyor,
    etc.  Class 431 takes gaseous and liquid fuel combustion apparatus and
    burners utilizing a finely divided fuel dispersed in air in which the
    mixture merely acts as a fluid fuel stream, even though it is defined by
    terms such as solid fuel burner, fuel suspension burner, etc.  Class 431
    also takes candles, jelled fuel burners, magnesium strip burners and
    illuminating flash devices of the combustion type.  Combustion apparatus
    for or a method of burning liquid waste material, however, is proper in
    Class 110.  Also, search Class 110 for the following furnace elements,
    subcombinations or appurtenances: subclasses 119+ for spark arrestors;
    subclasses 145+ for spark and smoke conductors; subclasses 147+ for draft
    regulators for a furnace; subclasses 165+ for an ash receiving or handling
    device; subclass 172 for a furnace front; subclasses 173+ for a door
    specialized for use in a furnace; subclass 181 for a casing or arch
    specialized for use in a furnace door; subclasses 182.5+ for a conduit
    specialized to feeding air to a furnace; subclass 184 for a metal smoke
    stack specialized for use with a locomotive or portable boiler.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, appropriate subclasses for a heat
    generator, (e.g., fuel burner, etc.) specifically related to a closed
    holder of liquid to be heated, or combined with a specific closed liquid
    holder. However, when the liquid heated is fed to the burner head of a
    burner assembly and the closed chamber or conduit is merely an element of
    the burner assembly, classification is in Class 431.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, appropriate subclass for a device
    specialized to the production of power in which fuel is burned in an
    expansible chamber.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, for the apparatus for the application of heat,
    and for the stove and furnace elements specifically provided for in the
    various subclasses; see particularly subclasses 144+ for a firepot or
    lining, subclasses 285+ for a damper, and subclasses 307+ for a stove pipe.

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclasses 217+ for a
    residual thermoelectric generator heated by a pilot burner.

    137,    Fluid Handling, appropriate subclass for a residual fluid handling
    or feeding invention of general utility. The recitation that a fuel is
    handled or that the invention comprises a burner does not bar
    classification in Class 137 where no particulars of a flame holding element
    nor significant relationship of a flame holder and fuel handler based upon
    the combustibility of the fuel fed to the flame holder is involved.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, appropriate subclass
    for an explosive or thermic composition, or charge, e.g., match
    composition, etc.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 85+ for a tobacco
    container with an igniter for said content and subclasses 96+ for a match
    packet, container or holder.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 260+ for an incandescent type of
    electrically operated igniter, per se.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 136+ for an article dispenser
    combined with an ignition means.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, appropriate subclass
    for a control system regulating the temperature of a chamber or material
    where no more of the structure of the means supplying or removing heat is
    included than is necessary to bring out its relationship to the control
    system. It is noted that for Class 236 an igniter, flame sensor or pilot
    burner is a part of the control structure rather than of the controlled
    temperature modifying burner.



    It is also noted that a residual apparatus specialized to combustion and
    having either a broad or specific burner is classified in Class 431 where
    the operation of the temperature modifying burner is simply initiated or
    terminated by a broad "off and on" thermostat sensing and responding to the
    temperature of the chamber or material heated by the burner.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclass for
    subject matter relating to the emission from a fluid handling system in
    modified flow, of fluid or slurry, and for the emitter member, per se.  An
    indication that a fuel is handled or that the emitted material is burned
    (e.g., named welding torch, etc.) does not bar classification in Class 239
    in the absence of a feature or structure dependent upon the combustion or
    combustibility of the fuel specializing the invention to combustion.



    The structure listed in (1) Note above and the following features or
    elements are among those that distinguish a specialized fuel discharger
    classifiable in Class 431 from a Class 239 structure:

    1.      A device for starting combustion at the discharger such as a pilot
    or igniter even nominally recited.

    2.      A sensor of combustion heat in, or burner flame at the discharger,
    controlling feed to the discharger.

    3.      A means by which the discharger feed line receives heat from
    burning discharge.

    4.      A related furnace wall serving as a part of, or supporting guide
    means feeding air to a combustion chamber fed by the discharger.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclass for an
    air gap discharge device (e.g., spark plug etc.), per se.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 247+ for a
    residual electrical igniting system.

    362,    Illumination, appropriate subclasses for an illumination device
    comprising a light source, e.g., a burner etc., combined (1) with a device
    that encloses the light source and transmits the light therefrom or (2)
    with a light distributor.  However, patents issued prior to 1940, having a
    conventionally shown light transmitting or distributing device and specific
    burner structure have been placed in the appropriate burner subclass in
    Class 431.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 73+, for a pumping system operated by combustion
    displacement of the liquid and appropriate subclass for a pumping system
    that may handle fuel where combustion of the material handled is not
    involved.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for
    generating a treating agent by burning a combustible material, a combustion
    or reaction device for purifying a gas, or with means for recovering,
    mixing, separating, or otherwise handling as a product material formed in
    the device or residual chemical apparatus.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclass, for
    inorganic compounds and nonmetallic elements including their manufacture by
    chemical reaction, and note especially subclasses 212+ for exhaust gas
    purification or separation.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process, subclasses 12+ for a battery generating current by feeding a gas
    into a cell to react with fluids in the cell, (e.g., fuel cell, etc.).

    432,    Heating, appropriate subclass, for a residual method or apparatus
    for generating heat and applying it to materials.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the methods of combustion of hazardous or toxic waste, from
    any source where a useful product is not produced or obtained.






    INDEX TO SEARCH NOTES AND "SEARCH CLASSES"

    Class           Class 431 Subclass

    7                       296

    8                       100

    15                      122, 320

    23                      76

    30                      120, 144

    42                      125, 269

    44                      main, 3, 4, 126,
                    267, 288, 327

    48                      main, 4, 11, 38, 207,
                    208, 346, 354

    53                      358

    60                      main, 1, 4, 5, 6, 158,
                    159, 346

    62                      203, 344

    73                      76

    89                      258

    92                      354

    102                     main, 99, 258, 269,
                    345, 357

    106                     94, 325

    110                     main, 20, 86, 115, 157, 159,
                    163, 171, 173, 190

    112                     100

    116                     13

    118                     100

    122                     21, 33, 144, 159, 160, 161,
                    207

    123                     main

    126                     main, 4, 20, 21, 86, 115,
                    117, 328, 331, 343, 344,
                    345, 347, 353

    131                     267

    136                     main, 80

    137                     main, 1, 2, 3, 12, 13, 21,
                    42, 59, 60, 64, 65,
                    75, 77, 80, 86, 88, 89, 90,
                    119, 121, 122, 123, 160,
                    207,208, 278, 280, 350, 354

    141                     321

    149                     main, 267, 357

    165                     114, 119, 170

    167                     288

    169                     144

    175                     158

    196                     207

    200                     75, 76, 79

    202                     170

    206                     main, 100, 253, 267, 269

    219                     main, 208, 255, 258

    220                     358

    221                     main, 258, 269

    222                     88, 320, 330, 344, 345

    236                     main, 13, 18, 20, 75, 86, 159, 237

    239                     main, 1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13,
                    86, 90, 91, 117, 119, 121,
                    122,123, 125, 158, 159, 160,
                    168, 181, 182, 184, 185, 187,
                    203, 207, 239, 246, 252, 278,
                    284, 298, 320, 328, 343, 344,
                    345, 346, 350, 353, 354

    248                     114, 289, 295, 343

    250                     79

    251                     86

    252                     100, 268, 325

    261                     330, 354

    264                     100, 288

    266                     159

    307                     78

    312                     269

    313                     main, 264, 358, 360

    318                     69, 79

    323                     78

    324                     76

    331                     78

    338                     78

    340                     13, 23, 26, 78

    356                     13, 126

    361                     main, 78, 79, 80, 255,
                    258, 365

    362                     main, 92, 99, 122, 125, 251,
                    288, 289, 291, 311, 327, 343,
                    346, 358

    374                     13, 78, 80

    417                     Main, 354

    422                     main, 5, 76, 268

    423                     main, 5

    425                     288

    427                     100

    428                     125, 325

    429                     Main,

    432                     main, 159, 160, 161, 170,
                    215, 351

    441                     1

    445                     358

    446                     125, 269, 273

    454                     184

    D 23                    126


CLS 431/1
TXT Subject matter under the class definition including means or steps for
    causing combustion of a continuing series of intermittent fuel charges
    which create a peak combustion followed by a minimum combustion rate,
    regularly or in definite repeating patterns.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 39.76+ for an intermittent combustion type
    of combustion product generator disclosed solely for use for powder
    production.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 624.13+ for a timer or programmer
    controlled fluid handling system of general utility providing for a
    repeating cycle.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 99+ for a
    fluid sprinkling or spraying device of general utility with means causing
    intermittent interruption of supply to the distributing means and subclass
    101 for a sprinkling device of general utility with means for fluctuating
    flow or pressure of fluid supplied to it.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 48+ for a fluid retarder or
    timer for a valve that may produce a pulsed feeding.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclass 13 for a flashing
    aquatic buoy.


CLS 431/2
TXT Processes under the class definition pertaining to:  burning fuel,
    operating a burner, or starting combustion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 341+ for methods of operating refuse
    incinerators and solid fuel furnaces.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 3+ for a process not specialized to
    combustion for the mixing of plural fluids of diverse characteristics or
    conditions.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 1+ for a
    process of sprinkling, spraying or diffusing a fluid (e.g., fuel) not
    specialized to combustion.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the operation of a burner and the starting of combustion
    using as a fuel hazardous or toxic waste wherein destruction of the waste
    is an objective of the process.


CLS 431/3
TXT Processes under subclass 2 involving (1) the addition of a cleansing or
    decarbonizing substance to the fuel; (2) a procedure that eliminates or
    prevents the formation of carbon and other deposits in the burner; or (3)
    clearing residual or undesired matter (e.g., vapor) out of a burner
    assembly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29+,    for the automatic control of scavenger means.

    32,     for the automatic control of cleaning means.

    121+,   for combustion apparatus with cleaning, purging or scavenging means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclasses 300+ for a liquid fuel
    admixed with anti-oxidants, corrosion inhibitors, gum inhibitors,
    stabilizers, preservatives in general etc.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 15 for a process of cleaning a fluid
    handling system of general utility.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 9 for a fluid
    sprinkling, spraying or diffusing process not requiring combustion
    involving dissolving or mixing a material in a flowing liquid stream and
    combining the stream with air, gas or steam.


CLS 431/4
TXT Processes under subclass 2 including feeding a substance to the flame
    additional to the normal fuel and oxidizing material to act as a protective
    agent or to give the flame some special characteristic.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclasses 300+ for a liquid fuel
    composition that may include a flame modifying additive.

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, sub- classes 89+ for a retort
    generating heating or illuminating gas fed with steam or water, and
    subclasses 204+ for a heating or illuminating gas process involving water
    or steam.

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 39.05 for a combustion products generating
    process involving the addition of steam or water to the combustion products.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 59.5 for an orchard device generating
    smoke by combustion.


CLS 431/5
TXT Processes under subclass 2 of burning combustible constituents remaining in
    the gaseous waste effluent of an industrial or power plant or process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202,    for the structural installation of a combustion device that may use
    waste gas as fuel, e.g., flare burner, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 272+, for the handling or treatment of the
    exhaust of an internal combustion engine.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 198+ for a furnace that may be used
    for such purification.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 210+ for purifying or
    separating gases by chemical reaction and note especially 212+ for exhaust
    gases.


CLS 431/6
TXT Processes under subclass 2 involving: (1) initial supplying of burner feed;
    (2) ignition of fuel; or (3) steps bringing about termination of combustion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 39.06 for a process of ignition of a
    combustion products generator disclosed solely for use in power production.


CLS 431/7
TXT Processes under subclass 2 of injecting fuel into a bed of refractory
    material or a porous refractory member and burning it therein or adjacent
    its surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170,    for a furnace in which combustion takes place in a permeable mass.

    326+,   for a porous capillary, particulate or sieve-like flame holder.


CLS 431/8
TXT Processes under subclass 2 involving the manner in which the feed is
    discharged into the region where combustion takes place, or the manner in
    which the flame is shaped into a pattern.


CLS 431/9
TXT Processes under subclass 8 in which the shaping of the flame or
    distributing the components includes (1) whirling the combustion components
    within the combustion zone; or (2) directing removed or burning material
    towards or into the incoming feed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115+,   for combustion product return structure.

    173,    for feed projected tangentially to the wall of a circular
    combustion chamber.


CLS 431/10
TXT Processes under subclass 8 including the step of supplying a distinct
    stream of an oxidizer, such as air, into a burning mixture of fuel and
    oxidizer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    351,    for a flame holder including means feeding air at axially spaced
    points of the flame.


CLS 431/11
TXT Processes under subclass 2 of heating either the fuel or oxidizer prior to
    its discharge into a combustion zone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36+,    for the automatic control of the burner feed heating structure.

    161+,   for a furnace heated furnace feed line.

    207+,   for a heated feed line section feeding a flame holder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclasses 197+ for a process for
    the mere generation of heating or illuminating gas.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 13 for a
    process of sprinkling, spraying or diffusing not specialized to combustion
    including heating or cooling of the sprayed material.


CLS 431/12
TXT Processes under subclass 2 controlling the supply of fuel or air discharged
    into the combustion zone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 6 for a process comprising controlling the
    mixing of plural fluids of diverse characteristics or conditions by the
    heat of combustion of the mixture.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 8+ for a
    sprinkling, spraying or diffusing process not specialized to combustion
    including the steps of mixing or combining air, gas or steam with the
    material to be sprayed.


CLS 431/13
TXT Apparatus under class definition including (1) an indicating, registering,
    recording or alarm means for conveying information about a condition of a
    combustion or combustion starting apparatus, or (2) means which permits
    inspection of normally hidden parts of combustion apparatus or combustion
    starting apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 7 for a burglar alarm that also
    ignites a lamp or match; and subclasses 101+ for an alarm actuated by
    change in temperature, e.g., fire alarm, incubator, etc.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 551+ for a fluid handling system of
    general utility including an indicator, register, recorder, alarm or
    inspection means.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 94 for
    automatic temperature and humidity regulation apparatus thermostatically
    operated and including an indicator or alarm.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 71+ for fluid
    sprinkling, spraying and diffusing apparatus of general utility with a
    signal, indicator, recorder, meter or changeable exhibitor.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 577+ for an electrical
    communications system not specialized for use with a specific flame holder
    responsive to flame.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 315, for spectroscopic
    analysis apparatus and subclass 417 for flame photometers comprising a
    flame holder, a means for feeding a sample to the flame and flame
    observation means.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 100+ for a device for
    measuring or testing temperature.


CLS 431/14
TXT Apparatus under subclass 13 associated with a burner having a condition
    responsive control and in which the indicating or inspecting means is
    actuated by the control to convey to the operator information concerning a
    condition of the burner.


CLS 431/15
TXT Apparatus under subclass 14 in which the control has (1) reached a position
    necessitating external intervention to start, i.e., shutdown, and the
    indicator informs the operator that such a position has been reached; or
    (2) sensed that a new start attempt is necessary and informs the operator
    that such an attempt is being or has been made.


CLS 431/16
TXT Apparatus under subclass 15 that:  (1) responds to sensed leakage, overflow
    or pressure outside of a predetermined range or (2) responds to an
    indication by an electrical test circuit of electrical component deficiency
    or failure.


CLS 431/17
TXT Apparatus under subclass 13 wherein the indicator gives information
    concerning the position or relative movement of some part of a burner
    apparatus or burner control.


CLS 431/18
TXT Apparatus under class definition whereby (1) a control is exerted by means
    sensing an environmental or operating condition; (2) the time at which an
    actuation is performed is controlled; (3) the length of time taken to
    perform an operation is controlled; (4) there is means providing a sequence
    of events set to occur at predetermined intervals; or (5) there is a means
    terminating a single operation in a fixed position to restart an additional
    cycle, which cycle is more complex than a mere starting or stopping of a
    single device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, appropriate subclass
    for a residual system including a temperature modifier (e.g., burner, etc.)
    and a means sensing the temperature of a chamber or material acted upon by
    the modifier; the sensing means regulating the temperature of the chamber
    or material by controlling the operation of the modifier.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 130+
    for data processing control systems wherein the control system is claimed
    generically, and subclasses 496+ for the application of a computer in the
    chemical or engineering sciences.


CLS 431/19
TXT Apparatus under subclass 18, in which a control of a burner element is
    effected in response to a sensed pressure within a chamber in which fuel is
    burned.


CLS 431/20
TXT Apparatus under subclass 18 in which (1) a pump or flow controller in a
    line by which combustion products are removed from a combustion  chamber is
    controlled or (2) a means responsive to the position or condition of
    operation of such a pump or flow controller exerts a control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 147+ for a draft regulator for a solid fuel
    furnace.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 285+ for a cooking stove damper and
    its operator.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 45 for the
    regulation of temperature by means controlling the draft of a heater.


CLS 431/21
TXT Apparatus under subclass 18 in which a control actuation results from the
    destruction of a heat fusible or consumable connection responsive to heat
    of combustion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 504.1 and 504.3 for a
    fusible type safety device in a boiler.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 287.5 for a stove having a fusible
    release damper.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 72+ for a heat destructible or fusible
    control element in a fluid handling system of general utility.


CLS 431/22
TXT Apparatus under subclass 18 wherein the sensing means is responsive to (1)
    the presence of gaseous combustion material outside of its normal flow path
    or outside of its confiner during shutdown; or (2) the presence of
    combustion outside of the normal combustion zone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for a control system including an indicator responsive to leakage,
    overflow, or abnormal pressure.


CLS 431/23
TXT Apparatus under subclass 18 in which the likelihood of damage to an element
    of a burner assembly, e.g., igniter, nozzle, etc. is prevented or lessened
    by a controlled actuation of a device that (1) moves the element relative
    to the flame area (2) moves a baffle shielding the element from the frame
    area (3) directs the flow of a cooling fluid over the element or (4)
    otherwise modified the transfer of heat to the element from the flame area.


CLS 431/24
TXT Apparatus under subclass 18 including structure response to a signal
    indicating abnormality or malfunction that is produced by an electrical
    circuit means which (1) tests or checks a combustion sensor and its circuit
    or (2) analysis a signal from a combustion sensor to distinguish a tone
    flame signal from a false signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 514+ for an electrical
    communication system of general application automatically responsive to a
    condition having means for testing the sensor or the means conveying the
    signal from the sensor to a control or indicator.


CLS 431/25
TXT Apparatus under subclass 24 in which the circuit has one response to the
    flow of current through a gap device in the flame area when the current has
    been changed from alternating to direct by the rectifying effect of the
    flame and another response to an unrectified current which is an indication
    of a short circuit at the gap or some other abnormality in the sensor
    circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 579 for an electrical
    communication system of general utility in which a flame sensor responds to
    the ionization or rectification properties of a flame.


CLS 431/26
TXT Apparatus under subclass 24 in which a starting means connects a checking
    circuit into a flame sensing circuit as a preliminary to fuel feed and
    subsequently disconnects the checking circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 515 for the testing of an
    automatically responsive communications system of general utility having a
    test structure for the system including means simulating the condition
    being sensed.


CLS 431/27
TXT Apparatus under subclass 18 in which a failure to sense flame in the
    proving period of a start program reinitiates the start program; said
    apparatus including structure causing shutdown requiring reset after one or
    more reinitiations of the start program.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for a control that provides for recycle through a proving period on
    the sensing of a failure of an established flame.


CLS 431/28
TXT Apparatus under subclass 18 which, on starting, provides for activation of
    an electrical heater for the burner or burner feed and subsequently for
    admission of fuel to the burner or for triggering of an igniter.


CLS 431/29
TXT Apparatus under subclass 18 wherein a timing, retarding or programming
    means (1) effects the operation of a device which (a) supplies a quantity
    of fluid other than a combustible mixture to cleanse the burner of any
    undesirable fluid or (b) drains or otherwise removes undesirable fluid from
    the burner between combustion stopping and starting; or (2) causes upon the
    actuation of means calling for a combustion operation a predetermined
    period of inaction of any fire producing elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for processes involving decarbonizing, cleaning or purging.


CLS 431/30
TXT Apparatus under subclass 29 wherein the control provides for the operation
    of a mechanical impelling means to flush the burner with noncombustible
    material (e.g., air, steam, etc.) during the scavenging or combustion start
    up delay period.


CLS 431/31
TXT Apparatus under subclass 30 in which, during initiation of a combustion
    period, the device for moving the cleansing fluid is activated for a
    predetermined time prior to actuation to combustion starting position of
    means controlling the necessary fire producing elements, (e.g., fuel
    supplier, igniter, etc.).


CLS 431/32
TXT Apparatus under subclass 18 in which the control or actuation is of
    structure dislodging extraneous matter or incrustations from burner
    elements.


CLS 431/33
TXT Apparatus under subclass 18 including structure actuating a means to put
    out a burner flame other than by shutting off the fuel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 504+ for a safety device
    for a steam boiler comprising an automatic extinguisher.


CLS 431/34
TXT Apparatus under subclass 33 wherein the flame is put out by a smothering
    cap actuated in response to tilting of the burner.


CLS 431/35
TXT Apparatus under subclass 33 including means for extinguishing the flame
    automatically when a predetermined portion of a candle has been consumed or
    when a predetermined quantity of fuel has been consumed.


CLS 431/36
TXT Apparatus under subclass 18 in which the control is of or by, a condition
    of heat generation or transfer structure by which fluid for supply to a
    combustion zone of an associated burner is heated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for a process for preheating feed.

    31,     for a burner having an electrical heater controlled to preheat a
    burner or burner feeder before attempting ignition of the burner.


CLS 431/37
TXT Apparatus under subclass 36 in which the flow of feed fluid into the feed
    heating structure is controlled.


CLS 431/38
TXT Apparatus under subclass 37 in which the feed admission mean is controlled
    by means sensing the pressure within the feed containing section of the
    structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating, and Illuminating, subclass 106 for a retort not
    associated with a fuel burner regulated by the pressure of the gas either
    in the retort or gasometer.


CLS 431/39
TXT Apparatus under subclass 37 in which the feed admission means is controlled
    by means measuring the liquid level in the fuel containing section of the
    structure.


CLS 431/40
TXT Apparatus under subclass 37 including structure by which variation in
    length of a fluid containing section of the feed heating structure is
    utilized in the actuation of a feed admission controller.


CLS 431/41
TXT Apparatus under subclass 36 in which a means sensing a condition of the
    heating structure actuates a controller of the heat supply of the structure.


CLS 431/42
TXT Apparatus under subclass 18 in which a means responsive to a condition of
    one burner head or assembly effects or locks a control means of a second
    burner head or assembly.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 65+ for a control subcombination of a
    burner assembly comprising a combustion failure responsive fuel safety cut
    off for a burner feed line where the subcombination does not include the
    flame holder fed by the controlled line.


CLS 431/43
TXT Apparatus under subclass 42 having an electrical spark producing means or
    an electrical heating element associated with one of the burners to ignite
    fuel supplied to the burner.


CLS 431/44
TXT Apparatus under subclass 43 in which the igniter is de-energized by a means
    responsive to a pressure variation in a burner feed line produced by the
    sensing of combustion at one of the burners.


CLS 431/45
TXT Apparatus under subclass 43 having means to open a switch to the igniter
    within a predetermined time after the igniter has been turned on regardless
    of the condition of the burner.


CLS 431/46
TXT Apparatus under subclass 43 in which the igniter is de-energized in
    response to a sensed ignition of the first burner.


CLS 431/47
TXT Apparatus under subclass 43 in which the igniter is energized or
    de-energized manually.


CLS 431/48
TXT Apparatus under subclass 42 in which there is a third burner and an
    additional sensor which controls the third burner in response to a sensed
    condition of the second burner.


CLS 431/49
TXT Apparatus under subclass 42 in which there are three burners, the operation
    of the second and third burners being under the control of a sensing means
    responsive to a condition of the first burner; said third burner being an
    igniting means for the first burner.


CLS 431/50
TXT Apparatus under subclass 42 in which: (1) the sensed failure of flame at
    either burner during operation will result in the cut off of fuel to the
    second burner; or (2) the presence of a flame at both burners must be
    indicated at least momentarily in the starting procedure to prevent cut off
    of the second burner.


CLS 431/51
TXT Apparatus under subclass 42 including means controlling the feed to the
    first and second burners; the means automatically cutting off the feed to
    both burners if the flame at the first burner is sensed as being
    extinguished.


CLS 431/52
TXT Apparatus under subclass 51 including valve means for the first burner that
    must be manually opened after shutdown to feed the first burner for
    reignition.


CLS 431/53
TXT Apparatus under subclass 52 wherein the valve means is a single valve in a
    feed line common to the burners controlling the flow of fuel to both
    burners.


CLS 431/54
TXT Apparatus under subclass 53 including a valve, additional to the valve
    controlling flow to the first and second burner, in a branch leading to the
    second burner; said additional valve being closed or locked in the closed
    position until combustion is sensed at the first burner.


CLS 431/55
TXT Apparatus under subclass 52 including a reset valve in the feed line to
    each burner for independent control of the burners.


CLS 431/56
TXT Apparatus under subclass 51 including a fuel conduit acting as a by-pass
    around the valve means of the first burner, or means supplying fuel down
    stream of the valve means for the first burner.


CLS 431/57
TXT Apparatus under subclass 42 wherein a second burner valve means is
    automatically closed upon sensed extinguishment of the first burner, and
    the second burner valve means must be manually opened for fuel to be
    supplied to the second burner for reignition.


CLS 431/58
TXT Apparatus under subclass 42 wherein the first burner sensor controls the
    flow of actuating fluid relative to a diaphragm that operates a valve
    controlling flow in the feed line of the second burner.


CLS 431/59
TXT Apparatus under subclass 42 wherein the first burner sensor is an
    electrical type sensor; e.g., burner flame completes electrical circuit,
    thermocouple; magnetic valve or magnetic switch responsive to the heat of
    the burner, photoelectric, heat responsive resistor (thermistor) etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 66 for a shutdown valve in a burner feed
    line and a thermoelectric flame sensor which causes closing of said valve
    in response to sensed flame failure (e.g., main burner line and pilot
    sensor etc.).


CLS 431/60
TXT Apparatus under subclass 18 in which the actuation causes the starting or
    stopping at different times of at least two distinct burner head units or
    burner pots.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18+,    for a burner system in which the sensor of one burner head controls
    a second burner head.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 119.01+ for self controlled branched
    flow systems of general utility involving alternate or successively
    substituted outflow.


CLS 431/61
TXT Apparatus under subclass 60 in which the starting and stopping of the
    burners is in response to changes in the fuel feed pressure.


CLS 431/62
TXT Apparatus under subclass 18 including structure providing (1) feed rate
    variations or modulation within the period between the initial demand
    actuation and the attainment of the full "run" position of the control
    structure; or (2) a shift from "off" to a combustion initiating feed rate,
    then to a running feed rate; or (3) a shift from a starting fuel or fuel
    mixture to a "running" fuel or fuel mixture; or (4) a shift from a starting
    fuel charge to a "running" combustible feed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29+,    for a control system that feeds a scavenging fluid to the burner
    before starting combustion.


CLS 431/63
TXT Apparatus under subclass 62 in which the burner control structure is
    shifted to its normal operating condition, i.e., "run" position, by means
    sensing the establishment of combustion.


CLS 431/64
TXT Apparatus under subclass 18 including means responsive to the level of a
    body of liquid fuel or connected bodies of fuel and controlling the flow of
    fuel to maintain a substantially unvarying depth of liquid fuel burning at
    the surface of one of the bodies or on a wick extending from that body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 386+ for a liquid level responsive or
    maintaining system of general utility.


CLS 431/65
TXT Apparatus under subclass 18 including a controller arranged to stop the
    fuel supply to a liquid burner in response to an accumulation of unburned
    liquid fuel discharged from the combustion zone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 403+ for a fluid handling system that
    may be a part of a burner organization in which the liquid supplied to a
    vessel is cut off responsive to the weight of a predetermined accumulation
    of unconsumed liquid.


CLS 431/66
TXT Apparatus under subclass 18 in which a fuel feed means is controlled by a
    means sensing and responding to a change in the temperature of the igniter
    or in the rate of current flow, voltage or other electrical condition of
    the igniter.


CLS 431/67
TXT Apparatus under subclass 18 providing for a timed period between
    energization of an igniter of a burner assembly and following admission of
    fuel to the burner head for ignition by the igniter.


CLS 431/68
TXT Apparatus under subclass 18 including control means responsive to the
    temperature in a combustion zone and requiring a sensed cold condition of
    the combustion zone before a start or recycle attempt can be effective to
    feed fuel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29+,    for a control means providing a combustion start up delay period
    after sensed flame failure.


CLS 431/69
TXT Apparatus under subclass 18 including a "shutdown" device for a burner
    actuated at the expiration of a period established by a timer or retarder
    means; the start of the means being correlated with the movement of a
    demand controller to "start" position; and a flame responsive control
    effective to prevent "shutdown" by the device if flame is sensed within the
    period.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for means indicating a shutdown or aborted start attempt.

    27,     for a control providing repeated start attempts prior to shutdown
    upon failure to establish combustion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 471 for an automatic
    or time delay control means responsive to thermal conditions, and subclass
    480 for a similar control responsive to radiant energy, in which an
    electric motor is the ultimate and sole electrical device controlled.


CLS 431/70
TXT Apparatus under subclass 69 in which a sensing of flame failure, after the
    sensing of flame establishment has prevented. "Shutdown", acts to initiate
    a restart attempt to be terminated by flame establishment or "shutdown".


CLS 431/71
TXT Apparatus under subclass 69 in which the flame responsive control acts to
    de-energize the igniter upon establishment of combustion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for a structure in which a sensor of a first burner control a
    second burner and shuts off the igniter of the first burner responsive to
    the establishment of flame at the first burner.


CLS 431/72
TXT Apparatus under subclass 18 including structure by which feed means and a
    means for igniting the fed fuel are operated at different times or for
    different time intervals.


CLS 431/73
TXT Apparatus under subclass 72 including a time interval establishing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for an igniter de-energized by a timer or retarder in a system in
    which the sensor of a first burner controls a second burner.


CLS 431/74
TXT Apparatus under subclass 72 including a sensor responsive to the presence
    of flame in a combustion zone controlling the igniter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for an igniter de-energized responsive to ignition of a burner and
    in which a sensor of this burner controls another burner.


CLS 431/75
TXT Apparatus under subclass 18 including a sensing means which responds to a
    condition within an area of combustion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for a burner control means responsive to combustion chamber
    pressure.

    21,     for a control responsive to a combustion destructible element.

    24+,    for a flame sensor with a checking or analyzing circuit.

    27,     for a control providing repeated start attempts prior to shutdown
    upon a sensed failure to establish combustion.

    42+,    for a second burner controlled by a sensor of a first burner.

    63,     for a combustion sensor providing for a shift from "start" to "run"
    feed.

    68,     for a control in which the sensing of a hot combustion zone
    condition blocks a restart attempt.

    69+,    for a control providing shutdown requiring reset on sensed absence
    of combustion in a proving period; and

    74,     for a system in which a flame sensor controls an igniter and fuel
    feeder in sequence.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 65+ for a combustion failure responsive
    fuel safety cut off burner subcombination.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Maker and Breakers, subclasses 136+ for a
    temperature controlled switch that may be a burner element.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 9+ for an
    automatic temperature central device responsive to temperature changes at a
    burner and in the apartment to be heated; subclass 11 for a hot air furnace
    in which the fire and the flow of heating air through the air chamber of
    the furnace are controlled; subclass 14 for a device regulating a fire
    under a boiler according to conditions in the combustion chamber and in the
    boiler; subclasses 15+ for the regulation of a fire according to conditions
    in the furnace; subclasses 21+ for a control for a boiler having a safety
    cut off for the heating means responsive to abnormal boiler conditions or
    to the failure of the heating means (e.g., fire, etc.); and subclasses 95
    and 96 for automatic control of temperature by a flue or heater attached
    thermostat.


CLS 431/76
TXT Apparatus under subclass 75 in which the control is by a means analyzing
    the composition of or responding to the relative quantity of a material
    formed in the combustion area, e.g., carbon or CO2 in combustion gases, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 23.2+ for apparatus for gas
    analysis.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 61.03 for a
    smoke responsive switch.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclass for
    apparatus for testing the electrical properties of gases.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 83+ for chemical gas analysis
    apparatus.


CLS 431/77
TXT Apparatus under subclass 75 in which the sensor responds to combustion
    failure or overheat to actuate a means terminating combustion and so
    disabling the burner that external intervention is necessary for restart.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for means indicating shutdown or aborted start attempt.

    51+,    for a system in which a sensor of a first burner cuts off itself
    and a second burner upon sensed failure of combustion of the first burner.

    69+,    for shutdown requiring reset by sensed absence of flame in a
    proving period.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 65+ for a fluid handling system that may
    be a part of a burner organization, having a flow control device in a feed
    line to a burner where a burner controlled by the device is not included
    and which device is automatically actuated to discontinue feed responsive
    to a temperature drop; and subclass 457 for a line condition change
    responsive safety cutoff valve of general utility that requires reset.


CLS 431/78
TXT Apparatus under subclass 77 in which the combustion terminating structure
    includes electrical means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24+,    for a shutdown control including an electrical test circuit sensing
    malfunction of a combustion sensing circuit.

    59,     for an electrical or magnetic sensor of a first burner controlling
    a second burner.

    66,     for a system in which a sensor of the electrical condition or
    temperature of an igniter controls the feed of fuel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 117
    for a residual electrical interconnection system responsive to light, heat,
    vibratory or radiant energy.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 294 for
    a residual electrical control in which an impedance responsive to a thermal
    condition is between the electrical source and the load.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 66 for an electrical system including an
    oscillator and a useful output for the oscillator and in which means
    responsive to temperature, or radiant energy in the form of light modifies
    a current characteristic of the oscillator.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 22+ for an electrical resistance
    variable in response to temperature changes.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 577+ for a flame responsive
    indicating system; and subclasses 584+ for a temperature responsive
    indicating system.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 161+,
    170+, and 211 for a thermally controlled electrical circuit for a relay or
    electromagnet.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 179+ for a current
    generating sensor or thermometer, per se.


CLS 431/79
TXT Apparatus under subclass 78 in which the sensor is a means responsive to
    electromagnetic waves produced by the burner flame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 61.02 for a
    light responsive switch.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 206+ for a residual photocell controlled
    circuit and subclass 215 for a photocell combined with a diverse type
    device.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 480 for an automatic
    or time delay control means responsive to radiant energy in which an
    electric motor is the ultimate and sole electrical device controlled.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 173+ and
    211 for an electric circuit having a photocell device in which the final
    element is an electro-magnet or a relay.


CLS 431/80
TXT Apparatus under subclass 78 in which the sensor is a means which converts
    energy produced by heat of combustion into electrical energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclasses 200+ for a
    thermoelectric generator; particularly subclasses 217+ for a thermoelectric
     generator operated by a burner acting merely as the heat source for the
    generator.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 66 for a valve controlled by a combustion
    sensor of the thermoelectric type where the burner acting on the combustion
    sensor is not controlled by the valve.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 162 for an
    electrical circuit controlled by a thermoelectric device which the final
    element is an electromagnet or a relay.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 179+ for a current
    generating type thermometer.


CLS 431/81
TXT Apparatus under subclass 77 including a burner feed line with a valve
    biased toward closed position which, when manually opened, is held in the
    open position by a holding means which is released by a means sensing
    establishment of combustion at the burner; the valve thereafter being under
    the control of a means sensing overheat or failure of combustion at the
    burner.


CLS 431/82
TXT Apparatus under subclass 77 including means to supply fuel to a burner fuel
    line down stream of a controlled burner shutdown valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for a system in which a sensor of a first burner cuts off feed to a
    first and second burner, said system having a by-pass around the cut off
    valve to supply the first burner or having an additional supply of fuel for
    the first burner.


CLS 431/83
TXT Apparatus under subclass 77 including a shutdown valve acted upon by a
    continuously applied force tending to move it toward closed position, the
    valve being held open against the force, by a restraining means (e.g.,
    catch, brake, etc.), and the restraining being released by the sensor to
    free the valve for movement by the biasing force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52+,    for a manually reset cut-off valve that cuts off two burners
    simultaneously.


CLS 431/84
TXT Apparatus under subclass 83 in which the restraining means is a catch
    device that holds the valve open by projecting into a notch or cavity and
    releases the valve upon withdrawal.


CLS 431/85
TXT Apparatus under subclass 84 wherein the catch is released by a force
    produced by the expansion or contraction of a confined fluid in the sensor.


CLS 431/86
TXT Apparatus under subclass 18 including (1) a time measuring device that is
    manually started and causes actuation of a control device at the expiration
    of a selected period or (2) a clock device that actuates a control at a
    desired time of the day.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 192 for refuse incinerators or solid fuel
    furnaces provided with a timer control.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 285.5 for a timer controlled damper.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 624.21 for a fluid handling system not
    specialized to combustion controlled by a clock alarm mechanism.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 46 for an
    automatic temperature or humidity control system with a timing element.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 70 for a fluid
    discharge device not specialized to combustion with a preset timer for
    cutting off discharge.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 48+ for a fluid dash pot
    controlled valve or for a fluid controlled valve timer.


CLS 431/87
TXT Apparatus under subclass 86 actuating means for (1) producing a spark, (2)
    striking a match, or (3) combining ingredients which ignite when mixed.


CLS 431/88
TXT Apparatus under subclass 18 in which the operation of the burner is
    effected by a means which is responsive to tilting, jarring, or mechanical
    damage of the burner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for a burner controlled by a means sensing gas leakage, flashback
    or escaped flame.

    34,     for a wick cover type extinguishing means actuated in response to
    tilting of a burner assembly.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 38+ for the control of a fluid handling
    system of general utility by change of position or inertia of the system.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 500 for gravity or inertia actuated outlet
    elements for dispensers.


CLS 431/89
TXT Apparatus under subclass 18 in which a means sensing the condition in or of
    burner feed structure exerts a control.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36+,    for control of or by the temperature of, pressure of, or liquid
    level in heated feed means.

    61,     for the sequential of plural burners by fuel feed pressure
    variations.

    64,     for a level responsive means which controls the fuel level in a
    wick pot or in a pot type burner.

    65,     for means cutting off the flow of fuel by collected fuel overflow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 455+ for a line condition change
    responsive valve of general utility.


CLS 431/90
TXT Apparatus under subclass 89 in which the means sensing the condition in one
    burner feed line controls the flow of a second to the burner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 87.01+ for a fluid handling system not
    specialized to combustion or fluid emission in which flow in one feed line
    is proportional to or correlated with that in a second flow line by movable
    means in one of the lines responsive to means sensing a variable condition
    in the other.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 61+ for a
    fluid handling system with a flow modifying fluid emitter not specialized
    to combustion having movable means responsive to some variable condition in
    a first fluid which causes a change in a second fluid flow or in a control
    means, to maintain the relative amounts thereof in a selected ratio.


CLS 431/91
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means for hurling a slug or
    forming a propelled rod of liquid or gelled fuel unmixed with oxidizer and
    igniting the surface of the slug or rod as it leaves the hurling or
    propelling means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 67+ for a
    dispenser with selectively preset flow cut off means.


CLS 431/99
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which the fuel is in the form of an
    elongated solid piece of magnesium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 337+ for a parachute flare.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 3+ for a photographic light.


CLS 431/100
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a lace-like hood or
    envelope of thin, porous, refractory material which, when positioned in a
    flame, incandesces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    326+,   for a porous, capillary, particulate, screen or sieve-like flame
    holder, e.g., radiant burner, etc.

    347+,   for an incandescing or reflecting burner component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous methods of
    treating  textiles to chemically modify the same combined with a coating,
    lubricating or sizing of the textile.

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 173+ for devices for shirring and threading in
    the supporting loop.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for coating apparatus,
    per se.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 68, for receptacles for
    shipping mantles.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 492 for processes of making an incandescent
    mantle which involves no more than preparing or regenerating the
    composition of which the mantle is composed.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclass for nonmetallic article making or shaping process of
    general utility.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 159, for processes of producing an
    incandescent mantle by a coating process.


CLS 431/101
TXT Apparatus under subclass 100 including mounting structure of resilient
    construction that alternates the transmission of shock or vibration to the
    supported mantle.


CLS 431/102
TXT Apparatus under subclass 100 including a wick positioned adjacent the
    mantle and means by which fuel vapors evaporated from the wick by mantle
    heat are directed into the mantle.


CLS 431/103
TXT Apparatus under subclass 100 in which a fuel or air mantle feed line is
    heated either by an auxiliary heater or by heat conducted or radiated from
    the heated mantle.


CLS 431/104
TXT Apparatus under subclass 103 including means forming an auxiliary fuel jet
    or flame holder which acts to heat the mantle feed fuel or air line.


CLS 431/105
TXT Apparatus under subclass 103 in which a heat receiving section of the
    mantle feed line is within the mantle.


CLS 431/106
TXT Apparatus under subclass 103 in which the heated section of the mantle feed
    line is directly above and adjacent to a mantle supported above and fed by
    an upwardly directed fuel discharge member.


CLS 431/107
TXT Apparatus under subclass 103 in which the hood-like mantle is supported
    adjacent the heated section of the feed line with its open end facing
    upwardly and surrounding a downwardly discharging line terminus.


CLS 431/108
TXT Apparatus under subclass 100 including distinct means acting on the fuel or
    fuel mixture in the mantle zone to increase the pressure thereof in said
    zone, e.g., a separate fuel pump or jet which causes vapor flow into the
    mantle.


CLS 431/109
TXT Apparatus under subclass 100 in which the hood-like mantle is supported
    below the feed line terminus with its open end facing upwardly and
    surrounding a downwardly discharging terminus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for a downwardly fed mantle heating the feedline of the burner
    feeding the mantle.


CLS 431/110
TXT Apparatus under subclass 100 in which a hood like mantle is supported above
    an upwardly discharging fuel line terminus with the open end of the mantle
    at or adjacent the terminus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    for a mantle supported above an upwardly discharging fuel line
    terminus in which the feed line to the terminus is heated by the mantle.


CLS 431/111
TXT Apparatus under subclass 100 including (1) a support or connector extending
    outwardly from the hood-like incandescent portion of a mantle, which
    support or connector is attachable to means acting to mount the mantle
    portion or (2) a guard or shield for the mantle.


CLS 431/112
TXT Apparatus under subclass 111 in which the support, connector or protector
    is surrounded by the mantle.


CLS 431/113
TXT Apparatus under subclass 111 in which the support, connector or protector
    is positioned on a mantle, the mouth of which faces upwardly.


CLS 431/114
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means for dampening or
    preventing the occurrence of noises or vibrations tending to be produced in
    the operation of the burner assembly.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 69 for a resilient vibration damper
    isolating a heat exchanger element and subclass 136 for a heat exchanger
    with a thermal or acoustical blocker.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 560+ for resili- ent supports; and subclasses
    637+ for machinery supports of general utility.


CLS 431/115
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means defining a distinct
    path or passage communicating with a region of combustion and through which
    combustion products are delivered to the feed line or to the feed inlet
    zone of the region.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for a method of whirling, recycling material, or reversing flow in
    an enclosed flame zone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 203+ for a solid fuel burning furnace in which
    the products of combustion either wholly or in part, are returned to the
    fire that produced them.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 79 for a heating stove provided with
    means for returning the products of combustion from the smoke outlet to the
    combustion chamber of the stove.


CLS 431/116
TXT Apparatus under subclass 115 including a wall or partition, one side of
    which is the boundry of a mixing chamber containing or directly feeding the
    initial combustion region of the combustion zone and the other side of
    which defines a return path or passage supplying combustion products to the
    mixing chamber to be mixed therein.


CLS 431/117
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including distinct means receiving an
    excess quantity of liquid fuel discharged into but not used in a
    vaporization or flame holding structure and draining it from the structure
    to a region remote from the vaporization or flame holder structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65,     for a fuel feed cut off actuated by collected excess liquid
    discharged from the fed combustion zone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 51 for a liquid fuel stove having a
    pan or receptacle supported to catch liquid fuel dripping or overflowing
    from a burner.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 103 for a
    nozzle carrying an apertured shield and excess sprayed material collector.


CLS 431/118
TXT Apparatus under subclass 117 in which the liquid receiving and draining
    means includes a drained pan positioned outside of the flame or
    vaporization chamber and catching unvaporized fuel as it escapes from the
    chamber.


CLS 431/119
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising means to collect material
    escaping from the confines of the apparatus additional to that withdrawn
    through desired and intended exhaust structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 312+ for a fluid handling system of
    general application with leakage or drip collecting structure.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 70 for a heat exchange having leakage
    collecting structure.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 120+ for a
    spray nozzle having a waste disposal or drip collecting means.


CLS 431/120
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a device for scraping,
    cutting or brushing a wick or for facilitating the placing of a wick in or
    removing it from a burner during assembly or disassembly of the burner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 134+ for a grip type shear combined with other
    structure and subclass 233 for a shear of general application with a guard,
    gage or guide.


CLS 431/121
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having (1) means for cleaning or
    facilitating the cleaning of a part of a burner or (2) means for removing
    from a part of a burner feed material that has become undesirable in that
    part before, during, or after operation of the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for a process of decarbonizing, cleaning or purging a burner
    assembly.

    29+,    for the automatic control of a scavenging period.

    32,     for the automatic control of cleaning means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 238+ for a fluid handling system of
    general utility having structure for cleaning or steam sterilization of the
    system.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 106+ for a
    sprinkling, spraying or diffusing structure of general utility having a
    nozzle cleaner, flusher, or drainer; subclass 575 for a nozzle with a valve
    controlled feed line having a filter, sifter or screen; and subclass 590
    for a nozzle having an interior filter or guide.


CLS 431/122
TXT Apparatus under subclass 121 including a member supported for movement
    relative to structure from which it is to dislodge undesirable material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 104.03+ for a
    pipe or tube cleaner of general application.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 242+ for a fluid handling system of
    general application having a mechanical cleaning means.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 114+ for a
    nozzle having a solid scraping or clearing member.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 458 for a hand implement for clearing out or
    freeing the discharge opening of a burner tip.


CLS 431/123
TXT Apparatus under subclass 122 wherein the movably mounted member moves
    through a feed flow control or discharge orifice.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 244+ for a fluid handling system in
    which a mechanical cleaning member reciprocates in a passage.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 117+ for a
    nozzle of general utility in which a scraping or clearing member moves
    through the spray opening.


CLS 431/124
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having a special compartment to store
    replacement flints for a pyrophoric igniter.


CLS 431/125
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a burner or igniter
    structure shaped to have the appearance of another product or article
    (e.g., an artificial candle, a gas flameholder in the form of a firelog, a
    candle holder in the shape of a flower, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, subclasses 54+ for a toy made to imitate a firearm and
    which fires an explosive (e.g., cap, etc.) by means of some sort of lock.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 211 for a fluid
    discharge device imitating the appearance of some animate or inanimate
    object.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 392+ for a light support formed to
    resemble a candle or adapted to be enclosed in a cylindrical casing
    resembling a candle.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 15+ for a
    three-dimensional imitation or "treated" natural product.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclass 22 for a spark-producing toy.


CLS 431/126
TXT Apparatus under the class definition with ornamental forms, surface
    ornamentation or an additive or additive means producing flame coloration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for a burning method including feeding a flame modifying additive
    to a flame.

    125,    for a burner or igniter structure shaped to have the appearance of
    another product or article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclass 603 for a solid fuel
    composition with combustion improver, and subclass 641 for a solid fuel
    combustion improving compositions.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 315 for spectroscopic
    apparatus and subclass 417 for flame photometers comprising a flame holder
    having means for adding a flame coloring sample combined with a flame
    observing or analyzing means.

    D23,    Environmental Heating and Cooling; Fluid Handling and Sanitary
    Equipment, subclasses 318+ for the ornamental design of a boiler or oil
    burner; and subclasses 403+ for the design of a gas, oil, or vapor stove or
    log.


CLS 431/127
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a torch having a fuel
    absorbing material and being separately mounted on a structure including an
    igniter or igniter element, the torch being removed from the structure for
    use.


CLS 431/128
TXT Apparatus under subclass 127 wherein the igniter includes an electrical
    spark producer or an electrically heated means.


CLS 431/129
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including structure forming a movable
    section of a chamber enclosing a flame holder or a cap for a flame holder,
    and means by which action of an igniter is correlated with movement of such
    section or cap.


CLS 431/130
TXT Apparatus under subclass 129 with means to operate a valve controlling flow
    of fuel through a feed passage leading to the burner head along with the
    cover and igniter.


CLS 431/131
TXT Apparatus under subclass 130 in which a flow controlling element of the
    valve is interconnected for movement with the cover and igniter by means
    including a movable section of a conduit forming a flame holding section of
    the feed passage.


CLS 431/132
TXT Apparatus under subclass 129 wherein the igniter is an electrical spark
    producing means or an electrical resistance element.


CLS 431/133
TXT Apparatus under subclass 129 in which the movable section drives or is
    driven by a structure dispensing and firing a match, pellet, or percussion
    cap to ignite the flame holder.


CLS 431/134
TXT Apparatus under subclass 129 in which the actuating movement of an igniter
    element or its operator frees a cover or cap held closed against a biasing
    force.


CLS 431/135
TXT Apparatus under subclass 129 wherein the cover or cap is releasably latched
    in position upon being forced closed against bias, the biasing force acting
    to open the cover or cap and to actuate the igniter upon release of the
    latch.


CLS 431/136
TXT Apparatus under subclass 135 in which the igniter includes a flint and an
    abrasive wheel; the wheel being coaxial with the hinge of the cover or cap
    and mounted to rotate with the cover or cap as it moves toward open
    position.


CLS 431/137
TXT Apparatus under subclass 129 wherein upon actuation of the ignition
    mechanism, energy is first stored by suitable means, e.g., a spring, etc.,
    and then suddenly released to quickly actuate an abrasive member.


CLS 431/138
TXT Apparatus under subclass 129 wherein a hinged cover or cap and a rotatable
    abrasive wheel are mounted to move about a common axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136,    for a burner igniter assembly in which the release of a biasing
    force results in the rotation of a cover and abrasive wheel about a common
    axis.


CLS 431/139
TXT Apparatus under subclass 138 wherein an operating member, e.g., finger
    piece, etc., is connected with the cover by interlinking means providing
    for relative movement of the cover and operating member.


CLS 431/140
TXT Apparatus under subclass 139 wherein the interlinking means between the
    operating member and the cover includes a gear driven by a rack, ratchet or
    another gear.


CLS 431/141
TXT Apparatus under subclass 129 wherein the igniter includes an abrasive wheel
    which is rotated in one direction only by a drive between it and the cover
    or cap.


CLS 431/142
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which either a flame holder or an
    igniter is detachably secured to a discrete fuel receptacle by means of a
    frame or casing, extending about or clasping the fuel receptacle.


CLS 431/143
TXT Apparatus under subclass 142 wherein the fuel receptacle includes a means
    for dispensing fuel to a combustion zone, and a means to initiate
    combustion of the fuel is attached to a frame or casing which in turn holds
    the fuel receptacle in a position adjacent the means to initiate combustion.


CLS 431/144
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having distinct structure other than a
    fuel feed termination or flame size control element stopping or preventing
    combustion on, or ignition of, a flame holder (1) by capping or covering
    the flame holder, (2) by cutting off the oxygen from the fuel or flame, (3)
    by cooling the burner head below the combustion temperature of the fuel, or
    (4) by positively withdrawing fuel from contact with the oxidizer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33+,    for a timer, programmer or condition responsive controlled burner
    extinguishing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 131 for a combined candle snuffer and wick
    trimming shears.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 504+ for a closed water
    heater with a fire extinguishing type of safety device.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, appropriate subclass for a residual
    extinguisher of general application or one peculiarly adapted for use with
    or inseparable from a structure other than a fuel burner.


CLS 431/145
TXT Apparatus under subclass 144 using either a liquid or gas to cool, smother,
    or blow out the flame.


CLS 431/146
TXT Apparatus under subclass 144 comprising structure movably or removably
    mounted with respect to a flame holder section of a burner assembly forming
    an enclosure, plug, or cap for enclosing, sealing, or embracing the flame
    holder, which structure renders the burner nonusable when in one position
    and exposes the flame holding section to the atmosphere, e.g., oxidizer,
    when in another position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for a snuffer responsive to tilting of a burner.

    129+,   for a movable flame holder cover with an interrelated igniter.

    251,    for a flame enclosure movably mounted for access.


CLS 431/147
TXT Apparatus under subclass 146 wherein the cover, when in closed position,
    prevents access of air to, and consequent ignition by, a catalyst.


CLS 431/148
TXT Apparatus under subclass 146 wherein the flame holder cover is mounted on a
    support for a lamp chimney surrounding the flame holder or on the chimney
    itself.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for a snuffer actuated in response to tilting of a burner assembly.


CLS 431/149
TXT Apparatus under subclass 146 in which a distinct flame snuffing member is
    enclosed or encased by the flame holder cover structure when the cover
    structure is in its closed position.


CLS 431/150
TXT Apparatus under subclass 146 in which movement of the cover operates an
    additional means cutting off, causing, or adjusting flow of feed fluid to
    the flame holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130+,   for a cover operatively related with a feed control device and with
    an igniter.


CLS 431/151
TXT Apparatus under subclass 146 wherein the burner cover encloses or caps the
    top of a windshield mounted about the burner.


CLS 431/152
TXT Apparatus under subclass 146 wherein the cover is hinged to a fuel
    container or supply.


CLS 431/153
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means correlating the
    operation of a burner assembly feed control or power supply with movement
    of a burner assembly component into or out of a disarranged position.


CLS 431/154
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including (1) a distinct device or
    means for repairing an existing burner, which device usually becomes a part
    of the burner or; (2) a distinct device or means serving to enhance the
    ease or safety of repairing, removing, replacing, or assembling an element
    of a burner; the device or means being a distinct structure added to but
    not essentially a part of the burner and being more than a joint, hinge or
    releasable connector of the burner.


CLS 431/155
TXT Apparatus under subclass 154 in which the means or device is a support on
    which a burner or burner element is slid or rolled into or out of operative
    position.


CLS 431/156
TXT Apparatus under the class definition which by relative rearrangement of its
    parts or by the addition or omission of a part is so changed as to become
    (a) basic subject matter of this class of a different character or having a
    different mode of operation or (b) basic subject matter of another class.


CLS 431/157
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a combustion chamber that
    has at its outlet distinct structure, which in the performance of its
    intended function, establishes or maintains a pressure within the
    combustion space distinctly above or below the pressure of the ambient
    which pressure is critical in the operation of the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  A gravity type exhaust flue is not by itself considered to
    establish a pressure critically distinct from the pressure of the ambient.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for a burner having a control responsive to combustion chamber
    pressure.

    20,     for automatic control of or by an exhaust damper or pump.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 147+ for a device that acts directly on the
    products of combustion of a solid fuel burner after they leave the firebox,
    to affect the velocity of the products.


CLS 431/158
TXT Apparatus under subclass 157 in which the distinct structure comprises
    means forming the sole outlet from a confined combustion space, said means
    being a jet nozzle having a restricted throat; said restriction producing
    the elevated pressure in the combustion space and causing combustion
    products to discharge as a high speed jet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 200.1+ for a specific combustion products
    generator supplying a nozzle where the sole specific disclosure is to
    obtain thrust.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 14 for a means forming a
    hole in the earth by directly applying heat and in which the combustion is
    confined in a chamber having a restricted orifice.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 265.11+ for a
    reaction motor discharge nozzle discharging material from a chamber or
    mixer not specialized by structure to combustion even though the chamber or
    mixer is nominally a "combustion chamber"; and subclasses 127.1+ for a
    similar reaction motor discharge nozzle with cooling structure.


CLS 431/159
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including fuel discharging means
    mounted in a particular feeding relationship to a chamber structure the art
    term for which is "combustion furnace" the fuel discharging means being of
    the type adapted to scatter the fuel in the "furnace".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8+,     for processes of flame shaping, or distributing components in a
    combustion zone.

    115+,   for combustion product return structure.

    158,    for means supplying fuel to a high pressure combustion chamber
    having a restricted outlet, and see the search notes under this subclass.

    350+,   for a flame holder having protective or flame enclosing structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 722+ for a chamber in which combustion
    products are generated for use in a power plant.

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 260+ for feeding gas or oil and solid fuel to
    a furnace and appropriate subclasses for furnace structure with means
    peculiar to the combustion of solid fuel and which may include means
    dispersing fluid fuel into a furnace.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 23+ for a closed circuit
    liquid heating means heated by fluid fuel.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 15+ for a
    furnace having a control that automatically regulates its temperature.

    237,    Heating Systems, appropriate subclass, for a chamber having a
    heating system.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclass for
    a combustion chamber nominally set forth as supporting a nozzle wherein no
    special relationship between a wall of the combustion chamber and the
    nozzle is set forth, nor any details of the combustion chamber.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 171+ and 200+ for metallurgical
    furnaces.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 159+, for a work heating chamber heated by
    combustion products generated in or fed to the work chamber and having a
    work holding or handling feature or structure making the device more than
    mere combustion apparatus.


CLS 431/160
TXT Apparatus under subclass 159 having structure by which a fluid medium
    additional to the furnace feed is directed in heat exchange relationship
    with a portion of the dispersing structure to remove heat therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 6.5 and 6.6+ for a fuel
    disperser cooled by a closed circuit conduit containing a liquid and in
    which the liquid acting as the cooling fluid is not added to the burner
    feed nor dispersed into the combustion zone of the furnace.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 334+ for a fluid handling system of
    general utility with means for heating or cooling the system.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 128+ for a
    sprinkling, spraying or diffusing structure, per se, having means for
    heating or cooling the system or system fluid.

    432,    Heating subclass 174, for a material heating chamber heated by
    combustion therein having protective cooling means for combustion material
    feed structure.


CLS 431/161
TXT Apparatus under subclass 159 including a feed line section particularly
    shaped or located to receive heat from combustion within the furnace, and
    means dispersing the heated feed into the combustion chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for processes of heating feed to a burner or combustion chamber.

    36+,    for automatic control of or by the burner feed supply heating
    structure.

    207+,   for a heated line section feeding a flame holder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, appropriate subclass for boiler
    structure wherein only a portion of the heated fluid from the boiler is
    supplied to a burner or combustion chamber of the boiler.  Where the entire
    heated fluid of the boiler is supplied to the burner or combustion chamber
    of the boiler, classification is in Class 431.

    432,    Heating, subclass 178, for a residual work heating furnace in which
    a combustion feed material is heated by the work chamber wall; and
    subclasses 179+, for a residual furnace having means outside of the chamber
    by which combustion feed material recovers heat from combustion gases that
    have been discharged from the chamber.


CLS 431/162
TXT Apparatus under subclass 161 including two furnace heated feed line
    sections, one section being fed by a fluid of one composition and the other
    section being fed by a fluid of another composition, and means for feeding
    the fluids either mixed or unmixed to the combustion chamber of the furnace.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216+,   for separate heated sections feeding disparate fluids to a flame
    holder.


CLS 431/163
TXT Apparatus under subclass 161 in which steam either generated or superheated
    in the heated section is fed to the fuel disperser to be dispersed into the
    combustion chamber of the furnace.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162,    for distinct furnace heated feed lines feeding disparate fluids to
    a furnace.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 188+, 199+, 296, and 297+ for apparatus
    feeding air and steam to a solid fuel furnace.


CLS 431/164
TXT Apparatus under subclass 161 in which an oxidizer (air) is heated in the
    section and directed into the combustion zone of the furnace through an
    opening in the furnace wall remote from any furnace wall opening which may
    be provided for the fuel disperser or its feed means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162,    for distinct furnace heated feed lines feeding disparate fluids to
    a furnace.


CLS 431/165
TXT Apparatus under subclass 164 including one or more sections for heating an
    oxidizer and means for supplying the heated oxidizer to the combustion zone
    at a number of spaced points along the flow path of burning gases and
    remote from the disperser.


CLS 431/166
TXT Apparatus under subclass 161 in which an oxidizer is heated in the section
    and directed into the combustion chamber through the disperser or through a
    furnace wall opening surrounding the disperser.


CLS 431/167
TXT Apparatus under subclass 166 in which the heated section includes (1) a
    hollow portion of a wall of the combustion chamber of the furnace, or (2) a
    combustion confining wall and another wall spaced from the combustion
    chamber, and the section leads to the disperser to feed the heated oxidizer
    into the combustion chamber through or around the disperser.


CLS 431/168
TXT Apparatus under subclass 159 including a power driven disperser which
    rotates about an axis and discharges fuel by centrifugal force (1) at a
    surface spaced from the furnace wall or (2) at an annular protrusion of the
    furnace wall, which surrounds the disperser and which extends in the
    direction of the axis of the rotation of the disperser.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 214+ for a
    slinger or splasher type fluid disperser, per se.


CLS 431/169
TXT Apparatus under subclass 168 including an annular rim or a group of
    deflectors which extends along the spaced surface or protrusion and is
    located adjacent the surface or protrusion to intercept projected fuel.


CLS 431/170
TXT Apparatus under subclass 159 including a mass of porous or spaced
    refractory material in the furnace and into which the disperser discharges
    fuel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for a process of combustion in a porous body or bed.

    326+,   for a porous, particulate or sievelike flame holder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 4+ for a heat exchanger of the
    regenerative type.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclasses 122, 123, 130, 140, 143, 144,
    146, and 148, for distillation apparatus using a regenerative type heating
    device.

    432,    Heating, subclass 197, for a work chamber in which combustion
    products heat work by contact and having particulate or liquid heat
    transfer medium in the chamber; and subclasses 214+, for a gas heating
    structure in which a heat storage mass is charged with heat for subsequent
    use.


CLS 431/171
TXT Apparatus under subclass 159 including (1) structure within the combustion
    chamber of the furnace distinct from the furnace walls and fuel discharge
    means or (2) a distinct protrusion of the furnace wall, directing the flow
    of the combustion materials.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    for recirculation of gases about a mixing or combustion chamber
    wall or baffle.

    168,    for a rotary disperser projecting fuel at a surrounding flange
    surface in a furnace.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 322+ for a furnace baffle or heat retainer.


CLS 431/172
TXT Apparatus under subclass 171 including structure in the combustion chamber
    arranged to direct burning fuel from one or more dispersers against all of
    the side walls of the chamber.


CLS 431/173
TXT Apparatus under subclass 159 including means for introducing fuel,
    oxidizer, or a mixture of the two into a circular combustion chamber
    substantially tangentially to the wall of the chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for processes of whirling the feed in a combustion zone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 263+ for furnaces wherein fine fuel is burned
    in suspension, e.g., cyclone combustion, etc.


CLS 431/174
TXT Apparatus under subclass 159 including means to disperse spaced individual
    streams of fuel into the furnace.


CLS 431/175
TXT Apparatus under subclass 174 wherein one fuel stream is discharged into the
    combustion chamber in a linear path which intersects the linear path of
    another fuel stream.


CLS 431/176
TXT Apparatus under subclass 175 including (1) two or more parallel rows of
    fuel dispersers facing each other with each discharge axis of the
    dispersers of one row intersecting the discharge axis of an opposing
    disperser, or; (2) a plurality of fuel dispersers arranged in a circular
    pattern with the axis of discharge of each disperser being in a common
    plane.


CLS 431/177
TXT Apparatus under subclass 174 wherein the fuel dispersers are positioned in
    a ring shaped pattern with (1) their discharge terminus directed at the
    surrounding side walls of the furnace, or (2) the dispersers being located
    immediately adjacent the side walls of the combustion chamber to form a
    layer of flame at the side walls.


CLS 431/178
TXT Apparatus under subclass 174 including a row of fuel dispersing means
    having parallel discharge axes; the discharge terminus of each disperser
    means being at an opening in the combustion chamber wall or forming an
    opening in the combustion chamber wall.


CLS 431/179
TXT Apparatus under subclass 178 including two rows of fuel dispersers which
    are close to each other and substantially parallel.


CLS 431/180
TXT Apparatus under subclass 174 including a row of fuel dispersers extending
    from one wall section of the combustion chamber of the furnace through the
    chamber to another wall section of the chamber.


CLS 431/181
TXT Apparatus under subclass 159 including structure for separately supplying
    fuel and another fluid to a single furnace wall opening; said fluids mixing
    either in the wall opening or after the two fluids are discharged into the
    furnace.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 418+ for
    sprinkling, spraying or diffusing structure, per se, with combining of
    separately supplied fluid streams at or beyond the terminal element.


CLS 431/182
TXT Apparatus under subclass 181 including an air conduit surrounding a fuel
    disperser and having means to direct its discharge to form spinning stream
    of air surrounding the dispersed fuel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing subclasses 403+ for a
    fluid discharger of general utility whirling one fluid prior to or at the
    point of addition of a second fluid.


CLS 431/183
TXT Apparatus under subclass 182 wherein the means for spinning the air
    includes a ring of spaced fins coaxial with the disperser and which remain
    stationary while directing the air.


CLS 431/184
TXT Apparatus under subclass 183 wherein the fins are pivotally mounted so that
    the angle at which they direct air may be changed, if desired.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 402.5 for
    disperser structure, per se, including combining of separately supplied
    fluids with adjustable whirling means.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 313+ for an air register having pivoted
    slats.


CLS 431/185
TXT Apparatus under subclass 181 including means at the wall directing the flow
    of fuel, oxidizer, or a mixture of the two to produce a spinning discharge
    into the furnace.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 399+ for
    disperser structure, per se, including combining of separately supplied
    fluids with whirling of fluid.


CLS 431/186
TXT Apparatus under subclass 181 including (1) means for mounting the fuel
    disperser so that its discharge terminus may be shifted to various
    positions relative to the furnace opening, or (2) means at the discharge
    terminus of the fuel disperser to vary either the fuel discharge pattern or
    the direction of the fuel discharged.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189,    for a disperser of a single feed mounted for movement relative to a
    furnace wall opening.


CLS 431/187
TXT Apparatus under subclass 181 in which the fuel and the other fluid are
    discharged in coaxial streams into the furnace wall opening or combustion
    chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 423+ for the
    combining of separately supplied fluids at or beyond a disperser outlet
    with concurrent or concentric flow means.


CLS 431/188
TXT Apparatus under subclass 187 wherein the fluid discharged coaxially with
    the fuel is air supplied by a chamber surrounding the fuel disperser at the
    furnace wall opening and having an adjustable control means to regulate the
    supply of air into the chamber.


CLS 431/189
TXT Apparatus under subclass 159 including means for mounting the fuel
    disperser so that it may be moved to various positions relative to the
    furnace wall opening and for supporting it in the various positions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186,    for plural feed means extending to a common wall opening of a
    furnace including a shiftably mounted disperser or adjustably positioned
    disperser terminal element.


CLS 431/190
TXT Apparatus under subclass 159 including a means distinct from the fuel
    disperser assembly for supplying air, water, or steam to the combustion
    chamber of the furnace.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for a process of adding an oxidizer to a region of incomplete
    combustion.

    162,    for distinct heated sections feeding disparate fluids to a furnace.

    164+,   for a heated line feeding air to a furnace through an opening
    spaced from a fuel disperser opening.

    351,    for means feeding air at axially spaced points along combustion
    confining structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 188+, 199+, 214, 270, 288, 296, and 297+ for
    feeding air, water, or steam to a solid fuel furnace.


CLS 431/191
TXT Apparatus under the class definition wherein a tube or hood distinct from
    the burner is provided to distribute fuel between a first burner and (1) a
    second burner, or (2) an externally accessible region; the fuel mixing with
    air within the tube or hood to form a combustible charge, which upon being
    ignited by the second burner or at said region, burns in the form of a
    flash passing through the tube to ignite the first burner.


CLS 431/192
TXT Apparatus under subclass 191 in which the fuel that burns in the flash
    conduit is supplied to the conduit at a point removed from the region at
    which the conducted flame is discharged from the conduit against the burner
    being ignited.


CLS 431/193
TXT Apparatus under subclass 191 in which the fuel that burns in the flash
    conduit is supplied to the conduit by the ignited burner through an orifice
    differing from any other orifices of the burner.


CLS 431/194
TXT Apparatus under subclass 193 in which the orifice of the burner that feeds
    the flash conduit is formed in a nipple that serves as a connector
    supporting an end of the flash conduit.


CLS 431/195
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a combustion chamber
    between two radially spaced coaxial, coextensive tubes having an outlet at
    its top and a fuel distributor at its bottom, one tube having multiple
    perforations through which air is admitted to the chamber.


CLS 431/196
TXT Apparatus under subclass 195 having associated means for aiding in putting
    the apparatus into operation; the means being (1) a pilot burner, i.e., a
    separately fed adjunctive burner, (2) structure additional to the fuel
    distributor for supplying a distinct starting charge of combustible
    material, or (3) an electrical heater or igniter.


CLS 431/197
TXT Apparatus under subclass 195 including a means interconnecting the
    combustion chamber and fuel distributor and providing for their relative
    movement between a normal operating position and a position exposing the
    interior of the distributor.


CLS 431/198
TXT Apparatus under subclass 195 in which the distributor comprises a chamber
    coextensive with and adjacent the end of the combustion annulus; the
    chamber distributing fuel into the annulus through spaced ports or through
    an elongated circumferentially extending restricted throat passage.


CLS 431/199
TXT Apparatus under subclass 195 including a line section feeding fuel to the
    distributor and which section is heated by combustion of fuel within the
    annulus.


CLS 431/200
TXT Apparatus under subclass 195 including a second combustion chamber formed
    by two radially spaced coaxial, coextensive tubes, one tube being
    perforated; the tubes forming one combustion chamber being radially spaced
    from the tubes forming the other combustion chamber to form a common
    combustion air supply passage between the two chambers.


CLS 431/201
TXT Apparatus under subclass 195 with an encircling baffle or shield defining a
    chamber or passage by which air is directed to the perforations in the tube.


CLS 431/202
TXT Apparatus under the class definition (1) with a static constructional
    installation, or (2) with a particular geographic feature, or (3) supported
    or carried by a means performing an operation external of the subject
    matter of this class; wherein there is included no more of the
    installation, feature or means than is necessary to bring out its
    relationship to the apparatus of Class 431.


CLS 431/203
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a reservoir holding a
    limited fuel charge with means on the reservoir serving to support and
    supply fuel to a flame holder, and means whereby the fuel in the reservoir
    is heated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36+,    for automatic control of or by the temperature, pressure or liquid
    level of all heated supply line or tank.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 48.1+ for a device of general utility
    dispensing vapor from a liquefied gas storage container.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 135+ for a
    sprinkling or spraying device not specialized to combustion having means
    for heating the system or system fluid.


CLS 431/204
TXT Apparatus under subclass 203 including means wherein fuel from the
    reservoir is discharged as a high velocity stream across a flame area of an
    associated wick type burner.


CLS 431/205
TXT Apparatus under subclass 203 including a fuel charge receiving basin in
    which a fuel charge is burned to exhaustion in raising the temperature of
    the fuel in the reservoir to a condition for operation of the flame holder.


CLS 431/206
TXT Apparatus under subclass 203 including a distinct heat conductive member
    that carries heat from the combustion zone to the tank or its contents.


CLS 431/207
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a line feeding fluid to a
    flame holder and having (1) a means other than the flame at the flame
    holder for heating a section of the line, or (2) an arranged by which the
    fed flame holder heats a distinct section of the line by which it is fed or
    feed material while it is within the feed line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for a process of heating the burner feed.

    36+,    for automatic control of or by the burner feed supply heating
    structure.

    103+,   for a heated feed line section feeding an incandescent mantle.

    161+,   for a feed line section for a furnace heated by the furnace.

    199,    for a fuel distributor underlying a combustion annulus having air
    feeding perforations the feed line supplying the distributor being heated
    by the combustion annulus.

    203+,   for a flame holder mounted on a heated single charge fuel tank
    supplying fuel to the flame holder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclasses 89+ for a gas generator,
    per se, or for a gas generator with a burner fed by such generator combined
    with means for purifying, fixing or storing an unburned portion of the
    generated gas.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 10, for a steam producer,
    per se, peculiarly adapted for feeding a fluid fuel burner.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 334+ for a fluid distribution system not
    specialized to combustion having means for heating or cooling the system or
    the system fluid.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclasses 104+ for mineral oil
    vaporizing apparatus.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 128+ for a
    spray device not specialized to combustion having heating or cooling means
    for the device or the fluid handled by the device.


CLS 431/208
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 in which a device that changes electrical
    energy to heat energy is a heat source for the feed line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclass 103 for apparatus
    generating gas from oil which is heated by an electrical heater and which
    does not feed an immediately associated fuel discharger specialized to
    combustion.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 341 for a fluid handling system of general
    utility in which the fluid is heated by an electric heating element.

    392,    Electric Resistance Heating Devices, subclasses 386+ for electrical
    apparatus of general application for vaporizing a liquid and subclasses
    441+ for heating a fluid.


CLS 431/209
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 including means wherein the section and heat
    source are structurally connected to be relatively movable, e.g., to vary
    the thermal effect of the heat source on the section, or to position the
    heat source away from the heated section.


CLS 431/210
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 having structure by which fluids of different
    compositions are fed to a common point in the heat absorbing section,
    either simultaneously or at different times.


CLS 431/211
TXT Apparatus under subclass 210 including means to heat one of the fluids
    prior to mixing it with another fluid at the common point.


CLS 431/212
TXT Apparatus under subclass 211 including means to heat the other unmixed
    fluid prior to feeding it to the feed line at the common point.


CLS 431/213
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 including means for discharging heated air
    from the section downwardly against the surface of a body or film of liquid
    fuel.


CLS 431/214
TXT Apparatus under subclass 213 in which the heated air from the section is
    discharged downwardly at a film of liquid fuel flowing down a surface
    within the combustion zone.


CLS 431/215
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 including means by which the heated line
    section receives its heat at a region remote from the combustion area from
    combustion products flowing through a conduit extending from the immediate
    combustion area and directing the products to the heated section.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    432,    Heating, subclasses 179+, for a residual material heating furnace
    in which fuel is burned and in which the chamber exhaust heats combustion
    material being fed to the chamber.


CLS 431/216
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 including two heated feed line sections, one
    supplying a fluid of one composition and the other supplying a fluid of a
    different composition either directly or through a mixer to a common
    combustion zone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162,    for distinct heated feed line sections feeding disparate fluids to
    a furnace.


CLS 431/217
TXT Apparatus under subclass 216 in which the two fluids are fed to the
    combustion zone through a device in which they are intermingled.


CLS 431/218
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 including an open topped, liquid tight,
    receptacle located in proximity to a feed line and in which liquid fuel is
    burned to heat the feed line, the feed line delivering the feed either to
    the combustion zone of the receptacle or to an additional flame holder.


CLS 431/219
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 wherein water is heated in the section above
    its temperature of vaporization and including means to deliver the heated
    water (steam) from the heated section to the combustion zone of the
    receptacle or into the fuel in the receptacle.


CLS 431/220
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 including a line feeding heated fuel to a
    flame holder and another line for feeding fuel to the fuel receptacle.


CLS 431/221
TXT Apparatus under subclass 220 in which the basin fuel feed line and flame
    holder fuel feed line are connected to a common main fuel line and the
    basin fuel feed line includes a valve to control the flow of fuel to the
    basin independently of the flow to the flame holder.


CLS 431/222
TXT Apparatus under subclass 218 in which the receptacle is positioned to
    receive liquid drip or drainage from the discharge end of the fuel line
    feed by the heated section.


CLS 431/223
TXT Apparatus under subclass 222 with a deflector adjacent the discharge
    terminus of the fuel line and mounted to be moved into and out of a
    position directing the fuel discharged into the receptacle.


CLS 431/224
TXT Apparatus under subclass 222 in which the heated feed line section is a
    horizontally extending hollow wall section of the receptacle.


CLS 431/225
TXT Apparatus under subclass 222 including a valve for controlling the flow of
    fuel through the heated section and the basin being mounted on the valve
    body.


CLS 431/226
TXT Apparatus under subclass 222 in which the heat absorbing section of the
    fuel line is a vertically extending cone or a drum shaped structure
    positioned above the terminus of the fuel line and in which the receptacle
    is subjacent the terminus.


CLS 431/227
TXT Apparatus under subclass 222 wherein the heated fuel line section extends
    vertically through the fuel basin.


CLS 431/228
TXT Apparatus under subclass 227 in which the fuel line extends vertically
    through the basin and discharges over surrounding means forming one or more
    passages descending to a flame holder or discharge terminus immediately
    above the basin.


CLS 431/229
TXT Apparatus under subclass 227 in which the receptacle is relatively long in
    one dimension and parallels an overlying horizontally extending conduit
    that forms the heat absorbing section of the fuel line.


CLS 431/230
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 including a first liquid fuel burner having a
    capillary mass conveying liquid fuel from a source to its heated feed line
    section, and a second distinct burner for heating the feed line section of
    the first burner.


CLS 431/231
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 including a liquid supply container, a line
    feeding such liquid to a first burner, a second burner heating the feed
    line of the first burner, and a line by which gas from the space above the
    liquid in the container is supplied to the second burner.


CLS 431/232
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 in which a feed line section heated by the fed
    flame holder is also heated by a second flame holder; e.g., the initial
    vapor for an oil vapor burner is generated by a gas burner and the
    continuing vapor by the oil vapor burner.


CLS 431/233
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 in which a portion of the material that has
    been heated in the heat absorbing line is fed to a burner heating the line
    and another portion is fed a means discharging externally or to a separate
    burner.


CLS 431/234
TXT Apparatus under subclass 233 including a group of similar burners (e.g.,
    cooking stove burners etc.), all of which are fed by the heated feed line
    section and one of which heats the heated section.


CLS 431/235
TXT Apparatus under subclass 233 in which the heated line feeds gas produced or
    generated therein to a line heating burner and to a line supplying a
    heating or illuminating gas distribution system.


CLS 431/236
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 in which the heat absorbing section is heated
    by a burner not fed by the heated section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for an incandescent mantle feed line heated by a discrete flame
    holder.

    218+,   for a fuel basin heating the feed line section of a disparate flame
    holder.

    232,    for a feed line section heated by distinct flame holders, one fed
    by the section.


CLS 431/237
TXT Apparatus under subclass 236 including a line feeding the heat absorbing
    section and a branch line connected ahead of the heated section supplying
    the burner which heats the section.


CLS 431/238
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 including means whereby unheated fuel is
    supplied either (1) directly to the flame holder or (2) to the line
    delivering feed to the flame holder downstream of the heated section.


CLS 431/239
TXT Apparatus under subclass 238 in which feed from the heated section of the
    feed line is discharged as a high velocity stream through (1) a suction
    device to pick up unheated fuel, or (2) an atomizing device to which the
    unheated fuel is supplied for atomization.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 138 for a fluid
    sprinkling or spraying device of general application with heating means for
    the sprayed fluid and in which two fluids are discharged through a single
    terminal outlet, one fluid aspirating the other.


CLS 431/240
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 in which the heat absorbing section has within
    it and in the flow path of the fuel (1) means holding back or separating
    any entrained solids from the fuel; or (2) means spreading out the fuel,
    guiding it or transmitting heat to it; or (3) wick means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230,    for an auxiliary burner which heats a wick within a heated feed
    line section for another burner.


CLS 431/241
TXT Apparatus under subclass 240 including a fuel tank and wick means for
    lifting liquid fuel from the tank to the heated section by capillary action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230,    for a liquid fuel burner having a wick in its feed line and heated
    by an auxiliary burner.


CLS 431/242
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 in which a flame area through which the heated
    section of the feed line passes is defined by a casing forming part of a
    flame holder assembly and spaced from the heated section.


CLS 431/243
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 in which the heat absorbing section of the
    feed line is shaped to form, is within, or is heat conductively arranged
    along, wall structure of an enclosure that directs or confines the flame.


CLS 431/244
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 including a burner head having plural distinct
    orifice or sets of orifices that receive the feed from the heated section
    of the fuel line; one of the distinct burner orifices or sets of orifices
    being arranged to heat the fuel line and another being otherwise directed.


CLS 431/245
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 including structure by which unheated oxidizer
    is mixed with the feed from the heated line section and the mixture passes
    through a line or manifold to a terminus of the flame holder discharging to
    the combustion zone heating the feed line.


CLS 431/246
TXT Apparatus under subclass 245 wherein the heated section is located within a
    wall of the flame holder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 132.5 for a
    sprayer of general utility in which a heat exchange fluid in the terminal
    element is, or is added to the spray fluid.


CLS 431/247
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 in which the feed line is a conduit within or
    passing through the flame area fed by the conduit.


CLS 431/248
TXT Apparatus under subclass 247 with a means directing the flow of flame or
    products of combustion from the burner to or around the heated feed line
    section.


CLS 431/249
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a chamber, chimney, or
    shield forming a flame enclosing zone and having distinct means additional
    to the normal combustion material supply or exhaust structure by which
    passage to or from the zone may be had, or by which the interior of the
    zone may be exposed; e.g., an ignition or cleaning port, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129+,   for a movable burner head cover and inter-related igniter.

    146+,   for a movably or removably mounted burner cover.

    153,    for the correlation of burner fuel or power supply with component
    movements (e.g., door opening, etc.) in a disabling and enabling sequence.

    186,    for a furnace having a fuel and air disperser shiftably mounted in
    a wall opening of a furnace.

    189,    for a fuel disperser adjustably mounted for movement relative to a
    furnace wall opening.

    191+,   for a burner ignited by a flash flame through a conduit.

    197,    for a preforated combustion annulus mounted for access to an
    underlying annular fuel distributor.


CLS 431/250
TXT Apparatus under subclass 249 including a flame enclosure and a match
    scratcher located within the enclosure adjacent the access or exposure
    means for striking a match to light the flame holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270,    for a cap, match or pellet igniting charge holding and firing
    structure within a flame enclosure that has an externally accessible charge
    firing operator.


CLS 431/251
TXT Apparatus under subclass 249 including means wherein the combustion zone
    enclosing means can be moved relative to the remainder of the apparatus to
    give access to the enclosed zone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    197,    for a combustion annulus having air feeding perforations movably
    mounted for access to an underlying fuel distributor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 174+ for a tubular lantern with a globe
    operator.


CLS 431/252
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having an appurtenance associated with
    a flame holder such that when air is drawn or blown through the
    appurtenance by a device or person at intervals, as desired, the flame held
    by the holder will be extended or deflected by the moving air.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8+,     for a process of flame shaping.

    204,    for a fuel jet from a heated tank traversing a wick burner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing subclasses 290+ for a
    sprinkling or spraying structure of general utility with a supplemental gas
    shaping or shielding jet; and subclasses 398+ for a sprinkling or spraying
    structure not specialized by structure to combustion with combining of
    separately supplied fluid streams.


CLS 431/253
TXT A combustion or combustion starting device as defined in the class
    definition (1) combined with an additional feature or structure having a
    function other than combustion or combustion starting; or (2) combined with
    additional structure serving to perfect the operation of the combustion
    device or combustion starting device.

    (1)     Note.  The features and structures mentioned in (1) Note of the
    class definition as part of a fuel discharger device specializing it to
    this class are not regarded as additional features or structures for
    classification in this "combined" subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The combined features or structures function other than as a
    support, handle or as a portion of a combustion fluid supply structure.
    For example, search this class subclass 295 for a holder for plural
    candles; 296 for a hook clamp or spike supported candle holder; subclasses
    320+ for a wick type burner having a liquid fuel tank; subclass 343 for a
    flame holder with a supporting bracket, leg, hook, strap, or clip, subclass
    344 for a flame holder-fuel tank assembly; and subclass 345 for a flame
    holder having an attached handle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 85+ for a tobacco
    container with an igniter for said content.


CLS 431/254
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means conjointly activating a
    burner feed means and a structure by which mechanical or electrical energy
    is utilized to create a fuel ignition in the combustion zone of the fed
    burner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for the automatic control of the sequence of operation of a feed
    heater and feed flow controller or igniter.

    67,     for igniter heat up and fuel feed sequence controlled by a timer or
    retarder.

    72+,    for a condition responsive control of an igniting and fuel feeding
    sequence.

    130+,   for correlated action of an igniter, fuel feed valve and burner
    cover.


CLS 431/255
TXT Apparatus under subclass 254 including, as a part of a unitary burner
    assembly, structure which creates the electrical energy for the igniter
    from some other form of energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 268 for an igniter of the resistive
    element type with a source of power or current.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 258+ for
    an electrical igniter having an electromechanical generator.


CLS 431/256
TXT Apparatus under subclass 254 in which a portion of a valve controlling
    burner feed, or the mechanical means by which the valve is activated, acts
    to close an electrical circuit in which the igniter is connected.


CLS 431/257
TXT Apparatus under subclass 256 wherein an element or operator means of the
    valve acts to move one electrode relative to another electrode of the
    igniter so that the electrodes come into brushing contact or break with
    each other to create a spark.


CLS 431/258
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which an electrical heating means,
    e.g., resistance coil, spark, etc., raises a fuel oxidizer mixture to
    ignition temperature or supplies heat to a combustion area of a burner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for an automatically controlled electrical feed preheater and
    igniter.

    128,    for a common support for an electrical igniter and a hand torch.

    196,    for an electric combustion starter for a burner having a fuel
    distributor under-lying a combustion annulus having air feeding
    perforations.

    208,    for an electricity heated burner feed line section.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    89,     Ordnance, subclasses 28.05+ for an electrical firing device for
    ordnance.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 202.5+ for a fuse, primer or
    igniter utilizing electrical energy for firing an ammunition or explosive
    device and subclass 322 for a blasting charge igniter fired by an electric
    current.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 260+ for a resistive element type
    electrical igniter, per se.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 143+ for an article dispenser having
    article treating means including an electrical igniter.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, appropriate
    subclasses under subclass 247 for an electrical igniting system.


CLS 431/259
TXT Apparatus under subclass 258 including an electrical heater which heats the
    feed material and a spaced electrical means for igniting the heated
    material.


CLS 431/260
TXT Apparatus under subclass 258 including an electrical means positioned
    adjacent structure collecting or holding a pool or film of liquid fuel,
    said electrical means vaporizing a portion of the fuel from the structure
    and igniting it.


CLS 431/261
TXT Apparatus under subclass 260 in which the structure is a wick or a porous
    solid capable of holding fuel by capillary action in the vicinity of the
    electrical means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128,    for a commonly supported electrical igniter and removable hand
    manipulable torch.


CLS 431/262
TXT Apparatus under subclass 261 wherein the igniter is an electrical resistor
    which reaches a temperature, when energized, which is sufficient to ignite
    the fuel.


CLS 431/263
TXT Apparatus under subclass 258 having means forming an auxiliary combustion
    chamber or distinct zone with an electrical igniter located in proximity to
    the main flame zone of the burner to ignite the fuel forming the main flame
    but located to the side of or in a by-pass of the direct blast or the main
    flame or main flame feed stream.


CLS 431/264
TXT Apparatus under subclass 258 including an electrode of a spark gap device
    positioned adjacent a fuel discharge nozzle or in front of it to ignite the
    discharged fuel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, a subclasses 118+ for a spark
    device, per se.


CLS 431/265
TXT Apparatus under subclass 264 including an air blast tube surrounding the
    fuel discharge nozzle, and delivering air to the discharged fuel at the
    nozzle, and having structure supporting the electrode within the air blast
    tube.


CLS 431/266
TXT Apparatus under subclass 264 in which the fuel discharge nozzle serves as
    an electrode or forms a necessary link conducting electricity to an
    immediately associated electrode of the spark gap device.


CLS 431/267
TXT Apparatus under the class definition by which igniting heat is produced by
    means converting mechanical energy into heat energy, by a catalyst, or by
    means mixing chemicals that react at low temperature and become heated to
    ignition temperature by released heat of reaction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclasses 507+ for a match, per se.

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 185 for a smoking device combined with an
    igniter; subclass 234 for an igniter or match scratcher combined with a
    tobacco ash receiver; and subclass 249 for a cigar end cutter combined with
    an igniter or match scratcher.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, appropriate subclass
    for an explosive or thermic composition or charge, e.g., match composition,
    etc.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 85+ for a tobacco
    container with an igniter for said content.


CLS 431/268
TXT Apparatus under subclass 267 in which the combustion initiating temperature
    is produced by the flow of an air and fuel mixture across a catalytic
    member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147,    for a burner having a catalytic flame holder or igniter and an
    extinguishing cover for stopping combustion.

    326+,   for a porous, capillary or particulate flame holder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 122, 139+, 171, 177+, 190, and 211
    for apparatus for carrying out a chemical reaction in which a catalyst is
    used.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, for a composition comprising a catalyst, per se.


CLS 431/269
TXT Apparatus under subclass 267 comprising structure by which a held charge of
    combustible mixture that bursts into flame when subjected to friction or
    percussion is fired by being moved or struck, said charge being in the form
    of a cap, match, or pellet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87,     for a timer controlling a combustion initiating means, e.g., match
    striker etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, subclasses 54+ for a device made to imitate a firearm and
    which fires an explosive, e.g., a cap, etc., by means of some sort of
    hammer.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclass 204 and 205 for an igniting
    device specialized to the igniting of an explosive device of Class 102;
    subclass 322 for a blasting cap; and appropriate subclass for a cartridge
    or cap type explosive charge or device, per se, with or without an
    electrical heater, that may be used as an igniter.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 98+ for a match safe
    wherein a match is ignited by withdrawal from the safe.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 137+ for a dispenser having a match
    striker, particularly subclass 139 for a device in which the manual removal
    of a match causes it to be struck.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 86 for a cabinet with a
    dispensing magazine for matches and having means for igniting the dispensed
    match.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 398+ for a cap exploding toy
    other than one which simulates a firearm.


CLS 431/270
TXT Apparatus under subclass 269 in which mechanical energy to fire a charge
    positioned within a flame enclosure is supplied by an energy transmitting
    structure, said structure being released or activated by a means accessible
    from without the enclosure.


CLS 431/271
TXT Apparatus under subclass 269 containing or supporting a plurality of
    charges and having means dispensing or holding separate one charge from the
    other charges and said means including structure providing for the firing
    of the separated charge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    for a solid ignition charge dispenser and striker correlated with
    the motion of a flame holder cover.


CLS 431/272
TXT Apparatus under subclass 271 including means by which charges linearly
    spaced along a strip or joined end to end by interconnectors between each
    two charges are successively advanced to the firing structure.


CLS 431/273
TXT Apparatus under subclass 267 in which an element and a member having an
    abrasive surface are rubbed together to project particles heated to
    igniting temperature by friction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, subclass 416 for rare earth metal
    base alloys which are useful for producing sparks, i.e., so-called "flints".

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 22+ for a spark-producing toy.


CLS 431/274
TXT Apparatus under subclass 273 including a mounting structure for the
    element, a mounting structure for the abrasive surface and a slidable or
    pivotal means distinct from the mounting structure to move the abrasive
    surface relative to the element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129+,   for a burner head cover operatively interrelated with an igniter,
    most of which are of the mechanically operated abrasive type.


CLS 431/275
TXT Apparatus under subclass 274 wherein energy is stored in the means for
    moving the abrasive member, e.g., a spring etc, and a means is included to
    suddenly release the stored energy to cause the abrasive member to move
    over the element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136,    for a burner in which the release of a latch frees a cover to
    spring open and rotate an abrasive wheel; and subclass 137 for the quick
    activation of an abrasive member by release of stored energy correlated
    with burner cover motion.


CLS 431/276
TXT Apparatus under subclass 273 in which the element, e.g., flint, is mounted
    on or within a holding device, the apparatus having structure by which the
    element is translated or rotated relative to the holding device.


CLS 431/277
TXT Apparatus under subclass 273 wherein both the element and the abrasive
    member are supported by a fuel tank which supplies fuel to a burner being
    lighted by the projected particles from the element.


CLS 431/278
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including two flame holding structures
    or sections physically related to each other, one of said structures or
    sections being operable independently of the other because of, (1)
    independent fuel supplies, or (2) a distinct separately actuatable
    controller or valve passage regulating the discharge to one of the
    structures or sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191+,   for one burner igniting another by flash of flame through a conduit.

    220,    for burner assembly having a feed line for one flame holder heated
    by a separately supplied pot type burner.

    236+,   for a feed line for one burner heated by an auxiliary burner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 599+ for a fluid handling system
    dividing a flow stream into parallel paths with recombining (e.g., pilot
    and main flame paths feeding a burner etc.).

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 444+ for a
    fluid discharge system of broader application having valving means
    controlling flow to selective terminal outlets.


CLS 431/279
TXT Apparatus under subclass 278 wherein one flame holding structure has a
    movable connector upon which it may be rotated, pivoted or slid relative to
    another flame holding structure, e.g., into or out of igniting relationship
    etc.


CLS 431/280
TXT Apparatus under subclass 278 in which the feed to the distinct flame
    holding sections is under the control of a single valve element having one
    or more grooves or passages that coacts with a valve seat to control the
    feed to one of the flame holder sections independently of that to another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 625+ for an arrangement in which a
    multiway valve unit controls flow in a fluid handling system of more
    general application.


CLS 431/281
TXT Apparatus under subclass 278 having separate controllers for two flame
    holding sections that are interconnected by structure providing common or
    interlocked operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for the control or actuation of plural burners in which the sensor
    of one burner controls another; and subclass 60+ for the sequential
    operation of plural burners by a time, program or condition responsive
    actuator.


CLS 431/282
TXT Apparatus under subclass 278 in which one of the flame holders is a wick
    that has an adjusting structure by which it may be independently controlled.


CLS 431/283
TXT Apparatus under subclass 278 in which one of a plurality of flame holding
    sections is positioned to be ignited by a second section and to ignite a
    third section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for a control system in which a sensor of a first burner controls a
    second burner and a sensor of the second burner controls a third burner; and

    192,    for a flash igniting conduit having a feed means for the conduit
    spaced from the ignited burner.


CLS 431/284
TXT Apparatus under subclass 278 wherein the fuel feeder discharges fuel at its
    terminus in a pattern coaxial of or surrounding the discharge terminus of
    the other fuel feed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 448+ for a
    sprinkling or spraying device not specialized to combustion having
    selectively usable or variable diverse terminal elements one of which
    discharges centrally of another.


CLS 431/285
TXT Apparatus under subclass 278 forming a burner head assembly that has as a
    part thereof means forming an enclosed or shielded combustion space fed by
    both sections.


CLS 431/286
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a distinct means providing
    an exposed combustible mixture in a zone extending from one distinct flame
    holding area of a burner head or section to another distinct burner head or
    section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191+,   for a burner ignited by a flash flame through a conduit; and

    283,    for three separately supplied or controlled burners mounted in
    cross igniting relationship.


CLS 431/287
TXT Apparatus under the class definition with means additional to the normal
    combustion structure (1) for preparing a burner for lighting or (2) for
    interaction with a source of igniting temperature in the initiation of
    combustion of fuel in a burner being put into operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196,    for means supplying a priming charge to a combustion annulus.


CLS 431/288
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including (1) a unit comprising a wick
    or other capillary fuel conveying structure on which fuel burns inbedded in
    a meltable solid fuel, e.g., wax etc, which is melted by the heat of the
    burner flame and is fed to the flame by the wick; or (2) structure
    peculiarly adapted for use with such a unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     for an extinguishing device controlled by means responsive to a
    change in candle length or fuel quantity.

    125,    for a simulation which may be a candle simulating another article,
    or a liquid fuel burner simulating a candle.

    126,    for a combustion device, e.g., candle etc, with added ornamentation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclass 275 for a candle
    composition.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclass for a process of molding a candle.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 190+ for an electric lamp simulating a
    candle.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 117+ for apparatus for casting candles.


CLS 431/289
TXT Apparatus under subclass 288 including (1) a candle or taper combined with
    structure additional to the wick and fuel of the candle or taper, or (2) a
    device peculiarly adapted for use with a candle or taper.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 511+ for a support of general utility for
    staff type objects.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 161+ for a lantern using a candle, and
    subclass 447 for a shade or bowl supported on a candle.


CLS 431/290
TXT Apparatus under subclass 289 including structural means provided to (1)
    maintain the flame of the burning candle or taper at a constant elevation,
    or (2) adjust the height of the burning portion of the wick to a desired
    position in a candle support.


CLS 431/291
TXT Apparatus under subclass 289 including a surrounding casing or wall
    extending the full length of the solid fuel body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290,    for a candle having a height adjusting or flame level maintaining
    device, e.g., a candle enclosing sleeve within which the candle is advanced
    as the fuel body is consumed etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 161+ for a lantern having a chimney and in
    which the light source is usually a candle.


CLS 431/292
TXT Apparatus under subclass 289 in which the additional device includes
    structure particularly adapted to act upon, receive or direct the flow of
    candle material liquefied by the heat of the flame.


CLS 431/293
TXT Apparatus under subclass 292 including a device for encircling the flame
    end of the candle and holding melted material adjacent the flame zone; the
    device being supported by the candle material adjacent the flame and
    sliding down along the candle as the supporting candle material is consumed
    by the flame.


CLS 431/294
TXT Apparatus under subclass 292 comprising a melt receiving receptacle
    carrying a candle grasping or socket means; the grasping or socket means
    having drainage structure or being of spaced elements providing for escape
    or drainage of the melt to the receptacle.


CLS 431/295
TXT Apparatus under subclass 289 wherein the device is a holder adapted to
    support a plurality of candles or candle flame sections erect and spaced
    apart.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 512+ for a support of general utility for
    plural staff type objects.


CLS 431/296
TXT Apparatus under subclass 289 including a candle holder and a hook, clamp,
    or spike for securing it to an external structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, subclass 104 for a candlestick provided with a
    spike supported holder, combined with a tool such as a knife blade, fuse
    capper, etc.


CLS 431/297
TXT Apparatus under subclass 289 comprising a unitary structure having a
    portion for engaging and retaining a candle and another portion for
    engagement and retention by a candlestick socket.


CLS 431/298
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a fibrous and flexible,
    cord, tape or tube; one end of which forms a flame holder; and that by
    capillary action draws up and feeds to the flame holder a steady supply of
    liquid fuel.

    (1)     Note.  A claim to a wick by name only, in terms of material, but no
    structure peculiar to a wick is considered to be a claim to a sorbent for
    Class 502. Woven material is not considered peculiar to a wick but a
    specific weave is structure peculiar to a wick.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for a wick cover actuated in response to tilting a burner.

    102,    for a wick feeding vapor to a mantle.

    282,    for an adjustable wick burner physically related to another burner.

    288+,   for a candle or taper, i.e., a wick impregnated with or embedded in
    a body of wax.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing subclasses 44+ for a slow
    diffuser spreading material into the air by vaporization from a wick
    removing liquid from a holder, and subclass 145 for a porous or external
    wick discharge of material.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, subclass 1 for a sorbent claimed as having thermal conductivity
    and subclasses 400+ and 526 for a sorbent which may be used as a wick.


CLS 431/299
TXT Apparatus under subclass 298 including a device holding a body of liquid of
    a different material than the fuel fed to the wick adjacent to the zone
    heated by the wick flame, or feeding such liquid to the zone heated by the
    wick flame.


CLS 431/300
TXT Apparatus under subclass 298 including apparatus supplying a distinct
    stream of pressurized air to the combustion area of a flame holding
    structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252,    for a burner with adjunctive means to extend the flame by air blast
    or aspiration.


CLS 431/301
TXT Apparatus under subclass 298 for limiting the upward or downward movement
    of a wick in its support, or for restraining the wick from unintentional
    movement.


CLS 431/302
TXT Apparatus under subclass 298 in which the wick is tubular in section at the
    flame zone and is supported by structure forming an air passage to the
    interior of the tubular wick through which air is supplied to the flame
    zone.


CLS 431/303
TXT Apparatus under subclass 302 wherein (1) the wick has a lateral air inlet
    or (2) one or more wicks are folded or positioned adjacent each other to
    form a tubular wick section at the flame zone and to form a lateral air
    inlet to the central air passage.


CLS 431/304
TXT Apparatus under subclass 302 including means for moving the wick section
    into or out of the flame zone and relative to its support.


CLS 431/305
TXT Apparatus under subclass 304 wherein the means for moving the wick includes
    a helical section attached to the wick which acts with a portion of the
    support to elevate the wick.


CLS 431/306
TXT Apparatus under subclass 304 wherein the means for moving the wick includes
    a screw in which structural means moves upon rotation of the screw, and the
    structural means engages the wick for movement relative to the support.


CLS 431/307
TXT Apparatus under subclass 304 wherein the means for moving the wick includes
    structural means forming a rack and engaging the wick, and a pinion meshing
    with the rack for reciprocating the rack and wick in a longitudinal
    direction.


CLS 431/308
TXT Apparatus under subclass 304 wherein the means for moving the wick includes
    structural means attached to the wick and having a bar, the bar being
    movable in a longitudinal direction for raising and lowering the wick.


CLS 431/309
TXT Apparatus under subclass 302 including structure in addition to the
    interior air passage for directing or distributing air into the flame zone
    of the wick.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195,    for a combustion annulus having air feeding perforations above a
    fuel distributor, e.g., wick etc.


CLS 431/310
TXT Apparatus under subclass 298 including a directing device at the upper end
    of the wick shielding the flame or establishing the size, shape or
    character of the flame by controlling the flow of air relative to the wick.


CLS 431/311
TXT Apparatus under subclass 310 including a member made of transparent or
    translucent material through which the wick projects.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 312+ for a transparent lamp chimney which
    may act as an air guide or distributor.


CLS 431/312
TXT Apparatus under subclass 310 including means forming a plurality of
    passages each surrounding the wick or flame zone of the wick and each
    directing a distinct stream of air at all sides of the flame zone.


CLS 431/313
TXT Apparatus under subclass 310 including plural distinct elongated air
    passages leading to distinct regions of the wick flame zone.


CLS 431/314
TXT Apparatus under subclass 310 including means forming an air passage
    surrounding the wick or flame zone of the wick and having a discharge
    annulus adjacent the flame zone.


CLS 431/315
TXT Apparatus under subclass 298 including structure for (1) moving the wick
    relative to a support or guide; or (2) varying the capillary action of a
    wick section or size of fuel conveying passages in or at the wick to
    control fuel flow therethrough.


CLS 431/316
TXT Apparatus under subclass 315 including a supported means having radial
    projections, e.g., a toothed wheel, which engages the wick to raise or
    lower it etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304+,   for a wick raiser for a tubular wick.


CLS 431/317
TXT Apparatus under subclass 316 including a transmission mechanism such as a
    coupling, linkage, gear train, or rack and pinion for moving the rotatably
    supported means.


CLS 431/318
TXT Apparatus under subclass 316 including two rotatably supported means for
    engaging and moving the wick being positioned on opposite sides of the wick
    and having parallel axis.


CLS 431/319
TXT Apparatus under subclass 298 including a fuel supply reservoir, and a wick
    support that is remote from the fuel reservoir and in communication
    therewith by a discrete fuel feed line.


CLS 431/320
TXT Apparatus under subclass 298 in which a reservoir containing a fuel supply
    carries means holding a wick extending inwardly and outwardly of the
    reservoir.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, for brushing and
    scrubbing implement of the wick type having a supply holder.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 187 for a wick type dispensing device.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 44+ for a
    slow diffuser including a wick extending from a liquid reservoir.


CLS 431/321
TXT Apparatus under subclass 320 including (1) distinct means forming a passage
    through a wall of the reservoir serving as a vent for the reservoir; or (2)
    means distinct from the wick guide or support opening for filling the
    reservoir.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    appropriate subclass for means specialized for filling a container with a
    fluent material.


CLS 431/322
TXT Apparatus under subclass 320 including discrete structure for holding or
    supporting the wick guide or support on the container when in a removed
    position.


CLS 431/323
TXT Apparatus under subclass 320 including (1) structure distinct from, and in
    addition to, the normal wick support for supporting a section of the wick;
    (2) structure restraining or directing the flow or movement of fluid within
    the reservoir; or (3) absorbent material within the reservoir feeding fuel
    to the wick by capillary action.


CLS 431/324
TXT Apparatus under subclass 320 including a removably mounted closure member
    for the container and means forming a passageway extending through the
    closure and filled with and supporting the wick.


CLS 431/325
TXT Apparatus under subclass 298 in which the fibrous and flexible cord, tape,
    or tube (1) has a surface covering in the form of a coating; (2) is
    impregnated with a material other than fuel; (3) is made up of layers of
    diverse materials; (4) is made up of two distinct connected sections; or
    (5) has as an integral part of the wick an attached or embedded
    strengthening, supporting or protecting structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclass for a
    plastic or coating composition, per se.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet, and especially subclasses 364+ for a structurally defined or coated
    rod, strand, fiber or filament.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, for a sorbent or catalyst, per se, which may serve as a flame
    holder material.


CLS 431/326
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having structure traversed by fuel
    which burns within the structure or along its surface, said structure being
    (1) a mass with interstices within which combustion takes place, (2) a
    discharge surface member with traversing minute passages through which fuel
    is supplied to the combustion zone to burn as a film thereon, or (3) a
    screen or screenlike means at the combustion area to which the fuel is fed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, for a sorbent or catalyst, per se, which may serve as flame
    holder material.


CLS 431/327
TXT Apparatus under subclass 326 including a porous capillary body of material,
    a surface of which carries the flame and the pores of which constitute a
    fuel storage reservoir and fuel feed passages, said body having distinct
    means attached thereto or a means containing it to manually carry it or
    support it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for a commonly supported igniter and removable hand manipulable
    torch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclasses 542+ for solid fuel
    compositions coated or impregnated for easier ignition.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 182 for a device for connecting a campaign
    torch to a staff.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, for a sorbent or catalyst, per se, which may serve as a flame
    holder material.


CLS 431/328
TXT Apparatus under subclass 326 including a feed line connected to the flame
    holding structure for directing fuel for traversal as a fuel or combustion
    product through the structure and for initial combustion within or along
    the surface of the flame holding structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for a process of burning fuel in a porous body or bed.

    147,    for a catalytic burner with an extinguishing cover.

    170,    for a furnace containing checker work or a permeable mass into
    which fuel is dispersed for combustion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 92+ for a stove having an
    incandescing, radiating, or surface combustion type flame holder.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 145 for a
    disperser or diffuser of general utility having a porous or external wick
    discharge means.


CLS 431/329
TXT Apparatus under subclass 328 wherein the flame holding structure includes a
    screen of interwoven refractory strands of material along the surface of
    which the fuel burns.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100+,   for an incandescent mantle of a woven material and on which fuel
    burns.


CLS 431/330
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including (1) means forming successive
    drops of fuel which fall into a combustion zone, (2) means forming stepped
    liquid fuel surfaces within a combustion zone arranged for serial flow of
    the fuel as a flowing layer thereover, or (3) a sloping shelf or baffle
    exposed within a combustion zone fed with a liquid stream at an upper part
    that is formed into a layer that flows by gravity as a layer across the
    shelf or baffle toward a lower edge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    214,    for means directing heated air at fuel flowing down a stepped or
    inclined surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 420+ a dispenser of general utility
    including a drop forming structure.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 108+ for a wetted
    baffle type gas and liquid contact apparatus not specialized to combustion.


CLS 431/331
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a container confining a
    layer or pool of liquid fuel and having means extending above the fuel
    surface to confine flames and products of combustion, said confined flame
    and products of combustion acting to heat the upper surface of the liquid
    fuel to produce fuel vapor for combustion within the container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 59.5 for an orchard heater which may
    include a pot type burner.


CLS 431/332
TXT Apparatus under subclass 331 including means whereby a fluid other than air
    or fuel is held within, or discharged into the region of combustion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219,    for a burner in which a heated line section feeds steam into a fuel
    basin or priming cup supplying heat to the heated line.


CLS 431/333
TXT Apparatus under subclass 331 including means for continuously replenishing
    the fuel as it is burned in the container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for a level responsive means maintaining a fuel level in a pot type
    burner.

    195+,   for a fuel distributor underlying a combustion annulus having air
    feeding perforations.

    213+,   for a burner having combustion immediately above a liquid fuel
    surface to heat an air feed line discharging against the surface.

    218+,   for a burner including a fuel basin (pot type burner) heating a
    burner feed line.

    260+,   for an open liquid fuel holder with an electrical heater or igniter
    adjacent the fuel.


CLS 431/334
TXT Apparatus under subclass 333 including distinct means by which the burner
    pot is moved as a whole in a vertical direction relative to its support.


CLS 431/335
TXT Apparatus under subclass 333 including a conduit extending vertically
    through the bottom of the fuel pot and feeding air into the pot.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195+,   for a fuel distributor underlying a perforated combustion annulus.


CLS 431/336
TXT Apparatus under subclass 333 including structure at the pot outlet forming
    a partial cover in the shape of a ring that forms a restricted, centrally
    located, upwardly facing passage for the escape of the combustion material
    from the pot.


CLS 431/337
TXT Apparatus under subclass 336 in which the structure making up the partial
    cover includes passages therein adjacent the centrally located pot
    discharge feeding air inwardly.


CLS 431/338
TXT Apparatus under subclass 333 having a flow director within the pot forming
    a tortuous passage or separated combustion regions therein.


CLS 431/339
TXT Apparatus under subclass 338 including a vertically extending baffle
    forming a horizontally restricted burning zone or chamber within the pot
    and exposed to fuel on the pot bottom.


CLS 431/340
TXT Apparatus under subclass 338 in which the structure within the pot extends
    across the pot and divides it into an upper and a lower chamber
    communicating through a central opening in the structure.


CLS 431/341
TXT Apparatus under subclass 331 with a duct forming a combustion chamber
    mounted on and receiving gas or vapor rising from the pot, the duct having
    structure by which air is supplied to and mixed with the rising gas or
    vapor for combustion within the duct.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333+,   for a controller, director or mixing means for the discharge from a
    continuously fed pot burner.


CLS 431/342
TXT Apparatus under subclass 341 having distinct means within the pot by which
    the flow of liquid fuel, air or combustion products is guided relative to
    the pot.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    338+,   for baffling means within a pot burner of the continuously fed type.


CLS 431/343
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means supporting a flame
    holder and its unitarily associated elements (e.g., fuel tank etc) relative
    to external structure, the means including a distinct leg, bracket, strap,
    hook or clip.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    296,    for a candle or taper holder with a hook, clamp or spike type
    support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, appropriate subclass where the support for the
    flame holder has combined with it additional structure forming a stove,
    furnace or heater; particularly subclass 271.2 for a surface heater
    comprising a flame holder and means supporting it to heat a surface.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 273+ for a
    sprinkling, spraying or diffusing structure not specialized to combustion
    with support means.

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclass for a support, per se, or for a
    device supporting a nominally recited device light (e.g., light burner,
    etc.) in which no significant structure of the device is claimed.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 382+ for a support for light.


CLS 431/344
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a vessel holding a
    depletable supply of fuel and a flame holder mounted on the vessel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     for a "flame thrower" which may be attached to a fuel tank.

    102,    103+, for incandescent mantle burners most of which include a fuel
    tank in combination.

    129+    and 144+, for a pocket type cigarette lighter comprising a flame
    holder and a fuel tank.

    142+,   for a burner or igniter removably secured to a fuel tank by an
    encircling frame or casing.

    203+,   for a heated tank and flame holder assembly.

    231,    for a burner-fuel tank assembly in which the burner feed line is
    heated by an auxiliary burner supplied from the upper space of the tank.

    241,    for a fuel tank-flame holder assembly in which a wick in a heated
    line feeds fuel from the tank to the flame holder.

    277,    for a projected spark igniter mounted on a fuel tank adjacent a
    burner head.

    298+,   for a wick type flame holder which includes a fuel tank in
    combination.

    331+,   for a pot type burner assembly in which the combustion takes place
    at the liquid surface in a fuel tank.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 45.1+ for a storage container-dispenser
    combination specialized to the handling of a liquefied gas (e.g., butane).

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 271.1+ for a heater adapted to be
    moved over a surface which is to be heated; and subclasses 401+ for a
    burner tool having a fuel reservoir.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 3 for a dispenser and a container for holding
    a gas to be dispensed; and appropriate subclass for a residual holder and
    dispenser of other fluids.

    239,    Fluid, Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 146+ for a
    sprinkler or sprayer not specialized to combustion with mobile tank-type
    supply means; and subclasses 302+ for a sprinkler or sprayer not
    specialized to combustion with a supply holder for the material.


CLS 431/345
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a flame holder provided with
    a handle for manual movement of the flame holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     for a flame thrower which may have a handle.

    127+,   for a common support for an igniter element and a removably used
    hand manipulable torch.

    289+,   for a porous or capillary flame holding structure attached to a
    handler.

    343,    for an external bracket, leg or clip for a burner assembly.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 336+ for a pyrotechnical
    signalling or illuminating torch.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 401+ for a hand manipulatable tool
    including a burner and work engager.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 465.1+ for a dispenser having a container
    handle or handgrip.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 375+ for a
    fluid disperser including a handle or handgrip and subclasses 525+ for a
    flow line or nozzle attached to, or carried by a handgrip or handle.


CLS 431/346
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means preventing or limiting
    the spread of flame from the combustion area into the fuel feed passage of
    a burner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for the control of a burner responsive to combustion pressure;

    22,     for the control of a burner responsive to a leakage, flashback or
    escaped flame sensor;

    29+,    for a timer or programmer controlled scavenging means; and

    328+,   for a burner having a porous, capillary, permeable, or sievelike
    member through which the fuel is delivered to the combustion zone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclass 192 for a means for
    preventing or localizing and confining, explosions in a gas line or
    distributing system.

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 39.11 for a combustion products type power
    plant with a screen to prevent flash-back.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 432 for a
    sprinkling or spraying device of general utility including a device mixing
    separately supplied fluid streams upstream of a discharger and having a
    dispersing plate or obstruction in the mixing chamber, subclasses 553+ for
    a unitary plural outlet nozzle with an interior guide, filter or apertured
    member; and subclasses 590+ for a rigid terminal member having an interior
    guide, distributor filter or screen.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 164+ for a lantern provided with fine
    screens at the openings in the lantern to prevent the flame from igniting
    combustible gases which may surround the lantern.


CLS 431/347
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which a structure within the flame
    region is particularly adapted (1) to reflect the radiant energy of the
    flame or (2) by its mass conductivity and composition to discharge radiant
    energy by glowing when heated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100+,   for an incandescent mantle.

    170,    for a furnace in which fuel is dispersed into a checkwork or
    permeable mass which may become incandescent from the heat of the burning
    fuel.

    328+,   for a porous, capillary, permeable, or sievelike flame holding
    structure within which or on the surface of which combustion takes place.
    The mass and conductivity of such structure is usually such that it
    incandesces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 14 for a broiling attachment for a
    stove; subclass 41, for a gas stove with broiler attachment, and subclass
    92, for a heating stove having members heated to incandescence by a gas
    burner.


CLS 431/348
TXT Apparatus under subclass 347, including a concave radiating surface which
    is swept by flames from fuel discharged across it.


CLS 431/349
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which a flame holder has means
    simultaneously discharging fuel in a high velocity stream and in a
    supplemental lower velocity stream, the lower velocity stream acting as
    pilot to reignite the high velocity stream upon accidental flame out.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278+,   for structurally related flame holding sections, one separately
    supplied or controlled; and

    286,    for a burner having means transmitting flame between separate flame
    holding sections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 548+, for a
    sprinkling, spraying or diffusing device of general utility having unitary
    plural outlet means in the device; and subclass 601, for a particular
    orifice shape for such a device.


CLS 431/350
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a fuel discharge device
    specialized to combustion by (1) an enclosing means forming a combustion
    chamber having an unmodified discharge; (2) structure protecting the
    discharge means or its surroundings from localized heat produced by the
    combustion of the discharged fuel and not of general utility for protection
    in the discharge of any hot fluid; or (3) means for maintaining a steady
    flame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for timer, programmer or condition responsive control of means
    protecting or shielding a burner assembly element from burner heat.

    248,    for a heat absorbing line section with a distinct baffle directing
    flame relative to the section.

    249+,   for a flame holder including a flame enclosure providing for access
    to the flame zone.

    270,    for an enclosed flame holder with means for holding and firing a
    cap, match or pellet type igniting charge within the enclosure.

    310+,   for a wick type burner with an air guide, distributor, or shield.

    338+    and 342, for baffling means within the confines of a pot type
    burner.

    346,    for a burner with flashback controlling or preventing structure.

    347+,   for an incandescing or reflecting component in the flame area.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 377+, for a fluid handling system of
    general application having a guard or shield.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 103, for a
    nozzle not specialized to combustion carrying an apertured shield and
    collector, subclasses 104+, for a sprinkler sprayer or diffuser not
    specialized to combustion having a soil preventing guard or shield,
    subclasses 132+, for a sprinkler, sprayer, or diffuser of general
    application having a heat exchanger in the terminal element, e.g.,
    injection nozzle cooling, subclasses 288+, for a sprinkler, sprayer, or
    diffuser not specialized to combustion having a solid means as a guard or
    protector and subclasses 461+, for a sprinkler, sprayer, or diffuser not
    specialized to combustion with flow deflecting or rotation controlling
    means.


CLS 431/351
TXT Apparatus under subclass 350 including means for supplying air directly to
    burning gases at spaced points along the region of combustion in the
    direction of flow of the flame as it passes along or through a shield,
    tunnel, or chamber means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for processes of adding an oxidizer to a region of incomplete
    combustion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    432,    Heating, subclasses 222+, for air heater that operates by mixing
    air with combustion gases.


CLS 431/352
TXT Apparatus under subclass 351 in which the means for feeding air comprises
    perforations through the shield, tunnel or chamber and spaced along the
    line of flow of the burning gases.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195+,   for a fuel distributor underlying a combustion annulus having air
    feeding perforations.

    333+,   for a pot type burner which may include perforations in its side
    wall for feeding air to the interior of the pot; and 341+,      for a pot
    type burner including an exhaust flue having air feed passages.


CLS 431/353
TXT Apparatus under subclass 350, including a barrier means encircling and
    extending along a flame area and forming a distinct chamber or vessel
    within which combustion takes place, the chamber or vessel having an
    unmodified discharge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151,    for a flame holder having a windshield within a covered zone.

    157+,   for a combustion confining means maintaining a critically defined
    combustion pressure, and see the search notes under subclasses 157 and 158.

    242,    for a burner casing enclosing a heated feed line section and flame
    holder.

    243,    for a flame enclosing tube or sleeve that comprises or conducts
    heat to a burner feed line.

    263,    for a burner having an electrical igniter in an offset ignition
    chamber.

    265,    for a gun type burner with a spark electrode adjacent a fuel
    discharger and in an air blast.

    285,    for separately supplied or controlled flame holders having a common
    flame chamber or shield means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 91+, for a radiator type heater
    which includes apparatus for burning gaseous fuel within a combustion tube;
    and subclasses 360+ for a submerged liquid or gaseous fuel water heater
    which is often a tubular combustion chamber passing through a body of water.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 499 for a spray
    nozzle of general utility having a flow deflecting or rotation controlling
    means in the form of a chamber.


CLS 431/354
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including chamber forming means which
    has a shaped or internal means specialized to the mixing of fuel and an
    oxidizing medium, the chamber means forming a unit with an immediately
    adjacent flame holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217,    for a burner assembly in which heated diverse fluids are mixed
    upstream of the combustion zone.

    239,    for a burner assembly in which a heated feed aspirates unheated
    fuel.

    245+,   for a burner assembly in which heated fuel is mixed with unheated
    air and fed to a flame holder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclasses 180+, for a device
    mixing, heating or illuminating gas where a burner is not immediately
    associated with the mixing device.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 602+, for a fluid mixing means in a
    residual fluid handling system of general utility.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclass for
    a device for mixing plural fluids which are later discharged from a
    terminal member modifying the flow of the mixed fluids as they are
    discharged.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclass for gas and
    liquid contact apparatus not involving combustion.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 151+, for a jet pump in which an aspirating fluid
    entrains and mixes with another fluid.


CLS 431/355
TXT Apparatus under subclass 354 comprising a vertical tube of constant cross
    section with a fuel gas feed means and an opening for air admission at its
    lower end, the fuel being fed upwardly and vertically into the tube, mixing
    with the air, and discharging from the upper end to burn thereabove.


CLS 431/356
TXT Apparatus under the class definition not provided for elsewhere.


CLS 431/357
TXT ILLUMINATING FLASH DEVICE, E. G., PHOTOGRAPHIC BULB, ETC.:

    Apparatus under the class definition having a substance which is quickly
    burnable to produce a burst of light for the purpose of signalling or
    illuminating an area.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 335+ for an explosive or
    pyrotechnic device in the form of a cartridge or receptacle containing
    powder that is ignited manually or with a fuse; and subclasses 200+ for
    means initiating the combustion or detonation of explosive or thermic
    compositions or charges.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 264+ for
    electrical systems, per se, for igniting incandescent means.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 3+ for a source of visible radiant energy
    and means to modify the distribution of said energy and designed for use
    with a camera.

    396,    Photography, main class definition, section IV for a listing of
    classifications for object illumination devices and subclasses 155+ for
    camera structure combined with illumination means.


CLS 431/358
TXT Fuel charge within sealed transparent casing, e.g., bulb:

    Apparatus under subclass 357 in which the substance to be burned is sealed
    within a transparent envelope, said envelope further containing the
    necessary atmosphere or other substance to support the burning process.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes a combustible flashbulb with a
    nominally claimed light modifier or reflector and see the search note below
    to Class 362, Illumination, for a classification for the combination.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 79+ and 403+ for methods of, and
    apparatus for, evacuating or gas filling a receptacle and closing the
    evacuated filled receptacle.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 267 for a housing, casing, or support
    for a resistive igniter element.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 2.1+ for an envelope for an electric lamp.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclass for
    residual electric lamp or discharge structure.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 3+ for a light source combined with a
    means adapted to perfect or modify the illumination, such as a reflector.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    appropriate subclass for methods and apparatus for manufacturing electric
    lamp and electric space discharge devices.


CLS 431/359
TXT Plurality of bulbs associated for sequential ignition:

    Apparatus under subclass 358 having means interconnecting a plurality of
    bulbs so that (a) upon percussive actuation of a single means, a successive
    one of said bulbs will be ignited, or (b) upon a single actuation of a
    means, a plurality of bulbs will ignite in a successive order with a
    predetermined time delay automatically interposed between successive
    ignitions, or (c) upon ignition of one of the bulbs of the sequence of
    bulbs, by activating an electrical means, a switch means or other
    electrical circuitry is conditioned so that when the electrical means is
    again activated, another bulb in the sequence will be ignited, or (d) a
    structural means provided to support a plurality of bulbs as a unit in
    which each bulb is provided with its own percussive ignition means.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are those multibulb units having a
    switch means which is conditioned upon the ignition of one bulb to permit
    ignition of another bulb by electrical means, or a unit of percussively
    actuated bulbs having means whereby each bulb is struck separately.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    358+,   for devices wherein a plurality of bulbs are arranged to be fired
    substantially simultaneously.


CLS 431/360
TXT Coated casing:

    Apparatus under subclass 358 having a layer of material, different from
    that of the envelope, on a surface of the transparent envelope.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclass for a
    coating composition.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 110+ for an
    electric lamp or discharge device with an optical device or a special ray
    transmission envelope.


CLS 431/361
TXT Percussive ignition means ignites charge:

    Apparatus under subclass 358 having a means which is ignited upon being
    struck a physical blow by a means provided therefore, said ignited means in
    turn ignites the quickly burnable substance to produce the burst of light.

    (1)     Note.  Mechanisms, per se, for striking percussively ignited bulbs
    are collected here where that is the sole disclosed use for the mechanism.


CLS 431/362
TXT Electrically ignited primer ignites charge:

    Apparatus under subclass 358 having a small quantity of a substance which
    (a) is ignited as a result of its proximity to a resistance wire which is
    heated when an electrical current is passed therethrough or (b) is ignited
    as a result of its own electrical resistance when an electrical current is
    passed therethrough, whereby when said small quantity of substance is
    ignited, it will in turn cause the quickly burnable substance to ignite and
    produce the desired burst of light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    358,    for bulbs provided with a mere filament or wire which is heated
    when an electrical current is passed therethrough and which in turn ignites
    the quickly burnable substance.


CLS 431/363
TXT Having fuel charge feeding means:

    Apparatus under subclass 357 having means to transfer the burnable
    substance from a remote area to an area where it is to be burned to produce
    the desired burst of light.


CLS 431/364
TXT Having protective shield:

    Apparatus under subclass 357 having a barrier means located adjacent to the
    area where the light producing substance is ignited for the purpose of
    protecting the user from undesirable effects from the ignition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 3+ for a light source combined with a
    means for reflecting or directing the light rays emanating from said source.


CLS 431/365
TXT Electrical means ignites charge:

    Apparatus under subclass 357 including an electrical spark producer or
    resistance heater which is arranged to ignite the burnable substance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 264+ for
    electrical circuitry, per se, for igniting incandescent means.


CLS 432/
TTL HEATING

CLS 432/
TXT This is the residual class for apparatus and related methods for the
    generation of heat and its application to materials; and for
    subcombinations and adjuncts specialized to such heating.

    Note.  Patents issued prior to 1945 have not in all instances been
    classified by their claimed disclosure so the placement of these older
    patents does not necessarily indicate lines of classification.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclass 360 for a dry
    sanitary closet having a means for drying or burning the discharge.

    5,      Beds, subclass 284 for an accessory device for heating or cooling a
    bed.

    26,     Textile:  Cloth Finishing, subclasses 81, 92, and 106 for apparatus
    for expanding (e.g., stretching, spreading) running length webs of cloth
    which further include means for heating or drying the cloth.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 280+ for a
    process limited to drying even though involving the burning of fuel, and
    for a residual process of contacting a solid with a gas or vapor; and
    appropriate subclass for (1) a heating apparatus specialized to drying or
    (2) an apparatus specialized to contacting solid with a gas.  A merely
    nominal heating means may be included in the structure of the apparatus of
    (1) and (2).

    37,     Excavating, subclass 226 for apparatus for excavating, compacting
    and melting snow.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 144 for a burner
    specialized to destroying vermin.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 1.44 for a process or apparatus
    specialized for use in plant husbandry for flame cultivation.

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclass 61 for apparatus in which
    heating or illuminating gas is produced by heating carbonaceous material in
    a chamber.

    53,     Package Making, subclass 127 for a package making apparatus having
    means to heat or cool the contents of the package; and subclasses 373.7+
    for a means to complete a package by heating or cooling a seam to seal the
    package.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 15 for a clothes
    washing machine combined with means to heat the tub or for applying heat to
    liquid within the tub.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, for processes of gas separation
    perfected by the application of heat.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, for apparatus for gas separation
    perfected with heating means.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 451 for apparatus for thawing a
    frozen load in railway rolling stock.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 739+ for a process of
    (1) making cement, (2) making a cement intermediate product or (3) for
    treating calcareous or argillaceous material if the treatment is disclosed
    as being for the purpose of making "cement" or lime".

    110,    Furnaces, appropriate subclasses for a solid fuel combustion
    furnace or subcombination thereof; and subclasses 173+ for a door usable on
    either a heating furnace or a solid fuel combustion furnace.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 47 for coating apparatus including
    means for carbonizing, flame contact, or burning off of coating ingredient;
    and subclasses 641+ for coating apparatus having means for the radiant
    heating of the work or coating.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 302+ for a brooder and subclasses 311+
    for an incubator.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, for the apparatus for the application of heat,
    and for the stove and furnace elements specifically provided for in the
    various subclasses.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 105+ for a
    cleaning and liquid contact with solids device having a nominal heating,
    cooling or heat exchange means.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    497 for a surface bonding device with gas, vapor or flame contact means for
    the work; and subclasses 583.1+ for a heated press for a surface bonding
    apparatus.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, appropriate subclass for a residual
    process or apparatus for concentrating a liquid by heat.

    164,    Metal Founding, appropriate subclass for the molding of free
    flowing liquid metal.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclass for a residual method or
    apparatus for the transfer of heat from one material to another.

    (1)     Note.  A heat generator is considered to make the arrangement
    special to heating except where the structure is a combined heating and
    cooling device.



    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclasses 104+ for apparatus for
    vaporizing mineral oils.

    237,    Heating Systems, appropriate subclass for an apparatus or process
    of heating a room, chamber or other enclosing structure by a system
    delivering fluid heated by a heat generator to the room or structure or to
    a heat exchanger in the room or structure.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, appropriate subclass, for apparatus
    concerned with the extraction of metals from their ores, with the refining
    of metal, and with the establishing a physical or mechanical property of a
    solid metal object by a heat treatment related to the composition of the
    object.  The relationship of the two classes is as follows:

    392,    Electric Resistance Heating Devices, subclasses 307+ for a specific
    electrical heating device combined with nonelectric heating means; and
    appropriate subclass for a residual device for the generator of heat by
    electricity and the utilization of the heat wherein there is involved an
    electrical characteristic or electrical structure that is more than merely
    nominal.

    452,    Butchering, subclass 73 for for singeing devices and subclasses 74+
    for scalding devices.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclass 1
    for a device for treating an abnormal condition of a living body with
    light, heat, or electricity.



    A.      Heating furnaces (i.e. a chamber for receiving material to be
    heated and supplied with heat independently of the charge) and heating
    furnace combination:

    1.      Class 266, Metallurgical Apparatus takes the following combinations
    of a heating furnace with additional structure for a metallurgical purpose:

    a.      A heating furnace with additional structure for cooling or
    quenching a solid metal object after heating is in Class 266 if the
    disclosure is limited to the metallurgical treatment of metals.  If the
    disclosure is generic to metals and nonmetals or if the material has not
    been specified, Classification is in Class 432.  It is noted that glass and
    ceramic article are commonly "annealed".  Accordingly, a disclosure of
    "annealing" without a specification of material is in Class 432.

    b.      Those heating furnaces which are limited by disclosure to heating
    solid metal articles and which have structure for supplying or producing a
    special atmosphere either protective or treating, are in Class 266.
    Furnaces not elsewhere provided for having gas supplying or producing means
    will be found in this (432) Class.

    c.      A heating furnace in which material is melted having additional
    structure for the collection of flow, separation, dispensing or mixing of
    melted metal is in Class 266 when the sole disclosure relates to the
    handling of metal.

    d.      A heating furnace in combination with a fume arrester in which the
    sole disclosure relates to the arresting of metallurgical fume, i.e. of
    condensate of metallic vapor generated from a charge of metal ore or
    intermediate metal product, is in Class 266. A residual heating furnace
    with means separating dust or slag from the furnace discharge is
    classifiable in Class 432, subclasses 67+.

    2.      A residual heating furnace not specialized to metallurgical use as
    indicated above is in Class 432.  It is noted that a "reverbatory" furnace
    or a furnace in which a steel making crucible is heated may be a Class 432
    heating subcombination of general utility even though the disclosed charge
    includes metal or metal ore with reactive ingredients combined therewith or
    separately fed into the heating chamber.

    B.      Oxygen reaction furnaces: A furnace heated by reacting a charge of
    solid  material with gaseous oxygen to produce heat and a chemical
    transformation of charge material and not having a separate heat generator
    is in Class 266 when the sole disclosed specific use of the apparatus is to
    produce metal or an intermediate metal product.  It is considered that a
    "blast furnace," a "cupola furnace," and a "converter" are this type of
    Class 266 apparatus unless there is a positive indication that the
    apparatus may be used to treat a specific nonmetal.  Also, in the absence
    of a disclosure that the apparatus of utility in treating nonmetal
    producing materials, the term "sintering" applied to a furnace treating
    bulk particulate material with gas is considered to indicate metallurgical
    apparatus for Class 266.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclass 180.1 for a heated chair or seat.

    366,    Agitating, subclass 144 for an agitator combined with means to heat
    the material during agitation, for purposes other than drying, involving no
    structural detail of the heating or heat transfer means and no new
    relationship of the heating structure to the agitating structure.

    373,    Industrial Electrical Heating Furnaces, appropriate subclass for a
    furnace specialized to the use of electricity as the heat source and
    particularly adapted to metallurgical and related work.  Such furnace is
    generally characterized by electrical heating means within the chamber
    containing the material to be heated, the heating means being either an
    arc, a resistance, the material itself, or a combination of such means, and
    is further characterized by adaptation for operation on a granular
    material, such as crushed ore, or for handling molten material fusing at a
    very high temperature, the material in both cases being received
    immediately within the body of the furnace.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    appropriate subclass for a nuclear reactor type of heat generator
    delivering heat energy to a material or to a power generator.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, appropriate subclasses for heating sterilizers;
    combustion or reaction device for purifying gas, or with means for
    recovering, mixing, separating, or otherwise handling as a product formed
    in the device; autoclaves for carrying out a reaction at high temperature;
    a cooler or digest or not otherwise provided for; and residual chemical
    apparatus.



    INDEX TO CLASSES NOTED IN THE CLASS DEFINITION AND IN THE SUBCLASSES OF
    THIS CLASS



    CLASS           IN CLASS 432
                    DEFINITIONS
    4,      Baths, Clo-
            sets, Sinks,
            and Spittoons   main
    5,      Beds    main
    12,     Boot and Shoe
            Making  231
    23,     Chemistry:
            Physical Processes      13
    29,     Metal Working   1, 228
    33,     Geometrical     33
            Instruments

    34,     Drying and      main, 6, 8, 13, 14              Gas or Vapor    15,
    17, 32, 36, 37,                 Contact With    45, 47, 48, 58, 59,
                Solids  60, 66, 74, 75, 77,                         95, 103,
    112, 117,                       120, 128, 129, 134,             151, 152,
    162, 184,               186, 198, 201, 204,             205, 221, 224, 228,
                    250, 253,
    26137,        Excavating      main38, Textiles:       225, 228  Ironing
    or      Smoothing43,    Fishing,        main    Trapping, and   Vermin
    Destroy- ing47,  Plant Husban-  main    dry48,  Gas:  Heating   main,
    98        and     Illuminating49, Movable or    35,
    250 Removable       Closures52,     Static Struc-       3, 247  tures
    (e.g.,    Buildings)53,   Package Making  main 10, 23155,       Gas
    Separa-     main    tion60, Power Plants          62, 72, 220,
    22265,   Glass Manu-    1, 9, 36,
    77    facturing68,    Textiles:       main    Fluid   Treating
    Apparatus72,    Metal   Deforming       5975,   Specialized
          Metallurgical     Processes,      Compositions    for Use Therein,
           Consolidated Metal       Powder Compositions,    and Loose Metal
            Particulate Mixtures,   1383,   Cutting         1099,   Foods
    and       36, 121, 128, 226,    Beverages:      230, 231,
    232   Apparatus100,   Presses 231105, Railway main    Rolling
    Stock106, Composition:    or Coating    Plastic main,
    1110,     Furnaces        main, 64, 67, 94,
                                99,103, 159, 237,
                              239, 247, 250116,     Signals
    and     32      Indicators118,  Coating Apparatus       main,
    228119,   Animal Hus-   main    bandry122,      Liquid Heat-    32, 35, 45,
    90, 173,        ers and         219,233,
    238    Vapors123,      Internal-       63      Combustion      Engines126,
      Stoves
    and       main, 34, 35, 66,     Furnaces        88, 93, 94,
    120,                162, 175, 219, 225,         227, 228, 231, 232,
       250

    132,    Toilet  62
    134,    Cleaning and    main, 1, 2
            Liquid Contact
            With Solids
    137,    Fluid Hand-     35, 46, 54, 219
            ling
    138,    Pipes and       225
            Tubular Con-
            duits
    148,    Metal Treat-    1, 8, 10, 13
            ment
    156,    Adhesive        main, 13
            Bonding and
            Miscellaneous
            Chemical Manufacture
    159,    Concentra-      main, 1, 13, 58,
            ting Evapo-     135, 151, 219, 228
            rators
    164,    Metal   main 4, 13, 262
            Founding
    165,    Heat    main 1, 2, 32, 36,              Exchange        37, 47, 51,
    77, 103,                135, 151, 180, 228,             235166, Wells   1,
    224169,      Fire Extin-        35      guishers175,    Boring or       1,
    224  Penetrating     the
    Earth184,      Lubrication     62193,  Conveyors,      246     Chutes,
    Skids,   Guides, and    Ways196,        Mineral main,
    219       Oils:   Apparatus198,   Conveyors:      77, 134,
    239  Power-Driven200,        Electricity:    37      Circuit Makers
    and Breakers201,    Distilla-       1, 2, 5,
    15 tion:   Processes,      Thermolytic202, Distilla-       47, 66, 95,
    103,     tion:   207, 219       Apparatus203,   Distilla-       1,
    13   tion:   Processes,      Separatory208,  Mineral 27      Oils:
    Pro-        cesses and  Products209,    Classifying,    61      Separating,
    and Assorting       Solids211,      Supports:       258     Racks219,
    Electric
    main 9, 34, 36, 47,     Heating 51,62, 88, 9 3, 94,
                       103, 120, 219, 227,
                    228220, Receptacles     247,
    261221,    Article Dispensing      62, 239222,  Dispensing      62, 239,
    263228,        Metal Fusion     33, 34, 226,
    229        Bonding236,     Automatic       32,36,37,46,47, Temperature
    51      and
    Humidity Regulation237,  Heating        main, 1, 36,
    120,       Systems 221239, Fluid   13, 58, 173,
    221,    Sprinkling,     225     Spraying, and   Diffusing241,   Solid   13,
    61  Material Com-       minution
    or     Disintegration248,      Supports        103, 258249,     Static
    Molds    120252, Compositions    15261,  Gas and        Liquid
    Contact  219     Apparatus264,   Plastic and    3, 5, 6, 9, 13, 19,
                        Nonmetallic     58,     Article Sha-        ping
    or Treating:       Processes266,   Metallur-       main 33, 72,
    85,     gical   95, 103, 160, 161,      Apparatus       229, 233, 252, 262

    269,    Work Holders    231, 253
    277,    Joint   244
            Packing
    285,    Pipe Joints or  115
            and Couplings
    312,    Supports:       198
            Cabinet
            Structures
    366,    Agitating       main,103,118,
                    139, 151, 239
    373,    Industrial      main,1,13,66,94,
            Electrical      103, 205, 238,  252
            Heating
            Furnaces
    374,    Thermal 32
            Measuring
            and Testing
    376,    Induced main
            Nuclear Reac-
            tors:  Processes,
            Systems, and
            Elements
    384,    Bearings,       103, 244
    414,    Material or     98, 239
            Article Handling
    422,    Chemical        37, 72, 103, 219
            Apparatus
            and Process
            Disinfecting,
            Deodorizing,
            Preserving, or
            Sterilizing
    427,    Coating Pro-    1
            cesses
    431,    Combustion      1, 2, 19, 20, 21, 25,           32, 35, 36, 37, 38,
                            41, 46, 47, 51, 74,                     75, 88,
    159, 173,                               175, 178,
    222452,       Butchering      main454,        Ventilation     64607,
    Surgery:
     Light,         main    Thermal, and    Electrical Application


CLS 432/1
TXT Processes of heating or heating apparatus operation under the class
    definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 592+ for a process of mechanical
    manufacture involving metal working that may include heating of the work.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 17.1+ for a process including the
    working of a glass type material after it has been softened or melted by
    heating.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 100+ for a process
    specialized to Portland type cement material.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 19+ for a
    process of cleaning including (1) contacting the work by hot products of
    combustion or (2) heating the work in any way other than or in addition to
    contacting the work with heated cleaning or liquid contact agents.

    148,    Metal Treatment, appropriate subclasses for processes of heat
    treating metal to modify or maintain the internal physical structure (i.e.,
    microstructure) or chemical properties of metal. If metal casting, fusion
    bonding, machining, or working is involved, there is a requirement of
    significant heat treatment as described in section III, A, of the Class 148
    definition.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclasses 47.1+ for a process of
    concentrating a liquid by evaporating one of the constituents.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 58+and 201+ for a process involving both
    heating and cooling and in which the cooling accomplishes more than the
    return of the temperature of heated work to room temperature.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 302+ for a process of heating or cooling a well
    formation.

    175,    Boring and Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 11+ for a process of
    boring the earth by directly applying heat to the formation material.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, appropriate subclass for a
    process comprising heating a carbonaceous material to vaporize a volatile
    material and to break down the substance into other chemical substances.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, appropriate subclass for a
    process involving the heating of a liquid mixture to drive off one
    constituent and the condensing of the expelled constituent.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclass 12, for an automatic control process in a
    heating system, and subclass 81 for a process for heating a house, room or
    other enclosure by a heat distributing system.

    373,    Industrial Electrical Heating Furnaces, subclasses 85, 102+, 116,
    135+, 146, and 149+ for processes of operating or manipulating an electric
    furnace and for merely heating by means of an electric furnace.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 223+ for coating processes including
    flame contact.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 2+ for a process of combustion not involving
    the application of the generated heat to external material.


CLS 432/2
TXT Process under subclass 1 including a procedure for flushing out,
    dislodging, or preventing collection of undesirable material in heating
    apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     for apparatus under the class definition including a protector,
    cleaner or support for a condition sensor:  subclass 74 for heating
    apparatus with a drip, spill or leakage collector:  and subclass 75 for
    heating apparatus having cleaning means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 341+ for method of operating solid fuel
    furnaces or refuse incinerators.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 1 to 42 for a
    residual process of cleaning, or contacting a solid with a liquid.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 5 for the cleaning of a regenerator.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclass 2 for a process
    including a step of cleaning an apparatus in which a solid carbonaceous
    material is heated.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 2 for a process of decarbonizing, cleaning or
    purging a combustion device.


CLS 432/3
TXT Process under subclass 1 in which a step of repairing, converting or
    assembling is an integral part of a heating procedure or in which repairing
    or assembling of the apparatus is effected in part by the heat incident to
    the operation of the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76,     for heating apparatus having structural elements provided for use
    in repair or assembly of the apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 741.1+ and 745.06+
    for a process of forming or assembling a structure in situ.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 30 for a process of repairing or forming a furnace lining and see
    the extensive collected search class notes of this Class 264 subclass.


CLS 432/4
TXT Process under subclass 1 including (1) a step or procedure for preventing
    damage to a heating device or (2) a procedure effective to bring a heating
    device up to or to lower its temperature from operating temperature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     for a heating apparatus having a frangible or fusible safety relief
    or shutdown means.

    38,     for a condition responsive control of apparatus protecting fluid or
    means:

    116,    for a rotary drum furnace having protective cooling means.

    233+,   for a heating apparatus element having protective cooling structure.

    248,    for a melt holding section of a furnace having a protected section.

    251,    for furnace structure having expansion, absorbing or relieving
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 121 for a process in which founding
    apparatus is readied for casting.


CLS 432/5
TXT Process under subclass 1 including a manipulation of, or an operation on
    the work prior to the application of heat, that conditions the work for
    receiving heat or that places it in position to be heated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87,     for heating apparatus having means supplying work to its work
    feeder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclass 6 for the
    distilling of solid carbonaceous material involving a step of shaping the
    material prior to heating; subclass 8 for a process of distilling solid
    carbonaceous material involving grinding the material prior to charging it
    into the carbonizing zone; and subclass 40 for distillation of solid
    carbonaceous material with a step of arranging the material to be heated.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 57+ for a process of vitrifying or sintering a preform to make
    an inorganic article (e.g., ceramic etc.) involving the particular
    positioning, arranging or conveying of articles during heating.


CLS 432/6
TXT Processes under subclass 5 including positioning a plurality of objects in
    an orderly arrangement for exposure to heat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    253+,   for a structure in which material is placed or arranged for holding
    work within a furnace during heating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 518 for a
    drying process involving piling or arranging the material treated.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 605+ for a process of stacking or arranging plural preformed
    articles for vitrifying or sintering by heating.


CLS 432/7
TXT Process under subclass 5 in which the arranging of the work material
    includes spreading out particulate material to form a porous sheet of
    relatively small transverse dimension.


CLS 432/8
TXT Process under subclass 1 including the step of passing a continuous strip,
    strand, web or sheet longitudinally through a heating zone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59,     for heating structure with means winding, coiling or flexing a
    longitudinally moving sheet, web or strand.

    122,    for heating structure including means for manipulating, orienting,
    segregating or topically heating an individual article; and

    231,    for heating apparatus including a heat generator and means engaging
    and retaining an article in a desired relationship to the heat generator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 444+ for a
    process of drying a sheet, web or strand by contact with gas or vapor and
    subclasses 519+ for a process of drying a sheet, web or strand by radiant
    or conducted heat.

    148,    Metal Treatment, appropriate subclasses for processes of heat
    treating metal to modify or maintain the internal physical structure (i.e.,
    microstructure) or chemical properties of metal.  If metal casting, fusion
    bonding, machining, or working is involved, there is a requirement of
    significant heat treatment as described in section III, A, of the Class 148
    definition.  Class 148 subclasses 568, 576, and 595-600 relate to treatment
    of wire and subclasses 601-603, 657, and 661 relate to treatment of strips.


CLS 432/9
TXT Process under subclass 1 peculiarly adapted to individually treat a work
    entity identifiable as an article, batch, or body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 120 for a process of treating a glass
    preform by flame.

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclass for a process of heating an
    article electrically.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 603+ for a process of heating a preform to a vitrifying or
    sintering temperature to produce an inorganic article, e.g., ceramic etc.


CLS 432/10
TXT Process under subclass 9 in which heating, cooling or other treatment is
    concentrated on a section of the entity; or a section of the entity is
    shielded from heating, cooling or other treatment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for a heater having a mask, baffle, or conductor concentrating heat
    on, or protecting a section of an article.

    123,    for a work handler outside a heating chamber supporting work
    partially within the chamber.

    184,    for a heating chamber having an opening through which an article is
    partially inserted into the chamber to be heated.

    225,    for a heat applicator mounted on or assembled about a work article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclass 477 for a process involving closing a
    package and heat sealing it at a localized area.

    83,     Cutting, subclass 16 for a cutting process having an ancillary
    heating of a localized area.

    148,    Metal Treatment, particularly subclasses 194+ for processes of
    chemical heat-removing (e.g., flame-cutting, etc.) or burning of metal,
    subclasses 210+ for processes of carburizing or nitriding of a selected
    area or zone of metal, or subclass 627 and subclasses 639-644 for localized
    or zone heating of iron base alloys.


CLS 432/11
TXT Process under subclass 9 in which the work entity is moved through a
    heating zone or past heating means while the heat is acting upon the
    article.


CLS 432/12
TXT Process under subclass 9 in which the work unit has heat applied to it (1)
    at a varying or stepped rate as it approaches a desired temperature, or (2)
    at a higher rate during a period at which it is being raised to a desired
    temperature than the rate at which it is supplied while the temperature is
    being maintained.


CLS 432/13
TXT Process under subclass 1 in which the work undergoes a change of phase, is
    comminuted, is sintered, or is classified in the course of treatment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, subclass 308 for a process of
    melting out a fusible solid from a less fusible material.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 519+ for a
    process of drying by heating.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 343+ for processes of producing or purifying free
    metal powder and subclasses 414+ for producing metal or treating molten
    metal at 300 degrees or greater.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 194+ for processes of chemical-heat
    removing (e.g., flame cutting, etc.) or burning of metal.  Class 148 for
    processes of heat treating metal to modify or maintain the internal
    physical structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical properties of metal.
    If metal casting, fusion bonding, machining, or working is involved, there
    is a requirement of significant heat treatment as described in section III,
    A, of the Class 148 definition.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    81+ for the melting or gasification of solid material in situ in an air
    tight cavity; subclass 89 for surface bonding with verification or firing
    of ceramic material.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclasses 47.1+ for a process of
    concentrating a material in a liquid by evaporating a constituent of the
    liquid.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 1+ for process of casting metal.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, appropriate subclass for a
    process involving the vaporization of a liquid from a mixture and the
    condensation of the vaporized liquid.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 79+ for a
    device melting solid spray material at a nozzle and spraying it from the
    nozzle.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 23 for a
    process of comminuting solid material having ancillary heating.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclass for a process of shaping or treating a plastic,
    nonmetallic article generally involving the application of heat.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclass 85, 102+, 116, 135+,
    146, and 149+ for a process of manipulating an electrical melting furnace.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclasses 1+ for processes for making articles from metal containing
    particulate material involving the use of pressure and heat.


CLS 432/14
TXT Process under subclass 1 including a step in which a temperature modifying
    gas traverses a mass or stream of particulate work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 443+ for a
    process of drying involving gas or vapor contact with the material being
    dried.


CLS 432/15
TXT Process under subclass 14 in which the operation is such that the work
    particles are so suspended in the gaseous current that the mixture of the
    gas and particles act like a liquid in forming a surface level, in flowing,
    and in supporting by buoyancy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 359 for a
    drying process or a residual process of contacting Solids with a gas
    involving fluidization of the solid material.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclass 31 for a process of
    heating carbonaceous material in a fluidized bed for distillation.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, for a composition comprising a catalyst or sorbent, per se, and
    see especially subclasses 20+ for processes of regenerating such a
    composition which may use a fluidized suspension of particles in a gas.


CLS 432/16
TXT Process under subclass 14 involving the separation of work particles from
    withdrawn treating gas.


CLS 432/17
TXT Process under subclass 14 in which the procedure includes continuously
    adjusting the flow of work particles or treating gas to maintain or
    establish steady flow conditions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 446+ for a
    process of drying by gas or vapor contact including temperature control or
    varying.


CLS 432/18
TXT Process under subclass 1 in which work is (1) moved along a path traversing
    zones of diverse characteristics or a zone having an increasing or
    decreasing temperature along its length; or (2) has applied to it
    successive treatments different in kind or (3) has its temperature changed
    by successive or progressive heat treatments.


CLS 432/19
TXT Process under subclass 1 including a step of forming, maintaining or
    circulating atmosphere in a heating chamber or about work material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    for sintering or vitrifying of shaped bodies, particularly, subclasses 646+
    or 674+ with controlling of gas composition of the heating chamber,
    subclasses 653+ with plural heating steps, subclasses 664+ or 667+ with
    specified gas pressure in the heating chamber, or subclasses 677+ with
    controlling or directing heated gas or exhaust within a heating chamber.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 8 for a combustion process involving flame
    shaping or distributing components in a combustion zone.


CLS 432/20
TXT Process under subclass 19 in which the heat radiation characteristics of
    the work atmosphere are controlled by providing an additive or adjusting
    combustion to produce a flame of high luminosity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    431,    Combustion, for a combustion process including the feeding of a
    flame modifying additive.


CLS 432/21
TXT Process under subclass 19 in which the atmosphere is controlled by
    recycling withdrawn material back to the work zone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    431,    Combustion, subclass 9 for a combustion process involving whirling,
    recycling material, or reversing flow in an enclosed flame zone.


CLS 432/22
TXT Process under subclass 19 in which a heating device is operated to
    establish a body of gas in the form of a sheet within or forming the
    boundary of a heating zone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for a furnace chamber port or work path having a fluid curtain.


CLS 432/23
TXT Process under subclass 19 including a procedure by which a desired chemical
    makeup of the gaseous material surrounding the work is adjusted or
    established.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for apparatus under the class definition comprising automatic
    control means including an analyzer or composition sensor of work, work
    atmosphere or exhaust gas.


CLS 432/24
TXT Process under subclass 19 including a step changing an operational
    parameter to produce or maintain a desired pressure in the work zone, or
    temperature of the work or its surrounding atmosphere.


CLS 432/25
TXT Process under subclass 19 in which the atmosphere surrounding the work is
    caused to reverse its direction of flow periodically or is given periodic
    or rhythmical pressure waves or impulses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    431,    Combustion, subclass 1 for combustion bursts or flareups in pulses
    or in serial pattern.


CLS 432/26
TXT Process under subclass 19 in which the control of the environment is
    accomplished by adjusting the rate, direction, or position of feed of a
    component of the work atmosphere.


CLS 432/27
TXT Process under subclass 1 including a step of moving particulate heat
    storage material as a flowing stream.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215,    for apparatus in which a heat generator heats a fluent mass of
    solid heat carrying or storing pebbles or particles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products subclass 127 for mineral oil
    cracking process using a suspension system of inert materials and
    subclasses 146+ for a process of chemical conversion of mineral oil
    involving solids contacting and mixing.  See the collected notes of this
    subclass for related fields for search.


CLS 432/28
TXT Process under subclass 1 involving the application of heat to work in a
    chamber, oven, or retort in which a heat storage mass or body is used.


CLS 432/29
TXT Process under subclass 1 for heating fluid work or providing a high
    temperature fluid stream.


CLS 432/30
TXT Process under subclass 29 in which a body of material is caused to receive
    and temporarily retain sensible or latent heat.


CLS 432/31
TXT Process under subclass 1 for heating work by radiation or conduction or for
    heating a heating surface.


CLS 432/32
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including structure (1) indicating a
    condition of the work or apparatus, (2) providing for the inspection of the
    work or apparatus; or (3) providing illumination.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 88 for a
    drier having a display, inspecting or indicating means and subclass 89 for
    a drier having indicating or testing means.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 101+ for a thermally responsive
    alarm and subclasses 216+ for a thermally responsive indicator, per se.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 504.2 for a boiler having
    an alarm or indicator.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 11.1 for a residual heat exchange device
    having an alarm, indicator, signal, register, recorder, or test or
    inspection means.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 94 for
    automatic control by a thermostat with an indicator or alarm.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 500+ for electrical
    automatic condition responsive indicating systems.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 100+ for a temperature
    measuring device, per se.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 13+ for a combustion device having an
    indicator or inspection means.


CLS 432/33
TXT Apparatus under subclass definition including a means mounting a work
    article and heat applicator for relative movement and a structure following
    a surface of the article or a template surface establishing the relative
    positions of the article and heat applicator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 18.1+ for a pattern tracing
    subcombination.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclass 7 for a fusion bounding apparatus in
    which a machine part follows a template or pattern and subclasses 25+ for a
    fusion bonding apparatus in which an applicator (e.g., of heat of pressure
    etc.) is movable along a seam during fusion.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 48+ for a metallurgical device
    for cutting metal by a flame including a support for proper manipulation of
    the cutting device.


CLS 432/34
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which an element of the apparatus
    is operated or controlled by engagement with a work unit, or by a holder
    for a work unit that is not a part of the apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 52 for a cooking stove using liquid
    or gaseous fuel, the feed valve for which is controlled by the weight of
    the article being heated.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 518 for an electrical heater the switch
    for which is responsive to the weight, position of presence of a body to be
    heated.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclass 9 for a metal fusion bonding
    apparatus responsive to the presence, absence, size or other condition of
    the work being bonded.


CLS 432/35
TXT Apparatus under class definition having an element specially provided to be
    destroyed or consumed by breaking or fusing upon the occurrence of a
    selected condition or event to protect the apparatus or its surroundings by
    relieving an unsafe stress or shutting down the heat emitter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclasses 3 and 4 for movable
    closure released or actuated by a fusible connection.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 504.1 and 504.3 for a
    fusible type safety device in a boiler.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 287.5 for a stove having fusible
    released damper.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 72+ for a heat destructible or fusible
    control element in a fluid handling system of general utility.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, subclass 42 for a fusible device adapted for
    use in fire extinguishing apparatus.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 21 for the control of a burner, per se, by a
    combustion destructible element.


CLS 432/36
TXT Apparatus under the class definition that has a means that senses a
    condition or change of condition and effects a control on the apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 524+ for
    the automatic control of a heater supplying heat to a drier or to a gas or
    vapor and solid contact apparatus.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 160+ for the automatic control of a
    heater for glass manufacturing.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 325+ for the automatic
    control of a food cooking apparatus.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 201+ for the automatic control of a
    combined heating and cooling system where the cooling is more than the
    reduction to ambient temperature of the heated material.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 490+ for the automatic control of the
    power supply, voltage or current of an electrical heater and subclasses
    509+ for an electrical heater having an automatically controlled switch.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, appropriate subclass
    for an automatically operating temperature or humidity controlling
    mechanism actuating a broadly recited device that modifies temperature or
    humidity.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 2+ for the automatic control of an
    enclosure heating system comprising a combination of heat generators or a
    combination of a heat generator and a heat distribution system.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 130+
    for data processing control systems wherein the control system is claimed
    generically, and subclasses 477.01+ for the application of a computer in
    the manufacturing of a product which includes heating.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 18+ for the automatic control of a
    combustion device, per se.


CLS 432/37
TXT Apparatus under subclass 36 in which the control includes a device
    responsive to changes in the composition of work, of work atmosphere
    surrounding the work, or of exhaust material withdrawn from the work zone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids subclass 557 for the
    automatic control of the humidity of the contacting gas in a drier or in
    gas-solid contact device.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 223+ for the automatic control of a
    combined heating and cooling system by a humidity sensor.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers subclass 61.03 for a
    smoke responsive switch.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 44 for a
    control system responding to and controlling humidity.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 50+ for (a) an analytical or
    analytical-control device determining qualitatively or quantitatively the
    presence of one or more chemical constituents of a material which involves
    a chemical reaction or (b) combination of a test or measurement and means
    for regulating a chemical reaction.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 76 for the control of a burner, per se, by a
    means responsive to the composition of the combustion products of the
    burner.


CLS 432/38
TXT Apparatus under subclass 36 in which the flow of a fluid protecting the
    apparatus from injury, or protective structure, is controlled; or in which
    a means sensing the condition of such fluid or structure exerts a control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    431,    Combustion, subclass 23 for the automatic control of means
    protecting a component of a burner from combustion heat.


CLS 432/39
TXT Apparatus under subclass 36 in which the means responding to a sensed
    condition controls the operation of a system of regenerators recovering the
    heat of a furnace exhaust.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for a process of operating a furnace utilizing a heat storage mass.


CLS 432/40
TXT Apparatus under subclass 36 effecting a control on an operating parameter
    of a hot blast stove, that is, of a structure comprising a combustion
    products generator and a mass of heat storage bricks in which the
    combustion products heat the bricks and the bricks after being heated heat
    a stream of air.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for a process of heating a fluid using a heat storage mass.


CLS 432/41
TXT Apparatus under subclass 36 in which the control is of means dislodging,
    removing, collecting or flushing out a material undesirable at all times or
    at a particular time of operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for a process including cleaning, purging or preventing undesirable
    accretion in a heating apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 29+ for a combustion device not having
    material heating features including a means automatically controlling a
    purging or scavenging arrangement.


CLS 432/42
TXT Apparatus under subclass 36 in which the control is (1) of a means
    establishing or adjusting the position of a heat applicator relative to the
    work; (2) of a cooling means that prevents overheat of the work; (3) of a
    protective atmosphere supply or (4) of a baffle means that shields work
    from a heat applicator.


CLS 432/43
TXT Apparatus under subclass 36 in which the control terminates the application
    of heat to a unit or batch of work by deactivating the heater, by removing
    the work from the heating zone, or by cooling the heating zone.


CLS 432/44
TXT Apparatus under subclass 43 in which a cooling means or cooling period
    timer is activated in correlation with the termination of the heating.


CLS 432/45
TXT Apparatus under subclass 36 in which the control is (1) of a means moving
    work into, within, or discharging it from, a zone in which it is heated or
    cooled or (2) by a means sensing quantity, position or movement of the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for a heating apparatus in which an article or template follower
    positions a heat applicator relative to the article.

    34,     for a heating apparatus having an operating or controlling device
    responding to the presence or absence of a discrete work unit or removable
    unit holder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 525 for a
    heater controlled by the tension or breaking or web or strand in a drying
    apparatus and subclass 560 for the automatic control of the rate of treated
    material motion in a dryer.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 447 for cut off of fuel to
    a water heater responsive to the quantity of water in the heater and
    subclass 451.1 for the automatic control of a boiler feeder.


CLS 432/46
TXT Apparatus under subclass 36 in which the control shuts off or prevents
    operation of a heater upon the sensing of an unsafe condition and so
    disables the apparatus that external intervention is necessary to return it
    to an operative condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 65+ for a combustion failure responsive
    fuel safety cut-off for a burner.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 21 for a
    closed fluid heater having an automatic safety cut-out.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 18+ for combustion devices, per se, having
    automatic control systems most of which are of the shut down type.


CLS 432/47
TXT Apparatus under subclass 36 in which pressure within a work chamber, either
    of the atmosphere of the chamber or of fluid being heated, is sensed or
    controlled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for a process of modulating or stabilizing the temperature or
    pressure of the atmosphere in a heating chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 558 for the
    automatic control of the gas or vapor pressure in a treating enclosure of a
    drier or of a residual gas and solid contact device.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 279+and 281+ for an automatic control
    responsive to or controlling the pressure in a combined heating and cooling
    system.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 160 for a separatory
    distillation column having an automatic temperature or pressure control
    means.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 496 for a pressure responsive control of
    the power supply to an electrical heater.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclasses 26+ for
    an automatic temperature control system for a closed fluid heater that is
    pressure operated.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 19 for automatic control of a burner
    responsive to pressure in a combustion chamber.


CLS 432/48
TXT Apparatus under subclass 36 in which (1) in the feeding of inert or
    treating fluid is controlled or (2) the cooling, dilution, withdrawal,
    return, mixing, by-pass, circulation or recirculation of work chamber gas
    in or from a work chamber is controlled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 565 for the
    automatic control of the flow of a treating gas or vapor in a drier or in a
    residual gas-solid contact device.


CLS 432/49
TXT Apparatus under subclass 36 in which heat generating structure or structure
    by which heat is transmitted to the work is controlled or its condition
    sensed.


CLS 432/50
TXT Apparatus under the class definition with means supporting, cleaning or
    protecting a device sensing a condition of the apparatus or of the work.


CLS 432/51
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which (1) the time in which or
    length of time taken to perform an operation is controlled, (2) there is a
    fixed continuous sequential or fixed repetitive operation, or (3) there is
    a means terminating a single operation in a fixed position to restart an
    additional cycle, which cycle is more complex than a mere starting or
    stopping of a single device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 232; 238+ for a residual heat exchange
    system controlled by a time or program arrangement.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 492+ for the automatic control, by a
    system comprising timing or cycling means, of the power supply to an
    electrical heating device.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 46 for a
    temperature control system including a timing element, for nominally
    recited temperature modifier.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 18+ for a residual combustion device, per
    se, controlled by a timer, programmer, retarder or condition responsive
    control.


CLS 432/52
TXT Apparatus under subclass 51 in which the means controls heating or
    manipulative operations on discrete work article or on a body of charge
    material handled as a unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for a condition responsive control discharging, or stopping the
    heating of, a unit or batch and including a cool-down timer or means.


CLS 432/53
TXT Apparatus subclass 52 in which the means controls (1) a heating chamber
    access closure or a heater and (2) a work unit advancer or manipulator.


CLS 432/54
TXT Apparatus under class definition including a passage connected to be
    supplied with both a heating fluid and a fluid to be heated and flow
    control system for the two fluids having structure by which the flow of one
    fluid is controlled by the same actuator as the other fluid or is made
    dependent upon the actuation of the other controller.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for condition responsive selection or load balancing of furnace
    exhaust heated regenerators.

    40,     for condition responsive control of a hot blast stove.

    51+,    for a control system for heating structure including a timing,
    programming or cycling means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 309+ for a reversing valve, per se, of
    the regenerative furnace type.


CLS 432/55
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which means are provided for
    relating various parts of the heating apparatus so that upon operation of
    one part another operating part is cut-off, disabled, stopped or operated.


CLS 432/56
TXT Apparatus under subclass 55 in which the operation of a baffle or furnace
    door is correlated with the operation of a device moving work within,
    feeding work into, or removing it from a heating zone.


CLS 432/57
TXT Apparatus under subclass 55 in which the operation of a means supplying,
    removing or circulating a heating gas (e.g., combustion product etc.) is
    correlated with the operation of a means moving work within, inserting it
    into, or providing access to a heating zone.


CLS 432/58
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having means by which work is moved
    for scattered by the flow or pressure of heating gases, the arrangement
    being such that the work would not be so moved or scattered in the absence
    of the heating gases.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for a heating process including the maintainance of a fluidized bed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 576+ a
    drying or gas and vapor contact apparatus with fluid current conveying of
    the treated material; and subclass 640 for such apparatus in which a sheet,
    web, or strand is supported or guided by a fluid current.

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 243+ for a refuse incinerator wherein the
    refuse is suspended in or supported by a fluid medium.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclasses 4.1+ for a device for
    concentrating a liquid by evaporation involving a gaseous current and a
    spray device.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 79+ for a
    device melting and spraying solid material.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 12 for a process of forming solid particles from a molten mass by
    a gaseous jet or blast.


CLS 432/59
TXT Apparatus under class definition in which the work is in the form of a
    sheet, web, or strand and the apparatus flexes, coils or loops the work as
    it is advanced longitudinally through the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for a process including advancing a strip, strand or web
    longitudinally through a heating zone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclasses 81, 92, and 106 for
    apparatus for expanding (e.g., stretching or spreading) a running length
    web of cloth and further including means for heating or drying the cloth.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 618+ for a
    drying or gas and solid contact apparatus for treating a running length of
    sheet, web or; and see the reference to Class 26, Textiles:  Cloth
    Finishing, hereabove.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 128 for a process of or apparatus for
    coiling or curving longitudinally moving metal with modification or control
    of the temperature of the work or of the machine.


CLS 432/60
TXT Apparatus under subclass 59 in which the longitudinally moving work is
    flexed over an internally heated roll member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228,    for an internally heated roll, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 110+ for a
    rotary drum drier about which work to be dried is supported or flexed.


CLS 432/61
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including structure (1) breaking up
    lumps formed from particulate material by the heating or (2) dividing work
    particles by size with recombining.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 11 for a
    combination involving heating and classifying particulate work, except
    where the sole separation is a portion of the material for further heating
    with return of the separated portion.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution of Disintegration, subclass 23 for a
    residual combined comminuting and heat treating process; and subclasses 65+
    for a comminuting apparatus having means for modifying the temperature of
    the work material.


CLS 432/62
TXT Apparatus under class definition (1) having a specific geographic
    relationship, or (2) that is specifically related to but is ancillary to a
    nominally recited building or machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 648 for a power plant procedure including
    the production of withdrawable product or the use of the plant steam for
    external heating.

    132,    Toilet, subclass 118 for a comb having a heater.

    184,    Lubrication, subclasses 104.1+ for a lubricator having heating or
    cooling means.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 201+ for a heater specialized to the
    use of electricity combined with a diverse type art device.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 150 for an article dispenser having a
    merely nominal heating or cooling means for the article handled.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 146.1 for a dispenser with merely nominal
    heating or cooling means.


CLS 432/63
TXT Apparatus under subclass 62 in which the heat generator or applicator is
    mounted to heat an element of an internal combustion engine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines subclass 142.5 for an internal
    combustion engine having a heating means.


CLS 432/64
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including structure by which a stream
    of fluid is directed to sweep across an opening of a heating or combustion
    chamber to hinder or prevent entry or discharge of gases through the
    opening.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 179 for a solid fuel furnace having a fluid
    screen for one of its openings.

    454,    Ventilation, subclasses 188+ for a building having a door or window
    provided with a fluid curtain.


CLS 432/65
TXT Apparatus under class definition comprising (1) a baffle mounted in front
    of and spaced from a furnace door acting to shield persons or articles in
    front of the door from the heat of the furnace; or (2) a structure acting
    to collect and remove any fumes escaping from the work access area.


CLS 432/66
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having a cooling or absorbing surface
    over which gaseous material in or exhausting from a work heating chamber
    passes to condense or absorb a component of the gaseous material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 73+ for a
    drier with means treating the gas or vapor to produce condensation.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 381+ for an open water heater
    having a condenser.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, appropriate subclass for a material
    heater having means condensing evolved vapor to produce a liquid product.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 144+ for a metallurgical
    furnace having a fume arrester.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 56+ for an
    electric furnace combined with a condenser.


CLS 432/67
TXT Apparatus under class definition in which a work contacting heating gas has
    solid impurities removed from it before, during or after contact with the
    work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 119+ for a spark arrestor for a solid fuel
    furnace.


CLS 432/68
TXT Apparatus under subclass 67 in which the separation of the impurities of
    the gas is before admittance of the gas, to or while it is within the work
    zone.


CLS 432/69
TXT Apparatus under subclass 67 having structure by which the separated solid
    material is passed from the separating means to the work chamber from which
    it came or to a second work heating chamber.


CLS 432/70
TXT Apparatus under subclass 67 in which the separator is positioned in a gas
    flow line between the work chamber and a heat exchanger fed from the work
    chamber.


CLS 432/71
TXT Apparatus under subclass 70 in which the separator has structure for the
    removal of the separated solids from the apparatus.


CLS 432/72
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including structure for preparing
    heating chamber fumes for discharge by diluting them, destroying harmful
    vapors in them by combustion, or by purifying them by other means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 685+ for the treatment of power plant
    exhaust.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 144+ for a metallurgical
    furnace having an arrester for metallurgical fume.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 198+ for apparatus for purifying a
    gas by combustion.


CLS 432/73
TXT Apparatus under the class definition in which structure that generates and
    supplies combustion material to, or by which combustion products are
    exhausted from work chamber are mounted on a handling means providing for
    movement between an operative position and a removed position leaving an
    opening providing access to the structure or work chamber.


CLS 432/74
TXT Apparatus under the class definition combined with means catching,
    directing or collecting work atmosphere; work or apparatus material; or
    combustion products that have become waster or undesirable material by
    escaping from a normal confining or directing part of the apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 85 for a
    drier or gas and vapor contact with solids apparatus having an apparatus
    cleaner or escaping material collector.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 119 for a residual combustion device having
    drip or leakage collecting structure.


CLS 432/75
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having a device to render the heating
    apparatus or parts thereof free from undesirable material.

    (1)     Note.  Cleaning means for this subclass requires the installation
    of additional means or connections to treat the apparatus, not the material
    being handled, or the manipulation of the system in some special way to
    secure the cleaning effect.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for a process of heater operation including a step of apparatus
    purging, cleaning or accretion preventing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 85 for a
    drier including structure for cleaning the drier.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 121 for a residual combustion device including
    an apparatus cleaner.


CLS 432/76
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means, other than the parts
    making up the heater and securing them in operative relationship, which
    means aids in the assembly or disassembly, or restores or aids in restoring
    the apparatus to its former condition after injury or decay.


CLS 432/77
TXT Apparatus under the class definition combined with a means by which the
    heated material is cooled during or after heating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 62+ for a
    drier having means cooling the dried material.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 349+ for glass annealing or
    tempering apparatus including heating and cooling means.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 61+ for (1) a temperature control system
    that will both heat and cool a room or chamber (2) a system in which heat
    is added to and removed from a fluid stream, and (3) a residual combination
    of a heater and a cooling means in which the cooler does more than merely
    lower the temperature of heated work toward ambient temperature.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclass for a cooling bed in
    which a bar of metal is conveyed while cooling.


CLS 432/78
TXT Apparatus under subclass 77 in which the heat removed from the work is
    transferred to air on its way to a burner of the work heating apparatus.


CLS 432/79
TXT Apparatus under subclass 78 in which the contact structure is a section of
    a furnace traversed by work fed at the top and moved by gravity to a
    discharge at the bottom, said section receiving work from a section of the
    furnace heating work by combustion of fuel therein and being traversed by
    air passing through the work in the section and entering the combustion
    zone.


CLS 432/80
TXT Apparatus under subclass 78 in which the work being cooled is caused to
    move relative to adjacent work or randomly for better exposure.


CLS 432/81
TXT Apparatus under subclass 74 including a chamber and means by which heat is
    supplied to the chamber and also means by which heat is removed from the
    chamber, the two means being optionally usable.


CLS 432/82
TXT Apparatus under subclass 77 including means by which heat removed from the
    work during cool-down is transferred to work being supplied.


CLS 432/83
TXT Apparatus under subclass 77 in which there is a solid barrier through which
    heat passes holding the work or work atmosphere separate from the cooling
    medium.


CLS 432/84
TXT Apparatus under subclass 83 in which the cooling medium held separate from
    the work in the work cool-down zone is oxidizer or fuel on its way to a
    work heating combustion device.


CLS 432/85
TXT Apparatus under subclass 77 in which the work is cooled down by a liquid
    sprayed on it or in which it is immersed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 111 and 114 apparatus, for the
    metallurgical treatment of solid metal by heat and liquid.


CLS 432/86
TXT Apparatus under class definition with structure receiving treated work that
    is more than the structure necessary to simply clear the heating apparatus
    to receive additional work material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77+,    for apparatus in which the means receiving the work discharged from
    the heating zone is a work cooling device.


CLS 432/87
TXT Apparatus under class the definition including structure moving work to a
    heating zone that is more than is necessary to simply charge the apparatus.


CLS 432/88
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a heating assembly (i.e.,
    work holder and heat source) carried by wheel, skid or handle means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 261 for a lunch wagon; subclass 271.1
    for a heating device mounted to be moved over a surface to heat the
    surface; and subclasses 401+ for a handled, self-heated, heating or burning
    tool.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 227+ for a hand manipulative
    electrical heating tool or instrument and subclasses 386+ for a portable or
    mobile electrically heated device including a container or support for the
    heater material.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 345 for a residual burner having an attached
    handle.


CLS 432/89
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including means whereby a mode or
    condition of operation or use can be changed by shifting or rearranging all
    or some of the parts in a different relationship to each other or by
    addition or omission of a part.

    (1)     Note.  The mode of operation is not considered to be charged by the
    operation of a selector or reversing valve means acting in its intended
    manner to select the direction of flow in a work chamber.


CLS 432/90
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a chamber in which heat is
    applied to work and an associated structure in which vapor is generated
    from a liquid by the application of heat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 7 for a nominal material
    heating furnace and a closed water chamber or conduit located so as to be
    heated by the waste heat of the furnace.


CLS 432/91
TXT Apparatus under subclass 90 including structure by which vapor from the
    boiler is discharged against or passed in heat transferring relationship to
    the work in the chamber.


CLS 432/92
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having in combination with the basic
    heating structure, additional structure; said additional structure (1)
    having a function other than the application of heat to material, or (2)
    serving to perfect the basic heating structure as a whole for its intended
    purpose.

    (1)     Note.  Basic heating structure includes means holding or
    manipulating the work during heating, means for feeding work into a heating
    chamber, and means for returning escaping heat to the heating zone.

    (2)     Note.  The additional structure required by this definition must be
    added to the basic heating structure elements.  A detail of an essential
    element that perfects the element rather than the combination is classified
    below.  For example, a heating apparatus element having protective cooling
    structure in classified in subclasses 233+ and a heating chamber structure
    having expansion relieving or absorbing means is classified in subclass 251.


CLS 432/93
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a work heating enclosure and
    a structure outside of the chamber for holding and heating unenclosed work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 1+ for a domestic type cooking
    stove.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 392 for an electrical heating device
    comprising an oven and a distinct container or support for material to be
    heated.


CLS 432/94
TXT Apparatus under the class definition having (1) two distinctly different
    types of heat generators, (2) a heat generator and a source of heat that is
    not a generator or (3) a combustion type heat generating means using two
    different fuels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 260+ for a residual combustion device burning
    gas or oil and solid fuel.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 36 for a combined solid fuel and
    gaseous and liquid fuel domestic type cooking stove; and subclass 369.1 for
    a steam box for cooking food products including means for utilizing a
    second heating fluid other than steam, for heating material.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 1+ for a furnace
    using a combination of electricity and some other heating medium adapted
    for operation or granular material such as ore, or for handling molten
    material fusing at a very high temperature.

    392,    Electric Resistance Heating Devices, subclasses 307+ for a residual
    electrical heating device combined with at least one other heat source of a
    nonelectrical nature.


CLS 432/95
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a chamber having a
    substantially vertical axis to which material is fed at an elevated level
    for gravitation generally downwardly across a heating surface or through a
    heating gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 165+ for a
    gravity flow type drier.  See the search class note to Class 34 in the
    class definition of Class 432 for the line between Classes 34 and 432.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclasses 120+ for a vertical retort in
    which a material is heated to drive off a condensible component.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclass 154 for a metallurgical shaft
    furnace having a fume arrester and subclasses for a 197+ metallurgical
    shaft furnace. See the search class notes in the class definition of Class
    432 for the line between Classes 266 and 432.


CLS 432/96
TXT Apparatus under subclass 95 in which the work is heated by combustion
    products formed by the burning of material within the work chamber or by
    combustion products produced externally and fed into the chamber.


CLS 432/97
TXT Apparatus under subclass 96 comprising a grid, baffle or restricted passage
    means in the vertically extending work chamber, the means serving to act to
    restrict the downward movement of the solid work but permitting the passage
    of melted material.


CLS 432/98
TXT Apparatus under subclass 96 including a material moving member within, or
    at the chamber outlet for loosening the material for flow or for causing
    movement of the material from the chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclass 85.2 for a vertical
    heating chamber for generating heating or illuminating gas having stirring
    means for the heated material.


CLS 432/99
TXT Apparatus under subclass 96 in which combustion materials are introduced
    into the work material through ports spaced vertically along the work
    chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 297+ for a mere conventional shaft type
    furnace with means for feeding air thereto.


CLS 432/100
TXT Apparatus under subclass 96 in which the work chamber has a work material
    supply port distinct from the opening through which the combustion products
    and any heat generated fumes are discharged.


CLS 432/101
TXT Apparatus under subclass 96 in which the combustion products that contact
    the work in the work chamber are produced in a chamber distinct from the
    work chamber.


CLS 432/102
TXT Apparatus under subclass 95 including a heating surface in the form of a
    tube or flue located within the chamber and across which the work flows.


CLS 432/103
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a work containing chamber
    structure mounted for rotation about a horizontal or slightly inclined
    axis, the rotation of the chamber structure imparting a tumbling motion to
    the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 108+ for a
    rotary drier or gas or vapor contact with solids apparatus.  See the search
    notes in Class 432 for the line between Classes 34 and 432.

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 246 for a refuse incinerator comprising a rotary
    drum.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 89 for a heat exchange comprising a rotary
    drum.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 100 for a directly, and subclass
    136 for an indirectly heated rotary chamber or retort used for producing a
    condensible material from solid work.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 389 for an electrically heated revolving
    container.

    248,    Supports, subclass 130 for a stand for a movable receptacle
    rotating about a horizontal axis.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclass 145 for a rotary metallurgical
    furnace with a fume arrester, and subclasses 163, 173 and 213 for
    metallurgical furnaces of the rotary drum type.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 220+ for an agitator, per se, comprising a
    rotatable mixing chamber.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 84 and 85+ for a
    tilting or rotating electrical arc furnace.

    384,    Bearings, subclass 549 for an antifriction bearing for a rotary
    drum.


CLS 432/104
TXT Apparatus under subclass 103 including means for engaging the top or rim of
    a stove hole of a domestic cooking stove for supporting the drum on the
    stove.


CLS 432/105
TXT Apparatus under subclass 103 having structure by which combustion products
    are generated within the work chamber or by which externally generated
    combustion products are fed into the chamber.


CLS 432/106
TXT Apparatus under subclass 105 in which (1) the drum includes two distinct
    chambers connected to provide for serial flow of work material or (2) the
    drum has connected thereto a separate chamber that received work from or
    feeds it to the drum chamber.


CLS 432/107
TXT Apparatus under subclass 105 in which the exterior surface of the drum is
    heated or in which there is a flue extending through the work space of the
    drum that conducts a hot material in indirect heat exchanging relationship
    with work material within the drum.


CLS 432/108
TXT Apparatus under subclass 105 having a structural feature providing for
    continuous movement of the work material from the inlet of the drum toward
    and through the drum outlet.


CLS 432/109
TXT Apparatus under subclass 108 with structure feeding a combustion material
    or a material that reacts with the work at zones spaced axially along the
    drum structure.


CLS 432/110
TXT Apparatus under subclass 108 including structure that provides (1) for
    different rates of heating of the work at different zones as it moves along
    the drum or (2) for different rates of movement of the material along the
    drum.


CLS 432/111
TXT Apparatus under subclass 108 in which the work material and combustion
    products move from drum end to drum end in opposite directions.


CLS 432/112
TXT Apparatus under subclass 103 in which the work carried by the drum receives
    heat by contact with a heated drum surface or by radiation from a heat
    radiating solid structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor With Solids, subclasses 140, 141, and 142
    for a rotary tumbler drum type drier having a broadly recited indirect
    heating means.


CLS 432/113
TXT Apparatus under subclass 112 comprising structure for feeding gaseous
    material into or removing it from the work chamber of the drum.


CLS 432/114
TXT Apparatus under subclass 112 including a heat emitting conduit passing
    through the work space of the chamber of the structure or through or along
    the cylindrical structure of the drum.


CLS 432/115
TXT Apparatus under subclass 103 having a stationary member and a rotary drum
    and including a means preventing or controlling dilution or escape of the
    drum atmosphere of their junction, the means being a flexible or cooler
    seal or an air curtain type flow controller.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for a fluid curtain at a work chamber port or work path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, cross-reference art collection 903 seal for a rotating kiln or
    drum or cross-reference art collection 930 for a seal including a heating
    or cooling feature.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, appropriate subclass for a seal, per se,
    for a tubular structure.


CLS 432/116
TXT Apparatus under subclass 103 including structure protecting an element of
    the drum device from heat damage by cooling the element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    for a cooler seal in a rotary tumbler drum device.


CLS 432/117
TXT Apparatus under subclass 103 including structure by which work, combustion
    material, inert gas or a treating agent is fed to the rotary drum.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 130+ for a
    tumbler drum drier with gas or vapor flow means; and subclass 142 for a
    tumbler drum drier of the axial material feed type.


CLS 432/118
TXT Apparatus under subclass 103 in which the drum comprises structure
    effective to act on the work while within the drum to stir or advance it.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    366,    Agitating, subclass 224 for a stirrer, and subclasses 225+ for a
    deflector in a rotatable mixing chamber.


CLS 432/119
TXT Apparatus under subclass 103 in which the drum comprises an outer
    cylindrical member and an inner layer made up of ceramic modules.


CLS 432/120
TXT Apparatus under class definition including (1) a chamber for containing
    work to be heated and (2) a source of heat heating the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219+,   for residual apparatus for heating liquid or gaseous work in a
    flowing stream.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 201+ for a
    drier comprising a house, kiln, or container. See the search class notes in
    the class definition for the line between Classes 34 and 432.

    126,    Stove and Furnaces, subclasses 19+ for a domestic cooking stove
    having an oven; subclass 343.5 for a melting furnace; and subclass 344 for
    an open water heater.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 385+ for specific electrical heating
    structure heating work in or on a container, enclosure, or support.

    237,    Heating Systems, appropriate subclass, for a system for heating a
    room, house or other enclosing structure including combinations of two or
    more heat generators or a heat generator combined with a system for
    distributing the heat.

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 78 and 79+ for a material shaping mold
    having heating means.


CLS 432/121
TXT Apparatus under subclass 120 including (1) mechanism which carries or moves
    or stirs work material in bulk or as a unit or (2) structure by which work
    is directed, guided, or otherwise caused to move progressively through or
    along different sections of a heating chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162,    for an unmechanized shelf, rack or tray on a guide or pivot
    carrying work into a heating chamber but not progressing it therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 360+ for an oven
    specialized to cooking food having a conveyor for the food.


CLS 432/122
TXT Apparatus under subclass 121 having means for handling or manipulating a
    distinct individual work unit as an entity to segregate it from other
    units, change its orientation, or position it within the chamber to present
    diverse areas of the article to diverse heating effects.


CLS 432/123
TXT Apparatus under subclass 122 in which a handling means outside of the
    heating chamber carries a distinct article so that one part of the article
    is outside of the chamber and an end or edge of the article is within the
    chamber.


CLS 432/124
TXT Apparatus under subclass 122 including structure by which the movement of
    the article produces a rotation of the article about its axis or a change
    of the angle of the axis of the article relative to the axis of the chamber.


CLS 432/125
TXT Apparatus under subclass 122 including a substantially vertical work path
    in which the individual articles rest upon each other to form a stack, the
    articles being supplied to, removed from, or advanced along the stack by a
    pushing device.


CLS 432/126
TXT Apparatus under subclass 122 in which work articles are arranged in
    alignment along a path and a pushing device moves the column of articles
    along the path in alignment.


CLS 432/127
TXT Apparatus under subclass 126 including means to overcome any unevenness of
    the heating of the article produced by the shielding effect of the article
    support upon which the article slides.


CLS 432/128
TXT Apparatus under subclass 121 in which work progresses through two distinct
    chambers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 180 for a
    drier having plural units each comprising a stationary receptacle or tube
    with an agitator or conveyor and subclasses 203+ for a housing with
    conveyors providing plural zigzag treated material paths.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 351+ for a filled
    receptacle type of food cooking apparatus having successive treating zones
    or units.


CLS 432/129
TXT Apparatus under subclass 128 in which the chambers are formed by vertically
    spaced substantially horizontal shelves or troughs and the work follows a
    downward path, dropping from chamber to chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 178 for a shelf
    or zigzag treated material flow type of drier.


CLS 432/130
TXT Apparatus under subclass 129 including structure by which combustion
    products are fed to the work path or fuel is fed to the path for combustion
    therein.


CLS 432/131
TXT Apparatus under subclass 130 comprising horizontal annular shelves having a
    common vertical axis and a rotary shaft at the axis having a work pushing
    arm arranged to sweep a shelf.


CLS 432/132
TXT Apparatus under subclass 129 in which a shelf or trough transfers heat to
    the work indirectly by conduction from heat supplied to the shelf or trough.


CLS 432/133
TXT Apparatus under subclass 128 including structure supplying combustion
    products to the work path or supplying fuel for combustion therein.


CLS 432/134
TXT Apparatus under subclass 121 having structure by which work is acted upon
    by vibrating or jarring means to agitate it or to cause it to advance along
    the path of travel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 164 for a
    drier of the treated material vibrating type.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 521, 533, 594+, 609, and 752.1
    for a vibrating trough conveyor, per se.


CLS 432/135
TXT Apparatus under subclass 121 in which the work within the chamber receives
    heat indirectly from a heating surface movably mounted to pass through or
    across the work or to support and carry the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclasses 25.1+ for a concentrating
    evaporator having a closed chamber in which the fluid being concentrated is
    heated by a rotatable agitator or coil.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 86+ for a heat exchanger including a
    movable heating or cooling surface.


CLS 432/136
TXT Apparatus under subclass 121 including structure by which combustion
    products are admitted to or formed within the work chamber.


CLS 432/137
TXT Apparatus under subclass 136 in which the work moving device is a work
    supporting section of the bottom wall of the work chamber, said section of
    the chamber wall being mounted for movement relative to the rest of the
    chamber on an axle or guide means outside of the heated work chamber.


CLS 432/138
TXT Apparatus under subclass 137 in which the floor section is carried for
    movement about a vertical axis.


CLS 432/139
TXT Apparatus under subclass 136 including a blade or plough mounted for
    movement through or against particulate work to advance the work or change
    the interrelationship of the particles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 225+ for a multiple hearth dryer provided in a
    refuse incinerator.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 241+ for an agitator having a stationary
    mixing chamber and a movable stirrer.


CLS 432/140
TXT Apparatus under subclass 139 in which the blade or plough is carried or
    moved by an endless belt, rope or chain.


CLS 432/141
TXT Apparatus under subclass 136 in which the work is progressed through the
    work chamber on a carrying structure mounted for rotation about a central
    axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162,    for a work chamber having shelf or rack on a guide or pivot that is
    manually operated and serves merely to position work within the chamber.


CLS 432/142
TXT Apparatus under subclass 141 wherein the work support is a horizontal
    platform mounted for rotation about a vertical axis.


CLS 432/143
TXT Apparatus under subclass 136 in which the chamber means includes a distinct
    work inlet opening, a distinct outlet opening, and structure moving work
    from the inlet to the outlet or defining a path directing or guiding work
    for such movement.


CLS 432/144
TXT Apparatus under subclass 143 including structure by which heating gases are
    withdrawn from the work path and readmitted to the path at a different
    point.


CLS 432/145
TXT Apparatus under subclass 144 in which the flow is caused (1) by a plurality
    of mechanical gas movers discharging the gas at points spaced along the
    path of travel of the work or (2) by a mechanical gas mover feeding a
    distributor discharging at regions spaced along the path of travel of the
    work.


CLS 432/146
TXT Apparatus under subclass 143 in which fuel is fed into the work path at
    points spaced along the path for combustion in the path.


CLS 432/147
TXT Apparatus under subclass 146 in which the burner includes structure in the
    path of flame that, by its mass, conductivity and composition, is
    particularly adapted to discharge radiant energy toward the work path when
    heated.


CLS 432/148
TXT Apparatus under subclass 143 having (1) a closed combustion products
    conduit exposed to the path; (2) a baffle guiding the combustion products
    or shielding work; or (3) a distinct heat radiating structure adjacent the
    path.


CLS 432/149
TXT Apparatus under subclass 143 in which a combustion product or a combustion
    feed material is discharged into the work path from a plurality of ports
    spaced longitudinally along the path.


CLS 432/150
TXT Apparatus under subclass 143 in which combustion products are withdrawn
    from the work path through a plurality of distinct ports.


CLS 432/151
TXT Apparatus under subclass 121 including means for stirring a batch of
    material in a closed bottomed, liquid-tight vessel to which access is had
    from the top and to which heat is applied externally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 179+ for a
    drier comprising a stationary receptacle or tube with agitator or conveyor.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclass 33 for an open pan having a
    rake means for evaporating a liquid for the specific purpose of
    concentrating it.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 109.1 for a heat exchange structure having
    agitating or stirring means that is equally adapted to heat or to cool the
    agitated or stirred material.

    366,    Agitating, subclass 149 for a mixing chamber having a heating
    jacket.


CLS 432/152
TXT Apparatus under subclass 121 including an element or distinct structure by
    which the atmosphere of the work space is supplied, removed or circulated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 181+ for a
    drier having a stationary receptacle with a conveyor and structure
    providing for flow or gas or vapor in contact with the treated material.


CLS 432/153
TXT Apparatus under subclass 121 having means by which the work itself or its
    carrier is caused to slide directly on a heat emitting surface of the work
    chamber.


CLS 432/154
TXT Apparatus under subclass 153 in which there is a pitched blade rotatable
    about an axis extending along the heated surface for sliding work along the
    surface.


CLS 432/155
TXT Apparatus under subclass 121 in which the heat emitting surface is heated
    by tortuous, branched or multiple combustion product flue means.


CLS 432/156
TXT Apparatus under subclass 120 in which the heating chamber includes
    structure specializing it to the reception and positioning of a removable
    pot or crucible.


CLS 432/157
TXT Apparatus under subclass 156 in which the furnace is mounted on supports
    providing for tilting or rocking movement to pour out the contents of the
    crucible or pot.


CLS 432/158
TXT Apparatus under subclass 156 in which the pot or crucible positioning
    structure is in the form of a pedestal surrounded by an annular chamber
    into which combustion material is admitted for burning therein.


CLS 432/159
TXT Apparatus under subclass 120 in which fuel and oxidizer react within the
    work chamber to produce heat or in which a combustion device produces hot
    gases that are fed into the work chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96+,    for a gravity flow shaft type furnace having combustion products
    generated in or fed to the shaft.

    105+,   for a tumbler type rotary drum furnace having combustion products
    generated in or fed to the drum.

    136+,   for apparatus having combustion products generated in or fed to a
    work chamber that also includes means by which work is progressed or moved
    mechanically in the chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, appropriate subclasses for a furnace in which solid
    material is burned.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 159+ for a fluid fuel disperser installed in
    a chamber not having a work related feature.


CLS 432/160
TXT Apparatus under subclass 159 in which the furnace as a whole or its
    structure retaining a pourable material is mounted so that the furnace
    contents may be discharged over an upper edge by tilting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157,    for a furnace specially adapted to receive a removable pot or
    crucible mounted to discharge the contents of the pot or receptacle by
    tilting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 243+ for a converter for
    treating molten metal comprising a crucible or pot having tilting or other
    rotating movement.


CLS 432/161
TXT Apparatus under subclass 159 in which means are provided (1) for separating
    melted from unmelted solid work material, (2) for retaining all or part of
    the melt after removal thereof from the unmelted solid or (3) for directing
    flow of such melted work material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97,     for a gravity flow shaft type furnace having a flow controller
    restraining solid and passing melt.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 200+ a heating furnace modified
    in its structure to adapt it to the collection of flow of molten
    metalliferous material.


CLS 432/162
TXT Apparatus under subclass 159 in which work is supported by a shelf, tray,
    or rack mounted for movement on guide or pivot means or in which the work
    chamber is mounted on a guide or pivot means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141,    for a rotability mounted work carrier that moves the work
    mechanically or progresses it from zone to zone during heating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 184+ for a
    drier having a rotary or swinging carrier or rack and subclasses 192+ for a
    drier of the removable shelf or tray type.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 338 for a rotary shelf or rack for a
    cooking oven and subclasses 339+ for a sliding shelf or rack for a cooking
    oven.


CLS 432/163
TXT Apparatus under subclass 159 including means forming two distinct work
    chambers that are parts of the same material heating apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    for plural distinct serially connected work chambers, one of which
    is of the rotary drum tumbler type; and subclasses 128+ for plural distinct
    chambers having means for progressing work or moving it mechanically.


CLS 432/164
TXT Apparatus under subclass 163 in which the two work chambers form a common
    flow path for the combustion products generated in or supplied to the
    apparatus, the products passing first through one and then through the
    other of the chambers.


CLS 432/165
TXT Apparatus under subclass 164 including a regenerator type heat exchanger
    connected in line with the serial connected work chambers.


CLS 432/166
TXT Apparatus under subclass 164 in which the plurality of chambers exist as
    separate structures.


CLS 432/167
TXT Apparatus under subclass 164 in which a dividing wall common to adjacent
    chambers is destructible or removable.


CLS 432/168
TXT Apparatus under subclass 164 in which one work chamber has opening in the
    floor for passage of the combustion products to or from another work
    chamber.


CLS 432/169
TXT Apparatus under subclass 164 in which an opening through a common wall
    forms a passage for combustion products.


CLS 432/170
TXT Apparatus under subclass 164 in which the structure has a flue or header to
    which the structurally related work chambers may be connected by branch
    flues to provide for selective parallel or serial connection.


CLS 432/171
TXT Apparatus under subclass 163 in which the two chambers are substantially
    noncommunicating and contain or are supplied with gases of distinctly
    different chemical compositions as work chamber atmospheres.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for a process of heating or heater operation, including passing
    work through diverse or temperature graduated treating zones.


CLS 432/172
TXT Apparatus under subclass 163 in which the two chambers are fed with
    combustion products from a common combustion product generator.


CLS 432/173
TXT Apparatus under subclass 159 in which a conduit, passage, or other
    structure by which combustion material for heating the chamber is fed to,
    or removed from, a heating chamber is protected from damage by a cooling
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclasses 6.5 and 6.7+ for a
    cooling device for a gas or air port of a nominal furnace comprising a
    closed chamber or conduit for water.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 132.3 for a
    spray nozzle not specialized to combustion cooled by a heat exchange fluid.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 160 for a combustion chamber having no work
    material handling feature in which combustion material feed structure is
    cooled by a fluid additional to the combustion materials.


CLS 432/174
TXT Apparatus under subclass 159 including a flue by which combustion products
    by-pass the work chamber or exchange heat indirectly with the atmosphere of
    the work chamber and which are discharged outside of the work chamber.


CLS 432/175
TXT Apparatus under subclass 159 in which a chamber wall is permeated or swept
    by fuel or oxidizer and combustion takes place on the surface of the wall
    to cause the wall to become a glowing, heat radiating surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 92 for a direct heat radiating
    heating stove including an incandescent fire grate heated by gaseous or
    liquid fuel.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 326+ for a porous radiant surface burner,
    per se; and subclasses 347+ for a burner, per se, having an incandescing or
    reflecting component.


CLS 432/176
TXT Apparatus under subclass 159 including means by which a portion of the
    heating gas passing from the work zone of the work chamber is delivered
    back into the work zone or into combustion material being fed to the
    chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for a process of controlling the flame position or work atmosphere
    of a heating apparatus including recycling the work atmosphere; and
    subclasses 144+ for a work chamber having means circulating work atmosphere
    along or across a path of travel of work from a work inlet to a work outlet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 203+ for refuse incinerators or solid fuel
    furnaces provided with exhaust gas recirculation means.


CLS 432/177
TXT Apparatus under subclass 159 in which an exhaust flue from the work chamber
    is within or in heat exchanging relationship with a wall of the work
    chamber to transfer heat therewith.


CLS 432/178
TXT Apparatus under subclass 159 in which combustion feed moving toward the
    work chamber receives heat indirectly through a wall of the work chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    431,    Combustion, subclass 161 for a combustion chamber not specialized
    to the heating of materials in which the heat of the chamber heats the
    chamber feed.


CLS 432/179
TXT Apparatus under subclass 159 including structure in which the gaseous
    material exhausted from the work chamber transfer heat to combustion
    material being fed to the chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for a means between the work chamber and the heat exchanger
    separating solid particles or slag from the exhausting work chamber gas.


CLS 432/180
TXT Apparatus under subclass 179 utilizing a heat storage mass that alternately
    receives heat from chamber exhaust gases and later discharges the stored
    heat to combustion feed material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for a process of operating a furnace using a heat storage mass.

    39,     for the automatic control of the selection or load balancing of
    furnace exhaust heated regenerators.

    54,     for a controller alternating the flow of heated and heating fluid.

    165,    for plural work chambers serially connected for flow of combustion
    products and having a serially connected regenerator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 4+ for a regenerative type heat
    exchanger, per se.


CLS 432/181
TXT Apparatus under subclass 180 in which the discharge from the chamber occurs
    successively or alternately from spaced exhaust ports and to spaced heat
    storage masses.


CLS 432/182
TXT Apparatus under subclass 181 in which the combustion feed material heated
    by the regenerator is fuel.


CLS 432/183
TXT Apparatus under subclass 159 in which the work chamber conforms in shape to
    an annular article and also has article conforming product supply or
    distribution structure.


CLS 432/184
TXT Apparatus under subclass 159 including structure forming an enclosure
    having one or more openings or an open front through which an article is
    partially inserted to project into the enclosure to be heated by combustion
    products.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 202 for drying
    apparatus of the article inserted type.


CLS 432/185
TXT Apparatus under subclass 159 comprising a cabinet having a combustion
    products generator in its lower interior with a combustion product previous
    divider thereabove defining separate work and burner chambers in the
    cabinet.


CLS 432/186
TXT Apparatus under subclass 159 in which combustion takes place in a chamber
    distinct from the work chamber and the combustion products pass from the
    combustion chamber into the work chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 218+ for a
    house, kiln or container with gas or vapor circulation for contact with the
    treated material.  The gas may be combustion products.  However, the
    combination including a specific combustion product generator is in Class
    432.


CLS 432/187
TXT Apparatus under subclass 186 including a line or opening feeding a material
    to the combustion products to form a diluted mixture in the work chamber.


CLS 432/188
TXT Apparatus under subclass 186 in which (1) a wall common to the two chambers
    conducts heat from the combustion to the work chamber; or (2) a flue
    conducting the combustion products between the two chambers includes a
    section indirectly heating the work chamber.


CLS 432/189
TXT Apparatus under subclass 186 in which combustion air is forced into the
    combustion chamber by a pump or a steam jet.


CLS 432/190
TXT Apparatus under subclass 186 comprising means causing the products of
    combustion to flow both upwardly and downwardly in the work chamber either
    alternately, or simultaneously during work treatment.


CLS 432/191
TXT Apparatus under subclass 186 comprising two combustion chambers feeding
    combustion products to a single work chamber.


CLS 432/192
TXT Apparatus under subclass 186 in which a surface of the work chamber has a
    plurality of openings or passages over a substantial portion of its area so
    that the combustion products enter or leave the chamber over essentially
    the entire area of the surface.


CLS 432/193
TXT Apparatus under subclass 159 in which work atmosphere is withdrawn from the
    work chamber through plural ports spaced from each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    192,    for a work chamber fed by a distinct combustion chamber, the supply
    or exhaust from the work chamber being through a wall floor or roof having
    multiple perforations.


CLS 432/194
TXT Apparatus under subclass 159 including a structure within the work chamber
    (1) supporting work, (2) directing the flow of combustion products within
    the work chamber, or (3) shielding work or an apparatus element within the
    chamber from radiant heat.


CLS 432/195
TXT Apparatus under subclass 159 in which the charge rests on the bottom of the
    furnace and is heated by hot gases passing over it; the bottom of the
    furnace serving to collect or hold molten material.


CLS 432/196
TXT Apparatus under subclass 159 in which fuel that burns within the work
    chamber or the air supporting combustion within the work chamber, is fed
    into the chamber at plural distinct points spaced from each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146+,   for plural burners longitudinally spaced along a work path;
    subclass 149 for combustion material supply ports spaced along a work path;
    and subclass 150 for spaced combustion product exhaust ports spaced along a
    work path.


CLS 432/197
TXT Apparatus under subclass 120 including a liquid or fluent heat transfer
    medium within the work chamber and forming a part of the apparatus.


CLS 432/198
TXT Apparatus under subclass 120 including structure by which a material of a
    different composition than atmospheric air is admitted to the work chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for a process of establishing or maintaining the composition of the
    atmosphere bathing work being heated.

    37,     for an automatic control responsive to a sensor of the composition
    of the work or work atmosphere; and 159+, for a work chamber in which the
    work is heated by contact with combustion products.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 516+ for a
    residual gas or vapor and solid contact process utilizing a special gas or
    vapor contact with a solid apparatus with means to treat the gas or vapor.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 31+ for a residual cabinet
    having means to treat material with gas or vapor.


CLS 432/199
TXT Apparatus under subclass 120 including a device utilizing mechanical or
    kinetic energy to move the atmosphere in the work chamber in a flow pattern
    providing for the return of some of the atmosphere to repeat its
    transversal of the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for a process of heater operation including recycling of the work
    atmosphere.

    144+,   for apparatus having structure recirculating combustion products
    along a work path extending through a work chamber.

    152,    for a work chamber having a means by which work is moved and a
    means providing for distinct atmosphere supply, removal or recirculation
    structure.

    176,    for a work chamber heating work by combustion products having an
    exhaust return passage or recirculating fan or jet.


CLS 432/200
TXT Apparatus under subclass 120 including an element or structure by which
    atmosphere of the work chamber is vented or admitted.


CLS 432/201
TXT Apparatus under subclass 200 in which air drawn from the atmosphere enters,
    passes through or across the work in the work chamber and discharges as a
    flowing stream.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 218+ for a
    gas-solid contact house, chamber or kiln having gas or vapor circulation.
    The gas or vapor may be heated by a nominal heater; however, a specific
    combustion type heater in this combination makes it classifiable in Class
    432.


CLS 432/202
TXT Apparatus under subclass 201 in which the traversed work is in contact with
    a surface acting to heat the work indirectly or is exposed to an internally
    heated radiating surface.


CLS 432/203
TXT Apparatus under subclass 201 in which the air stream is caused to flow by a
    mechanical, electrical or jet pump.


CLS 432/204
TXT Apparatus under subclass 201 in which the work traversed by the flowing air
    is carried by a movable or removably mounted tray or drawer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 197 for a
    drier of the removable shelf or tray type having gas or vapor circulation
    for contact with the work and having a heater.


CLS 432/205
TXT Apparatus under subclass 200 providing for the supply, removal, or
    maintanence of work atmosphere to establish a pressure in the work chamber
    substantially greater or less than atmospheric pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 92 for a
    drier treating material in a vacuum chamber.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 54, 63, 110+, and
    140+ for an electric furnace in which the material is heated under pressure
    or under a vacuum.


CLS 432/206
TXT Apparatus under subclass 120 including an inner chamber formed by a
    removable hood, open its bottom, that sits on a heating chamber floor to
    form a closed inner work chamber within the heating chamber.


CLS 432/207
TXT Apparatus under subclass 120 including means forming distinct chambers that
    communicate with each other or are formed in the same heating apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128+,   for plural work chambers having heating means and through which
    work is progressed or moved mechanically; and 163+ for plural structurally
    related work chambers in which work is heated by contact with combustion
    products.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclasses 113+ for plural structurally
    related, externally heated chambers in which carbonaceous materials are
    broken down by heat.


CLS 432/208
TXT Apparatus under subclass 207 in which two closed work holding vessels
    providing for discharge of fluid outside of a furnace structure and that
    are necessary parts of the apparatus are mounted on structure providing for
    ready removal in a common heating chamber.


CLS 432/209
TXT Apparatus under subclass 120 including a work chamber traversed by a heat
    emitting tube or rod that supplies heat to the chamber atmosphere or to the
    work therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for a shaft type furnace having a heat emitting tube or flue within
    or traversing the shaft chamber.

    135,    for a work chamber in which a traveling heat emitter carries or
    stirs the work.

    148,    for a work chamber in which work is progressed and heated by
    combustion products and that is also heated by a heat radiator in the
    chamber.


CLS 432/210
TXT Apparatus under subclass 120 in which the work enclosure is a liquid tight
    receptacle having a feed opening near, in or for its top and having a
    normally closed bottom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151,    for a heated pot having means for stirring its contents.

    156,    for a furnace adapted to receive a pot or receptacle in which work
    is heated.

    197,    for a heated tank having a heat transfer liquid or fluent therein
    forming a part of the apparatus.


CLS 432/211
TXT Apparatus under subclass 210 in which the work container is mounted on a
    structure by which a lip of the container may be depressed to cause
    contents to discharge over the lip.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157,    for a furnace particularly adapted to contain a pot or receptacle
    mounted for tilting to discharge the pot or receptacle.

    160,    for a furnace or a work holder of furnace in which work is heated
    by contact with combustion products mounted for tilting discharge.


CLS 432/212
TXT Apparatus under subclass 120 in which combustion products heating the work
    chamber atmosphere move through a conduit means within the wall of the
    chamber or including the chamber wall as a part thereof, the conduit means
    providing a tortuous, branched, or plural passages to distribute heat with
    respect to the chamber while holding the combustion products separated from
    the chamber atmosphere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155,    for a chamber through which work is progressed or moved
    mechanically heated by multiple combustion product flues.


CLS 432/213
TXT Apparatus under subclass 212 including distinct conduits each having its
    own source of combustion products.


CLS 432/214
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising (1) combustion products
    generating structure and a heat storage mass, the combustion products
    discharging through or across the mass to heat the mass or (2) means
    feeding a fuel and oxidizer into a heat storage mass for combustion therein.


CLS 432/215
TXT Apparatus under subclass 214 in which the heat storage mass is a quantity
    of fluent solid particles within a flow structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for a process of heating including the flowing or circulating of a
    particulate heat carrier mass.


CLS 432/216
TXT Apparatus under subclass 214 in which heat storage masses are contained in
    two distinct lines connected cases.


CLS 432/217
TXT Apparatus under subclass 214 including a casing and a partition therein
    defining a distinct combustion chamber and a chamber holding the heat
    storage mass.


CLS 432/218
TXT Apparatus under subclass 217 in which the partition is an annular member
    concentrically arranged within a cylindrical casing.


CLS 432/219
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including a means converting another
    form of energy to heat energy and structure for adding the generated heat
    to a flowing stream of a fluid or plastic material that is either work
    material or a part of the heating apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31+,    for a residual process of heating a liquid.

    40,     for the automatic control of an air heater of the hot blast stove
    type.

    90,     for a residual combination of a boiler and a work heating furnace.

    201+,   for a work chamber to which air from an air heater is supplied to
    flow through the chamber.

    215,    for a heat generator heating a fluent mass of heat storage material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, appropriate subclass for a closed
    water heater.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 344+ for an open water heater;
    subclasses 67+ for a residual heating stove for heating and circulating a
    current of air. subclasses 99+ for a furnace heating air in a jacket for
    distribution to a remote room; and subclasses 500+ for a hot air fireplace;
    subclasses 561+ and 569+ for devices for heating water by solar energy.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 334+ for a residual fluid handling
    system with heating or cooling of the system.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, appropriate subclass for an apparatus of
    general utility in concentrating a liquid.

    196,    Mineral Oils: Apparatus, subclasses 104+ for vaporizing apparatus
    peculiarly designed for use in the distillation of mineral oils.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclasses 163+ for a separatory
    distillation still.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 141+ for a gas and
    liquid contact device having a heat generator.

    392,    Electric Resistance Heating Devices, subclasses 311+ for a fluid
    heater specialized to the use of electricity as the heat source.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 285+ and 307+ for apparatus for
    concentrating liquids in liquids by heat.


CLS 432/220
TXT Apparatus under subclass 219 in which a common heat generator furnishes
    heat to raise the temperature of a fluid and heat energy to a motor that
    drives a mechanical means that increases the pressure or velocity of the
    fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 39.01+ for a device producing hot gases
    under pressure solely disclosed for use in the production of power.


CLS 432/221
TXT Apparatus under subclass 219 having structure by which the heated fluid
    material is (1) directed against work or (2) passed in heat transferring
    relationship to structure for applying heat to work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclass
    for residual structure for drying or for contacting a solid with a gas or
    vapor.  See the search reference in the class definition of Class 432 for
    the line between Classes 34 and 432.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 50+ for a system in which a heat
    generator heats air and having a means for distributing the air to rooms or
    chambers; and subclasses 56+ for a room or chamber heating system in which
    heat from a heat generator is distributed by flowing water.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 128+ for a
    fluid sprinkling, spraying or diffusing device having heating or cooling
    means for the system or system fluid.


CLS 432/222
TXT Apparatus under subclass 219 in which a stream of fluid is heated by mixing
    it with products of combustion from a burner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, 39.53 for a combustion products generator having
    means for the addition of steam or water to the products.  This combination
    is classified in Class 60 even though there is no disclosure for power
    purposes.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 341 for a pot type combustion device including
    an exhaust flue having air feed passages and subclasses 351+ for a flame
    holder having a flame enclosing structure with means feeding air at axially
    spaced points along the flame.


CLS 432/223
TXT Apparatus under subclass 22 including a confining passage by which a stream
    of the gas to be intermingled or a stream of combustion feed fluid is
    passed in heat exchange with the combustion products flowing to the mixing
    zone.


CLS 432/224
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a heat emitter and
    structure by which it is inserted into a hollow article or by which a
    hollow article is positioned about the emitter for the purpose of heating
    the interior of the article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 104+ for a
    drier for hollow articles.

    166,    Wells, subclass 59 for means for burning fuel within a well.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 11 for apparatus for
    boring the Earth including the direct application of heat to the formation.


CLS 432/225
TXT Apparatus under the class definition for heating an article including
    structure for applying heat to the article with elements (1) for engaging
    the article for support of the heating structure by the article or (2) for
    engagement with the article to hold it in fixed operative relationship
    about the article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     for a heater installed on an internal combustion element for
    heating the element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing, or Smoothing, subclasses 82+ for a residual
    flat-iron or smoothing textiles.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 271.1+ for a residual surface
    heater comprising a heat emitter and means supporting the emitter spaced
    from or in contact with a surface to be heated.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 35 for a portable apparatus
    specialized to thawing a pipe or tubular conduit.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 398+ for a
    spraying or diffusing device for combining separately supplied fluids, per
    se, and appropriate subclass for such device supported on and traversing
    work in which the motion of the device is determined by the will of the
    operator.  Such device is often disclosed as a flame torch.


CLS 432/226
TXT Apparatus under the class definition including structure in the form of a
    mask, shield or baffle by which a portion of surface area of an article is
    shielded from direct heating or has heat concentrated therein to provide
    differential heating of the article sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for a process of heating an article with provision for localized
    treating or shielding of a section of the article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 447 for a heat
    distributor for a food cooker.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclass 59 for a heat shield used in metal
    fusion bonding and subclass 214 for the process of bonding while using such
    a shield.


CLS 432/227
TXT Apparatus under the class definition comprising a device producing heat by
    chemical, electrical, or mechanical, means and (1) structure for supporting
    work relative to the heat producing means or (2) structure by which heat is
    applied to work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 1+ for a cooking stove; subclasses
    58+ for a direct heat radiating heating stove; subclasses 204+ for a body
    warmer; subclasses 261+ for a lunch heater; subclasses 263.01+ for a heater
    using a chemical type of heat generator; and 401+ for a hand manipulatable
    tool having a work engaging element and fluid fuel burner.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 200+ for a heating device having a
    more than nominal electrical heater.


CLS 432/228
TXT Apparatus under subclass 227 in which the work supporting or heat applying
    structure comprises a drum having within it a source of heat, and the
    exterior of which is adapted to support work and to apply heat to the
    supported work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for a residual heating structure that advances and flexes a sheet,
    web or strand and that includes an internally heated roll.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 110+ for a
    rotary drum type drier in which the work is treated by the drum exterior.
    See the search note to the class definition of Class 432 for the line
    between Classes 34 and 432.

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclasses 44+ for a textile
    ironing or smoothing machine of the roller press type and subclasses 100+
    for a roller type smoothing implement.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 60 for coating apparatus including a
    heated roll for treating the work.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 410 for a heated, roll type, hand
    manipulatable heating tool.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclass 11.1 for a concentrating
    evaporator using a rotary drum or disk as a moving film support for the
    material being concentrated.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 90+ for a heat exchanger of the rotary
    drum type.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 469+ for a roller specialized for
    heating by electricity that supports and heats material.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 432/229
TXT Apparatus under subclass 227 in which the heat producing means is supported
    on a means for carrying it along a path traversing the article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for a heating device in which an article or template follower
    positions a heating element relative to the article being heated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 25+ for a metal fusion bonding
    apparatus having an applicator of heat, pressure or flux movable during
    fusion.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 48+ for a metallurgical
    blowpipe including a support for proper manipulation of the same.


CLS 432/230
TXT Apparatus under subclass 227 in which the article support provides for
    movement of the article relative to the heat produced by the heat generator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for automatic control of or by means sensing or controlling work
    movement;

    59+,    for structure, flexing, looping, or coiling a sheet, web or strand
    as it advances across or through heating means; and

    122,    for a work chamber with heating means having structure by which the
    work is progressed or moved mechanically therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 386+ for a slice
    toaster or broiler having a conveyor; and subclasses 419+, for a spit or
    impaling type of food cooking device.


CLS 432/231
TXT Apparatus under subclass 227 in which the work support includes structure
    engaging the article to hold it in a fixed horizontal and vertical position
    relative to the heat emitter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclass 129.4 for a heated form for making a
    shoe.

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 387.4+ for a heated or cooled flap or
    seam holder.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 385+ for a slice
    toaster or broiler; and subclasses 419+ for a spit or impaling type of food
    cooking device.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 300+ for a press having means for heating the
    material in the press.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 226+ for a device for heating a
    tool including structure fro positioning the tool relative to the heat
    source.

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclass for a residual device for
    clamping, supporting, or holding an article in position to be operated on
    or treated.


CLS 432/232
TXT Apparatus under subclass 227 in which the structure is a substantially
    horizontal openwork grid or rack for holding work against gravity within
    the flow path of combustion products.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 444+ for cooking
    apparatus including a perforated support for food and an associated drip
    collector; and subclass 450, for cooking apparatus comprising a foraminous
    food support.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 1+ for a cooking stove not having a
    feature specializing it for use with food.


CLS 432/233
TXT An element specialized for use in heating apparatus including structure
    removing heat from the element to keep it from being damaged by the heat of
    the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77+,    for heating apparatus combined with work cooling structure.

    115,    for a tumbler drum furnace having a flexible or cooled seal between
    the rotary and stationary parts.

    116,    for a tumbler drum furnace having protective cooling structure.

    173,    for a furnace heated by combustion within the chamber and having
    protective cooling means for combustion material feed structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 6 for a broadly recited
    furnace having a cooling device comprising a closed chamber of conduit for
    water.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 190+ for a metallurgical shaft
    furnace having cooling means.


CLS 432/234
TXT Apparatus under subclass 233 in which the part is an elongate stationary
    member along which work or a work holder is slid.


CLS 432/235
TXT Apparatus under subclass 233 in which the cooled element is a part of a
    work chute, conveyor or agitator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    for a rotary drum furnace having protective cooling structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 92+ for a hollow stirrer or scraper.


CLS 432/236
TXT Apparatus under subclass 235 in which the cooled element is a work or belt
    supporting roll.


CLS 432/237
TXT Apparatus under subclass 233 in which the cooled element is a part of an
    opening, its cover, a work cover, or the joint of the cover to the heating
    structure e.g. door, cover, door frame, pot rim, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 180 for a solid fuel combustion furnace door
    kept cool by the circulation of steam or air therethrough.


CLS 432/238
TXT Apparatus under subclass 233 in which the cooled element is a part of a
    wall, floor, or roof of a heating chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 6 for a closed chamber or
    conduit conducting liquid to cool a wall, roof, or lining of utility in a
    broadly recited heating or combustion chamber organization.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 71+, 113+, 158,
    and 165 for an electrical furnace having means for cooling the furnace
    walls.


CLS 432/239
TXT A subcombination of a heating device under the class definition,
    specialized for use in heating, for feeding or discharging a work chamber
    or for conveying or agitating work while within such chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for a work unit handler interrelated with a furnace closure or
    heating element operator.

    86,     for a furnace having associated means for receiving work from the
    discharge means.

    87,     for a furnace having associated means for supplying the furnace
    feed means.

    95+,    for a gravity flow type shaft furnace through which work is moved
    by gravity.

    96,     for a shaft furnace having an agitator or movably mounted baffle
    for the shaft outlet.

    103+,   for a rotary drum-type furnace for tumbling work material.

    121+,   for a furnace having heating structure and being of the type in
    which a charge is progressed or moved mechanically.

    157,    for a furnace for heating material in a crucible or pot and mounted
    to discharge the crucible or pot by tilting to pour melted material.

    160,    for a combustion gas heated furnace or furnace work holder mounted
    for tilting discharge.

    162,    for a combustion gas heated furnace charged by a movably mounted
    shelf, rack or tray.

    211,    for an externally heated liquid holding type of work container
    mounted for pouring discharge.

    234,    for a protectively cooled work skid or rail.

    235,    for a protectively cooled conveyor, chute, or work agitator element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 101 for a means for feeding solid fuel into a
    combustion furnace.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclass for a power driven
    conveyor or conveyor element, per se, of general utility.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclass for a means dispensing
    articles or arranging them in a chamber for dispensing.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclass for a residual process or
    apparatus for dispensing fluent material.

    366,    Agitating, appropriate subclass for an agitator, per se, or one
    having merely nominally recited heating or cooling means.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 147+ for the combination
    of a chamber of a type utilized for a heating function and material
    charging or discharging means therefor. Specific furnace structure is
    included there (147+) only when its sole purpose is to facilitate the
    movement of material to or from the chamber furnace.  See also subclasses
    586+ for a device or element associated with the handling or moving of a
    charge for a heating-type chamber.


CLS 432/240
TXT Apparatus under subclass 239 in which the structure includes a means for
    engaging a stove top or the rim of a stove hole for supporting it relative
    to the heat of the stove.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for a rotary drum type agitator having a support for engaging the
    surface of a domestic stove.


CLS 432/241
TXT Apparatus under subclass 239 in which (1) platform structure that forms
    part of the floor a heating chamber is loaded while displaced from the rest
    of such chamber and carries the work into the chamber as it is moved into
    assembled position; or (2) a cart specialized for use in carrying work to
    be heated into a furnace.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136+,   for a work chamber having combustion product supply means and a
    movable floor section carried by an external guide or axle by which work is
    progressed through a work chamber.


CLS 432/242
TXT Apparatus under subclass 239 including a means closing or sealing an
    opening through which work is moved by the feeder or conveyor into the
    chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for a work unit handler and a furnace closure operator controlled
    to work in a program or cycle.

    56,     for means correlating door movement and work movement or placement.

    64,     for a heating chamber having a fluid curtain at a chamber port or
    work path.


CLS 432/243
TXT Apparatus under subclass 239 in which a work support within the chamber is
    moved by an element extending therefrom through a slit in the chamber
    paralleling an external track on which the element is carried to move the
    work along the chamber.


CLS 432/244
TXT Apparatus under subclass 239 including a seal structure preventing leakage
    through a chamber wall about a conveyor or agitator element passing through
    the wall.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclass 906 for a seal for an article having indefinite length
    (e.g., strip, sheet, etc.).

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 130+ for a plain rotary bearing with a seal.


CLS 432/245
TXT Apparatus under subclass 239 including or having associated therewith
    structure specialized to (1) controlling the flow of heat; (2) protecting
    the apparatus or work from heat or (3) relieving or preventing stress from
    expansion or contraction produced by temperature changes.


CLS 432/246
TXT Apparatus under subclass 239 in which the feeding or conveying structure
    is, or includes a work supporting roll.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for an internally heated roll advancing and flexing sheet, web, or
    strand type work.

    228,    for an internally heated roll, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, subclass 37 for a
    conveying roll not specialized for guiding work in a high temperature
    environment.


CLS 432/247
TXT Apparatus under the class definition forming the work chamber of an
    apparatus specialized for heating work or for use in controlling the drop
    in temperature of highly heated work toward ambient temperature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g. Buildings), appropriate subclass for a
    residual static structure; particularly subclasses 415+ for a structure
    assembled of bricks.

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 317+ for the structure of a solid fuel
    combustion furnace.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 400+ and 415+ for a spaced wall or jacketed
    receptacle of general utility.


CLS 432/248
TXT Apparatus under subclass 247 in which the furnace has a melt holding or
    receiving section that is specialized to withstand the action of the melt
    by having reinforcing means, a lining, or other protective structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238,    for a heating apparatus having a wall, floor or roof element
    protected by cooling means.


CLS 432/249
TXT Apparatus under subclass 247 including as a part thereof structure that
    supports or protects the work, or shields the work area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    253+,   for an adjunctive means for holding, shielding, or supporting work
    within a heating chamber.


CLS 432/250
TXT Apparatus under subclass 247 including structure defining (1) a feed or
    access opening of a work chamber or (2) a removable cover for such opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for a heater having a fluid curtain at a chamber port or work path.

    65,     for a heat shield or fume collector at a furnace chamber access
    area.

    73,     for a combustion products flue or generator and a work chamber
    mounted for relative movement for access.

    237,    for a protectively cooled door, cover, door frame, or rim of a
    cover of a heating furnace.

    242,    for a closure or seal for an entrance passage through which a
    feeding means causes work to move.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 242 for a
    chamber seal in a gas-solid contact device.

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, appropriate subclass for a movable
    or removable closure of general utility.

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 173+ for a door, and subclass 181 for a door
    easing or arch, usable in either a heating or solid fuel combustion furnace.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 190+ for door structure applicable
    to a cooking or direct heat radiating heating stove.


CLS 432/251
TXT Apparatus under subclass 247 having structure preventing or limiting damage
    to the apparatus by relieving or absorbing heat induced expansive forces.


CLS 432/252
TXT Apparatus under subclass 247 comprising a structure of masonry supported or
    reinforced by a metallic member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    for a rotary tumbler drum type furnace having a brick type lining.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 336+ for wall structure particularly adapted
    for use in a solid fuel furnace.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 280+ for a lining construction
    for a metallurgical furnace.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 137, 155, and 164
    for a furnace lining particularly adapted for use in an electrical furnace.


CLS 432/253
TXT Structure specialized for use in a subordinate or temporary capacity in
    heating apparatus comprising (1) means by which a body or material is held
    in place in a heating zone or (2) a protective means for limiting or
    directing the transfer of heat from the heating medium or heat radiator to
    work or parts of work within a heating zone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 239+ for
    means to support solid work for drying or for contact of solid with gas or
    vapor.

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclass for a residual device for
    clamping, supporting or holding an article in position to be operated on or
    treated.


CLS 432/254.1
TXT Apparatus under subclass 253 comprising a removable enclosing receptacle or
    hood specially adapted for holding articles being heated, shielding them
    from the atmosphere, and equalizing the application of heat to the articles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 262+, for heat transferring
    boxes, shields or hoods which are solely disclosed for use in the heat
    treatment of metal objects, e.g., annealing boxes, carbonizing boxes will
    likewise be found therein.


CLS 432/254.2
TXT Apparatus under subclass 254.1 including structure adapted to be lowered
    about the work comprising a hood closed on its top and sides and open at
    its bottom, or the support upon which such hood is lowered.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206,    for a furnace in which a bell-type hood forming a part of the
    furnace encloses work in a chamber having heating means.


CLS 432/258
TXT Apparatus under subclass 253 comprising structure for supporting a rigid or
    semi-rigid work piece of ceramic material, or coated with ceramic material,
    while exposing it to heating fluid or radiant heat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, appropriate subclass for a residual rack for
    supporting plural articles and disclosed as having utility other than, or
    in addition to, use in the firing of ceramics.

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclass for a residual support for a single
    article disclosed as having utility other than, or in addition to, use in
    the firing of ceramics.


CLS 432/259
TXT Apparatus under subclass 258 in which the work support structure provides
    point or edge contact with the work piece to provide for maximum exposure
    of the surface of the work piece to heat.


CLS 432/260
TXT Apparatus under subclass 253 relying on the central passage in an annular
    body for the positioning in of the body.


CLS 432/261
TXT Apparatus under subclass 253 comprising a container or platform, having
    apertures or gaps, for supporting metal work to expose it to heating fluid
    or radiant heat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 237+ for a
    tray or floor for a drier, or for a gas or vapor and solid contact device.

    220,    Receptacles, appropriate subclass for a metallic receptacle
    disclosed as being of general utility or as having a use additional to the
    support of metal work in a high temperature furnace.


CLS 432/262
TXT Apparatus under subclass 253 comprising a refractory vessel for melting or
    calciming, metals, ores, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 335+ for metal molding apparatus
    including a receptacle for holding or dispensing molten material.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 275+ for a receptacle
    specialized for holding molten metalliferous material.


CLS 432/263
TXT Apparatus under subclass 262 having a dispensing opening or spout.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 566+ for a receptacle of general utility
    having a nozzle, spout, pouring lip or other material pouring guide as a
    dispensing feature.


CLS 432/264
TXT Apparatus under subclass 262 in which the crucible has a coated or lined
    section or is made of layers of diverse materials.


CLS 432/265
TXT Apparatus under subclass 262 made of a named material.


CLS 432/266
TXT Miscellaneous apparatus under the class definition.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTION


CLS 432/500
TXT The common disclosure of the art in this, digest is a barn used in the
    drying, curing, or storing of tobacco.  The disclosures are examples only
    and are not exhaustive of the subject matter.  They have been placed in
    this subclass without regard to their original classification or to their
    claimed subject matter.


CLS 433/
TTL DENTISTRY

CLS 433/
TXT This class is a specific class under the broader class of Surgery and
    includes methods directed to or including specific dental steps, e.g.,
    taking impressions of the teeth or gums, adapting a plate or model to a
    particular mouth formation, mounting teeth on a plate in a particular way,
    etc.; apparatus, implements, and devices relating to the treatment of teeth
    or gums, or the replacement of teeth.



    I.    GENERAL LINES WITH OTHER CLASSES:

    A.      Apparatus

    Inasmuch as this class is defined in terms of specific rather than
    proximate function, many of the apparatus provided for in this class are
    also provided for broadly in the proximate function classes.  Unless
    otherwise stated, patents claiming such apparatus should be classified as
    follows: patents with claims reciting structure peculiar to dentistry
    should be placed as originals in Class 433.  Use of the functional
    adjective "dental" will not in itself cause placement in Class 433.  For
    example, "a dental mirror comprising...", without further peculiar dental
    structure recited is classified broadly with mirrors in Class 359, Optics:
    Systems (Including Communication) and Elements (subclass 882 for a mirror
    with a handle).  However, the recitation of means to prevent fogging or
    accumulation of water from a drill dictates classification in Class 433.
    Use of nouns peculiar to dentistry such as "a dental handpiece..." or  "an
    articulator comprising...", will cause classification in Class 433.
    Apparatus and implements classified in Class 433 are generally those of the
    type used by a dentist.  However, Class 433 will take a device which is
    disclosed as being used by individuals upon their own teeth, if not
    provided for elsewhere.



    B.      Methods

    Methods including steps normally performed by a dentist are classified in
    Class 433.  Methods for making prostheses and appliances and which contain
    only those steps which are performed by a technician (e.g., molding, die
    shaping, etc.) are classified in the appropriate manufacturing class.
    Methods of treating a tooth by application of a named composition are
    classified in Class 433 if more than the mere application to a tooth is
    claimed (e.g., an additional step of drilling, cleaning, filling, etc.).

    C.      Prostheses or appliances

    Class 433 will take claims to a dental prosthesis or appliance, per se,
    unless claimed in terms of a particular composition or material and no
    structural limitations are recited. Patents including a claim to a
    composition, per se, are classified in the appropriate composition class.

    D.      SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 592+ for miscellaneous processes for
    making dental parts; subclasses 426.1 for methods of disassembly; and
    subclasses 426.1+ for methods of assembly.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 60+ and 343+ for forming metal dentures
    or portions thereof by die shaping.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, appropriate subclasses for alloys for making and filling teeth,
    and other dental prostheses.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclass 35 for coatings or
    plastic compositions specialized for dental use.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses for
    methods and apparatus for cleaning dentures.

    164,    Metal Founding, appropriate subclasses for apparatus and methods
    for casting dental parts of metal.  See particularly subclass 376 for
    investment type molds.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 63.5 for a special
    container, package, or carrying case for a dental implement, material, or
    article.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 16+ for processes of molding dental parts of material other than
    metal, where a specific dental step is not recited.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, appropriate subclasses for
    X-ray sources, detectors, and related apparatus, or methods of using such
    apparatus in dentistry for producing images of teeth.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, subclasses 526+ for amalgams, per
    se, which may be useful for dental purposes.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, appropriate subclasses for processes for
    sterilizing or disinfecting dental apparatus, and for apparatus for
    chemically disinfecting or sterilizing dental implements.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 2.1+ for processes for making dental
    products comprising a coating step (e.g., dental implements, dental
    prostheses, etc.).

    451,    Abrading, subclasses  28+ for a process for abrading a dental
    prothesis.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Class 523, subclasses 105+ for nonmedicated compositions
    containing a synthetic resin having utility specifically intended to be for
    contact with animal living tissue, especially subclasses 109 and 113- 120
    for dental compositions or to processes of preparing said compositions.


CLS 433/1
TXT VETERINARY DENTISTRY:

    Subject matter under the class definition peculiar to the treatment or
    replacement of the teeth of animals.


CLS 433/2
TXT ORTHODONTICS:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to the correction of
    malocclusions, or the maintenance of desired position or alignment of
    natural teeth.


CLS 433/3
TXT Tool:

    Apparatus under subclass 2 to be used for manipulating or otherwise working
    with an orthodontic appliance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25+,    for other dental tools.

    141+,   for hand manipulatable tools.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 700+ for assembly and disassembly tools.

    81,     Tools, appropriate subclasses for hand tools of both general
    purpose and specific application which are not provided for elsewhere.

    140,    Wireworking, appropriate subclasses for wireworking tools.


CLS 433/4
TXT Plier type:

    Apparatus under subclass 3 comprising a hand manipulatable implement which
    includes two elongated members pivotally connected intermediate their
    lengths, each having cooperating work engaging jaw on one side of the pivot
    and a handle portion on the opposite side of the pivot.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 225+ and 268 for disassembly and assembly
    pliers.

    81,     Tools, subclasses 300+ for pliers in general.


CLS 433/5
TXT Including extra-oral force transmitting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein a tooth is aligned or positioned by
    a device which includes a member that is worn externally of the mouth and
    places the device under tension.


CLS 433/6
TXT By mouthpiece-type retainer:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein a member which conforms in shape to
    a patient's teeth is worn over the teeth to complete an orthodontic
    treatment or to correct mild malocclusions.


CLS 433/7
TXT By device having means to apply outwardly directed force (e.g., expander):

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein a tooth is positioned or aligned by
    a device which includes two force applying surfaces movable in divergent
    paths.


CLS 433/8
TXT Bracket:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 relating to an orthodontic element adapted
    to be fixed to a tooth and having means for rigidly connecting or
    positioning an arch wire or similar force transmitting strand thereto.


CLS 433/9
TXT Cemented to tooth:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 wherein the appliance is secured to a tooth
    by a settable binding substance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226+,   for methods of treating or restoring natural teeth by filling or
    cementing.


CLS 433/10
TXT Having means to secure arch wire:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 wherein the orthodontic element includes
    means for rigidly connecting an arch wire or similar force transmitting
    strand thereto.


CLS 433/11
TXT Resiliently biased clamping member:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein the means for rigidly connecting
    arch wire to the bracket includes an elastically yieldable retaining means.


CLS 433/12
TXT Tension adjustment nut:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein a threaded member is provided and
    adapted to cooperate with threads formed on either the bracket or an arch
    wire engaged therewith whereby rotation of the threaded member causes a
    change in the tension of the arch wire.


CLS 433/13
TXT Separable securing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein the arch wire may be rigidly
    connected to the bracket by a readily removable retaining element.

    (1)     Note.  The retaining element must be readily removable from both
    the arch wire and the bracket.


CLS 433/14
TXT Lock pin:

    Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein the removable retaining element
    comprises a rigid member which is substantially elongated relative to any
    lateral dimension.


CLS 433/15
TXT Ligature wire:

    Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein the removable retaining element
    comprises a length of metallic strand which is adapted to be wrapped around
    the arch wire and a portion of the bracket.

    (1)     Note.  Patent claiming brackets having structure for accommodating
    ligature wire have been placed as originals in this subclass; i.e., the
    ligature wire need not be claimed.


CLS 433/16
TXT Having adjustable or angular arch wire guide:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 wherein the bracket includes a wire
    engaging surface for locating or orienting the arch wire or similar force
    transmitting strand with respect to the tooth carrying the bracket, and
    either (a) the surface is adjustably carried by the bracket whereby it may
    assume any of an plurality of positions with respect to the bracket, or (b)
    the wire engaging surface forms an acute angle with the plane of occlusion
    whereby the arch wire or strand applies a torque to the tooth carrying the
    bracket.


CLS 433/17
TXT Having arch wire enclosing guide (e.g., buccal tube):

    Subject matter under subclass 8 wherein the bracket includes an elongated
    member having a passage therein through which the arch wire is placed.


CLS 433/18
TXT Means to transmit or apply force to tooth:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 relating to either (a) a strandlike member
    adapted to be secured to a bracket and placed under tension to apply force
    to a tooth, or (b) a device adapted to engage two brackets or teeth, or a
    bracket and arch wire, for creating a force between a tooth and arch wire.


CLS 433/19
TXT Acting between upper and lower teeth:

    Subject matter under subclass 18 wherein the strandlike member or the force
    creating device is connected to a tooth on the maxillary arch and to a
    tooth on the mandibular arch to transmit or apply a force between the two
    teeth.


CLS 433/20
TXT Arch wire:

    Subject matter under subclass 18 relating to a metallic strandlike member
    adapted to be secured to a bracket and placed under tension to apply force
    to a tooth.


CLS 433/21
TXT Metallic spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 18 comprising a device for creating a force
    between two teeth or between a tooth and arch wire comprising a metallic
    element of sufficient elastic property that it recovers its original shape
    when released after being distorted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, appropriate subclasses for springs in general.


CLS 433/22
TXT Arch wire attachment:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 comprising a discrete element adapted to be
    secured to an arch wire.


CLS 433/23
TXT Band:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 relating to an appliance element adapted to
    be positioned around substantially the entire circumference of a tooth for
    the purpose of securing a bracket thereto.


CLS 433/24
TXT Method of positioning or aligning teeth:

    Method under subclass 2 including a step for correcting a malocclusion.


CLS 433/25
TXT APPARATUS:

    Device or subcombination thereof under the class definition for
    facilitating the replacement, treatment, or testing of either natural or
    artificial teeth.

    (1)     Note.  The above apparatus do not remain in the patient's mouth
    after treatment.

    (2)     Note.  This and indented subclasses are intended to collect patents
    to devices for performing specific dental steps (i.e., those performed by a
    dentist). Devices of a more general nature (e.g., molds, forming dies,
    etc.) which are used by technicians are classified elsewhere unless
    specifically provided for in this class (see search notes below).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for apparatus peculiar to the treatment or replacement of the teeth
    of animals.

    3,      for a tool for manipulating an orthodontic appliance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 167.1 for
    toothbrushes.

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 305+ for combined
    fasteners, especially subclasses 326+ for dental chair fasteners.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 33+ and 650 for manufacturing apparatus
    which perform two or more diverse operations (as in the manufacture of
    dental prostheses);  and subclasses 700+ for assembling and disassembling
    apparatus.

    30,     Cutlery, appropriate subclasses for hand held cutting implements in
    general.  Class 433 will take cutting implements which are disclosed solely
    for use by a dentist.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 200+ for toothbrushes provided with
    dentifrice supply means.

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 3+ for specula.

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 321+ for toothpicks and dental floss, and
    subclasses 308+ for a toilet kit including a toothbrush.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 637+ for machinery supports not peculiar to or
    including dental treating apparatus.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 2 for shaping means utilizing an anatomical body or portion
    thereof; and subclasses 175+ for investment molding apparatus.

    451,    Abrading, for abrading of dentures in a manufacturing or laboratory
    operation.  Abrading or polishing natural teeth or mutually abrading upper
    and lower dentures is provided for in Class 433 (sole disclosure).

    601,    Surgery:  Kinesitherapy, subclasses 136+ for gum massagers and
    subclasses 154+ for water getting devices for gums.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 19+ for aspirating devices; and subclasses 181+
    for handheld injecting devices.

    606,    Surgery, subclasses 79+ for orthopedic cutting instruments,
    subclass 116 for cutting means for marking animals, subclass 132 for skin
    cutting dermatomes; subclass 137 for cutting means used in animal
    sterilization, subclass 163 for cutting means used in debeaking or
    dehorning animals and subclasses 167+, for cutting instrument in general.


CLS 433/26
TXT Tooth selection guide:

    Apparatus under subclass 25 comprising a common holder for displaying a
    plurality of artificial teeth for the purpose of choosing the proper color,
    shape, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163,    for an artificial tooth holder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 63.5 for a special
    container, package, or carrying case for a dental implement, material or
    article.


CLS 433/27
TXT Having condition sensor to transmit signal to regulate indicating device or
    controller:

    Device under subclass 25 wherein means are provided for detecting the
    random occurrence of a predetermined event and releasing, terminating, or
    modifying a flow of energy which in turn either produces a perceptible
    manifestation of the event, or regulates a control means (e.g., motor,
    valve, solenoid, etc.).


CLS 433/28
TXT Switch or valve controlled by presence of device on support:

    Apparatus under subclass 27 including a holder for storing an implement,
    and wherein removal or replacement of the implement on the holder activates
    or regulates the controller.


CLS 433/29
TXT Having means to emit radiation or facilitate viewing of the work:

    Device under subclass 25 including (a) means to increase the lighting
    intensity at selected areas, or (b) means to bend or reflect light waves to
    make characteristics of the device or work more readily discernable, or (c)
    means from which electromagnetic radiation is directed at the work.

    (1)     Note.  Mouth props, per se, are excluded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140,    for mouth props.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 3+ for specula; and subclass 23 for lamps.

    250,    Radiant Energy, appropriate subclass for X-ray sources, detectors
    and related apparatus, or methods of using such apparatus in dentistry for
    producing images of teeth.

    362,    Illumination, appropriate subclasses for lighting systems in
    general, especially subclass 32 for optic transmission fibers which modify
    light from a man-made source.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, appropriate subclasses for optic transmission
    fibers.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclass 16 for
    drilling apparatus provided with means to facilitate viewing of the work.


CLS 433/30
TXT Mirror:

    Apparatus under subclass 29 including a polished or smooth surface for
    forming an image by reflection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    838+ for mirrors in general, and dental mirrors without structure peculiar
    to dental use.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 185+, 246, and 247+ for surgical mirrors,
    especially subclasses 246 and 247+ for oral mirrors.


CLS 433/31
TXT Combined with other device:

    Apparatus under subclass 30 wherein the mirror is connected to a disparate
    dental device.


CLS 433/32
TXT Having heater or electrode:

    Device under subclass 25 provided with either (a) means to raise the
    temperature of the device, work or environment, or (b) a conductor for
    establishing electrical contact with the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215+,   for methods of treating teeth by heat or electricity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 362+ for other light, thermal, or electrical
    application in surgery.

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclasses for details of electrical
    heating devices in general.

    606,    Surgery, subclasses 2+ for light, subclasses 27+ for heat and
    subclasses 32+, for electrical applicators surgical instruments.


CLS 433/33
TXT Having support for patient or operator:

    Apparatus under subclass 25 including means to support a patient or
    operator against the force of gravity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclass 600 for invalid beds and surgical patient supports.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, appropriate subclasses for dental chairs, per se.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 38+, 168+, and
    190+ for tables or chairs for supporting persons for X-ray diagnosis, and
    having means peculiar thereto.


CLS 433/34
TXT Having static product shaping surface (e.g., mold):

    Device under subclass 25 comprising static structure for confining a
    settable fluent material that is allowed to contact said structure and
    harden into a specific contour.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for bite trays wherein an impression is obtained by biting into a
    solid material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 54 for a mold for making a dental prosthesis.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 16+ for a process of molding or otherwise shaping a dental
    prosthesis.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    subclass 2 for shaping apparatus utilizing an anatomical body or portion
    thereof as a shaping surface, and particularly subclasses 175+ for
    investment molding apparatus for dentures.


CLS 433/35
TXT Having cooling means:

    Apparatus under subclass 34 including means to carry heat away from the
    hardenable fluent material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 79+ for molds having cooling passages.


CLS 433/36
TXT Having settable material dispenser or fill opening:

    Device under subclass 34 including either a supply means for the settable
    fluent material or an orifice through which settable material is introduced
    into the static structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80+,    for an intra-oral dispenser, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 311+ for filling means having a coacting receiver, other than a
    molding apparatus.

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 105 for a mold having static filling means
    in contact with the mold cavity.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 447+ for molding apparatus including a shaping surface and means
    feeding fluent stock thereto, see the collection to search notes thereunder.


CLS 433/37
TXT Intra-oral:

    Apparatus under subclass 34 wherein the static structure is placed in the
    mouth of a patient to form a mold in conjunction with a surface inside the
    patient's mouth.


CLS 433/38
TXT Comprising frame and flexible bib:

    Apparatus under subclass 37 wherein the surface of the static structure
    which supports or contacts the settable fluent material comprises a thin
    strip of pliant material supported in a relatively rigid construction.


CLS 433/39
TXT Deformable or flexible band (e.g., matrix):

    Apparatus under subclass 37 comprising a thin strip of material adapted to
    be bent or flexed to define a mold cavity in conjunction with a surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155,    for matrix clamps.

    226,    for a method of filling a tooth.


CLS 433/40
TXT Single tooth:

    Apparatus under subclass 37 wherein the static structure forms a mold in
    conjunction with the surface of one tooth only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223,    for a method of constructing a prosthetic crown including the step
    of forming an impression of the natural tooth stump.


CLS 433/41
TXT Adjustable:

    Apparatus under subclass 37 wherein means are provided to vary the position
    or orientation of a first portion of the static structure relative to a
    second portion to accommmodate different patients.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 155 for adjustable molds for forming
    different size or shaped product.


CLS 433/42
TXT Upper section relative to lower section:

    Apparatus under subclass 41 wherein the first and second relatively movable
    portions are adapted to form maxillary and mandibular casts of the
    patient's mouth.


CLS 433/43
TXT Pivotally connected sections:

    Apparatus under subclass 41 wherein the first and second portions are
    hingedly attached to one another for swinging movement about an axis.


CLS 433/44
TXT Having positioning means or gauge:

    Apparatus under subclass 37 including a dimensional reference or other
    means to facilitate exact placement of the static structure inside the
    patient's mouth.


CLS 433/45
TXT Having means to facilitate assembly or disassembly:

    Device under subclass 37 wherein means are provided to facilitate the
    putting together or taking apart of the various elements of the static
    structure.


CLS 433/46
TXT Detachable handle:

    Apparatus under subclass 45 wherein the static structure is provided with a
    specific portion by which a person may grasp the structure, and wherein the
    portion is readily removable from the remainder of the structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 110+ for handles, per se.


CLS 433/47
TXT Including release facilitating means:

    Device under subclass 37 wherein the static structure includes means
    specifically provided to assist in separating the hardened fluent material
    from either the static structure or the mouth of the patient.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 66.1 for a mold having means to apply force
    to remove or release a product from a mold.


CLS 433/48
TXT Mold material:

    Apparatus under subclass 37 wherein the static structure is formed of a
    specified composition.


CLS 433/49
TXT Work support:

    Apparatus under subclass 25 comprising means to sustain the weight of a
    workpiece and which in turn is adapted to be supported on a surface
    external to the patient.

    (1)     Note.  Tool and equipment supports are excluded from this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77+,    for storage or nonuse supporting means for dental apparatus.

    163,    for a hand-held work carrier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses for work holders not
    specifically provided for in the various treatment classes.


CLS 433/50
TXT Including tool, marker, or coupling means therefor:

    Apparatus under subclass 49 provided with either (a) an implement to
    contact and modify the workpiece being supported, or (b) structure adapted
    to cooperate with an implement or secure an implement to the support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75+,    for a tool guide carried by the operator or the workpiece itself.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 48, 87+, and 290+ for other than dental
    work holders and which have a tool guide or coupling means.


CLS 433/51
TXT Abrading tool or cutter:

    Apparatus under subclass 50 wherein the implement comprises a instrument
    which is rotated or otherwise moved while in contact with the surface of a
    workpiece to either (a) polish the surface or remove a portion of the
    surface by reducing the surface to powder or small fragments, or (b)
    penetrate the surface by a cutting edge or point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    for a hand-held motor driven grinder or polisher.

    142,    for a hand manipulatable grinder or polisher.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 364+ for a work holder for an abrading
    apparatus or process.


CLS 433/52
TXT Including motor or power transmitting means:

    Apparatus under subclass 49 provided with a prime mover or means to receive
    the output of a prime mover.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 114+ for abrading by mutual moving contact
    between plural work pieces held respectively by relatively moving work
    holders.


CLS 433/53
TXT Including means to support plural workpieces for relative movement:

    Apparatus under subclass 49 comprising a common support having a first work
    carrying means for supporting a first workpiece and a second work carrying
    means for supporting a second work part, at least one of said work carrying
    means being movable on said common support toward or away from the other of
    said work carrying means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, subclass 45 for similar work holders not used in
    dentistry.


CLS 433/54
TXT Articulator or attachment therefor:

    Apparatus under subclass 53 wherein the first and second work carrying
    means are specifically adapted to support maxillary and mandibular dental
    casts, respectively, and wherein the relative movement between the two work
    carrying means represents movement of the temporo-mandibular joints, or
    subcombinations peculiar thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196,    for a method of using an articulator for positioning or aligning
    teeth.


CLS 433/55
TXT Having visual indicator or recorder:

    Apparatus under subclass 54 wherein the articulator includes a scale or
    other markings which provide a visual reference to the position or movement
    of the holder or a portion thereof.


CLS 433/56
TXT Including gauge or means for removably mounting gauge on support:

    Apparatus under subclass 54 wherein the articulator includes either means
    providing a dimensional or angular reference, or structure for removably
    carrying such referencing means.


CLS 433/57
TXT Including hinge having parts which cooperate in a manner allowing relative
    movement:

    Apparatus under subclass 54 wherein the relative movement between the first
    and second work carrying means is governed by a joint which comprises a
    fulcrum carried by one of said work carrying means and a cooperating
    surface on the other of said work carrying means, wherein the fulcrum
    pivots and translates relative to the cooperating surface.


CLS 433/58
TXT And resiliently biased:

    Apparatus under subclass 57 including means to elastically urge the fulcrum
    against its cooperating surface.


CLS 433/59
TXT Including adjustable incisal guide:

    Apparatus under subclass 54 comprising a surface associated with one of the
    work carrying means which cooperates with a guide pin or analagous
    structure associated with the other of the work carrying means to cause
    lateral movement between the two work carrying means as they approach one
    another, and wherein said surface may be adjusted to assume a selected
    angle or position with respect to a horizontal plane.


CLS 433/60
TXT Including means to secure workpiece on articulator:

    Apparatus under subclass 54 wherein at least one of the first and second
    work carrying means includes structure for fastening a dental cast thereto.


CLS 433/61
TXT Having pivot and additional adjustment between workpiece supporting means:

    Apparatus under subclass 54 wherein the work carrying means are connected
    through a joint which allows relative swinging movement about an axis
    through the joint, and wherein the joint in turn is also movable relative
    to one of the work carrying means.


CLS 433/62
TXT Additional pivot:

    Apparatus under subclass 61 wherein the joint is mounted for swinging
    movement relative to one of the work carrying means about a second axis.


CLS 433/63
TXT Rectilinear adjustment:

    Apparatus under subclass 62 wherein the joint is also capable of adjustable
    movement in a straight-line fashion relative to one of the work carrying
    means.


CLS 433/64
TXT Ball-and-socket:

    Apparatus under subclass 62 wherein the joint comprises a spherical convex
    surface mated with a concave surface to allow relative swinging movement of
    the work carrying means in more than one plane.


CLS 433/65
TXT Rectilinear adjustment only between supporting means and pivot:

    Apparatus under subclass 61 wherein the joint is mounted for rectilinear
    movement along a second axis relative to one of said work carrying means.


CLS 433/66
TXT Having lock or adjustable stop for pivoted work holder:

    Apparatus under subclass 54 wherein the work carrying means are connected
    through a joint which allows relative swinging movement between the two
    work carrying means, and either (a) means are provided to selectively allow
    or prevent relative swinging movement between the two work carrying means,
    or (b) abutment means are provided to limit the extent of relative movement
    of the work carrying means about the joint, and wherein the abutment means
    is movable to vary the relative positions of the work carrying means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 83+ for articulated members
    lockable at fixed positions.


CLS 433/67
TXT Workpiece supporting means between adjustable stop and pivot:

    Apparatus under subclass 66 wherein an adjustable abutment means is
    provided at a greater radius from the joint than the work carrying means.


CLS 433/68
TXT Having means to record or indicate jaw movement or position or dental
    occlusion:

    Apparatus under subclass 25 including means to provide a representation of
    the position or movement of the mandible, or of the positions or alignment
    of a patient's teeth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37+,    for dental impressions trays.

    140,    for jaw positioners.


CLS 433/69
TXT Jaw movement:

    Apparatus under subclass 68 comprising means to provide a representation of
    maxillomandibular movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for an articulator provided with means to record relative movement
    of the work (denture) carrying means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, appropriate subclasses for apparatus and methods in
    general for making records of the movement of instruments.


CLS 433/70
TXT By transfer of material to teeth:

    Apparatus under subclass 68 comprising means carrying a marking material
    which is transferred by contact to the teeth of a patient when the patient
    bites the material carrying means.


CLS 433/71
TXT By deformation of material:

    Apparatus under subclass 68 comprising a relatively easily deformed
    material or a holder therefor adapted to be contacted by the teeth of a
    patient to provide a visual representation of the patient's bite.


CLS 433/72
TXT Having gauge or guide:

    Apparatus under subclass 25 including either (a) dimensional or angular
    reference, or (b) a surface adapted to be contacted by another device
    (e.g., a tool) to govern the movement of the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for an impression tray provided with a gauge.

    55,     for an articulator provided with a gauge having indicia thereon.

    56,     for an articulator having a gauge without indicia.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 511+ for anatomical gauges; and
     subclasses 783+ for anatomical calipers.


CLS 433/73
TXT Condylar referencing means (i.e., face bow):

    Apparatus under subclass 72 comprising means specifically provided for
    transferring a dimension measured with respect to the temporo-mandibular
    joints.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for an articulator provided with a face bow or means to mount or
    engage a face bow.


CLS 433/74
TXT Dowel pin or positioner therefor:

    Apparatus under subclass 72 comprising either (a) an elongated member for
    attachment to either an artificial tooth or base casting to ensure proper
    positioning of the tooth on the base following removal therefrom, or (b) a
    device for locating the member in the proper position on the tooth or base
    prior to fixing the member thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for dowel pin positioners having a support for the casting.


CLS 433/75
TXT Having tool, marker, or coupling or guiding means therefor:

    Apparatus under subclass 72 including either (a) an implement to contact
    and modify a workpiece, or (b) structure for cooperating with such an
    implement or for securing such an implement to the dimensional or angular
    reference means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     for similar devices which include a work supporting means as well
    as tool, marker, or coupling means therefore.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclass 241 for
    drill guides of general utility; and subclass 202 for a depth limiting
    member.


CLS 433/76
TXT Parallel drilling:

    Apparatus under subclass 75 wherein means are provided to guide a drill
    such that the hole formed thereby will be parallel to an adjacent hole.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are dental drills having plural parallel
    drilling bits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclass 46 for a
    paralleling drill of general utility; and subclass 241 for drill guides.


CLS 433/77
TXT Having storage or nonuse supporting means (e.g., tray, rack, cabinet,etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 25 comprising means for stowing or carrying dental
    equipment or materials while they are not being used.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for equipment supports having means to automatically activate a
    tool when it is removed from the support.

    29,     for dental stands equipped with illuminating means.

    33,     for a dental stand provided with a patient's or dentist's chair.

    49+,    for work supports.

    108+,   for a dental stand or bracket having means for retaining a tool
    carrying arm in an adjusted or stored position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, appropriate subclasses for cabinet
    structure, per se, especially subclass 209 for dental equipment cabinets.
    Class 433 takes cabinets provided with specific dental equipment.


CLS 433/78
TXT Including hose retractor:

    Apparatus under subclass 77 comprising means for moving a length of
    flexible conduit from an extended operable position to a stowed position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 370+ for a reeling
    device, particularly subclasses 371+ for a spring powered reeling device.


CLS 433/79
TXT Movably mounted tray or holder:

    Apparatus under subclass 77 including an equipment support which is
    externally attached to a supporting structure by means which allows
    relative movement between the support and its supporting structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, appropriate subclasses for
    movably mounted trays without specific dental structure (e.g., fluid
    conduits, controls, combined with dental chair, etc.).


CLS 433/80
TXT Having intra-oral dispensing means:

    Apparatus under subclass provided with a discharge outlet through which
    material passes from a supply into a patient's mouth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for a syringe combined with a support and means for actuating a
    valve when the syringe is removed from the support.

    36,     for a dispenser claimed in combination with a mold.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 200+ for toothbrushes with dentifrice
    supplying means.

    128,    Surgery, subclass 66 for hydrants (i.e., water picks and the like).

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for dispensers in general.  See
    particularly the search notes in the class definition for other classes
    having dispensers.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 77+ for Intra-oral medicator; and subclasses
    181+ for hypodermic syringes.


CLS 433/81
TXT Endodontic:

    Apparatus under subclass 80 comprising means for dispensing material
    interiorly of a tooth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for an endodontic broach.

    224,    for endodontic methods.


CLS 433/82
TXT Combined with or attachment for work contacting tool or handpiece therefor:

    Apparatus under subclass 80 wherein the discharge outlet is provided in
    structure with either (a) includes a nondispensing means for contacting and
    modifying the work, or a handle for removably carrying a work contacting
    and modifying means or (b) is provided with means to connect the structure
    to a work contacting and modifying means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30+,    for dental mirrors having air outlets adjacent the mirror surface
    for removing debris therefrom.

    100,    for dental drills having means to circulate lubricant or coolant
    through the tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, appropriate subclasses for
    dentifrice dispensing tooth brushes.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 66+ for
    drilling apparatus which dispense coolant to the tool or work.

    451,    Abrading, subclass 488 for means to ventilate or cool an abrading
    tool or workpiece.


CLS 433/83
TXT Having means to compact dispensed material:

    Apparatus under subclass 82 wherein the means for contacting and modifying
    the work comprises a surface for compressing the dispensed material into
    the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118+,   for motor driven pluggers.

    151,    for spring operated pluggers.

    164,    for hand manipulatable pluggers.


CLS 433/84
TXT Power-driven tool having fluid control valve for dispensed material:

    Apparatus under subclass 82 wherein the dispensed material is liquid or
    gaseous and means are provided to regulate the flow through the discharge
    outlet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for a valve which is actuated by removing a dispenser from its
    nonuse supporting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, for condition responsive valves and valves in fluid
    systems.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, appropriate subclasses for valve and
    actuator structure, per se.


CLS 433/85
TXT On or adjacent handpiece or handle:

    Apparatus under subclass 84 wherein an activator for the flow regulating
    means is located on or immediately adjacent to a portion of the device that
    is adapted to be gripped by the operator's hand while the device is in use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    for fluid motor regulating valves on dental handpieces.


CLS 433/86
TXT Ultrasonic tool:

    Apparatus under subclass 82 wherein the work contacting means is caused to
    vibrate by the prime mover at a very high frequency that is above
    audibility limit of the human ear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    for an ultrasonic tool, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    601,    Surgery:  Kinesitherapy, subclasses 1+ for ultrasonic devices
    employed in kinesitherapy.


CLS 433/87
TXT Dispenser externally mounted on tool or handpiece:

    Apparatus under subclass 82 wherein the structure having the discharge
    outlet therein comprises a discrete device carried on the exterior of the
    treating device.


CLS 433/88
TXT Dispensed material discharged by fluid current:

    Apparatus under subclass 80 including means to direct a flow of fluid into
    contact with the material to be dispensed so that the fluid entrains or
    impells the material to carry or force the same into the patient's mouth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 630+ for apparatus for dispensing material
    by a fluid current.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, appropriate subclasses for entrainment
    and transport of solid material by a fluid current.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 75+ for sandblasting apparatus.


CLS 433/89
TXT Hand-held implement with material supply:

    Apparatus under subclass 80 which is supported entirely by the hand of the
    operator while being used and includes a reservoir for containing the
    supply of material to be dispensed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 372 for a supply container and pump.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 77+ for intra-oral medicators.


CLS 433/90
TXT Single charge device having plunger type ejector:

    Apparatus under subclass 89 including a pistonlike member movable through
    either the reservoir or an additional chamber supplied from the reservoir
    to expel the material contained in said reservoir or chamber through the
    discharge outlet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 386+ for dispensers comprising a container,
    discharge outlet and follower.


CLS 433/91
TXT Having suction orifice:

    Apparatus under subclass 25 including a nozzle at which a low pressure is
    created to draw air or material through or around a nozzle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 300.1+ for
    devices which clean by suction.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 131+ for surgical aspirators.


CLS 433/92
TXT And suction pump or material separator:

    Apparatus under subclass 91 including either (a) means for creating
    subatomospheric pressure at the nozzle, or (b) means for recovering and
    retaining the removed material from the air current.


CLS 433/93
TXT And mouth prop, tongue guard depressor, or cheek spreader:

    Apparatus under subclass 91 wherein the nozzle is adapted to remove
    material from the mouth of a patient and means are provided to either (a)
    brace the patient's mouth in an open position, (b) protect the patient's
    tongue or retain the tongue at the bottom of the mouth, or (c) hold the
    cheek away from adjacent teeth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140,    for a dental jaw, cheek, lip, or tongue positioner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 184+ for surgical specula.


CLS 433/94
TXT And clamp or positioner:

    Apparatus under subclass 91 including means for holding or locating the
    nozzle in a desired position.


CLS 433/95
TXT And control valve for suction:

    Apparatus under subclass 91 including means for regulating the vacuum
    strength at the nozzle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     for intra-oral dispensers provided with a fluid control valve.

    98+,    for dental apparatus having valves for actuating a fluid motor.


CLS 433/96
TXT In flexible conduit or eduction tube:

    Apparatus under subclass 91 wherein the nozzle comprises an aperture
    located in a readily deformable length of conduit.


CLS 433/97
TXT Having receptacle (e.g., cuspidor):

    Apparatus under subclass 25 including a basin or other container for
    receiving material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclass 263 for a dental
    cuspidor, per se.


CLS 433/98
TXT Including activator or regulator for controller or drive:

    Apparatus under subclass 25 wherein means are provided by which an energy
    flow or signal is initiated or modified to activate or otherwise regulate a
    motor or other controller (e.g., valve, solenoid, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27+,    for a condition responsive activator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses
    for switch or actuating structure, per se.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, particularly subclasses 518+ for miscellaneous control circuits
    which can be used for handpieces or dental stands.


CLS 433/99
TXT In handpiece:

    Apparatus under subclass 98 wherein an actuator for the means which
    initiates or modifies an energy flow or signal is carried on a hand-held
    device which includes either means to drive or to transmit power to a tool
    releasably secured thereto.


CLS 433/100
TXT Fluid control valve:

    Apparatus under subclass 99 wherein the means for initiating or modifying
    an energy flow or signal comprises means for regulating the flow of a fluid
    which operates or drives a controller.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85,     for a handpiece provided with a valve for controlling a dispensed
    fluid.


CLS 433/101
TXT Foot operated:

    Apparatus under subclass 98 wherein an actuator for the means which
    initiates or modifies an energy flow or signal is located near the floor
    and adapted to be actuated by the foot of an operator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 86.5 for foot
    operated electric switches.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 295 for foot operated valves,
    per se.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 551 for foot-operated
    motor controller systems having three or more positions.


CLS 433/102
TXT Broach:

    Apparatus under subclass 25 comprising an elongated member having
    serrations or projections on the periphery thereof and adapted to be pulled
    and pushed inside of a natural tooth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for a broach provided with a penetration gauge or stop.

    81,     for the combination of a broach and endodontic dispenser.

    224,    for a method of using a broach.


CLS 433/103
TXT Having motor or means to transmit motion from motor to tool (e.g.,
    "engine"):

    Apparatus under subclass 25 including either (a) a prime mover for driving
    a work contacting and modifying means, or (b) dynamic power transmission
    means between a prime mover and a work contacting and modifying means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for a motor operated in response to a sensed condition.

    52,     for a motor driven work holder.

    82+,    for a motor operated tool combined with a dispenser.

    98+,    for a motor driven apparatus wherein an activator (i.e., switch or
    valve) is claimed.


CLS 433/104
TXT Including lubricating or apparatus cooling means:

    Apparatus under subclass 103 wherein means are provided either (a) to apply
    a substance between moving parts of the apparatus which are in contact to
    reduce the friction therebetween, or (b) to carry heat away from the
    apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus which dispense the lubricating or cooling liquid
    into the patient's mouth will be found in the dispensing subclasses above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82+,    for motor operated tools which dispense the cooling or lubricating
    fluid into the patient's mouth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 313+ for cooling a bearing by a lubricant and
    subclasses 317+ for cooling a bearing by means other than lubricant.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 66+ for
    cooling or drilling apparatus in general.

    451,    Abrading, subclass 488 for abrading apparatus combined with cooling
    means.


CLS 433/105
TXT Including clutch or variable transmission:

    Apparatus under subclass 103 including either (a) a selectively engageable
    drive between the prime mover and tool, or (b) means to vary the ratio of
    the speed of movement of the prime mover's working member to the speed of
    movement of the tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 640+ for gearing.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 30+ for a clutch, per
    se.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 124+ and
    139 for drilling apparatus having clutches or variable speed transmissions,
    especially subclass 133 for plural speed drives.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, appropriate
    subclasses for variable speed transmission using a belt drive.


CLS 433/106
TXT Including braking means:

    Apparatus under subclass 103 wherein means are provided to decelerate the
    motor, tool, or transmission means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, appropriate subclasses for braking means, per se.


CLS 433/107
TXT Including means to apply counter force to counteract tool weight or
    movement:

    Apparatus under subclass 103 including an elongated bracket for movably
    connecting a tool or handpiece to a standard, wall or other support, and
    means are provided to offset the moment or inertia of the tool at the end
    of the bracket.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 162.1 for counterbalanced stands; and subclasses
    280.11 and 292.11 for counterbalanced brackets in general.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclass 235 for
    means to counterbalance a drill or drill supporting structure.


CLS 433/108
TXT And means to retain standard, arm, or handpiece in adjusted or stored
    position:

    Device under subclass 103 wherein the prime mover or power transmission
    means is carried by either an adjustable floor supported columnar
    structure, an adjustable elongated bracket or a hand-held tool chuck, and
    means are provided to releasably hold or support the columnar structure,
    bracket, or chuck in a predetermined position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 127 for adjustable stands; and subclasses 274.1+
    for adjustable brackets.


CLS 433/109
TXT Pivotally adjustable:

    Apparatus under subclass 108 wherein the columnar structure, bracket, or
    chuck are swingably attached to an adjacent supporting structure to permit
    swinging movement to the supported or held position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     for a swingably mounted tray or tool holder.


CLS 433/110
TXT Endless belt transmission:

    Apparatus under subclass 103 including a dynamic power transmission means
    which comprises an endless flexible member to transmit rotary or
    oscillatory motion from a prime mover to a tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclass 128 for
    belt and pulley driven drilling apparatus.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, appropriate
    subclasses for an endless belt power transmission; and particularly
    subclasses 58+ for a system wherein a power output pulley is selectively
    shiftable to different power output locations relative to an input pulley.


CLS 433/111
TXT Having tensioning means:

    Apparatus under subclass 110 including means to adjust the tension of the
    endless flexible member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 101+ for a belt tensioner for an endless belt transmission.


CLS 433/112
TXT Flexible shaft transmission:

    Apparatus under subclass 103 including a dynamic power transmitting means
    comprising an elongated member which is readily deformable in a direction
    perpendicular to its length.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclass 127 for
    flexible shaft driven drilling apparatus.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, appropriate subclasses for flexible rotary shafts used in
    torque transmission.


CLS 433/113
TXT Having treadle:

    Apparatus under subclass 103 including a swiveling or lever device adapted
    to be depressed by the foot and which operates the drive for a tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 512 and 561 for treadle
    linkage systems, per se.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclass 136 for
    treadle powered drilling apparatus.

    451,    Abrading, subclass 341 for treadle actuated abrading apparatus.


CLS 433/114
TXT Hand-held tool or handpiece:

    Apparatus under subclass 103 comprising either (a) a hand-held device
    having a driven work contacting and modifying means, or (b) a hand-held
    chuck for removably holding a driven work contacting and modifying means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29+,    for a hand-held tool or handpiece provided with means to facilitate
    viewing of the work.

    50+,    for a tool combined with means to support the work.

    75+,    for a tool provided with a gauge or guide.

    82+,    for a hand-held tool or handpiece provided with a dispenser (which
    may dispense the motive fluid).

    99+,    for a hand-held tool or handpiece provided with an activator (e.g.,
    switch or valve).


CLS 433/115
TXT Having seal:

    Apparatus under subclass 114 including a substance or member employed
    specifically to block the passage of material into or out of the tool or
    handpiece.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process.

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 130+ for bearings with a seal.

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, subclasses 110+ and 170.1 for
    seals employed in rotary fluid motors other than Class 433 type.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclass 174 for a seal
    between an impeller or shaft and a static part.


CLS 433/116
TXT Having cover or guard:

    Apparatus under subclass 114 including means carried by the tool hand-held
    or handpiece either to protect the tool or handpiece, or to protect the
    patient or operator from contact with a tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136+,   for means to protect a tooth or the mouth from an adjacent work
    area.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 451+ for a cover or work guard for an abrading
    apparatus.


CLS 433/117
TXT Including shock absorbing or vibration dampening means:

    Apparatus under subclass 114 wherein the handpiece or hand tool includes
    means to reduce the transmission of vibration or sudden forces along the
    tool or handpiece.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 210+ for impacting tools
    provided with cushioning means; and subclass 162 for tool drive means in
    general provided with vibration dampening means.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, for drilling
    apparatus in general wherein the tool carrier is provided with vibration
    dampening means.


CLS 433/118
TXT Having reciprocating, vibrating, or oscillating output:

    Apparatus under subclass 114 wherein the prime mover or power transmission
    means causes a work contacting surface of a tool driven thereby to move
    back and forth along a straight-line or arcuate path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151,    for spring operated pluggers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses for mechanical
    movements, per se (e.g., rotary motion to reciprocating motion).

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, appropriate subclasses for reciprocating
    tool drives in general.

    601,    Surgery:  Kinesitherapy, subclasses 46+ for vibrators; and
    subclasses 84+ for other kinesitherapeutic devices having specific movement.


CLS 433/119
TXT Ultrasonic:

    Apparatus under subclass 118 wherein the tool is vibrated at a very high
    frequency that is above the audibility limit of the human ear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86,     for an ultrasonic tool combined with a dispenser.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 311+ for
    ultrasonic transducers, per se.

    601,    Surgery:  Kinesitherapy, subclasses 1+ for ultrasonic
    kinesitherapeutic devices.


CLS 433/120
TXT Fluid motor:

    Apparatus under subclass 118 wherein the means to drive the tool comprises
    structure which converts the energy of a working fluid into movement of a
    working member to drive the tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, appropriate subclasses for a
    fluid motor, per se.

    601,    Surgery:  Kinesitherapy, subclasses 46+ for fluid motor driven
    vibrations; and subclasses 88+, 96, and 105 for other kinesitherapeutic
    devices driven by fluid motors.


CLS 433/121
TXT Impact by sudden release of spring:

    Apparatus under subclass 118 including a resilient member which alternately
    stores and releases energy from the prime mover or power transmission to
    drive the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151,    for a hand manipulatable impact delivering tool which employs a
    spring which stores an energy input from the operator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 202+ for a spring driven
    hammerhead adapted to drive a tool.


CLS 433/122
TXT Having rotating cam or eccentric:

    Apparatus under subclass 118 comprising power transmission means which
    includes a driven member having a surface which is so arranged about an
    axis as to cause a cooperating member to be reciprocated to drive the tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 53, 54, and 55+ for
    mechanical movements of the rotary to or from reciprocating or oscillating
    type which include a cam.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 122+ for a tool driving
    hammer reciprocably driven through a linkage which includes a cam or
    eccentric.


CLS 433/123
TXT And adjustment for stroke, intensity, or position of tool:

    Apparatus under subclass 122 including means whereby one of the following
    may be varied:  (a) the distance the tool travels during each
    reciprocation, (b) the impact with which the tool strikes the work, or (c)
    the orientation or attitude of the tool with respect to the hand engaged
    portion of the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    for tools or handpieces provided with a clutch to disengage the
    drive from a tool or chuck.

    130,    for a rotary hand tool or handpiece provided with an adjustable
    head.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclass 115 for a tool driving hammer
    element wherein means are provided to selectively vary the length of cyclic
    travel; and subclass 120 for a spring driven tool driving hammer element
    wherein means are provided to adjust the spring force.


CLS 433/124
TXT Angularly offset tool:

    Apparatus under subclass 118 wherein the longitudinal axis of the handpiece
    or the handle of the hand-held tool is angularly offset with respect to the
    movement axis of the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    for a handpiece for driving a rotary tool wherein the axis of
    rotation of a tool held therein is angularly offset with respect to the
    longitudinal axis of the handle.


CLS 433/125
TXT Having abrading or polishing means:

    Apparatus under subclass 114 including a driven work contacting or
    modifying means adapted to either smooth a surface by friction or to reduce
    a surface to powder or small fragments by a plurality of natural cutting
    edges.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142,    for hand-held grinder or polisher that is not power-driven.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 344+ for a hand-held grinding or polishing
    device.


CLS 433/126
TXT Having means facilitating assembly or disassembly of tool or handpiece:

    Apparatus under subclass 114 wherein means are provided to facilitate the
    putting together or taking apart of distinct elements of the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146,    for a hand manipulatable implement provided with means to
    facilitate assembly or disassembly of the implement.


CLS 433/127
TXT Means to releasably grip tool:

    Apparatus under subclass 126 including a chuck for releasably holding a
    work contacting and modifying means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147,    for a hand manipulatable tool having a removable tool element or
    bit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, appropriate subclasses for tool chucks in
    general. See particularly the search notes under the class definition.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 239+ for
    drill chucks.


CLS 433/128
TXT Comprising locking means extending into groove or recess:

    Apparatus under subclass 127 wherein the chuck includes a movable member
    adapted to engage an indentation formed in the work contacting and
    modifying means to retain the work contacting and modifying means in the
    chuck.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, subclasses 76+ for nondental tool chucks of
    similar structure.


CLS 433/129
TXT Including axially movable collect to cam fingers:

    Apparatus under subclass 127 wherein the means for releasably holding a
    working contacting or modifying means comprises a plurality of gripping
    elements adapted to grip the periphery of the work contacting and modifying
    means by moving a member which surrounds said gripping elements to urge
    them inwardly to grip the work contacting and modifying means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, subclasses 9.1+ for nondental tool chucks of
    similar structure.


CLS 433/130
TXT Having adjustable head:

    Apparatus under subclass 114 wherein a joint is provided between the handle
    and proximal end of the hand held-tool or handpiece which allows the
    longitudinal axis of the work contacting and modifying means to assume any
    one of the plurality of selected positions with respect to the longitudinal
    axis of the handle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123,    for reciprocating, vibrating, or oscillating hand tools provided
    with adjustable heads.


CLS 433/131
TXT Having motor:

    Apparatus under subclass 114 wherein the hand-held tool or handpiece is
    provided with a prime mover to drive the work contacting and modifying
    means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98+,    for a hand-held tool or handpiece having a motor and wherein an
    activator (i.e., switch or valve) is claimed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 40 for miniature
    motors.


CLS 433/132
TXT Rotary fluid turbine:

    Apparatus under subclass 131 wherein the prime mover comprises a disc or
    shaft which is rotated about an axis by a current of fluid directed against
    a series of reaction surfaces formed or carried on the disc or shaft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, appropriate subclasses for
    rotary fluid turbine motors, per se.  See particularly subclass 904 for a
    tool drive turbine art collection.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers) appropriate subclasses
    for turbine rotor structure.


CLS 433/133
TXT Contra angled handpiece:

    Apparatus under subclass 114 comprising an elongated handpiece having a
    longitudinal axis angularly offset with respect to the longitudinal axis of
    the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124,    for a reciprocating, vibrating, or oscillating angularly offset
    tool.


CLS 433/134
TXT Arbor:

    Apparatus under subclass 103 comprising a member having a first portion
    adapted to be received in a motor driven chuck, and a second portion
    adapted to releasably hold a tool bit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127+,   for tool gripping features of dental handpieces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, appropriate subclasses for an arbor in general.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 490+ for a grinding tool support.


CLS 433/135
TXT Screw actuated clamp for apertured tool bit:

    Apparatus under subclass 134 wherein the second portion adapted to
    releasably hold a tool bit includes helically ribbed means adapted to be
    inserted through an opening in the tool bit and rotated to secure the tool
    bit to the arbor.


CLS 433/136
TXT Having absorption means or means to isolate tooth or mouth from adjacent
    area (e.g., bib, dam, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 25 including either (a) a piece of material
    adapted to be placed inside the mouth to absorb fluids, or (b) means for
    covering a tooth, mouth or other area of a patient to protect the same
    against injury or debris, or (c) means to engage and retain (a) or (b) in
    or adjacent the work area.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 46+ and 455 for guards and protectors.


CLS 433/137
TXT Bib:

    Apparatus under subclass 136 comprising means for covering an area of the
    patient externally of the mouth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 46+ for a garment protector.


CLS 433/138
TXT And discrete oral fastening or positioning means:

    Apparatus under subclass 136 including means readily separable from the
    absorption or isolating means to removably attach or orient the absorption
    or isolation means to the patient's mouth.


CLS 433/139
TXT Tooth clamp:

    Apparatus under subclass 138 wherein the attaching means is adapted to be
    fastened to a tooth inside the patient's mouth.

    (1)     Note.  Patents reciting a clamp and any structure which recognizes
    the presence of an absorption or isolating device have been placed as
    originals in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153+,   for miscellaneous clamps used in dentistry.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 305+ for combined
    fasteners.


CLS 433/140
TXT Jaw, cheek, lip, or tongue positioner:

    Apparatus under subclass 25 comprising means to engage and retain either
    the mandible cheek, lip, or tongue, in a desired position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29+,    for mirror or means to increase the lighting intensity in the
    vicinity of the work, excluding mouth props, per se.

    68,     for an adjustable mouth prop provided with a gauge to indicate jaw
    position.

    93,     for similar structure combined with a suction orifice.

    138+,   for a dam clamp provided with means to retain the jaw, tongue,
    etc., in a desired position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 238+ for surgical specula without structure
    peculiar to dental use.


CLS 433/141
TXT Hand manipulatable implement:

    Apparatus under subclass 25 which is carried and actuated by the hand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3+,     for orthodontic implements.

    30+,    for dental mirrors, per se, and combined with other implements.

    72+,    for gauges and implements combined therewith.

    102,    for endodontic broaches.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, appropriate subclasses for hand tools of both general
    purposes and specific application which are not provided for elsewhere.
    Class 433 will take any hand tool wherein the sole disclosure is for use by
    a dentist.

    606,    Surgery, subclasses 1+ for surgical instruments.


CLS 433/142
TXT Having abrading or polishing means:

    Apparatus under subclass 141 including a work contacting and modifying
    means adapted to either smooth a surface by friction or to reduce a surface
    to powder or small fragments by a plurality of natural cutting edges.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    for a motor driven abrading or polishing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 75.6 and 76.5+ for manicuring abrading
    implements.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 523+ and 557+ for a manually manipulated
    abrading tool.


CLS 433/143
TXT Scaler:

    Apparatus under subclass 141 specifically adapted for scraping deposits
    from teeth.


CLS 433/144
TXT Having cutter:

    Apparatus under subclass 141 having a man made cutting edge or point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for veterinary cutters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, appropriate subclasses for hand manipulatable cutters.

    606,    Surgery, subclasses 167+ for surgical cutting instruments.


CLS 433/145
TXT Including force multiplier:

    Apparatus under subclass 144 including structure (e.g., screw, lever, etc.)
    by which the force input from the hand of the operator may be increased at
    the cutter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 175+ for nippers; and subclasses 194+ for
    shears.


CLS 433/146
TXT Having means facilitating assembly or disassembly:

    Apparatus under subclass 141 wherein means are provided to facilitate the
    putting together or taking apart of two or more distinct portions of the
    implement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126+,   for motor operated hand-held tools provided with means to
    facilitate assembly or disassembly of the tool.


CLS 433/147
TXT Removable tool element:

    Apparatus under subclass 146 including a distinct work contacting and
    modifying portion and means to facilitate the assembly and disassembly of
    said portion and the remainder of the implement.


CLS 433/148
TXT Separator:

    Apparatus under subclass 141 comprising means to apply oppositely directed
    forces against opposing faces of adjacent teeth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for an orthodontic appliance to be worn by the patient over a
    period of time to permanently move one tooth relative to another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 239 for disassembly apparatus for spreading
    parts apart or separating them from face to face engagement; and subclasses
    244+ for other disassembly tools with force multiplying operators.


CLS 433/149
TXT Comprising tooth contacting wedge or wedge actuator:

    Apparatus under subclass 148 comprising a member having a tapering width
    and which is forced in a directing parallel to the opposing faces of two
    teeth to move the teeth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 253 for assembly or disassembly apparatus
    having a wedge actuator.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for  Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclass 104 which is the residual locus for wedges.


CLS 433/150
TXT Impacting means:

    Apparatus under subclass 141 including means to impart a blow to a
    workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118+,   for motor driven impacting devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 254+ for assembly or disassembly tools
    with an impact operator; and subclasses 275+ for those having a surface
    adapted to receive a blow from a hammer.

    81,     Tools, subclasses 52.3+ for impacted delivering tools.


CLS 433/151
TXT By sudden release of spring:

    Apparatus under subclass 150 including a resilient member which stores
    energy supplied by the hand of an operator, which energy is subsequently
    released to impart a blow to the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121,    for motor-driven tools which deliver an impact by sudden release of
    a spring compressed by the motor.


CLS 433/152
TXT Including work penetrating portion to secure tool to work:

    Apparatus under subclass 141 which is attached to a workpiece by a
    workpiece piercing member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 244+ for disassembly tools having a force
    multiplier, especially subclasses 264 and 281 for those having a
    screw-threaded work engager.


CLS 433/153
TXT Having relatively movable work engaging surfaces:

    Apparatus under subclass 141 including a plurality members, each having a
    work contacting face, and structure connecting the members which permits
    relative displacement between the work contacting faces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 300+ for tools in general having jaws positioned
    by relatively moving handles and subclass 487 for other hand-held tools
    having a clamp.


CLS 433/154
TXT Three or more relatively movable coacting surfaces:

    Apparatus under subclass 153 including three members, each having a work
    contacting face and wherein the structure connecting the  members permits
    each of the work contacting faces to be displaced relative to the work
    contacting faces.

    (1)     Note.  As an example, tooth or pin extractors having two clamping
    jaws for engaging a tooth or pin and a pivoted fulcrum or other member for
    engaging an adjacent area whereby a force is exerted on the clamping jaws,
    are found in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclass 303 for pliers and the like having three or more
    jaws.


CLS 433/155
TXT Work accommodating slot or opening through surface (e.g., matrix clamp):

    Apparatus under subclass 154 wherein at least one of the members has an
    aperture or slot through which a portion of the work may pass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for matrix clamps wherein the matrix band is claimed.


CLS 433/156
TXT Including contoured work shaping surface:

    Apparatus under subclass 153 wherein one of the work contacting faces has a
    shape which is imparted to a workpiece by displacing the faces relative to
    each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34+,    for dental devices having a static product shaping surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 409.01+ for contoured metal shaping
    pliers.

    81,     Tools, subclasses 424.5+ for work conforming tool jaw faces for
    gripping work.


CLS 433/157
TXT Pivoted:

    Apparatus under subclass 153 wherein the structure connecting the members
    defines a first pivot axis about which the work contacting faces on the
    elongated members are adapted to swing.


CLS 433/158
TXT Having actuating screw:

    Apparatus under subclass 157 including an elongated helically ribbed member
    which when rotated causes the work contacting face to pivot about the
    bearing surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 388+ and 395+ for tools having screw-actuated
    pivoted jaws.


CLS 433/159
TXT Having handles to pivot surfaces (e.g., pliers):

    Apparatus under subclass 157 comprising two elongated members pivotally
    connected at points intermediate their length, each having a handle at one
    side of the pivot and the work contacting face on the opposite side of the
    pivot.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for orthodontic pliers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 268 for pliers for assembling or
    disassembling parts.

    81,     Tools, subclasses 300+ for pliers of general purpose or specific
    use and not provided for elsewhere.

    606,    Surgery, subclasses 205+ for forceps.


CLS 433/160
TXT Plural pivots:

    Apparatus under subclass 159 wherein a second pivot is provided spaced from
    the first pivot and which connects two elements of the apparatus for
    relative swinging movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 350+, 367+, and 424 for pliers in general
    provided with plural pivots.


CLS 433/161
TXT Screw actuated:

    Apparatus under subclass 153 including an elongated helically ribbed member
    that when rotated moves the work contacting faces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139,    for screw actuated tooth clamps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 256+ for screw-actuated assembly or
    disassembly tools.


CLS 433/162
TXT Resiliently biased:

    Apparatus under subclass 153 wherein the work contacting faces are
    elastically urged to a desired position after they are moved from said
    position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclass 427 for pliers having resiliently urged handles.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, for tweezers in general.

    606,    Surgery, subclasses 210+ for tweezers in general.


CLS 433/163
TXT Work carrier:

    Apparatus under subclass 141 including a surface which is provided to
    support dental work or material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for a tooth selection guide comprising a holder for one or more
    tooth models.

    153,    for carriers having relatively movable surfaces to grip the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, appropriate subclasses
    for handheld article carriers and manipulators in general.


CLS 433/164
TXT Plugger:

    Apparatus under subclass 141 including a surface adapted to be pressed
    against a filling in a tooth to compact the filling material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83,     for pluggers with filling dispensers.

    118+,   for motor operated pluggers.

    150,    for hand manipulatable pluggers having a spring or other impact
    delivering or receiving means.


CLS 433/165
TXT Tool bit:

    Apparatus under subclass 25 comprising a work contacting and modifying
    element adapted to be received in a chuck or socket whereby the element may
    be driven or manipulated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    407,    Cutters, for Shaping, appropriate subclasses for work shaping tool
    in general (other than wood); see especially subclasses 53+ for face or end
    mill cutters.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 199+ for
    drill bits in general.


CLS 433/166
TXT Abrading or polishing:

    Apparatus under subclass 165 wherein the work contacting and modifying
    element is adapted to either smooth a surface by friction or reduce a
    surface to powder or small fragments by a plurality of natural cutting
    edges.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 526+ for a flexible member abrading tool and
    subclasses 540+ for a rigid abrading tool.


CLS 433/167
TXT PROSTHODONTICS:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to artificial teeth.

    (1)     Note.  Utilization of an existing tooth or portion thereof for
    purpose other than fastening adjacent artificial teeth is considered repair
    rather than replacement.

    (2)     Note.  Methods for making dental prostheses are proper for Class
    433 if they include specific dental steps (e.g., impression taking, fitting
    the patient with the denture, etc.). Generally, those process claims which
    recite only manufacturing steps will be classified in the appropriate
    manufacturing class (see search notes below).  A claim to a dental
    prosthesis, per se, is properly classified in this class if significant
    structure is recited.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for apparatus employed in the process of replacing missing teeth
    with artificial teeth.

    215+,   for a method or material for replacing a portion of a natural tooth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 400.1+ for processes of mechanical
    manufacture including diverse manufacturing steps.

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses for a method or apparatus
    for die shaping a denture base or other prosthodontic element.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclass 35 for plastic or
    coating compositions used in dental prostheses.

    164,    Metal Founding, appropriate subclasses for a method of casting a
    prostodontic element.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 67+ for electroforming methods for
    production of dentures.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 16+ for a process for forming a denture or element thereof.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Class 523, subclasses 105+ for nonmedicated compositions
    containing a synthetic resin having utility specifically intended to be for
    contact with animal living tissue, especially subclasses 109 and 113-120
    for dental compositions or to processes of preparing said compositions.


CLS 433/168.1
TXT Denture liner or cushion:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 relating to the provision of a soft layer
    or pad of material on the mouth contacting surface of a denture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199.1,  for laminated or other plural layer denture bases.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    523,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 120 for a dentures
    plate liner specified only in terms of a composition of the type there
    provided for (see Note I, C under the main definition of Class 433 for the
    general line).


CLS 433/169
TXT Stress breaker:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 wherein a denture includes means to
    redirect or absorb forces during mastication to protect the denture from
    damage.


CLS 433/170
TXT Between tooth engaging clasp and denture:

    Subject matter under subclass 169 including means to secure the denture in
    the mouth, which comprises opposing surfaces which are elastically urged
    against opposing exterior surfaces of an abutment tooth, and wherein the
    means to redirect or absorb mastication forces forms the connection between
    the denture and securing means.


CLS 433/171
TXT Prefabricated denture:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 relating to a standard denture which is
    modified to conform to the individual patient.


CLS 433/172
TXT Holding or positioning denture in mouth: Subject matter under subclass 167
    relating to locating or securing one or more artificial teeth in the mouth.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass must relate to the connection
    between a denture and either a natural tooth or some part of the patient's
    mouth. Patents relating to the connection between a denture and an
    artificial tooth will be found in subclasses below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191,    for a method or means for securing an artificial tooth to a base.

    219,    for a method or material for attaching a crown, per se, to a
    natural tooth.


CLS 433/173
TXT By fastening to jawbone:

    Subject matter under subclass 172 wherein the denture is secured directly
    to the jawbone of the patient.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201.1,  for subject matter relating to the construction or composition of a
    dental implant.


CLS 433/174
TXT By screw:

    Subject matter under subclass 173 wherein the denture is secured to the
    jawbone by an elongated helically ribbed member.


CLS 433/175
TXT Shape of removed tooth root:

    Subject matter under subclass 173 wherein the lower portion of the denture
    that is secured to the jawbone is shaped to correspond to the configuration
    of the root of a natural tooth which had previously occupied the same
    position in the mouth.


CLS 433/176
TXT By blade:

    Subject matter under subclass 173 wherein the denture is secured to the
    jawbone by a flat platelike member extending from the bottom of an
    artificial tooth.


CLS 433/177
TXT By resiliently biased means:

    Subject matter under subclass 172 wherein denture is secured or located in
    the patient's mouth by means which includes a member that must be deformed
    elastically when applying the denture to the mouth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169+,   for a denture having resilient means to absorb the forces of
    mastication.


CLS 433/178
TXT Tooth engaging clasp:

    Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein the locating or securing means
    includes opposing surfaces which are elastically urged against opposing
    exterior surfaces of a natural or artificial tooth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139,    for a tooth clamp for holding a dam or absorption roll in place.

    170,    for a resilient tooth engaging clasp connected to a denture by a
    stress breaker.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 530+ for resiliently
    biased clasps.


CLS 433/179
TXT Acting between upper and lower denture:

    Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein the elastically deformable means
    from a connection between an upper denture and a lower denture to bias them
    away from each other.


CLS 433/180
TXT By cement or adhesive:

    Subject matter under subclass 172 wherein a denture is secured in the
    patient's mouth by a settable fluent material or other binding substance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226+,   for methods of treating or restoring natural teeth by filling or
    cementing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclass 35 for dental filling
    or cement compositions devoid of a synthetic resin.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, especially Class 523,
    subclasses 116+ for a composition containing a synthetic resin used as a
    cement or a filling; and subclass 120 for a composition to be used as a
    denture plate, adhesive, denture plate liner, or a denture plate cushion.


CLS 433/181
TXT Including mating connectors on denture and abutment tooth:

    Subject matter under subclass 180 wherein the denture is secured to a
    natural tooth by a settable fluent material and the denture and the natural
    tooth are provided with respective elements which cooperatively engage each
    other to supplement or reinforce the settable material bond.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191,    for connectors for securing artificial teeth together.


CLS 433/182
TXT And additional member for securing connectors together:

    Subject matter under subclass 181 wherein a third discrete element is
    provided for securing together the respective elements on the denture and
    natural tooth.


CLS 433/183
TXT Including crown cemented to existing tooth:

    Subject matter under subclass 180 wherein the denture has attached thereto
    a simulation of the exposed portion of a tooth, and the denture is secured
    in the mouth of fixing the simulation to the base of an existing natural
    tooth using a settable adhesive material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218,    for crown construction or attachment to a natural tooth.


CLS 433/184
TXT By suction:

    Subject matter under subclass 172 wherein the denture is provided with
    means engaging a natural surface inside the mouth to form a chamber
    therewith, which chamber is placed under subatmospheric pressure to secure
    the denture in the mouth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 305+ for vacuum-type
    fasteners.


CLS 433/185
TXT Including valve or air passageway leading from suction area:

    Subject matter under subclass 184 wherein means are provided to selectively
    establish communication between the suction chamber and the environment.


CLS 433/186
TXT Cup or disc:

    Subject matter under subclass 184 wherein the means which engages a natural
    surface inside the mouth comprises a concave or flat, substantially rounded
    pliant member carried by but distinct from the base of the denture.


CLS 433/187
TXT Plural cups or discs:

    Subject matter under subclass 186 wherein a plurality of rounded pliant
    members are provided on the denture.


CLS 433/188
TXT Suction area comprises recess or cavity formed in denture base:

    Subject matter under subclass 184 wherein the chamber is formed by a
    natural surface inside the mouth and an indentation formed in the denture
    base.


CLS 433/189
TXT By magnetic material:

    Subject matter under subclass 172 wherein a denture is secured in the mouth
    of the patient by magnetic attraction between material carried by the
    denture and material inside the mouth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 304 for magnetic fasteners.


CLS 433/190
TXT Connecting right and left segments of partial denture:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 relating to a connector for joining
    spaced bilateral parts of a maxillary or mandibular removable partial
    denture.


CLS 433/191
TXT Attaching artificial tooth to base or adjacent artificial tooth:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 relating to the connection between an
    artificial tooth and an intra-oral common support for a plurality of teeth,
    or between two adjacent artificial teeth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206,    for subject matter relating to the connection between a tooth
    facing and backing wherein the backing may be connected to an adjacent
    backing to form a bridge.


CLS 433/192
TXT By cavity in tooth for base material:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein an artificial tooth having a hole
    or other indentation in surface is united to a common support for a
    plurality of such teeth by causing a portion of the support material to
    flow into the indentation and then harden.


CLS 433/193
TXT Connected to base by discrete connecting member:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein an individually distinct device
    forms the connection between an artificial tooth and a common support for a
    plurality of such teeth.

    (1)     Note.  A metallic pin embedded in a porcelain facing and attached
    to the base is considered to be "individually distinct" as defined above.
    However, for the pin-to-facing connection, per se, see the search note
    below to subclasses 206+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206+,   for a metallic attachment to an artificial tooth, which may be a
    tooth to base connecting member (e.g., "connecting pin").


CLS 433/194
TXT And additional discrete element for securing connecting member to tooth:

    Subject matter under subclass 193 wherein a second device which is
    individually distinct from the tooth, base, and connecting member forms the
    connection between the tooth and the connecting member.


CLS 433/195
TXT Embedded in base material:

    Subject matter under subclass 193 wherein the individually distinct device
    which forms the connection between an artificial tooth and support is fixed
    to the material of the support by either forming the support material about
    the connecting device or by driving the connecting device into the support
    material.


CLS 433/196
TXT Orienting or positioning teeth:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 relating to the determination of the
    precise location and attitude of an artificial tooth with respect to
    another artificial or natural tooth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for means to support and position plural workpieces relative to
    each other.

    54+,    for articulators.

    68+,    for means to record or indicate dental occlusion.


CLS 433/197
TXT Cutting edge shape or arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 relating to the profile or relative
    position or configuration of a masticating edge or surface of an artificial
    tooth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202.1,  for other subject matter relating to artificial tooth shape or
    composition.


CLS 433/198
TXT Metallic cutting edge:

    Subject matter under subclass 197 wherein

    the masticating edge or surface is formed from metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206+,   for a metallic tooth, tooth portion, or attachment wherein the
    specific cutting edge shape is not recited.


CLS 433/199.1
TXT Denture base construction:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 relating to the particular structure of a
    intraoral common support for a plurality of artificial teeth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208,    for a metallic backing for an artificial tooth, a plurality of
    which may be soldered together to form a base.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclass 35 for dental plastic
    or coating compositions wherein no significant denture structure is recited
    in the claims (i.e., the denture is only nominally recited).

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, particularly Class 523,
    subclasses 115+ for a composition containing a synthetic resin for use as a
    tooth or bone replacement, restorative, or implant or to processes or
    preparing said composition (see Note I, C under the main definition of
    Class 433 for the line).


CLS 433/200.1
TXT Metallic:

    Subject matter under subclass 199.1 wherein the common support is formed of
    metal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses for method or apparatus for
    swaging dental plates.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, for alloys or metallic
    compositions.


CLS 433/201.1
TXT Dental implant construction:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 relating to either the structure or a
    process of making a dental prosthesis which is adapted to be fixed to the
    jawbone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173+,   for a method or structure for fastening an implant to the jawbone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, particularly Class 523,
    subclasses 115+ for a composition containing a synthetic resin suitable for
    use as a tooth or bone replacement, restorative, or implant, or to
    processes of preparing said composition (See section I, C of the main
    definition of Class 433).


CLS 433/202.1
TXT Tooth construction:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 relating to either the structure of or a
    process of adapted to be fixed to a base or an adjacent natural or
    artificial tooth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218+,   for construction or composition of a prosthetic crown.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclass 35 for dental plastic
    or coating composition wherein no significant structure is recited (i.e., a
    tooth is only nominally recited).

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, particularly Class 523,
    subclasses 115+ for a composition containing a synthetic resin for use as a
    tooth or bone replacement, restorative, or implant or to processes of
    preparing said composition (See Note I, C of the main definition Class 433).


CLS 433/203.1
TXT Indicia, tinting or shading:

    Subject matter under subclass 202.1 relating to either (1) the provision of
    markings on the surface of the artificial tooth by which is may be
    identified, or (2) the hue or relative lightness of an artificial tooth to
    tooth portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for a tooth shade or hue selection guide.

    199.1,  for methods and compositions for obtaining desired tinting or
    shading of denture bases.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 20 for shaping or treating a tooth and providing a color or tone
    differential across the member.  Class 433 provides for patents claiming
    the tooth itself.


CLS 433/204
TXT Having means facilitating replacement of tooth portion:

    Subject matter under subclass 202.1 wherein the artificial tooth comprises
    two discrete portions, the connection between the portions being of such a
    nature to permit one portion to be readily removed from the remaining
    portion for repair or replacement.

    (1)     Note.  The two "tooth portions" may comprise a porcelain facing and
    metallic backing.


CLS 433/205
TXT Having plural piece backing or discrete connecting means for adjacent tooth
    portions:

    Subject matter under subclass 202.1 wherein the artificial tooth comprises
    either (a) a tooth facing and a plurality of adjacent plate sections
    attached to the facing, or (b) a plurality of discrete tooth portions
    mechanically fastened together by means individually distinct from either
    tooth portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193+,   for a discrete connecting means between an artificial tooth and a
    base.

    211,    for a discrete connecting pin embedded in a tooth for attaching the
    tooth to a base or backing.


CLS 433/206
TXT Metallic tooth, tooth portion, or attachment:

    Subject matter under subclass 202.1 wherein the artificial tooth is formed
    of metal or has fixed thereto a metallic device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198,    for a tooth having a metallic cutting edge.


CLS 433/207
TXT Alloy:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 wherein the metal is a homogeneous
    mixture of two or more different base metals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200,    for denture bases formed from particular alloys.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, subclasses 526+ for amalgams, per
    se, useful in making and filling teeth.


CLS 433/208
TXT Metallic backing:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 relating to a plate or other covering
    formed of metal and adapted to be secured to the inside surface of an
    artificial tooth facing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191+,   for an artificial tooth backing having specific means for
    connecting or facilitating the connection to an adjacent backing or base.

    205,    for a tooth facing connected to a metallic backing by a discrete
    connecting means.


CLS 433/209
TXT Having dovetail, "t", pinhead or bulbuous protrusion extending in congruent
    recess in facing:

    Subject matter under subclass 208 wherein the backing is provided with a
    protruding portion provided with an enlargement at its distal end having a
    cross sectional shape of a dovetail, "T", pinhead, or bulb, the enlargement
    being placed in a correspondingly shaped recess in the tooth facing to
    unite the tooth facing and backing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181,    for similarly shaped protrusions carried by dentures to secure the
    denture in the mouth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclass 381 for corresponding connections
    between members other than teeth.


CLS 433/210
TXT Having pin extending into facing:

    Subject matter under subclass 208 wherein the backing is provided with a
    protruding portion adapted to be inserted into the tooth facing, and
    wherein the protruding portion is substantially elongated in a direction
    away from the backing relative to any lateral dimension of the portion.


CLS 433/211
TXT Connecting pin:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 wherein the artificial tooth has fixed
    thereto a metallic pin adapted to secure the tooth to a base or backing.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains subject matter relating to tooth
    facing to pin connections and connecting pin structure, per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195,    for patents showing or claiming the pin to base connection.


CLS 433/212.1
TXT Nonmetallic composite:

    Subject matter under subclass 202.1 wherein the artificial tooth comprises
    two distinct portions, each formed of a different nonmetallic material.

    (1)     Note.  See Note I, C in the main definition for the line with
    Chemical Composition Classes.


CLS 433/213
TXT Preliminary casting, model, or trial denture:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 relating to the formation or use of a
    positive likeness of part of the oral cavity for the purpose of
    constructing a finished dental prosthesis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34+,    for molds.

    49+,    for work supports for measuring and working with models, especially
    subclasses 54+ for articulators.

    74,     for dowel pins or positioners therefor (nonwork supporting type).

    144,    for model trimmers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 16+ for processes by which dentures or teeth are formed which do
    not include specific dental steps (e.g., impression taking, articulation,
    try-in, etc.).


CLS 433/214
TXT Impression taking or bite determination:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 relating to the formation or use of
    either (a) an imprint or negative likeness of a part of the dental cavity,
    or (b) a visual record indicating the occlusal relationship of a patient's
    teeth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37+,    for impression trays.

    68+,    for apparatus employed in determining a patient's bite.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, particularly Class 523,
    subclass 109 for a composition containing a synthetic resin wherein said
    composition is useful in taking impressions of the mouth or to processes of
    preparing said composition.


CLS 433/215
TXT METHOD OR MATERIAL FOR TESTING, TREATING, RESTORING, OR REMOVING NATURAL
    TEETH:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising either (a) a step of
    removing, repairing, testing, or prophylactically treating a natural tooth,
    or (b) a device which is employed in the restoration or treatment of a
    natural tooth and which remains in the patient's mouth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclass 35 for coatings or
    plastic compositions specialized for dental use.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses for treating compositions, per se, and methods involving no more
    than the application of a Class 424 composition.


CLS 433/216
TXT Cleaning:

    Subject matter under subclass 215 including a step or material for removing
    foreign matter from the surface of a tooth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25+,    for apparatus for cleaning teeth.

    80+,    for apparatus which dispense a cleaning or rinsing material.

    119,    for ultrasonic cleaners.

    125,    for power operated abrading or polishing tools.

    142,    for hand manipulatable abrading or polishing tools.

    143,    for scalers.

    166,    for abrading or polishing tool bits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 167.1 for tooth
    brushes.


CLS 433/217.1
TXT By lining or coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 215 relating to either (1) a device or
    material applied to a natural tooth to form an intermediate layer between
    the tooth and a filling, crown, etc., to be applied to the tooth, or (2)
    any treating or protective material that is applied to the teeth to form a
    film thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     for apparatus for dispensing and applying coatings to the teeth.

    228.1+, for a method which includes the step of applying a restorative
    composition or cement to fill a tooth or cover its face (bonding).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclass 35 for a protective
    coating composition, per se, adapted to be applied to a tooth to form a
    structural barrier thereon.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses for treating compositions applied to natural teeth.


CLS 433/218
TXT Crown:

    Subject matter under subclass 215 relating to a simulation of the exposed
    portion of a natural tooth adapted to be attached to and carried by the
    remainder of the natural tooth.

    (1)     Note.  Crowns having artificial teeth fixed thereto which are not
    carried on portions of natural teeth are considered to be prosthodontic
    devices and are excluded from this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for veterinary crown slitters. 40, for a device for taking an
    impression of a prepared tooth prior to forming a prosthetic crown to be
    fixed upon the tooth.

    145,    for hand manipulatable crown slitters.

    202.1,  for artificial tooth construction or composition.


CLS 433/219
TXT Attachment to natural tooth or adjacent crown:

    Subject matter under subclass 218 comprising a step or means for securing a
    prosthetic crown to a natural tooth or to a prosthesis carried on an
    adjacent natural tooth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183,    for attachment of a crown to an abutment tooth wherein the crown
    serves as fastening means for an adjacent bridge.


CLS 433/220
TXT By post:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 wherein the crown is secured or
    positioned on the natural tooth by an elongated member extending vertically
    into both the crown and the natural tooth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211,    for method or means for securing a connecting pin to an artificial
    tooth facing, the connecting pin adapted to be used to fasten the tooth to
    a backing or plate.


CLS 433/221
TXT Having surface grooves or ridges:

    Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein the periphery of the elongated
    member is formed with one or more elongated crests or flutes.

    (1)     Note.  Threaded posts are included in this subclass.


CLS 433/222.1
TXT Composite:

    Subject matter under subclass 218 wherein the crown includes two distinct
    portions, each formed of a different material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198,    for artificial teeth having a metallic occlusal surface.

    208+,   for artificial teeth having a metallic portion.

    212.1,  for a nonmetallic tooth composed of a plurality of distinct
    sections each formed of a different material.


CLS 433/223
TXT Method of fabricating:

    Process under subclass 218 including a step in the formation of the crown.

    (1)     Note.  Methods for fabricating dental crowns are classified in
    Class 433 only if they include specific dental steps (e.g., taking an
    impression of the prepared tooth, fitting the crown on the tooth, etc.).
    Process claims reciting only manufacturing or forming steps should be
    classified in the appropriate manufacturing or treatment class.


CLS 433/224
TXT Endodontic:

    Subject matter under subclass 215 relating to treating the pulp of a
    natural tooth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for an endodontic broach having a penetration gauge.

    81,     for endodontic dispensers.

    102,    for broaches.


CLS 433/225
TXT Anchor pin:

    Subject matter under subclass 215 relating to the use of an elongated
    member which is fixed to a tooth at an area where the tooth is to be filled
    to secure the filling to the tooth.


CLS 433/226
TXT By filling, bonding or cementing:

    Subject matter under subclass 215 relating to repair of a tooth by either
    (a) applying and shaping material on the crown portion of a tooth, or (b)
    employing a hardenable fluent material to bond a dental restoration to a
    natural tooth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for a dental matrix.

    83,     for a combined plugger and filling material dispenser.

    118+,   for powered pluggers.

    164,    for hand manipulatable pluggers.

    180+,   for fixing a bridge or other prosthesis to an inlay or filling in
    the surface of a natural tooth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses for
    patents claiming a dental cement by composition.


CLS 433/227
TXT Foil:

    Subject matter under subclass 226 wherein the material applied to the tooth
    comprises one or more thin sheets of metal.


CLS 433/228.1
TXT Composition:

    Subject matter under subclass 226 relating to a specific material applied
    to the tooth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or plastic, subclass 35 for dental cements,
    per se, and see Note I, C in the main definition of Class 433 for the line.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, subclasses 526+ for an amalgan,
    per se, and See Note I, C in the main definition for Class 433 for the line.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, particularly Class 523,
    subclasses 116+ for a composition containing a synthetic resin used as a
    cement or filling or to processes of preparing said composition (See Note
    I, C in the main definition of Class 433).


CLS 433/229
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition which is not provided for under
    any of the preceding subclass.


CLS 434/
TTL EDUCATION AND DEMONSTRATION

CLS 434/
TXT This is the generic class for apparatus and processes not elsewhere
    classifiable for: providing instruction about a subject or means; testing
    or grading a person's knowledge, skill, discipline, or mental or physical
    ability; displaying for purpose of comparison contrast, or demonstration;
    demonstrating characteristics and advantages of apparatus, objects, or
    processes; and cryptography apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, for means to display cards,
    pictures, and signs of both a fixed and changeable nature.  Class 40
    contains devices which are directed to the general purpose of conveying
    information by displaying words or the like (e.g., alpha-numeric indicia).
    This class contains devices limited to the specific purposes of comparing,
    contrasting, or demonstrating the qualities of objects, machinery, and
    materials.

    54,     Harness, subclasses 71+ for breaking and training harness.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for physical
    measuring and testing.

    84,     Music, subclasses 470+ for devices and methods of teaching music.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, for signals and indicators which may be
    used for educational purposes, especially subclasses 306+ for hand set
    indicators which indicate some fact or information.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 712+ for animal breaking and training,
    and subclass 905 for a breaking and training method.

    177,    Weighing Scales, appropriate subclasses for a weigher not limited
    to mere teaching or demonstrating.

    250,    Radiant Energy, appropriate subclasses for testing objects or
    materials by invisible radiation.

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, for a game which tests the skill of a
    person in accomplishing some sought result or for a means by which a
    contest of skill or chance may be engaged in among two or more players.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, for general electric testing.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses subclasses 326+ for operator
    interfaces.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, for the testing of visible light or
    material by means of visible light or optical principles, particularly
    subclass 51 for the testing of materials by optical means by means of
    ultraviolet or infrared radiation.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 101+ for
    methods or apparatus for processing data for (a) static presentation (hard
    copy) or (b) display, wherein the processing of data for display includes
    the creation or manipulation of graphic objects (e.g., artificial images)
    or text by a computer prior to use with or in a specific display system and
    for computer graphics and control of data presentation with creation or
    manipulation of graphic objects or text performed by a computer or
    processor.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 1+ for
    chemical analytical processes.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, appropriate subclasses for a device whose
    purpose is for amusement rather than education.  An amusement device having
    a specific modification in its design or operation to effect instruction of
    the individual is classified originally in Class 434.

    472,    Amusement Devices, for an amusement device proper therefor which
    may simulate an actual event or apparatus or provide an environment in
    which physical training may occur.

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, for an amusement game or sport
    device adapted to be used in a competitive and amusing contest of skill or
    chance between two or more participants, whereby the results of the contest
    can be indicated according to rules defined for the game or sport, which
    device may also have an educational effect, benefit, or value.  Class 473
    contains devices which are to be used for practice by, or for perfecting
    the skill of, a person who already knows how to play the game, sport, or
    the like.  Class 434 contains devices which are to be used for instructing
    an unknowledgeable person in some aspect of the game, sport, or the like.
    A device which is used for both instruction and practice or perfecting game
    skills is classifiable in Class 434 and cross-referenced into Class 473.

    482,    Exercise Devices, for an exercise device proper therefor which may
    involve training a human user in an exercise activity.

    707,    Data Processing - Database and File Management, Data Structures, or
    Document Processing, subclasses 500-542 for document processing performed
    by a computer for presentation.


CLS 434/1
TXT DETECTION OR RANGE DETERMINATION OF DISTANT OBJECT BY APPARATUS USING
    SENSOR OF ELECTROMAGNETIC OR SOUND ENERGY:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to teaching or
    demonstrating the operation or characteristics of a means for locating, or
    finding the distance to, a remote object (e.g., an enemy aircraft, etc.) by
    use of electromagnetic or sound energy detecting means.

    (1)     Note.  Instruction can be done by any means, actual or simulated;
    however, when using actual means the input signal representing the remote
    object is a simulated signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 850+ for underwater systems.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 17.7 for devices
    which use a simulated signal for testing or calibrating equipment.

    367,    Communication, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 87+ for echo systems.

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclasses 207+ for equipment which determines position.


CLS 434/2
TXT Radar:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 relating to teaching or demonstrating the
    operation or characteristics of radar.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 5+ for radio wave
    energy object detecting and ranging systems.


CLS 434/3
TXT Cathode ray screen display simulated by light means (e.g., light spot
    projected onto screen, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein light is used to provide a display
    that looks like a blip or sweeping line seen on the face of a cathode ray
    tube.


CLS 434/4
TXT Optical means (e.g., image projector, etc.) or light or sound sensor (e.g.,
    television camera, microphone, etc.) included in a simulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein an apparatus simulating a radio
    wave sensing means includes some optical device (e.g., a lens, etc.), a
    light detector, or a sound detector.


CLS 434/5
TXT Interference simulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 relating to the limitation of means or
    conditions interfering with detection of reflected radio waves, such as
    pieces of metallic material dropped into the atmosphere (chaff or window),
    interfering radio waves transmitted by an enemy (jamming), or natural
    electrical disturbances of the atmosphere.


CLS 434/6
TXT Sonar:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 relating to teaching or demonstrating the
    operation or characteristics of sonar.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 850+ for underwater systems.

    367,    Communication, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclass 1 for sonar counter-measure apparatus; and subclasses 87+ for echo
    systems.


CLS 434/7
TXT Interference simulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 relating to the limitation of means or
    conditions interfering with the detection of reflected sound waves, such as
    water turbulence or propeller sound associated with a ship carrying a
    sound-sensing means.


CLS 434/8
TXT Simulation of doppler shift of echo:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 relating to an imitation of the effect of
    the direction of movement of a distant object upon the frequency of sound
    waves reflected therefrom.


CLS 434/9
TXT Simulation of plural detector system:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 relating to an imitation of apparatus using
    multiple means for sensing sound.


CLS 434/10
TXT Simulation by use of sound recording:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 relating to an imitation of sound produced
    by object detecting apparatus by employing a sound recording, e.g., a
    magnetic tape or a phonographic disk.


CLS 434/11
TXT ORGANIZED ARMED OR UNARMED CONFLICT OR SHOOTING:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to conducting wars
    between nations and states, to tactics employed by a military, police, or
    like unit, or to the discharging of firearms or other ordnance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, subclass 1 for dummy guns.

    89,     Ordnance, for means used in waging war.

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, subclass 28 for devices converting
    a firearm into a mere target masking device for practicing aiming.

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 348+ for targets, per se.

    348,    Television, subclasses 121+ for training devices utilizing
    television systems to simulate conditions relating to activities in war.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 39 and 95 for motion picture
    methods and apparatus used in marksmanship training.


CLS 434/12
TXT Self-propelled projectile:

    Subject matter under subclass 11 relating to a missile that is moved by
    some means contained therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    89,     Ordnance, subclasses 1.8+ for rocket-launching means.


CLS 434/13
TXT Launched underwater:

    Subject matter under subclass 12 wherein the missile is released from a
    carrier below the surface of a body of water.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclasses 238+ for torpedo-launching means.

    235,    Registers, subclass 403 for computers used in torpedo direction.


CLS 434/14
TXT Aerial warfare:

    Subject matter under subclass 11 relating to conflict involving an aircraft
    or means carried thereby.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 400+ for computers associated with ordnance
    or weapon systems.

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 360+ for airplane-towed
    targets.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 18 for targets with
    radio wave absorbing, reflecting, or countering features.


CLS 434/15
TXT Bombing:

    Subject matter under subclass 14 relating to attacking an enemy target with
    an explosive or incendiary device dropped from an aircraft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 401+ for computers associated with bombing
    apparatus.


CLS 434/16
TXT Gunnery:

    Subject matter under subclass 11 relating to the effective use of guns.


CLS 434/17
TXT Gunfire spotting:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 relating to training in observation of the
    impact of projectiles, generally for the purpose of supplying information
    to a gun crew from an observation point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for means for teaching the proper use of range-finding apparatus.


CLS 434/18
TXT Gun recoil simulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 relating to an imitation of the kickback
    of a gun when it is fired.


CLS 434/19
TXT Gun aiming:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 relating to pointing a gun toward
    something intended to be hit by a projectile discharged therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  Devices which are used to instruct an unknowledgeable person
    in the use of a gun are classified in this subclass and subclasses indented
    hereunder.  Devices which are used for practice by a person who already
    knows how to use a gun are classified in Class 463, subclasses 2+ and 49+.
    Devices which are used for both instruction and practice are classified in
    this subclass and indented subclasses and cross-referenced into Class 463,
    appropriate subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, subclass 1 for gun-sighting devices.

    235,    Registers, subclasses 404+ for computers used in gun-aiming
    apparatus.

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 348+ for combinations of
    targets with projectile projecting or aiming devices used for amusement.

    463,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 2+ and 49+ for a simulated
    projectile game.


CLS 434/20
TXT Cinematographic or cathode ray screen display:

    Subject matter under subclass 19 wherein a motion picture film or a cathode
    ray tube presents a representation of an object or scene to a person.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, appropriate subclasses for motion picture
    methods and apparatus.


CLS 434/21
TXT Training apparatus using beam of infrared, visible light, or ultraviolet
    radiation:

    Subject matter under subclass 19 wherein apparatus for instructing a person
    in pointing a gun uses a beam of electromagnetic radiation having a wave
    frequency in the range of infrared, visible light, or ultraviolet energy.


CLS 434/22
TXT Beam sensor included in apparatus:

    Subject matter under subclass 21 including means for detecting the
    electromagnetic radiation.


CLS 434/23
TXT Means (e.g., target, terrain model, etc.) marked or pierced to simulate
    projectile impact point:

    Subject matter under subclass 19 wherein the place where a projectile
    contacts a target or other surface is represented by applying something
    (e.g., an ink spot) to, or puncturing, an object (e.g., a simulated target
    or a terrain model used as a background for a target).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include a projectile such as a
    frangible ball that contains a dye or the like for marking a target at the
    point of impact of the projectile, since a projectile of this type actually
    strikes the target and there is no simulation of an impact of the type
    included in apparatus herein.


CLS 434/24
TXT Gun loading or projectile preparation (e.g., fuse setting, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 16 relating to making a projectile ready for
    use or placing a projectile in a gun.


CLS 434/25
TXT Water warfare:

    Subject matter under subclass 11 relating to conflict waged on or below the
    surface of a body of water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for training means relating to torpedoes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclasses 1+ for warships.


CLS 434/26
TXT Periscope view simulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 25 including means for presenting to a viewer
    an imitation of a scene observed through the tube used for viewing a
    seascape from an underwater combat vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclass 340 for actual submersible vessels having
    periscopes.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    402+ for periscopes.


CLS 434/27
TXT Range finding:

    Subject matter under subclass 11 relating to determining the distance
    between an object such as an enemy target and a second point such as a gun
    site.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclass 414 for computers used in range finding.


CLS 434/28
TXT AIRCRAFT WIND DRIFT SIMULATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to means for imitating
    the effect of wind upon the path of an aircraft.


CLS 434/29
TXT VEHICLE OPERATOR INSTRUCTION OR TESTING:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to controlling a
    conveyance during its movement or operation preparatory thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 121+ for television systems utilized in a
    vehicle simulator.

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclasses 27 and 28 for an
    amusement roundabout having a carriage which may simulate a vehicle,
    subclasses 59+ for a device for causing a person to experience an illusion
    of being in motion, e.g., travel simulating, etc., subclasses 88+ for a
    surface for a wheeled or gliding vehicle which may be used to simulate
    travel, e.g., skiing, skating, etc., and subclass 130 for an amusement
    device for simulating an aircraft or space vehicle or the movement thereof.

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclasses 1+ for vehicle operation or guidance involving data processing
    or calculating techniques.


CLS 434/30
TXT Flight vehicle:

    Subject matter under subclass 29 relating to an aircraft-type conveyance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 229 for dual control aircraft used for
    student instruction.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclass 7 for a toy simulation of an
    aircraft cockpit; and subclasses 30+ for remotely controlled tethered toy
    aircraft.

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclass 130 for an amusement
    device for simulating an aircraft or space vehicle or the movement thereof
    used primarily for entertainment.

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclasses 120+ for traffic control of aircraft.


CLS 434/31
TXT Automatic pilot:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 relating to means for automatically
    directing the course of the conveyance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclasses 1+ for  computers used in vehicle guidance.


CLS 434/32
TXT Model viewed and maneuvered by trainee from point remote therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 including a miniature or model of a
    conveyance, the movement of which is controlled by a student or examinee
    watching the conveyance from a location spaced therefrom.


CLS 434/33
TXT Helicopter:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein the conveyance is supported by
    blades rotating in a substantially horizontal plane and located above its
    passenger-carrying fuselage or framework.


CLS 434/34
TXT Outer space vehicle:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein the conveyance is a type that
    travels outside the atmosphere of the earth.


CLS 434/35
TXT In flight:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein a real conveyance that flies
    through the atmosphere without restriction of its path is used for
    instruction.


CLS 434/36
TXT With simulation of night or reduced visibility flight:

    Subject matter under subclass 35 wherein travel in darkness, or under
    conditions which restrict a pilot's view, is imitated.


CLS 434/37
TXT Aircraft, aircraft simulator, or means connected thereto travelling on
    ground or water during simulated flight training:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein a real aircraft, a representation
    of such a vehicle, or something connected to the aircraft or representation
    (e.g., a boat or truck attached to an airplane by a universally pivoting
    boom, etc.) travels in any desired direction on land or water during
    simulated flight training.


CLS 434/38
TXT Simulation of view from aircraft:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 relating to an imitation of the scene
    observed by a person looking out from the conveyance.


CLS 434/39
TXT View simulating means located on belt or cylinder:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 including a continuous flexible band or a
    barrel-like element on which a drawing, painting, print, photograph, or
    other graphic scene imitation (e.g., a terrain model, etc.) is carried.


CLS 434/40
TXT View simulating means located on element having spherical surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 including a means having a surface all
    points on which are equidistant from a point (e.g., a hemisphere) and on
    which a drawing, painting, print, photograph, or other graphic scene
    imitation (e.g., a terrain model, etc.) is carried.


CLS 434/41
TXT Simulation of night or reduced visibility flight:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 wherein travel in darkness, or under
    conditions which restrict a pilot's view, is imitated.


CLS 434/42
TXT Runway outlining or approach lights simulated:

    Subject matter under subclass 41 including an imitation of a light source
    used to show the limits of an airfield landing strip or the path leading
    thereto.


CLS 434/43
TXT View simulated by cathode ray screen display:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 wherein the scene is imitated by a cathode
    ray tube.


CLS 434/44
TXT View simulated by projected image:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 wherein the scene to be viewed is
    contained on a film slide, or the like, and is projected upon a viewing
    surface.


CLS 434/45
TXT Simulation of feel of control means (e.g., flight control stick, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein touch-perceived handling
    characteristics of means for operating the conveyance are imitated.


CLS 434/46
TXT Ground trainer agitated to simulate rough air buffeting or engine induced
    vibration of aircraft:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein movement imparted to an aircraft
    by turbulent air or engine vibration is imitated.


CLS 434/47
TXT Display or recordation of simulated flight path of ground trainer:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 including an earth supported
    representation of the conveyance and means for exhibiting or recording the
    path that would be followed by the conveyance if maneuvered in accordance
    with a trainee's handling of its control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 24 for means for plotting the
    position of a vehicle.

    346,    Recorders, subclass 8 for means for recording the course of a
    vehicle.


CLS 434/48
TXT Aircraft sound simulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 including an imitation of noise made by an
    aircraft.


CLS 434/49
TXT Aircraft or ambient condition simulated electrically or indicated by
    instrument or alarm:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein the functioning of an aircraft or
    a characteristic of the environment in which an aircraft is operated is
    imitated by electrical apparatus or is indicated by a dial, audible
    warning, or other informative means.


CLS 434/50
TXT Takeoff or preparation therefor:

    Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein departure of an aircraft from the
    ground, or preparation therefor is imitated.


CLS 434/51
TXT Aircraft attitude (e.g., roll, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein the condition simulated or
    indicated is roll, pitch, or yaw of an aircraft during its maneuvers.


CLS 434/52
TXT Ice formation or aircraft weight:

    Subject matter under subclass 49 including means for imitating (a) an
    accumulation of ice on an aircraft, e.g., on its wings or in a fuel tank,
    or (b) the weight of such a conveyance.


CLS 434/53
TXT Pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 49 including a means for showing force per
    unit of area in some component of an aircraft.


CLS 434/54
TXT Propulsion means or accessory:

    Subject matter under subclass 49 relating to apparatus for moving an
    aircraft, e.g., an engine or the fuel supply means associated therewith.


CLS 434/55
TXT Tiltable or turntable ground trainer:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein an earth supported representation
    of the conveyance is mounted so that it can be inclined or pivoted to
    imitate roll, pitch, yaw, or turning movement during flight.


CLS 434/56
TXT With fan or simulated propeller:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein a spinning blade is mounted on or
    associated with the representation of the conveyance.


CLS 434/57
TXT With means for stabilizing trainer when idle:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 including apparatus for preventing
    movement of the representation of the conveyance when it is not being used.


CLS 434/58
TXT By fluid actuated piston/cylinder ram:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein the representation of the
    conveyance is moved by a fluid driven means comprising a piston slidable in
    a cylinder.


CLS 434/59
TXT Simulation of flight generated force applied to aircraft occupant:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 relating to an imitation of a force
    exerted upon a person by motion of an aircraft, e.g., the force exerted
    upon a pilot when his aircraft is pulled out of a dive.


CLS 434/60
TXT Sail-equipped vehicle:

    Subject matter under subclass 29 relating to a conveyance having a panel
    against which wind force is exerted to propel the conveyance.


CLS 434/61
TXT Bicycle or motorcycle:

    Subject matter under subclass 29 relating to a conveyance having only two
    wheels and propelled either by a person or an engine.


CLS 434/62
TXT Automobile or truck:

    Subject matter under subclass 29 relating to a powered nontrack land
    conveyance commonly known as an automobile or truck.


CLS 434/63
TXT Model viewed and maneuvered by trainee from point remote therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 62 including a miniature or model of a
    conveyance the movement of which is controlled by a student or examinee
    watching from a location spaced therefrom.


CLS 434/64
TXT Driver's skill measured by time or vehicle travel distance:

    Subject matter under subclass 62 wherein the ability of a person in
    controlling operation of the conveyance is appraised in terms of time
    lapsed or distance travelled by the conveyance during the performance of a
    task (e.g., stopping the conveyance, etc.).


CLS 434/65
TXT Recordation of driver's performance:

    Subject matter under subclass 62 including apparatus for making a record of
    the manner in which a student or examinee controls the conveyance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 24 for means for plotting the
    position of a vehicle.

    346,    Recorders, subclass 8 for means for recording the course of a
    vehicle.


CLS 434/66
TXT Real vehicle used in instruction or testing:

    Subject matter under subclass 62 wherein an actual conveyance is controlled
    by a student or examinee.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 321+ for dual control motor vehicles
    used for student instruction.


CLS 434/67
TXT Vehicle positioned on rollers, belt, or platform:

    Subject matter under subclass 66 wherein the conveyance is supported upon
    (a) rotatable cylinders, wheels, or the like (b) a continuous flexible
    band, or (c) a generally planar man-made structure.


CLS 434/68
TXT Obstacle or other means contacted by improperly driven vehicle:

    Subject matter under subclass 66 wherein a conveyance not correctly
    controlled by a student or examinee contacts some object located on or near
    a path or parking position of the conveyance.


CLS 434/69
TXT Simulation of view from vehicle:

    Subject matter under subclass 62 relating to an imitation of the scene
    observed by a person looking out from a conveyance of the aforesaid type.


CLS 434/70
TXT View simulating means located on belt or cylinder:

    Subject matter under subclass 69 including a continuous flexible band or a
    roller-like element on which a drawing, painting, print, photograph, or
    other graphic scene imitation (e.g., a terrain model) is carried.


CLS 434/71
TXT Manipulation of gear shift lever or clutch pedal:

    Subject matter under subclass 62 relating to operation of a lever or clutch
    pedal used for controlling the drive shaft power transmission of the
    conveyance.


CLS 434/72
TXT ARCHITECTURE, INTERIOR DECORATION, OR INDUSTRIAL PLANT LAYOUT:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to design or
    construction of a building, design or furnishings of the interior of a
    building, or layout of machines or other equipment used in an industrial
    facility.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), for various types of buildings.


CLS 434/73
TXT Magnet included in display or demonstration:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein an exhibiting means therefor
    includes a magnet.


CLS 434/74
TXT Brick, tile, roofing, or siding:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 relating to small ceramic blocks used for
    forming a wall or floor surface, a material such as asphalt shingles for
    sheathing a roof, or a material such as aluminum or wood strips for
    sheathing the exterior of a building.


CLS 434/75
TXT Curtain or wall, ceiling, or floor cover:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 relating to a material such as cloth used
    to cover a window or form a space divider, or any material used to cover a
    wall, ceiling, or floor of a house or building.


CLS 434/76
TXT Light, mirror, or image projector included in display or demonstration:

    Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein an exhibiting means therefor
    includes a source of illumination, a polished means such as silvered glass
    for reflecting an image, or a means for projecting an image upon a viewing
    surface.


CLS 434/77
TXT Roller-mounted belt or strip included in display or demonstration:

    Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein an exhibiting means therefor
    includes a rotatable cylinder on which a continuous flexible band or
    elongate sheet is mounted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    426,    for similar belt or reel devices used for other purposes.


CLS 434/78
TXT Plaque (e.g., disk, etc.) turntable relative to index (e.g., window in
    card, etc.) to selectively align different points on plaque therewith:

    Subject matter under subclass 75 including a stiff sheet or board pivotal
    relative to a pointer, an aperture in a second stiff sheet or board, or
    other indexing means so that various points on the first sheet or board can
    be brought into register with said pointer, aperture in said second sheet
    or board, or other indexing means as desired.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198     and 404, for similar devices used for other purposes.


CLS 434/79
TXT Building or room interior represented pictorially or by model:

    Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein the appearance of a roofed
    structure or a room therein is exhibited by a picture or a miniature
    structure.


CLS 434/80
TXT Representation of furniture, bathroom or kitchen accessory, or cabinet
    placeable in different locations on representation of room interior:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 including a facsimile or illustration of
    (a) an item used in a house or building to support a person or an object
    (e.g., a bed, chair, or table), or (b) an accessory used in a kitchen or
    bathroom (e.g., a sink or dishwasher), the facsimile or illustration being
    movable to different places on a picture, model, or other exhibit of the
    inside of a room for the purpose of showing different arrangements of the
    furnishings.


CLS 434/81
TXT VISUAL ART OR CRAFT, ARTISTIC ADORNMENT, OR COLOR TRAINING OR DEMONSTRATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to (a) a visually
    aesthetic object (e.g., a painting), (b) a personal beautifying means, (c)
    a craft involving artistic skill, or (d) color training or exhibiting means.

    (1)     Note.  To be included in this subclass as related to a color
    training or demonstrating means, or in subclasses indented thereunder, a
    patent must disclose means for teaching color recognition or must
    demonstrate color for its aesthetic effect.  A means using color for
    identification or other subsidiary purpose is classified in another
    subclass according to the primary subject matter involved.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass or subclasses indented hereunder
    are certain aids for making an artistic object, e.g., a support framework
    for modeling clay used in a statue or a device for facilitating creation of
    a perspective drawing.

    (3)     Note.  Mechanical drawing is considered an artistic craft for
    purpose of this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, appropriate subclasses for drafting
    instruments.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 441.1+ for an easel, book, or music score
    holder.


CLS 434/82
TXT Sculpture or craft involving manual carving or shaping:

    Subject matter under subclass 81 relating to an artistic object or work
    involving cutting or molding by use of the hands.


CLS 434/83
TXT Shape defined by filament (e.g., string, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 81 relating to an artistic form delineated by
    a cord, wire, or like tenuous material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 32 for an
    article having ornamentally wound or woven strands.


CLS 434/84
TXT Color application (e.g., painting, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 81 involving placement of color on a surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 256+ for processes of forming a
    nonuniform coating on a substrate.


CLS 434/85
TXT Drawing:

    Subject matter under subclass 81 involving production of a likeness or
    impression by making lines on a surface.


CLS 434/86
TXT Animal or human body model having movable parts:

    Subject matter under subclass 85 relating to an animal or human body model
    having limb representations or other parts which can be adjusted to
    different positions.

    (1)     Note.  Models included in this subclass are used by artists drawing
    the body of a human being or other animal in different positions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    267+,   for anatomical representations used in medical training.

    295+,   for artificial body parts used in taxidermy or specimen displays.


CLS 434/87
TXT Stencil:

    Subject matter under subclass 85 relating to a masking plaque having
    therein a perforation through which a marking implement or material can be
    applied to a surface underlying the plaque.


CLS 434/88
TXT Tracing:

    Subject matter under subclass 85 involving creation of a drawing by moving
    a pencil or other marking means over a path viewed through a transparent
    sheet.


CLS 434/89
TXT Model support:

    Subject matter under subclass 85 relating to a means for supporting a
    subject while it is being drawn.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 441+ for an easel.


CLS 434/90
TXT Grid included in drawing aid or scene viewer:

    Subject matter under subclass 85 relating to a means for facilitating
    creation of a drawing or a device through which a scene or object to be
    drawn is viewed, the means or device including a network of lines, usually
    to aid in proportioning the drawing.


CLS 434/91
TXT Perspective:

    Subject matter under subclass 85 relating to a drawing which gives the
    impression that parts thereof are at different distances from the viewer.


CLS 434/92
TXT Orthogonal projection:

    Subject matter under subclass 85 relating to drawing an object by
    projecting lines representing its shape onto mutually perpendicular planes.


CLS 434/93
TXT Flower arranging or landscaping:

    Subject matter under subclass 81 relating to the artistic arrangement of a
    collection of flowers or the decorative features of a tract of land.


CLS 434/94
TXT Hair or wig styling:

    Subject matter under subclass 81 relating to the artistic arrangement of
    (a) a person's hair, or (b) a representation thereof.


CLS 434/95
TXT Decorative sewing, needlework, weaving, or textile designing:

    Subject matter under subclass 81 relating to the artistic creation of items
    with a needle and thread, forming fabric by interlacing strands, or
    creating textile patterns.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclass 69 for ornamental textiles.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a textile fabric of single or plural layers which may have an
    ornamental design or indicia thereon, see especially subclasses 175+, 187,
    190, 193+, and 196+.


CLS 434/96
TXT Design formed of identical or complementary elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 81 relating to the creation of an artistic
    arrangement of elements which are the same or which cooperate with each
    other with respect to shape, color, or other design feature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    63 for laminating processes combined with manually arranging different
    element to form a design.


CLS 434/97
TXT Strips:

    Subject matter under subclass 96 wherein said elements are narrow, flat
    pieces of material.


CLS 434/98
TXT Color display:

    Subject matter under subclass 81 relating to a means for showing color or
    presenting color characteristics, e.g., a chart naming harmonious colors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 421+ for an effective
    multicolor chart or standard.


CLS 434/99
TXT Personal appearance or wearing apparel:

    Subject matter under subclass 98 relating to color of an item or material
    worn to cover a person's body or to enhance appearance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    377,    for means for demonstrating characteristics of beauty aids not
    involving color.


CLS 434/100
TXT Cosmetic or nail polish:

    Subject matter under subclass 99  relating to color of a material applied
    to the face or nails.


CLS 434/101
TXT Produced by spinning means (e.g., plural rotating color disks, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 98 including a rapidly rotating means for
    producing color.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104+,   for rotatably mounted color disks which are stationary when viewed.


CLS 434/102
TXT Display produced by superposed color filters:

    Subject matter under subclass 98 including color filters which are disposed
    in layers to produce a color.


CLS 434/103
TXT Including mixing receptacle or holder for color material:

    Subject matter under subclass 98 which includes a means for holding a color
    material while it is being mixed or until it is used.


CLS 434/104
TXT Including relatively rotatable elements (e.g., concentrically mounted color
    disks, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 98 including parts which turn relative to
    each other.


CLS 434/105
TXT Automobile:

    Subject matter under subclass 98 relating to the color of an automobile.


CLS 434/106
TXT ASTROLOGY:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to the divination of the
    supposed influence of the stars or planets upon human affairs and
    terrestrial events by their positions and aspects.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284+,   for teaching means relating to astronomy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclass 161 for fortune-telling devices.


CLS 434/107
TXT BUSINESS OR ECONOMICS:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to activities involved
    with managing a commercial or industrial enterprise or to analysis of
    factors involved with production, distribution, and consumption of goods
    and services.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219+,   for occupational training.

    365+,   for means for demonstrating or displaying an item of manufacture or
    an industrial operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    283,    Printed Matter, subclass 115 for graphic charts for illustrating
    statistical information; subclass 54 for insurance; subclass 56 for
    advertising; subclass 57 for banking; and subclasses 66.1+ for accounting
    forms, books and sheets.

    705,    Data Processing: Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/price Determination, subclasses 1+  for business or financial
    management data processing.


CLS 434/108
TXT Work schedule:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 relating to means for exhibiting a plan
    for, or the status of, labor or production matters of a commercial or
    industrial enterprise.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    705,    Data Processing: Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/price Determination, subclass 5 for a work or task assignment data
    processing system; and subclass 32 for a time accounting data processing
    system.


CLS 434/109
TXT Record keeping:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 relating to a means for maintaining
    information about finance or other concerns of a commercial or industrial
    enterprise, such as records of income or expenses of operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    705,    Data Processing: Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/price Determination, subclasses 30+ for an accounting data processing
    system.


CLS 434/110
TXT Coin or currency identification or counterfeit detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 relating to instruction in the relative
    value of different denominations of money or in recognizing bogus currency.


CLS 434/111
TXT CELESTIAL NAVIGATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to the use of a star for
    determining an object's position, course, or distance traveled in relation
    to a reference such as the surface of the earth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186,    for means for instructing in the use of magnetic or gyro compasses.

    239+,   for means for instructing the use of radio navigation apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclass 200 for electrical navigation equipment.


CLS 434/112
TXT COMMUNICATION AIDS FOR THE HANDICAPPED:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to devices which enable
    a handicapped person to communicate with another person.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this class and subclass are devices which
    merely give a signal to the handicapped person upon detection of an
    obstacle in the person's path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, digest 17 for tactile signalling devices.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 407.1+ for tactile signals
    in electrical communication apparatus.

    348,    Television, subclasses 62+ for television aids for the blind.

    704,    Data Processing:  Speech Signal Processing, Linguistics, Language
    Translation, and Audio Compression/Decompression, subclasses 258+ for
    speech synthesis.


CLS 434/113
TXT Tactile reading aid (e.g., braille, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein information is given to the
    handicapped person in tactile form.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are tactile alphabets.


CLS 434/114
TXT Converting information to tactile output:

    Subject matter under subclass 113 wherein the information is initially in
    another sensory medium (e.g., Visual, Aural, etc.) and is changed to a
    tactile output.


CLS 434/115
TXT Braille writing slate:

    Subject matter under subclass 113 relating to a surface having protrusions
    or depressions arranged in a particular form, selected ones of which can be
    pressed against paper or the like to form tactile characters thereon.


CLS 434/116
TXT Converting information to sound:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein information is initially in
    another medium (e.g., visual, tactile, etc.) and is changed to sound output.


CLS 434/117
TXT Writing guide for the blind:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 relating to devices having guide means
    for a writing instrument, whereby handwriting by a blind person is
    facilitated.


CLS 434/118
TXT COMPUTER LOGIC, OPERATION, OR PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTION:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to instruction in the
    operation of a computer, the logic involved in its operation, or the
    technique of programming a computer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for computer procedures and applications.


CLS 434/126
TXT FLUID FLOW OR WAVE MOTION:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to movement of a fluid.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are patents dealing with the
    demonstration of pipeline networks, water waves, the simulation of sound
    waves by mechanical analogy, and devices which use fluid mechanics or
    hydraulics to demonstrate a machine or the like, regardless of whether the
    machine itself demonstrates a principle of fluid flow or wave motion.


CLS 434/127
TXT FOOD:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to an edible substance.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are devices relating to dieting,
    nutrition, cooking, etc.


CLS 434/128
TXT GAME, BOARD OR TABLE TYPE:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to an amusement of the
    type played on a surface of limited area, e.g, chess or checkers.


CLS 434/129
TXT Using playing card:

    Subject matter under subclass 128 relating to an amusement using small
    pasteboard type cards with indicia thereon commonly referred to as playing
    cards.

    (1)     Note.  Actual playing cards need not be used.  A hand to be played
    may be displayed on a surface such as a disk, slide, or the like.


CLS 434/130
TXT GEOGRAPHY:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to the study of features
    of an area of the earth.


CLS 434/131
TXT Terrestrial globe or accessory therefor:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 relating to an earth-representing sphere
    or spherelike body or to means associated therewith to facilitate the use
    thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284+,   for astronomy teaching apparatus including a representation of the
    earth which is not intended to illustrate geographic features thereof.

    287+,   for a celestial globe.


CLS 434/132
TXT Relief globe:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 relating to a globe which represents the
    positions and varying elevations of different land masses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for making spherical articles by laminating
    processes.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses for methods of shaping or molding plastic materials
    within the class definition.


CLS 434/133
TXT Having diverse use (e.g., pencil box, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the sphere or like body is also
    useable for a purpose not involved with study of the earth.


CLS 434/134
TXT Having magnet associated therewith:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein a magnet is used in combination
    with the sphere or like body.


CLS 434/135
TXT Having plural planar or curved surfaces (e.g., flat or frustoconical
    surfaces, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 131 relating to a spherelike body having
    multiple planar or curved surfaces.


CLS 434/136
TXT Rotated by mechanical drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the sphere or like body is turned
    by mechanical means (e.g., belt, gears, etc.) about an axis passing
    therethrough.


CLS 434/137
TXT Collapsible or arranged for convenient assembly, disassembly, or storage:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the sphere or like body can be
    collapsed or is designed so that elements thereof can easily be put
    together, taken apart, or stowed.


CLS 434/138
TXT Inflatable:

    Subject matter under subclass 137 wherein the sphere or like body can be
    distended from a collapsed state to a taut state by introducing fluid
    therein.


CLS 434/139
TXT With means representing vehicle movement relative to earth:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 including a representation of a
    conveyance movable relative to the sphere or like body.


CLS 434/140
TXT Space vehicle:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein a conveyance travelling outside
    the atmosphere of the earth is represented.


CLS 434/141
TXT With means indicating distance between points on earth:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 including means giving the distance
    between two locations on the earth.


CLS 434/142
TXT With means indicating time at different points on earth:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 including means giving the relative time
    at various locations on the earth.


CLS 434/143
TXT With means demonstrating solar illumination of earth:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 including means representing sunlight
    striking the earth.


CLS 434/144
TXT With means demonstrating wind currents over earth:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 including means representing flow of
    atmospheric air streams relative to the surface of the earth.


CLS 434/145
TXT With internal light:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 including a source of light located
    inside the sphere or like body.


CLS 434/146
TXT With means to facilitate finding or reading indicia thereon:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 including means for helping a user locate
    or read markings, printing, or other indicia on the surface of the sphere
    or like body, e.g., a magnifying lens or a pointer movable relative to the
    surface of a globe.


CLS 434/147
TXT With map segments attachable thereto (e.g., continent, nation, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 131 including a plaque representing a portion
    of the surface of the earth and mountable on the sphere or like body.


CLS 434/148
TXT With suspension type support:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 including a cord or other means from
    which the sphere or like body is suspended.


CLS 434/149
TXT Means indicating time at different points on earth:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 including means giving the relative time
    at various locations on the earth.


CLS 434/150
TXT Map or terrain model:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 relating to a representation of an area
    of the earth on a generally flat surface.

    (1)     Note.  The maps in this and indented subclasses are limited to
    instruction in geography.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149,    for maps including means giving the time at various locations on
    the earth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    283,    Printed Matter, subclasses 34+ for maps of general utility which
    merely delineate geographical features.


CLS 434/151
TXT With model or sample of natural or man-made item associated therewith:

    Subject matter under subclass 150 relating to a generally flat
    representation or three-dimensional model of an area of land combined with
    a model or sample of something occurring in nature (e.g., animal, plant,
    etc.) or made by man at a particular place.


CLS 434/152
TXT Relief:

    Subject matter under subclass 150 relating to a map or model having an
    irregular surface which represents the positions and varying elevations of
    different land masses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    59 for processes of making relief representations of three-dimensional
    surfaces.


CLS 434/153
TXT Means for facilitating location of different points on map:

    Subject matter under subclass 150 including a device for helping a person
    find various points on a generally flat representation of an area of land.


CLS 434/154
TXT HISTORY OR GENEALOGY:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to the recordation or
    explanation of significant facts or events of the past, or to the descent
    of a person, family, or group from an ancestor.


CLS 434/155
TXT IDENTIFICATION OF PERSON OR HANDWRITING ANALYSIS:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to aids for identifying
    an individual, or for determining information concerning a person whose
    handwriting is being studied.

    (1)     Note.  Included are devices comprising a plurality of elements,
    each bearing a portion of a facial characteristic of a person, such as
    eyes, nose, chin, etc., which can be selectively assembled to form a
    composite picture of an individual, and devices for facilitating the
    identification of fingerprints.


CLS 434/156
TXT LANGUAGE:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to instruction in
    language skills.

    (1)     Note.  Crossword puzzle aids, because they involve spelling and
    reading devices, because they involve word recognition, are indented under
    subclass 167, spelling, phonics, work recognition, or sentence formation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222+,   for devices relating to instruction in code communication.

    307,    308+ and 319+, for use of audio means for teaching a subject other
    than language.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    283,    Printed Matter, subclass 46 for printed sheets of language
    characters.

    704,    Data Processing:  Speech Signal Processing, Linguistics, Language
    Translation, and Audio Compression/Decompression, subclasses 1+ for
    linguistics and subclasses 200+ for speech signal processing.


CLS 434/157
TXT Foreign:

    Subject matter under subclass 156 relating to a language not generally used
    in a student's native country.


CLS 434/158
TXT Shorthand:

    Subject matter under subclass 156 relating to writing in which characters,
    abbreviations, or symbols are substituted for letters, words, or phrases.


CLS 434/159
TXT Alphabet letter formation, recognition, or sequencing:

    Subject matter under subclass 156 relating to instruction in forming,
    recognizing, or sequentially arranging letters of the alphabet.


CLS 434/160
TXT Letter formed by segments:

    Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein an alphabet letter is formed by
    assembling selected ones of a set of pieces, such as short of long,
    straight or curved elements, in the shape of the letter.


CLS 434/161
TXT Letter displayed upon manipulation of mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein some mechanism, such as a key
    having an alphabet letter associated therewith is manipulated (e.g.,
    depressed) and as a result, a letter-bearing member is brought into
    viewable position.


CLS 434/162
TXT Writing or printing by hand:

    Subject matter under subclass 156 relating to instruction in formation of
    letters or words with a hand-held means such as a pen or pencil.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclass 118.5 for a hand or arm rest movable with the
    hand of a writer during writing.


CLS 434/163
TXT Tracing:

    Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein a trainee moves some means over
    an exhibited path (e.g., a writing sample, etc.) to learn proper movement
    of his hand in writing or printing.


CLS 434/164
TXT Slotted or grooved path:

    Subject matter under subclass 163 wherein the path is a slot or groove.


CLS 434/165
TXT Writing sample included in teaching means:

    Subject matter under subclass 162 including an exhibit of a properly
    written or printed letter or word.


CLS 434/166
TXT Mechanical means for teaching proper position of body part while writing:

    Subject matter under subclass 162 including a mechanical structure for
    teaching a person how a body part should be placed during writing, e.g., a
    means which holds fingers in proper gripping position on a pen or pencil.


CLS 434/167
TXT Spelling, phonics, word recognition, or sentence formation:

    Subject matter under subclass 156 relating to instruction in the way
    letters are arranged in words, the sound of letters, groups of letters, or
    words, the meanings of words, or the way in which sentences are correctly
    formed.


CLS 434/168
TXT Magnet included in teaching means:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 having a magnet in the instructing means.


CLS 434/169
TXT Electrical component included in teaching means:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 having an electrical part in the
    instructing means.


CLS 434/170
TXT Color used in teaching means:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 including color in the instructing means.


CLS 434/171
TXT Letter or word bearing elements (e.g., cards, blocks, etc.) with
    interfitting surface configurations:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 including components having letters or
    words thereon and shaped so that surfaces thereof interfit.

    (1)     Note.  Including are devices to ensure that the components must be
    properly arranged relative to each other to form a word or sentence.


CLS 434/172
TXT Letter-bearing elements (e.g., cards, blocks, etc.) selectively aligned to
    form word or sentence:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 including components which have letters
    thereon and which are selectively placed in order to form a word or
    sentence.


CLS 434/173
TXT Letter-bearing belt or reel-mounted strip:

    Subject matter under subclass 172 wherein a letter-bearing component
    consists of a strip formed into a loop or wound on a reel.


CLS 434/174
TXT Rotatably mounted letter bearing element:

    Subject matter under subclass 172 wherein a letter-bearing component is
    arranged to turn about an axis passing therethrough.


CLS 434/175
TXT Letter-bearing elements slidable between different grooves:

    Subject matter under subclass 172 including letter-bearing components
    slidable from one groove to another groove associated therewith, e.g.,
    blocks disposed in grooves in the shape of a T and slidable from the
    horizontal portion of the T into the vertical stem portion or vice versa.


CLS 434/176
TXT Display of word or picture upon correct manipulation of teaching means:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 wherein a word or picture is exhibited
    when an instructing means is properly manipulated, e.g., a keyboard
    arranged to display a word when its keys are depressed in proper sequence
    or plaques bearing portions of a picture and words which when placed in
    proper alignment complete the picture.


CLS 434/177
TXT Crossword puzzle aid:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 relating to aids for creating or working
    on a crossword puzzle.


CLS 434/178
TXT Reading:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 relating to instruction in reading.


CLS 434/179
TXT Speed:

    Subject matter under subclass 178 relating to devices used to train a
    person to read rapidly.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclasses
    237+ for tachistoscope type vision testing apparatus.  See also (1) Note
    under this subclass for the distinction between the tachistoscope type
    instruments as classified in Classes 351 and 434.


CLS 434/180
TXT Projected image of reading matter:

    Subject matter under subclass 179 wherein the matter to be read is
    contained on a film, slide, or the like and is projected upon a viewing
    surface.


CLS 434/181
TXT Apertured mask moved past reading matter carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 179 wherein a member having a viewing opening
    therein passes between reading matter and a viewer, the latter attempting
    to read the matter during the time it is exposed through the viewing
    opening.


CLS 434/182
TXT Reading matter carrier moved past viewing position:

    Subject matter under subclass 179 wherein the matter to be read is located
    on a carrier such as a sheet or roll and is moved past a viewing position.


CLS 434/183
TXT Pacer moved down reading matter carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 179 wherein an element such as a bar passes
    down reading matter at a controlled rate, the viewer attempting to read at
    the speed of the moving element.


CLS 434/184
TXT Directionality training (e.g., for dyslexics, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 178 relating to training a person to
    correctly read from left to right, and including aids for training a person
    to recognize or distinguish between letters which are mirror images of each
    other, such as "b" and "d" or  "p" and "q".


CLS 434/185
TXT Speech:

    Subject matter under subclass 156 relating to instruction in proper speech,
    including public speaking and corrective training for persons with speech
    impediments.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclass 590 for a diagnostic device placed in a person's
    mouth to detect the locations where a person's tongue touches the palate
    during speech in order to determine abnormal speech patterns.

    704,    Data Processing:  Speech Signal Processing, Linguistics, Language
    Translation, and Audio Compression/Decompression, subclasses 200+ for
    speech signal processing.


CLS 434/186
TXT MAGNETIC OR GYRO COMPASS:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to a device for
    determining directions by means of (a) a magnetic needle turning freely on
    a pivot and pointing to the magnetic north, or (b) a direction indicator
    controlled by a gyroscope.


CLS 434/187
TXT MEASUREMENT OF LENGTH OR VOLUME:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to determination of (a)
    the distance between points, or (b) volume.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, digest 47 for scale conversion means.


CLS 434/188
TXT MATHEMATICS:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to the science of
    numbers and their operations, interrelations, combinations,
    generalizations, and abstractions, and of space configurations and their
    structure, measurement, transformations, and generalizations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    283,    Printed Matter, subclass 44 for printed sheets of mathematical
    values.


CLS 434/189
TXT Base conversion or use of base other than ten:

    Subject matter under subclass 188 relating to a set of numbers based on
    calculations with any number except ten, or to transformation between bases.


CLS 434/190
TXT Magnet included in teaching means:

    Subject matter under subclass 188 including a magnet.


CLS 434/191
TXT Arithmetic:

    Subject matter under subclass 188 relating to computations with real
    numbers.


CLS 434/192
TXT Chalkboard or equivalent means having readily erasable surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 including a panel having a surface from
    which marks made by chalk or other means can easily be erased.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    408+,   for chalkboards and equivalent readily erasable means.


CLS 434/193
TXT Manually manipulated numeral shaped elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 including pieces handled by hand and
    having the form of a symbol which represents a number.


CLS 434/194
TXT Numeric value represented by weight placed on balance:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 including a weight which represents a
    numeric value and which is placed on a balance to illustrate a mathematical
    relationship.


CLS 434/195
TXT Manually manipulated elements having size proportional to numeric value:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 including pieces handled by hand and
    sized according to their numeric value.


CLS 434/196
TXT Fraction representing elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 195 wherein the pieces represent two numbers
    whose quotient is to be determined, e.g., 3/4.


CLS 434/197
TXT Indicia-bearing belt or reel-mounted strip:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 including indicia such as numbers located
    on a continuous flexible band or on a web wound on a reel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    426,    for similar devices not used for teaching mathematics.


CLS 434/198
TXT Plaque (e.g., disk, etc.) turntable relative to index (e.g., window in
    card, etc.) to selectively align different points on plaque therewith:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 including a first stiff sheet or board
    pivotal relative to a pointer, an aperture in a second stiff sheet or
    board, or other indexing means so that various points on the first sheet or
    board can be brought into register with said pointer, aperture in said
    second sheet or board, or other indexing means as desired.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78      and 404, for similar devices not used for teaching mathematics.


CLS 434/199
TXT Plaque slidable relative to index (e.g., window in card, etc.) to
    selectively align different points on plaque therewith:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 including a first stiff sheet or board
    translatable relative to a pointer, an aperture in a second stiff sheet or
    board, or other indexing means so that various points on the first sheet or
    board can be brought into register with said pointer, aperture in said
    second sheet or board, or other indexing means as desired.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    405,    for similar devices not used for teaching mathematics.


CLS 434/200
TXT Manually manipulated pin or peg:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 including an elongate member inserted by
    hand into a hole or a material.


CLS 434/201
TXT Electric component included in teaching means:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 including an electrical part.


CLS 434/202
TXT Keyboard or like manually manipulated array (e.g., slides, levers, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 191 including an assemblage of systematically
    arranged keys, slidable or turntable members, or the like by means of which
    a machine is caused to function.


CLS 434/203
TXT Apertured elements threaded on elongate means (e.g., abacus, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 191 including apertured pieces through all of
    which a wire, a rod, or the like extends.


CLS 434/204
TXT Elements manually placed on or removed from elongate means during use:

    Subject matter under subclass 203 wherein the apertured pieces are placed
    by hand on the wire, rod, or like means during instruction of a student.


CLS 434/205
TXT Means having number of marks (e.g., dots, etc.) or associated physical
    units (e.g., sticks, indentations, etc.) corresponding to numeric value:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 including teaching means with a
    collection of marks or physical elements equal in number to a particular
    numeric value, e.g., a block representing the number 10 and having ten dots
    or ten notches on a surface thereof, or a bundle of five sticks
    representing the number 5.


CLS 434/206
TXT Rotatable wheel-shaped element (e.g., ring, disk, cylinder, etc.) having
    indicia on perimeter thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 including indicia such as numbers located
    on the circumference of a means having a circular cross section.


CLS 434/207
TXT Color used in teaching means:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein color is employed to relate to a
    specific number or set of numbers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98+,    for color training devices or charts.


CLS 434/208
TXT Ball, block, or disk:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 including a sphere, a generally cubical
    element, or a thin circular object.


CLS 434/209
TXT Division or multiplication:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 relating to dividing or multiplying one
    number by another.


CLS 434/210
TXT Place value relative to decimal point:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 relating to the value of a number
    according to its position relative to a decimal point, e.g., a number
    located two places to the left of a decimal point represents units valued
    at 10 each.


CLS 434/211
TXT Geometry, trigonometry, or physical mathematical model structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 188 relating to the branches of mathematics
    that deal with (a) the measurement, properties, and relationships of
    points, lines, angles, surfaces, and solids, (b) the study of trigonometric
    functions and their applications, or (c) relating to a physical
    representation of some mathematical relationship, e.g., a model of a
    parabola.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, appropriate subclasses for geometrical
    instruments.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 817 for
    the evaluation of trigonometric functions by analog computations.


CLS 434/212
TXT Pythagorean theorem:

    Subject matter under subclass 211 relating to the theorem stating that for
    a right-angled triangle the square of the hypotenuse is equal to the sum of
    the squares of the other sides.


CLS 434/213
TXT Property of sphere or spheroid:

    Subject matter under subclass 211 relating to characteristics of a globular
    body or an ellipsoid of revolution.


CLS 434/214
TXT Property of circle or ellipse:

    Subject matter under subclass 211 relating to characteristics of a closed
    plane curve every point of which is equidistant from a fixed point within
    the curve, or characteristics of a closed plane curve generated about two
    points in such a way that the sums of its distances from two fixed points
    is a constant.


CLS 434/215
TXT Demonstration means using relatively turnable elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 211 demonstrated by a means including
    elements that turn relative to each other.


CLS 434/216
TXT Demonstration means using filament (e.g., string, etc.) to define geometric
    shape:

    Subject matter under subclass 211 demonstrated by means including a strand
    such as string or wire which delineates a geometric form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 32 for an
    article having ornamentally wound or woven strands.


CLS 434/217
TXT METEOROLOGY:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to atmospheric
    conditions, weather, or weather forecasting.


CLS 434/218
TXT NUCLEAR ENERGY OR RADIOACTIVE RADIATION DETECTION OR SIMULATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to energy released by
    atomic fission or fusion, or to sensing or representing radiation released
    from atoms.


CLS 434/219
TXT OCCUPATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to a vocation.


CLS 434/220
TXT Air traffic control:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 relating to guidance of airplanes along
    airways and during takeoff and landing.


CLS 434/221
TXT Audiometry:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 relating to the skill of determining a
    patient's hearing ability, e.g., instruction in the use of an audiometer.


CLS 434/222
TXT Code communication:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 relating to a system such as Morse code
    signals for transmitting information.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclasses for mechanical
    signalling apparatus.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 113 for telegraph codes; and subclass 115 for
    electrical learner's instruments.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, appropriate subclasses for operative
    railway signals.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, for miscellaneous electric signalling.


CLS 434/223
TXT Visual signalling:

    Subject matter under subclass 222 relating to a system such as semaphore
    using signals that can be seen.


CLS 434/224
TXT Electricity or electronics:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 relating to the assembly or connection of
    resistors, capacitors, or other electrical components in one or more ways
    to complete an electrical circuit for training, demonstration, or
    experimental purposes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    234,    for devices for teaching soldering, wherein electricity or an
    electrical component is only nominally disclosed.


CLS 434/225
TXT Dairying, farming, ranching, or other occupation involving care of plants
    or animals:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 relating to operation of a dairy, farm,
    or ranch, or to any other occupation involving cultivation or care of
    plants or animals.


CLS 434/226
TXT Fire fighting:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 relating to the art of extinguishing
    fires.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are devices for simulating a fire
    or for simulating fire-fighting equipment (e.g., a pumper, etc.).


CLS 434/227
TXT Keyboard operation (e.g., typing, key punching, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 219 relating to the proper technique of
    operating the keyboard of a machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, subclasses 465+ and 470+ for teaching keyboard musical
    instruments.

    199,    Type Casting, for lino-type machines. 234, Selective Cutting (e.g.,
    Punching), appropriate subclasses, and particularly subclass 123 for
    keyboard means in a card or tape punch.

    235,    Registers, for registers and calculators.

    276,    Typesetting, appropriate subclasses for machines pertinent to that
    class.

    346,    Recorders, appropriate subclasses for recorders.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 472+ for a keyboard of a
    typewriter.


CLS 434/228
TXT Means for selectively illuminating character on simulated keyboard:

    Subject matter under subclass 227 including a replica (such as a display
    panel) of an actual keyboard, with a light associated with each key or
    representation so that a character can be illuminated to indicate that it
    is to be typed.


CLS 434/229
TXT Means for selectively rendering key operable or inoperable:

    Subject matter under subclass 227 including means to lock one or more keys
    of a keyboard in an inoperable position and means to release a selected key
    so that it can be depressed.


CLS 434/230
TXT Means for selectively producing sound of character:

    Subject matter under subclass 227 including means having the sounds of
    characters recorded thereon, and means for reproducing the sound of a
    selected character either before or after the key therefor is depressed.


CLS 434/231
TXT Practice keyboard having individually depressible keys:

    Subject matter under subclass 227 wherein the training is performed on a
    dummy keyboard having individual keys each of which can be depressed
    without affecting another key.


CLS 434/232
TXT With means to display character upon depression of key:

    Subject matter under subclass 231 including means which will cause a
    character to be displayed when the key bearing the corresponding character
    is depressed.


CLS 434/233
TXT Means on hand or finger for indicating finger to be used:

    Subject matter under subclass 227 including structure to be worn on the
    hand or finger of a trainee, the structure having characters thereon
    associated with individual fingers to indicate to the trainee which finger
    is to be used to strike a selected character.


CLS 434/234
TXT Soldering or welding:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 relating to welding or soldering,
    including devices for simulating the "puddle" created by a welding torch.


CLS 434/235
TXT PARLIAMENTARY PROCEDURE:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to the proper conduction
    of a meeting or the like according to recognized rules of order.


CLS 434/236
TXT PSYCHOLOGY:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to the behavioral
    characteristics of an individual or group.


CLS 434/237
TXT Cooperation of plural pupils:

    Subject matter under subclass 236 involving interaction between two or more
    persons.


CLS 434/238
TXT Behavior or performance display (e.g., board for showing completed chores,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 236 wherein a record of a person's diligence
    in completing a chore or a student's academic success is displayed.


CLS 434/239
TXT RADIO NAVIGATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to teaching or
    demonstrating the operation or characteristics of a means for determining
    position, course, or distance traveled by use of radio waves.

    (1)     Note.  Instruction can be done by any means, actual or simulated,
    however, when using actual means the input signal representing position,
    course, or distance is a simulated signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 385+ for radio
    wave energy directive beacons for guiding aircraft along a course or on a
    glide path in landing operations; and subclasses 417+ for direction finding
    receivers.

    346,    Recorders, subclass 8 for recorders responsive to the direction
    and/or extent of motion of a translating member or vehicle.

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclass 200 for electrical navigation equipment.


CLS 434/240
TXT Light sensor included in simulator of radio navigation equipment:

    Subject matter under subclass 239 wherein an imitation of radio navigating
    apparatus includes a means for detecting light.

    (1)     Note.  Light is usually substituted for the radio wave.


CLS 434/241
TXT Simulation of upwardly directed airfield or landing approach marker radio
    beam:

    Subject matter under subclass 239 including an imitation of a vertically
    directed radio beam used to designate the location of an airport or the
    path to be followed by an aircraft landing thereon.


CLS 434/242
TXT Simulated radio signal generated by use of data storage means:

    Subject matter under subclass 239 wherein an imitation of a radio signal is
    produced by means of information storing apparatus such as an electronic
    computer.


CLS 434/243
TXT Simulated bearing or position of vehicle relative to radio transmitter or
    directional beam indicated to trainee by instrument:

    Subject matter under subclass 239 wherein an imitation of the heading or
    location of a conveyance with respect to a radio station or directed radio
    beam is exhibited to a trainee by a dial indicator or other instrument used
    in navigation.


CLS 434/244
TXT Simulation of radio directional beam carrying morse code signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 239 including an imitation of a directed
    radio beam modulated by a signal used in transmitting Morse code, generally
    signals for the letters A and N.


CLS 434/245
TXT RELIGION:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to the worship of God or
    the supernatural, or to personal or institutionalized moral attitude,
    belief, or practice.


CLS 434/246
TXT Rosary:

    Subject matter under subclass 245 relating to a string of beads used to
    count prayers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclass 68 for ball calculators.


CLS 434/247
TXT PHYSICAL EDUCATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to teaching a physical
    activity engaged in for pleasure, or to instruction, discipline, drill, or
    evaluation of the body or its use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 379.01+ for devices for measuring
    muscular strength.

    473,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 131+ for golf equipment and
    devices used in practicing the game of golf and subclasses 422+ for a
    practice or training device for a playing field or court game such as
    baseball, basketball, football, soccer, tennis, etc..

    482,    Exercise Devices, for a muscle conditioning or developing
    exercising device which is selftraining or which may be used in practicing
    an athletic activity appropriate therefor, e.g., track or field sports,
    gymnastics, etc.


CLS 434/248
TXT Basketball:

    Subject matter under subclass 247 relating to a court game in which each of
    two teams tries to toss a ball through a raised hoop.


CLS 434/249
TXT Bowling:

    Subject matter under subclass 247 relating to a game in which balls are
    rolled on a green or down an alley at an object or group of objects.


CLS 434/250
TXT Dancing:

    Subject matter under subclass 247 relating to a rhythmic and patterned
    succession of bodily movements usually performed to music.


CLS 434/251
TXT Football, soccer, or rugby:

    Subject matter under subclass 247 relating to a game played on a
    rectangular field by two teams whose objects is to get a ball over opposite
    ends of the field or between goal posts located thereon solely by the use
    of hands or feet, without the use of clubs or the like.


CLS 434/252
TXT Golf:

    Subject matter under subclass 247 relating to a game whose object is to
    advance toward and sink a ball into each of a series of holes on a course
    with a club by using as few strokes as possible and avoiding various
    obstacles.


CLS 434/253
TXT Skiing:

    Subject matter under subclass 247 relating to the art of sliding and
    jumping on one or two narrow strips of wood, metal, or plastic, either on
    land or water.


CLS 434/254
TXT Swimming:

    Subject matter under subclass 247 relating to the art of propelling the
    body through water by use of the limbs.


CLS 434/255
TXT Traversing ground (e.g., crawling, running, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 247 relating to movement of the body over a
    surface by use of the limbs.


CLS 434/256
TXT Body model with articulated parts:

    Subject matter under subclass 247 including a physical representation of
    the body having pivotally joined segments, e.g., a cardboard representation
    of the body the torso of which includes parts pivotal relative to each
    other for illustrating good or bad posture.


CLS 434/257
TXT Picture or image of body included in display or demonstration:

    Subject matter under subclass 247 including a drawing, painting, or
    photographic image of the body.


CLS 434/258
TXT Developing or testing coordination:

    Subject matter under subclass 247 relating to teaching, or determining
    ability in, control of the body.

    (1)     Note.  A patent which discloses utility both as a coordination
    testing device and as a diagnostic device is classified in this class and
    cross-referenced into Class 128 unless there is one or more claims directed
    solely to the use as a diagnostic device, in which case, the patent is
    classified in Class 128 and cross-referenced into this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 440+ for a reaction timer
    used as, or in conjunction with, an amusement device or game.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 300+ for a device for diagnosing an abnormal
    physical condition wherein the diagnosis involves a response to a stimulus.


CLS 434/259
TXT Associating dissimilar objects with apertures or pegs having matching size,
    shape, or color:

    Subject matter under subclass 258 wherein elements of different size,
    shape, or color are respectively placed by an examinee or trainee in holes
    or on pegs which are identified by the same or different colors or which
    have corresponding size or shape.


CLS 434/260
TXT Manipulation of tool or fastener (e.g., zipper, shoelaces, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 258 wherein an examinee or trainee manually
    handles a work implement or a means for securing elements together.


CLS 434/261
TXT Tracing:

    Subject matter under subclass 258 wherein an examinee or trainee attempts
    to move a stylus or the like over or along a defined path.


CLS 434/262
TXT ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY, THERAPEUTIC TREATMENT, OR SURGERY RELATING TO HUMAN
    BEING:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to human anatomy or
    physiology, treatment of the human body to cure some disease or disorder,
    or a cutting operation on the human body to correct some improper condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 268+ for a figure toy (e.g.,
    doll) or a portion thereof which is intended for amusement only.


CLS 434/263
TXT Dentistry:

    Subject matter under subclass 262 relating to care of the teeth.


CLS 434/264
TXT Means mounting upper and lower tooth models for relative movement:

    Subject matter under subclass 263 including means supporting upper and
    lower tooth facsimiles so that they can move toward or away from each other.


CLS 434/265
TXT Cardiac massage or artificial respiration:

    Subject matter under subclass 262 relating to manipulation of the heart to
    revive its beat or to assistance of breathing by any means.


CLS 434/266
TXT Simulation of body sound:

    Subject matter under subclass 262 relating to an imitation of a noise made
    by the body.


CLS 434/267
TXT Anatomical representation:

    Subject matter under subclass 262 including a facsimile of body structure.


CLS 434/268
TXT Simulation of flow of body liquid:

    Subject matter under subclass 267 relating to an imitation of movement of a
    liquid in or from the body, e.g., simulation of blood circulation in the
    body or blood flow from a wound.


CLS 434/269
TXT Including superposed sheets respectively depicting different body parts:

    Subject matter under subclass 267 including thin panels placeable one on
    top of another and respectively picturing diverse portions of the body.


CLS 434/270
TXT Head or part thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 267 including a facsimile of the portion of
    the body that contains the brain, chief sense organs, and mouth.


CLS 434/271
TXT Eye:

    Subject matter under subclass 270 including a facsimile of the visual organ
    or a portion thereof.


CLS 434/272
TXT Internal organ, blood vessel, or nerve:

    Subject matter under subclass 267 including a facsimile of:  (a) one of the
    assemblages of body tissue which perform particular functions (e.g., the
    heart or liver); or (b) a body conduit for carrying blood or a neural
    impulse.


CLS 434/273
TXT Female genital:

    Subject matter under subclass 272 including a facsimile of a reproductive
    organ of a female.


CLS 434/274
TXT Skeleton or bone:

    Subject matter under subclass 267 including a facsimile of the rigid
    framework which supports soft tissue of the body, or a portion of such
    framework.


CLS 434/275
TXT Palpation or manual force application (e.g., chiropractic adjustment, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 274 relating to feeling a bone to detect an
    abnormal condition thereof, or to exerting force against a bone for any
    purpose, e.g., to adjust the position of a vertebra in the spinal column.


CLS 434/276
TXT SCIENCE:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to the systematic study
    of matter, energy, and their interrelations and transformations, or to
    objectively measurable phenomena of nature.


CLS 434/277
TXT Crystal structure model or display having discrete element (e.g., geometric
    shape, light, etc.) representing atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 relating to a representation of the
    lattice arrangement of atoms of a crystal and including a separate means
    such as a ball or light bulb which serves as a representation of an atom.


CLS 434/278
TXT Molecular model or display having discrete element representing atom or
    radical:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 relating to a representation of the
    arrangement of atoms of a molecule and including a separate means which
    serves as a representation of an atom or a group of atoms that act as a
    unit in a chemical reaction.


CLS 434/279
TXT Model having helical chain of elements (e.g., dna model, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 278 including a helical string of atom
    representing elements, e.g., a model of a molecule of deoxyribo nucleic
    acid.


CLS 434/280
TXT Atom or radical represented by element formed of sheet material:

    Subject matter under subclass 278 wherein an atom or radical is simulated
    by a means formed of a thin, flat material such as cardboard.


CLS 434/281
TXT Model or display demonstrating structure or property of atom or radical:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 relating to a representation of the
    arrangement or characteristics of an atom or group of atoms that act as a
    unit in a chemical reaction.


CLS 434/282
TXT Indicia chart (e.g., periodic table, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 281 including a sheet presenting information
    in tabular form, e.g. an arrangement of the elements bases on Mendeleev's
    periodic law.


CLS 434/283
TXT Means demonstrating physical property (e.g., osmotic pressure, solubility,
    etc.) of substance:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 illustrating a physical characteristic of
    a material, e.g., the tendency of a substance to diffuse through a
    semipermeable membrane or the amount of a substance that will dissolve in a
    given amount of another substance.


CLS 434/284
TXT Astronomy:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 relating to celestial bodies or material
    and their magnitudes, motions, and constitution.


CLS 434/285
TXT Representation of light generating celestial body:

    Subject matter under subclass 284 including representation of celestial
    body which produces light.

    (1)     Note.  A representation may comprise a physical object such as a
    ball, or a dot or an aperture on a surface.


CLS 434/286
TXT Light spot:

    Subject matter under subclass 285 wherein the body is simulated by a dot of
    light on a surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, subclass 62 for projection of an image
    of a stencil in the sky or on a cloud.


CLS 434/287
TXT Celestial globe:

    Subject matter under subclass 285 wherein a simulation of the body is
    situated on a surface, all points on which are equidistant from a point
    (e.g., a sphere).


CLS 434/288
TXT And earth representation:

    Subject matter under subclass 287 including a simulation of the earth.


CLS 434/289
TXT Finding or identifying aid:

    Subject matter under subclass 285 including means for locating or naming
    the body.


CLS 434/290
TXT Simulation of sun and earth:

    Subject matter under subclass 285 including representations of the sun and
    the earth.


CLS 434/291
TXT Simulation of motion of earth and another major planet around sun:

    Subject matter under subclass 290 including an imitation of the movement of
    the earth and one of the other major bodies moving around the sun.


CLS 434/292
TXT And moon:

    Subject matter under subclass 290 including a representation of the natural
    satellite orbiting the earth.


CLS 434/293
TXT Moon model moved around earth model by mechanical or electrical means:

    Subject matter under subclass 292 wherein the satellite representation
    orbits the earth representation without being touched by a person.


CLS 434/294
TXT By belt drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 293 wherein the satellite representation is
    moved by a continuous flexible band.


CLS 434/295
TXT Biology or taxidermy:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 relating to the branch of knowledge that
    deals with organisms and vital processes, and the preparation, stuffing and
    mounting of animal skins.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 8, Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and
    Chemical Modification of Textiles and Fibers, subclass 94.11 for reactive
    treatment of biological specimens.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 264, Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or
    Treating:  Processes, subclasses 271+ for processes wherein a body or
    element is embedded in or surrounded by shaped material in which said body
    or element may be a plant, flower, or a biological specimen.

    (3)     Note.  See Class 27, Undertaking, subclass 22 for manipulative
    methods of embalming or preserving corpses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 712+ and 905 for training animals.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclass 3 for
    a composition for preparing animal (including human) tissue for
    pathological examination including the staining and fixing of a
    histological tissue specimen.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 2 for a plastic product manufacturing apparatus employing an
    anatomical body portion as a shaping surface.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 4 for processes of coating a plant
    member or animal specimen.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 15+ for a
    three-dimensional imitation or "treated" natural product (e.g., imitation
    flower, natural Christmas tree with coating, replica of an animal, etc.).

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 389 and 392 for an artificial
    eye for taxidermy use.


CLS 434/296
TXT Specimen display:

    Subject matter under subclass 295 relating to means for exhibiting a sample
    of an organism.

    (1)     Note.  Included are forms for use in taxidermy.


CLS 434/297
TXT Specimen enclosure:

    Subject matter under subclass 296 including means for closing in the sample.


CLS 434/298
TXT Chemistry or metallurgy:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 relating to the science dealing with the
    composition, structure, and properties of substances such as chemicals or
    metals and the transformations that they undergo.


CLS 434/299
TXT Geology:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 relating to the history of the earth and
    its life, as recorded in rock or other mineral deposit.


CLS 434/300
TXT Physics:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 relating to the study of matter and
    energy.


CLS 434/301
TXT Electricity or magnetism:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 relating to the phenomena of electrically
    or magnetically charged particles, the interrelationship therebetween, the
    fields produced by charged particles, the flow of electrons in a circuit,
    or electrical waveforms.


CLS 434/302
TXT Statics or dynamics:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 relating to the phenomena of mechanical
    energy or force, or the effect they produce on a physical body.


CLS 434/303
TXT Optics:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 relating to light, its genesis or
    propagation, or the effect that it undergoes or produces when propagated
    through a substance or object (e.g., a lens or prism.


CLS 434/304
TXT TELLING TIME OR CALENDAR READING:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to devices used to teach
    people how to tell time or read calendars.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are simulated watches and clocks whose hands
    may be manually turned.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154,    for educational devices wherein events are listed in chronological
    order.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 107+ for calendars,
    per se.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, particularly subclass
    45 for actual operative watches and clocks; and subclasses 28+ for calendar
    indicators combined with clocks.


CLS 434/305
TXT VEHICLE MOVEMENT OR TRAFFIC ACCIDENT OR CONDITION:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the movement of a vehicle
    through or over a pathway is demonstrated, e.g., by the use of a model, or
    wherein a vehicle representation is positioned on a support surface (e.g.,
    a board) in simulation of a traffic situation or accident.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, particularly subclasses 584+ for
    support surfaces for displaying general information.


CLS 434/306
TXT VOTING MACHINE OR BALLOT MARKING:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to the structure or
    operation of a ballot recording device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 51+ for voting machines.


CLS 434/307
TXT CATHODE RAY SCREEN DISPLAY AND AUDIO MEANS:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein visual and sound
    information is presented by means including a cathode ray tube.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes cathode ray screen displays which
    originate from wireless broadcasts, closed circuit systems, and videotape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323,    for cathode ray screen displays which present a question or problem
    for eliciting a response from an examinee.


CLS 434/308
TXT AUDIO RECORDING AND VISUAL MEANS:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein instruction is presented
    both audibly from a sound recording and visually.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156,    for an audio recording used in language instruction.

    319,    for subject matter wherein instruction is presented only from an
    audio recording, with no visual presentation.

    322,    for visual means for presenting a question or problem for eliciting
    a response from an examinee, with no audio recording.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 1+ for motion pictures with
    sound accompaniment where the invention relates to the film and/or
    projector structure even though the intellectual content may be educational.

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, subclasses 15+ for slide projectors with
    film accompaniment.


CLS 434/309
TXT Common carrier for visual means and audio recording:

    Subject matter under subclass 308 wherein both visual and sound information
    are included on the same carrier structure.


CLS 434/310
TXT Carrier used with image projector:

    Subject matter under subclass 309 wherein the visual information is
    projected by optical means from an image carrier onto a viewing screen.


CLS 434/311
TXT Card, sheet, or block:

    Subject matter under subclass 309 wherein the carrier structure is a card,
    sheet, block or the like.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 2 for
    cards having sound information recorded thereon where the information
    recorded thereon is of a noninstructional nature.


CLS 434/312
TXT Reading head moved past stationary audio track:

    Subject matter under subclass 311 wherein the sound information is
    reproduced by moving a reproducing head past an audio track on a stationary
    card, sheet, or block.


CLS 434/313
TXT Manually:

    Subject matter under subclass 312 wherein the reproducing head is moved by
    hand.


CLS 434/314
TXT Image projector:

    Subject matter under subclass 308 wherein the visual information is
    projected by optical means from an image carrier onto a viewing screen.


CLS 434/315
TXT With code on image carrier for controlling operation of apparatus:

    Subject matter under subclass 314 wherein the visual information carrier
    carries a code (e.g., light or opaque area, notch, aperture, etc.) to
    control the operation of the devices.


CLS 434/316
TXT With code on audio carrier for controlling operation of apparatus:

    Subject matter under subclass 314 wherein the sound information carrier
    carries a code (e.g., a tone of selected frequency, etc.) to control the
    operation of the device.


CLS 434/317
TXT Visual information in book form:

    Subject matter under subclass 308 wherein the visual information carrier is
    a book or the like.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are devices commonly known as "talking
    books".


CLS 434/318
TXT Audio recording on disk:

    Subject matter under subclass 308 wherein the sound information carrier is
    a circular plaque (e.g., a phonograph record, etc.).


CLS 434/319
TXT AUDIO RECORDING:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein instruction is reproduced
    from an audio carrier such as a magnetic tape or a phonograph record.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156+,   for an audio recording used in language instruction.

    308+,   for subject matter wherein instruction is presented from both an
    audio recording and a visual means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, appropriate
    subclasses for audio reproduction from a magnetic recording.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 84+ for audio
    reproducing devices in general.


CLS 434/320
TXT Listener's voiced response recorded:

    Subject matter under subclass 319 wherein a listener makes a voice
    recording in response to the sound information.


CLS 434/321
TXT Operation of apparatus controlled by listener's response to question or
    problem:

    Subject matter under subclass 319 including means for receiving a
    listener's response (e.g., an input key) and the quality of the response
    (e.g., correct) causes the audio carrier to move to a new location to
    present new information.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327+,   for devices for visually presenting a question or problem for
    eliciting a response from an examinee, with no audio recording, and the
    correctness of the response causes a new question or problem to be
    presented.


CLS 434/322
TXT QUESTION OR PROBLEM ELICITING RESPONSE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a question or problem
    concerning an academic subject is presented to an examinee to obtain his or
    her response.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156+,   188+, and other appropriate subclasses for devices presenting a
    problem specific to these subjects.

    308+,   for devices which present a question or problem in both audio and
    visual form.

    319+,   for devices which present a question or problem in audio form.

    365+,   for devices for presenting educational subject matter not in
    question or problem form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 429+ for a problem eliciting
    game response which is based on the participant's existing knowledge.


CLS 434/323
TXT Cathode ray screen display included in examining means:

    Subject matter under subclass 322 wherein the question or problem is
    presented by use of a cathode ray tube.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes cathode ray screen presentations
    which originate from wireless broadcasts, closed circuit systems, and
    videotape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    307,    for cathode ray screen displays accompanied by audio information.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, for television, per se.


CLS 434/324
TXT Image projector included in examining means:

    Subject matter under subclass 322 wherein the question or problem is
    projected by optical means from an image carrier onto a viewing screen.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are devices wherein the question
    or problem is directly viewed through a magnifying lens.


CLS 434/325
TXT And light detector:

    Subject matter under subclass 324 wherein the examining means includes a
    light sensing means (e.g., photocell, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    337,    for light detectors in examining means which do not have an image
    projector included therein.


CLS 434/326
TXT Mark transfer sheet (e.g., carbon paper, etc.) included in examining means:

    Subject matter under subclass 322 including a first surface for receiving
    an examinee's marked or written response and means transferring it to a
    second surface.

    (1)     Note.  The first and second surfaces may be the obverse and reverse
    surfaces of single sheet or they may be a first, upper, visible sheet and a
    second, underlying, hidden sheet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    462,    Books, Strips, and Leaves for Manifolding, subclass 78 for leaves
    with mark transfer means, per se.

    503,    Record Receiver Having Plural Leaves or a Colorless Color Former,
    Method of Use, or Developer Therefor, subclass 201 for leaves with mark
    transfer means, per se.


CLS 434/327
TXT Correctness of response indicated to examinee by self-operating or
    examinee-actuated means:

    Subject matter under subclass 322 wherein after an examinee has responded
    to a presented question or problem, such as by manipulation of some means
    (e.g., key, etc.), an indication of the correctness of the response is
    given.

    (1)     Note.  The indication may be direct, such as by illumination of a
    green light, or indirect, such as by presentation of a new question, or it
    may be a negative indication, for example, the illumination of a red light
    or the failure to present a new question after an incorrect response.


CLS 434/328
TXT Involving heat or chemical reaction:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein the correctness of the examinee's
    response is revealed by means of thermal energy or a chemical
    transformation.


CLS 434/329
TXT Involving fluid flow:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein the correctness of the examinee's
    response is revealed by means involving movement of a fluid.


CLS 434/330
TXT Involving magnetic attraction:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein the correctness of the examinee's
    response involves the attraction of magnetic materials.


CLS 434/331
TXT By optical element (e.g., mirror, color filter, lens, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein the correctness of an examinee's
    response is indicated by optical means.


CLS 434/332
TXT Reward dispensed for correct answer:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein the correctness of an examinee's
    response is indicated by a means which dispenses a tangible reward.


CLS 434/333
TXT Picture or pattern completed by examinee placing plaques bearing portions
    thereof in correct relation:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein an examinee places a plurality of
    response-bearing elements (e.g., blocks, tiles, etc.) in an array, the
    location of each element being suggested by a question or problem, each
    element bearing a portion of a design, drawing, or the like, and the
    complete, uninterrupted design or illustration being revealed if all
    elements are correctly placed.


CLS 434/334
TXT Hand-held element insertable to different depths in apertures respectively
    representing right and wrong answers:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein a question or answer carrier has
    means (e.g., recesses, etc.) of differing depths, the degree of depth of
    manual insertion of an element into the carrier indicating the correctness
    of the examinee's response (e.g., a recess associated with a correct answer
    choice being deeper than a recess associated with an incorrect answer
    choice).


CLS 434/335
TXT By means including electrical component:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein correctness of the examinee's
    response is revealed by means including an electrical part, e.g., means
    wherein an electric circuit is completed by means manipulated by an
    examinee in the process of making a response.


CLS 434/336
TXT Response of plural examinees communicated to monitor or recorder by
    electrical signals:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein the response of a plurality of
    examinees are electrically transmitted to an examiner's station or to a
    recording means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    350+,   for similar devices where there is no means to indicate correctness
    of response to the examinee.


CLS 434/337
TXT Light detector:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein the examining means includes a
    light detecting means (e.g., photocell, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    325,    for light detectors in examining means which also have an image
    projector.


CLS 434/338
TXT Part of electric circuit completed when examinee places end of flexible
    lead, or means connected thereto (e.g., plug, etc.), in contact with
    another element:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein an elongated electrical conductor
    (e.g., wire, etc.), or something attached thereto, such as a probe, is
    manually placed in contact with another element associated with an answer
    choice to thereby complete an electric circuit.


CLS 434/339
TXT Part of electric circuit completed when examinee depresses portion of sheet
    having electric conductor associated therewith:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 arranged so that when an examinee
    depresses a sheet at a correct answer location thereon an electric circuit
    is completed.


CLS 434/340
TXT Part of electric circuit completed when examinee places free element in
    contact with another element:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein a freely movable element (e.g., a
    conductive disk) causes an electric circuit to be completed if placed at a
    correct answer location on some element.

    (1)     Note.  The manually placed element may be either conductive or
    nonconductive.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    338,    manually placed elements having a conductive lead wire attached
    thereto.


CLS 434/341
TXT Correct answer indicator lamp carried by free element:

    Subject matter under subclass 340 wherein the free element includes an
    indicator lamp as a part thereof, the lamp being illuminated upon the
    closing of the electric circuit to thereby indicate a correct response.


CLS 434/342
TXT Question or problem located on endless belt or reel mounted strip:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 including a question or problem carrier
    in the form of a flexible loop or a strip supported at least in part by a
    reel.


CLS 434/343
TXT Size or shape of, or aperture in, free element controls indication of
    response correctness:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein a freely movable element (e.g.,
    card, etc.) has a distinctive configuration, a perforation, or other
    physical characteristic which is indicative of the correct response to a
    question or problem.

    (1)     Note.  The "free" element is not directly connected to other means
    in an examining device.  It may be manually placed in position on some
    other means to actuate the same or it may be loosely contained in a housing
    and moved into position by a mechanical means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    345,    for similar devices which do not include an electrical component.


CLS 434/344
TXT Correct answer illuminated:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein the correct answer to a question
    or problem is present on a carrier surface but is not visible to an
    examinee until the correct response is selected, at which time the correct
    answer is illuminated and revealed.


CLS 434/345
TXT Size or shape of, or aperture in, free element controls indication of
    response correctness:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein a freely movable element (e.g., a
    card, etc.) has a distinctive configuration, a perforation, or other
    physical characteristic which is indicative of the correct response to a
    question or problem.

    (1)     Note.  The element is not directly connected to other means in an
    examining device.  It may be manually placed in position on some other
    means to actuate the same or it may be loosely contained in a housing and
    moved into position by a mechanical means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    343,    for similar devices which include an electrical component.


CLS 434/346
TXT Correctness of response indicated when examinee physically alters element
    other than by marking it:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein the examinee responds to a
    question or problem by altering an element in some way other than by
    marking it (e.g., by abrading, erasing, puncturing, etc.) and the
    correctness of the response is revealed as the result of such alteration.


CLS 434/347
TXT Correct answer displayed on side of element opposite side displaying
    question or problem:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein a question or problem is
    presented on one side of an element (e.g., a sheet, etc.) and the correct
    answer appears on the reverse side of the element.


CLS 434/348
TXT Correct answer hidden until examinee moves element:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein the correct answer is revealed
    after the examinee moves some element.

    (1)     Note.  The movement may be manual or through a mechanism of some
    type.


CLS 434/349
TXT Means for receiving examinee's written response:

    Subject matter under subclass 348 including a writing surface on which an
    examinee may enter a response prior to moving the aforesaid element to
    reveal the correct answer.


CLS 434/350
TXT Response of plural examinee's communicated to monitor or recorder by
    electrical signals:

    Subject matter under subclass 322 wherein the responses of a plurality of
    examinees are electrically transmitted to an examiner's station or a
    recording means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    336,    for similar devices which also include means for indicating
    correctness of response to the examinee.


CLS 434/351
TXT Wireless signals:

    Subject matter under subclass 350 wherein the responses are communicated by
    wireless means (e.g., radio, etc.).


CLS 434/352
TXT With means for indicating first examinee to respond:

    Subject matter under subclass 350 including means to identify the first
    examinee to respond.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes structure such as "lockout circuits"
    which prevents subsequent responses to be record or identified.


CLS 434/353
TXT Grading or response form:

    Subject matter under subclass 322 wherein the examinee's response is graded.


CLS 434/354
TXT Comparison of response form with standard answer form:

    Subject matter under subclass 353 including a standard form having correct
    answer locations indicated thereon, and an examinee's response form having
    response choices marked thereon is compared with the standard form to
    determine which of the examinee's choices are correct.


CLS 434/355
TXT Light detector sensing response:

    Subject matter under subclass 354 wherein the examinee's response is
    detected by light sensitive means (e.g., a photocell, etc.)

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    358,    for similar devices which do not include a standard answer form.


CLS 434/356
TXT Electrical means sensing conductive mark representing response:

    Subject matter under subclass 354 wherein the examinee's response is in the
    form of a mark (e.g., a pencil mark, etc.) which is conductive and which
    completes an electrical circuit by bridging electrical means.


CLS 434/357
TXT Means sensing aperture representing response:

    Subject matter under subclass 354 including means for detecting an aperture
    made in a means (e.g., a sheet, etc.) by an examinee to indicate his
    response.


CLS 434/358
TXT Light detector sensing response:

    Subject matter under subclass 353 wherein the examinee's response is
    detected by light sensitive means (e.g., a photocell, etc.)

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    355,    for similar devices which include a standard answer form.


CLS 434/359
TXT Electrical means sensing conductive mark representing response:

    Subject matter under subclass 353 wherein the examinee's response is in the
    form of a mark (e.g., a pencil mark, etc.) which is conductive and which
    completes an electric circuit by bridging electrical means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    356,    for similar means including a standard answer form.


CLS 434/360
TXT Means sensing aperture representing response:

    Subject matter under subclass 353 including means for detecting an aperture
    made in a means (e.g., a sheet, etc.) by an examinee to indicate his
    response.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    357,    for similar devices which include a standard answer form.


CLS 434/361
TXT Means perforating response form at correct answer location:

    Subject matter under subclass 353 including means used by an examiner for
    placing a hole through a student test paper at a position corresponding to
    that of the correct answer to a question, the coincidence or lack thereof
    between the hole and the examinee's response then being compared.


CLS 434/362
TXT Electrical means for recording examinee's response:

    Subject matter under subclass 322 wherein an examinee's response is
    recorded by means including a electrical circuit or component.


CLS 434/363
TXT Card or sheet for receiving examinee's written, marked, or punched response:

    Subject matter under subclass 322 relating to a cord or sheet having areas
    thereon for receiving an examinee's response as indicated by writing, a
    mark, or a punched hole.


CLS 434/364
TXT With apertured overlay:

    Subject matter under subclass 363 including a template having openings at
    positions corresponding to possible examinee responses to better enable an
    examinee to accurately locate a response by placing a marking instrument
    through a selected opening in the overlay.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 174 for templates, per se.


CLS 434/365
TXT MEANS FOR DEMONSTRATING APPARATUS, PRODUCT, OR SURFACE CONFIGURATION, OR
    FOR DISPLAYING EDUCATION MATERIAL OR STUDENT'S WORK:

    Subject matter under the class definition for showing the working of, or
    exhibiting: (a) any manufactured apparatus, (b) a natural or manufactured
    product, (c) the shape of a surface, or (d) instructional subject matter or
    the work done by a student.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for testing the
    quality of articles.


CLS 434/366
TXT Means for simulating abnormal condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 wherein a malfunction is simulated in an
    apparatus or simulated apparatus in order to enable a trainee to recognize
    the malfunction and return the apparatus to its proper operating condition.


CLS 434/367
TXT Means for comparing characteristics of plural articles or materials:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 wherein two or more similar articles or
    materials are displayed so that differences in quality or characteristics
    can be recognized.


CLS 434/368
TXT Superposed indicia bearing sheets, one depicting interior view:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 including a plurality of sheets, each
    bearing indicia showing a portion of an item of manufacture, one or more of
    the sheets showing an interior view and the sheets being superposed to
    thereby give the viewer a composite view of the exterior and interior of
    the item.


CLS 434/369
TXT Means for displaying article at various stages of manufacturer or treatment:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 wherein an article is shown in several
    stages (such as stock material, intermediate product, and finished article)
    or two or more copies of the same article are shown, each copy being in a
    different stage of manufacture.


CLS 434/370
TXT Transparent means permitting interior view:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 wherein an interior view of an article is
    obtained by forming at least a portion of the article of transparent
    material.


CLS 434/371
TXT Mirror for displaying something (e.g., apparel, hair style, etc.) as it
    would appear when associated with viewer:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 wherein a mirror is used in conjunction
    with an article or other means so that a person may view his or her image
    and the article or means in apparent close relation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclass 58 for an amusement
    illusion device which superimposes images by means of a transparent
    reflector.


CLS 434/372
TXT Aircraft, spacecraft, or component thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 relating to an aircraft or spacecraft, or
    any of its mechanical or electrical parts.


CLS 434/373
TXT Land or water vehicle (e.g., automobile, boat, etc.) or component thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 relating to a land or water vehicle or
    any of its mechanical or electrical parts.


CLS 434/374
TXT Servicing aid (e,g, lubrication chart, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 373 including means for showing the proper
    servicing of an automobile or component thereof.


CLS 434/375
TXT Shock absorber or spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 373 relating to a resilient means for
    absorbing shock applied to, or for resiliently supporting a land vehicle.


CLS 434/376
TXT Tire, wheel, or brake:

    Subject matter under subclass 373 relating to (a) a circular means on which
    an automobile or truck rolls, or (b) a means for stopping the motion of
    such a vehicle.


CLS 434/377
TXT Beauty aid or perfume:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 relating to perfume, a cosmetic, or means
    other than clothing for enhancing the physical allurement of a person.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    395+,   for means for exhibiting wearing apparel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    132,    Toilet, for toilet articles and methods.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, particularly
    subclasses 59 to 74 for a composition for treating or changing the
    appearance of the body, e.g., face rouge or lipstick, etc.

    512,    Perfume Compositions, subclasses 1 - 27.


CLS 434/378
TXT Burial means or grave marker:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 relating to a means for interring the
    remains of a deceased person or for indicating the location of such
    interment.


CLS 434/379
TXT Demonstration or display of electrical apparatus or component:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 relating to electrical machinery,
    circuitry of electrical apparatus, or a component of such equipment.


CLS 434/380
TXT Motor or generator:

    Subject matter under subclass 379 relating to a motor or generator, e.g., a
    device demonstrating a magnetic flux pattern, electrical waveform, or
    proper winding connection of a motor or generator.


CLS 434/381
TXT Fluid filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 relating to a device for filtering
    impurities from a fluid.


CLS 434/382
TXT Household equipment:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 relating to devices and apparatus
    generally used in a home.


CLS 434/383
TXT Refrigerator or air conditioner:

    Subject matter under subclass 382 relating to a cooling unit for food or a
    dwelling unit.


CLS 434/384
TXT Vacuum cleaner:

    Subject matter under subclass 382 relating to apparatus for cleaning by
    removal of dirt by air suction.


CLS 434/385
TXT Insulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 relating to material that impedes heat
    transfer.


CLS 434/386
TXT Jewelry or monogram:

    Subject matter under subclasses 365 relating to a ring, bracelet, buckle,
    or the like adornment, or to monogram letters, e.g., means for representing
    the appearance of monogram letters as if applied to silverware or similar
    articles.


CLS 434/387
TXT Lock or safe:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 relating to a locking mechanism or a
    means for the safekeeping of valuables.


CLS 434/388
TXT Lubricant or lubrication:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 relating to oil, grease, or like
    friction-reducing material.


CLS 434/389
TXT Mechanical power source (e.g., engine, windmill, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 365 relating to the structure or operation of
    mechanical means for producing or harnessing power.


CLS 434/390
TXT Mining:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 relating to a mining operation including
    subsurface mining means such as a tunnel or ventilator shaft.


CLS 434/391
TXT Pen or pencil:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 relating to a writing instrument.


CLS 434/392
TXT Sport equipment:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 relating to the demonstration of sport
    apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247+,   for instructional means for sport.


CLS 434/393
TXT Toy:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 relating to devices which demonstrate the
    operation of a toy.


CLS 434/394
TXT Timepiece or component thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 relating to a device for telling time, or
    a part thereof.


CLS 434/395
TXT Wearing apparel:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 relating to an article worn on the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 458 for a receptacle with
    means to simulate wearing of the content.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 66+ for garment display forms.


CLS 434/396
TXT Displayed on doll or manikin:

    Subject matter under subclass 395 wherein the wearing apparel is displayed
    on a support simulating a human figure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 66+ for manikins, per se.


CLS 434/397
TXT Footwear:

    Subject matter under subclass 395 relating to a boot, shoe, or other item
    worn on the foot.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclass 1 for last pullovers intended to
    show how a shoe will look.


CLS 434/398
TXT Hose:

    Subject matter under subclass 397 relating to a fabric cover worn on the
    foot.


CLS 434/399
TXT Headwear:

    Subject matter under subclass 395 relating to an item worn on the head.


CLS 434/400
TXT Neckwear:

    Subject matter under subclass 395 relating to a tie or other item worn on
    or around the neck.


CLS 434/401
TXT Machine mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 relating to the structure or operation of
    an element or subassembly of machinery.


CLS 434/402
TXT Rotatable element having indicia or picture on perimeter thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 including indicia or a picture located on
    the circumference of a means having a circular cross section.


CLS 434/403
TXT Block or like manually manipulatable object having indicia or picture on
    face thereof, or three-dimensional form for demonstrating shape:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 including (a) a generally cubical element
    which can be handled by hand and which has a picture or letters, numbers,
    or the like thereon, or (b) a three-dimensional form (e.g., an assemblage
    of connectable parts, etc.) for demonstrating shape.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Building), subclass 105 for building or
    building component with indicia and other appropriate subclasses for
    components which in use are part of a building or other units so
    structurally similar thereto as to be classified therewith, e.g., panels of
    general application.

    84,     Music, subclass 476 for cards and blocks for teaching music.

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 292+ for card or tile games
    which may have an educational benefit, and see especially subclasses 299,
    300, 302, and 308 thereof.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 85+ for a construction toy
    (e.g., blocks) intended for amusement only.


CLS 434/404
TXT Plaque (e.g., disk, etc.) turntable relative to index (e.g., window in
    card, etc.) to selectively align different points on plaque therewith:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 including a stiff sheet or board pivotal
    relative to a pointer, an aperture in a second stiff sheet or board, or
    some other indexing means so that various points on first mentioned sheet
    or board can be brought into register with said pointer, said aperture in
    said second sheet or board, or other indexing means as desired.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78      and 198, for similar devices used for teaching architecture and
    mathematics, respectively.


CLS 434/405
TXT Plaque slidable relative to index (e.g., window in card, etc.) to
    selectively align different points on plaque therewith:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 including a stiff board or sheet
    translatable relative to a pointer, an aperture in a second stiff sheet or
    board, or some other indexing means so that various points on the first
    mentioned sheet or board can be brought into register with said pointer,
    said aperture in said second sheet or board, or other indexing means as
    desired.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199,    for similar devices used for teaching mathematics.


CLS 434/406
TXT Jigsaw elements having indicia thereon:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 including irregularly cut pieces that fit
    together and have markings such as letters or numbers thereon.


CLS 434/407
TXT Manually manipulated pin or peg inserted into display board:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 including an exhibiting means wherein an
    elongate member is inserted by hand into a hole or a material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200,    for similar devices used for teaching mathematics.


CLS 434/408
TXT Chalkboard or equivalent means having easily erasable surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 including a panel having a surface from
    which marks made by chalk or other means can easily be erased.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211,    for similar devices used for teaching mathematics.


CLS 434/409
TXT Mark formed by magnetic attraction between materials (e.g., particles in
    sheet made visible by movement of magnet over sheet, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 408 wherein a mark is made on the panel by
    means involving attraction of one magnetic material to another.


CLS 434/410
TXT Mark formed by bonding sheet to underlying surface with pressure-applying
    stylus (e.g., magic slate, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 408 wherein the panel comprises a transparent
    or translucent sheet and an underlying surface, a mark being made by
    applying pressure against the top surface of the sheet with a pen-shaped
    instrument to thereby cause the sheet to stick to the underlying surface
    along the path traced by said instrument, the line of bonding being visible.


CLS 434/411
TXT Erasable surface on endless belt:

    Subject matter under subclass 408 wherein the erasable surface is on a
    continuous flexible band.


CLS 434/412
TXT Erasable surface on reel-mounted sheet:

    Subject matter under subclass 408 wherein the erasable surface is on a
    thin, flexible panel wound on a reel.


CLS 434/413
TXT Separate elements having erasable surfaces:

    Subject matter under subclass 408 including multiple erasable panels.


CLS 434/414
TXT Relatively swingable:

    Subject matter under subclass 413 wherein the panels can be pivoted
    relative to each other.


CLS 434/415
TXT With pencil holder or sharpener:

    Subject matter under subclass 408 including means for holding or putting a
    point on a pencil.


CLS 434/416
TXT With chart, illustration, or indicia:

    Subject matter under subclass 408 including a sheet giving information in
    graphic or tabular form, a picture or diagram of something, or markings
    such as letters or numbers.


CLS 434/417
TXT Chalkboard cleaning means, chalk or eraser holder, or chalk dust receiver:

    Subject matter under subclass 408 including means for removing markings
    from the panel, means for holding chalk or an eraser, or means for catching
    chalk powder.


CLS 434/418
TXT With ruler, straight edge, or holder therefor:

    Subject matter under subclass 408 including a strip used for guiding a pen
    or pencil in drawing lines or for measuring, or a means for holding a strip
    of such type.


CLS 434/419
TXT Pivotal about horizontal axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 408 wherein the panel is turnable about a
    line parallel with the surface of the earth.


CLS 434/420
TXT Vertically adjustable:

    Subject matter under subclass 408 wherein the panel can be moved up or down.


CLS 434/421
TXT Attached to wall:

    Subject matter under subclass 408 wherein the panel is secured to a
    vertical partition of a building structure.


CLS 434/422
TXT Hand-carried school slate:

    Subject matter under subclass 408 wherein the panel can be held in a
    student's hand as he goes to or from school classrooms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    415,    for a hand-carried school slate having a pencil holder or sharpener
    associated therewith.


CLS 434/423
TXT With rigid corner cap or separate means holding slate frame elements
    together:

    Subject matter under subclass 422 including a stiff means which covers a
    point where edging members for the panel meet or a means which secures such
    edging members together.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for means for
    securing frame elements together.


CLS 434/424
TXT With cushion or noise muffler attached to slate frame:

    Subject matter under subclass 422 including a means for protecting an
    edging for the panel or a means for reducing the sound made by the edging
    when it strikes another object.


CLS 434/425
TXT Artificial slate formed of plural constituents:

    Subject matter under subclass 408 wherein the panel is man-made and
    includes multiple materials.


CLS 434/426
TXT Endless belt or reel-mounted strip having indicia thereon:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 including indicia such as numbers or
    letters located on a continuous flexible band or on a web wound on a reel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    197,    for similar devices used for teaching mathematics.


CLS 434/427
TXT Apertured mask placed over information bearing surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 including an opaque screen having a hole
    or holes therein so that it can be laid on a sheet or board having
    information thereon to thereby reveal certain data and cover irrelevant
    data.


CLS 434/428
TXT Pictorial demonstration or display:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 wherein an exhibiting means includes a
    picture.


CLS 434/429
TXT Demonstration or display means combined with storage or collection means
    (e.g., receptacle, scoop, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 365 including a container for holding
    exhibiting means, or a device for gathering such means.


CLS 434/430
TXT Display panel, chart, or graph:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 including a sheet giving information in
    graphic or tabular form, a diagram that represents the variation of a
    variable, or a panel for displaying indicia, an apparatus or a product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305,    for a panel or chart for depicting a traffic accident or condition.


CLS 434/431
TXT Showing seat or desk location:

    Subject matter under subclass 430 which exhibits the placement of one or
    more seats or desks.


CLS 434/432
TXT DESK, TABLE, OR STUDY BOOTH:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to structure for
    facilitating study by at least partially shielding a person from
    surrounding objects or persons, or for supporting study material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 135+ for a chair with a desk, i.e.,
    school desk.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, appropriate subclasses for cabinet
    structures.


CLS 434/433
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition not provided for in any previous
    subclass.


CLS 435/
TTL CHEMISTRY:  MOLECULAR BIOLOGY AND MICROBIOLOGY

CLS 435/
TXT CONTENTS



    I.      STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    II.     CLASSIFICATION LINES WITH OTHER CLASSES

    A.      Lines with classes providing for the use of a micro-organism, an
    enzyme, and the apparatus therefor and the composition classes, providing
    for the products of a micro-organism or enzyme.

    B.      Lines with related classes

    III.    SEARCH NOTES

    IV.     INDEX TO CLASS LINE AND SEARCH NOTES IN CLASS DEFINITION SECTIONS
    AND SUBCLASSES OF THIS CLASS

    V.      GLOSSARY

    VI.     CLASSIFICATION GUIDELINES FOR THIS CLASS

    VII.    SUBCLASS DEFINITIONS

    I.      STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    This class provides for the following subject matter when not provided for
    elsewhere:

    A.      A process of using a micro-organism or enzyme to synthesize a
    chemical product.

    B.      A process of treating a material with a micro-organism or enzyme to
    separate, liberate, or purify a preexisting substance.

    C.      An in vitro process of measuring and testing in which:

    (1)     A micro-organism or enzyme is used to determine the presence or
    identity of a compound or composition in a sample.

    (2)     A micro-organism is identified by propagation.

    (3)     An enzyme is identified by its catalytic activity.

    (4)     The presence of micro-organisms is detected.

    (5)     A live micro-organism is used in an antigen antibody test as an
    antigen.

    (6)     Fixed or stabilized nonliving microorganisms, cells, or tissues are
    involved.

    D.      A process of propagating a micro-organism.

    E.      A process in which the genetic structure of a micro-organism or
    extrachromosomal genetic structure is altered.

    F.      A process of organ or tissue maintenance.

    G.      A process of mashing or malting.

    H.      Apparatus claimed or solely disclosed as for A-G.

    I.      micro-organisms, per se, or the subcellular parts thereof.

    J.      Enzymes, immobilized enzymes or enzyme containing compositions not
    otherwise provided for and the processes for purifying enzymes or forming
    immobilized enzymes.

    K.      Compositions claimed or solely disclosed as for the propagation of
    micro-organisms or for measuring and testing processes in C above.

    L.      Using micro-organisms to destroy hazardous or toxic waste.

    II.     CLASSIFICATION LINES WITH OTHER CLASSES

    A.      Lines with classes providing for the use of a micro-organism, an
    enzyme and the apparatus therefor and the composition classes providing for
    the products of a micro-organism or enzyme.

    Class 8, Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, provides for processes of (a) dyeing employing a
    micro-organism or enzyme (b) treating hides or skins by use of a
    micro-organism or enzyme with subsequent tanning of the hides or skins or
    subsequent operations that are preliminary and peculiar to tanning of hides
    or skins or peculiar to making leather.

    Class 435, provides for a process of using an enzyme or micro-organism to
    treat a hide or skin particularly depilating or bating as well as treating
    feathers or animal tissue with a micro-organism or enzyme not otherwise
    provided for.

    Class 47, Plant Husbandry, which provides for mushrooms or processes of or
    apparatus for cultivating or culturing mushrooms; sprouting or germinating
    seeds for planting, or testing the sprouting or germinating power of seeds;
    articles or compositions that include seeds and either a micro-organism or
    enzyme and process of making such articles or compositions; processes of
    cultivating or culturing seed plants, or other nonfungal plants that
    include the use of a micro-organism or enzyme, articles, compositions, or
    apparatus, for use in the above processes, or in making articles or
    compositions, that include seeds and micro-organism or enzymes or processes
    of making articles or compositions for use in the above noted processes.

    Class 435, provides for materials that contain germinated seeds, for
    processes that include germinating seeds or for apparatus for use therein,
    e.g., malting grain and malting apparatus, etc., as well as processes
    involving propagation of unicellular algae or undifferentiated plant cells
    where there is no plant propagation and for the extraction of enzymes from
    plants or plant products.

    Class 435, also, provides for the production of starter culture for
    mushrooms or for the propagation of undifferentiated plant cells as well as
    the culture of unicellular algae.

    Class 48, Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, for fuel gas compositions when
    the processes of making such compositions involve a micro-organism;
    processes of producing fuel gas compositions that include a micro-organism;
    articles, compositions, or apparatus, for uses in such processes; or
    processes of making such articles or compositions for such uses.

    Class 435, provides for the production or purification of a gas by the use
    of micro-organisms or enzymes if such process is not ancillary to the
    production of fertilizer or a Class 210 liquid purification by living
    organisms or directed to the production of a fuel gas by living organisms.

    Class 62, Refrigeration, for processes or apparatus for preserving an
    organ, micro-organism, or enzyme by the removal of heat and the cooled or
    frozen product resulting.  The process may involve the use of a composition
    to eliminate or minimize cooling or freezing damage, e.g., sperm
    preservation, etc.

    Class 435, provides for methods and apparatus of maintaining the viability
    of an animal organ tissue including blood and sperm or cells as well as the
    process and apparatus for the treatment or propagation of animal cells or
    tissue.

    Class 71, Chemistry:  Fertilizers, provides for processes of producing a
    composition or article having utility as a fertilizer by use of a
    micro-organism or enzyme as well as the composition containing a
    micro-organism or enzyme.

    Class 435, provides for the production of micro-organisms having utility
    for fertilizer production and micro-organism containing starter
    compositions useful in a Class 71 process.

    Class 75, Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use
    Therein, Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal
    Particulate Mixtures, provides for processes and compositions containing a
    micro-organism or enzyme for use in processes of obtaining free metals from
    metal compounds or ores.

    Class 75, in particular, provides for processes of hydrometallurgy
    processes of beneficiating ores or recovery of elemental metal from waste
    in which a micro-organism or enzyme is used when the reduction to elemental
    metal is claimed.

    Class 435, provides for the process of producing a micro-organism or enzyme
    useful in ore treating and for processes of cultivating micro-organisms on
    sulfur containing media.

    Class 106, Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, provides for processes which
    use an enzyme or micro-organism to produce a coating or plastic composition.

    Class 435, provides for the use of a micro-organism or enzyme to produce a
    product which may be a composition not otherwise provided for.

    Class 127, Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, provides for the hydrolysis of
    carbohydrates including their conversion to sugar by chemical means or
    process using an enzyme or micro-organism only where the hydrolysis by
    micro-organism or enzyme is followed by steps of concentration purification
    or treatment (such as crystallization) to make a sugar or syrup.
    Additionally, Class 127 provides for the products of such processes.

    Class 435, provides for hydrolysis of a carbohydrate by a micro-organism or
    enzyme when not followed by steps of concentration, purification, or
    treatment to make a sugar or syrup. Class 435, also, provides for
    hydrolysis by any method when followed by treatment with a micro-organism
    or enzyme to produce alcohol.

    Class 128, Surgery, appropriate subclasses provide for methods of blood
    transfusion and insemination by artificial means as well as for methods of
    treatment of the living body or a test which involves contact with a body
    and apparatus used in the inspection and treatment of diseases of the
    bodies of men and animals which apparatus is provided with means for
    connection to the living body.

    Class 435, provides for the maintenance of blood or sperm and viable tissue
    and virus cultures and the media for such processes.

    Class 131, Tobacco, for tobacco-containing articles, or compositions, or
    articles or compositions when tobacco is used in the making thereof, when
    the processes of making such articles or compositions involve the use of a
    micro-organism or enzyme; processes of making such articles or
    compositions, or treating tobacco, that include the use of a micro-organism
    or enzyme; or articles, compositions, or apparatus, for uses in such
    processes, or processes of making the latter articles or compositions for
    uses in above noted processes.

    Class 435, provides for processes of growing a micro-organism or using an
    enzyme the media for which may comprise plant material.

    Class 162, Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, provides for processes and
    apparatus which includes use of a micro-organism or enzyme when combined
    with a step peculiar to Class 162 as well as the use of a micro-organism or
    enzyme as a component of a paper or fiber pulp.

    Class 435, provides for fiber paper pulping and textile treatment by a
    micro-organism or enzyme, per se.  For an exhaustive listing of fiber
    treatment classes, see the notes immediately following the class definition
    of Class 162.

    Class 166, Wells, provides for processes and apparatus for treating oil or
    an oil bearing mineral with a micro-organism or enzyme while in the ground.

    Class 204, Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, provides for processes
    and apparatus involving electrical or wave energy.  Class 204 provides for
    electrophoretic or electro-osmotic separation and purification of a
    compound or element and for other electrical separation or purification of
    a liquid when not provided for elsewhere, for the use of electrophoretic or
    electro-osmotic techniques to immobilize a compound or element where not
    provided for elsewhere, and for processes for use of an electrode
    containing a micro-organism or enzyme for measuring or testing.  Class 435
    provides for processes and apparatus for measuring or testing in which a
    micro-organism is cultured or an enzyme functions catalytically when a
    nonelectrical or nonwave energy property is measured, or when an electrical
    or wave energy property is measured separate and apart, but in combination
    with Class 435 subject matter; and for processes and apparatus for
    electrical or wave energy treatment of micro-organisms or enzymes when the
    treatment is solely disclosed for use with viable micro-organisms or
    catalytically active enzymes.

    Class 205, Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods
    of Preparing the Compositions, appropriate subclasses for processes of
    measuring and testing in which the activity of a micro-organism or enzyme
    is measured by change in electrolytic action, for electrolytic separation
    and purification of a compound or element when not provided for elsewhere,
    for the use of electrolytic techniques to immobilize a compound or element
    where not provided for elsewhere, and for processes of use of an electrode
    containing a micro-organism or enzyme for measuring or testing.  Class 435
    provides for processes and apparatus for measuring or testing in which a
    micro-organism is cultured or an enzyme functions catalytically when a
    nonelectrolytic property is measured, or when an electrolytic property is
    measured separate and apart, but in combination with Class 435 subject
    matter; and for processes and apparatus for electrical or wave energy
    treatment of micro-organisms or enzymes when the treatment is solely
    disclosed for use with viable micro-organisms or catalytically active
    enzymes.

    Class 210, Liquid Purification or Separation, provides for processes of
    treating impure liquids by processes including a micro-organism, e.g.,
    bacteriological digestion of sewage including the use of an immobilized
    micro-organism and the apparatus for such processes, as well as methods of
    physical separation of micro-organisms and viruses from liquid media.

    Class 435, provides for the growth of a micro-organism on a liquid media
    and the apparatus therefor as well as providing for process utilizing an
    immobilized micro-organism, per se.

    Class 252, Compositions, provides for detergent compositions containing
    enzymes.

    Class 435, provides for process of production of enzymes and enzymes, per
    se, and enzyme compositions not otherwise provided for.

    Class 260, Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, provides for the synthesis and
    liberation and purification by chemical or physical means of compounds and
    extracts falling within the class definition of Class 260 where such
    processes do not include a step of treatment by a micro-organism or enzyme.
    Processes of making chemical compounds that include the use of a
    micro-organism or enzyme are controlling for classification over other
    processes of making chemical compounds.

    Class 435, provides for a process of synthesis or liberation, separation,
    or purification of a compound utilizing a micro-organism or enzyme, per se.

    Class 435, provides for an enzyme, per se, and the process of recovering
    the enzyme from a natural source or immobilizing or insolubilizing an
    enzyme.

    Class 435, provides for a process utilizing a micro-organism or enzyme
    combined with a physical separation or purification.

    Class 435, will provide for preliminary chemical treatment to produce a
    starting material which is subjected to the action of a micro-organism or
    enzyme or a chemical reaction simultaneously with or subsequent to the
    action of a micro-organism or enzyme which perfects or improves the action
    of the micro-organism or enzyme.

    Class 424, Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, for:
    compositions (A) for preventing, alleviating, treating, or curing abnormal
    and pathological conditions of the living body, for maintaining,
    increasing, decreasing, limiting, or destroying a physiologic body
    function, for diagnosing a physiological condition or state by an in vivo
    test, for controlling or protecting an environment or living body by
    attracting, disabling, inhibiting, killing, modifying, repelling, or
    retarding an animal or micro-organism, (B) for deodorizing, protecting,
    adorning, or grooming a body, (C) for fermentates and extracts for use in A
    or B and not elsewhere provided for, and (D) such compositions defined in
    terms of specific structure; methods of making the above compositions;
    methods of using the class defined compositions for purposes in A and B;
    and methods of using compounds, per se, for purposes in A and B.  See
    subclasses  85.1+ for a lymphokine composition; subclasses 130.1+ for a
    bioaffecting or body-treating composition of an immunoglobulin, antiserum,
    antibody, or antibody fragment and for methods of immunizing to produce
    antibodies for recovery, which antibodies are characterized as being useful
    as bioaffecting or body-treating agents (e.g., to provide passive
    immunity); subclasses 184.1+ for a bio-affecting or body-treating
    composition comprising an antigen, an epitope, or another immunospecific
    immunoeffector, such as an immunospecific vaccine, an immunospecific
    stimulator of cell-mediated immunity, an immunospecific tolerogen, or an
    immunospecific immunosuppressor, and for methods of immunizing to produce
    protective immunity in vivo (i.e., for vaccination purposes); subclasses
    93.1+ for a composition including whole live micro-organism or virus; and
    subclass 94 for a composition containing an enzyme or co-enzyme.

    Class 435, provides for a process of propagating a micro-organism or using
    an enzyme to produce a drug or bio-affecting composition.  Class 435
    provides for virus culture and attenuation, for the virus or
    micro-organism, per se, and their culture and propagation and for in vitro
    diagnostic tests involving a micro-organism or enzyme and antigen antibody
    tests which involve a living micro-organism or use of an enzyme label.

    Class 426, Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    provides for fermentation processes that are solely disclosed or claimed as
    preparing an edible, and for mixtures of enzymes or ferments solely
    disclosed or claimed as edible or used in the preparation of an edible.
    Class 426 provides for compositions and processes of preparation relating
    to compositions which have the capacity to ferment and produce an edible,
    but which are claimed as being in an inactive state, and also provides for
    compositions which are undergoing a fermentation to produce an edible
    product.  See especially subclasses 11+ for alcoholic beverages, or other
    beverages, milk or other alimentary articles or compositions, when the
    beverage or other alimentary articles contain bacteria or enzymes;
    processes of making the same which include micro-organisms or enzymes.
    Processes of autolysis or microbial or enzymic destruction of yeasts or
    other living organisms are in Class 435, subclasses 262+, but processes of
    preparing foods including such autolysis are in Class 426.  Processes of
    making vinegar by methods including use of a micro-organism or enzyme are
    in Class 426.

    Class 435, provides for processes and apparatus of production of nonpotable
    ethanol and acetic acid and for processes and apparatus for diastatic
    mashing as well as fermentation other than primary fermentations.  Class
    435 also provides for compositions and processes of producing a
    micro-organism containing starter culture useful in the production of an
    edible product.

    Class 435, will provide for production of protein from a single source by
    fermentation or enzymology even if the product is claimed as having a Class
    426 utility.  For an elaboration of the line regarding the placement of
    yeast patents, see (1) Note in subclass 255 of this class.

    Class 429, Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process, provides for a current producing device having a micro-organism as
    an integral part and the process of operating the device and a process
    involving the device.

    Class 435, provides for processes of producing micro-organisms in bulk,
    i.e., propagation of micro-organisms.

    Class 435, Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, provides for a
    photo imaging process in which an enzyme whose activity is altered upon
    exposure to light is used and the material therefor.

    Class 436, Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, provides for a
    measurement or test in which an enzyme reacts chemically, i.e.,
    noncatalytically and antigen antibody tests for the identification of
    chemical species that are nondiagnostic and do not involve a living antigen.

    Class 435, provides for a test or measurement involving a micro-organism or
    enzyme which functions catalytically as well as antigen antibody tests
    involving a living micro-organism.

    (1)     Note.  The burden of showing an enzyme is functioning
    noncatalytically is on Class 436, i.e., the presumption, as between Class
    435 and Class 436, is that an enzyme in a test functions catalytically
    until rebutted.

    Class 504, Plant Protecting and Regulating Compositions, provides for
    processes of producing a composition or article having plant stimulating or
    eradicating utility by using a micro-organism or enzyme as well as the
    composition containing a micro-organism or enzyme.

    Class 435, provides for the production of micro-organisms having utility
    for plant growth regulator production and micro-organism containing starter
    compositions useful in a Class 504 process.

    Class 588, Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, provides
    for the storage to contain pathogenic organisms, e.g., virus, bacteria and
    medical waste, see subclass 258.

    B.      LINES WITH RELATED CLASSES

    Class 8, Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, provides for compositions for dyeing materials of any
    kind which may contain a micro-organism or enzyme.

    Class 15, Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, provides for dust
    cloths, mops, or other cleaning devices which include detergents which may
    contain enzymes.

    Class 34, Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, provides for
    processes and apparatus for drying of a solid which may include a
    micro-organism enzyme or media composition.

    Class 435, provides for processes of culture or propagation of
    micro-organisms including the production of enzymes and media and provides
    for the combination of culture or production with drying or another Class
    34 operation.

    Class 48, Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, for gaseous compositions for
    heating or illuminating by combustion which may be the result of a process
    using a micro-organism or enzyme.

    Class 73, Measuring and Testing, provides for processes and apparatus for
    determining the physical properties of the product of fermentation or
    enzymology and include process and apparatus for measuring the rate of
    sedimentation of elements in blood.

    Class 436, Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, provides for
    testing compositions

    (a)     which contain an enzyme if the enzyme participates in a chemical
    reaction in a noncatalytic manner,

    (b)     which are of use in an antigen-antibody test and do not involve a
    micro-organism or enzyme and are not diagnostic.

    (1)     Note.  The burden of showing an enzyme is functioning
    noncatalytically is on Class 436, i.e., the presumption, as between Class
    435 and Class 436, is that an enzyme in a testing composition functions
    catalytically until rebutted.

    Class 435, provides for in vitro testing by or for a micro-organism or
    enzyme or tests involving the propagation of a micro-organism or catalytic
    use of an enzyme.  Class 435 provides for antigen-antibody tests wherein a
    living antigen, i.e., a micro-organism is involved or an enzyme label is
    present.

    Class 435, provides for processes and apparatus and material for measuring
    and testing blood which involve the propagation of a micro-organism or
    catalytic functioning of an enzyme.

    Class 99, Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, for apparatus adapted for the
    preparation of a beverage or beverage intermediate by carrying out primary
    ethyl alcoholic fermentations and apparatus for the aging, refining, and
    purification of alcoholic beverages.

    Class 435, provides for apparatus claimed or solely disclosed as used for
    propagating a micro-organism or for use of an enzyme.

    Class 137, Fluid Handling, is the residual place for processes, systems,
    combinations, and subcombinations for fluid material handling.  Part III of
    the headnotes of Class 137 provide a guide to the automatic control
    provided for therein.

    Class 435, will provide for condition responsive control of a process with
    a step of microbial growth or enzymology and for condition responsive
    control apparatus when claimed or solely disclosed as involving a
    micro-organism or enzyme.

    Class 159, Concentrating Evaporators, provides for the concentration of
    solids held in solution or suspension by evaporation of liquid and the
    recovery of a concentrate or a dry solid which include the treatment of a
    feed stream to or the treatment of a product of a micro-organism or enzyme.

    Class 435, is superior to Class 159 and will provide for the concentration
    of a solid by the evaporation of liquid when combined with process or
    apparatus involving a micro-organism or enzyme.

    Class 241, Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, provides for
    processes and apparatus for the comminution or disintegration of solids
    which includes the comminution of the feed material to or the product of a
    micro-organism or enzyme.

    Class 435, provides for the combination of comminution or disintegration
    with a process or apparatus for micro-organism use or enzymology.

    Class 250, Radiant Energy, provides for all methods and apparatus for
    using, generating, controlling, or detecting radiant energy including
    radioactivity not elsewhere provided for.  Class 250 provides a
    comprehensive guide in part IVA of the headnotes for classes providing for
    similar subject matter.

    Class 435, provides for the use of radiant energy to alter the genetic
    structure of a micro-organism as part of a measuring and testing process or
    in combination with microbial growth or enzymology.

    Class 366, provides for apparatus and processes restricted to causing fluid
    or particulate material to move irregularly and commingle.

    Class 435, provides for apparatus with agitators claimed or solely
    disclosed as useful for micro-organism propagation or enzymology and for
    processes of micro-organism propagation or enzymology which may include an
    agitation step.

    Class 260, Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, provides for organic compounds,
    per se, and methods of synthesizing them by means other than a
    micro-organism or enzymes.

    Class 423, Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, provides for processes of
    purification of fermentation off gas by chemical means as well as the
    recovery of metal values by means other than micro-organisms or enzymes.

    Class 435, provides for processes of synthesis of organic or inorganic
    compounds involving a micro-organism or enzyme.

    Class 427, Coating Processes, provides for significant coating or
    impregnating processes when not involving subject matter proper for Class
    435.

    Class 435 provides for processes having a significant or nonsignificant
    coating (or impregnating) step and otherwise proper for the class.

    III.    SEARCH CLASS NOTES

    In general, in subclasses 84+ and indented, subclasses 95, 96, 98, and 99
    compounds are produced by hydrolysis of larger structures with subclasses
    97 and 100 through 105 providing for building up from smaller saccharide
    units, while subclass 94 is reserved for the enzymatic interconversion of
    isomers.

    IV.     INDEX TO LINE AND SEARCH NOTES IN CLASS DEFINITIONS SECTIONS AND
    SUBCLASSES OF THIS CLASS

    Class   Section Subclass
    3               1, 284
    8       II A, B 29, 263, 264,
                    265, 270, 277
    15      II B
    19              263, 279
    23      II A,B  4,289
    34      II B    1,262
    47      II A    254, 257, 287
    48      II A, B 167
    53              287
    62      II A    1, 2, 262, 283
    65              174
    71      II A    167, 243,
                    265, 270, 287
    73      II B    4, 13, 262,
                    287, 289, 291
    75      II A    168, 282
    95              262, 266
    99      II B    287
    106     II A    68.1, 174
    127     II A    72, 262, 275
    128     II A    2, 4, 283, 287
    131     II A
    134             264, 270
    137     II B    4,266,289,
                    291
    156             174
    159     II B    262
    162     II A    226, 263, 277
    166             281
    196             281, 289, 291
    201             262
    203             262, 266
    204     II A    4, 262, 281,
                    289, 291
    206             287, 294, 298
    208             4, 262, 281
    210     II A    167, 174,
                    262, 281,

                    283, 311
    215             287, 298, 299
    235             4
    250     II B    29
    252     II A    4, 262, 264
    259     II B    266, 281

    260     II A, B 4, 72,
                    155,174,
                    262,
                    272, 274, 277
    261             266, 283
    264             174
    299             281
    324             4, 289, 291
    346             4, 289, 291
    356             28+,
                    139.04+,
                    141.1+,
                    152.1+
    359             4, 39
    364             3, 4, 289
    374             289, 291
    422             288, 304,
                    306,
                    310, 311, 312
    423     II B    262, 283
    424     II A    2, 4, 29, 69.3,
                    69.5, 69.51,
                    69.6, 70.21
                    70.3,70.5,
                    71.3, 173,
                    235.1, 236,
                    245, 255, 269
    426     II A    41, 68.1, 140,
                    155, 174,
                    243,
                    248, 255, 257
    427             29
    428             68.1, 174
    429     II A
    430     II A
    432             312
    436             69.3, 70.21
    504     II A    243, 270
    514             69.51, 69.52,
                    69.6, 70.3
    520             174
    524             69.5
    530             68.1, 69.1,
                    69.3 - 69.6,
                    70.2 - 70.5,
                    71.1, 71.2

    536             68.1
    935             69.1, 70.2,
                    70.21



    V.      GLOSSARY

    ACTIVITY

    Rate of metabolic or anabolic action, speed or efficiency.  Mere
    suppression of competing strains is not viewed as increasing the activity.

    BIOCHEMICAL

    By means of a bacteria, yeast, animal or plant cell, or virus, or the parts
    thereof.

    CONDENSED

    Bridged or fused.

    DERIVATIVE

    For purposes of this class derivatives included with the production of a
    named compound are only the inorganic anion or inorganic cation salts
    thereof, e.g., metal, ammonium, halogen, carbonate, etc.

    DIASTACE

    For purposes of this class classified as an amylase.

    FERMENTATION

    The use of a micro-organism or enzyme to carry a molecular transformation.

    HAZARDOUS WASTE

    Material that when present in the environment produces for man and other
    living organisms a dangerous, risky, or perilous environmental situation in
    so for as the physiological well being of the organism is concerned (e.g.,
    all caustic chemicals, irritants, cancer causing agents, and other tumor
    producing materials).

    HETERO

    Containing only O, N, S, Se, or Te in addition to carbon in a ring.

    MEDIA

    Material which supports or sustains growth of micro-organisms which
    material may contain substances which will not support or may inhibit the
    growth of selected micro-organisms.

    MICRO-ORGANISM

    For purposes of this class, bacteria, actinomycetales, cyanobacteria
    (unicellular algae), fungi, protozoa, animal cells or plant cells or virus.

    NUCLEIC ACID

    A polynucleotide or more than two nucleotides.

    TEST MEDIA

    Distinguished from (propagation) media by the presence of an indicator,
    e.g., chromophore, etc.

    TOXIC WASTE

    Materials that are direct physiological poisons to living organisms (e.g.,
    pesticides, heavy metal ion solutions, and other materials that are
    poisonous to life.

    IV.     CLASSIFICATION GUIDELINES FOR THIS CLASS

    APPARATUS

    This class takes only apparatus claimed or solely disclosed as for
    fermentation or enzymology, organ, and tissue maintenance or genetic
    engineering not otherwise provided for.  Apparatus by name only which is
    claimed as a collection of compounds or compositions in a kit without
    structure is classified on the basis of the compositions into the
    subclasses 4+ area.

    COMPOSITIONS

    In general, this class will not provide for compositions other than an
    immobilized or insolubilized enzyme or a test or culture media.

    COMPOUNDS

    In general, this class does not provide for compounds other than an
    immobilized or insolubilized enzyme or an enzyme, per se. Production of
    metal or ammonium salts of a compound are classified with the production of
    that compound.

    AMINO ACID RESIDUES

    If upon hydrolysis of an unidentified product the only residues are amino
    acids, it should be presumed that the product is a protein or peptide.  If
    other organic moieties are present after hydrolysis of the product then
    placement should be made upon the basis of the presence of such structure
    in the product.

    PRESUMPTION

    In the absence of a clearly claimed step of killing or inactivating a
    micro-organism in an antigen-antibody test the micro-organism should be
    treated as a living antigen.


CLS 435/1.1
TXT DIFFERENTIATED TISSUE OR ORGAN OTHER THAN BLOOD, PER SE, OR DIFFERENTIATED
    TISSUE OR ORGAN MAINTAINING; COMPOSITION THEREFOR:

    Processes or compositions under the class definition for the maintenance of
    a differentiated tissue or organ, or the differentiated tissue or organ,
    per se.

    (1)     Note.  Maintenance includes keeping an organ under conditions in
    which it produces a product (e.g., hormone, etc.) which is later recovered.

    (2)     Note.  Tissue is presumed to be undifferentiated in the absence of
    a clear showing to the contrary. The fact that a tissue continues to
    produce hormones, etc., is to be taken as an indication that the tissue
    retains its differentiation.

    (3)     Note.  For a process to be classified in this subclass, the organ
    must be maintained in a viable state (e.g., in a nutrient or life
    sustaining media) and the tissue must contain an integral membrane.  Thus,
    the preservation of blood plasma provided for in subclass 2 is excluded
    from this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235.1+, for virus culture and treatment.

    325+,   for animal cells, per se, and compositions thereof; processes of
    propagating, maintaining, preserving, isolating, etc. animal cells or
    compositions; culture media therefore.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, for methods of
    preserving by freeze drying.

    62,     Refrigeration, for methods of cooling.

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, appropriate subclasses for implantable living
    glands encapsulated in a porous membrane.


CLS 435/1.2
TXT Including perfusion; composition therefor:

    Processes under subclass 1.1 for the maintenance of differentiated tissue
    or organs by continuously perfusing with a fluid, or compositions useful in
    such processes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284.1,  for differentiated tissue (e.g., organ) perfusion or preservation
    apparatus.


CLS 435/1.3
TXT Including freezing; composition therefor:

    Processes under subclass 1.1 for the maintenance of differentiated tissue
    or organs by freezing, or compositions useful in such processes


CLS 435/2
TXT MAINTAINING BLOOD OR SPERM IN A PHYSIOLOGICALLY ACTIVE STATE OR
    COMPOSITIONS THEREOF OR THEREFOR OR METHODS OF IN VITRO BLOOD CELL
    SEPARATION OR TREATMENT:


    Processes or compositions under the class definition for the maintenance of
    blood or sperm in a physiologically active state or for the in vitro
    separation or treatment of blood cells.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes methods for preserving the viability
    of sperm by chemical means.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass provides for compositions for artificial
    insemination.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235.1+, where the tissue or cell culture is concomitant with virus
    propagation.

    243+,   for culture media for propagating micro-organism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, for methods of maintaining the viability of living
    tissue and cells including sperm under refrigeration or in a frozen state.
    These processes may include the addition of chemical agents to prevent or
    minimize cellular damage from the refrigeration.

    128,    Surgery, appropriate subclasses for a method of blood transfusion
    or artificial insemination.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses
    184.1+ for therapeutic compositions containing a living cell which
    functions as an antigen; and subclass 529 for therapeutic compositions
    containing viable blood cells and a therapeutically active ingredient. See
    subclass 1.17 for compositions comprising a radiolabeled cell or
    sub-cellular structure, including red blood cells, intended for class
    defined uses such as in vivo diagnosing (e.g., imaging), methods of making
    such compositions, and nominal methods of using such compositions.


CLS 435/3
TXT CONDITION RESPONSIVE CONTROL PROCESS:

    Process under the class definition in which a process parameter is measured
    and that or another process parameter is varied responsive to such
    measurement.

    (1)     Note.  The measurement should be by a nonsubjective means, i.e.,
    mere observation by an operator is not sufficient to constitute measurement
    for purposes of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    289     and 290, for condition or time responsive control apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 496 for
    data processing systems or calculating computer designed for use in
    chemistry, chemical engineering or other areas of engineering or for the
    solution of problems in these areas.


CLS 435/4
TXT Measuring or testing process involving enzymes or micro-organisms;
    composition or test strip therefore; processes of forming such composition
    or test strip:

    Processes under the class definition in which there is a direct or indirect
    qualitative or quantitative measurement or test of a material which
    contains an enzyme or micro-organism or processes in which a material
    containing an enzyme or micro-organism is used to perform a qualitative or
    quantitative measurement or test and compositions therefor and the
    processes of making such compositions.

    (1)     Note.  "Involving" in this and the indented subclasses includes (a)
    the use of a known micro-organism or enzyme to detect or identify a
    chemical compound or composition, (b) the use of a chemical compound or
    composition to detect or identify a micro-organism or enzyme, (c) a
    composition containing a micro-organism or enzyme for use as in (a), and
    (d) a composition distinguished by the presence of an indicator for use as
    in (b).  Thus, "involving" in this and the  indented subclasses means that
    the steps in the measurement or test either use the designated chemical
    compound, micro-organism, or individual plant or animal cells or enzyme or
    the steps in the measurement or test indicate the presence or absence of
    the designated chemical compound, micro-organism, plant or animal cell or
    enzyme.

    (2)     Note.  The enzyme herein can be free or immobilized or present in a
    cell, tissue, or organ.

    (3)     Note.  Compositions herein may include inert carriers that have
    either a single or multiple zones or chemical agents.  Included as carriers
    are bibilous or absorbent materials and films.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174+,   for immobilized enzymes, per se.

    183+,   for enzymes.

    188,    for stabilized enzymes, enzyme conjugates or compositions thereof.

    235.1+, for viruses, per se.

    287+,   for apparatus for measuring and     testing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, for processes and apparatus for making a
    test or measurement of any kind not provided for in other classes.  In
    general, the classes superior to 73 are 435, 422, 424, 204, 350, and 356.

    128,    Surgery, for methods of treatment of the living body or a test
    which involves contact with a body and apparatus used in the inspection and
    treatment of diseases of the bodies of men and animals which apparatus is
    provided with means for connection to the living body.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 2+ for processes of controlling the flow
    of a fluid in response to the sensing of a condition or characteristic of a
    fluid.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 400+ for
    electrolytic analysis and testing apparatus, especially subclass 403 for
    electrolytic analysis and testing apparatus involving biological material
    (e.g., microbe, enzyme, antigen, etc.).

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 775+ for electrolytic analysis or
    testing processes, especially subclasses 777.5+ for electrolytic analysis
    or testing involving an enzyme or micro-organism (e.g., animal or plant
    cells, bacteria, virus, etc.).

    208,    Minerals Oils:  Processes and Products, for chemical tests claimed
    in association with processes for recovery or treatment of naturally
    occurring mineral oil.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 408 for testing compositions.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for chemical tests claimed in
    association with processes for the treatment or modification of carbon
    compounds.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for
    methods and apparatus for testing an electrical property or condition of a
    material by electrical means, even though the result of the test may be
    used as an indication of some other physical or chemical property or
    condition.

    346,    Recorders, subclasses 2+ for phenomenal apparatus and processes
    recording.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, especially subclasses 28, 139.04
    through 139.08, 141.1 through 141.5 and 152.1 through 152.3, 205+, and 218
    for methods and apparatus for optical testing with a photoelectric light
    detector with either an indicator or structure to support or contain the
    specimen or sample under test.  Class 356 provides for methods and
    apparatus for visual counting of bacteria colonies, etc., with a scale or
    spacer to aid the eye without an optical element or statistical analysis
    procedures for the sizing and counting of particles, such as bacteria
    colonies by visible light and the counting of particles one by one with a
    microscope having a graticule rather than a cross hair or reticle.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    396+ for transparent microscope slides with means to contain and support
    the life functions of a micro-organism.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 496 for
    data processing systems or calculating computer designed for use in
    chemistry, chemical engineering or other areas of engineering or for the
    solution of problems in these areas.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 10 for sizing or counting of discrete
    particles such as bacteria colonies one at a time by numerical counting
    apparatus which registers the counts.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses
    1.11+ for class defined compositions and methods comprising a radionuclide
    or intended radionuclide, including those for in vivo diagnosing, and
    subclasses 9.1+ for a composition or method of in vivo testing (diagnosing)
    a living body or for an in vivo method of testing or analyzing a
    composition of that class (424).

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 1+ for
    processes for analysis involving steps for causing or promoting a chemical
    reaction, regulating or controlling a chemical reaction.  This includes
    tests dependent upon the chemical, i.e., proteinaceous reactivity of an
    enzyme as opposed to its catalytic functioning provided for in Class 435.
    Measurements and tests when claimed in association with chemical processes
    provided for in other Classes, e.g., 435, 208, 260, 423, etc., are
    classified in the class providing for the chemical process.


CLS 435/5
TXT Involving virus or bacteriophage:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 where the material to be measured or tested
    contains a virus or bacteriophage or the agent used for the measurement or
    test contains a virus or bacteriophage.


CLS 435/6
TXT Involving nucleic acid:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 where the material to be tested or the
    composition in which the test is conducted contains nucleic acid or the
    agent used for the measurement or test contains nucleic acid.

    (1)     Note.  The tests provided for in this subclass may involve the
    determination of the mutagenic effect of drugs on nucleic acid containing
    genetic materials such as genes and chromosomes.

    (2)     Note.  Nucleic acids for the purpose of this subclass are defined
    as polynucleotides of three or more nucleotides.

    (3)     Note.  Proper for this subclass is subject matter involving the
    staining of micro-organisms, cells, or tissues specifically for and only
    for nucleic acid (e.g., DNA, RNA, etc.) with stains such as Feulgen stain
    or acridine orange.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40.5+,  for subject matter involving micro-organisms, cells, or tissues
    stained with a composition providing contrasting stains for the cell
    nucleus and cytoplasm (e.g., hematoxylin, eosin, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    536,    Organic Compounds, appropriate subclasses for saccharides,
    polysaccharides, nucleosides, nucleotides, and polynucleotides like RNA or
    DNA compounds as well as chemical methods of synthesizing such compounds.
    Search specifically subclasses 23.1+ for fragments of RNA or DNA which
    could have utility as genes in recombinant processes and subclass 24.3 for
    probes.


CLS 435/7.1
TXT Involving antigen-antibody binding, specific binding protein assay, or
    specific ligand-receptor binding assay:Subject matter under subclass 4 in
    which a measurement or test utilizes an enzyme or micro-organism or plant
    or animal cells in an antibody binding, specific binding protein or other
    specific ligand-receptor binding test or assay.

    (1)     Note.  Cross-Reference Art Collections 960 through 975 provide for
    different aspects of the subject matter of this and the indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  The enzyme or micro-organism may function for example, as an
    antigen, separating agent or detection label in a test or assay.

    (3)     Note.  Subject matter directed to identifying a specific enzyme in
    a micro-organism or tissue is appropriate for subclass 7.4 below, however,
    determining an enzyme as an indirect indication of a specific
    micro-organism being present is appropriate for the micro-organism subclass.

    (4)     Note.  Subject matter directed to determining the presence of a
    specific micro-organism is appropriate for the specific microbial subclass
    below.  For example, an assay for determining a bacteria in an animal
    tissue sample is appropriate for the bacteria subclass rather than the
    animal cell subclass.

    (5)     Note.  An indirect microbial determination, such as a determination
    of a microbial product as an indication of the presence of the microbe, is
    appropriate for the microbial subclasses below.  However, it is strongly
    suggested that a patent containing such an indirect microbial determination
    be cross-referenced to the subclass appropriate for the assay of the
    product of the microbe.

    (6)     Note.  Terminology used in this and the indented subclasses:

            ANALYTE - The compound or composition to be measured.

            SPECIFIC LIGAND-RECEPTOR BINDING ASSAY - the interaction between a
    ligand material and a receptor which is specific to a class of compounds or
    a single compound.

            EPITOPE - a single antigenic determinant portion of the antigen
    which combines with the antibody site.

            LABEL - a member of a signal producing system which is usually
    bound to or incorporated in the ligand.  Measurement of the label activity
    is an indication of the amount of unknown in the sample.

            LIGAND - any organic compound for which a receptor naturally exists
    or can be prepared; a linking or binding molecule.

            RECEPTOR - any compound or composition capable of recognizing a
    particular spatial and polar organization of a molecule, i.e., epitopic
    site on an antigen.  The receptor material can be isolated from a cellular
    material from a living body such as a membrane or organ and exhibits great
    specificity to the species to be tested for.  A cell surface molecule which
    binds specifically to particular proteins or peptides in the fluid phase.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for processes in which a virus is involved, as for example, as an
    antigen.

    174+,   for immobilized enzymes.

    183+,   for enzymes, per se, and methods of isolating enzymes.

    188,    for enzyme conjugates.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses
    184.1+ for methods of immunizing with an antigen to induce protective
    immunity in vivo.  Class 424 provides for in vivo antigen-antibody tests.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, for a measurement
    or test involving antigen-antibody tests and other ligand-receptor binding
    tests for the identification of chemical species that do not involve a
    micro-organism or enzyme.

    530,    Chemistry, Natural Resins or Derivatives Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclasses 387+ for antibodies, per
    se, subclasses 403+ for protein antigens or the use of antigenic proteins
    as an immunogenic carrier for a hapten, subclass 413 for immunological
    separation and affinity chromatography, cross-reference art collections 806
    for antigenic peptides or protein, and 807 for hapten conjugated with
    peptide or protein, and 808 for monoclonal antibodies.

    600     and 604, Surgery, provides for methods including the use of claimed
    specific structure adapted to be placed on or in the living body and
    further include diagnostic or therapeutic methods and apparatus when the
    only disclosed utility is for diagnosis or treatment of a living body.


CLS 435/7.2
TXT Involving a micro-organism or cell membrane bound antigen or cell membrane
    bound receptor or cell membrane bound antibody or microbial lysate:Subject
    matter under subclass 7.1 involving a micro-organism or cell membrane bound
    antigen, or cell membrane bound receptor or cell membrane bound antibody,
    or lysate of a micro-organism.


CLS 435/7.21
TXT Animal cell:
    Subject matter under subclass 7.2 involving animal cells.

    (1)     Note.  Though "whole blood" contains animal cells, the mere
    presence of a "whole blood sample" in an assay or test is not sufficient
    for placement in this and the indented subclasses.  Since "whole blood" is
    a complex mixture of cells and liquid, classifying based on its presence
    might be inconsistent.  Furthermore, the "whole blood" aspect is rarely of
    main importance, therefore, patents using whole blood samples are more
    appropriately placed based on the analyte of interest or on a reagent which
    is more specific, i.e., cancer cell, lymphocyte, red blood cell, enzyme
    label, etc., to one of the subclasses below.

    (2)     Note.  "Animal cell" in this and the indented subclasses is also
    intended to include tissue.


CLS 435/7.22
TXT Parasite or protozoa:
    Subject matter under subclass 7.21 involving a parasite or protozoa.

    (1)     Note.  Parasite is intended to include those animals which live in
    or on and at the expense of a host such as certain nematodes, cestodes,
    trematodes (e.g., tapeworm, heartworm, Trichinella, etc.).

    (2)     Note.  A protozoa is a single-celled animal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.32+,  for bacteria which may be parasitic.


CLS 435/7.23
TXT Tumor cell or cancer cell:
    Subject matter under 7.21 involving tumor or cancer cells.


CLS 435/7.24
TXT Leukocyte (e.g., lymphocyte, granulocyte, monocyte, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 7.21 involving leukocytes such as
    lymphocytes, granulocytes, monocytes, etc.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter intended for this subclass includes, for
    example, a test wherein the leukocyte is a reagent, the leukocyte type is
    determined, a leukocyte surface antigen is determined, etc.


CLS 435/7.25
TXT Erythrocyte:
    Subject matter under subclass 7.21 involving red blood cells or
    reticulocytes.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of subject matter in this subclass are red blood
    cell carriers, red cell surface antigen testing, etc.


CLS 435/7.3
TXT Flagellar-antigen or pili-antigen:
    Subject matter under subclass 7.2 involving flagellar-antigen (e.g.,
    (H)-antigen, etc.) or pili-antigen, (e.g., (K)-antigen, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Flagellar - or pili-antigens are those which are or are part
    of the flagella or pili of certain motile micro-organisms.


CLS 435/7.31
TXT Fungi (e.g., yeast, mold, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 7.2 involving fungi such as yeast or mold.


CLS 435/7.32
TXT Bacteria or actinomycetales:
    Subject matter under subclass 7.2 involving bacteria or actinomycetales.


CLS 435/7.33
TXT Staphylococcus:
    Subject matter under subclass 7.32 involving bacteria of the genus
    Staphylococcus.


CLS 435/7.34
TXT Streptococcus:
    Subject matter under subclass 7.32 involving bacteria of the genus
    Streptococcus.


CLS 435/7.35
TXT Salmonella:
    Subject matter under subclass 7.32 involving bacteria of the genus
    Salmonella.


CLS 435/7.36
TXT Sexually transmitted disease (e.g., chlamydia, syphilis, gonorrhea,
    etc.):Subject matter under subclass 7.32 involving a sexually transmitted
    disease caused by bacteria.

    (1)     Note.  Common bacteria involved include Chlamydiae, Treponema
    pallidum, and Neisseria gonorrhoeae.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for a sexually transmitted disease involving a virus.


CLS 435/7.37
TXT Escherichia coli:
    Subject matter under subclass 7.32 involving Escherichia coli (E. coli.).


CLS 435/7.4
TXT To identify an enzyme or isoenzyme:
    Subject matter under subclass 7.1 in which the measurement or test
    determines the identity or quantity of an enzyme or group of isoenzymes.

    (1)     Note.  Immunological identification of enzymatic coagulation
    factors is proper for this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Determination of complement or complement components is
    proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.6,    for an assay or test involving a modified enzyme in a capacity
    other than that of being identified or quantified.

    7.7     through 7.8, for an assay or test in which an enzyme is involved as
    a reagent.

    7.8     through 7.95, for an assay or test in which an enzyme is involved
    as a detection label.


CLS 435/7.5
TXT Involving avidin-biotin binding:
    Subject matter under subclass 7.1 involving the binding of avidin to biotin.

    (1)     Note.  The binding of avidin and biotin derivatives such as
    streptavidin or iminobiotin is also included in this subclass.


CLS 435/7.6
TXT Involving a modified enzyme (e.g., abzyme, recombinant, chemically altered,
    etc.):Subject matter under subclass 7.1 involving a modified enzyme which
    has been functionally changed through recombinant DNA techniques, chemical
    treatment, etc.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is not intended to include a mere conjugation
    of an enzyme to an antigen or antibody, since the function of the enzyme
    has not been changed.

    (2)     Note.  An abzyme is an antibody with enzymatic activity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.4,    for a test or assay for determining the identity or quantity of a
    modified enzyme.


CLS 435/7.7
TXT Assay in which a label present is an apoenzyme, prosthetic group, or enzyme
    cofactor:Subject matter under subclass 7.1 in which a label is present in
    the assay and is an apoenzyme, prosthetic group or enzyme cofactor.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 7.1 for the definition of label.

    (2)     Note.  An enzyme cofactor is a nonprotein substance whose presence
    is required for an enzyme to exhibit its catalytic activity and which
    undergoes a chemical change during the catalytic cycle of the enzyme
    involved. A coenzyme is a type of enzyme cofactor which is chemically
    modified in the course of the reaction catalyzed by the parent enzyme.
    Regeneration of the original form of the cofactor requires its
    participation in a separate reaction that is catalyzed by an enzyme other
    than the parent enzyme.  A prosthetic group is an enzyme cofactor which is
    chemically modified in the course of the reaction catalyzed by the parent
    enzyme and is regenerated by a second reaction catalyzed by the parent
    enzyme.  Prosthetic groups are bound to the protein portion of the parent
    enzyme, such protein portion being known as the apoenzyme and the
    catalytically active parent enzyme being known as the holoenzyme.

    (3)     Note.  Prosthetic groups and Holoenzymes.

    prosthetic group             conjugated enzyme

            flavine adenine glutathione
    dinucleotide (FAD)      reductase (human
            erythrocytes)
    flavin mono-    cytochrome reductase
    nucleotide (FMN)        (yeast)
    FMN     NADPH: oxidoreduc-
            tase
            ("old yellow en-
            zyme")
    FAD     glucose oxidase
            (Aspergillus niger)
    FAD     lipoamide
            dehydrogenase
    FMN     pyridoxine phosphate
            oxidase
    heme    peroxidase
            (horseradish)
    heme    cytochrome C


CLS 435/7.71
TXT Assay in which a label present is an enzyme inhibitor or functions to alter
    enzyme activity:Subject matter under subclass 7.1 in which a label is
    present in the assay and is an enzyme inhibitor or otherwise functions to
    alter the function of the enzyme present in the analysis.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 7.1 for the definition of label.


CLS 435/7.72
TXT Assay in which a label present is an enzyme substrate or substrate
    analogue:Subject matter under subclass 7.1 in which a label is present in
    the assay and is an enzyme substrate or substrate analogue.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 7.1 for the definition of label.


CLS 435/7.8
TXT Involving nonmembrane bound receptor binding or protein binding other than
    antigen-antibody binding:Subject matter under subclass 7.1 in which the
    measurement or test includes nonmembrane bound receptor binding or
    ligand-receptor binding other than antigen-antibody binding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for enzyme-inhibitor binding where
    the inhibitor is not a label, binding to soluble or nonmembrane bound
    receptors or transport proteins, etc.  Specific examples include
    thyroxine-thyroxine binding globulin, B12-intrinsic factor,
    cortisol-transcortin, lectin-carbohydrate, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.71,   for an assay where an enzyme inhibitor is present as a label.


CLS 435/7.9
TXT Assay in which an enzyme present is a label:
    Subject matter under subclass 7.1 in which an enzyme present is a label in
    the assay.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 7.1 for the definition of label.


CLS 435/7.91
TXT Enzyme produces product which is part of another reaction system (e.g.,
    cyclic reaction, cascade reaction, etc.):Subject matter under subclass 7.9
    in which the enzyme label produces a product which is part of another
    reaction system.

    (1)     Note.  The reaction system may be chemical or enzymatic.


CLS 435/7.92
TXT Heterogeneous or solid phase assay system (e.g., ELISA, etc.):Subject
    matter under subclass 7.9 in which the assay system requires at least one
    separation step which allows differentiation of reacted from unreacted
    material or requires that at least one of the immunochemicals in the system
    be bound to an insoluble support material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174+,   for carrier-bound or immobilized enzymes.

    188,    for enzyme conjugates.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 518+
    for immunoassays, not including Class 435 subject matter, wherein a solid
    phase carrier is utilized.


CLS 435/7.93
TXT Competitive assay:
    Subject matter under subclass 7.92 in which the heterogeneous or solid
    phase assay involves competitive binding of immunologically similar or
    identical compounds.


CLS 435/7.94
TXT Sandwich assay:
    Subject matter under subclass 7.92 in which the heterogeneous or solid
    phase assay involves the binding of polyvalent analyte antigen to an
    antibody and a labeled antibody to obtain a measurable
    antibody-antigen-antibody complex; alternatively, a second unlabeled
    antibody and a third labeled anti-antibody can be reacted with the
    antigen-antibody complex to obtain a measurable result.


CLS 435/7.95
TXT Indirect assay:
    Subject matter under subclass 7.92 in which the heterogeneous or solid
    phase assay involves the binding of antigen with analyte antibody and a
    labeled anti-antibody thereby forming a complex.


CLS 435/8
TXT Involving luciferase:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 where the material to be measured or tested
    contains luciferase or the agent used for the measurement or test contains
    luciferase.

    (1)     Note.  Firefly extract or firefly lantern extract contains
    luciferase.


CLS 435/9
TXT Geomicrobiological testing (e.g., for petroleum, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 4 where the measurement or test is for the
    presence or absence of mineral deposits or for the presence of
    micro-organisms which thrive in the presence of such minerals.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for detection of underground deposits
    of petroleum or natural gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 152.02+ for well logging, per se,
    wherein the logging is not determined by making a purely electrical
    measurement or a purely magnetic measurement.


CLS 435/10
TXT Involving uric acid:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 where the material to be measured or tested
    contains uric acid or the agent used for the measurement or test contains
    uric acid.


CLS 435/11
TXT Involving cholesterol:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 where the material to be measured or tested
    contains cholesterol or the agent used for the measurement or test contains
    cholesterol.


CLS 435/12
TXT Involving urea or urease:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 where the material to be measured or tested
    contains urea or urease or the agent used for the measurement or test
    contains urea or urease.


CLS 435/13
TXT Involving blood clotting factor (e.g., involving thrombin, thromboplastin,
    fibrinogen, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 4 where the material to be measured or tested
    contains a blood clotting factor or the agent used for the measurement or
    test contains a blood clotting factor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 64.41 for apparatus used for
    testing the ability of blood to clot.


CLS 435/14
TXT Involving glucose or galactose:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 where the material to be measured or tested
    contains glucose or galactose or the agent used for the measurement or test
    contains glucose or galactose.


CLS 435/15
TXT Involving transferase:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 where the material to be measured or tested
    contains a transferase or the agent used for the measurement or test
    contains a transferase.


CLS 435/16
TXT Involving transaminase:

    Subject matter under subclass 15 subclass where the material to be measured
    or tested contains a transaminase or the agent used for the measurement or
    test contains a transaminase.


CLS 435/17
TXT Involving creatine phosphokinase:

    Subject matter under subclass 15 where the material to be measured or
    tested contains creatine phosphokinase or the agent used for the
    measurement or test contains creatine phosphokinase.

    (1)     Note.  Creatine Phosphokinase is also known as creatine kinase.


CLS 435/18
TXT Involving hydrolase:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 where the material to be measured or tested
    contains a hydrolase or the agent used for the measurement or test contains
    a hydrolase.


CLS 435/19
TXT Involving esterase:

    Subject matter under subclass 18 where the material to be measured or
    tested contains an esterase or the agent used for the measurement or test
    contains an esterase.


CLS 435/20
TXT Involving cholinesterase:

    Subject matter under subclass 19 where the material to be measured or
    tested contains cholinesterase or acetylcholinesterase or the agent used
    for the measurement or tests contains cholinesterase or
    acetylcholinesterase.


CLS 435/21
TXT Involving phosphatase:

    Subject matter under subclass 19 where the material to be measured or
    tested contains a phosphatase or the agent used for the measurement or test
    contains a phosphatase.

    (1)     Note.  Phosphatase includes all of the phosphoric monoester
    hydrolases (ICE classification 3.1.3) including the phytases and the
    nucleotidases.


CLS 435/22
TXT Involving  amylase:

    Subject matter under subclass 18 where the material to be measured or
    tested contains amylase or the agent used for the measurement or test
    contains amylase.


CLS 435/23
TXT Involving proteinase:

    Subject matter under subclass 18 where the material to be measured or
    tested contains proteinase (endopeptidase) or the agent used for the
    measurement or test contains a proteinase (endopeptidase).

    (1)     Note.  Enzymes included in this subclass are trypsin, pepsin,
    ficin, bromelin, papain, renin.

    (2)     Note.  Where the hydrolytic activity of an enzyme on a protein or
    polypeptide is unclear it should be presumed to be an endopeptidase,
    classifiable in subclass 23.


CLS 435/24
TXT Involving peptidase:

    Subject matter under subclass 18 where the material to be measured or
    tested contains a peptidase (exopeptidase) or the agent used for the
    measurement or test contains a peptidase (exopeptidase).


CLS 435/25
TXT Involving oxidoreductase:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 where the material to be measured or tested
    contains an oxidoreductase or the agent used for the measurement or test
    contains an oxidoreductase.


CLS 435/26
TXT Involving dehydrogenase:

    Subject matter under subclass 25 where the material to be measured or
    tested contains a dehydrogenase or the agent used for the measurement or
    test contains a dehydrogenase.


CLS 435/27
TXT Involving catalase:

    Subject matter under subclass 25 where the material to be measured or
    tested contains catalase or the agent used for the measurement or test
    contains catalase.


CLS 435/28
TXT Involving peroxidase:

    Subject matter under subclass 25 where the material to be measured or
    tested contains peroxidase or the agent used for the measurement or test
    contains peroxidase.


CLS 435/29
TXT Involving viable micro-organism:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 where the material to be tested contains a
    micro-organism or the agent used for the measurement or test contains a
    micro-organism.

    (1)     Note.  A micro-organism for the purposes of this subclass includes
    actinomycetates, unicellular algae, bacteria, fungi (including yeast),
    plant cells, and animal cells.

    (2)     Note.  If there is no clear disclosure as to whether the
    micro-organism or cell is viable or nonliving, it shall be presumed to be
    viable and therefore appropriate for this or the indented subclasses.
    However, due to the uncertainty of the viability of the micro-organism or
    cell, placement of a cross reference in the most appropriate place in this
    class, subclasses 40.5+ for nonliving micro-organisms or cells is strongly
    recommended.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40.5+,  for measuring or testing processes involving fixed or stabilized
    nonliving micro-organisms, cells, or tissues.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclass 94.11 for reactive treatment of biological
    specimens as by a bleach or dye.

    250,    Radiant Energy, for methods and apparatus for detecting radiant
    energy.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 2.1+ for coating a biological
    specimen for a medical test and when not provided for in Class 435.


CLS 435/30
TXT Methods of sampling or inoculating or spreading a sample; methods of
    physically isolating an intact micro-organism:

    Processes under subclass 29 in which (a) a series of sampling steps are
    claimed in which a sample containing a micro-organism is separated or
    recovered from a larger body of material before or while performing a
    measurement or test, or (b) a sample is brought into contact with a
    measuring or testing media to result in a particular geometric pattern or
    at a particular varying flow rate.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for sampling when claimed by a series
    of sampling process steps, i.e., not sampling by name only.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass provides for applying the sample in a
    particularly claimed varying flow rate or pattern or path other than merely
    a single straight line.

    (3)     Note.  Mere nonpattern applications such as dipping or spaying is
    not included herein.

    (4)     Note.  Included in this subclass is a test or measurement which
    includes a swab streaking procedure or centrifugal density separation step.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243,    for sampling, inoculating, spreading a sample or physical isolation
    of samples which are not claimed as part of a test.

    292,    for inoculation and sampling apparatus.


CLS 435/31
TXT Testing for sterility condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 29 wherein the efficacy of a prior step
    intended to destroy living organisms is assessed by attempting to culture a
    micro-organism which has been exposed to such treatment and determining
    subsequent growth or by exposing an enzyme to such treatment and
    subsequently testing for enzymatic activity.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is the use of a living
    micro-organism as the test agent or the use of enzymes which simulate the
    living micro-organism's ability to survive as a test agent.


CLS 435/32
TXT Testing for antimicrobial activity of a material:

    Subject matter under subclass 29 where the in vitro ability of a material
    to kill or inhibit the growth of micro-organisms is determined.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for (a) a determination of the
    sensitivity of a micro-organism to known antibiotics, and (b) determining
    the presence or amount of an antibiotic or toxicant in a sample.


CLS 435/33
TXT Using multifield media:

    Subject matter under subclass 32 where the test field contains more than
    one zone or area.

    (1)     Note.  Zones or areas can contain different concentrations of the
    same antibiotic or different antibiotics and are generally separated by an
    identifiable boundary.

    (2)     Note.  Media as used in this subclass includes culture media which
    sustains growth and medias which kill or inhibit certain micro-organisms.


CLS 435/34
TXT Determining presence or kind of micro-organism; use of selective media:


    Subject matter under subclass 29 where the presence of or identity of a
    micro-organism is determined.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are test media that contains chemicals which
    change or remain unchanged in color or other physical appearance due to the
    action of or the absence of action of the micro-organisms on the test media.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes but is not restricted to testing of
    biological samples.

    (3)     Note.  Test media includes culture media plus a chromosphere.

    (4)     Note.  This subclass includes determining the metabolic character
    of a micro-organism, i.e., the production or consumption of a particular
    metabolite.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32      and 33, for similar process used to test for antimicrobial
    sensitivity.


CLS 435/35
TXT Using radioactive material:

    Subject matter under subclass 34 where the test media contains an
    assimilable radioactive labeled compound.


CLS 435/36
TXT Streptococcus; staphylococcus:

    Subject matter under subclass 34 where the micro-organisms involved are
    Streptococcus or Staphylococcus or the agent is specific for indicating the
    presence or absence of Streptococcus or Staphylococcus.


CLS 435/37
TXT Nitrate to nitrite reducing bacteria:

    Subject matter under subclass 34 where the micro-organisms involved are
    nitrite forming bacteria or the agent is specific for indicating the
    presence or absence of nitrite forming bacteria.

    (1)     Note.  It should be generally presumed that the presence of the
    nitrite is due to bacterial conversion of nitrate to nitrite.

    (2)     Note.  Included here are detection of nitrite in materials, such as
    an indication of bacteria.


CLS 435/38
TXT Enterobacteria:

    Subject matter under subclass 34 where the micro-organism involved is an
    enterobacteria or the agent is specific for indicating the presence or
    absence of enterobacteria.


CLS 435/39
TXT Quantitative determination:

    Subject matter under subclass 34 where the number or concentration of
    living micro-organisms in the material is found.

    (1)     Note.  The identity of the micro-organism is not necessarily known.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein are tests for the purity of water.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, for the
    use of an optical element such as a lens of a microscope for magnification
    for counting particles such as bacteria colonies one by one.


CLS 435/40
TXT Using multifield media:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 which uses a test substrate that has more
    than one test zone or area.

    (1)     Note.  Zones or areas can contain different concentrations of the
    same antibiotic or different antibiotic and are generally separated by an
    identifiable boundary.


CLS 435/40.5
TXT Involving fixed or stabilized, nonliving micro-organism, cell, or tissue
    (e.g., processes of staining, stabilizing, dehydrating, etc.; compositions
    used therefore, etc.):

    Subject under subclass 4 where the material to be tested contains fixed or
    stabilized, nonliving micro-organisms, cells, or tissues or the agent used
    for the measurement or test contains fixed or stabilized, nonliving
    micro-organisms, cells, or tissues.

    (1)     Note.  If there is no clear disclosure as to whether the
    micro-organism or cell is nonliving or viable, it shall be presumed to be
    viable and therefore appropriate for this class, subclasses 29+.  However,
    due to the uncertainty of the viability of the micro-organism or cell,
    placement of a cross reference in this or the indented subclasses is
    strongly recommended.

    (2)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses are intended to take
    compositions used to aid in the microscopic study (e.g., light, scanning or
    transmission electron microscopy, etc.) of micro-organisms, cells, and
    tissues such as those used for staining, clarifying, firming, fixing, or
    dehydrating a micro-organism, cell, or tissue for microscopic examination
    as well as the methods for preparing the micro-organisms, cells, and
    tissues for examination and the processes of examining them not
    specifically provided for elsewhere.

    (3)     Note.  Fixation or stabilization of the microorganisms, cells, or
    tissues on a slide may involve merely air drying rather than a chemical
    fixation process.

    (4)     Note.  Subject matter involving the staining of micro-organisms,
    cells, or tissues specifically and only for nucleic acid (e.g., DNA or RNA,
    etc.) with stains such as Feulgen stain or acridine orange is proper for
    this class, subclass 6.  Subject matter involving microorganisms, cells, or
    tissues stained with a composition providing contrasting stains for the
    cell nucleus and cytoplasm (e.g., hematoxylin, eosin, etc.) is proper for
    this or the indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for measuring or testing processes or compositions therefore
    involving nucleic acid, nucleotide, or nucleoside which includes processes
    of staining micro-organisms, cells, or tissues via in situ nucleic acid
    hybridization.

    7.1+,   for test methods or compositions therefore involving the staining
    of micro-organisms, cells, or tissue with labelled antibodies, ligands, or
    receptors.

    14+,    for test methods or compositions therefore involving the staining
    of micro-organisms, cells, or tissues for endogenous enzyme activity.

    29+,    for test methods or compositions therefore involving the staining
    of microorganisms, cells, or tissues with vital stains; methods or
    compositions involving the microscopic observation of live micro-organisms
    or cells; methods or compositions involving the counting of intact, live
    micro-organisms or cells not provided for elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing;  Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 94.1+ for treatment of hides, skins,
    feathers and animal tissues, e.g., tanning, particularly subclass 94.11
    pertaining to treatment of subcutaneous or internal tissues of animals,
    e.g., the production of sutures, racket strings, etc., from gut and various
    subclasses for compositions for dying materials of any kind which may
    contain a micro-organism or enzyme.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclass for a process of mounting a specimen by a lamination
    process which process may or may not include the step of staining,
    clarifying, firming or fixing the tissue; and subclass 57 for the
    combination of coating a biological specimen and then interposing the
    coated specimen between glass plates.

    250,    Radiant Energy, for methods and apparatus for detecting radiant
    energy not classified elsewhere.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, for methods and apparatus for
    analyzing light, determining the optical or nonoptical properties of
    materials, measuring optically dimensions, determining optically spatial
    relations and inspecting optically for flaws and imperfections within the
    scope of this class and not otherwise classifiable.  This includes visual
    counting of blood particles, etc. with a scale or spacer to aid the eye,
    counting and sizing particles with visible light by statistical analysis
    procedures rather than one by one numerical particle counting, etc.

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including communication) and Elements, for
    microscopes and microscope slides.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, for a numerical counting means for counting and/or
    sizing discrete particles such as blood particles or bacteria colonies one
    at a time.

    424,    Drug, Bio-affecting and Body Treating Composition, subclass 75 for
    an embalming and undertaking composition.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 2+ for coating processes wherein a
    medical or dental product is produced and subclass 4 for processes of
    coating a plant member or animal specimen.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclass 295+ for method, apparatus or
    product related to teaching and pertinent to biology and taxidermy,
    including models, cells, mounting and preserving means, processes and
    taxidermy devices.

    436,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 10 for
    particle count standards or controls such as platelet count standards;
    subclass 521 for fixed or stabilized red blood cells used as an insoluble
    carrier for immunochemicals (e.g., hemagglutination, etc.).


CLS 435/40.51
TXT Involving a monolayer, smear or suspension of microorganisms or cells:

    Subject under subclass 40.5 where the fixed or stabilized, nonliving
    micro-organisms or cells are in the form of a monolayer, smear, or a
    suspension.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is subject matter in which the
    micro-organisms or cells may be placed on a slide or other surface for
    histological or microscopic examination or may be automatically examined
    such as by flow cytometry.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass is subject matter involving blood
    cell smears; cells prepared for cytopathological analysis, e.g., analysis
    of cells that are spontaneously exfoliated, mechanically dislodged by
    irrigation, brushing, or scraping, or forcibly removed by needle aspiration
    (e.g., Pap smears, etc.); urine sediments, etc.


CLS 435/40.52
TXT Involving tissue sections:

    Subject matter under subclass 40.5 wherein the fixed or stabilized,
    nonliving tissue is in the form of a tissue section.

    (1)     Note.  Since tissues and organs are usually too thick for
    microscopic study, techniques have been developed which result in thin,
    translucent sections.  Therefore, for the purpose of this subclass, tissue
    sections are tissues which have been sliced so that they may be
    microscopically observed.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass are all stages of tissue
    processing in the preparation for and examination of tissue sections, e.g.,
    fixation, dehydration, embedding, sectioning, etc.


CLS 435/41
TXT MICRO-ORGANISM, TISSUE CELL CULTURE, OR ENZYME USING PROCESS TO SYNTHESIZE
    A DESIRED CHEMICAL COMPOUND OR COMPOSITION:

    Processes under the class definition wherein the product is synthesized by
    a biochemical transformation of matter, i.e., a transformation wherein the
    transforming agent is a micro-organism, or an enzyme or an immobilized
    enzyme or an animal or plant cell culture or organelles.

    (1)     Note.  Micro-organism for the purpose of this subclass includes
    bacteria, fungi (including yeast), virus, actinomycetales unicellular
    algae, plant cells, actinomycetales, and protozoa.

    (2)     Note.  Synthesis for purposes of this subclass involves the
    preparation of a composition or compound which did not exist in the
    starting material, and does not include an ancillary operation wherein a
    material is chemically modified by an enzyme, cell bound free or
    immobilized, or micro-organism or animal or plant cell so as to degrade or
    change the chemical structure thereof so that another material which is in
    initial intimate contact with the modified material can be recovered in a
    nonmodified form.  See in particular, subclasses 262+ of this schedule for
    such liberation or purification processes.

    (3)     Note.  As between Class 260 and this class (435) provide an
    original home for all synthesis which include action by a micro-organism or
    enzyme.

    (4)     Note.  Enzymes for the purpose of this subclass are polypeptides or
    proteins or material containing the same which are capable of chemically
    transforming matter, e.g., oxidation, etc., without undergoing a
    transformation itself.

    (5)     Note.  Processes for producing an enzyme or micro-organism are
    excluded herefrom and are found in subclasses 183+ and 243+.

    (6)     Note.  Processes for the production of products in which the
    structure is not disclosed should be placed in this and the indented
    subclasses in the first appearing subclass which takes an identified
    constituent of the product. Should such a placement prove impossible, then
    placement is on the basis of the micro-organism's identity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, for chemical processes
    including electrical or wave energy methods.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for the synthesis of carbon
    compounds by means not including a micro-organism or enzyme.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, for the synthesis of inorganic
    compounds or elements other than metals by means not including the use of a
    micro-organism or enzyme.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    for fermentation processes that are solely disclosed or claimed in
    preparing an edible, and for mixtures of enzymes or ferments solely
    disclosed or claimed as edible or used in preparation of an edible.  Class
    426 provides for compositions and processes of preparation relating to
    compositions which have the capacity to ferment and produce an edible, but
    which are claimed as being in an inactive state, and also provides for
    compositions which are undergoing a fermentation to produce an edible
    product.


CLS 435/42
TXT Process involving micro-organisms of different genera in the same process,
    simultaneously:

    Processes under subclass 41 wherein micro-organisms of different genera are
    simultaneously propagated on the same culture media.


CLS 435/43
TXT Preparing compound having a 1- thia- 4-  aza-bicyclo (3.2.0) heptane ring
    system (e.g., penicillin, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 41 wherein the product synthesized contains a
    1-thia-4-aza-bicyclo (3.2.0) heptane polycyclic ring system, i.e.,



    (1)     Note.  The media of the processes included in subclass 45 must
    contain the 1-thia-4-aza-bicyclo heptane ring system compound.


CLS 435/44
TXT By desacylation of the substituent in 6-position:

    Processes under subclass 43 wherein the product synthesized is prepared by
    the hydrolysis of an acetyl group in the 6-position.


CLS 435/45
TXT By acylation of the substituent in 6-position:

    Processes under subclass 43 wherein the product synthesized is prepared by
    substituting an acyl group in the 6-position.

    (1)     Note.  The media of the processes included herein must contain the
    1-thia- 4-aza-bicyclo heptane ring system compound.


CLS 435/46
TXT In presence of phenyl acetic acid or phenyl acetamide or their derivatives:

    Processes under subclass 43 wherein phenyl acetic acid or substituted
    phenyl acetic acid or salts thereof or phenyl acetamide or substituted
    phenyl acetamide or salts thereof is present during the synthesis.


CLS 435/47
TXT Preparing compound having a 1 -thia -5- aza-bicyclo (4.2.0) octane ring
    system (e.g., cephalosporin, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 41 wherein the product synthesized contains a
    1-thia-5-aza-bicyclo (4.2.0) octane polycyclic ring system, i.e.,



CLS 435/48
TXT Di-substituted in 7-position:

    Processes under subclass 47 wherein the polycyclic ring system synthesized
    contains two substituents other than hydrogen in the 7-position.


CLS 435/49
TXT Cephalosporin C:

    Processes under subclass 47 wherein the product contains
    7-(D-5-amino-5-carboxy valer-amido)-3-(hydroxy methyl)-8- oxo - 1
    -thia-5-aza-bicyclo (4.2.0) -oct -3 -ene -3-carboxylic acid acetate, i.e.,



    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass, derivatives include only
    metal and ammonium salts.


CLS 435/50
TXT By acylation of the substituent in the 7-position:

    Processes under subclass 47 wherein the product synthesized is prepared by
    amide bond formation, present with the nitrogen attached at the 7-position.


CLS 435/51
TXT By desacylation of the substituent in the 7-position:

    Processes under subclass 47 wherein the product synthesized is prepared by
    cleaving the amide bond with the nitrogen attached to the 7-position.


CLS 435/52
TXT Preparing compound containing a cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene nucleus;
    nor-, homo-, or D-ring lactone derivatives thereof:

    Processes under subclass 41 wherein the product synthesized  contains  a
    cyclopentanophenanthrene ring system, i.e., or the nor or homo



    or D-ring lactone derivatives.

    (1)     Note.  The phenanthrene ring system contains more hydrogen than is
    present in phenanthrene.

    (2)     Note.  Common atoms of two rings are considered to belong to the
    rightmost ring.

    (3)     Note.  Homo derivatives wherein the D-ring is expanded to 6-carbons
    such as in Hellebrin are found here.


CLS 435/53
TXT Containing heterocyclic ring:

    Processes under subclass 52 wherein the cyclopentanophenanthrene ring
    system synthesized contains an additional ring which is a hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  The hetero ring may be fused or bridged with the
    cyclopentanophenanthrene ring system.


CLS 435/54
TXT Acting on D-ring:

    Processes under subclass 52 wherein the product synthesized is formed by
    biochemical transformation within the D-ring.

    (1)     Note.  The hetero ring may be fused or bridged with the
    cyclopentanophenanthrene ring system.


CLS 435/55
TXT Acting at 17-position:

    Processes under subclass 54 wherein the product synthesized is formed by
    biochemical transformation at the 17-position.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes cleavage of the 17-side chain with
    the formation of keto or hydroxyl groups at the cleaved position.


CLS 435/56
TXT Hydroxylating at 17-position:

    Processes under subclass 55 wherein the product synthesized has a hydroxyl
    group at the 17-position and is formed by the addition of an oxygen atom to
    the pendant hydrogen atom.


CLS 435/57
TXT Hydroxylating at 16-position:

    Processes under subclass 54 wherein the product synthesized has a hydroxyl
    group at the 16-position and is formed by the addition of oxygen to the
    ring pendant hydrogen atom.


CLS 435/58
TXT Hydroxylating:

    Processes under subclass 52 wherein a carbon atom on the substrate nucleus
    is hydroxylated by the addition of oxygen to the ring pendant hydrogen atom.


CLS 435/59
TXT At 11-position:

    Processes under subclass 58 wherein the product synthesized has a hydroxyl
    group formed at the 11-position.


CLS 435/60
TXT At 11 alpha position:

    Processes under subclass 59 wherein the product synthesized has a hydroxyl
    group formed at the 11 Alpha position.


CLS 435/61
TXT Dehydrogenating; dehydroxylating:

    Processes under subclass 52 wherein the product synthesized is produced by
    the removal from the nucleus of a pair of hydrogen atoms creating an
    unsaturated bond or the product is synthesized by removal or addition of a
    hydroxyl group.

    (1)     Note.  The mere shifting of unsaturated bonds from adjacent
    positions such as from the 5, 6 position to the 4, 5 position is not a
    dehydrogenation.


CLS 435/62
TXT Forming an aryl ring from "A" ring:

    Processes under subclass 61 wherein the product synthesized contains an
    aromatic "A" ring which is formed by dehydrogenation.


CLS 435/63
TXT Preparing compound containing a prostaglandin nucleus:

    Processes under subclass 41 wherein the product synthesized contains a five
    membered ring having two side-chains in ortho position to each other, and
    having at least one oxygen atom directly bound to the ring in ortho
    position to one of the side-chains, one side-chain containing, not directly
    bound to the ring, a carbon atom having three bonds to hetero atoms with at
    the most one bond to halogen, and the other side-chain having at least one
    oxygen atom bound in position to the ring, i.e., prostaglandins having the
    structure,



CLS 435/64
TXT Preparing compound other than saccharide containing a tetracycline nucleus
    (e.g., naphthacene, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 41 wherein the product synthesized contains a
    naphthacene ring system, i.e.,



    and nonsaccharide ring unsaturated derivatives thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Tetracyclines are properly classified here.

    (2)     Note.  Saccharide derivatives are excluded herefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     for saccharide derivatives.


CLS 435/65
TXT Preparing compound other than saccharide containing a gibberellin nucleus
    (i.e., gibbane):

    Processes under subclass 41 wherein the product synthesized contains other
    than the saccharide.



    (1)     Note.  Gibberellic acid and gibberellins are properly classified
    here.

    (2)     Note.  Saccharide derivatives are excluded herefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     for saccharide derivatives.


CLS 435/66
TXT Preparing compound other than saccharide containing alloxazine or
    isoalloxazine nucleus:

    Processes under subclass 41 wherein the product synthesized contains an
    alloxazine or isoalloxazine ring system, e.g., and is not a saccharide.



    (1)     Note.  Riboflavin is not considered a saccharide derivative for the
    purpose of this subclass and is therefore provided for here.

    (2)     Note.  Saccharide derivatives are excluded herefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72+,    for saccharide derivatives of these compounds.


CLS 435/67
TXT Preparing compound containing a carotene nucleus (i.e., carotene):

    Processes under subclass 41 wherein the product synthesized contains



    or



    (1)     Note.  Carotenoids having a cyclic group are properly classified
    here.

    (2)     Note.  Structures above can be partially hydrogenated such as
    Phytofluene.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166,    for the acyclic carotenoid, lycopene.


CLS 435/68.1
TXT Enzymatic production of a protein or polypeptide (e.g., enzymatic
    hydrolysis, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 41 wherein the enzymatically produced product is a
    high molecular weight polypeptide of alpha amino acids or consists of two
    or more amino acids linked by a peptide bond.

    (1)     Note. This subclass provides for peptones which are the result of
    partial protein hydrolysis.

    (2)     Note.  A peptide bond is defined as an amide linkage between two
    amino acid residues.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, for protein containing coating
    or plastic compositions, particularly subclasses 4, 31.24, 31.57, 31.82,
    31.94, 124+, 645+ and indented subclasses.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 63, 92, 105, 211, and 212 for
    edible protein compositions or products and related process involving the
    same.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 474.4+ for a
    nonstructural stock material product in the form of a composite web or
    sheet including a layer comprising protein, and other appropriately titled
    subclasses (e.g., subclasses 435 and 458).

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives Peptides or Proteins,
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclasses 300 and 345 for peptides
    and reaction products thereof; subclasses 350 to 427 for proteins and the
    reaction products thereof; and cross-reference art collections 800 through
    859 for antigenic peptides or proteins, methods of immobilizing peptides or
    proteins, and the source materials from which peptides or proteins are
    isolated.

    536,    Organic Compounds, appropriate subclasses, for nucleic acids and
    processes of chemical synthesis thereof.

    930,    Peptide or Protein Sequence, subclasses 10+ for peptide or protein
    sequence of four or more amino acids.


CLS 435/69.1
TXT Recombinant DNA technique included in method of making a protein or
    polypeptide:

    Processes under subclass 41 which involve the use of recombinant DNA
    techniques in a process of synthesis of a protein or polypeptide.

    (1)     Note.  An example of the subject matter in this subclass is a
    process of producing a polypeptide which includes the alteration of the
    genetic structure of a cell by use of recombinant DNA techniques.

    (2)     Note.  See this class, subclass 68.1 for the definition of
    polypeptide or protein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172.3,  for processes using recombinant DNA techniques to alter the genetic
    structure of a living micro-organism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclass 808 for the product produced
    by the processes of this subclass.

    930,    Peptide or Protein Sequence, subclasses 10+ for peptide or protein
    sequence of four or more amino acids.

    935,    Genetic Engineering:  Recombinant DNA Hybrid or Fused Cell
    Technology and Related Manipulations of Nucleic Acids, subclasses 1-88 for
    a cross-reference art collection of all subject matter related to
    recombinant DNA technology.


CLS 435/69.2
TXT Enzyme inhibitors or activators:

    Processes under subclasses 69.1 wherein the product synthesized is an
    enzyme inhibitor or activator which is a protein or polypeptide.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of the subject matter included in this subclass are
    the cloning and expression of antagonists to enzymes for amino acid
    biosynthesis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106     through 116 and 183-234, for enzyme inhibitors employed in the
    production of amino acids.


CLS 435/69.3
TXT Antigens:

    Processes under subclass 69.1 wherein the product synthesized is claimed or
    solely disclosed as functioning as an antigen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of the subject matter included in this subclass are
    cloning and expression of all polypeptide antigens (e.g., viral subunit
    antigens).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.1+,   for antigens involved in an enzyme immunoassay.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses
    184.1+ for compositions of that class which contain antigens.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses
    543-546 for antigens used as a testing material in an in vitro test.

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives Peptides, or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclasses 806 and 807 for the
    product produced by the processes of this subclass.


CLS 435/69.4
TXT Hormones or fragments thereof:

    Processes under subclass 69.1 wherein the product synthesized is a hormone
    or a part of a hormone.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of the subject matter included in this subclass are
    cloning and expression of polypeptide hormones (e.g., mammalion growth
    stimulating hormones).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclass 399 for the product produced
    by the processes of this subclass.


CLS 435/69.5
TXT Lymphokines or monokines:

    Processes under subclass 69.1 wherein the product synthesized is a
    lymphokine or monokine.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of the subject matter included in this subclass are
    cloning and expression of interferon, interleukin, lymphotoxin, or tumor
    necrosis factor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclass 85 for
    bioactive compositions containing interferon.

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclass 351 for the product produced
    by the processes of this subclass.


CLS 435/69.51
TXT Interferons:

    Processes under subclass 69.5 wherein the product synthesized is an
    interferon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclass 85 for
    compositions of that class containing interferon.

    514,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclass 21 for
    compositions of that class containing interferon.

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclass 351 for the product produced
    by the processes of this subclass.


CLS 435/69.52
TXT Interleukins:

    Processes under subclass 69.5 wherein the product synthesized is an
    interleukin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    514,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclass 21 for
    compositions of that class containing an interleukin.

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclass 351 for the product produced
    by the processes of this subclass.


CLS 435/69.6
TXT Blood proteins:

    Processes under subclass 69.1 wherein the product synthesized is a blood
    protein.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of the subject matter included in this subclass are
    cloning and expression of polypeptide of immunoglobulin origin.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70.4,   for processes including the culture of blood cells.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses
    85.1+ for composition of that class containing a blood protein.

    514,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 2+
    for compositions of that class containing a blood protein.

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclasses 380-394 for the product
    produced by the processes of this subclass.


CLS 435/69.7
TXT Fusion proteins or polypeptides:

    Processes under subclass 69.1 wherein the product synthesized is a fusion
    protein or fusion polypeptide.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of the subject matter included in this subclass are
    the cloning and expression of a fused polypeptide (e.g., tribrid protein).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclasses 300+ for the product
    produced by the processes of this subclass.


CLS 435/69.8
TXT Signal sequence (e.g., beta-galactosidase, etc.):

    Process under subclass 69.1 wherein the product synthesized is a protein or
    polypeptide with a signal sequence such as beta-galactosidase.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183     through 234, for enzymatic signal sequences.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclasses 300+ for the product
    produced by the processes of this subclass which includes fused
    polypeptides.


CLS 435/69.9
TXT Yeast derived:

    Processes under subclass 69.8 wherein the product synthesized is a protein
    or polypeptide with a yeast derived signal sequence.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of the subject matter included in this subclass are
    cloning and expression of polypeptides attached to a yeast signal sequence
    (e.g., alpha-amylose).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183     through 234, for enzymatic signal sequence of yeast.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclasses 300+ for the product
    produced by the processes of this subclass which include fused polypeptides.


CLS 435/70.1
TXT Using tissue cell culture to make a protein or polypeptide:

    Processes under subclass 41 wherein an in vitro tissue cell culture is used
    to produce a protein or polypeptide.

    (1)     Note.  An example of the subject matter included in this subclass
    is use of a plant or animal cell culture to produce polypeptides.

    (2)     Note.  See this class, subclass 68.1 for the definition of
    polypeptide or protein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    325+, for the culture of animal cells absent the production of a protein or
    polypeptide product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    930,    Peptide or Protein Sequence, subclasses 10+ for peptide or protein
    sequence of four or more amino acids.


CLS 435/70.2
TXT Fused or hybrid cells:

    Processes under subclass 70.1 wherein the product is synthesized by culture
    of fused or hybrid cells.

    (1)     Note.  Fused or hybrid cells include those resulting from (a) the
    fusion of two cells, (b) the insertion of the nucleus or chromosone of one
    cell into another or (c) the treatment of a cell with an immortalizing
    agent which results in a cell which will proliferate in long-term culture.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of the subject matter included in this and the
    indented subclass are use of lymphoblastoid hybridoma cells to produce
    peptide hormones (e.g., insulin, calcitonin, growth hormone, etc.) or
    monoclonal anti-bodies or use of cells transformed with a virus or oncogene
    to produce a cell line which will proliferate and produce proteins or
    polypeptides in long term culture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    326+,   for fused or hybrid animal cells, per se, which express
    immunoglobulin, antibody, or fragment thereof.

    346,    for fused or hybrid cell, per se.

    373     through 403, for various processes of culturing animal cells.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclasses 303, 307, 399, for the
    product produced by the processes of this subclass which includes insulin,
    calcitonin, and hormones.

    935,    Genetic Engineering:  Recombinant DNA Technology, Hybrid or Fused
    Cell Technology and Related Manipulations of Nucleic Acids, subclasses 89+
    for processes of producing fused or hybrid cells.


CLS 435/70.21
TXT Producing monoclonal antibody:

    Processes under subclass 70.21 wherein the product synthesized by the fused
    or hybrid cell is a monoclonal antibody.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter in this subclass includes production of
    monoclonal antibodies by hybridoma cells.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.1+,   for use of monoclonal antibodies in testing methods involving a
    micro-organism or enzyme.

    326+,   for fused or hybrid animal cells, per se, which express
    immunoglobulin, antibody, or fragment thereof.  373 through 403, for
    various processes of culturing animal cells.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses
    131.1+ for bio-affecting compositions containing monoclonal antibodies.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclass 548 for
    monoclonal antibodies used in a process of immunoassay.

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclasses 387.2+ for the product
    produced by the processes of this subclass and subclass 413 for the process
    of using monoclonal antibody to separate a protein.

    935,    Genetic Engineering:  Recombinant DNA Technology, Hybrid or Fused
    Cell Technology, and Related Manipulations of Nucleic Acids, subclass 100
    for processes of producing a fused or hybrid cell including a lymphocyte.


CLS 435/70.3
TXT Animal tissue cell culture:

    Processes under subclass 70.2 wherein the protein or polypeptide product
    synthesized is derived from the culture of animal tissue cells.

    (1)     Note.  The term tissue cells is intended to differentiate cells
    cultivated as a contiguous mass as opposed to individual cells or fused
    cells.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    326     through 372.3, for animal cells, per se.

    373     through 403, for techniques of culturing animal cells.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 95+
    for medicinal compositions containing animal cell extracts.

    514,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclass 21 for
    medicinal compositions produced by or extracted from animal tissue
    containing a peptide.

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclasses 350+, for proteins, per se.


CLS 435/70.4
TXT Blood (lymphoid) cell culture:

    Processes under subclass 70.3 wherein the product synthesized is produced
    by culture of blood cells.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of the subject matter included in this subclass are
    interleukins produced by culture of blood cells.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69.5,   for processes of producing lymphokines or monokines through use of
    recombinant DNA techniques.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclass 351 for the product produced
    by the processes of this subclass.


CLS 435/70.5
TXT Producing interferons:

    Processes under subclass 70.4 wherein the product synthesized is an
    interferon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69.51,  for processes of producing interferon through use of recombinant
    DNA techniques.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclass 85 for
    compositions of that class containing interferon.

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclass 351 for the product produced
    by the processes of this subclass.


CLS 435/71.1
TXT Using a micro-organism to make a protein or polypeptide:

    Processes under subclass 41 wherein a protein or peptide synthesized is
    produced by a culture of a micro-organism.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of the subject matter included in this subclass are
    eucaryotic antibiotics.

    (2)     Note.  See this class subclass 68.1 for the definition of
    polypeptide or protein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243     through 261, for process of culturing micro-organisms and for
    micro-organisms, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Therefore, subclasses 820+ for the product
    produced by the process of this subclass.

    930,    Peptide or Protein Sequence, subclasses 10+ for peptide or protein
    sequence of four or more amino acids.


CLS 435/71.2
TXT Procaryotic micro-organism:

    Processes under subclass 71.1 wherein the micro-organism is procaryotic.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of the subject matter included in this subclass are
    bacterial antigens and periplasmic proteins.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252.1+, for process of culture of bacteria and for bacteria, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclasses 820+ for the product
    produced by the processes of this subclass.


CLS 435/71.3
TXT Antibiotic or toxin:

    Processes under subclass 71.2 wherein the product synthesized is an
    antibiotic or toxin.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of the subject matter in this subclass are
    procaryotic antibiotics (e.g.,  polymyxin).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    514,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 2+
    for compositions of that class containing an antibiotic or toxin which is a
    protein or polypeptide.


CLS 435/72
TXT Preparing compound containing saccharide radical:

    Processes under subclass 41 wherein the product synthesized contains a
    saccharide or polysaccharide, the monomeric units of which contain at least
    five-carbon atoms, or their reaction products wherein the carbon skeleton
    of the saccharide or polysaccharide of the unit is not destroyed.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is cellulose, derivatized cellulose, starch,
    derivatized starch, sugars, lignins, tannins, o-glycosides, n-glycosides,
    and s-glycosides.

    (2)     Note.  Processes wherein the product synthesized is a degradation
    product which contains fewer than five-carbon atoms are not provided for in
    this subclass but are provided for in an appropriate subclass below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137,    for sugar acids.

    158+,   for sugar alcohols.

    262,    for processes of liberation or purification of carbohydrates using
    a biochemical reaction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, for the hydrolysis of
    carbohydrates including their conversion to sugar by means other than a
    micro-organism or enzyme.  Class 127 will provide for such processes using
    an enzyme or micro-organism only where the hydrolysis by micro-organism or
    enzyme is followed by steps of concentration, purification, or treatment
    (such as crystallization) to make a sugar or syrup.

    536,    Organic Compounds, for the chemical manufacture or synthesis of
    sugar or carbohydrates by a process other than hydrolysis and the
    rearrangement of one carbohydrate to form another carbohydrate by means
    other than a micro-organism or enzyme. Search subclasses 22.1+ for
    N-glycosides (e.g., nucleosides, nucleotides, polynucleotides) and more
    specifically subclasses 23.1+ for fragments of RNA or DNA which could have
    utility as genes in recombinant processes and subclasses 26.4+ for vitamin
    B-12 and its derivatives.


CLS 435/73
TXT Preparing S-glycoside (e.g, lincomycin, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 72 wherein the product synthesized is a thioacetal
    derivative of a cyclic form of sugar in which the hydrogen atom of the
    hemithioacetal sulfhydryl group has been replaced by an alkyl, aralkyl, or
    aryl group.

    (1)     Note.  An S-glycoside is a compound having a sugar moiety connected
    to an aglycone moiety via a sulfur.

    (2)     Note.  The aglycone is a nonsaccharide material, e.g., benzene,
    indoxyl, anthracene, etc.

    (3)     Note.  On complete hydrolysis S-glycosides yield one or more
    monosaccharides, and a mono or a polyhydric thiol or thiol phenol.

    (4)     Note.  The cyclic sugars referred to in the definitions are
    normally pyranoses or furanoses.

    (5)     Note.  Gyclosides derived from aldoses are referred to as
    aldosides, and those from ketoses are ketosides.


CLS 435/74
TXT Preparing O-glycoside (e.g, glucosides, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 72 wherein the product synthesized is an acetal
    derivative of a cyclic form of sugars in which the hydrogen atom of the
    hemiacetal hydroxyl has been replaced by an alkyl, aralkyl, or aryl group.

    (1)     Note.  An O-glycoside is a compound having a sugar moiety connected
    to an aglycone moiety via oxygen.

    (2)     Note.  The aglycone is a nonsaccharide material, e.g., benzene,
    indoxyl, anthracene, etc.

    (3)     Note.  On complete hydrolysis O-glycosides yield one or more
    monosaccharides, and a mono or polyhydric alcohol or phenol.

    (4)     Note.  The cyclic sugars referred to in the definitions are
    normally pyranoses or furanoses.

    (5)     Note.  Glycosides derived from aldoses are referred to as
    aldosides, and those from ketoses are ketosides.


CLS 435/75
TXT Oxygen of the saccharide radical is directly bonded to a nonsaccharide
    heterocyclic ring or a fused- or bridged-ring system which contains a
    nonsaccharide heterocyclic ring (e.g., coumermycin, novobiocin, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 74 wherein a nonsaccharide heterocyclic ring or a
    fused or bridged- ring system which contains a nonsaccharide


    heterocyclic ring is attached to an oxygen of the saccharide radical, e.g.,



CLS 435/76
TXT The hetero ring has eight or more ring members and only oxygen as ring
    hetero atoms (e.g., erythromycin, spiramycin, nystatin, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 75 wherein the nonsaccharide heterocyclic ring has
    eight or more ring members and only oxygen as the ring heteroatom, e.g.,



CLS 435/77
TXT Oxygen atom of the saccharide radical is directly linked through only
    acyclic carbon atoms to a nonsaccharide heterocyclic ring (e.g., bleomycin,
    phleomycin, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 74 wherein the Heterocyclic ring is directly
    linked to an oxygen atom

    of the saccharide radical directly through only acyclic carbon atoms, e.g.,



CLS 435/78
TXT Oxygen atom of the saccharide radical is directly bonded to a condensed
    ring system having three or more carbocyclic rings (e.g., dauomycin,
    adriamycin, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 74 wherein a condensed ring system having three or
    more carbocyclic rings is directly bonded to an oxygen atom of the
    saccharide radical, e.g.,



CLS 435/79
TXT Oxygen atom of the saccharide radical is bonded to a cyclohexyl radical
    (e.g., kasugamycin, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 74 wherein a cyclohexyl radical is bonded to an
    oxygen atom of the saccharide radical, e.g.,



CLS 435/80
TXT Cyclohexyl radical is substituted by two or more nitrogen atoms (e.g.,
    destomycin, neamin, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 79 wherein two or more nitrogen atoms are attached
    to the cyclohexyl radical, e.g.,



CLS 435/81
TXT Cyclohexyl radical is attached directly to a nitrogen atom of two or more
    N-C(=N)-N radicals (e.g., streptomycin, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 80 wherein nitrogen atoms of two or more N-C(=N)-N
    radicals are bonded to the cyclohexyl radical, e.g.,



CLS 435/82
TXT Having two saccharide radicals bonded through only oxygen to adjacent ring
    carbons of the cyclohexyl radical (e.g., ambutyrosin, ribostamycin, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 80 wherein the cyclohexyl radical is separately,
    independently bonded to two or more oxygen atoms of saccharide radicals at
    adjacent ring carbons, e.g.,



CLS 435/83
TXT Containing three or more saccharide radicals (e.g., liquidomycin, neomycin,
    lividomycin, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 82 wherein the cyclohexyl radical is bonded
    directly or indirectly to three or more saccharide radicals, e.g.,



CLS 435/84
TXT Preparing nitrogen-containing saccharide:

    Processes under subclass 72 wherein the product synthesized has a
    nitrogen-containing group bonded to a chain carbon of the saccharide or
    polysaccharide.


CLS 435/85
TXT N-glycoside:

    Processes under subclass 84 wherein the product synthesized is a glycosidic
    derivative of the cyclic forms of saccharides or polysaccharides in which
    the aglycone portion is attached through nitrogen to the saccharide moiety
    by substituting it for the hemiacetal hydroxyl of the sugar.

    (1)     Note.  The aglycone can be noncyclic.

    (2)     Note.  N-glycosides in which the aglycone is purine or pyrimidine
    in which the ring structure is intact are provided for in subclasses 87 and
    89.  Compounds such as





    not considered to be within this meaning and thus, are here in subclass 85.


CLS 435/86
TXT Cobalamin (i.e., vitamin B12,LLD factor):

    Processes under subclass 85 wherein the product synthesized has the
    following structure:



CLS 435/87
TXT Nucleoside:

    Processes under subclass 85 wherein the nitrogen is part of a purine or
    pyrimidine or a substituted purine or pyrimidine ring and the product
    synthesized does not contain phosphorus.

    (1)     Note.  Substituted purine or pyrimidine includes only those
    derivatives which are substituted on rather than in the respective ring
    positions, i.e.,



    is present in the structure.  The internal ring bonding may be altered by
    tautomerism or by the addition of substituents without excluding a compound
    from this subclass.


CLS 435/88
TXT Having a fused ring containing a six-membered ring having two N-atoms in
    the same ring (e.g., purine nucleosides, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 87 wherein the nitrogen is part of a purine or
    substituted purine ring.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 17, Note (1) for a definition of substituted.


CLS 435/89
TXT Nucleotide:

    Processes under subclass 85 wherein the nitrogen is part of a purine or
    pyrimidine or a substituted purine or pyrimidine ring and the compound
    additionally contains a phosphoric acid residue esterified to one of the
    hydroxyl groups of a saccharide moiety.


CLS 435/90
TXT Dinucleotide (e.g., NAD, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 89 wherein the product contains only two
    nucleotides joined through esterified phosphoric acid residues.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 87, Note (1) for definition of the term
    substituted.


CLS 435/91.1
TXT Polynucleotide (e.g., nucleic acid, oligonucleotide, etc.):
    Processes under subclass 89 wherein the product synthesized is:

            where "n" is a whole number greater than 2, R' is H or OH, and R is
    purine or pyrimidine or a substituted purine or pyrimidine.

    (1)     Note.  The two purines, adenine and guanine, are found in both
    deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA) and ribonucleic acid (RNA). The pyrimidine
    cytosine is found in both DNA and RNA while the pyrimidine thymine is found
    only in DNA and the pyrimidine uracil appears only in RNA.

    (2)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses are intended to include
    processes wherein the polynucleotide synthesized did not exist as such in
    the starting material.  The synthesized material may be entirely different
    from the starting material, or it may have a substituted, deleted, or added
    nucleotide or nucleotides.

    (3)     Note.  Substituted purine or pyrimidine includes only those
    derivatives which are substituted on, rather than in the respective ring
    positions.

    (4)     Note.  If the disclosure is unclear as to what kind of
    polynucleotide is being made (i.e., RNA or DNA) the subject matter should
    be classified in the first appearing appropriate subclass for either RNA or
    DNA and cross-referenced to other appropriate subclasses for RNA or DNA.
    Unless the subject matter is directed to an acellular amplification
    process, synthesis of RNA is intended for subclasses 91.3+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91.3+,  for processes wherein the product synthesized contains only
    ribonucleotide monomers.

    270,    for methods of removing nucleic acid from intact or disrupted cells
    by the use of an enzyme or microorganism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    536,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 22.1+ for nucleic acids, per se, and
    for methods of making nucleic acids which do not involve use of an enzyme
    or microorganism in the process.


CLS 435/91.2
TXT Acellular exponential or geometric amplification  (e.g., PCR,
    etc.):Processes under subclass 91.1 which result in a geometric or
    exponential increase in the number of copies of a nucleotide sequence or
    sequences, rather than an arithmetic increase which occurs in the making of
    a single complementary copy of a nucleotide, wherein such processes take
    place without the involvement of  viruses, eukaryotic cells, or prokaryotic
    cells.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is the polymerase chain reaction
    (PCR).  PCR is an in vitro DNA amplification system that uses repeated
    cycles of oligonucleotide-directed DNA synthesis to selectively generate
    multiple copies of a specific DNA segment.  It involves repeated cycles of
    (a) denaturation or strand displacement of the DNA, (b) annealing of two
    oligonucleotide primers that flank the DNA segment to be amplified, and (c)
    extension of the annealed primers with DNA polymerase.

    (2)     Note.  Processes which result in an arithmetic increase in the
    number of copies of a nucleotide sequence, such as occurs in the making of
    a single complementary copy of a nucleotide sequence, are proper for
    subclasses 91.3+ if the nucleotide is a ribonucleotide and either subclass
    91.1 or subclasses 91.5+, depending on the process details, if the
    nucleotide is other than a ribonucleotide.


CLS 435/91.21
TXT Involving the making of multiple RNA copies:
    Processes under subclass 91.2 which result in a geometric or exponential,
    rather than an arithmetic increase in the number of copies of a
    ribonucleotide sequence or sequences.

    (1)     Note.  Transcription amplification is included in this subclass.


CLS 435/91.3
TXT Polynucleotide contains only ribonucleotide monomers:
    Processes under subclass 91.1 wherein the product synthesized is:

            where "n" is a whole number greater than 2 and R is purine or
    pyrimidine or a substituted purine or pyrimidine.

    (1)     Note.  The two purines, adenine and guanine, and the two
    pyrimidines, cytosine and uracil, are used in ribonucleic acid (RNA)
    synthesis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91.51,  for acellular synthesis of RNA-DNA hybrid polynucleotides.


CLS 435/91.31
TXT Involving catalytic ribonucleic acid:
    Processes under subclass 91.3 wherein a ribonucleic acid (RNA) acting as an
    enzyme is involved as a reactant in, or as a product of, a process of
    synthesizing a polynucleotide containing only ribonucleotide monomers.

    (1)     Note.  Catalytic RNA is also called enzymatic RNA or ribozyme.

    (2)     Note.  Catalytic RNA is RNA which can serve as an enzyme acting on
    other RNA molecules in vitro as a (a) dephosphorylase, (b)
    ribonucleotidyl-transferase, or (c) sequence-specific endoribonuclease.


CLS 435/91.32
TXT Prepared from virus, prokaryotic cell, or eukaryotic cell culturing
    process:Processes under subclass 91.3 wherein the desired RNA results from
    the culturing of a virus, prokaryote, or eukaryote.

    (1)     Note.  A prokaryotic cell is one that lacks a defined nucleus.
    Generally, the cellular DNA is in the form of a single circular molecule
    not bounded by a membrane.  The cell wall is rigid and it has few distinct
    organelles.  Included in this group are bacteria and blue-green algae.

            A eukaryotic cell is one that has a nucleus defined by a nuclear
    membrane, which nucleus contains chromosomes that comprise the cell's
    genome.  Eukaryotic organisms may be multicellular or single-celled and
    include cells from plants, animals, fungi, and algae other than blue-green
    algae.

    (2)     Note.  This and the indented subclass is intended to include
    processes wherein the virus, prokaryote, or eukaryote is a wild type,
    mutant, or recombinant.


CLS 435/91.33
TXT Involving virus:
    Processes under subclass 91.32 wherein a virus is involved in the
    production of the polyribonucleotide.


CLS 435/91.4
TXT Modification or preparation of a recombinant DNA vector:
    Processes under subclass 91.1 involving the insertion, deletion, addition,
    or substitution of a nucleotide or nucleotides in an already existing
    vector or involving the creation of a new vector.

    (1)     Note.  A vector is a DNA sequence (e.g., a plasmid, cosmid, a viral
    or phage DNA, etc.) which is able to replicate autonomously in  a host cell.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of processes intended for this and the indented
    subclasses include cleaving a plasmid followed by adding onto the plasmid a
    piece of nucleic acid and then ligating the plasmid; linearizing and then
    ligating two plasmids together; culturing cells and isolating vectors from
    them, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    320.1,  for vectors, per se.


CLS 435/91.41
TXT By insertion or addition of one or more nucleotides:
    Process under subclass 91.4 involving the insertion of a nucleotide or a
    nucleotide sequence into a vector or onto the end of a vector wherein the
    result is a vector different from the starting vector.


CLS 435/91.42
TXT Involving deletion of a nucleotide or nucleotides from a vector:Processes
    under subclass 91.4 involving the removal of an unwanted nucleotide or
    nucleotide sequence from the vector structure wherein the result is a
    vector different from the starting vector.


CLS 435/91.5
TXT Acellular preparation of polynucleotide:
    Processes under subclass 91.1 wherein the polynucleotide is prepared
    enzymatically (with no virus, eukaryotic cell, or prokaryotic cell
    involvement in the preparation step) which results in a new polynucleotide
    or a polynucleotide different from the starting polynucleotide.

    (1)     Note.  Viral or cellular involvement, prior to the actual
    polynucleotide preparation steps, is acceptable for this subclass as is
    cellular replication of the newly made polynucleotide, if said replication
    does not modify the structure of the polynucleotide product.


CLS 435/91.51
TXT Involving RNA as a starting material or intermediate:
    Processes under subclass 91.5 wherein RNA is involved in the preparation of
    a polynucleotide as a template for the polynucleotide or as an intermediate
    in the process which results in the polynucleotide.


CLS 435/91.52
TXT Involving a ligase (6.):
    Processes under subclass 91.5 wherein a ligase (6.) is involved in the
    preparation of the polynucleotide.

    (1)     Note.  Although ligase is the most common name used, carboxylase,
    synthetase, and synthase are other names used.


CLS 435/91.53
TXT Involving a hydrolase (3.):
    Processes under subclass 91.5 wherein a hydrolase (3.) is involved in the
    preparation of the polynucleotide.

    (1)     Note.  While the systematic name always includes "hydrolase," the
    recommended name is in most cases formed by the name of the substrate plus
    the suffix "ase"  (e.g., nuclease, phosphatase, etc.).


CLS 435/92
TXT Having a fused ring containing a six-membered ring having two N-atoms in
    the same ring (e.g., purine based mononucleotides, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 89 wherein the nitrogen atoms are part of a purine
    or substituted purine ring.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 87, Note (1) for a definition of the term
    substituted.


CLS 435/93
TXT Mashing or wort making:

    Processes under subclass 72 wherein the product is mashed grain or wort
    which has been prepared by a biochemical reaction utilizing malt, or malt
    diastase, or a malt extract.

    (1)     Note.  Malt, malt diastase, and malt extract are considered to
    include a mixture of alpha- and beta-amylases.

    (2)     Note.  Diastase (as distinguished from malt diastase) is considered
    to be alpha-amylase.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95+,    for products other than mash or wort produced by malt, malt
    diastase, or malt extract.

    99+,    for producing compounds containing saccharide radials by diastase.

    201,    for the production of maltase.

    202,    for the production of diastase from micro-organisms.

    203,    for the production of diastase from a fungal source.

    204,    for the production of diastase from a  plant source such as barley
    malt.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    426,    Food or Edible Material: Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    particularly subclasses 16, 28+, and 64 for processes of producing mash or
    wort when combined with steps for producing an edible, e.g., a beverage and
    the product of such processes.


CLS 435/94
TXT Produced by the action of an isomerase (e.g., frutose by the action of
    xylose isomerase on glucose, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 17 wherein the product synthesized is an
    enzymatically isomerized polysaccharide or saccharide containing compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174,    for immobilized isomerase preparation.

    233     and 234, for isomerase.


CLS 435/95
TXT Produced by the action of a beta-amylase (e.g., maltose by the action of
    beta-amylase on amylose, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 72 wherein the product is produced by the
    successive hydrolysis of alpha-1, 4-glucan bonds in a polysaccharide from a
    terminal end.

    (1)     Note.  Malt and malt diastase are considered to include a mixture
    of alpha- and beta-amylases.  Products containing saccharide radicals
    (other than mash or wort) produced by malt, malt diastase, or malt extract
    are provided for here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174+,   for immobilized beta-amylase preparations.

    201,    for beta-amylase type enzymes.


CLS 435/96
TXT Produced by the action of an exo-1.4 alpha glucosidase (e.g., dextrose by
    the action of glucoamylase on starch, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 72 wherein the product synthesized is produced by
    the hydrolysis of alpha-1, 4-glucan bonds of saccharides or polysaccharides.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    for the production of dextrose by other methods.

    174,    for immobilized glucoamylase preparations.

    205,    for glucoamylase enzymes.


CLS 435/97
TXT Produced by the action of a glycosyl transferase (e.g., alpha, beta, or
    gamma-cyclodextrins by the action of glycosyl transferase on starch, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 72 wherein the product synthesized is produced by
    the direct transfer of a glycosyl moiety from one saccharide or
    polysaccharide to another, e.g., cyclo-dextrins, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174+,   for immobilized transferase preparations.

    193+,   for transferases.


CLS 435/98
TXT Produced by the action of an alpha-1, 6-glucosidase (e.g., amylose,
    debranched amylopectin by action of pullulanase, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 72 wherein the product is produced by the
    hydrolysis of alpha-1, 6-glucan bonds in polysaccharides.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174+,   for immobilized enzyme preparations which may be used in this
    process.

    210+,   for the enzyme which may catalyze this process.


CLS 435/99
TXT Produced by the action of a carbohydrase (e.g., maltose by the action of
    alpha amylase on starch, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 72 wherein the product synthesized is a saccharide
    or polysaccharide produced by the enzymatic hydrolysis of a polysaccharide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174,    for immobilized enzyme preparations which may catalyze this process.

    200,    for the enzyme which may catalyze this reaction.


CLS 435/100
TXT Disaccharide:

    Processes under subclass 72 wherein the product synthesized is a glycoside
    composed of only two glucan moieties.


CLS 435/101
TXT Polysaccharide of more than five saccharide radicals attached to each other
    by glycosidic bonds:

    Processes under subclass 72 wherein the product synthesized contains five
    or more saccharide moieties bonded together.


CLS 435/102
TXT Pullulan:

    Processes under subclass 101 wherein the polysaccharide is composed of
    glucose units which are joined predominantly by 1, 6-glucosidic bonds.


CLS 435/103
TXT Dextran:

    Processes under subclass 101 wherein the polysaccharide is composed of
    maltotriose units which are linked by 1, 6-glucosidic bonds.

    (1)     Note.  Dextrin and Dextrine are not variant spellings of "Dextran",
    instead they are respectively a starch hydrolysis product and a variant
    spelling of dextrin.


CLS 435/104
TXT Xanthan (i.e., xanthomonas-type heteropolysaccharides):

    Processes under subclass 101 wherein the polysaccharide is prepared through
    the cultivation of a species of Xanthomonas.


CLS 435/105
TXT Monosaccharide:

    Processes under subclass 72 wherein the product synthesized is a
    monosaccharide.


CLS 435/106
TXT Preparing alpha or beta amino acid or substituted amino acid or salts
    thereof:

    Processes under subclass 41 wherein the product synthesized is an orgnaic
    compound that contains both a basic amino group and an acidic carboxyl
    group where a primary or secondary amino group is directly bonded to the
    alpha or beta carbon.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes compounds such as pantothenic acid and
    amino acids that additionally contain heterocyclic groups.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass provides for the salt form as well as the acid
    form.


CLS 435/107
TXT Proline; hydroxyproline; histidine:

    Processes under subclass 106 wherein the product synthesized is an acid or
    salt form of alpha-2-pyrrolidine carboxylic acid or 4-hydroxy-2-pyrrolidine
    carboxylic acid or alpha-amino-4-imidazole propionic acid.


CLS 435/108
TXT Tryptophan; tyrosine; phenylalanine; 3, 4, dihydroxyphenylalanine:

    Processes under subclass 106 wherein the product synthesized is an acid or
    salt form of alpha-amino-beta-phenyl-propionic acid or
    p-hydroxyphenylaminoacetic acid or 2-amino-3-(3, 4-dihydroxyphenyl)
    propanoic acid or 1-alpha-aminoindole-3-propionic acid.


CLS 435/109
TXT Aspartic acid (asparaginic acid); asparagine:

    Processes under subclass 106 wherein the product synthesized is an acid or
    salt form of amino succinic acid or alpha-amino succinamic acid.


CLS 435/110
TXT Glutamic acid; glutamine:

    Processes under subclass 106 wherein the product synthesized is an acid or
    salt form of 2-amino pentanedioic acid or alpha-amino-glutaric acid or
    1-amino propane-1, 3-dicarboxylic acid or 2-amino glutaramic acid or
    glutamic acid 5-amide.


CLS 435/111
TXT Utilizing biotin or its derivatives:

    Processes under subclass 110 wherein biotin or biotin derivative is present
    in the production media.

    (1)     Note.  Biotin Derivatives include desthio-biotin,
    biotin-d-sulfoxide, biocytin.

    (2)     Note.  Molases and various carbohydrate and protein hydrolyzates
    provide biotin.


CLS 435/112
TXT Utilizing surfactant, fatty acids, or fatty acid esters (i.e., having seven
    or more carbon atoms):

    Processes under subclass 110 wherein a surfactant or a fatty acid or a
    fatty acid ester is present in the production media.

    (1)     Note.  A fatty acid or its ester is defined as containing seven or
    more carbon atoms in a single chain.


CLS 435/113
TXT Methionine; cysteine; cystine:

    Processes under subclass 106 wherein the product synthesized is an acid or
    salt form of 2-amino-4-(methyl thio) butyric acid or
    2-amino-3-mercaptopropanoic acid or 3, 3'-dithiobis (2-aminopropanoic acid).


CLS 435/114
TXT Citrulline; arginine; ornithine:

    Processes under subclass 106 wherein the product synthesized is an acid or
    salt form of alpha-amino-6-ureidovaleric acid or 1-amino-4-guanidovalenic
    acid or 2, 5 diaminopentaneic acid.


CLS 435/115
TXT Lysine; diaminopimelic acid; threonine; valine:

    Processes under subclass 106 wherein the product synthesized is an acid or
    salt form of 2, 6-diaminohexanoic acid or 2, 4 diamino-1,5-pentane
    dicarboxylic acid or 2-amino-3-hydroxy butanoic acid or 2-amino-3-methyl
    butanoic acid.


CLS 435/116
TXT Alanine; leucine; isoleucine; serine; homoserine:

    Processes under subclass 106 wherein the product synthesized is an acid or
    salt form of 2-aminopropanoic acid or 2-amino-4-methyl pentanoic acid or
    2-amino-3-methyl pentanoic acid or 2-amino-3-hydroxypropionic acid or
    2-amino-4-hydroxy butanoic acid.


CLS 435/117
TXT Preparing heterocyclic carbon compound having only O, N, S, Se, or Te as
    ring hetero atoms:

    Processes under subclass 41 wherein the product synthesized is a carbon
    compound which contains a ring composed of carbon and at least one element
    from the group consisting of nitrogen, sulfur, selenium, tellurium, or
    oxygen and no other atoms.

    (1)     Note.  Processes wherein the product synthesized is an acid
    anhydride or lactone, or lactam are properly classified herein.


CLS 435/118
TXT Containing two or more hetero rings:

    Processes under subclass 117 wherein the product synthesized contains at
    least two hetero rings.


CLS 435/119
TXT Containing at least two hetero rings bridged or fused among themselves or
    bridged or fused with a common carbocyclic ring system (e.g., rifamycin,
    etc.):

    Processes under subclass 118 wherein the product synthesized contains at
    least two hetero rings which are bridged or fused among themselves or
    bridged or fused with a common carbocyclic ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Ring systems containing two carbocyclic rings fused to a
    common heterocyclic ring where each of the carbocyclic rings share a hetero
    ring are included herein, e.g.,



    (2)     Note.  A common carbocyclic ring system may contain three or more
    carbon atoms and may be bridged or fused, e.g.,



    (3)     Note.  This subclass provides for compounds generally referred to
    as alkaloids.


CLS 435/120
TXT Nitrogen or oxygen hetero atom and at least one other diverse hetero ring
    atom in the same ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 wherein the product synthesized contains
    a hetero ring which contains at least two different hetero atoms, one of
    which is either nitrogen or oxygen.


CLS 435/121
TXT Nitrogen as only ring hetero atom:

    Processes under subclass 117 wherein the product synthesized contains a
    hetero ring having nitrogen as the only hetero atom.


CLS 435/122
TXT Containing six-membered hetero ring:
    Processes under subclass 117 wherein the N-containing hetero ring contains
    six-members.


CLS 435/123
TXT Oxygen as only ring hetero atom:

    Processes under subclass 117 wherein the product synthesized contains a
    hetero ring wherein oxygen is the only hetero atom.


CLS 435/124
TXT Containing a hetero ring of at least seven ring members (e.g., zearalenone,
    macrocyclic lactones, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 123 wherein the product synthesized contains an
    O-containing hetero ring of seven or more ring members.


CLS 435/125
TXT Containing six-membered hetero ring (e.g., fluorescein, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 123 wherein the O-containing hetero ring has only
    six members.


CLS 435/126
TXT Containing five-membered hetero ring (e.g., griseofulvin, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 123 wherein the O-containing hetero ring has five
    members.


CLS 435/127
TXT Preparing compound containing at least three carbocyclic rings:

    Subject matter under subclass 41 in which the product contains three
    carbocyclic rings.

    (1)     Note.  The rings need not be fused or contiguous.


CLS 435/128
TXT Preparing nitrogen-containing organic compound:

    Processes under subclass 41 wherein the product is an organic compound
    which contains nitrogen.


CLS 435/129
TXT Amide (e.g., chloramphenicol, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 128 wherein the product has the following
    structural group,



CLS 435/130
TXT Preparing sulfur-containing organic compound:

    Processes under subclass 41 wherein the product synthesized contains sulfur.


CLS 435/131
TXT Preparing organic compound containing a metal or atom other than H, N, C,
    O, or halogen:

    Processes under subclass 41 wherein the product contains an atom other than
    H, N, C, O, or halogen.


CLS 435/132
TXT Preparing oxygen-containing organic compound:

    Processes under subclass 41 wherein the product is an organic compound
    containing oxygen.


CLS 435/133
TXT Containing quinone nucleus (i.e., quinoid structure):

    Processes under subclass 132 wherein the product contains the following
    structure, i.e.,



CLS 435/134
TXT Fat; fatty oil; ester-type wax; higher fatty acid (i.e., having at least
    seven carbon atoms in an unbroken chain bound to a carboxyl group);
    oxidized oil or fat:

    Processes under subclass 132 wherein the product synthesized is a fat or
    fatty oil or ester-type wax or fatty acis, oxidized oil or fat.

    (1)     Note.  "Fats" and "fatty oils" are the glycerides of higher fatty
    acids having seven or more carbon atoms.

    (2)     Note.  "Higher fatty acid" is a monocarboxylic acid containing
    seven or more carbon atoms bonded to a carboxyl group, e.g., lauric,
    palmitic stearic, oleic, ricinoleic, linoleic, and behonolic acids.  Where
    there are several unbroken chains of carbon atoms bonded to the carboxyl
    group, one of the chains must contain seven or more carbon atoms.

    (3)     Note.  Ester-type waxes and esters of a higher fatty acid having
    seven or more carbon atoms and a monohydric alcohol.

    (4)     Note.  The conversion of fats, proteins, and carbohydrates to fatty
    acids is a step in the anaerobic digestion of sewage provided for in Class
    210, subclasses 2+.


CLS 435/135
TXT Carboxylic acid ester:

    Processes under subclass 132 wherein the
    product synthesized contains an ester group,


    i.e.,O-R wherein R=alkyl, aryl, alkenyl, alkynyl.


CLS 435/136
TXT Containing a carboxyl group:

    Processes under subclass 132 wherein the product synthesized contains a
    carboxylic acid

    functional group, i.e.,-CH which is either in the acid or salt form.


CLS 435/137
TXT Sugar acid having five or more carbon atoms (i.e., aldonic, keto-aldonic,
    or saccharic acids):

    Processes under subclass 136 wherein the product synthesized is a
    polyhydroxy acid having five or more carbon atoms.

    (1)     Note.  The processes of this subclass typically involve the
    oxidation of a carbohydrate and include the production of aldonic,
    keto-aldonic and saccharic acids.


CLS 435/138
TXT Alpha-ketogulonic acid (i.e., 2-ketogulonic acid):

    Processes under subclass 137 wherein the product synthesized is an acid or
    salt form of:



CLS 435/139
TXT Lactic acid:

    Processes under subclass 136 wherein the product synthesized is an acid or
    salt form of alpha-hydroxy propanoic acid.


CLS 435/140
TXT Acetic acid:

    Processes under subclass 136 wherein the product synthesized is ethanoic
    acid which by the nature of the process can not be readily used as a food
    product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclass 17 for fermentation of alcohol to produce vinegar.  The oxidizing
    of alcohol to produce acetic acid as a chemical compound is subject matter
    for Class 435.


CLS 435/141
TXT Propionic or butyric acid:

    Processes under subclass 136 wherein the product synthesized is an acid
    with the structure:



CLS 435/142
TXT Polycarboxylic acid:

    Processes under subclass 136 wherein the product synthesized contains two
    or more carboxylic acid groups.


CLS 435/143
TXT Having keto group (e.g., alpha-ketoglutaric acid, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 142 wherein the polycarboxylic acid synthesized
    contains a keto group.


CLS 435/144
TXT Tricarboxylic acid (e.g., citric acid, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 142 wherein the product synthesized contains three
    carboxylic acid groups.


CLS 435/145
TXT Dicarboxylic acid having four or less carbon atoms (e.g., fumaric, maleic,
    etc.): Processes under subclass 142 wherein the product synthesized
    contains two carboxylic acid groups and four or less carbon atoms.


CLS 435/146
TXT Hydroxy carboxylic acid:

    Processes under subclass 136 wherein the product synthesized contains one
    or more hydroxy groups.


CLS 435/147
TXT Containing carbonyl group:

    Processes under subclass 132 wherein the product synthesized contains a
    carbonyl group, i.e.,



    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for linear carbocyclic acid
    anhydrides such as acetic acid anhydride.


CLS 435/148
TXT Ketone:

    Processes under subclass 147 wherein the product synthesized contains a
    keto group, i.e.,



CLS 435/149
TXT Cyclopentanone or cyclopentadione containing compound:

    Processes under subclass 148 wherein the product synthesized is
    cyclopentanone or cyclopentadione or a substituted cyclopentanone or
    cyclopentadione.


CLS 435/150
TXT Acetone containing product:

    Processes under subclass 148 wherein the product synthesized contains
    acetone, i.e.,



    (1)     Note.  Molasses is not considered a grain or cereal material for
    purposes of this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Care should be taken with the word "mash" to determine if
    sugar, or grain or cereal material is intended.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass does not include dihydroxy acetone.


CLS 435/151
TXT Substrate contains grain or cereal material:

    Processes under subclass 150 wherein acetone is prepared by biochemical
    transformation of farinaceous material.

    (1)     Note.  Molasses is not considered a cereal or grain substrate.

    (2)     Note.  Care should be taken with the word "mash" to determine if
    sugar or grain-cereal is intended.


CLS 435/152
TXT Substrate contains protein as nitrogen source:

    Processes under subclass 150 wherein the production media contains a
    protein as the nitrogen source.


CLS 435/153
TXT Substrate contains inorganic nitrogen source:

    Processes under subclass 150 wherein the production media contains an
    inorganic nitrogen source.


CLS 435/154
TXT Substrate contains inorganic compound, other than water:

    Processes under subclass 150 wherein the production media contains an added
    inorganic compound other than water.


CLS 435/155
TXT Containing hydroxy group:

    Processes under subclass 132 wherein the product contains a hydroxyl group,
    i.e., R-OH.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, subclasses 97.5 and 124 for the
    treatment of source materials such as sulfite waste liquor or black liquor
    to derive a specific carbon compound, subclass 527 for the production of
    oxalic acids from waste sulfite liquor.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    for fermentation to produce beverage alcohol.  Class 426 also provides for
    methods of clarifying alcoholic beverages by fermentation.


CLS 435/156
TXT Aromatic:

    Processes under subclass 155 wherein the product synthesized contains at
    least one aryl ring.


CLS 435/157
TXT Acyclic:

    Processes under subclass 155 wherein the product synthesized is acyclic.


CLS 435/158
TXT Polyhydric:

    Processes under subclass 157 wherein the product synthesized contains two
    or more hydroxyl groups.


CLS 435/159
TXT Glycerol:

    Processes under subclass 158 wherein the product is 1, 2, 3, propanetriol.

    (1)     Note.  Glycerine is another name for glycerol.


CLS 435/160
TXT Butanol:

    Processes under subclass 157 wherein the product synthesized is
    2-methyl-2-propanol or 1-butanol or 2-methyl-1-propanol or 2-butanol.

    (1)     Note.  Butanol is typically produced as a product in fermentation
    process for producing acetone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150+,   for processes for producing acetone which also produces a butanol
    by-product.


CLS 435/161
TXT Ethanol:

    Processes under subclass 157 wherein the product synthesized is ethanol
    which is not directly suitable for food or beverage use.


CLS 435/162
TXT Multiple stages of fermentation; multiple types of micro-organisms or reuse
    of micro-organisms:

    Processes under subclass 161 wherein ethanol is prepared by (a) two or more
    distinct fermentation steps, or (b) by using micro-organisms of different
    species sequentially, or (c) by a process wherein the micro-organism is
    recycled and reused.


CLS 435/163
TXT Produced as by-product or from waste or from cellulosic material substrate:


    Processes under subclass 161 wherein ethanol produced as a by-product in a
    process for the production of another chemical species or is prepared by
    the biochemical conversion of materials containing cellulose or unrefined
    waste materials of another process.


CLS 435/164
TXT Substrate contains sulphite waste liquor or citrus waste:

    Processes under subclass 163 wherein ethanol is prepared by the biochemical
    conversion of waste sulfite liquor or citrus waste.

    (1)     Note.  Waste sulfite liquor is the residual material obtained after
    the sulfurous acid treatment of paper pulp.


CLS 435/165
TXT Substrate contains cellulosic material:

    Processes under subclass 163 wherein ethanol is prepared by the biochemical
    treatment of a cellulose containing material.


CLS 435/166
TXT Preparing hydrocarbon:

    Processes under subclass 41 wherein the product synthesized is a
    hydrocarbon.


CLS 435/167
TXT Only acyclic:

    Processes under subclass 166 wherein the only hydrocarbon product is
    acyclic.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is largely devoted to production of methane.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, especially subclass 197 for
    processes of producing a fuel gas by anerobic fermentation of sewage.

    71,     Chemistry:  Fertilizers, for processes whose primary intent is to
    make a product of that class which may incidentally produce a methane
    containing gas by-product.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 603 for fermentative
    processing of liquid which may result in the production of a methane
    containing gas.  The following criteria are determinative of placement in
    Class 210.

    (1)     Where water is the only disclosed liquid purified, the patent will
    be classified in Class 210.

    (2)     Where the disclosure includes water, mineral oils and/or other
    liquids, the patent will be classified:

    (a)     In Class 210 if all the claims are broad as to the liquid.

    (b)     In Class 210 if several species of liquid are claimed and one
    species includes waters.

    (c)     In the appropriate art class if some liquid other than water is the
    only liquid claimed (e.g., mineral oils in Clas 208; organic compounds in
    Class 206).  When the treatment of mineral oils and the treatment of other
    materials (other than water) are claimed the patent will be classified in
    Class 208.


CLS 435/168
TXT Preparing element or inorganic compound except carbon dioxide:

    Processes under subclass 41 wherein the product is an element or inorganic
    compound.

    (1)     Note.  The exclusion of carbon dioxide is intended to exclude
    carbon dioxide as a normal respiration product of micro-organisms.


CLS 435/169
TXT Using actinomycetales:

    Processes under subclass 41 wherein the product synthesized is prepared by
    actinomycetales.


CLS 435/170
TXT Using bacteria:

    Processes under subclass 41 wherein the product synthesized is prepared by
    bacteria.


CLS 435/171
TXT Using fungi:

    Processes under subclass 41 wherein the product synthesized is prepared by
    fungi.


CLS 435/172.1
TXT MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING:

    Processes under the class definition for producing a stable inheritable
    change in the genotype of an animal or plant cell or a micro-organism by
    artificially inducing a structural change in a gene or by the incorporation
    of genetic material from an outside source.

    (1)     Note.  An outside source may include chemically synthesized or
    modified genes.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes fused cells of the same or different
    species, such as the fusion of an animal or plant cell.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass provides for methods of modifying plasmids by
    chemical or biochemical processes, e.g., use of restriction enzymes, etc.

    (4)     Note.  This subclass will provide for processes of mutation which
    are processes directed to the production or selection of essentially random
    changes to the DNA of a micro-organism without the incorporation of
    exogenous DNA.

    (5)     Note.  The changes to the cellular DNA can be either spontaneous,
    caused by environmental factor or errors in DNA replication or induced by
    physical conditions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    935,    Genetic Engineering:  Recombinant DNA Technology, Hybrid or Fused
    Cell Technology, and Related Manipulations of Nucleic Acids, which provides
    a search collection for processes of altering the genetic structure of
    micro-organisms; genes and methods of modifying genes and their expression;
    vectors and methods of modifying vectors and methods of introducing DNA
    into a cell; micro-organisma, per se, which have had their generic sequence
    altered by recombinant DNA techniques or by cell fusion or by uptake or
    DNA; testing; separation techniques; apparatus; and methods of use of
    vectors or of the genetically engineered micro-organisms; methods of gene
    therapy or genetic modification of living organisms.


CLS 435/172.2
TXT Fused or hybrid cell formation:

    Processes under subclass 172.1 in which the cellular matter of two or more
    fusing partners is combined producing a cell which initially contains the
    genes of the fusing partners, or a cell is treated with a virus or oncogene
    to permit proliferation in long term culture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    935,    Genetic Engineering:  Recombinant DNA Technology, Hybrid or Fused
    Cell Technology, and Related Manipulations of Nucleic Acids, which provides
    a search collection for processes of altering the genetic structure of
    micro-organisms; genes and methods of modifying genes and their expression;
    vectors and methods of modifying vectors; methods of introducing DNA into a
    cell; micro-organisms, per se, which have had their genetic sequence
    altered by recombinant DNA techniques or by cell fusion or by uptake of
    DNA; testing; separation techniques; apparatus; and methods of use of
    vectors or of the genetically engineered micro-organisms; methods of gene
    therapy or genetic modification of living organisms.


CLS 435/172.3
TXT Recombination:

    Processes under 172.1 including the methods and materials of recombinant
    DNA technology.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    536,    Organic Compounds,  subclasses 23.1+ for fragments of RNA or DNA
    which could have utility as genes in recombinant processes, subclass 24.1
    for noncoding sequences (e.g., promoters, operators, etc.), and subclass
    24.33 for primers.

    935,    Genetic Engineering:  Recombinant DNA Technology, Hybrid or Fused
    Cell Technology, and Related Manipulations of Nucleic Acids, which provides
    a search collection for processes of altering the genetic structure of
    micro-organisms; genes and methods of modifying genes and their expression;
    vectors and methods of modifying vectors; methods of introducing DNA into a
    cell; micro-organisms, per se, which have had their genetic sequence
    altered by recombinant DNA techniques or by cell fusion or by uptake of
    DNA; testing; separation techniques; apparatus; and methods of use of
    vectors or of the genetically engineered micro-organisms; methods of gene
    therapy or genetic modification or living organisms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    320.1,  for vector, per se, e.g., plasmid, hybrid plasmid, cosmid, viral
    vector, bacteriophage vector, etc.


CLS 435/173.1
TXT TREATMENT OF MICRO-ORGANISMS OR ENZYMES WITH ELECTRICAL OR WAVE ENERGY
    (E.G., MAGNETISM, SONIC WAVES, ETC.):Processes under the class definition
    wherein a microorganism is subjected to electrical or wave energy either
    prior to or during propagation, or catalytically active enzymes are
    subjected to electrical or wave energy.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include the treatment of plant cells,
    tissues thereof, algae, or any micro-organism with light for the
    photosynthetic propagation thereof.  Such subject matter is provided for in
    Class 47 or in Class 435, subclasses 410+ for plant cells and tissues
    thereof, and 243+ for algae and other photosynthetic micro-organisms.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not include the use of electrical or wave
    energy for the purpose of sterilizing, etc.  Such subject matter is
    provided for in Class 422, subclasses 20 through 24.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass does not include the use of electrical or wave
    energy for the purpose of detecting or measuring micro-organisms or
    enzymes.  Such subject matter is provided for in Class 435, subclasses 4+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    283.1,  for subject matter including apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, for processes and apparatus
    involving electrical and wave energy effects upon chemical compositions,
    compounds, and elements not provided for elsewhere.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclass 701 for electrolytic treatment of
    biological material (e.g., sterilizing, etc.).


CLS 435/173.2
TXT Enzyme treated:
    Processes under subclass 173.1 wherein enzymes are subjected to electrical
    or wave energy thus affecting the catalytic activity and/or physical
    structure thereof.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include electrophoretic or
    electrofocusing processes for the separation and purification of enzymes.
    Such subject matter is provided for in Class 204, and in Class 435,
    subclasses 183+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8       through 29, for subject matter involving measuring and testing
    utilizing enzymes.

    174+,   for subject matter involving immobilization of enzymes.

    183+,   for subject matter involving enzyme and proenzyme compositions and
    other processes for preparing, activating, inhibiting, separating, or
    purifying enzyme or proenzyme compositions.

    817,    for subject matter involving enzyme electrodes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 777.5+ for electrolytic analysis or
    testing involving an enzyme or micro-organism (e.g., animal or plant cells,
    bacteria, virus, etc.).


CLS 435/173.3
TXT Modification of viruses (e.g., attenuation, etc.):
    Processes under subclass 173.1 in which viruses are modified utilizing
    electrical or wave energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for subject matter of measuring and testing utilizing a virus or
    bacteriophage.

    172.1+, for processes wherein the genetic material is altered.

    235.1+, for subject matter involving a virus or bacteriophage, particularly
    subclass 236 which involves other processes of inactivation or attenuation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, particularly subclass 492.1 for processes of
    irradiation of objects or materials.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting, and Body Treating Compositions, particularly
    subclasses 159.1+ for a process involving the step of immunizing an animal
    with a virus to produce a protective antiserum, followed by the step of
    obtaining the protective antiserum from the animal; subclasses 199.1,
    201.1, 202.1, and 204.1 for an immunologic composition containing a virus
    (e.g., vaccines, etc.); subclass 93.6 for compositions or products under
    the class definition which contain nongenetically modified whole, live
    viruses.  The mere use of the word vaccine, etc., is insufficient for
    placement in Class 424.

    935,    Genetic Engineering: Recombinant DNA Technology, Hybrid or Fused
    Cell Technology, and Related Manipulations of Nucleic Acids, particularly
    subclasses 22+ for methods of modifying viral vectors.


CLS 435/173.4
TXT Cell membrane or cell surface is target:
    Processes under subclass 173.1 wherein electrical or wave energy affects
    the membrane or surface of a micro-organism.


CLS 435/173.5
TXT Membrane permeability increased:
    Processes under subclass 173.4 wherein the permeability of a cell membrane
    is increased.


CLS 435/173.6
TXT Electroporation:
    Processes under subclass 173.5 wherein the permeability of a cell membrane
    is increased as a result of an applied electric current.

    (1)     Note.  The related process of electrofusion is provided for in
    Class 435, subclass 172.2.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172.1+, for processes, including electrofusion, wherein the genetic
    material of a cell is altered.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 450+ for
    electrophoretic or electro-osmotic processes, in general. Class 435
    provides for processes and apparatus using electrical or wave energy
    treatment of micro-organisms or enzymes when the treatment is solely
    disclosed for use with viable micro-organisms or catalytically active
    enzymes.

    935,    Genetic Engineering: Recombinant DNA Technology, Hybrid or Fused
    Cell Technology, and Related Manipulations of Nucleic Acids, particularly
    subclass 52 for processes of introducing a gene into a cell.


CLS 435/173.7
TXT Lytic effect produced (e.g., disruption of cell membrane for release of
    subcellular parts; e.g., nucleic acids, etc.):Processes under subclass
    173.4 wherein electrical or wave energy is utilized to disrupt a cell
    membrane (e.g., ultrasonic energy, etc.) for releasing the contents of the
    cell or for producing membrane fragments thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259,    for subject matter involving lysis of micro-organisms.


CLS 435/173.8
TXT Metabolism of micro-organism enhanced (e.g., growth enhancement or
    increased production of microbial product):Processes under subclass 173.1
    wherein the metabolic activity of a micro-organism is affected by
    electrical or wave energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235.1+, for subject matter involving additional processes of propagation of
    a virus or bacteriophage.

    243+,   for subject matter involving additional processes of propagation of
    bacteria, fungi, protozoa, or single cell algae.

    325+,   for processes of propagation, maintenance, etc. of animal cells.


    410+,   for processes of propagation, maintenance, etc. of plant cells.


CLS 435/173.9
TXT Concentration, separation, or purification of micro-organisms:Processes
    under subclass 173.1 wherein electrical or wave energy (e.g. magnetism) is
    utilized to concentrate, separate, or purify a micro-organism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235.1+, for subject matter involving other processes of purification of a
    virus or bacteriophage.

    243+,   for subject matter involving other processes of purification of
    bacteria, fungi, protozoa, or single cell algae.


CLS 435/174
TXT CARRIER-BOUND OR IMMOBILIZED ENZYME OR MICROBIAL CELL; CARRIER-BOUND OR
    IMMOBILIZED CELL; PREPARATION THEREOF:

    Subject matter under the class definition which is an artificially produced
    composition or complex or compound under the class definition containing
    microbial cell or enzyme or individual plant or animal cell which imparts
    to the enzyme or the micro-organism or the individual plant or animal cell
    the property of physical confinement or localization during a continuous
    biochemical process or the property of enhanced recoverability in a batch
    process for repeated future use and processes for preparing the same.

    (1)     Note.  Immobilization results from covalent bonding between an
    enzyme or micro-organism and the carrier or an ionic bonding between an
    enzyme or micro-organism and a carrier or sorption of an enzyme or
    micro-organism within a carrier, or entrapment of an enzyme or
    micro-organism within a carrier.

    (2)     Note.  A carrier material may be either water soluble or water
    insoluble.

    (3)     Note.  Reaction or ultra filtration cells, vials, or beakers which
    contain enzymes or micro-organisms are not considered to be immobilized
    complexes or compositions.

    (4)     Note.  Enzymes chemically or physically bonded to a water-insoluble
    matrix, enzymes contained within a polymer or gel, enzymes absorbed on a
    resin are examples of immobilized enzymes.

    (5)     Note.  Proenzymes are considered to be enzymes for the purpose of
    this subclass.

    (6)     Note.  When a carrier is composed of more than one material, the
    patent is placed in the subclass which corresponds to the material to which
    the enzyme is bound, e.g., a carrier which is a synthetic polymer coated
    metal is placed in subclass 177.

    (7)     Note.  The carrier material or the carrier material and a covalent
    bond forming agent impart to the enzyme or the microbial or plant or animal
    cell the property of physical confinement or localization during a
    continuous process or the property of enhanced recoverability in a batch
    process which it did not possess prior to treatment with the carrier
    material or carrier material and a covalent bonding agent.

    (8)     Note.  A microbial cell for purposes of this subclass includes
    bacteria, fungi (including yeast), actinomycetales, animal or plant cells,
    unicellular algae or protozoa.

    (9)     Note.  An enzyme conjugate, enzyme ligand, enzyme adduct for the
    purpose of this subclass are deemed to enhance enzyme stability.

    (10)    Note.  In documents where it is unclear whether an enzyme joined to
    a chemical moiety is an immobilized enzyme or is an enzyme conjugate or
    adduct, the following factors should be considered.

    A.      If the document states that the product is an enzyme conjugate,
    adduct or ligand bound enzyme placement is proper in subclass 188.

    B.      If the ratio of nonenzyme moiety to enzyme is in the range of
    0.01-100:1 placement would be indicated in subclass 188.  A ratio of 1-40
    nonenzyme moieties per enzyme indicates placement in subclass 188.

    C.      If the molecular weight of the nonenzyme moiety is less than about
    100,000 placement would be indicated in subclass 188.

    D.      If the intended use of the enzyme containing product is a reagent
    in competitive assay placement is indicated in subclass 188.  If the use of
    the product is as a catalyst in the preparation of chemical compounds with
    recoverability (i.e., insolubililty) an important consideration, placement
    as an immoblized enzyme is indicated in subclasses 174+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, for processes of making glass articles,
    particularly subclasses 447+ for making a resin coated glass fiber; and
    subclass 22 for making a porous glass article which may find utility as an
    immobilization agent.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, for protein containing coating
    or plastic compositions, particularly subclasses 4, 31.24, 31.53, 31.82,
    31.94, 124+, 645+, and indented subclasses.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    77+ for pore forming in combination with a laminating step.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 263+ and 660+ for
    processes and apparatus for ion exchange or sorption of components from a
    liquid; and subclasses 606 and 632 for a process of use of an immobilized
    enzyme or micro-organism to purify sewage.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, various subclasses for coenzymes or
    immobilized coenzymes; subclasses 112+ for proteins or polypeptides, per se.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 41+ for significant molding processes which include the step of
    pore forming in situ.

    362,    Illumination, for cells which are propagated fixed to a surface.

    424     and 514, Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions,
    especially Class 424 subclasses 19 and 31 for coated products which may
    contain a protein; Class 424 subclass 94.1+ for a composition containing an
    enzyme or coenzyme including immobilized forms; and Class 514, subclasses
    2+ for a composition containing a protein.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    appropriate subclasses, for edible protein compositions or products and
    related process involving the same.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 474.1+ for a
    nonstructural stock material product in the form of a composite web or
    sheet including a layer comprising protein, and other appropriately titled
    subclasses, e.g., subclasses 435 and 458; and subclasses 304.4+ for a stock
    material in the form of a composite web or sheet embodying a component
    which is porous or cellular.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, for resin containing a
    chemically combined protein or biologically active polypeptide which is
    other than an enzyme; see in particular, Class 525, subclases 8+ and 54.1;
    Class 526, subclass 238.1; and Class 527, subclasses 200+.

    521,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 25+ for an ion
    exchange resin and the processes of making or regenerating them; and
    subclasses 50+ for cellular or porous resinous bodies and the process of
    preparing them.


CLS 435/175
TXT Multi-enzyme system:

    Subject matter under subclass 174 wherein two or more functionally
    different enzymes are immobilized on the same support material.

    (1)     Note.  The use of a micro-organism as a carrier is excluded
    herefrom.

    (2)     Note.  Functionally different means possessing differing catalytic
    activities.


CLS 435/176
TXT Enzyme or microbial cell is immobilized on or in an inorganic carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 174 wherein the carrier is an inorganic
    compound or metal alloy.


CLS 435/177
TXT Enzyme or microbial cell is immobilized on or in an organic carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 174 wherein the support material is an
    organic compound.


CLS 435/178
TXT Carrier is carbohydrate:

    Subject Matter under subclass 177 wherein the support material is a
    carbohydrate.

    (1)     Note.  Derivatized starch, derivatized cellulose, and derivatized
    polysaccharides are carbohydrates within the meaning of this subclass.


CLS 435/179
TXT Carbohydrate is cellulose or derivative thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 178 wherein the carbohydrate is cellulose or
    a substituted cellulose.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of substituted cellulose are DEAE cellulose, etc.


CLS 435/180
TXT Carrier is synthetic polymer:

    Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein the support material is a linear
    or cross-linked polymer which is not naturally occurring.


CLS 435/181
TXT Attached to the carrier via a bridging agent:

    Subject matter under subclass 180 wherein the enzyme or microbial cell is
    bonded to the polymeric carrier through an intermediate compound which
    attaches to both the enzyme and the carrier.

    (1)     Note.  The formation of the immobilized enzyme or cell may be in a
    stagewise manner with a reaction between the carrier and bridging agent
    being completed before the enzyme is added or in a process in which the
    carrier, bridging agent, and enzyme are present simultaneously in which
    case some care should be exercised in  distinguishing the process of this
    subclass from mere entrapment.  In general, if three separate entities,
    i.e., enzyme and two different chemical species are present simultaneously
    bonding through a bridging agent should be presumed.

    (2)     Note.  A product or process classifiable in this subclass combines
    a polymeric carrier with a bridging agent to provide functional groups for
    enzyme attachment.  It should be noted that similar functional groups can
    be provided by formation of a polymeric carrier by copolymerization of
    monomers one or more of which contain the desired functional group for
    enzyme attachment and that such would be provided for in subclass 180.


CLS 435/182
TXT Enzyme or microbial cell is entrapped within the carrier (e.g., gel, hollow
    fibre):

    Subject matter under subclass 180 wherein the enzyme or microbial cell is
    physically trapped in a reticulated polymer structure.


CLS 435/183
TXT ENZYME (E.G., LIGASES (6.), ETC.); PROENZYMES, COMPOSITIONS THEREOF;
    PROCESS FOR PREPARING, ACTIVATING, INHIBITING, SEPARATING, OR PURIFYING
    ENZYMES:

    Enzymes, per se, compositions under the class definition containing
    enzymes, processes for synthesizing enzymes, and preparing enzyme
    compositions, processes for separating enzymes from a source material, or
    purifying enzymes or processes under the class definition for treating
    enzymes.

    (1)     Note.  Enzymes, for the purpose of this class, are defined as
    proteinaceous materials which cause a chemical change in a starting
    material without being consumed in the reaction with the remaining amount
    of enzyme generally, after the reaction, the same as originally present.

    (2)     Note.  Processes wherein a micro-organism is propagated and an
    enzyme recovered therefrom or processes wherein a micro-organism is
    cultivated in the presence of a compound or composition which induces or
    stimulates enzyme formation are included in this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  The chemical changes catalyzed by an enzyme include
    oxidation-reduction, transfer of methyl or phosphate groups from one
    molecule to the next, hydrolysis, nonhydrolytic bond cleavage,
    isomerization, bond formation in the presence of a nucleotide, etc.

    (4)     Note.  Enzymes conjugates, i.e., enzymes which are labeled with
    relatively small organic molecules compared to the enzyme, are included in
    this subclass.

    (5)     Note.  Processes for treating enzymes include but are not limited
    to processes for inactivating an enzyme, processes for enhancing enzyme
    activity, processes for forming granular or free-flowing enzyme
    compositions.

    (6)     Note.  Proenzymes or precursors of enzymes are classified with the
    related enzyme.

    (7)     Note.  The bracketed numerals following the titles in this and the
    indented subclasses refer to the nomenclature system recommended by the
    Commission on Bio-chemical Nomenclature on the Nomenclature and
    Classification of Enzymes.  The titles include the enzymes defined by the
    bracketed numerals but are not limited to the enzymes so classified.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclass 94.5
    for medicinal compositions containing a ligase.

    507,    Earth Boring, Well Treating, and Oil Field Chemistry, subclass 101
    for a composition which contains an enzyme and which is specific to earth
    boring and subclass 201 for a composition which contains an enzyme and
    which is specific to well treating.

    930,    Peptide or Protein Sequence, subclass 240 for enzyme or protein
    sequence..


CLS 435/184
TXT Enzyme inactivation by chemical treatment: Processes under subclass 183
    wherein the enzyme is contacted with an element or chemical compound to
    reduce its catalytic activity.

    (1)     Note.  Processes such as the treatment of an enzyme containing a
    sulfhydryl group in the active site with mercuric salts, etc., are included
    herein.

    (2)     Note.  Selective inactivation by chemical treatment to obtain a
    greater proportion of certain enzymes is found in this subclass.


CLS 435/185
TXT Malt:

    Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein the enzyme containing composition
    is green, partially dried, dried, kilned malt, or malt extract.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is intended to provided for documents which
    germinate grain to produce a mixture containing enzymes, i.e., malt rather
    than the use of grain as a substrate for  micro-organism growth, e.g.,
    ergot on rye grain, etc.  If the crude mixture is subjected to further
    refinement to obtain a specific enzyme, placement should be on the basis of
    the enzyme obtained.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, for processes of hydrolysis of
    carbohydrates which include the action of diastase only when the hydrolysis
    is followed by steps of concentration, purification, or treatment, such as
    crystallization to make a sugar or syrup.


CLS 435/186
TXT Pancreatin:

    Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein the product contains a mixture of
    amylopsin, trypsin and steapsin (lipase) obtained from a pancreas.


CLS 435/187
TXT Preparing granular- or free-flowing enzyme composition:

    Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein an enzyme is treated to produce a
    solid flowable product or to produce a product in the form of small
    discrete particles.


CLS 435/188
TXT Stabilizing an enzyme by forming a mixture, an adduct, or a composition, or
    formation of an adduct or enzyme conjugate:

    Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein (a) the enzyme is contacted with
    an extraneous material to impart to the enzyme a resistance to loss of
    activity, or (b) the enzyme is reacted with a nonenzymatic material to form
    a complex or a chemically modified enzymatic compound, e.g., conjugate,
    ligand, etc.

    (1)     Note.  An enzyme conjugate, enzyme ligand, enzyme adduct for the
    purpose of this subclass are deemed to enhance enzyme stability.

    (2)     Note.  In documents where it is unclear whether an enzyme joined to
    a chemical moiety is an immobilized enzyme or is an enzyme conjugate or
    adduct, the following factors should be considered.

    A.      If the document states that the product is an enzyme conjugate,
    adduct, or ligand bound enzyme, placement is proper in subclass 188.

    B.      If the ratio of non-enzyme moiety to enzyme is in the range of
    0.01-100:1 placement would be indicated in subclass 188.  A ratio of 1-40
    nonenzyme moieties per enzyme indicates placement in subclass 188.

    C.      If the molecular weight of the non-enzyme moiety is less than about
    100,000, placement would be indicated in subclass 188.

    D.      If the intended use of the enzyme containing product is a reagent
    in competitive assay, placement is indicated in subclass 188.  If the use
    of the product is as a catalyst in the preparation of chemical compounds
    with recoverability (i.e., insolubility) an important consideration,
    placement as an immobililzed enzyme is indicated in subclasses 174+.


CLS 435/188.5
TXT Catalytic antibody:

    Subject matter under subclass 183 involving an antibody that functions
    catalytically in a chemical reaction.

    (1)     Note.  Synonym is abzyme, etc.


CLS 435/189
TXT Oxidoreductase (1. ) (e.g., luciferase):

    Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein the enzyme catalyzes an
    oxidation-reduction reaction between a donor and aceptor,

    e.g., AH2+B=A+BH2, etc.

    (1)     Note.  An oxidation-reduction reaction for the purposes of this
    classification involves the transfer of oxygen, hydrogen, or electrons from
    a donor to an acceptor.

    (2)     Note.  A water molecule is not considered to be an acceptor or a
    donor.

    (3)     Note.  Oxidoreductases which catalyze a reaction between a donor
    and acceptor are different portions of the same molecule, i.e., an
    intramolecular oxidoreductase, are considered to be isomerases and are
    excluded herefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233+,   for isomerases which are oxidoreductases which catalyze a reaction
    between a donor and acceptor on the same molecule.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclass 94.4
    for medicinal compositions containing oxidoreductases.


CLS 435/190
TXT Acting on CHOH group as donor; e.g., glucose oxidase, lactate dehydrogenase
    (1.1):

    Subject matter under subclass 189 wherein the donor is a compound
    containing a hydroxyl group, i.e., -C-OH.


CLS 435/191
TXT Acting on nitrogen-containing compound as donor (1.2, 1.5, 1.7):

    Subject matter under subclass 189 wherein the donor is a nitrogen compound.


CLS 435/192
TXT Acting on hydrogen peroxide as acceptor (1.11):

    Subject matter under subclass 189 wherein the acceptor is hydrogen peroxide.


CLS 435/193
TXT Transferase other than ribonuclease (2.):

    Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein the enzyme catalyzes the transfer
    of a functional group from one molecule to another, e.g., AR + BBR + A, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Elements, e.g., hydrogen, oxygen, etc., electrons, or water,
    per se, are not considered for the purposes of this subclass to be a
    functional group.

    (2)     Note.  Functional groups include but are not limited to methyl,
    hydroxyl methyl, formyl, carboxyl, carbamoyl, amidino, acyl, amino acyl,
    hexosyl, pentosyl, glycosyl, amino, oximino, phosphate, sulfur, sulpho, etc.

    (3)     Note.  Transaminases, transacetylases, and kinases that transfer
    phosphate from a nucleoside dior triphosphate to an acceptor are examples
    of transferases.

    (4)     Note.  Ribonuclease is excluded herefrom.

    (5)     Note.  A transferase which catalyzes the cleavage of a functional
    group from one part of a molecule and its transfer to another part of the
    same molecule, i.e., an intramolecular transferase, is considered an
    isomerase and is excluded herefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199,    for ribonucleases.

    233,    for transferases which catalyze the cleavage of a functional group
    from one part of a molecule and the transfer to another part of the same
    molecule.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclass 94.5
    for medicinal compositions containing transferases.


CLS 435/194
TXT Transferring phosphorus containing group; e.g., kineases, etc., (2.7):

    Subject matter under subclass 193 wherein the functional group transferred
    contains phosophorus.


CLS 435/195
TXT Hydrolase (3.):

    Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein the enzyme catalyzes the
    followingreaction; AB + H2O  AOH + BH.

    (1)     Note.  The compounds hydrolyzed are usually carboxylic esters,
    thiolesters, phosphoric esters, sulfuric esters, glycosides, ethers,
    peptides, amides, amidines, nitriles, acid anhydrides, organis halides, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Peptidases, esterases, glycosidases, and phosphatases are
    examples of hydrolases.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclass for
    medicinal compositions containing a hydrolase.


CLS 435/196
TXT Acting on ester bond (3.1):

    Subject matter under subclass 195 wherein the enzyme catalyzes the
    hydrolysis of an ester bond.


CLS 435/197
TXT Carboxylic ester hydrolase (3.1.1):

    Subject matter under subclass 196 wherein the ester bond which is
    hydrolyzed was formed by

     a carboxylic acid and an alcohol, i.e., OR.


CLS 435/198
TXT Triglyceride splitting; e.g., lipase, etc. (3.1.1.3):

    Subject matter under subclass 197 wherein the enzyme catalyzes the
    hydrolysis of the ester bond in triglyceride fats.


CLS 435/199
TXT Ribonuclease (3.1.4):

    Subject matter under subclass 196 wherein the enzymes are phosphoric
    diester hydrolases that act on nucleotides and nucleic acids.


CLS 435/200
TXT Acting on glycosyl compound (3.2):

    Subject matter under subclass 195 wherein the enzyme catalyzes the
    hydrolysis of O-glycosyl bonds or N-glycosyl bonds or S-glycosyl bonds.

    (1)     Note.  Enzymes which hydrolyze mucin are classifiable in this
    subclass.


CLS 435/201
TXT Acting on alpha-1, 4-glucosidic bond; e.g., hyaluronidase, invertase,
    amylase, etc., (some 3.2.1):

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the enzyme catalyzes the
    hydrolysis of an alpha-1, 4-glucosidic bond.

    (1)     Note.  Amylase from Bacillus macerans characterized by its ability
    to degrade starch in part to crystalline nonreducing substances known as
    Schardinger dextrins is included in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  In the absence of a clear showing to the contrary the
    recitation of "amylase" is presumed to mean alpha-amylase.


CLS 435/202
TXT Alpha-amylase, microbial source:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the source of alpha-1,
    4-glucano-4-glucanohydrolase obtained is a micro-organism.

    (1)     Note.  In the absence of a clear showing to the contrary, a
    recitation of "amylase" is presumptively alpha-amylase.


CLS 435/203
TXT Fungal source:

    Subject matter under subclass 202 wherein the source of alpha-1,
    4-glucan-4- glucanohydrolase is a fungi.

    (1)     Note.  Takediastase, koji, and taka-koji are classifiable in this
    subclass.


CLS 435/204
TXT Alpha-amylase, plant source (3.2.1.1):

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the source of alpha-1,
    4-glucan-4- glucanohydrolase is a nonmicrobial plant.

    (1)     Note.  An alpha-1, 4-glucan-4- glucohydrolace is an enzyme that
    catalyzes in a random fashion the hydrolysis of the alpha-1, 4-glucan bonds
    in carbohyrates that contain three or more alpha-1, 4-linked-D- glucose
    units and does not hydrolyze alpha-1, 6-bonds connecting D-glucose units.

    (2)     Note.  In the absence of a clear showing to the contrary, a
    recitation of amylase is presumptively alpha-amylase.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205,    for hydrolases capable of hydrolyzing both alpha-1,4 and and
    alpha-1,6 glucan bonds.


CLS 435/205
TXT Glucomylase (3.2.1.3):

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the enzyme obtained is an
    alpha-1, 4-glucanglucohydrolase.

    (1)     Note.  Alpha-1, 4-glucanglucohydrolase for the purpose of this
    subclass is defined as an enzyme which hydrolyzes alpha-1,4-glucan bonds
    and alpha-1,6-glucan bonds in carbohydrates removing successive glucose
    units from the ends of carbohydrate chains.


CLS 435/206
TXT Acting on beta-1, 4 link between N-acetylmuramic acid and 2-acetylamino
    2-deoxy-D-glucose (e.g., lysozyme, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the enzyme hydrolyzes a beta-1,4
    glycoside bond between N-acetylmuramic acid and 2-acetyl amino
    2-deoxy-D-glucose moieties.

    (1)     Note.  The hydrolysis of this subclass is usually of a
    mucopolysaccharide, muco-polypeptide, or chitin.

    (2)     Note.  Lysozyme is an example of an enzyme appropriate for this
    subclass.

    (3)     Note.  Cell lytic, bacteriolytic, lytic enzymes are presumptively
    included in this subclass unless the document indicates that the lysis
    (hydrolysis) is not of the bond specified.


CLS 435/207
TXT Acting on beta-galatose-glycoside bond (e.g., beta-galactosidase, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the enzyme catalyzes the
    hydrolysis of beta-galactose-glycoside bonds.


CLS 435/208
TXT Acting on alpha-galatose-glycoside bond (e.g., alpha-galactosidase, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the enzyme catalyzes the
    hydrolysis of alpha-galactose-glycoside bonds.


CLS 435/209
TXT Acting on beta-1,4-glucosidic bond (e.g., cellulase, etc.(3.2.1.4)):

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the enzyme catalyzes the
    hydrolysis of beta-1, 4-glucan bonds in polysaccharides.


CLS 435/210
TXT Acting on alpha-1,6-glucosidic bond (e.g., isoamylase, pullulanase, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the enzyme catalyzes the
    hydrolysis of an alpha-1,6-glucosidic bonds of a polysaccharide.

    (1)     Note.  Dextranase and isoamylase are examples of enzymes
    appropriate for this subclass.


CLS 435/211
TXT Dextranase (3.2.1.11):

    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein the enzyme is
    alpha-1,6-glucan-6-glucanohydrolase.

    (1)     Note.  Alpha-1,6-glucan-6- glucanohydrolase is defined as an enzyme
    which hydrolizes dextran to oligosaccharides of various lengths and upon
    complete hydrolysis of dextran yields isomaltose and trace amounts of
    glucose.


CLS 435/212
TXT Acting on peptide bond (e.g., thromboplastin, leucine amino-peptidase, etc.
    (3.4)):

    Subject matter under subclass 195 wherein the enzyme catalyzes the
    hydrolysis of amide bonds in proteins or peptides.

    (1)     Note.  Exopeptidases (peptidases which hydrolyze single amino acids
    from the terminus of peptide chains) and   enzymes having both exo- and
    endo-peptidase-activities are examples of enzymes for this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Where the peptide hydrolase activity is unclear or
    undisclosed and not ascertainable the activity is presumptively that of an
    endopeptidase.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227,    for enzymes which hydrolyze the amide bond in compounds other than
    proteins or peptides.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclass for
    medicinal compositions containing a hydrolase.


CLS 435/213
TXT Trypsin; chymotrypsin:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 wherein the enzyme catalyse the
    hydrolysis of the amide bond connecting the carboxyl group of
    alpha-arginine and alpha-lysine or an aromatic alpha-amino acid with
    another amino acid or peptide.


CLS 435/214
TXT Thrombin:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 wherein the enzyme catalyzes the
    hydrolysis of fibrinogen to fibrin.


CLS 435/215
TXT Urokinase:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 wherein the source of the enzyme which
    converts plasminogen to plasmin is mammalian blood or urine.


CLS 435/216
TXT Streptokinase:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 wherein the source of the enzyme which
    catalyzes the hydrolysis of amide bonds and converts plasminogen to plasmin
    in hemolytic streptococci.


CLS 435/217
TXT Plasmin (i.e., fibrinolysin):

    Subject matter under subclass 212 wherein the enzyme catalyzes the
    hydrolysis of amide bonds which connect alpha-arginine or alpha-lysine to
    another amino acid or peptide and converts fibrin to water soluble products.


CLS 435/218
TXT Elastase:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 wherein the enzyme catalyzes the
    hydrolysis of amide bonds connecting a neutral amino acid to another amino
    acid or peptide.


CLS 435/219
TXT Proteinase:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 wherein the enzyme catalyzes the
    hydrolysis of amide bonds within a polypeptide chain, i.e., the amide bonds
    of nonterminal amino acids.

    (1)     Note.  Endopeptidases are examples of enzymes for this subclass,
    e.g., ficin, bromelin, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Where the peptide hydrolase activity is unclear (e.g., if it
    can not be determined whether exopeptidase oendopeptidase activity is
    involved), enzyme activity within the means of this subclass is presumed.

    (3)     Note.  Exopeptidase and enzymes having both exo- and endo-peptidase
    activity are to be found in subclass 212.


CLS 435/220
TXT Derived from bacteria:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 wherein the source of the enzyme is a
    bacteria.


CLS 435/221
TXT Bacteria is bacillus:

    Subject matter under the subclass 220 wherein the bacteria is a species of
    bacillus.


CLS 435/222
TXT Bacillus subtilus or bacillus lichenoformis:

    Subject matter under subclass 221 wherein the species of bacillus is
    Bacillus subtilus or Bacillus lichenofomis.


CLS 435/223
TXT Derived from fungi:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 wherein the source of the enzyme is fungi.


CLS 435/224
TXT From yeast:

    Subject matter under subclass 223 wherein the source of the enzyme is yeast.


CLS 435/225
TXT From aspergillus:

    Subject matter under subclass 223 wherein the fungi is a species of
    aspergillus.


CLS 435/226
TXT Derived from animal tissue (e.g., rennin, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 219 wherein the source of the enzyme is
    animal tissue, glands, etc.


CLS 435/227
TXT Acting on carbon to nitrogen bond other than peptide bond (3.5):

    Subject matter under subclass 195 wherein the enzyme catalyzes the
    hydrolysis of a carbon-nitrogen bond.


CLS 435/228
TXT Acting on a linear amide linkage in linear amide:

    Subject matter under subclass 227 wherein the enzyme catalyzes the
    hydrolysis of a linear amide bond which is not part of a cyclic ring.

    (1)     Note.  Acylases, such as cephalosporin amidase, which can also act
    as deacylases by hydrolysis of a linear amide bond are included in this
    subclass.


CLS 435/229
TXT Asparaginase:

    Subject matter under subclass 228 wherein the enzyme catalyzes the
    hydrolysis of alpha-asparagine forming alpha-aspartate and ammonia.


CLS 435/230
TXT Penicillin amidase:

    Subject matter under subclass 228 wherein the enzyme catalyzes the
    hydrolysis of pencillin forming a carboxylic acid anion and penicin.

    (1)     Note.  Penicillin amidase (acylase) also acts in the reverse
    direction producing penicillins from 6-aminopenicillanic acid and a
    appropriate side chain.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228,    for acylases and amidases which attack the 7-position in
    cephalosporins.


CLS 435/231
TXT Acting on amide linkage in cyclic amides (e.g., penicillinase, etc.
    (3.5.2)):

    Subject matter under subclass 227 wherein the enzyme catalyzes the
    hydrolysis of an amide bond which is part of a ring structure.


CLS 435/232
TXT Lyase (4. ):

    Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein the enzyme catalyzes the
    nonhydrolytic cleavage of bonds, e.g., AB  A + B, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Decarboxylases, aldolases, deaminases are examples of
    subject matter included in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclass 94.5
    for medicinal compositions containing lyases.


CLS 435/233
TXT Isomerase (5. ):

    Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein the enzyme catalyzes an
    isomerization reaction, e.g., AB  BA.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes racemases, epimerases, cis-trans
    isomerases, intramolecular oxide reductases, intrmolecular transferases,
    etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclass 94.5
    for medicinal compositions containing an isomerase.


CLS 435/234
TXT Glucose isomerase:

    Subject matter under subclass 233 wherein the enzyme catalyzes the
    conversion of xylose to xylulose or glucose to fructose or glucose -6-
    phosphate to fructose -6- phosphate.


CLS 435/235.1
TXT VIRUS OR BACTERIOPHAGE, EXCEPT FOR VIRAL VECTOR OR BACTERIOPHAGE VECTOR;
    COMPOSITION THEREOF; PREPARATION OR PURIFICATION THEREOF; PRODUCTION OF
    VIRAL SUBUNITS; MEDIA FOR PROPAGATING:

    Subject matter under the class definition excluding viral and
    bacteria-phage vectors, but including a virus or bacteriophage which is a
    micro-organism that (a) consists of a protein shell around a nucleic acid
    core of either ribonucleic acid or deoxyribonucleic acid, and (b) is
    capable of independently entering a host micro-organism, and (c) requires a
    host micro-organism, having both ribonucleic acid and deoxyribonucleic
    acid, to replicate, compositions thereof under the class definition not
    elsewhere provided for, processes of preparation or propagation, media for
    propagating, processes of purifying the micro-organism and processes of
    producing viral subunits.

    (1)     Note.  Propagation is limited to processes concerned with the
    multiplication of viruses and not with processes concerned with the
    artificial alteration of genetic material involving changes in the genotype
    of the virus.  Such processes of artificial alteration of genetic material
    are intended for this class, subclasses 172.1+.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass provides for processes involving viruses of
    all types, i.e., animal, plant, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for process of maintaining tissue in a viable state or media
    therefor.

    2,      for process of maintaining blood or sperm in a physiologically
    active state.

    172.1+, for processes in which the genetic material of a micro-organism is
    altered.

    284+,   for tissue or virus culture apparatus.

    320.1,  for vector, e.g., viral, phage, etc., where vector is intended to
    encompass a virus or phage which is used in the transformation or
    transfection of a cell.  Transformation is the acquisition of new genetic
    material by incorporation of exogenous DNA and transfection is the transfer
    of genetic information to a cell using isolated DNA or RNA.

    325+,   for animal cells, per se, and culture processes therefore.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses
    159.1+ for a process involving the step of immunizing an animal with a
    virus to produce a protective antiserum, followed by the step of obtaining
    the protective antiserum from the animal.  See subclasses 199.1, 201.1,
    202.1, and 204.1+ for an immunogenic composition that contains a virus,
    which composition induces protective immunity.  Where there is doubt as to
    whether or not virus propagation takes place in preparing a vaccine, the
    process should be classified in Class 424 in the subclass providing for the
    corresponding viral vaccine.  The mere use of the word vaccine is
    insufficient basis for placement in Class 424.  See subclass 93.6, for
    compositions under the class definition containing a whole live virus.

    930,    Peptide or Protein Sequence, subclasses 220-224 for sequence of
    peptides or protein homologous to a virus.

    935     Cross-Reference Art Collection, Genetic Engineering:  Recombinant
    DNA Technology, Hybrid or Fused Cell Technology, and Related Manipulations
    of Nucleic Acids, subclasses 25 and 32 for plant and animal virus vectors
    and subclass 31 for bacteriophage vectors.


CLS 435/236
TXT Inactivation or attenuation; producing viral subunits:

    Subject matter under subclass 235.1 in which the virulence of the virus is
    decreased or the virus is reduced to its component parts.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes methods of attenuation by physical
    means, e.g., freezing, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Viral subunits include the virus protein coat, viral nucleic
    acid and viral enzymes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses
    204.1+ for immunologic compositions prepared by the irradiation of a virus.


CLS 435/237
TXT By serial passage of virus:

    Subject matter under subclass 236 which involves attenuation of a virus by
    serial passage by transferring a virus containing body fluid through a
    series of animals or transfer of supernatant culture fluid through a series
    of cultures.


CLS 435/238
TXT By chemical treatment:

    Subject matter under subclass 236 which involves attenuation of a virus by
    chemical means.


CLS 435/239
TXT Recovery or purification:

    Subject matter under subclass 235.1 which involves the purification or
    recovery of a virus in a purified or uncontaminated state.


CLS 435/242
TXT SPORE FORMING OR ISOLATING PROCESS:

    Processes under the class definition of inducing the formation of spores or
    their recovery.


CLS 435/243
TXT MICRO-ORGANISM, PER SE; E.G., PROTOZOA, ETC., COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROCESS
    OF PROPAGATING, MAINTAINING, OR PRESERVING MICRO-ORGANISMS OR COMPOSITIONS
    THEREOF; PROCESS OF PREPARING OR ISOLATING A COMPOSITION CONTAINING A
    MICRO-ORGANISM; CULTURE MEDIA THEREFOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition including micro-organisms,
    compositions containing, processes under the class definition for
    propagating, processes under the class definition for preserving or
    maintaining, processes under the class definition for isolating, processes
    under the class definition for preparing compositions containing and,
    compositions under the class definition for use in propagation of
    micro-organisms.

    (1)     Note.  Micro-organisms for the purpose of this subclass include
    actinomycetales, unicellular algae, bacteria, fungi (yeast and molds), and
    protozoa.  virus propagation is provided for in subclass 235 and animal or
    plant cell cultivation in subclasses 410+.

    (2)     Note.  The mere propagation of a micro-organism to produce a
    recoverable chemical product is excluded herefrom.

    (2)     Note.  Subcellular parts of a micro-organism are not appropriate
    for this and the indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29+,    for measuring or testing processes which involve viable
    micro-organisms and the use of selective media to identify a particular
    micro-organism.

    41+,    for propagation processes which produce a recoverable chemical
    product.

    42,     for the symbiotic propagation of genetically dissimilar
    micro-organisms to produce a product.

    173.1+, for the use of magnetic or wave energy to enhance mictrobial growth
    or product production.

    283.1+, for apparatus used in the cultivation, propagation, or innoculation
    of micro-organisms.

    317.1,  for subcellular parts of micro-organisms such as organelles.

    320.1,  for vector, e.g., plasmid, cosmid, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    71,     Chemistry:  Fertilizers, appropriate subclasses and in particularly
    subclasses 6+ for a fertilizer containing a micro-organism.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses for a composition of that class and in particular, subclasses
    93.1+ which may contain a micro-organism.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    appropriate subclasses for a product containing a micro-organism and in
    particularly subclasses 7+, 61+, 531+, 656, and 800+.

    504,    Plant Protecting and Regulating Compositions, subclass 117 for a
    plant regulator composition containing a micro-organism.

     507,   Earth Boring, Well Treating, and Oil Field Chemistry, subclass 101
    for a composition which contains a living micro-organism and which is
    specific to earth boring and subclass 201 for a composition which contains
    a living micro-organism and which is specific to well treating.


CLS 435/244
TXT Chemical stimulation of growth or activity by addition of chemical compound
    which is not an essential growth factor; stimulation of growth by removal
    of a chemical compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein the growth rate of a
    micro-organism or its metabolic activity is stimulated or enhanced by the
    addition or removal of a particular element or compound which is not
    required for the micro-organism's growth or the control of the pH of the
    propagation media.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41+,    for processes in which the synthesis of compounds is enhanced by
    methods including the addition of stimulants, etc., to the culture media.

    173,    for the use of magnetic or wave energy to alter microbial growth or
    activity.


CLS 435/245
TXT Adaptation or attenuation of cells:

    Processes under subclass 243 wherein the virulence of a micro-organism is
    reduced or a micro-organism's ability to propagate on a given substrate is
    increased or growth requirements are altered by a series of sequential
    cultivation steps.

    (1)     Note.  The dividing line between adaptation and mutation is that an
    adapted micro-organism will not retain its ability to flourish in a hostile
    media when cultured in a normal growth media and returned to the hostile
    media.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172,    for mutation and genetic engineering.


CLS 435/246
TXT Foam culture:

    Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein media of the process is in the
    form of a foam.


CLS 435/247
TXT Utilizing media containing lower alkanols (i.e., having one to six carbon
    atoms):

    Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein a micro-organism is propagated on
    a media containing an alkanol having six or less carbon atoms or the media,
    per se.


CLS 435/248
TXT Utilizing media containing hydrocarbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein the micro-organism is propagated
    on a media containing a hydrocarbon or the media, per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281,    for processes of growing micro-organisms on petroleum oil
    containing media.

    282,    for processes in which micro-organisms are grown in a petroleum oil
    to remove sulfur.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    426,    Foods or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclass 62 for growing yeast on a hydrocarbon feed-stock which is claimed
    as edible yeast.


CLS 435/249
TXT Aliphatic:

    Subject matter under subclass 248 wherein the hydrocarbon is aliphatic.


CLS 435/250
TXT Having five or less carbon atoms:

    Subject matter under subclass 249 wherein the aliphatic hydrocarbon
    contains five or less carbon atoms.


CLS 435/251
TXT Utilizing media containing waste sulphite liquor:

    Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein the media contains waste liquid
    from the sulfurous acid treatment of cellulose containing material, e.g.,
    paper pulp, etc.


CLS 435/252
TXT Utilizing media containing cellulose or hydrolysates thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein the micro-organism is propagated
    on a media which contains cellulose or cellulose hydrolysates or the media,
    per se.

    (1)     Note.  Media containing only glucose prepared by the hydrolysis of
    cellulose are excluded herefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252.1+, 254+ and 257, for a media for bacteria or yeast, or fungi, or
    protozoa or unicellular algae which contains glucose.


CLS 435/252.1
TXT Bacteria or actinomycetales; media therefor:

    Subject matter under subclass 243 including micro-organisms which are
    bacteria or actinomycetales, media for the propagation or maintenance of
    bacteria or actinomycetales, compositions containing, processes for
    propagating or maintaining, and processes for preparing media for and
    compositions containing bacteria or actinomycetales.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    930,    Peptide or Protein Sequence, subclasses 220-224 for sequence of
    peptides or protein homologous to a virus.


CLS 435/252.2
TXT Rhizobium or agrobacterium:

    Subject matter under subclass 252.1 wherein the micro-organisms is a
    species of Rhizobium or Agrobacterium.

     (1)    Note.  These micro-organisms may be wild-type, mutated,
    transformed, etc.


CLS 435/252.3
TXT Transformants (e.g., recombinant DNA or vector or foreign or exogenous gene
    containing, fused bacteria, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 252.1 wherein the genotype of the
    micro-organism is a product of recombination or transformation with a
    vector or foreign or exogenous gene, or the result of bacterial cell
    fusion, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Products of bacterial conjugation and natural or spontaneous
    recombination events are not included in this subclass.  See subclasses
    252.1 and 252.4+ which contain nontransformant bacteria, for such products.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41+,    for methods of using a transformant to produce a desired compound.

    172.2   and 172.3, for processes of producing the micro-organisms of
    subclass 252.3.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    935,    Genetic Engineering:  Recombinant DNA Technology Hybrid or Fused
    Cell Technology, and Related Manipulations of Nucleic Acids, which provides
    a search collection for processes of altering the genetic structure of
    micro-organisms; genes and methods of modifying genes and their expression;
    vectors and methods of modifying vectors; methods of introducing DNA into a
    cell; micro-organisms, per se, which have had their genetic sequence
    altered by recombinant DNA techniques or by cell fusion or by uptake of
    DNA; testing; separation techniques; apparatus; and methods of use of
    vectors or of the  genetically engineered micro-organisms; methods of gene
    therapy or genetic modification of living organisms.


CLS 435/252.31
TXT Bacillus (e.g., B. subtilis, B. thuringiensis, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 252.3 wherein the altered micro-organism is a
    species of Bacillus.


CLS 435/252.32
TXT Brevibacterium or corynebacterium:

    Subject matter under subclass 252.3 wherein the altered micro-organism is a
    species of Brevibacterium or Corynebacterium.


CLS 435/252.33
TXT Escherichia (e.g., E. coli, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 252.3 wherein the altered micro-organism is a
    species of Escherichia.


CLS 435/252.34
TXT Pseudomonas:

    Subject matter under subclass 252.3 wherein the altered micro-organism is a
    species of Pseudomonas.


CLS 435/252.35
TXT Streptomyces:

    Subject matter under subclass 252.3 wherein the altered micro-organism is a
    species of streptomyces.


CLS 435/252.4
TXT Mixed culture:

    Subject matter under subclass 252.1 wherein the bacteria are in a mixed
    culture of at least two different genera of micro-organisms one of which is
    a bacteria.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    71,     Chemistry:  Fertilizers, subclass 6 for fertilizer compositions
    containing micro-organisms.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products
    appropriate subclasses, for mixed cultures solely disclosed or claimed as
    edible or to be used in the preparation of an edible material.


CLS 435/252.5
TXT Bacillus (e.g., B. subtilis, B. thuringiensis, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 252.1 wherein the micro-organism is a species
    of Bacillus.


CLS 435/252.6
TXT Actinoplanes:

    Subject matter under subclass 252.1 wherein the micro-organism is a species
    of Actinoplanes.


CLS 435/252.7
TXT Clostridium:

    Subject matter under subclass 252.1 wherein the micro-organism is a species
    of Clostridium.


CLS 435/252.8
TXT Escherichia (e.g., E. coli, etc.) or salmonella:

    Subject matter under subclass 252.1 wherein the micro-organism is a species
    of Escherichia or Salmonella.


CLS 435/252.9
TXT Lactobacillus, pediococcus, or leuconostoc:

    Subject matter under subclass 252.1 wherein the micro-organism is a species
    of Lactobacillus, Pediococcus, or Leuconostoc.


CLS 435/253.1
TXT Mycobacterium:

    Subject matter under subclass 252.1 wherein the micro-organism is a species
    of Mycobacterium.


CLS 435/253.2
TXT Nocardia:

    Subject matter under subclass 252.1 wherein the micro-organism is a species
    of Nocardia.


CLS 435/253.3
TXT Pseudomonas:

    Subject matter under subclass 252.1 wherein the micro-organism is a species
    of Pseudomonas.


CLS 435/253.4
TXT Streptococcus:

    Subject matter under subclass 252.1 wherein the micro-organism is a species
    of streptococcus.


CLS 435/253.5
TXT Streptomyces:

    Subject matter under subclass 252.1 wherein the micro-organisms is a
    species of Streptomyces.


CLS 435/253.6
TXT Culture media, per se:

    Subject matter under subclass 252.1 directed to a composition having
    utility as a bacterial culture medium (i.e., media for maintenance, growth,
    production, etc.).


CLS 435/254.1
TXT Fungi:
    Subject matter under subclass 243 including micro-organisms which are
    fungi, compositions containing fungi, processes for propagating or
    maintaining fungi, and processes for preparing compositions containing
    fungi.

    (1)     Note.  Fungi includes yeast and molds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.31,   for measuring and testing processes involving fungi.

    171,    for processes wherein the product synthesized is prepared by a
    fungi.

    203,    for subject matter wherein the source of
    alpha-1,4-glucan-4-glucanohydrolase is a fungi.

    223,    for subject matter wherein the source of a proteinase enzyme is a
    fungi.

    804,    for subject matter wherein the suitability of a micro-organism
    (e.g., a fungi) to supply palatable protein is disclosed.

    911+,   for specific fungi cross-reference collections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 1.1 for the cultivation of multicellular
    mushrooms, per se.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 601+ for processes of
    liquid purification using a living organism (e.g., a fungi).

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives; Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclasses 371 and 823 for proteins
    derived from fungi (e.g., yeast, molds, etc.).


CLS 435/254.11
TXT Transformants:
    Subject matter under subclass 254.1 involving a fungi which is 1) a product
    of recombination or transformation with (a) a vector, or (b) a foreign or
    exogenous gene, or 2) a product of homologous recombination if it is
    directed rather than spontaneous, or 3) a product of fused cell formation.

    (1)     Note.  Fused cells are cells of which the cellular matter of two or
    more individual cells is combined producing a single cell which initially
    contains the genes of all the combined cells.

    (2)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are products of unidentified or
    noninduced mutations, and products of natural, spontaneous, or arbitrary
    recombination events.  These are not considered genetically modified for
    this subclass and therefor will be classified as unmodified fungi
    (subclasses 254.1, and 255.1 through 256.8).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172.1+, for  processes  of  mutation   or   genetic             engineering
    wherein the genetic mate-               rial of a micro-organism (e.g. a
    fungi) is altered.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    935,    Genetic Engineering: Recombinant DNA Technology, Hybrid or Fused
    Cell Technology, and Related Manipulations of Nucleic Acids, particularly
    subclasses 68 for subject matter involving transformed fungi, and 97 for
    subject matter involving cell fusion or hybridization of fungi (e.g.
    yeasts, etc.).


CLS 435/254.2
TXT Yeast; media therefor:
    Subject matter under subclass 254.11 wherein the altered fungus is a yeast,
    and media and processes for preparing media for the propagation,
    maintenance, or preservation of transformed yeast.

    (1)     Note.  Disposition of yeast patents claimed or disclosed (a) as an
    edible, (b) as a component in an edible, or (c) as a single source material
    for producing protein useful in making an edible.

    (a)     Yeast with a claimed or solely disclosed utility as a foodstuff in
    the form it is produced by a Class 435 process is classifiable in Class 426.

    (b)     Yeast claimed or disclosed as a component of an edible is
    classifiable in Class 426 if the claim or disclosure is that the yeast is a
    food supplement and is not medicative (i.e., used to alleviate a disease)
    in which case placement in Class 424 is proper.

    (c)     Refined or crude yeast protein is not classifiable in Class 426
    solely on the basis of a Class 426 utility.  Refined yeast protein is
    classifiable in Class 530.  Crude yeast is usually disposed of on the basis
    of utility.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69.9,   for processes wherein the product synthesized is a protein or
    polypeptide with a yeast derived signal sequence.

    224,    for subject matter wherein the source of a proteinase enzyme is a
    yeast.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    935,    Genetic Engineering: Recombinant DNA Technology, Hybrid or Fused
    Cell Technology, and Related Manipulations of Nucleic Acids, particularly
    subclasses 37 for methods of enhancing or diminishing expression of yeast
    cell products, and 69 for subject matter involving transformed yeast.


CLS 435/254.21
TXT Saccharomyces:
    Subject matter under subclass 254.2 wherein the altered yeast is a species
    of Saccharomyces.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are bakers, brewers, compressed, and pressed
    yeast, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    940+,   for specific Saccharomyces cross-reference collections.


CLS 435/254.22
TXT Candida:
    Subject matter under subclass 254.2 wherein the altered yeast is a species
    of Candida.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    921+,   for specific Candida cross-reference collections.


CLS 435/254.23
TXT Pichia:
    Subject matter under subclass 254.2 wherein the altered yeast is a species
    of Pichia.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    938,    for specific Pichia cross-reference collections.


CLS 435/254.3
TXT Aspergillus:
    Subject matter under subclass 254.11 wherein the altered fungus is a
    species of Aspergillus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225,    for subject matter wherein the source of a proteinase enzyme is a
    species of Aspergillus.

    913+,   for specific Aspergillus cross-reference collections.


CLS 435/254.4
TXT Neurospora:
    Subject matter under subclass 254.11 wherein the altered fungus is a
    species of Neurospora.


CLS 435/254.5
TXT Penicillium:
    Subject matter under subclass 254.11 wherein the altered fungus is a
    species of Penicillium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    933+,   for specific Penicillium cross-reference collections.


CLS 435/254.6
TXT Trichoderma:
    Subject matter under subclass 254.11 wherein the altered fungus is a
    species of Trichoderma.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    945,    for specific Trichoderma cross-reference collections.


CLS 435/254.7
TXT Fusarium:
    Subject matter under subclass 254.11 wherein the altered fungus is a
    species of Fusarium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    929,    for specific Fusarium cross-reference collections.


CLS 435/254.8
TXT Mucor:
    Subject matter under subclass 254.11 wherein the altered fungus is a
    species of Mucor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    931,    for specific Mucor cross-reference collections.


CLS 435/254.9
TXT Rhizopus:
    Subject matter under subclass 254.11 wherein the altered fungus is a
    species of Rhizopus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    939,    for specific Rhizopus cross-reference collections.


CLS 435/255.1
TXT Yeast:
    Subject matter under subclass 254.1 wherein the fungus is a yeast.

    (1)     Note.  Disposition of yeast patents claimed or disclosed (a) as an
    edible, (b) as a component in an edible, or (c) as a single source material
    for producing protein useful in making an edible.

    (a)     Yeast with a claimed or solely disclosed utility as a foodstuff in
    the form it is produced by a Class 435 process is classifiable in Class 426.

    (b)     Yeast claimed or disclosed as a component of an edible is
    classifiable in Class 426 if the claim or disclosure is that the yeast is a
    food supplement and is not medicative (i.e., used to alleviate a disease)
    in which case placement in Class 424 is proper.

    (c)     Refined or crude yeast protein is not classifiable in Class 426
    solely on the basis of a Class 426 utility.  Refined yeast protein is
    classifiable in Class 530.  Crude yeast is usually disposed of on the basis
    of utility.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224,    for subject matter wherein the source of a proteinase enzyme is a
    yeast.


CLS 435/255.2
TXT Saccharomyces:
    Subject matter under subclass 255.1 wherein the yeast is a species of
    Saccharomyces.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are bakers, brewers, compressed, and pressed
    yeast, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    940+,   for specific Saccharomyces cross-reference collections.


CLS 435/255.21
TXT Culture media, per se, or technique:
    Subject matter under subclass 255.2 directed to a composition having
    utility as a Saccharomyces culture medium (i.e., media for maintenance,
    growth, production, etc.) or a technique for preparing and using the same.


CLS 435/255.3
TXT Cryptococcus:
    Subject matter under subclass 255.1 wherein the yeast is a species of
    Cryptococcus.


CLS 435/255.4
TXT Candida or torulopsis:
    Subject matter under subclass 255.1 wherein the yeast is a species of
    Candida or Torulopsis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    921+,   for specific Candida cross-reference collections.

    944,    for specific Torulopsis cross-reference collections.


CLS 435/255.5
TXT Pichia:
    Subject matter under subclass 255.1 wherein the yeast is a species of
    Pichia.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    938,    for specific Pichia cross-reference collections.


CLS 435/255.6
TXT Hansenula:
    Subject matter under subclass 255.1 wherein the yeast is a species of
    Hansenula.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    930,    for specific Hansenula cross-reference collections.


CLS 435/255.7
TXT Culture media, per se, or technique:
    Subject matter under subclass 255.1 directed to a composition having
    utility as a yeast culture medium (i.e., media for maintenance, growth,
    production, etc.) or a technique for preparing and using the same.


CLS 435/256.1
TXT Aspergillus:
    Subject matter under subclass 254.1 wherein the fungus is a species of
    Aspergillus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    225,    for subject matter wherein the source of a proteinase enzyme is a
    species of Aspergillus.

    913+,   for specific Aspergillus cross-reference collections.


CLS 435/256.2
TXT Mucor:
    Subject matter under subclass 254.1 wherein the fungus is a species of
    Mucor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    931,    for specific Mucor cross-reference collections.


CLS 435/256.3
TXT Penicillium:
    Subject matter under subclass 254.1 wherein the fungus is a species of
    Penicillium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    933+,   for specific Penicillium cross-reference collections.


CLS 435/256.4
TXT Cephalosporium or acremonium:
    Subject matter under subclass 254.1 wherein the fungus is a species of
    Cephalosporium or Acremonium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    925+,   for specific Cephalosporium cross-reference collections.


CLS 435/256.5
TXT Fusarium:
    Subject matter under subclass 254.1 wherein the fungus is a species of
    Fusarium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    929,    for specific Fusarium cross-reference collections.


CLS 435/256.6
TXT Rhizopus:
    Subject matter under subclass 254.1 wherein the fungus is a species of
    Rhizopus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    939,    for specific Rhizopus cross-reference collections.


CLS 435/256.7
TXT Trichoderma:
    Subject matter under subclass 254.1 wherein the fungus is a species of
    Trichoderma.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    945,    for specific Trichoderma cross-reference collections.


CLS 435/256.8
TXT Culture media, per se, or technique:
    Subject matter under subclass 254.1 directed to a composition having
    utility as a fungal culture medium (i.e., media for maintenance, growth,
    production, etc.) or a technique for preparing and using the same.


CLS 435/257.1
TXT Algae, media therefor:
    Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein the micro-organism propagated or
    treated is a unicellular algae, or the media useful for the propagation of
    unicellular algae, or a composition containing unicellular algae, or
    methods of preparing said compositions or media.

    (1)     Note.  Edible compositions containing unicellular algae are
    excluded herefrom.

    (2)     Note.  Multicellular algae are excluded herefrom. Algae are
    presumed to be multicellular in the absence of a clear showing to the
    contrary.

    (3)     Note.  Unicellular algae in this subclass include both eukaryotic
    and prokaryotic algae.  Examples of eukaryotes include Chlorophyta (green
    algae, such as Chlorella, Scenedesmus, etc.), Euglenophyta (Euglena),
    Rhodophyta (red algae), etc.  Examples of prokaryotes include Cyanobacteria
    (blue-green algae, such as Anacystis, Anabaena, etc.).

    (4)     Note.  Micro-organisms of the genera Euglena and Chlamydomonas are
    currently classified in both algal (Bold and Wynne) and protozoan (Levine)
    taxonomic systems due to their photosynthetic and motility systems.  For
    classification purposes, these genera are placed under algae unless the
    reference specifically eludes to the "protozoan" nature of the
    micro-organism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    804,    for subject matter wherein the suitability of a micro-organism
    (e.g., an algae) to supply palatable protein is disclosed.

    946,    for specific algae cross-reference collections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 1.4 for the cultivation of multicellular
    algae, per se.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 601+ for processes of
    liquid purification using a living organism (e.g., an algae).

    504,    Plant Protecting and Regulating Compositions, subclasses 150+ for
    subject matter involving algicides.

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives; Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclass 370 for proteins derived
    from plants (e.g., algae).


CLS 435/257.2
TXT Transformants:
    Subject matter under subclass 257.1 involving an algae which is 1) a
    product of recombination or transformation with (a) a vector, or (b) a
    foreign or exogenous gene, or 2) a product of homologous recombination if
    it is directed rather than spontaneous, or 3) a product of fused cell
    formation.

    (1)     Note.  Fused cells are cells of which the cellular matter of two or
    more individual cells is combined producing a singlecell which initially
    contains the genes of all the combined cells.

    (2)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are products of unidentified or
    noninduced mutations, and products of natural, spontaneous, or arbitrary
    recombination events.  These are not considered genetically modified for
    this subclass and therefor will be classified as unmodified algae
    (subclasses 257.1, and 257.3 through 257.6).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172.1+,         for  processes  of  mutation  or  genetic
                  engineering wherein the genetic mate-             rial of a
    micro-organism (e.g. an algae) is altered.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    935,    Genetic Engineering: Recombinant DNA Technology, Hybrid or Fused
    Cell Technology, and Related Manipulations of Nucleic Acids, particularly
    subclass 38 for methods of enhancing or diminishing expression of
    prokaryotic organisms (e.g. an algae).


CLS 435/257.3
TXT Chlorella:
    Subject matter under subclass 257.1 wherein the algae is a species of
    Chlorella.


CLS 435/257.4
TXT Euglena:
    Subject matter under subclass 257.1 wherein the algae is a species of
    Euglena.

    (1)     Note.  Micro-organisms of the genus Euglena are currently
    classified in both algal (Bold and Wynne) and protozoan (Levine) taxonomic
    systems due to their photosynthetic and motility systems. For
    classification purposes, this genus is placed under algae unless the
    reference specifically eludes to the "protozoan" nature of the
    micro-organism.


CLS 435/257.5
TXT Scenedesmus:
    Subject matter under subclass 257.1 wherein the algae is a species of
    Scenedesmus.


CLS 435/257.6
TXT Chlamydomonas:
    Subject matter under subclass 257.1 wherein the algae is a species of
    Chlamydomonas.

    (1)     Note.  Micro-organisms of the genus Chlamydomonas are currently
    classified in both algal (Bold and Wynne) and protozoan (Levine) taxonomic
    systems due to their photosynthetic and motility systems.  For
    classification purposes, this Genus is placed under algae unless the
    reference specifically eludes to the "protozoan" nature of the
    micro-organism.


CLS 435/258.1
TXT Protozoa, media therefor:
    Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein the micro-organism propagated or
    treated is a protozoa, or media useful for the propagation of protozoa, or
    a composition containing protozoa, or methods of preparing said composition
    or media.

    (1)     Note.  Micro-organisms of the genera Euglena and Chlamydomonas are
    currently classified in both algal (Bold and Wynne) and protozoan (Levine)
    taxonomic systems due to their photosynthetic and motility systems.  For
    classification purposes, these genera are placed under algae unless the
    reference specifically eludes to the "protozoan" nature of the
    micro-organism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.22,   for measuring and testing processes involving protozoa.

    947,    for specific protozoa cross-reference collections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives; Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclass 822 for proteins derived
    from protozoa.


CLS 435/258.2
TXT Plasmodium:
    Subject matter under subclass 258.1 wherein the protozoa is a species of
    Plasmodium.


CLS 435/258.3
TXT Leishmania:
    Subject matter under subclass 258.1 wherein the protozoa is a species of
    Leishmania.


CLS 435/258.4
TXT Eimeria:
    Subject matter under subclass 258.1 wherein the protozoa is a species of
    Eimeria.


CLS 435/259
TXT Lysis of micro-organism:

    Processes under the subclass 243 wherein the micro-organism is ruptured by
    added material or mechanical means.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for autolysis which is
    generally part of the processes included in subclasses 262+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, particularly subclass
    2 for methods of and apparatus for the comminution of micro-organisms or
    tissues.


CLS 435/260
TXT Preserving or maintaining micro-organism:

    Processes under subclass 243 wherein a viable micro-organism is rendered
    reversibly dormant.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes preparing solvent dried and freeze
    dried cells.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, particularly subclass
    2 for methods of and apparatus for the comminution of microorganisms or
    tissues.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for processes of maintaining differentiated tissue or an organ in a
    viable state.

    2,      for processes or media for maintaining blood or sperm in a
    physiologically active state.


CLS 435/261
TXT Separation of micro-organism from culture media:

    Processes under subclass 243 where a micro-organism is recovered from
    culture media.


CLS 435/262
TXT PROCESS OF UTILIZING AN ENZYME OR MICRO-ORGANISM TO DESTROY HAZARDOUS OR
    TOXIC WASTE, LIBERATE, SEPARATE, OR PURIFY A PREEXISTING COMPOUND OR
    COMPOSITION THEREFORE; CLEANING OBJECTS OR TEXTILES:Processes under the
    class definition wherein a preexisting material or compound, which may
    include a hazardous or toxic waste, present in a composition or material
    containing a preexisting material, is contacted with an enzyme or
    immobilized enzyme micro-organism or plant or animal cells to isolate or
    recover the preexisting material which is chemically unchanged by the
    process and the hazardous or toxic waste is destroyed.

    (1)     Note.  Liberation or purification of a preexisting substance is
    usually accomplished by breaking down or otherwise physically or chemically
    altering the substance regarded as a contaminant by means of an enzyme or
    micro-organism.

    (2)     Note.  The amount of the preexisting compound or material is not
    increased by the microbial or enzymatic treatment.

    (3)     Note.  Resolution of optical isomers or their salts is considered
    purification or separation of a preexisting compound.

    (4)     Note.  Composition includes oil shale deposits, oil, hides, etc.

    (5)     Note.  The hydrolysis of starch or proteins to liberate glucose or
    amino acids, respectively, is not included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68.1,   for the hydrolysis of proteins.

    94,     for the hydrolysis of starch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, provides for processes
    of separating liquids from solids or slurries, i.e., drying as well as the
    contact of solids with either, or both, gases and vapors.  If the starting
    material is in the form of a liquid suspension or solution even of the
    process is continued to the point of complete dryness, Class 159,
    Concentrating Evaporators, will take the process.

    62,     Refrigeration, includes processes which include removing heat by
    refrigeration from a substance whether solid, liquid, or vapor.  In
    particular, Class 62, subclasses will take processes of making a solidified
    or liquefied gaseous product provided the gas has a normal boiling point
    below 32o (methane, ethane, propane) and Class 62, subclasses 532+ will
    take processes wherein a solution or mixture is cooled to solidify a
    constituent which is then removed from the mixture.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, for physical processes involving steps
    resulting in separation of a gas from a fluid mixture comprising (a) a gas
    and solid or liquid particles entrained therein, (b) a liquid and gas
    entrained therein, or (c) a plurality of gases.  The separation is not done
    by chemical reaction.

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, for processes wholly peculiar to
    processes of extracting or purifying natural starch, natural sucrose, or
    other natural carbohydrates except cellulose, processes of hydrolyzing
    carbohydrates or processes of purifying the products of such hydrolysis.
    The chemical manufacture or synthesis of sugar or of carbohydrates by any
    other process than that of hydrolysis is not included in Class 127.
    Molecular rearrangement of one carbohydrate to form any other carbohydrate
    is excluded.  Such processes are provided for in Class 260.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, provides for processes peculiar to the
    concentration of solids held in solution or suspension by evaporation of
    the liquid containing them and the recovery of the concentrate.  If the
    starting material is a solid or slurry placement in Class 34, Drying and
    Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, would be indicated.  Class 159 will take
    concentration to the point of crystallization or to dryness, however,
    removal of water of crystallization is considered to be a chemical reaction
    and placement would not be proper in Class 159.  Evaporating with
    subsequent vapor condensation is excluded from Class 159 and in such case,
    placement in Class 203, Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, would be
    proper.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, provides for processes of
    thermolytic distillation wherein a solid carbonaceous material is heated to
    vaporize a volatile portion and to cause chemical decomposition of the
    heated material to form different chemical substances at least some of
    which are volatile and leave behind a solid carbonaceous material.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, provides for processes for
    separating a liquid mixture by vaporizing and condensing a portion thereof
    to isolate in the condensed liquid or the unvaporized portion a  relatively
     pure compound which was present in the original mixture.  The original
    mixture may be in a solid form so long as it melts to form a liquid before
    it vaporizes.  A solid original mixture which undergoes chemical
    decomposition leaving a carbonaceous residue would be classifiable in Class
    201, Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, which is superior to Class 203.
    Processes including a chemical reaction and a separatory distillation
    operation are classified in Class 203 only when the chemical reaction
    merely facilitates the isolation by the separatory distillation operation
    of a preexisting substance in the distilland.  See Class 260, Chemistry of
    Carbon Compounds, or Class 423, Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, for a
    process of preparing a compound and isolating it by a separatory
    distillation process.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, includes processes for the
    separation or purification of a constituent from a flowable liquid mixture
    by dialysis, sorption, ion exchange, liquid extraction, gravitational
    separation, or filtration, as well as purification of a liquid mixture by
    destruction or conversion of a constituent.  Processes directed to the
    purification of a particular compound or composition (including solutions
    of either the compound or composition in water), are classified with the
    particular compound or composition.  Insofar as the treatment of liquids
    with ion exchange or sorption materials are concerned, the following lines
    will be maintained.

    (1)     Where water is the only disclosed liquid purified, the patent will
    be classified in this class (210).

    (2)     Where the disclosure includes water, hydrocarbons and/or other
    liquids the patent will be classified:

    (a)     In Class 210 if all claims are broad as to the liquid.

    (b)     In Class 210 if several species of liquid are claimed and one
    species includes water.

    (c)     In the appropriate art class if some liquid other than water is the
    only liquid claimed (e.g., mineral oils in Class 208, organic compounds in
    Class 260).

    (3)     Purification or separation of liquids by flocculation only are
    classified in Class 210.

    (4)     Processes wherein all claims are limited to the deposition of
    specific materials on ion-exchangers or sorbents with subsequent recovery
    of the specific materials are classified with materials so operated upon.

            Class 210 is superior to Class 95 and takes separating processes,
    per se, generally disclosed or claimed as fluid separation, or if the
    disclosure or a claim is restricted to liquid separation.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, provides for the liberation and
    purification by chemical or physical means of compounds and extracts
    falling within the class definition of Class 260.  Generally, the physical
    processes included are of two types (a) a purification process prior or
    subsequent to a chemical reaction producing a Class 260 product, (b) a
    purification process directed to the purification of a Class 260 compound
    by a combination of physical separation techniques the classes for which do
    not provide for or exclude the combination claimed.  Chemical purification
    processes are generally provided for with each product produced.


CLS 435/262.5
TXT Destruction of hazardous or toxic waste:
    Process under subclass 262 wherein hazardous or toxic waste is destroyed or
    converted into an environmentally safe substance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 1 - 209 and Digest 17
    for the use of micro-organisms in the leaching of ores.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    250+ for the use of containment in the treatment of hazardous or toxic
    waste.


CLS 435/263
TXT Textile treating:

    Processes under subclass 262 wherein the preexisting material is an organic
    fiber material, per se, or the fiber is spun or woven into fabric.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, for chemical modification and fluid treatment of
    fibers and textiles, not otherwise provided for; and subclass 138 for
    nonenzymatic removal of natural sericin or other naturally occurring gum or
    wax or an artificially applied size or gum from textile fibers.

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, for the mechanical treatment of
    fibers to put them in condition for use.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, particularly subclass 2 for the
    freeing of silk from a cocoon.


CLS 435/264
TXT Cleaning using a micro-organism or enzyme:

    Processes under subclasses 262 wherein the preexisting material is a solid
    macroscopic material not obtained from a natural source and is recovered
    from an undesired extraneous material originally contained in the
    macroscopic material's surface.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes processes of using a micro-organism
    or enzyme, per se, to remove adherent matter from an object.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching, and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification,
    for process of cleaning and laundering textile fabrics and fibers,
    including a fluid or chemical treatment.  Includes also combinations and
    aftertreatments incidental to such operation not elsewhere classifiable.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With  Solids, for processes of cleaning
    textiles and fibers not involving chemical or fluid treatment and including
    the mechanical cleaning of textiles and fibers and cleaning by a gas blast
    or suction (which is not considered a fluid treatment for Class 8).

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 89+ for enzyme containing detergent
    compositions.


CLS 435/265
TXT Depilating hides, bating, or hide treating using enzyme or micro-organism:

    Processes under subclass 262 wherein the preexisting material treated is a
    hide or a skin of an animal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclass 401 for a dyeing process employing
    fermentation or an enzyme; subclasses 94.1+ for processes of tanning hides
    or skins by fermentation with subsequent tanning of the hides or skins or
    subsequent operations that are preliminary and peculiar to making leather.
    Class 435 provides for a fermentation process, per se, of treating a hide
    or skin, e.g., depilating, bating, etc.

    71,     Chemistry:  Fertilizers, subclass 18 for compositions of matter
    including hides, skins, feathers, or animal tissues such as compost.


CLS 435/266
TXT Treating gas, emulsion, or foam:

    Processes under subclass 262 wherein the preexisting material is a gas or
    is initially a component of an emulsion or foam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, for physical processes involving steps
    resulting in separation of a gas from a fluid mixture comprising (a) a gas
    and solid or liquid particles entrained therein, (b) a liquid and gas
    entrained therein, or (c) a plurality of gases.  The separation is not done
    by chemical reaction.  See particularly subclass 155 for processes of gas
    separation involving contacting with a liquid that contains a defoaming or
    antifoaming agent, subclass 157 for processes of gas separation involving
    liquid contacting and defoaming the liquid, and subclass 242 for defoaming
    a liquid.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 107+ for apparatus for controlling the
    degree of foaming in a gas charged liquid.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclass 9 for a process of
    surface treating the solid particles of the charge to inhibit, reduce, or
    prevent foaming during distillation.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclass 264 for distillation apparatus
    intended to break foam or inhibit foaming.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclass 20 for processes of
    defoaming or inhibition of the formation of foam combined with distillation.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 321 for a process not combined with
    distillation for inhibiting foam and Search Class thereunder; subclass 358
    for compositions for use in breaking colloids a period.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    gas-liquid scrubbing devices.


CLS 435/267
TXT Treating animal or plant material or micro-organism:

    Processes under subclass 262 wherein the preexisting material is obtained
    directly from an animal or plant source or micro-organism.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are processes of isolating a hormone from an
    organ or a compound from a fruit by means of an enzyme or micro-organism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239,    for treatment of animal tissue or organs to recover a virus.


CLS 435/268
TXT Treating organ or animal secretion:

    Processes under subclass 267 wherein the preexisting material is an organ
    or animal secretion.

    (1)     Note.  Animal secretion includes blood, urine, feces, hormones, etc.


CLS 435/269
TXT Treating blood fraction:

    Processes under subclass 267 wherein the preexisting material is blood or a
    blood fraction.

    (1)     Note.  A blood fraction is considered to include plasma, red blood
    cells, white blood cells, nonenzymatic proteins, serum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for processes of treating blood cells in vitro to alter some
    cellular property while maintaining cell viability.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclass 1.17
    for the class defined compositions and methods comprising radiolabeled
    cells and subcellular structures, including red blood cells and platelets.


CLS 435/270
TXT Removing nucleic acid from intact or disrupted cell:

    Processes under subclass 267 wherein an intact or disrupted cell's nucleic
    acid content is reduced by the use of an enzyme or micro-organism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    71,     Chemistry:  Fertilizers, for the production of substances having a
    nutrient  action on plant growth and the product of such processes
    including methods of utilizing micro-organisms to produce a fertilizer,
    e.g., compositing as well as the micro-organism containing fertilizer so
    produced.

    504,    Plant Protecting and Regulating Compositions, for the production of
    substances having a stimulating, inhibiting, or regulating action on plant
    growth and the product of such processes including methods of utilizing
    micro-organisms to produce a plant growth stimulator, inhibitor, or
    regulator as well the micro-organism containing plant growth regulator so
    produced.


CLS 435/271
TXT Glyceridic oil, fat, ester-type wax or higher fatty acid recovered or
    purified:

    Processes under subclass 267 wherein the preexisting material is a fat,
    ester-type wax, higher fatty acid, or glyceride oil.

    (1)     Note.  Fats and fatty oils are the glycerides of higher fatty
    acids, including naturally occurring mixtures thereof present in a single
    oil or fat.

    (2)     Note.  Ester-type waxes are waxes which are essentially esters in
    chemical structure, e.g., beeswax, montan wax, carnauba wax, and spermaceti.

    (3)     Note.  Higher fatty acid is a monocarboxylic acid containing an
    unbroken chain of more than seven carbon atoms bonded to a carboxylic
    group, e.g., lauric, palmitic, stearic, oleic, ricinoleic, linoleic acid,
    etc. Where there are several unbroken chains of carbon atoms bonded to the
    carboxyl group, one of the chains must contain a chain of seven or more
    carbon atoms.


CLS 435/272
TXT Proteinaceous material recovered or purified:

    Processes under the subclass 267 wherein the preexisting material is a
    proteinaceous material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239,    for methods of separating virus and protein contaminants by various
    methods, e.g., sorption, precipitation, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching, and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 94.1+ for fluid or chemical treatment of
    hides, skins, feathers, and animal tissues, not otherwise provided for;
    subclass 127.5 for processes of chemically modifying proteinaceous fibers;
    and subclass 138 for processes for fluid or chemical treatment of silk for
    the removal of sericin, or other naturally occurring gum or wax.  Processes
    classifiable in this subclass (2) generally include the production of a
    fiber pulp from a raw proteinaceous fibrous material (e.g., leather).

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, for processes of
    chemically removing coatings, such as wax, from a paper base without
    otherwise affecting the base, where the coating is not recovered.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, subclass 112 for proteins and their
    reaction products and, in particular, subclass 123.7 for chemical treatment
    of natural protein containing material.


CLS 435/273
TXT Collagen or gelatin:

    Processes under the subclass 272 wherein the preexisting material is
    collagen or gelatin.


CLS 435/274
TXT Carbohydrate material recovered or purified:

    Processes under subclass 267 wherein the preexisting material is a
    carbohydrate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, for the hydrolysis of
    carbohydrates including their conversion to sugar by means other than a
    micro-organism or enzyme.  Class 127 provides for processes using an enzyme
    or micro-organism only where the hydrolysis by micro-organism or enzyme is
    followed by steps of concentration purification or treatment (such as
    crystallization) to make a sugar or syrup.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for the chemical manufacture or
    synthesis of sugar or carbohydrates by a process other than hydrolysis and
    the rearrangement of one carbohydrate to form another carbohydrate by means
    other than a micro-organism or enzyme.


CLS 435/275
TXT Pectin or starch:

    Processes under subclass 274 wherein the preexisting material is a pectin
    or a starch.


CLS 435/276
TXT Sugar (e.g., molasses treatment, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 274 wherein the preexisting material is a
    monosaccharide or a polysaccharide which has predominately alpha-1, 4
    linkages between the glucose units.


CLS 435/277
TXT Cellulose (e.g., plant fibers, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 274 wherein the preexisting material is a
    polysaccharide which has predominately beta-1, 4 linkages between the
    glucose units.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, for chemical modification and fluid treatment of
    fibers and textiles, not otherwise provided for.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, for processes of liberation,
    recovery or purification of cellulose or animal fibers as individual fibers
    or fibrous pulp by the use of a reagent which exerts some solvent or
    chemical action upon fibrous material and the reagent compositions employed
    in such processes.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, particularly subclasses 212+ for
    processes of chemically modifying cellulose in which its fibrous nature is
    destroyed, e.g., in the production of cellulose esters.


CLS 435/278
TXT Producing paper pulp:

    Processes under subclass 277 wherein the material which is liberated is
    paper pulp.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, for processes of making a paper
    pulp by chemical action.


CLS 435/279
TXT Hemp or flax treating:

    Processes under subclass 277 wherein the preexisiting material which is
    liberated is hemp or flax.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, for the mechanical treatment of
    fibers to put them in condition for use.


CLS 435/280
TXT Resolution of optical isomers or purification of organic compounds or
    composition containing same:

    Processes under subclass 262 wherein a racemic mixture is treated to
    liberate an optically active mixture or compound or a mixture is otherwise
    purified by a micro-organism or enzyme to obtain a specified organic
    compound.

    (1)     Note.  It should be noted that biological, i.e., microbial or
    enzymatic reactions are generally steriospecific so that a search, to be
    complete, should also include a search of the synthesis subclass, i.e.,
    subclasses 41+ of this class which provides for the transformation of the
    "contaminant" if it is chemically identifiable.


CLS 435/281
TXT Petroleum oil or shale oil treating:

    Processes under subclass 262 wherein the preexisting material which is
    liberated or purified is petroleum or shale oil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for processes of prospecting for minerals including petroleum oils.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, appropriate subclasses for processes and apparatus for
    treating oil or an oil bearing mineral with a micro-organism or enzyme
    while in the ground.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, for apparatus for treating, refining, or
    recovering mineral oils such as petroleum, tar, pitch asphalt, or related
    products not otherwise provided for.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclass for
    apparatus for treating mineral oils involving more than the mere thermal
    effects of the electrical or wave energy.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, for processes of treating
    and preparing mineral oils including their separation from sands, coal, or
    shales.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, for processes and apparatus for
    separating liquids including mineral oils involving no chemical treatment
    of the mineral oil.

    252,    Compositions, particularly subclasses 319+ for processes for
    breaking emulsions including petroleum emulsions where there is no
    additional treatment of the oil.

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, for a process or
    apparatus for treating oil or oil bearing minerals while in situ in a
    tunnel or excavation.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclass 41 for the recovery of
    metal containing compounds without the reduction of the compound to pure
    metal.


CLS 435/282
TXT Desulfurizing:

    Processes under subclass 281 wherein sulfur or sulfur containing compounds
    are removed from petroleum or shale oil.


CLS 435/283.1
TXT APPARATUS:

    Apparatus under the class definition.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded herefrom are kits that are claimed as kits which
    have no claimed structure, but instead recite the ingredients of the kit.
    Such subject matter should be considered test media and classified in this
    class, subclasses 4+.

    (2)     Note.  Class 435 is the residual class for enzyme and microorganism
    apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 400.1+ for methods of assembling the
    apparatus provided for in this class.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, particularly subclass 1.1 for processes and
    apparatus for growing a mushroom or edible fungi (excluding yeast) and
    subclass 1.4 for processes and apparatus for growing multicellular algae.

    53,     Package Making, various subclasses for processes of packaging and
    package making.

    71,     Chemistry: Fertilizers, particularly subclasses 6+ for processes of
    using a micro-organism or enzyme to produce a fertilizer.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 64.41 for apparatus used for
    testing the ability of blood to clot.

    99,     Foods and Beverages: Apparatus, subclasses 275+ for apparatus
    adapted for the preparation of a beverage or beverage intermediate by
    carrying out primary ethyl alcoholic fermentations, and apparatus for
    aging, refining, and purifying alcoholic beverages.

    128,    Surgery, for methods of treatment of the living body and for
    apparatus used in the inspection and treatment of diseases of the bodies of
    humans and lower animals which apparatus is provided with means for
    connection to the living body.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 223+ for a test kit of
    general utility.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, for bottles and jars of general utility and the
    closures therefor.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, for apparatus for chemical analysis and
    chemical reactors of general utility.


CLS 435/284.1
TXT Differentiated tissue (e.g., organ) perfusion or preservation apparatus:

    Apparatus under subclass 283.1 with means adapted for maintaining a
    differentiated tissue or  animal organ in vitro in a viable state.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1.2,    for processes of differentiated tissue or organ other than blood,
    per se, or differentiated tissue or organ maintaining by perfusion.

    297.2,  for bioreactors including perfusion means.

    307.1,  for apparatus for preserving, storing, or transporting
    micro-organisms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, for process of and apparatus for cooling and
    freezing materials.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 560 for systems including pulsating pumps
    useful for forcing perfusate through organs.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 321.6+ for dialysis
    devices adapted for gas and mass transfer (e.g., artificial kidneys).

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, for gas liquid contact means of
    general utility.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 44+ for blood oxygenating devices
    and other blood treatment devices.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 4+ for extra corporeal blood treating devices
    connected to or having specific means for connection to a living body.


CLS 435/285.1
TXT Mutation or genetic engineering apparatus:

    Apparatus under subclass 283.1 for producing a known stable change in the
    genotype of a micro-organism by artificially inducing a structural change
    in a gene or by the incorporation of genetic material from an external
    source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172.1+, for processes of mutation or genetic engineering.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    935,    Genetic Engineering: Recombinant DNA Technology, Hybrid or Fused
    Cell Technology, and Related Manipulations of Nucleic Acids, particularly
    subclasses 85+ for genetic engineering apparatus.


CLS 435/285.2
TXT With means for applying an electric current or charge (e.g., electrofusion,
    electroporation, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 285.1 for producing a known stable change in the
    genotype of a micro-organism by the use of an applied electric current or
    charge.

    (1)     Note.  Electrofusion is the combining of the entire genetic
    material of two separate cells, while electroporation is the incorporation
    of subcellular parts (i.e., plasmids) into a cell.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172.2,  for processes of electrofusion.

    173.6,  for processes of electroporation.


CLS 435/285.3
TXT Including projectile means:

    Apparatus under subclass 285.1 wherein a projectile means is utilized to
    incorporate foreign genetic material into a cell.


CLS 435/286.1
TXT Including condition or time responsive control means:

    Apparatus under subclass 283.1 with means to sense a process parameter
    which actuates means to alter a process parameter, or with timing means
    which actuates means which alters a process parameter.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is the mere use of a programmed computer and
    associated detection and actuation devices for process control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, for apparatus for making tests and
    measurements not otherwise provided for.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 88+ for systems for controlling the
    mixture of a plurality of fluids in response to the sensing of a condition
    or characteristic of the mixture, note particularly subclass 93 in which
    the control is in response to a sensing of a chemical property.

    196,    Mineral Oils: Apparatus, subclasses 132 and 141 for combinations of
    apparatus for making a test or measurement and means for controlling a
    reaction provided for in that class.

    346,    Recorders, for recording apparatus, per se.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 496 for
    data processing systems or calculating computer is designed for use in
    chemistry, chemical engineering, or other areas of engineering or for the
    solution of problems in these areas.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, for apparatus for (a) determining qualitatively
    or quantitatively the presence of one or more chemical constituents of a
    material which involve a chemical reaction, and (b) combinations of a test
    or measurement and means for regulating a chemical reaction.


CLS 435/286.2
TXT Including position control:

    Apparatus under subclass 286.1 with means to control the position of a
    component (e.g., a sample container, dispensing means, etc.).


CLS 435/286.3
TXT Plater, streaker, or spreader:

    Apparatus under subclass 286.2 with means to control inoculation of
    microorganisms on a solid surface so as to isolate individual cells or
    colonies, or to completely cover the solid surface with a mat or lawn of
    cells.


CLS 435/286.4
TXT Including liquid dispenser means:

    Apparatus under subclass 286.2 with means to control dispensing of a liquid
    (e.g., reagents, samples, etc.).


CLS 435/286.5
TXT Including liquid flow, level, or volume control:

    Apparatus under subclass 286.1 with means to control the volume, level, or
    flow of a liquid.


CLS 435/286.6
TXT Including gas flow or pressure control:

    Apparatus under subclass 286.1 with means to control pressure or gas flow.


CLS 435/286.7
TXT Including mixing or agitation control:

    Apparatus under subclass 286.1 with means to control mixing or agitation.


CLS 435/287.1
TXT Including measuring or testing:

    Apparatus under subclass 283.1 with means to test or measure a condition or
    property in a sample.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass excludes mere means for measuring temperature
    or pH in combination with bioreactor structures.  See this class,
    subclasses 289.1+ for this subject matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, for apparatus for making tests and
    measurements not otherwise provided for.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 88+ for systems for controlling the
    mixture of a plurality of fluids in response to the sensing of a condition
    or characteristic of the mixture.

    196,    Mineral Oils: Apparatus, subclasses 132 and 141 for combinations of
    apparatus for making a test or measurement and means for controlling a
    reaction provided for in that class.

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 400+ for
    apparatus specialized for analysis and testing of electrolytic reactions.

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus for testing an electrical property or condition of a material by
    electrical means, even though the result of the test may be used as an
    indication of some other physical or chemical property or condition.

    346,    Recorders, for recording apparatus, per se.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 31+ for calorimetry.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, particularly subclasses 50+ for apparatus for
    (a) determining qualitatively or quantitatively the presence of one or more
    chemical constituents of a material, and (b) combinations of a test or
    measurement and means for regulating a chemical reaction.


CLS 435/287.2
TXT Measuring or testing for antibody or nucleic acid, or measuring or testing
    using antibody or nucleic acid:

    Apparatus under subclass 287.1 with means for the measuring or testing of
    antibodies or nucleic acids, or with means for using an antibody or nucleic
    acid agent to measure or test a sample.


CLS 435/287.3
TXT With sample or reagent mechanical transport means:

    Apparatus under subclass 287.1 having means to transport a sample to be
    measured or a reagent involved in a measurement by mechanical means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, particularly  subclasses 63+ for automated
    analytical apparatus having sample mechanical transport means.


CLS 435/287.4
TXT Sterility testing means:

    Apparatus under subclass 287.1 with means to test for sterility.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are means for  attempting to culture a
    microorganism which has been exposed to a prior step intended to destroy
    living organisms, or by exposing an enzyme to such treatment and
    subsequently testing for enzymatic activity.


CLS 435/287.5
TXT Means for measuring gas pressure or gas volume of gas evolved from or
    consumed in an enzymatic or microbial reaction:

    Apparatus under subclass 287.1 with means to measure gas pressure or gas
    volume that is either evolved from or consumed in an enzymatic or microbial
    reaction.


CLS 435/287.6
TXT Including frangible means for introducing a sample or reagent:

    Apparatus under subclass 287.1 containing a frangible element which, when
    broken, releases a reagent or  a sample to a reaction container.


CLS 435/287.7
TXT Including bibulous or absorbent layer:

    Apparatus under subclass 287.1 wherein a reagent or sample is contained or
    placed in an absorbent or bibulous carrier or substrate (e.g., a dip-stick,
    test paper, wick, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, particularly  subclasses 55+  for visual or
    optical indicators, including subclasses 56 and 57 which include absorbent
    or coated layers.


CLS 435/287.8
TXT Including multiple, stacked layers:

    Apparatus under subclass 287.7 wherein a reagent or sample is contained or
    placed in or on an element containing multiple stacked layers of an
    absorbent or bibulous carrier or substrate.


CLS 435/287.9
TXT Including a coated reagent or sample layer:

    Apparatus under subclass 287.1 wherein a reagent or sample is coated on the
    surface of a carrier or substrate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, particularly  subclasses 55+  for visual or
    optical indicators, including subclasses 56 and 57 which include absorbent
    or coated layers.


CLS 435/288.1
TXT Including a bottle, tube, flask, or jar:

    Apparatus under subclass 287.1 which includes a bottle, tube, flask, or jar.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304.1,  for bottles, tubes, flasks, and jars of general use for the growth,
    propagation, or maintenance of a microorganism or enzyme, or for the
    synthesis of a composition or compound using a microorganism or enzyme.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 223+ for a test kit of
    general utility.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, for bottles and jars of general utility and the
    closures therefor.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, particularly  subclass 102 for miscellaneous
    laboratory containers.


CLS 435/288.2
TXT Including multiple internal compartments or baffles:

    Apparatus under subclass 288.1 wherein a bottle, tube, flask, or jar
    contains multiple internal compartments or baffles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    299.2,  for bottles, tubes, flasks, and jars containing a solid extended
    reaction surface.

    304.2,  for bottles, tubes, flasks, and jars including multiple internal
    compartments or baffles of general use involving the growth, or propagation
    of a micro-organism or enzyme, or for the synthesis of a composition or
    compound using a micro-organism or enzyme.


CLS 435/288.3
TXT Including a dish, plate, slide, or tray:

    Apparatus under subclass 287.1 which includes a dish, plate, slide, or tray.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    297.5,  for a dish, plate, or tray of general use involving the growth or
    propagation of a micro-organism or enzyme, or for the synthesis of a
    composition or compound using a micro-organism or enzyme in combination
    with a semi-permeable membrane or filter.

    305.1+, for a dish, plate, or tray of general use involving the growth or
    propagation of a micro-organism or enzyme, or for the synthesis of a
    composition or compound using a micro-organism or enzyme.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, particularly  subclass 102 for miscellaneous
    laboratory containers.


CLS 435/288.4
TXT Including multiple compartments (e.g., wells, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 288.3 including two or more separate compartments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305.2+, for a multi-welled dish, plate, or tray of general use involving
    the growth or propagation of a micro-organism or enzyme, or for the
    synthesis of a composition or compound using a micro-organism or enzyme.


CLS 435/288.5
TXT Including means for fluid passage between compartments (e.g., between
    wells, etc.):

    Apparatus under subclass 288.4 with means providing fluid passage between
    compartments.


CLS 435/288.6
TXT Including column separation means:

    Apparatus under subclass 287.1 including a column separation means in
    addition to measuring or testing means.


CLS 435/288.7
TXT Including optical measuring or testing means:

    Apparatus under subclass 287.1 having means for measuring or testing an
    optical property of the material to be analyzed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, particularly subclasses 82.05+ for analytical
    apparatus which measures optical properties of a chemical reaction.


CLS 435/289.1
TXT Bioreactor:

    Apparatus under subclass 283.1 adapted for the growth or propagation of a
    micro-organism or enzyme, or for the synthesis of a composition or compound
    using a micro-organism or enzyme.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    307.1,  for apparatus for maintaining a microorganism in a viable state.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for chemical manufacturing apparatus not elsewhere
    provided for producing articles of manufacture, and see especially subclass
    345 for differential etching apparatus.

    196,    Mineral Oils: Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for apparatus for
    treating mineral oils. Catalytic apparatus, even though employed for
    carrying out a catalytic-cracking process provided for in Class 208,
    Mineral Oils: Processes and Products, is classified in Class 422.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 193+ for
    apparatus employed in carrying out a process provided for in that class,
    which apparatus is not provided for in any other class.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, for reactors utilized in
    purifying liquids.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 255 for apparatus for testing earth
    material samples involving, and in name only, chemical or physical
    separation and an invisible radiation test of the separated material;
    subclass 281 for ionic separation or analysis apparatus; subclasses 306+
    for the inspection of solids or liquids by charged particles and the
    detection of the particles modified by the solids or liquids; and
    subclasses 336.1+ for apparatus for analyzing material.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 40+ and 44+
    (particularly subclass 47) for a coating implement by means of which
    diverse materials are applied to a work surface.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, particularly  subclasses 129+ for chemical
    reactors of a general nature.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, for inorganic compound and
    nonmetallic elements and processes for their manufacture involving chemical
    reaction.


CLS 435/290.1
TXT Composting apparatus:

    Apparatus under subclass 289.1 for the treatment of organic waste material
    by the action of micro-organisms or enzymes.


CLS 435/290.2
TXT Including agitation means:

    Apparatus under subclass 290.1 wherein an agitator is utilized to mix the
    organic material being composted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    366,    Agitating, for mixing devices of general utility.


CLS 435/290.3
TXT Compostor is rotatably mounted:

    Apparatus under subclass 290.2 wherein the agitation means includes a
    rotating compostor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291.8,  for a rotatably mounted malting or mashing apparatus.

    298.2,  for a rotatably mounted bioreactor of general utility.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, for rotatably mounted devices.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, particularly  subclass 209 for chemical
    reactors including means for rotating a reaction chamber during use.


CLS 435/290.4
TXT Including solid or liquid transport means into or out of a compostor:

    Apparatus under subclass 290.1 incorporating means to transport solids or
    liquids into or out of the compostor (e.g., conveyors, etc.).


CLS 435/291.1
TXT Malting or mashing apparatus:

    Apparatus under subclass 289.1 with means to effect the sprouting of grain
    by heat and humidity.


CLS 435/291.2
TXT Movable floor to facilitate maintenance (e.g., cleaning):

    Apparatus under subclass 291.1 wherein the bioreactor includes movable
    floors, whereby maintenance such as cleaning is facilitated.


CLS 435/291.3
TXT Vertically spaced stages, levels, or floors:

    Apparatus under subclass 291.1 wherein the bioreactor includes a series of
    vertically spaced stages, levels, or floors.


CLS 435/291.4
TXT Cascading:

    Apparatus under subclass 291.3 wherein the composition of an upper stage,
    level, or floor spills over into a lower stage, level, or floor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    294.1,  for vessels or trays in series.


CLS 435/291.5
TXT With agitator or mash turner:

    Apparatus under subclass 291.1 including means for mixing or stirring the
    mash.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    366,    Agitating, for mixing devices of general utility.


CLS 435/291.6
TXT With vertical axis of rotation:

    Apparatus under subclass 291.5 in which the axis of the mixing means is
    vertical.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes eccentrically moving mixing devices
    in which the rotating mixing means revolve in turn about an axis.


CLS 435/291.7
TXT With horizontal axis of rotation:

    Apparatus under subclass 291.5 in which the axis of the mixing means is
    horizontal.


CLS 435/291.8
TXT Rotating vessel:

    Apparatus under subclass 291.7 which includes a horizontally disposed
    vessel and means for rotating the vessel about its central axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290.3,  for a rotatably mounted composting apparatus.

    298.2,  for a rotatably mounted bioreactor of general utility.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, for rotatably mounted devices.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, particularly  subclass 209 for chemical
    reactors including means for rotating a reaction chamber during use.


CLS 435/292.1
TXT Including means to transmit light into a bioreactor to facilitate
    photo-bioreaction (e.g., photosynthesis):

    Apparatus under subclass 289.1 wherein the bioreactor includes means to
    facilitate photoreactions (e.g., light sources, transparent barriers, etc.)
    for the growth of photosynthetic micro-organisms or for the treatment of
    microorganisms or enzymes.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is  not intended to provide for means of
    simply viewing or detecting the level or presence  of the contents of a
    reactor.


CLS 435/293.1
TXT Tubular or plug flow bioreactor:

    Apparatus under subclass 289.1 wherein fluid or fluidized reagents are
    continuously pumped through substantially tubular structures.

    (1)     Note.   This form of reactor typically creates unequal conditions
    between two separated points in the reactor.  For example,  the
    concentrations of reactants at the inlet of such a reactor change as the
    reactants flow through  the tubular member.


CLS 435/293.2
TXT Radial or spiral flow bioreactor:

    Apparatus under subclass 293.1 wherein fluid flow in the tubular or plug
    flow bioreactor is in a radial or spiral direction.


CLS 435/294.1
TXT Vessels or trays in series:

    Apparatus under subclass 289.1 including vessels or trays in series.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291.4,  for cascading malting devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, particularly subclasses 188+ for chemical
    reactors including plural reaction stages of general use.


CLS 435/295.1
TXT Including a draft tube for agitation:

    Apparatus under subclass 289.1 including a  tubular element extending from
    a lower to a higher level in a vessel to provide for internal mixing.

    (1)     Note.  Draft tubes are used to facilitate circulation of a  fluid
    within a bioreactor for the purpose of mixing.  Separate means, such as an
    impeller or gas bubbles, are required to drive the fluid.

    (2)     Note.  An example of structures provided for herein is:



    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, particularly  subclass 227 for chemical
    reactors including a draft tube.


CLS 435/295.2
TXT Airlift bioreactor:

    Apparatus under subclass 295.1 whereby the driving means to circulate fluid
    in a bioreactor with a draft tube is a gas which is sparged through a
    lower, usually bottom, portion of the bioreactor.


CLS 435/295.3
TXT Including a semipermeable membrane or filter:

    Apparatus under subclass 295.1 wherein the bioreaction chamber includes at
    least one semiporous membrane or filter that is designed for holding or
    excluding a solid or dissolved reactant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    297.1,  for semipermeable membrane or filter containing reactors which do
    not include a draft tube.


CLS 435/296.1
TXT Bubble bioreactor:

    Apparatus under subclass 289.1 whereby the means to agitate fluid in a
    reactor is limited to sparging or bubbling gas in the bottom or lower
    portions of the reactor.


CLS 435/297.1
TXT Including semipermeable membrane or filter:

    Apparatus under subclass 289.1 wherein the reaction chamber includes at
    least one semi-porous membrane or filter that is designed for holding or
    excluding a solid or dissolved reactant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    295.3,  for semi-permeable membrane or filter containing reactors in
    combination with a draft tube.


CLS 435/297.2
TXT Including perfusion means:

    Apparatus under subclass 297.1 with means to cause fluid to flow through
    the semipermeable membrane or filter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284.1,  for differentiated tissue (e.g., organ) perfusion or preservation
    apparatus.


CLS 435/297.3
TXT Including a spinning semipermeable membrane or filter:

    Apparatus under subclass 297.2 wherein a semipermeable membrane or filter
    rotates or spins about an axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, particularly subclasses 359+ for
    apparatus using movable filters.


CLS 435/297.4
TXT Including hollow fiber or capillary:

    Apparatus under subclass 297.2 wherein the semipermeable membrane or filter
    consists of hollow fibers or capillary membranes.

    (1)     Note:  Hollow fibers and capillary membranes are small diameter
    open ended tubes, the walls of which are semipermeable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, particularly subclasses 500.23+
    for hollow fiber or cylinder material.


CLS 435/297.5
TXT In combination with a dish, plate, or tray:

    Apparatus under subclass 297.1 wherein the semipermeable membrane or filter
    is in combination with a dish, plate, or tray.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    288.3,  for  a dish, plate, slide, or tray used for measuring or testing.

    305.1+, for  a dish, plate, or tray of general use involving the growth, or
    propagation, of a microorganism or enzyme, or for the synthesis of a
    composition or compound using a microorganism or enzyme not in combination
    with a semipermeable membrane.


CLS 435/298.1
TXT Cylindrical reaction tank or vessel horizontally disposed with respect to
    its central axis:

    Apparatus under subclass 289.1 wherein a substantially cylindrical tank or
    vessel is horizontally disposed with respect to its central axis.


CLS 435/298.2
TXT With a rotatably mounted tank or vessel:

    Apparatus under subclass 298.1 including means providing for motion of the
    tank or vessel about its central axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290.3,  for a rotatably mounted composting apparatus.

    291.8,  for a rotatably mounted malting or mashing apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, for rotatably mounted devices.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, particularly  subclass 209 for chemical
    reactors including means for rotating a reaction chamber during use.


CLS 435/299.1
TXT Including solid extended fluid contact reaction surface:

    Apparatus under subclass 289.1 including a solid extended surface fluid
    contact reaction means.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are means providing a relatively large solid
    contact surface area within the reaction zone wherein a large surface area
    presents multiple reaction sites for contact by the reaction mixture and,
    thereby, enhance the rate and/or the completeness of the reaction (e.g.,
    inert Raschig rings, particulate absorbent, pleated surfaces, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, particularly  subclasses 211+ for chemical
    reactors of general use including solid extended surface fluid contact
    reaction means.


CLS 435/299.2
TXT Including a bottle, tube, jar, or flask:

    Apparatus under subclass 299.1 wherein a solid extended fluid contact
    reaction surface is in conjunction with a bottle, tube, jar, or flask.

    (1)     Note.  For bottles,tubes, jars, or flasks with solid partition
    walls for mere separation or compartmentalizing, see this class, subclass
    304.2.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    288.1+, for bottles, tubes, jars, or flasks specifically adapted to perform
    measuring or testing.

    304.1+, for bottles, tubes, jars, or flasks of general utility,
    particularly 304.2 which includes multiple internal compartments or baffles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, for bottles and jars of general utility and the
    closures therefor.


CLS 435/300.1
TXT Including off-gas trapping means:

    Apparatus under subclass 289.1 with means to trap gas evolved from the
    action of a micro-organism or enzyme reaction.


CLS 435/301.1
TXT Including foam breaking means:

    Apparatus under subclass 289.1 with means to separate the liquid and gas
    components of foam.

    (1)     Note.    Examples of such foam are those generated from the action
    of micro-organisms or enzymes, or those generated from sparging a fluid
    containing active micro-organisms or enzymes with a gas.


CLS 435/302.1
TXT Including magnetically coupled agitation means:

    Apparatus under subclass 289.1 including magnetically coupled agitation
    means.

    (1)     Note.   A magnetically coupled agitator requires a substantially
    closed container with an internal magnet, an external magnet held in close
    proximity to a wall of the container such that the internal and external
    magnets are coupled by their magnetic flux, and a means to rotate the
    external magnet.


    (2)     Note.  This subclass is not intended to include magnetically driven
    motors coupled to an agitation means.


CLS 435/303.1
TXT Incubator:

    Apparatus under subclass 289.1 including a housing for supporting or
    maintaining a reaction container in a desired relationship with other
    structures, including maintaining a proper environment (e.g., temperature,
    humidity, etc.) for micro-organisms to grow or enzymes to react.


CLS 435/303.2
TXT Specifically adapted for an anaerobic microorganism or enzyme (e.g.,
    anaerobe jars):

    Apparatus under subclass 303.1 with means specifically adapted for the
    growth of anaerobic micro-organisms or for the activity of anaerobic
    enzymes.


CLS 435/303.3
TXT Including an agitator:

    Apparatus under subclass 303.1 which includes an agitation means.


CLS 435/304.1
TXT Bottle, tube, jar, or flask:

    Apparatus under subclass 289.1 which is a bottle, tube, jar, or flask.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this definition are test tubes and capillary
    tubes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    288.1+, for bottles or flasks specifically adapted to perform measuring or
    testing.

    299.2,  for bottles and flasks containing a solid extended reaction surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, for bottles and jars of general utility and the
    closures therefor.


CLS 435/304.2
TXT Including multiple internal compartments or baffles:

    Apparatus under subclass 304.1 wherein the bottle, tube, jar, or flask
    contains multiple internal compartments or baffles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    288.2,  for bottles or flasks including multiple internal compartments or
    baffles specifically adapted to perform measuring or testing.


CLS 435/304.3
TXT Flat culture flask:

    Apparatus under subclass 304.1 having a substantially flat profile.

    (1)     Note.  Such flasks typically have a primary opening protruding from
    a side wall.

    (2)     Note.  An example of structures provided for herein is:



CLS 435/305.1
TXT Dish, plate, or tray:

    Apparatus under subclass 289.1 including a dish, plate, or tray.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    288.3+, for  a dish, plate, slide, or tray used for measuring or testing.

    297.5,  for a dish, plate, or tray of general use involving the growth or
    propagation of a micro-organism or enzyme, or for the synthesis of a
    composition or compound using a micro-organism or enzyme  in combination
    with a semipermeable membrane or filter.


CLS 435/305.2
TXT Multicompartmented:

    Apparatus under subclass 305.1 including two or more separate media areas,
    or areas adapted to contain the same or different media (e.g., wells, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    288.4,  for  a dish, plate, or tray including multiple internal
    compartments or baffles specifically adapted for measuring and testing.


CLS 435/305.3
TXT Including cover seal:

    Apparatus under subclass 305.2 which includes a means, separate and apart
    from the internal compartments, to prevent the passage of material to or
    from the interior of a multicompartmented dish, plate, or tray.


CLS 435/305.4
TXT Including cover seal:

    Apparatus under subclass 305.1 which includes a means to prevent the
    passage of material to or from the interior of a dish, plate, or tray.


CLS 435/306.1
TXT Involving lysis of a microorganism by means other than comminution:

    Apparatus under subclass 283.1 with means to lyse or rupture
    micro-organisms by addition of material or by mechanical means other than
    comminution.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259,    for associated processes of lysing cells.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, particularly subclass
    2 for methods of and apparatus for the comminution of micro-organisms or
    tissues.


CLS 435/307.1
TXT Micro-organism preservation, storage, or transport apparatus:

    Apparatus under subclass 283.1 for preserving, storing, or transporting a
    micro-organism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for processes of maintaining differentiated tissue or an organ in a
    viable state.

    2,      for processes or media for maintaining blood or sperm in a
    physiologically active state.

    260,    for associated processes of preserving or maintaining a
    microorganism, per se, in a viable state.

    284.1,  for a differentiated tissue (e.g., organ) perfusion or preservation
    apparatus.


CLS 435/308.1
TXT Means for separation or recovery of a microorganism from culture media:

    Apparatus under subclass 283.1 with means to separate or recover a
    micro-organism from culture media.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261,    for associated processes of separation of micro-organisms from
    culture media.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, for separation apparatus of
    general utility.


CLS 435/309.1
TXT Inoculator, streaker, or sampler:

    Apparatus under subclass 283.1 including means for effecting physical
    contact between a sample and a media or means for physically removing
    material as a sample.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286.3,  for an automatically controlled plater, streaker, or spreader
    apparatus.


CLS 435/309.2
TXT Means for inoculation or sampling of a closed vessel:

    Apparatus under subclass 309.1 including means to penetrate a closed vessel
    for the purpose of inoculation or sampling.


CLS 435/309.3
TXT Loop or wire streaker:

    Apparatus under subclass 309.1 of wire or plastic material specifically
    adapted to pick-up and move colonies of micro-organisms or small amounts of
    liquid containing micro-organisms.


CLS 435/309.4
TXT Replica plate:

    Apparatus under subclass 309.1 including a means specifically adapted to
    sample from a first plate, and transfer and inoculate to a second plate so
    that an identical pattern of colonies forms on the second plate.


CLS 435/317.1
TXT MISCELLANEOUS (E.G., SUBCELLULAR PARTS OF MICRO-ORGANISMS, ETC.):Subject
    matter under the class definition not otherwise provided for and including
    subcellular parts of micro-organisms such as organelles, i.e.,
    mitochondria, microsomes, chloroplasts, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for apparatus for maintaining a tissue or organ in a viable state.

    284+    for apparatus for the propagation of tissue.

    820,    for subcellular parts of micro-organisms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 105 for control elements responsive to
    a sensed operating condition; subclasses 150+ for chemical analytical
    apparatus; subclass 162 for automatic analytical monitor and control of
    chemical processes; and subclasses 163+ for chemical analytical apparatus
    with continuous sample movement.

    536,    Organic Compounds, subclass 27 for DNA fragments, genes, etc.


CLS 435/320.1
TXT VECTOR, PER SE (E.G., PLASMID, HYBRID PLASMID, COSMID, VIRAL VECTOR,
    BACTERIOPHAGE VECTOR, ETC.):Subject matter under the class definition
    directed to self-replicating nucleic acid molecules which may be employed
    to introduce a nucleic acid sequence or gene into a cell; such nucleic acid
    molecules are designated as vectors and may be in the form of a plasmid,
    hybrid plasmid, cosmid, viral vector, bacteriophage vector, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Vectors or vehicles may be used in the transformation or
    transfection of a cell.  Transformation is the acquisition of new genetic
    material by incorporation of exogenous DNA.  Transfection is the transfer
    of genetic information to a cell using isolated DNA or RNA.

    (2)     Note.  A plasmid is an autonomously replicating circular
    extrachromosomal DNA element.  A hybrid plasmid is a plasmid which has been
    broken open, has had DNA from another organism spliced into it, and has
    been resealed.  A cosmid is a plasmid into which phage lambda "cos" sites
    have been inserted.

    (3)     Note.  A viral vector (e.g., SV40, etc.) is a plant or animal virus
    which is specifically used to introduce exogenous DNA into host cells.  A
    bacteriophage vector (e.g., phage lambda, etc.) is a bacterial virus which
    is specifically used to introduce exogenous DNA into host cells.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    536,    Organic Compounds, subclass 27 for DNA fragments, genes, etc.

    935,    Cross-Reference Art Collection, Genetic Engineering:  Recombinant
    DNA Technology, Hybrid or Fused Cell Technology and Related Manipulations
    of Nucleic Acids, subclasses 25 and 32 for plant and animal virus vectors,
    subclasses 26-30 for plasmids and cosmids, and 31 for bacteriophage vectors.


CLS 435/325
TXT ANIMAL CELL, PER SE (E.G., CELL LINES, ETC.); COMPOSITION THEREOF; PROCESS
    OF PROPAGATING, MAINTAINING OR PRESERVING AN ANIMAL CELL OR COMPOSITION
    THEREOF; PROCESS OF ISOLATING OR SEPARATING AN ANIMAL CELL OR COMPOSITION
    THEREOF; PROCESS OF PREPARING A COMPOSITION CONTAINING AN ANIMAL CELL;
    CULTURE MEDIA THEREFORE:

    Subject matter under the class definition including animal cells, per se;
    compositions containing animal cells; processes of in vitro propagation of
    animal cells or groups of cells that are not organized tissues; processes
    of maintaining or preserving animal cells or compositions thereof;
    processes of isolating or separating an animal cell or composition thereof;
    processes of preparing a composition containing animal cells; culture media
    therefore.

    (1)     Note. Where the tissue is first cultured and then destroyed by
    subsequent extraction, for example to extract compound or composition from
    the tissue, the process is not included in this subclass.  Such subject
    matter is provided for in subclasses 41+ of this class.

    (2)     Note. This subclass provides for the culture of skin cells for a
    purpose such as transplantation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    317.1,  for subcellular parts of micro-organisms

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses
    93.1+ for bio-affecting or body treating compositions which contain whole
    live micro-organisms, cells, or viruses and subclasses 520+ for
    bio-affecting or body treating compositions containing extracts, body
    fluids, or cellular material of undetermined constitution derived from
    animal.


CLS 435/326
TXT Animal cell, per se, expressing immunoglobulin, antibody, or fragment
    thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 325 wherein the animal cells produce
    immunoglobulin, antibody, or a fragment thereof.

    (1)     Note. This subclass includes cells producing immunoglobulins or
    gamma globulins, whether or not the binding specificities are disclosed.

    (2)     Note. Mixtures of cells of the same origin; i.e., species, tissue,
    etc., encoding different antibodies; e.g., in a library, etc., are
    encompassed by this subclass.

    (3)     Note. The major classes of immunoglobulins are IgG, IgM, IgA, IgD,
    and IgE.  Subclasses of immunoglobulins include IgG1, IgG2a, IgG2b, IgG3,
    and IgG4 subclasses which comprise the IgG class.  IgY, which is similar to
    IgG, is found only in birds.

    (4)     Note. Synonyms include immune globulin, gamma globulin, Ig, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4+,     for the use of antibodies in immunological testing involving a
    micro-organism or enzyme.  See particularly subclasses 7.1+.

    69.1+,  for making antibodies involving an enzyme or micro-organism.

    188,    for antibodies conjugated to enzymes

    188.5,  for catalytic antibodies

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, for antibody
    containing bio-affecting or body treating compositions and nominal methods
    of using said compositions according to the Class 424 definitions.  See
    subclasses 1.49+ for compositions comprising radiolabelled antibody, or
    antibody fragment, or immunoglobulin, subclasses 9.3+ and 9.4+ for
    non-radioactive in vivo testing compositions, and subclasses 130.1+ for
    body treating compositions containing an immunoglobulin, an antiserum, an
    antibody, or an antibody fragment.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 500+
    for immunoassays and binding assays including thyroid hormone tests,
    biospecific ligand binding assays, etc.  Subclasses 543 through 548 include
    methods of modifying antigens and antibodies as part of a testing procedure.

    525,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 54.1 for proteins or
    biologically active polypeptides chemically bound to synthetic resins.

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives; Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclasses 387.1+, for antibodies or
    antisera or fragments, other than those which are conjugated or adsorbed to
    other substances; subclasses 391.1+, for antibodies or antisera or
    fragments thereof that are conjugated or adsorbed to other substances;
    subclass 829, for blood proteins including immunoglobulins; subclass 830,
    for plasma or serum proteins including immunoglobulins; subclass 831, for
    immunoglobulins and other proteins isolated via the Cohn fractionation
    method; subclass 832, for immunoglobulins isolated from milk or colostrum;
    subclass 833, for immunoglobulins isolated from whey; and subclass 851, for
    immunoglobulins isolated from placental extracts.


CLS 435/327
TXT Immunoglobulin or antibody is anti-idiotypic:

    Subject matter under subclass 326 involving an animal cell which produces
    an antibody or antibody fragment that binds another antibody at one of its
    idiotopes.

    (1)     Note. An idiotope is an antigenic determinant in the variable
    region of the antibody.

    (2)     Note. An idiotype is that set of idiotopes characteristic of a
    particular antibody.

    (3)     Note. Included in this subclass are "internal image" antibodies
    which are a subset of anti-idiotypic antibodies that mimic the antigen in
    their ability to elicit antibodies that bind said antigen.

    (4)     Note. It is suggested that the patents in this subclass be
    cross-referenced to Class 530, in the appropriate subclasses, 387.1 through
    389.8, that provide for the binding specificity of the antibodies bound by
    the anti-idiotypic antibodies, if disclosed.


CLS 435/328
TXT Immunoglobulin or antibody is chimeric, mutated, or a recombined hybrid
    (e.g., bifunctional, bispecific, rodent-human chimeric, single chain, rFv,
    immunoglobulin fusion protein, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 326 involving an animal cell which produces
    an antibody or antibody fragment altered with respect to its amino acid
    sequence; with respect to its composition of heavy and light chains or
    immunoglobulin domains; or with respect to its glycosylation, as compared
    with that found in nature; or involving an antibody or antibody fragment
    fused to a nonimmunoglobulin amino acid sequence.

    (1)     Note. Chimeric and recombined hybrid antibodies comprise amino acid
    sequences derived from two or more nonidentical immunoglobulin molecules;
    e.g., interspecies combinations, etc.

    (2)     Note. It is suggested that the patents in this subclass be
    cross-referenced to Class 530, in the appropriate subclasses, 387.1 through
    389.8, that provide for the binding specificity of the antibodies employed
    herein, if disclosed.


CLS 435/329
TXT Immunoglobulin or antibody binds an oligosaccharide structure other than
    nucleic acid:

    Subject matter under subclass 326 involving an animal cell which produces
    an antibody or antigen-binding fragment thereof whose antigen-binding
    site(s) will combine with an oligosaccharide structure, other than a
    nucleic acid, that is either free, a component of a glycoprotein, or a
    component of a glycolipid.

    (1)     Note. The oligosaccharide structure can be one that is
    schematically illustrated in the disclosure or one that is known in the
    art, such as the carbohydrate component of ganglioside GD3.

    (2)     Note. Some of the oligosaccharide structures disclosed by the
    patents of this subclass are expressed on the surfaces of cancer cells as
    components of glycoproteins or glycolipids and are related to the A, B, Le,
    or H blood-group antigens.

    (3)     Note. It is suggested that the patents in this subclass be
    cross-referenced to Class 530, in the appropriate subclasses, 388.2 through
    389.8, that provide for the binding specificity of the antibodies that bind
    the micro-organism(s) upon which the oligosaccharide structure is
    expressed, if such disclosure is present.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333,    for an animal cell producing a monoclonal antibody which binds to a
    nucleic acid or derivative or component thereof.

    344.1,  for an animal cell producing a monoclonal antibody which binds to
    an antigen characterized by name or molecular weight (e.g., CEA, NCA, CC
    glycoprotein, melanoma gp 150 antigen, etc.).


CLS 435/330
TXT Immunoglobulin or antibody binds an expression product of a cancer related
    gene or fragment thereof (e.g., oncogene, proto-oncogene, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 326 involving an animal cell which produces
    an antibody or antigen-binding fragment thereof whose antigen-binding
    site(s) will combine with an expression product or fragment thereof of a
    cancer related gene, such as an oncogene or proto-oncogene.

    (1)     Note. An oncogene is a genetic sequence whose expression transforms
    a normal cell into a cancerous cell.  A proto-oncogene is a genetic
    sequence found in a noncancerous cell which, when mutated in a
    characteristic way, can become an oncogene.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    344.1,  for an animal cell producing a monoclonal antibody which binds to
    an antigen characterized by name or molecular weight (e.g., CEA, NCA, CC
    glycoprotein, melanoma gp 150 antigen, etc.).


CLS 435/331
TXT Immunoglobulin or antibody binds a specifically identified amino acid
    sequence:

    Subject matter under subclass 326 involving an animal cell which produces
    an antibody or antigen-binding fragment thereof whose antigen-binding
    site(s) will combine with a protein or peptide antigen or antigenic
    determinant whose amino acid sequence is disclosed.

    (1)     Note. It is suggested that the patents in this subclass be
    cross-referenced to Class 530, in the appropriate subclasses, 387.1 through
    389.8, that provide for antibodies that bind the antigen or antigenic
    determinant that the disclosed sequence comprises.


CLS 435/332
TXT Immunoglobulin or antibody binds a micro-organism or normal or mutant
    component or product thereof (e.g., animal cell, cell surface antigen,
    secretory product, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 326 involving an animal cell which produces a
    monoclonal antibody or antigen-binding fragment thereof whose
    antigen-binding site(s) will combine with an integral or isolated part of a
    micro-organism, or with a substance shed or secreted by a micro-organism,
    or with a chemically-altered component of a micro-organism, or with a
    chemically-altered substance shed or secreted by a micro-organism.

    (1)     Note. A micro-organism, for the purpose of this and the indented
    subclasses, is a cell from a multicellular organism, a single-celled
    organism, a virus, or other intracellular organism.

    (2)     Note. A mutant or chemically-altered component or product of a
    micro-organism may be made by chemical synthesis or chemical modification
    or by expression of a cloned altered gene.

    (3)     Note. Monoclonal antibodies or fragments thereof that bind a mutant
    or chemically-altered component or product of a micro-organism are proper
    for the subclass that provides for monoclonal antibodies that bind the
    corresponding normal component or product.


CLS 435/333
TXT Binds a nucleic acid or derivative or component thereof (e.g., DNA, RNA,
    DNA-RNA hybrid, nucleotide, nucleoside, carcinogen-DNA adduct, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 332 involving an animal cell which produces a
    monoclonal antibody or antigen-binding fragment thereof whose
    antigen-binding site(s) will combine with a nucleic acid, a component of a
    nucleic acid, such as a nucleotide or nucleoside, or a modified nucleic
    acid, such as carcinogen-DNA adduct resulting from exposure to a carcinogen.

    (1)     Note. An adduct is an addition group or compound.


CLS 435/334
TXT Binds a receptor (e.g., transferrin receptor, Fc receptor, dihydropyridine
    receptor, IL-2 receptor, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 332 involving an animal cell which produces a
    monoclonal antibody or antigen-binding fragment thereof whose
    antigen-binding site(s) will combine with a free or
    micro-organism-associated receptor.

    (1)     Note. A receptor is a structure integral to a micro-organism or
    released into the surrounding milieu that has binding specificity for a
    particular three-dimensional structural configuration of a molecule or
    portion thereof.

    (2)     Note. For the purpose of this subclass, an antibody is not
    considered a receptor.  Patents disclosing cells producing
    nonanti-idiotypic monoclonal antibodies or fragments thereof that bind
    other immunoglobulins are proper for subclass 337 unless the monoclonal
    antibodies specifically bind lymphocyte-bound immunoglobulins, in which
    case the patents are proper for subclass 343.1.


CLS 435/335
TXT Binds a lymphokine, cytokine, or other secreted growth regulatory factor,
    differentiation factor, intercellular mediator specific for a hematopoietic
    cell (e.g., interleukin, interferon, erythropoietin, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 332 involving an animal cell which produces a
    monoclonal antibody or antigen-binding fragment thereof whose
    antigen-binding site(s) will combine with a lymphokine, cytokine, or any
    other secreted growth stimulatory factor, growth inhibitory factor,
    differentiation factor, or intercellular mediator that targets any type(s)
    of hematopoietic cell(s).

    (1)     Note. The term "growth regulatory factor" is meant to encompass any
    secretory factor that is growth-stimulatory or growth-inhibitory; i.e.,
    that will stimulate or inhibit clonal expansion of cells.

    (2)     Note. The term "differentiation factor" is meant to encompass any
    secretory factor that causes cells to progress from a relatively
    undifferentiated state to a more differentiated state, wherein said
    progression may include clonal expansion.

    (3)     Note. The term "intercellular mediator" is meant to encompass any
    secretory factor that affects cellular functions such as chemotaxis, etc.

    (4)     Note. See Class 424, subclass 85.1 definitions for examples of
    lymphokines and cytokines.

    (5)     Note. Hematopoietic cells are considered to be bone marrow stem
    cells and cells derived from bone marrow stem cells, including cells at any
    stage of differentiation from progenitor cells to mature erythrocytes,
    granulocytes, lymphocytes, etc., both normal and neoplastic.


CLS 435/336
TXT Binds a hormone or other secreted growth regulatory factor, differentiation
    factor, intercellular mediator, or neurotransmitter (e.g., insulin, human
    chorionic gonadotropin, intragonadal regulatory protein, Mullerian
    inhibiting substance, inhibin, epidermal growth factor, nerve growth
    factor, dopamine, norepinephrine, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 332 involving an animal cell which produces a
    monoclonal antibody or antigen-binding fragment thereof whose
    antigen-binding site(s) will combine with a neurotransmitter, with a
    hormone, or with any other secreted growth regulatory factor,
    differentiation factor, or intercellular mediator that targets cells other
    than hematopoietic cells.

    (1)     Note. The term "growth regulatory factor" is meant to encompass any
    secretory factor that is growth-stimulatory or growth-inhibitory; i.e.,
    that will stimulate or inhibit clonal expansion of cells.

    (2)     Note. The term "differentiation factor" is meant to encompass any
    secretory factor that causes cells to progress from a relatively
    undifferentiated state to a more differentiated state, wherein said
    progression may include clonal expansion.

    (3)     Note. The term "intercellular mediator" is meant to encompass any
    secretory factor that affects cellular functions such as chemotaxis, etc.


CLS 435/337
TXT Binds a plasma protein, serum protein, or fibrin (e.g., clotting factor,
    fibrinolytic factor, complement factor, immunoglobulin, apolipoprotein,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 332 involving an animal cell which produces a
    monoclonal antibody or antigen-binding fragment thereof whose
    antigen-binding site(s) will combine with a plasma protein, serum protein,
    or with fibrin.

    (1)     Note. Patents with disclosures to cells producing monoclonal
    antibodies or fragments thereof that bind proteins, including enzymes, that
    are members of plasma "activation systems", such as the clotting system,
    the fibrinolytic system, the bradykinin system, and the complement system,
    are proper for this subclass.

    (2)     Note. Patents with disclosures to cells producing nonanti-idiotypic
    monoclonal antibodies or fragments thereof that bind immunoglobulins are
    proper for this subclass, unless the monoclonal antibodies specifically
    bind lymphocyte-bound immunoglobulins, in which case, they are proper for
    subclass 343.1.

    (3)     Note. See Class 530, subclasses 380+ definitions for examples of
    plasma and serum proteins.


CLS 435/338
TXT Binds an enzyme:

    Subject matter under subclass 332 involving an animal cell which produces a
    monoclonal antibody or antigen-binding fragment thereof whose
    antigen-binding site(s) will combine with an enzyme.


CLS 435/339
TXT Binds a virus or component or product thereof (e.g., virus associated
    antigen, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 332 involving an animal cell which produces a
    monoclonal antibody or antigen-binding fragment thereof whose
    antigen-binding site(s) will combine with an integral or isolated part of a
    virus, or with a substance shed by a virus, such as a viral antigen.


CLS 435/339.1
TXT Binds a retrovirus or component or product thereof (e.g., HIV, LAV, HTLV,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 339 involving an animal cell which produces a
    monoclonal antibody or antigen-binding fragment thereof whose
    antigen-binding site(s) will combine with an integral or isolated part of a
    retrovirus, or with a substance shed by a retrovirus, such as a viral
    antigen.

    (1)     Note. Retroviruses are RNA viruses that encode the enzyme, reverse
    transcriptase, and are associated with acquired immune deficiency syndrome
    (AIDS) and related disorders, as well as with some forms of cancer, such as
    those caused by HTLV (human T-lymphotrophic virus) I and II, Rous sarcoma
    virus, MMTV (murine mammary tumor virus), feline leukemia virus, etc.


CLS 435/340
TXT Binds a bacterium or similar micro-organism or component or product thereof
    (e.g., Streptococcus, Legionella, Mycoplasma, bacterium associated antigen,
    exotoxin, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 332 involving an animal cell which produces a
    monoclonal antibody or antigen-binding fragment thereof whose
    antigen-binding site(s) will combine with an integral or isolated part of a
    bacterium or similar micro-organism, or with a substance shed or secreted
    by a bacterium or similar micro-organism.

    (1)     Note. For the purpose of this subclass, micro-organisms "similar"
    to bacteria are those that have properties in common with typical bacteria,
    but which differ from them in characteristic ways.  Examples of such
    micro-organisms are rickettsiae, chlamydiae, and mycoplasmas.


CLS 435/341
TXT Binds a fungus or plant cell or component or product thereof (e.g., fungus
    associated antigen, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 332 involving an animal cell which produces a
    monoclonal antibody or antigen-binding fragment thereof whose
    antigen-binding site(s) will combine with an integral or isolated part of a
    fungus or plant cell, or with a substance shed or secreted by a fungus or
    plant cell.

    (1)     Note. Fungi include yeasts and molds.


CLS 435/342
TXT Binds a parasitic protozoan or metazoan cell or component or product
    thereof (e.g., Dirofilaria, Eimeria, Coccidia, Trichinella, parasite cell
    surface antigen, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 332 involving an animal cell which produces a
    monoclonal antibody or antigen-binding fragment thereof whose
    antigen-binding site(s) will combine with an integral or isolated part of a
    parasitic protozoan or metazoan cell, or with a substance shed or secreted
    by a parasitic protozoan or metazoan cell.

    (1)     Note. Metazoan parasites include such multicellular organisms as
    the parasitic flatworms and roundworms.


CLS 435/343
TXT Binds a hematopoietic cell or component or product thereof (e.g.,
    erythrocyte, granulocyte, macrophage, monocyte, platelet, myelogenous
    leukemia cell, bone marrow stem cell, granulocytic cell surface antigen,
    hemoglobin, thrombospondin, glycophorin, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 332 involving an animal cell which produces a
    monoclonal antibody or antigen-binding fragment thereof whose
    antigen-binding site(s) will combine with an integral or isolated part of a
    hematopoietic cell, or with a substance shed or secreted by a hematopoietic
    cell.

    (1)     Note. Hematopoietic cells are considered to be bone marrow stem
    cells and cells derived from bone marrow stem cells including cells at any
    stage of differentiation from progenitor cells to mature erythrocytes,
    granulocytes, lymphocytes, etc., both normal and neoplastic.


CLS 435/343.1
TXT Binds a lymphocytic or lymphocytic-like cell or component or product
    thereof (e.g., B cell, B-lineage bone marrow cell, null cell, natural
    killer cell, B-lymphoblastoid cell, B-lineage acute lymphoblastic leukemia
    cell, B-lymphocytic cell surface antigen, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 343 involving an animal cell which produces a
    monoclonal antibody or antigen-binding fragment thereof whose
    antigen-binding site(s) will combine with an integral or isolated part of a
    lymphocytic or lymphocytic-like cell, or with a substance shed or secreted
    by a lymphocytic cell or lymphocytic-like cell.

    (1)     Note. Lymphocytes are considered to be either B- or T-lineage
    cells.  Null cells, K cells, and natural killer cells are considered
    "lymphocytic-like" cells, since they have the morphology of lymphocytes but
    not the antigenic markers of either B- or T-lineage cells.


CLS 435/343.2
TXT Binds a T-lymphocytic cell or component or product thereof (e.g., T- cell,
    thymocyte, T-lineage bone marrow cell, T-lymphoblastoid cell, T-lineage
    acute lymphoblastic leukemia cell, T-lymphocytic cell surface antigen,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 343.1 involving an animal cell which produces
    a monoclonal antibody or antigen-binding fragment thereof whose
    antigen-binding site(s) will combine with an integral or isolated part of a
    T-lymphocytic cell, or with a substance shed or secreted by a T-lymphocytic
    cell.


CLS 435/344
TXT Binds a cancer cell or component or product thereof (e.g., cell surface
    antigen, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 332 involving an animal cell which produces a
    monoclonal antibody or antigen-binding fragment thereof whose
    antigen-binding site(s) will combine with an integral or isolated part of a
    cancer cell, or with a substance shed or secreted by a cancer cell.


CLS 435/344.1
TXT Binds an antigen characterized by name or molecular weight (e.g., CEA, NCA,
    CC glycoprotein, melanoma gp 150 antigen, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 344 involving an animal cell which produces a
    monoclonal antibody or antigen-binding fragment thereof whose
    antigen-binding site(s) will combine with an antigen that is an integral or
    isolated part of cancer cell, or that is shed or secreted by a cancer cell,
    and that is disclosed by name or molecular weight.


CLS 435/345
TXT Immunoglobulin or antibody binds a drug, hapten, hapten-carrier complex, or
    specifically identified chemical structure (e.g., theophylline, digoxin,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 326 involving an animal cell which produces a
    monoclonal antibody or antigen-binding fragment thereof whose
    antigen-binding site(s) will combine with a drug, hapten, hapten-carrier
    complex, or with a specifically-identified chemical structure that is
    disclosed.

    (1)     Note. A hapten is a molecule or portion thereof that has little or
    no antigenicity unless coupled to a carrier molecule that is antigenic.
    Haptens are usually, but not always, of low molecular weight.  Common
    carriers are proteins such as bovine serum albumin (BSA) and keyhole limpet
    hemocyanin (KLH).

    (2)     Note. This is the proper subclass for animal cells producing
    catalytic antibodies.


CLS 435/346
TXT Fused or hybrid cell, per se:

    Subject matter under subclass 325 wherein the animal cell is a cell
    resulting from (a) the fusion of two cells or (b) the insertion of the
    nucleus of one cell into another.


CLS 435/347
TXT Two or more cell types, per se, in co-culture:

    Subject matter under subclass 325 wherein two or more types of cell are
    present in the same cell culture.

    (1)     Note. Methods of culturing two or more types of cells together;
    i.e., methods of co-culturing, are classified in subclass 373 of this class.


CLS 435/348
TXT Insect cell, per se:

    Subject matter under subclass 325 wherein the animal cell is of insect
    origin.

    (1)     Note. Insects do not include other arthropods such as arachnids and
    crustaceans.


CLS 435/349
TXT Avian cell, per se:

    Subject matter under subclass 325 wherein the animal cell is of avian
    origin; i.e., from a bird.


CLS 435/350
TXT Canine cell, per se:

    Subject matter under subclass 325 wherein the animal cell is of canine
    origin.

    (1)     Note. Canines are members of the family Canidae, including dogs,
    wolves, jackals, foxes, coyotes, etc.


CLS 435/351
TXT Feline cell, per se:

    Subject matter under subclass 325 wherein the animal cell is of feline
    origin.

    (1)     Note. Felines are members of the family Felidae, including domestic
    cats, lions, tigers, jaguars, leopards, cheetahs, etc.


CLS 435/352
TXT Rodent cell, per se:

    Subject matter under subclass 325 wherein the animal cell is of rodent
    origin.

    (1)     Note. Rodents are members of the order Rodentia, including rats,
    mice, deer mice, Chinese hamsters, Syrian hamsters, squirrels, chipmunks,
    guinea pigs, woodchucks, marmots, muskrats, lemmings, voles, chinchillas,
    etc.  Excluded from the order Rodentia, and therefore from this subclass,
    are:  members of the order Lagomorpha; e.g., rabbits and hares; members of
    the order Carnivora; e.g., weasels, minks, raccoons, etc.; and members of
    the order Insectivora; e.g., shrews, moles, and hedgehogs.


CLS 435/353
TXT Rat (i.e., Rattus):

    Subject matter under subclass 352 wherein the animal cell is of rat origin.

    (1)     Note. This subclass includes members of the genus Rattus, including
    the common domestic rat; i.e., laboratory rat.


CLS 435/354
TXT Mouse (i.e., Mus):

    Subject matter under subclass 352 wherein the animal cell is of mouse
    origin.

    (1)     Note. This subclass includes members of the genus Mus, including
    the common domestic mouse; i.e., laboratory mouse.


CLS 435/355
TXT Blood or lymphatic origin or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 354 wherein the mouse cell is of blood or
    lymphatic origin.


CLS 435/356
TXT L cell or derivative (e.g., Ltk(-), etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 354 wherein the mouse cell is of L cell
    origin.


CLS 435/357
TXT Fibroblast, fibroblast-like cell or derivative (e.g., NIH 3T3, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 354 wherein the mouse cell is of fibroblast
    origin or is most similar to a fibroblast in phenotype.


CLS 435/358
TXT Chinese Hamster Ovary (i.e., CHO):

    Subject matter under subclass 352 wherein the animal cell is of Chinese
    Hamster ovary origin.


CLS 435/359
TXT Expressing recombinant tPA:

    Subject matter under subclass 358 wherein the Chinese Hamster ovary cell
    expresses tissue plasminogen activator (tPA) from a recombinant gene.


CLS 435/360
TXT Expressing recombinant hormone or growth factor:

    Subject matter under subclass 358 wherein the Chinese Hamster ovary cell
    expresses a polypeptide having hormone or growth factor activity, said
    polypeptide being expressed from a recombinant gene.


CLS 435/361
TXT Expressing recombinant receptor:

    Subject matter under subclass 358 wherein the Chinese Hamster ovary cell
    expresses a receptor polypeptide from a recombinant gene.


CLS 435/362
TXT Expressing recombinant antigen:

    Subject matter under subclass 358 wherein the Chinese Hamster ovary cell
    expresses a polypeptide used to stimulate an immune response or for
    recognition by an antibody, said polypeptide being expressed from a
    recombinant gene.


CLS 435/363
TXT Primate cell, per se:

    Subject matter under subclass 325 wherein the animal cell is of primate
    origin.

    (1)     Note. Primates are members of the order Primates, including humans,
    apes, monkeys, lemurs, marmosets, tamarins, baboons, etc.


CLS 435/364
TXT Monkey kidney:

    Subject matter under subclass 363 wherein the primate cell is of monkey
    kidney origin.


CLS 435/365
TXT COS (e.g., COS-7, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 364 wherein the monkey kidney cell is a COS
    cell.

    (1)     Note. COS-1 and COS-7 are African Green monkey kidney cells
    transformed with replication-defective SV40, and which exhibit
    fibroblast-like morphology.


CLS 435/365.1
TXT Expressing recombinant lymphokine, interferon, hormone, growth factor or
    morphogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 wherein the COS cell expresses a
    polypeptide having lymphokine, interferon, hormone, growth factor or
    morphogen activity, said polypeptide being expressed from a recombinant
    gene.


CLS 435/366
TXT Human:

    Subject matter under subclass 363 wherein the primate cell is of human
    origin.


CLS 435/367
TXT HeLa cell or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 366 wherein the human cell is of HeLa cell
    origin.


CLS 435/368
TXT Nervous system origin or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 366 wherein the human cell is of nervous
    system origin.

    (1)     Note. This subclass includes, in addition to neurons, those cells
    normally associated with neuron in vivo; e.g., glial cells.


CLS 435/369
TXT Renal origin or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 366 wherein the human cell is of renal; i.e.,
    kidney, origin.

    (1)     Note. Excluded from this subclass are cells of urinary tract origin
    outside the kidney; e.g., urinary bladder cells.


CLS 435/370
TXT Hepatic origin or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 366 wherein the human cell is of hepatic;
    i.e., liver, origin.


CLS 435/371
TXT Epithelial origin or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 366 wherein the human cell is of epithelial
    origin.


CLS 435/372
TXT Blood, lymphatic or bone marrow origin or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 366 wherein the human cell is of blood,
    lymphatic or bone marrow origin.


CLS 435/372.1
TXT Myeloma origin or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 372 wherein the human cell is of myeloma
    origin.

    (1)     Note. A myeloma is a primary tumor arising from bone marrow cells.


CLS 435/372.2
TXT B-cell or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 372 wherein the human cell is a B-cell; i.e.,
    B-lymphocyte.


CLS 435/372.3
TXT T-cell or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 372 wherein the human cell is a T-cell; i.e.,
    T-lymphocyte.


CLS 435/373
TXT Method of co-culturing cells:

    Subject matter under subclass 325 wherein two or more different animal cell
    types are cultured together.


CLS 435/374
TXT Method of storing cells in a viable state:

    Subject matter under subclass 325 wherein animal cells are stored under
    conditions to maintain their viability.


CLS 435/375
TXT Method of regulating cell metabolism or physiology:

    Subject matter under subclass 325 wherein a particular metabolic activity
    or physiological trait of the animal cell is nonmutagenically and
    non-recombinantly altered.

    (1)     Note. Examples of such activities or traits included in this and
    the indented subclasses which may be altered or regulated are the
    differentiation state of said cells, ability of cells to metabolize nitric
    oxide, cell-to-cell contact, cell cycle synchronization or lack thereof,
    resistance or sensitivity to particular compounds, etc.

    (2)     Note. Excluded from this subclass are methods which alter the
    physiology of cells in a broad or nonspecific manner; e.g., mere culturing
    in a medium, which promotes normal cell growth and division, or shifting
    the culture temperature to achieve a general heat shock response.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for mutagenic and/or recombinant methods which are part of a
    selection, assay, or test process.

    172.1+, for methods of mutating or genetically altering cells.


CLS 435/376
TXT Method of synchronizing cell division:

    Subject matter under subclass 375 wherein the cell cycles of a plurality of
    cells are brought to the same point in the cell cycle, whereupon cell
    division occurs essentially in phase for at least one cell cycle.


CLS 435/377
TXT Method of altering the differentiation state of the cell:

    Subject matter under subclass 375 wherein the cell is caused to progress to
    a more specialized state; i.e., more differentiated; is caused to regress
    to a less specialized state; i.e., less differentiated; or is prevented
    from progressing with an increase or decrease in the degree of
    differentiation.

    (1)     Note. An example of subject matter intended for this subclass would
    be the use of retinoic acid to cause tumor cells to differentiate.

    (2)     Note. Methods of employing only substances which merely promote or
    inhibit cell division without altering the differentiation state of the
    cell are classified in this class, subclass 384.


CLS 435/378
TXT Method of detaching cells, digesting tissue or establishing a primary
    culture:

    Subject matter under subclass 325 wherein animal cells are detached from a
    solid surface or matrix, or from one another, or a primary culture of
    animal cells is established.

    (1)     Note. Establishing a primary culture entails starting a culture of
    the organisms of choice from their original source, such as a tissue
    sample, blood, etc.


CLS 435/379
TXT Using mechanical means (e.g., trituration, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 378 wherein the cells are detached using a
    mechanical means of separating, triturating, cutting, or comminuting the
    matrix or tissue.


CLS 435/380
TXT Releasing bound or adhered cell using protease:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 wherein the cells are released from a
    solid surface or matrix using a proteolytic enzyme.


CLS 435/381
TXT Digesting tissue with protease:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 wherein the cells in a tissue are
    detached from one another using a proteolytic enzyme.


CLS 435/382
TXT Method of culturing encapsulated cells:

    Subject matter under subclass 325 wherein an encapsulated cell is cultured.

    (1)     Note. An encapsulated cell is a cell held within or coated by a
    polymer or gel layer; e.g., alginate, gelatin, albumin, or a semi-permeable
    polymer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41+,    for the use of an encapsulated cell to produce a product.

    174+,   for methods of immobilizing animal cells.


CLS 435/383
TXT Method of culturing cells in suspension:

    Subject matter under subclass 325 wherein the cell culture is in suspension.


CLS 435/384
TXT Culture medium contains a growth factor or growth regulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 383 wherein the cell culture medium contains
    a substance which stimulates or inhibits cell division without altering the
    differentiation state of the cell.


CLS 435/385
TXT Medium contains a colony stimulating factor:

    Subject matter under subclass 384 wherein the medium contains a substance
    which is a colony stimulating factor.


CLS 435/386
TXT Medium contains an interleukin:

    Subject matter under subclass 384 wherein the medium contains a substance
    which is an interleukin.


CLS 435/387
TXT Medium contains a polypeptide hormone:

    Subject matter under subclass 384 wherein the medium contains a substance
    which is a polypeptide hormone.


CLS 435/388
TXT Culture medium contains an albumin:

    Subject matter under subclass 383 wherein the medium contains a substance
    which is an albumin.


CLS 435/389
TXT Culture medium contains a transferrin:

    Subject matter under subclass 383 wherein the medium contains a substance
    which is a transferrin.


CLS 435/390
TXT Culture medium contains an incompletely defined plant or microbial extract
    excluding animal extract:

    Subject matter under subclass 383 wherein the medium contains an
    incompletely-defined plant or microbial extract, but contains no extract
    derived from an animal source.

    (1)     Note. An extract is incompletely defined if at least one of the
    components of said extract is not characterized.


CLS 435/391
TXT Culture medium contains an animal extract:

    Subject matter under subclass 4067 wherein the medium contains an animal
    extract.

    (1)     Note. Animal extracts include compositions derived from whole
    animals as well as animal cells, tissues and organs.  Methods employing
    highly purified factors; e.g., colony stimulating factors, are classified
    in this class, subclasses 385 through 389.  Methods employing viable intact
    cells or intact cellular material; i.e., co-culturing, are classified in
    this class, subclass 373.


CLS 435/392
TXT Serum:

    Subject matter under subclass 391 wherein said animal extract comprises
    serum.


CLS 435/393
TXT Using airlift or laminar flow aeration or foam culture:

    Subject matter under subclass 383 wherein the cell culture is subjected to
    airlift or laminar flow aeration, or is cultured as a foam.


CLS 435/394
TXT Wherein culture vessel is rotated or oscillated or culture is agitated:

    Subject matter under subclass 383 wherein the culture vessel is subjected
    to rotation or oscillation, or the culture is agitated.


CLS 435/395
TXT Solid support and method of culturing cells on said solid support:

    Subject matter under subclass 325 including solid supports for cell growth
    and culture methods wherein the animal cells are cultured employing a
    specific solid support for them to attach to.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174+,   for methods of immobilizing animal cells.

    283.1+, for apparatus for cell culture


CLS 435/396
TXT Support is a resin:

    Subject matter under subclass 395 wherein the support is a resin.

    (1)     Note. Resins include ion exchange resins.


CLS 435/397
TXT Support is a gel surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 395 wherein the support is a gel surface.


CLS 435/398
TXT Support is a fiber:

    Subject matter under subclass 395 wherein the support is in the form of a
    fiber.


CLS 435/399
TXT Fabric, mat, gauze, or fibrous coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 398 wherein the fiber is in the form of a
    fabric, mat, gauze or coating.


CLS 435/400
TXT Hollow:

    Subject matter under subclass 398 wherein the fiber is hollow.


CLS 435/401
TXT Support is a membrane:

    Subject matter under subclass 395 wherein the support is a membrane.


CLS 435/402
TXT Support is a coated or treated surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 395 wherein the support is coated or treated
    to enhance attachment or growth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181,    for processes of immobilization of micro-organisms using an agent
    to link the micro-organism to a solid support.


CLS 435/403
TXT Support is a suspendable particle:

    Subject matter under subclass 395 wherein the support is a suspendable
    particle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175+,   for micro-organisms immobilized on a solid support which may be
    particulate.


CLS 435/404
TXT Culture medium, per se:

    Subject matter under subclass 325 which is a culture medium, per se.


CLS 435/405
TXT Contains a growth factor or growth regulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 404 wherein the culture medium contains a
    substance which stimulates or inhibits cell division without altering the
    differentiation state of the cell.


CLS 435/406
TXT Contains a polypeptide hormone:

    Subject matter under subclass 405 wherein the culture medium contains  a
    polypeptide hormone.


CLS 435/407
TXT Contains an albumin:

    Subject matter under subclass 404 wherein the culture medium contains
    albumin.


CLS 435/408
TXT Contains an animal extract:

    Subject matter under subclass 404 wherein the culture medium contains an
    animal extract.

    (1)     Note. Animal extracts include compositions derived from whole
    animals as well as animal cells, tissues and organs.  Methods employing
    highly purified factors; e.g., colony stimulating factors, are classified
    in this class, subclasses 384 through 389.  Media already containing other
    viable intact cells or intact cellular material would be classified based
    upon said cells or cellular material, this class, subclasses 326+.


CLS 435/410
TXT PLANT CELL OR CELL LINE, PER SE (E.G., TRANSGENIC, MUTANT, ETC.);
    COMPOSITION THEREOF; PROCESS OF PROPAGATING, MAINTAINING, OR PRESERVING
    PLANT CELL OR CELL LINE; PROCESS OF ISOLATING OR SEPARATING A PLANT CELL OR
    CELL LINE; PROCESS OF REGENERATING PLANT CELLS INTO TISSUE, PLANT PART, OR
    PLANT, PER SE, WHERE NO GENOTYPIC CHANGE OCCURS; MEDIUM THEREFORE:

    Subject matter under the class definition which includes plant cells or
    cell lines, per se which may be transgenic, mutant, or products of  other
    processes for obtaining plant cells; compositions containing plant cells;
    processes of in vitro propagating, maintaining or preserving plant cells or
    cell lines; processes of isolating or separating plant cells; processes of
    regenerating plant cells into tissues, plant parts, or plants, per se,
    wherein no genotypic change occurs; and medium for propagation,
    maintenance, preservation, etc. of plant cells or cell lines.

    (1)     Note. Not included in this subclass, are processes wherein a
    product is synthesized by a biochemical transformation of matter; i.e., a
    transformation wherein the transforming agent is a plant cell culture or
    tissue or processes wherein the tissue is first cultured and then destroyed
    by subsequent extraction, for example to extract compound or composition
    from the tissue.  Such subject matter is provided for in subclasses 41+ of
    this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172.1+, for processes of producing a stable heritable change in the
    genotype of a micro-organism, an animal cell, or a plant cell by
    artificially inducing a structural change in a gene or by the incorporation
    of genetic material from an outside source.  Processes of mutation which
    are processes directed to the production or selection of essentially random
    changes to the DNA of a cell without the incorporation of exogenous DNA are
    provided for in this area.  Also included are processes in which the
    cellular matter of two or more fusing partners is combined producing a
    fused or hybrid cell.

    262+,   for processes wherein a preexisting material or compound present in
    a composition or material is contacted with an enzyme, plant cell, animal
    cell, etc. to isolate or recover the preexisting material which is
    chemically unchanged by the process.

    317.1,  for subcellular parts of micro-organisms (bacteria, animal cell,
    plant cell, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, for apparatus and processes used in treating the
    earth and its products and includes all inventions relating thereto that
    have not been especially provided for in other classes.  Subclass 1.1
    includes mushroom culture.  Subclasses 59+ include processes for fostering
    growth beyond germination of plants in a soilless nutrient environment
    (water culture).  Subclass 57.6 includes coated or impregnated seed not
    specifically provided for elsewhere.  Subclass 58 includes miscellaneous
    processes for plant cultivation and propagation.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    appropriate subclasses for products and processes of preservation and
    preparation of edible material, including earth products.

    504,    Plant Protecting and Regulating Compositions, for compositions for
    treating terrestrial or aquatic plants or their habitat with chemicals
    which affect the growth characteristics of the plants and processes of mere
    use of said compositions.

    800,    Multicellular Living Organisms and Unmodified Parts Thereof,
    appropriate subclasses for living multicellular organisms; e.g., plants,
    etc., and separated or severed parts thereof that have not undergone any
    modification or treatment subsequent to their separation; e.g., untreated
    seeds, etc.


CLS 435/411
TXT Tomato cell or cell line, per se:

    Subject matter under subclass 410 wherein the plant cell or cell line is
    from a tomato plant.

    (1)     Note. The tomato is a member of the genus Lycopersicon.


CLS 435/412
TXT Corn cell or cell line, per se:

    Subject matter under subclass 410 wherein the plant cell or cell line is
    from a corn plant.

    (1)     Note. Corn is also known as maize and is a member of the genus Zea.


CLS 435/413
TXT Herbicide resistant:

    Subject matter under subclass 412 wherein the corn cell or cell line will
    survive exposure to certain herbicides.


CLS 435/414
TXT Tobacco cell or cell line, per se:

    Subject matter under subclass 410 wherein the plant cell or cell line is
    from a tobacco plant.

    (1)     Note. Tobacco is a member of the genus Nicotiana.


CLS 435/415
TXT Soybean cell or cell line, per se:

    Subject matter under subclass 410 wherein the plant cell or cell line is
    from a soybean plant.

    (1)     Note. Soybean is a member of the genus Glycine.


CLS 435/416
TXT Sunflower cell or cell line, per se:

    Subject matter under subclass 410 wherein the plant cell or cell line is
    from a sunflower plant.

    (1)     Note. Sunflower is a member of the genus Helianthus.


CLS 435/417
TXT Potato cell or cell line, per se:

    Subject matter under subclass 410 wherein the plant cell or cell line is
    from a potato plant.

    (1)     Note. Potato is a member of the genus Solanum.


CLS 435/418
TXT Plant cell or cell line, per se, is pest or herbicide resistant or pest
    lethal:

    Subject matter under subclass 410 wherein the plant cell or cell line has a
    property which allows it to survive pest or herbicide attacks or a property
    which makes it lethal to living organisms which prey on or come in contact
    with it.

    (1)     Note. The term pest includes insects, fungi, or other organisms
    which may be detrimental to the plant cell.


CLS 435/419
TXT Plant cell or cell line, per se, contains exogenous or foreign nucleic acid:

    Subject matter under subclass 410 wherein the plant cell or cell line has
    been transformed by the insertion of nucleic acid which is either exogenous
    or foreign to it.

    (1)     Note. The nucleic acid may come from any outside source; e.g.,
    animal, different plant family, genus, species, etc.


CLS 435/420
TXT Culture, maintenance or preservation techniques, per se:

    Subject matter under subclass 410 directed to the processes of culturing,
    propagating, maintaining, preserving, or regenerating of plant cells or
    cell lines.


CLS 435/421
TXT Involving protoplast:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 wherein the process includes the presence
    of a protoplast.

    (1)     Note. A protoplast is a viable intact plant cell from which the
    cell wall has been removed.


CLS 435/422
TXT Involving conifer cell or tissue (e.g., pine, spruce, fir, cedar, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 420 wherein the process includes the presence
    of a conifer cell or tissue.

    (1)     Note. Conifers (class Coniferae), include pines, spruces, firs,
    cedars, hemlocks, yews, larches, cypresses, redwoods, junipers, etc.


CLS 435/423
TXT Involving tomato cell or tissue:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 wherein the process includes the presence
    of a tomato cell or tissue (Lycopersicon).


CLS 435/424
TXT Involving corn cell or tissue:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 wherein the process includes the presence
    of a corn cell or tissue (i.e., Zea mays or maize).


CLS 435/425
TXT Involving tobacco cell or tissue:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 wherein the process includes the presence
    of a tobacco cell or tissue (Nicotiana).


CLS 435/426
TXT Involving soybean cell or tissue:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 wherein the process includes the presence
    of a soybean cell or tissue (Glycine).


CLS 435/427
TXT Involving cotton cell or tissue:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 wherein the process includes the presence
    of a cotton cell or tissue (Gossypium).


CLS 435/428
TXT Involving sunflower cell or tissue:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 wherein the process includes the presence
    of a sunflower cell or tissue (Helianthus).


CLS 435/429
TXT Involving potato cell or tissue:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 wherein the process includes the presence
    of a potato cell or tissue (Solanum).


CLS 435/430
TXT Involving regeneration or propagation into a plant or plant part:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 wherein the process is one in which the
    plant cell or tissue regenerates or propagates into a plant or plant part
    which is more mature or differentiated than the starting cell or tissue,
    e.g., growing a mature plant from meristematic tissue, culturing a root to
    induce formation of a cell mass which is cultured in a medium which results
    in a plantlet, etc.

    (1)     Note. Plant parts include seed, embryo, flower, leaf,
    differentiated tissue (i.e., specific organs), bud, meristem, shoot, root,
    tuber, fruit, stem, cutting, bulb, corm, rhizome, pollen, mycelium, spore,
    ascocarp, and sclerotia.


CLS 435/430.1
TXT Involving callus or embryonic stage:

    Subject matter under subclass 430 wherein the regeneration or propagation
    process includes a callus or embryonic stage at some stage of the process.

    (1)     Note. A callus is a growth of unorganized and either unconnected or
    loosely connected plant cells generally produced by culturing an explant.

    (2)     Note. For the purposes of this subclass, embryonic stage may be a
    proembryo, early stage proembryo, late stage proembryo, cotyledonary
    embryo, embryo, etc.


CLS 435/431
TXT Medium, per se, for culture, maintenance, regeneration, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 410 which is a medium, per se, for culturing,
    maintaining, regenerating, differentiating, isolating, etc. the plant cell,
    cell line, or tissue.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 435/800
TXT ELIMINATION OR REDUCTION OF CONTAMINATION BY UNDESIRED FERMENTS (E.G.,
    ASEPTIC CULTIVATION):

    Subject matter in which a culture is subjected to physical or chemical
    treatment to suppress or reduce the growth of a micro-organism present in
    order to permit another micro-organism to propagate.


CLS 435/801
TXT ANEROBIC CULTIVATION:

    Subject matter in which micro-organism cultivation takes place in the
    absence of oxygen or oxygen bearing gas.


CLS 435/802
TXT LOGARITHMIC GROWTH PHASE:

    Subject matter in which the initial growth period of a micro-organism
    culture is extended or controlled or is otherwise of interest.


CLS 435/803
TXT PHYSICAL RECOVERY METHODS; E.G., CHROMATOGRAPHY, GRINDING:

    Subject matter in which a micro-organism or microbial product other than an
    enzyme is recovered or purified by physical means alone.


CLS 435/804
TXT SINGLE CELL PROTEIN:

    Subject matter in which the suitability of a micro-organism to supply
    palatable protein is disclosed.


CLS 435/805
TXT TEST PAPERS:

    Subject matter in which a test material is carried on a bibulous material
    which may be cellulosic or noncellulosic.


CLS 435/806
TXT FERTILITY TESTS:

    Subject matter in which fecundity or pregnancy is determined.


CLS 435/807
TXT GAS DETECTION APPARATUS:

    Subject matter in which means is provided to detect the presence of gas in
    a qualitative or quantitative manner.


CLS 435/808
TXT OPTICAL SENSING APPARATUS:

    Subject matter in which means senses the production or absorbtion of light
    by a sample or otherwise optically examines a specimen.


CLS 435/809
TXT INCUBATORS OR RACKS OR HOLDERS FOR CULTURE PLATES OR CONTAINERS:

    Subject matter including heating means for culture containers or means to
    support such containers.


CLS 435/810
TXT PACKAGED DEVICE OR KIT:

    Subject matter in which a measuring or testing device or sample or
    plurality of such is in a container or package.


CLS 435/811
TXT INTERFERON:

    Subject matter in which the antiviral agent interferon is isolated or
    treated.


CLS 435/812
TXT FOAM CONTROL:

    Subject matter in which the formation of froth in fermentors is suppressed
    by physical or chemical treatment.


CLS 435/813
TXT CONTINUOUS FERMENTATION:

    Subject matter which is arranged to facilitate continuous operation.


CLS 435/814
TXT ENZYME SEPARATION OR PURIFICATION:

    Subject matter in which an enzyme is separated or purified.


CLS 435/815
TXT By sorption:

    Subject matter under subclass 814 in which an enzyme is separated or
    purified  by absorption or adsorption.


CLS 435/816
TXT By solubility:

    Subject matter under subclass 814 in which an enzyme is separated or
    purified by manipulation of the relative solubility of the enzyme in a
    solvent.


CLS 435/817
TXT ENZYME OR MICROBE ELECTRODE:

    Subject matter in which an enzyme or microbe is part of an electrode.


CLS 435/818
TXT AERATION OR OXYGEN TRANSFER TECHNIQUE:

    Subject matter in which a fermentor is aerated or other process of oxygen
    transfer is disclosed.


CLS 435/819
TXT FERMENTATION VESSELS IN SERIES:

    Subject matter in which two or more fermentation vessels are connected in
    series.


CLS 435/820
TXT SUBCELLULAR PARTS OF MICRO-ORGANISMS:

    Subject matter in which the subcellular parts of a micro-organism are
    isolated or treated.


CLS 435/821
TXT MICRO-ORGANISMS USED IN THE DESTRUCTION OF HAZARDOUS OR TOXIC
    WASTE:Collection of micro-organisms specifically disclosed as being useful
    for the destruction of hazardous or toxic waste.


CLS 435/822-948
TXT MICRO-ORGANISM CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS:

    The bacteria terminology is based upon "Bergey's Manual of Determinative
    Bacteriology," Eighth Edition which is to be considered dispositive of the
    subject matter.

            CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS RELATED TO SUBCLASSES 7.1 THROUGH
    7.95


CLS 435/960
TXT IMMUNOHISTOCHEMICAL ASSAY:
    Subject matter involving antigen-antibody binding or ligand-receptor
    binding involving the study of the structure or function of intact tissue.


CLS 435/961
TXT INCLUDING A STEP OF FORMING, RELEASING, OR EXPOSING THE ANTIGEN OR FORMING
    THE HAPTEN-IMMUNOGENIC CARRIER COMPLEX OR THE ANTIGEN, PER SE:Subject
    matter involving a step of (1) forming, releasing, or exposing an antigen,
    (2) forming a hapten-immunogenic carrier complex, or (3) claiming the
    structure of the antigen, per se.


CLS 435/962
TXT PREVENTION OR REMOVAL OF INTERFERING MATERIALS OR REACTANTS OR OTHER
    TREATMENT TO ENHANCE RESULTS (E.G., DETERMINING OR PREVENTING NONSPECIFIC
    BINDING, ETC.):Subject matter involving (1) preventing the formation of
    interfering reactants or material, (2) removal of interfering reactants or
    material, or (3) treatment described as improving or enhancing the result
    of the assay.


CLS 435/963
TXT METHODS OF STOPPING AN ENZYME REACTION OR STABILIZING THE TEST
    MATERIALS:Subject matter involving (1) methods of stopping an enzyme
    reaction or (2) methods of stabilizing the test materials.


CLS 435/964
TXT INCLUDING ENZYME-LIGAND CONJUGATE PRODUCTION (E.G., REDUCING RATE OF
    NONPRODUCTIVE LINKAGE, ETC.):Subject matter involving the production of an
    enzyme-ligand conjugate.


CLS 435/965
TXT INVOLVING IDIOTYPE OR ANTI-IDIOTYPE ANTIBODY:
    Subject matter involving idiotype or anti-idiotype antibodies.


CLS 435/966
TXT INVOLVING AN ENZYME SYSTEM WITH HIGH TURNOVER RATE OR COMPLEMENT MAGNIFIED
    ASSAY (E.G., MULTI-ENZYME SYSTEMS, ETC.):Subject matter involving (1) an
    enzyme system with high turnover rate or (2) the use of complement to
    enhance the results of the assay.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also provides for the cyclic enzyme system for
    steroid assay.


CLS 435/967
TXT STANDARDS, CONTROLS, MATERIALS (E.G., VALIDATION STUDIES, BUFFER SYSTEMS,
    ETC.):Subject matter involving the standards, controls, or materials used
    in antigen-antibody or ligand-receptor binding assays.


CLS 435/968
TXT HIGH ENERGY SUBSTRATES (E.G., FLUORESCENT, CHEMILUMINESCENT, RADIOACTIVE,
    ETC.):Subject matter involving a high energy substrate such as one which is
    fluorescent, chemiluminescent, or radioactive.


CLS 435/969
TXT MULTIPLE LAYERING OR REACTANTS:
    Subject matter including the reacting of multiple ligand-binder components
    to result in amplification of the detection system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is not intended to include conventional
    layered test strips or slides.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    970,    for test strips or test slides.


CLS 435/970
TXT TEST STRIP OR TEST SLIDE:
    Subject matter involving the use of a test strip or slide which carries the
    reagents or reactants involved in the test.


CLS 435/971
TXT CAPTURE OF COMPLEX AFTER ANTIGEN-ANTIBODY REACTION:
    Subject matter involving reaction of antigen with antibody in solution
    resulting in an antigen-antibody complex which is then captured through
    insolubilization prior to a determination step.


CLS 435/972
TXT MODIFIED ANTIBODY (E.G., HYBRID, BIFUNCTIONAL, ETC.):
    Subject matter involving antibodies which have been altered physically or
    chemically.


CLS 435/973
TXT SIMULTANEOUS DETERMINATION OF MORE THAN ONE ANALYTE:
    Subject matter involving an analysis in which multiple analytes are
    determined at the same time.


CLS 435/974
TXT AIDS RELATED TEST:
    Subject matter involving a test for Acquired Immunodeficiency Syndrome.


CLS 435/975
TXT KIT:
    Subject matter in which measuring or testing reagents are in kit form.

    FOREIGN ART COLLECTIONS

    The definitions for FOR 100-FOR 122 below correspond to the definitions of
    the abolished subclasses under Class 435 from which these collections were
    formed.  See the Foreign Art Collections schedule for specific
    correspondences.  [Note: The titles and definitions for indented art
    collections include all the details of the one (s) that are hierarchically
    superior.


CLS 435/FOR100
TXT ANIMAL OR PLANT CELL (E.G., CELL LINES, ETC.); COMPOSITION
    THEREOF; PROCESS OF PROPAGATING, MAINTAINING OR PRESERVING ANIMAL OR PLANT
    CELL OR COMPOSITION THEREOF; PROCESS OF ISOLATING OR SEPARATING AN ANIMAL
    OR PLANT CELL OR COMPOSITION THEREOF; PROCESS OF PREPARING A COMPOSITION
    CONTAINING ANIMAL OR PLANT CELL; CULTURE MEDIA THEREFORE:

    Foreign art collections including animal or plant cells, per se;
    compositions containing animal or plant cells; processes of in vitro
    propagation of animal or plant cells or groups of cells that are not
    organized tissues; processes of maintaining or preserving animal or plant
    cells or compositions thereof; processes of isolating or separating an
    animal or plant cell or composition thereof; processes of preparing a
    composition containing animal or plant cells; culture media therefore.


CLS 435/FOR101
TXT Animal cells, per se, culture techniques and media:

    Foreign art collections including animal cell culture techniques, the media
    used to culture the cells and the animal cells, per se.


CLS 435/FOR102
TXT Techniques of establishing a primary culture:

    Foreign art collections wherein a primary culture of animal cells is
    established.


CLS 435/FOR103
TXT Culture of encapsulated cells:

    Foreign art collections wherein an encapsulated cell is cultured.


CLS 435/FOR104
TXT Culture of cells on solid support (e.g., anchorage dependent cells):

    Foreign art collections wherein the animal cells are cultured on a solid
    support.


CLS 435/FOR105
TXT Support is suspendable particle:

    Foreign art collections wherein the solid support is a suspendable particle.


CLS 435/FOR106
TXT Culture of cells on membrane:

    Foreign art collections wherein the solid support is a membrane.


CLS 435/FOR107
TXT Hollow fibre membrane:

    Foreign art collections wherein the membrane is in the form of a hollow
    tube or fibre.


CLS 435/FOR108
TXT Solid support treated or coated to enhance attachment or growth:

    Foreign art collections wherein the solid support is treated or coated to
    enhance attachment or growth.


CLS 435/FOR109
TXT Culture in suspension:

    Foreign art collections wherein the cell culture is in suspension.


CLS 435/FOR110
TXT Fused or hybrid cells:

    Foreign art collections wherein the cell resulting from (a) the fusion of
    two cells, (b) the insertion of the nucleus or chromocone of one cell into
    another or (c) the treatment of a cell with an immortalizing agent which
    results in a cell which will proliferate in long-term culture.


CLS 435/FOR111
TXT Ab or Ig fragments producing cells:

    Foreign art collections wherein the fused or hybrid cells are
    immunoglobulin or immunoglobulin fragment producing cells.


CLS 435/FOR112
TXT Culture medium, per se:

    Foreign art collections wherein the culture medium, per se, is claimed.


CLS 435/FOR113
TXT Defined medium:

    Foreign art collections wherein the media is composed of purified distinct
    chemical compounds.


CLS 435/FOR114
TXT Plant cells, per se, culture techniques and media:

    Foreign art collections including plant cells, per se, and processes of
    culture of plant cells and the media for the culture or regeneration of
    plant cells.


CLS 435/FOR115
TXT Culture techniques (e.g., meristem culture, etc.):

    Foreign art collections directed to the process of culture of plant cells.


CLS 435/FOR116
TXT Culture in suspension:

    Foreign art collections wherein the cell culture is carried out in
    suspension.


CLS 435/FOR117
TXT Protoplasts:

    Foreign art collections wherein a plant protoplast is cultured.


CLS 435/FOR118
TXT Callus culture:

    Foreign art collections wherein a callus culture is grown.


CLS 435/FOR119
TXT Regeneration (includes nonflowering ornamentals):

    Foreign art collections  wherein the callus is used to  regenerated a
    differentiated  plant.


CLS 435/FOR120
TXT Agronomic crops (e.g., tobacco, grains, etc.):

    Foreign art collections wherein the plant is an agronomic crop.


CLS 435/FOR121
TXT Fruit and vegetable crops (e.g., tobacco, etc.):

    Foreign art collections wherein the plant is a fruit or vegetable crop.


CLS 435/FOR122
TXT Culture medium, per se, or regeneration medium, per se:

    Foreign art collections wherein a culture medium, per se, or a regeneration
    medium, per se, is claimed.


CLS 436/
TTL CHEMISTRY:  ANALYTICAL AND IMMUNOLOGICAL TESTING

CLS 436/
TXT
    I.      STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    This is the generic class for:

    A.      Processes which involve a chemical reaction for determining
    qualitatively or quantitatively the presence of a chemical element,
    compound or complex in a composition or a chemical compound, or an element
    or radical in a compound.

    B.      Process for analysis which involve an in vitro antigen-antibody,
    immunological or protein binding interaction other than those involving a
    living antigen, or enzyme label.

    C.      Processes of analysis or study of the chemical properties of a
    sample; the physiological effect of a sample; or chemical determination of
    a physical property of a sample.

    D.      Compositions and their mere methods of use of thermoparticulating
    compositions.

    E.      Chemical test standards for A, B, and C.

    F.      Analytical compositions for A, B or C subject to the caveat of III
    A.

    G.      Combinations of tests or measurements with methods of regulating a
    chemical reaction not otherwise provided for in a chemical synthesis class
    or otherwise.

    Note.  For an elaboration of the distinction between subclasses 1-146 and
    subclasses 147-181 which provide for methods of examining the results of a
    significant chemical interaction see section VI infra.

    II.     CLASSIFICATION LINES WITH OTHER CLASSES GENERAL NOTE
    The mere presence of a chemical reaction is not generally sufficient to
    place a patent in this class.  This class provides for the qualitative and
    quantative analysis of chemical compounds, complexes and elements which at
    some point involve a chemical interaction.  In other words, the subject
    matter of this class involves an investigation of what chemical specie is
    present and/or how much of the specie is present or investigates some
    chemical property of a sample.  The technique used to detect the result of
    chemical interaction need not be chemical but may involve a physical,
    optical or electrical measurement.  No attempt should be made to apply or
    generalize the lines of any given class to any other given class in regard
    to this class.  In any instance where the line notes use the word
    significant or nominal this is especially true and the limits of such terms
    can only be determined on a case by case basis in view of an examination of
    the patents in the involved class.

    71,     Chemistry:  Fertilizers, provides for a process of soil analysis
    combined with the application of Class 71 composition in response to the
    analysis.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, provides for a
    process of qualatative or quantitative chemical analysis of a soil sample.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, is the generic class for making a
    measurement or test of any kind not provided for in other classes.  Class
    73 is also the generic class for sampling processes and apparatus not
    otherwise provided for (Class 73 provides in Note (3) of the Class
    Definition an extensive listing of classes for measuring and testing, per
    se, and a sampling).

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, provides for
    processes of analysis which involve a chemical reaction and a qualitative
    or quantitative measurement or test and such processes including sampling
    or sample preparation (For a more precise indication of the line between
    this class and Class 73 the line and search notes indexed in section IV
    should be consulted).

    116,    Signals and Indicators, provides for a signal or indicator wherein
    the signal or indicator is given by a chemical reaction, e.g., change in
    color, smoke, odor etc.  Class 116 provides for a temperature indicator
    which has a single temperature indication.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, provides for a
    method of qualitative or quantitative chemical analysis.

    128,    Surgery, provides for methods including the use of claimed specific
    structure adapted to be placed on or in the living body and further
    includes diagnostic or therapeutic methods and apparatus when the only
    disclosed utitility is for diagnosis or treatment of a living body.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, provides for
    methods of qualitative or quantative chemical testing including (1) the in
    vitro testing of a body fluid which may be diagnostic of a body condition
    as well as (2) methods wherein the disclosed utility of a chemical test is
    both diagnostic and nondiagnostic.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, provides
    for processes of chemical manufacture not otherwise provided for and for a
    process of chemical testing when combined with such process.  Class 156
    particularly provides for a process of measuring and testing when combined
    with a process of etching or laminating.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, provides for a
    process of qualitative or quantitative chemical analysis of a crystalline
    material, etching solution or laminate material.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, provides for a process of fiber
    liberation including a step of chemical testing of the fiber or testing
    fluid as well as providing for chemical testing in combination with a paper
    making operation.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, provides for a
    qualitative or quantitative chemical test of fibers, paper or processing
    fluids therefor when not claimed in combination with a process of fiber
    liberation or paper making.

    166,    Wells, for a chemical test in combination with a process of using,
    making or treating a well where such process incorporates more than a
    nominal step in a claim reciting drilling or treating a well or recovering
    a fluid therefrom.  The headnotes of Class 166 provide comprehensive
    listing of the disposition of well related testing art.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, provides for
    processes of chemical analysis of samples derived from wells which may
    include a step of inserting and recovering an absorbent material or a
    nominal step of drilling or treating a well or recovering a fluid therefrom.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, provides for a process for boring
    into the earth combined with a measurement or test where more than a mere
    step of boring is claimed.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, provides for a
    process of chemical testing combined with a nominal step of earth boring.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, provides for a process of
    chromatographic separation for separation of the constituents of mixture.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, provides for a
    process including gas or liquid chromatography with a colorimetric test of
    the colored bands or bands from the chromatography column where a
    chemically reactive reagent is necessary to develop the color for the
    colorimetric test.

    250,    Radiant Energy, provides for a method of using, generating,
    controlling or detecting radiant energy or a subcombination thereof when
    not otherwise provided for.  This includes use of X-rays to determine
    chemical composition or crystal structure as well as use of a mass
    spectrometer.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, provides for a
    qualitative or quantitative chemical test including a step involving the
    generation, use or detection of radiant energy.  The mere use of a
    flourescent material is not considered to be chemical, at least in regard
    to Class 250.

    252,    Compositions, provides for a chemical testing composition when
    claimed in combination with a composition specifically provided for in
    Class 252 and for physical testing, analysis, indicating or warning agents
    or for physical standards, tracer or identification compositions.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, provides for
    compositions used in a process of chemical analysis including tracers,
    identifying compositions, diluents, buffers, standards, compositions which
    simulate or calibrate a test as well as chemical reactants and
    immunochemical compositions for in vitro testing (See the note on creation
    of this class for a more complete analysis of the relation of compositions
    of this class with other classes).

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    provides for a step of chemically testing or inspecting some variable
    condition in a shaped article, molding material, mold or shaping surface as
    part of a process included in Class 264.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, provides for a
    chemical test or analysis of a shaped article absent a claim to a process
    of producing the shaped article.

    324,    Electricity, Measuring and Testing, is the residual home for
    measuring and testing electrical properties or the measuring testing or
    sensing of nonelectric properties (e.g., moisture, pH etc.) by electric
    means including a chemical reaction by name only.  The presence of any
    detail to the chemical reaction is beyond Class 324.  In general, a 324
    process may result in the identification of a chemical specie by NMR, ESR,
    conductivity, impedance, or other electrical property but only absent a
    significant chemical reaction in which case Class 436 will provide for the
    combination.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, will provide for
    electrical measuring, testing or sensing when claimed in combination with
    significant chemical reaction. Significant is taken to mean the inclusion
    of any detail of a chemical reaction in the claimed process.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, provides for electrical indicating and
    measuring systems which include the use of a catalytic or semiconductor gas
    detector.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, will provide for
    the use of a catalytic or semiconductor gas detector when claimed as part
    of a process involving a significant chemical reaction as part of a
    qualitative or quantitative chemical analysis.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, provides for methods and apparatus
    for determining the optical or nonoptical properties of materials or
    articles by noting the effect produced by the materials or articles or
    light associated therewith.  Light analysis includes spectroscopy,
    interference, polarization, shade or color and photometers.  The material
    properties involve crystal or gem examination, blood analysis, optical
    pyrometers, oil testing, document verification, refraction testing, light
    transmission or absorbtion, light reflection, and inspection for flaws or
    imperfections in materials.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, will provide for
    a process of optical examination which involves a chemical reaction either
    prior to the optical examination or as a chemically reactive reagent or
    indicator necessary to develop color or produce an optically detectable
    result.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, provides for a
    process or nominally recited chemical analysis combined with a significant
    data processing or computer or calculating method.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, will provide for
    the combination of a claimed chemical reaction as part of an analytical
    process when combined with a step involving data processing or
    computational manipulation.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, provides for an
    in vivo test which may include a chemical reaction.  Class 424 provides
    for:  compositions (A) for preventing, alleviating, treating, or curing
    abnormal and pathological conditions of the living body, for maintaining,
    increasing, decreasing, limiting, or destroying a physiologic body
    function, for diagnosing a physiological condition or state by an in vivo
    test, for controlling or protecting an environment or living body by
    attracting, disabling, inhibiting, killing, modifying, repelling, or
    retarding an animal or micro-organism, (B) for deodorizing, protecting,
    adorning, or grooming a body, (C) for fermentates and extracts for use in A
    or B and not elsewhere provided for, and (D) such compositions defined in
    terms of specific structure; methods of making the above compositions;
    methods of using the class defined compositions for purposes in A and B;
    and methods of using compounds, per se, for purposes in A and B.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, provides for in
    vitro qualitative or quantitative chemical analysis including the use of an
    vitro antigen-antibody interaction as well as for production of an
    immunological test material by treatment of a live animal.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    provides for processes of performing a test or measurement on an edible
    combined with an additional operation for treating, preparing, or
    perfecting an edible, with the exception of an additional operation which
    is solely involved in perfecting the test or measurement.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, provides for
    processes of performing a test or measurement on an edible involving a
    chemical reaction.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, provides for a test
    or measurement involving a microorganism or enzyme which functions
    catalytically as well as antigen antibody tests involving a living
    microorganism or enzyme label.

    (1)     Note.  The burden of showing an enzyme is functioning
    noncatalytically is on Class 436, i.e., the presumption, as between Class
    435 and Class 436, is that an enzyme in a testing composition functions
    catalytically until rebutted.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, provides for a
    measurement or test in which an enzyme reacts chemically, i.e.,
    noncatalytically and antigen-antibody tests for the identification of
    chemical species that do not involve a living antigen or enzyme.

    III.    Search Notes

    A.      Class 252 Compositions Search.  This class was created by
    incorporation of chemical standards and chemical testing compositions from
    Class 252, subclass 408.1.  The superior subclasses in 252 other than
    subclass 1 were not screened to remove all chemical test compositions or
    standards properly classifiable therein.  Thus, when considering the proper
    search and classification of a chemical testing composition Class 252
    should always be consulted.  Upon conclusion that 252 does not provide for
    the subject composition, the composition is properly classifiable in this
    class.

    B.      Class 424 in vivo/ in vitro line. Class 436, subclasses 500+
    incorporate patents to in vitro antigen-antibody, immunological, or protein
    binding tests formerly classified in Class 424, subclass 1.5 (which no
    longer exists) and subclasses 2+.  Class 424 continues to provide for in
    vivo antigen-antibody, immunological, or protein binding tests when the
    final testing or diagnosis step occurs in or on the living body.  A
    document which includes the invivo production of an in vitro test material
    or reagent, such as the in vivo production or treatment of an antigen or
    antibody used in an immunoassay, will be provided for the Class 436 (see
    especially subclasses 543-548).

    C.      Analysis in combination with other chemical processes.  This class
    includes tests or measurements of any type claimed in association with a
    chemical reaction when the reaction is not part of a process elsewhere
    classifiable.

    Measurements and tests when claimed in association with e.g., condition
    responsive control, etc., chemical processes provided for in other classes,
    e.g., 208, 260, 435 etc., are classified in the class providing for the
    chemical process.

    D.      Immobilized peptides, namely proteins, enzymes and immunologically
    active species are classified in Classes 260, 435 and 436 respectively.  In
    the instance where the claims are directed to a generic immobilization
    process with or without species claims to the particular peptides the order
    of superiority of placement is 435, 436, and 260 (including the resin
    series). Class 424 will take a composition which may contain any of the
    immobilized species above as a composition for the treatment of the living
    body and will control placement.


    IV.     INDEX TO LINE AND SEARCH NOTES IN CLASS DEFINITIONS SECTIONS AND
    SUBCLASSES OF THIS CLASS

    CLASS   SECTION         SUBCLASSES


    29      Metal Working           4

    34      Drying and Gas
            or Vapor Contact
            With Solids                     177

    62      Refrigeration           177

    65      Glass Manufac-
            turing                  518

    71      Chemistry:
            Fertilizers             II

    73      Measuring And
            Testing         II      3 - 6, 11,
                                    20, 28,

                                    29, 36,

                                    38, 39,

                                    40, 43,

                                    48, 50,

                                    60, 65,

                                    69, 139,

                                    147, 149,

                                    151, 156,

                                    163, 164,

                                    173, 174,

                                    180

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes      161,164,
                                    167,177

    106     Compositions:

            Coating or Plas-
            tic                     86, 518

    116     Signal and Indi-

            cators          II      60

    125     Stone Working           4

    128     Surgery         II      11, 57,

                                    62, 66,

                                    69, 132,

                                    163, 504

    149     Explosive and
            Thermic Composi-

            tions or Charges                156

    156     Adhesive Bonding

            and Miscellaneous

            Chemical Manufac-

            ture            II      2, 4, 518

    159     Concentrating

            Evaporators                     177

    162     Paper Making

            and Fiber

            Liberation              II      2

    166     Wells           II      25

    175     Boring or Penetra-

            ting The Earth  II      28, 50

    201     Distillation:

            Processes, Thermo-

            lytic                   177

    203     Distillation:

            Processes, Separa-

            tory                    177

    204     Chemistry:  Elec-

            trical and Wave

            Energy                  51, 139,

                                    149, 151,

                                    163, 516

    210     Liquid Purifica-

            tion or Separa-

            tion            II      161, 162,

                                    164, 177,

                                    178, 518

    235     Registers                       11, 69

    236     Automatic Temper-

            ature and Humi-

            dity Regulation         39

    250     Radiant Energy  II      4, 27, 28,

                                    50, 56,

                                    139, 147,

                                    172, 173

    252     Compositions    II, III 3, 8, 9,

                                    18, 28,

                                    50, 172,

                                    176

    260     Chemistry of Car-

            bon Compounds   III     86, 88,

                                    91, 177,

                                    518, 543

    264     Plastic And Non-

            metallic Article

            Shaping Or Treat-

            ing:  Processes II      2, 518

    324     Electricity:

            Measuring And

            Testing         II      4, 8, 25,

                                    28, 50,

                                    68, 70,

                                    147, 149,

                                    163, 164,

                                    173

    340     Communications:

            Electrical              II      36, 151,

                                    164

    356     Optics:  Measuring

            And Testing             II      4, 8, 11,

                                    36, 60,

                                    69, 147,

                                    153, 155,

                                    161, 164,

                                    165, 171

    359     Optic:  Systems
            (Including Communication)
            and Elements            11, 69,
                                    164

    364     Electrical Compu-

            ters and Data Pro-

            cessing Systems II      43, 55,

                                    171

                                    55, 69,

                                    147, 154,

                                    161, 164,

                                    165, 169,

                                    170, 172,

                                    176, 177,

                                    180

    424     Drug, Bio-

            Affecting and

            Body Treating

            Compositions    II, III 64, 86,

                                    518, 543

    426     Food or Edible

            Material:  Pro-

            cess, Composi-

            tions, and Pro-

            ducts           II      20, 86

    428     Stock Material

            or Miscellaneous

            Articles                        518

    435     Chemistry:  Molec-

            ular Biology and

            Micro-Biology   II      1, 25, 86,

                                    87, 177,

                                    518, 522

    521     Synthetic Resins

            or Natural Rubbers      518

    525     Synthetic Resins or

            Natural Rubbers         518, 533

    V.      GLOSSARY


    ANTIBODY
    A protein of the globulin in type that is formed in an animal organism in
    response to the administration of an antigen and that is capable of
    combining specifically with that antigen.  Abbr Ab. See also immunoglobulin.

    ANTIGEN
    A substance, frequently a protein that can stimulate an animal organism to
    produce antibodies and that can combine specifically with the antibodies
    thus produced; called also complete antigen as distinct from a hapten.
    Abbr Ag.


    ANTIGEN - ANTIBODY COMPLEX
    The generally insoluable molecular aggregate that is formed by the specific
    interaction of antigens and antibodies.  It is also referred to as the
    immune complex.

    HAPTEN
    A substance that can react selectively with antibodies of the appropriate
    specificity but stimulates the production of these antibodies in an animal
    only when it is coupled to a carrier.

    IMMUNOADSORBENT

    An insoluble material that is used for the purification of antibodies by
    adsorbing them from a serum; a gel for trapping antibodies, or an inert
    solid to which either antigens or haptens have been covalently linked are
    two examples.

    IMMUNOASSAY

    An assay that utilizes antigen antibody reactions for the determination of
    chemical substances.

    IMMUNOELECTROPHORESIS

    A technique for identifying antigens in complex mixtures by first
    separating the antigens in one dimension by means of gel electrophoresis,
    and then allowing them to react with antibodies by means of two dimensional
    double diffusion through the gel; a pattern of precipitin arcs is thereby
    produced.  Abbr IE.

    IMMUNOGLOBULIN

    1.      A protein of animal origin that has a known antibody activity.

    2.  A protein that is closely related to an antibody by its chemical
    structure and by its antigenic specificity.

    VI.     CLASSIFICATION GUIDELINES FOR THIS CLASS

    A.      Compositions:  Standards and Analytical Compositions used to
    prepare a sample for chemical testing or to standardize a test procedure
    are classifiable in subclasses 8-19.  Subclasses 8-19 will also provide for
    the process of use of such standards to calabrate a test procedure but will
    not provide for a comprehensive chemical test process including calabration
    and analytical testing of an unknown.  Compositions used for qualitative or
    quantitative chemical testing are classifiable with their process of use.

    B.      Testing Processes:  Methods of chemical testing or analysis are
    classifiable on the basis of the specie tested for if such specie is
    claimed or solely disclosed.  Subclasses 147 through 181 provide for
    processes not limited by claim or sole disclosure to the concepts of
    subclasses 1-146.  If placement in subclasses 147 through 181 appears
    proper, two cautions should be observed.  First, the claim or claims in
    question should be scrutinized for the presence of a significant chemical
    interaction which is not merely the application of measuring technique
    otherwise classifiable in another class.  Second, due to longstanding
    conflicts and nonuniform practice in the determination of significant
    chemistry, classification in subclasses 147 through 181 indicates that at
    least a cursory search should be made of the class providing for the
    appropriate technique absent significant chemistry.

    A method of testing for a disease or condition if by claim or disclosure is
    a test for a particular chemical specie and classification is proper in the
    subclass providing for that specie.

    A test for an extract or factor is properly classifiable in the subclass
    providing for the major chemical constituents as determined by the
    disclosure or a standard reference work.

    A process directed to the analysis of a complex is classified on the basis
    of the first appearing member of the complex.

    A process testing a flue gas, off gas, combustable gas, or other gaseous
    composition for a particular claimed or solely disclosed species should be
    classified with that species.  A broad analysis claim should be classified
    in subclasses 147 through 181.

    A broadly recited anion or cation test is classifiable in subclasses 147
    through 181.

    A test to determine the utility or suitability if a sample for some use or
    some generalized property (e.g., toxicity, etc.) is properly classifiable
    in subclasses 2+.

    C.      Presumptive Identity:  In the absence of a clear showing to the
    contrary the following will control classification.

    Term            Presumed classified as

    "acidic" or  "basic"

    component               inorganic acid or base

    ginsing extract         saponin

    hydrocarbon             compound of hydrogen

    and carbon only

    isotopes                nonisotopic form

    marahuana               tetrahydrocannabinol

    octane test             hydrocarbon

    organo          hydrocarbon derivative

    "organic compound"      by technique in

                            147 - 183


CLS 436/1
TXT PROCESS OR COMPOSITION FOR STERILITY OR PACKAGE INTEGRITY TEST:

    Processes or compositions within the class definition for determining the
    effectiveness of a prior sterilization process or the physical integrity or
    a package by means of a chemical reaction.

    (1)     Note.  Processes classifiable in this subclass include monitoring
    the presence or absence of a sterilizing agent such as ethylene oxide.

    SEARCH  CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 11 for
    methods and materials for determining the effectiveness of a sterilization
    procedure which involves the use of an enzyme or microorganism.


CLS 436/2
TXT PROCESS OR COMPOSITION FOR DETERMINATION OF PHYSICAL STATE OR PROPERTY BY
    MEANS INCLUDING A CHEMICAL REACTION:

    Processes or compositions within the class definition for determining
    physical state or a physical property by means of a chemical reaction.

    (1)     Note.  Also included in this subclass are processes for determining
    the thickness of a coated material by means of a chemical reaction.

    (2)     Note.  Processes for determining pressure by nonvolumetric
    techniques is included in this subclass, i.e., via flame ionization.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    64 for a process of surface bonding and/or assembly combined with a step of
    determining some chemical property of the product or a component thereof.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclass 49 for a chemical test
    of a property or characteristic of a fiber or treating fluid when combined
    with a process of fiber liberation and subclass 198 for a process of
    chemically determining some property in combination with a paper making
    operation.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Articles Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 40.1+ for a process of Class 264 shaping or treating which
    includes a step of chemical treating which includes a step of chemical
    testing or inspecting of the product or shaping surface including a
    determination of completeness of reaction.


CLS 436/3
TXT Leak detection:

    Processes or compositions under the subclass 2 for a test in which a
    chemical reaction is included in a process for detection of leaks.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are processes for determining
    leaks in a closed system, or, equipment failure wherein the material
    leaking out of the closed system, or a tracer leaking from the closed
    system, is determined by a chemical reaction, e.g., reaction with a
    colorimetric indicator.  Examples of closed systems are refrigeration
    systems, heat exchangers, tanks, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses  40+ for physical tests of
    leakage; 598 and 600 for flaw or discontinuity dectection by use of a
    vibration.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 62.52 for a magnetic flaw detection
    composition.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, for thermal measuring and testing.


CLS 436/4
TXT Of crystal or crystalline material:

    Processes and compositions therefore under subclass 2 in which a physical
    property of a crystal or crystalline material is determined by means
    involving a chemical reaction.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes gross determination of the
    crystallinity of a material e.g., polymer, etc., as well as a determination
    of the crystal habit of a compound by means of a chemical reaction.

    (2)     Note.  The loss or gain of a water of crystallization is considered
    to be a chemical reaction while other alternations of crystal structure are
    not.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 25.35 for the electrical measuring testing
    or sensing of piezoelectric crystals combined with the manufacture thereof.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, Digest 4 for physical test of piezoelectric
    properties.

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes of measuring, testing, or
    sensing in combination with single crystal growth.

    125,    Stone Working, subclasses 12 and 13.01+ for apparatus and methods
    for cutting crystal which include the step of first examinating optically
    and working the crystal for axis orientation.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 109 for the
    electrical testing of a piezoelectric crystal.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 30 for a process of
    optical testing of crystals including gems, piezoelectric and semiconductor
    crystals which may include nominal cutting or etching of the crystal.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, appropriate subclasses, 44
    through 50 for the use of X-rays to determine chemical composition or
    crystal structure or a process of X-ray crystallography.


CLS 436/5
TXT Surface area, porosity, imperfection, or alteration:

    Processes or compositions under the subclass 2 for chemically determining
    surface area of an object or part of an object; the permability of a
    surface; the roughness of portions of a surface; or the alteration of a
    surface.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for colorimetrically or fluorescently
    determining flaws, imperfections or surface defects of a metal surface or
    metal coating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 104+ for surface roughness
    testing.


CLS 436/6
TXT Corrosion resistance or power:

    Processes or compositions under subclass 2 for chemically testing the
    corrosion resistance of material, the corrosiveness of a sample material,
    the presence or strength of a corrosion inhibitor, or determining corrosion
    preventing properites.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, various subclasses for methods of physical
    determination of corrosion particularly subclass 104.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 53 for apparatus for carrying out the
    process of this subclass.


CLS 436/7
TXT By thermoparticulating composition:

    Compositions for and processes under subclass 2 in which a chemical
    composition decomposes at a desired temperature to indicate the temperature
    of some part of a device on which it has been coated and the decomposition
    products are detected chemically.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass will provide for a process use of a
    thermoparticulating agent even if claimed in combination with nominal
    electrical structure.


CLS 436/8
TXT COMPOSITIONS FOR STANDARDIZATION, CALIBRATION, SIMULATION, STABILIZATION,
    PREPARATION OR PRESERVATION: PROCESSES OF USE IN PREPARATION FOR CHEMICAL
    TESTING:

    Compositions under the class definition which are used to mimic or quantify
    the effect, in a chemical test procedure, of another chemical composition,
    or to stabilize, preserve or otherwise prepare a sample for a chemical test
    and the processes of use of such materials preparatory to a chemical test
    procedure.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses resulted from the
    incorporation of Class 252, subclass 408.1, into this class.  The user is
    cautioned that a claim to a composition provided for in Class 252 e.g., a
    lubricant with a test agent, etc., will be provided for in Class 252 absent
    a claim to a test method.

    (2)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses provide for a test in which
    a substance which produces a standardized result is used in place of the
    actual specie to be tested for.

    (3)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses do not provide for original
    placement of a process which includes the test for the actual specie or
    species of interest.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 408.1 for physical test standards.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 308 and 317 for the
    use of a control sample in nuclear resonance spectrometry and electron
    resonance spectrometry.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, various subclasses for use of
    standards in a process of optical testing particularly subclasses:

       42,  for optical blood standards

       46,  for light standards, per se

      243,  for optical standards generally.

      412,  for colorimeters which utilize a solid or liquid transmissive
    standard.

      420,  for a colored light source used as a standard and 421 for
    reflective light standards.


CLS 436/9
TXT Simulative of a gaseous composition:

    Compositions and methods under subclass 8 which produce the effect of a gas
    composition for the purpose of calibration or otherwise simulating a
    chemical effect of the gas simulated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 372 for gaseous compositions, per se.


CLS 436/10
TXT Particle count or volume standard or control (e.g., platelet count
    standards, etc.):

    Compositions and methods under subclass 8 in which a chemical composition
    is designed to simulate the number of particles in some fluid of interest
    or to have a desired volume related property.


CLS 436/11
TXT Blood gas standard or control:

    Compositions and processes under subclass 8 which simulate the effect of
    blood in a test for blood gases.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     blood gas tests absent the presence or use of a standard or control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 61.65+ for testing the settling
    rate of liquid suspensions of solids.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, particularly subclasses 40+ for a
    transmissive or reflective optical measurement or test performed on blood
    such as statistical counting of blood component particles, determination of
    hemoglobin content or determination of oxyhemoglobin in blood.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, for the
    counting of blood cells or particles one by one.

     377,   Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclasses 10+ for particulate counters with or
    without the sizing of the particles counted.

    600,    Surgery, for diagnostic methods which utilize light sensing units
    on or in the body for the testing or inspection of blood subclass 309 for a
    method wherein a physical characteristic of blood is measured by means
    placed against or in the body, e.g., time required for blood to clot,
    erythrocyte sedimentation rate, white cell count or viscosity.


CLS 436/12
TXT Bilirubin or uric acid standard or control:

    Compositions and processes under subclass 8 which simulate the chemical
    effect of bilirubin or uric acid to calabrate or standardize a test.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97,     for tests for bilirubin absent the use of a standard or control.

    99,     for tests for uric acid absent the use of a standard or control.


CLS 436/13
TXT Lipid, cholesterol or triglyceride standard or control:

    Compositions and processes under subclass 8 which standardize or calabrate
    a test or test procedure for a lipid, cholesterol, or triglyceride.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for a test for lipids, cholesterol or triglycerides.


CLS 436/14
TXT Glucose, ketone, or nitrate standard or control:

    Compositions and processes under subclass 8 which simulate the chemical
    effect of a composition containing glucose, ketone or nitrates.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95,     for a test for glucose.

    110,    for a test for nitrates.

    128,    for a test for ketones or ketone   bodies.


CLS 436/15
TXT Protein or peptide standard or control (e.g., hemoglobin, etc.):

    Compositions or processs under subclass 8 which simulate the chemical
    effect of a protein or peptide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66,     for a test for a hemoglobin.

    86+,    for tests for proteins or peptides.


CLS 436/16
TXT Blood serum or blood plasma standard or control:

    Compositions or processes under subclass 8 in which simulate the chemical
    effect of blood serum or plasma.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     66, 67, 68, and 70, for tests involving blood or blood fractions.


CLS 436/17
TXT Preparation composition (e.g., lysing or precipitation, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 8 which are used to prepare a sample for a
    chemical test.

    (1)     Note.  Typically the compositions find use in either freeing the
    sample from material which would interfere with the test procedure by
    lysing or precipitation of the interferring material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175,    for processes of digestion or removal of interferring materials as
    part of a chemical test.


CLS 436/18
TXT Preservative, buffer, anticoagulant or diluent:

    Compositions under subclass 8 which are added to a sample for a chemical
    test which compositions serve to prevent deterioration of the sample,
    stabilize the pH, prevent the sample from coagulating, or increase the
    volume of the sample.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176,    for a process of stabilizing or preserving a sample for a chemical
    test.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 380 for preservate compositions and
    especially subclass 398 for chemical change inhibitors.


CLS 436/19
TXT Inorganic standards or controls:

    Compositions or processes under subclass 8 which simulate the chemical
    effect of an inorganic substance to standardize, or calabrate a chemical
    procedure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73+,    for processes of chemical analysis of metals.

    100+,   for processes of chemical analysis of inorganic acids, or bases.

    182,    for processes of chemical analysis of inorganic compounds.


CLS 436/20
TXT FOOD OR DAIRY PRODUCTS:

    Processes or composition therefor under the class definition wherein
    constituents or components of food or dairy products are determined by a
    chemical reaction.

    (1)     Note.  Food or dairy products tested under this subclass includes
    meat, fowl, fish or seafood, cereal or grain products, dairy products and
    beverages.

    (2)     Note.  Foods tested are not limited to those defined by human
    consumption.

    (3)     Note.  The constituents or components tested for include fats,
    oils, proteins, nitrates, metals, etc., so long as the claim is directed to
    the testing of some food or dairy product. A broader claim not limited to
    food would be classified below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses, for measuring and
    testing of physical properties, especially subclass 169 for testing flour,
    dough or bread by physical means.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclass 231 for processes of performing a test or measurement on an edible
    combined with an additional operation for testing, preparing, or perfecting
    an edible.


CLS 436/21
TXT Meat or eggs:

    Processes or compositions under subclass 20 for testing of animal flesh or
    of eggs.

    (1)     Note.  Typically the processes of this subclass determine protein
    content.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     for a process of chemically testing a nonfood material derived from
    cellular material of a living body.

    86+,    for processes and compositions for testing peptides, proteins, or
    amino acids not associated with a food.


CLS 436/22
TXT Dairy product:

    Processes or compositions under subclass 20 wherein the products tested are
    derived from or include animal milk as a major constituent.


CLS 436/23
TXT Milk or butter fat:

    Processes or compositions under subclass 22 for testing of milk or butter
    fat.


CLS 436/24
TXT Wine or alcoholic beverages:

    Processes or compositions under subclass 21 wherein the food tested is an
    ethyl alcohol containing beverages.

    (1)     Note.  A dealcoholized beverage is presumed to contain at least a
    trace of alcohol and is classifiable in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132,    tests for ethanol not forming part of a food or beverage.


CLS 436/25
TXT GEOCHEMICAL, GEOLOGICAL, OR GEOTHERMAL EXPLORATION:

    Processes or compositions under the class definition utilizing chemical
    analysis for studying or determining the existence, location of flow of
    materials or studying other natural phenomena on, within or below the
    earth's crust, or determining components of solids or ores.

    (1)     Note.  Most determinations are indirect for example determining
    metal carbonates, HCO3, Ca+, C1-, Mg+, as indication of deposits and will
    be classified according to purpose of the claim.

    (2)     Note.  The headnotes of Class 166, Wells, provide a comprehensive
    listing of well related testing art.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 152.01+ for borehole testing, per
    se, wherein the test is not of a purely electrical type or of a purely
    magnetic type.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 264, 265+, 268, 336+, and 350+ for processes
    which may involve a chemical test when combined with more than a nominal
    step of well drilling treating or recovering a fluid therefrom.  A process
    claiming the use of an injection and a separate recovery well is considered
    to be more than a nominal well treating step.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 323 for process of
    geophysical testing or investigation using electrical properties.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 9 for a
    process of testing for a mineral, oil, etc., by means of a microorganism or
    enzyme.


CLS 436/26
TXT For metallic ores:

    Processes or compositions under subclass 25 for determining some chemical
    property of metal containing ore.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     for chemical testing of or for mineral oils or carbonaceous
    minerals.

    139,    for tests preformed on hydrocarbons especially subclass 141 for
    octane tests.


CLS 436/27
TXT Using chemical tracers:

    Processes or compositions under subclass 25 wherein chemical tracers are
    utilized for studying or determining the existence, location or flow of
    materials within or below the earth's crust.

    (1)     Note.  The tracers used in the processes classified in this
    subclass are typically a chemical composition containing a component that
    is easily detectable and not normally present in the material under study.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for chemical tracer compositions, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 253+ for processes of geological testing
    or irradiation including the use of a radioactive tracer in a well and
    subclass 301 for a process of determination of oil presence contamination
    or concentration and subclasses 302+ for methods of using tracer which emit
    radiant energy.


CLS 436/28
TXT In situ testing:

    Processes or compositions under subclass 25 wherein the testing is
    conducted within the earth's crust.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is limited to processes wherein the testing
    device is inserted into the earth's crust.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not include  inserting an absorbing
    medium into a bore hole and subsequently removing the absorbent and
    determining the amount of gas/carbonaceous products absorbed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 152.07, 152.09, and 152.11 for
    core sample analysis for making a formation logging, subclasses 152.23+ for
    fluid flow measuring or fluid analysis combined with sampling well fluid
    wherein the test is not purely electrical or purely magnetic, and
    subclasses 863+ for methods and apparatus for sampling liquids not
    involving a well, or for soil gas sampling methods and apparatus.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 59 for processes of
    taking solid samples of earth formation combined with a step of retaining
    fluid therein, or taking a separate fluid sample.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 253+ for processes of geological
    testing, or irradiation including the use of a radioactive tracer in a well
    and subclass 301 for a process of determination of oil presence
    contamination or concentration and subclasses 302+ for methods of using a
    tracer which emits radiant energy.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 323+ for subject
    matter relating to the determination of an electrical characteristic of the
    subsurface of the earth, and involving devices in wells.

    507,    Earth Boring, Well Treating, and Oil Field Chemistry, subclasses
    100+ for compositions and mere methods of use of said compositions in earth
    boring and well treating processes.  See Class 166, subclasses 305.1, for a
    more detailed discussion of placing fluid into an earth formation.


CLS 436/29
TXT For petroleum oils or carbonaceous minerals:

    Processes of compositions under subclass 25 wherein oil gas or carbonaceous
    materials are sought.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are processes in which an
    adsorbent is placed within a bore hole and gas evolved is collected and
    then exhausted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139,    for a test for hydrocarbons including methane.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 19.01+ for the detection of a
    hydrocarbon gas in seawater; subclasses 23.2+ for a prospecting method for
    hydrocarbons, subclasses 61.43+ for detection of oil or hydrocarbons in
    water, and subclasses 152.01+ for a borehole test which is not  purely
    electrical or purely magnetic.


CLS 436/30
TXT Removing and testing drilling mud or fluid:

    Processes or compositions under subclass 29 wherein drilling mud or
    drilling fluid is chemically analyzed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 152.04 for drill mud analysis and
    subclasses 152.23+ for a process or an apparatus for fluid flow measuring
    or fluid analysis combined with sampling wherein neither the analysis nor
    the  measuring is of a purely electrical type or of a purely magnetic type.


CLS 436/31
TXT Removing and testing solid samples:

    Processes or compositions under subclass 29 where soil, rock, core samples,
    etc., are removed from the earth's crust and chemically analyzed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85      through 145, for tests for particular compounds not claimed as
    evolved from a mineral sample.

    139,    for tests for particular hydrocarbons.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 152.07, 152.09, and 152.11 for
    core sample analysis for making a borehole formation logging wherein the
    analysis is not of a purely electrical type or of a purely magnetic type.


CLS 436/32
TXT Analyzing evolved gas:

    Processes or compositions under subclass 31 where solid samples are
    chemically treated to evolve a gas and the gas is chemically analyzed.

    (1)     Note.  The evolution of gas need not be chemical evolution but
    includes physical treatment to release dissolved or otherwise trapped gas
    from a sample material.

    (2)     Note.  Typically the gases evolved include carbon dioxide.

    (3)     Note.  The test for the gas absent the evolution step would be
    found in subclasses below.

    (4)     Note.  The evolved gas is sometimes condensed and the condensate is
    analyzed.


CLS 436/33
TXT Evolving gas by acidification:

    Processes or compositions under subclasses 32 where the gas is evolved by
    treating or contacting the solid sample with an acid.

    (1)     Note.  Typically the processes included in this subclass involve a
    step of treating the solid sample with a mineral acid, e.g., H2SO4, etc.,
    to evolve gas.


CLS 436/34
TXT RATE OF REACTION DETERMINATION:

    Processes or compositions under the class definition where the change in
    concentration of a reactant per unit time or the number of moles of a
    reactant converted to products per unit time are measured.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is intended to provide for reaction rate or
    kinetic studies.

    (2)     Note.  The term "kinetic" may not occur in the document in question
    but there will be a description of a determination of a time rate of change
    of some parameter usually absorbance which is within the meaning of this
    subclass.


CLS 436/35
TXT USING ACTIVATED SPECIE:

    Processes or composition under the class definition where an unknown specie
    is determined by contacting the specie with a material that has been
    activated or excited to a metastable state and analyzing the resulting
    products or reaction of activated species.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes processes in which materials such as
    nitrogen, mercury argon, etc., are excited to a metastable state by
    exposing the material to high frequency discharge, microwave excitation,
    x-radiation, cold cathode discharges, U.V. lasers, etc., and contacting the
    excited material with the unknown(s) being monitored or detected.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not include a chemiluminescent species as
    an activated species.


CLS 436/36
TXT WITH USE OF CONDENSATION NUCLEI:

    Processes or materials under the class definition wherein water or another
    liquid is deposited on the unknown material in the vapor state to
    facilitate the optical study of the unknown.

    (1)     Note.  Generally the material in a gas sample is expanded to obtain
    a supersaturated condition relative to the gas and participated by use of
    water vapor.

    (2)     Note.  Materials examined include ionized particles and molecular
    species.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 28.01+ for the determination of
    the amount of solid matter in the analysis of gases generally, subclasses
    29.01+ for moisture content of gases, and subclasses 863+ for reciprocating
    and rotary samplers involving gases and liquids.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 37, for particle detection
    by condensation nuclei, subclasses 335+, for the determining of the size of
    particles by optical methods, subclasses 337+, for particle light
    scattering generally including the determination of concentration or number
    of particles by statistical methods, subclasses 437+ for transmission tests
    through gases for the determination of the concentration of particles
    present in the gases generally and visual inspection equipment.


CLS 436/37
TXT TESTING OF CATALYST:

    Processes or compositions under the class definitions where compositions
    specialized and designed for use as a catalyst are chemically analyzed.

    (1)     Note.  Processes for chemically evaluating the effectiveness of the
    catalyst are included herein.


CLS 436/38
TXT PURITY OF STEAM OR INERT GAS:

    Processes under the class definition wherein trace amounts of unspecified
    materials in steam or inert gases are chemically determined.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is intended to provide for processes which
    chemically determine the gross amount of undesired substances present in a
    sample without regard to the chemical identity of the undesired substance.
    If the undesired substance is named, classification is not proper herein
    but should be with the test for the named material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 19.01 for the detection of a
    hydrocarbon gas in seawater; subclass 23.2 for a prospecting method for
    hydrocarbons subclasses 61.43+ for detection of oil or hydrocarbons in
    water and subclasses 152.01+ for bore hole and drilling study.


CLS 436/39
TXT DETERMINATION OF WATER:

    Processes or compositions under the class definition for determining the
    presence or amount of water by means of a chemical reaction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 75 for a process of moisture
    determination by electrical or thermal conductivity.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, subclass 44 for
    processes in which the humidity of area is controlled and subclass 44 for
    use of an electrically conductive element.


CLS 436/40
TXT In petroleum oil, hydrocarbon oil, or organic fluid:

    Processes or compositions under subclass 39 for the determination of water
    in petroleum oil, hydrocarbon oil, or organic fluid.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 60 for further search notes relating to oil
    testing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing subclasses 19.01+ for the detection of a
    hydrocarbon gas in seawater; subclasses 23.2+ for a prospecting method for
    hydrocarbons; subclasses 61.43+ for detection of oil or hydrocarbon in
    water, and subclasses 152.01 for bore hole and drilling study.


CLS 436/41
TXT By use of a cobalt, copper, or nickel containing reagent:

    Processes or composition under subclass 39 in which a cobalt, copper or
    nickel containing test material is utilized in a test for water.


CLS 436/42
TXT By use of a karl fischer reagent:

    Processes or compositions under subclass 39 in which a reagent composed of
    a solution including iodine and sulfur dioxide is used to determine the
    presence, or amount of water.


CLS 436/43
TXT AUTOMATED CHEMICAL ANALYSIS:

    Processes under the class definition wherein sample(s) are analyzed by
    using self-operated mechanisms or devices.

    (1)     Note.  Included in the subclass are methods of controlling the
    operation of the self-operated analyzing system, i.e., process control of a
    chemical test procedure.

    (2)     Note.  Also included in the subclass are the methods of using the
    various subcombinations of the self-operated analyzer.  Examplary of such
    subcombinations is the method of aspirating, using aspirating devices of
    claimed structure when in such self-operated devices and the use is solely
    disclosed as in a self-operated chemical analyzer.

    (3)     Note.  This class does not provide for processes of automatic or
    condition responsive control of a chemical process except in the case (a)
    where the claims are so broad as to be unclassifiable in any other chemical
    class or (b) where there is effected some chemical test in combination with
    a mechanical or class which excludes chemical reactions or electrical
    process classifiable in a class which excludes chemical reactions or (c)
    where the process is that of condition responsive control of an analytical
    chemical test.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 863+ for a sampling process which
    is not claimed or solely disclosed as part of a process of chemical
    analysis and the search notes therein for other classes providing for
    sampling techniques.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 497+
    for the use of a data processing system or calculating computer to analyze
    the result of a chemical reaction which is only nominally claimed.


CLS 436/44
TXT Utilizing a moving indicator strip or tape:

    Processes under subclass 43 wherein the self operated device utilized
    includes a moving indicator strip or tape.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 66 for apparatus for carrying out the
    process of this subclass.


CLS 436/45
TXT Utilizing a centrifuge or compartmented rotor:

    Processes under subclass 43 wherein the sample to be analyzed is conveyed
    in a curvett or container of a turntable with chemical process stations
    located about the circumference of the turntable or a centrifuge is
    utilized.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are self-operated devices where
    the samples are contained within wells in the turntable with the turntable
    mounted in a housing having the necessary subcombination processing units.


CLS 436/46
TXT With sample on test slide:

    Processes under subclass 43 wherein the sample is conveyed via a test slide.


CLS 436/47
TXT With conveyance of sample along a test line in a container or rack:

    Processes under subclass 43 wherein samples to be subjected to testing are
    conveyed in containers, or racks containing a plurality of samples along a
    pathway along which various physical and chemical processes stations are
    located for the quantitative and qualitative analysis of the samples.

    (1)     Note.  Process stations includes physical and chemical operations
    such as aspirating, detecting, mixing, heating, incubating, analyzing,
    washing, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 63 for apparatus for carrying out the
    process of this subclass.


CLS 436/48
TXT With step of insertion or removal from test line:

    Process under subclass 47 wherein the sample containers or racks are fed
    into or out of the testing pathway.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes processes where the containers or
    racks are fed into or discharged from the testing pathway at the starting
    or terminating point of the testing pathway or processes where a container
    or rack is removed from the testing pathway during its processing for
    processing at a particular testing station and later reinserted into the
    testing pathway for further processing thereby allowing continuous movement
    of the testing pathway.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 19.01+ and 23.2+ for physical
    methods of gas analysis especially subclasses 23.35+ for chromatographic
    analysis.


CLS 436/49
TXT With treatment or replacement of aspirator element (e.g., cleaning, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 47 where the aspirating tip or pipette or
    container is cleaned or wiped or removed or replaced.


CLS 436/50
TXT Condition or time responsive:

    Processes under subclass 43 wherein the operation of the self-operated
    analyzer is controlled responsive to a sensed operating parameter or time
    sequence.

    (1)     Note.  Control of industrial processes with feedback or
    feedforeward control of fluids to or from the process controlled do not
    belong in this class.  They are classified with the appropriate synthesis
    class providing for the process.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 59 for process of taking
    solid samples of earth formation combined with a step of retaining fluid
    therein or taking a separate fluid sample.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 253+ for processes of geological testing
    or irradiation including the use of a radioactive tracer in a well subclass
    310 for a process of determination of oil presence contaimination or
    concentration and subclasses 302+ for methods of using a tracer which emits
    radiant energy.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 323+ for subject
    matter relating to the determination of an electrical characteristic of the
    subsurface of the earth, and involving devices in wells.

    507,    Earth Boring, Well Treating, and Oil Field Chemistry, subclasses
    100+ for compositions and mere methods of use of said compositions in earth
    boring and well treating processes.  See Class 166, subclasses 305.1+, for
    a more detailed discussion of placing fluid into an earth formation.


CLS 436/51
TXT With automated titrator:

    Processes under subclass 50 wherein a titration process is controlled by a
    condition responsive control system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 775+ for electrolytic analysis or
    testing processes.


CLS 436/52
TXT With a continuously flowing sample or carrier stream:

    Processes under subclass 43 wherein a continuously flowing stream of a
    sample or carrier fluid is formed and flows into and through analysis.


CLS 436/53
TXT With formation of a segmented stream:

    Processes under subclass 52 wherein the continuously flowing stream is
    segmented by alternately injecting a sample, reagent or any number of
    fluids into a common flow path.


CLS 436/54
TXT With aspirator of claimed structure:

    Processes under subclass 43 where the self-operated analyzer utilizes an
    aspirating means of claimed structure.


CLS 436/55
TXT CONDITION RESPONSIVE CONTROL:

    Processes under the class definition in which (a) a process parameter in a
    qualitative or quantitative chemical analysis is determined and that or
    another process parameter of the analysis is changed in repsonse to the
    analysis or (b) a process parameter in a chemical process is determined by
    a qualitative or quantitative chemical analysis and some parameter of the
    process is changed in response to the analysis and such condition
    responsive control is not other wise classifiable in the class providing
    for the chemical process.

    (1)     Note.  In general each chemical class provides for control of its
    own processes even when such control is responsive to a qualitative or
    quantitative chemical analysis.  To be properly classifiable in this class
    a condition responsive control of a process should be unclassifiable in the
    class providing for the chemical process in question.

    (2)     Note.  See subclass 43, (3) Note.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     for process condition responsive control of an automated chemical
    analyzer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclassses 497+
    for the use of a data processing system or calculating computer to analyze
    the results of a chemical reaction which is only nominally claimed.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 62 for apparatus for carrying out the
    process of this class.


CLS 436/56
TXT TRACERS OR TAGS:

    Processes or compositions under the class definition which utilize a
    chemical composition to identify the origin of a material associated with
    the chemical composition.

    (1)     Note.  An example of the subject matter of this subclass would be
    an explosive composition with additives that are identifiable chemically
    and indicate the producer of the explosive.


CLS 436/57
TXT INCLUDING USE OF RADIOACTIVE PROPERTIES:

    Processes or compositions under the class definition wherein analysis or a
    chemical reaction includes measurement of radioactivity.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes scintillation counting and sample
    preparation by pyrolysis or combustion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82+,    for the chemical testing of radioactive materials.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 407+ for methods for detecting radiation
    emanating from a radioactive material in the body.


CLS 436/58
TXT Dosage determination of high energy radiation (e.g., use of an X-ray
    dosimeter, etc.):

    Processes or compositions under subclass 57 which determine by means of a
    chemical reaction, the exposure to radiation of wavelengths of less than
    1.4 x 10-7 cm.


CLS 436/59
TXT Including pyrolysis of radioactive material:

    Processes or compositions under subclass 57 which include a step or
    pyrolysis of a sample material at least part of which is radioactive.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155+,   for processes of chemical analysis including a step of pyrolysis.


CLS 436/60
TXT LUBRICANT, GREASE, MINERAL OILS, HYDROCARBON OIL PRODUCT, OR FATS OR LIPIDS
    FOR OXIDATION (E.G., BREAKDOWN PRODUCTS OR CONTAMINATION, ETC.):

    Processes or compositions under the class definition in which a lubricant,
    fat or oil is tested for oxidation products, for products of the breakdown
    of the fat or oil, or for contamination.

    (1)     Note.  These tests include:  amount of unsaturated acids in fats,
    oils or gasoline; refrigeration oil analysis; acid and base content;
    neutralization number; metal content; antioxidant effectiveness; detergency
    of lubricating oils; chemicals in oil; organic solvent tests; oxidation of
    fats or lipids.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 28.01+ for testing for solid
    matter entrained in a gas, subclasses 61.71+ for the testing of a liquid
    for sediment or foreign material content where more than a visual or
    photoelectric test of the color or the amount of visible radiant energy
    transmitted through or scattered by the liquid involved, and subclasses
    53.05+ for lubricant testing.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 206 for visual indicators, per
    se, where no color or other optical comparison test is involved and for
    level indicators of the mechanical type.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses:

       51,  for tests of oil which may involve infrared radiation.

       70,  for determining the physical properties of oil by the optical
    response produced by visible light transmitted though or reflected by the
    oil.

       128,         for refraction test devices which may be applicable for
    testing of oil.

       364+,        for polarization test devices which may be applicable for
    testing of oil.

       402, for color test devices which may be applicable for the testing of
    oil.

       432, for transmission test devices particularly particle suspension
    tests.

       445,         for reflection test devices which may be applicable to the
    testing of oil.


CLS 436/61
TXT Acidity, basicity or neutralization number:

    Processes or compositions under subclass 60 in which acidity or basicity of
    a lubricant is determined.


CLS 436/62
TXT OXYGEN DEMAND (E.G., BOD, TOD, COD, ETC.):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein ozidizable matter in an
    aqueous sample is determined.

    (1)     Note.  Three principle oxygen demand tests are Biological Oxygen
    demand (BOD), Chemical Oxygen demand (COD) and Total Oxygen demand (TOD).
    BOD = measure of organic matter in sample in terms of the amount of oxygen
    the sample will consume when organic matter is eliminated.  COD = measure
    of the organic matter in a sample that is susceptible to oxidation by a
    strong chemical oxidant.  TOD = amount of oxygen required when the
    combustible materials in a sample burn in the presence of an oxygen
    containing feed stream.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    for processes of carbon content determination which include a step
    of converting the carbon content of a sample to carbon dioxide.

    146,    for processes of determination of total organic carbon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclass 529 for determination of metabolic rate by a
    method which measures the rate of oxygen consumption of a living body by
    means contacting or in a living body.


CLS 436/63
TXT BIOLOGICAL CELLULAR MATERIAL TESTED:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the material analyzed is
    a cellular material obtained from biological fluids or tissue.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes tests on red and white corpuscles,
    blood platelets, tissue cells, etc.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not include test for clotting factor, see
    subclass 69.

    (3)     Note.  Hemolysis tests are classified here.

    (4)     Note.  This subclass does not include sedimentation rate and
    hematocrit, see subclass 70.


CLS 436/64
TXT CANCER:

    Processes or compositions under the class definition which chemically
    detect the presence of cancer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500+,   for an immunological test for cancer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 9.1+
    for an in vivo determination of cancer.


CLS 436/65
TXT PREGNANCY OR OVULATION:

    Processes under the class definitions for determining pregnancy or
    ovulation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 54.01+ for ovulation tests
    wherein the viscosity of the vaginal fluid is measured.


CLS 436/66
TXT HEMOGLOBIN, MYOGLOBIN OR OCCULT BLOOD:

    Process or compositions under the class definition which test for
    hemoglobin, myoglobin or trace blood.

    (1)     Note.  The substances classified herein are often referred to as
    peroxidatively active.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclass 368 for methods and apparatus of measuring a
    physical characteristic of blood by means placed against or in the body and
    subclass 371 for methods of detecting bleeding.


CLS 436/67
TXT Glycosylated hemoglobin:

    Processes under subclass 66 wherein glycosylated hemoglobin is subject to a
    qualitative or quantitative chemical analysis.


CLS 436/68
TXT BLOOD GAS (E.G., OXYGEN, CARBON DIOXIDE, BLOOD pH, ETC.):

    Processes under the class definitions wherein gases in the blood are
    determined.

    (1)     Note.  Blood and pH gases such as O2, CO and CO2 are determined.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 71.1+, 425+, 438,
    439+ particularly 446 and 450 for electrical tests performed on blood such
    as sedimentation, PH, or blood gas.


CLS 436/69
TXT CLOTTING OR CLOTTING FACTOR LEVEL TESTS:

    Processes or compositions under the class definition, for performing
    clotting tests and factor level tests.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of the tests included here are: P.T. Prothrombin
    time, APPT. Activated partial prothrombin time, T.T. Thromboplastin Test,
    P.P Prothrombin and Procovertin Test

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 61.65+ for testing the settling
    rate of liquid suspensions of solids.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, particularly subclasses 40+ for a
    transmissive, or reflective optical measurement or test performed on blood
    such as statistical counting of blood component particles, determination of
    hemoglobin content or determination of oxyhemoglobin in blood.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, for the
    counting of blood cells or particles one by one.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclasses 10+ for particle counters with or without
    the sizing of the particles counted.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 73 for apparatus for carrying out the
    process of this subclass.

    600,    Surgery, for diagnostic methods which utilize light sensing units
    on or in the body for the testing or the inspection of blood and subclass
    368 for a method wherein a physical characteristic of blood is measured by
    means placed against or in the body, e.g., time required for blood to clot,
    sedimentation rate, white cell count or viscosity.


CLS 436/70
TXT SEDIMENTATION RATE OR HEMATOCRIT:

    Processes under the class definition wherein the sedimentation rate or
    hematocrit are determined.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 71.1+, 425+, 438,
    439+ particularly 446 and 450 electrical tests performed on blood such as
    sedimentation, PH or blood gas.


CLS 436/71
TXT LIPIDS, TRIGLYCERIDES, CHOLESTEROL, OR LIPOPROTEINS:

    Processes or compositions under the class definition for determining
    lipids, triglycerides, cholesterol and lipoproteins.

    (1)     Note.  Steroid-broadly recited is classified as a hydrocarbon in
    subclass 139.



    If a steriod is specifically recited it is originally classified in an
    appropriate subclass and crossed into 139.

    (2)     Note.  Estrogen is a steroid lipid and is therefore originally
    classified with cholesterol.


CLS 436/72
TXT SILICON CONTAINING:

    Processes or compositions under the class definition for chemically testing
    silicon or silicon containing organic or inorganic compounds.


CLS 436/73
TXT METAL OR METAL CONTAINING:

    Processes or compositions under the class definition in which the species
    sought is a metal or metal containing compound or composition.

    (1)     Note.  Ions are classified with their un-ionized form.


CLS 436/74
TXT Present in biological fluids (e.g., blood, urine, etc.):

    Processes or composition under subclass 73 which determine the metal
    present in a fluid derived from a living body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     for chemical tests performed on biological materials with intact
    cells.


CLS 436/75
TXT Oxide or gas content of metal (e.g., determination of dissolved gases,
    etc.):

    Processes or compositions under subclass 73 which determine the metallic or
    nonmetallic oxide content or determine the included gases in a mass of
    metal.


CLS 436/76
TXT Organometallic compound determined:

    Processes or compositions under subclass 73 which determine a compound
    containing carbon covalently bonded to metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66,     for tests for hemoglobin.


CLS 436/77
TXT Ge, Sn, Pb:

    Processes or compositions under subclass 76 which determine the presence or
    amount of an organometallic compound of tin, lead or germanium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for tests to determine the lead content of blood.


CLS 436/78
TXT Presence of a component of steel:

    Processes or compositions under subclass 73 for the analysis of components
    of iron carbon alloys.

    (1)     Note.  It is conclusively presumed that any composition denominated
    steel will come within the definition of this subclass.


CLS 436/79
TXT Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs, Fr, Be, Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba, Ra:

    Processes or compositions under subclass 73 for the analysis of lithium,
    sodium, potassium, rubidium, cesium, beryllium, magnesium, calcium,
    strontium, barium, or radium.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for water hardness tests even though
    the hardness is indirectly determined as by use of a chelating agent.


CLS 436/80
TXT Cu, Ag, Au:

    Processes or compositions under subclass 73 for analysis of copper, silver
    or gold.


CLS 436/81
TXT Zn, Cd, Hg, Sc, Y, or Actinides, or Lanthanides:

    Processes under subclass 73 for the analysis of zinc, cadmium, mercury,
    scandium, yttrium or elements with atomic numbers 57-71 or 89 or higher.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for analysis of metals dependent upon radioactivity.


CLS 436/82
TXT Lanthanide or Actinides:

    Processes or compositions under subclass 81 directed to the analysis of
    elements with atomic numbers 57-71 or 89-103 inclusive.

    (1)     Note.  The Lanthanides are: La (Lanthanum), Ce (Cerium), Pr
    (Praseadymium), Nd (Neodymium), II (Illinium) or Pm (Promethium), Sm
    (Samarium), Eu (Europium), Gd (Gadolinium), Tb (Terbium), Dy (Dysprosium),
    Ho (Holmium, Er (Erbium), Tm (Thulium), Y (Ytterbium), and Lu (Lutecium).

    (2)     Note.  The Actinides are: Elements with atomic numbers 89-103
    inclusive, Ac (Actinium), Th (Thorium), Pa (Prottactinium), U (Uranium), Np
    (Neptunium), Pu (Plutonium), Am (Americurium), BK (Berkelium), Cf
    (Californium), Es (Einsteinium), Fm (Ferium), Md (Mendelevium), No
    (Nobelium), and Lw (Lawrenceium).


CLS 436/83
TXT Ti, Zr, Hf, Va, Nb, Ta, Cr, Mo, W:

    Processes under subclass 73 for analysis of titanium, zirconium, hafnium,
    vanadium, niobium, tantalum, chromium, molybdenium or wolfram (tungsten).


CLS 436/84
TXT Mn, Tc, Re, Fe, Ru, Os, Co, Rh, Ir, Ni, Pd, Pt:

    Processes or compositions under subclass 73 for analysis of manganese,
    technetium, rhenium, iron, cobalt, nickel, ruthenium, rhodium, palladium,
    osmium, iridium and platinum.


CLS 436/85
TXT SYNTHETIC OR NATURAL RESIN:

    Processes or compositions under the class definition, or in which a resin
    is subjected to a qualitative, or quantitative chemical analysis.

    (1)     Note.  Resin is defined coterminously with the Class 520 definition.

    (2)     Note.  Measurement of physical property (i.e., electrical
    resistivity) of an on going polymerization process to obtain optimum
    operating conditions is classified below under technique used.

    (3)     Note.  Resin polymer stability tests, i.e., temperature, light,
    oxidative, reductive stability, are classified with the polymer.

    (4)     Note.  A process investigating the hardening time of a resin is
    presumed to be a chemical testing process in the absence of a clear showing
    to the contrary.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for method and materials for chemically determining the
    crystallinity of a polymer.

    72,     for silicon containing polymers.


CLS 436/86
TXT PEPTIDE, PROTEIN, OR AMINO ACID:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which the chemical specie
    subject to qualitative or quantitative chemical analysis is an (1) amino
    acid, (2) two or more amino acids residues linked by a peptide bond, (i.e.,
    amide linkage) or (3) a compound containing both peptide and saccharide
    moieties.

    (1)     Note.  A determination of total protein is a determination of the
    total albumin and globulins in a sample.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, for protein containing coating
    or plastic compositions, particularly subclasses 4, 31.24, 31.53, 31.82,
    31.94, 38.4, 124+, 614, 645, and indented subclasses.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, especially
    subclasses 400+ for a composition of that class in a protein ingestible
    capsule.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 63, 92, 105, for edible
    protein compositions or products and related process involving the same.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, for a nonstructural stock
    material product in the form of a composite web or sheet including a layer
    comprising protein, and other appropriately titled subclasses (e.g.,
    subclasses 435 and 458).

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 68.1+
    for microbial synthesis of peptides, subclass 106, for synthesis of amino
    acids and 91.3 for synthesis of ribonucleic acids, subclass 6 for tests for
    nucleic acid.

    514,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 2+
    for a composition containing peptide or protein.

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives; Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclasses 300+ for peptides and
    proteins and their reaction products.

    536,    Organic Compounds, for nucleic acids and processes of chemical
    synthesis thereof.

    562,    Organic Compounds, subclass 516 for  amino acids produced from
    protein.


CLS 436/87
TXT Glycoproteins (e.g., hormones, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 86 in which a protein or peptide is
    covalently bonded to a saccharide.

    (1)     Note.  Glycoproteins classified in this and the indented subclasses
    represent only a small portion of glycopeptide testing processes.  Enzymes,
    immunogoloublins, antibodies and subcellular parts of cells represent large
    bodies of art classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, for tests by and
    for enzymes particularly subclasses 23 and 24, for tests involving proteins
    and peptides.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500+,   for tests involving antigens and antibodies many of which are
    glycoproteins.


CLS 436/88
TXT Albumin:

    Subject matter under subclass 87 in which the specie of intent is albumin.

    (1)     Note.  Albumin is a commonly used immunogenic carrier and such use
    is provided for in subclasses 500+ of this class and in 530 subclasses 362+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives; Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclasses 362+ for processes under
    that class definition involving albumin or reaction products thereof.


CLS 436/89
TXT Amino acid or sequencing procedure:

    Subject matter under subclass 86 in which (a) the specie of interest is an
    organic compound that contains both a basic amino group and a acidic
    carboxyl group or (b) a process of analysis of a peptide in which the
    identity and order of the amino acid residues in the peptide are determined.

    (1)     Note.  The peptide need not be completely sequenced; a procedure to
    determine as few as two units would be properly classifiable herein.


CLS 436/90
TXT Alpha or beta amino acid:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 in which a primary or secondary amino
    group is bonded to the alpha or beta carbon of the amino acid.


CLS 436/91
TXT HETEROCYCLIC CARBON COMPOUND (I.E., O, S, N, Se, Te, AS ONLY RING HETERO
    ATOM):

    Subject matter under the class definition involving the qualitative or
    quantitative chemical analysis of a carbon compound which contains a ring
    composed of carbon and at least one element from the group consisting of
    nitrogen, sulfur, selenium, tellurium or oxygen and not other atoms.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are analysis involving heterocyclic acid
    anhydrides, lactones or lactams.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    540     through 549, Organic Compounds, for processes of  synthesis of
    heterocyclic carbon compounds.


CLS 436/92
TXT Diverse hetero atoms in same or different rings (e.g., alkaloids, opiates,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 91 in which (a) a single carbon ring has more
    than one diverse hetero atom or (b) a fused- or bridged-ring system has
    diverse hetero atoms in one or more of the carbon rings.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for (a) alkaloids which include
    opiates such as morphine, codeine, strychnine, quinine, cocaine, and
    nicotine and (b) phenothazines such as chlopromazine, trifluoperazine, and
    triflupromazine.


CLS 436/93
TXT Hetero-O (e.g., ascorbic acid, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 91 in which the hetero ring contains only
    oxygen as the hetero atom.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are tests for the active constituents of the
    cannabis drugs, i.e., derivatives of cannbinol especially
    tetrahydrocannabinol. Broadly claimed tests for marihuana are included
    herein in the absence of a clear showing that the test is for a nonhetero-O
    containing derivative of cannabinol, typically a hydroxyl or carboxylic
    acid substituted hydrocarbon.


CLS 436/94
TXT Saccharide (e.g., DNA, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 93 in which the substance subjected to
    chemical analysis is or contains a saccharide.

    (1)     Note.  A sugar or carbohydrate is presumed to be a saccharide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    935,    Genetic Engineering:  Recombinant DNA Technology, Hybrid or Fused
    Cell Technology, and Related Manipulations of Nucleic Acids, which provides
    a search collection for processes of altering the genetic structure of
    micro-organisms; genes and methods of modifying genes and their expression;
    vectors and methods of modifying vectors; methods of introducing DNA into a
    cell; micro-organisms, per se, which have had their genetic sequence
    altered by recombinant DNA techniques or by cell fusion or by uptake of
    DNA; testing; separation techniques; apparatus; and methods of use of
    vectors or of the genetically engineered micro-organisms; methods of gene
    therapy or genetic modification of living organisms.


CLS 436/95
TXT Glucose:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 in which the saccharide is glucose.


CLS 436/96
TXT Hetero-N:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 in which the hetero ring contains only
    nitrogen as the hetero atom.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for hetero rings with multiple
    nitrogen ring atoms as well as ring system with nitrogen in diverse rings.

    (2)     Note.  Paraquat and phencyclidine would be provided for in this
    subclass as would nicotine or nicotinic acid.


CLS 436/97
TXT Bile pigment:

    Subject matter under subclass 96 the degradation products of heme are
    detected.

    (1)     Note.  Bile pigments include: bilirubin, dihydrobilirubin,
    Mesobilirubin, urobilin, urobilinogen, urobilin and stercobilin.


CLS 436/98
TXT Plural nitrogen in the same ring (e.g., barbituarates, creatinine, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 96 in which the compound to be analyzed
    contains a hetero ring with two or more nitrogen atoms as members of the
    same ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for (a) barbituric acid derivatives
    including dephenylhydantoin, phenobarbital, secobarbital, pentobarbital,
    amobarbital, aprobarbital and thiopental and (b) paraquat.


CLS 436/99
TXT Uric acid:

    Subject matter under subclass 98 wherein the specie of interest is
    triketopurine.


CLS 436/100
TXT INORGANIC ACID OR BASE (E.G, HC1, SULFURIC ACID, ETC.):

    Subject matter under class definition for testing for mineral acids or
    bases.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is intended to provide for tests for simple
    inorganic acids such as sulfuric and nitric, etc. Many elaborate theories
    of acidity and bascisity exist, if to classify a document herein one of
    these theories is used, classification herein is incorrect.


CLS 436/101
TXT Halogen containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 which contains, chorine, bromine,
    fluorine, iodine or astatine.


CLS 436/102
TXT Sulfur containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the acid determined contains
    sulfur.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119+,   for compositions and processes for determination of sulfur dioxide
    which may include aqueous solutions thereof.


CLS 436/103
TXT PHOSPHORUS CONTAINING:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which the compound or
    composition to be investigated is or contains phosphorus.


CLS 436/104
TXT Organic (e.g., chemical warfare agents, insecticides, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 103 in which the compound containing
    phosphorus is organic.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 133 for a definition or organic.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass primarily provides for insecticides and
    chemical warfare agents e.g., G agents, anticholinesterase agent, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for a qualitative or quantitative tests for phospholipids
    especially lecithin.


CLS 436/105
TXT Of inorganic phosphorus compound in body fluid:

    Subject matter under subclass 103 involving a quantitative or a qualitative
    test for inorganic phosphorus in a fluid produced by or taken from the body.

    (1)     Note.  Typically the body fluid is blood serum.


CLS 436/106
TXT NITROGEN CONTAINING:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which the compound or
    composition to be investigated is or contains nitrogen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86+,    for proteins, peptides and amino  acids.

    94,     for nitrogen containing saccharides.

    96+,    for nitrogen containing hetero compounds.


CLS 436/107
TXT N-Nitroso containing (e.g., nitrosamine, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 106 in which the nitrogen containing species
    is the radical=N-NO.


CLS 436/108
TXT Urea or blood urea nitrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 in which a test is directed to a
    qualitative or quantitative test for N2 - CO - N2 or is directed to a
    determination of blood urea nitrogen.


CLS 436/109
TXT Cyanide or isocyanide:

    Subject matter under subclass 106 in which the specie to be determined
    contains the - C=N or - N=C radical.


CLS 436/110
TXT Nitrite or nitrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 106 in which the specie determined is (1) a
    salt of nitric acid, or compound containing the radical -NO3 or (2) a salt
    of nitrous acid or a compound containing the radical -NO2.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for nitrogen oxide gases.


CLS 436/111
TXT Amine and quaternary ammonium:

    Subject matter under subclass 106 in which the specie to be determined
    contains an amino group.

    (1)     Note.  Amines R is an organic radical

    Primary         H2Nr

    Secondary       R H N R  (imines)

    Tertiary                R2NR

    Quaternary      R4NOH (ammonium)

            Amide

            -CONH2

    (2)     Note.  This subclass would provide for aralkylamines such as
    amphetamine, methamphetamine, methadone, propxyphene, and methaquaone.


CLS 436/112
TXT Tertiary amine:

    Subject matter under subclass 111 in which the specie tested for is NR3
    where R is an organic radical.


CLS 436/113
TXT Ammonia:

    Subject matter under subclass 106 in which the specie tested for in NH3.


CLS 436/114
TXT Total nitrogen determined:

    Subject matter under subclass 106 in which the total quantity of nitrogen
    present in a sample is determined without regard for the specific identity
    of the compound which contains the nitrogen.


CLS 436/115
TXT As part of an elemental analysis:

    Subject matter under subclass 114 in which the total nitrogen content is
    determined as part of an elemental analysis in which at least one other
    element is quantitatively determined.


CLS 436/116
TXT Oxides of nitrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 106 in which the specie to be tested is
    composed solely of nitrogen and oxygen.


CLS 436/117
TXT Only nitrogen dioxide:

    Subject matter under subclass 116 in which nitrogen dioxide is the only
    nitrogen oxide determined.

    (1)     Note.  NO2 may be in admixture with other gases NOx, CO2, SO2,
    etc., but is the only gas quantitatively detected.


CLS 436/118
TXT Both nitrogen oxide and dioxide:

    Subject matter under subclass 116 in which both nitric and nitrous oxide
    are determined.


CLS 436/119
TXT SULFUR CONTAINING:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which the compound or
    composition to be investigated is or contains sulfur.

    (1)     Note.  As used herein sulfur oxide includes gaseous sulfur dioxide
    and its aqueous solution but does not include sulfur trioxide, sulfuric
    acid or its salts which are classified in subclass 102 above.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is intended to provide for tests for "sulfur
    radicals", e.g., sulfate, etc., for a determination of the total sulfur
    present without reference to the particular compound or radical containing
    the sulfur.


CLS 436/120
TXT Organic or sulfhydryl containing (e.g., mercaptan, hydrogen sulfide, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 119 in which (1) an organic sulfur containing
    specie or (2) a specie containing the -Sh radical is sought by qualitative
    or quantitative chemical analysis.

    (1)     Note.  The sulfhydry radical is -SH and thus includes mercaptans
    and thiois, and hydrosulfides.

    (2)     Note.  See subclass 133 for a definition of organic.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass provides for hydrogen sulfide and mercaptan
    tests. These tests are also referred to as sulfhydryl or hydrosulfide test.


CLS 436/121
TXT Only hydrogen sulfide:

    Subject matter under subclass 120 in which the only test perferred for a
    sulfur compound is for hydrogen sulfide.

    (1)     Note.  H2S can be in admixture with other gases but is the only gas
    detected or determined.


CLS 436/122
TXT Sulfur dioxide:

    Subject matter under subclass 119 in which SO2, per se, is the specie which
    is subject to a quantitative or qualitative chemical analysis.


CLS 436/123
TXT Total or elemental sulfur:

    Subject matter under subclass 119 in which (1) the total sulfur content of
    a sample is determined or (2) the total elemental sulfur is determined.

    (1)     Note.  The total sulfur may be in the form of a variety of sulfur
    compounds but are included herein where there is no analysis for their
    identity, with only the total amount determined.

    (2)     Note.  Total sulfur can be sulfur content of organic and/or
    inorganic materials.


CLS 436/124
TXT HALOGEN CONTAINING:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which the compound or
    composition to be investigated is or contains halogen.


CLS 436/125
TXT In aqueous solution:

    Subject matter under subclass 124 in which the specie investigated is in an
    aqueous solution.

    (1)     Note.  An aqueous solution includes body fluids.


CLS 436/126
TXT Carbon containing compound (e.g., vinylchloride, etc.):

    Subject matter under the class definition in which the specie to be
    investigated is a compound containing halogen, carbon and hydrogen.


CLS 436/127
TXT OXYGEN CONTAINING:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which the compound or
    composition to be investigated is or contains oxygen.


CLS 436/128
TXT Carbonyl, ether, adehyde or ketone containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 127 in which the specie to be investigated
    contains R-C=O, R-O-R, RCHO or RCOOH.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclass will provide for tests for
    fatty oils and higher fatty acids, i.e., C7+.

    (2)     Note.  A ketone body test is classified here even through acetone
    is specifically disclosed as the ketone body.


CLS 436/129
TXT Carboxylic acid:

    Subject matter under subclass 128 in which the specie to be investigated
    contains a carboxylic acid functional group.

    (1)     Note.  Acetic acid and salicyclic acid are classifiable herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89      and 90, for chemical tests for amino acids.


CLS 436/130
TXT Formaldehyde or acetone:

    Subject matter under subclass 128 in which the specie investigated is H CHO
    or CH3 CO CH3.


CLS 436/131
TXT Hydroxyl containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 127 in which the investigated specie contains
    a hydroxyl group i.e., R-OH.

    (1)     Note.  Glycerol and glycerine are synonymous with 1, 2, 3
    propanetriol. Glucose is a saccharide classifiable in subclass 95.


CLS 436/132
TXT Ethanol:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 in which the specie investigated is
    ethanol.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclass 532 for methods of qualitative or quantitative
    analysis of a particular component of the breath by means placed against or
    in the body.


CLS 436/133
TXT Inorganic carbon compounds:

    Subject matter under subclass 127 in which there is a qualitative or
    quantitative chemical test for inorganic compound of carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Organic compounds are compounds containing carbon which are
    further characterized by the presence of two carbon atoms bonded together
    or one atom of carbon bonded to at least one atom of hydrogen or halogen or
    one atom of carbon bonded to one atom of nitrogen by a single or double
    bond.


CLS 436/134
TXT Carbon monoxide only:

    Subject matter under subclass 133 in which the only chemical specie tested
    for is carbon monoxide.


CLS 436/135
TXT Ozone or peroxide:

    Subject matter under subclass 127 in which the qualitative or quantitative
    chemical test is for O3 or for an organic or inorganic peroxide.


CLS 436/136
TXT Molecular oxygen:

    Subject matter under subclass 127 in which there is a qualitative or
    quantitative test for molecular oxygen.


CLS 436/137
TXT Fuel/air mixture or exhaust gas analysis:

    Subject matter under subclass 136 in which the fluid tested for the
    presence of molecular oxygen is either a fuel/air mixture or the exhaust
    gas from some process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    for analysis of gas streams for their nitrogen oxides content.

    134,    for analysis of gas streams for their carbon monoxide content.

    143,    for analysis of gas streams for the residual hydrocarbon content,
    flammability or hydrogen or hydrocarbon content in an air/fuel mixture.


CLS 436/138
TXT Dissolved or trace oxygen or oxygen content of a sealed environment:

    Subject matter under subclass 136 in which the molecular oxygen is present
    (a) dissolved in a liquid (b) is denominated as a trace, residium, etc. or
    (c) in which the test is directed to the detection of the oxygen content of
    a confined space which is isolated from the atmosphere.


CLS 436/139
TXT HYDROCARBON:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which there is a qualitative
    or quantitative chemical analysis of compounds which consist of carbon and
    hydrogen only.

    (1)     Note.  Coal has arbitrarily been classified as a hydrocarbon.

    (2)     Note.  A claim broadly reciting "organic compound" with a shotgun
    disclosure is originally classified on the basis of analysis technique in
    subclasses 147 through 181 and desirably cross-referenced to this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for determination of BOD, COD or TOD which may include the
    detection of hydrocarbons.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 19.01+ for the detection of
    hydrocarbon gas in seawater; subclasses 23.2+ for a prospecting method for
    hydrocarbons; subclasses 61.43+ for detection of oil or hydrocarbons in
    water and subclass 152.01 for bore hole and drilling study.

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 775+ for electrolytic analysis or
    testing processes, especially subclass 787 for electrolytic determination
    of an organic compound.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 301 for methods involving radiant energy
    for determination of oil presence, contamination or concentration.


CLS 436/140
TXT Aromatic:

    Subject matter under the subclass 139 in which the qualitative and
    quantitative chemical analysis is for a compound containing one or more
    aromatically unsaturated rings.


CLS 436/141
TXT Acyclic (e.g., methane, octane, isoparaffin, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 139 in which the hydrocarbon is linear.

    (1)     Note.  Octane and gasoline tests are classifiable here.


CLS 436/142
TXT Unsaturated (e.g., ethylene, diene, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 141 in which the hydrocarbon posseses one or
    more double or triple bonds between two or more carbon atoms.


CLS 436/143
TXT Total hydrocarbon, flammability, combustibility (e.g., air-fuel mixture,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 139 in which (a) the total hydrocarbon
    content of a sample is determined without regard to the identity of the
    hydrocarbon or (b) the flammability or combustibility of a mixture is
    determined, or (c) a combustible gas test.

    (1)     Note.  A test broadly claimed as for combustable content should be
    originally classified in subclasses 147+ and desirably cross-referenced
    here if a hydrocarbon is disclosed.


CLS 436/144
TXT HYDROGEN, PER SE:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which the test is for
    molecular hydrogen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163,    for hydrogen ion content test, i.e., pH.


CLS 436/145
TXT CARBON CONTAINING:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which elemental carbon content
    or presence is determined.


CLS 436/146
TXT In an aqueous solution, (e.g., TOC, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 145, in which the carbon content of a aqueous
    solution is determined.


CLS 436/147
TXT MEASUREMENT INCLUDES TEMPERATURE CHANGE OF THE MATERIAL BEING ANALYZED
    (E.G., CALORIMETRY, ETC.):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein temperature changes
    occuring when a material to be analyzed is chemically reacted are utilized
    as the basis for qualitative or quantitative chemical analysis.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for processes of calorimetry wherein
    the heat of reaction of a material is used to qualitatively or
    quantitatively identify a material, mere determination of heat of formation
    of a known compound is provided for in Class 73, Measuring and Testing.

    (2)     Note.  In general the calorimetry found in this Class 436 will
    involve the chemical combination of a chemical constituent with another to
    determine the amount or identity of one reactant.

    (3)     Note.  Although burning a combustible material is technically a
    chemical reaction, it has not for purposes of classification been
    considered "chemical".  Thus, a process of combustion followed by analysis
    of the results may be found in Classes 73, 250, 324, and 356 on the basis
    of the analysis technique.

    (4)     Note.  The determination of amount of a chemical species is
    presumptively a chemical analysis in the absence of a showing that the
    materials are identified by physical tests alone.

    (5)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for a process wherein the
    temperature sensor or a portion thereof reacts with the material to be
    analyzed, such as a process wherein the properties of a conductor or
    semiconductor are chemically altered in an analysis with a corresponding
    change in electrical properties.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151+,   for a process of chemical analysis utilizing a catalyst coated
    temperature responsive electric element and the search notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 25.01+ for a method of gas
    analysis by electrical thermal determination.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 311+ for methods which
    include heating, burning or otherwise stimulating a sample to cause
    emission of radiation for optical analysis including burning, resistance
    heating, flame and high frequency fields.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 31+ for processes for
    calorimetrically determining the amount of a constituent in a compound or
    the heat of chemical combination where such process involve no more than a
    determination of the heat evolved by combustion of the material under test.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 51 for apparatus for carrying out the
    process of this subclass.


CLS 436/148
TXT MEASUREMENT INCLUDES CHANGE IN VOLUME OR PRESSURE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the basis of analysis is
    a change in volume or pressure caused by chemical reaction.


CLS 436/149
TXT MEASUREMENT OF ELECTRICAL OR MAGNETIC PROPERTY OR THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein electrical, or magnetic
    properties or thermal conductivity.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for mere use of a
    thermocouple to detect a temperature change, such tests being classified in
    this class, subclass 147.

    (2)     Note.  Thermal conductivity is a physical property and
    classification in this subclass requires the combination thereof with a
    chemical reaction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 25.01+ for a method of gas
    analysis by electrical thermal determination.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 775+ for electrolytic analysis or
    testing processes.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 425+ and 71.1+ for
    processes for the determination of nonelectric properties by measuring
    electric properties particularly subclass 71.5 for the use of a
    semiconductor which is of itself chemically reactive.


CLS 436/150
TXT Of a liquid:

    Subject matter under subclass 149 wherein an electric or magnetic property
    of a liquid is determined.


CLS 436/151
TXT By means of a solid body in contact with a fluid:

    Subject matter under subclass 149 wherein the changes in an electric or
    magnetic property of a solid in physical contact with the fluid to be
    determined provides the basis for analysis.

    (1)     Note.  Physical contact includes chemical reaction with a material
    as well as mere adsorption.

    (2)     Note.  Solid body includes a confined mass of particles whose
    electric or magnetic properties are determined as well as a structural
    device.

    (3)     Note.  Thermal conductivity measurement is classified in 149 since
    the measurement is not based on chemical reaction or absorption with the
    solid but upon the cooling effect of the fluid on the solid element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 19.01+ and 23.2+ for physical
    methods of gas analysis, especially subclasses 23.35+ for chromatographic
    analysis.

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclasses for
    electrical or wave energy processes and apparatus. See section III of the
    Class 204 definition for an explanation of the class line between Class 436
    and Class 204.

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 775+ for electrolytic analysis or
    testing processes.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 632+ for electrical
    indicating or measuring systems which include the use of a semiconductor
    gas detector.


CLS 436/152
TXT Solid body contains a combustion catalyst:

    Subject matter under subclass 151 wherein the material to be analyzed
    undergoes combustion in contact with a catalyst containing
    temperature-responsive element whose change in electrical property is a
    basis for the analysis.

    (1)     Note.  Mere recital of a catalyst without combustion beng indicated
    goes in subclass 151.


CLS 436/153
TXT Of an ionized gas:

    Subject matter under subclss 149 wherein an electric or magnetic property
    of an ionized gas is measured as a step in analysis.

    (1)     Note.  The gas may be the result of heating a liquid sample.

    (2)     Note.  Wave or particle radiation as well as use of electric
    discharge to ionize the gas is included herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 311+ for methods which
    include heating, burning or otherwise stimulating a sample to cause
    emission of radiation for optical analysis including burning, resistance
    heating, arc heating, flame and high frequency fields.


CLS 436/154
TXT Flame ionization:

    Subject matter under subclass 153 wherein basis for analysis is the change
    in conductivity of a standard flame by inclusion therein of a gaseous
    material to be analyzed.

    (1)     Note.  The standard flame is usually hydrogen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 54 for apparatus for carrying out the
    process of this subclass.


CLS 436/155
TXT PYROLYSIS, COMBUSTION, OR ELEVATED TEMPERATURE CONVERSION:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the material to be
    analyzed is (1) heated either in the presence or absence of oxygen to cause
    a chemical reaction or (2) thermally decomposed.

    (1)     Note.  Elevated temperature conversion is construed to be more than
    mere heating to increase or optimize reaction rate, e.g., the conversion
    will not occur unless performed at an elevated temperature.

    (2)     Note.  On combustion in general:  a process of combustion is not
    considered to be a chemical reaction, however, a quantitative reaction with
    oxygen or an oxygen containing gas in a test for a chemical specie is taken
    to be more than mere combustion and is considered to be a chemical test.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass will provide for methods of sample preparation
    by combustion or pyrolysis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 311+ for methods which
    include heating burning or otherwise stimulating a sample to cause emission
    of radiation of optical analysis including burning, resistance heating, arc
    heating, flame and high frequencey fields.


CLS 436/156
TXT Explosibility:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 wherein the susceptability to explosive
    detonation of a material is utilized to make a qualitative or quantitative
    determination.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141,    for octane and gasoline tests.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 35.01+ for a process of testing
    explosive or motor fuels to measure or test detonation or knock
    characteristics; subclass 36 for testing illuminating fluids to determine
    flash point; and subclass 167 for methods of testing ordinance or
    projectives.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, subclass 109.6 for
    processes of making explosive charges.


CLS 436/157
TXT Multiple stages of heating or heating at multiple temperatures or
    application of temperature gradient:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 wherein the material is subjected to
    plural heating temperatures in one or more zones or to a varying
    temperature in a single zone.

    (1)     Note.  Preheating of the material is construed to be a stage of
    heating and is the subject matter of this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Heating that is continuously varied, e.g., a temperature
    gradient, would be classified here.


CLS 436/158
TXT Dividing or separating a sample stream:

    Subject matter under subclass 157 a sample stream is divided into portions.

    (1)     Note.  The sample stream may be divided before or after pyrolysis,
    combustion or high temperature conversion.

    (2)     Note.  The division or separation may be volumetric or dependent
    upon composition e.g., chromatography, cold trap, etc.


CLS 436/159
TXT With catalyst or accelerator:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 wherein the pyrolysis, combustion or high
    temperature conversion is effected in the presence of a catalyst or
    accelerator.


CLS 436/160
TXT Combustion with oxygen containing gas:

    Processes under subclass 155 wherein the material to analyzed is subjected
    to combustion in the presence of an oxygen containing gas.

    (1)     Note.  Combustion with pure oxygen is included herein.


CLS 436/161
TXT INCLUDING CHROMATOGRAPHY:

    Processes and compositions under the class definition in which the result
    of a chemical reaction is subjected to chromatographic separation or
    analysis is carried out by chromatography using a chromophore.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 61.62+ for methods of liquid
    chromatography which do not involve a chemical reaction; subclasses 54.01+
    for viscosity measuring methods; subclasses 64.45+ for measurement of vapor
    pressure; subclasses 64.47+ for measurement of osmotic pressure; subclasses
    64.48+ for measurement of surface tension.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 82+ for processes of gas
    separation using chromatography.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 656 for chromatography
    columns for generic fluids or liquids when there is no analysis of the
    displaced liquid.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 409+ for a process
    including liquid or gas chromatography wherein a fluid substance, a solute
    in a solvent, or a miscible liquid is examined by a transmissive light test
    to furnish quantitative or qualitative determination with respect to
    chemical composition of the material analyzed in the absence of a color
    development reaction.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 50+ for analyti- cal apparatus
    involving chromatography or a colorimeter wherein a reactive reagent is
    used to develop color.


CLS 436/162
TXT Utilizing paper or thin layer plate:

    Processes or compositions under subclass 161 in which the sorbent comprises
    a fibrous web or a thin coating of sorptive material or a flat substrate
    and wherein separation occurs along the plane of the web or coating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 658 for a process of
    paper or thin layer chromatography without the use of a chromophore to
    separate a material into its constituents.


CLS 436/163
TXT INCLUDING TITRATION OR pH DETERMINATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the combining capacity of
    a substance with a reagent is measured or the hydrogen ion concentration is
    determined.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 19.01+ and 23.2+ for physical
    methods of gas analysis, especially subclasses 23.35+ for chromatographic
    analysis.

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 400+ for
    electrolytic analysis and testing apparatus, especially subclass 433 for
    electrolytic apparatus used to measure carbon or pH.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 775+ for electrolytic analysis or
    testing processes, especially subclass 787.5 for analysis or testing to
    determine pH by electrolysis and subclass 788.5 for electrolytic analysis
    or testing involving titration.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 438 for a process
    which uses an electrical device to determine the hydrogen ion concentration
    absent any step involving a chemical reaction.

    600,    Surgery, subclass 309 for a method of measuring pH of a body fluid
    on, or in the living body.


CLS 436/164
TXT OPTICAL RESULT:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the basis for analysis is
    an optical result of a chemical reaction that is measured mechanically or
    visually, e.g., photometer, colorimeter, by human sight, etc.

    (1)     Note.  On disposition of optical examination techniques:

            Class 356 see headnotes of this Class 73 provides for measuring and
    testing which may include optical measuring and testing, combined with some
    nonoptical limitation beyond the scope of Class 356 and specifically
    provided for in Class 73.  Specific provision exists in Class 73 when the
    measurement or test is of the type provided for by the subclasses of Class
    73.  For example, Class 73 in subclasses 23.35+ provides for gas
    chromatogtaphy involving color determination of the Class 356 type together
    with some manipulation of the gas beyond the scope of Class 356. Again
    Class 73 provides in subclasses 116+ for engine testing involving optical
    tests of the Class 356 type together with some mechanical manipulation of
    the parts beyond the scope of Class 356.

            In general Class 73 provides for measuring and testing of the type
    indicated by its subclass titles and definitions which may include optical
    steps together with other mechanical measuring and testing steps beyond the
    scope of Class 356.  There are some patents presently in Class 73 which
    relate to measuring and testing as there provided, but which claim only
    optical subject matter within the scope of Class 356.

            Combinations of optical measuring or testing with other structure
    or methods is classified in Class 356 if no provision for such combination
    exists elsewhere.

            Class 359 provides for optical elements which may be used in
    measuring and testing apparatus.  The conventional optical element such as
    lenses, prisms and mirrors are there.  Subclasses 436+ relating to scale or
    indicia reading should be particularly noted.  Class 250, subclasses 200+
    for photocell circuits and apparatus.  Class 313, subclasses 523+ provides
    for photosensitive discharge devices.  Class 33 provides for mechanical
    scales and gauges which may be part of optical measuring systems.  Class
    116, subclasses 200+ provides for mechanical indicators which may be part
    of optical measuring systems.  Class 324 and 340 provide for electrical
    indicating and measuring devices which may be part of optical measuring
    systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 23.35+ and 61.52+ for methods and
    apparatus for examining the band or bands of the chromatography column to
    determine the quantity, quality, or the substances of the band or bands in
    a gas or liquid chromatography test.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 82+ for processes of gas
    separation using chromatography in which no analysis is made of the colored
    band or successive bands of the chromatography test.

    210,    Liquid Purfication or Separation, for chromatography columns for
    generic fluids or liquids when there is no analysis of the electrolyte or
    displaced liquid.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 50+ for analytical appatatus
    involving chromatography or a colorimeter wherein a reactive reagent is
    used to develop color.


CLS 436/165
TXT With claimed manipulation of container to effect reaction or use of
    container of claimed optical structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 164 wherein the chemical reaction takes place
    in a container that is claimed as manipulated in some manner to effect the
    reaction or is claimed as constructed so as to facilitate optical
    examination.

    (1)     Note.  The manipulation is usually to improve or enhance the
    reading of the optical result.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43+,    for chemical testing by automated analysis which may include
    optical examination.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 246 for fluid containers,
    e.g., cells or cuvettes, not claimed as part of a chemical analysis process.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 58 for apparatus for carrying out the
    process of this subclass.


CLS 436/166
TXT Including reagent preparation:

    Subject matter under subclass 164 including a step of preparing a reagent
    to be utilized in the chemical reaction to be optically analyzed.

    (1)     Note.  Preparation includes a specifically recited step of reagent
    manipulation or transfer, or reagent production for an immediate use (in
    situ generation) of subsequent analysis.

    (2)     Note.  For purposes of cross-referencing reagent preparation by
    electrolytic action should be placed here.


CLS 436/167
TXT Including gas absorption in liquid or solid:

    Subject matter under subclass 164 including absorption or adsorption of
    gaseous materials by a liquid or solid media which is in turn optically
    examined.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161,    wherein chromatography is utilized as a step in an analysis without
    the requirement that the basis for analysis be an optical result in the
    liquid or solid media.  Also note the search class notes to Class 95, Gas
    Separation:  Processes, therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 90+ for processes of gas
    separation using solid sorption, per se, and subclasses 149+ for processes
    of gas separation using liquid contacting, per se.


CLS 436/168
TXT Liquid sorbent:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 wherein the gaseous material to be
    analyzed flows into a liquid resulting in an optically detected reaction.


CLS 436/169
TXT With reagent in absorbent or bibulous substrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 164 wherein the material to be analyzed is
    reacted with a reagent contained in absorbent or bibulous carrier or
    substrate.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are a dip-stick, test paper, wick, etc.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is not intended to be a catch-all for test
    substrates. Cross-referencing is not mandatory in this subclass when claims
    are classifiable in subclasses 1 to 146 and merely perform the test on an
    impregnated substance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166,    for processes of optical detection including reagent preparation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 56 for equivalent apparatus.


CLS 436/170
TXT Plural superposed layers:

    Processes under subclass 169 wherein the absorbent or bibulous carrier or
    substrate includes plural superposed layers, and wherein the material to be
    analyzed flows between at least two layers.

    (1)     Note.  Mere support of an absorbent or bibulous carrier or
    substrate on a support is not included in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 60 for apparatus for carrying out the
    process of this subclass.


CLS 436/171
TXT Spectrum analysis (e.g., flame photometry, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 164 wherein the basis of chemical analysis is
    spectral lines or bands.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 303+ and 311+ for
    heating or combination of a sample and the spectrographic analysis of the
    heated sample.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 498 for
    the use of a computer to analyze a substance through study of spectra.


CLS 436/172
TXT With fluorescence or luminescence:

    Processes under subclass 164 wherein the material to be analyzed is excited
    whereby it emits light, or causes a change in wavelength of the incident
    light, or produces light during a chemical reaction without apparent
    temperature rise.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 361 for a process involving
    chemiluminescent detection which involves electrical signaling.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 700 for chemiluminescent compositions, 625+
    for radioactive compositions, subclasses 301.16+, 301.36, and 301.4 for
    luminescent compositions particularly 301.17 for scintillating or lasing
    compositions.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 52 for apparatus for carrying out the
    process of this subclass.


CLS 436/173
TXT Nuclear magnetic resonance, electron spin resonance, or other spin effects
    or mass spectrometry:

    Processes under the class definition including the use of nuclear magnetic
    resonance, electron paramagnetic resonance or other spin effects and mass
    spectrometry.

    (1)     Note.  Recitation of the specific chemical formula of a compound
    utilized for spin labeling, as a shift reagent or as a solvent in a process
    claim is considered to be "significant chemistry" classifiable here as
    compared to Class 324.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 23.35+ for the combination of a
    gas chromatograph and a nominally recited mass spectrometer.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 281+ for processes which include use of
    a mass spectrometer or calutron or a method of separating or accumulating
    ions based upon the charge to mass ratio.


CLS 436/174
TXT INCLUDING SAMPLE PREPARATION:

    Processes under the class definition including treatment of the material to
    be analyzed to facilitate subsequent analysis.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for documents which claim
    subcombinations of chemical tests which are not provided for in a chemical,
    electrical, or optical class.  There may be only nominal claim language to
    chemical analysis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, for a sampling process which is not claimed
    or solely disclosed as part of a process of chemical analysis and the
    search notes therein for other classes providing for sampling techniques.


CLS 436/175
TXT Digestion or removing interfering materials:

    Processes under subclass 174 wherein the material to be analyzed is
    subjected to a step of disintegration by a chemical reagent or in which a
    substance which interfers with subsequent analysis is removed.

    (1)     Note.  The interference may be chemical or physical (i.e.,
    entrapment in a matrix, etc.).


CLS 436/176
TXT Stabilizing or preserving:

    Subject matter under subclass 174 wherein the material to be analyzed is
    stablized or preserved prior to analysis.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes methods for prevention of changes in
    a sample during its transportation and storage.

    (2)     Note.  Stability Tests are generally classified on the basis of the
    species tested for.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 380 for preservative compositions especially
    subclass 397 for a chemical change inhibitor.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 1+ for a process of preserving not
    claimed in combination with chemical analysis.


CLS 436/177
TXT Liberation or purification of sample or separation of material from a
    sample (e.g., filtering, centrifuging, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 174 in which the sample to be subjected to
    chemical analysis is the product of an isolation or purification procedure.

    (1)     Note. Included herein are procedures involving filtering,
    centrifuging, sorbtion, as well as concentrating evaporation and
    chromatography.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, provides for processes
    of separating liquids from solids or slurries, i.e., drying as well as the
    contact of solids with either, or both, gases and vapors.  If the starting
    material is in the form of a liquid suspension or solution even if the
    process is continued to the point of complete dryness, Class 159,
    Concentrating Evaporators, will take the process.

    62,     Refrigeration, includes processes which include removing heat by
    refrigeration from a substance whether solid, liquid, or vapor.  In
    particular, Class 62, subclasses 8+ will take processes of making a
    solidified or liquefied gaseous product provided the gas has a normal
    boiling point below 32 (methane, ethane, propane) and Class 62, subclasses
    500+ will take processes wherein a solution or mixture is cooled to
    solidify a constituent which is then removed from the mixture.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, for physical processes involving steps
    resulting in separation of a gas from a fluid mixture comprising (a) a gas
    and solid or liquid particles entrained therein, (b) a liquid and gas
    entrained therein, or (c) a plurality of gases.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, provides for processes peculiar to the
    concentration of solids held in solution or suspension by evaporation of
    the liquid containing them and the recovery of the concentrate.  If the
    starting material is a solid or slurry placement in Class 34, Drying and
    Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, would be indicated.  Class 159 will take
    concentration to the point of crystallization or to dryness, however,
    removal of water of crystallization is considered to be a chemical reaction
    and placement would not be proper in Class 159.  Evaporating with
    subsequent vapor condensation is excluded from Class 159 and in such case,
    placement in Class 203, Distillation: Processes, Separatory, would be
    proper.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, provides for processes of
    thermolytic distillation wherein a solid carbonaceous material is heated to
    vaporize a volatile portion and to cause chemical decomposition of the
    heated material to form different chemical substances at least some of
    which are volatile and leave behind a solid carbonaceous material.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, provides for processes for
    separating a liquid mixture by vaporizing and condensing a portion thereof
    to isolate in the condensed liquid or the unvaporized portion a relatively
    pure compound which was present in the original mixture. The original
    mixture may be in a solid form so long as it melts to form a liquid before
    it vaporizes.  A solid original mixture which undergoes chemical
    decomposition leaving a carbonaceous residue would be classifiable in Class
    201, Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, which is superior to Class 203.
    Processes including a chemical reaction and a separatory distillation
    operation are classified in Class 203 only when the chemical reaction
    merely facilitates the isolation by the separatory distillation operation
    of a pre-existing substance in the distilland.  See Class 260, Chemistry of
    Carbon Compounds, or Class 423, Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, for a
    process of preparing a compound and isolating it by a separatory
    distillation process.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, includes processes for the
    separation or purification of a constituent from a flowable liquid mixture
    by dialysis, sorption, ion exchange liquid extraction, gravitational
    separation, or filtration, as well as purification of a liquid mixture by
    destruction or converson of a constituent.  Processes directed to the
    purification of a particular compound or composition (including solution of
    either the compound or compsition in water), are classified with the
    particular compound or composition.  Insofar as the treatment of liquids
    with ion exchange or sorption materials are concerned, the following lines
    will be maintained.



    (1)     Where water is the only disclosed liquid purified, the patent will
    be classified in this class (210).

    (2)     Where disclosure includes water, hydrocarbons and/or other liquids
    the patent will be classified:

    (a)     In Class 210 if all claims are broad as to the liquid.

    (b)     In Class 210 if several species of liquid are claimed and one
    species includes water.

    (c)     In the appropriate art class it some liquid other than water is the
    only liquid claimed (e.g., mineral oils in Class 208, organic compounds in
    Class 260).

    (3)     Purification or separation of liquids by flocculation only are
    classified in Class 210.

    (4)     Processes wherein all claims are limited to the deposition of
    specific materials on ion-exchangers or sorbents with subsequent recovery
    of the specific materials are classified with material so operated upon.

    Class 210 is superior to Class 95 and takes separating processes, per se,
    generally disclosed or claimed as fluid separation, or if the disclosure or
    a claim is restricted to liquid separation.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, provides for the liberation and
    purification by chemical or physical means of compounds and extracts
    falling within the class definition of Class 260.  Generally the physical
    processes included are of two types (a) a purification process prior or
    subsequent to a chemical reaction producing a Class 260 product, (b) a
    purification process directed to the purification of a Class 260 compound
    by a combination of physical separation techniques the classes for which do
    not provide for or exclude the combination claimed.  Chemical purification
    processes are generally provided for with each product produced.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 101 for apparatus for carrying out the
    process of this subclass.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 262+ for
    methods of using microrganism or enzyme to liberate or purify a preexisting
    substance.


CLS 436/178
TXT Including use of a solid sorbent, semipermeable membrane, or liquid
    extraction:

    Processes under subclass 177 wherein the material to be analyzed is
    concentrated or separated by sorption, ion entrapment, a septum selective
    as to material or by liquid extraction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 656+ for a process of
    chromatographic separation using a solid sorbent and subclass 635 for
    processes using a liquid or organic gel as a sorbent.


CLS 436/179
TXT Dilution:

    Processes under subclass 174 wherein the material to be analyzed is diluted
    prior to analysis.


CLS 436/180
TXT Volumetric liquid transfer:

    Processes under subclass 174 wherein the material to be analyzed is a
    liquid and including a step of obtaining and transferring an absolute
    volume or a predetermined volumetric ratio to the source of the material to
    be analyzed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 100 for apparatus for carrying out the
    process of this subclass.


CLS 436/181
TXT Gaseous sample or with change of physical state:

    Processes under subclass 174 including step of sampling a vaporous or
    gaseous material to be analyzed, or changing the physical state of a sample.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass will provide for a process in which the
    gaseous sample is produced by vaporization of a liquid.

    (2)     Note.  A change of physical state includes melting and
    solidification.


CLS 436/182
TXT ELEMENT OR INORGANIC COMPOUND:

    Processes or composition under the class definition which are directed to
    the chemical analysis of an element or inorganic compound not provided for
    above.


CLS 436/183
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Processes or compositions under the class definition which are not other
    wise provided for.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass would provide for processes for determining
    properties such as toxic effects of substances by a chemical test.


CLS 436/500
TXT THYROID HORMONE TESTS (E.G., T3, T4, TBG, TSH, ETC.):

    Subject matter under the class definition for hormones associated with or
    acting on the thyroid gland or binding proteins associated with such
    hormones.

    (1)     Note.  Included are triodothyronine (T3) thyroxine (T4), thyroid
    binding globulin (TBG), thyroid stimulating


            hormone (TSH), etc.  Also included are thyroxine binding index
    tests and test for "free" (unassociated with binding proteins) hormones.


CLS 436/501
TXT BIOSPECIFIC LIGAND BINDING ASSAY:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which there is an interaction
    between a material and a receptor which by claim or disclosure is specific
    to class of compounds or a single compound.

    (1)     Note.  The receptor material typically is isolated from a cellular
    material from a living body such as a membrane or organ and exhibits great
    specificity to the specie to be tested for.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of the type of materials included herein are tests
    involving  cardiolipin, opiate receptor material, Beta-endorphin, and B
    protein (Bucorvaz protein).  Also included are agglutination tests.


CLS 436/503
TXT Utilizing isolate of tissue or organ as binding agent:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein the receptor is a tissue or an
    isolate of a tissue or organ.

    (1)     Note.  Tests involving sensitized lymphocytes are included in this
    subclass.


CLS 436/504
TXT Radioactive label:

    Methods under subclass 503 in which a radioactive label is employed as an
    aid in detection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 300+ for methods of diagnostic testing on or in
    the living body.


CLS 436/505
TXT B12 or Folate:

    Methods under subclass 504 in which the substance tested for is vitamin B12
    or a folate.


CLS 436/506
TXT FOR PREEXISTING IMMUNE COMPLEX OR AUTO-IMMUNE DISEASE:

    Subject matter under the class definition involving immunoassay for
    antigens, antibodies or immune complexes associated with autoimmune disease.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes immunohistopathology testing.

    (2)     Note.  Autoimmune disease includes:

    (a)     Systemic Rheumatic diseases

    (1)     Systemic lupus erythematosus

    (2)     Progressive systemics clerosia

    (3)     Chronic discoid lupus

    (4)     Mixed connective tissue disease (MCTD)

    (b)     Rheumatoid Arthritis

    (c)     Kidney diseases resulting from reaction of antibodies with renal
    basement membrane, or the formation of circulating immune complex
    glomeralonephritis

    (d)     Hashmotos disease (chronic thyroiditis)

    (e)     Diseases involving antibodies to tissue specific antigens

    1.      Mitrochrondrial antigens (antibodies found in primary biliary
    cirrhosis).

    2.      Smooth muscle antigens, i.e., antibodies which may be demonstrated
    in some
    infectious disease such as viral hepatitus, yellow fever and infectious
    mononucleosis and in some malignancies such as carcinoma of the ovary and
    malignant mellanoma and in some types of cirrhosis.

    3.      Gastric Parietal Cells - antibodies to intracytoplasmic antigens of
    gastric
    parietal cells, to the B12 binding site of intrinsic factor and to the
    intrinsic factor B12 complex may be found in patients with pernicious
    anemia.

    (f)     Skin Diseases

    1.      Vesiculoballous skin diseases-pemphigus, pemphigoids, dematitis
    herpeti
    formis, herpes gestatenis

    2.      Cutaneous forms of lupus erythematosis vasculitis (rheumatoid
    vasculitis)

    (g)     Human sperm antibodies


CLS 436/507
TXT Immune complex:

    Subject matter under subclass 506 which includes a test for the
    antigen-antibody complex itself.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes tests employing as reagents
    Rheumatoid factors and complements.


CLS 436/508
TXT Antinuclear (e.g., DNA, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 506, including tests for antibodies to
    antigens which form part of the material of a cell nucleus.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes tests in which the antigen is DNA.

    (2)     Note.  Tests for lupus erythematosus and rheumatoid arthritis are
    included here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    935,    Genetic Engineering:  Recombinant DNA Technology, Hybrid or Fused
    Cell Technology, and Related Manipulations of Nucleic Acids, which provides
    a search collection for processes of altering the genetic structure of
    microorganisms; genes and methods of modifying genes and their expression;
    vectors and methods of modifying vectors; methods of introducing DNA into a
    cell; microorganisms, per se, which have had their genetic sequence altered
    by recombinant DNA techniques or by cell fusion or by uptake of DNA;
    testing; separation techniques; apparatus; and methods of use of vectors or
    of the genetically engineered microorganisms; methods of gene therapy or
    genetic modification of living organisms.


CLS 436/509
TXT Rheumatoid factors:

    Subject matter under subclass 506 which include tests for immunoglobulins
    found in patients with rheumatoi arthritis.


CLS 436/510
TXT IMMUNOCHEMICAL PREGNANCY DETERMINATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition including immunoassay testing for
     pregnancy.


CLS 436/512
TXT INVOLVING ANTIBODY FRAGMENTS:

    Subject matter under the class definition which involves an immunoassay
    which utilizes only a subpart of an antibody.


CLS 436/513
TXT IVOLVING IgA, IgD, IgE, or IgM:

    Subject matter under the class definition which involve tests for
    immunogloubulins other than IgG.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for methods of allergen detection
    (IgE).


CLS 436/514
TXT INVOLVING DIFFUSION OR MIGRATION OF ANTIGEN OR ANTIBODY:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which the antigen or antibody
    migrates through a solid or semisolid medium to produce lines or bands of
    precipitation.


CLS 436/515
TXT Through a gel (e.g., Ouchterlony technique, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 514 in which migration of the antigen or
    antibody is through a gel.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is the use of agar or gelatin in tubes or on
    plates.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 456+ for gel
    electrophoresis, in general.


CLS 436/516
TXT Immunoelectrophoresis:

    Subject matter under subclass 515 in which antigens or antibodies migrate
    through a gel medium under the influence of an electric current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 456+ for gel
    electrophoresis of proteins other than antibodies.


CLS 436/517
TXT INVOLVING KINETIC MEASUREMENT OF ANTIGEN-ANTIBODY REACTION:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which the time rate of
    progress of an antigen-antibody interaction is measured.


CLS 436/518
TXT INVOLVING AN INSOLUBLE CARRIER FOR IMMOBILIZING IMMUNOCHEMICALS:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which an immunological test is
    carried out using an antigen, antibody or fragment thereof as part of an
    artifically produced composition or complex or compound which imparts the
    property of physical confinement or localization during a immunochemical
    analysis and the processes for preparing the same.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, for processes of making glass articles,
    particularly subclasses 447+ for making a resin coated glass fiber; and
    subclass 22 for making a porous glass article which may find utility as an
    immobilization agent.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, for protein containing coating
    or plastic compositions, particularly subclasses 4, 31.24, 31.53, 31.82,
    31.94, 38.4, 124+, 614, 645, and indented subclasses.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    77+ for pore forming in combination with a laminating step.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 660 and 263+ for
    processes and apparatus for ion exchange or sorption of components from a
    liquid; and subclass 615 for a process of use of a immobilized enzyme or
    microorganism to purify sewage.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 41+ for significant molding processes which include the step of
    pore forming in situ.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, especially
    subclasses 400+ for coated products which may contain a protein; subclasses
    94.1+ for a composition containing an enzyme or coenzyme including
    immobilized forms.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    appropriate subclasses for edible protein compositions or products and
    related process involving the same.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 411.1+ for a
    nonstructural stock material product in the form of a composite web or
    sheet including a layer comprising protein, and other appropriately titled
    subclasses, e.g., subclasses 435 and 458; and subclasses 304.4+ for a stock
    material in the form of a composite web or sheet embodying a component
    which is porous or cellular.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 174+ for
    carrier bound or immobilized enzymes or microbial cells and the preparation
    thereof and subclass 188 for enzyme conjugates, ligands and adducts.

    514,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 2+
    for a composition containing a protein.

    521,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 25+ for an ion
    exchange resin and the processes of making or regenerating them; and
    subclasses 50+ for cellular, or porous resinous bodies and the process of
    preparing them.

    525,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 54.1+ for a product
    or process of chemically reacting a protein or polypeptide with a synthetic
    resin.

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives; Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignens or Reaction Products Thereof, subclasses 300 through 345 for
    peptides and reaction products thereof; subclasses 350 to 427 for proteins
    and the reaction products thereof; and cross-reference art collections 800
    through 859 for antigenic peptides or proteins, methods of immobilizing
    peptides or proteins, and the source materials from which peptides or
    proteins are isolated.

    (1)     Note.  Immobilization results from covalent bonding between an
    immunochemical and the carrier or an ionic bonding between an
    immunochemical and a carrier or sorption of an immunochemical within a
    carrier, or entrapment of an immunochemical within a carrier.

    (2)     Note.  A carrier material may be either water soluble or water
    insoluble.

    (3)     Note.  Reaction or ultra filtration cells, vials, or beakers which
    contain immunochemicals are not considered to be immobilized complexes or
    compositions.

    (4)     Note.  Antigens chemically or physically bonded to a water
    insoluble matrix, antibodies contained within a polymer or gel, antigens
    absorbed on a resin are examples of immobilized immunochemicals.

    (5)     Note.  Haptens are considered to be antigens for the purpose of
    this subclass.

    (6)     Note.  When a carrier is composed of more than one material, the
    patent is placed into the subclass which corresponds to the material to
    which the Ag or Ab is bound, e.g., a carrier which is a synthetic
    polymer-coated metal is placed in subclass 525.

    (7)     Note.  The carrier material or the carrier material and a covalent
    bond forming agent impart to the immunochemical the property of physical
    confinement or localization during a continuous process or the property of
    enhanced recoverability in a batch process which it did not possess prior
    to treatment with the carrier material or carrier material and a covalent
    bonding agent.


CLS 436/519
TXT Carrier is a biological cell or cell fragment:

    Subject matter under subclass 518 in which the carrier is a biological cell
    or fragment thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Biological cells or fragments therof include bacteria and
    blood cells.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes the use of a bacteria as a carrier or
    the use of a cell wall fragment as a carrier.


CLS 436/520
TXT Red blood cell:

    Subject matter under subclass 519 in which the carrier is a red blood cell.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are treated red blood cells and fragments of
    red blood cells including stroma carrying heterophile antigens or various
    antigenic materials including antibodies.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass excludes Rh membrane antigens and
    immunohematological testing which is provided for in Class 435, subclasses
    7.1+.


CLS 436/521
TXT Fixation or stabilization of red blood cells:

    Subject matter under subclass 520 which includes the chemical or physical
    treatment of the red blood cells to prevent deterioration.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes cells treated with agents which act
    as both preservatives and bonding agents such as glutaraldehyde,
    formaldehyde cyanuric chloride, etc.


CLS 436/522
TXT Lysis of red blood cell membrane:

    Subject matter under subclass 520 in which there is a step of lysis of the
    red blood cells.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 269 for a
    process of lysis by microorganism or enzyme.


CLS 436/523
TXT Carrier is particulate and the particles are of intentionally different
    sizes or impregnated differently with the immunochemicals:

    Subject matter under subclass 518 in which the carrier is particulate and
    the particles are formed or chosen to be different sizes or are coated with
    chemically different coating materials.


CLS 436/524
TXT Carrier is inorganic:

    Subject matter under subclass 518 in which the carrier is an inorganic
    compound or metal or alloy.

    (1)     Note.  The term "minerals" is presumed to refer to inorganic
    minerals although care should be taken with disclosure to coal or other
    carbonaceous minerals which are for purpose of this subclass are to be
    considered inorganic.


CLS 436/525
TXT Metal or metal coated:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 in which the carrier is a metal.


CLS 436/526
TXT Magnetic:

    Subject matter under subclass 525 in which the carrier is magnetic.

    (1)     Note.  The essential characteristic of the patents in this subclass
    is that the processes claim or disclose use of a magnetic separation step.


CLS 436/527
TXT Glass or silica:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 in which the carrier is glass or silica.

    (1)     Note.  The glass may be a plate, hollow tube or test tube.


CLS 436/528
TXT Carrier is organic:

    Subject matter under subclass 518 in which the carrier is an organic
    compound.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 133 for a definition of organic.


CLS 436/529
TXT Polysaccharide carrier (e.g., dextran, etc.):

    Subject matter under the subclass 528 in which the carrier is a
    polysaccharide.

    (1)     Note.  This includes subclass materials designated as carbohydrates.

    (2)     Note.  Derivatized starch, derivatized cellulose, and derivatized
    polysaccharides are included in this subclass.


CLS 436/530
TXT Cellulose or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 529 in which the polysaccharide is cellulose
    or substituted cellulose.

    (1)     Note.  Exemplary of materials included herein would be DEAE
    cellulose, etc.


CLS 436/531
TXT Carrier is synthetic resin:

    Subject matter under the subclass 528 in which the support material is a
    linear or cross-linked polymer which is not naturally occurring.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this and the indented subclass "latex" is
    conclusively presumed to be a synthetic resin.

    (2)     Note.  Polystryrene latex particles make up the majority of the
    latex subclass.


CLS 436/532
TXT Antigen or antibody is attached to a carrier via bridging agent:

    Subject matter under subclass 531 wherein the Ag or Ab is bonded to the
    polymeric carrier through an intermediate compound which attaches to both
    the Ag or Ab and the carrier.

    (1)     Note.  The intermediate compound is not another Ag or Ab.  Such
    interactions are found below in subclass 540.

    (2)     Note.  The formation of a carrier bound Ag or Ab may be in as
    stagewise manner with a reaction between the carrier and bridging agent
    being completed before the Ag or Ab is added or in a process in which the
    carrier, bridging agent, and Ag or Ab are present simultaneously, in which
    case some care should be exercised in distinguishing the subject matter of
    this subclass from mere entrapment.  In general, if three separate
    entities, i.e., Ag or Ab and two different chemical species are present
    simultaneously bonding through a bridging agent should be presumed.

    (3)     Note.  A product or process classifiable in this subclass combines
    a polymeric carrier with a bridging agent to provide functional groups for
    Ag or Ab attachment.  It should be noted that similar functional groups can
    be provided by prior formation of a polymeric carrier by copolymerization
    of monomers one or more of which contain the desired functional group for
    Ag or Ab attachment and that as such would be provided for in 531.


CLS 436/533
TXT Carrier is water suspendible particles (e.g., latex etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 532 in which the carrier consists of
    colloidal particles of synthetic resin suspended or disclosed as suspended
    in an aqueous medium.

    (1)     Note.  The bulk of patents classified herein are directed to
    polystyrene latex as the carrier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    524,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, in particular subclasses 577+
    and 800+ for a process of synthesis of a polystyrene latex.

    525,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 54.1+ for a process
    of after treatment of a polystyrene latex.


CLS 436/534
TXT Carrier is water suspendible particles:

    Subject matter under subclass 531 in which the carrier consists of
    collodial particles of synthetic resin suspended or disclosed as suspended
    in an aqueous medium.


CLS 436/535
TXT Antigen or antibody entrapped within the carrier (e.g., gel, hollow fiber,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 531 wherein the Ag or Ab is physically
    trapped in a reticulated polymer structure or entrapped within a
    microcapsule.


CLS 436/536
TXT INVOLVING IMMUNE COMPLEX FORMED IN LIQUID PHASE:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which the immune complex is
    formed in a liquid.

    (1)     Note.  Cases in which separation methods are disclosed but not
    claimed are classified here and crossed to the appropriate separation
    method.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    515,    for immune complex formation in gels.


CLS 436/537
TXT Signal modification or steric inhibition:

    Subject matter under subclass 536 wherein the formation of the immune
    complex alters molecular properties giving rise to a detectable change in
    the tag or label attached to the antigen or antibody.

    (1)     Note.  Typically the signal modification is fluorescent quenching.


CLS 436/538
TXT Separation of immune complex from unbound antigen or antibody:

    Subject matter under subclass 536 in which excess antigen or antibody is
    separated from the immune complex by physical or chemical means.


CLS 436/539
TXT Involving precipitating reagent:

    Subject matter under subclass 538 wherein the separation of the immune
    complex from the unbound component is aided by the addition of an agent
    which enhances the precipitation of the immune complex after the complex
    has been formed.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of precipitating agents used in the processes
    provided for here are charcoal, ammonium sulfate and carrier bound antigen
    or antibody.


CLS 436/540
TXT Double or second antibody:

    Subject matter under subclass 539 in which unreacted antigen or antibody or
    the immune complex is separated by means of a second antibody or an immune
    complex containing the same.

    (1)     Note.  The second antibody is usually directed against the antibody
    of the complex (e.g., goat anti-rabbit immunoglobulin) but may be directed
    against the immune complex itself.


CLS 436/541
TXT Absorbent column, particles or resin strip:

    Subject matter under subclass 539 wherein the separation is by a column of
    nonspecific absorbent, sorbent particles or by absorbtion of the complex or
    unbound phase by a resin in the form of a strip.


CLS 436/542
TXT Involving radioactive labeling:

    Subject matter under subclass 538 which involves the detection of one of
    the separation phases by means of scintillation counting.


CLS 436/543
TXT INVOLVING PRODUCING OR TREATING ANTIGEN OR HAPTEN:

    Subject matter under the class definition involving the production or
    physical or chemical treatment of an antigen.

    (1)     Note.  A hapten is included in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, for methods of
    using an antigen for treatment of the living body.

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives; Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclasses 402+ for methods of
    attaching hapten to immunogenic carriers.


CLS 436/544
TXT Producing labeled antigens:

    Subject matter under subclass 543 which includes attaching a detectable
    label to antigens.


CLS 436/545
TXT Radioactive label:

    Subject matter under subclass 544 wherein the detectable label is
    radioactive.


CLS 436/546
TXT Fluorescent label:

    Subject matter under subclass 544 wherein the detectable label is one which
    fluoresces.


CLS 436/547
TXT INVOLVING PRODUCTION OR TREATMENT OF AN ANTIBODY:

    Subject matter under the class definition producing treating, separating or
    labeling of an anitbody.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are:

    (a)     Processes including the injection of antigenic material into a body
    to produce antibodies for in vitro testing purposes.

    (b)     Processes of fragmenting or otherwise changing antibodies to
    improve assay specificity.

    (c)     Processes of associating the antibody with a detectable label.


CLS 436/548
TXT Monoclonal Antibody:

    Subject matter under subclass 547 in which includes the production of
    antibodies by use of a cloned hybrid cell line formed by fusion of myeloma
    cell with an antibody producing cell.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    935,    Genetic Engineering:  Recombinant DNA Technology, Hybrid or Fused
    Cell Technology, and Related Manipulations of Nucleic Acids, which provides
    a search collection for processes of altering the genetic structure of
    microorganisms; genes and methods of modifying genes and their expression;
    vectors and methods of modifying vectors; methods of introducing DNA into a
    cell; micro-organisms, per se, which have had their genetic sequence
    altered by recombinant DNA techniques or by cell fusion or by uptake of
    DNA; testing; separation techniques; apparatus; and methods of use of
    vectors or of the genetically engineered micro-organisms; methods of gene
    therapy or genetic modification of living organisms.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS
    RELATED TO ANTIGEN-ANTIBODY TESTS


CLS 436/800
TXT FLUORESCENT DYES (E.G.,  RHODAMINE, ETC.):

    Art collection of fluorescent dyes useful in antigen-antibody tests.


CLS 436/801
TXT ELECTRON DENSE COMPOUNDS (E.G., FERRITIN, ETC.):

    Art collection of electron dense compounds useful as labels in
    antigen-antibody testing.


CLS 436/802
TXT PROTEIN-BACTERIOPHAGE CONJUGATES:

    Art collection of protein-bacteriophage conjugates used for labels in
    antigen-antibody tests.


CLS 436/803
TXT STABLE FREE RADICALS (E.G., SPIN IMMUNOASSAY, ETC.):

    Art collection of patents utilizing stable free radicals in an
    antigen-antibody test as a label.


CLS 436/804
TXT RADIOISOTOPE (E.G., RADIOIMMUNOASSAY, ETC.):

    Art collection of patents utilizing a radioactive label in an
    antigen-antibody test.


CLS 436/805
TXT OPTICAL PROPERTY:

    Art collection of patents related to the optical examination of the results
    of an antigen- antibody test.


CLS 436/806
TXT ELECTRICAL PROPERTY OR MAGNETIC PROPERTY:

    Art collection of patents related to the examination of the results of an
    antigen-antibody reaction by change in electrical or magnetic properties.


CLS 436/807
TXT APPARATUS INCLUDED IN PROCESS CLAIM (E.G., PHYSICAL SUPPORT STRUCTURES,
    ETC.):

    Art collection of patents related to apparatus used in antigen-antibody or
    binding protein testing.


CLS 436/808
TXT Automated or kit:

    Art collection under 807 in which the apparatus is self-operated or is a
    kit.


CLS 436/809
TXT Multifield plates or multicontainer arrays:

    Art collection under 807 in which the apparatus is generally planar and has
    a number of distinct test areas on its surface or consists of a series of
    containers held in a physical arrangement for testing.


CLS 436/810
TXT Tube, bottle, or dipstick:

    Art collection under 807 in which a tube, bottle, or dipstick carries the
    immunochemical.


CLS 436/811
TXT TEST FOR NAMED DISEASE, BODY CONDITION, OR ORGAN FUNCTION:

    Art collection related to antigen-antibody test for a named disease,
    condition of the body or organ function.


CLS 436/812
TXT Infectious mononucleosis:

    Art collection under 811 in which the named disease is infectious
    mononucleosis.


CLS 436/813
TXT Cancer:

    Art collection under 811 in which the named disease is cancer.


CLS 436/814
TXT Pregnancy:

    Art collection under 811 in which the body condition is pregnancy.


CLS 436/815
TXT Test for named compound or class of compounds:

    Art collection of patents relating to testing for an identified compound or
    class of compounds e.g., nitrates, etc.


CLS 436/816
TXT Alkaloids, amphetamines, and barbiturates:

    Art collection under 815 relating to an antigen antibody test for an
    alkaloid, amphetamine, or barbiturate.


CLS 436/817
TXT Steroids or hormones:

    Art collection under 815 relating to antigen antibody tests for steroids or
    a hormone.


CLS 436/818
TXT Human chorionic gonadotropin:

    Art collection under 817 relating to tests for HCG.


CLS 436/819
TXT MULTIFUNCTIONAL ANTIGEN OR ANTIBODY:

    Art collection relating to tests in which more than one compound or disease
    is identified or antigen or antibody is sensitized to a multiplicity of
    complements.


CLS 436/820
TXT HEPATITIS ASSOCIATED ANTIGENS AND ANTIBODIES:

    Art collection relating to tests for antigens and antibodies associated
    with hepatitis.


CLS 436/821
TXT INVOLVING COMPLEMENT FACTORS OR COMPLEMENT SYSTEMS:

    Art collection relating to identified complement factors or complement
    systems related to testing.


CLS 436/822
TXT INDENTIFIED HAPTEN:

    Art collection of patents relating to compound which are disclosed as
    haptens.


CLS 436/823
TXT IMMUNOGENIC CARRIER OR CARRIER, PER SE:

    Art collection of patents relating to the use of immunogenic carrier for
    haptens or to carriers, per se.


CLS 436/824
TXT IMMUNOLOGICAL SEPARATION TECHNIQUES:

    Art collection relating to the use of an antigen, antibody or binding
    protein reaction to effect a separation of a component from a mixture.


CLS 436/825
TXT PRETREATMENT FOR REMOVAL OF INTERFERING FACTORS FROM SAMPLE:

    Art collection relating to materials and methods for preparation of a
    sample for an immunological test by removal of interfering materials.


CLS 436/826
TXT ADDITIVES (E.G., BUFFERS, DILUENTS, PRESERVATIVES):

    Art collection relating to materials used as additives to solutions
    involved in antigen- antibody testing.


CLS 436/827
TXT LECTINS:

    Art collection relating to lectins and their use in immunological testing.


CLS 436/828
TXT PROTEIN A:

    Art collection relating to Protein A.


CLS 436/829
TXT LIPOSOMES, (E.G., ENCAPSULATION, ETC.):

    Art collection relating to the formation of lipsomes containing
    immunological materials.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS
    RELATED TO CHEMICAL TESTING


CLS 436/900
TXT BREATH TESTING:

    Art collection of chemical tests relating to breath testing.


CLS 436/901
TXT DRUGS OF ABUSE (E.G., NARCOTICS, AMPHETAMINES, ETC.):

    Art collection of chemical tests used for determining drugs of abuse.


CLS 436/902
TXT DOSIMETER:

    Art collection of chemical tests relating to the use of apparatus for
    determining the cumulative exposure to a given substance.


CLS 436/903
TXT DIAZO REACTIONS:

    Art collection of chemical tests relating to diazo reactions.


CLS 436/904
TXT OXIDATION-REDUCTION INDICATORS:

    Art collection of chemical tests and materials therefore which exhibit a
    color change caused by an oxidation or reduction reaction.


CLS 436/905
TXT PHOTOCHEMICAL ACTIVATION OF REACTIONS:

    Art collection of chemical tests which involve a step of photochemical
    activation.


CLS 436/906
TXT FERTILITY TESTS:

    Art collection of chemical tests relating to the detection or determination
    of capacity to reproduce.


CLS 436/907
TXT FETAL LUNG MATURITY:

    Art collection of chemical tests for the determination of the developmental
    state of the fetal lung.


CLS 436/908
TXT GRAVIMETRIC ANALYSIS:

    Art collection of chemical tests relating to gravimeteric analysis of the
    results of chemical reactions.


CLS 436/909
TXT NEPHELOMETRY:

    Art collection of chemical tests relating to measurements of the light
    scattering effect of solutions.


CLS 436/910
TXT IRON-BINDING CAPACITY OF BLOOD:

    Art collection of chemical tests relating to determination of the iron
    binding capacity of blood.


CLS 438/
TTL SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICE  MANUFACTURING:  PROCESS

CLS 438/
TXT

    TABLE OF CONTENTS:

    I.      STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    II.     ACRONYMS, ABBREVIATIONS, AND GLOSSARY

    III.    NOTES TO RELATED CLASSES

    IV.     SUBCLASS DEFINITIONS



    CONTENTS:

    I.      STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER:

    A.      This class provides for manufacturing a semiconductor containing a
    solid-state device by a combination of operations wherein:

    1.      no other class provides for the overall combination, and

    2.      the intent is to use the electrical properties of the semiconductor
    in the device for at least one of the following purposes:

    a.      conducting or modifying an electrical current,

    b.      storing electrical energy for subsequent discharge within a
    microelectronic integrated circuit, or

    c.      converting electromagnetic wave energy to electrical energy or
    electrical energy to electromagnetic energy.

    B.      This class provides for a species of Class 427 operations involving:

    1.      coating a substrate with a semiconductive material, or

    2.      coating a semiconductive substrate or substrate containing a
    semiconductive region;

            wherein the intent is to use the electrical properties of the
    semiconductor in a solid-state device for at least one of the following
    purposes:

    a.      conducting or modifying an electrical current,

    b.      storing electrical energy for subsequent discharge within a
    microelectronic integrated circuit, or

    c.      converting electromagnetic wave energy to electrical energy or
    electrical energy to electromagnetic energy.

    C.      This class provides for a species of Class 216 operations involving
    etching a semiconductive substrate or etching a substrate containing a
    semiconductive region, wherein the intent is to use the electrical
    properties of the semiconductor in a solid-state device for at least one of
    the following purposes:

    1.      conducting or modifying an electrical current,

    2.      storing electrical energy for subsequent discharge within a
    microelectronic integrated circuit, or

    3.      converting electromagnetic wave energy to electrical energy or
    electrical energy to electromagnetic energy.

    D.      This class provides for packaging (e.g., with mounting,
    encapsulating, etc.) or treatment of packaged semiconductor, when not
    elsewhere provided, wherein there are:

    1.      multiple operations having a step of permanently attaching or
    securing a semiconductive substrate to a terminal, elongated conductor, or
    support (e.g., mounting, housing, lead frame, discrete heat sink, etc.),

    2.      multiple operations having a step of shaping flowable plastic or
    flowable insulative material about a semiconductive substrate, or

    3.      a step of treating an already packaged semiconductor substrate
    (e.g., coating, etching, etc.); if the following conditions are also met:

    a.      there is significant semiconductor chip structure (e.g., such as
    recited semiconductor junction, etc.) or named semiconductor device (e.g.,
    DRAM, CMOS, EPROM, etc.), or

    b.       there is no significant semiconductor structure if also combined
    with a coating operation of this class (see B above) or etching operation
    of this class (see C above), and

    c.      the intent is to use the electrical properties of the semiconductor
    in a solid-state device for at least one of the following purposes:

    i.      conducting or modifying an electrical current,

    ii.     storing electrical energy for subsequent discharge within a
    microelectronic integrated circuit, or

    iii.    converting electromagnetic wave energy to electrical energy or
    electrical energy to electromagnetic energy;

    (1)     Note.  When Class 438 coating (see B above) or etching operations
    (see C above) are not included, Class 29, following historical precedence,
    provides for processes of mounting, packaging, molding, or encapsulating of
    semiconductors having no significant semiconductor chip structure (e.g.,
    merely recited as semiconductor chip, per se, etc.) when not elsewhere
    provided.

    E.      This is the generic class for operations not elsewhere provided for
    treating a semiconductive substrate or substrate containing a
    semiconductive region; wherein the intent is to use the semiconductor in a
    solid-state device for at least one of the following purposes:

    1.      conducting or modifying an electrical current,

    2.      storing electrical energy for subsequent discharge within a
    microelectronic integrated circuit, or

    3.      converting electromagnetic wave energy to electrical energy or
    electrical energy to electromagnetic energy.

    (1)     Note.  Lacking an indication that the semiconducting material is to
    be used for a purpose other than (a) conducting or modifying an electrical
    current, (b) storing electrical energy for subsequent discharge within a
    microelectronic integrated circuit, or (c) converting electromagnetic wave
    energy to electrical energy or electrical energy to electromagnetic energy;
    it will be assumed that the process meets the Class 438 definition.

    (2)     Note.  For this class certain materials will be considered to be
    semiconductors even if there is no other indication that semiconducting
    properties are present.  Thus, if the criteria set forth under the (1) Note
    is met that there is no indication that the material is to be used for a
    purpose other than (a), (b), or (c), the following materials are to be
    considered semiconductive: silicon, germanium, selenium, tellurium, gallium
    nitride, gallium phosphide, gallium arsenide, aluminum phosphide, aluminum
    arsenide, and mercury cadmium telluride.





    II.     ACRONYMS, ABBREVIATIONS, AND GLOSSARY

    1.      Solid-State Electronics Terms Index

            Listed below is a compilation of acronyms, abbreviations, and
    technological terms pertaining to solid-state electrical devices,
    manufacturing processes, and related apparatus and compositions useful
    therefor.



    Acronym                         Meaning

                                    -A-

    a-Si                    amorphous silicon

    ACT                     acoustic charge transport

    ADC                     analog-to-digital converter

    AES                     Auger electron spectroscopy

    ALE                     atomic layer epitaxy

    ALEP                    angle-lapping edge profilometry

    AMD                     active matrix display

    AMG                     alternative-metal, virtual-ground (metallization)

    APCVD                   atmospheric-pressure CVD

    APD                     avalanche photodiode

    ARC                     antireflective coating

    ASG                     arsenosilicate glass

                                    -B-

    BBCO                    barium bismuth copper oxide (a HTSC)

    BBD                     bucket brigade device

    BBL                     buried bit-line

    BED                     band edge discontinuity

    BH                      buried heterostructure

    BHF                     buffered hydrofluoric acid

    BIC                     breakdown of insulator for conduction

    BICFET                  bipolar inversion channel FET

    BiCMOS                  integrated bipolar and CMOS

    BiMOS                   integrated bipolar and MOSFET

    BJT                     bipolar junction transistor

    BKBO                    barium potassium bismuth oxide (a HTSC)

    BLM                     ball limiting metallization

    BMD                     bulk micro defect

    BOE                     buffered oxide etch

    BOX                     buried oxide

    BOXES                   buried oxide with etch stop

    BPSG                    borophosphosilica glass

    BPTEOS                  borophosphoTEOS

    BSD                     back side damage

    BSE                     buried storage electrode

    BSG                     borosilica glass

    BSQ                     bias sputter quartz

    BST                     barium strontium titanate

                                    -C-

    CAIBE                   chemically assisted ion beam etching

    CBIC                    complementary bipolar IC

    CBKR                    cross bridge Kelvin resistor (test structure)

    CCB                     controlled collapse bonding

    CCC                     corrugated capacitor cell

    CCD                     charge coupled device

    CDE                     chemical dry etching

    CDI                     collector diffusion isolation

    CEL                     contrast enhancement layer

    CER                     contact end resistor (test structure)

    CERDIP                  ceramic DIP

    chanstop                        channel stop isolation structure

    CHEMFET         chemically sensitive FET

    CHL                     current hugging logic

    CID                     charge injection device

    CLSEG                   confined lateral SEG

    CML                     current mode logic (i.e., ECL)

    CMOS                    complementary (NMOS and PMOS) FETs

    CMP                     chemical-mechanical polishing/planarization

    COB                     (a) chip-on-board or (b) capacitor over bit-line

    COD                     catastrophic optical damage

    OG                      chip-on-glass

    COMFET          conductivity modulation FET (i.e., IGBT)

    CSBH                    channeled substrate buried heterostructure

    CSL                     coherent superlattice

    CTD                     charge transfer device

    CTSL                    coherent tilted superlattice

    CVD                     chemical vapor deposition

    Cz                      Czoshralski (melt pulling)

                                    -D-

    DADBS                   diacetoxyditertiarybutoxysilane

    DADIS                   diacetoxydiisopropoxysilane

    DBR                     distributed Bragg reflector

    DCG                     dichromated gelatin

    DCFL                    direct-coupled FET logic

    DCS                     dichlorosilane

    DDE                     double diffused epitaxy

    DDI                     deep dielectric isolation

    DEIS                    dual electron injection structure

    DEZ                     diethylzinc

    DFB                     distributed feedback (laser)

    DH                      double-hetero

    DHBT                    double-hetero bipolar transistor

    DHF                     dilute hydrofluoric acid

    DI                      dielectric isolation

    DIBL                    drain induced barrier lowering

    DIET                    dielectrically encapsulated trench capacitor

    DIP                     dual-in-line package

    DLP                     double layer polysilicon

    DLTS                    deep level transient spectroscopy

    DMAH                    dimethylaluminumhydride

    DMD                     (a) depletion mode device (also D-mode or D-type)
    or (b) deformable mirror device

    DMOS                    double diffused MOS

    DMS                     dilute magnetic semiconductor

    DOES                    doublehetero optoelectronic switch

    DRAM                    dynamic random-access memory

    DSP                     double stacked capacitor

    DTL                     diode-transistor logic

    DUF                     diffusion under film

    DUT                     device under test

    DUV                     deep ultraviolet

    DZ                      denuded zone

                                    -E-

    EAROM                   electrically alterable read-only memory

    EB                      (a) extrinsic base or (b) electron beam

    EBES                    electron beam exposure system

    EBIC                    electron beam induced current

    EBL                     electron beam lithography

    ECL                     emitter coupled logic

    ECR                     electron cyclotron resonance

    EDP                     ethylene-diamine-pyrocatechol etchant

    EDTA                    ethylenediaminotetraacetic acid

    EELS                    electron energy loss spectroscopy

    EEPROM          electrically erasable programmable read-only memory

    EFG                     edge-defined film-fed growth (also EDFFG or EDFG)

    EG                      extrinsic gettering

    EGSi                    electronic-grade silicon

    EL                      electroluminescent

    ELO                     epitaxial lateral overgrowth

    EMD                     enhancement mode device (also E-mode or E-type)

    EMI                     electromagnetic interference

    EMP                     electron microprobe

    EPB                     epoxidated polybutadiene (an EB resist)

    EPD                     etch pit density

    EPI                     epitaxial (single crystalline) layer

    EPP                     ethylene-piperidine-pyrocatechol etchant

    EPR                     electron paramagnetic resonance

    EPROM                   erasable programmable read-only memory

    EPS                     effective punchthrough stopper

    EPW                     etchant mix of ethylenediamine, pyrocatechol, and
    water

    ESCA                    electron spectroscopy for chemical analysis

    ESD                     electrostatic discharge

    ESR                     (a) equivalent series resistance or (b) electron
    spin resonance

                                    -F-

    FAMOS                   floating-gate avalanche-injection MOS

    FASIC                   folded bit-line adaptive sidewall isol. capacitor
    cell

    FCT                     field controlled thyristor

    FEC                     floating electrode capacitor

    FED                     field emission device

    FET                     field effect transistor

    FIB                     focused ion beam

    FIPOS                   full isolation by porous oxidized silicon

    FLOTOX                  floating gate tunnel oxide

    FOX                     field oxide

    FPD                     field programmable device

    FPGA                    field programmable gate array

    FTIR                    Fourier transform infrared spectroscopy

    FUROX                   fully recessed oxide isolation

                                    -G-

    GDMS                    glow discharge mass spectroscopy

    GILD                    gas immersion laser doping

    GRIN-SCH                graded index separate confinement heterostructure

    GTO                     gate turn-off

                                    -H-

    HBT                     heterojunction bipolar transistor

    HDC                     high dielectric constant

    HDI                     high density interconnects

    HDMI                    high density multilayer interconnects

    HEMT                    high electron mobility transistor (Hetero MESFET)

    HET                     hot electron transistor (bipolar)

    Hi-C                    high capacitance

    HIC                     hybrid integrated circuit

    HIMOS                   (see COMFET)

    HIPOX                   high pressure oxidation

    HMDS                    hexamethyldisilizane

    HNA                     etchant mix of hydrofluoric, nitric, and acetic
    acids

    HPSC                    half-Vccsheath plate capacitor

    HTO                     high temperature oxide

    HTSC                    high temperature superconductor

                                    -I-

    IB                      (a) intrinsic base or (b) ion beam

    IBD                     ion beam deposition

    IC                      integrated circuit

    ICP                     inductively coupled plasma

    IG                      intrinsic gettering

    IGBT                    insulated gate bipolar transistor (e.g., COMFET,
    HIMOS)

    IGFET                   insulated gate field effect transistor

    IID                     impurity induced disordering

    I2L                     integrated injection logic

    IJP                     ink jet printhead

    ILB                     inner lead bonding

    ILD                     interlayer dielectric

    IMMA                    ion microprobe mass analysis

    IMPATT                  impact ionization avalanche transist time (diode)

    intrinsic                       nondoped semiconductor

    IR                      infrared

    ISFET                   ion sensitive FET (i.e., CHEMFET)

    ITO                     indium tin oxide (a TCO)

    IVEC                    isolation vertical capacitor cell

                                    -J-

    JFET                    junction field effect transistor (junction gate)

    JOFET                   Josephson junction field effect transistor

    JTE                     junction termination extension

                                    -K-

    KMER                    Kodak metal etch resist

    KPR                     Kodak photo resist

    KTFR                    Kodak thin film resist

                                    -L-

    LAGB                    low-angle grain boundary

    LATID                   large angle tilt implant drain

    LB                      (a) Langmuir-Blodgett or (b) laser beam

    LCCD                    leadless ceramic chip carrier

    LCD                     liquid crystal display

    LDCC                    leaded ceramic chip carrier

    LDD                     lightly doped drain

    LEC                     liquid encapsulated Czoshralski

    LED                     light emitting diode

    LEED                    low-energy electron diffraction

    LEK                     liquid encapsulated Kyropoulus

    LOCOS                   local oxidation of silicon

    LOPED                   lift-off using edge detection

    LPCVD                   low-pressure chemical vapor deposition

    LPE                     liquid phase epitaxy

    LRP                     limited reaction processing

    LSI                     large scale integration

    LSSL                    lateral surface superlattice

    LST                     logic service terminal

    LTCC                    low temperature co-fired ceramic

    LTG                     low temperature growth

    LTO                     low temperature oxidation

                                    -M-

    MBE                     molecular beam epitaxy

    MCz                     magnetic Czoshralski

    MCM                     multichip module

    MCT                     (a) MOS controlled thyristor or (b) HgCdTe

    MEM                     micro-electromechanical

    MESFET                  metal semiconductor FET (Schottky gate)

    MF3R                    modified fully-framed fully-recessed isolation

    MGSi                    metallurgical-grade silicon

    MIM                     metal-insulator-metal

    MISFET                  metal insulator semiconductor IGFET

    MLEC                    magnetic LEC

    MLC                     multilayer ceramic

    MLO                     multilayer oxide

    MLR                     multilayer resist

    MMA                     methyl methacrylate

    MMIC                    monolithic microwave integrated circuit

    MNOS                    metal nitride/oxide IGFET

    MOCVD                   metal organic chemical vapor deposition

    MODFET          modulation doped MESFET (i.e., HEMT)

    MOMOM           metal-oxide-metal (tunnelling device)

    MOSFET          metal oxide semiconductor IGFET

    MQW                     multiquantum well

    MTF                     mean time to failure

    MTL                     merged transistor logic (i.e., I2L)

                                    -N-

    NDC                     negative differential conductivity

    NEA                     negative electron affinity (e-emitter)

    NMA                     N-methyl-acetamide

    NMOS                    n-channel MOSFET

    NMP                     n-methyl-pyrrolidone

    novolak                 Thermoplastic phenol-formaldehyde used as
    photoresist

    NPN                     (bipolar transistor)

    NRD                     nitridation retarded diffusion

    NSAG                    nonself-aligned gate

    NTD                     neutron transmutation doping

    NVRAM                   nonvolatile RAM

                                    -O-

    OBG                     optical band gap

    ODE                     orientation dependent etching

    OED                     oxidation enhanced diffusion

    OEIC                    optoelectronic integrated circuit

    OF                      orientation flat

    OISF                    oxidation induced stacking fault

    OMCVD                   organometallic CVD

    OMCT                    octamethylcyclotetrasiloxane

    OMVPE                   organometallic VPE

    ORD                     oxidation retarded diffusion

    ORL                     optical return loss

    OSA                     optical subassembly

    OSF                     (see OISF)

    OTCR                    over-the-cell routing

    OTP                     one-time programmable

    OXSEF                   oxygen-doped silicon epitaxial film

                                    -P-

    PAC                     photoactive compound

    PAP                     peel apart

    PBG                     photonic band gap

    PBL                     polybuffered LOCOS

    PBM                     planarization blocking mask

    PBN                     pyrolytic boron nitride

    PBT                     permeable base transistor

    PCB                     printed circuit board

    PCE                     photoconductive element

    PEB                     postexposure baking

    PECVD                   plasma enhanced chemical vapor deposition

    PEP                     photo-engraving process

    PFT                     peeled film technology

    PGA                     (a) pin-grid array or (b) programmable gate array

    PGMA                    poly(glycidyl methacrylate) (an EB resist)

    PHS                     plated heat sink

    PIC                     photonic integrated circuit

    PID                     programmable interconnect device (fuse/antifuse)

    PIN                     P-type layer, intrinsic layer, N-type layer

    PIQ                     thermosetting polyimide resin

    PLA                     programmable logic array

    PLCC                    plastic leaded chip carrier

    PLDD                    profiled LDD

    PLM                     pad limiting metallurgy

    PLZT                    lead lanthanate zirconate titanate

    PMMA                    polymethylmethacrylate

    PMOS                    p-channel MOSFET

    PNP                     (bipolar transistor)

    polycide                        polycrystalline silicide

    polySi                  polycrystalline silicon

    PPL                     poly pad LOCOS

    PR                      photoresist

    PROM                    programmable read only memory

    PROPS                   planarization with resist/oxide and polysilicon

    PSD                     photosensitive diode or dielectric

    PSG                     phosphosilica glass

    PTC                     positive temperature coefficient

    PTH                     plated through-hole

    PUT                     programmable unijunction transistor

    PVD                     physical vapor deposition

    PWB                     printed wiring board

    PZT                     lead zirconate titanate

                                    -Q-

    QE                      quantum efficiency

    QFP                     quad flat package

    QUIP                    quad-in-line package

    QW                      quantum well

    QWIP                    quantum well infrared photodetector

                                    -R-

    RAM                     random access memory

    RBS                     Rutherford backscattering

    RBT                     resonant tunneling bipolar transistor

    RCT                     reverse conducting thyristor

    RED                     radiation enhanced diffusion

    resurf                  reduced surface field

    RETT                    resonant electron transfer triode

    RF                      radiofrequency

    RHEED                   reflected high energy electron diffraction

    RHET                    resonant tunneling hot electron transistor (bipolar)

    RIBE                    reactive ion beam etching

    RIE                     reactive ion etching

    RISC                    reduced instruction set computing

    RMS                     refined metallurgical silicon

    ROI                     recessed oxide isolation

    ROM                     read only memory

    ROX                     recessed oxide

    RTA                     rapid thermal anneal

    RTP                     rapid thermal processing

                                    -S-

    salicide                        self-aligned silicide

    SAG                     self-aligned gate

    SAW                     surface acoustic wave (pressure sensitive device)

    SBD                     Schottky barrier diode

    SBH                     Schottky barrier height

    SBS                     silicon bilateral switch

    SCCM                    standard cubic centimeter per minute

    SCM                     single chip module

    SCR                     silicon controlled rectifier

    SDFL                    Schottky diode FET logic

    SDHT                    selectively doped heterostructure transistor (e.g.,
    HEMT)

    S-DIP                   shrink DIP

    SEED                    self-enhanced electro-optical devices

    SEG                     selective epitaxial growth

    SEL                     (a)surface emitting laser or (b)state excitation by
    light

    SELFOX                  selective epitaxial layer field oxidation

    SEM                     scanning electron microscopy

    SEOT                    self-aligned epitaxy over trench

    SEPOX                   selective polysilicon oxidation

    SER                     soft error rate

    SFFT                    superconducting flux flow transistor

    SGT                     surrounding gate transistor

    Si                      silicon

    SI                      semi-insulating

    SICOS                   sidewall base contact structure

    SILO                    sealed interface local oxidation

    SIMOX                   separation by implanted oxygen

    SIMS                    secondary ion mass spectrometry

    SIP                     single-in-line package

    SIPOS                   semi-insulating polycrystalline oxygen-doped silicon

    SIT                     (a)static induct. thyristor or (b)static induct.
    trans.

    SLM                     spatial light modulator

    SLS                     strained layer superlattice

    SLT                     solid logic technology

    SMT                     surface mount technology

    SOG                     spin-on glass

    SOI                     silicon on insulator

    SOIC                    small outline IC package

    SOJ                     small outline J-lead package

    SOS                     silicon on sapphire

    SPE                     solid phase epitaxy

    SPOT                    self-aligned planar oxidation technology

    SPT                     substrate plate trench capacitor

    SQUID                   superconductive quantum interference device

    SRAM                    static random access memory

    SRO                     stress relief oxide

    SSDP                    simultaneous single/polycrystalline deposition

    SSI                     small scale integration

    SST                     (a)super self-alignment tech. or (b)sealed sidewall
    tech.

    STT                     stacked transistor capacitor cell

    SUBHET                  superconducting base hot electron transistor

    SUBSIT                  superconducting base semiconductor isolated
    transistor

    SWAMI                   sidewall masked isolation

                                    -T-

    TAB                     tape automated bonding

    TAT                     turn around time

    TBES                    tritertiarybutoxyethoxysilane

    TBCO                    thallium bismuth copper oxide (a HTSC)

    TCE                     trichloroethylene

    TCM                     thermal conduction module

    TCO                     transparent conductive oxide

    TDDB                    time dependent dielectric breakdown

    TEC                     thermoelectric cooler

    TED                     transient enhanced diffusion

    TEG                     (a) triethylgallium or (b) test element group

    TEM                     transmission electron spectroscopy

    TEOS                    tetraethylorthosilane

    TFR                     thin film resistor

    TFT                     thin film transistor

    TGZM                    temperature gradient zone melting

    TH                      through-hole

    TIBA                    triisobutylaluminum

    TLTR                    transmission line tap resistor (test structure)

    TMA                     (a) trimethylaluminum or (b) trimethylantimony

    TMAH                    tetramethyl ammoniumhydroxide

    TMAT                    tetramethylamidotitanium

    TMB                     tetramethylborate

    TMCTS                   tetramethylcyclotetrasiloxane

    TMG                     trimethylgallium

    TMOS                    tetramethyloxysilane

    TMP                     trimethylphosphine

    TMS                     tetramethylsilane

    TMT                     tetramethyltin

    TOFER                   topographic feature enhancement by RIE

    TPF                     thermoplastic film

    TRAPPAT         trapped plasma avalanche tunnel transit (diode)

    TSD                     temperature sensing diode

    TSOP                    thin small outline package

    TTL                     transistor-transistor logic

                                    -U-

    UHV                     ultrahigh vacuum

    UV                      ultraviolet

                                    -V-

    VCNR                    voltage controlled negative resistance

    VGF                     vertical gradient freeze (also VFG)

    VHSIC                   very high speed integrated circuit

    VLE                     vapor levitation epitaxy

    VLSI                    very large scale integration

    VMOS                    vertical MOS

    VPE                     vapor phase epitaxy

    VSIS                    V-channel substrate inner stripe

                                    -W-

    WSI                     wafer scale integration

                                    -X-

    XRD                     x-ray diffraction

                                    -Y-

    YBCO                    yttria barium copper oxide (a HTSC)

    YSZ                     yttria stabilized zirconia

                                    -Z-

    ZDO                     zero drain overlap

    ZIP                     zigzag-in-line package

    ZMR                     zone melt recrystallization

    mc                      microcrystalline

    p                       high resistivity intrinsic semiconductor

    2.      GLOSSARY

    Note: The meaning to be given to the various "art" terms appearing in this
    class, some of which have been included in the glossary below, is the same
    as that generally accepted or in common usage.  However, certain terms
    employed in this class and also included below have been assigned
    definitions which may be more restrictive or different from those in common
    usage since these terms are being utilized for distinguishing this class
    over other classes of related art.

    ACCEPTOR IMPURITY

    An atom or ion different from or foreign to, but present in, a
    semiconductor material and which has insufficient valence electrons to
    complete the normal bonding arrangement in the semiconductor crystal
    structure.  An  acceptor impurity (also referred to as p-type) accepts an
    electron from an adjacent atom to create a positive charge carrier (i.e., a
    hole).  A donor impurity (also referred to as n-type) provides an electron
    to the conduction band of the semiconductor.

    ACTIVE SOLID-STATE DEVICE

    An electronic device or  component that is primarily made up  of solid
    materials, usually semiconductors, which operates by the movement of charge
    carriers -  electrons or holes - which undergo energy level changes within
    the material and can modify an input voltage to achieve rectification,
    amplification, or switching action.  Active solid-state electronic devices
    include diodes, transistors, thyristors, etc., but exclude pure resistors,
    capacitors, inductors, or combinations solely thereof.  The latter category
    is characterized as passive.

    ALLOY JUNCTION

    A fused junction produced by combining one or more elemental impurity
    metals with a semiconductor.  Typical alloyed junctions include
    indium-germanium and aluminum-silicon.

    AUTODOPING

    The introduction via the vapor phase of impurities from an existing
    substrate region (and adjacent supports, e.g., susceptors, etc.) into
    another substrate region, typically during growth of the same.

    AVALANCHE BREAKDOWN

    A sudden change from high dynamic electrical resistance to very low dynamic
    resistance in a reverse biased semiconductor device (e.g., a  reverse
    biased junction between p-type and n-type semiconductor materials) wherein
    current carriers are created by electrons or  holes which have gained
    sufficient speed to dislodge valence electrons.  Avalanche breakdown can
    cause structural damage to a semiconductor device.

    BAND GAP

    The difference between the energy levels of electrons bound to their nuclei
    (valence  electrons) and the energy levels that allow electrons to migrate
    freely (conduction electrons).  The band gap depends on the particular
    semiconductor involved.

    BARRIER REGION OR LAYER

    A region which extends on both sides of a semiconductor junction in which
    all carriers are swept away from the  junction region.  The region is
    depleted of carriers.  This is also referred to as a depletion region.  Not
    to be confused with diffusion barrier layers associated with metallization
    schemes for active solid state devices.

    BINARY COMPOUND

    A substance that always contains the same two elements in a fixed atomic
    ratio.

    BIPOLAR

    An active solid-state electronic device in which both positive and negative
    current carriers are used to support current flow.

    BIPOLAR TRANSISTOR

    An active solid-state electronic device with a base electrode and two or
    more junction electrodes in which both  positive and negative current
    carriers are used to support current flow.

    BIRD'S BEAK

    The lateral encroachment of the localized oxidation region associated with
    a recessed oxide isolation structure.

    BONDING PAD

    A metallized area to which an external electrical connection is to be made.

    BREAKDOWN

    A sudden change from high dynamic electrical resistance to a very low
    dynamic resistance in a reverse biased semiconductor  device (e.g., a
    reverse biased junction between p-type and n-type semiconductor materials)
    wherein reverse current increases rapidly for a small increase in reverse
    applied voltage, and the device behaves as if it had negative electrical
    resistance.

    CAPACITOR

    A component used in electrical and electronic circuits which stores a
    charge of electricity, usually for very brief periods of time, with the
    ability to rapidly charge and discharge.  A capacitor is usually considered
    a passive component since it does not rectify, amplify, or switch and
    because charge carriers do not undergo energy level changes therein,
    although some active solid state devices function as voltage variable
    capacitors.

    CHANNEL

    A path for conducting current between a source and drain of a field effect
    transistor.

    CHANNEL STOP

    Means for limiting channel formation in a semiconductor device by
    surrounding the affected area with a ring of highly doped, low resistivity
    semiconductor material.  In a field effect transistor, it is a region of
    highly doped material of the same type as the lightly doped substrate used
    to prevent leakage paths along the chip surface from developing.  Also
    referred to as "chanstop."

    CHANNEL PINCH-OFF REGION

    The location in a current channel portion of a field effect transistor
    (FET) where the current is reduced to a minimum value due to its diameter
    being reduced to a minimum.

    CHARGE CARRIER

    A mobile conduction electron or hole in a semiconductor.

    CHARGE CONFINEMENT

    Restriction of electrical charge carriers (e.g., electrons or holes) to
    specified locations (e.g., by quantum wells, gate electrode potentials,
    etc.).

    CHARGE INJECTION DEVICE

    A field effect device in which storage sites for packets of electric charge
    are induced at or below the surface of an active solid-state device by an
    electric field applied to the device and wherein carrier potential energy
    per unit charge minima are established at a given storage site and such
    charge packets are injected into the device substrate or into a data bus.
    This type device differs from a charge transfer device in that, in the
    latter, charge is transferred to adjacent charge storage sites in a serial
    manner, whereas, in a charge injection device, the charge is injected in a
    nonserial manner to the device substrate or to a data bus.

    CHIP

    A single crystal substrate of semiconductor material on which one or more
    active or passive solid-state electronic devices are formed.  A chip may
    contain an integrated circuit.  A chip is not normally ready for use until
    packaged and provided with external connectors.

    CHIP CARRIER

    A package with terminals, for  solid-state electronic devices, including
    chips which facilitates handling of the chip during assembly of the chip to
    other electronic elements.

    CLADDING BARRIER

    A higher band gap material which encases a lower band gap material that
    defines the walls of a quantum well.

    COHERENCE LENGTH

    The typical distance an  electron can travel before it is scattered (e.g.,
    by a phonon, a defect, or an  impurity, etc.).

    COHERER

    A term which encompasses both active and passive type devices, the passive
    type being a resistor whose resistance decreases when subjected to a high
    frequency signal, and the active type being a rectifier which is made up of
    active solid-state particles which conduct and rectify current when
    connected into a cohesive element but which loses that characteristic when
    the particles are separated (e.g., by shaking a container in which the
    particles are located, etc.).

    COLLECTOR DIFFUSION ISOLATION (CDI)

    An electrical isolation technology used for bipolar devices which employs
    an epitaxial layer, which forms transistor base regions, laid on a
    substrate of the same conductivity type (p or n) as the epitaxial layer,
    with an opposite conductivity type region, more heavily doped than the
    epitaxial base layer and located between the layer and the substrate,
    forming the collector and isolating the transistor from the substrate.

    COMPOUND SEMICONDUCTOR

    A semiconductor composed of a chemical compound formed of elements from two
    or more different groups of the chemical periodic chart (e.g., Group III
    (B, Al, Ga, In) and Group V (N, P, As, Sb) for the following compounds:
    AlP, AlAs, AlSb, GaP, GaAs, GaSb, InP, InAs, and InSb, or a compound of
    silicon and carbon (SiC)).

    CONDUCTION BAND

    A partially filled energy band in which electrons can move freely,
    permitting a material to carry electric current where electrons are the
    current carriers.

    CONDUCTION ELECTRONS

    In a conductor or  n-type semiconductor, outer shell electrons that are
    bound so loosely that they can move freely in the conduction band of a
    solid material under the influence of an electric field.

    CONNECTOR AREA

    That portion of the electrical conductors (e.g., bonding pad, die bond,
    etc.) used for providing external electrical connections from a component
    to a chip or other component.

    CONTACT

    The point or part of a conductor which touches another electrical conductor
    or electrical component to carry electrical current to or from the
    conductor or electrical component.

    CRYSTAL DEFECT

    Any nonuniformity in a  crystal lattice.  There are four categories of
    crystal defects: (a) point defects, (b) line defects, (c) area defects, and
    (d) volume defects.  Point defects include any foreign atom at a regular
    lattice site (i.e., substitutional site) or between lattice sites (i.e.,
    interstitial site), antisite defects in compound semiconductors (e.g., Ga
    in As or As in Ga), missing lattice atoms, and host atoms located between
    lattice sites and adjacent to a vacant site (i.e., Frenkel defects).  Line
    defects, also called edge or screw dislocations, include extra planes of
    atoms in a lattice.  Area defects include twins or twinning (i.e., a change
    in crystal orientation across a lattice) and grain boundaries (i.e., a
    transition between crystals having no particular positional orientation to
    one another).  Volume defects include precipitates of impurity or dopant
    atoms caused by volume mismatch between a host lattice and precipitates.

    DEEP DEPLETION

    The condition in which a depletion layer formed in a MOS active device due
    to voltage applied to the gate electrode of the device is deeper than the
    maximum depth at which inversion would normally be expected to occur at
    room temperature in a semiconductor device at the surface closest to the
    gate electrode, without formation of an inversion layer.

    DEEP LEVEL CENTERS

    Energy levels that can act as traps located in the forbidden band of a
    semiconductor material that are not near the conduction or valence band
    edges.

    DEGENERATION

    Doping of a semiconductor to such an extent that the Fermi level lies
    within the conduction band (i.e., N+ semiconductor) or within the valence
    band (i.e., P+ semiconductor).  Also, in circuit applications, negative
    feedback between two or more active solid-state devices.

    DEPLETION MODE

    The operation of a field effect transistor having appreciable channel
    conductivity for zero gate-source voltage and whose channel conductivity
    may be increased or decreased according to the polarity of the applied
    gate-source voltage, by changing the gate-to-source voltage from zero to a
    finite value, resulting in a decrease in the magnitude of the drain current.

    DEPLETION REGION

    The region extending on both sides of a reverse biased semiconductor
    junction in which free carriers are removed from the vicinity of the
    junction.  It is also called a space charge region, a barrier region, or an
    intrinsic semiconductor region.

    DEVICE (ACTIVE)

    The physical realization of an individual electrical element in a
    physically independent body which cannot be further divided without
    destroying its stated function.  Examples are transistors, pnpn structures,
    and  tunnel diodes.

    DIE

    A tiny piece of semiconductor material, separated from a semiconductor
    slice, on which one or more active electronic components are formed.
    Sometimes called a chip.

    DIE BOND

    Attachment of a semiconductor chip to a  substrate or chip carrier or
    package, usually with an epoxy, eutectic, or solder alloy.

    DIFFUSED JUNCTION

    A junction between two different conductivity regions within a
    semiconductor and which is formed by diffusion of appropriate  impurity
    atoms into the material.

    DIFFUSION BARRIER

    An obstacle to the diffusion of atoms in a metallization scheme for an
    active solid-state device.

    DIODE ISOLATION

    A technique in which a high electrical resistance between an integrated
    circuit element and its substrate is achieved by surrounding the element
    with a reverse biased pn junction.

    DIP (DUAL IN-LINE PACKAGE)

    A chip carrier or package consisting of a plastic or ceramic body with two
    rows of vertical leads in which a semiconductor integrated circuit is
    assembled and sealed.  The leads are typically inserted into a circuit
    board and secured by soldering.

    DIRECT BAND GAP SEMICONDUCTOR

    A semiconductor in which an electron transition from the conduction to the
    valence band, or vice versa, does not require a change in crystal momentum
    for electrons.  Gallium arsenide is an example of a direct band gap
    semiconductor.

    DISORDERED

    Crystalline arrangement in which the different constituent atoms of a
    compound semiconductor randomly occupy lattice sites.

    DISLOCATION

    A line defect in a crystal, either of the edge type or screw type, in which
    the atoms are not arranged in a perfect latticelike structure.  See CRYSTAL
    DEFECT for other examples of crystalline defects.

    DMOSFET

    Depletion-type metal oxide semiconductor field effect transistor.  Such
    devices are normally in the on condition with no applied gate voltage.

    DONOR IMPURITY

    An element which when added to a semiconductor provides unbound or  free
    electrons to the semiconductor which may serve as current carriers.
    Typically, donors are atoms which have more valence electrons than the
    atoms of the semiconductor material into which they are introduced in small
    quantities as an impurity or dopant.  Since such donor impurities have more
    valence electrons than the semiconductor, a semiconductor doped with donor
    impurities is an n-type semiconductor.

    DOPANT

    An impurity added from an external source to a material by diffusion,
    coating, or implanting into a substrate, such as changing the properties
    thereof.  In semiconductor technology, an impurity may be added to a
    semiconductor to modify its electrical properties or to a material to
    produce a semiconductor having desired electrical properties. N-type
    (negative) dopants (e.g., such as phosphorus for a group IV semiconductor)
    typically come from group V of the periodic table.  When added to a
    semiconductor, n-type dopants create a material that contains conduction
    electrons.  P-type (positive) dopants (e.g., such as boron for a group IV
    semiconductor) typically come from group III and result in conduction holes
    (i.e., vacancies in the electron shells).

    DOPING OF SEMICONDUCTOR

    Adding controlled amounts of conductivity modifying material, referred to
    as electrically active dopant or impurity, to a semiconductor material or
    to a material to produce a semiconductor having desired electrical
    properties for this class.

    DOPING PROFILE

    The point to point concentration throughout a semiconductor of an impurity
    atom doped into the semiconductor.

    DOUBLE-DIFFUSED MOS (DMOS)

    A metal oxide semiconductor having diffused junctions in which successive
    diffusions of different impurity types are made in the same well-defined
    region of the semiconductor.

    DRAIN

    The electrode of a field effect transistor which receives charge carriers
    which pass through the transistor channel from the source electrode.

    DUAL GUARD-BAND ISOLATION

    A type of electrical isolation of functional elements of an integrated
    circuit comprised of two distinct unused areas of chip surface area
    adjacent to the elements desired to be electrically isolated.

    DYNAMIC RANDOM ACCESS MEMORY (DRAM)

    Solid-state memory in which the information decays over time and needs to
    be periodically refreshed.

    ELECTROMIGRATION

    Mass transport of ions (i.e., usually metal) in a material as a response to
    the passage of current through the material by momentum exchange between
    thermally activated ions and conduction electrons.

    ELECTRON-HOLE PAIR

    A positive charge carrier (i.e., hole) and a negative charge carrier
    (i.e., electron) considered together as being created or destroyed as part
    of one and the same event.

    ENHANCEMENT MODE

    The operation of a  field effect transistor which has a channel formed
    therein between its source and drain regions and which normally does not
    conduct current through its channel with zero voltage applied to its gate
    electrode.  Voltage of the correct polarity will accumulate minority
    carriers in the channel to permit conduction of current in the channel,
    thus turning on the transistor.

    EPITAXIAL LATERAL OVERGROWTH

    Process of epitaxial deposition through an exposed opening in an insulating
    layer with deposition continuing epitaxially over the insulating layer
    laterally from the opening.

    EPITAXY

    The controlled growth of a single crystal of one material on the surface of
    a crystal of the material (i.e., homo) or onto another substance (i.e.,
    hetero) so that the crystal lattice of the base material controls the
    orientation of the atoms in the grown single crystal layer.

    ESAKI DIODE

    A heavily doped pn-junction diode where conduction occurs through the
    junction potential barrier due to a quantum mechanical effect even though
    the carriers which tunnel through the potential barrier do not have enough
    energy to overcome the potential barrier.  Esaki tunneling involves a
    tunneling barrier formed by a macroscopic depletion layer between n-type
    and p-type regions.  It does not involve a resonant  tunneling barrier
    using controlled quantum confinement, a layer located between junctions,
    nor a thin superlattice layer.

    EXTRINSIC SEMICONDUCTOR

    A semiconductor whose charge carrier concentration and, therefore,
    electrical properties depend on impurity atoms introduced therein.

    FACE BONDED

    A chip mounting technique wherein semiconductor chips are provided with
    small mounting pads, turned face down, and bonded directly to conductors on
    a substrate.

    FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTOR (FET)

    A unipolar transistor in which current carriers are injected at a source
    terminal and pass to a drain terminal through a channel of semiconductor
    material whose conductivity depends largely on an electric field applied to
    the semiconductor from a control electrode.  There are two main types of
    FETs, a junction FET and an  insulated-gate FET.  In the  junction FET, the
    gate is isolated from the channel by a pn-junction.  In an  insulated-gate
    FET, the gate is isolated from the channel by an insulating layer so that
    the gate and channel form a capacitor with the insulating layer as the
    capacitor dielectric.

    FIELD OXIDE

    A thin (on a macroscopic scale) film made of an oxide of a material which
    overlies a device substrate to reduce parasitic capacitive coupling between
    conductors overlying the oxide and the substrate or devices below the oxide
    layer (e.g., in the substrate).  See bird's beak.

    FLIP-CHIP

    A term which describes the situation wherein a semiconductor device which
    has all terminations on one side thereof in the form of bump contacts, has
    a passivated surface, and has been flipped over and attached to a matching
    substrate.

    FLOATING DIFFUSION

    A region of a semiconductor device in which impurity atoms have been doped
    and which is electrically floating, that is, has no direct electrical
    connection.

    FLOATING GATE

    A gate electrode that is electrically floating, that is, has no direct
    electrical connection.

    FORBIDDEN ENERGY BAND

    The energy band of a material which is located between a solid material's
    conduction and valence bands. It is defined by the amount of energy that is
    needed to release an electron from its valence band to its conduction band.
    Electrons cannot exist in this gap.  They are either below it, and bound to
    an atom, or above it, and able to move freely.

    FRAME TRANSFER CCD

    A charge coupled device area imager array with a separate image area,
    storage area, and read-out register area, the storage area being located
    between the image area and the readout area.  This is distinguished from an
    interline- transfer CCD in which the sensing and storage/readout function
    areas are located next to each other.

    GATE

    The control electrode or control region that exerts an effect on a
    semiconductive region directly associated therewith, such that the
    conductivity characteristic of the semiconductor region is altered in a
    temporary manner, often resulting in an on-off type switching action. The
    control electrode or control region of a field effect transistor is located
    between the source and drain electrodes, and regions thereof.

    GATE ARRAY

    A repeating geometric arrangement of groups of active solid-state devices,
    each group being connectable into a logic circuit, in one integrated,
    monolithic semiconductor chip.

    GATE CONTROLLED DIODE

    A three terminal semiconductor diode with the ability to be turned on or
    off by a pulse applied to its gate electrode.

    GETTERING

    The elimination or reduction of unwanted constituents (i.e., impurities) or
    defects from a substrate.

    GRAPHOEPITAXY

    The growth of a single crystalline layer across the surface of a nonsingle
    crystalline substrate by commencing growth at a seeding portion/region
    thereof.

    GUNN DIODE

    A diode in which electrons under the influence of sufficiently high
    electric fields are transferred between energy valleys of different
    momentum in the conduction band of the active semiconductor device material
    or holes under the influence of sufficiently high electric fields are
    transferred between energy valleys of different momentum in the valence
    band of the active semiconductor device material.  A Gunn diode does not
    normally have a pn junction and cannot be used as a rectifier.

    GUNN EFFECT

    An intervalley transfer effect wherein electrons under the influence of
    sufficiently high electric fields are transferred between energy valleys of
    different momentum in the  conduction band of the active semiconductor
    device material, or holes under the influence of sufficiently high electric
    fields are transferred between energy valleys of different momentum in the
    valence band of the active semiconductor device material.

    HALL EFFECT DEVICE

    An active solid-state device in which a current is flowing and is in a
    magnetic field perpendicular to the current, and in which a voltage is
    produced that is perpendicular to both the current flow direction and the
    magnetic field direction.

    HETEROJUNCTION/HETEROINTERFACE

    An interface between two dissimilar semiconductor materials.  For example,
    one material may by InAs and the other may be InAlAs, or one material may
    be GaAs and the other material may be GaAlAs.

    HIGH ELECTRON MOBILITY TRANSISTOR (HEMT)

    A heterojunction field effect transistor with impurity ions located on the
    side of the heterojunction with lower affinity for the charge carriers
    (holes or electrons) injected at the source that pass to the drain via a
    channel adjacent the heterojunction.

    HOLE

    An empty energy level in the valence band of a semiconductor crystal which
    exhibits properties of a real particle and can act as a mobile
    positive-charge carrier.

    HOMOJUNCTION

    An interface between regions of opposite polarity in the same semiconductor
    material.

    HOT CARRIER DIODE

    A diode in which  electrons (or holes) have energies greater than those
    that are in thermal equilibrium with the material of at least one of the
    regions forming the  diode.  Schottky barrier diodes typically have "hot
    carriers" (hot electrons) injected into the metal from the semiconductor.

    HYBRID CIRCUIT

    A small printed circuit having miniature components which may include
    passive components (resistors, capacitors, and inductors) deposited on a
    printed circuit board.

    IMPURITY

    A foreign material present in a semiconductor crystal, such as boron or
    arsenic in  silicon, which is added to the semiconductor to produce either
    p-type or n-type semiconductor material, or to otherwise result in material
    whose electrical characteristics depend on the impurity dopant atoms.

    INDIRECT BAND GAP SEMICONDUCTOR

    A semiconductor material in which a change in semiconductor crystal
    momentum for an electron is required when it moves from the conduction band
    to the valence band and vice versa.  Silicon and aluminum arsenide are
    examples of indirect band gap semiconductors.

    INSULATED-GATE FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTOR (IGFET)

    A unipolar transistor with source, gate, and drain regions and electrodes,
    in which conduction takes place in a channel controlled by action of the
    voltage applied to the gate electrode of the device, in which the gate
    electrode is separated from the channel by an insulator layer.

    INSULATOR

    A material which has a high resistance to the flow of electric current.  It
    has such low electrical conductivity that the flow of current therethrough
    can usually be neglected.

    INTRINSIC CONCENTRATION

    The number of  minority carriers in a semiconductor due to thermal
    generation of electron-hole pairs.

    INVERSION

    A condition in a semiconductor material in which the concentration of
    minority carriers exceeds the concentration of majority carriers.

    INVERSION LAYER/CHANNEL

    A region in a semiconductor material in which the concentration of minority
    carriers exceeds the concentration of majority carriers.

    ISOELECTRONIC

    A condition in which two constituents have the same number of valence
    electrons.

    ISOLATION

    The separation or surrounding of active semiconductor regions or components
    with electrically insulative regions to prevent the flow of electrical
    current between the active semiconductor regions or between electronic
    component parts of a solid-state electronic device.

    ISOPLANAR CMOS

    A semiconductor device in which relatively thick regions of silicon
    dioxide, recessed into the semiconductor surface, are used to electrically
    isolate device areas and prevent  parasitic device formation.  More
    commonly called LOCOS CMOS.

    ISOPLANAR ISOLATION

    A type of electric  isolation in which relatively thick regions of silicon
    dioxide, recessed into the semiconductor surface, are used to electrically
    isolate device areas and prevent  parasitic device formation.  More
    commonly called LOCOS ISOLATION.

    JUNCTION BARRIER

    The opposition to the diffusion of  majority carriers across a pn junction
    due to the charge of the fixed donor and acceptor ions.

    JUNCTION CAPACITANCE

    The capacitance across a pn junction.  It depends on the width of the
    depletion layer, which increases with increased reverse bias voltage across
    the junction.

    JUNCTION ISOLATION

    Electrical isolation of devices on a monolithic integrated circuit chip
    using a reverse biased junction diode to establish a depletion layer that
    forms the electrical isolation between devices.

    JUNCTION RESISTANCE

    The electrical resistance across a semiconductor PN junction.

    LAND

    The conductive areas, normally metal patterns, on a semiconductor
    integrated circuit, which form part of the contacts and interconnections
    between components on the integrated circuit.  See bonding pad, die bond.

    LIFT-OFF

    Process for the removal of unwanted deposited material from a substrate
    (and thus patterning the same) by the dissolution of an intermediate layer
    and the commitant physical separation of the overlying deposited material.

    LUMINESCENCE

    The emission of visible or invisible radiation unaccompanied by high
    temperature by any substance as a result of absorption of exciting energy
    in the form of photons, charged particles, or chemical change. It is a
    general term which includes fluorescence and phosphorescence.  Types
    include hemiluminescence, bioluminescence, photoluminescence,
    electroluminescence, photoluminescence, and triboluminescence.  Active
    solid-state luminescent devices are semiconductors which operate via
    injection luminescence.  Active devices include pn junctions (including
    heterojunctions), Schottky barrier junctions, metal-insulator-semiconductor
    (MIS) structures, and high speed traveling domains (e.g., Gunn domain and
    acoustoelectric wave generated domains). Passive solid-state
    electroluminescent devices (phosphors) are insulators which operate in an
    intrinsic luminescence phenomena (i.e., where an applied electric field
    generates free carriers) to initiate the light emission mechanism, there
    being no free carriers in an insulator to be accelerated by an applied
    field unless the field also generates them.

    MAJORITY CARRIER

    The predominant charge carrier in a semiconductor.  Electrons are majority
    carriers in n-type semiconductors.  Holes are majority carriers in p-type
    semiconductors.

    MASTERSLICE ARRAY/MASTERCHIP

    A substrate that contains active and passive electronic components in a
    predetermined pattern which may be connected into different logic or analog
    circuits.

    MBM JUNCTION

    Active solid-state devices having metal-barrier-metal layer junctions.

    METAL-OXIDE SEMICONDUCTOR FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTOR (MOSFET)

    See INSULATED-GATE FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTOR.

    METALLIZATION

    Process of coating (a) metal or (b) other material which is identified as
    having the conductive characteristic of a metal onto a semiconductor or a
    substrate containing semiconductor regions to form electrodes, contacts,
    interconnects, bonding pads, or heat sinks and also including formation of
    conductive material by doping of nonconductive material.

    MIM DIODE

    A junction diode with a thin insulating layer of material sandwiched
    between two metallic surface layers which operates as a tunneling (direct
    or Fowler-Nordheim type) diode.

    MINORITY CARRIER

    The less predominant charge carrier in a semiconductor.  In a p-type
    semiconductor, minority carriers are electrons, whereas in n-type
    semiconductor material, minority carriers are holes.

    MIS

    Acronym for metal-insulator-semiconductor.  Typically active solid-state
    devices with MIS technology have a silicon dioxide layer formed on a
    single crystal silicon substrate.  A polysilicon conductor layer is formed
    on the oxide.

    MOBILITY

    The facility with which carriers move through a semiconductor when
    subjected to an applied electric field.  Electrons and holes typically have
    different mobilities in the same semiconductor.

    MODFET

    Acronym for a modulation doped field effect transistor.  A high speed
    semiconductor FET in which dopant atoms containing semiconductor layers
    alternate with nondoped semiconductor layers, so that the carriers
    (electrons or holes) resulting from the dopant atoms can travel in the
    undoped material, so that there is little scattering of carriers from
    dopant atoms.  Typically, the dopant atoms are in semiconductor material
    having a lower carrier affinity than the undoped layers to facilitate
    carrier spill over into the undoped layers.  Such a structure may typically
    constitute a superlattice.  See also High Electron Mobility Transistor.

    MONOLITHIC DEVICE (E.G., IC, ETC.)

    A device in which all components are fabricated on a single chip of
    silicon.  Interconnections among  components are provided by means of
    metallization patterns on the surface of the chip structure, and the
    individual parts are not separable from the complete circuit.  External
    connecting wires are taken out to terminal pins or leads.

    MSM

    Acronym for metal-semiconductor-metal semiconductor device.  Active
    solid-state semiconductor devices having a semiconductor layer sandwiched
    between two layers of metal and forming back-to-back Schottky diodes.

    NEGATIVE RESISTANCE REGION

    An operating region of an active solid-state electronic device in which an
    increase in applied voltage results in a decrease in output current.

    NEGATIVE TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT

    The amount of reduction in a device parameter, such as capacitance or
    resistance, for each degree of device operating temperature.

    NMOS

    N-channel metal oxide semiconductor devices which use electrons as majority
    carriers.

    NONDOPANT

    An impurity added from an external source which does not modify the
    electrical properties of a semiconductor.

    NPN TRANSISTOR

    A bipolar transistor with n-type emitter and collector regions separated by
    a p-type base.

    N-CHANNEL FET

    A field effect transistor that has an n-type conduction channel.

    N-TYPE SEMICONDUCTOR

    An extrinsic semiconductor having n-type dopant atoms (e.g., atoms with one
    or more valence electron than the host atoms). Electron density exceeds
    hole density.

    ORDERED

    Crystalline arrangement in which different constituent atoms of a compound
    semiconductor occupy specific lattice sites resulting in long range
    regularity of the resultant structure.

    OUTDIFFUSION

    The solid-state diffusion of impurities from the underlying substrate into
    a deposited layer during the growth thereof.

    PACKAGE

    A container, case, or enclosure utilized in the context of semiconductor
    art for protecting a solid-state electronic device from the environment and
    which is considered a part of a manufacture product (i.e., as opposed to a
    package utilized for passage of a product through the channels of trade in
    a safe, convenient, and attractive condition).

    PAD

    A.      The portion of a conductive pattern on a solid-state electronic
    device for making external connection thereto.

    B.      The portion of a conductive pattern on a chip or a printed circuit
    board designed for mounting or attaching a substrate or solid-state active
    electronic device.

    See also bonding pad, die bond, etc.

    PARASITIC DEVICES/CHANNELS

    A.      Junctions forming unintended interconnection of intended active
    solid-state devices.

    B.      Devices which were not designed to carry current flow and which
    result from unintended interconnection of intended active solid-state
    devices.

    PASSIVE DEVICE

    A solid-state electronic device or component in which charge carriers do
    not change their energy levels and that does not provide rectification,
    amplification, or switching, but which does react to voltage and current.
    Examples are pure resistors, capacitors, and inductors.

    P-CHANNEL

    A conduction path, made of p-type semiconductor material, located between
    source and drain of a field effect device.

    PHOTODIODE

    A diode in which charge carriers are created by light which illuminates the
    diode junction.  It is a photovoltaic as well as a photoconductive device.

    ---CDEF---PINCH-EFFECT RESISTOR

    A monolithic integrated circuit resistor having a layer of one conductivity
    type, typically a P-layer formed at the same time as integrated circuit
    bipolar transistor base regions, which is thinned by an inset region of
    opposite conductivity type, typically an N-layer formed at the same time as
    integrated circuit bipolar transistor emitter regions.

    PIN DIODE/DEVICE

    A diode having an  intrinsic semiconductor (i.e., one with no dopants)
    sandwiched between a p-type layer and an n-type layer.  The depletion
    region (the intrinsic semiconductor layer) thickness can be tailored to
    optimize quantum efficiency for use as a photo diode or frequency response
    for use as a microwave diode.

    PIN-GRID ARRAY

    A semiconductor chip package having leads in the form of pins arranged in
    columns and rows.

    PLANAR TRANSISTOR

    A bipolar transistor in which the emitter base and collector regions
    terminate at the same plane surface without indentations in or protrusions
    from the surface.  Hence, the emitter and base regions form dish-shaped
    portions extending into the semiconductor from the common surface.

    PN-JUNCTION

    The interface and region of transition between p-type and n-type
    semiconductors.  See also barrier layer.

    PN-JUNCTION DIODE

    A semiconductor device having two terminals connected to opposite-type
    semiconductor materials with a junction therebetween and exhibiting a
    nonlinear voltage-current characteristic, usually used for switching or
    rectification.

    PNP TRANSISTOR

    A bipolar transistor with p-type emitter and collector regions separated by
    an n-type base.

    POINT DEFECT

    A crystal defect occurring at a point in a crystal. Examples include (a) a
    foreign atom incorporated into the crystal lattice at either a
    substitutional (regular lattice) site or interstitial (between regular
    lattice sites) site, (b) a missing atom in the lattice, or (c) a host atom
    located between regular lattice sites and adjacent to a vacancy (called a
    Frenkel defect).  See CRYSTAL DEFECT for other examples of crystalline
    defects.

    POLYSILICON

    A polycrystalline form of silicon.

    POTENTIAL BARRIER

    The difference in electrical potential across a pn junction in a
    semiconductor.  See also barrier layer.

    POTTING

    An embedding process in which an electronic component is placed in a can,
    shell, or other container and buried in a fluid dielectric which
    subsequently is hardened material.  Even though the container is not
    removed from the finished part, this is considered a molding operation
    since the fluid  is confined to a definite shape during hardening.

    PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD

    A structure formed on one or more layers of electrically insulating
    material having electrical terminals and conductive material deposited
    thereon, in continuous paths, from terminal to terminal, to form circuits
    for electronic apparatus such as chips or substrates.

    P-TYPE

    An extrinsic semiconductor in which the hole density exceeds the conduction
    electron density.

    PUNCHTHROUGH

    Expansion of a depletion region* from one junction to another junction in
    an active solid-state device.

    QUANTUM TRANSISTOR

    Transistors whose operation is based on the properties of electrons
    confined in quantum wells - semiconductor films only a hundred or so
    angstroms thick sandwiched between high confining walls made of a second
    semiconductor material.

    QUANTUM WELL

    Semiconductor films only a hundred or so angstroms thick sandwiched between
    high confining walls made of a second material.

    RECOMBINATION

    The process by which excess holes and electrons in a semiconductor crystal
    recombine and no longer function as charge carriers in the semiconductor.
    Basic recombination processes are band-to-band recombination which occurs
    when an electron in the conduction band recombines with a hole in the
    valence band, and trapping recombination which occurs when an electron or
    hole is captured by a deep energy level, such as produced by a deep level
    dopant, before recombining with an opposite conductivity-type carrier.

    RESISTIVITY

    A measure of the resistance of a material to electric current.  Resistivity
    is a bulk material property measured in ohm-cm.

    RESONANT TUNNELLING DEVICE

    A device that works on the principle of resonant electron (or hole)
    tunneling through a pair of matched  potential barriers.  This occurs when
    the energy of the electrons (or  holes) matches that of a quantum energy
    level in the quantum well formed between the barriers.

    SEMICONDUCTOR

    A.      A generic term for (1) a substance or material whose electronic
    conductivity at ordinary temperature is intermediate between that of a
    metal and an insulator and whose conductivity is capable of being modified
    by the addition of a dopant or (2) an electronic device the main
    functioning parts are made from semiconductor materials.

    B.      For the purposes of Class 438, a semiconductor material (1) must
    have resistivity between that of an insulator and a conductor and (2) be
    intended for use in a solid state device for at least one of the following
    purposes: (a) conducting or modifying an electrical current, (b) storing
    electrical energy for subsequent discharge,or (c) converting
    electromagnetic wave energy to electrical energy or electrical energy to
    electromagnetic energy.  The resistivity is commonly changed by light,
    heat, or electric or magnetic fields incident on the material.

    SEMICONDUCTOR JUNCTION

    The region of transition, which usually exhibits asymmetric conductivity,
    between two joined semiconductors of different electrical properties or of
    joined semiconductor and conductor (e.g., metal, etc.) and which is also
    referred to in the art as a barrier layer.  Types of junctions include
    heterojunctions, Schottky barrier junctions, and PN junctions.

    SILICON ON INSULATOR (SOI)

    A semiconductor structure using an insulating substrate, instead of silicon
    as a substrate material, with an overlying active layer of single crystal
    silicon containing active solid state devices.  The substrate may typically
    be of the form of an insulating layer which is itself formed on a single
    crystal substrate.

    SILICON ON SAPPHIRE (SOS) CMOS

    A complementary metal oxide semiconductor device (e.g., a transistor)
    wherein single crystal silicon is grown on a passive insulating base of
    sapphire (single crystal alpha phase aluminum oxide) with complementary MOS
    transistors formed in the  silicon in one or more island portions.

    SINGLE CRYSTAL

    A body of material having atoms regularly located at periodic lattice sites
    throughout.

    SINKER

    A buried electrically conductive, low resistance path in an integrated
    circuit which connects an electrical contact to a conductive region buried
    in the integrated circuit.  It may be made up of a heavily doped impurity
    region.

    SOLID-STATE DEVICE

    An electronic device or component that uses current flow through solid (as
    opposed to liquid), gas, or vacuum materials.  Solid-state devices may be
    active or passive.

    SOURCE

    In a field effect transistor, the active region/electrode to which the
    source of charge carriers is connected.

    SPACE CHARGE REGION

    The region around a  pn junction in which holes and electrons recombine to
    leave no mobile charge carriers and a net charge density due to the
    residual dopant ions.

    SPIKING

    Phenomena associated with electromigration wherein a fingerlike protrusion
    of a metallization layer is allowed to grow through a dielectric layer and
    eventually contact a further layer.

    SUBSTRATE

    A.      A base upon which a coating is formed.  See the class definition
    for the requirements for coating, per se, or etching, per se, when a base
    of semiconductor or  containing a semiconductive region is the substrate.

    B.      The supporting material on or in which the components of an
    integrated circuit are fabricated or attached.

    SUPERLATTICE

    A periodic sequence of variations in carrier potential energy in a
    semiconductor, of such magnitude and spacing that the current carrier wave
    function is spread out over many periods, so that carrier energy and other
    properties are determined in part by the periodic variations.  The
    variation may be in chemical composition of the material, as in a sequence
    of heterojunctions, or in impurity concentration, forming a doping
    superlattice, or both.

    SURFACE MOUNT DEVICES

    Active or passive solid-state devices which are structured and configured
    to be mounted directly to a printed circuit board surface.  This type of
    mounting is distinguished from "through-hole" mounting which involves the
    electrical and physical connection of devices to a printed circuit board
    using drilled and plated holes through the conductive pattern of the board.

    SURFACE RESISTIVITY

    The resistance of a material between two opposite sides of a unit square of
    its surface.  Also called Sheet Resistance.  Measured in ohms, often
    written as "ohms per square" in this case.

    THERMISTOR

    A thermoelectric device whose electrical resistance varies with
    temperature.  Its temperature coefficient of resistance is high, nonlinear,
    and usually negative.

    THIN-FILM

    A material on a substrate with a thickness not greater than 10 microns and
    uniformity within 20% of it's average value (Grant and Hackh's Chemical
    Dictionary, 5th Edition, edited by Roger & Claire Grant, McGraw-Hill, Inc.,
    1987, page 235).

    THICK-FILM DEVICES

    Printed thin-film circuits.  Silk screen printing techniques are used to
    make the desired circuit patterns on a ceramic  substrate.  Active devices
    may be added thereto as separate devices (see  HYBRID CIRCUIT).

    THIN-FILM DEVICES

    Solid-state electronic devices which are constructed by depositing films of
    conducting material on the surface of electrically insulating bases.

    THYRISTOR

    A four layer p-n-p-n bistable switching device that changes from an off or
    blocking state to an on or conducting state which uses both  electron and
    hole-type carrier transport.

    TRANSFERRED ELECTRON DEVICE

    See  GUNN EFFECT.  In such devices, advantage is taken of the negative
    differential mobility of  electrons or holes in certain semiconducting
    compounds, particularly GaAs or InP.

    TRANSISTOR

    An active solid-state semiconductor device having three or more electrodes
    in which the current flowing between two specified electrodes is modulated
    by the voltage or current applied to one or more specified electrodes, and
    is capable of performing switching or amplification.  May be of unipolar
    type (i.e., field effect transistor) or bipolar type.

    TRAPATT DEVICE

    An acronym for trapped plasma avalanche triggered transit diodes, which are
    biased into avalanche condition.  As the diode breaks down, a highly
    conducting electron-hole plasma quickly fills the entire n-type region, and
    the voltage across the diode drops to a low value.  The plasma is then
    extracted from the diode by the low residual electric field, thus causing a
    large current flow even though the voltage is low.  Once extraction of the
    plasma is completed, the current drops and the voltage rises.

    TRENCH ISOLATION

    Electrical isolation of electronic components in a monolithic integrated
    circuit by the use of grooves or other indentations in the surface of the
    substrate, which may or may not be filled with electrically insulative
    (i.e., dielectric) material.

    TUNNEL DIODE

    A semiconductor diode in which the electrons penetrate a quantum barrier
    that is impenetrable in terms of classical physics, but which is penetrable
    in terms of quantum physics due to the quantum mechanical uncertainty in
    position of current carriers.

    TWO-DIMENSIONAL ELECTRON GAS

    A description of the motion of electrons which are confined in only one
    direction, such as electrons in the conducting channel of a MOSFET.  In an
    electron gas, the electrons move around without apparent restriction.  The
    behavior of electrons in conducting metals (e.g., copper) is an example of
    a three-dimensional electron gas.  In a two dimensional electron gas,
    motion is restricted to a single plane (two dimensions).  See also MODFET.

    UNIPOLAR

    An active solid-state electronic device in which only one type of charge
    carrier (i.e., positive holes or negative electrons) is used to support
    current flow.

    VARACTOR

    A semiconductor diode comprising a two terminal active device using the
    voltage variable capacitance of a pn junction or a Schottky junction that
    changes capacitance with a change in applied voltage.

    VARISTOR

    A varistor is a two-electrode active or passive semiconductor device with a
    voltage dependent nonlinear resistance which falls significantly as the
    voltage is increased.  In an active device, the nonlinear property is due
    to the presence of one or more potential barriers. In a passive-type
    varistor, it is due to electrical heating of the material due to current
    flow therethrough.  Varistors are to be contrasted with passive variable
    resistors such as rheostats or potentiometers.

    VIA

    A metallized or plated-through hole in an insulating layer, a semiconductor
    containing substrate or chip, or a printed circuit board which forms a
    conduction path itself without having a wire or lead inserted therethrough.

    WAFER

    A thin slice of semiconductor material with parallel faces used as the
    substrate for active solid-state devices in discrete or monolithic
    integrated circuit form.

    WIRING CHANNEL

    An area on an integrated circuit, such as a gate array, which is left free
    of active devices and in which interconnection metallization patterns are
    formed.

    WORK FUNCTION

    The minimum energy required to remove an electron from the Fermi level of a
    material and liberate it to free space outside the solid.

    ZENER DIODE

    A single pn junction, two terminal semiconductor diode reversed biased into
    breakdown caused by the Zener effect (i.e., by field emission of charge
    carriers in the device's depletion layer).  NOTE:  True Zener breakdown
    occurs in  silicon at values below 6 volts.  It is to be distinguished from
    the avalanche breakdown mechanism that occurs in reverse biased  diodes at
    higher (about 6 volts) voltages.

    III.    NOTES TO RELATED CLASSES:

            Several classes provide for plural step operations for
    manufacturing semiconductor solid-state devices or components therefor.
    Combined operations for manufacturing semiconductor electrical devices or
    semiconductor-based components therefor having plural steps not encompassed
    by another class are proper for Class 438.

            For example, while plural steps acceptable to Class 264 (e.g.,
    injection molding and subsequent removal of flash, etc.) remain in Class
    264, combinations of molding and adhesive bonding are provided for in Class
    156, even though this involves multiple steps, one of which (i.e., molding)
    would be considered a Class 264 unit operation even if semiconductor
    material is involved.  However, combinations of molding, adhesive bonding,
    and a Class 438 unit operation acting on a semiconductor substrate which is
    used for at least one of the following purposes: (a) conducting or
    modifying an electrical current, (b) storing electrical energy for
    subsequent discharge within a microelectronic integrated circuit, or (c)
    converting electromagnetic wave energy to electrical energy or electrical
    energy to electromagnetic energy, are considered proper for Class 438.

    A.      Unit coating operations, combined operations involving coating, and
    particle bombardment

            The following search notes are intended to clarify the lines and
    distinctions for determining when coating operations are provided for in
    Class 438. Throughout this class, the term "coating" is used in the generic
    sense to include both surface coating and impregnation.

            The unit coating operations in Class 438 may be viewed as a specie
    of a Class 427 process which was removed intact from Class 427 and
    transferred to Class 438 for the convenience of the searcher. Thus, plural
    step operations that were acceptable in Class 427 are now acceptable in
    Class 438 if the criteria for the semiconductor material as set forth
    hereinabove is met.  Coating operations which do not meet the Class 438
    definition may be classified in the following classes:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefore, for processes of single crystal growth of
    semiconductor material upon a seed or substrate and perfecting operations
    combined therewith.  See Class 117 definitions for examples of perfecting
    operations generally acceptable to Class 117.  See particularly Class 117,
    I, C, (2), and (3) for terms indicative of single crystal formation.
    Inclusion of a nonperfecting single crystal forming operation on a
    semiconductor substrate or producing a semiconductor product meeting the
    hereinabove requirements of a semiconductor material or the definition of a
    semiconductor substrate takes the original to Class 438, even if there is
    present a single crystal forming step.

            When combined with single crystal formation, the following
    operations are acceptable in Class 438:

            (a)     simultaneous formation of nonsingle crystalline regions
    intended to impart structure that will serve as a functional part of the
    semiconductive substrate or completed device,

            (b)     prior or subsequent removal of a nonseed portion of the
    substrate in order to impart electrical device structure to the same (e.g.,
    formation or a recess, trench, trough, ridge, mesa, stripe, etc.), or

            (c)     prior or subsequent step acting to alter the composition of
    the semiconductor substrate so as to impart electrical device structure to
    the same.

    148,    Metal Treatment, for unit coating operations on metal, particularly
    subclasses 206+ wherein there is carburization or nitriding of a metal
    surface by chemical reaction or diffusion of an externally supplied source
    of carbon or nitrogen that reacts with the metal surface wherein the metal
    substrate remains as part of the coating and subclasses 240+ wherein there
    is reactive coating of a metal substrate with an external reactant (e.g.,
    oxygen, etc.) wherein the metal substrate remains as part of the coating.
    Class 148 also takes heat treatment of metallic compositions if during the
    heat treatment there is either a change in the internal physical structure
    (i.e., microstructure) or chemical properties.

    (1)     Note. Since in certain instances metallic compositions could be
    semiconductor material meeting the Class 438 criteria, placement will go to
    Class 438 over Class 148 if the material is identified or perceived as
    semiconductor material.  If perceived, a mandatory cross is made in Class
    148.

    (2)     Note. Reactive coating, per se, of a metal (i.e., not intended to
    be semiconductive) area on a semiconductive substrate (i.e., meeting the
    Class definition of semiconductor substrate under section III, 2, above) is
    original in Class 438. A mandatory cross is made in Class 148 if the only
    step is reactive coating of a metal portion of a semiconductive containing
    substrate.

    (3)     Note. Combination of Class 148 heat treatment of a metal substrate
    to modify or maintain the chemical property or microstructure of the metal
    with (a) additional manufacturing of semiconductor device structure or (b)
    with a Class 438 coating  or etching operation takes the original to Class
    438.



    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, for electroplating see Class
    205 (i.e., which is an integral part of Class 204), and see Class 204
    subclasses 192.1+ for sputter coating operations involving semiconductor
    material or substrates including a semiconductor region, even if the intent
    is to use the semiconductor material for (a) conducting or modifying an
    electrical current,(b) storing electrical energy for subsequent discharge
    within a microelectronic integrated circuit, or (c) converting
    electromagnetic wave energy to electrical energy or electrical energy to
    electromagnetic energy. Class 204 will take combinations of electrolytic or
    sputter coating with other chemical treating operations that involve (a)
    preparatory treatment of the substrate (e.g., etching, cleaning, etc.) or
    (b) subsequent perfecting treatment of the applied coating with the
    following exception noted.

    (1)     Note.  Creation of semiconductor structure (e.g., semiconductor
    active region, semiconductor junction, etc.) by subsequent treatment steps,
    even if limited to the Class 204 applied coating, will go to Class 438.
    Any subsequent operation that affects the substrate is not provided in
    Class 204 and is proper in Class 438. However, heat treatment of the Class
    204 coating that causes interdiffusion limited to the interfacial region to
    perfect the bonding of the coating to the substrate is proper for Class
    204.

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, particularly subclasses 123+, and 157 for
    electrolytic coating operations on semiconductor or semiconductor devices.
    Class 205 is an integral part of Class 204 and follows the definitions
    thereof.

    250,    Radiant energy, for methods not elsewhere provided of (a) using,
    generating, controlling, or detecting radiant energy, (b) combinations
    including such methods, and (c) subcombinations thereof. Particularly, see
    subclasses 492.2+ for processes of irradiation of semiconductor devices
    with no indication as to what occurs to the substrate.  Class 250,
    subclasses 492.2+, generally relates to processes of exposing substrates to
    ion bombardment utilizing apparatus of Class 250 when limited to operating
    the apparatus in apparatus terms.  Class 250 is also the generic home for
    processes of exposing substrates to ion bombardment.  However, Class 438
    provides for ion implantation of semiconductive substrate or substrate
    containing a semiconductive region and also ion implantation throughout the
    material mass to produce semiconductive material or to modify the
    semiconductive material.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions: Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    particularly subclass 183 for a process of neutron bombardment, per se, of
    semiconductive material containing an element which is converted to a
    desired dopant by nuclear transmutation. Any combination of operations that
    goes beyond formation of the transmutated doped semiconductor material, per
    se, goes as original to Class 438 if it meets the criteria of the intent to
    use the electrical properties of the semiconductor in a solid-state device
    as set forth by the Class 438 definition.

    427,    Coating Processes, for coating operations provided for in that
    class, particularly subclasses 457+ for a process of treating a coating
    with radiant energy; subclasses 487+ for polymerization of applied coating
    utilizing direct application of electrical, magnetic, wave, or particulate
    energy; subclasses 523+ for ion plating or ion implanting; subclasses 532+
    for pretreatment of a substrate or posttreatment of a coated substrate
    utilizing electrical, magnetic, wave, or particulate energy; subclasses
    569+ for deposition coating processes utilizing plasma; subclasses 580+ for
    deposition coating processes utilizing electrical discharge; subclass 581
    for coating processes utilizing chemical liquid deposition; subclass 582
    for coating processes utilizing photo-initiated chemical vapor deposition;
    subclasses 585+ for coating processes utilizing chemical vapor deposition;
    subclass 591 for deposition coating utilizing induction or dielectric
    heating; subclasses 592+ for deposition coating utilizing resistance
    heating; subclasses 595+ for deposition coating utilizing electromagnetic
    or particulate radiation; subclasses 598+ for deposition coating utilizing
    magnetic field or force; subclass 600 for deposition coating utilizing
    sonic or ultrasonic energy.

    (1)     Note. Class 438 provides for a specie of Class 427 operations
    involving (a) coating a substrate with a semiconductive material or (b)
    coating a semiconductive substrate or substrate containing a semiconductive
    region; and wherein the intent is to use the electrical properties of the
    semiconductor in a solid state device for at least one of the following
    purposes: (i) conducting or modifying an electrical current, (ii) storing
    electrical energy for subsequent discharge within a microelectronic
    integrated circuit, or (iii) converting electromagnetic wave energy to
    electrical energy or electrical energy to electromagnetic energy.

    (2)     Note.  Generic claims with a sole claimed specie of coating for
    Class 438 goes as original to Class 438. Generic claims with a sole
    disclosed specie of coating for Class 438 goes as original in Class 438.
    Generic claims with plural claimed coating species wherein at least one of
    the claimed species does not belong in Class 438 goes as original in Class
    427. Generic claims with plural disclosed coating species one of which does
    not belong in Class 438 goes to Class 427 as original. Generic claims with
    no material species claimed or disclosed goes as original in Class 427.

            When there is no generic claim and plural separately claimed
    coating specie, wherein at least one claim of which is Class 427 and one
    claim of which is Class 438, placement goes as original to Class 438 with a
    mandatory cross-reference to 427.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, particularly for initial lithographic processes in semiconductor
    manufacture limited to (a) exposure imaging and developing and including
    preparatory operations to the exposure (e.g., as coating to form the
    resist, etc.) or (b) developing, per se, of subject matter of Class 430
    substrates. When Class 430 exposure, imaging or developing are combined
    with etching or coating of a semiconductor substrate for purposes other
    than masking and commensurate with the Class 438 definition for manufacture
    of a semiconductor device as set forth hereinabove, the combination goes as
    original to Class 438 with the following exception noted.

    (1)     Note.  Since Class 430 provides for processes of (a) coating, per
    se, of substrates, with a composition to produce a product to be used for
    electric or magnetic imagery and (b) processes of coating, per se, of
    substrate with a photosensitive composition for use in radiation imagery,
    coating or etching of semiconductor material limited to forming a product
    intended to be used for electric, magnetic, or radiation imagery is
    original in Class 430.

    (2)     Note.  Although technically classifiable as an original in Class
    438 according to the above paragraph, any multistep process involving
    significant Class 430 operations as a subcombination of the overall process
    should be cross-referenced to Class 430.

    B.      Unit etching operations and combined etching operations in Class 438

            The following search notes are intended to clarify the lines and
    distinctions for determining when an etching unit operation is provided for
    in Class 438. Throughout this class, the term "etching" is used in the
    generic sense to include the removal of a surface by chemical reaction or
    solvent action regardless of the composition thereof.

            The unit etching operations in Class 438 may be viewed as a specie
    of a Class 216 process which was removed intact from Class 216 and
    transferred to Class 438 for the convenience of the searcher. Thus, plural
    step operations that were acceptable in Class 216 are now acceptable in
    Class 438 if the criteria for the semiconductor material as set forth
    hereinabove is met.  Etching operations which do not meet the Class 438
    definition may be classified in the following classes:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, especially subclasses 1.2
    and 1.3 for processes for cleaning a semiconductor substrate including the
    application of electrical or wave energy to the substrate.

    (1)     Note.  If the undesirable material to be removed from the
    semiconductor substrate resides other than on the surface thereof, the
    process is to be considered gettering of the substrate and thus is proper
    for Class 438.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, particularly see subclasses
    192.32+, for sputter etching operations on semiconductor material and
    semiconductor containing substrates; even if the semiconductor is intended
    for electrical purposes.  Simultaneous sputter etching and chemical etching
    (e.g., as when utilizing a mixture of argon and halide gas, etc.) go as
    original in Class 204.

    (1)     Note. Creation of semiconductor structure, (e.g., semiconductor
    active region, semiconductor junction, etc.) by steps subsequent to sputter
    etching will go to Class 438.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, particularly subclasses 656 for electrolytic
    erosion of a workpiece of nonuniform internal electrical characteristics.
    Class 205 is an integral part of Class 204 and follows the definitions
    thereof.

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, for chemical etching processes and
    perfecting operations therefor, including lithographic steps, of
    semiconductor material that is to be utilized for nonelectrical properties.

    (1)     Note.  This class provides for a species of Class 216 operations
    involving etching a semiconductive substrate or etching a substrate
    containing a semiconductive region; wherein the intent is to use the
    electrical properties of the semiconductor in a solid-state device for at
    least one of the following purposes: (a) conducting or modifying an
    electrical current, (b) storing electrical energy for subsequent discharge
    within a microelectronic integrated circuit, or (c) converting
    electromagnetic wave energy to electrical energy or electrical energy to
    electromagnetic energy.


    (2)     Note.  Generic claims with a sole claimed specie of etching for
    Class 216 goes as original to Class 216. Generic claims with a sole
    disclosed specie of etching for Class 438 goes as original in Class 438.
    Generic claims with plural claimed etching specie wherein at least one of
    the claimed species does not belong in Class 438 goes as original in Class
    216. Generic claims with plural disclosed etching specie one of which does
    not belong in Class 438 goes to Class 216 as original. Generic claims with
    no material specie claimed or disclosed goes as original in Class 216.

            When there is no generic claim and plural separately claimed
    etching specie, wherein at least one claim of which is Class 216 and one
    claim of which is Class 438, placement goes as original to Class 438 with a
    mandatory cross-reference to Class 216.

    250,    Radiant Energy, for methods not elsewhere provided, of (a) using,
    generating, controlling, or detecting radiant energy, (b) combinations
    including such methods, and (c) subcombinations thereof. Particularly, see
    subclasses 492.2+ for processes of irradiation of semiconductor devices
    with no indication as to what occurs to the substrate.  Class 250
    subclasses 492.2+, generally relates to processes of exposing substrates to
    ion bombardment utilizing apparatus of Class 250 when limited to operating
    the apparatus in apparatus terms.  Class 250 is also the generic home for
    processes of exposing substrates to ion bombardment.  However, Class 438
    takes chemically reactive ion etching of semiconductive substrate or
    substrate containing semiconductive region.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, particularly for initial lithographic processes in semiconductor
    manufacture limited to (a) exposure imaging and developing and including
    preparatory operations to the exposure (e.g., as coating to form the
    resist, etc.) or (b) developing, per se, of subject matter of Class 430
    substrates. When Class 430 exposure imaging or developing are combined with
    etching or coating of a semiconductor substrate commensurate with the Class
    438 definition for manufacture of a semiconductor device as set forth
    hereinabove, the combination goes as original to Class 438 with the
    following exception noted.

    (1)     Note. Since Class 430 provides for processes of (a) coating, per
    se, of substrates, with a composition to produce a product to be used for
    electric or magnetic imagery and (b) processes of coating per se of
    substrate with a photosensitive composition for use in radiation imagery,
    coating or etching of semiconductor material limited to forming a product
    intended to be used for electric, magnetic, or radiation imagery is
    original in Class 430.

    (2)     Note. Although technically classifiable as an original in Class 438
    according to the above paragraph, any multistep process involving
    significant Class 430 operations as a subcombination of the overall process
    should be cross-referenced to Class 430.

    C.      Packaging (e.g., with mounting, encapsulating, etc.) or treatment
    of packaged semiconductor

            Packaging is a semiconductor art manufacturing term for
    integration, assembly, or surrounding of a semiconductive substrate (e.g.,
    chip, die, etc.) with a permanent encasement, housing, capsule, or support.
    This is distinguished from package making found in Class 53 which is
    directed to preparing a manufactured product for passage through the
    channels of trade in a safe, convenient, and attractive condition, usually
    wrapped in a cover or in a container which is intended to be removed when
    the manufactured product is used.

            Class 438 takes the following packaging or packaging related
    operations, if not elsewhere provided: (a) multiple operations having a
    step of permanently attaching or securing a semiconductive substrate to a
    terminal, elongated conductor, or support (e.g., mounting, housing, lead
    frame, discrete heat sink, etc.), (b) multiple operations having a step of
    shaping flowable plastic or flowable insulative material about a
    semiconductive substrate, or (c) a step of treating an already packaged
    semiconductor substrate (e.g., coating, etching, etc.).

            However, other manufacturing classes have established historic
    lines with Class 438 that must be considered when determining proper
    placement. These lines with external classes revolve around such concepts
    as:  whether there is significant semiconductor device structure, whether
    there is a unit operation or a so-called "multi-step" operation, etc. The
    following notes are intended to clarify these established lines and to
    alert the searcher to other classes for related searches:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, especially subclasses 729+ for electrical device
    manufacturing apparatus, subclasses 829+ for the assembly of electrical
    components to an insulative base having a conductive path applied thereto,
    or formed thereon or therein (e.g., a printed circuit board).

    (1)     Note. When Class 438 coating (see B above) or etching operations
    (see C above) are not included, Class 29, subclasses 825+, following
    historical precedence, provides for processes of mounting, packaging,
    molding, or encapsulating of semiconductors having no significant
    semiconductor chip structure (e.g., merely recited as semiconductor chip,
    per se, etc.) when not elsewhere provided. If there is no significant chip
    structure, Class 29 takes as original (a) adhesive bonding combined with
    specified metal shaping steps or (b) adhesive bonding combined with
    mechanical joining, either broad or specific.

    (2)     Note. Multistep processes for packaging  semiconductors having no
    significant semiconductor chip structure are proper for Class 156 when they
    claim: (a) adhesive bonding combined with shaping of nonmetals; (b)
    adhesive bonding combined with broad or nominally claimed metal shaping
    steps; or (c) adhesive bonding including steps for assembling the parts to
    be bonded are proper in Class 156.


    53,     Package making, for passage through the channels of trade in a
    safe, convenient, and attractive condition, usually wrapped in a cover or
    in a container.  In this context of trade, Class 53 provides for methods
    of: (a) encompassing, encasing, or completely surrounding goods or
    materials with a cover made from sheet stock, (b) partially encasing or
    surrounding goods and materials by a partial cover made from sheet stock,
    (c) assembling or securing a separate closure to an aperture of a preformed
    receptacle to complete encasement of contents, (d) depositing articles and
    arranging fluent materials in preformed receptacles, (e) partial or
    complete shaping of a cover about an article, and other related package
    making processes.

    (1)     Note: If it cannot be perceived (a) whether the process is package
    making or (b) whether the process is manufacturing of a semiconductor
    device within or attached to a container, case, lead frame, heat sink, or
    enclosure as an integral part of the manufactured product; placement goes
    to Class 438 and Class 53 may be cross-referenced.

      65,   Glass Manufacturing, for processes of melting, shaping or forming,
    joining, or heat treating of glass.  Glass is defined in the Class 65
    definitions (section II, A) as an inorganic material generally including a
    glass former and having specific characteristics provided in the
    definition. Included in Class 65 is joining, per se, of glass to metal or
    glass.

    (1)     Note. Class 438 takes packaging or the packaging-related operation
    of semiconductor devices when glass melting, glass shaping, glass forming,
    or glass heat treating is combined with any coating, adhesive bonding,
    metal casting, metal working, or deforming, metal fusion bonding or other
    chemical manufacturing operation.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    subclasses 60+ for a process of adhesively bonding.

    (1)     Note. Multistep processes for packaging  semiconductors having no
    significant semiconductor chip structure are proper for Class 156 when they
    claim (a) adhesive bonding combined with shaping of nonmetals, (b) adhesive
    bonding combined with broad or nominally claimed metal-shaping steps, or
    (c) adhesive bonding including steps for assembling the parts to be bonded
    are proper in Class 156.

    (2)     Note. An adhesive bonding unit operation for packaging or mounting
    operations on semiconductor devices goes as original to Class 156.

    (3)     Note. Adhesive bonding combined with Class 438 coating of a
    semiconductor substrate or Class 438 etching of a semiconductor substrate
    places the original in Class 438.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, appropriate subclasses for a process of
    fusion bonding and additional operations which are considered to be
    ancillary to the bonding (preheating, positioning, pretinning, etc.) of a
    semiconductive substrate; especially note subclasses 123.1 and 179.1+.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes, for
    a process (and steps perfecting same) of forming a composite by shaping a
    plastic or nonmetallic wherein a semiconducting containing preform is
    within a mold during the shaping operation (e.g., encapsulating, etc.).

    D.      Line notes to other manufacturing operations

            The following lines clarify the relationship of other chemical
    classes to Class 438.  For many of the chemical classes, inclusion of metal
    casting, working or deforming, or fusion bonding step is not acceptable if
    combined with an operation of the chemical class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, for processes of melting, shaping or forming,
    joining, or heat treating of glass.  Glass is defined in the Class 65
    definitions (section II, A) as an inorganic material generally including a
    glass former and having specific characteristics provided in the
    definition.  It is noted that both silica and elemental silicon are also
    included for Class 65.  Thus, melting, shaping, or fusion bonding of
    silicon dioxide, per se, or silicon, per se, is also considered proper for
    Class 65. Class 65 also takes combined operations whether preparatory or
    subsequent to the melting, shaping or forming, joining or heat treating of
    glass.  Included in Class 65 is joining, per se, of glass to metal,
    spinning, per se, of glass fibers or joining through glass melting, per se,
    of glass fibers to substrates such as semiconductor substrates.


    (1)     Note.  Class 438, as the exception, takes the combination of Class
    438 unit coating operation or Class 438 unit etching operation with glass
    melting, shaping or forming, joining, or heat treating.  Moreover, Class
    438 also takes the heat treating, per se, of Class 438 semiconductor
    material if for purposes of modifying the electrical properties thereof.
    Class 438 takes the mounting or packaging operation of semiconductor
    devices when glass melting, glass shaping, glass forming, or glass heat
    treating is combined with any coating, adhesive bonding, metal casting,
    metal working, or deforming, metal fusion bonding or other chemical
    manufacturing operation.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, particularly subclasses
    334+ for synthesis of material, such as silicon, by passing an electrical
    current through a fused material.  See section III, A, above for Class 204
    or Class 205 coating or section III, B, above for Class 204 etching and the
    line to Class 438.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    particularly subclass 330 for processes of manufacturing from high
    temperature (i.e., above 30 degrees Kelvin) superconductive material (a)
    superconductor devices or (b) semiconductor devices having superconductive
    components or connect lines.

    E.      Location of semiconductor compound, composition, or stock

            Class 438 does not provide for compound, composition, or stock
    material produced or utilized by a Class 438 process. A process of
    manufacture or use of a compound or composition is usually classified with
    the compound or composition. The process of manufacturing a semiconductor
    compound or composition and the formation of a semiconductor device or
    semiconductor junction takes combined operations to Class 438.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions: Coating or Plastic, subclasses 1.05+ for
    metal-deposition or substrate-sensitizing compositions; subclasses 286.1+
    for inorganic materials only containing at least one metal atom; subclass
    286.8 for inorganic materials only; subclasses 287.1+ for silicon
    containing other than solely as silicon dioxide as a part of an
    aluminum-containing compound, and subclasses 400+ for materials or
    ingredients.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 33.1+ for semiconductor stock which
    must be essentially homogeneous and have at least two contiguous layers
    differing in the number of unbound electrons and/or differing in energy gap
    levels, which exhibit a junction between the layers.

    252,    Compositions, for (a) subclasses 62.3+ for semiconductor
    compositions which have been uniformly doped or otherwise specialized for
    use as one layer which when combined with another such layer would provide
    an interface exhibiting barrier layer properties (e.g., as exists in Class
    148, subclasses 33 through 33.6, stock wherein there is a semiconductor
    junction, etc.) and (b) subclasses 500+ for electrical conductive
    compositions. Also see the cross-reference art collection in Class 252,
    subclasses 950+, for doping agent source materials.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Composition, for alloys or metallic compositions
    that may also exhibit semiconductor properties (e.g., gallium arsenide,
    etc.).

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses for
    inorganic compounds or elements used in the manufacture of semiconductor
    devices.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for semiconductor stock material defined in terms of composition and
    structure, especially subclass 620.

    501,    Compositions: Ceramic, appropriate subclasses for ceramic
    compositions used in semiconductor devices.

    F.      Line to heating classes

            Class 438, Semiconductor Device Manufacturing:  Process, will take
    the process of (a) heating of semiconductor material to modify the
    microstructure or electrical properties thereof, (b) combined operations
    involving heating of semiconductor material to modify the semiconductor
    structure or electrical properties when not provided in another class, or
    (c) heating of semiconductor substrates that affects only the
    nonsemiconductor region of the substrate when combined with other
    operations acceptable to Class 438 or combined with the establishment of
    device structure (e.g., connects, insulating regions, electrodes, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, for processes of heat treating metals.  Class 148
    takes heat treatment of metallic compositions if during the heat treatment
    there is either a change in the internal physical structure (i.e.,
    microstructure) or chemical properties. Since in certain instances metallic
    compositions could be semiconductor material meeting the Class 438
    criteria, placement will go to Class 438 over Class 148 if the material is
    identified or perceived as semiconductor material.  If perceived, a
    mandatory cross is made in Class 148.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 78.01+ for a process and apparatus for
    bonding by electrical current and pressure, and appropriate subclasses for
    electric heating of material, per se.  However, inclusion of the criteria
    for Class 438 as set forth hereinabove takes the original to Class 438 even
    when electric heating is involved.

    250,    Radiant Energy, for heating invisible radiant energy; subject
    matter of Class 438, per se, when no function other than heating is
    attributed to the process and for methods not elsewhere provided, of (a)
    using, generating, controlling, or detecting radiant energy, (b)
    combinations including such methods, and (c) subcombinations thereof.
    Particularly, see subclasses 492.2+ for processes of ion bombardment or
    irradiation of semiconductor devices, with no indication as to what occurs
    to the substrate.

    432,    Heating, for generic heating processes. However, inclusion of the
    criteria for Class 438 as set forth hereinabove takes the original to Class
    438 even when generic heating is involved.

    G.      Line notes to electrical classes

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity: Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 15.1 through
    16.3 for fluid cooling of electrical conductors or insulator, subclasses
    52.1+, for housings with electric devices or mounting means, and subclasses
    250 through 268 for printed circuit devices.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    for active solid-state electronic device structure, per se. Subject matter
    may include one or more such devices combined with contacts or leads, or
    structures configured to be tested on a semiconductor chip, or merely
    semiconductor material without contacts or leads where the sole disclosed
    use is an active solid-state device. This subject matter does not include
    active solid-state devices combined with significant circuits.

    361,    Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 679+ for
    housings and mounting assemblies for electronic devices and components, and
    subclasses 736+ and 752+ for modules for printed circuits or housing or
    chassis for printed circuit boards.

    364,    Electrical Computers And Data Processing Systems, especially
    subclass 468.28 for methods of production or design of semiconductor
    devices or integrated circuits wherein a data processing system or
    calculating computer controls a specific manufacturing step, condition, or
    workpiece, and subclasses 490+ for the design and analysis of integrated
    circuits.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions: Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclasses 320+ for the direct conversion of the energy produced in a
    nuclear reaction into an electrical output by a one-step process or
    apparatus for accomplishing such a one-step process.

    378,    X-ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, especially subclasses 34+
    for X-ray or gamma-ray lithography.

    382,    Image Analysis, especially subclass 145 for a process limited to
    image analysis per se in manufacturing of an integrated circuit. However,
    inclusion of subject matter for Class 438 remains with Class 438 even if
    there is a step of image analysis.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, particularly, subclass 14 for a laser in
    integrated optical circuit, subclasses 129+ for a planar optical waveguide,
    and subclasses 141+ for a waveguide having a particular optical
    characteristic modifying chemical composition.  The (13) Note of Class 385
    indicates that miscellaneous manufacturing of optical wave guide devices
    not elsewhere provided are in Class 385.  Thus, if the manufactured article
    is a semiconductor device, a Class 438 process controls over the Class 385
    process even if an optical fiber is part of the device.

    429,    Chemistry: Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process, especially subclass 7 for a combination including a nonbattery
    electrical component electrically connected within a cell casing other than
    testing or indicating components.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for features related
    or analogous to electrical contact or housing features of active
    solid-state devices (e.g., subclasses 271+ for sealing elements or
    subclasses 449+ for stress relief means for conductor to terminal joint.


CLS 438/1
TXT HAVING BIOMATERIAL COMPONENT OR INTEGRATED WITH LIVING ORGANISM:

    Process under the class definition for making an electrical device
    utilizing a semiconductor substrate which contains a component identical to
    material found in a living organism or is integrated with a living organism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, for a method of treatment of a living body or organism.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process, subclass 2 for subject matter under the class definition having
    living matter (e.g., microorganism, etc.).


CLS 438/2
TXT HAVING SUPERCONDUCTIVE COMPONENT:

    Process under the class definition for producing an electrical device
    utilizing a semiconductor substrate having an electrically conductive
    component which at temperatures of less than or equal to 30K is able to
    conduct electricity in the absence of resistance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 25.01+ for manufacturing a
    nonsemiconductor-type barrier layer device and subclass 599 for a method of
    mechanical manufacture of a superconductor electrical device.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 30+ for an active solid-state device in which the active layer
    through which carrier tunnelling occurs has a lower conductivity than the
    material adjacent thereto, especially subclasses 31+ for Josephson junction
    devices, and subclasses 661+ for a superconductive contact or lead.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 107 for superconductive element and
    tunnelling element oscillators.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 62+ for a process of coating, per se,
    wherein the product is a superconductive electrical device.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    particularly subclass 330 for a process of manufacturing a semiconductor
    electrical device having a superconductive component possessing an
    operating temperature greater than 30K and subclass 923 for a process of
    making a semiconductor electrical device having a superconductive component
    possessing an operating temperature of less than 30K.


CLS 438/3
TXT HAVING MAGNETIC OR FERROELECTRIC COMPONENT:

    Process under the class definition for making an electrical device wherein
    the semiconductor substrate has integral therewith a component with recited
    magnetic or ferroelectric properties.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

     48,    for a process of manufacturing an electrical device or circuit
    utilizing a semiconductor substrate, said device or circuit being
    responsive to an external magnetic signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclass 295 for an insulated gate field effect transistor having a
    ferroelectric material layer.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 127+ for coating a magnetic base or
    coating a base with a magnetic material.


CLS 438/4
TXT REPAIR OR RESTORATION:

    Process under the class definition for the renewal, reconstruction, or
    refurbishment of the previously possessed electrical or mechanical
    properties of a semiconductor electrical device which have become degraded.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes patents to a process of removing and
    replacing a defective chip from a package as well as a process of repair of
    defective electrical conduct paths (e.g., wirings).


CLS 438/5
TXT INCLUDING CONTROL RESPONSIVE TO SENSED CONDITION:

    Process under the class definition including the step of regulating an
    operation by detecting a characteristic or a change in a characteristic of
    the process or the semiconductor substrate acted upon and by implementing
    an action in the process based upon the detected characteristic or change
    therein.

    (1)     Note.  There must be a positive action carried out in response to
    the detected characteristic or change therein which furthers the
    semiconductor substrate toward its subsequent indented utilization.  Thus,
    the removal of defective devices or substrates from a manufacturing process
    flow (e.g., by sorting, etc.) or the identification of same (e.g., by
    inking, etc.) is not deemed to be a positive action proper for this
    subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, especially
    subclasses 552+ for methods sensing a condition of an item and controlling
    the separation in accordance therewith.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, for control responsive indicating
    systems not having structural details, especially subclass 653 for
    electronic circuit or component and subclasses 657+ for electrical
    characteristic.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 184+
    for testing of process control systems.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 201 for testing
    of memory systems.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, for
    diagnostic testing, per se.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclasses 28+ for error checking of pulse counters.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 180+ for
    reliability and availability, fault recovery, locating and avoidance,
    diagnostic testing or monitoring of a digital processing system for
    reliability purpose.


CLS 438/6
TXT Interconnecting plural devices on semiconductor substrate:

    Process under subclass 5 for electrically connecting multiple electrical
    devices on a monolithic semiconductive substrate to establish a desired
    circuit pattern (e.g., wiring, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128,    for a process of forming an array of electrical devices and
    selectively interconnecting the devices to produce a desired electrical
    circuit.


CLS 438/7
TXT Optical characteristic sensed:

    Process under subclass 5 wherein the sensed condition is an optical
    property of the device or an optical property of the process.

    (1)     Note.  Optical aligning, per se, is not deemed to be a control
    responsive operation for the purposes of this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 86+ for manufacturing wherein a picture
    signal generator (i.e., television camera) is utilized for monitoring a
    manufacturing operation.

    356,    Optics: Measuring and Testing, for optical alignment processes.

    382,    Image Analysis, for methods for the automated analysis of an image
    or recognition of a pattern, including measuring significant
    characteristics of the image or pattern.


CLS 438/8
TXT Chemical etching:

    Process under subclass 7 having a step of chemically etching the
    semiconductor substrate in conjunction with the sensing of an optical
    property of the process or of the semiconductor device.


CLS 438/9
TXT Plasma etching:

    Process under subclass 8 wherein the chemical etching step utilizes an
    ionized chemically reactive gas to etch the semiconductor substrate.


CLS 438/10
TXT Electrical characteristic sensed:

    Process under subclass 5 wherein the sensed condition is an electrical
    property of the device or an electrical property of the process.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, especially
    subclasses 571+ for methods of electrical testing thereby sensing a
    property of an item to facilitate subsequent separation.


CLS 438/11
TXT Utilizing integral test element:

    Process under subclass 10 wherein the electrical property is sensed
    utilizing a specific test structure integral to the semiconductor substrate
    and which has no other function in the completed device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclass 48 for test or calibration structures provided on active
    solid-state devices to permit or facilitate the measurement, test, or
    calibration of the characteristics of the devices.


CLS 438/12
TXT And removal of defect:

    Process under subclass 10 wherein a defect detected by the electrical
    sensing step is thereafter removed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for a process of repairing or restoring the previously possessed
    electrical or mechanical properties of a semiconductor electrical device
    which have become degraded.


CLS 438/13
TXT Altering electrical property by material removal:

    Process under subclass 10 whereby following or as a result of the
    electrical sensing step, an electrical property of the semiconductor
    substrate is altered by a material removal step (e.g., by etching).


CLS 438/14
TXT WITH MEASURING OR TESTING:

    Process under the class definition having combined therewith a step of
    measuring or testing a condition of the process or of the device made
    thereby.

    (1)     Note.  Processes having at least one step proper for the class and
    combined therewith a step of electrical aging or burn-in are classified
    herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, especially
    subclasses 571+ for methods of electrical testing thereby sensing a
    property of an item to facilitate subsequent separation.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 306+ for inspection of solids or liquids
    by charged particles, and subclass 371 for invisible radiant energy
    responsive methods using semiconductor devices.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, for per se electrical
    measuring, especially subclass 71.5 for determining a nonelectrical
    property of a semiconductor by measuring an electrical property, subclass
    451 for determining a material property using thermoelectric phenomenon,
    subclasses 500+ for fault detecting in electrical circuits and of
    electrical components, and subclass 719 for semiconductor materials quality
    determination using conductivity effects.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, especially subclass 57 for thermal
    testing of susceptibility to thermally induced deterioration, flaw, etc.,
    and subclass 178 for thermal measuring utilizing a barrier layer (e.g.,
    semiconductive junction) sensing element.


CLS 438/15
TXT Packaging (e.g., with mounting, encapsulating, etc.) or treatment of
    packaged semiconductor:

    Process under subclass 14 provided including (a) multiple operations having
    a step of permanently attaching or securing a semiconductive substrate to a
    terminal, elongated conductor or support (e.g., a mounting, housing, lead
    frame, discrete heat sink, etc.), (b) multiple operations having a step of
    shaping flowable plastic or flowable insulative material about a
    semiconductive substrate, or (c) a step of treating an already mounted or
    packaged semiconductor substrate (e.g., coating of flowable plastic or
    flowable insulative material about a semiconductor substrate by dipping,
    etc.).


CLS 438/16
TXT Optical characteristic sensed:

    Process under subclass 14 wherein the sensed condition is an optical
    characteristic of the process or of the device made thereby.

    (1)     Note.  Optical aligning per se is not deemed to be a measurement of
    an optical characteristic and as such would not bring original
    classification to this subclass solely based on that claimed feature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 86+ for manufacturing wherein a picture
    signal generator (i.e., television camera) is utilized for monitoring a
    manufacturing operation.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, for optical alignment processes.

    382,    Image Analysis, especially subclasses 141+, for a manufacturing
    process using image analysis, aligning images/masks, or pattern recognition.


CLS 438/17
TXT Electrical characteristic sensed:

    Process under subclass 14 wherein the sensed condition is an electrical
    characteristic of the process or of the device made thereby.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, for per se electrical
    measuring, especially subclass 71.5 for determining a nonelectrical
    property of a semiconductor by measuring an electrical property, subclass
    451 for determining a material property using thermoelectric phenomenon,
    subclasses 500+ for fault detecting in electrical circuits and of
    electrical components, and subclass 719 for semiconductor materials quality
    determination using conductivity effects.


CLS 438/18
TXT Utilizing integral test element:

    Process under subclass 17 wherein the electrical property is sensed
    utilizing a specific test structure integral to the semiconductor substrate
    and which has no other function in the completed device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclass 48 for test or calibration structures provided on active
    solid-state devices to permit or facilitate the measurement, test, or
    calibration of the characteristics of the devices.


CLS 438/19
TXT HAVING INTEGRAL POWER SOURCE (E.G., BATTERY, ETC.):

    Process under the class definition for making a semiconductor electrical
    device having therewith an integral  structure capable of chemically or
    radioactively generating electrical power.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclass 202 for
    apparatus wherein nuclear energy other than that resulting from an induced
    nuclear reaction is used as a heat source for the generator or comprising a
    thermoelectric device designed to be employed as an ancillary unit in a
    nuclear reactor system.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 303 for the
    combination of a semiconductor junction and a radioactive source which
    radiates the semiconductor material and thus generates a source of current
    for an external load.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclasses 320+ for the direct conversion of the energy produced in a
    nuclear reaction into an electrical output by a one-step process or
    apparatus for accomplishing such one-step process.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process, especially subclass 7 for a combination including a nonbattery
    electrical component electrically connected within a cell casing other than
    testing or indicating components.


CLS 438/20
TXT ELECTRON EMITTER MANUFACTURE:

    Process under the class definition for manufacturing a structure which
    gives off electrons into free space utilizing a semiconductor substrate.

    (1)     Note.  Some materials may variously be conductive, semiconductive,
    or insulative.  See section A. above for an expansion of what comprises a
    semiconductor substrate for the purposes of this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclass 254 for a
    photoemissive photoelectric cell.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 10+ for devices having a low workfunction layer for electron
    emission.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, especially subclass 346 for
    cathodes containing or coated with electron emissive material, subclasses
    499+ for subject matter under the class definition having semiconductor
    depletion layer-type luminescent material, and subclass 546 for
    photosensitive photocathodes.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 74+ for coating processes which
    result in a photoelectric or photovoltaic product (e.g., a photocathode)
    which is responsive to visible, infrared, or ultraviolet illumination by
    (a) emitting electrons, (b) generating an electromotive force, or by (c)
    varying electrical conductivity.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    for a process of manufacturing a nonsemiconductive-type space discharge
    device.


CLS 438/21
TXT MANUFACTURE OF ELECTRICAL DEVICE CONTROLLED PRINTHEAD:

    Process under the class definition for manufacturing from a semiconductor
    substrate an electrical device utilized for the transfer to another surface
    of an imprint or mark which transfer is regulated by the electrical device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 890.1 for fluid pattern dispersion device
    manufacture (e.g., ink jet manufacture).

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, subclasses 1+ for ink
    jet marking apparatus, subclasses 159+ for electrical discharge marking
    apparatus, subclasses 163+ for electrochemical marking apparatus, and
    subclasses 171+ for thermal marking apparatus.


CLS 438/22
TXT MAKING DEVICE OR CIRCUIT EMISSIVE OF NONELECTRICAL SIGNAL:

    Process under the class definition for making a semiconductor electrical
    device or circuit which is emissive of a nonelectrical output during
    operation.

    (1)     Note.  The nonelectrical signal serving as input stimulus to the
    device or circuit may be described as an information carrying wave.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 13, 79 through 103, and 918 for incoherent light emitting
    injection luminescent devices.

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, for coherent light emissive devices, in
    particular subclasses 43 through 50 for a semiconductive laser device and
    subclass 75 for semiconductor optical laser pump devices.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 311+ for electrical device manufacture involving
    photolithography, and subclass 321 for nonelectro-optic device manufacture
    involving photolithography.


CLS 438/23
TXT Having diverse electrical device:

    Process under subclass 22 for manufacturing a circuit composed of a
    plurality of electrical devices integrated on a common substrate or chip of
    monolithic construction, at least one of the devices being emissive of
    nonelectrical signal.


CLS 438/24
TXT Including device responsive to nonelectrical signal:

    Process under subclass 23 for making a circuit comprising a combination of
    a device emissive of nonelectrical signal and a device responsive to
    nonelectrical signal integrated onto a common substrate or chip of
    monolithic or hybrid construction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, especially subclasses 406+ for process of
    glass bonding an optical fiber to a substrate.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 551 for signal isolators, including
    optically coupled light emitters and semiconductor light receivers.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 80 through 85 for an incoherent light emitter coupled to an
    active solid-state light responsive device, per se.

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, for coherent light emissive devices, in
    particular subclasses 43 through 50 for a semiconductive laser device and
    subclass 75 for semiconductor optical laser pump devices.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, subclass 14 for a laser in integrated optical
    circuit, subclasses 129+ for a planar optical waveguide, and subclasses
    141+ for a waveguide having a particular optical characteristic modifying
    chemical composition.


CLS 438/25
TXT Packaging (e.g., with mounting, encapsulating, etc.) or treatment of
    packaged semiconductor:

    Process under subclass 24 including (a) multiple operations having a step
    of permanently attaching or securing a semiconductive substrate to a
    terminal, elongated conductor or support (e.g., a mounting, housing, lead
    frame, discrete heat sink, etc.), (b) multiple operations having a step of
    shaping flowable plastic or flowable insulative material about a
    semiconductive substrate, or (c) a step of treating an already mounted or
    packaged semiconductor substrate (e.g., coating of flowable plastic or
    flowable insulative material about a semiconductor substrate by dipping,
    etc.).


CLS 438/26
TXT Packaging (e.g., with mounting, encapsulating, etc.) or treatment of
    packaged semiconductor:

    Process under subclass 22 including (a) multiple operations having a step
    of permanently attaching or securing a semiconductive substrate to a
    terminal, elongated conductor or support (e.g., a mounting, housing, lead
    frame, discrete heat sink, etc.), (b) multiple operations having a step of
    shaping flowable plastic or flowable insulative material about a
    semiconductive substrate, or (c) a step of treating an already mounted or
    packaged semiconductor substrate (e.g., coating of flowable plastic or
    flowable insulative material about a semiconductor substrate by dipping,
    etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for a process of packaging (e.g., with mounting, encapsulating,
    etc.) or treating a packaged semiconductor device responsive to
    electromagnetic radiation.

    106,    for a process of packaging (e.g., with mounting, encapsulating,
    etc.) or treating a packaged semiconductor device.


CLS 438/27
TXT Having additional optical element (e.g., optical fiber, etc.):

    Process under subclass 26 for making a semiconductor device wherein the
    device has combined therewith one or more separate optical elements to
    transmit or modify electromagnetic radiation incident from the
    semiconductor device and wherein the optical element is affixed or joined
    to the semiconductor device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, especially subclass 406 for processes which
    involve assembling at least two individually distinct optical fibers,
    waveguides, or preforms directly to each other (e.g., coupling, etc.)

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 902 for
    optical coupling to a semiconductor.


CLS 438/28
TXT Plural emissive devices:

    Process under subclass 26 for making a collection or grouping of multiple
    devices emissive of a nonelectrical signal in a single coherent monolith.


CLS 438/29
TXT Including integrally formed optical element (e.g., reflective layer,
    luminescent material, contoured surface, etc.):

    Process under subclass 22 for making a semiconductor device wherein the
    device has combined therewith one or more optical elements to transmit or
    modify electromagnetic radiation incident from the semiconductor device.


CLS 438/30
TXT Liquid crystal component:

    Process under subclass 29 for making a semiconductor device wherein the
    additional optical element is a substance, usually organic with at least
    one polarizable group, capable of unidirectional molecular alignment in
    layers, giving rise to optical bifringement.

    (1)     Note.  Liquid crystals, on variation in pressure, temperature,
    electric current passing therethrough, etc., change their colors or light
    transmitting ability, the cholesteric type changing colors while the
    nematic-type changes between transparency and opacity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 87+ for a display
    element control system for liquid crystal display elements arranged in a
    matrix configuration.

    349,    Liquid Crystal Cells, Elements and Systems, particularly subclasses
    187+ for nominal manufacturing methods or postmanufacturing processing of
    liquid crystal cells.


CLS 438/31
TXT Optical waveguide structure:

    Process under subclass 29 for making a semiconductor device wherein the
    additional optical element is an optical conduit for the transmission of
    light energy.


CLS 438/32
TXT Optical grating structure:

    Process under subclass 29 for making a semiconductor device wherein the
    additional optical element is a periodic latticework or screen composed of
    lines producing a series of spectra by the dispersion of the radiation
    emitted from the device.


CLS 438/33
TXT Substrate dicing:

    Process under subclass 22 having a step of dividing the semiconductor
    substrate into plural separate bodies.

    (1)     Note.  The dicing may be done by any manner, such as abrading,
    sawing, etching, cleavage, or a combination thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, for generic processes of cutting a substrate into discrete
    individual units.

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, subclasses 1+ for methods.

    451,    Abrading, for a process of dicing by abrading.


CLS 438/34
TXT Making emissive array:

    Process under subclass 22 for making a collection or grouping of multiple
    devices emissive of nonelectrical signal in a single semiconductor
    substrate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for a process of packaging (e.g., with mounting, encapsulating,
    etc.) plural emissive devices into a coherent monolith.


CLS 438/35
TXT Multiple wavelength emissive:

    Process under subclass 34 wherein the array is emissive of plural
    electromagnetic wavelengths.


CLS 438/36
TXT Ordered or disordered:

    Process under subclass 22 for making a semiconductor device wherein a
    compound semiconductor region is ordered or disordered.


CLS 438/37
TXT Graded composition:

    Process under subclass 22 wherein the chemical composition of a
    semiconductor region of the substrate varies with location within the
    semiconductive region.


CLS 438/38
TXT Passivating of surface:

    Process under subclass 22 having a step of making the surface of the
    semiconductor substrate less chemically or optically active.


CLS 438/39
TXT Mesa formation:

    Process under subclass 22 having a step of removing material from the
    semiconductor substrate to form a raised feature relative to the
    surrounding regions of the substrate.


CLS 438/40
TXT Tapered etching:

    Process under subclass 39 wherein the material removal step is by etching
    the substrate to form a mesa with nonparallel sides.


CLS 438/41
TXT With epitaxial deposition of semiconductor adjacent mesa:

    Process under subclass 39 including a step of epitaxial growth of
    semiconductor material on the portion of the substrate adjacent the mesa.


CLS 438/42
TXT Groove formation:

    Process under subclass 22 having a step of removing material from the
    semiconductor substrate to form a recessed feature (e.g., trench, notch,
    etc.) relative to the surrounding regions of the substrate.


CLS 438/43
TXT Tapered etching:

    Process under subclass 42 wherein the material removal step is by etching
    the substrate to form a groove with nonparallel sides.


CLS 438/44
TXT With epitaxial deposition of semiconductor in groove:

    Process under subclass 42 including a step of epitaxial growth of
    semiconductor material in the groove.


CLS 438/45
TXT Dopant introduction into semiconductor region:

    Process under subclass 22 having a step of introducing a dopant into a
    semiconductive region of the substrate.


CLS 438/46
TXT Compound semiconductor:

    Process under subclass 22 for making a device emissive of electromagnetic
    radiation having a compound semiconductor.


CLS 438/47
TXT Heterojunction:

    Process under subclass 46 for making a device emissive of electromagnetic
    radiation having a interface between two dissimilar semiconductor
    materials, at least one of which is a compound semiconductor, to constitute
    a junction.


CLS 438/48
TXT MAKING DEVICE OR CIRCUIT RESPONSIVE TO NONELECTRICAL SIGNAL:

    Process under the class definition for making a semiconductor electrical
    device or circuit which is responsive to a nonelectrical input or stimuli
    during operation.

    (1)     Note.  The nonelectrical signal serving as input stimulus of the
    device or circuit may be described as an information carrying wave.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, for active
    solid-state device structures with a specified usage of generating
    electricity, especially subclasses 200+ for batteries which generate
    electricity under the action of heat and subclasses 243+ for batteries
    which generate electricity under the action of light; some of these
    batteries utilize potential barrier layers.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 338.4 for infrared responsive
    semiconductor devices for signaling, subclasses 370.01 through 370.15 for
    invisible radiant energy responsive semiconductor devices, subclasses 552
    through 553 for photocell circuits and apparatus involving solid-state
    light sources, and subclasses 208.1 through 208.6 for plural photosensitive
    elements, including arrays.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 53 through 56, 108, 414, and 467 through 470 for such devices
    used as temperature responsive devices; subclasses 108, 414, and 421
    through 427 for devices responsive to an external magnetic field;
    subclasses 10, 11, 21, 53 through 56, 72, 113 through 118, 184 through 189,
    225 through 234, 257, 258, 290 through 294, 414, and 431 through 466 for
    light responsive active semiconductor devices.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, especially subclass 2 for electrical
    resistors of the strain gage type and subclass 22 for semiconductor
    thermistors.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 74+ for coating processes which
    result in a photoelectric or photovoltaic product (e.g., photocathode)
    which is responsive to visible, infrared, or ultraviolet illumination by
    (a) emitting electrons, (b) generating an electromotive force, or (c)
    varying electrical conductivity.


CLS 438/49
TXT Chemically responsive:

    Process under subclass  48 for making a semiconductor device responsive to
    a chemical reaction or the presence of a particular chemical or
    concentration thereof (e.g., pH level, etc.) in close proximity to the
    device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 225, 253, and 414+ for an active solid-state device responsive
    to a nonelectrical signal.


CLS 438/50
TXT Physical stress responsive:

    Process under subclass  48 for making a semiconductor device or circuit
    responsive to physical deformation (e.g., pressure, strain, etc.)

    (1)     Note.  Processes for making semiconductor electrical device based
    surface acoustic wave devices, accelerometers, and strain gages are proper
    for this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, particularly subclass 777 for a
    semiconductor-type stress/strain sensor, subclass 514.16 for a
    semiconductor-type accelerometer, and subclass 754 for semiconductor-type
    fluid pressure sensors.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 415+ for a solid-state active device responsive to physical
    deformation.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 193+ for
    electromechanical filter using surface acoustic waves.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 2 for electrical resistors of the
    strain gage type.


CLS 438/51
TXT Packaging (e.g., with mounting, encapsulating, etc.) or treatment of
    packaged semiconductor:

    Process under subclass 50 including (a) multiple operations having a step
    of permanently attaching or securing a semiconductive substrate to a
    terminal, elongated conductor or support (e.g., a mounting, housing, lead
    frame, discrete heat sink, etc.), (b) multiple operations having a step of
    shaping flowable plastic or flowable insulative material about a
    semiconductive substrate, or (c) a step of treating an already mounted or
    packaged semiconductor substrate (e.g., coating of flowable plastic or
    flowable insulative material about a semiconductor substrate by dipping,
    etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    for process of packaging (e.g., with mounting, encapsulating, etc.)
    or treating a packaged semiconductor device.


CLS 438/52
TXT Having cantilever element:

    Process under subclass 50 for making a physical stress responsive device or
    circuit which has a projecting beam or horizontal member supported at only
    one end.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, subclass 2 for a process of making
    a cantilever mechanical structure using semiconductive material wherein no
    electrical function is attributable to the cantilever element produced.


CLS 438/53
TXT Having diaphragm element:

    Process under subclass 50 for making a physical stress responsive device or
    circuit which has a thin deflectable membrane.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, subclass 2 for a process of making
    a diaphragm mechanical structure using semiconductive material wherein no
    electrical function is attributable to the structure produced.


CLS 438/54
TXT Thermally responsive:

    Process under subclass  48 for making a device or circuit responsive to the
    temperature proximate the device.

    (1)     Note.  Processes of making devices which vary in electrical
    properties at various temperatures of operation are not deemed to be
    responsive to thermal stimuli for the purposes of this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclass 200 for a
    process of using a thermoelectric device for generating electrical current.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 108, 225, 252, and 467 through 470 for a device responsive to
    temperature.


CLS 438/55
TXT Packaging (e.g., with mounting, encapsulating, etc.) or treatment of
    packaged semiconductor:

    Process under subclass 54 provided including (a) multiple operations having
    a step of permanently attaching or securing a semiconductive substrate to a
    terminal, elongated conductor or support (e.g., a mounting, housing, lead
    frame, discrete heat sink, etc.), (b) multiple operations having a step of
    shaping flowable plastic or flowable insulative material about a
    semiconductive substrate, or (c) a step of treating an already mounted or
    packaged semiconductor substrate (e.g., coating of flowable plastic or
    flowable insulative material about a semiconductor substrate by dipping,
    etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    for a process of packaging (e.g., with mounting, encapsulating,
    etc.) or treating a packaged semiconductor device.


CLS 438/56
TXT Responsive to corpuscular radiation (e.g., nuclear particle detector, etc.):

    Process under subclass  48 for making a device or circuit responsive to
    atomic or subatomic discrete particles (e.g., alpha, neutron, fission
    fragment or fissionable isotope).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 371 for invisible radiant energy
    responsive methods using semiconductor devices.  Also see subclasses
    370.01+ for invisible radiant energy responsive electric signaling means of
    the semiconductor type, particularly subclass 370.02 for an alpha particle
    detection system, subclass 370.03 for a fission fragmentor fissionable
    isotope detection system, and subclass 370.05 for a neutron detection
    system.


CLS 438/57
TXT Responsive to electromagnetic radiation:

    Process under subclass 48 for making a device or circuit responsive to
    ultraviolet, visible, or infrared light, x-rays, or gamma rays.

    (1)     Note.  Processes of making devices in which (a) stored electrical
    charges are erased by exposure to electromagnetic radiation or (b) the
    device is switched from a nonconducting state to a conducting state or vice
    versa (e.g., optical turn-on type), are not considered to be responsive to
    a nonelectrical signal for placement in this and its indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257,    for a process of manufacturing a field effect transistor which has
    a floating gate structure capable of having electrical charge stored
    therein erased upon the application of electromagnetic radiation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 74+ for a process of coating with a
    photoelectric material to produce an electrical product.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 31+ for an electric or magnetic imagery process
    employing a photoconductive semiconductive component.


CLS 438/58
TXT Gettering of substrate:

    Process under subclass 57 having a step of gettering the semiconductor
    substrate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    471,    for a process of gettering a semiconductor substrate per se.


CLS 438/59
TXT Having diverse electrical device:

    Process under subclass 57 for making an electrical device responsive to
    electromagnetic radiation in combination with an additional electrical
    device which is not responsive to electromagnetic radiation.


CLS 438/60
TXT Charge transfer device (e.g., CCD, etc.):

    Process under subclass 59 for making a charge transfer device having
    combined therewith another electrical device or element, either of which
    being responsive to electromagnetic radiation.

    (1)     Note.  A charge transfer device is a structure in which storage
    sites for packets of electrical charge are induced at or below the
    semiconductor surface by an electric field applied by serially arranged
    gate electrodes formed thereupon and wherein carrier potential energy per
    unit charge minima are established at a given storage site and such minima
    are transferred in a serial manner via an active channel region to one or
    more adjacent storage sites.


CLS 438/61
TXT Continuous processing:

    Process under subclass 57 for making a semiconductor device responsive to
    electromagnetic radiation wherein a series of processing steps are
    performed in a uninterrupted manner.


CLS 438/62
TXT Using running length substrate:

    Process under subclass 61 whereby the continuous processing is affected
    using an elongate substrate of indeterminate length having a semiconductive
    layer thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    484,    for a process of depositing amorphous active semiconductor onto a
    substrate of indeterminate length.

    490,    for a process of depositing polycrystalline active semiconductor
    onto a substrate of indeterminate length.


CLS 438/63
TXT Particulate semiconductor component:

    Process under subclass 57 for making a device responsive to electromagnetic
    radiation wherein the substrate contains particulate semiconductive
    material.

    (1)     Note.  "Particulate" is defined as a mass of discrete units of
    matter so small (generally of largest dimension <1000 microns) that they
    are not ordinarily handled as individual units, and whose shape and
    length-to-diameter ratio are such that in the dry state the particles will
    not hold together as a coherent article without the application of pressure
    or heat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric or Photoelectric, subclass 250 for a
    photoelectric device having a particulate or spherical semiconductor
    component.


CLS 438/64
TXT Packaging (e.g., with mounting, encapsulating, etc.) or treatment of
    packaged semiconductor:

    Process under subclass 57 provided including (a) multiple operations having
    a step of permanently attaching or securing a semiconductive substrate to a
    terminal, elongated conductor or support (e.g., a mounting, housing, lead
    frame, discrete heat sink, etc.), (b) multiple operations having a step of
    shaping flowable plastic or flowable insulative material about a
    semiconductive substrate, or (c) a step of treating an already mounted or
    packaged semiconductor substrate (e.g., coating of flowable plastic or
    flowable insulative material about a semiconductor substrate by dipping,
    etc.).

    (1)     Note.  The term packaging connotes the integration/assembly of the
    semiconductive substrate/chip/die with a preformed housing, capsule, or
    support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    for a process of packaging (e.g., with mounting, encapsulating,
    etc.) or treating a packaged semiconductor device.


CLS 438/65
TXT Having additional optical element (e.g., optical fiber, etc.):

    Process under subclass 64 for packaging a semiconductor device responsive
    to electromagnetic radiation wherein the device has combined therewith one
    or more optical elements to transmit or modify electromagnetic radiation
    incident upon the semiconductor device and the optical element is fixed or
    attached to the device or the housing or support thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, especially subclass 406 for processes which
    involve assembling at least two individually distinct optical fibers,
    waveguides, or preforms directly to each other (e.g., coupling, etc.).

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 902 for
    optical coupling to a semiconductor.


CLS 438/66
TXT Plural responsive devices (e.g., array, etc.):

    Process under subclass 64 for packaging a multiplicity of devices or
    elements responsive to electromagnetic radiation into a coherent monolith.

    (1)     Note.  The plural responsive devices may be combined via a hybrid
    construction or secured onto a common support.


CLS 438/67
TXT Assembly of plural semiconductor substrates:

    Process under subclass 66 having a step of joining multiple semiconductor
    substrates into a coherent monolith in which plural devices responsive to
    electromagnetic radiation are formed.


CLS 438/68
TXT Substrate dicing:

    Process under subclass 57 having a step of dividing the semiconductor
    substrate into multiple separate bodies.

    (1)     Note.  The dicing may be done by any manner, such as abrading,
    sawing, etching, cleavage, or a combination thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, for generic processes of cutting a substrate into discrete
    individual units.

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, subclasses 1+ for methods.

    451,    Abrading, for a process of dicing by abrading.


CLS 438/69
TXT Including integrally formed optical element (e.g., reflective layer,
    luminescent layer, etc.):

    Process under subclass 57 for making a semiconductor device responsive to
    electromagnetic radiation wherein the device has combined therewith one or
    more integrally formed optical elements to transmit or modify
    electromagnetic radiation incident upon the semiconductor device


CLS 438/70
TXT Color filter:

    Process under subclass 69 for making a semiconductor device responsive to
    electromagnetic radiation having combined therewith structural means
    functioning as a color filter element.


CLS 438/71
TXT Specific surface topography (e.g., textured surface, etc.):

    Process under subclass 69 having a surface of specified topography
    incorporated into an electromagnetic sensitive device or utilized during
    manufacture thereof.


CLS 438/72
TXT Having reflective or antireflective component:

    Process under subclass 69 for making a semiconductor device responsive to
    electromagnetic radiation having a component which has reflective or
    antireflective properties with respect to electromagnetic radiation
    incident thereupon.


CLS 438/73
TXT Making electromagnetic responsive array:

    Process under subclass 57 for making a collection or grouping of
    electromagnetically responsive devices on a single, coherent, semiconductor
    substrate.

    (1)     Note.  Individual detectors of the array may alternatively be
    referred to as elements, pixels, or cells.


CLS 438/74
TXT Vertically arranged (e.g., tandem, stacked, etc.):

    Process under subclass 73 wherein the array of electromagnetic responsive
    devices is configured with one responsive device residing at a position
    over another such device.


CLS 438/75
TXT Charge transfer device (e.g., CCD, etc.):

    Process under subclass 73 for making a structure in which storage sites for
    packets of electrical charge are induced at or below the semiconductor
    surface by an electric field applied by serially arranged gate electrodes
    formed thereupon and wherein carrier potential energy per unit charge
    minima are established at a given storage site and such minima are
    transferred in a serial manner via an active channel region to one or more
    adjacent storage sites.


CLS 438/76
TXT Majority signal carrier (e.g., buried or bulk channel, peristaltic, etc.):

    Process under subclass 75 for making a charge transfer device wherein the
    transfer of such charge minima is by majority carriers of the
    semiconductive material (i.e., by electrons in n-type material or by holes
    in p-type semiconductive material) and such transfer is in response to
    electromagnetic radiation incident to the device.


CLS 438/77
TXT Compound semiconductor:

    Process under subclass 75 for making a charge transfer device in which the
    storage sites are composed of a compound semiconductor material.


CLS 438/78
TXT Having structure to improve output signal (e.g., exposure control
    structure, etc.):

    Process under subclass 75 for making a charge transfer device which
    contains structural means to improve the electrical signal it generates in
    response to the electromagnetic radiation.

    (1)     Note.  The structural means to improve the output signal may serve
    to control the amount of light incident on the device which is transferred
    as output signal charge.


CLS 438/79
TXT Having blooming suppression structure (e.g., antiblooming drain, etc.):

    Process under subclass 78 for making a charge transfer device wherein the
    structural means to improve the output signal prevents spill over of a
    large amount of signal charge generated at a storage site which receives an
    electromagnetic radiation responsive input signal of very high intensity to
    adjacent storage sites.

    (1)     Note.  The antiblooming suppression structure may include a drain
    structure for removing charge from storage sites.

    (2)     Note.  The antiblooming drain structure may be located in the
    device beneath storage sites rather than on its surface.


CLS 438/80
TXT Lateral series connected array:

    Process under subclass 73 wherein the array of electromagnetically
    responsive devices is laterally arranged and serially electrically
    connected.


CLS 438/81
TXT Specified shape junction barrier (e.g., V-grooved junction, etc.):

    Process under subclass 80 wherein the junction barrier interface (i.e.,
    between adjoining semiconductor regions of opposite conductivity type) has
    a specified geometrical configuration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclass 465 for a light-responsive active solid-state device having a
    barrier junction of specified geometrical configuration and subclasses 653+
    for an active solid-state device having a specified shape PN junction.


CLS 438/82
TXT Having organic semiconductor component:

    Process under subclass  57 wherein the semiconductor substrate contains a
    semiconductive compound in which the molecule is characterized by two or
    more carbon atoms bonded together, one atom of carbon bonded to at least
    one atom of hydrogen or halogen (i.e., chlorine, fluorine, bromine, iodine)
    or one atom of carbon bonded to at least one atom of nitrogen by a single
    or double bond.

    (1)     Note.  Exceptions to this rule include HCN, CN-CN, HNCO, HNCS,
    cyanogen halides, cyanamide, fulminic acid, and metal carbides.  These are
    not regarded as organic materials.  Also, note that graphite and diamond
    are not regarded as organic semiconductors, since they are not compounds;
    silicon carbide is not regarded as organic.


CLS 438/83
TXT Forming point contact:

    Process under subclass 57 for making a device responsive to electromagnetic
    radiation including forming a potential barrier between an electrode of
    small contacting or cross-sectional area in touching relationship with a
    substantially larger area of the semiconductor substrate, thus forming a
    potential barrier junction at the single point therebetween.


CLS 438/84
TXT Having selenium or tellurium elemental semiconductor component:

    Process under subclass 57 for making a device responsive to electromagnetic
    radiation utilizing a semiconductor substrate containing semiconductive
    selenium or tellurium in elemental form (i.e., not in a compound) or an
    alloy (i.e., mixture) thereof.


CLS 438/85
TXT Having metal oxide or copper sulfide compound semiconductive component:

    Process under subclass 57 for making a device responsive to electromagnetic
    radiation utilizing a semiconductor substrate containing a metal oxide or
    copper sulfide compound semiconductor.


CLS 438/86
TXT And cadmium sulfide compound semiconductive component:

    Process under subclass 85 wherein the semiconductor substrate containing a
    metal oxide or copper sulfide compound semiconductor additionally contains
    a cadmium sulfide compound semiconductor.


CLS 438/87
TXT Graded composition:

    Process under subclass 57 for making a device responsive to electromagnetic
    radiation wherein the chemical composition of a semiconductor region of the
    substrate varies with location within the semiconductive region.


CLS 438/88
TXT Direct application of electric current:

    Process under subclass 57 for making a device responsive to electromagnetic
    radiation having a step of directly applying electrical current to the
    semiconductor substrate.


CLS 438/89
TXT Fusion or solidification of semiconductor region:

    Process under subclass 57 for making a device responsive to electromagnetic
    radiation having a step of fusing or solidifying a semiconductive region of
    the substrate.


CLS 438/90
TXT Including storage of electrical charge in substrate:

    Process under subclass 57 for making a device responsive to electromagnetic
    radiation having a step of storing electrical charge in a region of the
    semiconductor substrate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for a process of making a semiconductor electrical device having
    formed therewith an integral battery or power source.


CLS 438/91
TXT Avalanche diode:

    Process under subclass 57 for making a device which is configured to
    operate in a manner in which an external voltage applied in the
    reverse-conducting direction of the device junction with sufficient
    magnitude causes the potential barrier at the junction to breakdown due to
    electrons or holes gaining sufficient speed to dislodge valence electrons
    and thus create more hole-electron current carriers resulting in a sudden
    change from high dynamic electrical resistance to very low dynamic
    resistance.

    (1)     Note.  The terms Zener diode and Zener breakdown voltage are used
    rather loosely in that the breakdown mechanism above about 6 volts is
    thought to be due to avalanching and that below about 6 volts is thought to
    be due essentially to tunnelling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    380,    for a process of making an avalanche diode which is not responsive
    to electromagnetic radiation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclass 199 for an avalanche diode in a noncharge transfer device having a
    heterojunction, subclass 438 for a light-responsive avalanche junction
    device, subclass 481 for an avalanche diode having a Schottky barrier,
    subclass 551 for an avalanche diode used as a voltage reference element
    combined with pn junction isolation means in an integrated circuit, and
    subclasses 603+ for avalanche diodes in general.


CLS 438/92
TXT Schottky barrier junction:

    Process under subclass 57 for making a device responsive to electromagnetic
    radiation having a Schottky rectifying junction.


CLS 438/93
TXT Compound semiconductor:

    Process under subclass 57 for making a device responsive to electromagnetic
    radiation having a compound semiconductor.


CLS 438/94
TXT Heterojunction:

    Process under subclass 93 for making a device responsive to electromagnetic
    radiation having a interface between two dissimilar semiconductor
    materials, at least one of which is a compound semiconductor, to constitute
    a junction.


CLS 438/95
TXT Chalcogenide (i.e., oxygen (O), sulfur (S), selenium (Se), tellurium (Te))
    containing:

    Process under subclass 93 wherein the compound semiconductor contains an
    element from the group of oxygen, sulfur, selenium, and tellurium.


CLS 438/96
TXT Amorphous semiconductor:

    Process under subclass 57 for making a device responsive to electromagnetic
    radiation having an amorphous semiconductor component.


CLS 438/97
TXT Polycrystalline semiconductor:

    Process under subclass 57 for making a device responsive to electromagnetic
    radiation having a polycrystalline semiconductor component.


CLS 438/98
TXT Contact formation (i.e., metallization):

    Process under subclass 57 for making a semiconductor device responsive to
    electromagnetic radiation having a step of coating the device with
    electrically conductive material forming an electrical connect or conductor
    thereto.

    (1)     Note.  The electrically conductive material may additionally be
    transparent to electromagnetic radiation.


CLS 438/99
TXT HAVING ORGANIC SEMICONDUCTIVE COMPONENT:

    Process under the class definition for making a semiconductor electrical
    device wherein the semiconductor substrate contains a semiconductive
    compound in which the molecule is characterized by two or more carbon atoms
    bonded together, one atom of carbon bonded to at least one atom of hydrogen
    or halogen (i.e., chlorine, fluorine, bromine, iodine) or one atom of
    carbon bonded to at least one atom of nitrogen by a single or double bond.

    (1)     Note.  Exceptions to this rule include HCN, CN-CN, HNCO, HNCS,
    cyanogen halides, cyanamide, fulminic acid, and metal carbides.  These are
    not regarded as organic materials.  Also, note that graphite and diamond
    are not regarded as organic semiconductors, since they are not compounds;
    silicon carbide is not regarded as organic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     for a process of making a device having an organic semiconductive
    component which is responsive to electromagnetic radiation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 25.03 for a process of making an
    electrolytic capacitor using a solid organic semiconductor.

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclass 263 for
    photoelectric cells containing organic active material.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 62.3 for organic barrier layer device
    compositions.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclass 40 for an active solid-state device having an organic
    semiconductor.


CLS 438/100
TXT MAKING POINT CONTACT DEVICE:

    Process under the class definition for making a semiconductor electrical
    device having a potential barrier between an electrode of small contacting
    or cross-sectional area in touching relationship with a substantially
    larger area of the semiconductor substrate, thus forming a potential
    barrier junction at the single point of contact therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83,     for a process of making a point contact device which is responsive
    to electromagnetic radiation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclass 41 for a point contact device.


CLS 438/101
TXT Direct application of electrical current:

    Process under subclass 100 including a step of directly applying electrical
    current to the point contact semiconductor electrical device.


CLS 438/102
TXT HAVING SELENIUM OR TELLURIUM ELEMENTAL SEMICONDUCTOR COMPONENT:

    Process under the class definition for making a semiconductor electrical
    device wherein the semiconductor substrate is comprised of semiconductive
    selenium or tellurium in elemental form (i.e., not in a compound) or an
    alloy (i.e., mixture) thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     for a process of making a device responsive to electromagnetic
    radiation comprised of semiconductive selenium or tellurium in elemental
    form or an alloy thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 62.3 for barrier layer device compositions
    containing free elemental selenium or tellurium.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclass 42 for a device having elemental selenium or tellurium
    semiconductor.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, subclass 579 for selenium or
    tellurium base alloy containing metal.


CLS 438/103
TXT Direct application of electrical current:

    Process under subclass 102 having a step of directly applying electrical
    current to the selenium or tellurium elemental semiconductor component
    substrate.


CLS 438/104
TXT HAVING METAL OXIDE OR COPPER SULFIDE COMPOUND SEMICONDUCTOR COMPONENT:

    Process under the class definition for making a semiconductor electrical
    device wherein the semiconductor substrate contains a metal oxide or copper
    sulfide compound semiconductor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85,     for a process of making a device responsive to electromagnetic
    radiation having a metal oxide or copper sulfide compound semiconductor
    component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclass 43 for a semiconductor solid-state device having a metal oxide or
    copper sulfide compound semiconductor component.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    subclass 61 for methods of vitrifying or sintering an inorganic preform to
    make a discrete passive device (e.g., multilayer ceramic capacitor, etc.)


CLS 438/105
TXT HAVING DIAMOND SEMICONDUCTOR COMPONENT:

    Process under the class definition for making a semiconductor electrical
    device wherein the semiconductor substrate contains a diamond semiconductor
    component.

    (1)     Note.  The utilization of a diamond component for other than its
    semiconductor properties (e.g., as a thermal heat sink) is not proper for
    this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclass 77, for a solid-state device having a diamond semiconductor
    component.


CLS 438/106
TXT PACKAGING (E.G., WITH MOUNTING, ENCAPSULATING, ETC.) OR TREATMENT OF
    PACKAGED SEMICONDUCTOR:

    Process under the class definition provided including (a) multiple
    operations having a step of permanently attaching or securing a
    semiconductive substrate to a terminal, elongated conductor, or support
    (e.g., a mounting, housing, lead frame, discrete heat sink, etc.), (b)
    multiple operations having a step of shaping flowable plastic or flowable
    insulative material about a semiconductive substrate, or (c) a step of
    treating an already mounted or packaged semiconductor substrate (e.g.,
    coating of flowable plastic or flowable insulative material about a
    semiconductor substrate by dipping, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Packaging is a semiconductor art manufacturing term for
    integration, assembly, or surrounding of a semiconductor substrate (e.g.,
    chip, die, etc.) with a permanent encasement, housing, capsule, or support.
     This is distinguished from package making found in Class 53 which is
    directed to preparing a manufactured product for passage through the
    channels of trade in a safe, convenient, and attractive condition, usually
    wrapped in a cover or in a container which is intended to be removed when
    the manufactured product is used.

    (2)     Note.  See section III, C, for a listing of various related classes
    providing for unit or combined operations.

    (3)     Note.  See section III, G, for a listing of various related classes
    providing for electrical connectors, electrical device housing or
    packaging, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for a process of packaging (e.g., with mounting, encapsulating,
    etc.)or treating a packaged semiconductor device or circuit emissive of a
    nonelectrical signal.

    51,     for a process of packaging (e.g., with mounting, encapsulating,
    etc.) or treating a packaged semiconductor device responsive to physical
    stress.

    55,     for a process of packaging (e.g., with mounting, encapsulating,
    etc.) or treating a thermally responsive semiconductor electrical device.

    64,     for a process of packaging (e.g., with mounting, encapsulating,
    etc.) or treating a semiconductor device or circuit responsive to
    electromagnetic radiation.

    100,    for a process of manufacturing a point-contact-type semiconductor
    device.

    616,    for a process of transcribing bump electrodes which substantially
    do not retain their contour following transfer from a carrier substrate
    (e.g., template, etc.) to a semiconductor substrate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, especially subclass 827 for lead frame or beam lead
    device manufacture, subclasses 829+ for the assembly of an electrical
    component to an insulative base having a conductive path applied thereto,
    or formed thereon or therein (e.g., a printed circuit board), subclasses
    854+ for the  assembly of an electrical component directly to terminal or
    elongated conductor, and subclasses 729+ for an electrical device
    manufacturing apparatus.

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 396+ for methods of encompassing,
    encasing, or completely surrounding goods or materials with a cover made
    from sheet material stock, and for methods of assembling or securing a
    separate closure (hood, cap, capsule, crown, seal, etc.) to the aperture of
    a preformed receptacle so as to complete the encasement of contents.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, especially subclasses 36+ for a process of
    fusion bonding of glass to a formed part, and subclass 155 for electronic
    device making means involving fusion bonding.

    148,    Metal Treatment, for a process of treating metal to modify or
    maintain the internal physical structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical
    properties of metal.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    60+ for a single step process of adhesively bonding and for certain
    multistep processes having a step of adhesively bonding a nominal
    semiconductive chip or wafer.

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, especially subclasses 13+ for
    processes of manufacturing a printed circuit board or thick film circuit
    board involving an etching step.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 78.01+ for process and apparatus for
    bonding by electrical current and pressure.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, appropriate subclasses, for a process of
    fusion bonding and additional operations which are considered to be
    ancillary to the bonding (preheating, positioning, pretinning, etc.) of a
    semiconductive substrate, especially subclasses 123.1 and 179.1+.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes, for
    a process (and steps perfecting same) of shaping plastic or nonmetallic
    material and uniting it to a preform (e.g., encapsulating), said preform
    being a semiconductive substrate.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, for a process of temporarily
    affixing a semiconductor substrate to a support during the electrical
    testing thereof.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 96+ for a process of coating an
    insulative substrate to form a printed circuit board or thick film circuit
    board.


CLS 438/107
TXT Assembly of plural semiconductive substrates each possessing electrical
    device:

    Process under subclass 106 wherein plural semiconductive substrates are
    combined into a hybrid construction or secured onto a common support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    455,    for a nonpackaging process of joining or bonding plural
    semiconductive substrates wherein none of the semiconductive substrates are
    intended to function as a terminal, elongated conductor, or support.


CLS 438/108
TXT Flip-chip-type assembly:

    Process under subclass 107 wherein a semiconductive substrate which has
    electric contacts on the top side thereof is flipped to juxtapose the
    contacts in face-to-face orientation with a substrate which has matching
    electrical contacts prior to bonding.


CLS 438/109
TXT Stacked array (e.g., rectifier, etc.):

    Process under subclass 107 for making a semiconductor device wherein a
    multiplicity of semiconductive substrates are juxtaposed in face-to-face
    orientation.


CLS 438/110
TXT Making plural separate devices:

    Process under subclass 106 for making a semiconductor device wherein a
    multiplicity of separate semiconductive devices are obtained.


CLS 438/111
TXT Using strip lead frame:

    Process under subclass 110 for making plural separate semiconductor devices
    utilizing a plurality of support structures or positions arranged on an
    elongated continuum prior to separation.

    (1)     Note.  The continuum may either be the material of the lead frame
    (e.g., metal strip) or the lead frame may be mounted serially on another
    continuum (e.g., plastic strip)


CLS 438/112
TXT And encapsulating:

    Process under subclass 111 including a step of surrounding the
    semiconductor substrate with an electrically insulating material which
    forms a sealed encasement therefor.


CLS 438/113
TXT Substrate dicing:

    Process under the subclass 110 wherein a semiconductive substrate is
    divided into discrete individual units.

    (1)     Note.  The dicing may be done by any manner, such as abrading,
    sawing, etching, cleavage, or a combination thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    460,    for a process under the class definition of dicing a semiconductor
    substrate into multiple separate bodies.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, for generic processes of cutting a substrate into discrete
    individual units.

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, subclasses 1+ for methods.

    451,    Abrading, for a process of dicing by abrading.


CLS 438/114
TXT Utilizing a coating to perfect the dicing:

    Process under subclass 113 including a step of coating the semiconductive
    substrate to enhance the dicing operation.


CLS 438/115
TXT Including contaminant removal or mitigation:

    Process under subclass 106 including the step of removing undesirable
    material through the use of a getter, desiccant, etc.


CLS 438/116
TXT Having light transmissive window:

    Process under subclass 106 wherein the housing contains light transmissive
    means allowing light to reach the enclosed semiconductive device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

     64,    for a process of packaging (e.g., with mounting, encapsulating,
    etc.) or treating a packaged semiconductor device responsive to
    electromagnetic radiation.


CLS 438/117
TXT Incorporating resilient component (e.g., spring, etc.):

    Process under subclass 106 for packaging a semiconductor substrate wherein
    the resulting structure includes an elastically compressible component.


CLS 438/118
TXT Including adhesive bonding step:

    Process under subclass 106 for packaging a semiconductor substrate
    including a step of joining the semiconductor substrate to a another body
    by nonmetallic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  See section III, C,  above and the notes in the Class 156
    definitions for further elucidation as to the relevant class lines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    60+ for a step of surface bonding or assembly therefor, and section II, AA,
    of the Class 156 definition for special lines to Class 29, Metal Working.


CLS 438/119
TXT Electrically conductive adhesive:

    Process under subclass 118 wherein the nonmetallic bonding material is
    electrically conductive.

    (1)     Note.  The nonmetallic bonding material may possess particulate
    metal dispersed in the nonmetallic adhesive binder to render the
    composition electrically conductive.


CLS 438/120
TXT With vibration step:

    Process under subclass 106 for packaging a semiconductor substrate
    including a step of applying vibratory energy.


CLS 438/121
TXT Metallic housing or support:

    Process under subclass 106 for mounting, packaging, or encapsulating a
    semiconductor device wherein a semiconductive substrate is supported or
    enclosed by joining the substrate to a metallic body.


CLS 438/122
TXT Possessing thermal dissipation structure (i.e., heat sink):

    Process under subclass 121 wherein the metallic body joined to the
    semiconductor substrate possesses structure for the dissipation of thermal
    energy generated during operation of the electrical device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    584,    for a process of coating a semiconductor substrate with a thermally
    conductive material (e.g., plated heat sink, etc.)


CLS 438/123
TXT Lead frame:

    Process under subclass 121 wherein the metallic body joined to the
    semiconductor device is in the form of a metallic support with electrically
    conductive leads depending therefrom.


CLS 438/124
TXT And encapsulating:

    Process under subclass 121 including a step of surrounding the
    semiconductor substrate or the metallic housing or support with an
    electrically insulating material which forms a sealed encasement therefor.


CLS 438/125
TXT Insulative housing or support:

    Process under subclass 106 for making a structure wherein the
    semiconductive device is supported or enclosed by preformed insulative body.

    (1)     Note.  An encapsulant, per se, is not considered to be a supporting
    structure proper for this and indented subclasses.


CLS 438/126
TXT And encapsulating:

    Process under subclass 125 including a step of surrounding the
    semiconductor substrate or insulative housing or support with an
    electrically insulating material which forms a sealed encasement therefor.


CLS 438/127
TXT Encapsulating:

    Process under subclass 106 including a step of surrounding the
    semiconductor substrate with an electrically insulating material which
    forms a sealed encasement therefor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, for a per se process of shaping glass material
    about an electrical device to encapsulate same.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    especially subclasses 272.11+ for per se electrical component encapsulating
    by molding of insulative material about the electrical component.


CLS 438/128
TXT MAKING DEVICE ARRAY AND SELECTIVELY INTERCONNECTING:

    Process under the class definition for forming an array of active devices
    on a semiconductor substrate and electrically interconnecting the devices
    into a designated circuit arrangement.

    (1)     Note.  The processes found in this and its indented subclasses
    result in circuits which are alter-natively referred to as personalized,
    customized, or application specific.

    (2)     Note.  This and its indented subclasses do not take processes of
    producing a shorted or shunted structure as an integral part of a single
    device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for processes of interconnecting plural devices wherein at least
    one operation is responsive to a sensed condition.

    587,    for process of forming an array of gate electrodes upon a
    semiconductor substrate.

    598+,   for a process of metallizing a semiconductor substrate wherein the
    electrically conductive metallization contains a portion which is alterable
    from the conductive to nonconductive condition or vice-versa (e.g., a fuse
    or antifuse).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    particularly subclasses 202+ for gate arrays.


CLS 438/129
TXT With electrical circuit layout:

    Process under subclass 128 including a step of designing the topological
    arrangement of arrayed device components or electrical conductors
    therebetween in combination with making the semiconductor device array.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 491 for
    integrated circuit layout, per se.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, for processes of storing
    or retrieving dynamic information, subclasses 99+ for a particular detail
    of the information handling portion of a system, especially subclasses 100+
    for radiation beam modification of or by a storage medium and subclass 126
    for electrical modification or sensing of a storage medium (e.g.,
    capacitive, resistive, or electrostatic discharge)


CLS 438/130
TXT Rendering selected devices operable or inoperable:

    Process under subclass 128 wherein selected devices located on a
    semiconductive substrate are electrically completed or electrically shorted
    so as to be rendered operable or inoperable.

    (1)     Note.  Adjusting an operating characteristic (e.g., threshold
    voltage) of selected devices so as to render them operational yet
    nonresponsive to the intended operating voltage is specifically excluded
    from herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    276,    for processes of programming or encoding a grouping of insulated
    gate field effect transistors by altering the operative mode (enhancement
    type or depletion type) of selected transistors.


CLS 438/131
TXT Using structure alterable to conductive state (i.e., antifuse):

    Process under subclass 128 for making an array of electrical devices and
    selectively interconnecting the devices via a structure which is alterable
    from a nonconductive state to a conductive state.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    467,    for altering the conductivity of an antifuse element through the
    direct application of an electrical current.

    600,    for metallization processes forming a structure alterable to a
    conductive state.


CLS 438/132
TXT Using structure alterable to nonconductive state (i.e., fuse):

    Process under subclass 128 for making an array of electrical devices and
    selectively interconnecting the devices via a structure which is alterable
    from a conductive state to a nonconductive state.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    467,    for altering the conductivity of a fuse element through the direct
    application of electrical current.

    601,    for metallization processes forming a structure alterable to a
    nonconductive state.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, especially subclass 525 for a specific identifiable device,
    circuit, or system having as a part of it's construction or arrangement a
    fusible link element.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 96 for fusible
    links relating to programmable read-only memory and subclass 200 for
    eliminating "bad bit" information associated with read/write circuits.


CLS 438/133
TXT MAKING REGENERATIVE-TYPE
    SWITCHING DEVICE (E.G., SCR,
    IGBT, THYRISTOR, ETC.):

    Process under the class definition for making a switching device structure
    acting as if it has two or more active emitter junctions each of which is
    associated with a separate, equivalent transistor having an individual gain
    and which, when initiated by a base region current, causes the equivalent
    transistors to mutually drive each other in a regenerative manner to lower
    the voltage drop between emitter regions.

    (1)     Note.  If the current is above a level Ih, called the "holding
    current", then the device will remain ON when the triggering signal is
    removed by the regenerative feedback therebetween, and is then said to be
    "latched.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 107+ for a regenerative-type switching device.

    361,    Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 100+ and
    205 for circuits employing thyristors (e.g., silicon controlled rectifiers
    (SCRs))

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 27+, 54, 57+, 68,
    85+, 96+, 128+, 135+, and 160+ for circuits employing thyristors (e.g.,
    silicon controlled rectifiers (SCRs))


CLS 438/134
TXT Bidirectional rectifier with control electrode (e.g., triac, diac, etc.):

    Process under subclass 133 for making a regenerative switching device
    having a control electrode which device can conduct in both the forward and
    reverse directions, being triggered into conduction by a pulse applied to
    the control electrode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 119+ for a bidirectional rectifier with control electrode.


CLS 438/135
TXT Having field effect structure:

    Process under subclass 133 wherein the regenerative switching device
    includes or is combined with a field effect structure (i.e., wherein the
    current through a active channel region is controlled by an electric field
    coming from a voltage which is applied between the gate and source
    terminals thereof).

    (1)     Note.  Includes amplifying gate-type and optical turn-on-type
    structures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 133+ for a regenerative device combined with a field effect
    transistor.


CLS 438/136
TXT Junction gate:

    Process under subclass 135 for making a regenerative switching device which
    possesses a gate electrode which forms a PN (rectifying) junction with the
    semiconductor substrate.


CLS 438/137
TXT Vertical channel:

    Process under subclass 136 for making a junction gate regenerative-type
    switching device wherein the active channel is configured to provide, in
    whole or in part, a vertically conductive pathway between source and drain
    regions.


CLS 438/138
TXT Vertical channel:

    Process under subclass 135 for making a regenerative-type switching device
    wherein the active channel is configured to provide, in whole or in part, a
    vertically conductive pathway between source and drain regions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    268,    for a process of making a vertical channel insulated gate field
    effect transistor.


CLS 438/139
TXT Altering electrical characteristic:

    Process under subclass 133 having a step of altering an electrical
    characteristic of the regenerative-type switching device.


CLS 438/140
TXT Having structure increasing breakdown voltage (e.g., guard ring, field
    plate, etc.):

    Process under subclass 133 for making a regenerative switching device
    having a structure for increasing the breakdown voltage of the device
    (e.g., beveled junction, contoured edge, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 168+ for a regenerative-type switching device having means to
    increase breakdown voltage.


CLS 438/141
TXT MAKING CONDUCTIVITY MODULATION DEVICE (E.G., UNIJUNCTION TRANSISTOR, DOUBLE
    BASE DIODE, CONDUCTIVITY-MODULATED TRANSISTOR, ETC.):

    Process under the class definition for making a conductivity modulation
    device structure which has a high resistivity semiconductor region of one
    conductivity-type having a region of opposite conductivity-type forming a
    pn junction with a central portion of the high resistivity region, with
    structural means provided to forward bias the pn junction to inject
    minority carriers into the high resistivity region to vary its conductivity
    producing modulated wave response (i.e., conductivity modulation).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclass 212 for a conductivity modulation device.

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, subclass 919 for unijunction
    transistor circuit trigger control means.


CLS 438/142
TXT MAKING FIELD EFFECT DEVICE HAVING PAIR OF ACTIVE REGIONS SEPARATED BY GATE
    STRUCTURE BY FORMATION OR ALTERATION OF SEMICONDUCTIVE ACTIVE REGIONS:

    Process under the class definition for forming or altering a pair of device
    active regions (i.e., source or drain) separated by a gate structure
    intended to permit or block the flow of electrical current therebetween.

    (1)     Note.  To be proper hereunder, the claim must include a positive
    recitation of (a) formation of semiconductive active regions or (b)
    altering the electrical properties of active semiconductive regions of the
    substrate.



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for a process of making a chemically sensitive field effect
    transistor (i.e., CHEMFET.)


CLS 438/143
TXT Gettering of semiconductor substrate:

    Process under subclass 142 including a step of gettering the semiconductor
    substrate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    471,    for process of gettering a semiconductor substrate, per se.


CLS 438/144
TXT Charge transfer device (e.g., CCD, etc.):

    Process under subclass 142 for making a structure in which storage sites
    for packets of electrical charge are induced at or below the semiconductor
    surface by an electric field applied by serially arranged gate electrodes
    formed thereupon and wherein carrier potential energy per unit charge
    minima are established at a given storage site and such minima are
    transferred in a serial manner via an active channel region to one or more
    adjacent storage sites.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are devices commonly referred to as charge
    coupled devices as well as bucket brigade devices.

    (2)     Note.  A field effect device of the charge injection-type (i.e.,
    CID) that transfers the charge in a nonserial manner to the device
    substrate or the data bus is not proper hereunder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for a process of making a charge transfer device which is
    responsive to electromagnetic radiation.

    587,    for a process of making an array of gate electrodes upon a
    semiconductor substrate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 215+ for a charge transfer device structure.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 183 for a charge
    coupled memory.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclasses 57+ for charge transfer device systems.


CLS 438/145
TXT Having additional electrical device:

    Process under subclass 144 for making a charge transfer device structure in
    combination with an additional electrical device.


CLS 438/146
TXT Majority signal carrier (e.g., buried or bulk channel, peristaltic, etc.):

    Process under subclass 144 for making a charge transfer device structure
    wherein the transfer of such charge minima is by majority carriers of the
    semiconductive material (i.e., by electrons in n-type material, and is by
    holes in p-type semiconductive material).


CLS 438/147
TXT Changing width or direction of channel (e.g., meandering channel, etc.):

    Process under subclass 144 for making a charge transfer device structure
    wherein the active channel region changes its width or direction throughout
    all or part of the distance between adjacent storage sites.


CLS 438/148
TXT Substantially incomplete signal charge transfer (e.g., bucket brigade,
    etc.):

    Process under subclass 144 for making a charge transfer device structure
    wherein the charge transferred is less than the entire charge stored in the
    storage site from which it originates.


CLS 438/149
TXT On insulating substrate or layer (e.g., TFT, etc.):

    Process under subclass 142 for making a field effect transistor from a
    semiconductive layer formed upon an insulating substrate (for example,
    glass or sapphire) or an insulating layer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

     30,    for process of making a device or circuit emissive of nonelectrical
    signal comprising an array of field effect transistors on an insulating
    substrate combined with a liquid crystal optical material.


CLS 438/150
TXT Specified crystallographic orientation:

    Process under subclass 149 wherein a given feature of the field effect
    device on an insulating substrate or layer is formed in a definite
    crystallographic relationship relative to the insulating substrate or layer
    or the semiconductor layer thereupon.


CLS 438/151
TXT Having insulated gate:

    Process under subclass 149 for making an insulated gate field effect
    transistor from a semiconductive layer formed upon an insulating substrate
    (for example, glass or sapphire) or an insulating layer.


CLS 438/152
TXT Combined with electrical device not on insulating substrate or layer:

    Process under subclass 151 for making a field effect transistor formed on
    an insulating substrate or layer combined with an additional electrical
    device which is not formed upon an insulating substrate or layer.

    (1)     Note.  The electrical device not on an insulating substrate or
    layer is often referred to as a bulk device while the electrical device on
    the insulating substrate or layer is often referred to as a thin film
    device with the combined structure either horizontally disposed or
    vertically stacked (i.e., 3-dimensional).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155,    for a process of making a field effect transistor on an insulating
    substrate or layer and an additional electrical device on an insulating
    substrate or layer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 350+ for an insulated gate field effect device formed on a
    single crystal semiconductor layer on an insulating substrate combined with
    a diverse-type device structure.


CLS 438/153
TXT Complementary field effect transistors:

    Process under subclass 152 for making plural field effect transistors of
    opposite conductivity type (i.e., wherein source and drain regions of a
    first field effect transistor are of opposite conductivity type to source
    and drain regions of a second field effect transistor).


CLS 438/154
TXT Complementary field effect transistors:

    Process under subclass 151 for making plural field effect transistors of
    opposite conductivity type (i.e., wherein source and drain regions of a
    first field effect transistor are of opposite conductivity type to source
    and drain regions of a second field effect transistor).


CLS 438/155
TXT And additional electrical device on insulating substrate or layer:

    Process under subclass 151 for making a field effect transistor formed on
    an insulating layer or substrate combined with an additional electrical
    device which is also formed on an insulating substrate or layer.

    (1)     Note.  The additional electrical device must be other than an
    insulated gate field effect transistor if formed utilizing the same
    semiconductive layer or may be any type of electrical device if formed
    utilizing a different semiconductive layer with the structure formed
    referred to as a vertically stacked or 3-dimensional structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    for a process of making a field effect transistor on an insulating
    substrate or layer and an additional electrical device not on an insulating
    substrate or layer.


CLS 438/156
TXT Vertical channel:

    Process under subclass 151 for making a junction gate field effect
    transistor wherein the active channel is configured to provide, in whole or
    in part, a vertically conductive pathway between source and drain regions.


CLS 438/157
TXT Plural gate electrodes (e.g., dual gate, etc.):

    Process under subclass 151 for making a field effect transistor formed on
    an insulating layer or substrate wherein plural insulated gate electrodes
    on either the same or opposite sides of the active channel region serve to
    control the electrical conduction characteristics of the semiconductive
    active channel region.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    283,    for a process of making an insulated gate field effect transistor
    having either dual gate or opposed gate structure.


CLS 438/158
TXT Inverted transistor structure:

    Process under subclass 151 for making a field effect transistor formed on
    an insulating substrate or layer wherein the gate electrode of the field
    effect transistor is formed so as to be in direct contact with the
    insulating substrate or layer.


CLS 438/159
TXT Source-to-gate or drain-to-gate overlap:

    Process under subclass 158 wherein the source or drain regions or layers of
    the inverted field effect transistor are formed so as to extend over a
    portion of the gate electrode formed on the insulating substrate or layer.


CLS 438/160
TXT Utilizing backside irradiation:

    Process under subclass 158 wherein single or multiple layers formed over
    the gate are patterned by irradiating a photoresist layer with a radiation
    source located on the opposite side of the substrate from which the gate is
    formed.


CLS 438/161
TXT Including source or drain electrode formation prior to semiconductor layer
    formation (i.e., staggered electrodes):

    Process under subclass 151 wherein the source or drain electrodes of the
    field effect transistor are formed on the insulating substrate or layer
    prior to the deposition of a semiconductive layer.


CLS 438/162
TXT Introduction of nondopant into semiconductor layer:

    Process under subclass 151 wherein a nonelectrically active impurity (i.e.,
    one that does not change the electrically properties) is introduced into
    the semiconductive layer.


CLS 438/163
TXT Adjusting channel dimension (e.g., providing lightly doped source or drain
    region, etc.):

    Process under subclass 151 wherein a particular dimension of the active
    channel region of the field effect transistor (e.g., thickness, length,
    etc.) is adjusted.


CLS 438/164
TXT Semiconductor islands formed upon insulating substrate or layer (e.g., mesa
    formation, etc.):

    Process under subclass 151 wherein the semiconductor layer selectively
    deposited or deposited and subsequently patterned to form a semiconductive
    region electrically isolated from laterally adjoining semiconductor regions.

    (1)     Note.  The separate laterally adjacent semiconductor layers are
    each intended to possess a single field effect transistor and be
    electrically isolated with respect to one another prior to electrically
    interconnecting.


CLS 438/165
TXT Including differential oxidation:

    Process under subclass 164 in which the patterning of the semiconductive
    layer includes a step of oxidizing the semiconductive layer to form regions
    of differing oxide thickness.


CLS 438/166
TXT Including recrystallization step:

    Process under subclass 151 wherein the crystalline structure of the
    semiconductive layer is altered or modified (e.g., from amorphous to
    polycrystalline or single crystalline).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150,    for a process of making a field effect transistor on an insulating
    substrate or layer having a specified crystallographic orientation.


CLS 438/167
TXT Having Schottky gate (e.g., MESFET, HEMT, etc.):

    Process under subclass 142 for making a field effect transistor which
    possesses a gate which forms a metal-semiconductor rectifying junction with
    the underlying semiconductive active channel region.


CLS 438/168
TXT Specified crystallographic orientation:

    Process under subclass 167 wherein a given feature of the Schottky gate
    field effect device is formed in a definite crystallographic orientation
    relative to the substrate.

    (1)     Note.  Processes of making a transistor in a semiconductor
    substrate of given orientation are not sufficient for placement in this
    subclass.


CLS 438/169
TXT Complementary Schottky gate field effect transistors:

    Process under subclass 167 for making plural Schottky gate field effect
    transistors of opposite conductivity type (i.e., wherein source and drain
    regions of a first field effect transistor are of opposite conductivity
    type to source and drain regions of a second field effect transistor).


CLS 438/170
TXT And bipolar device:

    Process under subclass 167 for making a bipolar transistor in addition to
    the Schottky gate field effect transistor.


CLS 438/171
TXT And passive electrical device (e.g., resistor, capacitor, etc.):

    Process under subclass 167 for making a Schottky gate field effect
    transistor having combined therewith an electrical device or element in
    which charge carriers do not change their energy levels and do not provide
    electrical rectification, amplification, or switching, but which does react
    to voltage and current input.


CLS 438/172
TXT Having heterojunction (e.g., HEMT, MODFET, etc.):

    Process under subclass 167 for making a Schottky gate field effect
    transistor wherein the Schottky gate field effect transistor possesses an
    interface between two dissimilar semiconductor materials which constitute a
    junction.


CLS 438/173
TXT Vertical channel:

    Process under subclass 167 for making a Schottky gate field effect
    transistor wherein the active channel is configured to provide, in whole or
    in part, a vertically conductive pathway between source and drain regions.


CLS 438/174
TXT Doping of semiconductive channel region beneath gate (e.g., threshold
    voltage adjustment, etc.):

    Process under subclass 167 for making a Schottky gate field effect
    transistor having a step of introducing an electrically active dopant
    species into the semiconductor channel region beneath the gate electrode.

    (1)     Note. To be proper herein, the transistor channel region must
    possess semiconductive characteristics prior to the introduction of the
    dopant.


CLS 438/175
TXT Buried channel:

    Process under subclass 167 for making a Schottky gate field effect
    transistor wherein the channel formed between the source and drain regions
    is configured so as to be buried beneath the semiconductor substrate
    surface.


CLS 438/176
TXT Plural gate electrodes (e.g., dual gate, etc.):

    Process under subclass 167 for making a Schottky gate field effect
    transistor wherein plural gate electrodes on either the same or opposite
    side of the active channel region serve to control the electrical
    conduction characteristics of the semiconductive active channel region.


CLS 438/177
TXT Closed or loop gate:

    Process under subclass 167 for making a Schottky field effect transistor
    wherein the gate electrode is configured such that it closes upon itself to
    thereby totally surround one of the device active regions.


CLS 438/178
TXT Elemental semiconductor:

    Process under subclass 167 for making a Schottky gate field effect
    transistor wherein the gate electrode is formed upon an elemental
    semiconductor active channel region.


CLS 438/179
TXT Asymmetric:

    Process under subclass 167 for making a Schottky gate field effect
    transistor wherein the pair of active regions are off-set or nonsymmetrical
    with respect to the centerline of the Schottky gate electrode.


CLS 438/180
TXT Self-aligned:

    Process under subclass 167 for making a Schottky gate field effect
    transistor wherein a previously formed device feature is utilized to make
    device regions in the desired registration to the previously formed feature.

    (1)     Note.  A self-aligned gate is one which is aligned between the
    source and drain via a masking process which uses the gate material itself
    to achieve the registration of the related device regions.


CLS 438/181
TXT Doping of semiconductive region:

    Process under subclass 180 wherein a semiconductive region of the substrate
    is changed in electrical properties by introduction of an electrically
    active impurity.


CLS 438/182
TXT T-gate:

    Process under subclass 181 wherein a T-shaped gate structure is formed or
    utilized at any stage in the process.


CLS 438/183
TXT Dummy gate:

    Process under subclass 181 wherein a temporary gate is formed or utilized
    at any stage in the process and is intended to be removed or have no
    function in the final device.


CLS 438/184
TXT Utilizing gate sidewall structure:

    Process under subclass 181 wherein a gate sidewall structure is utilized
    during the doping of semiconductive regions adjacent the gate structure.

    (1)     Note.  The sidewall structure may function as a masking layer or
    dopant source during the self-aligned doping step.


CLS 438/185
TXT Multiple doping steps:

    Process under subclass 184 including plural steps of doping the
    semiconductive regions of the substrate.


CLS 438/186
TXT Having junction gate (e.g., JFET, SIT, etc.):

    Process under subclass 142 for making a field effect transistor which
    possesses a gate electrode which forms a PN (rectifying) junction with the
    semiconductor active channel region.


CLS 438/187
TXT Specified crystallographic orientation:

    Process under subclass 186 wherein a given feature of the junction gate
    field effect device is formed in a definite crystallographic orientation
    relative to the substrate.

    (1)     Note.  Processes of making a transistor in a semiconductor
    substrate of given orientation are not sufficient for placement in this
    subclass.


CLS 438/188
TXT Complementary junction gate field effect transistors:

    Process under subclass 186 for making plural junction gate field effect
    transistors of opposite conductivity type (i.e., wherein source and drain
    regions of a first field effect transistor are of opposite conductivity
    type to source and drain regions of a second field effect transistor).


CLS 438/189
TXT And bipolar transistor:

    Process under subclass 186 for making a junction gate field effect
    transistor which additionally contains a bipolar transistor.


CLS 438/190
TXT And passive device (e.g., resistor, capacitor, etc.):

    Process under subclass 186 for making a junction gate field effect
    transistor having combined therewith an electrical device or component in
    which charge carriers do not change their energy levels and do not provide
    electrical rectification, amplification, or switching, but which does react
    to voltage and current input.


CLS 438/191
TXT Having heterojunction:

    Process under subclass 186 for making a junction gate field effect
    transistor which possesses an interface between two dissimilar
    semiconductor materials which constitute a junction.


CLS 438/192
TXT Vertical channel:

    Process under subclass 186 for making a junction gate field effect
    transistor wherein the active channel is configured to provide, in whole or
    in part, a vertically conductive pathway between source and drain regions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    347,    for a process of making a permeable base bipolar transistor.


CLS 438/193
TXT Multiple parallel current paths (e.g., grid gate, etc.):

    Process under subclass 192 for making a junction gate field effect
    transistor wherein the junction gate which controls the vertical channel
    consists of a plurality of parallel current paths.


CLS 438/194
TXT Doping of semiconductive channel region beneath gate (e.g., threshold
    voltage adjustment, etc.):

    Process under subclass 186 for making a junction gate field effect
    transistor having a step of introducing an electrically active dopant
    species into the semiconductor channel region beneath the gate electrode.

    (1)     Note. To be proper herein, the transistor channel region must
    possess semiconductive characteristics prior to the introduction of the
    dopant.


CLS 438/195
TXT Plural gate electrodes:

    Process under subclass 186 for making a junction gate field effect
    transistor having plural gate electrodes on either the same or opposite
    side of the active channel region which serve to control the electrical
    conduction characteristics of the semiconductive active channel region.


CLS 438/196
TXT Including isolation structure:

    Process under subclass 186 for making a junction gate field effect
    transistor having a structure which serves to at least partially
    electrically isolate the semiconductor region in which the device is formed
    from laterally adjacent semiconductive regions.


CLS 438/197
TXT Having insulated gate (e.g., IGFET, MISFET, MOSFET, etc.):

    Process under subclass 142 for making a field effect transistor wherein the
    gate electrode is electrically insulated from the semiconductive substrate,
    that portion of the semiconductive substrate therebeneath being the active
    channel region separating source and drain.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151,    for a process of making an insulated gate field effect transistor
    on an insulating substrate or layer

    585,    for insulated gate metallization processes, per se.


CLS 438/198
TXT Specified crystallographic orientation:

    Process under subclass 197 wherein a given feature of the junction gate
    field effect device is formed in a definite crystallographic orientation
    relative to the substrate.

    (1)     Note.  Processes of making a transistor in a semiconductor
    substrate of given orientation are not sufficient for placement in this
    subclass.


CLS 438/199
TXT Complementary insulated gate field effect transistors (i.e., CMOS):

    Process under subclass 197 for making plural insulated gate field effect
    transistors of opposite conductivity type (i.e., wherein source and drain
    regions of a first field effect transistor are of opposite conductivity
    type to source and drain regions of a second field effect transistor).


CLS 438/200
TXT And additional electrical device:

    Process under subclass 199 for making complementary insulated gate field
    effect transistors having combined therewith an additional electrical
    device.


CLS 438/201
TXT Including insulated gate field effect transistor having gate surrounded by
    dielectric (i.e., floating gate):

    Process under subclass 200 for making complementary insulated gate field
    effect transistors having combined therewith an additional insulated gate
    field effect transistor possessing a gate electrode enclosed by dielectric.

    (1)     Note.  Usually, the floating gate electrode is located (a) above
    and insulated from the channel region and (b) below and insulated from a
    controlling gate electrode.  A floating gate electrode, due to accumulated
    electrical influence derived from the controlling gate electrode, provides
    on-off operation of the channel region.  Floating gate arrangements are
    prevalent in ultraviolet erasable programmable read-only memory devices
    (i.e., EPROMs)


CLS 438/202
TXT Including bipolar transistor (i.e., BiCMOS):

    Process under subclass 200 for making complementary insulated gate field
    effect transistors combined with a bipolar transistor.


CLS 438/203
TXT Complementary bipolar transistors:

    Process under subclass 202 for making complementary insulated gate field
    effect transistors combined with a first bipolar transistor which
    additionally contains a second bipolar transistor which is of opposite
    conductivity type to the first bipolar transistor.


CLS 438/204
TXT Lateral bipolar transistor:

    Process under subclass 202 for making complementary insulated gate field
    effect transistors additionally having a bipolar transistor possessing a
    horizontal-type structure so that current flow between its emitter and
    collector regions is parallel to a major surface of the semiconductor
    substrate.


CLS 438/205
TXT Plural bipolar transistors of differing electrical  characteristics:

    Process under subclass 202 for making complementary insulated gate field
    effect transistors combined with multiple bipolar transistors of differing
    electrical properties.


CLS 438/206
TXT Vertical channel insulated gate field effect transistor:

    Process under subclass 202 for making complementary insulated gate field
    effect transistors combined with a bipolar transistor and wherein at least
    one insulated gate field effect transistor possesses an active channel
    region which is configured to provide, at least in part, a vertically
    conductive pathway between source and drain regions.


CLS 438/207
TXT Including isolation structure:

    Process under subclass 202 for making complementary insulated gate field
    effect transistors combined with a bipolar transistor having a structure
    serving to at least partially electrically isolate the semiconductive
    region in which one transistor is formed from laterally adjacent
    semiconductive regions.


CLS 438/208
TXT Isolation by PN junction only:

    Process under subclass 207 for making complementary insulated gate field
    effect transistors combined with a bipolar transistor in which the
    transistors are electrically isolated solely through the use of properly
    biased PN junctions.


CLS 438/209
TXT Including additional vertical channel insulated gate field effect
    transistor:

    Process under subclass 200 for making complementary insulated gate field
    effect transistors having combined therewith an additional field effect
    transistor having an active channel region configured to provide, at least
    in part, a vertically conductive pathway between source and drain regions.


CLS 438/210
TXT Including passive device (e.g., resistor, capacitor, etc.):

    Process under subclass 200 for making complementary insulated gate field
    effect transistors having combined therewith a passive electrical device or
    element (i.e., an electrical device or component in which charge carriers
    do not change their energy levels and do not provide electrical
    rectification, amplification, or switching, but which does react to voltage
    and current input).


CLS 438/211
TXT Having gate surrounded by dielectric (i.e., floating gate):

    Process under subclass 199 for making complementary insulated gate field
    effect transistors wherein at least one field effect transistor has an
    additional insulated gate electrode completely separated by dielectric from
    its first insulated gate electrode.

    (1)     Note. Usually, the floating gate electrode is located (a) above and
    insulated from the channel region and (b) below and insulated from a
    controlling gate electrode.  A floating gate electrode, due to accumulated
    electrical influence derived from the controlling gate electrode, provides
    on-off operation of the channel region.  Floating gate arrangements are
    prevalent in ultraviolet erasable programmable read-only memory devices
    (i.e., EPROMs)


CLS 438/212
TXT Vertical channel:

    Process under subclass 199 for making complementary insulated gate field
    effect transistors wherein the active channel region of at least one of the
    transistors is configured to provide, at least in part, a vertically
    conductive pathway between source and drain regions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    268,    for a process of making a vertical channel insulated gate field
    effect transistor.


CLS 438/213
TXT Common active region:

    Process under subclass 199 for making complementary insulated gate field
    effect transistors wherein the transistors share a device active region.


CLS 438/214
TXT Having underpass or crossunder:

    Process under subclass 199 for making complementary insulated gate field
    effect transistors having an electrically conductive structure located
    within the semiconductor substrate which functions to electrically connect
    the transistors.


CLS 438/215
TXT Having fuse or integral short:

    Process under subclass 199 for making complementary field effect
    transistors having a structure which is alterable from the conductive to
    nonconductive state or functions to electrically short the transistor
    structure.


CLS 438/216
TXT Gate insulator structure constructed of diverse dielectrics (e.g., MNOS,
    etc.) or of nonsilicon compound:

    Process under subclass 199 for making complementary insulated gate field
    effect transistors wherein the gate dielectric insulator of at least one of
    the transistors is constructed of plural diverse dielectrics (e.g., nitride
    and oxide layers, etc.) or of a nonsilicon containing dielectric compound.


CLS 438/217
TXT Doping of semiconductor channel region beneath gate insulator (e.g.,
    threshold voltage adjustment, etc.):

    Process under subclass 199 having a step of introducing an electrically
    active dopant species into the semiconductor active channel region beneath
    the gate insulator of at least one of the complementary insulated gate
    field effect transistors.


CLS 438/218
TXT Including isolation structure:

    Process under subclass 199 for making complementary field effect
    transistors having a structure serving to at least partially electrically
    isolate the semiconductive region in which one transistor is formed from
    laterally adjacent semiconductive regions.


CLS 438/219
TXT Total dielectric isolation:

    Process under subclass 218 for making complementary insulated gate field
    effect transistors in which at least one of the insulated gate
    complementary field effect transistors is fully electrically isolated by
    dielectric insulative material from laterally adjacent semiconductive
    regions.


CLS 438/220
TXT Isolation by PN junction only:

    Process under subclass 218 for making complementary insulated gate field
    effect transistors in which the transistors are electrically isolated
    solely through the use of properly biased PN junctions.


CLS 438/221
TXT Dielectric isolation formed by grooving and refilling with dielectric
    material:

    Process under subclass 218 for making complementary insulated gate field
    effect transistors wherein lateral isolation means is provided by forming a
    recess into the semiconductor substrate and refilling the recess at least
    in part with electrically insulative material.


CLS 438/222
TXT With epitaxial semiconductor layer formation:

    Process under subclass 221 for making complementary insulated gate field
    effect transistors with dielectric isolation formed by grooving and
    refilling with dielectric material including a step of forming an epitaxial
    semiconductor layer.


CLS 438/223
TXT Having well structure of opposite conductivity type:

    Process under subclass 221 for making complementary insulated gate field
    effect transistors including a step of forming a well of opposite
    conductivity to the adjoining semiconductor region in which well is formed
    an insulated gate field effect transistor of opposite conductivity type to
    an insulated gate field effect transistor located in the adjoining
    semiconductor region.


CLS 438/224
TXT Plural wells:

    Process under subclass 223 for making complementary insulated gate field
    effect transistors wherein plural wells of the same or opposite
    conductivity type are formed in the semiconductive substrate, each well
    utilized for formation therein of an insulated gate field effect transistor.


CLS 438/225
TXT Recessed oxide formed by localized oxidation (i.e., LOCOS):

    Process under subclass 218 for making complementary insulated gate field
    effect transistors wherein lateral isolation means is provided by a step of
    selectively oxidizing semiconductive regions of the substrate.


CLS 438/226
TXT With epitaxial semiconductor layer formation:

    Process under subclass 225 for making complementary insulated gate field
    effect transistors with dielectric isolation formed by selectively
    oxidizing semiconductive regions of the substrate combined with a step of
    forming an epitaxial semiconductor layer.


CLS 438/227
TXT Having well structure of opposite conductivity type:

    Process under subclass 225 for making complementary insulated gate field
    effect transistors including a step of forming a well of opposite
    conductivity to the adjoining semiconductor regions in which well is formed
    an insulated gate field effect transistor of opposite conductivity type to
    an insulated gate field effect transistor located in the adjoining
    semiconductor region.


CLS 438/228
TXT Plural wells:

    Process under subclass 227 for making complementary insulated gate field
    effect transistors wherein plural wells of the same or opposite
    conductivity type are formed in the semiconductive substrate, each well
    utilized for formation therein of an insulated gate field effect transistor.


CLS 438/229
TXT Self-aligned:

    Process under subclass 199 for making complementary insulated gate field
    effect transistors wherein a previously formed device feature is utilized
    to make device regions in the desired registration to the previously formed
    feature.

    (1)     Note.  A self-aligned gate is one which is aligned between the
    source and drain via a masking process which uses the gate material itself
    to achieve the registration of related device regions.


CLS 438/230
TXT Utilizing gate sidewall structure:

    Process under subclass 229 with a step of utilizing a structure located on
    the sidewall of the gate electrode as the previously formed device feature.


CLS 438/231
TXT Plural doping steps:

    Process under subclass 230 including multiple steps of introducing
    electrically active dopant species into semiconductor regions of the
    substrate.


CLS 438/232
TXT Plural doping steps:

    Process under subclass 229 including multiple steps of introducing
    electrically active dopant species into semiconductor regions of the
    substrate.


CLS 438/233
TXT And contact formation:

    Process under subclass 199 for making complementary insulated gate field
    effect transistors including a step of forming electrical connections to
    the transistors.


CLS 438/234
TXT Including bipolar transistor (i.e., BiMOS):

    Process under subclass 197 for making an insulated gate field effect
    transistor having combined therewith a bipolar transistor.


CLS 438/235
TXT Heterojunction bipolar transistor:

    Process under subclass 234 for making an insulated gate field effect
    transistor combined with a bipolar transistor wherein the emitter-base
    junction or the collector-base junction of the bipolar transistor possesses
    an interface between two dissimilar semiconductor materials.


CLS 438/236
TXT Lateral bipolar transistor:

    Process under subclass 234 for making an insulated gate field effect
    transistor combined with a bipolar transistor which has a horizontal-type
    structure resulting in current flow between its emitter and collector
    regions parallel to a major surface of the semiconductor substrate.


CLS 438/237
TXT Including diode:

    Process under subclass 197 for making an insulated gate field effect
    transistor having combined therewith a diode device or element.


CLS 438/238
TXT Including passive device (e.g., resistor, capacitor, etc.):

    Process under subclass 197 for making an insulated gate field effect
    transistor having combined therewith an electrical device or component in
    which charge carriers do not change their energy levels and do not provide
    electrical rectification, amplification, or switching, but which does react
    to voltage and current input.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273,    for a process of making an insulated gate field effect transistor
    which possesses an integral short of the active regions of a single
    transistor.


CLS 438/239
TXT Capacitor:

    Process under subclass 238 for making an insulated gate field effect
    transistor having combined therewith a capacitor as the passive device.


CLS 438/240
TXT Having high dielectric constant insulator (e.g., Ta2O5, etc.):

    Process under subclass 239 wherein the capacitor dielectric is constructed
    of a material having a dielectric constant of greater than 7.5, the
    dielectric constant of Si3N4.


CLS 438/241
TXT And additional field effect transistor  (e.g., sense or access transistor,
    etc.):

    Process under subclass 239 for making an insulated gate field effect
    transistor having combined therewith a capacitor and an additional field
    effect transistor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258,    for process of making a floating gate-type insulated gate field
    effect transistor having combined therewith an additional insulated gate
    field effect transistor.


CLS 438/242
TXT Including transistor formed on trench sidewalls:

    Process under subclass 241 wherein the additional diverse field effect
    transistor is formed on the side-walls of a groove formed in the
    semiconductor substrate.

    (1)     Note.  The access transistor serves to sense the storage of
    electrical charges on the capacitor.


CLS 438/243
TXT Trench capacitor:

    Process under subclass 239 for making an insulated gate field effect
    transistor combined with a capacitor which is located in a groove in the
    semiconductor substrate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 301+ for an insulated gate field effect transistor combined with
    a trench capacitor.


CLS 438/244
TXT Utilizing stacked capacitor structure (e.g., stacked trench, buried stacked
    capacitor, etc.):

    Process under subclass 243 wherein the trench capacitor contains a number
    of capacitor plate regions aligned vertically above each other or wherein
    the capacitor and the insulated gate field effect transistor are located
    such that one overlies the other.


CLS 438/245
TXT With epitaxial layer formed over the trench:

    Process under subclass 243 including a step of forming an epitaxial
    semiconductive layer over the trench region.


CLS 438/246
TXT Including doping of trench surfaces:

    Process under subclass 243 having a step of introducing electrically active
    dopant species into the surfaces of the groove in which the capacitor is
    located.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    524,    for a process of implanting a dopant into a grooved semiconductive
    region.


CLS 438/247
TXT Multiple doping steps:

    Process under subclass 246 utilizing plural steps of introducing
    electrically active dopant species into the trench surfaces.


CLS 438/248
TXT Including isolating means formed in trench:

    Process under subclass 246 including forming a structure functioning as
    electrical isolation means at the groove bottom.


CLS 438/249
TXT Doping by outdiffusion from a dopant source layer (e.g., doped oxide, etc.):

    Process under subclass 246 wherein doping the trench surfaces is via
    diffusion from an adjacent dopant source layer formed thereupon.


CLS 438/250
TXT Planar capacitor:

    Process under subclass 239 for making an insulated gate field effect
    transistor combined with a capacitor wherein a generally planar region of
    the semiconductive substrate forms a first capacitor plate with the
    capacitor dielectric and a second capacitor plate formed thereupon.


CLS 438/251
TXT Including doping of semiconductive region:

    Process under subclass 250 having a step of introducing an electrically
    active dopant species into a semiconductive region of the substrate forming
    the first capacitor plate.


CLS 438/252
TXT Multiple doping steps:

    Process under subclass 251 having plural steps of introducing electrically
    active dopant species into a semiconductive region of the substrate forming
    the first capacitor plate.


CLS 438/253
TXT Stacked capacitor:

    Process under subclass 239 for making an insulated gate field effect
    transistor in combination with a capacitor containing a number of capacitor
    plate and dielectric layers deposited successively one atop another and
    overlying the field effect transistor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 306+ for an insulated gate field effect transistor combined with
    a stacked capacitor.


CLS 438/254
TXT Including selectively removing material to undercut and expose storage node
    layer:

    Process under subclass 253 having a step of selectively removing material
    (e.g., by etching, etc.) to undercut and expose the capacitor electrode
    which serves as the storage node layer of the stacked capacitor.

    (1)     Note. The capacitor electrode on which the electrical charge is
    stored is referred to as the storage node layer.


CLS 438/255
TXT Including texturizing storage node layer:

    Process under subclass 253 having a step of roughening the surface of the
    capacitor plate which serves as the storage node layer of the stacked
    capacitor.

    (1)     Note.  The capacitor electrode on which the electrical charge is
    stored is referred to as the storage node layer.


CLS 438/256
TXT Contacts formed by selective growth or deposition:

    Process under subclass 253 wherein electrical contacts are formed by
    selective growth or deposition of conductive material onto the
    semiconductor substrate.


CLS 438/257
TXT Having additional gate electrode surrounded by dielectric (i.e., floating
    gate):

    Process under subclass 197 for making an insulated gate field effect
    transistor wherein an additional gate electrode completely separated by
    dielectric from a first insulated gate electrode is formed.

    (1)     Note.  Usually, the floating gate electrode is located (a) above
    and insulated from the channel region and (b) below and insulated from a
    controlling gate electrode that determines operation of the floating gate
    electrode.  A floating gate electrode, due to accumulated electrical
    influence derived from the controlling gate electrode, provides on-off
    operation of the channel region.  Floating gate arrangements are prevalent
    in ultraviolet erasable programmable read-only memory devices (i.e.,
    EPROMs).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201,    for a process of making complementary insulated gate field effect
    transistors combined with an additional floating gate-type insulated gate
    field effect transistor.


CLS 438/258
TXT Including additional field effect transistor (e.g., sense or access
    transistor, etc.):

    Process under subclass 257 for making a floating gate-type insulated gate
    field effect transistor having combined therewith an additional field
    effect transistor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241,    for a process of making an insulated gate field effect transistor
    combined with a capacitor which structure contains an additional insulated
    gate field effect transistor.


CLS 438/259
TXT Including forming gate electrode in trench or recess in substrate:

    Process under subclass 257 for making a floating gate type insulated gate
    field effect transistor including forming a gate electrode in a groove
    located in the semiconductor substrate.


CLS 438/260
TXT Textured surface of gate insulator or gate electrode:

    Process under subclass 257 for making a floating gate-type insulated gate
    field effect transistor wherein a roughened surface is utilized for the
    gate insulator or gate electrode.


CLS 438/261
TXT Multiple interelectrode dielectrics or nonsilicon compound gate insulator:

    Process under subclass 257 for making a floating gate-type insulated gate
    field effect transistor with plural interelectrode dielectrics or a
    nonsilicon compound dielectric material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    287,    for a process of making an insulated gate field effect transistor
    having the gate insulator constructed of diverse dielectrics or of a
    nonsilicon compound dielectric.


CLS 438/262
TXT Including elongated source or drain region disposed under thick oxide
    regions (e.g., buried or diffused bitline, etc.):

    Process under subclass 257 for making a floating gate-type insulated gate
    field effect transistor having elongated source or drain region located
    under thick oxide dielectric regions.

    (1)     Note.  The regions disposed under the thick oxide regions must be
    active source or drain regions rather than channel stops serving to
    electrically isolate laterally spaced FETs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    294,    for a process of making an insulated gate field effect transistor
    including dielectric isolation structure.


CLS 438/263
TXT Tunneling insulator:

    Process under subclass 262 for making a floating gate type insulated gate
    field effect transistor including an insulative layer adjacent the gate
    electrode which allows passage of charge carriers therethrough.


CLS 438/264
TXT Tunneling insulator:

    Process under subclass 257 for making a floating gate-type insulated gate
    field effect transistor including an insulative layer adjacent the gate
    electrode which allows passage of charge carriers therethrough.


CLS 438/265
TXT Oxidizing sidewall of gate electrode:

    Process under subclass 257 for making a floating gate-type field effect
    transistor including a step of forming a dielectric sidewall on the gate
    electrode by reacting the gate electrode material with oxygen.


CLS 438/266
TXT Having additional, nonmemory control electrode or channel portion (e.g.,
    for accessing field effect transistor structure, etc.):

    Process under subclass 257 for making a floating gate-type field effect
    transistor having an additional, nonmemory control electrode (i.e., having
    direct electrical contact thereto) or channel portion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclass 316 for a floating gate memory device with an additional contacted
    control electrode.


CLS 438/267
TXT Including forming gate electrode as conductive sidewall spacer to another
    electrode:

    Process under subclass 266 including a step of forming a conductive
    electrode on the sidewall of another electrode wherein the conductive
    sidewall serves as a gate electrode.


CLS 438/268
TXT Vertical channel:

    Process under subclass 197 for making a insulated gate field effect
    transistor wherein the active channel is configured to provide, in whole or
    in part, a vertically conductive pathway between source and drain regions.


CLS 438/269
TXT Utilizing epitaxial semiconductor layer grown through an opening in an
    insulating layer:

    Process under subclass 268 for making an insulated gate field effect
    transistor wherein a epitaxial semiconductor layer is deposited through an
    opening in an insulating layer upon a semiconductor substrate.


CLS 438/270
TXT Gate electrode in trench or recess in semiconductor substrate:

    Process under subclass 268 for making an insulated gate field effect
    transistor wherein the gate electrode is formed in a groove or recess in
    the semiconductor substrate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259,    for a process of making a floating gate-type insulated gate field
    effect transistor having a gate electrode formed in a groove located in the
    semiconductive substrate.


CLS 438/271
TXT V-gate:

    Process under subclass 270 for making an insulated gate field effect
    transistor wherein the gate electrode has a V-shape configuration.


CLS 438/272
TXT Totally embedded in semiconductive layers:

    Process under subclass 270 wherein the gate electrode is surrounded on all
    sides by semiconductive layers.


CLS 438/273
TXT Having integral short of source and base regions:

    Process under subclass 268 for making an insulated gate field effect
    transistor having an integral electrical connection between the source and
    base (i.e., substrate) regions.


CLS 438/274
TXT Short formed in recess in substrate:

    Process under subclass 273 wherein the integral short is formed in a groove
    in the semiconductor substrate


CLS 438/275
TXT Making plural insulated gate field effect transistors of differing
    electrical characteristics:

    Process under subclass 197 for making multiple insulated gate field effect
    transistors of differing electrical characteristics.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128,    for processes of selectively wiring an array of electrical devices
    by completing particular devices of the array or by completion or
    destruction of conductive pathways between particular devices of the array.


CLS 438/276
TXT Introducing a dopant into the channel region of selected transistors:

    Process under subclass 275 for making plural insulated gate field effect
    transistors having a step of introducing an electrically active dopant
    species into the semiconductor channel region beneath the gate insulator of
    one or more transistors to produce transistors of differing electrical
    characteristics.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130,    for processes of rendering electrical devices in an array operable
    or inoperable by electrically completing or electrically shorting
    designated devices thereof to selectively interconnect the array.

    289,    for a process of doping the semiconductor channel region beneath
    gate insulator to (a) produce field effect transistors of identical
    electrical characteristics or (b) alter the electrical characteristics of a
    single field effect transistor.


CLS 438/277
TXT Including forming overlapping gate electrodes:

    Process under subclass 276 for making plural insulated gate field effect
    transistors of differing electrical characteristics including a step of
    forming overlapping gate electrodes.


CLS 438/278
TXT After formation of source or drain regions and gate electrode (e.g., late
    programming, encoding, etc.):

    Process under subclass 276 for making plural insulated gate field effect
    transistors of differing electrical characteristics wherein the
    semiconductor channel region is doped subsequent to the formation of the
    source and drain regions and the gate electrode.


CLS 438/279
TXT Making plural insulated gate field effect transistors having common active
    region:

    Process under subclass 197 for making multiple insulated gate field effect
    transistors in which a transistor active region is shared between two or
    more field effect transistors.


CLS 438/280
TXT Having underpass or crossunder:

    Process under subclass 197 for making an insulated gate field effect
    transistor electrically interconnected to an adjoining electrical device
    via a conductive structure located within the semiconductor substrate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    214,    for a process of making complementary insulated gate field effect
    transistors combined with an underpass or crossunder.


CLS 438/281
TXT Having fuse or integral short:

    Process under subclass 197 for making an insulated gate field effect
    transistor which possesses a structure alterable to a nonconductive state
    (i.e., fuse) or an integral electrical connection between source and gate
    regions or between drain and gate regions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132,    for a process of making an array of electrical devices and
    selectively interconnecting the devices via fusible links.

    238,    for a process of making an insulated gate field effect transistor
    combined with a resistor.


CLS 438/282
TXT Buried channel:

    Process under subclass 197 for making an insulated gate field effect
    transistor wherein the channel formed between the source and drain regions
    is configured so as to be located beneath the semiconductor substrate
    surface.


CLS 438/283
TXT Plural gate electrodes (e.g., dual gate, etc.):

    Process under subclass 197 for making an insulated gate field effect
    transistor wherein plural gate electrodes on either the same or opposite
    side of the active channel region serve to control the electrical
    conduction characteristics of the semiconductive active channel region.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157,    for a process of making an insulated gate field effect transistor
    upon an insulating substrate or layer wherein the transistor possesses dual
    gate or opposed gate structure.


CLS 438/284
TXT Closed or loop gate:

    Process under subclass 197 for making an insulated gate field effect
    transistor wherein the gate electrode is configured such that it closes
    upon itself to thereby totally surround one of the device active regions.


CLS 438/285
TXT Utilizing compound semiconductor:

    Process under subclass 197 for making an insulated gate field effect
    transistor utilizing a compound semiconductor active region.


CLS 438/286
TXT Asymmetric:

    Process under subclass 197 for making an insulated gate field effect
    transistor wherein the pair of active regions are offset or nonsymmetrical
    with respect to the centerline of the insulated gate electrode.


CLS 438/287
TXT Gate insulator structure constructed of diverse dielectrics (e.g., MNOS,
    etc.) or of nonsilicon compound:

    Process under subclass 197 for making an insulated gate field effect
    transistor wherein the gate dielectric insulator is constructed of plural
    diverse dielectrics (e.g., nitride and oxide, etc.) or of a nonsilicon
    containing dielectric compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216,    for a process of making complementary insulated gate field effect
    transistors at least one transistor having a gate insulator structure
    constructed of diverse dielectrics or of nonsilicon compound.

    261,    for a process of making a floating gate-type insulated gate field
    effect transistor having multiple interelectrode dielectrics or nonsilicon
    containing dielectric.


CLS 438/288
TXT Having step of storing electrical charge in gate dielectric:

    Process under subclass 197 for making an insulated gate field effect
    transistor having an active step of storing electrical charge in the gate
    dielectric insulator.


CLS 438/289
TXT Doping of semiconductive channel region beneath gate insulator (e.g.,
    adjusting threshold voltage, etc.):

    Process under subclass 197 for making an insulated gate field effect
    transistor having a step of introducing electrically active dopant species
    into the semiconductor active channel region beneath the gate insulator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    276,    for a process of doping the semiconductor channel region beneath
    gate insulator of selected transistors to make plural field effect
    transistors of differing electrical characteristics.



CLS 438/290
TXT After formation of source or drain regions and gate electrode:

    Process under subclass 289 wherein the semiconductor channel region is
    doped subsequent to the formation of the source and drain regions and the
    gate electrode.


CLS 438/291
TXT Using channel conductivity dopant of opposite type as that of source and
    drain:

    Process under subclass 289 wherein the dopant and the semiconductor active
    channel region beneath the gate insulator are of the same conductivity type.


CLS 438/292
TXT Direct application of electrical current:

    Process under subclass 197 for making an insulated gate field effect
    transistor having a step of directly applying an electrical current to the
    semiconductor substrate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for a step of measuring involving aging electrical devices formed
    on a semiconductor substrate via the direct application of electrical
    current.


CLS 438/293
TXT Fusion or solidification of semiconductor region:

    Process under subclass 197 for making an insulated gate field effect
    transistor having a step of fusing or solidifying a semiconductive region
    of the substrate.


CLS 438/294
TXT Including isolation structure:

    Process under subclass 197 for making an insulated gate field effect
    transistor having a structure which serves to at least partially
    electrically isolate the semiconductor region in which the device is formed
    from laterally adjacent semiconductive regions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400,    for processes of forming an electrically isolated lateral
    semiconductor structure utilizing dielectric or junction isolation.


CLS 438/295
TXT Total dielectric isolation:

    Process under subclass 294 for making an insulated gate field effect
    transistor which is fully electrically isolated by dielectric insulative
    material from laterally adjacent semiconductive regions.


CLS 438/296
TXT Dielectric isolation formed by grooving and refilling with dielectric
    material:

    Process under subclass 294 for making an insulated gate field effect
    transistor including the step of forming an isolation structure by making a
    recess in the semiconductor substrate and refilling the recess with an
    insulative material.


CLS 438/297
TXT Recessed oxide formed by localized oxidation (i.e., LOCOS):

    Process under subclass 294 for making an insulated gate field effect
    transistor including the step of oxidizing a selected region of a
    semiconductive substrate to form an embedded oxide (e.g., field oxide)
    therein which forms the periphery of a semiconductive region utilized for
    the formation of the field effect transistor.


CLS 438/298
TXT Doping region beneath recessed oxide (e.g., to form chanstop, etc.):

    Process under subclass 297 including a step of introducing electrically
    active dopant species into the semiconductor substrate region beneath the
    recessed oxide (e.g., to form a channel stop thereby preventing electric
    field inversion beneath the recessed oxide, etc.).


CLS 438/299
TXT Self-aligned:

    Process under subclass 197 for making an insulated gate field effect
    transistor wherein a previously formed device feature is utilized to make
    device regions in the desired registration to the previously formed feature.

    (1)     Note.  A self-aligned gate is one which is aligned between the
    source and drain via a masking process which uses the gate material itself
    to achieve the registration of the related device regions.


CLS 438/300
TXT Having elevated source or drain (e.g., epitaxially formed source or drain,
    etc.):

    Process under subclass 299 including a step of forming the source or drain
    active region at a position above and laterally adjacent to the channel
    region of the transistor.


CLS 438/301
TXT Source or drain doping:

    Process under subclass 299 having a step for the self-aligned introduction
    of electrically active dopant species into the semiconductor regions of the
    substrate to form the transistor source or drain regions or portions
    thereof.


CLS 438/302
TXT Oblique implantation:

    Process under subclass 301 involving implanting ions other than
    perpendicularly with respect to the plane of the substrate.


CLS 438/303
TXT Utilizing gate sidewall structure:

    Process under subclass 301 having structure on the sidewall of the gate
    electrode or gate insulator which is utilized as the previously formed
    device feature.


CLS 438/304
TXT Conductive sidewall component:

    Process under subclass 303 wherein the gate sidewall structure is composed
    at least in part of a conductive component.


CLS 438/305
TXT Plural doping steps:

    Process under subclass 303 including multiple steps of introducing dopant
    species into the semiconductive regions of the substrate.


CLS 438/306
TXT Plural doping steps:

    Process under subclass 301 including multiple steps of introducing dopant
    species into the semiconductive regions of the substrate.


CLS 438/307
TXT Using same conductivity-type dopant:

    Process under subclass 306 wherein the same conductivity-type electrically
    active dopant is introduced using plural doping steps.


CLS 438/308
TXT Radiation or energy treatment modifying properties of semiconductor regions
    of substrate (e.g., thermal, corpuscular, electromagnetic, etc.):

    Process under subclass 197 for making an insulated gate field effect
    transistor having a step of irradiating the semiconductor substrate to
    alter the electrical properties of semiconductive regions thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    795,    for a process of modifying properties of semiconductive regions of
    the substrate via radiation or energy treatment.


CLS 438/309
TXT FORMING BIPOLAR TRANSISTOR BY FORMATION OR ALTERATION OF SEMICONDUCTIVE
    ACTIVE REGIONS:

    Process under the class definition for forming a transistor structure which
    upon completion possesses a base region separating two or more active
    regions and in which both positive and negative charge carriers are used to
    support current flow.

    (1)     Note.  To be proper hereunder, the claim must include a positive
    recitation of (a) formation of semiconductive active regions or (b)
    altering the electrical properties of active semiconductive regions of the
    substrate.

    (2)     Note.  The regions of a bipolar transistor are commonly referred to
    as collector, base, and emitter.  A bipolar device may alternatively be
    identified by the semiconductive regions from which the device is formed
    (i.e., a NPN or PNP device).



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170,    for a process of making a Schottky gate field effect transistor
    combined with a bipolar transistor.

    189,    for a process of making a junction gate field effect transistor
    combined with a bipolar transistor.

    202,    for a process of making complementary insulated gate field effect
    transistors combined with a bipolar transistor.

    234,    for a process of making an insulated gate field effect transistor
    combined with a bipolar transistor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 47, 197, 205, 273, 350, 361, 370, 378, 423, 462, 477+, 511, 512,
    517, 518, 525, 526, 539+, and 552+ for a bipolar transistor structure.


CLS 438/310
TXT Gettering of semiconductor substrate:

    Process under subclass 309 having a step of gettering the semiconductor
    substrate.


CLS 438/311
TXT On insulating substrate or layer (i.e., SOI type):

    Process under subclass 309 for making a bipolar transistor wherein the
    transistor is formed upon an insulating substrate (e.g., glass, sapphire,
    etc.) or layer.


CLS 438/312
TXT Having heterojunction:

    Process under subclass 309 for making a bipolar transistor wherein the
    emitter-base or the collector-base junction is an interface of two
    dissimilar semiconductor materials resulting in a heterojunction
    therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235,    for a process of making an insulated gate field effect transistor
    combined with a heterojunction bipolar transistor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 197+ for a heterojunction bipolar transistor structure.


CLS 438/313
TXT Complementary bipolar transistors:

    Process under subclass 312 for making a structure which comprises plural
    bipolar transistors wherein the emitter and collector regions of a first
    bipolar transistor are of opposite conductivity type to the emitter and
    collector regions of a second bipolar transistor.(i.e., both pnp and npn
    bipolar transistor structures), at least one of which possesses a
    heterojunction.


CLS 438/314
TXT And additional electrical device:

    Process under subclass 312 for making a heterojunction bipolar transistor
    and an additional electrical device.


CLS 438/315
TXT Forming inverted transistor structure:

    Process under subclass 312 forming a heterojunction bipolar transistor
    structure in which a semiconductor body such as a semiconductor substrate
    or a semiconductor layer is used as its emitter region, a first
    semiconductor region formed in the semiconductor body is used as the base
    region and a second semiconductor region formed in the first semiconductor
    region is used as the collector region.


CLS 438/316
TXT Forming lateral transistor structure:

    Process under subclass 312 for making a heterojunction bipolar transistor
    which has a horizontal structure resulting in current flow between its
    emitter and collector parallel to a major surface of the semiconductor
    substrate.


CLS 438/317
TXT Wide bandgap emitter:

    Process under subclass 312 for making a heterojunction bipolar transistor
    with an active region which involves a charge carrier emitter region made
    of a semiconductor material having an energy gap between its conduction and
    valence band which is greater than the energy gap of the dissimilar
    semiconductor material of the base region.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclass 198 for a wide band-gap emitter heterojunction bipolar transistor
    structure.


CLS 438/318
TXT Including isolation structure:

    Process under subclass 312 for making a heterojunction bipolar transistor
    which has structure so as to at least partially electrically isolate the
    device from laterally adjacent semiconductor regions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    353,    for an electrical isolation process in a nonheterojunction bipolar
    device.


CLS 438/319
TXT Air isolation (e.g., mesa, etc.):

    Process under subclass 318 for making a heterojunction bipolar transistor
    wherein the emitter or collector region of the device is a raised feature
    with respect to the plane of the substrate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    343,    for a process of making a nonheterojunction bipolar device having a
    mesa or stacked emitter.


CLS 438/320
TXT Self-aligned:

    Process under subclass 312 for making a heterojunction bipolar transistor
    wherein a previously formed device feature is utilized to make device
    regions in the desired registration to the previously formed feature.


CLS 438/321
TXT Utilizing dummy emitter:

    Process under subclass 320 for making a heterojunction bipolar transistor
    wherein a substitute emitter is formed or removed prior to the forming of
    the active emitter region of the device.


CLS 438/322
TXT Complementary bipolar transistors:

    Process under subclass 309 for making plural bipolar transistors wherein
    the emitter and collector regions or a first bipolar transistor are of
    opposite conductivity type to the emitter and collector regions of a second
    bipolar transistor.


CLS 438/323
TXT Having common active region (i.e., integrated injection logic (I2L), etc.):

    Process under subclass 322 for making complementary bipolar transistors
    which possess a common active region.


CLS 438/324
TXT Including additional electrical device:

    Process under subclass 323 for making complementary bipolar transistors
    with shared common region having combined therewith an additional
    electrical device.


CLS 438/325
TXT Having lateral bipolar transistor:

    Process under subclass 323 for making complementary bipolar transistors
    with shared common region wherein at least one of the bipolar transistors
    has a horizontal structure resulting in current flow between its emitter
    and collector parallel to a major surface of the semiconductor substrate.


CLS 438/326
TXT Including additional electrical device:

    Process under subclass 322 for making complementary bipolar transistors
    having combined therewith an additional electrical device.


CLS 438/327
TXT Having lateral bipolar transistor:

    Process under subclass 322 for making complementary bipolar transistors
    wherein at least one of the bipolar transistors has a horizontal structure
    resulting in current flow between its emitter and collector parallel to a
    major surface of the semiconductor substrate.


CLS 438/328
TXT Including diode:

    Process under subclass 309 for making a bipolar transistor having combined
    therewith a diode.


CLS 438/329
TXT Including passive device (e.g., resistor, capacitor, etc.):

    Process under subclass 309 for making a bipolar transistor having combined
    therewith an electrical device or component in which charge carriers do not
    change their energy levels and do not provide electrical rectification,
    amplification, or switching, but which does react to voltage and current
    input.


CLS 438/330
TXT Resistor:

    Process under subclass 329 for making a bipolar transistor combined with a
    resistive element or component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 539+, 577, and 582 for bipolar transistor structure combined
    with a resistive element.


CLS 438/331
TXT Having same doping as emitter or collector:

    Process under subclass 330 wherein the resistor region has the same doping
    profile (i.e., is formed in the same step) as either the emitter or
    collector region of the bipolar transistor with which the resistor is
    combined.

    (1)     Note.  Most resistors in bipolar integrated circuits are formed
    with the same doping step as the bipolar transistor base regions.
    Resistors that are instead formed at the same doping step as the emitter or
    collector, rather than the base, go in this subclass.


CLS 438/332
TXT Lightly doped junction isolated resistor:

    Process under subclass 330 wherein the resistive element is in the form of
    a lightly doped layer of one conductivity type located in a region of
    opposite conductivity type, such that the pn junction between the resistor
    region and its containing opposite conductivity-type region serves to
    electrically isolate the resistor.

    (1)     Note.  A resistor region is considered to be lightly doped if it is
    substantially less heavily doped than the base region of the bipolar
    transistor combined therewith, or if it has a doping density not greater
    than 100 times that of the opposite conductivity-type region in which it is
    contained.


CLS 438/333
TXT Having fuse or integral short:

    Process under subclass 309 for making a bipolar transistor which possesses
    a structure which is alterable from a conductive to a nonconductive state
    (i.e., fuse) or an integral electrical short between the collector and
    emitter active regions or between the base and emitter active regions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132,    for a process of making an array of electrical devices and
    selectively interconnecting the devices via fusible links.


CLS 438/334
TXT Forming inverted transistor structure:

    Process under subclass 309 forming a bipolar transistor structure in which
    a semiconductor body such as a semiconductor substrate or a semiconductor
    layer is used as its emitter region, a first semiconductor region formed in
    the semiconductor body is used as the base region and a second
    semiconductor region formed in the first semiconductor region is used as
    the collector region.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315,    for a process of making a heterojunction bipolar transistor having
    an inverted structure.


CLS 438/335
TXT Forming lateral transistor structure:

    Process under subclass 309 for making a bipolar transistor wherein the
    transistor has a horizontal structure resulting in current flow between its
    emitter and collector parallel to a major surface of the semiconductor
    substrate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204,    for a process of making complementary insulated gate field effect
    transistors combined with a lateral bipolar transistor.

    236,    for a process of making an insulated gate field effect transistor
    combined with a lateral bipolar transistor.

    327,    for a process of making a structure comprising complementary
    bipolar transistors one of which possesses a lateral transistor structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 557+ for a lateral bipolar transistor structure.


CLS 438/336
TXT Combined with vertical bipolar transistor:

    Process under subclass 335 for making a lateral bipolar transistor combined
    with a vertical bipolar transistor having current flow between its emitter
    and collector perpendicular to a major surface of the semiconductor
    substrate.


CLS 438/337
TXT Active region formed along groove or exposed edge in semiconductor:

    Process under subclass 335 for making a lateral bipolar transistor wherein
    the transistor has a recess or exposed edge and an active region of the
    transistor is formed along the recess or exposed edge.


CLS 438/338
TXT Having multiple emitter or collector structure:

    Process under subclass 335 for making a lateral bipolar transistor having
    plural emitter active regions or plural collector active regions.


CLS 438/339
TXT Self-aligned:

    Process under subclass 335 for making a lateral bipolar transistor wherein
    a previously formed device feature is utilized to make device active
    regions in the desired registration to the previously formed feature.


CLS 438/340
TXT Making plural bipolar transistors of differing electrical characteristics:

    Process under subclass 309 for making multiple bipolar transistors
    possessing differing electrical properties.


CLS 438/341
TXT Using epitaxial lateral overgrowth:

    Process under subclass 309 for making a bipolar transistor including
    forming a single crystalline semiconductor layer epitaxially on the
    semiconductor substrate and laterally over an insulative layer thereupon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    481,    for a process utilizing fluid growth or deposition of semiconductor
    active material onto an insulating layer by epitaxial lateral overgrowth.


CLS 438/342
TXT Having multiple emitter or collector structure:

    Process under subclass 309 for making a bipolar transistor having plural
    emitter active regions or plural collector active regions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 563+ for multiple separately connected emitter, collector, or
    base regions in the same transistor structure.


CLS 438/343
TXT Mesa or stacked emitter:

    Process under subclass 309 for making a bipolar transistor wherein the
    emitter is a raised feature relative to the adjoining semiconductive
    regions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclass 586 for a bipolar transistor structure with a nonplanar
    semiconductor surface (e.g., groove, mesa, bevel, etc.).


CLS 438/344
TXT Washed emitter:

    Process under subclass 309 wherein the surface of the semiconductive
    substrate is etched to remove oxide layers formed on the emitter region
    during emitter diffusion thus allowing an aperature used for diffusing the
    emitter impurity to be directly utilized as the aperature for electrical
    contact formation.


CLS 438/345
TXT Walled emitter:

    Process under subclass 309 for making a bipolar transistor wherein the
    emitter-base junction terminates against a dielectric isolation sidewall.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    especially subclasses 514 and 515 for walled emitter bipolar transistor
    structure.


CLS 438/346
TXT Emitter dip prevention or utilization:

    Process under subclass 309 involving special diffusion techniques to
    eliminate or utilize the tendency of the base-collector junction to "bulge"
    downward during the emitter diffusion.


CLS 438/347
TXT Permeable or metal base:

    Process under subclass 309 for making a bipolar transistor wherein the base
    region incompletely separates the collector and emitter regions, or is
    constructed of a metallic material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    192,    for a method of making a vertical junction gate field effect
    transistor.


CLS 438/348
TXT Sidewall base contact:

    Process under subclass 309 for making a bipolar transistor wherein a
    conductive layer serving as the base electrode makes contact to the
    sidewall of the base region.


CLS 438/349
TXT Pedestal base:

    Process under subclass 309 for making a bipolar transistor wherein the base
    region is provided with a projecting portion.


CLS 438/350
TXT Forming base region of specified dopant concentration profile (e.g.,
    inactive base region more heavily doped than active base region, etc.):

    Process under subclass 309 for making a bipolar transistor with a
    semiconductor base region possessing a specified concentration profile of
    an electrically active dopant species contained therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclass 592 for a bipolar transistor device having a base region
    possessing specified doping concentration profile.


CLS 438/351
TXT Direct application of electrical current:

    Process under subclass 309 for making a bipolar transistor involving having
    a step of directly applying an electric current to the semiconductor
    substrate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for a step of measuring involving aging electrical devices formed
    on a semiconductor substrate via the direct application of electrical
    current.


CLS 438/352
TXT Fusion or solidification of semiconductor region:

    Process under subclass 309 for making a bipolar transistor having a step of
    fusing or solidifying semiconductive regions of the substrate.


CLS 438/353
TXT Including isolation structure:

    Process under subclass 309 for making a bipolar transistor having a
    structure which serves to at least partially electrically isolate the
    semiconductive region in which the transistor is formed from laterally
    adjacent semiconductive regions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400,    for processes of forming an electrically isolated lateral
    semiconductor structure utilizing dielectric or junction isolation without
    a step of bipolar transistor manufacture.


CLS 438/354
TXT Having semi-insulative region:

    Process under subclass 353 for making a bipolar transistor wherein the
    electrical isolation is provided at least in part by a high resistivity
    semiconductive component.


CLS 438/355
TXT Total dielectrical isolation:

    Process under subclass 353 for making a bipolar transistor which is fully
    electrically isolated by dielectric insulative material from laterally
    adjacent semiconductive regions.


CLS 438/356
TXT Isolation by PN junction only:

    Process under subclass 353 for making a bipolar transistor in a
    semiconductive region which is completely electrically isolated from
    laterally spaced regions of the semiconductor substrate solely through the
    use of properly biased PN junctions.



CLS 438/357
TXT Including epitaxial semiconductor layer formation:

    Process under subclass 356 for making a junction isolated bipolar
    transistor utilizing the formation of an epitaxial semiconductor layer.


CLS 438/358
TXT Up diffusion of dopant from substrate into epitaxial layer:

    Process under subclass 357 including a step of diffusing a dopant from the
    semiconductor substrate into the epitaxial layer form thereupon.


CLS 438/359
TXT Dielectric isolation formed by grooving and refilling with dielectrical
    material:

    Process under subclass 353 for making a bipolar transistor involving the
    formation of a recess in the semiconductor followed by the refilling of the
    recess with an insulative material.


CLS 438/360
TXT With epitaxial semiconductor formation in groove:

    Process under subclass 359 for making a bipolar transistor additionally
    involving the epitaxial deposition of a semiconductor material in the
    groove.


CLS 438/361
TXT Including deposition of polysilicon or noninsulative material into groove:

    Process under subclass 359 for making a bipolar transistor wherein a
    noninsulative material is deposited into the groove in addition to the
    insulative material.


CLS 438/362
TXT Recessed oxide by localized oxidation (i.e., LOCOS):

    Process under subclass 353 for making a bipolar transistor including the
    step of oxidizing a portion of a semiconductive material to form an
    embedded oxide (i.e., field oxide) therein which forms the periphery of a
    semiconductive region utilized for the formation of the bipolar transistor.


CLS 438/363
TXT With epitaxial semiconductor layer formation:

    Process under subclass 362 for making a bipolar transistor utilizing in
    addition to the recessed oxide the formation of an epitaxial semiconductor
    layer.


CLS 438/364
TXT Self-aligned:

    Process under subclass 309 wherein a previously formed device feature is
    utilized to make device regions in the desired registration to the
    previously formed feature.


CLS 438/365
TXT Forming active region from adjacent doped polycrystalline or amorphous
    semiconductor:

    Process under subclass 364 having an active region (e.g., base, emitter, or
    collector) formed of polycrystalline or amorphous semiconductor.


CLS 438/366
TXT Having sidewall:

    Process under subclass 365 including forming dielectric isolation on the
    sidewall of the base region to separate the base and collector regions.


CLS 438/367
TXT Including conductive component:

    Process under subclass 366 wherein the sidewall is a combination of
    conductive and insulative components.


CLS 438/368
TXT Simultaneously outdiffusing plural dopants from polysilicon or amorphous
    semiconductor:

    Process under subclass 365 including the simultaneous outdiffusing of
    electrically active dopants from the polysilicon or amorphous active region.


CLS 438/369
TXT Dopant implantation or diffusion:

    Process under subclass 364 having a step of implanting or diffusing an
    electrically active dopant species into a semiconductive region of the
    substrate.


CLS 438/370
TXT Forming buried region (e.g., implanting through insulating layer, etc.):

    Process under subclass 369 wherein the dopant is implanted or diffused
    through an insulating layer.


CLS 438/371
TXT Simultaneous introduction of plural dopants:

    Process under subclass 369 involving the concurrent introduction of
    multiple dopant species into one or more semiconductive regions of the
    substrate.


CLS 438/372
TXT Plural doping steps:

    Process under subclass 369 having multiple steps of doping semiconductive
    regions of the substrate.


CLS 438/373
TXT Multiple ion implantation steps:

    Process under subclass 372 wherein the plural doping steps are affected by
    implanting electrically active dopant ions into semiconductive regions of
    the substrate.


CLS 438/374
TXT Using same conductivity-type dopant:

    Process under subclass 373 wherein the same conductivity-type electrically
    active dopant ion is introduced using plural ion implantation steps.


CLS 438/375
TXT Forming partially overlapping regions:

    Process under subclass 372 wherein the plural doping steps are affected
    upon localized areas which lap over each other in part.


CLS 438/376
TXT Single dopant forming regions of different depth or concentrations:

    Process under subclass 372 wherein the plural doping steps form regions
    which differ in amount of impurity or the distance the impurity has to
    travel inwardly from the surface.


CLS 438/377
TXT Through same mask opening:

    Process under subclass 372 wherein plural doping steps are affected through
    the same opening in a dopant masking layer.


CLS 438/378
TXT Radiation or energy treatment modifying properties of semiconductor regions
    of substrate (e.g., thermal, corpuscular, electromagnetic, etc.):

    Process under subclass 309 for making a bipolar transistor having a step of
    irradiating the semiconductor substrate to alter the electrical properties
    of semiconductive regions thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    795,    for a process of modifying properties of semiconductive regions of
    the substrate via radiation or energy treatment.


CLS 438/379
TXT VOLTAGE VARIABLE CAPACITANCE DEVICE MANUFACTURE (E.G., VARACTOR, ETC.):

    Process under the class definition for making an active solid-state device
    wherein the device changes its capacitance depending on the amount of
    voltage applied thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclass 312 for an insulated gate FET combined with a voltage variable
    capacitor, subclass 480 for a Schottky barrier in a voltage variable
    capacitance diode, and subclasses 595+ for a voltage variable capacitance
    device.

    332,    Modulators, subclass 136 for a modulator combined with a voltage
    variable capacitor.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 277+ for a
    per se voltage variable capacitor (varactor).


CLS 438/380
TXT AVALANCHE DIODE MANUFACTURE (E.G., IMPATT, TRAPPAT, ETC.):

    Process under the class definition for making a device which is configured
    to operate in a manner in which an external voltage is applied in the
    reverse-conducting direction of the semiconductor device junction with
    sufficient magnitude to cause the potential barrier at the junction to
    breakdown due to electrons or holes gaining sufficient speed to dislodge
    valence electrons and thus create more hole-electron current carriers
    resulting in a sudden change from high dynamic electrical resistance to
    very low dynamic resistance.

    (1)     Note.  The terms Zener diode and Zener breakdown voltage are used
    rather loosely in that the breakdown mechanism above about 6 volts is
    thought to be due to avalanching and that below about 6 volts is thought to
    be due essentially to tunnelling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     for a process of making a device or circuit which is responsive to
    a nonelectrical signal and operates in an avalanche breakdown mode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclass 199 for an avalanche diode in a noncharge transfer device having a
    heterojunction, subclass 438 for a light-responsive avalanche junction
    device, subclass 481 for an avalanche diode having a Schottky barrier,
    subclass 551 for an avalanche diode used as a voltage reference element
    combined with pn junction isolation means in an integrated circuit, and
    subclasses 603+ for avalanche diodes in general.


CLS 438/381
TXT MAKING PASSIVE DEVICE (E.G., RESISTOR, CAPACITOR, ETC.):

    Process under the class definition for making an electrical device or
    component utilizing a semiconductor substrate in which charge carriers do
    not change their energy levels and that does not provide rectification,
    amplification, or switching, but which does react to voltage and current
    input.

    (1)     Note.  Formation of a conductive layer of specified resistivity is
    not sufficient for placement hereunder unless the intent is for the layer
    to function as a discrete resistor element.

    (2)     Note.  An isolation structure which functions by the application of
    an electrical bias (e.g., a channel stop, guard ring, or field plate
    region) is not a passive charge storage element proper here for, nor is the
    floating gate structure of a field effect device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    subclass 61 for methods of vitrifying or sintering of inorganic preform to
    make a discrete passive device (e.g., multilayer ceramic capacitor, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for making a device controlled ink jet printhead or thermal
    printhead.

    50,     for a process of making a pressure sensitive resistive device.

    171,    for a process of making a Schottky gate field effect transistor
    combined with a passive electrical device.

    190,    for a process of making a junction gate field effect transistor
    combined with a passive electrical device.

    210,    for a process of making complementary insulated gate field effect
    transistors combined with a passive electrical device.

    238,    for a process of making an insulated gate field effect transistor
    combined with a passive electrical device.

    329,    for a process of making a bipolar transistor combined with a
    passive electrical device.

    379,    for a process of making a voltage variable capacitance device.


CLS 438/382
TXT Resistor:

    Process under subclass 381 involving the manufacture of an electrically
    resistive element utilizing a semiconductor substrate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for a process of making an electrical resistor-type thermal
    printhead.

    50,     for a process of making a resistor responsive to physical stress.

    238,    for a process of making an insulated gate field effect transistor
    combined with a resistor device or element.

    330,    for making a bipolar transistor combined with a resistor device or
    element.


CLS 438/383
TXT Lightly doped junction isolated resistor:

    Process under subclass 382 wherein the resistive element is in the form of
    a lightly doped layer of one conductivity type located in a region of
    opposite conductivity type, such that the pn junction between the resistor
    region and its containing opposite conductivity-type region serves to
    electrically isolate the resistor.


CLS 438/384
TXT Deposited thin film resistor:

    Process under subclass 382 wherein the resistor is formed by the deposition
    of resistive material upon the semiconductor substrate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, especially subclasses 96+ for producing a
    printed circuit by coating and subclasses 101+ for producing a resistor for
    current control by coating onto a nonsemiconductive substrate.


CLS 438/385
TXT Altering resistivity of conductor:

    Process under subclass 384 wherein the electrical resistivity of a
    conductive material (i.e., metallization) is altered subsequent to
    deposition.


CLS 438/386
TXT Trench capacitor:

    Process under subclass 381 for making a capacitor located in a groove in a
    semiconductive substrate.


CLS 438/387
TXT Having stacked capacitor structure (e.g., stacked trench, buried stacked
    capacitor, etc.):

    Process under subclass 386 wherein the trench capacitor contains a number
    of capacitor plate regions aligned vertically above each other.


CLS 438/388
TXT With epitaxial layer formed over the trench:

    Process under subclass 386 for making a trench capacitor including a step
    of forming an epitaxial semiconductive layer over the trench region.


CLS 438/389
TXT Including doping of trench surfaces:

    Process under subclass 386 for making a trench capacitor having a step of
    introducing electrically active dopant species into a surface (i.e.,
    sidewall or bottom) of the trench in which the capacitor is located.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    524,    for a process of implanting a dopant into a grooved semiconductive
    region.


CLS 438/390
TXT Multiple doping steps:

    Process under subclass 389 for making a trench capacitor utilizing plural
    doping steps.


CLS 438/391
TXT Including isolating means formed in trench:

    Process under subclass 389 for making a trench capacitor having structure
    functioning as electrical isolation formed in the trench bottom.


CLS 438/392
TXT Doping by outdiffusion from a dopant source layer (e.g., doped oxide):

    Process under subclass 389 for making a trench capacitor wherein the trench
    surfaces are doped via outdiffusion from a doped source layer.


CLS 438/393
TXT Planar capacitor:

    Process under subclass 386 for making a capacitor wherein a generally
    planar region of a semiconductive substrate forms a first capacitor plate
    with a dielectric layer and a second capacitor plate formed thereupon.


CLS 438/394
TXT Including doping of semiconductive region:

    Process under subclass 393 for making a planar capacitor having a step of
    introducing electrically active dopant species into a semiconductive region
    of the substrate forming the first capacitor plate.


CLS 438/395
TXT Multiple doping steps:

    Process under subclass 394 for making a planar capacitor utilizing plural
    steps of incorporating electrically active dopant species into a
    semiconductive region of the substrate forming the first capacitor plate.


CLS 438/396
TXT Stacked capacitor:

    Process under subclass 386 for making a capacitor containing a number of
    capacitor plate and dielectric layers deposited successively one atop
    another.


CLS 438/397
TXT Including selectively removing material to undercut and expose storage node
    layer:

    Process under subclass 396 for making a stacked capacitor having a step of
    selectively removing material to undercut and expose the capacitor
    electrode which serves as the storage node layer.

    (1)     Note.  The capacitor electrode on which the electrical charge is
    stored is referred to as the storage node layer.


CLS 438/398
TXT Including texturizing storage node layer:

    Process under subclass 396 for making a stacked capacitor having a step of
    roughening the surface of the capacitor plate which serves as the storage
    node layer.

    (1)     Note.  The capacitor electrode on which the electrical charge is
    stored is referred to as the storage node layer.


CLS 438/399
TXT Having contacts formed by selective growth or deposition:

    Process under subclass 396 for making a stacked capacitor wherein
    electrical contacts are formed by selective growth or deposition of
    conductive material onto the substrate.


CLS 438/400
TXT FORMATION OF ELECTRICALLY ISOLATED LATERAL SEMICONDUCTIVE STRUCTURE:

    Process under the class definition for making partial or total electrical
    isolation means serving to minimize electrical current flow between
    laterally adjoining semiconductive regions of the substrate.

    (1)     Note.  To be proper hereunder, the proximate function of the formed
    semiconductor structure must be to electrically isolate laterally adjoining
    semiconductive regions, wherein each region is adapted for the construction
    of an electrical device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for a process of manufacturing a regenerative switching device
    having a guard ring or field plate component.

    196,    for a process of making a junction gate field effect transistor
    having an electrical isolation structure.

    207,    for a process of making a structure combining complementary
    insulated gate field effect transistors with a bipolar transistor (BiCMOS)
    additionally having an electrical isolation structure.

    218,    for a process of making a structure having complementary insulated
    gate field effect transistors (CMOS) additionally having an electrical
    isolation structure.

    294,    for a process of manufacturing an insulated gate field effect
    transistor having an electrical isolation structure.

    353,    for a process of manufacturing a bipolar transistor having an
    electrical isolation structure.

    455,    for a process in which plural semiconductive substrates are joined
    together with insulative material to provide layered semiconductive regions
    which may be electrically isolated from one another.

    479,    for a process involving fluid growth of a layer of semiconductive
    material upon an insulative substrate (i.e., SOI formation).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 499+ for an integrated circuit structure with electrically
    isolated components.


CLS 438/401
TXT Having substrate registration feature (e.g., alignment mark):

    Process under subclass 400 wherein the process of forming electrical
    isolation utilizes an alignment feature formed on the semiconductive
    substrate or forms an alignment feature for subsequent use.


CLS 438/402
TXT And gettering of substrate:

    Process under subclass 400 for making laterally spaced electrically
    isolated semiconductor regions having a step of gettering a semiconductor
    substrate.


CLS 438/403
TXT Having semi-insulating component:

    Process under subclass 400 for making laterally spaced electrically
    isolated semiconductor regions wherein a high resistivity semiconductive
    component serves to electrically isolate, at least in part, the laterally
    spaced regions.


CLS 438/404
TXT Total dielectric isolation:

    Process under subclass 400 for making laterally spaced electrically
    isolated semiconductor regions wherein the semiconductive regions are fully
    electrically isolated by dielectric insulative material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219,    for a process of making complementary insulated gate field effect
    transistors having total dielectric isolation means.

    295,    for a process of making an insulated gate field effect transistor
    having total dielectric isolation means.

    355,    for a process of making a bipolar transistor having total
    dielectric isolation means.


CLS 438/405
TXT And separate partially isolated semiconductor regions:

    Process under subclass 404 for making a total dielectric isolation
    semiconductor structure additionally having laterally spaced semiconductor
    regions at least one of which is fully electrically isolated from other
    laterally spaced semiconductive regions and at least one other region which
    is partially electrically isolated from another laterally spaced
    semiconductive region.


CLS 438/406
TXT Bonding of plural semiconductive substrates:

    Process under subclass 404 for making a total dielectric isolation
    semiconductor structure including a step of joining plural semiconductive
    substrates together into a coherent monolith, such as by thermal treatment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    455,    for a process of laminating or bonding of plural semiconductive
    substrates not resulting in an electrically isolated lateral semiconductor
    structure.


CLS 438/407
TXT Nondopant implantation:

    Process under subclass 404 for making a total dielectric isolation
    semiconductor structure including a step of ion implantation of a
    nonelectrically active impurity into a semiconductive region of the
    substrate.

    (1)     Note.  The nondopant may react with the semiconductor region to
    produce a dielectric material embedded in the semiconductor region.


CLS 438/408
TXT With electrolytic treatment step:

    Process under subclass 404 for making a total dielectric isolation
    semiconductor structure including a step of electrochemical treatment of
    the semiconductor substrate (i.e., such as to affect etching or coating
    action thereupon).


CLS 438/409
TXT Porous semiconductor formation:

    Process under subclass 408 wherein the electrolytic treatment results in
    the formation of a porous semiconductor component.


CLS 438/410
TXT Encroachment of separate locally oxidized regions:

    Process under subclass 404 for making a total dielectric isolation
    semiconductor structure including a step of oxidation of adjacent
    semiconductive regions whereby the oxidized regions acquire a touching
    relationship.


CLS 438/411
TXT Air isolation (e.g., beam lead supported semiconductor islands, etc.):

    Process under subclass 404 for making a total dielectric isolation
    structure wherein the resulting structure has islands of semiconductor
    material supported by beam leads and separated by air.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    461,    for a process of depositing electrically conductive material to a
    semiconductive substrate and subsequently removing portions of the
    substrate to separate the same into beam leaded semiconductor devices.

    619,    for process of depositing an electrically conductive structure
    (i.e., metallization) upon a semiconductive substrate contacting spaced
    regions thereupon utilizing an air-gap dielectric.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclass 522 for an air bridge isolated integrated circuit structure.


CLS 438/412
TXT Semiconductor islands formed upon insulating substrate or layer (e.g., mesa
    isolation, etc.):

    Process under subclass 411 for making a total dielectric isolation
    semiconductor structure wherein laterally spaced semiconductor islands are
    formed upon an insulative substrate or layer.


CLS 438/413
TXT With epitaxial semiconductor formation:

    Process under subclass 404 for making a total dielectric isolation
    semiconductor structure having a step of epitaxially depositing a
    semiconductive layer onto the substrate.


CLS 438/414
TXT Isolation by PN junction only:

    Process under subclass 400 whereby the laterally spaced regions of the
    semiconductor substrate are electrically isolated solely through the use of
    properly biased PN junctions.


CLS 438/415
TXT Thermomigration:

    Process under subclass 414 for making junction isolated laterally spaced
    semiconductor regions having a step of dopant migration under the influence
    of a temperature gradient.


CLS 438/416
TXT With epitaxial semiconductor formation:

    Process under subclass 414 for making junction isolated laterally spaced
    semiconductor regions having a step of epitaxially depositing a
    semiconductor layer.


CLS 438/417
TXT And simultaneous polycrystalline growth:

    Process under subclass 416 for making junction isolated laterally spaced
    semiconductor regions in which polycrystalline semiconductive regions are
    deposited simultaneously with the epitaxial deposition.


CLS 438/418
TXT Dopant addition:

    Process under subclass 416 for making junction isolated laterally spaced
    semiconductor regions including a step of introducing an electrically
    active dopant species into semiconductive regions of the substrate.


CLS 438/419
TXT Plural doping steps:

    Process under subclass 418 for making junction isolated laterally spaced
    semiconductor regions including multiple steps of introducing an
    electrically active dopant species into semiconductive regions of the
    substrate.


CLS 438/420
TXT Plural doping steps:

    Process under subclass 414 for making an junction isolated laterally spaced
    semiconductor regions including multiple steps of introducing an
    electrically active dopant species into semiconductive regions of the
    substrate.


CLS 438/421
TXT Having air-gap dielectric (e.g., groove, etc.):

    Process under subclass 400 for making an electrically isolated laterally
    spaced semiconductor structure resulting in laterally spaced semiconductive
    regions separated at least in part by a recessed air-gap feature relative
    to the surrounding surface (e.g., groove, trench, notch, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    411,    for a process of forming a total dielectric isolation structure
    utilizing air isolation.


CLS 438/422
TXT Enclosed cavity:

    Process under subclass 421 wherein the air-gap dielectric is in the form of
    an enclosed cavity or void between the laterally spaced semiconductive
    regions.


CLS 438/423
TXT Implanting to form insulator:

    Process under subclass 400 for making an electrically isolated laterally
    spaced semiconductor structure including a step of implanting a
    nonelectrically active dopant species to form an insulative region which
    serves to electrically isolate lateral semiconductive regions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    407,    for a process of forming total dielectric isolation with a step of
    implanting a nondopant ion.

    766,    for a process of forming a buried insulative region by ion
    implantation of a nondopant species.


CLS 438/424
TXT Grooved and refilled with deposited dielectric material:

    Process under subclass 400 for making electrically isolated laterally
    spaced semiconductor regions including a step of forming a recess or trench
    in the semiconductive substrate and refilling the same with deposited
    insulative material.


CLS 438/425
TXT Combined with formation of recessed oxide by localized oxidation:

    Process under subclass 424 for making electrically isolated laterally
    spaced semiconductor regions by grooving and refilling with insulative
    material including the step of forming an embedded oxide by localized
    oxidation (of semiconductor material).

    (1)     Note.  To be proper herein, the locally oxidized regions must
    consume semiconductor regions of the substrate (i.e., other than the
    oxidation solely of deposited layers residing within the groove).
    Additionally, the uppermost surface of the embedded oxide must be
    physically below the adjoining semiconductor top surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    444,    for a process of forming a recessed oxide electrical isolation
    structure by localized oxidation including a preliminary step of forming a
    groove into the semiconductor substrate.



CLS 438/426
TXT Recessed oxide laterally extending from groove:

    Process under subclass 425 for making electrically isolated laterally
    spaced semiconductor regions by grooving and refilling with insulative
    material whereby the embedded oxidized region extends laterally from the
    groove region.



CLS 438/427
TXT Refilling multiple grooves of different widths or depths:

    Process under subclass 424 for making electrically isolated laterally
    spaced semiconductor regions by grooving and refilling with insulative
    material wherein grooves of differing widths or depths are filled with
    insulative material.


CLS 438/428
TXT Reflow of insulator:

    Process under subclass 427 for making electrically isolated laterally
    spaced semiconductor regions by grooving and refilling with insulative
    material including a step of redistributing insulative material by the
    viscous flow of the insulative material when exposed to high temperature.


CLS 438/429
TXT And epitaxial semiconductor formation in groove:

    Process under subclass 424 for making electrically isolated laterally
    spaced semiconductor regions by grooving and refilling with insulative
    material including a step of epitaxially depositing semiconductive material
    in the groove.


CLS 438/430
TXT And deposition of polysilicon or noninsulative material into groove:

    Process under subclass 424 for making electrically isolated laterally
    spaced semiconductor regions by grooving and refilling with insulative
    material wherein polysilicon or noninsulative material is deposited into
    the groove.


CLS 438/431
TXT Oxidation of deposited material:

    Process under subclass 430 for making electrically isolated laterally
    spaced semiconductor regions by grooving and refilling with insulative
    material including a step of oxidizing the polysilicon or noninsulative
    material deposited into the groove.


CLS 438/432
TXT Nonoxidized portions remaining in groove after oxidation:

    Process under subclass 431 for making electrically isolated laterally
    spaced semiconductor regions by grooving and refilling with insulative
    material wherein at least a portion of the polysilicon or noninsulative
    material deposited into the groove remains after the oxidation step.


CLS 438/433
TXT Dopant addition:

    Process under subclass 424 for making electrically isolated laterally
    spaced semiconductor regions by grooving and refilling with insulative
    material combined with a step of introducing an electrically active dopant
    species into a semiconductive region of the substrate.


CLS 438/434
TXT From doped insulator in groove:

    Process under subclass 433 for making electrically isolated laterally
    spaced semiconductor regions by grooving and refilling with insulative
    material wherein the semiconductor regions are doped from a doped insulator
    residing in the groove.


CLS 438/435
TXT Multiple insulative layers in groove:

    Process under subclass 424 for making electrically isolated laterally
    spaced semiconductor regions by grooving and refilling with plural
    insulative layers.


CLS 438/436
TXT Reflow of insulator:

    Process under subclass 435 for making electrically isolated laterally
    spaced semiconductor regions by grooving and refilling with insulative
    material including a step of redistributing insulative material by the
    viscous flow of the insulative material when exposed to high temperature.


CLS 438/437
TXT Conformal insulator formation:

    Process under subclass 435 for making electrically isolated laterally
    spaced semiconductor regions by grooving and refilling with insulative
    material including forming an insulative layer which follows the contour of
    the groove.


CLS 438/438
TXT Reflow of insulator:

    Process under subclass 424 for making electrically isolated laterally
    spaced semiconductor regions by grooving and refilling with insulative
    material including a step of redistributing insulative material by the
    viscous flow of the insulative material when exposed to high temperature.


CLS 438/439
TXT Recessed oxide by localized oxidation (i.e., LOCOS):

    Process under subclass 400 for making electrically isolated laterally
    spaced semiconductor regions including the step of oxidizing a portion of a
    semiconductive material to form an embedded oxide (e.g., field oxide)
    therein which isolates the laterally adjacent semiconductive regions.


CLS 438/440
TXT Including nondopant implantation:

    Process under subclass 439 including a step of ion implanting a
    nonelectrically active impurity species into any region of the
    semiconductor substrate.

    (1)     Note.  The nondopant may serve to alter the oxidation rate of the
    implanted region.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    423,    for a process of forming a laterally spaced isolation structure
    involving the implantation of an ion which reacts with the substrate to
    form an insulative material.


CLS 438/441
TXT With electrolytic treatment step:

    Process under subclass 439 including a step of electrochemical treatment of
    the semiconductor substrate (e.g., such as to affect etching or coating
    action thereon).


CLS 438/442
TXT With epitaxial semiconductor layer formation:

    Process under subclass 439 including a step of epitaxially growing a single
    crystal semiconductor layer on the substrate.


CLS 438/443
TXT Etchback of recessed oxide:

    Process under subclass 439 having a step of thinning the formed recessed
    oxide by chemical etching action followed by an additional step of
    oxidizing a semiconductive region of the substrate.


CLS 438/444
TXT Preliminary etching of groove:

    Process under subclass 439 including a preliminary step of etching a trench
    into the semiconductive substrate followed by locally oxidizing the trench
    surfaces to form the recessed oxide therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    421,    for a process of forming electrically isolated lateral
    semiconductive regions utilizing an air-gap separation.

    425,    for a process of forming a grooved and refilled electrical
    isolation structure including a step of forming an embedded localized
    oxidation region of the semiconductor substrate within or adjoining the
    groove.


CLS 438/445
TXT Masking of groove sidewall:

    Process under subclass 444 utilizing a layer in contact with the groove
    sidewalls which serves as a protective covering during either an etching or
    oxidation step.


CLS 438/446
TXT Polysilicon containing sidewall:

    Process under subclass 445 utilizing a polysilicon containing component for
    masking the groove sidewalls.


CLS 438/447
TXT Dopant addition:

    Process under subclass 444 including a step of introducing an electrically
    active dopant species into semiconductive regions of the substrate.


CLS 438/448
TXT Utilizing oxidation mask having polysilicon component:

    Process under subclass 439 utilizing a layer in contact with the substrate
    having a polysilicon containing component which serves as a protective
    covering during the localized oxidation step.


CLS 438/449
TXT Dopant addition:

    Process under subclass 439 including a step of introducing an electrically
    active dopant species into semiconductive regions of the substrate.


CLS 438/450
TXT Implanting through recessed oxide:

    Process under subclass 449 wherein the dopant species is implanted through
    the recessed oxide into the semiconductive regions therebeneath.


CLS 438/451
TXT Plural doping steps:

    Process under subclass 449 utilizing multiple steps of doping
    semiconductive regions of the substrate.


CLS 438/452
TXT Plural oxidation steps to form recessed oxide:

    Process under subclass 439 having multiple steps of oxidizing the
    semiconductor substrate in the region of the recessed oxide.


CLS 438/453
TXT And electrical conductor formation (i.e., metallization):

    Process under subclass 439 including a step of making an electrically
    conductive member integral to the semiconductive substrate.

    (1)     Note.  The contact may be, for example, directly to semiconductive
    regions of the substrate or may reside atop the field oxide isolation
    structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    584,    for a process of depositing electrically or thermally conductive
    material on a semiconductor substrate.


CLS 438/454
TXT Field plate electrode:

    Process under subclass 400 having a step of forming an electrically
    conductive structure formed on a major surface of the semiconductor
    substrate for electrically separating laterally positioned device regions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    584,    for a process of depositing electrically or thermally conductive
    material on a semiconductor substrate.


CLS 438/455
TXT BONDING OF PLURAL SEMICONDUCTOR SUBSTRATES:

    Process under the class definition in which plural semiconductive
    substrates are joined together into a coherent body, such as by thermal
    treatment.

    (1)     Note.  Connection of electrical terminals on transposed
    semiconductive substrates by joining the respective terminals on one
    substrate to the terminals on a second substrate (e.g., flip-chip bonding,
    etc.) is a packaging operation and as such cross-referencing hereunder is
    discouraged.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for a process of packaging (e.g., mounting, encapsulating, etc.)
    involving the assembly of plural semiconductive substrates or the treating
    of a packaged device containing the same.

    406,    for a process of making a full electrical isolation structure
    including a laminating step whereby current flow will be minimized between
    laterally adjoining semiconductive regions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, particularly subclasses 36+ for fusion bonding
    of glass to a formed part. While Class 65 considers silicon and silicon
    dioxide glass, and hence takes the melting, shaping or fusion bonding of
    the same (as well as combined operations whether preparatory or subsequent
    to the melting, shaping, or fusion bonding step), if the structure formed
    is identified as having utility for semiconductor electrical devices,
    placement is proper in Class 438.

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, subclass 1 for processes of joining
    independent crystals.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    60+, for a per se process of adhesive bonding or assembly therefor of
    plural preforms.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, for processes of metal fusion bonding of
    semiconductive substrates.


CLS 438/456
TXT Having enclosed cavity:

    Process under subclass 455 for joining plural semiconductive substrates
    into an integral body resulting in a partially or wholly enclosed void
    structure therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    422,    for a process of forming an electrically isolated lateral
    semiconductive structure utilizing a partially or wholly enclosed cavity as
    an air-gap dielectric.


CLS 438/457
TXT Warping of semiconductor substrate:

    Process under subclass 455 for joining plural semiconductive substrates
    into an integral body including a step of bending one or more of the
    semiconductor substrates to be joined.


CLS 438/458
TXT Subsequent separation into plural bodies (e.g., delaminating, dicing, etc.):

    Process under subclass 455 for joining plural semiconductive substrates
    into an integral body having a step of dividing the integral body into
    plural individual bodies subsequent to the joining operation.


CLS 438/459
TXT Thinning of semiconductor substrate:

    Process under subclass 455 for joining plural semiconductive substrates
    into an integral body having a step of reducing the thickness of at least
    one of the semiconductive substrates.


CLS 438/460
TXT SEMICONDUCTOR SUBSTRATE DICING:

    Process under the class definition including the step of separating the
    semiconductor substrate into plural individual bodies (e.g., die, etc.)
    usually by removal of material therefrom or by cleavage thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for a process of packaging (e.g., mounting, encapsulating, etc.) of
    treating a packaged semiconductor device having a step of dividing a
    semiconductor substrate into discrete individual units.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, for a generic process of cutting a substrate into discrete
    individual units.

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, subclasses 1+ for methods.

    451,    Abrading, for a process of dicing by abrading.


CLS 438/461
TXT Beam lead formation:

    Process under subclass 460 for separating a semiconductor substrate into
    plural individual bodies wherein the resultant bodies possess electrical
    leads which extend beyond the edges of the body (i.e., cantilevered).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    411,    for a process of making laterally spaced isolated semiconductor
    structure wherein self-supporting electrodes hold plural semiconductor
    bodies in spaced relationship to each other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 827 for beam lead device manufacture
    wherein an electrically conductive body is mounted in a cantilever fashion
    to an electrical device.


CLS 438/462
TXT Having specified scribe region structure (e.g., alignment mark, plural
    grooves, etc.):

    Process under subclass 460 wherein the region of the semiconductor
    substrate delineating the separating boundary between adjacent die
    possesses a specified structure.

    (1)     Note.  The specified structure may serve no function in the
    separation of the substrate into plural bodies (e.g., alignment marks,
    etc.) or may facilitate the separation operation (e.g., plural grooves of
    specified relationship, a trench having significant sidewall structure,
    etc.).

    (2)     Note.  A scribe groove, per se, or plural scribe lines intersecting
    in such a way so as to form chips of a certain shape (e.g., trapezoidal,
    etc.) are not considered proper herein.


CLS 438/463
TXT By electromagnetic irradiation (e.g., electron, laser, etc.):

    Process under subclass 460 utilizing electromagnetic radiation for dividing
    the semiconductor substrate into plural distinct bodies.

    (1)     Note.  Proper for this subclass are processes wherein the
    electromagnetic irradiation serves to from a "scribe" line (i.e., a
    weakened or removed area to facilitate subsequent separation) combined with
    an additional step of separating the substrate into distinct bodies at such
    line.


CLS 438/464
TXT With attachment to temporary support or carrier:

    Process under subclass 460 including a step of attaching the semiconductor
    substrate to a temporary holder to facilitate the handling of the substrate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    for a process of packaging (e.g., mounting, encapsulating, etc.) a
    semiconductor substrate by securing the same to a support (i.e., a
    mounting) or treating a packaged semiconductor device.


CLS 438/465
TXT Having a perfecting coating:

    Process under subclass 460 including a step of coating the semiconductor
    substrate with a coating which enhances the dicing operation.


CLS 438/466
TXT DIRECT APPLICATION OF ELECTRICAL CURRENT:

    Process under the class definition including the step having an electric
    current come in direct contact with the semiconductor substrate (i.e.,
    nonradiatively) to treat the same.

    (1)     Note.  Per se (a) irradiation of ionized atoms or molecules to
    implant the same into a semiconductor material, (b) exposing a
    semiconductive substrate to a plasma or electron beam, or (c)
    electrochemical treatment of a semiconductive substrate, is not considered
    a direct application electrical treatment for this and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for a semiconductor manufacturing process including a step of
    measuring or testing of the process or of the substrate for feedback
    control of the manufacturing process.

    17,     for a semiconductor manufacturing process including a step of
    measuring or testing an electrical characteristic of the process or of the
    substrate.

    88,     for a process of making a device responsive to electromagnetic
    radiation having a step of directly applying electrical current.

    101,    for a process of manufacturing a point contact semiconductive
    device having a step of directly applying electrical current.

    103,    for a process of manufacturing a device having a selenium or
    tellurium elemental semiconductive device including a step of directly
    applying electrical current.

    292,    for a process of making an insulated gate field effect transistor
    having a step of directly applying electrical current.

    351,    for a process of making a bipolar transistor having a step of
    directly applying electrical current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, especially subclasses 192.1+
    for processes of coating, forming, or etching by sputtering.

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclass for per se
    electrical testing (i.e., aging).


CLS 438/467
TXT To alter conductivity of fuse or antifuse element:

    Process under subclass 466 involving the direct application of electrical
    current to a fuse or antifuse portion of the semiconductor substrate to
    alter the conductivity of same.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132,    for a process of making an array of electrical devices and
    selectively interconnecting the devices via fusible links.

    281,    for a process of making an insulated gate field effect transistor
    combined with a fuse or integral short.

    333,    for a process of making a bipolar transistor combined with a fuse
    or integral short.


CLS 438/468
TXT Electromigration:

    Process under subclass 466 involving the movement of atoms (usually dopant
    atoms) under the influence of an electric field.


CLS 438/469
TXT Utilizing pulsed current:

    Process under subclass 466 wherein the electrical current is presented in
    periodic surges.


CLS 438/470
TXT Fusion of semiconductor region:

    Process under subclass 466 wherein semiconductor regions of the substrate
    are melted upon application of the electrical current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89,     for a process of making a semiconductive device responsive to
    electromagnetic radiation having a step of fusing or solidifying a
    semiconductive region of the substrate.

    293,    for a process of making an insulated gate field effect transistor
    having a step of fusing or solidifying a semiconductive region of the
    substrate.

    352,    for a process of making a bipolar transistor having a step of
    fusing or solidifying a semiconductive region of the substrate


CLS 438/471
TXT GETTERING OF SUBSTRATE:

    Process under the class definition having a step of treating a
    semiconductor substrate to reduce or remove deleterious defects
    (impurities, vacancies, dislocations, etc.) therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of gettering techniques include segregation (e.g.,
    coalescence) of defects to a defined region, implanting internal defect
    localizing regions, removal of superfluous electrical charges other than
    mere static electricity or those accumulated during manufacture (e.g.,
    passivation of dangling bonds on the substrate surface by covalently
    bonding to hydrogen), and removal of mobile ion contamination such as by
    volatilization.

    (2)     Note.  The introduction of recombination centers (i.e., deep level
    dopants) into the semiconductor substrate, such centers serving to control
    carrier lifetime, is not considered to be gettering for the purpose of this
    and indented subclasses.  However, the removal of the same from the
    semiconductor substrate is proper hereunder.

    (3)     Note.  Gettering includes treating the substrate locally (e.g.,
    surface, internal regions, etc.). In gettering, impurities within the
    substrate may be attracted to a region of the substrate where they can be
    removed or "fixed".  In cleaning, foreign matter on the substrate surface
    is removed.  Thus there may be a cleaning step within an overall process of
    gettering.  Processes of apparatus gettering (i.e., apparatus cleaning) are
    not considered proper hereunder unless combined with the gettering of a
    semiconductor substrate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    for a step of contaminant removal or mitigation in a process of
    mounting, packaging, or encapsulating a semiconductor device.

    510,    for a process of doping semiconductive regions with an electrically
    active element.

    795,    for a process of radiation or energy treating a semiconductive
    substrate to modify the properties thereof of semiconductive regions
    thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 1 through 42
    for a process of cleaning.


CLS 438/472
TXT By vibrating or impacting:

    Process under subclass 471 wherein a step of vibrating the semiconductive
    substrate or striking the semiconductive substrate with solid material is
    utilized to produce a gettering effect.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, especially subclasses 6+
    for a process of cleaning a semiconductor wafer by impacting the wafer with
    solid matter.


CLS 438/473
TXT By implanting or irradiating:

    Process under subclass 471 wherein a step of implanting or irradiating the
    semiconductive substrate is utilized to produce a gettering effect.


CLS 438/474
TXT Ionized radiation (e.g., corpuscular or plasma treatment, etc.):

    Process under subclass 473 wherein ionized radiation is applied to the
    semiconductor substrate to produce a gettering effect.


CLS 438/475
TXT Hydrogen plasma (i.e., hydrogenization):

    Process under subclass 474 wherein the radiation is a plasma containing
    ionized hydrogen (i.e., proton irradiation).


CLS 438/476
TXT By layers which are coated, contacted, or diffused:

    Process under subclass 471 wherein the substrate is exposed to a specified
    material by (a) depositing a layer of the material on the substrate, (b)
    physically contacting the substrate with the material, or (c) diffusing
    into the substrate a gettering species to form a gettering region in the
    substrate.


CLS 438/477
TXT By vapor phase surface reaction:

    Process under subclass 471 in which the substrate is treated with a
    reactive gas mixture which preferentially forms volatile compounds with the
    undesired impurities.


CLS 438/478
TXT FORMATION OF SEMICONDUCTIVE ACTIVE REGION ON ANY SUBSTRATE (E.G., FLUID
    GROWTH, DEPOSITION, ETC.):

    Process under the class definition for depositing onto any substrate single
    or multiple layers of semiconductor material adapted to serve as an active
    device region, the semiconductive material being deposited as amorphous,
    polycrystalline, or single crystalline material.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are those processes for the fluid growth of
    semiconductive material having a sufficiently high resistivity so as to be
    termed semi-insulative.  However, if the proximate function of the
    semiconductive material is as a electrical conductor (e.g., a multilayer
    inter-connect having a polysilicon layer), classification is excluded fro m
    this and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes of single crystal growth of
    semiconductor material upon a seed or substrate and perfecting steps
    combined therewith.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, particularly subclasses 348+ for
    methods of producing elemental silicon intended as a feedstock for later
    fabrication into active layers/regions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for selenium or tellurium elemental semiconductor deposition,

    104,    for transition metal oxide or copper sulfide compound semiconductor
    deposition,

    105,    for diamond semiconductor deposition,

    412,    for a process of forming laterally spaced isolated semiconductive
    islands/mesas upon an insulating substrate or layer.

    414,    for a process of forming laterally spaced junction isolated
    semiconductive regions.

    584,    for a process of coating conductive material onto a semiconductive
    substrate, or intermediate layers thereupon.


CLS 438/479
TXT On insulating substrate or layer:

    Process under subclass 478 wherein the semiconductor layer is deposited
    onto an electrically insulating substrate or layer.

    (1)     Note.  The formation of a semiconductive active region on an
    insulative substrate by the chemical reduction of a portion of the
    insulative substrate thereby altering the reduced portion of the insulative
    substrate into a semiconductive region is proper herein.


CLS 438/480
TXT Including implantation of ion which reacts with semiconductor substrate to
    form insulating layer:

    Process under subclass 479 for the deposition of a semiconductor layer onto
    an electrically insulating layer including implanting an ion which reacts
    with the semiconductive regions of the substrate to form an electrically
    insulating layer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    766,    for a per se process of implanting an ion which reacts with
    semiconductive regions of the substrate to form an electrical insulator.


CLS 438/481
TXT Utilizing epitaxial lateral overgrowth:

    Process under subclass 479 wherein the semiconductor material is deposited
    so as to overlay electrically insulative material and such that epitaxial
    growth occurs laterally from a crystal seeding region.


CLS 438/482
TXT Amorphous semiconductor:

    Process under subclass 478 wherein the deposited semiconductive material
    possesses no regular crystalline lattice.


CLS 438/483
TXT Compound semiconductor:

    Process under subclass 482 wherein the deposited amorphous semiconductor is
    a compound semiconductor.


CLS 438/484
TXT Running length (e.g., sheet, strip, etc.):

    Process under subclass 482 involving the fluid growth of an amorphous
    semiconductor onto a substrate presented as a continuum of indeterminate
    length.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for a process of making a device responsive to electromagnetic
    radiation utilizing the deposition of a semiconductive active layer onto a
    substrate of indeterminate length.


CLS 438/485
TXT Deposition utilizing plasma (e.g., glow discharge, etc.):

    Process under subclass 482 utilizing a plasma or glow discharge during the
    deposition of the semiconductive material.


CLS 438/486
TXT And subsequent crystallization:

    Process under subclass 482 having a step of depositing an amorphous
    semiconductor layer combined with the subsequent crystallization of the
    amorphous semiconductor layer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, appropriate subclasses for the process of
    single crystallization and perfecting steps therewith.


CLS 438/487
TXT Utilizing wave energy (e.g., laser, electron beam, etc.):

    Process under subclass 486 whereby the crystallization is affected by the
    application of a source of wave energy to the amorphous semiconductor.


CLS 438/488
TXT Polycrystalline semiconductor:

    Process under subclass 478 wherein the deposited semiconductive material is
    polycrystalline (i.e., possesses multiple crystalline regions having grain
    boundaries therebetween).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    764,    for processes of depositing semi-insulative polycrystalline silicon
    upon a semiconductive substrate.


CLS 438/489
TXT Simultaneous single crystal formation:

    Process under subclass 488 wherein both single and polycrystalline regions
    are simultaneously formed on the same substrate.


CLS 438/490
TXT Running length (e.g., sheet, strip, etc.):

    Process under subclass 488 involving the fluid growth of an indeterminate
    length of amorphous semiconductor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for a process of making a device responsive to electromagnetic
    radiation utilizing the deposition of a semiconductive active layer onto a
    substrate of indeterminate length.


CLS 438/491
TXT And subsequent doping of polycrystalline semiconductor:

    Process under subclass 488 having a subsequent step of incorporating an
    electrically active dopant species into the polycrystalline semiconductive
    material.


CLS 438/492
TXT Fluid growth step with preceding and subsequent diverse operation:

    Process under subclass 478 having a step of the fluid growth of a
    semiconductor active region combined with a preceding nonfluid growth step
    and a subsequent nonfluid growth step.


CLS 438/493
TXT Plural fluid growth steps with intervening diverse operation:

    Process under subclass 478 wherein multiple fluid growth steps having
    combined therewith at least one step not perfecting to either prior or
    subsequent growth steps and which step is preformed intermediate to the
    multiple fluid growth steps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, appropriate subclasses for the process of
    single crystallization and perfecting steps therewith.


CLS 438/494
TXT Differential etching:

    Process under subclass 493 where the differential etching of the substrate
    intermediate to the steps of fluid growth of semiconductive material is the
    diverse step.


CLS 438/495
TXT Doping of semiconductor:

    Process under subclass 493 wherein the incorporation of an electrically
    active dopant species into a semiconductive region of the substrate
    intermediate to the steps of fluid growth of semiconductive material is the
    diverse step.


CLS 438/496
TXT Coating of semiconductive substrate with nonsemiconductive material:

    Process under subclass 493 wherein the coating of a nonsemiconductive
    material intermediate to the steps of fluid growth of semiconductive
    material is the diverse operation.


CLS 438/497
TXT Fluid growth from liquid combined with preceding diverse operation:

    Process under subclass 478 having a nonfluid growth operation which
    precedes the fluid growth of semiconductive material from the liquid state
    and is not merely perfecting thereto.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 117, class definition section I, C, (4) Note, for
    a detailed description of the types of perfecting prior operations which in
    combination with a step of single crystal growth are proper therein.


CLS 438/498
TXT Differential etching:

    Process under subclass 497 wherein the differential etching of the
    substrate prior to the fluid growth of semiconductive material from the
    liquid state is the diverse step.


CLS 438/499
TXT Doping of semiconductor:

    Process under subclass 497 wherein a semiconductive region of the substrate
    is incorporated with an electrically active dopant species prior to a step
    of fluid growth of semiconductive material from the liquid state.


CLS 438/500
TXT Fluid growth from liquid combined with subsequent diverse operation:

    Process under subclass 478 having a nonfluid growth operation which is
    subsequent to the fluid growth of semiconductive active region from the
    liquid state and is not merely perfecting thereto.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 117, class definition section I, C, (4) Note, for
    a detailed description of the types of perfecting subsequent operations
    which in combination with a step of single crystal growth are proper
    therein.


CLS 438/501
TXT Doping of semiconductor:

    Process under subclass 500 wherein a semiconductive region of the substrate
    is incorporated with an electrically active dopant species subsequent to a
    step of fluid growth of semiconductive material from the liquid state.


CLS 438/502
TXT Heat treatment:

    Process under subclass 500 wherein the substrate having the deposited
    semiconductor active region thereon is heat treated following a step of
    fluid growth of semiconductive material from the liquid state.


CLS 438/503
TXT Fluid growth from gaseous state combined with preceding diverse operation:

    Process under subclass 478 having a nonfluid growth operation which
    precedes the fluid growth of semiconductive material from the vapor state
    and is not merely perfecting thereto.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 117, class definition section I, C, (4) Note, for
    a detailed description of the types of perfecting prior operations which in
    combination with a step of single crystal growth are proper therein.


CLS 438/504
TXT Differential etching:

    Process under subclass 503 wherein the differential etching of the
    substrate prior to the fluid growth of semiconductive material from the
    gaseous state is the diverse step.


CLS 438/505
TXT Doping of semiconductor:

    Process under subclass 503 wherein a semiconductive region of the substrate
    is incorporated with an electrically active dopant species prior to a step
    of fluid growth of semiconductive material from the vapor or gaseous state.


CLS 438/506
TXT Ion implantation:

    Process under subclass 505 wherein the doping is by implantation of dopant
    ions into the semiconductor regions of the substrate.


CLS 438/507
TXT Fluid growth from gaseous state combined with subsequent diverse operation:

    Process under subclass 478 having a nonfluid growth operation which is
    subsequent to the fluid growth of semiconductive active region from the
    gaseous state and is not merely perfecting thereto.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 117, class definition section I, C, (4) Note, for
    a detailed description of the types of perfecting subsequent operations
    which in combination with a step of single crystal growth are proper
    therein.


CLS 438/508
TXT Doping of semiconductor:

    Process under subclass 507 wherein a semiconductive region of the substrate
    is incorporated with an electrically active dopant species subsequent to a
    step of fluid growth of semiconductive material from the gaseous state.


CLS 438/509
TXT Heat treatment:

    Process under subclass 507 wherein the substrate having the deposited
    semiconductor active region thereon is heat treated following a step of
    fluid growth of semiconductive material from the gaseous state.


CLS 438/510
TXT INTRODUCTION OF CONDUCTIVITY MODIFYING DOPANT INTO SEMICONDUCTIVE MATERIAL:

    Process under the class definition involving the incorporation within a
    semiconductive substrate of material referred to as dopants or dopant
    modifiers or impurity functioning to alter the electrical characteristics
    of semiconductive regions thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301,    for a process of making an insulated gate field effect transistor
    having a step for the self-aligned doping of source or drain regions.

    414,    for the formation of laterally spaced isolation regions within a
    semiconductive substrate by the use of differently doped semiconductive
    regions.

    471,    for incorporation within a semiconductive substrate of sites (e.g.,
    precipitates, strained layers, etc.) functioning as gettering sites.

    658,    for processes of incorporating an alloying constituent into a
    conductive layer deposited upon a semiconductive substrate.

    783,    for processes of incorporating an additional constituent into a
    insulative region deposited upon a semiconductive substrate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 492.1+ for generic irradiation of a
    semiconductor substrate, per se, wherein no doping of the semiconductor
    substrate occurs.


CLS 438/511
TXT Ordering or disordering

    Process under subclass 510 for making semiconductor regions of the
    substrate ordered or disordered prior to, simultaneous with, or subsequent
    to a step of doping semiconductor regions of the substrate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for a process of making a device emissive of a nonelectrical signal
    having a step of affecting ordering or disordering of semiconductor regions
    of the substrate.

    797,    for processes of radiation or energy treatment of a compound
    semiconductor substrate to affect ordering or disordering.


CLS 438/512
TXT Involving nuclear transmutation doping:

    Process under subclass 510 for introducing a dopant into semiconductor
    regions of the substrate having a combination of diverse steps in which one
    step involves the conversion of an element into a dopant by nuclear
    transmutation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions, Systems, and Elements, subclass 183 for
    per se nuclear transmutation doping of semiconductors.


CLS 438/513
TXT Plasma (e.g., glow discharge, etc.):

    Process under subclass 510 involving the use of a gaseous vapor of ions in
    equilibrium or a vapor of ions in vacuum in nonequilibrium state (i.e., a
    "cold plasma") to introduce a dopant into the semiconductive material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    485,    for a process of utilizing a plasma or glow discharge during the
    deposition of an amorphous semiconductive layer upon a substrate wherein
    the proximate function of the amorphous semiconductor material is as an
    active semiconductor region.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, especially subclass 192.12
    for glow discharge sputter deposition (e.g., cathode sputtering).


CLS 438/514
TXT Ion implantation of dopant into semiconductor region:

    Process under subclass 510 involving penetration of the surface of the
    semiconductive regions of the substrate with electrically active dopant
    species possessing sufficient kinetic energy therefor, usually resulting in
    the formation of a barrier layer rectifying junction within the
    semiconductive regions.

    (1)     Note.  Ion implantation involves the introduction of a desired
    dopant species into a semiconductive region of a substrate by ionizing the
    dopant material and accelerating the resulting ions through a carefully
    controlled voltage to impinge on the semiconductive region so that the
    depth of the resulting dopant atoms is determined by the accelerating
    voltage and the doping density is determined by the flux of the ion beam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    535,    for the implantation of dopant ions into nonsemiconductive regions
    of the substrate and subsequent diffusion into semiconductive regions.

    659,    for the implantation of an ion into a metallic or conductive region
    of the substrate.

    798,    for the ionized irradiation of a semiconductor substrate to modify
    the properties of semiconductor regions contained therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 492.1+ for generic processes of
    irradiating objects or material wherein no function is attributed to the
    implanted species.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 523+ for a coating process involving
    ion plating or implantation (see especially subclass 527 when silicon is
    present in the substrate, plating, or implanted layer).

    (1)     Note.  Processes utilizing ion bombardment or ion treating, that
    specifies neither implanting, etching, plating, etc., but merely recites
    some change as in the materials characteristic properties of the
    semiconductor substrate go as original to Class 438.


CLS 438/515
TXT Ionized molecules

    Process under subclass 514 involving the use of ionized molecules
    possessing sufficient kinetic energy to penetrate the semiconductive
    substrate with one or more of the elements of the molecule remaining in the
    semiconductive regions functioning as an electrically active dopant.


CLS 438/516
TXT Including charge neutralization:

    Process under subclass 514 including discharging electrical charges which
    would otherwise accumulate in the semiconductor substrate due to the
    implantation of electrically active dopant ions therein.


CLS 438/517
TXT Of semiconductor layer on insulating substrate or layer:

    Process under subclass 514 wherein the electrically active dopant ions are
    implanted into a semiconductor layer or portion thereof, the semiconductor
    layer residing on an insulating substrate or layer.


CLS 438/518
TXT Of compound semiconductor:

    Process under subclass 514 wherein the semiconductive region into which the
    electrically active dopant is implanted is a compound semiconductor.


CLS 438/519
TXT Including multiple implantation steps:

    Process under subclass 518 having plural steps of implanting ions, at least
    one step of which introduces an electrically active dopant ion, into a
    compound semiconductive substrate.


CLS 438/520
TXT Providing nondopant ion (e.g., proton, etc.):

    Process under subclass 519 wherein a nonelectrically active impurity
    species is implanted into a compound semiconductor region of the substrate
    in conjunction with the prior, simultaneous, or subsequent implantation of
    an electrically active dopant ion.

    (1)     Note.  Process for the implantation of positively charged hydrogen
    ions (i.e., protons) in conjunction with the implantation of a dopant is
    proper herein.


CLS 438/521
TXT Using same conductivity-type dopant:

    Process under subclass 519 wherein the multiple implantation steps
    introduce electrically active dopant ions of the same conductivity type
    into one or more regions of the compound semiconductor substrate.


CLS 438/522
TXT Including heat treatment:

    Process under subclass 518 including a step of heat treating the substrate
    having compound semiconductive regions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    542,    for a per se process of diffusing (i.e., driving-in) a dopant into
    semiconductive regions of the substrate via a heat treatment step.


CLS 438/523
TXT And contact formation (i.e., metallization):

    Process under subclass 518 including a step of making an electrical contact
    to a compound semiconductor region of the substrate.


CLS 438/524
TXT Into grooved semiconductor substrate region:

    Process under subclass 514 wherein the electrically active dopant is
    implanted into a trench or recess formed in a semiconductor region of the
    substrate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    389,    for a process of making a trench capacitor including doping of the
    surfaces of the trench.

    433,    for a process of forming electrically isolated lateral
    semiconductor structure by forming a groove and refilling the same with
    dielectric material combined with a step of doping a semiconductor region
    of the substrate.

    447,    for a process of forming electrically isolated lateral
    semiconductor structure by forming a recessed oxide via localized oxidation
    combined with the preliminary etching of a groove and doping a
    semiconductor region of the substrate.


CLS 438/525
TXT Using oblique beam:

    Process under subclass 514 wherein the angle of the ion beam relative to
    the major surface of the semiconductor substrate is other than 90 degrees.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302,    for a process of making an insulated gate field effect transistor
    having a step of self-aligned doping of source and/or drain regions via
    oblique ion implantation.


CLS 438/526
TXT Forming buried region:

    Process under subclass 514 involving a step of producing a region implanted
    with an electrically active dopant which is not in contact with the free
    surface of the semiconductor substrate through which it was implanted.

    (1)     Note.  The mere indication that the projected range (i.e., the
    average depth of the implanted ions) is of a particular value is
    insufficient for placement herein.


CLS 438/527
TXT Including multiple implantation steps:

    Process under subclass 514 having plural steps of implanting ions, at least
    one step of which introduces an electrically active dopant ion, into a
    semiconductive substrate.


CLS 438/528
TXT Providing nondopant ion (e.g., proton, etc.):

    Process under subclass 527 wherein a nonelectrically active impurity
    species is implanted into a semiconductor region of the substrate in
    conjunction with the prior, simultaneous, or subsequent implantation of an
    electrically active dopant species.

    (1)     Note.  Process for the implantation of positively charged hydrogen
    ions (i.e., protons) in conjunction with the implantation of a dopant is
    included herein.


CLS 438/529
TXT Using same conductivity-type dopant:

    Process under subclass 527 wherein the multiple implantation steps
    introduce electrically active dopant ions of the same conductivity type
    into one or more regions of the semiconductor substrate.


CLS 438/530
TXT Including heat treatment:

    Process under subclass 514 including a step of heat treating the
    semiconductive substrate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    795,    for a process of heat treatment of a semiconductive substrate to
    modify the properties thereof.


CLS 438/531
TXT Using shadow mask:

    Process under subclass 514 involving the use of a spaced templet positioned
    with respect to the ion source and the semiconductor substrate in such a
    manner as to allow the electrically active dopant ions to impinge only a
    portion of the semiconductor substrate.


CLS 438/532
TXT Into polycrystalline region:

    Process under subclass 514 involving implanting electrically active dopant
    ions into polycrystalline semiconductive regions.


CLS 438/533
TXT And contact formation (i.e., metallization):

    Process under subclass 514 including a step of forming an electrical
    contact to a semiconductor region of the substrate.


CLS 438/534
TXT Rectifying contact (i.e., Schottky contact):

    Process under subclass 533 wherein the electrical contact is a rectifying
    contact.


CLS 438/535
TXT By application of corpuscular or electromagnetic radiation (e.g., electron,
    laser, etc.):

    Process under subclass 510 having a step of applying corpuscular or
    electromagnetic radiation to the semiconductor substrate to affect the
    incorporation of an electrically active dopant therein.

    (1)     Note.  See herein for a process of implantation of dopant ions into
    nonsemiconductive regions of the substrate and subsequent diffusion into
    semiconductive regions thereof.


CLS 438/536
TXT Recoil implantation:

    Process under subclass 535 involving the use of kinetic energy via the use
    of applied corpuscular or electromagnetic radiation for introduction of an
    electrically active dopant species to a semiconductive region of the
    substrate whereby at least a portion of the kinetic energy travels in other
    than a straight path (e.g., bounces back and forth).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, especially subclass 192.11
    for ion beam sputter deposition.


CLS 438/537
TXT Fusing dopant with substrate (i.e., alloy junction):

    Processes under subclass 510 for incorporating an electrically active
    impurity into a semiconductor material during an operation affecting the
    partial melting of the substrate.

    (1)     Note.  The impurity contact alloys with a semiconductor material to
    form a p-type or n-type region, depending on the impurity used.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    470,    for a process of fusing a dopant with a semiconductive region by
    the direct application of electrical current.


CLS 438/538
TXT Using additional material to improve wettability or flow characteristics
    (e.g., flux, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 537 including the incorporation of an agent to
    alter the melting and crystallization of the alloying operation.


CLS 438/539
TXT Application of pressure to material during fusion:

    Processes under subclass 537 wherein pressure is applied during the
    alloying operation.


CLS 438/540
TXT Including plural controlled heating or cooling steps or nonuniform heating:

    Processes under subclass 537 including regulated multiple cooling or
    heating operations, or nonuniform application of thermal energy to the
    semiconductor substrate during the alloying operation.


CLS 438/541
TXT Including diffusion after fusing step:

    Processes under subclass 540 including a step of solid-state diffusion
    subsequent to the alloying operation.


CLS 438/542
TXT Diffusing a dopant:

    Processes under subclass 510 for permeating an electrically active impurity
    in a semiconductive region of the substrate.


CLS 438/543
TXT To control carrier lifetime (i.e., deep level dopant):

    Processes under subclass 542 involving the introduction by diffusion of an
    impurity serving to form energy levels in the forbidden band of a
    semiconductor material that can act as traps for charge carriers (e.g.,
    gold (Au), chromium (Cr), iron (Fe), nickel (Ni), etc.).


CLS 438/544
TXT To solid-state solubility concentration:

    Processes under subclass 542 involving the introduction by diffusion at a
    concentration level up to the limit at which precipitation out of solid
    solution begins to occur for the particular electrically active impurity in
    the semiconductive material.


CLS 438/545
TXT Forming partially overlapping regions:

    Processes under subclass 542 for permeating one or more electrically active
    impurities in localized areas which lap over each other only in part.


CLS 438/546
TXT Plural dopants in same region (e.g., through same mask opening, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 542 for applying multiply electrically active
    impurities in the same area.


CLS 438/547
TXT Simultaneously:

    Processes under subclass 546 wherein the multiple electrically active
    impurities are applied at the same time.


CLS 438/548
TXT Plural dopants simultaneously in plural regions:

    Processes under subclass 542 for permeating multiple electrically active
    impurities in multiple localized areas.


CLS 438/549
TXT Single dopant forming plural diverse regions (e.g., forming regions of
    different concentrations or of different depths, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 542 for permeating an electrically active impurity
    into multiple different localized areas which differ in the amount of
    impurity, the distance the impurity has to travel inwardly from the
    surface, or the like.


CLS 438/550
TXT Nonuniform heating:

    Processes under subclass 542 including the nonuniform application of
    thermal energy to the semiconductor substrate (e.g., heating distinct areas
    as opposed to heating the entire substrate, etc.).


CLS 438/551
TXT Using multiple layered mask:

    Processes under subclass 542 involving use of a mask composed of plural
    layers to retard the diffusion of an electrically active impurity.


CLS 438/552
TXT Having plural predetermined openings in master mask:

    Processes under subclass 551 wherein the multiple layered diffusion mask
    contains a multitude of desired openings.

    (1)     Note.  The multiple openings need not all be open at any one given
    step (i.e., sequential diffusion steps may utilize various openings
    selected from among the predetermined openings).


CLS 438/553
TXT Using metal mask:

    Processes under subclass 542 involving use of a mask made from metal to
    retard the diffusion of an electrically active impurity.


CLS 438/554
TXT Outwardly:

    Processes under subclass 542 wherein the electrically active impurity moves
    from an internal location toward the major surface of the semiconductor
    substrate.


CLS 438/555
TXT Laterally under mask opening:

    Processes under subclass 542 wherein the direction of diffusion for the
    electrically active impurity includes a component parallel to the major
    surface of the masking layer.


CLS 438/556
TXT Edge diffusion by using edge portion of structure other than masking layer
    to mask:

    Processes under subclass 542 using an edge feature of the substrate other
    than a masking layer to retard the diffusion of the electrically active
    impurity.


CLS 438/557
TXT From melt:

    Processes under subclass 542 wherein the source of the electrically active
    impurity is molten material.


CLS 438/558
TXT From solid dopant source in contact with semiconductor region:

    Processes under subclass 542 wherein the electrically active impurity is
    produced by a solid substance which is in physical contact with the
    semiconductor region to be doped.


CLS 438/559
TXT Using capping layer over dopant source to prevent out-diffusion of dopant:

    Processes under subclass 558 including use of an overlying layer of
    material to prevent the diffusion of the electrically active impurity in
    the dopant source from moving therethrough.


CLS 438/560
TXT Plural diffusion stages:

    Processes under subclass 558 wherein the diffusion is carried out in
    multiple stages.


CLS 438/561
TXT Dopant source within trench or groove:

    Processes under subclass 558 wherein the solid dopant source material
    resides within the confines of a recessed region in the semiconductor
    substrate.


CLS 438/562
TXT Organic source:

    Processes under subclass 558 wherein the solid dopant source material is
    composed of other than inorganic matter.


CLS 438/563
TXT Glassy source or doped oxide:

    Processes under subclass 558 wherein the solid dopant source material is
    composed of a glass-type material or an oxide which has been doped.


CLS 438/564
TXT Polycrystalline semiconductor source:

    Processes under subclass 558 wherein the solid dopant source material is
    composed of a multicrystalline semiconductor (i.e., polysilicon).


CLS 438/565
TXT From vapor phase:

    Processes under subclass 542 wherein an electrically active impurity is
    produced using a gaseous substance as the dopant source material.


CLS 438/566
TXT Plural diffusion stages:

    Processes under subclass 565 wherein the diffusion is carried out in
    multiple stages.


CLS 438/567
TXT Solid source in operative relation with semiconductor region:

    Processes under subclass 565 wherein the dopant source material originates
    from a solid source in close proximity to the semiconductor region to be
    doped.


CLS 438/568
TXT In capsule-type enclosure:

    Processes under subclass 567 carried out in a small containerlike apparatus.


CLS 438/569
TXT Into compound semiconductor region:

    Process under subclass 565 wherein an electrically active dopant is
    diffused into a compound semiconductor.


CLS 438/570
TXT FORMING SCHOTTKY JUNCTION (I.E., SEMICONDUCTOR-CONDUCTOR RECTIFYING
    JUNCTION CONTACT):

    Processes under the class definition for making a metal-to-semiconductor
    interface that exhibits a nonlinear impedance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

     92,    for a process of making a Schottky junction which is responsive to
    electromagnetic radiation.

    167,    for a process of making a field effect transistor device
    incorporating a Schottky gate electrode.

    534,    for a process of implanting a conductivity modifying dopant into
    semiconductive regions of the substrate combined with the formation of a
    Schottky electrode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses, including subclasses 54, 73, 260, 280 through 284,
    449 through 457, 471 through 486, and 928 for Schottky barrier devices.


CLS 438/571
TXT Combined with formation of ohmic contact to semiconductor region:

    Processes under subclass 570 additionally having a method for the formation
    of an ohmic contact to a semiconductor region.


CLS 438/572
TXT Compound semiconductor:

    Processes under subclass 570 wherein the rectifying contact is formed on a
    compound semiconductor.


CLS 438/573
TXT Multilayer electrode:

    Processes under subclass 572 wherein the contact is composed of plural
    layers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    605,    for a process for making plural layer ohmic electrode to a III-V
    compound semiconductor.


CLS 438/574
TXT T-shaped electrode:

    Processes under subclass 573 wherein the contact is configured so as to
    possess a central conductive portion with adjacent conductive portions
    laterally extending therefrom.


CLS 438/575
TXT Using platinum group metal (i.e., platinum (Pt), palladium (Pd), rhodium
    (Rh), ruthenium (Ru), iridium (Ir), osmium (Os), or alloy thereof):

    Processes under subclass 573 for forming a contact using a platinum group
    metals (i.e., platinum (Pt), palladium (Pd), rhodium (Rh), ruthenium (Rh),
    iridium (Ir), osmium (Os), or alloy thereof).


CLS 438/576
TXT Into grooved or recessed semiconductor region:

    Processes under subclass 572 wherein the contact is formed in a recess in
    the semiconductor substrate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclass 284 for a field effect device having a Schottky gate residing in a
    groove.


CLS 438/577
TXT Utilizing lift-off:

    Processes under subclass 576 including a step of material removal via a
    lift-off technique.


CLS 438/578
TXT Forming electrode of specified shape (e.g., slanted, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 576 wherein the contact possesses a specified
    shape.


CLS 438/579
TXT T-shaped electrode:

    Processes under subclass 578 wherein the contact is configured so as to
    possess a central conductive portion with adjacent conductive portions
    laterally extending therefrom.


CLS 438/580
TXT Using platinum group metal (i.e., platinum (Pt), palladium (Pd), rhodium
    (Rh), ruthenium (Ru), iridium (Ir), osmium (Os), or alloy thereof):

    Processes under subclass 570 for forming a contact using a platinum group
    metals (i.e., platinum (Pt), palladium (Pd), rhodium (Rh), ruthenium (Ru),
    iridium (Ir), osmium (Os), or alloy thereof).


CLS 438/581
TXT Silicide:

    Processes under subclass 580 for forming a contact using the chemical
    combination of silicon (Si) with one of the platinum group metals (i.e.,
    platinum (Pt), palladium (Pd), rhodium (Rh), ruthenium (Ru), iridium (Ir),
    osmium (Os), or alloy thereof).


CLS 438/582
TXT Using refractory group metal (i.e., titanium (Ti), zirconium (Zr), hafnium
    (Hf), vanadium (V), niobium (Nb), tantalum (Ta), chromium (Cr), molybdenum
    (Mo), tungsten (W), or alloy thereof):

    Processes under subclass 570 for forming the contact using a refractory
    metal (i.e., titanium (Ti), zirconium (Zr), hafnium (Hf), vanadium (V),
    niobium (Nb), tantalum (Ta), chromium (Cr), molybdenum (Mo), tungsten (W),
    or alloy thereof).


CLS 438/583
TXT Silicide:

    Processes under subclass 582 for forming a contact using the chemical
    combination of silicon (Si) with one of the refractory group elements
    (i.e., titanium (Ti), zirconium (Zr), hafnium (Hf), vanadium (V), niobium
    (Nb), tantalum (Ta), chromium (Cr), molybdenum (Mo), tungsten (W), or alloy
    thereof).


CLS 438/584
TXT COATING WITH ELECTRICALLY OR THERMALLY CONDUCTIVE MATERIAL:

    Processes under the class definition having a step of depositing
    electrically or thermally conductive material upon a semiconductive
    substrate.

    (1)     Note.  Deposition may occur on any portion of the semiconductor
    substrate, including nonsemiconductor regions associated therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98,     for a process of making an electrical contact to a radiation
    responsive device.

    381,    for a process of making a passive device (e.g., resistor,
    capacitor, etc.).

    453,    for a process of forming an electrically isolated lateral isolation
    structure having combined therewith an electrical contact structure.

    454,    for a process of forming a field plate electrode structure utilized
    in electrically isolating laterally spaced semiconductor regions.


CLS 438/585
TXT Insulated gate formation:

    Processes under subclass 584 for forming an electrode which is electrically
    insulated from the adjoining semiconductor regions and which upon
    application of a voltage thereto exerts a change in electrical behavior in
    the adjoining semiconductor region.


CLS 438/586
TXT Combined with formation of ohmic contact to semiconductor region:

    Processes under subclass 585 having combined therewith the formation of an
    ohmic contact to a semiconductor region.


CLS 438/587
TXT Forming array of gate electrodes:

    Process under subclass 585 involving the deposition of electrically
    conductive material resulting in the formation of a repeating geometrical
    arrangement (e.g., multiple, adjacent electrically conductive elements) of
    coplanar gate electrodes.

    (1)     Note.  The array of coplanar gate electrodes may be partially
    overlapping (i.e., for applicability in multiphase CCDs).

    (2)     Note.  Included herein are processes directed to formation of an
    arrayed gate electrode structure for various field effect device
    applications ranging from "gate arrays" to charge transfer devices to other
    arrays of active solid-state devices possessing gate electrodes (e.g.,
    programmable logic arrays (PLAs) configured for connection of the
    individual structural units into a specific circuit, etc.)

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for a process of making an image sensor-type charge transfer device
    having an array of gate electrodes.

    128,    for a process of forming an array of electrical devices and
    selectively interconnecting the devices to produce a desired electrical
    circuit.

    144,    for a process of making a charge transfer device by altering the
    electrical properties of semiconductive regions of the substrate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    especially subclasses 202+ for a gate array structure and subclasses 245+
    for a charge transfer device having a structure for applying an electric
    field into the device.


CLS 438/588
TXT Plural gate levels:

    Processes under subclass 587 wherein the array of insulated gate electrodes
    reside on more than one level relative to the main surface of the
    semiconductor substrate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclass 250 for a charge transfer device having plural gate levels.


CLS 438/589
TXT Recessed into semiconductor substrate:

    Processes under subclass 585 wherein the insulated gate electrode is
    recessed below the main surface of the semiconductor  substrate.


CLS 438/590
TXT Compound semiconductor:

    Processes under subclass 585 wherein the insulated gate is formed on a
    compound which is a semiconductor.


CLS 438/591
TXT Gate insulator structure constructed of plural layers or nonsilicon
    containing compound:

    Processes under subclass 585 wherein the gate insulator is a laminate of
    multiple dielectric layers or is a nonsilicon containing dielectric
    compound.


CLS 438/592
TXT Possessing plural conductive layers (e.g., polycide):

    Processes under subclass 585 wherein the electrode is a laminate of
    multiple conductive layers.


CLS 438/593
TXT Separated by insulator (i.e., floating gate):

    Processes under subclass 592 wherein an intervening dielectric layer
    separates the plural conductive layers.


CLS 438/594
TXT Tunnelling dielectric layer:

    Processes under subclass 593 wherein the intervening dielectric allows for
    the migration of charge carriers therethrough.


CLS 438/595
TXT Having sidewall structure:

    Processes under subclass 585 wherein the insulated gate electrode has
    material features formed along the electrode sidewall.


CLS 438/596
TXT Portion of sidewall structure is conductive:

    Processes under subclass 595 wherein a least a portion of the material
    features formed along the electrode sidewalls is electrically conductive.


CLS 438/597
TXT To form ohmic contact to semiconductive material:

    Processes under subclass 584 for depositing electrically conductive
    material which forms an indirect or direct ohmic contact to a
    semiconductive region.


CLS 438/598
TXT Selectively interconnecting (e.g., customization, wafer scale integration,
    etc.):

    Processes under subclass 597 wherein an array of devices is electrically
    interconnected into a designated circuit arrangement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128,    for processes of making a device array combined with selectively
    interconnecting the devices in a particular circuit configuration.


CLS 438/599
TXT With electrical circuit layout:

    Processes under subclass 598 including a step of designing the topological
    arrangement of electrical conductors between arrayed device components.


CLS 438/600
TXT Using structure alterable to conductive state (i.e., antifuse):

    Processes under subclass 598 for making an electrical interconnect
    structure which is alterable to a conductive state.


CLS 438/601
TXT Using structure alterable to nonconductive state (i.e., fuse):

    Processes under subclass 598 for making an electrical interconnect
    structure which is alterable to a nonconductive state.


CLS 438/602
TXT To compound semiconductor:

    Processes under subclass 597 wherein an ohmic contact is formed to a
    compound which is a semiconductor.


CLS 438/603
TXT II-VI compound semiconductor:

    Processes under subclass 602 wherein the compound semiconductor is composed
    of elements of Group II (i.e., zinc (Zn), cadmium (Cd), and mercury (Hg))
    and Group VI (i.e., oxygen (O), sulfur (S), selenium (Se), and tellurium
    (Te)).


CLS 438/604
TXT III-V compound semiconductor:

    Processes under subclass 602 wherein the compound semiconductor is composed
    of elements of Group III (i.e., boron (B), aluminum (Al), gallium (Ga), and
    indium (In)) and Group V (i.e., nitrogen (N), phosphorus (P), arsenic (As),
    antimony (Sb), and bismuth (Bi)).


CLS 438/605
TXT Multilayer electrode:

    Processes under subclass 604 wherein the ohmic contact is composed of
    plural layers.


CLS 438/606
TXT Ga and As containing semiconductor:

    Processes under subclass 604 wherein the III-V compound semiconductor
    contains gallium (Ga) and arsenic (As).


CLS 438/607
TXT With epitaxial conductor formation:

    Processes under subclass 597 involving the formation of an epitaxial
    conductive layer in ohmic electrical contact to a semiconductor region.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes:
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, appropriate subclasses for a process of
    forming an epitaxial layer upon a substrate.


CLS 438/608
TXT Oxidic conductor (e.g., indium tin oxide, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 597 wherein the ohmic contact is formed of an
    electrically conductive oxide.


CLS 438/609
TXT Transparent conductor:

    Processes under subclass 608 wherein the oxidic conductor is transparent to
    electromagnetic radiation incident thereupon.


CLS 438/610
TXT Conductive macromolecular conductor (including metal powder filled
    composition):

    Processes under subclass 597 wherein the ohmic contact is formed of an
    electrically conductive macromolecular composition.


CLS 438/611
TXT Beam lead formation:

    Processes under subclass 597 wherein the electrical contact leads extend
    beyond the edge of the semiconductor substrate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    411,    for processes of making an electrically isolated lateral
    semiconductor structure wherein spaced semiconductor bodies are held in
    place via beam leads.

    461,    for processes of dicing a semiconductor substrate which
    coincidently form beam lead conductors.


CLS 438/612
TXT Forming solder contact or bonding pad:

    Processes under subclass 597 for making an ohmic electrical contact to a
    semiconductor region which contact also serves as a solder contact or
    bonding pad.


CLS 438/613
TXT Bump electrode:

    Processes under subclass 612 wherein the electrical contact is in the shape
    of an abrupt protuberance elevated relative to the main surface of the
    substrate.


CLS 438/614
TXT Plural conductive layers:

    Processes under subclass 613 wherein the bump electrode is composed of
    multiple conductive layers.


CLS 438/615
TXT Including fusion of conductor:

    Processes under subclass 613 wherein at least a portion of the conductive
    material forming the bump electrode is molten during formation of the bump.


CLS 438/616
TXT By transcription from auxiliary substrate:

    Processes under subclass 615 wherein the bump electrode is formed by
    transcription of conductive material from an auxiliary substrate to the
    semiconductor substrate.


CLS 438/617
TXT By wire bonding:

    Processes under subclass 615 wherein the bump electrode is formed by a
    process which includes a step of utilizing a metallic wire to form the
    elevated structure.

    (1)     Note.  If a significant portion of the bonding wire remains
    attached to the semiconductor substrate and is discernable in the final
    structure, then original classification is proper in that class providing
    for the welding of same to a substrate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclasses for a process of joining a
    bonding wire to a substrate via the application of electric heat.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, especially subclasses 180.1+ for simultaneous
    bonding of multiple joints and subclass 180.5 for wire bonding.


CLS 438/618
TXT Contacting multiple semiconductive regions (i.e., interconnects):

    Processes under subclass 597 wherein the electrical contact is formed so as
    to make electrical contact to plural semiconductive regions


CLS 438/619
TXT Air bridge structure:

    Processes under subclass 618 wherein a portion of the electrical contact is
    suspended over the semiconductor substrate.


CLS 438/620
TXT Forming contacts of differing depths into semiconductor substrate:

    Processes under subclass 618 wherein at least one electrical contact is
    formed at a depth into the semiconductive substrate which differs from that
    of another  electrical contact.


CLS 438/621
TXT Contacting diversely doped semiconductive regions (e.g., p-type and n-type
    regions, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 618 wherein at least one electrical contact is
    formed to a semiconductive region which is diversely doped (more heavily
    doped, oppositely doped, etc.) with respect to the semiconductive region
    contacted by another electrical contact.


CLS 438/622
TXT Multiple metal levels, separated by insulating layer (i.e., multiple level
    metallization):

    Processes under subclass 618 wherein there are plural levels of metal
    forming electrical contact material, the levels being separated by
    intervening dielectric material except at designated openings therethrough.



    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclass 758+ for a solid-state integrated circuit device structure having
    multiple level metallization.


CLS 438/623
TXT Including organic insulating material between metal levels:

    Processes under subclass 622 wherein the intervening dielectric is at least
    partly composed of organic insulating material.

    (1)     Note.  An organic compound is one which fulfills the requirements
    of the Class 260 definitions (i.e., has a molecule characterized by two
    carbon atoms bonded together, one atom of carbon being bonded to at least
    one atom of hydrogen of a halogen, or one atom of carbon bonded to at least
    one atom of nitrogen by a single or double bond, certain compounds such as
    HCN, CN-CN, HNCO, HNCS, cyanogen halides, cyanamide, fulminic acid and
    metal carbides, being exceptions to this rule).


CLS 438/624
TXT Separating insulating layer is laminate or composite of plural insulating
    materials:

    Processes under subclass 622 wherein there is at least one separating
    insulator layer between different metal levels, which separating insulator
    layer is itself made up of plural sublayers or which separating layer is a
    composite such as a mixture of silicon oxide and silicon nitride.


CLS 438/625
TXT At least one metallization level formed of diverse conductive layers:

    Processes under subclass 622 wherein at least one of the metallization
    levels is composed of plural conductive layers of differing composition or
    electrical characteristics.


CLS 438/626
TXT Planarization:

    Processes under subclass 625 wherein at least one of the metallization
    levels or at least one separating insulating layer is leveled into a single
    plane at any stage in the process.


CLS 438/627
TXT At least one layer forms a diffusion barrier:

    Processes under subclass 625 wherein at least one of the diverse conductive
    layers forms a barrier to the migration of  a contact material into the
    semiconductor or into another contact layer.


CLS 438/628
TXT Having adhesion promoting layer:

    Processes under subclass 625 wherein a material (e.g., layer, etc.) is
    utilized to promote adhesion of the electrical contact or lead to an
    adjacent surface.


CLS 438/629
TXT Diverse conductive layers limited to viahole/plug:

    Processes under subclass 625 wherein the diverse conductive layers of a
    metallization level are limited in lateral extent to the viahole or plug
    extending through an insulating layer.


CLS 438/630
TXT Silicide formation:

    Processes under subclass 629 wherein at least one of the diverse conductive
    layers is a compound of silicon and a metal.


CLS 438/631
TXT Having planarization step:

    Processes under subclass 622 wherein at least one of the metallization
    levels or at least one separating insulating layer is leveled into a single
    plane at any stage in the process.


CLS 438/632
TXT Utilizing reflow:

    Processes under subclass 631 wherein the planarization step is conducted by
    decreasing the viscosity of a layer and causing a leveling of the same by
    the viscous flow thereof.


CLS 438/633
TXT Simultaneously by chemical and mechanical means:

    Processes under subclass 631 wherein the planarization step is conducted by
    the simultaneous chemical and mechanical material removal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    692,    for a process of chemical-mechanical polishing of a semiconductor
    substrate.


CLS 438/634
TXT Utilizing etch-stop layer:

    Processes under subclass 631 wherein the planarization step is conducted
    utilizing an etch stop layer to limit the extent of a material removal
    operation.


CLS 438/635
TXT Insulator formed by reaction with conductor (e.g., oxidation, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 622 wherein an insulating layer is formed by the
    conversion of a conductive layer at least in part to an electrically
    insulative material.


CLS 438/636
TXT Including use of antireflective layer:

    Processes under subclass 622 including the use of an antireflection layer.


CLS 438/637
TXT With formation of opening (i.e., viahole) in insulative layer:

    Processes under subclass 622 including a step of forming an opening in the
    separating insulating layer.


CLS 438/638
TXT Having viaholes of diverse width:

    Processes under subclass 637 wherein at least one viahole is formed which
    is wider than at least one other viahole.


CLS 438/639
TXT Having viahole with sidewall component:

    Processes under subclass 637 wherein the viahole has an additional
    component formed along the sidewall thereof.


CLS 438/640
TXT Having viahole of tapered shape:

    Processes under subclass 637 wherein the viahole is formed so as to possess
    nonparallel sidewalls.


CLS 438/641
TXT Selective deposition:

    Processes under subclass 622 wherein a material is deposited selectively
    upon the semiconductor substrate.


CLS 438/642
TXT Diverse conductors:

    Processes under subclass 618 wherein the electrically conductive pathway
    contacting multiple semiconductive regions is composed of plural conductive
    layers of differing composition or electrical characteristics.


CLS 438/643
TXT At least one layer forms a diffusion barrier:

    Processes under subclass 642 wherein at least one of the diverse conductive
    layers forms a barrier to the diffusional migration of a contact material
    into the semiconductor or into another contact layer.


CLS 438/644
TXT Having adhesion promoting layer:

    Processes under subclass 642 wherein a material (e.g., layer, etc.) is
    utilized to promote adhesion of the electrical conductor to an adjacent
    surface.


CLS 438/645
TXT Having planarization step:

    Processes under subclass 642 wherein a material layer is leveled into a
    single plane at any stage in the process.


CLS 438/646
TXT Utilizing reflow:

    Processes under subclass 645 wherein the planarization step is conducted by
    decreasing the viscosity of a layer and causing a leveling of the same by
    the viscous flow thereof.


CLS 438/647
TXT Having electrically conductive polysilicon component:

    Processes under subclass 642 wherein one of the diverse conductive layers
    is polycrystalline silicon.


CLS 438/648
TXT Having refractory group metal (i.e., titanium (Ti), zirconium (Zr), hafnium
    (Hf), vanadium (V), niobium (Nb), tantalum (Ta), chromium (Cr), molybdenum
    (Mo), tungsten (W), or alloy thereof):

    Processes under subclass 642 for forming at least one layer of the diverse
    conductive layers using a refractory metal (i.e., titanium (Ti), zirconium
    (Zr), hafnium (Hf), vanadium (V), niobium (Nb), tantalum (Ta), chromium
    (Cr), molybdenum (Mo), tungsten (W), or alloy thereof).


CLS 438/649
TXT Silicide:

    Processes under subclass 648 for forming a conductive layer using the
    chemical combination of silicon (Si) with one of the refractory group
    elements (i.e., titanium (Ti), zirconium (Zr), hafnium (Hf), vanadium (V),
    niobium (Nb), tantalum (Ta), chromium (Cr), molybdenum (Mo),  tungsten (W),
    or alloy thereof).


CLS 438/650
TXT Having noble group metal (i.e., silver (Ag), gold (Au), platinum (Pt),
    palladium (Pd), rhodium (Rh), ruthenium (Ru), iridium (Ir), osmium (Os), or
    alloy thereof):

    Processes under subclass 642 for forming at least one of the conductive
    layers using one of the noble group elements (e.g., silver (Ag), gold (Au),
    platinum (Pt), palladium (Pd), rhodium (Rh), ruthenium (Ru), iridium (Ir),
    osmium (Os), or alloy thereof).


CLS 438/651
TXT Silicide:

    Processes under subclass 650 for forming a contact using the chemical
    combination of silicon (Si) with one of the noble group elements (e.g.,
    silver (Ag), gold (Au), platinum (Pt), palladium (Pd), rhodium (Rh),
    ruthenium (Ru), iridium (Ir), osmium (Os), or alloy thereof).


CLS 438/652
TXT Plural layered electrode or conductor:

    Processes under subclass 597 for making an ohmic contact to a semiconductor
    region involving the formation of multiple conductive layers of differing
    composition or electrical characteristics.


CLS 438/653
TXT At least one layer forms a diffusion barrier:

    Processes under subclass 652 wherein at least one of the diverse conductive
    layers forms a barrier to the diffusional migration of a contact material
    into the semiconductor or into another contact layer.


CLS 438/654
TXT Having adhesion promoting layer:

    Processes under subclass 652 wherein a material (e.g., layer, etc.) is
    utilized to promote adhesion of the electrical contact or lead to an
    adjacent surface.


CLS 438/655
TXT Silicide:

    Processes under subclass 652 wherein at least one of the diverse conductive
    layers is formed by the chemical combination of silicon (Si) with a metal
    atom.


CLS 438/656
TXT Having refractory group metal (i.e., titanium (Ti), zirconium (Zr), hafnium
    (Hf), vanadium (V), niobium (Nb), tantalum (Ta), chromium (Cr), molybdenum
    (Mo), tungsten (W), or alloy thereof):

    Processes under subclass 652 wherein at least one of the diverse conductive
    layers is formed using a refractory metal (i.e., titanium (Ti), zirconium
    (Zr), hafnium (Hf), vanadium (V), niobium (Nb), tantalum (Ta), chromium
    (Cr), molybdenum (Mo), or tungsten (W), or alloy thereof).


CLS 438/657
TXT Having electrically conductive polysilicon component:

    Processes under subclass 652 wherein one of the diverse conductive layers
    is polycrystalline silicon.


CLS 438/658
TXT Altering composition of conductor:

    Processes under subclass 597 wherein the composition of the conductive
    material which forms an ohmic contact to an adjacent semiconductive region
    is altered (e.g., via implantation, diffusion, etc.)

    (1)     Note.  The material serving to alter the composition of the
    conductive material must by supplied from other than a semiconductive
    region of the substrate.  Formation of a silicide by reaction with a
    semiconductor substrate region is thus not sufficient for placement in this
    subclass.


CLS 438/659
TXT Implantation of ion into conductor:

    Processes under subclass 658 wherein an ion is implanted into the
    electrical conductor (e.g., to alter the composition thereof, etc.).


CLS 438/660
TXT Including heat treatment of conductive layer:

    Processes under subclass 597 wherein a thermal treatment is performed on
    the electrically conductive layer (e.g., for modifying the electrical
    properties thereof, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, appropriate subclasses for processes of altering
    the physical or electrical characteristics of metallic material.


CLS 438/661
TXT Subsequent fusing conductive layer:

    Processes under subclass 660 wherein the conductive layer is melted
    subsequent to the deposition thereof.


CLS 438/662
TXT Utilizing laser:

    Processes under subclass 661 wherein the melting of the conductive layer is
    affected through the application of coherent radiant energy thereupon.


CLS 438/663
TXT Rapid thermal anneal:

    Processes under subclass 660 wherein the heat treatment is of sufficiently
    short time span so as to limit the thermal affects primarily to the
    electrically conductive layer.


CLS 438/664
TXT Forming silicide:

    Processes under subclass 663 wherein the rapid thermal anneal results in
    the formation of a single silicide layer by the reaction of a conductive
    layer and a silicon substrate region.


CLS 438/665
TXT Utilizing textured surface:

    Processes under subclass 597 wherein a surface is roughened at some stage
    in the process.


CLS 438/666
TXT Specified configuration of electrode or contact:

    Processes under subclass 597 wherein the ohmic electrode or contact has a
    specified shape or configuration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, solid-state Diodes),
    subclass 773 for an electrical contact or lead to an active solid-state
    device having a specified configuration.


CLS 438/667
TXT Conductive feedthrough or through-hole in substrate:

    Processes under subclass 666 wherein the electrically conductive material
    is formed upon one surface of the semiconductor substrate and is able to
    make electrical contact with the opposing surface of the semiconductor
    substrate.


CLS 438/668
TXT Specified aspect ratio of conductor or viahole:

    Processes under subclass 666 wherein the width-to-depth ratio or
    width-to-height ratio of the electrical conductor or the viahole in which
    the same is to reside is given.


CLS 438/669
TXT And patterning of conductive layer:

    Processes under subclass 597 including the selective removal of portions of
    the conductive layer formed upon the semiconductor substrate.


CLS 438/670
TXT Utilizing lift-off:

    Processes under subclass 669 including a step of material removal via a
    lift-off technique.


CLS 438/671
TXT Utilizing multilayered mask:

    Processes under subclass 669 involving the use of a mask composed of plural
    layers.


CLS 438/672
TXT Plug formation (i.e., in viahole):

    Processes under subclass 669 wherein the patterning step results in the
    remaining conductive material being recessed below the top surface of the
    substrate.


CLS 438/673
TXT Tapered etching:

    Processes under subclass 669 wherein the patterning step is accomplished
    through a tapering etching step.


CLS 438/674
TXT Selective deposition of conductive layer:

    Processes under subclass 597 wherein the conductive material is deposited
    upon selected regions of the substrate.


CLS 438/675
TXT Plug formation (i.e., in viahole):

    Processes under subclass 674 wherein the selective deposition results in
    the deposited conductive material being recessed below the top surface of
    the substrate.


CLS 438/676
TXT Utilizing electromagnetic or wave energy:

    Processes under subclass 674 wherein the selective deposition is
    accomplished through the irradiation of localized regions of the substrate
    with electromagnetic or wave energy.


CLS 438/677
TXT Pretreatment of surface to enhance or retard deposition:

    Processes under subclass 674 including a step of treating the substrate
    surface preparatory to the selective deposition step to increase or
    decrease the deposition thereon.


CLS 438/678
TXT Electroless deposition of conductive layer:

    Processes under subclass 597 wherein the formation of the conductive layer
    is accomplished by immersion of the semiconductor substrate in a metallic
    salt solution and deposition therefrom without the use of electricity.


CLS 438/679
TXT Evaporative coating of conductive layer:

    Processes under subclass 597 wherein the formation of the conductive layer
    is accomplished through the evaporation of the conductive material from a
    source and the deposition of the same on the semiconductive substrate.


CLS 438/680
TXT Utilizing chemical vapor deposition (i.e., CVD):

    Processes under subclass 597 wherein the conductive material is deposited
    utilizing a vapor phase precursor which decomposes or reacts either in the
    gaseous phase or on a substrate.


CLS 438/681
TXT Of organo-metallic precursor (i.e., MOCVD):

    Processes under subclass 680 where the chemical vapor deposition process
    utilizes an organo-metallic compound.


CLS 438/682
TXT Silicide:

    Processes under subclass 597 wherein the conductive material is formed by
    the chemical combination of Silicon (Si) with a metal atom.


CLS 438/683
TXT Of refractory group metal (i.e., titanium (Ti), zirconium (Zr), hafnium
    (Hf), vanadium (V), niobium (Nb), tantalum (Ta), chromium (Cr), molybdenum
    (Mo), tungsten (W), or alloy thereof):

    Processes under subclass 682 for forming a contact using the chemical
    combination of silicon (Si) with one of the refractory group elements
    (i.e., titanium (Ti), zirconium (Zr), hafnium (Hf), vanadium (V), niobium
    (Nb), tantalum (Ta), chromium (Cr), molybdenum (Mo), tungsten (W), or alloy
    thereof).


CLS 438/684
TXT Electrically conductive polysilicon:

    Processes under subclass 597 for forming a contact using electrically
    conductive polycrystalline silicon.


CLS 438/685
TXT Refractory group metal (i.e., titanium (Ti), zirconium (Zr), hafnium (Hf),
    vanadium (V), niobium (Nb), tantalum (Ta), chromium (Cr), molybdenum (Mo),
    tungsten (W), or alloy thereof):

    Processes under subclass 597 for forming the contact using a refractory
    metal (i.e., titanium (Ti), zirconium (Zr), hafnium (Hf), vanadium (V),
    niobium (Nb), tantalum (Ta), chromium (Cr), molybdenum (Mo), tungsten (W),
    or alloy thereof).


CLS 438/686
TXT Noble group metal (i.e., silver (Ag), gold (Au), platinum (Pt), palladium
    (Pd), rhodium (Rh), ruthenium (Ru), iridium (Ir), osmium (Os), or alloy
    thereof):

    Processes under subclass 597 for forming a contact using one of the noble
    group elements (e.g., silver (Ag), gold(Au), platinum (Pt), palladium (Pd),
    rhodium (Rh), ruthenium (Ru), iridium (Ir), osmium (Os), or alloy thereof).


CLS 438/687
TXT Copper or copper alloy conductor:

    Processes under subclass 597 for forming a contact using copper (Cu) or an
    alloy thereof.


CLS 438/688
TXT Aluminum or aluminum alloy conductor:

    Processes under subclass 597 for forming a contact using aluminum (Al) or
    an alloy thereof.


CLS 438/689
TXT CHEMICAL ETCHING:

    Processes under the class definition having a step of removing material
    from a semiconductor substrate through the action of a chemical agent,
    wherein the intent is to use the electrical properties of the semiconductor
    for at least one of the purposes outlined in section I, C, of the class
    definition for this class (438).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 192.32+ for a
    process of sputter etching.

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 640+ for methods of electrolytic
    erosion of a substrate, particularly subclass 656 for erosion of a
    substrate of nonuniform internal electrical characteristics.

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, appropriate subclasses for a
    process of chemical etching a generic substrate.


CLS 438/690
TXT Combined with the removal of material by nonchemical means (e.g., ablating,
    abrading, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 689 wherein the chemical removal is accompanied by
    the removal, either concurrently or consecutively, of material by
    nonchemical means.


CLS 438/691
TXT Combined mechanical and chemical material removal:

    Processes under subclass 690 wherein the nonchemical material removal is a
    mechanical (e.g., abrading, cutting, etc.) removal method.


CLS 438/692
TXT Simultaneous (e.g., chemical-mechanical polishing, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 691 wherein the chemical and mechanical material
    removal processes are concurrent.


CLS 438/693
TXT Utilizing particulate abradant:

    Processes under subclass 692 wherein the mechanical material removal is
    affected through the use of a particulate abrasive material.


CLS 438/694
TXT Combined with coating step:

    Processes under subclass 689 additionally having a step of depositing a
    material onto the semiconductive substrate.


CLS 438/695
TXT Simultaneous etching and coating:

    Processes under subclass 694 wherein the chemical etching and material
    deposition occur concurrently.


CLS 438/696
TXT Coating of sidewall:

    Processes under subclass 694 wherein the chemical etching and material
    deposition is affected so that only vertically disposed surfaces remain
    coated with the deposited material.


CLS 438/697
TXT Planarization by etching and coating:

    Processes under subclass 694 wherein at least one surface of the
    semiconductor substrate is leveled through a combination of chemical
    etching and material deposition.

    (1)     Note.  The material being planarized may or may not be that layer
    which was deposited.


CLS 438/698
TXT Utilizing reflow:

    Processes under subclass 697 wherein the planarization method requires
    decreasing the viscosity of a layer residing on the substrate in order to
    fluidize the same.


CLS 438/699
TXT Plural coating steps:

    Processes under subclass 697 having multiple material deposition steps are
    utilized in the planarization of the surface.


CLS 438/700
TXT Formation of groove or trench:

    Processes under subclass 694 wherein at least one groove or trench is
    formed by a combination of chemical etching and material deposition.


CLS 438/701
TXT Tapered configuration:

    Processes under subclass 700 wherein the viahole or trench is formed so as
    to possess nonparallel sides.


CLS 438/702
TXT Plural coating steps:

    Processes under subclass 700 wherein the viahole or trench is formed by a
    process having multiple material deposition steps.


CLS 438/703
TXT Plural coating steps:

    Processes under subclass 694 having multiple material deposition steps.


CLS 438/704
TXT Having liquid and vapor etching steps:

    Processes under subclass 689 having a liquid (i.e., wet) chemical etching
    step and a gaseous (i.e., dry) chemical etching step.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, subclass 57 for the combination of
    wet chemical etching with dry chemical etching upon a generic substrate.


CLS 438/705
TXT Altering etchability of substrate region by compositional or crystalline
    modification:

    Processes under subclass 689 wherein the manner in which a semiconductor
    substrate is etched by a chemical etchant is altered by contacting the
    substrate prior to etching (a) with a material which alloys or diffuses
    into a substrate region or (b) by modifying the crystalline structure of a
    substrate region (e.g., amorphosizing, introducing dislocations, etc.).


CLS 438/706
TXT Vapor phase etching (i.e., dry etching):

    Processes under subclass 689 wherein the chemical etchant is in a gaseous
    state when brought into contact with the semiconductive substrate.

    (1)     Note.  A colloidal dispersion having fine droplets of an etchant is
    not considered to be vapor phase for the purposes of this and its indented
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    477,    for a gettering process in which the semiconductor substrate is
    treated with a reactive gas mixture which preferentially forms volatile
    compounds with certain undesired impurities.


CLS 438/707
TXT Utilizing electromagnetic or wave energy:

    Processes under subclass 706 wherein the vapor phase etching is conducted
    using irradiation of electromagnetic or wave energy.


CLS 438/708
TXT Photo-induced etching:

    Processes under subclass 707 involving the simultaneous irradiation of the
    substrate or adjoining space with infrared, visible, or ultraviolet
    radiation to induce the vapor phase etching of regions thereof.


CLS 438/709
TXT Photo-induced plasma etching:

    Processes under subclass 708 wherein the photo-induced vapor phase etching
    is accompanied with the excitation of the etchant into a plasma.

    (1)     Note.  A plasma is a gas that is sufficiently ionized for its
    properties to depend on the ionization. It contains approximately equal
    numbers of positive ions and electrons, so the mixture is electrically
    neutral, highly conductive, and affected by magnetic fields. A thermal
    plasma is produced by temperatures above 20, 000 degrees centigrade.


CLS 438/710
TXT By creating electric field (e.g., plasma, glow discharge, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 707 involving the application of an electric field
    to generate, modify, or control the vaporous reactant(s) used in the
    chemical etching process.

    (1)     Note.  Chemical etching processes utilizing corona, glow discharge,
    and plasma are found here, when utilized to cause dissociation of the
    etching gas precedent to the chemical etching of the semiconductor
    substrate therewith.

    (2)     Note.  A plasma is a gas that is sufficiently ionized for its
    properties to depend on the ionization.  It contains approximately equal
    numbers of positive ions and electrons, so the mixture is electrically
    neutral, highly conductive, and affected by magnetic fields.  A thermal
    plasma is produced by temperatures above 20,000 degrees centigrade.  In a
    cold plasma, the temperature of the electrons is high whereas the
    temperature of the ions is relatively low.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, particularly subclasses 67+ for
    generic plasma etching methods.  However, the use of a high temperature
    thermal plasma which removes of alters material solely by thermal means is
    proper for Class 219, Electric Heating.


CLS 438/711
TXT Utilizing multiple gas energizing means:

    Processes under subclass 710 wherein plural gas energizing means are
    utilized either simultaneously or consecutively to ionize the etching gas
    (e.g., RF discharge and a DC electron source, etc.)


CLS 438/712
TXT Reactive ion beam etching (i.e., RIBE):

    Processes under subclass 710 wherein the semiconductor substrate is mounted
    on the RF-powered electrode of the etching apparatus.


CLS 438/713
TXT Forming tapered profile (e.g., tapered etching, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 710 wherein the etchant removes material from the
    substrate resulting in a mesa or trench profile possessing nonparallel
    sides.


CLS 438/714
TXT Including change in etch influencing parameter (e.g., energizing power,
    etchant composition, temperature, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 710 wherein a parameter influencing material
    removal, such as energizing power, gas etchant composition, temperature,
    etc., is varied during the etching process.


CLS 438/715
TXT With substrate heating or cooling:

    Processes under subclass 710 including the temperature maintenance or
    modification of the semiconductor substrate during the etching thereof with
    the energized gas.


CLS 438/716
TXT With substrate handling (e.g., conveying, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 710 including the physical handling or
    manipulation of the semiconductor substrate in conjunction with the etching
    thereof.


CLS 438/717
TXT Utilizing multilayered mask:

    Processes under subclass 710 wherein selected regions of the semiconductor
    substrate are protected from the effects of the energized gas through use
    of a mask composed of plural layers.


CLS 438/718
TXT Compound semiconductor:

    Processes under subclass 710 wherein the material undergoing etching with
    the energized gas is a compound semiconductor.


CLS 438/719
TXT Silicon:

    Processes under subclass 710 wherein the material undergoing etching with
    the energized gas is silicon.


CLS 438/720
TXT Electrically conductive material (e.g., metal, conductive oxide, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 710 wherein the material undergoing etching with
    the energized gas is an electrically conductive material.


CLS 438/721
TXT Silicide:

    Processes under subclass 720 wherein the material undergoing etching with
    the energized gas is an electrically conductive compound of silicon and a
    metal atom.


CLS 438/722
TXT Metal oxide:

    Processes under subclass 710 wherein the material undergoing etching with
    the energized gas is a compound of a metal and oxygen.


CLS 438/723
TXT Silicon oxide or glass:

    Processes under subclass 710 wherein the material undergoing etching with
    the energized gas is a compound of silicon and oxygen or glass.


CLS 438/724
TXT Silicon nitride:

    Process under subclass 710 wherein the material undergoing etching with the
    energized gas is a compound of silicon and nitrogen.


CLS 438/725
TXT Organic material (e.g., resist, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 710 wherein the material undergoing etching with
    the energized gas is an organic material.


CLS 438/726
TXT Having microwave gas energizing:

    Processes under subclass 710 wherein the ionized etching gas is produced
    using a microwave source.


CLS 438/727
TXT Producing energized gas remotely located from substrate:

    Processes under subclass 726 wherein the etching gas is energized in a
    region spaced apart from the region in which the semiconductor substrate is
    located.


CLS 438/728
TXT Using magnet (e.g., electron cyclotron resonance, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 727 wherein the a magnet is utilized in producing
    or confining the energized gas.


CLS 438/729
TXT Using specified electrode/susceptor configuration (e.g., of multiple
    substrates using barrel-type susceptor, planar reactor configuration, etc.)
    to generate plasma:

    Processes under subclass 710 having a specified physical arrangement of
    electrode(s) and/or susceptor.


CLS 438/730
TXT Producing energized gas remotely located from substrate:

    Processes under subclass 729 wherein the etching gas is energized in a
    region spaced apart from the region in which the semiconductor substrate is
    located.


CLS 438/731
TXT Using intervening shield structure:

    Processes under subclass 730 wherein a blocking means is interposed between
    the region generating the energized gas and the region in which the
    semiconductor substrate resides.


CLS 438/732
TXT Using magnet (e.g., electron cyclotron resonance, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 710 wherein the a magnet is utilized in producing
    or confining the energized gas.


CLS 438/733
TXT Using orientation dependant etchant (i.e., anisotropic etchant):

    Processes under subclass 706 wherein the vapor phase etching of the
    semiconductor substrate is produced through the use of an etchant
    possessing varying etching rates upon varying crystallographic orientations.


CLS 438/734
TXT Sequential etching steps on a single layer:

    Processes under subclass 706 wherein plural etching steps are carried out
    on a single layer at different times.

    (1)     Note.  Removal of a resist layer which has the sole function of
    protecting an underlying area from etchant is not considered to be an
    etching step for this and the indented subclasses.


CLS 438/735
TXT Differential etching of semiconductor substrate:

    Processes under subclass 706 directed to (a) contact only selected surface
    areas of the substrate with the etchant to remove a constituent part of the
    substrate at the selected surface areas only or (b) cause the substrate to
    be treated at different rates in different areas to produce a nonuniform
    surface.


CLS 438/736
TXT Utilizing multilayered mask:

    Processes under subclass 735 wherein selected regions of the semiconductor
    substrate are protected from the effects of the etching gas through use of
    a mask composed of plural layers.


CLS 438/737
TXT Substrate possessing multiple layers:

    Processes under subclass 735 wherein the semiconductor substrate undergoing
    etching possesses plural layers.


CLS 438/738
TXT Selectively etching substrate possessing multiple layers of differing etch
    characteristics:

    Process under subclass 737 involving the etching of a multilayered
    substrate, using a single etching step, where the process parameters used
    causes a difference of the etching rate or characteristic in at least two
    different layers of the substrate.


CLS 438/739
TXT Lateral etching of intermediate layer (i.e., undercutting):

    Processes under subclass 738 wherein an intermediate layer on the substrate
    is etched laterally to the major surface thereof.


CLS 438/740
TXT Utilizing etch stop layer:

    Processes under subclass 738 wherein the selective etching is effected
    through the use of a material resistant to the etchant.


CLS 438/741
TXT PN junction functions as etch stop:

    Processes under subclass 740 wherein the etch stop layer is a component of
    a PN junction.


CLS 438/742
TXT Electrically conductive material (e.g., metal, conductive oxide, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 737 wherein the material undergoing etching with
    the energized gas is an electrically conductive material.


CLS 438/743
TXT Silicon oxide or glass:

    Processes under subclass 737 wherein the material undergoing etching with
    the energized gas is a compound of silicon and oxygen or glass.


CLS 438/744
TXT Silicon nitride:

    Process under subclass 737 wherein the material undergoing etching with the
    energized gas is a compound of silicon and nitrogen.


CLS 438/745
TXT Liquid phase etching:

    Processes under subclass 689 wherein the chemical etchant is in a liquid
    state when brought into contact with the semiconductive substrate.


CLS 438/746
TXT Utilizing electromagnetic or wave energy:

    Processes under subclass 745 wherein the liquid phase etching is conducted
    using irradiation of electromagnetic or wave energy.


CLS 438/747
TXT With relative movement between substrate and confined pool of etchant:

    Processes under subclass 745 including the step of causing a relative
    motion between the semiconductor substrate being etched and the liquid
    phase etchant which is confined by a container.


CLS 438/748
TXT Projection of etchant against a moving substrate or controlling the angle
    or pattern of projected etchant:

    Processes under subclass 745 wherein the chemical etchant is sprayed upon
    the moving semiconductor substrate or sprayed upon the semiconductor
    substrate in a specific angle or pattern.


CLS 438/749
TXT Sequential application of etchant:

    Processes under subclass 745 wherein plural liquid phase etching steps are
    carried out on the semiconductor substrate in succession to one another.


CLS 438/750
TXT To same side of substrate:

    Processes under subclass 749 wherein the sequential liquid phase etching
    steps are carried out on the same major surface of the semiconductor
    substrate.


CLS 438/751
TXT Each etch step exposes surface of an adjacent layer:

    Processes under subclass 750 wherein a layer on the semiconductor substrate
    previously covered by a different layer is exposed by each liquid phase
    etching step.


CLS 438/752
TXT Germanium:

    Processes under subclass 745 wherein the material undergoing wet chemical
    etching is germanium (Ge).


CLS 438/753
TXT Silicon:

    Processes under subclass 745 wherein the material undergoing wet chemical
    etching is silicon (Si).


CLS 438/754
TXT Electrically conductive material (e.g., metal, conductive oxide, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 745 wherein the material undergoing wet chemical
    etching is an electrically conductive material.


CLS 438/755
TXT Silicide:

    Processes under subclass 754 wherein the material undergoing wet chemical
    etching is an electrically conductive compound of silicon and a metal atom.


CLS 438/756
TXT Silicon oxide:

    Processes under subclass 745 wherein the material undergoing wet chemical
    etching is a compound of silicon and oxygen.


CLS 438/757
TXT Silicon nitride:

    Processes under subclass 745 wherein the material undergoing wet chemical
    etching is a compound of silicon and nitrogen.


CLS 438/758
TXT COATING OF SUBSTRATE CONTAINING SEMICONDUCTOR REGION OR OF SEMICONDUCTOR
    SUBSTRATE:

    Processes under the class definition for forming or applying a coating on a
    semiconductor substrate, and wherein the intent is to use the electrical
    properties of the semiconductor for at least one of the purposes outlined
    in section I, B, of the Class 438 definition above.

    (1)     Note.  Coating limited to nonsemiconductive areas of the substrate
    is acceptable in this and undented subclasses if the substrate also
    contains, integral therewith, a semiconductive region functioning as per
    section I, B, of the Class 438 definition.

    (2)     Note.  The passivation of dangling bonds on the semiconductor
    substrate surface (such as by covalently bonding hydrogen to the surface)
    is considered to be proper under gettering above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33 or 465, for formation of a coating combined with substrate dicing.

    476,    for coating combined with gettering.

    478+,   for formation of a semiconductive coating.

    493,    for formation of a nonconductive coating combined with formation of
    a semiconductive coating.

    689,    for coating of metal, metallization, or formation of a heat sink.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 192.12+ for glow
    discharge sputter deposition processes.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, especially subclasses 123+ for forming an
    electrolytic coating on a selected area of a semiconductor substrate and
    subclass 157 for electrolytic coating a semiconductor substrate.

    427,    Coating Processes, for processes of coating where the product of
    the process is generically disclosed for both semiconductive electrical
    purpose and nonsemiconductive electrical purpose.


CLS 438/759
TXT Combined with the removal of material by nonchemical means:

    Processes under subclass 758 having an additional step of removing material
    from the semiconductor substrate by nonchemical means (e.g., ablating,
    abrading, grinding, etc.)


CLS 438/760
TXT Utilizing reflow (e.g., planarization, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 758 wherein the coating step is combined with a
    step of decreasing the viscosity of the layer and causing a redistribution
    of the same by the viscous flow thereof.


CLS 438/761
TXT Multiple layers:

    Processes under subclass 758 wherein plural layers are formed upon the
    semiconductor substrate.


CLS 438/762
TXT At least one layer formed by reaction with substrate:

    Processes under subclass 761 wherein at least one of the layers is formed
    by reacting an external agent with a constituent of the substrate to form a
    compound thereof.


CLS 438/763
TXT Layers formed of diverse composition or by diverse coating processes:

    Processes under subclass 761 wherein the plural layers are formed utilizing
    different processes (e.g., thermal insulator with deposited insulator,
    etc.) or are of differing composition or physical characteristics (e.g.,
    crystallinity, orientation, etc.).


CLS 438/764
TXT Formation of semi-insulative polycrystalline silicon:

    Processes under subclass 758 involving the deposition of polycrystalline
    silicon which possesses an electrical conductivity less than that typically
    utilized for the formation of electrical devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    488,    for processes of depositing polycrystalline silicon of
    semiconductive electrical characteristics.

    564,    for processes of depositing polycrystalline silicon combined with
    the subsequent diffusion of conductivity modifying dopants therefrom into
    adjacent semiconductive regions.


CLS 438/765
TXT By reaction with substrate:

    Processes under subclass 758 wherein a coating layer is formed by reacting
    an external agent with a constituent of the substrate to form the coating
    thereupon.


CLS 438/766
TXT Implantation of ion (e.g., to form ion amorphousized region prior to
    selective oxidation, reacting with substrate to form insulative region,
    etc.):

    Processes under subclass 765 having a step of implanting an ionized species
    into a substrate region to form or facilitate formation of a reactive
    coating layer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    423,    for a process of forming an electrically isolated lateral
    semiconductor structure having a step of implanting to form an electrically
    insulative region.

    798,    for a process of exposing a semiconductor substrate to ionized
    radiation for modification of some property of the same.


CLS 438/767
TXT Compound semiconductor substrate:

    Processes under subclass 765 wherein the substrate region reacting with the
    external agent is a compound semiconductor.


CLS 438/768
TXT Reaction with conductive region:

    Processes under subclass 765 wherein the substrate region reacting with an
    external agent is a conductive region or layer residing upon the
    semiconductor substrate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, appropriate subclasses for methods of reactively
    coating (e.g., carburizing, nitriding, oxidizing, etc.) a metallic
    substrate.


CLS 438/769
TXT Reaction with silicon semiconductive region (e.g., oxynitride formation,
    etc.):

    Processes under subclass 765 wherein the substrate region reacting with an
    external agent is a silicon semiconductor region.


CLS 438/770
TXT Oxidation:

    Processes under subclass 769 wherein the external agent supplies oxygen
    which reacts with the silicon substrate region to form a compound therewith.


CLS 438/771
TXT Using electromagnetic or wave energy:

    Processes under subclass 770 wherein the oxidation is conducted using
    irradiation of electromagnetic or wave energy.


CLS 438/772
TXT Microwave gas energizing:

    Processes under subclass 771 wherein the irradiation is of microwave
    frequency.

    (1)     Note.  The FCC allowed frequency for microwave energy is 2.45 GHz,
    with a corresponding wavelength of from 1mm to 1m.

    (2)     Note.  Microwave is a term applied to electromagnetic waves which
    occupy a region in the electromagnetic spectrum which is bounded by radio
    waves on the side of longer wavelengths and by infrared waves on the side
    of shorter wavelengths.


CLS 438/773
TXT In atmosphere containing water vapor (i.e., wet oxidation):

    Processes under subclass 770 wherein the oxidation is carried out in an
    atmosphere containing water in vaporous form.


CLS 438/774
TXT In atmosphere containing halogen:

    Processes under subclass 770 wherein the oxidation is carried out in an
    atmosphere containing a halogen.


CLS 438/775
TXT Nitridation:

    Processes under subclass 769 wherein the external agent supplies nitrogen
    which reacts with the silicon substrate region to form a compound therewith.


CLS 438/776
TXT Using electromagnetic or wave energy:

    Processes under subclass 775 wherein the nitridation is conducted using
    irradiation of electromagnetic or wave energy.


CLS 438/777
TXT Microwave gas energizing:

    Processes under subclass 776 wherein the irradiation is of microwave
    frequency.

    (1)     Note.  The FCC allowed frequency for microwave energy is 2.45 GHz,
    with a corresponding wavelength of from 1mm to 1m.

    (2)     Note.  Microwave is a term applied to electromagnetic waves which
    occupy a region in the electromagnetic spectrum which is bounded by radio
    waves on the side of longer wavelengths and by infrared waves on the side
    of shorter wavelengths.


CLS 438/778
TXT Insulative material deposited upon semiconductive substrate:

    Processes under subclass 758 wherein an insulative coating is formed upon
    the semiconductor substrate solely by the deposition of externally supplied
    material.


CLS 438/779
TXT Compound semiconductor substrate:

    Processes under subclass 778 wherein the substrate upon which is deposited
    the coating is a compound semiconductor.


CLS 438/780
TXT Depositing organic material (e.g., polymer, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 778 wherein the deposited material is at least
    partly composed of organic material.  An organic compound is one which
    fulfills the requirements of the Class 260 definitions (i.e., has a
    molecule characterized by two carbon atoms bonded together, one atom of
    carbon being bonded to at least one atom of hydrogen or a halogen, or one
    atom of carbon bonded to at least one atom of nitrogen by a single or
    double bond, certain compounds such as HCN, CN-CN, HNCO, HNCS, cyanogen
    halides, cyanamide, fulminic acid and metal carbides, being exceptions to
    this rule).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    623,    for processes of constructing a multilayer interconnect using an
    organic insulating material between metal levels.


CLS 438/781
TXT Subsequent heating step modifying organic coating composition:

    Processes under subclass 780 including a subsequent thermal treatment step
    altering the chemical composition of the organic coating composition.


CLS 438/782
TXT With substrate handling during coating (e.g., immersion, spinning, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 778 wherein the semiconductor substrate is handled
    or manipulated in conjunction with the coating operation.


CLS 438/783
TXT Insulative material having impurity (e.g., for altering physical
    characteristics, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 778 wherein the deposited insulative material
    contains one or more impurities (e.g., for altering a physical
    characteristic such as etchability, for serving as a diffusion source for
    adjacent semiconductive regions of the substrate, etc.).


CLS 438/784
TXT Introduction simultaneous with deposition:

    Processes under subclass 783 wherein the impurity is introduced into the
    insulative material concurrently with the deposition step.


CLS 438/785
TXT Insulative material is compound of refractory group metal (i.e., titanium
    (Ti), zirconium (Zr), hafnium (Hf), vanadium (V), niobium (Nb), tantalum
    (Ta), chromium (Cr), molybdenum (Mo), tungsten (W), or alloy thereof):

    Processes under subclass 778 for forming an insulative compound using one
    of the refractory group elements (i.e., titanium (Ti), zirconium (Zr),
    hafnium (Hf), vanadium (V), niobium (Nb), tantalum (Ta), chromium (Cr),
    molybdenum (Mo), or tungsten (W)).


CLS 438/786
TXT Tertiary silicon containing compound formation (e.g., oxynitride formation,
    etc.):

    Processes under subclass 778 for forming an insulative compound of silicon
    and two other elements is deposited upon the semiconductor substrate.


CLS 438/787
TXT Silicon oxide formation:

    Processes under subclass 778 wherein the deposited insulative material is a
    compound of silicon and oxygen.


CLS 438/788
TXT Using electromagnetic or wave energy (e.g., photo-induced deposition,
    plasma, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 787 wherein the silicon oxide is deposited using
    irradiation of electromagnetic or wave energy.


CLS 438/789
TXT Organic reactant:

    Processes under subclass 788 wherein a reactant compound utilized during
    the deposition of silicon oxide is an organic material (e.g.,
    organo-siloxane, etc.).


CLS 438/790
TXT Organic reactant:

    Processes under subclass 787 wherein a reactant compound utilized during
    the deposition of silicon oxide is an organic material (e.g.,
    organo-siloxane, etc.).


CLS 438/791
TXT Silicon nitride formation:

    Processes under subclass 778 wherein the deposited material is a compound
    of silicon and nitrogen.


CLS 438/792
TXT Using electromagnetic or wave energy (e.g., photo-induced deposition,
    plasma, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 791 wherein the silicon nitride is deposited using
    irradiation of electromagnetic or wave energy.


CLS 438/793
TXT Organic reactant:

    Processes under subclass 792 wherein a reactant compound utilized during
    the deposition of silicon nitride is an organic material (e.g.,
    organo-siloxane, etc.).


CLS 438/794
TXT Organic reactant:

    Processes under subclass 791 wherein a reactant compound utilized during
    the deposition of silicon nitride is an organic material (e.g.,
    organo-siloxane, etc.).


CLS 438/795
TXT RADIATION OR ENERGY TREATMENT MODIFYING PROPERTIES OF SEMICONDUCTOR REGION
    OF SUBSTRATE (E.G., THERMAL, CORPUSCULAR, ELECTROMAGNETIC, ETC.):

    Process under the class definition of radiating a semiconductor substrate
    with a form of energy to change some characteristic thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    308,    for a process of making an insulated gate field effect transistor
    having a step of modifying semiconductor regions of the substrate via a
    radiation or energy treatment.

    378,    for a process of making a bipolar transistor having a step of
    modifying semiconductor regions of the substrate via a radiation or energy
    treatment.

    471,    for a process of gettering a semiconductive substrate (including
    layers thereon) by a thermal treatment.

    466,    for a process of directly applying electrical current to a
    semiconductor substrate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes of heat treating
    polycrystalline or amorphous semiconductor material to thereby cause single
    crystal growth.

    219,    Electric Heating, particularly subclass 638 for inductive heating
    of a semiconductive rod.

    250,    Radiant Energy, particularly subclasses 492.2+ for methods of
    using, generating, or controlling ion bombardment of semiconductive
    substrates when there is no indication of what occurs to the substrate.


CLS 438/796
TXT Compound semiconductor:

    Process under subclass 795 wherein the substrate being modified is a
    compound semiconductor.


CLS 438/797
TXT Ordering or disordering:

    Process under subclass 796 wherein a compound semiconductive region is
    transformed from an ordered state to a disordered state or vice versa.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for a process of making a device emissive of nonelectrical signal
    having a step wherein a compound semiconductor is transformed from an
    ordered state to a disordered state or vice versa.

    511,    for a process of introducing an electrically active dopant species
    into a semiconductor wherein the semiconductor is transformed from an
    ordered state to a disordered state or vice versa.


CLS 438/798
TXT Ionized irradiation (e.g., corpuscular or plasma treatment, etc.):

    Process under subclass 795 wherein ionized radiation is applied to the
    semiconductor to modify the properties thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    474,    for a process of gettering a semiconductor substrate by the
    application of ionized irradiation thereto.

    514,    for a process for implanting an electrically active dopant into a
    semiconductive region of the substrate.


CLS 438/799
TXT By differential heating:

    Process under subclass 795 involving the nonuniform heating of a
    semiconductive substrate to modify the properties of semiconductor regions
    thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 492.22 for a method of controlling the
    pattern of irradiation incident upon a semiconductor substrate and subclass
    492.23 for method of variably impinging radiation upon a semiconductor
    substrate.


CLS 438/800
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Process under the class definition not provided for above.

               CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 438/900
TXT BULK EFFECT DEVICE MAKING:

    Art collection involving the construction of a semiconductor device whose
    electrical characteristics and electronic properties are exhibited
    throughout the entire body of the material, rather than in just a localized
    region thereof (e.g., the surface).


CLS 438/901
TXT CAPACITIVE JUNCTION:

    Art collection involving the construction of a barrier layer junction
    possessing capacitive properties.


CLS 438/902
TXT CAPPING LAYER:

    Art collection involving the use of an overlayer serving to separate and
    protect an underlying region or layer from the environment.


CLS 438/903
TXT CATALYST AIDED DEPOSITION:

    Art collection involving the use of a catalyst to facilitate material
    deposition.


CLS 438/904
TXT CHARGE CARRIER LIFETIME CONTROL:

    Art collection involving the control of the lifetime of charge carriers
    (i.e., electrons or holes) in the semiconductor.


CLS 438/905
TXT CLEANING OF REACTION CHAMBER:

    Art collection involving cleaning an etch chamber.


CLS 438/906
TXT CLEANING OF WAFER AS INTERIM STEP:

    Art collection involving cleaning a semiconductive wafer as a step between
    other processing steps.


CLS 438/907
TXT CONTINUOUS PROCESSING:

    Art collection involving carrying out process steps in semiconductor
    manufacture in a continual manner.


CLS 438/908
TXT Utilizing cluster apparatus:

    Art collection under subclass 907 wherein the continuous processing is
    conducted in an apparatus having a plurality of processing chambers having
    associated handling means to move the semiconductor substrate therebetween.


CLS 438/909
TXT CONTROLLED ATMOSPHERE:

    Art collection involving use of a regulated gaseous environment (e.g.,
    inert gases, specifically proportioned mixtures, etc.).


CLS 438/910
TXT CONTROLLING CHARGING STATE AT SEMICONDUCTOR-INSULATOR INTERFACE:

    Art collection involving adjusting the charge state where the semiconductor
    and insulator surfaces meet.


CLS 438/911
TXT DIFFERENTIAL OXIDATION AND ETCHING:

    Art collection involving differential oxidation combined with an etching
    process.


CLS 438/912
TXT DISPLACING PN JUNCTION:

    Art collection involving physical relocation of the P-N junction from its
    originally formed position.


CLS 438/913
TXT DIVERSE TREATMENTS PERFORMED IN UNITARY CHAMBER:

    Art collection involving diverse treatments performed upon a semiconductor
    substrate which are affected in a single processing chamber.


CLS 438/914
TXT DOPING:

    Art collection involving the doping of a semiconductor substrate with
    conductivity modifying impurities.


CLS 438/915
TXT Amphoteric doping:

    Art collection under 914 involving use of a dopant capable of functioning
    as a P- or N-type conductivity modifier depending on process conditions.


CLS 438/916
TXT Autodoping control or utilization:

    Art collection under 914 involving the regulation of self-induced impurity
    production in a semiconductor substrate.


CLS 438/917
TXT Deep level dopants (e.g., gold (Au), chromium (Cr), iron (Fe), nickel (Ni),
    etc.):

    Art collection under 914 involving the utilization of dopants serving to
    reduce minority carrier lifetime through the formation of energy levels
    located in the forbidden band of a semiconductor material that are not near
    the conduction or valence band edges.


CLS 438/918
TXT Special or nonstandard dopant:

    Art collection under 914 involving use of a special or nonstandard dopant.


CLS 438/919
TXT Compensation doping:

    Art collection under 914 involving doping of over-lapping regions to
    convert first to one conductivity type and then to the other conductivity
    type.


CLS 438/920
TXT Controlling diffusion profile by oxidation:

    Art collection under 914 involving the regulation of a diffusion contour by
    an oxidation step.


CLS 438/921
TXT Nonselective diffusion:

    Art collection under 914 involving a random diffusion process (i.e.,
    diffusion without a mask).


CLS 438/922
TXT Diffusion along grain boundaries:

    Art collection under 914 involving diffusion between the grains of
    nonsingle crystalline material along the physical interface of two layers.


CLS 438/923
TXT Diffusion through a layer:

    Art collection under 914 involving diffusing a dopant in a perpendicular
    manner through a layer of material.


CLS 438/924
TXT To facilitate selective etching:

    Art collection under 914 involving doping selected regions of the
    semiconductor substrate to alter the etchibility of the doped regions.


CLS 438/925
TXT Fluid growth doping control (e.g., delta doping, etc.):

    Art collection under 914 involving regulating the dopant concentration
    during the fluid growth of material upon the substrate.


CLS 438/926
TXT DUMMY METALLIZATION:

    Art collection involving the use of an electrically conductive layer during
    semiconductor manufacture which is not utilized for the carrying of
    electrical current.


CLS 438/927
TXT ELECTROMIGRATION RESISTANT METALLIZATION:

    Art collection directed to metallization constructed so as to prevent the
    mass transport of metal by momentum exchange between thermally activated
    metal ions and conduction charge carriers.


CLS 438/928
TXT FRONT AND REAR SURFACE PROCESSING:

    Art collection directed to processing both opposed major surfaces of a
    semiconductor substrate.


CLS 438/929
TXT EUTECTIC SEMICONDUCTOR:

    Art collection directed to semiconductor manufacture involving the use of a
    dual phase, cooperatively formed semiconductor.


CLS 438/930
TXT TERNARY OR QUATERNARY SEMICONDUCTOR COMPRISED OF ELEMENTS FROM THREE
    DIFFERENT GROUPS (E.G., I-III-V, ETC.):

    Art collection involving the use of a compound semiconductor composed of
    elements form three different groups of the Periodic Table.


CLS 438/931
TXT SILICON CARBIDE SEMICONDUCTOR:

    Art collection involving the use of semiconducting silicon carbide in
    semiconductor manufacture.


CLS 438/932
TXT BORON NITRIDE SEMICONDUCTOR:

    Art collection involving the use of semiconducting boron nitride in
    semiconductor manufacture.


CLS 438/933
TXT GERMANIUM OR SILICON OR GE-SI ON III-V:

    Art collection involving the formation of a hetero-interface between
    germanium or silicon or an alloy thereof with a III-V compound
    semiconductor.


CLS 438/934
TXT SHEET RESISTANCE (I.E., DOPANT PARAMETERS):

    Art collection directed to the electrical resistivity of a thin film of
    semiconductor material.


CLS 438/935
TXT GAS FLOW CONTROL:

    Art collection involving gas flow manipulation in conjunction with
    semiconductor manufacture.


CLS 438/936
TXT GRADED ENERGY GAP:

    Art collection involving sequential formation of layers of composition or
    dopant concentration which vary with position in the layer.


CLS 438/937
TXT HILLOCK PREVENTION:

    Art collection involving the prevention of spikelike projections which
    protrude from a layer surface.


CLS 438/938
TXT LATTICE STRAIN CONTROL OR UTILIZATION:

    Art collection involving the regulation or utilization of lattice strain.


CLS 438/939
TXT LANGMUIR-BLODGETT FILM UTILIZATION:

    Art collection involving the use of an organic coating having both
    hydrophilic and hydrophobic ends in semiconductor manufacture.


CLS 438/940
TXT LASER ABLATIVE MATERIAL REMOVAL:

    Art collection involving the removal of material from a semiconductor
    substrate by laser ablation.


CLS 438/941
TXT LOADING EFFECT MITIGATION:

    Art collection involving the minimalization of localized variations in the
    processing behavior of the substrate due to variations in the density of
    features formed thereupon.


CLS 438/942
TXT MASKING:

    Art collection involving the use of a structure having openings therein to
    affect selective processing of underlying regions laid bare by said
    openings.


CLS 438/943
TXT Movable:

    Art collection under 942 involving the use of a mask movable with respect
    to the semiconductor substrate.


CLS 438/944
TXT Shadow:

    Art collection under 942 involving the use of a mask not in contact with
    the semiconductor substrate so as to cast a shadow thereupon.


CLS 438/945
TXT Special (e.g., metal, etc.):

    Art collection under 942 involving the use of a nonconventional mask.


CLS 438/946
TXT Step and repeat:

    Art collection under 942 wherein the processing of the semiconductor
    substrate is affected by the sequential treatment of laterally arranged
    regions.


CLS 438/947
TXT Subphotolithographic processing:

    Art collection under 942 wherein the photolithographic features formed on
    the substrate are of a dimension below the resolution limit of the
    photolithographic process.


CLS 438/948
TXT Radiation resist:

    Art collection under 942 involving the use of a radiation resist in a
    masking operation.


CLS 438/949
TXT Energy beam treating radiation resist on semiconductor:

    Art collection under 948 involving the use of an energy beam to irradiate a
    radiation sensitive layer upon a semiconductor substrate.


CLS 438/950
TXT Multilayer mask including nonradiation sensitive layer:

    Art collection under 948 involving the use of a multilayer mask having both
    radiation sensitive and nonradiation sensitive components.


CLS 438/951
TXT Lift-off

    Art collection under 948 involving the selective removal of a deposited
    layer by striping off the radiation resist and portions of the deposited
    layer residing thereupon.


CLS 438/952
TXT Utilizing antireflective layer

    Art collection under 948 involving the use of an antireflective layer on
    the semiconductor substrate.


CLS 438/953
TXT MAKING RADIATION RESISTANT DEVICE

    Art collection involving the construction of a device resistant to radiant
    energy.


CLS 438/954
TXT MAKING OXIDE-NITRIDE-OXIDE DEVICE

    Art collection involving construction of a device having a layered
    dielectric structure composed of a nitride layer interposed between outer
    oxide layers.


CLS 438/955
TXT MELT-BACK

    Art collection directed to the utilization of molten material to dissolve
    semiconductor regions of the substrate, often preparatory to liquid phase
    epitaxy.


CLS 438/956
TXT MAKING MULTIPLE WAVELENGTH EMISSIVE DEVICE

    Art collection involving the construction of a device emissive of radiation
    of plural wavelengths.


CLS 438/957
TXT MAKING METAL-INSULATOR-METAL DEVICE

    Art collection involving the construction of a metal-insulator-metal device
    (e.g., MOMOM, etc.).


CLS 438/958
TXT PASSIVATION LAYER

    Art collection involving protecting the semiconductor substrate surface
    with a passivating coating.


CLS 438/959
TXT MECHANICAL POLISHING OF WAFER

    Art collection involving mechanically abrading a semiconductor substrate.


CLS 438/960
TXT POROUS SEMICONDUCTOR

    Art collection involving the processing of the porous semiconductor region
    of the substrate.


CLS 438/961
TXT ION BEAM SOURCE AND GENERATION

    Art collection involving use of an ion source with the generation of ions
    therefrom.


CLS 438/962
TXT QUANTUM DOTS AND LINES

    Art collection involving the construction of a one- or two-dimensional
    quantum well structure.


CLS 438/963
TXT REMOVING PROCESS RESIDUES FROM VERTICAL SUBSTRATE SURFACES

    Art collection involving the removal of unwanted process residues from
    vertical surfaces of the substrate.


CLS 438/964
TXT ROUGHENED SURFACE

    Art collection involving the use of a nonsmooth surface in semiconductor
    manufacture.


CLS 438/965
TXT SHAPED JUNCTION FORMATION

    Art collection involving the formation of a barrier layer junction of a
    nonstandard shape.


CLS 438/966
TXT SELECTIVE OXIDATION OF ION-AMORPHOUSIZED LAYER

    Art collection involving enhancing the oxidation of predetermined substrate
    regions by ion amorphousization of the regions.


CLS 438/967
TXT SEMICONDUCTOR ON SPECIFIED INSULATOR

    Art collection involving a semiconductor layer formed upon a specified
    insulative sublayer or substrate.


CLS 438/968
TXT SEMICONDUCTOR-METAL-SEMICONDUCTOR

    Art collection involving the construction of a
    semiconductor-metal-semiconductor configuration.


CLS 438/969
TXT SIMULTANEOUS FORMATION OF MONOCRYSTALLINE AND POLYCRYSTALLINE REGIONS

    Art collection involving the simultaneous formation of single crystalline
    and polycrystalline regions.


CLS 438/970
TXT SPECIFIED ETCH STOP MATERIAL

    Art collection involving the use of a specified material as an etch stop.


CLS 438/971
TXT STOICHIOMETRIC CONTROL OF HOST SUBSTRATE COMPOSITION

    Art collection involving the regulation of the proportions of elements
    combined in a base substrate composition.


CLS 438/972
TXT STORED CHARGE ERASURE

    Art collection involving the removal of accumulated electrical charges from
    the semiconductor substrate.


CLS 438/973
TXT SUBSTRATE ORIENTATION

    Art collection involving the use of a substrate of specified or nonstandard
    orientation.


CLS 438/974
TXT SUBSTRATE SURFACE PREPARATION

    Art collection involving treatment of the surface of a substrate prior to
    an operation being affected thereupon.


CLS 438/975
TXT SUBSTRATE OR MASK ALIGNING FEATURE

    Art collection involving the lining up of a mask or regions to be formed
    with structural features (e.g., indicia, marks, etc.) of the substrate.


CLS 438/976
TXT TEMPORARY PROTECTIVE LAYER

    Art collection involving the temporary use of a protective layer.


CLS 438/977
TXT THINNING OR REMOVAL OF SUBSTRATE

    Art collection involving the reduction in thickness of a substrate or the
    removal of the entirety thereof.


CLS 438/978
TXT FORMING TAPERED EDGES ON SUBSTRATE OR ADJACENT LAYERS

    Art collection involving the formation of nonperpendicular edges on the
    semiconductor substrate or layers residing thereupon.


CLS 438/979
TXT TUNNEL DIODES

    Art collection involving the construction of a semiconductor diode having a
    forward negative resistance wherein conduction occurs through a potential
    barrier and in which the electrons pass in either direction between the
    conduction band in the n-type region and the valance band of the p-type
    region.


CLS 438/980
TXT UTILIZING PROCESS EQUIVALENTS OR OPTIONS

    Art collection involving the substitution of an operation that will perform
    the same or similar function of the operation it replaces.


CLS 438/981
TXT UTILIZING VARYING DIELECTRIC THICKNESS

    Art collection involving the utilization of regions having dielectric
    layers of different thicknesses.


CLS 438/982
TXT VARYING ORIENTATION OF DEVICES IN ARRAY

    Art collection involving the construction of an array of devices of varying
    orientation with respect to one another.


CLS 438/983
TXT ZENER DIODES

    Art collection involving construction of a single PN junction, two terminal
    semiconductor diode reverse biased into breakdown caused by the field
    emission of charge carriers in the device's depletion layer.


CLS 438/FOR
TXT FOREIGN ART COLLECTIONS

    The foreign patents/nonpatent literature from Class 156, subclasses 625.1
    through 640.1, 642.1 through 657.1, 659.11, 661.11, and 662.1, and Class
    437, subclasses 1 through 250 and Cross-Reference Art Collections 900
    through 987, have been transferred directly to the foreign art collections
    below (art collections FOR 100 through FOR 498) which are intended only as
    a repository for foreign patents/nonpatent literature. See the Foreign Art
    Collections in the Class 438 schedule for specific correspondences. [Note:
    The titles and definitions for indented art collections include all the
    details of the one(s) that are hierarchically superior.]


CLS 438/FOR100
TXT Etching of semiconductor precursor, substrates, and devices used in an
    electrical function:

    Foreign art collection for processes directed to contacting a solid
    semiconductive precursor, substrate, or device used in an electrical
    function, with a chemical reagent to remove only a portion or constituent
    part of the solid semiconductive precursor, substrate, or device.


CLS 438/FOR101
TXT Measuring, testing, or inspecting:

    Foreign art collection for processes including the step of visually,
    chemically, or physically determining or measuring a variable condition or
    property of the substrate.


CLS 438/FOR102
TXT By electrical means or of electrical property:

    Foreign art collection for processes where the measurement or test is
    performed electrically or determines an electrical property, e.g.,
    resistance, etc.


CLS 438/FOR103
TXT Altering the etchability of a substrate by alloying, diffusing, or chemical
    reacting:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the manner in which a
    substrate is effected by an etchant is altered by contacting the substrate
    prior to etching with a material which (a) forms an alloy with, (b)
    diffuses into, or (c) chemically reacts with the substrate.


CLS 438/FOR104
TXT With uniting of preforms (e.g., laminating, etc.):

    Foreign art collection for processes including the step of adhesively
    uniting at least two self-sustaining preforms.


CLS 438/FOR105
TXT Prior to etching:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein a step of uniting of preforms
    is carried out prior to a step of etching.


CLS 438/FOR106
TXT Delamination subsequent to etching:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein a preform is detached from
    another preform by destruction of the bond therebetween subsequent to a
    step of etching.


CLS 438/FOR107
TXT With coating:

    Foreign art collection for processes including the step of applying a layer
    in a fluent state which solidifies onto the substrate.


CLS 438/FOR108
TXT Differential etching:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein an etching material (a)
    contacts selected surface areas of the substrate to remove a constituent
    part of the substrate at the selected surface areas only, or (b) treats the
    substrate at different rates in different areas to produce a nonuniform
    surface.


CLS 438/FOR109
TXT Metal layer etched:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein a layer of the substrate
    etched contains metal atoms in elemental form, e.g., alloys, etc.


CLS 438/FOR110
TXT With in situ activation or combining of etching components on surface:

    Foreign art collection for processes directed to (a) applying a chemical
    substance which is inert to the substrate and thereafter treating the
    chemical substrate to produce a chemical reagent which functions to etch
    the substrate, or (b) simultaneously applying two or more substances none
    of which will alone etch the substrate but which interact with each other
    to produce a chemical reagent which etches the substrate.


CLS 438/FOR111
TXT With thin film of etchant between relatively moving substrate and
    conforming surface (e.g., chemical lapping, etc.):

    Foreign art collection for processes in which the etching occurs at a thin
    film of etchant present between the substrate and another conforming
    surface, the substrate and conforming surface being in relative motion to
    one another during the etching.


CLS 438/FOR112
TXT With relative movement between the substrate and a confined pool of
    etchant:

    Foreign art collection for processes including the step of causing a
    relative motion between a substrate being etched and an etchant which is
    confined by a container and wherein the substrate being etched may serve as
    the container.


CLS 438/FOR113
TXT With removal of adhered reaction product from substrate:

    Foreign art collection for processes directed to the formation of reaction
    products by reaction of the etching reagent with a constituent of the
    substrate and thereafter removing the reaction products from the substrate.


CLS 438/FOR114
TXT With substrate rotation, repeated dipping, or advanced movement:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the substrate is (a) rotated
    with respect to the pool of etchant, (b) repeatedly dipped into and removed
    from a pool of etchant, or (c) moved through a pool of etchant.


CLS 438/FOR115
TXT Projection of etchant against a moving substrate or controlling the angle
    or pattern of projected etchant:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein an etchant is transported
    through space by mechanical force and (a) brought into contact with a
    substrate while the substrate is in motion, (b) the etchant is transported
    at a predetermined angle, or (c) the etchant is transported in a particular
    pattern.


CLS 438/FOR116
TXT Recycling or regenerating etchant:

    Foreign art collection for processes which include the step of
    reconstituting or reusing an etchant or wherein, the etchant is removed
    from an etching bath and is returned to an etching bath for further use.


CLS 438/FOR117
TXT With treatment by high energy radiation or plasma (e.g., ion beam, etc.):

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein a substrate is subjected to
    bombardment by high energy radiation above that of the so-called
    ultraviolet range or is subjected to a plasma.


CLS 438/FOR118
TXT Forming or increasing the size of an aperture:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein an etchant is applied to a
    substrate in such a manner that (a) a relatively small passage or opening
    is formed completely through the substrate, or (b) a previously existing
    small passage or opening in an substrate is enlarged by the action of the
    etchant.


CLS 438/FOR119
TXT With mechanical deformation, severing, or abrading of a substrate:


    Foreign art collection for processes wherein a substrate is subjected to a
    physical force of sufficient magnitude to cause permanent distortion
    thereof or removal of material therefrom.


CLS 438/FOR120
TXT Etchant is a gas:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the etchant is in a state of
    molecular dispersion when it contacts the substrate.


CLS 438/FOR121
TXT Etching according to crystalline planes:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the substrate is at least
    partially crystalline and the etchant selectively etches the crystals at
    different rates along different axes or planes of orientation.


CLS 438/FOR122
TXT Etching isolates or modifies a junction in a barrier layer:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein a substrate which includes a
    junction in a barrier layer is treated with an etchant which contacts and
    removes at least a portion of the junction or removes material to isolate
    or separate one junction from another.


CLS 438/FOR123
TXT Discrete junction isolated (e.g., mesa formation, etc.):

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein a substrate containing a
    junction between contiguous layers of barrier layer material is etched in
    such a manner as to isolate multiple areas each containing a discrete
    junction.


CLS 438/FOR124
TXT Sequential application of etchant material:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein plural etching steps are
    carried out on the same substrate at different times.


CLS 438/FOR125
TXT Sequentially etching the same surface of a substrate:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the plural etching steps are
    carried at the same location on the substrate at different times.


CLS 438/FOR126
TXT Each etching exposes surface of an adjacent layer:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein a layer or part of a substrate
    previously covered by a different layer or part of the substrate is exposed
    by each etching step.


CLS 438/FOR127
TXT Etched layer contains silicon (e.g., oxide, nitride, etc.):

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein at least one layer etched
    contains atoms of silicon.


CLS 438/FOR128
TXT Differential etching of a substrate:

    Foreign art collection for processes directed to (a) contacting only
    selected surface areas of the substrate with the etchant to remove a
    constituent part of the substrate at the selected surface areas only, or
    (b) cause the substrate to be treated at different rates in different areas
    to produce a nonuniform surface.


CLS 438/FOR129
TXT Composite substrate:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein a substrate which is
    plural-layered, multipart, or includes distinct areas made of diverse
    compositions, is subjected to an etchant which contacts more than one
    layer, part, or area of the substrate, and results in a differential
    etching of the substrate.


CLS 438/FOR130
TXT Substrate contains metallic element or compound:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein at least a portion of the
    composite includes a metal atom in elemental form or in chemical
    combination.


CLS 438/FOR131
TXT Substrate contains silicon or silicon compound:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein at least a portion of the
    composite includes a silicon atom in elemental form or in chemical
    combination.


CLS 438/FOR132
TXT Resist coating:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein a coating is applied which has
    the sole function of protecting the substrate from the action of the
    etchant.


CLS 438/FOR133
TXT Plural resist coating:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein more than one coating,
    intended to protect at least a portion of the substrate from the action of
    an etchant, is applied.


CLS 438/FOR134
TXT Silicon, germanium, or gallium containing substrate:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the substrate contains
    silicon, germanium, or gallium in elemental form or in chemical combination.


CLS 438/FOR135
TXT MAKING DEVICE HAVING ORGANIC SEMICONDUCTOR COMPONENT:

    Foreign art collection for a process for making a semiconductor device
    having and organic material as at least one component.


CLS 438/FOR136
TXT MAKING DEVICE RESPONSIVE TO RADIATION:

    Foreign art collection for a process for making a device which will react
    to being exposed to radiant energy to produce light, a signal, etc.


CLS 438/FOR137
TXT Radiation detectors, e.g., infrared, etc.:

    Foreign art collection for a process for making a device which indicates
    the presence of radiation.


CLS 438/FOR138
TXT Composed of polycrystalline material:

    Foreign art collection for a process wherein the device is made in the form
    of monolithic matter having plural crystals.


CLS 438/FOR139
TXT Having semiconductor compound:

    Foreign art collection for a process wherein chemical compounds which are
    semiconductors are used, i.e., two different elements in stoichiometric
    proportions having an energy gap between conductor and valance bands
    (generally of the order of 1 ev), e.g., III-V, II-VI and substituted
    compositions thereof.


CLS 438/FOR140
TXT MAKING THYRISTOR, E.G., DIAC, TRIAC, ETC.:

    Foreign art collection for a process for making a device having multiple
    stacked PN junctions.


CLS 438/FOR141
TXT INCLUDING CONTROL RESPONSIVE TO SENSED CONDITION:

    Foreign art collection for a process including the step of regulating an
    operation as a result of a sensed (e.g., test, measurement, etc.) condition.


CLS 438/FOR142
TXT INCLUDING TESTING OR MEASURING:

    Foreign art collection for a process having the step of measuring, or
    testing, a condition of the process or the device made thereby.


CLS 438/FOR143
TXT INCLUDING APPLICATION OF VIBRATORY FORCE:

    Foreign art collection for a process including the step of applying
    periodic motion.


CLS 438/FOR144
TXT INCLUDING GETTERING:

    Foreign art collection for a process having a step of treating a
    semiconductor substrate to reduce or remove deleterious (impurities) or
    micro defects therefrom by withdrawing the same e.g., into an adjacent
    layer, implanting internal localizing regions, or reacting the materials so
    as to produce volatile substances thereof, etc.


CLS 438/FOR145
TXT By ion implanting or irradiating:

    Foreign art collection for subject matter wherein the substrate is exposed
    to ion beams or wave energy to create lattice defects which act as trapping
    sites or to enhance the movement of undesired impurities out of a given
    semiconductor area.


CLS 438/FOR146
TXT By layers which are coated, contacted, or diffused:

    Foreign art collection for subject matter wherein the substrate is exposed
    to a specified material by (1) depositing a layer of the material on the
    substrate, (2) physically contacting the substrate with the material or (3)
    performing a diffusion operation to form a gettering layer in the substrate.


CLS 438/FOR147
TXT By vapor phase surface reaction:

    Foreign art collection for subject matter in which the substrate is treated
    with a reactive gas mixture which preferentially forms volatile compounds
    with the undesired impurities.


CLS 438/FOR148
TXT THERMOMIGRATION:

    Foreign art collection for subject matter wherein impurities are diffused
    in a substrate under a temperature gradient which causes impurities to
    diffuse toward the hotter end.


CLS 438/FOR149
TXT INCLUDING FORMING A SEMICONDUCTOR JUNCTION:

    Foreign art collection for a process including the step of providing a
    region of transition between two types of material differing in impurity
    characteristics (e.g., p and n type) in a semiconductor.


CLS 438/FOR150
TXT Using energy beam to introduce dopant or modify dopant distribution:


    Foreign art collection for a process wherein the substrate is subjected to
    specified energy beams which are the dopant carrier, dopant modifier, the
    source of energy for controlled drive-in of dopant or thermal treatment of
    the same.


CLS 438/FOR151
TXT Neutron, gamma ray or electron beam:

    Foreign art collection for processes involving the use of beamed energy in
    the form of neutrons, gamma rays or electrons.


CLS 438/FOR152
TXT Ionized molecules:

    Foreign art collection for processes involving the use of a beam
    constituted of ionized molecules possessing sufficient kinetic energy to
    penetrate a semiconductor substrate.


CLS 438/FOR153
TXT Coherent light beam:

    Foreign art collection for a process involving use of coherent light in the
    range of ultraviolet (UV) to infrared in a pulsed or scanning mode to
    control defect density of dopant distribution in a doped semiconductor.


CLS 438/FOR154
TXT Ion beam implantation:

    Foreign art collection for processes involving penetration of the surface
    of a semiconductor substrate with ion beams, i.e., charged negative or
    positive particles, functioning as a dopant carrier or dopant modifier
    possessing sufficient kinetic energy to form a junction region in the
    substrate, e.g., P+, P-, N+, N-, PN, NPN, etc., metal semiconductor
    junction exhibiting rectifying properties, etc.


CLS 438/FOR155
TXT Of semiconductor on insulating substrate:

    Foreign art collection for a process wherein the substrate is composed of a
    material highly resistant to flow of current, e.g., sapphire, beryllium
    oxide, spinel, etc.


CLS 438/FOR156
TXT Of semiconductor compound:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the substrate is a
    semiconductor composed of at least two different elements in a
    stoichiometric proportions having an energy gap between conduction and
    valence bands (generally of the order of 1 ev), e.g., III-V, II-VI and the
    substitute compositions thereof.


CLS 438/FOR157
TXT Light emitting diodes (LED):

    Foreign art collection for a process wherein the semiconductor compound is
    made in the form of a PN junction which emits light when biased in the
    forward direction.


CLS 438/FOR158
TXT Providing nondopant ion including proton:

    Foreign art collection for processes involving use of beam energy to
    introduce ions incapable of changing the conductivity type of the
    substrate, e.g., rare gas ions, halogen ions, group IV ions in Si/Ge,
    amorphosizing ions, i.e., oxygen/nitrogen ions, etc.


CLS 438/FOR159
TXT Providing auxiliary heating:

    Foreign art collection for processes including the step of adding extra
    heat either from external source or in-situ generation.


CLS 438/FOR160
TXT Forming buried region:

    Foreign art collection for processes including the step of producing ion
    implanted area which is not in contact with the surface of the device.


CLS 438/FOR161
TXT Including multiple implantations of same region:

    Foreign art collection for processes including plural steps of implanting
    ions in the same area of the device.


CLS 438/FOR162
TXT Through insulating layer:

    Foreign art collection for subject matter wherein the implantations pass
    through the same area which is an insulator.


CLS 438/FOR163
TXT Forming field effect transistor (FET) type devices:

    Foreign art collection for subject matter for making field effect
    transistors type devices, e.g., IGFET, MOSFET, COMOS, etc.


CLS 438/FOR164
TXT Using same conductivity type dopant:

    Foreign art collection for processes involving plural steps of implanting
    ions of the same conductivity type dopant either all P or N.


CLS 438/FOR165
TXT Forming bipolar transistor (NPN/PNP):

    Foreign art collection for processes for making a region of an NPN/PNP
    transistor (e.g., base or emitter profiling).


CLS 438/FOR166
TXT Lateral bipolar transistor:

    Foreign art collection for processes for forming a bipolar transistor of
    the lateral type.


CLS 438/FOR167
TXT Having dielectric isolation:

    Foreign art collection for processes involving the incorporation of an
    insulating regions, e.g., air-gap, recessed oxide, etc., to separate
    adjacent areas.


CLS 438/FOR168
TXT Forming complementary MOS (metal oxide semiconductor):

    Foreign art collection for processes for forming complementary metal oxide
    semiconductor device, e.g., forming source and drain regions in the
    implanted well-region, etc.


CLS 438/FOR169
TXT Using oblique beam:

    Foreign art collection for processes involving implanting ions other than
    right angle with respect to plane of substrate.


CLS 438/FOR170
TXT Using shadow mask:

    Foreign art collection for processes involving use of a mask positioned
    with respect to the energy beam and substrate in such a manner as to cast a
    shadow on the substrate.


CLS 438/FOR171
TXT Having projected range less than thickness of dielectrics on substrate:


    Foreign art collection for processes include the step of limiting the
    projected range of the ion energy to be less than the combined thickness of
    the dielectric material on the substrate.


CLS 438/FOR172
TXT Into shaped or grooved semiconductor substrate:

    Foreign art collection for processes for implanting ions in a channel of
    the semiconductor substrate.


CLS 438/FOR173
TXT Involving Schottky contact formation:

    Foreign art collection for processes for forming a metal semiconductor
    junction which exhibits current rectifying characteristics, known as
    Schottky barrier effect wherein the current is mainly due to majority
    carriers rather than PN junction.

    Please note, foreign art collections FOR 175 through FOR 184 and  FOR 186
    through 201 correspond to unofficial subclasses formed by the examiners and
    as such do not have definitions associated with them.


CLS 438/FOR174
TXT Forming pair of device regions separated by gate structure, i.e., FET:

    Foreign art collection for processes for forming two regions, e.g., source
    and regions, etc. on a device separated by a gate composed of thin
    insulator and an electron (gate) layer formed thereon in such a manner that
    conductance between the device regions (channel regions) is modulated by
    varying the gate voltage, i.e., FET.


CLS 438/FOR185
TXT Self-aligned:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein a previously formed device
    feature is utilized in proper interrelationship (registration), with
    related device regions.


CLS 438/FOR202
TXT Gate structure constructed of diverse dielectrics:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the gate structure is made
    from different dielectric materials.


CLS 438/FOR203
TXT Gate surrounded by dielectric layer, e.g., floating gate, etc.:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the gate structure is
    submerged in dielectric material.


CLS 438/FOR204
TXT Adjusting channel dimension:

    Foreign art collection for processes involving controlling the geometric
    configuration of the conductivity profile of the channel region.


CLS 438/FOR205
TXT Active step for controlling threshold voltage:

    Foreign art collection for processes involving the step of regulating the
    threshold voltage of the device.


CLS 438/FOR206
TXT Into polycrystalline or polyamorphous regions:

    Foreign art collection for processes involving implanting ions into a
    polycrystalline or polyamorphous, i.e., noncrystalline substrate.


CLS 438/FOR207
TXT Integrating active with passive device:

    Foreign art collection for processes for combing active device e.g, FET,
    Transistor, etc.        with passive devices, e.g., resistor, capacitor,
    etc.


CLS 438/FOR208
TXT Forming plural active devices in grid/array, e.g., RAMS/ROMS, etc.:

    Foreign art collection for processes for making multiple active devices,
    e.g., FETs, transistors, diodes, etc., arranged in grids/arrays, e.g.,
    memory cells, etc.


CLS 438/FOR209
TXT Having multiple-level electrodes:

    Foreign art collection for processes forming plural electrodes at various
    levels of the device.


CLS 438/FOR210
TXT Forming electrodes in laterally spaced relationships:

    Foreign art collection for processes for forming electrodes spaced
    laterally one from the other.


CLS 438/FOR211
TXT Making assemblies of plural individual devices having community feature,
    e.g., integrated circuit, electrical connection, etc.:

    Foreign art collection for processes for putting together multiple single
    devices having something in common, e.g., mounted in an integrated circuit,
    electrical interconnections, etc.


CLS 438/FOR212
TXT Memory devices:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the devices produced are a
    means of storing information usually in a computer.


CLS 438/FOR213
TXT Charge coupled devices (CCD):

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the devices produced are
    charge coupled (CCD).


CLS 438/FOR214
TXT Diverse types:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the devices produced are of
    different types.


CLS 438/FOR215
TXT Integrated injection logic (I2L) circuits:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein different types of integrated
    injection logic devices (I2L) are produced.


CLS 438/FOR216
TXT Plural field effect transistors (CMOS):

    Foreign art collection for a process wherein different types of field
    effect transistors are produced.


CLS 438/FOR217
TXT Complimentary metal oxide having diverse conductivity source and drain
    regions: (437/57)

    Foreign art collection for subject matter wherein complementary metal oxide
    semiconductor field effect transistors have source and drain regions of
    opposite conductivity.


CLS 438/FOR218
TXT Having like conductivity source and drain regions:

    Foreign art collection for subject matter wherein the transistors have
    source and drain regions of the same conductivity.


CLS 438/FOR219
TXT Including field effect transistor:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the diverse type devices
    produced is a field effect transistor.


CLS 438/FOR220
TXT Including passive device:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein one of the diverse type
    devices produced is a passive field effect transistor.


CLS 438/FOR221
TXT Including isolation step:

    Foreign art collection for processes for separating devices or regions by
    providing means whereby electron flow will not be possible between such
    devices or regions, e.g., dielectric area, air-gap, intrinsic zone by
    counter doping, reversed biased PN junction or combinations thereof.


CLS 438/FOR222
TXT By forming total dielectric isolation:

    Foreign art collection for processes for forming complete insulation of
    current flow surrounding the active regions, e.g., bathtub, waffle-wafer
    isolation, etc.


CLS 438/FOR223
TXT By forming vertical isolation combining dielectric and PN junction:


    Foreign art collection for processes wherein an upright isolation is formed
    by joining an insulative area with a PN junction.


CLS 438/FOR224
TXT Using vertical dielectric (air-gap/insulator) and horizontal PN junction:


    Foreign art collection for processes wherein isolation is performed by
    combining an upright insulator with a horizontal PN junction.


CLS 438/FOR225
TXT Grooved air gap only:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the dielectric produced is a
    furrowed opening to air only.


CLS 438/FOR226
TXT V-groove:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the geometry of the groove is
    V-shaped.


CLS 438/FOR227
TXT Grooved and refilled with insulator:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the isolation is performed by
    a step of furrowing followed by refilling the furrow with a nonconductor.


CLS 438/FOR228
TXT V-groove:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the groove has a V-shaped
    geometry.


CLS 438/FOR229
TXT Recessed oxide by localized oxidation:

    Foreign art collection for processes for forming the recessed oxide by use
    of localized oxidation, e.g., using a mask, etc.


CLS 438/FOR230
TXT Preliminary formation of guard ring:

    Foreign art collection for processes for forming a guard ring to prevent
    surface inversion beneath the recessed oxide.


CLS 438/FOR231
TXT Preliminary anodizing:

    Foreign art collection for processes including a step electrochemical
    action preceding the formation of the recessed oxide.


CLS 438/FOR232
TXT Preliminary etching of groove:

    Foreign art collection for processes including step of etching a farrow
    before forming the recessed oxide.


CLS 438/FOR233
TXT Using overhanging oxidation mask and pretreatment of recessed walls:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the etching step produces an
    overhanging oxidation mask with a pretreatment of the recessed walls.


CLS 438/FOR234
TXT Isolation by PN junction only:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein only PN junction formation
    isolates the device regions.


CLS 438/FOR235
TXT By diffusion from upper surface only:

    Foreign art collection for processes for forming the Pn junction by
    diffusion from only the topmost surface of the device.


CLS 438/FOR236
TXT By up-diffusion from substrate region and down diffusion into upper surface
    layer:

    Foreign art collection  for processes for forming the isolation by upward
    diffusion from the substrate into the upper region and downward diffusion
    from the upper region into the substrate.


CLS 438/FOR237
TXT Substrate and epitaxial region of same conductivity type, i.e., P or N:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the substrate and the active
    epitaxial region are both either P or N type.


CLS 438/FOR238
TXT By etching and refilling with semiconductor material having diverse
    conductivity:

    Foreign art collection for processes for forming the isolation by etching
    and filling the etched region with a semiconductor material of the opposite
    type conductivity of the material etched.


CLS 438/FOR239
TXT Using polycrystalline region:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein polycrystalline areas form
    isolation regions.


CLS 438/FOR240
TXT Shadow masking:

    Foreign art collection for processes involving the use of a mask positioned
    with respect to the radiation and the substrate in such a manner as to cast
    a shadow.


CLS 438/FOR241
TXT Doping during fluid growth of semiconductor material on substrate:


    Foreign art collection for processes for growing a layer of semiconductor
    material from a liquid or gaseous medium and at the same time adding an
    impurity (p- or n-type).


CLS 438/FOR242
TXT Including heat to anneal:

    Foreign art collection for processes providing a increased temperature
    modification to anneal.


CLS 438/FOR243
TXT Growing single crystal on amorphous substrate:

    Foreign art collection for processes for growing only one crystalline
    material on a solid substance which does not crystalline and is without
    definite geometrical shape, i.e., amorphous.


CLS 438/FOR244
TXT Growing single crystal on single crystal insulator (SOS):

    Foreign art collection for processes for growing only one crystalline
    material on only one other crystalline material, the latter being a poor
    electrical conductor.


CLS 438/FOR245
TXT Including purifying stage during growth:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein provision(s) is made to render
    the material more pure.


CLS 438/FOR246
TXT Using transitory substrate:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the base material exist only
    temporarily.


CLS 438/FOR247
TXT Using inert atmosphere:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein a nonreactive gaseous medium
    is used.


CLS 438/FOR248
TXT Using catalyst to alter growth process:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein a reaction modifying material
    is used to change the growth rate.


CLS 438/FOR249
TXT Growth through opening:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the crystal growth occurs in
    an open space in or on the device.


CLS 438/FOR250
TXT Forming recess in substrate and refilling:

    Foreign art collection for processes for making a depression in the base
    material and placing a filling material in the same.


CLS 438/FOR251
TXT By liquid phase epitaxy:

    Foreign art collection for processes for growing the same type crystal from
    a liquid.


CLS 438/FOR252
TXT By liquid phase epitaxy:

    Foreign art collection for processes for growing the same type crystal from
    a liquid.


CLS 438/FOR253
TXT Specified crystal orientation other than (100) or (111) planes:

    Foreign art collection for processes involving orienting crystals in a
    named plane other than (100) or (111) planes.


CLS 438/FOR254
TXT Introducing minority carrier life time reducing dopant during growth, i.e.,
    deep level dopant Au (Gold), Cr (Chromium), Fe (Iron), Ni (Nickel), etc.:


    Foreign art collection for processes involving the introduction of a less
    predominant dopant carrier functioning as a reducing dopant during the
    growth process, i.e., Au (Gold), Cr (Chromium), Fe (Iron), Ni (Nickel), etc.


CLS 438/FOR255
TXT Autodoping control:

    Foreign art collection for processes involving the regulation of
    self-induced impurity production in a semiconductor material.


CLS 438/FOR256
TXT Compound formed from Group III and Group V elements:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the material which forms the
    semiconductor is composed of elements from Group III, B (Boron), Al
    (Aluminum), Ga (Gallium), In (Indium), etc. and Group V, N (Nitrogen), P
    (Phosphorus), As (Arsenic), Sb (Antimony), Si (Bismuth), etc.


CLS 438/FOR257
TXT Forming buried regions with outdiffusion control:

    Foreign art collection for processes for making subsurface areas while
    regulating the diffusion from within towards the outside.


CLS 438/FOR258
TXT Plural dopants simultaneously outdiffusioned:

    Foreign art collection for processes for diffusing from within towards the
    outside multiple impurities at the same time.


CLS 438/FOR259
TXT Growing mono and polycrystalline regions simultaneously:

    Foreign art collection for processes for growing at the same time materials
    wherein (1) crystallographic orientation of all the basic groups of atoms
    are the same and (2) monolithic matter containing plural crystals.


CLS 438/FOR260
TXT Growing silicon carbide (SiC):

    Foreign art collection for processes for growing silicon carbide (SiC).


CLS 438/FOR261
TXT Growing amorphous semiconductor material:

    Foreign art collection for processes for growing semiconductor material
    which is a solid substance that does not crystalline and is without
    definite geometric shape, i.e., amorphous.


CLS 438/FOR262
TXT Source and substrate in close-space relationship:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the dopant material and the
    base material in a near touching relationship.


CLS 438/FOR263
TXT Group IV elements:

    Foreign art collection for processes involving use of Group IV elements,
    e.g., C (Carbon), Si (Silicon), Ge (Germanium), Sn (Tin), Pb (Lead), etc.


CLS 438/FOR264
TXT Compound formed from Group III and Group V elements:

    Foreign art collection for processes involving use of a compound made from
    elements of Groups III, B (Boron), Al (Aluminum), Ga (Gallium), In
    (Indium), etc.  and Group V, O (Oxygen), S (sulfur), Se (Selenium), Te
    (Tellurium), etc.


CLS 438/FOR265
TXT Vacuum growing using molecular beam, i.e., vacuum deposition:

    Foreign art collection for processes for growing crystals under a vacuum
    using a molecular beam.  This is sometimes known as molecular beam epitaxy
    (MBE).


CLS 438/FOR266
TXT Group IV elements:

    Foreign art collection for processes involving Group IV elements, C
    (Carbon), Si (Silicon), Ge (Germanium), Sn (Tin), Pb (Lead), etc.


CLS 438/FOR267
TXT Compound formed from Group III and Group V elements:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the material which forms the
    semiconductor is composed of elements from Group III, B (Boron), Al
    (Aluminum), Ga (Gallium), In (Indium), etc. and Group V, N (Nitrogen), P
    (Phosphorus), As (Arsenic), Sb (Antimony), Be (Bismuth), etc.


CLS 438/FOR268
TXT Growing single layer in multi-steps:

    Foreign art collection for processes for growing a layer of material in
    plural operations (steps).


CLS 438/FOR269
TXT Polycrystalline layers:

    Foreign art collection for processes for growing plural layers having
    monolithic matter containing multiple crystals.


CLS 438/FOR270
TXT Using modulated dopants or materials, e.g., superlattice, etc.:

    Foreign art collection for processes using modified materials or dopants,
    e.g., superlattice.


CLS 438/FOR271
TXT Using preliminary or intermediate metal layer:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein a first or mid-layer of metal
    material is provided.


CLS 438/FOR272
TXT Growing by varying rates:

    Foreign art collection for processes for growing a layer of material at a
    nonuniform rate.


CLS 438/FOR273
TXT Using electric current, e.g., Peltier effect, glow discharge etc.:

    Foreign art collection for processes involving use of electric current.


CLS 438/FOR274
TXT Using seed in liquid phase:

    Foreign art collection for processes for using a solid starting material
    (seed) to grow a single crystal material from a liquid source.


CLS 438/FOR275
TXT Pulling from melt:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the seed is used to start
    formation of material from molten matter and is pulled therefrom.


CLS 438/FOR276
TXT And diffusing:

    Foreign art collection for processes consisting of permeating an impurity
    into the semiconductor.


CLS 438/FOR277
TXT Liquid and vapor phase epitaxy in sequence:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the material is formed either
    from a liquid or vapor sequentially.


CLS 438/FOR278
TXT Involving capillary action:

    Foreign art collection for processes involving elevation or depression of
    the surface of a liquid in a fine tube, etc., due to surface tension and
    the forces of cohesion and adhesion.


CLS 438/FOR279
TXT Sliding liquid phase epitaxy:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the material is deposited by a
    pool of material moving along and in continuous contact with a substrate.


CLS 438/FOR280
TXT Modifying melt composition:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the composition of the melt is
    changed during the process.


CLS 438/FOR281
TXT Controlling volume or thickness of growth:

    Foreign art collection for processes having the step of regulating the
    volume of the material deposited or the thickness of the deposited layer.


CLS 438/FOR282
TXT Preliminary dissolving substrate surface:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the substrate surface is at
    least partially dissolved before the material is grown or deposited.


CLS 438/FOR283
TXT With nonlinear slide movement:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the slide is operated in a
    manner other than linear.


CLS 438/FOR284
TXT One melt simultaneously contacting plural substrates:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein a single melt contacts
    multiple substrates at the same time.


CLS 438/FOR285
TXT Tipping liquid phase epitaxy:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the formation of the material
    is made by a slanted or sloping position.


CLS 438/FOR286
TXT Heteroepitaxy:

    Foreign art collection for processes for growing a single crystal material
    on a different single crystal material.


CLS 438/FOR287
TXT Multi-color light emitting diode (LED):

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein a device is produced on a
    substrate capable of producing light in different wave lengths.


CLS 438/FOR288
TXT Graded composition:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the composition of the
    material is gradually changed during the process.


CLS 438/FOR289
TXT Forming laser:

    Foreign art collection for processes for making a laser.


CLS 438/FOR290
TXT By liquid phase epitaxy:

    Foreign art collection for processes involving growth of a single crystal
    material from a liquid source.


CLS 438/FOR291
TXT Si(Silicon) on Ge(Germanium) or Ge(Germanium on Si(Silicon):

    Foreign art collection for processes for depositing Si(Silicon on crystals
    on a Ge(Germanium) substrate or vice-versa.


CLS 438/FOR292
TXT Either Si(Silicon) or Ge(Germanium) layered with or on compound formed from
    Group III and Group V elements:

    Foreign art collection for processes for growing either a Si(Silicon) or
    Ge(Germanium) layer with or on a compound formed from Group III B(Bron),
    Al(Aluminum), Ga(Gallium), In(Indium), etc. and Group V elements
    N(Nitrogen), P(Phosphorus), As(Arsenic), Sb(Antimony), Bi(Bismuth) etc.


CLS 438/FOR293
TXT Compound formed from Group III and Group V elements on diverse Group III
    and Group V elements including substituted Group III and Group V compounds:

    Foreign art collection for processes for growing a compound formed from
    Group III, B (Boron), Al (Aluminum), Ga (Gallium), In (Indium), etc. and
    Group V, N (Nitrogen), S (Sulfur), Se (Selenium), Te (Tellurium), etc.
    elements on a compound composed of different Group III and Group V elements
    wherein the elements of the groups may be substituted.


CLS 438/FOR294
TXT By fusing dopant with substrate, e.g., alloying, etc.:

    Foreign art collection for processes for incorporating an impurity into a
    semiconductor material by a melting operation.


CLS 438/FOR295
TXT Using flux:

    Foreign art collection for processes including the step of using a material
    to promote the fusion of the materials.


CLS 438/FOR296
TXT Passing electric current through material:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein an electric current is applied
    to and through the material.


CLS 438/FOR297
TXT With application of pressure to material during fusion:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein pressure is applied during the
    fusion operation.


CLS 438/FOR298
TXT Including plural controlled heating or cooling steps:

    Foreign art collection for processes including regulated multiple cooling
    or heating operations.


CLS 438/FOR299
TXT Including diffusion after fusing step:

    Foreign art collection for processes including doping by diffusing after
    the fusing operation.


CLS 438/FOR300
TXT Including additional material to improve wettability or flow
    characteristics:


    Foreign art collection for processes including the incorporation of a
    nonreactive agent to alter the melting and crystallization of the alloying
    substance.


CLS 438/FOR301
TXT Diffusing a dopant:

    Foreign art collection for processes for permeating an impurity into the
    semiconductor.


CLS 438/FOR302
TXT To control carrier lifetime, i.e., deep level dopant Au(Gold),
    Cr(Chromium), Fe(Iron), Ni(Nickel), etc.:

    Foreign art collection for processes involving the introduction of a less
    predominant carrier, e.g., Au(Gold), Cr(Chromium), Fe(Iron), Ni(Nickel),
    etc.


CLS 438/FOR303
TXT Al(Aluminum) dopant:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the impurity is Al(Aluminum).


CLS 438/FOR304
TXT Li(Lithium) dopant:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the impurity is Li(Lithium).


CLS 438/FOR305
TXT Including nonuniform heating:

    Foreign art collection for processes including heating distinct areas as
    opposed to heating the entire area.


CLS 438/FOR306
TXT To solid state solubility concentration:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the dopant is introduced to
    the maximum concentration which can be obtained before alloying takes
    place, i.e., degenerately doped.


CLS 438/FOR307
TXT Using multiple layered mask:

    Foreign art collection for processes involving use of a mask composed of
    plural layers.


CLS 438/FOR308
TXT Having plural predetermined openings in master mask:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the mask contains multiple
    desired openings.


CLS 438/FOR309
TXT Forming partially overlapping regions:

    Foreign art collection for processes for permeating an impurity in
    localized areas which lap over each other in part.


CLS 438/FOR310
TXT Plural dopants in same region, e.g., through same mask opening, etc.:


    Foreign art collection for processes for applying multiply impurities in
    the same area.


CLS 438/FOR311
TXT Simultaneously:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the multiple impurities are
    applied at the same time.


CLS 438/FOR312
TXT Plural dopants simultaneously in plural regions:

    Foreign art collection for processes for permeating multiple impurities in
    multiple localized areas.


CLS 438/FOR313
TXT Single dopant forming plural diverse regions:

    Foreign art collection for processes for permeating an impurity into
    multiple different localized areas.


CLS 438/FOR314
TXT Forming regions of different concentrations or different depths:

    Foreign art collection for a process wherein the regions formed differ in
    amount of impurity or the distance the impurity has to travel inwardly from
    the surface.


CLS 438/FOR315
TXT Using metal mask:

    Foreign art collection for processes involving use of a mask made from
    metal.


CLS 438/FOR316
TXT Outwardly:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the impurities moves from an
    internal location to an outward direction.


CLS 438/FOR317
TXT Laterally under mask:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the diffusion is carried out
    on a slanted angle under the mask.


CLS 438/FOR318
TXT Edge diffusion by using edge portion of structure other than masking layer
    to mask:

    Foreign art collection for processes using and edge portion of the device
    (other than masking layer) functioning as a mask.


CLS 438/FOR319
TXT From melt:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the source of the impurity is
    molten material.


CLS 438/FOR320
TXT From solid dopant source in contact with substrate:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the impurity is produced by a
    solid substance which is touching the semiconductor to be doped.


CLS 438/FOR321
TXT Using capping layer over dopant source to prevent outdiffusion of dopant:

    Foreign art collection for processes using a layer of material to prevent
    the diffusion of the impurity (located within the device) outside of same.


CLS 438/FOR322
TXT Polycrystalline semiconductor source:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the solid material is composed
    of multicrystals.


CLS 438/FOR323
TXT Organic source:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the solid material is composed
    of other than inorganic matter.


CLS 438/FOR324
TXT Glassy source or doped oxide:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the solid material is composed
    of a glass type material or an oxide which has been doped.


CLS 438/FOR325
TXT From vapor phase:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the impurity is produced by a
    gaseous substance.


CLS 438/FOR326
TXT In plural stages:

    Foreign art collection for processes carried out in multiple stages.


CLS 438/FOR327
TXT Zn (Zinc) dopant:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the impurity is Zn (Zinc).


CLS 438/FOR328
TXT Solid source is operative relation with semiconductor material:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the dopant source material is
    in close proximity with the semiconductor material.


CLS 438/FOR329
TXT In a capsule type enclosure:

    Foreign art collection for processes carried out in a small container like
    apparatus.


CLS 438/FOR330
TXT DIRECTLY APPLYING ELECTRICAL CURRENT:

    Foreign art collection for processes including the step having an electric
    current come in contact with the semiconductor material.


CLS 438/FOR331
TXT And regulating temperature:

    Foreign art collection for processes including the step of controlling the
    degree of hotness or coldness.


CLS 438/FOR332
TXT Alternating or pulsed current:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the electric current reverses
    its direction periodically or is presented in periodic surges.


CLS 438/FOR333
TXT APPLYING CORPUSCULAR OR ELECTROMAGNETIC ENERGY:

    Foreign art collection for processes including the step of applying energy
    in the form of electromagnetic radiation or corpuscular emissions, e.g.,
    alpha, beta, cosmic, etc.


CLS 438/FOR334
TXT To anneal:

    Foreign art collection for processes for heat treating the material to
    obtain a desired result.


CLS 438/FOR335
TXT FORMING SCHOTTKY CONTACT:

    Foreign art collection for processes for making a simple
    metal-to-semiconductor interface that exhibits a nonlinear impedance.


CLS 438/FOR336
TXT On semiconductor compound:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the contact is formed on a
    compound which is a semiconductor.


CLS 438/FOR337
TXT Multi-layer electrode:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the contact is composed of
    plural layers.


CLS 438/FOR338
TXT Using Platinum Group silicide, i.e., silicide of Pt (Platinum), Pd
    (Palladium), Rh (Rhodium), Ru (Ruthenium), Ir (Iridium), Os (Osmium):

    Foreign art collection for processes for forming a contact using the
    chemical combination of Si (Silicon) with one of the platinum group
    elements, e.g., Pt (Platinum), Pd (Palladium), Rh (Rhodium), Ru
    (Ruthenium), Ir (Iridium), Os (Osmium).


CLS 438/FOR339
TXT Using metal, i.e., Pt(Platinum, Pd(Palladium), Rh(Rhodium), Ru(Ruthenium),
    Ir(Iridium), Os(Osmium), Au(Gold), Ag(Silver):

    Foreign art collection for processes for forming the contact using precious
    metal, i.e., Pt(Platinum), Pd(Palladium), Rh(Rhodium), Ru(Ruthenium),
    Ir(Iridium), Os(Osmium), Au(Gold), Ag(Silver).


CLS 438/FOR340
TXT MAKING OR ATTACHING ELECTRODE ON OR TO SEMICONDUCTOR, OR SECURING COMPLETED
    SEMICONDUCTOR TO MOUNTING OR HOUSING:

    Foreign art collection for processes for forming or connecting an electrode
    on or to a semiconductor body.  Also securing a finished semiconductor to a
    mount or housing structure.


CLS 438/FOR341
TXT Forming transparent electrode:

    Foreign art collection for processes for making a contact that can be seen
    through.


CLS 438/FOR342
TXT Forming beam electrode:

    Foreign art collection for processes for making a contact in the shape of a
    beam.


CLS 438/FOR343
TXT Forming bump electrode:

    Foreign art collection for processes for making a contact in the shape of a
    bump.


CLS 438/FOR344
TXT Electrode formed on substrate composed of elements of Group III and Group V
    semiconductor compound:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the contact is placed on a
    base material made from Group III, B (Boron), Al (Aluminum), Ga (Gallium),
    In (Indium), etc., and Group V, N (Nitrogen), P (Phosphorus), As (Arsenic),
    Sb (Antimony), Bi (Bismuth), etc., elements in the form of compounds which
    function as semiconductors.


CLS 438/FOR345
TXT Electrode formed on substrate composed of elements of Group II and Group VI
    semiconductor compound:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the contact is placed on a
    base material made from Group II, Zn (Zinc), Cd (Cadium), Hg (Mercury),
    etc. and Group VI, O (Oxygen), S (Sulfur), Se (Selenium), Te (Tellurium) in
    the form of compounds which function as semiconductors.


CLS 438/FOR346
TXT Single polycrystalline electrode layer on substrate:

    Foreign art collection for processes  wherein the contact is composed of
    single layer of multicrystalline material on a base material.


CLS 438/FOR347
TXT Single metal layer electrode on substrate:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein a single metal layer serves as
    a contact on a base material.


CLS 438/FOR348
TXT Subsequently fusing, e.g., alloying, sintering, etc.:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the metal contact is after
    treated to combine the materials at point of contact, e.g, by melting, etc.


CLS 438/FOR349
TXT Forming plural layered electrode:

    Foreign art collection for processes for making the electrode in multiply
    layers.


CLS 438/FOR350
TXT Including central layer acting as barrier between outer layers:

    Foreign art collection for processes involving a device having a middle
    layer located between outer layers and functioning as a barrier between the
    outer layers.


CLS 438/FOR351
TXT Of polysilicon only:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the contact is composed of
    multiple layers of polysilicon crystals only.


CLS 438/FOR352
TXT Including refractory metal layer of Ti (Titanium), Zr (Zirconium), Hf
    (Hafnium), V (Vanadium), Nb (Niobium), Ta (Tantalum), Cr (Chronium), Mo
    (Molybdenum), W (Tungsten):

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein one of the layers is composed
    of a refractory metal Ti (Titanium), Zr (Zirconium), Hf (Hafnium), V
    (Vanadium), Nb (Niobium), Ta (Tantalum), Cr (Chronium), Mo (Molybdenum), W
    (Tungsten).


CLS 438/FOR353
TXT Including polycrystalline silicon layer:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein at least one layer is composed
    of polycrystalline silicon.


CLS 438/FOR354
TXT Including Al (Aluminum) layer:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein one layer is composed of Al
    (Aluminum).


CLS 438/FOR355
TXT Including layer separated by insulator:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein a nonconductive layer
    separates at least one other layer.


CLS 438/FOR356
TXT Forming electrode of alloy or electrode of a compound of Si (Silicon):


    Foreign art collection for processes for making a contact from a mixture of
    metals or a chemical compound of Si (Silicon).


CLS 438/FOR357
TXT Al (Aluminium) alloy:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the contact is composed of a
    mixture of metals one being Al (Aluminum).


CLS 438/FOR358
TXT Including Cu (Copper):

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the mixture of metals includes
    Cu (Copper).


CLS 438/FOR359
TXT Including Si (Silicon):

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the contact contains Si
    (Silicon).


CLS 438/FOR360
TXT Silicide of Ti(Titanium), Zr(Zirconium), Hf(Hafnium), V(Vanadium),
    Nb(Niobium), Ta(Tantalum), Cr(Chromium), Mo(Molybdenum), W(Tungsten),:

    Foreign art collection for processes for forming contact using chemical
    combinations of Si(Silicon) and anyone of Ti(Titanium), Zr(Zirconium),
    Hf(Hafnium), V(Vanadium), Nb(Niobium), Ta(Tantalum), Cr(Chromium),
    Mo(Molybdenum), W(Tungsten).


CLS 438/FOR361
TXT Of platinum metal group Ru (Ruthenium), Rh (Rhodium), Pd (Palladium), Os
    (Osmium), Ir (Iridium), Pt (Platinum):

    Foreign art collection for processes for forming the contact from a
    platinum metal group Ru (Ruthenium), Rh (Rhodium, Pd (Palladium), Os
    (Osmium), Ir (Iridium), Pt (Platinum).


CLS 438/FOR362
TXT By fusing metal with semiconductor (alloying):

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the contact is formed by heat
    treating the materials to cause them to combine at point of contact.


CLS 438/FOR363
TXT Depositing electrode in preformed recess in substrate:

    Foreign art collection for processes for applying electrode material in a
    preformed recess in the base material.


CLS 438/FOR364
TXT Including positioning of point contact:

    Foreign art collection for processes including the step of placing an
    electrode of small cross sectional or contacting area into touching
    relationship with a substantially larger area on part of the device.


CLS 438/FOR365
TXT Making plural devices:

    Foreign art collection for processes for making multiple devices.


CLS 438/FOR366
TXT Using strip lead frame:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the formed contacts are formed
    on a continuous length or strip of material.


CLS 438/FOR367
TXT And encapsulating:

    Foreign art collection for processes for enclosing the device in a coating
    material.


CLS 438/FOR368
TXT Stacked array, e.g., rectifier:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the plural devices are
    configured one on top of the other.


CLS 438/FOR369
TXT Securing completed semiconductor to mounting, housing or external lead:

    Foreign art collection for processes for attaching an operable
    semiconductor to a support, e.g., mounting, housing or external lead.


CLS 438/FOR370
TXT Including contaminant removal:

    Foreign art collection for processes having the step of removing
    undesirable material.


CLS 438/FOR371
TXT Utilizing potting or encapsulating material only to surround leads and
    device to maintain position, i.e., without housing:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the leads are held in position
    on the device by only encapsulating material.


CLS 438/FOR372
TXT Including application of pressure:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein pressure is applied sometimes
    during the operation.


CLS 438/FOR373
TXT Glass material:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the potting material is a
    glass.


CLS 438/FOR374
TXT Utilizing header (molding surface means):

    Foreign art collection for processes subclass 209 wherein a shape imparting
    means is used.


CLS 438/FOR375
TXT Insulating housing:

    Foreign art collection for processes including a nonconducting housing.


CLS 438/FOR376
TXT Including application of pressure:

    Foreign art collection for processes including the use of pressure during
    some stage of the operation.


CLS 438/FOR377
TXT And lead frame:

    Foreign art collection for processes including use of a conductive frame
    that holds leads of a plastic encapsulated package in place before
    encapsulation and is cut away after encapsulation.


CLS 438/FOR378
TXT Ceramic housing:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the housing is made from a
    clay-like material, consisting primarily of magnesium and aluminum.


CLS 438/FOR379
TXT Including encapsulating:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the housing is enclosed in a
    coating material.


CLS 438/FOR380
TXT Lead frame:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the support usually is in the
    form of a strip having leads depending therefrom.


CLS 438/FOR381
TXT Metallic housing:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the housing is composed of a
    material that has high electrical and thermal conductivity at normal
    temperatures.


CLS 438/FOR382
TXT Including application of pressure:

    Foreign art collection for processes including the application of pressure
    during some stage of the operation.


CLS 438/FOR383
TXT Including glass support base:

    Foreign art collection for processes including the use of a support base
    made of glass.


CLS 438/FOR384
TXT Including encapsulating:

    Foreign art collection for processes including placing a material on or
    around the housing to provide protection from the surrounding environment.


CLS 438/FOR385
TXT INCLUDING COATING OR MATERIAL REMOVAL, E.G., ETCHING, GRINDING, ETC.:


    Foreign art collection for processes having the step of (1) covering or
    impregnating, or (2) wearing away of a portion of (as by acid, abrasion,
    etc.) a semiconductor.


CLS 438/FOR386
TXT Substrate dicing:

    Foreign art collection for processes including the step cutting the
    substrate by any manner, e.g., sawing, etching, etc.


CLS 438/FOR387
TXT With a perfecting coating:

    Foreign art collection for processes including the step of coating during
    the dicing which coating enhances the dicing.


CLS 438/FOR388
TXT Coating and etching:

    Foreign art collection for processes having both the step of coating and
    etching regardless of the order of occurrence of the steps.


CLS 438/FOR389
TXT Of radiation resist layer:

    Foreign art collection for processes including coating or etching, or both
    steps of a resist layer which is affected by electromagnetic radiation.


CLS 438/FOR390
TXT By immersion metal plating from solution, i.e., electroless plating:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein a metal coating is applied by
    immersion in a solution of a metallic compound without the use of
    electricity.


CLS 438/FOR391
TXT By  spinning:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the operation is carried out
    by a rotatory motion.


CLS 438/FOR392
TXT Elemental (Se) Selenium substrate or coating:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the element selenium (Se)
    constitutes either the base or the coating.


CLS 438/FOR393
TXT Of polycrystalline semiconductor material on substrate:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein a multicrystalline
    semiconductor material e.g., Si, Ge, GaAs, etc., is coated on a base.


CLS 438/FOR394
TXT Semiconductor compound or mixed semiconductor material:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the semiconductor material is
    a compound or mixture.


CLS 438/FOR395
TXT Of a dielectric or insulative material:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the coating or etchant is
    applied to a nonconducting substrate.


CLS 438/FOR396
TXT Containing Group III atom:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the nonconductor substrate
    contains a Group III, B (Boron), Al (Aluminum), Ga (Gallium), In (Indium),
    etc., atom.


CLS 438/FOR397
TXT By reacting with substrate:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the coating or etchant reacts
    with substrate.


CLS 438/FOR398
TXT Monoxide or dioxide of Ge (Germanium) or Si (Silicon):

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the nonconductive substrate is
    composed of either germanium monoxide (GeO) or germanium dioxide (GeO1) or
    silicon monoxide (SiO) or silicon dioxide (SiO2).


CLS 438/FOR399
TXT By reacting with substrate:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the coating or etchant reacts
    with the base.


CLS 438/FOR400
TXT Doped with impurities:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein impurities are added to the
    substrate.


CLS 438/FOR401
TXT Si (Silicon) and N (Nitrogen):

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the nonconductive substrate is
    composed of silicon (Si) and nitrogen (N).


CLS 438/FOR402
TXT By chemical reaction with substrate:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the coating or etchant
    chemically reacts with the base.


CLS 438/FOR403
TXT Directly on semiconductor substrate:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the coating or etchant is
    applied to the nonconducting substrate which is located on a semiconductor
    substrate.


CLS 438/FOR404
TXT By chemical conversion of substrate:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the coating or etchant
    chemically converts the base.


CLS 438/FOR405
TXT Comprising metal layer:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the coating consists of a
    metal layer.


CLS 438/FOR406
TXT On metal:

    Foreign art collection for processes wherein the substrate is metal.


CLS 438/FOR407
TXT TEMPERATURE TREATMENT MODIFYING PROPERTIES OF SEMICONDUCTOR, E.G.,
    ANNEALING, SINTERING, ETC.:

    Foreign art collection for processes for treating a semiconductor with
    other than ambient temperature to change some characteristic of the same.


CLS 438/FOR408
TXT Heating and cooling:

    Foreign art collection for processes including the steps of either
    increasing the temperature above the ambient environment and then lowering
    the temperature or lowering the temperature below the ambient environment
    and then increasing the temperature.


CLS 438/FOR409
TXT INCLUDING SHAPING:

    Foreign art collection for processes having the step of imparting an
    intentional shape of the semiconductor or part thereof.


CLS 438/FOR410
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Foreign art collection for processes not provided for above.


CLS 438/FOR411
TXT UTILIZING PROCESS EQUIVALENTS OR OPTIONS:

    Foreign art collection involving the substitution of an operation that will
    perform the same or similar function of the operation it replaces.


CLS 438/FOR412
TXT MAKING PRESSURE SENSITIVE DEVICE:

    Foreign art collection involving the construction of a device which is
    sensitive to pressure.


CLS 438/FOR413
TXT MAKING DEVICE HAVING HEAT SINK:

    Foreign art collection involving the construction of a device having means
    to control heat in a determined area of the device.

     414. MAKING THERMOPILE:

    Foreign art collection involving the construction of a group of
    thermocouples connected in series used to measure radiant power of energy,
    also a source of electric energy.


CLS 438/FOR415
TXT MAKING DIODE:

    Foreign art collection involving the construction of an electronic device
    having a cathode and an anode.


CLS 438/FOR416
TXT Light emitting diode:

    Foreign art collection wherein the device constructed gives off light.


CLS 438/FOR417
TXT Mounting and contact:

    Foreign art collection involving the details of the mountings and contacts
    of the device.


CLS 438/FOR418
TXT LASER PROCESSING OF FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTOR (FET):

    Foreign art collection involving the use of a laser in the construction of
    a field effect transistor.


CLS 438/FOR419
TXT LASER PROCESSING OF TRANSISTOR:

    Foreign art collection involving the use of a laser in the construction of
    a transistor.


CLS 438/FOR420
TXT MAKING TRANSISTOR ONLY):

    Foreign art collection limited to the construction of a transistor, by
    relatively nonconventional techniques.


CLS 438/FOR421
TXT MAKING JOSEPHSON JUNCTION DEVICE:

    Foreign art collection involving the construction of a device having a
    Josephson junction.


CLS 438/FOR422
TXT MAKING JUNCTION-FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTOR (J-FET) OR STATIC INDUCTION
    TRANSISTOR (SIT) DEVICE:

    Foreign art collection involving the construction of a junction-field
    effect transistor or static induction transistor (SIT).


CLS 438/FOR423
TXT MAKING METAL SEMICONDUCTOR FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTOR (MESFET) DEVICE ONLY:

    Foreign art collection limited to the construction of a metal semiconductor
    field effect transistor.


CLS 438/FOR424
TXT MAKING METAL OXIDE SEMICONDUCTOR FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTOR (MOSFET) DEVICE:

    Foreign art collection involving the construction of a metal oxide
    semiconductor field effect transistor device by relatively nonconvention
    techniques.


CLS 438/FOR425
TXT MAKING NONEPITAXIAL DEVICE:

    Foreign art collection involving the construction of a semiconductor device
    by a process other than by growth of crystalline material.


CLS 438/FOR426
TXT MAKING VERTICALLY STACKED DEVICES (3-DIMENSIONAL STRUCTURE):

    Foreign art collection involving the construction of a 3-dimensional device
    which is vertically stacked.


CLS 438/FOR427
TXT MAKING PHOTOCATHODE OR VIDICON:

    Foreign art collection involving the construction of a photocathode or
    vidicon tube.


CLS 438/FOR428
TXT MAKING LATERAL TRANSISTOR:

    Foreign art collection involving the construction of a lateral transistor,
    i.e., the emitter, base, and collector being formed horizontally displaced
    from each other.


CLS 438/FOR429
TXT MAKING RESISTOR:

    Foreign art collection involving the construction of a resistor, either
    individually or in combination with other device regions.


CLS 438/FOR430
TXT MAKING CAPACITOR:

    Foreign art collection involving the construction of a capacitor, either
    individually or in combination with other device regions.


CLS 438/FOR431
TXT MAKING SILICON-OXIDE-NITRIDE-OXIDE OR SILICON (SONOS) DEVICE:

    Foreign art collection involving the construction of a layered gate
    dielectric of oxide-nitride on a silicon substrate and with silicon as the
    gate material.


CLS 438/FOR432
TXT MAKING STRAIN GAGE:

    Foreign art collection involving the construction of a strain measuring
    device.


CLS 438/FOR433
TXT MAKING FUSE OR FUSABLE DEVICE:

    Foreign art collection involving the construction of a device containing a
    means switchable between a conducting and nonconducting condition.


CLS 438/FOR434
TXT WITH REPAIR OR RECOVERY OF DEVICE:

    Foreign art collection involving renovating a device by repairing or
    recovering the same.


CLS 438/FOR435
TXT HAVING SUBSTRATE OR MASK ALIGNING FEATURE:

    Foreign art collection involving novel lining up a base or mask with other
    structure features of the device.


CLS 438/FOR436
TXT SUBSTRATE SUPPORT OR CAPSULE CONSTRUCTION:

    Foreign art collection involving novel construction of a support for a
    substrate or a capsule, per se.


CLS 438/FOR437
TXT CONTINUOUS PROCESSING:

    Foreign art collection involving carrying out the process steps in a
    continual manner.


CLS 438/FOR438
TXT FORMING HOLLOW BODIES AND ENCLOSED CAVITIES:

    Foreign art collection involving use of hollow structures and cavities
    having material surrounding the same.


CLS 438/FOR439
TXT ENERGY BEAM TREATING RADIATION RESIST ON SEMICONDUCTOR:

    Foreign art collection involving use of energy beam to irradiate a resist
    responsive thereto located on a semiconductor.


CLS 438/FOR440
TXT RADIATION ENHANCED DIFFUSION (R.E.D.):

    Foreign art collection involving a diffusion process assisted by use of
    radiation.


CLS 438/FOR441
TXT ION BEAM SOURCE AND GENERATION:

    Foreign art collection involving use of a source and generation of ion
    beams.


CLS 438/FOR442
TXT IMPLANTATION THROUGH MASK:

    Foreign art collection involving the passage of particles (ions) or of
    energy through a protection masking material.


CLS 438/FOR443
TXT RECOIL IMPLANTATION:

    Foreign art collection involving the use of energy for implanting whereby
    at least a portion of the energy travels in other than a straight path
    (bounces back and forth).


CLS 438/FOR444
TXT DUAL SPECIES IMPLANTING OF SEMICONDUCTOR:

    Foreign art collection involving the use of two dopant sources during
    implantation so as to simultaneously implant both dopants.


CLS 438/FOR445
TXT DOPANT ACTIVATION PROCESS:

    Foreign art collection involving steps taken to activate a dopant.


CLS 438/FOR446
TXT BEAM WRITING OF PATTERNS:

    Foreign art collection involving use of beam energy to create patterns.


CLS 438/FOR447
TXT BEAM PROCESSING OF COMPOUND SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICE:

    Foreign art collection involving use of beam energy to treat a device made
    from semiconductor compounds.


CLS 438/FOR448
TXT HYDROGEN PLASMA TREATMENT OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICE:

    Foreign art collection involving use of hydrogen plasma to treat the
    semiconductor device.


CLS 438/FOR449
TXT MAKING RADIATION RESISTANT DEVICE:

    Foreign art collection involving the construction of a device resistant to
    radiant energy.


CLS 438/FOR450
TXT DEFECT CONTROL OF SEMICONDUCTOR WAFER (PRETREATMENT):

    Foreign art collection involving steps, involving pretreating ones, for the
    control of defects in a semiconductor wafer.


CLS 438/FOR451
TXT SELECTIVE OXIDATION OF ION AMORPHOUSIZED LAYERS:

    Foreign art collection involving enhancing the oxidizability of
    predetermined regions by ion amorphousization of the regions.


CLS 438/FOR452
TXT CONTROLLING CHARGE STATE AT SEMICONDUCTOR-INSULATOR INTERFACE:

    Foreign art collection involving adjusting the charge state where the
    semiconductor and insulator surfaces meet.


CLS 438/FOR453
TXT INCOHERENT LIGHT PROCESSING:

    Foreign art collection involving use of multifrequency light.


CLS 438/FOR454
TXT THERMALLY ASSISTED BEAM PROCESSING:

    Foreign art collection involving use of heat other than that provided by
    (or in addition to) a beam.


CLS 438/FOR455
TXT UTILIZING LIFT-OFF:

    Foreign art collection involving use of the lift-off technique associated
    with coating operations.


CLS 438/FOR456
TXT STOICHIOMETRIC CONTROL OF HOST SUBSTRATE COMPOSITION:

    Foreign art collection involving the regulation of the proportions of
    elements combined in a base substrate composition.


CLS 438/FOR457
TXT SUBSTRATE SURFACE PREPARATION:

    Foreign art collection involving steps for treating the surface of a
    substrate prior to deposition of a layer or junction formation.


CLS 438/FOR458
TXT FORMING TAPERED EDGES ON SUBSTRATE OR ADJACENT LAYERS:

    Foreign art collection involving the formation of slanted edges on either
    the substrate or layers on same or both.


CLS 438/FOR459
TXT MOVABLE MASK:

    Foreign art collection involving use of a mask which can be moved and is
    not in contact with the substrate.


CLS 438/FOR460
TXT CONTROLLED ATMOSPHERE:

    Foreign art collection involving use of a regulated gaseous environment,
    e.g., inert gases, specifically proportioned mixtures, etc.


CLS 438/FOR461
TXT SHALLOW DIFFUSION:

    Foreign art collection involving formation of regions of very small depth
    in the surface of the substrate.


CLS 438/FOR462
TXT AMPHOTERIC DOPING:

    Foreign art collection involving use of a dopant capable of functioning as
    a P or N type depending on process conditions.


CLS 438/FOR463
TXT CONTROLLING DIFFUSION PROFILE BY OXIDATION:

    Foreign art collection involving the regulation of a diffusion contour by
    an oxidation step.


CLS 438/FOR464
TXT DIFFUSION OF OVERLAPPING REGIONS (COMPENSATION):

    Foreign art collection involving diffusing at least partially one area over
    the other.


CLS 438/FOR465
TXT VERTICAL DIFFUSION THROUGH A LAYER:

    Foreign art collection involving diffusion in a perpendicular manner
    through a layer of material.


CLS 438/FOR466
TXT NONSELECTIVE DIFFUSION:

    Foreign art collection involving a random diffusion process, i.e.,
    diffusion without a mask.


CLS 438/FOR467
TXT DISPLACING P-N JUNCTION:

    Art collection involving physical relocation of the P-N junction from its
    originally formed position.


CLS 438/FOR468
TXT ELECTROMIGRATION:

    Foreign art collection involving movement of atoms (usually dopant atoms)
    through a material under the influence of an electric field.


CLS 438/FOR469
TXT SHAPED JUNCTION FORMATION:

    Foreign art collection involving the formation of a junction of a
    nonstandard configuration.


CLS 438/FOR470
TXT USING NONSTANDARD DOPANT:

    Foreign art collection involving use of a material as a dopant which is not
    normally used as such.


CLS 438/FOR471
TXT WASHED EMITTER PROCESS:

    Foreign art collection involving the cleaning of the surface of an emitter
    region by a nonstandard dip-etching or washing step.


CLS 438/FOR472
TXT EMITTER DIP PREVENTION (OR UTILIZATION):

    Foreign art collection involving the utilization of special diffusion
    techniques to eliminate the undesirable tendency of the base-collector
    junction to "bulge" downwardly during the emitter diffusion.


CLS 438/FOR473
TXT UTILIZING SPECIAL MASKS (CARBON, ETC.):

    Foreign art collection involving use of nonconventional masks.


CLS 438/FOR474
TXT LOCALIZED HEATING CONTROL DURING FLUID GROWTH:

    Foreign art collection involving the regulation of heat in a desired area
    during gaseous or liquid deposition of material.


CLS 438/FOR475
TXT FLUID GROWTH INVOLVING VAPOR-LIQUID-SOLID STAGES:

    Foreign art collection involving deposition of material from a vapor into a
    liquid solvent then precipitating the material from solution onto a
    substrate.


CLS 438/FOR476
TXT FLUID GROWTH OF COMPOUNDS OF GROUPS II, IV, OR VI ELEMENTS:

    Foreign art collection involving the liquid of vapor deposition of
    compounds formed from Group II, IV, or VI elements.


CLS 438/FOR477
TXT FORMING THIN SHEETS:

    Foreign art collection involving the construction of thin sheets or free
    standing layers.


CLS 438/FOR478
TXT PRODUCING POLYCRYSTALLINE SEMICONDUCTOR MATERIAL:

    Foreign art collection involving the formation of nonsingular crystalline
    semiconductor material.


CLS 438/FOR479
TXT SELECTIVE OXIDATION OF POLYCRYSTALLINE  LAYER:

    Foreign art collection involving controlled oxidation of a polycrystalline
    layer.


CLS 438/FOR480
TXT FORMING GRADED ENERGY GAP LAYERS:

    Foreign art collection involving sequential formation of layers of
    composition or dopant concentration which vary in a uniform manner.


CLS 438/FOR481
TXT DIFFERENTIAL CRYSTAL GROWTH:

    Foreign art collection involving use of growth conditions so as to produce
    (anisotropic) nonuniform growth.


CLS 438/FOR482
TXT FLUID GROWTH DOPING CONTROL:

    Foreign art collection involving regulation of the doping process during
    fluid deposition.


CLS 438/FOR483
TXT UTILIZING MELT BACK:

    Foreign art collection involving liquid phase epitaxial deposition wherein
    a thin surface layer of the substrate is dissolved prior to the start of
    the deposition process.


CLS 438/FOR484
TXT SOLID PHASE EPITAXIAL GROWTH:

    Foreign art collection involving the deposition of material from solid to
    solid, e.g., migration of silicon through an aluminum layer on a silicon
    substrate.


CLS 438/FOR485
TXT THINNING OR REMOVAL OF SUBSTRATE:

    Foreign art collection involving the selective removal of a portion of all
    of the base material.


CLS 438/FOR486
TXT DIFFUSION ALONG GRAIN BOUNDARIES:

    Foreign art collection involving diffusion of material between the grains
    of nonsingle crystal material or along the physical junction of two layers.


CLS 438/FOR487
TXT CONTROLLING LATTICE STRAIN:

    Foreign art collection involving regulating of strain in the lattice.


CLS 438/FOR488
TXT UTILIZING ROUGHENED SURFACE:

    Foreign art collection involving use of a nonsmooth surface.


CLS 438/FOR489
TXT UTILIZING MULTIPLE DIELECTRIC LAYERS:

    Foreign art collection involving use of multi-nonconducting layers.


CLS 438/FOR490
TXT UTILIZING THICK-THIN OXIDE FORMATION:

    Foreign art collection involving formation of plural oxide areas having
    different thicknesses.


CLS 438/FOR491
TXT FORMING POLYCRYSTALLINE SEMICONDUCTOR PASSIVATION:

    Foreign art collection involving protecting the surface P-N junction with
    nonsingle crystalline semiconductor coatings.


CLS 438/FOR492
TXT PRODUCING TAPERED ETCHING:

    Foreign art collection involving the use of an etchant to form an angled
    surface.


CLS 438/FOR493
TXT REFLOW OF INSULATOR:

    Foreign art collection involving the melting or softening to the point of
    flowing insulator material.


CLS 438/FOR494
TXT OXIDATION OF GATE OR GATE CONTACT LAYER:

    Foreign art collection involving self-aligned masking by oxidation of
    either the gate or the gate contact layer.


CLS 438/FOR495
TXT SELF-ALIGNING FEATURE:

    Foreign art collection involving usually automatic, relative alignment of
    parts, materials, etc.


CLS 438/FOR496
TXT DIFFERENTIAL OXIDATION AND ETCHING:

    Foreign art collection involving preferential oxidation accompanied by
    etching.


CLS 438/FOR497
TXT DIFFUSING LATERALLY AND ETCHING:

    Foreign art collection involving carrying out a diffusion step in a lateral
    direction and etching.


CLS 438/FOR498
TXT DIFFUSING DOPANTS IN COMPOUND SEMICONDUCTOR:

    Foreign art collection involving special conditions for diffusing a dopant
    in chemical compounds which function as a semiconductor.


CLS 439/
TTL ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS

CLS 439/
TXT

    I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    A.      This is the generic class for a pair of mated conductors comprising
    at least two electrically conducting elements which are interconnected to
    permit relative motion of such conducting elements during use without a
    break in electrical conductivity therebetween (see subclasses 1+).

    B.      Also, this is the generic class for a device constituting an
    electricity conducting contact between conductors of electricity; wherein
    the joint is of a type which may be readily made and broken, repeatedly by
    attachment and detachment of contact supporting structure on each conductor.

    (1)     Note.  A soldered joint or joint formed by twisting together a pair
    of conductors and any of various other splices that is more or less
    permanent in  nature is not generally provided for in this class.  See the
    reference to Class 174 of section VI below for location of a device
    relating to such a splice joint.  Also, see section IV below for the scope
    of this class with regard to general utility and the lines with respect to
    other classes providing for a joint, per se.

    (2)     Note.  Included under this class definition is a device known in
    the art as a contact plug, an outlet receptacle, a lamp socket, a vacuum
    tube socket, a connection block, a cable terminal, a cable joint, a binding
    post, a cube tap, a grounding strap, etc.

    (3)     Note.  This class also includes a device specialized for use with
    an electrical connector and not elsewhere classifiable.  Such a device may
    be, for example, any of certain types of mounting or supporting means, a
    locking device, a shield or cover, a strain relieving device, etc.

    II.     GLOSSARY

    Terms or phrases used in definitions either repeatedly or in a special or
    limited sense are set forth below with the meaning each is to have in this
    class. For economy of space, an asterisk (*) following a word or phrase
    indicates that reference should be made to this glossary for the specific
    meaning thereof.

    CABLE

    An elongated, flexible assembly of two or more elongated conductors
    intended to transmit electricity from one end to the other, the conductors
    being  electrically insulated from one another but physically held together
    in association with one another.

    (1)     Note.  The two or more physically associated but mutually insulated
    conductors are usually further enclosed within an outer protective or
    insulating covering or sheath.

    (2)     Note.  A stranded, wire-type conductor is considered to be a single
    conductor.

    CONDUCTOR

    A member intended to transmit electricity from one portion or end thereof
    to another portion or end thereof, and to which electricity-transmitting
    member the electricity-conducting part of an electrical connector is
    intended to be electrically joined or attached.

    (1)     Note.  A conductor may include such diverse members as an
    electrical cable, a wire (either stranded or solid), a grounding plate, an
    inductive shield, a bus bar, or an electricity-transmitting path formed of
    a conductive film deposited on an insulating plate or panel, etc.

    CONNECTOR

    A device for forming an electricity-conducting joint between conductors of
    electricity, wherein the device either (1) consists solely of an
    electricity-conducting element having a contact surface for forming the
    joint or (2) comprises an assembly which includes an electricity-conducting
    element having a contact surface for forming the joint and further includes
    any structure necessary to support, carry, or encase the conductive
    element; and wherein the joint is of a type which may be readily made and
    broken, repeatedly, either (a) by engaging or disengaging the conductive
    element or (b) by engaging or disengaging the conductive element with a
    conductor.

    CONTACT

    An electricity-conducting component of an electrical connector, including a
    contact surface intended to form a readily made and broken
    electricity-conducting joint by directly engaging either a conductor or a
    corresponding surface of a cooperating joint-forming conductive component,
    so as to permit the passage of electricity through the joint from one
    component to the other.

    COUPLING PART

    An electrical connector comprising a contact and additional supporting
    structure specially adapted to mate with a specific complementary
    electrical connector.

    (1)     Note.  A "specific complementary electrical connector" is also a
    "coupling part" in this class, but may be referred to as a "mating part" in
    order to distinguish it from the first mentioned coupling part.  Also, such
    a "counterpart" and the complementary contact thereof may be referred to as
    the "counter-contact".

    (2)     Note.  A relatively short, generally stationary rodlike connector
    is not considered to be a "coupling part" even though it otherwise meets
    the limitations of this definition, because such structure has not been so
    considered in the past.  Similiarly, a connector for interfitting with such
    a short rodlike connector is not considered to be a "coupling part".  Such
    a connector may commonly be used on an automobile electrical energy
    battery.  Note further that this restriction does not apply to a generally
    fixed socket and a cooperating short rodlike connector.

    (3)     Note.  A bare wire (or cable) making electrical contact is not a
    coupling part; nor is a connector for making direct engagement with such a
    wire.  Also, neither a threaded stud nor a ring for fitting over such a
    stud is considered to be a coupling part.

    MATING PART

    A coupling part for electrically connecting with a specific coupling part.
    Actually a coupling part and a mating part are structurally the same, the
    distinct terminology is used in this class as an aid to expression.

    PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD

    A relatively thin, flat insulating sheet, panel, or plate having two or
    more circuit elements or conductors deposited, adhered, or otherwise formed
    on a planar surface thereof, the circuit elements or conductors being
    electrically insulated from one another or being, during use, at electrical
    potentials different from one another.

    III.    COMBINATION OF AN ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR WITH ANOTHER DEVICE

    With respect to a combination of an electrical connector with an art
    device, no absolutely uniform rule of classification can be set forth.
    Disposition of such combination depends on factors such as the nature of
    the combined art device, the manner in and extent to which such art device,
    per se, and in other combinations have been classified, the relationship of
    other classes to this class as regards superiority, and the manner in which
    the combination is claimed.  Generally, the combination of an electrical
    connector with an art device is classifiable in the appropriate art class.
    Also, an electrical connector limited to arrangement or use with an art
    device is generally classified in the appropriate art class.  Two or more
    different electrical devices combined with an electrical connector will be
    found in the class providing for the combined electrical devices, even
    though they are broadly recited.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 541+ for a sign in
    which a character or legend is made more apparent by means of a special
    illuminating device.  Class 40 provides for the combination of an
    electrical connector with the significantly recited body of a sign.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 378 for cooking apparatus
    in which there is included some electrical structure over and above an
    electrical heat element as, for example, an arrangement of conductors or
    connectors supplying electric current to various heating elements.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 78 for a telegraph instrument combined with a
    connection for tapping into a telegraph line to receive or transmit a
    message.

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, for the combination of an
    electrical connector with vehicle structure; particularly subclasses 12+
    for vehicle structure combined with an electrical connector including means
    for storing a line cord; subclass 23 for a continuous outlet for a
    nonremovable sliding coupling associated therewith for transmission of
    electricity to tranversing device; subclass 44 for a trolley conductor
    having a gear adapted to join a trolley conductor gear; and subclass 44.1
    for a splice or coupling for a line and electric trolley wire.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, for the combination of
    an electrical circuit maker or breaker for example, an electrical connector
    with a distinct switch actuated by coupling engagement is to be found in
    Class 200, especially in subclasses 61.58+.  However, an electrical
    connector that includes integrally therewith a "switching" component
    actuated by coupling engagment with a mating connector is to be found in
    this class (Class 439); e.g., in subclass 188.



    See section V of the class definition of Class 200, for further distinction
    between a circuit breaker of Class 200 and an electrical connector of this
    class (Class 439).  See especially subclasses 51+ of Class 200 for an
    electrical connector combined with a switch in a unitary structure or
    capable of functioning as a switch; and see (4) Note of subclass 51 for a
    line note directed to the combination of a connector-coupling device with a
    specified type of circuit maker and breaker excluded from these subclasses.

    See IV (5) SEARCH CLASS, 200 below.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 193+ for an
    electrical connector combined with apparatus for carrying out a process
    involving electrolysis, a process in which a chemical change is brought
    about by application of electric current or wave energy to material being
    treated, a process involving electrophoresis or electro-osmosis, or a
    process involving coating or forming an object by cathode sputtering.  See
    subclasses 280+ for an electrode for carrying out a process of that class
    (Class 204).

    213,    Railway Draft Appliances, subclasses 1.3+ for the combination of a
    railway draft coupler with an electricity conducting means and see (2) Note
    of that class (Class 213) definition for the line between various classes
    with respect to a car coupler combined with another device.

    219,    Electric Heating, for an electrical connector combined with an
    electrical heating device such as a space heater, an electrically heated
    metal working apparatus, or an electrically heated tool.

    238,    Railways:  Surface Track, subclasses 14.05+ for a joint, coupling,
    rail bond, other electrical connector device, or other means for
    electrically connecting a railway rail or other surface track element to
    another rail or some other stationary device or object.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 19.1+ for a
    device for placing or removing a coupling part connector from a distance.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 71 for a dynamo
    electric machine having combined therewith an electrical connector,
    terminal, or lead-in, and subclasses 219+ for a current collector including
    a slip ring, brush holder, brush, etc.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, for an electric lamp and
    electric space discharge device structure and see especially section XI of
    the class definition of Class 313 for the line between Class 313 and this
    class (Class 439) with respect to the combination of an electric lamp and
    space discharge device and electrical connector structure.  In section XI
    of the class definition of Class 313 may also be found the line between
    this class (Class 439) and various other classes with respect to the
    classification of the various features of electric lamp and space discharge
    devices.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 149 for a connector
    combined with meter structure or a connector associated with a support for
    a meter.  Where the support merely holds the connector elements in an
    operative position, classification is in this class (Class 439).  However,
    if the support in any way contacts or supports the meter, classification is
    in Class 324.

    337,    Electricity:  Electrothermally or Thermally Actuated Switches, for
    an electrothermal or thermally operated switch, combined with an electrical
    connector.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 220 for an electrical resistor in a
    detachable plug-type resistor unit, and subclasses 322+ for a resistor with
    a terminal.  See section XIV of the Class 338 definition for lines between
    Class 338 and this class (Class 439).

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 870 for a loop-type
    antenna with a connector (or terminal) and subclass 906 for an antenna
    combined with an electrical connector.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 600+,
    especially subclass 823 for a switchboard or analogous structure (e.g.,
    plural components with spacing means, distribution boards, etc.) having a
    connector.

    362,    Illumination, for an electrical connector combined with means
    adapting it to illumination; such as means to protect, support or
    distribute a light source, or an artificial light distributor or modifier
    (e.g., a reflector, a refractor, or a shade).  Subclasses 437+ provide for
    a socket cover combined with means for securing a bowl or shade thereto and
    subclass 457 provides for a miscellaneous attachment or fitting adapted to
    be secured to or about a socket to form an ornamental lighting unit, in
    combination with a lamp socket.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, subclasses 117+ for a holder
    for an electrode in an electric arc furnace provided with mechanism for
    feeding the electrode as it is consumed to regulate the length of the arc.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclass 185 for a portable telephone or
    station set adapted to be connected to a circuit at fixed points or at any
    point.  The instrument is connected by means of a line tap, or by means of
    a socket, plug or equivalent.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process, for an electrical cell combined with an electrical connector, and
    see especially subclasses 209+ for the connection of an electrode within an
    electrical cell or a terminal claimed in combination with significant
    battery structure or when of such nature and construction as to be
    inseparable from an electrical cell.

    IV.     CONNECTOR, PER SE, ELSEWHERE CLASSIFIED

    (1)     Since any mechanical joint, coupling or connector, when made of
    metal or other material capable of conducting an electrical current may be
    said to "electrically" connect, only such structure as are specially
    designed for and/or disclosed for electrical use have been placed in this
    class (Class 439).

    (2)     A patent disclosing a connector having utility both as an
    electrical connector and as a mechanical coupling wherein the claims do not
    limit the connector function as an electrical connector is classified in
    the appropriate class providing for the mechanical joint.

    (3)     A patent claiming a limitation of structure, composition, or
    arrangement utility in an electrical installation and not generally
    applicable to a class providing for the mechanical joint is classified in
    this class (Class 439).  Reference to electrical insulation features is
    considered to establish electrical utility in an electrical installation.

    (4)     As stated in section I (2) above, the connector of this class
    (Class 439) is generally of the type wherein an electrical joint can be
    readily made or broken and reused.  Generally an electrical joint of a more
    permanent nature (e.g., molded, soldered, twisted or crimped connection) is
    not provided for in this class.

    (5)     SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., for a fastener, generally,
    especially subclasses 115+ for a cord or rope holder, subclass 122.3 for a
    device for gripping and holding a sheathed strand and subclass 122.6 for a
    device for gripping or holding a stranded cord or rope.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, for a permanent electrical
    connection between two conductors.  See section VI of this class (Class
    439) definition.

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, subclass 44.1 for a splicer
    for the aligned ends of electric trolley wires.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, for a device including a
    housing first brought into coupled relationship with a mating housing
    combined with subsequentially actuated sliding contacts if the contacts are
    intended to function in making and breaking electrical circuitry without
    separation of housings.  Note however, that such a device may be found in
    this class (Class 439) if the coupling of the housings is ancillary to
    making electrical connection.  An electrical connector of class (Class 439)
    can be distinguished from a circuit maker or breaker of Class 200 in that
    an electrical connector is physically separated from a distinct mating
    connector each time the circuit is broken; whereas, a circuit maker or
    breaker comprises a "permanent" assemblage of parts including both a
    movable contact and its mating  contact wherein there is a positive
    physical connection between the contacts such that a contact is restricted
    to move with respect to the mating contact along a prescribed path each
    time the circuit maker or breaker operates.



    An electrical connector, per se, may include movable contacts and be in
    this, the class of electrical connectors.  For example, search Class 439,
    subclasses 43+ for an electrical connector with a selectable circuit
    wherein no details of the circuit structure are set forth; subclasses 152+
    for an electrical connector with a coupling separator; subclass 180 for an
    electrical connector detachable from a mating connector by snap or
    quick-break action; subclasses 259+ for a connector with a contact moved
    laterally into engagement with a mating contact in a "zero insertion force
    device"; subclasses 296+ for an electrical connector with coupling
    movement-actuating means or retaining means in addition to the contact,
    especially subclasses 310+ for a retaining means with distinct
    movement-actuating means to move a coupling part axially; and subclasses
    374+ for an electrical connector with guiding means for mating of a
    coupling part.

    Class 200 has not been screened to verify placement according to this line.

    See III.  (2) SEARCH CLASS 200, above.

    403,    Joints and Connections, for a joint uniting the ends of two rodlike
    bodies, or a rodlike body and a base, head, or other nonrodlike body;
    particularly subclasses 206+ wherein an axially curved or bent portion of a
    rod (or wire) is a joint component.  See the notes at the beginning of this
    section (section IV) for the general rule of classification.  However,
    certain specific types of electrical connectors are excepted from the
    general rule, as follows:



    Electrode Joints - See the class definition of Class 313, XIV, section 1
    for the line between Class 403 and this class (439) with respect to
    electrode joints.

    Rail Bonds - See the definition of Class 238, subclass 14.05, (6) Note for
    the line between the various classes with respect to rail bonds.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses
    115+ for apparatus for applying electrical energy directly to the human
    body, including particular electrode structure; especially subclasses 149+
    for an electrode having a flexible metallic contact surface designed to
    adapt itself to the contours of the human body, and subclass 153 for an
    electrode having means for wetting the contact surface between the
    electrode and the body.

    V.      METHOD OR APPARATUS FOR MANUFACTURING OR APPLYING AN ELECTRICAL
    CONNECTOR

    (1)     A patent including a claim to an electrical connector structure of
    this class (439) and another claim to a process or an apparatus for
    manufacture of such an electrical connector is originallly classified in
    this class (439) with a mandatory cross-reference in the appropriate
    manufacturing class.

    (2)     SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 400.1+ for the residual home for a
    process of manufacturing; subclasses 592.1+ for a process of making an
    electrical device, generally; and subclasses 729+ for apparatus for
    assembling, disassembling or securing parts thereof in the manufacture of
    an electrical device; especially subclasses 747+ for apparatus for
    assembling an electrical connector.  For example, many patents in
    subclasses 747+ comprise apparatus for pulling or inserting a contact prong
    into an aperture of a resilient plug.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 36+ for a process of bonding glass
    to a formed part by a glasssworking operation, and subclasses 152+ for
    fusion bonding by glassworking means; see the "Search Notes" under each of
    these subclasses.

    81,     Tools, subclasses 53.1+ for a wrench for applying an overhead line
    tap-type electrical connector.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, for a
    method or apparatus employed in laminating, per se.  See particularly
    subclass 49 for splicing; and subclasses 51+ for covering, respectively in
    making an electrical connector with a conductor of indefinite length.  See
    also subclass 94 for reclaiming or repairing an article.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 91+ for a process of manufacturing a
    battery post clamp in which metal is cast about an element of the clamp or
    conductor.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, for uniting work parts by forming a
    metallurgical bond.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 430+ for a process or
    apparatus for winding a composite electrical article that may include
    terminal winding.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    for a method of molding an insulative body about a contact in the
    manufacture of an electrical connector.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus, for
    molding an insulating body.  See especially subclasses 110+ for apparatus
    molding a housing about preformed electrical contacts.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 58+ for a process of coating, per se,
    wherein the product has utility as an electrical product.

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    for a process of or apparatus for manufacture of an electrical device of
    that class, including assembly therewith of an electrical connector.

    VI.     INDEX AND MISCELLANEOUS CLASS NOTES:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc.          IV

    29,     Metal Working           V

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting               III

    65,     Glass Manufacturing             V

    81,     Tools                   V

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus         III

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscella-
    neous Chemical Manufacture              V

    164,    Metal Founding          V

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulator  IV

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical        IV
    Application



    Search Class 174 for an electrical conductor or insulator, and for an
    insulator or apparatus specialized to mounting, supporting, encasing in a
    conduit, or housing the same.  Class 174 also provides for a device in
    which conductors are joined or spliced for transmission of electrical
    current therebetween if by a permanent joint (as distinguished from the
    detachable joint of this class (439).  For example, search subclasses 84+
    for conductors joined by having been fused, twisted, soldered or crimped
    together.  An electrical connector of this class which may incidentlly also
    be soldered to the mating connector, e.g., to a printed circuit board, is
    included in this class (439).  Search subclasses 50+ for a box or housing
    limited by claimed structure to electrical use and for combination of a
    housing and a connector.

    A hermetically sealed envelope such as is used for an electric lamp having
    connector structure is provided for in subclasses 50.5+ of Class 174 where
    significant structure of the envelope is recited in addition to that
    necessary to support or mount the connector.

    178,    Telegraphy              III

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission

            to Vehicles             III, IV

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and

            Breakers                        III, IV

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical

            and Wave Energy         III

    213,    Railway Draft Appliances                III

    219,    Electric Heating                III

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding            V

    238,    Railways, Surface Track         III

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding         V

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic

            Article Shaping or

            Treating, Processes             V

    294,    Handling:  Hand and

            Hoist-Line Implements           III

    310,    Electrical Generator or

            Motor Structure         III

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge

            Devices                 III

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and

            Testing                 III

    343,    Communications:  Radio

            Wave Antennas           III

    361,    Electricity: Electrical

            Systems and Devices             III

    362,    Illumination            III

    373,    Industrial Electric

            Heating Furnances               III

    379,    Telephonic Communications               III

    403,    Joints and Communications               IV

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware

            Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus         V

    427,    Coating Processes               V


CLS 439/1
TXT INTERRELATED CONNECTORS RELATIVELY MOVABLE DURING USE:

    Device under the class definition including a conductor* having a contact*
    and including another conductor having a contact for engagement with the
    contact of the first conductor so that electricity is transmitted from one
    of the conductors to the other at the engagement joint; wherein, the two
    conductors are constructed to allow relative movement therebetween during
    use without breaking the electricity transmittting joint.

    (1)     Note.  The art of this subclass (and those subclasses intended
    hereunder) is somewhat different from that of the remainder of the class in
    that the indented function of the art of this area is to permit relative
    movement of two electrically connected members; whereas, the other areas of
    the class are to provide for disconnection of two parts which do not move
    with respect to each other during electricity transmitting use.

    (2)     Note.  The design and intent of the connector of this subclass is
    to allow movement of the two members during use as distinguished from
    adjustment made incidental to a coupling or uncoupling as in screwing a
    plug into a socket is not included herein.  Also, separable couplings which
    due to the physical disposition of the contacts (e.g., concentric contacts)
    theoretically might allow relative movement of the members but are excluded
    from this subclass unless there is a specific disclosure that such relative
    movement during use is intended.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131,    for a connector including a contact carrier that is movable between
    accessible and inaccessible positions.

    307,    for unauthorized coupling separation preventing means for a screw
    coupling which includes a freely rotatable shell.

    578+,   for a connector including or for use with coaxial cable, having
    contacts symmetric about the axis of engagement.

    586,    for a connector in which a contact is carried by flexible or
    resilient insulation.

    675,    for a connector of the axially engageable type having contacts
    symmetric about the axis of engagement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, for conducting electric
    energy between relatively movable objects.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, for a brush, commutator,
    slip ring, or other collector for a dynamo electric machine.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    subclass 129 for a consumable electrode device (e.g., an arc lamp) provided
    with means to transfer electric current from a lead wire to a moving
    electrode.


CLS 439/2
TXT And antivibration mounting:

    Device under subclass 1 including means to prevent transmission of high
    frequency reciprocating movement from one member to another or to the
    electricity transmitting joint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86+,    for an electric connector having an elastomeric or nonmetallic
    conductive portion which may dampen vibration.

    382+,   for an electrical connector with vibration damping or cushioning,
    generally.

    586+,   for an electrical connector including flexing insulation, generally.


CLS 439/3
TXT With means to apply lubricant or coolant:

    Device under subclass 1 combined with means to supply friction reducing
    material or thermal energy absorbing or reducing material to a surface of a
    member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    190+,   for an electrical connector with means to apply or retain fluent
    material, generally.


CLS 439/4
TXT With storage means for flaccid conductor:

    Device under subclass 1 intended to be used with a pliable strandlike
    member for transmitting electricity to the transmitting member is generally
    elongated and is readily yieldable transversely of its length to the force
    of gravity, combined with means to receive and accomodate temporarily a
    surplus portion of the electricity transmitting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for interrelated electrical connectors relatively movable during
    use having "nonsolid" contact.

    501,    for an electrical connector, generally, with storage means for
    flaccid conductor.


CLS 439/5
TXT Having liquid contact:

    Device under subclass 1 (a) wherein the electricity transmitting joint is
    filled with a material in the liquid state during electricity transmission
    to make a more positive electricity transmitting path; or, (b) including
    provision to utilize a liquid as a contact*, i.e., to make the electricity
    transmitting joint with another member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    178+,   for an electrical connector, generally including fluent conducting
    material.


CLS 439/6
TXT Universal movement:

    Device under subclass 1 wherein:  (a) the two conductors are connector
    together such that neither can rotate more than 360_ but one can pivot with
    respect to the other about any nonrotary axis, or;  (b) the two conductors
    are connected together such that rotation of one about a first axis is
    accompanied by corresponding rotation of the other about a second axis
    which intersects the first axis at a point, wherein the conductors are able
    to pivot about any other axis passing through that point.

    (1)     Note.  A second or intermediate conductor may be pivotally
    connected to the first conductor for movement about a first axis with
    respect thereto and may be pivotally connected to a third conductor for
    movement with respect thereto about a second axis transverse to the first
    axis to allow resultant "universal" movement.

    (2)     Note.  The pivotal movement of this subclass is controlled; e.g., a
    pliable connecting rod allowing similar movement is not included herein.

    (3)     Note.  Under Clause (a) of this definition, the end of the moving
    conductor opposite from the pivot can move in the manner of a pencil when
    writing a letter "O".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    534,    for an electrical connector combined with a universally adjustable
    support.


CLS 439/7
TXT Having "nonsolid" contact, e.g., fibrous or pelletized bed:

    Device under subclass 6 wherein one of the conductors movably engaging the
    other comprises a mass of generally small size strands or grains that make
    engagement for the electricity transmitting joint without presenting a
    single uninterrupted surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for interrelated electrical connectors relatively movable during
    use having a liquid contact.

    390,    for an insulation piercing contact adapted to engage a liquid
    granular or metallic wool contactor.


CLS 439/8
TXT Parts comprising ball and socket:

    Device under subclass 6 wherein one of the conductors includes a generally
    spherical surface for encompassing engagement by the other conductor.


CLS 439/9
TXT One part having flexible contact fingers:

    Device under subclass 6 wherein the contact of one of the conductors
    includes a plurality of resilient  extensions adapted to encompassingly
    engage the other conductor so that the resilience of the extensions allows
    relative movement between the conductors while continuing to make an
    electricity transmitting joint.


CLS 439/10
TXT Compound movement, e.g., rotary + linear:

    Device under subclass 1 wherein relative movement of one of the conductors
    with respect to the other is (a) in a first direction and then in a second
    direction; or, (b) in a manner that is best defined as including two
    components of movement.

    (1)     Note.  Helical motion is best defined as rotary + linear.


CLS 439/11
TXT Movement about axis:

    Device under subclass 1 wherein the first and second conductors move about
    a pivot line with respect to each other without breaking the electricity
    transmitting joint therebetween.


CLS 439/12
TXT Including stacked plates used as conductor:

    Device under subclass 11 including a first conductor* having a contact* and
    including a second relatively movable conductor having a first contact
    surface for transmitting electricity to the contact of the first conductor
    and having a second contact surface for transmitting electricity to a
    contact surface of a third conductor; wherein, the second conductor is
    generally platelike and wherein its planar surfaces comprise the first and
    second contact surfaces.


CLS 439/13
TXT Rotary movement:

    Device under subclass 11 wherein a first conductor moves more than 360_
    about the pivot line with respect to other.


CLS 439/14
TXT Between cable and screw-type contact shell:

    Device under subclass 13 including a first member having a helically-ribbed
    contact and having a second member for receiving an electrical supply
    cable* wherein the member having a ribbed contact turns about an axis to
    effect engagement with a cooperating contact of a third member without
    breaking the electricity transmitting joint between the first and second
    members.


CLS 439/15
TXT Part comprising hand wheel, e.g., steering wheel:

    Device under subclass 13 wherein the conductor which turns more than 360_
    includes a circular periphery and is intended to be engaged and caused to
    turn about its axis by a hand of an operative.


CLS 439/16
TXT Part comprising vehicle wheel:

    Device under subclass 13 wherein the conductor which turns more than 360_
    includes a circular periphery and is intended to roll therealong to support
    and transport a mobile structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for interrelated electrical connectors relatively movable during
    use involving rolling contact, generally.


CLS 439/17
TXT Including ball or roller bearing used as conductor:

    Device under subclass 13 including a first conductor* having a
    contact-surface and including a second relatively movable conductor having
    a contact-surface for transmitting electricity to the contact of the first
    conductor; wherein the second conductor is circular in cross-section (the
    second conductor may be either spherical or rodlike) and is intended to
    roll over the contact surface of the first conductor and is intended to
    carry a physical load.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for interrelated electrical connector relatively movable during use
    involving rolling contact, generally.


CLS 439/18
TXT Including annular contact:

    Device under subclass 13 wherein one of the members includes a contact that
    extends more than 180_ about the axis about which one of the conductors
    turns with respect to the other.


CLS 439/19
TXT Rolling contact:

    Device under subclass 18 wherein one of the contacts is adapted to engage
    and transmit electrical current to another contact with substantially no
    slippage in the manner of a vehicle wheel in engagement with a support
    surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for interrelated electrical connectors relatively movable during
    use where one comprises a vehicle wheel.

    17,     for interrelated electrical connectors relatively movable during
    use comprising a ball or roller bearing.


CLS 439/20
TXT Coaxial annular contacts:

    Device under subclass 18 wherein one of the members includes a first
    contact that extends more than 180_ about the axis about which one of the
    conductors turns with respect to the other and includes a second contact
    that also extends more than 180_ about the same axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    578+,   for an electrical connector for use with a coaxial cable.

    675,    for an insulated connector having plural contacts including an
    annular push-pull contact.


CLS 439/21
TXT Concentric:

    Device under subclass 20 wherein a portion of the first and a portion of
    the second contact are positioned in a common plane about their common axis
    radially spaced from one another.


CLS 439/22
TXT Having axially facing contact surface:

    Device under subclass 20 including a contact having a surface for making an
    electricity tranmitting joint, which surface is in a plane normal to the
    axis about which one of the conductors turns with respect to the other.


CLS 439/23
TXT Having radially outwardly facing contact surface:

    Device under subclass 20 including a contact having a surface for making an
    electricity transmitting joint, which surface is cylindrical about the axis
    about which one of the conductors turns with respect to the other and can
    be approached by a cooperating contact as that contact moves toward the
    axis.


CLS 439/24
TXT Three or more such contacts:

    Device under subclass 23 including more than two contacts* each of which
    having a surface for making an electricity transmitting joint, which
    surface is cylindrical about the axis about which one of the conductors
    turns with respect to the other and can be approached by a cooperating
    contact as that contact moves toward the axis.


CLS 439/25
TXT Engaged by resiliently biased contact:

    Device under subclass 24 wherein one of the cylindrical contacts makes an
    electricity transmitting joint with a contact that is yieldably urged
    thereagainst by a member stressed within its elastic limit.


CLS 439/26
TXT Laterally biased finger contact:

    Device under subclass 25 wherein the yieldably urged contact comprises an
    elongated member urged to move to one side and make the electricity
    transmitting joint with a side face thereof.


CLS 439/27
TXT Having axially facing contact surface:

    Device under subclass 18 including a contact having a surface for making an
    electricity transmitting joint, which surface is in a plane normal to the
    axis about which one of the conductors turns with respect to the other.


CLS 439/28
TXT Having radially outwardly facing contact surface:

    Device under subclass 18 including a contact having a surface for making an
    electricitry transmitting joint, which surface is cylindrical about the
    axis about which one of the conductors turns with respect to the other and
    can be approached by a cooperating contact as that contact moves toward the
    axis.


CLS 439/29
TXT Including resiliently biased contact:

    Device under subclass 13 including a member adapted to be flexed within its
    elastic limit, which member serves by the flexing action to urge the
    contact of one of the conductors joint into forming engagement with another
    contact to assure transmission of electricity through the joint.

    (1)     Note.  The member adapted to be flexed within its elastic limit may
    be a contact.


CLS 439/30
TXT Contact having resilient shank:

    Device under subclass 29 wherein the member to be flexed within its elastic
    limit is a contact.


CLS 439/31
TXT Hinge:

    Device under subclass 11 wherein the first and second conductors comprise
    or are mounted on structural components for pivotal support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165,    for a plurality of electrical connectors not involving interrelated
    connectors relatively movable during use; mounted on different blades of a
    hinge; wherein the connectors are electrically connected to each other by a
    pliable conductor.


CLS 439/32
TXT Linear movement:

    Device under subclass 1 wherein the two conductors are constructed to allow
    relative movement therebetween along a prescribed line during use without
    breaking the electricity transmitting joint therebetween.


CLS 439/33
TXT Expansion joint:

    Device under subclass 32 wherein the purpose of relative movement between
    the two conductors is to accomodate relatively small movement of supporting
    structure brought about by ambient (e.g., temperature) changes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    238,    Railways:  Surface Track, subclass 14.2 for a detailed rail
    combined with an electrical connector, and for a pair of aligned rails
    combined with an electrical connector (e.g., a rail bond).

    403,    Joints and Connections, for a structural member which may be a
    railway rail having no claimed limitation to the railway aspect, combined
    with an electrical connector (e.g., a rail bond).


CLS 439/34
TXT WITH VEHICLE STRUCTURE:

    Electrical connector under the class definition in combinatin with or
    specialized for use with a means of conveyance.

    (1)     Note.  This class does not include the combination of a vehicle
    draft coupling with an electrical connector, such combination being
    classified in the appropriate class providing for the particular draft
    coupling involved.

    (2)     Note.  A claim directed to an electrical connector combined with a
    "named" vehicle structure or with only sufficient vehicle structure to be
    illustrative only will be found in the appropriate subclass in this class
    providing for the connector without the vehicle.  A claimed reference to
    two or more vehicles or to two or more members of a single vehicle is
    considered to be "significant" vehicle structure for classification in this
    subclass.


CLS 439/35
TXT Connection to towed vehicle:

    Electrical connector under subclass 34 for transmitting electrical current
    between a leading means of conveyance and a second means of conveyance that
    is pulled thereby.


CLS 439/36
TXT Connection to lamp:

    Electrical connector under subclass 34 adapted to transmit electrical
    current to an illumination device.


CLS 439/37
TXT WITH WEARING APPAREL:

    Electrical connector under the class definition in combination with or
    specialized for use with clothing, footwear or another element of personal
    attire.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, for the structure or details of a garment or other device
    to be worn by mankind to adorn, cover or protect the body or person.

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, for miscellaneous footwear, such as
    boots, shoes, or leggings.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductor and Insulators, subclasses 5+ for a device
    including wearing apparel for protecting a person or animal against
    electric shock.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 211 for apparel or fabric having
    electric heating means.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 220+ and
    230+ for means for discharging a static charge including footwear combined
    with means to conduct electricity from or bypass it around the body of a
    person.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 103+ for a device for supporting a lamp
    upon the body of a person, e.g., cap supported.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclass 149
    for a device similar to apparel having means for applying electricity to
    the body as in electrotherapy.


CLS 439/38
TXT WITH MAGNET:

    Electrical connector under the class definition combined with means to
    cause one portion of the device to be drawn toward a member of iron or
    ironlike composition by magnetic attraction.

    (1)     Note.  The "magnet" of this subclass may be either a permanent
    magnet or an electromagnet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305,    for an electrical connector including a latch adapted to be
    manipulated by a magnet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclass 397 for a lamp combined with a magnet for
    support thereof.


CLS 439/39
TXT To urge mating connectors together:

    Electric connector under subclass 38 wherein the means to cause magnetic
    attraction is intended to hold the connector in position with respect to a
    cooperating connector to transmit electricity thereto.

    (1)     Note.  The connector of this subclass is not necessarily a
    "coupling part".


CLS 439/40
TXT To urge connector to supporting surface:

    Electrical connector under subclass 38 wherein the means to cause magnetic
    attraction is intended to hold the connector to another member and hold the
    connector against the force of gravity.


CLS 439/41
TXT WITH VACUUM APPLYING MEANS, E.G., SUCTION CUP:

    Electrical connector under the class definition combined with means to
    cause one portion thereof to be drawn toward a member by removal of
    atmospheric pressure from a surface so that atmospheric pressure on other
    surfaces urges the portion to move toward the area of reduced atmospheric
    pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclass 398 for a lamp  combined with a suction cup
    for support thereof.


CLS 439/42
TXT To urge mating connectors or contacts together:

    Electrical connector under subclass 41  wherein removal of atmospheric
    pressure is intended to hold the connector in position with respect to a
    cooperating connector to transmit electricity thereto or is intended to
    hold the electricity transmitting member thereof in engagement with
    corresponding member of an electrical connector with which this connector
    mates.


CLS 439/43
TXT WITH SELECTABLE CIRCUIT, E.G., PLUG BOARD:

    Electrical connector under the class definition (a) comprising a member
    having a first contact connected to a first electrical circuit and having a
    second contact connected to a second electrical circuit and a second member
    connected to other circuitry, wherein the second member is intended to be
    manipulated by and at the will of an operative to make electrical
    connection with either the first or the second contact of the first member;
    or (b) comprising a member having first, second and third electrically
    isolated contacts and second member intended to electrically bridge the
    first contact with either the second or the third contacts, by and at the
    will of an operative.

    (1)     Note.  A board, per se, of the type provided for in clause (a) of
    this definition, i.e., plug board and of the type provided for in clause
    (b) i.e., a jumper board is included herein, since such a board is not
    provided for as a subcombination in other areas of this schedule.

    (2)     Note.  This definition requires that the second member be
    manipulated to make selection; therefore, a member for selectively
    receiving either a second member for making connection in a first manner
    (which may or may not be disclosed) or a different second member for making
    connection in a second manner (which also may or may not be disclosed) is
    not included herein.  See the Search Notes hereunder especially to subclass
    189.  Similarly, a removable device to "selectively" transmit when
    installed or break circuitry when removed is not considered to meet the
    requirements of this definition; whereas, a repositionable conductor to
    transmit from a first contact to either a second or a third contact is
    included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for an electrical connector provided with a plurality of jumperlike
    devices which may selectively be used or not used to bridge certain groups
    of contacts.

    189,    for a removable circuit assembly to "prewire" an electrical device,
    which may be selectable in that a different assembly may be used.  See (1)
    Note above.

    502+,   for a flaccid conductor for bridging between a first and a second
    contact on a board.

    507+,   for a rigid conductor for bridging between a first and a second
    contact on a board.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 46 for a
    switching device in which a contact is controlled by means of a perforated
    or embossed sheet, card or strip.

    235,    Registers, subclasses 487+ for a circuit selecting record, per se,
    used with a calculator.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 633 for a
    plug board combined with an electrical system.


CLS 439/44
TXT Planar circuit overlying a second planar circuit, both adapted to be
    electrically connected:

    Electrical connector under subclass 43 wherein the previously arranged
    circuits comprise at least first and second electrical circuits, each
    physically positioned in a generally planar configuration, the circuits to
    be impositioned one above the other and adapted to be electrically
    connected to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65+,    for a preformed panel circuit arrangement with provision to conduct
    electricity from that panel circuit to another.

    74+,    for superposed panel circuits, generally.


CLS 439/45
TXT Connected by transversely inserted pin:

    Electrical connector under subclass 44 wherein the structure is such that a
    rodlike connector passing normally therethrough can be used by an operative
    to selectively make connection with the circuits therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for similar structure lacking selectability of circuits.


CLS 439/46
TXT Pin having selection feature:

    Electrical connector under subclass 45 wherein selection is made by the
    operative in choice of a particular rodlike connector that is adapted to
    make electrical connection with certain of the circuitry according to
    physical characteristics of the rod.


CLS 439/47
TXT Panel member having planar surface for supporting circuit and parallel
    surface for supporting second circuit:

    Electrical connector under subclass 45 wherein a first electrical circuit
    is supported on a first generally flat surface of a rigid sheetlike member
    and a second electrical circuit is supported on a second generally flat
    surface of that rigid sheetlike member; wherein the second flat surface is
    parallel to the first flat surface.


CLS 439/48
TXT Linear conductors of first surface; linear, normally disposed, conductors
    in second circuit:

    Electrical connector under subclass 45 including a first planar circuit
    including a plurality of conductors extending generally in parallel
    straight lines and a second planar circuit including a plurality of
    conductors also extending in parallel straight lines wherein the direction
    of the conductors of the first circuit is at approximately 90_ orientation
    with respect to those of the second circuit.


CLS 439/49
TXT Including three or more contacts adapted to be selectively interconnected:

    Electrical connector under subclass 43 having at least three contacts* and
    provision to allow electrical connection therebetween at the will of the
    operative.

    (1)     Note.  A plugboard to be used with a jumper to bridge selected
    contacts is included herein.


CLS 439/50
TXT Panel having planar contact array with mating panel having mating planar
    contact array:

    Electrical connector under subclass 49 including at least three contacts
    positioned on a sheetlike member and at a substantially equal distance from
    a planar face thereof for electricity transmitting engagement with another
    sheetlike member also including at least three contacts positioned thereon
    at a substantially equal distance from a planar face thereof.

    (1)     Note.  "Selectability" of circuits in this subclass is not
    necessarily made by mating of the first and second sheetlike members.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein is a plugboard to be used with a jumper to
    selectively bridge the contacts; wherein the board is moved to make
    engagement with a mating board.


CLS 439/51
TXT Mounted for controlled movement with respect thereto:

    Electrical connector under subclass 50 including support structure for the
    first sheetlike structure and structure to support the second sheetlike
    structure for movement with respect thereto such that the respective
    groupings of contacts are to be brought together by movement along a
    predetermined, regulated path.


CLS 439/52
TXT Coupling part including repositionable contact:

    Electrical connector under subclass 43 comprising a coupling part*
    including a contact* or a portion of a contact adapted to be moved to a
    different, particularly configured, sized, or positioned cooperating
    connector; wherein the contact or the portion of a contact is adapted to be
    returned to the original position.

    (1)     Note.  The purpose of repositioning the contact of this subclass
    may be to adapt the device for use with mating parts of different
    configurations without use of an intermediate "adapter".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for a male coupling part (plug) having a repositionable safety
    ground prong.

    171+,   for a connector having a repositionable contact for interfitting
    with variously configured mating parts of particular, assigned
    configurations, e.g., assigned for a particular voltage or ampere rating.

    174+,   for a connector, generally, having a repositionable contact.


CLS 439/53
TXT Coupling part with selectably oriented mating part:

    Electrical connector under subclass 43 including a coupling part* having a
    plurality of contacts for use with mating part* such that a contact thereon
    can, at the will of the operative, be brought into engagement with
    different contacts of the mating part, by selection of relative position of
    the parts while the mating part covers substantially all of the contacts of
    the coupling part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218+,   for a coupling part intended to engage a mating part (a) of a first
    or a second configuration, or (b) from a first or a second direction.


CLS 439/54
TXT Test panel:

    Electrical connector under subclass 43 including a plurality of accessible
    contacts intended to be engaged merely by inspection equipment.


CLS 439/55
TXT PREFORMED PANEL CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENT, E.G., PCB, ICM, DIP, CHIP, WAFER, ETC.:

    Electrical connector under class definition combined with a prefabricated
    sheetlike part on which circuit elements are replaced and fixed.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein as a "preformed panel circuit arrangement"
    is a printed circuit board (PCB), an integrated circuit module (ICM), a
    dual-in-line package (DIP), an electronic circuitry "chip", an electronic
    circuitry "wafer", etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, particularly subclasses 829+ for conductor or
    circuit manufacture on an insulative base (e.g., printed circuit, etc.).

    216,    Etching a Substrate: Processes, for combined methods including a
    chemical etching step in the manufacture of a so-called "printed circuit."

    250,    Radiant Energy, for similar matter in which significant radio parts
    or means which coact to tune a circuit or a subcombination thereof are
    included.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 600+ for
    similar subject matter including a significantly identified inductor or
    capacitor.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 96+ for coating methods for making a
    printed circuit board.


CLS 439/56
TXT Connection to lamp or electron tube:

    Electrical connector under subclass 55 comprising a coupling part*
    particularly adapted to detachably receive and electrically couple to a
    member intended to radiate light, or to a member including electrical
    amplifying or switching means utilizing an environment excluding vacuum
    maintaining envelope.

    (1)     Note.  A lamp or tube socket is included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base convertible by internal
    change to selectively cooperate with a different contact.

    182,    for a lamp or electron tube socket including arc suppressing or
    extinguishing means.

    220,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base adapted to engage a
    mating connector in alternative manners.

    226+,   for a coupling part to receive a fluorescent or neon lamp.

    280,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base having a resilient
    housing for sealing with a coupled connector.

    336,    for a lamp or electron tube socket adapted to receive a cooperating
    lamp or tube by bayonet action, including a movement actuating means in
    addition to the contact of the socket.

    375,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base with a guiding means for
    mating of a coupling part.

    414,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base including a conductor
    sheath penetratring contact and screw means to move the conductor against
    the cutting contact.

    419,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base including a conductor
    sheath penetrating contact adapted to cut to engage a first conductor and
    to also engage (and interconnect) a second connector.

    541,    for plural lamp or electron tube sockets including supporting means
    therefor.

    558,    for a lamp or electron tube socket extending into a supporting
    panel.

    602,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base including flexing
    insulation.

    611+,   for a connector or contact having vitreous-type envelope secured
    thereto (e.g., a base of a lamp or vacuum tube).

    661+,   for a plural contact coupling part including a screw-threaded
    contact and insulation other than the conductor sheath.


CLS 439/57
TXT Movable about its axis:

    Coupling part under subclass 56 intended to be brought into interfitting
    relationship with a mating part* by movement along its greatest axial
    extent and by movement about the central axis of the coupling part with
    respect to the mating part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332+,   for a bayonet coupling part movable about its axis with coupling
    movement-actuating means or retaining means in addition to contact of
    coupling part.

    338+,   for a coupling part, generally, movable about its axis with
    coupling movement-actuating means or retaining means in addition to contact
    of coupling part.


CLS 439/58
TXT Electron tube moved perpendicularly to panel circuit:

    Coupling part under subclass 56 particularly adapted to detachably receive
    and electrically couple with a member including electrical amplifying or
    switching means utilizing an environment excluding, vacuum maintaining
    envelope wherein connection is effected by rectilinear movement of the
    member normally with respect to the sheetlike part.


CLS 439/59
TXT With mating connector which receives panel circuit edge:

    Electrical connector under subclass 55 combined with a member having a
    contact surface encased by the walls of an opening therein, which opening
    is particularly adapted to receive an entire marginal edge of that, or
    another, sheetlike member and wherein the contact surface of the electrical
    connector is intended to be engaged by the contact surface of the member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79+,    for panel structure not claimed in combination with the mating
    connector.


CLS 439/60
TXT Contacts at different distances from lead panel circuit edge:

    Electrical connector under subclass 59 wherein the prefabricated sheetlike
    part includes a generally straight marginal edge first presented as the
    part moves into mating engagement with the mating connector in which the
    straight marginal edge is approximately normal to the direction of
    movement, wherein the sheetlike part includes a contact at a first distance
    from the straight edge and a second contact at a different distance from
    that edge.


CLS 439/61
TXT Receives plural panel circuit edges:

    Electrical connector under subclass 59 including the first opening
    particularly adapted to receive an entire marginal edge of that or another
    sheetlike member and another opening particularly adapted to receive
    another entire marginal edge of that or another sheetlike member.


CLS 439/62
TXT Panel mounted connector which receives edge of panel circuit:

    Electrical connector under subclass 59 wherein the member having an opening
    for receiving the marginal edge of a sheetlike part is supported on another
    sheetlike part.


CLS 439/63
TXT For receiving coaxial connector:

    Electrical connector under subclass 55 particularly constructed for receipt
    of an elongated coupling part having a center contact* and cylindrical
    contact concentrically disposed thereabout.


CLS 439/64
TXT With guide for directing panel circuit movement:

    Electrical connector under subclass 55 combined with means fixed to a base
    to slidingly confine movement of the sheetlike part along a prescribed path.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a printed circuit board guided by a track
    into connection with another connector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    297,    for an electrical connector with a guiding means for receiving a
    longitudinally moved communications device, e.g., a removable automobile
    radio, with coupling movement-actuating means or retaining means in
    addition to contact.

    374+,   for an electrical connector with a guiding means, effect mating,
    generally.

    752.5,  for an insulated connector body with guiding means for an inserted
    contact.


CLS 439/65
TXT With provision to conduct electricity from panel circuit to another panel
    circuit:

    Electrical connector under subclass 55 wherein the preplaced circuit
    element lies in a first plane, combined with means to transmit electrical
    current from that circuit element to another circuit element also on a
    sheetlike part.

    (1)     Note.  Both circuit elements of this subclass may be on the same
    panel board, but at different levels.

    (2)     Note.  The first and second planes of this subclass may be
    coextensive; e.g., the first and second circuit elements may be positioned
    side by side so that their respective "planes" are in a common strata.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44+,    for superposed panel circuits interconnected selectably an
    operative.


CLS 439/66
TXT Conductor is compressible and to be sandwiched between panel circuits:

    Electrical connector under subclass 65 wherein the electricity transmitting
    means comprises an assembly of a first contact surface to engage a contact
    surface of the sheetlike part, includes an intermediate portion intended to
    transmit electricity, and includes a second contact surface of another
    sheetlike part; wherein intended to fit between the two circuit elements
    and to be compressed within its elastic limit by force therefrom and
    conduct electrical current from one sheetlike part to the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     for an electrical connector including an elastomeric or nonmetallic
    conductive portion adapted to be sandwiched between preformed panel circuit
    arrangements.

    591,    for a coupling part including flexing insulation for use between
    duplicate coupling parts, e.g., sandwiched between printed circuit boards.


CLS 439/67
TXT Flexible panel:

    Electrical connector under subclass 65 wherein the sheetlike part is
    intended to readily bend either within or beyond its elastic limit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for an electrical connector that is part of a flexible preformed
    panel circuit, generally.

    492+,   for a flexible flat conductor cable lacking the circuit elements of
    this subclass.


CLS 439/68
TXT Micro panel circuit arrangement, e.g., ICM, DIP, chip, wafer, etc.:

    Electrical connector under subclass 65 wherein one of the panel circuit
    arrangements is a very small member including more than three electrical
    contacts and an electrical circuit.

    (1)     Note.  The device of this subclass includes circuitry that is
    closed as a package in which the circuitry is not readily accessible.

    (2)     Note.  "Very Small Member" is intended to imply that the circuitry
    is so small that if it were exposed, its details could not ordinarily be
    seen by the naked eye.


CLS 439/69
TXT Overlying second, coextensive micro panel circuit arrangement:

    Electrical connector under subclass 68 combined with a second very small
    panel circuit arrangement of substantially the same lateral dimension as
    the first, and parallel thereto.


CLS 439/70
TXT Dual inline package (DIP):

    Electrical connector under subclass 68 comprising a very small panel
    circuit arrangement on which circuit elements are preplaced and fixed,
    including first and second parallel straight rows of three or more contacts
    on or near each of two opposite marginal extremities.

    (1)     Note.  The member with which the electrical connector of this
    subclass is to be used includes circuitry that is integrated as a package
    in which the circuitry is not readily accessible.

    (2)     Note.  "Very small panel circuit arrangement", implies that the
    member is a prefabricated sheetlike part on which circuit elements are
    preplaced and fixed (i.e., a printed circuit) and that circuitry is so
    small that, if it were exposed, its details could not be seen by the naked
    eye.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264,    for a coupling part with actuating means urging contact to move
    laterally with respect to rest of coupling part and toward mating part
    comprising a contractile receptacle for receiving a dual inline package
    (DIP).

    330+,   for an electrical connector with coupling movement-actuating means
    or retaining means in addition to contact of coupling part for receiving a
    dual inline package (DIP).

    525,    for an electrical connector for a dual inline package (DIP),
    generally.

    526,    for an aligning means for a dual inline package (DIP).


CLS 439/71
TXT Leadless:

    Electrical connector under subclass 70 wherein the contacts of the first
    and second rows are substantially flush with the surface of the device.


CLS 439/72
TXT Contacts extending parallel with DIP at contact surface:

    Electrical connector under subclass 70 wherein each of the contacts of the
    device includes a surface for making electrical engagement with the very
    small panel circuit arrangement which surface extends generally parallel
    with the panel of the circuit arrangement.


CLS 439/73
TXT With external, contact enhancing clamp:

    Electrical connector under subclass 70 combined with means outside the
    panel for movement to urge the contact of that electrical connector toward
    the contact of the mating part.


CLS 439/74
TXT Overlying second preformed panel circuit, both adapted to be electrically
    connected:

    Electrical connector under subclass 65 combined with a second prefabricated
    sheetlike part on which circuit elements are preplaced and fixed,
    physically positioned above or below the first and adapted to be
    electrically connected to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44+,    for similar structure allowing selection of circuits.


CLS 439/75
TXT Connected by transversely inserted pin:

    Electrical connector under subclass 74 wherein the structure is such that a
    rodlike connector passing normally therethrough is used to make electrical
    connection of the circuits therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for similar structure allowing selection of circuits.


CLS 439/76.1
TXT Within distinct housing spaced from panel circuit arrangement:

    Electrical connector under subclass 55 combined with an encasing structure
    that is clearly distinct from and spaced from the encased, prefabricated,
    sheetlike part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    892+,   for a distant housing, per se, for an electrical connector.


CLS 439/76.2
TXT Automotive junction box:

    Coupling part under subclass 76.1 comprising a container adapted to be
    secured to a motor vehicle that includes an electrical connector.

    (1)     Note.  The term "automotive" is intended to include any motor
    vehicle (e.g., a truck, a farm tractor, a boat, an airplane, etc.).

    (2)     Note.  This electrical connector commonly, but not necessarily,
    comprises a "busbar."


CLS 439/77
TXT Flexible panel:

    Electrical connector under subclass 55 wherein the sheetlike part is
    intended to readily bend either within or beyond its elastic limit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     for a flexible preformed panel circuit arrangement with provision
    to conduct electrical current to another, superposed panel circuit
    arrangement.

    492,    for a flexible flat conductor cable lacking the circuit elements of
    this subclass.


CLS 439/78
TXT Distinct contact secured to panel circuit:

    Electrical connector udner subclass 55 including a contact* that is
    distinguishable from the circuitry of the panel and is united to the panel
    either permanently or detachably.

    (1)     Note.  The contact of this subclass while distinct is considered to
    be a part of the panel.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein is a panel circuit arrangement having a
    contact soldered to the circuitry of the panel as a separate member, but a
    dab of solder added to such a panel is considered to be a coating and not a
    distinguishable element.

    (3)     Note.  Included herein is a panel circuit arrangement having a
    contact that is not distinguishable from the circuitry combined with a
    detachable member for interfitting with that contact and presenting another
    contact surface.


CLS 439/79
TXT Panel circuit adapted to move along panel plane relative to coupling part
    for insertion of male contact:

    Electrical connector under subclass 78 to be received by a cavity in a
    cooperating connector and is configured to be engaged with the cooperating
    connector by relative movement of the prefabricated sheetlike part with
    respect to the cooperating connector in a direction parallel to the surface
    of the sheetlike part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59+,    for panel structure combined with the connector with which the
    panel mates.


CLS 439/80
TXT Resilient contact or to receive resilient contact:

    Electric connector under subclass 79 having a contact* adapted to yield
    within its elastic limit for yieldably urging its surface toward a
    cooperating connector or adapted to interfit with such yieldable contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    816+,   for a metallic electrical connector having a spring actuated or
    resilient securing part.


CLS 439/81
TXT Resilient contact or to receive resilient contact:

    Electrical connector under subclass 78 having a contact* adapted to yield
    within its elastic limit for yieldably urging its surface toward a
    cooperating contact or adapted to interfit with such a yieldable contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    816+,   for a metallic electrical connector having a spring actuated or
    resilient securing part.


CLS 439/82
TXT In or for use in panel circuit aperture:

    Electrical connector under subclass 81 wherein the yieldable contact is
    located inside a female portion of the sheetlike member or is on another
    member to be received by and yieldably engage a female portion of the
    sheetlike member.


CLS 439/83
TXT Contact soldered to panel circuit:

    Electrical connector under subclass 78 wherein the distinguishable contact
    is adapted to be or has been permanently attached to the circuitry of the
    sheetlike member by metallic fusion bonding.


CLS 439/84
TXT Contact secured to panel circuit by deformation:

    Electrical connector under subclass 78 wherein the distinguishable contact
    is adapted to be or has been permanently attached to the circuitry of the
    sheetlike member by stressing the contact member or the sheetlike member
    beyond its elastic limit.


CLS 439/85
TXT Of layers of insulation:

    Electrical connector under subclass 55 comprising a multiplicity of levels
    of distinct, nonconducting material.

    (1)     Note.  The layers of insulation may be bonded together.  Also
    coating is considered to be a layer.


CLS 439/86
TXT INCLUDING ELASTOMERIC OR NONMETALLIC CONDUCTIVE PORTION:

    Electric connector under the class definition wherein a component part
    thereof is intended to transmit electricity, which part is made of material
    that is a plastic or is other than a metal.

    (1)     Note.  A mixture of an elastomeric material and metallic particles
    is included herein if the mixture retains the general characteristics of an
    elastomeric material.

    (2)     Note.  A carbon impregnanted string is considered to be a
    nonmetallic conductor for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for interrelated electrical connectors relatively movable during
    use with antivibration mounting.

    382+,   for an electrical connector with vibration clamping or cushioning,
    generally.

    586+,   for an electrical connector including flexing insulation, generally.


CLS 439/87
TXT Rigid carbon conductive member:

    Electrical connector under subclass 86 including a physically nonyielding
    component for conducting electricity comprised at least in part of
    elemental carbon in the graphite form.


CLS 439/88
TXT Inductive shielding or arc suppressing means:

    Electrical connector under subclass 86 adapted to prevent passage of
    inductive current therethrough or having means to inhibit electrical
    discharge in the vicinity of the electrical joint forming means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181+,   for an electrical connector having arc suppressing or extinguishing
    means, generally.

    607+,   for an electrical connector having an inductive or capacitive
    shield, generally.


CLS 439/89
TXT Sealing with coupled connector:

    Electrical connector under subclass 88 wherein the elastomeric or
    nonmetallic conductive portion is provided to fit between a face of the
    device and a corresponding face of a mating part* to securely close off the
    faces and interior of the mated assembly from moisture, dust, or other
    foreign matter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    190+,   for sealing means used with an electrical connector with means for
    retaining or having a passageway for fluent material.

    230,    for a coupling part to receive a fluorescent or neon lamp having
    sealing element or material for cooperation with a coupled lamp.

    271,    for an electrical connector with a sealing element or material for
    cooperation with a coupled connector, generally.

    283,    for the sealed interfitting of coupled connector part housings.

    527+,   for a wall, plate or panel mounting or attaching means with a
    connector part sealed thereto.

    586+,   for a connector having a contact carried by flexing or resilient
    insulation and having a sealing joint between coupled parts.

    604,    for a connector with an external cable or conductor embedded in
    insulative sealing material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, cross-reference art collection 920 for a seal including an
    electromagnetic shielding feature.


CLS 439/90
TXT Between parallel conductors:

    Electrical connector under subclass 88 wherein the electricity conducting
    plastic or nonmetal is physically located between a pair of spaced
    electricity conducting members extending in the same direction.


CLS 439/91
TXT Adapted to be sandwiched between preformed panel circuit arrangements:

    Electrical connector under subclass 86 wherein the conductive member of
    plastic or other than metallic material is to be used between a first and a
    second sheetlike part on which circuit arrangements are preplaced and fixed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66,     for a preformed panel circuit arrangement with provision to
    sandwich a connector between it and a superposed second preformed panel
    circuit arrangement.

    591,    for a coupling part including flexing insulation for use between
    duplicate coupling parts, e.g., sandwich between printed circuit boards.


CLS 439/92
TXT WITH CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS AND SAFETY GROUNDING PROVISION:

    Electrical connector under the class definition combined with a electricity
    transmitting member for supply of electrical current, a second electricity
    transmitting member for return of that electrical current (i.e., a return
    ground) and with additional, distinct, particular provision to electrically
    connect a portion thereof to the earth, in addition to or other than the
    provision of an electromagnetic or electrostatic shielding ground.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is to provide for any electrical connector
    including a grounding provision, except (a) one providing for a return path
    to earth of electricity that has been transmitted to an appliance that has
    utilized the electricity passing therethrough or (b) one purely for
    shielding the effect of electromagnetic or elastrostatic radiation.  Such
    provision may be called a "return", "common", "neutral", etc. ground.  In
    the event of doubt of whether or not the provision is an "earth" ground or
    a "return" ground, the device is to be found in this and the indented
    subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  In the transmission of low voltage electricity, it is not
    unusual to utilize the framework of structure to serve as a return for
    electricity.  Such a return path is not considered to be a "common" or
    "return" ground.  Terminology that may be indicative of structure including
    a ground that is not a safety ground includes:  "tube socket",
    "transistor", "chassis", "electronic", "radio circuitry", "electrical
    shield", etc.

    (3)     Note.  A connector for a two-wire, 120v. a.c. residential
    electrical supply system including an insulated "hot" wire (black) and
    insulated "ground" wire (white) is not included herein because the white
    wire is considered to be an electricity return, even though the white line
    is connected to earth at some point.  A connector for a three-wire 120v.
    a.c. electrical supply system wherein the third wire comprises a "bond"
    wire is included herein because the third wire is a safety ground not
    intended to serve as an electricty return.

    (4)     Note.  A connector for a three-wire 240v. a.c. residential
    electrical supply system including two "hot" wires and a single ground wire
    is excluded from this subclass if the ground is insulated (therefore
    considered to be a ground that is not an electricity return).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126,    for an electrical connector having a spark or glow plug cover with
    inductive shielding with a grounding provision.

    578+,   for an electrical connector combined with a coaxial cable having
    provision to ground the shielding or return ground sheath thereof.

    607+,   for an electrical connector having or providing inductive or
    capacitive shielding, including means for grounding the shield.

    677+,   for a polarized plural contact coupling part wherein one contact
    may be for "safety" grounding, but is not claimed as the combination of
    elements required for this subclass.

    799+,   for a circumferentially tensioned flexible strap or band which may
    be for "safety" grounding, but is not claimed as the combination of
    elements required for this subclass.


CLS 439/93
TXT And means to block access to power contact surface:

    Electrical connector under subclass 92 combined with (a) means to
    physically block the contact surface* thereof from electricity transmitting
    engagement with the contact surface of a cooperating connector; or, (b) a
    connector enclosing member having a portion intended to remain attached to
    the remainder of the enclosing member but repositinable to alternatively
    cover a contact surface or permit access to that contact surface.

    (1)     Note.  The contact preventer of this subclass (clause a) includes
    any structure which, by disclosure, is intended to be used for that
    function and also any structure which is of like configuration but lacks
    specific disclosure of being a contact preventer; e.g., a plastic shell
    intended to cover and protect the pins of an electron tube is included
    herein.

    (2)     Note.  The retractable cover part of this subclass (clause b) is in
    addition to the electrical connector.  Also the retractable cover part may,
    but is not required to, prevent making of electrical contact.

    (3)     Note.  In this subclass, access is usually prevented to provide
    safety.  The blocking means may be moved out to blocking position by
    insertion of the ground prong.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133+,   for a lock to prevent unauthorized use of a connector combined with
    contact preventing structure or a retractable cover.

    135+,   for an electrical connector combined with a contact preventer or
    retractable cover part, generally.

    892+,   for a distinct connector cover, generally.


CLS 439/94
TXT Uninterrupted support rail or contact, or for interfitting with
    uninterrupted support rail or contact:

    Electrical connector under subclass 92 including (a) an elongated member
    for supporting another connector such that the supported structure may be
    located at any of an infinite number of locations along the elongated
    member; or (b) an elongated member housing an elongated contact member such
    that the contact can accept a mating connector at any of an infinite number
    of locations along its length; or intended to cooperate with such a member.

    (1)     Note.  Under clause (a) of this definition, a device is included if
    the track (elongated supporting member) does not house an electrical
    connector, rather an electrical connection may be made by use of a flexible
    conductor extended to a fixed electrical connector.

    (2)     Note.  Under clause (b) of this definition, the elongated housing
    may be constructed to limit access to the elongated contact to only a
    restricted location.  This is to allow placement of similar art in this
    subclass even though limited use has been placed on the device by
    application of a restricting cover plate.  Also, if not provided for
    elsewhere, a contact, per se, for engagement with a mating connector at any
    of an infinite number of locations along its length is included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110+,   for an electrical connector including an uninterrupted support rail
    or interrupted contact, generally.

    121+,   for an electrical connector for interfitting with an uninterrupted
    support rail or contact, generally.


CLS 439/95
TXT Grounding to connector container or housing:

    Electrical connector under subclass 92 wherein the contact is encased in a
    vessel, combined with provision to transmit electricity to the vessel.

    (1)     Note.  For placement herein, it is not necessary that the vessel be
    positively claimed.

    (2)     Note.  The vessel may comprise a component part of the connector
    for encasing the remainder thereof.


CLS 439/96
TXT Pliable conductor for making grounding connection of connector to container:

    Electrical connector under subclass 95 including an assembly within the
    vessel, wherein the provision to transmit electricity to the vessel
    comprises a flexible strand or web extending from the assembly to the
    vessel.

    (1)     Note.  The "assembly" of this subclass may comprise a receptacle*,
    a switch (by name only), a lamp, etc.


CLS 439/97
TXT By means of connector mounting screw:

    Electrical connector under subclass 95 including an assembly within the
    vessel wherein the provision to transmit electricity to the vessel
    comprises means adapted to securely engaged by a helically ribbed member
    adapted to hold the assembly and vessel together.


CLS 439/98
TXT Grounding to conductive sheath of cable:

    Electrical connector under subclass 92 for use with a cable* including a
    flexible conductor and a protective wrapper, which wrapper is conductive of
    electricity; which connector is particularly adapted to be secured to the
    surface of the protective wrapper and provide earth grounding of the
    wrapper.

    (1)     Note.  Grounding the outer conductor of a coaxiale cable is
    included herein even if there is an additional wrapper about the cable.


CLS 439/99
TXT Portion of connector beneath conductive sheath:

    Electrical connector under subclass 98 wherein a position of the structure
    including an electricity transmitting contact surface is positioned to be
    encased at least partially by the protective wrapper.


CLS 439/100
TXT Grounding to pipe, rod, or conduit:

    Electrical connector under subclass 92 particularly adapted to be secured
    to a concave or convex surface of a cylindrical member of either hollow or
    solid cross-section wherein the member is not one that would be considered
    to be a "wire", or to a "second electricity transmitting member" comprising
    a sheath about a wire or cable as a part of the supply and return of
    electrical current.

    (1)     Note.  The "wire" of this definition is a metallic strandlike
    member intended to be generally flexible and to conduct electrical current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208,    for a conduit or duct with a grounding cable passing therethrough
    electrically bonded thereto; wherein there is not electrical circuit; e.g.,
    a ground line from a water line passing through a conduit.

    799+,   for a circumferentially tensioned flexible strap or band which may
    be for "safety" grounding, but is not claimed as the combination of
    elements required for this subclass.


CLS 439/101
TXT Direct grounding of coupling part member passing into aperture:

    Electrical connector under subclass 92 comprising a coupling part* having a
    contact* that is part of the second electricity transmitting member, and is
    intended to enter into an opening in the mating part and be electrically
    connected to earth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    677+,   for a polarized plural contact coupling part wherein one contact
    may be for "safety" grounding but is not claimed as the combination of
    elements required for this subclass.


CLS 439/102
TXT Prong having locking provision, e.g., bayonet:

    Electrical connector under subclass 101 including a male contact member
    having physical configuration to secure the connector to a mating connector
    adapted to receive the male member.


CLS 439/103
TXT Movable or removable ground prong:

    Electrical connector under subclass 101 including a male contact* adapted
    to enter a receptacle and make electrical connection to earth ground, which
    male contact is constructed to be (a) operationally repositioned with
    respect to the remainder of the connector or, (b) withdrawn from
    operational position.

    (1)     Note.  The purpose of repositioning the contact of this subclass
    may be to adapt the connector for use with mating parts of different
    configurations without use of an intermediate "adapter".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     for a coupling part having a repositionable contact to allow an
    operative to select different circuitry.

    171+,   for a connector having a repositionable contact for interfitting
    with variously configured mating parts of particular, assigned
    configurations, e.g., assigned for a particular voltage or ampere rating.

    174,    for a connector, generally, having a repositionable contact.


CLS 439/104
TXT Pivotable or rotatable about transverse axis:

    Electrical connector under subclass 103 wherein the male contact member is
    constructed to be repositioned or withdrawn by movement about a pivot with
    respect to the device, wherein the pivot is normal to the extent of the
    member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172,    for a coupling part including a contact repsitionable to a nonuse
    position so that the coupling part can interfit with a different mating
    part.


CLS 439/105
TXT Adapter:

    Electrical connector under subclass 101 including (a) a first coupling part
    for mating with a first mating part and including integrally therewith a
    second coupling part for mating with a second  mating part to thereby
    connect together the first and second parts, wherein the first and second
    mating parts could not be interconnected directly; (b) a first coupling
    part for mating with a first mating part and including integrally therewith
    a plurality of second coupling parts similar in configuration to the first
    mating part, for mating with plural other mating parts to provide multiple
    access to the first mating part; or (c) a first coupling part for mating
    with a first mating part and including integrally therewith a second
    coupling part similar in configuration to the first mating part to
    effectively reposition the second mating part from the location of the
    first mating part if it were interfitted therewith.

    (1)     Note.  The coupling part of clause (a) allows a coupling part to be
    electrically connected to a physically noninterfitting mating part; the
    coupling part of clause (b) allows plural mating parts to be electrically
    connected to a single coupling part; and the coupling part of clause (c)
    effectively repositions a mating part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    for an uninterrupted support rail or interrupted contact with an
    adapter.

    124,    for a candle-simulation-type electrical connector comprising an
    adapter.

    236,    for an adapter to receive a fluorescent or neon lamp.

    300,    for an adapter retained in connection with a mating part by the
    presence of a distinct coupling part.

    323,    for an adapter with coupling part retaining means in addition to
    the contact comprising a movable threaded ring.

    365,    for an adapter with coupling retaining means in addition to the
    contact comprising a helically threaded member.

    638+,   for a member comprising two or more plural contact coupling parts
    with insulation other than a conductor sheath.


CLS 439/106
TXT Three-prong coupling part including ground prong, or receptacle:

    Electrical connector under subclass 101 comprising a coupling part*
    including more than two contacts* each intended to enter an opening in the
    mating part, or comprising such as mating part; wherein one of the contacts
    is a safety grounding device.


CLS 439/107
TXT Duplex receptacle:

    Electrical connector under subclass 106 comprising a member for receiving a
    mating part having more than two prong contacts at first location and for
    receiving a second mating part of like configuration to the first.

    (1)     Note.  The connector of this subclass is known by the name of this
    subclass title in the home building trade.


CLS 439/108
TXT Grounding of coupling part:

    Electrical connector under subclass 92 comprising a coupling part*.


CLS 439/109
TXT INTERMEDIATE MEMBER BETWEEN PRONG AND ENCOMPASSING PLANAR GROUND:

    Electrical connector under the class definition comprising a conductor
    adapted to serve as return ground transmitting member between a male
    contact and a plate having an opening therethrough for receipt of the male
    contact; wherein the device is adapted to fit physically between the male
    contact and the opening in the plate through which the contact penetrates
    and make electrical connection with the male contact and with the plate.

    (1)     Note.  See the discussion of "safety grounding" under subclass 92.


CLS 439/110
TXT UNINTERRUPTED SUPPORT RAIL OR UNINTERRUPTED CONTACT:

    Electrical connector under the class definition including (a) an elongated
    member for supporting another connector such that the supported structure
    may be located at any of an infinite number of locations along the
    elongated member; or (b) an elongated member housing an elongated contact
    member such that the contact can accept a mating connector at any of an
    infinite number of locations along its length.

    (1)     Note.  Under clause (a) of this definition, a device is included if
    the track (elongated supporting member) does not house an electrical
    connector, rather an electrical connection may be made by use of a flexible
    conductor extended to a fixed electrical connector.

    (2)     Note.  Under clause (b) of this definition, the elongated housing
    may be constructed to limit access to the elongated contact to only a
    restricted location.  This is to allow placement of similar art in this
    subclass even though limited use has been placed on the device by
    application of a restricting cover plate.  Also, if not provided for
    elsewhere, a contact, per se, for engagement with a mating connector at any
    of an infinite number of locations along its length is included herein.  An
    accessible, pliant, conducting wire within a housing is not considered to
    be an elongated contact under this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94,     for an uninterrupted support rail or contact or a connector for
    interfitting with an uninterrupted rail or contact with safety grounding.

    121+,   for an electrical connector for interfitting with an uninterrupted
    support rail or contact, generally.

    207+,   for an electrical connector combined with a distinct structure for
    encasing a pliant conducting wire including a device wherein the wire is
    "accessible" at an infinite number of locations along its length.


CLS 439/111
TXT Arcuate, bendable, or pliant rail or contact:

    Electrical connector under subclass 110 wherein the elongated member is
    constructed to allow support or acceptance of the supported connector or
    the mating connector at an infinite number of locations along a curved way,
    or along a way which may be made permanently or temporarily curved.


CLS 439/112
TXT Circular rail or contact:

    Electrical connector under subclass 11 wherein the curved way extends
    equidistant about a center 360_.


CLS 439/113
TXT With access restricting cover:

    Electrical connector under subclass 110 including or combined with a member
    overlaying the elongated member such that the supported or mating connector
    can utilize only a limited extent of the device.


CLS 439/114
TXT Bus duct:

    Electrical connector under subclass 113 comprising an elongated, rigid
    metallic housing of reasonably uniform cross-section, and a plurality of
    rigid metallic contacts (i.e., buses) extending therealong and spaced
    therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  "Bus duct" is an art term.

    (2)     Note.  A second housing of reasonable uniform cross-section
    connected at its end with the first housing is not considered to be
    "distinct from the first and such a combination is included herein".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207+,   for an electrical connector combined with a distinct conductor
    encasing housing.

    212+,   for a bus duct including an electrical connector, generally.


CLS 439/115
TXT With means to join tandem rails or tandem contacts:

    Electrical connector under subclass 110 including provision to unite the
    elongated member to another such member at the respective ends thereof.


CLS 439/116
TXT With coupling movement-actuating means or retaining means in addition to
    contact of coupling part:

    Electrical connector under subclass 110 comprising a coupling part* having
    (a) separate means to forcibly bring together into mating relation the
    interfitting or matching parts of the coupling part and a mating part*
    interfitting therewith, or (b) means separate from the current carrying
    components of the coupling part and a mating part to maintain the
    interengagement of such parts operable independently of or in addition to
    the coupling motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144,    for an electrical connector having a contact preventer or
    retractable coverpart that is movable about an axis, combined with
    retaining means.

    296+,   for an electrical connector with coupling movement-actuating or
    retaining means in addition to contact of coupling part.


CLS 439/117
TXT Uninterrupted contact accessible by mating contact moving in a first, then
    a lateral direction:

    Electric connector under subclass 116 particularly adapted to receive a
    mating connector by movement of the mating connector in a first coupling
    direction and then by movement of at least the contact portion of the
    mating connector in a direction at right angles to the first direction.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are devices adapted to receive a mating part
    by a pivotal or "bayonet" engagement.

    (2)     Note.  A "push-pull" mating part wherein the prong thereof is
    directed to move along an arcuate path to engage the uninterrupted contact
    is included herein.


CLS 439/118
TXT Bayonet coupling part movable about axis:

    Electrical connector under subclass 117 intended to be brought into
    interfitting relationship with a mating part* by a first movement along its
    greatest axial extent and then by a movement about the central axis of the
    coupling part with respect to the mating part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for a preformed panel circuit arrangement included a receptacle for
    a lamp or electron tube with connection effected by movement of the lamp or
    tube about its axis.

    314+,   for a coupling part with a retaining bayonet that is a relatively
    pivotable concentric movement-actuating or retaining ring.

    332+,   for a bayonet coupling part with coupling movement-actuating means
    or retaining means in addition to the contact of the coupling part.


CLS 439/119
TXT With mating part having mating connector portion and another connector
    portion electrically connected thereto; e.g., adapter:

    Electrical connector under subclass 110 combined with structure that mates
    therewith, wherein the mating structure includes a first part including an
    electrical contact for engagement with the device, an electrical contact
    for engagement with another coupling part, and an electricity conductive
    part for transmitting electrical current via the two contacts from the
    device to the other coupling part.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes the combination of an uninterrupted
    support rail or contact with an "adapter".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    for an adapter with safety grounding.

    124,    for a candle-simulation-type electrical connector comprising an
    adapter.

    236,    for an adapter to receive a fluorescent or neon lamp.

    300,    for an adapter retained in connection with a mating part by the
    presence of a distinct coupling part.

    323,    for an adapter with coupling part retaining means in addition to
    the contact comprising a movable threaded ring.

    365,    for an adapter with coupling retaining means in addition to the
    contact comprising a helically threaded member.

    638+,   for a member comprising two or more plural contact coupling parts
    with insulation other than a conductor sheath.


CLS 439/120
TXT Molding type; e.g., baseboard:

    Electrical connector under subclass 110 including a housing thereabout,
    wherein the housing is to be mounted on an otherwise finished product, is
    of decorative value, and accordingly serves as a trim as well as an
    electrical service means.

    (1)     Note.  The finished product of this subclass may be a building wall
    or an exterior panel of a vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209,    for a molding-type conduit or duct.

    216,    for a coupling part of indeterminate lateral length of the molding
    type.


CLS 439/121
TXT FOR INTERFITTING WITH UNINTERRUPTED SUPPORT RAIL OR UNINTERRUPTED CONTACT:

    Electrical connector under class definition intended to cooperate with (a)
    an elongated member supporting the device such that the device may be
    located at any of an infinite number of locations along the elongated
    member; or (b) an elongated member housing an elongated contact member such
    that the contact can accept the device at any of an infinite number of
    locations along its length.

    (1)     Note.  See the notes under subclass 110 for descriptions of the
    member with which the device of this subclass cooperates.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94,     for an uninterrupted support rail or contact or a connector for
    interfitting with an uninterrupted support rail or contact with safety
    grounding.

    110+,   for an electrical connector including an uninterrupted support rail
    or uninterrupted contact, generally.


CLS 439/122
TXT Coupling part with actuating means urging contact surface to move with
    respect to rest of connector and toward mating contact:

    Electrical connector under subclass 121 comprising a coupling part*
    including means to exert pressure on a contact thereof tending to move that
    contact with respect to other portions of the connector to cause it to make
    engagement with a contact of a mating part*.

    (1)     Note.  The "means to urge" of this subclass is part of the device,
    such as a cam or wedge, rather than a spring, a gravity utilizing device,
    or a handle with no force modifying linkage.  Note further that it is not
    necessary that the contact actually move.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein is a "zero insertion withdrawal force"
    connector in which that connector is brought into position with the mating
    part and subsequently the contacts are caused to move into engagement with
    each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259+,   for a coupling part with actuating means urging contact surface to
    move with respect to rest of connector and toward mating part, generally.


CLS 439/123
TXT CANDLE SIMULATION TYPE:

    Electrical connector under the class definition comprising means to receive
    and electrically connect to an illumination lamp, which device is shaped or
    arranged so that when combined with said lamp it has the appearance of a
    candle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 51.01 for such
    a device combined with a switch or capable of functioning as a switch.

    362,    Illumination, for such device in combination with a light modifying
    or distributing means, especially subclass 810 for a cross-reference art
    collection to imitation candles.


CLS 439/124
TXT Adapter:

    Electrical connector under subclass 123 comprising a coupling part* (a) for
    mating with a first mating part and including integrally therewith a second
    coupling part for mating with a second mating part to thereby connect
    together the first and second mating parts, wherein the first and second
    mating parts could both be interconnected directly; (b) for mating with a
    first mating part, and including integrally therewith a plurality of second
    in configuration to the first mating parts for mating with plural other
    mating parts to provide multiple access to the first mating part; or (c)
    for mating with a first mating part and including integrally therewith a
    second coupling part similar in configuration to the first mating part to
    effectively reposition the second mating part from the location of the
    first mating part if it were interfitted therewith.

    (1)     Note.  The coupling part of clause (a) allows a coupling part to be
    electrically connected to a physically noninterfitting mating part; the
    coupling part of clause (b) allows plural mating parts to be electrically
    connected to a single coupling part; and the coupling part of clause (c)
    effectively repositions a mating part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    for an adapter with safety grounding.

    119,    for an uninterrupted support rail or uninterrupted contact with an
    adapter.

    236,    for an adapter to receive a fluorescent or neon lamp.

    300,    for an adapter retained in connection with a mating part by the
    presence of a distinct coupling part.

    323,    for an adapter with coupling part retaining means in addition to
    the contact comprising a movable threaded ring.

    365,    for an adapter with coupling retaining means in addition to the
    contact comprising a helically threaded member.

    638+,   for a member comprising two or more plural contact coupling parts
    with insulation other than a conductor sheath.


CLS 439/125
TXT HAVING SPARK OR GLOW PLUG COVER:

    Electrical connector under the class definition comprising a connector at
    the terminal end of an integral combustion engine igniter including
    encasing structure to prevent or control passage of radiated electrical
    energy, to insulate against conduction of electrical current away from the
    terminal end of the igniter, to prevent corrosion, or to prevent passage of
    moisture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92+,    for an electrical connector, generally, having an encasing member
    that is grounded to provide electrical safety.

    521+,   for a contact cover or case to protect a contact from the
    environment.

    607+,   for a shielded electrical connector not peculiar to a spark plug.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 152+ for a
    spark plug and bushing (insulator).  (Claimed sparking electrodes go beyond
    Class 174).

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 118+ for spark
    plug, generally; and particularly subclass 134 for a spark plug with radio
    shielding and subclass 137 for a spark plug with plural part insulation
    means.


CLS 439/126
TXT Inductive shielding; e.g., radio disturbance:

    Electrical connector under subclass 125 intended to restrict radiation of
    electrical waves away from the connector or igniter.

    (1)     Note.  Inductive shielding is usually accomplished by
    concentrically encircling an electrical wave emitter with a conductive
    sleeve and grounding that sleeve.


CLS 439/127
TXT With distinct securing means:

    Electrical connector under subclass 125 combined with additional structure
    to hold the encasing structure in a selected position.


CLS 439/128
TXT Having removable closure:

    Electrical connector under subclass 125 wherein the encasing structure is
    provided with an openable cover providing access to the interior thereof.


CLS 439/129
TXT MAGNETO POST TYPE:

    Electrical connector under the class definition generally including a
    spring urged or other resiliently mounted contact for leading off the
    charge induced in a permanent magnet alternator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 249 for an
    electrical connector intended to slidingly engage and transmit electrical
    current to the moving parts of an electromotive device and for the
    combination of such a connector with an electrical connector of this class.


CLS 439/130
TXT MULTICONTACT INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE DISTRIBUTOR CAP OR MULTICONTACT
    MATING PART:

    Electrical connector under class definition having a plurality of contacts*
    each to be detachably connected to a high tension spark plug conductor in a
    multicylinder ignition engine wherein the device is to be used with a
    selector means to sequentionally direct electrical current to each of the
    spark plugs; or comprising a connector including a plurality of distinct
    contacts for use with such a device.

    (1)     Note.  A distributor cap may be referred to as a "timer".


CLS 439/131
TXT CONNECTOR MOVABLE BETWEN ACCESSIBLE AND INACCESSIBLE POSITIONS:

    Electrical connector under the class definition relocatable between a first
    location in which electrical connection can be made and a second location
    in which electrical connection is physically blocked.

    (1)     Note.  In order for the device to be moved to the second position,
    electrical connection must be broken.


CLS 439/132
TXT With fluid pressure operating or control means:

    Electrical connector under subclass 131 combined with means to move or
    regulate the movement of the device utilizing hydraulic or vacuum effort.


CLS 439/133
TXT WITH UNAUTHORIZED CONNECTION PREVENTER, E.G., KEY OR COMBINATION LOCK:

    Electrical connector under the class definition having provision to
    physically block electrical connection of the device except by utilization
    of a specially designed implement or by special manipulation of a component
    thereof to permit such connection.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a locking device requiring use of a key,
    a combination lock, or other device requiring use of an uncommon tool to
    permit coupling.  Also included herein is a device requiring presence of a
    particular sound (e.g., voice command) or a particular anatomical feature
    (e.g., a particular fingerprint).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS SUBCLASS:

    93,     for an electrical connector including provision for safety
    grounding combined with a contact preventer or retractable cover part.

    135+,   for an electrical connector combined with a contact preventer or
    retractable cover part, generally.

    304+,   for locking structure to prevent uncoupling of coupled connectors.

    892+,   for a distinct connector cover, generally.


CLS 439/134
TXT Prong cover:

    Electrical connector under subclass 133 including an outwardly extending
    male contact having a contact-surface* and including means to fit over the
    contact to prevent normal electrical conduction from the contact-surface*
    to the contact surface of a cooperating connector.


CLS 439/135
TXT WITH CONTACT PREVENTER OR RETRACTABLE COVER PART:

    Electrical connector under the class definition combined with (a) means to
    physically block the contact-surface* of the device from electricity
    transmitting engagement with the contact-surface of a cooperting connector;
    or (b) a connector enclosing member having a portion intended to remain
    attached to the remainder of the connector but repositionable to
    alternatively cover a contact-surface or permit access to that
    contact-surface.

    (1)     The contact preventer of this subclass (clause a) includes any
    structure which, by disclosure, is intended to be used for that function.
    Also any structure which is of like configurationn but lacks specific
    dislclosure of intent to cover and protect the plane of electron tube is
    included herein (specifically, in subclass 150) intended hereunder.

    (2)     Note.  The retractable cover part of this subclass (clause b) is in
    addition to the electrical connector.  Also the retractable cover part may,
    but is not required to, prevent making of electrical contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93,     for an electrical connector including provision for safety
    grounding combined with a contact preventer or retractable cover part.

    133+,   for a lock to prevent unauthorized use of a connector combined with
    contact preventing structure or a retractable cover.

    892+,   for a distinct connector cover, generally.


CLS 439/136
TXT Movably mounted:

    Electrical connector under subclass 135 including (a) means to physically
    block the contact-surface comprising a member repositionable with respect
    to the remainder of the device from a position blocking the contact-surface
    to a position not blocking the contact-surface; or (b) a connector
    enclosing member having a portion intended to remain attached to the
    remainder of the enclosing member but repositionable to that
    contact-surface.

    (1)     Note.  A compressible sleeve about a contact is considered to be
    movably mounted for this and the indented subclasses.


CLS 439/137
TXT Moved by mating connector:

    Electrical connector under subclass 136 wherein the repositionable member
    is displaced by a surface of a connector interfitting therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93+,    for an electrical connector including movable means to cover an
    electrical contact, which means is adapted to be moved by receipt of the
    ground prong of a cooperating connector.


CLS 439/138
TXT Moved about an axis:

    Electrical connector under subclass 137 wherein the repositionable member
    is restricted to move about a fixed line with respect to the remainder of
    the device.


CLS 439/139
TXT Connector moved rectilinearly for engagement, preventer or cover moved
    about axis parallel to direction of connector movement:

    Electrical connector under subclass 138 intended to move in a straight path
    to make electrical connection with a cooperating connector, wherein the
    repositionable member is restricted to move with respect to the remainder
    of the device about a fixed line extending in the direction of with
    straight path.

    (1)     Note.  The helical movement of a screw threaded connector is not
    considered to be "rectilinear" for this subclass.


CLS 439/140
TXT Connector moved rectilinearly for engagement, preventer or cover moved
    rectilinearly and parallel thereto:

    Electrical connector under subclass 137 intended to move in a straight path
    to make electrical connection with a cooperating connector, wherein the
    repositionable member is restricted to move with respect to the remainder
    of the electrical connector in a straight path parallel to the electrical
    connection path.


CLS 439/141
TXT Retractable sheath:

    Electrical connector under subclass 140 wherein the repositionable member
    is generally cylindrical and encircles the contact-surface and wherein it
    is moved with respect to the remainder of the electrical connector along
    its cylindrical axis.


CLS 439/142
TXT Movable about axis:

    Electrical connector under subclass 136 wherein the repositionable member
    is restricted to move about a fixed line with respect to the remainder of
    the device.


CLS 439/143
TXT To misalign aperture with contact:

    Electrical connector under subclass 142 comprising means to cover the
    contact* while leaving an opening providing direct access to that contact
    wherein that means is movable so as to reposition that opening out of a
    position that allows such access.


CLS 439/144
TXT With connector retaining means in addition to contact of connector:

    Electrrical connector under subclass 142 having means separate from the
    current carrying components of the connector and a mating part to maintain
    interengagement of such parts operable independently of or in addition to
    the connecting motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147,    for an electrical connector with a contact preventer or retractable
    cover part with connector retaining means in addition to the contact
    thereof.

    292+,   for an electrical connector adapted to cooperate with a duplicate
    electrical connector with connector retaining means in addition to the
    contact thereof.

    310+,   for a coupling part with coupling movement retaining means in
    addition to the contact thereof, with distinct movement-actuating means to
    move the coupling part axially.

    345+,   for an electrical connector with coupling retaining means in
    addition to the contact thereof, generally.


CLS 439/145
TXT Movable to misalign aperture with contact:

    Electrical connector under subclass 136 comprising means to cover the
    contact* while leaving an opening providing direct access to that contact
    wherein that means is movable so as to reposition that opening out of a
    position that allows such access.


CLS 439/146
TXT Adapted to fit between contacts of first and second coupled connectors
    (e.g., power measuring meter):

    Electric connector under subclass 135 comprising means to prevent
    engagement of a contact* with a mating contact by being physically
    positioned to hold the contacts apart with the connectors in position such
    that the contacts would normally function.

    (1)     Note.  Device of the type normally found in this subclass may be
    used with a power measuring meter to prevent use of power and still allow
    the meter to physically remain in position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    for an electrical connector convertible by internal change to
    selectively cooperate with a different contact, comprising a connector for
    a power measuring meter.

    508,    for jumper adapted to be used with a power measuring meter.

    517,    for power measuring meter coupling part, generally.


CLS 439/147
TXT With connector retaining means in addition to contact of connector:

    Electrical connector under subclass 135 having means separate from the
    current carrying components of the connector and mating part to maintain
    interengagement of such parts operable indepently of or in addition to the
    connection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144,    for an electrical connector with a contact preventer or retractable
    cover part movable about an axis with connector retaining means in addition
    to the contact thereof.

    292+,   for an electrical connector adapter to cooperate with a duplicate
    electrical connector with connector retaining means in addition to the
    contact thereof.

    310+,   for a coupling part with coupling movement retaining means in
    addition to the contact thereof, with distinct movement-actuating means to
    move the coupling part axially.

    345+,   for an electrical connector with coupling retaining means in
    addition to the contact thereof, generally.


CLS 439/148
TXT Dummy connector:

    Device under subclass 135 comprising a member adapted to couple with an
    electrical connector, but failing to conduct electrical current with
    respect thereto.

    (1)     Note.  A device to be inserted into a wall outlet to prevent
    tampering, e.g., by a child, is to be found in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  A dummy connector, per se, even though not meeting the
    requirements of this class (e.g., not having a contact*) is included among
    the patents of this subclass.


CLS 439/149
TXT Prong cover:

    Electrical connector under subclass 135 adapted to be used with a male-type
    connector and adapted to enclose only the protruding contact.


CLS 439/150
TXT Protector for electron tube pin:

    Electrical connector under subclass 149 adapted to physically shield the
    male contact of a member including electrical amplifying or switching means
    utilizing an environment excluding vacuum maintaining envelope.


CLS 439/151
TXT COUPLING PART COMBINED WITH MEANS TO ALLOW REPOSITIONING OF MATING PART FOR
    ENGAGEMENT WITH DIFFERENT CONTACTS ON MATING PART, E.G., FLASH CUBE:

    Electrical connector under the class definition comprising a coupling part*
    intended to mate with a mating part* in a first relative position mating
    with a first contact of the mating part and in a second relative position
    mating with a second contact of the mating part.

    (1)     Note.  The device of this subclass allows selection of more than
    one circuitry of the mating part, such as is used in a photo flash device
    which, when in a first position actuates a first illumination portion and
    when in a second position acuates a second illumination portion.


CLS 439/152
TXT WITH COUPLING SEPARATOR:

    Electrical connector under the class definition combined with means in
    addition to any coupling means and any conductors electrically connected
    thereby, acting either in conjunction with or independently with those
    components of the device to forcibly uncouple the connector both physically
    and electrically from a mating connector.

    (1)     Note.  Structure utilizing the force of an explosive device to
    separate one electrical connector from another is included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180,    for an electrical connector having means for causing the contacts
    to separate from a mating member by a snap action, wherein such means does
    not cause separation of the connector assembly from a mating connector
    assembly.

    266+,   for a coupling part with plug prong deflecting or socket spreading,
    means to permit uncoupling where such means does not cause separation of
    the coupled parts.

    296+,   for an electrical connector with coupling movement actuating means,
    generally.


CLS 439/153
TXT Including retainer or joiner:

    Electrical connector under subclass 152 also (a) including means to
    positively (i.e., more than frictional drag) hold the device in coupled
    relationship with respect to the mating connector or (b) combined with
    means to bring the connector into coupled relationship with a mating
    connector.


CLS 439/154
TXT Destructible retainer:

    Electrical connector under subclass 153 including means to secure it to a
    cooperating connector wherein the means is intended to be altered when
    permitting separation of the connector from a mating connector such that
    the means is no longer functional as a securing member.


CLS 439/155
TXT Distinct from separator:

    Electrical connector under subclass 153 wherein the means to secure the
    connector or to bring into mating cooperation is physically separate from
    the means to forcibly uncouple the device.


CLS 439/156
TXT Coaxial contacts, center one comprising separator, e.g., photo flash:

    Electrical connector under subclass 155 including a first contact at the
    center of the connection and a second contact concentric thereabout wherein
    the first contact is movable with respect to the remainder of the connector
    and is to force the connector out of engagement with the mating connector.


CLS 439/157
TXT Integral retainer and cam separator:

    Electrical connector under subclass 153 wherein the means to forcibly
    uncouple the connector turns about an axis and also serves as the means to
    positively hold the device in coupled relationship.


CLS 439/158
TXT Means to utilize direct fluid action:

    Electric connector under subclass 152 wherein a liquid or gaseous medium is
    directed against the device or against the cooperating connector to
    forcibly uncouple the device.


CLS 439/159
TXT Nonconducting pusher:

    Electrical connector under subclass 152 wherein the means to forcibly
    uncouple the connector is made of material that is highly resistant to the
    flow of the electrical current and wherein the member acts in compression
    when performing the uncoupling function.


CLS 439/160
TXT Including handle for direct manual urge to separate:

    Electrical connector under subclass 159 wherein the means to forcibly
    uncouple the connector is engageable by an operative without other
    intermediate structure.


CLS 439/161
TXT HEAT RESPONSIVE CONTACT PRESSURE CONTROL:

    Electrical connector under the class definition including structure
    particularly adapted to urge the contact toward a cooperating contact at a
    predetermined force according to the temperature of the device.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass, the expansion of component parts under
    temperature changes is recognized and compensation is accordingly made.
    Usually the provision is to increase contact pressure upon increase in
    ambient temperature, but also may be to reduce contact pressure as
    temperature is elevated or to maintain substantially unchanging pressure.


CLS 439/162
TXT WITH RELATIVELY GUIDED MEMBERS AND INTERMEDIATE PLIABLE CONDUCTOR:

    Electrical connector under the class definition combined with two component
    parts intended to move with respect to each other in a prescribed,
    controlled manner and combined with a flexible electrical conductor
    extending from one of the component parts to the other.

    (1)     Note.  A storage spool, even though having a relatively guided
    member and an electrical connector is not included in this and the indented
    subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for structure having two component parts movable relative to each
    other wherein a connector on one is also movable relative to a cooperating
    connector on the component part.


CLS 439/163
TXT Frangible pliable conductor; e.g., umbilical break-away:

    Electrical connector under subclass 162 wherein the flexible electrical
    conductor is specially designed to rupture and subdivide upon extreme
    movement of one component part with respect to the other.


CLS 439/164
TXT Relatively movable about axis:

    Electrical connector under subclass 162 wherein the component parts move
    relatively about a line that is fixed with respect to each of the parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    446,    for an electrical connector having means pivotally attached thereto
    to protect the cable extending from the connector from excessive bending.

    534,    for an electrical connector pivotally attached to supporting
    structure.


CLS 439/165
TXT Hinge:

    Electrical connector udner subclass 164 wherein the first component part is
    secured to and supported by a member and the second component part is
    secured to and supported by the first member such that the first member
    pivotally supports the second member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for a plurality of electrical connectors mounted on different
    blades of a hinge, wherein the connector is electrically connected to each
    other.


CLS 439/166
TXT CONVERTIBLE BY INTERNAL CHANGE TO SELECTIVELY COOPERATE WITH A DIFFERENT
    CONTACT:

    Electrical connector under the class definition including a contact*
    adapted to interfit with a particularly configured contact, a particularly
    sized contact, or a contact particularly positioned within supporting
    structure including integral component structure intended to be
    repositioned to allow the electrical connector to interfit with a different
    particularly configured, sized, or positioned contact; wherein the integral
    component structure is intended to be returnable to the original position.

    (1)     Note.  A device including a storage compartment for a component to
    be transformed manually to operating position is included herein; whereas a
    similar device having no such storage compartment is not included herein.

    (2)     Note.  A single device may have several "connectors".  In such a
    structure, it is only necessary that one of these connectors be changed
    under this subclass definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176,    for a female coupling part convertible to a male coupling part by
    addition of a prong.

    177,    for a coupling part convertible to a distinct shape by addition of
    a nonremovable element or by removal of a nonreusable element.

    217+,   for a device having several types of connector available without
    modification of the device, but structurally limited so that if one type is
    in use, use of another will be prevented.

    516,    for an electrical connector with provision to isolate circuitry by
    serverance of a bridging element.

    518,    for a coupling part convertible to a different format by
    substitution of a different contact.


CLS 439/167
TXT Connector for power measuring meter:

    Electrical connector under 166 comprising the base of a watt-hour measuring
    device or adapted to engage and be electricaly connected with the base of a
    watt-hour measuring device.

    (1)     Note.  Watt-hour meters are somewhat standardized in overall
    configuration; i.e., are adapted to be mounted on the wall of a permanent
    structure, presenting a generally circular base, and having four, five or
    more vertically disposed blade-type contacts extending from the base
    thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146,    for a contact preventer or retractable cover part adapted to fit
    between coupled connectors (e.g., power measuring meter).

    508,    for a jumper adapted to be used with a power measuring meter.

    517,    for a power measuring meter coupling part, generally.


CLS 439/168
TXT Lamp or electron tube socket or base:

    Electrical connector under subclass 166 particularly adapted to detachably
    receive and electrically couple to a member intended to radiate light, or
    to a member including electrical amplifying or switching means utilizing an
    environment excluding, vacuum maintaining envelope; or comprising the
    electrical connector of such a light radiating member or amplifying or
    switch member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56+,    for a preformed panel circuit arrangement with an electrical
    connector for connection to a lamp or electron tube.

    182,    for a lamp or electron tube socket including arc suppressing or
    extinguishing means.

    220,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base adapted to engage a
    mating connector in alternative manners.

    226+,   for a coupling part to receive a fluorescent or neon lamp.

    280,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base having a resilient
    housing for sealing with a coupled connector.

    336,    for lamp or electron tube socket adapted to receive a cooperating
    lamp or tube by bayonet action, including a movement-actuating means or
    retaining means in addition to the contact of the socket.

    356,    for a lamp or electron tube socket including a retaining means
    comprising a finger or stretchable sleeve resiliently urged laterally of
    connection with a mating part.

    375,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base with a guiding means for
    mating of a coupling part.

    414,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base including a conductor
    against the cutting contact.

    419,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base including a conductor
    sheath penetrating contact adapted to cut to engage a first conductor and
    to also engage (and interconnect) a second conductor.

    541,    for a plural lamp or electron tube sockets including supporting
    means therefore.

    558,    for a lamp or electron tube socket extending into a supporting
    panel.

    602,    for a lamp  or electron tube socket or base including flexing
    insulation.

    611+,   for a connector or contact having vitreous-type envelope secured
    thereto (e.g., a base of a lamp or vacuum tube).

    661+,   for a plural contact coupling part including a screw-threaded
    contact and insulation other than the conductor sheath.


CLS 439/169
TXT Test probe:

    Electrical connector under subclass 166 comprising a generally rodlike
    member having an elongated portion adapted to be grasped by the hand of an
    operative for random manipulation thereof and having a contact* extending
    from the axial extremity thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The contact may comprise a coupling part* for interfitting
    with a particular mating part*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219,    for an alternatively connected test probe.

    482,    for a randomly manipulated test probe including a handle or
    distinct manipulating means.


CLS 439/170
TXT Coupling part:

    Coupling part under subclass 166 specially adapted to mate with a specific
    complementary electrical connector.

    (1)     Note.  See coupling part* in the glossary of this class.


CLS 439/171
TXT Including repositionable contact:

    Coupling part under subclass 170 including a contact* or a portion of a
    contact adapted to be moved to a different location with respect to the
    coupling part to allow it to interfit with a different, particularly
    configured, sized, or positioned cooperating connector; wherein the contact
    or the portion of a contact is adapted to be returned to the original
    position.

    (1)     Note.  The purpose of repositioning the contact of this subclass
    may be to adapt the device for use with mating parts of different
    configurations without use of an intermediate "adapter".

    (2)     Note.  Included herein is a connector having a repositionable
    contact for interfitting with variously configured mating parts of
    particular, assigned configurations, e.g., assigned for particular voltage
    or ampere rating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     for a coupling part having a repositionable contact to allow an
    operative to select different circuitry.

    103+,   for a male coupling part (plug) having a repositionable safety
    ground plug.

    174+,   for a connector, generally, having a repositionable contact.


CLS 439/172
TXT To nonuse or distinct use (e.g, male/female) position:

    Coupling part under subclass 171 wherein the contact or the portion of a
    contact is adapted to be moved (a) out of operating position, or (b) to a
    position such that the device functions differently.

    (1)     Note.  Under (b) of this subclass definition, a contact prong may
    be withdrawn into the device to then function as the contact of a female
    connector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for an electrical connector including a safety ground including a
    pivotable prong.


CLS 439/173
TXT To fit differently oriented contact:

    Coupling part under subclass 171 wherein the contact or the portion of a
    contact is adapted to be moved so that it will fit with a mating contact of
    different alignment than before such modification.


CLS 439/174
TXT Including repositionable contact:

    Electrical connector under subclass 166 including a contact* or a portion
    of a contact adapted to be moved to a different location with respect to
    the device to allow the device to interfit with a different, particularly
    configured, sized or positioned cooperating connector; wherein the contact
    or the portion of a contact is adapted to be returned to the original
    position.

    (1)     Note.  The purpose of repositioning the contact of this subclass
    may be to adapt the device for use with mating parts of different
    configurations without use of an intermediate "adapter".

    (2)     Note.  Included herein is a connector having a repositionable
    contact for interfitting with variously configured mating parts of
    particular, assigned configurations, e.g., assigned for particular voltage
    or ampere rating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     for a coupling part having a repositionable contact to allow an
    operative to select different circuitry.

    103+,   for a male coupling part (plug) having a repositionable safety
    ground prong.

    171+,   for a coupling part having a repositionable contact for
    interfitting with variously configured mating parts of particular, assigned
    configurations, e.g., assigned for a particular voltage or ampere rating.


CLS 439/175
TXT To fit different size contact:

    Electrical connector under subclass 74 wherein the contact or the portion
    of a contact is adapted to be moved so that it will fit with a cooperating
    contact of different cross-sectional area.


CLS 439/176
TXT FEMALE COUPLING PART CONVERTIBLE TO MALE COUPLING PART BY ADDITION OF PRONG:

    Electrical connector under the class definition comprising a coupling part*
    of the type including an opening with a contact* therein for receiving a
    projecting contact of a mating part*; wherein the device is particularly
    adapted to receive, as a part thereof, a prong to enable the device to
    function as a coupling part having a contact project therefrom to be
    received by an opening of a mating part.

    (1)     Note.  Without the added prong, the device of this subclass
    functions as a female coupling part, with the prong it functions as a male.
     The device does not function alternatively without addition or removal of
    the prong.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166+,   for an electrical connector convertible by internal change to
    selectivley cooperate with a different contact.

    177,    for a coupling part convertible to a distinct shape by addition of
    a nonremovable element or by removal of a nonreusable element.

    217+,   for a device having several types of  connector available without
    modification of the device, but structurally limited so that if one type is
    in use, use of another will be prevented.

    516,    for an electrical connector with provision to isolate circuitry by
    serverance of a bridging element.

    518,    for a coupling part convertible to a different format by
    substitution of a different contact.


CLS 439/177
TXT COUPLING PART CONVERTIBLE TO DISTINCT SHAPE BY ADDITION OF NONREMOVABLE
    ELEMENT OR BY REMOVAL OF NONREUSABLE ELEMENT:

    Electrical connector under the class definition comprising a coupling part*
    having a particular configuration adapted to have a member permanently
    added thereto to change the device to a different configuration or adapted
    to have a member permanently removed therefrom to change the device to a
    different configuration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166+,   for an electrical connector convertible by internal change to
    selectively cooperate with a different contact.

    176,    for a female coupling part convertible to a male coupling part by
    addition of prong.

    217+,   for a device having several types of connector available without
    modification of the device, but structurally limited so that if one type is
    in use, use of another will be prevented.

    516,    for an electrical connector with provision to isolate circuitry by
    severance of a bridging element.

    518,    for a coupling part convertible to a different format by
    substitution of a different contact.


CLS 439/178
TXT FLUENT CONDUCTING MATERIAL:

    Electrical connector under the class definition in which at least part of
    the electricity transmitting medium is a gas liquid or flowable solid
    during transmission of electrical current.

    (1)     Note.  Provision of an environment in which an arc passes through
    atmospheric gases (or vacuum) is included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for interrelated electrical connectors relatively movable during
    use having a liquid contact.

    190+,   for an electrical connector having a retainer or passageway for
    fluent material.

    485+,   for a connector in which fluent material dissipates heat, but does
    not serve to conduct electricity.

    519+,   for a connector in which fluent material restricts environmental
    effects, e.g., corrosion, but does not serve to conduct electricity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 9+ for a
    conductor utilizing a conductive fluid, generally.


CLS 439/179
TXT Liquid:

    Electrical connector under subclass 178 wherein the electricity
    transmitting medium is liquid during transmission of electrical current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for a connector with relatively moving parts having liquid contacts.

    199+,   for a connector including a retainer for liquid.


CLS 439/180
TXT CONTACT SEPARATION BY SNAP OR QUICK-BREAK ACTION:

    Electrical connector under the class definition having means which, during
    uncoupling from a cooperating connector, causes a contact* of the device to
    move suddenly with respect to the remainder of the device and out of
    engagement with and away from the contact of the cooperating connector.

    (1)     Note. In general, the contact movement is effected suddenly by
    release of stored energy.

    (2)     Note.  The movable contact herein is actuated when the connector as
    a whole is disengaged from the cooperating connector rather than in the
    manner of a switch or circuit breaker, i.e., make or break circuitry
    without uncoupling the connectors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    for an electrical connector with means to separate it from another
    electrical connector.

    266+,   for a coupling part having handle or means to move the contact
    thereof laterally to permit uncoupling.

    296+,   for an electrical connector with coupling movement-actuating means,
    generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, particularly subclasses 97.1+ and
    100.1+ for a mechanical movement involving a snap action.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses  402+ for a
    circuit maker or breaker having snap action.


CLS 439/181
TXT INCLUDING ARC SUPPRESSING OR EXTINGUISHING MEANS:

    Electrical connector under the class definition combined with or having
    means to inhibit electrical discharge or the effects of electrical
    discharge in the vicinity of the electrical joint forming means resulting
    from the making or breaking of the electrical connection.

    (1)     Note.  Provision to cause arcing at one location, e.g., at a spark
    gap, thereby inhibiting arcing at another location is included herein.

    (2)     Note.  Provision to prevent arcing from a contact to an adjacent
    contact on a connector, e.g., from one to another of the prongs of an
    electron tube, is considered to be an insulator rather than an arc
    suppressing or extinguishing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38+,    for a connector using magnetic means to suppress or extinguish an
    arc.

    88,     for an electrical connector including an elastomeric or nonmetallic
    conductive portion having inductive shielding or arc suppressing means.

    135+,   for a connector having cover means automatically moving upon
    separation of the connector from a mating part.

    180,    for a connector having means to move its contact away from the
    contact of a cooperating connector by a snap or quick-break action, which
    might incidentally thereby suppress the arc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    218,    High-Voltage Switches With Arc Preventing and Extinguishing
    Devices, subclasses 1+ for an arc suppressing or extinguishing means for a
    circuit maker or breaker.


CLS 439/182
TXT Lamp or electron tube socket:

    Electrical connector under subclass 181 comprising a coupling part*
    particularly adapted to detachably receive and electrically couple to a
    member intended to radiate light, or to a member including electrical
    switching means utilizing an environment excluding, vacuum maintaining
    envelope.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56+,    for a preformed panel circuit arrangement with an electrical
    connector for connection to a lamp or electron tube.

    168,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base convertibly by internal
    change to selectively cooperate with a different contact.

    220,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base adapted to engage a
    mating connector in alternative manners.

    226+,   for a coupling part to receive a fluoresent or neon lamp.

    280,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base having a resilient
    housing for sealing with a coupled connector.

    336,    for a lamp or electron tube socket adapted to receive a cooperating
    lamp or tube by bayonet action, including a movement-actuating means or
    retaining means in addition to the contact of the socket.

    356,    for a lamp or electron tube socket including a retaining means
    comprising a finger or stretchable sleeve resiliently urged laterally of
    connection with a mating part.

    375,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base with a guiding means for
    mating of a coupling part.

    414,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base including a conductor
    sheath penetrating contact and screw means to move the conductor against
    the cutting contact.

    419,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base including a conductor
    sheath penetrating contact adapted to cut to engage a first conductor and
    to also engage (and interconnect) a second conductor.


CLS 439/183
TXT By arc suppressing or extinguishing environment:

    Electrical connector under subclass 181 including provision of an
    atmosphere in the vicinity of the electrical joint forming means to inhibit
    electrical discharge or the effects of electrical discharge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186+,   for means for holding normal atmosphere or normal combustion
    by-products within a chamber or confined escape passage so that oxygen is
    consumed, thereby extinguishing any resulting fire.


CLS 439/184
TXT Gas:

    Electrical connector under subclass 183 wherein the atmosphere that
    inhibits electrical discharge or the effects of electrical discharge is in
    the gaseous state when so functioning.

    (1)     Note.  Accommodation of normal atmosphere or of normal combustion
    gaseous by products is not included herein.


CLS 439/185
TXT Gas accommodation by relatively moving parts:

    Electrical connector under subclass 184 including means to contain or
    provide controlled escape of gases from the vicinity of the joint forming
    means, wherein the containing or controlling means includes portions that
    move with respect to one another during such function.


CLS 439/186
TXT Contact encasing chamber:

    Electrical connector udner subclass 181 with an enclosure wherein any arc
    formed when making or breaking electrical connection is enclosed to thereby
    limit the effect of the arc.

    (1)     Note.  Mere encasement of a contact does not justify placement
    herein.  There must be specific, claimed disclosure that the encasement is
    to suppress or extinguish the arc formed when mating contacts are brought
    together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183+,   for an electrical connector, with specific environment for arc
    suppressing or extinguishing which may include a contact encasing chamber.


CLS 439/187
TXT Movable relative to contact:

    Electrical connector under subclass 186 wherein the contact* is
    repositioned during making or breaking of electrical continuity with
    respect to the arc enclosing means thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186,    for an electrical connector wherein a contact encasing chamber
    includes wall portions that are part of that connector and wall portions
    that are part of a mating connector and move during making or breaking of
    electrical connection with respect to the wall portions of the mating
    connector.


CLS 439/188
TXT HAVING CIRCUIT INTERRUPTING PROVISION EFFECTED BY MATING OR HAVING "DEAD"
    CONTACT ACTIVATED AFTER MATING:

    Electrical connector under the class definition (a) including a
    characteristic intended to modify the flow of electrical current upon
    making of the connection, other than that effected by the connection; or
    (b) including an electricity transmitting member intended to be not
    connected to a source of electrical current before mating with
    corresponding electricity transmitting member of a cooperating connector
    but be so connected after mating.

    (1)     Note.  Under clause (b) of this definition the "dead" contact may
    be actuated by sliding within the contactor to make engagement with another
    contact that is "live", i.e., charged with electrical current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    944+,   for a cross-reference art collection similar to this subclass, but
    limited to use with coaxial cable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, for an electrical
    connector assembly combined with a switch, generally, and especially
    subclasses 51+ for an electrical connector combined with a switch actuated
    upon application of the connector with a mating connector wherein the
    switch is remote from the connector assembly or is functional to actuate a
    distinct electrical circuit.  See the line expressed under section III of
    the definition of this class (Class 439).


CLS 439/189
TXT WITH OR COMPRISING REMOVABLE CIRCUIT MODIFYING ARRANGEMENT:

    Electrical connector under the class definition including two contacts*
    wherein a removable unitary member is intended to electrically connect
    those two contacts to each other; wherein the member is intended to
    electrically alter the current to the connector structure.

    (1)     Note.  The circuitry of the removable member may not be clearly set
    forth.  The structure of this subclass commonly is to be fitted with a
    bridging member to convert the circuitry of the device.

    (2)     Note.  A device to be used "selectively" with either of a plurality
    of jumpers or circuit arrangements is included herein.  Also, a device to
    receive a "key", coded for restrictive utilization is included herein, as
    is a device used to alter a motor for use with a 120 volt rather than a 240
    volt supply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500,    for an energy cell substitution device including plural contacts or
    for an electrical connector including support means for an energy cell.

    502+,   for a flaccid bridging conductor combined with a plurality of
    electrical connectors.

    507+,   for a rigid bridging conductor with a contact surface at each end.


CLS 439/190
TXT HAVING RETAINER OR PASSAGEWAY FOR FLUENT MATERIAL:

    Electrical connector under the class definition with a provision to (a)
    confine a flowable medium or (b) confine the flow of such a medium.

    (1)     Note.  A hydraulic drive is not considered to meet the limitations
    of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for interrelated electrical connectors relatively movable during
    use with means to apply lubricant or coolant.

    41,     for means to subject a portion of an electrical connection to
    negative pressure; i.e., to a vacuum.

    89,     for an electrical connector including an elastomeric or nonmetallic
    conductive, inductive shield or arc suppressing means.

    178+,   for similar structure in which the fluent material conducts
    electricity.

    207+,   for similar structure including a tubular component for confining
    an electrical cable.

    230,    for a coupling part to receive a fluorescent or neon lamp having
    sealing element or material for cooperation with a coupled lamp.

    271,    for an electrical connector with a sealing element or material for
    cooperation with a coupled connector, generally.

    283,    for a seal interfitting a coupled connector part housings.

    386+,   for a connector having a contact carried by flexible or resilient
    insulation and having a sealing joint between coupled parts.

    527+,   for a wall, plate or panel mounting or attaching means with a
    connector part sealed thereto.

    586+,   for a connector having a contact carried by flexible or resilient
    insulation and having a sealing joint between coupled parts.

    604+,   for a connector with an external cable or conductor embedded in
    insulative sealing material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, for an electrical
    conductor combined with provision for a fluid, not including a detachable
    electrical connector.


CLS 439/191
TXT Fluent material transmission line:

    Electrical connector under subclass 190 including a passageway along which
    the flowable medium is transported.


CLS 439/192
TXT Connector electrically joined to line:

    Electrical connector under subclass 191 wherein that electrical connector
    is in electrical communication with the means providing a passageway for a
    flowable medium.

    (1)     Note.  Attachment to the conduit is normally to maintain
    transmission of only so much current as required to maintain equal
    electrical potential between interconnected line components to thereby
    prevent formation of an arc between the components and to reduce corrosion
    of the components.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210,    for an electrical connector with a conduit or duct and means to
    join conduit, duct or conductor sections.


CLS 439/193
TXT For use with line heater:

    Electrical connector under subclass 191 to be used with a heating means
    (e.g., an electrical resistance heater) to raise the thermal level of the
    means providing the passageway.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 38 for the combination of a
    transmission line and an electrical heating means provided specifically to
    thaw material inside the line with or without an electrical connector.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 47 for a fluid
    transmission line combined with a conductor but lacking a claimed reference
    to an electrical connector.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 200+ for a fluid transmission line
    combined with an electrical heating device, with or without an electrical
    connector.


CLS 439/194
TXT Electrical connection within line:

    Electrical connector under subclass 191 wherein the means to make an
    electrical connection is physically positioned within the confines of the
    passageway for transmission of a flowable medium.


CLS 439/195
TXT Connector/line assembly coupled to mating connector/line assembly by
    movement about an axis less than 360_:

    Electrical connector under subclass 191 adapted to make both electrical
    contact and fluent material passageway connection with mating connector
    whereby such connection is effected by movement of the device relative to
    the mating connector about a pivot line less than a full revolution.


CLS 439/196
TXT Liquid material to dissipate, remove, or block the flow of heat:

    Electrical connector under subclass 190 wherein the flowable medium is in
    the liquid state and is for spreading, lowering the level of, or preventing
    transmission of thermal energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    485+,   for an electrical connector with provision to dissipate, remove, or
    block the flow of heat, generally.

    519+,   for an electrical connector with provision to restrict
    environmental effects, generally.


CLS 439/197
TXT For urging contact toward or away from mating contact:

    Electrical connector under subclass 190 with provision to bring pressure
    from the flowable medium onto the contact* thereof tending to move that
    contact with respect to other portions of the electrical connector cause
    that contact to make (or break) engagement with the contact of a mating
    part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    259+,   for a coupling part with actuating means urging the contact to move
    laterally with respect to the rest of the coupling part and toward a mating
    part.


CLS 439/198
TXT Gas retainer:

    Electrical connector under subclass 190 wherein the flowable medium is in
    the gaseous state while confined.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41+,    for provision to retain an electrical connector under negative
    pressure, i.e., under vacuum.


CLS 439/199
TXT Liquid retainer:

    Electrical connector under subclass 190 wherein the flowable medium is in
    the liquid state while confined.

    (1)     Note. A gelatinous material is considered to be in the liquid state
    only if it is retained in the manner of a liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179,    for a conductor in which liquid conducts electricity.

    190,    for provision to flush out unwanted material from a connection
    region by liquid material, without retention of the liquid.

    196,    for a connector in which liquid dissipates, removes or blocks the
    flow of heat.


CLS 439/200
TXT Impregnated material:

    Electrical connector under subclass 199 wherein the liquid medium is
    absorbed or held in place by a porous member.


CLS 439/201
TXT Coupling part having contact encompassed by liquid storage chamber:

    Electrical connector under subclass 199 comprising a coupling part* wherein
    the liquid medium is retained in an enclosed pocket surrounding the means
    for making an electricity transmitting joint.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a coupling part wherein the liquid medium
    surrounds the contact but does not necessarily engage the surface from
    which electrical current is transmitted to a mating part.


CLS 439/202
TXT Contact comprising tapered post or mating part (e.g., battery post):

    Coupling part under subclass 201 wherein the contact* is an elongated
    rodlike member having aconical end, or is a socket for receiving such a
    rodlike member, at which conical end is the surface for transmitting
    electrical current to a mating part* and at which the liquid is retained.


CLS 439/203
TXT Crimped end terminal:

    Electrical connector under subclass 199 wherein the liquid medium is
    located between a solid means for making an electricity transmitting joint
    and an electricity transmitting strandlike member or assembly, wherein both
    the solid means and the strandlike member or assembly having been
    subsequently secured together by distortion of the solid means.

    (1)     Note.  To be included herein an electrical connector must meet the
    definition of the class, i.e., must be detachable from a cooperating
    connector, generally at a point remote from the crimp.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 825+ and 753 for a process of or
    apparatus for attaching a conductor to a connector element wherein the
    joint is formed by a crimping or deforming operation.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 84+ for a
    conductor crimped to a mting part, generally.


CLS 439/204
TXT Encompassing wire:

    Electrical connector under subclass 199 including provision to enclose an
    electrical conductor in the liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and insulators, subclasses 8+ for a
    conductor encased in a liquid, without a detachable electrical connector.


CLS 439/205
TXT Passageway allowing escape of fluent material during mating:

    Electrical connector under subclass 190 with provision to permit movement
    of the flowable medium out of the vicinity of the mating face of the
    connector as the connector is brought into position with respect to a
    cooperating connector.


CLS 439/206
TXT Vent:

    Electrical connector under subclass 190 including provision to allow
    aeration of the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    485+,   for an electrical connector with cooling, generally.


CLS 439/207
TXT WITH CONDUIT OR DUCT:

    Electrical connector under the class definition combined with an elongate
    tubular casing of either circular or polygonal cross-section wherein the
    casing is distinct from the housing of the elctrical connector, is of
    indeterminate length and is for encasing an electricity transmitting member.

    (1)     Note.  The elongated tubular casing of this subclass may be of any
    cross-section; for example, it may be oval. Also the casing may be made of
    straight or curved section.  "Conduit" and "duct" are terms in the building
    trade.

    (2)     Note.  A cable sheath is not considered to be a "conduit or duct"
    for this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  The electricity transmitting member of this subclass may
    comprise a wire, a line cord, a cable, or a bus bar.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110+,   for structure that includes an elongated member for supporting an
    electrical connector at any point along its length and for a contact
    intended to be engagable at any point  along its length, wherein an
    electricity transmitting member may be housed.

    209,    Indented hereunder for an elongated tubular shell of decorative
    shape and indeterminate length for housing a row of connectors.

    892+,   for a connector encasing means that is distinct from the connector,
    generally.


CLS 439/208
TXT Enclosed conductor electrically connected thereto:

    Electrical connector under subclass 207 wherein the encased electricity
    transmitting member is  attached to the housing to transmit electrical
    current thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    for safety grounding to a pipe, rod or conduit.

    192,    for an electrical connector attached to a fluent material
    transmission line.


CLS 439/209
TXT Molding type (e.g., baseboard):

    Electrical connector under subclass 207 wherein the distinct housing is to
    be mounted on an otherwise finished product is of decorative value, and
    accordingly serves as a trim as well as an electric service means.

    (1)     Note.  The finished product of this subclass may be a building wall
    or an exterior panel or a vehicle.

    (2)     Note.  Concealment of electric wires is considered to be
    "decorative".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for an electric connector of the molding type including an
    uninterrupted contact.

    216,    for an electrical connector of the molding type not combined with a
    distinct conduit or duct.


CLS 439/210
TXT Means to join conduit, duct or conductor selections:

    Electrical connector under subclass 207 combined with or comprising a
    structural member intended to fit between a first and a second conductor to
    couple the housings together or to couple the conductor encased by one
    housing to the conductor encased by the other housing.


CLS 439/211
TXT Including receptacle:

    Electrical connector under the subclass 207 comprising a female coupling
    part* including a contact located within a recession.


CLS 439/212
TXT BUS DUCT:

    Electrical connector under the class definition comprising an elongated,
    reasonably uniform cross section, rigid metallic housing and a plurality of
    rigid metallic contacts (i.e., buses) extending therealong and spaced
    therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  "Bus duct" is an art term.

    (2)     Note.  A second housing of reasonably uniform cross-section
    connected at its end with the first housing is not considered to be
    "distinct" from the first and such a combination is included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for a bus duct including buses accessible at any point along their
    length.

    207+,   for an electrical connector combined with a distinct conductor
    encasing housing.


CLS 439/213
TXT Means to join bus ducts:

    Electrical connector under subclass 212 particularly adapted to connect a
    housing or conductor at its longitudinal extent to another such housing or
    conductor.


CLS 439/214
TXT COMPRISING COUPLING PART OF INDETERMINATE LENGTH LATERALLY OF CONNECTION:

    Electrical connector under the class definition comprising a coupling part*
    intended to mate with a specially shaped mating part* at a face thereof,
    which connector is of undefined dimension in at least one direction
    parallel to that face.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a lamp fixture consisting of a
    multiplicity of sockets set in a face thereof, with no lateral limit to the
    structure.  Also included herein is a multioutlet "baseboard" intended to
    be limited in length only by the dimension of the room wall on which it is
    to be custom fitted.

    (2)     Note.  An electrical connector of infinite length is included
    herein if it is intended to be coupled directly with another such connector
    which in turn is to be coupled directly to a third such connector, such
    that the resultant structure is of indefinite length.


CLS 439/215
TXT Included in prefabricated building panel (e.g., floor, ceiling, wall):

    Coupling part under subclass 214 combined with means forming a substantial
    portion of a generally planar space dividing member of an architectural
    structure wherein the device is a portion thereof.


CLS 439/216
TXT Molding type, (e.g., baseboard):

    Coupling part under subclass 214 wherein the housing is to be mounted on an
    otherwise finished product, is of decorative value, and accordingly serves
    as trim as well as an electric service means.

    (1)     Note.  The finished product of this subclass may be a building wall
    or an exterior panel of a vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for an electrical connector of the molding type including an
    uninterrupted contact.

    209,    for an electrical connector of the molding type combined with a
    distinct conduit or duct.


CLS 439/217
TXT ALTERNATIVELY CONNECTED:

    Electrical connector under the class definition including a connection face
    which is selectively usable at one time without rearrangement or alteration
    thereof (a) with a first cooperating connector of a first configuration or
    with a second cooperating connector that is of a different configuration,
    or (b) with a cooperating connector making electrical connection from a
    first direction or from a second, distinct direction.

    (1)     Note.  The "connection face" of this subclass refers to a particuar
    component of an electrical connector usually comprising a contact where
    connection may be made and is intended to restrict from this subclass a
    connector simply having a first face for making electrical connection with
    a first mating connector and a second face for making electrical connection
    wherein the first and second connections are independent one of the other.
    However, included in this subclass is a similar device wherein if the first
    mating connection is connected thereto, use of the second connection would
    be blocked from making connection by the presence of the first.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this and the indented subclasses, particularly
    subclass 218, is a coupling part* that accepts a mating part* from a first
    direction along a first axis or accepts a mating part from the opposite
    direction along the same axis.  Also included in this and the indented
    subclasses, particularly subclass 224, is a connector that is not a
    coupling part that accepts a cooperating connector from a first or a second
    direction, with one exception, i.e., NOT INCLUDED HEREIN is a noncoupling
    part connector that is accessible only from opposite directions along the
    same axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166+,   for an electrical connector convertible by internal change to
    selectively cooperate with a different contact.

    176,    for a female coupling part convertible to a male coupling part by
    addition of a prong.

    177,    for a coupling part convertible to a distinct shape by addition of
    a nonremovabe element or by removal of a nonreusable element.

    516,    for an electrical connector with provision to isolate circuitry by
    severance of a bridging element.

    518,    for a coupling part convertible to a different format by
    substitution of a different contact.


CLS 439/218
TXT Coupling part:

    Electrical connector under subclass 217 specially adapted to mate with a
    specific complementary electrical connector.

    (1)     Note.  See coupling part* in the glossary of this class.

    (2)     Note.  See (2) Note under the definition of subclass 217.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for an alternatively connected coupling part intending to bring a
    contact selectively into engagement with a first or a second mating contact.


CLS 439/219
TXT Test probe:

    Coupling part under subclass 218 comprising a generally rodlike member
    having an elongated portion adapted to be grasped by the hand of an
    operative for random manipulation thereof and having a contact* extending
    from the axial extremity thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The contact alone of this subclass may comprise a coupling
    part* for interfitting with a particular mating part*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169,    for a test probe convertible by internal change to selectively
    cooperate with a different contact.

    482,    for a randomly manipulated test probe including a handle or
    distinct manipulating means.


CLS 439/220
TXT Lamp or electron tube socket or base:

    Coupling part under subclass 218 particularly adapted to detachably receive
    and electrically couple to a member intended to radiate light, or to a
    member including electrical, amplifying or switching means utilizing an
    environment excluding vacuum maintaining envelope; or comprising the
    electrical connector of such a light radiating or switching member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56+,    for a preformed panel circuit arrangement with an electrical
    connector for connection to a lamp or electron tube.

    168,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base convertible by internal
    change to selectively cooperate with a different contact.

    182,    for a lamp or electron tube socket including arc suppresing or
    extinguishing means.

    226+,   for a coupling part to receive a fluorescent or neon lamp.

    280,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base having a resilient
    housing for sealing with a coupled connector.

    336,    for a lamp or electron tube socket adapted to receive a cooperating
    lamp or tube by bayonet action, including a movement-actuating means or
    retaining means in addition to the contact of the socket.

    356,    for a lamp or electron tube socket including a retaining means
    comprising a finger or stretchable sleeve resiliently urged laterally of
    connection with a mating part.

    375,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base with a guiding means for
    mating of a coupling part.

    414,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base including a conductor
    sheath pentrating contact and screw means to move the conductor against the
    cutting contact.

    419,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base including a conductor
    sheath penetrating contact adapted to cut to engage a first conductor and
    to also engage (and interconnect) a second conductor.

    541,    for plural lamp or electron tube sockets including supporting means
    therefor.

    558,    for a lamp or electron tube socket extending into a supporting
    panel.

    602,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base including flexing
    insulation.

    611+,   for a connector or contact having vitreous-type envelope secured
    thereto (e.g., a base of a lamp or vacuum tube).

    661+,   for a plural contact coupling part including a screw-threaded
    contact and insulation other than the conductor sheath.


CLS 439/221
TXT Contact comprising prong:

    Coupling part under subclass 218 including a male contact* adapted to enter
    a receptacle* and make electrical connection therein.


CLS 439/222
TXT Receptacle having distinct openings for distinct prongs:

    Coupling part under subclass 218 comprising a receptacle* including a
    contact located within a first recess therein for receipt of a male contact
    and including a contact within a second recess are constructed such that
    only a contact of a required characteristic with respect to the coupling
    part of which it is a part can interfit therewith.


CLS 439/223
TXT Receptacle for prong of first lateral dimension or for prong of second
    lateral dimension:

    Coupling part under subclass 218 comprising a receptacle* designed to
    receive a male contact of first cross-sectional shape or size; or to
    receive a male contact of a second cross-sectional shape or size.


CLS 439/224
TXT To receive contact from first direction or from second axially distinct
    direction:

    Electrical connector under subclass 217 adapted to engage an elongated
    cooperating connector positioned along a first predetermined axis and
    adapted to engage an elongated cooperating connector lying along a second
    predetermined axis that is not coextensive with the first axis.

    (1)     Note.  Not included herein is a terminal device to which a
    cooperating connector may be secured from an infinite number of directions
    (rather than from a finite number of distinct directions).  Also not
    included herein is a device for receiving a cooperating connector from
    directions exactly 180_ opposite.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218,    for a coupling part for receiving a mating part from a first
    direction or for receiving a coupling part from a second direction exactly
    180_ opposite.


CLS 439/225
TXT CONTACT TAP BETWEEN NORMALLY ENGAGED COUPLING PARTS:

    Electrical connector under the class definition for use with a coupling
    part* and its mating part* by fitting between the parts when they are mated
    to each other and make electrical connection therewith to modify electric
    current flow between the mated parts.

    (1)     Note.  "Modify electric current flow" includes utilization of
    electric power to drive another device and includes addition of power to
    the contacts of the mated parts.

    (2)     Note.  Grounding or shielding is not included in this definition.


CLS 439/226
TXT COUPLING PART TO RECEIVE FLUORESCENT OR NEON LAMP:

    Electrical connector under the class definition comprising a coupling part*
    particularly intended to be used to physically interfit with and supply
    electric current to an illumination device, which illuminating device
    includes means to ionize that gas (a) to cause the gas to activate a
    coating on the envelope and causes that coating to emit visible light, or
    (b) wherein the gas is neon to cause the gas to emit visible light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56+,    for a preformed panel circuit arrangement with an electrical
    connector for connection to a lamp or electric tube.

    168,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base convertible by internal
    change to selectively cooperate with a different  contact.

    182,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or including arc suppressing or
    extinguishing means.

    220,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base adapted to engage a
    mating connector in alternative manners.

    280,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base having a resilient
    housing for sealing with a coupled connector.

    336,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or adapted to receive a
    cooperating lamp or tube by bayonet action, including a movement-actuating
    means or retaining means in addition to the contact of the socket.

    356,    for a lamp or electron tube socket including a retaining means
    comprising a finger or stretchable sleeve resiliently urged laterally of
    connection with a mating part.

    375,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base with a guiding means for
    mating of coupling part.

    414,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base including a conductor
    sheath penetrating contact and screw means to move the conductor against
    the cutting contact.

    419,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base including a conductor
    sheath penetrating contact adapted to cut to engage a first conductor and
    to also engage (and interconnect) a second conductor.

    541,    for plural lamp or electron tube sockets including supporting means
    therefor.

    558,    for a lamp or electron tube socket extending into a supporting
    panel.

    602,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base including flexing
    insulation.

    611+,   for a connector or contact having vitreous-type envelope secured
    thereto (e.g., a base of a lamp or vacuum tube).

    661+,   for a plural contact coupling part including a screw-threaded
    contact and insulation other than the conductor sheath.


CLS 439/227
TXT Having curved tubular envelope:

    Coupling part under subclass 226 particularly adapted to supply electricity
    to an illuminating device wherein its tubular gas containing transparent
    container extends along a nonrectilinear way.


CLS 439/228
TXT Plural lamps:

    Coupling part under subclass 227 intended to supply electrical current to a
    first and to a second illumination device without removal of either
    illumination device therefrom.


CLS 439/229
TXT Circular lamp:

    Coupling part under subclass 227 wherein the tubular gas containing
    envelope extends along a circular way.


CLS 439/230
TXT With sealing element or material for cooperation with coupled lamp:

    Coupling part under subclass 226 combined with a member intended to be
    positioned during use between the connector and the illuminating device to
    which it transmits electrical current, which member is intended to isolate
    the contacts from foreign material in the environment (e.g., water or dust).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86+,    for an electrical connector including an  elastomeric or
    nonmetallic conductive, inductive shield or arc suppressing means.

    190+,   for similar sealing means used with an electrical connector with
    means for retaining or having a passageway for fluent material.

    271+,   for an electrical connector with a sealing element or material for
    cooperation with a coupled connector, generally.

    283,    for the sealed interfitting of coupled connector part housings.

    527+,   for a wall, plate or panel mounting or attaching means with a
    connector part sealed thereto.

    586+,   for a connector having a contact carried by flexible or resilient
    insulation and having sealing joint between coupled parts.

    604+,   for a connector with an external cable or conductor embedded in
    insulative sealing material.


CLS 439/231
TXT With contact for starting switch:

    Coupling part under subclass 226 combined with provision to transmit
    electrical energy to a switching device having a function to start
    ionization of the gas within the tubular envelope of the illuminating
    device.


CLS 439/232
TXT With additional retaining or locking means for coupled connector and lamp:

    Coupling part under subclass 226 combined with means to hold the coupling
    part in electrical current carrying relationship with the illuminating
    device or to secure another member which in turn holds the coupling part in
    electric current carrrying relationship with the illuminating device.


CLS 439/233
TXT Removable:

    Coupling part under subclass 232 wherein the means to hold the coupling
    part in current carrying relationship is detachable from the remainder
    thereof.


CLS 439/234
TXT Adjustably mounted:

    Coupling part under subclass 226 supported on other structure such that it
    can be repositioned thereupon.


CLS 439/235
TXT Plural lamps:

    Coupling part under subclass 226 intended to supply electrical current to a
    first and to a second illumination device without removal of either
    illumination device therefrom.


CLS 439/236
TXT Adapter:

    Coupling part under subclass 226, (a) for mating with a first mating part
    and including integrally therewith a second coupling part for mating with a
    second mating part to thereby connect together the first and second mating
    parts, wherein the first and second mating parts could not be
    interconnected directly; (b) for mating with a first mating part and
    including integrally therewith a plurality of second coupling part similar
    in configuration to the first mating part to effectively reposition the
    second mating part from the location of the first mating part if it were
    interfitted therewith.

    (1)     Note.  The coupling part of clause (a) allows a coupling part to be
    electrically connected to a physically noninterfitting mating part; the
    coupling part of clause (b) allows plural mating parts to be electrically
    connected to a single coupling part; and the coupling part of clause (c)
    effectively repositions a mating part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    for an adapter with safety grounding.

    119,    for an uninterrupted support rail or uninterrupted contact with an
    adapter.

    124,    for a candle-simulation type electrical connector comprising an
    adapter.

    300,    for an adapter retained in connection with a mating part by the
    presence of a distinct coupling part.

    323,    for an adapter with coupling part retaining means in addition to
    the contact comprising a movable threaded ring.

    365,    for an adapter with coupling retaining means in addition to the
    contact comprising a helically threaded member.

    638+,   for a member comprising two or more plural contact coupling parts
    with insulation other than a conductor sheath.


CLS 439/237
TXT Separately biased connector:

    Coupling part under subclass 226 mounted on another member and movable with
    respect thereto wherein the coupling part is yieldably urged in a direction
    with respect to the member on which it is movably mounted.


CLS 439/238
TXT Pivotable connector:

    Coupling part under subclass 237 movably with respect to the member on
    which it is mounted about an axis less than 360_.

    (1)     Note.  For placement in this subclass, a connector is considered to
    be moved about an axis, even if that axis is constantly changing, as a
    rocking movement or the movement of a member supported by a flexible,
    resilient blade.


CLS 439/239
TXT With provision for transverse receipt of lamp contact:

    Coupling part under subclass 226 intended to receive an illuminating device
    contact that extends in the direction parallel to the tubular illuminating
    device envelope by movement of the illuminating device perpendicular to
    that direction with respect to the coupling part.


CLS 439/240
TXT By rotation of lamp about axis:

    Coupling part under subclass 239 wherein the illuminating device is to be
    turned about its axis to effect the electrical connection.


CLS 439/241
TXT Contact comprising laterally resilient spring finger:

    Coupling part under subclass 240 wherein the contact is an elongated
    protuberance that is yieldable within its elastic limit normally with
    respect to the elongation.


CLS 439/242
TXT With provision for axial receipt of lamp contact:

    Coupling part under subclass 226 intended to receive an illuminating device
    contact that extends in the direction parallel to the tubular illuminating
    device envelope by movement of the illuminating device in the direction of
    the axis.


CLS 439/243
TXT Axially biased contact:

    Coupling part under subclass 242 wherein a contact is movable relative to
    the remainder of the coupling part in the direction parallel to the
    illuminating device envelope and is yieldably urged by a member stressed
    within its elastic limit in that direction.


CLS 439/244
TXT Coil spring with provision to utilize conductivity thereof:

    Coupling part under subclass 243 wherein the contact is yieldably urged by
    a helically wound resilient conductive member intended to transmit
    electrical current.


CLS 439/245
TXT COUPLING PART HAVING HELICALLY DISPOSED STRANDLIKE CONTACT:

    Electrical connector under the class definition, comprising a coupling
    part* having an elongated contact* formed about and along an axis for
    screwthread engagement with a screwlike contact of a mating part*


CLS 439/246
TXT SELF ALIGNING CONTACT:

    Electrical connector under the class definition having a contact* which is
    nonrigidly mounted upon the remainder of the electrical connector such that
    the said contact is permitted a certain freedom of movement (other than
    inherent resiliency) and is accordingly movable during the coupling motion
    with respect to the remainder of the connector.


CLS 439/247
TXT Contact mounted in floating nonconductive holder:

    Electrical connector under subclass 246 including support structure for the
    contact, which support structure is not intended to transmit electricity
    and which structure is mounted for movement with the contact and with
    respect to the remainder of the electrical connector.


CLS 439/248
TXT Connector including housing or panel to support holder:

    Electrical connector under subclass 247 having structure to support the
    contact and associated structure against gravity while permitting the
    certain freedom of movement of the contact with respect thereto, which
    structure is constructed (a) to encase the contact; or, (b) as a planar
    member extending in the plane of the freedom of movement.


CLS 439/249
TXT Receptacle having two directly opposed contact arms and open sides between
    arms:

    Electrical connector under subclass 246 including a U-shaped member having
    legs comprising a contact* or a pair of electrically insulated contacts
    adapted to grip and make electrical contact with a connector held
    therebetween.


CLS 439/250
TXT To receive fuse:

    Electrical connector under subclass 249 intended to be used to grip and
    make electrical contact with a conductive member having portion intended to
    melt under excess current flow to thereby terminate that current flow.


CLS 439/251
TXT To receive rigid bar type connector, e.g., busbar:

    Electrical connector under subclass 249 intended to be used to grip and
    make electrical contact with an elongated rigid member having no function
    other than making electrical contact.


CLS 439/252
TXT Tubular socket:

    Electrical connector under subclass 246 wherein the contact is cylindrical
    in shape and is intended to axially receive a mating contact internally
    along the axis thereof.


CLS 439/253
TXT SCREW COUPLING PART ENGAGED OR DISENGAGED WITHOUT ROTARY MOTION:

    Electrical connector under the class definition comprising a coupling part*
    having a rib helical about an axis parallel to the direction of connector
    coupling action, for coupling with a mating part by a helical motion and
    with helical interfitting with respect thereto, and also having provision
    to permit coupling or uncoupling with the mating part other than by helical
    motion.

    (1)     Note.  A member for interfitting with the helical rib of a mating
    connector is considered to be a helical rib because such a member functions
    as a helical rib.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein is a device adapted to be coupled to a
    mating connector by a screwlike operation having means to disable the
    helical rib to allow disconnection by a longitudinal pulling motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    352,    for an electrical coupling part including a resiliently urged
    retaining finger or stretchable sleeve with additional means to prevent
    unlatching.


CLS 439/254
TXT Having radially movable threaded means:

    Coupling part under subclass 253 wherein the helical rib is moved radially
    into or out of screwlike engagement with the mating part to permit coupling
    with the mating part other than by helical motion.

    (1)     Note.  A member for interfitting with the helical rib of a mating
    connector is considered to be a helical rib because such a member functions
    as a helical rib.


CLS 439/255
TXT By axially moving wedge or cam:

    Coupling part under subcalss 254, (a) including a tapering member adapted
    to move in the direction of connector coupling action, (i.e., parallel to
    the helical axis) to engage and force the helical rib to move radially into
    or out of screwlike engagement with the mating adapted to turn about an
    axis normal to the direction of connector coupling action and having a
    surface extending progressively away from its axis to engage and force the
    helical ribs to move radially into or with the mating part.


CLS 439/256
TXT Biased toward mating thread:

    Coupling part under subclass 254 wherein the rib is resiliently urged
    toward the interfitting rib of the mating part.


CLS 439/257
TXT Socket:

    Coupling part under subclass 256 comprising a female part having a movable
    helical rib.


CLS 439/258
TXT COUPLING PART WITH LATCHING MEANS AND TETHER OR EXPLOSIVE TO UNLATCH FROM
    MATING PART:

    Electrical connector under the class definition comprising a coupling part*
    having means to exert more than frictional resistance to effect separation
    of the device from connection with an electrically coupled part and having
    (a) a pliant member capable of exerting only force in tension for being
    pulled by an operative to make the separation resisting means ineffective
    or (b) explosive means to make the separation resisting means ineffective.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    352,    for an electrical coupling part including a resiliently urged
    retaining finger or stretchable sleeve with additional means to prevent
    unlatching.


CLS 439/259
TXT COUPLING PART WITH ACTUATING MEANS URGING CONTACT TO MOVE LATERALLY WITH
    RESPECT TO REST OF COUPLING PART AND TOWARD MATING PART:

    Electrical connector under the class definition comprising a coupling part*
    including means to exert pressure on a contact* thereof tending to move
    that contact generally normally of the coupling axis with respect to other
    portions of the electrical connector to cause that contact to make
    engagement with the contact of a mating part*.

    (1)     Note.  The "means to urge" of this subclass is part of the device,
    such as a cam or wedge, rather than a spring, a gravity utilizing device,
    or a handle with no force modifying linkage.  Note further that it is not
    necessary that the contact actually move.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein is a "zero insertion withdrawal force"
    connector in which that connector is brought into position with the mating
    part and subsequently the contacts are caused to move into engagement
    position with the mating part and subsequently the contacts are caused to
    move into engagement with each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    for a coupling part including actuating means to urge a contact
    toward a mating contact for interfitting with uninterrupted support rail or
    contact.

    197,    for an electrical connector with provision to utilize fluid
    pressure to urge a contact toward or away from a mating contact.

    252,    for a tubular socket having a self aligning contact and having a
    contractile contact biasing band.


CLS 439/260
TXT Having open slot for receiving preformed panel circuit arrangement or tape
    cable:

    Coupling part under subclass 259 including an elongated opening intended
    (a) to receive a sheetlike member and make electrical connection with a
    portion thereof or (b) to receive an electricity transmitting cable
    including more than three conductors wherein all the conductors are
    arranged in the same plane extending therealong and make electrical contact
    with a portion thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55+,    for a preformed panel circuit arrangement including an electrical
    connector.

    267,    for a coupling part having a handle or means to move a contact
    laterally to permit uncoupling, having an open slot for receiving a panel
    circuit arrangement.

    492+,   for an electrical connector for use with a tape cable, generally.


CLS 439/261
TXT Pivotable means, one portion actuating contact surface, another portion
    retaining coupling part:

    Coupling part under subclass 259 wherein the means to urge the contact to
    move is mounted for movement about an axis with respect to the remainder of
    the coupling part and includes a first surface portion adapted to urge the
    contact to move and a second surface adapted to secure the coupling part to
    a mating part.


CLS 439/262
TXT Urging stacked contacts to move with respect to rest of coupling part:

    Coupling part under subclass 259 including a plurality of contacts mounted
    in alignment such that when one is urged to move with respect to the
    remainder of the coupling part it will serve to move the next one, so that
    when one is first urged by the means, then the next is urged by the means
    via the first.


CLS 439/263
TXT Contractile receptacle:

    Coupling part under subclass 259 comprising a female coupling part having
    an opening to receive a male coupling part including means to vary the size
    or position of the opening while urging the contact to move.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a device wherein a single contact is
    actuated to grip a mating contact as well as a device wherein a plurality
    of contacts are actuated to grip an assemblage of contacts against the
    reactive force of a similar opposing assemblage of contacts.


CLS 439/264
TXT For dual inline coupling part, e.g., DIP:

    Coupling part under subclass 263 intended to be used with a mating part
    having three or more contacts in rectilinear alignment on one lateral
    margin and three or more contacts in rectilinear alignment on the opposite
    lateral margin.

    (1)     Note.  The device of this subclass is to be used with a very small
    panel circuit arrangement on which circuit elements are preplaced and fixed
    including a first and a second straight row of three or more contacts on
    each of two opposite marginal extremities.

    (2)     Note.  The member with which the coupling part of this subclass is
    to be used includes circuitry that is integrated as a package in which the
    circuitry is not readily accessible.

    (3)     Note.  "Very small panel circuit arrangement", implies that the
    member is a prefabricated sheetlike part on which circuit elements are
    preplaced and fixed (i.e., a printed circuit) and that circuitry is so
    small that, if it were exposed, its details could not ordinarily be seen by
    the naked eye.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for preformed panel circuit arrangement with provision to conduct
    electricity from panel circuit to another panel circuit including a dual
    inline package (DIP).

    330+,   for an electrical connector with coupling movement-actuating means
    or retaining means in addition to contact of coupling part for receiving a
    dual inline pckage (DIP).

    525,    for an electrical connector for a dual inline package generally
    (DIP).

    526,    for an aligning means for a dual inline package (DIP).


CLS 439/265
TXT Expandable contact or spreadable contacts:

    Coupling part under subclass 259 including (a) a generally rodlike contact
    adapted to engage a mating contact by axial movement with respect thereto
    and having a variable cross-section to prevent removal thereof from the
    mating contact part, or (b) first and second laterally spaced contacts
    adapted to be moved away from each other and toward the contact  mating
    part.


CLS 439/266
TXT COUPLING PART HAVING HANDLE OR MEANS TO MOVE CONTACT LATERALLY TO PERMIT
    UNCOUPLING:

    Electrical connector under the class definition comprising a coupling part*
    adapted to be brought out of cooperative engagement with a mating part* by
    movement with respect thereto in a first direction, wherein a contact* or a
    portion of a contact of the device must be moved in a second direction with
    respect to the remainder of the device normal to the first direction;
    wherein the device includes (a) a portion adapted to be engaged by the hand
    of an operative, or (b) a force multiplying device, whereby moving force is
    exerted on the contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180,    for an electrical connector with provision to effect movement if
    its contact from a mating contact by snap or quickbreak action.


CLS 439/267
TXT Having open slot for receiving panel circuit arrangement:

    Coupling part under subclass 266 including an elongated opening intended to
    receive a sheetlike member and make electrical connection with a portion
    thereof; wherein the second direction of contact movement is normal to the
    plane of the sheetlike member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55+,    for a preformed panel circuit arrangment including an electrical
    connector.

    260,    for a coupling part with actuating means urging its contact to move
    laterally with respect to rest of coupling part and toward mating part
    having an open slot for receiving preformed panel circuit arrangement or
    tape cable.


CLS 439/268
TXT Expandable, prong receiving socket:

    Coupling part under subclass 266 wherein the contact* comprises a female
    member for matingly receiving and making electrical connection with a
    rodlike contact wherein the female member is intended to be expanded to
    allow removal of the mating rod like contact.


CLS 439/269.1
TXT To move contact with respect to similar contact:

    Coupling part under subclass 266 including a first and a second contact*
    that are (a) electrically insulated from each other, (b) of substantially
    identical configuration, and (c) adapted to be moved with respect to each
    other.


CLS 439/269.2
TXT Comprising laterally movable prong or socket attached to flaccid conductor:

    Coupling part under subclass 269.1 wherein the first or second contact is
    particularly adapted to be received by a confining, receptaclelike contact
    or comprises such a receptaclelike contact; in either case, it is intended
    to be used with a generally elongated, strandlike member, that is readily
    yieldable transversely of its length to the force of gravity, for
    transmitting electricity to the transmitting joint.


CLS 439/270
TXT Movable latching prong or latch on prong:

    Coupling part under subclass 226 including a rodlike contact* (a) adapted
    to be moved with respect to the remainder of the coupling part to project
    and interfit with a mating contact and thereby selectively permit
    separation therefrom, or (b) including a portion movable with respect to
    other portions of that contact to project and interfit with a mating
    contact and thereby selectively permit separation therefrom.


CLS 439/271
TXT WITH SEALING ELEMENT OR MATERIAL FOR COOPERATION WITH COUPLED CONNECTOR
    (E.G., GASKET):

    Electrical connector under the class definition combined with an additional
    discrete part or mass of filler substance provided to fit between a face of
    that electrical connector and a corresponding face of a cooperating
    connector to securely close off the faces and the interior of the mated
    assembly from moisture, dust, or other foreign matter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89,     for an electrical connector including an elastomeric or nonmetallic
    conductive, inductive shield or arc supporting means.

    205,    for similar sealing means used with an electrical connector with
    means for retaining or having a passageway for fluent material.

    230,    for a coupling part to receive a fluorescent or neon lamp having
    sealing element or material for cooperation with a coupled lamp.

    283,    for the sealed interfitting of coupled connector part housings.

    527+,   for a wall, plate or panel mounting or attaching means with a
    connector part sealed thereto.

    586+,   for a connector having a contact carried by flexible or resilient
    insulation and having a sealing joint between coupled parts.

    604,    for a connector with an external cable or conductor embedded in
    insulative sealing material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 602+ for a static, contact seal intended for use on a
    pipe, conduit, or cable.


CLS 439/272
TXT Sealing element having cross section that is neither circular nor
    rectangular:

    Electrical connector under subclass 271 including an additional discrete
    part which, when viewed in a plane along its longitudinal centerline with
    respect to the direction of coupling engagement of that electrical
    connector with another connector, is of a shape other than one defined by a
    curved everywhere equidistant from a fixed point or by a parallelogram
    which includes a right angle.

    (1)     Note.  A square cross-section is considered to be rectangular.


CLS 439/273
TXT Tapered cross-section:

    Electrical connector under subclass 272 wherein the additional discrete
    part which, when viewed in a plane along its longitudinal centerline, is
    wedge shaped.


CLS 439/274
TXT Combined with distinct cable sheath sealing element or material:

    Electrical connector under subclass 272 wherein the end thereof remote from
    the end having a face mating with another connector has another discrete
    member or mass of filler substance which tightly engages the insulative
    covering surrounding an electricity transmitting strandlike member or
    assembly to prevent exposure of the interior of the electrical connector to
    moisture, dust, or other foreign matter.


CLS 439/275
TXT Combined with distinct cable sheath sealing element or material:

    Electrical connector under subclass 271 wherein the end thereof remote from
    the end having a face mating with another connector has another discrete
    member or mass of filler substance which tightly engages the insulative
    covering surrounding an electricity transmitting strandlike member or
    assembly to prevent exposure of the interior of the device to moisture,
    dust, or other foreign matter.


CLS 439/276
TXT Including chamber for contact potting:

    Electrical connector under subclass 271 including housing for enclosing a
    contact and for retaining a solid substance which is to have been pressed
    or flowed thereinto prior to or during electrical connection.

    (1)     Note.  The packing material usually serves to prevent exposure of
    the coupled connector parts to moisture, dust, or other foreign matter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    604+,   for an external conductor or cable molded in insulative sealing
    material.


CLS 439/277
TXT With helically threaded coupling movement-actuating means or retaining
    means in addition to contact of coupling part:

    Electrical connector under subclass 271 comprising a coupling part* having
    (a) separate means to forcibly bring together into mating relation the
    interfitting or matching parts of the coupling part and a mating part*
    interfitting therewith, or (b) means separate from the current carrying
    components of the coupling part and a mating part to maintain the
    interengagement of such parts operable independently of or in addition to
    the coupling motion; including a helically ribbed portion adapted to
    interfit with a portion of the mating part by relative rotation and
    corresponding axial advance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    309,    for an electrical connector with coupling movement-actuating means
    or retaining means in addition to contact of a coupling part including a
    female threaded coupling part and an unauthorized separation preventer.


CLS 439/278
TXT HAVING RESILIENT HOUSING FOR SEALING WITH COUPLED CONNECTOR:

    Electrical connector under the class definition provided with an external
    shell member made of pliable material adapted to yield within its elastic
    limit to abuttingly mate with another such device and securely close the
    abutting faces and the interior of the mated assembly from moisture, dust,
    or other foreign matter.


CLS 439/279
TXT Combined with distinct cable sheath sealing element or material:

    Element connector under subclass 278 wherein the end having a face mating
    with another connector has another discrete member or mass of filler
    substance which tightly engages the insulative covering surrounding an
    electricity transmitting strandlike member or assembly to prevent exposure
    of the interior of the device to moisture, dust, or other foreign matter.


CLS 439/280
TXT Connector comprising lamp or electron tube socket or base:

    Electrical connector under subclass 278 particularly adapted to detachably
    receive and electrically couple to a member intended to radiate light, or
    to a member including electrical amplifying or switching means utilizing an
    environment comprising the electrical connector of such a light radiating
    means or amplifying or switching member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56+,    for a preformed panel circuit arrangement wtih an electrical
    connector for connection to a lamp or electron tube.

    168,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base convertible by internal
    change to selectively cooperate with a different contact.

    182,    for a lamp or electron tube socket including arc suppressing or
    extinguishing means.

    220,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base adapted to engage a
    mating connector in alternative manners.

    226+,   for a coupling part to receive a fluorescent or neon lamp.

    336,    for a lamp or electron tube socket adapted to receive a cooperating
    lamp or tube by bayonet action, including a movement-actuating means or
    retaining means in addition to the contact of the socket.

    356,    for a lamp or electron tube socket including a retaining means
    comprising a finger or stretchable sleeve resiliently urged laterally of
    connection with a mating part.

    375,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base with a guiding means for
    mating of coupling part.

    414,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base including a conductor
    sheath penetrating contact and screw means to move the conductor against
    the cutting contact.

    419,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base including a conductor
    sheath penetrating contact adapted to cut to engage a first conductor and
    to also engage (and interconnect) a second conductor.

    541,    for plural lamp or electron tube sockets including supporting means
    therefor.

    558,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base including flexing
    insulation.

    602,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base including insulation.

    611+,   for a connector or contact having vitreous-type envelope secured
    thereto (e.g., a base of a lamp or vacuum tube).

    661+,   for a plural contact coupling part including a screw-threaded
    contact and insulation other than the conductor sheath.


CLS 439/281
TXT Having interengageable sealing extension:

    Electrical connector under subclass 278 wherein the external shell member
    includes a portion extending in the direction to which the electrical
    connector is intended to be mated with another such electical connector,
    which portion is intended to fit into a receiving pocket of the mating
    connector and perform the closing function by tightly fitting a generally
    cylindrical wall of the mating connector.


CLS 439/282
TXT Housing comprising resilient latching means:

    Electrical connector under subclass 278 wherein the external shell member
    adapted to yield within its elastic limit also is intended to interfit with
    the mating device and require flexing thereof for separation from the
    mating member.

    (1)     Note.  The resilient housing of this subclass may snap over a
    protuberance of the mating member; or may be forced out of its normal
    position to lock to the mating member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    350+,   for resilient latching structure wherein there is no disclosure of
    sealing.


CLS 439/283
TXT COUPLED CONNECTOR TO SEALINGLY FIT WITH FIRST CONNECTOR:

    Electrical connector under the class definition including a contact
    carrying body which when mated with another contact carrying body of a
    mating connector acts to securely close off the juncture of or the abutting
    or interfitting cojoined faces of the mated contact carrying bodies and the
    interior of the mated assembly thus formed from moisture, dust, or other
    foreign matter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89,     for an electrical connector including an elastomeric or nonmetallic
    conductive, inductive shield or arc suppressing means.

    190,    for similar sealing means with an electrical connector with means
    for retaining or having a passageway for fluent material.

    230,    for a coupling part to receive a fluorescent or neon lamp having
    sealing element or material for cooperation with a coupled lamp.

    271,    for coupled connector parts with a distinct sealing element
    therebetween.

    527+,   for a wall, plate or panel mounting or attaching means with a
    connector part sealed thereto.

    586+,   for a connector having a contact carried by flexible or resilient
    insulation and having a sealing joint between coupled parts.

    606,    for a connector part with a external cable or conductor embedded in
    a molded insulative sealing material.


CLS 439/284
TXT ADAPTED TO COOPERATE WITH DUPLICATE CONNECTOR:

    Electrical connector under the class definition adapted to be electrical
    connected to another electrical connector under the class definition
    wherein the first and second electrical connectors are identical in
    configuration in the interfitting portions thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The overall structure of the first and second devices of
    this subclass is such that they appear to be exactly alike, but this
    subclass is intended to include those connectors that are somewhat
    different from each other; for example, a first connector with a latch
    hinges to it and a cooperating connector with a cam to receive the latch.


CLS 439/285
TXT Sequentially connected contacts, e.g., zipper type:

    Coupling part under subclass 284 including a row of contacts connected to a
    pliable member to allow the contacts to be brought into interlocking
    engagement with a similar row of contacts on another pliable member by the
    action of camming device slideable along the respect rows of contacts.

    (1)     Note.  The device of this subclass has the appearance of a slide
    fastener used on a garment.


CLS 439/286
TXT Engaged by axial and pivotal movements (e.g., bayonet):

    Electrical connector under subclass 284 having a projecting contact member
    extending along an axis wherein coupling is effected by movement relative
    to the other connector along that axis and by movement about an axis
    parallel to that axis.


CLS 439/287
TXT Engaged by lateral movement:

    Electrical connector under subclass 284 having a projecting contact*
    extending along an axis adapted to be coupled to another such electrical
    connector by movement of the contact member with respect thereto
    transversely of that axis.


CLS 439/288
TXT Pivotal:

    Electrical connector under subclass 287 wherein the contact is moved about
    an axis parallel to its lateral extension during coupling of the connector
    to another electrical connector.


CLS 439/289
TXT Butt coupling:

    Electrical connector under subclass 284 including a housing presenting a
    generally planar face to a corresponding housing of the other electrical
    connector and including a contact member* having a contact surface
    generally coplanar therewith.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a connector having a contact intended to
    engage the cooperating connector with a directly, squarely abutting face.


CLS 439/290
TXT Contact intermeshable with duplicate mating contact:

    Electrical connector under subclass 284 including a contact* of a
    configuration to interfit with the contact of a cooperating connector such
    that a portion of the mating contact is gripped between opposed surfaces
    thereof; wherein the mating contact is identical in configuration thereto.


CLS 439/291
TXT Plural, electrically distinct contacts:

    Electrical connector under subclass 290 including a first contact* and a
    second contact that are electrically insulated from each other.


CLS 439/292
TXT With coupling movement retaining means in addition to contact of coupling
    part:

    Electrical connector under subclass 284 comprising a coupling part* having
    means separate from the current carrying elements thereof to maintain
    interengagement with a mating part.

    (1)     Note.  The overall structure of the device of this subclass and its
    mating part is such that they appear to be exactly alike, but, for example,
    this subclass is intended to include a connector having a latch hinged
    thereto, while the mating part includes a cam to be engaged by the latch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144,    for an electrical connector with a contact preventer or retractable
    cover part movable about an axis with connector retaining means in addition
    to the contact thereof.

    147,    for an electrical connector with a contact preventer or retractable
    cover part with connector retaining means in addition to the contact
    thereof.

    310+,   for a coupling part with coupling movement retaining means in
    addition to the contact thereof, with distinct movement-actuating means to
    move the coupling part axially.

    345+,   for an electrical connector with coupling retaining means in
    addition to the contact thereof, generally.


CLS 439/293
TXT Resilient:

    Coupling part under subclass 292 wherein the maintaining means is intended
    to be stressed within its elastic limit to hold the connectors together.


CLS 439/294
TXT With relatively rotatable movement-actuating or retaining ring:

    Coupling part under subclass 292 wherein the maintaining means comprises an
    encompassing member thereabout which turns about an axis with respect to
    the remainder thereof wherein the encompassing member is intended to engage
    a portion of a mating part to either bring or hold the coupling part and
    the mating part together.


CLS 439/295
TXT Resiliently biased contact:

    Electrical connector under subclass 284 including a contact* intended to be
    stressed within its elastic limit to effect a tight fit with a contact of
    the other device.


CLS 439/296
TXT WITH COUPLING MOVEMENT-ACTUATING MEANS OR RETAINING MEANS IN ADDITION TO
    CONTACT OF COUPLING PART:

    Electrical connector under the class definition comprising a coupling part*
    having (a) separate means to forcibly bring interfitting or matching parts
    of the coupling part and a mating part* interfitting therewith, i.e., to
    effect electrical connection; or (b) means separate from the current
    carrying components of the coupling part and a mating part to maintain the
    interengagement of such parts, the parts being operable independently of or
    in addition to the coupling motion, i.e., to maintain electrical connection.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses provide only for a device
    of the "coupling part* type, i.e., a device having a base or body, usually
    of insulation, carrying an electrical contact and constituting and
    connector which requires some complementary connector with a matching or
    interfitting conductive element.  This does not include a mere binding
    post, clip, cord or cable terminal or the like involving only the immediate
    connection between a wire, cable or bus bar and some other conductive part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116+,   for an uninterrupted support rail or uninterrupted contact with
    coupling movement-actuating means in addition to contact of coupling part.

    144,    for an electrical connector having a contact preventer or
    retractable cover part that is movable about an axis, combined with
    retaining means.

    152+,   for an electrical connector with a coupling separator.

    449+,   for means to prevent force on a conductor from being transmitted to
    an electrical connector.


CLS 439/297
TXT With guiding means for removable automobile radio or record player:

    Coupling part under subclass 296 for use with a removable information
    receiving or transmitting device or with a sound reproducing device,
    wherein the coupling part has a surface for directing the device to move in
    a prescribed path with respect to the coupling part as electrical
    connection between the coupling part and the device is effected, and
    wherein the coupling part is to be used in a motor vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for an electrical connector that is part of a preformed panel
    circuit arrangement with aguide for directing panel circuit movement.

    374,    for an electric connector with a guiding means to effect mating,
    generally.

    752.5,  for an insulated connector body with guiding means for an inserted
    contact.


CLS 439/298
TXT Including resilient latching retaining means:

    Coupling part under subclass 297 including a member that is yieldable
    within its elastic limit intended to engage the mating part and positively
    maintain electrical connection therewith.


CLS 439/299
TXT With coupling part retained in connection with mating part by presence of
    distinct coupling part:

    Coupling part under subclass 296 adapted to interfit with a mating part*
    and to be used in conjunction with a second coupling part which, when
    connected to a corresponding second mating part, physically blocks the
    first coupling part against removal from its mating part.


CLS 439/300
TXT Adapter:

    Coupling part under subclass 299 (a) for mating with a first mating part
    and including integrally therewith a second coupling part for mating with a
    second mating part to thereby connect together the first and second mating
    parts, wherein the first and second mating parts could not be
    interconnected directly; (b) for mating with a first mating part and
    including integrally therewith a plurality of second coupling parts similar
    in configuration to the first mating part, for mating with plural other
    mating parts to provide multiple access to the first mating part; or (c)
    for mating with a first mating part and including integrally therewith a
    second coupling part similar in configurtion to the first mating part to
    effectively reposition the second mating part from the location of the
    first mating part if it were interfitted therewith.

    (1)     Note.  The coupling part of clause (a) allows a coupling a part to
    be electrically connected to a physically noninterfitting mating part; the
    coupling part of clause (b) allows plural mating parts to be electrically
    connected to a single coupling part; and the coupling part of clause (c)
    effectively repositions a mating part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    for an adapter with safety grounding.

    119,    for an uninterrupted support rail or uninterrupted contact with an
    adapter.

    124,    for a candle simulation type electrical connector comprising an
    adapter.

    236,    for an adapter to receive a fluorescent or neon lamp.

    323,    for an adapter with coupling part retaining means in addition to
    the contact comprising a movable thread ring.

    365,    for an adapter with coupling retaining means in addition to the
    contact comprising a helically threaded member.

    638+,   for a member comprising two or more plural contact coupling parts
    with insulation other than a conductor sheath.


CLS 439/301
TXT Retaining means requiring destruction of element before separation:

    Coupling part under subclass 296 adapted to couple with a mating part and
    including provision such that the parts cannot be uncoupled without
    breaking or otherwise destroying an element associated therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133+,   for an electrical connector with a device, e.g., a key or
    combination lock, to prevent connection.


CLS 439/302
TXT Threaded coupling part:

    Coupling part under subclass 301 including a helically ribbed portion
    adapted to interfit with a portion of the mating part by relative rotation
    and corresponding axial advance thereof.


CLS 439/303
TXT Required destruction of lamp envelope:

    Coupling part under subclass 302 for use with or comprising the electrical
    connector of an illumination device including provision to require breakage
    of the glass bulb associated with the illumination device before the
    electrical connection can be broken.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a theft preventing device that eliminates
    theft by making any lamp removed unusable.


CLS 439/304
TXT Including lock for retaining means (e.g., key or combination lock or
    requiring "special" tool):

    Coupling part under subclass 296 wherein the means to maintain
    interengagement with a mating part requires utilization of a special
    manipulation of a component thereof to permit such removal of the coupling
    part from a mating part.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a locking device requiring use of a key,
    a combination lock or other device requiring use of an uncommon tool to
    permit uncoupling.  Also included herein is a device requiring presence of
    a particular sound (e.g., a voice command) or a particular anatomical
    feature (e.g., particular fingerprint).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133+,   for locking structure for preventing coupling of coupled connectors.


CLS 439/305
TXT Magnetically operated latch:

    Coupling part under subclass 304 wherein the means to maintain
    interengagement includes a member of iron or ironlike composition adapted
    to be moved to release the retaining means by magnetic attraction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for an electrical connector including magnet structure.


CLS 439/306
TXT Threaded coupling part:

    Coupling part under subclass 304 including a helically ribbed portion
    adapted to interfit with a portion of the mating part by relative rotation
    and corresponding axial advance.

    (1)     Note.  In this and the indented subclasses, the means to forcibly
    bring the parts together or the means to maintain interengagement may
    comprise structure actually stamped from a contact and still integral
    therewith wherein the intended use of that structure is to hold the parts
    together such that a specially designed implement or a special manipulation
    is required for separation of the parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277,    for a threaded coupling part with a sealing element or material for
    cooperation with a coupled connector.

    665,    for an insulated, plural contact electrical connector having an
    irregular, interrupted or discontinuous screw thread contact; wherein such
    irregularities are to increase friction with the groove of a mating
    connector.

    735,    for an insulated electrical connector having an irregular,
    interrupted or discontinuous screw thread contact; wherein such
    irregularities are to increase friction with groove of a mating connector.


CLS 439/307
TXT Having freely rotatable component to prevent unthreading:

    Coupling part under subclass 306 in which electrical connection is
    maintained by allowing a component on the helically-ribbed portion to turn
    with respect to the helically-ribbed portion when in blocking condition,
    such that rotation thereof does not effect separation from the mating part.

    (1)     Note.  Herein the coupling part and its mating part are prevented
    from being separated by the presence of the freely rotatable component
    since there is no way to hold the helically ribbed portion to turn with
    respect to the mating part.

    (2)     Note.  The device of this subclass is intended to be a provision to
    prevent coupling separation and not be a coupling with parts relatively
    movable during use while preserving circuit continuity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for similar structure including relatively rotatable components
    intended to transmit electrical current while being rotated with respect to
    each other.


CLS 439/308
TXT Retaining means entirely exterior of coupling part:

    Coupling part under subclass 306 wherein the means to maintain
    interengagment is distinct from and positioned outside the coupling part.


CLS 439/309
TXT Retaining means comprising part of female coupling part:

    Coupling part under subclass 306 having a recessed contact intended to be
    received by a projecting contact of the mating part and wherein the means
    to maintain interengagement is a part of the coupling part having a
    recessed contact.


CLS 439/310
TXT Retaining means with distinct movement-actuating means to move coupling
    part axially:

    Coupling part under subclass 296 having both (a) means to effect electrical
    connection, and (b) means to maintain electrical connection which is
    separate from and independantly operable from the means to effect
    electrical connection and separate from the current carrying parts thereof;
    wherein the coupling action is generally in a straight line parallel to the
    longitudinal extent of the coupling part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144,    for an electrical connector with a contact preventer or retractable
    cover part movable about an axis with connector retaining means in addition
    to the contact thereof.

    147,    for an electrical connector with a contact preventer or retractable
    cover part with connector retaining means in addition to the contact
    thereof.

    292+,   for an electircal connector adapted to cooperate with a duplicate
    electrical connector with connector retaining means in addition to the
    contact thereof.

    345+,   for an electrical connector with coupling retaining means in
    addition to the contact thereof, generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, for an electrical switch
    generally having a contact controlled for movement along a fixed path.
    However, a device that is basically an electrical connector will not be
    excluded from this class (Class 439) by the presence of a contact that is
    movable with respect thereto.  Specifically, a connector may include a
    first contact fixed mounted therein and a second contact movably mounted
    therein, such that upon engagement by the contact of a mating connector
    with the movable contact, it will move into engagement with the fixed
    contact, electrically coupling the three contacts together.  To distinguish
    the connector with the movable contact of this subclass, note that for
    inclusion herein the electrical connection is normally made as a function
    of the physical uniting of two connectors; whereas in the device of Class
    200 connection and disconnection is normally made without physical
    separation of the encasing structure.


CLS 439/311
TXT For bayonet (breech) type locking ring:

    Coupling part under subclass 310 wherein the means to maintain electrical
    connection is rotatable relative to the coupling part or mating part and
    engages a lug on the other part to secure the parts together upon partial
    rotation of the means about a pivot parallel to the longitudinal extent of
    the coupling part.


CLS 439/312
TXT Coupling part with relatively pivotable concentric movement-actuating or
    retaining ring:

    Coupling  part under subclass 296 having an encompassing member thereabout
    which turns about an axis parallel to the longitudinal extent thereof and
    with respect thereto, wherein the encompassing member is intended to engage
    a portion of a mating part to either effect or maintain electrical
    connection.


CLS 439/313
TXT Coupling part having appurtenant means for supporting other structure:

    Coupling part under subclass 312 combined with structure to hold against
    gravity structure in addition to the coupling part.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is an electrical coupling part and
    additional housing structure fixedly attached thereto intended to support
    another structure such as a lamp.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein is an electrical coupling part and a hook
    for supporting a flexible suspension means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    529+,   for an electrical coupling part with support means therefor,
    including appurtenant means for supporting other structure; and see the
    search notes thereunder for other electrical connectors having such support
    structure.


CLS 439/314
TXT Retaining bayonet:

    Coupling part under subclass 312 wherein the encompassing member is
    intended to interfit with the mating part by moving first axially and then
    rotatably with respect to the mating part to engage a cooperating lug on
    the mating part.

    (1)     Note.  Under the definition, one coupling part may move into
    engagement with a mating part, the mating part having an annular latching
    component which is then rotated to engage a lug on the coupling part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for a preformed panel circuit arrangement including a receptacle
    for a lamp or electron tube with connection effected by movement of the
    lamp or tube about its axis.

    118,    for a bayonet coupling part movable about its axis with coupling
    movement-actuating means or retaining means in addition to the contact
    thereof with an uninterrupted support rail or uninterrupted contact.

    332+,   for a bayonet coupling part with coupling movement-actuating means
    or retaining means in addition to the contact of the coupling part.


CLS 439/315
TXT Having coupling indicating indicia or signal:

    Coupling part under subclass 314 including as a part thereof, indicating
    markings or an audible or visual indicator intended to designate completion
    of coupling or retaining operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    488+,   for an electrical connector with indicating or identifying
    provision, generally.


CLS 439/316
TXT Bayonet lug on axially extending finger:

    Coupling part under subclass 314 wherein the encompassing member includes a
    protuberance for interfitting with the mating part, extending laterally
    from an elongated extension aligned generally parallel to the axial extent
    of the coupling part.


CLS 439/317
TXT With means to move ring:

    Coupling part under subclass 314 combined with means to engage and effect
    repositioning of the encompassing member about its axis.

    (1)     Note.  A biasing provision, e.g., a spring, is not considered to be
    a means to "effect repositioning" herein.


CLS 439/318
TXT With means to prevent bayonet release:

    Coupling part under subclass 314 combined with means to physically block
    removal of the coupling part from the mating part by preventing either
    rotary or axial movement of the parts with respect to each other.

    (1)     Note.  A spring biasing a component to prevent accidental
    uncoupling is not included herein.


CLS 439/319
TXT With spring to longitudinally bias movement-actuating or retaining ring:

    Coupling part under subclass 314 combined with means to be stressed within
    its elastic limit and yieldably urge the encompassing member in the
    direction parallel to its axis.


CLS 439/320
TXT Threaded ring or ring adapted to engage threaded mating part:

    Coupling part under subclass 312 wherein the encompassing member includes a
    helically ribbed surface intended to mate with a corresponding surface of
    the mating part; or wherein the encompassing member includes a portion
    intended to mate with a helically ribbed surface of the mating part; so
    that the parts are drawn or held together by rotation of the encompassing
    member.


CLS 439/321
TXT With means to prevent unthreading:

    Coupling part under subclass 320 combined with provision to block the
    encompassing member against rotating with respect to the mating part after
    connection has been established.


CLS 439/322
TXT Coupling part having concentric contacts:

    Coupling part under subclass 320 including a first contact surface and a
    second contact surface, each of which is circular about a common axis at a
    cross-section therethrough.


CLS 439/323
TXT Adapter:

    Coupling part under subclass 320 (a) for mating with a first mating part
    and including integrally therewith a second mating part to thereby connect
    together the first and second mating parts, wherein the first and second
    mating parts could not be interconnected directly; (b) for mating with a
    first mating part including integrally therewith a plurality of second
    coupling parts similar in configuration to the first mating part, for
    mating with plural other mating parts to provide multiple access to the
    first mating part; or (c) a first coupling part for mating with a first
    mating part and including integrally therewith a second coupling part
    similar in configuration to the first mating part to effectively reposition
    the second mating part from the location of the first mating part if it
    were interfit therewith.

    (1)     Note.  The coupling part of clause (a) allows a coupling part to be
    electrically connected to a physically noninterfitting mating part; the
    coupling part of clause (b) allows plural mating parts to be electrically
    connected to a single coupling part; and the coupling part of clause (c)
    effectively repositions a mating part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    for an adapter with safety grounding

    119,    for an uninterrupted support rail or uninterrupted contact with an
    adapter.

    124,    for a candle-simulation type electrical connector comprising an
    adapter.

    236,    for an adapter to receive a fluorescent or neon lamp.

    300,    for an adapter retained in connection with a mating part by the
    presence of a distinct coupling part.

    365,    for an adapter with coupling retaining means in addition to the
    contact comprising a helically threaded member.

    638+,   for a member comprising two or more plural contact coupling parts
    with insulation other than a conductor sheath.


CLS 439/324
TXT Male contact pin with blockable retaining means at tip, e.g., Modrey:

    Coupling part under subclass 296 comprising a rodlike male member including
    a base extending from a conductor and an exposed extremity having means to
    maintain interengagement with a mating part located at that extremity,
    further having means to physically prevent movement of the retaining means
    to an inactive position.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a device commonly referred as a "Modrey"
    type pin.


CLS 439/325
TXT Coupling part for receiving edge of planar board moving parallel to plane:

    Coupling part under subclass 296 particularly adapted to receive a lateral
    extremity of a rigid sheetlike mating part adapted to move when making
    electrical connection therewith in a direction along the flat extent
    thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55+,    for a connector comprising a part of or combined with a rigid
    sheetlike member.


CLS 439/326
TXT With angular mating:

    Coupling part under subclass 325 wherein the mating is to be by a dual
    movement, first along the flat extent of the sheetlike mating part and then
    about an axis parallel to the flat extent.


CLS 439/327
TXT Retaining means exterior of slot:

    Coupling part under subclass 325 including means to maintain electrical
    connection that is adapted to engage the sheetlike mating part away from
    the received lateral extremity thereof.


CLS 439/328
TXT Fingerlike grasping means comprising portion of coupling part:

    Coupling part under subclass 327 wherein the means to maintain electrical
    connection is generally elongated and is considered to be a part of the
    coupling part.

    (1)     Note.  A fingerlike retaining means that is first applied to the
    coupling part to become a part thereof and then, after coupling, applied to
    the mating part is included herein; a fingerlike retaining part that is
    snapped over the assembly of the coupling and mating parts is not included
    herein.


CLS 439/329
TXT For direct connection to a flexible tape or printed circuit board:

    Coupling part under subclass 296 intended to be used with and make contact
    with a sheetlike member that is either (a) elongated and pliable or (b) is
    generally rigid, and includes an electrical conductor extending in a
    direction of the sheetlike extent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55+,    for an electrical connector comprising or combined with a preformed
    panel circuit arrangement, e.g., a printed circuit board.

    492+,   for an electrical connector including or for use with a tape cable.


CLS 439/330
TXT For dual inline package (DIP):

    Coupling part under subclass 296 intended to be used with very small panel
    circuit arrangement on which circuit elements are preplaced and fixed
    including a first and a second straight row of three or more contacts on
    each of two opposite marginal extremities.

    (1)     Note.  The member with which the coupling part of this subclass is
    to be used includes circuitry that is integrated as a package in which the
    circuitry is not readily accessible.

    (2)     Note.  "Very small panel circuit arrangement", implies that the
    member is a prefabricated sheetlike part on which circuit elements are
    preplaced and fixed (i.e., a printed circuit) and that circuitry is so
    small that, if it were exposed, its details could not ordinarily be seen by
    the naked eye.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for a connector comprising part of or combined with a rigid
    sheetlike member, generally.

    70,     for a preformed panel circuit arrangement with provision to conduct
    electricity from panel circuit to another panel circuit.

    264,    for a coupling part with actuating means urging contact to move
    laterally with respect to rest of coupling part and toward mating part
    comprising a contractile receptacle

    525,    for an electrical connector for a dual inline package (DIP),
    generally.

    526,    for an aligning means for a dual inline package (DIP).


CLS 439/331
TXT Movement-actuating or retaining means comprises cover press:

    Coupling part under subclass 330 including means to effect electrical
    connector which means is adapted to be superposed over the planar member
    and exert force simultaneously on the contacts of the member along each row
    of the contacts.


CLS 439/332
TXT Bayonet coupling part movable about its axis:

    Coupling part under subclass 296 designed to be brought into interfitting
    relationship with the mating part* by a first movement along its greatest
    axial extent and then by a movement about the central axis of the coupling
    part with respect to the mating part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for a preformed panel circuit arrangement including a receptacle
    for a lamp or electron tube with connection effected by movement of the
    lamp or tube about its axis.

    118,    for a bayonet coupling part movable about its axis with coupling
    movement-actuating means or retaining means in addition to the contact
    thereof with an uninterrupted support rail or uninterrupted contact.

    314+,   for a coupling part with a retaining bayonet that is a relatively
    pivotable concentric movement-actuating or retaining ring.


CLS 439/333
TXT With distinct means to secure movement-actuating or retaining means against
    movement:

    Coupling part under subclass 332 combined with structure to block the means
    to effect or maintain electrical connection.


CLS 439/334
TXT Coupling part including appurtenant means for supporting other structure:

    Coupling part under subclass 332 combined with structure to hold against
    gravity structure in addition to the coupling part.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is an electrical coupling part and
    additional housing structure fixedly attached thereto intended to support
    another structure such as a lamp.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein is an electrical connector and a hook for
    supporting flexible suspension means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    529,    for an electrical coupling part with supporting means therefor,
    including appurtenant means for supporting other structure; and see the
    search notes thereunder for other electrical connectors having such support
    structure.


CLS 439/335
TXT Comprising cylindrical shell having lug receiving slot:

    Coupling part under subclass 332 including a tubular portion having a
    portion cut out or recessed along its axis to receive and guide
    protuberances of the mating part.

    (1)     Note.  The cylindrical shell herein may comprise either a male or
    female portion of a coupling part.


CLS 439/336
TXT Lamp or electron tube socket:

    Coupling part under subclass 335 particularly adapted to detachably receive
    and electrically couple to a member intended to radiate light, or to a
    member including electrical amplifying or switching means utilizing an
    environment excluding, vacuum maintaining envelope.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56+,    for a preformed panel circuit arrangement with an electrical
    connector for connection to a lamp or electron tube.

    168,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base convertible by internal
    change to selectively cooperate with a different contact.

    182,    for a lamp or electron tube socket including arc suppressing or
    extinguishing means.

    220,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base adapted to engage a
    mating connector in alternative manners.

    226+,   for a coupling part to receive a fluorescent or neon lamp.

    280,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base having a resilient
    housing for sealing with a coupled connector.

    356,    for a lamp or electron tube socket including a retaining means
    comprising a finger or stretchable sleeve resiliently urged laterally of
    connection with a mating part.

    375,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base with a guiding means for
    mating of a coupling part.

    414,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base including a conductor
    sheath penetrating contact and screw means to move the conductor against
    the cutting contact.

    419,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base including a conducto
    sheath penetrating contact adapted to cut to engage a first conductor and
    to also engage (and interconnect) a second conductor.

    541,    for plural lamp or electron tube sockets including supporting means
    therefor.

    558,    for a lamp or electron tube socket extending into a supporting
    panel.

    602,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base including flexing
    insulation.

    611+,   for a connector or contact having vitreous-type envelope secured
    thereto (e.g., a base of a lamp or vacuum tube).

    661+,   for a plural contact coupling part including a screw-threaded
    contact and insulation other than the conductor sheath.

    699.2,  for a plural-contact electrical connector with insulation other
    than the conductor sheath particularly adapted to receive a lamp.


CLS 439/337
TXT Having axially extending bayonet contact:

    Coupling part under subclass 332 wherein an electricity conductor member
    for making electrical contact elongated along the coupling direction and is
    shaped for interfitting with cooperating structure of the mating part to
    prevent separation thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is an electrical connector having a contact
    for interlocking with noncontact structure of the mating part; and an
    electrical contact with a nonconducting portion for holding it in
    engagement with a mating part and with a contact for interfitting with the
    contact of the mating part.


CLS 439/338
TXT Including movement of coupling part about axis:

    Coupling part under subclass 296 intended to be brought into interfitting
    relationship with the mating part by a movement about the central axis of
    the coupling part with respect to the mating part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for a preformed panel circuit arrangement including a receptacle
    for a lamp or electron tube with connection effected by movement of the
    lamp or tube about its axis.

    312+,   for a coupling part with relatively pivotable concentric movement
    actuating or retaining ring in addition to the contact thereof.


CLS 439/339
TXT Threaded coupling part:

    Coupling part under subclass 338 to be brought into interfitting
    relationship with the mating part by a simultaneous movement about and
    along the central axis of the coupling part with respect to the mating part.


CLS 439/340
TXT With socket contact transversely engaging male threaded part:

    Coupling part under subclass 339 wherein either that part or the mating
    part is a male member having a helical ridge shaped contact extending along
    a tubular wall thereof and wherein the cooperating part includes a contact
    member adapted to engage that helical ridge shaped contact at only a
    portion thereof while other portions are engaged by conductive structure
    for bringing or holding the coupling part and the mating part together.


CLS 439/341
TXT Pivotal movement:

    Coupling part under subclass 338 wherein relative movement thereof with
    respect to the mating part is restricted to less than 360_.


CLS 439/342
TXT Including compound movement of coupling part:

    Coupling part under subclass 296 intended to be brought into interfitting
    relationship with the mating part by a first movement and then by a second
    movement that is distinct from the first.


CLS 439/343
TXT Including appurtenant means for supporting other structure:

    Coupling part under subclass 342 combined with structure to hold against
    gravity structure in addition to the coupling part.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is an electrical coupling part and
    additional housing structure fixedly attached thereto intended to support
    another structure such as a lamp.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein is an electrical coupling part and a hook
    for supporting flexible suspension means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    529,    for an electrical coupling part with supporting means therefor,
    including appurtenant means for supporting other structure; and see the
    search notes thereunder for other electrical connectors having such support
    structure.


CLS 439/344
TXT Having push-pull contacts spaced along only one planar side wall transverse
    to longitudinal engagement axis (e.g., telephone jack or plug):

    Coupling part under subclass 296 adapted to engage or disengage a mating
    part by pure rectilinear movement relative thereto; including a contact
    carrying planar surface extending in the direction of coupling movement;
    wherein not more than one plurality of contacts are spaced along a straight
    line on the planar surface perpendicular to the direction of coupling
    movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    676,    for similar structure lacking a latching means other than the
    contact.


CLS 439/345
TXT Retaining means:

    Coupling part under subclass 296 having means separate from the current
    carrying elements thereof to maintain interengagment with a mating part*,
    i.e., to maintain electrical connection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144,    for an electrical connector with a contact preventer or retractable
    cover part movable about an axis with connector retaining means in addition
    to the contact thereof.

    147,    for an electrical connector with a contact preventer or retractable
    cover part with connector retaining means in addition to the contact
    thereof.

    292+,   for an electrical connector adapted to cooperate with a duplicate
    electrical connector with connector retaining means in addition to the
    contact thereof.

    310+,   for a coupling part with coupling movement retaining means in
    addition to the contact thereof, with distinct movement-actuating means to
    move the coupling part axially.


CLS 439/346
TXT Adapted to engage contact of mating part:

    Coupling part under subclass 345 wherein the means to maintain electrical
    connection is a nonconducting member adapted to hold to the conductive
    contact* of the other part.

    (1)     Note.  The retaining engagement is nonconductive.


CLS 439/347
TXT Laterally moving slide:

    Coupling part under subclass 345 wherein the means to maintain electrical
    connection moves transversely with respect to the longitudinal movement of
    coupling action and the means is rigid in the portion engaging the mating
    part.

    (1)     Note. Included herein is a laterally sliding plate as well as a
    laterally sliding pin.


CLS 439/348
TXT Laterally moving roller or ball:

    Coupling part under subclass 345 wherein the means to maintain electrical
    connection moves transversely with respect to the longitudinal movement of
    coupling action and the means includes a portion engaging the mating part
    that is circular in cross-section or spherical and is allowed to turn about
    its axis when mating is effected.


CLS 439/349
TXT Toroidal band urged radially of connection or adapted to be compressed for
    retention, e.g., O-ring:

    Coupling part under subclass 345 wherein the means to maintain electrical
    connection has the shape of a tube curved upon itself into a ring and is
    adapted to function for maintaining interengagement by being resiliently
    urged toward or away from the center of the ring or by being resiliently
    urged toward the center of the tubular configuration.

    (1)     Note.  The "tube" of this subclass may be circular or rectangular,
    but must be of such configuration that force on one part is transmitted to
    other parts of the tubular cross-section, as compared to a sleeve wherein
    one portion can be forced to move without affecting other portions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252,    for a self-aligning contact formed in a tubular configuration
    biased towards its axis by a contractile band.


CLS 439/350
TXT Finger or stretchable sleeve resiliently urged laterally of connection:

    Coupling part under subclass 345 wherein the means to maintain electrical
    connection has the shape of (a) an elongated protuberance adapted to flex
    within its elastic limit transversely of its longitudinal extent to
    grippingly engage the mating part; or (b) a tube adapted to stretch within
    its elastic limit outwardly of its central axis to grippingly engage the
    mating part.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is movement of the finger about the axis of
    a circular connector as well as radially.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    282,    for an electrical connector having a resilient housing for sealing
    with a coupled connector wherein the housing comprises a resilient latching
    means.


CLS 439/351
TXT Coupling part having appurtenant means for supporting other structure:

    Coupling part under subclass 350 combined with structure to hold against
    gravity structure in addition to the coupling part.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is an electrical coupling part and
    additional housing structure fixedly attached thereto.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein is an electrical coupling part and a hook
    for supporting flexible suspension means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    529,    for an electrical coupling part with supporting means therefor,
    including appurtenant means for supporting other structure; and see the
    search notes thereunder for other electrical connectors having such support
    structure.


CLS 439/352
TXT With additional means to cause or prevent unlatching:

    Coupling part under subclass 350 combined with structure to engage the
    resilient member to effect release thereof from engagement with the mating
    part, or to effect positive securement of the coupling part to a mating
    part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    253,    for similar structure having a screw coupling part adapted to be
    engaged or disengaged without rotary motion.

    258,    for similar structure including a tether to unlatch from a mating
    part.


CLS 439/353
TXT Finger inwardly biased during coupling or uncoupling:

    Coupling part under subclass 350 wherein the elongated member is moved
    radially toward the center of the coupling part against its elastic bias
    when going into or out of coupling engagement with a mating part.


CLS 439/354
TXT Rearwardly extending finger:

    Coupling part under subclass 353 wherein the elongated protuberance is
    attached to the coupling part such that, as the mating occurs, the portion
    of the protuberance that flexes is advanced of the portion in engagement
    with the mating part.


CLS 439/355
TXT Plural independent coupling parts:

    Coupling part under subclass 350 including a first coupling part* for
    interfitting with a mating part* and a second coupling part for
    interfitting at the same time with a second mating part wherein the
    interfitting of one is not dependent on the interfitting of the other.


CLS 439/356
TXT Coupling part comprising lamp or electron tube socket:

    Coupling part under subclass 350 intended to receive a male portion of an
    illumination device or of a device having electrical amplifying or
    switching mechanism in an evacuated environment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56+,    for a preformed panel circuit arrangement with an electrical
    connector for connection to a lamp or electron tube.

    168,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base convertible by internal
    change to selectively cooperate with a different contact.

    182,    for a lamp or electron tube socket including arc suppressing or
    extinguishing means.

    220,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base adapted to engage a
    mating connector in alternative manners.

    226+,   for a coupling part to receive a fluorescent or neon lamp.

    280,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base having a resilient
    housing for sealing with a coupled connector.

    336,    for a lamp or electron tube socket adapted to receive a cooperating
    lamp or tube by bayonet action, including a movement-actuating means or
    retaining means in addition to the contact of the socket.

    375,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base with a guiding means for
    mating of a coupling part.

    414,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base including a conductor
    sheath penetrating contact and screw means to move the conductor against
    the cutting contact.

    419,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base including a conductor
    sheath penetrating contact adapted to cut to engage a first conductor and
    to also engage (and interconnect) a second conductor.

    541,    for plural lamp or electron tube sockets including supporting means
    therefor.

    558,    for a lamp or electron tube socket extending into a supporting
    panel.

    602,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base including flexing
    insulation.

    611+,   for a connector or contact having vitreous-type envelope secured
    thereto (e.g., a base of a lamp or vacuum tube).

    661+,   for a plural contact coupling part including a screw-threaded
    contact and insulation other than the conductor sheath.


CLS 439/357
TXT Resilient finger:

    Coupling part under subclass 350 wherein the means to maintain electrical
    connection has the shape of an elongated protuberance adapted to flex
    within its elastic limit transversely of its longitudinal extent to
    grippingly engage the mating part.


CLS 439/358
TXT With graspable portion:

    Coupling part under subclass 357 wherein the elongated protuberance is
    provided with a portion intended to be engaged by the hand of an operator.


CLS 439/359
TXT Retaining means comprising helically threaded member:

    Coupling part under subclass 345 wherein the means to maintain electrical
    connection is generally tube or rodlike and has a rib extending continually
    about and along its axis for interengagement with another member so that
    relative rotation effects longitudinal movement between the tube or rodlike
    means and the other member.


CLS 439/360
TXT For lamp or electron tube:

    Coupling part under subclass 359 particularly adapted to detachably receive
    and electrically couple to a member intended to radiate light, or to a
    member including electrical switching means utilizing an environment
    excluding, vacuum maintaining envelope.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56+,    for a preformed panel circuit arrangement with an electrical
    connector for connection to a lamp or electron tube.

    168,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base convertible by internal
    change to selectively cooperate with a different contact.

    182,    for a lamp or electron tube socket including arc suppressing or
    extinguishing means.

    220,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base adapted to engage a
    mating connector in alternative manners.

    226+,   for a coupling part to receive a fluorescent or neon lamp.

    280,    for a  lamp or electron tube socket or base having a resilient
    housing for sealing with a coupled connector.

    336,    for a lamp or electron tube socket adapted to receive a cooperating
    lamp or tube by bayonet action, including a movement-actuating means or
    retaining means in addition to the contact of the socket.

    375,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base with a guiding means for
    mating of a coupling part.

    414,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base including a conductor
    sheath penetrating contact and screw means to move the conductor against
    the cutting contact.

    419,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base including a conductor
    sheath penetrating contact adapted to cut to engage a first conductor and
    to also engage (and interconnect) a second conductor.

    541,    for a plural lamp or electron tube sockets including supporting
    means thereof.

    558,    for a lamp or electron tube socket extending into a supporting
    panel.

    602,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base including flexing
    insulation.

    611+,   for a connector or contact having vitreous-type envelope secured
    thereto (e.g., a base of a lamp or vacuum tube).

    661+,   for a plural contact coupling part including a screw-threaded
    contact and insulation other than the conductor sheath.


CLS 439/361
TXT Including appurtenant means for supporting other structure:

    Coupling part under subclass 359 combined with structure to hold against
    gravity structure in addition to the coupling part.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is an electrical coupling part and
    additional housing structure fixedly attached thereto.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein is an electrical coupling part and a hook
    for supporting a flexible suspension means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    529,    for an electrical coupling part with supporting means therefor,
    including appurtenant means for supporting other structure; and see the
    search notes thereunder for other electrical connectors having such support
    structure.


CLS 439/362
TXT Parallel to connection:

    Coupling part under subclass 359 wherein electrical engagement with a
    mating part is effected along a straight path and wherein the axis of the
    tube or rodlike maintaining means extends in the same direction as that
    path.


CLS 439/363
TXT For retaining tubular conductor in electrical contact:

    Coupling part under subclass 362 including a conductor for carrying
    electricity away from the coupling part comprising an elongated shell-like
    member to be held directly in contact with the contact surface of the
    mating part.


CLS 439/364
TXT Passing centrally through coupling part:

    Coupling part under subclass 362 wherein the axis of the tube or rodlike
    retaining means passes through the center of the coupling part.

    (1)     Note.  A point intermediate a pair of coupling parts (e.g., a
    duplex outlet) is not considered to be central of the coupling part.


CLS 439/365
TXT Adapter:

    Coupling part under subclass 362 (a) for mating with a first mating part
    and including integrally therewith a second coupling part for mating with a
    second mating part to thereby connect together the first and second mating
    parts, wherein the first and second mating parts could not be
    interconnected directly; (b) for mating with a first mating part and
    including integrally therewith a plurality of second coupling parts similar
    in configuration to the first mating part; for mating with plural other
    mating parts to provide multiple access to the first mating part; or (c)
    for mating with a first mating part and including integrally therewith a
    second coupling part similar in configuration to the first mating part to
    effectively reposition the second mating part from the location of the
    first mating part if it were interfitting therewith.

    (1)     Note.  The coupling part of clause (a) allows a coupling part to be
    electrically connected to a physically noninterfitting mating part; the
    coupling part of clause (b) allows plural mating parts to be electrically
    connected to a single coupling part; and the coupling part of clause (c)
    effectively repositions a mating part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    for an adapter with safety grounding.

    119,    for an uninterrupted support rail or uninterrupted contact with an
    adapter.

    124,    for a candle simulation type electrical connector comprising an
    adapter.

    236,    for an adapter to receive a fluorescent or neon lamp.

    300,    for an adapter retained in connection with a mating part by the
    presence of a distinct coupling part.

    323,    for an adapter with coupling part retaining means in addition to
    the contact comprising a movable threaded ring.

    638+,   for a member comprising two or more plural contact coupling parts
    with insulation other than a conductor sheath.


CLS 439/366
TXT Retaining functioning electrical component (e.g., tube, lamp, fuse,
    battery, etc.):

    Coupling part under subclass 345 for use directly with a unitized structure
    intended to utilize electrical energy to perform a useful operation.


CLS 439/367
TXT Protective enclosure:

    Coupling part under subclass 345 including an encasing shell for providing
    physical protection of the coupling part.


CLS 439/368
TXT Single means retaining plural distinct coupling parts and mating parts
    together:

    Coupling part under subclass 345 comprising a unitary structure to maintain
    electrical connection of a first coupling part and a first mating part and
    to maintain electrial connection of a second coupling part and a second
    mating part, wherein the first parts and second parts are separate from one
    another.


CLS 439/369
TXT For unsupported coupling part and unsupported mating part (e.g., connecting
    extension cords):

    Coupling part under subclass 345 not intended to be held against gravity by
    a base member and wherein the mating part to which it is adapted to be
    connected is also not intended to be held against gravity by a base member.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a coupling part that is the termination
    of an "extension cord" adapted to be connected to another extension cord.

    (2)     Note.  The means retaining a pair of coupling parts together of
    this subclass my inherently relieve a contact from stress.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    449+,   for means to prevent force and a conductor from being transmitted
    to an electrical connector.

    502+,   for an "extension cord" generally, including an electrical
    connector with a flaccid conductor and another electrical connector spaced
    therealong.


CLS 439/370
TXT Resiliently urging coupling part and mating part together:

    Coupling part under subclass 345 wherein a portion of the means to maintain
    electrical connection in use is intended to be stressed within its elastic
    limit and to accordingly bias the coupling part into tight fit with the
    mating part.


CLS 439/371
TXT Pliable band, conductor sheath engaging means, or adhesive:

    Coupling part under subclass 345 wherein the means to maintain electrical
    connection of the parts comprises (a) a flexible member capable of exerting
    force only in tension along its length, (b) means for engaging the encasing
    structure (usually insulation) of a pliable conductor assembly, or (c)
    means for application of treatment by a surface bonding material.


CLS 439/372
TXT Rotatable retaining means, pivotable retaining means, or actuated gripping
    retaining means:

    Coupling part under subclass 345 wherein the means to maintain electrical
    connection either:

    (a)     turns 360_ or more about an axis with respect to the coupling part,

    (b)     turns less than 360_ about an axis with respect to the coupling
    part, or

    (c)     includes means to engage and urge the means radially inwardly.


CLS 439/373
TXT Wall or outlet mounted:

    Coupling part under subclass 345 to be used as a power supply in household
    type use of electricity wherein the means to maintain electrical connection
    of is secured either to the wall on which the coupling part is mounted or
    to a portion of the coupling part itself.


CLS 439/374
TXT WITH GUIDING MEANS FOR MATING OF COUPLING PART:

    Electrical connector under the class definition provided with nonconductive
    means to cooperate with a mating connector to slidingly direct the device
    and the mating connector to assume a desired alignment as the device is
    mated with the mating connector.

    (1)     Note.  The "nonconductive means" may be made of metal, but is not
    intended to transmit electricity in use of the device.

    (2)     Note.  The portion of the mating connector engaged by the alignment
    causing member may be a contact* or other conductor, or may be a
    nonconductor.

    (3)     Note.  The guiding means herein may serve to polarize the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for an electrical connector that is part of a preformed panel
    arrangement with a guide for directing panel circuit movement.

    297+,   for an electrical connector with a guiding means for receiving
    longitudinally moved communications device, e.g., an automobile radio, with
    coupling movement-actuating means or retaining means in addition to contact.

    752.5,  for an insulated connector body with guiding means for an inserted
    contact.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, for an electrical
    contact intended to make and break with mating contact under controlled or
    guided movement, wherein both contacts are considered to be an integral
    member.


CLS 439/375
TXT Lamp or electron tube socket or base:

    Electrical connector under subclass 374 particularly adapted to detachably
    receive and electrically couple to a member intended to radiate light, or
    to a member including electrical amplifying or switching means utilizing an
    environment excluding, vacuum maintaining envelope; or comprising the
    electrical connector of such a light radiating member or amplifying or
    switching member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56+,    for a preformed panel circuit arrangement with an electrical
    connector for connection to a lamp or electron tube.

    168,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base convertible by internal
    change to selectively cooperate with a different contact.

    182,    for a lamp or electron tube socket including arc suppressing or
    extinguishing means.

    220,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base adapted to engage a
    mating connector in alternative manners.

    226+,   for a coupling part to receive a fluorescent neon lamp.

    280,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base having a resilient
    housing for sealing with a coupled connector.

    336,    for a lamp or electron tube socket adapted to receive a cooperative
    lamp or tube by bayonet action, including a movement-actuating means or
    retaining means in addition to the contact of the socket.

    356,    for a lamp or electron tube socket including a retaining means
    comprising a finger or stretchable sleeve resiliently urged laterally of
    connection with a mating part.

    414,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base including a conductor
    sheath penetrating contact and screw means to move the conductor against
    the cutting contact.

    419,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base including a conductor
    sheath penetrating contact adapted to cut to engage a first conductor and
    to also engage (and interconnect) a second conductor.

    541,    for plural lamp or electron tube sockets including supporting means
    therefor.

    558,    for a lamp or electron tube socket extending into a supporting
    panel.

    602,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base including flexing
    insulation.

    611+,   for a connector or contact having vitreous-type envelope secured
    thereto, (e.g., a base of a lamp or vacuum tube).

    661+,   for a plural contact coupling part including a screw-threaded
    contact and insulation other than the conductor sheath.


CLS 439/376
TXT For constrained pivotal or plural movement coupling:

    Electrical connector under subclass 374 having means to guide the device
    into mating relationship with a mating connector by directing relative
    movement of the device (a) about an axis or (b) along a first and then a
    second path.


CLS 439/377
TXT For guiding side of movable panel, e.g., circuit board:

    Electrical connector under subclass 374 intended to engage a lateral
    boundary of a planar member and slidingly direct that member into mating
    relationship with the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55+,    for an electrical connector comprising or combined with a preformed
    panel circuit arrangement.


CLS 439/378
TXT Rodlike guide member extending in coupling direction or tubular passage for
    receiving rodlike guide member:

    Electrical connector under subclass 374 wherein the directing means
    comprises an opening for encircling and receiving an elongated cylindrical
    shaft of amating connector or comprises such an elongated cylindrical shaft.


CLS 439/379
TXT With plural contacts circularly disposed about guide opening or rodlike
    member, e.g., electron tube base:

    Electrical connector under subclass 378 including a plurality of contact
    members positioned in a circle, the center of which coincides with the
    center of the tubular passage or of the elongated cylindrical shaft.


CLS 439/380
TXT Tubular passage receives contact:

    Electrical connector under subclass 378 wherein the directing means
    comprises a tubular passage for an elongated cylindrical shaft, which shaft
    includes a contact member or comprises a nonconductive portion of a rodlike
    shaft, which shaft also includes a contact member.


CLS 439/381
TXT Bare contact:

    Electrical connector under subclass 380 wherein the directing means
    comprises a tubular passage for an elongated cylindrical shaft, which shaft
    is a contact member and has no insulation in the portion received by the
    guide opening.


CLS 439/382
TXT INCLUDING VIBRATION CUSHIONING OR ABSORBING MEANS:

    Electrical connector under the class definition having or combined with
    means to lessen, soften, or take up mechanical shocks or impulses imparted
    thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for interrelated electrical connectors relatively movable during
    use with antivibration mounting.

    86+,    for an electrical connector having an elastomeric or nonmetallic
    conductive portion which may dampen vibration.

    586+,   for an electrical connector including flexing insulation, generally.

    775+,   for a connector or contact, per se, having a movable or resilient
    securing part.


CLS 439/383
TXT Adapted to fit between opposing faces of mated connectors:

    Electrical connector under subclass 382 adapted to abuttingly engage a
    cooperating connector wherein the means to lessen, soften, or take up
    mechanical shocks or impulses is physically located between the abutting
    faces of the device and a cooperating connector.

    (1)     Note.  One of the connectors may comprise the base of a lamp or
    electron tube.


CLS 439/384
TXT For supporting connector:

    Electrical connector under subclass 382 wherein the means to lessen,
    soften, or take up mechanical shocks or impulses also serves as a mounting
    for the device or another connector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    527+,   for a coupling part with supporting means therefor.


CLS 439/385
TXT By gripping mating connector:

    Electrical connector under subclass 384 wherein the means to lessen,
    soften, or take up mechanical shocks or impulses is constructed to exert
    yieldable force about and radially inwardly toward the connector with which
    the device cooperates.

    (1)     Note.  The mating connector may comprise the base of a lamp or
    electron tube.


CLS 439/386
TXT WITH COMMONING MEANS FOR RETURN GROUND:

    Electrical connector under the class definition including conductor means
    in electrical engagement with plural other conductors intended to be used
    to hold all those conductors at neutral potential.


CLS 439/387
TXT CONTACT COMPRISING CUTTER (SEVERING, PIERCING, ABRADING, SCRAPING,
    BREAKING, OR TEARING):

    Electrical connector under the class definition including a penetrating
    contact, i.e., a member for engaging and making electrical contact with
    another device, wherein that member also serves to forcibly separate one
    portion of the second or a third device from another portion thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is:



    (a)     Severing - subdividing one portion of the other device from another
    portion thereof.

    (b)     Piercing - penetrating the other device to form an opening therein
    or therethrough.

    (c)     Abrading - engaging the  other device to grind away a portion
    thereof by the action of a crystalline tool.

    (d)     Scraping - subjecting the other device to a surface action by a
    sharp blade to remove a portion thereof or a coating thereon.

    (e)     Breaking - subjecting the other device to bending forces exceeding
    the strength thereof.

    (f)     Tearing - subjecting the other device to tensile forces exceeding
    the strength thereof.


CLS 439/388
TXT Adapted to engage tapered post (e.g., storage battery terminal):

    Electrical connector under subclass 387 intended to engage and make
    electrical contact with an elongated rodlike member at a conical portion
    thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The electrical connection of a lead-acid storage battery
    such as used in an automobile commonly has been a tapered rod.


CLS 439/389
TXT Insulation cutter:

    Electrical connector under subclass 387 including a penetrating contact to
    be used to make electrical contact with a conducting member and intended to
    penetrate a nonconductor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201,    for a device for piercing through a grease package to make
    electrical connection with a contact thereby, such as is used in oil well
    drilling apparatus.


CLS 439/390
TXT Adapted to engage liquid, granular, or metallic wool conductor:

    Electrical connector under subclass 389 for making electrical contact with
    an electricity transmitting member that is (a) in the liquid state when
    conducting electricity, (b) is composed of multiple, unconnected particles
    collectively acting as a single member, or (c) is composed of randomly
    intertwined strands acting collectively as a single member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for interrelated electrical connectors relatively movable during
    use having a "nonsolid" contact.


CLS 439/391
TXT Conductor sheath piercing:

    Electrical connector under subclass 389 wherein the conducting member is
    strandlike and is enclosed by an elongated generally encircling casing of
    solid nonconducting material wherein the penetrating contact cuts through
    the casing.


CLS 439/392
TXT With means to cut off excess end of conductor:

    Electrical connector under subclass 391 combined with or including means to
    sever away a surplus portion of the conducting strand being electrically
    engaged.


CLS 439/393
TXT Cutter piercing insulation parallel to conductor axis:

    Electrical connector under subclass 391 wherein the penetrating contact
    engages the strandlike conductor by relative movement along the axis of the
    strandlike conductor.


CLS 439/394
TXT Coaxial cable:

    Electrical connector under subclass 391 particularly adapted to be used
    with an electricity transmitting, generally circular cross-section,
    elongated cable* including a first electrical conductor at the axis thereof
    and an isolated second conductor that is sleevelike and concentric with
    respect to the axis of the first conduct.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    578+,   for an electrical connector including or for use with a coaxial
    cable generally.


CLS 439/395
TXT Having slot edge for cutting insulation:

    Electrical connector under subclass 391 wherein the penetrating contact is
    a platelike conductive body having a first margin provided with a notch or
    opening therein such that the stranded conductor when moved to a certain
    position within the notch or opening is passively urged against the first
    margin by a second margin with sufficient force to penetrate the casing and
    make electrical contact with the stranded conductor.

    (1)     Note.  Penetration may be made by both the first margin and the
    second margin.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    443,    for a contact having a slot edge for piercing, generally.


CLS 439/396
TXT With additional diverse sharp cutting edge:

    Electrical connector under subclass 395 including a piercing member or
    surface in additional to and of a type different from the margin of a notch
    or opening in the platelike conductive body.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a cutting contact wherein a notch or
    opening is provided with a sharp piercing point (e.g., extending from the
    intersection of the first and second margins).


CLS 439/397
TXT Contact engages conductor in at least two locations spaced along conductor
    axis:

    Electrical connector under subclass 395 wherein the conductive body has a
    portion intended to make electrical contact with the strandlike conductor
    at a first point along the length of the conductor and has another portion
    intended to make the electrical contact with the stranded conductor at a
    different point along the length thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The other portion of the contact may be the second margin or
    may be a distinct contact surface.


CLS 439/398
TXT Conductor engaging slot extends through bight of contact:

    Electrical connector under subclass 397 wherein the platelike conductive
    body is generally folded back on itself and the notch or opening therein is
    such that it extends through the fold to present a first and cooperating
    second margin and a third and its cooperating fourth margin, wherein the
    first and third margins engage the strandlike conductor at different points
    along the length of the strandlike conductor.


CLS 439/399
TXT With stress relieving means for conductor to terminal joint:

    Electrical connector under subclass 397 combined with distinct means for
    carrying the reactive physical load from tensile forces of an electricity
    transmitting conductor or cable to thereby prevent that physical load from
    being transmitted to electricity transmitting joint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401,    for a contact comprising an insulation cutter having a slot edge
    for cutting insulation, with a stress relieving means to engage the
    conductor at a second axial location.

    407,    for a contact comprising an insulation cutter having a slot edge
    for cutting insulation, wherein the contact is a portion of an elongaged
    channel, with a stress relieving means.

    449+,   for an electrical connector with stress relieving means for
    conductor to terminal joint, generally, and see the Search Notes thereunder.


CLS 439/400
TXT With distinct surface holding conductor in slot:

    Electrical connector under subclass 397 having a configuration such as to
    block movement of the strandlike conductor out of the contact notch or
    opening in the conductive body.


CLS 439/401
TXT Contact engages conductor at axial location and engages insulation at
    second axial location to relieve stress at conductor to terminal joint:

    Electrical connector under subclass 395 wherein the conductive body has a
    first portion for making electricity transmitting engagement with the
    strandlike conductor at a first point along its length and has a second
    portion for engaging the insulative material surrounding the conductor at a
    location axially displaced from the first point, wherein the engagement
    with the insulation is for carrying the reactive physical load from the
    tensile forces of an electricity transmitting suspended conductor or cable
    to thereby prevent that physical load from being transmitted to the
    electricity transmitting joint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    339,    for a contact comprising an insulation cutter having a slot edge
    for cutting insulation, wherein the contact engages the conductor at
    axially spaced points, with a stress relieving means.

    407,    for a contact comprising an insulation cutter having a slot edge
    for cutting insulation, wherein the contact is a portion of an elongated
    channel, with a stress relieving means.

    449+,   for an electrical connector with stress relieving means for
    conductor to terminal joint, generally, and see the Search Notes thereunder.


CLS 439/402
TXT Single conductive member having plural slots formed by three or more
    fingers for connecting plural conductors:

    Electrical connector under subclass 395 comprising a unitary platelike
    conductive body having a second notch or opening therein wherein each notch
    or opening is formed by a pair of extensions and wherein the first and
    second notch or opening utilize a common extension, intended to receive and
    make electrical contact with a first and a second electrically conductive
    member and transmit electical current therebetween.


CLS 439/403
TXT From different margins of contact:

    Electrical connector under subclass 402 wherein the first pair of
    extensions project in a first direction and the second pair of extensions
    project in a different direction.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the contact from which the extensions of this
    subclass project is planar such that the extensions project from the planar
    edges.


CLS 439/404
TXT Plural contacts, each formed by slot between pair of fingers:

    Electrical connector under subclass 395 including a first conductive body
    having a notch or opening therein formed by a pair of extensions and
    including a second conductive body having a notch or opening therein formed
    by a pair of extensions intended to electrically contact first and second
    electrically conductive members.


CLS 439/405
TXT Longitudinally and laterally staggered contacts:

    Electrical connector under subclass 404 wherein the first notch or opening
    of the first conductive body is in a first plane normal to the axis of the
    conductive member, wherein the notch or opening of the second conductive
    body is in a second different plane normal to the axis of the conductive
    member, and wherein the notch or opening of the first conductive body is
    not in axial alignment with any such notch or opening in the second
    conductive body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    494,    for an electrical connector including or for use with a tape cable
    wherein the cable is splayed into dual rows of contacts.


CLS 439/406
TXT Contact is portion of elongated channel:

    Electrical connector under subclass 395 wherin the platelike conductive
    body either is, or is part of, a structure which in cross-section is
    circular or U-shaped.

    (1)     Note. The elongated channel of this subclass may house the
    strandlike conductor and the means having V-shaped notch is positioned
    generally transversely of the extent of the channel.


CLS 439/407
TXT With stress relieving means for conductor to terminal joint:

    Electrical connector under subclass 406 combined with distinct means for
    carrying the reactive physical load from the tensile forces of an
    electricity transmitting suspended conductor or cable to thereby prevent
    that physical load from being transmitted to the electricity transmitting
    joint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    339,    for a contact comprising an insulation cutter having a slot edge
    for cutting insulation, wherein the contact engages the conductor at axialy
    spaced points, with a stress relieving means.

    401,    for a contact comprising an insulation cutter having a slot edge
    for cutting insulation, with a stress relieving means for conductor to
    terminal joint, generally, and see the Search Notes thereunder.

    449+,   for an electrical connector with stress relieving means for
    conductor to terminal joint, generally, and see the Search Notes thereunder.


CLS 439/408
TXT More than one conductor in same slot:

    Electrical connector under subclass 395 specifically intended to receive a
    plurality of distinct electricity transmitting strandlike members in a
    common notch or opening.


CLS 439/409
TXT Pivoting cutter, pivoting means to operate cutter, or pivoting means to
    move conductor against cutter:

    Electrical connector under subclass 391 (1) wherein the penetrating contact
    moves with respect to the remainder of the device about an axis less than
    360_ when making electrical contact; (2) having a component to move the
    penetrating contact wherein the component moves with respect to the
    remainder of the device about an axis less than 360_; or (3) a. comprising
    an electrical connector having a base and having a component to move the
    strandlike conducting member relative to the base against the penetrating
    contact, or b. comprising a baseless electrical connector having a
    component to move the strandlike conducting member with respect to any part
    of the device (e.g., with respect to the penetrating contact), wherein the
    component moves with respect to the remainder of device about an axis less
    than 360_ when moving the conductor.


CLS 439/410
TXT Pivoting cutter:

    Electrical connector under subclass 409 wherein the penetrating contact
    moves with respect to the remainder of the device about an axis less than
    360_ when making contact.


CLS 439/411
TXT Comprising screw, screw operated cutter, or screw means to move conductor
    against cutter:

    Electrical connector under subclass 391 (a) wherein the penetrating contact
    is helically ribbed and supported for rotation about the helical axis and
    longitudinal movement along the helical axis as guided by the rib with
    respect to the remainder of the device when making contact; (b) having with
    a component to move the penetrating contact wherein the component is
    helically ribbed and supported for rotation about the helical axis and
    longitudinal movement along the helical axis as guided by the rib with
    respect to the remainder of the device when moving the contact; or (c) a.
    comprising an electrical connector having a base and having a component to
    move the strandlike conducting member relative to the base and against the
    penetrating contact, or b. comprising a baseless electrical connector
    having a component to move the strandlike conducting member with respect to
    any other part of the device (e.g., with respect to the penetrating
    contact), wherein the component is distinct from the contact, is helically
    ribbed and supported for rotation about the helical axis and longitudinal
    movement along the helical axis as guided by the rib with respect to the
    remainder of the device when moving the conductor.


CLS 439/412
TXT Screw means to move conductor against cutter:

    Electrical connector under subclass 411 (a) having a base and a component
    to move the strandlike conducting member relative to the base and against
    the penetrating contact, or (b) comprising a baseless electrical connector
    having a component to move the strandlike conducting member with respect to
    any other part of the device (e.g., with respect to the penetrating
    contact), wherein the component is helically ribbed and supported for
    rotation about the helical axis as guided by the rib with respect to the
    remainder of the device when moving the conductor.


CLS 439/413
TXT Single element cutting and connecting plural conductors:

    Electrical connector under subclass 412 wherein the contact is intended to
    penetrate and electrically connect two conducting members.


CLS 439/414
TXT Lamp or electron tube socket or base:

    Electrical connector under subclass 412 particularly adapted to detachably
    receive and electrically couple to a member intended to radiate light, or
    to a member including electrical amplifying or switching means utilizing an
    environment excluding, vacuum maintaining envelope; or comprising the
    electrical connector of such a light radiating member or amplifying or
    switching member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56+,    for a preformed panel circuit arrangement with an electrical
    connector for connection to a lamp or electron tube.

    168,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base convertible by internal
    change to selectively cooperate with a different contact.

    182,    for a lamp or electron tube socket including arc suppressing or
    extinguishing means.

    220,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base adapted to engage a
    mating connector in alternative manners.

    226+,   for a coupling part to receive a fluorescent or neon lamp.

    280,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base having a resilient
    housing for sealing with a coupled connector.

    336,    for a lamp or electron tube socket adapted to receive a cooperating
    lamp or tube by bayonet action, including a movement-actuating means or
    retaining means in addition to the contact of the socket.

    356,    for a lamp or electron tube socket including a retaining means
    comprising a finger or stretchable sleeve resiliently urged laterally of
    connection with a mating part.

    375,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base with a guiding means for
    mating of a coupling part.

    419,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base including a conductor
    sheath penetrating contact adapted to cut to engage a first conductor and
    to also engage (and interconnect) a second conductor.

    541,    for plural lamp or electron tube sockets including supporting means
    therefor.

    558,    for a lamp or electron tube socket exxtending into a supporting
    panel.

    602,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base including flexing
    insulation.

    611+,   for a connector or contact having vitreous-type envelope secured
    thereto, (e.g., a base of a lamp or vacuum tube).

    661+,   for a plural contact coupling part including a screw-threaded
    contact and insulation other than the conductor sheath.


CLS 439/415
TXT Screw threads pierce insulation:

    Electrical connector under subclass 411 wherein the penetrating contact is
    helically ribbed and supported for rotation about the helical axis and
    longitudinal movement along the helical axis as guided by the rib with
    respect to the remainder of the device when making contact, and wherein the
    rib edge is utilized to penetrate and make electrical contact.


CLS 439/416
TXT Piercing means comprising end of screw:

    Electrical connector under subclass 411 wherein the penetrating contact is
    helically ribbed and supported for rotation about the helical axis and
    longitudinal movement along the helical axis as guided by the rib with
    respect to the remainder of the device when making contact, and wherein the
    axially most advanced portion of the ribbed member is utilized to penetrate
    and make electrical contact.


CLS 439/417
TXT Rectilinearly moving operator:

    Electrical connector under subclass 391 including a driver to move the
    penetrating contact, which driver moves along a straight path.


CLS 439/418
TXT Contact member cutting to contact first conductor and contacting second
    conductor:

    Electrical connector under subclass 391 including a member having a first
    portion for penetrating and making electrical contact with a first
    electricity transmitting member and having a second portion for making
    electrical contact with a second electricity transmitting member, wherein
    the contact member is of conductive material so that it transmits
    electricity from one of the transmitting members to the other.

    (1)     Note.  Both joints formed by the contact member of this subclass
    may be readily made and broken; i.e., each connection is of type provided
    for under the definition of this class.


CLS 439/419
TXT Lamp or electron tube socket or base:

    Electrical connector under subclass 418 particularly adapted to detachably
    receive and electrically couple to a member intended to radiate light, or
    to a member including electrical amplifying or switching means utilizing an
    environment excluding vacuum maintaining envelope; or comprising the
    electrical connector of such a light radiating member of amplifying or
    switching member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56+,    for a preformed panel circuit arrangement with an electrical
    connector for connection to a lamp or electron tube.

    168,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base convertible by internal
    change to selectively cooperate with a different contact.

    182,    for a lamp or electron tube socket including arc suppressing or
    extinguishing means.

    220,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base adapted to engage a
    mating connector in alternative manners.

    226+,   for a coupling part to receive a fluorescent or neon lamp.

    280,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base having a resilient
    housing for sealing with a coupled connector.

    336,    for a lamp or electron tube socket adapted to receive a cooperating
    lamp or tube by bayonet action, including a movement-actuating means or
    retaining means in addition to the contact of the socket.

    356,    for a lamp or electron tube socket including a retaining means
    comprising a finger or stretchable sleeve resiliently urged laterally of
    connection with a mating part.

    375,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base with a guiding means for
    mating of a coupling part.

    541,    for a plural lamp or electron tube sockets including supporting
    means therefor.

    558,    for a lamp or electron tube socket extending into a supporting
    panel.

    611+,   for a connector or contact having vitreous-type envelope secured
    thereto, e.g., a base of a lamp or vacuum tube).

    661+,   for a plural contact coupling part including a screw-threaded
    contact and insulation other than the conductor sheath.


CLS 439/420
TXT Flexibly tensioned strap:

    Electrical connector under subclass 391 wherein the pentrating contact is
    pliable and is adapted to encircle the conductor with which it is to make
    contact and is to be drawn radially toward the conductor by application of
    tensile forces to the ends thereof.


CLS 439/421
TXT Crimped:

    Electrical connector under subclass 391 wherein the penetrating contact is
    also secured in a nonremovable manner to a conductor by being stressed
    beyond its elastic limit when brought into engagement with that conductor.

    (1)     Note.  The device herein includes a detachable electrical connector
    combined with nondetachable electrical connector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 84 for a crimped
    electrical connector without a surface for detachable connection.


CLS 439/422
TXT For use with tape cable:

    Electrical connector under subclass 421 intended to be used with an
    electrical cable* having 3 or more conductors all of which are extending in
    a common plane.


CLS 439/423
TXT Cutting by peripheral end of sheath encircling crimped contact:

    Electrical connector under subclass 421 comprising a member adapted to be
    wrapped about a strandlike insulated conductor including an extremity
    intended to curl in and penetrate through the insulation and make
    electrical contact with the conductor.


CLS 439/424
TXT Cutting by stamped out tooth of sheath encircling crimped contact:

    Electrical connector under subclass 421 comprising a member adapted to be
    wrapped about a strandlike insulated conductor including a portion
    partially cut out thereof such that this portion presents an edge adapted
    to penetrate the insulation and make electrical contact with the strandlike
    conductor.


CLS 439/425
TXT Nail like cutter:

    Electrical connector under subclass 391 wherein the penetrating contact is
    an axially extending member, is generally circular in cross-section and is
    intended to penetrate the insulation making electricity transmitting
    engagement with an underlying conductor by movement along the axis of the
    contact.


CLS 439/426
TXT Passing through insulation to make contact:

    Electrical connector under subclass 389 intended to penetrate through a
    nonconductor and make electricity transmitting contact with the underlying
    conducting member.


CLS 439/427
TXT Axially penetrating the elongated conductor:

    Electrical connector under subclass 387 wherein the penetrating contact
    makes engagement with the strandlike conductor by relative movement along
    the axis thereof.


CLS 439/428
TXT Comprising screw or screw operated means:

    Electrical connector under subclass 427 (a) wherein the penetrating contact
    is helically ribbed and supported for rotation about the helical axis and
    longitudinal movement along the helical axis as guided by the rib with
    respect to the remainder of the device when making contact; or (b) having a
    component to move the penetrating contact wherein the component is
    helically ribbed and supported for rotation about the helical axis and
    longitudinal movement along the helical axis as guided by the rib with
    respect to the remainder of the device when moving the penetrating contact.


CLS 439/429
TXT Screw threads engage conductor:

    Electrical connector under subclass 428 wherein the rib edge is utilized to
    penetrate and make electrical contact.


CLS 439/430
TXT Contact permanently secured to a conductor, e.g., crimped, soldered, etc.:

    Electrical connector under subclass 427 wherein the penetrating contact is
    also secured in a nonremovable manner to an electrical conductor.


CLS 439/431
TXT Comprising screw, screw operated cutter, or screw means to move conductor
    against cutter:

    Electrical connector under subclass 387 (a) wherein the penetrating contact
    is helically ribbed and supported for rotation  about the helical axis and
    longitudinal movement along the helical axis as guided by the rib with
    respect to the remainder of the device when making contact; (b) having with
    a component to move the penetrating contact wherein the component is
    helically ribbed and supported for rotation about the helical axis and
    longitudinal    movement along the helical axis as guided by the rib with
    respect to the remainder of the device when moving the contact; or (c) a.
    comprising an electrical connector having a base and having a component to
    move the strandlike conducting member relative to the base and against the
    penetrating contact, or b. comprising a baseless electrical connector
    having a component to move the strandlike conducting member with respect to
    any other part of the device (e.g., with respect to the penetrating
    contact), wherein the component is distinct from the contact, is helically
    ribbed and supported for rotation about the helical axis and longitudinal
    movement along the helical axis as guided by the rib with respect to the
    remainder of the device when moving the conductor.


CLS 439/432
TXT Screw operated pivoted cutter:

    Electrical connector under subclass 431 having a helically threaded
    component to move the penetrating contact wherein the contact is adapted to
    swing about a fixed pivot with respect to the remainder of the device when
    making engagement with the conductor.


CLS 439/433
TXT Annular cutter:

    Electrical connector under subclass 431 wherein the penetrating contact is
    tubular in shape and has a cutting edge at the end thereof.


CLS 439/434
TXT Annular cutter:

    Electrical connector under subclass 387 wherein the penetrating contact is
    tubular in shape and has a cutting edge at the end thereof.


CLS 439/435
TXT U-shaped clamp:

    Electrical connector under subclass 387 wherein the penetrating contact is
    comprised of a pair of generally parallel arms connected together at one
    end and adapted to grippingly engage a conductor therebetween.


CLS 439/436
TXT Resiliently biased:

    Electrical connector under subclass 387 wherein the penetrating contact is
    urged by the force of a member stressed within its elastic limit.


CLS 439/437
TXT Finger:

    Electrical connector under subclass 436 wherein the penetrating contact has
    the shape of an elongated protuberance.


CLS 439/438
TXT Resilient finger:

    Electrical connector under subclass 437 wherein the penetrating contact is
    supported for movement laterally thereof by flexure within its elastic
    limit.


CLS 439/439
TXT Plural fingers:

    Electrical connector under subclass 438 including two or more elongated
    protuberances intended to make electrical contact with a single mating
    contact.


CLS 439/440
TXT Spaced along longitudinal axis of engagement:

    Electrical connector under subclass 438 adapted to be brought into mating
    relationship with another electrical connector in a given direction
    including a first protuberance at a second, different location along that
    direction.


CLS 439/441
TXT Adapted to grip upon withdrawal of mating part:

    Electrical connector under subclass 438 of such configuration that the
    protuberance will exert greater penetrating force resulting from pulling
    the contact* of a cooperating electrical connector out of current
    transmitting with respect thereto.


CLS 439/442
TXT Crimped:

    Electrical connector under subclass 387 adapted to be stressed beyond its
    elastic limit in penetrating and making electrical contact.



    (1)     The contact of this subclass normally includes a portion for being
    stressed beyond its elastic limit, a nondetachable connection of a type not
    included in this class and includes a portion for detachable electrical
    connection.


CLS 439/443
TXT Having slot edge for cutting:

    Electrical connector under subclass 387 wherein the penetrating contact is
    a platelike conductive body having a first margin provided with a notch or
    opening therein such that the stranded conductor when moved to a certain
    position with the notch or opening is passively urged against the first
    margin by a second margin with sufficient force to penetrate the conductor
    and  make electrical contact therewith.

    (1)     Note.  Penetration may be made by both the first margin and the
    second margin.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    395,    for a contact having a slot edge for penetrating through an
    insulative sheath.


CLS 439/444
TXT Piercing into support structure:

    Electrical connector under subclass 387 wherein the penetrating contact is
    adapted to cut into structure for supporting the connector against the
    force of gravity.


CLS 439/445
TXT WITH OR HAVING FLEXIBLE GUARD OR SUPPORT FOR CABLE OR CONDUCTOR:

    Electrical connector under the class definition combined with or including
    a nonrigid or swinging member for protection or supporting an electricity
    transmitting strandlike member with respect to the means for making an
    electrical transmitting joint to protect the member against injury at or
    near the means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for movably mounted cable guards having contact thereon which slide
    or roll over the corresponding contacts to the connector body during
    movement of the cable guards.

    476.1+, for a rigid sleeve, tube, etc., through which a cable extends which
    serves as a handle for a connector body.



    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, sublass 178 for coil springs, per se, which may be
    attached to a connector body to serve as a resilient support for the line
    cord.


CLS 439/446
TXT Pivotal:

    Electrical connector under subclass 445 wherein the protecting member is
    secured to the electrical connector for movement with respect thereto about
    an axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164+,   for an electrical connector including two components pivotally
    attached together for relative movement, combined with an intermediate
    pliable conductor.


CLS 439/447
TXT Resilient:

    Electrical connector under subclass 445 wherein the nonrigid or swinging
    supporting member elastically directs the electricity transmitting
    strandlike member or assembly in a particular direction.


CLS 439/448
TXT Coil spring concentric with cable or conductor:

    Electrical connector under subclass 447 wherein the elastically directing
    member is helically wound about the longitudinal axis of the electricity
    transmitting strandlike member.


CLS 439/449
TXT WITH STRESS RELIEVING MEANS FOR CONDUCTOR TO TERMINAL JOINT:

    Electrical connector under class definition combined with distinct means
    for carrying the reactive physical load from the tension of an electricity
    transmitting suspended conductor or cable to thereby prevent that physical
    load from being transmitted to the electricity transmitting joint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    296+,   for means to hold a pair of coupling parts together which may
    inherently relieve load on a conductor from being transmitted to a contact.

    399,    for a contact comprising an insulation cutter having a slot edge
    for cutting insulation, wherein the contact engages the conductor at
    axially spaced points, with a stress relieving means.

    401,    for a contact comprising an insulation cutter having a slot edge
    for cutting insulation, with a stress relieving  means to engage the
    conductor at a second axial location.

    407,    for a contact comprising an insulation cutter having a slot edge
    for cutting insulation, wherein the contact is a portion of an elongated
    channel, with a stress relieving means.

    455+,   for a connector having a flexible or movably mounted conductor or
    cable guard.

    604+,   for a connector in which the conductor or cable is embedded in
    molded insulation or sealing material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 115+ for a cord or rope
    holder having or constituting a stress reliever not limited to use with an
    electrical conductor.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors, and Insulators, subclasses 65 and 135 for
    a strain reliever limited to use with an electrical conductor but not
    claiming connector structure.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 178, 179, and 669 for devices with electrical conductor
    (including lead frame) stress/strain relief.


CLS 439/450
TXT Drop cord attaching means, e.g., block or rosette:

    Electrical connector under subclass 449 intended to support the
    gravitational load of a vertically extending conductor cable and prevent
    transmission of that load to the electricity transmitting joint.

    (1)     Note.  In the installation of a suspended lamp fixture (e.g., a
    chandelier) the load of the fixture may be applied directly to a suspension
    means (e.g., a chain) and at no time be applied to the conductor cable but
    is not transmitted to the electricity transmitting joint is included in
    this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    531,    for an electrical coupling part with flexible suspension means.

    576,    for a supporting means for a coupling part to be engaged by
    suspension means.


CLS 439/451
TXT Including provision to attach tether:

    Electrical connector under subclass 449 wherein the means receiving the
    physical load is specially adapted to receive a nonenclosed, strandlike,
    load bearing member and transmit the physical load thereto.


CLS 439/452
TXT Including provision to attach to stress bearing portion of conductor:

    Electrical connector under subclass 449 intended for use with an
    electricity transmitting, strandlike assembly including a strandlike
    component intended to support the physical load of that assembly, which
    device is specially adapted to receive the force of the physical load from
    that componet.


CLS 439/453
TXT Enlargement engaging means:

    Electrical connector under subclass 449 intended for use with an
    electricity transmitting, strandlike member or assembly that is uniformly
    rodlike in external configuration but is provided with a raised surface for
    load bearing engagement by the means for receiving that load.

    (1)     Note.  A knot engaging means is included herein.

    (2)     Note.  The raised surface may be part of a member that is either
    fixedly or loosely attached to the strandlike member or assembly.


CLS 439/454
TXT Including longitudinally threaded connector part to effect gripping of
    enlargement:

    Electrical connector under subclass 453 including a member having a
    screwlike rib intended to be positioned coaxially with the electricity
    transmitting, strandlike member or assembly and to effect gripping of the
    raised surface by rotation of the screwlike rib about its axis.


CLS 439/455
TXT Distinct cable attached enlargement means:

    Electrical connector under subclass 453 adapted for load bearing engagement
    with a separate raised surface element fastened to the electricity
    transmitting, strandlike member or assembly.

    (1)     Note.  The englargement means of this subclass may be loosely
    attached to the cable.


CLS 439/456
TXT Curved conductor path:

    Electrical connector under subclass 449 wherein the means to receive the
    physical load includes a nonlinear way for the electricity transmitting
    strandlike member or assembly to frictionally engage and transmit the
    physical load thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    450,    for a drop cord attaching means including a curved, stress
    relieving way to receive the electrical cable extending therefrom.


CLS 439/457
TXT Means comprising notched or apertured body:

    Electrical connector under subclass 456 including a distinct member having
    an opening therealong or therethrough to frictionally engage and receive
    the physical load of the strandlike member or assembly.


CLS 439/458
TXT Platelike body:

    Electrical connector under subclass 457 wherein the distinct member is a
    planar member having a uniformly thick cross section.


CLS 439/459
TXT Conductor clamping and shaping:

    Electrical connector under subclass 456 including a member adapted to grip
    the strandlike member or assembly with sufficient force to change the
    physical configuration of the strandlike member or assembly.


CLS 439/460
TXT Conductor gripped by or entirely within connector housing:

    Electrical connector under subclass 449 including a chamber defined by wall
    portions which encompass the electricity transmitting joint and also
    partially or completely encompass the means for receiving the physical
    load, which means is forced into frictional engagement with the electricity
    transmitting strandlike member or assembly.


CLS 439/461
TXT Including longitudinally threaded connector part to effect gripping of
    conductor:

    Electrical connector under subclass 460 including a member having a
    screwlike rib intended to be positioned coaxially with the electricity
    transmitting strandlike member or assembly to effect friction engagement
    thereof by rotation of the screwlike ribbed portion about its axis.


CLS 439/462
TXT Distinct clamp actuated by threaded connector part:

    Electrical connector under subclass 461 including a separate member forced
    into frictional engagement with the strandlike member or assembly by the
    member having a screwlike ribbed portion.


CLS 439/463
TXT Eccentric gripping means:

    Electrical connector under subclass 460 wherein the means for frictional
    engagement with the strandlike member or assembly is mounted for pivotal
    movement about an axis on the device such that an extending portion moves
    for such frictional engagement.


CLS 439/464
TXT By pliant, conductor encircling strap:

    Electrical connector under subclass 460 wherein the means for making
    frictional engagement includes a flexible band for binding the strandlike
    member or assembly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    471,    for an electrical connector with a stress relieving means wherein
    the conductor is gripped outside the connector housing by a distinct
    encircling strap.


CLS 439/465
TXT Longitudinally divided connector housing grips conductor:

    Electrical connector under subclass 460 wherein the chamber is formed by a
    first and a second shell like structure which together encompass the
    electricity transmitting joint and wherein the shell structures meet along
    a line also parallel to the electricity transmitting strandlike member or
    assembly and make frictional engagement therewith.


CLS 439/466
TXT With additional contacts comprising coupling part mating along axis normal
    to conductor:

    Electrical connector under subclass 465 including a second portion also
    making electrical contact with another connector, wherein the second
    portion is a coupling part* and wherein it is brought into engagement with
    the mating part by movement in a direction perpendicular with respect to
    the cable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    468,    for an electrical connector with stress relieving means wherein the
    conductor is gripped by or entirely within the connector housing with
    additional contacts comprising a coupling part mating along an axis normal
    to the conductor.

    473,    for an electrical connector with stress relieving means wherein the
    conductor is gripped outside the connector housing by a distinct clamp with
    additional contacts comprising a coupling part mating along an axis normal
    to the conductor.


CLS 439/467
TXT Hinged connector housing parts:

    Electrical connector under subclass 465 wherein the first and second shell
    like structures are secured together such that they may be moved apart by
    movement along a pivot fixed with respect to each structure.


CLS 439/468
TXT With additional contacts comprising coupling part mating along axis normal
    to conductor:

    Electrical connector under subclass 460 including a second portion also
    making electrical contact with another connector, wherein the second
    portion is a coupling part* and wherein it is brought into engagement with
    the mating part by movement in a direction perpendicular with respect to
    the cable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    466,    for an electrical connector with stress relieving means wherein the
    conductor is gripped by a longitudinally divided connector housing with
    additional contacts comprising a coupling part mating along an axis normal
    to the conductor.

    473,    for an electrical connector with stress relieving means wherein the
    conductor is gripped outside the connector housing by a distinct clamp with
    additional contacts comprising a coupling part mating along an axis normal
    to the conductor.


CLS 439/469
TXT Transverse conductor gripping screw, or with means to transversely move
    conductor gripping means:

    Electrical connector under subclass 460 wherein the strandlike member or
    assembly is frictionally engaged (a) by a helically ribbed member that
    interfits with the remainder of the connector to be moved axially into
    engagement with the stradlike member when rotated about its axis; or (b) by
    a member moving radially with respect to the strandlike member or assembly
    with separate structure to cause radial movement of the member.


CLS 439/470
TXT Conductor gripped outside connector housing by distinct clamp:

    Electrical connector under subclass 449 including a chamber defined by wall
    portions which encompass the electricity transmitting joint, wherein the
    means for receiving the physical load is located outside the chamber, and
    wherein the means for receiving the physical load is forced into frictional
    engagement with the electricity transmitting strandlike member or assembly.


CLS 439/471
TXT By pliant conductor encircling strap:

    Electrical connector under subclass 470 wherein the means for making
    frictional engagement includes a flexible band for binding the strandlike
    member or assembly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    464,    for an electrical connector with a stress relieving means wherein
    the conductor is gripped by or entirely within the connector housing, by an
    encircling strap.


CLS 439/472
TXT With means to transversely move conductor gripping means:

    Electrical connector under subclass 470 combined with means to force the
    means for receiving physical load radially toward the electricity
    transmitting strandlike member or assembly.


CLS 439/473
TXT With additional contacts comprising coupling part mating along axis normal
    to conductor:

    Electrical connector under subclass 472 including a second portion also
    making electrical contact with another connector, wherein the second
    portion is a coupling part* and wherein it is brought into engagement with
    the mating part by movement in a direction perpendicular with respect to
    the cable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    466,    for an electrical connector with stress relieving means wherein the
    conductor is gripped by a longitudinally divided connector housing with
    additional contacts comprising a coupling part mating along an axis normal
    to the conductor.

    468,    for an electrical connector with stress relieving means wherein the
    conductor is gripped by or entirely within the connector housing with
    additional contacts comprising a coupling part mating along an axis normal
    to the conductor.


CLS 439/474
TXT INCLUDING OVERSTRESS PREVENTING MEANS:

    Electrical connector under the class definition including provision to
    positively prevent application of more than a predetermined amount of force
    to a component of the device.


CLS 439/475
TXT Frangible element:

    Electrical connector under subclass 474 including a weakened area intended
    to break upon application of a predetermined amount of force to prevent
    more than the predetermined amount of force to be transmitted to another
    component of the device.


CLS 439/476.1
TXT INCLUDING HANDLE OR DISTINCT MANIPULATING MEANS:

    Electrical connector under the class definition combined with or having (a)
    particular means to be engaged by an operative's hand or (b) a particular
    handheld implement that is separate from the connector and is used for
    maneuvering the connector randomly into assembly and connection with
    another connector.

    (1)     Note.  A structure disclosed as being used for grasping by an
    operative is in this and the indented subclasses only when there is novelty
    in the handle feature.

    (2)     Note.  A handle for operating a relatively movable portion of a
    connector is not included herein.


CLS 439/477
TXT For attachment of connector to overhead conductor:

    Electrical connector under subclass 476.1 wherein the particular means for
    maneuvering the device serves to assemble and electrically connect the
    device with an electric power line that is at a location physically higher
    and beyond the reach of the operative.

    (1)     Note.  An illumination lamp which may be gripped by a particular
    means for manipulation is included in this and the indented subclasses only
    if the envelope of the lamp is modified specifically for receipt of the
    manipulation means.


CLS 439/478
TXT With conductor inside handle or manipulating means:

    Electrical connector under subclass 477 wherein the particular means for
    maneuvering the device is generally tubular and includes a conductor
    therein for transmitting electrical current to the contact.


CLS 439/479
TXT Including handle operated screw to effect gripping of overhead conductor:

    Electrical connector under subclass 477 including means to be manipulated
    by a hand held implement comprising a helically ribbed member adapted to
    move a contact member into intimate engagement with the overhead electrical
    power line when turned about its axis.


CLS 439/480
TXT Distinct manipulating means; e.g., hot stick:

    Electrical connector under subclass 476.1 comprising a particular hand held
    implement that is separate from the connector for maneuvering the connector
    randomly into assembly and connection with another connector.


CLS 439/481
TXT Randomly manipulated implement:

    Electrical connector under subclass 476.1 intended to be coupled with a
    mating connector such that the assembly thereof comprises a unit that is
    maneuverable at the will of the operative.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, for a soldering iron complete with an electric
    heating element.


CLS 439/482
TXT Test probe:

    Electrical connector under subclass 481 comprising a generally rodlike
    member having an elongated portion adapted to be grasped by the hand of an
    operative for random manipulation thereof and having a contact* extending
    from the axial extremity thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The contact may comprise a coupling part* for interfitting
    with a particular mating part*

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169,    for a convertible test probe.

    219,    for a test probe convertible by internal change to selectively
    cooperate with a different contact.


CLS 439/483
TXT Coupling part:

    Electrical connector under subclass 476.1 specially adapted to mate or
    interengage with a specific complementary electrical connector.


CLS 439/484
TXT Including bale or loop:

    Coupling part under subclass 483 including a particular means to be engaged
    by an operator's hand or to be received by a hand held implement, which
    means is (a) arcuate in shape and secured to or integral with the remainder
    of the coupling part.


CLS 439/485
TXT WITH PROVISION TO DISSIPATE, REMOVE, OR BLOCK THE FLOW OF HEAT:

    Electrical connector under the class definition combined with means for
    spreading, lowering the level of, or preventing transmission of, thermal
    energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196,    for an electrical connector with a retainer or passageway for
    liquid material to dissipate, remove, or block the flow of heat.


CLS 439/486
TXT Tube clamp:

    Electrical connector under subclass 485 for use with the glass envelope of
    an electron tube and comprising opposing members adapted to grip the
    envelope to transfer thermal energy from the envelope to another location.

    (1)     Note.  The tube clamp of this subclass may transfer heat to a
    support panel for the tube socket.


CLS 439/487
TXT Distinct heat sink:

    Electrical connector under subclass 485 wherein a separate element is
    intimately attached to an electrical connector for absorbing or storing
    thermal energy.


CLS 439/488
TXT WITH INDICATING OR IDENTIFYING PROVISION:

    Electrical connector under the class definition combined with means for
    providing discernible denotation of a condition, e.g., visible or audible;
    or with provision notching information, e.g., recognizable indicia, etc.

    (1)     Note.  A designating color is considered to provide "notching
    information" for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315,    for a coupling part with coupling retaining means, comprising a
    bayonet having a coupling indicating indicia or signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, for the structure of a sign,
    label, tag or other identifying means which may be used in conjunction with
    a connector.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 656 for a connector combined
    with electrical signal means to indicate flow of electricity through a
    connector.


CLS 439/489
TXT Connection indicating provision:

    Electrical connector under subclass 488 wherein the means for providing
    visible, audible or other discernible denotation signals when a connector
    part is properly coupled to either another connector part or an electricity
    transmitting strandlike member or assembly.

    (1)     Note.  A signal that is turned off by the making of a connection is
    included herein.


CLS 439/490
TXT Indicator light:

    Electrical connector under subclass 489 wherein the signal means is a lamp
    which lights upon proper coupling of a connector part to either another
    connector part or an electricity transmitting strandlike member or assembly.

    (1)     Note.  The light also usually indicates a complete electrical
    circuit by the connector part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 656 for connector combined
    with electrical signal means to indicate flow of electricity through a
    connector.


CLS 439/491
TXT Distinct indicia bearing member:

    Electrical connector under subclass 488 wherein the means for providing
    visible denotation of a condition, nature or position of a connector is a
    discrete labeled element attached to the connector part.

    (1)     Note.  The label, per se, usually consists of numbers or letters.


CLS 439/492
TXT INCLUDING OR FOR USE WITH TAPE CABLE:

    Electrical connector under the class definition comprising the termination
    of or for attachment with an electricity transmitting cable* including more
    than three conductors wherein all the conductors are arranged in the same
    plane extending therealong.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     for a flexible preformed panel circuit with provision to conduct
    electrical current to another, superposed, panel circuit arrangement.

    77,     for an electrical connector that is part of a flexible preformed
    circuit arrangement.

    260,    for a coupling part with actuating means urging its contact to move
    laterally toward a mating part having an open slot to receive a tape cable.


CLS 439/493
TXT For connection to rigid preformed panel circuit arrangement, e.g., PCB:

    Electrical connector under subclass 492 for use with a prefabricated
    sheetlike part on which circuit elements are preplaced and fixed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55+,    for a printed circuit board in combination with an electrical
    connector.


CLS 439/494
TXT Single cable end into dual rows of contacts:

    Electrical connector under subclass 492 including first and second rows of
    electrical contacts* adapted to receive the termination of a flat cable and
    splay the conductors thereof such that a plurality of the conductors
    engages the first row contacts in a first plane parallel to the plane of
    the conductors and another plurality of the conductors engage the second
    group of contacts in a second plane distinct from and parallel with the
    first.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    405,    for an electrical connector including an insulation cutting contact
    having plural longitudinally and laterally staggered contacts, each formed
    by a slot between a pair of fingers.


CLS 439/495
TXT With mating connection region formed by bared cable:

    Electrical connector under subclass 492 particularly adapted to receive a
    cable end wherein the insulative material has been removed from a
    substantial portion thereof.


CLS 439/496
TXT Bared cable wrapped into U-shape about insertion projection:

    Electrical connector under subclass 495 including a member adapted to
    engage the terminal end of a conductor and force the conductor into a
    cooperating portion of the connector such that the conductor is formed at
    least 180_ about the forcing member.


CLS 439/497
TXT With shield, ground conductor, or ground commoning means:

    Electrical connector under subclass 492 combined with either (a) means to
    prevent radiation of electrical energy, (b) means intended to transmit and
    or maintain the device at earth potential, or (c) means to maintain
    multiple components at a neutral potential.


CLS 439/498
TXT Plural cables to multicontact connector or single cable branching to plural
    connectors:

    Electrical connector under subclass 492 comprising a device adapted to
    receive a plurality of distinct electrical cables* or comprising a
    plurality of electrical connectors for use with a single cable.

    (1)     Note.  "A plurality of electrical connectors for use with a single
    cable" may comprise:



    a.      Plural connectors along the side of the cable,

    b.      A connector at each of opposite ends of the cable,

    c.      A connector at each leg of a branched cable or,

    d.      Any combination of above.


CLS 439/499
TXT Including connector housing surrounding cable:

    Electrical connector under subclass 492 having an encasing structure
    adapted to enclose the connector and a portion or the electricity
    transmitting cable*.


CLS 439/500
TXT ENERGY CELL SUBSTITUTION DEVICE INCLUDING PLURAL CONTACTS (E.G., JUMPER) OR
    WITH SUPPORT MEANS FOR ENERGY CELL:

    Electrical connector under the class definition (a) including two or more
    means for making current transmitting contact and adapted to be used in
    place of a storage battery or (b) combined with means to hold a storage
    battery.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189,    for an electrical connector with or comprising a removable circuit
    modifying arrangement.

    502+,   for a flaccid bridging conductor combined with a plurality of
    electrical connectors.

    507+,   for a rigid bridging conductor with a contact surface at each end.


CLS 439/501
TXT WITH STORAGE MEANS FOR FLACCID CONDUCTOR:

    Electrical connector under the class definition intended to be used with a
    pliable strandlike member for transmitting electricity to the transmitting
    joint wherein the transmitting  member is generally elongated; combined
    with means to receive and accommodate temporarily a surplus portion of the
    electricity transmitting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for interrelated electrical connectors relatively movable during
    use, with storage means for flaccid conductor.


CLS 439/502
TXT WITH FLACCID CONDUCTOR AND WITH ADDITIONAL CONNECTOR SPACED THEREALONG:

    Electrical connector under the class definition combined with an
    electricity transmitting member that is generally elongated and readily
    yieldable transversely of its length to the force of gravity and with a
    second electrical connector under the class definition wherein the first
    and second connector are each electrically and physically attached to the
    transmitting member at distinct locations along the length of the
    transmitting member.

    (1)     Note.  A conductor shaped with a flexible loop portion is generally
    considered flaccid, even though it is disclosed as a bendable, stiff wire
    or spring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189,    for an electrical connector with or comprising a removable circuit
    modifying arrangement.

    500,    for an energy cell substitution device including plural contacts or
    for an electrical connector including support means for an energy cell.

    507+,   for a rigid bridging conductor with a contact surface at each end.


CLS 439/503
TXT Adapted to interconnect vehicles:

    Electrical connector under subclass 502 intended to be used with a first
    and a second land vehicle wherein one of the connectors is intended to
    engage one of the vehicles and the electricity transmitting member is
    intended to thereby transmit electricity from one of the vehicles to the
    other.


CLS 439/504
TXT Adapted to connect to a battery:

    Electrical connector under subclass 502 intended to be used with an
    electricity storage cell.


CLS 439/505
TXT And with third connector spaced therealong:

    Electrical connector under subclass 502 combined with a third electrical
    connector under the class definition.

    (1)     Note.  The third connector of this subclass may be electrically
    connected to either, both or neither of the other two connectors.


CLS 439/506
TXT Connector comprising pivoted spring biased clamp:

    Electrical connector under subclass 502 wherein the member for making
    electrical contact is adapted to grippingly engage the cooperating contact
    by yieldable urging of a resilient member.


CLS 439/507
TXT JUMPER (OR SHORT CIRCUITING COUPLING PART):

    Electrical connector under the class definition including a first and a
    second contact surface interconnected by a conductor (a) comprising a
    coupling part* to interfit with a particular mating connector and maintain
    two portions of that mating connector at the same electrical potential
    (i.e., bridge the portions of the mating connectors); or (b) to transport
    electricity from one connector to another.

    (1)     Note.  An "adapter" is capable of functioning to transmit
    electricity from one member to another; however that is not the intended
    function of an adapter.  Rather, the intended function of an adapter is to
    allow interfitting of two members that are not physically compatible.
    Therefore, an adapter is not included in this and the indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  A fuse or fuse holder is capable of functioning to transmit
    electricity from one another; however, that is not necessarily the intended
    function of a fuse or holder.  Rather usually, the intended function of a
    fuse or fuse holder is to limit the quantity of electricity flowing through
    the device.  Therefore, a fuse or fuse holder is not included in this and
    the indented subclasses unless it has the intended function of transmitting
    electricity (e.g., a jumper may include a fuse).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189,    for an electrical connector with or comprising a removable circuit
    modifying arrangement.

    500,    for an energy cell substitution device including plural contacts or
    for an electrical connector including support means for an energy cell.

    502+,   for a flaccid bridging conductor combined with a plurality of
    electrical connectors.


CLS 439/508
TXT Adapted to be used with power measuring meter:

    Electrical connector under subclass 507 particularly intended to bridge two
    contacts of a watt-hour measuring device or to bridge two contacts of a
    connector for receiving a watt-hour measuring device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    517,    for a power measuring meter coupling part, generally.


CLS 439/509
TXT Coupling part comprising short circuiting cover or manipulatable supporting
    means:

    Electrical connector under subclass 507 which is a coupling part* (a) to
    engage and cover at lest two contacts of a mating part and electrically
    connect (bridge) those two contacts; or (b) to provide structure to be
    received by an operative for random movement of the device and a mating
    part to which it is attached.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a fuse substitution coupling part, as
    well as a lamp substitution coupling part usable to supply current to
    another lamp wired in series therewith.


CLS 439/510
TXT To bridge post-type contacts:

    Electrical connector under subclass 507 to be used to transmit electrical
    current from one upstanding member to another upstanding member rigidly
    associated and in the same plane with the first.


CLS 439/511
TXT Including plural prongs:

    Electrical connector under subclass 507 comprising an electrical conductor
    between a first and a second male mating part.


CLS 439/512
TXT Including plural female contacts:

    Electrical connector under subclass 507 comprising an electrical conductor
    between a first and second mating parts having a recessed contact* for
    receiving the contact of each mating part.


CLS 439/513
TXT Having spring biased contact:

    Electrical connector under subclass 507 including a contact* with a portion
    thereof adapted to yield within its elastic limit to urge a portion thereof
    into engagement with another contact or including a contact and an
    additional member adapted to yield within its elastic limit to urge the
    contact into engagement with another contact.


CLS 439/514
TXT Parallel or supplemental nonshielded path:

    Electrical connector under subclass 507 wherein the conductor is to provide
    for passage of electrical current in addition to that of another conductor,
    and is not to function to prevent radiation of undesirable electrical
    energy therethrough.

    (1)     Note.  The device of this subclass may, for example, serve as a
    conductor (a) providing a passageway for electrical current in addition to
    another conductor, thereby reducing the overall impedance to flow or (b)
    bridging a section of another conductor to allow repair of that section
    without removal of the second and with no break in current flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    515,    for similar structure having an electrical connector at only one
    end of the conductor.


CLS 439/515
TXT PARALLEL OR SUPPLEMENTAL NON-SHIELDED PATH:

    Electrical connector under class definition combined with a conductor to
    provide for passage of electrical current in addition to that provided by
    another conductor, wherein the conductor is not to function to prevent
    radiation of undesirable electrical energy therethrough.

    (1)     Note.  The device of this subclass may, for example, serve as a
    conductor (a) providing a passageway for electrical current in addition to
    another conductor, thereby reducing the overall impedance to flow; or (b)
    bridging a section of another conductor to allow repair of that section
    without removal of the section and with no break in current flow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    514,    for similar structure including an electrical contact at each end
    of the conductor.


CLS 439/516
TXT WITH PROVISION TO ISOLATE CIRCUITRY BY SEVERANCE OF BRIDGING ELEMENT:

    Electrical connector under the class definition including a conductive
    component adapted to be torn or cut away therefrom to separate a portion of
    conductive material from electrical cooperation within the device.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a "duplex receptacle" having bridging
    structure such that the upper and lower outlets are in the same electrical
    circuit, wherein the bridging structure is adapted to be broken or severed
    to allow each of the outlets to be part of  different electrical circuit.
    A "duplex receptacle" is known as such in the building trade.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166+,   for an electrical connector convertible by internal change to
    selectively cooperate with a different contact.

    176,    for a female coupling part convertible to a male coupling part by
    addition of prong.

    177,    for a coupling part convertible to a distinct shape by addition of
    a nonremovable element or by removal of a nonreusable element.

    217+,   for a device having several types of connectors available without
    modification of the device, but structurally limited so that if one type is
    used, use of another will be prevented.

    518,    for a coupling part convertible to a different format by
    substitution of a different contact.


CLS 439/517
TXT POWER MEASURING METER COUPLING PART:

    Electrical connector under class definition comprising a coupling part*
    which is the base of a watt-hour measuring device or adapted to engage and
    be electrically connected with the base of a watt-hour measuring device.

    (1)     Note.  Watt-hour meters are somewhat standardized in overall
    configuration adapted to be mounted on the wall of a permanent structure,
    presenting a generally circular base, and having four, five or more
    vertically disposed blade type contacts extending from the base thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146,    for a contact preventer or retractable cover part adapted to fit
    between coupled connectors (e.g., power measuring meter).

    167,    for an electrical connector convertible by internal change to
    selectively cooperate with a different contact, comprising a connector for
    a power measuring meter.

    508,    for a jumper adapted to be used with a power measuring meter.


CLS 439/518
TXT COUPLING PART CONVERTIBLE TO DIFFERENT FORMAT BY SUBSTITUTION OF DIFFERENT
    CONTACT:

    Electrical connector under the class definition comprising a coupling part*
    particularly adapted to have a contact* thereof removed and to receive as a
    replacement therefor another contact of different shape than the first so
    that the device will interfit with a different mating part*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166+,   for an electrical connector convertible by internal change to
    selectively cooperate with a different contact.

    176,    for a female coupling part convertible to a male coupling part by
    addition of prong.

    177,    for a coupling part convertible to a distinct shape by addition of
    a nonremovable element or by removal of a nonreusable element.

    217+,   for a device having several types of connectors available without
    modification of the device, but structurally limited so that if one type is
    in use, use of another will be prevented.

    516,    for an electrical connector with provision to isolate circuitry by
    severance of a bridging element.


CLS 439/519
TXT WITH PROVISION TO RESTRICT ENVIRONMENT EFFECTS:

    Electrical connector under the class definition combined with means to
    prevent or inhibit electrochemical oxidation or the gradual chemical
    disintegration of the connector, or prevent or inhibit exposure of the
    connector to a detrimental gas or liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    190+,   for an electrical connector having a retainer or passageway which
    may restrict environmental effects.

    271+,   for a connector having a gasket or packing for a joint between
    coupled parts to exclude corrosive vapors.

    387+,   for a connector having cutting or scraping means for the purpose of
    removing corrosion.

    524,    for a connector made of corrosion resistant conducting material.


CLS 439/520
TXT Sacrificial material:

    Electrical connector under subclass 519 wherein the means to restrict
    environmental effects comprises a portion thereof adapted to preferentially
    electrochemically oxidize or chemically disintegrate instead of or prior to
    other connector components.

    (1)     Note.  The material may be a replaceable part of the connector or
    made of a substance which corrodes more rapidly than the other connector
    materials.


CLS 439/521
TXT Including contact cover or case:

    Electrical connector under subclass 519 with means to inhibit exposure
    thereof comprising a sealed housing wherein the electricity transmitting
    joint is encased to substantially seal out gas and moisture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125+,   for an electrical connector having a spark or glow plug cover.

    201+,   for a connector combined with a liquid filled storage chamber
    encompassing the contact.


CLS 439/522
TXT Connector comprising or mating with tapered post, e.g., storage battery
    terminal:

    Electrical connector under subclass 521 comprising an elongated, rodlike
    contact having a conical electricity transmitting surface; or comprising a
    conical socket for receiving such a rodlike contact.


CLS 439/523
TXT Having elastic or heat shrunk cable grip:

    Electrical connector under subclass 521 wherein at least part of the
    sealing structure comprises a sleeve or member adapted to contract
    resiliently or upon application of heat thereto to tightly surround an
    electricity transmitting strandlike member or assembly.


CLS 439/524
TXT CORROSION RESISTANT CONDUCTING MATERIAL OTHER THAN LEAD:

    Electrical connector under the class definition in which an electricity
    transmitting member is made from a substance other than substantially pure
    metallic lead, to prevent or inhibit electrochemical oxidation or the
    gradual disintegration of the connector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    519+,   for a connector combined with means to prevent or inhibit corrosion.


CLS 439/525
TXT FOR DUAL INLINE PACKAGE (DIP):

    Electrical connector under the class definition intended to be used with a
    very small panel circuit arrangement on which circuit elements are
    preplaced and fixed including a first and a second straight row of three or
    more contacts on each of two opposite marginal extremities.

    (1)     Note. The member with which the connector of this subclass is to be
    used includes circuitry that is integrated as a package in which the
    circuitry is not readily accessible.

    (2)     Note.  "Very small panel circuit arrangement", implies that the
    member is a prefabricated sheetlike part on which circuit elements are
    preplaced and fixed, (i.e., a printed circuit) and that circuitry is so
    small that, if it were exposed, its details could not ordinarily be seen by
    the naked eye.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70+,    for a preformed panel circuit arrangement with provision to conduct
    electricity from panel circuit arrangement with provision to conduct
    electricity from panel circuit to another panel circuit including a dual
    inline package (DIP).

    264,    for a coupling part with actuating means urging contact to move
    laterally with respect to rest of coupling and toward mating part
    comprising a contractile receptacle for receiving a dual inline package
    (DIP).

    330+,   for an electrical connector with coupling movement-actuating means
    or retaining means in addition to contact of coupling part for receiving a
    dual inline package (DIP).

    526,    for an aligning means for a dual inline package (DIP).


CLS 439/526
TXT ALIGNING MEANS FOR DUAL IN-LINE PACKAGE (DIP):

    Device under the class definition for directing contacts of a very small
    panel circuit arrangement on which the circuit elements are preplaced and
    fixed including a first and a second straight row of three or more contacts
    on each side of two opposite marginal extremities.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not require that the claim set forth a
    contact; rather, included herein is a structure to be used in conjunction
    with a DIP wherein neither the DIP nor mating structure is claimed.

    (2)     Note.  The member with which the device of this subclass is to be
    used includes circuitry that is integrated as a package in which the
    circuitry is not readily accessible.

    (3)     Note.  "Very small panel circuit arrangement", implies that the
    member is a prefabricated sheetlike part on which circuit elements are
    preplaced and fixed, (i.e., a printed circuit) and that circuitry is so
    small that, if it were exposed, its details could not ordinarily be seen by
    the naked eye.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70+,    for a preformed panel circuit arrangement with provision to conduct
    electricity from panel circuit to another panel circuit including a dual
    inline package (DIP)

    264,    for a coupling part with actuating means urging contact to move
    laterally with respect to rest of coupling part and toward mating part
    comprising a contractile receptacle for receiving a dual inline package
    (DIP).

    330+,   for an electrical connector with coupling movement-actuating means
    or retaining means in addition to contact of coupling part for receiving a
    dual inline package (DIP).

    525,    for an electrical connector for a dual inline package (DIP),
    generally.


CLS 439/527
TXT WITH SUPPORTING MEANS FOR COUPLING PART:

    Electrical connector under class definition comprising a coupling part*
    combined with particular means for holding or retaining the complete
    coupling part in operational position and against the force of gravity.

    (1)     Note.  For classification herein the coupling part is either
    attached directly to some static structure such as a wall or floor, or is
    affixed to some support or base member, such as an outlet box, panel
    member, or chassis surface.

    (2)     Note.  Mere attachment of a contact portion of a coupling part to
    the insulation is not considered to be supporting means for this and the
    indented subclasses, in that the insulation is actually part of the
    coupling part itself.

    (3)     Note.  The device of this subclass must be a complete coupling part
    without the supporting means.  However, the retaining means may be a
    component part of another "connector".  For example, a lamp socket is a
    coupling part; a device having a screw to hold such a socket to a base and
    to a supporting panel is to be found in this and the indented subclasses
    even though that screw also functions as a contact* for connection with
    another distinct connector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89,     for an electrical connector including an elastomeric or nonmetallic
    conductive, inductive shield or arc suppressing means.

    190+,   for similar sealing means used with an electrical connector with
    means for retaining or having a passageway for fluent material.

    230,    for a coupling part to receive a fluorescent or neon lamp having
    sealing element or material for cooperation with a coupled lamp.

    271+,   for an electrical connector with a sealing element or material for
    cooperation with a coupled connector, generally.

    283,    for the sealed interfitting of coupled connector part housings.

    384+,   for a electrical connector with cushioning support structure.

    586+,   for any connector having a contact carried by flexible or resilient
    insulation and having a sealing joint between coupled parts.

    604+,   for a connector with an external cable or conductor embedded in
    insulative sealing material.


CLS 439/528
TXT Nonuse covering means, e.g., connector storage means:

    Coupling part under subclass 527 wherein the holding or retaining means
    comprises means to encase the coupling part when that part is not in
    engagement with a mating part.


CLS 439/529
TXT And including appurtenant means for supporting other structure:

    Coupling part under subclass 527 combined with structure to hold against
    gravity structure in addition to the coupling part assemblage.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is an electrical connector and additional
    housing structure fixedly attached thereto intended to support another
    structure, such as a lamp.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein is an electrical connector and a hook for
    supporting a flexible suspension means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    313,    for a coupling part having appurtenant means for supporting other
    structure with a relatively pivotable concentric movement-actuating or
    retaining ring.

    334,    for a coupling part having appurtenant means for supporting other
    structure with a relatively pivotable concentric movement-actuating means
    or retaining means in addition to the contact thereof.

    343,    for a coupling part having appurtenant means for supporting other
    structure comprising a coupling part movable about an axis, generally, with
    coupling movement-actuating means or retaining means in addition to the
    contact thereof.

    351,    for a coupling part having appurtenant means for supporting other
    structure including a retaining means comprising a finger or stretchable
    sleeve.

    361,    for a coupling part having appurtenant means for supporting other
    structure including a retaining means comprising a helically-threaded
    member.

    450,    for an electrical connector combined with means to support the load
    of a suspended lamp wherein tension is applied to the conductor cable such
    that the load of the cable is not transmitted to the contact of the
    connector.

    520,    for an electrical connector combined with a flexible suspension
    means to support that connector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, for a supporting structure combined with an electrical
    connector if the support is to function independently of the electrical
    connector.  For example, a wall hanging lamp base that receives a portion
    of the support of the lamp base from a contact that fits into a wall
    receptacle is not considered to function independently of the connector and
    is to be found in this class (Class 439).  On the other hand, a similar
    wall hanging lamp base that is secured totally to the wall for support and
    includes a connector to be plugged into an independent wall receptacle is
    to be found in Class 248.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 382+ for any combination of a support with
    significant structure of a light source or a light source support having
    structural features limited to use with a light source support having
    structural features limited to use with a light source.  See the line
    expressed in the definition of Class 362, subclasses 382+.


CLS 439/530
TXT And including electrical contact for load bearing:

    Coupling part under subclass 529 wherein the electricity conducting joint
    includes a contact* for transmitting electricity, wherein the contact is
    adapted to interfit with a mating contact member and to support the
    coupling part and the additional structure, at least partially, against the
    force of gravity.


CLS 439/531
TXT Flexible suspension means, e.g., chain or strand:

    Coupling part under subclass 527 wherein the means for holding or retaining
    the coupling part is generally limp and capable of exerting tensile forces
    only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    450,    for a drop cord attaching means comprising a stress relieving means.

    576,    for similar structure wherein the suspension means is not flexible.


CLS 439/532
TXT Interfitting with channel or double rail:

    Coupling part under subclass 527 wherein the means for holding or retaining
    the coupling part is particularly adapted to engage a retaining groove or
    both of a pair of parallel bars such that the coupling part may selectively
    be positioned at any of an infinite number of locations along the groove or
    bars.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32+,    for interrelated connectors relatively movable in straight line
    during use.

    121+,   for an electrical connector for interfitting with an uninterrupted
    support rail or an uninterrupted contact.


CLS 439/533
TXT Also supporting mating part:

    Coupling part under subclass 527 wherein the means for holding or retaining
    the coupling part serves in addition to hold or retain the connector
    intended to mate with the coupling part.


CLS 439/534
TXT Universally or pivotally adjustable supporting elements:

    Coupling part under subclass 527 including a first and a relatively
    positionable second holding or retaining means wherein (a1) the two means
    are connected together such that neither can rotate more than 360_ but one
    can pivot with respect to the other about an nonrotary axis; (a2) the two
    means are connected together such that rotation of one about a first axis
    is accompanied by corresponding rotation of the other about a second axis
    which intersects the first axis at a point, wherein the means are able to
    pivot about any other axis passing through that point; or (b) one of the
    means moves about a fixed axis with respect to the other; wherein the
    movement is to reposition one of the holding or retaining means with
    respect to the other.

    (1)     Note.  The pivotal movement of this subclass is controlled; e.g., a
    pliable connecting rod allowing similar movement is not included herein.

    (2)     Note.  Under clause (a1) of this definition, the end of the movable
    member opposite from the pivot can move in the manner of a pencil when
    writing a letter "O".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6+,     for relatively movable conductors arranged for universal movement
    including relatively moving mutually engaging contacts to transmit
    electricity during such movement.

    11+,    for relatively movable conductors arranged for pivotal movement
    including relatively moving mutually engaging contacts to transmit
    electricity during such movement.

    164+,   for an electrical connector including two components pivotally
    attached together for relative movement, combined with an intermediate
    pliable conductor.


CLS 439/535
TXT Outlet box:

    Coupling part under subclass 527 wherein the holding or retaining means
    comprises a container for encasing the coupling part, which container is
    particularly adapted to be inserted into the wall to its interior through
    the wall or ceiling or a building with an access way to its interior
    through the wall or ceiling and wherein the coupling part intended to
    transmit electrical power to a mating part through the access way.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    536+,   for a coupling part combined with the face plate of an outlet box,
    but not including the encasing portion of the outlet box.


CLS 439/536
TXT Supporting means comprising face plate or closure member for outlet box:

    Electrical connector under subclass 527 wherein the holding or retaining
    means comprises the front side of a container for encasing an electric
    power supply for normal household use, or comprising a planar member for
    enclosing such a container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    535,    for a coupling part combined with an outlet box.


CLS 439/537
TXT For ceiling box:

    Coupling part under subclass 536 wherein the holding or retaining means is
    intended to be used in conjunction with an encasing container in the
    overhead, horizontal portion of a room to pride access to the outlet from
    beneath the horizontal portion.


CLS 439/538
TXT Outlet receptacle mounting flange:

    Coupling part under subclass 527 comprising a power supply connector for
    normal household use wherein the holding or retaining means is a generally
    thin panel extending laterally from the coupling part to be detachably
    secured to a container therefor.


CLS 439/539
TXT Yoke:

    Coupling part under subclass 538 wherein the holding or retaining means is
    generally longer than the transverse dimension of the power supply
    connector, is U-shaped to embrace the body of the connector, and is
    attached to the connector at a central portion thereof such that opposite
    ends thereof are accessible for detachable securement to the container.


CLS 439/540.1
TXT Supporting plural, independent coupling parts:

    Coupling part under subclass 527 wherein the means is also for holding or
    retaining another distinct coupling part.


CLS 439/541
TXT Plural lamp or electron tube sockets:

    Coupling part under subclass 540.1 particularly adapted to detachably
    receive and electrically couple to a first and a second member each of
    which is to radiate light, or comprises electrical amplifying or switching
    means utilizing an environment excluding, vacuum maintaining envelope.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56+,    for a preformed panel circuit arrangement with an electrical
    connector for connection to a lamp or electron tube.

    168,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base convertible by internal
    change to selectively cooperate with a different contact.

    220,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base adapted to engage a
    mating connector in alternative manners.

    226+,   for a coupling part to receive a fluorescent or neon lamp.

    280,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base having a resilient
    housing for sealing with a coupled connector.

    336,    for lamp or electron socket adapted to receive a cooperating lamp
    or tube by bayonet action, including a movement-actuating means or
    retaining means in addition to the contact of the socket.

    375,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base with a guiding means for
    mating of a coupling part.

    414,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base including a conductor
    against the cutting contact.

    419,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base including a conductor
    sheath penetrating contact adapted to cut to engage a first conductor and
    to also engage (and interconnect) a second conductor.

    558,    for a lamp electron tube socket extending into a supporting panel.

    602,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base including flexing
    insulation.

    611+,   for a connector or contact having vitreous-type envelope secured
    thereto (e.g., a base of a lamp or vacuum tube).

    661+,   for a plural contact coupling part including a screw-threaded
    contact and insulation other than the conductor sheath.


CLS 439/541.5
TXT Stacked right-angle connector for use on printed circuit board (i.e., PCB):

    Coupling part under subclass 540.1 wherein one of the coupling parts (a)
    includes plural contacts in lateral alignment, (b) is particularly adapted
    to be mounted on a printed circuit board, and (c) extends first normally
    away from the plane of the PCB, then parallel to said plane.


CLS 439/542
TXT Elongated member supporting connector at its extremity or member for
    interfitting with such an elongated member:

    Coupling part under subclass 527 wherein the means for holding or retaining
    is generally rodlike and is intended to support the connector at its
    greatest axial extent; or is the structure for making structural engagement
    with a generally rodlike member intended to make that engagement at its
    greatest axial extent.


CLS 439/543
TXT Threaded shaft or tube:

    Coupling part under subclass 542 wherein the rodlike member may be hollow
    along its axis and a helically ribbed at its greatest extent for
    interfitting with a cooperating portion of the held or retained structure.


CLS 439/544
TXT Coupling part or mating part extending into panel  opening:

    Coupling part under subclass 527 wherein the holding or retaining means
    comprises or engages a generally planar sheet having an opening
    therethrough wherein a contact of the coupling part or of a mating part* is
    intended to extend through that opening when the parts are mated.


CLS 439/545
TXT With securing by movement of coupling part in plane of panel:

    Coupling part under subclass 544 secured to the planar sheet by first being
    passed through the opening and then being moved in a direction parallel to
    the sheet for locking engagement therewith.


CLS 439/546
TXT Movement about connective axis; e.g., bayonet:

    Coupling part under subclass 545 wherein the movement parallel to the sheet
    is movement about an axis passing through the device and perpendicular to
    the sheet.


CLS 439/547
TXT To preformed panel circuit arrangement:

    Coupling part under subclass 546 wherein the planar sheet is a component on
    which circuit elements are preplaced and fixed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55+,    for a prefabricated sheetlike part on which circuit elements are
    fixed, wherein the circuit elements are claimed as a part of the
    combination.


CLS 439/548
TXT With sealing to panel:

    Coupling part under subclass 546 having provision to close off passage of
    moisture, dust, or other foreign matter between the coupling part and the
    sheet.

    (1)     Note.  The disclosure of the device herein must specify restriction
    of the passage to exclude foreign matter.


CLS 439/549
TXT Resilient gripping of panel:

    Coupling part under subclass 546 including means adapted to flex within its
    elastic limit to bias the coupling part with respect to the planar sheet to
    enhance engagement therewith.


CLS 439/550
TXT With opening encircling retaining collar:

    Coupling part under subclass 544 combined with an annular member adapted to
    engage the coupling part and the sheet and secure them together; wherein
    the annular member is adapted to extend about and be coaxial with the
    opening through the generally planar sheet.

    (1)     Note.  The device of this subclass must comprise an electrical
    connector, the collar may also comprise an electrical connector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    551,    for a collar having a concentric thread opening or insert for a
    retaining screw.


CLS 439/551
TXT Concentrically screw threaded collar:

    Coupling part under subclass 550 wherein the annular member is helically
    ribbed about its axis for interfitting with corresponding helical grooves
    on the device.

    (1)     Note.  A part of the collar, e.g., an insert, may be helically
    ribbed along the collar axis to receive a screw.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    550,    for a collar having a concentric opening without screw threads, for
    a retaining screw.


CLS 439/552
TXT Including resilient securing:

    Coupling Part under subclass 544 including a component adapted to be
    stressed within its elastic limit to serve to prevent undesired separation
    of the coupling part and the planar sheet.

    (1)     Note.  A coupling part forced into an opening in the sheet to
    prevent undesired separation (i.e., force fitted) is included herein only
    if there is disclosure of a component being stressed with its elastic limit.


CLS 439/553
TXT By resilient member on panel:

    Coupling part under subclass 552 wherein the component stressed within its
    elastic limit is an integral part of the planar sheet.

    (1)     Note.  A component permanently secured to the coupling part is
    considered to be an integral part thereof.


CLS 439/554
TXT Panel circuit arrangement:

    Coupling part under subclass 552 wherein the planar sheet is a component on
    which circuit elements are preplaced and fixed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55+,    for prefabricated sheetlike part on which circuit elements are
    fixed, wherein the circuit elements are claimed as a part of the
    combination.


CLS 439/555
TXT With means to deform or lock resilient means:

    Coupling part under subclass 552 combined with additional structure to (a)
    stress the component adapted to be stressed within its elastic limit beyond
    its elastic limit at a localized point, or (b) to block movement of the
    component adapted to be stressed within its elastic limit to prevent
    separation of the device from the sheet.


CLS 439/556
TXT With sealing to panel:

    Coupling part under subclass 552 having provision to close off passage
    between the coupling part and the sheet of moisture, dust, or other foreign
    matter.

    (1)     Note.  The disclosure of the device herein must specify restriction
    of the passage to exclude foreign matter.


CLS 439/557
TXT Laterally flexed finger on coupling part:

    Coupling part under subclass 552 wherein the component adapted to be
    stressed within its elastic limit is an integral part thereof, is elongated
    such that a remote portion engages the sheet, and is adapted to be stressed
    within its elastic limit normally of its elongation.

    (1)     Note.  A resilient finger permanently secured to the coupling part
    is considered to be an integral part thereof.


CLS 439/558
TXT Including lamp or electron tube socket:

    Coupling part under subclass 557 particularly adapted to detachably receive
    and electronically couple to a member intended to radiate light, or to a
    member including electrical amplifying or switching means utilizing an
    environment excluding, vacuum envelope.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56+,    for a preformed panel circuit arrangement with an electrical for
    connection to a lamp or electron tube.

    168,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base convertible by internal
    change to selectively cooperate with a different contact.

    220,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base adapted to engage a
    mating connector in alternative manners.

    226+,   for a coupling part to receive a fluorescent or neon lamp.

    280,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base having a resilient
    housing for sealing with a coupled connector.

    336,    for a lamp or electron tube socket adapted to receive a cooperating
    lamp or tube by bayonet action, including a movement-actuating means or
    retaining means in addition to the contact of the socket.

    356,    for a lamp or electron tube socket including a retaining means
    comprising a finger or stretchable sleeve resiliently urged laterally of
    connection with a mating part.

    375,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base with a guiding means for
    mating of a coupling part.

    414,    for a lamp to electron tube socket or base including a conductor
    sheath penetrating contact and screw means to move the conductor against
    the cutting contact.

    419,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base including a conductor
    sheath penetrating contact adapted to cut to engage a first conductor and
    to also engage (and interconnect) a second conductor.

    541,    for plural lamp or electron tube sockets including supporting means
    therefor.

    602,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base including flexing
    insulation.

    611+,   for a connector or contact having vitreous-type envelope secured
    thereto (e.g., a base of a lamp or vacuum tube).

    661+,   for a plural contact coupling part including a screw-threaded
    contact and insulation other than the conductor sheath.


CLS 439/559
TXT With sealing to panel:

    Coupling part under subclass 544 having provision to close off passage
    between the coupling part and the sheet of moisture, dust, or other foreign
    matter.

    (1)     Note.  The disclosure of the device herein must specify restriction
    of the passage to exclude foreign matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 602+ for a static contact seal intended for use on a
    pipe, conduit or cable.


CLS 439/560
TXT Coupling part secured to panel by stressing beyond elastic limit:

    Coupling part under subclass 544 attached to the generally planar sheet by
    permanent deformation of a member.

    (1)     Note.  Permanent deformation is such that the member will not
    resiliently return to its original shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    741+,   for a connector comprising insulation other than a conductor sheath
    with a metallic connector or contact secured to the insulation by permanent
    deformation of the metallic part.

    870,    for a metallic connector or contact having means for securing to
    unclaimed insulation other than a conductor sheath by permanent deformation
    of the metallic part.


CLS 439/561
TXT By stressing panel beyond elastic limit:

    Coupling part under subclass 560 wherein the member deformed for attachment
    is the generally planar sheet.


CLS 439/562
TXT Coupling part including panel engaging shoulder:

    Coupling part under subclass 544 having a portion intended to extend
    laterally beyond the margin of the opening in the generally planar sheet
    and intended to supportingly contact a planar surface of the sheet.


CLS 439/563
TXT Comprising detachable or adjustable flange:

    Coupling part under subclass 562 wherein the laterally extending sheet
    contact portion is a relatively thin, flat member having a planar surface
    to engage a substantial portion about the planar surface of the sheet
    outside the margin of the opening and is either removable from the device
    or is positionable with respect thereto.


CLS 439/564
TXT Directly attached to panel by elongated fastener in tension (e.g., rivet,
    bolt, or screw):

    Coupling part under subclass 562 secured to the rigid body by a generally
    rodlike member subjected primarily to tensile forces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    573,    for similar structure wherein the coupling part or mating part does
    not extend into a panel opening.


CLS 439/565
TXT With opposed, cooperating panel engaging member:

    Coupling part under subclass 562 combined with an element intended to
    contact the sheet on an opposing planar surface from that contacted by the
    laterally extending portion such that the planar sheet is gripped between
    the element and the laterally extending portion.


CLS 439/566
TXT For permanent attachment to panel, e.g., by welding:

    Coupling part under subclass 562 intended to be secured to the planar sheet
    in a manner requiring destruction for removal.

    (1)     Note.  The device of this subclass has not yet been secured to the
    panel upon such securement, since it is of a permanent nature, the panel
    becomes a part of the device.


CLS 439/567
TXT Having resilient means engaging panel opening:

    Coupling part under subclass 527 wherein the holding or retaining means
    comprises a generally planar sheet having an opening therethrough, the
    device including a component adapted to be strained within its elastic
    limit and engage the margin of the opening by yieldable urging thereof as
    the device tends to return to its original shape to prevent undesired
    separation of the coupling part (or mating part) and the planar sheet.

    (1)     Note.  A coupling part with a securing means forced into an opening
    in the sheet to prevent undesired separation (press fit) is included herein.


CLS 439/568
TXT Coupling part supported by randomly manipulated appliance (e.g., electric
    iron):

    Coupling part under subclass 527 comprising a component part of an
    electricity using member that is the last unit of an electrical circuitry
    and is adapted to be moved about at the will of an operative.


CLS 439/569
TXT Flange on coupling part:

    Coupling part under subclass 527 having a relatively thin, flat portion
    extending outwardly from the coupling part, having a planar surface adapted
    to supportingly engage the holding or retaining means.


CLS 439/570
TXT Plural detachable flanges:

    Coupling part under subclass 569 including a first and a second relatively
    thin, flat portion extending outwardly from the coupling part, each having
    a planar surface adapted to supportingly engage the holding or retaining
    means, wherein the first and second portions are removable from the device.


CLS 439/571
TXT Comprising or for use with supporting panel:

    Coupling part under subclass 527 that is, or is adapted to be secured to, a
    rigid body having a relatively flat surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 230+ for a joint or connection
    for securing a rodlike body to a base or plate member; and see section IV
    of the definition of this class (439).


CLS 439/572
TXT Conductor extending into panel opening:

    Coupling part under subclass 571 wherein the rigid body includes a
    passageway therethrough and wherein a member for transmitting electrical
    current to the coupling part is adapted to pass therethrough.


CLS 439/573
TXT Directly attached to panel by elongated fastener in tension (e.g., rivet,
    bolt, or screw):

    Coupling part under subclass 571 secured to the rigid body by a generally
    rodlike member subjected primarily to tensile forces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    564,    for similar structure including a coupling part extending into a
    panel opening.


CLS 439/574
TXT Means to clamp:

    Coupling part under subclass 527 including a first engaging surface and a
    second opposing engaging surface adapted to cooperate and grip other
    structure therebetween and thereby support the coupling part.


CLS 439/575
TXT Resilient clamp:

    Coupling part under subclass 574 wherein both gripping surfaces are
    component parts of the coupling part and are drawn into gripping
    relationship by flexure of a member with its elastic limit.


CLS 439/576
TXT To be engaged by suspension means:

    Coupling part under subclass 527 wherein the means for holding or retaining
    the device is intended to in turn be engaged by a member that is physically
    limited to support the device against gravity by the application of tensile
    forces only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    450,    for a drop cord attaching means comprising a stress relieving means.

    531,    for similar structure in combination with a suspension means that
    is flexible.


CLS 439/577
TXT COMBINED WITH NONELECTRICAL FEATURE:

    Electrical connector under the class definition in combination with
    additional structure (1) not relating to the electrical connector and (2a)
    not provided for elsewhere, or (2b) of such limited detail as to fail to
    meet the requirements of the Class providing for the additional structure.


CLS 439/578
TXT INCLUDING OR FOR USE WITH COAXIAL CABLE:

    Electrical connector under the class definition having one or more
    contacts* adapted to be either (a) electrically secured in one-to-one
    relationship to one or more conductors* of an elongated plural-conductor
    cable* or (b) electrically coupled to one or more contacts of a
    complementary mating connector, the contacts of which being securable in
    one-to-one relationship to one or more conductors of an elongated
    plural-conductor cable, the elongated cable having an inner conductor
    centrally disposed within the cable and extending along the longitudinal
    axis thereof and further having at least one tubular outer conductor
    concentrically surrounding and fixedly spaced apart from the inner
    conductor, and wherein the conductors of the cable are electrically
    insulated from one another.

    (1)     Note.  The term "coaxial cable" is interpreted to encompass any
    form of coaxial transmission line having the defined coaxial configuration
    of conductors and may include, for example, a cable having flexible coaxial
    conductors with flexible insulation interposed between the conductors or
    rigid conductors disposed in spaced coaxial relationship.

    (2)     Note.  A connector of this and the indented subclasses usually has
    a contact configuration similar to the coaxial cables used therewith in
    that the connector often has an inner contact centrally disposed within the
    connector and has a tubular-shaped outer contact concentrically surrounding
    and fixedly spaced apart from the inner contact by means of an intermediate
    layer of insulation.

    (3)     Note.  The inner, centrally-disposed conductor of the cable may
    also be tubular in cross-section, in which case the cable comprises inner
    and outer tubular conductors held in fixed spaced-apart concentric relation
    from one another.

    (4)     Note.  The outer tubular conductor of a coaxial cable is often used
    as an electrostatic or inductive shield for the inner signal-carrying
    conductor (or conductors) or used as the common return or grounded line of
    an electrical circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92+,    particularly subclasses 98+ for an electrical connector having a
    specific provision to electrically connect a portion thereof to the earth
    for the purpose of providing a safety ground for the electrically connector.

    274,    275 and 279, for an electrical connector, which may be of a coaxial
    cable type, combined with a distinct cable sheath sealing element or
    material.

    394,    for a coaxial-cable type electrical connector having a cutter-type
    electrical contact for piercing the insulative sheath of a coaxial cable.

    607+,   for an electrical connector adapted to be electrically connected to
    a conductor or cable other than a coaxial cable and which provides
    electrostatic or inductive shielding or internally disposed contacts, and
    see Note (1) appended to subclass 607.


CLS 439/579
TXT Having means for interconnecting outer conductors of three or more cables:

    Electrical connector under subclass 578 including means for electrically
    joining the corresponding outer conductor type cables so that the
    respective outer conductors are maintained at a common electrical potential.


CLS 439/580
TXT For cable having three or more coaxial conductors:

    Electrical connector under subclass 578 particularly adapted to be
    mechanically and electrically connected to a coaxial-conductor type cable
    having at least three coaxially disposed conductors or connected to a
    mating connector which has, or is adapted to have, such a cable connected
    thereto.


CLS 439/581
TXT Adapted to join cable conductors to different type conductors (e.g., to PCB
    conductors):

    Electrical connector under subclass 578 particularly adapted to
    electrically connect at least one of the conductors of a
    coaxial-conductor-type cable to a conductor other than a conductor of
    another coaxial-conductor-type cable.

    (1)     Note.  The connector may, for example, electrically connect the
    outer conductor of a coaxial cable to a planar conductive shield or ground
    panel; or it may electrically connect the conductors disposed on a printed
    circuit board, to conductive contacts of an electrical circuit component,
    or to individual wire-type conductors.


CLS 439/582
TXT Adapted to secure cables perpendicular to one another or a cable
    perpendicular to coupling axis:

    Electrical connector under subclass 578 either (a) having means for
    securing thereto and electrically interconnecting two
    coaxial-conductor-type cables in such a manner that the longitudinal axes
    of such secured cables are disposed at a right angle to one another; or (b)
    comprising a coupling part* having the longitudinal axis along which it is
    to be coupled to its mating coupling part* disposed at a right angle to the
    longitudinal axis of a coaxial-conductor type-cable secured thereto.


CLS 439/583
TXT Having screw-threaded or screw-thread operated cable grip:

    Electrical connector under subclass 578 wherein the coaxial-conductor-type
    cable is clamped or secured by and directly to the connector; and the
    clamping or securing force is caused by the motion resulting from the
    rotation of a screw-threaded member carried by the connector.


CLS 439/584
TXT With radially compressible cable grip:

    Electrical connector under subclass 583 wherein at least a portion of the
    coaxial-conductor-type cable is clamped or secured either within or between
    radially movable means operated by the screw-threaded member.

    (1)     Note.  The radially movable clamping or securing means may be a
    unitary part of the screw-threaded member.


CLS 439/585
TXT Having crimpable metallic cable conductor grip:

    Electrical connector under subclass 578 wherein the coaxial-conductor-type
    cable is clamped or secured directly to the connector by a conductive
    clamping or securing part comprised of malleable metallic material; the
    cable being conductively clamped or secured to the connector by permanently
    bending or deforming the malleable part over or onto a conductor of the
    cable.


CLS 439/586
TXT COUPLING PART INCLUDING FLEXING INSULATION:

    Electrical connector under the class definition comprising a coupling part*
    in part of yieldable, nonconductive material; wherein the yieldability is
    utilized in the use or assembly of the device.

    (1)     Note.  An electrical connector having flexible insulation, e.g., of
    rubber, is included in this subclass only if the flexibility of the rubber
    is "utilized in the use or assembly of the device", e.g., to effect a
    tight, sealing fit; to allow the clip enclosed therein to be manually
    gripped; etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for interrelated electrical connectors relatively movable during
    use with antivibtration mounting.

    86+,    for an electrical connector having an elastomeric or nonmetallic
    conductive portion.

    89,     for an electrical connector including an elastomeric or nonmetallic
    conductive, inductive shield or arc suppressing means.

    190+,   for similar sealing means used with an electrical connector with
    means for retaining or having a passageway for fluent material.

    230,    for a coupling part to receive a fluorescent or neon lamp having
    sealing element or material for cooperation with a coupled lamp.

    271+,   for an electrical connector with a sealing element or material for
    cooperation with a coupled connector, generally.

    283,    for the sealed interfitting of coupled connector part housings.

    382+,   for an electrical connector including flexing insulation, generally.

    527+,   for a wall, plate or panel mounting or attaching means with a
    connector part sealed thereto.

    604+,   for a connector with an external cable or conductor embedded in
    insulative sealing material.


CLS 439/587
TXT Sealing:

    Electrical connector under subclass 586 wherein the yieldable nonconductive
    material serves to close off passage through the device of moisture, dust,
    or other foreign matter.

    (1)     Note.  The disclosure of the coupling part herein must specify
    restriction of the passage to exclude foreign matter.


CLS 439/588
TXT Resilient, coupling part encircling jacket:

    Coupling part under subclass 587 including an encasing member thereabout of
    yieldable nonconductive material serving to close off passage to the
    interior of the device of moisture, dust or other foreign matter.


CLS 439/589
TXT Within rigid coupling part shell:

    Coupling part under subclass 587 wherein the nonconductive sealing material
    is within a generally inflexible, encasing housing.


CLS 439/590
TXT Storage strip for plurality of coupling parts:

    Coupling part under subclass 586 wherein the yieldable nonconductive
    material serves to support the coupling part for subsequent use and also
    serves to support additional similar coupling parts for subsequent use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    885,    for a strip of detachable contacts, generally.


CLS 439/591
TXT Coupling part for use between duplicate coupling parts (e.g., sandwiched
    between printed circuit boards):

    Coupling part under subclass 586 comprising a member for transmitting
    electricity from a second to a third such device wherein the second and
    third such devices are identical in configuration to each other in the
    areas intended to interfit with the first device.

    (1)     Note.  The connector of this subclass is intended to be used in
    series between a power source and a user of electricity.  This subclass is
    not intended to include a connector for receiving power through a base
    portion and transmitting that power to a pair of connectors, even though
    the connectors of the pair are identical, e.g., a device to connect two
    electric lamps to a single lamp socket is not included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66,     for a coupling part of the type found herein combined with a
    preformed panel circuit arrangement, e.g., a printed circuit board.

    91,     for an electrical connector including an elastomeric or nonmetallic
    conductive portion adapted to be sandwiched between preformed panel circuit
    arrangement.


CLS 439/592
TXT Insulation distorted by or to effect coupling action:

    Coupling part under subclass 586 wherein engagement with a mating part
    changes the shape of the yieldable, nonconductive material, or wherein the
    yieldable, nonconductive material is normally forced to change its shape in
    the act of bringing about such mating.

    (1)     Note.  Insulation distorted by or to effected uncoupling is
    included herein.


CLS 439/593
TXT Receptacle adapted to bias contact and cause indirect gripping of mating
    contact:

    Coupling part under subclass 592 wherein the yieldable, nonconductive
    material is strained within its elastic limit and is adapted to yieldably
    urge the contact of that device and cause that contact to engage a contact
    of a mating part more intimately.


CLS 439/594
TXT Resiliently interlocking coupling part with adjacent modular coupling part:

    Coupling part under subclass 586 for use in nonconductive relationship with
    at least one other such coupling part (for transmitting electricity to
    corresponding mating parts) of substantially identical structure such that
    the yieldable, nonconductive material of one serves to hold the two
    coupling parts together.


CLS 439/595
TXT Hinged or flexed detent on insulation engaging to secure contact within
    coupling part housing:

    Coupling part under subclass 586 wherein the yieldable, nonconductive
    material includes a finger extending into engagement with the contact* to
    hold the contact in a fixed location with respect to other portions of the
    device wherein the finger is pivoted about an axis or bent within its
    elastic limit along its length by engagement with the contact.


CLS 439/596
TXT Coupling part housing hinged for coupling part assembly:

    Coupling part under subclass 586 including an external encasing member of
    yieldable, nonconductive material comprising a first generally rigid
    portion, a second rigid portion, and a connecting intermediate portion
    adapted to flex and thereby allow the first and second portion to encompass
    the remainder of the device.


CLS 439/597
TXT Having plural, laterally spaced prongs or prong sockets:

    Coupling part under subclass 586 including (1) a first generally rodlike
    elongated male contact* extending along an axis for mating with a female
    contact and including a second generally rod-like elongated male contact
    extending along a second axis for mating with a second female contact;
    wherein the first and second axes are parallel and wherein the first and
    second male contacts are in the same plane normal to their axes; or
    including (2) a first female contact extending along an axis for mating
    with a generally rodlike elongated male contact and including a second
    female contact extending along a second axis for mating with a second
    generally rodlike elongated male contact wherein the first and second
    female contacts are in the same plane normal to their axes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    626+,   for a rigidly insulated plural contact coupling part.


CLS 439/598
TXT Coupling part including shell and assembly of contact and contact
    supporting insulator:

    Coupling part under subclass 597 comprised of an encased housing and a
    grouping consisting of an insulative body and a contact supported thereby
    wherein the components of the grouping are intended to be first brought
    together and then inserted into the encased housing.


CLS 439/599
TXT And multiple insulating components:

    Coupling part under subclass 597 including a portion of yieldable,
    nonconductive material and including another portion of nonconductive
    material.

    (1)     Note.  An insulative body about a conductor cable is not considered
    to be a part of the coupling part in this subclass.


CLS 439/600
TXT Having laterally spaced prongs:

    Coupling part under subclass 597 including a first generally rodlike
    elongated male contact enxtending along an axis for mating with a female
    contact and including a second generally rodlike elongated male contact
    extending along the second axes for mating with a second female contact;
    wherein the first and second axis are parallel and wherein the first and
    second male contacts are in the same plane normal to their axes.


CLS 439/601
TXT Folded prongs:

    Coupling part under subclass 600 wherein the male contacts each are made
    from a single strip of material folded back on itself at the greatest
    projection thereof.


CLS 439/602
TXT Lamp or electron tube socket or base:

    Coupling part under subclass 586 particularly adapted to detachably receive
    and electrically couple to a member intended to radiate light, or to a
    member including electrical or amplifying switching means utilizing an
    environment including, vacuum maintaining envelope; or comprising the
    electrical connector of such a light radiating member or amplifying
    switching member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56+,    for a preformed panel circuit arrangement with an electrical
    connector for connection to a lamp or electron tube.

    168,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base convertible by internal
    change to selectively cooperate with a different contact.

    220,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base adapted to engage a
    mating connector in alternative manners.

    226+,   for coupling part to receive a fluorescent or neon lamp.

    280,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base having a resilient
    housing for sealing with a coupled connector.

    336,    for a lamp or electron tube socket adapted to receive a cooperating
    lamp or tube by bayonet action, including a movement-actuating means or
    retaining means in addition to the contact of the socket.

    356,    for a lamp or electron tube socket including a retaining means
    comprising a finger or stretchable sleeve resiliently urged laterally of
    connection with a mating part.

    375,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base with a guiding means for
    mating of a coupling part.

    414,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base including a conductor
    sheath penetrating contact and screw means to move the conductor against
    the cutting contact.

    419,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base including a conductor
    sheath penetrating contact adapted to cut to engage a first conductor and
    to also engage (and interconnect) a second conductor.

    541,    for plural lamp or electron tube sockets including supporting means
    therefor.

    558,    for a lamp or electron tube socket extending into a supporting
    panel.

    611+,   for a connector or contact having vitreous-type envelope secured
    thereto (e.g., a base of a lamp or vacuum tube).

    661+,   for a plural contact coupling part including a screw threaded
    contact and insulation other than the conductor sheath.


CLS 439/603
TXT Retaining contact within distinct coupling part housing:

    Coupling part under subclass 586 wherein the yieldable, nonconductive
    material is urged to hold the contact* in a fixed location with respect to
    the other portion of the device.


CLS 439/604
TXT WITH EXTERNAL CONDUCTOR OR CABLE EMBEDDED IN INSULATIVE SEALING MATERIAL:

    Electrical connector under the class definition comprising electricity
    transmitting contact combined with an electricity transmitting strandlike
    member with a nonconductive substance molded thereabout forming a
    physically leakproof junction between the contact and the strandlike member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89,     for an electrical connector including an elastomeric or nonmetallic
    conductive, inductive shield or arc suppressing means.

    190+,   for similar sealing means used with an electrical connector with
    means for retaining or having a passageway for fluent material.

    230,    for a coupling part to receive a fluorescent or neon lamp having
    sealing element or material for cooperation with a coupled lamp.

    271+,   for an electrical connector with a sealing element or material for
    cooperation with a coupled connector, generally.

    283,    for the sealed interfitting of coupled connector part housing.

    445+,   for a device having a cable embedded in a flexible or movably
    mounted cable guard.

    527+,   for a wall, plate or panel mounted or attaching means with a
    connector part sealed thereto.

    586+,   for a coupling part in which a cable and contact are embedded in
    flexible or resilient insulation.


CLS 439/605
TXT Lamp or electron tube socket or base:

    Coupling part under subclass 604 particularly adapted to detachably receive
    and electrically couple to a member intended to radiate light, or to a
    member including electrical switching means utilizing an environment
    excluding, vacuum maintaining envelope; or comprising the electrical
    connector of such a light radiating or switching member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56+,    for a preformed panel circuit arrangement with an electrical
    connector for connection to a lamp or electron tube.

    168,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base convertible by internal
    change to selectively cooperate with a different contact.

    220,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base adapted to engage a
    mating connector in alternative manners.

    226+,   for a coupling part to receive a fluorescent or neon lamp.

    280,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base having a resilient
    housing for sealing with a coupled connector

    336,    for a lamp or electron tube socket adapted to receive a cooperating
    lamp or tube bayonet action, including a movement-actuating means or
    retaining means in addition to the contact of the socket.

    356,    for a lamp or electron tube socket including a retaining means
    comprising a finger or stretchable sleeve resilient urged laterally of
    connection with a mating part.

    375,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base with a guiding means for
    mating of a coupling part.

    414,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base including a conductor
    sheath penetrating contact and screw means to move the conductor against
    the cutting contact.

    419,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base including a conductor
    sheath penetrating contact adapted to cut to engage a first conductor and
    to also engage (and interconnect) a second conductor.

    558,    for a lamp or electron tube socket extending into a supporting
    panel.

    602,    for a lamp or electron tube socket or base including flexing
    insulation.

    611+,   for a connector or contact having vitreous-type envelope secured
    thereto (e.g., a base of a lamp or vacuum tube).

    661+,   for a plural contact coupling part including a screw-threaded
    contact and insulation other than the conductor sheath.


CLS 439/606
TXT Molded connector body:

    Electrical connector under subclass 604 wherein a nonconductive substance
    is shaped about the electricity transmitting strandlike member not only to
    form a leakproof junction but also to form the configuration of the
    structural member.


CLS 439/607
TXT HAVING OR PROVIDING INDUCTIVE OR CAPACITIVE SHIELD:

    Electrical connector under class definition comprising a conductive screen
    means for (a) preventing or reducing the detrimental effect induced within
    a connector or contact* due to capacitive or inductive coupling with
    electric or magnetic fields generated from a source outside of the
    connector or contact, or (b) preventing or reducing induced electrical
    interference or signal loss due to capacitive or inductive coupling between
    mutually insulated contacts within a plural-contact connector (i.e.,
    reducing crosstalk), or (c) preventing or reducing undesirable loss of
    electrical information or signal due to electrical radiation of signal from
    the connector or contact.

    (1)     Note.  Since there are included herein connectors of the type
    adapted to be electrically connected to a cable* having an outer conductive
    shield concentrically surrounding the longitudinal axis of the cable, there
    is a similarity between the connectors for coaxial cables found in
    subclasses 578+ and some of the connectors included in this and the
    indented subclasses.  The similarity relates, however, only to the tubular
    outer contact, because the shielded-cable connectors included in these
    subclasses (607+) are adapted to be secured to cables having at least one
    inner conductor whose longitudinal axis does not extend along the
    longitudinal axis of the cable, whereas the connectors in subclasses 578+
    are adapted to be secured only to cables in which the longitudinal axes of
    all of the conductors coincide with the longitudinal axis of the cable.

    (2)     Note.  Since electric fields induce noise voltages capactively, it
    is common to surround a connector or contact with a grounded conducting
    shield in order to reduce stray pickup from external sources or crosstalk
    between mutually insulated contacts.  Since external magnetic fields induce
    noise currents inductively, it is common to surround a connector or contact
    with a high-permeability ferromagnetic enclosure which reduces the
    intensity of magnetic fields.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88+,    for an electrical connector which includes an elastomeric or
    nonmetallic conductive portion and which provides anti-inductive shielding.

    92+,    for an electrical connector having a specific provision to
    electrically connect a portion thereof to the earth for the purpose of
    providing a safety ground for the electrical connector, and see Note (2)
    above, and see the Notes appended to subclass 92.

    125+,   particularly subclass 126 for a spark plug cover or shield of an
    electrostatic suppressing nature.

    274,    275, and 279, for an electrical connector combined with a distinct
    cable sheath sealing element or material, which connector may also provide
    inductive or capacitive shielding.

    578+,   for an electrical connector specifically adapted for use with
    coaxial cables, which connector often includes an inductive or capacitive
    shielding function, and see Note (1) above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 35+ for a
    conductor in which an antiinductive shield is used, and see especially the
    Notes appended thereto for the location of other devices having
    antiinductive structure.


CLS 439/608
TXT Conductive shielding material individually surrounding or interposed
    between mutually insulated contacts:

    Electrical connector under subclass 607 comprising at least two mutually
    insulated contacts carried in a relatively fixed spaced relation one from
    another by an insulating body to form a coupling part* specially adapted to
    mate or interengage with a complementary plural-contact-carrying
    counterpart* so as to form an electrical joint having at least two mutually
    insulated electrical paths, and wherein the conductive screen means
    comprises conductive material either (a) formed around but spaced apart
    from at least a portion of at least one contact, so that the contact is
    inductively screened from the one or more other contacts, or (b) interposed
    between two or more contacts, so that the contacts are inductively screened
    from one another.


CLS 439/609
TXT Resilient conductive means providing additional electrical path between
    mating outer shield members:

    Electrical connector under subclass 607 wherein the conductive screen means
    comprises a conductive member for surrounding one or more
    mutually-insulated contacts, which conductive member forms an outer screen
    contact of a coupling part*, which coupling part is specifically adapted to
    mate or interengage with a complementary counterpart* also having a
    surrounding outer screen counter-contact*, so that, when the screen contact
    is electrically engaged with the screen counter-contact, the conductive
    path of the screen means extends over both the coupling part and its
    counterpart, and wherein the conductive screen member of the coupling part
    further includes an additional conductive element having a portion thereof
    either engaged or adapted to be engaged with the screen contact of the
    coupling part and having a resilient portion thereof engageable with the
    screen counter-contact or the counterpart, so that, when the coupling part
    and its counterpart are joined together, an additional conductive path is
    formed between the conductive screen member of the coupling part and the
    conductive screen member of the counterpart.


CLS 439/610
TXT Having means for electrically connecting shield of shielded cable to
    connector shield member:

    Electrical connector under subclass 607 wherein the conductive screen means
    comprises a conductive member for surrounding one or more contacts, which
    conductive member forms an outer screen contact of a coupling part*, which
    coupling part is specially adapted to mate or interengage with a
    complementary counterpart* having a screen counter-contact*, so that, when
    the screen contact is electrically engaged with the complementary screen
    counter-contact of the counterpart, the conductive path of the screen means
    extends over both the coupling part and its counterpart, and wherein the
    conductive screen member of the coupling part further includes means
    specially adapted to electrically connect the conductive shielding sheath
    of a shielded cable* to the conductive screen member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98+,    for an electrical connector having a safety grounding provision and
    having means for grounding to a conductive sheath of a cable.

    274,    275 and 279, for an electrical connector combined with a distinct
    cable sheath sealing element or material, which connector may also provide
    inductive or capacitive shielding.

    578+,   for an electrical connector specially adapted for use with coaxial
    cables, which connector often includes an inductive or capacitive shielding
    function.


CLS 439/611
TXT WITH VITREOUS-TYPE ENVELOPE (E.G., BASE OF LAMP OR VACUUM TUBE):

    Electrical connector under the class definition carried by or secured to a
    hollow glasslike body constituting a container for an electrically
    operative element of an electric lamp, electric space discharge device, or
    other electrical component.

    (1)     Note.  Class 313, Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, is the
    generic class for electric lamp and electric space discharge devices.  For
    a complete listing of where the various combinations and subcombinations of
    such devices may be found and also the line between the classes providing
    for the aforementioned subject matter, attention is directed to the class
    definition of Class 313.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226+,   for a coupling part specially designed to receive a fluorescent or
    neon lamp, and see the Search Notes appended thereto for the various
    locations provided for the bases of lamps or vacuum tubes or for
    complementary coupling parts designed to mate with such bases.

    638+,   for a device including two or more plural-contact coupling parts
    combined in one integral unit, which coupling parts may be either similar
    in structure to lamp or vacuum tube base or complementary coupling parts
    for mating with lamp or vacuum-tube-type bases.

    660+,   for a plural-contact coupling part comprising a receptacle or plug,
    which receptacle or plug may be a base of lamp or vacuum tube, a coupling
    part similar in structure to such a lamp or vacuum tube base, or a
    complementary coupling part for mating with either of the above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices,  for the combination of an
    electric lamp or discharge device, where significant lamp or discharge
    structure is recited, and a connector for connecting such device with an
    electric circuit, and see section XI of the class definition of that class
    (313) for the line between Class 313 and Class 439.


CLS 439/612
TXT Connector or contact secured to each end of double-ended envelope:

    Electrical connector under subclass 611 wherein the glasslike body has two
    electrically operative ends, each end of which carries a contact*, carries
    a contact-carrying connector, or is formed into a contact-carrying
    connector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226+,   for a coupling part specially designed to receive a fluorescent or
    neon lamp.

    621+,   for an electrical connector combined with a named fuse or including
    a housing for fully enclosing a fuse, which electrical connector may be
    designed to receive a cartridge-type fuse having a contact at each end
    thereof.

    698,    for a plural-contact receptacle specially designed to transversely
    receive an elongated fuselike component having a contact at each end
    thereof.


CLS 439/613
TXT Connector of the type having only concentric annular contacts or annular
    contact disposed concentrically about an axial contact:

    Electrical connector under subclass 611 wherein the glasslike body carries
    a connector of the type having at least two contacts* which are
    spaced-apart and electrically insulated one from the other the connector
    forming a coupling part* specially adapted to mate or interengage with a
    complementary plural-contact-carrying counterpart*, so that a readily
    separable electrical joint having at least two mutually-insulated
    electrical paths may be formed, and wherein one of the contacts is disposed
    symmetrically around and spaced from the longitudinal axis along which the
    coupling part is intended to be engaged and coupled with its counterpart,
    all points on the symmetrical contact at any point along said axis being
    equally spaced from said axis, and wherein the outer of the contacts is
    either (a) disposed on the longitudinal axis along which the coupling part
    is intended to be engaged and coupled with its counterpart or (b) also
    disposed symmetrically around and spaced from the said longitudinal axis in
    such a manner that all points on the second said symmetrical contact at any
    point along said axis is equally spaced from said axis a distance different
    from the corresponding contact-to-axis points on the first said symmetrical
    contact, whereby the symmetry of the contacts of the coupling part is such
    that the contacts will make electrical connection with their mating
    counter-contacts* regardless of the angular disposition of the coupling
    part about the longitudinal axis of engagement with its counterpart.

    (1)     Note.  Included also in this and the indented subclasses are
    patents in which the connector carried by the glasslike body is disclosed
    to be of the type defined above, but in which the claims recite only one of
    the contacts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    641+,   649, 662+, 672, 675, and 734+, for plural-contact coupling part
    having at least one annular contact disposed concentrically around the
    longitudinal axis of engagement with its counterpart, such coupling part
    usually having an axial contact or another annular contact coaxial with the
    longitudinal axis.


CLS 439/614
TXT Having three or more contacts (e.g., for three-way lamp):

    Electrical connector under subclass 613 wherein the coupling part carried
    by the glasslike body carries at least three contacts which are
    spaced-apart and electrically insulated from one another, and wherein at
    least two of the contacts are disposed symmetrically around and spaced
    apart from the longitudinal axis along which the coupling part is intended
    to be engaged and coupled with its counterpart.


CLS 439/615
TXT Having screw-thread-coupling contact:

    Electrical connector under subclass 613 wherein one of the contacts of the
    coupling part carried by the glasslike body carries screwthreads for the
    purpose of electrically and mechanically coupling to a mating
    screw-thread-coupling counter-contact carried by a mating counterpart.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    641+,   659, 662+, and 734+, for a plural-contact coupling part having a
    cylindrical or annual, screw-thread-coupling contact disposed
    concentrically around the longitudinal axis of engagement with mating
    screw-thread-coupling counterpart.


CLS 439/616
TXT Having bayonet-coupling contact:

    Electrical connector under subclass 611 wherein the connector carried by
    the glasslike body forms a coupling part* specially adapted to mate or
    interengage with a complementary counterpart*, so that a readily separable
    electrical joint may be formed, and wherein the coupling part either (a)
    carries a contact* which itself extends or which has a pin or projection
    thereon which extends radially of the longitudinal axis along which the
    coupling part is intended to be coupled to its counterpart, or (b) has an
    abutment extending circumferentially about the longitudinal axis along
    which the coupling part is intended to be coupled to its counterpart, and
    wherein the coupling part and its counterpart are retained in coupled
    relationship either by the radially extending pin or projection on the
    contact, being received behind the circumferentially extending abutment,
    the engaging motion being first along the longitudinal coupling axis and
    then a partial turning about the said coupling axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    613,    for a coupling part carried by a glasslike body in which the
    coupling part has an annular, bayonet-coupling contact around an axial
    contact.

    644,    648 and 672+, for plural-contact coupling part having one or more
    bayonet-coupling contacts.


CLS 439/617
TXT Plug having spaced, longitudinally engaging, prong-like contacts:

    Electrical connector under subclass 611 wherein the connector carried by
    the glasslike body has extending therefrom at least two elongated,
    fingerlike contacts* which are spaced-apart and electrically insulated one
    from another, the connector further forms a coupling part* specially
    adapted to mate and interengage with a complementary counterpart having
    prong-receiving contacts, so that an electrical joint having at least two
    mutually insulated electrical paths may be formed, and wherein the
    longitudinal axes of the elongated, fingerlike contacts are disposed
    parallel to the longitudinal axis along which the coupling part is intended
    to be engaged with its counterpart.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    647     and 651+, for a single unit containing two or more plural-contact
    coupling parts, at least one of the coupling parts being a plug having two
    or more spaced, longitudinally engaging, pronglike contacts.

    655     and 692+, for a coupling part comprising a plug having two or more
    spaced, longitudinally engaging, pronglike contacts.


CLS 439/618
TXT Having three or more circularly arranged contacts (e.g., base of vacuum
    tube):

    Electrical connector under subclass 617 wherein the coupling part carried
    by the glasslike body has at least three elongated, fingerlike contacts
    extending therefrom, and wherein the fingerlike contacts are so arranged on
    the face of the glasslike body or the coupling part secured thereto that
    they will fall on the circumference of a circle.


CLS 439/619
TXT Having only two duplicate contacts arranged bilaterally symmetric about
    longitudinal axis of engagement:

    Electrical connector under subclass 611 wherein the connector carried by
    the glasslike body carries only two identical contacts which are
    spaced-apart and electrically insulated one from the other, the connector
    further forming a coupling part* specially adapted to mate or interengage
    with a complementary contact-carrying counterpart*, so that an electrical
    joint having only two mutually-insulated electrical paths may be formed,
    and wherein the two spaced-apart contacts taken together are disposed
    bilaterally symmetric about the longitudinal axis along which the coupling
    part is intended to be engaged and coupled with its mating counterpart.

    (1)     Note.  The bilaterally symmetric disposition of the two duplicate
    contacts of the connectors in this subclass also means that each contact is
    annularily spaced about the longitudinal axis of engagement 180 degrees
    from the other contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    699.1,  for a coupling part having only two duplicate contacts arranged
    bilaterally symmetric about the longitudinal axis of engagement but which
    is not combined with a glasslike body.


CLS 439/620
TXT WITH CIRCUIT COMPONENT OR COMPRISING CONNECTOR WHICH FULLY ENCLOSES CIRCUIT
    COMPONENT:

    Electrical connector under the class definition either (a) combined with a
    functioning electrical circuit device; or (b) comprising a holder, casing,
    or housing adapted to substantially completely surround an unclaimed
    functioning electrical circuit device, which holder, casing, or housing
    further carrying at least one contact* for electrically engaging a contact
    of the circuit device.

    (1)     Note.  The following "functioning electrical circuit devices" are
    specifically excluded from this and the indented subclasses since, for the
    most part, they are provided for elsewhere within this class (439):  energy
    cells or batteries (both the dry cell and storage types), spark plugs of
    the type designed for internal combination engines, lamps, vacuum tubes,
    interference filters of the type combined or used with contacts of
    inductively or capacitively shielded connectors, and a power measuring
    meter coupling part.

    (2)     Note.  Some examples of "functioning electrical circuit devices"
    which may be included herein are: fuses, resistors (including resistive
    heating elements), capacitors, inductors or coils, transformers, relays,
    switches, transistors, solid-state diodes or rectifiers, transducers (such
    as earphones, microphones, piezoelectric devices, photocells, etc.), and
    measuring or detection devices (such as meters, strain gauges, and
    seismometers).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125+,   for a connector having a spark or glow plug cover.

    130,    for a multicontact internal combustion engine distributor cap or a
    multicontact mating part therefor.

    226+,   for a coupling part for use with a fluorescent or neon lamp.

    500,    for an energy cell substitution device including plural contacts
    (e.g., jumper) or a connector with support means for an energy cell.

    517,    for a power measuring meter coupling part.

    525,    for a connector for a dual-in-line package.

    526,    for an aligning means for a dual-in-line package.

    527+,   for supporting means for coupling part.

    577,    for a connector combined with a nonelectrical feature.

    607+,   for an interference-filter-type contact for use in providing
    inductive or capacitive shielding.

    611+,   for a connector or contact having a vitreous-type envelope secured
    thereto (e.g., lamp or vacuum tube).

    754+,   for a metallic clamp-type connector for a storage battery terminal.

    890,    for a contact terminal for a functioning electrical component.

    893,    for a distinct covering means for covering a functioning electrical
    component.


CLS 439/621
TXT With or for fuse:

    Electrical connector under subclass 620 wherein the functioning electrical
    circuit device is an electrical safety device comprising a wire or strip of
    fusible metal that melts and interrupts the circuit when the current
    exceeds a specified amperage.


CLS 439/622
TXT Comprising coupling part housing for enclosing fuse:

    Electrical connector under subclass 621 comprising a holder, casing, or
    housing for supporting and surrounding the fuse component; which holder,
    casing, or housing also comprises a coupling part* carrying at least two
    mutually insulated contacts*, the coupling part being specially adapted to
    mate with a complementary coupling part*.


CLS 439/623
TXT CABLE COMPOSED OF MUTUALLY INSULATED CONDUCTORS HAVING SEPARATELY CARRIED
    CONDUCTOR END TERMINALS:

    Electrical connector under the class definition comprising an electrical
    cable* having two or more conductors* physically held together in
    association one with the other, but electrically insulated one from the
    other, and at least two of the mutually insulated conductors have separate
    terminal* connectors secured conductively thereto at the ends thereof.

    (1)     Note.  By "separate terminal connectors" is meant that the terminal
    connectors of the various conductor ends are not physically held together
    by a common insulating body in a manner similar to the structures found in
    subclasses 626+ and 709+.


CLS 439/624
TXT PLURAL CONTACTS DISPOSED INTERMEDIATE ENDS OF CABLE HAVING SHEATH ENCLOSING
    MUTUALLY INSULATED CONDUCTORS (E.G., SEISMIC TYPE CABLE):

    Electrical connector under the class definition comprising an electrical
    cable* having two or more conductors* physically held together in
    association with one another by a surrounding insulating covering, the
    conductors being electrically insulated from one another, at least two of
    the mutually insulated conductors have contacts* secured conductively
    thereto at one or more locations spaced-apart from the ends thereof and
    from the ends of the insulating covering, and wherein the insulating
    covering leaves the contacts exposed to the exterior thereof, so that the
    contacts may be exterior thereof, so that the contacts may be electrically
    engaged by complementary mating contact carried by one or more connectors
    separate from and independent of the cable.

    (1)     Note.  A stranded conductor is considered to be a single conductor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    502+,   for an electrical connector combined with a flaccid conductor and
    with an additional connector spaced therealong.


CLS 439/625
TXT WITH INSULATION OTHER THAN CONDUCTOR SHEATH:

    Electrical connector under the class definition at least a part of which
    includes electrically insulating material exclusive of that forming an
    insulating covering of conductor* or cable* secured thereto, the said
    insulating covering being carried by the conductor and being separate from
    the insulation of the connector.

    (1)     Note.  The "insulating material" of this and the indented
    subclasses must be a part of the connector or contact structure rather than
    being merely the insulating covering on a conductor or cable secured to the
    connector or contact.  The recitation of such insulated conductor in the
    claims is ignored for the purpose of classification in this and the
    indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  Patents are classified in this and the indented subclasses
    when any claimed element is disclosed to be of insulating material (or
    known to be of insulating material) even though the claims do not
    specifically recite that such element is of insulating material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    754+    and 775+, for a metallic connector or contact in which no
    insulating part is recited in the claims.

    865+,   for a metallic connector or contact having means for engaging the
    insulating covering of a conductor and in which no insulating part, other
    than the insulating covering on a conductor, is claimed.

    869+,   for a metallic connector or contact having thereon means designed
    specifically for enabling it to be secured to insulation (e.g., an
    unclaimed insulating panel) other than the insulating covering on a
    conductor and in which no insulating part, other than the insulating
    covering on a conductor, is claimed.

    874+,   877+ and 883, for a metallic connector or contact in which no
    insulating part is recited in the claims.


CLS 439/626
TXT Plural-contact coupling part:

    Electrical connector under subclass 625 comprising an electrically
    insulating body carrying a plurality of current-carrying contacts* in a
    relatively fixed spaced-apart relation one with another, but electrically
    insulated one from another, the insulating body and the contacts together
    forming a unitary coupling part* specially adapted to mate or interengage
    with a complementary plural-contact-counterpart*, so that, when the
    contacts are electrically engaged in one to one relationship with the
    complementary counter-contacts* carried by the counterpart, a readily
    separable electrical coupling joint having at least two mutually insulated
    electrical paths is formed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226+,   for a coupling part specially designed to receive a fluorescent or
    neon lamp.

    296+,   for a coupling part having either (a) separate means to forcibly
    bring together into coupled relationship the coupling part and its
    complementary counterpart or (b) means separate from the current-carrying
    parts of the coupling part to maintain the coupling part in coupled
    relationship with its complementary counterpart.

    578+,   for an electrical connector specialized for use with coaxial cable.

    623,    for a cable composed of plural, mutually insulated conductors, each
    conductor separately carrying a conductor end terminal and having no other
    insulating body for supporting the end terminals.

    709+,   for an insulating body having plural, mutually insulated,
    electrically conductive connectors, terminals, contacts, or
    conductor-securing means in which the insulating body and the
    current-carrying parts together do not form a coupling part, and therefore
    the current-carrying parts neither receive nor join with plural contacts
    carried by a unitary insulting body specifically designed to be coupled
    thereto.

    723+,   and all of the subclasses following subclass 723 which are indented
    under 625, for an electrical connector combined with insulation other than
    a conductor sheath, which connector includes only a single electrically
    conductive path, connector, terminal, contact, or conductor securing means
    or includes only (in subclasses 723+) plural, electrically interconnected
    connectors, terminals, contacts, or conductor securing means.


CLS 439/627
TXT For direct simultaneous contact with plural battery or cell terminals:

    Coupling part under subclass 626 which is particularly adapted to make
    intimate (and otherwise unsupported) electrical engagement simultaneously
    with at least two battery or cell terminals.


CLS 439/628
TXT Single-contact connector for interposition between two plural-contact
    coupling parts (e.g., adaptor):

    Coupling part under subclass 626 comprising a coupling member having but a
    single electrical path, which single-path coupling member being
    specifically adapted to be disposed between two noncomplementary,
    plural-contact coupling parts (which by themselves cannot be directly
    joined or coupled tone another) so that the two noncomplentary coupling
    parts may be electrically joined by the intermediate coupling member; the
    single-path coupling member providing an intermediate electrically
    conductive means between a contact on one coupling part and a contact on
    the other coupling part while allowing another contact on the said one
    coupling part to directly engage another contact on the said other coupling
    part.

    (1)     Note.  The subclass may include, for example, a device for changing
    a push-pull-coupling plug to a screw-thread-coupling plug by adding a screw
    shell contact member to one of the contacts of the push-pull coupling plug.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166+,   for an electrical connector convertible by internal change to
    selectively cooperate with a different contact.

    176,    for a female coupling part convertible to a male coupling part by
    the addition of a prong.

    177,    for a coupling convertible to distinct shape by the addition of a
    nonremovable element or by removal of a nonreusable element.

    518,    for a coupling part convertible to a different format by
    substitution of a different contact.


CLS 439/629
TXT For coupling to edge of printed circuit board or to coupling part secured
    to such edge:

    Coupling part under subclass 626 specially adapted to be electrically
    connected either directly or indirectly to a printed circuit board* so that
    the conductors or circuit elements on the printed circuit board may be
    electrically connected to the contacts of the coupling part, and wherein
    the coupling part is further either (a) specifically adapted to be engaged
    and coupled directly to an edge portion of the printed circuit board, the
    edge portion having counter-contacts thereon electrically connected to the
    mutually-insulated conductors or circuit elements on the printed circuit
    board, so that the edge portion constitutes a mating counterpart for the
    coupling part, or (b) specifically adapted to be engaged and coupled to
    mating plural-contact-carrying counterpart which, in turn, is mechanically
    and electrically connected to an edge portion of the printed circuit board.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55+,    for a coupling part combined with a printed circuit board.

    325+,   for a coupling part with coupling movement-actuating means or
    additional retaining means for coupled connectors, which coupling part may
    be specifically adapted to be coupled to an edge of a printed circuit board
    or to a connector secured to such edge.

    439,    for a coupling part specially adapted to electrically interconnect
    a printed circuit board to a multiconductor tape cable.


CLS 439/630
TXT Having elongated slot for receiving edge of printed circuit board:

    Coupling part under subclass 629 having a long, narrow, channel-like
    aperture or cavity extending therein and into which the edge portion of a
    printed circuit board is to  be inserted an thereby directly coupled to the
    coupling part, and wherein the aperture or cavity has a plurality of
    contacts mounted in the vicinity of the interior therof and spaced
    therealong, so that the contacts are engaged by the corresponding
    counter-contacts spaced along the edge portion of the printed circuit board
    whenever the printed circuit board is located within the aperture or cavity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59+,    for the combination of preformed panel circuit arrangement and a
    mating connector which receives the edge of the panel circuit.

    260,    for a coupling part having actuating means urging a contact to move
    laterally relative to the coupling part and toward contact of mating part,
    which coupling part further includes an open slot for receiving a preformed
    panel circuit arrangement or tape cable.

    267,    for a coupling part having a handle or means to move a contact
    laterally to permit uncoupling, which coupling part further includes an
    open slot for receiving a panel circuit arrangement.

    325+,   for a coupling part with coupling movement-actuating means or
    retaining means, which coupling part designed to receive the edge of a
    planar board moving parallel to the plane thereof.

    377+,   for an electrical connector with means for guiding the side of a
    movable panel (e.g., a circuit board).


CLS 439/631
TXT Plural slots for electrically interconnecting plural printed circuit boards:

    Coupling part under subclass 630 having a plurality of the long, narrow,
    channel-like apertures or cavities extending therein for simultaneously
    receiving the edge portion of a corresponding plurality of printed circuit
    boards, and wherein one or more of the contacts associated with one
    aperture or cavity is electrically connected to the one or more
    counter-contacts spaced along the edge portion of at least one other
    printed circuit board.

    (1)     Note.  The one or more electrically interconnected contacts
    associated with individual apertures or cavities may consist of a single
    integral conductive member or comprise separate conductive members
    interconnected by direct contact or by some electricity transmitting means.


CLS 439/632
TXT Providing direct contact between contacts of printed circuit board and
    different type conductors:

    Coupling part under subclass 630 wherein each of the contacts spaced along
    the channel-like aperture or cavity is either formed from the end portion
    of a wire-type conductor or is the end terminal secured to the end portion
    of a wire-type conductor, so that the counter-contacts spaced along the
    edge portion of a printed circuit board may be in direct or touching
    engagement with the wire-type conductors secured to the coupling part
    without the utilization of any other separate, intermediary contacts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    492+,   for a coupling part providing direct contact of conductors of a
    tape cable secured thereto to conductors of another tape cable secured to a
    counterpart or to counter-contacts spaced along the edge of a printed
    circuit board.


CLS 439/633
TXT Having polarizing means:

    Coupling part under subclass 630 further having indexing or keying means
    formed thereon or attachable thereto, which indexing or keying means is
    intended to cooperate with complementary indexing or keying means on a
    mating counterpart, so that either (a) the various contacts of the coupling
    part must always be associated with the same corresponding counter-contacts
    on its counterpart whenever the coupling part is joined or coupled to its
    counterpart, or (b) the coupling part must be capable of being joined or
    coupled to only one specific, but to no other, counterpart among a
    plurality of counterparts which are all structurally identical except for
    some variation of the indexing or keying means thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    677+,   for a coupling part having polarizing means, and see the search
    notes appended thereto.


CLS 439/634
TXT Having multipart insulating body:

    Coupling part under subclass 630 wherein the body of insulation is
    segmental, divided, or otherwise composed of an assembly of two or more
    sections.

    (1)     Note.  The multipart insulating body in this subclass refers only
    to a single coupling part.  Thus, two discrete coupling parts joined to
    form an electrical joint are not considered to be subject matter for this
    subclass unless each of the individual coupling parts is composed of a
    multipart insulating body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    599,    684, 686+, 695+, and 701, for a coupling part having a multipart
    insulating body.

    712+,   724 and 731, for an electrical connector having a multipart
    insulating body.


CLS 439/635
TXT Relative movement of insulating parts alters contact pressure:

    Coupling part under subclass 634 wherein at least two of the segments or
    sections of insulation are so mounted to one another as to enable movement
    of one segment or section relative to the other in response to the printed
    circuit board being inserted into or withdrawn from the channel-like
    aperture or cavity, and wherein each of the contacts has at least a portion
    thereof movable in response to the movement of the one insulating segment
    or section, so that, whenever a printed circuit board is either inserted
    into or withdrawn from the aperture or cavity, the edge portion of the
    printed circuit board engages and moves the movably mounted segment or
    section which then moves the movable portion of the contacts to alter the
    pressure that they apply to the counter-contacts of the printed circuit
    board.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    325+,   for a coupling part with coupling movement actuating means or
    retaining means in addition to contact of coupling part, which coupling
    part is adapted to receive the edge of a planar board moving parallel to
    the plane thereof.


CLS 439/636
TXT Contacts within slot engage opposite sides of printed circuit board:

    Coupling part under subclass 630 wherein the contacts mounted in the
    vicinity of the channel-like aperture or cavity are arranged or formed so
    that they engage the opposite planar sides of the printed circuit board in
    the vicinity of the edge portion thereof when the printed circuit board is
    located within the aperture or cavity.


CLS 439/637
TXT Separate mutually insulated contacts on opposite longitudinal sides of slot:

    Coupling part under subclass 636 wherein the contacts are arranged in two
    spaced-apart rows with each row of contacts extending parallel to and
    spaced apart from the long transverse axis of the opening to the aperture
    or cavity, and wherein the contacts in one row are electrically insulated
    from the contacts in the other row.


CLS 439/638
TXT Two or more plural-contact coupling parts combined in one integral unit:

    Device under subclass 626 comprising a single unitary structure having two
    or more spaced but electrically connected plural-contact coupling parts
    embodied therein.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses may include, for example, a
    unitary device commonly known as a cube tap, duplex receptacle*, twin
    receptacle, or multiple receptacle, etc.; and also included herein is that
    type of unitary device often referred to as an adapter which has, for
    example, a plural-contact receptacle at one end and a plural-contact plug
    at the other end.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for an electrical connector combined with a preformed panel circuit
    which is specifically designed to receive plural panel circuit edges.

    105,    for an adapter with a safety grounding provision.

    107,    for a duplex receptacle with a safety grounding provision.

    119,    for an uninterrupted support rail or uninterrupted contact with an
    adapter.

    124,    for a candle-simulation-type electrical connector comprising an
    adapter.

    218+,   for a coupling part which may be alternatively joined with any one
    of plural mating coupling parts having different configurations or with a
    mating coupling part from any one of plural, distinct directions.

    228     and 235, for a device comprising plural coupling parts for
    receiving plural fluorescent or neon lamps.

    236,    for an adapter for receiving a fluorescent or neon lamp.

    300,    for a adapter retained in connection with a mating coupling part by
    the presence of a distinct coupling part.

    323,    for an adapter with coupling part retaining means in addition to
    the contact comprising a movable threaded ring.

    355,    for a device with coupling part retaining means in addition to the
    contact comprising plural independent coupling parts.

    365,    for an adapter with coupling part retaining means in addition to
    the contact comprising a helically threaded member.

    540.1+, for a means for supporting plural independent coupling parts.

    578+,   for an electrical connector including or for use with a coaxial
    cable, which connector may constitute two or more plural-contact coupling
    parts combined in one integral unit.

    628,    for a single-contact electrical connector for interposition between
    two plural-contact coupling parts.

    631,    for an electrical connector comprising plural slots for
    electrically interconnecting plural printed circuit boards.


CLS 439/639
TXT Unit includes three or more diverse types of coupling parts:

    Device under subclass 638 wherein there are at least three different types
    of plural-contact coupling parts contained within the single unitary
    structure.

    (1)     Note.  Two coupling parts are considered to be "different" if a
    mating plural-contact counterpart adapted to be coupled with one coupling
    part cannot be coupled with the other coupling part.  Thus, a
    plural-contact plug having a male screw-thread-coupling contact and a
    plural-contact receptacle having a female screw-thread-coupling contact,
    even though complementary to one another, constitute "different" types of
    plural-contact coupling parts, Similarly, two receptacles having spaced
    prong-receiving contacts which differ in number, arrangement (i.e.,
    relative spacing therebetween), cross-sectional shape, or size constitute
    "different" types of receptacles if a plug having spaced pronglike contacts
    is capable of mating with one receptacle but not with the other.


CLS 439/640
TXT One coupling part of unit repositionable relative to another thereof:

    Device under subclass 638 wherein at least one of the coupling parts
    contained within the single unitary structure is connected or joined to the
    unitary structure in such a manner that the said coupling part is movable
    or shiftable from one position or location to another relative to another
    coupling part contained within the unitary structure.

    (1)     Note.  The coupling parts of these devices are not adapted to be
    continuously varied during use, but are only arranged so that they may be
    intermittently adjusted.  A device including interrelated connectors
    specifically designed with parts relatively movable during use may be found
    in subclasses 1+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for interrelated connectors having parts relatively movable during
    use, and see (1) Note.  above.


CLS 439/641
TXT Unit includes coupling part having screw-thread-coupling contact:

    Device under subclass 638 wherein at least one of the plural-contact
    coupling parts contained within the unitary structure carries a contact
    which either has screw threads formed thereon or has equivalent
    screw-thread-engaging means thereon which cooperates, by means of a
    relative screw motion therebetween, with screw-threads or
    screw-thread-engaging means formed on a mating counter-contact, so that the
    coupling part may be screw coupled with and thereby electrically joined to
    a mating, plural-contact counterpart carrying a screw-thread-coupling
    counter-contact.

    (1)     Note.  A document which discloses solely a device encompassed by
    the subclass definition set forth herein, but which fails to specifically
    claim screw-threading on an annularily-shaped contact shell, is also
    included in this and the indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    296+,   for coupling part adapted to be screw-thread-coupled to a mating
    counterpart, but in which the screw-thread-coupling means is not formed on
    a contact.


CLS 439/642
TXT Plug having surrounding screw-thread-coupling contact:

    Device under subclass 641 wherein the plural-contact coupling part having
    the screw-thread-coupling contact further comprises a plug, and wherein the
    screw-thread-coupling contact is formed cylindrically around a protruding
    male portion of the plug and the said contact further has screw threads
    disposed about the exterior surface portion thereof, so that the plug may
    be screw coupled with and thereby electrically joined to a mating
    plural-contact receptacle having a complementary screw-thread-coupling
    counter-contact either located within or forming the plug-receiving recess
    thereof.


CLS 439/643
TXT Combined with plural receptacles with each having internal
    screw-thread-coupling contact:

    Device under subclass 642 wherein the single unitary structure, in addition
    to having embodied therein the plug with the externally disposed
    screw-thread-coupling contact, also has embodied therein a plurality of
    plural-contact coupling parts in the form of receptacles, each receptacle
    includes a contact formed with screw-thread-coupling means adapted to
    receive therein or therebetween, by means of relative screw motion, the
    externally disposed screw-thread-coupling counter-contact carried by
    another plural-contact plug, whereby each receptacle may be screw coupled
    with and thereby electrically joined to a mating plural-contact plug having
    a complementary screw-thread-coupling counter-contact externally located
    thereon.

    (1)     Note.  The screw-thread-coupling contact of any receptacle either
    may be located within or may form the plug receiving recess of the
    receptacle.

    (2)     Note.  Usually, the screw-thread-coupling contact of each
    receptacle is a cylindrically hollow member having screw threads formed on
    the interior surface portion thereof.


CLS 439/644
TXT Combined with receptacle having internal bayonet-coupling contact:

    Device under subclass 642 wherein the single unitary structure, in addition
    to having embodied therein the plug with the externally disposed
    screw-thread-coupling contact, also has embodied therein, a plural-contact
    coupling part in the form of a receptacle having a contact disposed within
    a recess extending therein, which contact or recess has an abutment
    extending circumferentially about the longitudinal axis along which the
    receptacle is intended to be coupled to a mating plural-contact plug having
    a contact which itself extends or which has a pin or projection thereon
    which extends radially of the longitudinal axis along which the receptacle
    and plug are intended to be coupled, and wherein the receptacle and its
    mating plug are retained in coupled relationship either by the radially
    extending contact itself, or by the radially extending pin or projection on
    the contact, being received behind the circumferentially extending abutment
    of the receptacle, the engaging motion being first along the longitudinal
    coupling axis and then a partial turning about the said coupling axis.


CLS 439/645
TXT Combined with push-pull-coupling receptacle:

    Device under subclass 642 wherein the single unitary structure, in addition
    to having embodied therein the plug with the externally disposed
    screw-thread-coupling contact, also has embodied therein a plural-contact
    coupling part in the form of a receptacle adapted to receive within the
    interior portion thereof at least a portion of a complementary
    plural-contact plug, the receptacle and its complementary plug being
    intended to be engaged and coupled together solely by linearly pushing the
    one coupling part directly toward the mating coupling part, and the
    receptacle and its complementary plug being intended to be disengaged from
    one another solely by linearly pulling the said one coupling part away from
    the mating coupling part in the direction opposite to the direction of the
    coupling motion.


CLS 439/646
TXT Wherein the receptacle is adapted to receive plug having spaced prong-like
    contacts:

    Device under subclass 645 wherein the push-pull-coupling receptacle is
    adapted to be coupled to a complementary plug having extending therefrom at
    least two spaced, elongated, fingerlike counter-contacts whose longitudinal
    axes are parallel to the longitudinal axis along which the one coupling
    part is intended to be pushed toward and thereby coupled to the other, and
    wherein the receptacle has at least two correspondingly-spaced contacts for
    slidingly engaging the elongated fingerlike counter-contacts along the
    longitudinal axes thereof whenever the one coupling part is pushed toward
    the other.


CLS 439/647
TXT Receptacle having internal screw-thread-coupling contact combined with plug
    having spaced, longitudinally engaging, pronglike contacts:

    Device under subclass 641 wherein the plural-contact coupling part having
    the screw-thread-coupling contact further comprises a receptacle, and
    wherein the screw-thread-coupling contact is adapted to receive therein or
    therebetween the externally disposed screw-thread-coupling  counter-contact
    carried by a complementary plural-contact plug, so that the receptacle may
    be screw coupled with and thereby electrically joined to a mating
    plural-contact plug, having a complementary screw-thread-coupling
    counter-contact externally located thereon; and wherein the single unitary
    structure also has embodied therein a plural-contact coupling part in the
    form of a plug having extending therefrom at least two spaced, elongated,
    fingerlike contacts for being slidingly engaged along the longitudinal axes
    thereof by at least two correspondingly spaced counter-contacts of a
    complementary receptacle, the longitudinal axes of the fingerlike contacts
    are disposed parallel to the longitudinal axis along which the plug or its
    complementary receptacle is intended to be pushed toward and thereby
    coupled to the other.

    (1)     Note.  The screw-thread-coupling contact of the receptacle either
    may be located within or may form the plug-receiving recess of the
    receptacle.

    (2)     Note.  Usually, the screw-thread-coupling contact is a
    cylindrically hollow member having screw-threads formed on the interior
    surface portion thereof.


CLS 439/648
TXT Plural receptacles with each having screw-thread-coupling contact:

    Device under subclass 641 wherein the single unitary structure has embodied
    therein a plurality of plural-contact coupling parts in the form of
    receptacles, each receptacle includes a contact formed with
    screw-thread-coupling means adapted to receive therein or therebetween, by
    means of relative screw motion, the externally disposed
    screw-thread-coupling counter-contact carried by a complementary
    plural-contact plug, so that each of the receptacles may be screw coupled
    with and thereby electrically joined to a mating plural-contact plug,
    having a complementary screw-thread-coupling counter-contact externally
    located thereon.

    (1)     Note.  The screw-thread-coupling contact of any receptacle either
    may be located within or may form the plug-receiving recess of the
    receptacle.

    (2)     Note.  Usually, the screw-thread-coupling contact of each
    receptacle is a cylindrically hollow member having screw threads formed on
    the interior surface portion thereof.


CLS 439/649
TXT Unit includes plural receptacles with each having bayonet-coupling contact:

    Device under subclass 638 wherein the single unitary structure has embodied
    therein a plurality of plural-contact coupling parts in the form of
    receptacles, each receptacle has a contact disposed with a recess extending
    therein, which contact or recess of each of the receptacles has an abutment
    extending circumferentially about the longitudinal axis along which the
    receptacle is intended to be coupled to a mating plural-contact plug having
    a contact which itself extends or which has a pin or projection thereon
    which extends radially of the longitudinal axis along which the receptacle
    and plug are intended to be coupled, and wherein each receptacle and its
    mating plug are retained in coupled relationship either by the radially
    extending contact itself, or by the radially extending pin or projection on
    the contact, being received behind the circumferentially extending abutment
    of the receptacle, the engaging motion being first along the longitudinal
    coupling axis and then a partial turning about said coupling axis.


CLS 439/650
TXT Unit includes receptacle for receiving plug having spaced, longitudinally
    engaging, pronglike contacts:

    Device under subclass 638 wherein at least one of the plural-contact
    coupling parts contained within the single unitary structure comprises a
    receptacle adapted to be coupled to a complementary plug having extending
    therefrom at least two spaced, elongated, fingerlike counter-contacts whose
    longitudinal axes are parallel to the longitudinal axis along which the one
    coupling part is intended to be pushed toward and thereby into engagement
    with other, and wherein the receptacle has at least two correspondingly
    spaced contacts for slidingly engaging the elongated fingerlike
    counter-contacts along the longitudinal axes thereof whenever the one
    coupling part is longitudinally pushed into embracing relationship with the
    other.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the devices included herein are known the art as
    "duplex receptacles."

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for a duplex receptacle with a safety grounding provision.


CLS 439/651
TXT Combined with plug having spaced, longitudinally engaging, pronglike
    contacts:

    Device under subclass 650 wherein the single unitary structure, in addition
    to having embodied therein the receptacle adapted to be coupled to a plug
    having spaced fingerlike counter-contacts, also has embodied therein a
    plural-contact coupling part in the form of a plug having extending
    therefrom at least two spaced, elongated, fingerlike contacts for being
    slidingly engaged along the longitudinal axes thereof by at least two
    correspondingly spaced counter-contacts of a complementary receptacle, the
    longitudinal axes of the fingerlike contacts are disposed parallel to the
    longitudinal axis along which the one coupling part is intended to be
    pushed toward and thereby coupled to the other.


CLS 439/652
TXT Wherein the plug is combined with a plurality of the receptacles adapted to
    receive spaced-prong plug:

    Device under subclass 651 wherein the single unitary structure has embodied
    therein the plug having spaced fingerlike contacts extending therefrom,
    along with a plurality of the receptacles adapted to be coupled to a plug
    having spaced fingerlike counter-contacts extending therefrom.


CLS 439/653
TXT Combined with diverse type of coupling part:

    Device under subclass 650 wherein the single unitary structure, in addition
    to having embodied therein the receptacle adapted to be coupled to a plug
    having spaced fingerlike counter-contacts, also has embodied therein a
    plural-contact coupling part which is of a type different from the said
    receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  Two coupling parts are considered to be "different" if a
    mating plural-contact counter-part designed for coupling with one of the
    coupling parts cannot be coupled with the other coupling part.  Thus, two
    plural-contact receptacles having spaced prong-receiving contacts which
    differ in number, arrangement (i.e., relative spacing therebetween),
    cross-sectional shape, or size constitute "different" types of receptacles
    if a plug having spaced pronglike contacts is capable of being coupled to
    one receptacle but not to the other.


CLS 439/654
TXT Having receptacle at each of parallel opposed surfaces or sides:

    Device under subclass 650 wherein the single unitary structure has embodied
    therein at least two receptacles adapted to be coupled to a complementary
    plug having extending therefrom at least two spaced, elongated, fingerlike
    counter-contacts whose longitudinal axes are parallel to the longitudinal
    axis along which the one coupling part is intended to be pushed toward and
    thereby into engagement with the other, and wherein at least two
    receptacles are located on the single unitary structure so that they
    receive their respective complementary plugs from directions opposite to
    one another.

    (1)     Note.  Often the longitudinal engagement axes of the respective,
    oppositely directed receptacles are also aligned.


CLS 439/655
TXT Unit includes plug having spaced, longitudinally engaging, pronglike
    contacts:

    Device under subclass 638 wherein at least one of the plural-contact
    coupling parts contained within the single unitary structure comprises a
    plug having extending therefrom at least two spaced, elongated, fingerlike
    contacts for being slidingly engaged along the longitudinal axes thereof by
    at least two correspondingly spaced counter-contacts of a complementary
    receptacle, the longitudinal axes of the fingerlike contacts are disposed
    parallel to the longitudinal axis along which the one coupling part is
    intended to be pushed toward and thereby coupled to the other.


CLS 439/656
TXT With common means securing plural conductors to separate contacts:

    Coupling part under subclass 626 having a single operating means for
    clamping or forcibly engaging separate external conductors* each
    individually to separate mutually insulated contacts of the coupling part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    387+,   for a connector having piercing means for contacting external
    conductors and in which a single operator may be included which effects
    simultaneous contacting of the plural conductors.

    711,    for an insulating body having a common operator for simultaneously
    securing separate, mutually insulated contacts or conductor-engaging means
    thereof to separate external contacts or conductors.

    756,    for a clamp-type connector for storage battery post in which the
    connector has common means for effecting connection to both a post and a
    conductor.

    775+,   for various noninsulated types of common means for effecting
    connection between plural conductors and in which special means for
    engaging the plural conductors is provided.


CLS 439/657
TXT Screw-thread operated:

    Coupling part under subclass 656 wherein the clamping or engaging force is
    caused by the motion resulting from the rotation of a screw-threaded member.


CLS 439/658
TXT Having separate through-passageways for enabling securement of intermediate
    portion of conductors thereto:

    Coupling part under subclass 626 wherein the insulating body thereof has
    spaced channels, grooves, or openings extending therethrough, so that each
    contact of the coupling part may be electrically connected to a point on an
    external conductor which is spaced from the ends of the conductor.


CLS 439/659
TXT Coupling part comprises receptacle having internal screw-thread-coupling
    contact:

    Coupling part under subclass 658 comprising a receptacle having a contact
    formed with screw-thread-coupling means adapted to receive therein or
    therebetween, by means of relative screw motion, the externally disposed
    screw-thread-coupling counter-contact carried by a mating plural-contact
    plug, so that the receptacle may be screw coupled with and thereby
    electrically joined to a mating plural-contact plug having a complementary
    screw-thread-coupling counter-contact externally located thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    661+,   for a plural-contact coupling part which may be in the form of a
    receptacle and in which the receptacle has a screw-thread-coupling contact
    for receiving a mating plug having a screw-thread-coupling counter-contact
    externally disposed thereon, and see the search notes appended thereto.


CLS 439/660
TXT Plural-contact coupling part comprises receptacle or plug:

    Coupling part under subclass 626 either (a) in the form of a female
    coupling part denoted as a receptacle which has its contacts located within
    the interior portion thereof, which receptacle further is adapted to have
    its contacts receive the counter-contacts located within the interior
    portion thereof, which receptacle further is adapted to have its contacts
    receive the counter-contacts either protruding outwardly from or externally
    disposed on a complementary male coupling part denoted as a plug whenever
    the receptacle is coupled to the mating plug; or (b) in the form of a male
    coupling part denoted as a plug which has its contacts either protruding
    outwardly therefrom or disposed on the exterior surface thereof, which plug
    further is adapted to have its contacts received by the counter-contacts
    located within the interior portion of a complementary female coupling part
    denoted as a receptacle whenever the plug is coupled to the mating
    receptacle.


CLS 439/661
TXT Having screw-thread-coupling contact:

    Coupling part under subclass 660 having a contact which either has screw
    threads formed thereon or has equivalent screw-thread-engaging means
    thereon which cooperates, by means of a relative screw motion therebetween,
    with screw threads or screw-thread-engaging means formed on mating
    counter-contact, so that the coupling part may be screw coupled to and
    thereby electrically joined to a mating plural-contact counterpart carrying
    a mating screw-thread-coupling counter-contact.

    (1)     Note.  A document which discloses solely a device encompassed by
    the subclass definition set forth herein, but which fails to specifically
    claim the screw threading on a cylindrical or annularily-shaped contact, is
    also included in this and the indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for a connector having a swivel joint between a conductor and a
    screw-type contact shell.

    253+,   for a coupling part adapted to be coupled to a mating connector,
    whereby one of the connectors is  screw threaded, and the couple is engaged
    or disengaged without rotary motion.

    296+,   for a coupling part adapted to be screw-thread-coupled to a mating
    counterpart, but in which the screw-thread-coupling means is not part of a
    contact.

    615,    for a connector having a screw-thread-coupling contact combined
    with a vitreous-type envelope.

    641+,   for a single unitary device having two or more plural-contact
    coupling parts embodied therein and in which at least one of the coupling
    parts has a screw-thread-coupling contact.

    659,    for a receptacle having separate through-passageways for securing
    intermediate portion of conductors thereto and having a
    screw-thread-coupling contact therein.


CLS 439/662
TXT Screw threads formed on cylindrical or annular contact:

    Coupling part under subclass 661 wherein the screw-thread-coupling contact
    is in the form of a short cylindrically-shaped rod, tube, or shell; and
    wherein the screw threads are disposed on a curved surface of the
    cylindrically-shaped contact.


CLS 439/663
TXT Screw-threaded center-contact type:

    Coupling part under subclass 662 wherein the cylindrically-shaped,
    screw-thread-coupling contact is disposed substantially on or at the
    longitudinal axis along which the coupling part engages its mating
    counterpart.

    (1)     Note.  The screw-thread-coupling contact of a coupling part
    included in this subclass is usually the innermost of plural concentric
    contacts.


CLS 439/664
TXT Plug having screw-thread-coupling contact and also having resilient or
    spring-biased center contact:

    Coupling part under subclass 662 in the form of a plug having the
    screw-thread-coupling contact either formed cylindrically around or forming
    the male portion of the plug, the screw threads being disposed about the
    exterior surface portion of the contact; and wherein the plug further has a
    second contact centrally located at the end of the plug on the
    longitudinally axis along which the plug engages its mating receptacle, the
    second contact either (a) being formed from resilient material for
    yieldable movement of the portion thereof along the said longitudinal axis
    of engagement or (b) being resiliently biased for yieldable movement along
    the said longitudinal axis of engagement by the action of a spring means
    associated with the plug.


CLS 439/665
TXT Having multilated, irregular, interrupted, or discontinuous contact thread:

    Coupling part under subclass 662 wherein the screw threading disposed on
    the screw-thread-coupling contact is broken, deformed, or of a
    noncontinuous helical configuration.

    (1)     Note.  The discontinuity of the screw threading on a
    cylindrically-shaped contact shaped shell or tube may be due to the contact
    shell or tube being composed of an assembly of two or more separate
    sections which do not touch one another when they are mounted together to
    form the cylindrical shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    735,    for an annular, screw-threaded contact secured to an insulating
    body in which the contact has multilated, irregular, interrupted, or
    discontinuous screw threading.


CLS 439/666
TXT Receptacle having internal screw-thread-coupling contact:

    Coupling part under subclass 662 in the form of a receptacle having the
    cylindrically-shaped, screw-thread-coupling contact forming the female
    portion of the receptacle, screw threads being disposed on the interior
    surface portion of the contact.


CLS 439/667
TXT And also having resilient or spring-biased center contact:

    Receptacle under subclass 666 further having a second contact centrally
    located within the receptacle on the longitudinal axis along which the
    receptacle receives its mating plug, the second contact either (a) being
    formed from resilient material for yieldable movement of a portion thereof
    along the said longitudinal axis of engagement or (b) being resiliently
    biased for yieldable movement along the said longitudinal axis of
    engagement by the action of a spring means associated with the receptacle.


CLS 439/668
TXT Having only push-pull-engaging contacts spaced along longitudinal axis of
    engagement (e.g., jack-type receptacle or plug):

    Coupling part under subclass 660 adapted to be coupled to its mating
    coupling part solely by linearly pushing the one coupling part directly
    toward and into engagement with the mating coupling part, and the coupling
    parts are separated solely by linearly pulling the said one coupling part
    away from the other coupling part in the engaging motion; and wherein the
    contacts are all either disposed serially along a line parallel to the
    longitudinal axis along which the coupling part engages its mating coupling
    part or disposed serially along two or more lines parallel to but spaced at
    different distances from the longitudinal axis along which the coupling
    part engages its mating coupling part.


CLS 439/669
TXT Plug having cylindrical or annular contacts of substantially the same
    diameter (e.g., jack-type plug):

    Coupling part under subclass 668 in the form of a plug, and wherein all of
    the contacts and the intervening material electrically insulating each of
    the contacts from one another together form a receptacle-receiving male
    part which is cylindrical or rodlike in structure.


CLS 439/670
TXT Having coupling contact requiring successive relative motions in different
    directions to complete the coupling:

    Coupling part under subclass 660 either (a) wherein at least one of the
    contacts thereof has means thereon adapted to cooperate with complementary
    means on the mating coupling part, or (b) wherein the coupling part has
    means thereon adapted to cooperate with complementary means on at least one
    of the counter-contacts of the mating coupling part; and wherein the said
    means on either the contact or the coupling part enables the coupling part
    to be locked or retained in coupled engagement with its mating coupling
    part, the one coupling part being moved first in one direction relative to
    the other coupling part and then moved in a different direction relative to
    the other coupling part.

    (1)     Note.  A configuration or shape of a contact or counter-contact
    which performs the function specified herein for the means on a contact or
    counter-contact is also considered to be encompassed by the said means.


CLS 439/671
TXT Having bayonet-coupling contact:

    Coupling part under subclass 670 comprising either (a) a plug having a
    contact which extends or which has a pin or projection thereon which
    extends radially of the longitudinal axis along which the plug is intended
    to be coupled to its mating plural-contact receptacle; or (b) a receptacle
    having a contact disposed within a recess extending therein, which contact
    or recess has an abutment extending circumferentially about the
    longitudinal axis along which the receptacle is intended to be coupled to
    its mating plural-contact plug; and wherein the plug and its mating
    receptacle are locked or retained in coupled relationship by the radially
    extending contact of the plug or by the radially extending pin or
    projection on the contact of the plug being received behind the
    circumferentially extending abutment of the receptacle, the engaging motion
    being first along the longitudinal coupling axis and then a partial turning
    about the said coupling axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332+,   for a coupling part with a bayonet-type retaining means operating
    between the coupling part and its mating coupling part, which bayonet-type
    retaining means is in addition to any retaining means formed or located on
    one or more contacts of the coupling part.


CLS 439/672
TXT Bayonet-coupling contact comprises cylindrical-shaped ring or shell:

    Coupling part under subclass 671 wherein the locking or retaining contact,
    which requires the engaging motion between the coupling part and its mating
    coupling part to be first along the longitudinal coupling axis and then a
    partial turning about the said coupling axis, is further in the form of a
    short tube or shell-like member having a circularly-shaped cross-section,
    and wherein the coupling part either (a) is a plug in which the male
    portion thereof is in the form of a cylinder for insertion into the recess
    of the mating receptacle and the locking or retaining contact surrounds or
    forms the male portion of the plug, or (b) is a receptacle in which the
    female portion thereof is in the form of a cylindrically-shaped recess for
    receiving the male portion of the mating plug and the locking or retaining
    contact either is located within and forms the interior cylindrical surface
    of the female portion of the receptacle or forms the female portion of the
    receptacle.


CLS 439/673
TXT Having plural bayonet-coupling contacts:

    Coupling part under subclass 671 carrying at least two mutually insulated,
    locking or retaining contacts, each of which requires the engaging motion
    between the coupling part and its mating coupling part to be first along
    the longitudinal coupling axis and then a partial turning about the said
    coupling axis.


CLS 439/674
TXT Polarized:

    Coupling part under subclass 673 further having indexing or keying means
    formed thereon or attachable thereto, which indexing or keying means is
    intended to cooperate with complementary indexing or keying means on a
    mating coupling part, so that either (a) the various contacts of the
    coupling part must always be associated with the same corresponding
    counter-contacts on the mating coupling part whenever the coupling part is
    coupled to its mating coupling part, or (b) the coupling part must be
    capable of being coupled to only one specific, but to no other, mating
    coupling part among a plurality of mating coupling parts which are all
    structurally identical except for some variation of the indexing or keying
    means thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    677+,   for a coupling part having polarizing means, and the search notes
    appended thereto.


CLS 439/675
TXT Having annular, push-pull-engaging contact concentrically disposed about
    longitudinal axis of engagement:

    Coupling part under subclass 660 intended to be coupled to its mating
    coupling part solely by linearly pushing the one coupling part directly
    toward and into engagement with the mating coupling part, and the coupling
    part is separated from its mating coupling part solely by linearly pulling
    the said one coupling part away from the other coupling part in the
    direction opposite to the direction of the engaging motion; and wherein at
    least one of the contacts of the coupling part is in the form of a
    cylindrically-shaped tube, sleeve, or shell or in form of a
    circularly-shaped ring, and the axis around which the contact is
    cylindrically or circularly disposed is coincident with the longitudinal
    axis along which the coupling part engages its mating coupling part.


CLS 439/676
TXT Having push-pull engaging contacts spaced along planar side wall transverse
    to longitudinal engagement axis (e.g., telephone jack or plug):

    Coupling part under subclass 660 adapted to be engaged with and disengaged
    from its mating coupling part solely by movement of one part relative to
    the other along a straight line passing through both coupling parts; the
    coupling part includes a planar contact-carrying wall surface extending
    parallel to the straight line produced by the coupling or uncoupling
    movement; and the contacts are spaced along a straight line on the planar
    wall surface perpendicular to the straight line produced by the coupling or
    uncoupling movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    344,    for a similar plural-contact coupling part having a retaining means
    in addition to a contact.


CLS 439/677
TXT Polarized:

    Coupling part under subclass 660 having indexing or keying means formed
    thereon or attachable thereto, which indexing or keying means is intended
    to cooperate with complementary indexing or keying means on a mating
    coupling part, so that either (a) the various contacts of the coupling part
    must always be associated with the same corresponding counter-contacts on
    the mating coupling part whenever the coupling part is coupled to its
    mating coupling part, or (b) the coupling part must be capable of being
    coupled to only one specific, but to no other, mating coupling part among a
    plurality of mating coupling parts which are all structurally identical
    except for some variation of the indexing or keying means thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92+,    for an electrical connector which may be polarized for safety
    grounding purposes.

    633,    for a plural-contact coupling part adapted to be coupled to the
    edge of a printed circuit board, the coupling part further including an
    indexing or keying means.

    674,    for a coupling part having plural bayonet-coupling contacts and
    further including an indexing or keying means.


CLS 439/678
TXT By asymmetric disposition or asymmetric shape of duplicate contacts:

    Coupling part under subclass 677 wherein all of the contact are identical;
    the identical contacts either (a) are randomly or irregularly disposed on
    the coupling part and are adapted to engage correspondingly disposed
    counter-contacts on the mating coupling part, so that the coupling part can
    be coupled to its mating coupling part at only one relative disposition of
    the coupling parts; or (b) have an irregular shape, the irregular shape of
    each contact enabling the contact to engage a complementarily-shaped
    counter-contact on a mating coupling part in only one relative disposition
    of the contact and its counter-contact, so that the coupling part can be
    coupled to its mating coupling part at only one relative disposition of the
    coupling parts.


CLS 439/679
TXT By having or receiving contacts of similar type which are unequal in size
    or shape:

    Coupling part under subclass 677 either (a) wherein at least one of the
    contacts carried by the coupling part has a size dimension or a
    cross-sectional shape different from all the other contacts and yet is
    still similar in general configuration and structure to the other contacts
    and still functions to engage its corresponding counter-contact in the same
    manner as the other contacts, so that the coupling part can be coupled to
    its mating coupling part at only one relative disposition of the coupling
    parts; or (b) wherein the body of the coupling part has openings through or
    into which counter-contacts correspondingly disposed on a mating coupling
    part must be introduced in order to engage the contacts carried by the
    coupling part so as to complete the electrical coupling, at least one of
    the openings has a size dimension or a cross-sectional shape different from
    all the other openings in order to accommodate counter-contacts having
    complementary sizes or shapes, so that the coupling part can be coupled to
    its mating coupling part at only one relative disposition of the coupling
    parts.


CLS 439/680
TXT By key or guideway:

    Coupling part under subclass 677 either (a) having a groove or slot thereon
    disposed parallel to the axis along which the coupling part engages its
    mating coupling part, which groove or slot is intended to cooperate with a
    member carried by the mating coupling part by slidingly receiving the
    member within the groove or slot to fix the relative angular relationship
    of the coupling parts about the longitudinal engagement axis whenever they
    are coupled; or (b) having a member thereon adapted to cooperate with a
    groove or slot disposed on the mating coupling part parallel to the axis
    along which the coupling part engages its mating coupling part, which
    member is intended to ride in said groove or slot to fix the relative
    angular relationship of the coupling parts about the longitudinal
    engagement axis whenever they are coupled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    374+,   for a coupling part having guiding means which may serve to
    polarize the coupling part.


CLS 439/681
TXT User adjustable key or guideway:

    Coupling part under subclass 680 wherein the indexing or keying means,
    which either provides the groove or slot or provides the member which
    cooperates with a groove or slot, is further capable of (a) being
    selectively shifted about on the body of the coupling part from one
    location to another, (b) being selectively mounted to the body of the
    coupling part at any one of two or more locations, (c) having its
    orientation relative to the body of the coupling part selectively changed,
    or (d) being removed from the body of the coupling part and selectively
    exchanged for another indexing or keying means having a different indexing
    or keying characteristic.


CLS 439/682
TXT Receptacle for receiving plug having spaced, longitudinally engaging,
    prong-like contacts:

    Coupling parts under subclass 660 in the form of a receptacle which is
    adapted to be coupled to a mating coupling part in the form of a plug
    having extending therefrom at least two spaced, elongated, fingerlike
    counter-contacts whose longitudinal axes are parallel to the longitudinal
    axis along which the one coupling part is intended to be linearly pushed
    toward and thereby into engagement with the other coupling part, and
    wherein the receptacle carries at least two correspondingly spaced contacts
    for slidingly engaging the elongated fingerlike counter-contacts along the
    longitudinal axes thereof whenever the one coupling part is pushed into
    embracing relationship with the other coupling part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106+,   for a receptacle for receiving a three-prong coupling part
    including a safety ground prong.

    218+,   for a coupling part having an alternatively connected coupling face.

    225,    for a contact tap between normally engaged coupling parts.

    226+,   for a coupling part having a fluorescent or neon lamp.

    246+,   for an electrical connector having a self-aligning contact.

    266+,   for a coupling part having a handle or means to move a contact
    laterally to permit uncoupling.

    374+,   for a coupling part with guiding means for mating coupling part.

    517,    for a power measuring meter coupling part.

    597+,   for a coupling part including flexing insulation and having plural,
    laterally spaced, prong sockets.

    638+,   particularly subclasses 646 and 650+, for a single unitary device
    including two or more plural-contact coupling parts, at least one of which
    is a receptacle adapted to receive a spaced-prong plug.


CLS 439/683
TXT Adapted to receive base connector of electron tube:

    Receptacle under subclass 682 specifically intended to be coupled to a plug
    which carries or is intended to carrying an electric space discharge device
    of the electron-tube type.

    (1)     Note.  The term "electron tube" is interpreted to mean an
    electronic device in which conduction by electrons takes place through a
    vacuum or a gaseous medium within a sealed glass or metal container and
    which has various uses based on the controlled flow of electrons.  Various
    specialized types of, or alternative names for, an electron tube include:
    an X-ray tube, cathode-ray tube, vacuum tube, theremionic tube, or
    electrical valve (British terminology).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56+,    168, 182, 220, 280, 356, 360, 375, 414, 419, 541, 558, 602, and
    605, for a receptacle adapted to receive the base connector of an electron
    tube, which receptacle is combined with other features provided for in this
    class.


CLS 439/684
TXT Receptacle body formed of thin, superposed plates or discs of insulation:

    Receptacle under subclass 683 wherein the insulating body forming the
    receptacle is composed of a plurality of flat, thin, sheetlike places of
    insulation which are layered or stacked one atop another or located in
    spaced, face-to-face relationship one above another and which carry the
    contacts.


CLS 439/685
TXT Having only three prong-receiving recesses arranged to define apices of a
    triangle:

    Receptacle under subclass 682 wherein the insulating body of the receptacle
    has three sockets or apertures extending therein parallel to the
    longitudinal axis of engagement of the coupling, the openings of the
    sockets or apertures being nonlinearly arranged across the coupling face of
    the receptacle; and wherein the receptacle has only three contacts, each of
    which is located either within or directly behind a said socket or aperture
    so that the fingerlike counter-contacts extending from the mating plug must
    be introduced within or passed through the sockets or apertures to complete
    the electrical coupling.


CLS 439/686
TXT Having multipart insulating body or casing:

    Receptacle under subclass 682 wherein the body of insulation is segmental,
    divided, or otherwise composed of an assembly of two or more sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    599,    634+, 684+, 695+, and 701, for a coupling part having a multipart
    insulating body.

    707,    712+, 724, and 731, for an electrical connector having a multipart
    insulating body.


CLS 439/687
TXT Divided parallel to longitudinal engagement axis (e.g., formed of two
    casing halves):

    Receptacle under subclass 686 wherein the insulating body is separable
    along at least one line generally parallel to the longitudinal axis along
    which the receptacle is intended to engage its mating plug.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    465+,   for an electrical connector comprising a longitudinally divided
    connector housing for gripping a conductor to provide stress relief for the
    conductor to terminal joint.

    696,    for a spaced-prong plug having an insulating housing divided
    parallel to the longitudinal engagement axis of the plug.

    731,    for an electrical connector housing made of insulating material and
    divided parallel to the longitudinal engagement axis of the connector.


CLS 439/688
TXT Formed of superposed planar sheets or plates of insulation:

    Receptacle under subclass 686 wherein the insulating body is composed of a
    plurality of thin, flat, sheetlike pieces of insulation which are layered
    or stacked one atop another, or located in spaced, face-to-face
    relationship one above the other.


CLS 439/689
TXT Planar insulating cover overlying insulating body or casing:

    Receptacle under subclass 686 wherein the insulating body is composed of
    (a) a main contact-carrying housing having an opening leading into an
    externally accessible interior portion and (b) a separate thin, flat
    closure member removably secured to the main housing to close-off the
    opening leading into the interior portion of the housing.


CLS 439/690
TXT Insulating parts secured together by screw-threaded means:

    Receptacle under subclass 686 wherein the insulating sections separably
    forming the insulating body are held together by means having screw threads
    formed thereon, the screw-thread-carrying means being either a portion of
    the insulating sections or an additional member cooperating with the
    sections.


CLS 439/691
TXT Having additional resilient member cooperating with contact to increase
    grip on contact of mating plug:

    Receptacle under subclass 682 including a resilient means operatively
    associated with at least one of the contacts thereof, but not part of the
    contact itself, for applying pressure, over and above what the contact
    itself may apply, to the fingerlike counter-contact of the plug whenever
    the receptacle and plug are in coupled relationship so as to either help
    maintain the coupled relationship of the receptacle and plug or enhance the
    transfer of electrical current from one contact to its mating contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    833,    for a metallic spring clip, per se, having a resilient securing
    part for receiving the end contact of an elongated fuselike component
    inserted transverse to the longitudinal axis of the component, which spring
    clip is combined with a separate means to increase the clamping pressure of
    the spring clip.

    839,    for a metallic connector or contact, per se, having a resiliently
    urged securing part, which connector or contact is combined with an
    additional reinforcing spring means.


CLS 439/692
TXT Plug having spaced, longitudinally engaging, prong-like contacts:

    Coupling part under subclass 660 in the form of a plug having extending
    therefrom at least two spaced, elongated, fingerlike contacts whose
    longitudinal axes are parallel to the longitudinal axis along which the one
    coupling part is intended to be linearly pushed toward and into engagement
    with its mating coupling part, and wherein the contacts of the plug are
    slidingly engaged along the longitudinal axes thereof by the
    counter-contacts of the mating receptacle whenever the one coupling part is
    pushed into embracing relationship with its mating coupling part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106+,   for a three-prong coupling part including a ground prong.

    149+,   for an electrical connector combined with a prong cover.

    266+,   for a coupling part having a handle or means to move a contact
    laterally to permit uncoupling, and see the Search Notes appended thereto
    for the bases of lamps or electron tubes.

    374+,   for a coupling part with guiding means for mating with a
    complementary coupling part.

    568,    for a coupling part supported by a randomly manipulated appliance
    (e.g., electric iron).

    597+,   for a coupling part including flexing insulation and having plural,
    laterally spaced, prongs.

    617+,   for a plug having spaced, longitudinally engaging, prong contacts
    combined with a vitreous-type envelope.

    638+,   particularly subclasses 647, 651+ and 655, for a single unitary
    device which includes two or more plural-contact coupling parts, at least
    one of the coupling parts being a spaced-prong plug.


CLS 439/693
TXT With insulative covering about part of protruding portion of each contact:

    Plug under subclass 692 wherein each of the contacts protruding from the
    insulating body of the plug has an additional coating or sheath formed of
    insulating material which encloses or covers a part of the outwardly
    protruding portion of the contact.

    (1)     Note.  Generally, the purpose of the insulative sheath covering a
    portion of the pronglike contacts is to prevent electrical shock to the
    person who may inadvertently grasp the pronglike contacts with his hand
    while plugging or unplugging the plug into or from its mating receptacle.


CLS 439/694
TXT Having wire conductor receiving passageway extending perpendicular to
    longitudinal axes of contacts:

    Plug under subclass 692 having a socket or aperture extending into the
    insulating body thereof generally at a right angle to the longitudinal axes
    of the fingerlike contacts, which sockets or aperture is intended to
    receive a wire-type or cable-type conductor therein for electrical
    securement to one or more of the contacts.


CLS 439/695
TXT Having multipart insulating body:

    Plug under subclass 692 wherein the body of insulation is segmental,
    divided, or otherwise composed of an assembly of two of more sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    599,    634+, 684+, 686+, and 701, for a coupling part having a multipart
    insulating body.

    707,    712+, 724, and 731, for an electrical connector having a multipart
    insulating body.


CLS 439/696
TXT Divided parallel to longitudinal engagement axis (e.g., formed of two
    casing halves):

    Plug under subclass 695 wherein the insulating body is separable along at
    least one line generally parallel to the longitudinal axis along which the
    plug is intended to engage its mating receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    465+,   for an electrical connector comprising a longitudinally divided
    connector housing for gripping a conductor to provide stress relief for the
    conductor to terminal joint.

    687,    for a receptacle for a spaced-prong plug, which receptacle includes
    an insulating housing divided parallel to the longitudinal engagement axis
    of the receptacle.

    731,    for an electrical connector housing made of insulating material
    which is divided parallel to the longitudinal engagement axis of the
    connector.


CLS 439/697
TXT Having means other than screw-threaded means for securing wire-type
    conductor to contact:

    Plug under subclass 692 including means, other than a means having screw
    threads thereon, for enabling the end of a wire-type conductor or terminal
    secured to such end of a wire-type conductor to be mechanically and
    electrically fastened or clamped to a contact carried by the plug.

    (1)     Note.  The conductor may be either separably secured to the contact
    (e.g., by a resiliently biased portion of the contact) or permanently
    secured to the contact (e.g., by crimping a portion of the contact onto the
    conductor or by soldering the conductor to the contact).


CLS 439/698
TXT Receptacle for transversely receiving elongated fuselike component having
    contact at each end thereof:

    Receptacle under subclass 660 specifically adapted to be electrically
    coupled to a narrow, tube-shaped plug having a counter-contact located at
    each of the longitudinally spaced-apart ends thereof, the plug being
    intended to be moved into coupled engagement with the receptacle by pushing
    the plug toward the receptacle along a line perpendicular to the
    longitudinal axis of the plug; and wherein the receptacle has two contacts
    which are spaced apart from one another along the coupling face thereof a
    distance approximately equal to the longitudinal length of the plug, so
    that the longitudinal length of the plug lies along a line passing through
    the spaced-apart contacts of the receptacle whenever the receptacle is
    coupled to the plug.

    (1)     Note.  Usually, the plug adapted to be coupled to the receptacle
    provided herein is in the form of a cartridge-type fuse.

    (2)     Note. The cross-sectional shape of the tube-shaped plug may be
    circular, square, hexagonal, elliptical, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239+,   for a coupling part specially designed to receive a fluorescent or
    neon lamp, which coupling part is further designed for transverse receipt
    of a lamp contact.

    249+,   particularly subclass 250, for a receptacle having two directly
    opposed contact arms for receiving a connector therebetween, one of the
    contact arms being self-aligning.

    830+,   for a spring-actuated resilient metallic contact, per se, for
    receiving an end contact of an elongated fuselike component inserted
    transverse to the longitudinal axis of the component.


CLS 439/699.1
TXT Having only two duplicate contacts arranged bilaterally symmetric about
    longitudinal axis of engagement:

    Coupling part under subclass 660 carrying only two identical contacts which
    are spaced apart and electrically insulated from one another, wherein the
    two contacts taken together are disposed bilaterally symmetric about the
    longitudinal axis along which the coupling part is intended to be engaged
    and coupled with its mating coupling part.

    (1)     Note.  The bilaterally symmetric disposition of the two duplicate
    contacts of a plug or receptacle in this subclass also means that each
    contact is annularly spaced about the longitudinal axis of engagement 180
    degrees from the other contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    619,    for a coupling part having only two duplicate contacts arranged
    bilaterally symmetric about the longitudinal axis of engagement, wherein
    the coupling part is carried by a glasslike body.


CLS 439/699.2
TXT Lamp-receiving socket:

    Coupling part under subclass 699.1 particularly adapted to detachably
    receive and electrically couple to a member intended to radiate light
    utilizing an environment-excluding, vacuum-maintaining envelope.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    336+,   for a lamp-receiving socket with coupling-movement actuating means
    or retaining means in addition to the contact of the coupling part.  Also,
    see the additional search notes therein.


CLS 439/700
TXT Having spring-biased, plunger-type contact movable along line parallel to
    longitudinal axis of engagement:

    Coupling part under subclass 660 wherein at least one of the contacts
    carried thereby is in the form of a pistonlike member which is mounted for
    reciprocative movement relative to the coupling part whenever the one
    coupling part is moved into or out of engagement with its mating coupling
    part, the reciprocative movement being along a line parallel to the
    longitudinal axis of the coupling part or parallel to the longitudinal axis
    along which the coupling part is intended to engage its mating coupling
    part, and wherein the pistonlike contact member is further resiliently
    biased for yieldable movement along the said line by the action of a spring
    means carried by the coupling part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    824,    for a spring-biased butt contact, per se.


CLS 439/701
TXT Having modular or multipart insulating body:

    Coupling part under subclass 660 either (a) wherein the body of insulating
    includes means for enabling the coupling part to be separably joined or
    assembled with one or more other coupling parts which are substantially
    identical in structure to the first coupling part so as to build up an
    assembly composed of any desired number of duplicate coupling parts, or (b)
    wherein the body of insulation is segmental, divided, or otherwise composed
    of an assembly of two or more sections.

    (1)     Note.  The multipart insulating body in this subclass refers only
    to a single coupling part.  Thus, two discrete coupling parts joined to
    form an electrical joint are not considered to be subject matter for this
    subclass unless each of the individual coupling parts is composed of a
    multipart insulating body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    594,    for a coupling part having flexing insulation for resiliently
    interlocking with an adjacent modular coupling part.

    599,    634+, 684, 686+, and 695+, for a coupling part having a multipart
    insulating body.

    707,    712+, 724, and 731, for an electrical connector having a multipart
    insulating body.


CLS 439/702
TXT Insulating body comprising or for use with cylindrical cap and shell type
    lamp receptacle casing:

    Insulating body under subclass 625 either (a) in the form of a housing
    composed of a hollow insulating cylinder and a removable insulating cover
    for closing off one end of the cylinder, the insulating housing being
    adapted to contain a plural-contact receptacle which is accessed though the
    remaining open end of the cylinder by a mating cylindrical plug of the type
    having one of its contacts in the form of a cylinder or annulus surrounding
    the cylindrical plug; or (b) adapted to be enclosed within a housing
    composed of a hollow metallic cylinder and a removable metallic cover for
    closing off one end of the cylinder, the housing being adapted to contain a
    plural-contact receptacle which is accessed through the remaining open end
    of the cylinder by a mating cylindrical plug of the type having one of its
    contacts in the form of a cylinder or annulus surrounding the cylindrical
    plug.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    753,    for a cylindrical metallic cap and shell- type lamp receptacle
    casing, per se.


CLS 439/703
TXT Insulating lining or contact support within separable, metallic cap and
    shell casing:

    Insulating body under subclass 702 combined with and enclosed within a
    housing composed of a hollow metallic cylinder and a removable metallic
    cover, and wherein the body of insulation either (a) is in the form of a
    thin insulating sleeve or tube or in the form of a thin insulating disc so
    that the metallic cylinder or metallic cover is separated from the
    plural-contact receptacle by nonconductive material, or (b) has or is
    adapted to have contacts of conductor securing means secured thereto.


CLS 439/704
TXT Insulating lining or contact support within metallic cap casing:

    Insulating body under subclass 702 combined with the removable metallic
    cover forming part of a housing, and wherein the body of insulation either
    (a) is in the form of a thin insulating disc located adjacent the interior
    surface of the cover so that the metallic cover is separated from the
    plural-material, or (b) has or is adapted to have contacts or conductor
    securing means secured thereto.


CLS 439/705
TXT Insulating lining or contact support within metallic shell casing:

    Insulating body under subclass 702 combined with a hollow metallic cylinder
    forming part of a housing, and wherein the body of insulation either (a) is
    in the form of a thin insulating sleeve or tube located adjacent the
    interior surface of the cylinder so that the metallic cylinder is separated
    from the plural-contact receptacle by nonconductive material, or (b) has or
    is adapted to have contacts or conductor securing means secured thereto.


CLS 439/706
TXT Insulating lining for interior of metallic cap or shell casing:

    Insulating body under subclass 702 either (a) in the form of a thin
    insulating sleeve or tube adapted to be located adjacent the interior
    surface of the hollow metallic cylinder forming part of a housing so that
    the metallic cylinder is separated from the plural-contact receptacle by
    nonconductive material, or (b) in the form of thin insulting disc adapted
    to be located adjacent the interior surface of the removable metallic cover
    forming part of a housing so that the metallic cover is separated from the
    plural-contact receptacle by nonconductive material.


CLS 439/707
TXT Separable insulating cap and shell casing:

    Insulating body under subclass 702 in the form of a housing composed of a
    hollow insulating cylinder and a removable insulating cover for closing off
    one end of the cylinder, the plural-contact receptacle adapted to be
    enclosed by the housing being electrically coupled to the mating plug
    though the remaining open end of the cylinder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    703,    704 and 705, for a separable metallic cap and shell casing, or cap
    or shell portion thereof, combined with an insulating lining or contact
    support.

    753,    for a cylindrical metallic cap and shell- type lamp receptacle
    casing, per se.


CLS 439/708
TXT Insulating body providing direct contact or engagement of duplicate
    terminals or conductors:

    Electrical connector under subclass 625 wherein the insulating body thereof
    includes means for physically associating either a plurality of identical
    wire-type conductors* or a plurality of identical wire-type-conductor end
    terminals into touching engagement with one another so as to electrically
    join them together.

    (1)     Note.  Since a connector included in this subclass does not rely
    upon a contact or any other conductive, current-carrying part to
    electrically interconnect the duplicate conductors or terminals, a
    connector in this subclass will often consist entirely of insulation.

    (2)     Note.  The mere recitation in a claim that the identical conductors
    or terminals are in contact with each other is not sufficient for
    classification in this subclass.  To be classified in this subclass, some
    structural modification of the connector which particularly adapts it to
    make an electrical connection in which the connected conductors or
    terminals directly contact each other must be claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    778+    and 792+, for a metallic connector or contact having a movable or
    resilient securing part for providing direct contact or engagement of
    plural conductors or conductor end terminals.


CLS 439/709
TXT Insulating body having plural mutually insulated terminals or contacts
    (e.g., terminal block):

    Electrical connector under subclass 625 wherein two or more
    current-carrying terminals, contacts,* conductor-securing means, or other
    metallic connectors are carried by an electrically insulating body in a
    relatively fixed, spaced-apart relationship with one another and in
    electrical insulation from one another.

    (1)     Note.  A connector included in this and the indented subclasses
    differs from a plural-contact coupling part (as found in subclasses 626+)
    in that a connector included herein is neither adapted nor in any other way
    intended to be coupled or mated to a single complementary insulating body
    carrying plural mutually insulated contacts.

    (2)     Note.  One common type of connector included herein (usually known
    as a terminal block or board) has a first means to receive and electrically
    interconnect separate wire-type conductors or separate wire-type conductor
    end terminals and has a second means to receive and electrically
    interconnect another set of separate wire-type conductors or another set of
    separate wire-type conductor end terminals; the said another set of
    conductors remaining, however, electrically insulated from the first set of
    conductors.

    (3)     Note.  Any of the metallic connectors, terminals, or conductor
    securing means carried by a terminal block or board included herein may
    simply be in the form of a screw or nut securing means around which a
    wire-type conductor is intended to be wound, or it may be in the form of a
    clip for receiving a complementary wire-type conductor or wire-type
    conductor end terminal, but in every case the wire-type conductors received
    by such terminal block or board are physically separate elements.

    (4)     Note.  Also included herein (particularly in subclasses 710 and
    712+) is a single insulating body (commonly known as a "modular" terminal
    block or board) which usually has a single current-carrying bus or
    commoning bar having two or more electrically interconnected terminals,
    contacts, or conductor-securing means thereon.  This "modular" terminal
    block or board is particularly adapted and intended to be separably joined
    or assembled with or more other terminal blocks or boards which are
    substantially identical in structure to the first said block or board, so
    that an assembly composed of any desired number of identical terminal
    blocks or boards may be built up.  The resultant assembly is thus comprised
    of a composite insulating body carrying a plurality of mutually insulated
    terminals, contacts, or conductor-securing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    723+,   for an insulating body carrying spaced, electrically
    interconnected, duplicate terminals, contacts, conductor-securing mans, or
    other metallic connectors.


CLS 439/710
TXT Duplicate insulating blocks or boards interconnected by frangible or
    severable part:

    Electrical connector under subclass 709 wherein the insulating body thereof
    is composed of a plurality of identical insulating body parts which are all
    integrally joined in side-by-side relationship to one another by
    intervening web means; each body part carries at least one terminal,
    conductor-securing means, or other metallic connector thereon; and the
    intervening web means forming integral joint between any two adjacent body
    parts is adapted to be readily broken or cut so as to enable separation
    therebetween and to thereby enable utilization of a composite body having
    any selected number of identical body parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    590,    for a storage strip made of yieldable nonconductive material
    carrying a plurality of a similar coupling parts.

    885,    for a storage carrying detachable contacts.


CLS 439/711
TXT With common operator for simultaneously securing separate contacts thereof
    to separate external contacts or conductors:

    Electrical connector under subclass 709 having a single manipulatable means
    thereon for simultaneously clamping or otherwise forcibly engaging two or
    more separate external contacts or conductors each individually to two or
    more separate, mutually insulated contacts or conductor-engaging means
    carried by the connector, so that each contact or conductor-engaging means
    of the connector may be electrically joined to a respective external
    contact or conductor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    387+,   for a connector having piercing means for contacting external
    conductors and in which a single operator may be included which effects
    simultaneous contacting of the plural conductors.

    656+,   for a plural-contact coupling part having a common means for
    securing plural conductors to separate contacts.

    756,    for a clamp-type connector for a storage battery post in which the
    connector has a common means for effecting connection to both a post and a
    conductor.

    775+,   for various noninsulated types of common means for effecting
    connection between plural conductors and in which special means for
    engaging the plural conductors is provided.


CLS 439/712
TXT Modular or multipart insulating body:

    Electrical connector under subclass 709 either (a) including means for
    enabling the connector to be separably joined to or assembled with one or
    more other connectors which are substantially identical in structure to the
    first connector so that an assembly composed of any desired number of
    substantially identical connectors may be built up, or (b) wherein the body
    of insulation is segmental, divided, or otherwise composed of an assembly
    of two or more sections.

    (1)     Note.  Usually, a "modular" connector (commonly known as a
    "modular" terminal block or board) carries only current-carrying bus or
    commoning bar, and the bus or commoning bar in turn carries two or more
    electrically interconnected terminals, contacts, or conductor-securing
    means thereon.  However, whenever this "modular" block or board is
    assembled with one or more other "modular" blocks or boards which are
    similar to the first, the resultant assembly of "modular" terminal blocks
    or boards forms a composite insulating body carrying a plurality of
    mutually insulated terminals, contacts, or conductor-securing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    599,    634+, 684, 686+, 695+, and 701, for a coupling part having a
    multipart insulating body.

    707,    724 and 731, for an electrical connector having a multipart
    insulating body.


CLS 439/713
TXT Relatively movable insulating body parts:

    Electrical connector under subclass 712 wherein the insulating sections or
    segments forming the insulating body are held together by means enabling
    one of the sections or segments to be moved relative to another while
    remaining assembled to the one or more other sections or segments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    296+,   for a coupling part with coupling movement actuating means or with
    retaining means, other than on a contact, for retaining coupled connectors
    together.

    635,    for a coupling part adapted to receive an edge of a printed circuit
    board and which is composed of relatively movable insulating body parts so
    that the pressure of the contacts thereof upon the contacts of the printed
    circuit board may be altered.


CLS 439/714
TXT Formed of three or more thin, flat, superposed layers, plates, or sheets of
    insulation:

    Electrical connector under subclass 712 wherein the insulating body thereof
    is composed of at least three thin, flat, sheetlike pieces of insulation
    which are layered in spaced, face-to-face relationship one above another.


CLS 439/715
TXT Modular insulating block or board:

    Electrical connector under subclass 712 including means for enabling the
    connector to be separably joined to or assembled with one or more other
    connectors which are substantially identical in structure to the first
    connector so that an assembly composed of any desired number of
    substantially identical connectors may be built up.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    594,    for a coupling part having flexing insulation for resiliently
    interlocking with an adjacent modular coupling part.

    701,    for a plural-contact receptacle or plug having a modular insulating
    body.

    712,    for search notes to related subject matter, and see especially (1)
    Note appended thereto for a further discussion of the term "modular."

    724,    for an electrical connector having a modular or multipart
    insulating body carrying spaced, electrically interconnected, duplicate
    terminals or contacts.


CLS 439/716
TXT With support track for receiving plural insulating blocks or boards:

    Electrical connector under subclass 715 combined with an elongated means
    for holding or retaining the connector in side-by-side relationship with
    one or more other connectors which are substantially identical in structure
    to the first connector so that a plurality of the connectors may be
    supported together in assembled relationship.

    (1)     Note.  Usually, the elongated means for holding or retaining a
    plurality of the connectors in assembled relationship is somewhat in the
    form of an elongated C-or U-shaped channel or rail.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    527+,   especially subclass 532, for a coupling part combined with a means
    for supporting the coupling part.


CLS 439/717
TXT Having integral means to interlock or interfit with a duplicate insulating
    block or board:

    Electrical connector under subclass 715 having unitary means thereon
    adapted to be mated to or interengaged with complementary unitary means on
    at least one of the other connectors to or with which the first said
    connector is to be joined or assembled, so that unitary means on the
    connector cooperating with the complementary unitary means on at least one
    other connector permits the connectors to be assembled together and
    maintained in joined relationship.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    594,    for a coupling part having flexing insulation for resiliently
    interlocking with an adjacent modular coupling part.

    701,    for a plural-contact receptacle or plug having a modular insulating
    body.


CLS 439/718
TXT Having protective cover formed from insulating material:

    Electrical connector under subclass 712 wherein the insulating body is
    composed of (a) a main body member which carries the current-carrying parts
    of the connector and (b) a closure member which is either movably secured
    or removably attached to the main body member, the closure member is
    intended to be manipulated or attached to enclose or otherwise close-off
    the current-carrying parts from the exterior of the connector or,
    alternatively, be manipulated or removed to permit access to the
    current-carrying parts of the connector.


CLS 439/719
TXT With conductor fanning means:

    Electrical connector under subclass 709 having thereon means to guide or
    position a plurality of wire-type conductors so as to prevent entanglement
    of the conductors whenever they are attached to the connector.


CLS 439/720
TXT Terminals or contacts secured by permanently bending or deforming metallic
    part onto insulation:

    Electrical connector under subclass 709 wherein the terminals, contacts,
    conductor-securing means, or other metallic connectors are fastened or
    attached to the insulating body (a) by permanently bending, crimping, or
    deforming a malleable portion of each terminal, contact conductor-securing
    means, or other metallic connector onto or into a portion of the insulating
    body or (b) by permanently bending, crimping, or deforming a separate
    metallic rivet or other separate portion of the insulating body or onto a
    portion of each terminal, contact, conductor-securing means, or other
    metallic connector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    741+,   for the combination of an insulating body and a metallic connector
    or contact in which the metallic connector or contact is secured to the
    insulating body by permanently bending, crimping, or deforming a part
    thereof or a separate metallic part onto the insulating body.

    870,    for a metallic connector or contact, per se, which is adapted to be
    secured to an insulating body by permanently bending, crimping, or
    deforming a part thereof or a separate metallic part onto the insulating
    body.


CLS 439/721
TXT Having three or more spaced, electrically interconnected, duplicate
    terminals or contacts:

    Electrical connector under subclass 709 wherein at least one of the
    mutually insulated terminals, contacts, conductor-securing means, or other
    metallic connectors carried by the insulating body is spaced apart from and
    electrically connected to at least two other spaced-apart terminals,
    contacts, conductor-securing means, or other metallic connectors which are
    identical to the first said terminal, contact, conductor-securing means, or
    other metallic connector and which are also carried by the insulating body.

    (1)     Note.  Usually, the three or more spaced, electrically
    interconnected, duplicate terminals, contacts, conductor-securing means, or
    other metallic connectors are electrically interconnected by means of a bus
    bar, neutral bar, shorting bar, or other similar current-carrying means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    723+,   for an insulating body with spaced electrically interconnected,
    duplicate terminals, contacts, conductor-securing means, or other metallic
    connectors; but in which no other terminals, contacts, conductor-securing
    means, or other metallic connectors, insulated from the interconnected
    terminals, etc., are included.

    755+,   for an uninsulated connector having spaced electrically
    interconnected means for securing plural conductors or connectors thereto.


CLS 439/722
TXT Terminals or contacts embedded in insulating body:

    Electrical connector under subclass 709 wherein the terminals, contacts,
    conductor-securing means, or other metallic connectors are secured or
    fastened to the insulating body (a) by applying either heat or pressure to
    at least a portion of the insulating body to thereby deform it about at
    least a portion of each terminal, contact, conductor-securing means, or
    other metallic connector, (b) by casting the metallic parts within or onto
    the insulating body, (c) by welding the metallic parts and insulating body
    to one another, or (d) by applying glue or other adhesive cementlike
    material between the insulating body and the metallic parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    736,    for the combination of an insulating body and a metallic connector
    or contact in which the metallic connector or contact is secured to the
    insulating body by heat-molding or cold-deforming the insulation about the
    connector or contact or by means of a casting, welding, or cementing
    process.


CLS 439/723
TXT Insulating body with spaced, electrically interconnected, duplicate
    terminals or contacts:

    Electrical connector under subclass 625 wherein two or more substantially
    identical, current-carrying terminals, contacts,* conductor-securing means,
    or other metallic connectors are carried by an electrically insulating body
    in a relatively fixed, spaced-apart relationship with one another, so that
    any one terminal, contact, conductor-securing means, or other metallic
    connector is at the same electrical potential as any other.

    (1)     Note.  Usually, the two or more spaced, electrically
    interconnected, substantially identical terminals, contacts,
    conductor-securing means, or other metallic connectors are electrically
    joined by means of a bus bar, neutral bar, shorting bar, or other similar
    current-carrying means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    709+,   for an insulating body having plural, mutually insulated terminals
    or contacts in which it often happens that at least one of the mutually
    insulated terminals, contacts, conductor-securing means, or other metallic
    connectors is also electrically connected to other spaced-apart terminals,
    contacts, etc. which are identical to the said at least one terminal,
    contact etc.

    775+,   for an uninsulated connector having spaced electrically
    interconnected means for securing plural conductors or connectors thereto.


CLS 439/724
TXT Modular or multipart insulating body:

    Electrical connector under subclass 723 either (a) including means for
    enabling the connector to be separably joined to or assembled with one or
    more other connectors which are substantially identical in structure to the
    first connector so that an assembly composed of any desired number of
    substantially identical connectors may be built up, the assembly having all
    terminals, contacts, conductor-securing means, or other metallic connectors
    thereof  electrically joined together; or (b) wherein the body of
    insulation is segmental, divided, or otherwise composed of an assembly of
    two or more sections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    599,    634+, 684, 686+, 695+, and 701, for coupling part having a
    multipart insulating body.

    712+,   for a modular or multipart insulating body providing or having
    plural spaced, mutually insulated terminals, contacts, conductor-securing
    means, or other metallic connectors, and see (1) Note appended thereto.

    731,    for an electrical connector having a multipart insulating body.


CLS 439/725
TXT Having movable insulated part for securing conductor or mating connector
    thereto:

    Electrical connector under subclass 625 wherein a part of the connector
    structure is either electrically insulated from the current-carrying
    portions of the connector or the part itself is formed in whole or in part
    of insulating material, which part is movable to electrically and
    mechanically connect a conductor or complementary connector thereto or is
    movable to electrically and mechanically release or disconnect a conductor
    or complementary connector therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  The movable insulated securing part may be, for example, a
    lever, handle, push button, nut, screw etc.

    (2)     Note.  A movable insulated part which constitutes merely a sleeve
    or housing for enclosing a connection and which is moved into position
    after the connected parts have been brought together has been excluded from
    this and the indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266+,   for a coupling part having a handle or means to move a contact
    laterally to permit uncoupling of joined coupling parts.

    738     and 750, for a connector in which an insulating tube, sleeve or cap
    concentrically surrounds at least a portion of the metallic part of the
    connector, and see (2) Note above.

    754+    and 775+, for an uninsulated connector having a movable or
    resilient securing part.


CLS 439/726
TXT Clamp-type connector for storage battery post:

    Electrical connector under subclass 725 specialized or particularly adapted
    to grasp or be secured to the terminal of a storage battery by compressive
    or wedging action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202,    for a coupling part comprising a tapered post or a mating part
    thereof (e.g., a battery post) and having a contact encompassed by a liquid
    storage chamber.

    388,    for an electrical connector having a cutter-type contact and
    adapted to engage a tapered post (e.g., a storage battery terminal).

    504,    for an electrical connector adapted to connect to a battery and
    which is combined with a flaccid conductor and with an additional connector
    spaced therealong.

    522,    for an electrical connector comprising or mating with a tapered
    post (e.g., a storage battery terminal), which connector includes a contact
    cover or case for restricting environmental effects.

    754+,   for an uninsulated clamp-type connector adapted to be secured to a
    storage battery terminal.


CLS 439/727
TXT Screw-thread-operated securing part:

    Electrical connector under subclass 725 either (a) wherein the movable
    insulated connecting part carries screw threads thereon whereby the
    insulated connecting part is moved by screwing or unscrewing the same, or
    (b) wherein the connector includes another movable member which carries
    screw threads thereon and which is operatively associated with the movable
    insulated connecting part so that the insulated connecting part may be
    moved by screwing or unscrewing the said another movable member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    738     and 750, for a connector in which an insulating tube, sleeve, or
    cap concentrically surrounds at least portion of the metallic part of the
    connector, and see (2) Note appended to subclass 725 above.

    754+    and 775+, for an uninsulated connector having a
    screw-thread-operated securing part.


CLS 439/728
TXT With spring operating on conductive clamp portion of securing part:

    Electrical connector under subclass 727 wherein the portion of the movable
    insulated connecting part which directly contacts and connects a conductor
    or complementary connector to the connector is a movable current-carrying
    clamp member; and wherein the connector further carries a resilient member
    operatively associated with the clamp member to resiliently bias or move
    the clamp member in addition to or independently of the movement of the
    insulated connecting part so as to facilitate the connection of a conductor
    or complementary connector to the connector or to facilitate or effect the
    release or disconnection of a conductor or complementary connector from the
    connector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    729,    for a connector having a movable insulated part for securing a
    conductor or mating connector thereto in which the securing part is
    spring-operated or resilient, and see the search not appended thereto.


CLS 439/729
TXT Spring-operated or resilient securing part:

    Electrical connector under subclass 725 wherein the movable insulated
    connecting part is resiliently urged or moved in one direction by the
    action of a resilient portion of the insulated connecting part or by the
    action of a separate resilient member carried by the connector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    759,    786+ and 816+, for an uninsulated connector having a
    spring-operated or resilient securing part.


CLS 439/730
TXT Terminal connector having insulating tube or sleeve adapted to be crimped
    or heat-shrunk onto wire conductor:

    Electrical connector under subclass 625 adapted to be electrically and
    mechanically secured to an insulated wire-type conductor; the insulating
    material of the connector is in the form of a hollow, sleevelike member
    which surrounds the conductive, conductor-securing portion of the connector
    and is adapted to also surround or receive therein a portion of the
    insulating covering or coating of the conductor; and the sleevelike member
    is of an insulating material which is either (a) capable of being
    plastically deformed by the application thereto of a clamping or crimping
    pressure, so that the sleevelike member is thereby formed tightly about the
    insulating covering or coating of the conductor or (b) capable or having
    its hollow interior plastically reduced in radial size by the application
    thereto of heat, so that the sleevelike member is thereby formed tightly
    about the insulating covering or coating of the conductor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    523,    for an electrical connector with a contact cover or case in the
    form of an elastic or heat-shrunk cable grip for restricting environmental
    effects.

    865+,   for metallic terminal connector, per se, which has a conductor
    sheath engaging means.


CLS 439/731
TXT Insulating body divided parallel to longitudinal axis of engagement (e.g.,
    formed of two casing halves):

    Electrical connector under subclass 625 wherein the body of insulation is
    segmental, divided, or otherwise composed of an assembly of two or more
    sections or segments; the insulating body being separable along at least
    one line generally parallel to the longitudinal axis along which the
    connector is intended to engage and mate with a complementary connector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    465+,   for an electrical connector comprising a longitudinally divided
    connector housing for gripping a conductor to provide stress relief for the
    conductor to terminal joint.

    687,    for a receptacle for a spaced-prong plug, which receptacle includes
    an insulating body or casing divided parallel to the longitudinal axis of
    engagement with mating plug.

    696,    for a spaced-prong plug having an insulating body or casing divided
    parallel to the longitudinal axis of engagement with its mating receptacle.


CLS 439/732
TXT Interfitting or abutting insulating bodies carried by separate mating
    connectors:

    Electrical connectors under subclass 625 comprising two metallic connectors
    which are complementary to one another and adapted to be separably
    connected or coupled together to form an electrical joint, each of the two
    metallic connectors carries or is secured to a separate insulating body
    being so configured as to engage each other in overlapping, interengaging,
    or touching relationship.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    271+,   for an electrical connector combined with a sealing element or
    material for cooperation with a mating connector (e.g., gasket), and see
    the search notes appended thereto.

    278+,   for an electrical connector having a resilient housing for sealing
    with a mating connector to prevent moisture, dust, or the foreign matter
    from reaching the interior region of the coupled connectors.

    283,    for an electrical connector having a housing which sealing fits
    with the housing of a mating connector for the purpose of the housings when
    they are joined, and see the search notes appended thereto.


CLS 439/733.1
TXT Metallic connector or contact secured to insulation:

    Electrical connector under subclass 625 wherein a metallic terminal,
    contact, conductor-securing means, or other metallic connector is carried
    by an insulating body; and the metallic terminal, contact,
    conductor-securing means, or other metallic connector includes means to
    attach or fasten it to the insulating body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    586+,   for a coupling part including flexing insulation in which the
    yieldability of the insulation is utilized in the use or assembly of the
    coupling part.

    869+,   for a metallic connector or contact, per se, having means enabling
    it to be secured to an insulating body which carries it.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 747+ for a means to assemble or
    disassemble a terminal or connector.


CLS 439/734
TXT Annular or center contact secured to lamp-type insulating receptacle or
    base:

    Electrical connector under subclass 733.1 wherein the insulating body has a
    contact attached or fastened thereto and is either (a) in the form of a
    receptacle having a cylindrical blind recess extending partially therein
    for receiving the cylindrical male portion of a mating plug of the type
    which carries a light-emitting device, or (b) in the form of a plug of the
    type which carries a light-emitting device and which carries a cylindrical
    male portion adapted to be received within the cylindrical recess of a
    mating receptacle; and wherein thecontact is either (1) in the form of a
    cylindrically-shaped tube, shell, or ring and is symmetrically located
    within the cylindrical recess of the receptacle or symmetrically located on
    the exterior surface of the cylindrical male portion of the plug, or (2) in
    the form of a disc or button and is centrally located at the bottom of the
    cylindrical recess of the receptacle or centrally located on the end of the
    cylindrical male portion of the plug.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    613+,   641+, 649, 662+, 672, and 675, for a plural-contact plug or
    receptacle having at least one annular contact disposed concentrically
    around the longitudinal axis of engagement with its mating counterpart,
    such plug or receptacle usually also having an axial contact or another
    annular contact coaxial with the longitudinal axis.


CLS 439/735
TXT Screw-threaded contact having mutilated, irregular, interrupted, or
    discontinuous screw thread:

    Electrical connector under subclass 734 wherein the contact attached or
    fastened to the insulating body is in the form of a cylindrically-shaped
    tube or shell, which cylindrically-shaped contact has screw threads
    disposed on a curved surface thereof for cooperating by means of a relative
    screw motion therebetween with screw threads or equivalent
    screw-thread-engaging means on the mating counter-contact of a mating
    connector, and wherein the screw threading disposed on the contact is
    broken, deformed, or of a noncontinuous helical configuration.

    (1)     Note.  The discontinuity of the screw-threading on the
    cylindrically-shaped contact shell or tube may be due to the contact shell
    or tube being composed of an assembly of two or more separate sections
    which do not quite touch or align with one another when they are mounted
    together to form the cylindrical shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    665,    for a plural-contact coupling part in which one of the contacts
    thereof is a cylindrically-shaped tube or shell which carries screw threads
    thereon, and in which the screw-threading on the contact is mutilated,
    irregular, interrupted, or discontinuous.

    802,    for a screw-threaded lamp-shell type contact having a resilient or
    spring biased securing part, the screw-threading of which may be
    interrupted or discontinuous.


CLS 439/736
TXT Secured by heat-molding or cold-deforming insulation or by casting,
    welding, or cemnting:

    Electrical connector under subclass 733.1 wherein the metallic terminal,
    contact, conductor-securing means, or other metallic connector (hereinafter
    referred to as metallic connector part) is attached or fastened to the
    insulating body (a) by applying either heat or pressure to previously
    unformed insulating material or to a portion of a previously formed
    insulating body to thereby plastically form or plastically deform the
    insulation about or onto a portion of the metallic connector part, (b) by
    applying heat to the metallic connector part until it is softened or molten
    and then pressing, shaping, or pouring it onto or into the insulation body,
    (c) by applying heat to one or both the previously formed and previously
    engaged metallic connector part and insulating body so that they are fused
    to one another, or (d) applying glue or other adhesive cementlike material
    between the insulating body and the metallic connector part.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are those devices in which a
    metallic terminal or contact is secured to the insulating body by the
    terminal or contact having serrated, pointed, roughened, or toothlike part
    which bites or penetrates into the insulation.  Such devices, even though
    the insulation might be considered to be plastically deformed at the
    securing region by the penetration thereinto of a serrated or toothlike
    part of a terminal or contact, are found in subclasses 387+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    387+,   for a metallic terminal or contact secured to an insulating body by
    the terminal or contact having a roughened, serrated, pointed, or toothlike
    part which bites into the insulation, and see (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 189 and 196 for
    a molded joint between a line insulator and an insulator terminal element.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    for a process for molding plastic insulating material and see especially
    subclasses 272.11+ for a process for securing a contact or connector to
    insulation by molding.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 265+ for a molded joint in
    general.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus, for
    an apparatus for molding plastic insulating material.


CLS 439/737
TXT Secured to insulation by screw-threaded means:

    Electrical connector under subclass 733.1 wherein the metallic terminal,
    contact, conductor-securing means, or other metallic connector is attached
    or fastened to the insulating body by means having screw threads formed
    thereon, the screw-thread-carrying means being a portion of the insulating
    body, a portion of the terminal, contact conductor-securing means, or other
    metallic connector, or portion of an additional member cooperating with the
    insulating body and the metallic part to hold the same together.


CLS 439/738
TXT Insulating tube, sleeve, or cap concentrically surrounding part of
    connector:

    Electrical connector under subclass 737 wherein the insulating body is in
    the form of either a hollow, generally cylindrical, sleevelike member or a
    generally cylindrical, cuplike cover member, which insulating member
    surrounds or covers at least a portion of the terminal, contact,
    conductor-securing means, or other metallic connector within the interior
    thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    750,    for metallic connector or contact secured to an insulating body in
    which the insulating body is in the form of a tube, sleeve, or cap
    concentrically surrounding a part of the connector or contact.


CLS 439/739
TXT Including resilient or spring-biased part for securing wire-conductor or
    mating connector thereto:

    Electrical connector under subclass 737 wherein the metallic terminal,
    contact conductor-securing means, or other metallic connector includes a
    part which is movable to electrically and mechanically connect a wire-type
    conductor or complementary metallic connector thereto; and wherein the
    movable connecting part is resiliently urged or moved in one direction
    either by the action of a resilient portion of the connecting part or by
    the action of the separate resilient member carried by the connector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    729,    for a connector having an insulated, spring-operated or resilient
    securing part.

    759,    786+ and 816+, for an uninsulated connector having a
    spring-operated or resilient securing part.


CLS 439/740
TXT Secured to insulation by bayonet engagement:

    Electrical connector under subclass 733.1 wherein the metallic terminal,
    contact, or conductor securing means (hereinafter referred to as metallic
    connector part) is retained in attached or fastened relationship to the
    insulating body by a pin or projection extending radially of the axis along
    which the metallic connector part is initially brought into engagement with
    the insulating body, the pin or projection being received behind a
    circumferentially extending abutment located in the insulating body, the
    attaching motion being first along the said axis along which the metallic
    connector part is first brought into engagement with the insulating body
    and then a partial turning about the said axis.


CLS 439/741
TXT Secured by permanently bending, deforming, or crimping metallic part:

    Electrical connector under subclass 733.1 wherein the metallic terminal,
    contact, conductor-securing means, or other metallic connector is attached
    or fastened to the insulating body (a) by permanently bending, crimping, or
    deforming a malleable portion of the terminal, contact, conductor-securing
    means, or other metallic connector onto or into a portion of the insulating
    body or (b) by permanently bending, crimping, or deforming a separate
    metallic rivet or other separate metallic securing means onto or into a
    portion of the insulating body or onto a portion of the terminal, contact
    conductor-securing means, or other metallic connector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    720,    for an insulating body having plural, mutually insulated, metallic
    terminals or contacts in which the terminals or contacts are secured to the
    insulating body by permanently bending or deforming a metallic part onto
    the insulation.

    870,    for a metallic connector or contact, per se, which is adapted to be
    secured to an insulating body by permanently bending, crimping, or
    deforming a part thereof or a separate metallic part.


CLS 439/742
TXT Having separate bendable or deformable securing part (e.g., rivet):

    Electrical connector under subclass 741 wherein the metallic terminal,
    contact conductor-securing means, or other metallic connector is attached
    or fastened to the insulating body by permanently bending, crimping, or
    deforming a separate metallic rivet or other separate metallic securing
    means onto or into a portion of the insulating body or onto a portion of
    the terminal, contact, conductor-securing means, or other metallic
    connector.


CLS 439/743
TXT Resilient or spring-biased socket contact or connector:

    Electrical connector under subclass 741 wherein the connector attached or
    fastened to the insulating body is in the form of a female member for
    slidingly receiving in electrical engagement therewith a mating metallic
    male contact or connector in the form of a pronglike or pluglike member;
    and wherein the female contact or connector either is made at least in part
    of resilient material or has a movable clamping portion which is
    resiliently urged or moved in one direction by the action of a separate
    resilient member cooperatively associated with the female contact or
    connector, so that, whenever the female contact or connector and its mating
    male contact or connector are in coupled relationship, the resiliency of
    the female contact or connector or the resiliency of the separate resilient
    member cooperating with the movable clamping portion maintains or helps to
    maintain the coupled relationship or enhances the transfer of electrical
    current from one contact or connector to its mating contact or connector.


CLS 439/744
TXT Secured by resiliently biased part latching behind shoulder or into recess:

    Electrical connector under subclass 733.1 wherein the means to attach or
    fasten the metallic connector or contact to the insulating body comprises a
    yieldable or yieldably operated retaining tongue, projection, or shoulder
    carried by the metallic connector or contact (or by the insulating body)
    for being yieldably urged to latch and remain behind a cooperating
    retaining shoulder or abutment carried by the insulating body (or by the
    metallic connector or contact) whenever the metallic connector or contact
    and the insulating body are interengaged for attachment therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    595,    for a coupling part including flexing insulation in which a hinged
    or flexed detent on the insulation engages to secure a contact within a
    coupling part housing.

    603,    for a coupling part including flexing insulation in which the
    yieldable insulation is urged to retain a contact within a coupling part
    housing.

    751,    for a metallic connector or contact secured to insulation by a part
    of the connector or contact resiliently urged to grip the insulation.

    871+,   for a metallic connector or contact, per se, which is adapted to be
    secured to an insulating body by a resiliently biased retaining part
    latching behind a retaining shoulder.

    873,    for a metallic connector or contact, per se, adapted to be secured
    to insulation by a part of the connector or contact resiliently urged to
    grip the insulation.


CLS 439/745
TXT Separate latching part secured to contact prior to engagement with
    insulation:

    Electrical connector under subclass 744 wherein the latchable tongue,
    projection, or shoulder is part of a separate member which is attached or
    fastened to the metallic connector or contact before the metallic connector
    or contact is interengaged with the insulating body.


CLS 439/746
TXT Latching part unitary with metallic connector or contact:

    Electrical connector under subclass 744 wherein the latchable tongue,
    projection, or shoulder and the metallic connector or contact are of single
    one-piece construction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    872,    for a metallic connector or contact, per se, adapted to be secured
    to an insulating body by a resiliently biased retaining part unitary with
    the connector or contact latching behind a retaining shoulder in the
    insulating body.


CLS 439/747
TXT Coupling part type contact inserted into insulation from coupling end:

    Electrical connector under subclass 746 wherein the metallic contact or
    terminal attached or fastened to the insulating body is in the form of
    either a male or female member adapted to be electrically engaged,
    respectively, with a mating female or male contact or terminal by sliding
    one within the other along the longitudinal axes thereof; and wherein the
    resilient latching attachment or fastening of the contact or terminal is
    accomplished by linearly pushing it into the insulating body from the same
    direction as the contact or terminal itself is intended to be engaged by
    its mating contact or terminal.


CLS 439/748
TXT Resilient socket contact for surrounding or engaging opposed surfaces of
    mating plug contact:

    Electrical connector under subclass 746 wherein the contact or terminal
    attached or fastened to the insulating body is in the form of a female
    member for slidingly receiving in electrical engagement therewith a mating
    metallic male contact or terminal in the from of a pronglike or pluglike
    member; the female contact or terminal either being made of resilient
    metallic material or having a movable metallic part which is urged or moved
    toward an opposed metallic clamping part by the action of a separate
    resilient member so that the resiliency of the female contact or terminal
    imposes a gripping force upon the mating male contact or terminal; the
    female contact or terminal being either in the form of a resilient or
    resiliently biased tube for receiving and gripping the mating male contact
    or terminal or in the form of a bifurcated member having opposed
    furcations, at least one of which is resilient or resiliently biased toward
    the other furcation for receiving and gripping the mating male contact or
    terminal therebetween.

    (1)     Note.  A resilient socket contact of the type which engages and
    resiliently biases against only one side of a mating male contact is
    excluded from these subclasses.  Excluded, for example, would be a
    resilient socket contact located within a male-contact receiving opening of
    an insulating housing, which contact resiliently gripping an inserted male
    contact by resiliently pushing against one side of the male contact thereby
    forcing the opposite side thereof against an interior wall of the opening.


CLS 439/749
TXT Adapted to have secured wire conductor extending transverse to longitudinal
    coupling axis:

    Electrical connector under subclass 748 wherein the resilient socket
    contact or terminal includes means for mechanically attaching in electrical
    engagement therewith an elongated wire-type conductor; and wherein the
    design of the conductor-attaching means is such that the longitudinal axis
    of the attached portion of the wire-type conductor is disposed at generally
    a right angle to the longitudinal axis along which the socket contact or
    terminal is intended to receive its mating male contact or terminal.


CLS 439/750
TXT Insulating tube, sleeve, or cap concentrically surrounding part of
    connector:

    Electrical connector under subclass 733.1 wherein the insulating body is in
    the form of either a hollow, generally cylindrical, sleevelike member or a
    generally cylindrical, cup cover member, which insulating member surrounds
    or covers at least a portion of the terminal, contact, conductor-securing
    means, or other metallic connector within the interior thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    738,    for a metallic connector or contact secured to an insulating body
    by screw-threaded means and in which the insulating body is in the form of
    a tube, sleeve, or cap concentrically surrounding a part of the connector
    or contact.


CLS 439/751
TXT Secured by part resiliently gripping insulation:

    Electrical connector under subclass 733.1 wherein the metallic connector is
    attached or fastened to the insulating body by the metallic connector
    having on the insulation-engaging portion thereof a retaining means which
    is yieldably urged to grip or clamp onto a portion of the insulating body
    so as to hold the connector to the insulating body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    603,    for a coupling part including flexing insulation in which the
    yieldable insulation is urged to retain the contact within a distinct
    coupling part housing.

    744+,   for a metallic connector or contact secured to an insulating body
    by a resiliently biased part latching behind a retaining shoulder, and see
    the Search Notes appended thereto.

    873,    for a metallic connector or contact, per se, which is adapted to be
    secured to an insulating body by a part resiliently gripping the insulation.


CLS 439/752
TXT Secured by superposition of insulating body parts:

    Electrical connector under subclass 733.1 wherein the metallic contact,
    terminal, or other conductor-securing means (hereinafter referred to as
    metallic connector part) is attached or fastened to the insulating body
    during the assembly of the insulating body which is initially composed of
    separate and distinct segments or sections; the segments or sections of the
    insulating body, when assembled into a whole body, have at least one
    retaining shoulder or other retaining formation formed on the metallic
    connector part to retain the metallic connector part to the insulating body
    when it has been fully assembled into a whole body.

    (1)     Note.  Also included herein is a connector in which the various
    parts of the insulating body have generally parallel matching faces and the
    metallic connector part is retained in the insulating body by pressure
    applied by the parallel matching faces of the assembled insulating body
    parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    731,    for an electrical connector having an insulating body divided
    parallel to the longitudinal axis of engagement with a mating connector,
    and see the Search Notes appended thereto for the locations of other
    connectors having a longitudinally divided insulating housing.


CLS 439/752.5
TXT With guiding means for inserted contact:

    Electrical connector under subclass 733.1 wherein the insulated body
    includes a provision to cooperate with a contact to slidingly direct the
    contact and the insulating body to assume a desired alignment as the
    contact is mated with the insulating body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for an electrical connector that is part of a preformed panel
    arrangement with a guide for directing panel circuit movement.

    297+,   for an electrical connector with a guiding means for receiving a
    longitudinally moved communications device (e.g., an automobile radio) with
    coupling movement-actuating means or retaining means in addition to a
    contact.

    374+,   for an electrical connector with a guiding means that effects
    mating, generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity: Circuit Makers and Breakers, for an electrical contact
    intended to make and break with mating contact under controlled or guided
    movement, wherein both contacts are considered to be an integral member.


CLS 439/753
TXT CYLINDRICAL METALLIC CAP AND SHELL TYPE LAMP RECEPTACLE CASING:

    Device under the class definition in the form of a housing composed of a
    hollow metallic cylinder and a removable metallic cover for closing off one
    end of the cylinder, the metallic housing being adapted to contain a
    plural-contact receptacle which is accessed through the remaining open end
    of the cylinder by a mating cylindrical plug of the type having one of its
    contacts in the form of a cylinder or annulus surrounding the cylindrical
    plug.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    702+,   for an insulating lining or contact support within a cylindrical
    metallic cap and shell-type lamp receptacle casing.

    707,    for a cylindrical cap and shell-type lamp receptacle casing made of
    insulating material.


CLS 439/754
TXT METALLIC CLAMP-TYPE CONNECTOR FOR STORAGE BATTERY TERMINAL:

    Electrical connector under the class definition consisting solely of
    metallic material and specialized or particularly adapted to grasp or be
    secured to the terminal of a storage battery by compressive or wedging
    action.

    (1)     Note.  To be classified in this and the indented subclasses, the
    connector must be disclosed as being used with a storage battery; the
    claims need not necessarily recite such use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202,    for a coupling part comprising a tapered post or a mating part
    therefor (e.g., a battery post) and having a contact encompassed by a
    liquid storage chamber.

    388,    for an electrical connector having a cutter-type contact, which
    connector is adapted to engage a tapered post (e.g., a storage battery
    terminal).

    522,    for an electrical connector comprising or mating with a tapered
    post (e.g., a storage battery terminal), which connector includes a contact
    cover or case for restricting environmental effects.

    524,    for an electrical connector comprising corrosion resistant
    conducting material other than lead.

    726,    for a clamp-type connector for a storage battery post, the
    connector having a movable insulated part for securing it to the battery
    post or a conductor thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process,  for a battery having connector structure.


CLS 439/755
TXT For threaded-receptacle type terminal flush with battery wall (e.g., for
    side terminal type battery):

    Electrical connector under subclass 754 specialized or particularly adapted
    to be secured to a storage battery terminal which extends from within the
    interior of the battery case to approximately the exterior surface of a
    wall of the battery case, the battery terminal further including an
    internally screw-threaded recess or bore opening to the exterior surface of
    the battery wall, so that the connector may be secured to the terminal by a
    compressive pressure caused by the motion resulting from rotation of a
    screw, bolt, or other male screw-threaded member.

    (1)     Note.  To be classified in this subclass, the connector must be
    disclosed as being used with a storage battery having a threaded-receiver
    type of terminal which is substantially flush with the outer surface of one
    of the battery casing walls; the claims need not necessarily recite such
    battery terminal structure, but may be drawn only to connector structure.


CLS 439/756
TXT Common securing means for post and conductor:

    Electrical connector under subclass 754 having a clamp for attachment to a
    battery terminal post and in addition having a connector portion for
    securing a conductor with a single actuating device for effecting both
    connections.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    775+,   for an uninsulated connector which is not of the type for clamping
    to a storage battery post, but which has a common actuating means for
    securing plural conductors.


CLS 439/757
TXT With clamp-to-post joint separator:

    Electrical connector under subclass 754 having some positive means to break
    the joint between the battery terminal post and clamp connector by causing
    movement of the connector or a part thereof with respect to the terminal
    post.

    (1)     Note.  In these connectors the coupling is not removed completely
    from the battery post, nor need it be even electrically separated
    therefrom.  The joint separating means in these connectors is intended
    primarily to break a "frozen" joint to permit further separation of the
    parts by other means.  A connector which has means for separating one
    coupling part of a coupling from another coupling part may be found in
    subclasses 152+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152+,   and see (1) Note above.

    180,    for a connector having means to separate contacts by a snap or
    quick-break action.

    258,    for a coupling part with a latching means and tether or explosive
    to unlatch from a mating part.

    266+,   for a coupling part having a handle or means to move a contact
    laterally to permit uncoupling.


CLS 439/758
TXT Clamp secured to and separated from post by same screw-threaded member:

    Electrical connector under subclass 757 wherein the means to break the
    joint between the battery terminal post and the clamp connector comprises a
    screw-threaded member, which screw-threaded member is also the means by
    which the clamp connector is placed into gripping engagement with the
    battery terminal post; the motion resulting from rotating the
    screw-threaded member in one direction causes the clamping pressure to be
    applied to the terminal post, while the motion resulting from rotating the
    screw-threaded member in the opposite direction causes the joint between
    the terminal post and the clamp connector to be broken.


CLS 439/759
TXT Spring-actuated or resilient clamp:

    Electrical connector under subclass 754 wherein the clamping force is
    caused by the action of an elastic body tending to return to its normal
    shape after being distorted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    816+,   for an uninsulated connector which is not of the type for clamping
    to a storage battery post, but which has a spring-actuated or resilient
    securing part, and see the Search Notes appended thereto.


CLS 439/760
TXT With reinforcing insert:

    Electrical connector under subclass 754 wherein the body of the connector
    has a body of relatively strong material embedded therein for the purpose
    of strengthening the clamp structure.


CLS 439/761
TXT Deformable C- or U-clamp:

    Electrical connector under subclass 754 having a flexing one-piece loop in
    the general shape of a C or U and having means for forcing the ends thereof
    toward one another so as to flex the loop into gripping engagement with a
    storage battery post enclosed thereby.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    799+,   for a connector structure comprising a circumferentially tensioned
    flexible strap or band, and see the notes appended thereto for other
    similar connector structures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 568+ for a clasp, clip,
    or support clamp having a gripping member shifted by an operator.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 274+ for a joint wherein a
    member is deformed beyond its elastic limit to effect the joint, and
    subclasses 289+ for a joint wherein a member is provided with a split end
    having laterally movable opposed portions to effect the joint.


CLS 439/762
TXT Screw-thread operated:

    Electrical connector under subclass 761 wherein the means for forcing the
    ends of the loop toward one another comprises a screw-threaded member.


CLS 439/763
TXT With plural conductor terminals:

    Electrical connector under subclass 762 having at least two separate and
    distinct means thereon for electrically and mechanically securing a
    conductor thereto, so that either (a) two or more conductors may be
    attached simultaneously to the connector, or (b) a single conductor may be
    attached to the connector at one of the two or more available locations
    thereon.


CLS 439/764
TXT With means for removably securing conductor thereto:

    Electrical connector under subclass 762 having means thereon for
    electrically and mechanically securing a conductor thereto, which securing
    means also enables ready disconnection of a secured conductor from the
    connector.


CLS 439/765
TXT Screw-thread operated:

    Electrical connector under subclass 754 wherein the clamping pressure is
    caused by the motion resulting from the relative rotation of mated
    screw-threaded members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    762+,   for a screw-thread operated deformable C- or U-clamp.

    801+,   for an uninsulated connector which is not of the type for clamping
    to a storage battery post, but which has a screw-thread operated securing
    part, and see especially the notes appended thereto for the location of
    other screw-threaded fastening or securing means.


CLS 439/766
TXT Screw or nut coaxial with post:

    Electrical connector under subclass 765 wherein the longitudinal axis of
    the battery post and the axis about which the screw-threaded member is
    rotated are in line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    805,    and see the notes attached thereto for other connectors in which a
    screw-threaded securing member is coaxial with an attached conductor.


CLS 439/767
TXT Post between and transverse of plural screws:

    Electrical connector under subclass 765 having at least two spaced-apart,
    male screw-threaded members, the longitudinal axes of which are disposed
    parallel; and the battery post is disposed between the screw-threaded
    members with its longitudinal axis perpendicular to the plane formed by the
    said parallel axes of the male screw-threaded members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    804,    and see the notes attached thereto for other connectors in which a
    conductor is located between and transverse of plural screws.


CLS 439/768
TXT Eye bolt type:

    Electrical connector under subclass 765 wherein a battery post is encircled
    by a ringlike member having screw-threaded shank extending radially of the
    ringlike member and through an abutment member, motion of the shank and
    ringlike member relative to the abutment member causes the battery post to
    be drawn against the abutment member and wedged between the ringlike member
    and abutment member.


CLS 439/769
TXT Clamping lever:

    Electrical connector under subclass 765 wherein the screw-threaded member
    causes an arm to pivot or swing about an axis and clamp the battery post
    between the said arm and an abutting surface of the clamp connector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    806,    for another connector having a clamping lever for securing a
    conductor thereto which is operated by a screw-threaded member.


CLS 439/770
TXT Clamping cam or wedge:

    Electrical connector under subclass 765 wherein the screw-threaded member
    causes (a) turning motion of a clamping member of gradually increasing
    radius, (b) turning motion of an eccentrically mounted clamping member, (c)
    straight-line motion of a clamping member having diverging opposed
    surfaces, or (d) motion of a clamping member relative to a curved or
    inclined surface; which movable clamping member in turn exerts a clamping
    pressure on the battery post between the said movable clamping member and
    an abutting surface of the clamp connector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    807,    for a connector in which a cam or wedge means is actuated by a
    screw-threaded operating member.


CLS 439/771
TXT Screw axis intersects post axis (e.g., set screw):

    Electrical connector under subclass 765 wherein the longitudinal axis of
    the male member of the screw-threaded clamping means carried by the
    connector intersects the longitudinal axis of the battery post, whereby the
    male screw-threaded member either directly or through a follower exerts the
    clamping pressure on the post.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    810+,   and see the notes attached thereto for other connectors in which a
    screw-threaded member intersects the longitudinal axis of a conductor to be
    secured and applies a clamping pressure thereto.


CLS 439/772
TXT Clamping lever, cam, or wedge:

    Electrical connector under subclass 754 wherein the clamping pressure
    exerted on the battery post is caused by the action of (a) a clamping arm
    swinging about an axis, (b) the turning motion of a clamping member of
    gradually increasing radius, (c) the turning motion of an eccentrically
    mounted clamping member, (d) the straight-line motion of a clamping member
    having diverging opposed surfaces, or (e) the motion of a clamping member
    relative to a curved or inclined surface; which movable clamping arm or
    member exerts a clamping pressure on the battery post between the said
    movable clamping member and an abutting surface of the clamp connector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    863+,   for another connector in which the motion of a clamping cam or
    wedge exerts a clamping pressure on a conductor to be secured thereto.


CLS 439/773
TXT Rotary or swinging cam:

    Electrical connector under subclass 772 wherein the clamping pressure is
    caused by the action of (a) the turning motion of a clamping member of
    gradually increasing radius, (b) the turning motion of an eccentrically
    mounted clamping member, or (c) the motion of a clamping member relative to
    a curved surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    864,    for another electrical connector in which a rotary or swinging
    clamping member exerts a clamping pressure on a conductor to be secured
    thereto.


CLS 439/774
TXT Sliding wedge:

    Electrical connector under subclass 772 wherein the clamping pressure is
    caused by the action of (a) the straight-line motion of a clamping member
    having diverging opposed surfaces or (b) the motion of a clamping member
    relative to an inclined surface.


CLS 439/775
TXT METALLIC CONNECTOR OR CONTACT HAVING MOVABLE OR RESILIENT SECURING PART:

    Electrical connector or contact under the class definition consisting
    solely of metallic material and specialized or particularly adapted to
    electrically and mechanically secure, by means of the binding action of a
    forcibly urged displaceable member, either conducting bodies together or a
    conducting body thereto.

    (1)     Note.  The displaceable member may be urged, for example, by a
    force multiplier such as a screw or nut or may be urged by the inherent
    elasticity of a spring means in returning from a distorted to an
    undistorted condition.

    (2)     Note.  The connectors in this and the indented subclasses do not
    recite in the claims any part which by disclosure is of insulating
    material.  Also, the conductors and connectors claimed herein form but a
    single electrical path rather than plural paths electrically insulated from
    one another.  For connectors which recite in the claims structure which by
    disclosure is insulation other than a conductor sheath see subclasses 625+
    above, especially subclasses 626+ and 709+ for connectors having multiple
    insulated electrical paths, contacts or connectors, and subclasses 723+ and
    those following for connectors combined with insulation which have a single
    electrical path.

    (3)     Note.  See section IV of the class definition of this class (439)
    for the location of other patents relating to joints, per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    387+,   for an electrical connector having a cutter-type contact.

    476.1+  for an electrical connector including a handle or distinct
    manipulating means.

    625+,   for an electrical connector including insulation other than a
    conductor sheath, and see (2) Note above.

    626+    and 709+, for an electrical connector including insulation and
    which has plural, mutually insulated electrical paths, and see (2) Note
    above.

    723+,   and those following which are indented under subclass 625 for an
    electrical connector including insulation and which has only one electrical
    path, and see (2) Note above.

    725+,   for an electrical connector having a movable insulated part for
    securing a conductor or mating connector thereto.

    754+,   for a metallic clamp-type connector particularly adapted to be
    secured to a storage battery terminal.


CLS 439/776
TXT Stirrup type for simultaneously securing two spaced-apart locations along
    the length of a conductor thereto:

    Electrical connector under subclass 775 for attaching a first conductor to
    a second conductor at a point spaced from the ends of the second conductor,
    the connector being generally U-shaped and having securing means at the
    base of the U; the first conductor being intended to be secured at the base
    of the U and the second conductor being intended to be secured by the means
    at the ends of the arms, whereby the connector secures the second conductor
    at spaced points along the length thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    477.+,  for a similar type of electrical connector which includes a handle
    or distinct manipulating means for attachment of the connector to an
    overhead conductor.


CLS 439/777
TXT Adjustable angular joint between separate connectors or conductor securing
    means:

    Device under subclass 775 comprising two separate, interconnected
    connectors or conductor securing means for electrically joining separate
    conductors or mating connectors, which device further includes means
    enabling one connector or securing means to move relative to the other so
    that the angular relationship between the two connectors or securing means
    may be fixed as desired.

    (1)     Note.  Connectors included herein are not adapted to be
    continuously varied during use, but are only arranged so that they may be
    intermittently adjusted.  Connectors specifically designed to be relatively
    movable during use may be found in subclasses 1+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     and see (1) Note above.


CLS 439/778
TXT Externally threaded, bifurcated bolt for joining conductors having like
    cross-sectional shape:

    Electrical connector under subclass 775 comprising a boltlike member having
    a shank provided with an externally screw-threaded surface and having a
    slot extending longitudinally through the shank portion thereof; the slot
    being open at one end of the shank and terminating near its opposite end in
    a conductor clamping seat so that the slot provides the bolt wi.h an
    opposed pair of spaced-apart legs between which wire-type conductors are
    adapted to be transversely received and clamped for electrical
    interconnection therebetween; and rotatably mounted upon the outer
    screw-threaded surfaces of the spaced-apart legs is an interiorly
    screw-thread nut which, when rotated to longitudinally move it toward the
    closed end of the slot, provides the clamping pressure upon wire conductors
    located transversely within the slot.


CLS 439/779
TXT With nut retainer:

    Electrical connector under subclass 778 wherein the boltlike member and the
    clamping nut include means cooperating with one another to prevent removal
    of the clamping nut from the boltlike member whenever the connector is in
    its unclamping condition so that the component parts of the connector will
    remain attached to one another when not in use.


CLS 439/780
TXT With slidable conductive element between conductors:

    Electrical connector under subclass 778 further including a substantially
    planar, conductive pressure bar located transverse to the longitudinal axis
    of the slot and slidable along the longitudinal length of the slot due to
    the rotational motion of the clamping nut, the pressure bar being intended
    to be located between a pair of wire-type conductors which are to be
    interconnected.

    (1)     Note.  The planar pressure bar located between interconnected
    conductors may have a hole (or some similar structure) extending from one
    face to the other face so as to allow conductors located at each opposing
    face to come into some degree of direct contact with one another in the
    region of the hole.


CLS 439/781
TXT Bolt or screw between and transverse of parallel conductors:

    Electrical connector under subclass 775 having means for receiving and
    clamping at least two conductors, the secured portions of which are
    arranged in spaced-apart, parallel disposition; the clamping pressure of
    the connector being provided by a male screw-threaded member disposed
    between the conductors with its longitudinal axis perpendicular to the
    plane formed by the parallel conductors.


CLS 439/782
TXT With means to maintain assembly of clamp part and bolt or screw:

    Electrical connector under subclass 781 wherein the means securing the
    conductors in parallel disposition and the male screw-threaded member each
    include means cooperating with one another to prevent removal of one from
    the other whenever the connector is in its unclamping condition so that the
    component parts of the connector will remain attached to one another when
    not in use.


CLS 439/783
TXT Cam or wedge between conductors:

    Electrical connector under subclass 775 wherein at least two conductors are
    to be secured by being received within the body of the connector and then
    forced against the walls of the connector by a movable member disposed
    between the conductors, which movable member comprises a tapering or
    curving body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    770,    metallic clamp-type connector for a storage battery terminal which
    comprises a screw-thread operated cam or wedge.

    772+,   for a metallic clamp-type connector for a storage battery terminal
    which comprises a clamping cam or wedge.

    807,    for a metallic connector having movable securing part comprising a
    screw-thread operated cam or wedge.

    863+,   for a metallic connector having a movable securing part comprising
    a clamping cam or wedge.


CLS 439/784
TXT Screw-threaded securing means coaxial with elongated conductors joined in
    axially aligned relationship:

    Electrical connector under subclass 775 having means for receiving and
    clamping in electrical engagement two elongated conductors, the secured
    portions of which have collinear longitudinal axes; the clamping pressure
    of the connector being provided by at least one screw-threaded member, the
    axis about which the screw-threaded member is rotated being also collinear
    with the line passing through the longitudinal axes of the secured
    conductors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    766,    for a metallic clamp-type connector for a storage battery post
    comprising a screw or nut coaxial with the post.

    805,    for a metallic connector having a movable securing part, which
    connector includes a nut, bolt, or screw coaxial with a secured elongated
    conductor, and see the Search Notes appended thereto.


CLS 439/785
TXT Parallel elongated conductors between and transverse of plural screws
    (e.g., U-bolt):

    Electrical connector under subclass 775 having means for receiving and
    clamping in electrical engagement at least two elongated conductors, the
    secured portions, of which are arranged in parallel disposition; the
    clamping pressure of the connector being provided by at least two
    spaced-apart, male screw-threaded members, the longitudinal axes of which
    are disposed parallel; and the parallel conductors are secured between the
    screw-threaded members such that the plane formed by the parallel
    conductors is disposed perpendicular to the plane formed by the said
    parallel axes of the male screw-threaded members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    767,    for a metallic clamp-type connector for a storage battery post in
    which the battery post is disposed between and transverse of plural
    clamping screws.

    804,    for a metallic electrical connector which secures a single
    elongated conductor between and transverse of plural screws.


CLS 439/786
TXT Resilient or spring-operated securing means joining plural conductors:

    Electrical connector under subclass 775 particularly adapted to
    electrically join at lest two conductors or comprising a conductive
    connector body having at least two electrically interconnected means for
    securing at least two conductors or contacts; and wherein the clamping or
    securing force joining the two or more conductors is produced by the action
    of an elastic body tending to return to its normal shape after being
    distorted.

    (1)     Note.  To be classified here, a connector must be particularly
    adapted to accommodate at least two conductors; such adaptation being, for
    example, space securing means each receiving a single conductor, two or
    more seats for receiving separate conductors, or some other configuration
    unique to at least two conductors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    729,    for an electrical connector having an insulated spring-operated or
    resilient part for securing a conductor or mating connector thereto.

    759,    for a metallic spring-actuated or resilient clamp connector for a
    storage battery post.

    816+,   for a metallic electrical connector or contact having a spring
    actuated or resilient securing part.


CLS 439/787
TXT Conductors secured in duplicate receiving means:

    Electrical connector under subclass 786 wherein the conductors to be
    electrically interconnected are individually secured to or by identical
    spaced-apart means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    796+,   for an electrical connector having duplicate, independently
    operated securing means, other than resilient or spring-operated, for
    joining plural conductors, and see the Search Notes appended thereto.


CLS 439/788
TXT With helical spring:

    Electrical connector under subclass 787 wherein the elastic body is in the
    form of a coil made from a wirelike material which has been formed into a
    series of helically wound loops.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    840+,   for a metallic electrical connector having a resilient part for
    securing a single conductor, which securing part is in the form of a
    helically coiled spring.


CLS 439/789
TXT Hinged jaw type having alignable conductor receiving bores:

    Electrical connector under subclass 775 composed of male and female jaw
    members joined together for relative angular movement between an open,
    conductor-receiving position and a closed, conductor-clamping position; the
    jaw members having respective tails which project in a common direction and
    which are intended to be forced toward one another to effect the relative
    angular movement of the jaw members to thus produce the clamping action of
    the connector upon a conductor to be secured thereto; the male jaw member
    including a trunnionlike head formed with a cable-receiving aperture; the
    female jaw member including a yoke defining a socket shaped complemental to
    the trunnionlike head and also formed with a cable-receiving aperture; and
    also formed with a cable-receiving aperture; the female jaw member
    including a yoke defining a socket shaped complemental to the trunnionlike
    head and also formed with a cable-receiving aperture; whereby the head and
    yoke are interfitted for the relative angular movement of the jaw members
    between the open, conductor-receiving position where the respective
    apertures are aligned to enable the end of the conductor to pass
    therethrough and the closed, conductor-clamping position where the
    apertures are misaligned to crimp the inserted conductor.


CLS 439/790
TXT Single operator for securing and joining plural conductors:

    Electrical connector under subclass 775 for electrically interconnecting at
    least two conductors and in which the movable securing parts of the
    connector have but a single actuating means.

    (1)     Note.  To be classified here, a connector for securing plural
    conductors must do more than merely receive plural conductors in a single
    securing means, but must be particularly adapted to accommodate at least
    two conductors; such adaptation being, for example, spaced securing means
    each receiving a single conductor, plural configured seats for receiving
    separate conductors, or some other configuration unique to at least two
    conductors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    756,    for a metallic clamp-type connector designed specifically for a
    storage battery terminal post, which connector has a common securing means
    for both the post and conductor.

    778+,   781+, 783, 784, 785, and 786+, for special types of metallic
    connectors having or which may have common actuating means for securing
    plural conductors.


CLS 439/791
TXT Single screw-threaded operator:

    Electrical connector under subclass 790 wherein the single actuating means
    consists of a single screw-threaded member, the clamping pressure of the
    connector being caused by the motion resulting from the rotation of the
    lone screw-threaded member.


CLS 439/792
TXT Conductors secured in direct contact with one another:

    Electrical connector under subclass 791 specifically adapted to join the
    plural conductors electrically by physically associating them into touching
    engagement with one another.

    (1)     Note.  To be classified here, there must be some structural
    modification of the connector to specialize it to an electrical connection
    in which the connected conductors directly contact each other.


CLS 439/793
TXT Screw axis intersects axes of conductors joined parallel to one another:

    Electrical connector under subclass 792 wherein at least the portions of
    the conductors which are secured in direct contact with one another are
    elongated and have their longitudinal axes disposed parallel to one
    another; and wherein the screw-threaded actuator carried by the connector
    is elongated and has its longitudinal axis disposed substantially
    perpendicular to the longitudinal axes of the secured portions of the
    conductors, whereby the screw-threaded actuator either directly or through
    a follower exerts the clamping pressure on the conductors.


CLS 439/794
TXT Conductors secured in duplicate receiving means:

    Electrical connector under subclass 791 wherein the conductors to be
    electrical interconnected are individually secured to or by identical,
    spaced-apart, clamping means operated by the single screw-threaded actuator.


CLS 439/795
TXT Screw-threaded operator circumferentially tensions flexible strap or band:

    Electrical connector under subclass 791 comprising a bendable strip,
    filament, or strand which is secured to the conductors by contracting it
    about the conductors; the contraction being effected by applying an endwise
    or lengthwise pull upon the strip filament, or strand; and the endwise or
    lengthwise pulling force being produced by operation of the single
    screw-threaded actuator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    for an electrical connector adapted to be secured to a pipe, rod,
    or conduit for the purpose of providing a safety ground.

    799+,   for a metallic electrical connector comprising a circumferentially
    tensioned flexible strap or band, but which connector does not include a
    single operator for securing and joining plural conductors.


CLS 439/796
TXT Duplicate receiving means having independently operated securing means for
    joining plural conductors:

    Electrical connector under subclass 775 for electrically interconnecting at
    least two conductors and wherein the conductors are individually secured to
    or by identical spaced-apart clamping means.

    (1)     Note.  Generally, the independently operated securing means of the
    connectors included herein are identical in all respects, including size.
    However, there may be some slight variation as to the size between the
    various securing means, but they still must be of the same type.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    723+,   for an electrical connector comprising an insulating body having
    spaced, electrically interconnected, duplicate terminals or connectors.

    787+,   for a metallic electrical connector having resilient or
    spring-operated securing means for joining plural conductors, the
    conductors being secured in duplicate receiving means.

    794,    for a metallic electrical connector having a single screw-threaded
    operator for securing and joining plural conductors, the conductors being
    secured in duplicate receiving means.


CLS 439/797
TXT Screw-thread-operated securing means for each receiving means:

    Electrical connector under subclass 796 wherein each of the spaced-apart
    clamping means includes a screw-threaded member, whereby the clamping
    pressure of each clamping means is caused by the motion resulting from the
    rotation of its respective screw-threaded member.


CLS 439/798
TXT For joining three or more conductors:

    Electrical connector under subclass 797 having at least three spaced-apart,
    screw-threaded-operated clamping means for individually securing and
    thereby electrically interconnecting at least three conductors.


CLS 439/799
TXT Circumferentially tensioned flexible strap or band:

    Electrical connector under subclass 775 comprising a bendable strip,
    filament, or strand which is secured to a conductor; the contraction being
    effected by applying an endwise or lengthwise pull upon the strip,
    filament, or strand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    for an electrical connector adapted to be secured to a pipe, rod,
    or conduit for the purpose of providing a safety ground.

    795,    for a metallic electrical connector in which a single
    screw-threaded operator circumferentially tensions a flexible strap or band
    for securing and joining plural conductors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 16+  for binder chains,
    bands, cords, or wires in combination with an attached binder tightener;
    subclasses 481+ for a clasp or support clamp having a flaccid gripping
    member, and subclass 483 for an encircling gripping member including a
    semirigid band and an operator for tightening.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 1+ for methods and apparatus there provided,
    for use in disposing a flexible binder tightly and circumferentially closed
    around the feeding material, and see the notes appended thereto for the
    location of other devices in which a flexible binder is disposed tightly
    around material.


CLS 439/800
TXT Tensioning screw intersects longitudinal axis of encircled conductor:

    Electrical connector under subclass 799 wherein the means contracting the
    strip, filament, or strand about the conductor comprises cooperating male
    and female screw-threaded members; the longitudinal axis of the male
    screw-threaded member being disposed perpendicular to the longitudinal axis
    of the secured portion of the conductor; whereby contraction of the strip,
    filament, or strand about the conductor is caused by the motion resulting
    from the rotation of one of the cooperating screw-threaded members relative
    to the other.


CLS 439/801
TXT Screw-thread operated securing part:

    Electrical connector under subclass 775 wherein the clamping pressure is
    caused by the motion resulting from the relative rotation between a mating
    pair of male and female screw-threaded members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    411+,   for an electrical connector having a cutter-type contact for
    penetrating through a conductor sheath and which comprises a screw, a screw
    operated cutter, or a screw means to move a conductor against the cutter.

    428+,   for an electrical connector having a cutter-type contact which
    axially penetrates an elongated conductor and which comprises a screw or
    screw operated means.

    431+,   for an electrical connector having a cutter-type contact which
    comprises a screw, a screw operated cutter, or a screw means to move a
    conductor against the cutter.

    479,    for an electrical connector attachable to an overhead conductor,
    which connector includes a handle operated screw to effect gripping of the
    overhead conductor.

    727+,   for an electrical connector having screw-thread operated, insulated
    part for securing a conductor or mating connector thereto.

    758,    for a metallic clamp-type connector for a storage battery terminal
    in which the clamp is secured to and separated from the battery post by a
    single screw-threaded member.

    762+,   for a metallic clamp-type connector for a storage battery terminal
    which comprises a screw-thread operated, deformable C- U-clamp.

    765+,   for a metallic clamp-type connector having screw-thread operated
    securing means and which is particularly adapted to be clamped to a storage
    battery terminal.


CLS 439/802
TXT Screw-threaded lamp-shell type contact having resilient or spring biased
    securing part:

    Electrical connector under subclass 801 comprising a contact in the form of
    a screw-threaded metal sleeve for receiving and retaining, by means of the
    screw threads, a mating contact having complementary screw-threads thereon;
    the contact, in use, is intended to be contained in a plural-contact
    coupling part of the type known as a screw plug or receptacle which is
    coupled to its respective mating receptacle or plug by screw-threaded
    engagement; the contact further is either made of resilient material or is
    provided with a resilient or resiliently biased gripping means, so that the
    contact is provided with an additional means for retaining the mating
    contact screw-thread coupled thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    665     and 735, for a screw-threaded sleeve contact secured to insulation,
    the sleeve contact having mutilated, irregular, interrupted, or
    discontinuous screw thread.


CLS 439/803
TXT C-clamp type:

    Electrical connector under subclass 801 comprising a body which
    approximates the shape of a C, the end of one arm of the C constituting an
    anvil against which a screw carried by the other arm applies the clamping
    pressure.

    (1)     Note.  The bodies of the connectors included herein are rigid as
    distinguished from the deformable C-clamps found in subclasses 761+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    761+,   for a battery post clamp-type connector in which the body of the
    connector is a deformable or distortable C and the clamping pressure occurs
    by forcing the arms of the C together.


CLS 439/804
TXT Single conductor between and transverse of plural screws (e.g., U-bolt):

    Electrical connector under subclass 801 comprising at least two
    spaced-apart, male screw-threaded members, the longitudinal axes of which
    are disposed parallel; and wherein the conductor to be secured is elongated
    and disposed between and perpendicular to the plane formed by the said
    parallel axes of the male screw-threaded members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    767,    for a battery post clamp-type connector in which the battery post
    is disposed between and transverse of plural clamping screws.

    785,    for a connector which clamps two or more parallel conductors
    between and transverse of plural screws.


CLS 439/805
TXT Nut, bolt, or screw coaxial with elongated conductor:

    Electrical connector under subclass 801 wherein the conductor to be
    received and clamped is elongated, and wherein the axis about which the
    screw-threaded clamping member is rotated and the longitudinal axes of the
    secured conductor are collinear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    428+,   for an electrical connector having a cutter-type contact comprising
    a screw which axially penetrates an elongated conductor.

    766,    for a battery post clamp-type connector having a screw or nut
    coaxial with the battery post.

    784,    for a connector having screw-threaded securing means coaxial with
    plural elongated conductors joined in axially aligned relationship.


CLS 439/806
TXT Clamping lever:

    Electrical connector under subclass 801 wherein the screw-threaded member
    causes an arm to pivot or swing about a fulcrum to apply clamping pressure
    to the conductor to be secured between the said arm and an abutting surface
    of the clamp connector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    769,    for a battery post clamp-type connector having a clamping lever
    which is operated by a screw-threaded member.


CLS 439/807
TXT With screw-thread operated cam or wedge:

    Electrical connector under subclass 801 wherein the screw-threaded member
    causes (a) turning motion of a clamping member of gradually increasing
    radius, (b) turning motion of an eccentrically mounted clamping member, (c)
    straight-line motion of a clamping member having diverging opposed
    surfaces, or (d) motion of a clamping member relative to a curved or
    inclined surface; which movable clamping member in turn exerts a clamping
    pressure on the conductor to be secured between the said clamping member
    and an abutting surface or the connector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    770,    for a battery post clamp-type connector having a clamping cam or
    wedge means operated by a screw-threaded member.

    772+,   783 and 863+, for other connectors having a movable clamping cam or
    wedge means which is operated by means other than a screw-threaded member.


CLS 439/808
TXT With strand coiling or loop forming means:

    Electrical connector under subclass 801 wherein the turning of the
    screw-threaded member causes a flexible conductor to be bent into a coil or
    loop about the axis about which the screw-threaded member turns.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    809,    for a connector having merely a means to confine a conductor about
    a screw but which does not coil or loop the conductor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 135+ and 146+ for a method of or a
    means for bending a metal workpiece into a helical coil or a spiral coil,
    respectively.

    140,    Wireworking, subclasses 102+ and 104+ for miscellaneous apparatus
    and processes for forming loops or eyes in wires.


CLS 439/809
TXT With means confining strand or wire loop about screw:

    Electrical connector under subclass 801 including means for holding or
    keeping the portion of the conductor to be secured adjacent the
    screw-threaded securing member during application of the clamping pressure;
    the secured portion of the conductor being initially in looped form or
    wrapped at least 180 degrees around the longitudinal axis of the male part
    of the screw-threaded securing means prior to the application of the
    clamping pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    808,    for a connector in which a coil or loop is actually formed in a
    flexible conductor by the screw-threaded securing means.


CLS 439/810
TXT Screw axis intersects conductor axis (e.g., set screw):

    Electrical connector under subclass 801 wherein the longitudinal axis of
    the male member of the mating male and female screw-threaded securing means
    carried by the connector intersects the longitudinal axis of the conductor
    secured by the connector, whereby the male screw-threaded member either
    directly or through a follower exerts the clamping pressure on the
    conductor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    771,    for a battery post clamp-type connector in which the axis of a male
    screw-threaded securing member intersects the battery post axis.

    793,    for a connector in which a single operator of the screw type joins
    plural conductors parallel to one another and wherein the longitudinal axis
    of the screw operator intersects the longitudinal axes of the joined
    conductors.

    800,    for a connector comprising a circumferentially tensioned flexible
    strap or band for securing an enclosed conductor thereto and in which a
    tensioning screw intersects the longitudinal axis of the encircled
    conductor.


CLS 439/811
TXT With movable clamp jaw between conductor and screw or nut (e.g., slidable
    follower):

    Electrical connector under subclass 810 including a movable clamping member
    located between the screw-threaded member to be rotated and an abutting
    surface of the connector, whereby rotation of the screw-threaded member
    causes linear motion of the clamping member toward the abutting surface so
    as to exert a clamping pressure on the conductor to be secured between the
    clamping member and the abutting surface of the connector.


CLS 439/812
TXT Clamp jaw movably secured to screw or nut:

    Electrical connector under subclass 811 wherein the movable clamping member
    and the screw-threaded member to be rotated are attached to one another;
    the nature of the attachment being such that, whenever the screw-threaded
    member is rotated the screw-threaded member rotates relative to the
    clamping member while at the same time both the threaded member and the
    clamping member move as a unit linearly along the axis about which the
    threaded member rotates.


CLS 439/813
TXT Captive screw or nut:

    Electrical connector under subclass 810 wherein the screw-threaded member
    and the body of the connector each include means (other than the screw
    threads) cooperating with one another to prevent removal of one from the
    other whenever the connector is in its unclamping condition so that the
    component parts of the connector will remain attached to one another when
    not in use.


CLS 439/814
TXT Set screw type:

    Electrical connector under subclass 810 wherein it is the male member of
    the mating male and female screw-threaded securing members carried by the
    connector which is rotated by the user to apply the clamping pressure on
    the conductor.


CLS 439/815
TXT Screw or nut moves resilient or resiliently biased securing part:

    Electrical connector under subclass 801 including an elastic body which
    tends to return to its normal shape after being distorted and wherein the
    screw-threaded member to be rotated distorts the elastic body whenever it
    is rotated to clamp a conductor.

    (1)     Note.  If the screw or nut is to be rotated with the bias of the
    resilient body to clamp a conductor, the resilient body usually provides
    part of or the initial clamping pressure while the screw or nut serves to
    lock the connector in its clamping condition or to increase the clamping
    pressure.  If, on the other hand, the screw or nut is to be rotated against
    the bias of the resilient body to clamp a conductor, the screw or nut
    provides the clamping pressure while the resilient body usually serves to
    facilitate release of a previously clamped conductor or to hinder the screw
    or nut from becoming inadvertently unscrewed from its clamping condition.


CLS 439/816
TXT Spring actuated or resilient securing part:

    Electrical connector under subclass 775 wherein the clamping or securing
    force is caused by the action of an elastic body tending to return to its
    normal shape after being distorted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    729,    for an electrical connector having a movable insulated part for
    securing a conductor or mating connector thereto, the securing part being
    spring operated or resilient.

    759,    for a battery post clamp-type connector having a spring actuated or
    resilient securing part.

    786+,   for a connector having resilient or spring-operated securing means
    for electrically interconnecting plural conductors.


CLS 439/817
TXT Compression spring axis transverse of and intersecting conductor axis:

    Electrical connector under subclass 816 wherein the conductor is secured by
    an elongated compressible resilient member, the longitudinal axis of which
    is at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the conductor.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein, for example are connectors in which a coil
    spring causes the clamping force.


CLS 439/818
TXT Spring biases detent member to form snap-latch type securing part:

    Electrical connector under subclass 817 having a bore for receiving the end
    of a conductor or mating male connector inserted along the longitudinal
    axis of the bore; and wherein the resilient member yieldingly urges a rigid
    securing part into the bore, the movement of the securing part being along
    a straight line disposed at right angles to the longitudinal axes of both
    the bore and the conductor or mating male connector inserted therein; and
    the securing part includes a conductor-engaging surface for being received
    within a detent recess disposed in a lateral surface of the conductor or
    mating male connector so that, whenever the conductor or male connector is
    inserted along its longitudinal axis into the bore, the securing part is
    yieldingly moved laterally of the bore into the detent recess to retain the
    conductor or male connector within the bore.


CLS 439/819
TXT Separate spring means moves rigid nonresilient clamping part into securing
    condition:

    Electrical connector under subclass 816 having a hard, nonflexible,
    nonelastic movable securing part urged into clamping engagement by a
    distinct spring member.

    (1)     Note.  Connectors having a spring which merely has a rigid portion
    to move therewith are not considered to be separate spring means and may be
    found in other appropriate structural subclasses.


CLS 439/820
TXT Spring biases slidable wedge-shaped or wedge-operated jaw:

    Electrical connector under subclass 819 wherein the spring member (a)
    resiliently urges a rigid clamping part having diverging opposed surfaces
    to move in a straight line, or (b) resiliently urges a rigid clamping part
    to move in a straight line along or toward an inclined surface of the
    connector; which rigid clamping part in turn exerts a clamping pressure on
    the conductor to be secured between the said clamping part and an abutting
    surface of the connector.


CLS 439/821
TXT Socket connector having three or more   annularly arranged duplicate grip
    elements:

    Electrical connector under subclass 819 having at least three identical,
    rigid clamping parts so disposed that they will fall on the circumference
    of a circle; and wherein the spring member urges the clamping parts
    radially inward toward the center of the circle so that they exert a
    radical clamping pressure on a conductor located at the center of the
    circle.

    (1)     Note.  Also included herein are connectors in which a separate
    spring is provided for each duplicate grip element.


CLS 439/822
TXT Hinged clamping part (i.e., clamping lever):

    Electrical connector under subclass 819 wherein the spring member
    resiliently urges a rigid arm to pivot or swing about a fulcrum to apply
    clamping pressure to a conductor to be secured between the said arm and an
    abutting surface of the clamping connector.


CLS 439/823
TXT Socket or pin connector having small radially biased clamping or detenting
    element:

    Electrical connector under subclass 819 either comprising a male connector
    adapted to be pushed linearly along its longitudinal axis into the
    elongated hollow interior of a mating female connector, or comprising the
    said female connector; and wherein the spring member carried by the male or
    female connector resiliently urges a rigid clamping or retaining part
    radially of the longitudinal axis of the connector, so as to either exert a
    radial clamping pressure on the lateral surface of the mating connector or
    to resiliently snap-latch into a shouldered recess located in the lateral
    surface of the mating connector.


CLS 439/824
TXT Spring-biased butt contact:

    Electrical connector under subclass 819 wherein the spring member is a
    compression spring which resiliently urges a contact plunger or head to
    slidably move along the compression-extension axis of the spring in the
    direction away from the spring into abutting engagement with a mating
    contact; and wherein the structure of the contact plunger or head is such
    that there is no telescopic engagement of the contacts within one another
    whenever the contact plunger or head is held in abutting engagement with
    the mating contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    700,    for a plural-contact coupling part in which one of the contacts is
    a spring biased, plunger-type contact.


CLS 439/825
TXT Plug having means for resiliently engaging opposed interior surfaces of
    mating socket connector (e.g., banana plug):

    Electrical connector under subclass 816 comprising a male connector
    particularly adapted to be inserted linearly along its longitudinal axis
    into an elongated hollow or slotted interior of a mating female connector;
    the male connector further carries an elastic clamping or retaining part
    which is resiliently urged radially outward from the longitudinal axis of
    the male connector, so that the lateral interior surfaces of the female
    connector are resiliently engaged to retain the male connector within its
    mating female connector.


CLS 439/826
TXT Also having means for resiliently engaging exterior surfaces of the socket
    connector:

    Male connector under subclass 825 further carrying an elastic clamping or
    retaining part which is resiliently urged radially inward toward the
    longitudinal axis of the connector so that the lateral exterior surfaces of
    the mating female connector are resiliently engaged to further aid in
    retaining the male connector within its mating female connector.


CLS 439/827
TXT Having separate resilient means extending externally around or outwardly
    through rigid plug body:

    Male connector under subclass 825 comprising a nonflexible male member
    carrying a distinct elastic clamping or retaining part which either (a)
    extends circumferentially about a portion of the outer surface of the male
    member or (b) is located within the male member with a portion thereof
    extending laterally outwardly through the body of the male member to engage
    the interior surface of the mating female connector.


CLS 439/828
TXT Having resilient clamping finger crossing plane of opposed clamping member
    while in clamping condition:

    Electrical connector under subclass 816 wherein the resilient portion
    exerting the clamping force is attached to the body of the connector along
    one end only (i.e., cantilevered); and wherein the said cantilevered
    portion, in its distorted clamping position, passes through the plane of
    the clamping portion that opposes it at a point between the attached end
    and free end of the cantilevered portion.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass may be found, for example, connectors known
    in the art as "Fahnestock" clips.


CLS 439/829
TXT Hand-grip type:

    Electrical connector under subclass 828 specifically adapted and indented
    to be unmounted or otherwise unattached to a supporting structure; and
    wherein both crossed members must be simultaneously squeezed by the hand of
    the user to be distorted into position to receive the body to be
    resiliently clamped.

    (1)     Note.  A body to be clamped by the connector does not constitute a
    "supporting structure".


CLS 439/830
TXT For receiving end contact of elongated fuselike component inserted
    transverse to longitudinal axis of component (e.g., fuse clip):

    Electrical connector under subclass 816 comprising a resilient clip having
    opposed clamping jaws, at least one of which is urged toward the other for
    receiving therebetween and resiliently gripping one of the end contacts of
    a narrow, tube-shaped electrical component of the type having a contact
    located at each of the spaced-apart ends thereof; the component being
    intended to be placed into electrical and mechanical engagement with the
    resilient clip by pushing the component toward the clip along a line
    perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the component until one of the
    said end contacts is received within and resiliently gripped by the jaws of
    the resilient clip.

    (1)     Note.  Usually, the electrical component adapted to have one of its
    end contacts gripped by the connector provided herein is known in the art
    as a "cartridge-type fuse."

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249+,   especially subclass 250 for a receptacle having two directly
    opposed contact arms for receiving a connector therebetween, one of the
    contact arms being self-aligning.

    698,    for a plural-contact receptacle for transversely receiving an
    elongated fuselike component having a contact at each end thereof.


CLS 439/831
TXT With contact rejection feature or adaptor:

    Electrical connector under subclass 830 either (a) including interference
    means for preventing insertion of an end contact of an improper electrical
    component into the resilient clip, or (b) including means for converting
    the resilient clip into one which is capable of receiving an electrical
    component having an end contact of a distinctly different shape, type, or
    size from the one of the resilient clip previously received.


CLS 439/832
TXT With movably attached user manipulated locking, contact retaining, or
    spring spreading means:

    Electrical connector under subclass 830 including means movably secured to
    the body of the resilient clip to be operated by the user for the purpose
    of (a) preventing accidental dislodgement or removal of the end contact of
    the electrical component from the resilient clip until desired by the user
    or (b) facilitating insertion or removal of the end contact of the
    electrical component into or from the resilient clip by separating opposed
    clamping jaws.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    835+,   for metallic connector having a spring actuated or resilient
    securing part, which connector includes a movably attached user manipulated
    means.


CLS 439/833
TXT With separate means to increase clamping pressure of spring clip:

    Electrical connector under subclass 830 including means operatively
    associated with the clamping jaws of the resilient clip but distinct
    therefrom for applying a clamping pressure upon the end contact of an
    electrical component in addition to the resilient clamping pressure
    provided by the clamping jaws of the resilient clip itself.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    839,    for a metallic connector having a spring actuated or resilient
    securing part combined with an additional reinforcing spring means.


CLS 439/834
TXT Clamping pressure provided by cantilevered finger resiliently urged away
    from opposed clamping member:

    Electrical connector under subclass 816 having opposed clamping parts, at
    least one of which is attached to the body of the connector along one end
    only thereby forming a fingerlike clamping part; and wherein the free end
    of the fingerlike part is resiliently urged away from the opposed clamping
    part so that a conductor to be secured is gripped by surfaces or edges of
    the connector which are resiliently urged away from one another.


CLS 439/835
TXT With movably attached user manipulated means or having user grippable means
    for manually distorting resilient part:

    Electrical connector under subclass 816 either (a) including means movably
    secured to the body of the connector to be operated by the user for the
    purpose of operating the clamping part, locking the conductor to be secured
    to the connector, or facilitating insertion or removal of the conductor to
    be secured into or from the connector; or (b) having means located on the
    body of the connector specifically intended to be engaged by the hand of
    the user for the purpose of distorting the elastic body to enable insertion
    or removal of the conductor to be secured into or from the connector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    832,    for an electrical connector for receiving the end contact of an
    elongated fuselike component inserted transverse to the longitudinal axis
    of the component, which connector includes a movably attached user
    manipulated locking, contact retaining, or spring spreading means.


CLS 439/836
TXT Slidably mounted cam or wedge locks or places resilient securing part into
    securing condition:

    Electrical connector under subclass 835 wherein the movably secured means
    operated by the user includes either (a) a member having diverging opposed
    surfaces which is slid relative to the body of the connector by the user;
    or (b) a member which is slid relative to a curved, inclined, or tapered
    surface on the body of the connector by the user; which slidable member
    either distorts the connector or maintains the elastic body in distorted
    condition to prevent removal of a conductor clamped to the connector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    863+,   for a metallic connector having a movable securing part which is
    netiher spring operated or resilient nor screw-thread operated and in which
    the clamping force is caused by a cam or wedge.


CLS 439/837
TXT With additional spring means to operate slidable cam or wedge:

    Electrical connector under subclass 836 including an additional elastic
    body operatively associated with the slidable cam or wedge member to
    facilitate the act of clamping a conductor to the connector, to maintain
    the connector in clamped condition, or to facilitate insertion or removal
    of a conductor into or from the connector.


CLS 439/838
TXT Pivotally or rotatably mounted member locks or places securing part into
    securing condition:

    Electrical connector under subclass 835 wherein the movably secured means
    operated by the user includes an arm secured to the body of the connector
    so as to pivot or swing about a fulcrum; which arm either distorts the
    elastic body to clamp a conductor to the connector or maintains the elastic
    body in distorted condition to prevent removal of a conductor clamped to
    the connector.


CLS 439/839
TXT With additional reinforcing spring means:

    Electrical connector under subclass 816 wherein the resiliently urged
    securing member has an additional elastic member coating therewith for
    increasing the clamping pressure of the said securing member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    819+,   for a connector in which a separate spring means urges a rigid
    nonresilient clamping part into clamping condition.

    833,    for a spring clip connector of the type which transversely receives
    an end contact of an elongated fuselike component, which spring clip has
    separate means to increase the clamping pressure thereof.


CLS 439/840
TXT Helically coiled spring forms securing part:

    Electrical connector under subclass 816 wherein the elastic body is in the
    form of a coil made from a resilient wirelike material which has been
    formed into a series of loops or turns wound helically about an axis; and
    wherein the said elastic  coil also constitutes the displaceable securing
    member, whereby the elastic coil is in direct touching engagement with the
    conductor to be secured whenever it is secured by the connector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    788,    for a metallic connector having a resilient or spring-operated
    securing means for joining plural conductors in duplicate receiving means,
    the resilient or spring-operated means being a helical spring.


CLS 439/841
TXT Adapted to receive elongated contact or conductor by insertion along axis
    passing through spring coils:

    Electrical connector under subclass 840 wherein the hollow interior region
    formed by series of helically wound loops making up the elastic coil
    constitutes a resilient female socket which is particularly adapted to
    receive and resiliently grip an elongated male contact or the end of an
    elongated conductor; the longitudinal axis of the elongated male contact or
    conductor end and the axis about which the loops are helically wound are
    aligned just prior  to reception of the male contact or conductor end
    within the female socket and are coincident whenever the male contact or
    conductor end and the female socket are finally joined.


CLS 439/842
TXT Socket adapted to receive push-pull-engaging elongated contact by insertion
    along longitudinal axis of contact:

    Electrical connector under subclass 816 comprising a female connector
    having surfaces or edges between which an elongated male contact or the end
    of an elongated conductor is adapted to be telescopically received and
    resiliently gripped, at least one of the surfaces or edges is resiliently
    urged or moved toward another surface or edge so that the male contact or
    conductor end is resiliently grasped, gripped, or clamped between the
    surfaces or edges; and wherein the electrical joint between the female
    connector and the male contact or conductor end to be secured is made
    either (a) by telescoping the elongated male contact or conductor end along
    its longitudinal axis into the female connector or (b) by telescoping the
    female connector along the longitudinal axis of the male contact or
    conductor end onto the said male contact or conductor end.


CLS 439/843
TXT Having separate gripping spring means located within or extending into a
    rigid socket body:

    Electrical connector under subclass 842 wherein the female connector
    comprises a solid nonflexible body having an interior open region for
    telescopically receiving the elongated male contact or conductor end, and
    further comprises a separate and distinct resilient member for engaging and
    exerting the resilient securing force upon the male contact or conductor
    end located within the interior region of the nonflexible body; the
    resilient member being either carried entirely within the interior region
    of the nonflexible body or carried on the exterior surface of the
    nonflexible body with a portion thereof extending into the said interior
    region for resiliently engaging the male contact or conductor end.


CLS 439/844
TXT Adapted to be mounted to flat panel with longitudinal axis of socket
    perpendicular to plane of panel:

    Electrical connector under subclass 843 wherein the female connector
    includes means for securing it to a relatively thin support base having a
    relatively large planar surface, the female connector being defined as
    having a longitudinal axis which is identical to the axis along which the
    elongated male contact or conductor end is telescoped into the female
    connector; and when the female connector is secured to the support base,
    the said longitudinal axis thereof is disposed at a right angle to the
    planar surface of the support base.


CLS 439/845
TXT Adapted to receive thin blade contact (e.g., spade receiving):

    Electrical connector under subclass 843 wherein the female connector is
    particularly adapted to telescopically receive and resiliently grip a male
    contact having a generally flattened rectangular cross section.


CLS 439/846
TXT Separate spring means forms snap-latching detent:

    Electrical connector under subclass 843 wherein the separate and distinct
    resilient member carried by the nonflexible body has a retaining part
    yieldingly urged to move transverse to the longitudinal axis of an
    elongated male contact telescopically inserted into the nonflexible body;
    so that, whenever the male contact is telescoped into the female connector,
    the retaining part resiliently latches behind a shoulder or into a
    shouldered recess located in a lateral surface of the male contact, whereby
    the retaining part tends to prevent an inserted male contact from being
    withdrawn from the female connector.


CLS 439/847
TXT Spring means mounted on exterior of and extends into rigid socket body:

    Electrical connector under subclass 843 wherein is carried on the exterior
    surface of the solid nonflexible body with a portion thereof extending into
    the open interior region for resiliently engaging a male contact or
    conductor end telescoped within the female connector.


CLS 439/848
TXT Having latching detent or means operated by mating contact to lock or
    manipulate resilient part:

    Electrical connector under subclass 842 either (a) wherein the resilient
    securing member has a retaining part yieldingly urged to move transverse to
    the longitudinal axis of an elongated male contact telescopically inserted
    into the female connector so that, during the act of telescopically
    inserting a male contact into the female connector, the retaining part
    resiliently latches behind a shoulder or into a shouldered recess located
    in a lateral surface of the male contact, whereby the retaining part tends
    to prevent an inserted male contact from being withdrawn from the female
    connector; or (b) wherein the resilient securing member has means
    engageable by cooperating means on a male contact whenever it is telescoped
    into the female connector for maintaining the resilient securing member in
    its secured condition or for placing the resilient securing member into
    securing condition.


CLS 439/849
TXT Adapted to receive thin blade contact (e.g., spade receiving):

    Electrical connector under subclass 848 wherein the female connector is
    particularly adapted to telescopically receive and resiliently grip a male
    contact having a generally flattened rectangular cross section.


CLS 439/850
TXT Resilient channel-like socket for receiving thin blade contact (e.g., spade
    receiving):

    Electrical connector under subclass 842 wherein the female connector is
    particularly adapted to telescopically receive and resiliently grip a male
    contact having a generally flattened rectangular cross section; and wherein
    the female connector comprises a generally planar base having an opposed
    pair of side flanges, each of which has a portion thereof extending
    inwardly toward one another to form male contact gripping surfaces or
    edges, whereby a flat male contact telescopically inserted into the female
    connector is resiliently gripped between the base and the inwardly
    extending surfaces or edges.


CLS 439/851
TXT Socket comprises tubular body having resilient means for gripping inserted
    elongated contact (includes split or slotted tube):

    Electrical connector under subclass 842 wherein the female connector
    comprises an elongated hollow tubelike housing or shell having a
    substantially closed transverse cross section and having at least one open
    end for axially receiving and resilient gripping within the interior
    thereof an elongated contact or conductor end.


CLS 439/852
TXT Having resilient cantilevered clamping finger located within tubular body:

    Electrical connector under subclass 851 wherein the means exerting the
    resilient clamping force upon an elongated male contact or conductor end
    axially located within the hollow tubelike housing or shell comprises a
    fingerlike clamping part defined by having only one of its ends or edges
    attached to the housing or shell; and wherein at least the clamping portion
    of the fingerlike part is disposed within the hollow interior of the
    housing or shell, so that it may resiliently engage a male contact or
    conductor end disposed within the tubelike housing or shell.


CLS 439/853
TXT With means for mounting to flat panel:

    Electrical connector under subclass 852 wherein the female connector
    includes means for securing it to a relatively thin support base having a
    relatively large planar surface.


CLS 439/854
TXT Tubular socket perpendicular to wire-securing barrel (e.g., right-angle
    connector):

    Electrical connector under subclass 851 wherein the hollow tubelike housing
    or shell comprising the female connector also includes a sleeve or ferrule
    means for receiving therein and mechanically attaching in electrical
    engagement therewith the end of an elongated wire-type conductor; and
    wherein the disposition of the conductor-attaching sleeve or ferrule means
    is such that the longitudinal axis of the attached portion of the wire-type
    conductor extends at generally a right angle to the longitudinal axis of
    the elongated hollow tubelike housing or shell comprising the female
    connector.


CLS 439/855
TXT Socket perpendicular to wire-securing barrel (e.g., right-angle connector):

    Electrical connector under subclass 842 wherein the female connector also
    includes a sleeve or ferrule means for receiving therein and mechanically
    attaching in electrical engagement therewith the end of an elongated
    wire-type conductor; and wherein the disposition of the conductor-attaching
    sleeve or ferrule means is such that the longitudinal axis of the attached
    portion of the wire-type conductor extends at generally a right angle to
    the longitudinal axis along which the female connector is intended to
    telescopically receive its mating male contact or conductor end.


CLS 439/856
TXT Having opposed cantilevered clamping fingers resiliently urged toward one
    another:

    Electrical connector under subclass 842 wherein the means exerting the
    resilient clamping force upon an elongated male contact or conductor end
    telescopically received within the female connector comprises at least two
    fingerlike clamping parts, each defined as having only one of its ends or
    edges attached to the body of the female connector; and wherein the two
    fingerlike parts are disposed on opposite sides of and resiliently urged
    toward the longitudinal axis along which the female connector
    telescopically receives the elongated male contact or conductor end, so
    that opposed lateral portions of the contact or conductor end are
    resiliently engaged.


CLS 439/857
TXT Allochiral cantilevered clamping fingers:

    Electrical connector under subclass 856 wherein the at least two opposed
    fingerlike clamping parts are mirror images of one another about the
    longitudinal axis along which the female connector telescopically receives
    the male contact or conductor end.


CLS 439/858
TXT Having cantilevered clamping finger resiliently urged toward rigid clamping
    jaw:

    Electrical connector under subclass 842 wherein the means exerting the
    resilient clamping force upon an elongated male contact or conductor end
    telescopically received within the female connector comprises a fingerlike
    clamping part defined by having only one of its ends or edges attached to
    the body of the female connector; and wherein the gripping portion of the
    fingerlike part is resiliently urged toward a solid nonflexible clamping
    part of the female connector in a direction transverse to the longitudinal
    axis along which the female connector telescopically receives the male
    contact or conductor end, so that opposed lateral portions of the elongated
    male contact or conductor end are resiliently gripped between the clamping
    parts.


CLS 439/859
TXT Adapted to resiliently engage end face and inner annular shoulder of headed
    terminal:

    Electrical connector under subclass 816 particularly adapted to be
    resiliently secured to the headed end of a cylindrical conducting body, the
    headed end being either the flanged or enlarged annular end of a
    cylindrical conducting body or the annular end of a cylindrical conducting
    body having a circumferential groove or reduced portion spaced slightly
    from the said end thereof; and wherein the connector has surfaces or edges
    resiliently urged toward one another so as to resiliently grip the top or
    end surface of the headed end and the inner circumferential ledge or
    shoulder therebetween.


CLS 439/860
TXT Comprising conductor-encircling resilient wire loop or comprising slotted
    or apertured resilient plate:

    Electrical connector under subclass 816 either (a) comprising a conducting
    body formed from a length of resilient wirelike material which has been
    bent upon itself to form a generally unbroken loop, there being interior
    surfaces or edges of the loop resiliently urged toward one another to grip
    or grasp a contact or conductor received within the interior of the loop;
    or (b) comprising a generally flat sheetlike conducting body having
    surfaces or edges resiliently urged toward one another to grip or grasp a
    contact or conductor therebetween, the body having either a hole
    therethrough or an opening extending inwardly from an edge thereof for
    receiving the contact or conductor to be resiliently secured thereby.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    868,    for metallic conductor terminal having conductor sheath engaging
    means, the terminal comprising a slotted or apertured disc or plate which
    does not have a resilient securing part.

    883,    for a metallic connector or contact comprising a slotted or
    apertured disc or plate which does not have a resilient securing part.


CLS 439/861
TXT Having cantilevered clamping finger resiliently urged toward opposed
    clamping jaw:

    Electrical connector under subclass 816 wherein the means exerting the
    resilient clamping force upon a contact or conductor to be secured
    comprises a fingerlike clamping part defined by having only one of its ends
    or edges attached to the body of the connector; and wherein the clamping
    portion of the fingerlike part is resiliently urged toward another clamping
    part of the connector to grip or grasp a contact or conductor received
    therebetween


CLS 439/862
TXT Having cantilevered spring contact finger:

    Electrical connector under subclass 816 wherein the means exerting the
    resilient clamping force upon a contact or conductor to be secured
    comprises a fingerlike part defined by having only one of its ends or edges
    attached to the body of the connector.


CLS 439/863
TXT Clamping cam or wedge:

    Electrical connector under subclass 775 wherein the clamping pressure
    exerted on a contact or conductor to be secured is caused by the action of
    (a) the turning motion of a clamping member of gradually increasing radius,
    (b) the turning motion of an eccentrically mounted clamping member, (c) the
    straight-line motion of a clamping member having diverging opposed
    surfaces, or (d) the motion of a clamping member relative to a curved,
    inclined, or tapered surface; which movable clamping member exerts a
    clamping pressure on the contact or conductor to be secured between the
    said movable clamping member and an abutting surface of the clamp connector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    770,    for a metallic clamp-type connector for a storage battery terminal
    having a screw-thread operated clamping cam or wedge.

    772+,   for a metallic clamp-type connector for a storage battery terminal
    having a clamping lever, cam or wedge.

    807,    for a metallic connector having a screw-thread operated cam or
    wedge.

    836+,   for a metallic connector having a user manipulated slidable cam or
    wedge for locking or placing a resilient securing part into securing
    condition.


CLS 439/864
TXT Rotary or swinging:

    Electrical connector under subclass 863 wherein the clamping pressure is
    caused by the action of (a) the turning motion of a clamping member of
    gradually increasing radius, (b) the turning motion of an eccentrically
    mounted clamping member, or (c) the turning motion of a clamping member
    relative to a curved surface.


CLS 439/865
TXT METALLIC CONDUCTOR TERMINAL HAVING CONDUCTOR SHEATH ENGAGING MEANS:

    Electrical connector or contact under the class definition consisting
    solely of metallic material and having means thereon for receiving or
    engaging the insulating coating or covering of a conductor*, there being no
    insulation claimed other than the conductor covering.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses include, for example,
    uninsulated terminal devices to be attached to the end of a conductor wire
    so as to facilitate connection thereof to a binding post, etc.; and which
    include ferrules, sleeves, thimbles, or other means for receiving the
    insulating covering of the wire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    274,    275 and 279, for a connector combined with a distinct conductor
    sheath sealing element or material, the connector being also combined with
    means for sealing with a mating connector.

    391+,   for a connector having a cutter-type contact for penetrating the
    insulating covering of a conductor to engage the conductive portion
    therebeneath to establish electrical connection therewith.

    445+,   for a connector combined with or having a flexible guard or support
    for a cable or conductor

    449+,   for a connector combined with stress relieving means for the
    conductor to terminal joint.

    578+,   for a connector including or for use with a coaxial cable.

    604+,   for a connector with an external conductor or cable embedded in
    insulative sealing material.

    730,    for a terminal connector having an insulating tube or sleeve
    surrounding a wire-receiving ferrule or sleeve and which insulating tube or
    sleeve is adapted to be crimped or heat-shrunk onto a wire conductor or
    onto its insulating covering.

    874+,   877+ and 883, for various joints between a conductor wire and a
    metallic connector or contact in which no conductor sheath engaging means
    is claimed.


CLS 439/866
TXT Pin or plug type terminal:

    Electrical connector or contact under subclass 865 in the form of an
    elongated, conductive male member which is adapted to be slidingly received
    along the longitudinal axis thereof within a complementary socket or recess
    of a mating female connector or contact so that a readily separable
    electrical joint may be formed.


CLS 439/867
TXT Resilient or spring-biased socket or clip type terminal:

    Electrical connector or connector under subclass 865 having surfaces or
    edges between which another metallic connector or contact is adapted to be
    disposed and releasably secured in order to form a readily separable
    electrical joint, at least one of the surfaces or edges is forcibly urged
    or forcibly moved toward another surface or edge so that the said another
    connector or contact is grasped, gripped, or clamped between the surfaces
    or edges, the clamping of securing force being caused by the action of an
    elastic body tending to return to its normal shape after being distorted.

    (1)     Note.  The documents in this subclass disclose but do not claim a
    resilient or spring-biased socket or clip type terminal; such terminals
    when claimed, may be found, for example, in subclasses 842+ above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    816+,   particularly subclasses 842+ for a similar type of uninsulated
    connector or contact in which no conductor sheath engaging means is claimed.


CLS 439/868
TXT Slotted or apertured disc or plate type terminal (e.g., ring terminal):

    Electrical connector or contact under subclass 865 in the form of a
    generally flat, conductive body having a hole extending therethrough or
    having an opening extending inwardly from an edge of the body whereby the
    connector or contact may be readily secured to another metallic connector
    or contact to form a readily separable electrical joint.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    883,    for an uninsulated connector or contact in the form of a slotted or
    apertured disc or plate, and in which no conductor sheath engaging means is
    claimed.


CLS 439/869
TXT METALLIC CONNECTOR OR CONTACT HAVING MEANS  FOR SECURING TO INSULATION
    OTHER THAN CONDUCTOR SHEATH:

    Electrical connector or contact under the class definition consisting
    solely of metallic material and including means to attach or fasten it to a
    body of electrically insulating material exclusive of that forming an
    insulating covering of a wire-type conductor or cable secured thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    625+,   for a connector combined with insulation other than a conductor
    sheath, and see the notes appended thereto for a further discussion of the
    type of "insulating material" to which the connector or contact is to be
    secured.

    733.1+  for a metallic connector or contact combined with and secured to a
    body of insulation other than a conductor sheath.


CLS 439/870
TXT Adapted to be secured by permanently bending or deforming metallic part:

    Electrical connector or contact under subclass 869 wherein the metallic
    connector or contact is adapted to be attached or fastened to an insulating
    body (a) by permanently bending, crimping, or deforming, a malleable
    portion of the connector or contact onto or into a portion of the
    insulating body or (b) by permanently bending, crimping, or deforming a
    separate metallic rivet or other separate metallic securing means onto or
    into a portion of the insulating body or onto a portion of the connector or
    contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    741+,   for a metallic connector or contact combined with and secured to an
    insulating body by permanently bending, deforming, or crimping a metallic
    part.


CLS 439/871
TXT Adapted to be secured by resiliently biased part latching behind shoulder:

    Electrical connector or contact under subclass 869 wherein the means to
    attach or fasten the metallic connector or contact to the insulating body
    comprises a yieldable or yieldably operated retaining tongue, projection,
    or shoulder carried by the metallic connector or contact (or by the
    insulating body) for being yieldably urged to latch and remain behind a
    cooperating retaining a shoulder or abutment carried by the insulating body
    (or by the metallic connector contact) whenever the metallic connector or
    contact and the insulating body are interengaged for attachment
    therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    595,    for a coupling part including flexing insulation in which a hinged
    or flexed detent on the insulation engages the contact to secure it within
    a coupling part housing.

    603,    for a coupling part including flexing insulation in which the
    yieldable insulation is urged to retain a contact within a coupling part
    housing.

    744+,   for the combination of insulation and a metallic connector or
    contact in which the connector or contact is secured to the insulation by a
    resiliently biased retaining shoulder.

    751,    for a metallic connector or contact secured to insulation by a part
    of the connector contact resiliently urged to grip the insulation.

    873,    for a metallic connector or contact, per se, adapted to be secured
    to insulation by a part of the connector or contact resiliently urged to
    grip the insulation.


CLS 439/872
TXT Latching part unitary with metallic connector or contact:

    Electrical connector or contact under subclass 871 wherein the latchable
    tongue, projection, or shoulder and the metallic connector or contact are
    of single one-piece construction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    746+,   for a metallic connector or contact combined with and secured to a
    body of insulation by a latching part which is unitary with the connector
    or contact.


CLS 439/873
TXT Adapted to be secured by part resiliently gripping insulation:

    Electrical connector or contact under subclass 869 wherein the metallic
    connector or contact is adapted to be attached or fastened to an insulating
    body by the connector or contact having on the insulation-engaging portion
    thereof a retaining means which is yieldably urged to grip or clamp onto a
    portion of the insulating body so as to hold the connector or contact to
    the insulating body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    751,    for a metallic connector or contact combined with and secured to an
    insulating body by a part resiliently gripping the insulation, and see the
    Search notes appended thereto.


CLS 439/874
TXT METALLIC CONNECTOR OR CONTACT HAVING PART PERMANENTLY SECURED TO CONDUCTOR
    USING FUSED OR MOLDED MATERIAL:

    Electrical connector or contact under the class definition consisting
    solely of metallic material and having means to which an electrical
    conductor is intended to be permanently attached or fastened in conductive
    relationship therewith, whereby a permanent conductive joint may be formed
    therebetween; the conductive joint being formed by an operation involving
    fluid or molten bonding material, by applying heat to the metallic material
    of one or both parts until it is softened or molten and then pressing,
    shaping, or pouring it onto or into the metallic material of the other
    part, or by applying glue or other adhesive cementlike material between the
    two metallic parts.

    (1)     Note.  This class does not provide for a molded or soldered joint
    between two conductors.  Such subject matter is not considered to be a
    connector for this class (439) but is provided for in Class 174.  See the
    class definition of this class (439) for the line between Classes 174 and
    439.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    430,    for a connector having a cutter-type contact which axially
    penetrates an elongated conductor and which is also permanently secured to
    a conductor by for example, solder.

    736,    for a metallic connector or contact which is secured to insulation
    by a molded, cast, welded, or cemented joint.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 860 for a process of assembling a terminal
    to an elongated conductor by metal fusion bonding.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding,  for uniting work parts by forming a
    metallurgical bond.


CLS 439/875
TXT Having duplicate locations for permanently securing individual conductors
    thereto:

    Electrical connector or contact under subclass 874 having at least two
    identical means to which individual electrical conductors are to be
    permanently attached or fastened in conductive relationship therewith.


CLS 439/876
TXT Adapted to be secured to conductor formed on printed circuit board:

    Electrical connector or contact under subclass 874 wherein the electrical
    conductor to which the metallic connector or contact is to be permanently
    and conductively attached or fastened is the conductive material which has
    been preplaced and fixed on a prefabricated sheetlike insulating member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83,     for a contact soldered to a panel circuit of a preformed panel
    circuit arrangement.


CLS 439/877
TXT METALLIC CONNECTOR OR CONTACT ALSO HAVING SECURING PART ADAPTED TO BE
    CRIMPED, DEFORMED, OR BENT ONTO CONDUCTOR:

    Electrical connector or contact under the class definition consisting
    solely of metallic material and having a malleable part (i.e., a
    plastically deformable part) to which an electrical conductor is intended
    to be permanently attached or fastened in conductive relationship
    therewith, whereby a permanent conductive joint may be formed therebetween;
    the conductive joint being formed by permanently bending, crimping, or
    deforming the malleable part of the connector or contact onto a portion of
    the electrical conductor.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein, for example, are connectors in which
    novelty resides in the joint between a so-called "solderless lug" and its
    associated conductor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     for a contact secured by deformation to a panel circuit of a
    preformed panel circuit arrangement.

    430,    for a connector having a cutter-type contact which axially
    penetrates an elongated conductor and which is also permanently secured to
    a conductor by, for example, crimping.

    442,    for a connector having a cutter-type contact which is crimped to
    make an electrical connection.

    585,    for a connector including or for use with a coaxial cable which has
    a crimpable metallic conductor grip.

    730,    for a terminal connector having an insulating tube or sleeve
    adapted to be crimped onto a wire-type conductor.

    865+,   for a metallic conductor terminal having conductor sheath engaging
    means which often is of the type adapted to be crimped onto both the
    insulating sheath portion and the conductive portion of a wire-type
    conductor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 861+ for processes for attaching an
    elongated conductor to a connector element wherein the joint is formed by a
    crimping or deforming operation.


CLS 439/878
TXT Securing part crimped or bent onto looped end of wire conductor:

    Electrical connector or contact under subclass 877 wherein the electrical
    conductor to which the metallic connector or contact is to be permanently
    and conductively attached or fastened is an elongated wire-type conductor,
    the end of which is first coiled or looped either upon itself or about a
    portion of the securing part of the connector or contact, and then the
    malleable portion of the securing part is bent or deformed onto or about
    the coiled or looped end to form the conductive electrical joint
    therebetween.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are wire-type conductor end terminals having
    the general configuration of an annular eyelet.


CLS 439/879
TXT Multipart assembly:

    Electrical connector or contact under subclass 877 comprising at least two
    nonunitary metallic parts.


CLS 439/880
TXT Having duplicate receiving means for permanently securing individual
    conductors thereto:

    Electrical connector or contact under subclass 877 having at least two
    identical malleable securing parts to which individual electrical
    conductors are to be permanently attached or fastened in conductive
    relationship therewith.


CLS 439/881
TXT Wire conductor secured transverse to contact portion (e.g., right-angle
    connector):

    Electrical connector or contact under subclass 877 wherein the electrical
    conductor to which the metallic connector or contact is to be permanently
    and conductively attached or fastened is an elongated wire-type conductor;
    and wherein the disposition of the malleable conductor-attaching part of
    the connector or contact relative to the readily separable contact part
    thereof is such that the separable contact part of the connector or contact
    extends laterally and to one side of the longitudinal axis of the attached
    portion of the wire-type conductor.


CLS 439/882
TXT Wire conductor secured within ferrule having series of preformed
    wire-gripping means therein:

    Electrical connector or contact under subclass 877 wherein the malleable
    attaching or fastening part is in the form of ferrule-forming means for
    receiving therein and being crimped or otherwise pressure forged onto the
    end of a wire-type conductor; and wherein the interior conductor-gripping
    surface of the ferrule-forming means has a plurality of longitudinally
    spaced teeth, ridges, grooves, ribs, serrations, or other corrugated means
    formed therein during manufacture of the connector or contact so as to
    provide increased axial friction upon the end of a crimped conductor,
    thereby tending to prevent axial separation of the conductor from the
    ferrule forming means.


CLS 439/883
TXT METALLIC CONDUCTOR OR CONTACT COMPRISING A SLOTTED OR APERTURED DISC OR
    PLATE:

    Electrical connector or contact under the class definition comprising a
    generally flat sheetlike conducting body having either a hole therethrough
    or an opening extending inwardly from an edge thereof whereby the connector
    or contact may be readily secured to a corresponding connector.


CLS 439/884
TXT CONTACT TERMINAL:

    Device under the class definition comprising structure to physically engage
    and become electrically conductive with a corresponding portion of a mating
    part for making and breaking an electrical circuit.

    (1)     Note.  The device of this and the subclasses indented hereunder may
    comprise a contact member that in reality is a complete electrical
    connector or is only part of an assembly that is an electrical connector,
    if not provided for above.


CLS 439/885
TXT Strip of detachable contacts:

    Device under subclass 884 comprising a structure including a plurality of
    members for making electrical engagement with corresponding mating members,
    each of which is intended to be detached from the instant assembly when
    used.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    590,    for a storage strip for a plurality of coupling parts including
    flexing insulation.


CLS 439/886
TXT Having treated (e.g., coated) surface or distinct contact surface layer:

    Device under subclass 884 including a filmlike outer covering intended to
    make physical engagement with a mating contact, which is distinct from the
    body of the device and may have been applied thereto by a coating process
    or by a laminating process.


CLS 439/887
TXT Of particular metal or alloy:

    Device under subclass 884, as claimed, made of a named metal of mixture of
    metals.

    (1)     Note.  An electrical connector including portions of different,
    specific metals is included in this collection.


CLS 439/888
TXT Having provision for retaining to mating wire (e.g., wire wrap):

    Device under subclass 884 having a particular shape intended to implement
    attachment of a flexible strandlike conductor thereto.


CLS 439/889
TXT Having provision for retaining to mating contact:

    Device under subclass 884 having a particular shape intended to implement
    attachment of a corresponding mating part.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a contact having plural surfaces intended
    to be gripped by a mating device, as by friction, bayonet-type engagement
    or by a helically-arranged threaded engagement.


CLS 439/890
TXT For functioning electrical component (e.g., tube, lamp, fuse, spark plug,
    etc.):

    Device under subclass 884 intended to be a part of a current utilizing
    structure.


CLS 439/891
TXT Multipart contact prong:

    Device under subclass 884 including a male contact* of plural components.


CLS 439/892
TXT DISTINCT COVERING MEANS:

    Device under the class definition comprising covering that is
    distinguishable from the connector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76.1+,  for a preformed panel circuit arrangement within a distinct housing
    spaced therefrom.

    135+,   for an electrical connector with a contact preventer or retractable
    cover part.

    207,    for an electrical connector with a conduit or duct.


CLS 439/893
TXT Covering functioning electrical component (e.g., tube, lamp, fuse, spark
    plug, etc.):

    Device under subclass 892 intended to cover a current utilizing structure.


CLS 439/894
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Device under the class definition not provided for elsewhere.

               CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


    The following subclasses are collections of published disclosures
    pertaining to various specified aspects of the electrical connector art,
    which aspects do not form appropriate bases for subclasses in the forgoing
    classification (i.e., subclasses superior hereto in the schedule), wherein
    the original copy of a patent is placed on the basis of proximate function
    of the apparatus.  These subclasses assist a search based on remote
    function of the apparatus and may be of further assistance to the searcher,
    either as a starting point in searching this class or as an indication of
    further related fields of search inside or outside the class.  Thus, there
    is here provided a second access for retrieval of a limited number of types
    of disclosures.

    (1)     Note.  A disclosure is placed in these subclasses for its value as
    reference and may lead to appropriate main or secondary fields of search,
    without regard to its original classification or its claimed subject matter.

    (2)     Note.  The disclosures found in the following subclasses are
    examples, only, of the indicated subject matter, and in no instance do they
    represent the entire extent of the prior art.


CLS 439/901
TXT CONNECTOR HOOD OR SHELL:

    Art collection under the class definition directed to structure to either
    partially or totally encase an electrical connector.


CLS 439/902
TXT Angularly disposed contact and conductor:

    Art collection under subclass 901 wherein the contact is encased in a
    member such that the contact extends in a direction different from that of
    the conductor attached thereto.


CLS 439/903
TXT Special latch for insert:

    Art collection under subclass 901 provided with a detent for engagement
    with a portion of the electrical connector to effectively complete
    encasement thereof.


CLS 439/904
TXT Multipart shell:

    Art collection under subclass 901 intended to totally enclose an electrical
    connector and comprised of a plurality of components.


CLS 439/905
TXT Axially joined sections:

    Art collection under subclass 904 comprising an assembly having a generally
    axial extent and wherein the assembly is made of a plurality of components
    aligned and attached together therealong.


CLS 439/906
TXT Longitudinally divided:

    Art collection under subclass 904 comprising an assembly having a general
    axial extent and wherein the assembly is made of a plurality of components
    laterally disposed thereabout.


CLS 439/907
TXT CONTACT HAVING THREE CONTACT SURFACES, INCLUDING DIVERSE SURFACE:

    Art collection under the class definition comprising a contact* having a
    first portion of a first physical configuration for electricity
    transmitting engagement with a mating contact; including a second portion
    of a different physical configuration for electricity transmitting
    engagement with distinct mating contact; and including a third portion for
    electricity transmitting engagement with a  mating contact.


CLS 439/908
TXT CONTACT HAVING TWO CONTACT SURFACES FOR ELECTRICAL CONNECTION ON OPPOSITE
    SIDES OF INSULATIVE BODY:

    Art collection under class definition comprising a contact* for use with a
    supporting nonconductive member such that the contact has a surface on one
    surface of the nonconductive member for making electricity transmitting
    engagement with another mating contact.


CLS 439/909
TXT MEDICAL USE OR ATTACHED TO HUMAN BODY:

    Art collection under the class definition to be used in treating or testing
    a living person or to be secured for support to a portion of a living
    person.


CLS 439/910
TXT OBSERVATION AIDE, E.G., TRANSPARENT MATERIAL, WINDOW IN HOUSING:

    Art collection under the class definition intended to assist in optical
    viewing.


CLS 439/911
TXT SAFETY, E.G., ELECTRICAL DISCONNECTION REQUIRED BEFORE OPENING HOUSING:

    Art collection under the class definition intended to make use of the
    device less dangerous.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a device for disconnection of the
    electrical circuitry before disconnection of the housing structure to avoid
    exposure of a surface of electrical potential.


CLS 439/912
TXT WITH TESTING MEANS:

    Art collection under the class definition to be combined with structure for
    making some sort of study.


CLS 439/913
TXT CONDITION DETERMINING DEVICE, E.G., OXYGEN SENSOR, ACCELEROMETER, IONIZER
    CHAMBER, THERMOCOUPLE:

    Art collection under the class definition including provision for
    attachment to a member for detection of the environment.


CLS 439/914
TXT FOR FLASHBULB OR CAMERA (INCLUDING FLASH CUBE):

    Art collection under the class definition especially adapted for use with
    an instantly consumed lamp or of other use relating to a camera.


CLS 439/915
TXT AUXILIARY DEVICE FOR EXISTING PLUG:

    Art collection under the class definition for use with a particular male
    coupling part*


CLS 439/916
TXT ANTENNA:

    Art collection under the class definition of particular use to a member for
    receiving or transmitting electromagnetic waves.


CLS 439/917
TXT ALARM CIRCUIT, E.G., WINDOW AFFIXED FOIL:

    Art collection under the class definition intended to be used to trigger a
    device for notification of an emergency situation.


CLS 439/918
TXT MULTILAMP VEHICLE PANEL:

    Art collection under the class definition including a generally planar body
    for supporting plural luminaries on a surface of a transportation device.


CLS 439/919
TXT FOR TREATMENT BY ELECTRICAL CURRENT, E.G., MAGNET, BATTERY CHARGER, HEATER,
    WELDER, ETC.:

    Art collection under the class definition including provision to modify
    other structure by passing electricity through the provided member.


CLS 439/920
TXT FOR INTERCONNECTING RIGID PIPELIKE BODIES, E.G., WAVE GUIDES:

    Art collection under the class definition particularly adapted to the
    joining of self-sustaining tubular members.


CLS 439/921
TXT TRANSFORMER BUSHING TYPE OR HIGH VOLTAGE UNDERGROUND CONNECTOR:

    Art collection under the class definition of particular utility in
    electrically sealing the connector of a member for changing voltage in an
    alternating current supply or of connecting "high voltage" (i.e., measured
    in thousands of volts) electrical conductors intended to be buried beneath
    the surface of the earth.


CLS 439/922
TXT TELEPHONE SWITCHBOARD PROTECTOR:

    Art collection under the class definition of particular utility in the
    housing of a telephone switchboard housing.


CLS 439/923
TXT SEPARATION OR DISCONNECTION AID:

    Art collection under class definition comprising structure to assist in
    forcing one electrical connector out of coupling condition with a mating
    connector.


CLS 439/924.1
TXT CONTACTS ARRANGED FOR SEQUENTIAL CONNECTION:

    Art collection under the class definition including a plurality of
    contacts* arranged so that upon bringing the connector into engagement with
    a mating connector the contacts will make electrical engagement one after
    the other in a predicted order.


CLS 439/924.2
TXT With contact preventer to require joining in a given sequence:

    Art collection under art collection 924.1 wherein a contact of a first
    connector engages the corresponding contact of a mating connector, then a
    contact of a second connector engages the corresponding contact of the
    mating connector, and thus continuing in this sequence until all mating
    contacts of all the connectors are engaged.

    (1)     Note.  The mating connector engaged by the first connector may be
    the same assembly as the mating connector engaged by the second connector.


CLS 439/925
TXT FLOOR MOUNTED, E.G., UNDER CARPET:

    Art collection under the class definition of particular utility to be used
    on the floor of a room to be occupied by a person.


CLS 439/926
TXT WITHIN MACHINE CASING OR MOTOR HOUSING (CONNECTOR WITHIN CASING WALL):

    Art collection under the class definition intended to be used inside
    structure encasing a distinguishable appliance, especially a prime mover.


CLS 439/927
TXT CONDUCTIVE GASKET:

    Art collection under the class definition comprising a member intended to
    seal or cushion two members, which member is capable of transmitting
    electrical current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, cross-reference art collection 919 for a seal including an
    electrical feature.


CLS 439/928
TXT MODULAR ELECTRICALLY INTERENGAGING PARTS, E.G., STOVE WITH REPLACEABLE
    HEATING ELEMENTS FORMED ON COUPLING PARTS:

    Art collection under the class definition of physical shape to mesh with
    specially provided adjacent structure.


CLS 439/928.1
TXT Plug-in carrier or adapter for removable component (e.g., "hard drive" for
    computer):

    Art collection under art collection 928 including an easily removed member
    for holding a substantial portion of electrical "hardware" to be used as a
    portion of an electronic device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55+,    for a printed circuit board with detachable electric contacts,
    generally.


CLS 439/929
TXT CONNECTING BASE PLATE OR SHELF TYPE HOLDER:

    Art collection under the class definition of particular utility in making
    electrical engagement with a supporting structure comprising the lower
    portion of a device or an underlying planar member intended to support.


CLS 439/930
TXT COUPLING PART WHEREIN CONTACT IS COMPRISED OF A WIRE OR BRUSH:

    Art collection under the class definition including a contact* comprised of
    a single or a grouping of filaments.


CLS 439/931
TXT CONDUCTIVE COATING:

    Art collection under the class definition comprising an electrical
    connector including a layer of electricity transmitting material, applied
    thereto in liquid or vapor form.


CLS 439/932
TXT HEAT SHRINK MATERIAL:

    Art collection under the class definition including a component made of
    material having a memory such that upon the application of heat the
    component will contract to a prior size.


CLS 439/933
TXT SPECIAL INSULATION:

    Art collection under the class definition including nonconductive material
    of some recognizable feature that is unique.


CLS 439/934
TXT High voltage barrier (e.g., surface arcing or corona preventing insulator):

    Art collection under subclass 933 comprising a nonconducting member
    intended to physically block the flow of an arc through space or across the
    surface thereof.


CLS 439/935
TXT Glass or ceramic contact pin holder:

    Art collection under subclass 933 made of solid quartz-type material
    intended to isolate and physically support a male electrical contact*.


CLS 439/936
TXT Potting material or coating (e.g., grease, insulative coating, sealant, or
    adhesive):

    Art collection under subclass 933 comprising material intended to flow into
    an electrical connector and electrically isolate the components thereof.


CLS 439/937
TXT Plural insulators in strip form:

    Art collection under subclass 933 comprising a plurality of nonconducting
    members connected together, one after the other, which may be used in this
    format or may be served for independent use.


CLS 439/938.1
TXT CATHODIC PROTECTION OF STRUCTURE (E.G., SHIP HULL):

    Art collection under the class definition of particular utility in the
    application of a member for oxidation so that a more valued structure will
    not be oxidized by electrical potential generated by the presence of
    different metals.


CLS 439/939
TXT WITH GROUNDING TO METAL MOUNTING PANEL:

    Art collection under the class definition including means to mount and
    electrically connect a connector to a sheet of metallic material.


CLS 439/940
TXT INCLUDING PROVISION FOR MECHANICAL LIFTING OR MANIPULATION (E.G., FOR
    VACUUM LIFTING):

    Art collection under the class definition including an electrical connector
    combined with or having (a) particular means to be engaged by an device or
    (b) a particular  implement that is separate from the connector for
    maneuvering the connector randomly into assembly and connection with
    another connector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    476.1+, for a handle or distinct manipulating means intended for manual
    utilization.


CLS 439/941
TXT CROSSTALK SUPPRESSION:

    Art collection under the class definition including a connector having
    contacts or conductors specifically arranged with respect to one another to
    reduce generation of induced current therebetween.


CLS 439/942
TXT COMBLIKE RETAINER FOR CONDUCTOR:

    Art collection under the class definition comprising a barlike device
    having plural slots, each of which is intended to grip an
    electricity-conducting strand so that force on the strand is not
    transmitted to the electrical connection to which the strand is attached.


CLS 439/943
TXT INCLUDING PROVISION FOR PRESSING CONTACT INTO PCB HOLE:

    Art collection under the class definition including a structure
    particularly adapted to force the contact portion of an electrical
    connector into an opening in a printed circuit board.


CLS 439/944
TXT COAXIAL CONNECTOR HAVING CIRCUIT-INTERRUPTING PROVISION EFFECTED BY MATING
    OR HAVING "DEAD" CONTACT ACTIVATED AFTER MATING:

    Art collection under the class definition particularly adapted to use with
    a coaxial cable comprising an electrical connector (a) including a
    characteristic intended to modify the flow of electrical current upon the
    making of the connection, other than that effected by the connection, or
    (b) including an electricity-transmitting member intended not to be
    connected to a source of electrical current before mating with
    corresponding electricity-transmitting member of a cooperating connector,
    but to be so connected to a source of electrical current after mating.

    (1)     Note.  Under clause (b) of this definition the "dead" contact may
    be actuated by sliding within the connector to  make engagement with
    another contact that is "live" (i.e., charged with electrical current).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188,    for an official subclass directed to the same structure, but not
    necessarily for use with a coaxial cable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity: Circuit Makers and Breakers, for an electrical
    connector assembly combined with a switch, generally; especially subclasses
    51+ for an electrical connector combined with a switch that is actuated
    upon application of the connector with a mating connector, wherein the
    switch is remote from the connector assembly or is functional to actuate a
    distinct electrical circuit. See the line expressed under section III of
    the Class 439 definition.


CLS 439/945
TXT ADAPTER FOR PCB OR CARTRIDGE:

    Art collection under the class definition comprising a member including a
    male electrical connector adapted to be received by a cooperating connector
    (e.g., by a computer module) and including a connector particularly adapted
    to receive electrical contacts at the edge of a printed circuit board.

    (1)     Note.  The device of this subclass may serve to extend the point of
    electrical connection of a PCB to a somewhat remote location.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55+,    for a printed circuit board with detachable electric contacts,
    generally.


CLS 439/946
TXT MEMORY CARD CARTRIDGE:

    Art collection under the class definition comprising the electrical
    connector of an integrated circuit module.


CLS 439/947
TXT PCB MOUNTED CONNECTOR WITH GROUND TERMINAL:

    Art collection under the class definition comprising a printed circuit
    board having a specific contact for engaging a member of zero electrical
    potential.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55+,    for a printed circuit board with detachable electric contacts,
    generally.


CLS 439/948
TXT CONTACT OR CONNECTOR WITH INSERTION DEPTH LIMITER:

    Art collection under the class definition comprising an electrical
    connector having particular means to prevent excessive penetration of the
    connector with a mating connector or having particular means to prevent
    excessive penetration of a conductor intended to be permanently united with
    the connector.


CLS 439/949
TXT JUNCTION BOX WITH BUSBAR FOR PLUG-SOCKET-TYPE INTERCONNECTION WITH
    RECEPTACLE:

    Art collection under the class definition comprising a container for an
    electrical "outlet" in which there is an additional female connector
    intended to receive an interfitting connector from the outlet.


CLS 439/950
TXT ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR ADAPTED TO TRANSMIT ELECTRICITY TO MATING CONNECTOR
    WITHOUT PHYSICAL CONTACT (E.G., BY INDUCTION, MAGNETISM, OR ELECTROSTATIC
    FIELD):

    Art collection under the class definition comprising an electrical
    connector intended to cause electrical current to pass to a mating
    connector by magnetic field effects or by emission of electrons across a
    space between the connectors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 375+ for a system controlled by a
    data-bearing record in which electrical energy is induced to flow between
    two members that are in the proximity of each other, but are not actually
    touching each other.  Also, search subclasses 435+ for a sensor for
    detecting, without making physical contact with, another member that is in
    the proximity.


CLS 439/951
TXT PCB HAVING DETAILED LEADING EDGE:

    Art collection under the class definition comprising a printed circuit
    board having electrical contacts intended to be connected with a
    cooperating member, including structural limitations of the portion of the
    board advanced toward the cooperating member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55+     for a printed circuit board with detachable electric contacts,
    generally.


CLS 439/952
TXT JUMPER FOR USE WITH SPECIFIC APPARATUS:

    Art collection under the class definition comprising an electrical
    connector with a conductor intended for use with a particularly described,
    other structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189,    for an electrical connector with or comprising a removable circuit
    modifying  arrangement.  Such devices may be removed to prevent use of the
    apparatus from which it was attached, thus functioning as an electrical key.

    507+,   for an electrical "jumper," generally.


CLS 439/953
TXT WITH LATCH ROD TO BE RETAININGLY RECEIVED BY OPENING OF MATING CONNECTOR:

    Art collection under the class definition having an elongated retaining
    means intended to be inserted in a receptacle in a cooperating electrical
    connector, then (a) moved to secure the connector to the cooperating
    connector or (b) effected by moving means in the receptacle to secure the
    connector to the cooperating connector.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this collection is a "bayonet rod."

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    296+,   for an electrical connector having a distinct retaining means to
    hold it to another electrical connector.


CLS 439/954
TXT SPECIAL ORIENTATION OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR:

    Art collection under the class definition of a particular shape for a
    particular utilization.

    (1)     Note.  The particular shape of the electrical connector of this art
    collection may lessen interference of pliable conductors extending away
    from the connector or permit closer spacing of plural, independent
    connectors.

    (2)     Note.  The particular shape of the electrical connector of this art
    collection may aid in drainage of fluid.


CLS 439/955
TXT INCLUDING ELECTRONIC IDENTIFIER OR CODING MEANS:

    Art collection under the class definition including provision to digitally
    read information on a mating connector, or a connector carrying such
    digital information to be read by the mating connector, so that mating can
    be effected only if preselected information is received.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a connector having provision to read a
    bar code on the mating conductor or a conductor  having a bar code to be
    read by the mating conductor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135+,   for an electrical connector having a contact preventer, generally.

    489+,   for an electrical connector having an indicator to show that
    connection has been made, generally.


CLS 439/956
TXT WITH MEANS TO ALLOW SELECTION OF DIVERSE VOLTAGE OR POLARITY:

    Art collection under the class definition comprising an electrical
    connector having a particular means enabling it to supply different
    voltages outputs or to change the direction of power flowing into a circuit.


CLS 439/957
TXT AUXILIARY CONTACT PART FOR CIRCUIT ADAPTATION:

    Art collection under the class definition including an electrical connector
    that is not a "coupling part" (usually a single contact), but that is to be
    attached to another connector for affecting its manner of use or for
    providing a circuit tap or for providing repair of the connector.


CLS 440/
TTL MARINE PROPULSION

CLS 440/
TXT This class includes and is limited to devices that relate to and have for
    their object means other than sails for moving a vessel through the water.
    Included are all types of propellers acting or reacting upon the water or
    atmosphere and all inventions for moving tows not otherwise classified.

    To be proper for this class there must be significantly claimed vessel
    structure or a claimed modification to the vessel structure to accommodate
    the propulsion device.  If no more vessel structure is claimed than is
    necessary to mount the propulsion device, the device should be classified
    in the proper motive power class. This class, however, takes outboard motor
    types of propulsion devices regardless of claimed structure.

    Inventions pertaining to the structure or details of boats and skimming or
    walking devices (e.g., toboggans, water skis, etc.), are classified in
    Class 441, Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices., unless features are claimed
    to cause such boats or other devices to submerge and resurface at will, in
    which latter case they will be found in Class 114, Ships, subclasses 312+;
    those pertinent to structure or details of ships are classified in Class
    114.

    (1)     Note.  The term "vessel" in the definition may include a person or
    animal.  Mere aquatic devices secured to or held by a person or animal to
    increase the effective contact between the user and the liquid and thereby
    cause faster or farther propulsion through the liquid by the user's
    swimming strokes are not included.  For such devices, see Class 441, Buoys,
    Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclasses 55+.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 416, Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers),
    appropriate subclasses for an impeller of the type there classified wherein
    the marine vessel is not significantly claimed, and see III, A under the
    class definition of Class 416 for a detailed statement of the line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, for reaction motors per se not limited specifically
    to propelling a vessel in water.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, for transmissions having no specific
    marine housing or no more than a nominal load.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), for the combination of
    an impeller and a marine vessel wherein the impeller is arranged to propel
    the vessel and no more structure of the vessel is claimed than is necessary
    to mount the impeller inclusive of any impeller motor or drive means.  Any
    additional recitation of vessel structure or any modification of the vessel
    will require classification in Class 440.  See the class definition,
    section III,A of Class 416 for a detailed statement of the class line.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, for planetary
    gear transmission having no more than a nominal load.



    DEFINITION OF TERMS

    The following terms or words, used throughout the titles and definitions
    are set forth with the meaning each is to have in this class.

    ENGINE

    A device which converts thermal energy into mechanical energy or power to
    produce force or motion.

    MOTOR

    A device which receives and modifies electrical energy or energy from some
    natural source in order to produce force or motion.

    MOTIVE FORCE

    Any force used to impart motion.

    PADDLE

    A device used to propel a vessel in the water consisting of a broad fairly
    flat blade that is dipped vertically or near vertically into the water.

    PROPELLING MEANS

    The element of the propulsion unit which acts upon the surrounding fluid
    (air or water) to cause the vessel to move.

    PROPULSION UNIT

    The total combination of all elements including the engine, the propelling
    means, the casing, etc., involved in moving a vessel.

    REACTING SURFACE

    The area or face of the propelling means which directly displaces the
    surrounding fluid.


CLS 440/1
TXT MEANS TO CONTROL THE SUPPLY OF ENERGY RESPONSIVE TO A SENSED CONDITION:

    Device under the class definition having means to regulate the supply of
    energy or power used to operate the device or an element thereof, the
    operation of the regulating means in turn being affected by a means which
    detects a characteristic or a change in a characteristic of the device or
    an element thereof or of the surrounding environment.


CLS 440/2
TXT WITH INDICATOR:

    Device under the class definition having means to actuate a signalling
    means such as a guage, dial, meter, etc., which reports the status of a
    propulsion unit.


CLS 440/3
TXT DIVERSE ENGINE MEANS:

    Device under the class definition wherein one propelling means is driven by
    interconnected diverse power means which can power the propelling means
    selectively or simultaneously.


CLS 440/4
TXT PLURAL ENGINES WITH SINGLE PROPELLING MEANS:

    Device under the class definition wherein multiple engine power means of
    similar type provide the motive force for a propelling means.

    (1)     Note.  Turbine sets which make up the power means for a propelling
    means are considered single engines.


CLS 440/5
TXT HYDRAULIC FLUID DRIVE FOR PROPELLING MEANS:

    Device under the class definition wherein a liquid under pressure drives an
    impeller which rotates a drive shaft to supply the motive force to a
    propelling means.


CLS 440/6
TXT ELECTRIC DRIVE FOR PROPELLING MEANS:

    Device under the class definition wherein an electrically powered motor
    supplies the motive force to a propelling means.


CLS 440/7
TXT With foot control:

    Device under subclass 6 wherein the electrically powered motor is regulated
    by a means operated by the foot of an occupant of the vessel.


CLS 440/8
TXT WIND DRIVEN MOTORS:

    Device under the class definition wherein a motor driven by naturally
    moving air provides the power for a propelling means.


CLS 440/9
TXT WAVE POWERED PROPELLING MEANS: Device under the class definition wherein
    the motive force for a propelling means is derived from a motor which
    reacts to the undulations on the water surface or the motion imparted to
    the vessel by those undulations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 495+ for motors which depend for operation
    on the buoyancy of a fluid or on the vertical component of tides and waves.


CLS 440/10
TXT By oscillating weight:

    Device under subclass 9 wherein the motor to drive the propelling means
    consists of a weight which oscillates due to the undulation of the water
    surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, and Animal Powered, subclasses 29 and 30.


CLS 440/11
TXT POWERED FROM LAND VEHICLE SUPPORTED BY VESSEL:

    Device under the class definition comprising a watercraft structure
    provided with propelling means and supporting a ground traversing vehicle
    thereon; the propelling means being directly driven by a drive connection
    with the motive means of the ground traversing vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclasses 60 and 70 for canal and ferry boats.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclasses 35+ for vehicle
    rafts, per se.


CLS 440/12
TXT Land vehicle is two-wheel type:

    Device under subclass 11 wherein the ground traversing vehicle is a
    bicycle, motorcycle, or the like.


CLS 440/13
TXT OSCILLATING PROPELLING MEANS:

    Device under the class definition wherein the motive force for the vessel
    is produced by a back and forth movement of the propelling means.


CLS 440/14
TXT Fishtail motion propelling means:

    Device under subclass 13 wherein the propelling means moves through the
    water with a side-to-side or whipping motion, generally imitating the
    motion of the tail of a fish.


CLS 440/15
TXT Flexible:

    Device under subclass 14 wherein the reacting surface which comes in
    contact with the water is made of a pliant material.


CLS 440/16
TXT Moving wave propeller:

    Device under subclass 13 wherein the propelling means comprises a structure
    which undulates in the manner of a traveling wave.


CLS 440/17
TXT Having nonpropelling cycle segment:

    Device under subclass 13 wherein the propelling means supplies no motive
    force on one portion of its back and forth movement.


CLS 440/18
TXT Piston and cylinder:

    Device under subclass 17 wherein the propelling means is a fluid motor, the
    return stroke normally being the nonpropelling cycle portion.


CLS 440/19
TXT With means to move propelling element to nonpropelling position:

    Device under subclass 17 wherein a means is provided to shift the
    propelling element from its working position to its nonworking position.


CLS 440/20
TXT With reversing means:

    Device under subclass 17 wherein a means is provided to invert the
    propelling means in such a manner that the portion of the back and forth
    motion which supplies no motive force and the portion of the back and forth
    motion which supplies motive force can be interchanged.


CLS 440/21
TXT OPERATOR POWERED DRIVE FOR PROPELLING MEANS:

    Device under the class definition wherein the motive force for the
    propelling means is derived from the physical effort exerted by the
    occupant of the vessel and transmitted to the propelling means by some
    intermediate means.


CLS 440/22
TXT Rocking watercraft:

    Device under subclass 21 wherein the motive force of a propelling means is
    obtained by a to-and-fro motion of the vessel imparted thereto by the
    occupant of the vessel.


CLS 440/23
TXT Fluid pump:

    Device under subclass 21 wherein the motive force is produced by hydraulic
    pressure acting directly or indirectly on the surrounding water, which
    pressure is produced by an operator powered hydraulic impelling means.


CLS 440/24
TXT Having reciprocating pull cable:

    Device under subclass 21 wherein the motive force is transmitted to a
    propelling means by means of a strandlike member moved alternately backward
    and forward.


CLS 440/25
TXT Sliding handle or pedal:

    Device under subclass 21 wherein the motive force is transmitted to a
    propelling means by means of a lever operated by either the hand or foot of
    the occupant wherein the lever is moving within a guide means.


CLS 440/26
TXT Rotary cranking arm:

    Device under subclass 21 wherein the motive force is transmitted to a
    propelling means by means of a revolving arm or lever.


CLS 440/27
TXT Plural-crank type:

    Device under subclass 26 wherein the motive force is transmitted to a
    propelling means by means of the rotation of multiple offset segments of a
    revolving rod.


CLS 440/28
TXT Having flexible drive shaft:

    Device under subclass 26 wherein the motive force is transmitted from an
    actuator to a propelling means through bendable rotating elongated means.


CLS 440/29
TXT Having endless drive member:

    Device under subclass 26 wherein the motive force is transmitted from an
    actuator to a propelling means through a continuous band entrained about
    wheellike guides.


CLS 440/30
TXT Chain and sprocket:

    Device under subclass 29 wherein the continuous band is a chain and the
    wheellike guides are toothed wheels.


CLS 440/31
TXT Including gear means:

    Device under subclass 26 wherein the motive force is transmitted from the
    rotary crank to the propelling means by means of interengaged toothed
    members.


CLS 440/32
TXT Lever with connecting linkage:

    Device under subclass 21 wherein the motive force is transmitted to a
    propelling means by means of a bar that oscillates about a pivot to
    transmit the force to a propelling means through an intermediate connecting
    rod.


CLS 440/33
TXT TOWING:

    Device under the class definition wherein the propulsion means is a means
    provided to haul or pull a vessel in a canal or river or upon the sea or
    other bodies of water.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclasses 242+ for towing devices other than propelling
    means.

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, subclass 12 for electric
    railway systems.


CLS 440/34
TXT Cable system:

    Device under subclass 33 wherein the propulsion means includes the use of a
    strong strandlike member or a strandlike member is engaged by a device on
    the vessel to pull the vessel through the water.

    (1)     Note.  The strandlike member may be either fixed or movable.  If
    movable, the vessel is provided with means for securing the cable thereto,
    and if fixed, the vessel has traction means for hauling the cable in and
    paying it out.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, subclass 12 when electrical
    devices are involved.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 264+ for a driven, cable-pulling device for hauling or hoisting
    a load.


CLS 440/35
TXT Track system:

    Device under subclass 33 wherein the propulsion means comprises tracks upon
    which a traction device or vessel runs.


CLS 440/36
TXT Ground wheel or poler:

    Device under subclass 33 wherein the propulsion means comprises traction
    wheels which are used to traverse the bed or bottom of the canal or a long
    cylindrical piece of wood or metal attached to the vessel contacts or digs
    into the bed or bottom of the canal.


CLS 440/37
TXT AIR PROPELLED BOAT:

    Device under the class definition wherein the propelling means is a fan or
    bladed member mounted entirely above the waterline which reacts with the
    air to produce the motive force.


CLS 440/38
TXT JET DRIVE:

    Device under the class definition wherein the motive force is produced by a
    stream of fluid forcefully issuing from an outlet of the propulsion means
    which reacts with the fluid surrounding the propelling means thereby
    causing the vessel to move.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 221+ for reaction propulsion devices
    wherein no more structure of the vessel is claimed than is necessary to
    mount the device.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 127.1+ and
    265.11+ for a reaction motor discharge nozzle, per se, as defined and
    limited in (1) Note and (2) Note under subclass 265.11.


CLS 440/39
TXT Auxiliary use of propulsive fluid:

    Device under subclass 38 wherein a portion of the fluid stream may be
    diverted for a subsidiary use other than propulsion, e.g., firefighting.


CLS 440/40
TXT Direction control for fluid jet:

    Device under subclass 38 wherein a means is provided to guide the fluid
    stream into different directions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclass 228 for thrust direction modifiers for power
    plants not involving significant vessel structure.


CLS 440/41
TXT With bucket or clamshell-type reversing means:

    Device under subclass 40 wherein the means to guide the fluid stream is a
    scoop mounted exteriorly of the hull and selectively movable to intercept
    and redirect the flow of the jet.


CLS 440/42
TXT Pivoted outlet:

    Device under subclass 40 wherein the means to guide the fluid stream into
    different directions is a projecting discharge pipe which can be rotated or
    pivoted.


CLS 440/43
TXT Pivoted vane:

    Device under subclass 40 wherein the means to guide the fluid stream into
    different directions is a surface across which the fluid moves which can be
    pivoted to deflect the fluid stream.


CLS 440/44
TXT Propulsion fluid is pressurized gas:

    Device under subclass 38 wherein the motive force is provided by the
    ejection of a pressurized gas such as air or steam.


CLS 440/45
TXT Produced by combustion:

    Device under subclass 44 wherein the pressurized gas is created as a direct
    result of the burning of a substance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 73+ for pumps of the type which elevate or propel
    one fluid (e.g., liquid) by the ignition of another.


CLS 440/46
TXT Having means to prevent clogging:

    Device under subclass 38 wherein a means is provided to inhibit the
    obstruction of the fluid passageway by foreign material.


CLS 440/47
TXT Having means to increase fluid drive efficiency:

    Device under subclass 38 wherein the discharge pipe can have means to
    improve the fluid flow or the flow passage has additional means to improve
    flow.


CLS 440/48
TXT HELICAL SCREW:

    Device under the class definition wherein the propelling means consists of
    blades which encircle a hub and follow the pattern of a spiral (Archimedes
    screw).

    (1)     Note.  Buoyant helical propelling means are also included in this
    subclass and not in subclass 98, buoyant propelling means.


CLS 440/49
TXT SCREW PROPELLER:

    Device under the class definition consisting of a number of blades so
    inclined that upon rotation the blades tend to follow a helical path
    through the water and thereby drive a vessel in a path parallel to the axis
    of rotation of the blades.

    (1)     Note.  The propellers located here involve more than the structure
    of the propeller element, per se, or otherwise are excluded by definition
    from Class 416, Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers).


CLS 440/50
TXT Variable pitch:

    Device under subclass 49 wherein the angle of attack of the propeller
    blades can be changed.


CLS 440/51
TXT Combined with rudder:

    Device under subclass 49 wherein the screw propeller is an integral part of
    the assembly which includes a vertical blade at the stern of a vessel used
    to change the direction of travel of that vessel when in motion.


CLS 440/52
TXT With vibration dampening:

    Device under subclass 49 wherein means is provided to prevent transmission
    of shocks to the rest of the vessel or to attenuate the quivers produced by
    the engine, the drive shaft, etc.


CLS 440/53
TXT With means effecting or facilitating movement of propulsion unit or a
    segment of the propulsion unit (e.g., tilting or steering):

    Device under subclass 49 wherein a means is provided that moves, assists
    in, or allows the movement of the propulsion unit; this movement may
    include rotation about a vertical and/or horizontal axis or vertical or
    horizontal transitory movement or a combination thereof.


CLS 440/54
TXT With means limited to vertical movement within hull cavity:

    Device under subclass 53 wherein the means to move, assist, or allow the
    movement of the propulsion unit confines the unit only to movement in a
    plane perpendicular to the horizontal, causing the propulsion unit to move
    in and out of a hollow space within the hull.


CLS 440/55
TXT Having restraining means:

    Device under subclass 53 wherein a means is provided to prevent movement of
    the propulsion unit from its normal operating position.


CLS 440/56
TXT With releasing means when propulsion unit hits obstruction:

    Device under subclass 55 wherein a means is provided to unfasten the
    restraining means when the propulsion unit comes in contact with a
    submerged impediment.


CLS 440/57
TXT Having gimbal or universal joint support:

    Device under subclass 53 wherein the means to move or assist in the
    movement of the propulsion unit is a mounting upon which the propulsion
    unit is fastened which permits the unit to pivot or move freely along three
    axes of rotation.


CLS 440/58
TXT Having toothed or threaded member to move propulsion unit or a segment of
    the propulsion unit:

    Device under subclass 53 wherein the means to move or assist in the
    movement of the propulsion unit includes the interengaging projections of
    gears or helical ridges of screws interacting with some complementary
    member.


CLS 440/59
TXT Screw type:

    Device under subclass 58 wherein the threaded member is an helically ridged
    member such as a threaded rod, worm, etc.

    (1)     Note.  The screw may be fixed either on the propulsion unit or on
    the vessel.


CLS 440/60
TXT Rack and pinion:

    Device under subclass 58 wherein the toothed member consists of a bar with
    teeth on one of its sides adapted to engage a gear wheel with a small
    number of teeth to translate circular motion to linear motion or vice versa.


CLS 440/61
TXT Having fluid motor to move propulsion unit or a segment of the propulsion
    unit:

    Device under subclass 53 wherein the means to move, assist, or allow the
    movement of the propulsion unit includes a pneumatic motor.


CLS 440/62
TXT Having pilant member to move propulsion unit or a segment of the propulsion
    unit:

    Device under subclass 53 wherein the means to move, assist, or allow the
    movement of a portion of the propulsion unit includes a cablelike member.


CLS 440/63
TXT Having link or lever to move propulsion unit or a segment of the propulsion
    unit:

    Device under subclass 53 wherein the means to move, assist, or allow the
    movement of the propulsion unit includes an intermediate bar.


CLS 440/64
TXT Having shaft with releasable coupling:

    Device under subclass 53 wherein the propeller is driven by a shaft
    composed of plural sections which are connected together by a separable
    connection.


CLS 440/65
TXT With means to lift propeller when an obstruction is hit:

    Device under subclass 53 wherein a means associated with the propeller is
    provided to move the propeller in an upward direction when said means
    encounters an impediment.


CLS 440/66
TXT Having means to control flow around propeller:

    Device under subclass 49 wherein a structure is provided, mounted, or
    located in the vicinity of the propeller to regulate the stream of fluid
    around the propeller.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, for flow control surfaces
    when no significant vessel structure is claimed.


CLS 440/67
TXT Nozzle (kort-type):

    Device under subclass 66 wherein an annular member in the form of a
    projecting spout completely surrounds the propeller to control the flow
    around the propeller.

    (1)     Note.  These devices differ from a jet drive in that the propeller
    is located at the throat of the nozzle and the flow diverges at the exit.
    The propeller itself drives the vessel through the water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for devices wherein a propeller creates a fluid jet which reacts
    with the surrounding fluid to drive the vessel through the water.


CLS 440/68
TXT Hull channel:

    Device under subclass 66 wherein the means to control the flow around the
    propeller is an elongated passageway with an inlet and an outlet along the
    longitudinal axis of the hull, the propeller being located within or
    proximate the outside of the passageway but always acting at least in part
    on water exteriorly of the passageway.


CLS 440/69
TXT With open bottom:

    Device under subclass 68 wherein the lowermost side of the channel is
    removed.


CLS 440/70
TXT Hull concavity:

    Device under subclass 66 wherein the means to control the flow around the
    propeller is a recess shaped into the hull, generally near the stern, and
    in which the propeller is located.


CLS 440/71
TXT Propeller guard:

    Device under subclass 49 wherein a means outside of a casing for the
    propulsion unit is provided which protects the propeller on at least one
    side from impact with submerged objects.


CLS 440/72
TXT Cage or screen:

    Device under subclass 71 wherein the protecting means comprises an
    enclosure or a mesh surrounding the propeller.


CLS 440/73
TXT Self-clearing:

    Device under subclass 49 wherein a means is provided which is integral with
    or closely adjacent the screw itself which prevents fouling of the screw by
    seaweed, ropelike objects, etc.


CLS 440/74
TXT Shaft braking or locking:

    Device under subclass 49 wherein a means is provided to slow or stop the
    rotation of the propeller shaft or to prevent the shaft from initial
    rotation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 38+, particularly subclasses 40+ for
    propeller shaft brakes that involve means for throttling the steam in
    response to a marine governor.


CLS 440/75
TXT Having transmission:

    Device under subclass 49 wherein a means is provided which is interposed
    between the engine and the propeller for transferring the engine output to
    the propeller.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, for transmissions, per se, with no
    specific marine housing or no more than a nominal load.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, for planetary
    gear transmission, per se.


CLS 440/76
TXT Propulsion unit casing:

    Device under subclass 49 including a sealed enclosure adapted to contain an
    engine, shafting, or interconnecting drive train to supply the motive force
    to the propeller.


CLS 440/77
TXT Cowl:

    Device under subclass 76 wherein the sealed enclosure covers the upper
    portion of the propulsion unit, usually covering the engine.


CLS 440/78
TXT Propeller shaft housing:

    Device under subclass 76 wherein the sealed enclosure covers and contains
    the propeller shaft.


CLS 440/79
TXT Propeller arrangement:

    Device under subclass 49 having a specified connection to the vessel or a
    specified relationship with other propellers.


CLS 440/80
TXT Tandem:

    Device under subclass 79 wherein the propellers are arranged one behind the
    other.


CLS 440/81
TXT On single shaft:

    Device under subclass 80 wherein the propellers are arranged on the same
    propeller shaft.


CLS 440/82
TXT Supporting strut:

    Device under subclass 79 wherein a stengthening brace attaches a propeller
    shaft to the vessel.


CLS 440/83
TXT Shafting:

    Device under subclass 49 wherein significance is attributed to a rotating
    or oscillating straight bar for driving the propeller.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, subclasses 179+ for a rotary torque transmitting shaft of
    general application.


CLS 440/84
TXT ENGINE, MOTOR, OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL MEANS:

    Device under the class definition wherein a means is provided to regulate
    the engine, or motor which produces the power for the propelling means or
    the power transmission connected to the propelling means.


CLS 440/85
TXT For starter means:

    Device under subclass 84 wherein the means to regulate the motive engine
    regulates that section of the engine which initiates the power production.


CLS 440/86
TXT For transmission:

    Device under subclass 84 wherein the means to regulate the engine or power
    transmission regulates the speed or torque of the transmission which
    transfers the force from the engine to the propelling means.


CLS 440/87
TXT For engine speed:

    Device under subclass 84 wherein the means to regulate the engine or motor
    regulates the speed at which the engine or motor output rotates.


CLS 440/88
TXT MEANS FOR HANDLING ENGINE FLUIDS:

    Device under the class definition wherein a means is provided to move
    engine liquids such as lubricants, coolants, etc.


CLS 440/89
TXT Exhaust gas handling means:

    Device under subclass 88 wherein a means is provided to carry away the
    waste products of combustion from the engine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 272+ for power plants with exhaust gas
    handling means without significant vessel structure.


CLS 440/90
TXT PADDLE WHEEL:

    Device under the class definition wherein the means to provide the motive
    force for a vessel is an engine or motor-driven wheel having a number of
    planar water contacting blades extending therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for paddle wheel-type devices
    involving more than the structure of the paddle wheel per se, or which is
    otherwise excluded by definition from Class 416, Fluid Reaction Surfaces
    (i.e., Impellers).


CLS 440/91
TXT Having means to reposition paddle wheel assembly:

    Device under subclass 90 wherein a means is provided to vertically or
    horizontally adjust the paddle wheel as a unit for such purposes as
    steering, etc.


CLS 440/92
TXT Having means to retract paddle or change paddle attitude:

    Device under subclass 90 wherein a means is provided to draw a paddle
    inside the wheel or to adjust the inclination of a paddle relative to the
    wheel.


CLS 440/93
TXT Having means to provide cyclic change of paddle attitude (e.g.,
    voith-schneider):

    Device under subclass 92 wherein the means provided adjusts the inclination
    of the paddles through a repeatable series of different inclinations as it
    is rotated by the wheel.


CLS 440/94
TXT UPRIGHT REMAINING ORBITING PADDLE:

    Device under the class definition wherein a means is provided to move a
    paddle into and out of the water, backward and forward, for a power stroke
    and a return stroke wherein the paddle is maintained in an erect forwardly
    facing attitude at all times.


CLS 440/95
TXT FLEXIBLE ENDLESS PROPELLING MEANS:

    Device under the class definition wherein the means to provide the motive
    force is a pliable, continuous member entrained around a series of
    wheellike objects.


CLS 440/96
TXT With paddle:

    Device under subclass 95 wherein the endless member is fitted with a paddle.


CLS 440/97
TXT Foldable or retractable to nonpropelling position:

    Device under subclass 96 wherein the paddles are capable of being bent back
    upon or withdrawn into the endless member during the nonpropelling portion
    of the cycle.


CLS 440/98
TXT BUOYANT PROPELLING MEANS:

    Device under the class definition wherein the propelling means itself is
    capable of floating or exhibits the tendency to float.

    (1)     Note.  These devices include more than the structure of the
    propeller element, per se, or is otherwise excluded by definition from
    Class 416, Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers).

    (2)     Note.  Buoyant propelling means which is helicoid in shape are
    found in this class, subclass 48, helical screw.


CLS 440/99
TXT Rotating outer hull:

    Device under subclass 98 comprising a pair of hulls, one within the other,
    in which the outer hull, carrying or acting as the propelling means,
    rotates relative to the inner hull.


CLS 440/100
TXT Wheellike:

    Device under subclass 98 wherein the propelling means is in the shape of a
    wheel.


CLS 440/101
TXT OAR OR PADDLE:

    Device under the class definition wherein the propelling means consists of
    a long shaft, used as a lever, with a broad blade at one end.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclasses 69+ for oars
    or paddles, per se.  For a detailed statement of class lines, see Class
    416, Class Definition, section III,A.


CLS 440/102
TXT Aritculated sectional oar or paddle:

    Device under subclass 101 wherein the long shaft is composed of
    interconnected distinct segments joined together permanently or
    semipermanently by means of a pivot connection to operate the distinct
    segments as a unit.


CLS 440/103
TXT Having gear:

    Device under subclass 102 wherein the pivoted joints between the distinct
    segments include toothed members.


CLS 440/104
TXT Support:

    Device under subclass 101 wherein a means is provided to hold an oar or
    paddle on the gunwale of the vessel.


CLS 440/105
TXT Having outrigger:

    Device under subclass 104 wherein the oarlock is mounted on a structure
    extending beyond the gunwale of the vessel.


CLS 440/106
TXT Oarlock:

    Device under subclass 104 wherein a holding means for the oar or paddle is
    a device providing a pivot for the oar projecting above the gunwale.

    (1)     Note.  The holding means in this class is normally a swiveling
    crutchlike or ringlike device.


CLS 440/107
TXT Having oar shaft restraining means:

    Device under subclass 106 wherein a means is provided to secure the long
    shaft of the oar within the oarlock to inhibit unintentional shifting of
    the oar from its operative position in the holding means.


CLS 440/108
TXT Separate mounting means:

    Device under subclass 106 which includes a structure for mounting the
    oarlock to the boat, the structure being separate from the oarlock.


CLS 440/109
TXT Socket type:

    Device under subclass 108 wherein the mounting means comprises a hollow
    part or piece for receiving a part of the oarlock.


CLS 440/110
TXT Having guard for oar:

    Device under subclass 104 comprising a collar encircling the oar shaft.


CLS 440/111
TXT INBOARD ENGINE MOUNT:

    Device under the class definition wherein a means is provided to
    permanently affix the engine or motor of an inboard/outboard propulsion
    system within the hull.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 637+ for supports for vehicle motors.


CLS 440/112
TXT Having thru-hull sealing means:

    Device under subclass 111 wherein a means is provided which allows the
    propeller shaft to pierce the hull, which means separates the engine
    compartment from the water to prevent the influx of the water and which
    means usually includes bearings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 500+ for a dynamic, circumferential, contact seal for
    other than a piston.

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 130+ for a bearing with a seal.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclasses 174 for
    lubricating, sealing, packing, or specific bearing means between impeller
    or shaft and static part.


CLS 440/113
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Device under the class definition not provided for elsewhere but being
    proper for this class.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTION


CLS 440/900
TXT OUTBOARD MOTORS AND OUTDRIVE:

    Devices which reveal interesting and distinct features which are associated
    with portable outboard motors or the outdrive section of an
    inboard/outboard unit.


CLS 441/
TTL BUOYS, RAFTS, AND AQUATIC DEVICES

CLS 441/
TXT This class includes structure and attachments peculiar to mooring buoys,
    marker buoys, container buoys and other buoys; structure and attachment
    peculiar to rafts, and from analogy, to rafting and guiding of floating
    logs and similar material; water rescue apparatus; and other aquatic
    devices.

    Water rescue apparatus include devices maneuvered on or over the water
    surface by one person in order to rescue another person, passenger
    enclosing devices which are not buoys, rafts or boats and garment or other
    type of buoyant members, commonly known as personal flotation devices which
    support a user in the water.

    Aquatic devices include swimming aids to cause faster or farther propulsion
    through the water by the user's own swimming strokes, buoyant or nonbuoyant
    devices which support a user and which are caused by external means to
    roll, skim, glide over or through the water, buoyant underwater viewing
    devices, and other miscellaneous buoyant support devices.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 440, Marine Propulsion, for buoys or other aquatic
    devices comprising a motor propulsion means, or animal or human powered
    propulsion means other than swimming aids as defined in Class 441, subclass
    55.

    (2)     Note.  Lifeboats including those which enclose the passenger are
    classifiable in Class 114, Ships.

    (3)     Note.  A buoyant device made to simulate an animal, fish, fowl,
    etc., or any part thereof, where such simulation is claimed, is proper for
    Class 472.  However, where such simulation is disclosed but not claimed,
    classification of the buoyant device is proper for Class 441.  See the (2)
    Note under subclass 129 of Class 441 for a statement of this line.

    (4)     Note.  Class 441, subclass 65 takes all the skimming devices (skis,
    sleds, toboggans, etc.) which by claim or by disclosure may be used on
    water, even though also useable on snow or ice. Class 280, Land Vehicles,
    takes those skimming devices which are useable only on snow or ice.


CLS 441/1
TXT BUOY:

    Device under the class definition comprising a distinctly shaped, anchored
    device, such as cans, spars, nun, etc., especially adapted to float in
    water for the purpose of indicating a navigable channel, anchorage, some
    impediment or hazard to navigation, some object below the surface of the
    water, to provide a mooring or a support for some object, or to perform
    some other water related function.


CLS 441/2
TXT With means to call buoy to surface:

    Buoy under subclass 1 normally lying submerged under a body of water and
    including means to cause the buoy to surface in response to a transmitted
    signal.


CLS 441/3
TXT For mooring a vessel:

    Buoy under subclass 1 normally anchored to the seabed and having means for
    securing a marine vessel thereto.


CLS 441/4
TXT Having liquid cargo transfer means:

    Mooring buoy under subclass 3 including a fluid cargo conduit for
    transfering liquid cargo to a marine vessel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 236.1 for whole system combinations for
    offshore fluid handling; and subclass 615 for fluid handling systems not
    involving buoys having two or more sections joined for relative movement to
    assume various delivery or nonuse positions.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclass 279 for specific structure of the connection between the filling
    head and the receiver.


CLS 441/5
TXT Having swivel coupling for cargo conduit: Mooring buoy under subclass 4
    wherein a cargo conduit has a pipe fitting permitting a swinging movement
    of the marine vessel relative to the buoy.


CLS 441/6
TXT Marker buoy:

    Buoy under subclass 1 adapted to be anchored to a vessel or location on or
    under the waters surface to draw attention to the vessel or location.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 107 for audible signalling devices
    which can be placed on a buoy.


CLS 441/7
TXT Having means to release buoy upon submergence:

    Buoy under subclass 6 secured to a body or vessel by means which upon the
    sinking of the body or vessel is released to permit the buoy to surface and
    mark its location.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclasses 326+ for submersible devices which have buoys
    that can be released.


CLS 441/8
TXT Water soluble or water weakened member:
    Buoy under subclass 7 wherein the buoy is attached to a body or vessel by
    securing means soluble in, dissolved in, or weakened by water such that
    upon contact with water the securing means is disabled thereby releasing
    the buoy.


CLS 441/9
TXT Gas assisted:

    Buoy under subclass 7 wherein the release of the buoy is assisted by a gas
    and wherein the release or generation of the gas is initiated by sinking of
    the body or vessel.


CLS 441/10
TXT Responsive to hydrostatic pressure:

    Buoy under subclass 7 wherein the securing means is activated by a device
    which is sensitive to changes in liquid pressure.


CLS 441/11
TXT With signalling device:

    Buoy under subclass 6 wherein means to draw attention to the buoy and its
    location is affixed thereon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, signalling devices, per se.


CLS 441/12
TXT Audible:

    Buoy under subclass 11 wherein the attention drawing means is an audible
    signal, e.g., bell, whistle, etc.


CLS 441/13
TXT Illuminating:

    Buoy under subclass 11 wherein the attention drawing means produces light,
    e.g., lamps, torches, etc.


CLS 441/14
TXT By combustion of fluid:

    Buoy under subclass 13 wherein the light is produced by burning of a liquid
    or gas.


CLS 441/15
TXT Fluid produced by chemical reaction with water:

    Buoy under subclass 14 wherein the combustible liquid or gas is generated
    by the reaction of a chemical substance with water.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclasses 1+ for acetylene
    generators using chemical reactions not adapted specifically to a marine
    environment.


CLS 441/16
TXT Electric light:

    Buoy under subclass 13 wherein the light is produced by an electric lamp.


CLS 441/17
TXT Having water activated switch:

    Buoy under subclass 16 wherein the electric lamp is controlled by a
    mechanical means which makes or breaks a circuit upon its submergence.


CLS 441/18
TXT Having water activated battery:

    Buoy under subclass 16 wherein the electric lamp is powered by an
    electrochemical battery activated by the water in which the buoy is located.


CLS 441/19
TXT Smoke producing:

    Buoy under subclass 11 wherein the attention directing means generates a
    smoke signal.


CLS 441/20
TXT Reflecting means:

    Buoy under subclass 11 wherein the attention directing device includes a
    surface capable of reflecting a light or a radar beam.


CLS 441/21
TXT Having means to control attitude or position:

    Buoy under subclass 1 provided with means to control vertical, horizontal,
    or rotational movement of the buoy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclasses 330+ for submersible devices having means for
    attitude control.


CLS 441/22
TXT Fluid reaction surface:

    Buoy under subclass 21 wherein a surface is provided which reacts with a
    fluid to produce a force for controlling the attitude or position of the
    buoy.


CLS 441/23
TXT Tether:

    Buoy under subclass 21 wherein a pliant fastening line is used to place the
    buoy at a predetermined location.


CLS 441/24
TXT Having playout means:

    Buoy under subclass 23 wherein means are provided for storing and feeding
    out the pliant line.


CLS 441/25
TXT Having means to control playout:

    Buoy under subclass 24 wherein the playout means includes means for
    regulating the amount of line played out, the rate of playout, or the
    tension on the line after it has played out.


CLS 441/26
TXT Reel for tether:

    Buoy under subclass 24 wherein the line is wound on a spool from which it
    is played out.


CLS 441/27
TXT Having seat for buoy:

    Buoy under subclass 24 wherein means is provided on a marine body or a
    vessel which conforms to a portion of the buoy and upon or within which the
    buoy rests.


CLS 441/28
TXT Having ballast means:

    Buoy under subclass 21 wherein the means to control the vertical,
    horizontal, or rotational movement includes a heavy material intended to
    alter the draft or stability of the buoy.


CLS 441/29
TXT Variable ballast:

    Buoy under subclass 28 wherein the ratio of heavy material to buoyancy
    producing agent may be varied.


CLS 441/30
TXT Inflatable:

    Buoy under subclass 1 wherein the body of the buoy is expanded from a
    collapsed position by a gaseous medium.


CLS 441/31
TXT Having chemical reactor to produce gas:

    Buoy under subclass 30 wherein the pressurized gas is generated on site by
    the chemical interaction of a plurality of substances.


CLS 441/32
TXT Container type:

    Buoy under subclass 1 provided with a space therein for storage of
    materials.


CLS 441/33
TXT With means to release transponder, sensor, etc.:

    Buoy under subclass 32 wherein a transponder, hydrophone, sensor, or other
    related instrument is contained within the storage space and means for
    selectively releasing such instruments from the storage space is provided.


CLS 441/34
TXT Storm oil distributor:

    Buoy under subclass 32 wherein oil for distribution on the surface of a
    body of water to calm wave activity is contained in the storage space and a
    means for distributing the oil is provided.


CLS 441/35
TXT RAFT:

    Buoyant device under the class definition which is free floating, of
    shallow draft and little free board, and has a platform or floor for
    supporting a user.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 706+ for those devices commonly known as air
    mattresses, per se.


CLS 441/36
TXT With signal device:

    Device under subclass 35 including an attention getting device in the form
    of a flag, light, etc.


CLS 441/37
TXT Having water reactant stabilizing means:

    Device under subclass 35 including means to maintain a raft by limiting the
    effects of wave action on the raft.


CLS 441/38
TXT With shelter:

    Device under subclass 35 including a structure mounted on the floor or
    platform of a raft to protect an occupant from the elements.


CLS 441/39
TXT Having boarding aid:

    Device under subclass 35 including means for assisting a person floating in
    the water in climbing aboard the raft, i.e., ladders.


CLS 441/40
TXT Inflatable:

    Device under subclass 35 including a structural member used in forming the
    raft which is capable of being expanded by the introduction into the member
    of a fluent medium, e.g., gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for inflatable buoys.

    66,     for inflatable water skimming or walking devices.

    90+,    for nonoral expanding means for personal flotation devices worn by
    the user.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclass 345 for inflatable boats.


CLS 441/41
TXT Having inflation valve means:

    Device under subclass 40 including means to control the flow of the fluent
    medium into the structural member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99      and 100, for valves used in nonoral expanding means for personal
    flotation device worn by user.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, for fluid handling devices not specifically adapted
    for marine use.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, for valve structure, per se.


CLS 441/42
TXT Having storage container for raft:

    Device under subclass 40 including a receptacle for holding the raft in a
    deflated condition.


CLS 441/43
TXT Having centrally located suspended basket: Device under subclass 35 wherein
    the platform or floor of the raft is in the form of an open cage hanging in
    the center of the raft below the level of a surrounding buoyancy means.


CLS 441/44
TXT Columnar flotation member:

    Device under subclass 35 wherein the raft has an elongated buoyancy
    providing member having a cross-section with a periphery of a shape similar
    to a circle, or multiple sided geometric figure.


CLS 441/45
TXT Hollow:

    Device under subclass 44 wherein the buoyancy providing member contains a
    void.


CLS 441/46
TXT Barrel or drum:

    Device under subclass 45 wherein the buoyancy providing means is a cylinder
    of flat or slightly bulging sides having flat parallel ends and a ratio
    between the height and the diameter somewhat greater than one.


CLS 441/47
TXT Formed from log or other product:

    Device under subclass 35 in which logs or other similar raw material are
    formed into a raft in order to transport the same material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    for a float used to give a log additional buoyancy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 60.5 for devices which
    guide floating logs around bends in a river or into holding areas along a
    river.


CLS 441/48
TXT Booming:

    Device under subclass 47 wherein logs are joined end to end so as to form a
    closed loop within which logs or similar material are placed to form a raft.


CLS 441/49
TXT Cribbing:

    Device under subclass 47 wherein a rigid framework of logs is provided into
    which other logs are placed to form a raft.


CLS 441/50
TXT Coupling means:

    Device under subclass 47 having means which joins and holds logs or similar
    material together.


CLS 441/51
TXT Dog:

    Device under subclass 50 wherein the joining means is a spike or wedgelike
    device driven into a log to couple one to another.


CLS 441/52
TXT Clamp:

    Device under subclass 50 wherein the joining means has opposite facing saws
    which may be adjusted to contain one or more logs between them.


CLS 441/53
TXT Transverse rigid member:

    Device under subclass 50 wherein the joining means is a bar, rod, or
    similar rigid member which is oriented transversely to and affixed to a log
    for the purpose of joining them together.


CLS 441/54
TXT Encircling flexible member:

    Device under subclass 50 wherein the joining means is a pliant member such
    as a rope or chain and which is passed around a log to join it with other
    logs.


CLS 441/55
TXT SWIMMING AID TO INCREASE STROKE EFFICIENCY:
    Device under the class definition secured to or held by a swimmer which
    increases the effective surface used to propel the swimmer through the
    water, thereby providing for faster or farther propulsion through the
    liquid by the user's swimming strokes.


CLS 441/56
TXT Hand attached, held, or worn:

    Device under subclass 55 which is secured to, grasped by, or borne on the
    hand of a swimmer.


CLS 441/57
TXT Having finger stalls (e.g., gloves):

    Device under subclass 56 having a chamber into which a finger or the entire
    hand of the user may be inserted in the manner of a glove or mitt.


CLS 441/58
TXT Secured to hand by strap:

    Device under subclass 56 including bands for securing the device on the
    user's hands.


CLS 441/59
TXT Arm attached:

    Device under subclass 55 which is secured to the arm of the swimmer.


CLS 441/60
TXT Leg attached:

    Devices under subclass 55 which is secured to the leg of a swimmer.


CLS 441/61
TXT Foot attached:

    Device under subclass 55 which is secured to the foot of a swimmer.


CLS 441/62
TXT Repositioned by biasing means:

    Device under subclass 61 having means to urge the water-contacting surface
    to a selected position.

    (1)     Note.  These biasing means keep the surface in an operating
    position or at selected operating angles.


CLS 441/63
TXT With lock or latch:

    Device under subclass 61 having means to hold or secure the
    water-contacting surface in a predetermined position.


CLS 441/64
TXT Flipper:

    Device under subclass 61 including a flexible water-contacting surface
    resembling webbed feet in appearance and operation.


CLS 441/65
TXT WATER SKIMMING OR WALKING DEVICES:

    Device under the class definition constructed so as to permit walking,
    gliding, or planing on the surface of a body of water while sustaining a
    user substantially out of contact with the water.

    (1)     Note.  Movement usually occurs by action of the user or of an
    external agent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclasses 242+ for devices used in towing vessels for use
    in water.


CLS 441/66
TXT Inflatable:

    Device under subclass 65 which are expandable when filled with pressurized
    gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for an inflatable buoy.

    40,     for an inflatable raft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclass 345 for inflatable boats.


CLS 441/67
TXT Circular:

    Device under subclass 65 which has a periphery in the shape of a circle.


CLS 441/68
TXT Water ski:

    Device under subclass 65 comprising an elongated boardlike member having a
    width somewhat greater than a user's foot and a normally upturned leading
    edge adapted to support the user while planing across the water surface
    while under tow.


CLS 441/69
TXT Ski tow handle:

    Device under subclass 68 which is a handle secured to a towing device.

    (1)     Note.  The ski tow handle is usually attached to an elongated
    flexible member and is adapted to be grasped by the skier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclasses 253+ for towing with a cable.


CLS 441/70
TXT Ski binding:

    Device under subclass 68 including means to secure a ski to the foot of a
    skier.


CLS 441/71
TXT With rooster tail producing means:

    Device under subclass 68 including an attachment at the rear of a ski to
    project a stream of water in an arc above the water surface and behind the
    ski for visual effects.

    (1)     Note.  An example of such a device is a funnel like pipe whose
    outlet is oriented upwardly.


CLS 441/72
TXT With seat:

    Devices under subclass 68 including means upon which a skier may sit while
    being towed.


CLS 441/73
TXT Having connecting means:

    Device under subclass 68 wherein means are provided to link together at
    least two skis.


CLS 441/74
TXT Surfboard:

    Device under subclass 65 comprising an elongated member of a width
    comparable to the shoulder width of a user adapted to be propelled by a
    wave and capable of supporting the user.


CLS 441/75
TXT With lashing:

    Device under subclass 74 including a ropelike or cordlike member attached
    to the surfboard which can also be attached to the user.


CLS 441/76
TXT Water walking device (e.g., water shoes):
    Device under subclass 65 including a buoyant member supporting the user in
    a standing position and enabling the user to move across the water surface
    in a walking manner.


CLS 441/77
TXT Having pivoted traction flap:

    Device under subclass 76 wherein an element is provided having a fulcrum
    point which allows the element to move in and out of a working position in
    order to increase the traction of the buoyant member.


CLS 441/78
TXT Spheroid or wheel-like device encircling walker:

    Device under subclass 76 wherein the buoyant member is a globe or disclike
    means which supports, circumscribes, and rotates about the user as it moves
    across the water surface.


CLS 441/79
TXT Having stabilizing surface:

    Device under subclass 65 including a means, such as a keel, fin, etc. which
    tend to steady the water skimming or walking device.


CLS 441/80
TXT WATER RESCUE OR LIFE PROTECTING APPARATUS:

    Device under the class definition adapted to remove a person from the water
    from a position remote from said person, to protect a person from the
    elements or hostile marine life, or to sustain a person above the water for
    an extended time period.


CLS 441/81
TXT Tossable apertured member (e.g., ring):

    Device under subclass 80 comprising a buoyant flotation device adapted to
    be thrown to a person in the water.

    (1)     Note.  The device is usually secured to a rope.


CLS 441/82
TXT For use over ice:

    Device under subclass 80 specifically adapted for rescuing a person who has
    fallen through broken ice.


CLS 441/83
TXT Air-sea rescue device:

    Device under subclass 80 wherein means to assist a person in the water is
    carried by and is capable of being dropped from an aircraft to the person.


CLS 441/84
TXT Lifeline:

    Device under subclass 80 comprising a buoyant elongated pliant member used
    to rescue a person floating in a body of water.


CLS 441/85
TXT Having line propelling means:

    Device under subclass 84 including apparatus for delivering the elongated
    buoyant member from a remote location to a person in need of rescue.


CLS 441/86
TXT Buoyant shark screen encircling user:

    Device under subclass 80 wherein a buoyancy means to float the user is
    combined with a means to surround and hide the user from a shark.


CLS 441/87
TXT Passenger enclosing buoyancy device:

    Device under subclass 80 comprising an apparatus for protecting a user who
    has been stranded or shipwrecked in the water from the elements until he is
    rescued, by enclosing him and having sufficient buoyancy to support the
    user on the water surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for rafts having a shelter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclass 349 for life boats enclosing passengers.


CLS 441/88
TXT Personal flotation device:

    Device under subclass 80 worn by a user and including buoyancy means to
    sustain the user floating in a body of water.

    (1)     Note.  Buoyancy compensation vests for divers are classifiable in
    Class 405, subclass 186.


CLS 441/89
TXT With signal means:

    Device under subclass 88 including means secured to the personal flotation
    device for attracting attention.


CLS 441/90
TXT With mechanical inflation means:

    Device under subclass 88 having a chamber adapted to be expanded or
    enlarged for use from a collapsed state, together with means for causing
    the expansion.

    (1)     Note.  The means for causing expansion does not include oral
    expanding means.


CLS 441/91
TXT By pump:

    Device under subclass 90 wherein the means for causing the expansion is a
    pump.


CLS 441/92
TXT By compressed gas means:

    Device under subclass 90 including a self-contained source of pressurized
    gas for expanding the chamber.


CLS 441/93
TXT With puncturing means:

    Device under subclass 92 including means for piercing a seal on the
    pressurized gas source in order to allow the gas to flow into the chamber.


CLS 441/94
TXT Lever actuated:

    Device under subclass 93 including a pivoting bar for actuating the
    piercing means.


CLS 441/95
TXT Actuated by water softened or soluble member:

    Device under subclass 93 wherein the piercing means is restrained by a
    water soluble element or an element weakened by contact with water such
    that upon contact with water the piercing means is released.


CLS 441/96
TXT With control valve:

    Device under subclass 92 including a means located in a flow line
    communicating the gas source with the chamber to regulate the flow of the
    pressurized gas from the source.


CLS 441/97
TXT Actuated by water softened or soluble member:

    Device under subclass 96 wherein the regulating means is restrained by a
    water soluble element or an element weakened by contact with water such
    that upon contact with water the regulating means can be used.


CLS 441/98
TXT By gas generation from chemical reaction: Device under subclass 90 wherein
    a gas is generated by the reaction of reagents to fill the expandable
    chamber.


CLS 441/99
TXT With manually operated valve:

    Device under subclass 98 wherein a hand operated valve means is used to
    adjust or control the flow of at least one of the reactants or of the
    evolved gas.


CLS 441/100
TXT With soluble or deformable element:

    Device under subclass 98 provided with a means which can be mutilated,
    destroyed, distorted, or dissolved to initiate or terminate flow of the
    reactants or the evolved gas.


CLS 441/101
TXT With cutting, punching, or striking means:

    Device under subclass 100 provided with a means to bore or cut a hole in a
    wall of the deformable means, or to impinge against the wall with a view to
    plastically deforming the wall, to permit mixing of the reactants.


CLS 441/102
TXT Body suit:

    Device under subclass 88 wherein the buoyancy means is secured to a garment
    which encloses more than the torso of the user and includes arm, leg, and
    neck openings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, appropriate subclasses for normal articles of wear which
    do not increase the buoyancy of the user; especially, subclasses 2.15+ for
    suits worn by divers, per se..


CLS 441/103
TXT Full length:

    Device under subclass 102 wherein the garment covers the arms, legs, and
    torso of the user.


CLS 441/104
TXT With hood:

    Device under subclass 103 provided with means to substantially cover the
    user's head.


CLS 441/105
TXT With mask:

    Device under subclass 104 having in addition means to cover the user's face.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 200.24+ for respiratory methods and devices not
    associated with a personal flotation device.


CLS 441/106
TXT For torso:

    Device under subclass 88 worn by the user and which covers a portion of the
    trunk of the human body.


CLS 441/107
TXT With sleeve:

    Device under subclass 106 wherein the trunk covering means includes a
    sleeve.


CLS 441/108
TXT With buoyancy means substantially encircling the torso:

    Device under subclass 106 wherein the trunk covering means includes
    buoyancy means which substantially circumscribes the torso.


CLS 441/109
TXT And attached hip boot:

    Device under subclass 108 including boots secured to the trunk covering
    means in the vicinity of the user's hips.


CLS 441/110
TXT And leg or foot strap:

    Device under subclass 108 including a leg or foot strap securing the trunk
    covering means to a leg or foot.


CLS 441/111
TXT And support passing over the shoulder:

    Device under subclass 108 including means passing over the shoulders for
    supporting the buoyancy means.


CLS 441/112
TXT Having buoyancy means:

    Device under subclass 111 wherein the supporting means passing over the
    shoulders include buoyancy means.


CLS 441/113
TXT Buoyancy means is a continuous member:

    Device under subclass 108 wherein the buoyancy means is an uninterrupted
    member.


CLS 441/114
TXT With buoyancy means on the back:
    Device under subclass 106 wherein the trunk covering means includes
    buoyancy means for placement on the back of the torso.


CLS 441/115
TXT And front:

    Device under subclass 114 including buoyancy means for placement on the
    thorax or abdomen of the torso.


CLS 441/116
TXT And shoulder:

    Device under subclass 115 further including buoyancy means for placement
    over a shoulder of the torso.


CLS 441/117
TXT With buoyancy means on the front:

    Device under subclass 106 wherein the trunk covering means includes
    buoyancy means for placement on the thorax or abdomen of the torso.


CLS 441/118
TXT And shoulder:

    Device under subclass 117 including buoyancy means for placement over the
    shoulder of the torso.


CLS 441/119
TXT With buoyancy means on the side:

    Device under subclass 106 wherein the trunk covering means includes
    buoyancy means for placement on the sides of the torso.


CLS 441/120
TXT Trunks or shorts:

    Device under subclass 88 wherein the personal flotation device is in the
    form of bathing trunks or shorts.


CLS 441/121
TXT Suspender:

    Device under subclass 88 wherein the buoyancy means are incorporated on
    over the shoulder pants supports.


CLS 441/122
TXT Arm encircling means:

    Device under subclass 88 wherein the buoyancy means are adapted to be
    secured to and encircle an arm.


CLS 441/123
TXT Neck encircling means:

    Device under subclass 88 wherein the buoyancy means are adapted to be
    secured to and encircle the neck.


CLS 441/124
TXT Head gear:

    Device under subclass 88 wherein the buoyancy means are adapted to be worn
    on the head.


CLS 441/125
TXT Convertible use article:

    Device under subclass 80 wherein the device is designed to perform an
    entirely different function in normal usage but readily converts to a means
    for personal flotation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    190,    Trunks and Hand-Carried Luggage, subclass 1, for an article of
    luggage convertible to or from a flotation device.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 3, for an inflatable flexible bag.


CLS 441/126
TXT Seating means:

    Device under subclass 125 wherein the primary use of the device is for the
    purpose of sitting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 4, 118+, 423.1+, 468+ for seats not
    particularly adapted to a marine environment.


CLS 441/127
TXT Cushion:

    Device under subclass 126 wherein the sitting device is a soft pad.


CLS 441/128
TXT Berth:

    Device under subclass 125 wherein the primary use of the device is as a bed
    or mattress.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclass 9.1 for berths, per se.


CLS 441/129
TXT BODY SUPPORTING BUOYANT DEVICE: Device under the class definition including
    buoyancy means and size sufficient for normally supporting only one user on
    the water surface and subject to either little movement or slow movement
    across the water surface.

    (1)     Note.  These devices are normally recreational devices.

    (2)     Note.  Devices which comprise buoyant structures and are made to
    simulate animals, fish, fowl, etc., or any part thereof, are excluded from
    Class 441 if claimed to recite such simulating features, and will be found
    in Class 472, Amusement Devices, particularly subclasses 128+.  If the
    buoyant structure only is claimed, classification in Class 441 is proper.


CLS 441/130
TXT With seat:

    Device under subclass 129 provided with an element on which the user may
    sit.


CLS 441/131
TXT Annular buoyant member:

    Device under subclass 130 wherein the buoyancy means is in the form of a
    ring.


CLS 441/132
TXT U-shaped buoyant member:

    Device under subclass 130 wherein the buoyancy means is horseshoe shaped.


CLS 441/133
TXT BUOYANCY PROVIDING ATTACHMENT FOR PIPE, LOG, OR LINE:

    Element under the class definition attached to a conduit, cable, line, or
    log and providing the same with added buoyancy when in a body of water.


CLS 441/134
TXT Float or log:

    Device under subclass 133 which is fastened to a log so as to increase its
    buoyancy.


CLS 441/135
TXT BUOYANT UNDERWATER VIEWING DEVICE:

    Device under the class definition facilitating below the surface
    observations usually including a buoyant platform and a window located on
    the platform and below the water surface.


CLS 441/136
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Buoys, rafts, and aquatic devices under the class definition not
    specifically provided for elsewhere in the schedule.


CLS 442/
TTL FABRIC (WOVEN, KNITTED, OR NONWOVEN TEXTILE OR CLOTH, ETC.)

CLS 442/
TXT
    This class is an integral part of Class 428 (after subclass 223).  It
    incorporates all the definitions and rules as to subject matter of Class
    428.

     CLASS DEFINITION

    A woven, knitted, nonwoven, or felt article claimed as a fabric, having
    structural integrity resulting from forced interassociation of fibers,
    filaments, or strands, the forced interassociation resulting from processes
    such as weaving, knitting, needling hydroentangling, chemical coating or
    impregnation, autogenous bonding (i.e., heat- and/or pressure-promoted
    welding or solvent bonding) or felting, but not articles such as paper,
    fiber-reinforced plastic matrix materials (FRP), or other fiber-reinforced
    materials wherein fibers are present only as a filler material.

    (1)     Note.  This is not the location for a woven or knitted fabric which
    is no more than, respectively, the product of a loom or knitting machine
    which has not been further treated. Such a product of a loom is classified
    in Class 139, subclasses 420+.  Such a product from a knitting machine is
    classified in Class 66, subclasses 169+.

    (2)     Note.  This is the location for a woven or knitted fabric which has
    been subjected to further treatment after having been removed,
    respectively, from the loom or knitting machine, and all treated and
    untreated nonwoven fabrics, except those treated by a drying process or a
    chemical modification which effects chemical reaction within the material
    composing the woven, knitted, or nonwoven fabric.  A fabric which has been
    dyed or subjected to chemical modification effecting reaction within the
    material composing the fabric is classified in Class 8, except where the
    chemical modification results in converting the material composing the
    fabric to carbon. Carbon fabrics, per se, are classified in Class 423,
    subclasses 447.1+.

    (3)     Note.  This is not the location for nonwoven sheets produced by
    wet-laying fiber slurries on a screen (i.e., papers). Papers, per se, are
    classified in Class 162, subclasses 100+.

     (4)    Note.  Fiber-reinforced plastic matrix materials (FRP) or
    fiber-reinforced inorganic matrix materials, per se, are classified in
    Class 428, subclasses 292.1+.


CLS 442/1
TXT SCRIM (E.G., OPEN NET OR MESH, GAUZE, LOOSE OR OPEN WEAVE OR KNIT, ETC.):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the fabric is a woven,
    nonwoven, or knitted fabric which is specifically described as having an
    open or loose configuration of strands or filamentary material.

    (1)     Note.  Scrim includes but is not limited to open net, mesh, gauze,
    loosely woven, or knitted fabrics.  A characteristic of most scrims is the
    ability to see readily through the fabric from a distance.


CLS 442/2
TXT Woven scrim:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the scrim is a woven fabric.

    (1)     Note.  A woven fabric is composed of at least one set of strands or
    strips in a warp direction interengaged with at least one set of strands or
    strips in a fill or weft direction, the fill or weft direction being at an
    angle other than 0o relative to the warp direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181+,   for woven fabrics not meeting the definition of scrim as given
    above.


CLS 442/3
TXT Including a multifilament fiber precoated with other than free metal or
    alloy prior to weaving:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the woven scrim contains a
    multifilament fiber which has been coated with a non-metallic material
    prior to incorporation into the woven scrim.


CLS 442/4
TXT Comprising a composite fiber:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the woven scrim contains at least
    one fiber comprising more than one chemically distinct component such as a
    sheath/core fiber, an islands-in-sea fiber, a wrapped fiber, etc.


CLS 442/5
TXT Comprising at least two chemically different fibers:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the woven scrim contains two or
    more distinct fibers which differ from one another chemically.


CLS 442/6
TXT Metal or metal-coated fiber-containing scrim:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the woven scrim contains metal
    fiber or metal-coated fiber.


CLS 442/7
TXT Including an additional free metal or alloy constituent:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the woven scrim contains metal
    fiber or metal-coated fiber and an additional free metal or alloy
    constituent in a form such as particulate material, film, foil, sheet, or
    fabric layer.


CLS 442/8
TXT Particulate free metal or alloy constituent:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein the additional free metal or alloy
    constituent is in the form of particulate material.


CLS 442/9
TXT Including a foam layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the woven scrim containing metal
    fiber or metal-coated fiber has an open or closed cellular layer associated
    therewith.


CLS 442/10
TXT Including a woven fabric which is not a scrim:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the woven scrim containing metal
    fiber or metal-coated fiber is associated with at least one additional
    woven fabric which is not a scrim.


CLS 442/11
TXT Including a nonwoven fabric which is not a scrim:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein the woven scrim containing metal
    fiber or metal-coated fiber has a woven fabric and a nonwoven fabric which
    is not a scrim associated therewith.


CLS 442/12
TXT Including a paper layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the woven scrim containing metal
    fiber or metal-coated fiber has a paper layer associated therewith.


CLS 442/13
TXT Including a nonwoven fabric which is not a scrim:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the woven scrim containing metal
    fiber or metal-coated fiber has a nonwoven fabric which is not a scrim
    associated therewith.


CLS 442/14
TXT Two or more nonwoven fabric layers:

    Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein the woven scrim containing metal
    fiber or metal-coated fiber has two or more nonwoven fabric layers which
    are not scrim associated therewith.


CLS 442/15
TXT Including a natural or synthetic rubber layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the woven scrim containing metal
    fiber or metal-coated fiber has a natural or synthetic rubber layer
    associated  therewith.


CLS 442/16
TXT Including a preformed film, foil, or sheet:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the woven scrim containing metal
    fiber or metal-coated fiber has a preformed material associated herewith,
    the preformed material having structural integrity prior to association
    with the woven scrim and being in the form of a film, foil, or sheet.


CLS 442/17
TXT Including a layer derived from a water-settable material (e.g., cement,
    gypsum, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the woven scrim which contains
    metal or metal-coated fiber has a water-settable material (e.g., cement,
    gypsum, etc.) in  the form of a distinct layer associated therewith.


CLS 442/18
TXT Including a ceramic or glass layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the woven scrim which contains
    metal or metal-coated fiber has at least one additional layer in the form
    of  ceramic or glass associated therewith.


CLS 442/19
TXT Including a coating or impregnation of synthetic polymeric material:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the woven scrim which contains
    metal or metal-coated fiber has at least one synthetic polymeric coating or
    impregnation associated therewith.


CLS 442/20
TXT Inorganic fiber-containing scrim:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the woven  scrim comprises
    inorganic fiber.


CLS 442/21
TXT Including a carbon or carbonized fiber:

    Subject matter under subclass 20 wherein the inorganic fiber comprises a
    carbon (graphite) or fiber material which has been subjected to
    carbonization.


CLS 442/22
TXT Including a foam layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 20 wherein the woven scrim comprises
    inorganic fiber which has an open or closed cellular layer associated
    therewith.


CLS 442/23
TXT Including a metal layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 20 wherein the woven scrim comprises
    inorganic fiber which has a metal layer associated therewith.


CLS 442/24
TXT Including an additional scrim layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 20 wherein the woven scrim which comprises
    inorganic fiber has at least one additional scrim layer associated
    therewith.


CLS 442/25
TXT Including a woven fabric which is not a scrim:

    Subject matter under subclass 20 wherein the woven scrim which comprises
    inorganic fiber is associated with an additional woven fabric which is not
    a scrim.


CLS 442/26
TXT Including a nonwoven fabric which is not a scrim:

    Subject matter under subclass 20 wherein the woven scrim which comprises
    inorganic fiber has at least one nonwoven fabric which is not a scrim
    associated therewith.


CLS 442/27
TXT Including a preformed  film, foil, or sheet:

    Subject matter under subclass 20 wherein the woven scrim which comprises
    inorganic fiber has a preformed  material associated therewith, the
    preformed material having had structural integrity prior to association
    with the woven scrim and being in the form of a film, foil, or sheet.


CLS 442/28
TXT Including a mica layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 20 wherein the woven scrim which comprises
    inorganic fiber has a  mica layer associated therewith.


CLS 442/29
TXT Including a coating or impregnation containing  particulate material other
    than fiber:

    Subject matter under subclass 20 wherein the woven scrim which comprises
    inorganic fiber has a coating or impregnation which contains nonfibrous
    particulate material associated therewith.


CLS 442/30
TXT Including a foam layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the woven scrim has at least one
    additional layer which is an open or closed cellular layer associated
    therewith.


CLS 442/31
TXT Including a free metal or alloy constituent:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the woven scrim contains a free
    metal or alloy constituent.


CLS 442/32
TXT Including an additional scrim layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the woven scrim has an additional
    scrim layer associated therewith.


CLS 442/33
TXT Including a paper layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the woven scrim has an additional
    paper layer associated therewith.


CLS 442/34
TXT Two or more paper layers:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 wherein the woven scrim has at least two
    paper layers associated therewith.


CLS 442/35
TXT Including a nonwoven fabric which is not a scrim:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the woven scrim has a nonwoven
    fabric layer which is not a scrim associated therewith.


CLS 442/36
TXT Two or more nonwoven layers:

    Subject matter under subclass 35 wherein the woven scrim has two or more
    nonwoven fabric layers (which are not scrim) associated therewith.


CLS 442/37
TXT Including a natural or synthetic rubber layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the woven scrim has a natural or
    synthetic rubber layer associated therewith.


CLS 442/38
TXT Including a preformed film, foil, or sheet:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the woven scrim has a preformed
    material having had structural integrity prior to association with the
    woven scrim and being in the form of a film, foil, or sheet.


CLS 442/39
TXT Cellulose acetate film or sheet:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 wherein the preformed film or sheet is
    cellulose acetate.


CLS 442/40
TXT Fluorinated polyolefin film or sheet:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 wherein the preformed film or sheet is
    fluorinated polyolefin.


CLS 442/41
TXT Polyolefin film or sheet:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 wherein the preformed film or sheet is
    polyolefin.


CLS 442/42
TXT Including a layer derived from a water-settable material (e.g., cement,
    gypsum, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the woven scrim has a
    water-settable material (e.g., cement, gypsum, etc.) in the form of a
    distinct layer associated therewith.


CLS 442/43
TXT Coated or impregnated:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the woven scrim has a coating or
    impregnation associated therewith.


CLS 442/44
TXT Including particulate material other than fiber in coating or impregnation:

    Subject matter under subclass 43 wherein the coating or impregnation
    contains particulate material not being fibrous.


CLS 442/45
TXT Three or more layers:

    Subject matter under subclass 43 comprising at least three layers including
    a woven scrim layer and at least one coating and/or impregnation layer.


CLS 442/46
TXT Synthetic polymeric fiber:

    Subject matter under subclass  43 wherein the coated or impregnated woven
    scrim contains synthetic polymeric fiber.


CLS 442/47
TXT Nylon fiber:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 wherein the synthetic polymeric fiber is
    nylon (i.e., polyamide).


CLS 442/48
TXT Bitumen coating or impregnation:

    Subject matter under subclass 43 wherein the coating or impregnation
    contains pitch, asphalt, tar, bitumen, or the residue from the distillation
    of mineral oil and/or coal.


CLS 442/49
TXT Synthetic polymeric fiber:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the woven scrim contains synthetic
    polymeric fiber.


CLS 442/50
TXT Nonwoven scrim:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the scrim is a nonwoven fabric.

    (1)     Note. A nonwoven fabric is composed of strands or fiber material
    having structural integrity by forced interassociation of the strands or
    fiber material by mechanical means (e.g., needling, hydroentanglement,
    etc.) or by the effect of chemical binders or by autogenous bonding (i.e.,
    heat- and/or pressure-promoted welding or solvent bonding).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327+,   for nonwoven fabric not meeting the definition of  scrim as given
    above.


CLS 442/51
TXT Comprising a composite fiber:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein the nonwoven scrim comprises fiber
    containing more than one chemically  distinct component such as a
    sheath/core fiber, an islands-in-sea fiber, a wrapped fiber, etc.


CLS 442/52
TXT Metal or metal-coated fiber-containing scrim:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein the nonwoven scrim comprises metal
    fiber or metal-coated fiber.


CLS 442/53
TXT Including a paper layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein the nonwoven scrim comprising
    metal fiber or metal-coated fiber  has one additional paper layer
    associated therewith.


CLS 442/54
TXT Inorganic fiber-containing scrim:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein the nonwoven scrim comprises
    inorganic fiber.


CLS 442/55
TXT Including a foam layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 54 wherein the nonwoven scrim which comprises
    inorganic fiber has a  foam layer associated therewith.


CLS 442/56
TXT Including a foam layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein the nonwoven scrim has an open or
    closed cellular layer associated therewith.


CLS 442/57
TXT Including a nonwoven fabric which is not a scrim:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein the nonwoven scrim has a nonwoven
    fabric layer which is not a scrim associated therewith.


CLS 442/58
TXT Coated or impregnated:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein the nonwoven scrim has a coating
    or impregnation associated therewith.


CLS 442/59
TXT COATED OR IMPREGNATED WOVEN, KNIT, OR NONWOVEN FABRIC WHICH IS NOT (A)
    ASSOCIATED WITH ANOTHER PREFORMED LAYER OR FIBER LAYER OR (B) WITH RESPECT
    TO WOVEN AND KNIT, CHARACTERIZED, RESPECTIVELY, BY A PARTICULAR OR
    DIFFERENTIAL WEAVE OR KNIT, WHEREIN THE COATING OR IMPREGNATION IS NEITHER
    A FOAMED MATERIAL NOR A FREE METAL OR ALLOY LAYER:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the fabric is coated or
    impregnated with a material which is neither a foamed material nor a  metal
     or alloy layer, which is not associated with any other preformed layer
    other than  additional coatings or impregnations, and which is not
    characterized by a particular or differential weave or knit pattern.


CLS 442/60
TXT Fabric composed of a fiber or strand which is of specific structural
    definition:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the fabric comprises (a) strands
    having specific structural characteristics  such as being composed of
    individual filaments having different chemical composition twisted
    together or being core-spun about a non-elastic core;  or (b) the strands,
    per se, or individual filamentary materials comprising the strands are
    characterized by a specific structural feature such as non-linearity, a
    particular cross section or a particular absolute size of any feature,
    component or dimension (e.g., length, width, or thickness).


CLS 442/61
TXT Impregnation is confined to a plane disposed between both major fabric
    surfaces which are essentially free of impregnating material:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the fabric is impregnated in such
    a way as to restrict the impregnant to a location between both major fabric
    surfaces, both major fabric surfaces being essentially free of impregnant.


CLS 442/62
TXT Coating produced by extrusion:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the coating has been associated
    with the fabric by extrusion coating.


CLS 442/63
TXT Coating or impregnation formed in situ (e.g., by  interfacial condensation,
    coagulation, precipitation, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the coating or impregnation is
    formed by an in situ process on a surface of the fabric, the process being
    one such as interfacial condensation, coagulation, precipitation,  etc.


CLS 442/64
TXT Two or more non-extruded coatings or impregnations:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the fabric has at least two
    coatings or impregnations, no coating or impregnation having been produced
    by extrusion.


CLS 442/65
TXT Each major face of the fabric has at least one coating or impregnation:

    Subject matter under subclass 64 wherein each major face of the fabric has
    one or more coatings or impregnations.


CLS 442/66
TXT At least two coatings or impregnations of different  chemical composition:

    Subject matter under subclass 65 wherein the fabric  has two or more
    chemically different coatings or impregnations.


CLS 442/67
TXT Different coatings or impregnations on opposite faces of the fabric:

    Subject matter under subclass 66 wherein each face of the fabric has at
    least one coating or impregnation that is chemically different from at
    least one coating or impregnation on the opposite face of the fabric.


CLS 442/68
TXT At least one coating or impregnation contains        particulate material:

    Subject matter under subclass 66 wherein at least one coating or
    impregnation includes particulate material.


CLS 442/69
TXT At least one coating or impregnation functions to fix pigments or particles
    on the surface of a coating or impregnation:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein at least one coating or
    impregnation has pigments or particles on its surface.


CLS 442/70
TXT At least one coating or impregnation contains particulate material:

    Subject matter under subclass  65 wherein at least one coating or
    impregnation includes particulate  material.


CLS 442/71
TXT At least two coatings or impregnations of different  chemical composition:

    Subject matter under subclass 64 wherein the fabric has at least two
    coatings or impregnations which are chemically different.


CLS 442/72
TXT At least one coating or impregnation contains particulate material:

    Subject matter under subclass 71 wherein at least one coating or
    impregnation includes particulate  material.


CLS 442/73
TXT At  least one coating or impregnation functions to fix pigments or
    particles on the surface of a coating or  impregnation:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein at least one coating or
    impregnation has pigments or particles on its surface.


CLS 442/74
TXT At least one coating or impregnation contains particulate material:

    Subject matter under subclass 64 wherein at least one coating or
    impregnation includes particulate material.


CLS 442/75
TXT At least one coating or impregnation functions to fix pigments or particles
    on the surface of a coating or impregnation:

    Subject matter under subclass 74 wherein at least one coating or
    impregnation has pigments or particles on its surface.


CLS 442/76
TXT Coating or impregnation specified as porous or   permeable to a specific
    substance (e.g., water vapor, air, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the coating or impregnation is
    porous or permeable to water vapor, air, or some other specific substance,
    the porosity or  permeability being specifically stated.


CLS 442/77
TXT Coating or impregnation is specified as microporous but  is not a foam:

    Subject matter under subclass 76 wherein the coating or impregnation is not
    a foam but is microporous, the porosity being specifically stated.


CLS 442/78
TXT Coating or impregnation collects radionuclide or heavy  metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the coating or impregnation
    collects or binds radionuclides or heavy metals.


CLS 442/79
TXT Coating or impregnation specified as water repellent:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the coating or impregnation is
    water repellent, the water repellency being specifically stated.


CLS 442/80
TXT Also specified as oil repellent:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 wherein the coating or impregnation is
    also oil repellent, the oil repellency being specifically stated.


CLS 442/81
TXT Organosilicon containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 wherein the coating or impregnation
    includes organosilicon.


CLS 442/82
TXT Fluorocarbon containing:

    Subject matter under subclass  79 wherein the coating or impregnation
    includes fluorocarbon.


CLS 442/83
TXT Nitrogen containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 wherein the coating or impregnation
    includes nitrogen.


CLS 442/84
TXT Natural oil or wax containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 wherein the coating or impregnation
    includes natural oil or wax.


CLS 442/85
TXT Coating or impregnation is specified as weather proof, water vapor
    resistant, or moisture resistant:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the coating or impregnation is
    weather proof, water vapor resistant, or moisture resistant, the weather
    proofness or water vapor resistance or moisture resistance being
    specifically stated.


CLS 442/86
TXT Coating or impregnation is specified as water proof:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the coating or impregnation is
    water proof, the water proofness being specifically stated.


CLS 442/87
TXT Organosilicon containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein the coating or impregnation
    includes organosilicon.


CLS 442/88
TXT Fluorocarbon containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein the coating or impregnation
    includes fluorocarbon.


CLS 442/89
TXT Nitrogen containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein the coating or impregnation
    includes nitrogen.


CLS 442/90
TXT Natural oil or wax containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein the coating or impregnation
    includes natural oil or wax.


CLS 442/91
TXT Coating or impregnation is oil repellent but not oil or  stain release:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the coating or impregnation is oil
    repellent but not oil or stain release, the oil repellency being
    specifically stated.


CLS 442/92
TXT Fluorocarbon containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 wherein the coating or impregnation
    includes fluorocarbon.


CLS 442/93
TXT Coating or impregnation improves soil repellency, soil release, or
    anti-soil redeposition qualities of fabric:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the coating or impregnation
    improves qualities of fabric such as soil repellency, soil release, or
    anti-soil redeposition, the improvement being specifically stated.


CLS 442/94
TXT Fluorocarbon containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 93 wherein the coating or impregnation
    includes fluorocarbon.


CLS 442/95
TXT Linear polyether group chain containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 93 wherein the coating or impregnation
    includes a linear polyether group chain.


CLS 442/96
TXT Coating or impregnation provides a fragrance or releases an odor intended
    to be perceptible to humans:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the coating or impregnation
    provides a fragrance or releases an odor which is noticeable to humans.


CLS 442/97
TXT Coating or impregnation is a lubricant or a surface friction reducing agent
    other than specified as improving the "hand" of the fabric or increasing
    the softness thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the coating or impregnation which
    is not specified as improving the "hand" or increasing the softness of the
    fabric acts  as a lubricant or a surface friction reducing agent.

    (1)     Note. The term "hand" when used in connection with a fabric refers
    to the feel of the fabric when held in one's hand, particularly the
    softness of the fabric.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for a coating or impregnation which functions to soften or improve
    the "hand" of the fabric.


CLS 442/98
TXT Fluorocarbon containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 97 wherein the coating or impregnation
    includes fluorocarbon.


CLS 442/99
TXT Organosilicon containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 97 wherein the coating or impregnation
    includes organosilicon.


CLS 442/100
TXT Natural oil or wax containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 97 wherein the coating or impregnation
    includes natural oil or wax.


CLS 442/101
TXT Coating or impregnation is anti-slip or friction-increasing other than
    specified as an abrasive:

    Subject under subclass 59 wherein the coating or impregnation has anti-slip
    or friction-increasing properties, the properties being specifically
    stated, and is not referred to as abrasive.


CLS 442/102
TXT Coating or impregnation functions to soften the feel of  or improve the
    "hand" of the fabric:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the coating or impregnation
    softens the feel of or improves the "hand" of the fabric, the softening or
    "hand" improvement being specifically stated.


CLS 442/103
TXT Coating or impregnation improves stiffness of the fabric other than
    specified as a size:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the coating or impregnation is
    specifically stated to improve fabric stiffness, the coating not being a
    size.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for a coating or impregnation which is specified as a size.


CLS 442/104
TXT Coating or impregnation improves elasticity, bendability, resiliency,
    flexibility, or shape retention of the fabric:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the coating or impregnation is
    specifically stated to improve fabric elasticity, bendability,  resiliency,
    flexibility, or shape retention.


CLS 442/105
TXT Improves elasticity:

    Subject matter under subclass 104 wherein the coating or impregnation is
    specifically stated to improve fabric elasticity.


CLS 442/106
TXT Improves shrink resistance:

    Subject matter under subclass 104 wherein the coating or impregnation is
    specifically stated to improve fabric shrink resistance.


CLS 442/107
TXT Coating or impregnation provides crease-resistance or wash and wear
    characteristics:

    Subject matter under subclass 104 wherein the coating or impregnation is
    specifically stated to improve fabric crease-resistance or wash and wear
    characteristics.


CLS 442/108
TXT Coating or impregnation specified as a size:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the coating or impregnation is
    specifically stated to be a size or sizing material.


CLS 442/109
TXT Coating or impregnation improves snag or pull resistance of the fabric:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the coating or impregnation is
    specifically stated to improve fabric snag or pull resistance.


CLS 442/110
TXT Coating or impregnation increases electrical conductivity or anti-static
    quality:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the coating or impregnation is
    specifically stated to increase fabric electrical conductivity or
    anti-static quality.


CLS 442/111
TXT Elemental carbon containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein the coating or impregnation
    comprises elemental carbon.


CLS 442/112
TXT Linear polyether group chain containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein the coating or impregnation
    comprises a linear polyether group chain.


CLS 442/113
TXT Nitrogen and phosphorus containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein the coating or impregnation
    comprises nitrogen and phosphorus.


CLS 442/114
TXT Phosphorus containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein the coating or impregnation
    contains phosphorus.


CLS 442/115
TXT Nitrogen containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein the coating or impregnation
    comprises nitrogen.


CLS 442/116
TXT Sulphur containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein the coating or impregnation
    comprises sulphur.


CLS 442/117
TXT Coating or impregnation is electrical insulation-providing, -improving, or
    -increasing or conductivity- reducing:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the coating or impregnation is
    specifically stated to provide, improve, or increase fabric electrical
    insulating or reduce fabric conductivity.


CLS 442/118
TXT Coating or impregnation is water absorbency-increasing or
    hydrophilicity-increasing or hydrophilicity-imparting:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the coating or impregnation is
    specifically stated to increase fabric or impart to the fabric water
    absorbency or hydrophilicity.


CLS 442/119
TXT Polyether group containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein the coating or impregnation
    comprises a polyether group.


CLS 442/120
TXT Coating or impregnation absorbs sound:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the coating or impregnation is
    specifically stated to absorb sound.


CLS 442/121
TXT Coating or impregnation absorbs chemical material other than water:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the coating or impregnation is
    specifically stated to absorb chemical material (e.g., heavy metal, etc.,
    but not water).


CLS 442/122
TXT Chemical material is one used in biological or chemical warfare:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the coating or impregnation is
    specifically stated to be used in biological or chemical warfare.


CLS 442/123
TXT Coating or impregnation functions biologically (e.g., insect repellent,
    antiseptic, insecticide, bactericide, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the coating or impregnation is
    specifically stated to function biologically, including functioning as an
    insect repellent, antiseptic, insecticide, bactericide, etc.


CLS 442/124
TXT Inhibits mildew:

    Subject matter under subclass 123 wherein the coating or impregnation is
    specifically stated to inhibit the growth of mildew.


CLS 442/125
TXT Insect repellent:

    Subject matter under subclass 123 wherein the coating or impregnation is
    specifically stated to be an insect repellent.


CLS 442/126
TXT Coating or impregnation is chemically inert or of  stated nonreactance:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the coating or impregnation is
    specifically stated to be chemically inert or nonreactant.


CLS 442/127
TXT Oxygen or ozone resistant:

    Subject matter under subclass 126 wherein the coating or impregnation is
    specifically stated to be resistant to oxygen or ozone.


CLS 442/128
TXT Organic solvent resistant (e.g., dry cleaning fluid,  etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 126 wherein the coating or impregnation is
    specifically stated to be resistant to organic solvents such as dry
    cleaning fluid.


CLS 442/129
TXT Acid or alkali resistant:

    Subject matter under subclass 126 wherein the coating or impregnation is
    specifically stated to be resistant to acid or alkali.


CLS 442/130
TXT Coating or impregnation contains an optical bleach or brightener or
    functions as an optical bleach or brightener (e.g., it masks fabric
    yellowing, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the coating or impregnation is
    specifically stated to contain an optical bleach or brightener, act as an
    optical bleach or brightener, or mask fabric yellowing.


CLS 442/131
TXT Coating or impregnation provides protection from radiation (e.g., U.V.,
    visible light, I.R., microwave, high energy particle, etc.) or
    heat-retention thru radiation absorption:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the coating or impregnation is
    specifically stated to provide protection from radiation or absorption of
    radiation, the radiation being U.V., visible light, I.R., microwave, high
    energy particle, etc.


CLS 442/132
TXT Radiation reflective:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the coating or impregnation is
    specifically stated to reflect radiation.


CLS 442/133
TXT Radiation absorptive:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the coating or impregnation is
    specifically stated to absorb radiation.


CLS 442/134
TXT Coating or impregnation is resistant to penetration  by solid implements:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the coating or impregnation is
    specifically stated to resist penetration by solid implements such as
    bullets, knives, etc.


CLS 442/135
TXT Ballistic resistant:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 wherein the coating or impregnation is
    specifically stated to resist penetration by projectiles.


CLS 442/136
TXT Coating or impregnation provides heat or fire protection:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the coating or impregnation is
    specifically stated to provide protection from heat or fire.


CLS 442/137
TXT Coated or impregnated asbestos fabric:

    Subject matter under subclass 136 wherein the fabric comprises an asbestos
    fabric.


CLS 442/138
TXT Coating or impregnation is specified as an intumescent material:

    Subject matter under subclass 136 wherein the coating or impregnation is
    specifically stated to be an intumescent material.

    (1)     Note. An intumescent material comprises a material which swells,
    enlarges, or expands upon application of moisture or heat.


CLS 442/139
TXT Antimony containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 136 wherein the coating or impregnation
    comprises antimony.


CLS 442/140
TXT Boron containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 136 wherein the coating or impregnation
    comprises boron.


CLS 442/141
TXT Phosphorus containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 136 wherein the coating or impregnation
    comprises phosphorus.


CLS 442/142
TXT Phosphorus and nitrogen containing compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the coating or impregnation
    contains a compound which comprises phosphorus and nitrogen.


CLS 442/143
TXT A phosphorus containing compound and a nitrogen containing compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the coating or impregnation
    contains a compound comprising phosphorus and a compound comprising
    nitrogen.


CLS 442/144
TXT Phosphorus and halogen containing compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the coating or impregnation
    contains a compound comprising phosphorus and halogen.


CLS 442/145
TXT A phosphorus containing compound and a halogen containing compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the coating or impregnation
    contains a compound comprising phosphorus and a compound comprising halogen.


CLS 442/146
TXT Halogen containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 136 wherein the coating or impregnation
    comprises halogen.


CLS 442/147
TXT Nitrogen containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 136 wherein the coating or impregnation
    comprises nitrogen.


CLS 442/148
TXT Coating or impregnation provides wear or abrasion resistance:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the coating or impregnation is
    specifically stated to resist wear or abrasion.


CLS 442/149
TXT Coating or impregnation intended to function as an adhesive to solid
    surfaces subsequently associated therewith:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the coating or impregnation
    functions as an adhesive, the adhesive being used to adhere at least one
    solid surface subsequently associated with the coated or impregnated fabric.


CLS 442/150
TXT Heat-activatable adhesive:

    Subject matter under subclass 149 wherein the coating or impregnation is an
    adhesive which is heat activatable.


CLS 442/151
TXT Pressure-sensitive adhesive:

    Subject matter under subclass 149 wherein the coating or impregnation is an
    adhesive which is pressure sensitive.


CLS 442/152
TXT Coated or impregnated natural fiber fabric (e.g., cotton, wool, silk,
    linen, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the fabric comprises a naturally
    occurring fiber such as cotton wool, silk, linen, etc.


CLS 442/153
TXT Coated or impregnated cellulosic fiber fabric:

    Subject matter under subclass 152 wherein the naturally occurring fiber
    comprises cellulosic fiber.


CLS 442/154
TXT Coating or impregnation contains an acrylic polymer or copolymer (e.g.,
    polyacrylonitrile, polyacrylic acid, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 153 wherein the coating or impregnation
    comprises an acrylic polymer or copolymer such as polyacrylonitrile,
    polyacrylic acid, etc.


CLS 442/155
TXT Coating or impregnation contains a vinyl polymer or copolymer:

    Subject matter under subclass 153 wherein the coating or impregnation
    comprises a vinyl polymer or copolymer.


CLS 442/156
TXT Coating or impregnation contains an epoxy polymer or copolymer or
    polyether:

    Subject matter under subclass 153 wherein the coating or impregnation
    comprises a polyether or an epoxy polymer or copolymer.


CLS 442/157
TXT Polymeric coating or impregnation from a silane or siloxane not specified
    as lubricant or water repellent:

    Subject matter under subclass 153 wherein the coating or impregnation
    comprises a silane or siloxane polymer, the polymer not being a lubricant
    or water repellent.


CLS 442/158
TXT Coating or impregnation contains polyimide or polyamide:

    Subject matter under subclass 153 wherein the coating or impregnation
    comprises polyimide or polyamide.


CLS 442/159
TXT Coating or impregnation contains natural gum, rosin, natural oil, or wax:

    Subject matter under subclass 153 wherein the coating or impregnation
    comprises natural gum, rosin, natural oil, or wax.


CLS 442/160
TXT Coating or impregnation contains aldehyde or ketone condensation product:

    Subject matter under subclass 153 wherein the coating or impregnation
    comprises a product resulting from the condensation of an aldehyde or a
    ketone.


CLS 442/161
TXT Phenol-aldehyde condensate:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein the condensation product
    comprises a phenol-aldehyde condensate.


CLS 442/162
TXT Melamine-aldehyde condensate:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein the condensation product
    comprises a melamine- aldehyde condensate.


CLS 442/163
TXT Amide-aldehyde condensate (e.g., modified urea-aldehyde condensate, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein the condensation product
    comprises an amide-aldehyde condensate such as modified urea-aldehyde
    condensate.


CLS 442/164
TXT Coated or impregnated synthetic organic fiber fabric:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the fabric comprises synthetic
    organic fiber.


CLS 442/165
TXT Coated or impregnated regenerated cellulose fiber comprises synthetic
    organic fiber  fabric:

    Subject matter under subclass 164 wherein the synthetic organic fiber is a
    regenerated cellulose fiber.


CLS 442/166
TXT Coated or impregnated polyvinyl alcohol fiber fabric:

    Subject matter under subclass 164 wherein the synthetic organic fiber is a
    polyvinyl alcohol fiber.


CLS 442/167
TXT Coated or impregnated acrylic fiber fabric:

    Subject matter under subclass 164 wherein the synthetic organic fiber is an
    acrylic fiber.


CLS 442/168
TXT Coated or impregnated polyamide fiber fabric:

    Subject matter under subclass 164 wherein the synthetic organic fiber is a
    polyamide fiber.


CLS 442/169
TXT Aromatic polyamide fiber fabric:

    Subject matter under subclass 168 wherein the polyamide fiber is an
    aromatic polyamide fiber.


CLS 442/170
TXT Coated or impregnated polyolefin fiber fabric:

    Subject matter under subclass 164  wherein the synthetic organic fiber is a
    polyolefin fiber.


CLS 442/171
TXT Polypropylene fiber fabric:

    Subject matter under subclass 170 wherein the polyolefin fiber is a
    polypropylene fiber.


CLS 442/172
TXT Coated or impregnated inorganic fiber fabric:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the fabric comprises an inorganic
    fiber.


CLS 442/173
TXT Coating or impregnation contains vinyl polymer or  copolymer:

    Subject matter under subclass 172 wherein the coating or impregnation
    comprises vinyl polymer or copolymer.


CLS 442/174
TXT Vinyl acetate polymer or copolymer:

    Subject matter under subclass 173 wherein the vinyl polymer or copolymer
    comprises a vinyl acetate polymer or copolymer.


CLS 442/175
TXT Coating or impregnation contains epoxy polymer or  copolymer or polyether:


    Subject matter under subclass 172 wherein the coating or impregnation
    comprises a polyether or an epoxy polymer or copolymer.


CLS 442/176
TXT Coating or impregnation contains aldehyde or ketone condensation product:

    Subject matter under subclass 172 wherein the coating or impregnation
    comprises a product resulting from the condensation of an aldehyde or a
    ketone.


CLS 442/177
TXT Amide-aldehyde condensate:

    Subject matter under subclass 176 wherein the condensation product
    comprises an amide-aldehyde condensate.


CLS 442/178
TXT Coated or impregnated ceramic fiber fabric:

    Subject matter under subclass 172 wherein the inorganic fiber is a ceramic
    fiber.


CLS 442/179
TXT Coated or impregnated carbon or carbonaceous fiber fabric:

    Subject matter under subclass 172 wherein the inorganic fiber is a carbon
    (graphite) or carbonaceous fiber.


CLS 442/180
TXT Coated or impregnated glass fiber fabric:

    Subject matter under subclass 172 wherein the inorganic fiber is a glass
    fiber.


CLS 442/181
TXT WOVEN FABRIC (I.E., WOVEN STRAND OR STRIP MATERIAL):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the fabric is a woven
    fabric composed of at least one set of strands or strips in a warp
    direction interengaged with at least one set of strands or strips in a fill
    or weft direction, the fill or weft direction being at an angle other than
    0o relative to the warp direction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    139,    Textiles: Weaving, subclass 383 for woven fabrics made solely by a
    weaving process without any other fabric processing prior to or following
    weaving.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 34.1+ for
    hollow or container type articles (e.g., tube, vase, etc.) containing at
    least one woven fabric;  subclasses 105+ for woven fabrics wherein strands
    or strips thereof are disposed in angular relation to strands or strips in
    a second layer or component; subclass 114 for woven fabrics wherein strands
    or strips thereof are arranged in parallel relation to strands or strips in
    a second layer or component; subclasses 175+ for a product of uniform
    thickness but of nonplanar characteristics and comprising interengaged
    strands or strips; and subclass 196 for woven fabrics with a discontinuous
    coating, impregnation, or bond.


CLS 442/182
TXT Woven fabric has an elastic quality:

    Subject matter under subclass 181 wherein the fabric has an ability to
    recover substantially its original shape and size immediately after removal
    of deformation or elongation causing stress.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    139,    Textiles: Weaving, subclasses 421 through 423 for elastic woven
    fabrics made solely by a weaving process without any other fabric
    processing prior to or following weaving.


CLS 442/183
TXT Including a preformed layer other than the elastic woven fabric (e.g.,
    fabric or film or foil or sheet layer, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 182 wherein the elastic fabric has a
    preformed layer associated therewith, the preformed layer having structural
    integrity prior to association with the elastic woven fabric and being in
    the form of a film, foil, sheet, or additional fabric layer.


CLS 442/184
TXT Including elastic strand or strip:

    Subject matter under subclass 182 wherein a strand or strip or a
    filamentary component of a strand or strip of which the fabric is composed
    is characterized  by elastic qualities (e.g., it is formed of or has a core
    of elastomeric polymeric material).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    190     and 191, for fabric composed of a non-elastomeric core-spun strand.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 225 and 226
    for elastomeric core-spun yarns,  per se.


CLS 442/185
TXT Including a strip or ribbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 181 wherein a strip or ribbon has been woven
    into the fabric.

    (1)     Note. A strip or ribbon is an elongated element having a width
    which substantially exceeds its thickness.


CLS 442/186
TXT Woven fabric comprises strips or ribbons only:

    Subject matter under subclass 185 wherein the fabric is woven solely from
    ribbons or strips (i.e., does not contain woven strands or yarns).


CLS 442/187
TXT Including strand precoated with other than free metal or alloy:

    Subject matter under subclass 181 comprising a strand which has been coated
    with a non-metallic material prior to incorporation into the woven fabric.


CLS 442/188
TXT Multiple coatings:

    Subject matter under subclass 187 wherein the strand had been subjected to
    more than one coating prior to weaving.


CLS 442/189
TXT Including strand which is of specific structural     definition:

    Subject matter under subclass 181 wherein the fabric comprises (a) strands
    having a specific structural characteristics such as being composed of
    individual filaments having different chemical composition twisted together
    or being core-spun about a non-elastic core or (b) the strands, per se, or
    individual filamentary materials comprising the strands are characterized
    by a specific structural feature such as non-linearity, a particular cross
    section, or a particular absolute size of any feature, component, or
    dimension (e.g., length, width, or thickness, etc.).


CLS 442/190
TXT Strand material is core-spun (not sheath-core bicomponent strand):

    Subject matter under subclass 189 wherein the strand is a yarn made by
    twisting fibers around a filament or yarn core to form a fibrous sheath
    about the core.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 224 through
    230 for core-spun yarns, per se.


CLS 442/191
TXT Core is synthetic polymeric material:

    Subject matter under subclass 190 wherein the material of the core
    comprises a synthetic polymeric material.


CLS 442/192
TXT Cross-sectional configuration of strand material is specified:

    Subject matter under subclass 189 wherein the cross-sectional shape of the
    strand material or a filamentary constituent thereof is specified.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 397 through
    402 for strand material having, per se, particular cross sections or
    physical dimensions.


CLS 442/193
TXT Cross-sectional configuration varies longitudinally along the strand:

    Subject matter under subclass 192 wherein the cross section of the strand
    material or filamentary constituent thereof changes along the length
    thereof either in dimension or shape.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 399 for
    longitudinally varying strands, per se.


CLS 442/194
TXT Hollow strand material:

    Subject matter under subclass 192 wherein the strand material or a
    filamentary constituent thereof is tubular or hollow or characterized by
    one or more voids either coextensive or non-coextensive along the length
    thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 398 for hollow
    strand material, per se.


CLS 442/195
TXT Cross-sectional configuration of the strand material is other than circular:

    Subject matter under subclass 192 wherein the cross-sectional configuration
    of the strand material  is specified, the cross-sectional configuration not
    being circular.


CLS 442/196
TXT Cross-sectional configuration is multi-lobal:

    Subject matter under subclass 195 wherein the cross-sectional configuration
    of the strand material is characterized by two or more lobes (i.e., rounded
    projections or divisions).


CLS 442/197
TXT Strand material formed of individual filaments having different chemical
    compositions:

    Subject matter under subclass 189 wherein the strand material is composed
    of at least two chemically different individual filaments.


CLS 442/198
TXT Including inorganic filament:

    Subject matter under subclass 197 wherein at least one of the two
    chemically different individual filaments comprises inorganic material
    (e.g., glass, ceramic, mineral, carbon, or metal filaments, etc.).


CLS 442/199
TXT Strand material is composed of two or more polymeric materials in
    physically distinct  relationship (e.g., sheath-core, side-by-side,
    islands-in-sea, fibrils-in-matrix, etc.) or composed of physical blend of
    chemically different polymeric materials or a physical blend of a polymeric
    material and a filler material:

    Subject matter under subclass 181 wherein the strand material, per se, or a
    filamentary constituent thereof is composed of (a) two or more synthetic
    polymeric materials which are specified as being in sheath-core,
    side-by-side, islands-in-sea, fibrils-in-matrix, or any other physically
    distinct relationship across a cross section thereof, (b) a physical blend
    of two or more polymeric materials specifically disclosed and/or claimed as
    having distinctly different chemical characteristics, or (c) a blend or an
    admixture of a  polymeric material and a filler material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 372 for strands
    and filaments, per se, in combination with structurally defined particulate
     matter; and subclasses 373 and 374 for multicomponent strands and
    filaments, per se.


CLS 442/200
TXT Sheath-core multicomponent strand material:

    Subject matter under subclass 199 wherein the strand or a filamentary
    component thereof contains two or more synthetic polymeric materials which
    are in sheath-core relationship across a cross section thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 333 for a
    sheath-core filament or strand, per se.


CLS 442/201
TXT Islands-in-sea multicomponent strand material:

    Subject matter under subclass 199 wherein the strand or a filamentary
    component thereof is characterized by two or more distinct polymeric
    materials in islands-in-sea distinct physical relationship across a cross
    section thereof.


CLS 442/202
TXT Strand material is a blend of polymeric material and a filler material:

    Subject matter under subclass 199 wherein the strand or a filamentary
    component thereof comprises a blend or admixture of a synthetic polymeric
    material and one or more specified filler materials.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 372 for a strand
    or filament, per se, in combination with particulate matter.


CLS 442/203
TXT Woven fabric is characterized by a particular or   differential weave other
    than fabric in which the  strand denier or warp/weft pick count is
    specified:

    Subject matter under subclass 181 wherein a characteristic of the fabric
    weave is specified other than the strand denier or the pick yarn (i.e.,
    filling yarn) or warp yarn count (i.e., the number of yarns per specified
    unit of measure).


    SEARCH CLASS:

    139,    Textiles: Weaving, subclasses 383+ through 420+ for woven fabrics
    made solely by a weaving process without any other fabric processing prior
    to or following weaving.


CLS 442/204
TXT Triaxially woven fabric:

    Subject matter under subclass 203 wherein the fabric is specified as having
    been woven with strands disposed in at least three directions within an x-y
    plane.


CLS 442/205
TXT Three dimensional weave (e.g., x-y-z planes, multiplanar warps and/or
    wefts, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 203 wherein the fabric is specified as
    composed of multiple stacked warps and/or multiple stacked wefts held in
    place, respectively, by weft or warp strands.


CLS 442/206
TXT Multi-planar warp layers:

    Subject matter under subclass 205 wherein the fabric is  characterized by
    multiple warp layers in more than one plane.


CLS 442/207
TXT Multi-planar weft layers:

    Subject matter under subclass 205 wherein the fabric is  characterized by
    multiple weft layers in more than one plane.


CLS 442/208
TXT Warp differs from weft:

    Subject matter under subclass 203 wherein the warp yarns are stated to
    differ from the weft yarns in some specifically detailed manner other than
    a difference in denier or the number of yarns per unit of length or width.


CLS 442/209
TXT Materials differ:

    Subject matter under subclass 208 wherein the strand material composing the
    warps and wefts differs chemically.


CLS 442/210
TXT Including inorganic strand material:

    Subject matter under subclass 209 wherein the strands of the warp and/or
    the weft are composed of inorganic material (e.g., carbon, ceramic,
    mineral, glass, etc.).


CLS 442/211
TXT Including natural strand material (e.g., cotton, wool, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein the strands of the warp and/or
    the weft are composed of inorganic and natural materials (e.g., cotton,
    wool, etc.).


CLS 442/212
TXT Including synthetic polymeric strand material:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein the strands of the warp and/or
    the weft are composed of inorganic and synthetic polymeric material (e.g.,
    viscose rayon, polyamide, polyester, polyimide, etc.).


CLS 442/213
TXT Including synthetic polymeric strand material:

    Subject matter under subclass 209 wherein the strands of the warp and/or
    the weft are composed of synthetic polymeric material (e.g., viscose rayon,
    polyamide, polyester, polyimide, etc.).


CLS 442/214
TXT Including natural strand material:

    Subject matter under subclass 213 wherein the strands of the warp and/or
    the weft are composed of synthetic polymeric and natural material.


CLS 442/215
TXT Including polyamide strand material:

    Subject matter under subclass 213 wherein the synthetic polymeric material
    is a polyamide (e.g.,  nylon, etc.).


CLS 442/216
TXT Including polyester strand material:

    Subject matter under subclass 213 wherein the synthetic polymeric material
    is a polyester (e.g., Dacron# , etc.).


CLS 442/217
TXT Warp and weft are identical and contain at least two chemically different
    strand materials:

    Subject matter under subclass 203 wherein at least two chemically different
    strand materials are disposed in the warp and the same combination of
    chemically different strand materials are disposed in the weft.


CLS 442/218
TXT Coated, impregnated, or autogenous bonded:

    Subject matter under subclass 203 wherein the fabric has been coated or
    impregnated or autogenously bonded (i.e., wherein strands or filamentary
    components thereof have been caused to adhere to one another through
    activation of an inherent cohesive or adhesive property by heat and/or
    pressure or application of solvent).


CLS 442/219
TXT Woven fabric contains inorganic strand material:

    Subject matter under subclass 218 wherein the strands are composed of
    inorganic material (e.g., carbon, ceramic, mineral, glass, etc.).


CLS 442/220
TXT Woven fabric contains synthetic polymeric strand material:

    Subject matter under subclass 218 wherein the strands are composed of
    synthetic polymeric material (e.g., viscose rayon, polyamide, polyimide,
    polyester, etc.).


CLS 442/221
TXT Including a foamed layer or component:

    Subject matter under subclass 181 including a component or layer specified
    as being a foam (i.e., a material characterized by a multitude of open or
    closed cells).


CLS 442/222
TXT Including a free metal or alloy constituent:

    Subject matter under subclass 221 having a constituent which is a metal in
    elemental or alloy form (i.e., other than in the form of a chelate, salt,
    or compound resulting from the chemical reaction of a metal).

    (1)     Note. Classified here is, for example, a fabric-foam combination
    wherein (a) the fabric or the foam has been provided with a metal coating,
    (b) the fabric is composed of a strand comprising elemental metal, or (c) a
    metal layer having structural integrity has been adhesively associated with
    the foam and/or fabric layer.


CLS 442/223
TXT Plural foamed layers:

    Subject matter under subclass 221 characterized by having two or more
    distinct foam layers.


CLS 442/224
TXT Plural fabric layers:

    Subject matter under subclass 221 characterized by having two or more
    distinct fabric layers.


CLS 442/225
TXT Including a nonwoven fabric layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 224 wherein at least one fabric layer is
    nonwoven.


CLS 442/226
TXT Woven fabric is coated, impregnated, or autogenously bonded:

    Subject matter under subclass 221 wherein the woven fabric has been coated
    or impregnated or autogenously bonded (i.e., wherein the strands or
    filamentary components thereof have been caused to adhere to one another
    through activation of an inherent cohesive or adhesive property by heat
    and/or pressure or application of solvent).


CLS 442/227
TXT Coating or impregnation includes particulate material other than fiber:

    Subject matter under subclass 226 wherein the coating or impregnation
    contains particulate material which is not fiber.


CLS 442/228
TXT Including a free metal or alloy constituent:

    Subject matter under subclass 181 having a constituent which is a metal in
    elemental or alloy form (i.e., in other than the form of a chelate, salt,
    or compound resulting from the chemical reaction of a metal).


CLS 442/229
TXT Metal or metal-coated strand:

    Subject matter under subclass 228 wherein the metal constituent is in the
    form of a strand or a coating applied to a strand or strands prior to
    weaving the strand or strands into a fabric.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    139,    Textiles: Weaving, subclass 425 for metal-containing fabrics formed
    solely from a weaving process and no other process prior to or following
    weaving.


CLS 442/230
TXT Vapor or sputter deposited metal layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 228 wherein the metal constituent is in the
    form of a metal coating provided by a vapor deposition or sputter
    deposition process.


CLS 442/231
TXT Chemically deposited metal layer (e.g., chemical precipitation or
    electrochemical deposition or  plating, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 228 wherein the metal constituent is in the
    form of a distinct layer provided by a chemical or electrochemical process
    such as chemical precipitation, electrochemical deposition, or plating.


CLS 442/232
TXT Preformed metallic film or foil or sheet (film or foil or sheet had
    structural integrity prior to association with the woven fabric):

    Subject matter under subclass 228 wherein the metal constituent comprises
    at least one preformed film, foil, or sheet layer having had structural
    integrity prior to its association with the fabric.


CLS 442/233
TXT Plural metallic films or foils or sheets:

    Subject matter under subclass 232 characterized by two or more such
    preformed layers.


CLS 442/234
TXT Plural fabric layers:

    Subject matter under subclass 232 characterized by having two or more
    fabric (woven, nonwoven, knit) layers.


CLS 442/235
TXT Including a nonwoven fabric layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 234 wherein at least one fabric layer is
    nonwoven.


CLS 442/236
TXT Including a preformed synthetic polymeric film or sheet (i.e., film or
    sheet having structural integrity prior to association with the woven
    fabric):

    Subject matter under subclass 232 which contains at least one additional
    preformed synthetic polymeric film or sheet having had structural integrity
    prior to association with the fabric and which maintains its structural
    integrity after association with the fabric.


CLS 442/237
TXT Including particulate material other than fiber:

    Subject matter under subclass 232 which contains particulate material which
    is not fiber.


CLS 442/238
TXT Plural fabric layers:

    Subject matter under subclass 228 characterized by having two or more
    fabric (woven, nonwoven, knit) layers.


CLS 442/239
TXT Woven fabric including an additional woven fabric layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 181 wherein the woven fabric is in combined
    association with an additional woven fabric.


CLS 442/240
TXT Mechanically needled or hydroentangled:

    Subject matter under subclass 239 wherein the woven fabric layers have been
    adhered to one another by a mechanical needling or hydroentanglement
    process.

    (1)     Note. In a mechanical needling process, barbed needles are forced
    through fiber layers and in the process displace enough fibers to cause
    interlayer penetration of fibers with resultant fiber layer bonding.

    (2)     Note. In a hydroentanglement process, streams of water are forced
    through fiber layers and in the process displace enough fibers to cause
    interlayer penetration of fibers with resultant fiber layer bonding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    148 for a process of associating one woven web with another using a process
    of needling.


CLS 442/241
TXT Four or more layers:

    Subject matter under subclass 240 wherein four or more layers have been
    subjected to a needling or hydroentanglement operation.


CLS 442/242
TXT Coated, impregnated, or autogenously bonded:

    Subject matter under subclass 240 wherein at least one woven fabric has
    been coated or impregnated or subjected to autogenous bonding (i.e.,
    wherein the strand or filamentary components of the fabric have been caused
    to adhere to one another through activation of an inherent cohesive or
    adhesive property by heat and/or pressure or application of solvent).


CLS 442/243
TXT Woven fabric layers comprise chemically different strand material:

    Subject matter under subclass 239 wherein the woven fabrics differ
    chemically one from another due to the composition of strand materials
    incorporated therein.


CLS 442/244
TXT Three or more fabric layers:

    Subject matter under subclass 243 composed of three or more fabric (woven,
    nonwoven, knitted) layers.


CLS 442/245
TXT One of which is a nonwoven fabric layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 244 wherein at least one  fabric layer is
    nonwoven.

    (1)     Note. A nonwoven fabric is an assembly having structural integrity
    of continuous or discontinuous fibers held together in random or ordered
    (e.g., parallel, etc.) array by (a) mechanical interlock (e.g., as a
    consequence of needling or hydroentangling, etc.), (b) in the case of
    thermoplastic fibers, heat-induced bonding (i.e., fusing), or (c) an
    impregnation or coating of a bonding agent. Paper is not to be considered
    as nonwoven fabric for classification here.


CLS 442/246
TXT Three or more fabric layers:

    Subject matter under subclass 239 wherein the woven fabric is combined with
    two or more additional fabric (woven, nonwoven, knit) layers.


CLS 442/247
TXT One of which is a nonwoven fabric layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 246 wherein at least one of the additional
    fabric layers is nonwoven.


CLS 442/248
TXT Woven fabric layers impregnated with a blend of thermosetting and
    thermoplastic resins:

    Subject matter under subclass 246 wherein the woven fabric layers are
    impregnated with a blend of a thermosetting resin (i.e., a resin which
    hardens when subjected to heating conditions) and a thermoplastic resin
    (i.e., a resin rendered soft and moldable under heating conditions).


CLS 442/249
TXT Woven fabric layers impregnated with an organosilicon resin:

    Subject matter under subclass 246 wherein the layers have been impregnated
    with a polymeric organic silicon compound or an organosilicon oxide
    polymer.

    (1)     Note. Organosilicon resins usually serve as water and
    heat-resistant lubricants and finishers and can impart stain resistance,
    water repellency, and an enhanced crease resistance and feeling of softness
    to fabrics treated therewith.


CLS 442/250
TXT Woven fabric layers impregnated with a natural or synthetic rubber:

    Subject matter under subclass 246 wherein the layers have been impregnated
    with a natural or synthetic rubber.


CLS 442/251
TXT Woven fabric layers impregnated with a thermosetting resin:

    Subject matter under subclass 246 wherein the fabric layers have been
    impregnated with a resin which hardens when subjected to heating
    conditions.


CLS 442/252
TXT Phenolic resin:

    Subject matter under subclass 251 wherein the thermosetting resin is
    produced by condensing an aldehyde or ketone with a phenol or phenolate.


CLS 442/253
TXT Epoxy resin:

    Subject matter under subclass 251 wherein the thermosetting resin is
    produced by reacting an epoxide (e.g., epichlorohydrin, etc.) and a polyol
    (e.g., bisphenol, etc.) or alcoholate thereof.


CLS 442/254
TXT Woven fabric layers impregnated with a thermoplastic resin (e.g., vinyl
    polymer, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 246 wherein the woven fabric layers have been
    impregnated with a resin which is rendered soft and moldable under heating
    conditions such as vinyl polymer.


CLS 442/255
TXT Three or more distinct layers:

    Subject matter under subclass 239 wherein the woven fabric is combined with
    two or more additional distinct layers.


CLS 442/256
TXT At least one layer is derived from water-settable material (e.g., cement,
    gypsum, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 255 wherein at least one layer contains a
    water-settable material (e.g., cement, gypsum, etc.) which forms a distinct
    layer.


CLS 442/257
TXT At least one layer contains wood or cork:

    Subject matter under subclass 255 wherein at least one layer comprises a
    material derived from the structural element of a tree or shrub or the bark
    of a tree.


CLS 442/258
TXT At least one layer contains bituminous material (e.g., tar pitch, asphalt,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 255 wherein at least one layer is disclosed
    as being pitch, asphalt, tar, bitumen, or the residue from the distillation
    of mineral oil and/or coal.


CLS 442/259
TXT At least one layer comprises paper:

    Subject matter under subclass 255 wherein at least one layer comprises a
    sheet or web having structural integrity formed by the deposition of
    animal, vegetable, mineral, or synthetic fibers or mixtures thereof from a
    fluid suspension or dispersion which may or may not contain additional
    materials.


CLS 442/260
TXT At least one layer contains natural or synthetic rubber:

    Subject matter under subclass 255 wherein at least one layer comprises a
    natural or synthetic rubber.


CLS 442/261
TXT At least one layer is a preformed synthetic polymeric film or sheet:


    Subject matter under subclass 255 wherein at least one of the additional
    layers comprises a preformed synthetic polymer which is in the form of a
    film, foil, or sheet having had structural integrity prior to its
    association with the fabric.


CLS 442/262
TXT At least one layer comprises ceramic or glass material in other than
    particulate form:

    Subject matter under subclass 255 wherein at least one layer comprises
    compound in non-particulate form composed of one or more fired non-metallic
    inorganic compounds or one or more fused metallic silicates.


CLS 442/263
TXT Composite consisting of at least two woven fabrics bonded by an interposed
    adhesive layer (but not two woven fabrics bonded together by an
    impregnation which penetrates through the thickness of at least one of the
    woven fabric layers):

    Subject matter under subclass 255 characterized by the presence of at least
    two juxtaposed woven fabric layers with a distinct adhesive layer
    interposed therebetween.

    (1)     Note. The adhesive layer is not provided by an impregnation
    penetrating through the thickness of at least one of the woven fabric
    layers.


CLS 442/264
TXT Fabric layer contains natural strand material:

    Subject matter under subclass 263 wherein at least one fabric layer
    contains animal (e.g., wool, silk, etc.), vegetable (e.g, cotton, flax,
    etc.), or mineral (e.g., asbestos, etc.) naturally occurring filamentary
    material.


CLS 442/265
TXT Fabric layer contains carbon or carbonaceous strand material:

    Subject matter under subclass 263 wherein at least one fabric layer
    contains carbon (graphite) stran material  or a high tensile strength,
    stiff filamentary material produced by heating the filamentary material
    under conditions tending to remove all elements but carbon.


CLS 442/266
TXT Fabric layer contains glass strand material:

    Subject matter under subclass 263 wherein at least one fabric layer is
    composed of strand material comprising filamentary material produced by
    spinning molten glass.


CLS 442/267
TXT Including particulate material other than fiber:

    Subject matter under subclass 255 wherein at least one of the layers
    contains particulate material which is not fiber.


CLS 442/268
TXT Woven fabric including a nonwoven fabric other than paper:

    Subject matter under subclass 181 wherein the woven fabric is in
    association with a nonwoven fabric, which is not paper.


CLS 442/269
TXT Nonwoven fabric layer comprises parallel arrays of strand material:

    Subject matter under subclass 268 wherein the nonwoven fabric comprises
    strand material which has been oriented in a particular direction, the
    strand material components being parallel to one another.


CLS 442/270
TXT Needled:

    Subject matter under subclass 268 wherein the fabric layers have been
    adhered to one another by a mechanical needling.

    (1)     Note. In a mechanical needling process, barbed needles are forced
    through fibrous layers and in the process displace enough fibers to cause
    interlayer penetration of fibers and fiber layer bonding as a consequence
    of interlayer fiber friction.


CLS 442/271
TXT Including an additional nonwoven fabric:

    Subject matter under subclass 270 characterized by the presence of two or
    more nonwoven fabrics which are not paper.


CLS 442/272
TXT Additional nonwoven fabric comprises chemically different strand material
    than the first nonwoven fabric:

    Subject matter under subclass 271 wherein the chemical characteristics of
    the strand material comprising two different nonwoven fabrics are
    distinctly different.


CLS 442/273
TXT Including inorganic strand material:

    Subject matter under subclass 271 wherein at least one of the nonwoven
    fabrics is composed of strand material which is inorganic (e.g., glass,
    ceramic, carbon, etc.).


CLS 442/274
TXT Nonwoven fabric layer comprises at least two chemically different fibers:

    Subject matter under subclass 270 wherein the nonwoven fabric layer
    contains two or more fibrous materials having distinctly different chemical
    characteristics.


CLS 442/275
TXT Coated, impregnated, or autogenously bonded:

    Subject matter under subclass 270 wherein at least one layer has been
    coated or impregnated or subjected to autogenous bonding (i.e., wherein
    strand or filamentary components have been caused to adhere to one another
    through activation of an inherent cohesive or adhesive property by heat
    and/or pressure or application of solvent).


CLS 442/276
TXT Hydroentangled:

    Subject matter under subclass 268 wherein the fabric layers have been
    adhered to one another by hydroentangling.

    (1)     Note. In a hydroentangling process, liquid streams impinge against
    fibrous layers and penetrate thereinto and in the process displace enough
    fibers to cause interlayer penetration of fibers and fiber layer bonding as
    a consequence of interlayer fiber friction.


CLS 442/277
TXT Coated, impregnated, or autogenously bonded:

    Subject matter under subclass 268 wherein at least one layer has been
    coated or impregnated or subjected to autogenous bonding (i.e., wherein
    strand or filamentary components have been caused to adhere to one another
    through activation of an inherent cohesive or adhesive property by heat
    and/or pressure or application of solvent).


CLS 442/278
TXT Plural nonwoven fabric layers:

    Subject matter under subclass 277 wherein at least two nonwoven fabric
    layers which are not paper are associated with a woven fabric layer.


CLS 442/279
TXT Coating or impregnation is derived from a water-settable material (e.g.,
    cement, gypsum, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 277 wherein the coating or impregnation is a
    water-settable material (e.g., cement, gypsum, etc.) which forms a distinct
    layer.


CLS 442/280
TXT Coating or impregnation contains natural or synthetic rubber:

    Subject matter under subclass 277 wherein the coating or impregnation
    includes natural or synthetic rubber.


CLS 442/281
TXT Coating or impregnation contains synthetic polymeric material:

    Subject matter under subclass 277 wherein at least one fabric layer has
    been coated or impregnated with a polymeric material, the polymeric
    material being synthetic.


CLS 442/282
TXT Coating or impregnation contains bituminous material:

    Subject matter under subclass 277 wherein at least one layer is disclosed
    as being coated or impregnated with a pitch, asphalt, tar, bitumen, or the
    residue from the distillation of mineral oil and/or coal.


CLS 442/283
TXT Four or more layers:

    Subject matter under subclass 277 wherein at least four distinct layers are
    associated together including a woven fabric layer and at least one
    nonwoven fabric layer, the coating or impregnation may constitute at least
    one layer.


CLS 442/284
TXT Including particulate material other than fiber:

    Subject matter under subclass 283 wherein at least one of the four layers
    contains particulate material which is not fiber.


CLS 442/285
TXT Including particulate material other than fiber:

    Subject matter under subclass 277 wherein a woven fabric layer, a nonwoven
    fabric layer, and a coating or impregnation layer are associated together
    and at least one of the above mentioned layers contains particulate
    material which is not fiber.


CLS 442/286
TXT Woven fabric with a preformed polymeric film or sheet:

    Subject matter under subclass 181 which is associated with at least one
    additional preformed layer having had structural integrity prior to
    association with the fabric and which maintains its structural integrity
    after association with the fabric, the preformed layer being formed from a
    synthetic polymeric material which is in the form of a film or sheet.


CLS 442/287
TXT Ester condensation polymer sheet or film (e.g., polyethylene terephthalate,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 286 wherein the preformed polymeric film or
    sheet is an ester condensation product such as polyethylene terephthalate,
    etc.


CLS 442/288
TXT Vinyl polymer or copolymer sheet or film (e.g., polyvinyl chloride,
    polyvinylidene chloride, polyvinyl acetate, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 286 wherein the preformed polymeric film or
    sheet is a vinyl polymer or copolymer such as polyvinyl chloride,
    polyvinylidene chloride, polyvinyl acetate, etc.


CLS 442/289
TXT Fluorinated olefin polymer or copolymer sheet or film (e.g., TeflonR):

    Subject matter under subclass 286 wherein the preformed polymeric film or
    sheet is a fluorinated olefin polymer or copolymer such as TeflonR, etc.


CLS 442/290
TXT Olefin polymer or copolymer sheet or film (e.g.,    polypropylene,
    polyethylene, ethylene-butylene copolymer, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 286 wherein the preformed polymeric film or
    sheet is an olefin polymer or copolymer such as polypropylene,
    polyethylene, ethylene-butylene copolymer, etc.


CLS 442/291
TXT Amide condensation polymer sheet or film (e.g., nylon  6, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 286 wherein the preformed polymeric film or
    sheet is an amide condensation polymer such as nylon 6, etc.


CLS 442/292
TXT Polyimide sheet or film:

    Subject matter under subclass 286 wherein the preformed polymeric film or
    sheet is a polyimide.


CLS 442/293
TXT Natural or synthetic rubber sheet or film:

    Subject matter under subclass 286 wherein the preformed polymeric film or
    sheet is natural or synthetic rubber.


CLS 442/294
TXT Including particulate material other than fiber:

    Subject matter under subclass 286 wherein the preformed polymeric film or
    sheet or the woven fabric associated therewith contains particulate
    material which is not fiber.


CLS 442/295
TXT Including a paper or wood pulp layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 181 wherein the woven fabric is associated
    with an  additional layer comprising a sheet or web having structural
    integrity formed by the deposition of animal, vegetable, mineral, or
    synthetic fibers or mixtures thereof from a fluid suspension or dispersion
    which may or may not contain additional materials.


CLS 442/296
TXT Mica paper layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 295 wherein the paper is formed from mica.


CLS 442/297
TXT Plural paper or wood pulp layers:

    Subject matter under subclass 295 wherein the woven fabric is associated
    with two or more additional layers comprising a sheet or web having
    structural integrity formed by the deposition of animal, vegetable,
    mineral, or synthetic fibers or mixtures thereof from a fluid suspension or
    dispersion which may or may not contain additional materials.


CLS 442/298
TXT Including a bituminous layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 295 wherein at least one layer is disclosed
    as being coated or impregnated with a pitch, asphalt, tar, bitumen, or the
    residue from the distillation of mineral oil and/or coal.


CLS 442/299
TXT Including an outermost adhesive layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 295 wherein an outer surface of the woven
    fabric and/or the paper or wood  pulp layer has associated therewith an
    adhesive layer.


CLS 442/300
TXT Including a natural or synthetic rubber layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 295 wherein the woven fabric and/or the paper
    or wood pulp layer has associated therewith a natural or synthetic rubber
    layer in the form of a coating, impregnation, or separate and distinct
    layer.


CLS 442/301
TXT Including strand which is stated to have specific  attributes (e.g., heat
    or fire resistance, chemical or solvent resistance, high absorption for
    aqueous composition, water solubility, heat shrinkability, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 181 wherein the woven fabric contains a
    strand which has attributes such as heat or fire resistance, chemical or
    solvent resistance, high absorption for aqueous compositions, water
    solubility, heat shrinkability, etc., the strand attributes being
    specifically stated.

    (1)     Note. Inherent properties of a given strand or fiber material
    should not be considered for classification purposes in this subclass,
    only specifically stated properties of the strand or fiber material.


CLS 442/302
TXT Strand is other than glass and is heat or fire resistant:

    Subject matter under subclass 301 wherein the strand which is not glass is
    heat or fire resistant.


CLS 442/303
TXT Strand is heat shrinkable:

    Subject matter under subclass 301 wherein the strand shrinks when exposed
    to heat.


CLS 442/304
TXT KNIT FABRIC (I.E., KNIT STRAND OR STRIP MATERIAL):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the fabric is a knit
    fabric composed of strands or strips interengaged with one another to form
    interlocked loops of strand material, the interlocked loops forming wales
    and courses in the knit fabric.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    66,     Textiles: Knitting, for knitted fabrics made solely by a knitting
    process without any other fabric processing prior to or following knitting.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 34.1+ for
    hollow or container type articles (e.g., tube, vase, etc.) containing at
    least one knit fabric; subclasses 105+ for knit fabrics wherein strands or
    strips thereof are disposed in angular relation to strands or strips in a
    second layer or component; subclass 114 for knit fabrics wherein strands or
    strips thereof are arranged in parallel relation to strands or strips in a
    second layer or component; subclasses 175+ for a product of uniform
    thickness but of nonplanar characteristics and comprising interengaged
    strands or strips; and subclass 196 for knit fabrics with a discontinuous
    coating, impregnation, or bond.


CLS 442/305
TXT Including parallel strips:

    Subject matter under subclass 304 wherein parallel strips are incorporated
    into the knitted fabric.

    (1)     Note. A strip is an elongated element having a width which
    substantially exceeds its thickness.


CLS 442/306
TXT Including an elastic strand:

    Subject matter under subclass 304 wherein a strand or strip or a
    filamentary component of a strand or strip of which the fabric is composed
    is characterized by elastic qualities (e.g., it is formed of or has a core
    of elastomeric polymeric material, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    308,    for fabrics composed of a non-elastomeric core-spun strand.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles: Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 225 and 226
    for elastomeric core-spun yarns, per se.


CLS 442/307
TXT Including strand precoated with other than free metal or alloy:

    Subject matter under subclass 304 comprising a strand which has been coated
    with a non-metallic material prior to incorporation into the knit fabric.


CLS 442/308
TXT Including strand which is of specific structural definition:

    Subject matter under subclass 304 wherein the fabric comprises (a) strands
    having a specified structural characteristic such as being composed of
    individual filaments having different chemical composition twisted together
    or being core-spun about elastic core or (b) the strands, per se, or
    individual filamentary materials comprising the strands are characterized
    by a specific structural feature such as non-linearity, a  particular cross
    section or a particular absolute size  of any feature, component, or
    dimension (e.g., length, width, or thickness).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles: Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 224 through
    230 for core-spun yarns, per se.


CLS 442/309
TXT Cross-sectional configuration of strand material is specified:

    Subject matter under subclass 308 wherein the cross-sectional shape of the
    strand material or a filamentary constituent thereof is specified or of
    continuously uniform diameter or of a particular nature or specified shape
    or dimension.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 397 through
    402 for strand materials having, per se, particular cross sections or
    physical dimensions.


CLS 442/310
TXT Strand material formed of individual filaments having different chemical
    compositions:

    Subject matter under subclass 308 wherein the strand material is composed
    of at least two chemically different individual filaments.


CLS 442/311
TXT Strand is a monofilament composed of two or more polymeric materials in
    physically distinct relationship (e.g., sheath-core, side-by-side,
    islands-in-sea, fibrils-in-matrix, etc.) or composed of physical blend of
    chemically different polymeric materials or a physical blend of a polymeric
    material and a filler material:

    Subject matter under subclass 304 wherein the strand material, per se, or a
    filamentary constituent thereof is composed of (a) two or more synthetic
    polymeric materials which are specified as being in sheath-core,
    side-by-side, islands-in-sea, fibrils-in-matrix, or any other physically
    distinct relationship across a cross section thereof, (b) a physical blend
    of two or more polymeric materials specifically disclosed and/or claimed as
    having distinctly different chemical or physical characteristics, or (c) a
    blend or an admixture of a polymeric material and a filler material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 372 for strands
    and filaments, per se, in combination with structurally defined particulate
    matter; and subclasses 373 and 374 for multicomponent strands and
    filaments, per se.


CLS 442/312
TXT Knit fabric is characterized by a particular or differential knit pattern
    other than open knit fabric or a fabric in which the strand denier is
    specified:

    Subject matter under subclass 304 wherein a characteristic of the fabric
    knit pattern is specified other than the strand denier or an open knit
    fabric.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for an open knit fabric.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    66,     Textiles: Knitting, for knitted fabrics made solely by a knitting
    process without any other fabric processing prior to or following knitting.


CLS 442/313
TXT Including additional strand inserted within knit fabric:

    Subject matter under subclass 312 wherein the knit pattern includes
    additional strand within the knit fabric, the additional strand being
    inserted in the knit fabric to form a warp-inserted and/or weft-inserted
    knit fabric.


CLS 442/314
TXT Warp knit insert strand:

    Subject matter under subclass 313 wherein the additional strand is inserted
    within the knit fabric to form a warp-inserted knit fabric.


CLS 442/315
TXT Including a foamed layer or component:

    Subject matter under subclass 304 including a component or layer specified
    as being a foam (i.e., a material characterized by a multitude of open or
    closed cells).


CLS 442/316
TXT Including a free metal or alloy constituent:

    Subject matter under subclass 304 having a constituent which is a metal in
    elemental or alloy form (i.e., other than in the form of a chelate, salt,
    or compound resulting from the chemical reaction of a metal).

    (1)     Note. Classified here is, for example, a knit fabric wherein (a)
    the fabric has been provided with a metal coating, (b) the fabric is
    composed of a strand comprising elemental metal, and (c) a metal layer
    having structural integrity has been adhesively associated with the fabric
    layer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    66,     Textiles: Knitting, subclass 202 for metal-containing fabrics
    formed solely from a knitting process and no other process prior to or
    following knitting.


CLS 442/317
TXT Chemically deposited metal layer (e.g., chemical precipitation or
    electrochemical deposition or plating, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 316 wherein the metal constituent is in the
    form of a distinct layer provided by a chemical or electrochemical process
    such as chemical precipitation, electrochemical deposition, or plating.


CLS 442/318
TXT Including an additional knit fabric layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 304 wherein the knit fabric is in association
    with an additional knit fabric layer.


CLS 442/319
TXT Including a nonwoven fabric layer other than paper:

    Subject matter under subclass 304 wherein the knit fabric is in association
    with a nonwoven fabric which is not paper.


CLS 442/320
TXT FELT FABRIC:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the fabric comprises
    fibers having barbs or some other laterally  extending fiber portion, the
    fibers being worked together by pressure, heat, or some other means without
    weaving or knitting to form a sheet having structural integrity due to the
    interlocking of the barb-like extensions on the fibers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 141+ for a
    textured surface, such as roofing elements, comprising asphalt impregnated
    felt fabric substrates with particulate matter thereon.


CLS 442/321
TXT From natural organic fiber (e.g., wool, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 320 wherein the fibers include natural
    organic fibers such as wool, etc.


CLS 442/322
TXT Including particulate material other than fiber:

    Subject matter under subclass 321 wherein the fabric contains particulate
    material which is not fiber.


CLS 442/323
TXT At least three layers:

    Subject matter under subclass 321 wherein the fabric comprises at least two
    additional distinct layers.


CLS 442/324
TXT From synthetic organic fiber:

    Subject matter under subclass 320 wherein the fibers include synthetic
    organic fibers.


CLS 442/325
TXT Including particulate material other than fiber:

    Subject matter under subclass 320 wherein the fabric contains particulate
    material which is not fiber.


CLS 442/326
TXT At least three layers:

    Subject matter under subclass 320 wherein the fabric comprises at least two
    additional distinct layers.


CLS 442/327
TXT NONWOVEN FABRIC (I.E., NONWOVEN STRAND OR FIBER MATERIAL):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the fabric comprising a
    fabric assembly having structural integrity of continuous or discontinuous
    strands or fibers held together in random or ordered (e.g., parallel, etc.)
    array by (a) mechanical interlocking (e.g., as a consequence of needling or
    hydroentangling, etc.) in the case of thermoplastic fibers, heat-induced
    bonding (i.e., fusing), or (b) an impregnation or coating of a bonding
    agent.

    (1)     Note. Paper or felt are not to be considered as nonwoven fabrics
    for classification here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles: Manufacturing, subclasses 103 through 115 for nonwoven
    fabrics made solely by a fiber entanglement or interlocking process without
    any other fabric processing prior to or following the entanglement or
    interlocking process.


    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    180 and 181 for processes used to form nonwoven fabrics comprising
    thermoplastic fibers (i.e., heat-induced bonding).

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 100 through 231 for
    paper products made by a papermaking process without the addition of an
    additional fabric layer (i.e., woven, knit, or nonwoven fabric layer).

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles,  subclasses 34.1+ for
    hollow or container type articles (e.g., tube, vase, etc.) containing
    nonwoven fabric; subclasses 174+ for a nonwoven product of uniform
    thickness but of nonplanar characteristics; and subclasses 195+ for
    nonwoven fabrics with a discontinuous coating, impregnation, or bond.


CLS 442/328
TXT Nonwoven fabric has an elastic quality:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein the fabric has an ability to
    recover substantially its original shape and size immediately after removal
    of deformation or elongation causing stress.


CLS 442/329
TXT Nonwoven fabric comprises an elastic strand or fiber material:

    Subject matter under subclass 328 wherein a strand or filamentary
    constituent thereof or fiber material of which the fabric is composed is
    characterized by elastic qualities (e.g., it is formed of or has a core of
    elastomeric polymeric material, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334,    for fabrics composed of a non-elastomeric core-spun strand or fiber
    material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    57,     Textiles: Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 225 and 226
    for elastomeric core-spun yarns,  per se.


CLS 442/330
TXT Including strand or fiber material precoated with other  than free metal or
    alloy:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 comprising a strand or fiber material
    which had been coated with a non-metallic material prior to fabric assembly.


CLS 442/331
TXT Strand or fiber material is glass:

    Subject matter under subclass  330 wherein the strand or fiber material is
    glass.


CLS 442/332
TXT Strand or fiber material is inorganic:

    Subject matter under subclass 330 wherein the strand or fiber material is
    inorganic material.


CLS 442/333
TXT Strand or fiber material is synthetic polymer:

    Subject matter under subclass 330 wherein the strand or fiber material is
    synthetic polymeric material.


CLS 442/334
TXT Including strand or fiber material which is of specific structural
    definition:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein the fabric comprises (a) strand
    or fiber material having a specific structural characteristic such as being
    composed of individual filaments having different chemical composition
    twisted together or being core-spun about a non-elastic core or (b) the
    strand or fiber material, per se, or individual filamentary material
    comprising the strand are characterized by a specific structural feature
    such as non-linearity, a particular cross section, or a particular absolute
    size of any feature, component, or dimension (e.g., length, width, or
    thickness).

     SEARCH CLASS:

     57,    Textiles: Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 224 through
    230 for core-spun yarns, per se.


CLS 442/335
TXT Cross-sectional configuration of strand or fiber  material is specified:

    Subject matter under subclass 334 wherein the cross-sectional shape of the
    strand or a filamentary constituent thereof or the fiber material is
    specified or of continuously uniform diameter or of a particular nature or
    specified shape or dimension.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 397 through
    402 for strand materials having, per se, particular cross sections or
    physical dimensions.


CLS 442/336
TXT Cross-sectional configuration varies longitudinally along strand or fiber
    material:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein the cross section of the strand
    or a filamentary constituent thereof or the fiber material changes along
    the length thereof either in dimension or shape.

     SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 399 for
    longitudinally varying strands,  per se.


CLS 442/337
TXT Cross-sectional configuration of strand or fiber material is other than
    circular:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein the cross-sectional configuration
    of the strand or a filamentary constituent thereof or the fiber material is
    specified, not being circular.


CLS 442/338
TXT Hollow strand or fiber material:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein the strand or a filamentary
    constituent thereof or the fiber material is tubular or hollow or
    characterized by one or more voids either co-extensive or non-coextensive
    along the length thereof.

     SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 398 for hollow
    strand material,  per se.


CLS 442/339
TXT Microcellular strand or fiber material:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein the strand or a filamentary
    constituent thereof or the fiber material is microcellular in structure.


CLS 442/340
TXT Strand or fiber material specified as having micro dimensions (i.e.,
    microfiber):

    Subject matter under subclass 334 wherein the strand or a filamentary
    constituent thereof or the fiber material is specified as having a diameter
    of less than 100 microns or is specified as microfibers.


CLS 442/341
TXT Strand or fiber material is blended with another  chemically different
    microfiber in the same layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 340 wherein the strand or filamentary
    constituent thereof or the fiber material is blended with additional
    microfiber to form a single layer, the additional microfiber being
    chemically different.


CLS 442/342
TXT Blend of synthetic polymeric and inorganic microfibers:

    Subject matter under subclass 341 wherein the single fabric layer comprises
    synthetic polymeric microfiber and inorganic microfiber.


CLS 442/343
TXT Blend of chemically different inorganic microfibers:

    Subject matter under subclass 341 wherein the single fabric layer comprises
    at least two inorganic microfibers which are chemically different from one
    another.


CLS 442/344
TXT Including other strand or fiber material in the same layer not specified as
    having micro dimensions:

    Subject matter under subclass 340 wherein a single layer contains a strand
    or a filamentary constituent thereof or a fiber material of micro
    dimensions blended with another strand or fiber material.


CLS 442/345
TXT Including another chemically different microfiber in a separate layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 340 wherein the strand or a filamentary
    constituent thereof or the fiber material is combined with a separate layer
    which contains a chemically different microfiber.


CLS 442/346
TXT Including other strand or fiber material in a different layer not specified
    as having micro dimensions:

    Subject matter under subclass 340 wherein the strand or a filamentary
    constituent thereof or the fiber material is combined with a separate layer
    which contains other strand or fiber material.


CLS 442/347
TXT Microfiber is a composite fiber:

    Subject matter under subclass 340 wherein the strand or a filamentary
    constituent thereof or the fiber material specified as having micro
    dimensions is a composite microfiber.


CLS 442/348
TXT Microfiber is glass:

    Subject matter under subclass 340 wherein the strand or a filamentary
    constituent thereof or the fiber material is glass.


CLS 442/349
TXT Microfiber is carbon or carbonaceous:

    Subject matter under subclass 340 wherein the strand or a filamentary
    constituent thereof or the fiber material is a carbon (graphite) or
    carbonaceous microfiber.


CLS 442/350
TXT Autogenously bonded:

    Subject matter under subclass 340 wherein the strand or a filamentary
    constituent thereof or the fiber material is autogenously bonded (i.e.,
    having heat- and/or pressure-promoted thermoplastic welding or solvent
    bonding).


CLS 442/351
TXT Microfiber is synthetic polymer:

    Subject matter under subclass 340 wherein the strand or a filamentary
    constituent thereof or the fiber material is a synthetic polymeric
    microfiber.


CLS 442/352
TXT Strand or fiber material is specified as non-linear (e.g., crimped, coiled,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 334 wherein the strand or a filamentary
    constituent thereof or the fiber material is specified as being crimped,
    coiled, etc.


CLS 442/353
TXT Composite strand or fiber material:

    Subject matter under subclass 352 wherein the strand or a filamentary
    constituent thereof or the fiber material comprises two or more chemically
    distinct components.


CLS 442/354
TXT Carbon or carbonaceous strand or fiber material:

    Subject matter under subclass 352 wherein the strand or a filamentary
    constituent thereof or the fiber material comprises carbon (graphite) or
    carbonaceous material.


CLS 442/355
TXT Glass strand or fiber material:

    Subject matter under subclass 352 wherein the strand or a filamentary
    constituent thereof or the fiber material comprises glass material.


CLS 442/356
TXT A single nonwoven layer comprising non-linear synthetic polymeric strand or
    fiber material and strand or fiber material not specified as non-linear:

    Subject matter under subclass 352 wherein the strand or a filamentary
    constituent thereof or fiber material which is specifically stated to be
    non-linear comprises a synthetic polymeric material and is combined with an
    additional strand or fiber material which is not specified as non-linear to
    form a single layer.


CLS 442/357
TXT Synthetic polymeric strand or fiber material is of  staple length:


    Subject matter under subclass 356 wherein the strand or a filamentary
    constituent thereof or fiber material which is specifically stated to be
    non-linear comprises staple length material.


CLS 442/358
TXT A nonwoven fabric having a layer comprising non-linear synthetic polymeric
    strand or fiber material and a separate and distinct layer comprising
    strand or fiber material which is not specified as non-linear:

    Subject matter under subclass 352 wherein the strand or a filamentary
    constituent thereof or fiber material which is specifically stated to be
    non-linear comprises a synthetic polymeric material and is combined with at
    least one additional separate and distinct layer of strand or fiber
    material which is not being specified as non-linear.


CLS 442/359
TXT Synthetic polymeric strand or fiber material:

    Subject matter under subclass 352 wherein the strand or a filamentary
    constituent thereof or fiber material which is specifically stated to be
    non-linear comprises a synthetic polymeric material.


CLS 442/360
TXT Synthetic polymeric strand or fiber material is of  staple length:


    Subject matter under subclass 359 wherein the strand or a filamentary
    constituent thereof or fiber material which is specifically stated to be
    non-linear comprises a staple length synthetic polymeric material.


CLS 442/361
TXT Including strand or fiber material which is a monofilament composed of two
    or more polymeric materials in physically distinct relationship (e.g.,
    sheath-core, side-by-side, islands-in-sea, fibrils-in-matrix, etc.) or
    composed of physical blend of chemically different polymeric materials or a
    physical blend of a polymeric material and a filler material:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein the strand or fiber material, per
    se, is a monofilament composed of (a) two or more synthetic polymeric
    materials which are specified as being in sheath-core, side-by-side,
    islands-in-sea, fibrils-in-matrix, or any other physically distinct
    relationship across a cross section thereof, (b) a physical blend of two or
    more polymeric materials specifically disclosed and/or claimed as having
    distinctly different chemical or physical characteristics, or (c) a blend
    or an admixture of a polymeric material and a filler material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles,  subclass 372 for strand
    or fiber material containing structurally defined particulate material,
    per se; and subclasses 373 and 374 for multicomponent strands and
    filaments, per se.


CLS 442/362
TXT Side-by-side multicomponent strand or fiber material:

    Subject matter under subclass 361 wherein the strand or fiber material
    contains two or more synthetic polymeric materials, the polymeric materials
    being in a side-by-side relationship across a cross section thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 374 for a
    side-by-side filament or strand,  per se.


CLS 442/363
TXT Islands-in-sea multicomponent strand or fiber material:

    Subject matter under subclass 361 wherein the strand or fiber material is
    characterized by two or more distinct polymeric materials in an
    islands-in-sea distinct physical relationship across a cross section
    thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 374 for an
    island-in-sea filament or strand,  per se.


CLS 442/364
TXT Sheath-core multicomponent strand or fiber material:

    Subject matter under subclass 361 wherein the strand or fiber material
    contains two or more synthetic polymeric materials which are in a
    sheath-core relationship across a cross section thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 373 for a
    sheath-core filament or strand,  per se.


CLS 442/365
TXT Strand or fiber material is a blend of polymeric material and a filler
    material:

    Subject matter under subclass 361 wherein the strand or fiber material
    comprises a blend or admixture of a synthetic polymeric material and one or
    more specified filler materials.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 372 for a strand
    or fiber material containing structurally defined particulate material, per
    se.


CLS 442/366
TXT Including parallel strand or fiber material within the nonwoven fabric:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein the nonwoven fabric comprises
    strand or fiber material which has been oriented in a particular direction,
    the strand or fiber material being parallel to one another.


CLS 442/367
TXT Parallel strand or fiber material is glass:

    Subject matter under subclass 366 wherein the parallel strand or fiber
    material within the nonwoven fabric is glass material.


CLS 442/368
TXT Parallel strand or fiber material is inorganic (e.g., rock wool, mineral
    wool, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 366 wherein the parallel strand or fiber
    material within the nonwoven fabric is inorganic material.


CLS 442/369
TXT Parallel strand or fiber material is naturally occurring (e.g., cotton,
    wool, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 366 wherein the parallel strand or fiber
    material within the nonwoven fabric is naturally occurring material such as
    cotton, wool, etc.


CLS 442/370
TXT Including a foamed layer or component:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 including a component or layer specified
    as being a foam (i.e., a material characterized by a multitude of open or
    closed cells).


CLS 442/371
TXT Including a free metal or alloy constituent:

    Subject matter under subclass 370 having a constituent which is a metal in
    elemental or alloy form (i.e., other than in the form of a chelate, salt,
    or compound resulting from the chemical reaction of a metal).

    (1)     Note.  Classified here is, for example a fabric-foam combination
    wherein (a) the fabric or the foam has been provided with a metal coating,
    (b) the fabric is composed of a strand comprising elemental metal, and (c)
    a metal layer having structural integrity has been adhesively associated
    with the foam and/or fabric layer.


CLS 442/372
TXT Plural foamed layers:

    Subject matter under subclass 370 characterized by having two or more
    distinct foam layers.


CLS 442/373
TXT Plural fabric layers:

    Subject matter under subclass 370 characterized by having two or more
    distinct fabric layers.


CLS 442/374
TXT Nonwoven fabric is coated, impregnated, or autogenously bonded:

    Subject matter under subclass 370 wherein the nonwoven fabric has been
    coated or impregnated or autogenously bonded (i.e., wherein the strands or
    filamentary components thereof or fiber material have been caused to adhere
    to one another through activation of an  inherent cohesive or adhesive
    property by heat and/or pressure or application of solvent).


CLS 442/375
TXT Including particulate material other than fiber:

    Subject matter under subclass 374 wherein the coated, impregnated, or
    autogenously bonded nonwoven fabric contains particulate material which is
    not in fiber form.


CLS 442/376
TXT Including a free metal or alloy constituent:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 having a constituent which is a metal in
    elemental or alloy form (i.e., in other than the form of a chelate, salt,
    or compound resulting from the chemical reaction of a metal).


CLS 442/377
TXT Metal or metal-coated strand or fiber material:

    Subject matter under subclass 376 wherein the metal constituent is in the
    form of a strand or fiber material or a coating applied to a strand or
    fiber material prior to forming the strand or fiber material into a fabric.



CLS 442/378
TXT Preformed metallic film or foil or sheet (film or foil or sheet had
    structural integrity prior to association with the nonwoven fabric):

    Subject matter under subclass 376 wherein the metal constituent was
    provided by at least one preformed layer having had structural integrity
    prior to its association with the fabric.


CLS 442/379
TXT Vapor, chemical, or spray deposited metal layer: Subject matter under
    subclass 376 wherein the metal constituent is in the form of a distinct
    layer provided by a vapor, chemical, spray, or electrochemical process
    (e.g., chemical precipitation or electrochemical deposition or plating).


CLS 442/380
TXT Particulate free metal or alloy constituent:

    Subject matter under subclass 376 wherein the metal in elemental or alloy
    form is particulate material.


CLS 442/381
TXT Including an additional nonwoven fabric:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein the nonwoven fabric is in
    association with an additional nonwoven fabric.


CLS 442/382
TXT Additional nonwoven fabric is a spun-bonded fabric:

    Subject matter under subclass 381 wherein the additional nonwoven fabric is
    a spun-bonded fabric.


CLS 442/383
TXT Needled:

    Subject matter under subclass 382 wherein the first nonwoven fabric is
    needled prior to association with the spun-bonded fabric or the association
    therewith is  by a needling process.


CLS 442/384
TXT Hydroentangled:

    Subject matter under subclass 382 wherein the first nonwoven fabric is
    hydroentangled prior to association with the spun-bonded fabric or the
    association therewith is by a hydroentanglement process.


CLS 442/385
TXT Including a wood fiber containing layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 381 wherein the nonwoven fabric has
    associated therewith an additional wood fiber layer.


CLS 442/386
TXT Including a layer derived from a water-settable material (e.g., cement,
    gypsum, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 381 wherein the nonwoven fabric has
    associated therewith a water-settable material (e.g., cement, gypsum,
    plaster, etc.) which forms a distinct layer.


CLS 442/387
TXT Mechanically interengaged by needling or impingement of fluid (e.g., gas or
    liquid stream, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 381 wherein the first nonwoven fabric is
    needled or impinged by fluid such as a gas or liquid stream prior to
    association with the additional nonwoven fabric or the association
    therewith is by a needling or fluid impingement process.


CLS 442/388
TXT Needled:

    Subject matter under subclass 387 wherein the nonwoven fabrics are
    mechanically interengaged by needling.


CLS 442/389
TXT Separate nonwoven fabric layers comprise chemically different strand or
    fiber material:

    Subject matter under subclass 381 wherein the nonwoven fabric layers
    comprise chemically different strand or fiber material.


CLS 442/390
TXT At least one layer of inorganic strand or fiber material and at least one
    layer of synthetic polymeric strand or fiber material:

    Subject matter under subclass 389 wherein the nonwoven layer comprises
    inorganic strands or fiber materials and the additional nonwoven layer
    comprises synthetic polymeric strand or fiber material.


CLS 442/391
TXT Multiple nonwoven fabric layers composed of the same  inorganic strand or
    fiber material:

    Subject matter under subclass 381 wherein the nonwoven fabric layer and the
    additional nonwoven fabric layer comprise the same inorganic strand or
    fiber material.


CLS 442/392
TXT Multiple nonwoven fabric layers composed of the same polymeric strand or
    fiber material:

    Subject matter under subclass 381 wherein the nonwoven fabric layer and the
    additional nonwoven fabric layer comprise the same polymeric strand or
    fiber material.


CLS 442/393
TXT Including particulate material other than fiber:

    Subject matter under subclass 381 wherein the nonwoven fabric layer
    includes particulate material which is not fiber.


CLS 442/394
TXT Nonwoven fabric with a preformed polymeric film or sheet:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein the nonwoven fabric is associated
    with a preformed polymeric film or sheet layer having structural integrity
    prior to association with the nonwoven fabric.


CLS 442/395
TXT Ester condensation polymer sheet or film (e.g., polyethylene terephthalate,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 394 wherein the preformed polymeric film or
    sheet is an ester condensation polymer such as polyethylene terephthalate,
    etc.


CLS 442/396
TXT Vinyl polymer or copolymer sheet or film (e.g., polyvinyl chloride,
    polyvinylidene chloride, polyvinyl acetate, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 394 wherein the preformed polymeric film or
    sheet is a vinyl polymer or copolymer such as polyvinyl chloride,
    polyvinylidene chloride, polyvinyl acetate, etc.


CLS 442/397
TXT Fluorinated olefin polymer or copolymer sheet or film (e.g., TeflonR):

    Subject matter under subclass 394 wherein the preformed polymeric film or
    sheet is a fluorinated olefin polymer or copolymer such as TeflonR, etc.


CLS 442/398
TXT Olefin polymer or copolymer sheet or film (e.g., polypropylene,
    polyethylene, ethylene-butylene copolymer, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 394 wherein the preformed polymeric film or
    sheet is an olefin polymer or copolymer such as polypropylene,
    polyethylene, ethylene-butylene copolymer, etc.


CLS 442/399
TXT Natural or synthetic rubber sheet or film:

    Subject matter under subclass 394 wherein the preformed polymeric film or
    sheet is a rubber, the rubber being natural or synthetic rubber.


CLS 442/400
TXT Melt-blown nonwoven fabric:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein the nonwoven fabric is melt blown.


CLS 442/401
TXT Spun-bonded nonwoven fabric:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein the nonwoven fabric is spun
    bonded.


CLS 442/402
TXT Needled nonwoven fabric:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein the nonwoven fabric is needled.


CLS 442/403
TXT Containing at least two chemically different strand or  fiber materials:

    Subject matter under subclass 402 wherein the nonwoven fabric comprises two
    or more chemically different strands or fiber materials mechanically
    interengaged by needling.


CLS 442/404
TXT Containing inorganic and polymeric strand or fiber materials:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 wherein the nonwoven fabric comprises at
    least one inorganic and at least one polymeric strand or fiber material
    mechanically interengaged by needling.


CLS 442/405
TXT Containing polymeric and natural strand or fiber materials:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 wherein the nonwoven fabric comprises at
    least one polymeric and at least one natural strand or fiber material
    mechanically interengaged by needling.


CLS 442/406
TXT Containing inorganic strand or fiber material:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 wherein the nonwoven fabric comprises two
    or more inorganic strand or fiber materials mechanically interengaged by
    needling.


CLS 442/407
TXT Containing polymeric strand or fiber material:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 wherein the nonwoven fabric comprises two
    or more polymeric strand or fiber materials mechanically interengaged by
    needling.


CLS 442/408
TXT Hydroentangled nonwoven fabric:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein the nonwoven fabric is
    hydroentangled.


CLS 442/409
TXT Autogenously bonded nonwoven fabric:

    Subject matter under subclass  327 wherein the nonwoven fabric is
    autogenously bonded (i.e., having heat- and/or pressure-promoted
    thermoplastic welding or solvent bonding).


CLS 442/410
TXT Inorganic strand or fiber material only:

    Subject matter under subclass 409 wherein the nonwoven fabric contains only
    inorganic strand or fiber material.


CLS 442/411
TXT Containing at least two chemically different strand or  fiber materials:

    Subject matter under subclass 409 wherein the nonwoven fabric comprises two
    or more chemically different strands or fiber materials.


CLS 442/412
TXT Including a paper layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein the nonwoven fabric is in
    association with a paper layer.


CLS 442/413
TXT Including a wood containing layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein the nonwoven fabric is in
    association with an additional layer containing wood.


CLS 442/414
TXT Including strand or fiber material which is stated to have specific
    attributes (e.g., heat or fire resistance, chemical or solvent resistance,
    high absorption for aqueous compositions, water solubility,  heat
    shrinkability, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein the nonwoven fabric includes
    strand or fiber material which has attributes such as heat or fire
    resistance, chemical or solvent resistance, high absorption for aqueous
    compositions, water solubility, heat shrinkability, etc., the strand or
    fiber material attributes being specifically stated.

    (1)     Note. Inherent properties of a given strand or fiber material
    should not be considered for classification purposes in this subclass,
    only specifically  stated properties of the strand or fiber material.


CLS 442/415
TXT Containing at least two chemically different strand or  fiber materials:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein the nonwoven fabric comprises two
    or more chemically different strand or fiber materials.


CLS 442/416
TXT Containing polymeric and natural strand or fiber  materials:

    Subject matter under subclass 415 wherein the nonwoven fabric comprises at
    least one polymeric and at least one natural strand or fiber material.


CLS 442/417
TXT Including particulate material other than strand or fiber material:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein the nonwoven fabric contains
    particulate material, the particulate material not being strand or fiber
    material.

    FOREIGN ART COLLECTIONS

    The definitions for FOR 100-FOR 167 below correspond to the definitions of
    the abolished subclasses (224-291) under Class 442 from which these
    collections were formed.  See the Foreign Art Collection schedule for
    specific correspondences.  [Note:  The titles and definitions for indented
    art collections include all the details of the one(s) that are
    hierarchically superior.]


CLS 442/FOR100
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product in which the web or sheet is
    disclosed as useful in the manufacture of clothing, draperies, upholstery,
    shoes or their reinforcements, or tire fabric reinforcements or other such
    wearing or household uses such as roofing felt and is claimed as a textile,
    cloth or fabric or the equivalent thereof.


CLS 442/FOR101
TXT Foreign art collection for a product not elsewhere provided for in
    which the structurally defined element or component comprises strands,
    strand-portions* or relatively narrow ribbon elements mechanically
    intertangled, interlooped, interwoven or intertwined.


CLS 442/FOR102
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product wherein at least some of the
    cross-joined constituents are  relatively narrow ribbon-like elements
    mechanically interengaged with similar elements or with strands or
    strand-portions.


CLS 442/FOR103
TXT Foreign art collection for a product which consists of or includes
    a layer of strand material in a nonparallel arrangement with portions of
    the strand material interlocked with one another.


CLS 442/FOR104
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product in which the material
    comprises strands of glass.


CLS 442/FOR105
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product in which constituent strands
    of the fabric are permanently either (a) deformed, (b) elongated, (c)
    enlarged in diameter, or (d) reduced in length following assembly of said
    strands to form the product or some physical or chemical characteristic of
    the strand is recited.


CLS 442/FOR106
TXT   Foreign art collection for a product in which the layer or
    component, or a portion or strand thereof possesses a relatively high
    degree of extensibility longitudinally and/or laterally of the web and the
    ability to resile from the extension with substantially no permanent
    deformation.


CLS 442/FOR107
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product comprising individually
    resilient strands or strand-portions.


CLS 442/FOR108
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product which also includes a
    plurality of individual strands or strand-like strips lying side-by-side in
    a layer, whether touching or not and extending generally in the same
    direction without interengagement with any other strand or strip.


CLS 442/FOR109
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product wherein the strand layer or
    component is part of a composite web which also includes a layer or
    component which consists of or includes fibers*.


CLS 442/FOR110
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product in which adjacent layers of
    the composite web are secured to each other by intertanglement of the
    fibers of one layer with an adjacent layer, the intertanglement being
    disclosed as accomplished by the use of barbed needles passing through the
    layers.


CLS 442/FOR111
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product in which the fibers or any
    of the layers or components are covered or saturated, at least in part,
    with extraneous material or in which layers or components or constituents
    thereof, are joined to each other by an adhesive substance.


CLS 442/FOR112
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product in which the fibers or any
    of the layers or components are covered or saturated, at least in part,
    with extraneous material or in which at least some of the layers or
    components or constituents thereof are joined together by an adhesive
    substance.


CLS 442/FOR113
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product which includes material in
    the form of small particles embedded in or adhered to the surface of the
    web.


CLS 442/FOR114
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product wherein the layer or
    component of interengaged strands is enclosed within a layer or between
    layers of nonstrand material.


CLS 442/FOR115
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product wherein the enclosing
    layer(s) consists of or includes fibers.


CLS 442/FOR116
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product which includes material in
    the form of small or minute particles incorporated as a distinct layer of
    the product, embedded therein or adhered to a surface matter.


CLS 442/FOR117
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product in which the particles
    contain silicon in either the elemental or compound form.


CLS 442/FOR118
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product in which the particles
    contain a metal* in either its element or combined state.


CLS 442/FOR119
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product in which the particles
    contain the carbohydrate known as cellulose in either its natural or
    modified form.


CLS 442/FOR120
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product in which the particles
    consist of carbon in its element state or in any of its allotropic forms.


CLS 442/FOR121
TXT   Foreign art collection for a product in which the web or sheet
    or constituent* thereof is fully covered or saturated with extraneous
    material or in which elements or components are adhesively or cohesively
    joined to one another.


CLS 442/FOR122
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product in which the sheet* or web*
    comprises at least three layers*.


CLS 442/FOR123
TXT   Foreign art collection for a product in which at least one layer
    comprises strands or filaments or fibers or strand-portions or strips which
    are tied at their intersections or are loosely interwoven to provide
    interstices of substantial size.


CLS 442/FOR124
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product in which one of the layers
    comprises cellulose in either its natural or modified state.


CLS 442/FOR125
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product comprising at least two
    layers of cellulosic material in either the natural or modified state.


CLS 442/FOR126
TXT   Foreign art collection for a product in which one of the layers
    comprises the natural gum known as caoutchoec*, gutta percha* or balata*
    from the latex or sap of the "rubber" tree.


CLS 442/FOR127
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product in which the component which
    incorporates the interengaged strands comprises a material containing
    silicon or a free metal*.


CLS 442/FOR128
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product in which the component which
    incorporates the interengaged strands comprises a synthetic resin or
    polymer.


CLS 442/FOR129
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product wherein the strand-type
    component comprises interlocked loops of strand* material.


CLS 442/FOR130
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product comprising a single layer of
    interlocked loops of strand-like material which is saturated or permeated
    with a fluid.


CLS 442/FOR131
TXT Foreign art collection for a product which comprises strand-type
    component having crossed strands which are tied at their junctures, or
    loosely interwoven strands which are arranged to provide interstitial
    spaces of substantial size.


CLS 442/FOR132
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product in which the strands are metal*.


CLS 442/FOR133
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product wherein the strand-type
    layer or component has a specifically claimed woven texture or wherein the
    woven texture of one component differs substantially from that of another
    component of the web.


CLS 442/FOR134
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product in which all of the basic
    warp strands in a component differ from all of the basic weft strands,
    either physically, as in size or hardness, or with regard to the material
    from which they are made.


CLS 442/FOR135
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product in which the weft strands
    differ from the warp strands with regard to the material from which each is
    made.


CLS 442/FOR136
TXT   Foreign art collection for a product in which the web or sheet
    is fully covered or saturated with extraneous material.


CLS 442/FOR137
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product wherein the extraneous
    material is capable of sticking to a surface to which it may be applied or
    of being activated so as to have such capability.


CLS 442/FOR138
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product wherein the entraneous
    material covers the sheet or web, forming a layer on the surface thereof.


CLS 442/FOR139
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product in which the layer contains
    either (1) a free or combined metal or (2) natural rubber.


CLS 442/FOR140
TXT   Foreign art collection for a product in which the web or sheet
    material is cellulosic* or is derived therefrom.


CLS 442/FOR141
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product wherein the constituent
    strands comprise artificially produced fibers* or filaments*.


CLS 442/FOR142
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product in which the coating
    comprises (1) a compound similar to hydrocarbons in which the tetravalent
    silicon replaces the carbon atom, as SiH4--monosilane or silicomethane, (2)
    an elastomeric in which the carbon linkages of a polymerized hydrocarbon
    are replaced by Si-O linkages or (3) any of a class of compounds that
    contain alternate silicon and oxygen atoms in either a linear structure
    (such as H3Si(OSiH2)nOSiH3 or a cyclic structure as H2(SiO)n and that may
    also contain methyl, phenyl or other organic radicals in place of some or
    all of the hydrogen atoms and are made by hydrolysis of chlorosilanes or
    alkoxy-silanes.


CLS 442/FOR143
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product in which the synthetic
    strand comprises polyamide* or polyimide*.


CLS 442/FOR144
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product wherein the fibers or
    filaments are finely attenuated glass.


CLS 442/FOR145
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product in which a nonstrand layer
    or component has portions which enter the reticular spaces of a woven or
    braided layer or component.


CLS 442/FOR146
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product in which the component
    comprises the hair from a sheep, or from some other animal whose hair is
    similar in texture to that of sheep and is permeated or saturated at least
    in part with an extraneous material.


CLS 442/FOR147
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product in which the component
    comprises fibers from the mineral asbestos and is permeated or saturated at
    least in part with an extraneous material.


CLS 442/FOR148
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product in which the component
    comprises artificially or man-made fibers or filaments and is saturated or
    permeated with extraneous material.


CLS 442/FOR149
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product in which the synthetic fiber
    or filament is glass*.


CLS 442/FOR150
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product wherein the web or sheet
    material is a single layer of cellulose or is derived from cellulose and is
    saturated or permeated.


CLS 442/FOR151
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product in which the extraneous
    material contains a metal* in either its free or combined form.


CLS 442/FOR152
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product in which the extraneous
    material contains a compound of phosphorus.


CLS 442/FOR153
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product in which the extraneous
    material also contains a halogen, which may be part of the phosphorous
    compound.


CLS 442/FOR154
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product in which the component is
    saturated or permeated at least in part with an extraneous material which
    contains an aldehyde or ketone condensation* product.


CLS 442/FOR155
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product in which the component is
    saturated or permeated with an extraneous material which contains an
    organic nitrogen compound in which the molecular structure includes a
    central nitrogen atom joined to four organic groups.


CLS 442/FOR156
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product comprising a fabric made of
    fibers which have been worked together by pressure, heat or other means
    without weaving or knitting.


CLS 442/FOR157
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product in which the fabric also
    contains small pieces or fragments of solid matter.


CLS 442/FOR158
TXT Foreign art collection for a product which consists of at least
    three layers of material, at least one such layer comprising felt.


CLS 442/FOR159
TXT Foreign art collection for a product which comprises small bits or
    fragments of solid matter.


CLS 442/FOR160
TXT Foreign art collection for a product which comprises a fabric with
    at least two additional layers thereon.


CLS 442/FOR161
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product wherein at least one of the
    layers consists of or includes a metal* or a mixture of (1) fused silica,
    and (2) alkali and alkaline silicates, commonly known as glass*.


CLS 442/FOR162
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product wherein at least one of the
    layers consist of or includes a synthetic resin, that is, a complex organic
    compound produced from ingredients which are nonresinous in themselves and
    which simulates a natural resin in that it is usually adapted for forming
    films or for use as binders in plastic compositions or a polymer, that is,
    a substance, often synthetic, composed of giant molecules that have been
    formed by the union of a considerable number of simple molecules with one
    another.


CLS 442/FOR163
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product wherein the polymeric
    compound is one (1) containing ester groups through which the monomers are
    linearly linked to each other or (2) amide or imide groups through which
    the monomers are linearly linked.


CLS 442/FOR164
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product wherein the fibers of the
    textile, cloth or fabric are covered at least in part with extraneous
    material or are adhesively or cohesively joined to each other.


CLS 442/FOR165
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product comprising a nonwoven fabric
    which has (1) an impregnation, (2) a single coating thereon, or (3)
    combination of (1) and (2) above.


CLS 442/FOR166
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product wherein the impregnant or
    coating consists of or includes nonnatural resin, i.e., a complex organic
    compound produced from ingredients which are nonresinous in themselves and
    which simulates a natural resin in that it is usually adapted for forming
    films or for use as binders in plastic compositions, or a polymer, that is,
    a substance, often synthetic, composed of giant molecules that have been
    formed by the union of a considerable number of simple molecules with one
    another.


CLS 442/FOR167
TXT  Foreign art collection for a product wherein the impregnant or
    coating consists of or includes a (bituminous or tarry residue*), natural
    gum*, natural oil*, resin* or wax*.


CLS 445/
TTL ELECTRIC LAMP OR SPACE DISCHARGE COMPONENT OR DEVICE MANUFACTURING

CLS 445/
TXT This is the residual and generic class of process and apparatus for the
    manufacturing, fabrication, repair, salvage, assembly, disassembly or other
    treatment of an electric lamp, liquid crystal display device or an electric
    space discharge device which process or apparatus is not elsewhere
    classified.

    (1)     Note.  An electric lamp is defined for the purpose of
    classification as a device for converting electric energy into visible
    light or ultraviolet light.

    (2)     Note.  An electric space discharge device is defined for the
    purpose of classification as including any device which is intended to have
    an electric current flow between two spaced parts or electrodes, at least
    part of the path followed by the discharge constituting a gas, vapor, or
    vacuum. Examples of an electric space discharge device include spark gap,
    spark plug, radio tube, X-ray tube, cathode-ray tube, laser tube, arc tube,
    gas or vapor discharge lamp, flash lamp and lightning arrester of the
    electric space discharge type.

    (3)     Note.  The line between this class and all other classes which
    provide for either apparatus or process for the manufacture or treatment of
    electric lamp, liquid crystal display device or electric space discharge
    device is that all combined process and all apparatus which are intended to
    perform a plurality of different processes are classified in this class
    when one of the operations performed is an operation specifically provided
    for in this class.  For the lines between particular classes not included
    in the general line above, see the notes to the class definition below.

    (4)     Note.  For electric lamp and electric space discharge device, see
    Class 313, Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses.
    Note subclass 327 for the structure of a  self-baking or Soederberg
    electrode which is formed from a plastic mass during the operation of the
    device.

    (5)     Note.  The line between this class (445) and Class 29 is as
    follows:  (a) where a claim is presented which recites manufacturing
    another structure, e.g., a lamp base, PCB; either specific or nominal and
    specific Class 445 device manufacture, placement of the original will be in
    Class 445; (b) where there is specific recited manufacture of another
    structure and, as a step in that manufacture, a nominally recited Class 445
    device is nominally united to the base, placement is in Class 29 (merely
    screwing a light bulb into a base is considered nominal); and (c) the
    manufacture of other structures intended to be used with a Class 445 device
    is in Class 29 or other manufacturing classes.

    (6)     Note.  The subject matter of the class (445) was found in Class 316
    and abolished subclasses 25.1+ of Class 29.  No other portions of Class 29
    have been screened for Class 445 subject matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, for miscellaneous compound tools.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, appropriate subclasses,
    for brushing, scrubbing, and generally cleaning apparatus for use with
    electric lamps and discharge devices, note especially subclass 56 and
    indented subclasses, for miscellaneous apparatus for cleaning receptacles.

    29,     Metal Working, for process and manufacturing miscellaneous
    electrical devices, especially subclass 2, for battery-grid making,
    subclass 25.35 for piezoelectric device making, subclasses 25.41+ for
    electric condenser making, subclasses 592.1+ for processes of manufacturing
    various electrical devices, subclasses 33+ for plural diverse manufacturing
    apparatus including metal shaping and/or assembling, subclasses 729+ for
    means for assembling electric devices, and subclasses 762+ for means for
    disassembling electrical devices.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, for miscellaneous
    apparatus for the separation of liquids from solids by drying or the
    contacting of solids with gases and/or vapors.  For heating apparatus see
    the Class 34 definitions for additional searches.

    53,     Package Making, for methods and apparatus including closing and
    evacuating gas from or introducing gas, vapor or liquid into a portable
    receptacle.  An electric lamp and an electric space discharge device are
    deemed to be encompassed by the term "portable receptacle" when there are
    no claimed limitations restricting the method or apparatus to the
    manufacture and/or repair of Class 445 devices - e.g., (1) limitation to
    electrode heating or assembly of components other than an envelope closure
    would require classification in this class (445) while mere heating of an
    envelope during evacuating or filling would not require exclusion from
    Class 53; (2) methods and the apparatus for such methods, which include
    performing a chemical reaction to eliminate gas or vapor by reacting the
    gas or vapor with some chemical to form a nonvolatile compound; or which
    include performing a chemical reaction to generate gas or vapor - whether
    the reaction is performed outside of or within the envelope - when the
    method or apparatus is directed to use in manufacturing a lamp or discharge
    device are excluded from Class 53 and classified in the class (445).  See
    especially subclasses 403+ for process of gas filling and/or evacuating
    combined with closing and subclasses 79+ for equivalent apparatus.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 34 for a glass-working process
    including sealing off of a gas evacuating opening; subclasses 138+ for
    electronic envelope header, terminal or stem making by glassworking means;
    subclasses 152+ for fusion bonding by glassworking means, note especially
    subclass 153 for means attaching a flare concentrically to an envelope;
    subclass 154 for bonding a metal part to a glass part of lamp envelope;
    subclass 155 for glass to glass fusion bonding in an electronic device
    making apparatus; and subclass 270 for glass envelope tipping off apparatus
    utilizing glassworking, see the "Search Notes" thereunder.

    72,     Metal Deforming, for disclosure of pertinent deforming operations;
    and see particularly subclasses 66 and 135+ for disclosure of wire-coiling;
    253.1+ for disclosure of extruding; and 274+ for disclosure of drawing
    through an orifice.

    81,     Tools, for miscellaneous handtools of general application, screw
    drivers, and wrenches and vises, of this class note especially subclass 9.4
    for wire strippers for stripping insulation off wire.

    82,     Turning, for miscellaneous apparatus for producing articles by
    means of cutters brought into engagement with a work piece, either the
    cutter of the work piece being given a rotary motion so as to produce an
    article or predetermined section, usually circular.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 95+ and 98+ for electrodes
    for electrical precipitators.

    101,    Printing, for miscellaneous printing apparatus.  Note especially
    subclasses 3.1+ for machines for producing characters or designs upon
    surfaces (such as the base of a discharge device or lamp) by dies which
    deform or remove part of the material and subclasses 35+ for machines for
    printing upon special articles, such as the envelope or base of a lamp or
    discharge device.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, for miscellaneous coating apparatus, and
    especially subclass 47 for apparatus for carbonizing lamp filament
    coatings, and subclasses 715+ for apparatus for coating by means of a gas
    or vapor.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 153+ for make and break
    sparkers for internal combustion engines, and subclass 169 for spark plugs
    for internal combustion engines.

    140,    Wireworking, for miscellaneous apparatus for wireworking including
    the working of wire by bending or twisting it to form specific articles or
    fabrics, the applying of wire to articles, and cutting, feeding,
    straightening, and tensioning wire.  Note especially subclass 1 for wire
    working in combination with means not specific to wireworking such as
    apparatus for wireworking in combination with means for metal casting,
    swaging, welding, metal rolling, painting etc.  See subclass 71 for
    miscellaneous apparatus for making articles from wire stock. See subclasses
    71.5+ for forming and shaping electrodes and electrodes supports which are
    made of wire. Subclass 71.5 includes some patents for trimming and/or
    shaping the lead wire projecting from the stem of a lamp or discharge
    device.  Subclass 71.6 includes machines for holding the stem and applying
    the wire electrodes to the support wires in the stem where only wireworking
    operations are involved.  Subclasses 111+ provides for wire joining
    apparatus.  Subclasses 147+ provides for wire straightening apparatus.
    Subclass 149 includes some apparatus for shaping a filament by twisting.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    345 for differential etching apparatus, and subclass 424, for apparatus for
    assembling and bonding an electric lamp envelope to its base.  Class 156,
    subclasses 47+ is also the generic home for processes for making and/or
    joining or splicing running or indefinite length electrical conductors not
    elsewhere provided for.  Apparatus designed to perform a metal working and
    a covering operation is in this Class 445.

    164,    Metal Founding, for metal casting apparatus.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 194+ for
    electrolytic apparatus, in general, especially subclasses 280+ for
    electrodes used in this type of electrolytic apparatus; and subclasses
    298.01+ for sputter coating, forming, or etching apparatus.  Note, however,
    that self-baking or Soederberg electrodes, not limited to use in
    electrolytic apparatus, are classified in Class 313, Electric Lamp and
    Discharge Devices, subclass 327.

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, subclass 11 forming or treating
    article whose final configuration has a projection for the use of etching
    in the manufacturing of an electrode.

    219,    Electric Heating, for electric heating and welding apparatus, note
    especially subclasses 145.1+ for arc welding electrodes.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 2.1+, for envelopes, per se, for electric
    lamps, discharge devices, and similar devices.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, for methods of and
    apparatus for feeding material without utilizing the leading or trailing
    ends to effect movement of the material.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, for joining of work portions by soldering,
    welding or brazing, note especially subclasses 179.1+ for methods of
    bonding electrical devices having plural joints, and subclass 903 for a
    cross-reference art collection for bonding metal to nonmetal.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, for miscellaneous winding and
    reeling apparatus, including subclasses 430+ for methods and apparatus for
    making by winding articles such as electromagnets and coils, etc., or in
    applying wire or cordage material by winding to armatures, rings, pails,
    pipes, or other articles.

    269,    Work Holders, for work holders, per se, for use in electric lamp or
    space discharge device manufacture.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 248+ for
    brushes for electrical motors and generators.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, for electric lamps and
    electric space discharge devices, including electric incandescent lamps,
    electric space discharge lamps, electronic tubes, gas or vapor filled
    discharge tubes, cathode-ray tubes, X-ray tubes, photoemissive discharge
    tubes and spark plugs.  Note especially subclass 11.5 for spark plug type
    discharge device having temperature modifier, subclasses 402+ for shadow
    mask, support or shield for CRT, subclass 482 for support for electrode or
    envelope of CRT, subclasses 118+ for spark plug devices, subclasses 238+
    for support and/or spacing structure for electrode and/or shield, and
    subclasses 326+ for electrodes, filaments and shields for such devices.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Consumable Electrodes,
    appropriate subclasses, for electric space discharge devices of the
    consumable electrode type (arc lamps etc.).

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices:  Systems, appropriate
    subclasses, for special types of electric lamp and electric space discharge
    device systems.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, for electrical resistors, per se.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 247+ for
    electrical igniting systems, and subclasses 600+ for housing and mounting
    assemblies with plural diverse electrical components.

    362,    Illumination, appropriate subclasses, for means and processes for
    casting visible radiant energy in at least one direction to render objects
    in that direction visible.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, appropriate subclasses, for
    miscellaneous electrical furnace structures, especially subclasses 2+ and
    60+ for arc furnaces, and subclasses 88+ for arc furnace electrodes.  Note,
    however, that self-baking or Soederberg electrodes, not limited to use in
    arc furnaces, are classified in Class 313, Electric Lamp and Discharge
    Devices, subclass 327.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, for drilling and
    boring tools and operations.

    417,    Pumps, for pumps, per se.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, appropriate subclasses for electrodes for
    electrolytic, electrostatic and electric discharge apparatus.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 74 for methods of coating to form a
    photoconductive product which responds to visible, infrared, or ultraviolet
    illumination by (a) emitting electrons, (b) generating an electromotive
    force, or (c) varying electrical conductivity.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    for a stock material product or blank in the form of a single or plural
    layer (laminated or coated) web or sheet.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process, subclass 94 for plural concentric or single coiled electrode under
    the class definition, and subclasses 122+ for elements, subcombinations,
    and compositions for use in current producing cell and note especially
    subclass 208 for electrode support for holding an electrode in a battery
    and subclasses 209+ for various electrode structure and chemical
    compositions.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 23+ for producing CRT or element thereof under the
    class definition.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 358 for a photoflash bulb of the combustion
    type.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, subclass 20 for
    methods of making semiconductor-based electron emitters.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, for electrical connectors, per se.  Note
    especially subclasses 143+ for electrical connectors with anti-inductive
    shielding means, and subclass 217 for electrical contact or connector
    secured to insulation.

    451,    Abrading, for grinding or abrading apparatus.


CLS 445/1
TXT PROCESS:

    Method under the class definition.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclass include the manufacture of
    lamps and space discharge devices from any material where no specific class
    provided for the claim subject matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 115.51+ for processes for the chemical
    modification of textiles and fibers, especially subclasses 116.1+ for such
    processes for treating vegetable fibers (cotton, bamboo, etc.,) and
    subclass 128.1 for such processes for treating animal fibers, subclass 140
    for methods of carbonizing textiles and fibers by means of fluid treatment
    and chemical modification.

    29,     Metal Working, appropriate subclasses, for process of manufacturing
    miscellaneous electrical devices, note especially subclasses 2 for
    battery-grid making, 25.01+ for semiconductor or barrier layer device
    making, 25.35 for piezoelectric device making, 25.41+ for electric
    condenser making, and 592.1+ for processes of manufacturing various
    electric devices.  See also subclasses 426.1+ and 428+ for miscellaneous
    processes of disassembly, and assembly respectively, and subclasses 17.2+
    for processes for forming thin sheet metal and metal foil process which
    includes coating a form and then removing the form to leave an article of
    thin sheet metal or metal foil.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, the subclasses
    indented under the title "Processes", for miscellaneous methods of treating
    articles and materials by, (1) separating liquids from the article or the
    material by drying, (2) the contacting of the article or the material with
    either or both gases or vapors, note especially subclass 427 for such
    processes combined with a diverse type process and subclasses 437+ for
    processes peculiar to hollow articles.

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 403+, for processes of gas filling
    and/or evacuating packages or receptacles including lamps or electric space
    discharge devices and closing same.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 17.1+ for miscellaneous process of,
    (1) making and/or treating a glass product or stock, or (2) re-working
    and/or treating a glass preform or stock, or (3) such working or treating
    combined with severing, perforating or abrading of the glass; see
    especially subclass 34 for glass-working combined with sealing off of a gas
    evacuating opening and subclasses 26+ for a process of fusion bonding of
    glass to glass or metal.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 253.1+, for extruding metal (e.g.,
    electrodes), and 362+ (particularly 364 and 377) for processes thereof
    which do not involve specified apparatus, 199+ for disclosure of rolling
    metal, and 274+ for disclosure of drawing wire through an orifice.

    106,    Composition:  Coating or Plastic, for miscellaneous coating,
    impregnating or plastic compositions, excepting those which are limited to
    use for making filaments, electrodes and shields for electric lamps and
    electric space discharge devices which are in Class 252 below.  Class 106
    provides for processes of making compositions within its class definition
    even though the step of molding, extruding, spinning or sheeting is claimed
    broadly, also the statement that heat and/or specific pressure are recited
    will not be enough of itself to take a patent claiming a process of
    preparing a composition out of Class 106.  Class 106, therefore, includes
    the process of producing articles from plastic materials within the limits
    set forth above.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, for processes of cleaning
    or treating various solids (including electrodes and blanks) with liquids,
    and including the acid treatment of metals in subclasses 3, 27, 28, and 41.

    140,    Wireworking, appropriate subclasses, for processes of making
    articles from wire by wireworking operations. Subclasses 71.5+ provides for
    making or shaping parts of electric space discharge devices, such as grids,
    filaments or other electrodes by wireworking operations, and methods of
    attaching such electrodes to their support wires where the method involves
    only wireworking operations.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 4 and 8 for methods and subclasses 65+ for apparatus pertaining
    to the evacuation of and/or filling receivers with gas or vapor including
    lamps or electric space discharge devices.

    148,    Metal Treatment, appropriate subclasses for process of treating
    metal to modify or maintain the internal physical structure (i.e.,
    microstructure) or chemical properties of metal.  If metal casting, fusion
    bonding, machining, or working is involved there is a requirement of
    significant heat treatment as described in section III, A, of the Class 148
    definition.  Note that Class 148, subclasses 240+, provides for the
    reactive coating of metal wherein an external agent combines with a
    component of the metal substrate to produce a coating on the metal
    substrate that contains the component of the metal substrate.


    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacturing,
    subclasses 47+ for making electrical conductors of indefinite length under
    the class definition, and subclasses 60+ for processes of surface bonding
    and/or assembly under the class definition.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, appropriate subclasses,
    for electrical conductor and insulators structures, per se, note especially
    subclasses 17.05+ for hermetically sealed envelope type housings for vacuum
    or fluids and 50.5+ for hermetically sealed envelope type housings which
    may include electrical connecter or conductor structure or insulator
    structure.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 155+ for
    chemical preparation of a compound or element by using electrical or wave
    energy in a magnetic field, subclasses 164+ for chemical preparation of a
    compound or element by using an electrostatic field or electrical discharge
    and subclasses 192.1+ for coating, forming, or etching by sputtering.
    Class 204 provides for combined coating operations where only one such
    coating method is a Class 204 method. Class 204 also provides for some
    other processes which include a plurality of operations, even if only one
    of the operations is a Class 204 operation.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 67+ for electroforming in which the
    material deposited to form the article is not intended to remain on the
    base or form upon which deposition is made, subclasses 80+ for electrolytic
    coating, subclasses 149+ for coating specified shapes, and other
    appropriate subclasses for electrolytic etching or treating of articles
    (e.g., electrodes, etc.).  Class 205 provides for combined coating
    operations where only one such coating method is a Class 205 method. Class
    205 also provides for some other processes which include a plurality of
    operations, even if only one of the operations is a Class 205 operation.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 104+ for methods of inductively
    heating metal or nonmetal, and subclass 162 for methods of electrically
    heating metal.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 500+ for electrically conductive and
    emissive compositions and devices defined only in terms of their
    composition.  These subclasses in Class 252 provide for the same
    manufacturing operations as the subclasses in Class 106, relative Class 106
    and for other classes which provide for methods of preparing the
    compositions and devices see the above statement concerning Class 106.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses, for processes of working, molding or shaping
    miscellaneous plastic materials, per se, or combined with other operations,
    within the class definition.  See the Class 264 definitions for the line
    between this class (445) and Class 264. Some subclasses in Class 264 which
    are specific to production of electrical components or devices ard 104+,
    272.11 and 614+.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    900 for a cross-reference art collection of optical methods.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 257+ for means and processes for casting
    visible radiant energy in at least one direction to render objects in that
    direction visible.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 546+ for means and processes for exposing
    multicolor CRT targets.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclass 1 for
    processes of boring or drilling under the class definition.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, appropriate subclasses, for methods of
    forming various components by powder metallurgy.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, appropriate subclasses for metal
    powder products which are alloys.

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclasses, note especially
    subclasses 457+ for coating with direct application of electrical, magnetic
    or wave energy, and 58+ for processes of manufacturing coated electrical
    products and particularly 106+ and 111+ for coating bulbs and filaments.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 23+ for processes under the class definition for
    producing CRT or element thereof.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, appropriate subclasses, for processes of manufacturing
    electrical components from paper or other sheet or web material.


CLS 445/2
TXT Repairing, converting or salvaging:

    Method under subclass 1 including (A) restoring or reconditioning an
    inoperative electric lamp or electric space discharge device to its
    functional, stable, or working condition; or (B) altering or modifying an
    electric lamp or electric space discharge device to produce a lamp or
    device of substantially different capacity, size, function, or type of
    operation; or (C) recovering or   reclaiming a portion of an electric lamp
    or electric space discharge device that would otherwise be discarded.

    (1)     Note.  The methods in this subclass are limited by some claimed
    subject matter to use in repairing or salvaging a discharge device or lamp
    and are not merely methods of general utility which are disclosed as being
    useful in such repair or salvage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3+,     for methods including testing or adjusting.

    5,      for methods including use of electric arc or current for removing
    an undesired particle, i.e., spot knocking.

    6,      for methods including start up, flashing or aging.

    61,     for the corresponding apparatus - see the search notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 401.1 for miscellaneous methods of
    converting, subclasses 402.01+ for miscellaneous methods of repairing, and
    subclasses 403.1+ for miscellaneous methods including scrap recovery or
    utilization.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    94+ for methods of reclaiming, renewing or repairing articles for reuse by
    surface bonding techniques.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 92.1 for methods of repairing or restoring
    articles for use utilizing liquid metal.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 192.1+ for
    coating, forming, or etching by sputtering.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, appropriate subclasses for electrolytic
    processes, including coating and erosion.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 600+ for inductive heating, subclasses
    678+ for microwave heating, subclasses 764+ for capacitive dielectric
    heating, and subclasses 50+ for electrical heating of metal.  Said heating
    may be in combination with working, as for example, welding.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclass 119 for methods of repairing,
    restoring or renewing product for reuse by metal fusion bonding operations.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 36 for methods of repairing or restoring articles for reuse under
    the class definition, and subclasses 37+ for recycling of reclaimed or
    purified process material under the class definition.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 58+ for processes of coating which
    produce an electrical product, and subclasses 140+ for restoring or
    repairing by means of coating processes.


CLS 445/3
TXT With testing or adjusting:

    Method under subclass 1 including (A) determining or examining the
    operating or functional characteristics or simulations thereof of an
    electric lamp or electric space discharge device or a portion thereof or
    (B) modifying or changing the response of the lamp or device parts or
    components thereof to given operating parameters until a desired condition
    is obtained.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for methods including start up, flashing or aging.

    63+,    for apparatus having means for testing or adjusting electric lamp
    or electric space discharge devices - see the search notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, appropriate subclasses, for miscellaneous methods of
    manufacturing or assembly various electrical devices, note especially
    subclass 593 for methods including measuring or testing of an electrical
    device or component part thereof during manufacturing of the electrical
    device.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    64, for surface bonding methods including measuring, testing or inspecting.

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, subclasses 59+ and 84+ for
    processes of etching combined with measuring, testing, or inspecting.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 40.1+ for methods under the class definition including
    measuring, testing or inspecting.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 364, for
    systems and methods for testing CRT's.  A method of manufacturing which is
    otherwise classified in Class 445 which includes a testing operation is
    classified in Class 445.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses, note
    especially subclasses 121 and 250 for test devices using a CRT's.

    427,    Coating Process, subclasses 8+ for coating methods including
    measuring, testing or indicating.


CLS 445/4
TXT Electrode position sensing or adjusting by optical operation:

    Method under subclass 3 which include determining or regulating the proper
    location of electric terminals by means of light, ultraviolet or infrared
    electromagnets radiation.

    (1)     Note.  Most of the methods in this subclass are directed to the
    method of positioning the filament of a lamp with respect to the base so as
    to make a prefocused lamp.

    (2)     Note.  This class provides for all methods for positioning the
    electrodes in which the position of the electrodes is determined by the use
    of optical means even though another class may provide for the particular
    method used to assemble the electrodes.  For example, processes for joining
    two preforms by a molding step are in Class 264, Plastic and Nonmetallic
    Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes, by a laminating step in Class 156,
    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical  Manufacture, but such
    processes when optical means are used to position the filament with respect
    to the base, are in this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for the corresponding apparatus - see the search notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, appropriate subclasses, for miscellaneous methods of
    assembly, note especially subclasses 592.1+ for method of making
    miscellaneous electrical devices.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 123 for methods relating
    to adjustment of the focal position of a light filament with respect to
    generally a reflector or a lens.


CLS 445/5
TXT Including use of electric arc or current for removing an undesired
    particle, i.e., spot knocking:

    Method under subclass 1 wherein an electromagnetic discharge or electron
    flow is employed to eliminate unwanted minutiae.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for methods of repairing, converting or salvaging.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 155+ for
    chemical preparation of a compound or element by using electrical or wave
    energy in a magnetic field.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 640+ for electrolytic erosion to
    change the shape or surface configuration of a workpiece (e.g., etching,
    polishing, etc.).

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 69.1+ for cutting or disintegrating
    utilizing an electric arc.


CLS 445/6
TXT With start, flashing, or aging:

    Method under subclass 1 wherein an electric lamp or electric space
    discharge device is (A) treated by initially subjecting to similar forces
    and environment substantially duplicating those encountered under real
    operating conditions or (B) treated for sensitizing or stabilizing purposes
    which treatment is not provided for in any other class.

    (1)     Note.  For other classes which provide for processes of aging
    and/or sensitizing an electrode for an electric space discharge device,
    search Class 148, Metal Treatment, appropriate subclasses, for processes
    for treating metal electrodes.  Class 445 provides only for such metal
    treatment to age or sensitize electrodes as is not provided for in Class
    148.  Note especially subclasses 559+ and 625+ which provide for heat
    treatment metal electrodes containing an electron emissive material, either
    to bring the electron emissive material to the surface of the electron or
    to convert the material into a different form (i.e., reducing Th02 content
    of the electrode to thorium).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for methods including testing or adjusting.

    22,     for combined operations within the class definition.

    62,     for apparatus having means for simulating real operating conditions
    and environment.

    64,     for combined apparatus within the class definition.


CLS 445/7
TXT Spark plug of spark gap making:

    Method under subclass 1 for manufacturing or fabricating a device generally
    for use in cylinder of an internal combustion engine, which device has a
    pair of electrodes between which an electric discharge is passed usually to
    ignite an explosive mixture of fuel.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also includes the manufacture, fabrication, or
    production of devices which are of similar structure but intended for use
    in diverse applications.  It does not include the manufacture of devices
    where the spark is made by moving the electrodes into contact and then
    separating them to draw the spark. Also excluded is the manufacture of
    single electrode structures which are designed to be used with some other
    device so as to form a jump spark therewith.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 153+ for making and break
    type sparkers in a combustion with an internal combustion engine or engine
    accessory, and subclass 169, for spark plugs in combination with an
    internal combustion engine or engine accessory.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 118+ for spark
    plugs or spark gaps, per se.


CLS 445/8
TXT Implosion protecting:

    Method under subclass 1 to provide the electric lamp or electric space
    discharge device with special features or means to safeguard against or to
    prevent inward collapse or bursting of an evacuated hermetically sealed
    vessel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses, note
    especially subclasses 477+ for CRT envelopes, per se, and subclass 634 for
    envelopes containing gas or vapor having particular envelope structure.

    314,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Consumable Electrodes,
    appropriate subclasses.


CLS 445/9
TXT Generating gas or vapor within an envelope, or coating by vapor, gas, mist
    or smoke within the envelope:

    Method under subclass 1 which includes (1) producing or creating a gasous
    material or aerosol within the enclosure of the electric lamp or electric
    space discharge device by treating a normally nongaseous material within
    the enclosure, or (2) producing or creating a deposition layer on some part
    of the electric space discharge by the absorption or condensation of a
    gaseous material or aerosol, or by the reaction of a base or deposition
    ingredient with a gaseous material or aerosol.

    (1)     Note.  Original placement within this subclass requires that the
    gaseous material or aerosol must be within the enclosure of the lamp or
    discharge device and deposition operation must include some operation
    peculiar to the manufacture of electric lamps or electric space discharge
    devices so that the process is not of general utility.

    (2)     Note.  Methods which include introducing a material which is in the
    gaseous or vapor state prior to its introduction in the envelope and which
    do not involve forming a coating from the gas or vapor material are
    excluded from these subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  The coating applied to the part of the lamp or discharge
    device need not serve any useful function as a coating, but may be merely a
    procedure adapted to eliminate the vapor from the interior of the envelope
    of the lamp or discharge device, or the vaporizing and subsequent
    deposition may be for procuring the material in a vaporized state so that
    it will be an active getter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for other methods of coating a part of a lamp or discharge device
    combined with a Class 445 operation other than coating.

    38+,    for methods of assembly or disassembly including gas, vapor or
    liquid introduction.

    53+,    for methods including getter or fluent material introduction.

    73,     for corresponding apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, appropriate subclasses, for methods directed to the production of
    metals where a gas or vapor is generated containing the metal, the gas or
    vapor being treated so as to yield the metal.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 240+ for processes of reactively
    coating a metal substrate wherein an external agent combines with a
    component of the metal substrate to produce a coating on the metal
    substrate that contains a component of the metal substrate.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 192.1+ for
    coating, forming, or etching by sputtering.  See the (3) Note in the Class
    445 definition for an explanation of the general class line between Class
    445 and other classes.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, appropriate subclasses for electrolytic
    processes.  See the (3) Note in the Class 445 definition for an explanation
    of the general class line between Class 445 and other classes.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 181.1+ for getter materials and gas or
    vapor generating materials for electric lamps and electric space discharge
    devices and the classes specified in the notes to the definitions of those
    subclasses.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses, for
    lamp and discharge device structure whether prior to the use of the getter
    or vapor generating material (e.g., incompletely manufactured) or
    subsequent to the use of the material. Subclasses 549+ provides for lamps
    and discharge devices provided with a getter or gas or vapor generating
    material.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 48+ for electrical or getter type devices.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 58+ for processes of coating, per se,
    to form an electrical product and note especially subclasses 77+ for
    processes wherein the coating is electron emissive or suppressive and
    applied by vapor deposition; and subclass 237, for coating the interior of
    a hollow article by vapor, gas, mist or smoke.


CLS 445/10
TXT Controlled vaporizing or coating:

    Method under subclass 9 which includes (1) regulating the amount of gaseous
    material or aerosol produced or created or (2) regulating the amount of
    material in the deposition layer or coating.

    (1)     Note.  This Subclass does not include methods where a predetermined
    amount of material is introduced into the envelope and this material is
    then used to generate as much gas or vapor as it is capable of generating
    in order to obtain a predetermined amount of gas or vapor within the
    envelope.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for such methods where the coating is deposited in a particular
    place or on a particular base material or part.

    53+,    for other methods of introducing a limited amount of gas or vapor
    into the envelope of a lamp or discharge device.


CLS 445/11
TXT Depositing plural coatings:

    Method under subclass 9 which includes producing or creating a plurality of
    deposition layers or coating on some part of the lamp or discharge device
    by a plurality of absorption, condensation or reaction operations.

    (1)     Note.  Merely producing a coating upon two or more parts of the
    lamp or discharge device such as upon two different electrodes, where only
    a single coating operation is involved is not within the definition of this
    subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The coatings produced in this subclass may be superposed or
    upon separate parts of the lamp or discharge device.

    (3)     Note.  The coating may be of the same material applied separately
    or of different materials.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for plural coating processes where one coating is produced by a
    vapor, gas, mist, or smoke, and one is produced by some other operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 183+, 188+, 191+, and 198+, for
    electrolytic coating methods combined with other types of coating
    operations.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Device, subclasses 553+ for electric
    lamps and electric space discharge devices which are provided with a
    plurality of different getters and/or gas or vapor generating means.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 58+ for coating, per se, wherein the
    coated product has electrical utility, and subclasses 402+ for methods of
    applying superposed diverse coating or coating a coated base.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 311+ for methods under the class definition of making
    electrical devices having nonplanar or printing surfaces.


CLS 445/12
TXT With diverse type coating operation:

    Method under subclass 9 combined with a deposition operation other than
    produced by gaseous material or aerosol.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes methods where the gas or vapor
    generated is not utilized to form a coating.

    (2)     Note.  The coating applied by the methods in this subclass does not
    need to be applied to the same base as the base coated by the vapor, gas,
    mist, or smoke.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for methods of depositing plural coating - see the search notes
    thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 240+, for methods of reactively coating
    solid metal employing a gaseous or vaporous reactant material.


CLS 445/13
TXT With subsequent treatment of the coating:

    Method under subclass 9 wherein the deposition layer or coating is
    subjected to a further processing or conditioning operation.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes methods where the coating material is
    deposited at one place within the envelope of the lamp or discharge device
    and then revaporized to deposit the material as a coating at another place.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes mere heating of the coating after it
    has been deposited.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     where the subsequent treatment includes depositing another coating
    upon the first coating by means of vapor, gas, mist, or smoke.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 220+ for electrolytical coating
    methods in combination with subsequent treatment of the coating.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 58+ for coating processes, per se,
    wherein the coated product has electrical utility, and subclasses 331+ for
    methods with post-treatment of the coating or the coating material.


CLS 445/14
TXT Coating on particular base material, part or place:

    Method under subclass 9 wherein the deposition layer or coating is produced
    upon a specific component, location, or composition of matter.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass gettering where the getter is condensed in a
    particular place.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 240+ for processes of reactively
    coating a metal substrate wherein an external agent combines with a
    component of the metal substrate to produce a coating on the metal
    substrate that contains a component of the metal substrate.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 80+ for electrolytic coating, and
    subclasses 118+ for coating selected areas.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 558+ for electric
    lamps and electric space discharge devices which are provided with a getter
    or a gas or vapor generating means and which are provided with means for
    causing the deposit or coating from the gas, vapor, mist or smoke generated
    when the getter or gas or vapor generating material is vaporized to deposit
    in a particular place within the device.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 58+ for coating processes, per se,
    wherein the coated product has electrical utility, and subclasses 256+ for
    coating processes, per se, which produce nonuniform coating.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 311+ for methods under the class definition of making
    electrical devices having nonplanar or printing surfaces.


CLS 445/15
TXT Plural gas or vapor generating operations:

    Method under subclass 9 which involves a plurality of gaseous material or
    aerosol production or creation sequences.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for this subject material where the generated gas or vapor is
    utilized to deposit a plurality of coatings - see the search note
    thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 255.1+ for coating methods, per se,
    utilizing a mixture of vapors, gases or smoke.


CLS 445/16
TXT With gas introduction:

    Method under subclass 9 in combination with the operation of bringing or
    producing from an outside source gaseous material into the enclosure of the
    lamp or discharge device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, for methods including introducing gas, vapor or
    liquid into a portable receptacle.  An electric lamp and an electric space
    discharge device are deemed to be encompassed by the term "portable
    receptacle" when there are no claimed limitations restricting the method or
    apparatus to the manufacture and/or repair of Class 445 devices, e.g., (1)
    limitation to electrode heating or assembly of components other than an
    envelope closure would require classification in this class (445) while
    mere heating of an envelope during evacuating would not require exclusion
    from Class 53; (2) methods and apparatus for such methods, which include
    performing a chemical reaction to eliminate gas or vapor by reacting the
    gas or vapor with some chemical to form a nonvolatile compound; or which
    include performing a chemical reaction to generate gas or vapor - whether
    the reaction is performed outside of or within the envelope when the method
    or apparatus is directed to use in manufacturing a lamp or discharge device
    are excluded from Class 53 and classified in this class.  See especially
    subclasses 403+ for processes of gas filling and/or evacuating combined
    with closing and subclasses 79+ for equivalent apparatus.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 4+ for methods and subclasses 65+ for apparatus pertaining to
    the evacuation of and/or filling receivers with gas or vapor including
    lamps or electric space discharge devices.


CLS 445/17
TXT With precedent or subsequent heating of tube or electrode:

    Method under subclass 9 including thermally warming the envelope or the
    conductor structure of the lamp or discharge device prior to the coating or
    gas generating operation or following the gas generating operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     where the method includes forming a coating from a vapor, gas,
    smoke or mist, and then subsequently treating the deposited coating by
    heating it.

    19,     where the method includes electromagnetic induction heating.

    20,     where the method includes filament heating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 314+ for coating methods, per se,
    with heating pretreatment of the base, and subclasses 372.2+ for coating
    methods, per se, with heating post-treatment of coating or coating material.


CLS 445/18
TXT Including establishing an electric space discharge:

    Method under subclass 9 which includes setting up or producing an electric
    arc or current flow between electrodes of the lamp or discharge device.

    (1)     Note.  The discharge may be established between the discharge
    electrodes where the device being treated is a discharge device, or between
    any members of the device between which a discharge can be established.

    (2)     Note.  The discharge may be established for the purpose of heating
    or treating the gas or vapor generating material, or may be established for
    other purposes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for apparatus under the class definition including means to
    establish an electric space discharge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, for processes of treating metal to modify or
    maintain the internal physical structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical
    properties of metal.  If metal casting, fusion bonding, machining, or
    working is involved, there is a requirement of significant heat treatment
    as described in section III, A, of the Class 148 definition.  Use of
    electrical heating does not negate Class 148 placement, if the other
    criteria for Class 148 are met.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 164+ for
    chemical preparation of a compound or element by using an electrostatic
    field or electrical discharge and subclasses 192.1+ for coating, forming,
    or etching by sputtering.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 121.11+ for methods of metal heating
    by means of an electric discharge.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 580 for coating methods, per se,
    utilizing direct application of an electric discharge.


CLS 445/19
TXT Electromagnetic induction heating:

    Method under subclass 9 which includes heating a part of the lamp or
    discharge device by placing the lamp or discharge device in an
    electromagnetic field so as to induce current flow in the part to be
    heated, the heat being generated by the induced current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 240+ for processes of reactively
    coating a metal substrate wherein an external agent combines with a
    component of the metal substrate to produce a coating on the metal
    substrate that contains a component of the metal substrate.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 155+ for
    chemical preparation of a compound or element by using electrical or wave
    energy in a magnetic field.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 600+ for inductive heating, subclasses
    678+ for microwave heating, and subclasses 764+ for capacitive dielectric
    heating.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 591 for coating methods, per se,
    utilizing direct application of induction or dielectric heating.


CLS 445/20
TXT Filament heating:

    Method under subclass 9 which includes supplying current to the conducting
    cathode, anode or grid structure of the lamp or discharge device so as to
    cause thermally warming.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 549 for electric
    lamps and electric space discharge devices which are provided with a getter
    or a gas or vapor generating material and which have combined therewith
    means for heating the getter or the gas or vapor generating material.


CLS 445/21
TXT Generating gas or vapor from reactive composition containing a reducing
    agent:

    Method under subclass 9 wherein gaseous material or an aerosol is produced
    by or from a mixture containing two substance, one substance being a
    reducing agent with respect to the other, the other substance releasing a
    gaseous material or aerosol when acted upon by the reducing agent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Composition, subclasses 181.3+ for the compositions which are used
    in this method.


CLS 445/22
TXT Combined, e.g., with shaping of lamp or device envelope:

    Method under subclass 1 which includes a step which is, per se, (1) not
    provided for in this class and which (2) performs a function other than
    that utilized to perfect an operation provided for in this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 592+ for processes of making metallic
    articles and processes of working metal not classified in specific classes.
    Subclasses 592+ are not limited to metal working operations, and nonmetal
    working operations are included in combination with a metal working
    operation.  Also note subclasses 592.1+ for miscellaneous processes for
    making electrical devices which include a metal working operation.
    Subclasses 874+ provides for processes for making contacts and terminals
    for electric lamps, electric space discharge devices and other electrical
    devices.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 427, for
    contacting of the article or the material with either or both gases or
    vapors combined with a diverse type process.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 17.1+, for appropriate process
    subclasses limited to glass shaping or reshaping, or fusion bonding of
    glass to a formed part.

    144,    Woodworking, for a woodworking process involving an operation other
    than woodworking in addition to the woodworking operation where no specific
    class provides for the combined operations.

    148,    Metal Treatment, appropriate subclasses for processes of treating
    solid or semi-solid metal to modify or maintain the internal physical
    structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical properties of metal.  If metal
    casting, fusion bonding, machining, or working is involved, there is a
    requirement of significant heat treatment as described in section III, A,
    of the Class 148 definition.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 76.1, for metal casting processes combined
    with a diverse nonperfecting operation.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclasses for
    electrical or wave energy processes provided for by the Class 204
    definition.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 50+ for electric heating of metal, per
    se.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 238, for methods of plastic molding, shaping, or working combined
    with a diverse operation.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 178+ for
    plural diverse type load devices.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 401 for coating processes combined with
    a diverse nonperfecting operation.


CLS 445/23
TXT With assembly or disassembly:

    Method under subclass 1 in which a plurality of self-sustaining preforms
    are associated, disassociated, juxtaposed, put together or removed, with or
    without securing, in a nontransitory arrangement.

    (1)     Note.  Merely stacking, moving or otherwise arranging preforms to
    effect or facilitate transportation, per se, is not considered an assembly
    operation.

    (2)     Note.  Association or disassociation with a tool, work holder, or
    transitory attached material, none of which constitute part of the finished
    product, is not considered assembly or disassembly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66+,    for apparatus having assembly or disassembly means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 2 for battery grid making, subclasses
    592.1+ for methods of manufacturing miscellaneous electrical devices,
    subclasses 426.1+ for miscellaneous methods of disassembly, and subclasses
    428+ for miscellaneous methods of assembly.

    140,    Wireworking, subclasses 111+ for method of joining wire, per se.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    47+ for making electrical conductors of indefinite length, and subclasses
    60+ for methods of surface bonding and/or assembly therefor.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 91+ for methods of composite article
    forming under the class definition.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 101+ for a method under the class
    definition, especially subclasses 179.1+ for a method of metallurgically
    bonding plural joints of an electrical device.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 241+ for methods of mechanically shaping or molding to produce
    composite, plural part or multilayered article.

    419,    Powder Metallurgy Processes, appropriate subclasses, for methods of
    powder metallurgy.


CLS 445/24
TXT Display or gas panel making:

    Method under subclass 23 which produces or manufactures a device which is
    intended to exhibit a visual readout or message.

    (1)     Note.  Many display panels are filled with gaseous media, however a
    display panel can be another Class 445 type device such as a liquid crystal
    display device.

    (2)     Note.  Merely indicating a single binary message, e.g., on/off,
    go/no go, is not considered to warrant placement in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 592.1+ for processes of manufacturing
    miscellaneous electrical devices, which employ electrically activated light
    valve means to block or change the path of pre-existing light.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 513+ for electric
    lamp and discharge devices with character display.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    26+ and 245+ for display devices, per se, employing electrically activated
    light valve structure.


CLS 445/25
TXT With sealing:

    Method under subclass 24 which includes closing and making secure against
    leakage an enclosure of the display or gas panel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for assembly or disassembly methods with particular sealing which
    methods include evacuation, degasification or gas, vapor or liquid
    introduction - see the search notes thereunder.

    44,     for methods of hermetically assembling plural parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 628+ for a static contact seal for other than an
    internal combustion engine, or a pipe, conduit, or cable.


CLS 445/26
TXT Arc tube making, e.g., fluorescent lamp:

    Method under subclass 23 for fabricating or manufacturing a lamp or device
    which produces light by means of electric current flow or discharge through
    ionized gas between two electrodes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 483+ for electric
    lamp or discharge device with luminescent solid or liquid material.


CLS 445/27
TXT Incandescent lamp making:

    Method under subclass 23 for fabricating or manufacturing a device that
    produces light when a filament is heating in a vacuum or inert atmosphere
    by passing an electric current through the filament.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for methods of manufacturing flash lamp, X-ray or laser.

    29+,    for methods including electrode or getter mounting.

    35+,    for methods of assembly or disassembly including electrode making.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclass 315 for
    incandescent lamps, per se, subclasses 578+ for incandescent lamps having
    envelope with gas or vapor.


CLS 445/28
TXT Flash lamp, X-ray tube or laser making:

    Method under subclass 23 for fabricating or manufacturing a device that,
    (1) produces bursts of light of short duration and high intensity such as
    are used for photography, or (2) produces a penetrating electromagnetic
    radiation known as roentgen rays such as by accelerating electrons to high
    velocity and suddenly stopping them by collision with a solid target or
    body, or (3) produces a narrow beam of coherent, powerful and nearly
    monochromatic electromagnetic radiation using the laser principle of light
    amplifications by stimulated emission of radiation, i.e., LASER.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, appropriate subclasses for laser
    devices, per se.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 119+ for X-ray
    tubes, per se.

    431,    Combustion, subclasses 358+ for a fuel charge within sealed
    transparent casing, e.g., bulb.


CLS 445/29
TXT Including electrode or getter mounting:

    Method under subclass 23 which includes the operation of placing or
    securing in final position (1) an electrical conductor through which an
    electric current enters or leaves a vacuum or a fluent medium or which is
    designed to produce light by incandescent or (2) a degasser or substance
    that absorbs, or otherwise binds up undesired gases or aerosols, which
    degasser or substance is used in a vacuum or atmosphere therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for methods including electrode positioning by optical operation.

    35+,    for methods including assembly or disassembly which includes
    electrode making.

    46+,    for other methods of making electrodes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 825+ for mechanical manufacturing methods
    for making an electrical conductor or circuit including assembly operations.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 238+ for support
    and/or spacing structure for electrode and/or shield structure, per se.


CLS 445/30
TXT CRT mask mounting:

    Method under subclass 29 including attaching or manipulating a perforated
    panel or equivalent arrangement located adjacent the screen of a cathode
    ray tube to delineate the path of various electron or light beams within
    the tube as in a color television picture tube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for methods of assembly including CRT mask making.

    47,     for other methods of making a CRT mask.

    68,     for apparatus having means for CRT mask manipulation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 402+ for CRT shadow
    mask, support or shield, for the devices, per se.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof,  subclasses 23+ for processes under the class definition for
    making a CRT or components thereof.


CLS 445/31
TXT Getter mounting:

    Method under subclass 29 including mounting a degasser or substance that
    absorbs, adsorbs or otherwise binds up undesired gases or aerosols, which
    degasser or substance is used in a vacuum tube to maintain the desired
    vacuum or atmosphere therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 238+ for support
    and/or spacing structure for electrode and/or shield structure of lamp or
    discharge devices.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 48+ for electrical or getter type pump, per se.


CLS 445/32
TXT Incandescent filament mounting:

    Method under subclass 29 wherein an electrical conductor or electrode which
    generates light by emission when the electrode under intense heat becomes
    glowing or luminous is mounted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for methods including assembly which manufacture an incandescent
    lamp.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 271+ for support or
    spacing structure for filaments.


CLS 445/33
TXT Plural electrode mounting:

    Method under subclass 29 wherein two or more conductors or electrode are
    mounted or secured in final position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 243+ for support or
    spacing structure for plural electrodes of a discharge device.


CLS 445/34
TXT CRT grid or cathode gun:

    Method under subclass 33 wherein the mounted plural electrodes are part of
    the internal conducting structure, which emits and/or controls an electron
    beam in a cathrode-ray tube such as a color television picture tube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36+,    for methods of assembly including electrode making.

    46+,    for other methods of making electrodes under the class definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 441+ for ray
    generating or control structure for CRT's.


CLS 445/35
TXT Electrode making:

    Method under subclass 23 for fabricating or manufacturing an electrical
    conductor through which an electric current enters or leaves a vacuum or
    fluent.

    (1)     Note.  For original placement of a patent within this subclass it
    is not necessary that the electrode structure itself be produced by an
    assembly step provided that an assembly step is claimed in the fabrication
    or manufacture of the lamp or discharge device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29+,    for methods of mounting electrodes.

    46+,    for methods of making electrodes without any assembly operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 326+ for electrode
    and shield structures.


CLS 445/36
TXT CRT type:

    Methods under subclass 35 wherein the electrode or the electrical conductor
    fabricated or manufacture is similar to or identical with those in a
    cathode-ray tube such as a color television picture tube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for methods of CRT mask mounting.

    34,     for methods of mounting plural  electrodes including CRT grid or
    cathode gun.

    46+,    for methods of making CRT electrode which do not include any
    assembly operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 458+ for ray
    generating or control means including CRT electrode.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 64+ for methods of producing
    fluorescent or phosphorescent CRT screen coating.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 23+ for processes under the class definition for making
    a CRT or element thereof.


CLS 445/37
TXT CRT mask making:

    Method under subclass 36 wherein the fabricated or manufactured electrode
    is a perforated panel or equivalent panel or equivalent arrangement located
    adjacent the screen of a cathode-ray tube to delineate the path of various
    electron or light beams within the tube as in a color television picture
    tube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for methods of CRT mask mounting.

    47,     for methods of making CRT masks which do not include assembly
    operations, which include at least one Class 445 type operation.

    68,     for apparatus with assembly or disassembly means for CRT mask
    manipulation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electrical Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 402+ for CRT
    shadow mask, support or shield, for the devices, per se.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, of Product
    Thereof, subclasses 23+ for processes under the class definition for making
    a CRT or component thereof.


CLS 445/38
TXT Including evacuating, degasifying or gas, vapor, liquid or meltable or
    sublimable solid introduction:

    Methods under subclass 23 which includes (1) applying gaseous material,
    aerosol, or liquid within an enclosure of an electric lamp or electric
    space discharge device; (2) removing, absorbing or adsorbing gaseous
    material, occluded gaseous material, or aerosol from within an enclosure of
    the lamp or device, or (3) inserting into an enclosure a solid material
    intended to be vaporized or liquified.

    (1)     Note.  Where the envelope is evacuated after a gas or vapor has
    been introduced into the envelope, the patent is classified in the indented
    subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  Merely introducing solid material into the lamp or device
    enclosure is not, per se, an assembly operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9+,     for this subject matter where the evacuating operation includes
    generating a gas or vapor within the envelope of the lamp or discharge
    device which acts as a getter.

    53+,    for methods of evacuating, degasifying or introducing getter or
    fluent material which methods do not include any assembly or disassembly
    operations.

    70,     for the corresponding apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 210+ for methods under
    the class definition for modifying or removing components of normally
    gaseous mixture.


CLS 445/39
TXT With cooling, e.g., to condense:

    Method under subclass 38 for removing thermal energy from within the
    enclosure of the lamp or device.

    (1)     Note.  Merely providing a time delay for allowing passive cooling,
    i.e., normal heat flow across an unchanged thermal gradient; is not
    considered sufficient for inclusion in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for similar subject matter which does not include any assembly or
    disassembly operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 56+ for general cooling processes, per se.


CLS 445/40
TXT With heating, e.g., to outgas:

    Method under subclass 38 for supplying or increasing thermal energy within
    the enclosure of the lamp or device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for similar subject matter which does not include any assembly or
    disassembly operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, appropriate subclasses for processes of treating
    solid or semi-solid metal including metal electrodes to modify or maintain
    the internal physical structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical
    properties of metal.  If metal casting, fusion bonding, machining, or
    working is involved, there is a requirement of significant heat treatment
    as described in section III, A, of the Class 148 definition.  Use of
    electric heating does not negate placement in Class 148, if the other
    criteria of Class 148 are met.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 600+ for inductive heating, subclasses
    678+ for microwave heating, subclasses 764+ for capacitive dielectric
    heating, and subclass 162 for methods of electrically heating metal.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Process,
    subclasses 345+ for methods of treating a shaped or solid nonmetallic
    article by means of a temperature change.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 9+ for processes of heating to treat an
    article, container, or body as an unit.


CLS 445/41
TXT By gettering:

    Method under subclass 38 which includes introducing a chemical material
    such as a solid or vapor to absorb, adsorb or chemically tie up undesired
    materials such as gases within the sealed enclosure of the lamp or device.

    (1)     Note.  Gettering includes using materials which, when placed in the
    envelope, reduce the gas or vapor pressure in any manner, even though the
    theory of operation is not known. Gettering, therefore, includes using a
    reactive material which will chemically combine with the gas or vapor to
    form a nonvolatile compound, or to form a compound of lower vapor pressure
    or ionic activity. One gas may therefore be a getter for another gas.
    Gettering also include using materials, such as charcoal, with adsorb and
    absorb the gases or vapors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9+,     for methods of gettering which include generating a gas or vapor
    from a normally nongaseous and nonvaporous material in the envelope, the
    generated gas or vapor being active as a getter. Flashing magnesium is the
    subclasses 9+.

    55,     for similar subject matter which does not include any assembly or
    disassembly operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, for miscellaneous chemical compositions, note
    especially subclasses 181.11+, for getter compositions.  Note also
    subclasses 182.11+ for chemical agents or materials.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 174+ for electric
    lamps and electric space discharge devices which are provided with a
    getter.  Class 313 provides for such devices with a getter whether claimed
    prior to the use of the getter (incompletely manufactured) or subsequent to
    such use.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 48+ for electrical or getter type devices.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, appropriate subclasses for metal
    powder products which are alloys.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses, for
    inorganic compounds and nonmetallic elements which may be useful in
    gettering.  Also note subclasses 210+ for modifying or removing gaseous
    material.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, for a composition comprising a catalyst or support therefor or
    sorbent of general utility.


CLS 445/42
TXT With subsequent evacuation:

    Method under subclass 38 which includes a following step of establishing a
    partial vacuum by physically removing a portion or all of the gaseous
    materials or aerosols from within the enclosure of the lamp or device.

    (1)     Note.  The gas or vapor need not be completely evacuated from the
    envelope of the lamp or discharge device, but the evacuation may be stopped
    when the desired pressure in the envelope is obtained.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for similar subject matter which does not include any assembly or
    disassembly operations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 403+ for methods of gas filling and/or
    evacuating of receptacles combined with closing, and see (3) Note and the
    reference to Class 53 under "SEARCH CLASS" in the class definition of this
    class (445) for the line.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 4, 8 and 65+ for methods of and apparatus for gas filling and/or
    evacuating of receptacles.


CLS 445/43
TXT With particular sealing:

    Method under subclass 38 wherein significance is attributed to the sealing
    operation such as by the use of specific materials for closing and making
    secure against leakage the enclosure of the lamp or discharge device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for combined method under the class definition, e.g., with shaping
    of lamp or device envelope.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 422 for miscellaneous methods of shaping a
    container end to encapsulate material.

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 403+ for methods of gas filling and/or
    evacuating of receptacles combined with closing, and see (3) Note and the
    reference to Class 53 under "SEARCH CLASS" in the class definition of this
    class (445) for the line.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 34 for a glassworking process
    including sealing off of a gas evacuating opening.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 50.61+ for
    housings with bonded seal for conductive member.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclass 60 for closing metal tube ends by
    metal fusion operations, e.g., soldering.


CLS 445/44
TXT Hermetically assembling plural parts:

    Method under subclass 23 for sealing together two or more parts to form an
    airtight enclosure or receptacle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 36+ for processes of fusion bonding
    glass to a formed part.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    60+ for processes of adhesive or chemical bonding together plural parts.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 17.05+ for
    fluid or vacuum housings of the hermetric sealed envelope type.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 101+ for processes of
    metallurgically bonding together plural parts.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 238+ for nonmetal to metal
    joints or couplings, and subclasses 328+ for particular interface of joints
    or couplings.


CLS 445/45
TXT CRT:

    Method under subclass 44 for producing a cathode-ray type tube such as a
    color television picture tube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for methods of CRT mask mounting.

    34,     for methods of mounting plural CRT grids or cathode guns.

    36,     for methods of assembly or disassembly including making CRT type
    electrodes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 364+ for CRT
    structures and components, per se.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 23+ for processes under the class definition for
    producing CRT or element thereof.


CLS 445/46
TXT Electrode making:

    Method under subclass 1 for fabricating or manufacturing an electrical
    conductor through which an electric current enters or leaves a vacuum or a
    fluent media.

    (1)     Note.  For original placement within this subclass it is not only
    necessary that the electrode structure itself be produced without any
    recited assembly or disassembly operation but also that no other
    fabrication or manufacture of the product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35+,    for method of making electrodes, which methods include at least one
    assembly or disassembly operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 874+ for miscellaneous methods of
    manufacturing electrical contacts or terminals.

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, subclass 11 for chemical etching
    processes for making an article whose final configuration has a projection,
    and subclasses 59+ and 84+ for processes of etching combined with
    measuring, testing, or inspecting.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 29.2 for methods of carbonizing a nonmetallic material to form a
    filament.

    313,    Electrical Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 326+ for
    electrode and shield structure of electric lamp and discharge devices.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 74 for methods of coating to form a
    photoconductive product which responds to visible, infrared, or ultraviolet
    illumination by (a) emitting electrons, (b) generating an electromotive
    force, or (c) varying electrical conductivity andsubclasses 111+ for
    coating methods of producing a filament for lamp or tube.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 311+ for methods under the class definition of making
    electrical devices having nonplanar or printing surface.

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing: Process, subclass 20 for
    methods of making semiconductor-based electron emitters.


CLS 445/47
TXT Multi-apertured panel making, e.g., CRT mask:

    Method under subclass 46 wherein the fabricated or manufactured electrode
    is a panel having lateral dimensions much larger than its thickness and
    which is provided with an array of perforations or equivalent arrangement
    such as that located adjacent the screen of a cathode-ray tube to delineate
    the path of various electron or light beams within the tube as in a color
    television picture tube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for method including an assembly or disassembly step wherein a CRT
    mask is made - see the search notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, subclass 56 involving etching to
    produce porous or perforated article.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 58+ for coating methods of making an
    electrical product.


CLS 445/48
TXT Incandescent filament making:

    Method under subclass 46 for fabricating or manufacturing a device that
    produces light when a filament is heated in a vacuum or inert atmosphere by
    passing an electric current through the filament.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for methods including assembly which make incandescent lamps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 29.2 for methods of carbonizing a nonmetallic material to form a
    filament.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 326+ for electrode
    and shield structures of electric lamp and discharge devices.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 111+ for coating methods of producing
    a filament for lamp or tube.


CLS 445/49
TXT Electrode shaping:

    Method under subclass 46 for fabricating or manufacturing a configurated
    electrode by means of non-assembly steps which significantly alter the
    physical structure of the stock material of the electrode.

    (1)     Note.  The shaping may be by cutting, machining, etching, or
    plastic deforming.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 874+ for miscellaneous methods of
    manufacturing contacts or terminals.

    72,     Metal Deforming, appropriate subclasses, for methods and apparatus
    for metal deforming, per se.

    140,    Wireworking, subclasses 71.5+ for methods of making electric lamp
    or space discharge device electrodes where only wireworking operations are
    involved.

    148,    Metal Treatment, appropriate subclasses for processes of treating
    solid or semi-solid metal including metal electrodes to modify or maintain
    the internal physical structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical
    properties of metal.  If metal casting, fusion bonding, machining, or
    working is involved, there is a requirement of significant heat treatment
    as described in section III, A, of the Class 148 definition.

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 640+ for electrolytic erosion to
    change the shape or surface configuration of a workpiece (e.g., etching,
    polishing, etc.).

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, appropriate subclasses for shaping
    of an electrode involving etching.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses, for methods of shaping, forming, or treating
    nonmetallic materials under the class definition.


CLS 445/50
TXT Emissive type:

    Method under subclass 49 for manufacturing or fabricating an electrode of
    the type which emits or gives off electrons, the electrodes being itself
    eventually consumed in the process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for methods of making emissive type electrodes without involving a
    shaping operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 500+ for electrically conductive or
    emissive compositions.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 326+ for electrode
    and shield structure of lamp and discharge devices, note especially
    subclass 346 for cathode containing or coated with electron emissive
    material.


CLS 445/51
TXT Emissive type:

    Method under subclass 46 for manufacturing or fabricating and electrode of
    the type which emits or gives off electrons, the electrode itself
    eventually consumed in the process.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 500+ for electrically conductive or
    emissive compositions.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 326+ for electrode
    and shield structures of lamp and discharge devices, note especially
    subclass 346 for cathodes containing or coated with electron emissive
    material.


CLS 445/52
TXT Fluorescent type or mosaic electrodes:

    Method under subclass 46 for manufacturing or fabricating (1) an electrode
    of a substance which emits visible light when bombarded by electrons, or
    (2) a bidimensional array of adjacent electrodes or conductive areas.

    (1)     Note.  CRT screen making processes are found in this subclass
    unless specially provided for elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 329 for mosaic
    electrodes, per se.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 58+ for methods of producing
    electrical products by coating processes, note especially subclasses 64+
    for fluorescent or phosphorescent base coating.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 23+ for processes under the class definition which
    produced a CRT or element thereof.


CLS 445/53
TXT Including evacuating, degasifying or getter or fluent material introduction:

    Method under subclass 1 which includes (1) applying gaseous material,
    aerosol, liquid or other fluent material within an enclosure of the
    electric lamp or electric space discharge device or (2) removing, absorbing
    or adsorbing material occluded gaseous material, or aerosol from within an
    enclosure of the lamp or device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38+,    for a method of assembly or disassembly including evacuating,
    degasifying or gas, vapor, liquid or solid introduction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, the subclasses
    indented under the title "Processes" which is the generic place for
    processes of contacting of solids with either or both gases or vapors, and
    for miscellaneous processes for the separation of liquids from solids by
    drying.  Note especially subclass 427 for such processes combined with a
    diverse type process and subclasses 437+ for the processes peculiar to
    hollow articles.  Class 34 includes processes for drying a material by
    placing the material in a chamber and evacuating the chamber.  See the
    notes to the class definition and the subclass definitions of Class 34 for
    other classes which provide for such processes.

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 403+ for methods of gas filling and/or
    evacuating of receptacles combined with closing, and see (3) Note and the
    reference to Class 53 under "SEARCH CLASS" in the class definition of this
    class (445) for the line.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 34 for a glassworking process
    including sealing off of a gas evacuating opening.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 4, 8 and 65+ for methods of and apparatus for gas filling and/or
    evacuating or receptacles.

    148,    Metal Treatment, appropriate subclasses for processes of treating
    solid or semi-solid metal to modify or maintain the internal physical
    structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical properties of metal.  If metal
    casting, fusion bonding, machining, or working is involved, there is a
    requirement of significant heat treatment as described in section III, A,
    of the Class 148 definition.  Class 148, subclasses 206+, takes as original
    processes of carbonizing or nitriding a metal substrate with an external
    source of carbon or nitrogen including the use of gas therefor.  Moreover,
    Class 148, subclasses 240+, takes as original processes of reactive coating
    of metal with an external gaseous agent that combines with a component of
    the metal substrate to form a coating thereon which contains a component of
    the metal substrate.

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 687+ for electrolytic methods of
    removing occluded gases from materials.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 1+ for processes of dispensing and
    subclasses 3+ for vapor or gas dispensing.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 500+ for processes within
    the class definition, for molding or shaping plastic materials which
    include the step of directly applying fluid pressure or vacuum to the work
    or molding material.  For formation of electrical articles, per se, see
    particularly subclasses 104+ and  614+.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 549+ for electric
    lamps and electric space discharge devices which are provided with means
    for regulating the gas or vapor pressure in the envelope of the lamp.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 108+ for
    electrical systems for supplying electric energy to electric space
    discharge devices of the gas or vapor filled type, the system including
    means to regulate the gas or vapor pressure in the envelope of the
    discharge device.

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 91+ for methods
    of energization and electrical control of space discharge devices producing
    X-rays.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 48+ for electrical or getter type devices.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 210+ for purification
    or separations of gases by a chemical reaction.


CLS 445/54
TXT With cooling, e.g., to condense:

    Method under subclass 53 for removing thermal energy from within the
    enclosure of the lamp or device.

    (1)     Note.  Mere ambient cooling by passive means is not considered
    sufficient for inclusion in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for similar subject matter which includes an assembly or
    disassembly apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 56+ for general cooling processes, per se.


CLS 445/55
TXT By gettering:

    Method under subclass 53 introducing a chemical material such as a solid or
    vapor to absorb, adsorb or chemically tie up undesired material such as
    gases within the sealed enclosure of the lamp or device.

    (1)     Note.  Gettering includes using materials which, when placed in the
    envelope, reduce the gas or vapor pressure in any manner, even though the
    theory of operation is not known. Gettering, therefore, includes using a
    reactive material which will chemically combine with the gas or vapor to
    form a nonvolatile compound, or to form a compound of lower vapor pressure
    or ionic activity.  One gas may be a getter for another gas.  Gettering
    also includes using materials, such as charcoal which adsorb and absorb the
    gases or vapors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9+,     for methods of gettering which include generating a gas or vapor
    from a normally nongaseous and nonvaporous material in the envelope, the
    generated gas or vapor being active as a getter. Flashing magnesium is in
    subclasses 9+.

    41,     for similar subject matter which include an assembly or disassembly
    operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, for miscellaneous chemical compositions, note
    especially subclasses 181.1+, for getter compositions.  Note also
    subclasses 182.11+ for chemical agents or materials.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 549+ for electric
    lamps and electric space discharge devices which are provided with a
    getter.  Class 313 provided for such devices with a getter whether claimed
    prior to the use of the getter (incompletely manufactured) or subsequent to
    such use.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 48+ for electrical or getter type devices.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, appropriate subclasses for metal
    powder products which are alloys.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses, for
    inorganic compounds and nonmetallic elements which may be useful in
    gettering.  Also note subclasses 210+ for modifying or removing component
    of normally gaseous material.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, for a composition comprising a catalyst or support therefor or
    sorbent of general utility.


CLS 445/56
TXT With subsequent evacuation:

    Method under subclass 53 which includes a following step of establishing a
    partial vacuum by physically removing a portion or all of the gaseous
    materials or aerosols from within the enclosure of the lamp or device.

    (1)     Note.  The gas or vapor need not be completely evacuated from the
    envelope of the lamp or discharge device, but the evacuation may be stopped
    when the desired pressure in the envelope is obtained.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for similar subject matter which includes an assembly or
    disassembly operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 403+ for methods of gas filling and/or
    evacuating of receptacles combined with closing, and see (3) Note and the
    reference to Class 53 under "SEARCH CLASS" in the class definition of this
    class (455) for the line.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 4, 8 and 65+ for methods of and apparatus for gas filling and/or
    evacuating of receptacles.


CLS 445/57
TXT With heating, e.g., to outgas:

    Method under subclass 53 for supplying or increasing thermal energy within
    the enclosure of the lamp or device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for similar subject matter which includes an assembly or
    disassembly operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, appropriate subclasses for processes of treating
    solid or semi-solid metal to modify or maintain the internal physical
    structure (i.e., microstructure) or chemical properties of metal.  If metal
    casting, fusion bonding, machining, or working is involved, there is a
    requirement of significant heat treatment as described in section III, A,
    of the Class 148 definition.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 600+ for inductive heating, subclasses
    678+ for microwave heating, subclasses 764+ for capacitive dielectric
    heating, and subclass 162 for methods of electrically heating metal.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 345+ for methods of treating a shaped or solid nonmetallic
    article by means of a temperature change.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 9+ for processes of heating to treat an
    article, container, or body as an unit.


CLS 445/58
TXT With coating, e.g., providing protective coating on sensitive area:

    Method under subclass 1 for treating the surface of a workpiece so as to
    form a film or surface layer of material thereupon.

    (1)     Note.  The coating material may be the same or different
    composition from the base material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9+,     for methods including coating by vapor, gas, mist or smoke within
    the envelope.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 424 for methods of utilizing a temporary
    protective coating, subclasses 458+ for methods of assembly including
    coating step previous to assembly, and subclass 460 for methods of assembly
    including a subsequent coating step.

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 240+ for processes of reactive coating
    of metal wherein an external agent combines with a component of a metal
    substrate to form a coating thereon which contains a component of the metal
    substrate.


    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses, note especially subclass 278 for methods of surface
    bonding or assembly therefor which include coating of nonadherent face of
    lamina, and subclass 289 for methods of surface bonding or assembly
    therefor which utilize parting or release material to prevent adhesion.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 192.1+ for
    coating, forming, or etching by sputtering.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 80+ for electrolytic coating
    processes.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 129+ for methods under the class definition of coating a
    workpiece (out of the mold).

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclasses, note especially subclass
    122 for carbon coating, subclasses 123+ for metal coating, and subclasses
    126.1+ for metallic compound coating, all of which are indented under
    subclass 58 which is methods for producing electrical products.


CLS 445/59
TXT Including cleaning:

    Method under subclass 1 for removing or eliminating undesired or foreign
    material from the surface of a workpiece or manufactured product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for methods including use of electric arc or current for removing
    an undesired particle, i.e., spot knocking.

    55,     for methods including the introduction of getter material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 1.51+ for
    electrostatic cleaning.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 81.01+ for removing scale from metal
    workpiece.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, see subclasses 1.1, 1.2,
    1.3 for cleaning of specialized materials with or without plasma, for
    processes of cleaning or treating various solids (including electrodes and
    blanks) with liquids, and including the acid treatment of metals in
    subclasses 3, 37, 28, and 41.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 640+ for electrolytic erosion to
    change the shape or surface configuration of a workpiece (e.g., etching,
    polishing, etc.).

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, for methods of chemical etching.


CLS 445/60
TXT Apparatus:

    Machine or implement under the class definition.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses include all apparatus for
    the manufacture of electric lamps, liquid crystal display devices and
    electric space discharge devices from an material and by any type of
    operation where no specific class provides for the claimed subject matter.

    (2)     Note.  Work holders are usually classified with the apparatus for
    performing the operation. Miscellaneous work holders for assembly
    operations are in Class 269, Work Holders.

    (3)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses include only such apparatus
    as is used during the manufacture of the lamp or discharge device.  If the
    claimed subject matter is intended to be used during the operation of the
    lamp or discharge device and to thereby control the operating
    characteristics of the lamp or discharge device, the patent is excluded and
    will be found in the classes referred to in the notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for the corresponding methods.  See also the search notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, appropriate subclasses, for diverse apparatus for
    manufacturing miscellaneous electrical devices.  Also see subclasses 33+
    for plural diverse manufacturing apparatus including metal shaping and/or
    assembly, and subclass 650 for plural diverse manufacturing apparatus.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, the subclasses
    indented under the title "Apparatus" is the generic place for apparatus for
    the separation of liquids from solids by drying and the contacting of
    solids with either or both gases or vapors.  See the notes to the class
    definition and the subclass definitions of Class 34 for other classes which
    provide for such apparatus.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 270 for glassworking apparatus
    comprising means for glass envelope tipping off, with or without exhausting
    means.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 58+, for coating apparatus combined
    with means to heat or dry the work.

    140,    Wireworking, appropriate subclasses, for miscellaneous apparatus
    for assembling and making wire articles where only wireworking operations
    are involved.  Note especially subclass 71.5 for making (including forming
    and assembling) electrodes made of wire for electric lamps and electric
    space discharge devices, such as grids, filaments, and subclass 71.6 for
    apparatus for joining wire electrodes (grids, filaments) to their support
    wires, subclasses 93+, for apparatus for applying wires to particular
    articles, and subclasses 111+, for apparatus for joining wire.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for apparatus for making electrical devices by an
    adhesive joining step only.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 194+ for
    electrolytic coating apparatus combined with means for heat treating the
    coated article, see especially subclass 210 for such apparatus where the
    article being coated is a continuous strip or filament.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 50+ for electric heating of metal,
    subclasses 200+ for electric heating of nonmetal, subclasses 600+ for
    inductive heating, subclasses 678+ for microwave heating, and subclasses
    764+ for capacitive dielectric heating.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 3+ for apparatus for dispensing vapor,
    compressed air or gas.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for photocells and circuits and
    apparatus including photocells.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 102+ for means to heat treat a
    continuous metal strip, subclasses 114+ for heat treating a metal object
    combined with liquid contact apparatus, e.g., quench tank, and 249+ for
    heat treating a metal object in the presence of a treating or protective
    gas.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses, for
    the devices, per se.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, appropriate subclasses, for
    electric furnace structures.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 546+ for means to record an image which is
    to be used as a multicolor luminescent target of a CRT.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 288+ for planing
    machines.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 48+ for electrical or getter type pumps.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 129+ and 243+ for miscellaneous
    apparatus especially designed to perform chemical and analogous processes.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    appropriate subclasses, for shaping or reshaping apparatus peculiar to
    plastic or powdered materials, especially subclasses 113+ for applying a
    coating to a conductor by extrusion shaping means and subclass 117 for
    apparatus for making a composite of a preform and fluent material.


CLS 445/61
TXT Repairing, converting or salvaging means:

    Apparatus under subclass 60 having means to (1) restore or recondition an
    inoperative electric lamp or electric space discharge device to its
    functional, stable or working condition; (2) alter or modify an electric
    lamp or electric space discharge device to produce a lamp or device of
    substantially different capacity, size, function or type of operation; or
    (3) recover or reclaim a portion of an electric lamp or electric space
    discharge that would otherwise be discarded.

    (1)     Note.  The apparatus in this subclass is limited by some claimed
    subject matter to use in repairing or salvaging a discharge device or lamp
    and is not merely apparatus of general utility which is disclosed as being
    useful in such repair or salvage.

    (2)     Note.  Class 269 is the residual locus for patents to a device for
    clamping, supporting and/or holding an article (or articles) in position to
    be operated on or treated.  See notes thereunder for other related loci.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for corresponding methods.  See the search notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, appropriate subclasses, note especially subclasses
    762+ for means to disassembly miscellaneous electrical devices.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 286+ for apparatus for reshaping a
    glass preform.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses, for coating apparatus,
    per se.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclasses, for
    electrolytic coating apparatus and cathode sputtering coating apparatus.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 236 for electric
    lamps and electric space discharge devices which are provided with a spare
    electrode, and subclass 237 for electric lamps and discharge devices which
    are provided with means so that an electrode can be readily replaced or
    which have the discharge device especially designed to be readily
    disassembled, and subclass 314 for electric lamps and discharge devices
    which are especially designed to be nonrepairable.


CLS 445/62
TXT Having means to operate the device or portion thereof, e.g., to age:

    Apparatus under subclass 60 which (1) subject an electric lamp or electric
    space discharge to similar forces and environment substantially duplicating
    those encountered under real operating conditions, or (2) impose operating
    conditions which will mature the device or components thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for methods including start up, flashing or aging.  See Also the
    notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, appropriate classes, for assembly apparatus and
    diverse manufacturing apparatus.  See especially subclass 722, for an
    assembly or disassembly apparatus including means to provide a controlled
    environment.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses, for coating apparatus,
    per se.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclasses, for
    electrolytic coating apparatus and cathode sputtering coating apparatus.

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclasses, for electric heating and
    welding apparatus.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 249+, for means treating solid
    metal.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, appropriate subclasses, for apparatus for
    treating chemical compounds or compositions even though only a physical
    reaction is discernible.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 445+ for miscellaneous apparatus for treating a product of a
    molding apparatus for nonmetals not otherwise provided for.  Also see the
    notes thereunder.


CLS 445/63
TXT Testing or adjusting means:

    Apparatus under subclass 60 which (1) determine or examine the operating or
    functional characteristics or parameters or simulations thereof of an
    electric lamp or electric space discharge devices or a portion thereof or
    (2) modify or change the conformance of the lamp or device parts or
    components.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus designed for manufacturing and testing electric
    lamp and space discharge devices are in the above subclass.  Apparatus
    designed for testing only are provided for in the appropriate measuring and
    testing class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3+,     for corresponding methods.  See also the search notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, appropriate subclasses, for plural diverse
    manufacturing apparatus under the class definition, note especially
    subclass 705 for means to disassemble or assemble including means to test
    work or product.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses, for measuring and
    testing means, per se.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 364+ for
    circuits and apparatus for testing electric lamps and electric space
    discharge devices.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 403+, for system,
    apparatus, and methods for testing the operativeness or characteristics of
    electric lamp or discharge devices.


CLS 445/64
TXT Having optical means to sense or adjust electrode position:

    Apparatus under subclass 63 including means for determining or regulating
    the proper location of electric terminals by means of light, ultraviolet or
    infrared electromagnetic radiation.

    (1)     Note.  The optical means may be a projecting apparatus for
    projecting an image of the filament of a lamp upon a screen or optical
    viewing means so that the operator of the apparatus can align the
    electrodes in proper position or means which include a photo-sensitive
    element to receive the light emitted by the filament of a lamp and to
    position the filament with respect to a base or connector when the light
    intensity is a maximum.

    (2)     Note.  Most of the apparatus in this subclass are designed to
    position the filament of a lamp with respect to the base so as to make a
    prefocused lamp.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass provides for all apparatus for positioning the
    electrodes by optical means even though another class may provide for the
    particular means used to assemble the electrodes.  For example, apparatus
    for cementing a base to an electric lamp is in Class 156, Adhesive Bonding
    and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, but such apparatus, when provided
    with optical means to position the filament with respect to the base, is in
    this class (445).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for corresponding methods - see also the search notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 720+ for assembly or disassembly
    apparatus having signal, scale, illuminator or optical viewer, and subclass
    746 for an apparatus for assembling an electrical terminal in the
    manufacture of a device particularly adapted to transmit or utilize
    electrical energy.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    379 for surface bonding means and/or assembly means therefor with
    inspecting and/or illuminating means.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 123 for apparatus to
    adjust the focal position of a light filament generally with respect to a
    reflector or a lens.


CLS 445/65
TXT Combined:

    Apparatus under subclass 60 combined with means not provided for in the
    class and which means performs a function other than to perfect means that
    are provided for in the class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for corresponding methods - see also search notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous plural
    diverse manufacturing apparatus, especially subclasses 33+ and 650.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 138+ for electronic envelope
    header, terminal or stem making by glassworking means, subclasses 152+ for
    fusion bonding by glassworking means, and subclasses 181+ for means in
    addition to or combined with glass working apparatus.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclass 75 for coating apparatus combined with
    diverse features.

    140,    Wireworking, subclass 1 for apparatus for wireworking in
    combination with means not specific to wireworking.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    349+, for surface bonding means and/or assembly means therefor.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 270.1+ for a metal casting apparatus
    with diverse means.

    219,    Electrical Heating, subclasses 600+ for inductive heating,
    subclasses 678+ for microwave heating, subclasses 764+ for capacitive
    dielectric heating, and subclasses 209+ for heating devices combined with
    diverse - type electrical devices.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 215 for a photocell combined with a
    diverse-type device.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 317 for shaping or reshaping apparatus combined with diverse means
    for treating or working stock material.

    432,    Heating, subclass 92 for apparatus for the generation of heat
    combined with a diverse additional structure having a function other than
    the application of heat.


CLS 445/66
TXT Assembly means:

    Apparatus under subclass 60 including means for associating, juxtaposing or
    putting together, with or without securing, a plurality of self-sustaining
    preforms in a nontransitory arrangement.

    (1)     Note.  Merely stacking, moving, or otherwise arranging preforms to
    effect or facilitate transportation, per se, is not considered an assembly
    operation.

    (2)     Note.  Work holders are usually classified with the apparatus for
    performing the operation. Miscellaneous work holders for assembly
    operations are in Class 269, Work Holders.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23+,    for methods including assembly.  See also the search notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 729+ for an assembly apparatus for
    manufacturing miscellaneous electrical devices.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 152+ for glass fusion bonding means.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    349+ for surface bonding means and/or assembly means therefor, note
    especially subclass 424 for apparatus for assembling and bonding an
    electric lamp or space discharge device envelope to its base.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus. appropriate subclasses, for
    apparatus for driving a member such as a rivet into work, and particularly
    subclasses 51+ for combined apparatus for driving and heading such member.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, appropriate subclasses, for joining of work
    portions by solder, welding or brazing.


CLS 445/67
TXT Having electrode positioning or assembly means:

    Apparatus under subclass 66 including means for orienting, associating or
    juxtaposing components, parts or portions of an electrical conductor
    structure through which an electric current enters or leaves a vacuum or a
    fluent medium.

    (1)     Note.  Electrode mount means, per se, is not appropriate subject
    matter for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29+,    for methods of assembly including electrode mounting.

    64,     for apparatus including optical means to sense or adjust electrode
    position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 746 for an apparatus for assembling an
    electrical terminal in the manufacture of a device particularly adapted to
    transmit or utilize electrical energy.


CLS 445/68
TXT Having means to manipulate a CRT mask:

    Apparatus under subclass 67 which includes means for positioning a
    perforated panel or equivalent arrangement located adjacent the CRT screen
    for precisely focusing various electron beams or light beams within a
    cathode- ray tube such as a color television picture tube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for methods of CRT mask mounting.

    37,     for methods of assembly including CRT mask making.

    47,     for other methods of making CRT masks

    SEARCH CLASS:

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 23+ for processes under the class definition for making
    a CRT or components thereof.


CLS 445/69
TXT Having means to manipulate lead wire, lamp base or terminal:

    Apparatus under subclass 66 including means for positioning or orientating
    electric conductor positions of an electric lamp or electric space
    discharge device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 729+, for apparatus having means to
    assemble electrical devices, note especially subclasses 747+ for means for
    assembling terminal or connecting structure.


CLS 445/70
TXT Having evacuation or degasification means or means to introduce gas, vapor,
    liquid or solid treating agent:

    Apparatus under subclass 66 including means for (1) applying gaseous
    material, aerosol, liquid, or solid treating material within an enclosure
    of an electric lamp or electric space discharge device; (2) removing,
    absorbing, or adsorbing gaseous material or aerosol from within an
    enclosure of the lamp or device; or (3) removing gases or vapors from other
    parts of the lamp or discharge device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38+,    for methods of assembly including evacuating, degasifying or gas,
    vapor, liquid, or meltable or sublimable solid introduction.

    73,     for similar subject matter which does not include any assembly
    apparatus - see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 445/71
TXT With turret means:

    Apparatus under subclass 66 including a pivoted and revolvable holder
    structure having a plurality of work stations or positions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 33+ for various turret mechanisms in
    apparatus for plural diverse manufacturing including metal shaping and/or
    assembly.


CLS 445/72
TXT Including means to establish an electric space discharge:

    Apparatus under subclass 60 including means to set up or have an electric
    current flow between two spaced parts or electrodes, at least part of the
    path followed by the current flow being within a vacuum or a fluent media.

    (1)     Note.  Means for establishing a space discharge solely to evacuate
    the space will be found in subclasses 70 and 73.

    (2)     Note.  The discharge may be between electrodes other than the
    discharge electrodes, or between any other electrodes or parts capable of
    being used to establish an electric space discharge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for methods including use of electric arc or current for removing
    an undesired particle, i.e., spot knocking.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, appropriate subclasses for processes of treating
    metal to modify or maintain the internal physical structure (i.e.,
    microstructure) or chemical properties of metal.  If metal casting, fusion
    bonding, machining, or working is involved, there is a requirement of
    significant heat treatment as described in section III, A, of the Class 148
    definition.  Use of electric heating including space discharge does not
    negate placement in Class 148 if the other criteria for Class 148 are met.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 193+ for
    apparatus under the class definition.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 426 and the classes specified in the note
    to the definition of that subclass for apparatus for subjecting objects and
    materials to the influence of ions and/or electrons generated by an
    electric space discharge.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses, and the classes specified in the notes to the main class
    definition of that class, for electric systems for energizing electric
    lamps and discharge devices to initiate an electric space discharge in the
    lamp or discharge device.

    417,    Pumps, subclass 50, for pumps of the electromagnetic type.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 174+ for means applying electrical energy directly to work.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 580 for coating methods using
    electrical arcing or sparking.


CLS 445/73
TXT Having evacuation or degasification means or means to introduce gas, vapor,
    liquid or solid treating agent:

    Apparatus under subclass 60 which include means for (1) applying gaseous
    material, aerosol, liquid, or solid treating material within an enclosure
    of an electric lamp or electric space discharge device or (2) removing,
    absorbing, or adsorbing gaseous material or aerosol from within an
    enclosure of the lamp or device.

    (1)     Note.  Merely stating that an apparatus has exhaust heads does not
    make the apparatus an exhausting or gas filling machine where none of the
    operations performed on the article held in the exhaust heads are either
    exhausting or gas filling.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes only such apparatus as is used during
    manufacture of the lamp or discharge device.  If the claimed subject matter
    is intended to be used during the operation of the lamp or discharge device
    and to thereby control the operating characteristics of the lamp or
    discharge device, the patent is excluded and will be found in the classes
    referred to in the notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for the corresponding method.

    70,     similar subject matter which includes assembly means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, the subclasses
    indented under the title "Apparatus" is the generic place for apparatus for
    the separation of liquids from solids by drying and the contacting of
    solids with either or both gases or vapors.  See the notes to the class
    definition and subclass definitions of Class 34 for other classes which
    provide for such apparatus.

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 79+ for apparatus for gas filling and/or
    evacuating of receptacles combined with closing, and see (3) Note and the
    reference to Class 53 under "SEARCH CLASS" in the class definition of this
    class (445) for the line.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 270 for glassworking apparatus
    comprising means for glass envelope tipping off, with or without exhausting
    means.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 58+, for coating apparatus combined
    with means to heat or dry the work.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 4, 8 and 65+ for methods of and apparatus for gas filling and/or
    evacuating of receptacles.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 194+ for
    electrolytic coating apparatus combined with means for heat treating the
    coated article, see especially subclass 210, for such apparatus where the
    article being coated is a continuous strip or filament.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses, for apparatus for dispensing
    gases or liquids, especially subclasses 3+ for apparatus for dispensing
    compressed air or gas.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 7 for electric lamps
    and space discharge devices which have combined therewith an evacuating
    pump designed for use during the operation of the lamp or discharge device,
    and subclass 549 for electric lamps and discharge devices which are
    provided with means for regulating the pressure within the envelope of the
    lamp or discharge device.

    373,    Industrial Electric Heating Furnaces, appropriate subclasses, for
    electric furnace structures.


CLS 446/
TTL AMUSEMENT DEVICES:  TOYS

CLS 446/
TXT This class is a specific class under the broader class of Amusement and
    Exercising Devices, and includes patents relating to devices of the type
    whose principal purpose is for the amusement or recreation of children,
    wherein there is some physical interaction between a person and the device.

    (1)     Note.  Some devices, although referred to as toys, are classified
    in other classes on the basis of analogous structure or function.  Also,
    working models or toys which would be operable devices if made of
    sufficient size, are generally classified with the operable device.  See
    the search notes below.

    (2)     Note.  This class provides for toys combined with or convertible
    from other devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, appropriate subclasses for
    display devices, changeable exhibitors, etc., for attracting and holding
    the attention of a child or other person, but not intended for physical
    interaction between the device and viewer.

    42,     Firearms, subclasses 54+ for detonating toy firearms such as cap
    pistols.

    84,     Music, subclasses 1+ for a musical instrument, i.e., a
    sound-producing device which may be manipulated to play music.  Class 446
    takes devices which are capable of producing different tones, but are not
    intended to play music.

    104,    Railways, appropriate subclasses for miniature or toy railways.
    Class 446 takes toy railways wherein the energy for moving the rolling
    stock is supplied by the child, such as a wind-up toy, or where a feature
    peculiar to Class 446 is claimed, such as a toy building or accessory, or
    an animate simulation.  Toy combinations including road surfaces without
    structure for engaging and physically guiding a vehicle are classified in
    Class 446 rather than Class 104.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, appropriate subclasses for miniature railway
    rolling stock.  See particularly subclasses 1.5, 29.1 and 157.2 for toy
    rolling stock.  Class 446 takes claimed devices which include structure not
    suitable for a full-scale device, as well as all illumination features, per
    se, of toy railway vehicles (subclass 438).

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclasses for mechanical
    signals, including alarms.  Class 446 takes visual and audible devices
    whose purpose is for amusement or recreation.

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, appropriate subclasses, for
    mechanical missile projecting and throwing devices, including bows and
    arrows. Class 446 devices, other than toy guns, combined with or
    functioning as missile projectors are generally classified in Class 446.

    213,    Railway Draft Appliances, subclass 75 for toy couplers, except for
    claimed couplers which include a feature not suitable for a full scale
    device.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 24 for an article dispenser not
    otherwise provided for in which the dispenser or supply receptacles are so
    formed or shaped as to simulate some object.

    249,    Static Molds, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclass 55 for
    a toy-like mold, per se.

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, for an amusement apparatus or device
    which tests the skill of a person in accomplishing some result or which
    provides means by which a contest of skill or chance may be engaged in
    among two or more players.  See particularly subclasses 108+ for game
    apparatus (other than a game projectile, per se) in which a game projectile
    is intended to travel over a playing surface at all times in its course or
    for an implement or device for projecting such a projectile for movement
    upon a playing surface, and subclasses 317+ for game apparatus (other than
    a game projectile, per se, or a projector, per se) in which a game
    projectile is projected into the air.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclass 106 for a
    toy watch having a cheap or partial movement.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, appropriate subclasses for educational
    toys.

    463,    Amusement Devices:  Games, for subject matter relating to the type
    of amusement, recreation, or play activity commonly known as a game,
    wherein one or more players or participants engage in a competition or
    contest involving skill, ability, strategy, or chance, against either
    another player or players or against a device which is intended to function
    as a competitive player or players, in order to achieve an objective
    defined by a rule or rules specified for a particular competition or
    contest; whereby the ultimate outcome of said objective in such a
    competition or contest can be determined or indicated according to said
    specified rule or rules; the exception being that a game which includes or
    utilizes a tangible projectile, other than a propelled racing game or a
    chance device, classified herein is classified elsewhere.

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclasses 6+ for a powered toy
    roundabout.

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, for a device or apparatus for a
    game or sport in which a tangible projectile is used and which tests the
    skill of a person in accomplishing some sought result or which provides a
    means by which a contest of skill or chance may be engaged in among two or
    more participants, whereby the results of the contest can be determined by
    rules defined for the contest.  See particularly subclasses 52+ for a ball
    used in the game of billiards or pool, subclasses 125+ for a ball used in
    the game of bowling, subclasses 351+ for a ball used in the game of golf,
    subclass 413 for a ball used in the game of croquet, subclass 414 for a
    projectile used in the game of hopscotch, subclasses 422+ for a projectile
    (or a simulation thereof) used to practice or train for play of a playing
    field or court game, and subclasses 569+ for a miscellaneous projectile
    used in playing a game, in general (e.g., a dart, arrow, quoit, horseshoe,
    boomerang, flying disk or saucer, hockey puck, beach ball, baseball,
    football, basketball, etc.).  Class 473 will also take (a) an implement or
    device, per se, for projecting a game projectile such that it travels upon
    a playing surface at all times in its course, (b) a centrifugally or
    mechanically operated device for projecting or launching a game projectile
    into the air provided only that it is claimed in combination with at least
    one other game component (e.g., combined with a game projectile, a playing
    surface, tennis net, lacrosse goal, etc.), (c) a player held and powered
    implement, per se, for striking and thereby projecting a game projectile
    into the air, and (d) an implement or device for both projecting a
    projectile into the air and catching a projectile moving through the air.


CLS 446/1
TXT INCLUDING APERTURED BOARD AND ELEMENT HAMMERED INTO APERTURE:

    Device under the class definition comprising a member having a plurality of
    holes in its surface, and an element corresponding in shape to a hole,
    wherein the method of operation is to strike an element with a tool to
    drive the element into a hole in the member.


CLS 446/2
TXT DOMINO EFFECT:

    Device under the class definition including a plurality of elements which
    are located or are intended to be located adjacent one another in an
    upright position, wherein the method of operation is to upset one which
    results in the toppling of the others in sequence.


CLS 446/3
TXT INCLUDING VIBRATING OR HORIZONTALLY RECIPROCATING SUPPORT FOR TRAVELLING
    OBJECT OR TRAVELLING OBJECT THEREFOR:

    Device under the class definition comprising a member having a horizontally
    extending surface over which an element is adapted to translate, wherein
    means are provided to move the surface alternately to-and-fro along the
    same path thereby causing movement of the element over the surface, or an
    element, per se, having structure which peculiarly adapts the element for
    translation over such a moving surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    360,    for a figure suspended over and moved by a platform which is caused
    to strike the figure.


CLS 446/4
TXT HAVING PORTIONS KNOCKED APART OR AWRY BY IMPACT:

    Device under the class definition including a plurality of discrete parts
    and means connecting or holding the parts in contact or immediately
    adjacent on another, wherein said connecting or holding means is caused to
    release the parts upon forceful contact between the device and another
    member or a surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclass 380 for a target knocked apart
    by impact, but which is used in a game involving skill or competition.


CLS 446/5
TXT Including portion serving as container for diverse articles (e.g., pinata):

    Device under subclass 4 wherein one of the discrete parts comprises a
    package or receptacle for a plurality of articles other than toys.


CLS 446/6
TXT Vehicle:

    Device under subclass 4 which simulates the form of a conveyance for
    carrying or transporting something.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    435,    for a wheeled vehicle having means for freeing or launching an
    object therefrom.


CLS 446/7
TXT SIMULATION OF VEHICLE COCKPIT OR OF VEHICLE CONTROL:

    Device under the class definition which represents the outward qualities
    and appearance of either (1) a space or compartment in a boat, aircraft,
    automobile or other conveyance from which it is piloted, steered, or
    otherwise controlled, or (2) a manipulatable mechanism normally found in
    such a space or compartment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154+,   for a remote control mechanism for toy boats.

    454+,   for a remote control mechanism for wheeled toy vehicles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 1.12 for a wheeled, occupant propelled
    simulated aircraft having a simulated cockpit; and subclass 1.21 for other
    wheeled simulated aircraft in which the child sits.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 29+ for simulators which
    instruct or test a vehicle operator.

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclass 130 for an amusement type
    vehicle cockpit simulator in which a person sits.


CLS 446/8
TXT TOY MONEY BOX:

    Device under the class definition comprising a receptacle for the deposit
    and storage of money.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses .8+ for a coin receptacle
    and see the Search Notes thereunder for other related loci.

    232,    Deposit and Collection Receptacles, subclasses 4+ for a deposit and
    collection receptacle, per se, even if shaped to simulate some other object.


CLS 446/9
TXT Having figure or mechanism operated or released by coin:

    Device under subclass 8 including the face or form of an animate being, or
    a mechanical movement, which is caused to move or is released for movement
    by the act of depositing money in the device.


CLS 446/10
TXT Having coin depositing mechanism:

    Device under subclass 8 including mechanical means for placing the money
    into the receptacle.


CLS 446/11
TXT Coin projector:

    Device under subclass 10 wherein the mechanical means imparts momentum to
    the money to send it through the air toward the receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  Either a horizontal or upward vertical velocity component
    must be given to the coin to enable it to travel from the point of
    releases, through the air, and into the receptacle.


CLS 446/12
TXT Coin depositing figure:

    Device under subclass 10 wherein the mechanical means comprises a
    simulation of an animate being, or portion thereof, which appears to be
    placing the money into the receptacle.


CLS 446/13
TXT Having retractable coin slot or guard:

    Device under subclass 8 including an opening through which money is placed
    into the receptacle, wherein either (1) the opening is in a part mounted
    for movement between an open and closed or hidden position, or (2) a member
    is mounted for movement to alternately cover and uncover the receptacle
    opening.


CLS 446/14
TXT OPERATED BY INTRINSIC TEMPERATURE CHANGE:

    Device under the class definition including means activated or changed by
    an internal change in temperature.


CLS 446/15
TXT HAVING MEANS FOR FORMING TRANSITORY BUBBLE:

    Device under the class definition comprising means for producing a thin
    film of cohesive material inflated with air, wherein the air is sealed
    within the film solely by said cohesive property.

    (1)     Note.  Device which form bubbles under water are excluded.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 408 for a store window
    type display device having bubble forming means.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 307 for bubble compositions.


CLS 446/16
TXT Including movably mounted means to dip orificed member into solution:

    Device under subclass 15 including apertured means for holding a thin film
    of liquid while it is being inflated, and means for holding a supply of
    liquid, wherein the film-holding means is movable into and from the liquid
    supply to cover the aperture with a film of liquid and dispense a bubble.


CLS 446/17
TXT And mouthpiece:

    Device under subclass 16 including a portion adapted to be engaged by the
    mouth of a person and which directs expelled breath to the thin film of
    liquid to inflate the bubble.


CLS 446/18
TXT And variable size air chamber:

    Device under subclass 16 including an expandable and contractable
    compartment for forcing air toward the thin film of liquid to inflate the
    bubble.


CLS 446/19
TXT Including mouthpiece:

    Device under subclass 15 including a portion adapted to be engaged by the
    mouth of a person and which directs expelled breath to the thin film of the
    liquid to inflate it with air.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 320+ for a smoking device such as a pipe.


CLS 446/20
TXT And solution reservoir with discrete intermediate passage leading to
    bubble-forming area:

    Device under subclass 19 including a receptacle for storing a cohesive
    liquid, wherein said receptacle has an opening formed therein through which
    the solution passes to a separate area where a thin film of the solution is
    inflated by the expelled breath to form a bubble.


CLS 446/21
TXT Including variable sized air chamber:
    Device under subclass 15 including an expandable and contractable
    compartment for forcing air toward the thin film of liquid to inflate the
    bubble.


CLS 446/22
TXT SPARKING:

    Device under the class definition which includes means for throwing out
    glowing particles struck from a mass, or for forming an electrical
    discharge across an air gap.


CLS 446/23
TXT Figure, wheeled, or simulated weapon:
    Device under subclass 22 comprising either (1) a simulation of an animate
    being or portion thereof, (2) a generally round rotatable element upon
    which the sparking portion may be rolled along a surface, or (3) a
    simulated instrument of offensive or defensive combat.


CLS 446/24
TXT SMOKING:

    Device under the class definition including means for forming or passing a
    volume of gas made visible by the presence of either small particles
    suspended therein, or a vapor which is intended to simulate the same effect.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 407 for a display
    device which includes smoke emitting means.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 305 for a smile, fog, or gaseous dispersant
    colloid.


CLS 446/25
TXT Wheeled vehicle:

    Device under subclass 24 wherein the means for forming or passing the
    visible volume of gas is supported by a generally round rotatable element
    upon which it may be rolled along a surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    431+,   for other toy wheeled vehicles, and see the Search Notes thereunder
    for related loci.


CLS 446/26
TXT BODY-CARRIED OR WORN:

    Device under the class definition which is specifically configured or is
    provided with means whereby it may be supported on a person.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from the subclass are patents to devices which are
    gripped and supported by the hand, such as hand puppets.

    (2)     Note.  Devices which are maintained about a portion of the body
    solely by a whirling motion (e.g., "hulahoop") are excluded from this
    subclass.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass includes a toy attached to the clothes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236+,   for a hoop maintained about a portion of the body solely by a
    whirling motion.

    327+,   for a hand puppet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    63,     Jewelry, appropriate subclasses for an ornamental device worn on
    the body, and which may have an active portion.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclasses 101+ for a body carrier by
    which a toy is transported.

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclass 133 for a body attached,
    worn, or carried amusement device appropriate therefor.


CLS 446/27
TXT Facial, head, or neck:

    Device under subclass 26 which is directly or indirectly supported by the
    face, head, or neck of the person.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 171+ for head coverings in general, especially
    subclass 206 for ornamental masks.


CLS 446/28
TXT Torso:

    Devise under subclass 26 which derives its support from direct engagement
    with either the trunk of the person, or an intermediate article worn or
    carried on the person's trunk.


CLS 446/29
TXT STRADDLED:

    Device under the class definition wherein the method of operation entails
    sitting or standing astride the device.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes stick horses.


CLS 446/30
TXT TETHERED-FIXED WING AIRCRAFT:

    Device under the class definition comprising an airplane or glider, or
    simulation thereof, which is constrained to move at or about a radius
    determined by the length of an elongated member connected at one end to the
    aircraft.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes as original copies patents claiming
    only the control handle for a tethered airplane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247,    for other tethered toys.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 413 for a fluid
    operated hood ornament in the form of a tethered aircraft.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 370+ for a reeling
    device, particularly subclasses 345+ for a reeling device adapted to be
    held in a user's hand.


CLS 446/31
TXT Tether-manipulated control or mechanism:
    Device under subclass 30 wherein the elongated member is connected to the
    aircraft in manner whereby relative movement between the elongated member
    and aircraft causes operation of means carried by the aircraft.


CLS 446/32
TXT Elevator control only:

    Device under subclass 31 wherein the only means operated by an elongated
    member comprises an airfoil which, when moved, results in pitching
    movements of the aircraft about its lateral axis.


CLS 446/33
TXT Including aircraft-carried propulsion means:

    Device under subclass 30 including means on the aircraft itself for
    supplying power to drive the aircraft through the air.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for jet-propelled untethered toy aircraft.

    57+,    for propeller-driven untethered toy aircraft.

    232,    for a nonflying toy aircraft having a motor-driven propeller.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclasses 7+ for a powered toy
    type roundabout having an article, e.g., an airplane, etc., supported by a
    tether as it is mechanically propelled along a circuitous path about a
    central pylon, tower, pole, pedestal, etc.


CLS 446/34
TXT AERODYNAMICALLY SUPPORTED OR RETARDED:

    Device under the class definition including a surface which, when moved
    relative to the surrounding air, reacts with the air to either support the
    weight of the device, or to restrict its velocity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for a model airplane adapted to be assembled from a kit, and with
    no aerodynamic features.

    237+,   for a simulated aerial device (i.e., nonflying).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 413 for an automobile
    hood ornament in the form of an aircraft and which is caused to rise by the
    relative wind.

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, for a centrifugally or mechanically
    operated device, per se, for launching a projectile into the air (e.g., a
    sling, bow, baseball or tennis ball pitching machine, slingshot, etc.).

    244,    Aeronautics, appropriate subclasses for kites, and full size
    aeronautic devices.  Inventions which apply logically to full size devices
    for actual use in carrying persons or cargo are classified in Class 244.
    All other toy or model aircraft are classified in Class 446.

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 317+ for an aerial projectile
    claimed in combination with at least one other game component and for an
    implement or mechanically operated device for projecting or launching a
    game projectile into the air provided that it is claimed in combination
    with at least one other game component.

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, subclasses 569+ for an aerial
    projectile, per se, used for play of a game or sport, which projectile may
    be aerodynamically supported or retarded (e.g., a boomerang, flying disc or
    saucer, etc.).  Also included in Class 473 are (a) a centrifugally or
    mechanically operated device for projecting or launching such aerial
    projectile provided only that it is claimed in combination with at least
    one other game component such as a game projectile, (b) a player held and
    powered implement, per se, for striking and thereby projecting such aerial
    projectile, and (c) an implement or device, per se, for both projecting and
    catching an aerial projectile.


CLS 446/35
TXT Ornithopter:

    Device under subclass 34 including flapping wings for supporting and
    propelling the device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 11, 22, and 28 for aircraft sustained aloft
    by beating wings.


CLS 446/36
TXT Including rotary wing (e.g., helicopter, flying propeller, autogyro, etc.):

    Device under subclass 34 including an airfoil which revolves about an axis
    to develop lift to support or retard the device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 17.11+ for a full-size rotary wing
    aircraft, or a reduced size aircraft where the invention applies logically
    to full sized ones.

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, subclasses 569+ for an aerial
    projectile used for play of a game or sport, which projectile may be
    aerodynamically supported or retarded, particularly subclass 590 for a
    boomerang.


CLS 446/37
TXT And means to rotate wing:

    Devices under subclass 36 including means for revolving the airfoil about
    the axis to develop lift.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248     and 259, for means to spin a top or other spinning toy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 116+ for ground effect vehicles.

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclasses 7+ for a powered toy
    type roundabout having an article, e.g., a helicopter, etc., supported by a
    tether as it is mechanically propelled along a circuitous path about a
    central pylon, tower, pole, pedestal, etc.


CLS 446/38
TXT Separable rotating means:

    Device under subclass 37 wherein the means for revolving the airfoil
    detaches from the airfoil.


CLS 446/39
TXT Including resilient actuator:

    Device under subclass 38 wherein the detachable means includes an
    elastically deformable material which is deformed to store energy and then
    released to rotate the airfoil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    260,    for a spring impeller for a top.


CLS 446/40
TXT Including flaccid pulling element:

    Device under subclass 38 wherein the separable means comprises an elongated
    member formed of a nonself-sustaining pliant material and which is intended
    to be wrapped about a portion connected to the airfoil and then pulled to
    rotate the airfoil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248     and 261, for cord impeller for spinning a top.


CLS 446/41
TXT Having rewinding spring or plural discrete flaccid elements:

    Device under subclass 40 including either (1) an elastically deformable
    member which causes the elongated pliant member to be rewrapped about the
    portion connected to the airfoil, or (2) a second, individually distinct
    elongated member formed of a nonself-sustaining pliant material and adapted
    to be wrapped about a portion connected to the airfoil and then pulled to
    rotate the airfoil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249,    for similar actuating means for a top.


CLS 446/42
TXT Flaccid element wound about and in contact with portion which moves aloft:

    Device under subclass 40 wherein the portion about which the elongated
    pliant member is wrapped remains with the airfoil while it flies.


CLS 446/43
TXT Including spiral actuator:

    Device under subclass 38 wherein the separable means comprises a twisted or
    helically fluted member which is adapted to engage cooperating structure
    connected to the airfoil and is then pushed or pulled to rotate the airfoil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241,    for a nonflying toy which is caused to rotate by a spiral actuator.


CLS 446/44
TXT Including elastomeric actuator:

    Device under subclass 37 including a member formed of rubber or a material
    of similar characteristics which is elastically deformed to store energy,
    and is then released to rotate the airfoil.


CLS 446/45
TXT And projector:

    Device under subclass 36 combined with means to cast the revolving airfoil
    upwardly or outwardly, whereby the airfoil rotates freely to provide lift.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for a parachute and projector therefor.

    63+,    for a glider and projector therefor.

    380+,   for a projector for a figure toy.

    429+,   for a vehicle projector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, for a centrifugally or mechanically
    operated device, per se, for launching a projectile into the air (e.g., a
    sling, bow, baseball or tennis ball pitching machine, slingshot, etc.).

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 317+ for an implement or
    mechanical device for projecting or launching a game projectile into the
    air, which implement or device is claimed in combination with at least one
    other game component such as a target, projectile, etc.

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, subclasses 569+ for an aerial
    projectile used for play of a game or sport, which projectile may be
    aerodynamically supported or retarded (e.g., a boomerang, flying disc or
    saucer, etc.).  A launcher for such aerial projectile may be included in
    Class 473 provided that it is claimed in combination with another game
    component such as a game projectile.


CLS 446/46
TXT Spinning disc (e.g., flying saucer):

    Device under subclass 34 wherein the surface is in the shape of a flat or
    concave disk adapted to be spun and sailed through the air.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, subclasses 569+ for an aerial
    projectile used for play of a game or sport, which projectile may be
    aerodynamically supported or retarded, particularly subclasses 588+ for a
    flying disc, ring, or saucer.


CLS 446/47
TXT With electric light or sounder:

    Device under subclass 46 including either an electrically powered means for
    producing illumination, or means for producing mechanical wave energy which
    can be perceived by the sense of hearing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213+,   for a fluid operated sounder, per se.

    242,    for a nonflying, rotating toy having an electric light or an
    electric sounder.

    486,    the residual locus for toys having an electric light.


CLS 446/48
TXT Having through air passage:

    Device under subclass 46 wherein the disk is provided with an opening
    through which air may pass across the thickness of the disk as it travels
    through the air.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, subclasses 569+ for an aerial
    projectile used for play of a game or sport, which projectile may be
    aerodynamically supported or retarded, particularly subclass 589 for a
    flying ring.


CLS 446/49
TXT Parachute:

    Device under subclass 34 including a collapsible cupped or curved surface
    for retarding the velocity of an object attached thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 142+ for a parachute, per se.


CLS 446/50
TXT Released from airplane or simulated airplane:

    Device under subclass 49 wherein the collapsed surface is carried by a toy
    fixed-wing aircraft from which it is discharged to assume an open, velocity
    retarding position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 337, 348, 387 for projectiles
    having a retarding chute.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 113 for aerodynamic retarding devices for
    aircraft.


CLS 446/51
TXT Released from container:

    Device under subclass 49 including a receptacle into which the collapsed
    surface is placed, and from which it is discharged to assume an open,
    velocity retarding position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 337, 348, 354, and 387 for
    projectiles having a retarding chute.


CLS 446/52
TXT From rocket or simulated rocket:

    Device under subclass 51 wherein the receptacle comprises a toy missile
    powered by a rocket engine, or a simulation of a missile.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 113 for aerodynamic retarding devices for
    aircraft.


CLS 446/53
TXT Container detached from parachute:

    Device under subclass 51 wherein the collapsible surface is completely
    separated from the receptacle after it is ejected therefrom.


CLS 446/54
TXT And separable projector:

    Device under subclass 49 including detachable means for casting the
    collapsed cupped or curved surface upwardly or outwardly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for a rotary wing device and projector therefor.

    63+,    for a glider and projector therefor.

    308+,   for a projector for a figure toy.

    429+,   for a vehicle projector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, for a centrifugally or mechanically
    operated device, per se, for projecting a projectile into the air.

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 317+ for an implement or
    mechanical device for projecting or launching a game projectile into the
    air, which implement or device is claimed in combination with at least one
    other game component such as a target, projectile, etc.

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, subclasses 569+ for an aerial
    projectile used for play of a game or sport, which projectile may be
    aerodynamically supported or retarded (e.g., a boomerang, flying disc or
    saucer, etc.).  A launcher for such aerial projectile may be included in
    Class 473 provided that it is claimed in combination with another game
    component such as a game projectile.


CLS 446/55
TXT Having retractable landing gear:

    Device under subclass 34 including a ground engaging wheel, and means for
    movably mounting the wheel on the device for movement between a position of
    use and a storage position.


CLS 446/56
TXT Jet-propelled:

    Device under 34 which is moved on direction by discharging a stream of
    fluid in the opposite direction through a small opening or nozzle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for a jet-propelled tethered toy aircraft.

    211,    for jet-propelled toys which are not aerodynamically supported by
    an airfoil, and see the search notes thereunder for other related loci.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 4+ for full size jet aircraft, as well as
    toy jet aircraft where the invention would logically apply to full size
    aircraft; and subclasses 73+ for jet propulsion systems for full size
    aircraft.


CLS 446/57
TXT Having motor-driven propeller:

    Device under subclass 34 including a rotating airfoil to provide forward
    thrust, and energy transducing or storing means for supplying power to
    rotate the airfoil.

    (1)     Note.  Toy aircraft having engine starters which fall within the
    scope of this definition will be found in this and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for a propeller-driven tethered aircraft.

    37+,    for a toy aircraft having a propeller which provides vertical lift.

    232,    for a nonflying toy aircraft having a motor-driven propeller.


CLS 446/58
TXT Gear-driven or having plural propellers:

    Device under subclass 57 wherein either (1) a driven member is provided
    having teeth thereon which engage the teeth on a second rotatable member to
    rotate the second member and thereby the airfoil, or (2) the rotating
    airfoil is mounted on a first rotatable portion, and a second rotating
    airfoil is provided and is mounted on a second rotatable portion
    individually distinct from the first portion.


CLS 446/59
TXT Elastomeric motor (e.g., rubber band):

    Device under subclass 57 wherein the energy transducing or storing means
    comprises an elastically deformable member formed of rubber or a substance
    which exhibits similar characteristics.


CLS 446/60
TXT Enclosed:

    Device under subclass 59 wherein a substantial portion of the elastically
    deformable member is surrounded on at least three sides by structural
    members extending along the length of the elastically deformable member.


CLS 446/61
TXT Glider:

    Device under subclass 34 having an airfoil which is caused to travel
    through the air by either releasing it at a height over a surface over
    which it will fly, or by supplying an initial impulse to project it forward
    or upward.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for a device having a freely rotating airfoil to retard its descent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 16 for a full size glider, or a toy glider
    where the invention would logically apply to a full size device; and see
    subclass 154 for airplane type kites which are structurally similar to
    gliders, but which are held against the relative wind by a line.


CLS 446/62
TXT Having folding wing:

    Device under subclass 61 wherein one section of the airfoil is swingably
    mounted to another section of the airfoil whereby an overall dimension of
    the airfoil may be reduced.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109,    for a construction toy having a foldable panel.

    487,    for other foldable or collapsible toys.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 49 for a folding wing applicable to full size
    aircraft.


CLS 446/63
TXT And projector or launcher:

    Device under subclass 61 including either means for imparting an initial
    impulse to the airfoil, or separable means from which the airfoil is thrown
    into the air.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for a rotary wing device and projector therefor.

    54,     for a parachute and a projector therefor.

    308+,   for a projector for a figure toy.

    429+,   for a vehicle projector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, for a centrifugally or mechanically
    operated device, per se, for projecting a projectile into the air.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 63 for an aircraft launcher for operative
    aircraft.

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 317+ for an implement or
    mechanical device for projecting or launching a game projectile into the
    air, which implement or device being claimed in combination with at least
    one other game component such as a target, projectile, etc.

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, subclasses 569+ for an aerial
    projectile used for play of a game or sport, which projectile may be
    aerodynamically supported or retarded (e.g., a boomerang, flying disc or
    saucer, etc.).  A launcher for such aerial projectile may be included in
    Class 473 provided that it is claimed in combination with another game
    component such as a game projectile.


CLS 446/64
TXT Resiliently biased projector:

    Device under subclass 63 wherein the means for imparting an initial impulse
    to the airfoil comprises a member which is deformed elastically and then
    supplies the impulse while returning to its initial undeformed state.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    430,    for a resiliently biased projector for a toy wheeled vehicle.


CLS 446/65
TXT Including means to retain resilient propulsion member in stressed
    condition:

    Device under subclass 64 wherein releasable means are provided to hold the
    elastically deformable member in its deformed state.


CLS 446/66
TXT Having adjustable mounted airfoil:

    Device under subclass 61 including a fluid reaction surface or a distinct
    portion thereof which is attached to the device by means which permits the
    surface or portion to be moved to any one of a plurality of positions.


CLS 446/67
TXT Having longitudinally folded or creased fuselage:

    Device under subclass 61 including a distinct elongated main body portion
    to which the airfoil is attached, wherein the body portion is formed from a
    section of sheet material which is either doubled over or bent along a line
    extending in the direction of the length of the main body portion.


CLS 446/68
TXT Having ballast feature:

    Device under subclass 61 including a discrete mass or high density portion
    which improves stability or control of the device while in flight.


CLS 446/69
TXT HAVING SEPARABLE NESTED PARTS:

    Device under the class definition including a plurality of parts, separable
    for playing, and which are dimensioned and configured to closely fit one
    within another, wherein the inner surface of one part is similar in shape
    to the outer surface of another part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 514 and 515 for special
    receptacles or closures having nesting features.

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 380 for closures having features for nesting
    within one another.


CLS 446/70
TXT SAND CONSTRUCTION:

    Device under the class definition including means provided specifically for
    playing with sand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166+,   for a toy which is operated by a gravity fed fluent material such
    as sand.


CLS 446/71
TXT CONVERTIBLE FROM, OR SERVING AS DIVERSE ARTICLE:

    Device under the class definition wherein either (1) the device enable an
    article other than a toy be used as a toy, or (2) all or a portion of the
    toy device is usable, with or without modification, as an article other
    than a toy.

    (1)     Note.  This definition is not intended to encompass a toy
    constructed of edible material, per se.

    (2)     Note.  Regarding part (2) above, a device which instructs as the
    child plays with it is not considered to serve as a diverse article on the
    basis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    434,    Education and Demonstration, for a toy which instructs as the child
    plays with it.


CLS 446/72
TXT Including figure toy:

    Device under subclass 71 comprising a simulation of the face or form of an
    animate being.


CLS 446/73
TXT Diverse article is container, holder, or support:

    Device under subclass 72 wherein the article other than a toy comprises
    either a receptacle or means to grip or to sustain a discrete object
    against the force of gravity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 457 for a receptacle or
    package shaped to represent a figure.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclass 116.3 for an
    ornamental box which is shaped to simulate a figure.


CLS 446/74
TXT Diverse article is fluid container or handbag:

    Device under subclass 73 wherein the article other than a toy comprises
    either a receptacle for a fluid, or bag held in the hand or hung from a
    shoulder strap and used for carrying small personal articles or money.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, subclasses 100+ for body
    construction of a handbag.


CLS 446/75
TXT Including container for storing toy parts: Device under subclass 71 wherein
    a portion of the device is used as a receptacle for holding other parts of
    the device when not in use.


CLS 446/76
TXT Container having shape of specific article: Device under subclass 71
    wherein the article other than a toy comprises a receptacle configured to
    simulate the appearance of something.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 457 for a receptacle or
    package shaped to simulate something.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 116.1+ for an
    ornamental container (e.g., a container shaped to simulate something).


CLS 446/77
TXT Including toy appurtenance attachable to container:

    Device under subclass 71 which includes a subordinate part or adjunct which
    is connectable to a receptacle to form an amusement or recreation device
    under the class definition.


CLS 446/78
TXT Rollable wheel:

    Device under subclass 77 comprising a generally round ground engaging
    element adapted to rotate about an axle and which, when connected to the
    receptacle, enables the receptacle to be used as a vehicle rollable about
    on the element.


CLS 446/79
TXT Having severable portion (i.e., score line):

    Device under subclass 71 which is adapted to be cut along a line in a
    process of modifying the device to enable its use as a toy.


CLS 446/80
TXT Including fold line (to convert to toy):

    Device under subclass 71 in which one portion is adapted to be bent about a
    line toward another portion in a process of modifying the device to enable
    its use as a toy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    488,    for other toys constructed from folded sheet material, and see the
    search notes thereunder for related loci.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclass 103 for a
    convertible paperboard box.


CLS 446/81
TXT Including sounding toy:

    Device under subclass 71 including means specifically provided for
    generating sound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    397+,   for a sounding toy, per se, and see the search notes to that
    subclass for other related loci.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 2+ for a mechanical signal
    (e.g., alarm) combined with a diverse art device.


CLS 446/82
TXT TOY THEATER:

    Device under the class definition comprising a simulation of a structure or
    area for showing motion pictures or for performances or shows.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    476+,   for other toy buildings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclasses 75+ for a stage
    apparatus or setting appropriate therefor which is not a toy.


CLS 446/83
TXT Including movable figure:

    Device under subclass 82 including a simulation in the form of an animate
    being which may be moved from one location to another, or having a portion
    which may be moved relative to another portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    330+,   for a figure toy having a mechanism or manipulatable means to move
    the figure or a portion thereof, and see the search notes thereunder for
    other related loci.


CLS 446/84
TXT Including marionette:

    Device under subclass 83 wherein the simulation in the form of an animate
    being has jointed limbs which are moved by manipulation of attached wires,
    rods, or strings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359+,   for other marionettes.


CLS 446/85
TXT CONSTRUCTION TOY:

    Device under the class definition comprising a plurality of parts for
    assembling, wherein the child plays with the device by assembling,
    disassembling, or relatively arranging the parts.

    (1)     Note.  Mere recitation in a claim that a part is "detachable" from
    a toy is not in itself sufficient to cause classification as a construction
    toy as defined above.  Although the toy may be an operable device in
    assembled form, a primary purpose of the toy must be the amusement of the
    child by assembling or disassembling the toy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for a plurality of parts for assembling and disassembling, wherein
    the parts are sized and configured to fit one within another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g. Buildings), appropriate subclasses for
    construction elements specifically for use in full size constructions;
    especially subclasses 578+ for connectable modules or panels; subclasses
    596+ for stonelike modules; and subclasses 720.1+ for a shaft type
    construction member.

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 156+ for puzzles.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 8 for a
    knockdown special occasion ornament.


CLS 446/86
TXT With special tool or workholder:

    Device under subclass 85 including a hand-manipulatable implement means or
    means to grip and support a part to assist the child in assembling or
    disassembling the parts.


CLS 446/87
TXT For assembly into permanent form (i.e. nonseparable):

    Device under subclass 85 wherein the parts are permanently fixed by the
    child.

    (1)     Note.  Many toys are purchased in unassembled form, to be assembled
    prior to their first use, and many patents address the ease with which a
    toy is assembled.  The original patents in this subclass; however, disclose
    toys in which a primary purpose is that the child carry out the assembly
    into a permanent form.  A typical example is the "cut-paste" toy.


CLS 446/88
TXT Vehicle (e.g., aircraft, automobile):
    Device under subclass 87 wherein the parts are assembled to form a
    simulation of a conveyance for carrying or transporting something.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160+,   for a toy boat.

    230+,   for a toy aircraft.

    431+,   for a toy wheeled vehicle.


CLS 446/89
TXT Including fluid conduit:

    Device under subclass 85 wherein the assembled parts define or have
    attached thereto a channel through which something is conveyed or routed.


CLS 446/90
TXT Including motor:

    Device under subclass 85 including mechanical means for operating the
    device or a portion thereof, and energy transducing or storage means for
    supplying power to said mechanical means.

    (1)     Note.  "Energy transducing means" is intended to include any device
    which converts one form of energy into another (e.g., electric motor, solar
    cell, turbine, etc.).


CLS 446/91
TXT Including electrical feature or assembly:
    Device under subclass 85 including means operated by, conducting, or
    producing a flow of electrical energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    484+,   for other toys having an electrical feature, and see the search
    notes thereunder for other related loci.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    238,    Railways:  Surface Track, subclasses 14.05+ for electrical
    connection features between railway surface track.


CLS 446/92
TXT Including permanent magnet or suction cup to secure elements:

    Device under subclass 85 wherein one of the parts includes either (1)
    magnetized material for attracting another part whereby the parts are
    retained in assembled relationship by magnetic attraction, or (2) a concave
    member formed of pliant material which is adapted to form a sealed chamber
    with a surface on the other part, wherein said chamber is placed under
    subatmospheric pressure to retain the two parts in assembled relationship.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclass 73 for constructable
    architectural demonstration models which include a magnet.


CLS 446/93
TXT Vehicle:

    Device under subclass 85 comprising a simulated conveyance for carrying or
    transporting something.

    (1)     Note.  Placing a figure in or on a vehicle to represent a driver or
    rider is not considered to be a construction toy for the purpose of this
    and indented subclasses.


CLS 446/94
TXT Alternative vehicular forms:

    Device under subclass 93 wherein the parts may be arranged or assembled in
    any of a plurality of relative positions which correspond to a plurality of
    vehicle shapes.


CLS 446/95
TXT Wheeled:

    Device under subclass 93 wherein the simulated conveyance is rendered
    ambulant by rounded members attached thereto and upon which it may roll
    over a surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    279+,   for a vehicle having a removable rider or driver.

    431+,   for other toy wheeled vehicles and see the search notes thereunder
    for related loci.


CLS 446/96
TXT And pulling member or extrinsic guide:
    Device under subclass 95 including either (1) an element or portion
    connected to or formed on the vehicle and adapted to be gripped by the
    child to roll the vehicle over the surface, or (2) structure external to
    and engaged by the vehicle for constraining its movement to a predetermined
    path, wherein the structure does not form part of the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    444+,   for other rolling toys guided by extrinsic structure.

    450,    for a rolling toy pulled by a handle, rod or tether.


CLS 446/97
TXT Figure:

    Device under subclass 85 comprising a simulation of the face or form of an
    animate being.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    268,    for other figure toys, and see the search notes thereunder for
    other related loci.


CLS 446/98
TXT Including attachable clothes:

    Device under subclass 97 comprising a representation of a garment which is
    adapted to be readily attached to and detached from the simulation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, appropriate subclasses for paper doll apparel, per se.


CLS 446/99
TXT Alternative figures:

    Device under subclass 97 wherein the parts may be arranged or assembled in
    any of a plurality of relative positions which correspond to a plurality of
    different faces or forms.


CLS 446/100
TXT Having detachable subordinate part of face or head:

    Device under subclass 99 wherein one of the parts which are arranged or
    assembled comprises a portion of the face or head which is applied or
    removed to change the appearance of the entire face or head of the
    simulation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    321,    for a figure toy having selectively displayed alternative features
    which are not detachable from the remainder of the figure.


CLS 446/101
TXT Plural mutually attachable:

    Device under subclass 97 wherein two of the detached parts comprise
    discrete simulations of faces or forms of beings adapted to be connected
    together.


CLS 446/102
TXT Having parts assembled for relative movement:

    Device under subclass 85 including connecting structure between two of the
    parts which permits swinging or sliding movement between the parts after
    the device has been assembled, wherein the assembled device is adapted to
    be played with by relatively moving the parts.


CLS 446/103
TXT Including rotary gear, pulley, or strand-winding member:

    Device under subclass 102 wherein one of the relatively moving parts
    comprises an element mounted for rotation about an axis passing through the
    element, and having on its periphery either (1) a series of teeth adapted
    to engage cooperating structure on another element to impart movement from
    one element to the other, (2) a groove adapted to receive a portion of a
    rotary motion transmitting flaccid loop, or (3) an elongated flaccid
    element adapted to be alternately wound and unwound about the periphery.


CLS 446/104
TXT One part swingable about an axis extending along a side or transversely
    through an end:

    Device under subclass 102 wherein the connecting structure permits one part
    to swing about an axis which lies along or adjacent to one edge or terminal
    portion of part.

    (1)     Note.  This definition is intended to exclude pivotal movement of a
    part about its central or longitudinal axis.


CLS 446/105
TXT Including post having plural longitudinal slots for panels or strips:

    Device under subclass 85 wherein one part comprises an elongated member
    having a plurality of circumferentially arranged grooves along its length,
    each which is adapted to slidably receive another part comprising a flat
    member which is thin compared to its length and breadth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 474+ for similar
    construction elements for a full size structure.


CLS 446/106
TXT Including elongated element having laterally opposed interlocking notches
    (e.g., long cabin type):

    Device under subclass 85 wherein the detached parts include an elongated
    member having matching cutaway portions on opposite sides of its
    circumference and adapted to receive a similar elongated member in each
    cutaway portion, whereby the two elongated elements are assembled in an
    orthangonal relationship.


CLS 446/107
TXT Including longitudinally flexed rod or strip:

    Device under subclass 85 including an elongated slender or thin detached
    part formed of a material which allows the part to be readily bent in a
    direction transverse to its length when assembled to another part.


CLS 446/108
TXT Including connectable panels or strips:
    Device under subclass 85 wherein the detached parts include two members
    which are adapted to be assembled together and each of which is thin
    compared to its length and breadth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g. Buildings), or subclasses 578+ for
    connectable modules or panels specifically for use in a full size
    construction.


CLS 446/109
TXT Foldable panel, strip, or connector:

    Device under subclass 108 wherein either one of the thin members, or a
    discrete sheet for fastening them together, comprises structure or material
    which is intended to allow one portion to be bent about a line toward the
    remaining portion, either prior or subsequent to construction.


CLS 446/110
TXT And door, window or perfecting structure for building:

    Device under subclass 108 including either (1) a portal or closure
    therefor, (2) an opening in a wall to permit light to pass to the interior
    of a toy building, or a closure for said opening, or (3) any structure
    which is peculiar to buildings and in addition to the requisite structure
    of a foundation, interior and exterior walls, floor, and roof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 72+ for constructable
    modules for architectural demonstration.


CLS 446/111
TXT With separate diverse connector between adjacent panels or strips:

    Device under subclass 108 wherein the two thin members are retained in
    assembled relationship by a discrete fastening means which differs from the
    thin members in either form or composition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 582.1+ for modules
    or panels used in full size constructions and connected by separate
    dissimilar joining means.


CLS 446/112
TXT Connected panels or strips having parallel edges and mutually angled faces:

    Device under subclass 111 wherein the two thin members are assembled with
    their edges coplanar and everywhere equidistant, and with a major face of
    one either orthogonal or forming an oblique angle with major face of the
    other.


CLS 446/113
TXT Extending transversely through panel or strip:

    Device under subclass 111 wherein the discrete fastening means passes
    through a major surface of each thin member.


CLS 446/114
TXT Connectable with adjacent edges transversely oriented:

    Device under subclass 108 wherein the two thin members are adapted to be
    assembled such that their proximal edges are skewed.


CLS 446/115
TXT Connected panels or strips having parallel edges and mutually angled faces:

    Device under subclass 108 wherein the two thin members are assembled with
    their edges coplanar and everywhere equidistant, and within a major face of
    one member is either orthogonal to or forms an oblique angle with a major
    face of the other member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    for similarly oriented panels or strips fastened to one another by
    a discrete transverse connector.


CLS 446/116
TXT Having resilient interlocking portions:

    Device under subclass 108 wherein the thin members are provided with
    connecting structure having a portion which is elastically deformed during
    assembly and disassembly of the members and which interferes with a
    cooperating portion to resist separation.


CLS 446/117
TXT Single column stacking:

    Device under subclass 85 comprising a plurality of detached parts, each of
    which is adapted to rest upon a single other part to form a vertical array.

    (1)     Note.  The device typically includes a standing support for
    receiving the stacked parts.


CLS 446/118
TXT Including substrate for construction elements (e.g., for array of tiles or
    pegs):

    Device under subclass 85 including a base presenting a substantially planar
    surface upon which a plurality of parts are assembled or arranged.


CLS 446/119
TXT Including flaccid connector for joining plural elements:

    Device under subclass 85 including discrete means, formed from a
    nonself-sustaining material, for fastening together the two parts.


CLS 446/120
TXT Resilient interlocking joint (e.g., snap joint):

    Device under subclass 85 including a portion which is elastically deformed
    during assembly and disassembly of the parts and interferes with a
    cooperating portion on another part or connector to resist separation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    for a resilient interlocking joint between panels or strips.


CLS 446/121
TXT Resilient male member:

    Device under subclass 120 wherein the portion which is elastically deformed
    during assembly and disassembly is shaped to fit within the cooperating
    portion on another part or connector.


CLS 446/122
TXT Including abutting elements having slots or apertures receiving discrete
    transverse connector:

    Device under subclass 85 wherein two parts having mutually contacting
    surfaces are fixed together by a separate connector whose longitudinal axis
    extends in a direction across both parts and through registering grooves or
    openings in the parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111+,   for a similar connection between adjacent panels or strips.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses for a similar
    connecting feature in a structural module or panel of that class type.


CLS 446/123
TXT Transverse member is separable bolt or screw:

    Device under subclass 122 wherein the separate connector comprises an
    elongated member having a helically threaded periphery.


CLS 446/124
TXT Interfitting elements:

    Device under subclass 85 wherein a detached part has a distinctly shaped
    portion for cooperative engagement with another part or with a connector
    for plural parts.

    (1)     Note.  This definition attempts to avert the determination of
    whether a particular item is an element or a connector.  Area of an
    engagement or joint in this or its indented subclasses refers either to a
    connection between major construction elements or to a connection between
    major element and an intermediate fastener.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 578+ and 596+ for
    connectable modules for use in full size constructions.

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 202.1+, especially subclass 209, for various
    shaped connections between portions of artificial teeth.


CLS 446/125
TXT Including identically shaped interfitting portions:

    Device under subclass 124 wherein the distinctly shaped portion of one part
    is adapted to cooperatively engage a distinctly shaped portion on a second
    part or connector, wherein the two portions are alike in pattern and
    contour.


CLS 446/126
TXT Including three rod-like elements projecting from a fourth element or
    common connector:

    Device under subclass 124 including a common fastening means for three
    elongated parts which, when assembled, protrude longitudinally outwardly
    from the common fastener in different directions.


CLS 446/127
TXT Joined by lateral sliding (e.g., dovetail):

    Device under subclass 124 wherein the distinctly shaped portion of one part
    is configured to be connected to a distinctly shaped portion of a second
    part by relative movement of the parts in a direction parallel to the
    interface between the connected parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    433,    Dentistry, subclass 209 for various sliding connections between
    portions of artificial teeth.


CLS 446/128
TXT Including element having plural bosses for forming single joint:

    Device under subclass 124 wherein the distinctly shaped portion of one part
    comprises a plurality of protrusions engageable with the other part to
    connect the two parts together, wherein each protrusion is essential to the
    connection.


CLS 446/129
TXT HAVING PERMANENT MAGNET (NOT MOTOR ASSOCIATED):

    Device under the class definition including a first element or portion
    formed of a material having the inherent property of attracting iron and
    producing a magnetic field external to itself, wherein the method of
    operation involves the mutual attraction or repulsion between the first
    element or portion and a second element or portion formed of magnetic or
    magnetizable material.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded are devices whose operation is due solely to an
    electrically induced magnetic field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    484,    for a toy having an electric motor or an electromagnet, and see the
    search notes thereunder for other related loci.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 426 for a display
    device having a magnetically moved object.

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 118, 138.1+, and 239 for
    magnetic board games involving skill or competition; and subclass 443 for a
    contest using a magnetically guided game element which involves physical
    skill or ability of the player, subclass 448 for a contest involving a
    player using manual dexterity in the magnetic capture or pickup of a game
    element, and subclass 456 for a magnetic means intended to assist a
    participant in accomplishing a task or to measure his/her skill in the
    completion of a task.

    463,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclass 61 for a magnetically propelled
    object in a racing game.


CLS 446/130
TXT For operating valve, switch, or clutch:

    Device under subclass 129 wherein the first element or portion is employed
    to actuate one of the following:

    (1)     a fluid flow controller, (2) a device for making or breaking a
    connection in an electric circuit, or (3) a coupling for connecting and
    disconnecting a driving and a driven part of a mechanism.


CLS 446/131
TXT Including loosely confined parts moved relatively by magnetic field:

    Device under subclass 129 including a plurality of relatively movable
    elements formed from magnetic or magnetizable material and which are
    restricted to movement within an enclosure, wherein relative movement
    between the elements is caused by movement of a magnetic field of one of
    the elements, or of a disparate element or portion.


CLS 446/132
TXT Manually held member for magnetic interaction with additional member having
    confined movement:

    Device under subclass 129 wherein the first element or portion is adapted
    to be supported and manipulated by a user's hand to move the second element
    or portion which is constrained either to rotational movement about one or
    more axes or to translational movement along a particular path.


CLS 446/133
TXT And member movable in spaced relation to moving magnet:

    Device under subclass 129 wherein movement of either the first or second
    element or portion causes movement of the other element or portion and
    wherein the movement occurs without mutual contact between the two elements
    or portions.


CLS 446/134
TXT Including interposed partition:

    Device under subclass 133 wherein the movement of the elements or portions
    occurs on opposite sides of a panel located therebetween.


CLS 446/135
TXT Magnet or member moves along partition surface:

    Device under subclass 134 wherein one of the elements or portions remains
    in contact with a panel surface while moving along the surface opposite the
    other element or portion.


CLS 446/136
TXT Including motor to move member, magnet, or partition:

    Device under subclass 135 including energy transducing or storing means for
    providing power for moving the elements or portions along the panel
    surface, or for moving the panel with respect to the elements or portions.


CLS 446/137
TXT Contacting, mutually attracted members:
    Device under subclass 129 wherein the method of operation involves mutual
    contact between the first and second elements or portions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92,     for a toy comprising a plurality of magnetically attachable parts
    which are played with by assembling or relatively arranging them into a
    desired form or array.


CLS 446/138
TXT Contact maintained during relative movement:

    Device under subclass 137 wherein the first and second elements or portions
    remain in contact with each other while one of the elements or portions is
    translated or rotated with respect to the other.


CLS 446/139
TXT Including figure or figure portion:

    Device under subclass 137 including a simulation of an animate being, or a
    portion thereof.


CLS 446/140
TXT INCLUDING MEANS CREATING, STORING, OR OPERATED BY STATICALLY INDUCED
    CHARGE: Device under the class definition having means for producing or
    accumulating a stationary electrical charge, or having means which is
    activated by such a charge.


CLS 446/141
TXT TELEPHONE:

    Device under the class definition comprising a simulation of an instrument
    by which sound is converted to and from electrical impulses for
    transmission to and from a similar instrument.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    397+,   for other sounding toys, and see the search notes for that subclass
    for other related loci.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communications, appropriate subclasses for a commercial
    telephone, particularly subclass 434 for novelty or fanciful character type
    telephone.


CLS 446/142
TXT Having electrical or voice feature:

    Device under subclass 141 including either (1) means operated by,
    conducting, or producing a flow of electrical energy, or (2)
    sound-producing means which simulates the voice of a human being.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    397+,   for a sounding toy, per se, and see the search notes thereunder for
    other related loci.

    484+,   for toys having an electrical feature, and see the search notes
    thereunder for other related loci.


CLS 446/143
TXT HAVING KEYBOARD:

    Device under the class definition including an assemblage of systematically
    arranged buttons by which levers or switches are manipulated to operate the
    device, or a simulation of an apparatus or instrument having such an
    assemblage.


CLS 446/144
TXT SIMULATED HAND OR POWER TOOL:

    Device under the class definition comprising a simulation of either a hand
    manipulatable implement adapted to contact and modify or hold a workpiece,
    or an apparatus for driving an instrument for contacting and modifying a
    workpiece.


CLS 446/145
TXT Saw or drill:

    Device under subclass 144 wherein the implement or instrument simulated is
    either a cutter having a plurality of serially arranged teeth, or a
    rotatable cutter which is axially advanced to cut a round hole in a
    workpiece.


CLS 446/146
TXT HAVING MEANS TO DRAW:

    Device under the class definition including a driven or manipulatable
    mechanism for moving a pen, pencil or other marking implement across a
    surface to form a picture or design on the surface.


CLS 446/147
TXT CHANGEABLE BOOK, CARD, OR PICTURE:

    Device under the class definition comprising either (1) a set of printed or
    blank sheets bound together into a volume, (2) a printed or blank sheet of
    stiff paper or paperboard, or (3) a substantially two-dimensional visual
    design or representation, formed by printing, drawing, painting or
    photography; wherein the method of operation is to alter the appearance of
    the volume, sheet, design, or representation.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include devices which replace an
    entire picture with another, as do thaumatropic devices.  To be proper for
    this subclass under part (3), a portion of a picture must be changed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    321,    for a doll having plural selectively displayed faces, limbs or
    bodies.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 446+ for a display
    device comprising a changing exhibitor; and subclasses 427+ for display
    devices which produce a special effect, particularly subclass 445 for a
    hand manipulated folded slided card.


CLS 446/148
TXT Including device erected by opening card or book, or removing from cover:

    Device under subclass 147 comprising a volume of printed or blank sheets,
    or a folded sheet of stiff paper or paperboard, wherein a portion is
    connected to the volume or folded sheet in such a manner as to cause the
    portion to be raised from a collapsed configuration upon opening the volume
    or unfolding the sheet, or upon withdrawal from an enclosure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 486+ for a device
    having a cover which is moved to selectively cover or expose an inscription.


CLS 446/149
TXT Movable picture portion:

    Device under subclass 147 including a visual design or representation, a
    part of which may be selectively moved relative to another part to animate
    the design or representation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    330+,   for a toy doll and means to move all or a portion of the doll.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 421+ for a
    two-dimensional movable figure display device; and subclasses 446+ for
    changing exhibitor.


CLS 446/150
TXT Moved by opening or closing card or book: Device under 149 wherein the
    visual design or representation is either on one of a plurality of sheets
    bound into a volume, or on a folded sheet of paper or cardboard, wherein a
    part of the visual design or representation is selectively moved by opening
    the volume or unfolding the sheet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    488,    for objects formed by folding sheet material.


CLS 446/151
TXT Including hand-manipulatable actuator:
    Device under subclass 149 including a portion connected to the selectively
    movable part and which is adapted to be engaged by the hand to move the
    part.


CLS 446/152
TXT For moving pivoted portion:

    Device under subclass 151 wherein the selectively movable part is connected
    to another part by means which constrains the movable part to movement
    about an axis fixed within respect to the other part.


CLS 446/153
TXT AQUATIC:

    Device under the class definition specifically adapted to be operated or
    played with upon or beneath the surface of water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    267,    for a toy having an enclosed liquid in which a portion of the toy
    may move.


CLS 446/154
TXT Including remote control means or tether: Device under subclass 153 wherein
    means are provided to operate the portion upon or beneath the water surface
    from a distance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for simulated vehicle cockpit or simulated vehicle control means.

    454,    for a remotely controlled wheeled vehicle toy, and see the search
    notes thereunder for other related loci.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclass 144 for a remotely controlled steering mechanism.


CLS 446/155
TXT For buoyancy control:

    Device under subclass 154 wherein means are provided to operate at a
    distance from the boat, a control means by which the tendency of the boat
    to float or rise in the water can be altered.


CLS 446/156
TXT Including means to move figure or figure part:

    Device under subclass 153 comprising a simulation of an animate being or
    portion thereof, and either means moving the device through the water, or
    means moving the simulation or a portion thereof with respect to the
    remainder of the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    330+,   for other figure toys including a mechanism or manipulatable means
    for moving a figure portion, and see the search notes thereunder for
    related loci.


CLS 446/157
TXT Including oar or paddle held by figure:
    Device under subclass 156 wherein the simulation of an animate being holds
    or appears to hold an implement for propelling a boat and having a handle
    portion connected to a broad face at one end.


CLS 446/158
TXT Mechanical motor within figure:

    Device under subclass 156 including an energy-storing or-transducing
    mechanism contained within the simulation of an animate being, for either
    moving the simulation through the water, or for moving the figure or a
    portion thereof with respect to the remainder of the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    353,    for a figure toy having an intrinsic motor for moving the figure or
    a portion thereof, and see the search notes thereunder for related loci.


CLS 446/159
TXT Fluid operated means to move figure or figure part:

    Device under 156 including energy-transducing means for converting the
    energy of a motive liquid or gas into movement of the simulation of an
    animate being.

    (1)     Note.  A figure which is propelled by a reaction (jet) motor is not
    classified in this subclass on that basis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199,    for other toys which include a fluid operated figure or figure part.


CLS 446/160
TXT Boat:

    Device under subclass 153 including a simulation of a vehicle which travels
    upon or beneath the surface of water.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 1 for an occupant propelled simulated boat.

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclasses 13 for a marine
    roundabout upon which a child may ride.


CLS 446/161
TXT Submersible:

    Device under subclass 160 specifically adapted to travel underwater or
    which simulates a vehicle adapted to travel underwater.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclasses 312+ for a submersible vessel.


CLS 446/162
TXT Including mechanical propulsion motor:
    Device under subclass 161 wherein the vehicle is provided with a mechanism
    for moving it through the water, and energy-transducing or-storing means
    for supplying power to drive the mechanism.


CLS 446/163
TXT Having propulsion means:

    Device under subclass 160 wherein the vehicle is provided with means for
    moving it through the water.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    440,    Marine Propulsion, appropriate subclasses for devices in which all
    claimed structure applies logically to full size boats.


CLS 446/164
TXT Mechanical motor:

    Device under subclass 163 wherein the means for moving the vehicle through
    the water comprises a mechanism, and energy transducing or storing means
    for supplying power to drive the mechanism.


CLS 446/165
TXT And screw propeller rotated by motor:
    Device under subclass 164 wherein the mechanism includes a thrust-providing
    member revolved about an axis which coincides with the direction of thrust
    of the member and having helically shaped blades about said axis which
    contact the water to move the vehicle therethrough.


CLS 446/166
TXT OPERATED BY GRAVITY-FED FLUENT MATERIAL:

    Device under the class definition including dynamic means powered by a
    falling stream of liquid or loose granular material or by weight of
    material accumulated from the stream.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for a toy with which a child may construct something with sand.


CLS 446/167
TXT For moving figure or figure portion:

    Device under subclass 166 wherein the dynamic means comprises a simulation
    of an animate being or portion thereof which is caused to move by the
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    330+,   for a figure toy having mechanism or manipulatable means to move
    the figure or a portion thereof, and see the search notes thereunder for
    other related loci.


CLS 446/168
TXT INCLUDING UNATTACHED GRAVITY-FED ROLLING, TUMBLING, OR ENERGY-IMPARTING
    FALLING ELEMENT, OR PATHWAY THEREFOR (E.G., MARBLE RUNWAY):

    Device under the class definition including an unattached element which
    either (1) moves down an incline under the force of gravity by turning over
    and over along the surface of the incline, or (2) drops through the air or
    travels down an incline to supply energy to a movable portion of the device
    to cause movement thereof, or (3) a track or guide for such an element, in
    (1) or (2) above.

    (1)     Note.  Devices having pivoted parts and adapted to move down an
    incline (e.g., "walking" dolls) are not considered to be elements as
    defined above, nor are wheeled devices adapted to move down an incline.

    (2)     Note.  Devices having a supply (e.g., magazine) in which elements
    are successively presented, or incrementally roll down an incline toward a
    dispensing outlet are not classified in this subclass on that basis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324,    for a tumbling figure which turns end over along a surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    238,    Railways:  Surface Track, subclass 10 for toy track having
    structure for physically guiding a toy vehicle.

    463,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclass 69 for a gravity-operated
    racing game.


CLS 446/169
TXT For moving figure or figure portion:

    Device under subclass 168 including a simulation of an animate being or
    portion thereof which is caused to move by the unattached element.


CLS 446/170
TXT Hand supported and manipulated runaway: Device under subclass 168
    comprising a track or guide for an unattached element and which is held and
    oriented by the operator in a manner to allow gravity to move the element
    along the track or guide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 109+ for a game of skill
    comprising a movable surface over which an element is caused to roll.


CLS 446/171
TXT And means for automatically recycling element:

    Device under subclass 168 including means to return an element back to its
    starting point without manual handling after it has rolled or fallen under
    the force of gravity.


CLS 446/172
TXT Hand-cranked element conveyer:

    Device under subclass 171 wherein the means to return the elements to their
    starting point is driven by manually rotating a shaft having either a
    handle extending radially or offset from the shaft to gain mechanical
    advantage to rotate the shaft.


CLS 446/173
TXT For moving element-support device:

    Device under subclass 168 wherein the energy of the element is imparted to
    a portion of the device which supports the element, thereby causing that
    portion to move.

    (1)     Note.  The portion of the device which is moved by the element must
    be a visible portion.


CLS 446/174
TXT Wheeled element carrier:

    Device under subclass 173 comprising an element supporting vehicle having a
    generally round ground-engaging part upon which the vehicle is rolled by
    energy imparted to it by the unattached element.


CLS 446/175
TXT HAVING LIGHT OR SOUND-RESPONSIVE SWITCH OR CONTROL:

    Device under the class definition including means for causing the device to
    operate in response to sound waves or visible electromagnetic radiation, or
    for affecting the operation of the device in response to sound waves or
    visible electromagnetic radiation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 167+ for a full size motor vehicle
    remotely controlled by sound or light waves.

    367,    Communications, Electrical: Acoustic Wave System and Devices,
    subclasses 198 for a sound or speech responsive control system, per se.


CLS 446/176
TXT OPERATED BY RELATIVELY MOVING FLUID OR PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL:

    Device under the class definition which functions by utilizing either (1)
    the kinetic energy from a liquid or gas moving relative to the device, or
    (2) energy derived from gases isolated from one another and at different
    static pressures.

    (1)     Note.  The mere distention of an inflatable toy is not sufficient
    to cause classification in this or indented subclasses.  However, when the
    addition or movement of a fluid causes animate or other representative
    movements of a figure or device, the toy is properly classified here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    for bubble blowing devices.

    30+     and 34+, for an aerodynamically supported toy.

    166+,   for toy operated by a gravity fed fluent material.


CLS 446/177
TXT Including suction cup:

    Device under subclass 176 including a concave or flat pliant member adapted
    to detachably and sealingly engage a surface and form therewith a chamber
    for gas at subambient pressure.


CLS 446/178
TXT Including motorized fan:

    Device under subclass 176 including a rotatable member for moving air with
    respect to the device, and means for rotating the member.


CLS 446/179
TXT Producing supporting air column or cushion: Device under subclass 178
    wherein the rotatable member forces air upwardly or downwardly to support
    the weight of the device or a portion thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37+,    for a moverable rotary wing device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 116+ for a full size ground-effect
    machine and toy machines wherein all claimed structure is suitable for use
    in a full size device.


CLS 446/180
TXT Including variable-size fluid chamber to move fluid:

    Device under subclass 176 including an enclosure of changeable volume for
    imparting energy to the liquid or gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    for a bubble-making device having a variable size fluid chamber for
    inflating bubbles.


CLS 446/181
TXT Supplying compressed gas to rupture sheet (e.g., film burster):

    Device under subclass 180 including a membrane adapted to be impacted and
    torn by a charge of gas from the enclosure.


CLS 446/182
TXT Including means to feed sheet:

    Device under subclass 181 including means to supply a new membrane or
    section thereof to replace the torn membrane.


CLS 446/183
TXT Squeezable figure:

    Device under subclass 180 wherein the enclosure is shaped to represent an
    animate being or portion thereof, or is located inside a simulation of an
    animate being or portion thereof, and is operated by pressing to deform the
    figure.


CLS 446/184
TXT Sounding:

    Device under subclass 183 including means specifically provided for
    emitting sound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193,    for a sounder operated by fluid from a squeezable bulb.

    397+,   for a mechanical sounder and see the search notes to that subclass
    for other related loci.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 139 for a horn or whistle operated
    by fluid from a manually actuated air compressor.


CLS 446/185
TXT Including external fluid-operated accessory or means to move figure portion:

    Device under subclass 184 including either (1) structure appurtenant to the
    animate being simulation and which is caused to function by the energy of
    the fluid, or (2) means to cause one portion of the simulation to move with
    respect to another portion.


CLS 446/186
TXT Contractable balloon for moving fluid:

    Device under subclass 180 wherein the enclosure is formed of an elastomeric
    material which contracts due to the resilient property of the enclosure
    walls to impart energy to the fluid.


CLS 446/187
TXT Jet-propelled balloon:

    Device under subclass 186 wherein the elastomeric enclosure is moved in one
    direction by discharging a stream of fluid in the opposite direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211+,   for other jet-propelled toys, and see the search notes thereunder
    for other related loci.


CLS 446/188
TXT Sounding:

    Device under subclass 180 having means specifically provided for emitting
    sound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    397,    for a mechanically actuated sounder and see the search notes for
    that subclass for other related loci.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 112 for an alarm comprising a
    fluid flow operated sounder.


CLS 446/189
TXT Wheel-actuated:

    Device under subclass 188 including a generally round rotatable element
    upon which the device may be rolled over a surface, and means transmitting
    the motion of the element to the sound-emitting means to cause it to emit
    sound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270,    for a wheeled figure toy having mechanically operated sounder.

    409+,   for a rolling or tumbling toy having a mechanically operated
    sounder.


CLS 446/190
TXT And tearing, or having mechanism or manipulatable means for moving figure
    portion:

    Device under subclass 188 comprising a simulation of an animate being or
    portion thereof and including either (1) an opening or passageway within or
    adjacent to a representation of an eye on the simulation through which a
    liquid is discharged to simulate weeping, or (2) a motor or mechanical
    motion-transmitting means to move the simulation or a part of the
    simulation with respect to another part.

    (1)     Note.  A simple spring or elastomeric member is considered to be a
    "motor".

    (2)     Note.  The "hand engageable portion" may be a different body
    portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    297+,   for a figure toy provided with a mechanically actuated sounder.

    305,    for a tearing doll, per se.


CLS 446/191
TXT Having electrical or wind-up motor:

    Device under subclass 190 including a motor for moving the simulation or
    portion thereof and which comprises either (1) means for converting
    electrical energy into mechanical movement, or (2) a resiliently deformable
    member which is deformed to store energy by rotating a hand-engageable
    portion, wherein the energy is subsequently released to move the simulation
    or portion thereof.


CLS 446/192
TXT Including motive power means or hand manipulator for sounder:

    Device under subclass 188 including either energy-transducing or storing
    means or a specific part other than the enclosure wall adapted to be
    engaged and moved with respect to another part for supplying power to
    actuate the sound-emitting means.

    (1)     Note.  The portion engaged by the hand may be a movable body
    portion of a figure toy.  The hand engageable portion may not be portion of
    a bellows or bulb.  However, a discrete hand engageable portion for
    actuating a bellows or bulb is proper for this subclass.


CLS 446/193
TXT And bellows or bulb:

    Device under subclass 192 wherein the wall of the enclosure either includes
    pleats to permit expansion and contraction, or is formed of a
    self-restoring pliant material and is collapsible under pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189,    for wheeled toys having a bellows driven by the wheel to produce a
    sound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 139 for a horn or whistle operated
    by fluid from a manually operated compressor.


CLS 446/194
TXT Rotary or pivoted valve:

    Device under subclass 188 wherein the sound-emitting means is fluid
    actuated and a flow regulator is provided which comprises a member mounted
    to revolve or swing about an axis.


CLS 446/195
TXT Reciprocating valve:

    Device under subclass 188 wherein the sound-emitting means is fluid
    actuated and flow regulator is provided which comprises a member mounted
    for to-and-fro rectilinear movement.


CLS 446/196
TXT Including piston slidable along central apertured member:

    Device under subclass 195 wherein the member mounted for to-and-fro
    movement includes an air moving-surface which is slidably mounted upon an
    elongated rod or tube of lesser transverse dimension and whose longitudinal
    axis passes through said surface, wherein an opening provided through the
    rod or tube is alternately covered and uncovered as the member slides along
    the rod or tube.


CLS 446/197
TXT Bellows or bulb for moving fluid:

    Device under subclass 180 wherein the wall of the enclosure either includes
    pleats to permit expansion and contraction, or is formed of a
    self-restoring pliant material and is collapsible under pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154+,   for aquatic toys including a squeezable bulb for remotely
    controlling the operation of the toy (e.g., buoyancy, speed, direction,
    etc.).

    193,    for toys having a bellow or bulb operator for a sounder.


CLS 446/198
TXT To move figure or figure portion:

    Device under subclass 197 including a simulation of an animate being or
    portion thereof which is caused to move by the fluid from the enclosure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    330+,   for a toy including a moving figure or figure portion which is
    actuated by other than fluid means, and see the search notes to the
    subclass 330 definition for other related loci.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 412+ for a fluid
    actuated three-dimensional figure.


CLS 446/199
TXT For changing or moving figure or figure part:

    Device under subclass 176 including a simulation of an animate being or
    portion thereof, wherein the energy of the fluid is utilized either to
    alter the appearance of the simulation, or to move the simulation or a
    portion thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    330+,   for a toy including a moving figure which is actuated by other than
    fluid means, and see the search notes to the subclass 330 definition for
    other related loci.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 412+ for a fluid
    actuated three-dimensional figure.


CLS 446/200
TXT Including mouthpiece for blowing or sucking:

    Device under subclass 199 including a portion adapted to be engaged by the
    mouth of a person and which directs expelled breath or fluid to the device
    from the person's mouth, or fluid through the device to the person's mouth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71+,    for a drinking straw combined with a fluid operated changeable toy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 33 for drinking
    straws.


CLS 446/201
TXT Including fluid-driven rotary blades:

    Device under subclass 199 including a portion comprising a plurality of
    discrete elongated relatively thin fluid reaction surfaces
    circumferentially arranged about an axis about which they are caused to
    revolve by the energy of the fluid, wherein the portion is connected to the
    simulation or portion thereof to move the same.


CLS 446/202
TXT Including mouthpiece for blowing or sucking:

    Device under subclass 176 including a portion adapted to be engaged by the
    mouth of a person and which directs expelled breath or fluid to the device
    from the person's mouth, or fluid through the device to the person's mouth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    for a bubble-making device having a mouthpiece.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, subclasses 330+ for an instrument having a mouthpiece and
    which is specifically used for playing music.


CLS 446/203
TXT Plural differently operated sounders:
    Device under subclass 202 including first means utilizing the energy of the
    breath or fluid to produce sound, and a second means for producing sound
    which is actuated or functions in a manner different than the first
    sound-producing means.


CLS 446/204
TXT Whistle or siren:

    Device under subclass 202 including means utilizing the energy of the
    breath or fluid to produce sound and comprising either (1) a portion having
    a relatively small opening which affects the breath of fluid passing
    through it to cause the sound, or (2) a rotating member which produces
    rapid interruptions in the breath or fluid current to cause the sound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 137+ for a mechanical signalling
    whistle; and subclass 147 for a mechanical signalling siren.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 404+ for an electrically
    controlled siren or whistle.


CLS 446/205
TXT Including discrete relatively movable portions:

    Device under subclass 204 wherein the sound producing means comprising a
    plurality of individual distinct connected parts, one of which is movable
    with respect to another.


CLS 446/206
TXT Including distinct means enabling selection of pitch:

    Device under subclass 204 having either (1) two distinguishable portions
    for producing two different tones, one higher in frequency than the other,
    or (2) a distinguishable portion provided specifically for permitting a
    person to selectively produce one of a plurality of different tones, one
    higher in frequency than another.

    (1)     Note.  The devices in this subclass are not intended to play music.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, subclasses 330+ for a musical instrument, even though called
    a toy, having enabling selection of pitch.


CLS 446/207
TXT Vibratory reed sounder:

    Device under subclass 202 including a thin elastic member fastened at one
    end over an opening in the device and which is caused to vibrate by the
    breath or fluid to produce sound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, subclasses 330+ for a vibratory reed musical instrument
    (e.g., woodwind).


CLS 446/208
TXT Including distinct means for enabling selection of pitch:

    Device under subclass 207 having either (1) two distinguishable portions
    for producing two different tones, one higher in frequency than the other,
    or (2) a distinguishable portion provided specifically for permitting a
    person to selectively produce one of a plurality of different tones, one
    higher in frequency than the other.

    (1)     Note.  The devices in this subclass are not intended to play music.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, subclasses 330+ for a musical instrument, even though called
    a toy, having means enabling selection of pitch.


CLS 446/209
TXT And cone-shaped terminal portion (e.g., horn):

    Device under subclass 207 including outwardly diverging passage by which
    the sound is amplified as it exits the device.


CLS 446/210
TXT Convection-operated:

    Device under subclass 176 including means actuated by a vertically moving
    air current resulting from a nonuniform temperature distribution in the air.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 441 for convention
    operated rotating display devices.


CLS 446/211
TXT Having jet propulsion:

    Device under subclass 176 which is moved or has a portion which is moved in
    one direction by discharging a stream of fluid from a small opening or
    nozzle in the opposite direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for a jet-propelled aerodynamically supported toy.

    163,    for a jet-propelled aquatic toy.

    187,    for a jet-propelled contractable balloon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 7.3 for a jet-propelled land vehicle.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 290+ for a
    jet nozzle.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 73+ for a jet propulsion system for a full
    size aircraft.


CLS 446/212
TXT And multiple stages or holder for launching:

    Device under subclass 211 including either (1) a plurality of sequentially
    operating, connected sections, each of which includes a small opening or
    nozzle through which a stream of fluid issues to propel the section through
    the air, wherein one section is caused to operate after a preceding section
    has operated and then separated from the device, or (2) separable means to
    secure or support the propelled portion until the stream of fluid, propels
    the portion therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    429,    for a toy wheeled vehicle launcher, and see the search notes
    thereunder for related loci.


CLS 446/213
TXT Sounding:

    Device under subclass 176 having means specifically provided for emitting
    sound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    397,    for a mechanical sounder and see the search notes for that subclass
    related loci.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 112 for an alarm comprising a
    fluid-operated sounder.


CLS 446/214
TXT Having twistable or intertwistable flaccid strands for rotating sounder:

    Device under subclass 213 including one or more elongated pliant lengths
    connected to a revolvable sound producing means and either (1) a single
    pliant length is alternately twisted and then allowed to untwist to impart
    revolutions to the revolving sound producing means, or (2) a plurality of
    elongated pliant lengths are alternately intertwined and then separated to
    impart revolutions to the revolvable portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254,    for a similar device having a mechanical sounder.


CLS 446/215
TXT Having tether for whirling sounder:

    Device under subclass 213 wherein the sound omitting means is attached to
    an end of a hand-held elongated member which constrains its movement about
    a radius determined by the length of the elongated member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247,    for a tethered whirling device, per se.


CLS 446/216
TXT Whistle or siren:

    Device under subclass 213 comprising either (1) a portion having a
    relatively small opening which affects fluid passing through it to cause
    the sound, or (2) a rotating member which produces rapid interruptions in a
    fluid current to cause the sound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204,    for a whistle or siren operated by fluid from a mouthpiece, and see
    the search notes thereunder for related loci.


CLS 446/217
TXT Having fluid-driven rotating radial blades (e.g., pinwheel):

    Device under subclass 176 including a plurality of fluid reaction surfaces
    extending radially from an axis about which they are caused to revolve by
    the energy of the fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), appropriate subclasses
    for a patent directed to the fluid reaction surfaces (blades), per se, and
    see subclass 69 for an operator supported manually actuated bladed member
    (e.g., fan).


CLS 446/218
TXT Rollable or having plural rotatable bladed members:

    Device under subclass 217 wherein (1) the fluid reaction surfaces are
    rotatably carried on a support which is adapted to have rolling contact
    with a supporting surface, or is supported on a generally round rotatable
    element upon which it may be rolled along a supporting surface, or (2) a
    second discrete set of fluid-reaction surfaces is provided which extend
    radially from an axis about which they are caused to revolve.


CLS 446/219
TXT HAVING CHEMILUMINESCENT LIGHT SOURCE, OPTIC FIBER, MIRROR, OR LENS:

    Device under the class definition which either (1) emits visible light due
    to a chemical reaction, (2) turns back all light impinging thereon to
    reflect an image, or (3) focuses or directs light rays as they pass
    therethrough.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements,
    appropriate subclasses for a device which employs an optical element to
    produce a desired visual effect.  Class 446 takes optical devices or
    elements when claimed in combination with an active toy properly
    classifiable in Class 446.

    362,    Illumination, subclass 34 for chemiluminescent lighting.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, appropriate subclasses for an optical fiber,
    per se.  Class 446 takes an optical fiber when in combination with an
    active toy properly classifiable in Class 446.


CLS 446/220
TXT INFLATABLE:

    Device under the class definition comprising an enclosure formed of elastic
    or pliant material and whose shape is manifested by filling the enclosure
    with a gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186+,   for an inflatable balloon combined with means actuated by the fluid
    issuing from the balloon while it is being deflated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 223+ for a device for inflating or
    facilitating the inflation of an article.


CLS 446/221
TXT Having separately inflatable parts:

    Device under subclass 220 comprising a plurality of discrete pliant or
    elastic enclosures, each of which is adapted to be filled with a gas.


CLS 446/222
TXT Including externally applied sealing element:

    Device under subclass 220 including an element fastened to the outside of a
    filled enclosure to prevent gas from escaping.


CLS 446/223
TXT And means attachable to form a figure:
    Device under subclass 220 including a member adapted to be joined to the
    filled enclosure to form a simulation of an animate being or portion
    thereof.


CLS 446/224
TXT Having check valve:

    Device under subclass 220 wherein the enclosure is provided with an opening
    and means which permits the flow of gas in one direction through the
    opening, but prevents flow in the opposite direction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 223+ for a valve for facilitating the
    inflation of an inflatable article.


CLS 446/225
TXT Simulated aerial or space vehicle:

    Device under subclass 220 wherein the filled enclosure represents the shape
    or form of a mobile conveyance adapted to travel through the air or outer
    space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230+,   for other toy aircraft or space vehicles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 24+ for lighter-than-air aircraft.


CLS 446/226
TXT Figure:

    Device under subclass 220 comprising a simulation of an animate being or
    portion thereof.


CLS 446/227
TXT INFANT'S TOY AND MEANS FOR RETAINING, ATTACHING, OR SUPPORTING TOY IN
    INFANT'S ENVIRONMENT:

    Device under the class definition including structure for fastening the
    device to a surface of a diverse article, and while so fastened, is adapted
    to be manipulated in a random manner by a young child


CLS 446/228
TXT SUSPENDED FOR TRAVEL BELOW GUIDE OR SUPPORT MEANS:

    Device under the class definition including a member supported from an
    elevated track or cable, wherein substantially all of the member lies below
    the track or cable and is caused to translate over the ground along or
    within the track or cable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273+,   for a device which travels along a guide, and has its center of
    gravity (i.e., weight) below the guide, and a figure above the guide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclasses 89+ for a railway for suspended vehicles and
    see the search note to Class 104 in the main definition of Class 446 for
    the line.

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclass 351 for a suspended toy which
    simulates bombing of a target.


CLS 446/229
TXT Including electrical or wind-up propulsion motor:

    Device under subclass 228 including power means to move the member along or
    with the track or cable, wherein the power means comprises either (1) a
    device for converting electrical energy into mechanical energy, or (2) a
    resiliently deformable member which is deformed to store energy by rotating
    a hand-engageable portion, wherein the energy is subsequently released to
    move the member.


CLS 446/230
TXT SIMULATED AIRCRAFT OR SPACE VEHICLE (I.E., NONAERODYNAMIC):

    Device under the class definition comprising an imitative representation of
    an aircraft or spaceship.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for a simulated vehicle cockpit or control.

    30+,    for a tethered, fixed wing toy aircraft.

    34+,    for any toy which is aerodynamically supported (i.e., flying) or
    retarded (e.g., parachute).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 1.12 and 1.21 for a wheeled simulation of
    an aircraft or space vehicle on which the child sits.

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclasses 6+ for a powered toy
    type roundabout having an article, e.g., aircraft, etc., supported thereon.


CLS 446/231
TXT Space vehicle or rocket:

    Device under subclass 230 comprising an imitative representation of either
    a spacecraft or an elongated craft or missile which is projected by a
    rocket engine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     for a rocket having a releasable parachute.

    225,    for an inflatable simulation of an aerial or space vehicle.


CLS 446/232
TXT Having means to rotate propeller or rotor: Device under subclass 230
    including a simulation of a rotating airfoil for propelling or supporting
    an aircraft, wherein motive power means or mechanical motion-transmitting
    means are provided for supplying power to rotate the airfoil.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37+,    for flying toy having means to rotate a propeller which furnishes
    lift.

    57+,    for a flying toy having a motor driven propeller.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), appropriate subclasses
    for an impeller or propeller, per se, or combined with a rotary drive,
    particular subclasses 120+ for plural impellers having independent supports.


CLS 446/233
TXT GYROSCOPE:

    Device under the class definition including a mass which is mounted to spin
    within a supporting structure which is freely rotatable or tiltable,
    wherein the entire device offers opposition to any torque that would change
    the direction of the axis of spin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 5+ for a gyroscope not
    associated with a toy.


CLS 446/234
TXT Having figure:

    Device under subclass 233 wherein the mass or its supporting structure is
    or has attached thereto a simulation of an animate being or portion thereof.


CLS 446/235
TXT Having detachable cord for spinning:

    Device under subclass 233 including a separable elongated pliant member for
    imparting rotation to the mass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261+,   for a top spun by a detachable cord.


CLS 446/236
TXT ROTATING OR HAVING VISIBLE ROTATING PORTION (E.G., SPINNING OR WHIRLING,
    NOT ROLLING):

    Device under the class definition wherein the method of operation is to
    impart successive uninterrupted revolutions to the device or a visible
    portion thereof about an axis.

    (1)     Note.  A device which rolls along a surface (e.g., wheeled) is not
    considered to be a "rotating" toy as defined above; nor is an exposed
    rotating element (e.g., gear, crank), the sole purpose of which is to drive
    another element.

    (2)     Note.  For untethered devices, the rotational axis must pass
    through the rotating portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30+,    for a tethered, fixed wing aircraft 26+, for a rotating toy worn or
    attached to the child.

    322+,   for jumping jack toys having a figure which is caused to swing or
    rotate sporadically about an axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclasses 1+ for a roundabout
    which carries a person or object along a circuitous path.


CLS 446/237
TXT On wheeled support:

    Device under subclass 236 wherein the visible revolving portion is mounted
    for rotation on a carriage having a rotatable ground-engaging element upon
    which the carriage may be rolled about.


CLS 446/238
TXT And having additional portion which reciprocates or oscillates, or which
    rotates about distinct axis:

    Device under subclass 237 including a second visible portion which is
    carried by the carriage and which either moves to-and-fro along a path, or
    revolves about an axis other than that about which the first visible
    portion revolves.


CLS 446/239
TXT Including corrugated support for imparting rotation:

    Device under subclass 236 including a member having a series of alternating
    ridges and grooves along a surface and which supports the  revolvable
    portion and causes its rotation through vibrations made by moving a second
    member along the ridges or grooves.


CLS 446/240
TXT Including unattached rod for manipulating toy:

    Device under subclass 236 comprising a separate elongated rigid element
    which is held by the child and with which the child imparts successive
    revolutions to the revolvable portion.


CLS 446/241
TXT Including helically grooved or twisted shaft for imparting rotation:

    Device under subclass 236 comprising an elongated element having helical
    convolutions about its longitudinal axis and which cooperates with
    structure on the revolving portion to impart successive revolutions thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for a flying toy having an airfoil which is rotated by using a
    helically grooved or twisted shaft.


CLS 446/242
TXT Including electric light or electric sounder:

    Device under subclass 236 provided with either means for converting
    electrical energy into visible radiation, or means for converting
    electrical energy into sound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 431+ for a motor
    operated display device having a light.


CLS 446/243
TXT Including markings producing visual effect (e.g., chromatic):

    Device under subclass 236 wherein the revolving portion is provided with a
    visible impression thereon which yields a distinctive appearance when the
    portion is rotated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, for a
    device which uses an optical element to produce a desired visual effect,
    and see subclasses 616+ for a kaleidoscope.

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclasses 57+ for an illusion
    device other than a toy.


CLS 446/244
TXT Thaumatropic effect:

    Device under subclass 243 including two discrete visual impressions which
    are present successively when the device or portion is rotated and which
    employ the memory of the eye to yield, an appearance which is a combination
    of the two impressions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, appropriate subclasses for a device which
    is structurally similar but creates an illusion of motion.  See
    particularly subclass 101 for picture drums.


CLS 446/245
TXT Cord impeller:

    Device under subclass 243 wherein the revolving portion is caused to rotate
    by an elongated flaccid member.

    (1)     Note.  The elongated pliant member is typically wrapped around the
    rotatable portion and then pulled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247+,   for a rotating toy which is rotated by an attached cord.

    261+,   for a top which is rotated by a separable cord.


CLS 446/246
TXT Including hand crank for imparting rotation:

    Device under subclass 236 including a shaft rotatable about its
    longitudinal axis for imparting successive revolutions to the device or
    portion, and provided with a handle extending radially or offset from the
    shaft to gain mechanical advantage to rotate the shaft.

    (1)     Note.  The shaft may be separate from, secured to, or formed on the
    revolvable portion.


CLS 446/247
TXT Having attached cord for imparting rotation:

    Device under subclass 236 including a elongated pliant member for imparting
    successive revolutions to the revolvable portion, and which is either
    permanently fastened to the removable portion or is temporarily fastened
    directly to the revolvable portion by a releasable fastener.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes tethered swingable toys.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30+,    for tethered toys in the form of fixed wing aircraft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 329-335 for a game of skill
    or competition which includes a tethered projectile.


CLS 446/248
TXT Wound about rotatable member:

    Device under subclass 247 wherein the elongated pliant member is encircled
    about the revolvable portion prior to imparting revolutions thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261+,   for a rotatable top spun by a wrapped cord.


CLS 446/249
TXT Including spring to rewind:

    Device under subclass 248 wherein the elongated pliant member is unwound as
    revolutions are imparted to the revolvable portion, and an elastically
    deformable element is provided for supplying a force to cause the pliant
    member to re-encircle the revolvable portion after it has unwound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for a rotating means for a rotary wing, and which includes a cord
    actuator and a rewinding spring.


CLS 446/250
TXT Bandalore:

    Device under subclass 248 in which the elongated pliant member is attached
    to the revolvable portion in such a manner as to automatically wind about
    the revolving portion after the revolving portion has been thrown, to
    thereby bring it back to the hand.


CLS 446/251
TXT Including sounder, figure, or vehicle:

    Device under Class 250 further comprising either (1) means specifically
    provided for generating sound, (2) a simulation of an animate being or
    portion thereof, or (3) a simulation of a conveyance for carrying or
    transporting something.


CLS 446/252
TXT Sounding:

    Device under subclass 248 including means for producing sound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258+,   for a sounding top spun by a separable cord.

    397+,   for other toy sounders, and see the search notes for that subclass
    for other related loci.


CLS 446/253
TXT Intertwistable flaccid strands:

    Device under subclass 247 including a plurality of elongated pliant lengths
    connected to the revolvable portion and which are alternately intertwined
    and then separated to impart revolutions to the revolvable portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    214,    for an air actuated sounder spun by intertwistable flaccid strands.


CLS 446/254
TXT Including sounding means:

    Device under subclass 253 including means specifically provided for
    generating sound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    214,    for a similar device having an air actuated sounder.

    397+,   for a mechanically operated toy sounder, and see the search notes
    to that subclass for related loci.


CLS 446/255
TXT Aerial (e.g., diabolo):

    Device under subclass 236 wherein the method of operation involves
    projecting the rotating device or portion through the air.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34+,    for devices having aerodynamically configured surfaces which
    support or retard the device as it flies or falls through the air,
    especially subclasses 46+ for a spinning disc.


CLS 446/256
TXT Top:

    Device under subclass 236 including a mass tapered down to a tip or carried
    on a central spindle having a tip on which the mass is caused to stand as
    it spins.


CLS 446/257
TXT Plural tops:

    Device under subclass 256 including a second discrete mass tapered down to
    a tip or carried on a central spindle having a tip on which the second mass
    is caused to stand as it spins.


CLS 446/258
TXT Including sounding means:

    Device under subclass 256 including means specifically provided for
    generating sound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213+,   for a spinning air actuated sounder.

    397+,   for other toy sounders, and see the search notes thereunder for
    other toy related loci.


CLS 446/259
TXT And means for spinning:

    Device under subclass 256 including discrete means by which a torque is
    applied to the mass to cause it to revolve rapidly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37+,    for means to rotate a rotary wing.


CLS 446/260
TXT Spring impeller:

    Device under subclass 259 wherein the discrete torque-applying means
    comprises an elastically deformable member which is deformed to store
    energy and then released to spin the rotatable part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for a spring impeller for a rotary wing toy.


CLS 446/261
TXT Cord impeller:

    Device under subclass 259 wherein the discrete torque-applying means
    comprises an elongated flaccid element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for a cord impeller for a rotary wing device.

    247+,   for a top having a cord impeller which either is permanently
    attached to the top, or is temporarily attached by an intermediate
    releasable fastener.


CLS 446/262
TXT Including holding means:

    Device under subclass 261 including a nonrotatable member or portion which
    is attached to or engageable with the rotatable part to steady the
    rotatable part when the elongated flaccid element is employed to spin it.


CLS 446/263
TXT Separable:

    Device under subclass 262 wherein the nonrotatable member or portion is
    disengageable from the rotatable part.


CLS 446/264
TXT Having special tip or spindle:

    Device under subclass 256 wherein significance is attributed to the
    structure or composition of either the tip of the mass or spindle, or a
    spindle itself.


CLS 446/265
TXT Sounding:

    Device under subclass 236 including means specifically provided for
    emitting sound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242,    for a rotating toy having an electric sounder.

    252,    for a sounding toy rotated by a cord attached thereto and wound
    about the toy.

    254,    for a sounding rotating toy rotated by attached intertwisted
    strands.

    258,    for a sounding top.

    397,    for other sounding toys, and see the search notes to that subclass
    for related loci.


CLS 446/266
TXT Handle-supported manually actuated rotating portion:

    Device under subclass 236 wherein the rotating visible portion is rotatably
    carried on a second portion which is adapted to be gripped and supported by
    the hand, wherein the rotating portion is caused to rotate by movement of
    the handgripped portion.


CLS 446/267
TXT HAVING ENCLOSED LIQUID:

    Device under the class definition including structure for surrounding a
    quantity of liquid which remains with the device throughout the operation
    thereof.


CLS 446/268
TXT FIGURE TOY OR ACCESSORY THEREFOR:

    Device under the class definition comprising a simulation of an animate
    being or portion thereof, or an adjunctive or subordinate object whose use
    is peculiar to such a simulation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for a sparking figure toy.

    72+,    for a figure toy convertible from, or which may serve as a diverse
    article.

    97+,    for a figure toy which is played with by assembling or
    disassembling its parts.

    139,    for a magnetic toy having figure or figure portion.

    147+,   for a two dimensional representation of an animate being associated
    with a card or book.

    156+,   for an aquatic toy including or representing an animate figure.

    167     and 169, for a figure toy moved by gravity fed material or elements.

    176+,   for a fluid operated figure toy.

    220+,   for an inflatable figure toy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, appropriate subclasses for doll apparel, per se.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclasses 2+ for decoys;
    and subclasses 42+ for artificial bait.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 66+ for mannikins.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 262+ for an educational
    device comprising a portion of the human anatomy.

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, for parts of figures and see the notes under the
    Class Definition.


CLS 446/269
TXT Rollable:

    Device under subclass 268 wherein the simulation or subordinate object
    either (1) has a generally rounded periphery whereby it may have rolling
    contact for travel along a surface, or (2) is supported on a generally
    round rotatable element on which it may be rolled for travel along a
    surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    431+,   for other rollable toys, and see the search note thereunder for
    other related loci.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 113+ for occupant propelled vehicles
    which simulate an animate being.

    901,    Robots, subcollection 1 for mobile reprogrammable robots.


CLS 446/270
TXT Having sounding means:

    Device under subclass 269 including means specifically provided for
    emitting sound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189,    for a wheeled figure toy having a wheel driven pneumatically
    operated sounder.

    397+,   for other sounding toys, especially subclasses 409+ for a sounding
    rolling toy without a figure, and see the search notes to subclass 397 for
    other related loci.


CLS 446/271
TXT Including resiliently recovering striking mechanism:

    Device under subclass 270 wherein the sound-emitting means comprises an
    element which is impacted against a receiving member, and an elastically
    deformable element or portion is provided which forces the element away
    from or toward the receiving member.


CLS 446/272
TXT And wheel-driven mechanism for moving figure or figure portion:

    Device under subclass 270 including a mechanical motion transmission means
    connecting a generally round rotatable ground-engaging element with the
    simulation for moving one part of the simulation with respect to another
    part, or for moving the simulation with respect to a wheeled support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238,    for a wheeled rotating figure.

    271,    for figures having wheel driven movable beaks combined with
    resiliently recovering sounding mechanisms.

    292,    for other rollable figure toys having a wheel-driven moving figure
    or figure portions, and see the search notes, thereunder for other related
    loci.

    330+,   for a moving figure toy, per se, and see the search notes to the
    subclass for related loci.


CLS 446/273
TXT Pivoted figure having center of gravity below pivot axis:

    Device under subclass 269 including means mounting the simulation to swing
    freely about a horizontal axis, and when the device is at rest, the center
    of mass of the simulation and any structure swingable therewith is located
    at a point lower than the horizontal axis.


CLS 446/274
TXT Including wheel-driven mechanism for moving figure portion:

    Device under subclass 273 including a mechanical motion transmitting means
    connecting a generally round rotatable ground-engaging element with the
    simulation for moving one part of the simulation with respect to another
    part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    292,    for other rollable figure toys having a wheel-driven moving figure
    or figure portion, and see the search notes thereunder for other related
    loci.


CLS 446/275
TXT Vehicle and external figure:

    Device under subclass 269 including a simulation of a conveyance for
    carrying or transporting something, wherein a simulation of an animate
    being is outside the simulation of a conveyance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 1.16+ for an occupant propelled vehicle
    and external figure.


CLS 446/276
TXT Having moving limb or foot to simulate walking:

    Device under subclass 275 wherein means are provided to move or to permit
    movement of a leg or a terminal part on which the animate being stands,
    concurrently with rolling movement of the device over a surface, thereby
    appearing as though the animate being is traveling by foot.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    377,    the residual locus for patents relating to the moving limbs or feet
    of walking figure toys, and see the search notes thereunder for other
    related loci.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 1.167 for an occupant propelled vehicle and
    an external figure with moving legs.


CLS 446/277
TXT By direct linkage to vehicle wheel or axle:
    Device under subclass 276 wherein the simulated conveyance includes a
    generally round rotatable element on which it may be rolled along a
    surface, and structure is provided which connects the leg or terminal part
    of a leg to the rotatable element or to a rod on or with which the round
    element rotates, whereby rotation of the round element or rod causes
    movement of the leg or terminal part.


CLS 446/278
TXT Elongate figure having writhing or undulating movement:

    Device under subclass 269 wherein the simulation represents an animate
    being whose length is many times greater than any lateral dimension and
    which moves along a surface by a squirming or wave-like motion of its body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    368,    for other figure toys in the form of a reptile.


CLS 446/279
TXT Figure mounted on wheeled support:

    Device under subclass 269 wherein the simulation is supported upon a
    discrete member which includes a generally round rotatable supporting
    element on which the member may be rolled along a surface.


CLS 446/280
TXT Including wheel-driven mechanism for moving figure or figure portion:

    Device under subclass 279 including a motion transmission means connecting
    a generally round rotatable ground-engaging element with the simulation for
    moving the simulation or a portion thereof with respect to the discrete
    supporting member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    292,    for other wheeled figure toys which include a wheel-driven
    mechanism for moving the figure or a portion thereof, and see the search
    notes thereunder for other related loci.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 113+ for occupant propelled figure
    vehicles having means to move the figure or portion thereof.


CLS 446/281
TXT Plural relatively moving figures:

    Device under subclass 280 including a second simulation of an animate being
    or portion thereof which is supported on the discrete member and is made to
    move with respect to the first simulation.


CLS 446/282
TXT Dependent movement or common component:

    Device under subclass 281 wherein the two simulations are directly related
    so that movement of one with respect to the supporting member effects
    movement of the other with respect to the supporting member, or wherein the
    motion transmission means moving each simulation have at least one discrete
    link in common.

    (1)     Note.  The common link must be other than the supporting wheel or
    axle, or structure rigid therewith.


CLS 446/283
TXT One figure mounted on another figure:

    Device under subclass 282 wherein one of the animate being simulations is
    entirely supported upon the other.


CLS 446/284
TXT Relatively moving portions of one figure:
    Device under subclass 282 wherein one of the simulations includes two
    parts, and connecting structure therebetween which allows relative movement
    between the two parts.


CLS 446/285
TXT Having moving limb or foot to simulate walking:

    Device under subclass 280 wherein means are provided to move or permit
    movement of a leg, or a terminal part on which the animate being stands,
    concurrently with rolling movement of the device over a surface, thereby
    appearing as though the animate being is traveling by foot.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    377,    the residual locus for patents relating to the moving limbs or feet
    of walking figure toys, and see the search notes thereunder for other
    related loci.


CLS 446/286
TXT Figure movement simulates propulsion of wheeled support:

    Device under subclass 280 wherein means are provided to move or permit
    movement of the simulation or a portion thereof with respect to the
    discrete supporting member as the device rolls over a surface, wherein the
    movement of the simulation or portion thereof appears to cause movement of
    the device over the surface.


CLS 446/287
TXT Movement about vertical axis or by bent support-wheel axle:

    Device under subclass 280 wherein either (1) the simulation or portion
    thereof moves about an axis substantially perpendicular to the surface over
    which the device is rolled, or (2) the motion transmission means includes
    an axially rotating rod with which the rotatable supporting element
    rotates, wherein the rod includes an angular portion offset from the
    rotational axis to supply motion to move the simulation or portion thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237+,   for a similar toy in which successive rotations are imparted to the
    figure on the wheeled support.


CLS 446/288
TXT Including means to move figure or figure portion with respect to wheeled
    support: Device under subclass 279 wherein means are provided for supplying
    power to move the simulation or a portion thereof with respect to the
    discrete supporting member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    292,    for a wheeled figure-toy which includes a wheel-driven mechanism
    for moving the figure or a portion thereof, and see the search notes
    thereunder for other related loci.


CLS 446/289
TXT Including axle through or within figure:
    Device under subclass 269 including a shaft or pin on or with which the
    simulation or rotatable element revolves as it rolls along a surface,
    wherein the rotational axis coincides with the shaft or pin, and passes
    through the simulation.

    (1)     Note.  The rotational axis need not pass through the simulation at
    all times for classification in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    901,    Robots, subcollection 1 for mobile reprogrammable robots.


CLS 446/290
TXT Front and rear axles:

    Device under subclass 289 wherein the shaft or pin mounts a first rotatable
    ground engaging element, and a second shaft or pin is provided on or with
    which a second rotatable ground-engaging element revolves, wherein one of
    the shafts or pins is displaced forwardly of the other shaft or pin, with
    respect to the direction of rolling movement of the device.


CLS 446/291
TXT More than two axles:

    Device under subclass 290 including a third shaft or pin on or with which a
    third rotatable supporting element revolves, and which is displaced
    forwardly or rearwardly of the first and second shafts or pins with respect
    to the direction of rolling movement of the device.


CLS 446/292
TXT Including wheel-driven mechanism for moving figure portion or accessory:

    Device under subclass 290 including motion transmitting means connecting
    one of the rotatable ground engaging elements and either a movable mounted
    body portion of the simulation or appurtenant structure worn or carried by
    the simulation, whereby the body portion or appurtenant structure is moved
    in response to rolling movement of the device over a surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238,    for a rotating figure on a wheeled support.

    272,    274 and 278+, for other rollable wheeled toys having a wheel-driven
    figure or figure portion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 113+ for an occupant propelled vehicle in
    the form of an animate being, especially subclasses 1.192+ and 1.201+ for
    those having a movable figure or figure part.


CLS 446/293
TXT For moving limb or foot to simulate walking:

    Device under subclass 292 wherein a leg or terminal part on which the
    animate being stands is moved in response to rolling movement of the device
    over a surface to give the appearance that the animate being is travelling
    by foot.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    377,    the residual locus for patents relating to the moving limbs or feet
    of walking figure toys, and see the search notes thereunder for other
    related loci.


CLS 446/294
TXT Having moving limb or foot to walk or simulate walking:

    Device under subclass 289 wherein means are provided to move or to permit
    movement of a leg, or a terminal part on which the animate being stands,
    concurrently with rolling movement of the device over a surface, thereby
    appearing as though the animate being is traveling by foot.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    377,    the residual locus for patents relating to the moving limbs or feet
    of walking figure toys, and see the search notes thereunder for other
    related loci.


CLS 446/295
TXT Having means to simulate respiration, heartbeat, body temperature, or
    specific symptom of illness:

    Device under subclass 268 including means for providing the simulation of
    an animate being with an imitative representation of either (1) the
    breathing function, (2) a pulsating heart, (3) heat generation from body
    metabolism, or (4) a manifestation of a disease or infection of the body.


CLS 446/296
TXT Having means for simulating personal toilet or medical activity or device
    therefor (e.g., bathing, hair care, etc.):

    Device under subclass 268 including means providing an imitative
    representation of a apparatus or precess by which an individual grooms or
    cares for itself or another.


CLS 446/297
TXT Having sounding means:

    Device under subclass 268 including means specifically provided for
    generating sound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184+,   for a figure toy having an air operated sounder actuated by
    squeezing the figure.

    190+,   for a moving figure toy having an operated sounder.

    270+,   for a wheeled figure toy having a sounder.

    397+,   for other sounding toys, and see the search notes to that subclass
    for other related loci.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 455+ for a changing
    exhibitor having sounding means.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclass 266 for an educational device
    which simulates body sounds.


CLS 446/298
TXT And internal mechanism to move figure portion:

    Device under subclass 297 including a mechanical motion transmission means
    enclosed by the simulation and powered by energy-transducing or-storing
    means, and which is connected to part of the simulation to move that part
    with respect to another part of the simulation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    353,    for a moving figure having intrinsic motive power means.


CLS 446/299
TXT Phonograph, tape, or wire:

    Device under subclass 298 wherein the sound is generated by an instrument
    which reproduces sound by means of the vibration of a stylus or needle
    following a groove or by means of electric pulses controlled by a magnetic
    pattern stored on a ribbon or thread.


CLS 446/300
TXT Head or head part movement:

    Device under subclass 298 wherein the part of the simulation that moves
    represents the upper or anterior division of a body that contains the
    brain, the chief sense organs, and the mouth, or a portion of such an upper
    or anterior division.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    338,    for a figure toy having a changeable facial feature and means to
    move the head.


CLS 446/301
TXT Eye, eyelid, or mouth movement:

    Device under subclass 300 wherein the part of the simulation that moves
    represents either (1) an organ of sight, (2) a movable lid of skin and
    muscle that can be closed over the eyeball, or (3) the opening through
    which food passes into the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272,    for wheeled figure toys having mouth movement accompanied by sound.

    329,    for a hand puppet having a movable jaw.

    337+,   for a figure toy having eye, eyelid, or mouth movement, per se.


CLS 446/302
TXT Phonograph, tape, or wire:

    Device under subclass 297 wherein the sound is generated by an instrument
    which reproduces sound by means of the vibration of a stylus or needle
    following a groove or by means of electric pulses controlled by a magnetic
    pattern stored on a ribbon or thread.


CLS 446/303
TXT And motive power means or hand crank:
    Device under subclass 297 including either (1) an energy-transducing or
    storing mechanism for providing power to operate the device, or (2) a shaft
    rotatable about its longitudinal axis and provided with a handle extending
    radially or offset from the shaft to gain mechanical advantage to rotate
    the shaft.


CLS 446/304
TXT Nursing, eating, or drinking:

    Device under subclass 268 including means for providing an imitative
    representation of the act of suckling or of ingesting food or liquid.


CLS 446/305
TXT And tearing or wetting:

    Device under subclass 304 wherein the simulation is provided with an
    opening or passageway through which material passes to exit from the
    simulation to simulate weeping or wetting.


CLS 446/306
TXT Tearing:

    Device under subclass 268 including an opening or passageway within or
    adjacent to a representation of an eye on the simulation through which a
    liquid is discharged to simulate weeping.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    190,    for a doll having tearing means as well as an air actuated sounder
    (e.g., "crying").


CLS 446/307
TXT Rope skipping:

    Device under subclass 268 wherein the simulation repetitively hops or steps
    or appears to repetitively hop or step over a revolving representation of
    jump rope.


CLS 446/308
TXT Leaping or projected figure or accessory:
    Device under subclass 268 including means for imparting an impulse to cause
    the simulation or adjunctive object to be impelled outwardly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176+,   for a pneumatically operated projector.

    429+,   for a vehicle launcher.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, for a centrifugally or mechanically
    operated device, per se, for projecting or launching a projectile into the
    air, which projectile may be a game projectile classified in Class 473.

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 108+ for an implement or
    mechanically operated device (either, per se, or in combination with
    another game component) for projecting a game projectile such that it
    travels upon a playing surface at all times in its course, and subclasses
    317+ for an implement or device for projecting or launching a game
    projectile into the air provided only that it is claimed in combination
    with at least one other game component.

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, (a) for a player held and powered
    implement, per se, for striking and thereby projecting or launching a game
    projectile into the air, (b) for a centrifugally or mechanically operated
    device for projecting or launching a game projectile into the air provided
    only that it is claimed in combination with at least one other game
    component, and (c) for an implement or mechanically operated device
    (either, per se, or in combination with another game component) for
    projecting a game projectile such that it travels upon a playing surface at
    all times in its course.


CLS 446/309
TXT Figure:

    Device under subclass 308 wherein the simulation is impelled outwardly.


CLS 446/310
TXT From within enclosure (e.g., "jack-in-the-box"):

    Device under subclass 309 including a receptacle which receives the
    simulation and from which it is to be impelled outwardly.


CLS 446/311
TXT Self-projecting:

    Device under subclass 309 wherein the simulation includes means for
    supplying the impulse by which it is impelled.


CLS 446/312
TXT By impulse from moving limb or foot:

    Device under subclass 311 wherein the impulse for impelling the simulation
    outwardly is supplied by movement of a leg, or of a terminal part on which
    the animate being stands.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198,    for a leaping figure actuated by squeezing a bulb.


CLS 446/313
TXT Animal and rider:

    Device under subclass 268 wherein a first simulation represents a lower
    animal as distinguished from man, and a second simulation of an animate
    being or portion thereof is provided which is supported upon the first
    simulation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    283,    for a wheeled figure toy comprising one figure mounted upon another
    figure.


CLS 446/314
TXT Including guide for ascending or descending figure:

    Device under subclass 268 including inclined or vertical structure which is
    adapted to be engaged by the simulation to constrain its movement to a
    particular path as the simulation goes up or down along the structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for similar toys, in which the guide is vibrated to cause movement
    of the figure there along.

    228,    for a toy which is suspended for travel below a guide or support.

    241,    for a figure which decends along and rotates about a helically
    grooved or twisted shaft.


CLS 446/315
TXT And flaccid element for supporting or moving figure:

    Device under subclass 314 including a length of nonself-sustaining pliant
    material from which the simulation is suspended as it moves up or down, or
    which is employed to move the simulation up or down.


CLS 446/316
TXT Constructed for walking down incline:

    Device under subclass 268 wherein the simulation includes a plurality of
    movably connected parts which represent legs or terminal portions on which
    the animate being stands, and which move in a manner that permits the
    simulation to travel down a sloped surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    364,    for walking figure toy which is drawn along a surface by a cord.

    377,    the residual locus for patents relating to the moving limbs or feet
    of walking figure toys, and see the search notes thereunder for other
    related loci.


CLS 446/317
TXT Including spring for returning limb or foot during walking:

    Device under subclass 268 including an elastically deformable element which
    is caused to deform upon movement of a leg or terminal part from a
    particular position, and which consequently exerts a force tending to
    return the leg or terminal part to that position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    337,    the residual locus for patents relating to the moving limbs or feet
    of walking figure toys, and see the search notes thereunder for related
    loci.

    353+,   for a figure toy having a spring motor for moving a portion of the
    figure.

    379,    for other figure toys having a resiliently biased joint (i.e.,
    joint retainer or return spring).


CLS 446/318
TXT Including musical instrument or simulation thereof:

    Device under subclass 268 including an adjunctive device used to produce
    music or a visual representation of such a device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176+,   for a figure having an air actuated sounder.

    297+,   for a figure having a sounder other than an air actuated one.


CLS 446/319
TXT Variable length hair:

    Device under subclass 268 including an elongated threadlike element
    protruding from the surface of the simulation and intended to represent a
    hair of the animate being, wherein means are provided which permit the
    element to be extended or retracted from the surface.


CLS 446/320
TXT Enlargeable or elongatable figure or figure portion:

    Device under subclass 268 wherein the simulation or a portion thereof is
    formed of a material or is constructed to enable it to increase or appear
    to increase in dimension or size.


CLS 446/321
TXT Having selectively displayed alternative faces, limbs, or bodies:

    Device under subclass 268 including a plurality of distinct interconnected
    representations of major anatomical portions, any one of which may be
    presented to change the appearance of the simulation.

    (1)     Note.  The distinct representations may be mere surfaces on
    opposite sides of the figure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99+,    for a construction toy whose parts can be selectively arranged to
    yield different figures by disassembling and then reassembling the parts.

    337+,   for a figure toy whose facial appearance may be changed by
    substituting or altering a specific feature of the face.


CLS 446/322
TXT Seesawing or swinging (e.g., "jumping jack"):

    Device under subclass 268 including either (1) an elongated member
    fulcrumed at its middle and having a simulation mounted or resting on
    either end for up and down movement about the fulcrum, or (2) means for
    suspending the simulation for movement about an axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclasses 106+ for a full size
    seesaw and subclasses 118+ for a full size swing appropriate therefor.


CLS 446/323
TXT Including flaccid support or actuator for figure:

    Device under subclass 322 including a length of nonself-sustaining pliant
    material which is employed either to suspend the simulation for movement
    about the axis, or to transmit motion from a motor or hand to move the
    simulation about the axis.


CLS 446/324
TXT Tumbling:

    Device under subclass 268 wherein simulation is constructed specifically
    for the purpose of turning end over end on a supporting surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168+,   for gravity operated tumbling figures.

    267,    for tumbling toys actuated by an enclosed liquid.

    309+,   for a projected figure which flips end over end in the air.


CLS 446/325
TXT Balanced or self-righting:

    Device under subclass 268 having its mass distributed in such a manner as
    to cause the simulation or supporting structure therefor to return to its
    original attitude after it has been tilted from that attitude.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273+,   for a wheeled self-righting figure toy.

    396,    for other balancing or self-righting toys.


CLS 446/326
TXT Having relatively movable sections on balanced or self-righting portion:

    Device under subclass 325 wherein the portion which returns to its original
    attitude after it has been tilted from that attitude includes two discrete
    parts which are connected or relatively arranged to allow relative movement
    between the parts, in addition to the tilting or righting movement.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, balancing figure toys
    having adjustable weights.


CLS 446/327
TXT Having hand or finger-accommodating means in figure:

    Device under subclass 268 wherein the simulation is provided with means
    specifically adapted to receive a hand or finger of a person playing with
    the device, whereby the hand or finger or a portion thereof is within the
    simulation.


CLS 446/328
TXT Hand or finger forms visible part of figure:

    Device under subclass 327 wherein a portion of the user's hand or finger is
    employed as a visual representation of the animate being or portion thereof.


CLS 446/329
TXT And movable jaw:

    Device under subclass 327 wherein parts representing the upper and lower
    portions of the mouth are relatively movable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301,    for a figure toy having a sounder as well as a movable jaw.


CLS 446/330
TXT Having mechanism or manipulatable means to move figure or figure portion:

    Device under subclass 268 including a motor or a hand-actuated motion
    transmitting means to move the simulation or a part of the simulation with
    respect to another part.

    (1)     Note.  A spring or elastomeric member is considered to be a "motor"
    for purposes of this definition.

    (2)     Note.  The motion transmitting means may operatively connect one
    body portion to another body portion, whereby movement of one of the body
    portions causes movement of the other body portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8+,     for a toy money box having a moving figure.

    83+,    for toy theater and movable figure.

    149+,   for a card having a movable picture (figure) portion.

    156+,   for an aquatic toy having a moving figure.

    167,    for a figure moved by gravity fed fluent material.

    169,    for a figure moved by a gravity fed element.

    176+,   for a figure moved by a moving fluid.

    236+,   for a toy having a rotating figure.

    269+,   for a rollable toy having a moving figure.

    298+,   for a moving figure having sounding  means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 411+ for a movable
    figure display device.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclass 87 for animation devices used to
    create motion pictures.


CLS 446/331
TXT Base-mounted figure and button-controlled flaccid element to move figure or
    figure portion:

    Device under subclass 330 including structure below and supporting the
    simulation, and an elongated member of nonself-sustaining pliant material
    connecting the simulation or a portion thereof to a finger-actuated key on
    the supporting structure adapted to be pushed by a person to move the
    simulation or one part of the simulation with respect to another part.


CLS 446/332
TXT Figure movable along endless path:

    Device under subclass 330 including means forming a closed circuit and
    which causes the simulation to travel therealong.


CLS 446/333
TXT Kicking:

    Device under subclass 330 means to move or permit movement of leg or foot
    of the simulation in a specific manner to appear as though the simulation
    is striking outwardly or at something with its leg or foot.


CLS 446/334
TXT Fighting:

    Device under subclass 330 including means to move or permit movement of the
    simulation or a portion thereof in a specific manner to appear as though
    the simulation is contending in physical combat.


CLS 446/335
TXT Including motive power means or hand crank: Device under subclass 334
    including mechanical means for moving the simulation or a portion thereof
    to simulate physical combat, and either (1) energy-transducing or storing
    means for supplying power to said mechanical means, or (2) a shaft
    rotatable about its longitudinal axis and provided with a handle extending
    radially or offset from the shaft to gain mechanical advantage to rotate
    the shaft and thereby supply power to said mechanical means.

    (1)     Note.  While toy figures having spring motors are included in this
    subclass, figures having springs which merely return a body portion when
    moved from a neutral position are not classified here on that basis.


CLS 446/336
TXT Striking:

    Device under subclass 330 including means to move or to permit movement of
    the simulation or a portion thereof in a specific manner to appear as
    though the simulation is delivering a blow to something.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334+,   for a figure toy which delivers a blow to another figure.


CLS 446/337
TXT Having changeable facial feature:

    Device under subclass 330 wherein the front part of the head of the
    simulation, including the chin, mouth, nose, cheeks, eyes and forehead,
    includes a portion which is movable with respect to the remainder to change
    the appearance of the front part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    for a figure toy having facial features changeable by removing or
    applying portions of the face.

    321,    for a figure toy having selectively displayed faces.


CLS 446/338
TXT And means to move or manipulate head:

    Device under subclass 337 including mechanical motion transmitting means
    connecting either the source of power or hand-engageable means to the head
    of the simulation to move the same with respect to the remainder of the
    body.


CLS 446/339
TXT Changeable by hand-manipulatable means: Device under subclass 337 including
    hand engageable means for manually moving the movable portion of the face.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151,    for a two-dimensional figure on a card having a portion movable by
    a hand manipulatable actuator.


CLS 446/340
TXT Manipulatable means is different body portion:

    Device under subclass 339 wherein the hand-engageable means for moving the
    facial portion comprises an area or part on the body represented by the
    simulation other than the facial portion itself.


CLS 446/341
TXT Including changeable eye:

    Device under subclass 339 wherein the movable portion of the front part of
    the head represents an eyeball, eyelid, eyebrow or eye opening.


CLS 446/342
TXT Movable eyelid:

    Device under subclass 337 wherein the movable portion of the front part of
    the head represents a movable lid of skin and muscle that can be moved with
    respect to the eyeball.

    (1)     Note.  The representation of the movable lid must be separate from
    the eyeball itself.


CLS 446/343
TXT Movable eye:

    Device under subclass 337 wherein the movable portion of the front part of
    the head represents an organ of sight.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    339+,   for a figure toy having a hand manipulator for moving the eyes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclass 271 for an educational device
    which represents the human eye.


CLS 446/344
TXT Universally movable:

    Device under subclass 343 wherein the representation of an organ of sight
    is movable about a plurality of different axes.


CLS 446/345
TXT About horizontal axis:

    Device under subclass 343 wherein the representation of the organ of sight
    is rotatable about an axis which is perpendicular to a plane which bisects
    the head into left and right halves.


CLS 446/346
TXT Independently movable eyes:

    Device under subclass 345 including a plurality of movable portions, each
    of which represents an organ of site, wherein movement of each organ is not
    contingent upon movement of another.


CLS 446/347
TXT Incrementally closed by rocking figure:
    Device under subclass 345 including means to rotate or to permit rotation
    of the eye, step by step, from position wherein the eye appears open, to a
    position at which it appears closed, wherein each rotational step is caused
    by back and forth movement of the simulation.


CLS 446/348
TXT Having end-mounted axle, or relatively pivoted or sliding anchoring
    portions: Device under subclass 345 which either (1) includes a pin or
    shaft on or with which the eye is rotatable, and which is fastened at its
    distal end to the head of the simulation, or (2) is provided with two
    relatively movable parts which engage the head of the simulation to secure
    the eye thereto, wherein the relatively moving parts are connected by
    structure which allows swinging or guided translational movement between
    the parts.


CLS 446/349
TXT Having lock or drag for eye movement, or having spring acting against axle
    in slot: Device under subclass 345 including either (1) means for
    selectively preventing rotation of the eye about an axis, (2) means
    specifically provided for supplying resistance to rotation of the eye about
    an axis, or (3) an elastically deformable member located such that when
    deformed it applies a force against a pin or shaft on or with which the eye
    rotates.

    (1)     Note.  An axle retaining clip which applies opposing forces on
    either side of the axle is not included in this subclass.


CLS 446/350
TXT Adjustable eye spacing:

    Device under subclass 345 including a second representation of an organ of
    sight and structure connecting the two representations which permits the
    distance between the two to be varied.


CLS 446/351
TXT Operated by movably mounted weight:

    Device under subclass 330 wherein the simulation or a portion thereof is
    caused to move by a mass which is suspended therefrom or constrained to
    move in a particular manner with respect to the simulation or portion
    thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    315,    for a figure movable up or down a guide and including a weight for
    moving the figure.


CLS 446/352
TXT Including motive-power means or hand-crank mechanism:

    Device under subclass 330 including either (1) an energy-transducing or
    storing mechanism for providing power to move the simulation or portion
    thereof, or (2) a shaft rotatable about its longitudinal axis and provided
    with a handle extending radially or offset from the shaft to gain
    mechanical advantage to rotate the shaft which provides power to move the
    simulation or portion thereof.

    (1)     Note.  While toy figures having spring motors are included in this
    subclass, figures having springs which merely return a body portion when
    moved from a neutral position are not classified here on that basis.

    (2)     Note.  Numerous patents to motor driven figures have not been
    cross-referenced here, but may be found in the specific subclasses above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for a toy operated by an intrinsic temperature change.

    90,     for a construction toy having a motor.

    167,    for a figure moved by a stream of gravity fed fluent material.

    169,    for a figure moved by a rolling, tumbling or falling element.

    176+,   for a figure moved by a pressure fluid.

    236+,   for a rotating or spinning figure.

    288,    for a motor driven figure on a wheeled support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    901,    Robots, subcollection 1 for mobile reprogrammable robots.


CLS 446/353
TXT Motive-power means intrinsic to figure:
    Device under subclass 352 wherein the energy-transducing or-storing means
    is located inside the simulation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158,    for an aquatic toy including a figure having a motor therein for
    moving the figure or a portion thereof.

    298,    for a sounding figure toy having an internal mechanism to move a
    figure portion.

    311+,   for a leaping figure toy having an internal motive power means.


CLS 446/354
TXT Human figure having movably attached arm or leg portion moved by motive
    power means: Device under subclass 353 wherein the energy-transducing or
    storing means provides power to move a portion of the simulation which
    represents a limb of a body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333,    for a kicking figure toy.

    335,    for a fighting figure toy.

    336,    for a figure which appears to deliver a blow to something.


CLS 446/355
TXT Walking:

    Device under subclass 354 wherein the simulation is provided with a movable
    leg or terminal part upon which the animate being stands, and the energy
    transducing or storage means, or the shaft, supplies power to move the leg
    or terminal part to appear as though the animate being is travelling by
    foot.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    377,    the residual locus for patents relating to the moving limbs or feet
    of walking figure toys, and see the search notes thereunder for other
    related loci.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 8.1+ for a full size motor vehicle
    propelled by moving legs (i.e., stepper).


CLS 446/356
TXT Four moving supporting limbs or feet:
    Device under subclass 353 wherein the simulation is provided with four
    movable legs or terminal parts, all of which are moved relative to the body
    of the simulation by power supplied by the energy-transducing or-storing
    means, or the shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    377,    the residual locus for patents relating to the moving limbs or feet
    of walking figure toys, and see the search notes thereunder for other
    related loci.


CLS 446/357
TXT Plural relatively moving figures:

    Device under subclass 352 including a plurality of discrete simulations,
    wherein each simulation or a portion thereof is movable with respect to
    another simulation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281+,   for plural relatively moving figures on a wheeled support.

    334+,   for plural figures which move relatively in a manner to appear as
    though they are fighting.


CLS 446/358
TXT Including extrinsic electric or wind-up motor:

    Device under subclass 352 including motive power means external to the
    simulation and comprising either (1) means for converting electrical energy
    into mechanical movement, or (2) a resiliently deformable member which is
    deformed to store energy by rotating a hand-engageable portion, wherein the
    energy is subsequently released to move the simulation or portion thereof.


CLS 446/359
TXT Including support or manipulator extrinsic to figure (e.g., marionette):

    Device under subclass 330 including means outside the simulation which
    either sustains the simulation against gravity, or serves to transmit
    motion from the user's hand to the simulation or portion thereof, wherein
    the supporting or motion-transmitting means does not represent part of the
    animate being.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes figures having a support or
    manipulator of which only a portion is outside the figure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    339+,   for a figure having an external manipulator for moving the eyes.


CLS 446/360
TXT Relatively movable striking platform:

    Device under subclass 359 including a member presenting a surface beneath
    the simulation, wherein means are provided to move the member in a manner
    which causes movement of the simulation or portion thereof through impact
    between the surface and the simulation

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for a figure combined with a vibrating or horizontally
    reciprocating support over which the figure travels.

    358,    for a figure combined with a motor driven platform for striking the
    figure.


CLS 446/361
TXT Flaccid support or manipulator:

    Device under subclass 359 wherein the means outside the simulation which
    either sustains it against gravity or transmits motion from the user's hand
    to the simulation comprises a length of nonself-sustaining pliant material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331,    for a base mounted figure and a button controlled cord for moving
    the figure or a portion thereof.


CLS 446/362
TXT Plural flaccid elements to manipulate plural body parts:

    Device under subclass 361 including a plurality of lengths of
    nonself-sustaining pliant material, each of which is connected to a
    different part of the simulation and which serves to transmit motion to
    move the respective part.


CLS 446/363
TXT Hand-held overhead support for flaccid elements:

    Device under subclass 362 wherein each of the lengths of pliant material is
    also connected to or passes through a common member which is adapted to be
    supported by the user's hand above the simulation and which is manipulated
    to cause movement of the simulation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     for a toy theater including a marionette.


CLS 446/364
TXT For drawing figure along surface:

    Device under subclass 361 wherein the length of pliant material is employed
    to pull the simulation across a surface.

    (1)     Note.  For proper classification in this subclass, a component of
    the pulling force must be in the direction of motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    316,    for a figure toy adapted to walk down an incline.


CLS 446/365
TXT Resiliently biased body portion:

    Device under subclass 359 including a member or portion which is deformed
    elastically upon movement of one part of the simulation from a particular
    position with respect to another part, and consequently exerts a force
    tending to return the part to that position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    317,    for a figure toy having a spring for returning a limb or foot
    during walking.

    379+,   for a resiliently biased joint feature, per se.


CLS 446/366
TXT Rod-supported or -controlled figure:

    Device under subclass 359 wherein the means outside the simulation which
    either sustains it against gravity or transmits motion from the user's hand
    to the simulation comprises an elongated pole or bar of relatively rigid
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    352+,   for a rod supported or -controlled figure driven by a motor or
    hand-crank.


CLS 446/367
TXT Plural rods for manipulating plural body parts:

    Device under subclass 366 including a plurality of poles or bars of
    relatively rigid material, each of which is connected to a different body
    part of the simulation, and which serves to transmit motion to move the
    respective part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     for a toy theater to be used in conjunction with or including a
    marionette.


CLS 446/368
TXT Reptile:

    Device under subclass 268 wherein the simulation represents an animal of
    the class for  air-breathing vertebrates that crawl or move on their belly,
    or on small short legs.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are simulations of alligators,
    crocodiles, lizards, snakes, turtles, and extinct related forms such as
    dinosaurs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278,    for an elongated wheeled figure toy (e.g., snake, worm) having
    writhing or undulating movement.


CLS 446/369
TXT Fabric-covered stuffed figure:

    Device under subclass 268 wherein the simulation includes an outer layer of
    woven sheet material distended by a filling of either fluent or
    compressible solid material.


CLS 446/370
TXT Having enclosed reinforcing or skeletal portion:

    Device under subclass 369 including a member formed of a relatively rigid
    material located inside the simulation and which lends structural support
    to the simulation or a portion thereof.


CLS 446/371
TXT Including hinge feature connecting parts:
    Device under subclass 369 provided with a specific connection between two
    body portions of the simulation which allows one portion to pivot about the
    connection relative to the other portion.


CLS 446/372
TXT Including facial or hair feature:

    Device under subclass 369 wherein significance is attributed to the
    structure of that part of the simulation which represents the front part of
    the head, including the chin, mouth, nose, cheeks, eyes, and forehead, or
    elongated thread-like element protruding from the surface of the simulation
    and intended to represent hair.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    319,    for a figure toy having variable length hair.

    321,    for a figure toy having alternatively displayed faces.

    337+,   for a figure toy having a changeable facial feature.

    391+,   for other facial or hair features.


CLS 446/373
TXT Having enclosed reinforcing or skeletal portion:

    Device under subclass 268 wherein the simulation is provided with a
    discrete internal member which leads structural support to a body formed of
    either a less rigid material or of spaced portions of a dissimilar material.


CLS 446/374
TXT Of nonrecovering bendable material:

    Device under subclass 373 wherein the discrete internal member is formed
    from a plastically deformable material and is readily deformed manually to
    change the appearance of the simulation.


CLS 446/375
TXT Including pivoted joint:

    Device under subclass 373 wherein a first portion of the discrete internal
    member is swingable connected to a second portion for movement about an
    axis passing through the connection.


CLS 446/376
TXT Having movably joined body parts:

    Device under subclass 268 wherein a first portion of the simulation which
    represents a distinct anatomical part is connected to a second portion
    representing a second distinct anatomical part and wherein structure
    connecting the two portions allows relative movement between the two
    portions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 52+ for articulated members.

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, for similar devices primarily intended for
    missing of human body.


CLS 446/377
TXT Walking:

    Device under subclass 376 including a movable leg or terminal portion on
    which the animate being stands, wherein the motor or leg or terminal
    portion moves in a manner to appear as though the simulation were
    travelling by foot.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    276+,   for a toy vehicle and an external walking figure.

    285,    for a wheel actuated moving figure mounted upon a wheeled support
    and which appears to walking.

    293     and 294, for a wheeled figure toy having moving limbs to simulate
    walking.

    316,    for a figure toy constructed for walking down an incline.

    317,    for a figure toy having spring for returning a limb or foot during
    walking.

    355     and 356, for walking figure toy powered by an intrinsic motor.

    360+,   for a marionette, or a walking figurepulled along a surface by an
    attached cord.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 1.181+ for an occupant ridden and
    propelled vehicle which represents an animate being and has moving legs to
    simulate walking.


CLS 446/378
TXT And locking means for retaining body parts in adjusted position:

    Device under subclass 376 including distinct means for selectively holding
    the two portions in a fixed relative position or releasing them for
    relative movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 83+ for articulated members
    lockable at fixed positions.


CLS 446/379
TXT Including separate resilient member:

    Device under subclass 376 wherein the structure connecting the two distinct
    portions of the simulation includes a discrete member which is elastically
    deformed either upon assembly or upon relative movement between the two
    portions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    317+,   for a walking figure toy having a spring for returning a limb or
    foot during walking.

    353+,   for figures wherein the resilient member is employed as a motive
    power means to move a figure part, rather than a mere return spring.


CLS 446/380
TXT Elastomeric member:

    Device under subclass 379 wherein the discrete connecting member is formed
    of rubber or of a substance which exhibits similar stretch characteristics.


CLS 446/381
TXT For joint allowing movement about plural axes:

    Device under subclass 379 wherein the connecting structure between the two
    distinct portions of the simulation permits one portion to be rotated
    relative to the other portion about any one of a plurality of different
    axes of rotation.


CLS 446/382
TXT By bendable or pliant material connecting parts:

    Device under subclass 376 wherein the structure connecting the two portions
    which allows relative movement consists of a material which is readily
    deformed to allow the movement.


CLS 446/383
TXT Including joint allowing movement about plural axes:

    Device under subclass 376 wherein the structure connecting the two portions
    of the simulation permits one portion to be rotated relative to the other
    portion about any one of a plurality of different axes of rotation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 53+ for articulated members
    having plural distinct articulated axes.


CLS 446/384
TXT Swivelled head:

    Device under subclass 376 wherein one of the relatively moving distinct
    anatomical parts represents the upper or anterior division of the body that
    contains the brain, the chief sense organs and the mouth, and the
    connecting structure permits pivotal movement of that part about an axis
    passing from the connecting structure through the top of the upper or
    anterior division.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300,    for a sounding figure toy having means to move the head.

    338,    for a figure toy having a changeable facial feature and means to
    move or manipulate the head.


CLS 446/385
TXT Formed from specific material:

    Device under subclass 268 wherein significance is attributed to the
    particular type of material from which the simulation or adjunctive object
    is formed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    369+,   for a fabric covered stuffed figure toy.


CLS 446/386
TXT Edible material:

    Device under subclass 385 wherein the simulation or adjunctive object is
    formed from a substance adapted to be eaten by a human being or an animal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclass 104 for a edible product in the form of a toy and see the search
    notes to that subclass definition for the line with Class 446.


CLS 446/387
TXT Sheet material figure (e.g., paper doll):

    Device under subclass 385 wherein the simulation comprises a section of
    material that is thin in comparison to its length and breadth and having an
    outlined representing that of the animate being.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98,     for a sheet material figure having attachable and removable clothes.


CLS 446/388
TXT Three-dimensional folded figure:

    Device under subclass 387 wherein one portion of the thin material is
    adapted to be bent along a line toward an adjacent portion to thereby form
    a simulation or portion thereof having length, width, and depth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    488,    for other toys formed by folding sheet material.


CLS 446/389
TXT Eye:

    Device under subclass 385 wherein significance is attributed to the
    particular type of material forming a representation of an organ of sight.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is intended to include features of eye
    sockets, eyelids, and eyelashes, per se, but not of eyebrows.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    392,    for structural features of doll eyes, and see the search notes
    thereunder for related loci.


CLS 446/390
TXT Limb, hand, or foot:

    Device under subclass 268 wherein significance is attributed to the part of
    the simulation representing a leg, arm, or the terminal portion of a leg or
    arm.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, for similar devices primarily intended for
    missing of human body.


CLS 446/391
TXT Head:

    Device under subclass 268 wherein significance is attributed to the part of
    the simulation which represents the upper or anterior division of the body
    that contains the brain, the chief sense organs and the mouth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    372,    for a facial or hair feature of a fabric covered stuffed figure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclass 270 for an educational device
    which represents all or a portion of the human head.


CLS 446/392
TXT Eye:

    Device under subclass 391 wherein significance is attributed to a
    representation of an organ of sight.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is intended to include features of eye
    sockets, eyelids and eyelashes, but not of eyebrows, per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    343,    for an eye and mounting structure which permits movement thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclass 271 for an educational device
    which represents the human eye.

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, subclasses 4+ for artificial eyes for use in a
    living human body.


CLS 446/393
TXT Eyelash:

    Device under subclass 392 including an elongated thread-like element which
    represents a hair edging the eyelid.


CLS 446/394
TXT Having hair:

    Device under subclass 391 including an elongated thread-like element
    protruding from the head of the simulation and intended to represent hair.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    296,    for a figure toy combined with means simulating a personal toilet
    activity or device, such as hair grooming.

    319,    for a figure toy having variable length hair.

    372,    for a fabric covered stuffed figure toy having hair on its head.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 53+ for a wig for use on a human head.


CLS 446/395
TXT Mouth feature:

    Device under subclass 391 wherein significance is attributed to the area of
    a representation of the opening through which food passes into the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    190+    and 301, for a talking figure toy having mouth movement.


CLS 446/396
TXT BALANCED OR SELF-RIGHTING (E.G., ROCKING):

    Device under the class definition the mass of which is distributed in such
    a manner as to cause the device or a portion thereof to return to a
    particular attitude after it has been tilted from that attitude.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228+,   for a toy comprising a balanced portion suspended for travel below
    a guide or support.

    273+,   for a self-righting wheeled figure toy.

    315,    for a figure toy balanced upon a flaccid element for movement
    therewith or therealong.

    325,    for balancing or self-righting figure toys.


CLS 446/397
TXT SOUNDING:

    Device under the class definition including means specifically provided for
    generating sound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     for a sounding toy which is converted from, or may serve as, a
    diverse article or device.

    141,    for toy telephone having a voice feature.

    143,    for a sounding toy having a simulated keyboard.

    176+,   for a fluid operated sounder.

    236+,   for a rotating sounding toy.

    270+,   for a rollable figure toy having a sounder.

    297+,   for a figure toy having sounder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 455+ for a changing
    exhibitor with sound.

    84,     Music, appropriate subclasses for a toy sounding instrument used to
    produce music.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclasses for mechanical
    signals, including alarms.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 384.1+ for audible electric
    signals, such as bells, gongs, whistles, sirens and horns.

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, subclasses 9 for artificial larynxes for use in a
    living human body.


CLS 446/398
TXT Detonating:

    Device under subclass 397 including means for causing a charge of
    fulminating material to explode.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, appropriate subclasses for a missile,
    blasting device, pyrotechnic, gun ammunition, or miscellaneous explosive
    device.  See subclass 281 for explosive caps for toys.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 23, 83 and 87+ for a detonating
    signal or alarm.

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclasses 53 and 56 for an
    amusement device for perpetrating a practical joke or an initiation
    ceremony, which produces an unexpected noise.


CLS 446/399
TXT Including projecting means:

    Device under subclass 398 wherein means are provided for impelling
    outwardly a portion of the device.

    (1)     Note.  The projecting means usually comprises the fulminating
    charge. However, a mechanical projector may be found herein when the device
    includes an additional feature (e.g., Class 446 sounder) which precludes
    classification in Class 124, Mechanical Guns and Projectors, subclass 2.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, subclass 2 for a mechanically
    operated device for throwing or impelling a projectile and combined with a
    cap exploder.

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 108+ for an implement or
    mechanically operated device (either, per se, or in combination with
    another game component) for projecting a game projectile such that it
    travels upon a playing surface at all times in its course, and subclasses
    317+ for an implement or device for projecting or launching a game
    projectile into the air provided only that it is claimed in combination
    with at least one other game component.

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, (a) for a player held and powered
    implement, per se, for striking and thereby projecting or launching a game
    projectile into the air, (b) for a centrifugally or mechanically operated
    device for projecting or launching a game projectile into the air provided
    only that it is claimed in combination with at least one other game
    component, and (c) for an implement or mechanically operated device
    (either, per se, or in combination with another game component) for
    projecting a game projectile such that it travels upon a playing surface at
    all times in its course.


CLS 446/400
TXT Projectile:

    Device under subclass 398 wherein means are provided to explode the charge
    by throwing the device through the air.

    (1)     Note.  The charge may be exploded as a result of the throwing
    motion itself, or by the consequent impact.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, appropriate subclasses for pyrotechnics
    and exploding or explosively propelled projectiles.

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, subclass 571 for a game projectile
    having sound producing means.


CLS 446/401
TXT Simulated weapon:

    Device under subclass 398 comprising an imitative representation of an
    instrument of offensive or defensive combat.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include cap pistols.  See search
    notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    473,    for a simulated weapon without a sounder, and see the search notes
    in the subclass definition for related loci.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, subclasses 54+ for a detonating toy firearm such as a cap
    pistol.


CLS 446/402
TXT Cane or rod thrust longitudinally against surface:

    Device under subclass 398 wherein the charge exploding means is carried by
    an elongated relatively rigid member, wherein the charge is exploded by
    striking the end of the member against a surface in the direction of its
    longitudinal axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, subclass 52 for a cane gun.


CLS 446/403
TXT Including magazine:

    Device under subclass 402 including a supply for a plurality of charges,
    and means for successively feeding the charges to the exploding means.


CLS 446/404
TXT With means facilitating combination with diverse art device:

    Device under subclass 397 including means for attaching or engaging the
    sound-generating means with an article other than a toy.


CLS 446/405
TXT Having simulated weapon feature coordinated with sound:

    Device under subclass 397 comprising an imitative representation of an
    instrument of offensive or defensive combat, wherein the sound is generated
    while simulating the operation of the instrument.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    473,    for other toy weapons, and see the search notes under that subclass
    definition for related loci.


CLS 446/406
TXT Including finger trigger for sounder:

    Device under subclass 405 comprising a button or pivoted lever adapted to
    be operated by a finger on a hand grasping the instrument to cause the
    sound to be produced.


CLS 446/407
TXT Single report:

    Device under subclass 406 wherein the sound generating means issues a
    single sharp noise each time the trigger is operated and released.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401,    for a detonating toy shaped to simulate a weapon.


CLS 446/408
TXT Simulated musical instrument, radio, camera, or television device:

    Device under subclass 397 comprising an imitative representation of either
    (1) a device to be played by an individual to produce music, (2) a device
    which either receives or transmits electromagnetic wave energy and converts
    the energy into sound, or visa versa, (3) a device for taking photographs,
    or (4) a device for receiving coded electrical information and converting
    it into a visual image on a screen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143,    for a toy keyboard instrument.

    202+,   for a toy horn, whistle or siren.

    318,    for a figure having a simulated musical instrument.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, subclasses 1+ for musical instrument, i.e., sound producing
    devices which may be manipulated by an operator to produce music.  Class
    446 will take devices which are capable of producing different tones, but
    are not intended to produce music.


CLS 446/409
TXT Including rolling or tumbling toy:

    Device under subclass 397 at least a portion of which is specifically
    adapted to have rolling contact with or to turn end over end along a
    supporting surface, or is supported upon a generally round rotatable
    element on which it may be rolled along a surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270+,   for a figure wheeled sounding toy.

    431+,   for other toy wheeled vehicles, and see the search notes thereunder
    for other loci.


CLS 446/410
TXT Toy locomotive:

    Device under subclass 409 comprising an imitative representative of a
    self-propelled railway vehicle used for moving other railroad cars.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    467,    for a railroad locomotive simulating toy, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 26.1+ for a toy locomotive
    wherein all claimed structure is suitable for a full scale device.


CLS 446/411
TXT And rod, cable or tether as guide means:
    Device under subclass 409 including an elongated member connected or
    engageable at one end to a rollable portion of the device and by which the
    rollable portion is constrained to move at a distance or about a radius
    determined by the length of the elongated member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    450+,   for similar rolling toys without sounders.


CLS 446/412
TXT Guide means secured centrally of wheel:
    Device under subclass 411 wherein the elongated member is attached to the
    rollable portion at a point lying on the rotational axis of the rollable
    portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    452+,   for similar rolling toys without sounders.


CLS 446/413
TXT Including wheel-carried strikers for impacting nonrotating portion:

    Device under subclass 412 wherein the rotating portion is provided with a
    plurality of elements adapted to contact one or more cooperating elements
    which are fixed with respect to the elongated member, to produce the sound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    420,    for a ratchet-actuated sounder, per se.


CLS 446/414
TXT Having belt-carried or rotary striker on vehicle:

    Device under subclass 409 comprising a wheeled toy having a rotatable
    member or a projection on the surface of a continuous band of pliant
    material for impacting against a cooperating portion as the member or band
    rotates, whereby a sound is produced.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    418+,   for a sounder comprising a rotary striker, per se.


CLS 446/415
TXT Snapping sheet member (e.g., cricket):
    Device under subclass 397 wherein the sound generating means comprises a
    portion of relatively rigid spring material which is thin in comparison to
    its length and breadth, wherein a sharp sound is produced when a section of
    the spring material snaps back after being displaced from its original
    position.


CLS 446/416
TXT Voice-actuated diaphragm (e.g., kazoo):
    Device under subclass 397 including a pliant membrane which is caused to
    vibrate by sound waves emitted from the vocal cords of a person, and which
    produces its own sound by the vibrations.


CLS 446/417
TXT Tick-tack:

    Device under subclass 397 having an element or portion adapted to impact
    against a surface on something other than the device to produce a sound.

    (1)     Note.  The "surface" is typically a window pane.


CLS 446/418
TXT Percussion:

    Device under subclass 397 wherein the sound-generating means comprises a
    first portion adapted to strike a second portion to produce a sound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    397,    for a scraping sounder.


CLS 446/419
TXT Unattached loosely confined percussive member (e.g., rattle):

    Device under subclass 418 wherein the first portion comprises a free
    element contained within a compartment, wherein the volume of the
    compartment is greater than the volume of the element such that the element
    strikes the compartment walls when the compartment is shaken.


CLS 446/420
TXT Ratchet-actuated:

    Device under subclass 418 wherein the first portion comprises an arm
    actuated by a star wheel or other rotating element having actuating
    structure about its periphery.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 144+ for a sound generator
    having a rotary striker in the form of a toothed wheel.


CLS 446/421
TXT Including handle for shaking, flipping, or flicking:

    Device under subclass 418 wherein the first and second portions are carried
    on a common member adapted to be grasped by the hand and moved quickly to
    cause the first portion to move relative to and strike the second portion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 148+ for a bell.


CLS 446/422
TXT Resiliently restored swinging percussive member:

    Device under subclass 421 including elastically deformable means which
    tends to move the first portion away from the second portion after it
    strikes the second portion.


CLS 446/423
TXT GARAGE:

    Device under the class definition comprising a simulation of a building or
    portion thereof in which motor vehicles are repaired, serviced, or stored.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85+,    for a garage or other building that may be played with by
    constructing or dismantling the same.

    476+,   for other toy buildings.

    483,    for a simulated gas pump.


CLS 446/424
TXT MATERIAL OR ARTICLE HANDLING DEVICE:

    Device under the class definition comprising a simulation of an instrument
    or machine for displacing or placing articles or material in a particular
    manner.

    (1)     Note.  Devices such as toy elevators or jacks which merely lift or
    lower an article are excluded.

    (2)     Note.  Excluded are devices having only internal feeding mechanisms
    such as magazines.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    423,    for a toy garage having an elevator or lift.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    212,    Traversing Hoists, appropriate subclasses for a device for
    suspending and moving a load horizontally, wherein all claimed structure is
    suitable for a full size device.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, appropriate subclasses for a device
    for displacing or placing articles or material in a particular manner,
    wherein all claimed structure is suitable for a full size device.


CLS 446/425
TXT Having load-supporting swingable arm:

    Device under subclass 424 including an elongated member which extends
    outwardly from supporting structure upon which it is mounted to swing about
    an axis, and having means for carrying thereon or suspending therefrom the
    material or articles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclasses 255+ for a functional crane having a
    vertically swinging boom.


CLS 446/426
TXT Horizontally swinging (e.g., crane):

    Device under subclass 425 including means which allows the elongated member
    to be swung about a substantially vertical axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    212,    Traversing Hoists, subclasses 223+ for a functional crane having a
    horizontally swinging boom.


CLS 446/427
TXT On wheeled vehicle:

    Device under subclass 424 wherein the simulation of an instrument or
    machine for placing or displacing articles or material is supported by a
    generally round rotatable element upon which it may roll over a surface.

    (1)     Note.  The vehicle must be capable of moving the material or
    article with respect to the vehicle, rather than merely transporting the
    material or articles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    258,    Railway Mail Delivery, subclasses 5+ for a railway vehicle having
    means to collect or eject a package therefrom.


CLS 446/428
TXT Having tiltable vehicle body portion for discharging contents (e.g., dump
    truck): Device under subclass 427 comprising a simulated conveyance for
    transporting the articles or material in a receptacle or on a platform
    which forms a principal part of the conveyance, wherein the receptacle or
    platform is mounted for movement about an axis, such that when moved about
    the axis, the articles or material are removed from the receptacle or
    platform by gravity.

    (1)     Note.  Toy vehicles having stationary receptacle with trap doors
    have been classified in subclass 427.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    298,    Land Vehicles, Dumping, appropriate subclasses for full size
    dumping vehicles, and toy dumping vehicles which if made of sufficient size
    could be operative devices.


CLS 446/429
TXT DISCRETE LAUNCHER, ACCELERATOR, OR RETARDER FOR TOY VEHICLE:

    Device under the class definition including means for either (1) imparting
    an initial velocity to, or (2) increasing or decreasing the speed of or (3)
    releasing in an energized condition, a simulation of a conveyance wherein
    the velocity-imparting or changing means is external to and does not form a
    part of the conveyance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for a rotary wing toy and launcher therefor.

    54,     for a parachute toy and launcher.

    63+,    for a toy glider combined with a launcher.

    212,    for a jet propelled rocket and launcher.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, appropriate subclasses for a
    mechanical projector for an aerial projectile.

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 108+ for an implement or
    mechanically operated device (either, per se, or in combination with
    another game component) for projecting a game projectile such that it
    travels upon a playing surface at all times in its course, and subclasses
    317+ for an implement or device for projecting or launching a game
    projectile into the air provided only that it is claimed in combination
    with at least one other game component.

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, (a) for a player held and powered
    implement, per se, for striking and thereby projecting or launching a game
    projectile into the air, (b) for a centrifugally or mechanically operated
    device for projecting or launching a game projectile into the air provided
    only that it is claimed in combination with at least one other game
    component, and (c) for an implement or mechanically operated device
    (either, per se, or in combination with another game component) for
    projecting a game projectile such that it travels upon a playing surface at
    all times in its course.


CLS 446/430
TXT Including helical spring or elastomeric strip:

    Device under subclass 429 wherein the means for changing the velocity of
    the simulated conveyance includes an elastically deformable element
    comprising either (1) a coil spring in the form of a helix, or (2) a length
    of rubber or a material which exhibits similar stretch characteristics.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64+,    for a resiliently biased projecting means for a toy glider.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, subclasses 16+ for a spring
    actuated projector for an aerial projectile.


CLS 446/431
TXT ROLLING OR TUMBLING (E.G., WHEELED):

    Device under the class definition comprising either (1) means specifically
    adapted to have rolling contact with or to turn end over end along a
    supporting surface, or (2) means supported by a generally round rotatable
    element upon which it may be rolled along a supporting surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for a wheeled vehicle having portions knocked apart or awry by
    impact.

    23,     for a wheeled vehicle having means for emitting sparks.

    25,     for a wheeled vehicle having smoke emitting means.

    71+,    for a toy wheeled vehicle converted from a diverse article (e.g.,
    container).

    95+,    for a construction toy in the form of a wheeled vehicle.

    174,    for a wheeled carrier moved by a gravity fed rolling, tumbling, or
    falling element (e.g., marble).

    237+,   for a toy wheeled vehicle having a visible rotating portion.

    269+,   for a rollable toy which includes a simulation of an animate being
    or portion thereof.

    409+,   for a rollable toy having sounding means.


CLS 446/432
TXT Fire apparatus:

    Device under subclass 431 comprising a simulation of a vehicle which is
    used to combat fires.


CLS 446/433
TXT Endless track vehicle:

    Device under subclass 431 including either a chain of pivoted elements, or
    a belt, wherein the belt or chain is in the form of a closed loop which is
    carried by a vehicle and contacts a supporting surface, and which is caused
    to revolve to propel the vehicle forward, or structure which simulates such
    a chain or belt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    425,    for an endless track vehicle having a vertically swinging load
    supporting bucket or scoop.


CLS 446/434
TXT Tractor or trailer:

    Device under subclass 431 comprising either (1) a simulation of an on-or
    off-road vehicle which is specifically adapted to draw another


    vehicle or a piece of equipment, or (2) a simulation of an on-or off-road
    vehicle adapted to be drawn by another vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    424+,   for a simulation of a self-loading or unloading tractor or trailer.


CLS 446/435
TXT Vehicle and means for freeing or launching object therefrom:

    Device under subclass 431 including a simulated wheeled conveyance and an
    object carried thereon, wherein means are provided either for releasing the
    object from the conveyance, or for impelling the object outwardly from the
    conveyance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for a vehicle having portions which are knocked apart or awry upon
    impact.

    427,    for a toy material handling vehicle having means to unload material
    therefrom (e.g., dumping).


CLS 446/436
TXT Including changeable program carried by vehicle:

    Device under subclass 431 comprising a wheeled portion having control means
    thereon which either causes a change in the travelling movement or controls
    a particular operation to be performed at a future time after an operator
    has selected one of a plurality of available modes of operation by altering
    the control means.


CLS 446/437
TXT Including means for causing erratic movement:

    Device under subclass 431 comprising means for steering or driving the
    rolling or tumbling means in an irregular manner by succesive changes in
    speed or direction.


CLS 446/438
TXT Including illumination means:

    Device under subclass 431 having a source of light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    485,    the residual subclass for toys having an electric lamp, and see the
    search notes thereunder for related loci.


CLS 446/439
TXT And battery holder or rolling or tumbling toy:

    Device under subclass 438 including structure carried by the rolling or
    tumbling means specifically provided for supporting an electric cell for
    supplying energy to the source of light.


CLS 446/440
TXT Motorcycle, tricycle or bicycle:

    Device under subclass 431 comprising a simulated wheeled conveyance having
    a front wheel, a rear wheel, and a saddle therebetween whereby a simulated
    rider may straddle the conveyance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 29+ for a wheeled vehicle on which a
    person may ride.


CLS 446/441
TXT Including vehicle carried control mechanism activated or deactivated in
    response to contact with extrinsic structure:

    Device under subclass 431 comprising a wheeled vehicle having means thereon
    for changing the speed or direction of the vehicle, wherein said means is
    operated when a part carried by the vehicle comes into contact with
    structure located on or adjacent to the path of the vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 117.1 for cable railways having automatic
    stopping or reversing of the vehicle.


CLS 446/442
TXT Reversing:

    Device under subclass 441 wherein the speed-or direction changing means
    causes the vehicle to travel in the opposite direction after the part
    carried by the vehicle contacts the structure on or adjacent to the path of
    the vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 117.1 for cable railways having automatic
    reversing of the vehicle; and subclass 303 for a railway vehicle having a
    reversing switch responsive to contact with means along the guideway.


CLS 446/443
TXT Having reversible drive:

    Device under subclass 431 including a motor or power-transmitting means
    which can propel the rolling or tumbling means either forwards or backwards.


CLS 446/444
TXT Including extrinsic guide or means cooperable with extrinsic guide:

    Device under subclass 431 including either (1) fixed structure external to
    and not forming a part of the rolling or tumbling means, for constraining
    the movement of the rolling or tumbling means to a particular path, or (2)
    means on the rolling or tumbling means adapted to engage such fixed
    structure to constrain the movement of the rolling or tumbling means to a
    particular path.

    (1)     Note.  A track which allows a vehicle thereon to change lanes at
    any time is not considered to be an extrinsic guide as defined above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    455,    for a multilane track having ribbon conductors along the surface
    through which commands are given to a vehicle to change lanes.

    467,    for a simulated railway vehicle which does not have flanged wheels
    (as claimed).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, appropriate subclasses for electrically powered toy
    railways (see the search notes to Class 104 in the main definition to Class
    446 for the line).

    238,    Railways:  Surface Track, subclass 10 for toy track.


CLS 446/445
TXT Cooperable traction means on vehicle and roadway:

    Device under subclass 444 comprising a simulated wheeled conveyance and
    driven structure either on the simulation, or on or adjacent to the path of
    the simulation which engages specific structure on the path or simulation,
    respectively, to propel the vehicle along the path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclasses 165+ for fullsize railways having a
    traction-type propulsion system.


CLS 446/446
TXT By guide surface below running surface:

    Device under subclass 444 having means on the rollable or wheeled means
    adapted to engage path-defining structure external to and not forming a
    part of the rollable or wheeled means, wherein the path-defining structure
    comprises a surface adapted to support thereover the weight of the rollable
    or wheeled means, and a lower generally vertical surface adapted to
    constrain the movement of the rollable or wheeled means to the particular
    path.


CLS 446/447
TXT Vehicle having flanged wheel:

    Device under subclass 446 including a simulated conveyance supported by a
    generally round rotatable element upon which it may be rolled along the
    horizontal supporting surface, wherein the rotatable element includes a
    vertically protruding lip formed about its periphery and adapted to
    cooperated with the vertical surface on the path-defining structure to
    constrain movement of the conveyance to a particular path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, appropriate subclasses for miniature railway
    rolling stock.  Class 446 takes claimed devices which include structure not
    suitable for a full scale device.


CLS 446/448
TXT Including wheel- or axle-operated device:
    Device under subclass 431 including a generally round rotatable element
    upon which the device may be rolled along a supporting surface, and
    including means for transmitting energy from either the rotatable element
    or an axial shaft with which the rotatable element revolves, to a dynamic
    portion which is actuated by the transmitted energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237+,   for a wheeled toy in which the wheel or axle imparts successive
    rotation to the wheel or axle operated device.

    269+,   especially subclasses 272, 274, 277, 280+, and 292+, for a wheeled
    figure toy having a wheel-drive mechanism for moving the figure or a
    portion thereof.

    409+,   for a wheel operated sounder.


CLS 446/449
TXT Operated by belt drive or by tangential contact with wheel:

    Device under subclass 448 wherein the energy-transmitting means comprises
    either (1) a rotary loop of flexible material, or (2) a rotatable member
    which contacts the periphery of the rotatable element upon which the device
    rolls.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232,    for a wheeled simulated airplane having a belt or friction
    transmission between a wheel and a propeller.


CLS 446/450
TXT Including handle, rod, or tether for physically guiding or propelling
    (e.g., trundle, hoop, etc.):

    Device under subclass 431 wherein the speed or direction of the rolling or
    tumbling means may be changed or maintained through physical interaction
    either with a hand-engageable portion thereon, or with an elongated member
    which is adapted to contact the rolling or tumbling means or is attached
    thereto at one of its ends and is secured or held by a person at the other
    end.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    411+,   for similar devices provided with a sounder.


CLS 446/451
TXT Plural wheels:

    Device under subclass 450 including a rolling portion which comprises a
    plurality of coaxially spaced discs, rings, or annuluses.


CLS 446/452
TXT Guide means secured centrally of wheel:
    Device under subclass 450 wherein the rolling or tumbling means comprises a
    ring, annulus or disc, and the hand engageable portion or the elongated
    member is attached to the ring, annulus or disc at a point lying on its
    axis of rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    412+,   for similar devices provided with a sounder.


CLS 446/453
TXT Including rolling element or sliding or pivoted retainer between rod and
    hoop or wheel:

    Device under subclass 450 including an intermediate friction reducing
    element which rolls along the ring, disc or annulus as it travels along the
    surface, or a discrete element mounted for either swinging or guided
    translational movement to secure or release the connection between the
    elongated member and the ring, annulus or disc.


CLS 446/454
TXT Remotely controlled:

    Device under subclass 431 including means on the rolling or tumbling means
    for changing its speed or direction and further including control means
    removed from the rolling or tumbling means by which an operator may control
    the speed-or direction-changing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for a simulated vehicle cockpit or simulated vehicle control means.

    154+,   for a remotely controlled aquatic toy.

    175,    for any toy remotely controlled by an extrinsic light or sound
    signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclasses 295+ for remotely controlled electric toy
    railways, including slot car systems.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825+ for an electrical
    remote control system, per se.


CLS 446/455
TXT Via conductor adjacent to vehicle path:
    Device under subclass 454 including a stationary conductor of an electrical
    circuit placed alongside the path of the rolling or tumbling means for
    transmitting an electrical signal from the control means to the speed or
    direction-changing means on the rolling or tumbling means, wherein the
    rolling or tumbling means is in the form of a wheeled conveyance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 304 for a steerable slot guided vehicle; and
    subclass 296 for other remotely controlled slot guided vehicles.


CLS 446/456
TXT By radio signal:

    Device under subclass 454 wherein the control means comprises a transmitter
    for sending a signal in the form of radio waves to control the speed or
    direction-changing means on the rollable or wheeled means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154+,   for a radio controlled toy boat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 167 for a full size motor vehicle remotely
    controlled by a radio signal.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.69 and 825.72 for a
    radio remote control system, per se.


CLS 446/457
TXT Including intrinsic motive power means for propulsion:

    Device under subclass 431 comprising energy-transducing or storing means
    located inside the rolling or tumbling means for providing power to move
    the rolling or tumbling means along a surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    269+,   for a motor-driven wheeled figure toy.


CLS 446/458
TXT And eccentric weight:

    Device under subclass 457 including a mass rotatably connected to a
    rollable means and whose center is radially offset from the axis of
    rotation of the rolling means.

    (1)     Note.  The mass typically keeps the propulsion means from rotating
    with the rolling means.


CLS 446/459
TXT Elastomeric (e.g., rubber band):

    Device under subclass 457 wherein the energy storing means for providing
    power to move the rolling or tumbling means comprises on elastically
    deformable member formed of rubber or a substance which exhibits similar
    characteristics.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176,    for a propeller driven toy land vehicle.


CLS 446/460
TXT Steering vehicle:

    Device under subclass 457 including means carried by a wheeled means for
    altering its course over the surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    436,    for a toy vehicle having a changeable program for controlling the
    steering.

    437,    for a programmed steering control means for causing erratic
    movement of the vehicle.

    454+,   for remotely controlled toy vehicle.

    468,    for a toy wheeled vehicle having means which permits turning of a
    wheel for steering.


CLS 446/461
TXT Having lock for rotary motor or transmission:

    Device under subclass 457 wherein the energy-transducing or storing means
    or, power-transmitting means therefrom, includes an element which turns
    about an axis, wherein means are provided to selectively interfere with the
    rotation of said element to prevent the energy storing or transducing means
    from propelling the rolling or tumbling means.


CLS 446/462
TXT Having intrinsic energy storing battery or flywheel:

    Device under subclass 457 wherein the energy-storing means comprises either
    a chemical cell that furnishes electric current, or a rotatable mass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for a flywheel driven toy which emits sparks.

    233+,   for a gyroscopic toy having a mass mounted for spinning movement
    within a supporting structure which is itself rotatable or tiltable.

    439,    for a toy vehicle having a battery holder for providing power to an
    electric lamp.


CLS 446/463
TXT And clutch:

    Device under subclass 462 including a mechanical power transmission having
    selectively disengageable means to interrupt the power for driving the
    rolling or tumbling means.

    (1)     Note.  The clutches in this subclass are generally claimed in
    combination with toy vehicle structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, appropriate subclasses for
    clutches used in full scale power transmissions, and toy clutches which
    have no claimed structure which would preclude its use in a full size
    vehicle.


CLS 446/464
TXT Flat spiral or torsion spring:

    Device under subclass 457 wherein the energy-storing means comprises either
    (1) an elastically deformable element curved into a planar spiral, or (2)
    an elongated elastically deformable element which is caused to store energy
    by rotating one end relative to the other about the longitudinal axis of
    the element or a helix formed thereby.


CLS 446/465
TXT Wheeled vehicle:

    Device under subclass 431 comprising a simulation of a conveyance supported
    by a generally round rotatable element upon which it may be rolled along a
    supporting surface.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is the residual locus for all toy wheeled
    vehicle simulations which are not specifically provided for in the
    subclasses above. Consequently, patents have not been cross-referenced into
    this and indented subclass unless necessitated by a claimed feature not
    provided for in the preceding subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, appropriate subclasses for toy vehicles wherein all
    claimed features are suitable for use in a full size device.


CLS 446/466
TXT Wheels vertically movable relative to chassis:

    Device under subclass 465 wherein the rotatable element is mounted on the
    body or bottom of the simulated conveyance by means which allows relative
    movement between the element and body or bottom in a direction
    perpendicular to the supporting surface.


CLS 446/467
TXT Railroad locomotive simulation:

    Device under subclass 465 wherein the conveyance simulated is of the type
    which travels on and is guided by surface track, and carries its propulsion
    unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for a toy locomotive having smoke emitting means.

    447,    for a toy railway vehicle having flanged wheels.


CLS 446/468
TXT Having means permitting turning of wheel for steering:

    Device under subclass 465 wherein the rotatable element is connected to the
    body of the simulated conveyance by means which permits rotation of the
    element about a vertical axis to turn the conveyance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    460,    for a steerable motor driven toy vehicle, and see the search note
    thereunder for related loci.


CLS 446/469
TXT Having specific means for mounting axle to chassis:

    Device under subclass 465 including a shaft or pin on or with which the
    rotatable element revolves as it rolls along a surface, wherein
    significance is attributed to the connection between the shaft or pin and
    the body or bottom of the conveyance.


CLS 446/470
TXT Having specific body structure:

    Device under subclass 465 wherein significance is attributed to the
    construction of the superstructure of the simulated conveyance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 1.1+ for full size
    vehicle bodies and toy vehicle bodies which if made full size would be
    operative devices; especially subclass 177 for a miniature vehicle
    representation upon which a child may ride.


CLS 446/471
TXT Demountable:

    Device under subclass 470 wherein the superstructure or a section thereof
    is selectively removable from the remainder of the conveyance.


CLS 446/472
TXT SIMULATED MEDICAL OR TOILET DEVICE:

    Device under the class definition comprising an imitative representation of
    an article or apparatus for the maintenance or improvement of health or
    personal hygiene, or for grooming.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    296,    for a doll accessory which represents a medical or toilet device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, appropriate subclasses for functional medical devices
    usable on the human body.

    132,    Toilet, appropriate subclasses for a functional toilet device
    usable on a human body.


CLS 446/473
TXT SIMULATED WEAPON OR PROTECTOR: Device under the class definition comprising
    an imitative representation of an instrument of offensive or defensive
    combat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for a simulated weapon which emits sparks.

    26+,    for a toy protective device or weapon which is worn or carried on
    the body.

    401,    for a toy detonator in the form of a simulated weapon other than a
    firearm.

    405+,   for a simulated weapon having sounding means other than a detonator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, subclasses 54+ for a detonating toy firearm such as a cap
    pistol.

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, appropriate subclasses for a
    mechanical projecting or throwing device in the form of a toy weapon.


CLS 446/474
TXT SIMULATED CLOTHES OR FABRIC WORKING OR CLEANING:

    Device under the class definition comprising an imitative representation of
    an apparatus for making, treating or repairing a piece of apparel or an
    article of cloth.


CLS 446/475
TXT INCLUDING  DISPENSER:

    Device under the class definition including means to release, eject, or
    present for removal an article or quantity of material from a supply or
    holding location.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24+,    for a smoke dispensing toy.

    74      and 76, for a toy which additional serves as a container for
    storing or holding material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 24 for an article dispenser shaped to
    simulate something.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 78 for a dispenser of a particular shape which
    simulates something.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 211 for a
    sprinkling, spraying or diffusing device configured to simulate some
    animate or inanimate object.


CLS 446/476
TXT BUILDING, TOWER, BRIDGE OR HABITATION:

    Device under the class definition comprising a simulation of either (1) a
    roofed and walled structure built for permanent use, (2) a structure higher
    than any lateral dimension and intended to be high relative to its
    surrounding, (3) a structure carrying a pathway or roadway over a
    depression or obstacle, or (4) a structure which serves as a dwelling place.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for a toy building which includes a container for storing its parts
    when disassembled.

    76,     for container shaped to simulate a building.

    82+,    for a toy theater.

    85+,    construction elements adapted to be assembled to represent a
    building.

    423,    for a toy garage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses for
    structures large enough to accommodate people or equipment.


CLS 446/477
TXT Including electrical feature:

    Device under subclass 476 having means operated by, conducting, or
    producing a flow of electrical energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    484,    the residual locus for toys having an electrical feature, and see
    the search notes thereunder for other related loci.


CLS 446/478
TXT Folding or collapsible:

    Device under subclass 476 wherein the simulation comprises either (1)
    structure or material which is intended to allow one portion to be bent
    about a line toward an adjacent portion, or (2) portions connected in a
    manner which allows them to fall or be drawn together to reduce the volume
    of the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    487+,   the residual locus for folding or collapsible toys.


CLS 446/479
TXT BUILDING FURNISHING OR APPLIANCE:

    Device under the class definition comprising a simulation or an
    appurtenance for a building or home for increasing the comfort or utility
    therefor, or a household or office device designed for a particular use in
    that environment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141+,   for a toy telephone.

    474,    for a toy sewing machine, clothes washer, iron, or other simulation
    of a fabric working or cleaning device.


CLS 446/480
TXT Simulated fireplace:

    Device under subclass 479 comprising an imitative representation of a
    framed opening in a chimney for holding an open fire.


CLS 446/481
TXT Simulated stove, heater, or cooking device: Device under subclass 479
    comprising an imitative representation of either an apparatus that burns
    fuel or uses electricity to produce heat for cooking or for heating a
    living area, or an apparatus for holding food while it is being cooked.


CLS 446/482
TXT Chair, table, desk, cabinet or bed:

    Device under subclass 479 comprising an imitative representation of an
    article of furniture either (1) for supporting a person in a sitting
    position, or in a recumbent position, (2) having a leg supported
    horizontally disposed top surface on which a meal is eaten or on which
    articles may be supported, (3) having a sloping or horizontal surface for
    writing or reading, or (4) comprising a case or cupboard having shelves or
    a door.


CLS 446/483
TXT SIMULATED DISPENSER OR PUMP:

    Device under the class definition comprising an imitative representation of
    either (1) means to release, eject, or present an article or quantity of
    material from a supply or holding location, or (2) apparatus for
    compressing or imparting kinetic energy to a fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    432,    for a fire truck.

    475,    for a toy having an operable dispenser.


CLS 446/484
TXT ELECTRIC:

    Device under the class definition including means operated by, conducting,
    or producing a flow of electrical energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for an electrically powered tethered toy fixed-wing aircraft.

    37,     for an electrically powered toy helicopter.

    91,     for a construction toy having an electrical feature.

    142,    for a toy telephone having an electrical feature.

    164+,   for a motor driven toy boat.

    178,    for a toy employing a motor-driven fan to supply forced air to
    operate the toy.

    229,    for a suspended toy propelled by an electric motor.

    232,    for a nonflying toy aircraft having a motor drive propeller.

    242,    for a rotating toy having an electric light or sounder.

    268+,   for a figure toy having an electrical feature (e.g., motor).

    431+,   for a toy vehicle having an electrical feature.

    477,    for a toy building, tower, or bridge having an electrical feature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 44 for a
    miniature electric motor.


CLS 446/485
TXT With lamp:

    Device under subclass 484 including means for transforming a flow of
    electrical energy into light for illumination.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for a flying saucer provided with an electric light.

    242,    for a spinning or rotating toy having an electric light.

    438,    for a rolling or tumbling toy having a lamp.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 442+ for a display
    device which creates special effects by illumination.

    362,    Illumination, appropriate subclasses for an illuminating device,
    per se.


CLS 446/486
TXT RESILIENT TOY OR ACTUATOR:
    Device under the class definition including an elastically deformable
    portion which is deflected during use of the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for a rotary wing toy including a resilient actuator for rotating
    the wing.

    40,     for a resiliently biased projector for a toy glider.

    183,    for a squeezable resilient figure toy.

    365,    for a figure toy having a resiliently biased body portion.

    379,    for a figure toy having a resilient connector for body parts.

    430,    for a resiliently actuated toy vehicle launcher.


CLS 446/487
TXT FOLDABLE, COLLAPSIBLE, OR HAVING PIVOTED PORTION:

    Device under the class definition comprising either (1) structure or
    material which is intended to allow one portion of the device to be bent
    about a line toward an adjacent portion, (2) portions connected in a manner
    which allows them to fall or be drawn together to reduce the volume of the
    device, or (3) two parts connected by structure which permits relative
    swinging movement between the two parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for a glider provided with a folding wing.

    109,    for a construction toy which includes a folding panel, strip, or
    connector.

    236+,   for a toy having a pivoted portion which is continuously revolved
    about an axis.

    371,    375 and 376+, for pivotally connected doll parts.

    478,    for a collapsible toy building.


CLS 446/488
TXT Sheet material folded to form object:

    Device under subclass 487 comprising a section which is very thin compared
    to its length and breadth, wherein one portion is adapted to be bent along
    a line toward an adjacent portion to yield a form having the two portions
    as adjacent panels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     for a glider formed by folding sheet material.

    80,     for an object other than a toy having fold lines to convert it to a
    toy.

    388,    for a figure toy formed by folding sheet material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclass 155 for a foldable puzzle.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 9 for a
    collapsible special occasion ornament; or subclasses 15+ for a
    three-dimensional representation of a natural object.


CLS 446/489
TXT INCLUDING SLIDING OR GUIDING ELEMENT OR PORTION:

    Device under the class definition comprising a first part which either (1)
    contacts and moves smoothly along the surface of a second part, or (2)
    constrains translational movement of a second part moving therealong.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for a sliding retractable coin slot or guard on a toy money box.

    127,    for construction toy elements which are joined together by
    laterally sliding the elements.

    135+,   for a magnetic element and means for guiding its path over a
    surface over which it is caused to slide.


CLS 446/490
TXT INCLUDING FLACCID ELEMENT OR PORTION:

    Device under the class definition comprising a part or section of
    nonself-sustaining pliant material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    for a construction toy having elements retained in assembled
    condition by a flaccid connector.

    247+,   for a spinning or whirling toy having an attached flaccid element
    for imparting rotation thereto.

    331     and 361+, for a figure having a portion moved by an attached
    flaccid element.


CLS 446/491
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition which is not provided for under
    any of the preceding subclasses.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTION


CLS 446/901
TXT DETACHABLY ADHESIVE:

    Device under the class definition comprising two portions, one of which has
    adhesive structure or material along a surface thereof, whereby a child may
    repeatedly attach and detach two portions.


CLS 449/
TTL BEE CULTURE

CLS 449/
TXT This class includes the methods of and structures for propagating, raising
    and caring for bees; as well as certain ancillary methods and structures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, appropriate subclasses for methods and structures
    for propagating, raising, and caring for animals, or other living, mobile
    creatures, generally.  Also, see the search notes therein for reference to
    ancillary methods and structure.


CLS 449/1
TXT METHOD:

    Process under the class definition.


CLS 449/2
TXT Honeybee:

    Process under subclass 1 specific to bees of a variety intended to produce
    edible honey.


CLS 449/3
TXT Hive:

    Structure under the class definition intended to house a colony of bees.


CLS 449/4
TXT For nonhoney producing bee:

    Structure under subclass 3 intended to house a colony of bees of a variety
    that does not produce honey suitable for human consumption.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is housing for "leaf cutter" bees which are
    used to pollinate alfalfa.


CLS 449/5
TXT With provision to extract honey:

    Structure under subclass 3 including provision to remove liquid honey from
    the component parts of the hive.


CLS 449/6
TXT Observation:

    Structure under subclass 3 including provision to allow viewing of the
    interior of the hive without opening the hive.


CLS 449/7
TXT Multi-queen, e.g. swarm capture:

    Structure under subclass 3 with provision to allow more than one queen bee
    to be housed in the same hive.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for a container for multiple colonies of bees with independent
    chambers for each colony.


CLS 449/8
TXT Queen raising:

    Structure under subclass 7 with provision to encourage and care for the
    production of a bee larvae into a queen bee.


CLS 449/9
TXT With Feeder:

    Structure under subclass 3 combined with means to alloy a beekeeper to
    provide sustenance to the colony.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for means to allow a beekeeper to supply sustenance to bees,
    outside the confines of a bee hive.



CLS 449/10
TXT Fitted in frame slot:

    Structure under subclass 9 wherein the hive is of a type having removable
    honey supporting frames and wherein the sustenance supplying provision
    comprises structure intended to fit in the space normally occupied by such
    a frame.


CLS 449/11
TXT Having external food supply:

    Structure under subclass 9 wherein there is access outside the hive to
    allow sustenance to be provided to the colony without opening the hive.

    (1)     Note.  An opening provided for access to the hive for the sole
    purpose of supplying food is included herein; e.g., an opening in the hive
    cover for supplying food is included herein, but a removable hive cover
    through which food may be supplied is not included herein.


CLS 449/12
TXT With heater:

    Structure under subclass 3 combined with structure to raise the thermal
    level of the hive or of a portion thereof.


CLS 449/13
TXT With ventilator:

    Structure under subclass 3 with or including provision to encourage the
    flow of air through the hive.


CLS 449/14
TXT In cover:

    Structure under subclass 13 including a removable top most portion having
    provision therein for encouraging the flow of air through the hive.


CLS 449/15
TXT Cover:

    Structure under subclass 3 comprising a removable top most portion of a
    hive.


CLS 449/16
TXT Alighting board:

    Structure under subclass 3 comprising that portion of a hive provided to
    receive bees as they land in anticipation of entering the hive.


CLS 449/17
TXT Comb honey:

    Structure under subclass 3 including provision specific to the marketing of
    honey without removal from the honeycomb.


CLS 449/18
TXT Having propolis collector:

    Structure under subclass 3 having or combined with provision to capture
    propolis from the bees as they pass by.


CLS 449/19
TXT Having pollen collector or applier:

    Structure under subclass 3 having or combined with provision to capture the
    pollen off the bees as they pass by or provision to apply pollen to the
    bees as they pass by.

    (1)     Note.  Pollen is captured from the bees to make possible marketing
    of the pollen.  Pollen is applied to the bees to encourage pollination of
    the flowers to which the bees subsequently fly.


CLS 449/20
TXT Passage:

    Structure under subclass 3 comprising that portion of a hive intended to
    allow movement of bees from one portion of the hive to another.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is an entrance to the hive.


CLS 449/21
TXT Queen/drone control means:

    Structure under subclass 20 intended to restrict passage such that a queen
    bee or a drone is limited in movement therethrough, while permitting
    passage of worker bees.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for transportation means specific to transportation requirements of
    a queen bee which may confine the movements of the queen and her attendant
    workers.


CLS 449/22
TXT Moth control means:

    Structure under subclass 20 intended to restrict passage such that a moth
    is limited in movement therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for an alighting board that is movable to restrict passage into the
    hive which, if moved to the  restricting position, may be used to prevent
    moths entering at night.

    25,     for a manually closable hive entrance which, if in the closed
    position, may prevent moths entering at night.


CLS 449/23
TXT One-way passage:

    Structure under subclass 20 intended to allow movement of bees in only a
    single direction.


CLS 449/24
TXT Adjustable:

    Structure under subclass 20 including provision to modify the position or
    size of the passage.


CLS 449/25
TXT Entrance:

    Structure under subclass 20 comprising that passage in which the bees
    normally enter (or exit) the hive.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for an alighting board that is adjustable to change the size or
    configuration of the hive entrance.


CLS 449/26
TXT Stand or hive container:

    Structure under subclass 3 comprising (a) underlying members, distinct from
    the hive itself, intended to support the hive or a group of hives against
    the force of gravity or (b) structure, distinct from the hive itself,
    intended to house the hive or a group of hives.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7+,     for a container for multiple queen bees without a distinguishable
    housing for each queen colony.



CLS 449/27
TXT Transportation provision or swarm catcher:

    Structure under subclass 3 including provision specific to transport of a
    hive or a significant component part thereof from one location to another;
    or including provision to retrieve an unhived colony of bees.

    (1)     Note.  A hive including component securing means to allow it to be
    inverted is included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7+,     for a hive having provision to retain both the old colony and the
    swarming colony of bees.

    26,     for a hive on specific stand that allows the hive to be inverted.

    42,     for a honey frame that can be inverted.


CLS 449/28
TXT Queen bee:

    Structure under subclass 27 including provision specific to transport a
    living queen bee.


CLS 449/29
TXT Hive shell of particular material:

    Structure under subclass 3 comprising that portion of a hive intended to
    encase a colony of bees, i.e., body, bottom and cover, which is of a
    specifically recited composition.

    (1)     Note.  Generally, wood is not considered to be a particular
    material for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42+,    for a honey frame of particular material.


CLS 449/30
TXT Plastic or paper:

    Structure under subclass 29 comprising that portion of a hive intended to
    encase a colony of bees which is of polymerized petroleum or is of randomly
    woven cerulous fibers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for a honey frame of plastic.


CLS 449/31
TXT Ceramic, clay or plaster:

    Structure under subclass 29 wherein the specific composition is glazed or
    dried siliceous material or is a hardened mixture of material.


CLS 449/32
TXT Vertically stacked hive bodies:

    Structure under subclass 3 wherein the portion of the hive between the
    bottom and the cover consists of a plurality of tubular members positioned
    one above the other.


CLS 449/33
TXT Directly accessible lower body:

    Structure under subclass 32 including provision to allow physical
    inspection of the interior of a lower hive body without removal of the
    upper hive body.


CLS 449/34
TXT Congruent bodies:

    Structure under subclass 32 wherein the upper and lower hive bodies engage
    in a horizontal plane and wherein they are of such dimensions that, at the
    plane of engagement, they fit exactly one on the other.


CLS 449/35
TXT Separable honey frame type:

    Structure under subclass 3 including a removable member having parts
    intended to generally lie in a plane with the honeycomb and incompassing
    that honeycomb, such that the member and the honeycomb can be removed from
    the remainder of the hive with a minimum of disturbance to the colony of
    bees housed therein.


CLS 449/36
TXT Pivoted honey frame:

    Structure under subclass 35 including a plurality of honey frames attached
    to each other such that one turns with respect to the adjacent honey frame
    about a line when being removed or inspected by the beekeeper.

    (1)     Note.  The honey frame of the hive of this subclass may open, in
    the manner of the pages of a book.


CLS 449/37
TXT With honey frame spacer:

    Structure under  subclass 35 including provision to determine the distance
    that a honey frame is located from other structure, e.g., from an adjacent
    frame.

    (1)     Note.  The frame spacer of this subclass may be any part of the
    hive structure except it may not be an integral part of the honey frame.


CLS 449/38
TXT Side opening hive:

    Structure under subclass 35 including a horizontally facing wall having a
    portion movable to allow access to the hive.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for a side opening bee hive, generally.


CLS 449/39
TXT Pivoting side:

    Structure under subclass 38 wherein the portion moves about a fixed axis
    with respect to the remainder of the hive.


CLS 449/40
TXT Vertical pivot:

    Structure under subclass 39 wherein the portion moves in a horizontal plane.


CLS 449/41
TXT Laterally disposed compartments:

    Structure under subclass 35 including a vertical partition forming distinct
    rooms.

    (1)     Note.  The vertical partition of this subclass may comprise a panel
    inserted in place of one of the honey frames.


CLS 449/42
TXT Honey frame or honeycomb foundation details:

    Structure under subclass 35 including limitations of the honey frame or of
    artificial honeycomb.

    (1)     Note.  The artificial honeycomb of this subclass normally comprises
    only the central web between the chambers in which honey is to be placed.

    (2)     Note.  A honey frame, per se, a section of artificial honeycomb,
    per se, is included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for a honey frame specifically intended to hold honey to be
    marketed in the comb.


CLS 449/43
TXT Snap fit together or of plastic:

    Structure under subclass 42 wherein the honey frame consists of multiple
    components that fit together by stressing a portion within its elastic
    limit or wherein the honey frame is of polymerized petroleum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for a hive shell made of plastic.


CLS 449/44
TXT Honeycomb foundation details:

    Structure under subclass 42 comprising artificial honeycomb specifically
    limited.


CLS 449/45
TXT Strand or metal reinforced honeycomb foundation:

    Structure under subclass 44 including (1) fibrous material embedded in the
    plane of the artificial honeycomb, or (2) metallic component to strengthen
    the artificial honeycomb.


CLS 449/46
TXT Side opening:

    Structure under subclass 3 including a horizontally facing wall having a
    portion movable to allow access to the hive.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38+,    for a similar hive of the separable honey frame type.


CLS 449/47
TXT VENOM COLLECTOR:

    Structure under the class definition comprising provision to capture poison
    from a bee stinger.


CLS 449/48
TXT FEEDER:

    Structure under the class definition comprising provision to supply
    sustenance to bees.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9+,     for the combination of a bee hive with a bee feeding provision or
    for a feeder that is to be a part of a bee hive.


CLS 449/49
TXT BEE FOOD PREPARATION MEANS:

    Structure under the class definition including means to aid in making
    sustenance for consumption by bees.


CLS 449/50
TXT BASE MOUNTED DEVICE:

    Structure under the class definition intended to be used in a fixed
    location, with structure includes support provision.


CLS 449/51
TXT Means to remove honey frame from hive:

    Structure under subclass 50 intended to be used to take a honeycomb
    supporting frame member out of a hive body.


CLS 449/52
TXT Means to remove bees from hive:

    Structure under subclass 50 intended to be used to cause the bees to leave
    a hive body.

    (1)     Note.  A fume producing panel is included herein, even though
    supported by the hive rather than by its base.


CLS 449/53
TXT Honey extracting device:

    Structure under subclass 50 intended to be used to separate liquid honey
    from other parts or component of the hive, particularly from the honeycomb.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 361 for a centrifugal
    extractor having an individual article container or support.



CLS 449/54
TXT Honeycomb decapping device:

    Structure under subclass 51 intended to remove the wax covering of
    honeycomb to allow removal of honey therefrom.


CLS 449/55
TXT Having heater:

    Structure under subclass 54 including means to raise the thermal level
    thereof.


CLS 449/56
TXT Hive or frame cleaning:

    Structure under subclass 50 including  means to remove foreign material
    from the component parts of structure used to house a colony of bees.


CLS 449/57
TXT Assembling device:

    Structure under subclass 50 peculiar to the bringing together of the
    components of structure peculiar to bee culture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 700+ for means to assemble, generally.


CLS 449/58
TXT Honeycomb foundation:

    Structure under subclass 57 peculiar to bringing honeycomb foundation
    together with other structure.


CLS 449/59
TXT Honeycomb foundation wiring:

    Structure under 58 peculiar to embedding strand material into the plane of
    artificial honeycomb.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 50+ for metal heating utilizing
    electrical resistance, generally; and subclasses 201+ for a heating device
    combined with a diverse-type art device, generally.


CLS 449/60
TXT Honeycomb foundation former:

    Structure under subclass 50 intended to give desired configuration to
    artificial honeycomb.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    60+ for a method of surface bonding and/or assembly therefor; and
    subclasses 349+ for means of surface bonding and/or assembly therefor;
    generally.

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 117+ for a static mold for forming
    material, generally.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses for a method of molding, generally.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    appropriate subclasses for apparatus for molding, generally.


CLS 449/61
TXT RANDOMLY MANIPULATED DEVICE:

    Structure under the class definition peculiar to beekeeping and intended to
    be handled by a beekeeper without restriction.


CLS 449/62
TXT Plier type:

    Structure under subclass 61 including a pair of manually squeezable handles
    pivotally attached to each other each   carrying a jaw to act in concert
    with    the jaw of the other handle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 16 for a hand
    bar or hand barrow having opposing jaws; subclasses 86.4+ for a grapple,
    generally, especially subclasses 118+ for a grapple of the crossed lever,
    pivoting jaw type.


CLS 449/63
TXT Honeycomb decapping device:

    Structure under subclass 61 intended     to remove the covering of
    honeycomb     to allow removal of honey therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 140 for a heated knife, generally; and subclasses
    165+ for a knife, generally, especially subclasses 296.1+ for a blade and
    handle.


CLS 449/64
TXT Hive body separating device:

    Structure under subclass 61 particularly adapted to force one tubular
    beehive shell away from another tubular shell on which it was previously
    resting.


CLS 450/
TTL FOUNDATION GARMENTS

CLS 450/
TXT
    This class includes devices which are specifically designed to fit the
    human body to protect, compress, support, restrain or alter the
    configuration of the body torso or a portion thereof, e.g., the female
    mammae, or those portions of the body lying below the mammae and extending
    along a line below the abdomen portion of the body to the region of the
    thighs.



CLS 450/1
TXT BREAST OR CHEST, E.G., BRASSIERES:

    Subject matter under the class definition in the form of skeletal
    frameworks, or made of sheetlike materials, designed to be applied to the
    upper part of the torso, functioning to protect and support that part of
    the body or to contact the breasts of the human body to support or restrain
    or to temporarily alter the configuration thereof or to supply an apparent
    configuration which may differ from the natural configuration.

    (1)     Note.  Because of their structural similarity, garments commonly
    known as "halters" have been included in this and appropriate indented
    subclasses when the halter is constructed (a) to closely contact or embrace
    the body in the area immediately above and below the breasts, or (b) to
    provide breast-receiving pockets either for each individually or a single
    pocket for both breasts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7+,     for body supporters of the foundation garment type.


CLS 450/2
TXT With shoulder or back brace:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the breast supporter includes
    shoulder extensions in the form of tensioning straps or panels disclosed
    for drawing the shoulders back.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 44 and 45 for shoulder braces, per se.

    602,    Surgery:  Splint, Brace, or Bandage, subclass 19 for orthopedic
    device for correcting deformities and other abnormalities of the body.


CLS 450/3
TXT With midriff covering extension terminating adjacent waistline, e.g.,
    "longline":

    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising a bodice or panel extending from
    above the breasts of the wearer to the waistline to confine the figure at
    and adjacent the waistline.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for brassieres combined with subjacent body supporters, e.g.,
    foundation garments.


CLS 450/4
TXT With additional means interiorly attached to extension to support the
    diaphragm area:

    Subject matter under subclass 3 wherein the panel is provided with a band
    or belt member to confine and lightly support the fleshy part of the body
    above the waistline.

    (1)     Note.  The diaphragm region as referred to in the art, signifies
    the area above the waist and extending to approximately the chest.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for foundation garments designed to support the diaphragm area.


CLS 450/5
TXT Midriff extension includes overlapping relative movable parts:

    Subject matter under subclass 3 wherein the portion of the brassiere which
    extends below the breast cups is provided with overlying, self-regulatable
    bands or panels which permit adjustability over the diaphragm area.


CLS 450/6
TXT With means to attach extension to subjacent body-supporter or garment,
    e.g., hold-downs:

    Subject matter under subclass 3 provided with separable fasteners designed
    to function as supporters for neither garments or corsets and as hold-down
    means to prevent the long-line brassiere "riding up" on the body of the
    wearer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for combination body supporters (foundation garments) provided with
    means to support hosiery or other apparel-type garments.

    106     and 112+, for corsets and girdles provided with means to anchor the
    supporter on the body.

    110,    for corsets and girdles provided with means to support hosiery or
    to engage apparel-type garments such as skirts.


CLS 450/7
TXT Combined with subjacent body supporters, e.g., foundation garment:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the breast supporter is connected
    with a neither bandage device functioning to support or mold the flesh of
    the lower torso.

    (1)     Note.  These are commonly known as "foundation garments" and in
    common parlance the parts thereof are termed "brassiere" and "corset" or
    "girdle" for the upper and lower parts, respectively.

    (2)     Note.  Where the disclosure indicates that the neither device
    closely embraces or sheathes the torso, such as in a "skin-tight" bathing
    suit or in sheath-type underwear, the device will not be considered to be a
    support for this group unless the disclosure is clear that there is
    definite supporting or compressing function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for brassieres combined with nonsupporting garments such as slips
    and waists.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, appropriate subclasses for sheath-type bathing suits and
    underwear, and see (2) Note, above.


CLS 450/8
TXT Including plural superimposed supporting panels or bands:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein, at some body area, there are at
    least two distinct layers each of which exerts a supporting or molding or
    compressing force on the body and wherein the layers are free to move
    relative to each other in directions normal to the planes thereof except at
    marginal or isolated points where they may be secured together for
    convenience in handling or donning.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    for supporters for the lower torso having similar features.

    153,    for lower torso supporters having liners, covers or shields which
    have no supporting function.


CLS 450/9
TXT With separable closure for each layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 wherein each layer is circumferentially
    discontinuous and is provided with a separable closure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for similar subject matter in supports for the lower torso only.


CLS 450/10
TXT Each layer separately encircles body:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 wherein each layer is a complete unit which
    substantially separately girdles the body.

    (1)     Note.  The two layers may be attached to a common point such as the
    back seam or back closure edges.  In many instances each layer may be worn
    independently of the other.


CLS 450/11
TXT Including apparel-type garment:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 having, in addition to the breast and lower
    torso support, a body covering of the type recognized in Class 2, Apparel.


CLS 450/12
TXT Vertically slidable overlapped portions between breast and torso support:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 having a telescoping or interfitting
    connection between the breast and torso supporters, usually to provide
    freedom of movement in bending the body at the waist area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15      and 16, for devices of this nature where there is freedom for
    movement or bending at the waistline but where there are no overlapping
    portions.

    120,    for similar construction in a supporter for the lower torso.


CLS 450/13
TXT With elastically extensible connector:

    Subject matter under subclass 12 wherein a resiliently extensible member is
    floatingly attached between the brassiere and the subjacent supporter at
    the area of overlap to control the relative movement of the two parts.


CLS 450/14
TXT Detachably secured to subjacent supporter by separable fastener:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein the brassiere element of the
    combination is integrally united with the corset element by means of
    cooperating disconnectible fastening means.

    (1)     Note.  Included in the subclass are foundation garments in which
    the brassiere portion is readily removable from the corset portion so as to
    facilitate laundering or for interchanging the brassiere or corset with
    another supporter or an apparel-type garment.


CLS 450/15
TXT Subjacent supporter unattached at front:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein the brassiere and corset parts are
    disposed in spaced relation in front and interconnected at the back of the
    foundation garment.


CLS 450/16
TXT Subjacent supporter unattached at back:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein the brassiere and corset portions
    are independent of each other at the back and disposed in spaced relation,
    and are interconnected at the front of the supporter.


CLS 450/17
TXT Front center separable closure for both breast and torso support:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein the brassiere and corset are
    provided with closure means which permit opening both parts along a front
    central vertical line.

    (1)     Note.  This foundation garment is referred to in the art as the
    "coat-type" foundation.


CLS 450/18
TXT With size adjustment for both, e.g., maternity type:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 which extensible portions or releasable
    means are provided to permit girth or length adjustment in each part.

    (1)     Note.  These are usually disclosed as providing for adjustments in
    body contour occurring during pregnancy.

    (2)     Note.  The adjusting means may be common to both parts or may be
    separate; in the latter case both must be claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    136 and 137, for corsets having means permitting girthwise
    adjustment.


CLS 450/19
TXT Including plural elastic panels or inserts with diversely oriented lines or
    elasticity:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 made up of a multiplicity of distinct
    pieces having some degree of elasticity and wherein the permissive
    direction of stretch of at least two pieces is in some angular relation
    other than parallel.

    (1)     Note.  This includes the combination of a one-way and a two-way
    stretch piece of elastic material because the second-named piece will have
    a direction of permissive stretch not parallel to the of the first-named
    piece.

    (2)     Note.  Straps and narrow bands attached at their ends only and used
    for tension members have generally been excluded from this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for "long-line" type brassiere where the midriff covering portion
    may comprise crossed elastic bands or webs.


CLS 450/20
TXT Including elastic portions with varying modulus of elasticity:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 in which the stretch modulus of elasticity
    of elastic portions of the supporter differs comparatively from one area to
    another or from one direction to another.

    (1)     Note.  The entire combination supporter may be elastic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for brassieres having similar structure.

    131,    for corsets or girdles having similar structure.


CLS 450/21
TXT Including elastic portion with stretch inhibitor or limiter:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 comprising a distinct piece of, or entirely
    constructed of, elastic material and wherein there is provided means acting
    to restrain, check, or set bounds for the stretching of the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for brassieres having elastic panels of variable modulus of
    elasticity.

    76,     for brassieres having elastic portions provided with stretch
    inhibiting means.

    115,    for corsets having elastic portions provided with stretch
    inhibiting means.


CLS 450/22
TXT Subjacent supporter includes crotch member:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein the subjacent supporter is provided
    with a closure flap joining the front and rear panels at the lower edges
    thereby forming a bifurcated member or "panty".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    104 and 105, for "panty girdles".


CLS 450/23
TXT Wraparound overlapped type torso support:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 in which oppositely extending portions of a
    panel section are adapted to be wrapped about the torso in overlapping
    relation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121     and 122, for similar features in the corset-type supporter not
    combined with a brassiere.


CLS 450/24
TXT Including panels having pleats or folds to permit size increase:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein a series of pleats or folds is
    formed in the panels whereby girthwise or circumferential dimension of the
    supporter as well as the shape may be adjusted or altered.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are devices fashioned of
    overlapped sections or folds of elastic material formed to permit expansion
    or contraction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134+,   for girdles having "let-outs".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 76 for adjustable or elastic garment sections.


CLS 450/25
TXT Stepwise girth adjustment:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein a series of coacting fastening
    elements are spaced at fixed intervals on portions of the device for
    selectively changeable relative engagement whereby the length of the
    supporter circumferentially of the wearer's torso may be varied.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134+,   for this feature in the corset-type supporter not combined with a
    brassiere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 237 for adjustable waistbands.

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 580+ for separable
    fasteners of the step adjustment type.


CLS 450/26
TXT With separable fastener or connector for apparel-type garment:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 provided with suspenders by which hosiery
    or other garments may be supported.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are shoulder straps equipped with
    pendant means for supporting a garment.


CLS 450/27
TXT Low cut at back:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein the bodice portion is provided with
    a cutout or open gap centrally of the top edge of the back for exposing the
    back of the wearer.


CLS 450/28
TXT With separable fastener or connector for apparel-type garment:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 in which the breast supporter is provided
    with a separable fastener or pendant strap means, the strap including a tab
    or fastener means, for attaching the breast supporter to a subjacent
    apparel-type garment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for brassieres provided with means for fastening to a subjacent
    supporter.


CLS 450/29
TXT For hosiery:

    Subject matter under subclass 28 disclosed or designed for supporting a
    stocking.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for foundation garments having hose supporters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 306 for garter belts, and subclasses 303 and 335
    for hose supporters.


CLS 450/30
TXT Combined with apparel-type garment:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 having a garment of the type recognized in
    Class 2, Apparel, such as a skirt, bathing garment or panties, conjoined
    therewith to form a unitary garment.

    (1)     Note.  A waist-encircling band or belt is not considered to be a
    "garment" for the purpose of this and the indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  Brassieres combined with corsets are in subclass 7.


CLS 450/31
TXT Breast supporting member within other garment:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein the breast supporter is built in
    or concealed within the garment and secured thereto to form a unitary
    garment.

    (1)     Note.  This art includes the "built-in-up-lift" as referred to in
    industry.


CLS 450/32
TXT Removable breast supporter:

    Subject matter under subclass 31 in which the brassiere is detachably
    secured to the outer garment.

    (1)     Note.  Each garment may be worn independently or worn with another
    garment.


CLS 450/33
TXT Subjacent garment attached at front only:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 in which the brassiere and a nether
    garment are independent of each other at the back and disposed in spaced
    relation, and are interconnected at the front of the garment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for a subjacent supporter unattached to the brassiere at the back
    thereof.


CLS 450/34
TXT With means providing girthwise elastically for brassiere:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 in which the bodice portion is fashioned
    of material having elastic properties or has elastic strips, bands or
    panels which provide a torso fitting garment which automatically
    accommodates itself to the body contour.


CLS 450/35
TXT Portion of garment covers elastic connector at back:

    Subject matter under subclass 34 wherein the brassiere includes tensioning
    straps or bands disposed at the back of the wearer and the garment includes
    a portion or panel at the back disposed in overlying relation to the straps
    or bands.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for breast supporters complete in themselves and arranged within
    the bodice portion of an apparel-type garment.


CLS 450/36
TXT Closable aperture permits access to breast, i.e., nursing type:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the cup area has an orifice or slit
    which is closed or covered by separable or removable means to expose the
    breast and wherein the brassiere as a whole remains attached to or
    supported on the body while the breast is exposed.

    (1)     Note.  Device under this subclass are usually worn for a period
    before and/or after childbirth such as during puerperium and/or during the
    nursing period.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for brassieres having absorbent pads.

    38,     for front opening brassieres wherein there is complete separation
    of the brassiere portions.


CLS 450/37
TXT With lacteal fluid receptor or shield:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 provided with absorptive or receptacle-type
    structures to receive and hold lacteal fluid; also, including sheetlike
    structure impermeable to liquids to prevent or minimize the transfer of
    lacteal fluid to other garments worn over or outside fo the brassiere.

    (1)     Note.  The claimed structure must be specifically disclosed as
    being waterproof or absorbent for shielding against or receiving the
    lacteal fluid; and see search notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for rigid or resiliently elastic preshaped cup structures which may
    be made of material impermeable to liquids, but wherein there is no
    disclosed function of shielding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclass 890 for devices covering or shielding the nipples
    against chafing, including nursing devices permitting the flow of lacteal
    fluid therethrough, wherein there is no claimed structure disclosed for
    breast supporting, restraining or molding.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 358+ for absorbent pads and materials useful as
    lacteal receptors.


CLS 450/38
TXT With inflatable or liquid-containing chambers:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including a hollow body constructed to
    retain a fluid.

    (1)     Note.  There may be access means permitting ingress or egress of
    the fluid or body may be sealed so as to contain a predetermined quantity
    of fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 67 for inflatable garment forms.

    441,    Boats, Buoys, and Aquatic Devices, subclasses 88+ for body
    supporting inflatable water wings and for garments having inflatable
    portions therein.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclass 87 for toys which are inflatable.


CLS 450/39
TXT Molded preshaped shell-like cup, e.g., plastic latex:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 provided with cups of thin substantially
    uniform thickness wherein the cup has been shaped by casting or plastically
    working a material which is self-shape-retaining subsequent to such shaping.

    (1)     Note.  A thickened portion serving to represent the areoia of a
    breast or serving merely as a reinforcing device are included here within
    the concept of uniform thickness.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42      and 44, for preshaped cups including stays, strips or strands.

    53,     for preshaped cups contacting only the lower half of the breast.

    55+,    for molded pads designed to add volume to the breast, and see (1)
    Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses for molding or shaping processes within the class
    definition.


CLS 450/40
TXT Strand-type fabric with thermoplastic fibers or filaments:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 including filaments or fibers, including
    yarns comprising discontinuous fibers, formed from a thermoplastic material.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are breast cups molded from
    compound strands of thermoplastic and nonthermoplastic material made by
    intertwining or spinning the two components.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass are cups formed from the vinyl
    resins, nylon, cellulose acetate in the thermoplastic state, and the like.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclass 169 for articles and products
    involving significant steps of knitting.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    62.2+ for processes of laminating which includes the step of forming at
    least one lamina by bulk deposition and uniting of discrete fibers or other
    discrete particulate material.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 109+ for processes under the class definition for formation of
    articles by uniting randomly associated particles.

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 409+ for autogenously bonded fabric.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 370+ for absorbent pads made of thermoplastic
    materials.


CLS 450/41
TXT With stiffening strips, strands, or stays, e.g., wired:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 in which slender elongated elements which
    are inflexible or resiliently elastic are incorporated.

    (1)     Note.  Stays or wire frames, per se, are included in this and
    indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this and indented subclasses are brassieres
    reinforced by the use of stays, strips or filamentary strands united to
    form a stiffener strip.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143,    for body supporters having stays or strips.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    140,    Wireworking, subclass 91 for making crimped or bent wire stays
    employed as stiffeners in garments.

    148,    Metal Treatment, for specially treated metals, including of wire
    springs.


CLS 450/42
TXT Cup form includes spirally arranged strip:

    Subject matter under subclass 41 wherein the breast cup comprises a
    stiffening strip arranged in approximately a helispherical form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90,     for spirally stitched cups.


CLS 450/43
TXT Woven or braided strand-type fabric, e.g., wire gauze:

    Devices under subclass 41 wherein the strips or strands are interlaced to
    form a mesh-type fabric.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     where the fabric included a thermoplastic strand.

    44,     for devices wherein individual strips or strands are arranged to be
    in contact any one with any other one to form a skeletonized structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a single or plural layer web or
    sheet, and particularly subclasses 175+, 190, 193, 196+, and 225+ for such
    a product embodying mechanically interganged strands or strandportions
    (e.g., woven knitted) strands.


CLS 450/44
TXT Cup form includes latticework of strips:

    Subject matter under subclass 41 wherein the breast cup comprises a
    skeletonized structure made by arranging the strips or strands to be in
    contact any one with any other one.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for breast cup-forms comprising strips or strands interlaced to
    form a mesh-type fabric.


CLS 450/45
TXT Paired strips or stays for cup rims with connecting span:

    Subject matter under subclass 41 where there is a sitffener strip or stay
    located at and arranged to extend along at least a portion of the periphery
    of each cup, and these two stays are connected by a bridging piece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for stays detachably mounted in brassieres.


CLS 450/46
TXT With separable joint between paired stays:

    Subject matter under subclass 45 wherein the two stay members may be
    readily disconnected or separated one from the other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 263 for stays having fastening elements in
    association therewith.

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 572+ for separable
    fasteners.


CLS 450/47
TXT Annular cup-rim-encircling stays:

    Subject matter under subclass 45 wherein each stiffening strip or stay
    encircles the peripheral portion of a breast cup, the annular members so
    formed being joined by the bridging member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for annular-type stiffening members individual to one breast cup.


CLS 450/48
TXT Stays with connecting span form U, V, H, or V shape between the breasts:

    Subject matter under subclass 45 wherein at least a portion of the
    stiffening strips or stays are disposed at adjacent inner edges of the
    breast cups and are joined together by a bridging member to thereby form a
    horizontally transverse portion and a pair of upwardly extending arms.

    (1)     Note.  Inverted U- or V-shaped junctions may be found in subclasses
    45, 46, 49 and 80.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass are bridged stay members designed
    to separate the breasts of the wearer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for stays with a bridging member wherein that member is separable.

    47,     for stays that encircle the breast cup.


CLS 450/49
TXT Cup fabric has tunnels separably retaining joined stays:

    Subject matter under subclass 45 wherein the cups include circumferential
    channels or passage-ways having at least one opening to permit the stay to
    be inserted in or removed from the passageway.


CLS 450/50
TXT Plural separate stays diagonally crossing between cups:

    Subject matter under subclass 41 wherein stiffening elements are positioned
    centrally in the front body portion and are arranged to cross over one
    another at a point along the median line of the body portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for joined or united stays having an H- or X-shaped junction.


CLS 450/51
TXT Annular cup-rim encircling stay individual to one cup:

    Subject matter under subclass 41 wherein a stiffening stay in the form of a
    hoop or loop completely encircles the breast cup.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for annular rings which are joined together.


CLS 450/52
TXT Single stay individual to one cup with arcuate portion along bottom rim of
    cup, e.g., u-shaped:

    Subject matter under subclass 41 wherein the lower rim of each breast cup
    is provided with an arcuate, generally semicircular brace.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are frame members, per se.


CLS 450/53
TXT With stiffened supporting means contacting only lower half of breasts:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 having cup structures (1) of rigid material
    or (2) including a rigidified or stiffened portion, the stiffened portion
    being designed to contact the breast only below the nipple.

    (1)     Note.  In (2) above, the brassiere may include a flaccid pocket or
    cup which covers the entire breast, however, the stiffened portion must
    contact the breast only below the nipple.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39+,    for molded plastic brassiere cups.

    41+,    for breast cups reinforced by strips, stays or strands.


CLS 450/54
TXT With means to separably retain breast-form-supplementing pads:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 provided with means designed to embrace or
    retain a breast-building pad; separable fasteners are included as retainers
    where one part of the fasteners is on the brassiere and the complementary
    part may be on the pad.

    (1)     Note.  Pad-retaining pockets must have an open mouth or be closed
    by nondestructible-type separable fasteners.

    (2)     Note.  Pads, per se, that is, lacking means to support the device
    on the body, in which the padding material is removable from a supporting
    or enclosing holder or envelope are found below in subclass 57.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for brassieres having absorptive pads which usually are readily
    removable.


CLS 450/55
TXT With cup-supplementing means to add volume to breast, e.g., pads:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the breast cup is provided with
    supplemental means functioning to increase the apparent size of the breasts
    or to reshape the breasts or the breast region.

    (1)     Note.  Included are rigid or semirigid preshaped forms such as
    hollow cones which distend the breast cup to achieve a desired contour.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for brassieres provided with inflatable chambers.

    56,     for pads designed to be worn only in the lower portion of a
    brassiere cup.

    57,     for pads, per se.


CLS 450/56
TXT Applied to only lower half of breast:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein the supplemental means is formed
    to fit within the lower half only of a cup to contact the breast only below
    the nipple.

    (1)     Note.  Pads in this subclass are designed to support the breast as
    well as augment the appearance thereof.


CLS 450/57
TXT Pads, per se:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 limited to the preshaped filler or cushion
    for the breast cups.

    (1)     Note.  Pads with supporting features, such as straps or adhesive
    areas, will be found in appropriate subclasses above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     54, 55, and 56, for pads having means to maintain them on the human
    body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members) Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, subclasses 7+ for artificial breasts.


CLS 450/58
TXT Separable at front center:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the front portion of the brassiere
    is provided with fastening means so that the brassiere may be opened at the
    front rather than the back thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for brassieres wherein each breasts cup is provided with are
    inforcing element which carries one-half of a readily detachable
    interengaging or coupling means for joining the cup members.

    85,     for brassieres having extended-length body-embracing bands designed
    to wraparound the back of the wearer to be tied in front.


CLS 450/59
TXT With cup supplementing uplift straps or slings diagonally crossings at
    front center:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 having a pair of tensionable straps or the
    like associated with the breast cups and arranged so that each strap
    extends from adjacent the inner lower portion of one breast cup diagonally
    upward to adjacent the upper portion of the other breast cup.

    (1)     Note.  Included are brassieres embodying means whereby each of the
    wearer's breasts is individually supported and lifted.

    (2)     Note.  The brassieres of this subclass are usually designed to
    achieve a definite separation between the breasts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45+,    especially subclass 48, for breast separators of the stay or
    stiffener type.

    60,     for sling members disposed within the breast cup.

    61,     for a pouch-forming member within the cup and see (1) Note to the
    definition of that subclass.

    62,     for a body-embracing hammock like member.


CLS 450/60
TXT With floatingly attached cup-supplementing breast supporting strip or panel:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein each breast cup is provided at the
    inside thereof with an internal breast-engaging strap or sheet having
    marginal or end portions thereof attached to the cup to arrange the strap
    or sheet in a chordal manner with respect to the curved interior surface of
    the cup.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59,     for floatingly attached cup-supplementing straps which cross
    diagonally between the cups.


CLS 450/61
TXT Forming breast receiving pouch with cup bottom:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 wherein the inner strip or panel is
    disposed along the bottom of the cup and is unattached along its upper edge
    to form, thereby, a pocket to receive a portion of the breast.

    (1)     Note.  Disclosures for this subclass found in patents classifiable
    in subclass 59 above have been cross-referenced here; search in subclass 59
    should not be necessary.


CLS 450/62
TXT Supplementary means includes body-girdling straps:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 wherein each inner strap or panel has an
    elongated strip attached thereto and these collectively are of sufficient
    length to encompass the body.


CLS 450/63
TXT Attaching means includes adjustment feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 wherein the means connecting the floating
    portions to the brassiere can be manipulated so that (a) the unattached
    portion can be shortened or lengthened, narrowed or widened, or (b) the
    point of connection to brassiere can be varied.

    (1)     Note.  Elastic portions are not considered to constitute
    "adjustment" features.  Brassieres as used above includes shoulder straps
    and body-girdling straps or bands.


CLS 450/64
TXT Straps narrow bands only, i.e., skeletal type:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the breast supporting or contacting
    parts are composed of narrow elongated tapelike structure and wherein there
    is no sheetlike material covering or forming a pocket for the breast.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41+,    especially subclasses 42, 47 and 51 for stays or wires which serve
    to outline the breast.


CLS 450/65
TXT Elastically expansible cup or cup rim:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the cup is in a contracted
    condition when not applied to the body but when it is applied the structure
    of cup is such as to permit the size of the cup to enlarge and to
    elastically resiliently tend to return to its contracted condition.


CLS 450/66
TXT All-elastic cup:

    Subject matter under subclass 65 wherein the breast contacting sections or
    cups have resiliently elastic characteristics so as to adapt the brassiere
    to breasts of varying sizes.


CLS 450/67
TXT Expansible cup rim, e.g., elastic shirring:

    Subject matter under subclass 65 wherein the cup material is in elastically
    extensible or gathered or puckered at the rim and an elastic means is
    associated with the rim to permit the cup to enlarge and to cause the cup
    to tend to return to a smaller size.

    (1)     Note.  Elastic tapes or panels connected to the cup rim from
    outside the cup area are not here included unless the cup itself is so
    constructed so to enlarge if the elastic is stretched.


CLS 450/68
TXT With means to vary size of breast cups:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the breast-contacting cups are so
    constructed that the enclosed volume or peripheral extent of the rims can
    be enlarged or decreased.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are brassieres having means
    adapted to increase or decrease the size of the breast cups.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66,     for cups which are wholly elastic.


CLS 450/69
TXT By vertical gathering of material between the cups:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein the portion connecting the two
    cups is provided with means to contract the portion in a direction
    approximately normal to the line connecting the centers of the cups.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     for cups which are provided with elastic shirring in their rims to
    permit variations in the size of the cup.


CLS 450/70
TXT Cups joined to common subjacent elastic strip or panel:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the cups are secured at their lower
    edges to an elastic body-contacting band or sheet.

    (1)     Note.  "Common" includes two or more pieces if united one to
    another so as to present an integral strip or panel to which both cups are
    attached.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for "long-line" type brassieres.


CLS 450/71
TXT With variable length connector between cups:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the breast cups are jointed
    together by means which permits the spacing between the cups to be changed
    or altered.

    (1)     Note.  In some cases, the spacing is changed by the pivotal
    movement permitted by the combination of an extensible and an in extensible
    connector vertically spaced from each other, see, e.g., subclass 73,
    hereunder for structures including one connector which is elastic and the
    other which is inelastic.


CLS 450/72
TXT Elastic connector:

    Subject matter under subclass 71 wherein the connection comprises a
    resiliently elastic material.


CLS 450/73
TXT With additional nonelastic connector means:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 including a nonstretchable or
    nonresiliently extensible connecting member or portion.


CLS 450/74
TXT Including plural elastic panels or inserts with diversely oriented
    directions of elasticity:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 made up of a multiplicity of distinct
    pieces having some degree of elasticity and wherein the permissive
    direction of stretch of at least two pieces is in some angular relation
    other than parallel.


CLS 450/75
TXT Including elastic portions with variable modulus of elasticity:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 in which the stretch modulus of elasticity
    of elastic portions of the supporter differs comparatively from one area to
    another or from one direction to another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for similar subject matter in a foundation garment.


CLS 450/76
TXT Including elastic portion with stretch inhibitor or limiter:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising a distinct piece of, or entirely
    constructed of, elastic material and wherein there is provided means acting
    to restrain, check, or set bounds for the stretching of the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for similar subject matter in a foundation garment.


CLS 450/77
TXT With girthwise inelastic size adjustment additional to separable closure:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the brassiere is provided with a
    separable closure to facilitate donning and there is additionally a
    nonstretchable portion which may be changed or altered in girthwise
    dimensions.


CLS 450/78
TXT With means to gather peripheral edge, e.g., drawstring:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 provided with means to contract the lineal
    dimension of an edge portion of the brassiere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     for elastic shirring of the cup rim.

    69,     for means to gather the material between the cups for the purpose
    of adjusting the size of the cups.


CLS 450/79
TXT Body band has overlapping separately secured ends:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the closure of an openable
    brassiere includes portions of the body-encircling band or other segments
    which are long enough girthwise to lap one over the other as the brassiere
    is donned, both free ends of the closure being constructed or adapted to be
    secured in body-embracing relation.

    (1)     Note.  The usual end-to-end joining of the body bands may include
    some overlapping portions but where no effort is made to secure both ends
    of such lapped portions the construction will not be considered
    classifiable in this subclass.


CLS 450/80
TXT Resilient body-clasping band:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including a resilient self-supporting band
    or frame member conforming to the body of the wearer and embracing a
    sufficient portion of the body to support the device thereon.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are snap-on frame members for
    garments.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 52 for aprons having supports.


CLS 450/81
TXT With adhesive means or vacuum cup to secure to body:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 having properties of adherence to the skin
    thus holding the brassiere in position on the body of the wearer.

    (1)     Note.  The adherence is ensured, for instance, by the use of
    pressure sensitive adhesive or by means of suction cups thus making the
    brassiere self-sustaining.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 40.1+ for a
    plural layer web or sheet in which one of the layers must be removed to
    expose an adhesive, and subclasses 343+ for a plural layer web or sheet in
    which the outermost layer is an adhesive, and subclasses 355+ for the
    adhesive composition.


CLS 450/82
TXT Body-embracing band includes detachable connector unit:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 having a body-girdling band in which a
    separable insert is connected so as to be readily detached from the
    remainder of the band.

    (1)     Note.  These units or extensions are intended to provide selective
    diverse lengths to adapt the brassiere for different body girth dimensions.


CLS 450/83
TXT Body-embracing band means includes vertically spaced portions:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein there are means to girdle the body
    connected to the brassiere for supporting it on the body, and the means
    comprises at some point girthwise of the body separate band portions which
    are arranged one above the other.


CLS 450/84
TXT One portion is narrow waist-encircling band:

    Subject matter under subclass 83 wherein one of the separate band portions
    is a vertically thin or narrow band which girdles the body approximately at
    the waistline, there being vertically extending ties connecting this band
    to the brassiere.


CLS 450/85
TXT Extended length wraparound body bands:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 having body-encircling straps of sufficient
    length to wraparound one side to the back of the wearer and extend around
    the other side to the front where the ends of the straps are tied or
    otherwise fastened together.

    (1)     Note.  These straps are so arranged as to make for convenience in
    donning.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for brassieres having a front center closure means.


CLS 450/86
TXT Shoulder strap arrangements and connecting features:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the claim is directed to systems
    for providing over-the-shoulder bands and to the means for attaching the
    bands to the breast-supporting portions and/or body-encircling bands of the
    device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 323 for shoulder straps, per se.


CLS 450/87
TXT Connected by floating extension at or below horizontal mid-cup region:

    Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein the front end of the strap is
    attached to the brassiere in the zone lying below a line through the center
    (nipple area) of the cups, the upper portions of the strap in that vicinity
    being unattached to the brassiere.


CLS 450/88
TXT Detachable, e.g., convertible to strapless:

    Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein the attachment between the strap
    and the brassiere is readily separable at both ends of the strap.

    (1)     Note.  These arrangements usually provide a convertible feature
    whereby the brassiere may be worn as a so-called strapless supporter.


CLS 450/89
TXT With compartment for carrying articles, e.g., coin pocket:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein there is provided a receptacle or
    enclosure other than and in addition to the breast cup adapted for
    receiving and retaining material therein.

    (1)     Note.  These pockets are sometimes intended to carry sachets,
    hearing-aid components, coins, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37      and 54, for brassieres having pockets to receive and hold pads for
    the purposes there set forth.

    49,     for brassieres having a wire-like stiffener separable retained in
    tunnels of the fabric.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 247+ for pockets for apparel-type garments and
    subclass 94 for hunter's coats and other special-article carrying coats.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclasses 101+ for carriers formed
    as articles of clothing or directly or indirectly attached to or supported
    from the body.


CLS 450/90
TXT With reinforcing stitching:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein lines of nonseaming or
    nonsegment-edge-joining stitching are incorporated in the cup or strap
    structure for strengthening said structures or to inhibit distortion of the
    cups.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for brassiere cups reinforced by spirally-arranged stiffener strips
    or stays.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 275 for seam structure specially adapted for
    garments.

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 400+ for sewn stock material or a sewn article
    not specifically provided for in any other class.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 102+ for a
    single or plural layer stock material product including stitching and
    discrete fastener, coating or bond.


CLS 450/91
TXT Reversible:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 having a finished appearance on the inside
    and outside thereof so that the same may be worn with either surface
    exposed.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes brassieres fashioned of two layers of
    fabric of different colors and secured together along their outer edges to
    form a unitary structure adapted to be worn with either face presented to
    the front.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 46+ for garment protectors, e.g., aprons, and
    subclass 105 for waists, e.g., halter type.


CLS 450/92
TXT Methods of making or assembling:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including claims directed to manipulative
    steps of providing segments and assembling and securing together, or of
    manufacturing the finished product.

    (1)     Note.  Because all article patents must disclose the method of
    making, the search for a method of making any particular type of brassiere
    should include the pertinent article subclasses above.  No article-claiming
    patents have been cross-referenced, nor should be, into this subclass
    unless there is present at least one claim to the method.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 243.1+ for processes applicable to garments in
    general.

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 12 for dressmakers' patterns.

    112,    Sewing, for a subclasses 475.01+ for a process of sewing in general.


CLS 450/93
TXT Materials:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 fashioned of single or multiple ply fabric
    involving particular properties or the combination of materials.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass for example are brassieres
    involving use of deposited latex, foam rubber, elastic webbing, synthetic
    fibers; and those fabricated from paper and known in the trade as
    disposable brassieres.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for molded breast cups.

    43,     for breast cups fabricated of interlaced or interwoven strands,
    i.e., wire mesh.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 243.1+ for structure and methods applicable to
    garments in general or to diverse types of garments.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclasses 169+ for knotted fabrics and
    articles.

    87,     Textiles:  Braiding, Netting, and Lace Making, subclass 2 for
    fabric which is extensible either longitudinally or transversely, or both.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, subclasses 383+ for woven fabrics.

    245,    Wire Fabrics and Structure, appropriate subclasses for wire fabrics.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses, for processes within the class definition, for
    molding or shaping of plastic materials.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 98+ for a
    structurally defined single or plural layer stock material product not
    specially provided for in any other class, subclasses 221+ for a single or
    plural layer web or sheet having a structurally defined element or
    component and subclasses 411.1+ for a  nonstructural plural layer web or
    sheet in which the composition of at least one layer is defined.


CLS 450/94
TXT FOR LOWER TORSO INCLUDING THIGHS, E.G., CORSET, GIRDLES:

    Subject matter under the class definition functioning to support or
    compress the human body portions lying generally below the breast and
    extending downward to about the line below the thighs.

    (1)     Note.  These devices are characterized in large part in the
    commercial world as corsets, girdles, abdominal supporters, and waist
    cinches.


CLS 450/95
TXT Combined with apparel type garment:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 which include additional structure forming
    a body-covering of the types recognized in Class 2, Apparel.


CLS 450/96
TXT With shoulder or upper back brace:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 which include means, usually in the nature
    of straps or bands, functioning to apply force to the shoulders or to the
    upper back to support the back or shoulders.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for supporters for the lower torso provided with over-the-shoulder
    straps disclosed for preventing vertical motion of the supporter on the
    body; that is, for supporting the body supporter against gravity or to
    counteract the downward pull of stocking supporters.


CLS 450/97
TXT Comprising sheet rubber or deposited rubber or latex:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 wherein a substantial portion of the
    supporter consists of sheetlike rubber or similar resiliently elastic
    material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is characterized by the resilient material
    being of nonstrand type; the supporter may be formed as by dipping or
    depositing rubber latex or it may be made from material in flat sheet form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116+,   for supporters made in their entirety or resiliently elastic
    strand-type fabrics.


CLS 450/98
TXT With means bridging or filling out hollows in the body:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 wherein a portion of the supporter is
    designed and constructed to extend across a depression on the body of the
    wearer or is supplied with a nonpressure type of pad which acts as a filler
    to fill out a depression.


CLS 450/99
TXT With individual buttock-receiving concavities:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 which include buttock-enveloping pockets
    formed and shaped to receive and mold or support each buttock in a separate
    pocket.

    (1)     Note.  These supporters are intended to accentuate the individual
    buttocks in contrast with other supporters which are designed to envelope
    and compress or flatten the buttocks together.


CLS 450/100
TXT With crotch or leg straps or leg-encircling parts:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 which include means such as a strap, band
    or piece of fabric so arranged with respect to the supporter as to pass
    between the legs of the wearer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95,     for supporters combined with loose-fitting body-coverings such as
    trousers, underpants and skirts.


CLS 450/101
TXT Upper-leg-encircling compressor, e.g., thigh reducers:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the strap, band fabric piece
    girdles the upper leg and is provided with means to constrict the girth so
    as to compress or firmly support the fleshly parts of the upper leg or
    thigh.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    for leg-encircling straps which function only as hold-downs or
    anchoring means to prevent the supporter "riding up" on the body of the
    wearer; in general, these straps are characterized by their strandlike or
    ropelike form, also by the lack of means to tension the strap around the
    leg for the purpose of compressing or supporting the flesh.


CLS 450/102
TXT With detachably connected crotch piece:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein a piece of fabric is attached to
    the supporter in such manner as to extend from the central front lower
    portion thereof between the legs of the wearer to the central rear lower
    portion and wherein at least the front or the back attaching means is of
    the separable fastener type.


CLS 450/103
TXT Completely removable:

    Subject matter under subclass 102 wherein both front- and rear-attaching
    means are separable fastener type whereby the fabric piece may be removed
    as a unit.


CLS 450/104
TXT Including crotch piece, e.g., panty girdle:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein a piece of fabric is attached to
    the supporter in such manner as to extend between the legs of the wearer
    the points of attachment being generally at the lower portion of the
    supporter and at the central part at front and rear thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    for devices having a leg-engaging anchor which is distinguished
    from the leg pieces by reason the anchors being mere bands or straps
    whereas the leg pieces enclose and cover the upper part of the leg.


CLS 450/105
TXT With opening therethrough, e.g., overlapped panel:

    Subject matter under subclass 104 wherein the crotch portion is provided
    with a slit or opening therethrough.

    (1)     Note.  Generally the slit or opening is so arranged as to be
    closable, for example, by providing overlapping parts or by the use of
    separable closures such as slide fasteners.


CLS 450/106
TXT Leg anchors:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein a strap or strand-like member
    passes between the legs of the wearer and functions to prevent the
    supporter "riding up" on the body of the wearer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    for upper-leg-encircling compressors and see the search note
    thereto for the line with this subclass.


CLS 450/107
TXT Comprising latticework of narrow strips or bands, e.g., skeletal:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 wherein the entire body portion thereof,
    except for the closure means, is composed of narrow strips or strand-like
    elements assembled in a crossed relationship so as to form a network.

    (1)     Note.  These structures are to be distinguished from strand-like
    fabrics in that this subclass is intended to take those structures where
    the strips or strands are, in effect, recognized as individual or discrete
    elements in making up the supporter, whereas in a woven or knitted fabric
    the individual strands lose their identity and are not recited as elements
    of the structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for supporters which include an insert-type panel or restricted
    area having perforations or composed of latticework to provide means for
    contacting the body of the wearer with air for ventilation.

    155,    for special materials which include mesh-type fabrics.


CLS 450/108
TXT With apertured insert-type panel for ventilation:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 wherein a section thereof is provided with
    openings or apparatus for the purpose of permitting air to contact the body
    when the supporter is worn on the body.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not take a supporter made entirely of
    open mesh or open weave fabric, rather this subclass is limited to
    structure of a portion only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for supporters made up by the use of narrow strips or bands into a
    skeletal framework, and see (1) Note above.

    155,    for special and significant materials, such as mesh-type stranded
    fabrics.


CLS 450/109
TXT With stiffener for upper margin, terminating substantially above lower
    margin, e.g., waistline antirol:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 having means functioning to render the
    portion of the device adjacent the upper edge nonflaccid and wherein the
    means is of shorter vertical extent than the supporter at the place of
    stiffening.

    (1)     Note.  These devices are usually stays located at the upper margin
    of the supporter, acting to prevent or inhibit the upper margin from
    rolling downward due to bending of the body or to the presence of bulges of
    fatty tissue in the diaphragm area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143+,   for stiffening means generally.


CLS 450/110
TXT With means to supportingly engage apparel-type garment, e.g., skirt
    supporters:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 which include separable fasteners, tabs,
    straps, hooks and other devices designed to be engaged with a garment of
    the type recognized in Class 2, Apparel, for the purpose of supporting the
    garment in relation to the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for brassieres having means to support apparel-type garment.


CLS 450/111
TXT Hosiery supporter:

    Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein the engaging means is of the
    pendant type designed to be engaged with hosiery or other leg coverings.


CLS 450/112
TXT With means to resist vertical motion on body, e.g., friction grips:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 wherein the supporter is provided with
    means functioning to inhibit movement, or "riding up", of the supporter
    with respect to the body when the supporter is worn on the body.

    (1)     Note.  This includes high-friction linings such as rubber or latex,
    and includes vacuum cups or adhesive means having the defined function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for "longline" brassieres having tabs or separable fasteners or the
    like to secure to a subjacent garment or supporter to prevent "riding up"
    of the brassiere.

    106,    for straps, bands or the like engaging around the leg at the thighs
    to prohibit "riding up".


CLS 450/113
TXT Over-shoulder straps:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein the inhibiting means takes the
    form of elongated elements such as ribbons which pass over the shoulder of
    the wearer when the supporter is worn on the body.


CLS 450/114
TXT With stiff or nonflaccid body-supporting plate or panel:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 which include or comprise a relatively
    thin and nearly flat piece or sheet of nonflaccid material.

    (1)     Note.  The piece of material may be perforate, as woven wire, and
    in itself may represent the element which supports the flesh, that is, in
    may be worn in direct contact therewith.  Usually, the piece of material is
    attached to straps or bands which encircle the body to permit the piece to
    be drawn snugly there against for support purposes.


CLS 450/115
TXT With elastic portions having means to limit or control stretching thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 which include a resiliently stretchable
    panel or band and an overlying nonstretchable panel or band so connected or
    attached to the first panel or band as to inhibit or modify the stretching
    action.

    (1)     Note.  The inhibiting or modifying must be expressly taught in
    order to be classified here.  Superimposed panels or bands one at least of
    which is elastic will, to some extent, have a controlling or modifying
    action where one of the panels or bands is inelastic; these are not placed
    here in the absence of the teaching above required.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123,    for superimposed layers one of which may be elastic but wherein
    there is no teaching of control or limit or stretching, and see (1) Note
    above.


CLS 450/116
TXT Elastic in entirety (may include nonelastic closures or girth adjusters):

    Subject matter under subclass 94 constructed wholly of material possessing
    the characteristic or readily recovering size and shape after stretching or
    similar deformation.

    (1)     Note.  The supporter may include closures or adjusting means of
    nonelastic material.


CLS 450/117
TXT Edge joined multipanel:

    Subject matter under subclass 116 made up of a plurality of segments
    connected together at the marginal portions thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122+,   for supporters made up of plural pieces superimposed one on another.


CLS 450/118
TXT With nonparallel lines or elasticity:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 wherein the segments are made up of
    strand-type elastic fabric and the segments are so oriented relative one to
    the other that the strand courses in one segment are nonparallel to those
    in the other segment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for combined brassiere and corset (foundation garment) having
    similar structure.

    124     and 130, for similar structure.


CLS 450/119
TXT Belt-operated lacing for closures or adjusters:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 having a lacing-operated closure or
    adjuster wherein plural strands comprising the lacing are brought together
    and secured to a common member which member is adapted to be tensioned to
    transmit a pull simultaneously to each of the several lacing strands.


CLS 450/120
TXT Vertically slidable overlapped portions, e.g., "telescoping":

    Subject matter under subclass 94 wherein portions of the supporter are
    arranged in shingled or overlapped relation and are permitted to move
    relation to each other, in a vertical direction.

    (1)     Note.  These telescoping connections are usually arranged in the
    back or the front of the supporter to permit bending of the body without
    unduly confining it in the vertical direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for similar connections arranged between a brassiere and a
    subjacent girdle.


CLS 450/121
TXT One portion laced through aperture in another portion:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 wherein the supporter is constructed with
    an orifice, slit or the like in one part thereof and some other part of the
    supporter is led through the opening.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is not intended to take lacing-type or belt
    and bucket-type tensioning or closure means.


CLS 450/122
TXT With superimposed supporting panels or bands:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 having at least two distinct superimposed
    layers each of which exerts a supporting or compressing force on the same
    area of the body at the point of overlay and wherein the layers are free to
    move relative to each other in directions normal to the planes thereof
    except at marginal or isolated points where they may be secured together
    for convenience in handling the supporter.

    (1)     Note.  This intended to exclude a laminated fabric unless the two
    layers are free from each other as set forth above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4       and 5, for "long-line" brassieres having superimposed supporting
    layers.

    8+,     for similar structure in a supporter of the combined brassiere and
    corset (foundation garment) type.

    12+     and 120, for supporters having vertically-slideable overlapped
    portions.

    151,    for bands or tapes which are secured to a panel member to merely
    reinforce the panel.

    153,    for covers or liners for supporters, the cover or liner having no
    supporting function.


CLS 450/123
TXT At least one layer includes elastic feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 122 wherein one or more of the superimposed
    layers includes or consists of material having resiliently elastic
    properties.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    for elastic panels or bands having a stretch-controlling panel or
    band over-lying, and see (1) Note to the definition of that subclass.


CLS 450/124
TXT Superimposed elastic layers having nonparallel lines or elasticity:

    Subject matter under subclass 123 wherein an inner and an outer layer are
    made up of strand-type elastic fabric and the layers are so oriented
    relative one to the other that the strand courses in one layer are
    nonparallel to those in the other layer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97,     for sheet rubber or deposited latex supporters.


CLS 450/125
TXT Layers are readily separable (detachable) one from another:

    Subject matter under subclass 122 wherein one of the supporting bands or
    panels is attached to the other by readily separable fasteners so that they
    may be disassembled one from the other.


CLS 450/126
TXT With selectively different assembled positions:

    Subject matter under subclass 125 wherein the layers may be reassembled in
    any one of several positional relationships.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140,    for panels which are edgewise associated and separably joined with
    means permitting them to be reassembled in any one of several positional
    relationships.


CLS 450/127
TXT Each layer circumferentially separable, with closure:

    Subject matter under subclass 122 wherein each supporting layer is
    circumferentially discontinuous and is provided with a separable fastener
    to secure together the two ends respectively of each layer.

    (1)     Note.  The separable fastener must be other than the means that
    attaches one layer to the other.


CLS 450/128
TXT Each layer substantially separately encircles body:

    Subject matter under subclass 122 wherein each of the supporting layers is
    sufficiently long in a girthwise direction to embrace the body, thus
    constituting in effect two separable supporters.

    (1)     Note.  The two layers may be secured together at a common point,
    such as a back seam.


CLS 450/129
TXT Having pretensioning means bridging girthwise closure:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 having a slit or cleft, the edges of which
    are separable girthwise and are provided with separable fastening means,
    and having also a separately tensionable device extending across the slit
    or cleft functioning as a preliminary closure to relieve the separable
    closure of most of the strain while it is being closed.

    (1)     Note.  The separately tensionable device may itself have separable
    fastener.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for supporters having superimposed layers each of which acts to
    support or compress the body and each of which has a girthwise closure.

    142,    for closures having an interiorly disposed shield to prevent injury
    or chafing of the body by the closure.


CLS 450/130
TXT Elastic portions have nonparallel lines of elasticity:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 which include segments or panels of
    strand-type elastic fabric and the segments are so oriented relative one to
    another that the strand courses in one segment or panel are nonparallel to
    those in another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97,     for supporters made up of homogenous elastic material such as sheet
    rubber or deposited rubber latex.

    118,    for similar arrangements in supporters constructed of elastic
    materials throughout.


CLS 450/131
TXT Elastic bands or panels with varying modulus of elasticity or with stretch
    limiter:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 in which the stretch modulus of elasticity
    of one area differs from that of another area.


CLS 450/132
TXT With elastic band, panel, or portion, e.g., gussets:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 which include some area or segment which
    is made of elastic material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass group is the residual repository for
    supporters under subclass 94 which include an elastic feature not
    specifically provided for above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123,    for supporters having superimposed layers, at least one having an
    elastic feature such as a band or panel of elastic material.

    130,    for supporters having elastic strips, bands or panels wherein the
    lines of elastic stretch of at least two pieces are nonparallel.


CLS 450/133
TXT Detachably secured to garment:

    Subject matter under subclass 132 wherein the elastic segment is readily
    removable from the corset.


CLS 450/134
TXT Girth adjustment by predetermined increments:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 wherein the circumferential measurement
    may be altered in previously established units of length.

    (1)     Note.  Characteristically, these units of length are established by
    rip-out seams in pleats or by inserting, removing or exchanging pieces
    forming a part of the circumference.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94,     for "fitters garments".


CLS 450/135
TXT With insertable or removable girth-changing units:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 wherein a discrete portion of the
    supporter is readily detachable or may be readily added so that the
    body-encircling dimension of the device may be decreased or increased in
    incremental units.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     for similar constructions used in body- embracing bands for
    brassieres.

    125,    for superimposed separately-tensionable supporters where one of the
    devices is readily detachable from the other.

    133,    for readily-detachable elastic segments such as gores, panels, etc.


CLS 450/136
TXT Having girth adjuster and separate nonadjustable separable fastener for
    closure:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 including means to shorten or lengthen the
    body-girdling dimension and including in addition a separable fastener
    which functions to join together edges of the supporter which define a
    closure, the joiner of these edges being such as to preclude a girthwise
    change in dimension.

    (1)     Note.  Included, for example, are corsets having a slide fastener
    closure and a lacing-type girth adjustment.


CLS 450/137
TXT With plural separately acting girth dimension adjusters:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 which include more than one individually
    operable device functioning to shorten or lengthen the body-girdling
    dimension of the supporter.

    (1)     Note.  These devices may be arranged to act in serial or cumulative
    effect circumferentially, or to act in different zones vertically or the
    supporter as at the waistline and at the fleshly part of the thighs.


CLS 450/138
TXT Vertically spaced:

    Subject matter under subclass 137 wherein the devices are arranged to act
    in different vertical zones of the supporter.


CLS 450/139
TXT With stays at closure edges having nonflaccid interengaging fastening means:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 which have two edges abutting to form a
    closure and wherein there are rigid stays or busks at each edge and these
    are separably fastened together by rigid means such as hooks on one and
    pins or eyes on the other.


CLS 450/140
TXT Plural disconnectable panels with selectively different assembled positions:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 constructed of a multiplicity of sheetlike
    parts or panels which are separable one from another at their edge portions
    and which can be reassociated in predetermined different or diverse
    relationships.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126,    for superimposed supporters wherein the supporting layers may be
    disassociated and reassembled in any one of several positional
    relationships.


CLS 450/141
TXT Lacing-type closure with flaccid lace-receiving eyelet or loop:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 comprising closure means wherein the
    lace-receiving aperture or loop is made up in the fabric of the supporter
    or is made up of nonrigid component materials.


CLS 450/142
TXT Closures or girth adjusters with interiorly disposed chafing shield:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 having a slit or cleft with separable
    edges and means to bridge the gap to draw the edges together or toward each
    other (as a closure or girth adjuster, respectively), there begin flaps,
    panels, bands or the like disposed interiorly of the supporter to prevent
    or minimize injury or chafing of the body of the wearer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122+,   especially subclass 127, for supporters with superimposed layers,
    the outer layer of which may include a closure or girth adjuster.


CLS 450/143
TXT With stiffening strips or stays:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 which include slender elongated elements
    which are inflexible or laterally resiliently elastic.

    (1)     Note.  In the art these are commonly referred to as stays, bones,
    busks and stiffeners.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109,    for stays or stiffeners located at the upper edge of a corset to
    resist downward rolling of the upper margin.

    114,    for stiff or nonflaccid plates or panels incorporated in or serving
    as supporting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    140,    Wireworking, subclass 91 making crimped or bent wire stays employed
    as stiffeners in garments, particularly corset stays.


CLS 450/144
TXT Including stay-reinforcers at waistline or broken stay shield:

    Subject matter under subclass 143 wherein there is an additional pad or
    panellike element which serves to inhibit too-sharp bending of the stays at
    the waistline or acts as a puncture-proof shield in the event a stay breaks.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for supporters consisting of narrow straps or bands arranged in
    latticework and which may include or comprise stays.


CLS 450/145
TXT Movably articulated directly one to another:

    Subject matter under subclass 143 wherein the individual stays are movably
    attached one to another without the intervention of the fabric of the
    supporter.


CLS 450/146
TXT Readily separable from supporter, e.g., from pockets:

    Subject matter under subclass 143 having tubelike receptacles within which
    the stay is received, the tube being open on at least one end to permit
    ready removal of the stay.


CLS 450/147
TXT Having means to interengage with lacing cord:

    Subject matter under subclass 143 wherein the stay is provided with
    structural configurations functioning to be engaged with a lacing cord.

    (1)     Note.  Typically, these are apertures or hooks.


CLS 450/148
TXT With closure means for access opening at lower rear margin of
    buttock-girdling member:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 wherein the supporter covers the lower
    portion of the buttocks and has slits, clefts, or the like, to define an
    access opening and the edges of the opening are provided with separable
    fastener elements.


CLS 450/149
TXT With insertable or removable panel unit, e.g., "convertible":

    Subject matter under subclass 94 wherein a discrete portion of the
    supporter may be readily attached or detached; usually these are termed
    "convertible" as from high to low back.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for removable crotch pieces.

    133,    for detachable elastic panels.

    135,    for removable girth-dimension-changing units.

    140,    for plural disconnectable panels with selectively different
    assembled positions.


CLS 450/150
TXT With article carrying pockets:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 wherein there is provided a receptacle or
    enclosure adapted or intended for receiving and retaining articles or
    materials.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89,     for pockets in brassieres.

    146,    for pockets for removably holding stays.


CLS 450/151
TXT Panels reinforced by tapes or bands:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 having a narrow elongated element sewn or
    otherwise secured to the surface of the supporter for the purpose of
    strengthening the panels or sheet material composing the supporter.


CLS 450/152
TXT With loops for donning:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 provided with finger-engaging loops or
    tabs to facilitate drawing the supporter on or off the body.


CLS 450/153
TXT Protective covers, liners, or shields:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 provided with exteriorly or interiorly
    disposed sheets or panels which serve to cover or protect either the body
    or the supporter and which in themselves perform no supporting or
    compressing function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122+,   for superimposed supporting layers.

    144,    for shields applied generally at the waistline to act as
    puncture-proof barriers for broken stays.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclass 96.1 for bandages having means to hold A pad or
    the like to apply pressure to A localized area.


CLS 450/154
TXT Waistlike type, i.e., limited vertical extent:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 which by structure and design function to
    support or compress only that area of the body immediately adjacent to the
    waistline and above the hips or lilac crest.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 11 for baby garments in the form of undershirts
    having no body supporting or compressing function.


CLS 450/155
TXT Abdominal uplifting sling type:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 which include a bandlike element formed of
    flaccid material capable of conforming to the contour of the abdomen and
    extending beneath the abdomen in uplifting engagement therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for similar devices having shoulder straps.

    122+,   for supporters having superimposed panels or bands.


CLS 450/156
TXT Materials and making, e.g., pattern layouts:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 relating to the materials used in making
    supporters and to methods of making or laying-out the same as from
    individual segments.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    602,    Surgery:  Splint, Brace, or Bandage, subclass 900 for materials and
    methods for making bandages other than for the lower torso.


CLS 451/
TTL ABRADING

CLS 451/
TXT
    I.      While theoretically all abrading (or grinding) may be said to
    involve a cutting action, the cutting instrument being a natural one, for
    example, the sharp edges of randomly oriented crystals, as opposed to the
    teeth of a file, milling tool, or the like, nevertheless there is a
    practical distinction between an abrading (or grinding) device on the one
    hand, and a cutting device on the other, as means of working various
    materials, which is sufficiently well understood throughout the industrial
    world to permit this distinction to be made in the classification of
    inventions relating to such devices. The present classification therefore
    excludes any and every form of cutting, milling, or filing if the abrading
    is done with materials of sufficiently fine grain to produce a
    light-reflecting surface or polish.  The term ``abrading" may include a
    polishing device that acts by removal of an integral portion of the
    material acted upon, but not such as depends upon the application of a
    coating capable of taking a polish by friction or upon a compression,
    consolidation, or swaging of the material, such as is involved in the
    method or a device classified in Class 29, Metal Working, subclasses 90.01+
    and Class 144, Woodworking, subclass 49.

    II.     Every invention relating to abrading must have to do either with an
    abrading element; a tool consisting of an abrading element or material and
    a holder by which it may be put to use; a machine embodying an abrading
    material or tool and means for moving it or the work, or an action
    equivalent to that of a tool; a holder for the work; a method or process of
    abrading; an attachment or accessory to a tool, machine, or process; or a
    plurality of these features. An abrasive tool distinguished solely by the
    abrasive material or composition is to be found in Class 51.  See Class 51,
    Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, for a nominal
    recitation of an abrasive tool with a specific composition.

    III.    Abrading machines are herein broadly classed under either of two
    headings, viz, an abrading machine using a tool or material of definite
    shape or character or an abrading machine having no such tool or material.
    The known types of tool are an endless band of abrasive material, a
    nonrotary block or pad, and a rotary cylinder or disk. Machines using a
    tool are differentiated from one another, first, by the character of the
    tool as to the motion given thereto or by the absence of such motion, its
    function being accomplished by movement of the work, and, second, by the
    manner of handling the work.

    IV.     A moving tool has either a continuous longitudinal motion in one
    direction, a reciprocating motion, a rotary motion, or a combination of two
    or more of these motions. In the present classification, no patents are
    placed under the title ``Machine, Reciprocating Tool" in which the tool has
    other than a reciprocating movement, nor any under the title ``Rotary Tool"
    in which it has other than a rotary motion. Those combining these motions
    are placed under the title ``Machine, Rotary Reciprocating Tool." As to the
    second differentiation for machine, it is to be noted that there is
    scarcely a type of work-handling means which has not been applied to and
    used with each and every type of tool.

    V.      In the case of a machine using a rotary tool, a further
    differentiation is based upon whether the abrading is done by the
    peripheral or curved face or by the radial or diametrical plane face of the
    tool or by a combination of abrading surfaces (for example, a cup-shaped
    tool), and upon the pluralization of tools with opposed working faces,
    between which the work is treated.

    VI.     In the case of a stationary tool machine, reciprocating tool
    machine, or tool, per se, differentiation is based upon the flexible or
    rigid characteristics of the tool.

    VII.    An abrading machine is included which depends upon the use of an
    amorphous or loose granular mass of abrading material in which the work is
    immersed or through which it is passed or which is forcibly carried in
    contact with the work. This will be found under the title ``By use of
    plural work holders, without tool" and the subclasses indented thereunder,
    and under the titles, ``Machine"; ``Machine, Rotary Tool"; ``Sandblast"; or
    ``Tumbling device" and the subclasses indented thereunder.

    VIII.A machine which uses abrading instruments of more than one of the
    types recognized in this classification is placed under the title
    ``Machine, combined"; and those in which an abrading means is inseparably
    organized with means for subjecting the material handled to other treatment
    are placed under the title ``Machine, combined, with nonabrading
    operations."

    IX.     With two exceptions, apparatus in which the abrading operation is
    in the nature of cleaning by removal of foreign or extraneous material from
    the surface of the work rather than of an integral portion of the work
    itself is classified in this class. The two exceptions are shotting
    apparatus for bottle cleaning, which is classified in Class 15, Brushing,
    Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, in subclass 95, and a machine or system
    for cleaning the inside of tubular work by passing a solid (sometimes
    abradant) cleaning instrumentality through such work in a fluid stream,
    which is classified in Class 15, subclass 3.5. A device for cleaning by the
    use of brushes only, without an abradant and with or without a liquid, are
    excluded from this class and will be found in Class 15, Brushing,
    Scrubbing, and General Cleaning. See also the search note in reference to
    Classes 51 and 451 in the definition of subclass 3.5 of Class 15 for a
    further statement of the line.

    X.      A shot-peening machine and process for removing material from a
    workpiece, as opposed to that for deforming or burnishing a workpiece
    surface, are found in this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclasses 70+ for a shoe burnishing machine
    and subclass 104 for a shoe burnishing tool.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, for shotting for bottle
    cleaning. Also, see section IX.

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclass 28 for a device for treating
    cloth by rubbing with a sand paperlike surface.

    29,     Metal Working, (see section I), subclass 28 for a lathe with a
    grinding attachment; subclass 89.5 for burning-in, wearing-in, and oil
    burnishing; and subclasses 90.01+ for a burnishing process or apparatus.

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 35+ for a razor with a sharpening feature,
    subclasses 138+ for a knife with a sharpening feature, or subclasses 329+
    for a holder for a detachable blade with a sharpening feature, which
    sharpening feature may be used during normal use  of the knife or may be
    used during sharpening of the blade. See the line expressed in the (2) Note
    after the definition of Class 30, subclasses 451+, for a pencil-sharpening
    implement including a statically related tool and work holder or work guide.

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclass 643 for a match scratcher
    composition or structure.

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, for the
    process or method of making an abrading tool or material to be used in the
    device or process of Class 451.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclass 38 for a rotary tool machine having
    a tool grinder.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 53 for shot blasting (or peening) to
    deform the surface of a metallic member.

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclasses 82+ for a process or
    apparatus relating to tool sharpening by the removal of stock adjacent to
    the edge of same by a cutting or filing action as distinguished from an
    abrading action.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, particularly subclasses 518+,
    560+, and 623+ for apparatus for abrading vegetable material for the
    purpose of hulling or removing the peeling.

    125,    Stone Working, for a process of or apparatus for operating on stone
    other than by abrading a surface thereof (roughening, polishing).

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 75.6 and 76.4+ for a manicuring abrader.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 243+ for a reciprocating disk or plug
    valve with a regrinding feature.

    144,    Woodworking, (see section I), subclass 38 for planing combined with
    polishing of wood; subclass 47 for turning combined with polishing; and
    subclasses 28.1+ for a pencil-sharpening machine which may include an
    abrasive tool.

    157,    Wheelwright Machines, subclass 13 for apparatus and process for
    treating the outer periphery of a rubber tire casing by a slitting, or
    another machine operation other than abrading, which (in the absence of
    this subclass) would ordinarily be classified in accord with the particular
    operation. (The treating of a rubber casing by abrading is classified in
    Class 451, Abrading).

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, for subject matter directed to driving
    or impacting a tool, when such subject matter includes combined features
    peculiar to tool driving, but which does not include features limiting the
    subject matter to a specific tool art, such as specific shape of the work
    contacting portion of a tool, related tools, or an opposed work support.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclass 93 for electrolytic coating in which a
    solid material or member other than an electrode contacts the coating as it
    is formed, subclass 222 for electrolytic coating combined with subsequent
    contacting of a coated layer with a solid member or material (e.g.,
    buffing, burnishing, polishing, etc.), and subclasses 640+ for electrolytic
    erosion to change the shape or surface configuration of an object,
    especially subclasses 661 and 662+ for electrolytic erosion combined with
    mechanical abrasion.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 67 and
    191 for a mercury adhesion or gravity-type separator combined with means
    for rubbing the solids.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 353 for a filter
    combined with a loose-abrasive cleaning means.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, for a comminuting
    process or apparatus which may involve an abrading action. See section 4 of
    the main class definition of that class (241) for the line.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 283 for a blade sharpening or conditioning-type
    magnet device.

    366,    Agitating, for an agitating apparatus and method where there is no
    abrading or surface-finishing use disclosed.

    396,    Photography, subclasses 658+ for photographic burnishing.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 64+ for apparatus
    disclosed as useful with either a milling or an abrading tool.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    particularly subclass 483 for a process of removing the outer covering of
    plant material by abrading.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 289+ for a coating process combined
    with abrading.

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 125, 142, and 166 for dental abrading and
    polishing means.

    483,    Tool Changing, for a transfer means for plural, separate tools
    between storage and a work station.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclass 271 for a tube-making machine which burnishes
    to minutely change the size of the tube.

    520-528,        Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, particularly Class
    523, subclasses 149+, for a composition containing a synthetic resin having
    utility as a friction element or to a process of preparation thereof.

    901,    Robots, subcollection 41 for a tool on the end of a robot arm.


CLS 451/1
TXT PRECISION DEVICE OR PROCESS - OR WITH CONDITION RESPONSIVE CONTROL:

    Process or apparatus under the class definition comprising use of means for
    regulating and limiting the depth of cut of the grinder by controlling the
    feed of the grinder toward the work or of the work toward the grinder.

    (1)     Note.  Means for regulating and limiting the depth of cut of the
    grinder are often referred to as ``sizing" devices.

    (2)     Note.  The above definition is as it has been for a long time
    (except that it now includes processes) and under which the indented
    subclasses (except subclasses 2 and 76) are defined. It is intended that
    the ``condition responsive" art will be collected in this and the indented
    subclasses, to be defined in the future, as follows:

    WITH CONDITION RESPONSIVE CONTROL:
    Abrading (or grinding) under the class definition including the process of
    or means for:


    (a)     detecting any of the following characteristics:

            a state or a property;
    a change in a state or property; or
    an occurrence of a predetermined event;

            in any of the following:

            a workpiece being abraded;
    the abraded product;
    the abrading machine or tool; or
    the environment of the machine or tool affecting the operation thereof; and

    (b)     initiating or modifying (as a direct result of such detection) a
    force or impulse other than that generated or transmitted by the detecting
    means; and,


    (c)     regulating or modifying (as a direct result of such initiation) the
    operation.


    (2-1)   Note.  This definition requires that a patent claim at least four
    instrumentalities or use of same, for original placement herein. One of
    these is an abrading device. The other three are:

    (a)     a sensor (e.g., a photocell system, trip lever, pressure diaphragm,
    etc.) to detect a condition stated in (a) of the definition;

    (b)     an activator (e.g., an element to make or break an electric
    circuit, a clutch, a valve, etc.) to cause a release of energy more than or
    different from that accounted by mere change in condition (e.g., position,
    movement, etc.) of the sensor while it is functioning; and,

    (c)     a controller (e.g., a motor or driver for said apparatus) to change
    or cause the operation of said apparatus.

            Therefore, a cam follower (or sensor) directly linked to a
    controller, whereby follower movement directly effects controller movement,
    is not proper subject matter for this subclass due to lack of an activator
    as defined. However, the same claimed structure is included herein if, for
    example, a claimed cam follower is disclosed as breaking an electrical
    circuit that energizes a motor.

    (2-2)   Note.  A voluntary act of the person operating the machine (the
    ``operative") is not proper subject matter for this subclass; e.g.,
    disclosure of an abrading machine having an on/off switch adapted to be
    manipulated by the operative to start or stop the machine (even though the
    switch initiates a release of energy) is not included under the limitations
    of this definition.


CLS 451/2
TXT Condition responsive control for sandblasting:

    Subject matter under subclass 1, as set forth in the (2) Note, including
    use of means to propel a stream of fluent abrasive material to effect the
    abrading operation.

    (1)     Note.  The stream may be propelled either by a compressed fluid
    (i.e., a gas or a liquid), a magnetic field, or a mechanical centrifugal
    device.

    (2)     Note.  The fluent abrasive material herein may be sand or any other
    particulate material that will perform in like manner when propelled
    against a workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38+,    for a sandblasting process without condition responsive control.

    75+,    for a sandblasting apparatus without a condition responsive control
    means.


CLS 451/3
TXT Cyclic control:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 including use of means having the capacity
    to program or regulate a sequence of operations and capable of programming
    or regulating this sequence of operations so that once the means is
    initiated, no manual intervention is required for the machine to perform
    the sequence of operations.


CLS 451/4
TXT Tape controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 in which the operation is regulated in
    response to information stored on a band member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclass 3 for
    similar control structure for a boring or drilling machine.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 2, 79, and 289 for
    similar control of a gear cutting, milling, or planing machine.


CLS 451/5
TXT Computer controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 in which the operation is regulated by an
    electronic device capable of performing calculations, or compiling,
    correlating, or selecting data.


CLS 451/6
TXT By optical sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 in which a light responsive means regulates
    the abrading operation.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a device in which a beam of light is
    reflected from the workpiece or an index mark thereon to the light
    sensitive means; a micrometer operably connected to a light source; or a
    device in which a tool or a workpiece covers or uncovers the light
    sensitive means for sensing a condition of the tool or the workpiece.


CLS 451/7
TXT Controlling temperature:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 using or having means which regulate the
    thermal level of the abrading machine or of the workpiece.


CLS 451/8
TXT With indicating:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 combined with using means to show the
    status or action of the abrader or the workpiece.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 680 for an electrical
    automatic condition-responsive indicating system for a machine tool.


CLS 451/9
TXT Of tool or work holder position:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 using or including means to show the
    location of an abrading tool or workpiece gripping means.


CLS 451/10
TXT And feeding of tool or work holder:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 combined with the use of means to
    relatively move an abrading tool and workpiece gripping means.


CLS 451/11
TXT With feeding of tool or work holder:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 combined with use of means to relatively
    move an abrading tool and workpiece gripping means.


CLS 451/12
TXT And use of moving abutment:

    Subject matter under subclass 11 combined with use of means which shifts
    the position of a movement blocking member relative to the tool or work
    holder.


CLS 451/13
TXT Moved by cam:

    Subject matter under subclass 12 in which the position of the blocking
    member is changed by engagement of an eccentric surface of a rotary member.


CLS 451/14
TXT Screw actuated:

    Subject matter under subclass 11 wherein the abrading tool is caused to
    move with respect to the work holder by a member adapted to turn about an
    axis, the member having a helical thread adapted to engage a relatively
    movable second member and force relative displacement of the second member
    upon rotation of the helically threaded member.


CLS 451/15
TXT Manually adjustable:

    Subject matter under subclass 14 in which the position of the helical means
    is set by the hand of the operative.


CLS 451/16
TXT Ratchet and pawl drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 14 including use of a circular toothed wheel
    (i.e., ratchet wheel) which is held in position or propelled by a feather
    (i.e., pawl), which wheel serves to turn the screw.


CLS 451/17
TXT Sizing gauge controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 including use of a selected removable
    member of a physical configuration to regulate the operation.


CLS 451/18
TXT Cam actuated:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 wherein the ratchet is caused to move by
    engagement of an eccentric surface of a rotary member.


CLS 451/19
TXT Hydraulically driven:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 actuated by fluid pressure means.


CLS 451/20
TXT Table dog actuated:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 actuated by reciprocating means which
    moves back and forth with a carriage.


CLS 451/21
TXT Tool wear compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 11 comprising means to make allowance for the
    deterioration or impairment of the tool caused by wear.


CLS 451/22
TXT Sizing gauge controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 21 including use of a selected removable
    member of a physical configuration to regulate the operation.


CLS 451/23
TXT Cam actuated:

    Subject matter under subclass 11 wherein the feeding means is caused to
    move by engagement of an eccentric surface of a rotary member.


CLS 451/24
TXT Hydraulically driven:

    Subject matter under subclass 11 actuated by fluid pressure means.


CLS 451/25
TXT Sizing gauge controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 24 including use of a selected removable
    member of a physical configuration to regulate the operation.


CLS 451/26
TXT Control means near and parallel to the abrader:

    Subject matter under subclass 24 in which control means therefor is
    relatively close and parallel to the grinder.


CLS 451/27
TXT Tool interior of workpiece:

    Subject matter under subclass 11 in which the tool moves internal of a
    workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  The apparatus is commonly referred to as a honing device.


CLS 451/28
TXT ABRADING PROCESS:

    Method of performing a grinding operation falling within the main class
    definition or method of performing an ancillary operation not elsewhere
    provided for.

    (1)     Note.  For a process of making an article or blank wherein abrading
    is included in addition to metal working, see the appropriate metal working
    class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 89.5 and 90.01+ for a process of
    wearing-in or burnishing metal.

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, for a
    process of making an abrading tool, material, or composition.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, for a process of cleaning
    and liquid contact with solids not involving (a) the use of an abradant or
    (b) the causing of plural workpieces to tumble or rub against each other,
    particularly subclass 7 for a process involving the use of particulate or
    comminuted solid treating agents.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 640+ for electrolytic erosion to
    change the shape or surface configuration of an object, especially
    subclasses 661 and 662+ for electrolytic erosion combined with mechanical
    abrasion.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclass 483 for a process of removing the outer covering of plant material
    by abrading.


CLS 451/29
TXT Utilizing shield (mask or stencil):

    Method under subclass 28 wherein an abradant-resist is relied on to define
    the work area and to protect underlying portions of the workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this and indented subclasses is a process
    including application, formation, or modification of the resist on the work
    surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    445,    for an accessory including an abrading shield, and see search notes
    thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, particularly subclasses 41+ for a
    step in a chemical etching process of masking the substrate with an etch
    resist.


CLS 451/30
TXT With in situ removal of nonresist portion of shield:

    Method under subclass 29 wherein, preliminary to erosion of the defined
    work area, a non-abrasion-protective portion of the shield member is
    removed from a position overlying the work area.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is the method wherein an abradant in its
    initial function cuts through a nonresist portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for preparation of modification of shield to define the work area.


CLS 451/31
TXT With preparation of shield:

    Method under subclass 29 including forming or modifying the abradant-resist
    to define the work area.

    (1)     Note.  Preparation as contemplated herein is not intended to
    include compounding of materials.

    (2)     Note.  The broad application of a preformed shield to a workpiece
    is insufficient to define a step of ``preparation" for this subclass.


CLS 451/32
TXT Tumbling:

    Method under subclass 28 wherein abrading of one or more workpieces is
    accomplished during a series of free fall movements, or propulsions,
    resulting from forces imparted thereon by a work receptacle in motion
    (generally rotational), and wherein the abrading contact may be:

    (a)     that of mutual attrition between similarly freely moving work
    bodies; and/or

    (b)     that between a work body and the receptacle wall structure; and/or

    (c)     that exercised by an encompassing fluent particulate mass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for a process utilizing a fluent abradant.

    326+,   for corresponding apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 485+ for means to treat
    food by agitating, tumbling, or vibrating.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 5, 22, and
    26 for a related process including mutual attrition and having the function
    of comminuting.


CLS 451/33
TXT Including temperature modification or control:

    Method under subclass 32 auxiliary to the abrading operation and including,
    relative to work or tool, a step of heating, cooling, or maintaining a
    constant temperature condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for a related process with another method of abrading.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 15 for a process of heating or cooling work
    ancillary to a cutting operation.


CLS 451/34
TXT In at least one of plural abrading steps:

    Method under subclass 32 including sequential abrading operations one of
    which is by tumbling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for plural abrading operations in which one operation utilizes a
    fluent abradant.

    57,     for plural abrading operations, generally.


CLS 451/35
TXT With auxiliary work treating or in critical fluent medium:

    Method under subclass 32 including (a) a nonabrading step of altering the
    state or shape of work to facilitate the tumbling operation; or (b)
    tumbling in a particularly defined fluid medium, abradant carrier, or
    atmosphere; or (c) any defined altering of state or shape of work or
    product by a claimed fluid medium, abradant carrier, or atmosphere in which
    the tumbling operation is accomplished.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33      and 53, for a related process including temperature modification or
    control.

    38,     for a related process in blasting.

    54,     for work treatment with a method of abrading, generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 14+ for a process of cutting including
    ancillary treatment of work.


CLS 451/36
TXT Utilizing fluent abradant:

    Method under subclass 28 utilizing an unbonded particulate mass through or
    across which work is carried, or which accomplishes its cutting function
    during motion as a fluid body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32+,    for abrading by tumbling.

    59+,    for a method of abrading in which an unbonded particulate film is
    dependent for cutting contact upon frictional forces thereon developed by a
    backup plate having motion relative to and paralleling the work surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 95 for cleaning
    hollow ware by agitation of particulate material within the ware.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 90.01+ for burnishing or compacting by
    shot blasting.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 7 and 32 for
    cleaning by particulate materials.


CLS 451/37
TXT Combined abrading:

    Method under subclass 36 including plural grinding operations one of which
    is performed on a single workpiece by a fluent abradant and occurs either
    concurrently with, but over a separately defined work surface, or
    sequentially with another grinding operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for sequential abrading steps including use of a mask or stencil.

    34,     for plural abrading steps including one by tumbling.

    57+,    for other plural distinct abrading areas or steps.


CLS 451/38
TXT By blasting:

    Method under subclass 36 wherein cutting is accomplished by forceful
    propulsion of the particulate mass, as free flung bodies, against the work
    surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29+,    for blasting including use of a mask or stencil, and see search
    notes thereunder.

    36+,    the subclass from which this subclass depends, especially subclass
    37, for ``liquid honing," a nonblasting scouring operation by a stream
    having motion substantially parallel to the work surface.


CLS 451/39
TXT With nonsiliceous abradant:

    Method of blasting under subclass 38 wherein the abradant or at least a
    component of an abradant mixture is in character other than a sand (i.e.,
    silica) bearing material.


CLS 451/40
TXT With nonatmospheric fluid carrier:

    Method of blasting under subclass 38 wherein the abradant is borne by a
    liquid or gas medium exclusive of air alone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29+,    for blasting including use of a mask or stencil.

    39,     for blasting by an abradant inclusive of a nonsiliceous material.


CLS 451/41
TXT Glass or stone abrading:

    Method under subclass 28 of grinding glass or natural or artificial stone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 37 for a process of lens making
    involving fusion bonding of glass and grinding, subclass 61 for a process
    of glassworking combined with grinding, and subclass 181 for glassworking
    or treating apparatus combined with grinding means.


CLS 451/42
TXT Lens:

    Method under subclass 41 for grinding a member intended to transmit and
    refract light.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes lens surface polishing as well lens
    generating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240,    255, 256, 277, and 323, for a lens grinding machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 214 for a lens
    wiper, dauber, or polisher.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 37+ for a process of uniting glass
    to glass to make a multifocal lens with or without a step of grinding.

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclass 177
    for a miscellaneous method of making an ophthalmic lens.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclass
    819 for a lens mount.


CLS 451/43
TXT Edging:

    Method under subclass 42 directed to grinding or polishing a
    circumferential margin of a lens.


CLS 451/44
TXT Edging:

    Method under subclass 41 directed to grinding or polishing a
    circumferential margin of a workpiece.


CLS 451/45
TXT Razor, knife, or scissors sharpening:

    Method under subclass 28 for sharpening the cutting edge of cutlery
    comprising a razor, knife, or a blade of a pair of scissors by an abrading
    operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclasses 82+, 89.1, and 89.2
    for miscellaneous tool sharpening.


CLS 451/46
TXT Gauge abrading:

    Method under subclass 28 for grinding a gauge member such as a plug gauge,
    Johanessen gauge, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 501+ for a gauge, generally.


CLS 451/47
TXT Gear or worm abrading:

    Method under subclass 28 for grinding a toothed or helical toothed wheel,
    cylinder, or similar machine element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48+,    for a process for grinding a hob, reamer, or twist drill.

    114+,   for apparatus for grinding a gear by mutual contact between plural
    gears.

    147+,   for a gear grinder having a rotary reciprocating tool of the
    peripheral face type and a rotary gear holder.

    237+    and 281, for a rotary tool in which the abrading action is
    controlled by a template.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 66+ for a thread or
    helix milling process.


CLS 451/48
TXT Drill, thread, thread cutter, reamer, or rotary cutter abrading:

    Method under subclass 28 for grinding a drill, a thread, a thread die or
    cutter, a reamer, or a rotary cutter such as a hob.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for a process of grinding a worm.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclasses 102, 107.1+, and
    108.1+ for other processes of making an auger, die, or drill.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclass 18 for
    structure of that class type including a screw-threading tool combined with
    means to refurbish that tool; subclass 215 for a screw threading tool, per
    se.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 66+ for a thread or
    helix milling process.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, for other processes of forming threads on such articles; except
    as provided for in Class 408.


CLS 451/49
TXT Roll, roller, shaft, ball, or piston abrading:

    Method under subclass 28 for grinding a roll, roller, shaft including a
    spliced shaft, ball, sphere, or piston.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 888.04+, 895.3+, 898.068, 898.069, and
    899+ for a metal working process involving more than mere grinding for
    making a roll or a piston.


CLS 451/50
TXT Ball abrading:

    Abrading process under subclass 49 specifically directed to forming a
    spherical shaped workpiece by abrading (or polishing).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 888.04+, 895.3+, 898.068, 898.069, and
    899+, for a metal working process involving more than mere grinding for
    making a ball bearing or other ball.


CLS 451/51
TXT Ring, tube, bushing, sleeve, or cylinder abrading:

    Method under subclass 28 for grinding a ring, tube, bushing, sleeve,
    cylinder, or the like requiring ``internal" grinding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 888.07+ for a process of making a piston
    ring involving more than grinding.


CLS 451/52
TXT Bearing raceway:

    Method under subclass 51 for grinding a bearing raceway for a ball or
    roller bearing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 898.066 for a process of making a bearing
    raceway involving more than grinding.


CLS 451/53
TXT With critical temperature modification or control of work or abradant:

    Method under subclass 28 auxiliary to the abrading operation and including,
    relative to work or tool, either a particularly defined thermal variation
    or control or else a detailed mode of accomplishing any heating, cooling,
    or constant temperature condition.

    (1)     Note.  The sole disclosure of ``cooling" or of ``supplying a
    cooling liquid" is insufficient to define a ``particularly defined" or
    ``detailed mode..." as above, since liquid coolant is relied on in most
    abrading procedures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for a related process in connection with tumbling, and see the
    search notes thereunder.

    36,     for temperature modification or control due to the fluid carrier of
    a fluent abrasive, or occurring simultaneously with the fluent abrading
    step.


CLS 451/54
TXT With critical nonabrading work treating:

    Method under subclass 28 auxiliary to the abrading step and wherein the
    workpiece is altered in shape or to a particularly defined state, or there
    is claimed specific manipulative steps for accomplishing any alteration of
    state or shape.

    (1)     Note.  The sole disclosure of ``cleaning" is insufficient to define
    the critical work treatment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     for work treatment auxiliary to a tumbling operation, and see the
    search notes thereunder.


CLS 451/55
TXT Deforming:

    Method under subclass 54 wherein the workpiece is altered in shape or
    dimension.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 17, 175, and 176 for work deformation with
    respect to cutting.


CLS 451/56
TXT With tool treating or forming:

    Method under subclass 28 wherein the abradant, either particulate material
    or bonded tool, is altered in state or shape in preparation for, or as an
    incidence of, the abrading operation.

    (1)     Note.  The mutual attrition between tool and workpiece is not
    considered to be ``tool treating or forming."

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     for work treatment auxiliary to a tumbling operation, and see the
    search notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, for an
    abrasive tool making process, material, or composition not elsewhere
    classifiable; and see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 451/57
TXT Combined abrading:

    Method under subclass 28 wherein a workpiece is subjected to at least two
    abrading operations which are relative to one another and occur either (a)
    concurrently, but over separately defined work surfaces, or (b) in sequence.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for plural abrading operations in which one operation is tumbling.

    37,     for plural abrading operations in which one operation utilizes a
    fluent abradant.


CLS 451/58
TXT Utilizing mounted rigid abrading tool only:

    Method under subclass 57 wherein the only tool relied on is a machine
    element of nondeformable bonded abradant.


CLS 451/59
TXT Utilizing nonrigid tool:

    Method under subclass 28 wherein abrasion is accomplished either by an
    unbonded particulate or a deformable tool (e.g., flexible, resilient).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29+,    for abrading by use of a nonrigid tool while using a shield.

    32+,    for abrading by tumbling, which may involve use of a nonrigid tool.

    36+,    for abrading by use of a fluent abradant.


CLS 451/60
TXT Abradant supplying:

    Method under subclass 28 for supplying abrasive materials to the abrading
    zone or zones.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99+,    for a sandblast nozzle, supply tank, or valve.

    446+,   for abradant supplying apparatus.


CLS 451/61
TXT Hollow work:

    Method under subclass 28 for abrading an interior surface of a workpiece.


CLS 451/62
TXT Cam:

    Method under subclass 28 for abrading a plate or cylinder which is intended
    to communicate motion to a follower by means of its edge or a groove cut in
    its surface.


CLS 451/63
TXT Side face of disk:

    Method under subclass 28 for abrading a planar surface of a disk-shaped
    workpiece.


CLS 451/64
TXT MACHINE:

    A complete abrading assemblage under the class definition comprised of
    moving components comprising:

    a.      A base mounted apparatus to which a workpiece is brought for the
    abrading operation, or

    b.      A sandblasting assemblage comprised of means for supplying an
    abrasive in free flight to a workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  A sandblasting assemblage in this subclass may be randomly
    manipulated during use.


CLS 451/65
TXT Combined:

    Abrading machine under subclass 64 having an abrading tool and another tool
    either (a) having a nonabrading function, or (b) having a distinct,
    different abrading function, wherein the first and second tools are mounted
    on a common frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    461+,   for a tool having surfaces for performing an abrading operation and
    another operation


CLS 451/66
TXT Scouring or polishing means:

    Abrading machine under subclass 65 including an abrading device acting to
    remove foreign matter from a workpiece rather than remove an integral
    portion therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for a scouring machine not combined with an additional treating
    structure.


CLS 451/67
TXT With nonabrading means:

    Abrading machine under subclass 65 including a grinding device of this
    class combined with a device for performing another operation cognate or
    accessory to the grinding operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 28 for a combined machine characterized by
    a mechanism for relatively rotating the work and a turning or milling tool
    and which have in addition thereto a grinding mechanism.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 1.1+, 38, and 47 for combined woodworking
    and polishing.


CLS 451/68
TXT Work deformer:

    Abrading machine under subclass 67 including an abrading device of this
    class combined with another device which stresses a workpiece beyond its
    elastic limit, but below the fracture point.


CLS 451/69
TXT Cutter:

    Abrading machine under subclass 67 in which the other device has a sharp
    cutting edge.


CLS 451/70
TXT Including abrader for cut surface:

    Abrading machine under subclass 69 wherein the grinding device is intended
    to abrade the surface of the workpiece previously engaged by the cutter.


CLS 451/71
TXT Drill:

    Abrading machine under subclass 69 in which the other tool is intended to
    turn about an axis and move along that axis with respect to material being
    cut.


CLS 451/72
TXT Having means to refurbish abrading tool:

    Abrading machine under subclass 67 provided with means which dresses or
    trues the grinding tool.


CLS 451/73
TXT Adjunct:

    Abrading machine under subclass 67 in which the other device completes,
    makes up for a deficiency, or strengthens an operation on a workpiece.


CLS 451/74
TXT Graining box:

    Abrading machine under subclass 64 comprising an open work receiving
    receptacle containing loose abrasive material overlying or underlying the
    work and which by relative movement of the work or the receptacle, or both,
    is caused to produce, upon a face of the work, a grained surface suitable
    for surface printing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104+    and 113, for an immersion-type abrader.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 90.01+ for a burnishing apparatus or
    process.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 233+ for
    a solid material sifter and subclasses 422+ for stratifier.


CLS 451/75
TXT Sandblast:

    Abrading machine under subclass 64 provided with means to propel a stream
    of fluent abrasive material to effect the abrading operation.

    (1)     Note.  The stream may be propelled either by a compressed fluid
    (i.e., a gas or a liquid), a magnetic field, or a mechanical centrifugal
    device.

    (2)     Note.  The fluent abrasive material herein may be sand or any other
    particulate material that will perform in like manner when propelled
    against a workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38+,    for a sandblasting process.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 90.1+ for a machine or process for
    burnishing (i.e., condensing, compacting, smoothing, or polishing the
    surface of a metallic or nonmetallic article), including subjecting it to
    shot blasting.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 308+ for apparatus for projecting
    particulate coating material against work.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 393 for a sandblast boiler
    cleaner.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 94 for a heat exchanger with scraping means
    removing a product from an exchange surface.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 54 for means for forming
    a hole in the earth by below ground recirculation of unsupported elements
    (e.g., shot).

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 5 for the
    process of comminuting and subclasses 39+ for a comminutor in which
    material is propelled by a fluid blast.

    291,    Track Sanders, for means for applying sand or like material to the
    wheel tread of a vehicle or to the surface over which that wheel tread is
    to pass.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, for a pneumatic conveyor in general.


CLS 451/76
TXT Hollow interior work:

    Abrading machine under subclass 75 specifically designed to perform an
    abrading operation on the interior surface of a generally hollow
    cylindrical workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  The workpieces of this subclass may comprise a tube, pipe,
    or similar structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    381,    for a work holder for supporting a hollow workpiece in an abrading
    machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 3.5+ for
    cleaning of a tubular conduit. See the search note in reference to Class
    451 in the subclass 3.5 definition for the line between these subclasses.

    122,    Liquid Heaters and Vaporizers, subclass 395 for a sandblaster
    specially adapted for or combined with a boiler.


CLS 451/77
TXT Spark plug:

    Abrading machine under subclass 75 specifically designed to perform
    abrading operations on a fuel igniting device for an internal combustion
    engine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    445,    Electric Lamp or Space Discharge Component or Device Manufacturing,
    subclass 7 for a method of making a spark plug or spark gap and subclasses
    60+ for the corresponding apparatus.


CLS 451/78
TXT Electrical device:

    Abrading machine under subclass 75 specifically designed to perform an
    abrading operation on an electrical device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 592.1+ for a process of making an
    electrical device in general and subclasses 729+ for apparatus for
    assembling an electrical device.


CLS 451/79
TXT File:

    Abrading machine under subclass 75 specifically designed to perform an
    abrading operation on a material working file.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is a patent for cleaning and/or
    resharpening a file.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclasses 12+ for file cutting
    in general.


CLS 451/80
TXT Having moving work holder:

    Abrading machine under subclass 75 provided with means for securely
    supporting and moving the workpiece past the sandblasting means.


CLS 451/81
TXT Endless belt type:

    Abrading machine under subclass 80 wherein the moving work holder consists
    of a belt or beltlike structure having an endless surface movable
    continuously along a path defined by its longitudinal axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 804+ for an endless belt
    conveyor, per se.


CLS 451/82
TXT Rotary:

    Abrading machine under subclass 80 in which the work holder turns about an
    axis to enable the workpiece to be rotated or moved in a circular path
    while being abraded.

    (1)     Note.  For placement in this and indented subclasses, the axis of
    rotation of the work holder does not necessarily have to coincide with the
    axis of rotation of the workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    143+, 173, 210, 246+, 269, 285+, 307+, 324+, and 398+, for other
    rotary work holders used with an abrading machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 793+ for a rotary conveyor,
    generally.

    269,    Work Holders, subclass 57 for a rotary work holder of general
    utility.


CLS 451/83
TXT Rollers:

    Abrading machine under subclass 82 wherein the work holder consists of at
    least a pair of cylinders which physically engage and rotate the workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  In addition to rotating the workpiece, the cylinders may
    convey the workpiece through the abrading area.

    (2)     Note.  A machine including more than one ``pair of cylinders" is
    included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    for a roller work feed for a scouring device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 780+ for a live roller
    conveyor, per se.


CLS 451/84
TXT Table:

    Abrading machine under subclass 82 wherein the work holder is generally a
    flat, circular platform upon which the workpiece is placed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    411+,   for a rotary work table for abrading.


CLS 451/85
TXT Having tumbling barrel:

    Abrading machine under subclass 75 provided with a cylindrical cage or
    rumble capable of rotating into which the workpiece is placed such that the
    workpiece is not securely held in the cage or rumble.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    326+,   for an abrading tumbling device, generally.


CLS 451/86
TXT And centrifugal particle propulsion means:

    Abrading machine under subclass 85 wherein the means to propel the stream
    of abrasive material is a revolving body from which the bits of abrasive
    material are propelled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94+,    for a mechanical centrifugal propelling means for a sandblast
    machine, without a tumbling barrel.


CLS 451/87
TXT Having particle recovery means:

    Abrading machine under subclass 75 provided with means to retrieve abrading
    particles subsequent to the abrading operation.

    (1)     Note.  The sand or abrasive material may be mixed with workpiece
    particles generated by the abrading operation.


CLS 451/88
TXT And separation means:

    Abrading machine under subclass 87 further provided with means to segregate
    the fluent abrasive material from workpiece particles generated by the
    abrading operation.


CLS 451/89
TXT Having sandblast chamber:

    Abrading machine under subclass 75 provided with a substantially closed
    vessel into or through which the workpiece is placed or passed during the
    abrading operation.


CLS 451/90
TXT Having hand-directed sandblast nozzle:

    Abrading machine under subclass 75 including a sandblasting or abrasive
    material stream directing terminal outlet capable of being hand manipulated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for nozzle structure, per se.


CLS 451/91
TXT Abradant propulsion means:

    Abrading machine under subclass 75 including particular means to impel the
    fluent abrasive material against the workpiece.


CLS 451/92
TXT Mobile machine:

    Abrading machine under subclass 91 provided with means capable of making
    the entire machine movable such that the machine can be easily transported
    to, from, or about the workpiece or work area.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    901,    Robots, subcollection 41 for a tool mounted on the end of a
    programmable robot arm.


CLS 451/93
TXT Magnetic:

    Abrading machine under subclass 91 wherein the propelling means is capable
    of impelling the abrasive material by the use of a magnetic field.


CLS 451/94
TXT Mechanical:

    Abrading machine under subclass 91 wherein the propulsion means propels the
    fluent abrasive material by means of a member which physically engages and
    forces the abrasive material into the stream.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86,     for a sandblast machine having a tumbling barrel and a centrifugal
    propulsion means for the sand.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 275 for a
    centrifugal projecting apparatus for comminuting material.


CLS 451/95
TXT Centrifugal batter with abradant supply:

    Abrading machine under subclass 94 wherein the propulsion means comprises a
    revolving body, including particular means for feeding abrasive material
    (or propellant) to the blast conduits in a sandblasting machine.

    (1)     Note.  The propellant may be either a pressurized fluid and/or
    liquid. The term ``propellant" is the medium which carries the abrasive
    material from the supply tank or hopper to the blasting nozzle and
    workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97,     for a centrifugal batter wheel, per se.


CLS 451/96
TXT Powered abradant supply:

    Abrading machine under subclass 95 wherein the propulsion means is provided
    with abrasive material which is caused to flow by means other than gravity.


CLS 451/97
TXT Centrifugal batter:

    Abrading machine under subclass 91 drawn to impeller rotor specifically
    adapted for propelling abrasive material in a sandblasting machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclasses 179+ for a
    fluid impeller rotor in general.


CLS 451/98
TXT Vane structure:

    Abrading machine under subclass 91 drawn to a particular impeller blade
    specifically adapted for propelling abrasive material in a sandblasting
    machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), subclass 233 for fluid
    impeller blade structure in general.


CLS 451/99
TXT Abradant supply structure:

    Abrading machine under subclass 75 including particular means for feeding
    abrasive material (or propellant) to the blast conduits in a sandblasting
    machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    446+,   for other abradant supply structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, for a dispenser of pulverulent material in general.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, for other distributor
    structure, especially subclass 336 for the discharge of a fluent solid, and
    subclass 379 where the material to be projected is contained in a
    hopperlike receptacle usually used for solids.

    291,    Track Sanders, for a sand supply for applying traction-improving,
    abrasive material to a vehicle supporting rail.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclasses 108+ for a fluid current
    conveyor having feeding means.


CLS 451/100
TXT Multiple hopper:

    Abrading machine under subclass 99 provided with at least two receptacles
    for holding the abrasive material wherein one receptacle feeds abrasive by
    gravity to a second receptacle which subsequently feeds abrasive to mixing
    chamber for the abrasive propellant.

    (1)     Note.  The propellant may be a pressurized fluid and/or liquid. The
    term ``propellant" is the medium which carries the abrasive material from
    the supply tank or hopper to the blasting nozzle and workpiece.


CLS 451/101
TXT Valve structure:

    Abrading machine under subclass 75 provided with a flow controller
    specifically adapted for supplying fluent abrasive material to the blast
    conduit in a sandblasting machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    446+,   for an abradant supplying accessory.


CLS 451/102
TXT Sandblast nozzle structure:

    Means under subclass 75 including a particular sandblasting or abrasive
    material stream directing terminal outlet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, for a miscellaneous dispensing nozzle, and see the
    notes to sections 16, 17, and 19 for the distribution of art for sanding;
    abrading; material throwing, spraying, scattering, or dusting; and nozzles.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, for other distributor
    structure, especially subclass 336 for the discharge of a fluent solid and
    subclass 379 where the material to be projected is contained in a
    hopperlike receptacle usually used for solids.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 151+ for a jet pump.


CLS 451/103
TXT Scouring device:

    Abrading machine under subclass 64 for removing foreign or extraneous
    material from the surface of a workpiece rather than from an integral
    portion of the workpiece itself.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66,     for a combined machine involving scouring.

    75+,    for a sandblast-type abrading machine.

    104+    and 113, for an immersion abrading machine.

    328+,   for a tumbling-type abrading machine.


CLS 451/104
TXT Immersion:

    Abrading machine under subclass 103 especially adapted for scouring or
    removing foreign material from the surface of articles rather than removing
    an integral portion of the substance of the article itself and in which the
    work is submerged under a mass of granular abrasive material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113+,   for an immersion abrader, generally.

    328+,   for a tumbling drum.


CLS 451/105
TXT Roller work feed:

    Abrading machine under subclass 104 in which the work is passed by
    feed-rollers through a mass of granular abrasive material for the purpose
    of scouring or removing from the surface thereof foreign or extraneous
    matter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131,    172, 188+, 207+, and 301, for other roller work feeds.


CLS 451/106
TXT Rotary work holder:

    Abrading machine under subclass 104 in which the work is carried by a
    gripping member that turns about an axis through a mass of granular
    abrasive material for the purpose of scouring or removing from the surface
    thereof foreign or extraneous matter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82+,    143+, 173, 210, 246+, 269, 285+, 307+, 324+, and 398+, for other
    rotary work holders used with an abrading machine.


CLS 451/107
TXT Drawing reel:

    Abrading machine under subclass 104 in which the work (e.g., wire) is drawn
    by a winding-drum through a mass of granular abrasive material for the
    purpose of scouring or removing from the surface thereof foreign or
    extraneous matter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176     and 183, for other work feeds of this type.


CLS 451/108
TXT Reciprocating scouring tool:

    Abrading machine under subclass 103 using a tool that moves to-and-fro for
    the application of granular abradant to a workpiece for the purpose of
    scouring (i.e., removing rust or other foreign material).

    (1)     Note.  The workpiece may be a kitchen knife or a similar implement.

    (2)     Note.  Removing rust or other foreign material is included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162+,   for other reciprocating tools.


CLS 451/109
TXT Rotary cylindrical scouring tool:

    Abrading machine under subclass 103 using the peripheral surface of a
    wheellike member of a shape which may be generated by a circle moved
    axially, which member turns about its central axis for the application of
    granular abradant to the workpiece for the purpose of scouring it (i.e.,
    removing rust or other foreign material).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    178+,   for other rotary cylindrical tools.


CLS 451/110
TXT Opposed pair of scouring tools:

    Abrading machine under subclass 109 using opposed rotary cylinders for the
    simultaneous application of granular abrasive material to opposite sides of
    a workpiece for the purpose of scouring the same (i.e., removing foreign or
    extraneous materials).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    132+, 194+, 262+, and 302, for other opposed tools.


CLS 451/111
TXT Rotary disk-shaped scouring tool:

    Abrading machine under subclass 103 employing the flat or plane face of a
    rotary disk for the purpose of scouring or removing foreign or extraneous
    material from the work by loose granular abrasive material applied to the
    disk.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109+,   for other rotary tools of this type.


CLS 451/112
TXT Opposed pair of scouring tools:

    Abrading machine under subclass 111 employing the flat or plane faces of
    opposed rotary disks for the purpose of scouring or removing foreign
    material from work placed between the disks with the aid of loose granular
    abrasive material supplied to the disks.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    132, 190+, 194, 262+, and 302, for other opposed tools.


CLS 451/113
TXT Immersion:

    Abrading machine under subclass 64 in which the workpiece passes through or
    otherwise has its whole surface submerged under a mass of loose abrasive
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for a graining box.

    104+,   for an immersion-type scouring machine.

    328,    for a drum-type tumbling machine.


CLS 451/114
TXT By use of plural work holders, without tool:

    Abrading machine under subclass 64 including a first work member for
    supporting a first workpiece and including a second member for supporting a
    second workpiece, and in which the abrading is accomplished by mutual
    moving contact of the plural workpieces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    326+,   for a tumbling device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, particularly subclasses 90.01+ for burnishing, which
    may include use of plural work holders, without use of a tool.

    125,    Stone Working, subclass 27 for millstone dressing.


CLS 451/115
TXT Of valve and seat:

    Abrading machine under subclass 114 in which the abrading is accomplished
    by mutual moving contact between plural workpieces intended to be used
    together to contain and adjustably restrict the flow of fluid.


CLS 451/116
TXT Plug cock:

    Abrading machine under subclass 115 by which a plug cock and its seat are
    abraded to fit by mutual moving contact, with or without an abrasive supply.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclass 83.5 for a
    portable valve refitting device involving the use of a cutting tool that
    turns about an axis and moves along that axis with respect to a workpiece.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 175+ for a portable
    valve refitting device involving the use of a milling cutter.


CLS 451/117
TXT Poppet valve:

    Abrading machine under subclass 115 by which a poppet valve and its seat
    are abraded to a fit by mutual moving contact.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclass 83.5 for a
    portable valve refitting device involving the use of a cutting tool that
    turns about an axis and moves along that axis with respect to a workpiece.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 175+ for a portable
    valve refitting device involving the use of a milling cutter.


CLS 451/118
TXT Slide valve:

    Abrading machine under subclass 115 by which a slide valve and its seat are
    abraded to a fit by mutual moving contact.


CLS 451/119
TXT Rotary reciprocating tool:

    Abrading machine under subclass 64 using an abrading tool the motion of
    which can be defined as a first movement about an axis and a second
    movement to-and-fro along a line.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass is a machine in which the active face of
    the tool is not necessarily or distinctively either the peripheral or the
    radial face and the reciprocation is other than a simple rectilinear or
    oscillating movement in one plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162+,   for an abrading machine using a reciprocating tool not having
    rotary motion.

    177+,   for an abrading machine using a rotary tool not having
    reciprocating motion.

    421,    for a cutting machine knife sharpening attachment which uses a
    rotary reciprocating abrading tool.

    425,    for a roll or wheel abrading attachment which uses a rotary
    reciprocating abrading tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 32 for a boot
    brushing machine in which the tool has a rotary reciprocating motion.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 189 for a drive means for
    an earth boring tool which reciprocates and rotates the tool.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, for a drilling
    machine which feeds the work or tool or both relative to one another along
    the axis of relative rotation of tool and work; especially, subclass 18 for
    a machine including a tool of that class type combined with abrasive means
    to refurbish that tool, subclass 27 for an operation of that class combined
    with a cutting operation of another class utilizing a crystalline tool, and
    subclass 145 for a tool operable in that class manner having a crystalline
    cutting edge.


CLS 451/120
TXT Cylindrical tool:

    Abrading machine under subclass 119 wherein the abrading tool has a work
    engaging surface coextensive with and parallel to the axis about which it
    turns.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass is a machine in which the reciprocation of
    the abrading tool is other than a simple rectilinear or oscillating
    movement in one plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    178,    for a machine including a cylindrical abrading tool not having
    reciprocating motion.


CLS 451/121
TXT Oscillating:

    Abrading machine under subclass 120 wherein the abrading tool moves
    to-and-fro about an axis.

    (1)     Note.  Including herein is a ``rocking" tool (i.e., one which moves
    to-and-fro about an axis that coincides with the point of engagement of the
    tool with the workpiece).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163,    for an abrading machine including an  oscillating tool not having
    rotary motion about another axis.


CLS 451/122
TXT Harvester knife:

    Abrading machine under subclass 121 especially adapted for sharpening the
    cutting edge of a member intended to be used in gathering agricultural
    produce.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128,    225, 230, 235, 349, 372+, and 421, for other inventions related to
    sharpening an agricultural blade (e.g., a mower or reaper knife).


CLS 451/123
TXT Work rotating:

    Abrading machine under subclass 121 in which the workpiece is caused to
    turn about an axis.


CLS 451/124
TXT Rectilinear:

    Abrading machine under subclass 120 wherein the abrading tool moves
    to-and-fro in a straight line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164,    for an abrading machine using a rectilinearly reciprocating tool
    not having rotary motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, for the driving mechanism.


CLS 451/125
TXT Pattern and follower driver:

    Abrading machine under subclass 124 wherein the rectilinear motion is
    actuated by a moving templet and coacting member riding thereon.


CLS 451/126
TXT Blade reversing (e.g., razor blade):

    Abrading machine under subclass 124 particularly adapted to present to the
    tool, a workpiece comprising a cutting member having a cutting edge in a
    first position, then turn the member over and present it in a second
    position for sharpening opposing bevels of the cutting edge.


CLS 451/127
TXT Compound rectilinear motion:

    Abrading machine under subclass 124 using the external peripheral face of a
    rotary abrading tool which has also rectilinear reciprocating movements at
    angles to each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166,    for an abrading machine using a  tool having compound, rectilinear
    reciprocating motion, but not rotary motion.


CLS 451/128
TXT Harvester knife:

    Abrading machine under subclass 124  especially adapted for sharpening the
    cutting edge of a member intended to be used in gathering agricultural
    produce.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    225, 230, 235, 349, 372+, and 421, for other inventions related to
    sharpening an agricultural blade (e.g., a mower or reaper knife).


CLS 451/129
TXT One-way tool cut:

    Abrading machine under subclass 124 wherein the abrading tool functions
    during its traverse in one direction only, returning idle to the starting
    point.


CLS 451/130
TXT One-way work traverse:

    Abrading machine under subclass 124 in which the workpiece is carried past
    the tool for abrading in one direction only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182+,   260+, and 299+, for other machines having one-way work traverse.


CLS 451/131
TXT Roller work feed:

    Abrading machine under subclass 130 which the workpiece is fed past the
    grinder in one direction only by feed rollers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    172, 188+, 207+, and 301, for other roller work feeds.


CLS 451/132
TXT Opposed:

    Abrading machine under subclass 124 and having a second rotary
    rectilinearly reciprocating cylindrical tool arranged to act upon opposite
    sides of the work simultaneously with or in alternation to the first tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    112, 190+, 194+, 262+, and 302, for other opposed tools.


CLS 451/133
TXT Reciprocating work holder:

    Abrading machine under subclass 132 in which the workpiece is carried by a
    work gripping member that moves to-and-fro.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136+,   170+, 199+, 212+, 264+, 272+, 305+, 314+, 320+, and 392+, for other
    reciprocating work holders.


CLS 451/134
TXT Rotating work holder:

    Abrading machine under subclass 132 in which the workpiece is gripped and
    turned about an axis while being ground.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    and see the notes thereto for rotary work holders.

    140+,   189, 209+, 218+, 227+, 242+, 268+, 283+, 306, 307+, 317+, 394, and
    397+, for other work rotating.


CLS 451/135
TXT Planetary:

    Abrading machine under subclass 124 wherein the tool turns about a first
    axis passing through its geometrical center, which axis, in turn, turns
    about a second axis that is outside the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211     and 271,  for other tools having planetary motion.


CLS 451/136
TXT Reciprocating work holder:

    Abrading machine under subclass 124 having a workpiece gripping means that
    moves to-and-fro.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass are collected those machines in which the
    reciprocating motion of the work holder is other than simple rectilinear or
    rocking motion in one plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    170+, 199+, 212+, 264+, 272+, 305+, 314+, 320+, and 392+, for other
    reciprocating work holders.


CLS 451/137
TXT Rectilinear:

    Abrading machine under subclass 136 in which the workpiece is moved
    to-and-fro along a straight line.


CLS 451/138
TXT Rocking:

    Abrading machine under subclass 136 in which the workpiece is turned
    to-and-fro about an axis that coincides with the point of engagement of the
    tool with the workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  A rocking workpiece is engaged by the abrading tool in the
    manner that a rocking chair is engaged by the floor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171,    201+, 204+, 216+, 226+, 266, 276+, and 396, for other rocking work
    holders.


CLS 451/139
TXT Swinging tool carrier:

    Abrading machine under subclass 124 in which the tool is mounted in a
    swinging frame to permit application of the tool to any desired part of the
    workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174+,   236, 280, and 310, for other swinging tool carriers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    38,     Textiles, Ironing or Smoothing, subclass 45 for a rotary and
    reciprocating ironing roll.

    83,     Cutting, subclass 490 for a rotatable tool carrier.

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 103 for a woodworking machine, generally
    mounted on an overhead pivot, adapted to be freely swung to operative
    position.


CLS 451/140
TXT Work rotating:

    Abrading machine under subclass 124 in which the workpiece turns about an
    axis.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass are collected those machines in which the
    work is rotated without the use of a rotary work holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    189, 209+, 218+, 227+, 242+, 268+, 283+, 306, 307+, 317+, 394, and
    397+, for other work rotating.


CLS 451/141
TXT Helical blade:

    Abrading machine under subclass 140 specifically adapted for sharpening a
    cutting member the cutting edge of which is disposed parallel to and along
    an axis in such a way that the edge extends about the axis as it extends
    therealong.


CLS 451/142
TXT Cylindrical surface (e.g., roll) abrader:

    Abrading machine under subclass 140 especially adapted for grinding an
    outwardly facing surface of the shape of a line which rotates about a
    central axis.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is grinding of a rotating roll, shaft, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146,    258, 254+, and 290, for a disk or wheel abrading machine.

    348     and 424+, for a wheel or roll grinder.


CLS 451/143
TXT Rotary work holder:

    Abrading machine under subclass 140 including a member which grips and
    turns the workpiece about an axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82+,    106, 173, 210, 246+, 269, 285+, 307+, 324+, and 398+, for other
    rotary work holders used with an abrading machine.


CLS 451/144
TXT Pattern and follower driver:

    Abrading machine under subclass 143 wherein the rectilinear motion is
    actuated by a moving templet and coacting member riding thereon.


CLS 451/145
TXT Hydraulic driver:

    Abrading machine under subclass 143 wherein rotary motion is actuated by a
    fluid motor.


CLS 451/146
TXT Disk or wheel abrader:

    Abrading machine under subclass  143 especially adapted for abrading a
    rotary platelike member or rolling element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142,    for a roll grinder.

    146,    254+, 258, and 290, for a disk or wheel abrading machine.

    348     and 424+, for a roll or wheel grinder.


CLS 451/147
TXT Gear abrader:

    Abrading machine under subclass  143 especially adapted for the grinding of
    a gear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for a gear or worm grinding process.

    114+,   for apparatus for grinding by mutual contact between two members
    (e.g., between plural gears).

    237+,   for a templet guided rotary, periphery face abrading tool.


CLS 451/148
TXT Hob:

    Abrading machine under subclass 147 in which the grinding tool is formed
    with a helical groove or tooth on its working surface for meshing with and
    grinding a gear.


CLS 451/149
TXT Turret:

    Abrading machine under subclass 143 in which the workpiece is carried by a
    rotary table presenting a series of workpieces in succession to the grinder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247+,   292, and 401, for other abrading machines with a workpiece carrying
    turret.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 35.5 for a work or tool turret for a
    combined machine.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 813 for an assembly with
    means to turn a shaft or rotatably mounted device about its axis to one or
    more selected loci including means to prevent or hold against rotation at
    such loci.


CLS 451/150
TXT Rectilinearly reciprocating tool carriage:

    Abrading machine under subclass 124 in which the grinding tool is mounted
    on support structure having to-and-fro motion along a straight line.


CLS 451/151
TXT Hydraulic driver:

    Abrading machine under subclass 150 wherein the reciprocating motion is
    effected by a fluid motor.


CLS 451/152
TXT Screw and nut driver:

    Abrading machine under subclass 150 wherein the reciprocating motion is
    effected by relative rotation between coaxial, complimentary threaded
    members.


CLS 451/153
TXT Flexible driver:

    Abrading machine under subclass 150 in which the reciprocating motion is
    effected by a pliant element (e.g., by a rope, chain, or cable).


CLS 451/154
TXT Rack and pinion driver:

    Abrading machine under subclass 150 wherein the reciprocating motion is
    caused by a toothed bar meshed with a gear.


CLS 451/155
TXT Reciprocating spindle:

    Abrading machine under subclass 124 wherein the rotary tool is supported by
    a spindle which also moves in a back and forth linear motion along its axis.


CLS 451/156
TXT Hydraulic driver:

    Abrading machine under subclass 155 wherein the reciprocating motion is
    effected by a fluid motor.


CLS 451/157
TXT Cam and follower driver:

    Abrading machine under subclass 155 wherein the reciprocating motion is
    effected by interengagement of a rotating member having an eccentric
    surface with a member which engages and conforms to the movement of that
    surface.


CLS 451/158
TXT Disk tool:

    Abrading machine under subclass 119 wherein the abrading tool has a radial
    or flat face normal to the axis about which it turns.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass are collected patents in which the
    reciprocating motion of the tool is other than a simple rectilinear or
    rocking reciprocation in a single plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158+,   259+, 353, 359, and 548+, for other rotary abrading disk tools.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 64+ for milling
    generally and subclasses 288+ for planing generally.


CLS 451/159
TXT Oscillating:

    Abrading machine under subclass 158 wherein the abrading tool moves
    to-and-fro about an axis.

    (1)     Note.  Including herein is a ``rocking" tool (i.e., one which moves
    to-and-fro about an axis that coincides with the point of engagement of the
    tool with the workpiece).


CLS 451/160
TXT Rectilinear:

    Abrading machine under subclass 158 wherein the rotary abrading tool  has
    to-and-fro movement along a straight line, in one plane.


CLS 451/161
TXT Gear abrader:

    Abrading machine under subclass 160 specifically disclosed for finishing a
    gear.


CLS 451/162
TXT Reciprocating tool:

    Abrading machine under subclass 64 in which the  abrading tool has a
    to-and-fro abrading movement.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass are collected machines in which the tool
    has other than a simple oscillation in one plane or a simple or compound
    rectilinear reciprocating movement in one plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for a reciprocating tool scouring device.

    119+,   for a rotary reciprocating tool machine.

    351,    for a portable grinding machine with a reciprocating tool.

    426+,   for a reciprocating tool, roll, or wheel grinding attachment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclass 78 for a reciprocating tool machine
    for burnishing boots or shoes.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 33 and 37 for
    a reciprocating brush machine for cleaning or polishing boots.

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 90.3 for burnishing paper with a heated
    reciprocating tool.

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, for a reciprocating ironing tool
    or machine.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 189 and the search there
    noted for a drive means for an earth boring tool which reciprocates the
    tool.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 283 for a
    comminuting machine having a reciprocating comminuting surface.


CLS 451/163
TXT Oscillating:

    Machine under subclass 162 in which the abrading tool moves  to-and-fro
    about an axis, in one plane during abrading.

    (1)     Note.  Including herein is a ``rocking" tool (i.e., one which moves
    to-and-fro about an axis that coincides with the point of engagement of the
    tool with the workpiece).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121+,   for an abrading machine which uses a rotary-oscillating tool.


CLS 451/164
TXT Rectilinear:

    Abrading machine under subclass 162 in which the abrading tool moves
    to-and-fro along a straight line in one plane during abrading.


CLS 451/165
TXT Ultrasonic:

    Abrading machine under subclass 164 wherein the grinding tool is vibrated
    at a frequency higher than that heard by the human ear (i.e., above about
    20,000 cycles per second).


CLS 451/166
TXT Compound rectilinear motion:

    Abrading machine under subclass 164 in which a tool having only
    rectilinearly-reciprocating movements has some of such movements at an
    angle to each other in one plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for a machine having a rotary tool also having a compound
    reciprocating motion.


CLS 451/167
TXT Endless work carrier:

    Abrading machine under subclass 164 operating on work presented by a
    band-type work advancing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184+    and 300, for other endless work carriers.


CLS 451/168
TXT Flexible strip or endless band tool:

    Abrading machine under subclass 164 in which the tool is a flexible or
    yielding end-supported strip or band in distinction from a pad or cushion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    296+,   especially 313+, for other flexible tools.


CLS 451/169
TXT Stropping machine:

    Abrading machine under subclass 168 especially organized and adapted for
    stropping a razor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    316     and 318, for other strops.

    459,    for a strop surface renewing device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 35+, for a razor combined with means to
    facilitate sharpening or for a device to facilitate sharpening a razor, per
    se, if features are claimed restricting the device to use with a razor,
    such as means for securing the blade in operative relation to a gauge or
    guard that protects the skin from cuts.


CLS 451/170
TXT Reciprocating work holder:

    Abrading machine under subclass 164 in which the work holder also has
    to-and-fro movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    136+, 199+, 212+, 264+, 272+, 305+, 314+, 320+, and 392+, for other
    reciprocating work holders.


CLS 451/171
TXT Rocking:

    Abrading machine under subclass 170 in which the work holder turns
    to-and-fro about an axis that coincides with the point of engagement of the
    tool with the workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    201+, 204+, 216+, 226+, 266, 276+, and 396, for other rocking work
    holders.


CLS 451/172
TXT Roller work feed:

    Abrading machine under subclass 164 in which the work is presented by feed
    rollers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    131, 188+, 207+, and 301, for other roller work feeds.


CLS 451/173
TXT Rotary work holder:

    Abrading machine under subclass 164 including a member which grips and
    turns the workpiece about an axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82+,    106, 143+, 210, 246+, 269, 285+, 307+, 324+, and 398+, for other
    rotary work holders used with an abrading machine.


CLS 451/174
TXT Swinging tool carrier:

    Abrading machine under subclass 164 in which the tool is so mounted as to
    be capable of swinging to the desired point of application to the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139,    236, 280, and 310, for other swinging  tool carriers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 490 for a swinging-saw mount.

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 103 for a woodworking machine, generally
    mounted on an overhead pivot, adapted to be freely swung to operative
    position.


CLS 451/175
TXT Having actuating handle:

    Abrading machine under subclass 174 in which the tool is reciprocated for
    grinding by the hand of the operator with a simple rectilinear motion in
    one plane and is mounted in a swinging carrier.


CLS 451/176
TXT Drawing reel:

    Abrading machine under subclass 164 in which the workpiece is a continuous
    length of wire or the like traversed past the tool by a winding-drum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107     and 183, for other work feeds of this type.


CLS 451/177
TXT Rotary tool:

    Abrading machine under subclass 64 using an abrading instrumentality that
    turns about an axis more than 360o during operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109+    and 111+, for a scouring machine which uses a rotary tool.

    119+,   for an abrading machine using a rotary reciprocating tool.

    296+,   for an abrading machine using an endless band tool.

    344+,   for a frame or mount for a portable machine which may use a rotary
    tool.

    420+,   for an attachment to a machine which uses a rotary abrading tool to
    sharpen a knife thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclass 77 for a rotary tool machine for
    burnishing boots or shoes.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 34 for a rotary
    brush machine for cleaning, blacking, or polishing boots.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 28.1+ for a pencil-sharpening machine in
    which an abrasive tool and support structure therefor are in rotary
    relation to a work holder or work guide; and subclasses 28.1 and 28.9 in
    which the tool is nonrotary (stationary in subclass 28.1, reciprocable or
    oscillatory in subclass 28.9) and the work holder is rotated relative
    thereto.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 277+ for a
    rotating comminuting surface.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, appropriate
    subclasses for a drilling machine which feed the tool or work or both
    relative to one another along the axis of relative rotation of tool and
    work.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 64+, Milling,
    especially subclasses 138, 139, and 140 for a machine having means to trim
    edge and to remove scale, raised surface imperfection, flash, or burr.


CLS 451/178
TXT Rotary cylinder:

    Abrading machine under subclass 177 in which abrading is accomplished using
    the axially extending peripheral face of the rotary tool.

    (1)     Note.  The face of the abrading tool is substantially parallel to
    the axis of rotation.

    (2)     Note.  A device including a tool face not clearly radial is
    included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109+,   for a scouring machine that uses a rotary cylinder-type scouring
    tool.

    120+,   for an abrading machine that uses a rotary reciprocating tool.

    352,    for a frame or mount for a portable machine using a  rotary
    cylinder abrading tool.

    541+,   for a rotary rigid cylindrical tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 28.11 and 28.6+ for a pencil-sharpening
    machine in which a peripheral-face abrasive tool is in rotary relation to a
    work holder or work guide; and subclass 28.9, in which the support
    structure for the tool is stationary, relative to supporting structure for
    the machine, and the work holder is rotary, relative thereto.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 64+ for a milling
    machine or for a machine disclosed as being for use with either a milling
    tool or an abrading tool.


CLS 451/179
TXT Linear indexing of the tool:

    Abrading machine under subclass 178 in which the tool is moved to a
    succession of different positions with regular incremental movements
    relative to a linear dimension of a workpiece.


CLS 451/180
TXT Internal:

    Abrading machine under subclass 178 in which the abrading is done by the
    radially inwardly facing peripheral face.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 49+ for a miscellaneous single operation
    machine.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclass 143 for a milling
    machine having means for internal milling.


CLS 451/181
TXT Abrading crank-pin:

    Abrading machine under subclass 180 especially adapted to grind a journal
    bearing for receiving a crankshaft.


CLS 451/182
TXT One-way work traverse:

    Abrading machine under subclass 178 in which the workpiece is carried past
    the tool in one direction only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130+,   260, 261, and 299+, for other machines having one-way work traverse.


CLS 451/183
TXT Drawing reel:

    Abrading machine under subclass 182 having a winding member on which the
    work is wound that turns about an axis and pulls  the work  rectilinearly
    in one direction across the tool

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105     and 176, for other work feeds of this type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    140,    Wireworking, subclass 1 for a combined machine and subclass 139 for
    a wire cutting and straightening machine having a work feed of this type.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, for a miscellaneous winding or
    reeling device.


CLS 451/184
TXT Endless work carrier:

    Abrading machine under subclass 182 having a moving conveyor which carries
    a workpiece rectilinearly in one direction only past the rotary abrading
    tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    for other endless work carriers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, for an endless conveyor, per se.


CLS 451/185
TXT Blade sharpener:

    Abrading machine under subclass 184 especially adapted to sharpen the edge
    of a cutting member.


CLS 451/186
TXT Nut and screw:

    Abrading machine under subclass 182 in which the workpiece is fed past the
    tool by the relative rotation of elements having a helical groove cut into
    their surfaces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 424.8 for miscellaneous
    screw and nut gearing.


CLS 451/187
TXT Blade sharpener:

    Abrading machine under subclass 186 especially adapted to sharpen the edge
    of a cutting member.


CLS 451/188
TXT Roller work feed:

    Abrading machine under subclass 182 in which the workpiece is fed past the
    tool by feed-rollers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    131, 172, 207, and 301, for other roller work feeds.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 604, 608, 611+, 624, and 780+
    for a conveyor, per se, having power-driven roll(s).


CLS 451/189
TXT Work rotating:

    Abrading machine under subclass 188 in which the workpiece is turned about
    an axis, generally by the feed rollers themselves, while being fed past the
    tool in one direction only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    140, 209+, 218+, 227+, 242+, 268+, 274, 283+, 306, 307+, 317+, 379,
    385, 394, and 397+, for other work rotating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 431+ for apparatus for
    advancing and rotating an elongated article by means adapted to engage the
    article between its ends.


CLS 451/190
TXT Opposed abrading tools:

    Abrading machine under subclass 182 in which a plurality of grinding tools
    are located on opposite or different sides of the workpiece and
    simultaneously or successively treat such opposite or different sides
    thereof.


CLS 451/191
TXT Razor blade:

    Abrading machine under subclass 190 in which the work member is intended to
    shave.


CLS 451/192
TXT Blade sharpener:

    Abrading machine under subclass 190 especially adapted to sharpen the edge
    of a cutting member.


CLS 451/193
TXT Blade sharpener:

    Abrading machine under subclass 182 especially adapted to sharpen the edge
    of a cutting member.


CLS 451/194
TXT Opposed abrading tools:

    Abrading machine under subclass 178 in which a plurality of grinding tools
    are located on opposite or different sides of the workpiece and
    simultaneously or successively treat such opposite or different sides
    thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132+,   262+, and 302, for other opposed tools.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclass 50 for a machine
    having a rotary cutting or abrading device for truing the points or sides
    of the teeth of a saw blade.


CLS 451/195
TXT Alternating tools:

    Abrading machine under subclass 194 in which abrading tools act in
    alternation upon a relatively stationary workpiece.


CLS 451/196
TXT Blade sharpener:

    Abrading machine under subclass 195 especially adapted to sharpen the edge
    of a cutting member.


CLS 451/197
TXT Plunger infeeder:

    Abrading machine under subclass 194 in which the work is fed between the
    tools by a reciprocating pushing device.


CLS 451/198
TXT Blade sharpener:

    Abrading machine under subclass 197 especially adapted to sharpen the edge
    of a cutting member.


CLS 451/199
TXT Reciprocating work holder:

    Abrading machine under subclass 194 having a member which carries the
    workpiece in an alternating back-and-forth movement.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes a device in which the work holder has
    a motion other than a rectilinear reciprocation in one plane, a simple
    rocking reciprocation, or such a reciprocation combined with a rocking
    movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    136+, 170+, 199+, 212+, 264+, 272+, 305+, 314+, 320+, and 389+, for
    other reciprocating work holders.


CLS 451/200
TXT Rectilinear:

    Abrading machine under subclass 199 in which the work holder back-and-forth
    movement is in a straight line.


CLS 451/201
TXT Rocking:

    Abrading machine under subclass 200 in which the work holder moves
    to-and-fro about an axis that coincides with the point of engagement of the
    abrading tool and the workpiece and the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    171, 204+, 216+, 226+, 266, 276+, and 396, for other rocking work
    holders.


CLS 451/202
TXT Blade sharpener:

    Abrading machine under subclass 201 especially adapted to sharpen the edge
    of a cutting member.


CLS 451/203
TXT Blade sharpener:

    Abrading machine under subclass 200 especially adapted to sharpen the edge
    of a cutting member.


CLS 451/204
TXT Rocking:

    Abrading machine under subclass 199 in which the work holder moves
    to-and-fro about an axis that coincides with the point of engagement of the
    abrading tool and the workpiece and the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS

    138,    171, 201, 216, 226+, 266, and 276+, for other machines having
    rocking work holders.


CLS 451/205
TXT Blade sharpener:

    Abrading machine under subclass 204 especially adapted to sharpen the edge
    of a cutting member.


CLS 451/206
TXT Blade sharpener:

    Abrading machine under subclass 199 especially adapted to sharpen the edge
    of a cutting member.


CLS 451/207
TXT Roller work feed:

    Abrading machine under subclass 194 in which the workpiece is forwarded
    between the abrading tools by feed-rollers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    131, 172, 188, and 301, for other roller work feeds.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 604, 608, 611+, 624, and 780+,
    for a conveyor, per se, having power-driven rollers.


CLS 451/208
TXT Blade sharpener:

    Abrading machine under subclass 207 especially adapted to sharpen the edge
    of a cutting member.


CLS 451/209
TXT Work rotating:

    Abrading machine under subclass 194 in which the workpiece  turns about an
    axis.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass are collected those machines in which the
    workpiece rotates without the use of a rotary work holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    140, 189, 218+, 227+, 242+, 268+, 283+, 306, 307+, 317+, 394, and
    397+, for other work rotating.


CLS 451/210
TXT Rotary work holder:

    Abrading machine under subclass 209 in which the workpiece is secured to a
    rotary drive element for support and rotation therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82+,    106, 143+, 173, 246+, 269, 285+, 307+, 324+, and 398+, for other
    rotary work holders used with an abrading machine.


CLS 451/211
TXT Planetary:

    Abrading machine under subclass 178 in which the abrading tool is mounted
    for bodily movement in an orbit, as well as for rotation on its own axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135     and 271, for other tools having planetary motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclass 122 wherein the cutting
    tool is supported for rotation about its axis and for relative arcuate
    translatory movement about the circumference of the workpiece.


CLS 451/212
TXT Reciprocating work holder:

    Abrading machine under subclass 178 having means to carry the workpiece in
    an alternating back-and-forth movement.

    (1)     Note.  The reciprocating movement of the work holder in this
    subclass is other than a simple or compound rectilinear movement in a
    single plane, such a movement combined with a rocking or rotary movement, a
    simple rocking movement, or such movement combined with a rotary movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    136+, 170+, 199+, 264+, 272+, 305+, 314+, 320+, and 230+, for other
    reciprocating work holders.


CLS 451/213
TXT Rectilinear:

    Abrading machine under subclass 212 in which the work holder movement is in
    a straight line.


CLS 451/214
TXT Indexing:

    Abrading machine under subclass 213 which is adapted to hold a workpiece in
    a succession of different positions with regular incremental movements
    relative to the abrading surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclass 198 for an indexable
    work holder which feeds a rotary cutter toward the workpiece and subclass
    221 for an indexable work supporting structure.


CLS 451/215
TXT Compound:

    Abrading machine under subclass 213 in which the  work holder straight line
    movement is in two or more directions at an angle to one another.


CLS 451/216
TXT Rocking:

    Abrading machine under subclass 213 in which the work holder moves
    to-and-fro about an axis that coincides with the point of engagement of the
    abrading tool and the workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    171, 201, 204, 226+, 266, and 276+, for other rocking work holders.


CLS 451/217
TXT Hob, tap, or fluted thread:

    Abrading machine under subclass 216 which grinds teeth, grooves, or threads.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 11 and 12 for
    apparatus for or method of hobbing.


CLS 451/218
TXT Work rotating:

    Abrading machine under subclass 213 in which the workpiece is turned about
    an axis while being reciprocated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    140, 189, 209+, 227+, 242+, 268+, 283+, 306, 307+, 317+, 394, and
    397+, for other work rotating.

    274     and 306, for other combined work rotating and reciprocating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 65+ for thread or
    helix generating.


CLS 451/219
TXT Gear forming:

    Abrading machine under subclass 218 which grinds a workpiece to form a gear.

    (1)     Note.  Hobbing by use of an abrading tool is included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147+,   253, and 275, for other gear grinders with a reciprocating or
    rotating work holder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 65+ for thread or
    helix generating.


CLS 451/220
TXT Long helix:

    Abrading machine under subclass 218 which grinds a helical form on a
    workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222+,   for abrading a comparatively short helix on a workpiece to form a
    thread therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 65+ for thread or
    helix generating.


CLS 451/221
TXT Rotary work holder:

    Abrading machine under subclass 218 including a rotary workpiece gripping
    means for rotating with the work during the abrading operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82+,    106, 143+, 173, 210, 246+, 269, 285+, 307, 324, and 398+, for other
    rotary work holders used with an abrading machine.


CLS 451/222
TXT Thread abrader:

    Abrading machine under subclass 218 which grinds a helical groove in a
    workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220,    for an abrading means for forming a long helix on a workpiece.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 65+ for thread or
    helix generating.


CLS 451/223
TXT Including work support engaging work at opposite, axial ends (e.g., opposed
    ``centers"):

    Abrading machine under subclass 222 having a pair of members intended to
    contact an elongated, generally rodlike workpiece at both ends to support
    the workpiece while allowing the workpiece to rotate with respect to the
    abrading tool.


CLS 451/224
TXT Blade sharpener:

    Abrading machine under subclass 213 especially adapted to sharpen the edge
    of a cutting member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202,    203, 206, and 367+, for other reciprocating blade holders.


CLS 451/225
TXT Harvester knife:

    Abrading machine under subclass 213 especially adapted for sharpening the
    cutting edge of a member intended to be used in gathering agricultural
    produce.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    128, 230, 235, 349, 372+, and 421, for other inventions related to
    sharpening an agricultural blade (e.g., a mower or reaper knife).


CLS 451/226
TXT Rocking:

    Abrading machine under subclass 212 in which the work holder moves
    to-and-fro about an axis that coincides with the point of engagement of the
    abrading tool and the workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    171, 201, 204, 216, 266, and 276, for other machines with a rocking
    work holder.


CLS 451/227
TXT Work rotating:

    Abrading machine under subclass 226 in which the rocking workpiece is
    turned about an axis while being abraded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123,    218, 274, and 306, for other combined work rotating and
    reciprocating.

    134,    140, 189, 209+, 218+, 242+, 268+, 283+, 306, 307+, 317+, 394, and
    397+, for other work rotating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, and Planing, subclass 76 for means to rotate
    a workpiece and means to interrelatedly infeed the work relative to the
    tool.


CLS 451/228
TXT Noncircular cross section:

    Abrading machine under subclass 227 in which the workpiece has a
    noncircular cross section, for example a cam or lobed surface.


CLS 451/229
TXT Blade sharpener:

    Abrading machine under subclass 212 especially adapted to sharpen the edge
    of a cutting member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202,    203, 206, 367+, and 392+, for other reciprocating blade holders.


CLS 451/230
TXT Harvester knife:

    Abrading machine under subclass 212 especially adapted for sharpening the
    cutting edge of a member intended to be used in gathering agricultural
    produce.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    128, 225, 235, 349, 372+, and 421+ for other inventions related to
    sharpening an agricultural blade (e.g., mower or reaper knife).


CLS 451/231
TXT Stationary work holder:

    Abrading machine under subclass 178 in which the workpiece is supported by
    a member which does not move during the abrading.

    (1)     Note.  The work position may be changed before or after abrading
    engagement.


CLS 451/232
TXT Reversing, obverting, or pivoting:

    Abrading machine under subclass 231 in which the work holder provides for a
    plurality of work positions by an end for end, edge for edge, or angular
    swing of the work holder.

    (1)     Note.  Included here is a device for sharpening a single edge or
    double-edged razor blade.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    279,    for a similar work holder in combination with a radial face tool.


CLS 451/233
TXT Spaced portions:

    Abrading machine under subclass 231 for grinding at least two distinct
    remote locations on a workpiece.


CLS 451/234
TXT Blade sharpener:

    Abrading machine under subclass 231 especially adapted to sharpen the edge
    of a cutting member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126,    278+, and 364+, for other knife grinders or stationary blade
    holders.


CLS 451/235
TXT Harvester knife:

    Abrading machine under subclass 231 especially adapted for sharpening the
    cutting edge of a member intended to be used in gathering agricultural
    produce.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    128, 225, 230, 349, 372+ and 421 for other inventions related to
    sharpening an agricultural blade (e.g., a mower or reaper knife).


CLS 451/236
TXT Swinging tool carrier:

    Abrading machine under subclass 178 in which the abrading tool is mounted
    in a swinging frame to permit application of the tool to any desired part
    of the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139,    174, 280, and 310, for other swinging tool carriers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 490 for a tool carrier for a rotatable tool,
    which carrier is oscillated or rotated.

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 103 for a woodworking machine, generally
    mounted on an overhead pivot, adapted to be freely swung to operative
    position.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 64+, Milling,
    particularly subclasses 183+ for means to infeed a rotary cutter toward a
    workpiece.


CLS 451/237
TXT Templet:

    Abrading machine under subclass 178 in which the abrading of the workpiece
    is under the control of a pattern and a follower.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125     and 281, for other template combinations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 134.1+ for shaping of wood.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 64+, Milling,
    particularly subclasses 67 and 130 having means to regulate operation by
    use of a templet.


CLS 451/238
TXT Pantograph:

    Abrading machine under subclass 237 wherein the templet is traced by an
    articulated parallelogram linkage which proportionally directs the motion
    of the abrading tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 86+ for other
    pantograph combinations.


CLS 451/239
TXT Rotary templet or pattern:

    Abrading machine under subclass 237 wherein the pattern is rotated.


CLS 451/240
TXT Lens abrader:

    Abrading machine under subclass 239 wherein the rotary templet is
    specifically disclosed for grinding an optical device made from glass,
    plastic, or other transparent material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes a device for lens surface polishing as
    well as one for lens generating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for a method of grinding a lens.

    255,    256, 277, and 323, for other lens grinders.


CLS 451/241
TXT Work guide:

    Abrading machine under subclass 178 including a member or rest to
    facilitate the application of the work to the tool at the proper angle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    267     and 282, for other work guides.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 253.1+ for a work guide.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 205 and 225 for a
    work holder or guide.


CLS 451/242
TXT Work rotating:

    Abrading machine under subclass 178 in which the work is turned about an
    axis while being abraded.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes a machine in which a workpiece is
    other than a disk or wheel and is merely rotated, without the use of a
    specific rotary work holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    140, 189, 209+, 218+, 227+, 268+, 283+, 306, 307+, 317+, 394, and
    397+, for other work rotating.


CLS 451/243
TXT With ``dead" center:

    Abrading machine under subclass 242 in which the workpiece is slidingly
    supported for rotation by a nonrotating member at surface of the workpiece
    that coincides with the axis about which the workpiece rotates during
    abrading.

    (1)     Note.  Opposed ``dead" centers are included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    397+,   for a work holder for an abrading machine having centers which
    support the workpiece for rotation.


CLS 451/244
TXT Work handling:

    Abrading machine under subclass 242 wherein the work is loaded into a
    grinding position, supported for rotation while in contact with the
    abrading tool, and then unloaded.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes patents for centerless grinders
    wherein the workpiece location is fixed during abrading.


CLS 451/245
TXT Through feed:

    Abrading machine under subclass 242 in which the work is traversed axially
    past the abrading tool in one direction during the abrading process.

    (1)     Note.   This subclass includes patents disclosing centerless
    grinding machines having a regulating wheel opposite the grinder for
    rotating and traversing the work past the grinder.


CLS 451/246
TXT Rotary work holder:

    Abrading machine under subclass 242 including a member adapted to grip and
    turn with the work  about an axis more than 360o.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82+,    106, 143+, 173, 210, 246+, 269, 285+, 307+, 324+, and 398+, for
    other rotary work holders used with an abrading machine.


CLS 451/247
TXT Turret:

    Abrading machine under subclass 246 including a rotating table which brings
    a number of workpieces in succession to the abrading tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149,    292, 308, and 401, for other turrets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 35.5+ for plural diverse manufacturing
    apparatus including a work or tool turret.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 813+ for a rotary member
    or shaft with means to index the rotary member or shaft about its axis to
    one or more selected loci including means to prevent or hold against
    rotation at such loci.


CLS 451/248
TXT Blade sharpener:

    Abrading machine under subclass 247 especially adapted to sharpen the edge
    of a cutting member.


CLS 451/249
TXT Spaced abrading areas:

    Abrading machine under subclass 246 in which the workpiece is abraded in at
    least two distinct locations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233+,   397+, and 399, for an abrading process involving plural distinct
    abrading areas on the workpiece.


CLS 451/250
TXT By hob:

    Abrading machine under subclass 246 in which the grinding tool is formed
    with a helical groove or tooth on its working surface for meshing with and
    grinding a gear.


CLS 451/251
TXT Abrading eccentric shape:

    Abrading machine under subclass 246 having means to infeed either the
    workpiece or the grinding tool as the workpiece is rotated in order to
    grind a lobed surface.


CLS 451/252
TXT Valve abrader:

    Abrading machine under subclass 246 particularly adapted to grind a sealing
    surface of a member intended to be used to contain and adjustably restrict
    the flow of fluid.


CLS 451/253
TXT Gear abrader:

    Abrading machine under subclass 246 specifically disclosed for finishing a
    gear by meshing with a toothed grinding tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250,    for abrading a gear by use of a hob.


CLS 451/254
TXT Disk or wheel abrader:

    Abrading machine under subclass 246  especially adapted for the grinding of
    a flat, circular plate or circular ring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142,    for a roll grinder.

    146,    258, and 290, for a disk or wheel abrading machine.

    348     and 424+, for a roll or wheel grinder.


CLS 451/255
TXT Lens abrader:

    Abrading machine under subclass 254 specifically disclosed for grinding an
    optical device made from glass, plastic, or other transparent material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes a device for lens surface polishing as
    well as one for lens generating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for a method of grinding a lens.

    240,    256, 277, and 323, for other lens grinders.


CLS 451/256
TXT Lens abrader:

    Abrading machine under subclass 246 specifically disclosed for grinding an
    optical device made from glass, plastic, or other transparent material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes a device for lens surface polishing as
    well as one for lens generating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for a method of grinding a lens.

    240,    255, 277, and 323, for other lens grinders.


CLS 451/257
TXT Glassware ornamenting:

    Abrading machine under subclass 246 especially adapted for producing a
    decorative pattern on an article made of glass.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is means to produce so-called ``cut-glass."


CLS 451/258
TXT Disk or wheel abrader:

    Abrading machine under subclass 242 especially adapted for grinding a flat,
    circular plate or circular ring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142,    for a roll grinder.

    146,    254+, and 290, for a disk or wheel abrading machine.

    348     and 424+, for a roll or wheel grinder.


CLS 451/259
TXT Rotary disk:

    Abrading machine under subclass 177 in which the abrading is done by a
    rigid tool, including a circular, planar surface, which tool is intended to
    turn about an axis normal to and passing through that surface to abrade the
    work by that surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111+,   158+, and 548+, for other rotary radial face tools.

    353,    for a portable floor grinding machine with a disk tool.


CLS 451/260
TXT One-way work traverse:

    Abrading machine under subclass 259 in which the workpiece is traversed
    past the tool in one direction only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130+,   182+, 261, and 299+, for other machines having one-way work
    traverse.


CLS 451/261
TXT Opposed abrading tools:

    Abrading machine under subclass 260 having a plurality of abrading tools
    located on opposite or different sides of the workpiece which
    simultaneously or successively treat such opposite or different sides
    thereof.


CLS 451/262
TXT Opposed abrading:

    Abrading machine under subclass 259 having a plurality of abrading tools
    located on opposite or different sides of the workpiece which
    simultaneously or successively treat such opposite or different sides
    thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    132+, 158, 194+, 261, and 302, for other opposed tools.


CLS 451/263
TXT Blade reversing:

    Abrading machine under subclass 262 particularly adapted for sharpening
    opposed bevel surfaces of a blade edge wherein each of the opposed abrading
    tools operates on a respective bevel.


CLS 451/264
TXT Reciprocating work holder:

    Abrading machine under subclass 262 having means to carry the workpiece
    alternatingly back-and-forth during abrading.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes a machine in which the reciprocating
    work holder has motion other than a simple rectilinear one or a simple
    oscillation or rocking.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133+,   136+, 170+, 199+, 212+, 272+, 305+, 314+, and 320+, for other
    reciprocating work holders.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclass 162 for means to
    reciprocate or oscillate work.


CLS 451/265
TXT Rectilinear:

    Abrading machine under subclass 264 in which the work holder reciprocation
    is in a straight line.


CLS 451/266
TXT Rocking:

    Abrading machine under subclass 264 in which the work holder moves
    to-and-fro about an axis that coincides with the point of engagement of the
    abrading tool and the workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  A rocking workpiece is engaged by the abrading tool in the
    manner that a rocking chair is engaged by the floor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    201+, 204+, 216+, 226+, 276+, and 396, for other rocking work
    holders.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclass 162 for means to
    reciprocate or oscillate work.


CLS 451/267
TXT Work guide:

    Abrading machine under subclass 262 including a member or rest which
    facilitates the application of the workpiece to the tool at a proper angle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241,    282, 545, 549, and 555, for other work guides.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 253.1+ for a work guide to be used with a
    machine of that class.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 205 and 225 for a
    work holder or guide.


CLS 451/268
TXT Work rotating:

    Abrading machine under subclass 262 in which the workpiece is turned about
    an axis while being abraded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    140+, 189, 209+, 218+, 227+, 242+, 283+, 306, 307+, 317+, 394, and
    397+, for other work rotating.


CLS 451/269
TXT Rotary work holder:

    Abrading machine under subclass 268 in which the workpiece is mounted in or
    on a member which turns about an axis during abrading of the workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82+,    106, 143+, 173, 210, 246+, 285+, 307+, 324+, and 398+, for other
    rotary work holders used with an abrading machine.


CLS 451/270
TXT Orbital:

    Abrading machine under subclass 259 in which the tool rotates about an axis
    which is eccentric to the geometric tool center axis.

    (1)     Note.  The tool rotation is about an axis other than the
    geometrical center of the tool which results in the center of the tool
    being revolved in an orbit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclass 47 wherein
    at least one tool is driven  by an orbiting wrist plate.


CLS 451/271
TXT Planetary:

    Abrading machine under subclass 270 in which the tool revolves about an
    axis within itself and also about an axis outside itself, so as to follow a
    planetary path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135,    211, 437, and 440, for other tools having planetary motion.


CLS 451/272
TXT Reciprocating work holder:

    Abrading machine under subclass 259 having means to carry the workpiece in
    an alternating back-and-forth movement.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes a machine in which the work holder
    has a reciprocation other than a simple rectilinear one, such motion
    combined with work rotating, or a simple rocking or oscillation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    136+, 170+, 199+, 212+, 264+, 305+, 314+, 320+, and 392+, for other
    reciprocating work holders.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclass 162 for reciprocating
    or oscillating means to infeed work to the cutter.


CLS 451/273
TXT Rectilinear:

    Abrading machine under subclass 272 using the radial face of an abrading
    tool having rotary motion only and a work holder having simple rectilinear
    reciprocation.


CLS 451/274
TXT Work rotating:

    Abrading machine under subclass 273 in which the work is rotated during
    reciprocation of the work holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218+,   227+, 306, and 394, for other combined work  rotating and
    reciprocating.


CLS 451/275
TXT Gear generating:

    Abrading machine under subclass 274 specifically disclosed for forming of
    gear teeth on a blank.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147,    161, and 219, for other gear grinding machines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 10+ for gear tooth
    shape generating and subclasses 65+ for thread or helix generating.


CLS 451/276
TXT Rocking:

    Abrading machine under subclass 272 in which the work holder moves
    to-and-fro about an axis that coincides with the point of engagement of the
    abrading tool and the workpiece and the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    171, 201+, 204+, 216+, 226+, 266, 276+, and 396, for other rocking
    work holders.


CLS 451/277
TXT Lens abrader:

    Abrading machine under subclass 276 specifically disclosed for forming the
    surface of an optical device made from glass, plastic, or other transparent
    material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes a device for lens surface polishing as
    well as one for lens generating.


CLS 451/278
TXT Stationary work holder:

    Abrading machine under subclass 259 using a work holder which does not move
    during the grinding operation.


CLS 451/279
TXT Reversing, obverting, or pivoting:

    Abrading machine under subclass 278 in which the work holder provides for a
    plurality of work positions by an end for end, edge for edge, or angular
    swing of the work holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232,    for a similar work holder in combination with a rotary cylinder
    abrading  tool.


CLS 451/280
TXT Swinging tool carrier:

    Abrading machine under subclass 259 wherein the abrading tool  is mounted
    in a carrier which may be swung to apply the tool to any desired point of
    the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     68, 99, 139, 147, 156, 174, and 310, for other swinging tool
    carriers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 490 for a tool carrier for a rotatable tool which
    is oscillated or rotated

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 103 for a woodworking machine, generally
    mounted on an overhead pivot, adapted to be freely swung to operative
    position.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclass 64, Milling,
    particularly  subclasses 183+ for means to infeed a rotary cutter toward a
    workpiece.


CLS 451/281
TXT Templet:

    Abrading machine under subclass 259 in which the abrading of the workpiece
    is under the control of a pattern and a follower.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236+,   for other template combinations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 134.1+ for shaping of wood.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 64+, Milling,
    particularly subclasses 67+; subclasses 79+ and 130 for a pattern
    controlled milling machine; and subclasses 290+ for a pattern controlled
    planing machine.


CLS 451/282
TXT Work guide:

    Abrading machine under subclass 259 using a member to position the
    workpiece with reference to the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241,    267, 545, 549, and 555, for other work guides.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclasses 82+ for sharpening a
    cutting tool other than by an abrading member.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 253.1+ for a work guide for a machine of
    that class.


CLS 451/283
TXT Work rotating:

    Abrading machine under subclass 259 in which the work is turned about an
    axis while being abraded.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes a machine in which the workpiece
    rotates while being abraded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    140, 189, 209+, 218+, 227+, 242+, 268+, 306, 307+, 317+, 394, and
    397+, for other work rotating.


CLS 451/284
TXT Raceway:

    Abrading machine under subclass 283 intended to abrade a workpiece; wherein
    the workpiece comprises a component of a ball-bearing assembly,
    particularly the track on which the balls are to ride.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 80+ for disclosure of deforming during
    rotation of work, especially subclasses 95+ wherein the work is also moved
    longitudinally.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 332 for shaping means imparting rolling action to a discrete
    charge of plastic stock to form a ball.


CLS 451/285
TXT Rotary work holder:

    Abrading machine under subclass 283 including a member adapted to grip and
    turn with the work  about an axis more than 360o.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass and subclasses indented hereunder are
    collected rotary work holders other than those for disk and wheel grinders,
    and those in which the work holder has planetary motion or takes the form
    of a turret.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82+,    106, 143+, 173, 210, 246+, 269, 285+, 307+, 324+, and 398+, for
    other rotary work holders used with an abrading machine.


CLS 451/286
TXT By means loosely confining work:

    Abrading machine under subclass 285 wherein the workpiece is bounded by the
    work holder which is dimensioned so that the workpiece contained therein
    may move within the holder during the abrading operation.

    (1)     Note.  One type of work holder found herein is a work holding ring
    which loosely circumscribes the workpiece.  Such a ring may be provided
    with a pressure plate which urges the work into contact with a grinding
    tool.


CLS 451/287
TXT Planar surface abrading:

    Abrading machine under subclass 285 wherein the work holder rotates the
    work about an axis either parallel to or coincident with the axis of the
    abrading tool.


CLS 451/288
TXT Having pressure plate:

    Abrading machine under subclass 287 including means bearing directly upon
    the work to apply grinding pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286,    for a similar machine including a pressure plate in combination
    with a rotary work holder loosely confining the workpiece.


CLS 451/289
TXT Having vacuum or adhesive securing means:

    Abrading machine under subclass 285 wherein the work holder includes
    suction or adhesive holding means.


CLS 451/290
TXT Disk or wheel abrader:

    Abrading machine under subclass 285 especially adapted for abrading a
    rotary platelike member or rolling element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142,    for a roll grinder.

    146,    254+, and 258, for other disk or wheel grinders.

    348     and 424+, for a roll or wheel grinder.


CLS 451/291
TXT Planetary:

    Abrading machine under subclass 285 in which the work holder revolves about
    its own longitudinal axis and also rotates about a second generally
    parallel axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135,    211, 271, 291, and 329, for other abrading involving planetary
    movement.


CLS 451/292
TXT Turret:

    Abrading machine under subclass 285  in which the workpiece is carried by a
    rotary member which presents a series of workpieces which are also rotating
    about their own axes in succession to the abrading tool.

    (1)     Note.  The rotary member must pause in the abrading position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149,    247, 308, and 401, for other turrets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 35.5+ for a work or tool turret for a
    combined machine.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 813+ for an assembly with
    means to turn a shaft or rotatably mounted device about its axis to one or
    more selected loci including means to prevent or hold against rotation at
    such loci.


CLS 451/293
TXT Blade sharpener:

    Abrading machine under subclass 259 especially adapted to sharpen the edge
    of a cutting member.


CLS 451/294
TXT Means to rotate tool:

    Abrading machine under subclass 177 having detailed mechanisms for
    transmitting or varying the rotary drive motion to the abrading tool.

    (1)     Note.  Mechanism for varying the rotational speed of the tool in
    accordance with the diameter of the tool are here classified.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not include significant parts of the
    machine other than the tool drive, such as the tool or work feeds, if
    provided for in a preceding subclass.

    (3)     Note.  A motor is classified in the appropriate motor classes, but
    the combination of a motor with a tool rotating mechanism is here
    classified when the motor class does not provide for the combination.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241+,   for an abrading tool which is mounted on or driven from another
    machine or device which has parts thereof that are to be abraded without
    removal from the machine or device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 64 for a speed controlling mechanism for a
    combined metal working machine.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 325+ for speed change
    gearing and subclasses 412+ for a gear train.

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems, subclasses 800+ for a single
    motor running-speed control system with feedback or subclasses 825+ for a
    single motor running-speed control system without feedback.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, for a flexible coupling between a torque transmitting shaft
    and a driven member.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, for power
    transmission via an endless belt including control for varying speed ratio.


CLS 451/295
TXT Hydraulic driver:

    Abrading machine under subclass 294 wherein control of the rotary drive
    motion is by way of fluid pressure.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes a patent related to a mechanism for
    imparting rotary motion to a tool by direct application of fluid pressure,
    as well as a device for governing the rotary motion of a tool by fluid
    resistance.  Excluded from this subclass is a device which is indirectly
    actuated by fluid pressure such as a grinder rotated by a piston driven
    crankshaft.


CLS 451/296
TXT Endless band tool:

    Abrading machine under subclass 64 employing an abrading tool consisting of
    a traveling flexible belt of abrading material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    355,    for a frame or mount for an endless band tool.

    491,    for other flexible, endless band tools.

    513,    for a ``flexible-member" tool which is an endless band tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 616 for an endless belt
    abrading grain huller.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 837 for specific means for
    sustaining the belt, holding on a selected path or pressing it against an
    object.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses
    268+ for an endless belt having additional coating, layer, or reinforcement
    of a diverse kind of material.


CLS 451/297
TXT Belt tracking:

    Abrading machine under subclass 296 having means to correct or adjust the
    lateral position of the abrading belt on a support roller.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 3 for a jet control-type
    motor.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 83 for a jet control pressure modulating
    relay or follower.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 57+ for reeling or
    unreeling means including a detector or stop; particularly subclass 57.1
    for such a device with means to shift the web roll axially.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, especially subclass 2 for feeding an
    envelope and subclass 6 for feeding and delivering by a continuous endless
    conveyor.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses
    101+ for a device of that class including means for shifting the belt,
    pulley, or guide roll.


CLS 451/298
TXT Chain:

    Abrading machine under subclass 296 employing an endless abrading band made
    up of a series of flexibly-connected parts, after the manner of a chain.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclasses 78+ for chain
    structure.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 202+ and 237+ for a drive belt which may be of the link type.


CLS 451/299
TXT One-way work traverse:

    Abrading machine under subclass 296 employing an endless traveling abrading
    band and nonrotary means for traversing the work past the abrader in one
    direction only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130+,   182+, and 260, for other machines having one-way work traverse.


CLS 451/300
TXT Endless work carrier:

    Abrading machine under subclass 299 employing a loop-shaped traveling
    abrading band and an endless carrier traversing the work past the grinder
    in one direction only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167     and 184, for other endless work carriers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, for a power-driven endless conveyor, per
    se.


CLS 451/301
TXT Roller work feed:

    Abrading machine under subclass 299 employing an endless traveling abrading
    band and feed-rollers traversing the work past the grinder in one direction
    only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    131, 172, 188, and 207, for other roller work feeds.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 604, 608, 611+, 624, and 780+
    for a conveyor, per se, having a power-driven roller.


CLS 451/302
TXT Opposed endless band abrading tools:

    Abrading machine under subclass 296 employing plural endless traveling
    abrading bands so mounted as to simultaneously act upon opposite sides of
    the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132+,   194+, and 262+, for other opposed tools.


CLS 451/303
TXT Presser or former:

    Abrading machine under subclass 296 employing an endless traveling abrading
    band and having means for pressing the band against the work and causing it
    to conform to the shape thereof.


CLS 451/304
TXT Reciprocating band carrier:

    Abrading machine under subclass 296 employing an endless traveling abrading
    band so mounted in a carrier as to receive a bodily transverse to-and-fro
    movement while running.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162+,   for other reciprocating tools, particularly subclass 168 for a
    reciprocating flexible tool.


CLS 451/305
TXT Reciprocating work holder:

    Abrading machine under subclass 296 employing an endless traveling abrading
    band and a reciprocating work holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    136+, 168+, 170+, 177+, 212+, 314+, and 320+, for other
    reciprocating work holders.


CLS 451/306
TXT Work rotating:

    Abrading machine under subclass 305 employing an endless traveling abrading
    band and a reciprocating work holder in which the work is turned about an
    axis while being reciprocated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    140, 189, 209+, 218+, 227+, 242+, 268+, 283+, 317+, 394, and 397+,
    for other work rotating.

    218,    227, and 274, for other combined work rotating and reciprocating.


CLS 451/307
TXT Rotary work holder:

    Abrading machine under subclass 296 employing an endless traveling abrading
    band and a work gripping member which rotates without reciprocation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82+,    106, 143+, 173, 210, 246+, 269, 285+, 324, and 398+, for other
    rotary work holders used with an abrading machine.

    134,    140, 189, 209+, 218+, 227+, 242+, 268+, 283+, 306, 317+, 394, and
    397+, for other work rotating.


CLS 451/308
TXT Turret:

    Abrading machine under subclass 307 wherein a plurality of rotating work
    holders are indexed by a rotary member into sequential engagement with the
    abrading tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149,    247, 292, 308, and 401, for other turret work holders.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 35.5+ for a work or tool turret.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 813 for a rotary member or
    shaft for indexing (e.g., a tool or work turret).


CLS 451/309
TXT Superposed endless band tools:

    Abrading machine under subclass 296 employing an endless traveling abrading
    band backed by a second endless traveling band.


CLS 451/310
TXT Swinging band carrier:

    Abrading machine under subclass 296 employing an endless traveling abrading
    band mounted on a swinging carrier, permitting it to be positioned with
    relation to the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139,    174, 236, and 280, for other swinging tool carriers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 103 for a woodworking machine, generally
    mounted on an overhead pivot, adapted to be freely swung to an operative
    position.


CLS 451/311
TXT Tension device:

    Abrading machine under subclass 296 for maintaining proper tautness in
    endless traveling abrading bands.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 101+ for a belt tightener.


CLS 451/312
TXT Stationary tool:

    Abrading machine under subclass 64 wherein the abrading takes place solely
    by movement of the workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    423     and 428, for a stationary tool attachment.

    461+,   526+, and 540+, for abrading tool structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclass 79.3 for a stationary tool machine
    for burnishing boots or shoes.

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 28.1 for a pencil-sharpening machine (i.e.,
    one having dynamically related tool and work holder or work guide parts),
    including a stationary tool; and indented subclass 28.11 for a hand
    manipulable pencil-sharpening machine wherein the tool may be held
    stationary in one hand while the other hand operates the work holder or
    work guide.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 274+ for a
    single comminuting surface that is stationary relative to material
    presented to it.


CLS 451/313
TXT Flexible:

    Abrading machine under subclass 312 using a stationary abrading tool of
    yielding or flexible character.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168+    and 296+, for other flexible tools.


CLS 451/314
TXT Reciprocating work holder:

    Abrading machine under subclass 313 employing a relatively stationary tool
    of flexible or yielding character and a work holder moving to-and-fro over
    the same.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    and see the notes thereto for other reciprocating work holders.

    169,    for a stropping machine.


CLS 451/315
TXT Needle-eye polisher:

    Abrading machine under subclass 314 employing a relatively stationary tool
    of flexible or yielding character and a work holder reciprocating
    thereover, and especially adapted for abrading the eye of a needle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    163,    Needle and Pin Making, subclass 1 for miscellaneous apparatus or
    process for needle making.


CLS 451/316
TXT Stropping machine:

    Abrading machine under subclass 314 employing a relatively stationary tool
    of flexible or yielding character and a work holder reciprocating
    thereover, and especially adapted for stropping a razor blade.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169     and 318, for other strops.

    459,    for a strop surface renewing device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 35+ for a razor feature such as means for
    securing the blade in operative relation to a gauge or guard that protects
    the skin from being cut.


CLS 451/317
TXT Work rotating:

    Abrading machines under subclass 313 employing a relatively stationary tool
    of flexible or yielding character and in which the work rotates.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    140, 189, 209+, 218+, 227+, 242+, 268+, 283+, 306, 307+, 394, and
    397+, for other work rotating.


CLS 451/318
TXT Stropping machine:

    Abrading machine under subclass 317 employing a relatively stationary tool
    of flexible or yielding character in which the work rotates, and especially
    adapted to the stropping of a razor blade.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169     and 316, for other stropping machines.

    486,    for a strop surface renewing accessory.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 35+ for a razor feature such as means for
    securing the blade in operative relation to a gauge or guard that protects
    the skin from being cut.


CLS 451/319
TXT Rigid:

    Abrading machine under subclass 312 using an inflexible, stationary tool.

    (1)     Note.  Collected in this subclass are machines in which the work
    rotates independently of the work holder or has motion other than simple
    reciprocation or rotation.


CLS 451/320
TXT Reciprocating work holder:

    Abrading machine 319 employing a relatively stationary tool of rigid
    character, as a hone or whetstone, and a work holder moving to and fro
    thereover.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    136+, 168+, 170+, 177+, 212+, 305, and 314+, for other
    reciprocating work holders.


CLS 451/321
TXT Blade sharpener:

    Abrading machine under subclass 320 especially adapted to sharpen the edge
    of a cutting member.

    (1)     Note.  Sharpening of a razor blade is included in this subclass.


CLS 451/322
TXT Blade reversing:

    Abrading machine under subclass 321 employing a relatively stationary tool
    of rigid character, as a hone or whetstone, and a work holder reciprocating
    thereover having means by which the direction of presentation of the blade
    edge is reversed at each stroke of the work holder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 35+ for a razor feature such as means for
    securing the blade in operative relation to a gauge or guard that protects
    the skin from being cut.


CLS 451/323
TXT Lens abrader:

    Abrading machine under subclass 320 specifically disclosed for grinding an
    optical device made from glass, plastic, or other transparent material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes a device for lens surface polishing as
    well as one for lens generating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for a method of grinding a lens.

    240,    255, 256, and 277, for other lens grinders.


CLS 451/324
TXT Rotary work holder:

    Abrading machine under subclass 319 employing a relatively stationary tool
    of rigid character and in which the work is rotated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82+,    106, 143+, 173, 210, 246+, 269, 285+, 307+, and 398+, for other
    rotary work holders used with an abrading machine.


CLS 451/325
TXT Lens abrader:

    Abrading machine under subclass 324 especially adapted for abrading an
    optical device made from glass, plastic, or other transparent material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42+,    for a lens grinding process.

    240,    277, 256, and 323, for other lens grinders.


CLS 451/326
TXT Tumbling device:

    Abrading machine or abrading shape for use therewith under subclass 64
    including means for abrading of one or more workpieces during a series of
    free fall movements, or propulsions, resulting from forces imparted thereon
    by a work receptacle in motion (generally rotational), and wherein the
    abrading contact may be:

    (a)     that of mutual attrition between similarly freely moving work
    bodies; and/or

    (b)     that between a work body and the receptacle wall structure; and/or

    (c)     that exercised by an encompassing fluent particulate mass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31+,    for a tumbling process.

    74,     for a graining box.

    75+,    for a sandblast machine.

    104+    and 113, for an immersion abrading machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 519+, 560+, and 623 for
    hulling and peeling apparatus including abrasion by tumbling but in which
    the material is usually contacted by an abrading tool.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 170+, and
    the notes thereto for a rotating receptacle, having a loose grinding
    material and subclass 284 for mutual attrition or compression comminutors.

    366,    Agitating, apparatus and methods where there is no abrading or
    surface-finishing use disclosed.


CLS 451/327
TXT Rotating work about vertical axis:

    Abrading machine under subclass 326 provided with an annular and/or
    spiral-shaped structure which causes the workpieces to move about a
    vertical axis in an annular and/or spiral path.


CLS 451/328
TXT Drum:

    Abrading machine under subclass 326 comprising a rotary drum or container,
    commonly known also as a ``rumble."

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is generic or residual with respect to rotary
    tumbling drums regardless of the expressed function, except as noted in the
    search notes below.

    (2)     Note.  Included here are means for fluid contact of work combined
    with drum mechanism.  The inclusion of means to treat the fluid, other than
    pumping or recirculation means, is too much for this subclass and requires
    classification on the basis of the disclosed function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85+,    for a tumbling barrel having means for delivering an abradant blast
    upon the work.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 18 for textile
    treating apparatus including means to reclaim and reuse a solvent.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclass 30 for rotary drum leather treater.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 605+ and 630+ for a
    drum for hulling or peeling that may rotate.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 19 and 417+ for coating apparatus
    having means to tumble work and coating material.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses for
    cleaning by tumbling in a rotary drum device without an abradant and
    involving liquid contact.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 88 and 89+ for a rotary heat exchange
    drum.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 176+ and
    the notes thereto for rotary drum comminutors.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 220+ for a rotary drum agitator.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 209+ for chemical apparatus
    employing a tank which rotates during use.


CLS 451/329
TXT Planetary:

    Abrading machine under subclass 328 wherein the drum revolves about its own
    longitudinal axis and also rotates about a second generally parallel axis.


CLS 451/330
TXT Tumbling shapes:

    Shapes under subclass 326 used in connection with a tumbling machine to
    assist in the abrasion of the workpieces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Materials, and Compositions, for
    abrasive compositions.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 184 for
    similar articles used in comminution.


CLS 451/331
TXT WORK FEEDER:

    Means under the class definition for advancing a workpiece into abrading
    contact with the abrading instrument without regard to the special
    character of that instrument or of the means for securing the workpiece
    against displacement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    364+,   for means for securing the work in position or traversing it past
    the grinder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 227+ and 250+ for feeding a workpiece
    to a rolling mill.

    82,     Turning, subclasses 124+ for a lathe having a work feeding or
    removing means and subclasses 132+ for a lathe carriage feed.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 242.1+ for a feed or presser mechanism
    particularly adapted for use in woodworking.

    221,    Article Dispensing, for an article dispenser (feeder) not otherwise
    provided for, and see the class definition of Class 221 for a statement of
    the class lines and for the disposition of a related disclosure of an
    article or strip feeding process or apparatus.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, for a method of, or
    apparatus for, feeding material, without utilizing the leading and trailing
    end, to effect movement of the material.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 288+ for a planing
    method or machine.

    413,    Sheet Metal Container Making, subclass 70 for blank work feeding.


CLS 451/332
TXT Rotary:

    Work feeder under subclass 331 wherein the workpiece is carried by a
    rotating member into contact with the abrading tool.


CLS 451/333
TXT With hopper or magazine:

    Work feeder under subclass 332 including a receptacle for holding and
    discharging workpieces in a controlled manner to the rotary work feeder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 424 for a receptacle that holds a supply
    of discrete articles of work to be deformed.

    82,     Turning, subclasses 125+ for a magazine-type storage means in which
    a plurality of pieces of work can be accumulated in an orderly arrangement
    and positioned such that the pieces may be engaged by the work feeder or
    remover.

    83,     Cutting, subclass 417 for means to store work articles including a
    hopper, work-storage magazine, or gravity fed chute serving to hold a
    reserve supply of work to be cut.

    140,    Wireworking, subclasses 27 and 28 for a wire fence making machine
    provided with a hopper that supplies slats for the manufacture of fencing
    and subclass 53 for a machine having a magazine for a supply of clips, lock
    plates, or similar members.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 241+ for subject matter including
    means to selectively vary the dimensions of the dispenser or some part
    thereof to thereby accommodate different size articles and wherein the
    supply of source dimensions are selectively variable.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, subclasses 164+ and see the notes thereto for feeding a nail,
    screw, or nut blank or nail plate or stock to a machine as part of the
    manufacture of that class.


CLS 451/334
TXT Reciprocating:

    Work feeder under subclass 331 in which the work conveying means moves the
    work to effect grinding and cyclically returns with the work generally
    along the path of the grinding stroke to the starting point.


CLS 451/335
TXT With hopper or magazine:

    Work feeder under subclass 334 including a receptacle for holding and
    discharging workpieces in a controlled manner to the reciproctating work
    feeder.


CLS 451/336
TXT Endless:

    Work feeder under subclass 331 in which the workpiece is fed into contact
    with an abrasive tool by means of a moving, continuous, closed-loop belt or
    chain.


CLS 451/337
TXT With hopper or magazine:

    Work feeder under subclass 336 including a receptacle for holding and
    discharging workpieces in a controlled manner to the endless work feeder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 424 for a receptacle that holds a supply
    of discrete articles of work to be deformed.

    82,     Turning, subclasses 125+ for a magazine-type storage means in which
    a plurality of pieces of work can be accumulated in an orderly arrangement
    and positioned such that the pieces may be engaged by the work feeder or
    remover.

    83,     Cutting, subclass 417 for means to store work articles including a
    hopper, work-storage magazine, or gravity fed chute serving to hold a
    reserve supply of work to be cut.

    140,    Wireworking, subclasses 27 and 28 for a wire fence making machine
    provided with a hopper that supplies slats for the manufacture of fencing
    and subclass 53 for a machine having a magazine for a supply of clips, lock
    plates, or similar members.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 241+ for subject matter including
    means to selectively vary the dimensions of the dispenser or some part
    thereof to thereby accommodate different size articles and wherein the
    supply of source dimensions are selectively variable.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, for feeding a nail, screw, or nut blank or nail plate or stock
    to a machine as part of the manufacture of that class.


CLS 451/338
TXT Skewed feed rollers:

    Work feeder under subclass 331 in which the workpiece is fed to the
    abrading tool by rollers wherein the longitudinal axes of the rollers are
    not parallel to one another and, due to their orientation, cause the
    workpiece to move toward the tool.

    (1)     Note.  The axes of the rollers or discs are neither intersecting
    nor parallel to one another.


CLS 451/339
TXT Ejector or unloader:

    Work feeder under subclass 331 in which a mechanism is used to remove the
    workpiece from the work feeder following the grinding operation.


CLS 451/340
TXT FRAME OR MOUNT:

    Structure for encasing or supporting a grinding device under the class
    definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, for a frame or mount of general utility.


CLS 451/341
TXT Double treadle:

    Frame or mount under subclass 340 organized to permit driving of the
    grinding tool by alternately acting treadles.


CLS 451/342
TXT For hanging rigid, rotary abrading tool:

    Frame or mount under subclass 340 for floatingly suspending a rotatable
    grindstone on or by its shaft in such manner as to prevent breakage or
    insure true and steady running.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 651 for a cutting tool or tool support.


CLS 451/343
TXT With balancing provision:

    Frame or mount under subclass 342 including structure particularly adapted
    for balancing a rotatable grindstone by properly mounting and distributing
    weights thereon to insure steady running.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 66 for a process or apparatus for
    testing for rotor unbalance including a test using adjustable masses.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 573 for miscellaneous rotor
    balancing means.


CLS 451/344
TXT Portable abrader:

    Frame or mount under subclass 340 for an abrading device especially adapted
    to permit ready transportation thereof, and in general, the application of
    the abrading tool to the work rather than of the work to the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370,    378, 386, and 391, for a portable clamping-type work holder for
    abrading an edge tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 166.3+ and 388+ for a portable hand manipulated
    saw and subclasses 478+ for a hand manipulable planing device.


CLS 451/345
TXT Button cleaner:

    Frame or mount under subclass 344 for an abrading device especially adapted
    and intended for use on a button of upholstery, clothing, or other article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    448,    for a button cleaning shield.


CLS 451/346
TXT Calk sharpener:

    Frame or mount under subclass 344 for an abrading device especially adapted
    for sharpening the calk of a horseshoe while on the hoof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, subclasses 36+ for
    miscellaneous horseshoe making.

    168,    Farriery, subclass 46 for miscellaneous devices for sharpening the
    calks of horseshoes while on the hoof.


CLS 451/347
TXT Rail abrader:

    Frame or mount under subclass 344 for an abrading device especially adapted
    for abrading a railway rail in situ.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 54+ for a
    rail sweeper.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 175+ for a portable
    milling device.


CLS 451/348
TXT Roll or wheel abrader:

    Frame or mount under subclass 344 for an abrading especially adapted to
    grinding a roll or a wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142,    for a roll grinder.

    146,    254+, 258, and 290, for a disk or wheel abrading machine.

    424+,   for a roll or wheel grinder.


CLS 451/349
TXT Edge-tool sharpener:

    Frame or mount under subclass 344 for an abrading device especially adapted
    for use refurbishing the sharp edge of the blade of a cutting device.

    (1)     Note.  Sharpening a harvester knife is included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    128, 225, 230, 235, 372+, and 421, for other inventions related to
    sharpening an agricultural blade (e.g., a mower or reaper knife).


CLS 451/350
TXT Floor surfacing machine:

    Frame or mount under subclass 344 for an abrading device especially adapted
    for being supported by and abrading the upper surface of a floor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    354,    for a wall surfacing machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, particularly subclasses
    49.1+ and 98+ for a portable floor brushing and wiping machine and
    subclasses 300.1+ for such machine combined with air blast and/or suction
    application to the floor.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 117.1+ and 118+ for a rotary cutter type
    planer and subclasses 134.1+ for a shaper.


CLS 451/351
TXT Reciprocating tool:

    Frame or mount under subclass 350 for a floor surfacing machine wherein the
    abrading tool moves rectilinearly to-and-fro.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162,    for other reciprocating tool abrading machines.


CLS 451/352
TXT Rotary cylinder tool:

    Frame or mount under subclass 350 for a floor surfacing machine wherein the
    abrading tool is of a shape of a solid generated by a circle moving
    axially, which tool is intended to turn about its axis and engage to abrade
    the work by the peripheral surface that is parallel to the axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    178+,   for a rotary cylinder abrading machine.


CLS 451/353
TXT Rotary disk tool:

    Frame or mount under subclass 350 for a floor surfacing machine wherein the
    abrading tool includes a circular, planar surface, which tool is intended
    to turn about an axis normal to and passing through that surface to abrade
    the work by that surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158+,   259+, 359, and 548+, for other rotary abrading disk tools.


CLS 451/354
TXT Wall surfacing machine:

    Frame or mount under subclass 344 for an abrading device especially adapted
    for abrading the planar surface of a vertical wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    350+,   for a floor finishing machine and see the notes thereto.


CLS 451/355
TXT Endless band tool:

    Device under subclass 344 especially adapted for sharpening the cutting
    edge of a member intended to be used in gathering agricultural produce.


CLS 451/356
TXT Reciprocating tool:

    Device under subclass 344 in which the tool has an alternating back and
    forth movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    351,    for other portable abrading devices with reciprocating motion.


CLS 451/357
TXT Orbital motion tool:

    Device under subclass 344 in which the abrading tool is revolved in an
    orbit about a center offset from its axis of rotation.


CLS 451/358
TXT Rotary cylinder tool:

    Device under subclass 344 which has a working face which is parallel to the
    axis of rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    352,    for other portable abrading tools having a working surface which is
    parallel to the axis of rotation.


CLS 451/359
TXT Rotary disk tool:

    Device under subclass 344 which has a planar working surface which is
    perpendicular to the axis of rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158+,   259+, 353, and 548+, for other rotary abrading disk tools.

    353,    for other portable abrading tools having a rotary working surface.


CLS 451/360
TXT Rotary tool supporter:

    Device under subclass 340 for supporting an abrading tool spindle for
    rotation about its axis.


CLS 451/361
TXT Floor or bench stand:

    Device under subclass 360 in which an abrading tool is supported on a stand
    mounted on the floor or mounted on a work bench.


CLS 451/362
TXT Turret:

    Device under subclass 360 including rotatably indexable means to support a
    plurality of individually usable abrading tools.


CLS 451/363
TXT Machine head:

    Device under subclass 360 including structure for supporting and driving an
    abrading tool.


CLS 451/364
TXT WORK HOLDER:

    Means under the class definition in general for securing the workpiece in
    position or to facilitate traversing it past the abrader.

    (1)     Note.  A work holder includes means to grippingly secure a
    workpiece, means to secure a workpiece in position by a vacuum, means to
    confine and guide a workpiece, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 329+ for a blade holder to make a general
    utility knife, but which may be used for holding the blade while
    sharpening.  See (2) Note of the class definition of Class 30.

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 306+ for a device for securing work upon a
    moving bed in a woodworking machine or while operated upon by a traveling
    woodworking cutter.

    269,    Work Holders, for a device for clamping, supporting, and/or holding
    an article (or articles) in position to be operated on or treated.  See
    notes thereunder for other related loci.


CLS 451/365
TXT Clamp:

    Work holder under subclass 364 employing the pressure of a clamping member
    for holding the work in place during abrading.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 455+ for a miscellaneous
    clasp, per se.


CLS 451/366
TXT Work oscillating:

    Work holder under subclass 365 in which the motion of the work is a simple
    back and forth swinging in an arc, with the work in contact with the
    abrading surface.


CLS 451/367
TXT Edge tool:

    Clamping work holder under subclass 365 especially adapted for securing a
    tool element having a sharp cutting edge while being abraded.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 329 for a blade holder and see (2) Note of the
    class definition of this class (30).


CLS 451/368
TXT Seat controlled:

    Clamping edge tool holder under subclass 367 controllable by connections to
    a saddle or seat for a human operator.


CLS 451/369
TXT Gauging device:

    Clamping work holder under subclass 367 employing a clamp, especially
    adapted for securing an edge tool in such position during abrading as to
    insure its being abraded at the proper angle.


CLS 451/370
TXT Portable:

    Clamping edge tool holder under subclass 369 adapted to be held in the hand
    and applied thereby to an abrading surface.


CLS 451/371
TXT Blade sharpener:

    Portable clamping edge tool holder under subclass 370 especially adapted to
    sharpen the edge of a cutting member.


CLS 451/372
TXT Harvester knife:

    Clamping edge tool holder under subclass 367 especially adapted for
    sharpening the cutting edge of a member intended to be used in gathering
    agricultural produce.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    128, 225, 230, 235, 349, and 421, for other inventions related to
    sharpening an agricultural blade (e.g., a mower or reaper knife).


CLS 451/373
TXT Suspension:

    Clamping harvester knife holder under subclass 372 especially adapted to
    suspend a harvester knife from an overhead support while being abraded.


CLS 451/374
TXT Rotary cutter:

    Clamping edge tool holder under subclass 367 especially adapted to hold an
    edge tool while being abraded, which tool, when used, will turn more than
    360o about an axis.


CLS 451/375
TXT Drill:

    Clamping rotary edge tool holder under subclass 374 especially adapted for
    securing a drill bit in position while being abraded.


CLS 451/376
TXT Pattern control:

    Clamping drill bit holder under subclass 375 having a templet for
    controlling movement of the drill bit when in contact with the abrading
    surface.


CLS 451/377
TXT Work reciprocating:

    Clamping edge tool holder under subclass 367 especially adapted for holding
    an edge tool which is positively reciprocated past an abrading device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    388,    for vacuum work holders.

    392+,   for a work holder for reciprocating a workpiece, other than an edge
    tool, during an abrading operation.


CLS 451/378
TXT Portable:

    Clamping edge tool holder under subclass 367 adapted to be manually held,
    thereby applying the workpiece to an abrading surface.


CLS 451/379
TXT Work rotating:

    Clamping edge tool holder under subclass 367 wherein  gripping means
    support the workpiece to turn more than 360o during the abrading operation.

    (1)     Note.  The rotation may be by means other than the work holder.


CLS 451/380
TXT Angularly adjustable:

    Clamping edge tool holder under subclass 367 having means to adjustably
    orient the workpiece about an axis in at least two different positions
    relative to the abrading surface.


CLS 451/381
TXT Hollow work:

    Clamping work holder under subclass 365 especially adapted for holding a
    hollow workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  The workpiece of this subclass is commonly made of glass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, subclasses 2.01+ and 9.1+ for an expanding
    socket-type chuck.


CLS 451/382
TXT Hypodermic needle:

    Clamping work holder under subclass 381  especially adapted for holding a
    hypodermic needle during abrading.


CLS 451/383
TXT Skate:

    Clamping work holder under subclass 365 especially adapted for holding an
    ice skate runner while being sharpened by abrading.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclass 83 for a skate
    sharpener which uses a nonabrasive tool.


CLS 451/384
TXT Lens holder:

    Work holder under subclass 365 particularly adapted for securing a lens
    during abrading.


CLS 451/385
TXT Work rotating:

    Work holder under subclass 365 having means to permit the workpiece to turn
    more than 360o while it is in contact with the abrading surface.

    (1)     Note.  The rotation may be by means other than the work holder, per
    se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402,    for other rotary work holders.


CLS 451/386
TXT Portable:

    Clamping work holder under subclass 365 adapted to be manually held,
    whereby the workpiece is applied to an abrading surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    391,    for a portable-type work holder but with other means to secure the
    workpiece.


CLS 451/387
TXT Angularly adjustable:

    Clamping work holder under subclass 365 having means to adjustably orient
    the workpiece about an axis in at least two different positions relative to
    the abrading surface.


CLS 451/388
TXT Vacuum:

    Work holder under subclass 364 in which the workpiece is held in place by
    atmospheric pressure brought into play by exhaustion of air from one side
    of the workpiece.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, subclass 3 for a vacuum-operated chuck
    mechanism, and see the notes thereto for similar subject matter.


CLS 451/389
TXT Dop or dop stick:

    Work holder under subclass 364 especially adapted for holding a jewel while
    being faceted or otherwise abraded comprising the member on which the jewel
    is placed or comprising structure for supporting that member.

    (1)     Note.  The workpiece of this subclass may be diamond.


CLS 451/390
TXT Lens or prism:

    Work holder under subclass 364 especially adapted for holding a workpiece
    comprising an optical device for intentionally directing light rays.

    (1)     Note.  The workpiece of this subclass may be made from glass,
    plastic, or other transparent material.


CLS 451/391
TXT Portable:

    Work holder under subclass 364 adapted to be held in hand and applied
    thereby to the abrading surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370     and 386+, for other portable fixtures.


CLS 451/392
TXT Work reciprocating:

    Work holder under subclass 364 especially adapted for holding a workpiece
    which is moved to-and-fro past an abrading device.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a work holder having (a) simple
    rectilinear reciprocating motion, (b) oscillating motion, (c)reciprocating
    motion combined with rotary motion, or (d) rocking motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    136, 170+, 199+, 212+, 264+, 272+, 305+, 314+, 320+, and 377,  for
    other reciprocating work holders.


CLS 451/393
TXT Rectilinearly:

    Work holder under subclass 392 for holding a workpiece as it is
    reciprocated along a straight line past an abrading device.


CLS 451/394
TXT And work rotating:

    Work holder under subclass 393 in which the workpiece is rotated while
    being reciprocated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    140, 189, 209+, 218+, 227+, 242+, 268+, 283+, 306, 307+, 317+, and
    397+, for other work rotating.

    218+,   227+, 274+, and 306, for other combined work rotating and
    reciprocating.

    397,    for a work holder in which the workpiece rotates without a
    reciprocating component, and see the notes thereto for other work rotating.


CLS 451/395
TXT Hydraulically actuated:

    Work holder under subclass 393 including a fluid pressure motor to produce
    reciprocation past the abrading surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclass 63 for a
    drilling machine in which a table supporting a workpiece is fed to a
    rotating drill along the axis of rotation by a fluid pressure motor.


CLS 451/396
TXT Rocking:

    Work holder under subclass 392  which moves to-and-fro about an axis that
    coincides with the point of engagement of the abrading tool and the
    workpiece and the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    171, 201+, 204+, 216+, 226+, 266, and 276+, for other rocking work
    holders.


CLS 451/397
TXT Work rotating:

    Work holder under subclass 364 in which the work is guided in rotation
    during grinding.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a device in which the work rotates
    without a specific rotary work holder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    140, 189, 209+, 218+, 227+, 242+, 268+, 283+, 306, 307+, 317+, and
    394, for other work rotating.


CLS 451/398
TXT Rotary work holder:

    Work holder under subclass 397 comprising rotary member holding and turning
    with the workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82+,    106, 143+, 173, 210, 246+, 269, 285+, 307, 324, and 398+, for other
    rotary work holders used with an abrading machine.


CLS 451/399
TXT Crank shaft:

    Rotary work holder under subclass 398  especially adapted for holding the
    rotary component of an engine intended to receive power to an eccentric
    portion thereof from a reciprocating piston via a connecting rod.


CLS 451/400
TXT Orbital movement:

    Rotary work holder under subclass 398  which  revolves in an orbit about a
    center outside itself.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270+,   for an orbital work holder for an abrading machine having a
    radial-faced rotary tool.


CLS 451/401
TXT Turret:

    Rotary work holder under subclass 398 in which a series of rotating
    workpieces are indexed by a rotary member into sequential engagement with
    the abrading tool.

    (1)     Note.  The workpiece is not in contact with the abrading means
    during indexing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149,    247+, 292, and 308, for other turret work holders.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 35.5+ for plural diverse manufacturing
    apparatus including a tool or tool turret.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 813+ for rotary member
    indexing, generally.


CLS 451/402
TXT Rotary:

    Work holder under subclass 364 in which gripping means support the
    workpiece in such a manner as to allow the workpiece to turn more than 360o
    during the abrading operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 37+ for plural work holders to hold
    workpieces relative to each other and subclasses 86+ for a work holder
    having relatively movable jaws.


CLS 451/403
TXT Indexing:

    Work holder under subclass 364 with structure to allow the position of the
    workpiece to be changed with regular steplike movements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139,    214, 232, and 403, for other indexing work holders.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 813+ for an assembly with
    means to turn a shaft of a rotatably mounted device about its axis to one
    or more selected loci including means to prevent or hold against rotation
    at such loci.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 44+ and
    70+ for intermittently operating work advancing means to sequentially
    present work to a tool of the class type.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, and Planing, subclass 61 for gear cutting
    which commonly includes indexing and subclass 198 for an indexable
    workholder.


CLS 451/404
TXT Hand operated:

    Work holder under subclass 403 in which the position of the workpiece can
    be changed manually.


CLS 451/405
TXT Angularly adjustable:

    Work holder under subclass 364 in which the position of the workpiece can
    be changed about an axis.


CLS 451/406
TXT WORK REST:

    Device under the class definition for supporting a workpiece against the
    force of gravity, without positive holding means,  while held in the hand
    of the operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216+,   for a work support with positive holding means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    82,     Turning, subclasses 162+ for a work rest for a lathe, other than a
    wood turning lathe.

    142,    Wood Turning, subclass 48 for a work rest for a wood cutting lathe.


CLS 451/407
TXT For centerless abrader:

    Work rest under subclass 406 especially adapted for supporting the
    workpiece in a grinding machine in which the abrading tool turns about a
    continuously moving axis passing through the tool.


CLS 451/408
TXT Steady rest:

    Work rest under subclass 406 for providing additional support to the
    workpiece to prevent deflection or vibration of the workpiece and to
    maintain the workpiece in a firm or stable condition.


CLS 451/409
TXT Tool tooth rest:

    Work rest under subclass 406 especially adapted to support a tooth of a
    cutting tool during abrading.


CLS 451/410
TXT Gauging device:

    Work rest under subclass 406  especially adapted to insure abrading to a
    desired angle.


CLS 451/411
TXT WORK TABLE:

    Device under the class definition including a generally planar work upper
    surface on which it is intended for a workpiece to be supported during
    abrading.

    (1)     Note.  The work table of this subclass is generally intended to
    support a workpiece while being abraded by a randomly manipulated abrading
    tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    364+,   for a positive work holder.

    406+,   for a work rest.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 285 and 286.1+ for a work bench for use in
    woodworking.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 219+ for a work table
    particularly adapted to be used with a milling machine.


CLS 451/412
TXT Glass work:

    Work table under subclass 411 especially adapted for supporting a sheet of
    glass.


CLS 451/413
TXT Work rotating:

    Work table under subclass 411 which rotates about its central axis.


CLS 451/414
TXT Angularly adjustable:

    Work table under subclass 411 having means to adjustably orient the work
    about an axis in at least two different positions relative to the tool.


CLS 451/415
TXT ATTACHMENT:

    Device under the class definition intended (a) to be secured to a
    nonabrading machine or tool for grinding a part thereof (b) to be secured
    to a nonabrading machine or tool to be driven or supported thereby.

    (1)     Note.  A device attached to the tool or element to be abraded (as
    for example, a sawing or drilling machine), whether or not said tool or
    element is mounted in a machine, is also classified here and in indented
    subclasses.


CLS 451/416
TXT To textile machine to abrade card:

    Attachment under subclass 415 to be secured to a textile working machine
    for grinding a surface of a member used to align textile fibers.

    (1)     Note.  Collected in this subclass is an attachment for a carding
    machine other than one using flat cards.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclass 98 for a carding machine.


CLS 451/417
TXT Flat card:

    Attachment under subclass 416  to be secured to a textile working machine
    which uses flat cards for abrading a card thereof.


CLS 451/418
TXT To electrical machine to abrade commutator:

    Attachment under subclass 415 adapted to be secured to an electric motor or
    generator and to abrade the commutator thereof.


CLS 451/419
TXT To cutting machine to sharpen blade:

    Attachment under subclass 415 adapted to be secured to a cutting machine to
    be used for sharpening a cutting blade thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is an attachment for a lawn mower, a meat
    cutter, a leather cutter, a cloth cutter, etc.

    (2)     Note.  A ``drill" or a ``saw" is considered to be a cutting blade.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 35+ for a significantly recited razor combined
    with a sharpening means and subclasses 138+ for a significantly recited
    cutlery implement, generally combined with a  sharpening means.

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 250 for a significantly recited rotating
    cutting reel mower organization modified to facilitate sharpening.

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclass 82.1 for a lawn mower
    sharpening attachment of the cutting type, rather than the abrading type.


CLS 451/420
TXT Rotary abrading tool:

    Machine knife sharpening attachment under subclass 419 in which the knife
    is ground by a tool having only a rotary movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177+,   and see the notes thereto for other rotary tools.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 139 for a significantly recited cutlery
    implement, generally combined with a rotary sharpening means.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclass 38 for a leather dressing rotary
    cutting tool with a grinding attachment where significant structure of the
    cutting tool is claimed.


CLS 451/421
TXT Rotary reciprocating tool:

    Machine knife sharpening attachment under subclass 420 in which the
    sharpening is done by a grinder having both rotary and reciprocating
    motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119+,   and see the notes thereto for other rotary reciprocating tools.

    122,    128, 225, 230, 235, 349, and 372+ for other inventions related to
    sharpening an agricultural blade (e.g., a mower or reaper knife).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 139 for a significantly recited cutting implement
    combined with a rotary blade sharpener.


CLS 451/422
TXT Work actuated:

    Machine knife sharpening attachment under subclass 420 in which the knife
    is abraded by a tool having only rotary motion and driven by contact with
    the knife being sharpened.


CLS 451/423
TXT Stationary abrading tool:

    Machine knife sharpening attachment under subclass 419 wherein the grinding
    means is immobile during the grinding operation (i.e., the blade being
    ground moves relative thereto).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312+,   and see the notes thereto for other stationary tool machines.

    428,    for other stationary tool attachments.


CLS 451/424
TXT Roll or wheel abrader:

    Attachment under subclass 415 adapted to be secured to a machine having a
    relatively smooth annular surface intended to grind such surface.

    (1)     Note.  A device intended to be attached to a metal deforming
    rolling machine, a calendaring machine, or a machine having a pulley with
    an annular surface is included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142,    for a roll abrader.

    146,    258, 254+, 290, and 348, for a disk or wheel abrading machine.

    348,    for a roll or wheel abrader.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    82,     Turning, subclass 103 for a lathe for making a pulley and
    subclasses 104+ for a wheel or axle lathe.

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 437 for a significantly claimed earth
    working apparatus combined with a device for sharpening an earth working
    tool.


CLS 451/425
TXT Rotary reciprocating tool:

    Attachment under subclass 424 including a grinder having both a rotary and
    a reciprocating motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119+,   and see the notes thereto for other rotary reciprocating tools; see
    particularly subclasses 142 and 146 for roll, disk, and wheel grinders.


CLS 451/426
TXT Reciprocating tool:

    Attachment under subclass 424 employing a reciprocating nonrotary grinder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162+,   and see the notes thereto for other reciprocating tools.


CLS 451/427
TXT Nut-and-screw-type drive:

    Attachment under subclass 426 employing means to cause the abrasive tool to
    reciprocate comprising a helical male member and a cooperating helical
    female member, one of which rotates with respect to the other.


CLS 451/428
TXT Stationary abrading tool:

    Attachment under subclass 424 in which the roll or wheel being ground
    revolves against a relatively fixed grinding means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312+,   for an abrading machine having a stationary tool, generally.

    423,    for other stationary tool attachments.


CLS 451/429
TXT To rail:

    Attachment under subclass 415 particularly adapted to be attached to and
    grind an elongated member on which a vehicle is to ride.


CLS 451/430
TXT Valve or valve seat abrader:

    Attachment under subclass 415 especially adapted for grinding a surface of
    the stationary portion or a movable portion of a valve.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115     and 252, for other valve abraders.


CLS 451/431
TXT Orbital tool:

    Attachment under subclass 430 in which the grinding tool revolves about a
    center outside itself.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270+    and 441, for other orbital tools.


CLS 451/432
TXT To sewing machine:

    Attachment under subclass 415 to be secured to some part of a sewing
    machine and driven thereby.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, subclass 257 for means for holding an attachment to a
    sewing machine.


CLS 451/433
TXT To be driven by flywheel:

    Attachment under subclass 432 to be secured to and driven by the flywheel
    of a sewing machine.


CLS 451/434
TXT To vehicle:

    Attachment under subclass 415 to be secured to a vehicle and driven thereby.


CLS 451/435
TXT To lathe:

    Attachment under subclass 415 to be secured to a lathe.

    (1)     Note.  The attachment of this subclass may be adapted to be driven
    by a lathe to abrade a workpiece or may be attached to a lathe in such a
    way as to abrade a workpiece driven by the lathe.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    82,     Turning, for a lathe, generally.

    142,    Wood Turning, for a lathe for shaping wood.


CLS 451/436
TXT Center abrader:

    Lathe attachment under subclass 435 especially adapted to the grinding of a
    lathe center.

    (1)     Note.  The device of this subclass may be used to true a lathe
    center.


CLS 451/437
TXT Internal abrader:

    Lathe attachment under subclass 435 especially adapted for grinding the
    interior of hollow work.


CLS 451/438
TXT To work guide:

    Attachment under subclass 415 provided with a member for locating a
    workpiece relative to the abrading tool.


CLS 451/439
TXT To the work:

    Attachment under subclass 415 especially adapted to be mounted on the
    member being abraded.


CLS 451/440
TXT Internal abrader:

    Attachment under subclass 415 to be secured to hollow work for abrading the
    interior thereof.


CLS 451/441
TXT Orbital tool:

    Attachment under subclass 415 in which the grinding tool revolves about a
    center outside itself.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270+    and 431, for other orbital grinders.


CLS 451/442
TXT ACCESSORY:

    Apparatus under the class definition intended to be used with and to
    augment the operation of a device under the class definition.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is an apparatus or part that is a part of or
    is separate from the device under the class definition, unless provided for
    in a preceding subclass.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass takes an abradant-resist (i.e., mask or
    stencil defining a work area and protecting underlying surface portions of
    the workpiece). However, a nominal recitation (e.g., ``stencil sheet
    designed for cutting") followed by a definition of a miscellaneous product
    of a Class 427 type of coating operation, or of a rubber chemistry material
    composition, or of a stock material blank, would each be deemed to recite
    insufficient abradant-resist structure for placement in this subclass and
    will be found in that class taking the defined subject matter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29+,    for an abradant-resist mask or stencil utilized in an abrading
    process.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, for a guide or gauge.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 388 and 430 for a
    stencil related to marking food during the cooking thereof.

    101,    Printing, subclasses 48+, 112, and especially subclasses 114+ for a
    mask or stencil or for a process utilizing same to define an area to be
    printed.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, for resists recited by
    composition, or method of compounding, of that class.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 213, 301, 406, and 504 for a work
    surface protector used in coating.

    132,    Toilet, subclass 319 for a stencil used in the application of
    cosmetics.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for a resist recited by composition,
    or method of compounding, of that class.


CLS 451/443
TXT Dressing:

    Accessory under subclass 442 for returning an abrading tool to a
    predetermined shape or form after or during use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for an abrading machine with a dressing device.


CLS 451/444
TXT Tool cleaner:

    Accessory under subclass 442 for removing the products of abrading from the
    abrading tool.


CLS 451/445
TXT Erasing shield:

    Accessory under subclass 442 intended to be used in association with an
    eraser, which accessory is either (a) to be interposed between the active
    surface of a carbon sheet and an underlying sheet to prevent sullying of
    the underlying sheet during an erasure operation or (b) has holes
    therethrough to define limits of an erasure area when the accessory is
    positioned over a sheet requiring erasure.

    (1)     Note.  An ``eraser" is a device intended to remove a coating from a
    surface, generally wherein that coating comprises printed information.


CLS 451/446
TXT Abradant supplying:

    Accessory under subclass 442 intended to provide abrading material to the
    tool under the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for a method of abrading with applying of abrasive material.

    75+,    for a sandblast machine which may be in combination with an
    abradant supply, particularly subclass 99 for a nozzle, supply tank, or
    valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, for a dispenser in general, and see particularly the
    notes in section 16 of the main class definition of Class 222 for the
    distribution of related art.


CLS 451/447
TXT Grader:

    Abradant supplying accessory under subclass 446 including means for sorting
    used abradant into portions of differing fineness and returning that which
    is suitable for reuse.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, particularly
    subclasses 155+ for liquid suspension type.


CLS 451/448
TXT Button cleaning shield:

    Accessory under subclass 442 comprising a protector for a garment to which
    a button is attached to prevent injury of the garment while a button is
    being cleaned or polished.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    345,    for a portable button cleaner.

    457,    for other work protecting shields.


CLS 451/449
TXT Cooling:

    Accessory under subclass 442 for preventing excessive heating of the work
    or tool during the abrading operation.


CLS 451/450
TXT Wetting grindstone:

    Cooling accessory under subclass 449 for applying a liquid cooling agent to
    an abrading tool.


CLS 451/451
TXT Guard or housing:

    Accessory under subclass 442 comprising a protective shield or an enclosure
    (e.g, a hood or guard) to be mounted on an abrading device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 606+ for means for
    enclosing a gear mechanism, subclasses 608+ for means for protectively
    covering a gear mechanism, and subclasses 612+ for means for protecting a
    human operator from engagement by the gears of a gear mechanism.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 440.2, 544+, and 814+ for a saw guard.

    112,    Sewing, subclass 261 for a cover or guard for the moving parts of a
    sewing machine.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 251.1+ and 252.1+ for a cutter guard, hood,
    or dust conveyor.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 116.5+ for a stop
    mechanism, particularly subclasses 129+ for a safety device.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 144+ for a guard or housing for a belt or pulley forming a part
    of a power transmission.


CLS 451/452
TXT Breakage guard:

    Guard or housing under subclass 451 intended to prevent damage in case of
    breakage of a rapidly turning abrading wheel.


CLS 451/453
TXT Collector:

    Guard or housing under subclass 451 for collecting loose particles from an
    abrading member or work thrown off during the abrading operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, for a device in general for separating particles
    from a confined gas stream.

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 252.1 for a cutter hood or dust conveyor for
    a woodworking machine.


CLS 451/454
TXT Drive shield:

    Guard or housing under subclass 451 intended to prevent foreign material
    from entering the driving structure of a device under the class definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 252.1 for a cutter hood or dust conveyor for
    a woodworking machine.


CLS 451/455
TXT Spark or splash guard:

    Guard or housing under subclass 451  for confining sparks developed in
    abrading or preventing splashing of cooling or lubricating fluid.


CLS 451/456
TXT Suction:

    Guard or housing under subclass 451 having air exhausting means for drawing
    off dust developed in the abrading operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 252.1 for a cutter hood or dust conveyor for
    a woodworking machine.


CLS 451/457
TXT Work guard:

    Guard or housing under subclass 451 for preventing injury to other parts of
    the work other than those being intentionally abraded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    448,    for a button cleaning shield.


CLS 451/458
TXT Abrading sheet applying device:

    Accessory under subclass 442 for fitting or attaching a sheet of abrading
    material to a sheet holder to constitute a flexible abrading tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    490,    for a tool support for a flexible member tool, including a sheet
    applying device.


CLS 451/459
TXT Strop surface renewing:

    Accessory under subclass 442 for smoothing, coating, or otherwise treating
    the surface of a used strop to restore it to its originally effective
    condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169,    316, and 318, for a stropping machine, generally.


CLS 451/460
TXT Work-mounting device:

    Accessory under subclass 442 for properly positioning work in a work holder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    82,     Turning, subclass 170 for a work centering device not otherwise
    classified, and see the notes thereto.


CLS 451/461
TXT COMBINED TOOL:

    Abrading implement under the class definition having two or more tools, at
    least one of which is of the class type and at least one of which is not of
    the class type, carried by a common operating handle or other support.

    (1)     Note.  An example of the tool of this class is an implement
    including an abrading portion and a cutting portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65+,    for a machine having abrading tools of more than one type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclasses 82+ for sharpening a
    sharp tool, other than by abrading.


CLS 451/462
TXT Internal:

    Combined tool under subclass 461 for grinding the interior of a hollow
    workpiece.


CLS 451/463
TXT CARRIER FOR RELATIVELY MOVABLE SIMULTANEOUSLY USABLE TOOLS:

    Device under the class definition provided with a means for mounting a
    plurality of abrading tools for abrading movement of all the tools at the
    same time in which means at least one of said tools is also mounted for
    urging movement (i.e., movement of a tool into engagement or continued
    engagement with a surface of the work) or for adjustment with respect to
    the other(s).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    526+,   for a support having a tool integrally bound thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 208 and more
    specifically subclass 230 for a support having means to secure a
    nonabrasive tool thereto.

    82,     Turning, subclass 169 for an expandable mandrel for supporting a
    rotating workpiece being machined.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 263 for an earth boring
    tool which is expansible.

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, subclasses 2.07+ for an expandable chuck.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 93 for an
    expandable grapple.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclass 42 for
    plural tools of that class type operable at the same time.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 47+ for a pulley with expansible rim means.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the notes thereto for the loci of a particular roll or combination
    involving a roll; search particularly subclasses 5+ for an expansible roll.


CLS 451/464
TXT For radially movable tools:

    Carrier under subclass 463 wherein the abrading movement of the tools
    relative to the work is about the axis of rotation of either the tools and
    their carrier or the work, and the urging movement of the tools relative to
    the work is along components of movement perpendicular to said axis.


CLS 451/465
TXT Centrifugal force urged tools:

    Carrier under subclass 464 comprising a rotatable carrier having tools
    mounted thereon for radial movement with respect to the axis of rotation of
    the carrier whereby the rotation of the carrier will tend to move the tools
    away from the axis of rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    506,    for a tool support expanded by centrifugal force.


CLS 451/466
TXT Flexible flail tools:

    Carrier under subclass 465 wherein the carrier has secured thereto or
    therein a plurality of flexible-member tools which project outwardly from
    the axis of the carrier so that their radial ends are free to flex with a
    radially outward component of motion.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 526 for the definition of ``flexible-member
    tool."

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    468,    indented hereunder, for a carrier having tool supports projecting
    from the carrier, which supports assist in urging the tools toward the work
    or back up the tool to prevent them from over-flexing.  Included in this
    subclass, but not meeting the definition of subclass 468, is such a device
    without back-up supports on the carrier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 230 for a
    rotary cleaning implement having fabric portions adapted to act as a wiper,
    dauber, or polisher.

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclass 28 for an abradant device
    limited to treatment of cloth.


CLS 451/467
TXT With tool supply or storage:

    Carrier under subclass 466 for holding additional tool material within the
    carrier.

    (1)     Note.  Additional material can be fed to operative position while
    the device is idle or operating.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    491+,   for a tool supply carried by a tool support.


CLS 451/468
TXT Including self-sustaining tools:

    Carrier under subclass 466 wherein only the tools project outwardly from
    the carrier.

    (1)     Note.  See (2) Note of subclass 466 definition.


CLS 451/469
TXT With discrete nondestructible tool-securing means:

    Carrier under subclass 468 wherein a flexible-member tool is held to the
    carrier by a separable element which may be removed from the carrier
    without destroying said element and then reused for reassembly of tool to
    carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    490+,   for means to secure a tool to a tool support.


CLS 451/470
TXT Including conoid or wedge tool moving member:

    Carrier under subclass 464 wherein means having a configuration defined by
    a cone (or conelike surface) or intersecting planes causes radial movement
    of the tool(s).


CLS 451/471
TXT With threaded operator:

    Carrier under subclass 470 having helical screw means for moving the cone
    or wedge member(s) to cause radial movement of the tool(s).


CLS 451/472
TXT To move conoid member:

    Carrier under subclass 471 wherein the member(s) actuated by the helical
    screws means comprises a cone.


CLS 451/473
TXT To actuate pivotally mounted tools:

    Carrier under subclass 472 wherein the tools are so secured to the carrier
    that when urged by the cone means they may arcuately swing away from the
    axis of the carrier and into engagement with the work.


CLS 451/474
TXT For movement of conoid members relative to each other:

    Carrier under subclass 472 wherein the members are moved toward or away
    from one another by the helical screw means.


CLS 451/475
TXT By conoid member with screw threads:

    Carrier under subclass 472 wherein a helical screw means is fastened to or
    integral with the cone member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    474,    for other conoid members with integral or directly attached screw
    threads.


CLS 451/476
TXT Including plural conoid members:

    Carrier under subclass 472 embodying two or more such cone (or conelike)
    surfaces.


CLS 451/477
TXT Including key-way or spline:

    Carrier under subclass 471 wherein the screw actuated taper or wedge member
    is on, and an integral part of, the tool carrier and said member is
    recessed into or protrudes from said carrier; said member also being
    angularly related to and extending along the axis of said carrier thus
    having a wedgelike configuration.


CLS 451/478
TXT Conoid member:

    Carrier under subclass 470 wherein the tool moving surface is conical or
    cone like.


CLS 451/479
TXT Including gear actuated tool mover:

    Carrier under subclass 464 in which means having toothed surfaces causes
    the radial movement of the tool.


CLS 451/480
TXT Including lever actuated tool mover:

    Carrier under subclass 464 wherein the radial motion of at least one of the
    tools is caused by a link pivoted on a fulcrum between the tool and a force
    applicator.


CLS 451/481
TXT Including hydraulically actuated tool mover:

    Carrier under subclass 464 wherein gas or liquid under pressure causes the
    radial movement of the tool(s).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    505,    for radial expansion of flexible tool by fluid pressure.


CLS 451/482
TXT Including thread actuated tool mover:

    Carrier under subclass 464 wherein helical screw means causes the radial
    movement of one or more tools relative to the carrier.


CLS 451/483
TXT Interrelated to move plural tools:

    Carrier under subclass 482 wherein the radial movement of more than one
    such tool is simultaneously caused by manipulation of a single element.


CLS 451/484
TXT Including resiliently urged tool:

    Carrier under subclass 464 wherein springlike means causes the radial
    movement of one or more tools relative to the carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    504+,   for resilient tool supports causing radial expansion of a tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, subclass 42 for a roll, per se, which includes coil
    or leaf springs supporting the working surface.


CLS 451/485
TXT By coil spring:

    Carrier under subclass 484 wherein the springlike means is a resilient
    member in the form of a helix wound about a centerline which, through force
    directed along such centerline, produces the tendency toward radial
    movement.


CLS 451/486
TXT Including tools resiliently urged toward work:

    Carrier under subclass 463 wherein the mounting means includes elements
    which yieldingly bias the tools toward a common line or plane in which line
    or plane the work lies.


CLS 451/487
TXT CARRIER FOR A RADIALLY MOVABLE TOOL:

    Device under the class definition provided with a means for mounting a
    single tool for abrading movement of that tool about an axis of rotation of
    either the tool and its mounting or the work, and for movement
    perpendicular to said axis urging the tool into engagement with a surface
    of the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    463+,   for a carrier having radially movable tools.


CLS 451/488
TXT VENTILATION OR COOLING OF TOOL OR TOOL SUPPORT:

    Device under the class definition having means to cause or permit
    circulation of fluent material to or adjacent, or to dissipate heat from, a
    tool or its support.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of ``tool support," see subclass 490.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 230.1 for
    similar ventilation or cooling of a tool or its support.


CLS 451/489
TXT FLEXIBLE-MEMBER TOOL MOUNTED ON PLURAL ROLLS:

    Means under the class definition wherein a tool is, or is carried on, an
    endless band  maintained or stretched about two or more pulleys.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    296+,   for a machine employing an endless band tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 200.1 and the search notes thereto for a cutting
    tool mounted on an endless band which is stretched about two more pulleys.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 202+ and 237+ for an endless drive belt.


CLS 451/490
TXT TOOL SUPPORT FOR FLEXIBLE-MEMBER TOOL:

    Device under the class definition including an element or assembly of
    elements at least one of which is connected to a flexible-member tool for
    supporting it against gravity and that partakes of all the movement of the
    tool and has no relative movement with respect to the tool during operation
    of the class type.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of ``flexible-member tool" see the
    definition of subclass 526.

    (2)     Note.  A flexible-member tool when mounted on its support will not
    necessarily be flexible in operation or use due to rigidity of the support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65+,    168+, 296+, and 313+, for  machines with flexible tools.

    330+,   for flexible abrasive tools mounted on an expansible carrier.

    352,    for a portable floor machine having a rotary cylinder.

    458,    for a device for applying a sheet to  a holder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 230+, and
    more specifically subclass 230.19 for means to secure a tool to a support.

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 451+ for a static pencil-sharpening implement
    including a flexible-member abrading tool and a support therefore.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 95+ for the
    combination of a holder and a bibulous absorbent sheet constituting a
    drying device (e.g., blotter); particularly subclasses 95.1+ for such a
    device which is hand-manipulable.

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Materials, and Compositions, for a
    flexible abrasive tool distinguished solely by the abrasive composition.

    101,    Printing, subclass 415.1 for a flexible sheet securing device.

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 134+ for a dental abrading tool mandrel for
    supporting a grinding disk.

    492,    Roll or Roller, subclasses 22+ for a roll, per se, with a sheet
    edge holder.


CLS 451/491
TXT With tool supply or storage:

    Tool support under subclass 490 also for holding on or in the support tool
    member or material in addition to that already in position for, or in, use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    458,    for a device for applying a sheet to its holder.

    467,    for a tool carrier having an additional tool supply.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 231+ for a
    holder for a sheet form wiper.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 95.1+ for a
    manually manipulable blotting device including means for supporting or
    containing additional blotting material.


CLS 451/492
TXT Coiled tool:

    Tool support under subclass 491 wherein the tool supply is a spirally wound
    web of indeterminate length material which is dispensed as needed.


CLS 451/493
TXT On spool or axle:

    Tool support under subclass 492 wherein the coil of tool material is held
    or mounted on a core within the coil.


CLS 451/494
TXT Having magnetic or suction tool holding means:

    Tool support under subclass 490 having means to secure the tool to a
    support by a body capable of attracting ferromagnetic material or by
    subatmospheric air pressure (e.g., vacuum).


CLS 451/495
TXT Contour-adjustable support:

    Tool support under subclass 490 wherein the shape of that portion of the
    support which is separated from the work by only the tool, can be changed
    or altered prior to use to allow the tool to conform to the shape of the
    work during use.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for mere resiliency of the
    support to conform to the work shape.  Disclosure of such a characteristic
    may be found anywhere within the flexible-member tool subclasses.


CLS 451/496
TXT Including tool holding slot in rotary tool support:

    Tool support under subclass 490 including a support that turns about an
    axis and has a groove or line of separation therein that extends along the
    axis, into which groove or separation a margin or other portion of the tool
    is inserted.

    (1)     Note.  To be included in this subclass positive disclosure of a
    means to rotate the support is not required, but the disclosure should
    clearly indicate a rotary support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    178+,   for a rotary peripheral face tool, and see the notes thereto.

    502+,   for a tool support having a nonrotary support having a tool holding
    slot.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 95.3 for a
    rotary blotting device which is slotted to retain sheet blotting material.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, for a flexible coupling between a torque transmitting shaft
    and a driven member.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, particularly
    subclasses 152+ and 166+ for a positive drive or friction drive pulley.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the notes thereto for other rolls and combinations involving rolls.


CLS 451/497
TXT Separable along slot:

    Tool support under subclass 496 which can be parted along the line of
    separation to receive and hold the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    503,    for a nonrotary support separable along tool holding slot.


CLS 451/498
TXT Diametrically separable:

    Tool support under subclass 497 which can be parted to receive and hold the
    tool along either of (a) two lines of separation lying in an axial plane or
    (b) one line of separation which lies in the axial plane which contains a
    line about which the two separable halves of the support pivot with respect
    to each other.


CLS 451/499
TXT With tool tensioning means:

    Tool support under subclass 496 provided with means within the groove or
    separation for pulling a portion of the tool into the slot, thereby causing
    the tool to be taut about its support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclasses 81.1+ for a support
    having means for tensioning a stropping tool thereon.


CLS 451/500
TXT By rotary gripping element:

    Tool support under subclass 499 wherein the tensioning means includes a
    device in frictional engagement with the tool, which device rotates to
    cause the tautness of the tool while maintaining its frictional contact
    with the tool.


CLS 451/501
TXT Including threaded element:

    Tool support under subclass 499 in which the tool tensioning means is
    actuated by helical screw means.


CLS 451/502
TXT Including longitudinal tool holding slot:

    Tool support under subclass 490 having a support having three dimensions
    one of which is longer than either of the others, along which longer
    dimension extends a groove or line of separation, into which a margin or
    other portion of the tool is inserted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    496+,   for a rotary support having a tool holding slot.


CLS 451/503
TXT Separable along slot:

    Tool support under subclass 502 wherein the support is divided along the
    line of separation thus forming the tool receiving opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    497+,   for a rotary tool support separable along the tool holding slot.


CLS 451/504
TXT Including expansible external surface:

    Tool support under subclass 490 wherein the outer effective tool engaging
    area of the support is increased for frictionally securing the tool to its
    support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    463+,   for a tool carrier wherein the effective tool engaging surface is
    increased by the outward or inward movement of the tool.


CLS 451/505
TXT Hydraulically actuated:

    Tool support under subclass 504 wherein expansion of the external surface
    is caused by a gas or liquid under pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    481,    for a fluid expanding tool carrier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, subclasses 4+ for rolls, per se, which are
    inflatable.


CLS 451/506
TXT Centrifugally actuated:

    Tool support under subclass 504 wherein expansion of the external surface
    is caused by the outward force resulting from rapid rotation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    465+,   for centrifugally expanded carriers adapted to frictionally secure
    a flexible-member tool thereto.


CLS 451/507
TXT Actuated by compression of support:

    Tool support under subclass 504 wherein expansion of the external surface
    is caused by compaction of the dimension of the support that is parallel to
    that surface.


CLS 451/508
TXT Including headed, axially disposed, tool holding member on rotary support:

    Tool support under subclass 490 having a support that turns about an axis,
    and means for securing the tool to the support comprising an element that
    extends along such axis, and engages an area of the tool surface which is
    small relative to the entire surface of the tool, and clamps the so engaged
    area between the tool support and itself.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 230+ and more
    specifically subclass 230.19 for axially-headed means to secure a cleaning
    or polishing tool to a support.


CLS 451/509
TXT Tool holding member disconnected from support by partial rotation:

    Tool support under subclass 508 wherein the tool securing means is held to
    the support by a joint that permits release of the means by arcuate
    movement thereof or of another means acting therewith to form the joint.


CLS 451/510
TXT With threaded means to retain tool holding member:

    Tool support under subclass 508 wherein the tool securing means is held
    relative to the support by helical screw means.

    (1)     Note.  The element itself may or may not be threaded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    521+,   for threaded means securing a tool to a nonrotary support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing and General Cleaning, subclass 230.19 for
    threaded means securing a nonabrading tool to a support.


CLS 451/511
TXT Including conical tool holding member:

    Tool support under subclass 510 having means for securing the tool to a
    support, which securing means is in the shape of a cone.

    (1)     Note.  The conical surface may be either protuberant or depressed.


CLS 451/512
TXT Including taper or wedge tool holding member:

    Tool support under subclass 490 having means for securing the tool to a
    support, which securing means has a configuration defined by a cone (or
    conelike surface) or by intersecting planes.


CLS 451/513
TXT Including endless band tool holding member:

    Tool support under subclass 490 having means for securing the tool to a
    support, which securing means comprises a ring or hoop forming a continuous
    clamping element entirely surrounding the tool.

    (1)     Note.  The element may or may not be resilient or elastic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    514+,   for other resilient tool securing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 230+ for a
    ring or hoop securing a cleaning or polishing tool to a support.


CLS 451/514
TXT Including resiliently urged tool holding member:

    Tool support under subclass 490 wherein the tool is secured to the support
    by an element or assemblage of elements which is yieldingly biased into or
    away from tool securing position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    499+,   for resiliently urged tool holding means on a rotary support.


CLS 451/515
TXT Separable:

    Tool support under subclass 514 wherein the tool holding means (i.e.,
    element or assemblage) is removable as a whole from the support, as for
    allowing insertion or removal of the tool relative to the support.


CLS 451/516
TXT Rotatable:

    Tool support under subclass 514 wherein the tool holding means (i.e.,
    element or assemblage) constitutes or is carried by a radial extension of
    or projection from an axle mounted for rotation in the tool support or a
    member attached thereto.

    (1)     Note.  A member secured at one end and arcuately bendable about
    said end is excluded from this subclass and may be found in appropriate
    subclasses of the group (subclasses 514+).


CLS 451/517
TXT Biased for tool disengagement:

    Tool support under subclass 514 wherein the tool holding means is
    yieldingly urged away from the tool securing position and is held in
    position securely by a releasable keeper.


CLS 451/518
TXT Cantilever-spring actuated:

    Tool support under subclass 514 wherein the tool holding means includes a
    resilient member which is rigidly connected to the support at one end
    thereof which urges the tool in a direction toward the workpiece.


CLS 451/519
TXT Coil-spring actuated:

    Tool support under subclass 514 wherein the tool holding means includes a
    resilient member in the form of a helix, wound about a centerline, which
    urges the tool engaging portion thereof toward the tool in a direction
    generally along such centerline.


CLS 451/520
TXT Including tool holder having tool surface depressor:

    Tool support under subclass 490 in which the tool securing means serves to
    cause a portion of the surface to be recessed relative to the work engaging
    portion thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the tool holding means is depressed into the tool
    surface in order to permit operation of the tool without contact between
    the means and the work.


CLS 451/521
TXT Including threaded means to retain tool holder:

    Tool support under subclass 490 including a tool securing means which is
    held relative to the support by helical screw means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    501,    for threaded means securing a tool to a rotary support having slots.


CLS 451/522
TXT Including bar or plate tool holding member:

    Tool support under subclass 521 wherein the tool securing means includes a
    rod or a piece of flat stock which engages only a small portion of the tool
    to secure that portion to the support.


CLS 451/523
TXT Manually manipulated:

    Tool support under subclass 490 adapted to be held by an operative and
    randomly moved during the abrading operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 95.1+ for a
    manually manipulable, flexible blotter and a support therefor.


CLS 451/524
TXT By handle:

    Tool holder under subclass 523 having a portion disclosed as intended to be
    grasped for manipulation thereof by the operative.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    557,    for a rigid tool with an actuating handle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 208+ for a
    fabric wiper, particularly subclass 214 for a lens cleaner.


CLS 451/525
TXT Detachable from tool support:

    Tool support under subclass 524 wherein the handle is separable therefrom.


CLS 451/526
TXT FLEXIBLE-MEMBER TOOL, PER SE:

    A bendable instrumentality under the class definition having (a) a work
    face that includes crystalline abrasive particles (e.g., emery, sand,
    corundum, etc.) and a supporting structure to which such particles are
    secured or (b) an abrasive containing composition molded to a particular
    shape.

    (1)     Note.  GLOSSARY OF TERMS.

    A term or phrase used in the schedule or definitions either repeatedly or
    in a special and limited sense is set forth below with the meaning each has
    in this group of subclasses (i.e., subclasses 526+).  An asterisk (*)
    following a term or phrase in the schedule or definitions in this area
    indicates that it has been defined in this  glossary.

    COMPONENT - A distinct unitary element of a composite tool in the form of a
    layer* or a constituent of a layer.

    FIBER - A relatively short, slender, flexible element of macroscopic size
    and finite length and having a width and thickness of the same order of
    magnitude. A fiber is generally of staple length to facilitate its being
    spun, twisted, or otherwise secured together into a composite strand but
    may be shorter length  requiring bonding, felting, or matting to form a
    strand or layer.  It may be of animal (e.g., wool, rabbit hair), vegetable
    (e.g., cotton, jute, hemp), or mineral (e.g., asbestos, glass, metal)
    origin and may be either natural, modified, or synthetic.

    LAYER - A single thickness of material(s) in the form of a sheet(s) in
    side-by-side, coplanar relation; or particulate material arranged in
    continuity to constitute a distinct stratum.

    SHEET - A rectangular portion of material of finite length, whose width is
    greater than its thickness.


CLS 451/527
TXT Interrupted or composite work face (e.g., cracked, nonplanar, etc.):

    Flexible-member tool under subclass 526 whose abrasive surface is (a)
    corrugated, pleated, or grooved; (b) apertured; (c) comprised of discrete
    abrasive areas on the supporting structure; (d) cracked or slit; or (e)
    made up of sheets* or components* disposed in adjoining or contiguous
    relation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 230.14 for a
    cleaning tool having an interrupted or composite work face and subclass
    230.16 for a cleaning tool having an interrupted work engaging surface.


CLS 451/528
TXT Uniform thickness nonplanar:

    Flexible-member tool under subclass 527 wherein the interrupted work face
    is in the form of an undulating (e.g., corrugated, pleated, etc.) abrasive
    layer of substantially constant depth.


CLS 451/529
TXT Sectional:

    Flexible-member tool under subclass 527 wherein the abrasive work face or
    layer is made up of discrete portions or zones and including such face or
    layer made up of a plurality of abrasive sheets or components.

    (1)     Note.  A layer cracked such that discrete portions or zones are
    formed is included in this subclass.


CLS 451/530
TXT Work face variegated or on projecting backing:

    Flexible-member tool under subclass 526 whose abrasive work engaging face
    comprises either (a) different sizes or kinds of abrasive particles of one
    uninterrupted layer* or (b) an uninterrupted abrasive layer which does not
    completely cover the supporting structure.


CLS 451/531
TXT Splice or joint:

    Flexible-member tool under subclass 526 comprising either two
    interconnected discrete parts, either of which would constitute a
    flexible-member tool, or a single flexible-member tool, two edges or ends
    of which are interconnected by securing means.


CLS 451/532
TXT Comprising fibers:

    Flexible-member tool under subclass 526 having abrasive material embedded
    in or intermingled with a relatively short, slender, flexible element of
    macroscopic size.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    533+,   for an instrumentality comprising abrasive elements associated with
    a composite strand composed of or comprising fibers.


CLS 451/533
TXT Laminate:

    Flexible-member tool under subclass 526 which comprises plural layers* at
    least one layer of which consists of or includes abrasive particles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    532,    for a laminate comprising a fiber layer with abrasive elements
    embedded in a surface thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 230.12 for
    cleaning tools comprising layers adhesively bound together and subclass
    230.15 for a plurality of layers sewn together to form a cleaning tool.


CLS 451/534
TXT Discontinuous or differential coating impregnation or bond:

    Flexible-member tool under subclass 533 comprising plastic facing,
    saturating, or joining material which is present in isolated areas, or as
    differing compositions, or varying in concentration or in physical
    characteristics; or comprising plural layers whose juncture (either
    adhesive or cohesive) is of different character (e.g., strong bond next to
    weak bond) in different areas of the tool.

    (1)     Note.  The plastic material may be abrasive particles of different
    kinds.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 103+, 194, and
    195+ for a single or plural layer stock material product in the form of a
    web or sheet embodying a differential or discontinuous coating,
    impregnation, or bond.


CLS 451/535
TXT Coil wound:

    Flexible-member tool under subclass 533 wherein a layer is helically or
    spirally wrapped (a) upon itself to form a cylinder or cone or (b) along an
    axis to form a cylinder or strand.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 230.13 for a
    spirally wound cleaning tool.


CLS 451/536
TXT Integrated strands:

    Flexible-member tool under subclass 533 which includes a layer or component
    consisting of relatively narrow ribbonlike elements mechanically
    intertangled, interwoven, intertwined, or interlooped.

    (1)     Note.  A patent to a product within the scope of this class and
    claiming a ``textile" will be placed in this subclass unless the disclosure
    indicates that the reference is to a nonstrand textile, such as a layer of
    fibers, for which see subclass 532 above.  The term cloth will be construed
    as signifying textile; the term fabric will not be so construed.


CLS 451/537
TXT Non-coextensive laminae:

    Flexible-member tool under subclass 533 which comprises a first layer
    including abrasive particles, at least one edge of which is offset (either
    laterally or longitudinally) relative to a corresponding edge of a second
    layer of the tool.


CLS 451/538
TXT Strippable layer or component:

    Flexible-member tool under subclass 533 which includes a layer or component
    adhered thereto by a bond, the nature of which permits relatively easy
    removal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass will receive such disclosures as a releasable
    protective layer covering a pressure sensitive adhesive, easily ruptured
    layer, or other temporarily protective layer.

    (2)     Note.  The disclosures of this subclass are limited to a tool in
    which the layer or component is removable as a whole; i.e., the layer is
    not dissolved (washed off) or disintegrated (as by scraping).  Such
    included disclosure may comprise preliminary softening of an adhesive by
    dissolution to release a layer which may then be removed bodily from the
    remainder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 411 for an adhesive tape
    roll package from which a strip may be peeled.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 154+ for a process of coating a
    substrate with a removable protective coating.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 40.1+ for a
    plural component web or sheet in which a layer or component is removable or
    strippable to expose a layer of adhesive material.


CLS 451/539
TXT Abrasive on one surface only:

    Flexible-member tool under subclass 533 in which the abrasive particles are
    disposed only on one face thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    527+    and 534 through 538, for a tool, per se, also having abrasive on
    one surface only.


CLS 451/540
TXT RIGID TOOL:

    Inflexible instrumentality under the class definition having (a) a work
    face that includes crystalline abrasive particles (e.g., emery, sand,
    corundum, etc.) and a supporting structure to which such particles are
    secured or (b) an abrasive containing composition molded to a particular
    shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    463+,   for an expansible tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, for a rigid
    abrasive tool distinguished solely by the abrasive composition.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 291+,
    especially subclasses 293+ for similar elements used in comminution.


CLS 451/541
TXT Rotary cylinder:

    Rigid tool under subclass 540 of a shape of a solid generated by a circle
    moving axially, which tool is intended to turn about its axis and engage to
    abrade the work by the peripheral surface that is parallel to the axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    178+,   for rotary, a peripheral face tool, and see the notes thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclasses 70 and 104 for a burnishing
    machine or tool.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the notes thereto for other loci for a roll or combination involving a
    roll.


CLS 451/542
TXT Circular segments:

    Rotary cylindrical abrading tool under subclass 541  comprised of a
    plurality of preformed blocks of material containing an abrasive which when
    assembled together, along the circumference of a circle, form a complete
    cylinder or cylindrical annulus.

    (1)     Note.  The blocks of material may be claimed with or without other
    means for holding, cementing, or spacing the blocks.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    541+,   the parent of this subclass, for a tool formed from a single
    monolithic or molded piece, even though the abrading surfaces may be
    discontinuous.

    544,    for a tool which is formed of a plurality of blocks of material
    containing an abrasive but in which each of the blocks forms a complete
    cylindrical abrading surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, subclasses 30+ for a roll, per se, comprising
    segmental sections.


CLS 451/543
TXT Detachable:

    Rotary cylindrical abrading tool under subclass 542 in which the blocks of
    material containing the abrasive can be assembled or disassembled without
    the destruction of either the blocks or the means for holding or spacing
    the blocks.


CLS 451/544
TXT Laminated:

    Rotary cylindrical abrading tool under subclass 541 of a rigid or
    inflexible character composed of plural layers of abrading material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, subclass
    297 for an abrasive tool manufacturing process involving.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, for a laminated tubular product not
    elsewhere provided for.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, for a
    laminating process, especially subclasses 184+ for the manufacture of a
    wound laminated cylinder.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, for a single or plural
    layer stock material product in the form of a web, sheet, rod, or strand
    which may include a layer of particulate material; see especially
    subclasses 87, 143+, 206+, 323+, 372, and 402+, all of which subclasses
    have ``particulate matter" in their titles.

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 68+, 70, 72+, and 74+ for a coated or impregnated fabric which
    contains particulate materials.

    492,    Roll or Roller, subclasses 30+ for a roll, per se, not elsewhere
    provided for, having annular axial sections.


CLS 451/545
TXT Work guide:

    Rotary cylindrical abrading tool under subclass 541 of a rigid or
    inflexible character provided with a guide to position the work, as a knife
    blade, at the proper angle to the tool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    267,    282, 365, 549, and 555, for other work guides.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclasses 88+.


CLS 451/546
TXT Reinforced:

    Rotary cylindrical abrading tool under subclass 541 imbedded with a
    strengthening material.

    (1)     Note.  The strengthening material may be wire mesh, fiber glass,
    polymer or resin compound, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material or Composition, for a
    process of making a reinforced abrasive tool.


CLS 451/547
TXT Ribbed periphery:

    Rotary cylindrical abrading tool under subclass 541 in which the
    cylindrical surface of the tool is formed by a single monolithic or molded
    piece provided with a regular pattern of raised abrasive regions, such as
    circumferential ridges or helical formations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    542,    for a rotary tool having a discontinuous segmented surface formed
    by a plurality of abrasive blocks.


CLS 451/548
TXT Rotary disk:

    Rigid tool under subclass 540 including a circular, planar surface, which
    tool is intended to turn about an axis normal to and passing through that
    surface to abrade the work by that surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158+,   259+, 353, and 359, for other rotary abrading disk tools.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    125,    Stone Working, subclasses 3 and 28 for rotary tool stone dressing
    apparatus.


CLS 451/549
TXT Work guide:

    Rotary disk abrading tool under subclass 548 provided with a member or a
    holder to facilitate the application of the tool to the workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    267,    282, 545, and 555, for other work guides.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclasses 88+ for a cutting
    tool sharpener (other than abrasive), cutter and guide.


CLS 451/550
TXT Disk laps:

    Rotary disk abrading tool under subclass 548 specifically disclosed for use
    in polishing a work surface in the presence of a fluent abradant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    450,    for a similar mechanism for applying a liquid coolant to a grinding
    tool.


CLS 451/551
TXT Scroll:

    Rotary disk abrading tool under subclass 548 wherein the working surface is
    formed with a network of raised curvilinear surfaces.


CLS 451/552
TXT Stationary:

    Rigid abrading tool under subclass 540 that is nonmoving and to which the
    work is to be applied to accomplish the abrading.

    (1)     Note.  A hone or a whetstone is included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312+,   for a stationary tool machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 544+ for stock
    materials (e.g., of indefinite length) which are all metal or have adjacent
    metal components.


CLS 451/553
TXT Metal:

    Rigid, stationary abrading tool under subclass 552 in which the abrading
    surface is of metal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclass 84 for a butchers'
    steel used in sharpening a cutting edge.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 544+ for stock
    material (e.g., of indefinite length) which is all metal or has adjacent
    metal components.


CLS 451/554
TXT Having oiler or moistener:

    Rigid, stationary abrading tool under subclass 552 having  means for
    supplying a lubricant to the abrading surface.


CLS 451/555
TXT Work guide:

    Rigid, stationary abrading tool under subclass 552 provided with a member
    or a holder to facilitate the application of the tool to the workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241,    267, 283, 558, and 545, for other work guides.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclass 82 for a cutter with a
    guide used in making a tool.


CLS 451/556
TXT Razor hone:

    Rigid, stationary tool under subclass 552 for sharpening the cutting edge
    of a razor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    319,    for other stationary blade sharpeners.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, digest 8 for an art collection
    directed to razor blade manufacturing.


CLS 451/557
TXT Having actuating handle:

    Rigid tool under subclass 540 provided with a portion disclosed as intended
    to be grasped by an operative for manipulation thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    526+,   for corresponding flexible tools.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclass 84 for a butchers'
    steel.


CLS 451/558
TXT Work guide:

    Rigid abrading tool under subclass  557 provided with a member for
    directing the motion of the tool on the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241,    267, 282, 438, 549, and 555, for other work guides.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclasses 82+ for making a
    cutting tool, generally, including use of a work guide.


CLS 451/559
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Invention under the class definition not strictly falling under any other
    subclass in this class either because of some inherent abrading distinction
    or because it is involving an operation which in itself or in combination
    is only doubtfully classifiable as an abrading operation or because the
    operation involved is merely cognate or accessory to some abrading
    operation without being sufficiently distinct to warrant assignment to
    another art.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


    The following subclasses are collections of published disclosures
    pertaining to various specified aspects of the abrading art.  These
    specified aspects do not form appropriate bases for subclasses in the
    foregoing classification (i.e., subclasses superior hereto in the schedule)
    wherein original copies of patents are placed on the basis of proximate
    function of the apparatus.  These subclasses assist a search based on
    remote function of the apparatus and may be of further assistance to the
    searcher, either as a starting point in searching this class or as an
    indication of further related fields of search inside or outside the class.
     Thus, there is here provided a second access for retrieval of a limited
    number of types of disclosures.

    (1)     Note.  Disclosures are placed in these subclasses for their value
    as references and as leads to appropriate main or secondary fields of
    search, without regard to their original classification or their claimed
    subject matter.

    (2)     Note.  The disclosures found in the following subclasses are
    examples, only, of the indicated subject matter, and in no instance do they
    represent the entire extent of the prior art.


CLS 451/900
TXT GEAR ABRADER:

    Disclosure of a device particular to formation or surfacing of a force
    transmitting gear.


CLS 451/901
TXT SUPER FINISH:

    Disclosure of providing an unusually high luster to a workpiece by abrading.


CLS 451/902
TXT BRAKE ABRADING:

    Disclosure of grinding a brake drum, disk, shoe, or pad.


CLS 451/903
TXT EGG CLEANING:

    Disclosure of removing foreign material from an egg.


CLS 451/904
TXT FLEXIBLE ABRASIVE STORAGE REEL:

    Disclosure of an abrading device with a compartment or spool to store
    several convolutions of flexible abrasive material.


CLS 451/905
TXT METAL LAP:

    Disclosure of means to grind comprising a member of metal which generally
    conforms to the desired shape of a workpiece to which is loosely applied
    crystalline material for grinding the workpiece by movement of the member
    with respect thereto.


CLS 451/906
TXT MACHINE ELEMENT OR UNIT:

    Disclosure of a subcombination of structure of this class, not provided for
    in the ``official" subclasses above.


CLS 451/907
TXT STRIP FEEDING:

    Disclosure of presenting an elongated workpiece toward a grinding means.


CLS 451/908
TXT ELECTRICAL ABRADING:

    Disclosure of grinding of surface material from a workpiece while passing
    electrical current therethrough.


CLS 451/909
TXT WIRE POLISHING:

    Disclosure particular to surface smoothing of a small metallic elongated
    strand.


CLS 451/910
TXT ULTRASONIC:

    Disclosure of abrading wherein vibrational energy of higher frequency than
    detected by normal human hearing is utilized.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165,    for an abrading machine having a rectilinearly reciprocating tool
    that vibrates ultrasonically.


CLS 451/911
TXT TOOL MOUNTING POINT:

    Disclosure of a support for an abrading tool comprising a rodlike member
    having a securing provision to hold the tool at its axial tip.


CLS 451/912
TXT SHOE ABRADING:

    Disclosure of abrading in the formation of or treatment of a shoe or boot.


CLS 451/913
TXT CONTOUR ABRADING:

    Disclosure particular to the grinding of a smooth, uniformly curved surface.


CLS 451/914
TXT SUPPORTING, POSITIONING, OR FEEDING WORK:

    Disclosure of holding a workpiece against gravity, manipulating a workpiece
    with respect to an abrading means, or advancing a workpiece with respect to
    an abrading means, of a type not provided for in the ``official" subclasses
    above.


CLS 451/915
TXT ABRADING WHEEL SPEED CONTROL:

    Disclosure of regulating the rotational velocity of a grinding disk or drum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for abrading with use of a condition responsive control.


CLS 451/916
TXT ABRADING OF BRUSH BRISTLE:

    Disclosure of grinding bristles of a brush.


CLS 451/917
TXT ABRADING OF SCALLOPED CUTTING EDGE (E.G., BREAD KNIFE SHARPENING):

    Disclosure of grinding a regularly pointed sharp cutting edge.

    (1)     Note.  The cutting edge of the disclosure of this subclass is
    shaped somewhat like a saw blade, except the valleys as well as the points
    are sharpened.


CLS 451/918
TXT ADJUSTABLE WORK SUPPORT (E.G., BY SINE BAR):

    Disclosure of repositionable means to support a workpiece not provided for
    in the ``official" subclasses above.

    (1)     Note.  A sine bar, included herein, serves to establish the
    vertical dimension of the angle of the work support (i.e., the sine of the
    angle).


CLS 451/919
TXT WANKEL:

    Disclosure particularly to abrading a trochoical cylinder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 241 for a Wankel engine.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, subclass 61.2 for a Wankel-type
    expansible chamber device.


CLS 451/920
TXT TIRE  ``ROUNDING":

    Disclosure of abrading to correct the exterior periphery of a vehicle tire.


CLS 451/921
TXT ``PAD" FOR LENS SHAPING TOOL:

    Disclosure of an accessory to be used in abrading an optical lens to
    cushion a lens engaging portion to prevent undesired modification of the
    lens.

    (1)     Note.  The pad of this subclass may prevent scratching or cracking
    of the lens.


CLS 452/
TTL BUTCHERING

CLS 452/
TXT                CLASS DEFINITION

    This class is limited to processes and apparatus for killing or dressing
    animals or fish for food or pelts and includes processes and apparatus for
    working with meat and not otherwise provided for, such as making and
    processing sausages, shirring sausage casings, cleaning intestines and
    tenderizing meat.

    (1)     Note.  The term  "carcass" as used throughout this definition is
    meant to include the dead body of either a land or marine animal.

    (2)     Note.  The term "dressing" as used throughout this definition
    includes the preparation of animals (land or marine) for eatable
    consumption.

    (3)     Note.  The illustrations provided herein are strictly exemplary of
    a type of subject matter which may be found in the subclasses and should
    not be construed as further limiting the written definitions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, appropriate subclasses for hand manipulated cutting tools
    adapted for use in butchering but capable of, and disclosed for a more
    general use.

    53,     Package Making, appropriate subclasses for the packaging of meat or
    fish and subclass 517 in particular for the packaging of meat or fish
    involving reshaping the product by cutting.

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses, for a slicing or cutting means of
    general utility which may include meat cutting. If the cutting device
    "recognizes" the article being cut as a meat product it is classified here
    (Class 452). If, on the other hand, there is no special adaptation of the
    machine for handling a particular piece of meat (i.e., it could be used to
    slice any object) it is classified in Class 83. Thus, for example, a mere
    meat slicing machine such as is commonly used to slice lunch meat would be
    classified in Class 83. However,cutting devices such as splitters which are
    designed to move along the backbone of a carcass, or cutting devices
    designed to cut through bone, are classified in Class 452.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 324+ for apparatus for
    cooking meat products, subclass 342 for probes for internally testing meat
    for bruises, subclasses 419+ for skewers for meat products, and subclasses
    485+ for apparatus for chemically treating meat products with an additive,
    particularly, subclass 494 for larding pins.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses for meat comminutors.

    249,    Static Molds, appropriate subclasses for static apparatus for
    molding ground meat products.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    appropriate subclasses for dynamic apparatus for molding ground meat
    products (e.g., briquetters).

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    appropriate subclasses for processes of chemically treating meat, mixing
    diverse meat products, heat treating meat, and molding comminuted meat, or
    meat products, per se.




CLS 452/1
TXT CRUSTACEAN (E.G., SHRIMP, CRAB, LOBSTER, CRAYFISH):
    Process or apparatus under the class definition for dressing marine animals
    which have an exoskeleton.


CLS 452/2
TXT Shrimp processing:
    Subject matter under subclass 1 particularly adapted for the dressing of
    small slender bodied marine decapod crustaceans of the suborder Natantia.


CLS 452/3
TXT Deveining:
    Subject matter under subclass 2 for removing the viscera known as the sand
    vein which is located under the shell and along the dorsal portion of a
    shrimp.


CLS 452/4
TXT Beheader:
    Subject matter under subclass 2 for severing the head from the body of a
    shrimp.


CLS 452/5
TXT Peeler:
    Subject matter under subclass 2 for removing the exoskeleton (i.e., outer
    shell) of shrimp.


CLS 452/6
TXT Hand tool:
    Apparatus under subclass 1 which are hand held and hand manipulated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for shrimp processing hand tools.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 120.1 for hand manipulated shell openers (e.g.,
    nut shell openers).


CLS 452/7
TXT Vibratory meat removal:
    Subject matter under subclass 1 relating to the separation of meat from
    shell by subjecting the crustacean to a rapid reciprocating movement.


CLS 452/8
TXT Meat removal by pressure differential:
    Subject matter under subclass 1 relating to the separation of meat from
    shell by creating a difference between fluid force acting on the shell and
    fluid forces acting on the meat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for devices which use a pressure differential to force open the
    shell of a mollusk.

    116,    for devices which use a pressure differential to eviscerate.


CLS 452/9
TXT Squeezing meat out:
    Subject matter under subclass 1 relating to the separation of meat from
    shell by applying an external force to the shell to forcibly expel the meat
    therefrom.


CLS 452/10
TXT Meat removal by centrifugal force:
    Subject matter under subclass 1 relating to the separation of meat from
    shell by constraining the crustacean to move curvilinearly and using the
    apparent force on the crustacean that is directed away from the center of
    curvature or axis of rotation to separate the meat from the shell.


CLS 452/11
TXT Claw lock:
    Apparatus under subclass 1 which are used to disable the pincers of
    crustaceans.


CLS 452/12
TXT MOLLUSK (E.G., OYSTER, CLAM, SQUID, MUSSEL, OCTOPUS, SNAIL, SLUG,
    SCALLOP):Method or apparatus under the class definition for dressing marine
    animals of the phylum Mollusca which are invertebrates characterized by a
    soft unsegmented body enclosed in most instances partly or wholly in a
    calcareous shell of one or more pieces and having gills, a foot, and a
    mantle.


CLS 452/13
TXT Bivalve opener:
    Subject matter under subclass 12 for forcing apart or causing to part the
    thick shell portions of a clam, oyster, scallop, or other hard-shelled
    mollusk.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, especially subclass 268 for disassembly of parts by
    a spreading tool.

    81,     Tools, particularly subclasses 300+ for tool jaw(s) positioned by
    relatively movable plural handles (e.g., pliers) and subclass 487 for other
    tools having a work clamping jaw.


CLS 452/14
TXT With heat treatment:
    Subject matter under subclass 13 in which the bivalve is subjected to an
    elevated temperature to aid in the opening of the shell.


CLS 452/15
TXT By pressure differential:
    Subject matter under subclass 13 in which the bivalve is subjected to a
    difference in fluid pressure between the exterior and the interior of the
    shell to aid in the opening of the shell.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for devices which use a pressure differential to separate the meat
    from the shell of a crustacean.

    116,    for devices which use a pressure differential to eviscerate.


CLS 452/16
TXT Support and wedge:
    Apparatus under subclass 13 including a surface which underlies, sustains,
    or holds the bivalve and a cutting or tapered tool which forces the shell
    halves apart.


CLS 452/17
TXT Hand tool:
    Apparatus matter under subclass 13 including an implement supported and
    manipulated by the hand of an operator for forcing or otherwise parting the
    shells of a bivalve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 120.1 for hand manipulated shell openers (e.g.,
    nut shell openers).


CLS 452/18
TXT Eviscerating:
    Subject matter under subclass 12 wherein the internal organs (i.e.,
    viscera) of the body are separated from the remainder of the mollusk.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses are the loci for scallop
    eviscerators.


CLS 452/19
TXT Pinching rollers:
    Subject matter under subclass 18 in which viscera is separated from the
    remainder of the mollusk by oppositely rotating elements which grip the
    viscera to remove it.


CLS 452/20
TXT By fluid pressure:
    Subject matter under subclass 18 wherein the viscera is extracted from the
    mollusk by applying a vacuum, or an air or liquid stream against either the
    viscera or the edible material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for pressure differential type separation of the meat from the
    shell in a crustacean.

    15,     for a pressure differential type bivalve opener.


CLS 452/21
TXT SHIRRING OF CASING:
    Method or apparatus under the class definition in which a flexible tubular
    container of either natural or artificial material, used to encase ground
    foodstuffs, is gathered into pleats about a core or mandrel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, appropriate subclasses for the packaging of shirred
    casing.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 118.1 for non-edible sausage
    casings, per se, including shirred casings, with more than nominal wall
    structure.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for inedible casing making by bonding plural layers,
    and particularly subclass 203 for joining of a one piece blank along a seam
    to form a tube.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, cross-reference art collection 802
    for a collection of shirred sausage casing articles.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes, for
    methods of molding an inedible casing.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 120 for pleated bags.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    subclasses 131.1+ for extrusion shaping apparatus for sausage casings.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 132+, particularly, subclass 135 for the combination of a
    sausage with an inedible casing, and subclasses 138+ for edible sausage
    casings, per se.  Class 426 provides for sausage casings, and their method
    of manufacture when combined with an edible perfecting feature (e.g., smoke
    flavoring the casing)

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 34.8 for
    non-edible sausage casings with nominal wall structure.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, subclasses 186+ for a method or apparatus for
    end-dressing sausage casings.


CLS 452/22
TXT Combined with sausage stuffing:
    Subject matter under subclass 21 which additionally includes the filling of
    the food casing with a comminuted meat product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30+,    for sausage making methods and apparatus, per se, which may include
    an already shirred casing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclass 576 for forming a package on a hollow
    mandrel and subsequently stuffing that package.


CLS 452/23
TXT Multiple shirring devices operating simultaneously:
    Subject matter under subclass 21 which includes the shirring of plural food
    casings at the same time.

    (1)     Note.  Most of the devices in this subclass include a timing
    mechanism which coordinates operation of the multiple shirring devices.


CLS 452/24
TXT Shirring head:
    Subject matter under subclass 21 in which particular significance is
    attributed to that portion of the apparatus which directly contacts the
    casing to form the pleats or causes the casing to be pleated in a specific
    manner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, subclass 132 for the ruffling or pleating of fabric.


CLS 452/25
TXT Moves about axis parallel to shirring mandrel:
    Subject matter under subclass 24 wherein the flexible casing moves and is
    pleated along an elongated rod or tube and the device which performs the
    pleating operation has at least one nonlinear component of motion which is
    in a plane perpendicular to the axis of the mandrel.


CLS 452/26
TXT Combined with twisting of casing:
    Subject matter under subclass 24 including a means which causes the casing
    to rotate about the axis of the mandrel during or subsequent to the
    shirring operation so that the shirrs form a helical pattern along the
    casing.


CLS 452/27
TXT Fluid lubrication of casing:
    Subject matter under subclass 21 which includes applying a liquid or gas to
    the casing to reduce frictional forces which would otherwise inhibit the
    shirring operation.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this and indented subclasses is the application
    of a liquid lubricant to the casing or the introduction of pressurized air
    inside the casing to reduce friction between the mandrel and the casing.

    (2)     Note.  Fluid treating of a casing other than for the sole purpose
    of lubrication is beyond the scope of this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    for processes of applying coating materials to an edible casing perfecting
    the flavoring thereof (e.g., smoke flavoring)

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 230+ for processes of applying a
    coating to nonedible sausage casings for purposes other than mere
    lubrication.


CLS 452/28
TXT Inflation pressure control:
    Subject matter under subclass 27 wherein the lubricating fluid is a gas
    injected between the casing and the mandrel to expand the casing about the
    mandrel, the device further including a sensing means which regulates the
    amount of injected gas.


CLS 452/29
TXT Severing into discrete lengths:
    Subject matter under subclass 21 which includes, either before or after the
    shirring operation, a means to divide the casing into individual segments.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 178+ for a cutting means of general utility
    adapted to be used on the inside of hollow work.


CLS 452/30
TXT SAUSAGE MAKING:
    Method or apparatus under the class definition used in the production of
    meat products consisting of a comminuted meat encased in a flexible wrapper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for a method or apparatus including shirring a sausage casing.

    186,    for stick-like supports for linked sausages used during smoke
    flavoring processes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, appropriate subclasses for the packaging of meat
    products such as sausages and hot dogs and subclasses 255+ for inserting
    and guiding material into a container.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 441 for apparatus for
    molding skinless sausage. Class 99, provides for sausage making apparatus
    which includes an edible perfecting operation, e.g., cooking, canning,
    smoking the casing, mixing with a diverse edible, etc.

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses for presses not elsewhere provided
    for, and especially subclass 1 for binder applying methods and apparatus
    not otherwise provided for.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    subclasses 461+ for extrusion devices which produce sausages or
    sausage-shaped articles.

    426,    Food or Edible Material: Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclass 105 for sausages, per se. Class 426 provides for methods of
    sausage stuffing, linking, delinking, encasing or casing removal when
    combined with an edible perfecting operation, e.g., cooking, canning,
    smoking the casing, mixing with a diverse edible, etc.


CLS 452/31
TXT Automatic control:
    Subject matter under subclass 30 including means to sense a condition or
    change of condition with respect to either the sausage being produced or to
    the apparatus used in the production of sausage, which and as a result of
    this sensing (and without external intervention) brings about an alteration
    in the operation or control of the device.

    (1)     Note.  The alteration may include stopping or starting of all or
    part of the mechanism so as to correct, avoid damage from, or mitigate the
    effects of the sensed condition.


CLS 452/32
TXT Casing handling:
    Subject matter under subclass 30 relating to the moving or orienting of
    sausage casing material preparatory to or in conjunction with the stuffing
    operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for the shirring of a casing combined with a sausage stuffing
    operation.


CLS 452/33
TXT Insertion on nozzle:
    Subject matter under subclass 32 relating to the loading or unloading of
    sausage casing material onto or off of a discharge spout from which fluid
    stuffing is expelled into the casing.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are devices which load a casing
    onto a holder. The holder may later be used as a stuffing horn or may be
    disposed of after inserting the casing onto the horn.


CLS 452/34
TXT Indexing onto stuffing horn:
    Subject matter under subclass 33 wherein a casing loader has plural casing
    holders which are moved between plural stations, one casing being loaded
    onto a holder at one station while another casing is unloaded onto the
    stuffing machine at another station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for multiple shirring devices which operate simultaneously

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 545+ for the making of a tubular package
    by progressively seaming a web.


CLS 452/35
TXT Stuffing:
    Subject matter under subclass 30 relating to the filling of a flexible
    casing with comminuted meat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 545+ for apparatus for forming packages
    by confining the contents within a progressively seamed cover formed from a
    continuous web or webs and subclasses 567, and 575-577 for the stuffing of
    large whole meat portions (i.e., hams, shoulders, etc.) into a casing.

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    appropriate subclasses for filling receivers with fluent material which is
    not a ground meat product, particularly subclasses 313+.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for portion dispensers of
    general utility.


CLS 452/36
TXT Multiple head:
    Subject matter under subclass 35 wherein plural stuffing nozzles operate
    concurrently.


CLS 452/37
TXT Sausage sizing and shaping:
    Subject matter under subclass 35 relating to the control or regulation of
    the diameter, length, or external form of sausage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for sensor controlled sausage stuffers.


CLS 452/38
TXT Sizing ring:
    Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein elements located on a discharge
    spout from which fluid stuffing is expelled into the casing and which are
    located internally of the sausage casing control or regulate the diameter
    of sausage.


CLS 452/39
TXT Casing insert (e.g., flat ended sausage)
    Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein disk-shaped members are inserted
    into the sausage casing to control the size and shape of the sausage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, appropriate subclasses, for the combination of a
    casing and insert which does not claim the stuffing operation.


CLS 452/40
TXT Pump type:
    Subject matter under subclass 35 wherein the stuffing is forced into the
    casing by a mechanically driven device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 179+ for concurrent pressing and conveying
    presses of the type in which a plunger forces material through a tube, not
    elsewhere provided for.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 481+ for oscillating type pumps, per se.


CLS 452/41
TXT Rotary piston:
    Subject matter under subclass 40 wherein the stuffing is forced into the
    casing by a device which makes complete revolutions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, appropriate subclasses for a
    unidirectional rotating member caused to move by an external force to
    increase the energy in a fluid by transfer of kinetic energy from the
    member to the fluid.

    417,    Pumps, appropriate subclasses for rotary expansible chamber pumps
    including (1) a motor to drive the pump, (2) operated by an art device, (3)
    claimed in combination with another type pump or (4) provided with valving
    other than in-line valving or valving operating merely to perfect the
    operation of the pump.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclasses for
    rotary expansible chamber pumps excluded from Class 417.


CLS 452/42
TXT Reciprocating piston:
    Subject matter under subclass 40 wherein the stuffing is forced into the
    casing by a piston which reciprocates back and forth in a straight line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, appropriate subclasses for pump
    subcombinations in which the working member has a reciprocating motion.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 179+ for concurrent pressing and conveying
    presses of the type in which a plunger forces material through a tube, not
    elsewhere provided for.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 437+ for expansible chamber pumps which include
    (1) drive means, (2) valving for the pumped fluid, or (3) a diverse pump.


CLS 452/43
TXT Fluid motor:
    Subject matter under subclass 42 wherein a gas or liquid operated motor
    causes reciprocation of the piston.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 269.01+ for reciprocating platen presses not
    elsewhere provided for, in which the actuation of the platen is by fluid
    pressure.

    417,    Pumps, subclasses 375+ for fluid motor driven pumps.


CLS 452/44
TXT Screw:
    Subject matter under subclass 40 wherein a rotating helix forces material
    into a sausage casing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 145+ for concurrent pressing and conveying
    presses of the helix compressor type not otherwise provided for.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power Driven, subclasses 657+ for screw type conveyors.


CLS 452/45
TXT Nozzle:
    Subject matter under subclass 35 wherein particular significance is
    attributed to a discharge spout from which a fluid stuffing is expelled
    into the casing.


CLS 452/46
TXT Linking:
    Subject matter under subclass 30 relating to the segmenting of sausage into
    a chain.


CLS 452/47
TXT By twisting:
    Subject matter under subclass 46 wherein the sausage links are formed by
    rotating the casing to form a constriction preventing the movement of
    sausage stuffing through the constriction.


CLS 452/48
TXT By applying constricting member:
    Subject matter under subclass 46 wherein the sausage links are formed by
    the closing off of the sausage casing at specific intervals by a tie, band,
    or clip.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 30.5 for bag clips, per
    se.


    289,    Knots and Knot Tying, subclass 18.1 for knot tying machines which
    may be used in a sausage linking operation.


CLS 452/49
TXT Delinking:
    Subject matter under subclass 30 relating to the separation of a chain of
    sausage into individual links.


CLS 452/50
TXT Peeling:
    Subject matter under subclass 30 relating to the removal of the sausage
    casing from formed sausages.


CLS 452/51
TXT Sausage link handling:
    Subject matter under subclass 30 relating to the transportation or
    orienting of sausage, either individually or in linked form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186,    for smoke sticks, per se.


CLS 452/52
TXT SLAUGHTERING:
    Subject matter under the class definition relating to the killing of
    animals in preparation for (1) consumption as food or (2) the use of animal
    hides for clothing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, appropriate subclasses
    for the killing of animals for purposes other than (1) and (2) as noted
    above.


CLS 452/53
TXT Conveying live animals to slaughtering apparatus:
    Subject matter under subclass 52 including a means to automatically move or
    guide living animals to the slaughtering location.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177+,   for conveyors peculiar to butchering which convey animals that have
    been already slaughtered.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 400+ for livestock carrying vehicle,
    subclasses 843+ for a live animal conveyor, gangway, or chute and
    subclasses 840+ for stock sorting.


CLS 452/54
TXT Restraint or immobilizer:
    Subject matter under subclass 52 including a means to hold up, prop, or
    steady the animal so as to inhibit movement thereof during the slaughtering
    operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    187+,   for supports or shackles used to suspend animals which may be still
    alive, and are used to restrain the legs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 712+ for animal restraining devices of
    general utility not restricted for use in a slaughtering operation.


CLS 452/55
TXT Knocking pen:
    Subject matter under subclass 54 wherein the restraint or immobilizer
    comprises a structure which closely surrounds the entire animal, preventing
    that animal from movement during slaughtering.


CLS 452/56
TXT Fall directing device:
    Subject matter under subclass 54 which will control the direction or
    orientation of the collapse of the animal after it loses consciousness.


CLS 452/57
TXT Stunning:
    Subject matter under subclass 52 including devices which render unconscious
    an animal to be slaughtered.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    42,     Firearms, subclass 1.12 for explosively actuated stunning devices.
    These devices ordinary include a piston which is explosively propelled to
    strike the skull of cattle to render the same unconscious.


CLS 452/58
TXT Electric:
    Subject matter under subclass 57 wherein the stunning is accomplished
    through the delivery of an electric shock to the animal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses 1+
    for electrical applications to the human body.


CLS 452/59
TXT Trough or tank:
    Subject matter under subclass 58 wherein the animal to be slaughtered is at
    least partially immersed in a liquid electrical conductor during the time
    the electric shock is delivered.


CLS 452/60
TXT Hand held stunner:
    Subject matter under subclass 58 wherein the stunning device is adapted to
    be carried and manipulated by a hand of a human operator.


CLS 452/61
TXT Spring loaded:
    Subject matter under subclass 57 wherein a mechanically-driven stunner is
    driven by a resilient or elastic member.


CLS 452/62
TXT Pneumatic:
    Subject matter under subclass 57 wherein a mechanically-driven stunner is
    driven by a compressed gas.


CLS 452/63
TXT Throat slitting or severing:
    Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein the animal is slaughtered by
    cutting the throat to cause the animal to bleed to death, suffocate, or cut
    off vital nerve functions.


CLS 452/64
TXT Beheading:
    Subject matter under subclass 63 wherein the animal is slaughtered by
    severing the head of the animal from the rest of the body.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is limited to beheaders which kill the animal
    as a result of the beheading. For devices which behead the animal after it
    is already dead, see search notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166+,   for extremity removers including devices which remove the head of
    an already slaughtered animal.


CLS 452/65
TXT Sticking:
    Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein the animal to be slaughtered is
    killed by inserting a pointed device into a vital organ.


CLS 452/66
TXT Anesthetizing or gassing:
    Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein the animal is either rendered
    unconscious or killed by inhalation of a gaseous material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 200.24+ for respiratory devices used in surgery.


CLS 452/67
TXT Bleeding:
    Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein blood is drained from an animal.

    (1)     Note.  Bleeding is usually carried out on a stunned animal and is
    the actual cause of death.


CLS 452/68
TXT Suction assisted:
    Subject matter under subclass 67 wherein the draining of blood is hastened
    by the application of below ambient air pressure.


CLS 452/69
TXT Trocar and cannula:
    Subject matter under subclass 67 wherein a surgical instrument consisting
    of a sharp stylet enclosed in a tube is inserted through the containing
    wall of a body cavity, thereby permitting blood to drain off through the
    tube.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 264+ for trocars and cannulas used in surgery.


CLS 452/70
TXT Tongue protector:
    Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein a device is inserted into the
    mouth of an animal to prevent the tongue from being bitten or swallowed
    during the slaughtering operation.


CLS 452/71
TXT EPIDERMAL OUTGROWTH REMOVER:
    Subject matter under the class definition relating to the extraction of
    hair from animals, feathers from fowl, or scales from fish in the
    preparation of these animals for human consumption.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 94.16+ for generic depilitating processes.


CLS 452/72
TXT Wax-type:
    Subject matter under subclass 71 wherein the animal is coated with a
    resinous material which is allowed to harden and is thereafter peeled from
    the animal the epidermal outgrowth adhering to the hardened material and
    being removed along with it.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses for wax
    compositions, per se.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for coating apparatus,
    per se.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclass 4 for processes
    and apparatus for cleaning by use of a solidifiable composition.


CLS 452/73
TXT Singeing:
    Subject matter under subclass 71 wherein the epidermal outgrowth is removed
    by burning.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, appropriate subclasses for furnaces, per se.


CLS 452/74
TXT Scalding:
    Subject matter under subclass 71 wherein the epidermal outgrowth is
    loosened from the skin by subjecting the carcass to a hot liquid or steam.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for coating apparatus,
    per se.


CLS 452/75
TXT With simultaneous scraping or defeathering:
    Subject matter under subclass 74 including mechanical removal of the
    epidermal outgrowth at the same time that the carcass is subject to the
    scalding treatment.


CLS 452/76
TXT Spray type scalding:
    Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein the hot liquid or steam is
    administered to the carcass as a jet of fine liquid particles.


CLS 452/77
TXT Spray type scalder:
    Subject matter under subclass 74 wherein the hot liquid or steam is
    administered to the carcass as a jet of fine liquid particles.


CLS 452/78
TXT Tanks:
    Subject matter under subclass 74 wherein the scalding is administered by
    immersing the carcass in a bath of hot liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 345+ for cauldrons.

    137,    Fluid Handling, particularly subclasses 255+, 386+, 571+, 581, and
    590+ for tanks combined with other fluid handling structure.

    220,    Receptacles, for tank structure not otherwise provided for, and see
    the notes thereto for the location of other tank structure.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclass 144 for a valve mounted on a
    tank.


CLS 452/79
TXT Means for raising or lowering animals into or out of scalding tank (e.g.,
    hoists):Subject matter under subclass 78 including an elevator mechanism
    for loading or unloading carcasses into the scalding tank.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    178,    for elevating conveyors not specifically used with scalding tanks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    appropriate subclasses for elevators of general utility, not solely
    restricted by disclosure to the handling of animal carcasses.

    212,    Traversing Hoists, appropriate subclasses for traversing hoists of
    general utility which raise, lower and move a load laterally.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 264+ for a subcombination hoisting device.


CLS 452/80
TXT Conveyed through scalding tank:
    Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein the carcass is transported from
    one end of a tank to the other.


CLS 452/81
TXT By fluid material impingement:
    Subject matter under subclass 71 wherein the epidermal outgrowth is removed
    by spraying the animal carcass with a jet of air or liquid of sufficient
    velocity to remove the outgrowth by direct impact.

    (1)     Note.  The air or liquid may have solids entrained therein to aid
    in the abrasive removal of the outgrowth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173,    for devices which wash debris from animal carcasses.  If the
    outgrowth is attached to the skin prior to the fluid treatment
    classification is proper in subclass 81.  Subclass 173 takes the removal of
    debris which merely lie on the surface.


CLS 452/82
TXT Gripping type:
    Subject matter under subclass 71 wherein the epidermal outgrowth is removed
    by grasping the outgrowth and pulling it from the carcass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclass 26 for machines for plucking the
    coarse or water hairs from furs.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoistline Implements, subclass 99.2 for
    tweezers and tongs of general utility.


CLS 452/83
TXT And further including rotary type remover:
    Subject matter under subclass 82 which, in addition to the gripping type
    remover also includes a device which moves about an axis and contacts the
    carcass to remove the outgrowth by an abrading type action.


CLS 452/84
TXT At least one surface rotates and moves cyclically towards and away from the
    other gripping surface:Subject matter under subclass 82 wherein a gripping
    couple is formed, at least one member of the couple moves about an axis and
    moves into and out of contact with the other member at least once during
    its rotational cycle to accomplish the grasping and pulling operation.


CLS 452/85
TXT Pinched between roller nip:
    Subject matter under subclass 84 wherein the gripping couple consists of a
    pair of rollers.


CLS 452/86
TXT Power driven:
    Subject matter under subclass 71 wherein the outgrowth remover is operated
    by mechanical, fluid, or electric motive means.


CLS 452/87
TXT Beater (i.e., flexible end):
    Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein the outgrowth remover is flexible
    and resiliently contacts the carcass to remove the outgrowth by a striking
    action.

     (1)    Note.  Subject matter in this and indented subclasses is usually
    restricted to the plucking of feathers from fowl.


CLS 452/88
TXT Rotary:
    Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein the outgrowth contacting portion
    of the beater moves in an orbital path about an axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94+,    for power driven rotary hog scrapers.

    99+,    for power driven rotary fish scalers.


CLS 452/89
TXT Carcass conveyed past beater:
    Subject matter under subclass 88 wherein carcasses are continuously
    transported by powered means along a path which intersects the path of the
    rotary beater.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95,     for conveyors suspending hog carcasses passing through a scraping
    apparatus.


CLS 452/90
TXT Axis of rotation parallel to work path:
    Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the axis about which the beater
    rotates is oriented in the same direction as the conveying path.


CLS 452/91
TXT Axis of rotation perpendicular to work path:
    Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the axis about which the beater
    rotates is oriented in a direction which is at a right angle to the
    conveying path.


CLS 452/92
TXT Batch type:
    Subject matter under subclass 88 wherein a single carcass or a discrete
    group of carcasses is introduced into the outgrowth remover, operated on by
    the outgrowth remover, and then removed from the outgrowth remover
    whereupon this cycle may be repeated.

    (1)     Note.  A batch type operation is distinguished from a continuous
    operation by a noncontinuous flow of work pieces through the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     for batch type rotary hog scrapers.


CLS 452/93
TXT Beater element structure or mounting:
    Subject matter under subclass 88 wherein particular significance is
    attributed either to the shape, composition, or arrangement of parts used
    to make up the beater or to the attachment of beater elements to a rotary
    driving member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97,     for hog scraper structure or mounting on a rotary drive member.


CLS 452/94
TXT Rotary scraper (i.e., rigid end):
    Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein the outgrowth remover moves in an
    orbital path about an axis and has a generally inflexible, linear,
    sharpened edge portion which rubs along the carcass to remove the outgrowth
    by an abrading action.

     (1)    Note.  Subject matter in this and indented subclasses is usually
    related to the scraping of hair from hogs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

     89+,   for power driven rotary beaters for removing feathers from fowl.

    99+,    for power driven rotary fish scalers.

    104,    for hand held hog scrapers.


CLS 452/95
TXT Carcass conveyed past scraper:
    Subject matter under subclass 94 wherein carcasses are continuously
    transported by powered means along a path which intersects the path of the
    rotary scraper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89+,    for conveyors suspending fowl passing through a defeathering
    apparatus.


CLS 452/96
TXT Batch (e.g., cradle):
    Subject matter under subclass 94 wherein a single carcass or a discrete
    group of carcasses is introduced into the outgrowth remover, operated on by
    the outgrowth remover, and then removed from the outgrowth remover
    whereupon this cycle may be repeated.

    (1)     Note.  A batch type operation is distinguished from a continuous
    operation by a noncontinuous flow of work pieces through the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92,     for batch type powered rotary beaters used for fowl defeathering.


CLS 452/97
TXT Scraper element structure or mounting:
    Subject matter under subclass 94 wherein particular significance is
    attributed to either the shape, composition, or arrangement of parts used
    to make up the scraper or to the attachment of the scraper to a rotary
    driving member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93,     for beater element structure or mounting on a rotary drive member
    used in fowl defeathering.


CLS 452/98
TXT Scaler (i.e., serrated or toothed end):
    Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein the end of the outgrowth remover
    is a generally rigid member having a jagged edge which catches or snags on
    the scales of fish to remove them.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    for hand held fish scalers.


CLS 452/99
TXT Rotary:
    Subject matter under subclass 98 wherein the outgrowth contacting portion
    of the scaler moves in an orbital path about an axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88+,    for power driven rotary beaters for removing feathers from fowl.

    94+,    for power driven rotary hog scrapers.


CLS 452/100
TXT Driven behind boat:
    Subject matter under subclass 99 wherein the outgrowth remover is drawn
    through water behind a watercraft and is powered by the motion of that
    watercraft.


CLS 452/101
TXT Hand held:
    Subject matter under subclass 99 wherein the scaling device is adapted to
    be carried and manipulated by the hand of a human operator.


CLS 452/102
TXT Hand tool:
    Subject matter under subclass 71 wherein the epidermal outgrowth remover is
    adapted to be carried and manipulated by the hand of a human operator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    for a hand held, power driven, rotary fish scaler.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 169+ for hand held scrapers of general utility.


CLS 452/103
TXT Diverse tool:
    Subject matter under subclass 102 wherein the device also has a utility
    different from epidermal outgrowth removal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, for compound tools having utility in other than the
    butchering art.


CLS 452/104
TXT Scraper:
    Subject matter under subclass 102 wherein the hand tool includes a
    generally inflexible, linear, sharpened edge portion which rubs along the
    carcass to remove the outgrowth by an abrading action.

     (1)    Note.  Subject matter in this subclass is usually restricted to the
    scraping of hair from hogs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94+,    for power driven rotary hog scrapers.


CLS 452/105
TXT Scaler:
    Subject matter under subclass 102 wherein the end of the hand tool is a
    generally rigid member having a jagged edge which catches or snags on the
    scales of fish to thereby remove them.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98+,    for power driven fish scalers.


CLS 452/106
TXT VISCERA PROCESSING:
    Process or apparatus under the class definition relating to the internal
    organs of a carcass.


CLS 452/107
TXT Eviscerating including means to remove external portion of animal:Subject
    matter under subclass 106 which separates an internal organ along with a
    noninternal part of the animal as a unit from the remainder of the carcass.


CLS 452/108
TXT Removal of head with viscera:
    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein the external portion removed is
    the head.


CLS 452/109
TXT Removal of vent with viscera:
    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein the external portion removed is
    the anal excretory opening.


CLS 452/110
TXT Roe or ova:
    Subject matter under subclass 106 relating specifically to the female
    reproductive cell of the animal.


CLS 452/111
TXT Gizzard:
    Subject matter under subclass 106 relating specifically to the enlargement
    of the alimentary canal which comprises the second stomach of fowl.


CLS 452/112
TXT Harvesting:
    Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein the gizzard is separated from the
    fowl or is isolated from the remaining viscera.


CLS 452/113
TXT Opener:
    Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein an access opening to the interior
    of the gizzard is created.


CLS 452/114
TXT With cleaning:
    Subject matter under subclass 113 and further including a step or means to
    remove loose material found within the interior of the gizzard.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111,    for devices to remove the interior lining of the gizzard (e.g.,
    gizzard skinners).

    123,    for the washing of other viscera.

    173,    for devices which wash the exterior surface of carcasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 3.1 for the
    general washing of food products when not limited to use in butchering. If
    the washer is specifically disclosed for cleansing a particular type of
    animal, (e.g. fish), for washing an entire animal carcass, or for washing
    specific carcass parts or organs, then the device is not considered to be
    of general utility and will be found in this class (452).

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses for
    the removal of undesirable materials from solids through contact with
    liquids.


CLS 452/115
TXT Oil gland remover:
    Subject matter under subclass 106 relating specifically to the extraction
    of the organ located near the anus of fowl that secretes oil for grooming
    of the feathers.


CLS 452/116
TXT Pressure differential type:
    Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein viscera is removed from the
    carcass by creating a difference in a fluid force acting between the
    carcass and the viscera.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for devices which use a pressure differential to separate the meat
    from the shell of a crustacean.

    15,     for devices which use a pressure differential to force open the
    shell of a mollusk.


CLS 452/117
TXT Gripper or hook type eviscerator:
    Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein viscera is removed by being (1)
    grasped or (2) impaled and subsequently pulled from the carcass.


CLS 452/118
TXT Spoon type eviscerator:
    Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein viscera is removed from the
    carcass by being scooped therefrom.


CLS 452/119
TXT Rotary scrubber type eviscerator:
    Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein viscera is removed by frictional
    contact with the periphery of a member which revolves about an axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173,    for surface scrubbers used in butchering

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 3.1 for the
    general washing of food products when not limited to use in butchering.


CLS 452/120
TXT Venting or opening preparatory to evicerating:
    Subject matter under subclass 106 which provides access to the interior
    visceral cavity of a carcass.


CLS 452/121
TXT Of fish:
    Subject matter under subclass 120 wherein the carcass is that of a cold
    blooded aquatic vertebrate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for the evisceration of crustaceans.

    18+,    for the evisceration of mollusks.


CLS 452/122
TXT By tubular rotary cutter:
    Subject matter under subclass 120 wherein the access opening is created by
    a cylindrical tool which revolves about an axis and which makes an incision
    of circular shape.


CLS 452/123
TXT Viscera cleaner:
    Subject matter under subclass 106 relating to the surface washing of
    visceral organs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for gizzard cleaners.

    173,    for devices which wash surface debris from animal carcasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 3.1 for the
    general washing of food products when not limited to use in butchering. If
    the washer is specifically disclosed for cleansing a particular type of
    animal (e.g., fish), for washing an entire animal carcass, or for washing
    specific carcass parts or organs, then the device is not considered to be
    of general utility and will be found in this class (452).

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses for
    the removal of undesirable materials from solids through contact with
    liquids.


CLS 452/124
TXT Giblet inserter:
    Subject matter under subclass 106 relating to the reinsertion of the
    cleaned viscera of fowl back into the visceral cavity.


CLS 452/125
TXT SKINNING:
    Method or apparatus under the class definition relating to the removal of
    the membranous tissue forming the external covering of a carcass or carcass
    section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111,    for subject matter which removes the interior lining of gizzards
    (gizzard skinners).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing: Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclass 94.1 for processes of treating hides with
    chemicals or fluids.

    30,     Cutlery, appropriate subclasses for hand manipulated cutting
    implements which may or may not have guards and are adapted for use in
    skinning animals, but are capable of a more general use.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 584+ for miscellaneous
    food skinning means. If the sole disclosure is to the skinning of a carcass
    or carcass part, placement is in this class (Class 452).


CLS 452/126
TXT Temperature modification perfects skinning operation:
    Subject matter under subclass 125 wherein the carcass is purposely heated
    or cooled thereby facilitating the removal of skin therefrom.


CLS 452/127
TXT Peeling by movement of workpiece past cutter:
    Subject matter under subclass 125 wherein the carcass or carcass section is
    conveyed past a knife positioned in the path of movement to separate the
    skin from the flesh.


CLS 452/128
TXT Gripper or hook type:
    Subject matter under subclass 125 wherein the skin is removed by being (1)
    grasped or (2) impaled and subsequently pulled from the carcass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 587 for apparatus which
    grips the skin of food, other than a carcass or carcass part, for removal
    thereof.


CLS 452/129
TXT Drum skinner type:
    Subject matter under subclass 128 wherein the skin is pulled from the
    carcass by wrapping the skin around a cylinder which progressively peels it
    from the carcass.


CLS 452/130
TXT Skin pinching roller type:
    Subject matter under subclass 128 wherein the skin is grasped between the
    nip formed between the outer peripheries of at least two rotating members.


CLS 452/131
TXT Fluid pressure type:
    Subject matter under subclass 125 wherein the skin is separated from the
    carcass by injecting a liquid or gaseous medium therebetween.


CLS 452/132
TXT Skinning implement (e.g., hand tool):
    Subject matter under subclass 125 wherein a skinning apparatus is adapted
    to be carried and manipulated by a human operator.


CLS 452/133
TXT Power type:
    Subject matter under subclass 132 wherein the skinning implement is
    operated by mechanical, fluid, or electric motive power means.


CLS 452/134
TXT DEFATTER:
    Method or apparatus under the class definition relating to the removal of
    the soft solid or semisolid organic compounds comprising the glyceride
    ester of fatty acids from a carcass or carcass part.


CLS 452/135
TXT DEBONING:
    Method or apparatus under the class definition relating to the separation
    or segregation of flesh from the skeleton of a carcass or carcass part.


CLS 452/136
TXT Plow type:
    Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein the flesh is scraped or shaved
    from the bone.


CLS 452/137
TXT Hand-held tool:
    Subject matter under subclass 136 wherein the deboning apparatus is adapted
    to be carried and manipulated by the hand of a human operator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, for hand held knives of general utility.


CLS 452/138
TXT Pressure type:
    Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein force is applied over an area of
    the carcass or carcass part to squeeze the flesh from the bone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses for presses of general utility.


CLS 452/139
TXT Beater or abrader type:
    Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein the flesh is removed from the
    bone by rubbing it off or wearing it away by friction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86+,    for epidermal outgrowth removers which operate on the principle of
    abrasion.


CLS 452/140
TXT Fluid impingement type:
    Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein the flesh is removed from the
    bone by contact with a high velocity jet of liquid or gaseous particles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     for epidermal outgrowth removers which operate on the principle of
    fluid impingement.


CLS 452/141
TXT TENDERIZERS:
    Method or apparatus under the class definition for rendering meat more
    easily chewed by either (1) electrical stimulation or (2) tearing,
    crushing, slitting or piercing of muscle tissue.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, appropriate subclasses for hand manipulated tools, adapted
    for tendering meat but disclosed as being of a more general utility.

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses for presses of general utility.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 198.1+,
    for cooperating comminuting surfaces which function in a manner similar to
    mechanical meat tenderizers.

    426,    Food or Edible Material: Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    appropriate subclasses for the tenderization of meat through the use of
    chemicals.


CLS 452/142
TXT Coacting rolls:
    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the meat is passed between the
    nip formed between the outer peripheries of at least two rotating members.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 155+ for concurrent pressing and conveying
    presses of the roller type which have a more general utility than that of
    tenderizing meat.


CLS 452/143
TXT Roll and plate:
    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the meat is passed between the
    outer periphery of a rotating member  and a coacting flat surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclass 156 for concurrent conveying and pressing presses
    of the roller type in which the roller coacts with a nonrotary press
    element, and subclass 210 for roll and platen presses which have a more
    general utility that of tenderizing meat.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 221+,
    particularly subclass 227 for comminuting rollers which function in a
    manner similar to mechanical meat tenderizers.


CLS 452/144
TXT Coacting toothed plates:
    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein plates provided with projections
    mash the meat therebetween.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, subclasses 214+ for reciprocating platen presses of a more
    general utility that of tenderizing meat.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 262+, for
    reciprocating comminuting surfaces which function in a manner similar to
    mechanical meat tenderizers.


CLS 452/145
TXT Hand roll:
    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the meat is contacted by the
    periphery of a rotating member adapted to be carried and manipulated by the
    hand of a human operator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 319 for a hand manipulated roller with cutting
    blades attached thereto which is of general utility and note the search
    notes appended thereunder.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 349+ for a hand propelled rolling earth
    working tool and subclasses 540+ for a rolling earth working tool with
    projecting teeth.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 221+, for
    comminuting rollers which function in a manner similar to mechanical meat
    tenderizers.


CLS 452/146
TXT Hand manipulated pounder:
    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the tenderizing device is adapted
    to strike a blow to the meat and is carried and manipulated by the hand of
    a human operator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 168+ for a
    hand supported comminutor.


CLS 452/147
TXT With chopper:
    Subject matter under subclass 152 which additionally includes a device
    which scores the meat (i.e., makes an incision but does not cut all the way
    through).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148,    for scoring meat cutters, per se, used for purposes other than the
    tenderizing of meat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 101.4 for a
    comminutor combined with a means to shape or section.


CLS 452/148
TXT SCORING CUTTERS:
    Apparatus under the class definition which makes an incision in a carcass
    or carcass part but does not cut all the way through.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141+,   for tenderizers which score meat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 879+ for scoring cutter of general utility


CLS 452/149
TXT CARCASS SUBDIVISION:
    Method or apparatus under the class definition relating to the separation
    of whole carcass sections from each other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, appropriate subclasses and particularly subclass 308 for
    hand manipulated cutting tools adapted for use in butchering but capable
    of, and disclosed for a more general use.

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses for cutters of general utility or a
    cutter which does not "recognize" the object being cut as a piece of meat
    (see the line notes under the class definition of this class for a further
    explanation of the line between Class 83 and Class 452).

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 537+ for devices which
    subdivide food, other than meat, into plural products.


CLS 452/150
TXT Automatic control:
    Subject matter under subclass 149 including means to sense a condition or
    change of condition with respect to either the carcass being subdivided or
    to the apparatus used to subdivide the carcass, which and as a result of
    this sensing (and without external manual intervention) brings about an
    alteration in the operation or control of the device.

    (1)     Note.  The alteration may include stopping or starting of all or
    part of the mechanism so as to correct, avoid damage from or mitigate the
    effects of the sensed condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 72+ for automatic control of cutting machines
    which have a general utility.


CLS 452/151
TXT Of cutters in series:
    Subject matter under subclass 150 wherein plural carcass subdividing
    devices are located along a processing line, at least one of which is
    automatically controlled.


CLS 452/152
TXT Of splitting:
    Subject matter under subclass 150 wherein the carcass subdividing device
    divides the carcass or carcass portion in half approximately along the
    centerline of its longest dimension.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160+,   for carcass splitters lacking automatic control means.


CLS 452/153
TXT Carcass oriented relative to cutter:
    Subject matter under subclass 152 wherein the carcass or carcass portion is
    moved so as to be aligned or positioned with respect to the subdividing
    device.


CLS 452/154
TXT Of extremity cutter:
    Subject matter under subclass 150 wherein the subdividing device operates
    to separate a limb or external appendage from the body of the carcass.

    (1)     Note.  "Extremities"  are exemplified by the head, neck, tail, leg,
    foot, fins (on a fish), and wings and drumsticks (on a fowl).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160,    for extremity removers which lack automatic control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 635+ for devices which
    remove extremities from food products other than meat.


CLS 452/155
TXT Of subdivision into portions:
    Subject matter under subclass 150 wherein the device operates to subdivide
    the main body (torso) of the carcass.


CLS 452/156
TXT Movement of cutter controlled:
    Subject matter under subclass 155 wherein the motion of the subdividing
    device is controlled by a sensed condition of the carcass or carcass
    portion.


CLS 452/157
TXT By sensed dimensions of carcass:
    Subject matter under subclass 156 wherein the sensed condition is the size
    or shape of the carcass or carcass portion.


CLS 452/158
TXT By sensed color variation:
    Subject matter under subclass 156 wherein the sensed condition is the
    wavelength, luminance, or purity of light reflected by the carcass or
    carcass portion.


CLS 452/159
TXT By manually placed markings:
    Subject matter under subclass 158 wherein the sensed condition results from
    the detection of a line or other sign or symbol placed on the carcass or
    carcass portion by a human.


CLS 452/160
TXT Cutting longitudinally through body or body portion (i.e.,
    splitters):Subject matter under subclass 149 wherein the carcass
    subdividing device divides the carcass or carcass portion in half
    approximately along the centerline of its longest dimension.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152+,   for carcass splitters having automatic control means.


CLS 452/161
TXT Fish filleting:
    Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein the carcass is that of a cold
    blooded aquatic vertebrate, the splitting device cutting along one or
    either side of the backbone through the ribs to separate the flanks.

    (1)     Note.  Fish filleting as defined herein does not produce totally
    boneless pieces of fish since the tiny rib or pin bones are included in the
    fillets. "Ribbing" devices which remove these bones to produce a truly
    boneless fish fillet will be found in this class, subclasses 135+ above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135+,   for boneless fish fillets.


CLS 452/162
TXT Coacting rotary disc cutters:
    Subject matter under subclass 161 wherein the splitting device includes a
    pair of thin circular members with sharp or irregular edges which rotate
    and contact the fish simultaneously, on either side of the backbone, to
    separate the flanks from the backbone.


CLS 452/163
TXT Means repositioning carcass relative to cutter:
    Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein the carcass or carcass part is
    adjustably moved to oriented or aligned it relative to the splitting device.


CLS 452/164
TXT Portable cutter:
    Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein the splitting device is capable
    of being easily carried or moved from one location to another.


CLS 452/165
TXT While internally supported on a mandrel:
    Subject matter under subclass 149 wherein the weight of the carcass or
    carcass portion is borne from below with the aid of a spindle or axle which
    extends into the visceral cavity.


CLS 452/166
TXT Extremity remover:
    Subject matter under subclass 149 wherein the subdividing device operates
    to separate a limb or external appendage from the body of the carcass.

    (1)     Note.  "Extremities" are exemplified by the head, neck, tail, leg,
    foot, fins (on a fish), and wings and drumsticks (on a fowl).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154,    for automatically controlled extremity removers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 635+ for devices which
    remove extremities from food products other than meat.


CLS 452/167
TXT Carcass suspended during removing:
    Subject matter under subclass 166 wherein the carcass or carcass part is
    supported by being hung while the extremity is separated therefrom.


CLS 452/168
TXT Neck puller:
    Subject matter under subclass 167 where the extremity which connects the
    head to body is ripped, torn, or snapped from the body of the carcass.


CLS 452/169
TXT Wing remover:
    Subject matter under subclass 166 wherein the appendage separated is the
    modified forelimb of a bird.


CLS 452/170
TXT Carcass conveyed to cutter in horizontal position:
    Subject matter under subclass 166 wherein the carcass or carcass part is
    delivered to the extremity remover oriented so that it lies in the same
    plane as the horizon.


CLS 452/171
TXT Loin remover:
    Subject matter under subclass 149 wherein the carcass subdividing means
    cuts out the part of the side and back of the carcass which lies between
    the ribs and the pelvis.


CLS 452/172
TXT SINEW REMOVER:
    Method or apparatus under the class definition for cutting out tendons from
    a carcass or carcass part.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is primarily concerned with the removal of
    tendons from fowl.


CLS 452/173
TXT WASHER:
    Method or apparatus under the class definition for cleansing the carcass or
    carcass portion of blood and other loose debris.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     for the removal of attached epidermal outgrowths by fluid pressure.

    114,    for the washing of gizzards.

    120,    for eviscerating using a rotary scrubber.

    123,    for the washing of other viscera.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 3.1 for the
    general washing of food products when not limited to use in butchering. If
    the washer is specifically disclosed for cleansing a particular type of
    animal, (e.g., fish), for washing an entire animal carcass, or for washing
    specific carcass parts or organs, then the device is not considered to be
    of general utility and will be found in this class (452).

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses for
    the removal of undesirable materials from solids through contact with
    liquids.


CLS 452/174
TXT MODELLING (E.G., SHAPING):
    Method or apparatus under the class definition for improving the appearance
    or shape of a carcass or carcass portion in preparation for marketing.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes devices for shaping whole meat
    portions and devices for folding wings, and securing drumsticks, etc., on
    fowl.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    197,    for carcass spreaders which allow easy access to the interior of a
    carcass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, appropriate subclasses for devices which include
    the wrapping or packaging of meat products.


CLS 452/175
TXT Bacon stretcher:
    Subject matter under subclass 174 which squares or flattens a pork belly
    carcass section.


CLS 452/176
TXT Visceral cavity closure:
    Subject matter under subclass 174 wherein an incision made to allow access
    to the internal organs is shut so as to preclude visual contact with the
    internal portions of the carcass.


CLS 452/177
TXT CONVEYOR:
    Apparatus under the class definition for moving a carcass or carcass
    portion over a predetermined path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for the conveying of animals while they are still alive in
    preparation for slaughtering.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 400+ for livestock carrying vehicle,
    subclasses 843+ for a live animal conveyor, gangway, or chute and
    subclasses 840+ for stock sorting.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses for power driven
    conveyors in general. If the conveyor is unique to butchering then
    classification is in this and indented subclasses. If the conveyor is of a
    more general utility then classification is in Class 198.


CLS 452/178
TXT Elevating:
    Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein the carcass or carcass portion is
    either (1) lifted off of an underlying supporting surface or (2) raised to
    a position further away from an underlying supporting surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for sausage link handlers

    79,     for conveyors specifically adapted to raise and lower carcasses
    into and out of a scalding tank.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 725+ for a body sling, subclass 728
    for a device for suspending an animal and subclasses 843+ for an elevator
    not restricted for use in a slaughtering operation.

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    appropriate subclasses for elevators of general utility, not solely
    restricted by disclosure to the handling of animal carcasses.

    212,    Traversing Hoists, appropriate subclasses for traversing hoists of
    general utility which elevate and move a load.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 264+ for a subcombination hoisting device.


CLS 452/179
TXT Orienting:
    Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein the attitude of the carcass or
    carcass part is adjusted or verified on the conveying system in a given
    direction with respect to the direction of movement of the conveyor.


CLS 452/180
TXT Registering (i.e., aligning):
    Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein the carcass or carcass part is
    particularly positioned transversely on the conveying system with respect
    to the direction of movement of the conveyor.


CLS 452/181
TXT Metering (e.g., from bulk supply):
    Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein carcass or carcass portions are
    fed to the conveyor system a certain rate to assure generally uniform
    spacing thereon.


CLS 452/182
TXT Transfer from one conveyor to another:
    Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein the carcass or carcass parts are
    moved from a first conveyor system to a second conveyor system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 97 for apparatus for bodily shifting a trolley
    from one track and placing it on another.


CLS 452/183
TXT Loading or unloading:
    Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein particularly significance is
    attributed to the placing of a carcass or carcass portion onto or its
    removal from a conveyor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    178,    for conveyors which vertically lift a carcass or carcass part with
    respect to an underlying supporting surface which may include loading or
    unloading.


CLS 452/184
TXT Sorting:
    Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein the carcass or carcass portions
    are classified and grouped according to some physical characteristic
    thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119     Animal Husbandry, subclasses 840+ for stock sorting.


CLS 452/185
TXT SUPPORT:
    Method or apparatus under the class definition relating to the sustainment
    of meat products against gravity, during butchering operations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 728 for suspending a live animal.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, appropriate subclasses, for plural supporting
    means disclosed for meat where the rack is of general utility and does not
    include means relating the rack to butchering, as, for example, by means
    for shaping, marking, or by means for preventing detrimental effects during
    processing.

    248,    Supports, appropriate subclasses for supports of general utility.
    Supports wherein the sole disclosure relates to butchering are properly
    classified here and in indented subclasses.

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses for work holders of disclosed
    as being of general utility.  If the sole disclosure is to butchering
    classification is proper in these and indented subclasses.


CLS 452/186
TXT Smoke stick:
    Subject matter under subclass 185 relating to the support of link sausage
    during smoking operations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51+,    for a sausage making method and apparatus combined with link
    handling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 467+ for smoking
    apparatus.


CLS 452/187
TXT Carcass or portion suspended (i.e., hanger):
    Subject matter under subclass 185 wherein the carcass or carcass portion
    extends underneath the support and is hung therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79+,    for means for lowering carcasses into or out of a scalding tank
    which often includes suspension means.

    95,     for suspended hog scrapers.

    167+,   for extremity removers which operate on a suspended carcass.

    177+,   for butchering conveyors with means for suspending a load.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 369 for hooks, per se.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 728 for animal suspending devices of
    general utility not restricted for use in a slaughtering operation.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 678.1+ for power driven
    conveyors of general utility with means for suspending a load in general.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 113+ for suspended racks.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 317+ for suspended supports of general utility.


CLS 452/188
TXT Fowl:
    Subject matter under subclass 187 wherein the carcass or portion thereof
    suspended is that of a bird.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89+,    for fowl defeathering apparatus which usually includes suspension
    means for fowl.


CLS 452/189
TXT Gambrel:
    Subject matter under subclass 187 wherein the suspending apparatus includes
    a framework designed to suspend a whole carcass by hooking or grasping and
    spreading either the front or rear legs thereof.


CLS 452/190
TXT Grappling:
    Subject matter under subclass 189 where the legs of the carcass are grasped.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 86.4+ for
    grapples of general utility.


CLS 452/191
TXT Weight of suspended carcass spreads carcass engaging means apart:Subject
    matter under subclass 189 wherein the gambrel includes a mechanism that
    converts at least part of the gravitational force exerted on the carcass to
    a lateral force tending to separate the attached legs of the carcass.


CLS 452/192
TXT Foldable to facilitate transport:
    Subject matter under subclass 189 wherein the gambrel is capable of being
    reduced in size when not in use so as to make it more easily portable.


CLS 452/193
TXT Bacon hanger:
    Subject matter under subclass 187 wherein the support is adapted to suspend
    a pork belly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175,    for a device which shapes or flattens a pork belly.


CLS 452/194
TXT Underlying support:
    Subject matter under subclass 185 wherein the carcass or carcass part is
    supported from underneath.


CLS 452/195
TXT With clamp (clipboard type):
    Subject matter under subclass 194 including a grasping device which
    securely positions the carcass or carcass part to the underlying support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, for plier-like grasping tools.


CLS 452/196
TXT With prong (e.g., impaling means):
    Subject matter under subclass 194 including a pointed device which
    protrudes into and thereby securely positions the carcass or carcass part
    to the underlying support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, subclass 53 for work holders using an impaling means.


CLS 452/197
TXT Carcass spreader:
    Subject matter under subclass 185 for holding open a slit carcass or
    carcass portion.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains apparatus which facilitates easy
    access to the interior of a carcass and should not be confused with
    subclasses  174+ (Modelling) which shapes a carcass or carcass part merely
    for a more pleasing appearance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174+,   for apparatus which shapes a carcass or carcass part for appearance
    purposes.


CLS 452/198
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:
    Subject matter under the class definition not otherwise provided for.


CLS 453/
TTL COIN HANDLING

CLS 453/
TXT This class includes machines and appliances employed for the purpose of
    handling coins (or checks or tokens similar in shape to coins and used as
    substitutes therefor), for facilitating the making of change or for
    transferring change from the clerk or cashier to the customer.

    (1)     Note. This class does not include means for transmitting money
    between a clerk and a cashier at a distance, for which see classes 186,
    Merchandising, and 406, Conveyors:  Fluid Current, for pneumatic
    dispatching devices.

    (2)     Note. For devices for testing coins see Class 73, Measuring and
    Testing, subclass 163; Class 177, Weighing Scales, subclass 51; Class 194,
    Check-Actuated Control Mechanisms, subclasses 302+; and Class 209,
    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids.

    (3)     Note. This class does not include means for handling paper money.
    For devices actuated by insertion of paper money see Class 194,
    Check-Actuated Control Mechanisms, subclasses 206+; for paper money sorting
    see Class 209, Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids; for paper
    money dispensers see Class 221, Article Dispensing; and for paper money
    stacking or unstacking see Class 271, Sheet Feeding and Delivering.

    (4)     Note. For token or check dispensing means not limited to
    facilitating transfer or making of change, see Class 221, Article
    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses. Class 221 includes devices for
    dispensing articles, such as coins, checks or tokens as rewards or prizes
    in game devices wherein no game device structure is included. For such
    combinations with game devices, see Class 273, Amusement Devices: Games,
    Class 463, Amusement Devices:  Games, and Class 473, Games Using Tangible
    Projectile.

    (5)     Note. For removal facilitating magazine type token or check holding
    means, see Class 312, Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 35+ and
    particularly subclasses 45 and 72+ for similar devices lacking the article
    releasing or discharging feature which characterizes the dispensing devices
    of Class 221, referred to in (4) Note, above.

    (6)     Note. For coin handling in combination with accounting mechanism,
    see Class 235, Registers.

    (7)     Note. For coin handling combined with check controlled apparatus
    see Class 194, Check-Actuated Control Mechanisms.

    (8)     Note. For coin packages, receptacles, mats and trays:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, appropriate subclasses for methods of and apparatus
    for totally encompassing or encasing goods or materials with a separate
    cover or band which serves as means for identifying, protecting or unit
    handling the goods or materials, subclasses 52+, for coin wrapping
    mechanisms automatically controlled by the coins, subclasses 507+, for
    combined counters and wrappers, subclass 527 for stack formers for wrapping
    machines, and subclass 254 for disc (e.g., coin) packers.

    206,    Special Receptacles and Packages, subclasses .8+, for coin
    receptacles per se.

    221,    Article Dispensing, see (4) Note above.

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 87.2 and 92
    for coin wrappers, packages and cards made of paper.

    232,    Deposit and Collection Receptacles, particularly subclasses 4+ for
    savings boxes, subclasses 7+, for fare boxes, subclass 33 for letter boxes
    combined with coin receptacles, subclasses 55+, for coin traps, and
    subclasses 64+, for coin deliverers for dumping change into a customer's
    hand.

    273,    Amusement Devices: Games, for a game device or apparatus combined
    with a device for dispensing articles, such as coins, checks, or tokens as
    rewards or prizes.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, see (5) Note above.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 8+ for money boxes having toy
    features.

    463,    Amusement Devices: Games, for a game device or apparatus combined
    with a device for dispensing articles, such as coins, checks, or tokens as
    rewards or prizes.

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, for a game device or apparatus
    combined with a device for dispensing articles, such as coins, checks, or
    tokens as rewards or prizes.


CLS 453/1
TXT CHANGE COMPUTATION AND DELIVERY:

    Device under the class definition having two sets of mechanisms, one
    representing money tendered for a purchase and the other the amount of the
    purchase, the two sets being so connected that by the proper manipulation
    of both, the difference between the amount tendered and the amount of the
    purchase, or the change, is delivered from the device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 7+ for cash registers which keep track of
    cash tendered and subclasses 61+ for calculators, per se.


CLS 453/2
TXT Electric computation:

    Device under subclass 1 wherein the amount of change is determined by
    electrical means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    705,    Data Processing: Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/price Determination, subclasses 16+ for computerized cash registers.


CLS 453/3
TXT ASSORTER:

    Device under the class definition having structure that separate the coins
    according to physical characteristics of the coins.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    194,    Check-Actuated Control Mechanisms, subclasses 334+ for
    check-actuated control mechanisms having means to test the size of coins.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses, for the sorting of articles other than coins.


CLS 453/4
TXT Photoelectric:

    Device under subclass 3 in which the separating structure includes a light
    sensitive sensor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 200+ for photoelectric cells, per se,
    and photoelectric cells combined with devices other than coin handlers.


CLS 453/5
TXT Largest first:

    Device under subclass 3 in which the separating structure initially
    separates the coins of greatest diameter.


CLS 453/6
TXT Centrifugal device conveys coins through assorter:

    Device under subclass 5 in which the coins are moved through the separating
    structure by an outward force derived from a rotating body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for centrifugal assorters, which separate the coins of least
    diameter first.


CLS 453/7
TXT Belt or chain conveys coins through assorter:

    Device under subclass 5 in which the coins are moved through the separating
    structure by an elongated flexible member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for devices in which the coin moving belt or chain operates in an
    assorter which separates the smallest coin first.

    56,     for devices which deliver coins by means of a moving belt or chain.


CLS 453/8
TXT Agitator or vibrator conveys coins through assorter:

    Device under subclass 5 which include means to impart random movement to
    the coins to aid them through the separating structure.


CLS 453/9
TXT Smallest first:

    Device under subclass 3 in which the separating structure initially
    separates the coins of least diameter.


CLS 453/10
TXT Centrifugal device conveys coins through assorter:

    Device under subclass 9 in which the coins are moved through the separating
    structure by an outward force derived from a rotating body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for centrifugal assorters which separate the coins of greatest
    diameter first.


CLS 453/11
TXT Belt or chain conveys coins through assorter:

    Device under subclass 9 in which the coins are moved through the separating
    structure by an elongated, flexible member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for devices in which the coin moving belt or chain operates in an
    assorter which separates the largest coin first.

    56,     for devices which deliver coins by means of a moving belt or chain.


CLS 453/12
TXT Rotating device conveys coins through assorter:

    Device under subclass 9 in which the coins are moved through the separating
    structure by an element which moves in an arcuate path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for devices in which a single coin is delivered by a rotary member.

    57,     for rotary coin delivery means in general.


CLS 453/13
TXT Rotating device is aperatured plate:

    Device under subclass 12 in which the rotating means includes a thin,
    substantially planar member having at least one coin recieving hole therein
    which moves the coins through the separating structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for an apertured coin mover in combination with a deliverer which
    delivers a distinct number of plural coins from a single source.


CLS 453/14
TXT Stepped rail type assorter:

    Device under subclass 9 in which the separating structure includes a tiered
    passageway wherein coins of different diameters tilt different amounts to
    engage different tiers.


CLS 453/15
TXT Deflector type assorter:

    Device under subclass 9 in which the separating structure includes at least
    one projection which selectively alters the path of a particular size coin.


CLS 453/16
TXT SUPPLY LEVEL DETECTOR:

    Device under the class definition having means sensing the height of coins
    in a coin source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 52+ for level detectors used with
    package making.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 14 for means to sense depletion of a
    supply of articles other than coins and subclass 17 for means responsive to
    an empty supply of articles other than coins.


CLS 453/17
TXT Electric:

    Device under subclass 16 in which the sensing means actuates an electric
    circuit.


CLS 453/18
TXT DELIVERER:

    Device under the class definition including at least one supply of coins
    and means to controllably remove one or more coins therefrom.


CLS 453/19
TXT Delivery from plural sources by a single actuation:

    Device under subclass 18 which includes two or more separate supplies of
    coins, and wherein the means for removing coins includes structure operable
    to simultaneously remove coins from more than one supply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     for delivery of a distinct number of coins from a single source.

    39,     for delivery of a single coin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 93+ for article dispensers not
    otherwise provided for having plural sources of articles and from which
    dispensing may be caused by a single actuation of a control mechanism. See
    also subclasses 123+ and particularly 126+ for plural source article
    dispensing devices having selector means.


CLS 453/20
TXT Electric:

    Device under subclass 19 in which the means which removes coins is
    electrically operated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for electrically operated devices which deliver a single coin.


CLS 453/21
TXT Rectilinearly reciprocating:

    Device under subclass 20 in which the means which removes coins includes
    coin engaging structure which is limited to straight line, back and forth
    movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for a rectilinearly reciprocating deliverer which delivers a
    distinct number of plural coins from a single source.

    41,     for an electric rectilinearly reciprocating deliverer of a single
    coin.

    43,     for a non-electric rectilinearly reciprocating deliverer of a
    single coin.


CLS 453/22
TXT Compound movement:

    Device under subclass 19 in which the means which removes coins includes
    coin engaging structure which partakes of more than one character of
    motion, either simultaneously or successively, in the normal operation
    thereof (as rotating and reciprocating or reciprocating and swinging, etc.)
    or partakes of motions which are discontinuous and in different unaligned
    paths if of the same character.

    (1)     Note. Rotation in one plane about a single axis is considered to be
    only one character of motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for deliverers having compound movement and which deliver a
    distinct number of plural coins from a single source.

    42,     for deliverers having compound movement which deliver a single coin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 262 for article dispensers having
    discharge assistants which have compound movement.


CLS 453/23
TXT Rectilinearly reciprocating:

    Device under subclass 19 in which the means which removes coins includes
    coin engaging structure which is limited to straight line, back and forth
    movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for an electric rectilinearly reciprocating deliverer which
    delivers from plural sources by a single actuation.

    37,     for a rectilinearly reciprocating deliverer which delivers a
    distinct number of plural coins from a single source.

    41,     for an electric rectilinearly reciprocating deliverer of a single
    coin.

    43,     for a non-electric rectilinearly reciprocating deliverer of a
    single coin.


CLS 453/24
TXT Ejector:

    Device under subclass 23 in which the structure which engages coins also
    imparts movement to the coins in the direction of discharge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for rectilinearly reciprocating ejectors which deliver a single
    coin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 268+ or article dispensing including
    reciprocating discharge assistants.


CLS 453/25
TXT Integral:

    Device under subclass 24 in which the structure which engages coins from
    one supply of coins is always fixed for movement with the structure for
    removing coins of at least one other supply of coins.


CLS 453/26
TXT Lever operated:

    Device under subclass 24 in which the structure which engages coins is
    caused to move by an element which turns on a fulcrum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for reciprocating lever operated ejectors which deliver a single
    coin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 274 for lever actuated reciprocating
    discharge assistants for article dispensers.


CLS 453/27
TXT Finger actuated (e.g. key button):

    Device under subclass 26 in which the element which turns on a fulcrum is
    caused to move by manual manipulation of a key button.

    (1)     Note. The buttons operate in a manner similar to typewriter keys
    and usually have indicia associated therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for finger actuated, lever operated ejectors used in combination
    with a rectilinearly reciprocating deliverer of a single coin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 12+ for key operated cash registers.


CLS 453/28
TXT Finger actuated (e.g. key button):

    Device under subclass 24 in which the structure which removes coins is
    caused to move by manual manipulation of a key button.

    (1)     Note. The buttons operate in a manner similar to typewriter keys
    and usually have indicia associated therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for finger actuated, lever operated ejectors used in combination
    with a rectilinearly reciprocating deliverer which delivers from plural
    sources by a single actuation.

    46,     for finger actuated, lever operated ejectors used in combination
    with a rectilinearly reciprocating deliverer of a single coin.

    47,     for finger actuated ejectors used in combination with a
    rectilinearly reciprocating deliverer of a single coin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 12+ for key operated cash registers.


CLS 453/29
TXT Delivery of a distinct number of plural coins from a single source:

    Device under subclass 18 which includes one supply of coins and structure
    operable for removing a specific or determined number of multiple coins
    therefrom upon each operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19+,    for coin delivery from plural sources by a single actuation.

    39+,    for delivery of a single coin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 206+ for an article dispenser with
    quantity preselection means.


CLS 453/30
TXT With counter:

    Device under subclass 29 with structure to tally the number of coins
    removed from the supply of coins.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58+,    for counters not combined with deliverers.


CLS 453/31
TXT And means to wrap delivered coins:

    Device under subclass 30 in which the coins removed from the supply are
    collected in a stack with a removable container closely surrounding the
    stack.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59,     for wrappers not combined with deliverers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 212+, 254, and 532 for combined counters
    and wrappers wherein a complete package is formed (totally encompassed).


CLS 453/32
TXT Electric:

    Device under subclass 30 in which the structure which tallies the number of
    coins removed is electrically operated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 7 for electrical counters for coins.


CLS 453/33
TXT Apertured coin mover:

    Device under subclass 30 including an element with at least one coin
    receiving hole for conveying the coins past the structure for tallying the
    number of coins.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for an apertured coin mover in an assorter.


CLS 453/34
TXT Notched coin mover:

    Device under subclass 30 including an element with at least one radial
    projection forming a coin receiving cut out for conveying the coins past
    the structure for tallying the number of coins.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     for a star wheel which is moved by the coins to actuate the counter.


CLS 453/35
TXT Star wheel:

    Device under subclass 30 including an element with radial projections
    forming coin receiving cut outs for operating the structure for tallying
    the number of coins as the structure for removing coins forces each coin
    against a projection to rotate the element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for devices wherein the coin receiving element conveys the coin.


CLS 453/36
TXT Compound movement:

    Device under subclass 29 in which the means which removes coins includes
    coin engaging structure which partakes of more than one character of
    motion, either simultaneously or successively, in the normal operation
    thereof (as rotating and reciprocating or reciprocating and swinging, etc.)
    or partakes of motions which are discontinuous and in different unaligned
    paths if of the same character.

    (1)     Note. Rotation in one plane about a single axis is considered to be
    only one character of motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for deliverers having compound movement and which deliver from
    plural sources by a single actuation.

    42,     for deliverers having compound movement which deliver a single coin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 262 for article dispensers having
    discharge assistants, including compound movement.


CLS 453/37
TXT Rectilinearly reciprocating:

    Device under subclass 29 in which the structure which removes coins
    includes a coin engaging element which is limited to straight line, back
    and forth movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for an electric rectilinearly reciprocating deliverer which
    delivers from plural sources by a single actuation.

    23,     for a non-electric rectilinearly reciprocating deliverer which
    delivers from plural sources by a single actuation.

    41,     for an electric rectilinearly reciprocating deliverer of a single
    coin.

    43,     for a non-electric rectilinearly reciprocating deliverer of a
    single coin.


CLS 453/38
TXT Plural superposed ejectors:

    Device under subclass 37 in which the structure which removes coins
    includes at least two coin  engaging elements which are situated one over
    another as in a stack.


CLS 453/39
TXT Delivery of a single coin:

    Device under subclass 18 which include at least one supply of coins and
    structure operable for removing only one coin upon each operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for delivery from plural sources by a single actuation.

    29,     for delivery of a distinct number of plural coins from a single
    source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for the dispensing of
    articles other than coins.


CLS 453/40
TXT Electric:

    Device under subclass 39 in which the structure which removes the coin is
    electrically operated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for electric delivery of plural coins by a single actuation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 129 for electrical control for
    dispensing articles other than coins.


CLS 453/41
TXT Rectilinearly reciprocating:

    Device under subclass 40 in which the structure which removes the coin
    includes a coin engaging element which is limited to straight line, back
    and forth movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for an electric rectilinearly reciprocating deliverer which
    delivers from plural sources by a single actuation.

    23,     for a non-electric rectilinearly reciprocating deliverer which
    delivers from plural sources by a single actuation.

    37,     for a rectilinearly reciprocating deliverer which delivers a
    distinct number of plural coins from a single source.


CLS 453/42
TXT Compound movement:

    Device under subclass 39 in which the means which removes coins includes
    coin engaging structure which partakes of more than one character of
    motion, either simultaneously or successively, in the normal operation
    thereof (as rotating and reciprocating or reciprocating and swinging, etc.)
    or partakes of motions which are discontinuous and in different unaligned
    paths if of the same character.

    (1)     Note. Rotation in one plane about a single axis is considered to be
    only one character of motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for deliverers having compound movement and which deliver from
    plural sources by a single actuation.

    36,     for deliverers having compound movement and which deliver a
    distinct number of plural coins from a single source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 262 for article dispensers having
    discharge assistants. including compound movement.


CLS 453/43
TXT Rectilinearly reciprocating:

    Device under subclass 39 in which the structure which removes the coin
    includes a coin engaging element which is limited to straight line, back
    and forth movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for an electric rectilinearly reciprocating deliverer which
    delivers from plural sources by a single actuation.

    23,     for a non-electric rectilinearly reciprocating deliverer which
    delivers from plural sources by a single actuation.

    37,     for a rectilinearly reciprocating deliverer which delivers a
    distinct number of plural coins from a single source.

    41,     for an electric rectilinearly reciprocating deliverer of a single
    coin.


CLS 453/44
TXT Ejector:

    Device under subclass 43 in which the structure which removes a coin also
    imparts movement to the coin in the direction of discharge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for rectilinearly reciprocating ejectors which deliver from plural
    sources by a single actuation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 268+ for article dispensing
    including reciprocating discharge assistants.


CLS 453/45
TXT Lever operated:

    Device under subclass 44 in which the element which engages the coin is
    caused to move by another element which turns on a fulcrum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for rectilinearly reciprocating, lever operated ejectors which
    deliver from plural sources by a single actuation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 274 for lever actuated reciprocating
    discharge assistants for article dispensers.


CLS 453/46
TXT Finger actuated (e.g. key button):

    Device under subclass 45 in which the element which turns on a fulcrum is
    caused to move by manual manipulation of a key button.

    (1)     Note. The buttons operate in a manner similar to typewriter keys
    and usually have indicia associated therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for finger actuated, lever operated ejectors used in combination
    with a rectilinearly reciprocating deliverer which delivers from plural
    sources by a single actuation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 12+ for key operated cash registers.


CLS 453/47
TXT Finger actuated (e.g. key button):

    Device under subclass 44 in which the structure which removes a coin is
    caused to move by manual manipulation of a key button.

    (1)     Note. The buttons operate in a manner similar to typewriter keys
    and usually have indicia associated therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for finger actuated, lever operated ejectors used in combination
    with a rectilinearly reciprocating deliverer which delivers from plural
    sources by a single actuation.

    28,     for finger actuated ejectors used in combinatiion with a
    rectilinearly reciprocating deliverer which delivers from plural sources by
    a single actuation.

    46,     for finger actuated, lever operated ejectors used in combination
    with a rectilinearly reciprocating deliverer of a single coin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 12+ for key operated cash registers.


CLS 453/48
TXT With follower:

    Device under subclass 44 including an element which pushes the entire
    contents of any supply of coins towards the structure which removes the
    coin.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for a follower in combination with a rotary deliverer for a single
    coin which has a resilient outlet.

    53,     for a follower used in combination with other devices which deliver
    a single coin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 226+ for article dispensers with
    followers.


CLS 453/49
TXT Rotary:

    Device under subclass 39 in which the structure which removes the coin
    moves in an arcuate path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for a rotating assorter which sorts the smallest coins first.

    57,     for rotary coin delivery means in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 277 for rotary discharge assistants
    for dispensers.


CLS 453/50
TXT Resilient outlet:

    Device under subclass 39 in which the coin is removed from any of the
    supplies of coins through an opening which elastically deforms to allow
    coin passage and then regains its original shape.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 307+ for article dispensers having a
    resilient outlet.


CLS 453/51
TXT With follower:

    Device under subclass 50 including an element which pushes the entire
    contents of any of the supplies of coins towards the opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for a follower in combination with a rectilinearly reciprocating
    ejector which delivers a single coin.

    53,     for a follower used in combination with other devices which deliver
    a single coin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 226+ for article dispensers with
    followers.


CLS 453/52
TXT Spring biased:

    Device under subclass 51 in which the pushing element is a resilient member.


CLS 453/53
TXT With follower:

    Device under subclass 39 including an element which pushes the entire
    contents of any supply of coins towards an opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for a follower in combination with a rectilinearly reciprocating
    ejector which delivers a single coin.

    51,     for a follower in combination with a rotary deliverer for a single
    coin which has a resilient outlet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 226+ for article dispensers with
    followers.


CLS 453/54
TXT Spring biased:

    Device under subclass 53 in which the pushing element is a resilient member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     for a spring biased follower used in combination with a device
    which delivers a single coin and has a resilient outlet.


CLS 453/55
TXT Vibratory:

    Device under subclass 18 in which the means to remove coins includes an
    element which imparts a shaking movement to the coin supply to controllably
    remove coins.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for an assorter which sorts by agitation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 200+ for vibrating and agitating
    article dispensers.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 161 and 196+ for vibrating and agitating
    dispensers.


CLS 453/56
TXT Belt or chain:

    Device under subclass 18 in which the means to remove coins includes an
    elongated flexible member for controllably removing at least one coin from
    a supply of coins.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7       and 11, for belts or chains combined with sorting mechanisms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 804+ for endless conveyors in
    general.


CLS 453/57
TXT Rotary:

    Device under subclass 18 in which the means to remove coins includes an
    element which moves in an arcuate path for controllably removing at least
    one coin from a supply of coins.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for a rotating assorter which sorts the smallest coins first.

    49,     for devices in which a single coin is delivered by a rotary member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 277 for rotary discharge assistants
    for dispensers.


CLS 453/58
TXT COUNTER OR INDICATOR:

    Device under the class definition to tally the number or indicate the
    number or value of coins in a group of coins.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    194,    Check-Actuated Control Mechanisms, appropriate subclasses for
    check-controlled devices which determine the value of coins, and
    particularly subclasses 215+ for check-actuated control mechanisms which
    determine the value of a plurality of accumulated coins.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 7 for coin counting with only nominal coin
    handling.


CLS 453/59
TXT With means to wrap coins:

    Device under subclass 58 in which the coins are collected in a stack with a
    removable container closely surrounding the stack.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for the combination of a coin counter and wrapper used
    specificallly with a device which delivers a distinct number of plural
    coins from a single source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 212+, 254, and 532 for combined counters
    and wrappers wherein a complete package is formed (totally encompassed).


CLS 453/60
TXT Graduated markings:

    Device under subclass 58 in which the number of coins is determined by
    comparison to a series of adjacent marks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 426+ for measuring vessels
    provided with inspection means.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclass 155 for article dispensing devices
    having transparent inspecting or viewing means.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 158 for material dispensers having graduated
    markings.


CLS 453/61
TXT STACKER:

    Device under the class definition including structure to aid in placing
    coins face to face to form a generally aligned pile or row.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclass 532 for stacking coins and like articles
    in combination with packaging.


CLS 453/62
TXT With tapered guide:

    Device under subclass 61 including converging walls to flow coins.


CLS 453/63
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Coin handling device under the class definition not classifiable elsewhere.


CLS 454/
TTL VENTILATION

CLS 454/
TXT This is the parent class for apparatus and processes for supplying air to
    and removing it from enclosures, for distributing and circulating the air
    therein, or for preventing its contamination.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 171+ for head coverings (e.g., hats) which may
    include ventilation.

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, appropriate subclasses for
    ventilation of devices forming the subject matter of that class,
    particularly, subclasses 209+ and 306 for ventilation of urinals;
    subclasses 347+ for ventilation of flush closets; and  subclasses 472, 475,
    477, and 482 for ventilation of dry closets.

    5,      Beds, subclasses 706+ for ventilation of a mattress.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses
    for ventilation processes and apparatus combined with added steps or means
    to cause drying or gas or vapor contact with solids.

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclass 3 for ventilation of boots or
    shoes.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings) subclasses 198+ for structure
    forming an enclosure for or a cover over a room or compartment and having a
    fluid guiding port in an outer barrier communicating between the space and
    ambient, subclass 200 for an enclosure located on and within the periphery
    of a roof and having an open bottom or passage communicating with the space
    beneath the roof (e.g., cupola), subclasses 204.5+ for passageways which
    traverse a barrier and which allow passage of air, subclass 218 for a flue
    with gaseous fluid directing features, and subclass 219 for a flue
    connection to building structures.

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclasses for ventilated rooms or
    chambers in combination with cooling or refrigeration means specialized to
    refrigeration.  The mere inclusion of a cooler for the air or means
    subjecting the air to air-liquid contact is not considered a means
    specialized to refrigeration.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, for processes of gas separation, per
    se, in which dust or other contaminants are removed from air.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, for apparatus for gas separation, per
    se, in which dust or other contaminants are removed from air.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 350+ for passenger car
    constructions tending to lessen the dust contents of the air in the
    vicinity of car doors and windows.

    114,    Ships, subclass 187 for steamboat stacks and chimneys specially
    adapted to use on vessels and subclasses 211+ for ventilating devices
    specific to ships and involving the structure of the ship.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, appropriate subclasses for the combination of
    ventilating and heating wherein significant heating structure (i.e., more
    than a nominal recitation such as a broadly recited "heating means") is
    claimed. See specifically subclasses 21+ for ventilated ovens, subclasses
    67+ for heating stoves provided with means for heating and circulating a
    current of air, subclass 80 for heating stoves provided with special
    ventilating attachments or features, subclasses 99+ for furnaces which heat
    air in an enclosing case or jacket to be distributed to points remote from
    the furnace, subclass 113 for the combination of an air moistener with a
    hot air furnace, subclass 198 for oven doors provided with means for
    ingress and egress of air, subclass 279 for ventilating platforms for
    stoves and furnaces, subclass 287.5 for fusible release-type stove or
    furnace dampers, subclass 293 for the combination of a smoke-controlling
    damper and a ventilating damper which are interconnected so that the
    movement of one operates to move the other, subclasses 299+ for stove hoods
    designed to carry off odors from kitchen ranges, subclass 312 for stovepipe
    ventilation, subclass 313 for air moistening attachments to stovepipes,
    subclass 316 for a combined stove pipe thimble and ventilator, and subclass
    508 for a fireplace with a room humidifier.

    128,    Surgery, subclass 205.26 for ventilating chambers usable by a
    patient such as oxygen tents and hyperbaric chambers.

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, and Cane, subclasses 93+ for ventilation of
    a portable structure (e.g., tent).

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 216 for vents in fluid lines to prevent
    backflow (e.g., antisyphon devices).

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, for ventilating
    devices (1) in the form of panels in which a flexible fabric or other
    flexible sheet material forms the panel portions; (2) in the form of panel
    units formed of plural strips, slats, or panels interconnected for relative
    motion (excluding those connected only by a common operator or mounted on a
    common support); (3) panels in the form of portable partitions, and (4)
    parts (1) - (3) combined with each other or with rigid closures or other
    rigid panels.  Ventilators, as above, combined with additional means (as
    pumps, valves, baffles, etc.) to cause, control, or direct the  flow of air
    are in Class 454, Ventilation.  Closures and panel units in the form of
    grilles, shutters, or registers, whether of the stationary or
    noninterconnnected pivoted-vane type, have been treated as rigid panels.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 59, 234+, and 248+,  for the combination
    of air distribution means with specific heat exchange means adapted to heat
    or cool the air and subclass 60 for the combination of an air moistening
    device with a specific heat exchange means adapted to heat or cool a
    chamber.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 163+ for a grated
    fluid inlet.

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclass 42 for ventilated crates and subclass
    74 for ventilated barrels.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, for automatically
    operating mechanisms for controlling temperature or humidity, per se.
    Class 236 does not include claims to the devices or systems controlled.

    237,    Heating Systems, appropriate subclasses and particularly subclasses
    46+ for the combination of ventilating and heating wherein significant
    heating structure (i.e., more than a nominal recitation such as a broadly
    recited "heating means") is claimed.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 34+ for slow
    diffusers, per se, and subclass 270 for a nozzle having an air supply means
    to the operator.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for air
    moistening devices, per se, and subclasses 127+ for heating and cooling
    devices combined with moisteners for the air. Devices including significant
    ventilating structure and excluding specific heating or cooling structure
    will be found in Class 454.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 847+ for devices for protecting the
    occupants of a vehicle or the vehicle itself from dust and mud incident to
    the use of that vehicle.

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 84.1+ for vehicle
    windshields.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 92+ for internal machine environment
    having a forced air circulation and subclasses 246+ for sprayed liquid
    developer applications.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 25+ for a
    pavement with a load bearing vault cover-closure which may include openings
    or vents.

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, for a blower, per se.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), for a fan, per se.

    417,    Pumps, for a motor driven blower, per se.


CLS 454/1
TXT CHIMNEY OR STACK:
    Subject matter under the class definition relating to a generally vertical,
    projecting, conduit section having an uppermost portion which opens to a
    surrounding environment, whereby air or products of combustion can flow
    between a ventilated space and the surrounding environment.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses provide a residual location for
    chimney or stack structure not properly classified in other classes.

    (2)     Note.  A mere opening, for example in a roof, is not considered to
    be a vertical conduit section.

    (3)     Note.  The vertical conduit section usually projects above a roof
    such as that of a building.

    (4)     Note.  This subclass does not include attic ventilators nor ceiling
    outlets ducted directly through the roof since they lack a "substantially
    vertically extending conduit section."

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings) subclass 218 for building
    structure with a flue having a gaseous fluid-directing feature which is not
    located in the chimney stacktop structure or cowl, subclass 219 for a
    connection between a flue and building structure, subclasses 245+ for a
    static structure including a barrier (e.g., wall, etc.) which has its
    opposite faces both curvilinear and substantially parallel.

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 184 for a metal smokestack combined with
    particular solid material combustion apparatus in a locomotive or portable
    boiler.

    114,    Ships, subclass 187 for steamboat stacks or chimneys adapted for
    use on vessels and having particular ship structure.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 285+ for chimney or stack dampers,
    per se, not incorporated in chimneytop or stacktop structure and subclasses
    307+ for miscellaneous smoke flues combined with particular stove or
    furnace apparatus provided for the application of heat.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 42+ for a pipe with a roof
    junction which includes flashing.


CLS 454/2
TXT Vehicle:
    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the ventilated space is in a device
    for transporting passengers, goods, or equipment.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides a residual location for vehicle
    chimney or stack structure not properly classified in other classes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 184 for a metal smokestack combined with
    particular solid material combustion apparatus in a locomotive or portable
    boiler.

    114,    Ships, subclass 187 for steamboat stacks or chimneys adapted for
    use on vessels and having particular ship structure.


CLS 454/3
TXT Chimneytop or stacktop structure (e.g., cowl):
    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising structure at an uppermost end of
    the vertical conduit section.

    (1)     Note.  Cowl structure is included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    339+,   for structure at the end of an outlet conduit section. See, in
    particular, subclass 368.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings) subclass 200 for cupolas,
    subclass 218 for flues with gas inlets and internal gas directing features
    (see the notes to that subclass), and subclass 244 for a cap which is
    mounted on and covers the exposed terminal edge of a barrier which encloses
    a space, e.g., chimney top guards.


CLS 454/4
TXT Cap closure:
    Subject matter under subclass 3 comprising a cover which can be positioned
    over the opening in the vertical conduit's uppermost section to stop flow
    therethrough of air or products of combustion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94,     for a railcar, bus, or trailer having an exterior cap closure for a
    vent.

    275,    for an inlet airway having a specific cover or shield for an
    exterior vent opening.

    347+,   for an outlet airway having an air pump and which may include a
    readily moveable cover.

    355,    for an outlet airway having an air pump and including a moveable
    access cover.

    356,    for an outlet airway having an air pump and including an exterior
    neck with an enlarged, weather resistant cover.

    358+,   for other outlet airways which may include a readily moveable cover.

    368+,   for other outlet airways with a specific cover or shield for an
    exterior vent opening.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 89+ for pipes and tubular
    conduits with closures and plugs.


CLS 454/5
TXT Pivoted:
    Subject matter under subclass 4 wherein the cover rotates about an axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for a pivoted outlet air current regulator used in a chimney or
    stacktop.

    363,    for a pivoted damper panel or cover used in an outlet airway.


CLS 454/6
TXT Plural, separately pivoted portions:
    Subject matter under subclass 5 wherein the cover comprises at least two
    parts, each part rotating independently about the same or different fixed
    axes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for plural pivoted air current regulating means in a chimney or
    stacktop structure.

    351     and 352, for plural damper panels in an outlet airway


CLS 454/7
TXT Having remote control:
    Subject matter under subclass 5 comprising means for rotating the cover
    about the fixed axis from a location distant from the cover.

    (1)     Note.  Pressure of air or products of combustion within the
    vertical conduit section, which directly acts on the cover to rotate it
    open and closed, does not constitute remote cap pivoting means for the
    purposes of this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, appropriate
    subclasses for an automatically operated mechanism for controlling
    temperature or humidity which does not include the device or system
    controlled.


CLS 454/8
TXT Inlet and outlet:
    Subject matter under subclass 3 comprising separate passages for directing
    air or products of combustion to and from the ventilated space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103+,   for a railcar, bus, or trailer having both inlet and outlet airways.

    141+,   for other vehicles having both inlet and outlet airways.

    237+,   for static structures (e.g., buildings) having both inlet and
    outlet airways, particularly, subclass 242, for a rooftop, unitary inlet
    and outlet housing having both inlet and outlet airways, which housing is
    not associated with a chimney or stack.


CLS 454/9
TXT Having air current responsive adjustment means (e.g., wind vane,
    etc.):Subject matter under subclass 8 comprising a means which alters a
    position or operation of the structure in reaction to a change in (1) flow
    of natural air (i.e., wind) or (2) flow of air or products of combustion
    through the vertical conduit section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for an air current responsive adjustment means associated with
    chimney or stacktop structure which includes an inlet only (no claimed
    outlet) to a ventilated space.

    17,     for an air current responsive adjustment means associated with
    chimney or stacktop structure which includes a rotary means in the air
    current (e.g., fan etc.).

    20,     for an air current responsive adjustment means associated with
    chimney or stacktop structure which includes an outlet only (no claimed
    inlet) to a ventilated space.


CLS 454/10
TXT Inlet:
    Subject matter under subclass 3 comprising a passage for directing air to
    the ventilated space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for railcars, buses, or trailers having inlet airways.

    143+,   for other vehicles having inlet airways.

    254+,   for static structures (e.g., buildings) having inlet airways.


CLS 454/11
TXT Having air current responsive adjustment means (e.g., wind vane,
    etc.):Subject matter under subclass 10 comprising a means which alters a
    position or operation of the structure in reaction to a change in (1) flow
    of natural air (i.e., wind) or (2) flow of air or products of combustion
    through the vertical conduit section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for an air current responsive adjustment means associated with
    chimney or stacktop structure which includes both an inlet and outlet to a
    ventilated space.

    17,     for an air current responsive adjustment means associated with
    chimney or stacktop structure which includes a rotary means in the air
    current (e.g., fan etc.).

    20,     for an air current responsive adjustment means associated with
    chimney or stacktop structure which includes an outlet only (no claimed
    inlet) to a ventilated space.


CLS 454/12
TXT With means for mounting on brick-type chimney:
    Subject matter under subclass 3 comprising means uniting the structure to
    an uppermost end of a brick or ceramic vertical conduit section (i.e.,
    chimney).


CLS 454/13
TXT Chimneytop structure extends within chimney:
    Subject matter under subclass 12 wherein a portion of the structure is
    located in an interior portion of the brick or ceramic conduit section.


CLS 454/14
TXT Means for mounting to inner wall:
    Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein the uniting means fastens the
    structure to an interior surface of the brick or ceramic conduit section.


CLS 454/15
TXT With rotary means in air current (e.g., fan, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 3 comprising a unidirectionally rotating
    member which acts on or is acted on by (1) flow of natural air (i.e., wind)
    or (2) flow of air or products of combustion through the vertical conduit
    section.

    (1)     Note.  The member may be referred to as a rotor, wheel, bucket
    wheel, rotary fan, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    for a wind-operated recirculating fan associated with a railcar,
    bus, or trailer.

    106,    for other railcar, bus, or trailer wind-operated fans associated
    with an inlet and outlet airway.

    113,    for other railcar, bus, or trailer wind-operated fans associated
    with an inlet airway only.

    117,    for a railcar, bus, or trailer having a wind-operated fan
    associated with an outlet airway.

    240,    for a wind-operated air pump associated with a building having both
    an inlet and an outlet airway.


CLS 454/16
TXT Driven by external power source:
    Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein the member is unidirectionally
    rotated by a means other than (1) flow of natural air (i.e., wind) or (2)
    flow of air or products of combustion through the vertical conduit section.

    (1)     Note. The means to unidirectionally rotate the member is commonly
    an electric or pneumatic motor.


CLS 454/17
TXT Having air current responsive adjustment means (e.g., wind vane,
    etc.):Subject matter under subclass 15 comprising a means which alters the
    position or operation of the structure or a part thereof in reaction to a
    change in (1) flow of natural air (i.e., wind) or (2) flow of air or
    products of combustion through the vertical conduit section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for an air current responsive adjustment means associated with
    chimney or stacktop structure which includes both an inlet and outlet to a
    ventilated space.

    11,     for an air current responsive adjustment means associated with
    chimney or stacktop structure which includes an inlet only (no claimed
    outlet) to a ventilated space.


CLS 454/18
TXT Cage-type blade set:
    Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein the unidirectionally rotating
    member comprises a hollow cylinder with two or more strip-like (blade)
    structures extending along the periphery thereof, which structures act on
    or are acted on by (1) flow of natural air (i.e., wind) or (2) flow of air
    or products of combustion through the vertical conduit section.

    (1)     Note.  A cage-type blade set is often referred to as a turbine.


CLS 454/19
TXT Including additional blade set:
    Subject matter under subclass 18 further comprising a different group of
    rotating member (blade) structures acting on or being acted upon by (1)
    flow of natural air (i.e., wind) or (2) flow of air or products of
    combustion through the vertical conduit.


CLS 454/20
TXT Having air current responsive adjustment means:
    Subject matter under subclass 3 comprising a means which alters the
    position or operation of the structure or a part thereof in reaction to a
    change in (1) flow of natural air (i.e., wind) or (2) flow of air or
    products of combustion through the vertical conduit section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for an air current responsive adjustment means associated with
    chimney or stacktop structure which includes both an inlet and outlet to a
    ventilated space.

    11,     for an air current responsive adjustment means associated with
    chimney or stacktop structure which includes an inlet only (no claimed
    outlet) to a ventilated space.

    17,     for an air current responsive adjustment means associated with
    chimney or stacktop structure which includes a rotary means in the air
    current (e.g., fan etc.).


CLS 454/21
TXT Wind vane:
    Subject matter under subclass 20 wherein the structure or a portion thereof
    rotates to maintain a particular orientation relative to changing natural
    air (i.e., wind) flow direction.

    (1)     Note.  The structure usually rotates about a vertical axis.


CLS 454/22
TXT With air current inducing jet:
    Subject matter under subclass 21 comprising a nozzle which ejects a high
    velocity flow stream to cause air or products of combustion to flow through
    the vertical conduit section.

    (1)     Note.  The high velocity flow stream is usually diverted natural
    air current (i.e., wind).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39+,    for other chimney or stacktop structures which use current inducing
    jets to induce flow in the outlet airway.

    116,    for a railcar, bus, or trailer which uses a current inducing jet
    (often wind caused by the movement of the vehicle) to induce flow in the
    outlet airway.

    163,    for other vehicles which use a current inducing jet (often wind
    caused by the movement of the vehicle) to induce flow in the outlet airway.


CLS 454/23
TXT Centered within induced air current:
    Subject matter under subclass 22 wherein the nozzle and its ejected flow
    stream lie in the middle of the air or products of combustion being caused
    to flow.


CLS 454/24
TXT Shield:
    Subject matter under subclass 21 wherein the rotating structure is a
    generally vertical deflector which shelters the vertical conduit section's
    uppermost portion from direct exposure to the natural air current (i.e.,
    wind).

    (1)     Note.  A generally horizontal, angled deflector which lies directly
    over an upwardly facing opening of the vertical conduit is not included in
    this subclass.


CLS 454/25
TXT Hood having outlet opening perpendicular to wind:
    Subject matter under subclass 21 wherein the structure comprises a cover
    means over the opening in the vertical conduit's uppermost section, the
    cover means rotating to maintain an air or products of combustion exhaust
    opening therein facing at a right angle to the natural air flow direction.


CLS 454/26
TXT Current regulator:
    Subject matter under subclass 20 wherein the means varies flow of air or
    products of combustion through the vertical conduit section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for a current regulator which is not air current responsive.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 285+ for a flow regulating damper,
    per se.


CLS 454/27
TXT Having readily movable air current regulating means:
    Subject matter under subclass 3 wherein the structure comprises a means
    which is easily shiftable to alter flow of air or products of combustion
    through the vertical conduit section.

    (1)     Note.  A means held in a single fixed position by a separate
    movable screw or bolt or other permanent-type tool actuated fastener is not
    considered "readily movable."

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for a chimneytop or stacktop structure having air current
    regulating means which is air current responsive.

    347+    and 358, for other types of outlet ventilators with a readily
    movable louver, damper, or cover.

    355,    for an air pump outlet airway with a movable access cover which
    also may affect the flow of air.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 285+ for chimney or stack dampers,
    per se, not incorporated in chimneytop or stacktop structure.


CLS 454/28
TXT With temperature sensitive release:
    Subject matter under subclass 27 wherein the shiftable means moves in
    reaction to temperature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257,    for a building inlet airway including an emergency smoke or fire
    responsive valve.

    342,    for a building outlet airway including an air pump and having means
    for controlling or dealing with smoke.

    357,    for other building outlet airways having means for controlling or
    dealing with smoke.

    369,    for fusible release controlled fire dampers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 287.5 for fusible release dampers for
    stoves or furnaces.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, particularly subclasses 42 and 56+ for fire
    extinguishing apparatus responsive to smoke or fire.

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, various subclasses
    for an automatic mechanism for controlling temperature which does not
    include the device or system controlled.


CLS 454/29
TXT Continuously horizontal panel:
    Subject matter under subclass 27 wherein the shiftable means comprises a
    multiposition plate which is maintained parallel to the horizon while in
    use and while motion is being imparted to it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    348     and 362, for continuously horizontal damper panels used with outlet
    airways.


CLS 454/30
TXT Pivoted:
    Subject matter under subclass 27 wherein the shiftable means rotates about
    a fixed axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for pivoted chimney or stacktop cap closures.

    363,    for a pivoted damper panel in an outlet airway.


CLS 454/31
TXT Plural:
    Subject matter under subclass 30 having two such shiftable means which
    rotate about the same or different fixed axes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for plural pivoted chimney or stacktop closures.

    351     and 352, for plural damper panels in an outlet airway.


CLS 454/32
TXT T-top:
    Subject matter under subclass 3 wherein the structure comprises two arms
    which, with the vertical conduit section, form a T-shape.


CLS 454/33
TXT Spiral or plural stacked rings:
    Subject matter under subclass 3 wherein the structure comprises (1)
    spaced-apart, helically-arranged strips or (2) rings spaced apart and
    positioned one above another.


CLS 454/34
TXT Four-side outlets with shield:
    Subject matter under subclass 3 wherein the structure comprises exhaust
    openings 90 degrees apart with a deflector across each opening to prevent
    back draft.


CLS 454/35
TXT Spaced cap:
    Subject matter under subclass 3 comprising a cover above and at a distance
    from the uppermost portion of the vertical pipe or conduit section.


CLS 454/36
TXT And spaced shield:
    Subject matter under subclass 35 comprising a structure which surrounds, is
    located at a distance from, and which shelters an area immediately above
    the uppermost portion of the vertical conduit section.

    (1)     Note.  The structure usually protects the uppermost portion of the
    conduit section from direct exposure to natural air currents (i.e., wind).


CLS 454/37
TXT And skirt deflector extending outwardly from chimney or stack:Subject
    matter under subclass 36 wherein the vertical conduit section has a flange
    surrounding and stretching away therefrom for guiding air, products of
    combustion, or water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for other skirt deflectors in combination with a spaced cap.


CLS 454/38
TXT And skirt deflector extending outwardly from chimney or stack:Subject
    matter under subclass 35 wherein the vertical conduit section has a flange
    surrounding and stretching away therefrom for guiding air, products of
    combustion, or water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for a structure comprising a spaced shield and a skirt deflector
    extending outwardly from a chimney or stack.


CLS 454/39
TXT Having air current inducing jet:
    Subject matter under subclass 3 comprising a nozzle for ejecting a high
    velocity fluid stream which causes flow of air or products of combustion
    through the vertical conduit section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22+,    for a chimney or stacktop which uses a diverted natural air current
    to induce flow in the outlet airway.

    116,    for a railcar, bus, or trailer which uses a current inducing jet
    (often wind caused by movement of the vehicle) to induce flow in the outlet
    airway.

    163,    for other vehicles which use a current inducing jet (often wind
    caused by the movement of the vehicle) to induce flow in the outlet airway.


CLS 454/40
TXT Plural, in-series jets:
    Subject matter under subclass 39 comprising two such nozzles, the high
    velocity fluid streams issuing from the nozzles acting on the air or
    products of combustion one after another in sequence.


CLS 454/41
TXT Having liquid drain:
    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising means to remove liquid from the
    vertical conduit section.


CLS 454/42
TXT Having internal air current guide:
    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising a surface within the vertical
    conduit section which straightens or diverts flow of air or products of
    combustion through the conduit.

    (1)     Note.  A mere vertical conduit wall is not considered to be an
    internal current guide. Particular flow guiding wall structure must be
    claimed for inclusion in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 285+ for chimney or stack dampers,
    per se, not incorporated in chimneytop or stacktop structure.


CLS 454/43
TXT Having flue heater:
    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising means to heat the air or
    products of combustion to increase their flow rate through the vertical
    conduit section.


CLS 454/44
TXT Having lining or sleeve:
    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising (1) an interior covering or
    coating for the vertical conduit section or (2) a member which encases the
    vertical conduit section.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 47+ for a joint or coupling
    with an insulated casing, lining, or protector.


CLS 454/45
TXT Including breech opening:
    Subject matter under subclass 44 comprising a side opening in a lower part
    of the vertical conduit section for entrance of air or products of
    combustion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 500+ for an open recess fireplace
    in a chimney.


CLS 454/46
TXT Pressurized air lining:
    Subject matter under subclass 44 comprising a layer of air which encases
    the vertical conduit section, the layer of air having a pressure above
    ambient.


CLS 454/47
TXT Axially connected chimney or stack sections:
    Subject matter under subclass 44 comprising at least two parts which are
    attached together end-to-end to form the vertical conduit section.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclasses 47+ for a joint or coupling
    with an insulated casing, lining, or protector.


CLS 454/48
TXT EXTERIOR VAULT OR MANHOLE COVER:
    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a means positioned
    over an outdoor aperture through which a person may enter a sewer, boiler,
    pipe, conduit, drain, or underground or burial chamber.

    (1)     Note.  The means usually acts to prevent outside debris from
    entering the aperture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 25+ for a
    pavement with a load bearing vault cover-closure which may include openings
    or vents.


CLS 454/49
TXT WORKSTATION VENTILATOR (E.G., HOOD, OFFTAKE, ETC.):
    Subject matter under the class definition particularly adapted to
    exhausting fumes, vapors, steam, dust, or other undesirable air pollutants
    from a task area where such pollutants have been generated.

    (1)     Note.  The task area may be a welding, painting, industrial
    process, or other area where a pollutant generating job is performed.

    (2)     Note. Subject matter comprising specific details of the pollutant
    generating device beyond those relating to ventilation structures are
    properly classified with the device.

    (3)     Note.  Means for conducting away naturally occurring, normally
    present particles from an area so as to render the area particle free
    (e.g., clean room, etc.) is not included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168+,   for a mine ventilator.

    197,    for a window related, bed or couch ventilator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, particularly subclasses 209+
    for bathroom ventilators.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, particularly subclass
    300.1 for a cleaning machine using air blast or suction devices.

    30,     Cutlery, particularly subclasses 41.5, 124+, and 133 for a cutlery
    device combined with various types of material disposal means.

    55,     Gas Separation, appropriate subclass for hoods or offtakes in which
    a gas is separated from a mixture.

    83,     Cutting, particularly subclasses 98+ for cutting devices having
    fluid current product handling means.

    104,    Railways, particularly subclass 52 for a smoke remover for use in
    roundhouses and train sheds over locomotive smoke stacks.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, particularly subclasses 299+ for a stove hood.

    144,    Woodworking, particularly subclasses 252.1+ for a device for
    catching and confining the flying shavings and sawdust from a cutting
    machine and for conveying them away from the machine.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, particularly subclasses 158 and 159 for
    metallurgical apparatus with hood or offtake means for handling gases
    exhausted by treating means.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 453 and 456 for a particle collector or a dust
    hood with air exhausting means for drawing off dust developed in a grinding
    operation.


CLS 454/50
TXT Spray booth:
    Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein the task area is particularly
    adapted to coating an object with an atomized material such as paint or
    electrostatic particles.

    (1)     Note.  A workstation ventilator in combination with specific
    coating means is properly classified in Class 118, Coating Apparatus. See
    the Search Class note of Class 118, subclass 326, for a further discussion
    of class lines.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    339+,   for a ventilation outlet airway.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, particularly Digest 46 for spray booths in which a
    gas is separated from a mixture.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, particularly subclass 326 for a hood or offtake
    for waste material and digest 7 for a hood.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 246+ for sprayed liquid developer
    applications.


CLS 454/51
TXT Having air inlet separate from access opening:
    Subject matter under subclass 50 comprising an inlet passage for admitting
    air to the task area which passage is distinct from an aperture allowing
    admittance to the area by personnel or by the object to be coated.

    (1)     Note.  A mere doorway or window is not considered to be an inlet
    passage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57+,    for a covered workbench chamber having an air inlet separate from
    an access opening.

    66,     for a workstation ventilator, in general, which has an inlet airway.


CLS 454/52
TXT Ceiling inlet:
    Subject matter under subclass 51 wherein the inlet passage admits air to
    the task area through a structural barrier above the area.


CLS 454/53
TXT With outlet air treatment means:
    Subject matter under subclass 50 comprising means to change a
    characteristic of the air being exhausted from the task area.

    (1)     Note.  For example, this subclass includes means for removing
    noxious spray particles such as paint from the air being exhausted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for means for
    removing dust and other contaminants from air, per se.


CLS 454/54
TXT With means for liquid contact:
    Subject matter under subclass 53 comprising means directly exposing the air
    being exhausted to a liquid.


CLS 454/55
TXT Spraying nozzle:
     Subject matter under subclass 54 comprising an aperture through which the
    liquid is forcibly ejected as a fine jet of dispersed droplets to be
    directly exposed to the exhausting air.


CLS 454/56
TXT Covered workbench chamber (e.g., fume hood, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein the task area is within a
    cabinet-like enclosure which allows admittance by an operator to work on a
    task.

    (1)     Note.  The enclosure need not enclose the task area on all sides,
    but if it does, it must provide an entryway for the work arms of an
    operator to work on a task.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, particularly subclasses 299+ for a stove hood.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, particularly subclass 104 for a laboratory
    housing or hood, per se.


CLS 454/57
TXT Having air inlet separate from access opening:

    Subject matter under subclass 56 comprising an inlet passage for admitting
    air to the task area, which passage is distinct from an aperture which
    allows admittance to the area by the operator.

    (1)     Note.  A device having an inlet passage which is adjacent the
    aperture is included in this subclass provided the airway is physically
    separated from the aperture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51+,    for a spray booth having an air inlet separate from an access
    opening.

    66,     for a workstation ventilator, in general, which has an inlet airway.


CLS 454/58
TXT Including flow adjustment means:
    Subject matter under subclass 57 comprising means to alter direction or
    rate of air flow through the inlet passage.


CLS 454/59
TXT Responsive to position of access door:
    Subject matter under subclass 58 wherein the means alters  the direction or
    rate of air flow dependent upon positioning of a closure for the aperture
    which allows admittance to the task area by the operator.


CLS 454/60
TXT And air outlet through access opening:
    Subject matter under subclass 57 wherein air is exhausted from the task
    area by way of the aperture which allows admittance to the task area by the
    operator.


CLS 454/61
TXT Having outlet airway flow adjustment means:
    Subject matter under subclass 56 comprising a passage for exhausting air
    from the task area and further comprising means to alter direction or rate
    of flow of air flowing through the passage.


CLS 454/62
TXT Plural airways with adjustable distribution means:
    Subject matter under subclass 61 comprising two or more passages for
    exhausting air from the task area and further comprising means to alter
    amounts of the air exhausting through one of the passages relative to
    another of the passages.

    (1)     Note.  The two or more passages may connect to a common outlet or
    suction pipe.


CLS 454/63
TXT Movable:
    Subject matter under subclass 49 comprising means for relocating the
    exhausting means or an air collecting portion thereof from one position to
    another during use.

    (1)     Note.  While retractable or pivotable hoods are considered proper
    for this subclass, generally movable planar doors for a stationary hood are
    not proper.


CLS 454/64
TXT Having sliding, communicating, airway duct sections:
    Subject matter under subclass 63 comprising two or more connected air
    carrying conduit sections which move relative to one another by a smooth,
    gliding motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 580 for a fluid handling system with a
    sliding joint between moveable parts of the system.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclass 298 for sliding, communicating
    pipe sections.


CLS 454/65
TXT Having canopy exhaust hood:
    Subject matter under subclass 63 comprising a cover-like structure above
    the task area which includes means to collect and exhaust air from the area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     for a workstation ventilator having a nonmoveable canopy exhaust
    hood.


CLS 454/66
TXT Having inlet airway:
    Subject matter under subclass 49 comprising an inlet passage for admitting
    air to the task area.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter which merely recirculates air within the task
    area is not included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51+,    for a spray booth having an air inlet separate from an access
    opening.

    57+,    for a covered workbench chamber having an air inlet separate from
    an access opening.


CLS 454/67
TXT Having canopy exhaust hood:
    Subject matter under subclass 49 comprising a cover-like structure above
    the task area which includes means to collect and exhaust air from the area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65,     for a workstation ventilator having a moveable, canopy exhaust hood.


CLS 454/68
TXT ELEVATOR:
    Subject matter under the class definition comprising features peculiar to
    admitting air to, exhausting air from, or circulating air about a
    (ventilated) space in a device vertically raised and lowered to transport
    passengers, goods, or equipment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    appropriate subclasses for particular elevator structure.


CLS 454/69
TXT VEHICLE (E.G., AUTOMOBILE, ETC.):

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising features peculiar to
    admitting air to, exhausting air from, or circulating air about a
    (ventilated) space in a device for transporting passengers, goods, or
    equipment.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter relating to a mobile home which is
    essentially stationary is not included in this and indented subclasses.
    However, subject matter relating to a self-propelled or towed recreational
    vehicle which is essentially mobile is included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for a chimney which admits air to or exhausts air from a ventilated
    space in a vehicle.

    68,     for elevator ventilation structure.


CLS 454/70
TXT Pressure regulation:
    Apparatus under the class definition including means responsive to air
    conditions either in or outside of an enclosure or the air condition in the
    supply system for the enclosure to maintain a predetermined pressure in
    said enclosure and/or a difference in pressure between said enclosure and
    the outside atmosphere.

    (1)     Note.  Systems which maintain enclosures under air pressure but
    having no air condition responsive automatic controls are in other
    appropriate subclasses of this class, e.g., those having differential air
    input and discharge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238,    for pressure regulation of a structure which includes both inlet
    and outlet airways.

    255,    for pressure regulation of a structure which includes an inlet
    airway.

    340,    for pressure regulation of a structure which includes an outlet
    airway.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 92,  287,
    402, and 558  for processes and apparatus for maintaining pressure and/or
    vacuum peculiar to that class and subclass 242 for chamber seals there
    provided for.

    128,    Surgery, subclass 205.26 for pressure chambers for therapeutic
    treatment, including hyperbaric and decompression chambers.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 494+, particularly subclasses 505+, for
    regulating valves of general utility.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 234+ for pressure control of a heated
    and/or cooled aircraft cabin where specific heating or cooling means are
    included.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 59 for aircraft cabin pressure control
    combined with aircraft engine supercharging or with specific aircraft
    structure.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering,  subclasses 8+ and 11+ for
    caissons.

    417,    Pumps, for pumps and pump regulators responsive to pump effect
    including such devices where the enclosure is defined by name and no
    specific relationship between the enclosure and the pump or fan is claimed.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices,  for rotary expansible chamber
    devices, per se.


CLS 454/71
TXT Ventilation of aircraft cabin:
    Subject matter under subclass 70 wherein the ventilated area is the
    interior, or compartment thereof, of an aircraft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 234+ for pressure control of a heated
    and/or cooled aircraft cabin where specific heating or cooling means are
    included.


CLS 454/72
TXT Auxiliary control system:
    Subject matter under subclass 71 wherein a secondary control system is
    utilized in the event of failure of the primary control system.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are auxiliary pressure relief
    systems.


CLS 454/73
TXT Mechanical operation of control system (e.g., by bellows or diaphragm,
    etc.):Subject matter under subclass 71 wherein the operation of the control
    system, including the responsive means, is by primarily mechanical devices
    (e.g., bellows, diaphragm, piston, valve, etc.).


CLS 454/74
TXT Control system having electrical or electronic component:
    Subject matter under subclass 71 including an electrical or electronic
    component which is essential to the operation, or activation thereof, of
    the automatic control system.


CLS 454/75
TXT Having automatic control means:
    Subject matter under subclass 69 comprising (1) means to sense a condition
    or change of a condition and (2) means responsive to the sensing means to
    effect a change in flow of the air.

    (1)     Note.  The condition or change of condition may be related to air
    temperature or moisture content, for example.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70+,    for automatic pressure regulation of a vehicle ventilating system.

    229,    for automatic control of a forced recirculation ventilating system.

    238,    for automatic pressure regulation of a ventilating system having
    both inlet and outlet airways.

    239,    for automatic control of a ventilating system having both inlet and
    outlet airways.

    255,    for automatic pressure regulation of a ventilating system having an
    inlet airway.

    256,    for automatic control of a ventilating system having an inlet
    airway.

    340,    for automatic pressure regulation of a ventilating system having an
    outlet airway.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, for such systems,
    per se.


CLS 454/76
TXT Aircraft:
    Subject matter under subclass 69 wherein the transporting device is
    particularly adapted to atmospheric flight.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71+,    for automatic pressure regulation of an aircraft cabin.


CLS 454/77
TXT Freight:
    Subject matter under subclass 76 wherein the ventilated space is
    particularly adapted for transporting goods, equipment, or livestock.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     for ventilated cargo holds on-board a ship.

    88,     for ventilation of a freight-carrying railcar or trailer.

    118,    for ventilation of other freight-carrying vehicles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclass 42 for ventilated crates and subclass
    74 for ventilated barrels, per se.

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 1.5 for freight containers, per se.


CLS 454/78
TXT Waterborne:
    Subject matter under subclass 69 wherein the transporting device is
    particularly adapted to navigation on or in a body of water.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, subclasses 211+ for ventilating devices specific to ships
    and involving the structure of the ship.


CLS 454/79
TXT Freight:
    Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein the ventilated space is
    particularly adapted for transporting goods, equipment, or livestock.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for ventilated aircraft cargo cabins.

    88,     for ventilation of a freight-carrying railcar or trailer.

    118,    for ventilation of other freight-carrying vehicles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclass 42 for ventilated crates and subclass
    74 for ventilated barrels, per se.

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 1.5 for freight containers, per se.


CLS 454/80
TXT Nonperishable bulk foodstuff (e.g., grain ship):
    Subject matter under subclass 79 wherein the ventilated space is
    particularly adapted for transporting grain or other unpackaged and
    unrefrigerated foodstuffs.


CLS 454/81
TXT Porthole ventilator:
    Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein the ventilating means is, or is
    used in conjunction with, an embrasure in the side of a vessel.


CLS 454/82
TXT With moisture deflector or drain:
    Subject matter under subclass 78 comprising means to divert, channel, or
    convey liquid away from the air admitting, exhausting, or circulating means.

    (1)     Note.  Means to dehumidify the air is not included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146,    for an exterior cowl ventilator with a moisture deflector or drain.

    156+,   for means to dehumidify air admitted to a ventilated space in a
    vehicle.


CLS 454/83
TXT Railcar, bus, or trailer:
    Subject matter under subclass 69 wherein the transporting device is
    particularly adapted to (1) run on a rail, (2) carry a large number of
    people, or (3) be drawn by a propelling vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter relating to a mobile home which is
    essentially stationary is not included in this and indented subclasses.
    However, subject matter relating to a self-propelled or towed recreational
    vehicle which is essentially mobile is included in this subclass.


CLS 454/84
TXT Locomotive cab:
    Subject matter under subclass 83 wherein the transporting device is
    particularly adapted for self-propulsion on a rail and wherein the
    ventilated space is a compartment for a driver of the device.


CLS 454/85
TXT Condensation preventer (e.g., defroster, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 84 comprising means for preventing water, in
    either solid or liquid form, which has been removed from the air, from
    accumulating on a surface.

    (1)     Note.  The condensate is usually prevented from accumulating on a
    window.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93,     for a condensation preventer specific to a railcar, bus, or
    trailer, in general, and not restricted to a locomotive cab.

    121,    for a condensation preventer specific to a vehicle, in general.

    198,    for a condensation preventer for a window in a static structure,
    (e.g., building).


CLS 454/86
TXT Including dust guard for cab window opening:
    Subject matter under subclass 83 comprising means for deflecting cinders,
    grit, or other particles from an air and light admitting aperture in a
    barrier of the driver compartment (i.e., a cab window).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     for dust guards for windows in railcars, buses, and trailers,
    generally, and not specific to locomotive cabs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 847+ for devices for protecting the
    occupants of a vehicle or the vehicle itself from dust and mud incident to
    the use of that vehicle.


CLS 454/87
TXT Sleeping car:
    Subject matter under subclass 83 wherein the transporting device is
    particularly adapted to ride on a rail and wherein the ventilated space
    comprises sleeping accommodations for human passengers.


CLS 454/88
TXT Freight:
    Subject matter under subclass 83 wherein the ventilated space is
    particularly adapted for transporting goods, equipment, or livestock.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for ventilated aircraft cargo cabins.

    79,     for ventilated cargo holds on-board a ship.

    118,    for ventilation of other freight-carrying vehicles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclass 42 for ventilated crates and subclass
    74 for ventilated barrels, per se.

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 1.5 for freight containers, per se.


CLS 454/89
TXT Ice-bunker closure (e.g., for refrigerated railcar):
    Subject matter under subclass 88 comprising a selectively movable or
    removable cover for a hatch of an ice-carrying bin in the transporting
    device, which closing includes means for admitting air.

    (1)     Note.  Ice is usually placed through the hatch and into the bin to
    cool a space in the transporting device.


CLS 454/90
TXT Refrigerated or heated:
    Subject matter under subclass 88 wherein the ventilated space is cooled
    below or warmed above ambient temperature.

    (1)     Note.  See the  "Search Class" notes in the class definition for a
    discussion of the lines between this class and the various heating and
    refrigerating classes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     for an ice-bunker closure.


CLS 454/91
TXT With air pump:
    Subject matter under subclass 90 comprising an apparatus for adding energy
    to and moving the air.

    (1)     Note.  The air moving apparatus is usually a fan.


CLS 454/92
TXT With air pump:
    Subject matter under subclass 88 comprising an apparatus for adding energy
    to and moving the air.

    (1)     Note.  The air moving apparatus is usually a fan.


CLS 454/93
TXT Condensation preventer (e.g., defroster, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 84 comprising means for preventing water, in
    either solid or liquid form, which has been removed from the air, from
    accumulating on a surface.

    (1)     Note.  The condensate is usually prevented from accumulating on a
    window.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85,     for a condensation preventer specific to a locomotive cab.

    121,    for a condensation preventer specific to a vehicle, in general.

    198,    for a condensation preventer for a window in a static structure.


CLS 454/94
TXT Having exterior cap closure for vent:
    Subject matter under subclass 83 comprising an outside aperture which leads
    to the ventilated space and further comprising a structure which swings,
    slides, rotates, or otherwise moves between a first position permitting
    airflow through the aperture and a second position covering the aperture
    and preventing airflow therethrough.

    (1)     Note.  Pivoting and sliding roof vents are included in this
    subclass.

    (2)     Note.  A damper door placed within an air passage connecting the
    ventilated space with atmosphere is not included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4+,     for a cap closure for a chimney or stacktop.

    129,    for a vehicle sunroof.

    275,    for an inlet airway having a specific cover or shield for an
    exterior vent opening.

    347+,   for an outlet airway having an air pump and which may include a
    readily moveable cover.

    355,    for an outlet airway having an air pump and including a moveable
    access cover.

    356,    for an outlet airway having an air pump and including an exterior
    neck with an enlarged, weather resistant cover.

    358+,   for other outlet airways which may include a readily moveable cover.

    367+,   for other outlet airways with a specific cover or shield for an
    exterior vent opening.


CLS 454/95
TXT Having window or entry-door ventilation structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 83 comprising means to admit air to, exhaust
    air from, or circulate air about the ventilated space combined with (1) a
    light admitting structure in a barrier of the ventilated space (i.e.,
    window) or (2) a structure which swings, slides, rotates, or otherwise
    moves between two positions, one closing a passenger entrance to the
    ventilated space and the other allowing such entrance (i.e., door).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128+,   for window ventilation in other types of vehicles.

    195,    for ventilation combined with a door in a static structure (e.g.,
    building).

    196+,   for ventilation combined with a window in a static structure (e.g.,
    building).


CLS 454/96
TXT Including dust guard for window opening:
    Subject matter under subclass 95 comprising means for deflecting dust,
    cinders, or other material from an air and light admitting aperture (i.e.,
    a window opening) in a barrier of the ventilated space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86,     for dust guards for locomotive cab windows.

    96,     for dust guards for windows in railcars, buses, and trailers,
    generally, and not specific to locomotive cabs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 847+ for devices for protecting the
    occupants of a vehicle or the vehicle itself from dust and mud incident to
    the use of that vehicle.


CLS 454/97
TXT Inside of window:
    Subject matter under subclass 96 wherein the deflecting means is positioned
    on the ventilated space side of the air and light admitting aperture.


CLS 454/98
TXT Outside of window:
    Subject matter under subclass 96 wherein the deflecting means is positioned
    outside the ventilated space.


CLS 454/99
TXT Having forced recirculation:
    Subject matter under subclass 83 comprising an air moving apparatus which
    contacts and directly forces air from one location within the ventilated
    space to another separate location within the space.

    (1)     Note.  Recirculating flow must directly contact and be driven by an
    air moving apparatus to be included in this and indented subclasses.
    Subject matter wherein recirculating flow is merely "induced" by a separate
    forced flow is not included in this and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139+,   for forced recirculation in other types of vehicles.

    205,    for recirculation combined with window features.

    228+,   for forced recirculation within a static structure, (e.g.,
    building).


CLS 454/100
TXT Having forced recirculation means alone:
    Subject matter under subclass 99 wherein the air moving apparatus contacts
    and directly moves only existing air within the ventilated space.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter including means for also introducing air from
    outside of the ventilated space into the space is excluded from this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140,    for other types of vehicles having forced recirculation of vehicle
    air alone.

    230+,   for a static structure (e.g., building) having forced recirculation
    of ventilating air alone.


CLS 454/101
TXT Wind-operated fan:
     Subject matter under subclass 100 comprising a device for adding energy to
    and moving the air, which device is driven by moving air.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for a wind-operated fan associated with chimney or stacktop
    structure.

    106,    for other railcar, bus, or trailer wind-operated fans associated
    with an inlet and outlet airway.

    113,    for other railcar, bus, or trailer wind-operated fans associated
    with an inlet airway only.

    117,    for a railcar, bus, or trailer having a wind-operated fan
    associated with an outlet airway.

    240,    for a wind-operated air pump associated with a building having both
    an inlet and an outlet airway.


CLS 454/102
TXT Wheel-axle operated fan:
    Subject matter under subclass 100 comprising a device for adding energy to
    and moving the air, which device is driven by a rotating shaft which
    supports a wheel of the transporting device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    for a railcar, bus, or trailer having both an inlet and an outlet
    airway and including wheel-axle operated fans.

    114,    for a railcar, bus, or trailer having a wheel-axle operated fan
    associated with an inlet airway.

    117,    for a railcar, bus, or trailer having a wheel-axle operated fan
    associated with an outlet airway.


CLS 454/103
TXT Having both inlet and outlet airways:
    Subject matter under subclass 83 comprising a means for admitting air to
    the ventilated space and a separate means for exhausting air from the space.

    (1)     Note.  The air admitting and exhausting means must be separate and
    distinct  from one another. A single means which admits air to the space
    under one condition and exhausts air from the space under another condition
    is not included in this and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8+,     for a chimney or stack having both inlet and outlet airways.

    100+,   for an apparatus for positively moving air present in a ventilated
    space in a transporting device from one position to another within the
    space without adding fresh air (i.e., recirculation alone).

    103+,   for a railcar, bus, or trailer having both inlet and outlet airways.

    141+,   for other vehicles having both inlet and outlet airways.

    237+,   for static structures (e.g., buildings) having both inlet and
    outlet airways.


CLS 454/104
TXT Including unitary inlet and outlet housing:
    Subject matter under subclass 103 comprising a single structure containing
    portions of the air admitting and air exhausting means.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is intended to include subject matter in which
    the air admitting and air exhausting means are integral.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142,    for other vehicles which have a unitary inlet and outlet housing.

    234+,   for static structures having forced recirculation and which use a
    unitary inlet and outlet housing.

    241+,   for static structures (e.g., buildings) which have a unitary inlet
    and outlet housing.


CLS 454/105
TXT With air pump:
    Subject matter under subclass 103 comprising an apparatus for adding energy
    to and moving the air.

    (1)     Note.  The air moving apparatus is often a fan.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249,    for a static structure (e.g., building) including both inlet and
    outlet airways and an air pump.


CLS 454/106
TXT Wind or wheel-axle operated:
    Subject matter under subclass 105 wherein the air moving apparatus is
    driven by moving air or by a rotating shaft which supports a wheel of the
    transporting device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for a wind-operated fan associated with chimney or stacktop
    structure.

    101,    for a wind-operated fan in a railcar, bus, or trailer used for
    forced recirculation.

    102,    for a wheel-axle operated fan in a railcar, bus, or trailer used in
    a forced recirculation system.

    113,    for a railcar, bus, or trailer wind-operated fan associated with an
    inlet airway.

    114,    for a railcar, bus, or trailer having a wheel-axle operated fan
    associated with an inlet airway.

    117,    for a railcar, bus, or trailer having a wind-operated fan or a
    wheel-axle operated fan associated with an outlet airway.

    240,    for a wind-operated air pump associated with a building having both
    an inlet and an outlet airway.


CLS 454/107
TXT Having inlet airway:
    Subject matter under subclass 83 comprising means for admitting air to the
    ventilated space.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter disclosing an airway which can function
    either as an inlet or an outlet is classified in this and indented
    subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10+,    for chimneys or stacks having inlet airways.

    143+,   for other vehicles having inlet airways.

    254+,   for static structures (e.g., buildings) having inlet airways.


CLS 454/108
TXT Including specific air distributor:
    Subject matter under subclass 107 comprising particular means for directing
    the air as it enters the ventilated space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152+,   for other types of vehicles having specific air distributors.

    185+,   for hollow partitions which may disclose specific air distributors.

    284+,   for static structures having specific air distributors.


CLS 454/109
TXT Having adjustable deflector:
    Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein the aperture structure comprises
    an air guiding means readily moveable to different positions to direct the
    air along different paths into the ventilated space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155,    for a specific distributor having an adjustable deflector used in
    other types of vehicles.


CLS 454/110
TXT Liquid contact:
    Subject matter under subclass 107 comprising means for the air to be
    directly exposed to water or another liquid.

    (1)     Note.  Liquid contact is usually for air humidification, cooling,
    or purification.

    (2)     Note.  Dehumidifying means are not included under this subclass
    definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157,    for other vehicles in which the inlet air is exposed to a liquid.

    223,    for a window ventilator having an air passage between the sill and
    the bottom of the sash in which the air is exposed to a liquid.

    291,    for a floor-type register in a building where the inlet air is
    exposed to a liquid.

    328,    for other types of registers in a building where the inlet air is
    exposed to a liquid.

    337,    for inlet airways for static structures, in general, (e.g.,
    buildings) where the inlet air is exposed to a liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 313 for air moistening attachments
    for stovepipes and subclass 508 for a fireplace with a room humidifier.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclass 5 for concentrating evaporators
    designed to evaporate a liquid in film or thin layer form.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 78+ for air moistening devices used in
    heating systems.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, for slow diffusers.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for air
    moistening devices, per se, and subclasses 127+ for heating and cooling
    devices combined with moisteners for the air. Devices including significant
    ventilating structure and excluding specific heating or cooling structure
    will be found in this Class 454.

    312,    Supports: Cabinet Structure, subclasses 31+ for gas or vapor
    treatment of material contained within a cabinet structure.


CLS 454/111
TXT With deflecting separator-type filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 comprising means for separating particles
    from the air by use of properties of momentum.


CLS 454/112
TXT With air pump:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 comprising an apparatus for adding energy
    to and moving the air.

    (1)     Note.  The air moving apparatus is usually a fan.


CLS 454/113
TXT Wind operated:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein the air moving apparatus is
    driven by moving air.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for a wind-operated fan associated with chimney or stacktop
    structure.

    101,    for a wind-operated fan in a railcar, bus, or trailer used for
    forced recirculation.

    106,    for other railcar, bus, or trailer wind-operated fans associated
    with an inlet and outlet airway.

    240,    for a wind-operated air pump associated with a building having both
    an inlet and an outlet airway.


CLS 454/114
TXT Wheel-axle operated:
     Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein the air moving apparatus is
    driven by a rotating shaft which supports a wheel of the transporting
    device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for a wheel-axle operated fan in a railcar, bus, or trailer used in
    a forced recirculation system.

    106,    for a railcar, bus, or trailer having both an inlet and an outlet
    airway and including wheel-axle operated fans.

    117,    for a railcar, bus, or trailer having a wheel-axle operated fan
    associated with an outlet airway.


CLS 454/115
TXT Having outlet airway:
    Subject matter under subclass 83 comprising means for exhausting air from
    the ventilated space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162+,   for other types of vehicles having an outlet airway.

    339+,   for static structures (e.g., buildings) having an outlet airway.


CLS 454/116
TXT With current inducing jet:
    Subject matter under subclass 115 comprising a nozzle which ejects a high
    velocity flow stream to draw the exhausting air from the ventilated space.

    (1)     Note.  The high velocity flow stream is usually diverted natural
    air current (i.e., wind) resulting from movement of the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22+,    for a chimney or stacktop which uses a diverted natural air current
    to induce flow in the outlet airway.

    39+,    for other chimney or stacktop structures which use current inducing
    jets to induce flow in the outlet airway.

    163,    for other vehicles which use a current inducing jet (often wind
    caused by the movement of the vehicle) to induce flow in the outlet airway.


CLS 454/117
TXT With air pump (e.g., wind or wheel-axle operated, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 115 comprising an apparatus for adding energy
    to and moving the air.

    (1)     Note.  The air moving apparatus is usually a fan which may be
    driven by various means such as moving air or a rotating shaft which
    supports a wheel of the transporting device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for a wind-operated fan associated with chimney or stacktop
    structure.

    101,    for a wind-operated fan in a railcar, bus, or trailer used in a
    forced recirculation system.

    102,    for a wheel-axle operated fan in a railcar, bus, or trailer used in
    a forced recirculation system.

    106,    for a railcar, bus, or trailer having both an inlet and an outlet
    airway and including wheel-axle operated fans.

    113,    for a railcar, bus, or trailer wind-operated fan associated with an
    inlet airway.

    114,    for a railcar, bus, or trailer having a wheel-axle operated fan
    associated with an inlet airway.


CLS 454/118
TXT Freight:
    Subject matter under subclass 69 wherein the ventilated space is
    particularly adapted for transporting goods, equipment, or livestock.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes a means to admit air to, exhaust air
    from, or circulate air about a space in a nonspecific freight transport
    container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for ventilated aircraft cargo cabins.

    79,     for ventilated cargo holds on-board a ship.

    88,     for ventilation of a freight-carrying railcar or trailer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    217,    Wooden Receptacles, subclass 42 for ventilated crates and subclass
    74 for ventilated barrels, per se.

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 1.5 for freight containers, per se.


CLS 454/119
TXT Having external connection:
    Subject matter under subclass 69 comprising a means separate and distinct
    from the transporting device which attaches to the device to admit air to,
    exhaust air from, or circulate air about the ventilated space.

    (1)     Note.  The external connection is usually used when the vehicle is
    stationary or parked for an extended period of time.


CLS 454/120
TXT Seat structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 69 wherein an occupant seating means contains
    particular structure for admitting air to, exhausting air from, or
    circulating air about the ventilated space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    907,    for a cross-reference art collection of ventilating devices
    combined with seats.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 180.1+ for means to transfer heat
    primarily to or from the seat or means to subject the seat to fume smoke or
    the like.


CLS 454/121
TXT Condensation preventer (e.g., defroster, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 84 comprising means for preventing water, in
    either solid or liquid form, which has been removed from the air, from
    accumulating on a surface.

    (1)     Note.  The condensate is usually prevented from accumulating on a
    window.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85,     for a condensation preventer specific to a locomotive cab.

    93,     for a condensation preventer specific to a railcar, bus, or
    trailer, in general, and not restricted to a locomotive cab.

    198,    for a condensation preventer for a window in a static structure,
    (e.g., building).


CLS 454/122
TXT Air directed between double paned window:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 comprising two adjacent and parallel
    light admitting panels which together form a light admitting structure and
    wherein air is guided intermediate the two panels to prevent congealed
    material from accumulating on the panels.


CLS 454/123
TXT Air directed at window exterior:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 comprising a light admitting structure
    and wherein the air is guided at an outside surface of the structure to
    prevent congealed material from accumulating thereon.


CLS 454/124
TXT Side or rear window:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the congealed material is
    prevented from accumulating on a light admitting structure in a barrier of
    the ventilated space which light admitting structure is predominantly
    parallel to or facing away from a direction of forward movement of the
    transporting device.


CLS 454/125
TXT Having sweeping air distributor:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 comprising means for guiding air along a
    regularly changing directional path.

    (1)     Note.  A continually oscillating or rotating air distributor is
    included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153,    for a sweeping-type ventilating air distributor in a vehicle.

    285,    for a sweeping-type ventilating air distributor in a static
    structure (e.g., building).


CLS 454/126
TXT Having means for combining heated and unheated air:
    Subject matter under subclass 121 comprising means for mixing separate
    warmed and unwarmed air portions together prior to admittance of the
    portions to the ventilated space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160,    for a vehicle heating system which combines heated and unheated air.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    237,    Heating Systems, appropriate subclasses for a means for ventilating
    a space in combination with specific heating structure.


CLS 454/127
TXT Having dashboard air distributor (e.g., for windshield, etc.):Subject
    matter under subclass 121 comprising an aperture means in the ventilated
    space which is in or supported directly by a panel immediately below a
    forward facing, light admitting, and wind protecting structure of the
    transporting device, which aperture directs air into the ventilated space.

    (1)     Note.  The air is usually directed at the wind protecting structure
    to prevent congealed material from accumulating thereupon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 84.1+ for vehicle
    windshields.


CLS 454/128
TXT Means for open window (e.g., deflector, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 69 comprising a light admitting structure in
    a barrier of the ventilated space (i.e., a window) and further comprising
    air guiding or directing means adapted for use with the light admitting
    structure when the structure is in an open position allowing free passage
    of air therethrough to or from the ventilated space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95+,    for window or entry-door ventilation in a railcar, bus, or trailer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclass 152 for vehicle windows
    which include an accessory (e.g., visor, shield, etc.) with no ventilation
    features. If particular structure is present on the closure or in or about
    the opening to cause air to flow into or out of the ventilated space, the
    subject matter is proper for Class 454.


CLS 454/129
TXT Sunroof:
    Subject matter under subclass 128 wherein the open window is in a top
    surface bounding the ventilated space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94,     for a railcar, bus, or trailer roof vent closure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    296,    Land Vehicles:  Bodies and Tops, subclasses 180.1+ for fins or air
    deflectors associated with the roof of a land vehicle to affect the
    movement of a slip stream of air over the vehicle and subclasses 210+ for a
    roof for a vehicle body having an opening in said roof and a closure for
    said opening in said roof which, when in the open position, permits free
    communication of light or air between the interior of the body and the
    atmosphere, but having no particular structure, either on the closure or in
    or about the opening, to cause air to flow into or out of the body.
    However, see subclass 217, in particular, for roof structure having air
    deflectors actively associated with the closure, so that upon movement of
    the closure toward an open position, the deflector is caused to move from a
    retracted position to a position in which it is operative to act upon the
    vehicle's slipstream. If particular structure is present on the closure or
    in or about the opening to cause air to flow into or out of the ventilated
    space, the subject matter is proper for Class 454.


CLS 454/130
TXT Windshield or rear window:
    Subject matter under subclass 128 wherein the open window faces forward or
    rearward of the direction of travel of the transporting device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146+,   for an air admitting aperture in a vehicle cowl.

    150,    for an air admitting aperture adjacent to a windshield.

    151,    for an air admitting aperture in an exterior side or rear side of a
    vehicle.


CLS 454/131
TXT At upper edge of sliding window:
    Subject matter under subclass 128 wherein the window opens by gliding along
    its surface and wherein the air guiding or directing means is positioned at
    a top portion of the structure's perimeter.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include an air guiding or directing
    means which is at an upper edge of a vertically sliding window only when
    the window is in its fully retracted position.


CLS 454/132
TXT Having means to selectively adjust airflow:
    Subject matter under subclass 131 comprising means which may be moved as
    desired to different positions to vary the direction or amount of air
    passing through the air guiding or directing means.

    (1)     Note.  A device wherein airflow is adjusted by mere opening or
    closing of the window is not included in this subclass.


CLS 454/133
TXT Having plural air passages:
    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the air guiding or directing
    means includes two or more physically separate air paths.


CLS 454/134
TXT Pivoted window:
    Subject matter under subclass 128 wherein the air guiding or directing
    means is adapted for use with a window which opens by rotation about a
    fixed axis.

    (1)     Note.  Deflectors for pivoted vent windows are included in this
    subclass.


CLS 454/135
TXT Adjacent front edge of window:
    Subject matter under subclass 128 wherein the air guiding or directing
    means is positioned next to a forward portion of the perimeter of the
    window.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    for a pivoted window having a ventilating means or deflector
    adjacent its front edge.


CLS 454/136
TXT Roof structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 69 comprising air guiding or directing means
    integral with a barrier above the ventilated space of the transporting
    device (i.e., roof).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94,     for a railcar, bus, or trailer roof vent closure.

    130+,   for air admitting, exhausting, or circulating means used with a
    windshield which opens.

    146+,   for an air admitting aperture in a vehicle cowl.

    150,    for an air admitting aperture adjacent to a windshield.

    151,    for an air admitting aperture in an exterior side or rear side of a
    vehicle.


CLS 454/137
TXT Including duct extending along roof:
    Subject matter under subclass 136 comprising an air carrying conduit
    stretching within or immediately adjacent the roof.


CLS 454/138
TXT Having exterior inlet opening over windshield:
    Subject matter under subclass 137 wherein the conduit comprises an aperture
    means above and generally adjacent a forward facing light admitting and
    wind protecting structure (i.e., windshield), the aperture means admitting
    air to the conduit from atmosphere.


CLS 454/139
TXT Having Forced Recirculation:
    Subject matter under subclass 69 comprising an air moving apparatus which
    contacts and directly forces air from one location within the ventilated
    space to another separate location within the space.

    (1)     Note.  Recirculating flow must directly contact and be driven by an
    air moving apparatus to be included in this and indented subclasses.
    Subject matter wherein recirculating flow is merely "induced" by a separate
    forced flow is not included in this and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99+,    for forced recirculation within a railcar, bus, or trailer type of
    vehicle.

    205,    for recirculation combined with window features.

    228+,   for forced recirculation within a static structure, (e.g.,
    building).


CLS 454/140
TXT Forced recirculation alone or agitating fan:
    Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein the air moving apparatus contacts
    and directly moves only existing air within the ventilated space.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter including means for also introducing air from
    outside of the ventilated space into the space is excluded from this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100+,   for a railcar, bus, or trailer having forced recirculation of
    vehicle air alone.

    230+,   for a static structure (e.g., building) having forced recirculation
    of ventilating air alone.


CLS 454/141
TXT Having both inlet and outlet airways:
    Subject matter under subclass 69 comprising a means for admitting air to
    the ventilated space and a separate means for exhausting air from the space.

    (1)     Note.  The air admitting and exhausting means must be separate and
    distinct  from one another. A single means which admits air to the space
    under one condition and exhausts air from the space under another condition
    is not included in this and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8+,     for a chimney or stack having both inlet and outlet airways.

    100+,   for an apparatus for positively moving air present in a ventilated
    space in a transporting device from one position to another within the
    space without adding fresh air (i.e., recirculation alone).

    103+,   for railcars, buses, or trailers having both inlet and outlet
    airways.

    145,    for a means combined with a closure which acts alternatively to
    admit air to and exhaust air from a ventilated space.

    237+,   for static structures (e.g., buildings) having both inlet and
    outlet airways.


CLS 454/142
TXT Including unitary inlet and outlet housing:
    Subject matter under subclass 141 comprising a single structure containing
    portions of the air admitting and air exhausting means.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is intended to include subject matter in which
    the air admitting and air exhausting means are integral.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for railcars, buses, or trailers which have a unitary inlet and
    outlet housing.

    234+,   for static structures having forced recirculation and which use a
    unitary inlet and outlet housing.

    241+,   for static structures (e.g., buildings) which have a unitary inlet
    and outlet housing.


CLS 454/143
TXT Having inlet airway:
    Subject matter under subclass 69 comprising means for admitting air to the
    ventilated space.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter disclosing an airway which can function
    either as an inlet or an outlet is classified in this and indented
    subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10+,    for chimneys or stacks having an inlet airway.

    107,    for railcars, buses, or trailers having inlet airways.

    254+,   for static structures (e.g., buildings) having inlet airways.


CLS 454/144
TXT Including duct extending along floor:
    Subject matter under subclass 143 comprising an air carrying conduit
    stretching parallel to and within or adjacent a lower, supporting surface
    of the ventilated space (i.e., floor).

    (1)     Note.  An air carrying conduit which merely passes perpendicularly
    through the supporting surface is not included in this subclass.


CLS 454/145
TXT Selective inlet, outlet, and closure:
    Subject matter under subclass 143 comprising means which can be positioned
    at will to admit air to the ventilated space, to exhaust air from the
    ventilated space, or to prevent airflow to and from the ventilated space.


CLS 454/146
TXT Including exterior cowl inlet:
    Subject matter under subclass 143 comprising an aperture through which air
    is admitted from atmosphere to the ventilated space, which aperture is on a
    top or outer side portion of the vehicle transporting device forward of a
    forward facing, light passing, and wind protecting structure (i.e.,
    windshield).

    (1)     Note.  The top or outer side portion of the vehicle transporting
    device forward of the windshield is commonly called a cowl.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130+,   for air admitting, exhausting, or circulating means used with a
    windshield which opens.

    136+,   for an air admitting aperture incorporated in vehicle roof
    structure.

    150,    for an air admitting aperture adjacent to a windshield.

    151,    for an air admitting aperture in an exterior side or rear side of a
    vehicle.


CLS 454/147
TXT With moisture deflector or drain:
    Subject matter under subclass 146 comprising means to divert, channel, or
    convey liquid away from the air admitting means.

    (1)     Note.  Means to dehumidify the air is not included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156,    for means to dehumidify vehicle inlet air.


CLS 454/148
TXT Ducting to heat exchanger:
    Subject matter under subclass 146 comprising means for directing air from
    the aperture to a nonspecific heat transferring structure for warming or
    cooling the air prior to admittance of the air to the ventilated space.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition for what constitutes a nonspecific
    heat transferring structure such as is appropriate for this class.
    Recitation of an "air conditioning unit" or a "heater" does not exclude a
    patent from this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, various subclasses for a means for ventilating a
    space in combination with specific cooling or refrigerating structure.

    237,    Heating Systems, various subclasses for a means for ventilating a
    space in combination with specific heating structure.


CLS 454/149
TXT Having exterior door:
    Subject matter under subclass 146 comprising a structure exposed to
    atmosphere which swings, slides, rotates, or otherwise moves between two
    positions, one exposing the (cowl) aperture to atmosphere to admit air
    therethrough and a second covering the aperture to prevent admittance of
    air therethrough.


CLS 454/150
TXT Including exterior windshield inlet:
    Subject matter under subclass 143 comprising an aperture exposed to
    atmosphere through which the air is admitted to the ventilated space, which
    aperture is adjacent a forward facing, light passing, and wind protecting
    structure (i.e., windshield) of the transporting device.

    (1)     Note.  The aperture is usually above or below and in the plane of
    the windshield.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130+,   for air admitting, exhausting, or circulating means used with a
    windshield which opens.

    136+,   for an air admitting aperture incorporated in vehicle roof
    structure.

    146+,   for an air admitting aperture in a vehicle cowl.

    151,    for an air admitting aperture in an exterior side or rear side of a
    vehicle.


CLS 454/151
TXT Including exterior rear or rear side inlet:
    Subject matter under subclass 143 comprising an aperture through which the
    air is admitted from atmosphere to the ventilated space, which aperture is
    (1) in a rearwardly facing outer boundary portion of the transporting
    device or (2) in an outer boundary portion of the transporting device
    facing horizontally and transverse to a direction of forward movement of
    the device and which portion lies rearward of a light admitting, wind
    protecting structure (i.e., windshield).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130+,   for air admitting, exhausting, or circulating means used with a
    windshield which opens.

    136+,   for an air admitting aperture incorporated in vehicle roof
    structure.

    146+,   for an air admitting aperture in a vehicle cowl (forward of
    windshield).

    150,    for an air admitting aperture adjacent to a windshield.


CLS 454/152
TXT Including specific air distributor:
    Subject matter under subclass 143 comprising particular means for directing
    the air as it enters the ventilated space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108+,   for railcars, buses, or trailers having specific air distributors.

    185+,   for hollow partitions which may disclose specific air distributors.

    284+,   for static structures having specific air distributors.


CLS 454/153
TXT Sweeping type:
    Subject matter under subclass 152 comprising means for guiding the air
    along a regularly changing directional path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    for a sweeping-type vehicle window defroster.

    285,    for a sweeping-type ventilating air distributor in a static
    structure (e.g., building).


CLS 454/154
TXT Having swiveling nozzle:
    Subject matter under subclass 152 comprising an air-enveloping passage
    which rotates to different positions to direct air along different paths
    into the ventilated space.

    (1)     Note.  Dashboard ball or spherical outlets are included in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286,    for a building air distributor having an airway joint with ball or
    cylinder rotatable in a socket.


CLS 454/155
TXT Having adjustable deflector:
    Subject matter under subclass 152 comprising an air guiding means readily
    moveable to different positions to direct the air along different paths
    into the ventilated space.

    (1)     Note.  Damper means which distribute inlet air between two or more
    aperture structures are not included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109,    for a specific distributor having an adjustable deflector used in a
    railcar, bus, or trailer.

    143,    for a damper means which distributes inlet air between two or more
    aperture containing structures.


CLS 454/156
TXT With air treatment means:
    Subject matter under subclass 143 comprising means to change a naturally
    occurring state of the air.

    (1)     Note.  A device which removes dust or grit from inlet air is
    included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201+,   for window ventilation having means for lowering the temperature of
    the air combined with filtering means.

    207,    for a filtering means combined with window ventilation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for means for
    removing dust and other contaminants from air, per se.


CLS 454/157
TXT Liquid contact:
    Subject matter under subclass 156 comprising means for the air to be
    directly exposed to water or another liquid.

    (1)     Note.  Liquid contact is usually for air humidification, cooling,
    or purification.

    (2)     Note.  Dehumidifying means are not included under this subclass
    definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for a railcar, bus, or trailer in which the inlet air is exposed to
    a liquid.

    223,    for a window ventilator having an air passage between the sill and
    the bottom of the sash in which the air is exposed to a liquid.

    291,    for a floor-type register in a building where the inlet air is
    exposed to a liquid.

    328,    for other types of registers in a building where the inlet air is
    exposed to a liquid.

    337,    for inlet airways for static structures, in general, (e.g.,
    buildings) where the inlet air is exposed to a liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 313 for air moistening attachments
    for stovepipes and subclass 508 for a fireplace with a room humidifier.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclass 5 for concentrating evaporators
    designed to evaporate a liquid in film or thin layer form.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 78+ for air moistening devices used in
    heating systems.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, for slow diffusers.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for air
    moistening devices, per se, and subclasses 127+ for heating and cooling
    devices combined with moisteners for the air. Devices including significant
    ventilating structure and excluding specific heating or cooling structure
    will be found in this Class 454.

    312,    Supports: Cabinet Structure, subclasses 31+ for gas or vapor
    treatment of material contained within a cabinet structure.


CLS 454/158
TXT Porous filter:
    Subject matter under subclass 156 comprising a means containing a multitude
    of orifices which permit the passage therethrough of air but which resist
    the passage therethrough of solids or other impurities.


CLS 454/159
TXT Heating:
    Subject matter under subclass 156 comprising nonspecific means for warming
    the air.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition for what constitutes a nonspecific
    means for warming the air such as is appropriate for this class. Recitation
    of an "air conditioning unit" or a "heater" does not exclude a patent from
    this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclasses for a means for ventilating a
    space in combination with specific cooling or refrigerating structure.

    237,    Heating Systems, appropriate subclasses for a means for ventilating
    a space in combination with specific heating structure.


CLS 454/160
TXT Having means for combining heated and unheated air:
    Subject matter under subclass 159 comprising means for mixing separate
    warmed and unwarmed air portions together prior to admittance to the
    ventilated space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    for a vehicle window defroster which combines heated and unheated
    air.


CLS 454/161
TXT Having heat exchange core:
    Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein the nonspecific unit for warming
    the air receives its heat from a cooling liquid of a propulsion plant of
    the transporting device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 59, 234+, and 248+, for the combination
    of air distribution means with specific heat exchange means adapted to heat
    or cool the air and subclass 60 for the combination of an air moistening
    device with a specific heat exchange means adapted to heat or cool a
    chamber.


CLS 454/162
TXT Having outlet airway:
    Subject matter under subclass 69 comprising means for exhausting air from
    the ventilated space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115+,   for a railcar, bus, or trailer having an outlet airway.

    339+,   for static structures (e.g., buildings) having an outlet airway.


CLS 454/163
TXT With current inducing jet:
    Subject matter under subclass 162 comprising a nozzle which ejects a high
    velocity flow stream to draw air from the ventilated space to atmosphere.

    (1)     Note.  The high velocity flow stream is usually diverted natural
    air current (i.e., wind) resulting from movement of the vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22+,    for a chimney or stacktop which uses a diverted natural air current
    to induce flow in the outlet airway.

    39+,    for other chimney or stacktop structures which use current inducing
    jets to induce flow in the outlet airway.

    116,    for a railcar, bus, or trailer which uses a current inducing jet
    (often wind caused by the movement of the vehicle) to induce flow in the
    outlet airway.


CLS 454/164
TXT Exterior side outlet:
    Subject matter under subclass 162 comprising an aperture through which the
    air is exhausted from the outlet passage to atmosphere, which aperture is
    in an outer boundary portion of the transporting device, which boundary
    portion faces horizontally and transverse to a direction of forward
    movement of the device.

    (1)     Note.  An outlet through a vehicle side door or side pillar (e.g.,
    C-pillar, etc.) is included in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The outer boundary portion through which the air is
    exhausted usually forms a barrier of the ventilated space.


CLS 454/165
TXT Exterior rear outlet:
    Subject matter under subclass 162 comprising an aperture through which the
    air is exhausted from the outlet passage to atmosphere, which aperture is
    in a rearwardly facing, outer boundary portion of the transporting device.

    (1)     Note.  An outlet through a rear deck of a vehicle is included in
    this subclass.


CLS 454/166
TXT VEHICULAR TUNNEL:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein an enclosed passageway
    for a passenger transporting, goods transporting, or equipment transporting
    device is ventilated.

    (1)     Note.  The enclosed passageway is often underground.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 52 for smoke removers in roundhouses and train
    sheds over locomotive smoke stacks which may be provided with means for
    producing an artificial draft.


CLS 454/167
TXT With air pump:
    Subject matter under subclass 166 comprising an air moving apparatus for
    forcing fresh air to or stale air from the enclosed passageway.


CLS 454/168
TXT MINE:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein an earth excavation for
    extracting ore or minerals is ventilated.


CLS 454/169
TXT With partition means (e.g., brattice, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 168 comprising a barrier means for resisting
    flow of air from one part of the earth excavation to another part of the
    excavation.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes brattice walls, mine safety doors,
    etc.

    (2)     Note.  A mere wall of a duct which carries air to, from, or along
    an excavation or gallery is not included in this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  The partition means often acts as a safety device for
    protection from fire or explosion or is erected to deflect air toward a
    particular location in the excavation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, subclass 12 for
    processes in which a step is included for preventing injury to a human
    working in a mine or mining operation.


CLS 454/170
TXT Flexible  sheet:
    Subject matter under subclass 169 wherein the flow resisting means
    comprises a pliable fabric or material.

    (1)     Note.  The pliable fabric or material may be cloth, canvas, a
    synthetic sheeting, etc.


CLS 454/171
TXT Having inlet and outlet ductwork:
    Subject matter under subclass 168 comprising conduit structure for
    admitting fresh ventilating air to the ventilated space and for exhausting
    stale air from the space.

    (1)     Note.  The conduit structure (ductwork) must be distinct from the
    walls defining the mine excavation or gallery.


CLS 454/172
TXT Having inlet ductwork:
    Subject matter under subclass 168 comprising conduit structure for
    admitting fresh ventilating air to the ventilated space.

    (1)     Note.  The conduit structure (ductwork) must be distinct from the
    walls defining the mine excavation or gallery.


CLS 454/173
TXT STORAGE AREA FOR PERISHABLES:
    Subject matter under the class definition comprising means to ventilate a
    space used for the safekeeping of a good subject to decay or spoilage.

    (1)     Note.  Perishables include grain, hay, ears of corn, seeds, fruit,
    vegetables, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 201+ for
    drying houses, kilns, or containers, particularly subclasses 232+ for
    plural gas or vapor inlets and/or outlets.

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclasses for ventilated rooms or
    chambers in combination with cooling or refrigeration means specialized to
    refrigeration.


CLS 454/174
TXT Harvested crop ventilation:
    Subject matter under subclass 173 wherein the goods comprise a newly
    obtained product of the soil.


CLS 454/175
TXT Having perforated or slotted duct contacting crop:
    Subject matter under subclass 174 comprising a conduit having a series of
    holes or elongated openings therealong for admitting or exhausting air from
    the ventilated space, the conduit being positioned so as to touch the
    product of the soil associated with the ventilated space.

    (1)     Note.  The conduit is usually placed inside a pile made up of the
    product of the soil.


CLS 454/176
TXT Including insertion means:
    Subject matter under subclass 175 comprising means to facilitate placement
    of the conduit into the product of the soil.

    (1)     Note. The placement facilitating means usually comprises a pointed
    conduit end which allows the conduit to be forced inside a pile of the
    product of the soil.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 271+ for
    apparatus including a sharpened or tapered element supported on or
    connected to either (1) a terminal outlet member or (2) a supply conduit
    means in order to adapt the apparatus to be forced through a wall, object,
    or mass to make the latter more accessible for spraying.


CLS 454/177
TXT Horizontal and vertical perforated or slotted ducts:
    Subject matter under subclass 175 comprising two or more such conduits
    having a series of holes or elongated openings therealong for admitting
    fresh air into the ventilated space, one of the conduits extending parallel
    to and another perpendicular to the force of gravity.

    (1)     Note.  A floor duct is considered to be horizontal and a vertically
    extending wall duct is considered to be vertical.


CLS 454/178
TXT With air pump:
    Subject matter under subclass 177 comprising an air moving apparatus which
    forces the air into or withdraws it from the ventilated space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180,    for a horizontal perforated or slotted harvested crop ventilating
    duct with an air pump.

    181,    for other perforated or slotted harvested crop ventilating ducts
    with an air pump.


CLS 454/179
TXT Horizontal duct:
    Subject matter under subclass 175 wherein the conduit extends parallel to
    the force of gravity.

    (1)     Note.  A perforated, ventilating floor duct is included in this
    subclass.


CLS 454/180
TXT With air pump:
    Subject matter under subclass 179 comprising an air moving apparatus which
    forces the air into or withdraws it from the ventilated space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    178,    for horizontal and vertical perforated or slotted harvested crop
    ventilating ducts with an air pump.

    181,    for other perforated or slotted harvested crop ventilating ducts
    with an air pump.


CLS 454/181
TXT With air pump:
    Subject matter under subclass 175 comprising an air moving apparatus which
    forces the air into or withdraws it from the ventilated space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    178,    for horizontal and vertical perforated or slotted harvested crop
    ventilating ducts with an air pump.

    180,    for a horizontal perforated or slotted harvested crop ventilating
    duct with an air pump.


CLS 454/182
TXT Granular crop or corn ears:
    Subject matter under subclass 174 wherein the product of the soil in the
    ventilated space comprises a plurality of particle or pellet sized elements
    or corn ears.

    (1)     Note.  Granular crops include grain in the kernel, malt, seeds,
    corn kernels, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Potatoes and vegetables, in general, are not considered to
    be granular crops.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     for a waterborne vehicle adapted to carrying a granular crop.

    175+,   for a perforated or slotted duct contacting and ventilating a
    granular crop.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate
    subclasses, particularly subclasses 174, 224, 225, and 232 for means for
    directing air relative to means for handling or supporting material.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings) appropriate subclasses,
    particularly 192+, 198+, 204.1+, 218, 219, 220.1+, and 302.1+ for an
    enclosure or building component having no means for positively causing or
    directing air flow other than a port, perforation, door or window.


CLS 454/183
TXT Provision safe:
    Subject matter under subclass 183 comprising means to ventilate a space
    used for safekeeping of food or supplies ready for use or consumption.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 72, 76, and
    84 for apparatus for treating a gas or vapor that contacts solids and
    includes forced circulation of the gas or vapor.

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclasses 401+ for particular elevator load support structure or
    arrangement.

    312,    Supports: Cabinet Structure, subclasses 31.01+ for provision safes
    having liquid wetted means continuously exposed to a chamber and to an
    unconfined gas and subclass 213 for provision safes having a perforated
    exterior wall.


CLS 454/184
TXT ELECTRONIC CABINET:
    Subject matter under subclass 188 wherein the ventilated space is a
    nonspecific repository with shelves, drawers, or compartments for the
    safekeeping of electrical or electronic circuitry.

    (1)     Note.  Ventilating systems for the interior of television cabinets
    or personal computer cabinets are included.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is meant to include on the board recitation of
    electric or electronic circuitry.  Any details of the electric or
    electronic circuitry are beyond the scope of this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    312,    Supports: Cabinet Structure, subclasses 7.1+ for radio-type
    cabinets, per se, and subclasses 8+ for phonograph cabinets, per se.
    Cabinets in combination with apparatus such as loud-speakers, dials, tuning
    handles or shafts, chassis, etc., are classified with the apparatus.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 217 for means to protect a receiver
    circuit or elements thereof from damage due to outside electrical
    influences.


CLS 454/185
TXT HOLLOW PARTITION:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a barrier of a structure
    (e.g., wall, floor, roof, etc.) is made hollow for the passage of air to
    effect ventilation of said structure.

    (1)     Note.  Patents wherein the ventilating transfer means is a duct or
    conduit within the partition are not to be placed in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings) subclasses 302.1 for a mere
    vent communicating with the interior of a partition.

    249,    Static Molds, subclasses 22 and 36+ for molds for forming a
    partition having a ventilating shaft.


CLS 454/186
TXT Having blower:
     Subject matter under subclass 185 wherein the ventilating air movement is
    forced by means such as a fan, air pump, etc.


CLS 454/187
TXT CLEAN ROOM:
    Subject matter under the class definition comprising means specifically for
    conducting naturally occurring, normally present particles away from a work
    enclosure.


CLS 454/188
TXT HAVING PROTECTING AIR CURRENT:
    Subject matter under the class definition comprising an air jet or air
    sheet forced across an opening to a (ventilated) space to prevent entrance
    of dust, flies, or other debris into the space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for a covered workbench chamber having an access opening which acts
    as an air outlet from the chamber.


CLS 454/189
TXT Surrounding protected area:
    Subject matter under subclass 188 wherein the air current jet or sheet
    substantially bounds the space being protected from dust, flies, or other
    debris.

    (1)     Note.  An air jet or sheet which forms the boundary of one half or
    more of a space being protected is included in this subclass.


CLS 454/190
TXT Including plural, layered currents:
    Subject matter under subclass 188 comprising two or more distinct air jets
    or sheets which are positioned one outside of the other relative to the
    space being protected.


CLS 454/191
TXT Including suction outlet:
    Subject matter under subclass 188 comprising a passageway for attracting
    and exhausting the jet or sheet of air after it has passed across the
    opening.


CLS 454/192
TXT Including current adjusting means:
    Subject matter under subclass 188 comprising means for varying the
    direction, rate of flow, or character of the air jet or sheet.


CLS 454/193
TXT Cabinet enclosure (e.g., display case, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 188 wherein the ventilated space is a
    nonspecific repository with shelves, drawers, or compartments for the
    safekeeping or display of a collection of objects or materials.

    (1)     Note.  A display case having a protecting air current is included
    in this subclass.


CLS 454/194
TXT BLAST OR SHOCK WAVE PREVENTION:
    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a means which senses a
    change in pressure or air flow resulting from  an explosion or a high
    intensity air pressure disturbance and said means acting either to allow or
    to obstruct air flow based upon such sensing.

    (1)     Note.  The devices of this subclass are commonly used in
    association with bomb shelters, or to allow venting of a ventilated space
    based upon a severe atmospheric pressure drop (e.g., tornados).

    (2)     Note.  The means usually permits flow in one direction along a
    conduit while blocking flow in an opposite direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3+,     for a backdraft preventer incorporated in chimneytop or stacktop
    structure, particularly subclass 26.

    70+,    for condition responsive pressure maintenance inside a vehicle
    which may include a valve.

    227,    for a backdraft preventer combined with a window.

    238,    for pressure regulation of a ventilation system which includes both
    inlet and outlet airways.

    255,    for pressure regulation of a ventilation system which includes an
    inlet airway.

    259,    for a backdraft preventer and an inlet airway.

    340,    for pressure regulation of a ventilation system which includes an
    outlet airway.

    353,    for a backdraft preventer and fan for an outlet airway.

    359+,   for a backdraft preventer for an outlet airway.


CLS 454/195
TXT MEANS COMBINED WITH DOOR:
    Subject matter under the class definition comprising means to admit air to,
    exhaust air from, or circulate air about a (ventilated) space in
    combination with a moveable structure which closes off an entranceway to
    the space.

    (1)     Note.  The entranceway must be for the passage of something other
    than mere air, for example, a human or good.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95+,    for entry-door ventilation structure in a railcar, bus, or trailer.


CLS 454/196
TXT MEANS COMBINED WITH WINDOW:
    Subject matter under the class definition comprising means to admit air to,
    exhaust air from, or circulate air about a (ventilated) space in
    combination with a structure for admitting light into the space through a
    barrier of the space.

    (1)     Note.  See the search note to Class 454 under the class definition
    of Class 49, Movable or Removable Closures, section III, c, for the line
    between that class and Classes 52, 160, and 454.

    (2)     Note.  See the search note to Class 454 under the class definition
    of Class 52, Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), section III, for the line
    between that class and Class 454.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95+,    for window ventilation structure in a railcar, bus, or trailer

    128+,   for window ventilation for other types of vehicles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, appropriate subclasses for a mere
    through passage in a wall combined with a closure, e.g., a window for the
    passage of air.  See, in particular, subclass 71 for distinct side wings
    movable with a closure.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses for
    static structures having windows therein.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, appropriate
    subclasses for screens and other flexible and portable panel type closures.


CLS 454/197
TXT For bed or couch:
    Subject matter under subclass 196 adapted for use with (1) a piece of
    furniture for reclining or sleeping or (2) a person supported on such a
    piece of furniture.

    (1)     Note.  Typically, air is supplied to or removed from a person's
    head by way of a window connection while the person is lying on the piece
    of furniture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

     5,     Beds, subclass 10.1 for a bed modified to project partly through a
    window or having some modification adapting them for use in connection with
    or relation to a window, subclasses 652.1+ for the ventilating of a
    cushion, and subclasses 724+ for the ventilating of a mattress.

    160,            Closures, Partitions and Panels, Flexible and Portable,
    appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 45+, for outrigged flexible
    and portable panels without additional means to control, direct, or cause
    ventilation.


CLS 454/198
TXT Condensation preventer:
    Subject matter under subclass 84 comprising means for preventing water, in
    either solid or liquid form, which has been removed from the air, from
    accumulating on a surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85,     for a condensation preventer specific to a locomotive cab.

    93,     for a condensation preventer specific to a railcar, bus, or
    trailer, in general, and not restricted to a locomotive cab.

    121,    for a condensation preventer specific to a vehicle, in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 250.01 for
    window cleaning attachments combined with means for applying air.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings) subclasses 171.3+ for residual
    transparent panel with treating means and see notes.


CLS 454/199
TXT Skylight:
    Subject matter under subclass 196 wherein the structure for admitting light
    is located on a top covering portion (i.e., roof) of the ventilated space.

    (1)     Note.  See the Search Note to Class 454 under the class definition
    of Class 49, Movable or Removable Closures, section III, c, for the line
    between that class and Class 454.

    (2)     Note.  See the Search Notes to Class 454 under the class definition
    of Class 52, Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), section III, and
    subclasses 198-200 for the line between that class and Class 454.

    (3)     Note.  Exterior vault or manhole covers are not included in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for an exterior vault or manhole cover which may also admit light.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, appropriate subclasses for a mere
    through passage in a barrier combined with a closure for the passage of air

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 18, 80, 198+, and
    200 for skylight-type fixtures.


CLS 454/200
TXT With air pump:
    Subject matter under subclass 196 comprising an apparatus for adding energy
    to and moving the air.

    (1)     Note.  The air is usually moved from one side to an opposite side
    of the window.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, appropriate
    subclasses for flexible and portable window panels.

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, appropriate subclasses for a
    blower, per se.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), appropriate subclasses
    for a fan, per se.

    417,    Pumps, appropriate subclasses for a motor driven blower, per se.


CLS 454/201
TXT Cooling air conditioner:
    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the air moving apparatus
    comprises a nominal means for lowering air temperature.

    (1)     Note.  The mere naming of an air cooling air conditioner in the
    claims will allow for a document to be placed in this subclass; however, if
    the document claims any specific details beyond a broad fan or housing of
    an air conditioner, e.g., a condenser or an evaporator, it should be
    classified elsewhere, e.g., Class 62.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, particularly subclass 262 for a window connected or
    mounted air conditioner, or subclasses 426+ for a cooling air conditioner
    with gas forcing means wherein specific details of the cooling air
    conditioner are claimed.

    248,    Supports, particularly subclasses 208+ for specially mounted or
    attached window brackets.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, particularly subclass 236 for a
    specific air conditioner housing.


CLS 454/202
TXT Having readily moveable flow control means:
    Subject matter under subclass 201 comprising easily shiftable means for
    altering a direction or rate of flow of the air.


CLS 454/203
TXT With extensible side panel:
    Subject matter under subclass 201 comprising a partition or screening
    element attached to the apparatus and moved laterally to close or block a
    window opening between a window frame member and the apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 262 for an air conditioner (including
    specific details of the cooling means) mounting in a window.


CLS 454/204
TXT With mounting or support means:
    Subject matter under subclass 201 comprising means for holding or uniting
    the air moving apparatus to the window.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 262 for an air conditioner (including
    specific details of the cooling means) mounting in a window.


CLS 454/205
TXT Recirculation means:
    Subject matter under subclass 200 comprising means for circulating or
    moving a portion of air from one position in the ventilated space to
    another position within the space.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter comprising forced, "partial recirculation",
    wherein fresh air and recirculating air contact and are directly forced
    into the space by an air moving apparatus are included in this and indented
    subclasses unless otherwise indicated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99+,    for forced recirculation in a railcar, bus, or trailer-type vehicle.

    139+,   for forced recirculation in other types of vehicles.

    228+,   for recirculation in a static structure (e.g., building).

    261+,   for inlet airways which induce recirculatory air flow.


CLS 454/206
TXT With specific noise inhibiting structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein particular significance is
    attributed to a configuration which prevents or reduces unwanted sound.

    (1)     Note.  See the Class 181, Acoustics, subclass 212, (1) Note, for
    the line between Class 181 and Class 454.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262,    for an inlet airway, including structure for mixing plural
    airstreams together, which has specific noise inhibiting structure.

    346,    for an outlet airway having vibration absorbing or preventing
    structure.

    906,    for a cross-reference art collection of ventilating structure
    combined with noise inhibiting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, appropriate subclasses. Note particularly subclasses
    212+ for a fluid conducting-type sound muffler of a general nature and
    subclass 224 for a sound absorbing ventilating duct.


CLS 454/207
TXT With specific filtering means:
    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein particular significance is
    attributed to a means for removing solids or other impurities from the air.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156+,   particularly subclass 158 for porous filters used to filter out
    solid particles in a vehicle inlet airway.

    201+,   for window ventilation having means for lowering the temperature of
    the air combined with filtering means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for means for
    removing dust and other contaminants from air, per se.


CLS 454/208
TXT Propeller fan having rotary axis perpendicular to window:
    Subject matter under subclass 200 comprising an air moving element which
    rotates about an axis lying at right angles to a plane which generally
    defines the window.


CLS 454/209
TXT With mounting means for pump reversal:
    Subject matter under subclass 208 comprising means for holding or uniting
    the air moving apparatus to the window and wherein the holding means
    permits selectively facing of the air moving apparatus in either of two
    opposing directions.

    (1)     Note.  The opposing directions are usually to allow the fan to
    selectively introduce air to or exhaust air from the ventilated space.

    (2)     Note.  A mounting means which must be reversed with the air pump to
    face the pump in an opposite direction is not included in this subclass.


CLS 454/210
TXT With extensible side panel:
    Subject matter under subclass 208 comprising a partition or screening
    element attached to the apparatus and moved laterally to close or block a
    window opening between a window frame and the air pump.


CLS 454/211
TXT Having air passage in sash:
    Subject matter under subclass 196 comprising a frame which directly
    attaches to and holds a light admitting panel (i.e., pane) of the window
    and wherein the frame includes a path therethrough for the air.

    (1)     Note.  A ventilation means which contains an air duct, but which
    merely attaches to the frame, is not included in this subclass unless the
    frame itself includes an air path therethrough.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclass 171 for a viewing,
    ventilating, or packet passage within a closure.


CLS 454/212
TXT Having air passage means within, attaching  to, or replacing pane:Subject
    matter under subclass 196 wherein the means (1) comprises an air passage
    through a light admitting panel of the window, (2) connects directly to a
    light admitting panel of the window, or (3) is substituted in place of a
    light admitting panel of the window.

    (1)     Note.  A window structure merely comprising light admitting (e.g.,
    glass, etc.) air guiding slats or louvers between which air flows is not
    included in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  A mere window pane which opens by pivoting or sliding is not
    included in this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  The light admitting panel noted above must be a part of the
    window proper and not merely a part of a ventilating device attached
    thereto.

    (4)     Note.  A frame which directly attaches to and holds a light
    admitting panel of the window and which includes a path therethrough for
    the air is not included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196,    for a means comprising a window pane which slides to an open
    position within a stationary sash.

    211,    for a frame which directly attaches to and holds a light admitting
    panel of the window and which includes an air pathway therethrough.

    224,    for a window structure comprising light admitting air guiding slats
    or louvers.

    225,    for a window pane which pivots to an open position in a stationary
    sash.


CLS 454/213
TXT Having air passage at window top:
    Subject matter under subclass 196 wherein the means is located at an upper
    portion of the window.


CLS 454/214
TXT Having air passage between sill and bottom of sash:
    Subject matter under subclass 196 comprising an air path located between a
    base of the window (i.e., a sill) and a base of a frame which directly
    attaches to and holds a lowermost light admitting panel of the window
    (i.e., a sash).

    (1)     Note.  A window frame which supports the sash is not considered to
    be part of the sash.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   for a window combined with an air pump located at various positions
    including at the bottom of the window between the window sash and window
    sill.

    213,    for a window having an air passage at a top portion of a window and
    also between a window sill and a sash bottom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, particularly subclasses 50+ for a
    safety guard insertable between a window sash and a window sill.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, appropriate
    subclasses for a screen inserted between the window sash and window sill.


CLS 454/215
TXT Including wall sloping downward from window:
    Subject matter under subclass 214 comprising a shield or air guiding
    surface which (1) forms a bounding side or wall of a path for the air and
    (2) extends vertically downward and away from the window.

    (1)     Note.  A downward sloping, outside awning is included in this
    subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The shield or air guiding surface may lie on the ventilated
    space side of the window or on an opposite side of the window.

    (3)     Note.  A panel comprising parallel or concentric ventilating slats
    or louvers is not considered to be a wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224,    for a panel comprising parallel or concentric air guiding slats
    which slopes downward from the window.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), for rigid-type awnings having
    no means other than vents or openings for allowing flow of air.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, particularly
    subclasses 20, 22, and 45+ for outrigged structures of flexible material or
    of plural strips, slats, or panels interconnected for relative motion and
    for such type structures combined with other flexible, portable, or rigid
    panels or closures where there are no additional air guiding or controlling
    features.


CLS 454/216
TXT Including wall for upwardly deflecting inlet air:
    Subject matter under subclass 214 comprising a shield or air guiding
    surface which (1) forms a bounding side or wall of a path for the air and
    (2) directs the air in a vertically upward direction into the ventilated
    space.

    (1)     Note.  The shield or guiding surface usually (1) lies parallel to
    the window or (2) extends vertically and into the ventilated space from the
    window.

    (2)     Note.  A device also having a position sloping downward from the
    window (e.g., an awning) is not included in this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  A panel comprising parallel or concentric air guiding slats
    or louvers is not considered to be a wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215,    for a wall for upwardly deflecting inlet air which wall is sloped
    or can be readily sloped downward from the window.

    221,    for a window having a panel comprising parallel or concentric air
    guiding slats which upwardly deflects inlet air.

    307,    for other inlet air ventilators having an air deflecting wall
    extending into the room.


CLS 454/217
TXT Having adjustable angle or swingable mounting:
    Subject matter under subclass 216 comprising a supporting means for the air
    guiding surface which (1) facilitates changing inclination of the guiding
    surface relative to the window or (2) permits arcuate movement of the
    guiding surface.

    (1)     Note.  A device wherein the inclination is changeable so as to
    slope downward from the window is not included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215,    for an air guiding surface combined with a window which surface is
    changeable so as to slope downward from the window.


CLS 454/218
TXT Including collapsible or flexible, perpendicular side wall:
    Subject matter under subclass 217 comprising a partitioning surface at an
    end of the air guiding surface which (1) has one edge which is connected to
    the air guiding surface for movement therewith and an opposite edge which
    is stationary and (2) lies generally at a right angle to the air guiding
    surface.

    (1)     Note.  The partitioning surface usually is constructed of a
    flexible material or of plural, relatively moveable strips.

    (2)     Note.  The side wall usually prevents air from bypassing the
    guiding surface and not being deflected upwardly.


CLS 454/219
TXT Having readily moveable air regulating means:
    Subject matter under subclass 217 comprising easily shiftable means to
    increase or decrease flow of the air.

    (1)     Note.  A shiftable internal body such as a damper is included in
    this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Readily moveable air regulating means does not include a
    mere sliding or pivoting window frame or sash.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217,    for an air passage between a window sill and sash bottom including
    an adjustable angle wall for upwardly deflecting inlet air.


CLS 454/220
TXT Having slidably interconnected sections:
    Subject matter under subclass 216 comprising at least two air guiding
    surface portions attached together which slip or glide relative to one
    another.

    (1)     Note.  The slipping or gliding motion is usually for adjustment of
    the surface to suit window size.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclass 223 for
    such devices made of two or more slidably interconnected sections, wherein
    each of the slats is composed of sliding or telescoping sections, the
    device having no additional means for directing or controlling air;
    subclasses 90+, particularly subclass 104, for such devices combined with
    flexible or portable panels, but having no means in addition to such
    combination for directing or controlling the air; subclasses 222+ for
    plural strip, slat, or panel devices slidably interconnected; and
    subclasses 375+ for single frames having movable side bar sections.


CLS 454/221
TXT Including louvers:
    Subject matter under subclass 214 comprising generally parallel or
    concentric air guiding slats which lie in the air path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224,    for other window ventilators including louvers.

    264,    for an inlet airway including structure for mixing plural air
    streams together which has a shaped nozzle and includes louvers.

    265+,   for other inlet airways including structure for mixing plural air
    streams together and which include louvers.

    277+,   for a wall-type inlet airway including a specific cover or shield
    for the exterior vent opening and includes louvers.

    288,    for a baseboard-type inlet airway which may include louvers.

    290,    for a floor-type inlet airway which may include louvers.

    299+,   for a ceiling-type inlet airway which may include louvers.

    309+,   for a wall-type inlet airway which includes a louvered air
    distributor.

    325+,   for an inlet airway including a specific air distributor and
    additionally a louver which forms an adjustable valve.

    335+,   for an inlet airway without a specific air distributor which
    includes a louver which forms an adjustable valve.

    347+,   for an outlet airway including an air pump which may have air
    regulating louvers.

    358+,   for other outlet airways which may have air regulating louvers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), particularly subclasses 473
    for a louvered panel and 633 for location of related structures in other
    classes.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 140+
    for louver devices in which the slats are flexible, or are interconnected
    to each other for relative movement, or may be accumulated (e.g.,venetian
    blinds).  See section III of the Class 160 class definition.


CLS 454/222
TXT Including readily moveable air regulating means:
    Subject matter under subclass 214 comprising easily shiftable means to
    increase or decrease flow of the air.

    (1)     Note.  A shiftable internal body such as a damper is included in
    this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Readily moveable air regulating means does not include a
    mere sliding or pivoting window frame or sash.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217,    for an air passage between a window sill and sash bottom including
    an adjustable angle wall for upwardly deflecting inlet air.

    219,    for an air passage between a window sill and sash bottom including
    a wall for upwardly deflecting inlet air and a readily moveable air
    regulating means.

    221,    for a device comprising parallel or concentric air guiding slats
    which pivot.


CLS 454/223
TXT With means for liquid contact:
    Subject matter under subclass 214 comprising means for directly exposing
    the air to a liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for a railcar, bus, or trailer in which the inlet air is exposed to
    a liquid.

    157,    for other vehicles in which the inlet air is exposed to a liquid.

    291,    for a floor-type register in a building where the inlet air is
    exposed to a liquid.

    328,    for other types of registers in a building where the inlet air is
    exposed to a liquid.

    337,    for inlet airways for static structures, in general (e.g.,
    buildings), where the inlet air is exposed to a liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 313 for air moistening attachments
    for stovepipes and subclass 508 for a fireplace with a room humidifier.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclass 5 for concentrating evaporators
    designed to evaporate a liquid in film or thin layer form.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 78+ for air moistening devices used in
    heating systems.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, for slow diffusers.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for air
    moistening devices, per se, and subclasses 127+ for heating and cooling
    devices combined with moisteners for the air. Devices including significant
    ventilating structure and excluding specific heating or cooling structure
    will be found in this Class 454.

    312,    Supports: Cabinet Structure, subclasses 31+ for gas or vapor
    treatment of material contained within a cabinet structure.


CLS 454/224
TXT Having louvers:
    Subject matter under subclass 196 wherein the means comprises generally
    parallel or concentric air guiding slats.

    (1)     Note.  The air guiding slats may be composed of an opaque or light
    admitting (i.e., louvered window panes) material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221,    for a window ventilator having an air passage between the sill and
    the bottom of the sash which includes louvers.

    264,    for an inlet airway including structure for mixing plural air
    streams together which has a shaped nozzle and includes louvers.

    265+,   for other inlet airways including structure for mixing plural air
    streams together and which include louvers.

    277+,   for a wall-type inlet airway including a specific cover or shield
    for the exterior vent opening and includes louvers.

    288,    for a baseboard-type inlet airway which may include louvers.

    290,    for a floor-type inlet airway which may include louvers.

    299+,   for a ceiling-type inlet airway which may include louvers.

    309+,   for a wall-type inlet airway which includes a louvered air
    distributor.

    325+,   for an inlet airway including a specific air distributor and
    additionally a louver which forms an adjustable valve.

    335+,   for an inlet airway without a specific air distributor which
    includes a louver which forms an adjustable valve.

    347+,   for an outlet airway including an air pump which may have air
    regulating louvers.

    358+,   for other outlet airways which may have air regulating louvers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, particularly subclasses 74.1+ for
    movable louvered windows which have adjacent edges which contact each other
    (i.e., are not constantly spaced apart) in the closed position to effect a
    closure between them.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Building), particularly subclass 473 for a
    louvered panel and subclass 633 for location of related structures in other
    classes.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 140+
    for louver devices in which the slats are flexible, or are interconnected
    to each other for relative movement, or may be accumulated (e.g.,venetian
    blinds).  See class definition section III of Class 160.


CLS 454/225
TXT Tilting pane window:
    Subject matter under subclass 196 wherein the window comprises a light
    admitting panel which rotates about a horizontal axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217,    for an air passage between a window sill and sash bottom having a
    wall for upwardly deflecting inlet air, the wall being adjustable for angle
    or having a swingable mounting.

    221,    for an air passage between a window sill and sash bottom which
    includes light admitting parallel or concentric slats which rotate about a
    horizontal axis.

    224,    for a window in combination with light admitting parallel or
    concentric ventilating slats which rotate about a horizontal axis.


CLS 454/226
TXT Having wind deflector:
    Subject matter under subclass 196 comprising a shield or air guiding
    surface which extends into a flow of natural air (i.e., wind) to direct the
    air through the window into the ventilated space or to draw air out of the
    ventilated space.

    (1)     Note.  A mere shield which shelters a window from the wind, but
    allows air to pass through the window into or out of the ventilated space,
    is not included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215,    for an air passage between a window sill and sash including a wall
    sloping downward from the window which may deflect air into or out of the
    window.


CLS 454/227
TXT Including backdraft preventer:
    Subject matter under subclass 196 comprising a means which senses pressure
    or direction of air flow to or from a ventilated space and which acts to
    allow airflow under certain sensed conditions and to obstruct airflow under
    other sensed conditions.

    (1)     Note.  The means usually permits flow in one direction along a
    conduit while blocking flow in an opposite direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3+,     for a backdraft preventer incorporated in chimneytop or stacktop
    structure, particularly subclass 26.

    70+,    for condition responsive pressure maintenance inside a vehicle
    which may include a valve.

    194,    for a blast or shock wave type of backdraft preventer.

    238,    for pressure regulation of a ventilation system which includes both
    inlet and outlet airways.

    255,    for pressure regulation of a ventilation system which includes an
    inlet airway.

    259,    for a backdraft preventer and an inlet airway.

    340,    for pressure regulation of a ventilation system which includes an
    outlet airway.

    353,    for a backdraft preventer and fan for an outlet airway.

    359+,   for a backdraft preventer for an outlet airway.


CLS 454/228
TXT HAVING FORCED RECIRCULATION:
    Subject matter under the class definition comprising an air moving
    apparatus which contacts and directly forces air from one location within a
    (ventilated) space to another separate location within the space.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes a multi-compartmented structure such
    as a multiple room house provided the air flow path is recirculatory and
    not merely a flow-through ventilation path.

    (2)     Note.  Subject matter comprising forced, "partial recirculation",
    wherein fresh air and recirculating air contact and are directly forced
    into the space by an air moving apparatus are included in this and indented
    subclasses unless otherwise indicated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99+,    for forced recirculation in a railcar, bus, or trailer-type vehicle.

    139+,   for forced recirculation in other types of vehicles.

    205,    for recirculation combined with  window features.

    261+,   for inlet airways which induce recirculatory air flow.


CLS 454/229
TXT Including automatic control means:
    Subject matter under subclass 228 comprising a means to sense a condition
    or change of condition which condition or change of condition may or may
    not occur, which means is effective to activate a separate means for
    regulating the quantity or direction of air flowing to, from, or about the
    ventilated space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70+,    for automatic pressure regulation of a vehicle ventilating system.

    75,     for automatic control of a vehicle ventilating system.

    238,    for automatic pressure regulation of a ventilating system having
    both inlet and outlet airways.

    239,    for automatic control of a ventilating system having both inlet and
    outlet airways.

    255,    for automatic pressure regulation of a ventilating system having an
    inlet airway.

    256,    for automatic control of a ventilating system having an inlet
    airway.

    340,    for automatic pressure regulation of a ventilating system having an
    outlet airway.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, appropriate
    subclasses for automatic control means for controlling temperature or
    humidity.


CLS 454/230
TXT Forced recirculation alone:
    Subject matter under subclass 228 wherein the air moving apparatus contacts
    and directly moves only existing air within the ventilated space.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter including means for also introducing air from
    outside of the ventilated space into the space is excluded from this and
    indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100+,   for a railcar, bus, or trailer having forced recirculation of
    vehicle air alone.

    140,    for other types of vehicles having forced recirculation of vehicle
    air alone.


CLS 454/231
TXT Having recirculating duct connecting upper and lower room air
    strata:Subject matter under subclass 230 comprising a conduit which guides
    air between separate horizontal air layers within a ventilated chamber.

    (1)     Note.  The air in the different layers usually differs in some
    characteristic such as temperature.

    (2)     Note.  The conduit must connect different strata within the same
    chamber or room to be included in this subclass (i.e., a duct connecting
    two different chambers on different floors of a building is not included in
    this subclass).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    187,    for a clean room having a recirculating duct connecting upper and
    lower room air strata.


CLS 454/232
TXT Having plural or branched recirculation ducts:
    Subject matter under subclass 230 comprising two or more conduits for
    separately guiding air between locations within the ventilated space.

    (1)     Note.  A single conduit comprising plural sections connected in
    series is not included in this subclass.


CLS 454/233
TXT For use with heating or cooling means:
    Subject matter under subclass 230 wherein the apparatus for moving the
    existing air is combined with a nominally recited means for raising or
    lowering air temperature in the ventilated space.

    (1)     Note.  The mere naming of a furnace, heat exchanger, or air
    conditioner in the claims will allow for a document to be placed in this
    subclass. However, if the document claims a specific furnace, heat
    exchanger, or air conditioner, it should be classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236,    for other forced recirculation systems combined with a nominally
    recited heating or cooling means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclasses for specific cooling or
    refrigeration means in a ventilating system.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for specific heating and
    cooling means in a ventilating system.

    237,    Heating Systems, particularly subclasses 48 and 53 for specific
    furnace means in a ventilating system and the Search Class notes of the
    class definition and subclass 46 for the line between Class 237 and Class
    454.


CLS 454/234
TXT Including unitary housing having both inlet and outlet airways:Subject
    matter under subclass 228 comprising a single structure containing means
    for admitting air to a ventilated space and a separate means for exhausting
    air from the space.

    (1)     Note.  A means for solely guiding air which is to be returned to
    the ventilated space (i.e., recirculating air alone) is not considered to
    be an inlet or outlet.

    (2)     Note.  The air admitting and exhausting means must comprise
    separate and distinct passages. A single passage which admits air to the
    space under one condition and exhausts air from the space under another
    condition is not included in this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  This and indented subclasses are intended to include subject
    matter in which the separate air admitting and air exhausting means are
    contained within or form a single, integral structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for a railcar, bus, or trailer having a unitary inlet and outlet
    housing which does not recirculate air.

    142,    for other types of vehicles having a unitary inlet and outlet
    housing which does not recirculate air.

    241+,   for a static structure (e.g., building) having a unitary inlet and
    outlet housing which does not recirculate air.


CLS 454/235
TXT Having air pump means for both airways:
    Subject matter under subclass 234 comprising an air moving means which
    directly contacts air to force it into the ventilated space and an air
    moving means which directly contacts air to force it out of the space.

    (1)     Note.  While most subject matter in this subclass comprises a means
    for contacting and forcing the air into the ventilated space and a separate
    means for contacting and forcing air out of the space, subject matter
    comprising a single means which performs both functions is also included
    herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244,    for similar devices where there is no forced recirculation.

    252,    for ventilation systems having air pump means for separate inlet
    and outlet airways.


CLS 454/236
TXT For use with heating or cooling means:
    Subject matter under subclass 228 wherein the apparatus for moving the
    existing air is combined with a nominally recited means for raising or
    lowering air temperature in the ventilated space.

    (1)     Note.  The mere naming of a furnace, heat exchanger, or air
    conditioner in the claims will allow for a document to be placed in this
    subclass. However, if the document claims a specific furnace, heat
    exchanger, or air conditioner, it should be classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233,    for a means having forced recirculation alone combined with a
    nominally recited heating or cooling means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclasses for specific cooling or
    refrigeration means in a ventilating system.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for specific heating and
    cooling means in a ventilating system.

    237,    Heating Systems, particularly subclasses 48 and 53 for specific
    furnace means in a ventilating system and the Search Class notes of the
    class definition and subclass 46 for the line between Class 237 and Class
    454.


CLS 454/237
TXT HAVING BOTH INLET AND OUTLET AIRWAYS:
    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a means for admitting
    air to a (ventilated) space and a separate means for exhausting air from
    the space.

    (1)     Note.  The air admitting and exhausting means must be separate and
    distinct from one another. A single means which admits air to the space
    under one condition and exhausts air from the space under another condition
    is not included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8+,     for a chimney or stack having both inlet and outlet airways.

    103+,   for railcars, buses, or trailers having both inlet and outlet
    airways.

    141+,   for other vehicles having both inlet and outlet airways.

    254+,   for a means which acts alternatively to admit air to or release air
    from a ventilated space.


CLS 454/238
TXT Pressure regulation:
    Apparatus under subclass 237 including means responsive to air conditions
    either in or outside of an enclosure or the air condition in the supply
    system for the enclosure to maintain a predetermined pressure in said
    enclosure and/or a difference in pressure between said enclosure and the
    outside atmosphere.

    (1)     Note. Systems which maintain enclosures under air pressure but
    having no air condition responsive automatic controls are in other
    appropriate subclasses of this class, e.g., those having differential air
    input and discharge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for pressure regulation with a vehicle and note the classes
    referred to under "SEARCH CLASS" for that subclass.

    255,    for pressure regulation of a structure which includes an inlet
    airway.

    340,    for pressure regulation of a structure which includes an outlet
    airway.


CLS 454/239
TXT Including automatic control means:
    Subject matter under subclass 237 comprising a means to sense a condition
    or change of condition which condition or change of condition may or may
    not occur, which means is effective to activate a separate means for
    regulating the quantity or direction of air flowing to or from the
    ventilated space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70+,    for automatic pressure regulation of a vehicle ventilating system.

    75,     for automatic control of a vehicle ventilating system.

    229,    for automatic control of a forced recirculation ventilating system.

    238,    for automatic pressure regulation of a ventilating system having
    both inlet and outlet airways.

    255,    for automatic pressure regulation of a ventilating system having an
    inlet airway.

    256,    for automatic control of a ventilating system having an inlet
    airway.

    340,    for automatic pressure regulation of a ventilating system having an
    outlet airway.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, appropriate
    subclasses for automatic control means for controlling temperature or
    humidity.


CLS 454/240
TXT With wind-operated air pump:
    Subject matter under subclass 237 comprising an air moving apparatus
    powered by natural air current for forcing air to or from the ventilated
    space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for a wind-operated fan associated with chimney or stacktop
    structure.

    101,    for a wind-operated fan in a railcar, bus, or trailer used for
    forced recirculation.

    106,    for other railcar, bus, or trailer wind-operated fans associated
    with an inlet and outlet airway.

    113,    for other railcar, bus, or trailer wind-operated fans associated
    with an inlet airway.


CLS 454/241
TXT Including unitary inlet and outlet housing:
    Subject matter under subclass 237 comprising a single structure containing
    portions of the air admitting and air exhausting means.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses are intended to include subject
    matter in which the air admitting and air exhausting means are integral.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for railcars, buses, or trailers which have a unitary inlet and
    outlet housing.

    142,    for other vehicles which have a unitary inlet and outlet housing.

    234+,   for static structures having forced recirculation and which use a
    unitary inlet and outlet housing.


CLS 454/242
TXT Rooftop:
    Subject matter under subclass 241 wherein the single structure is located
    on or in an outdoor exposed, top barrier of the ventilated space.

    (1)     Note.  A conduit which passes through the roof to conduct air to
    and from an area immediately below the roof is proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for specific chimney or stack structure wherein air communicates
    with an area substantially below the roof proper.


CLS 454/243
TXT Sleeved vent for ceiling, wall, or floor (i.e., thimble):
    Subject matter under subclass 241 wherein the single structure comprises a
    casing which acts alone and is inserted in an interior top, side, or bottom
    structural barrier of the (ventilated) space to guide air separately and in
    opposite directions between adjacent, unconfined locations on opposite
    sides of the barrier.

    (1)     Note.  An air distributing register with return vent which works in
    conjunction with a duct is not included in this subclass. The adjacent air
    on opposite sides of the barrier must be unconfined by ducting or like
    structures.

    (2)     Note.  A bank-vault ventilator thimble is included in this subclass.


CLS 454/244
TXT With air pump means for both inlet and outlet airways:
    Subject matter under subclass 243 comprising an air moving means which
    directly contacts air to force it into the ventilated space and an air
    moving means which directly contacts air to force it out of the space.

    (1)     Note.  While most subject matter in this subclass comprises a means
    for contacting and forcing the air into the ventilated space and a separate
    means for contacting and forcing air out of the space, subject matter
    comprising a single means which performs both functions is also included
    herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235,    for subject matter having forced recirculation and both inlet and
    outlet airways, and further having air pump means for both of the airways,
    which airways are contained in a unitary housing.

    252,    for ventilation systems having air pump means for separate inlet
    and outlet airways.


CLS 454/245
TXT Air distributor with return vent (e.g., register, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 241 wherein the single structure comprises a
    means for directing the airflow as it enters the ventilated space and an
    aperture for exhausting air from the space.


CLS 454/246
TXT Baseboard type:
    Subject matter under subclass 245 wherein the single structure is located
    at the juncture of an interior, side structural barrier (i.e., wall) and an
    interior, bottom structural barrier (i.e., floor) of the ventilated space.


CLS 454/247
TXT Floor type:
    Subject matter under subclass 245 wherein the single structure is located
    on or in an interior, bottom structural barrier of the ventilated space.


CLS 454/248
TXT Ceiling type:
    Subject matter under subclass 245 wherein the single structure is located
    on or in an interior, top structural barrier of the ventilated space.


CLS 454/249
TXT With air pump:
    Subject matter under subclass 241 comprising an air moving apparatus for
    forcing air into or out of the ventilated space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    for a railcar, bus, or trailer which includes both inlet and outlet
    airways and an air pump.

    243+,   for a sleeved vent having both inlet and outlet airways and further
    including an air pump.


CLS 454/250
TXT Natural ventilation including air passage through rooftop (i.e., no air
    pump):Subject matter under subclass 237 wherein the means for admitting air
    into the ventilated space and means for exhausting air from the space
    function by means other than an air moving apparatus for forcing air into
    or out of the space and wherein one of the means comprises an air carrying
    conduit which passes through an external top barrier of the space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for chimney or stack structure which may pass through a roof.


CLS 454/251
TXT With air pump means:
    Subject matter under subclass 237 comprising air moving means for forcing
    air into or out of the ventilated space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239,    for inlet and outlet airways including automatic control means and
    an air pump.

    240,    for inlet and outlet airways including a wind-operated air pump.

    241+,   for a unitary inlet and outlet housing with an air pump,
    particularly subclasses 243+ and 249.


CLS 454/252
TXT For both inlet and outlet airways:
    Subject matter under subclass 251 wherein the air moving means directly
    contacts air to force it into the ventilated space and directly contacts
    air to force it out of the space.

    (1)     Note.  While most subject matter in this subclass comprises a means
    for contacting and forcing the air into the ventilated space and a separate
    means for contacting and forcing air out of the space, subject matter
    comprising a single means which performs both functions is also included
    herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235,    for subject matter having forced recirculation and both inlet and
    outlet airways, and further having air pump means for both of the airways,
    which airways are contained in a unitary housing.

    244,    for a sleeved vent for a ceiling, wall, or floor with air pump
    means for both inlet and outlet airways.


CLS 454/253
TXT For outlet airway:
    Subject matter under subclass 251 wherein the air moving means directly
    contacts air to force it out of the ventilated space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    252,    for air pump means for both inlet and outlet airways.


CLS 454/254
TXT HAVING INLET AIRWAY:
    Subject matter under the class definition comprising means for admitting
    air to a (ventilated) space.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter relating to an airway which is not
    specifically an inlet or outlet airway (i.e., the airway can be used for
    either) is included in this and indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10+,    for chimneys or stacks having inlet airways.

    107,    for railcars, buses, or trailers having inlet airways.

    143+,   for other vehicles having inlet airways.


CLS 454/255
TXT Pressure regulation:
    Apparatus under subclass 254 including means responsive to air conditions
    either in or outside of an enclosure or the air condition in the supply
    system for the enclosure to maintain a predetermined pressure in said
    enclosure and/or a difference in pressure between said enclosure and the
    outside atmosphere.

    (1)     Note. Systems which maintain enclosures under air pressure but
    having no air condition responsive automatic controls are in other
    appropriate subclasses of this class, e.g., those having differential air
    input and discharge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for pressure regulation with a vehicle and note the classes
    referred to under "SEARCH CLASS" for that subclass.

    238,    for pressure regulation of a structure which includes both inlet
    and outlet airways.

    340,    for pressure regulation of a structure which includes an outlet
    airway.


CLS 454/256
TXT Including automatic control means:
    Subject matter under subclass 254 comprising a means to sense a condition
    or change of condition which condition or change of condition may or may
    not occur, which means is effective to activate a separate means for
    regulating the quantity or direction of the air flowing into the ventilated
    space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70+,    for automatic pressure regulation of a vehicle ventilating system.

    75,     for automatic control of a vehicle ventilating system.

    229,    for automatic control of a forced recirculation ventilating system.

    238,    for automatic pressure regulation of a ventilating system having
    both inlet and outlet airways.

    239,    for automatic control of a ventilating system having both inlet and
    outlet airways.

    255,    for automatic pressure regulation of a ventilating system having an
    inlet airway.

    340,    for automatic pressure regulation of a ventilating system having an
    outlet airway.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, appropriate
    subclasses for automatic control means for controlling temperature or
    humidity.


CLS 454/257
TXT Emergency smoke or fire responsive valve:
    Subject matter under subclass 256 comprising a means for regulating the
    quantity of airflow dependent on a means for sensing the presence of either
    (1) gaseous emission from a sudden, unexpected flame of a serious nature or
    (2) a flame.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for a chimney or stacktop with air current regulating means which
    is temperature responsive.

    342,    for a building outlet airway including an air pump and having means
    for controlling or dealing with smoke.

    357,    for other building outlet airways have means for controlling or
    dealing with smoke.

    369,    for fusible release controlled fire dampers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 287.5 for fusible release dampers for
    stoves or furnaces.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, particularly subclasses 42 and 56+ for fire
    extinguishing apparatus responsive to smoke or fire.


CLS 454/258
TXT Air temperature responsive:
    Subject matter under subclass 256 wherein the relocatable slats or slat
    portions relocate due to changes in the hotness or coldness of air.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, particularly
    subclass 49.1 for automatic temperature and humidity regulation of a
    ventilator.


CLS 454/259
TXT Including backdraft preventer:
    Subject matter under subclass 254 comprising a means which senses pressure
    or direction of air flow to or from a ventilated space and which acts to
    allow airflow under certain sensed conditions and to obstruct airflow under
    other sensed conditions.

    (1)     Note.  The means usually permits flow in one direction along a
    conduit while blocking flow in an opposite direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3+,     for a backdraft preventer incorporated in chimneytop or stacktop
    structure, particularly subclass 26.

    70+,    for condition responsive pressure maintenance inside a vehicle
    which may include a valve

    194,    for a blast or shock wave type of backdraft preventer.

    227,    for a backdraft preventer combined with a window.

    238,    for pressure regulation of a ventilation system which includes both
    inlet and outlet airways.

    255,    for pressure regulation of a ventilation system which includes an
    inlet airway.

    340,    for pressure regulation of a ventilation system which includes an
    outlet airway.

    353,    for a backdraft preventer and fan for an outlet airway.

    359+,   for a backdraft preventer for an outlet airway.


CLS 454/260
TXT Through roof eaves or rafters:
    Subject matter under subclass 254 particularly adapted to directing air
    through an opening in (1) a projecting overhang portion at the lower edge
    of a structure's external top covering (i.e., roof) or (2) an opening in or
    adjacent a sloping beam which supports a structure's external top covering.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228+,   for means mixing recirculated air with fresh air directed into a
    ventilated space.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, particularly
    subclass 13 for plenum-type fluid mixers with automatic temperature and
    humidity regulation.


CLS 454/261
TXT Including structure for mixing plural air streams together:
    Subject matter under subclass 254 in which the means for admitting the air
    includes a configuration which unites separately originating currents of
    air into a combined current of air.

    (1)     Note.  A means which mixes induced flow recirculation air with
    fresh inlet air for flow into a ventilated space is included in this and
    indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228+,   for a forced recirculation means which mixes plural airstreams
    together.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, particularly
    subclass 13 for plenum-type fluid mixers with automatic temperature and
    humidity regulation.


CLS 454/262
TXT And having specific noise inhibiting structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 261 in which particular significance is
    attributed to a configuration which prevents or deadens unwanted sound
    produced during the uniting of the separately originating currents of air.

    (1)     Note.  The specific noise inhibiting structure must be positively
    claimed for proper original patent placement in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  See the Class 181, Acoustics, subclass 212, (1) Note, for
    the line between Class 181 and Class 454.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206,    for a window mounted air pump including specific noise inhibiting
    structure.

    346,    for an outlet airway having vibration absorbing or preventing
    structure.

    906,    for a cross-reference art collection of ventilating structure
    combined with noise inhibiting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, particularly subclasses 212+ for a fluid-conducting-type
    sound muffler of a general nature and subclass 224 for a sound absorbing
    ventilating duct or curb.


CLS 454/263
TXT With shaped nozzle:
    Subject matter under subclass 261 wherein the air uniting configuration
    includes a continuous formed, projecting, air spout with an opening
    therethrough for carrying one of the currents of air to be combined.

    (1)     Note.  A flat plate with a hole or plurality of holes is not
    considered to be a shaped nozzle unless it is on the end or side of a
    formed, projecting, spout-like structure.

    (2)     Note.  Structures which mix plural air streams together and
    subsequently eject the combined air stream through a nozzle are not
    included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305,    for an air distributing, ejecting inlet nozzle.


CLS 454/264
TXT And readily movable air regulating louver, damper, or cover:Subject matter
    under subclass 263 wherein the continuous, formed, projecting air spout has
    a cooperating easily shiftable air permitting or preventing (1) group of
    parallel or concentric slats, (2) internal body, or (3) orifice cap or
    closure.

    (1)     Note.  A louver, damper, or cover held in a single fixed position
    by a separate, movable, screw, bolt, or other permanent type, tool actuated
    fastener is not considered "readily movable".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221,    for a window ventilator having an air passage between the sill and
    the bottom of the sash which includes louvers.

    224,    for other window ventilators including louvers.

    265+,   for other inlet airways including structure for mixing plural air
    streams together and which include louvers.

    277+,   for a wall-type inlet airway including a specific cover or shield
    for the exterior vent opening and includes louvers.

    288,    for a baseboard-type inlet airway which may include louvers.

    290,    for a floor-type inlet airway which may include louvers.

    299+,   for a ceiling-type inlet airway which may include louvers.

    309+,   for a wall-type inlet airway which includes a louvered air
    distributor.

    325+,   for an inlet airway including a specific air distributor and
    additionally a louver which forms an adjustable valve.

    335+,   for an inlet airway without a specific air distributor which
    includes a louver which forms an adjustable valve.

    347+,   for an outlet airway including an air pump which may have air
    regulating louvers.

    358+,   for other outlet airways which may have air regulating louvers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), particularly subclasses 473
    for a louvered panel and 633 for location of related structures in other
    classes.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 140+
    for louver devices in which the slats are flexible, or are interconnected
    to each other for relative movement, or may be accumulated (e.g., venetian
    blinds).  See section III of the Class 160 class definition.


CLS 454/265
TXT With readily movable air regulating louver, damper, or cover:Subject matter
    under subclass 261 having an easily shiftable air permitting or preventing
    (1) group of parallel or concentric slats, (2) internal body, or (3)
    orifice cap or closure.

    (1)     Note.  A louver, damper, or cover held in a single fixed position
    by a separate, movable, screw, bolt, or other permanent type, tool actuated
    fastener is not considered "readily movable".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221,    for a window ventilator having an air passage between the sill and
    the bottom of the sash which includes louvers.

    224,    for other window ventilators including louvers.

    264,    for an inlet airway including structure for mixing plural air
    streams together which has a shaped nozzle and includes louvers.

    277+,   for a wall-type inlet airway including a specific cover or shield
    for the exterior vent opening and includes louvers.

    288,    for a baseboard-type inlet airway which may include louvers.

    290,    for a floor-type inlet airway which may include louvers.

    299+,   for a ceiling-type inlet airway which may include louvers.

    309+,   for a wall-type inlet airway which includes a louvered air
    distributor.

    325+,   for an inlet airway including a specific air distributor and
    additionally a louver which forms an adjustable valve.

    335+,   for an inlet airway without a specific air distributor which
    includes a louver which forms an adjustable valve.

    347+,   for an outlet airway including an air pump which may have air
    regulating louvers.

    358+,   for other outlet airways which may have air regulating louvers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), particularly subclasses 473
    for a louvered panel and 633 for location of related structures in other
    classes.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 140+
    for louver devices in which the slats are flexible, or are interconnected
    to each other for relative movement, or may be accumulated (e.g.,venetian
    blinds).  See section III of the Class 160 class definition.


CLS 454/266
TXT Pivoted:
    Subject matter under subclass 265 wherein the shiftable slats, body, cap,
    or closure swing about a fixed axis region which is parallel to or within a
    major air engaging surface thereof.


CLS 454/267
TXT Plural:
    Subject matter under subclass 266 having at least two swinging slats,
    bodies, caps, closures, or a combination of at least two elements thereof.

    (1)     Note.  A set of grouped pivoted slats (e.g., a pivoted louver set)
    is considered sufficient for inclusion in this subclass and its indented
    subclass.


CLS 454/268
TXT Including parallel louver vanes:
    Subject matter under subclass 267 wherein the multiple swinging slats,
    bodies, caps closures, or combination thereof, include at least one set of
    slats having swinging members everywhere equidistant from each other.


CLS 454/269
TXT With air pump:
    Subject matter under subclass 261 wherein the air admitting means includes
    an air moving apparatus for forcing the air into the ventilated space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228+,   for an air pump used in combined inlet and outlet ventilator
    apparatus which exhausts a portion of the building air and returns the
    remaining portion of air to the stationary structure of the building along
    with incoming outside air, often into a combined stream of air.

    338,    for an inlet air way, including an air pump, of a generally
    nonmixing nature.


CLS 454/270
TXT Sleeved vent for ceiling, wall, or floor (e.g., thimble):
    Subject matter under subclass 254 comprising a casing which acts alone and
    is inserted in an interior top, side, or bottom structural barrier of the
    (ventilated) space to direct air from an unconfined location outside of the
    space to an adjacent unconfined location on an opposite side of the barrier
    and within the space.

    (1)     Note.  An air distributing register which works in conjunction with
    an inlet duct is not included in this subclass. The adjacent air on
    opposite sides of the barrier must be unconfined by ducting or like
    structures.

    (2)     Note.  An exterior, wall-type louver panel is not included in this
    and indented subclasses unless the panel guides air through a barrier
    directly into the ventilated space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277+,   for an exterior, wall-type louver panel for a building vent.

    330+,   for an air distributing register box, frame, or grating which acts
    in conjunction with an inlet airway or duct.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 302.1 for a passage
    between an interior part of a building and ambient atmosphere which does
    not direct or control air flow into a ventilated space. See the notes in
    Class 52, subclass 198, and in the main portion of the definitions.


CLS 454/271
TXT Wall type:
    Subject matter under subclass 270 wherein the barrier is a generally planar
    surface which extends vertically (i.e., parallel to the force of gravity).

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses include many bank-vault
    ventilators.


CLS 454/272
TXT With air pump:
    Subject matter under subclass 271 comprising an air moving apparatus for
    forcing air to or from the ventilated space.


CLS 454/273
TXT Having adjustable valve:
    Subject matter under subclass 271 comprising a positively repositionable
    device for regulating the quantity of airflow through the casing in the
    barrier.


CLS 454/274
TXT Sliding or axially moveable:
    Subject matter under subclass 273 wherein the regulating means (1)
    relocates along a path parallel to a general direction of airflow
    immediately prior to its contact with the means or (2) comprises a portion
    which translates along another portion of the means.

    (1)     Note.  Regarding (2), above, the airflow regulating means usually
    comprises two adjacent surface elements each having a group of holes
    therethrough, wherein the two elements translate relative to one another to
    vary airflow by bringing the groups of holes into and out of alignment with
    one another.


CLS 454/275
TXT Including specific cover or shield for exterior vent opening:Subject matter
    under subclass 254 wherein particular significance is attributed to a means
    positioned over an outdoor aperture of an air passage leading to a
    (ventilated) space so as to protect the air passage.

    (1)     Note.  The means usually acts to protect the passage from rain or
    outside debris.

    (2)     Note.  A cover or shield not inherent to the structure of the
    ventilating means (e.g., a building roof overhang) is not included under
    this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4+,     for a cap closure for a chimney or stacktop.

    94,     for a railcar, bus, or trailer having an exterior cap closure for a
    vent.

    347+,   for an outlet airway having an air pump and which may include a
    readily moveable cover.

    355,    for an outlet airway having an air pump and including a moveable
    access cover.

    356,    for an outlet airway having an air pump and including an exterior
    neck with an enlarged, weather resistant cover.

    358+,   for other outlet airways which may include a readily moveable cover.

    367+,   for other outlet airways with a specific cover or shield for an
    exterior vent opening.


CLS 454/276
TXT Wall type:
    Subject matter under subclass 275 wherein the means is located in a
    generally planar surface which extends vertically, i.e., parallel to the
    force of gravity.


CLS 454/277
TXT Louver:
    Subject matter under subclass 276 including a plurality of generally
    parallel or concentric slats or slat portions lying within a plane and
    spaced apart to form an air passageway therebetween.

    (1)     Note.  The dimension of a slat parallel to the direction of air
    flowing past it must be larger than its overall thickness to be considered
    a louver slat. Unless it is claimed in combination with, or as part of
    louver slats or slat portions, wired mesh or a plate with a mere plurality
    of holes is not considered to be a louver by itself.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221,    for a window ventilator having an air passage between the sill and
    the bottom of the sash which includes louvers.

    224,    for other window ventilators including louvers.

    264,    for an inlet airway including structure for mixing plural air
    streams together which has a shaped nozzle and includes louvers.

    265+,   for other inlet airways including structure for mixing plural air
    streams together and which include louvers.

    288,    for a baseboard-type inlet airway which may include louvers.

    290,    for a floor-type inlet airway which may include louvers.

    299+,   for a ceiling-type inlet airway which may include louvers.

    309+,   for a wall-type inlet airway which includes a louvered air
    distributor.

    325+,   for an inlet airway including a specific air distributor and
    additionally a louver which forms an adjustable valve.

    335+,   for an inlet airway without a specific air distributor which
    includes a louver which forms an adjustable valve.

    347+,   for an outlet airway including an air pump which may have air
    regulating louvers.

    358+,   for other outlet airways which may have air regulating louvers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), particularly subclasses 473
    for a louvered panel and 633 for location of related structures in other
    classes.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 140+
    for louver devices in which the slats are flexible, or are interconnected
    to each other for relative movement, or may be accumulated (e.g.,venetian
    blinds).  See section III of the Class 160 class definition.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, particularly subclasses 213 and 236
    for cabinets having ventilating features.


CLS 454/278
TXT Having moveable vanes:
    Subject matter under subclass 277 comprising means for relocating the slats
    or slat portions either (1) individually or (2) simultaneously or (3) as a
    unit along with supporting structure therefore.

    (1)     Note.  A means for relocating the slats or slat portions which
    merely involves permanently deforming the slats is not included in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    313+,   for an air distributor having a moveable louver.


CLS 454/279
TXT Having serially aligned vane sets:
    Subject matter under subclass 277 comprising two groups of slats or slat
    portions which act on contact airflow through the device one after another,
    i.e., sequentially.


CLS 454/280
TXT Formed in sheet member:
    Subject matter under subclass 277 comprising a single plate element having
    two or more ventilating air passages therethrough.


CLS 454/281
TXT Having specific vane supporting means:
    Subject matter under subclass 277 wherein particular significance is
    attributed to means for directly contacting and holding one of the slats in
    position.

    (1)     Note.  Specific vane supporting means must be claimed for inclusion
    in this subclass. A mere "means for mounting a louver slat" is not
    sufficient for inclusion in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  A specific supporting means for attaching one slat to an
    adjacent slat is included in this subclass.


CLS 454/282
TXT In between vane ends:
    Subject matter under subclass 281 comprising means located intermediate the
    lengthwise extremities of one of the vane-like strips or strip portions
    which holds the strip or strip portion in position.

    (1)     Note.  The supporting means may connect a strip or strip portion
    with a louver framing member or with an adjoining strip or strip portion.


CLS 454/283
TXT With screen mounting means:
    Subject matter under subclass 277 comprising means to hold in position a
    mesh-like element through which the air flows.


CLS 454/284
TXT Including specific air distributor (e.g., register, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 254 comprising particular means for directing
    the air as it enters the ventilated space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108+,   for railcars, buses, or trailers having specific air distributors.

    152+,   for other types of vehicles having specific air distributors.

    185+,   for hollow partitions which may disclose specific air distributors.

    270+,   for a sleeved vent in a ceiling, wall, or floor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, particularly
    subclasses 222, 229, and 231 for houses, kilns, and containers of that type
    having gas or vapor distributors.


CLS 454/285
TXT Sweeping type:
    Subject matter under subclass 284 comprising means for guiding the air
    along a regularly changing directional path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    for a sweeping-type vehicle window defroster.

    153,    for a sweeping-type ventilating air distributor in a vehicle.


CLS 454/286
TXT Having airway joint with ball or cylinder rotatable in a socket:Subject
    matter under subclass 284 wherein the air directing means has a hollow, air
    passing connection consisting of an inner member having a spherical or
    circular, tube shaped (i.e., cylindrical surface) portion located in an
    outer mating cavity member to permit rotating movement therebetween in
    plural directions.

    (1)     Note.  The socket portion may not be spherical or cylindrical.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154,    for a vehicle inlet airway having a swiveling nozzle air
    distributor which may be of the ball and socket type.

    316,    for a repositionable set of air distributing louvers and for
    louvers mounted in a nonairpassing or a nonsupporting ball or cylinder.

    317,    for rotating disk-type air distributing inlet louvers.


CLS 454/287
TXT Baseboard type:
    Subject matter under subclass 284 wherein the air directing means is
    located at the juncture of an interior, side structural barrier (i.e.,
    wall) and an interior, bottom structural barrier (i.e., floor) of the
    ventilated space.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes a floor-type air distributor having a
    hood above the floor for directing the air laterally.


CLS 454/288
TXT Including portion or element movable during normal use:
    Subject matter under subclass 287 wherein the air directing means has a
    part or component capable of motion under usual operating conditions.

    (1)     Note.  A movable portion or element which only moves during
    installation of the ventilator, but not subsequently, is not considered
    proper for this subclass.  A readily repositionable portion or element
    which is bodily movable (e.g., louver vanes or a cover plate) without the
    use of a special tool (e.g., a screwdriver) is proper for this subclass
    since this is part of its normal intended use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333+,   for an inlet airway with an adjustable valve.

    338,    for an inlet airway wherein the movable portion or element is an
    air pump or is combined with an air pump.


CLS 454/289
TXT Floor type:
    Subject matter under subclass 284 wherein the air directing means is
    located on or in an interior, bottom structural barrier of the ventilated
    space (i.e., floor).

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses do not include a floor-type air
    distributor having a hood above the floor for  directing the air laterally.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    287+,   for a floor-type air distributor having a hood above the floor for
    directing the air laterally.


CLS 454/290
TXT Having adjustable valve:
    Subject matter under subclass 289 comprising a positively repositionable
    device for regulating the quantity of airflow.


CLS 454/291
TXT With means for liquid contact:
    Subject matter under subclass 289 comprising means for directly  exposing
    the air to water or another liquid.

    (1)     Note.  Dehumidifying means are not considered to be means for
    liquid contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for a railcar, bus, or trailer in which the inlet air is exposed to
    a liquid.

    157,    for other vehicles in which the inlet air is exposed to a liquid.

    223,    for a window ventilator having an air passage between the sill and
    the bottom of the sash in which the air is exposed to a liquid.

    328,    for other types of registers in a building where the inlet air is
    exposed to a liquid.

    337,    for inlet airways for static structures, in general,(e.g.,
    buildings) where the inlet air is exposed to a liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 313 for air moistening attachments
    for stovepipes and subclass 508 for a fireplace with a room humidifier.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclass 5 for concentrating evaporators
    designed to evaporate a liquid in film or thin layer form.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 78+ for air moistening devices used in
    heating systems.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, for slow diffusers.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for air
    moistening devices, per se, and subclasses 127+ for heating and cooling
    devices combined with moisteners for the air. Devices including significant
    ventilating structure and excluding specific heating or cooling structure
    will be found in this Class 454.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 31+ for gas or vapor
    treatment of material contained within a cabinet structure.


CLS 454/292
TXT Ceiling type:
    Subject matter under subclass 284 wherein the air directing means is
    located on or in an interior, top structural barrier of the ventilated
    space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306,    for an air duct extending into the room and often suspended from
    the ceiling.


CLS 454/293
TXT With light fixture:
    Subject matter under subclass 292 wherein the air directing means is
    combined with an illuminating device.


CLS 454/294
TXT Air passes over lamp:
    Subject matter under subclass 293 wherein the air flows over and contacts a
    source of illumination associated with the illuminating device.


CLS 454/295
TXT Having adjustable valve:
    Subject matter under subclass 293 wherein the air directing means includes
    a positively repositionable means for regulating the airflow quantity.

    (1)     Note.  Opening or closing of an airflow quantity regulating means
    by air pressure alone is not considered to be positive repositioning
    thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    311,    for an inlet air distributer having a louver with concentric vanes
    and separate, adjustable internal damper.

    333+,   for other types of inlet airways with adjustable valves.


CLS 454/296
TXT Including perforated or porous element:
    Subject matter under subclass 292 wherein the air directing means includes
    a component either (1) having a plurality of air passing holes cut or
    formed in it or (2) formed from an air permeable material.

    (1)     Note.  While the panel need not be in a single plane (e.g., it may
    undulate), the holes themselves, when formed or cut, do not extend beyond
    the surface of the surrounding panel taken as a whole.  For example, they
    do not form nor do they support projecting nozzles or form louvers with
    projecting air directing slat portions which are above the adjacent panel
    surface.


CLS 454/297
TXT Having portion or element movable during normal use:
    Subject matter under subclass 296 wherein the air directing means has a
    part capable of motion under usual operating conditions.

    (1)     Note.  A movable portion which only moves during installation of
    the ventilator, but not subsequently, is not considered proper for this
    subclass.  A readily repositionable portion or element which is bodily
    movable (e.g., louver vanes or a cover plate) without the use of a special
    tool (e.g., a screwdriver) is proper for this subclass since this is part
    of its normal intended use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333+,   for an inlet airway with an adjustable valve.

    338,    for an inlet airway wherein the movable portion or element is an
    air pump or is combined with an air pump.


CLS 454/298
TXT Axially movable or sliding valve:
    Subject matter under subclass 297 comprising a means for regulating the
    quantity of airflow wherein the means (1) relocates along a path parallel
    to a general direction of airflow immediately prior to its contact with the
    means or (2) translates along another portion of the means.

    (1)     Note.  Regarding (2), above, the airflow altering means usually
    comprises two adjacent surface elements each having a group of holes
    therethrough, wherein the two elements translate relative to one another to
    vary airflow by bringing the groups of holes into and out of alignment with
    one another.


CLS 454/299
TXT Including plural vanes:
    Subject matter under subclass 292 wherein the air directing means includes
    a plurality of air guiding slats or slat-like portions.

    (1)     Note.  The portions may be integral with or separately attached to
    the rest of the air directing means.

    (2)     Note.  The dimension of the slats or slat-like portions parallel to
    the direction of air flow past them must be larger than the overall
    thickness of the slat or slat-like portion.

    (3)     Note.  Cooperation of the vane structure with a ceiling must be
    claimed for proper original patent placement hereunder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221,    for a window ventilator having an air passage between the sill and
    the bottom of the sash which includes louvers.

    224,    for other window ventilators including louvers.

    264,    for an inlet airway including structure for mixing plural air
    streams together which has a shaped nozzle and includes louvers.

    265+,   for other inlet airways including structure for mixing plural air
    streams together and which include louvers.

    277+,   for a wall-type inlet airway including a specific cover or shield
    for the exterior vent opening and includes louvers.

    288,    for a baseboard-type inlet airway which may include louvers.

    290,    for a floor-type inlet airway which may include louvers.

    309+,   for a wall-type inlet airway which includes a louvered air
    distributor.

    325+,   for an inlet airway including a specific air distributor and
    additionally a louver which forms an adjustable valve.

    335+,   for an inlet airway without a specific air distributor which
    includes a louver which forms an adjustable valve.

    347+,   for an outlet airway including an air pump which may have air
    regulating louvers.

    358+,   for other outlet airways which may have air regulating louvers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), particularly subclasses 473
    for a louvered panel and 633 for location of related structures in other
    classes.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 140+
    for louver devices in which the slats are flexible, or are interconnected
    to each other for relative movement, or may be accumulated (e.g.,venetian
    blinds).  See section III of the Class 160 class definition.


CLS 454/300
TXT Concentric:
    Subject matter under subclass 299 wherein the slats or slat-like portions
    of the air directing means are located parallel to and nested within one
    another.

    (1)     Note.  The concentric vanes need not be nested in the same general
    plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310+,   for concentric inlet air distributing louvers where the cooperation
    with the ceiling is not claimed.


CLS 454/301
TXT Including elongated output slot:
    Subject matter under subclass 292 wherein the air directing means includes
    or forms an oblong airway opening for admitting the air into the chamber.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    296+,   for a ceiling-type air distributor often having elongated
    perforation or porous openings.

    299+,   for a ceiling-type air distributor having elongated slots formed
    between plural vanes.


CLS 454/302
TXT Single, annular output slot:
    Subject matter under subclass 301 wherein the oblong airway opening is in
    the shape of a lone, closed ring.

    (1)     Note.  The ring need not be circular to be considered annular.


CLS 454/303
TXT Having portion or element movable during normal use:

    Subject matter under subclass 301 wherein the air directing means has a
    part or component capable of motion under usual operating conditions.

    (1)     Note.  A movable portion or element which only moves during
    installation of the ventilator, but not subsequently, is not considered
    proper for this subclass.  A readily repositionable portion or element
    which is bodily movable (e.g., a cover plate) without the use of a special
    tool (e.g., a screwdriver) is proper for this subclass since this is part
    of its normal intended use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333+,   for an inlet airway with an adjustable valve.

    338,    for an inlet airway wherein the movable portion or element is an
    air pump or is combined with an air pump.


CLS 454/304
TXT Pivoted:
    Subject matter under subclass 303 wherein the part or component capable of
    motion swings about a fixed axis region which is parallel to or within a
    major surface area of the part or component.


CLS 454/305
TXT Air nozzle:
    Subject matter under subclass 284 wherein the air directing means includes
    a projecting, air concentrating spout with an air passageway therethrough.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263+,   for nozzle used in mixing air for an inlet airway.

    296+,   for a perforated or porous plate ceiling-type diffuser.

    306,    for an air distributer having an air duct extending into a room.


CLS 454/306
TXT Having air duct extending into room:
    Subject matter under subclass 284 wherein the air directing means includes
    an elongated tubular air passageway projecting through a barrier and into
    the ventilated space.

    (1)     Note.  The extended air duct may subsequently pass out of the room.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes many inlet ventilation means combined
    with furniture.


CLS 454/307
TXT Having air deflecting wall extending into room:
    Subject matter under subclass 284 wherein the air directing means comprises
    an air guiding panel or surface structure which projects into the
    ventilated space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215,    for a wall for upwardly deflecting inlet air which wall is sloped
    or can be readily sloped downward from the window.

    216+,   for a window ventilator including a wall for upwardly deflecting
    inlet air.

    221,    for a window having a panel comprising parallel or concentric air
    guiding slats which upwardly deflects inlet air.

    306,    for an inlet airway having an air duct extending into a room.


CLS 454/308
TXT Having vanes or elongated output slots extending radially:
    Subject matter  under subclass 284 wherein the air directing means
    comprises a plurality of slats, slat portions, or oblong airway openings
    which radiate away from a common center.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    274,    for wall-type thimbles with sliding valves, many of which have
    radially extending output slots.


CLS 454/309
TXT Louvered air distributor:
    Subject matter under subclass 284 wherein the air directing means includes
    a plurality of generally parallel or concentric slats, or slat portions
    spaced apart to form an air passageway therebetween.

    (1)     Note.  The dimension of the slats parallel to the direction of air
    flow past them must be larger than the overall thickness of the slat to be
    considered a louver slat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221,    for a window ventilator having an air passage between the sill and
    the bottom of the sash which includes louvers.

    224,    for other window ventilators including louvers.

    264,    for an inlet airway including structure for mixing plural air
    streams together which has a shaped nozzle and includes louvers.

    265+,   for other inlet airways including structure for mixing plural air
    streams together and which include louvers.

    277+,   for a wall-type inlet airway including a specific cover or shield
    for the exterior vent opening and includes louvers.

    288,    for a baseboard-type inlet airway which may include louvers.

    290,    for a floor-type inlet airway which may include louvers.

    299+,   for a ceiling-type inlet airway which may include louvers.

    325+,   for an inlet airway including a specific air distributor and
    additionally a louver which forms an adjustable valve.

    335+,   for an inlet airway without a specific air distributor which
    includes a louver which forms an adjustable valve.

    347+,   for an outlet airway including an air pump which may have air
    regulating louvers.

    358+,   for other outlet airways which may have air regulating louvers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), particularly subclasses 473
    for a louvered panel and 633 for location of related structures in other
    classes.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel,, subclasses 140+
    for louver devices in which the slats are flexible, or are interconnected
    to each other for relative movement, or may be accumulated (e.g.,venetian
    blinds).  See section III of the Class 160 class definition.


CLS 454/310
TXT Concentric:
    Subject matter under subclass 309 wherein the slats or slat portions of the
    air directing means are located parallel to and nest within one another.

    (1)     Note.  The concentric vanes need not be nested in the same general
    plane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300,    for concentric air distributing vanes cooperating with a claimed
    ceiling air distributor.


CLS 454/311
TXT Having separate, adjustable internal damper:
    Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein the air directing means includes,
    in addition to the slats or slat-like portions, a positively
    repositionable, air permitting or preventing inner body which is configured
    such that it remains completely within the confines of the air directing
    means in all of its positions.

    (1)     Note.  Opening or closing of a damper by air pressure alone is not
    considered to be positive repositioning thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    295,    for an inlet ceiling-type air distributor and light having an
    adjustable valve.

    312,    for an inlet airway with concentric air distributing vanes and an
    adjustable vane for directing the air.

    333+,   for an inlet airway having an adjustable valve.


CLS 454/312
TXT Having adjustable vane:
    Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein at least one of the slats or
    slat-like portions is positively repositionable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    311,    for a separate, adjustable internal damper in addition to the vanes.


CLS 454/313
TXT Moveable:
    Subject matter under subclass 309 wherein the slats or slat portions of the
    air directing means are nondeformably relocatable either (1) individually
    or (2) simultaneously or (3) as a unit along with supporting structure
    therefore.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333+,   for an inlet airway with an adjustable valve.


CLS 454/314
TXT Aligned multiple, movable sets of vanes:
    Subject matter under subclass 313 wherein at least two groups of
    relocatable slats or slat portions direct the air along the same general
    pathway.


CLS 454/315
TXT Serially arranged sets:
    Subject matter under subclass 314 wherein one of the groups of relocatable
    slats or slat portions is located completely behind the other group in the
    direction of airflow.


CLS 454/316
TXT Repositionable set:
    Subject matter under subclass 313 wherein the slats or slat portions are
    relocatable as a unit along with supporting structure therefore.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286,    for an air distributor having an airway joint with a ball or
    cylinder rotatable in a socket.


CLS 454/317
TXT Rotating disks:
    Subject matter under subclass 313 wherein the relocatable slats or slat
    portion are round planar members which revolve about an axis transverse to
    the planes of the members.


CLS 454/318
TXT Louver vanes form valve:
    Subject matter under subclass 313 wherein the relocatable slats or slat
    portions themselves form a means for regulating the quantity of airflow.


CLS 454/319
TXT Plural vanes pivoting about individual axes:
    Subject matter under subclass 313 wherein the relocatable slats or slat
    portions each rotate about separate axes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    318,    for an air distributor having plural louver vanes which themselves
    form a valve.


CLS 454/320
TXT Pivot at leading or trailing vane edge:
    Subject matter under subclass 319 wherein at least one of the separate axes
    is at the forward or rearward extreme of a slat or slat portion as viewed
    in the direction of airflow.


CLS 454/321
TXT In housing within room:
    Subject matter under subclass 309 wherein the slats or slat portions are
    part of an enclosure which is positioned substantially inside the
    ventilated space.

    (1)     Note.  A register located within a ceiling, floor, or wall which
    includes a portion which projects into the ventilated space is not included
    in this subclass.


CLS 454/322
TXT With adjustable valve:
    Subject matter under subclass 284 which includes, in addition to the air
    directing means, a positively repositionable means for regulating the
    airflow quantity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273+,   for an inlet airway including an independent vent sleeve in a
    ceiling, wall, or floor which contains an adjustable valve.

    307,    for an adjustable air distributing valve comprising an air
    deflecting wall extending into a ventilated space.

    318,    for an air distributor having movable louver vanes which form an
    adjustable valve.

    333+,   for an inlet airway adjustable valve not associated with a means
    for guiding inlet air immediately into the ventilated space.


CLS 454/323
TXT Axially movable:
    Subject matter under subclass 322 wherein the positively repositionable
    airflow regulating means relocates along a path parallel to a general
    direction of airflow immediately prior to its contact with the means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    274,    for an independent vent sleeve in a ceiling, wall, or floor which
    contains an axially movable valve.


CLS 454/324
TXT Sliding:
    Subject matter under subclass 322 wherein a portion of the positively
    repositionable airflow regulating means translates along another portion of
    the means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    274,    for an independent vent sleeve in a ceiling, wall, or floor which
    contains a sliding valve.


CLS 454/325
TXT Plural blades pivoting along parallel axes:
    Subject matter under subclass 322 wherein the airflow regulating means
    comprises at least two slats or panels rotating about axes extending
    parallel to one another.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter including plural blades pivoting along
    coincident axes is included in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes subject matter pertaining to a single
    pivoting blade structure wherein the blade is disclosed as being one of a
    plurality which pivot along parallel axes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221,    for a window ventilator having an air passage between the sill and
    the bottom of the sash which includes louvers.

    224,    for other window ventilators including louvers.

    264,    for an inlet airway including structure for mixing plural air
    streams together which has a shaped nozzle and includes louvers.

    265+,   for other inlet airways including structure for mixing plural air
    streams together and which include louvers.

    277+,   for a wall-type inlet airway including a specific cover or shield
    for the exterior vent opening and includes louvers.

    288,    for a baseboard-type inlet airway which may include louvers.

    290,    for a floor-type inlet airway which may include louvers.

    299+,   for a ceiling-type inlet airway which may include louvers.

    309+,   for a wall-type inlet airway which includes a louvered air
    distributor.

    335+,   for an inlet airway without a specific air distributor which
    includes a louver which forms an adjustable valve.

    347+,   for an outlet airway including an air pump which may have air
    regulating louvers.

    358+,   for other outlet airways which may have air regulating louvers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), particularly subclasses 473
    for a louvered panel and 633 for location of related structures in other
    classes.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 140+
    for louver devices in which the slats are flexible, or are interconnected
    to each other for relative movement, or may be accumulated (e.g.,venetian
    blinds).  See section III of the Class 160 class definition.


CLS 454/326
TXT Adjacent blades pivot in opposing directions:
    Subject matter under subclass 325 wherein the two slats or panels are
    positioned next to another and wherein the slats or panels rotate about
    their axes in opposite directions.


CLS 454/327
TXT Valve opens by pivoting in upstream direction:
    Subject matter under subclass 322 wherein the air regulating means
    comprises an element which opens by rotating about a fixed axis toward the
    source of the air being admitted to the ventilated space.

    (1)     Note.  This device is often referred to as an inward pivoted valve
    and usually is composed of a pivoting blade or panel.


CLS 454/328
TXT With Means for liquid contact:
    Subject matter under subclass 284 comprising means for directly exposing
    the air to water or another liquid.

    (1)     Note.  Dehumidifying means are not considered to be means for
    liquid contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for a railcar, bus, or trailer in which the inlet air is exposed to
    a liquid.

    157,    for other vehicles in which the inlet air is exposed to a liquid.

    223,    for a window ventilator having an air passage between the sill and
    the bottom of the sash in which the air is exposed to a liquid.

    291,    for a floor-type register in a building where the inlet air is
    exposed to a liquid.

    337,    for inlet airways for static structures, in general, (e.g.,
    buildings) where the inlet air is exposed to a liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 313 for air moistening attachments
    for stovepipes and subclass 508 for a fireplace with a room humidifier.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclass 5 for concentrating evaporators
    designed to evaporate a liquid in film or thin layer form.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 78+ for air moistening devices used in
    heating systems.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, for slow diffusers.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for air
    moistening devices, per se, and subclasses 127+ for heating and cooling
    devices combined with moisteners for the air. Devices including significant
    ventilating structure and excluding specific heating or cooling structure
    will be found in this Class 454.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 31+ for gas or vapor
    treatment of material contained within a cabinet structure.


CLS 454/329
TXT With air pump:
    Subject matter under subclass 284 wherein the air admitting means includes
    an air moving apparatus for forcing the air into the ventilated space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    269,    for an inlet airway having an air pump and structure for mixing
    plural airstreams together.

    272,    for an independent vent sleeve in a ceiling, wall, or floor which
    includes an air pump.


CLS 454/330
TXT Having register box, frame, or grating:
     Subject matter under subclass 284 comprising a casing, support, or
    grill-like exit structure for a means which releases or directs the air
    immediately into the ventilated space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270+,   for a sleeved vent in a ceiling, wall, or floor.


CLS 454/331
TXT Including specific grating or grating mounting structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 330 wherein particular significance is
    attributed to (1) a grill-like exit structure or (2) a means for attaching
    a grill-like exit structure directly to a support.


CLS 454/332
TXT Readily moveable grating:
    Subject matter under subclass 331 wherein the grill-like exit structure and
    accompanying support are easily repositioned relative to one another.

    (1)     Note.  A grill-like exit structure which requires a tool such as a
    screwdriver to reposition it relative to an accompanying support is not
    included in this subclass.


CLS 454/333
TXT With adjustable valve (e.g., damper, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 254 wherein the air directing means includes
    a positively repositionable means for regulating the airflow quantity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264,    for an inlet airway including structure for mixing plural air
    streams together which has a shaped nozzle and may include an adjustable
    valve.

    265+,   for other inlet airways which include structure for mixing plural
    air streams together and which may include an adjustable valve.

    273+,   for an inlet airway including an independent vent sleeve in a
    ceiling, wall, or floor which contains an adjustable valve.

    288,    for a baseboard-type air distributor which may include an
    adjustable valve.

    290,    for a floor mounted air distributor having an adjustable valve.

    297+,   for a ceiling-type air distributor including a perforated or porous
    element and an adjustable valve.

    303+,   for a ceiling-type air distributor including an elongated output
    slot and an adjustable valve.

    318,    for an air distributor having movable louver vanes which form an
    adjustable valve.

    307,    for an adjustable air distributing valve comprising an air
    deflecting wall extending into a ventilated space.

    311,    for an air distributor having concentric louvers and a separate,
    adjustable internal damper.

    312,    for an air distributor having adjustable, concentric, louver vanes.

    313+,   for a louvered air distributor having moveable louvers.

    322+,   for an adjustable valve associated with a means for distributing
    inlet air immediately into the ventilated space.


CLS 454/334
TXT Axially movable or sliding:
    Subject matter subclass 333 wherein the air regulating means (1) relocates
    along a path parallel to the direction of the air immediately prior to its
    contact with the means or (2) contains a portion which translates along
    another portion of the means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    274,    for an independent vent sleeve in a ceiling, wall, or floor which
    contains an adjustable, axially movable or sliding valve.

    323,    for an air distributor with an axially movable, adjustable valve.

    324,    for an air distributor with a sliding, adjustable valve.


CLS 454/335
TXT Plural blades pivoting along parallel axes:
    Subject matter under subclass 333 wherein the airflow regulating means
    comprises at least two slats or panels rotating about axes extending
    parallel to one another.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter including plural blades pivoting along
    coincident axes is included in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes subject matter pertaining to a single
    pivoting blade structure wherein the blade is disclosed as being one of a
    plurality which pivot along parallel axes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221,    for a window ventilator having an air passage between the sill and
    the bottom of the sash which includes louvers.

    224,    for other window ventilators including louvers.

    264,    for an inlet airway including structure for mixing plural air
    streams together which has a shaped nozzle and includes louvers.

    265+,   for other inlet airways including structure for mixing plural air
    streams together and which include louvers.

    277+,   for a wall-type inlet airway including a specific cover or shield
    for the exterior vent opening and includes louvers.

    288,    for a baseboard-type inlet airway which may include louvers.

    290,    for a floor-type inlet airway which may include louvers.

    299+,   for a ceiling-type inlet airway which may include louvers.

    309+,   for a wall-type inlet airway which includes a louvered air
    distributor.

    325+,   for an inlet airway including a specific air distributor and
    additionally a louver which forms an adjustable valve.

    347+,   for an outlet airway including an air pump which may have air
    regulating louvers.

    358+,   for other outlet airways which may have air regulating louvers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), particularly subclasses 473
    for a louvered panel and 633 for location of related structures in other
    classes.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 140+
    for louver devices in which the slats are flexible, or are interconnected
    to each other for relative movement, or may be accumulated (e.g.,venetian
    blinds).  See section III of the Class 160 class definition.


CLS 454/336
TXT Adjacent blades pivot in opposing directions:
    Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein the two slats or panels are
    positioned next to one another and wherein the slats or panels rotate about
    their axes in opposite directions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    326,    for an air distributor with an adjustable valve having adjacent
    blades pivoting along parallel axes.


CLS 454/337
TXT With means for liquid contact:
    Subject matter under subclass 254 comprising means for directly exposing
    the airflow to water or another liquid.

    (1)     Note.  Dehumidifying means are not considered to be means for
    liquid contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for a railcar, bus, or trailer in which the inlet air is exposed to
    a liquid.

    157,    for other vehicles in which the inlet air is exposed to a liquid.

    223,    for a window ventilator having an air passage between the sill and
    the bottom of the sash in which the air is exposed to a liquid.

    291,    for a floor-type register in a building where the inlet air is
    exposed to a liquid.

    328,    for other types of registers in a building where the inlet air is
    exposed to a liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 313 for air moistening attachments
    for stovepipes and subclass 508 for a fireplace with a room humidifier.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclass 5 for concentrating evaporators
    designed to evaporate a liquid in film or thin layer form.

    237,    Heating Systems, subclasses 78+ for air moistening devices used in
    heating systems.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, for slow diffusers.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for air
    moistening devices, per se, and subclasses 127+ for heating and cooling
    devices combined with moisteners for the air. Devices including significant
    ventilating structure and excluding specific heating or cooling structure
    will be found in this Class 454.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 31+ for gas or vapor
    treatment of material contained within a cabinet structure.


CLS 454/338
TXT With air pump:
    Subject matter under subclass 254 wherein the air admitting means includes
    an air moving apparatus for forcing the air into the ventilated space.

    (1)     Note.  See the Class 181, Acoustics, subclass 212, (1) Note, for
    the line between Class 181 and Class 98.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, particularly subclasses 212+ for a fluid-conducting-type
    sound muffler of a general nature and subclass 224 for a sound absorbing
    ventilating duct or curb.

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, appropriate subclasses for a
    blower, per se.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), appropriate subclasses
    for a fan, per se.

    417,    Pumps, appropriate subclasses for a motor driven blower, per se.


CLS 454/339
TXT HAVING OUTLET AIRWAY:
    Subject matter under the class definition having means for exhausting air
    from a (ventilated) space.

    (1)     Note.  The ventilated space often comprises but is not limited to a
    room in a building.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115+,   for a railcar, bus, or trailer having an outlet airway.

    162+,   for other types of vehicles having an outlet airway.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 209+ for outlet
    ventilators of that class.


CLS 454/340
TXT Pressure regulation:
    Apparatus under subclass 237 including means responsive to air conditions
    either in or outside of an enclosure or the air condition in the supply
    system for the enclosure to maintain a predetermined pressure in said
    enclosure and/or a difference in pressure between said enclosure and the
    outside atmosphere.

    (1)     Note.  Systems which maintain enclosures under air pressure, but
    having no air condition responsive automatic controls are in other
    appropriate subclasses of this class, e.g., those having differential air
    input and discharge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for pressure regulation with a vehicle and note the classes
    referred to under "SEARCH CLASS" for that subclass.

    238,    for pressure regulation of a structure which includes both inlet
    and outlet airways.

    255,    for pressure regulation of a structure which includes an inlet
    airway.


CLS 454/341
TXT With air pump:
    Subject matter under subclass 339 wherein the air exhausting means includes
    an air moving apparatus for withdrawing the air out of the building.

    (1)     Note.  See the Class 181, Acoustics, subclass 212, (1) Note, for
    the line between Class 181 and Class 98.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, particularly subclasses 212+ for a fluid-conducting-type
    sound muffler of a general nature and subclass 224 for a sound absorbing
    ventilating duct or curb.

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, appropriate subclasses for a
    blower, per se.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), appropriate subclasses
    for a fan, per se.

    417,    Pumps, appropriate subclasses for a motor driven blower, per se.


CLS 454/342
TXT And having specific emergency smoke handling structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 341 in which significance is attributed to a
    specific configuration for controlling or dealing with the gaseous emission
    from a sudden, unexpected fire of a serious nature.

    (1)     Note.  The specific emergency smoke handling structure must be
    positively claimed for proper original patent placement in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The claimed presence of a heat sensitive element, e.g., a
    fusible link, is considered adequate if it is disclosed for causing the
    ventilator to control or deal with any smoke caused by fire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for a chimney or stacktop with air current regulating means which
    is temperature responsive.

    257,    for a building inlet airway including an emergency smoke or fire
    responsive valve.

    357,    for other building outlet airways having means for controlling or
    dealing with smoke.

    369,    for fusible release controlled fire dampers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 287.5 for fusible release dampers for
    stoves or furnaces.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, particularly subclasses 42 and 56+ for fire
    extinguishing apparatus responsive to smoke or fire.


CLS 454/343
TXT Having specific air pump actuator:
    Subject matter under subclass 341 in which significance is attributed to a
    specific activator for causing the air moving apparatus to operate or stop
    operating.

    (1)     Note.  Details of the specific activator must be positively claimed
    for proper original patent placement in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    236,    Automatic Temperature and Humidity Regulation, particularly
    subclass 49.1 for automatic temperature and humidity regulation of a
    ventilator.


CLS 454/344
TXT Pump induces draft in exit duct:
    Subject matter under subclass 341 wherein the air moving apparatus forces a
    directed stream of air out of an air withdrawal tube and the exhausting
    means to create an area of lower air pressure in the tube and thus cause
    air in the ventilated space to be withdrawn along with the directed stream
    of air.

    (1)     Note.  The air in the space is withdrawn by the draft caused by the
    air pump and its directed stream of air--not through, or by, the air pump
    alone.


CLS 454/345
TXT Having plural suction intakes:
    Subject matter under subclass 341 in which the air is withdrawn from
    multiple spaced apart locations within the ventilated space.

    (1)     Note.  The plural suction intakes must be positively claimed for
    proper original patent placement in this subclass.


CLS 454/346
TXT Having vibration absorbing or preventing structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 341 including structure which either (1)
    takes in without passing on, or (2) prohibits at least part of any rapid,
    unwanted shaking of the air exhausting means or a support therefore.

    (1)     Note.  See the Class 181, Acoustics, subclass 212, (1) Note, for
    the line between Class 181 and Class 454.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206,    for a window mounted air pump including specific noise inhibiting
    structure.

    262,    for an inlet airway, including structure for mixing plural
    airstreams together, which has specific noise inhibiting structure.

    906,    for a cross-reference art collection of ventilating structure
    combined with noise inhibiting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, appropriate subclasses. Note particularly subclasses
    212+ for a fluid-conducting-type sound muffler of a general nature and
    subclass 224 for a sound absorbing ventilating duct.


CLS 454/347
TXT Having readily movable air regulating louver, damper, or cover:Subject
    matter under subclass 341 including an easily shiftable air permitting or
    preventing (1) group of parallel or concentric slats, (2) internal body, or
    (3) orifice cap or closure.

    (1)     Note.  A louver, damper, or cover held in a single fixed position
    by a separate,

            movable, screw, bolt, or other permanent type, tool actuated
    fastener is not considered "readily movable".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4+,     for a cap closure for a chimney or stacktop.

    94,     for a railcar, bus, or trailer having an exterior cap closure for a
    vent.

    221,    for a window ventilator having an air passage between the sill and
    the bottom of the sash which includes louvers.

    224,    for other window ventilators including louvers.

    264,    for an inlet airway including structure for mixing plural air
    streams together which has a shaped nozzle and includes louvers.

    265+,   for other inlet airways including structure for mixing plural air
    streams together and which include louvers.

    275,    for an inlet airway having a specific cover or shield for an
    exterior vent opening.

    277+,   for a wall-type inlet airway including a specific cover or shield
    for the exterior vent opening and includes louvers.

    288,    for a baseboard-type inlet airway which may include louvers.

    290,    for a floor-type inlet airway which may include louvers.

    299+,   for a ceiling type inlet airway which may include louvers.

    309+,   for a wall-type inlet airway which includes a louvered air
    distributor.

    325+,   for an inlet airway including a specific air distributor and
    additionally a louver which forms an adjustable valve.

    335+,   for an inlet airway without a specific air distributor which
    includes a louver which forms an adjustable valve.

    355,    for an outlet airway having an air pump and including a moveable
    access cover.

    356,    for an outlet airway having an air pump and including an exterior
    neck with an enlarged, weather resistant cover.

    358+,   for other outlet airways having a readily movable louver, damper,
    or cover.

    367+,   for other outlet airways having a specific cover or shield for an
    exterior vent opening.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), particularly subclasses 473
    for a louvered panel and 633 for location of related structures in other
    classes.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 285+ for miscellaneous dampers not
    otherwise classifiable.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 140+
    for louver devices in which the slats are flexible, or are interconnected
    to each other for relative movement, or may be accumulated (e.g.,venetian
    blinds).  See section III of the Class 160 class definition.


CLS 454/348
TXT Continuously horizontal damper panel:
    Subject matter under subclass 347 comprising an easily shiftable, air
    permitting or preventing inner body having an air engaging and controlling
    plate which is always maintained in a position parallel to the horizon
    while motion is being imparted to it and while it is being used.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     for chimneytop or stacktop structure having a continuously
    horizontal damper panel which is readily movable to regulate an air current.


CLS 454/349
TXT Ceiling mounted air pump:
    Subject matter under subclass 347 wherein the air exhausting means is
    supported by and withdraws air through an interior, top structural barrier
    of the ventilated space.


CLS 454/350
TXT Wall mounted air pump:
    Subject matter under subclass 347 wherein the air exhausting means is
    supported by and withdraws air through an interior, side structural barrier
    of the ventilated space.


CLS 454/351
TXT Plural damper panels:
    Subject matter under subclass 350 comprising an easily shiftable air
    permitting or preventing inner body having two or more air engaging and
    controlling plates.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for plural pivoted chimney or stacktop closures.

    31,     for plural pivoted air current regulating means in a chimney or
    stacktop structure.

    352,    for plural damper panels in an outlet airway.


CLS 454/352
TXT Plural damper panels:
    Subject matter under subclass 347 comprising an easily shiftable air
    permitting or preventing inner body having two or more air engaging and
    controlling plates.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for plural pivoted chimney or stacktop closures.

    31,     for plural pivoted air current regulating means in a chimney or
    stacktop structure.

    351,    for plural damper panels in a wall mounted outlet airway.


CLS 454/353
TXT Including backdraft preventer:
    Subject matter under subclass 347 having a means which senses pressure or
    direction of air flow to or from a ventilated space and which acts to allow
    airflow under certain sensed conditions and to obstruct airflow under other
    sensed conditions.

    (1)     Note.  The means usually permits flow in one direction along a
    conduit while blocking flow in an opposite direction.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass commonly includes valves which open when an
    air pump is turned on and close when the air pump is turned off.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3+,     for a backdraft preventer incorporated in chimneytop or stacktop
    structure, particularly subclass 26.

    70+,    for condition responsive pressure maintenance inside a vehicle
    which may include a valve.

    194,    for a blast or shock wave type of backdraft preventer.

    227,    for a backdraft preventer combined with a window.

    238,    for pressure regulation of a ventilation system which includes both
    inlet and outlet airways.

    255,    for pressure regulation of a ventilation system which includes an
    inlet airway.

    259,    for a backdraft preventer and an inlet airway.

    340,    for pressure regulation of a ventilation system which includes an
    outlet airway.

    359+,   for a backdraft preventer for an outlet airway.


CLS 454/354
TXT Ceiling or wall mounted:
    Subject matter under subclass 341 wherein the air exhausting means is
    supported by and withdraws the air through either an interior top or a side
    structural barrier of the ventilated space.

    (1)     Note.  Ceiling or wall mounted ventilators which are, in addition,
    mounted to the roof, floor, or other structural barrier of the ventilated
    space are included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195,    for means combined with a door for ventilating a room.

    200+,   for a ventilator with an air pump combined with a window.

    349,    for an outlet airway having a readily movable air regulating
    louver, damper, or cover combined with a ceiling mounted fan.

    350+,   for an outlet airway having a readily movable air regulating
    louver, damper, or cover combined with a wall mounted fan.


CLS 454/355
TXT With movable access cover:
    Subject matter under subclass 341 having a readily shiftable orifice cap or
    closure portion which provides admittance by a human being to the air
    exhausting means.

    (1)     Note.  The movable cover may also be used to affect the flow of air
    in some instances.

    (2)     Note.  The specific means for permitting movement of the cover must
    be claimed for proper original patent placement in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4+,     for a cap closure for a chimney or stacktop.

    94,     for a railcar, bus, or trailer having an exterior cap closure for a
    vent.

    275,    for an inlet airway having a specific cover or shield for an
    exterior vent opening.

    347+,   for an outlet airway having an air pump and which may include a
    readily moveable cover.

    356,    for an outlet airway having an air pump and including an exterior
    neck with an enlarged, weather resistant cover.

    358+,   for other outlet airways which may include a readily moveable cover.

    367+,   for other outlet airways with a specific cover or shield for an
    exterior vent opening.


CLS 454/356
TXT Having exterior neck with enlarged, weather resistant cover:Subject matter
    under subclass 341 wherein the air exhausting means includes an outdoor
    portion with an upstanding air passage stem connected to an end cap or
    shelter which (1) has a larger dimension than the stem in a direction
    transverse to the direction of airflow through an exterior structural
    barrier, i.e., a wall or roof of the ventilated space and (2) assists in
    diminishing the deleterious effects of weather conditions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

     4+,    for a cap closure for a chimney or stacktop.

    94,     for a railcar, bus, or trailer having an exterior cap closure for a
    vent.

    275,    for an inlet airway having a specific cover or shield for an
    exterior vent opening.

    347+,   for an outlet airway having an air pump and which may include a
    readily moveable cover.

    355,    for an outlet airway having an air pump and including a moveable
    access cover.

    358+,   for other outlet airways which may include a readily moveable cover.

    367+,   for other outlet airways having a specific cover or shield for an
    exterior vent opening, particularly subclass 368 for other outlet airways
    having an exterior neck with an enlarged, weather resistant cover.


CLS 454/357
TXT Having emergency smoke handling feature:
    Subject matter under subclass 339 wherein the air exhausting means includes
    means for controlling or dealing with the gaseous emission from a sudden,
    unexpected fire of a serious nature.

    (1)     Note.  The claimed presence of a heat sensitive element, e.g., a
    fusible link considered adequate if it is disclosed for causing the
    ventilator to control or deal with any smoke caused by the fire.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for a chimney or stacktop with air current regulating means which
    is temperature responsive.

    257,    for a building inlet airway including an emergency smoke or fire
    responsive valve.

    342,    for a building outlet airway including an air pump and having means
    for controlling or dealing with smoke.

    369,    for fusible release controlled fire dampers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 287.5 for fusible release dampers for
    stoves or furnaces.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, particularly subclasses 42 and 56+ for fire
    extinguishing apparatus responsive to smoke or fire.


CLS 454/358
TXT Having readily movable air regulating louver, damper, or cover:Subject
    matter under subclass 339 wherein the air exhausting means includes an
    easily shiftable air permitting or preventing (1) group of parallel or
    concentric slats, (2) internal body, or (3) orifice cap or closure.

    (1)     Note.  A louver, damper, or cover held in a single fixed position
    by a separate, movable, screw, bolt, or other permanent type, tool actuated
    fastener is not considered "readily movable".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4+,     for a cap closure for a chimney or stacktop.

    94,     for a railcar, bus, or trailer having an exterior cap closure for a
    vent.

    221,    for a window ventilator having an air passage between the sill and
    the bottom of the sash which includes louvers.

    224,    for other window ventilators including louvers.

    264,    for an inlet airway including structure for mixing plural air
    streams together which has a shaped nozzle and includes louvers.

    265+,   for other inlet airways including structure for mixing plural air
    streams together and which include louvers.

    275,    for an inlet airway having a specific cover or shield for an
    exterior vent opening.

    277+,   for a wall-type inlet airway including a specific cover or shield
    for the exterior vent opening and includes louvers.

    288,    for a baseboard-type inlet airway which may include louvers.

    290,    for a floor-type inlet airway which may include louvers.

    299+,   for a ceiling-type inlet airway which may include louvers.

    309+,   for a wall-type inlet airway which includes a louvered air
    distributor.

    325+,   for an inlet airway including a specific air distributor, and
    additionally, a louver which forms an adjustable valve.

    335+,   for an inlet airway without a specific air distributor which
    includes a louver which forms an adjustable valve.

    347+,   for an outlet airway having an air pump and a readily movable
    louver, damper, or cover.

    355,    for an outlet airway having an air pump and including a moveable
    access cover.

    356,    for an outlet airway having an air pump and including an exterior
    neck with an enlarged weather resistant cover.

    367+,   for other outlet airways with a specific cover or shield for an
    exterior vent opening.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), particularly subclasses 473
    for a louvered panel and 633 for location of related structures in other
    classes.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 285+ for miscellaneous dampers not
    otherwise classifiable.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 140+
    for louver devices in which the slats are flexible, or are interconnected
    to each other for relative movement, or may be accumulated (e.g.,venetian
    blinds).  See section III of the Class 160 class definition.


CLS 454/359
TXT Including backdraft preventer:
    Subject matter under subclass 358 including a means which senses pressure
    or direction of airflow to or from a ventilated space and which acts to
    allow airflow under certain sensed conditions and to obstruct airflow under
    other sensed conditions.

    (1)     Note.  The means usually permits flow in one direction along a
    conduit while blocking flow in an opposite direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3+,     for a backdraft preventer incorporated in chimneytop or stacktop
    structure, particularly subclass 26.

    70+,    for condition responsive pressure maintenance inside a vehicle
    which may include a valve.

    194,    for a blast or shock wave type of backdraft preventer.

    227,    for a backdraft preventer combined with a window.

    238,    for pressure regulation of a ventilation system which includes both
    inlet and outlet airways.

    255,    for pressure regulation of a ventilation system which includes an
    inlet airway.

    259,    for a backdraft preventer and an inlet airway.

    340,    for pressure regulation of a ventilation system which includes an
    outlet airway.

    353,    for a backdraft preventer and fan for an outlet airway.


CLS 454/360
TXT Including counter balancing means:
    Subject matter under subclass 359 including a means which mechanically
    biases the backdraft preventer toward a particular position.

    (1)     Note.  The backdraft preventer is usually biased to an open or
    closed position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359,    for a backdraft preventer biased to a particular position by a
    naturally occurring force such as gravity.


CLS 454/361
TXT Internal damper:
    Subject matter under subclass 358 wherein the air exhausting means includes
    an easily shiftable air permitting or preventing inner body which is
    configured such that it remains completely within the confines of the air
    exhausting means in all of its shifted positions.


CLS 454/362
TXT Continuously horizontal damper panel:
    Subject matter under subclass 361 wherein the air permitting or preventing
    inner body is an air engaging and controlling plate which is always
    maintained in a position parallel to the horizon while motion is being
    imparted to it and while it is being used.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29,     for chimneytop or stacktop structure having a continuously
    horizontal damper panel which is readily movable to regulate an air current.

    348,    for an outlet airway having an air pump and a continuously
    horizontal damper panel.


CLS 454/363
TXT Pivoted damper panel:
    Subject matter under subclass 361 wherein the air permitting or preventing
    inner body is an air engaging and controlling plate which may be swung
    about a fixed axis region which is parallel to or within the plane of the
    plate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for pivoted chimney or stacktop cap closures.

    30,     for a pivoted outlet air current regulator used in a chimney or
    stacktop.

    325+,   for pivoted blades used as an internal damper in an inlet airway
    having a specific air distributor.

    327,    for an internal valve which pivots in an upstream direction
    included in an inlet airway having a specific air distributor.

    335+,   for other pivoted damper panels used in an inlet airway


CLS 454/364
TXT Along roof ridge:
    Subject matter under subclass 358 wherein the air exhausting means is
    formed (1) longitudinally of and (2) for cooperating with or aid in making
    up a roof crest of two converging, slanted, exterior top structural
    barriers, i.e., roof surfaces of the ventilated space.

    (1)     Note.  Roof ridge ventilators which do not have their longest
    horizontal dimension along the roof ridge are not considered proper for
    this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    341+,   for an outlet airway which may be along a roof ridge and includes
    an air pump to move the air.

    365,    for a roof ridge ventilator not having a readily movable air
    regulating louver, damper, or cover.


CLS 454/365
TXT Along roof ridge:
    Subject matter under subclass 339 wherein the air exhausting means is
    formed (1) longitudinally of and (2) for cooperating with or aid in making
    up a roof crest of two converging, slanted, exterior top structural
    barriers, i.e., roof surfaces of the ventilated space.

    (1)     Note.  Roof ridge ventilators which do not have their longest
    horizontal dimension along the roof ridge are not considered  proper for
    this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    341+,   for an outlet airway which may be along a roof ridge and includes
    an air pump to move the air.

    364,    for a roof ridge ventilator having a readily movable air regulating
    louver, damper, or cover.


CLS 454/366
TXT Slant roof ventilator:
    Subject matter under subclass 339 wherein the air exhausting means is
    specifically adapted to cooperate with a single, sloped surface of an
    exterior top structural barrier, i.e., a roof of the ventilated space.

    (1)     Note.  A roof ventilator which is disclosed as being capable of
    being mounted on a sloped roof but absent any specific claimed feature for
    cooperating with a sloped roof, e.g., a sloped cap or wall, is not
    considered proper for original patent placement in this subclass.


CLS 454/367
TXT Having specific cover or shield for exterior vent opening:
    Subject matter under subclass 4560 wherein particular significance is
    attributed to a means positioned over an outdoor aperture of an air passage
    leading to the ventilated space so as to protect the air passage.

    (1)     Note.  The means usually acts to protect the passage from rain or
    outside debris.

    (2)     Note.  A cover or shield not inherent to the structure of the
    ventilating means (e.g., a building roof overhang) is not included under
    this definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4+,     for a cap closure for a chimney or stacktop.

    94,     for a railcar, bus, or trailer having an exterior cap closure for a
    vent.

    275,    for an inlet airway having a specific cover or shield for an
    exterior vent opening.

    347+,   for an outlet airway having an air pump and which may include a
    readily moveable cover.

    355,    for an outlet airway having an air pump and including a moveable
    access cover.

    356,    for an outlet airway having an air pump and including an exterior
    neck with an enlarged, weather resistant cover.

    358+,   for other outlet airways which may include a readily moveable cover.


CLS 454/368
TXT Exterior neck with enlarged, weather resistant cover:
    Subject matter under subclass 367 wherein the air exhausting means includes
    an outdoor portion with an upstanding air passage stem connected to an end
    cap or shelter which (1) has a larger dimension than the stem in a
    direction transverse to the direction of airflow through an exterior
    structural barrier, i.e., a wall or roof of the ventilated space and (2)
    assists in diminishing the deleterious effects of weather conditions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    356,    for an outlet airway having an exterior neck with an enlarged,
    weather resistant cover and an air pump.


CLS 454/369
TXT FIRE DAMPERS:
    Subject matter under the class definition including valve means which act
    to shut off flow in a ventilating system in the event of a dramatic rise in
    temperature indicative of a fire.

    (1)     Note.  These dampers are usually activated by fusible links, a
    portion of which melts due to the elevated temperatures incurred in a fire.

    (2)     Note.  Many building codes require the use of fire dampers to
    prevent the spread of the fire through the ventilating system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for a chimney or stacktop with air current regulating means which
    is temperature responsive.

    257,    for a building inlet airway including an emergency smoke or fire
    responsive valve.

    342,    for a building outlet airway including an air pump and having means
    for controlling or dealing with smoke.

    357,    for other building outlet airways having means for controlling or
    dealing with smoke.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 287.5 for fusible release dampers for
    stoves or furnaces.

    169,    Fire Extinguishers, particularly subclasses 42 and 56+ for fire
    extinguishing apparatus responsive to smoke or fire.


CLS 454/370
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:
    Subject matter under the class definition not provided for in the above
    subclasses.

             CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 454/900
TXT VENTILATOR USING SOLAR POWER:
    Subject matter under the class definition comprising means using energy
    from the sun in its operation.


CLS 454/901
TXT FOG DISPELLER:
    Subject matter under the class definition comprising means for eliminating
    or dispersing cloud-like, condensed water vapor which is positioned close
    to a ground surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 2.1 for
    processes of weather control and subclass 14.1 for apparatus used in
    weather control.


CLS 454/902
TXT AIR RAID SHELTER VENTILATION:
    Subject matter under the class definition comprising means to ventilate a
    space which is intended to protect its occupants from an attack by hostile
    military aircraft or missiles.


CLS 454/903
TXT FLEXIBLE DUCTS USED FOR CARRYING AIR:
    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a conduit for guiding
    air to or from a ventilated space which is constructed to undergo bending,
    twisting, or turning without breakage.


CLS 454/904
TXT MAGNETIC MEANS TO HOLD A DAMPER CLOSED:
    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a means for permitting
    or preventing airflow and further comprising means using magnetic force to
    maintain in position the airflow permitting or preventing means so as to
    prevent airflow.


CLS 454/905
TXT BLACK OUT MEANS:
    Subject matter under the class definition comprising means for passing air
    therethrough to or from a ventilated space while blocking the passage of
    light.


CLS 454/906
TXT NOISE INHIBITING MEANS:
    Subject matter under the class definition comprising means which prevents
    or deadens unwanted sound.

    (1)     Note.  See the Class 181, Acoustics, subclass 212, (1) Note, for
    the line between Class 181 and Class 454.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206,    for a window mounted air pump including specific noise inhibiting
    structure.

    262,    for an inlet airway, including structure for mixing plural
    airstreams together, which has specific noise inhibiting structure.

    346,    for an outlet airway having vibration absorbing or preventing
    structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, appropriate subclasses. Note particularly subclasses
    212+ for a fluid-conducting-type sound muffler of a general nature and
    subclass 224 for a sound absorbing ventilating duct.


CLS 454/907
TXT SEAT:
    Subject matter under the class definition combined with a means for
    supporting a person in a sitting position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for seat structure for ventilating a space in a vehicle.


CLS 454/908
TXT HAVING ROTARY RETARDER:
    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a means in the path of
    air flowing to or from a ventilated space which is made to revolve about an
    axis by the airflow.

    (1)     Note.  The means must revolve at least 360 degrees to be included
    in this art collection.


CLS 454/909
TXT RADON PREVENTION:
    Subject matter under the class definition comprising means for evacuating
    or preventing radon from collecting in a ventilated space.

    (1)     Note.  The ventilated space usually is positioned at least
    partially below ground level.


CLS 455/
TTL TELECOMMUNICATIONS

CLS 455/
TXT
    I.      GLOSSARY

    TELECOMMUNICATIONS

    All types of communications systems in which electric or electromagnetic
    signals are used to transmit modulated carrier wave information between
    points.  The transmission media is via radio wave generally of a frequency
    above human speech, yet at a frequency lower than infrared frequencies.

    Radiotelephonic communication via wireless link is included in this class.

    MODULATED CARRIER WAVE

    A wave resulting when the necessary characteristics of an intelligence or
    information signal are impressed on a carrier wave.

    RADIOTELEPHONE SYSTEM

    A system for establishing a voice communication link between a base and a
    mobile transceiver via a wireless carrier wave channel that is allocated
    for use during a communication link, and wherein the mobile transceiver has
    a specific assigned call address number.

    II.     GENERAL STATEMENT OF THE CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    A.      This is the generic class for modulated carrier wave communications
    not elsewhere classifiable.  Some art areas which are excluded from this
    class are:

    Alternating or pulsating current telegraphy; Class 178, subclasses 66.1+.

    Antennas; Class 343, subclasses 700+.

    Broadcast or multiplex stereo; Class 381+, subclasses 1+.

    Condition responsive indicating systems with a radio coupling link; Class
    340, subclass 539.

    Directive carrier wave systems; Class 342, subclasses 350+.

    Modulated carrier wave communications having significant error detection or
    correction; Class 371.

    Multiplex carrier wave communications; Class 370.

    Paging via modulated carrier wave; Class 340, subclasses 311.1 and 825.44+.

    Pulse or digital communications which may be modulated onto a carrier wave;
    Class 375.

    Reflected carrier wave systems (e.g., radar); Class 343, subclasses 5+.

    Selective (e.g., remote control); Class 340, subclasses 825+, especially
    subclasses 825.69.

    Telemarketing; Class 340, subclasses 870.01+.

    Television; Class 348. Facsimile; Class 358.

    B.      The combination of the subject matter of this class (455) and other
    are environment is generally classified with the other art environment
    where that environment is significant by virtue of the claimed
    relationship.  For example:

    Directive systems, Class 343, subclasses 100+.

    Geophysical systems; Class 367.

    Radar systems; Class 343, subclasses 5+.

    Radio remote control systems; Class 340, subclasses 825+.

    Telegraph systems; Class 178.

    Telemetering systems; Class 340, subclasses 870.01+.

    Television systems; Class 348. Facsimile systems; Class 358.

    C.      Subcombinations specific to a modulated carrier wave communication
    system are classified herein unless classified elsewhere.  For example:

    Demodulation and detector, per se, are classified in Class 330.

    Oscillators, per se, are classified in Class 331.

    Modulators, per se, are classified in Class 332.

    Tuners, per se, are classified in Class 334.

    (1)     Note.  The classification lines between this class (455) and the
    related subcombinations classes are found in the class definitions of the
    above subcombination classes.

    D.      Organization of this class:

    Subclasses 1-355 of this class (455) are limited to radio wave
    communication systems in which the carrier wave is modulated by a
    continuous (analog) signals.  These subclasses exclude:

    Remote control of an external device which is classified in Class 340,
    subclasses 825+.

    Multiplexing of signals which represent intelligence; see Class 370.

    Pulse or digital signals which represent intelligence; see class (359),
    subclasses 109+; and Class 375.

    (1)     Note.  The above subclasses may include pulse signals which are
    used to control a transmitter or receiver; however, where the information
    content is represented by a pulse or digital signal, classification is in
    Class 375.  Subclass 620 is miscellaneous analog or pulse modulation
    carrier wave communication not elsewhere classified, for example, modulated
    protons, muons, or neutrino particles utilized for communication of
    information.


    III.    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, for geometrical type measuring instruments
    that may employ carrier wave telemetering links.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, which class may include carrier wave
    telemetric links.

    178,    Telegraphy, provides in subclasses 2+ for various telegraph systems
    comprising means for transmitting mark and space or coded telegraph
    messages between stations and including a plurality of telegraph
    instruments, such as transmitting and receiving instruments in circuit, and
    indented subclass 49 for superimposed current systems.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, appropriate subclasses for carrier
    wave railway signalling systems, particularly subclasses 2+ for train
    dispatching systems; indented subclasses 7+ providing for telegraphy or
    telephony; subclasses 20+ for block-signal systems; and subclasses 167+ for
    cab signal or train control systems.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses for integrated circuit structure, bipolar, and field
    effect transistors (or combinations thereof), light emitting injection
    diodes, and other light emitting devices, etc.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, appropriate subclasses for signalling
    systems in general that may employ carrier wave apparatus, particularly
    subclasses 825+ for means for controlling the operations of a signalling
    device or devices in a selective manner over a lesser number of
    communication lines than the number of different results which can be
    obtained by signalling over said lines and which may contain transmission
    and receiving means in circuit; subclasses 870.01+ for telemetering systems
    in which the received signal is at any instant proportional to a condition
    at the transmitter; and subclass 539 for alarm signals operated via a radio
    link.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 5+ for radar; and
    subclasses 100+ for directive radio wave systems.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    109+ for optical communication.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave System and Devices, for
    signalling by means of mechanical or compressional waves, such as sound or
    supersonic waves.  See subclasses 87+ for echo systems; and subclasses 131+
    for underwater systems.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, for multiplex communication systems which
    may include modulated carrier wave systems.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, for
    generic error checking devices.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, is the generic class for pulses
    modulated onto a nonlight wave carrier; see subclasses 222+, 259+, 301,
    303, 321, 322+, and 338+.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, for a two-way electrical transmission of
    intelligible audio information over an electrical conductor.

    380,    Cryptography, for cryptographic telecommunication techniques and
    equipment.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 200.3+ for
    data transferring among a plurality of spatially distributed computers or
    digital data processing systems.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclass 8 for remote monitoring of an
    electrophotographic device.

    463,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 1+, especially subclasses 39
    and 40+, for a nonprojectile game with telecommunication means.

    505,    Superconductor Technology: Apparatus, Material, Process, subclasses
    150+ for high temperature (Tc  30 K) superconducting devices, particularly
    subclasses 202+ for electrical communication systems.


CLS 455/1
TXT INTERFERENCE SIGNAL TRANSMISSION (E.G., JAMMING):

    Subject matter under the class definition including means to transmit an
    interference signal to interfere with a selected signal so as to prevent
    the intelligible reception of the selected signal.

    (1)     Note.  The combination of an interference transmitter with a
    receiver to select the frequency of the incoming signal it is desired to
    jam or block, and control means to tune the transmitter to said frequency,
    is classified in this subclass when the receiver serves solely to determine
    the frequency of the incoming signal and to control the transmitter.  If
    the receiver portion of the combination is complete (reproduces the
    intelligence received) the combination is a transceiver and is classified
    in this class (455), subclasses 73+.

    (2)     Note.  Antijamming devices or methods are not classified here, but
    are found in subclasses 296+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 18 for jamming or
    radar transmissions.

    380,    Cryptography, subclasses 6+ for concealment of information by
    masking of an information bearing signal.


CLS 455/2
TXT AUDIENCE SURVEY OR PROGRAM DISTRIBUTION USE ACCOUNTING:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means for indicating,
    metering, or recording the number of receivers using a program, the length
    of time that a program is being used, or which of several programs is being
    used.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is provided for generic devices of this type.
    Use survey and accounting systems which are designed for a specific type of
    signal such as television (Class 348) are not classified here but in the
    class appropriate thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.1+,   for program distribution systems.

    26,     for systems to prevent unauthorized use of a signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 1+ for use survey and accounting systems
    specific to television and subclasses 13+ for interactive television which
    may include an audience survey.

    380,    Cryptography, appropriate subclasses for a cryptographic system to
    prevent unauthorized use of a signal.


CLS 455/3.1
TXT DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM (E.G., PLURAL CABLES, ETC.):
    Subject matter under the class definition including an organized
    arrangement of transmission links, of either cable or radiant energy type,
    for connecting a plurality of discrete subscribers to a source of
    information signals.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and its indents are intended to collect
    devices, such as community antennas, national networks, and hotel cable
    systems.

    (2)     Note.  Distribution systems which are designed for a specific type
    of signal such as television (Class 348) and digital (Class 375) are not
    classified here, but rather in the appropriate class thereto.

    (3)     Note.  Police, fire, and other radiotelephone systems which may
    include some elements of a distribution system are classified in subclasses
    500+, plural transmitters or receivers at separated stations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132,    for plural receivers.

    149,    for a plural output receiver.

    272,    for plural separate wave collectors combined with a receiver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 11+
    and 43+ for like systems without limitation of radiant energy path or
    analog carrier wave.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 39+ for
    like systems with discharge devices.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 365+ for miscellaneous gating systems.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 1+ for plural
    channel systems.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825+ for selective systems
    with distribution characteristics.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas,  subclasses 850+ for antenna,
    per se, with coupling network.

    348,    Television, subclasses 6+ for wired broadcasting and distribution.


CLS 455/3.2
TXT Receiver for satellite broadcast:
    Subject matter under subclass 3.1 including a dish antenna for receiving
    satellite transmissions.


CLS 455/3.3
TXT Combined with power distribution network:
    Subject matter under subclass 3.1 wherein a carrier wave signal is
    transmitted over an electric power distribution line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 310.01+ for generic systems
    combined with signalling over power line.


CLS 455/4.1
TXT Remote control of distribution:
    Subject matter under subclass 3.1 wherein some functions of a modulated
    carrier wave source or receiver are supervised or controlled from a remote
    site.

    (1)     Note.  Because of a search note in subclass 5.1, only disclosures
    of more than mere control in the second directions should be
    cross-referenced thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for repeater system with failure compensation.

    26.1,   for unauthorized use prevention systems.

    31.1+,  for systems with additional selectively responsive means.

    68+,    for control of communication system.

    88,     for transceiver controlling a separate transceiver or receiver.

    92,     for remote control of a transmitter.

    132,    for plural receivers of which one controls another.

    352+,   for remote control of a receiver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.69 and 825.72 for
    remote control over a radio link.

    380,    Cryptography, appropriate subclasses for a cryptographic system to
    prevent unauthorized use of a signal.


CLS 455/4.2
TXT With subscriber selection or switching:
    Subject matter under subclass 4.1 including means for selectively
    connecting a subscriber line to a distribution system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825+ for generic selective
    systems.


CLS 455/5.1
TXT Two-way:
    Subject matter under subclass 3.1 including means for establishing
    communication in both directions.

    (1)     Note.  Wherein the second communication is the notation or
    reporting of the program watched or listened to, classification is in
    subclass 2, audience survey and use accounting.

    (2)     Note.  Wherein any communication in a system is in pulse form, such
    system is classified in Class 375.

    (3)     Note.  Wherein any communication in a system is in the form of
    light waves, such system is classified in Class 359, subclasses 109+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 310.01+ for carrier current
    or other combined systems without the limitations of this class.


CLS 455/6.1
TXT Common antenna or cable:
    Subject matter under subclass 3.1 wherein a plurality of receiver sites are
    connected to a single source of  signals, such as an antenna or cable.

    (1)     Note.  A plurality of antennas may be coupled to a common point or
    cable.


CLS 455/6.2
TXT With specific cable converter:
    Subject matter under subclass 6.1 having specific means to translate a
    source frequency from an antenna or cable to a different frequency operated
    by a specific receiver.


CLS 455/6.3
TXT Combined with diverse art device (e.g., audio/sound or entertainment
    system):Subject matter under subclass 3.1 wherein the distribution system
    is combined with another art device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 825.24 for selective program
    control of audio system and subclass 825.25 for selective of audio system
    by pulse signal.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    2+ for stereo broadcasting and subclasses 77+ for One Way Audio Signal
    Program Distribution.


CLS 455/7
TXT CARRIER WAVE REPEATER OR REPLAY SYSTEM (I.E., RETRANSMISSION OF SAME
    INFORMATION):

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising means whereby a
    radiant energy signal wave is received and reradiated at the same or
    different carrier frequency and usually at a higher energy level and/or in
    a desired direction.

    (1)     Note.  Where the transmitted signal has a different characteristic
    than the received signal or involves the addition or subtraction of
    information classification is not in this subclass, but in Class 343 (see
    notes under subclass 6.5 in the class definition of Class 343).  However,
    if the transmitted signal is on a different carrier frequency from the
    received signal merely to avoid interference classification is in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 70+ for repeaters specific to telegraphy.

    330,    Amplifiers, for amplifiers systems in general, particularly
    subclass 10 for modulator-demodulator type amplifiers for amplifying direct
    current or slowly varying alternating current signals.

    332,    Modulators, particularly subclasses 183+ for modulation converters
    for converting one modulated wave to a differently modulated wave (e.g.,
    pulse modulation to frequency modulation or frequency modulation to
    amplitude modulation); subclass 108 for plural stage modulation systems
    wherein each stage is of the same or diverse type of modulation, the last
    stage being of the pulse modulation type; subclasses 119+ or 145, for
    plural stage modulation systems wherein the last stage is of the phase or
    frequency modulation type; and subclasses 151+ for plural stage modulation
    systems wherein the last stage is of the amplitude modulation type.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 117 for hybrid-type
    networks.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 291 for signal box repeaters
    which repeat, for example, signals received at a central station to a
    plurality of fire houses.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 5+ for systems and
    apparatus which include a receiver-transmitter station designed for control
    by a wave transmitted from a first transmission station and designed to
    transmit a signal which is different from the received signal, i.e., adds
    additional information, the system including means to receive the signal
    transmitted by the receiver transmitter station. Where the signal which is
    transmitted by the receiver-transmitter is of the same character as the
    received signal, even though a time-delay is interposed between the time of
    reception and the time of transmission, the patent is classified in this
    subclass.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 274, 279, 293, 315+, and 492+
    for repeaters using multiplex frequency channels.


CLS 455/8
TXT Failure compensation (e.g., spare channel):

    Subject matter under subclass 7 including apparatus for compensating for
    failure in operation of a repeater station.


CLS 455/9
TXT Monitoring:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 including means for measuring or testing
    the operating condition at a repeater station.


CLS 455/10
TXT Fading compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 where the measured quantity is the strength
    of the received signal and variations in said received signal strength are
    compensated for.


CLS 455/11.1
TXT Portable or mobile repeater:
    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein a receiving or transmitting station
    is not permanently mounted in one location, but is either carried by a
    person or associated with a movable object, such as a vehicle (i.e., mobile
    repeater station).


CLS 455/12.1
TXT Space satellite:
    Subject matter under subclass 11.1 wherein the repeater or relay is
    associated with an artificial satellite orbiting the earth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 352+ which include a satellite.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, digest 2 for satellite
    mounted antenna.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 316+ for a space satellite
    repeater using communication techniques.


CLS 455/13.1
TXT With plural repeater or relay systems:
    Subject matter under subclass 12.1 having more than one modulated carrier
    wave and having a repeater or a relay for each modulated carrier wave.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass is limited to plural
    single channel repeaters; whenever plural independent messages are
    simultaneously transmitted, classification is in Class 370, Multiplex
    Communications.


CLS 455/13.2
TXT Synchronizing of satellites or system:
    Subject matter under subclass 12.1 wherein stations in a system are
    regulated such that each transmits a carrier wave of the same frequency and
    phase as those carriers transmitted by the other stations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclass 324 for time division multiple
    access synchronization of space satellites.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 354+ for digital
    network synchronization.


CLS 455/13.3
TXT With antennas feed network or multiple antennas switching:
    Subject matter under subclass 12.1 wherein the space satellite has more
    than one antenna or has a regulation means to control the selection of an
    antenna.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 705+ for antennas
    with aircraft.


CLS 455/13.4
TXT Power control:
    Subject matter under subclass 12.1 including means to regulate the output
    power in the satellite system.


CLS 455/14
TXT With transmission line:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 where the repeater or relay is inserted in
    a waveguide or other type of transmission line.


CLS 455/15
TXT Two separate way transmission:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 where the relay or repeater operates in at
    least two directions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 71.1+ for automatic two-way repeaters
    specific to telegraphy.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 276+ for duplex
    communications.


CLS 455/16
TXT Simultaneous using plural repeaters at each location:

    Subject matter under subclass 15 where the repeater operates in at least
    two directions at the same time by means of a plurality of repeaters at the
    same location.


CLS 455/17
TXT Plural modulated carriers:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein there is more than one modulated
    carrier wave being repeated or relayed at the same time.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 204+ for plural diverse
    modulation techniques.


CLS 455/18
TXT With delay or recording:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 including a device to time delay or make a
    permanent record of the modulated carrier wave.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 261+ for miscellaneous output waveform production
    delay.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 138-164 for
    passive delay networks.


CLS 455/19
TXT Common antenna:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 where the modulated carrier wave is
    received and transmitted on the same antenna.


CLS 455/20
TXT With frequency conversion:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 including apparatus to change the frequency
    of the modulated carrier wave.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this subclass it is not necessary that
    the carrier frequency of the transmitted signal be different from the
    carrier frequency of the received signal.  For example, the frequency of
    the received carrier wave may be converted to a lower frequency for
    purposes of amplification and then be reconverted to the original frequency
    for transmission.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 113+ for miscellaneous frequency control or conversion.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 37+ for means to produce a beat frequency
    by combining the output of two or more oscillators.

    332,    Modulators, appropriate subclasses for frequency conversion
    modulation systems, per se.


CLS 455/21
TXT With demodulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 20 including apparatus for removing the
    intelligence from the received signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    329,    Demodulators, for demodulators, per se.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 10 for direct current or low frequency
    alternating current amplifiers of the modulator-demodulator type.


CLS 455/22
TXT Plural conversion stages:

    Subject matter under subclass 20 including more than one successive
    conversion stage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    332,    Modulators, especially subclasses 108, 119+, 145, and 151+ for
    plural modulation stage modulators.


CLS 455/23
TXT Frequency or phase modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 where the carrier wave is modulated by
    varying its  fre-quency or phase in accordance with the information signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    329,    Demodulators, subclasses 315+ for frequency demodulators and
    subclasses 345+ for phase demodulators.

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 183+ for modulation converters (e.g., F.M.
    to A.M.); and subclasses 144+ and 117+ for phase or frequency modulators,
    per se.


CLS 455/24
TXT Transmitter-receiver feedback compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 including apparatus to prevent unwanted
    feedback between the transmitter and the receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     for a transceiver with transmitter-receiver interaction prevention.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 593 for miscellaneous oscillation prevention.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 75+ for amplifiers with feedback means
    including negative feedback for preventing oscillation.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 278 and 282+ for
    transmit/receive interaction control in duplex communications.


CLS 455/25
TXT Directive antenna:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 including an antenna which is more
    responsive in one direction than in another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 18 for structure for
    reflecting radio waves; subclasses 100+ for means for sending and/or
    receiving radio wave energy which is characterized by some quality that
    varies according to the relative direction, position and/or plane or
    polarization of the sender and receiver; and subclasses 700+ for antennas,
    per se, including directional antennas and antennas combined with
    reflecting and/or refracting means.


CLS 455/26.1
TXT USE OR ACCESS BLOCKING (E.G., LOCKING SWITCH):

    Subject matter under the class definition which blocks access to a signal
    source or otherwise limits usage of modulated carrier equipment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    194,    Check-Actuated Control Mechanisms, appropriate subclasses for a
    coin controlled device of general utility.

    380,    Cryptography, subclasses 6+ and 9+ for encryption by signal masking
    and scrambling, respectively.


CLS 455/31.1
TXT SYSTEM WITH RECEIVER SELECTION:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein an operator at a
    transmitter may selectively communicate with a selected one of a plurality
    of receivers or wherein an operator at the transmitter and/or any one of
    the receivers may signal any one or all of the remainder of the
    transmitters and/or receivers that a given condition of the system exists.

    (1)     Note.  As an example, the operator at a first transmitter may
    signal any or all receivers to which he wishes to transmit a message on the
    frequency to which receiver or receivers is/are tuned.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825+ for selective
    signalling systems in general and subclass 539 for electrical signalling
    systems which are automatically responsive to a condition and which utilize
    a radio link.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, appropriate subclasses for telephone
    systems with dialing, ringing, or other alerting means.


CLS 455/31.2
TXT Control of selectively responsive paging arrangement over telephone line:

    Subject matter under subclass 31.1 in which a telephone equipment is used
    to transmit a signal to operate an equipment of choice or to produce a
    notification signal over an electromagnetic link (e.g., wireless link).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.44+ for a selective
    paging arrangement not controlled over telephone equipment.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 170 and 217 for an audible
    paging device using a private telephone equipment.


CLS 455/31.3
TXT Two-way paging system:

    Subject matter under subclass 31.2 wherein a signal is received back
    responsive to the transmitted signal.

    (1)     Note.  Two-way voice communication is not classified herein.


CLS 455/32.1
TXT Receiver scans for address signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 31.1 wherein a transmitter transmits an
    address signal which uniquely identifies a particular receiver or group of
    receivers and wherein the receiver scans a plurality of different
    frequencies until its own address signal is detected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161.1+, for frequency scanning receiver.


CLS 455/35.1
TXT Tone coded squelch:

    Subject matter under subclass 31.1 having device whereby the operating
    condition of the audio section of a remote receiver is controlled from a
    distance by means of tone which is sent over an intervening wired or a
    radio modulated carrier wave circuit.


CLS 455/36.1
TXT Plural tones:

    Subject matter under subclass 35.1 wherein more than two audio tones are
    transmitted to control the audio section operating condition.


CLS 455/37.1
TXT Difference frequency:

    Subject matter under subclass 36.1 wherein the distinction in frequency
    between two transmitted audio tones is used.


CLS 455/38.1
TXT Coded sequence:

    Subject matter under subclass 31.1 wherein a series of encoded pulses is
    used, for example, to identify a device or an information signal.


CLS 455/38.2
TXT With actuation (e.g., turn on/off or alarm indication, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 38.1 wherein an operating condition of a
    device at a remote receiver is actuated from a distance in response to a
    sequence of encoded pulses which is sent over an intervening wired or a
    radio modulated carrier wave circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 825.69 for generic pulse
    responsive actuation over radio link.


CLS 455/38.3
TXT Power control or battery saving:

    Subject matter under subclass 38.2 wherein a power supply at a remote
    station is turned on or off upon receiving the encoded pulses.


CLS 455/38.4
TXT Visual indication:

    Subject matter under subclass 38.2 including a device to generate signals
    perceptible by the human eye in response to a sequence of encoded pulses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 815.4+ for generic systems
    with visual indicator.


CLS 455/38.5
TXT Tone sequence:

    Subject matter under subclass 38.2 including a series of encoded pulses of
    audio frequencies


CLS 455/39
TXT TRANSMITTER AND RECEIVER AT SEPARATE STATIONS:

    Subject matter under the class definition including at least one
    transmitting device which converts analog information signals (e.g., audio)
    into modulated carrier wave signals, a carrier wave transmission medium,
    and at least one receiving device whereby the information or modulating
    signal transmitted will be derived from the received modulated carrier wave
    signals.

    (1)     Note.  A system, in order to be classified in this subclass and its
    indents must include a means whereby the information transmitted is
    transmitted by means of a sinusoidal electromagnetic carrier wave.  Systems
    wherein the intelligence to be conveyed is transmitted by dot and dash
    (i.e., presence or absence of a unidirectional or direct current wave) are
    found in Class 178.  Systems wherein the intelligence conveyed is pulse or
    digital information are found in Class 375.  Systems wherein the
    intelligence to be conveyed by a varying current without a carrier wave are
    found in Classes 179 and 340.  Systems which are properly classifiable, as
    a result of some significantly claimed art limitations, in another class
    will not be classified here.

    (2)     Note.  The subject matter classifiable here will generally comprise
    both the means for origination and modulating a carrier wave according to
    the information, desired to be transmitted, and a means for receiving the
    modulated carrier wave and deriving the desired information.  However,
    where the claimed subject matter includes claims reciting the specific
    details of a transmitter or receiver or transceiver and broadly include
    another receiver, transceiver, or transmitter of different type by name
    only, the patent will be classified here and cross-reference down to the
    appropriate subclass below which contains the particular transmitter,
    transceiver, or receiver claimed.

    (3)     Note.  The systems in this and the indented subclasses comprises at
    least one transmitter and receiver device which devices are located at an
    appreciable distance one from the other.  However, patents in which the
    claimed subject matter includes transmitter-receiver means at a single
    station (transceiver) are also to be found here providing sufficient
    structure is recited whereby the transmitter-receivermeans cooperates with
    and influence or is influenced by a further receiver or transmitter at a
    distance; providing, that the claimed subject matter does not include a
    structure limiting the system to use of radiant energy as defined in the
    definition of Class 343 or to use in some other art class device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7+,     for transmitter-receiver repeater systems.

    73+,    for complete stations wherein the transmitter and receiver are at
    the same point.

    91+,    for transmitter, per se.

    130+,   for receivers, per se.

    600+,   for light wave communications.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 2+ for various telegraph systems which are
    limited to the transmission and reception of telegraph signals; subclasses
    24+ for teleprinting systems; subclasses 45+ for loaded carrier wave
    transmission lines; and subclass 118 for miscellaneous telegraph receivers.

    244,    Aeronautics, particularly subclasses 175+ for systems for
    automatically controlling aircraft by means of electrical apparatus which
    may utilize modulated carrier waves for control.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, particularly subclasses 7+ and 28+
    for carrier wave systems employed in railway signalling.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 117
    for switching systems controlled by radiant energy; and subclass 129 for
    frequency responsive switching space discharge device or lamp systems.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 149+ for
    radiant energy controlled space discharge device or lamp systems.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 16 for electric motor
    systems where the motor is controlled or supplied by space transmitted
    electromagnetic or electrostatic energy (including radio energy).

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for
    systems for measuring or utilizing carrier waves.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous circuits which may
    constitute elements of a system such as those classifiable in this class.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, appropriate subclasses for
    passive carrier wave transmission lines which may include passive network
    elements, attenuators or resonators which may have utility in the carrier
    wave systems of this class.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, appropriate subclasses for electrical
    signalling systems, especially subclasses 825.71+ for selective signalling
    systems, utilizing carrier waves; subclasses 870.01+ for telemetering
    systems; subclass 539 for systems automatically responsive to a condition
    and wherein the signal is transmitted via radio levels; and subclass 286
    for miscellaneous signalling systems consisting of transmitters and
    receivers; subclass 347 for code converters wherein a transmitter may
    receive its information in the form of a first code and transmit the
    information in the form of a dissimilar code; and subclasses 345+ for code
    transmitters.

    346,    Recorders, subclass 37 for systems wherein a recorder is operated
    in response to the tuning of a radio receiver or receivers, e.g., community
    radio listening survey.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 6+ for
    combined radio and phonograph systems.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, for analog carrier wave communication
    systems which have multiplexing.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, for systems conveying or digital
    pulse information which may use modulated carrier waves.

    380,    Cryptography, for cryptographic communications.

    411,    Expanded Threaded, Driven Headed, Tool-Deformed or Lock Threaded
    Fastener, subclasses 50+ for code converters wherein a transmitter may
    receive its information in the form of a first code and transmit the
    information in the form of a dissimilar code; and subclasses 20+ and 173+
    for code transmitters.


CLS 455/40
TXT Earth or water medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 where the ground (or water) supplies the
    natural medium for the transmission of the modulated carrier wave between
    the transmitter and receiver.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass has a specific under
    ground (or underwater) structure at each station.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 719 for antenna
    systems buried underground or submerged underwater.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclass 218 for pulse
    communication via an earth or water medium.


CLS 455/41
TXT Near field (e.g., inductive or capacitive coupling):

    Subject matter under subclass 39 which is near field or limited ranged
    systems (i.e., field strength = k/d where d = distance from the transmitter
    to the receiver) where signal transfer from the transmitter to the receiver
    is inductive or capacitive rather than electromagnetic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for underwater systems that may be inductive or capacitive.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 43 for inductive telegraphy.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclass 256 for near field pulse
    or digital communication.


CLS 455/42
TXT Frequency or phase modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 in which the intelligence or information
    to be transmitted is applied to a sine wave carrier in such a manner that
    the instantaneous frequency and/or phase angle of the sine wave carrier is
    caused to depart from a reference value by an amount proportional to the
    instantaneous amplitude of the modulating (intelligence) signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for frequency or phase modulated repeater.

    29,     for secret systems with carrier wobbling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 207+ for telemetering
    systems utilizing frequency or phase modulation.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 14 for reflected
    wave systems utilizing pulse waves frequency or phase modulated; subclass
    17.5 for reflected wave systems in general utilizing frequency or phase
    modulation; and subclasses 100+ for directive systems restricted to radio
    wave energy and utilizing frequency modulation.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    109+ for optical communication.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 200+ for spread
    spectrum; and subclasses 223, 271, 302+, 329+, and 334+ for pulse
    communication by frequency or phase modulation of a carrier wave.

    380,    Cryptography, particularly subclass 322 for carrier wobbling by
    cryptographic equipment.


CLS 455/43
TXT With modification of frequencies of analog signal passed (e.g.,
    pre-emphasis or de-emphasis):

    Subject matter under subclass 42 where the information or modulating signal
    is predistorted and/or preamplified prior to its modulation of the carrier
    wave.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 123+ for frequency modulators, per se, with
    distortion introduction or control, e.g., pre-emphasis networks.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 28+ for passive
    equalizing networks, per se.


CLS 455/44
TXT With stated modulation index:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 in which the effective frequency excursion
    or deviation is specified.


CLS 455/45
TXT Via subcarrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 where an intermediate frequency wave is
    modulated by a modulating signal representative of an intelligence or
    message and in turn is applied as a modulation signal to a main carrier
    wave, either alone or in conjunction with other subcarriers.

    (1)     Note.  The frequency of the subcarrier is usually low relative to
    that of the main carrier.


CLS 455/46
TXT Suppressed carrier wave system:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 where the carrier component of a modulated
    wave is suppressed at the transmitter so that only the information bearing
    sideband or sidebands are transmitted and received.

    (1)     Note.  Double or single sideband, suppressed carrier systems are
    found here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109,    for suppressed carrier transmitter.

    202,    for suppressed carrier receivers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 167+ for a suppressed carrier double
    sideband type amplitude modulator, per se.


CLS 455/47
TXT Single or vestigial sideband system:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 where one sideband of the transmitted
    signal is largely or entirely suppressed while the second sideband has
    little or no suppression.

    (1)     Note.  The carrier is not suppressed.

    (2)     Note.  In this class, the term asymmetric sideband is generic to
    single and vestigial sideband.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for systems where the carrier is suppressed.

    109,    for amplitude modulated transmitters.

    203,    for single sideband receivers.

    204,    for vestigial sideband receivers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 170+ for a single or vestigial sideband type
    amplitude modulator, per se.

    348,    Television, for vestigial sideband systems particular to television.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclass 270 for similar systems
    for transmitting pulse data.


CLS 455/48
TXT Inverted sideband:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 where one of the sidebands is shifted by
    180 degrees with respect to its normal phase relationship with respect to
    the other sideband.


CLS 455/59
TXT Single message via plural carrier wave transmission:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 where a single message or intelligence is
    transmitted by means of a plurality of carrier waves.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter to be found here will include systems in
    which the whole intelligence signal is divided into component parts, each
    of the components being modulated upon a separate carrier wave or systems
    in which the whole undivided intelligence signal is separately modulated
    upon separate carrier waves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13.1+   and 17, for repeaters utilizing plural channels.

    27,     for secret systems using a plurality of carrier waves.

    42,     for plural channel angle modulation systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 32 for secret telegraph systems which may
    employ a plurality of carrier waves or alternating current waves.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 260+ for pulse
    modulated carrier wave systems using plural channels to transmit a single
    pulse train.

    380,    Cryptography, particularly subclasses 34 for a cryptographic system
    utilizing plural carrier frequencies.


CLS 455/60
TXT Different phases of same frequency carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 in which the message is modulated onto
    different phases (e.g., different polarizations) of a carrier wave and each
    phase is then separately transmitted.


CLS 455/61
TXT Single message via plural modulation of single carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 including modulation of a single carrier
    wave by a plurality of separate and distinct modulation signals each
    representing a portion of the intelligence to be transmitted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for repeaters with plural conversion stages.

    28,     for plural modulation of a single carrier wave for secrecy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclass 269 for pulse modulated
    carrier wave systems with plural modulation of a single carrier.

    380,    Cryptography, particularly subclasses 31+ for a cryptographic
    system utilizing plural modulation of a single carrier wave.


CLS 455/62
TXT Optimum frequency selection:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 in which a frequency of operation is
    selected with is optimum with respect to a given criteria.


CLS 455/63
TXT Distortion, noise, or other interference prevention, reduction, or
    compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 with provision for reduction or
    elimination of distortion, noise, interference, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for failure compensation in a repeater.

    10,     for fading compensation in repeaters.

    501+,   for similar subject matter in plural transmitter/receiver systems.

    78+,    for transceivers with transmitter receiver interaction prevention.

    119,    for transmitters with carrier frequency stabilization.

    134     and 135, for plural receivers with output selecting according to
    signal strength or quality.

    222+,   for noise controlled squelch in a receiver.

    234.1+, for automatic gain or volume control in a receiver.

    255+,   for local oscillator frequency control in a receiver.

    267,    for tone control in a receiver.

    268,    for fidelity control in a receiver.

    278.1+, for receiver plural wave collector noise or interference
    elimination.

    283+,   for receiver wave collector interference or noise elimination.

    296+,   for receiver noise or interference  elimination.


CLS 455/64
TXT Plasma source or barrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 63 where the distortion and noise is caused
    by a plasma (e.g., space craft re-entry).


CLS 455/65
TXT Anti-multipath:

    Subject matter under subclass 63 where there is prevention, reduction, or
    compensation for distortion caused by the modulated carrier wave traveling
    from the transmitter to the receiver by plural paths of differing lengths.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for fading compensation in a repeater.

    504+,   for fading compensation in a plural transmitter or receiver systems.


CLS 455/66
TXT With diverse art device:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 including, in addition to a system under
    the class definition, other art devices or structures having an added
    purpose or independent utility other than to perfect an element of the
    system and in which the utility of the other art device or structure is not
    destroyed or disturbed by its removal from the system and which combination
    is not provided for elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 455+ for changeable
    exhibitors with sound in which the source of the sound may be a radio
    receiver.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosive Devices, subclass 214 for fuses utilizing
    radiant energy.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 241+ for position indicators for
    radio apparatus.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 118+ for telegraph receivers which may be
    combined with other art devices.

    194,    Check-Actuated Control Mechanisms, appropriate subclasses for check
    controlled radio apparatus, e.g., combined with other art devices.

    248,    Supports, subclass 27.1 for means for supporting an instrument in a
    panel.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 9.1+
    for vehicle mounted systems in which the vehicle may provide power means
    for a radio telephone or other receiver means; and subclass 156 for
    miscellaneous systems with particular load device or load device
    combination.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 7.1 for radio type cabinets.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 539 for a condition responsive
    indicating system with a radio coupling link.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 6 for reflected wave
    (e.g., radar) systems combined with diverse type radiant energy systems.

    346,    Recorders, subclass 25 for recorders combined with other
    nonrecording devices; and subclass 37 for recorders combined with a radio
    receiver and tuning responsive and for the purpose of determining the
    listening habits of the users of a receiver.

    362,    Illumination, for combined light and other art device structure.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 10+ for
    clocks combined with other devices where the claimed combination does not
    include characteristics of the device not necessary to the function of the
    horological device.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 6+ for
    combined radio and phonograph systems.

    386,    Television Signal Processing for Dynamic Recording or Reproducing,
    subclasses 1+ and 46+ for television combined with recorders.

    396,    Photography, subclass 434 for a camera combined with a radio.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 297+ for a figure toy having a
    sounder, wherein the figure may act as a receptacle for a receiver.


CLS 455/67.1
TXT With measuring, testing, or monitoring of system or part:
    Subject matter under subclass 39 which relates to means intended solely for
    the purpose of and adapted to (a) adjust the frequency setting of a carrier
    wave generation means or determine the output frequency or some other
    characteristics of a transmitter means; (b) adjust the frequency  setting
    of a local oscillator, a tuning means or other stages of a receiver means
    in accordance with a standard frequency; (c) compare the frequency of a
    resonant input or output circuit of a receiver or transmitter with a
    standard frequency for the purpose of setting a tuning position indicator
    or dial to correspond to maximum transmitter or receiver output at the
    standard frequency; and (d) determine the operating characteristics of the
    whole or selected components of the system under prescribed conditions of
    operation and not elsewhere classified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for repeaters with monitoring.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 224+ for pulse
    modulated carrier systems with testing.


CLS 455/67.2
TXT Using a chamber (e.g. room testing or audio surveillance, etc.):Subject
    matter under subclass 67.1 wherein the measuring, testing, or monitoring is
    conducted in a confined housing or in a relatively close location.

    (1)     Note. For example, method or device for locating an intermodular or
    interference source in a close proximity to a desired transmitting source,
    or detecting the presence of a hidden transmitter, e.g., eavesdropping
    device.


CLS 455/67.3
TXT Noise, distortion or unwanted signal detection (e.g. quality control,
    etc.):Subject matter under subclass 67.1 having means to detect any
    undesired electrical disturbance within the useful frequency band arising
    from sources internal or external to the system (e.g., crosstalk, power
    induction, atmospheric noise, etc.);  or any undesired self-sustained
    oscillation existing in the system;  or other unwanted signals tending to
    interfere with the operation of the system.


CLS 455/67.4
TXT Using a test signal:
    Subject matter under subclass 67.1 wherein a signal of predetermined
    frequency (i.e., reference signal) is sent over the system for testing or
    measuring purposes.


CLS 455/67.5
TXT Of a microwave link or system:
    Subject matter under subclass 67.1 involves system using communication
    signals in the range of microwave frequencies (i.e., approximately 1000 MHz
    and above).


CLS 455/67.6
TXT Phase measuring (e.g., group delay, propagation effect, etc.):Subject
    matter under subclass 67.1 including means to measure the change in phase
    of travelling waves for developing a suitable control for equalization,
    attenuation compensation, or synchronization.


CLS 455/67.7
TXT With indication (e.g., visual or voice signalling, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 67.1 having means for making a condition
    pertaining to the testing or measuring of the system perceptible to a human
    operator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 539 for generic condition
    indicating system over radio link.


CLS 455/68
TXT With control signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 wherein the communication apparatus
    includes an intelligence signal transmitted from a transmitter to a
    receiver over distances large compared with their dimensions and where one
    of either the transmitter or receiver includes controlling means which
    causes some modification of the operation of the other.


CLS 455/69
TXT Transmitter controlled by signal feedback from receiver:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein the controlling means is located
    at the receiver and modifies the operation of the transmitter in response
    thereto.


CLS 455/70
TXT Receiver control signal originates at message transmitter:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein the controlling means is located
    at the transmitter and modifies the operation of the receiver in response
    to said controlling means.

    (1)     Note.  The controlling means may send a reference or controlling
    modulation component on the carrier wave. However, such component must be
    distinct from the message, as receivers responsive to the inherent
    characteristics of the message signal are excluded from this subclass.


CLS 455/71
TXT Frequency control:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 where the frequency to which the receiver
    is tuned is controlled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151.1,  for remote control of channel or station selection in a receiver.


CLS 455/72
TXT For compression and expansion of message signal (i.e., companding):

    Subject matter under subclass 70 wherein the range of variation of the
    modulating parameter is decreased at the transmitter and expanded in the
    complementary manner in the receiver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 14 for companding
    systems, per se.


CLS 455/73
TXT TRANSMITTER AND RECEIVER AT SAME STATION (E.G., TRANSCEIVER):

    Subject matter under the class definition having both a signal transmitter
    and a signal receiver at a common geographic location for transmission and
    reception of separate signals.

    (1)     Note.  The transmitter and receiver at a common location are
    hereafter termed "a station" in these definitions.

    (2)     Note.  The simultaneous separation of a transmitter and receiver is
    a duplex operation and is classified in Class 370, Multiplex
    Communications, subclasses 276+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for an interference signal transmitter, which may include a
    receiver at the same station.

    606+,   for a complete light wave communication station.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 276+ for duplex systems, see
    (2) Note above.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclass 219 for similar devices
    which handle pulse and digital signals.


CLS 455/74
TXT Convertible (e.g., to diverse art device):

    Subject matter under subclass 73 wherein at least a portion of the
    transceiver circuitry is alternatively operable as a portion of another
    electrical sound signal processing system.

    (1)     Note.  The term convertible is intended to include a receiver for a
    different frequency band (e.g., broadcast receiver).


CLS 455/74.1
TXT Cordless/corded conversion:

    Subject matter under subclass 74 wherein the transceiver includes a
    structure for transforming a wired transmission capability to a wireless
    transmission capacity or vice versa.


CLS 455/75
TXT With frequency stabilization (e.g., automatic frequency control):

    Subject matter under subclass 73 having means to prevent or compensate for
    variation in the operating frequency of the transceiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113     and 119, for transmitter with automatic frequency control or
    stabilization.

    164.1,  173.1, 192.1+, and 257, for receivers with automatic frequency
    control or stabilization.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 1+ for oscillators with automatic frequency
    control.


CLS 455/76
TXT Synthesizer:

    Subject matter under subclass 75 in which a single stable oscillator is
    used as a source of one or more frequencies derived therefrom by frequency
    multiplication or division.

    (1)     Note.  The stable oscillator is often crystal controlled or
    phase-locked.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165.1   and 183.1+, for receivers with synthesizers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 1 for synthesizers in general.


CLS 455/77
TXT With tuning:

    Subject matter under subclass 73 having means to control or adjust the
    frequency of the transmitted or received signal; or the loading or
    adjustment of the radio frequency circuits is varied.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120+,   for transmitter tuning.

    150.1,  for receiver tuning.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    334,    Tuners, for passive tuning circuits in general.


CLS 455/78
TXT With transmitter-receiver switching or interaction prevention:

    Subject matter under subclass 73 wherein the transmitter and receiver are
    made orthogonal by alternatively actuating the transmitter or receiver or
    by isolation circuitry.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 278 and 282+ for
    transmit/receive interaction control in duplex communications.


CLS 455/79
TXT Automatic (e.g., voice-operated):

    Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein the switching device is other than
    manually operated.

    (1)     Note.  Such means includes voice operated switching.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    for transmitters automatically actuated in response to voice, etc.


CLS 455/80
TXT With distributed parameter coupling:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 having a distributed parameter transmitter
    line coupling the transmitter and receiver portions of the transceiver to
    an antenna.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 100+ for branched
    circuits.


CLS 455/81
TXT Waveguide:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the transmission line is a hollow
    conductor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 593 for miscellaneous circuits with a distributed
    parameter element (e.g., waveguide).

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 13 for waveguides
    having gas breakdown switching (e.g., T-R) tubes; subclasses 100+ for
    branching networks; and subclass 13 for hybrid transmit-receiver isolators.


CLS 455/82
TXT Common antenna:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 where the transmitter and the receiver use
    the same antenna.


CLS 455/83
TXT Single antenna switched between transmitter and receiver:

    Subject matter under subclass 78 which has a single antenna which is
    alternately connected to the transmitter and receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     for a single antenna automatically switched between transmitter and
    receiver.


CLS 455/84
TXT With a common signal processing stage:

    Subject matter under subclass 73 having an active element which performs a
    signal processing or generating function in the transmitter portion of the
    apparatus during signal transmission and in the receiver portion of the
    apparatus during signal reception.

    (1)     Note.  The terms "active" and "signal processing" are used to
    exclude common use of nonprocessing elements, e.g., antennas and power
    supplies.


CLS 455/85
TXT Transmitter oscillator used as detector:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 wherein the active element circuitry which
    produces the carrier signal during transmission functions as a demodulator
    during signal reception.

    (1)     Note.  The term demodulator used above excludes heterodyning
    mixers.  Rather it includes only those devices producing a signal which is
    a replica of the original modulating information signal.


CLS 455/86
TXT Transmitter oscillator used as local oscillator:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 wherein the active element circuitry which
    produces the carrier during transmission also produces the oscillatory
    signal with which the received signal is heterodyned.


CLS 455/87
TXT Tunable or variable:

    Subject matter under subclass 86 where the frequency of the local
    oscillator is variable or changeable.


CLS 455/88
TXT Transceiver controlling a separate transceiver or receiver:

    Subject matter under subclass 73 wherein the transceiver is operative to
    produce a signal controlling the operation of another transceiver or a
    receiver at the same location.

    (1)     Note.  The controlling signal may be either a signal produced for
    control purposes or may be the normal transmitted signal of the transceiver.

    (2)     Note.  Such control may include, for example, switching from a
    stand-by condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31.1+,  for selective system in general.

    132+,   for diversity-type receivers which may control one another.

    352,    for receivers which are remotely controlled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825+ for various remote
    control system not limited to modulated carrier waves.


CLS 455/90
TXT Housing or support:

    Subject matter under subclass 73 having specified enclosure or support
    means, and not classified above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    347,    for receiver housings.

    575,    for such housing or support means specifically providing for
    portable or mobile use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 309.1+ for bracket means for holding a radio
    that does not claim radio structure.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 7.1 for radio cabinets, per
    se, that do not claim radio structure.


CLS 455/91
TXT TRANSMITTER:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising apparatus for
    generating and modulating a carrier wave and usually including the coupling
    of the modulated carrier wave to the transmission medium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for an interference signal transmitter.

    7+,     for a repeater or relay system having a transmitter stage.

    26+,    for a secret system transmitter.

    39+,    for systems having a transmitter and a receiver.

    88+,    for a transceiver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 79+ for telephone transmitters.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 600+ for inductive heating, subclasses
    678+ for microwave heating, and subclasses 764+ for capacitive dielectric
    heating.

    250,    Radiant Energy, appropriate subclasses for radiant energy
    transmitters in general.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, appropriate subclasses for
    electrical generators.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 34 for a
    particular electron discharge tube device in a circuit including an antenna.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    generating electricity.

    331,    Oscillators, appropriate subclasses.

    332,    Modulators, appropriate subclasses for modulators, per se.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 853.1+ for well bore
    communications; subclasses 22+ for traffic and vehicle communications;
    subclasses 825+ for selective (e.g., remote control); and subclasses
    870.18+ for telemetering all which may include modulated carrier waves.
    Also subclass 539 for alarms with a radio link; and subclass 311.1 for
    paging transmitters.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 5+ for reflected
    or returned wave systems; and subclasses 100+ for antennas which may
    nominally recite a transmitter.

    348,    Television, subclasses 469+ and 723+ for television transmitters.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, particularly subclasses 295+ for
    similar transmission of pulse or digital signals.

    380,    Cryptography, appropriate subclasses for a cryptographic
    telecommunication system.


CLS 455/92
TXT Remote control of a transmitter:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 including structure for modifying or
    controlling the operation of the transmitter from a point removed some
    distance from the transmitter.

    (1)     Note.  The controlling function may be performed automatically or
    manually.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    352,    for remote control of a receiver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.69 and 825.72 for radio
    remote control in selective signalling systems.


CLS 455/93
TXT Convertible to different type (e.g., AM to FM):

    Subject matter under subclass 91 wherein the transmitter is constructed so
    that it may be changed from one type of transmitter to a different type of
    transmitter, such as, for example, changed from a crystal controlled to a
    tunable transmitter or change from FM to AM.

    (1)     Note.  If one alternative is pulse, e.g., digital transmission, the
    system is classified in Class 375.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclass 216 for transmitters
    convertible to/from pulse modulated carrier wave.


CLS 455/94
TXT Alternator:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 where the transmitter power is generated
    by a dynamo-electric radio frequency device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 116 for spark gap or arc discharge
    transmitters.


CLS 455/95
TXT Mobile or portable:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 constructed to be transportable by vehicle
    or person.

    (1)     Note.  The transmitters in this and the indented subclasses may be
    installed upon a vehicle and operated while the vehicle is in motion or may
    be installed or positioned on the vehicle to be ejected therefrom as in
    subclass 96 below.

    (2)     Note.  Transmitters, per se, which send signals which indicate
    relative direction or position are classified in Class 343, subclasses 100+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11.1+,  for mobile or portable repeaters.

    517+    and 575, for mobile or portable systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 22+ for vehicle or traffic
    environment signalling; and subclasses 500+ for condition responsive
    indicating systems.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 100+ for directive
    type transmitters or receivers or receivers, per se.


CLS 455/96
TXT Transmitter ejected from moving vehicle:

    Subject matter under subclass 95 where the transmitter is ejected from a
    mobile vehicle.

    (1)     Note.  The transmitter may be automatically ejected (e.g.,
    responsive to the impact of a crash) or manually ejected by operation of a
    switch.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 138+ for safety lowering devices in general
    of the aeronautical type.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 22+ for vehicle or traffic
    environment signalling.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 100+ for sending
    of radio wave energy which is characterized by relative direction or
    position and is not ejected or activated by a moving vehicle.


CLS 455/97
TXT With antenna ejection or external support:

    Subject matter under subclass 95 including provision for ejecting or
    extending an antenna from the transmitter, or having provision for
    externally supporting an antenna (e.g., a balloon).

    (1)     Note.  The antenna ejection or antenna support may or may not be
    automatically operated.


CLS 455/98
TXT With aircraft, satellite, or projectile:

    Subject matter under subclass 95 combined with or carried by an air or
    space vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     if the transmitter is ejected from the vehicle.


CLS 455/99
TXT With vehicle:

    Subject matter under subclass 95 carried by or combined with a vehicle such
    as surface craft, submarine, automobile, or other land or waterborne
    vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98,     for transmitters combined with aircraft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 22+ for vehicle or traffic
    environment signalling.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 709 and 710 for
    waterborne antennas.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclass 89 for body attached
    buoyant devices combined with analog modulated carrier wave communications.


CLS 455/100
TXT Body attached or connected:

    Subject matter under subclass 95 which is shaped to fit the body or be
    supported by the body.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this subclass, a portion of the
    transmitter must be shaped to fit or be supported by the body such as an
    antenna or microphone attached to the body.  Small hand carried
    transmitters with no portion thereof connected to the body are classified
    in subclass 95 above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 573 for transmitters
    responsive to the condition of a human which may be attached or connected
    to the body.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 718 for body
    attached or supported antennas.


CLS 455/101
TXT Diversity:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 where two or more channels are transmitted
    via different paths, frequencies, or times of transmission.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter classified here is distinguished from
    multiplex, Class 370, in that no specialized receiver is needed for
    discerning the separate channels.

    (2)     Note.  Subject matter classified here is limited to the
    transmission of a single message at a time over the channels.

    (3)     Note.  Some system classified here are directed toward reducing
    fading at the receiver.


CLS 455/102
TXT Plural modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 in which the carrier wave is modulated at
    least twice prior to transmission.

    (1)     Note.  The plural modulation may be of the same or diverse types,
    and is usually sequential.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 119+, 145 and 151+ for plural modulation,
    per se.


CLS 455/103
TXT Plural separate transmitters or channels:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 where there are plural transmission
    channels formed of separate complete transmitters, capable of independent
    operation.

    (1)     Note.  The plural transmitters may be interconnected to a common
    antenna, by a common power supply or by a common control signal path.

    (2)     Note.  Systems using multiplex techniques to combine separate
    messages and apply to a common antenna are classified in Class 370,
    subclasses 339+.


CLS 455/104
TXT Carrier and sidebands separately transmitted:

    Subject matter under subclass 103 where separate channels are provided for
    transmitting the carrier and the sideband components of a modulated carrier
    wave.

    (1)     Note.  Also included in this subclass are transmitters having
    separate channels for the carrier and sideband components and with means to
    produce a rotating field pattern.


CLS 455/105
TXT Common frequency:

    Subject matter under subclass 103 where the plural transmitters broadcast
    on the same frequency.

    (1)     Note.  Systems with frequency control of the second, spaced, or
    remote, transmitter are classified in subclass 92 above.


CLS 455/106
TXT Modulation by absorption, shielding, or reflecting:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 including structure spaced from or
    external to the antenna which modulates the carrier radiated from the
    antenna, such as by absorption, shielding, or reflecting.

    (1)     Note.  The radiated carrier may be angle modulated or it may be
    amplitude modulated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121+    and 129+, for systems not limited to modulation systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 753+ for radio
    antennas with external radio wave refractor.


CLS 455/107
TXT With variation of antenna impedance or dimension for modulation:Subject
    matter under subclass 91 where the carrier wave is modulated, under control
    of the modulating intelligence signal, by varying the impedance or
    dimension of the antenna.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121+,   for systems in which the antenna circuit is varied for tuning.

    129+,   for systems in which the antenna coupling is explicitly shown and
    varied therefor.

    269+,   for systems of antenna combined with receiver for similar coupling
    arrangements, noting especially 289.


CLS 455/108
TXT Amplitude modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 where the amplitude of the carrier is
    varied under control of the intelligence to be transmitted.


CLS 455/109
TXT Vestigial or single sideband or suppressed carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 where less than two complete sidebands
    are transmitted, with or without the carrier or two complete sidebands are
    transmitted without the carrier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for suppressed carrier wave systems.

    47,     for single or vestigial sideband systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 167+ for a suppressed carrier double
    sideband type amplitude modulator.

    348,    Television, subclasses 723+ for vestigial sideband television
    transmitters.


CLS 455/110
TXT Angle modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 where the frequency or phase of the
    carrier wave is varied or modulated under control of the intelligence that
    is transmitted.


CLS 455/111
TXT Including distributed parameter structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 110 including, as a significant part of the
    transmitter, a structure with distributed parameter wave transmission means
    or circuits designed to simulate the impedance characteristics of
    distributed parameter wave transmission means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, appropriate subclasses for
    distributed electric parameter devices, per se.


CLS 455/112
TXT With frequency multiplication or division:

    Subject matter under subclass 110 where a signal at one frequency is
    converted to a second frequency which is a multiple or sub-multiple of the
    first frequency.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 113+ for miscellaneous frequency conversion or control.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 157+ for power
    frequency conversion.


CLS 455/113
TXT With frequency control:

    Subject matter under subclass 110 where the operating frequency of the
    transmitter is controlled or regulated.


CLS 455/114
TXT With harmonic radiation suppression:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 having provision for the reduction or
    suppression of the radiation of harmonics from the antenna.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63+,    for spaced transmitter-receiver systems with distortion, noise, or
    other interference prevention, reduction, or compensation.

    501+,   for spaced plural transmitter-receiver systems with noise, singing,
    or other disturbance prevention means.


CLS 455/115
TXT Measuring, testing, or monitoring of transmitter:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 having measuring, testing, or monitoring
    of the signal transmitted.

    (1)     Note. The transmitter must be claimed in detail along with the
    monitoring means, claimed broadly or in detail.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for
    measuring sensing or testing electricity, per se.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 653 for condition of
    electronic circuit or component responsive indication.


CLS 455/116
TXT Carrier amplitude control (e.g., voice operated on/off):

    Subject matter under subclass 91 where the amplitude of the carrier signal
    is controlled responsive to the modulation signal.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this subclass the amplitude of the
    carrier is varied responsive to the modulation signal, for example, the
    carrier amplitude is reduced or cut off when the modulating signal is
    absent or reduced.


CLS 455/117
TXT With electrical protection of transmitter circuit or operator:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 where the transmitter circuits or
    operators are protected from damage or injury such as from overload or
    malfunction of a component within the transmitter.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this subclass some detail of the
    transmitter must be claimed along with the protective means, claimed
    broadly or in detail, for protecting the operator or transmitter.  Where
    the transmitter is claimed broadly (such as by name only) and the
    protective means is claimed in detail, classification is with the
    protective means.

    (2)     Note.  The overload may be the result of a defective tube or other
    component within the transmitter or it may be the result of an external
    fault such as an antenna failure, lightning, or of transmission line
    arc-over.

    (3)     Note.  Transmitters with temperature modifier or control means,
    such, for example, as cooling are in this subclass.

    (4)     Note.  Transmitters with automatic condition responsive alarm are
    in subclass 115.

    (5)     Note.  Operator protection is also included here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 326+
    for generic personnel safety means.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 51 for amplifiers with automatic disabling
    switch.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 62 for oscillators with circuit means.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 1+ for
    safety and protection of electrical systems and devices.


CLS 455/118
TXT Frequency conversion:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 where a signal is converted from a first
    frequency to a second frequency.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 113+ for miscellaneous frequency conversion or control.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 51 and 53 for plural oscillator frequency
    multipliers and dividers.

    363,    Electric Power Conversion Systems, subclasses 157+ for electric
    power frequency conversion.


CLS 455/119
TXT Carrier frequency stabilization:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 including provision to prevent or
    compensate for undesirable drift or change in the frequency at which the
    transmitter is operating.

    (1)     Note.  The prevention or compensation for the drift or change in
    frequency of the transmitter may be automatically controlled.


CLS 455/120
TXT Including tuning:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 including a resonant network or crystal
    whose resonant frequency may be varied (tuned) to control or modify the
    operating frequency of the transmitter, or which may be substituted for
    other resonant networks or crystals, as by switching, to control or modify
    the operating frequency of the transmitter.


CLS 455/121
TXT In antenna circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 120 wherein the tuning structure or circuitry
    is located within the antenna or forms part of the antenna coupling circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129,    for a transmitter with an antenna circuit with variable coupling
    thereto.


CLS 455/122
TXT With saturable reactor:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 having a magnetic core reactor which is
    controlled by adjusting a superimposed unidirectional magnetic flux to
    effect adjustment of saturation of the core.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 401+
    for saturable reactor systems, in general.


CLS 455/123
TXT Automatically controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the tuning is controlled in
    response to a signal condition.


CLS 455/124
TXT Distributed parameter device:

    Subject matter under subclass 120 where the tuning structure includes, as a
    significant part thereof, structure with distributed parameter wave
    transmission circuits or circuits designed to simulate the impedance
    characteristics of distributed parameter wave transmission circuits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, appropriate subclasses.


CLS 455/125
TXT Automatic adjustment of tuning:

    Subject matter under subclass 120 where the variation or substitution is in
    response to a characteristic of the transmitter or transmitted signal.


CLS 455/126
TXT With feedback of modulated output signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 including provision to apply a portion of
    the output signal of the transmitter to the input of a prior stage.

    (1)     Note.  The feedback circuit may include an auxiliary pickup coil or
    antenna to collect a portion of the energy being transmitted.

    (2)     Note.  The signal feedback may be shifted in phase to compensate
    for hum or distortion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for a system having a transmitter and receiver at separate stations
    in which the transmitter is controlled by signal feedback from the receiver.


CLS 455/127
TXT Power or bias voltage supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 including the details of the source of
    electrical energy or of the circuitry connecting such source to the
    transmitter for supplying power or biasing potential to the active elements
    of the transmitter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for power or bias control for transmitter circuit or operator
    protection.

    343,    for power or bias voltage supply in receivers.


CLS 455/128
TXT With casing or housing:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 provided with a casing or housing for
    enclosing the transmitter or a portion of the transmitter.

    (1)     Note.  For classification in this subclass, some detail of the
    transmitter must be claimed along with the casing or housing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 48-67 for
    electrical equipment boxes and housings in general.

    220,    Receptacles, appropriate subclasses.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 7.1 for radio cabinets, per
    se.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 67-69 for oscillators with shielding,
    casings, or housings.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 331+ for
    housings and mounting assemblies with plural diverse electrical components.


CLS 455/129
TXT With coupled antenna:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 including an antenna and circuit for
    coupling the antenna to the active elements of the transmitter.

    (1)     Note.  For classification here, some transmitter details should be
    included in the claimed combination. Combinations of antenna, coupling, and
    nominal transmitter are classified in Class 343, Communications:  Radio
    Wave, subclasses 850+.  See also (4) Note under subclass 850 of Class 343.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for coupling systems restricted or related to suppression of
    harmonics.


CLS 455/130
TXT RECEIVER OR ANALOG MODULATED SIGNAL FREQUENCY CONVERTER:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising (a) means for receiving a
    carrier wave, upon which an information signal has been modulated, and
    deriving the original information signal from the modulated carrier wave.
    Further means may be provided for converting the derived signal into a
    physical manifestation readily perceived by at least one of the human
    senses (e.g., sound) or (b) devices whereby an incoming carrier wave
    signal, which has been modulated by an analog signal, is changed from one
    carrier frequency to another carrier frequency.

    (1)     Note.  The system and apparatus found in this and the indented
    subclasses under (1) above will include wave collection means, at least one
    wave mixing or modifying means, detector, or demodulator means and
    utilization means, which utilization means may consist of a sound
    reproducing device. This class also contains subcombinations of any of the
    above recited elements combined with coupling circuitry, whereby some
    function of a complete receiver system is performed; as for example,
    antenna means broadly plus detector, radio frequency amplifier plus mixer
    means, etc., and which subcombinations are not elsewhere classifiable.

    (2)     Note.  The apparatus found in this and the indented subclasses will
    be restricted to those systems which are limited, by claimed subject
    matter, to use in the reception and utilization of electromagnetic wave
    energy transmitted in the form of a carrier wave having an analog signal of
    arbitrary message content modulated thereon or in the form of one or more
    sidebands, with or without a carrier, resulting from the modulation of a
    carrier wave by some external source.  The modulation may consist of
    amplitude modulation, frequency, or phase modulation, or any combination
    thereof.  The utilization means will in general comprise loud speaker means
    but may include visual reproduction means or in some cases a combination of
    both.

    (3)     Note.  Ordinarily this and the indented subclasses will not include
    patents whose claimed subject matter includes (a) devices for the operation
    and control of mechanical devices at a distance by radiant energy, (b)
    systems and devices for the reception and utilization of facsimile
    (television) or telegraph signals, (c) systems and devices for the
    reception of energy which utilize compressional waves in the audible range
    (telephony), (d) systems and apparatus restricted to the use of radio wave
    energy which is transmitted to and reflected from some object, the
    reflected energy being received at a receiving station (i.e., radar), and
    (e) systems and apparatus for the communication of pulse or digital
    information.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 10+ for mechanical dial
    operators; and see the notes thereto for the electrical type.

    178,    Telegraphy; and 379, Telephonic Communications, appropriate
    subclasses for line instruments restricted to use in these arts,
    particularly Class 178, subclasses 15, 17, 48, and 88+ for receivers and
    recorders adapted to code-signalling.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 113+ for miscellaneous frequency conversion or control.

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses for demodulators in general
    and particularly subclasses 315+ for frequency demodulators, subclasses
    345+ for phase demodulators, and subclasses 347+ for amplitude demodulators.

    330,    Amplifiers, appropriate subclasses for radio frequency,
    intermediate frequency, or audio frequency amplifiers, per se, useful in
    receivers in this class.

    331,    Oscillators, appropriate subclasses for electrical oscillator
    systems of general application, particularly subclasses 1+ for automatic
    frequency stabilized oscillators; and subclasses 37+ for beat frequency
    oscillators similar to the frequency conversion stage of a heterodyne type
    receiver.

    334,    Tuners, appropriate subclasses for specific adjustable resonant
    circuits, per se, utilizable as tuners for radio receivers.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 5+ for reflected
    or otherwise returned wave systems, e.g., radar; and subclasses 100+ for
    directive radio wave energy systems including receivers; see subclass 113
    for direction finding receivers; and subclasses 700+ for antennas which may
    be used with radio receivers.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    109+ for optical communication.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, for modulated carrier wave receivers and
    systems designed to simultaneously receive a plurality of messages.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclasses
    22.1+ for diagnostic test of transmission facility.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 316+ for pulse and
    digital modulated carrier wave receivers.


CLS 455/131
TXT Frequency conversion between signal source (e.g., wave collector) and
    receiver:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 where the frequency of the signal
    supplied by the signal source (antenna or cable) is converted to another
    frequency which the receiver is able to receive.


CLS 455/132
TXT Plural receivers:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 which comprises all of the essential
    elements (as defined in the definition of subclass 130 above and not merely
    by name only) of two or more separate receiver means, each of the receiver
    means being capable of, if detached from or removed from each of the other
    separate receivers, deriving a useful signal which is representative of
    useful information carried by an incoming modulated carrier wave and which
    plural receiver system is not otherwise classifiable.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter found here may include a plurality of
    structurally claimed receiver means whose input is derived from separate
    antenna or collector means, or a plurality of receiver means having some
    stage in common; for example, a common local oscillator, volume control, or
    utilization means, provided, that each recited receiver means is capable,
    if acting along and utilizing the common stage, of deriving a signal
    representative of the useful information carried by the modulation signal.
    Systems wherein a plurality of individual receiver means are fed from a
    single antenna will not be found here but in subclasses 6.1+.  For purposes
    of classification in this subclass a plurality of receivers each receiving
    its input from a single source are considered to be merely a plurality of
    output channels for a single carrier wave input even though each of the
    channels performs the normal function of a complete receiver having a
    common input means and may be tuned to receive a different wave frequency.

    (2)     Note.  The plurality of receivers found in this and the indented
    subclasses will generally be located at the same geographical location (as
    in a rack) or closely adjacent thereto (as in a building or structure), for
    example, plural nondirectional receivers utilized in a diversity system.
    The antennas or collecting means may be situated at some distance apart,
    but in the same general vicinity.  To be classified here the plurality of
    receivers must have some common cooperation or association one with
    another.  For a plurality of receivers located at distant locations
    relative to each other even though they may be responsive to a particular
    carrier wave originating at single transmitter the search must be extended
    to the systems subclasses herein-above in this class or other appropriate
    classes.


CLS 455/133
TXT With output selecting:

    Subject matter under subclass 132 where output signals from the several
    receivers are compared and a selected one of the output signals is either
    (a) applied to a utilization means, or (b) suppressed or prevented from
    appearing at the utilization means.


CLS 455/134
TXT By signal strength:

    Subject matter under subclass 133 where the output signal is selected
    according to its amplitude.


CLS 455/135
TXT By signal quality (e.g., signal to noise ratio):

    Subject matter under subclass 133 where the output signals are selected
    according to a measure of their signal quality.


CLS 455/136
TXT With control (e.g., automatic gain control, automatic frequency control,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 133 having provision for controlling an
    operating characteristic of at least one of the receivers.


CLS 455/137
TXT With output combining:

    Subject matter under subclass 132 where the outputs of two or more of the
    receivers are combined in an additive manner before being applied to a
    common utilization means.


CLS 455/138
TXT With control (e.g., automatic gas control):

    Subject matter under subclass 137 where one or more of the operating
    characteristics of one or more of the receivers is controlled.


CLS 455/139
TXT Frequency or phase control:

    Subject matter under subclass 138 where the frequency or phase of an
    oscillator in the receiver is controlled.


CLS 455/140
TXT Selectively actuated or controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 132 where each of the separate receivers may
    be independently energized, connected to a signal such as an antenna,
    individually tuned, or otherwise controlled to the exclusion of the others.


CLS 455/141
TXT Including common stage (e.g., local oscillator):

    Subject matter under subclass 132 including one or more local oscillators
    or other stage which act in common with two or more of the receivers.


CLS 455/142
TXT Convertible to different type (e.g., AM  to FM):

    Subject matter under subclass 130 comprising a receiver whose circuit can
    be changed to receive at least two different types of modulation, for
    example, amplitude or frequency modulated waves.

    (1)     Note.  Such receivers may be of the superheterodyne type and employ
    a common pre-amplifier, converter, and intermediate frequency stage for
    both types of modulation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for digital
    combined with analog transmission.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications subclass 216 for digital
    convertible to/from analog.


CLS 455/143
TXT With distinct signal path for each type:
    Subject matter under subclass 142 where the receiver contains a plurality
    of separate signal paths, each path being adapted for a different type of
    modulated signal, between the input and the output of receiver.

    (1)     Note.  An example of the subject matter found here may include
    separate diverse type collection means followed by a radio frequency stage
    or stages and a mixer with a common intermediate frequency stage followed
    by diverse detectors feeding a common audio frequency amplifier.


CLS 455/144
TXT With dual purpose amplifying or other stage:

    Subject matter under subclass 142 including one or more stages which
    perform plural functions.

    (1)     Note.  Some examples of dual purpose stages are VHF an UHF
    amplifiers, amplifier and limiter, and AM-FM detector.


CLS 455/145
TXT Panoramic display:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 including a cathode-ray oscilloscope for
    displaying the received signals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for transmitters controlled by a spectrum sweeping or panoramic
    type receiver for transmitting a jamming signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 76.12+ for
    apparatus for the analysis of complex electrical waves and which utilize
    panoramic display methods.

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses for a demodulator including a
    cathode-ray tube.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 100+ for directive
    radio wave energy panoramic-type receivers utilized as radio beacons.


CLS 455/146
TXT Plural separate paths or plural oscillators:

    Subject matter under subclass 145 wherein the receiver includes more than
    one individual circuit path or more than one local oscillator.

    (1)     Note.  For plural separator signal paths, at least a portion of the
    input carrier wave is conducted to an output utilization means by each path.

    (2)     Note.  For plural oscillators, the output of each oscillator is
    applied to one of a plurality of mixer or conversion means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143,    303+ and 313, for other types of receivers having plural signal
    paths therein.

    315+,   for plural frequency conversion means with plural local oscillators.


CLS 455/147
TXT Particular local oscillator control:

    Subject matter under subclass 145 wherein the receiver includes particular
    means whereby the frequency of the local oscillator means is maintained
    constant or whereby some other operating condition of the oscillator means
    is controlled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164.1,  for scanning receivers with automatic frequency control.

    173.1,  for mechanical or electromechanical frequency selection means with
    automatic frequency control.

    182.1,  for channel or station selection with automatic frequency control.

    208+,   for frequency or phase modulation type receivers with synchronized
    or controlled local oscillator means.

    255+,   for automatic frequency control systems for receivers in general.

    316,    for receivers with frequency conversion means with frequency
    stabilizing means for the local oscillator.


CLS 455/148
TXT With oscilloscope sweep signal derivation or control:

    Subject matter under subclass 145 wherein the receiver includes particular
    means for generating or controlling the voltage applied to the oscilloscope
    (e.g., control of voltage amplitude or cathode-ray beam intensity).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclasses 364+ for
    cathode-ray tube deflection systems in general, particularly subclasses
    383+ for ray beam intensity control.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 131+ for miscellaneous sawtooth or ramp circuit.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 143+ for free running relaxation
    oscillators utilized as sawtooth generators.


CLS 455/149
TXT Plural output (e.g., plural speakers) (not stereo):

    Subject matter under subclass 130 where the receiver has a plurality of
    separate outputs.

    (1)     Note.  Stereo receivers are classified in Class 381, subclasses 1+.


CLS 455/150.1
TXT Signal selection based on frequency (e.g., tuning):
    Subject matter under subclass 130 comprising means to cause the receiver to
    respond, selectively, to any one of two or more carrier waves.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for transceivers tuning.

    120+,   for transmitters with tuning.

    340,    for receivers in general with adjustable tuning means between
    stages.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 10+ for a radio tuner by
    names only when claimed in combination with shaft positioning means.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 76.39+ for systems
    for measuring the frequency of a cyclic current or voltage by tuning to
    resonance with a reference source.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 1+ for miscellaneous discriminating circuits and
    particularly subclasses 39+ for frequency discrimination.

    334,    Tuners, appropriate subclasses for tuners, per se.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclass for specific type inductor,
    per se, which may be used in a selective circuit, see particularly
    subclasses 130+.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses  870.40+ for telemetering
    systems including selective receivers.

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 5+ for radar receivers with wave
    selecting means and subclasses 100+ for directive receivers with selecting
    means.

    346,    Recorders, subclass 37 for the combination of a tuning responsive
    radio receiver with recording means.

    348,    Television, subclasses 725+ for television receivers having
    frequency selecting means.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 182+ for
    electric control circuits for relays which are frequency responsive.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclass for multiplex
    receivers with frequency selection means.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 316+ for pulse
    receivers with frequency selection.


CLS 455/151.1
TXT Remote control of channel or station selection:
    Subject matter under subclass 150.1 wherein the tuning means includes a
    control means that is actuated at a distance from the receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    352+,   for remote control of receivers for other than signal selection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    334,    Tuners, subclasses 8+ for remotely controlled tuner which claims
    significant details of the tuner.


CLS 455/151.2
TXT Wireless link (sonic, RF or infrared):
    Subject matter under subclass 151.1 wherein the remote control device is
    not physically connected to the receiver and generates an acoustic wave, an
    electromagnetic wave, or a pulse train (e.g., sonic, RF, or infrared).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.03+ for generic
    wireless remote control.


CLS 455/151.3
TXT Remote oscillator tuned:
    Subject matter under subclass 151.1 wherein the control means includes an
    oscillator which generates alternating-current power at a frequency which
    may be changed at will by the operator.


CLS 455/151.4
TXT Plural electronic devices controlled:
    Subject matter under subclass 151.1 wherein the  remote control apparatus
    operates at least two or more receivers.


CLS 455/152.1
TXT Of or combined with vehicle receiver:
    Subject matter under subclass 151.1 wherein the  receiver system has tuning
    means in addition to the remote control means and is carried by or combined
    with a land vehicle (e.g., automobile).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    297,    for receiver having noise or interference elimination combined with
    vehicle structure.


CLS 455/153.1
TXT Mechanical:
    Subject matter under subclass 151.1 wherein the receiver includes
    mechanical means responsive to the remote control device to the carrier
    wave.


CLS 455/153.2
TXT With wired link:
    Subject matter under subclass 153.1 wherein the remote control device is
    electrically connected to the receiver by a cable or a wire.

    (1)     Note.  Wire may carry current to a motor in the receiver which
    actuates the mechanical means to vary the frequency response.


CLS 455/154.1
TXT With indication of frequency, channel, or selector condition (e.g., tuning
    aid):Subject matter under subclass 150.1 including means for making a
    condition pertaining to the tuning of the receiver perceptible to a human
    operator.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and the indented subclass may also include TV
    tuning or channel indicators wherein the TV  receiver is broadly claimed
    which does not include any particular TV processing circuitry, e.g.,
    horizontal or vertical sync circuitry, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    for transmitters with tuning indicator.

    145+,   for receivers with panoramic display.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 10+ for mechanical radio
    tuning mechanisms which may include dial indication means.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 241+ for radio tuning indicators.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 76.11+ for devices
    for measuring or testing electricity, per se, and having indication means,
    particularly indented subclasses 76.49 and 76.51 for frequency measuring
    systems employing tuned circuits.

    329,    Demodulators, subclasses 315+ for frequency detectors with
    indication means.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 64 for oscillator devices with indicating
    means.

    334,    Tuners, appropriate subclasses for tuning devices, per se, with
    indicating means.

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 350+ for directive radio energy
    receivers with indicating means.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 1+ for visual display systems
    with selective electrical control.

    348,    Television, subclasses 569+ for television receivers with tuning
    indicators.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclass 12
    for stereo receivers with indicators.


CLS 455/154.2
TXT Scanning display:
    Subject matter under subclass 154.1 having means to automatically and
    continuously varies the carrier wave frequency to which the receiver is
    tuned and means to continuously display the frequency.


CLS 455/155.1
TXT By meter:
    Subject matter under subclass 154.1 comprising a movable visual indication
    actuated by electromagnetic means.


CLS 455/156.1
TXT Audible indicator:
    Subject matter under subclass 154.1 comprising means to generate a specific
    tone or sound or to vary the normal sound output of the receiver.


CLS 455/157.1
TXT Analog frequency indication (e.g., dial):
    Subject matter under subclass 154.1 including means for indicating the
    frequency value of the carrier wave to which the receiver is adjusted or
    tuned (e.g., tuning dial with a pointer).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67+,    for transmitters and receivers at separate stations with measuring,
    testing, and monitoring which may include the frequency display of the
    receiver.

    226.1,  for receiver measuring, testing, and calibration apparatus which
    may include means for displaying the actual receiver tuned frequency.


CLS 455/157.2
TXT With light indication or bar type:
    Subject matter under subclass 157.1 wherein the perceptible means is a line
    divided into equal measures which is variably illuminated to indicate the
    condition.


CLS 455/158.1
TXT Channel index indication:
    Subject matter under subclass 154.1 wherein the indication means displays
    information pertaining to the identity of the channel or station to which
    the receiver is tuned.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 168+ for keyboard input for a
    visual display system with selective electrical control, and subclasses 33+
    and 141+ for particular types of character displays in a visual display
    system with selective electrical control.

    348,    Television, subclasses 569+ for TV receivers which may include
    channel number displays.


CLS 455/158.2
TXT With electronic digital indication:
    Subject matter under subclass 158.1 wherein the display means is an
    electronic means for visually representing the channel or station number
    (e.g., seven-segment numerical display).


CLS 455/158.3
TXT Using a counter:
    Subject matter under subclass 158.2 wherein the electronic means includes a
    counter which counts control pulses transmitted by the remote control
    device to cause the receiver to be tuned from channel to channel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, appropriate subclasses for pulse counting means, per
    se.


CLS 455/158.4
TXT With multiple display functions:
    Subject matter under subclass 158.1 wherein the channel index indicating
    means also displays another kind of information (e.g., time of day,
    frequency, stereo mode, etc.).


CLS 455/158.5
TXT Non-numeric display (e.g., call letters):
    Subject matter under subclass 158.1 wherein the channel index indication
    includes alphanumeric data about a received channel.


CLS 455/159.1
TXT Variable light indication:
    Subject matter under subclass 154.1 which the condition is indicated by a
    variable light source.

    (1)     Note.  The variable light indication source may be an electron beam
    "ray" tube or LED by which tuning may be adjusted correctly.


CLS 455/159.2
TXT Plural lamps:
    Subject matter under subclass 159.1 wherein the variable light indicator
    contains at least two or more light sources.


CLS 455/160.1
TXT Plural tuning modes (e.g., manual and scanning, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 150.1 having two or more signal selection
    means (e.g., manual and automatic scanning and means to selectively actuate
    one of the signal selection means).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is restricted to plural  discrete selection
    modes. Systems such as coarse tuning and fine tuning are excluded and can
    be found in subclasses 173.1, 182.3, and 192.3.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161.1+, for frequency scanning receivers.

    170.1+, for receivers with manual, mechanical,
    or electromechanical selection.

    179.1+, for channel or station selection receiv-
     ers.

    188.1+, for band selection receivers.


CLS 455/161.1
TXT Frequency scanning:
    Subject matter under subclass 150.1 in which the selection means includes
    means for automatically tuning the receiver through a desired frequency
    range or a plurality of frequency ranges to obtain a carrier signal having
    predetermined characteristics (e.g., frequency, amplitude).

    (1)     Note.  The selection means in this subclass  and the indented
    subclasses may include electrical, mechanical, or electromechanical
    systems.  For example, the selection means may be adjusted to resonance at
    a desired frequency automatically by the action of a manually operated
    button, lever, dial, or knob means or means whereby the selection means is
    locked or clamped in a predetermined position as a consequence of the
    frequency of the received input carrier signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for receiver selection with scanning.

    77,     for transceivers with automatic tuning.

    125,    for transmitters with automatic adjustment of tuning.

    145,    for panoramic receivers with frequency scanning.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 76.12+ for
    frequency spectrum analyzers using scanning receivers.

    348,    Television, subclass 734 for television receivers with search
    tuning.


CLS 455/161.2
TXT With processor control:
    Subject matter under subclass 161.1 wherein the means includes a
    programmable controller for automatically tuning the receiver through the
    desired frequency range.


CLS 455/161.3
TXT Using signal strength or quality:
    Subject matter under subclass 161.1 wherein the predetermined
    characteristic is the strength of the information signal or the
    signal-to-noise ratio.


CLS 455/162.1
TXT Motor activated:
    Subject matter under subclass 161.1 in which the selection means is
    controlled by a motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170.1+, for signal selection receivers employing mechanical or
    electromechanical selection means such as a motor, particularly subclass
    172.1 for time activated receiver selection combined with a motor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    generic motor control device.

    334,    Tuners, subclasses 20+ for motor operated band scanning or selector
    circuit for tuners, per se.


CLS 455/163.1
TXT Reversible motor (e.g., end-stop control):
    Subject matter under subclass 162.1 in which the motor is bi-directional
    and circuit means is provided for controlling the direction of operation.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for selective  receivers in which the
    tuning means has limitations in motion and cam or other actuating means
    controls the motor circuit to prevent damage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass  626 for limit or
    end-stop control of an electric motor in a servo system and subclasses 280+
    for motor reversing systems.


CLS 455/164.1
TXT With automatic frequency control:
    Subject matter under subclass 161.1 including a self-regulating control
    circuit in the receiver which compensates for small variations in a carrier
    signal frequency to provide a stable audio output.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for transceivers with frequency stabilization.

    119,    for transmitters with automatic frequency control.

    173.1,  for manual, mechanical, or electromechanical frequency selection
    means with automatic frequency control.

    182.2,  for channel or station selection with automatic frequency control.

    192.2,  for receiver tuning in general with automatic frequency control or
    fine tuning control.

    257,    for nontuning receivers with automatic frequency control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 1+ for oscillators having automatic
    frequency control.

    348,    Television, subclass 735 for television receivers with automatic
    frequency control.


CLS 455/164.2
TXT Processor controlled (AFC):
    Subject matter under subclass 164.1 wherein the automatic frequency control
    is controlled by a programmable controller.

    (1)     Note. The processor may be a microprocessor.


CLS 455/165.1
TXT With frequency synthesizer:
    Subject matter under subclass 161.1 wherein the selection means includes
    means for deriving a plurality of local oscillator frequencies from a
    variable frequency oscillator by frequency multiplication or division.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76,     for transceivers with frequency synthesizers.

    183.1,  for channel or station selection with frequency synthesizers.

    260,    for automatic frequency control receivers with frequency
    synthesizers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 1+ for automatic oscillator frequency
    control, particularly subclass 1 for oscillator frequency control circuits
    with particular logic elements (e.g., programmable divider in a phase
    locked loop).


CLS 455/166.1
TXT With channel skipping selection:
    Subject matter under subclass 161.1 including     means to cause pass over
    of certain carrier frequencies during the scanning process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175.1,  for manual, mechanical, or electromechanical frequency selection
    means with channel preset.


CLS 455/166.2
TXT With priority channel selection:
    Subject matter under subclass 166.1 wherein the channel skipping selection
    includes means to cause the selection of preferred carrier frequencies over
    other carrier frequencies.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179.1,  which may include preferred channel selection.


CLS 455/167.1
TXT With dual sweeping:
    Subject matter under subclass 161.1 including a plurality of means (e.g.,
    two sweeping oscillators) operating in sequence to cause receiver scanning.


CLS 455/168.1
TXT Multiband:
    Subject matter under subclass 161.1 including means for scanning the
    receiver over a plurality of frequency bands.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176.1,  for manual, mechanical, or  electromechanical frequency selection
    means combined with band selection.

    180.1,  for channel selection combined with band selection.

    188.1+, for general band selection circuits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    334,    Tuners, subclasses 18+ for band scanning used in an electromagnetic
    operated tuner.


CLS 455/169.1
TXT With particular variable voltage or current tuning:
    Subject matter under subclass 161.1 including particular means for
    providing a changeable voltage or current to a receiver oscillator for
    scanning.

    (1)     Note.  Some significant detail of the voltage or current supply of
    receiver oscillator scanning must be claimed for classification in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195.1,  for signal selection systems in general using variable voltage or
    current tuning.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    334,    Tuners, subclasses 11+ for particular variable voltage or current
    responsive tuners.


CLS 455/169.2
TXT With varactor diode:
    Subject matter under subclass 169.1 wherein the particular variable voltage
    or current tuning means includes a two-terminal semiconductor device
    capacitance varies with the applied voltage.


CLS 455/170.1
TXT With mechanical or electromechanical selection:
    Subject matter under subclass 150.1 including mechanical or
    electromechanical operating devices (e.g., knobs, push buttons, tuning
    shafts, movable cores, ganged elements, etc.) for tuning the receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120+,   for transmitter tuning which may include manual, mechanical, or
    electromechanical means for frequency selection.

    160.1,  for receivers comprising plural selection modes which may include
    manual, mechanical, or electromechanical selection means.

    161.1+, for frequency scanning receivers which may include manual,
    mechanical, or  electromechanical means for frequency  selection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 10+ for mechanical radio
    tuning mechanisms.

    334,    Tuners, appropriate subclasses for mechanical or electromagnetic
    type tuners.


CLS 455/171.1
TXT Time actuated:
    Subject matter under subclass 170.1 wherein the mechanical or
    electromechanical selection means is controlled by a timing device (e.g.,
    clock).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181.1,  for channel or station selection which is       controlled or
    programmed by a timing device.

    231,    for receiver combined with diverse device, such diverse device
    being a clock.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, appropriate
    subclasses for particular clock structure.


CLS 455/172.1
TXT Including a motor:
    Subject matter under subclass 171.1 wherein the selection means is done by
    an electric motor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162.1,  for motor activated frequency scanning receivers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    334,    Tuners, subclasses 20+ for motor activated band scanning or
    selector circuit for tuners, per se.


CLS 455/173.1
TXT With automatic frequency control of fine tuning:
    Subject matter under subclass 170.1 wherein the manual, mechanical, or
    electromechanical means includes means for automatically stabilizing a
    receiver local oscillator frequency or means to permit fine adjustment of
    the local oscillator to the carrier frequency of a signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for transceivers with frequency stabilization (e.g., AFC).

    119,    for transmitters with automatic carrier frequency stabilization.

    164.1+, for frequency scanning receivers with automatic frequency control.

    182.1+, for channel or station selection receivers with automatic frequency
     control or fine tuning control.

    192.1+, for signal selection in general with automatic frequency control or
    fine tuning control.

    255,    for nontuning receivers with automatic frequency control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    334,    Tuners, subclasses 13, 16, and 26+ for tuners with automatic
    frequency centering circuits.


CLS 455/174.1
TXT With muting (e.g., silent tuning):
    Subject matter under subclass 170.1 including means for silencing the
    receiver at all times except when the signal selection means is exactly
    adjusted to the desired carrier frequency.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194.1+, for signal selection receivers (nonmechanical type) with muting.

    212+,   for FM receivers with muting or squelch circuits.

    218+,   for receivers in general with muting or         squelching circuits.


CLS 455/175.1
TXT With carrier wave preset:
    Subject matter under subclass 170.1 including means for preselecting a
    desired carrier wave frequency (e.g., by push buttons).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160.1,  for receivers with plural signal selection modes wherein at least
    one such mode may be a preset signal selection mode.

    166.1+, for frequency scanning receivers which  may comprise means for
    preselecting a channel to be skipped or a priority channel to be monitored.

    186.1+, for channel or station selection receivers with means for
    programming predetermined channel information into a storage memory.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    334,    Tuners, subclass 29 for tuners with predetermined center frequency
    selectors.


CLS 455/176.1
TXT Combined with band selection:
    Subject matter under subclass 170.1 including means for selecting one of a
    plurality of carrier wave bands.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168.1,  for multiband frequency scanning receivers.

    180.1,  for channel or station selection receivers combined with band
    selection.

    188.1+, for band selection receivers in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    334,    Tuners, subclasses 18+ for band selector with electromagnetic
    operator.


CLS 455/177.1
TXT Combined with other control (e.g., bandwidth, volume, gain, etc.):Subject
    matter under subclass 170.1 including additional means for controlling
    other functions of the receiver (e.g., bandwidth, volume, gain, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200.1,  for nonmechanical or nonelectromechanical-type frequency selection
    receivers with other control.

    232+,   for receivers in general with gain, level, or volume control.

    266,    for receivers with selectivity or bandwidth control.


CLS 455/178.1
TXT With plurality of tunable circuits:
    Subject matter under subclass 170.1 including separate circuits each being
    adjustable by the operation of manual, mechanical, or electromechanical
    means (e.g., tuning shaft).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    187.1,  for channel or station selection receivers using separate tuned
    circuits for each channel or station.

    191.1+, for band selection receivers with plural tuned circuits or tunable
    coupled stages.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    334,    Tuners, subclass 2 for plural diverse type tuners and subclasses
    42+ for resonant line element tuners employing plural operated tuning units.


CLS 455/179.1
TXT Channel or station selection:
    Subject matter under subclass 150.1 including means to tune the receiver to
    a desired carrier wave frequency.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and the indented  subclasses may also include
    TV channel or station selections wherein the TV receiver is broadly claimed
    and does not include any particular TV processing circuitry, e.g.,
    horizontal and vertical sync, circuitry, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73+,    for transceivers which may include channel selection means.

    151.1,  for remote control of channel or station selection.

    160.1,  for receivers with plural selection modes which may include channel
    selection means.

    161.1+, for frequency scanning receivers which   may include channel
    selection means, particularly subclasses 166.1+ for channel skipping or
    priority channel selection.

    170.1+, for receivers with mechanical or electromechanical selection which
    may include channel selection means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    334,    Tuners, appropriate subclasses for tuners, per se, with channel or
    station selection means.

    348,    Television, subclasses 570 and 731+ for television channel or
    station selections with such particular processing circuitry.


CLS 455/180.1
TXT Combined with band selection:
    Subject matter under subclass 179.1 including means in addition to the
    channel selection means for selecting a desired frequency range from a
    plurality of frequency ranges, whereby a channel frequency can be selected
    from such desired frequency range.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for transceivers with tuning which may  include band selection
    means.

    168.1,  for frequency scanning receivers with band selection means.

    176.1,  for receivers with mechanical or electromechanical selection means
    combined with band selection.

    188.1+, for band selection receivers in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 570 and 731+ for TV tuning which may include
    band selection means (e.g., UHF, VHF).


CLS 455/180.2
TXT UHF and VHF:
    Subject matter under subclass 180.1 wherein the desired frequency range is
    within 30 to 3000 MHz.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188.2,  for band selection receivers in general which include UHF and VHF
    band.


CLS 455/180.3
TXT With phase locked loop (PLL) tuning:
    Subject matter under subclass 180.2 wherein the tuning means includes a
    tuning circuit whose output locks onto and tracks a reference signal for
    tuning the desired frequency.

    (1)     Note.  Phase locking is accomplished by  comparing the phase of an
    output signal and the reference signal, and then converting any difference
    into a correction voltage that changes the phase of output so it matches
    that of the reference or the input signal.


CLS 455/180.4
TXT Varactor tuned (e.g., varactor diode):
    Subject matter under subclass 180.2 including a two-terminal semiconductor
    device capacitance for tuning the desired channel or station frequency.


CLS 455/181.1
TXT Time controlled:
    Subject matter under subclass 179.1 wherein the channel or station
    selection means is activated or programmed by a timing device (e.g., clock).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171.1,  for receivers with manual, mechanical, or electromechanical
    selection means controlled by a timing device.


CLS 455/182.1
TXT With frequency control:
    Subject matter under subclass 179.1 wherein the channel or station
    selection includes a local oscillator and a control means for stabilizing
    the oscillator frequency.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for transceiver with frequency stabilization.

    164.1+, for frequency scanning receivers with    automatic frequency
    control.

    173.1,  for receivers with mechanical or electromechanical frequency
    selection  means using AFC or fine tune control.

    192.1+, for signal selection with AFC or fine  tuning  control.

    257+,   for receivers in general with automatic frequency control.


CLS 455/182.2
TXT Automatic (AFC):
    Subject matter under subclass 182.1 wherein the control means is a
    self-regulating control circuit in the receiver which compensates for small
    variations in a carrier signal frequency to provide a stable audio output.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclass 735 for television receiver with automatic
    frequency control.


CLS 455/182.3
TXT Fine tuning:

    Subject matter under subclass 179.1 wherein the channel or station
    selection means includes a  local oscillator and means to permit fine
    adjustment (either manually or automatically, i.e., AFT) of the oscillator
    frequency.


CLS 455/183.1
TXT With frequency synthesizer:
    Subject matter under subclass 179.1 including means for deriving a
    plurality of local oscillator frequencies from a variable frequency
    oscillator by frequency multiplication or division.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76,     for transceivers with frequency synthesizers.

    165.1,  for frequency scanning receivers with frequency synthesizers.

    260,    for automatic frequency control receivers with frequency
    synthesizers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 1 for oscillator frequency control circuits
    with particular logic elements (e.g., programmable divider in a phase
    locked loop).


CLS 455/183.2
TXT Processor controlled:
    Subject matter under subclass 183.1 wherein the frequency synthesizer
    includes a programmable controller for selecting an appropriate one of the
    local oscillator frequencies to tune the receiver to the desired channel or
    station.


CLS 455/184.1
TXT With comparing desired and existing tuning conditions:
    Subject matter under subclass 179.1 including comparison means for
    determining the difference between the carrier wave to which the receiver
    is current tuned and a newly selected carrier wave.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161.1+, for frequency scanning receivers which  may include comparison
    means.

    170.1+, for manual, mechanical, or electromechanical frequency selection
    which may also include comparison means.


CLS 455/185.1
TXT With channel information storage:
    Subject matter under subclass 179.1 including     means for storing about
    the channel to which the receiver is tuned.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass may include a digital memory for storing
    channel number representation or a storage capacitor for storing channel
    voltage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77+,    for transceiver tuning which may include channel information
    storage.

    161.1+, for frequency scanning receivers which may include channel
    information storage.


CLS 455/186.1
TXT With memory control or programming:          Subject matter under subclass
    185.1 including means for controlling the address or readout of the storage
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclasses
    for generic memory device, particularly subclasses 185.01+ for floating
    gate memory storage  (e.g., flash memory).


CLS 455/186.2
TXT Having a keyboard:
    Subject matter under subclass 186.1 wherein the controlling means includes
    an array of push-button switches with related functions for programming the
    channel information.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses
    for generic switches.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 22+ for bodily
    actuated code generator including keyboard or keypad.


CLS 455/187.1
TXT Separate tuned circuits for each channel or station:
    Subject matter under subclass 179.1 including a plurality of separate and
    distinct circuit means each of which is tuned or tunable to resonate at a
    particular frequency corresponding to the frequency of a modulated carrier
    wave channel.

    (1)     Note.  Each of the plurality of circuit means  may be preadjusted
    to be resonant at the carrier frequency of a separate transmitting station
    and may be selectively inserted into the system at random or in a
    sequential order.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    178.1,  for receivers with manual, mechanical, or electromechanical
    selection means using a plurality of tunable circuits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    334,    Tuners, appropriate subclasses, especially  subclass 7 for push
    button-type tuners utilizing a plurality of tuned selector circuits.


CLS 455/188.1
TXT Band selection:
    Subject matter under subclass 150.1 including means for selecting ranges of
    radio frequencies lying between specified sets of limits, each  range
    including one or more carrier wave channels.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77+,    for transceiver tuning which may include band selection means.

    168.1,  for multiband frequency scanning receivers which may include band
    selection means.

    176.1,  for mechanical or electromechanical frequency selection receivers
    combined with band selection.

    180.1,  for channel or station selection receivers combined with band
    selection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing,  subclasses 76.39+ for
    frequency measuring systems which may include band changing or selection
    means.

    334,    Tuners, appropriate subclasses for tuners  with band selection or
    changing means.

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 350+ for directive radio energy
    receivers which may include band selection means.

    348,    Television, subclasses 570 and 731+ for TV tuning receivers which
    may include band selection means.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclass for multiplex
    receivers which may include band selection means.


CLS 455/188.2
TXT UHF and VHF:
    Subject matter under subclass 188.1 wherein the frequency range is within
    30 to 3000 MHz.


CLS 455/189.1
TXT With plural separate mixer or converter circuits:
    Subject matter under subclass 188.1 including two or more separate and
    distinct means for generating an output signal equal to the sum or
    difference of a local oscillator frequency and the carrier wave frequency
    or means for converting the carrier wave frequency to some other frequency
    by combining it with another frequency.

    (1)     Note.  The separate conversion means may be in separate signal
    channel paths for providing separate intermediate frequency outputs or may
    provide input signals for a common intermediate frequency channel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for radio repeaters with plural conversion stages.

    146,    for panoramic receivers which may comprise plural separate mixers
    or converter circuits.

    168.1,  for frequency scanning receivers which  may comprise plural
    separate mixers or conversion circuits.

    176.1,  for manual, mechanical, or electromechanical signal selection
    combined with band selection which may include plural frequency conversion
    means.

    180.1,  for channel or station selection receivers combined with band
    selection means which may comprise plural frequency conversion circuits.

    207,    for frequency modulation receivers with plural conversion means.

    314+,   for receivers with frequency conversion  systems comprising a
    plurality of plural   separate successive conversion means.


CLS 455/190.1
TXT With frequency conversion:
    Subject matter under subclass 188.1 including means for converting the
    carrier wave frequency to some other frequency by combining it with another
    frequency.


    (1)     Note.  The converting means may, for example, be a separate
    frequency band converter, connected between the antenna and the receiver
    input for adapting a receiver operative in one frequency band (e.g., VHF)
    to receive signals in another frequency band (e.g., UHF).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142+,   for systems wherein a receiver adapted to receive a wave containing
    a first type modulation component has means to convert it to receive a wave
    containing a second type modulation component or vice versa (e.g., AM or
    FM).


CLS 455/191.1
TXT With plurality of tuned circuits:
    Subject matter under subclass 188.1 including two or more tuned circuits
    each tunable to a different frequency.

    (1)     Note.  The separate tuned circuits need not  consist of separate
    distinct physical elements, but any two or more may share one or more
    elements in common.  As an example, a single inductance may be divided into
    sections with one or more sections being parallel connected with a
    capacitor whereby each of the sections when so connected constitutes a
    separate tuned circuit.  The plurality of tuned circuits may be situated
    either in the input to or the output of a radio frequency amplifier.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    340,    for receivers in general with tunable or        adjustable coupling
    circuits between stages.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    334,    Tuners, appropriate subclasses for band  selecting tuners, per se.


CLS 455/191.2
TXT Varactor tuned:
    Subject matter under subclass 191.1 wherein the plurality of tuned circuits
    includes a two-terminal semiconductor capacitive device for tuning a
    desired frequency range.


CLS 455/191.3
TXT With switching between stages:
    Subject matter under subclass 191.1 wherein the plurality of tuned circuits
    includes a mechanical or electrical device that completes or breaks a
    signal path or sends the signal over a different path.


CLS 455/192.1
TXT With frequency control:
    Subject matter under subclass 150.1 including a   control means for
    stabilizing a receiver local oscillator frequency.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for transceivers with automatic frequency control.

    119,    for transmitters with automatic frequency control.

    164.1,  for frequency scanning receivers with automatic frequency control.

    182.1+, for channel or station selection receivers with frequency control.

    255,    for nontuning receivers with automatic frequency control.


CLS 455/192.2
TXT Automatic (AFC):
    Subject  matter under subclass 192.1 wherein the control means is a
    self-regulating control circuit in the receiver which compensates for small
    variations in a carrier signal frequency to provide a stable audio output.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS SUBCLASS:

    164.1,  for frequency scanning receivers with automatic frequency control.

    173.1,  for receivers with mechanical or electromechanical frequency
    selection means using AFC or fine tuning control.

    182.2,  for channel or station selection  receivers with automatic
    frequency control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclass 735 for television receiver with automatic
    frequency control.


CLS 455/192.3
TXT Fine tuning:
    Subject matter under subclass 192.1 wherein the  control means includes
    means to permit fine  adjustment (either manually or automatically, i.e.,
    AFT) of the local oscillator to the carrier frequency of a desired signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173.1,  for receivers with mechanical or electromechanical frequency
    selection means using AFC or fine tuning control.

    182.3,  for channel or station selection  receivers with manual or
    automatic fine  tuning.


CLS 455/193.1
TXT With antenna circuit tuning:
     Subject matter under subclass 150.1 wherein the  signal selection means
    comprises a tunable RF circuit coupled to a carrier wave reception means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121+,   for tunable transmitters with tuning means in the antenna circuit.

    275,    for receivers with plural antennas and including frequency
    selecting means.

    289,    for receivers with tunable coupling means between the antenna and
    receiver input.


CLS 455/193.2
TXT With plural resonant circuits:
    Subject matter under subclass 193.1 wherein the  tunable antenna circuit
    includes a plurality circuits which contain both inductance and capacitance
    and are therefore tuned to a resonance at a certain frequency.


CLS 455/193.3
TXT Including varactor diode:
     Subject matter under subclass 193.1 wherein the  tunable RF circuit
    includes a two-terminal  semiconductor capacitive device.


CLS 455/194.1
TXT With muting (e.g., silent tuning):
    Subject matter under subclass 150.1 comprising a means to silence the
    receiver while it is being tuned to the desired carrier frequency (e.g.,
    silent tuning).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174.1,  for mechanical or electromechanical  signal selection receivers
    with muting  means.

    212,    for frequency or phase modulation  receivers having squelch
    circuits or other output silencing.

    218,    for receivers having squelch in general.


CLS 455/194.2
TXT Amplifier controlled:
    Subject matter under subclass 194.1 wherein the means includes an amplifier
    in a received signal path whose gain is controlled in such a manner that
    the audio output is muted  during the silent tuning.


CLS 455/195.1
TXT Variable voltage or current tuning:
    Subject matter under subclass 150.1 wherein the means to select the carrier
    wave frequency is responsive to voltage or current.

    (1)     Note.  Some significant detail of the voltage or current supply for
    carrier signal selection must be claimed for classification in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    169.1+, for frequency scanning receivers with particular variable voltage
    or current  tuning.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    334,    Tuners, subclasses 11+ for particular  variable voltage or current
    responsive tuners.


CLS 455/196.1
TXT Including variation of local oscillator frequency:
    Subject matter under subclass 150.1 which includes a variable frequency
    source of unmodulated oscillation.

    (1)     Note. Signal frequency selection effected by frequency variation of
    the oscillation source is classified herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    320,    for a frequency converter with a local oscillator in which the
    coupling means is variably tuned.


CLS 455/197.1
TXT By simultaneous control with signal selection:
    Subject matter under subclass 196.1 in which the local oscillator frequency
    and the carrier wave frequency are varied by a common actuator.


CLS 455/197.2
TXT Variable capacitor tuned:
    Subject matter under subclass 197.1 comprising an RF tuned circuit and an
    oscillator tuned circuit, each containing a variable capacitor which is
    tuned by the common actuator.


CLS 455/197.3
TXT Including additional tuning circuit:
    Subject matter under subclass 197.2 including more than two resonant
    circuits in combination with an  additional resonant circuit having a
    variable capacitor which is varied by the common actuator.


CLS 455/198.1
TXT Including distributed parameter control device:
    Subject matter under subclass 197.1 wherein the means to select either the
    carrier wave or the local oscillator frequency is of the electromagnetic
    wave transmission  type (e.g., resonators, waveguides).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks,  appropriate subclasses for
    such distributed parameter devices and networks.

    334,    Tuners, subclasses 41+ for tuners having resonant line elements.


CLS 455/199.1
TXT Discrete frequency types (e.g., channel switching):
    Subject matter under subclass 197.1 in which the frequency selection means
    selects distinct, spaced apart, frequencies.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179.1,  for similar signal selectors absent local oscillator frequency
    variation.


CLS 455/200.1
TXT With other control (e.g., volume, gain, bandwidth, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 150.1 including  significant details of the
    signal selection means  combined with at least one other functional control
    means.

    (1)     Note.  To complete the field of search in this class for subject
    matter found in this subclass, and in which the said other control means is
    included in some detail, further search must be made in the appropriate
    subclass relating to the  particular control means.

    (2)     Note. Wherein the subject matter claimed  includes two or more type
    of control means equally  claimed as to significant details classification
    will be in the subclass relating to the particular control means which is
    highest in the schedule. For example, wherein volume control and tuning
    control are both claimed with equal particularity,  classification will be
    in subclass 200 with an official cross-reference in subclass 233, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177.1,  for manual, mechanical, or electromechanical type signal selection
    receivers with other control means.

    232+,   for gain or volume control means.

    233,    for volume control means combined with other control means.

    255+,   for local oscillator frequency control systems.

    256,    for frequency control combined with other control means which other
    means may be  tuning or wave selection control.

    266,    for selectivity control wherein the  frequency bandwidth is
    controlled for any desired carrier wave received.

    353,    for remote control means controlling a plurality of conditions from
    a remote position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    334,    Tuners, appropriate subclasses for tuners, per se, which may be
    combined with other control means  mechanically.


CLS 455/201
TXT Exalted carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 relating to a receiver system adapted to
    derive an output voltage representative of useful information modulated
    upon a carrier wave and comprising means whereby the carrier component is
    separated from the sideband or bands, amplified and recombined with the
    sideband or bands for the purpose of preventing the effects of selective
    fading or for obtaining a relatively undistorted output.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    296,    for receiver systems in general having noise or other interference
    elimination.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    329,    Demodulators, subclass 358 for a synchronous amplitude demodulator.


CLS 455/202
TXT Suppressed carrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 relating to a receiver system adapted to
    derive an output voltage representative of useful information modulated
    upon a carrier wave in the form of amplitude modulation, the carrier
    portion of the resultant wave being reduced in amplitude at the transmitter
    with only one or both of the sideband signals being transmitted to the
    receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for transmitter and receiver systems of the suppressed carrier type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclass 270 for transmitter and
    receiver systems with suppressed carrier; subclass 301 for transmitters
    with suppressed carrier and subclass 321 for receivers with suppressed
    carrier.


CLS 455/203
TXT Carrier and single sideband:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 relating to a receiver system adapted to
    derive an output voltage representative of useful information being
    transmitted by means of the carrier and one sideband only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for transmitter and receiver systems of the single sideband type.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclass 270 for transmitter and
    receiver systems with single sideband; subclass 301 for single sideband
    transmitters and subclass 321 for single sideband receivers.


CLS 455/204
TXT Vestigial sideband:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 relating to a receiver system adapted to
    derive an output voltage representative of useful information modulated
    upon a carrier wave, the information having been transmitted via a signal
    comprising a carrier and one normal sideband the other sideband having been
    largely but not completely suppressed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for transmitter and receiver vestigial sideband systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 725+ for TV receivers which may include
    vestigial sideband.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclass 270 for transmitter and
    receiver pulse systems with vestigial sideband; subclass 301 for vestigial
    sideband pulse transmitters and subclass 321 for vestigial sideband pulse
    receivers.


CLS 455/205
TXT Frequency or phase modulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 comprising a receiver system designed to
    convert a frequency-modulated or phase-modulated carrier wave input into
    perceptible output signals representative of the useful information
    contained in the modulation signal.

    (1)     Note.  The basic elements of receivers included in this and the
    indented subclasses includes an input means (e.g., an antenna or converter
    means, intermediate frequency amplifier means, limiter means, frequency or
    phase discriminator and/or demodulator means, low (e.g., audio) frequency
    amplifier means and utilization means such as a loud speaker.

    (2)     Note.  The subject matter found in this and the indented subclasses
    ordinarily will not include a frequency or phase modulation receiver by
    name only (i.e., recited as in a frequency modulation receiver, etc.)
    followed by specific details of an otherwise classifiable system which is
    not limited by its function to use in a frequency or phase modulation
    receiver.  However, where the disclosure relates to such a frequency or
    phase modulation receiver and the receiver is included by name only
    followed by specifically claimed subject matter which is peculiar to such
    type a receiver, classification will be herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for frequency modulation-type radio repeater systems.

    42+,    for spaced transmitter and receiver systems of the frequency or
    phase modulation type.

    110+,   for frequency or phase modulated transmitters, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 66.1+ for frequency shift telegraph
    receivers.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 76.39+ for
    frequency comparison or testing devices; and subclasses 76.77+ for phase
    comparison means.

    329,    Demodulators, subclasses 315+ for a frequency demodulator and
    subclasses 345+ for a phase demodulator.

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 117+ and 144+ for frequency or phase
    modulator, per se.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 870.18+ for frequency or
    phase modulated telemetry systems; and subclasses 825.70 and 825.71+ for
    phase and frequency responsive selective systems.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 17.5 for frequency
    or phase modulation radar systems; subclasses 100+ for directional
    receivers utilizing a frequency modulated input.

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 400+ for facsimile systems which may utilize
    frequency modulation.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclass 215 for multiplex phase
    modulation, and subclass 483 for multiplex frequency or angle modulation.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 271+, 302+, and 322+,
    for frequency or phase modulated carrier wave pulse or digital
    communications.


CLS 455/206
TXT Responsive to one of overlapping signals:

    Subject matter under subclass 205 in which the receiver has means by which
    a desired signal is detected regardless of the pressure of an overlapping
    signal, whether stronger or weaker.


CLS 455/207
TXT With plural conversion:

    Subject matter under subclass 205 including a plurality of mixing or
    conversion means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for transmitters with plural stages of modulation.

    314,    for receivers in general with wave modifying or conversion systems
    including plural successive conversion stages.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 119+ and 145 for phase or frequency
    modulators having plural successive stages of modulation.


CLS 455/208
TXT With synchronized or controlled local oscillator:

    Subject matter under subclass 205 including means whereby the operating
    frequency of a local oscillator device is maintained in   synchronism with
    a reference frequency, is maintained constant or is varied in accordance
    with a variation of the frequency of an input signal or means whereby some
    other operating condition of the local oscillator is controlled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196,    for signal selection based on frequency (e.g., tuning) means
    combined with local oscillator tuning means.

    255,    for automatic frequency control or synchronization systems for
    receivers in general.

    316,    for frequency modifying or conversion means combined with plural
    local oscillator means and provided with frequency stabilization means for
    at least one local oscillator.

    502+,   for plural spaced transmitter and receiver systems with
    synchronization means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    329,    Demodulators, subclasses 323+ and 346 for combining locally
    generated oscillations with a frequency modulated or phase modulated signal
    respectively.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 1+ for automatic frequency stabilization of
    an oscillator or oscillators utilizing phase or frequency sensing means.


CLS 455/209
TXT Plural local oscillators or mixers:

    Subject matter under subclass 208 where there is more than one local
    oscillator or mixer in the receiver.


CLS 455/210
TXT With carrier amplitude modulation elimination (e.g., specified limiter):

    Subject matter under subclass 205 in which the receiver system includes
    means for the elimination of amplitude modulation components of the input
    carrier wave signal.

    (1)     Note.  The amplitude modulation component of the input signal wave
    may arise from any source external to the receiver but most generally
    arises at the output of the transmitter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for spaced transmitter and receiver systems of the frequency or
    phase-modulated type with preemphasis or other predistortion network.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    329,    Demodulators, subclasses 318+ for reduction of amplitude variation
    in a frequency demodulator.

    332,    Modulators, subclass 18 for modulators with means to remove
    undesired amplitude modulation.


CLS 455/211
TXT Combined with other function:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 where the tube or circuit which performs
    the carrier amplitude modulation elimination also performs another
    function, for example, amplification.


CLS 455/212
TXT With squelch or other audio output silencing:

    Subject matter under subclass 205 wherein the receiver system includes
    means whereby the receiver is prevented from producing audio-frequency
    output in the total absence of an input signal or in the absence of a
    predetermined signal-noise ratio relationship.

    (1)     Note.  The squelch means may be operated by signal energy in the
    receiver pass band, by noise quieting means, by a combination of the two,
    or means to prevent undesired variations in the output of the i.f.,
    amplifier from causing a response in the output of the demodulator.

    (2)     Note.  The amplitude limiting means found in this subclass is
    intended to ensure that the amplitude variations in the modulated wave
    input to the demodulator are an accurate representation of frequency
    modulation of the input exclusive of noise or other undesired effects and
    are not to be confused with the amplitude modulation elimination means
    found in subclasses 210+.

    (3)     Note.  To complete the field of search for receivers in general
    utilizing muting or squelching means consult subclass 218.

    (4)     Note.  The squelch means may be operated by an externally generated
    signal having special modulation characteristics; such systems are
    classified in subclasses 35.1+.


CLS 455/213
TXT Using specified filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 in which the squelch or silencing action,
    or its reverse, is determined by a frequency discriminating means,
    specifically recited.

    (1)     Note.  The filter means may be high, low, or band pass or reject.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 552+ for miscellaneous unwanted signal suppression
    utilizing an active filter.


CLS 455/214
TXT With particular discriminator or detector:

    Subject matter under subclass 205 in which the system includes the
    combination of a frequency or phase-modulation type receiver, which may be
    broadly claimed, with a specific discriminator or detector means.

    (1)     Note.  For similar subject matter consisting of discriminator means
    combined with receiver means other than a frequency or phase modulation
    type receiver the search will be elsewhere in this class, subclass 337,
    e.g., and for  frequency or phase discriminator, per se, the search will be
    in Class 329, subclasses 315+ and 345+ respectively.  See the definition
    and search notes in Class 329 for the complete field of search in other
    related classes and for a statement of the dividing line between the
    subject matter in that and other related classes.

    (2)     Note.  For purposes of classification in this subclass the words
    discriminator and detector are used synonymously and refer to the final
    means whereby amplitude variations are derived in response to the frequency
    or phase properties of a signal.  The subject matter to be found here is
    not to be confused with heterodyning or mixing means which is sometimes
    referred to as the first detector of a receiver.  Heterodyning or mixing
    means will be found in this class (455) subclass 313 and the indented
    subclasses.


CLS 455/215
TXT Superregenerative:

    Subject matter under subclass 214 wherein the particular discriminator or
    detector means is of the superregenerative type.

    (1)     Note.    Superregenerative detector means as such are specifically
    excluded from the Demodulator Detector Class 329 by Note III under the
    class definition. Such detectors will be found in this class (455)
    subclasses 323+ below, if the device acts as a conversion means whose
    output is an intermediate frequency wave to be further acted upon by
    further states in a receiver circuit, and in subclasses 336+ if the output
    actually represents the information contained in the modulation signal.


CLS 455/216
TXT With particular frequency division or multiplication:

    Subject matter under subclass 205 including the combination of a frequency
    or phase-modulation type receiver, which may be broadly claimed, with a
    specific frequency dividing or multiplying means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 113+ for miscellaneous frequency conversion or control
    and subclasses 185+ for stable state circuits which may be utilized as
    frequency dividers.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 51 for frequency dividing, and subclass 53
    for frequency multiplying, plural, cascaded oscillators; and subclasses 74+
    for systems comprising a free running oscillator combined with particular
    output coupling network means which may comprise frequency multiplying or
    dividing means.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, for electrical pulse counters and dividers.


CLS 455/217
TXT With protection circuit for receiver circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein the receiver system is provided
    with means to protect the entire receiver circuit or elements thereof from
    damage due to outside electrical influences.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter found in this subclass will include only
    devices intended to protect the receiver system from damage from outside
    sources, such as lightning, overload due to an excessive signal and may
    consist of means placed in the antenna or collector input circuit, or means
    incorporated in the receiver circuit itself.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117+,   for transmitters with circuit protective means.

    347+,   for mechanical protective means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 51 for amplifiers combined with automatic
    disabling switch means.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 62 for oscillators with circuit protective
    means.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 6+ for radar
    systems which are provided with means, usually a T-R switch for receiver
    protection; for preventing damage to the receiver due to direct radiation
    from the transmitter.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 112 and
    113 for safety and protective systems for electrical devices and equipment,
    for space discharge means and tuned circuit, respectively.

    454,    Ventilation, subclass 184 for means for ventilating an enclosed
    space, such as a radio or a television cabinet.


CLS 455/218
TXT Squelch:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 where the receiver gain is automatically
    reduced (quieted) in response to a specified characteristic of the input
    signal.

    (1)     Note.  The specified characteristic is usually a lack of carrier
    wave or the presence of excessive noise.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212+,   for frequency or phase modulation receivers with squelch.


CLS 455/219
TXT With automatic gain or volume control:

    Subject matter under subclass 218 combined with control of the
    amplification of the receiver without manual intervention.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    234.1+, for automatic gain or volume control.


CLS 455/220
TXT Adjustable:

    Subject matter under subclass 218 where the level of input signal
    characteristic at which the squelch will operate is operator variable.


CLS 455/221
TXT Audio responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 218 where the level of input signal
    characteristic at which the squelch will operate is operator variable.


CLS 455/222
TXT Noise controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 218 in which the specified characteristic of
    the input signal is the presence of an unwanted or spurious signal at the
    input of the receiver which modifies the wanted signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    296+,   for noise elimination in general.


CLS 455/223
TXT Short duration (noise blankers):

    Subject matter under subclass 222 where, in response to a noise pulse, the
    receiver output is squelched for a time period that is relatively short
    compared to the period of the demodulated signal.


CLS 455/224
TXT Separate broadband detector channel:

    Subject matter under subclass 223 where there is a separate signal path
    from the receiver input to the detector which has a broader frequency
    response than a signal path from the receiver input to the squelch circuit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    303+,   for receivers with noise elimination having plural signal paths.


CLS 455/225
TXT Plural paths:

    Subject matter under subclass 218 where the received signal is applied to
    two or more signal paths.


CLS 455/226.1
TXT Measuring or testing of receiver:
    Subject matter under subclass 130 comprising means which, in use,
    determines qualitatively or quantitatively, a receiver characteristic.

    (1)     Note.  The receiver may not be operative as to communication during
    test, and the receiver is  usually a block and claimed at least nominally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 250 for measuring the wavelength or
    frequency of radio and microwave.

    331,    Oscillators, appropriate subclasses for specific elements (e.g.,
    noise generator), with no more than means for coupling to  a receiver.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 703 for measuring of
    a signal with an antenna and a nominal receiver or with quantitative means.


CLS 455/226.2
TXT Signal strength:
    Subject matter under subclass 226.1 including a  means for measuring a
    signal strength level.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring, and Testing, subclasses 76+  for
    measuring, testing, or sensing electricity, per se.


CLS 455/226.3
TXT Signal-to-noise ratio:
    Subject matter under subclass 226.1 including a means for determining a
    signal-to-noise ratio.


CLS 455/226.4
TXT With meter or indicator:
    Subject matter under subclass 226.1 including a means for displaying to a
    human observer information concerning the receiver characteristics being
    measured.


CLS 455/227
TXT Responsive to an input signal of particular predetermined frequency:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein the receiver is permanently
    adjusted in such a manner as to have a response to signals having a carrier
    wave of a predetermined frequency or a carrier signal having a
    predetermined identifying modulation frequency superimposed thereon.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter found in this subclass is restricted to
    receivers responsive to a particular preselected input activating signal of
    a predetermined frequency or other preselected characteristic only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26+,    for unauthorized use prevention systems whereby only a particular
    receiver means is enabled to receive a message transmitted from the
    transmitter.

    31.1+,  for systems with receiver selection.

    140,    for a plurality of receivers selectively activated.

    229,    for receivers with alarm or alerting means.

    352+,   for remotely controlled receivers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 129
    for frequency responsive switching systems.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 1+ for miscellaneous discriminating circuits and
    particularly subclasses 39+ for frequency discriminating.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 165-212 for wave
    filters, per se, comprised of passive elements.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 171 for frequency responsive
    remote control signal devices; and subclass 539 for automatic alarm systems
    operated via radio link.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 5+ for object
    detection systems responsive to returned signals; and subclasses 113+ for
    direction finding receiver systems responsive to a particular input signal.

    346,    Recorders, subclass 37 for recording systems with control means of
    the radio receiver type.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 182+ for
    electric control circuits for relays which are frequency responsive.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 316+ for pulse
    receivers which may be selectively responsive.

    380,    Cryptography, appropriate subclasses for cryptographic prevention
    of signal unauthorized use.


CLS 455/228
TXT Responsive to specified modulation (e.g., call alarm, conelrad):

    Subject matter under subclass 227 including means for indicating a
    predetermined modulation in the carrier.

    (1)     Note.  Systems with a two-state indicator such as an alarm light
    off or on or with a filter passbanding a warning tone, are classified here
    only if combined with an analog carrier wave communication receiver.

    (2)     Note.  Selective systems responsive to a predetermined signal(s)
    are classified in Class 340, subclasses 147+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 539 for an alarm systems with
    a radio link.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 100+ for directive
    receivers.


CLS 455/229
TXT Responsive to carrier absence or presence:

    Subject matter under subclass 227 including means for indicating the
    absence or presence of the carrier in a receiver.

    (1)     Note.  The responsive means may energize an alarm or two-state
    device.

    (2)     Note.  Systems for indicating carrier level or strength, or for
    indicating tuning, are classified in subclass 154.


CLS 455/230
TXT Local control of receiver operation:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 including provision for controlling an
    operating characteristic of the receiver.

    (1)     Note.  The control may be automatic or manual.

    (2)     Note.  Remote control is excluded from this subclass and will be
    found in subclasses 352+.


CLS 455/231
TXT Applied at or for specific intervals or periods of time:

    Subject matter under subclass 230 including means whereby the control
    voltage or signal is applied to the receiver at or for specific intervals
    or periods of time.

    (1)     Note.  The time interval determining means may include electrical
    time constant circuits, mechanical means, or electron tube means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, appropriate subclasses for telegraph receivers combined
    with control means which may be activated at or for particular time
    intervals.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 35+ for clock
    actuated switching means.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 141+
    for time delay or retarded switching systems.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 443+ for means for
    periodically, repetitiously, or successively activating a motor control
    means; and subclasses 445+ for automatic or time delay means in a motor
    control circuit.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 261+ for miscellaneous output waveform production delay
    and subclasses 518+ for miscellaneous control circuits.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 9 for amplifiers with periodic switching of
    the input.

    334,    Tuners, appropriate subclass for clock controlled tuners, per se.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 309.15+ for timer
    controlled systems.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 113 for direction
    finding receivers which may have time controlling means.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 89+ for
    timepiece time interval measurement, per se.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 6+ for
    combined radio and phonograph systems.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for time division
    multiplex.


CLS 455/232.1
TXT Gain control:
    Subject matter under subclass 230 wherein the operating characteristic is
    the ratio of the  output of an amplifier to its input.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter included in this and the indented
    subclasses will include patents  relating to either signal gain or signal
    volume control combined with a receiver system since the terms are used
    more or less synonymously in the art.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136     and 138, for plural separate receivers with output control means.

    206+,   for automatic volume control means.

    210,    for frequency or phase modulation type receivers with output
    limiting means.

    254,    for means to maintain specified signals-to-noise ratio (i.e.,
    sensitivity control).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclass 345 for pulse receivers
    with automatic amplitude control.


CLS 455/233.1
TXT With diverse control (tone, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 232.1 including significantly claimed details
    of gain control means combined with other control means (e.g., tone
    control).

    (1)     Note. To complete the field of search in this class for subject
    matter found in this subclass, further search must be made in the
    appropriate subclass relating to the particular other control mean. For
    example, wherein the other control means comprises frequency control,
    further search subclasses 255+, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177.1,  for receivers with manual selection means combined with other
    control means.

    256,    for receivers with frequency control means combined with other
    control means.


CLS 455/234.1
TXT Automatic:
    Subject matter under subclass 232.1 comprising means for automatically
    controlling the gain as a function of some characteristic of the received
    carrier wave (e.g., signal amplitude) or some other conditions.

    (1)     Note. For information as to the field of  search for similar
    subject matter outside this class, see "SEARCH CLASS", under subclass 232.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205,    for frequency or phase-type receivers with automatic gain or volume
    control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclass 345 for pulse-type
    receivers with automatic gain or volume control.


CLS 455/234.2
TXT Processor controlled:
    Subject matter under subclass 234.1 wherein the automatic means includes a
    programmable controller.


CLS 455/235.1
TXT Forward acting:
    Subject matter under subclass 234.1 wherein the automatic gain acts on a
    stage subsequent to a  detector stage.


CLS 455/236.1
TXT Variable conversion efficiency (variable oscillator amplitude,
    etc.):Subject matter under subclass 234.1 wherein the receiver is a super
    heterodyne receiver with a  frequency converter wherein the ratio of the
    output to the input of the frequency converter is variable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    311,    for noise or the interference elimination means in converter
    circuit.

    313+,   for frequency modifiers or converters.


CLS 455/237.1
TXT Responsive to locally injected pilot:
    Subject matter under subclass 234.1 wherein the other condition is
    responsive to a changing amplitude of a local reference signal via the
    amplifier stages.


CLS 455/238.1
TXT Responsive to vehicle speed:
    Subject matter under subclass 234.1 wherein the other condition is
    responsive to the speed of a  vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    297,    for noise or other interference elimination in a vehicle receiver.

    345+,   for receivers combined with vehicles.


CLS 455/239.1
TXT Nonlinear automatic gain control:
    Subject matter under subclass 234.1 wherein the  output of the amplifier
    does not rise or fall in direct proportion to the input.


CLS 455/240.1
TXT Variable automatic gain control loop gain:
    Subject matter under subclass 239.1 wherein the  ratio of the output to the
    input of the amplifier is controlled by an automatic gain control circuit
    containing a closed signal path (loop) having variable gain.


CLS 455/241.1
TXT Different gain stages:
    Subject matter under subclass 239.1 wherein the receiver contains plurality
    of amplifiers, the gain of each amplifier being different.


CLS 455/242.1
TXT Delayed:
    Subject matter under subclass 239.1 including a  means to delay the output
    with respect to the input.


CLS 455/242.2
TXT Different delays for different signal stages or thresholds:
    Subject matter under subclass 242.1 wherein the delay  means is responsive
    to the input signal level of the amplifier or to the signal level in
    another amplifier.


CLS 455/243.1
TXT Radio frequency stage only delayed:
    Subject matter under subclass 242.1 wherein only the automatic gain control
    of the radio frequency stages of the receiver is delayed.


CLS 455/244.1
TXT Dual time constant:
    Subject matter under subclass 239.1 having two different periods of time to
    maximize the time  response related to the carrier wave (e.g., fast
    response for a high carrier frequency and slow response for a low carrier
    frequency).


CLS 455/245.1
TXT Automatic gain control signal derived from information signal:Subject
    matter under subclass 234.1 wherein the gain control is derived from the
    demodulated  (usually the audio) signal.


CLS 455/245.2
TXT Plural stages controlled:
    Subject matter under subclass 245.1 wherein the automatic gain control
    signal controls at least two or more stages.


CLS 455/246.1
TXT Responsive to plural inputs:
    Subject matter under subclass 234.1 wherein the gain control signal is
    responsive to more than one signal characteristic or other condition.


CLS 455/247.1
TXT Separate automatic gain control signals:
    Subject matter under subclass 246.1 wherein there are two or more different
    automatic output  signals.


CLS 455/248.1
TXT Constant or controlled input impedance:
    Subject matter under subclass 234.1 wherein the automatic gain control
    means varies or keeps constant the input impedance of the receiver.


CLS 455/249.1
TXT Variable attenuator type:
    Subject matter under subclass 234.1 comprising a circuit that absorbs part
    of the received carrier  wave and transmits the remainder with a minimum of
    distortion or delay, the amount absorbed being  variable.


CLS 455/250.1
TXT Automatic gain control to improve strong signal         handling:Subject
    matter under subclass 234.1 wherein automatic gain control is used to
    prevent the receiver from becoming overloaded by a strong received signal.


CLS 455/251.1
TXT Plural stages with different levels or bias to each stage (e.g., partial
    automatic gain control):Subject matter under subclass 234.1 wherein there
    are a plurality of stages in the receiver who have their gain automatically
    controlled by the application to said stages of different bias or gain
    control signal levels.


CLS 455/252.1
TXT Semiconductor:
    Subject matter under subclass 234.1 having at least one semiconductor
    device (e.g., transistor, integrated circuit, etc.).


CLS 455/253.1
TXT Plural stages controlled with plates, screen grids, or cathodes connected
    in parallel:Subject matter under subclass 234.1 wherein the receiver has a
    plurality of stages which have  vacuum tubes which have plates, cathodes,
    or screen grids connected in parallel to an automatic gain, level, or
    volume control voltage.


CLS 455/253.2
TXT Plural amplifier stages:
    Subject matter under subclass 234.1 including two or more gain stages.


CLS 455/254
TXT Sensitivity control:

    Subject matter under subclass 230 including significant means whereby the
    input signal to a receiver system is controlled in such a manner as to
    produce a predetermined specified output signal having a specified signal
    to noise ratio.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232.1,  for gain, level, or volume control systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 5+ for radar
    systems including receivers which may include sensitivity control; and
    subclasses 100+ for directive systems which may include sensitivity control.


CLS 455/255
TXT Local oscillator frequency control:

    Subject matter under subclass 230 including one or more local oscillators
    combined with means to adjust the generated frequency thereof or with a
    control circuit or loop for controlling the oscillator frequency adjusting
    means in response to deviation of the generated oscillator frequency from a
    desired frequency or range of frequencies in such direction and amount as
    to restore the oscillator frequency to the desired frequency or range of
    frequencies.

    (1)     Note.  The control circuit or loop includes:  (a) discriminator
    means for sensing the deviation of the generated frequency of the
    oscillator, or oscillators, in direction and amount and for producing
    control energy proportional to such deviation, and (b) means responsive to
    the control energy and coupled to frequency adjusting means of the
    oscillator, or oscillators, to the desired frequency or range of
    frequencies whereby the intermediate frequency output of a mixer means, to
    which the output of the oscillator, or oscillators, is applied will remain
    constant at a given frequency or range of frequencies.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147,    for panoramic type receivers with local oscillator control means.

    196.1+, for wave selection (i.e., tuning) means combined with local
    oscillator tuning means.

    208+,   for phase or frequency modulation type receivers with synchronized
    or controlled local oscillator means.

    226,    for measuring, testing, or calibrating apparatus for receivers
    which may include oscillator control means.

    316,    for wave or modifying or conversion systems with frequency
    stabilization means for at least one local oscillator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 123+ for controlling an average condition of
    a frequency modulator and subclasses 155+ and 161+ for controlling an
    average condition of an amplitude modulator.


CLS 455/256
TXT Combined with other control:

    Subject matter under subclass 255 including significantly claimed details
    of frequency control means (as defined in subclass 255) combined with other
    control means (e.g., tone control, selectivity control) or other broadly
    included control means which may be included by the name only (e.g., volume
    control).

    (1)     Note.  To complete the field of search for subject matter found in
    further search must be made in subclasses, or classes, relating to other
    control means.  For example, if the other control means comprises
    selectivity control the further search should be in subclass 266, etc.


CLS 455/257
TXT Automatic:

    Subject matter under subclass 255 wherein the control means consists of a
    self-acting control circuit or loop whereby the output frequency of the
    oscillator means or the output of the mixer means is maintained constant at
    a desired frequency or within a desired frequency range.  The control
    circuit or loop generally includes discriminator means for sensing the
    deviation of the oscillator output frequency in direction and amount with
    means for producing a control energy corresponding to the sensed deviation
    and applying the generated control energy to a controlling means in the
    oscillator circuit in the proper sense or direction to restore the
    oscillator output frequency to a desired value.

    (1)     Note.  Systems wherein the frequency deviation of the output of the
    conversion means (i.e., intermediate frequency) is sensed and a control
    energy applied in such a direction as to compensate for the deviation are
    also found here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 1+ for similar subject matter relating to
    oscillator systems of general utility having automatic frequency
    stabilization means.  See paragraph IV in the class definitions of Class
    331 and the search notes under subclass 1 of that class.


CLS 455/258
TXT Utilizing particular local oscillator control:

    Subject matter under subclass 257 including automatic frequency control
    means broadly included with significantly recited details of one or more
    particular elements within the control circuit whereby the frequency,
    control of the oscillator is stabilized or adjusted in response to a
    deviation from the desired frequency.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 1+ for oscillators in general having
    automatic frequency stabilization means, particularly subclass 8 for
    transistorized controls; subclasses 10+ for plural controls; and subclasses
    34+ for particular-type frequency control means.


CLS 455/259
TXT Reference oscillator or source:

    Subject matter under subclass 258 wherein the control means comprises a
    reference oscillator or source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, particularly subclasses 18+ for automatic frequency
    stabilized oscillators with reference oscillator or source.


CLS 455/260
TXT Phase lock loop or frequency synthesizer:

    Subject matter under subclass 259 having either a closed-loop electronic
    servomechanism the output of which locks onto or tracks the reference
    signal or a frequency source of high accuracy whose output frequency, is
    composed of two components.


CLS 455/261
TXT Variable reactance (e.g., reactance tube):

    Systems under subclass 258 wherein the control means comprises variable
    reactance means.  The variable reactance means may consist of a reactance
    tube or a solid-state type variable reactance means, e.g., in the
    oscillator circuit, the reactance of which is a function of applied bias
    voltage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 36 for automatic frequency stabilized
    oscillators with particular frequency control reactance device.


CLS 455/262
TXT Voltage controlled capacitor:

    Subject matter under subclass 261 in which the variable reactance is a
    device whose capacitance varies in accordance with a control voltage
    applied to the device.


CLS 455/263
TXT Discriminator or detector:

    Subject matter under subclass 258 wherein the control means comprises a
    device in which amplitude variations are derived in response to frequency
    or phase variations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses for demodulators, per se.

    331,    Oscillators, particularly subclasses 3, 9, 25+, and 32+ for
    automatic frequency stabilized oscillators with discriminator means.


CLS 455/264
TXT Voltage control of oscillator:

    Subject matter under subclass 258 having an oscillator the frequency of
    which can be varied by a changing voltage.


CLS 455/265
TXT With local oscillator synchronization or locking:

    Subject matter under subclass 257 including means whereby a predetermined
    phase or frequency relationship is maintained between the output of at
    least one local oscillator and a standard or synchronizing source or
    wherein the frequency of one or both of two oscillating systems which are
    coupled together are shifted and automatically held in such a relationship
    that the two frequencies have the ratio of two integral numbers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208+,   for frequency or phase modulation type receivers with synchronized
    or controlled local oscillator means.

    502+,   for complete systems comprising plural transmitters and/or
    receivers with synchronizing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, for synchronized oscillators; subclasses 18+ for
    automatic frequency control type; subclass 55 for plural oscillators;
    subclass 145 for multivibrators; subclass 149 for blocking oscillators; and
    subclass 172 for oscillators of general utility and having synchronizing
    means.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 354+ for synchronizing
    systems which may utilize oscillators of the automatic frequency stabilized
    type.


CLS 455/266
TXT Selectivity or bandwidth control:

    Subject matter under subclass 230 including significant means for
    controlling the extent to which the receiver is capable of differentiating
    between a desired signal and disturbances of the other frequencies or
    whereby the difference between the limiting frequencies of a band of
    frequencies over which the receiver is operative may be varied.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193.1   and 289, for systems comprising the combination of receiver systems
    with input wave selection means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 39+ for miscellaneous frequency comparing, selecting,
    or detecting circuits.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks subclasses 167+ for passive
    wave filters which may be of the adjustable bandwidth type, especially
    subclasses 177+ for transformer coupled type (e.g., intermediate frequency
    transformers).

    334,    Tuners, particularly subclass 40 for tuners with sensitivity or "Q"
    adjustment means.


CLS 455/267
TXT Tone control:

    Subject matter under subclass 230 including significant details of means
    whereby a part of the frequency range of the low frequency signals in an
    audio frequency amplifier of a receiver is emphasized or attenuated to
    produce a desired bass or treble effect thereby obtaining a quality more
    pleasing to the ear of a listener when the signals are reproduced.

    (1)     Note.  Where the claimed subject matter comprises significant
    details of some specific control means other than tone control with tone
    control means claimed broadly, classification will be in the appropriate
    subclass for such other control means with an official cross-reference in
    this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, subclass 622 for electronic musical instruments with tone
    generation and/or control of tone partials.

    330,    Amplifiers, appropriate subclasses for amplifiers with equalizing
    or tone control networks.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 28+ for equalizing
    networks of the passive type including tone controls which vary the signal
    attenuation characteristics over a range of frequencies.


CLS 455/268
TXT Fidelity control:

    Subject matter under subclass 230 including significant means for
    controlling the degree to which a signal transmission system, consisting of
    a receiver system, reproduces at its output the essential characteristics
    of a signal impressed upon the input.

    (1)     Note.  Systems which involve nothing more than noise elimination or
    control means will not be found in this subclass but, unless claimed as
    part of a more comprehensive system, will be classified in subclasses 296+.

    (2)     Note.  For complete information as to the extent of the field of
    search for similar subject matter in other classes, see "SEARCH CLASS",
    under subclass 254.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    267,    for receivers with tone control means.


CLS 455/269
TXT With wave collector (e.g., antenna):

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein the receiver includes wave
    collecting or antenna means combined with the whole or a specific part of a
    receiver system and wherein the claimed combination does not form a
    subcombination of a more comprehensive otherwise classifiable systems.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of classification in this class the word
    collector is generic to antenna and includes, in addition to antennas, such
    devices as inductive pickup coils and other devices intended to supply
    radio frequency or carrier wave energy to the input of a receiver.  In this
    and the indented subclasses the collector system will include the antenna
    or coil along with the connecting circuitry up to the input terminals of a
    preselector, radio frequency amplifier or mixer means which forms the first
    stage of a receiver.

    (2)     Note.  An antenna or collector means as defined in this class will
    include a physical device in the form of a metallic current conductor,
    waveguide, or space discharge device in direct engagement with free space
    and whereby an electromagnetic energy wave or a wave travelling in
    restricted space.

    (3)     Note.  Nominal recitation of antenna, or of "antenna circuit" plus
    specifics of an indent below is sufficient to classify herein.

    (4)     Note.  The combination of significant antenna structure and
    significant radio structure is classified herein. However, where detailed
    antenna structure is combined with nominally recited radio structure,
    classification is in Class 343, subclasses 700+.  For example, such terms
    as transmitter, receiver, and signal source are considered nominal
    recitations of radio structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 43 for space induction telegraphy systems.

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, for means for transmitting
    electrical energy between relatively moving parts, one of which may be a
    movable antenna, and particularly subclass 10 for magnetic induction
    systems; subclasses 12.2+ where a reel is involved; and subclasses 22+
    where a conductor presenting a substantially continuous exposed surface
    along the path of movement for contact with a collector is involved.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclasses 8, 63, and 194 for
    inductive signalling systems which may involve inductive coupling devices
    similar to loop antennas; and subclass 30 for Hertzian wave systems
    involving antennas.  See also the reference to Class 246 under section VIII
    of the class definition of Class 343.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 250 for radio and microwave meters which
    may include an antenna or probe as an element of the combination.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 34 for the
    structural combination of an electric discharge device and an antenna
    integrally united.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 16 for electric motors
    controlled by space transmitted electromagnetic wave energy (e.g., by
    radio) or electrostatic energy.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclass for
    electrical testing methods and apparatus that may include the use of radio
    waves, induction fields, or electric fields.

    332,    Modulators, subclass 174 for absorption type amplitude modulators
    which may include a directive antenna.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 5+ for radar
    systems which may include an antenna; subclasses 100+ for directive systems
    including beacons and direction finding receivers utilizing; and subclasses
    700+ for miscellaneous significant antenna systems and structure,
    particularly subclass 702 for antenna combined with a radio cabinet;
    subclass 703 for antenna combined with means for measuring the signal
    received; and subclass 711 for antenna combined with a vehicle.  See also
    the definitions and search notes of subclasses 700+ for the field of search
    for other apparatus or systems utilizing antennas or means for supporting
    and or orienting antennas.

    348,    Television, appropriate subclasses for television systems that may
    include radio wave antennas.

    358,    Facsimile, appropriate subclasses for facsimile systems that may
    include radio wave antennas.


CLS 455/270
TXT Power-line or receiver element used as wave collector:

    Subject matter under subclass 269 wherein a portion of a power-line, or a
    specified receiver element, is used as the formal wave collector.

    (1)     Note.  Receiver elements such as the power transformer, an external
    structure or the speaker leads may be used.

    (2)     Note.  Systems using "carrier current" communication along a
    power-line are classified in Class 340, subclasses 310.01+.


CLS 455/271
TXT Suppression of radiation from receiver via wave collector:

    Subject matter under subclass 269 wherein a circuit is provided in the
    coupling, or in the receiver, for the purpose of reducing emission from the
    collector.

    (1)     Note.  For a structural means (shielding) which may have the same
    purpose, see subclass 300.


CLS 455/272
TXT Plural separate collectors:

    Subject matter under subclass 269 in which there are two or more separate
    and distinct collecting means combined with a single receiving system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 725+ for plural
    separate diverse type antennas; subclasses 729+ for plural diverse type
    antennas using the same active element; subclasses 776+ for plural
    waveguide type antennas; subclass 844 for plural antennas spaced a
    fractional or full wavelength apart (e.g., diversity); subclass 869 for
    plural loop antennas; subclass 879 for support means for plural antennas;
    and subclass 893 for plural antennas in general.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for systems which
    may employ plural antenna to receive a plurality of messages or carriers
    (i.e., multiplex).


CLS 455/273
TXT With particular output combining:

    Subject matter under subclass 272 including significant details relating to
    particular combining means in the output circuit of the antennas or
    collectors and in which the single input to the receiver is a resultant
    function of the combination in some manner the various outputs of a
    plurality of separate collectors or antennas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 725+ for plural
    antennas with impedance matching or coupling networks.


CLS 455/274
TXT Loop or coil antenna:

    Subject matter under subclass 273 where at least one of the collectors
    consists of one or more loops of wire.

    (1)     Note.  The loops of wire may be wound around a core of magnetic
    material or a form made of insulating material or may be self-supporting.


CLS 455/275
TXT With frequency changing or selecting in the output path of one or more
    collectors:

    Subject matter under subclass 272 including specific details relating to
    frequency changing or fixed frequency selecting in the output path of at
    least one or more of the plurality of separate antennas or collectors and
    not comprising an integral part of the receiver proper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193.1,  for signal selection based on frequency with antenna circuit tuning.

    289,    for coupling varying, regulating, or control.

    313+,   for frequency modifying or conversion.


CLS 455/276.1
TXT With phase shifting, correcting, or regulating in the output path of one or
    more collectors:Subject matter under subclass 272 including specific
    details relating to phase shifting and/or regulating means in the output
    path of at least one or more of the plurality of separate antennas or
    collectors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclasses
    212-219 for electrical systems (i.e., power frequency systems) wherein a
    single electrical source circuit is coupled to a single electrical lead
    circuit and including means whereby the phase angle between the current or
    voltage of either or both of said circuits is automatically controlled.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 76.77+ for systems
    for measuring, testing, or sensing electricity, per se, by phase comparison.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 141+ for miscellaneous synchronizing circuits and
    subclasses 231+ for miscellaneous phase shift circuits.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 100+ for branched
    circuits that may include passive type equalizing or phase delay networks;
    subclass 18 for automatically controlled equalizer or phase control
    networks of the passive type; and subclasses 138+ for passive type wave
    equalizers, per se.


CLS 455/277.1
TXT Selectively or alternately connected to receiver:
    Subject matter under subclass 272 including a  means to connect any one of
    the plurality of antennas to the single receiving system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 725 for plural
    diverse type antenna structures which may be selectively employed; subclass
    742 for a  plurality of high frequency loop type antennas; subclass 777 for
    a plurality of waveguide antennas with switching means; and appropriate
    other subclasses for particular types of plural antennas which may be
    selectively utilized.


CLS 455/277.2
TXT By signal quality (e.g., noise):
    Subject matter under subclass 277.1 wherein the means is responsive to a
    signal noise.


CLS 455/278.1
TXT Combined with noise or interference elimination:
    Subject matter under subclass 272 including noise or interference
    elimination combined with or in the output circuit of at least one of the
    plurality collectors.

    (1)     Note. The claimed noise or interference elimination found in this
    subclass will be combined with or in the output path of at least one of a
    plurality of claimed antenna, collector device, or antenna circuit and
    generally consist of static or other noise elimination but may comprise
    correction for fading or other interfering signals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    283,    for noise reduction or elimination in the output circuit of a
    single claimed antenna or collector means.

    296,    for noise or interference reduction or elimination means within or
    comprising an integral part of the receiver circuitry or structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 850+ for antenna
    structure with coupling network or impedance in the lead-in which may
    include noise or static suppression means, particularly subclass 851 for
    such networks with radiation suppressor.


CLS 455/279.1
TXT Plural antenna currents entering single transformer:
    Subject matter under subclass 278.1 wherein one transformer is used in
    coupling the collectors to the receiver.


CLS 455/280
TXT With coupling to a stage of the receiver:

    Subject matter under subclass 269 including wave collector and a receiver
    stage coupled by a specified coupling means.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of classification in this class a tuned circuit
    connected between the grid and cathode of a tube and variably tunable will
    be considered as a preselector stage and not a part of the collector
    coupling circuit. Subject matter relating to preselector circuit means will
    be found in this class (455) subclass 193.1.

    (2)     Note.  The word detector as defined in this and the indented
    subclasses will refer to a demodulator means and is not to be confused with
    mixer means sometimes referred to in the patent literature as a first
    detector with the demodulator being referred to as a second detector.  In
    this and other subclasses in this class the word detector when used will
    always denote the demodulator or second detector means.  Note that prior to
    the advent of the heterodyne type of receiver the antenna was usually
    connected directly to a radio frequency amplifier-detector means or
    detector means along with the output connected directly to some utilization
    means such as headphones.

    (3)     Note.  Class 329, Demodulators, contains some demodulators combined
    with other elements such as an amplifier or speaker.  The search notes to
    that class under the general class definition list combinations considered
    as classifiable in Class 329 and elsewhere.  It will be noted that this
    Class is specifically mentioned as the proper place for "radio receivers
    generally including combinations of antennas and detectors or demodulators"
    and superheterodyne detectors (i.e., mixers).

    (4)     Note.  As an example of the difference between subject matter to be
    found in this and indented subclasses and that to be found in this class
    under signal selection based on frequency, subclasses 150.1+ let it be
    assumed (a) that the system claimed or disclosed consists of a collector
    circuit including the primary of an inductive transformer, one terminal of
    which is connected to ground and the other in a closed loop including the
    collector, or (b) a tunable circuit including the secondary of the input
    transformer and an amplifier having the tunable circuit connected between
    the grid and cathode thereof.  For classification purposes in this subclass
    the collector loop circuit including the primary winding of the transformer
    (a) will be considered as a particular coupling circuit (i.e., transformer)
    between the collector and amplifier and will be found in subclass 292.  The
    tunable circuit in the input of the tube means which also includes a
    winding of the transformer (i.e., secondary) (b) will be considered as a
    wave selecting means in combination with an amplifier means and will be
    found in subclasses 150+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129+,   for transmitters with coupled antenna.

    214+,   for frequency or phase modulation receivers with particular
    discriminator.

    313+,   for receiver including particular wave conversion or mixer means.

    337,    for receiver including particular discriminator means.

    341+,   for receiver including particular amplifier means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclass 2 for miscellaneous telegraphy systems which
    may comprise an antenna combined with detector or amplifier means.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, subclass 34 for
    electric lamp and discharge lead devices having an antenna combined
    therewith as a unitary structure and not otherwise classifiable.

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses for demodulator  systems, per
    se.

    330,    Amplifiers, appropriate subclasses for amplifiers, per se.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 37+ for beat frequency oscillator, per se.

    332,    Modulators, appropriate subclasses for modulators, per se.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, appropriate subclasses for
    radar, receivers consisting of an antenna combined with detector or other
    means. Search also subclasses 850+ for antenna structure combined with a
    coupling network or impedance in the leading. The leading is defined in the
    definition of Class 343 as being, "a conductive means for conveying the
    signal energy between the active antenna and the signal source or receiver.


CLS 455/281
TXT Having distributed parameters:

    Subject matter under subclass 280 wherein the coupling means is a system
    whose constants, such as a resistance, inductance or capacitance, cannot be
    considered as concentrated at any one point in space.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, appropriate subclasses.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 297+ for
    printed circuits structure.


CLS 455/282
TXT Transmission line:

    Subject matter under subclass 281 wherein the coupling means comprises a
    transmission line.

    (1)     Note.  The transmission line may be a lumped element artificial
    line, coaxial, shielded, or other configuration such as a Lecher wire.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 24+ for coupling
    networks consisting of passive elements and having long line
    characteristics; subclasses 236+ for long lines in general; and subclasses
    245+ for long line elements and components.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 905 for antenna
    structure combined with long line elements.


CLS 455/283
TXT Undesired signal or noise control (e.g., antistatic):

    Subject matter under subclass 280 in which the coupling means acts to
    reduce signals or noise from the frequency spectrum of the desired signal.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of classification in this and subsequent
    subclasses any undesired signal or electrical disturbance within the useful
    frequency band will be considered to be noise and any unwanted and random
    noise caused by atmospheric conditions or electric or electrostatic
    discharges originating from other sources external of and influencing the
    collector will be considered as static.  For systems comprising means,
    within the receiver circuit, for prevention, reduction, or elimination of
    noise and/or other interference search will be in this class (455),
    subclasses 296+ below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278.1,  for plural antennas for a single receiver with noise or
    interference suppressing means.

    296,    for similar systems wherein the collector is not claimed.  See (1)
    Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 32+ for
    anti-inductive structures.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 89+
    for anti-induction or coupling means for prevention of inductive coupling
    to other circuits; and subclass 93 for surge, transient, or parasitic
    current suppression means.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 12 for wave
    transmission line inductive or radiation interference reduction systems.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, appropriate subclasses for
    antenna structure combined with impedance means in the leadin which may
    serve as interference attenuation means, particularly subclass 851 for
    antenna combined with coupling network having radiation suppressing means.


CLS 455/284
TXT Balancing or cancelling:

    Subject matter under subclass 283 including significant means for producing
    a balancing or neutralizing current or voltage of opposite phase and equal
    intensity to that resulting from the unwanted signal whereby the unwanted
    signal is suppressed at the input to the receiver.


CLS 455/285
TXT With image frequency suppression:

    Subject matter under subclass 283 wherein the coupling includes means
    whereby an unwanted signal appearing at the collector and whose frequency
    differs from the received signal by twice the intermediate frequency, is
    suppressed or eliminated.

    (1)     Note.  For similar structure not tuned specifically to the
    superheterodyne image frequency refer to subclass 286 in a noise reducing
    system, and subclass 290 for general wave collector coupling systems using
    tuned circuits.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302,    for image frequency suppression in general.


CLS 455/286
TXT Wave filter, coil or wave trap:

    Subject matter under subclass 283 including means whereby undesired signals
    differing in frequency from the desired signal are absorbed and thus
    prevented from appearing at the input terminals of the receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193.1,  for receivers having tuned antenna coupling means in general.

    287,    for similar means comprising a shunt or bypass.

    307,    for receivers in general with filter means for reduction of the
    effects of noise or other interference.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 24+ for coupling
    networks consisting of passive element devices; and subclasses 165-212 for
    passive element wave filters.


CLS 455/287
TXT Shunt or bypass:

    Subject matter under subclass 283 including means whereby any undesired
    signal or signals are shunted or bypassed to ground and thus prevented from
    appearing at the input terminals of the receiver.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    285     and 286, for similar means comprising a resonant circuit or filter
    in a noise reduction system.


CLS 455/288
TXT Particular composition (e.g., of cell or element):

    Subject matter under subclass 283 wherein the significant noise and/or
    static reduction or elimination means comprises an element utilizing a
    material or composition which conducts or varies its impedance selectively
    so as to  attenuate the noise or static energy and permit message of the
    desired signal without attenuation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses for specific active solid- state devices which show
    nonlinear behavior.


CLS 455/289
TXT With coupling varying, regulating, or control:

    Subject matter under subclass 280 wherein the coupling means includes means
    whereby the reaction of the antenna or collector output circuit upon the
    receiver input circuit of the receiver is varied, maintained constant, or
    controlled by design to react over the frequency range in a desired way.

    (1)     Note.  An example of the subject matter to be found in this
    subclass is an antenna connected to the input of a receiver through a
    variometer.

    (2)     Note.  The systems to be found here are variable tuned circuits in
    the antenna or collector-receiver coupling circuits and are not intended to
    be utilized as preselector or tuning means for the receiver. For wave
    selecting (i.e., tuning), search this class (455), for subclass 193.1.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 854 and 861 for
    adjustable antenna coupling means.


CLS 455/290
TXT Including passive tuned circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 280 where the coupling is a fixed tuned
    circuit.

    (1)     Note.  The systems to be found here comprise tuned circuit means in
    the antenna or collector receiver coupling circuits and are not intended to
    be utilized as preselector or tuning means for the receiver but often times
    are utilized to determine the frequency of the signal accepted by the
    antenna or collector and transmitted to the receiver input terminals.  For
    wave selecting (i.e., tuning) circuits utilized for the determination of
    the frequency to which a receiver is tuned, search this class (455),
    subclass 193.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    283+,   for receivers using tuned circuits in the antenna coupling for
    undesired signal or noise control.

    289,    for receivers with variable tuned circuits in antenna coupling
    systems.

    340,    for receivers using variable resonant or tuned circuits in coupling
    systems.


CLS 455/291
TXT Using active device (e.g., as preamplifier or reactance):

    Subject matter under subclass 280 wherein the coupling means includes an
    electron tube device, solid state device, transistor, diode, or other
    active device whereby the magnitude of the high frequency signal applied to
    the receiver may be maintained constant or other wise influenced.

    (1)     Note.  The coupling means may act merely as a resistive impedance
    in the coupling circuit, or may act as an amplifier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, for miscellaneous nonlinear circuits utilizing active devices.

    330,    Amplifiers, appropriate subclasses for amplifiers.


CLS 455/292
TXT Transformer or other passive inductance:

    Subject matter under subclass 280 wherein the coupling means includes at
    least the primary winding of a transformer or other inductive means.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of Classification in this subclass the primary
    winding of an input transformer, the secondary winding of which, along with
    a capacitor or other tuning means constitutes the wave selecting or tuning
    means in the input of a receiver, will be considered to be in the coupling
    circuit and will be found in subclasses 289 and 290.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284,    285, 286, and 287, (note also) where inductances may be used in
    noise reducing coupling circuits.

    289,    where variometers and variable inductances are classified.

    290,    where tuned circuits using inductances are classified.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 745+ for antenna
    structure combined with variable reactance for tuning the antenna;
    subclasses 749+ for antenna structure combined with lumped reactance for
    leading the antenna; and subclasses 850+ for antenna structure combined
    with impedance means in the leadin.


CLS 455/293
TXT Specified stage (e.g., mixer, amplifier, or demodulator):

    Subject matter under subclass 280 wherein the coupling means is connected
    to at least a named stage of the receiver.


CLS 455/294
TXT With particular electron tube structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 293 in which the stage has an electron or
    other charged particle space discharge device or devices characterized by
    special tube construction or electrode arrangement combined with sufficient
    circuitry to define the assembly as a system such as is excluded from the
    other subclasses in this class and related other art devices classified
    elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  The circuitry means to be found in this subclass consists of
    the circuitry comprising that associated with the tube itself and is not to
    be confused with the coupling means between the collector and the tube
    input found in the subclasses above this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193.1,  where there is a tunable circuit between the collector and the tube
    input.

    291,    wherein the electron tube constitutes a coupling impedance or
    amplifier between collector and receiver input.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses for all
    lamp and discharge devices, per se, where significant lamp or discharge
    device structure only is claimed, combined with means for modifying the
    temperature of the lamp or discharge device, and with separate casing,
    jacket, shield, enclosure, or envelope protecting means.

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for discharge devices of various types combined with circuitry
    for controlling the tube and in which no load for the tube is claimed.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, particularly subclasses 598+ for miscellaneous electron tube
    devices characterized by special tube construction or electrode arrangement
    combined with sufficient circuitry to control the tube or provide an output
    from the tube and not otherwise classifiable.

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses for various electron tube
    devices used as demodulators and not combined with sufficient structure as
    to define a complete receiver.

    330,    Amplifiers, appropriate subclasses for various electron tube
    devices used as amplifiers and not forming a part of more comprehensive
    system classifiable elsewhere.

    331,    Oscillators, appropriate subclasses for various electron tube
    devices combined with sufficient circuitry to constitute a free running
    oscillator system and not forming a subcombination of a more comprehensive
    system classified elsewhere.


CLS 455/295
TXT Modulation distortion or cross talk correction or elimination:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 including means whereby intermodulation
    components occurring in a desired modulated carrier wave input signal, due
    to cross-modulation of the desired carrier by an undesired signal wave, are
    corrected for or whereby distortions of a desired modulated carrier wave
    input signal, which are due to causes other than interference external to
    the receiver system, are corrected for or eliminated.

    (1)     Note.  Some examples of the various sources of distortion are
    selective fading, attenuation in the transmitting medium, cross-talk, etc.


CLS 455/296
TXT Noise or interference elimination:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 having structure to (a) suppress the
    influence of extraneous electric or magnetic fields upon receiver
    circuitry, (b) prevent radiation of undesired electric or magnetic fields
    from the receiver circuitry, or (c) prevent translation through, or
    suppress at some point in, the receiver system any undesired modulation
    components accompanying a desired modulation carrier wave input signal
    which components are due to electrical disturbances within the useful
    frequency band or any undesired carrier wave, which may originate at a
    source external to the receiver wave input or collection means and arrive
    at the input or collector simultaneously with the desired modulated carrier
    wave.

    (1)     Note.  The extraneous fields or undesired components may be due to
    external sources or internally generated noises or disturbances due to
    microphonica or regenerative effects.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63+,    for complete systems with noise prevention.

    175.1+, for frequency selection (tuning) means combined with muting means.

    219,    for volume control systems combined with noise squelch means.

    278.1+, for plural antennas with noise elimination means connected to a
    receiver.

    283+,   for subject matter relating to noise or static reduction or
    eliminating means within the coupling circuit between a collector (antenna)
    means and the input terminals of a receiver.

    295+,   for receivers with signal intermodulation or cross talk correction
    or elimination means.

    298+,   for receivers with hum or interaction prevention means in the power
    or bias supply.

    317+,   for frequency modifying or conversion systems including means for
    the prevention of unwanted oscillations.

    501+,   for complete systems comprising a plurality of transmitters or
    receivers with noise reduction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 310+ for transient reduction by limiting or clipping,
    subclasses 379+ for miscellaneous reduction of gating noise, and subclasses
    551+ for miscellaneous unwanted signal suppression.

    330,    Amplifiers, appropriate subclasses for amplifiers with limiting
    means.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 600 for systems for detecting
    a signal bearing useful information accompanied by noise.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 5+ for object
    detection radar systems having noise or interference prevention means; and
    subclasses 100+ for directive radio wave receivers which may have
    interference prevention means.

    348,    Television, subclasses 607+ for noise elimination in television
    systems.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for multiplex
    systems having interference suppression.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclass 285 for complete systems
    utilizing pulse modulation and having distortion or noise prevention means;
    and subclasses 346+ for pulse type receivers with interference or noise
    reduction means.


CLS 455/297
TXT In vehicle:

    Subject matter under subclass 296 wherein the receiver is located in
    self-propelled movable conveyance.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of classification in this class, aircraft, land
    vehicles, and water craft are all considered to be vehicles under the
    general meaning of the word.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11.1+,  for mobile radio repeater stations.

    95,     for mobile or portable transmitters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 705+ for antennas
    combined with aircraft; and subclasses 711+ for antennas combined with
    other vehicle.


CLS 455/298
TXT Originating in power supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 296 where the noise or other interference
    arises in the receiver power supply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    343,    for receiver power supplies in general.


CLS 455/299
TXT Filter or rectification in power supply energized by fluctuating or A. C.
    source:

    Subject matter under subclass 298 having means to smooth or integrate the
    current or voltage of energization before application thereof to the signal
    processing components, the energizing circuit also having means to make the
    voltage or current unidirectional (i.e., D.C.) prior to application to such
    smoothing or integrating means, if necessary.


CLS 455/300
TXT By shielding:

    Subject matter under subclass 296 wherein the field suppression structure
    is a field-resistant body interposed between the field source and the
    region in which the suppression is desired.

    (1)     Note.  The body is generally an enclosure containing the receiver
    or a portion thereof.


CLS 455/301
TXT Plural or compartmented shielding structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein the shielding structure shields
    plural elements of the receiver by either (a) including plural shielding
    devices, or (b) including compartments in a single device.


CLS 455/302
TXT Image frequency suppression:

    Subject matter under subclass 296 comprising the combination of frequency
    modifying or conversion means with significant details of means whereby an
    unwanted signal appearing at the output of the conversion means, and whose
    frequency differs from the desired signal by twice the intermediate
    frequency, is suppressed or eliminated.


CLS 455/303
TXT Using plural separate signal paths:

    Subject matter under subclass 296 comprising means for receiving a
    modulated carrier input signal wave consisting of a plurality of signal
    translating channels including at least one main channel, which one channel
    includes means for selecting a carrier component having a first
    characteristic type of modulation representing a desired signal as well as
    a second type of modulation representing undesired signal disturbances, and
    at least one other auxiliary signal translating channel comprising means
    for selectively detecting only modulation representing undesired signal
    disturbances and means responsive to the output of both channels to reduce
    or cancel the effects of the undesirable signal disturbances.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclass 349 for a signal receiver
    with a noise or interference reduction circuit comprising plural signal
    paths.


CLS 455/304
TXT Phase shift in at least one path:

    Subject matter under subclass 303 wherein at least one of the separate
    signal paths includes phase shifting or delaying.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 138+ for passive
    phase delay networks, per se.


CLS 455/305
TXT With balancing or neutralizing:

    Subject matter under subclass 303 in which the outputs of the plural
    separate paths are combined in such a manner as to balance out or
    neutralize the modulation representing the undesired signal disturbances.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    283,    for receivers with particular noise or static balancing or
    neutralizing means coupled between the antenna and receiver.


CLS 455/306
TXT Filter in at least one path:

    Subject matter under subclass 305 where at least one signal path offers
    comparatively little opposition to certain frequencies or to direct
    current, while blocking or attenuating other frequencies.


CLS 455/307
TXT With specific filter structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 296 which offers comparatively little
    opposition to certain frequencies or direct current while blocking or
    attenuating other frequencies.


CLS 455/308
TXT With amplitude limiter:

    Subject matter under subclass 296 wherein the noise or interference
    reduction means includes diode or other amplitude limiting means.


CLS 455/309
TXT In demodulator or low frequency (audio amplifier circuit):

    Subject matter under subclass 308 wherein the diode or other amplitude
    limiting means is a part of or associated with the demodulator or audio
    frequency circuits of the receiver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    329,    Demodulators, particularly subclasses 321 and 350 for amplitude
    limiting in a frequency or amplitude demodulator respectively.


CLS 455/310
TXT Internally generated noise or oscillations:

    Subject matter under subclass 296 where the noise or other interference
    that is eliminated is noise or oscillations which arise from the receiver's
    own circuitry (except power supply).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    298+,   for elimination of noise arising in the receivers power supply.


CLS 455/311
TXT In radio frequency amplifier, intermediate frequency amplifier or converter
    circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 296 in which the noise or interference
    reduction means forms an integral part of or is associated with the
    circuitry of the radio frequency amplifier, frequency converter,
    intermediate frequency amplifiers of the receiver stages or the coupling
    circuit between any two of the three stages.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    307,    for noise or interference reduction means comprising filter means.
    The filter means may be located anywhere in the system and may consist of
    either a single filter or a plurality of filters.


CLS 455/312
TXT In demodulator or low frequency (e.g., audio frequency) amplifier circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 296 wherein the noise or interference
    reduction means forms an integral part of or is electrically associated
    with the circuitry of the demodulator or the low frequency (e.g., audio
    frequency) amplifier stages of the receiver.


CLS 455/313
TXT Frequency modifying or conversion:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 including means whereby a modulated
    carrier wave signal is changed to another carrier frequency, e.g., an
    intermediate frequency signal, the frequency of which lies between that of
    the modulated input signal and the frequency of the lower frequency
    modulating signal.

    (1)     Note.  In this and the indented subclasses the frequency conversion
    is usually accomplished by combining a modulated carrier wave input signal
    with the output of a local oscillator means (i.e., by mixer means).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196.1+, for variation of local oscillator frequency combined with signal
    frequency selection.

    255+,   for local oscillator frequency control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 424
    for nonoptical parametric amplifier frequency converters, per se.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 76.41 for systems for
    measuring, testing, or sensing of electricity by heterodyning; and subclass
    85 for phase comparison systems utilizing frequency conversion.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 113+ for miscellaneous frequency conversion or control.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 37+ for beat frequency oscillators.

    332,    Modulators, appropriate subclasses for modulators in general.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 6+ for radar
    receivers which may utilize frequency conversion means; and subclasses 100+
    for directional receivers utilizing frequency converters.

    348,    Television, appropriate subclasses for television systems which may
    include frequency conversion.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    326+ for optical frequency translators.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for multiplex
    systems which may include frequency conversion.


CLS 455/314
TXT Plural separate successive conversions:

    Subject matter under subclass 313 comprising a plurality of separate
    frequency modifying or conversion means or stages, the modulated input wave
    being passed through the frequency conversion stages in succession.


CLS 455/315
TXT With plural separate local oscillators:

    Subject matter under subclass 314 including separate local oscillator means
    combined with at least two or more of the plural separate conversion means.


CLS 455/316
TXT With frequency stabilization for at least one local oscillator:

    Subject matter under subclass 315 including means whereby the output
    frequency of at least one of the plurality of separate local oscillator
    means is stabilized.


CLS 455/317
TXT Unwanted oscillation or radiation prevention:

    Subject matter under subclass 313 including frequency modifying or
    conversion means combined with other means whereby any unwanted or
    parasitical oscillations originating in the receiver circuitry are
    eliminated or whereby any oscillations occurring in the receiver circuitry
    are prevented from being reradiated from the receiving antenna.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, for electric shielding
    structures in general.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclass 89 for
    anti-induction systems in general.

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses for demodulators having
    radiation reducing means.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 5+ for radar
    receivers with reradiation prevention means; and subclasses 100+ for
    directive systems which may have radiation control.


CLS 455/318
TXT With specified local oscillator structure or coupling:

    Subject matter under subclass 313 including significant details of either
    (a) at least one source of unmodulated signal for frequency conversion, or
    (b) circuitry connecting a source of unmodulated signal to a frequency
    conversion device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196.1+, for signal selection based on frequency including variation of
    local oscillator frequency.

    255+,   for control of local oscillator frequency.


CLS 455/319
TXT With particular coupling:

    Subject matter under subclass 318 including significant details of
    circuitry whereby the output of the local oscillator means is coupled to
    the frequency modifying or conversion means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    338,    for subject matter relating to particular coupling means between
    stages of a receiver system.


CLS 455/320
TXT Lumped impedance:

    Systems under subclass 319 where substantially all impedance in the
    coupling means is concentrated in components, as distinguished from
    impedance due to stray or distributed effects.


CLS 455/321
TXT In a single envelope or with common active element (e.g., autodyne):

    Subject matter under subclass 318 wherein the frequency modifying or
    conversion means and the local oscillator means are enclosed in a single
    envelope.

    (1)     Note.  The combination of means may comprise:

    (a)     a single triode or diode type tube structure with external
    circuitry whereby a local signal is generated and superposed on a modulated
    signal input, (b)two or more assemblies of electrodes to which the local
    signal and the modulated input signal are applied, (c)a single assembly of
    electrodes to some of which the local signal is applied and to others of
    which the modulated wave input is applied.  One example of the subject
    matter to be found here is the autodyne system in which the same electron
    tube device constitutes both an oscillator and a mixer (1st detector).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 591 for miscellaneous circuits where an electron tube
    performs plural functions.

    329,    Demodulators, subclasses 323+, 346 and 358+ for diverse types of
    demodulators using locally generated oscillations.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 58 for oscillators performing plural
    functions simultaneously.


CLS 455/322
TXT Plural common electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 321 wherein the conversion means and local
    oscillator means are combined in a single electron tube having a plurality
    of separate control grids.


CLS 455/323
TXT Particular frequency conversion structure or circuitry:

    Subject matter under subclass 313 including significant details of the
    frequency modifying or conversion means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 113+ for miscellaneous frequency conversion or control.


CLS 455/324
TXT Homodyne (e.g., zero beat or synchrodyne reception):

    Subject matter under subclass 323 comprising frequency conversion or
    modifying means and combined with means whereby a local signal wave of the
    same frequency as the incoming modulated wave is injected therein (i.e.,
    zero beat).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    329,    Demodulators, subclasses 323+, 346 and 358+ use of synchronized
    oscillations locally generated in a frequency, phase, or amplitude
    demodulator, respectively.


CLS 455/325
TXT Including distributed electrical parameter structure:

    Systems under subclass 323 comprising frequency conversion means including
    significant structural elements of such dimensions that their distributed
    constants (e.g., inductance, capacitance, resistance, or conductance) must
    be taken into account.

    (1)     Note.  The distributed inductance or capacity may be either in the
    conversion device or associated circuitry.

    (2)     Note.  The subject matter found here generally consists of systems
    where the combination of a detecting element and structure having
    distributed electrical parameters and which system is restricted by
    disclosure or claims to mixers or converters.  Where the combination is
    claimed generically with general detection use suggested in the
    specification, or with both mixer and detector use suggested in the
    specification, classification is in Class 329, subclasses 160+ or other
    appropriate subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    329,    Demodulators, subclasses 322 and 354 for distributed parameter
    structure in a frequency or amplitude demodulator, respectively.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 43 for travelling wave tube amplifiers;
    subclass 44 for electron beam tube amplifiers; subclass 47 for magnetron
    amplifiers; and subclass 49 for electron vacuum tube amplifiers with
    distributed electrical parameter elements.

    331,    Oscillators, appropriate subclasses for oscillators with
    distributed parameter resonator, particularly subclass 42 for beat
    frequency oscillators with cavity mixer.

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 129+ for distributed parameter structure in
    a frequency modulator and subclasses 163+ for distributed parameter
    structure in an amplitude modulator.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks appropriate subclasses for
    passive wave transmission networks of the distributed parameter type.


CLS 455/326
TXT With balanced mixer:

    Systems under subclass 325 including two or more identical frequency
    conversion devices arranged in conjugate relationship about a neutral or
    grounded point, the output of the system comprising a linear combination of
    the separate input signals.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter to be found here will include systems in
    which input signals are applied to the input of the mixer or conversion
    devices 180 apart, with the output signal being derived in additive
    relationship (i.e., push-pull).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 154 and 180 for push-pull circuits in an
    amplitude modulator and subclass 172 for an amplitude modulator utilizing a
    bridge circuit.


CLS 455/327
TXT Stripline:

    Systems under subclass 326 where the distributed electrical parameter
    structure is in the form of a thin, narrow rectangular strip adjacent to a
    wide ground-plane conductor or between two wide ground-plane conductors.


CLS 455/328
TXT Hollow waveguide:

    Subject matter under subclass 326 in which the distributed electrical
    parameter structure is a transmission line comprising a hollow conducting
    tube.


CLS 455/329
TXT Electron beam tube:

    Subject matter under subclass 325 wherein the frequency conversion means
    comprises electron beam tube means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    332,    Modulators, appropriate subclasses for a pulse, frequency, phase or
    amplitude modulator utilizing electron beam tubes.


CLS 455/330
TXT With nonlinear impedance (e.g., diode):

    Subject matter under subclass 325 having a device connected to the
    distributed electrical parameter structure, said device having an output
    that does not rise or fall in direction proportion to the input.


CLS 455/331
TXT Crystal or electron tube diode:

    Systems under subclass 323 and in which the frequency conversion means
    consists of crystal or other type (e.g., electron tube) diode devices of
    the two terminal or electrode type.  The diodes may be of passive rectifier
    type or active such as a negative resistance (e.g., tunnel or Esaki diode).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    326+,   for plural diode mixers forming a balanced mixer combined with
    distributed parameter structure.

    330+,   for a diode mixer combined with nonlinear structure.

    333,    for frequency converters of the semiconductor active element type
    having three or more terminals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    329,    Demodulators and Detectors, subclasses 203+ for demodulating
    devices consisting of diode or two electrode devices.

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 139+ for piezoelectric devices in a
    frequency modulator, subclass 172 for an amplitude modulator having a
    bridge which may include a nonlinear device, and subclasses 176+ for a
    nonlinear device in an amplitude modulator.


CLS 455/332
TXT Push-pull:

    Systems under subclass 323 wherein the frequency conversion means includes
    two paths for either the modulated input carrier wave or locally generated
    signal wave, or both, which have a common output, the two paths being
    connected electrically in parallel with respect to the input and output of
    the paths the voltages in the two paths being 180 of phase with respect to
    each other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses for demodulators having
    balanced input.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclass 118 for push-pull amplifiers.

    332,    Modulators, subclasses 154 and 180 for push-pull circuits in an
    amplitude modulator.


CLS 455/333
TXT Transistor or integrated circuit:

    Systems under subclass 323 wherein the frequency conversion means comprises
    an active element, three or more terminal device or devices constructed of
    a semiconductor material having a specific resistance, for example, of the
    order of that of germanium, silicon, selenium, etc. (e.g., transistor).

    (1)     Note.  For specific types of receivers which may include
    semiconductor devices, see the pertinent subclass relating to the
    particular special type receiver in this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses integrated circuit structure with active solid-state
    devices, subclasses 446 and 499+ for integrated circuit devices with
    electrically isolated components, in general, and other appropriate
    subclasses for specific type devices in integrated circuits.

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses for demodulators using a
    discrete semiconductor device.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 250+ for amplifiers with transistors.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 108+ for oscillators utilizing transistor
    type active element.

    348,    Television, subclasses 659+ for natural color television with
    mixing.


CLS 455/334
TXT With particular receiver circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 comprising subcombinations peculiarly
    adapted for use in a receiver system, and consisting of an electron tube or
    other active elements combined with particular electric circuit means in
    either the input or output thereof.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and its indented subclasses provide for
    subject matter peculiar to and forming subcombinations of receiver
    apparatus which are not sufficiently comprehensively claimed for
    classification above in this class, but which claim sufficient significant
    structure to exclude the subject matter claimed from art classified
    elsewhere. See Search Notes under subclass 130.


CLS 455/335
TXT Plural diverse function tube or stage (performs plural functions
    alternately or concurrently):

    Subject matter under subclass 334 including at least one electron space
    discharge device which is provided with circuit means for performing at
    least two independent functions either simultaneously or selectively.


CLS 455/336
TXT Superregenerative detector or discriminator:

    Subject matter under subclass 334 comprising systems of the type where, in
    the detector, oscillations are alternately allowed to build up and are
    quenched at a frequency which is high compared with the modulation
    frequency.

    (1)     Note.  The quench voltage may be supplied either by the detector
    itself or it may be supplied separately by a separate quenching oscillator.

    (2)     Note.  The superregenerative devices found here are very similar to
    the detector or demodulator systems found in Class 329.  However, the
    superregenerative systems have been excluded from that class since they are
    more in the nature of a combination of amplifier plus a first detector
    (i.e., mixer) in which the input comprises a modulated wave and in which
    the output voltage representing the modulating signal.  Therefor, even
    though the devices to be found here are often claimed as detectors, they
    are excluded from the detector Class 329 and, since this is the generic
    class for modulated carrier wave communication systems, they are to be
    classified here as wave frequency conversion devices.  See section III
    under the class definition of Class 329 for a further understanding of the
    line of demarcation between the two as to this subject matter.


CLS 455/337
TXT Discriminator or demodulator:

    Systems under subclass 334 including discriminator or demodulator means
    associated with sufficient significant circuitry so as to be limited to use
    in a receiver system.

    (1)     Note.  Some examples of subject matter to be found in this subclass
    are detector means in combination with antenna means and frequency
    discriminator means deriving an output other than the modulation signal,
    etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, particularly subclasses 2+ for miscellaneous phase discrimination,
    subclasses 39+ for miscellaneous frequency discrimination, and subclasses
    334+ for a miscellaneous circuit providing an output which is a nonlinear
    function of an input.

    329,    Demodulators, subclasses 315+, 345+ and 347+ for frequency, phase
    or amplitude demodulators, respectively.  See also the Class Definition of
    Class 329 for additional relevant areas of search.


CLS 455/338
TXT Coupling or decoupling between stages:

    Systems under subclass 334 including means whereby two or more stages or
    systems are electrically associated in such a manner that electrical
    effects in one produce similar effects in the other or networks are used to
    prevent interaction or coupling between two electric circuits.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280+,   for receivers with particular coupling means between antenna and
    input circuit.

    319+,   for local oscillator with particular coupling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, appropriate subclasses for amplifiers with coupling or
    decoupling means.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 74+ for oscillators with particular output
    coupling networks, per se, comprised of passive elements.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 24+ for coupling
    networks, per se, comprised of passive elements.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for transformers adapted
    to be used as coupling means.


CLS 455/339
TXT Band pass filter:

    Systems under subclass 338 wherein the coupling means comprises a band pass
    filter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 165-212 for wave
    filters comprised of passive elements.


CLS 455/340
TXT Variably tunable or adjustable:

    Systems under subclass 338 wherein the coupling or decoupling means is
    recited as variably tunable or adjustable whereby the extent of the
    effective coupling or the width of the band passed by the network may be
    varied.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191,    for band selection receivers with a plurality of tunable coupled
    tube stages.

    266,    for receivers with selectivity or bandwidth control means.

    289,    for variable coupling means between antenna and receiver.


CLS 455/341
TXT Amplifier:

    Systems under subclass 334 including amplifier means associated with
    sufficient significant circuitry so as to be limited to use in a receiver
    system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses for a demodulator with
    associated amplifier.

    330,    Amplifiers, appropriate subclasses for specific amplifiers, per se.


CLS 455/342
TXT Reflex type:

    Systems under subclass 341 wherein the amplifier is of the reflex type
    wherein two signals of different frequencies are amplified in the same tube.

    (1)     Note.  Most reflex circuits amplify the two signals simultaneously.
     For example, the signal may be amplified once as an i-f signal before
    detection and again as an a-f signal after detection.

    (2)     Note.  See the discussion of amplifier means in combination with
    other peculiar to radio receivers, in a single tube, in Note XVII of the
    Search Notes to Class 330, Amplifiers, for the classification line between
    the subject matter in that class and that contained in this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  Systems comprising the combination of amplifier means with
    detector means and wherein the detector means is claimed in such a way as
    to comprise merely a feedback signal source from the output to the input of
    the amplifier or where the detector is claimed in broad terms and
    significant details of the amplifier are claimed, will be classified here.
    Systems comprising significantly claimed detector means combined with an
    amplifier means claimed in broad terms or as serving merely as an input
    signal source for the detector means will be classified in Class 329,
    Demodulators.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    335,    for receivers having a tube or stage for performing plural
    functions simultaneously or selectively.


CLS 455/343
TXT With particular power or bias supply (includes battery saving means and
    includes self-powered):

    Systems under subclass 334 including significant details of a source of
    electrical energy for supplying power to the elements of the receiver or
    for supplying biasing potential to the electrodes of the active elements
    comprising the elements of the receiver.

    (1)     Note.  Class 327, Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear
    Devices, Circuits, and Systems, particularly subclasses 530+ is the place
    for miscellaneous circuits having a specific source of supply or bias
    voltage.  See also the SEARCH CLASS section thereunder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for means for protecting a transmitter by controlling the power
    supply or bias voltage.

    127+,   for transmitters with particular power or bias voltage supply.

    230+,   for similar receiver circuits having means to control receiver
    operation.

    298+,   for a power supply including means to prevent undesired signals
    therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses for demodulators with power
    supply.


CLS 455/344
TXT Combined with diverse art device:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein the receiver apparatus is
    combined with other devices or structures having an added purpose or
    independent utility other than to perfect the receiver, and in which the
    utility of the other art device is not destroyed or disturbed by the
    removal of the receiver and which combination is not provided for elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  Where the other art device merely acts as a temporary
    support for a receiver and there is no special structural features which
    form a cooperating means between the other art device and the receiver
    classification will be elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 455+ for changeable
    exhibitors with sound in which the source of the sound may be a receiver.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclass 214 for fuses utilizing radiant
    energy.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 118+ for telegraph receivers which may be
    combined with other art devices.

    194,    Check-Actuated Control Mechanisms, appropriate subclasses  for
    check controlled radio systems combined with other art devices.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 27.1+ for means for supporting an instrument
    in a panel.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 9.1+
    for vehicle mounted systems in which the vehicle may provide power means
    for a radio telephone or other receiver means; and subclass 156 for
    miscellaneous systems with particular load device or load device
    combination.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 7.1 for radio type cabinets.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 6 for radar system combined
    with diverse radio wave systems or apparatus.

    346,    Recorders, subclass 37 for recorders combined with a radio
    receiver, responsive to the receiver tuning means and for the purpose of
    determining the listening habits of the users of a receiver.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 182+ for
    single and plural relay circuits that are frequency responsive.  The signal
    may be derived from the output of a receiver means.

    362,    Illumination, appropriate subclasses for combined light and
    structure.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 6+ for
    combined radio and phonograph systems.

    386,    Television Signal Processing for Dynamic Recording or Reproducing,
    subclasses 1+ and 46+ for television combined with recorders.

    396,    Photography, subclass 434 for a camera combined with a radio.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 116+ for figure toys combined
    with sound in which the figure may act as a receptacle for a receiver.


CLS 455/345
TXT With vehicle:

    Subject matter under subclass 344 wherein the diverse art device is a
    self-propelled movable conveyance in which the receiver is mounted.

    (1)     Note.  For purpose of classification in this class, aircraft, land
    vehicles, and water craft are all considered to be vehicles under the
    general meaning of the word.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11.1+,  for mobile radio repeater stations.

    95+,    for mobile or portable transmitters.

    152,    for remote control of the tuning of a vehicle receiver.

    297,    for noise elimination or vehicle receiver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 705+ for antennas
    combined with aircraft; and subclasses 711+ for antennas combined with
    other vehicles.


CLS 455/346
TXT Detachable for portability:

    Subject matter under subclass 345 wherein the cooperating means between the
    vehicle and receiver is operable to permit release of the receiver to
    operate in an easily carried, self-contained manner.


CLS 455/347
TXT Cabinet, housing, or chassis structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 130 including structural details of an
    enclosure surrounding, or a framework supporting, the electrical components
    of the receiver.

    (1)     Note.  The cabinet structures in this and the indented subclasses
    must include specific structure of a receiver or an element thereof,
    otherwise such structure is classified as a cabinet, per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66,     for spaced transmitter and receiver systems combined with other art
    devices.

    128,    for transmitters with casing or housing.

    344,    for receivers combined with other art devices where the other art
    device may also furnish an enclosure or support for the receiver means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 50+ for boxes
    and housings limited by claimed structure to electrical use but having no
    characteristic limiting them to particular electrical equipment; and
    subclasses 250+ for printed circuit arrangements of general utility.

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 148+ for a diaphragm mounted in a cabinet.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 7.1 for cabinets or
    enclosures especially designed to house radio apparatus absent electrical
    component structure; see (1) Note, above.

    348,    Television, subclasses 787+, 789, and 836+ for structural details
    of cabinet or chassis for television systems.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 331+ for
    boxes and mountings in combination with electrical apparatus having no
    significant art limitation, or boxes and mounting in combination with
    plural diverse electrical apparatus, particularly subclass 101 for radio
    type components with housing or mounting means including modules.


CLS 455/348
TXT With retractable or readily detachable chassis:

    Subject matter under subclass 347 wherein the structure includes means
    whereby a chassis structure is retractably, hingedly, or detachably
    supported within the cabinet structure.


CLS 455/349
TXT Sectional or interconnectable (e.g., modules):

    Subject matter under subclass 347 wherein the receiver components are
    separately housed in separate containers or supported in groups or units
    each of the containers groups or units being separable from the others.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 50+ for
    electrical boxes and housings; and subclasses 250+ for preformed panel
    circuit arrangements, per se.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 380+ for
    radio-type electrical apparatus comprised of plural components with spacing
    or mounting means (e.g., modules and for switchboards and analogous devices
    utilizing printing circuitry.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclass 17 for detachable connectors
    comprising preformed panel circuit arrangement, e.g., printed circuit
    devices.


CLS 455/350
TXT With particular speaker mounting:

    Subject matter under subclass 347 wherein there are details of a support
    for a speaker in the receiver.


CLS 455/351
TXT Transportable:

    Subject matter under subclass 347 wherein the receiver is of such size and
    shape as to be readily carried by or supported by a person.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11+,    for portable repeaters.

    95+,    for portable transmitters.

    575,    for portable transceivers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 250 for radio and microwave frequency
    meters which may be portable.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 100+ for directive
    receiver systems comprising receivers which may be carried on the person;
    and subclass 718 for antennas adapted to be body attached or connected.


CLS 455/352
TXT Remote control of receiver:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein the operation of the receiver is
    controlled by at least one or more devices from a point geographically
    spaced from the receiver.

    (1)     Note.  The control system to be found in this and indented
    subclasses will include both means whereby the control function is
    performed electrically from a remote point over intervening wired or radio
    circuits and means whereby the control function is performed mechanically
    by mechanical means such as a Bowden wire or flexible shaft.

    (2)     Note.  The term geographically spaced means located at a distance
    of an order of magnitude comparable to, or greater than the receiver
    dimensions.

    (3)     Note.  Radio wave remote control of a receiver, per se, is
    classified herein. Radio wave remote control of an external device (e.g.,
    garage door opener) is classified in Class 340, subclasses 694+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.1+,   for remote control of a distribution system.

    31.1+,  for systems with receiver selection (e.g., selective calling).

    68+,    for systems having a transmitter and a receiver at separate
    location with signal control.

    88,     for a transceiver controlling a separate transceiver or receiver.

    92,     for remote control of a transmitter.

    151.1,  for receivers with remote control of channel or station selection
    (e.g., tuning).

    227+,   for a receiver responsive to an input signal of a particular
    predetermined frequency which may be used to remotely control the receiver.

    345,    for remote control of a vehicle receiver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 10+ for shaft operators of
    the radio tuner type which may be remotely controlled.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass .02 for electric motor
    control and clutch which may be utilized in radio receiver control means.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses
    for switch means, per se, particularly subclasses 35+ for clock controlled
    switching means.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 116+
    for condition responsive switching systems.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 16 for electric motor
    control systems.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 518+ for miscellaneous control circuits.

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses for automatic control of a
    demodulator.

    330,    Amplifiers, subclasses 127+ for amplifier means combined with means
    to control the power supply or bias voltage.

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 1+ for oscillators combined with automatic
    frequency stabilization means; subclasses 175+ for the frequency
    stabilization means; subclasses 177+ for frequency adjusting means; and
    subclasses 182+ for amplitude control or stabilization means for
    oscillators.

    332,    Modulators, appropriate subclasses for modulators combined with
    control means.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, appropriate subclasses for
    passive element networks with control means or having a controlling
    function.  For example, subclass 16 for pilot current controlled networks;
    subclasses 17.1+ of automatically controlled networks; and subclass 81 for
    attenuators.

    336,    Inductor Devices, appropriate subclasses for transformers or
    inductive devices with controlling means.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, appropriate subclasses for electrical
    resistance elements with control means, particularly subclasses 68+ for
    mechanically variable resistors.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.69 and 825.72 for
    remote control signalling or indicating systems; subclass 539 for an alarm
    system automatically responsive to a condition with a radio coupling link;
    and subclass 696 for a transmitter used for remote control.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 5+ for radar
    systems with control means; and subclasses 100+ for directive systems with
    control means.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    142+ for light wave remote control of an external device.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 182+ for
    radio control of a relay end element.


CLS 455/353
TXT Plural conditions from remote station:

    Subject matter under subclass 352 wherein two or more operation conditions
    of a receiver are controlled from a remote control device; e.g., volume and
    frequency.


CLS 455/354
TXT Mechanical:

    Subject matter under subclass 353 wherein the remote control device is a
    mechanical means utilized to vary one or more conditions of a receiver
    circuit.


CLS 455/355
TXT Amplitude, volume, or gain control:

    Subject matter under subclass 352 including means for adjusting the signal
    level (amplitude), amplification (volume), or gain of the receiver system
    as a function of the transmitted control signal from a remote point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232.1+, for nonremote means to control the gain, volume, or gain control of
    a receiver.


CLS 455/400
TXT HAVING SINGLE-CHANNEL TELEPHONE CARRIER:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a single telephone speech
    signal on wired link modulates a carrier signal which has a frequency above
    the range of human audibility.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 485+ for transmission of more
    than a single telephone signal on a carrier.


CLS 455/401
TXT Including call signaling (e.g., ringing, off-hook, dialing):

    Subject matter under subclass 400 which performs a call related signaling
    operation distinct from voice information.

    (1)     Note.  These signals are of predetermined frequency and perform the
    same functions as dc signals in a noncarrier telephone system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    567,    for a radiotelephone call alerting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclass 31 for testing of a call
    signaling arrangement and subclasses 164, 179+, 251+, 350+, and 418 for
    various telephone call signaling arrangements.


CLS 455/402
TXT Over power line:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein a modulated telephone carrier is
    transmitted over a power line electrical conductor.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are residential type plug-in intercoms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3.3,    for distribution system combined with power distribution network.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 310.01+ for electrical
    signaling over a power line.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 485+ for combining or
    distributing information via carrier frequency channels which may be
    transmitted over a power line.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 167+ for a general intercom
    system.


CLS 455/403
TXT RADIOTELEPHONE SYSTEM:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein voice communication is
    established between a base and a mobile transceiver via a wireless carrier
    wave channel that is allocated for use during a communication link and
    wherein the mobile transceiver has a specific assigned call address number.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    550+,   for radiotelephone equipment detail.


CLS 455/404
TXT Emergency or alarm communication:

    Subject matter under  subclass 403 which includes summoning response to an
    urgent or  hazardous situation over a radiotelephone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 287+ for a signal box alarm
    arrangement.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 37+ for an emergency or alarm
    communication in a landline telephone network.


CLS 455/405
TXT Usage measurement:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 which determines an amount of  provided
    service, such as a time length, number, or frequency of radiotelephone
    usage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for audience survey or program distribution use accounting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 1+  for television use survey and accounting.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 111+ for usage measurement in
    a landline telephone network.


CLS 455/406
TXT Billing:

    Subject matter under subclass 405 which computes a cost of usage or
    receives a radiotelephone subscriber payment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclass 3 for television use accounting with a billing
    feature.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 464.1+
    for cost computing using significant computer data processing.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 114+ for landline telephone
    call charge metering or monitoring.


CLS 455/407
TXT At subscriber unit:

    Subject matter under subclass 406  wherein the billing is performed at the
    radiotelephone terminal.


CLS 455/408
TXT At remote station:

    Subject matter under subclass  406  wherein the billing is performed at a
    place other than the radiotelephone terminal.


CLS 455/409
TXT Rental:

    Subject matter under subclass 405  including a service radiotelephone that
    is available for use in return for a periodic payment.


CLS 455/410
TXT Security or fraud prevention:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 having a provision for defeating or
    indicating an attempt to use the radiotelephone system without a proper
    authorization or control function.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclass 189 for a fraud or improper use
    mitigation or indication of a landline telephone.


CLS 455/411
TXT Privacy, lock-out, or authentication:

    Subject matter under subclass 410 which permits use of the radiotelephone
    system only by an authorized subscriber or transceiver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 161 for exclusion or priority
    in a multi-line or key substation system, subclasses 168+ for lockout in an
    intercom or single line system, subclass 184 for lockout in a polystation
    or party line system, and subclasses 194+ for lockout or double use
    signaling of a landline telephone.


CLS 455/412
TXT Message storage or retrieval:

    Subject matter under subclass 403  wherein the radiotelephone system is
    combined with a structure for retention of a message signal or for
    reproduction thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclasses
    for a static memory element or system, per se.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, appropriate subclasses
    for audio information storage or retrieval, per se.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 67+ for a message storage or
    retrieval within a landline telephone network.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 2.09+ for
    speech signal processing.


CLS 455/413
TXT Voice mail:

    Subject matter under subclass 412 wherein the message signal is an
    intelligible human sound.


CLS 455/414
TXT Special service:

    Subject matter under subclass 403  including a switching, connection, or
    control function additional to those necessary to establish and maintain a
    single call connection between two stations.

    (1)     Note.  These services generally involve three or more stations or
    two or more call connections.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of such special services are conferencing, call
    forwarding or transfer,  call waiting, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 259+ for special services
    combined with multiplex switching.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 157+ for special services on
    a key telephone system and subclasses 201+ for special services within a
    landline telephone network.


CLS 455/415
TXT Caller identification:

    Subject matter under subclass 414 which provides either a visible
    indication or a permanent or semi-permanent record of the calling telephone
    number  terminal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communications,  subclass 120 for a calling number
    identification on a hardcopy call charge record,  subclass 142 for a caller
    identification within a landline telephone network,  and subclasses 264+
    for a  line identification at a central switching facility.


CLS 455/416
TXT Call conferencing:

    Subject matter under subclass  414 which enables three or more terminals to
    be included in a single call connection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 260+ for conferencing using a
    multiplex communication technique.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 202+ for a call conferencing
    within a landline telephone network.


CLS 455/417
TXT Call diversion:

    Subject matter under subclass  414  for directing a call connection from an
    addressed radiotelephone station to another destination.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 210+ for a call diversion
    within a landline telephone network.


CLS 455/418
TXT Programming control:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 comprising an operation controlling logic
    which modifies operating characteristics of  the radiotelephone system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 514+
    for communication engineering having significant  computer programming in
    the controlling process.


CLS 455/419
TXT Remote programming control:

    Subject matter under subclass 418 wherein the programming control is
    generated at a place other than the location of a device which is being
    programmed.


CLS 455/420
TXT Control of another apparatus:

    Subject matter under subclass 419 wherein the programming control is
    remotely generated to control a nonradiotelephone system or device.


CLS 455/421
TXT Out-of-range indication:

    Subject matter under subclass 403  wherein a visual or audible signal
    indicates to a mobile user that he or she is approaching or beyond a
    communication area.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass may use a signal quality measurement as a
    parameter for an out-of-range determination.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    456+,   for location monitoring which does not have an out-of-range
    signaling feature.


CLS 455/422
TXT Zoned or cellular telephone system:

    Subject matter under subclass 403  including plural stations providing
    service to different geographical areas.

    (1)     Note.  Cellular systems are characterized by a large number of
    base stations enabling channel reuse.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 328+ for multiplex
    communication in a system having a plurality of contiguous regions served
    by respective fixed stations.


CLS 455/423
TXT Diagnostic testing, malfunction indication, or electrical condition
    measurement:

    Subject matter under subclass 422 for evaluating or monitoring the
    condition of a zoned or cellular radiotelephone system  in order  to
    determine the presence of a faulty or nonstandard condition.

    (1)     Note.  Testing to determine which one of several normal status
    conditions of the system exist (e.g., busy-idle, off-hook) is not
    classified in this or indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  Location determination for a mobile station  is not
    classified herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67.1+,  for measuring, testing, or monitoring of a system having a
    transmitter and receiver at separate stations.

    115,    for measuring, testing, or monitoring of a transmitter.

    226.1+, for measuring or testing of a receiver.

    456,    for  a mobile unit location determination.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses for an
    electrical measurement or test not limited to a telephone instrument or
    system.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 635+ for fault indication
    of an electrical apparatus or an electrical parameter.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 1+ for diagnostic testing,
    malfunction indication, or electrical condition measurement  within a
    landline telephone network.


CLS 455/424
TXT System equipment:

    Subject matter under subclass 423 wherein the evaluation, measuring, or
    monitoring is of a wireless network equipment.


CLS 455/425
TXT Subscriber equipment:

    Subject matter under subclass 423 wherein the evaluation, measuring, or
    monitoring is of a mobile user's equipment.


CLS 455/426
TXT Including other radio communication system (e.g., cordless telephone,
    paging, trunking, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 422 comprising both a noncellular radio
    communication and a cellular radiotelephone system.


CLS 455/427
TXT Space satellite:

    Subject matter under subclass 422  wherein  a man-made vehicle orbiting the
    earth is used to relay communication signals between stations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12.1+,  for noncellular satellite communications systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 352+ for directive communication which
    includes a satellite.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, digest 2 for a satellite
    mounted antenna.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 316+ for a space satellite
    repeater in a multiplex communication system.


CLS 455/428
TXT Switching or routing:

    Subject matter under subclass 427  which  selects a suitable satellite in a
    constellation or an antenna beam within a satellite to relay communication
    signals.

    (1)     Note.  A satellite usually has more than one antenna beam; each
    beam covers a particular area on earth via satellite projection.


CLS 455/429
TXT Cell projection:

    Subject matter under subclass 427 including a layout detail of a particular
    geographical area on earth being served by the satellite.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    446+,   for other particular cell planning techniques.


CLS 455/430
TXT Ground station control:

    Subject matter under subclass 427 including an earth based station for
    monitoring and controlling the communication relay operations of the space
    satellite.


CLS 455/431
TXT Airborne or aircraft:

    Subject matter under subclass 422 wherein a space deployed station or an
    airplane is used as a communication station or as a relay communicating
    station.

    (1)     Note.  The space deployed station in this subclass may be a balloon
    or blimp.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    427+,   for an earth orbiting satellite in a cellular telephone system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    342,    Communications:   Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), appropriate subclasses for aircraft directive
    communication in a noncellular communication system.


CLS 455/432
TXT Roaming:

    Subject matter under subclass 422  wherein a mobile station operates in a
    cellular system other than the system where the mobile station is
    subscribed.


CLS 455/433
TXT Home location registration (HLR) or visitor location registration (VLR)
    detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 432  having a particular detail of a
    subscribed or a transitional database which serves the roaming operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    435,    for a procedure of registration to a service area.


CLS 455/434
TXT Control or access channel scanning:

    Subject matter under subclass 422 wherein the mobile station searches all
    available overhead message trains in the system in order to obtain
    information about each cell prior to a registration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32.1,   for a system with receiver selection wherein the receiver scans for
    an address signal.

    515,    for a  noncellular control or access channel scanning.


CLS 455/435
TXT Registration:

    Subject matter under subclass 422  including a procedure by which a mobile
    station identifies itself to the radiotelephone system as being located
    within its service area.


CLS 455/436
TXT Handoff:

    Subject matter under subclass 422  wherein a mobile station during a call
    is switched from a first to a second serving base station, which may be
    located in different cells (inter-handoff) or located within a cell
    (intra-handoff).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 331+ for handoff control in a
    multiplex communication system.


CLS 455/437
TXT Mobile assisted or initiated:

    Subject matter under subclass 436 wherein the mobile station plays a role
    in the determination of the new serving base station.

    (1)     Note.  This is an automatic process which is generated without user
    participation.


CLS 455/438
TXT Serving site initiated:

    Subject matter under subclass 436 wherein the currently serving base
    station sends a request to a mobile telephone switching center to handoff a
    call.


CLS 455/439
TXT Handoff initiated by another source (e.g., target, user initiated, mobile
    switching center  (MSC), or mobile telephone switching office (MTSO), etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 436 wherein a site other than the serving
    base station or the mobile station originates the handoff.

    (1)     Note.   The other sources may be a mobile telephone switching
    office (MTSO), a mobile switching center (MSC), a new serving base station
    (target), or a user of the mobile unit.


CLS 455/440
TXT Based upon unit location:

    Subject matter under subclass 436 wherein the handoff is based on a mobile
    station position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    456,    for a location monitoring in a noncellular system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 988+ for vehicle position
    indication.

    342,    Communications:  Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 450+ for position indication in a
    nonradiotelephone cellular system.


CLS 455/441
TXT Based upon unit velocity:

    Subject matter under subclass 436 wherein the handoff is based on a mobile
    station speed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 936  for vehicle speed or
    over speed detection.


CLS 455/442
TXT Soft handoff:

    Subject matter under subclass 436 wherein the mobile station maintains its
    assigned channel while entering a new cell (e.g., make before break).


CLS 455/443
TXT Overlapping cells:

    Subject matter under subclass 436 including the handoff in a special
    situation where the mobile unit is in a common area between cells.


CLS 455/444
TXT Between macro and micro cells:

    Subject matter under subclass  436 including  a technique dealing with
    handoff between cells having significantly different coverage areas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    449,    for a hierarchical cell structure layout.


CLS 455/445
TXT Call routing (e.g., to prevent backhaul, routing efficiency, least cost, or
    alternate routing):

    Subject matter under subclass 422 involving the assignment of a
    communication path by which information is carried to its destination.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    560,    for detail of a switching unit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 216+ for alternate routing in
    the case of fault, subclass 238 for least cost or minimum delay routing,
    and subclasses 351+ for path finding or routing in a multiplex switching
    system.


CLS 455/446
TXT Including cell planning or layout:

    Subject matter under subclass 422 including a design of cell architecture
    of the cellular telephone system.


CLS 455/447
TXT Frequency reuse scheme:

    Subject matter under subclass 446 wherein the cellular system is divided
    into smaller coverage areas in which a  frequency can be simultaneously
    assigned to different coverage areas with minimum interference.


CLS 455/448
TXT Co-located systems:

    Subject matter under subclass  446 wherein a second cellular system is
    added to an existing cellular system at the same location.


CLS 455/449
TXT Hierarchical cell structure:

    Subject matter under subclass  446 wherein the radiotelephone system
    contains a site having cells organized into ranks, each subordinate to the
    one above it  (e.g., pico, micro, and macro cells, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    444,    for handoff between macro and micro cells.


CLS 455/450
TXT Channel allocation:

    Subject matter under subclass 422 wherein a mobile station is assigned a
    communication resource (e.g., frequency, time slot, etc.) for
    communications.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    464,    for a channel allocation in a private cordless extension system.

    509+,   for a centralized channel allocation in a general
    telecommunication, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 329+ for channel assignment in
    a region partitioning multiplex communication system, subclass 341 for
    channel assignment in a radio trunking multiplex communication, and
    subclasses 431+ for channel assignment in a general multiplex
    communication, per se.


CLS 455/451
TXT Hybrid allocation:

    Subject matter under subclass 450 including a combination of dynamic and
    fixed channel allocation.


CLS 455/452
TXT Dynamic allocation:

    Subject matter under subclass 450 wherein a channel is variably assigned.


CLS 455/453
TXT Load balancing:

    Subject matter under subclass 450 wherein a channel is assigned based on
    the density of the communication traffic.


CLS 455/454
TXT Spectrum sharing for different type of system (e.g., point-to-point
    microwave, television, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 450 wherein the cellular system utilizes
    frequency bands common to other types of systems for allocating channel.


CLS 455/455
TXT Channel seizing:

    Subject matter under subclass 422 wherein a mobile station identifies and
    commandeers a channel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    516,    for channel seizing in a telecommunication between
    nonradiotelephone transmitters and receivers.


CLS 455/456
TXT Location monitoring:

    Subject matter under subclass 422 including means to determine the position
    of a mobile station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    440,    for handoff control based on location.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses  988+ for vehicle location
    indication.

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 450+ for directive position indicating
    in noncellular and non-radiotelephone systems.


CLS 455/457
TXT Location display:

    Subject matter under subclass 456 wherein the location of the mobile
    station is visibly indicated.


CLS 455/458
TXT Specific paging technique:

    Subject matter under subclass 422 wherein the radiotelephone system
    summons a mobile station in a particular manner after an incoming call has
    been placed to the mobile station.


CLS 455/459
TXT Meet-me system:

    Subject matter under subclass 458 wherein an incoming call is parked while
    the radiotelephone system summons the mobile unit and when a response is
    received the radiotelephone system either connects the call or instructs
    the responding mobile unit on how to connect to the parked call (e.g.,
    giving a call back number).


CLS 455/460
TXT Auto-dialing:

    Subject matter under subclass  458 wherein the summons contains a call back
    number which is stored in the mobile station in order to generate an
    automatic call back.


CLS 455/461
TXT Including personal numbering system (i.e., intelligent network for
    subscriber tracking or follow-me subscriber feature):

    Subject matter under subclass 403 wherein a radiotelephone unit temporarily
    acquires a user's personal number that allows that user to make or receive
    calls independently of both a network access point and a specific telephone
    unit.


CLS 455/462
TXT Including private cordless extension system:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 wherein a base transceiver having direct
    connection to a landline telephone switching system provides restricted
    telephony access to a pre-selected cordless extension unit.

    (1)     Note.   Equipment for the private cordless extension is  not placed
    in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    550+,   for an equipment detail of the private cordless extension.


CLS 455/463
TXT Multi-users:

    Subject matter under subclass 462 wherein the restricted telephony access
    is provided to more than one preselected cordless extension unit.


CLS 455/464
TXT Channel selection or allocation:

    Subject matter under subclass 462 wherein a preselected cordless extension
    unit is assigned a communication resource (e.g., frequency, time slot,
    etc.) for communications.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    450+,   for a channel allocation in a cellular telephone system.

    509+,   for a centralized channel allocation in a general
    telecommunication, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 329+ for channel assignment in
    a region partitioning multiplex communication system, subclass 341 for
    channel assignment in a radio trunking multiplex communication, and
    subclasses 431+ for channel assignment in a general multiplex
    communication, per se.


CLS 455/465
TXT Including public cordless extension system:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 including a base transceiver which
    provides direct connection to a landline switching system for any cordless
    extension unit (i.e.,  access is not restricted to a preselected set of
    cordless extension units).


CLS 455/466
TXT Auxiliary data signaling (e.g., short message service (SMS)):

    Subject matter under subclass 403 including transmission of additional data
    messages which are nondestructive to voice communication.

    (1)     Note.  Auxiliary data signaling is widely used in cellular digital
    packet data transmission (CDPD) or in short message service (SMS).

    (2)     Note.  Nominal recitations of CDPD or SMS with significant
    radiotelephone system are classified herein.  For significant CDPD or SMS,
    see SEARCH CLASS note below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 328+ and 349 for cellular
    digital packet data transmission and subclasses 496 and 522 for signaling
    in a frequency division and time division multiplex communication system,
    respectively.


CLS 455/500
TXT Plural transmitters or receivers (i.e., more than two stations):

    Subject matter under subclass 39 including a plurality of separate and
    distinct transmitters, or receivers, or transmitter-receiver assemblies,
    which are physically located at a distance from each other and not
    restricted by claimed subject matter to other art classes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7+,     for a repeater which may employ plural transmitters or receivers.

    403+,   for a radiotelephone system wherein the intelligence to be conveyed
    is voice and which includes significant telephone exchange or landline
    structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825+ and 870.11+ for
    electrical communications in general which may have more than one
    transmitter or receiver.


CLS 455/501
TXT Noise, distortion, or singing reduction:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein any undesired electrical
    disturbance within the useful frequency band arising from sources internal
    or external to the system (e.g., crosstalk, power induction, atmospheric
    noise, etc.);  or any undesired self-sustained oscillation existing in the
    system;  or other unwanted signal tending to interfere with the operation
    of the system is reduced or prevented entirely.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for failure compensation in repeaters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 272+ for similar
    subject matter in a frequency shift keying system, subclasses 279+ for
    similar subject matter in a phase shift keyed system, subclass 285 for
    similar subject matter in a pulse modulated carrier wave system in general,
    subclass 313 for a key click prevention in a pulse modulated carrier wave
    keying circuit, and subclasses 346+ for similar subject matter in a pulse
    modulated carrier wave receiver.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 338+ for a telephone repeater
    with echo suppressing or anti-singing circuits.


CLS 455/502
TXT Synchronized stations:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein stations in a system are
    regulated such that each station transmits a carrier wave of the same
    frequency and phase as those carriers transmitted by the other stations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclass 350 and subclasses 503+ for
    synchronization  in a wireless and in a general multiplex communication
    system, respectively.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclass 272 for a synchronized
    frequency shift keying and subclasses 354+ for synchronizers.


CLS 455/503
TXT Simulcast system:

    Subject matter under subclass 502 in which a plurality of remote site
    transmitters simultaneously broadcast identical audio or data message
    signals on a particular carrier frequency and a receiving site positioned
    between two or more transmitting sites receives equal strength carrier
    signals from each remote transmitter, the message signals from the
    transmitters being synchronized in time.


CLS 455/504
TXT Fading compensation:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 having a device which corrects the
    undesired variation in amplitude of a received modulated carrier wave.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for fading compensation in a repeating system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclass 345 for automatic gain
    control in a pulse modulated carrier wave receiver.


CLS 455/505
TXT Due to weather:

    Subject matter under subclass 504 wherein the undesired variation in
    amplitude of a received modulated carrier wave is due to conditions such
    as: rain, snow, or disturbances in the upper atmosphere, which scatter the
    signals.


CLS 455/506
TXT Rayleigh or multipath fading:

    Subject matter under subclass 504 wherein signal fading is caused by
    cancellation and reinforcement of signal contributions received over
    separate paths.


CLS 455/507
TXT Central station (e.g., master, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 500 having a main station which has at least
    one transmitter-receiver assembly and a plurality of satellite stations,
    the satellite stations being connected to the main station by line wire or
    other means.

    (1)     Note.  The central station may receive messages transmitted by
    modulated carrier waves from an external source or from one or more
    satellite stations within the system and selectively transmit the received
    messages to all satellite receivers, to a selected satellite receiver, or
    to a receiver external to the system.

    (2)     Note.  The satellite receivers may be capable of communicating with
    each other without the intervention of the central station, but in order to
    communicate with a station external to the system, the communication must
    go through the central station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403+,   for a radiotelephone system which may include a central station.

    561+,   for a radiotelephone base station equipment detail.


CLS 455/508
TXT Having console:

    Subject matter under subclass 507 having details of an operating control
    board which monitors the system automatically or via an operator.


CLS 455/509
TXT Channel allocation:

    Subject matter under subclass 507 wherein a communication station is
    assigned a communication resource (e.g., frequency, time slot, etc.) for
    communications.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    450+,   for channel allocation in a cellular system.

    464,    for channel allocation in a radiotelephone system including a
    private cordless extension system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 329+ for channel assignment in
    a region partitioning multiplex communication system, subclass 341 for
    channel assignment in a radio trunking multiplex communication, and
    subclasses 431+ for channel assignment in a general multiplex
    communication, per se.


CLS 455/510
TXT Plural requests (e.g., retries):

    Subject matter under subclass 509 wherein a station makes repeated attempts
    for obtaining a communication channel.


CLS 455/511
TXT Control channel/voice channel conversion:

    Subject matter under subclass 509 wherein a communication channel can be
    dynamically assigned as a signaling channel or a voice channel.


CLS 455/512
TXT Based on priority:

    Subject matter under subclass 509 wherein an order of importance is
    assigned to certain communication channels requested from different
    subscriber stations attempting to gain access to the system at the same
    time.


CLS 455/513
TXT Ranking (e.g., based on signal strength, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 509 wherein signal quality parameters (e.g.,
    signal strength, interference level, etc.) of a plurality of communication
    channels are used in selecting a particular channel for assignment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for optimum frequency selection.


CLS 455/514
TXT Having storage detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 509 having a provision for retaining
    information regarding a selected channel for aiding in the channel
    assignment.


CLS 455/515
TXT Control channel monitoring (i.e., paging or access channel signaling) for
    system access:

    Subject matter under subclass 507 which scans  information broadcast on a
    plurality of paging or signaling channels in order to select an appropriate
    paging or signaling channel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161.1+, for frequency scanning by a receiver.

    434,    for control or access channel scanning in a zoned or cellular
    system.


CLS 455/516
TXT Channel seizing:

    Subject matter under subclass 507 wherein a station desiring to transmit
    commandeers a channel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    455,    for channel seizing in a zoned or cellular system.


CLS 455/517
TXT To or from mobile station:

    Subject matter under subclass 507 in which one or more of the subscriber
    stations is movable or portable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11.1+,for a mobile repeater system.

    403+,   for a mobile radiotelephone system.

    575,    for a portable or mobile transceiver.


CLS 455/518
TXT Having talk group:

    Subject matter under subclass 517 wherein a common identification is
    assigned to a particular group of subscriber stations such that any member
    of the group can transceive information to one another.


CLS 455/519
TXT Talk group forming (e.g., dynamic regrouping, talk group assignment):

    Subject matter under subclass 518 which assigns a subscriber station to a
    particular communication group.


CLS 455/520
TXT On-site or multi-site trunking:

    Subject matter under subclass 518 which includes co-existing trunking
    systems operating in the same geographical area or a trunking system having
    more than one base station.

    (1)     Note.  A trunking system is a system comprising one or more base
    sites, a resource controller, and a number of subscribers which share a
    limited number of communication resources.  The resource controller grants
    only upon request via the base site a communication channel to any
    subscriber desiring the service.  The base site in the trunking system
    supports a much larger coverage area than that of a cellular base station.


CLS 455/521
TXT Emergency dispatch or response:

    Subject matter under subclass 517 which handles an urgent communication at
    either the central station or at the subscriber station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404,    for an emergency and alarm communication in a radiotelephone system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 37+ for emergency or alarm
    communication using a landline telephone.


CLS 455/522
TXT Transmission power control technique:

    Subject matter under subclass 517 having detail of a technique for
    regulating the intensity of signals transmitted between stations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for controlling of a transmitter's parameter by control signal
    feedback from the receiver.


CLS 455/523
TXT Using radiating transmission line:

    Subject matter under subclass 517 wherein a signal transmission line
    extends along the path of a mobile station and that transmission line
    constitutes the transmitting or receiving antenna of a fixed station.


CLS 455/524
TXT Multiple base stations:

    Subject matter under subclass 517 wherein more than one fixed station is
    capable of communication with at least one mobile station.


CLS 455/525
TXT Base station selection:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 having details of a technique for
    switching between base stations.


CLS 455/526
TXT Plural receivers tuned to common frequency:

    Subject matter under subclass 507 in which all or a subgroup of satellite
    receivers are tuned to a common carrier wave signal frequency.

    (1)     Note.  For example, tuning to a traffic broadcasting or tornado
    warning over a radio frequency, etc.


CLS 455/527
TXT Break-in or priority override:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein a transmitting operator permits
    reception of an incoming signal in the interval between his or her own
    transmitted signals based on an order of importance assigned to the
    incoming signal.

    (1)     Note.  If the operator at a central station prevents all the
    receivers in the system from intercepting a message, except the one for
    which the message is intended, classification is not in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31.1+,  for a system with receiver selection  wherein not all the receivers
    in the system can  intercept the incoming message, except the one for which
    the message is intended.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.5+ for selective
    systems with priority override.


CLS 455/528
TXT Lockout or busy-idle signaling:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein a transmitting operator may
    prevent other transmitters in the system from operating or may generate a
    signal indicating the status of the transmitting channel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.5+ for selective
    systems including lockout authority.


CLS 455/550
TXT Radiotelephone equipment detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 73 wherein the transceiver is dedicated for
    two-way voice or data communication via a switched telephone network.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90,     for a transceiver or radiotelephone housing structure which has no
    attached circuitry.

    403,    for a radiotelephone system.

    575,    for  a portable or mobile transceiver which contains no telephonic
    recitations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 419+ for telephone equipment
    details  within a landline telephone network.


CLS 455/551
TXT Number assignment module (NAM) detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 550 having a memory storage detail denoting
    an identification number (e.g., a home system registration number, a
    telephone number, etc.) of a radiotelephone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    564,    for  a  repertory dialing feature such as a stored number.


CLS 455/552
TXT Operable on more than one system:

    Subject matter under subclass 550  wherein the radiotelephone can be used
    on at least two systems which may utilize different operating standards.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    432+,   for a system in which a radiotelephone is a roamer.


CLS 455/553
TXT Dual mode telephone (i.e., analog and digital):

    Subject matter under subclass 552 wherein the radiotelephone contains
    components which allow communication with both continuous and discrete
    signal systems.


CLS 455/554
TXT Remote private branch exchange (PBX) with wireless link to landline:

    Subject matter under subclass 550  wherein a distant telephone switching
    unit (private branch exchange) is equipped to communicate via radio
    frequency connection in place of a wire-line link (e.g., trunk) to a wired
    telephone system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 156+  for details of a PBX
    within a landline telephone network.


CLS 455/555
TXT Wireless private branch exchange (PBX) (i.e., wireless link to extension
    unit):

    Subject matter under subclass 550  wherein a telephone switching unit is
    equipped to communicate via radio frequency link to a wireless extension
    unit.


CLS 455/556
TXT Integrated with other device (e.g., electronic notebook, personal digital
    assistant, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 550  wherein the radiotelephone is
    incorporated within a device which performs a diverse function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    344+,   for receiver combined with diverse art devices.


CLS 455/557
TXT Interface attached device (e.g., interface with modem, facsimile, computer,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 550  wherein the radiotelephone has an
    adaptive circuitry or a connecting device which transfers signals to or
    from another device or element.


CLS 455/558
TXT Card control element:

    Subject matter under subclass 557 wherein the interface is an insertable
    module which assumes a controlling function in the transferring of signals
    (e.g., smart card).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass deals with detail of the card or control
    element circuitry.   For a system with billing capability by inserting a
    card, see search note below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    407,    for a system in which a module is used for billing at the
    subscriber unit.


CLS 455/559
TXT Smart cable:

    Subject matter under subclass 557 wherein the interface is a wired
    connection which contains logic circuitry.


CLS 455/560
TXT Switching unit detail (e.g., mobile telephone switching office (MTSO), base
    station controller (BSC), etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 550  including a structural detail of a
    control station which performs a routing function.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    445,    for call routing in a zoned or cellular telephone system.


CLS 455/561
TXT Base station detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 550  including a structural configuration
    detail of a mobile communication serving site.


CLS 455/562
TXT Having specific antenna arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 561  wherein the base station includes a
    particular detail of its aerial arrangement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272+,   for diversity antenna details.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, appropriate subclasses for a
    particular antenna configuration, per se.


CLS 455/563
TXT Having voice recognition or synthesization:

    Subject matter under subclass 550  wherein an input speech signal controls
    the operation of the radiotelephone equipment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 2.09+ for
    speech signal processing.


CLS 455/564
TXT Auto-dialing or repertory dialing (e.g., using bar code, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 550 wherein a complete call address signal is
    produced in response to a simple actuation.

    (1)     Note.  For example, by actuating a single key or by scanning an
    encoded pattern printed on a card.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    460,    for auto paging in a cellular telephone system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 216 and 355+ for repertory or
    abbreviated call signal generation.


CLS 455/565
TXT Restrictive dialing circuitry:

    Subject matter under subclass 550 having circuitry to disable or confine
    the output of a call address signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclass 200 for restrictive dialing
    circuitry in a landline telephone substation.


CLS 455/566
TXT Having display:

    Subject matter under subclass 550 having visual presentation of a signal.


CLS 455/567
TXT Call alerting:

    Subject matter under subclass 550 having indication of an incoming call
    signal (e.g., ringing).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclass 418 for call signal generating
    in a landline telephone substation.


CLS 455/568
TXT Headgear:

    Subject matter under subclass 550 wherein the radiotelephone equipment is
    wearable upon the head of a user.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclass 430 for headgear in a landline
    telephone substation.


CLS 455/569
TXT Hands-free or loudspeaking arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 550 wherein the radiotelephone equipment
    contains a special arrangement of its speech-to-electricity transducer
    component or any particular arrangement which allows communication without
    requiring a user to hold or be in physical contact with the radiotelephone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclass 420 for a landline telephone
    terminal having loudspeaking conversation capability (e.g., hands-free type
    or speakerphone).


CLS 455/570
TXT Noise suppression or echo cancellation:

    Subject matter under subclass 569 wherein any undesired electrical
    disturbance occurring in signal paths between loudspeaker and  microphone
    circuitry is reduced or prevented.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclasses 278 and 282+ for
    transmit/receive interaction control in a wireless and in a general duplex
    communication system, respectively, particularly subclasses 286+ for echo
    cancellation.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 389+ for loudspeaker with
    circuitry for voice control of transmission direction, subclasses 391+ for
    sidetone control, and subclasses 406+ for echo suppression in a telephone
    substation or terminal circuitry.


CLS 455/571
TXT Power booster:

    Subject matter under subclass 550 having circuitry connected to the
    radiotelephone to raise the transmitted output level.


CLS 455/572
TXT Power supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 550 including significant details of a source
    of electrical energy for supplying power to the radiotelephone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for power or bias voltage supply in a radio transmitter.

    343,    for power or bias voltage supply in a radio receiver.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, subclasses 43+
    for plural power supply circuits in an electrical transmission or
    interconnection system.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, appropriate
    subclasses for power supply in general.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 530+ for a specific source of supply having nonlinear
    circuitry.


CLS 455/573
TXT Battery charging:

    Subject matter under subclass 572 having details of the charging or
    recharging of a dc voltage source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    320,    Electricity:  Battery and Condenser Charging and Discharging,
    appropriate subclasses for battery charging in general.


CLS 455/574
TXT Power conservation:

    Subject matter under subclass 572 wherein the radiotelephone equipment
    contains energy saving means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclass 544 for power conservation using nonlinear circuitry.


CLS 455/575
TXT Portable or mobile:

    Subject matter under subclass 73 wherein the transceiver either (a) is
    together with the power supply self-contained, of such shape and size as to
    be readily transportable by an average person and operable during such
    transport; or (b) has structure specifically designed to permit movement
    (e.g., wheels) or for mounting in or upon a vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11.1+,  for a portable or mobile repeater.

    90,     for transceiver housing or support means other than those
    specifically providing for portability, movement, or vehicle attachment.

    95+,    for a portable transmitter.

    351,    for a portable receiver.

    403+,   for a mobile radiotelephone system.

    517+,   for communication between one or more mobile stations with one or
    more central stations.


CLS 455/899
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:
    Subject matter under the class definition relating to systems, instruments,
    or elements specific to modulated carrier wave communication and not
    provided for in any of the preceding subclassses of this class.

    (1)     Note.  Communication by protons, muons, or neutrinos is included
    here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclasses 32+ for
    anti-inductive structure with shields or screens; subclass 46 for apparatus
    wherein an extension power cord forms the handle of a portable radio
    cabinet; subclass 50 for boxes and housings including radio cabinets which
    are limited to electrical use, see indented subclass 52.1 for such boxes
    and housings where the box or housing has an electrical device such as
    radio apparatus cited by name only, or mounting a broadly recited
    electrical device therein.  Wherein the claims specify that the box
    contains two different apparatus, even though recited by name only, such as
    a power supply and a tuning stage, the patent will be found in Class 361,
    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 814 where no circuit
    connections between the apparatus is claimed which significantly limit the
    apparatus to use as a radio apparatus.

    178,    Telegraphy, appropriate subclasses for telegraph apparatus.

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 148+ for diaphragm mounted in a cabinet.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 51+ for
    electric connectors, including vacuum tube sockets, which have an electric
    switch structurally combined therewith.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 250 for radio wavemeters; subclass 305 for
    electron energy analysis; subclasses 336.1+ for invisible radiant energy
    responsive electric signalling; subclass 423 for ion generation; subclass
    489 for ion collectors; and subclasses 200+ for photocell circuits and
    apparatus.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 7.1 for cabinets designed
    to house radio apparatus.  See (1) Note to subclass 7.1 of Class 312 for a
    statement of the subject matter provided for in Class 312.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, appropriate subclasses for
    electric space discharge devices (e.g., radio tubes), per se.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 370 for
    structural combinations of condensers and grid leak-resistances.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous circuits which may form
    components of or be used with the systems of this class.

    329,    Demodulators, appropriate subclasses for demodulators and detectors
    wherein the useful information which has been modulated onto a carrier wave
    is derived and utilized.

    330,    Amplifiers, particularly subclass 65 for amplifiers including
    structural details.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 187 for miscellaneous oscillator structures.

    334,    Tuners, appropriate subclasses for tuner mechanism, per se.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclasses 70+ for mechanicallly variable
    electrical resistors mounted in or on a lamp socket which may be a vacuum
    tube socket; subclass 219 for fixed electrical resistors mounted in or on a
    lamp or tube socket or base; and subclasses 68+ for rheostats and
    potentiometers.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclasses 850+ for underwater apparatus and subclasses 870.01+ for
    telemetering systems.

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 702 for antennas
    combined with a radio cabinet.  See also (3) Note, subsection D, under
    subclass 700.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 600+ for
    miscellaneous arrangements of apparatus mounted on a panel, within a box;
    or other mounting  on a panel, within a box or other mounting, including a
    radio chassis.  See the reference to Class 174 above for a statement of the
    type of apparatus found in Class 361.  See subclasses 306.1+ for the
    structural combination of an electrical condenser, including vacuum tube
    sockets and an electric condenser.  The condenser may be connected to only
    one or less than all of the socket terminals.  Also included in subclasses
    306+ are condenser connector combinations where the connector is for the
    purpose of mounting another electrical device to the condenser, such as
    condensers with means for mounting and connecting a grid leak in circuit
    with the condenser.  See the reference to Class 323, Electricity: Power
    Supply or Regulation Systems, for condensor-grid leak resistance
    combinations.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 95+ and 133 for compressional wave control systems.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, appropriate subclasses for telephone
    apparatus.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for electrical
    connectors arranged on a panel with preformed circuit conductors and for
    devices in which a panel or chassis has connectors such as vacuum tube
    sockets mounted thereon.

    FOREIGN ART COLLECTIONS

    The definitions for FOR 100-FOR 121 below correspond to the definitions of
    the abolished subclasses under Class 455 from which these collections were
    formed.  See the Foreign Art Collection schedule for specific
    correspondences.  [Note:  The titles and definitions for indented art
    collections include all the details of the one(s) that are hierarchically
    superior.]


CLS 455/FOR100
TXT Zoned or cellular:

    Foreign art collection wherein stations are grouped into zones or cells and
    each zone or cell is assigned a different frequency.


CLS 455/FOR101
TXT Hand-off control:

    Foreign art collection including means to switch the control of a mobile
    station to another zone or cell.


CLS 455/FOR102
TXT Using plural antennas:

    Foreign art collection in which the handoff control between zones involves
    the use of more than one antenna.


CLS 455/FOR103
TXT With overlapping zones:

    Foreign art collection wherein two or more zones or cells have a partial
    common area.


CLS 455/FOR104
TXT Exclusive assigned channel:

    Foreign art collection wherein a station desiring to transmit is authorized
    a given frequency.


CLS 455/FOR105
TXT Seized channel:

    Foreign art collection wherein a station desiring to transmit, selects an
    unoccupied channel (e.g., idle or non-busy channel, etc.).


CLS 455/FOR106
TXT Plural transmitters or receivers (i.e., more than two stations):

    Foreign art collection including a plurality of separate and distinct
    transmitters, or receivers, or transmitter-receiver assemblies, which are
    physically located at a distance one from the other and not restricted by
    claimed subject matter to other art classes.


CLS 455/FOR107
TXT Noise, distortion, or singing reduction:

    Foreign art collection wherein any undesired electrical disturbance within
    the useful frequency band arising from sources internal or external to the
    system (e.g., crosstalk, power induction, atmospheric noise, etc.); or any
    undesired self-sustained oscillation existing in the system; or other
    unwanted signals tending to interfere with the operation of the system is
    reduced or prevented entirely.


CLS 455/FOR108
TXT Synchronized stations:

    Foreign art collection wherein stations in a system are regulated such that
    each station transmits a carrier wave of the same frequency and phase as
    those carriers transmitted by the other stations.


CLS 455/FOR109
TXT Simulcast system:

    Foreign art collection in which a plurality of remote site transmitters
    simultaneoustly broadcast identical audio or data message signals on a
    particular carrier frequency and a receiving site positioned between two or
    more transmitting sites receives equal strength carrier signals from each
    remote transmitter, the message signals from the transmitters being
    synchronized in time.


CLS 455/FOR110
TXT Fading compensation:

    Foreign art collection having a device which corrects the variation or
    attenuation in amplitude of the received modulated carrier wave.


CLS 455/FOR111
TXT Due to weather attenuation:

    Foreign art collection wherein the variation or attenuation in amplitude of
    the received modulated carrier wave is due to conditions, such as: rain,
    snow, or disturbances in the upper atmosphere, which scatter the signals.


CLS 455/FOR112
TXT Rayleigh or multipath fading:

    Foreign art collection wherein signal fading is caused by cancellation and
    reinforcement of contributions received over separated paths.


CLS 455/FOR113
TXT With central station (e.g., Master, etc.):

    Foreign art collection having a central station which has at least one
    transmitter-receiver assembly and a plurality of satellite stations, the
    satellite stations being connected to the central station by line wire or
    other means.


CLS 455/FOR114
TXT To or from mobile station:

    Foreign art collection in which one or more of the satellite receivers is
    movable or portable.


CLS 455/FOR115
TXT With service request and response:

    Foreign art collection in which one station sends a request signal to
    another station and waits for an answer to start an operation.


CLS 455/FOR116
TXT Using radiating transmission line:

    Foreign art collection wherein a signal transmission line extends along the
    path of a mobile station and that transmission line constitutes the
    transmitting or receiving antenna of a fixed station.


CLS 455/FOR117
TXT Multiple base stations:

    Foreign art collection wherein more than one fixed station is capable of
    communication with at least one mobile station.


CLS 455/FOR118
TXT Plural receivers tuned to common frequency:

    Foreign art collection in which all or a subgroup (i.e., more than two) of
    satellite receivers are tuned to a common carrier wave frequency, for
    example, traffic broadcasting or tornado warning over radio frequency, etc.


CLS 455/FOR119
TXT Break-in or priority override:

    Foreign art collection wherein a transmitting operator is permitted to
    receive incoming signals in the intervals between his own transmitted
    signals base on priority status.


CLS 455/FOR120
TXT Lockout or busy-idle signalling:

    Foreign art collection wherein a transmitting operator may prevent other
    transmitters in the system from operating, and may generate signals
    indicating the status of the transmitting channel.


CLS 455/FOR121
TXT Portable or mobile:

    Foreign art collection wherein the transceiver either (a) is together with
    the power supply self-contained, of such shape and size as to be readily
    transportable by an average person and operable during such transport; or
    (b) has structure specifically designed to permit movement (e.g., wheels)
    or for mounting in or upon a vehicle.


CLS 460/
TTL CROP THRESHING OR SEPARATING

CLS 460/
TXT This class provides for apparatus or process not otherwise classified for
    operating upon crops which have been removed from their natural or original
    positions by harvesting; in addition this is the generic class for crop
    separation including apparatus and process relating to separating crop
    material lying under the soil such as peanuts, potatoes, beets or the like.

    (1)     Note.  This class includes means to separate grain from the head,
    straw, short broken straw (cavings), pieces of broken ears (cobs) and
    chaff.  Also included are means for separating grain, seeds or produce from
    trash and separating hops strings, beans, peas and tomatoes from the vine,
    brussels sprouts or the like from stems, husks and kernels from the corn.

    (2)     Note.  This class is limited to the individual components that
    perform the separation except as provided under machine component
    arrangement.  The combine with harvesting or pickup is more appropriate for
    Class 56, Harvesting or Class 171, Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects.

    Relationship To Other Classes Which Include Subject Matter Related To Class
    460

    Class 14, Bridges

    Class 14 does not have any direct relationship to Class 460 except subclass
    70 which includes floored, narrow structures having an endless conveyor as
    whole or part of the floor.

    Class 19, Textiles:  Fiber Preparation

    Class 19 includes means which mechanically isolate and manipulate fibers so
    as to place them in condition for the purpose for which they are to be
    utilized; subclasses 5+ includes an apparatus having means to separate
    stalk and leaf fibers of plants and also includes means for stripping the
    seeds or leaves from the plant; subclasses 65+ includes method and
    apparatus to disentangle, clean and straighten the fibers.

    Class 29, Metal Working

    Class 29 the generic class of assembly and combined mechanical
    manufacturing.

    Class 30, Cutlery

    Class 30 is the broad generic class for cutting implements including those
    for cutting by sharp point, which are manipulable by hand.  Class 30 also
    includes hand manipulable scrapers having a sharpened scraping or cutting
    edge.  Subclass 121.5 includes devices for corn strippers.  Subclass 298
    includes hand harvesting implements such as removing corn ear from stalk,
    removing grapes from vine, fruit stem from fruits.

    Class 56, Harvesters

    Class 56 and 460 are closely related due to the fact that one of the most
    important modern day (at least for the last 50 years) power farming
    machines is the harvester-thresher.  It is more often called the "combine"
    as it combines several operations into a single operation.  With the help
    of the combine, harvesting and threshing are done simultaneously thereby
    eliminating several expensive operations formerly needed such as binding,
    shocking, stacking, pitching bundles and hauling crop to the thresher.
    Combines now harvest all the grain crops, roots crops, most of the vine
    crops and corn crop.  The combine as a whole unit performs six major
    operations.  Processes and apparatus with respect to the cutting unit, the
    feeding unit and the grain handling unit are classified more appropriately
    in Class 56.  Processes and apparatus with respect to threshing and
    rethreshing, separating, and cleaning are classified in Class 460.
    Further, in Class 56, particular attention should be given regarding
    subclasses 14.6 and 16.5 which include combines having threshing machines;
    subclasses 122+ which includes apparatus for cutting, conveying and
    threshing; subclasses 103+ which includes machines for seed gatherers,
    strippers and also those which thresh from the standing stalks.




    Schematic cross-section of combine showing units that perform the six major
    operations.

    Class 99, Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus

    Class 99 includes apparatus for preparing, treating, and preserving food
    substances such as all types of grain, underground and above ground
    vegetables, nuts and similar crop material.  Subclasses 567+ includes
    apparatus which spatially removes recognizable external portion from food
    material by compressing, impacting, or severing means.

    Class 171, Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects

    Class 171 includes machines and methods for removing a weed or plant root
    with the vine stem or top portion of said plant either connected to the
    root or severed therefrom.  Particularly subclass 13 has an apparatus
    having a pronged member which is adapted to snag or comb vines, tops, weed,
    trash or other material; subclass 17 has an apparatus which separates
    material by fluid current; subclass 23 has means to shift the flow of
    recovered objects; subclasses 27 and 28 include apparatus which severs or
    separates parts of harvested plants.

    Class 209, Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids

    Class 209 includes methods and apparatus for separating solids materials
    and assorting and segregating them in grades or classes according to their
    physical characteristics.  The class in general includes separation of
    grains, fruits and vegetables.  It does not include separation of straw and
    chaff from grain.  In particular, subclasses 132+ includes conveyors
    delivering the material; subclasses 233+ includes apparatus having
    reciprocating agitators with sifters having convex and concave forms;
    subclasses 307+ includes methods and means having endless belt sifters;
    subclass 607 includes apparatus for separating corn silk.

    Class 222, Dispensing

    Class 222 is the generic class for processes or apparatus for dispensing
    material which may be in any physical state (solid, liquid or gaseous), and
    may have any form or shape.  The class may include subject matter related
    to feeders for shellers and huskers.  Subclass 161 includes dispensing
    container having movement for the purpose of shaking the contents, and may
    include vibrators or shakers for grain separator and straw carrier.

    Class 241, Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration

    Class 241 includes processes or apparatus for classifying and separating
    the material into grades or sizes.  This class also has means for applying
    fluid to the material and includes processes and apparatus for comminution
    of cereal or other seeds or seed plants.  Subclass 38 includes apparatus
    for inducing, controlling or directing fluid to or from the material;
    subclass 185.5 includes apparatus in which the material is subjected to a
    rotary member; subclasses 198.1, 221 and 244+ include apparatus in which
    comminution of the material takes place between the two relatively moving
    surfaces having nonsmooth surface characteristics which cooperate with each
    other and in which the material flows either circumferentially or
    tangentially.

    Class 294, Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements

    Class 294 does not have direct relationship to Class 460 except subclass 25
    which includes miscellaneous hand and finger attachments to facilitate
    handling of material.

    Class 340, Communications:  Electrical

    Class 340 is the residual class for subject matter, not elsewhere
    classified, relating to communication by means which are in part or in
    whole electrical.  Subclass 684 includes condition-responsive indicating
    system in a agricultural machinery where an electrical means provides a
    humanly perceptible signal in response to the attainment for a
    predetermined condition.

    Class 406, Conveyors:  Fluid Current

    Class 406 includes apparatus or methods for conveying solid material or
    articles which are guided or supported to travel along a path by means of
    or with the assistance of a fluid current.  Subclass 53 includes screw-type
    power driven conveyor; subclass 73 includes reciprocating or oscillating
    conveyors; subclass 77 includes endless conveyors; subclass 69 includes
    means to advance the load which means is a plurality of flexible bristles;
    subclass 70 includes a rotating annular or cylindrical member to advance
    the load.

    Class 492, Roll or Roller

    Class 492 is the generic class for a roll or roller, per se, not elsewhere
    provided for, and see the search notes thereunder.

    GLOSSARY

    BEATER

    A rotary device mounted behind or in front of the cylinder on a combine
    which strikes the grains.

    CHAFF

    These are seed coverings and small stem pieces which are separated from
    seed and threshed grain during threshing or processing operation.

    CHAFFER

    A moving device having lips, loovers or similar means that separates the
    chaff from threshed grain or seed.

    COMBINE

    A machine in which six major operations are performed during harvesting;
    cutting the standing grain (cutting unit); feeding the cut grain to the
    threshing unit (feeding unit); threshing and rethreshing the grain or seed
    from the heads; separating the grain from the straw and chaff; cleaning the
    threshed grain; collecting the threshed grain for convenient handling
    (grain handling unit).

    CONCAVE

    A device consisting of a series of bars that are held together by rods or
    straps and is curved to match the cylinder.  It is sometimes adjustable up
    and down to allow the operator to change the cylinder to concave clearance.

    CONCAVE SPACING

    The radial distance between the concave and the cylinder on a combine.

    CYLINDER

    A device consisting of bars mounted on two hubs that are supported on a
    shaft that run the length of the threshing unit.  There are three types of
    cylinders; rasp-bar cylinder, spike-tooth cylinder, and angle-bar cylinder.

    EAR

    The article usually consists of grain bearing spike of a cereal plant such
    as an ear of corn.

    FEEDER

    The component of a grain thresher that transports the crop from the cutter
    or crop pickup apparatus to the threshing system.  Apparatuses prior to
    approximately 1950 included bundle handling and a band cutter.

    FLAIL

    An implement consisting of a free-swinging stick tied to the end of another
    stick or a plurality of swinging knives or blades which are mounted on a
    rotating shaft, used to thresh grains.

    GRAIN

    This term is interpreted to include those seeds to which the term is
    ordinarily applied, e.g., wheat, oats, cotton seeds, corn, coffee, bean,
    barley, etc., and to exclude larger vegetables such as beets, nuts,
    potatoes, etc.

    GRATE

    A separating device to separate the grain from the straw after threshing.

    HUSK

    The material consisting of the dry outer covering of the ear of corn.

    ROTOR-TYPE COMBINE

    A machine equipped with rotor or cylinder designed so that the crop stays
    in contact with the cylinder for several complete revolutions.

    SCREEN

    A device consisting of suitably mounted wirecloth, grate bars, or
    perforated sheet iron which removes particles smaller than the grain being
    threshed, such as weed seeds, sand, and other foreign matter.

    SEPARATING

    The operation which removes the threshed grain from the mixture of plant
    parts that comes from the threshing section.  The separation usually occurs
    at three places:  (a) concave grate, (b) finger grate beneath beater and
    (c) straw walker.

    SHELLING

    The operation in which the kernels of corn are removed or separated from
    the ear of corn.

    SIEVE

    A meshed or perforated device which is usually located under the chaffer on
    a combine that separates larger particles from the grain or seed.

    SNAPPING

    This expression is arbitrarily assigned as being generic to the separation
    of the corn ears from the corn stalks.  As the stalks are pulled downward
    between the cylindrical members, the ears, being too large to pass through
    the available space are snapped off.

    STALK

    The article usually consists of the stem or main axis of a plant or any
    lengthened support on which an organ grows such as a corn ear stalk.

    STEMMING

    This expression is arbitrarily assigned as being generic to the separation
    of items such as a blossom, leaf, root, tip, or similar portion of a
    naturally-occurring crop product in addition to connoting the separation of
    a stem.

    STRAW

    The material usually consisting of grain stalks mixed with leaves and chaff
    that is left after the threshing operation.

    STRAW WALKER

    A mechanism that imparts a fluffing, pitching motion to the material other
    than grain before it "walks" out of the rear of the combine.

    TAILINGS

    The material consisting of unthreshed heads and all trash that is too
    coarse to fall through the sieves.  Unthreshed heads are sometimes returned
    to the threshing section for second threshing.

    THRESHED

    The operation in which the grain is removed from the straw, the seed is
    removed from the seed head, the kernel is removed from the corn cob, or the
    bean is removed from the pod by a cylinder or rotor usually working against
    a curved, grated concave.


CLS 460/1
TXT MEANS RESPONSIVE TO A SENSED CONDITION:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which the threshing apparatus
    includes means for:



    a)      sensing a characteristic of the thresher or a characteristic that
    is external to the thresher but related to its use, and;

    b)      performing an action by at least one of the operating assemblages
    thereof, which action is a direct result of such sensing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 10.2+ which includes motorized harvester
    with condition-responsive operation.


CLS 460/2
TXT Foreign material:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 which detects the passage of objects such
    as stones, metal pieces etc., which would damage the machine.


CLS 460/3
TXT Drive interrupt:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 in which in response to the detection of
    foreign material within the machine power to any part of the machine is
    stopped.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 10.3 for release or slip of drive in response
    to obstruction and subclass 10.4 for retraction of cutter-unit in response
    to obstruction.


CLS 460/4
TXT Grain loss:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including means to detect or determine the
    amount of grain which is not being separated and blown out with the chaff.


CLS 460/5
TXT By detector at sieve or screen or grain pan:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 having a sensor (e.g., diaphragm) at or
    near the sieve, screen or grain pan for determining the amount of grain
    passing at the specified location.

    (1)     Note.  The sensor distinguishes the frequency of the grain hitting
    the diaphragm from the frequency of unwanted product e.g., chaff.


CLS 460/6
TXT Machine load:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including means to determine according to
    harvesting conditions the power requirement of any operational component of
    the machine for the purpose of affecting a change within the machine.

    (1)     Note.  The harvesting conditions may include type of crop, speed of
    the machine (combine) or moisture content.

    (2)     Note.  The operational component may be a crop feed conveyor, or a
    threshing cylinder or a harvester engine.

    (3)     Note.  The change within the machine is "Speed Change".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 10.2 for motorized harvester with
    condition-responsive operation.


CLS 460/7
TXT Moisture:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 having means to determine water vapor
    content of the harvested crop for affecting a speed change within the
    machine.

    (1)     Note.  A high water vapor content usually necessitates more
    difficult crop separation thus requiring more power for each unit of crop
    separation.


CLS 460/8
TXT HAVING MEANS TO DISTRIBUTE OR LEVEL CROP MATERIAL:

    Subject matter under the class definition having means to prevent crop
    buildup to the side, front, or rear of the combine while the combine is
    traversing uneven terrain such as a hill.

    (1)     Note.  To handle uneven or unlevel terrain, a portion of the
    machine is angularly shifted relative to the apparatus by gravity, power or
    manual means.  An alternative is the use of a deflector to direct crop
    material away from a side of the apparatus or exceeding a specific height.


CLS 460/9
TXT In association with shaking table:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 wherein leveling is accomplished in
    conjunction with a horizontal surface which imparts tossing, oscillating
    movement to the crop material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89,     for shaking table, per se.


CLS 460/10
TXT And baffle for grain:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 relating to barriers extending upwardly and
    rearwardly from the surface to maintain proper quantity of grain on the
    surface in spite of the movement of which it is subjected during operation,
    thereby substantially reducing the sideward movement of the grain.


CLS 460/11
TXT WITH RECYCLING OF PROCESSED MATERIAL:

    Subject matter under the class definition having means to feed back
    material to the beginning or intermittent stage of the machine to prevent
    objectionable grain loss and to enhance the machine efficiency.


CLS 460/12
TXT With means to recycle processed material from sieve, grate, or screen:

    Subject matter under subclass 11 acting in cooperation with or at the
    sieve, grate or screen to return crop material to any part of the machine
    for separation.


CLS 460/13
TXT Rethreshing:

    Subject matter under subclass 11 which brings back tailings to the
    threshing section for second threshing.

    (1)     Note.  Tailings are unthreshed heads and all trash that is too
    coarse to fall through the sieve and screens and too heavy to be blown out
    by the air blast.


CLS 460/14
TXT By separating diverse threshing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein means to rethresh is a secondary
    threshing apparatus including but not limited to another cylinder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for transverse threshing section; subclass 63 for prethreshing
    cylinder; subclass 141 for threshing nongrain crop material; subclass 24
    for flax thresher; subclass 46 for corn shelling by concave and cylinder.


CLS 460/15
TXT CLOVER HULLER:

    Subject matter under the class definition particularly adapted by virtue of
    its structure or operation for the separation of clover from hulls.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also includes machines of similar-type
    structure e.g., alfalfa threshing.

    (2)     Note.  For machines to be included in this subclass must have
    specific disclosure of a finer threshing than for grain.


CLS 460/16
TXT WITH FEEDER:

    Subject matter under the class definition mounted immediately before the
    thresher, separator, sheller, husker or stripper which conveys harvested
    material to said operational element.

    (1)     Note.  A feeder may be referred to as a feeder table.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 243+ for
    means for means for feeding material to sifting devices.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for dispensing or conveying
    solid material.


CLS 460/17
TXT Having grasping system for shelling or cutting:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 wherein the conveying device has means to
    grip or hold a corn ear for shelling or cutting.


CLS 460/18
TXT Feeder for husker (e.g., feeder table):

    Subject matter under subclass 16 for conveying corn ears to the husking
    apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for conveying solid material.


CLS 460/19
TXT With band cutter:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 in which the feeder includes means for
    severing a strap which binds the product being conveyed.


CLS 460/20
TXT And cooperating means for feeder:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 in which structure is provided in addition
    to a conveyor to assist in the feed of material to the thresher, separator
    or sheller.


CLS 460/21
TXT CONVERTIBLE:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which by making an integral
    change the apparatus or structure may be utilized to perform a separate
    function distinct from a primary function.

    (1)     Note.  The change may be accomplished by moving, altering or
    conversion of one or more parts of the apparatus.


CLS 460/22
TXT COMBINED WITH DIVERSE ART DEVICE (E.G., HOISTING, DIGGING):

    Subject matter under the class definition combined with any other
    functional apparatus or process not provided for under the class definition
    except as provided for under Class 56 Harvesting and 171, Unearthing Plants
    or Buried Objects.


CLS 460/23
TXT WITH HOPPER:

    Subject matter under the class definition which relates to a bin as intake
    structure for a thresher, separator or sheller.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for a feeder including a band cutter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 244 in
    which the material is fed from hoppers to the sifting devices.

    222,    Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for dispensing or conveying
    solid material.


CLS 460/24
TXT FLAX THRESHER:

    Subject matter under the class definition for threshing and separating
    slender, erect plants having delicate flowers, narrow leaves and stem
    having threadlike fibers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses 5+ for the liberation of
    stalk and leaf fibers of plants, particularly subclass 6 which includes
    means for stripping the seeds or leaves from the plant.


CLS 460/25
TXT CORN PROCESSING APPARATUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition for snapping, picking, husking
    and shelling corn.


CLS 460/26
TXT With corn snapping or husking means:

    Subject matter under subclass 25 including means for breaking the corn ear
    from the stalk or removing husks from the corn ear.

    (1)     Note.  The husks are "usually" removed from the ear by engagement
    of the ear between the two surfaces which include a pair of toothed
    elements, by a pair of husk engaging rollers having an endless chain, or by
    a revolving cylinder with a yielding concave surface.

    (2)     Note.  A common form of corn combine machine employs at least a
    pair of snapping and husking rolls which rotate in opposite angular
    directions on parallel axes and are spaced apart a distance which is
    sufficient to admit the corn ear.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 14.1 for motorized harvester having
    separately-acting opposed-rolled-couple units; subclass 103 for pickers or
    huskers.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 567+ for separating one
    external portion from the remaining food.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 607 which
    includes means for separating corn silk.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 460/27
TXT Compound roll having snapping and husking surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 26 wherein a revolving surface both breaks
    the ear from the stalk and removes the husk from the ear.


CLS 460/28
TXT Diverse functioning multiple roll pairs:

    Subject matter under subclass 26 having pairs of oppositely rotating
    parallel revolving surfaces arranged to cooperate so that the first pair
    performs a snapping function and the second pair performs a husking
    function.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 103+ for pickers or huskers in which
    plurality of pairs of rollers are disclosed.


CLS 460/29
TXT Including a husking or snapping roll:

    Subject matter under subclass 26 including surface for removing the husk
    from the corn ear or breaking the corn ear from the stalk.


CLS 460/30
TXT Including roll mounting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 29 relating to specific structure for
    attaching the roll or rolls to the frame.

    (1)     Note.  The mounting means may include a gear housing, a support
    frame or a drive apparatus.


CLS 460/31
TXT Including particular roll construction:

    Subject matter under subclass 29 having a longitudinal or circumferential
    working surface.

    (1)     Note.  The longitudinal or circumferential working surface of the
    roll defines a configuration which is directed to enhance the husking or
    snapping efficiency.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     which includes compound roll with snapping and husking surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 460/32
TXT With rib or bar:

    Subject matter under subclass 31 provided with a projecting element
    positioned on the roll surface to effectively pull the husk, stalk or ear.


CLS 460/33
TXT With teeth:

    Subject matter under subclass 31 having at least one row of a projecting
    part resembling a tooth like part such as a time or prong in shape or
    function, designed to separate or convey the stalk, leaves or ear.


CLS 460/34
TXT With abrasive surface, (e.g., rubber surface):

    Subject matter under subclass 31 wherein a part of the roll surface is
    formed of granular, rough or abrasive particles.

    (1)     Note.  The increased frictional engagement of the roll surface
    lessons clogging of the rolls.


CLS 460/35
TXT With cooperating member:

    Subject matter under subclass 26 provided with an element structured for
    contacting, guiding or positioning corn ears during husking, cutting or
    debutting operation.

    (1)     Note.  The guide means may be in the form of but not exclusive of a
    single rotating member having a plurality of ear-engaging flexible fingers
    or bristle-type brushes or similar means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, appropriate subclasses under 567+
    which includes gripping means and means to hold and rotate food.


CLS 460/36
TXT Including roll adjusting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 26 having means to change or adjust the
    position of the roll or rolls.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     which includes means to adjust the position of concave with respect
    to the cylinder.


CLS 460/37
TXT By suction means (e.g., husking by suction, per se):

    Subject matter under subclass 26 in which the husks are removed adjacent
    the husking roll by differential air pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 516+ wherein outer
    skins of the food products are removed by vacuum pressure produced as
    compressed air is discharged at a high speed.


CLS 460/38
TXT With cutting:

    Subject matter under subclass 25 wherein severing means is provided in
    conjunction with or as an aid to the husking or snapping means.

    (1)     Note.  Severing operation is usually performed after completion of
    husking or snapping operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48+,    having means to remove kernels by cutting or severing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 194+ which may include devices for cutting crop
    material.

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 53 which includes means for cutting standing
    cornstalks or other stalks of similar nature.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 584+ for cutting means
    that removes the tops from the remaining portion of food.


CLS 460/39
TXT Shredding:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 which cuts the corn stalk or husk into a
    plurality of small pieces.

    (1)     Note.  The product is generally used for feed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 500, for stalk choppers which includes means
    for cutting dead crop material into a plurality of small pieces.


CLS 460/40
TXT Debutting:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 which cuts or removes the butt or stalk
    end of the ear.


CLS 460/41
TXT Slitting:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 which incises the ear along its length to
    prepare the ear for husking operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 587 which includes
    cutting means for scoring to aid the tearing.


CLS 460/42
TXT With separating system (e.g., removing husked trash):

    Subject matter under subclass 26 including a conveyor, blower or similar
    means to facilitate removal of the husked trash.

    (1)     Note.  The end result of above is more efficient husking and a
    reduced load on the cleaning mechanism.


CLS 460/43
TXT With trash container:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 which collects the broken husks.

    (1)     Note.  Device may also have means to eject said husks collected in
    the container.


CLS 460/44
TXT With blower means:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 which supplies a stream of air to remove
    husks, trash and other foreign material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 644 for
    methods and apparatus wherein items are separated by impinging a stream of
    fluid thereon.


CLS 460/45
TXT With shelling:

    Subject matter under subclass 25 including means for separating kernels
    from the corn ear.


CLS 460/46
TXT Concave and cylinder:

    Subject matter under subclass 45 having a revolving drum provided with a
    toothed convex surface and a stationary shell with a ribbed concave surface
    such that an ear of corn can move between the revolving cylinder and shell
    and the action of ribs and teeth serves to tear the grains of corn from the
    ear.

    (1)     Note.  The device may include a drum and a counter-drum disposed
    horizontally one within the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     for prethreshing cylinder; subclass 75 for apparatus with
    transverse threshing section; subclass 141 for apparatus having cylinder
    and concave used for separating nongrain crop material; subclass 14 for
    rethreshing apparatus having separate diverse threshing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 574 wherein separating
    means is rotated in order to separate the external portion from the
    remaining food.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 274 for
    sifting devices which are curved concavely or convexly on the surfaces to
    which material is delivered.


CLS 460/47
TXT Disk:

    Subject matter under subclass 45 having a feed wheel and a rotating
    shelling disc with teeth, ribs or corrugated beveled surface and as the
    material passes the disc it is confined within an opposed surface and is
    subjected to an agitated grinding action whereby kernels and ears are
    separated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 574 which includes
    apparatus for cracking nuts and similar material, without crushing the
    kernels thereof, having a fixed plate with a cutting blade and a rotatable
    wheel adjacent the plate.


CLS 460/48
TXT Knife:

    Subject matter under subclass 45 including a cutting blade which severs the
    kernels from the corn ear.


CLS 460/49
TXT Slitter:

    Subject matter under subclass 48 having a series of adjustable radial
    knives or blades or teeth which split or cut kernels of corn by incising or
    severing the ear along a longitudinal axis of the corn ear.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 575 which includes
    apparatus for slitting nut skins.


CLS 460/50
TXT Tipper:

    Subject matter under subclass 48 where in the small, irregular, or
    imperfect kernels which are not yet fully developed and which are usually
    found at the butt and tip portions of the corn ear are removed by a knife,
    blade, cutter or similar means.

    (1)     Note.  The device shapes the end of the ear for better reception by
    the corn cutter.


CLS 460/51
TXT Reciprocatable knife:

    Subject matter under subclass 48 wherein the cutting blade which removes
    kernels from the corn ear has a alternating back and forth movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 194+ wherein cutting blades having
    reciprocating movement are disclosed.

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 158 for machines which includes means to cut
    grain which means is a reciprocating cutter; subclass 123 for reciprocating
    cutter.


CLS 460/52
TXT Stationary knife:

    Subject matter under subclass 48 in-which the corn ear is moved relative to
    a static knife for shelling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137,    for stationary cutter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 101 which discloses cutting means having one
    or more knives which are fixed with respect to the frame of the machine.


CLS 460/53
TXT Rotary knife:

    Subject matter under subclass 48 wherein the movement of the cutting blade
    or blades is circular about a single axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135,    for rotary cutter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 194+ wherein rotary blade and blade having
    rotary power source are disclosed.

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 157 for rotary cutting disk; subclass 235 for
    plurality of rotary disk cutters; subclass 295 for rotating cutting disk.


CLS 460/54
TXT Pivotable mount:

    Subject matter under subclass 48 wherein the rods, arms or similar elements
    which swing on their pivots carry the cutting blade or blades.

    (1)     Note.  As the ear advances through the group of cutters or blades,
    the blades are gradually expanded so as to remove the kernels off the
    surface of the ear.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 244+ wherein the blades are pivoted together.


CLS 460/55
TXT Longitudinally of cob axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 54 in which a plurality of blades or cutters
    are arranged adjacent to the lengthwise axis of the ear and are pivotal
    about an axis spaced from the blades as well as spaced lengthwise along and
    from the ear.


CLS 460/56
TXT Radially mounted:

    Subject matter under subclass 48 having a plurality of radially sliding
    blades or cutters arranged so as to surround the corn ear.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 135 for implements in which the blades are
    spring-urged to open position and subclass 261 in which a spring is
    provided to either open or close the blades.


CLS 460/57
TXT Having adjustment means:

    Subject matter under subclass 48 having means to regulate the depth of cut
    taken by the knife or knives so that they will shear off the kernels to the
    desired depth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 121.41 for self-aligning gauging and cutting
    means and subclass 121.46 wherein gauge and cutter are relatively
    adjustable responsive to size of plant.


CLS 460/58
TXT Peripheral action:

    Subject matter under subclass 48 in which shelling is accomplished by
    coaction between a roller or similar element having a rough (e.g., rib,
    tooth) surface and another member.

    (1)     Note.  The corn ear is fed between the roller and the member.  As
    the ear is carried along, the pressure between the members serves to loosen
    and effectively remove the kernels from the ear.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 574 which includes
    apparatus having a roller and an endless belt and the food product is fed
    between the roller and the endless belt to effectively remove the external
    portion.


CLS 460/59
TXT THRESHING:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which the grain is removed
    from the straw, the seed is removed from the seed head by a cylinder, rotor
    or similar element usually working against a curved, grated concave or
    similar element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86,     for threshing by endless apron.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 14.6 for harvester which includes thresher or
    crop separator unit; subclasses 122 and 126 which include means for cutting
    standing grain, and means for threshing the same.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 567+, appropriate
    subclasses indented thereunder for separating a portion from the remaining
    food.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 17 which includes
    means to separate material by fluid current; subclasses 27 and 28 for
    apparatus which severs or separates parts of harvested plants.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 185.5+
    which includes apparatus in which the material is subjected to the action
    of rotary member which strikes the material a sudden blow.


CLS 460/60
TXT With relief value in rotor section:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 including movable control element to
    prevent pressure build up about the rotor or concave.

    (1)     Note.  Pressure may build up within a closed or semi-closed crop
    separating system due to the rotational speed of the cylinders.  Such a
    pressure may be in the form of an air differential or crop buildup at some
    location within the system.


CLS 460/61
TXT Flail machine:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 in which a plurality of pivotable members
    are mounted on a rotor or cylinder to accomplish threshing.

    (1)     Note.  Separation is accomplished by rotor movement augmented by
    free-swinging rods or sticks attached to it and which in effect beats the
    crop as the rotor is rotated.  The crop is beaten between the concave and
    the axis of the flail rotor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 29, which includes flail or whip which beats
    the cotton from the plant.


CLS 460/62
TXT With adjusting means for threshing cylinder:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 having means to increase or decrease the
    clearance between the cylinder or rotor and the surrounding concave.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for roll-adjusting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 121.46 which includes adjusting means which
    adjust gauge or cutter in response to height or size of the crop material.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 579 which includes
    adjustment means for a separating member.


CLS 460/63
TXT With prethreshing cylinder:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 in which a smaller size cylinder and a
    concave or a feeding surface with protruding fingers is mounted prior to
    main threshing elements to assist in threshing operation.

    (1)     Note.  Patents having rethreshing or multiple threshing cylinders
    of similar construction are classified in subclasses 13 and 76.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for transverse threshing section; subclass 14 for rethreshing by
    separate diverse threshing means; subclass 141 for cylinder and concave for
    nongrain products; subclass 46 for shelling by concave and cylinder;
    subclass 24 for flax thresher.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 574+ for separation by
    rotating means.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 288 for
    cylinder or drum sifters.


CLS 460/64
TXT Vertical axle type:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 in which threshing is accomplished about
    an axis which is perpendicular relative to ground.

    (1)     Note.  The device has added advantage of reducing overall length of
    the machine by taking advantage of gravity for movement of the crop
    material through the threshing section.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66,     for threshing by axial flow through threshing section.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 301 for
    cylinders or drum sifters having vertical axes.


CLS 460/65
TXT Centrifugal:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 in which threshing is accomplished by the
    action of force tending to make rotating crop move away from the center of
    rotation.

    (1)     Note.  The force is developed by a fan or blower or by high speed
    movement of the rotor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 12.8+ which includes means for moving air
    under pressure or suction, whereby vegetation or crop is moved under the
    influence of air.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 148 for
    methods and means where in material is centrifugally projected into the
    suspending gaseous current.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 410 for centrifugal force feeders, per se.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 39+ and
    275 for comminutors including centrifugal force feeding.


CLS 460/66
TXT Axial flow through threshing section:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 in which the crop moves in a spiral motion
    and is subjected to an extended time duration for initial crop separation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for vertical-axle type threshing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 301 for
    cylinders or drum sifters having vertical axes; subclass 362 for spiral
    sifter; subclass 913 for screw feed conveyor.

    406,    Conveyor:  Fluid Current, subclass 53 for screw-type power driven
    conveyors.


CLS 460/67
TXT Flared cylinder:

    Subject matter under subclass 66 in which the threshing cylinder or rotor
    expands or opens outward in shape, e.g., frustrum of a cone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 567+ which includes
    devices having frusto conical breast and cylinder for removing outer
    portion of the food products.


CLS 460/68
TXT Rotor formed with integral feed section:

    Subject matter under subclass 66 in which a forward feed section is formed
    as an integral part of the threshing rotor.

    (1)     Note.  The device facilitates crop feeding, prevents crowding of
    the crop material upon the threshing rotor, maintains the crop feed uniform
    and feeds the crop in larger volume.


CLS 460/69
TXT With axial flow separator:

    Subject matter under subclass 66 integral with the threshing rotor which
    separates the grain from the chaff and straw by opposing action between the
    rotor and concave.

    (1)     Note.  The crop is along the axial length of the rotor.


CLS 460/70
TXT With feed means for threshing section:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 mounted between the feeder conveyor and
    the forward end of the rotor means to help engage the crop material with
    the threshing rotor.

    (1)     Note.  The device may be an improved feed ramp or a transition
    housing or the infeed area with an improved geometry which facilitates
    imparting a radial motion to the crop material early in its travel as it
    enters the threshing and separating cylinders and prevents back-feeding of
    the crop material down the feed conveyor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 263, 264
    in which means are employed to cause particles of material to move in some
    definite relation to the sifter and wherein guides are employed to direct
    the particles of material to the sifters.


CLS 460/71
TXT With bar (e.g., rasp bar or inclined blade):

    Subject matter under subclass 59 including rows or columns of protrusions
    arranged about the rotor cylinder in a removable or integral formation.

    (1)     Note.  The device may have protrusions in the form of spiketeeth,
    carried on the transverse bars of the rotor cylinder, which thresh out the
    grain as they revolve through similar teeth in the concave; the protrusions
    may be of rasp-bar type which are transverse bars with grooved metal faces,
    threshing is done by the rasping action between the cylinder bars and the
    solid concave bars below the cylinder; the protrusions may be of angle-bar
    type which are spiral bars having rubber facing.  They beat out the grain
    between the revolving cylinder bars and the stationary shelling plate or
    concave.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141,    for cylinder and concave having similar protrusions or projections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 574+ for devices which
    include cylinder or rotor having projections or protrusions and the other
    surface (concave or similar) having slots or projects.  Separation or
    hulling of the food products is accomplished through contact between the
    two surfaces.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 393 for
    sifting passages generally of elongated-slot form, are formed of bars or
    rods which do not intermesh.


CLS 460/72
TXT Adjustable:

    Subject matter under subclass 71 wherein the position of the bar or blade
    can be regulated.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for the adjustment or replacement of
    the individual blade or bar or the total movement of all blades or bars
    that perform threshing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 394 wherein
    the sifting passages which are formed by nonintermeshing bars have means
    for their relative adjustment to vary the size of the passages.


CLS 460/73
TXT With beater:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 including a drum, or rotor, or cylinder
    having protruding fingers or similar elements which is usually mounted
    behind and acting in cooperation with the threshing cylinder.

    (1)     Note.  The device prevents wrapping of the crop material about the
    threshing cylinder and thereby feeds the material downstream.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for beater, per se; subclass 142, for drum and beater.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 13.2 which includes means to beat the
    vegetation and which usually comprises a rotating shaft having bristles or
    loosely-mounted flail elements.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 595 in which the device
    includes means to feed the food material past the separating means;
    subclasses 609+ which includes dynamic means to move or to control movement
    of grain to or from the hulling zone.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 278 and
    283 in which the sifters include rotating agitators; subclass 299 which
    includes means to beat the material.


CLS 460/74
TXT With accelerator roll:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 having a single or a pair of rotating
    annular or cylindrical members which rapidly advance the threshed material
    leaving the threshing cylinder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclass 53 for a rotating annular or
    cylindrical member to advance or accelerate the load.


CLS 460/75
TXT Transverse threshing section:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the crop flow is mainly along a
    tangential and circumferential direction of the rotation of the threshing
    cylinder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for rethreshing by separate diverse threshing means; subclass 63
    for prethreshing means; subclass 141 for threshing by cylinder and concave
    for nongrain products; subclass 46 for shelling by cylinder and concave.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution and Disintegration, subclasses 244+
    which includes apparatus wherein comminution of the material takes place
    between two relatively moving surfaces having nonsmooth surface
    characteristics which cooperate with each other and in which the material
    flows along a tangential direction of rotation.


CLS 460/76
TXT Multiple threshing cylinders:

    Subject matter under subclass 75 including two or more annular or
    cylindrical members of identical function which are usually mounted in
    series.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 574+ which include
    devices having two or more rollers or cylinders of identical design which
    are mounted in series for separating.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 289+
    which includes a plurality of rotating cylindrical or drum sifters mounted
    on horizontal axis.


CLS 460/77
TXT With axial flow to opposed ends:

    Subject matter under subclass 75 including means to direct crop material in
    the direction or line of rotor axis for threshing in opposite directions.


CLS 460/78
TXT With cutting:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 including means to sever the crop material
    prior to or during threshing or after it is discharged from the threshing
    section.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 194+ for cutting tools, and appropriate
    subclasses indented there under for cutting implements.

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 53+ which includes means for cutting
    cornstalks or other stalks of similar nature, regardless of ultimate
    disposition of the cut stalks; subclasses 122+ for cutting, conveying and
    threshing which includes means for cutting crop material; subclasses 153+
    for cutting and conveying; subclass 500 for stalk choppers.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclasses 26+ for removing
    the ends from food after removing it from the ground.


CLS 460/79
TXT SEPARATOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition which removes the grain from the
    straw and chaff after it is threshed.

    (1)     Note.  The device usually includes one or more of the following; a
    revolving beater, deflector, straw rack, and a grain conveyor.  The
    aggressive motion of straw rack separates threshed grain from the straw;
    the grain falls through openings in the bottom of the rack to the grain pan
    or the grain conveyor.  The revolving beater strips the straw from the rear
    of the cylinder and distributes it to the straw rack.  Deflectors above the
    rack regulate the movement of the straw and deflect grain kernels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 14.6 which includes crop-separator unit.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 528 having means to
    separate products; subclass 601 having means to set apart from one another
    grain, nongrain or separated grain portions.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclasses 111+ for earth
    removal and separation, appropriate subclasses which include screen or
    sieve for separation, separating conveyor having compound motion including
    agitator, rotary-drum type separator, endless-belt type separator, etc.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 233+
    having means and methods by which material is separated or assorted
    according to size by presentation to a series of openings.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 68+ for
    comminuting device provided with means to separate material; subclasses 83+
    in which comminuting surface provided with openings to permit discharge of
    material.


CLS 460/80
TXT Axial:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 which separates grain from straw and chaff
    by propelling the crop material in a generally spiral path in line with
    harvesting direction.

    (1)     Note.  The device usually includes a separating rotor having
    several finger-like elements, guide vanes or bars or similar protrusions.
    The rotary motion with finger-like action provides the desired axial
    displacement and circumferential movement of the crop material.


CLS 460/81
TXT Separating cylinder:

    Apparatus under subclass 92 having an annular or cylindrical member which
    separates the threshed grain from the straw.

    (1)     Note.  The device may or may not be integral with the threshing
    cylinder and may not be of similar construction but essentially performing
    the function of the straw walker; however, device does not necessarily
    exclude the straw walker also being present.  See subclass 85 for straw
    walker, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 567+ having means to
    separate external portion from food products.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 288 for
    rotating drum sifters.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 185.5+ for
    apparatus in which the material is subjected to rotary striking member;
    subclass 220 for apparatus in which one of the cooperating surfaces rotates
    about an axis.


CLS 460/82
TXT Foraminous periphery without associated concave:

    Subject matter under subclass 81 in which the separating cylinder is
    provided with plurality of (partial or full) perforations or openings which
    allow the grain and smaller chaff and refuse to pass through but will
    detain the larger refuse and chaff.

    (1)     Note.  Separation is accomplished without an associated concave and
    the flow of the separated material is through the cylinder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 503 for means to treat
    food with a rotating foraminous separator; subclass 603 for hulling means
    having rotary perforated surface.


CLS 460/83
TXT Multiple cylinders:

    Subject matter under subclass 81 having a plurality of annular or
    cylindrical members which separate threshed grain from the straw and chaff.


CLS 460/84
TXT Including deflector means:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 including means to divert or to turn aside
    the crop to any part of the separating and cleaning system.

    (1)     Note.  The device prevents uneven build-up of the crop material and
    evenly distributes the material upon the grain pan.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 634 for food deflector to
    direct the food through the container or into contact with the abrading
    means.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 294 for
    rotating cylindrical or drum sifters having means for deflecting the
    material along the sifter.


CLS 460/85
TXT Straw walker:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 including a moving rack or a similar
    element which separates the grain and moves the straw, chaff and other
    material out the back of the thresher.

    (1)     Note.  The device tosses and tumbles the straw and chaff and
    propels it to the rear.  This aggressive motion separates threshed grain
    from the straw and chaff.  The straw travels the full length of the rack
    and is discharged at the rear.  The device consists of section of bars
    which are driven by means which gives an alternate lifting and dropping
    motion as the straw is "walked" toward the rear.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages: Apparatus,  subclasses 605+ for perforated
    sifters in a grain huller.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 247 and
    257 for devices which include conveyors associated with sifting means and
    delivering material to the latter; subclasses 277, 278 for reciprocating
    agitators; subclass 282 for stationary sifters with reciprocating
    agitators, subclasses 325, 326, 329 for flat reciprocating sifters having
    both horizontal and vertical movements and also having circular or orbital
    motion; subclass 396 for sifting passages of elongated slot form which are
    formed by bars or rods and which have relative movement during the sifting
    operation.


CLS 460/86
TXT Endless apron:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 including an endless flexible belt or
    conveyor with slats, bars or similar protrusions causing grain separation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    14,     Bridges, subclass 70 which includes floored, narrow structures
    having an endless conveyor as whole or part of the floor.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 616 for endless-belt
    hulling surface.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 272 for
    sifters having endless belt; subclass 307 for endless belt sifters;
    subclasses 921 and 923 for endless feed conveyor.

    406,    Conveyor:  Fluid Current, subclass 77 which includes pneumatic
    conveyors having endless belt.


CLS 460/87
TXT Overhung rake:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 which is usually made up of rods, bars,
    teeth or similar elements and is usually positioned over the crop flow.

    (1)     Note.  The device agitates the crop flow and aids in separation of
    grain from the straw.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 632 for grain hulling
    apparatus having agitator or flow control means.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 152 and
    320 for devices in which material is agitated by the drum or a cooperating
    element; subclasses 277, 322, 357 which include reciprocating agitators,
    subclasses 278, 283, 324, and 358 which include rotating agitators.


CLS 460/88
TXT Rotary rake:

    Subject matter under subclass 87 having a rotary member which agitates the
    crop and separates grain from the straw.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 278, 283,
    324, and 358 for rotary agitators.


CLS 460/89
TXT Mounted on crankshaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 88 in which the rake member is carried by a
    link mechanism that turns about a center of rotation.


CLS 460/90
TXT Shaking table:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 including an assembly of parallel bars,
    cross bars or similar elements which moves to-and-fro with a quick abrupt
    motion in separating grain from the straw.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 325, 326,
    329, and 674 for reciprocating sifters having movement both horizontally
    and vertically; subclass 921 for reciprocating or oscillating feed conveyor.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclass 73 for reciprocating or
    oscillating conveyors.


CLS 460/91
TXT Oscillating:

    Subject matter under subclass 90 including a member which swings the table
    back and forth.


CLS 460/92
TXT And reciprocating:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 including means to induce combined
    alternating back-and-forth and swinging back-and-forth movements to the
    table.


CLS 460/93
TXT Reciprocating:

    Subject matter under subclass 90 having a member which induces alternating
    back-and-forth movement to the table.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 277, 322,
    357 for reciprocating agitators.


CLS 460/94
TXT Mounting of:

    Apparatus under subclass 90 including means to support the shaking table to
    the combine.


CLS 460/95
TXT Suspended:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 having a member which hangs the table so
    as to allow free movement.

    (1)     Note.  The table is principally suspended from the frame of the
    combine.


CLS 460/96
TXT With material vibrator:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 consisting of a system of rods, fingers,
    fins or similar elements which agitates the crop material and prevents crop
    buildup.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 152 for a
    cooperating element which agitates the material; subclass 266 for guiding
    devices; subclass 267 for devices associated with sifters which retard the
    passage of material over the sifting surfaces; subclass 283 for sifters
    associated with rotating agitators.

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 161 for material vibrators.


CLS 460/97
TXT CLEANER:

    Subject matter under the class definition which removes chaff and fine
    residue from the threshed and separated grain.

    (1)     Note.  The device usually includes a grain pan, chaffer, and
    chaffer extension.  The device cleans the crop by the combined action of
    cleaning element and an air blast.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclass 9 for decorticating fibers
    with air blast.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 516+ for means to treat
    food products by fluid application; subclass 570 for means for removing
    shell or external portion by fluid application.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 17 for separation by
    fluid current.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 380 for
    devices having means to project fluid jets or streams against the sifting
    elements for purpose of cleaning or keeping open the sifting passages.


CLS 460/98
TXT Rotary cleaner:

    Subject matter under subclass 97 usually consisting of a hollow rotating
    screen or a sieve which rolls, tumbles or agitates the grain while
    separating it from the chaff and other foreign matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 522 and 528 having
    multi-perforated rotary member which retains grain and allows nongrain
    material to pass through or allows the grain to pass through and retains
    nongrain material; subclass 603 for hulling means having moving perforated
    surface.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 69+ where
    the discharge permitting screen forms a partition or end wall in a rotary
    comminuting drum; subclasses 83+ appropriate subclasses indented there
    under which include rotary comminuting surface having openings, and wherein
    screen or screen elements move during comminution.


CLS 460/99
TXT Air control affecting air flow:

    Subject matter under subclass 97 including means to regulate the direction
    of air blast.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, for treating food by applying
    fluid, subclass 525 which includes (a) dynamic means to forcibly propel gas
    to or from the device, or (b) static means to direct the flow of gas to or
    from the device, or both (a) and (b); subclass 527 which includes a
    relatively movable member that stops or varies the flow of gas through a
    gas entrance or gas exit.


CLS 460/100
TXT With fan feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 97 including means which blows across the
    crop material to further separate the grain from the remaining chaff and
    small pieces of straw.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 50 for
    apparatus wherein the material is elevated or moved to a screen by a fan
    member or members.


CLS 460/101
TXT Sieve or grate:

    Subject matter under subclass 97 consisting of sections or slats made of
    corrugated formation of plurality of plates or bars which separate grains
    from any remaining chaff after it is received from a separating mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 601 and 603 for means
    to segregate diverse material including moving perforated surface.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 393+ for
    bar-type elements for sifting bulk material; subclasses 659+ for sorting
    items by size which includes bars, slats etc.


CLS 460/102
TXT Screen:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 consisting of a utensil of wire mesh or
    closely perforated metal which removes particles smaller than the grain
    being separated such as weed seeds, sand and other foreign matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 528 for screen to
    separate food products,

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 401 for
    sifting passages which are formed by spaced intermeshing or crossing
    connected threads, wires or bars.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution and Disintegration, subclasses 83+ for
    comminuting surface provided with openings to permit discharge of material
    which includes screen or screen elements.


CLS 460/103
TXT WITH MEANS TO CLEAN MACHINE:

    Subject matter under the class definition for cleaning any part of the
    threshing machine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97,     for cleaning of the crop, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 12 for apparatus
    cleaner in which means is provided to remove accumulated dirt, recovered
    objects, or portions of said recovered objects from parts of said apparatus.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 487 for
    devices which remove from belt or drum surfaces material adhering thereto
    after gravital discharge of the stratified material.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 166 and 167
    for apparatus wherein means is provided to scrape or otherwise clean a
    comminuting member.


CLS 460/104
TXT Concave cleaner:

    Subject matter under subclass 103 including means to clean the concave
    portion of the machine to free it from all debris and unwanted foreign
    matter.


CLS 460/105
TXT WITH STONE TRAP:

    Subject matter under the class definition having means attached to the
    thresher which directs or collects rock or metal object away from the crop
    flow path and prevents it from reaching the crop separating components
    inclusive of the threshing cylinder.


CLS 460/106
TXT Pivoting trap:

    Subject matter under subclass 105 including a short rod or shaft which
    rotates or swings to facilitate emptying stones and metal objects from the
    stone trap.


CLS 460/107
TXT CONCAVE:

    Subject matter under the class definition having a series of stationary
    bars or open grates located below the threshing cylinder or rotor and
    surrounds part of its circumference.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 567+ for separating one
    external portion from the remaining food and grain hulling.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 274+ for
    sifters having concave or convex material receiving surfaces.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 27 for
    apparatus in which comminution or disintegration of the material is
    effected by subjecting the particles thereof to a blow by a moving surface;
    subclass 86 for apparatus in which the surface having openings cooperates
    with a rotary surface or member to effect the comminution; subclass 273.4
    wherein the stationary comminuting surface is an interior curved surface;
    subclasses 185.5+ for apparatus wherein the material is subjected to the
    action of a rotary member which strikes the material a sudden blow to
    effect comminution; subclass 221 for apparatus in which the material flows
    circumferentially or tangentially of the rotary surface during the
    comminuting operation.


CLS 460/108
TXT Grid or grate:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 consisting of a framework of crisscrossed
    bars or rods or a network of coil or fine wire, or a concave plate with a
    plurality of uniformly spaced perforations.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for specific detail of the grid and
    grate portion of the concave.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 396 wherein
    sifting passages are formed by bars or rods; subclass 401 wherein sifting
    passages are formed by spaced intermeshing or crossing connected wires or
    bars; subclasses 659+ for apparatus for sorting items by size which
    includes curved grating passages (e.g., bar, slat, etc.) between stationary
    element and roller.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 51 wherein
    screen forms part of comminuting surface; subclass 88.4 for spaced parallel
    bars (e.g., "Grate").


CLS 460/109
TXT Adjustable:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 having means to regulate the grid or
    grate or any part thereof by moving the concave closer or further away from
    the threshing or separating cylinders.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 523 for means to vary
    spacing between hulling surfaces; subclass 579 for apparatus which includes
    means for adjustment of a separating member.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 89.1 for
    apparatus in which the surface having openings, or portions thereof, is
    movable to change the size of the openings or its position relative to the
    comminuting member.


CLS 460/110
TXT Teeth, bars, blades, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 specific to the structure of the teeth,
    bars, blades or groups of the same.


CLS 460/111
TXT STRAW CHAFF SPREADER OR HANDLING (DISCHARGE):

    Subject matter under the class definition consisting of a fan, a blower or
    an adjustable valve which controls or regulates the discharge at the rear
    of the threshing machine.

    (1)     Note.  The device spreads, handles, or regulates the material
    (other than uncontrolled discharge) including straw and chaff which exit
    from the machine after it is threshed, separated and cleaned.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 13.3 for air-moving means which directs crop
    material away from the harvester; subclasses 16.4+ for apparatus for
    handling, regulating or dividing one portion of crop from another thereof,
    or dividing unwanted material from wanted crop; subclass 71 for apparatus
    having mechanism for effecting the discharge of the cut stalks from the
    machine.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 580 for discharge feature
    for handling subdivided portion of food which includes an ejector,
    guiding-trough, trap door, etc; subclasses 609+ for mechanism to feed or
    discharge material including discharge of the grain from final hulling zone.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 256 and
    258 for valves associated with sifters to control the discharge of the
    material from the sifters.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 186.2 and
    186.3 for means to effect a change in the flow of material from the
    comminutor and means to change the course of the material as it flows from
    the comminuting zone; subclass 222 which includes material discharge
    mechanism or control.


CLS 460/112
TXT With chopper:

    Subject matter under subclass 111 including a cutting element which cuts
    the chaff into small pieces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 60 for means for cutting the stalks into short
    lengths; subclass 500 for stalk choppers.


CLS 460/113
TXT BEATER:

    Subject matter under the class definition consisting of an annular or
    cylindrical revolving member which strips the straw.

    (1)     Note.  The device usually consists of a small diameter drum with
    protrusions around its circumference or may be a paddle or a rod with
    plurality of fingers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73,     for beater; subclass 142, for drum and beater.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 629 which includes moving
    means which causes the material to randomly contact the separating means.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting   Solids, subclass 254 for
    distributors or spreaders which distribute or spread the material over the
    surfaces of sifters; subclass 299 which includes means for beating the
    material.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 200+ and
    227+ wherein a rotor or a rotary member cooperates with the moving surface;
    subclass 250 for apparatus in which the rotary surface cooperates with
    comminuting surface which moves during the comminuting operation.


CLS 460/114
TXT TRANSPORT CONVEYOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition consisting of a continuous moving
    belt or similar structure which transports the crop material from one part
    of the machine to another including the discharge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    14,     Bridges, subclass 70 for floured, narrow structures having an
    endless conveyor.

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 122 which includes means or conveying the cut
    grain from the cutter to the thresher.

    198,    Conveyors, Power-Driven, subclasses 804+ for endless conveyor.

    209,    Classifying, Separating and Assorting Solids, subclasses 241, 247,
    257 and 261 wherein conveyors are employed for the feeding of material to
    and for discharging material from sifting devices.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 223 in which
    mechanism for feeding and discharging comprises an endless belt conveyor.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclass 77 for endless belt conveyors.


CLS 460/115
TXT Pneumatic:

    Subject matter under subclass 114 wherein the air flow from the fan or the
    blower assists in transporting crop material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, appropriate subclasses for methods and
    apparatus for conveying solid material by means of or with the assistance
    of a fluid current.


CLS 460/116
TXT DRIVE RELATED FEATURES:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a structure that
    relates to any operating part of the machine, e.g., gearing, casing, axle
    mount.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is limited only to structure that is directly
    connected to a thresher and unique for its utilization within the thresher.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 142 for drive details
    (e.g., clutch, or gearing) which includes a specific means forming a part
    of a power supply system to move a portion of a device which removes and
    separates buried plants or objects from the earth.


CLS 460/117
TXT DUST HANDLING:

    Subject matter under the class definition having means to control the dust
    due to threshing and separating operations and to prevent it from escaping
    except through usual discharge openings.


CLS 460/118
TXT DRIER:

    Subject matter under the class definition which removes moisture by direct
    heat, exhaust gases or air blast from the harvested crop prior to its
    separation or during its separation or after it is separated or threshed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate
    subclasses, for processes and apparatus of drying and vapor contact with
    the material.

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 12.2 for machine which includes means for
    utilizing exhaust gases to dry the crop.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, appropriate subclasses, for the
    heating of food products.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 11 for
    methods and means for heating associated with sepag.ration methods.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 8 and 17
    for comminuting combined with heatin

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    appropriate subclasses, for processes involving the application of a fluid
    to heat cereal or other seeds.


CLS 460/119
TXT MACHINE COMPONENT ARRANGEMENT AND STRUCTURE, E.G., ENGINE PLACEMENT, GRAIN
    BIN:

    Subject matter under the class definition unique to machine arrangement of
    major elements, e.g., grain bin, engine placement, in order to make the
    machine more efficient, shorter in length or similar improvement.


CLS 460/120
TXT RACK, GRATE, BAR EXTENSION:

    Subject matter under the class definition which bridges the crop flow to
    the next succeeding processing element but is not structurally identical to
    the element from which the extension is integrally connected.

    (1)     Note.  The device would be a series of rods or bars connected to
    the rear of a screen grate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 12.4 which includes fingerlike elements that
    engage and handle vegetation or crop; subclasses 161 and 164 which include
    conveying mechanism having a rake which is operated to rake the grain;
    subclass 180 which includes raking elements for raking grain from a
    harvester platform.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 267 for
    devices which retard the passage of material over the sifting surfaces and
    which are not primarily agitators.


CLS 460/121
TXT TOOTH STRUCTURE:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a projecting part
    resembling tooth in shape or function.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 363+ for
    elements, particularly subclass 399 wherein the sifting passages are formed
    by bars or rods which do not intermesh.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 87.1 for
    offset fingers or projections on stationary surface and on rotary member;
    subclasses 291+ for comminuting elements.


CLS 460/122
TXT Mounting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 including means to position or attach the
    tooth member either to the concave or cylinder, or roller.


CLS 460/123
TXT FRUIT OR VEGETABLE PROCESSING APPARATUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition which separates vegetables or
    fruits from plant stalks, pod or vine.

    (1)     Note.  Device separates vegetables from the plant stalk such as
    brussel sprouts; pods from the plant stem such as peas, beans; vegetables
    from the vine such as peanuts, cucumbers, potatoes, tomatoes; leaves from
    the stalk such as tobacco, sugarcane, broom-corn, hops from the branches
    and clusters.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 54 which include mechanism for trimming or
    cleaning broom-corn; subclasses 126+ for seed gatherers or strippers.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 546 and 635 which
    include severing means for detaching a stem-end or blossom-end from the
    food material.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclasses 26+ for apparatus
    and method for detachment of plant parts by pulling, beating and shaking;
    subclasses 111+ which includes means for earth removal and separation of
    plant objects.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 283 for
    stationary sifters having concave and convex material receiving surfaces
    including rotating agitators; subclasses 288 and 299 which include
    cylindrical and drum sifters mounted with their axes in horizontal or
    inclined position having rotary motion and having devices for lifting and
    dropping material and means for beating the material.


CLS 460/124
TXT Pre-stripper:

    Subject matter under subclass 123 including means to trim up the stalk
    before being inserted into the separating element.


CLS 460/125
TXT Declustering:

    Subject matter under subclass 123 including means to subdivide bunches or
    masses of naturally-connected crop products into smaller single crop
    products and means to sever the stem.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 638 for clusterr-breaking
    means.


CLS 460/126
TXT Including picking or plucking (peanuts, hops or similar material):

    Subject matter under subclass 123 consisting of cylinders, rollers, endless
    belts or similar elements which give an abrupt pull to the crop material
    and detach the product by grasping and pulling abruptly.

    (1)     Note.  The device usually includes cylinders or rollers having
    projecting fingers or rods which rotate in opposite or same direction or an
    endless belt having projecting fingers or rods or similar means.  The
    fingers or rods engage the vine and strip the pods.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 27.5 for devices used in harvesting tobacco;
    subclasses 38 and 49 wherein picking mechanism is carried by an endless
    belt.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 28 wherein detachment
    of plant objects is accomplished by opposed rotary gripping elements;
    subclasses 126+ for moving separating conveyors having compound motion, and
    having rotary cylinder, rotary drum, endless belt, shaking screen or grate,
    separating rollers, etc.


CLS 460/127
TXT Spike tooth:

    Subject matter under subclass 126 in which the projection is made of a
    long, thick, sharp-pointed piece of metal or equivalent.


CLS 460/128
TXT Spring biased:

    Subject matter under subclass 126 in which the projection is an elastic
    device such as  a coil of wire.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 16.1 which includes elongated fingers attached
    on an axle or a shaft.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 128 which includes
    rotary cylinder with radially extending separating elements.


CLS 460/129
TXT Combing:

    Subject matter under subclass 126 in which the projection is made of a
    plurality of thin, toothed strips which impart a combing effect in
    separating the crop material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 34 for device which includes a comb between
    the teeth of which the stalks are drawn; subclasses 114, 116, 127, 130 in
    which the snapping member consists of a fixed bar with teeth in the form of
    a comb.


CLS 460/130
TXT Pressure roller (e.g., snapping-cucumber):

    Subject matter under subclass 123 consisting of a single roll or a pair of
    closely spaced rolls which snap the crop material and separates the product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 14.1+ for devices which include at least two
    generally cylindrical closely spaced members rotating in opposite angular
    directions.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 558 for devices which
    include parallel, cooperating cylinders; subclasses 574+ and 600+,
    appropriate indented subclasses for rotating cylindrical separating means;
    subclass 640 which includes two or more revolving cylinders which coact to
    grasp and pull off a stem while the food product is in contact with the
    cylinders.

    171,    Unearthing Plants and Buried Objects, subclass 28 for devices which
    include opposed rotary gripping elements; subclass 58 for cylindrical
    spaced members between which an object being unearthed is grasped; subclass
    129 for rotary-drum type separators.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 460/131
TXT Shelling pressure roller (e.g., peas, beans, per se):

    Subject matter under subclass 123 consisting of a member or members with
    resilient surface which resiliently press and separate the product from the
    crop material.

    (1)     Note.  The device is used for shelling green peas, lima beans,
    string beans, black-eyed peas and similar material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 558 for parallel,
    cooperating cylinders, one resilient, one impaling; subclass 566 for ribbed
    rotating cylinder; subclass 575 for separating means with relative movement
    between adjacent irregular surfaces.  Subclass 586 for device including a
    flexible material or a plurality of flexible members which cooperate to
    form a passage; subclasses 623+ for grain hulling by abrading or resilient
    separating means.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 460/132
TXT With adjusting means for roller or cylinder:

    Subject matter under subclass 123 including means to regulate or change the
    clearance of the separate member or members.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 579 for device including
    means for adjusting of a separating member; subclass 523 for means to vary
    spacing between hulling surfaces.


CLS 460/133
TXT Including agitator:

    Subject matter under subclass 123 consisting of a plurality of rods, rakes,
    or similar means which extend into the crop flow and shake the crop
    material.

    (1)     Note.  The device increases the machine efficiency and provide an
    added motion consonant with the normal movement of the crop material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     for material vibrator which agitates the crop material and prevents
    the crop build up.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages: Apparatus, subclass 632 for agitator or flow
    control means.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 127 for moving
    conveyor, digger or separator having an agitating means.


CLS 460/134
TXT Stripper or stemmer:

    Subject matter under subclass 123 having means to sever and detach product
    or leaf from the vine or stalk from the fruit or vegetable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclass 338 which includes means to sever the stem of
    the fruit.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 546 and 635 for devices
    having a severing means for detaching a stem-end or blossom-end from food
    material.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclasses 26+ for removing
    the ends from food after removing it from the ground.


CLS 460/135
TXT With rotary cutter:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 in which the stripping or stemming is
    accomplished by a cutting element which moves in a circular orbit about a
    single axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 593 for device wherein
    the cutting means to sever the skin from the food is rotary.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 42 for a
    rotary-moving topping cutter.


CLS 460/136
TXT With cutter encompassing stalk:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 in which cutting means is arranged about
    a central axis.


CLS 460/137
TXT With stationary cutter:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 in which the product to be cut is moved
    relative to a stationary cutting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 595 for the device
    wherein means to move food past the stationary cutting tool is disclosed.


CLS 460/138
TXT With oscillating cutter:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 having cutting means which swings back
    and forth.


CLS 460/139
TXT With vibrating cutter:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 wherein the cutting means moves back and
    forth rapidly.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 589 wherein a vibrating
    cutting tool means is disclosed.


CLS 460/140
TXT With roller:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 including an annular cylindrical member
    which performs the stripping or stemming in combination with a cutting
    means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclass 585 for device for
    removing skin by pinching roller; subclass 625, for adjacent moving
    surfaces that remove skin by abrading; subclass 640, for roller means that
    grip a stem to remove it from food.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 28 for oppositely
    rotating members between which certain portions of a plant are engaged and
    fed until such portions are pinched or pulled apart from other portions of
    said plant; subclass 58, for opposed roller- type plant extractors.


CLS 460/141
TXT With cylinder and concave (for nongrain products):

    Subject matter under subclass 123 which includes a rotor having protruding
    elements and a grated area that surrounds part of its circumference.

    (1)     Note.  The device is similar to the grain threshing cylinder and
    concave but with unique features which separates only nongrain products.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for rethreshing by separate diverse threshing means; subclass 75
    for transverse threshing section; subclass 63, for prethreshing means;
    subclass 24 for flax thresher; subclass 46 for ear shelling by concave and
    cylinder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 574+ for separating one
    external portion from the remaining food by rotating separating means;
    subclasses 600+ for grain hulling; subclasses 623+ for separating by
    abrading or resilient separating means.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 279 for
    rotating sifters having material-receiving surfaces concave or convex in
    shape.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 221 for
    apparatus in which the material flows circumferential or tangentially of
    the rotary surface during the comminuting operation.


CLS 460/142
TXT Drum and beater:

    Subject matter under subclass 123 consisting of a rotating perforated
    member within which another rotary member with a plurality of rods, bars or
    similar elements interact with the crop material to separate the product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73,     for threshing section having beater; subclass 113 for beater.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 603+ for grain hulling
    apparatus having moving perforated surface particularly subclass 608
    wherein the cylindrical or conical perforated enclosure contains an inner
    hulling member which revolves about an axis substantially coincident with
    the axis of the cylinder or cone, with which the cylinder or cone
    cooperates to hull the grain.


CLS 460/143
TXT Blower assisted:

    Subject matter under subclass 123 including fan means to provide air blast
    for removing leaves, stems and other foreign matter from the crop product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    for cleaner with fan feature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 516+ for apparatus for
    treating food by applying fluid.


CLS 460/144
TXT Endless separating conveyor:

    Subject matter under subclass 123 consisting of a mechanical contrivance
    such as a continuous chain or belt which separates product from the crop
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for transport conveyor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclass 77 for endless belt conveyors.


CLS 460/145
TXT Shaker or shaking table (for nongrain products):

    Subject matter under subclass 123 consisting of an endless conveyor having
    a plurality of bars or rods or similar elements which agitates the crop
    material and separates the product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90,     for shaking table.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclasses 26+ for apparatus
    wherein means is provided to remove object from the plant parts,
    particularly subclass 27 wherein plant parts are separated by means which
    impacts or violently agitates the plant to jar or remove portions therefrom.


CLS 460/146
TXT Reciprocating:

    Subject matter under subclass 145 having means which induces alternating
    back-and-forth movement to the table or any part thereof.


CLS 460/147
TXT Oscillating:

    Subject matter under subclass 145 having means which swings the table back
    and forth or any part thereof.


CLS 460/148
TXT Vibratory:

    Subject matter under subclass 145 having means to cause rapid back and
    forth motion to any part of the shaker member.


CLS 460/149
TXT PROCESS:

    Method under the class definition for separating crop product.


CLS 460/150
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition which is not in conformance with
    the definition of any prior subclass in this schedule.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149,    for the corresponding process.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS

            The following subclasses are collections of published disclosures
    pertaining to various specified aspects of the threshing art.  These
    subclasses assist a search based on remote function of the apparatus and
    may be of further assistance to the searcher as an indication of further
    related fields of search inside or outside of the class.  Thus, there is
    here provided a second access for retrieval of a limited number of types of
    disclosures.

    (1)     Note.  The disclosures found in the following subclass are
    examples, only of the indicated subject matter, and no instance do they
    represent the entire extent of the prior art.


CLS 460/901
TXT MATERIAL DISTRIBUTOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means which permits the
    crop material to be distributed evenly across the feeder or shaking table.


CLS 460/902
TXT GRAIN CLEANER:

    Subject matter under the class definition having means for rethreshing the
    repeat material and thereby avoiding the necessity of returning the repeat
    material to the main threshing cylinder.


CLS 460/903
TXT GRAIN SAVER:

    Subject matter under the class definition having means adapted to be
    attached to some portion of the threshing machine in such a position as to
    catch the grains which are shelled out during the threshing operation and
    which would otherwise be lost.


CLS 460/904
TXT POTATO DIGGER:

    Subject matter under the class definition especially adapted for removing
    potatoes from the earth.


CLS 460/905
TXT STRAW OR CHAFF STACKER:

    Subject matter under the class definition for catching and retaining stalks
    or husks of grain after being discharged from the threshing machine.


CLS 462/
TTL BOOKS, STRIPS, AND LEAVES  FOR MANIFOLDING

CLS 462/
TXT This class provides for (a) an article comprising an upperbody* and an
    underbody* for simultaneously receiving indicia on the upperbody and the
    underbody as a member produces that indicia on the upperbody; and (b) a
    method of or apparatus for simultaneously producing indicia on the
    upperbody and underbody of such an article.

    (1)     Note.  An asterisk (*) in these definitions denotes a term  defined
    in the glossary for this class.

    (2)     Note.  The term "body" includes a sheet in the form of a  strip*, a
    leaf*, a book* or any other article subject to a process or apparatus of
    this class.

    (3)     Note.  The indicia impressed on the upperbody may be visibly
    produced on the upperbody, or alternatively the upperbody may remain
    visibly blank.

    (4)     Note.  There may be more than one underbody to which indicia is
    transferred.

    (5)     Note.  Either or both of the bodies may be flexible.

    (6)     Note.  The indicia generally comprises a written character.

    SCOPE OF THE CLASS:

    Included in this class is a manifold, (i.e., an article comprising
    superposed bodies on which indicia is to be simultaneously produced) which
    may include (1) a transfer means interposed between the bodies such that a
    pigmented delineation of an impression* on the upper-body* will be made on
    a surface of the under-body*, (2) a transfer means comprising a coating on
    one of the bodies or (3) a component of one of the bodies which causes an
    image to be visible thereon after being subjected to pressure.

    Also included in this class is an apparatus particularly adapted to support
    a manifold as indicia is produced on the upper-body thereof such that a
    similar indicia is produced on the under-body.  The corresponding method of
    simultaneously producing an image on the upper-body and the under-body of a
    manifold is also included in the scope of this class.

    In many instances, claimed subject matter includes manifolding articles in
    the form of strips*, books* and leaves* as well as such articles combined
    with apparatus such as feeding members, platens, storage means and holders.
     A substantial number of subclasses involve collections of such cooperating
    or "external" apparatus with particular manifolding articles.

    (1)     Note.  In this class, a patent is placed in a subclass based on the
    configuration of the manifold prior to the image producing operation.

    GLOSSARY

    (1)     Note.  Terms or phrases used in titles and definitions either
    repeatedly or in a special and limited sense are set forth below with the
    meaning each is to have in this class.  For economy of space, an asterisk
    (*) following a word indicates that reference should be  made to this
    glossary for the specific meaning thereof.

    BODY

    A sheet* in the form of a strip*, leaf*, or book* or any other article to
    be subjected to a process or apparatus of this class.

    BOOK

    Two or more sheets* secured together only at their margins or at a portion
    thereof, in particular, the outside limit or edge and adjoining surface of
    the sheets.  A single folded sheet is not considered to be a book; however,
    a stack of two or more folded sheets becomes a book when bonded together
    along the fold lines.

    IMPRESSION

    A discontinuity in a surface resulting from applying pressure, usually
    mechanical, against a surface to mark it such as to produce indicia thereon.

    LEAF

    A sheet* other than a strip*.

    MANIFOLDING

    The process of simultaneously producing indicia on an under-body* such as a
    flexible sheet+ or strip* by impression* of such indicia on an upper-body*.

    SHEET

    A body* having two parallel surfaces, both dimensions of which are very
    large in comparison with the third dimension (thickness) of the body.

    STRIP

    A sheet* in the form of a roll or a sheet folded back and forth along at
    least two folded lines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 22 and 23.01+ wherein the
    multicopying means are pantographic.

    101,    Printing, subclasses 67, 90 and 113 for multicopying means
    involving a type die or stencil and subclass 415.1 for flexible sheet
    securing device.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 389+ for a roll or reel
    package and subclasses 449+ for a sheet package.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 45+ for a paper or sheet supporting
    rack.

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, subclasses 6+ for severing by
    manually forcing against fixed edge and subclasses 93+ for breaking or
    tearing apparatus.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for methods of, and apparatus for, feeding material without utilizing
    either the leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material; see
    especially subclasses 52+ for means to engage longitudinally spaced
    modifications in material and subclasses 120+ for advancing material by
    intermittent (interrupted) material-mover.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 550+, 588+, and 590+
    for a dispenser of elongated material of general use.

    281,    Books, Strips, and Leaves, appropriate subclasses; books, strips
    and leaves, per se, and various combinations thereof with each other and
    accessories.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 34.21+ for continuous
    strip-type support cabinet structures.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 497+ for device for holding a
    sheet or web and a corresponding transfer sheet (e.g., "carbon paper")
    superimposed and in position for typing plural simultaneous copies.


CLS 462/1
TXT FOR RECORDING BODY PART IMAGE (E.G., FOOT, FINGER, PALM):

    Subject matter under the class definition particularly adapted to produce
    the likeness of a anatomical member of a human being or other animal, e.g.,
    apparatus particularly adapted to produce an impression of a human foot,
    palm or fingerprint.

    (1)     Note.  May include, for example, apparatus adapted to produce an
    impression of a human foot, palm or fingerprint.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 33+ for footwear measuring
    apparatus.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 172 for processes and apparatus for
    measuring orthopedic pressure distribution.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclass 255 for a process and
    apparatus related to demonstrating traversing of the ground (e.g., walking,
    running).


CLS 462/2
TXT CONTINUOUS FORM STRIP* - BOOK* TYPE:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising (1) a book* formed of
    two or more strips* which is intended to be subdivided into a plurality of
    smaller books or (2) an assembly of a strip with a first sheet* forming a
    first book at a first location on the strip and the assembly of the strip
    and a second sheet forming a second book at a second location on the strip.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for continuous strip, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    270,    Sheet-Material Associating, subclasses 52.01+ for method and
    apparatus for bringing together a plurality of webs.

    281,    Books, Strips, and Leaves, subclasses 5 and 23 for a strip and for
    means securing a leaf to a strip.

    283,    Printed Matter, subclass 62 for an indicia bearing strip.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 43 for a web
    having a portion weakened to permit separation through the thickness
    thereof and subclasses 98+ for a structurally defined web.


CLS 462/3
TXT With feed means:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 including means for effecting longitudinal
    movement of the strip* in the course of manifolding*.


CLS 462/4
TXT And strip* feeding distortion prevention means (e.g., anti-tenting device):

    Subject matter under subclass 3 wherein the strip* includes stress
    relieving structure to prevent strip damaging movement during its
    longitudinal advance.

    (1)     Note.  An anti-tenting device refers to means which prevent small
    gaps or "tents" between strip plies from forming during strip feeding which
    may lead to damage such as wrinkling of one or more plies.


CLS 462/5
TXT And feeding lead means:

    Subject matter under subclass 3 wherein the strip or strip feed apparatus
    includes means to facilitate positioning of the strip* as it is threaded
    through processing machinery.


CLS 462/6
TXT CONTINUOUS FORM STRIP* - FOLDER OR POCKET TYPE:

    Subject matter under the class definition including an assembly of a
    plurality of sheet* receiving enclosures in the form of a strip*.

    (1)     Note.  The strip includes within its structure the means to perform
    manifolding*.

    (2)     Note.  The form strip may include, for example, a series of airline
    tickets with their flight folders.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for continuous strip, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, subclasses 69+ for a
    strip of joined mailing enclosures (i.e., envelopes which may include
    manifolding).


    283,    Printed Matter, subclass 116 for indicia bearing envelopes.


CLS 462/7
TXT STRIP*, BOOK* AND LEAF*:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a strip*, a book*, and
    a leaf*.


CLS 462/8
TXT STRIP* AND LEAF*:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a strip* and a leaf*.


CLS 462/9
TXT With strip* retaining means:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 wherein means are provided for storing a
    strip* after its manifolding* use or operation.

    (1)     Note.  The storage means may include apparatus such as hub upon
    which a strip may be wound.


CLS 462/10
TXT And feed means:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 including means for effecting longitudinal
    movement of the strip* in the course of manifolding*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 52+ for
    means to engage longitudinally spaced modifications in material and
    subclasses 120+ for advancing material by intermittent (interrupted)
    material-mover.


CLS 462/11
TXT With perforated strip* guide or stop means:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein the strip* has at least one
    opening therein which cooperates with apparatus structured to align the
    strip for manifolding* or to arrest its feed motion.


CLS 462/12
TXT With leaf* retaining means:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 wherein apparatus is provided for storing a
    leaf* after its use in manifolding*.

    (1)     Note.  The leaf retained may be a separated portion of a strip and
    the storage apparatus may comprise, for example, a leaf receiving chamber
    within a housing.


CLS 462/13
TXT With feed means:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 including means for effecting longitudinal
    movement of the strip* in the course of manifolding*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 52+ for
    means to engage longitudinally spaced modifications in material and
    subclasses 120+ for advancing material by intermittent (interrupted)
    material-mover.


CLS 462/14
TXT With platen:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 including a hard planar surface over which
    the strip* and leaf* assembly pass to provide a pressure receiving backing
    device for the strip.

    (1)     Note.  The planar surface presents a hard backing used, for
    example, for manually writing on a superposed strip and leaf assembly
    positioned thereon.


CLS 462/15
TXT Having folded indicia receiving strip* material supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 14 wherein a strip* portion awaiting
    manifolding* is stored in the form of a bundle in which the strip is
    zig-zag creased and repeatedly doubled over upon itself.


CLS 462/16
TXT And perforated strip* guide or stop means:

    Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein the strip* has at least one
    opening therein which cooperates with a device to align the strip for
    proper feeding orientation for the manifolding* operation or to arrest its
    feed motion.


CLS 462/17
TXT BOOK* AND LEAF*:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a book* and a leaf*.

    (1)     Note.  The leaf* is a separate entity from the book* in that it is
    not a sheet of the book secured together in the same way as the other
    sheets forming the book (i.e., secured together only at their margin or at
    a portion thereof).


CLS 462/18
TXT Multiple copy:

    Subject matter under subclass 17 wherein manifolding* produces indicia on
    three or more surfaces.


CLS 462/19
TXT Having book* with sectional leaf* folded in manifolding*:

    Subject matter under subclass 18 wherein a book* has at least one leaf*
    that has at least two distinct areas of utility and wherein the leaf is
    creased along a line(s) during manifolding*.


CLS 462/20
TXT Multiple books*:

    Subject matter under subclass 18 including a plurality of books* utilized
    for manifolding*.


CLS 462/21
TXT Multiple books*:

    Subject matter under subclass 17 including a plurality of books* utilized
    for manifolding*.


CLS 462/22
TXT Having transfer leaf* (e.g., carbon) attached to book* holder or cover:

    Subject matter under subclass 17 wherein the book* is provided with a
    protective or support type means to which is connected a leaf* serving as a
    means to imprint indicia on a receiving body during manifolding*.

    (1)     Note.  The material typically coated on the transfer leaf is a
    pigment containing the element carbon, the leaf being commonly referred to
    as a "carbon".


CLS 462/23
TXT Having book* with sectional leaf* folded in manifolding*:

    Subject matter under subclass 17 wherein the book* has at least one leaf*
    that has at least two distinct areas of utility and wherein the leaf is
    creased along a line(s) during manifolding*.


CLS 462/24
TXT With transfer leaf* (e.g., carbon) attached to book*holder or cover:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein the book* is provided with a
    protective or support type means to which is connected a leaf* serving as a
    means to imprint indicia on a receiving body during manifolding*.

    (1)     Note.  The material typically coated on the transfer leaf is a
    pigment containing the element carbon, the leaf being commonly referred to
    as a "carbon".


CLS 462/25
TXT STRIP*:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a strip*.

    (1)     Note.  A strip* is defined in the glossary as a sheet* in the form
    of a roll or a sheet* folded back and forth along at least two folded lines.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for Strip* and Leaf* combined.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    281,    Books, Strips, and Leaves, subclasses 5+ for a strip, per se.


CLS 462/26
TXT Continuous:

    Subject matter under subclass 25 comprising strip* material suitable for
    manifolding* and available from a generally uninterrupted supply.

    (1)     Note.  The manifolding is performed generally in sequential steps
    from a refillable supply of work material in strip form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for continuous form strip - book type.

    6,      for continuous form strip - envelope, folder or pocket type.


CLS 462/27
TXT With strip* retaining means:

    Subject matter under subclass 26 wherein means are provided for storing the
    strip* after its manifolding* use.

    (1)     Note.  The storage means may include apparatus such as a hub upon
    which a strip may be wound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    281,    Books, Strips, and Leaves, subclasses 7+ for a strip, per se, with
    retaining means.


CLS 462/28
TXT Transfer strip* (e.g., carbon strip):

    Subject matter under subclass 27 including a strip* serving as a means to
    imprint indicia on a receiving element during manifolding*.

    (1)     Note.  The material typically coated on the strip is a pigment
    containing the element carbon, the strip being referred to as a "carbon
    strip".


CLS 462/29
TXT With feed means:

    Subject matter under subclass 28 including means for effecting longitudinal
    movement of a strip* in the course of manifolding*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 52+ for
    means to engage longitudinally spaced modifications in material and
    subclasses 120+ for advancing material by intermittent (interrupted)
    material-mover.


CLS 462/30
TXT And folded strip* retaining means:

    Subject matter under subclass 29 wherein means are provided for storing a
    strip* after its manifolding* use in the form of a bundle in which the
    strip is zig-zag creased and repeatedly doubled over upon itself.

    (1)     Note.  The retained strip may be folded into a bundle and stored in
    a housing, for example.


CLS 462/31
TXT Perforated strip* feed means:

    Subject matter under subclass 29 wherein a strip* has openings therein
    which cooperate with mechanical means to effect longitudinal movement of a
    strip in the course of manifolding*.


CLS 462/32
TXT With feed means:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 including means for effecting longitudinal
    movement of a strip in the course of manifolding*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 52+ for
    means to engage longitudinally spaced modifications in material and
    subclasses 120+ for advancing material by intermittent (interrupted)
    material-mover.


CLS 462/33
TXT Perforated strip* feed means:

    Subject matter under subclass 32 wherein a strip* has openings therein
    which cooperate with mechanical means to effect longitudinal movement of
    the strip in the course of manifolding*.


CLS 462/34
TXT With folded strip* retaining means:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 wherein means are provided for storing a
    strip* after its manifolding* use in the form of a bundle in which the
    strip is zig-zag creased and repeatedly doubled over upon itself.


CLS 462/35
TXT Including folded strip* retaining means:

    Subject matter under subclass 32 wherein means are provided for storing a
    strip* after its manifolding* use in the form of a bundle in which the
    strip is zig-zag creased and repeatedly doubled over upon itself.


CLS 462/36
TXT With leaf* retaining means:

    Subject matter under subclass 26 wherein apparatus is provided for storing
    a leaf* after its use in a manifolding* operation.

    (1)     Note.  The leaf may be a separated portion of an operated upon
    strip and the storage apparatus may comprise, for example, a leaf receiving
    chamber within a housing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    281,    Books, Strips, and Leaves, subclass 10 for a strip, per se, with
    apparatus for retaining a leaf.


CLS 462/37
TXT And feed means:

    Subject matter under subclass 36 including means for effecting longitudinal
    movement of a strip* in the course of manifolding*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 52+ for
    means to engage longitudinally spaced modifications in material and
    subclasses 120+ for advancing material by intermittent (interrupted)
    material-mover.


CLS 462/38
TXT Perforated strip* feed means:

    Subject matter under subclass 36 wherein a strip* has openings therein
    which cooperate with mechanical means to effect longitudinal movement of
    the strip in the course of manifolding*.


CLS 462/39
TXT Transfer strip* (e.g., carbon strip):

    Subject matter under subclass 26 including a strip* carrying a pigment-type
    material which under mechanical pressure is transferred to a receiving
    member during manifolding*.

    (1)     Note. The material typically coated on the strip is a pigment
    containing the element carbon, the strip being referred to as a "carbon
    strip".


CLS 462/40
TXT With feed means:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 including means for effecting longitudinal
    movement of a strip* in the course of manifolding*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 52+ for
    means to engage longitudinally spaced modifications in material and
    subclasses 120+ for advancing material by intermittent (interrupted)
    material-mover.


CLS 462/41
TXT And platen:

    Subject matter under subclass 40 including a hard planar surface over which
    the strip* passes.

    (1)     Note.  The platen provides a pressure receiving backing element for
    the strip used, for example, for manual writing thereon.


CLS 462/42
TXT Including perforated strip* feed means:

    Subject matter under subclass 41 wherein a strip* has openings therein
    which cooperate with mechanical means to effect longitudinal movement of a
    strip in the course of manifolding*.


CLS 462/43
TXT With platen:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 including a hard planar surface over which
    the strip* passes.

    (1)     Note. The platen provides a pressure receiving backing element for
    the strip used, for example, for manual writing thereon.


CLS 462/44
TXT And folded indicia receiving strip* material supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 43 wherein a strip* portion awaiting
    manifolding* is stored in the form of a bundle in which the strip is
    zig-zag creased and repeatedly doubled over upon itself.


CLS 462/45
TXT Including folded strip* manifolding* pack:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 comprising a supply of manifolding*
    material including superposed indicia receiving strips* and transfer means
    interposed between such strips which strips are zig-zag creased and
    repeatedly doubled over upon itself to form a compact bundle of such
    material.


CLS 462/46
TXT With feed means:

    Subject matter under subclass 26 including means for effecting longitudinal
    movement of the strip* in the course of manifolding*.

    (1)     Note.  Means related to the strip feeding movement such as guiding,
    aligning, tensioning and clamp means are included herein or in the
    subclasses indented hereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 52+ for
    means to engage longitudinally spaced modifications in material and
    subclasses 120+ for advancing material by intermittent (interrupted)
    material-mover.


CLS 462/47
TXT And platen:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 including a hard planar surface over which
    the strip* passes.

    (1)     Note. The platen provides a pressure receiving backing element for
    the strip used, for example, for manual writing thereon.


CLS 462/48
TXT Including friction feed means:

    Subject matter under subclass 47 including means to engage a strip* surface
    to impart its motion thereto without slippage in order to effect travel of
    the strip in the course of manifolding*.


CLS 462/49
TXT And perforated strip* guide or stop means:

    Subject matter under subclass 48 wherein the strip* has at least one
    opening therein which cooperates with means to align the strip or to arrest
    its feed motion.


CLS 462/50
TXT Including pin wheel feed means:

    Subject matter under subclass 47 wherein the strip* has openings therein
    which are engaged by circumferentially spaced radially projecting elements
    surrounding an axially driven circular support device in order to effect
    longitudinal movement of the strip in the course of manifolding*.


CLS 462/51
TXT Including strip* severing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 47 including means for separating an end
    portion of a continuous strip* of work material from the main strip.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, subclasses 6+ for severing by
    manually forcing against fixed edge and subclasses 93+ for breaking or
    tearing apparatus.


CLS 462/52
TXT And perforated strip* guide or stop means:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 wherein the strip* has at least one
    opening therein which cooperates with apparatus structured to align the
    strip for manifolding* or to arrest its feed motion.


CLS 462/53
TXT BANKING FORM - BOOK* TYPE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a document in book form
    utilized for manifolding* is imprinted with indicia such that it is
    commonly utilized in money related activities of a financial institution
    (e.g., bank check).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    283,    Printed Matter, subclasses 57+ for imprinted banking document.


CLS 462/54
TXT ACCOUNTING FORM - BOOK* TYPE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a document in book form
    utilized for manifolding is imprinted with indicia such that it is commonly
    utilized in various personal and commercial systems of monetary reckoning
    and computation (e.g., debit and credit transactions).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    283,    Printed Matter, subclasses 64.1 for accounting books, 66.1+ for
    accounting form or sheet.


CLS 462/55
TXT BOOK*:

    Subject matter under the class definition including at least a book*.

    (1)     Note.  A folded sheet is excluded from this definition.  See
    glossary for further explanation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for book and leaf combined.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    281,    Books, Strips, and Leaves, subclasses 15.1+ for books, per se, and
    accessories to books.


CLS 462/56
TXT Impressed*:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein at least one of the book* sheets*
    bear indicia thereon.

    (1)     Note. The indicia referred to is other than that produced in a
    manifolding* operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     for impressed leaf.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    283,    Printed Matter, subclasses 63.1+ for indicia bearing books.


CLS 462/57
TXT Multiple books*:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 including a plurality of books* utilized
    for manifolding* purposes.


CLS 462/58
TXT With book with sectional sheet folded in manifolding*:

    Subject matter under subclass 57 wherein the book* has at least one sheet*
    that has at least two distinct areas of utility and which sheet is creased
    along a line(s) during manifolding*.


CLS 462/59
TXT And book* sheet* forming element of another book:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein at least one sheet* of a first of
    a plurality of books* is utilized in a manifolding* operation involving
    said first book and also involving a second book.

    (1)     Note. The books sheets* may be arranged so that, for example, a
    transfer sheet (e.g., carbon sheet) from one of a plurality of books is
    utilized in a manifolding operation which involves indicia receiving sheets
    from a second book.


CLS 462/60
TXT With book* sheet* forming element of another book:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein at least one sheet* of a first of
    a plurality of books* is utilized in a manifolding* operation involving
    said first book and also involving a second book.

    (1)     Note.  The books sheets* may be arranged so that, for example, a
    transfer sheet (e.g., carbon sheet) from one of a plurality of books is
    utilized in a manifolding operation which involves indicia receiving sheets
    from a second book.


CLS 462/61
TXT With book* sheet* sectional and folded in manifolding*:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein the book* has at least one sheet*
    that has at least two distinct areas of utility and which sheet is creased
    along a line(s) during manifolding.


CLS 462/62
TXT And having configured (e.g., cutout, tab) sheet* separating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein at least one sheet* of a book* is
    shaped to assist the parting of a plurality of said book sheets.


CLS 462/63
TXT Having configured (e.g., cutout, tab) sheet* separating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein at least one sheet* of a book* is
    shaped to assist the parting of a plurality of said book sheets.


CLS 462/64
TXT ENVELOPE AND LEAF*:

    Subject matter under the class definition including at least one sheet*
    receiving pocket type device and a leaf*.

    (1)     Note.  Typically, the sheet* receiving pocket type device is a
    mailing envelope.


CLS 462/65
TXT One piece:

    Subject matter under subclass 64 wherein a single sheet* has a plurality of
    sections utilized to form at least a single envelope and a single leaf*.


CLS 462/66
TXT LEAF*:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a leaf*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    281,    Books, Strips, and Leaves, subclasses 38+ for leaves, per se,
    especially subclass 41 for single leaf.


CLS 462/67
TXT Impressed*:

    Subject matter under subclass 66 wherein a leaf* bears a indicia such as
    imprinting thereon.

    (1)     Note.  The indicia referred to is other than that produced in a
    manifolding* operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for impressed book structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    283,    Printed Matter, appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 55
    and 56 for indicia bearing documents relating to inventories and
    advertising.


CLS 462/68
TXT With sectional leaf* folded in manifolding*:

    Subject matter under subclass 67 wherein the leaf* has at least two
    distinct areas of utility and wherein the leaf is creased along a line(s)
    during manifolding*.


CLS 462/69
TXT Transfer leaf* (e.g., carbon paper):

    Subject matter under subclass 69 wherein the leaf* carries a pigment type
    material which under mechanical pressure is transferred to a receiving
    sheet in contact therewith during manifolding*.

    (1)     Note.  The material typically coated on the leaf is a pigment
    containing the element carbon, the leaf being referred to as "carbon paper"
    or a "carbon".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 146+, transfer or copy sheet making,
    especially subclass 153 carbon paper type.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclass 211 for structurally defined web including paper layer,
    subclass 204 for structurally defined web with intermediate layer
    containing particulate material (e.g., pigment, etc.) and subclasses 488.1
    and 488.4 for layered cellulosic paper with pigment or dye.

    503,    Record Receiver Having Plural Leaves or a Colorless Color Former,
    Method of Use, or Developer Therefor, appropriate subclasses, especially
    subclass 203 for a duplicating master.


CLS 462/70
TXT Marginal or indicia feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 69 wherein the transfer sheet includes (1) a
    distinctive border impression* or structure or (2) a distinctive impression
    on any portion of the transfer sheet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 192+ for a
    structurally defined edge feature of a web or sheet.


CLS 462/71
TXT HOLDER FOR BOOK* OR LEAF*:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a protective or support
    means for a book* or leaf*.

    (1)     Note.  The holder subclasses hereunder include cooperating or
    "external" apparatus for particular manifolding articles in book and leaf
    form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 45+ paper or textile sheet type.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 441.1+ for Easel; book, copy, or music score
    holder.

    281,    Books, Strips, and Leaves, subclasses 45+ for book or leaf holder.


CLS 462/72
TXT Book* or pad type:

    Subject matter under subclass 71 wherein the holder is supportive of a
    plurality of superposed leaves* or a book*(s) utilized in manifolding*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 42+ for book support type.

    281,    Books, Strips, and Leaves, subclasses 45+ for book or leaf holder.


CLS 462/73
TXT Writing machine (e.g., typewriter) type:

    Subject matter under subclass 71 wherein the holder is supportive of a
    plurality of superposed leaves* or a book*(s) utilized in manifolding* by
    means of a mechanized character impressing device.

    (1)     Note. The holder may be mounted upon the writing machine or hold
    the leaves or book(s) to facilitate use in connection with the writing
    machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 497+ for machine with control of
    "carbon paper" for typing plural simultaneous copies from a single
    impression (e.g., on "manifold set") and subclasses 521+ for typing on card
    in card holder.


CLS 462/74
TXT Transfer leaf* (e.g., carbon paper holder):

    Subject matter under subclass 73 including a writing machine leaf* holder
    especially suitable for holding one or more leaves having material thereon
    capable of being conveyed to another body by mechanical pressure causing
    the material to be pressed against and received on said body.

    (1)     Note. The material typically coated on the leaf is a pigment
    containing the element carbon, the leaf being referred to as "carbon paper"
    or a "carbon".


CLS 462/75
TXT Holder for plural distinct leaves* (e.g., multiple copy forms):

    Subject matter under subclass 71 wherein at least two leaves* suitable for
    manifolding* are supported in aligned and superposed relationship by the
    holder thereof.


CLS 462/76
TXT Having mechanical means for relative movement of leaf*holding means:

    Subject matter under subclass 75 including a mechanism for shifting one
    supported leaf* with respect to at least one other supported leaf.


CLS 462/77
TXT With indexing movement:

    Subject matter under subclass 76 wherein the relative movement is of
    predetermined increments.

    (1)     Note.  Such movement may provide, for example, for manifolding* of
    documents line-by-line.


CLS 462/78
TXT Having leaf* clamping means:

    Subject matter under subclass 75 including a gripping or pressing mechanism
    to statically hold one or more leaves* in position for manifolding*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 67.3+ for resiliently
    biased paper fastener.

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 237+ for pivoted jaw actuating means.


CLS 462/79
TXT With projection (e.g., pin) type leaf* locating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 78 including one or more members extending
    from a base, for example, and shaped to engage one or more leaf* openings
    and to thereby position the leaf thereon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    402,    Binder Device Releasably Engaging Aperture or Notch of Sheet,
    subclasses 60+ for sheet retainer with releasable keeper.


CLS 462/80
TXT With projection (e.g., pin) type leaf* locating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 75 including one or more members extending
    from a base, for example, and shaped to engage leaf* openings and to
    thereby position the leaf thereon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    402,    Binder Device Releasably Engaging Aperture or Notch of Sheet,
    subclasses 60+ for sheet retainer with releasable keeper.


CLS 462/81
TXT Multirow type:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein a plurality of projections are
    arranged along usually straight lines and there are a plurality of such
    lines.


CLS 462/82
TXT With distinctively shaped projection (e.g., pin shape):

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the configuration of at least one
    projection engaging a leaf* opening is significant in the relative
    positioning or alignment of the held leaves.


CLS 462/83
TXT Transfer leaf* (e.g., carbon) type:

    Subject matter under subclass 71 wherein the leaf* held is one which has
    material thereon capable of being conveyed to another body by mechanical
    pressure causing the material to be pressed against and received on said
    body.

    (1)     Note.  The material typically coated on the leaf is a pigment
    containing the element carbon, the leaf being referred to as "carbon paper"
    or a "carbon".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for a writing machine transfer leaf  holder.


CLS 462/84
TXT Miscellaneous:

    Subject matter under the class definition not provided for in the
    subclasses above.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 462/900
TXT ADHESIVE:

    Subject matter under the class definition disclosing a particular type or
    use of a substance causing adherence deemed especially useful with respect
    to manifolding*.


CLS 462/901
TXT PRESSURE SENSITIVE:

    Subject matter under cross-reference art collection 900 wherein the
    adhesive utilized is of the type that is joinable by means of exposing its
    tacky surface which may be pressed against a selected element to which it
    adheres.


CLS 462/902
TXT CAMOUFLAGE OR NONTRANSFER:

    Subject matter under the class definition disclosing manifolding* process
    or apparatus in which indicia is transferred to a receiving sheet* upon
    which it is purposefully obscured so as to be nonreadable or a portion of
    impressed indicia is purposefully not imposed upon a receiving sheet.


CLS 462/903
TXT SECURITY:

    Subject matter under the class definition disclosing a manifolding* process
    or apparatus in which provision is made to provide certain safeguards with
    respect to such matters as identifying individuals using such apparatus or
    the handling of certain information represented by indicia utilized with
    such apparatus.




CLS 463/
TTL AMUSEMENT DEVICES:  GAMES

CLS 463/
TXT This class--which is the residual class for the subject matter of  games,
    under which Class 473, Games Using Tangible Projectile, is specific; and
    which, together with Class 473, are specific under Class 472, Amusement
    Devices, the residual class for amusement devices--includes:

    (A)     Subject matter, relating to the type of amusement, recreation, or
    play activity commonly known as a game, wherein one or more players or
    participants engage in a competition or contest involving skill, ability,
    strategy, or chance--against either another player or players or against a
    device which is intended to function as a competitive player or players--in
    order to achieve an objective defined by a rule or rules specified for a
    particular competition or contest; whereby the ultimate outcome of said
    objective in such a competition or contest can be determined or indicated
    according to said specified rule or rules; the exception being that a game
    which includes or utilizes a tangible projectile--other than a propelled
    racing game or a chance device, classified herein--is classified elsewhere;

    (B)     A chance device, whether or not a projectile is included therein,
    and even if it is not a game or subcombination element of a game defined in
    (A), above, by reason of its similarity to chance devices normally combined
    with or defining such a game; and a method for using such a chance device
    for which there is no provision elsewhere;

    (C)     Subject matter relating to the type of amusement, recreation, or
    play activity commonly known as a puzzle, wherein a participant's mind is
    tested or otherwise challenged in an exercise of cleverness, ingenuity, or
    other mental skill or ability in an attempt to accomplish a solution to a
    complex or perplexing problem;

    (D)     Subject matter relating to the type of amusement, recreation, or
    play activity commonly known as fortune telling, wherein an attempt is made
    to predict the future of one or more persons or events;

    (E)     Subject matter relating to a type of device used by a person (often
    involved in law enforcement) to electrically shock or strike a human being
    so as to control said being, (e.g., a police club, night stick, black jack,
    brass knuckles, martial-art-type striking device, electric prod, etc.), or
    a method of using such a device; and

    (F)     Subject matter which is either ancillary to, appurtenant thereto,
    or a subcombination of the subject matter described in any one of (A)
    through (E) above, for which there is no provision elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  The line between this class and Class 473 is that this class
    does not accept a game which includes or utilizes a tangible projectile, a
    subcombination thereof  (e.g., bat, ball, etc.), or an accessory therefore
    (e.g., practice device, etc.), with the exception that a propelled racing
    game or a chance device is originally classified in this class despite a
    recitation of a projection or projectile, due to similarity of structure
    between games in which propelled objects are raced, and the similar
    function of various chance devices.

    (2)     Note.  Although a game that uses a tangible projectile is excluded
    from this class--except for a propelled racing game or a chance device, as
    set forth in (A), above--a game which simulates a tangible projectile game,
    without actually using or intending to use a tangible projectile (e.g., a
    video game with projectile image, light-ray gun, etc.), is classified
    herein.

    (3)     Note.  Included in this class is a game, chance device, or puzzle,
    etc., in which a player or participant competes against a means which
    simulates at least some of the mental processes of another player or
    participant as, for example, a computer or other gaming machine.  However,
    a general purpose computer in which software is provided so that it is
    useable to both play a game and to perform a function outside of this class
    (e.g., word processing, etc.) is classified elsewhere.  See the SEARCH
    CLASS notes, below.

    (4)     Note.  Although not generally used during play of a game included
    in this class, a method or device used by a player to practice or train for
    such a game is provided for in this class.  Since such a practice or
    training device is designed to enable a player to improve or perfect his or
    her physical skill or ability (e.g., motor skills, coordination, etc.) in
    playing the game for which it is designed, it is included in this class on
    the basis that it is ancillary or appurtenant to a game for which this
    class provides.

    (5)     Note.  This class does not provide for game scoring or indicating,
    per se (e.g., register, accumulator, totalizer, etc.), unless it combined
    with subject matter provided for in this class.  In such a case,
    classification is proper in the subclass providing for the subject matter
    in this class.   See the SEARCH CLASS notes, below.

    (6)     Note.  Class 273, Amusement Devices: Games, is currently being
    reclassified through a series of stages. Upon completion of this
    reclassification, Class 273 will be abolished and replaced by either Class
    463 or Class 473, Games Using Tangible Projectile.  Until such
    reclassification is completed, portions of Class 273 which are relevant to
    this class (463) are to be considered an integral part of this class.  That
    is, the portions of the Class 273 schedule of subclasses relating to a game
    which does not use a tangible projectile are to be considered as following
    in hierarchy after the last occurring subclass in the Class 463 schedule.
    Also, since Class 273 has not been completely screened for all patents
    properly classified in present subclasses of Class 463, appropriate
    subclass(es) in Class 273 should be considered for search purposes until
    such time that Class 273 is finally abolished.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 222 through 225 for a mechanical
    signal or indicator, per se, which is intended to form part of or to be
    used with a game device.

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, for a centrifugally or mechanically
    operated device, per se, for projecting or launching a tangible game
    projectile into the air.

    194,    Check-Actuated Control Mechanisms, for a game or chance device
    including a recited detail of a coin-controlled mechanism.

    200,    Electricity: Circuit Makers and Breakers, for an electrical switch,
    per se especially subclasses 61.1+ for a switch responsive to the action of
    a game or amusement piece, Digest 2 for a body attached switch, Digest 3
    for a coin operated switch, and Digest 23 for a game switch.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 315.1+ for a receptacle
    or package used for a sport implement, exercise device, or game.

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclass for an article dispenser,
    per se, such as might be used for or included as a subcombination of a
    chance device (e.g., lottery ticket dispenser, etc.).

    235,    Registers, for a register, per se, intended for use in a game,
    particularly subclass 1 for a miscellaneous game counter; subclass 61 for
    an odds computer; subclass 78 for a game calculator having concentric
    totalizing disks mounted upon a single axis; subclass 88 for a game
    calculator having tabular indicia placed upon disks which rotate about
    their centers; subclass 90 for a cribbage board; subclass 91 for a device
    for operating a register involving a billiard or pool game device; and
    subclasses 439+ for a coded record sensor structure (e.g., bar code reader,
    etc.).

    273,    Amusement Devices: Games, by reason of relevant portions of Class
    273 being an integral part of Class 463.  This class (463) is one of two
    classes which are intended to eventually replace Class 273, which is
    currently undergoing reclassification through a series of stages. See the
    (6) Note above for a further elaboration of the relationship between
    Classes 273 and 463, and the SEARCH CLASS notes below for the relationship
    between Classes 273 and 473.

    283,    Printed Matter, subclasses 72+ for printed matter having revealable
    concealed information, particularly subclass 94 for printed matter (e.g., a
    lottery ticket, etc.) with superposed layers; and cross-reference art
    collection 903 for a lottery ticket art collection.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 323+ for a game-reporting
    (e.g., scoreboard, indicator, etc.) electric signaling system, per se;
    subclass 825.19 for communication or control for the handicapped; and
    subclasses 825.3+ for intelligence comparison such as used for
    authorization, access, identification, credit, etc; and other appropriate
    subclasses for audible, visual, or tactile communication.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, appropriate subclass for a selectively
    controlled visual display system which may either form part of a game or
    not be limited to a game.  However if the term "game" or equivalent is
    recited in a claim, or if the only disclosure is a game provided for in
    Class 463, then classification is in Class 463, Amusement Devices:  Games,
    or its incorporated class (273, Amusement Devices: Games).

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 410+
    for a calculating computer or data processing system, per se, which may be
    adapted to be used with, in, or for a game or amusement device, which
    computer or data processing system must include significant recitation of
    the calculating computer or data processing system.  If the term "game" or
    the like appears in the claim or if the only disclosure is a game which is
    provided for in Class 463, then classification is in Class 463, Amusement
    Devices:  Games, and its incorporated class (273, Amusement Devices: Games).

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclass 3 for a time
    measuring means controlled by a game.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 31 for
    operator-actuated remote control of selective addressing of a storage
    medium in a novelty device (e.g., talking doll, etc.), subclasses 63+ for a
    sound reproduction means for a toy or novelty device, and other appropriate
    subclasses for memory structure and housings therefore.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 4 for a counter or register, per se, which
    is adapted to be controlled to accumulate a total involved in betting on
    various possibilities involved in an event or to determine the odds
    involved in the payoff of the various possibilities, and subclass 5 for a
    counter or register, per se, which is intended to be used with, in, or for
    a game or sport.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, particularly subclasses 17+
    and 71 for pavement or road structure which may be usable for a game
    surface.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, for stock material in the
    form of a single or plural layer web or sheet which may be used in the
    fabrication of products provided for in this class (463).

    434,    Education and Demonstration, particularly subclasses 16+ for
    teaching or demonstration of shooting, subclasses 29+ for a vehicle
    simulator for instruction or demonstration purposes, subclasses 128+ for
    teaching or demonstration of a game of the board or table type, subclasses
    247+ for a means specifically adapted to teach or instruct a person in some
    aspect of a game or sport which involves physical activity, and subclasses
    322+ for question or problem eliciting response. Class 463 and its
    incorporated class (273, Amusement Devices: Games), contain devices which
    are to be used for practice by, or for perfecting the physical skill of, a
    person who already knows how to play the game, sport, or the like.  Class
    434 contains devices which are to be used for instructing an
    unknowledgeable person in some aspect of the game, sport, or the like.  A
    device which is used for both instruction and for practice or perfection of
    game skills is originally placed into Class 434, and cross-referenced into
    the Class 463 group of game classes (i.e., Classes 463, 473, or 273).

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, for a device known as a toy whose
    principal purpose is for the amusement or recreation of a child.  If the
    device is used for the amusement or recreation of a child and is also a
    game component (i.e., used in a competition or contest), then it is placed
    into the Class 463 group of game classes (i.e., 463, 473, or 273).

    472,    Amusement Devices, subclasses 1+ for a roundabout, subclasses 85+
    for a racetrack, and subclasses 92+ for (a) the structure or composition of
    a playing surface, per se; (b) the structure or composition of a peripheral
    boundary marking or enclosure, per se, of such a playing surface; or (c)
    the combination of only a playing surface and a peripheral boundary marking
    or enclosure--where the above [i.e.,( a)-(c)] are limited to use for an
    athletic or exhibition event such as, for example, playing a game or sport
    thereon or therein.  Also, see the search notes appended thereto.

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, for a game in which a ball,
    missile, or other such tangible game projectile (other than a simulation or
    representation thereof) is used during play of a game or sport.  The
    relationship between Class 463 and Class 473 is that Class 463 is the
    residual class for a game, while Class 473 provides only for a specific
    type of game in which a ball, missile, or other such tangible projectile is
    used during play thereof.  (However, note those exceptions specified in the
    Class 463 definition and its appended notes.)  Accordingly, if a game which
    uses a ball, missile, or other such tangible game projectile (other than a
    simulation or representation thereof) during play of the game is recited,
    then classification is in Class 473; otherwise, classification is in Class
    463.  Furthermore, a game apparatus or means which uses a simulation or
    representation of a game or sport projectile (e.g., a light-ray simulation
    of a projectile or a video-game representation of a projectile, etc.) is
    classified in Class 463, since such simulation or representation of a
    projectile is not an actual or physical object which can be touched and
    handled (i.e., tangible) as required by Class 473.

    602,    Surgery:  Splint, Brace, or Bandage, subclasses 41+ for a bandaging
    device, even though specially adapted for use in supporting the body or
    body member of a person so as to function in a proper manner in playing a
    game.

    902,    Electronic Funds Transfer, subclass 23 for an art collection of
    means for electronic transfer of funds for an entertainment, amusement, or
    gambling application.

    D21,    Games, Toys, and Sports Goods, appropriate subclass for a game
    design.


CLS 463/1
TXT INCLUDING MEANS FOR PROCESSING ELECTRONIC DATA (e.g., computer/video game,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under the class definition including:

    (a)     means for systematically manipulating information in electronically
    coded form in accordance with a program or other set of rules;

    (b)     means including or utilizing electronic logic or calculation;

    (c)     electronically self-acting or self-regulating means for producing a
    desired response to a predetermined condition; or

    (d)     a subcombination thereof or accessory therefor that is unprovided
    for elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  Scoring, per se, is included herein only if combined with
    other game structure.  The combination of electronic scoring means with
    nonelectronic game structure is originally placed in this or indented
    subclasses according to the game played when there is no provision for the
    electronic details of the scoring means.  See the SEARCH CLASS notes below
    for scoring, per se, absent further game structure.

    (2)     Note.  A game that utilizes data processing via electromagnetically
    operated relays or the like for binary logical operations is considered to
    be electronic data processing for this and indented subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  A general purpose computer in which software is provided so
    that it is useable to play various types of games and usable to perform
    nongame functions such as word processing is classified elsewhere. See the
    SEARCH CLASS note, below.

    (4)     Note.  Processing of data in electronic form is to be distinguished
    from mere electrical control (e.g., on/off actuation, etc.), or an
    electrical source, supply, or energization.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 222 through 225 for a mechanical
    signal or indicator, per se, which is intended to form part of or to be
    used with a game device.

    200,    Electricity: Circuit Makers and Breakers, for an electrical switch,
    per se, especially subclasses 61.1+ for a switch responsive to the action
    of a game or amusement piece, Digest 2 for a body attached switch, Digest 3
    for a coin operated switch, and Digest 23 for a game switch.

    235,    Registers, for a register, per se, intended for use in a game,
    particularly subclass 1 for a miscellaneous game counter; subclass 61 for
    an odds computer; subclass 78 for a game calculator having concentric
    totalizing disks mounted upon a single axis; subclass 88 for a game
    calculator having tabular indicia placed upon disks which rotate about
    their centers; subclass 90 for a cribbage board; subclass 91 for a device
    for operating a register involving a billiard or pool game device; and
    subclasses 439+ for a coded record sensor structure (e.g., bar code reader,
    etc.).

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 203.5 for cathode ray tube (target)
    scanning; subclasses 206+ for a photocell controlled circuit; subclass
    227.13 for a light pen; and subclasses 222+ for an optical or prephotocell
    system controlled by an article, person, or animal.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, appropriate subclass for a selectively
    controlled visual display system which may either form part of a game or
    not be limited to a game.  However if the term "game" or equivalent is
    recited in a claim, or if the only disclosure is a game provided for in
    Class 463, then classification is in Class 463, Amusement Devices:  Games,
    or its incorporated class (273, Amusement Devices: Games).

    358,    Facsimile, appropriate subclass for television structure.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 4 for a counter or register, per se, which
    is adapted to be controlled to accumulate a total involved in betting on
    various possibilities involved in an event or to determine the odds
    involved in the payoff of the various possibilities, and subclass 5 for a
    counter or register, per se, which is intended to be used with, in, or for
    a game or sport.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, for subject matter that utilizes
    electronic data processing for instructional or demonstration purposes,
    particularly subclasses 16+ for teaching or demonstration of shooting,
    subclasses 29+ for a vehicle simulator for instruction or demonstration
    purposes, subclasses 128+ for teaching or demonstration of a game of the
    board or table type, subclasses 247+ for a means specifically adapted to
    teach or instruct a person in some aspect of a game or sport which involves
    physical activity; and subclasses 322+ for question or problem eliciting
    response.   Class 463 and its incorporated class (Class 273, Amusement
    Devices: Games), contain devices which are to be used for practice by, or
    for perfecting the physical skill of, a person who already knows how to
    play the game, sport, or the like.  Class 434 contains devices which are to
    be used for instructing an unknowledgeable person in some aspect of the
    game, sport, or the like.  A device which is used for both instruction and
    for practice or perfection of game skills is originally placed into Class
    434 and cross-referenced into the Class 463 group of game classes (i.e.,
    Classes 463, 473, or 273).


CLS 463/2
TXT In a game including a simulated projectile (e.g., bullet, missile, ball,
    puck, etc.):

    An application of electronic data processing under subclass 1 that includes
    representing or imitating the shooting, hitting, throwing, hurling, or
    redirecting of an intangible object (i.e., simulated projectile) toward an
    intended direction or place.

    (1)     Note.  Class 463 does not provide for a game--other than a
    propelled racing game or a chance device--that involves the actual
    projection of a tangible object. Therefore, any "projectile" under this
    definition can only be a phantom or simulation of a tangible projectile.
    Waves such as a mechanical wave (e.g., sonic, ultrasonic, etc.) or a
    nondestructive electromagnetic wave (e.g., a light, infrared, radio, etc.)
    are not considered to be a tangible projectile under this definition and
    are specifically provided for in this class. See the Class definition
    (463), the notes appended thereto, above, and the SEARCH CLASS note to
    Class 473, below.

    (2)     Note.  A simulated firearm utilized for the purpose of contest,
    entertainment, or practice in order to become a better marksman is
    appropriate for this class. However, a simulated firearm utilized for the
    purpose of education or demonstration in its use or operation to one who is
    uneducated in its use or operation is considered to be an education or
    demonstration device classified elsewhere. See the SEARCH CLASS notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49+,    for a simulated-projectile game that does not include electronic
    data processing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, appropriate subclass for a
    mechanical projector, per se, which projects a tangible projectile.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 203.5 for cathode ray tube (target)
    scanning; subclasses 206+ for a photocell controlled circuit; subclass
    227.13 for a light pen; and subclasses 222+ for an optical or prephotocell
    system controlled by an article, person, or animal.

    273,    Amusement Devices: Games, subclasses 108+ for a surface projectile
    game that utilizes a tangible projectile and subclasses 317+ for an aerial
    projectile game that utilizes a tangible projectile or a target therefor.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 11+ for a device utilized
    to teach or demonstrate how to operate or handle a firearm to one who is
    not educated in its use or operation.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, especially subclass 473 for a toy
    projector or one that simulates a projector or weapon.

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, for a game in which a ball,
    missile, or other such tangible game projectile (other than a simulation or
    representation thereof) is used during play of a game or sport.  The
    relationship between Class 463 and Class 473 is that Class 463 is the
    residual class for a game, while Class 473 provides only for a specific
    type of game in which a ball, missile, or other such tangible projectile is
    used during play thereof.  (However, note those exceptions specified in the
    Class 463 definition and its appended notes.)  Accordingly, if a game which
    uses a ball, missile, or other such tangible game projectile (other than a
    simulation or representation thereof) during play of the game is recited,
    then classification is in Class 473; otherwise, classification is in Class
    463.  Furthermore, a game apparatus or means which uses a simulation or
    representation of a game or sport projectile (e.g., a light-ray simulation
    of a projectile or a video-game representation of a projectile, etc.) is
    classified in Class 463, since such simulation or representation of a
    projectile is not an actual or physical object which can be touched and
    handled (i.e., tangible) as required by Class 473.


CLS 463/3
TXT Paddle-type game (e.g., pinball, tennis, baseball, golf, hockey, etc.):

    A simulated-projectile application under subclass 2 that includes the use
    of a bat, stick, club, racket, or other similarly used striking object or a
    representation (e.g., video, etc.) thereof to intercept, redirect, or
    otherwise project a simulated projectile.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, for a game in which an implement
    (e.g., a bat, racket, paddle, club, combined projector-catcher implement,
    etc.) or a mechanically operated device is used to project or launch a
    tangible game projectile, which game may use electronic data processing for
    such purposes as monitoring for competition, practice, etc., or, for
    example, to create a visual environment.


CLS 463/4
TXT Simulated court game or athletic event (e.g., soccer, basketball, etc.):

    A simulated-projectile application under subclass 2 that includes the use
    of a simulated projectile (e.g., ball, etc.) in a competitive-sports-type
    environment wherein (a) two or more opposing contestants or teams of
    contestants move about a defined playing area, field, or representation
    thereof while attempting to manipulate or control the simulated projectile
    in a defined task or (b) a contestant responds to or interacts with the
    projectile or opponent while the opponent is in control of the projectile.

    (1)     Note.  The opposing contestant or team does not have to involve or
    be otherwise controlled by a human participant. The electronic data
    processing, under program control, etc., may perform the action of an
    opponent so that only one human participant is required to play a contest.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for a simulated-projectile game with electronic data processing
    wherein a bowling-type contest is simulated.

    3,      for an athletic-type competition or court game involving electronic
    data processing that includes the use of a paddle-type projector (e.g.,
    bat, club, racket, etc.).

    6,      for a race game with electronic data processing.

    7+,     for an athletic-type competition or court game with electronic data
    processing that does not include a simulated projectile.

    58+,    for a propelled racing game.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, for a game of sport or athleticism that
    involves the use of a tangible projectile.

    473,    Amusement Devices:  Games, appropriate subclasses for a playing
    field or court game that utilizes a tangible projectile.


CLS 463/5
TXT Simulated projector with diverse interactive target:

    A simulated-projectile application under subclass 2 including a means for
    simulating a device for projecting a projectile (e.g., a gun, etc.) and a
    separate and distinct structure (e.g., CRT screen, etc.) arranged or
    intended to serve as a point-of-aim (i.e., target) for the simulated
    projector, and further including means for determining the coincidence
    between the aim of the projector and the intended target.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49+,    for a simulated-projectile game that does not include electronic
    data processing, especially subclasses 53+ for coincidence detection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 203.5 for cathode ray tube (target)
    scanning; subclasses 206+ for a photocell controlled circuit; subclass
    227.13 for a light pen; and subclasses 222+ for an optical or prephotocell
    system controlled by an article, person, or animal.

    358,    Facsimile, appropriate subclass for television structure.


CLS 463/6
TXT In a race game:

    An electronic data processing application under subclass 1 that includes a
    contest of speed commonly known as a race, wherein the contest requires the
    movement of an object, or representation (e.g., video, etc.) thereof,
    through a predetermined distance or defined course as fast as can be
    performed.

    (1)     Note.  It is not a requirement, for placement herein, that there be
    a plurality of simultaneously raced objects. Distinguish this from
    propelled racing, below. It is merely a requirement that the game involve
    the movement of an object over a given distance against time as a
    contestant.

    (2)     Note.  Racing against time or another moving object should be
    distinguished from a time limit for performing a move (e.g., a time limit
    for moving a chess piece). Only the former is classified herein. Similarly,
    the movement of an object over a distance versus time or another object
    should be distinguished from other tasks that do not require the movement
    of an object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7+,     for a game including electronic data processing that requires an
    element of physical skill or ability.

    15,     for a strategy or problem solving application that may include the
    task of moving an object through a maze.

    25+,    for race wagering.

    58+,    for a propelled racing game that does not include electronic data
    processing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, for railway rolling stock and track, each of which is
    modified for interrelation and cooperation with each other; for railway
    track other than normal surface track; and for railway fixtures and
    appliances for use with railway track in which some combination with a game
    feature (e.g., lap counter, clock, etc.) is absent, especially subclass 60
    for amusement-park-type racing and subclasses 295+ for a car-carried
    electric propulsion system with external car control (e.g., slot car, etc.).

    238,    Railways: Surface Track, subclasses 10+ for portable railway track
    structure.

    273,    Amusement Devices: Games, subclasses 236+ for a board game with a
    maze and subclasses 153+ for a puzzle that includes a maze.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, particularly subclasses 17+
    and 71 for pavement or road structure.

    446,    Amusement Devices: Toys, subclasses 444+ for a toy railway,
    subclasses 454+ for a remotely controlled rolling or tumbling toy, and
    subclasses 465+ for a toy wheeled vehicle.

    472,    Amusement Devices, subclasses 1+, for a roundabout, subclasses 85+
    for a racetrack, and subclasses 92+ for (a)  the structure or composition
    of a playing surface, per se; (b) the structure or composition of a
    peripheral boundary marking or enclosure, per se, of such a playing
    surface; or (c) the combination of only a playing surface and a peripheral
    boundary marking or enclosure--where the above [i.e.,( a)-(c)] are limited
    to use for an athletic or exhibition event such as, for example, playing a
    game or sport thereon or therein.  Also, see the search notes appended
    thereto.


CLS 463/7
TXT In a game requiring an element of a participant's physical skill or ability
    (e.g., hand-eye coordination, reflex, etc.):

    An electronic data processing application under subclass 1 that includes as
    an element of play, operation, or outcome thereof; a participant's speed,
    strength, dexterity, or other bodily capacity; or a simulation of a game or
    contest that requires such an element.

    (1)     Note.  Bodily capacity refers to the physical capacity of a
    participant, as opposed to a mental capacity (e.g, strategy or problem
    solving speed). While all voluntary motion involves a mental element, it is
    a contest-determinative, reflex-type action or other like physical
    manifestation of a mental process that is required for this subclass, which
    is to be distinguished from a mere physical motion used to, for example,
    push an appropriate button to indicate when a thought-provoking mental
    challenge has been completed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for a game including electronic data processing that requires
    physical skill or ability and also includes a simulated projectile,
    especially subclasses 3+ for an athletic-type game or amusement that
    includes a simulated projectile.

    6,      for a race game including electronic data processing that requires
    physical skill or ability to negotiate an object through a race course.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 440+ for a game that involves
    physical skill or ability.

    473,    Amusement Devices:  Games, for a tangible projectile game that
    involves physical skill or ability.

    482,    Exercise Devices, for an exercise devise that includes electronic
    data processing.


CLS 463/8
TXT Martial-art type (e.g., boxing, fencing, wrestling, etc.):

    A physical skill or ability application under subclass 7 including a fight-
    or war-type scenario or competition, especially that of hand-to-hand
    combat, with or without the use of a weapon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for a combat- or martial-art-type electronic game that includes a
    simulated-projectile-type weapon.

    47.1,   for a fencing game.

    47.2+,  for a striking type of weapon for use on a human being (e.g., a
    police club, billy, electric prod, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    482,    Exercise Devices, subclass 12 for a fencing foil.


CLS 463/9
TXT In a game requiring strategy or problem solving by a participant (e.g.,
    problem eliciting response, puzzle, etc.):

    An electronic data processing application under subclass 1 that requires
    from a participant a decision making process in the management or planning
    of a scheme, trick, or course of action, or the solution to a puzzle,
    question, or other perplexing situation.

    (1)     Note.  See the (1) Note in the subclass 7 definition for the line
    between a mental process of that subclass and this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for a game including electronic data processing and an element of
    mental strategy or problem solving ability that further includes a
    simulated projectile.

    6,      for a race game including electronic data processing that further
    includes an element of mental strategy or problem solving ability.

    7+,     for a game including electronic data processing and an element of
    mental strategy or problem solving ability that further requires an element
    of physical skill or ability.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 292+ for a card or tile game,
    subclasses 153+ for a puzzle, and subclasses 429+ for a
    problem-eliciting-response game.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 322+ for subject matter
    including a question or problem eliciting response for an instructional or
    demonstration purpose.


CLS 463/10
TXT With chance element or event (e.g., backgammon, ScrabbleR, etc.):

    A strategy or problem solving application under subclass 9 wherein play,
    operation, or the outcome thereof further depends from, or otherwise relies
    upon, the happening of an event absent of any apparent cause or design
    (i.e., an unpredictable or random event), or includes a means (i.e., lot)
    to randomly determine a matter or represent the outcome of a random event
    (e.g., dice, cards, random number generator, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16+,    for a game including electronic data processing wherein the outcome
    is solely determined by chance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    273,    Amusement Devices: Games, subclasses 236+ for a board game that
    includes a chance element, subclasses 138.1+ for a chance device, and
    subclasses 292+ for a card or tile game.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 4 for a counter or register, per se, which
    is adapted to be controlled to accumulate a total involved in betting on
    various possibilities involved in an event or to determine the odds
    involved in the payoff of the various possibilities; and subclass 5 for a
    counter or register, per se, which is intended to be used with, in, or for
    a game or sport.


CLS 463/11
TXT Card- or tile-type (e.g., bridge, dominoes, etc.):

    A strategy or problem solving application involving chance under subclass
    10 including an indicia-bearing device (e.g., card, domino, etc.), or a
    representation (e.g., video, etc.) thereof, wherein the indicia-bearing
    device is intended to be combined interactively with one or more additional
    indicia-bearing devices in a competitive contest based upon their indicia,
    and further wherein the chance happening involves a random distribution of
    one or more indicia-bearing devices to a participant or a random selection
    of one or more indicia-bearing devices by a participant.

    (1)     Note.  To be a proper card- or tile- type game for classification
    in this and indented subclasses, there must be some element of strategy or
    problem solving involved in the contest--as opposed to mere chance--which
    strategy, however, may be based upon chance odds of receiving a necessary
    card or tile to move toward a better position to win, such as how many
    cards to draw in poker, whether to ask for an additional card in blackjack,
    wagering strength of position, etc.  In contrast, a card-type game (e.g.,
    the card game "war," etc.); a slot machine with card-type indicia, etc.,
    involving mere chance; or a subcombination chance device (random card
    generator/distributor, etc.) is properly classified in chance application.
    See search notes, below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16+,    for a game of chance or a chance element with electronic data
    processing that includes a chance element with card- or tile-type indicia
    wherein the outcome is solely determined by chance, especially subclasses
    17+ where the outcome is determined by a comparison or match.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    273,    Amusement Devices: Games, subclasses 292+ for a card or tile game
    that does not include electronic data processing.


CLS 463/12
TXT Ultimate outcome dependent upon summation of plural card or tile values
    (e.g., blackjack, etc.):

    A card or tile game under subclass 11 wherein each card or tile has
    assigned thereto a relative worth (i.e., value) represented by said
    indicia, and further wherein a contest winner is determined by a
    participant who is both in active competition at a time for determining a
    winner and has either obtained, or has been assigned, a group of more than
    one card or tile that, at said time, has the greatest total amount of added
    individual values.


CLS 463/13
TXT Ultimate outcome dependent upon relative odds of a card or tile combination
    (e.g., poker, etc.):

    A card or tile game under subclass 11 wherein each card or tile has
    assigned thereto a particular feature or features (e.g., number, suit,
    etc.) represented by said indicia, and further wherein a contest winner is
    determined by a participant who is both in active competition at a time for
    determining a winner and has either obtained or been assigned a set of more
    than one card or tile that, at said time, has the lowest chance or
    probability of association (e.g., pair, three-of-a-kind, etc.) of
    predetermined individual features.


CLS 463/14
TXT Chess- or checker-type:

    A strategy or problem solving application under subclass 9 including a
    contest in which opposing participants alternately control the movement of
    one of a group of contest elements (e.g., checker, chessman, etc.)
    initially equal in number for each player, about a game area composed of an
    array or matrix of segments (e.g., squares) or positions wherein each
    segment can be occupied by only one contest element at a time, the contest
    proceeding until one participant captures all of the contest elements, or a
    principle contest element, of the other, without losing all or the
    principle contest element of his group; or otherwise places the other
    participant in a position where he cannot reposition one of his contest
    elements to another game segment.

    (1)     Note.  The contest does not require more than one human
    participant. The electronic data processing, under program control, etc.,
    may perform the action of an opponent so that only one human participant is
    required to play a contest.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    273,    Amusement Devices: Games, subclass      es 236+ for a board game,
    especially subclasses 260+ for a chess- or checker-type board game.


CLS 463/15
TXT Geometric maze (e.g., labyrinth, etc.):

    A strategy or problem solving application under subclass 9 that includes,
    as a contest goal, negotiation through a network of complex alternative
    pathways or courses, having or representing two or more dimensions, under a
    set of rules for said negotiation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for a race that includes a course in the form of a labyrinth or
    maze.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    273,    Amusement Devices: Games, subclasses 236+ for a board game with a
    maze and subclasses 153+ for a puzzle that includes a maze.


CLS 463/16
TXT In a game of chance (e.g., lot, etc.):

    An electronic data processing application under subclass 1 having an
    outcome that relies solely upon a happening (i.e., event) absent of any
    apparent cause or design (i.e., an unpredictable or random event), or
    includes an object (i.e., lot) used to so randomly determine a matter or
    represent the outcome of a random event (e.g., electronic dice or random
    number generator, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for a strategy or problem solving game with electronic data
    processing that further includes a chance element or event.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, for an article dispenser not otherwise provided
    for.  An article dispenser, per se, of the type often included as a
    subcombination of a chance device is classified in Class 221.

    273,    Amusement Devices: Games, subclasses 236+ for a board game that
    includes a chance element, subclasses 138.1+ for a chance device, and
    subclasses 292+ for a card or tile game.

    283,    Printed Matter, subclasses 72+ for printed matter having revealable
    concealed information, particularly subclass 94 for printed matter (e.g., a
    lottery ticket, etc.) with superposed layers, and subclass 903 for a
    lottery ticket art collection.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 4 for a counter or register, per se, which
    is adapted to be controlled to accumulate a total involved in betting on
    various possibilities involved in an event or to determine the odds
    involved in the payoff of the various possibilities and subclass 5 for a
    counter or register, per se, which is intended to be used with, in, or for
    a game or sport.


CLS 463/17
TXT Lot match or lot combination (e.g., roulette, lottery, etc.):

    A chance event application under subclass 16 wherein a particular
    characteristic of a lot is compared to a characteristic of either another
    lot or some other predetermined object, indicia or event, and further
    wherein the chance event relied upon is a determination of a substantial
    likeness in character (i.e., match) made by the comparison according to a
    predetermined rule or rules, or a determination that an ordered set or
    association is created when more than one lot is compared.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    273,    Amusement Devices: Games, subclasses 142+ for a roulette game or
    slot machine that does not include electronic data processing.

    283,    Printed Matter, subclasses 72+ for printed matter having revealable
    concealed information, particularly subclass 94 for printed matter (e.g., a
    lottery ticket, etc.) with superposed layers, and subclass 903 for a
    lottery ticket art collection.


CLS 463/18
TXT Plural lots (e.g., keno, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 17 wherein more than one lot is compared.


CLS 463/19
TXT Plural matches create pattern (e.g., bingo, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 18 wherein each of the plural lots is
    compared with a subset of a design, picture, array--or an arrangement of
    form, color, indicia or other predetermined characteristic--for a possible
    match; and further wherein the outcome of the game or amusement is
    determined by the attainment of a combination of more than one lot/subset
    match such that the combination establishes a particular arrangement of
    form, color, or other chosen characteristic according to a predetermined
    rule or rules.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    273,    Amusement Devices: Games, subclasses 269+ for a lotto- or bingo-
    type board game that does not include electronic data processing.


CLS 463/20
TXT Lot-to-lot combination (e.g., slot machine, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 18 wherein the chance event relied upon is a
    determination of a match between a lot and one or more additional lots, or
    any other ordered set or association of lots (e.g., numerical order, royal
    flush, etc.) according to a predetermined set of rules.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    273,    Amusement Devices: Games, subclasses 143+ for a slot machine that
    does not include electronic data processing.


CLS 463/21
TXT Having means to alter combination probability:

    Lot-to-lot combination under subclass 20 further including means for
    adjusting the likelihood of either a match between lots or a particular
    combination of plural lots.


CLS 463/22
TXT Lot generator (e.g., card distribution, simulated dice, random number
    generator, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 16 including means for creating or
    representing a random object or event.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    273,    Amusement Devices: Games, subclasses 144+ for a lot mixer or
    dispenser and subclass 146 for dice that do not include electronic data
    processing or automatic control.


CLS 463/23
TXT Skill level adjustment (e.g., speed change, complexity, etc.):

    Electronic data processing under subclass 1 including means for altering
    the degree of difficulty for a participant in performing or obtaining a
    goal in a game or contest.

    (1)     Note.  The alteration of the degree of difficulty may be either
    manually selected by a participant or program-controlled such as, for
    example, when a player establishes a predetermined goal.

    (2)     Note.  The alteration may take any form necessary depending upon
    the goal to be accomplished, such as changing the speed of presentation of
    data presented to a participant, changing the quantity of data presented to
    a participant at a given time, limiting the time for a response to a given
    task, etc.


CLS 463/24
TXT Suspension or restoration (e.g., power failure resumption, etc.):

    Electronic data processing under subclass 1 including means for (a) saving
    or preserving the status quo of a game upon its stoppage (e.g., stoppage
    due to power failure, stoppage by choice for resumption at a later time,
    etc.) for the purpose of resuming the game at a later time or (b)
    restarting a game with either the same status existing upon stoppage or
    another selectable status.


CLS 463/25
TXT Credit/debit monitoring or manipulation (e.g., game entry, betting, prize
    level, etc.):

    Electronic data processing under subclass 1 including means for providing a
    monetary-type accounting for the purpose of:

    (a)     payment to start or continue a game;

    (b)     wagering; or

    (c)     determining an award or payout amount.

    (1)     Note.  To be proper for placement in this subclass, the accounting
    must be in combination with a game element since such accounting, per se,
    is provided for outside of this class. See search notes, below.

    (2)     Note.  While the accounting may superficially resemble a scoring
    function, and may, in fact, be performed in the same manner, it is the
    monetary-type prize or award aspect of the accounting that is required for
    placement in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    194,    Check-Actuated Control Mechanisms, appropriate subclass for a game
    including a recited detail of a coin- or check-actuated control system.

    235,    Registers, appropriate subclass for a cash register.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.3+ for intelligence
    comparison such as used for authorization control by credit, etc.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 411 for
    a computer, per se, for a game scoring application and subclass 412 for a
    computer, per se, for a wagering application.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 4 for a counter or register, per se, which
    is adapted to be controlled to accumulate a total involved in betting on
    various possibilities involved in an event, or to determine the odds
    involved in the payoff of the various possibilities, and subclass 5 for a
    counter or register, per se, which is intended to be used with, in, or for
    a game or sport.

    902,    Electronic Funds Transfer, subclass 23 for an art collection of
    means for electronic transfer of funds for an entertainment, amusement, or
    gambling application.


CLS 463/26
TXT Pool amount (e.g., jackpot, etc.):

    Credit/debit monitoring or manipulation under subclass 25 including a means
    to account for the value of a sum (i.e., pool) of money or money equivalent
    wagered by or collected from one or more participants or gaming machines
    for the purpose of subsequent distribution of an amount of said pool as an
    award or prize to a participant that has reached or accomplished a defined
    goal in a contest; or means for determining or causing the distribution of
    said amount from said pool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for a jackpot or accumulated award that is retained and carried
    over to a subsequent game unless or until a defined goal is attained.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 412 for
    a computer, per se, for a wagering application.


CLS 463/27
TXT Pool carryover (e.g., progressive jackpot, etc.):

    Pool accounting under subclass 25 wherein the accounting means further
    includes means for retaining an amount of the pool unless or until a
    defined goal is attained in a game, the retained amount being successively
    added to the award amount for that goal in a subsequent game or games until
    said goal is attained.


CLS 463/28
TXT Parimutuel pool:

    Pool accounting under subclass 25 wherein the accounting means includes
    means for determining an award amount to each winner by dividing, in
    proportion to each winner's wager, the entire amount of the pool used for
    payout purposes (e.g., the amount of the pool remaining after
    administrative costs, taxes, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclass 61 for an odds computer.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 412 for
    a computer, per se, for a wagering application.


CLS 463/29
TXT Access or authorization (e.g., game selection, security, etc.):

    Electronic data processing under subclass 1 including:

    (a)     means for determining whether a participant has a right or
    privilege to input into, acquire, or use the electronic data;

    (b)     means to allow or prevent such input, acquisition, or use of said
    data based upon a right or privilege; or

    (c)     means for controlling acquisition, selection, or use of a
    particular subset of data (e.g., particular game, etc.) in a set of data
    (e.g., plural games, etc).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for access or authorization determined or controlled by available
    credit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.3+ for authorization or
    authentication (e.g., identity, etc.) control by intelligence comparison.


CLS 463/30
TXT Perceptible output or display (e.g., tactile, etc.):

    Electronic data processing under subclass 1 including a recited detail of a
    structural or procedural means for presenting information to a participant
    in a manner that can be recognized in the mind of the participant through
    one of the participant's senses.

    (1)     Note.  To be properly classified in this subclass, there must be
    more than mere nominal recitation of an output or display.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass provides for hardware for actually presenting
    sensory perceivable information, and for software or other data creation,
    manipulation, or other methodology for the specific purpose of presenting
    perceivable information to a participant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 203.5 for cathode-ray tube (target)
    scanning; subclasses 206+ for a photocell controlled circuit; subclass
    227.13 for a light pen; and subclasses 222+ for an optical or prephotocell
    system controlled by an article, person, or animal.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 323+ for a game-reporting
    (e.g., scoreboard, indicator, etc.) electric signaling system, per se;
    subclass 825.19 for communication or control for the handicapped;
    subclasses 825.3+ for intelligence comparison such as used for
    authorization, access, identification, credit, etc.; and other appropriate
    subclasses for audible, visual, or tactile communication.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, appropriate subclass for pectoral display
    system structure.

    348,    Television, appropriate subclass, for a television communication
    system.


CLS 463/31
TXT Visual (e.g., enhanced graphics, etc.):

    A perceptible output or display under subclass 30 wherein the means for
    providing information to a participant includes a structural detail of
    means for presenting the information in a manner that is perceivable via a
    retina of said participant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, cross-reference art collections 917+ for a video display
    screen support.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, appropriate subclasses for a selectrively
    controlled visual display system or image data presentation which may
    either form part of a game or not be limited to a game.  However if the
    term "game" or equivalent is recited in a claim, or if the only disclosure
    is a game provided for in Class 463, then classification is in Class 463,
    Amusement Devices:  Games, or its incorporated class (273, Amusement
    Devices: Games).

    348,    Television, appropriate subclass for a television communication
    system.


    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, appropriate
    subclass for optical communication structure, especially subclasses 1+ for
    a holographic system.


CLS 463/32
TXT Three-dimensional characterization:

    A visual output or display under subclass 31 wherein the information is
    presented to the eye(s) in such a manner that the information is visually
    perceivable as an image having height, width, and depth.

    (1)     Note.  It is not a requirement that the image actually include all
    three dimensions so long as the image, taken as a whole, has a general
    character that is perceivable as such.  For example, depth perception may
    be simulated or perceived from a flat image by utilizing the technique of
    perspective or the technique of covering the image of a first object by an
    image of a second object that is intended to be perceived in front of the
    first object, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 139 and 419+ for
    three-dimensional image presentation processing.


CLS 463/33
TXT Object priority or perspective:

    A visual output or display with a three-dimensional characterization under
    subclass 32 wherein one dimension (e.g., depth, etc.) may be simulated or
    characterized by either the technique of covering the image of a first
    object by an image of a second object intended to be perceived in front of
    the first object, or via the technique of picturing an object by converging
    lines or shrinking size versus, for example, apparent depth.


CLS 463/34
TXT Image projection:

    A visual output or display under subclass 31 wherein visually perceivable
    information (i.e., an image) is optically transmitted over a distance onto
    a surface or screen to be viewed therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  The purpose of the projection is usually to enlarge or
    reduce the size of the image or to provide a more convenient location of
    the image for viewing.

    (2)     Note.  A cathode-ray tube (CRT), per se, is not considered to be an
    image projector for this subclass because raster scanning of an electron
    beam on a phosphorescent screen is considered to be image formation rather
    than image projection. In contrast, a CRT in combination with a lens or
    other optical projection structure to project a CRT image is proper for
    this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    353,    Optics: Image Projectors, appropriate subclass for optical image
    projector structure.

    359,    Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, appropriate
    subclass for an optical communication structure, especially subclasses 1+
    for a holographic system.


CLS 463/35
TXT Audible:

    A perceptible output or display under subclass 30 wherein the means for
    providing information to a participant includes means for presenting the
    information in a manner that is perceivable via an ear of said participant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 63+ for a
    sound reproduction means for a toy or novelty device.

    446,    Amusements Devices:  Toys, subclasses 397+ for a sounding toy.


CLS 463/36
TXT Player-actuated control structure (e.g., brain-wave or body signal,
    bar-code wand, foot pedal, etc.):

    Electronic data processing under subclass 1 including means for generating,
    emitting, or otherwise deriving an information signal from a participant to
    provide data for introduction to the electronic data processing means.

    (1)     Note.  The information signal from the participant may either be
    actively created by the participant through a conscious effort, or
    passively or subconsciously derived from, for example, a brain-wave signal,
    a pulse-rate signal, etc.

    (2)     Note.  The information signal from the participant is commonly
    regarded as an input signal to the electronic data processor for the
    purpose of player interaction therewith.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 300+ for subject matter for detecting a body
    signal for diagnostic use, especially subclasses 544+ for detecting a brain
    signal; subclass 546 for detecting a muscle signal; and subclasses 587+ for
    measuring an anatomical characteristic or body movement.

    200,    Electricity: Circuit Makers and Breakers, for an electrical switch,
    per se, especially subclasses 61.1+ for a switch responsive to the action
    of a game or amusement piece, Digest 2 for a body attached switch, Digest 3
    for a coin operated switch, and Digest 23 for a game switch.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 203.5 for cathode-ray tube (target)
    scanning; subclasses 206+ for a photocell controlled circuit; subclass
    227.13 for a light pen; and subclasses 222+ for an optical or prephotocell
    system controlled by an article, person, or animal.

    235,    Registers,  subclasses 439+ for a coded record sensor structure
    (e.g., bar code reader, etc.).

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825+ for a selective
    control system (e.g., subclass 825.19 for communication or control for the
    handicapped, etc.).

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 20+ for a bodily
    actuated code generator (e.g., joystick, keyboard, etc.) of general utility.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 156+ for a display peripheral
    input device.


CLS 463/37
TXT Hand manipulated (e.g., keyboard, mouse, touch panel, etc.):

    Player-actuated control structure under subclass 36 wherein the means for
    deriving an information signal includes structure intended and arranged to
    interact with that part of a participant's arm beyond the wrist (i.e., the
    hand, including the palm, fingers, and thumb, etc.) so as to derive an
    information signal in response to motion of any part of the hand.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass definition requires that the information
    signal be derived from hand motion. Thus, a signal derived from the hand
    that is not responsive to hand motion such as, for example, hand
    temperature or a myoelectric (muscle electric) signal, is not proper for
    this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for structure for deriving an information signal from a hand other
    than by motion of the hand.

    41,     for a telephonic communication link where the particulars of the
    keypad are not recited.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 20+ for a bodily
    actuated code generator (e.g., joystick, keyboard, etc.) of general utility.


CLS 463/38
TXT Pivotally-translatable handle (e.g., joystick):

    Hand-manipulated control structure under subclass 37 including structure
    intended and arranged to be grasped by the hand (i.e., handle) and manually
    manipulated for rotation about a turning point or axis wherein the
    information signal is derived in response to the angular position of the
    handle with respect to a turning point or shaft.

    (1)     Note.  The control structure of this subclass is commonly referred
    to as a "joystick," and quite commonly also includes additional signal
    generators such as button-type switches arranged on the handle to be
    activated by the fingers when the handle is grasped by the hand.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 20+ for a bodily
    actuated code generator (e.g., joystick, keyboard, etc.) of general utility.


CLS 463/39
TXT Wireless signal:

    Player activated control structure under subclass 36 wherein the
    information signal from the participant is presented to the electronic data
    processing means via a transmission path that includes a means other than a
    means (e.g., metallic wire, electrolyte, etc.) for conducting electrons.

    (1)     Note.  Such transmission is commonly effected via an
    electromagnetic wave such as a radio wave, infrared wave, etc., but is not
    limited thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40+,    for a communication link combined with a game including electronic
    data processing  a communication purpose other than presenting a
    player-controlled signal to an electronic data processing means.


CLS 463/40
TXT With communication link (e.g., television broadcast, etc.):

    Electronic data processing under subclass 1 further including a recited
    detail of a structure or protocol for transmitting or receiving electronic
    data to or from a diverse operational location.

    (1)     Note.  A remote location is loosely interpreted to be any location
    outside of and distinct from the immediate operational environment of the
    electronic data processing structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36+,    for a communication link combined with a player control structure,
    especially subclass 39 for a player control structure having a wireless
    link to an electronic data processing means.

    43+,    for a data storage means which may include a communication link
    therein to transmit data between the inside of the storage means and its
    exterior, especially subclass 44 for a communication link in a data storage
    cartridge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    455,    Telecommunications, appropriate subclass for subject matter for
    transmitting modulated carrier wave communication between points.


CLS 463/41
TXT Telephonic (e.g., modem, etc.):

    An electronic data processing means with a communication link under
    subclass 40 wherein the communication link includes means commonly referred
    to as a telephone capable of simultaneously transmitting speech data in
    both directions over the link.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for a hand-manipulated input device wherein a particular detail of
    a telephone keypad is recited.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    379,    Telephonic Communications, appropriate subclass for a telephonic
    communication structure, especially subclasses 90.01+ for a telephone line
    or system combined with a diverse electrical system or signalling..


CLS 463/42
TXT Network type (e.g., computer network, etc.):

    A communication link under subclass 40 including a recited detail of means
    intended and arranged to interconnect, for the purpose of communication of
    electronic data, more than one diverse means, complete in itself, for
    processing electronic data independently.


CLS 463/43
TXT Data storage or retrieval (e.g., memory, video tape, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including a structure or process for saving
    electronic data in a form that can be accessed for later use, a structure
    or process for acquiring said data from storage, or a subcombination or
    accessory therefore that is unprovided for elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, appropriate
    subclass for electronic data storage or retrieval that utilizes a magnetic
    recording medium, especially subclasses 131+ for the recording medium, per
    se.

    365,    Static Information Storage or Retrieval, appropriate subclass,
    especially subclasses 94+ for a read only memory.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, appropriate subclass for
    electronic data storage or retrieval, especially subclasses 63+ for a sound
    reproduction device for a toy or novelty device and subclasses 272+ for
    storage medium structure.


CLS 463/44
TXT Cartridge:

    Data storage or retrieval under subclass 43 wherein the means for storing
    data is self-contained in a housing arranged to be physically separable
    from the electronic data processing means, and further includes means for
    transmitting data in electronic form between the storage means within the
    housing and the exterior of the housing where it can be accessed by the
    electronic data processing means via a physically separable connector or
    data link.


CLS 463/45
TXT Cartridge adaptor:

    Subject matter under subclass 43 including structure arranged to be
    attached to a self-contained electronic data storage housing (i.e.,
    cartridge) to either:

    (a)     structurally alter the cartridge in a manner that would allow it to
    be functionally engaged with a processing structure other than that for
    which the cartridge is intended to be used; or

    (b)     add to or otherwise alter an intended function of a cartridge.


CLS 463/46
TXT Housing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including detailed structure for containing
    or enclosing an electronic data processing element under the class
    definition.

    (1)     Note.  Nominal recitation of housing structure is not sufficient
    for placement in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for a cartridge for game memory storage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 315.1+ for a receptacle
    or package used for a sport implement, exercise device, or game.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 917+ for a video display screen support.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 223.1 for a cabinet
    structure for a particular electrical device or component; and

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 600+ for a
    housing for diverse electrical components, especially subclasses 679+ for a
    housing for an electronic system.


CLS 463/47
TXT Accessory:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising a device particularly adapted to
    be used with an electronic-data-processing game or amusement under the
    class definition, wherein said device constitutes an attachment or addition
    to the game or amusement that aids in a secondary or subordinate way, and
    is unprovided for elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 315.1+ for a receptacle
    or package used for a sport implement, exercise device, or game.

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 148+ for an accessory for a
    game other than a game that includes electronic data processing.


CLS 463/47.1
TXT FENCING:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising apparatus for (a)
    determining the accuracy of a user in thrusting a long, pointed or
    blade-type fighting weapon or (b) covering the tip or edge of a long,
    pointed or blade-type fighting weapon to render it harmless during practice
    or in the use thereof, which tip-covering apparatus comprises or includes
    at least one component of a contact indicating or detecting mechanism; and
    wherein the apparatus is used to practice or simulate combat between
    opponents bearing swordlike fighting implements (e.g., fencing foils,
    sabres, swords, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 2+ for protective clothing to be worn by a
    person as, for example, a protective vest, mask, boxing glove, etc.

    482,    Exercise Devices, subclass 12 for an exercise device designed for
    exercising the user's muscles in the use of thrusting a long, pointed or
    blade-type weapon (e.g., a fencing foil, etc.) or a simulation thereof.


CLS 463/47.2
TXT STRIKING WEAPON:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a user held or carried
    blunt implement for impacting, hitting, or prodding a human opponent during
    a game, sport, fight, struggle, or attack or to deter a fight, struggle, or
    attack.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 2+ for protective clothing to be worn by a
    person as, for example, a protective vest, mask, boxing glove, etc.

    231,    Whips and Whip Apparatus, subclasses 2.1+ for a device consisting
    of a handle and a goad for controlling a nonhuman animal, particularly
    subclass 7 for a goad which imparts an electric shock to a nonhuman animal,
    and see the Search Class notes appended to subclass 7.


CLS 463/47.3
TXT Having electric shock feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 47.2 wherein the implement comprises means
    for imparting a nonlethal electric shock to the opponent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    231,    Whips and Whip Apparatus, subclasses 2.1+ for a device consisting
    of a handle and a goad for controlling a nonhuman animal, particularly
    subclass 7 for a goad which imparts an electric shock to a nonhuman animal,
    and see the Search Class notes appended to subclass 7.


CLS 463/47.4
TXT Combined with antigrasping device or diverse art device (e.g., with light,
    knife, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 47.2 wherein the implement is combined with
    either (a) a device from an art different therefrom (e.g., a light, knife,
    keychain, etc.), or (b) a means to deter an opponent from grasping the
    implement or a means to make the opponent release his or her grip upon the
    implement.


CLS 463/47.5
TXT Having similar striking members flexibly tethered together:

    Subject matter under subclass 47.2 in which the striking weapon comprises
    two or more substantially alike blunt implements connected together by a
    flexible element and wherein each of the implements have a configuration
    such that any one of them can be held or carried by the user whereby, when
    the user holds or carries only one of the implements, any other of the
    implements are free to move relative to the held or carried implement so as
    to impart the impacting or hitting force upon the human opponent whenever
    the held or carried implement is moved by the user.


CLS 463/47.6
TXT Cross-handle type:

    Subject matter under subclass 47.2 wherein the implement comprises an
    elongate (i.e., rodlike) impact imparting portion and a handgrip portion
    connected thereto and extending generally perpendicularly away therefrom.


CLS 463/47.7
TXT Telescopic:

    Subject matter under subclass 47.2 wherein the implement comprises at least
    two longitudinally aligned portions which are mounted for longitudinal
    sliding movement relative to each other so that the overall length of the
    implement may be adjusted.


CLS 463/48
TXT COMBINED WITH OR CONVERTIBLE TO EXTERNAL ART DEVICE OR FUNCTION:

    A game under the class definition including either:

    (a)     subject matter in addition to game subject matter wherein the
    additional subject matter has utility both outside of the class definition
    and independent of the game subject matter, and where neither the utility
    of the game subject matter nor the utility of the additional subject matter
    is destroyed by removal or separation of the additional subject matter from
    the game subject matter; or

    (b)     a game under the class definition which may be altered to subject
    matter having utility other than a game under the class definition.

    (1)     Note.  The utility of the additional subject matter must be both
    diverse and independent from game subject matter.  Thus, game scoring or
    reporting, which, per se, is classifiable outside of this class, is not
    considered to be independent from game subject matter and is therefore not
    properly placed in this subclass.  Such subject matter, when combined with
    a game, is properly classified with the particular game.  Likewise, a game
    table combined with a game board for supporting said board is considered
    not to be independent of the game because it properly positions the board
    for play, and it is therefore properly classified with the  game board,
    even though the table is inherently capable of having another utility.
    However, if such a table has positively recited means for altering the
    table to a function independent from game utility or support (e.g., a table
    with a work support), then classification is proper herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, for a device or apparatus for play
    of, or practice for, a game or sport which uses a tangible game projectile,
    which game or sport device or apparatus may be combined with or convertible
    to a device or function other than a game or sport device or apparatus.


CLS 463/49
TXT SIMULATED-PROJECTILE GAME, TARGET THEREFOR, OR ACCESSORY:

    Apparatus under the class definition including either:

    (a)     a user-manipulated means for representing or imitating a device
    (i.e., simulated projector) for shooting or hurling (i.e., projecting) an
    object (i.e., projectile) intended to be projected from the simulated
    projector, combined with means for representing or imitating the path of
    motion that an intended projectile would traverse from the simulated
    projector to a point-of-aim (i.e., target);

    (b)     a device particularly adapted for use as a point-of-aim (i.e.,
    target) for a simulated projector; or

    (c)     a device (i.e., accessory) particularly adapted to be used with a
    simulated projector of (a), or a target of (b), respectively above, that is
    an attachment or addition to same that helps either in a secondary or
    subordinate way and is unprovided for elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  This class does not provide for a game involving the actual
    projection of a tangible object. Therefore, any projectile utilized with a
    projector of this definition can only be a phantom of a tangible
    projectile. As such, a nondestructive electromagnetic (e.g., a light,
    infrared, radio, etc.) or mechanical (e.g., sonic, ultrasonic, etc.) wave
    is not considered to be a tangible projectile for the purpose of this
    definition since this definition is intended to encompass the use of such
    waves to simulate a projectile or its path.

    (2)     Note.  A game under this definition generally includes means for
    determining the correctness-of-aim (i.e., coincidence) of a simulated
    projector towards an intended target and means for indicating same as a hit
    or score.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     especially subclass 5, for a game that simulates the projection or
    firing of a projectile that further includes the use of data processing, or
    that utilizes a cathode-ray tube for a target.

    51+,    for a target for a simulated-projectile game that utilizes an
    electromagnetic ray either for simulating a projectile or for coincidence
    detection.

    53,     for a target for a simulated-projectile game that further includes
    means for indicating a target strike.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, for a centrifugally or mechanically
    operated device, per se, for projecting or launching a tangible game
    projectile into the air.

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 108+ for game apparatus
    (other than a game projectile, per se) in which a game projectile is
    intended to travel over a playing surface at all times in its course or for
    an implement or device for projecting such a projectile for movement upon a
    playing surface, and subclasses 317+ for game apparatus (other than a game
    projectile, per se, or a projector, per se) in which a game projectile is
    projected into the air.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 11+ for a device utilized
    to teach or demonstrate to one how to operate or handle a firearm.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, especially subclass 473 for a toy
    projector or one that simulates a projector or weapon.

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, for a device or apparatus for the
    play of, or for practice for, a game or sport in which a tangible
    projectile is used.


CLS 463/50
TXT Plural simulated projectors (e.g., tennis, shoot-out, dual, etc.):

    A simulated-projectile game under subclass 49 which includes either:

    (a)     two or more simulated projectors respectively operable by two or
    more game participants in a competitive contest between the participants, or

    (b)     a simulated projector operable by a game participant combined with
    means to imitate or represent an opponent with a projector that can
    actively compete against the game participant in a game simulating a
    contest between two or more game participants.


CLS 463/51
TXT Electromagnetic ray simulates projectile or its path, or utilized for
    coincidence detection (e.g., light-ray gun, infrared aim detector, etc.):

    A simulated-projectile game under subclass 49 including means for
    projecting or receiving a light wave, infrared wave, radio wave, or other
    like wave or beam in the electromagnetic spectrum for the purpose of either:

    (a)     appearing as a projectile beam or aiming beam issued from a
    simulated projector;

    (b)     imitating or representing the track, line of movement, course
    taken, etc. (i.e., path), of a projectile intended to be issued from a
    simulated projector; or

    (c)     determining if the alignment (i.e., coincidence) between a
    simulated projector and an intended target is such that a projectile
    intended to be issued from the projector during the particular alignment
    would strike the intended target if so projected.

    (1)     Note.  If the intended use of a device which simulates a firearm or
    other projector is to direct visible radiation toward an object merely to
    render the object visible to an observer, classification is proper
    elsewhere.  However, if the intended use of a device which simulates a
    firearm or other projector is to illuminate an object and to simulate the
    projection of a projectile toward a target device for a purpose other than
    mere education or demonstration of the use or operation of a firearm or
    projector, classification is proper in this class.  See the search notes,
    below.

    (2)     Note.  It is not a requirement, for classification herein, that the
    electromagnetic wave be issued from the simulated projector at the same
    location (e.g., gun barrel) that a tangible projectile would be projected
    or fired from the actual projector that is simulated. The only requirement
    is that the electromagnetic wave serve one of the purposes listed in the
    definition, whether it be issued from the simulated projector itself or
    some means (e.g., coincidence detector, target, etc.) associated therewith.
     Generally, a target under this definition interacts with a simulated
    projector or an associated coincidence detector via an electromagnetic wave
    or ray to enable determination of correctness of aim.  Usually the
    electromagnetic wave or ray serves the dual function of simulating a
    projectile or its path and the purpose of aim determination for the purpose
    of scoring, but this definition is intended to encompass the use of the ray
    or wave for either of these functions alone.

    (3)     Note.  It is not a requirement, for classification herein, that the
    electromagnetic wave be issued from the projector or means physically
    attached thereto. For purpose of aim determination, for example, the wave
    can issue from the target or other apparatus and be reflected from the
    simulated projector to a device for determining correctness of aim.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for a simulated projectile game including the use of an
    electromagnetic wave where there is further use of electronic data
    processing or a simulated projector that interacts with a cathode ray tube.

    50,     for a simulated-projectile game having plural simulated projectors.

    53+,    for a coincidence detector for a simulated projectile game that
    does not use electromagnetic radiation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 233+ for a gun sight.

    42,     Firearms, subclass 103 for a firearm with a sight device including
    lights.

    89,     Ordnance, subclasses 41.01+ for ordnance with an aiming device.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 203.5 for cathode-ray tube (target)
    scanning; subclasses 206+ for a photocell controlled circuit; subclass
    227.13 for a light pen; and subclasses 222+ for an optical or prephotocell
    system controlled by an article, person, or animal.

    353,    Optics: Image Projectors, subclass 43 for an image projector with a
    housing shaped like a pistol or gun.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 110+ for a device which is combined with
    or simulates a firearm or other projector that functions merely to direct
    visible radiation toward an object to render it visible.  See the (1) Note,
    above.

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, for a device for producing a laser beam.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 11+ for a simulated
    projector or firearm that utilizes an electromagnet beam to teach or
    demonstrate how to operate or handle a firearm.  See the (1) Note above.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclass 175 for a toy having a light- or
    sound-responsive switch or control; subclass 219 for a toy having a
    chemiluminescent light source, optic fiber, mirror, or lens; and subclass
    473 for a simulated weapon.


CLS 463/52
TXT Having active target (e.g., moving target, "hit" responsive, etc.):

    A simulated-projectile game under subclass 51 including a device intended
    to be used as a point-of-aim (i.e., target) for a simulated-projectile
    game, wherein the target includes either means to render the target mobile
    while being the subject of aim, or means to alter the position,
    orientation, or physical appearance of the target in response to a
    simulated striking of the target due to correct aim of a simulated
    projector by a game participant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for a simulated-projectile game that utilizes a cathode-ray tube as
    a target.

    49,     for a simulated-projectile game target that does not use an
    electromagnetic ray for simulating a projectile or for coincidence
    detection, or is not hit responsive.

    53+,    for a hit-responsive target for a simulated-projectile game that
    does not use an electromagnetic ray for simulating a projectile or for
    coincidence detection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    273,    Amusement Devices: Games, subclasses 348+ for a target for an
    aerial projectile, especially subclasses 359+ for a moving target.


CLS 463/53
TXT Coincidence detection or indication means (e.g., aim detector,
    "hit"-indication, etc.):

    A simulated-projectile game under subclass 49 including structure for:

    (a)     determining the positional relationship (i.e., coincidence) between
    a simulated projector and a target for the purpose of determining whether
    the simulated projector is properly positioned (i.e., aimed) with respect
    to the target for an intended projectile to "strike" the target, or

    (b)     providing a display, signal, or other representation of the
    ultimate destination of an intended projectile (i.e., indication means)
    based upon the position of a simulated projector when the simulated
    projector simulates a projection (e.g, indicating if or where an intended
    projectile would "strike" a target).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for a simulated-projector game that utilizes an electromagnetic ray
    or wave to determine coincidence.


CLS 463/54
TXT Having target or subtarget marker:

    A coincidence indication means under subclass 53 including a means for
    placing a visible indication on a target--or on an additional means which
    represents and substantially duplicates the visual appearance of the
    target--at a position determined by the coincidence detector to be the
    point of aim of the simulated projector.


CLS 463/55
TXT Perforator:

    A target or subtarget marker under subclass 54 wherein the marker includes
    structure for placing a hole in the target or subtarget at a position
    determined to be the point of aim.


CLS 463/56
TXT Having target deflector (e.g., "hit" indication):

    A coincidence indication means under subclass 53 wherein indication is
    provided by a means to cause a change in position of a target to simulate a
    strike by a projectile.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     for an simulated-projector game that utilizes an electromagnetic
    ray or wave to simulate a projectile or to determine coincidence, wherein
    the target used therefor is a moving target or is "hit" responsive.


CLS 463/57
TXT Coincidence detection via electrical contacts:

    A coincidence detector under 53 including a separable junction comprising
    two electrically conductive terminals, and further comprising structure
    arranged to cause the terminals to abut one another and complete an
    electrical circuit used to determine or indicate coincidence when a
    simulated projector is properly aimed toward a target.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for a simulated-projectile game that utilizes an electromagnetic
    ray for coincidence detection.


CLS 463/58
TXT PROPELLED RACING:

    Subject matter under the class definition including an object to be placed
    in motion, and means, other than that directly provided by a human or
    animal, to apply mechanical force to the object to place it in motion over
    or through a predetermined distance or defined course in a competition of
    speed (i.e., a race), wherein the outcome of the race is determined by
    which one of a plurality of concurrently propelled objects takes the least
    amount of time to complete, or is first to complete, the distance or course.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass requires that there be a recitation of
    structure that creates an element of competition such as, for example,
    means to determine a winner of a competition (e.g., a lap counter, clock,
    etc); means to simultaneously start a plurality of objects in motion; or a
    course that enables a plurality of cars to travel concurrently or a
    plurality of individual controls for respective objects to be raced,
    together with a disclosed intent to competitively race said objects.

    (2)     Note.  It is not a requirement, for placement in this subclass,
    that participants in the competition have direct or continuous control over
    objects to be raced. For example, chance alone can govern the outcome of a
    race when, for example, gravity is the sole source of propulsion, so long
    as other aspects of competition are involved (e.g., simultaneous start,
    concurrent travel, etc).

    (3)     Note.  When there are means for propelling an object in more than
    one direction, original placement is made in the first occurring subclass
    providing for a means for propelling the object in a direction toward the
    completion of the distance or course, as opposed to a force applied
    laterally, to overcome inertia, or to return the object to the starting
    position, etc.

    (4)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass is a race game that utilizes
    mechanical force directly applied to the object by a human or animal as the
    sole means to place an object to be raced in motion. However, this should
    be distinguished from human or animal forces utilized to affect control of
    a means for applying mechanical force to an object, for example, where a
    human throws or shoots a projectile at a target with the intent to either
    control a mechanical force applied to an indicator representing an object
    to be raced, or transfer the momentum of the projectile to the object to
    place it in motion; or where a human powers a stationary bicycle to control
    power to a movable object that indicates a race position with respect to
    others in a simulated race, etc.

    (5)     Note.  Propelled racing is an exception to the requirement under
    the class definition that a game which uses a physical projectile be
    excluded from this class. See the projectile example in Note (3), above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for a race or time determinative contest that includes electronic
    data processing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, for railway rolling stock and track, each of which is
    modified for interrelation and cooperation with each other; for railway
    track other than normal surface track, and for railway fixtures and
    appliances for use with railway track, especially subclass 60 for
    amusement-park-type racing where a participant is carried by a propelled
    object and subclasses 295+ for a car-carried electric propulsion system
    with external car control (e.g., slot car, etc.) which lacks a competitive
    feature (e.g., lap counter, clock, etc.).  See the (1) Note, above.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 701 for a roundabout for a live animal
    and subclasses 702+ for an exercise or amusement device for a live animal.

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, appropriate subclass for a conveyor for
    moving an object.

    238,    Railways: Surface Track, subclasses 10+ for a portable railway
    track structure, per se.

    273,    Amusement Devices: Games, subclasses 236+, especially subclass 246,
    for a board game that simulates a race and subclasses 445+ for a game
    involving physical skill or ability that includes a timed reaction or race
    to a finish.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, particularly subclasses 17+
    and 71 for pavement or road structure.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 29+ for vehicle operator
    instruction or testing using a simulated model of a vehicle.

    446,    Amusement Devices: Toys, for a toy vehicle of that class powered by
    an infant or child, or otherwise powered for amusement other than in a
    competitive game, especially subclass 313 for a figure toy that simulates
    an animal and rider; subclasses 444+ for a toy railway; subclasses 454+ for
    a remotely controlled rolling or tumbling toy; and subclasses 465+ for a
    wheeled toy vehicle.

    472,    Amusement Devices, subclasses 1+ for a roundabout, subclasses 85+
    for a racetrack, and subclasses 92+ (a) for structure or composition of a
    playing surface, per se; (b) for structure or composition of a peripheral
    boundary marking or enclosure, per se, of such a playing surface; or (c)
    for the combination of only a playing surface and a peripheral boundary
    marking or enclosure--where the above [i.e.,( a)-(c)] are limited to use
    for an athletic or exhibition event such as, for example, for playing a
    game or sport thereon or therein.  Also, see the search notes appended
    thereto.

    482,    Exercise Devices, for structure utilized for exercise purposes that
    may involve body motion found in a typical race between humans (e.g.,
    swimming, running, bicycling, etc.).


CLS 463/59
TXT Having contest condition indicator (e.g., lap counter, timer, start
    indicator, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 54 including structure arranged to test,
    measure, or display the status of a race.

    (1)     Note.  To be properly placed in this or the indented subclass, the
    condition tested, measured, or displayed is a conditional aspect of the
    contest, per se, as opposed to the status of a peripheral structure
    associated with the game structure that has no informational value to the
    contest.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, especially subclasses 488+ for speed or
    acceleration measurement.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 222 through 225 for a mechanical
    signal or indicator, per se, which is intended to form part of or to be
    used with a game device.

    235,    Registers, for a register, per se, intended for use in a game,
    particularly subclass 1 for a miscellaneous game counter, subclass 61 for
    an odds computer, subclass 78 for a game calculator having concentric
    totalizing disks mounted upon a single axis, subclass 88 for a game
    calculator having tabular indicia placed upon disks which rotate about
    their centers, subclass 90 for a cribbage board, subclass 91 for a device
    for operating a register involving a billiard or pool game device, and
    subclasses 439+ for a coded record sensor structure (e.g., bar code reader,
    etc.).

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, especially subclasses 323+ for game
    reporting.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 410+,
    especially subclass 412 for game scoring.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, appropriate subclass
    for time measurement means, especially subclass 3 for game controlled time
    measurement and subclasses 89+ for time interval measurement.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, especially subclass 5 for game or sport applications,
    subclass 9 for vehicle counting, and subclasses 19+ for measuring or
    testing applications.


CLS 463/60
TXT Winner or finish order:

    A contest condition indicator under subclass 59 wherein the condition is
    that of the first object to complete the distance or course, or the
    relative positional succession of a plurality of objects that complete the
    distance or course.


CLS 463/61
TXT Magnetically propelled object:

    Propelled racing under subclass 58 wherein the object includes a magnet,
    electromagnet, or magnetically attractive substance, and, further, wherein
    the means to apply mechanical force to an object to be raced includes means
    external to said object for causing a magnetic force of attraction or
    repulsion between the object-carried magnet, electromagnet, or magnetically
    attractive substance and the external means sufficient to move the object.

    (1)     Note.  The means for applying a magnetic force to the object
    commonly includes another magnet with additional means to move the other
    magnet along a race course to move the object along.  However, this
    definition encompasses other means for applying magnetic force such as, for
    example, a plurality of stationary, separately energizable electromagnets
    spaced along the race course.

    (2)     Note.  Magnetic propulsion under this subclass is intended to
    include only direct magnetic propulsion of an entire object by magnetic
    forces acting between the object and structure external to the object, as
    opposed to a magnet force acting entirely within the object such as by, for
    example, an object-carried electromagnetic rotary drive motor for driving
    an axle or wheel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for propelled racing where a racing object is propelled by an
    object-carried electromagnetic drive motor for driving an axle or wheel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, for a magnetically suspended railway car.

    446,    Amusement Devices: Toys, subclasses 129+ for a toy having a
    permanent magnet, especially subclasses 133+ for a member movable in spaced
    relation to a spaced magnet.


CLS 463/62
TXT Electrically self-propelled object:

    Propelled racing under subclass 58 wherein the means to apply mechanical
    force to an object to be raced includes an object-carried electrodynamic
    motor for transducing electric current into motive force which moves the
    object.

    (1)     Note.  The source of electric current may be carried by the object
    (e.g., a battery, etc.) or collected from means external to the object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for a race game including electronic data processing.

    61,     for a race game in which an object is propelled by an
    electromagnetic drive means having a force acting between the object and
    structure external to the object.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclasses 287+ for a car-carried electric propulsion
    system.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, for structure for
    converting electrical energy into motive power.

    318,    Electricity: Motive Power Systems, for a control system for an
    electrodynamic motor.

    446,    Amusement Devices: Toys, especially subclasses 431+ for an
    electrically-propelled toy vehicle.


CLS 463/63
TXT Having means to alter lateral position of object (e.g., steerable car, lane
    changer, etc.):

    Electrically self-propelled racing under subclass 62 including means to
    affect side-to-side movement of the object with respect to its motion over
    or through the predetermined distance or defined course.

    (1)     Note.  The lateral positioning can be controlled by any means
    effective to laterally reposition the object (e.g., direct participant
    action to turn wheels on object, redirecting obstruction on racetrack,
    etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 304 for a vehicle of that class having a
    vehicle-carried electric propulsion system and a steering control external
    to the vehicle.

    446,    Amusement Devices: Toys, subclasses 431+, especially subclasses 460
    and 468, for a steerable toy vehicle.


CLS 463/64
TXT Object propelled by impact, projection, or reaction force (e.g., spring,
    fluid jet, wind, etc.):

    Propelled racing under subclass 58 wherein the mechanical force to place an
    object in motion includes either:

    (a)     a movable mass (e.g., projectile, wind, etc.) arranged to hit or
    strike the object to transfer its momentum thereto in a direction toward
    completion of a race (i.e., intended direction);

    (b)     a movable or expandable mass (e.g., projector, spring, etc.)
    arranged to throw, hurl, shoot, or otherwise push the object in said
    intended direction; or

    (c)     an object-carried mass arranged to forcefully escape from the
    object (e.g., jet, etc.) in a direction opposite to said intended direction
    to cause the object to be propelled along said intended direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for a game including electronic data processing that includes a
    simulated projectile.

    49,     for a simulated projectile game.

    58,     for a propelled racing game where an object is solely propelled by
    buoyant carriage on or in a flowing fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 108+ for game apparatus
    (other than a game projectile, per se) in which a game projectile is
    intended to travel over a playing surface at all times in its course or for
    an implement or device for projecting such a projectile for movement upon a
    playing surface, and subclasses 317+ for game apparatus (other than a game
    projectile, per se, or a projector, per se) in which a game projectile is
    projected into the air.

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, for a game or sport that uses a
    tangible projectile.


CLS 463/65
TXT Object propelled by reciprocating or vibrating surface:

    Propelled racing under subclass 58 wherein the mechanical force to place an
    object in motion includes a member having an exterior face (i.e., surface)
    and a means for imparting a back-and-forth or oscillatory motion to the
    surface whereby the object is caused to travel along the surface due to the
    surface motion when the object is engaged with the surface.

    (1)     Note.  The shape of the surface is not limited to a flat, roadlike
    surface, but may include such other shapes or forms such as a string or
    wire, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Vibration used for a reason other than propelling an object
    toward a finish line, such as, for example, that used to overcome an
    object's inertia at rest to allow gravity propulsion thereafter, is not
    properly classified herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for a gravity-propelled racing object with means to vibrate the
    object or its support to overcome resting inertia.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices: Toys, subclass 3 for a toy including a vibrating
    support for a travelling object.


CLS 463/66
TXT Object pulled by reelable cord:

    Propelled racing under subclass 58 wherein the means to apply mechanical
    force to an object includes an elongated flexible member (e.g. string,
    wire, etc.) having one end connected to the object and an opposite end
    connected to a rotatable spool, whereby motion can be imparted to the
    object by rotating the spool to wind the flexible member around the spool
    to shorten the length of the flexible member between the object and the
    spool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, appropriate subclass for reel
    structure.


CLS 463/67
TXT Object propelled by rotatable arm or disk:

    Propelled racing under subclass 58 wherein the means to apply mechanical
    force to place the object in motion includes either:

    (a)     an elongated bar having a pivot point along the bar and means for
    revolving the bar about the pivot point such that the bar defines a turning
    radius, and means on the bar, at a location spaced from said pivot point,
    for interacting with the object to propel the object along a circular path
    at a radial distance from said pivot point; or

    (b)     a generally thin, flat, circular member (i.e., disk) having a pivot
    point generally located at the center of the disk, means for turning the
    disk about the pivot point, and means along a radial line of the disk for
    interacting with the object to propel the object along a circular path at a
    radial distance from said pivot point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for a rotatable arm that propels an object by a force of magnetic
    attraction or repulsion between the arm and the object.

    64,     for a rotatable arm that propels an object by striking or
    projecting it.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    472,    Amusement Devices, subclasses 1+ for a roundabout, especially
    subclass 6 for a powered roundabout.


CLS 463/68
TXT Object propelled by endless loop:

    Propelled racing under subclass 58 wherein the means to apply mechanical
    force to place an object in motion includes an elongated flexible strip of
    material (e.g., belt, string, chain, etc.) curved back upon itself to form
    a closed, circlelike shape, means to drive the strip along its length in a
    circuitous manner, and means on the strip for engaging the object to impart
    movement to the object.

    (1)     Note.  To be properly placed in this subclass, the endless loop
    must directly propel or convey the object, as distinguishable from, for
    example, a belt that indirectly propels the object by rotating a pulley,
    gear, axle, etc., that in turn propels the object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for an endless loop that propels an object by a force of magnetic
    attraction or repulsion between the loop and the object.

    64,     for an endless loop including a mass arranged to strike or project
    an object.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 804+ for an endless-conveyor
    structure.


CLS 463/69
TXT Gravity propelled object:

    Propelled racing under subclass 58 wherein the mechanical force to place an
    object in motion results from the force of the object's weight which tends
    to pull a body toward the center of the Earth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    273,    Amusement Devices: Games, subclasses 138.1+, especially subclasses
    138.3+, for a gravity-propelled object in a chance device.

    446,    Amusement Devices, Toys, subclasses 168+ for a gravity-propelled
    toy.


CLS 464/
TTL ROTARY SHAFTS, GUDGEONS,  HOUSINGS, AND FLEXIBLE  COUPLINGS FOR ROTARY
    SHAFTS

CLS 464/
TXT I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    A.      This is the class for rotary shafts, a rotary shaft being defined
    as an elongated member intended to be rotated about its longitudinal axis
    to transmit torque.

    B.      This is also the class for gudgeons, a gudgeon being defined as a
    device secured to the end of a shaft or other rotary body, for rotation
    therewith, to facilitate mounting the body in a support.

    C.      This is also the class for housings, a housing being defined as a
    structure providing an enclosure surrounding at least a portion of a shaft,
    a flexible coupling, or a flexible motion transmitting device such as a
    Bowden Cable; such enclosure functioning to prevent in advertant contact
    between an operator or foreign matter and the shaft, flexible coupling, or
    flexible motion transmitting device; or to retain lubricant or the like
    within the space surrounded by the enclosure.

    D.      This is also the class for flexible couplings for rotary shafts, a
    flexible coupling being defined as structure interconnecting rotary
    devices, at least one of them being a shaft, in order to facilitate
    relative motion between them as they transmit torque, or to enable torque
    to be transmitted through rotary devices having misaligned or angularly
    related rotational axes.

    II.     EXPLANATORY NOTES ON THE SCOPE OF THE CLASS

    (1)     Note.  A method or apparatus for manufacturing a structure of this
    class is not found herein, but is found in an appropriate manufacturing
    class, such as Class 29, Metal Working; or Class 72, Metal Deforming.

    (2)     A nominal recitation of a device for applying rotary power to, or
    receiving rotary power from, a structure of this class will not exclude a
    patent from being placed in this class.

    III.    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 256.5+ for a
    cleaning device mounted to act on a moving surface.  If a cleaning device
    is mounted to act on a shaft so as to clean it during normal torque
    transmission, see this class (464), subclass 22.

    29,     Metal Working, for a method of assembling a structure of this class
    (464).

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 15.6+ for a power take-off
    from a shaft extension; subclasses 18+ for motion transmitting means
    including a flexible sealing diaphragm connected to a moving rod and a
    casing; subclasses 380+ for pivotally supported gearing; subclass 411 for
    structure providing yield ability in gear trains; subclass 443 for sound
    deadening means associated with rotary bodies; subclasses 489 and 500.5+
    for a flexible motion transmitter (e.g., Bowden cable); subclasses 572+ for
    a flywheel or rotor with balancing or vibration dampening means; and
    subclasses 606+ for a gear casing.

    81,     Tools, subclasses 467+ for a wrench or screwdriver responsive to
    torque on the work.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 131 for a resilient wheel or axle
    drive.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 420 for speed responsive
    centrifugal timing mechanism in spark ignition timing control.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 118+ for a flexible conduit.

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, appropriate subclasses for a connection
    which facilitates relative movement between a rim and a hub on a wheel.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclass 326 for
    a combined roller and gudgeon in a roller for accumulating material on a
    roll.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 261+ for an earthworking element combined
    with means permitting said element to shift in response to an overload
    condition.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 93.5+ for a rotary tool drive
    having a torque responsive impact in an impacting device; and subclasses
    165+ for means to drive a tool about an axis and including a relatively
    fixed drive for an advancing tool.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 195 for a rotary drive
    table for a relatively advancing tool.  See the reference to Class 464
    under section V of the Class Definition of Class 175, and see also Note (2)
    following the definition of subclass 320 in Class 175 for a statement of
    the line.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 254+ for a vehicle having a driven and
    steerable wheel and including a flexible drive transmitting means for
    transmitting torque to the wheel.

    184,    Lubrication, for lubrication systems, per se; but if a shaft or
    flexible coupling includes structure which is modified so as to admit
    lubrication, classification is in Class 464, subclasses 7+.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 56.1+ for an overload
    release clutch; subclasses 58.1+ for a fluent material clutch; subclasses
    84.1+ for an electric operator for a clutch; subclasses 85+ for a fluid
    pressure operator for a clutch; subclasses 103+ for a speed responsive
    operator; and subclasses 200+ for a clutch element combined with means for
    resiliently mounting such element on a hub.  In general, Class 192 has
    couplings of the kind wherein torque transmission may be selectively or
    automatically disrupted, wherein the couplings of Class 464 are generally
    intended for continuous torque transmission with provision for relative
    movement between the coupled members while torque is being transmitted.
    There are, however, exceptions to this general rule as follows:

    A.      Class 464, in subclasses 32+, has structure wherein torque
    transmission is disrupted by breakage of a frangible element which may be
    replaced.

    B.      Class 464, in subclasses 30+, has overload release couplings
    wherein relative rotation between coupled members continues so long as an
    overload condition occurs.  The line between Class 464, subclasses 30+, and
    Class 192, subclass 56.1+, is that Class 464 takes structure wherein
    relatively rotatable surfaces move with respect to each other during an
    overload condition; but drive through such surfaces is automatically
    re-established, without an additional operation, upon correction of the
    overload condition.  Class 192, subclass 56.1+, requires a further
    operation, in addition to correcting the overload condition, to
    re-establish the drive; such further operation being, for example, operator
    assisted re-engagement or reduction in rotational speed of a power input
    member.

    C.      Class 464, in subclasses 24+, provides for fluid couplings wherein
    relative movement between coupled members is facilitated by compression or
    decompression of a fluid wherein a significant feature is to accommodate
    relative movement between the coupled members for dampening, buffering,
    etc.  Class 192, subclasses 58.1+, has fluid couplings wherein a fluent
    material envelops the coupled parts, and the torque transmission occurs via
    a shearing action in the fluid.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 31 for ignition
    distributors with centrifugal advance mechanism.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 32 for
    overload release means for comminution apparatus, and subclasses 291+ for
    significant comminuting structure mounted on a drive shaft therefor.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclass 504 for a dynamic, circumferential contact seal for other
    than a piston that accommodates gyratory or oscillatory motion by using a
    flexible connection having static contact between the seal and one of the
    relatively movable parts; subclasses 549+ for a dynamic circumferential
    contact seal for other than a piston having a peripheral radially sealing
    flexible projection (e.g., lip seal, etc.) or subclasses 634+ for a static,
    contact seal for other than an internal combustion engine, or a pipe,
    conduit, or cable that is a flexible sleeve, boot, or diaphragm.

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, subclass 16 for a self-centering or floating
    chuck or socket.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, appropriate subclasses for a coupling
    between fluid conducting pipes.

    295,    Railway Wheels and Axles, subclasses 36.1+ for an axle of that
    class.

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclasses 124.1+ for an axle of
    that class.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 75+ for a drive
    mechanism which may include a flexible shaft, and subclasses 92+ for torque
    transmitting clutches.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for a joint or
    connector, per se.  If, however, a coupling between torque transmitting
    members is such as to facilitate connection or relative movement between
    members having misaligned or angularly related axes, then such coupling is
    in Class 464. See Class 403, subclasses 52+ for a joint between articulated
    members other than rotary torque transmitting members.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 231+ for a cutter
    spindle or spindle support.

    433,    Dentistry, subclass 112 for a flexible shaft transmission in a
    dental apparatus.

    440,    Marine Propulsion, subclass 83 for shafting combined with a screw
    propeller in marine propulsion apparatus.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclass 94
    for a flexible connection between a pulley or guide roll rim and its mount.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses 346+
    (and see The Search Notes therein) for a flexible coupling in a planetary
    gear arrangement.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 464/1
TXT SPEED RESPONSIVE DEVICE FOR ADJUSTING RELATIVE ROTATIONAL POSITION OF
    COUPLED MEMBERS:

    Flexible coupling structure under the class definition wherein a shaft and
    another member are mounted for relative rotation about a common axis and
    wherein means is provided to sense velocity or change of velocity of the
    shaft or other member and responsive to such sensed velocity or change of
    velocity, said means acts directly or indirectly to alter the relative
    rotational position of the shaft and other member between predetermined
    relative rotational positions.



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160+,   for a coupling other than speed responsive to adjust the relative
    rotational position of coupled members.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 420 for speed responsive
    centrifugal timing mechanism in spark ignition timing control.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 31 for an
    ignition distributor with centrifugal advance mechanism.


CLS 464/2
TXT Actuated by fluid or electricity:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein said means acts through the medium
    of force derived from fluid or electrical power to alter the relative
    rotational position of the shaft and the other member.


CLS 464/3
TXT Pivoted weight:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein said means comprises a mass
    swingably mounted for movement about a pivotal axis in response to
    centrifugal force caused by rotation of the shaft or other member.


CLS 464/4
TXT Gear segment on pivoted weight:

    Subject matter under subclass 3 wherein the relative rotational positions
    of the shaft and the other member are altered via gear teeth formed on or
    carried by the swingable mass so as to interact with another set of gear
    teeth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109,    for a gear segment associated with a coupling which accommodates
    drive between members having misaligned or angularly related axes.


CLS 464/5
TXT Pivotal movement opposed by compression of coil spring along its axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 3 wherein a helically wound device, which is
    resiliently compressible along its longitudinal axis, is mounted with
    respect to said swingable mass in such a manner that movement of said mass
    by centrifugal force is opposed by the resilient compression of said device.


CLS 464/6
TXT Pivotal movement opposed by expansion of coil spring along its axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 3 wherein a helically wound device, which is
    resiliently expansible along its longitudinal axis, is mounted with respect
    to said swingable mass in such a manner that movement of said mass by
    centrifugal force is opposed by the resilient expansion of said device.


CLS 464/7
TXT HAVING LUBRICATING MEANS:

    Subject matter under the class definition provided with means for directing
    or applying a fluid substance between relatively movable surfaces to reduce
    friction between such relatively movable surfaces.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    184,    Lubrication, appropriate subclasses for lubrication systems, per se.


CLS 464/8
TXT Lubricant impregnated into material:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein said lubricant is applied by means
    of a porous surface and wherein said porous surface is permeated by said
    fluid substance so that said flowable substance is located on and beneath
    the surface of said device throughout the extent of said porous surface.


CLS 464/9
TXT Metallic material:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 wherein said permeated device is made of
    metal.


CLS 464/10
TXT For overload release coupling:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein said relatively movable surfaces
    are associated with flexible coupling structure which permits relative
    rotation between torque input and output members for as long as said output
    member is subjected to a resistance to rotation greater than a
    predetermined value.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30+,    for an overload release coupling.


CLS 464/11
TXT For coupling having torque transmitted via radially directed pin received
    in conforming aperture:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein said relatively movable surfaces
    are associated with flexible coupling structure including a first part
    carried by one member of the coupling, said first part being in the form of
    a right cylinder with the axis of the cylinder extending perpendicularly
    to, and radially outwardly from, the axis of rotation of said one member of
    the coupling; and including a second part carried by the coupling, said
    second part comprising means defining a opening for receiving said first
    part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112+,   for a coupling which transmits torque via a radially directed pin.


CLS 464/12
TXT Lubricant supplied to plural pins via common ring which encapsulates pins:

    Subject matter under subclass 11 wherein coupling structure includes a
    plurality of circumferentially spaced right cylindrical parts, and said
    structure further includes an annular member enclosing said parts, said
    annular member comprising walls defining a path for flow of said substance
    from one to another of said parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125+,   for a ring which receives plural pins.


CLS 464/13
TXT Pin includes longitudinally extending internal passage:

    Subject matter under subclass 12 wherein at least one of said right
    cylindrical parts includes means defining a flow path for said fluid, said
    flow path being located internally of the external surface of said part and
    extending in a direction parallel to said axis of said part.


CLS 464/14
TXT Pin includes longitudinally extending internal passage:

    Subject matter under subclass 11 wherein said right cylindrical part
    includes means defining a flow path for said fluid, said flow path being
    located internally of the external surface of said part and extending in a
    direction parallel to the axis of said part.


CLS 464/15
TXT For coupling having torque transmitted via a ball:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein said relatively movable surfaces
    are associated with flexible coupling structure including a spherical part
    for transmitting torque between said relatively movable members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139+,   for a coupling which transmits torque via a radially spaced ball.


CLS 464/16
TXT For coupling having torque transmitted via intermeshing teeth:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein said relatively movable surfaces
    are associated with flexible coupling structure including alternating
    ridges and valleys on each of said coupled members, the ridges of one
    member being received within the valleys of the other member, and wherein
    torque is transmitted by surface engagement of the ridges of one member
    with the ridges of the other member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157+,   for a coupling which transmits torque via intermeshing teeth.


CLS 464/17
TXT HAVING HEATING OR COOLING MEANS:

    Subject matter under the class definition provided with means for applying
    heat to or extracting heat from said subject matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, for heating or cooling means, per se.


CLS 464/18
TXT FLEXIBLE COUPLING BETWEEN FLUID-CONDUCTING ROTARY SHAFTS (E.G., COUPLING
    BETWEEN SECTIONS OF DRILL STRING, ETC.):

    A flexible coupling under the class definition for interconnecting plural
    shafts, said shafts being of tubular construction for conducting a fluid
    internally of the shaft along the length thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 320+ for a tool shaft
    detail, and see the reference to Class 175 in the search class notes under
    the class definition of Class 464.

    285,    Pipe Joints or Couplings, appropriate subclasses for a coupling
    between fluid conducting pipes.


CLS 464/19
TXT Relative angular displacement of axes of shafts:

    Subject matter under subclass 18 wherein said coupling facilitates changing
    the angle defined by the longitudinal axes of the shafts with respect to
    each other.


CLS 464/20
TXT Including member deformable by relative movement between shafts:

    Subject matter under subclass 18 and further including a part which is
    deformed when one of said shafts moves relative to the other of said shafts.


CLS 464/21
TXT Member is coiled spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 20 wherein said part is a helically wound
    resilient device.


CLS 464/22
TXT HAVING CLEANING MEANS:

    Subject matter under the class definition provided with means associated
    with such subject matter to maintain its cleanliness during operation.

    (1)     Note.  For a patent to be placed herein, the cleaning device must
    be particularly adapted to be associated with a subject matter of this
    class to provide cleaning during torque transmission.  If the device is of
    general utility and not particularly adapted to be mounted on operating
    members of this class, classification is in a class appropriate for
    cleaning of general utility, such as Class 15 or 134.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 256.5+ for a
    cleaning device mounted to act on a moving surface.


CLS 464/23
TXT WITH AUXILIARY INDICATOR OR ALARM:

    Subject matter under the class definition and further including a separate
    device for indicating a condition thereof or for providing a warning that
    an undesirable condition exists.


CLS 464/24
TXT FLUID COUPLING:

    A flexible coupling under the class definition wherein a liquid or gas is
    used to affect or effect the coupling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 58.1+ wherein a fluent
    material envelops the coupled parts; subclasses 85+ for a fluid pressure
    operator for a clutch; and see the reference to Class 192 in the search
    class notes under the general definition of Class 464 for a statement of
    the line.


CLS 464/25
TXT For transmitting limited pulsating torque (e.g., fluid drive coupling for
    impulse tool):

    Subject matter under subclass 24 including structure for applying torque in
    cyclical pulses from an input member to a relatively rotatable output
    member through the medium of said liquid or gas, and wherein means is
    provided to limit the maximum torque applied during each pulse.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 467+ for a wrench or screwdriver responsive to
    torque on the work.


CLS 464/26
TXT Including piston axially movable in cylinder having axis coextensive with
    axis of rotation of coupled members:

    Subject matter under subclass 24 wherein the liquid or gas is contained
    within a cylinder having an axis which is aligned with the rotational axis
    of the coupled members, and wherein a piston is mounted within the cylinder
    for reciprocable movement along the axis of the cylinder.


CLS 464/27
TXT Including multiple piston-cylinder devices radially spaced from axis of
    rotation:

    Subject matter under subclass 24 wherein a plurality of cylinders
    containing the liquid or gas are located in a position radially spaced from
    the axis of rotation of the coupled members, each of said cylinders having
    a piston reciprocable therein.


CLS 464/28
TXT Fluid confined in enclosure having flexible walls:

    Subject matter under subclass 24 wherein the liquid or gas is contained
    within a device having walls made of flexible material.


CLS 464/29
TXT ELECTRICAL OR MAGNETIC COUPLING:

    A flexible coupling under the class definition including electrical or
    magnetic means for affecting or effecting the coupling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 84.1+ for an electric
    operator for a clutch.


CLS 464/30
TXT OVERLOAD RELEASE COUPLING:

    A flexible coupling under the class definition wherein means is provided
    for transmitting torque between input and output members so as to
    accommodate relative rotation between said members when resistance to
    rotation of said output member exceeds a predetermined value, said means
    including either (a) a device which is designed to rupture when said
    resistance to rotation exceeds said predetermined value, or (b) a device
    which slips or disengages when said resistance to rotation exceeds said
    predetermined value but which automatically reengages without operator
    intervention or other additional operation when said resistance to rotation
    no longer exceeds said predetermined value.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for an overload release coupling including means to supply a
    lubricant to relatively rotating surfaces.

    25,     for a coupling for transmitting a limited pulsating torque via a
    fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 467+ for a wrench or screwdriver responsive to
    torque on the work.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 261+ for an earthworking element combined
    with means permitting said element to shift in response to an overload.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclass 93.5 for a rotary tool drive
    having torque responsive impact in an impacting device.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 56.1+ for an overload
    release clutch, and see a statement of the line in the search class notes
    following the general definition of Class 464.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 32 for an
    overload release means for comminution apparatus.


CLS 464/31
TXT Including thermally responsive element:
    Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein said means includes a device for
    sensing the temperature of a part in said coupling, and in response to said
    sensed temperature, controlling the relative rotation between the members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for class subject matter including an auxiliary device to apply
    heat to or extract heat from such subject matter.


CLS 464/32
TXT Torque transmitted via frangible element:
    Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein rotation is transmitted from the
    input member to the output member through the medium of a device which is
    designed to rupture when the resistance to rotation is greater than said
    predetermined value.


CLS 464/33
TXT Axially extending pin:

    Subject matter under subclass 32 wherein the device is an elongated rodlike
    element mounted so that the longitudinal extent of the element is parallel
    to, or coextensive with, the axis of rotation of the coupled members.


CLS 464/34
TXT Torque transmitted via radially spaced deformable roller:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein rotation is transmitted from the
    input to the output member through the medium of a device rotatable about
    its own axis and spaced radially from the axis of rotation of the members,
    and wherein the device is made of a material capable of being deformed to
    accommodate said relative rotation.


CLS 464/35
TXT Torque transmitted via a ball:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein rotation is transmitted from the
    input to the output member through the medium of a spherical element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139+,   for a coupling which transmits torque via a radially spaced ball to
    accommodate drive between members having misaligned or angularly related
    axes.


CLS 464/36
TXT Axially biased:

    Subject matter under subclass 35 wherein the spherical element is
    resiliently biased along a line of force parallel to the rotational axes of
    the driving and driven members.


CLS 464/37
TXT Torque transmitted via resiliently biased positive drive connection (e.g.,
    cam and follower):

    Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein one of said input or output
    members, or an intermediate member, includes a contoured face; and the
    other of said input or output members, or an intermediate member, includes
    or carries a device resiliently biased into engagement with the contoured
    face to provide a positive drive connection for transmitting torque between
    the input and output members by contact of the device with an abutment
    forming a part of the contoured face, and wherein the shape of the abutment
    is such as to force the device against its resilient bias in a direction
    away from the abutment to permit said relative rotation when said
    resistance to rotation exceeds said predetermined value.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35+,    wherein the torque transmitting element is a ball.


CLS 464/38
TXT Axially biased:

    Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein the resilient bias of said device
    into engagement with said contoured surface is along a line of force
    parallel to the rotational axes of the driving and driven members.


CLS 464/39
TXT By spring coiled about axis of rotation:
    Subject matter under subclass 38 wherein the resilient bias is provided by
    a device helically wound about the axis of rotation of the driving and
    driven members.


CLS 464/40
TXT Torque transmitted via frictional engagement of coil spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein rotation is transmitted from the
    input member to the output member through the medium of a helically coiled
    resilient device which frictionally engages one of said members to transmit
    torque, but which slips when said resistance to rotation is greater than
    said predetermined value.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57+,    for a flexible coupling wherein torque is transmitted via a coiled
    spring.


CLS 464/41
TXT Torque transmitted via plural circumferentially spaced friction elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein one of said input or output
    members includes or carries a plurality of discrete frictional elements
    circumferentially spaced from each other about the axis of rotation of said
    one of said members, said frictional elements having surfaces engaged with
    a surface or surfaces on the other of said members to transmit rotation,
    the engaged surfaces slipping when the resistance to rotation exceeds said
    predetermined value.


CLS 464/42
TXT Torque transmitted via frictional engagement of conical or frustoconical
    surfaces:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein rotation is transmitted from said
    input member to said output member by frictional engagement of surfaces
    having the shape of a cone or the frustum of a cone.


CLS 464/43
TXT With separate resilient member for biasing surfaces into engagement:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 which further includes a disparate
    resilient device for biasing the conical or frustoconical surfaces into
    engagement.


CLS 464/44
TXT Coil spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 43 wherein the resilient device is a
    helically coiled resilient member.


CLS 464/45
TXT Torque transmitted via frictional engagement of planar radially extending
    surfaces:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein rotation is transmitted from said
    input member to said output member by frictional engagement of surfaces
    which extend in a direction radially outwardly from, and in a plane
    perpendicular to, the axis of rotation of the driving and driven members.


CLS 464/46
TXT With separate resilient members for biasing surfaces into engagement:

    Subject matter under subclass 45 which further includes a disparate
    resilient device for biasing the frictionally engaged surfaces into
    engagement.


CLS 464/47
TXT Coil spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 wherein the resilient device is a
    helically coiled resilient member.


CLS 464/48
TXT Plural, circumferentially spaced coil springs:

    Subject matter under subclass 47 including a plurality of helically coiled
    resilient members spaced circumferentially from each other about the
    rotational axis of the driving and driven members.


CLS 464/49
TXT COUPLING DEVICE INCLUDES ENDLESS CHAIN ENGAGED WITH CIRCUMFERENTIAL TEETH
    ON COUPLED MEMBERS:

    A flexible coupling under the class definition wherein the coupled members
    are axially spaced from each other, and each includes a plurality of
    circumferentially spaced, radially extending teeth, and wherein coupling
    structure includes a closed loop chain having grooves or openings spaced
    along the length thereof for receiving the teeth on the coupled members.


CLS 464/50
TXT COUPLING DEVICE INCLUDES ANGLED OR HINGED ROD HAVING OPPOSITE ENDS
    RELATIVELY RECIPROCABLE AXIALLY IN BORES IN SPACED COUPLED MEMBERS:

    A flexible coupling under the class definition comprising an axially
    elongated member which is bent along its longitudinal axis or which is
    formed or pivotally connected sections, the opposite ends of said member
    being mounted for relative reciprocable axial movement in openings formed
    in axially spaced coupled members.


CLS 464/51
TXT TORQUE TRANSMITTED VIA FLEXIBLE ELEMENT:

    A shaft or flexible coupling as defined in the class definition wherein
    said shaft or flexible coupling includes an element through which
    rotational torque is transmitted, and wherein said element is made of a
    material which is flexible.

    (1)     Note.  While all materials may have at least some minimal inherent
    flexibility, for a patent to be placed in this and indented subclasses,
    such flexibility must be intended to be used as a desirable feature in the
    functional operation of the device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 411 for structure providing
    yield ability in gear trains; subclass 443 for sound deadening means
    associated with rotary bodies; and subclasses 489 and 500.5+ for a flexible
    push-pull motion transmitting means such as a Bowden cable.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 131 for a resilient drive for a
    wheel or axle.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 254+ for a vehicle having a driven and
    steerable wheel and including a flexible drive transmitting means for
    transmitting torque to the wheel.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 200+ for a clutch
    element combined with means to resiliently mount such element on a hub.

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, subclass 16 for a self-centering or floating
    chuck or socket.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 75+ for a drive
    mechanism which may include a flexible shaft.

    433,    Dentistry, subclass 112 for a flexible shaft transmission in a
    dental apparatus.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclass 94
    for a flexible connection between a pulley or guide roll rim and its mount.


CLS 464/52
TXT With stationary housing:

    Subject matter under subclass 51 and further including a housing as defined
    in the class definition, said housing being nonrotatable with said shaft or
    coupling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170+,   for a housing, per se, for a shaft or coupling.


CLS 464/53
TXT And threaded annulus surrounding terminal end of housing for attachment to
    auxiliary housing:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein an annular, threaded connector
    device extends around the end of said housing, said threads on said
    connector cooperating with complementary threads on another housing to
    secure said housings together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177,    for separably connected housings for separably connected shafts.


CLS 464/54
TXT Element coiled sinusoidally about axially spaced driving and driven members:

    Subject matter under subclass 51 wherein said element is bent into the
    general shape of a sine curve, and wherein the bends of the element are
    curved about portions of driving and driven members spaced apart from each
    other in the direction of the longitudinal axis of rotation of the members.


CLS 464/55
TXT Element is flaccid and operates in tension during torque transmission
    (e.g., belt, cable, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 51 wherein said element is limp or sags under
    its own weight, said element being connected to driving and driven members
    at points spaced from each other along the longitudinal extent of said
    element so that rotary torque transmitted from the driving to the driven
    member via said element places said element in tension.


CLS 464/56
TXT Element has circular cross section:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein a cross section in a plane
    perpendicular to the longitudinal extent of the element is generally
    circular.


CLS 464/57
TXT Element has plural convolutions wound about rotational axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 51 wherein said element is elongated and
    coiled about a longitudinal centerline which is the rotational axis of said
    element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for a spring which transmits torque by frictional engagement in an
    overload release coupling.


CLS 464/58
TXT Plural radially overlapping convoluted elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 57 and further including an additional
    elongated torque transmitting element coiled about the same longitudinal
    centerline in a manner such that one of said elongated elements overlaps
    the other in a direction extending radially outwardly of said rotational
    axis.


CLS 464/59
TXT Single element has plural radially overlapping convolutions:

    Subject matter under subclass 57 wherein said element is wound in a
    plurality of successive radially overlapping coils.


CLS 464/60
TXT Convoluted element has noncircular cross section:

    Subject matter under subclass 57 wherein the shape of a transverse cross
    section taken through said element is other than circular.


CLS 464/61
TXT Element is a spring coiled about centerline angularly related to or
    radially spaced from rotational axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 51 wherein said element is a helically coiled
    resilient element, and wherein the center line of the helix is either
    radially spaced from or extends at an angle to the rotational axes of
    members interconnected by said element.


CLS 464/62
TXT Plural springs:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 and further including an additional
    helically coiled element having its centerline radially spaced from or
    extending at an angle to the rotational axes of members interconnected by
    said elements.


CLS 464/63
TXT Centerline of springs axially spaced from each other along rotational axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 62 wherein the centerline of the helix of one
    of the elements is spaced from the centerline of the helix of the other of
    the elements in an axial direction along the rotational axes of members
    interconnected by said elements.


CLS 464/64
TXT Plural superposed springs on common centerline:

    Subject matter under subclass 62 wherein both of the elements are coiled
    about a common centerline, and wherein one of the elements overlaps the
    other.


CLS 464/65
TXT Centerline of springs radially spaced from and parallel to rotational axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 62 wherein the centerline of each of the
    elements is spaced radially outwardly from and extends parallel to the
    rotational axis of members interconnected by said elements.


CLS 464/66
TXT Opposite ends of springs are equidistant from rotational axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 62 wherein the distance on a radial line
    extending from the rotational axis to the centerline of the element at one
    end of the element is the same as the distance on a radial line extending
    from the rotational axis to the centerline of the element at the opposite
    end of the element.


CLS 464/67
TXT Springs on circumferentially extending curved centerline:

    Subject matter under subclass 66 wherein the centerline of said element is
    curved and extends in circumferential direction radially spaced from the
    rotational axes of members interconnected by said elements.


CLS 464/68
TXT Springs positioned between axially spaced plates of one member and driven
    by other member extending radially between said plates:

    Subject matter under subclass 66 wherein driving and driven members are
    resiliently connected by said elements, one of said members including a
    pair of plates spaced apart axially from each other along the rotational
    axis, said elements being received in the space between said plates, and
    the other of said members including a radial projection extending between
    said plates and engaging said elements for said radial projections to drive
    said plates via said elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 200+ for a clutch
    element combined with means to resiliently mount such element on a hub.


CLS 464/69
TXT Plural flexible links connected to circumferentially spaced axially
    directed pins on drive and driven members:

    Subject matter under subclass 51 wherein driving and driven members each
    include a plurality of connector pins extending in an axial direction and
    spaced circumferentially about the axis of rotation of said members, and
    wherein a plurality of said elements are positioned between said members,
    each of said elements being elongated and joined at one point to a
    connector pin on one of said members and joined at a spaced point to a
    connector pin on the other of said members.


CLS 464/70
TXT Element is annular liner within radially spaced pin-receiving opening:

    Subject matter under subclass 51 wherein a rotary drive or driven member
    includes means defining an aperture spaced in a radial direction of the
    rotational axis of one of said members for receiving a pin extending
    between said members, and wherein said element comprises a ringlike device
    positioned between the walls of said aperture and said pin.


CLS 464/71
TXT Axially directed pin:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 wherein the longitudinal axis of said pin
    extends in a direction generally parallel to the rotational axis of the
    members.


CLS 464/72
TXT Plural axially spaced liners:

    Subject matter under subclass 71 wherein there is provided a plurality of
    said ringlike devices spaced axially from each other, either in the same
    aperture or in separate apertures, in the same direction as the rotational
    axes of the members.


CLS 464/73
TXT Element positioned between intermeshing teeth on driving and driven
    members: Subject matter under subclass 51 wherein a driving member includes
    a face having surfaces defining alternating ridges and valleys, and a
    driven member also includes a face having surfaces defining alternating
    ridges and valleys, the ridges of one member nesting within the valleys of
    the other member to provide surfaces facing each other, and wherein said
    element has portions positioned between said facing surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157,    for other coupling structure including axially intermeshing teeth,
    and see the search notes following subclass 157.


CLS 464/74
TXT Teeth on radially overlapping surfaces:
    Subject matter under subclass 73 wherein the face having ridges and valleys
    on one of said members overlaps the face having ridges and valleys on the
    other of said members in a direction extending radially outwardly of the
    rotational axes of the members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158+,   for other coupling structure including intermeshing teeth on
    radially overlapping surfaces, and see the search notes following subclass
    158.


CLS 464/75
TXT Element is a continuous annulus extending around rotational axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 74 wherein said element is ringlike in shape
    and encircles the rotational axis of said members, said element including
    projecting portions around its circumference which fit between said nesting
    ridges and valleys.


CLS 464/76
TXT Plurality of disparate elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 73 including a plurality of individually
    separable elements.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass are distinguished from patents in
    subclass 73, in that, in subclass 73 a common element is shaped so as to
    provide surface portions between intermeshing teeth, while in this subclass
    (76) the elements are separable, at least at the initial stages of assembly
    between the teeth.


CLS 464/77
TXT Element is an open loop spring curved about rotational axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 51 wherein said element is an elongated
    resilient device bent into the general shape of an open circle with the
    free ends spaced from each other on one side of the rotational axis of
    members interconnected by said element, and the curved portion between the
    ends extends around the rotational axis.


CLS 464/78
TXT Element is a tube with slot through wall to provide flexibility:

    Subject matter under subclass 51 wherein said element is an elongated tube
    having an opening cut through the wall thereof to facilitate flexure of the
    element.


CLS 464/79
TXT Element includes diverging wall portions defining annular groove completely
    surrounding Rotational axis (e.g., bellows):

    Subject matter under subclass 51 wherein said element comprises a pair of
    walls which meet at a common juncture and diverge from said juncture, said
    walls at said juncture following a circular circumferential path which
    surrounds and completely encloses the rotational axis of said element with
    said diverging walls defining a groove surrounding said rotational axis.


CLS 464/80
TXT Nonmetallic:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 wherein said element is formed of a
    material other than metal.


CLS 464/81
TXT Plural circumferentially spaced elements:
    Subject matter under subclass 51 wherein there is provided a plurality of
    said elements spaced circumferentially from each other about the rotational
    axes of driving and driven members interconnected by said elements.


CLS 464/82
TXT Extending between radially overlapping surfaces on driving and driven
    members: Subject matter under subclass 81 wherein one of said members has a
    surface which overlaps a surface of the other of said members in a
    direction extending radially outwardly of the rotational axis, and wherein
    said elements extend between and interconnect said overlapping surfaces.


CLS 464/83
TXT Nonmetallic:

    Subject matter under subclass 82 wherein said elements are made of a
    material other than metal.


CLS 464/84
TXT Elements are bowed leaf springs:

    Subject matter under subclass 81 wherein said elements have a substantial
    length and width as compared to a thickness dimension, and are curved in
    the relaxed condition for deflection along said curve to provide flexure
    during torque transmission.


CLS 464/85
TXT Nonmetallic:

    Subject matter under subclass 81 wherein said elements are formed of a
    material other than metal.


CLS 464/86
TXT Axially extending torsion bars:

    Subject matter under subclass 81 wherein said elements are each in the form
    of an elongated rodlike device, and wherein flexibility is obtained by
    twist of said elements about their longitudinal axis.


CLS 464/87
TXT Nonmetallic element:

    Subject matter under subclass 51 wherein said element is made of a material
    other than metal.


CLS 464/88
TXT Element is hollow sleeve surrounding rotational axis and connected at
    opposite ends to axially spaced torque transmitting surfaces on driving and
    driven members: Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein said element is an
    elongated tube, the longitudinal axis of which is coincident with the
    rotational axes of driving and driven members interconnected by it, said
    tube being connected at one end to a torque transmitting surface on said
    driving member and being connected at the opposite end to a torque
    transmitting surface on said driven member.


CLS 464/89
TXT Extending between radially overlapping surfaces on driving and driven
    members: Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein one of a driving or
    driven member interconnected by said element has a surface which overlaps a
    surface on the other member in a direction extending radially outwardly of
    the rotational axis of said members, and wherein said element extends
    between and interconnects said overlapping surfaces.


CLS 464/90
TXT Plural elements radially overlapping:
    Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein a plurality of said elements are
    arranged in such a manner that one of said elements is positioned radially
    outwardly of another of said elements.


CLS 464/91
TXT Plural elements axially spaced along rotational axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein a plurality of said elements are
    spaced from each other along the rotational axes of the members.


CLS 464/92
TXT Annular element between and coincident with drive and driven members:

    Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein said element comprises a ring-like
    or apertured disc-like body having a rotational center which is coincident
    with the longitudinal axis of driving and driven members that are
    interconnected by said body.


CLS 464/93
TXT Including means to receive radially spaced axially extending projection on
    drive and driven members:

    Subject matter under subclass 92 wherein said body is provided with grooves
    or apertures for receiving an axially extending projection carried by each
    of said driving and driven members, said projections being spaced radially
    from the rotational axis of said members.


CLS 464/94
TXT Laminated element or plural elements abutting or spaced along rotational
    axis: Subject matter under subclass 93 wherein said body is formed of a
    plurality of laminated nonmetallic parts, or wherein a plurality of said
    bodies are distributed along the rotational axis of said members in either
    contacting or spaced apart relationship.


CLS 464/95
TXT With disparate spacer between plural separable elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 wherein said bodies are separable and
    spaced apart axially from each other, and wherein a separate spacer member
    formed of a different material than said bodies is positioned between said
    bodies.


CLS 464/96
TXT Laminated element or plural elements abutting or spaced along axis of
    rotation: Subject matter under subclass 92 wherein said body is formed of a
    plurality of nonmetallic parts laminated together, or wherein a plurality
    of said bodies are distributed along the rotational axis of said members in
    either contacting or spaced apart relationship.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94+,    for similar structure and further including means to receive
    radially spaced axially extending projections on the drive and driven
    members.


CLS 464/97
TXT Element is a torsion bar having a longitudinal axis coincident with the
    rotational axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 51 wherein said element is an elongated rod
    which transmits torque by rotation about its longitudinal axis which is
    coincident with the axes of the members, and wherein flexibility is
    obtained by twist of said rod about its longitudinal axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86,     for a coupling including plural, circumferentially spaced torsion
    bars.


CLS 464/98
TXT Element is plate with external edge completely surrounding rotational axis
    (e.g., disc):

    Subject matter under subclass 51 wherein said element connects driving and
    driven members and comprises a disc-like body having a center of rotation
    coinciding with, and an outer circumferential edge completely surrounding
    the rotational axes of the members.


CLS 464/99
TXT Plural axially spaced plates:

    Subject matter under subclass 98 wherein a plurality of said bodies are
    spaced apart axially from each other along the rotational axis.


CLS 464/100
TXT Element is leaf spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 51 wherein said element is a strip-like body
    having a substantially greater length and width when compared to its
    thickness dimension.


CLS 464/101
TXT Bowed:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein said body is curved in the
    relaxed condition for deflection along said curve to provide flexure during
    torque transmission.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     for a coupling including plural bowed leaf springs
    circumferentially spaced about the rotational axis.


CLS 464/102
TXT SEPARATE COUPLING DEVICE MOVABLE RADIALLY OF AXES TORQUE TRANSMITTING
    MEMBERS TO ACCOMMODATE PARALLEL, MISALIGNED AXES (E.G., OLDHAM COUPLING):

    A flexible coupling under the class definition including a disparate device
    positioned and between drive and driven members having rotational axes
    which are parallel but out of alignment with each other, said device being
    mounted for reciprocable movement in a radial direction during each
    revolution of the drive and driven members.


CLS 464/103
TXT Coupling device includes rolling body for transmitting torque:

    Subject matter under subclass 102 wherein torque is transmitted between the
    drive and driven members via a spherical or other rotary body, mounted for
    rotary motion about its own axis, which is spaced from the rotational axis
    of the drive and driven members.


CLS 464/104
TXT Coupling device has aperture or groove for receiving complementary driving
    projection on torque transmitting members:

    Subject matter under subclass 102 wherein said coupling device includes
    means defining an opening or channel into which is positioned a
    protuberance carried by the drive or driven member for relative
    reciprocable movement of said protuberance in said opening or channel.


CLS 464/105
TXT Projection-receiving slot extends completely through thickness dimension of
    coupler:

    Subject matter under subclass 104 wherein said device includes oppositely
    facing surfaces longitudinally spaced from each other along the rotational
    axes of the drive and driven members, and wherein said opening extends from
    one of said surfaces through the other of said surfaces.


CLS 464/106
TXT COUPLING ACCOMMODATES DRIVE BETWEEN MEMBERS HAVING MISALIGNED OR ANGULARLY
    RELATED AXES:

    A flexible coupling under the class definition including structure which
    facilitates transfer of rotary torque between members wherein the
    rotational axes of the members are out of alignment with each other, or
    wherein the rotational axis of one of the members defines an angle of less
    than 180_ with the rotational axis of the other of the members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for coupling structure which facilitates angular displacement of
    fluid-conducting rotary shafts.

    49,     50 and 102+, for particular kinds of couplings accommodating
    misalignment or angular relationship between coupled members.

    51+,    for coupling structure wherein torque is transmitted via an element
    made of flexible material and which may accommodate misaligned or angularly
    related axes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 15.6+ for a power takeoff
    from a shaft extension.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 254+ for a vehicle having a driven and
    steerable wheel and including a flexible drive transmitting means for
    transmitting torque to the wheel.

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, subclass 16 for a self-centering chuck or socket.

    403,    Joints and Connections, subclasses 52+ for a joint between
    articulated members other than rotary torque transmitting members.

    433,    Dentistry, subclass 112 for a flexible shaft transmission in dental
    apparatus.


CLS 464/107
TXT Coupling between wheel and vertically oriented shaft (e.g., millstone):

    Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein one of the members is a shaft
    having its rotational axis oriented in a vertical direction, and the other
    of the members is a rotary body including a hub portion mounted on said
    shaft for facilitating relative angular movement of the rotational axis of
    the hub with respect to the rotational axis of the shaft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 291+ for
    comminuting structure mounted on a drive shaft therefor.


CLS 464/108
TXT Wheel mounted on rolling body:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein balls or rollers support said hub
    for rotation.


CLS 464/109
TXT Coupling includes relatively movable gear segments:

    Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein said structure includes
    relatively movable parts having teeth interengageable with each other,
    wherein teeth on one of the parts sequentially move from engaged to
    disengaged positions with respect to cooperating teeth on the other of said
    parts when the axes of said members move to different relative angular
    positions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for a pivoted weight including a gear segment in a speed responsive
    device for adjusting the relative rotational position of coupled members.


CLS 464/110
TXT Coupling transmits torque via semicylindrical segments separated by pivot
    pin (e.g., slipper bearing):

    Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein said structure includes a pair of
    spaced semicylindrical parts interconnected between their ends by a pivot
    pin, the semicylindrical parts and pivot pin being received in a
    cylindrical aperture of one of said members, and the other of said members
    including an axially extending tongue portion pivotally mounted on said pin.


CLS 464/111
TXT Tripod coupling:

    Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein said structure includes three
    pins extending along its own axis which is angularly related with respect
    to the rotational axes of the driving and driven members, and the axes of
    the pins being circumferentially spaced 120_ apart about the rotational
    axes of the driving and driven members.


CLS 464/112
TXT Coupling transmits torque via radially directed pin:

    Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein said structure includes an
    element having a cylindrical surface wherein the axis of the cylinder
    extends in a radial direction perpendicular to the rotational axis of a
    part which carries the element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11+,    for a coupling including lubrication means associated with a
    radially directed pin.

    70+,    for a coupling including a pin received in an opening having an
    annular liner of flexible material.


CLS 464/113
TXT With additional axially spaced torque-transmitting coupling which
    facilitates relative movement between members:

    Subject matter under subclass 112, and further including an additional
    coupling spaced from said element in a direction along the rotational axes
    of said coupled members, said additional coupling facilitating relative
    movement of said coupled members during torque transmission.


CLS 464/114
TXT Radially directed pin in each coupling:
    Subject matter under subclass 113 wherein said additional coupling also
    includes an element having a cylindrical surface wherein the axis of the
    cylinder extends in a radial direction perpendicular to the axis of
    rotation of a part which carries the element.


CLS 464/115
TXT Pin slidable axially in slot:

    Subject matter under subclass 114 wherein one of said members includes
    walls defining a passage extending in the same direction as the rotational
    axis of said one of said members, said passageway receiving one of said
    elements and permitting relative axial movement of said one of said
    elements between said walls.


CLS 464/116
TXT Axially spaced pin-carrying parts interconnected by pivotal head and socket
    centering joint:

    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein a separate part carries each of
    said axially spaced coupling elements, and wherein one of said parts
    includes head structure arranged along the axis of rotation of
    interconnected members, and said other of said parts includes socket
    structure also arranged along the axis of rotation of said interconnected
    members, said head being received in said socket for relative pivotal
    movement to provide a centering effect.


CLS 464/117
TXT Plural pins in each coupling with pin ends spaced 90 degrees apart:

    Subject matter under subclass 114 wherein each of said parts carries a
    plurality of cylindrical elements, the ends of said elements on each part
    being spaced 90_ circumferentially about the rotational axis of the part.


CLS 464/118
TXT Axially spaced pin-carrying parts interconnected by pivotal head and socket
    centering joint:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 wherein a separate part carries each of
    said axially spaced coupling elements, and wherein one of said parts
    includes head structure arranged along the axis of rotation of said
    interconnected members, and said other of said parts includes socket
    structure also arranged along the axis of rotation of said interconnected
    members, said head being received in said socket for relative pivotal
    movement to provide a centering effect.


CLS 464/119
TXT Pins in sequential couplings oriented at right angles to each other:

    Subject matter under subclass 114 wherein the axis of the cylindrical
    element in one of said couplings is oriented 90_ with respect to the axis
    of said element in said axially spaced coupling.


CLS 464/120
TXT Pin slidable axially in slot:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein one of said members includes
    walls defining a passage extending in the same direction as the rotational
    axis of said one of said members, said passageway receiving said element
    and permitting relative axial movement of said element between said walls.


CLS 464/121
TXT Pin carried by intermediate element and slidable axially in slots in both
    coupled members:

    Subject matter under subclass 120 wherein each of said members includes
    walls defining a passage extending in the same direction as the rotational
    axis of said members, and wherein said element, carried by a separate part
    between said members, is positioned for relative axial movement in the
    passageways between the wall of each of said members.


CLS 464/122
TXT Pin carries disparate sleeve engaged with slot walls:

    Subject matter under subclass 120 wherein a separate member encircles said
    element and is movable therewith for engagement with the walls defining
    said passageway to guide said element during said relative axial movement.


CLS 464/123
TXT Sleeve rotatable about pin axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 122 wherein said separate member is rotatable
    about the axis of said element.


CLS 464/124
TXT Sleeve has spherical or semispherical bearing surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 123 wherein the surface of said member
    engageable with said walls is spherical or semispherical in cross-sectional
    configuration.


CLS 464/125
TXT Plural pins received in conforming apertures in ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein an annulus having a
    circumferentially continuous wall surrounds the axis of rotation of said
    members, said wall being provided with a plurality of circumferentially
    spaced openings, each of said openings receiving one of a plurality of
    circumferentially spaced torque transmitting elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12+,    for a coupling wherein a ring encapsulates a pin, and wherein the
    ring provides a lubricant passageway.


CLS 464/126
TXT Split ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 125 wherein said annulus is formed of
    separate parts, each of said parts including surface portions configured to
    provide a part of said openings.


CLS 464/127
TXT With particular balancing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein significance is attributed to
    structure for minimizing vibration imparted to coupled members during
    torque transmission.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180,    for a shaft having particular balancing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 572+ for a flywheel or
    rotor with vibration dampening or balancing means.


CLS 464/128
TXT With particular bearing cup surrounding pin end:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein significance is attributed to a
    separate cap which is positioned over the end of said element, said cap
    enclosing the top and extending at least partially along the cylindrical
    side surfaces of said element.


CLS 464/129
TXT Spherical or semispherical cup:

    Subject matter under subclass 128 wherein the external surface of said cap
    is spherical or semispherical in cross-sectional configuration.


CLS 464/130
TXT And disparate device for securing cup to pin or receiver:

    Subject matter under subclass 128 and further including a separate member
    for attaching said cap to said element or to a device which receives said
    element.


CLS 464/131
TXT And flexible seal:

    Subject matter under subclass 128 and further including a seal formed of
    flexible material, e.g., a lubricant seal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11+,    for a flexible coupling including lubricating means associated with
    a pin received in a conforming aperture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 549+ for a dynamic circumferential contact seal for
    other than a piston having a peripheral radially sealing flexible
    projection (e.g., lip seal, etc.).


CLS 464/132
TXT With particular bearing or bushing mounted on pin:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein significance is attributed to a
    separate device encircling said element for minimizing friction between
    said element and a part which pivots relative to said element.


CLS 464/133
TXT With particular flexible seal:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein significance is attributed to a
    seal made of flexible material, e.g., a lubricant seal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7+,     for a flexible coupling associated with particular lubricating
    means.

    131,    for a flexible seal associated with a bearing cup on a pin end.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 549+ for a dynamic, circumferential, contact seal for
    other than a piston having a peripheral radially sealing flexible
    projection (e.g., lip seal, etc.).


CLS 464/134
TXT With particular yoke providing pin-receiving aperture:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein significance is attributed to
    structure which is U-shaped or Y-shaped with one leg on each side of the
    axis of rotation of said members, the legs including openings for receiving
    a plurality of elements.


CLS 464/135
TXT Split yoke:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 wherein said structure is formed of
    separable parts.


CLS 464/136
TXT Plural pins carried by intermediate member with pin ends spaced 90 degrees
    apart: Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein a plurality of said
    cylindrical elements are carried by structure which is mounted between said
    members, and wherein the ends of said elements are spaced circumferentially
    90_ apart.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117+,   for axially spaced couplings each including plural pins with pin
    ends spaced 90_ apart.


CLS 464/137
TXT Coupling transmits torque via axially directed pin radially spaced from
    rotational axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein said structure includes an
    element having a cylindrical surface, and wherein the axis of the cylinder
    is radially spaced from the axis of rotation of said members and extends in
    a direction parallel to the axis of rotation of said members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71+,    for a coupling including an axially directed radially spaced pin
    received within an opening having a liner made of flexible material.


CLS 464/138
TXT Particular pivotal mounting for pin:
    Subject matter under subclass 137 wherein significance is attributed to
    means for mounting the element relative to its supporting structure in
    order to facilitate pivotal motion of the element.


CLS 464/139
TXT Coupling transmits torque via radially spaced ball:

    Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein said structure includes a
    spherical element spaced radially from the axis of rotation of said members
    for transmitting torque between said members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for a coupling including lubrication means associated with a
    radially spaced ball.

    35+,    for an overload release coupling having torque transmitted via a
    ball.


CLS 464/140
TXT With additional axially spaced torque-transmitting coupling which
    facilitates relative movement between members:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 and further including an additional
    coupling spaced from said spherical element in a direction along the
    rotational axes of said coupled members, said additional coupling
    facilitating relative movement of said coupled members during torque
    transmission.


CLS 464/141
TXT Ball mounted in groove for relative axial movement with respect to coupled
    member: Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein said spherical element is
    mounted in an axially extending channel formed in one of said members for
    relative axial movement of said element with respect to said one of said
    members.


CLS 464/142
TXT Mounted for relative axial movement with respect to both coupled members:

    Subject matter under subclass 41 wherein the other of said coupled members
    also includes means permitting relative axial movement between said element
    and said other of said coupled members.


CLS 464/143
TXT Grooves formed in radially overlapping elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 142 wherein an internal axially extending
    channel is formed on one of said members, and an external axially extending
    channel is formed on the other of said members, said internal channel being
    located radially outwardly from said external channel with and said
    spherical element being positioned for relative axial movement in each of
    said channels.


CLS 464/144
TXT Intersecting grooves:

    Subject matter under subclass 143 wherein the internal channel is out of
    alignment in an axial direction with the external channel.


CLS 464/145
TXT With intermediate positioning cage for ball:

    Subject matter under subclass 143 wherein a separate annular device is
    positioned intermediate said channels, said device including openings for
    receiving said spherical element.


CLS 464/146
TXT Bottom wall of groove in outer member is parallel to axial centerline of
    outer member (e.g., internally grooved cylinder): Subject matter under
    subclass 145 wherein said internal channel is defined by opposed side walls
    and a top wall, and said top wall extends in a direction parallel to the
    axial centerline of the member having said internal channel formed therein.


CLS 464/147
TXT Torque transmitted via intermediate element:

    Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein said structure includes means
    interconnecting driving and driven members, said means being relatively
    movable with respect to each of said members.


CLS 464/148
TXT Element carries or receives hook on opposite ends for connection to drive
    and driven members (e.g., link chain):

    Subject matter under subclass 147 wherein said interconnecting means
    includes cooperating parts, at least one of said parts including a portion
    bent back upon itself along the rotational axis to provide a loop which
    cooperates with a portion on the other of said parts to accommodate said
    relative movement during torque transmission.

    (1)     Note.  The term hook as used herein includes also an eye.


CLS 464/149
TXT Axially intermeshing teeth:

    Subject matter under subclass 147 wherein said interconnecting means
    includes a body having opposite end faces, each of said end faces having a
    surface defined by alternating axially facing ridges and valleys, said
    surfaces cooperating with complementary axially facing surfaces on said
    members to accommodate said relative movement during torque transmission.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for a coupling including lubrication means associated with
    intermeshing teeth.

    73,     for coupling structure including axially intermeshing teeth and
    having an element formed of flexible material between the teeth to transmit
    torque.

    157,    for other coupling structure including axially intermeshing teeth.


CLS 464/150
TXT Intermediate element located between overlapping surfaces on drive and
    driven members:

    Subject matter under subclass 147 wherein said interconnecting means
    includes a body positioned relative to the driving and driven members in
    such a manner that a plane perpendicular to the axis of rotation of said
    members intersects surface portions of said body and both of said members.


CLS 464/151
TXT Intermediate element is externally grooved or ribbed sphere:

    Subject matter under subclass 150 wherein said body is spherical and
    includes slots or projections on its outer surface for cooperating with
    complementary surfaces on the driving and driven members.


CLS 464/152
TXT Plural circumferentially spaced intermediate elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 150 including a plurality of said bodies
    circumferentially spaced from each other around the rotational axes of said
    driving and driven members.


CLS 464/153
TXT Intermediate element includes internal openings at opposite ends for
    receiving axially spaced ends on drive and driven members:

    Subject matter under subclass 147 wherein said interconnecting means
    comprises a body having opposite ends spaced axially along the axis of
    rotation, and wherein each of said ends includes a wall having a
    circumferentially continuous surface facing inwardly toward the rotational
    axis and configured to receive and mate with a complementary outwardly
    facing surface on axially spaced ends of the driving and driven members.


CLS 464/154
TXT Intermeshing teeth on element and members: Subject matter under subclass
    153 wherein said inwardly facing surfaces comprise alternating ridges and
    valleys which mesh with complementary alternating ridges and valleys
    forming said outwardly facing surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158+,   for other coupling structure including radially overlapping teeth,
    and see the search notes following subclasses 158+.


CLS 464/155
TXT Intermediate member includes external surface at opposite ends received in
    complementary openings in axially spaced ends of driving and driven members:

    Subject matter under subclass 147 wherein said interconnecting means
    comprises a body having opposite ends spaced axially along the axis of
    rotation, and wherein each of said ends includes a circumferentially
    continuous surface facing outwardly of the rotational axis, said outwardly
    facing surface being configured to mate with complementary inwardly facing
    surfaces defining openings in axially spaced ends of the driving and driven
    members.


CLS 464/156
TXT Intermeshing teeth on element and members: Subject matter under subclass
    155 wherein said outwardly facing surfaces comprise alternately ridges and
    valleys which nest with complementary alternating ridges and valleys
    forming said inwardly facing surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158+,   for other coupling structure including radially overlapping teeth,
    and see the search notes following subclass 158.


CLS 464/157
TXT Torque transmitted via intermeshing teeth on drive and driven members:

    Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein a surface on one of said members
    includes a plurality of alternating ridges and valleys which mate with a
    plurality of alternating ridges and valleys formed on a surface of the
    other of said members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for a coupling including lubrication means associated with
    intermeshing teeth.

    73+     and 149, for other coupling structure including axially
    intermeshing teeth.


CLS 464/158
TXT Teeth on radially overlapping surfaces:
    Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the alternating ridges and
    valleys on one of said members are formed on an inwardly facing surface
    which is located radially outwardly from the other of said surfaces having
    said alternating ridges and valleys.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for coupling structure including lubrication means associated with
    intermeshing teeth.

    74+,    154 and 156, for other coupling structure including radially
    overlapping intermeshing teeth.


CLS 464/159
TXT Spherical or semispherical surfaces:
    Subject matter under subclass 158 wherein at least one of said surfaces
    carrying said alternating ridges and valleys is spherical or partially
    spherical in shape.


CLS 464/160
TXT COUPLING FACILITATES RELATIVE ROTARY DISPLACEMENT BETWEEN COUPLED MEMBERS:

    A flexible coupling under the class definition wherein means is provided to
    accommodate relative rotation between coupled members about their
    respective rotational axes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for a coupling including a speed responsive device to adjust
    relative rotational position of coupled members.

    24+,    for a coupling wherein a fluid is used to affect the movement of
    coupled members.

    30+,    for a coupling wherein relative rotary displacement occurs due to
    overload release.

    51+,    for a coupling facilitating relative rotary motion wherein torque
    is transmitted via an element made of flexible material.


CLS 464/161
TXT Members coupled via axially movable, resiliently biased intermediate
    element: Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein torque is transmitted
    from one member to the other via a separate body, said body being movable
    relative to both of said members along the axis of rotation of the members,
    and said body being biased by a spring along said axial direction.


CLS 464/162
TXT COUPLING FACILITATES RELATIVE AXIAL MOTION BETWEEN COUPLED MEMBERS:

    A flexible coupling under the class definition having means to accommodate
    relative movement between the coupled members along their rotational axes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18+,    for a coupling facilitating relative axial motion between
    interconnected shafts in a drill string.

    24+,    for a coupling wherein a fluid is used to affect movement of
    coupled members.

    51+,    for a coupling facilitating relative axial motion wherein torque is
    transmitted via an element made of flexible material.

    172,    for a coupling facilitating relative telescopic movement between
    mating housing parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 165+ for means to drive a
    tool about an axis and including a relatively fixed drive for an advancing
    tool.

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 43+, 49, 50+ for an antifriction ball or
    roller bearing.


CLS 464/163
TXT Coupling between rotary drive table and axially movable drill string:

    Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein one of said members is a rotating
    pipe used in an earth-boring operation, and the other of said members is a
    device positioned around the external circumference of the pipe for
    transmitting rotary torque to the pipe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18+,    for a coupling facilitating relative movement between
    interconnected shafts in a drill string.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclasses 165+ for means to drive a
    tool about an axis and including a relatively fixed drive for an advancing
    tool.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 195 for a rotary drive
    table for a relatively advancing tool wherein significance is attributed to
    table structure.


CLS 464/164
TXT Coupler includes endless belt or chain run engageable with drill string and
    movable in direction of axial advance:

    Subject matter under subclass 163 wherein said coupling means comprises a
    closed loop belt or chain entrained for movement around and between spaced
    rotational axes, and wherein one run of said belt or chain engages and
    moves with said pipe along the rotational axis of the pipe.


CLS 464/165
TXT Coupler includes antifriction rolling body engageable with drill string:

    Subject matter under subclass 163 wherein said coupling means includes a
    body rotatable about its own axis and engaging the external periphery of
    the pipe for facilitating axial movement of the pipe.


CLS 464/166
TXT With screw device for adjusting radial position of rolling body:

    Subject matter under subclass 165 and including an elongated threaded
    member rotatable about its own axis and coupled to said rotary body in such
    a manner that rotary movement of the threaded member causes linear movement
    of said rotary body in a direction toward or away from the rotational axis
    of the pipe.


CLS 464/167
TXT Coupler includes antifriction rolling body engageable with axially moveable
    member: Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein said coupling means
    includes a body rotatable about its own axis and engaging the external
    periphery of one of said members for facilitating axial movement of said
    one of said members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165,    for an antifriction roller engageable with an axially movable drill
    string.


CLS 464/168
TXT Recirculating rolling bodies:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 wherein a plurality of bodies mounted for
    movement individually along a closed loop path are supported for engagement
    with said axially movable member along a axial extent of the member.


CLS 464/169
TXT Including spring to bias member in axial direction:

    Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein a resilient device is associated
    with one of said members to bias said member along the rotational axis of
    the member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20+,    for resilient means biasing relatively movable, fluid conducting
    rotary shafts in an axial direction.

    36,     38+, 43+, and 46+, for axially resilient biasing means associated
    with an overload release coupling.


CLS 464/170
TXT HOUSING:

    A housing as defined in the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52+,    for a housing combined with a torque transmitting member made of
    flexible material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 606+ for a gear casing.


CLS 464/171
TXT Rigid semispherical surface on one housing part slidably engaged with
    surface on mating housing part:

    Subject matter under subclass 170 wherein said enclosure is formed of a
    plurality of relatively movable components, one of said components being
    rigid and having a semispherical surface portion which engages a
    corresponding surface portion on another of said components.


CLS 464/172
TXT Telescoping cylindrical housing members:
    Subject matter under subclass 170 wherein said enclosure is formed of a
    plurality of cylindrical components, one of said components fitting within
    the other of said components, and said components being mounted with
    respect to each other for relative movement along the rotational axis of
    the shaft or coupling which is surrounded by said enclosure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162+,   for a coupling facilitating relative axial motion between torque
    transmitting members.


CLS 464/173
TXT Flexible housing:

    Subject matter under subclass 170 wherein the enclosure is formed of a
    material which is flexible, per se, or which is configured in such a manner
    as to permit flexure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52+,    for a flexible housing combined with a shaft of flexible material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 18 for motion transmitting
    means including a flexible sealing diaphragm connected to a moving rod and
    casing; and subclasses 489 and 500.5+ for flexible push-pull motion
    transmitting means such as a Bowden Cable.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 118+ for a flexible conduit.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclass 504 for a dynamic, circumferential, contact seal for
    other than a piston that accommodates gyratory or oscillatory motion by
    using a flexible connection having static contact between the seal and one
    of the relatively movable parts or subclasses 634+ for a static, contact
    seal for other than an internal combustion engine, or a pipe, conduit, or
    cable that is a flexible sleeve, boot, or diaphragm.


CLS 464/174
TXT Helically coiled member:

    Subject matter under subclass 173 wherein said enclosure includes a
    helically coiled component.


CLS 464/175
TXT Corrugated structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 173 wherein said enclosure has an undulating
    surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79+,    for a flexible element in the form of a bellows which transmits
    torque.


CLS 464/176
TXT Pivotally mounted housing supported for movement between open and closed
    positions: Subject matter under subclass 170 wherein said enclosure
    includes a component which is pivotally supported about an axis so that
    said component can be moved to permit access to the shaft or coupling
    surrounded by said enclosure.


CLS 464/177
TXT Separably connected housings for separably connected shafts:

    Subject matter under subclass 170 comprising separate enclosures for
    separate shafts and including means for interconnecting said separate
    enclosures when said shafts are interconnected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52+,    for a housing combined with a shaft of flexible material and
    including means for attachment to an auxiliary housing.

    182,    for a disparate device for separably connecting one shaft to
    another.


CLS 464/178
TXT With rolling body supporting shaft in housing:

    Subject matter under subclass 170 wherein a body rotatable about its own
    axis is mounted between said enclosure and a shaft surrounded by said
    enclosure for facilitating rotation of said shaft within said enclosure.


CLS 464/179
TXT SHAFTING:

    A shaft as defined in the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51+,    for a shaft made of flexible material or a shaft including flexible
    material providing a torque transmitting coupling between shaft sections.

    106+,   for a shaft made of sections articulated along the longitudinal
    extent of the shaft axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    295,    Railway Wheels and Axles, subclasses 36+ for an axle of that class.

    301,    Land Vehicle:  Wheels and Axles, subclasses 124.1+ for an axle of
    that class.

    440,    Marine Propulsion, subclass 83 for shafting with a screw propeller
    in marine propulsion apparatus.


CLS 464/180
TXT Particular vibration dampening or balancing structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 179 wherein significance is attributed to
    structure associated with the shaft for the purpose of minimizing unwanted
    vibrations during torque transmission or for providing a desirable balance
    to the shaft structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for balancing means associated with a trunnion style of universal
    joint.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 572+ for a flywheel or
    rotor with balancing or vibration dampening means.


CLS 464/181
TXT Nonmetallic shaft or component:

    Subject matter under subclass 179 wherein said shaft or a portion thereof
    is made of a material other than metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51+,    for a shaft made of flexible material or combined with an element
    made of flexible material to provide a torque transmitting coupling between
    shaft sections.


CLS 464/182
TXT With disparate device for coupling shaft to additional shaft or rotary body:

    Subject matter under subclass 179 wherein separate means is provided to
    connect the shaft to another shaft or to another rotary body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52+,    for a flexible shaft and housing which may include means to couple
    to an auxiliary shaft and housing.

    177,    for separably connected housings for separably connected shafts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 15.6+ for a power takeoff
    from a shaft extension.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for a joint or
    connector, per se, and see a reference to the line in the search class
    notes following the general definition of Class 464.


CLS 464/183
TXT Hollow or layered shaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 179 wherein said shaft is hollow along its
    length, or wherein the shaft is formed of plural concentric layers of
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18+,    for a flexible coupling between rotary fluid-conducting shafts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, appropriate subclasses for a hollow
    pipe.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 320+ for a tool shaft
    detail, and see the reference to Class 175 in the search class notes under
    the class definition of Class 464.


CLS 464/184
TXT GUDGEONS:

    A gudgeon as defined in the class definition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, for a roll or roller, per se, having a generally
    cylindrical work contacting surface.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclass 326 for
    a gudgeon combined with a roller that accumulates material on a roll.


CLS 464/185
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition not provided for in the previous
    subclasses.



    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 464/900
TXT ELECTRICALLY INSULATIVE MEMBER:

    Structure wherein significance is attributed to the use of a material
    having electrically insulative properties in a shaft or shaft coupling.


CLS 464/901
TXT RAPID ATTACHMENT OR RELEASE:

    Structure wherein significance is attributed to means which enables coupled
    members to be quickly connected or disconnected.


CLS 464/902
TXT PARTICULAR MATERIAL:

    Structure wherein significance is attributed to the particular composition
    of material used in making a structure of this class.


CLS 464/903
TXT Nonmetal:

    Subject matter under subclass 902 wherein the composition includes a
    nonmetallic component.


CLS 464/904
TXT HOMOKINETIC COUPLING:

    A flexible coupling wherein significance is attributed to structure that
    obtains a uniform angular velocity between input and output members.


CLS 464/905
TXT Torque transmitted via radially extending pin:

    Subject matter under subclass 904 wherein torque is transmitted by a pin
    which extends radially outwardly of the rotational axes of the coupled
    members.


CLS 464/906
TXT Torque transmitted via radially spaced balls:

    Subject matter under subclass 904 wherein torque is transmitted by
    spherical elements spaced radially outwardly of the rotational axis of the
    coupled members.


CLS 470/
TTL THREADED, HEADED FASTENER,  OR WASHER MAKING:  PROCESS  AND APPARATUS

CLS 470/
TXT INDEX TO CLASS DEFINITIONS AND NOTES


    I.      CLASS DEFINITION

    II.     RELATIONSHIP TO OTHER MANUFACTURING CLASSES

    III.    MISCELLANEOUS SEARCH NOTES

    I.      CLASS DEFINITION

    This class provides for processes, machines, devices, and implements which
    are either:

    (a)     specialized and limited for manufacturing bolts, rivets, nails,
    screws, nuts and washers including the formation of internal and external
    screw-threads, or

    (b)     capable of manufacturing bolts, rivets, nails, screws, nuts and
    washers by an operation other than cutting by use of a rotating axially
    moving tool; or

    (c)     capable of manufacturing rivets, nails, screws, nuts and washers
    which may include a step of cutting by use of a rotating axially moving but
    also includes a step of materially treating bolts, rivets, nails, screws,
    nuts and washers.

    II.     RELATIONSHIP TO OTHER MANUFACTURING CLASSES

    Class 470 provides for the specialized manufacture or other operations of
    manufacturing of articles of its class.  However other classes provide for
    similar manufacturing operations, machines, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, for machines capable of manufacturing machine screws
    but additionally capable of forming other similar parts or articles such as
    binding posts, spoke nipples, etc., particularly subclasses 33+.

    72,     Metal Deforming, for machines and processes for forming articles of
    this class but wherein the forming operation is limited only to a metal
    deforming operation.  A machine, process, etc., having a deforming step of
    an article of Class 470 and another operation on the article is properly
    classifiable in Class 470.  See the note relating to Class 470 in section
    V. subsection A. of the Class Definitions of Class 72.

    82,     Turning, for machines and processes limited to thread cutting
    operations in which the operation is limited to the Class 82 operation
    particularly subclasses 110+, and without any other operation associated
    with bolt or screw formation.  See the note relating to Class 470 in the
    Search Class notes of the Class Definitions of Class 82.

    83,     Cutting, for machines and processes for manufacturing nuts and
    washers by cold-punching or shearing operations in which the operation is
    limited to a Class 83 operations and without any other operation associated
    with nut or washer formation.  See the note relating to Class 470 in
    section I. of the Class 83 Class Definitions.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, machines, process,
    etc. for drilling, screwing threading, or machining of a screw, bolt or nut
    wherein the machine, process, etc. is of general utility capable of
    performing operations on articles other than those of Class 470 in section
    IV. of the Class Definitions of Class 408.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, for machines or processes for
    milling a thread, particularly subclasses 65+, in which the operation is
    limited to Class 409 operations and without any other operation associated
    with bolt or screw formation or in which the machine or process is of
    general utility capable of performing milling operations on articles other
    than those of Class 470.

    451,    Abrading, for a machine or process limited to thread forming
    operations by grinding, particularly subclass 48. If machine or process
    provides for operations for forming articles of this class in addition to a
    grinding operation, the patent disclosing same is properly classified in
    Class 470.


    III.    MISCELLANEOUS SEARCH NOTES

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses for presses otherwise provided for
    and particularly the note (49) under section IV. and note (59) of Class 100
    Class Definitions related to Class 470.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, appropriate subclasses for subject
    matter directed driving or impacting a tool, when such subject matter
    includes combined features peculiar to tool driving.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclasses 82+, for combined machines for forming and
    subsequently driving a member, e.g., nail, staple, etc.

    249,    Static Molds, for machines for static molding for forming a helical
    or threaded product by molding particularly subclass 59.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fasteners, subclasses 337+, for bolts, screws, nails,
    washers and similar fasteners, per se.

    483,    Tool Changing, for machines or processes comprising a tool transfer
    means combined with either a tool support of storage means.


CLS 470/1
TXT PROCESS:
    Subject matter under the class definition for a method of manufacturing a
    threaded fastener, a headed fastener, or a washer.


CLS 470/2
TXT Assembling or disassembling fastener with element:
    Subject matter under subclass 1 for a method of associating or
    disassociating a threaded fastener with means structured to co-operate and
    function with the fastener.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46      and 48+, for concurrent apparatuses for assembling a fastener with
    an element for this subclass and its lineal indented subclasses, i.e.,
    subclasses 2 to 7.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 428+ for methods of assembly.  The
    fasteners and elements being assembled in this subclass (Class 470 subclass
    2) are formed such that the fastener and element are integral such that
    disassembly would require destruction of the fastener or element.


CLS 470/3
TXT Bolt or screw with washer:
    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the fastener comprises an
    externally threaded securing device having an enlargement at an end of the
    device structured to function as a head therefor, i.e., a bolt or screw,
    and further wherein the device is associated with means structured to
    co-operate and function with the fastener in the form of a perforated disk
    or annular component, i.e., a washer.


CLS 470/4
TXT By telescoping:
    Subject matter under subclass 3 wherein the nut or washer associated with
    the bolt or screw by moving the nut or washer along the longitudinal axis
    of the bolt or screw.


CLS 470/5
TXT Attaching cap to fastener:
    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein means structured to co-operate and
    function with the fastener comprises a covering for an end of the fastener.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184,    for concurrent apparatuses for capping dies for nails or screws.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 428+ for methods of assembly.  The
    processes of this subclass (Class 470, subclass 5) are such specialized
    manufacturing methods making them proper for Class 470.


CLS 470/6
TXT Screw fastener:
    Subject matter under subclass 5 wherein the fastener comprises an
    externally threaded fastener having threads which converge to a point on an
    end of the fastener.


CLS 470/7
TXT Nail fastener:
    Subject matter under subclass 5 wherein the fastener comprises a structure
    having an impact receiving surface adapted to receive an axially applied
    force which causes the fastener to penetrate material, substructure, or
    other work desired to be fastened.


CLS 470/8
TXT Making externally threaded fastener, e.g., screw or bolt:
    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the fastener is a threaded fastener
    comprising an externally threaded securing device having an enlargement at
    an end of the device structured to function as a head therefor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57+,    for concurrent apparatuses for forming the fasteners formed in this
    subclass and its lineal indents, i.e., subclasses 8 to 17.


CLS 470/9
TXT Screw:
    Subject matter under subclass 8 wherein the fastener comprises an
    externally threaded fastener having threads which converge to a point on an
    end of the fastener.


CLS 470/10
TXT Forming thread:
    Subject matter under subclass 9 having a step of producing an exterior
    helical ridge on the fastener.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185+,   for screw threading dies, per se.


CLS 470/11
TXT Bolt:
    Subject matter under subclass 8 wherein the fastener comprises an
    externally threaded fastener.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191,    for bolt forming dies, per se, 205 for bolt head punching dies, per
    se.


CLS 470/12
TXT Having specific configuration:
    Subject matter under subclass 11 wherein significance is attributed to the
    shape of the fastener.


CLS 470/13
TXT U-frame type:
    Subject matter under subclass 12 wherein the fastener comprises a plural
    shanked structure formed in the shape of the letter U.


CLS 470/14
TXT Hollow bolt type:
    Subject matter under subclass 12 wherein the fastener is provided with a
    longitudinally extending bore or cavity.


CLS 470/15
TXT And prong:
    Subject matter under subclass 14 wherein the fastener is further provided
    with a portion structured as a penetrating end to allow the fastener to be
    used as impact driven fastener.


CLS 470/16
TXT Formed by extrusion:
    Subject matter under subclass 11 having a step of shaping by forcing the
    fastener through a die.


CLS 470/17
TXT Formed by heat treatment:
    Subject matter under subclass 11 having a step of heating or cooling the
    fastener to produce desired properties or conditions.


CLS 470/18
TXT Making internally threaded fastener, e.g., nut:
    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the fastener is provided with an
    internal helical ridge.


CLS 470/19
TXT Lock-nut type, e.g., castellated nut:
    Subject matter under subclass 18 wherein the means secures the fastener to
    a bolt or screw.


CLS 470/20
TXT Having securement feature:
    Subject matter under subclass 18 wherein the fastener is further provided
    with means for securing the fastener to another structure.


CLS 470/21
TXT Fusible or deformable type:
    Subject matter under subclass 20 wherein the means comprises a
    metallurgical property of the fastener allowing it to be fused during a
    heating operation or allowing it to readily mechanically deformed during a
    metal forming operation.


CLS 470/22
TXT Weld nut type:
    Subject matter under subclass 21 wherein the fastener is capable of being
    fused during a welding operation.


CLS 470/23
TXT Having driver engagement feature, e.g., wing nut, etc.:
    Subject matter under subclass 18 wherein the fastener is provided with
    structure for receiving a means used to move the fastener during its
    fastening operation.


CLS 470/24
TXT Having decorative feature, e.g., cap nut, etc.:
    Subject matter under subclass 18 wherein the fastener is provided with
    structure functioning solely for aesthetic purposes.


CLS 470/25
TXT Formed by metal working:
    Subject matter under subclass 18 having a step of shaping metal.


CLS 470/26
TXT Forging:
    Subject matter under subclass 25 further having a step of heating metal.


CLS 470/27
TXT Making headed fastener, e.g., rivet or nail, etc.:
    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the fastener having an enlargement
    at an end of the device structured to function as a head therefor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110+,   for concurrent apparatuses for forming the fasteners formed in this
    subclass and its lineal indents, i.e., subclasses 27 to 40; 168+ for nail
    plate feeders, per se; 191 for rivet forming dies, per se; 205 for rivet
    head punching dies, per se;


CLS 470/28
TXT Rivet type:
    Subject matter under subclass 27 wherein the fastener is provided with an
    end structure consisting of a polycrystalline metallic grain structure
    which when subjected to an externally applied force is plastically flowable.


CLS 470/29
TXT Hollow type:
    Subject matter under subclass 28 wherein the fastener is provided with a
    longitudinally extending bore or cavity.


CLS 470/30
TXT Having prong:
    Subject matter under subclass 29 wherein the fastener is further provided
    with a portion structured as a penetrating end to allow the fastener to be
    used as impact driven fastener.


CLS 470/31
TXT Formed by extrusion:
    Subject matter under subclass 28 having a step of shaping by forcing the
    fastener through a die.


CLS 470/32
TXT Formed by heat treatment:
    Subject matter under subclass 28 having a step of heating or cooling the
    fastener to produce desired properties or conditions.


CLS 470/33
TXT And pressure, e.g., forging:
    Subject matter under subclass 32 having an additional step of applying
    pressure to the fastener.


CLS 470/34
TXT Nail type:
    Subject matter under subclass 27 wherein the fastener comprises a structure
    having an impact receiving surface adapted to receive an axially applied
    force which causes the fastener to penetrate material, substructure, or
    other work desired to be fastened.


CLS 470/35
TXT Horseshoe:
    Subject matter under subclass 34 wherein the fastener is structured for
    securing a shoe to the foot of a mammal in the family Equidae.


CLS 470/36
TXT Formed by heat treatment and metal shaping, i.e., wrought type:Subject
    matter under subclass 35 having a step of heating or cooling a fastener and
    a step of shaping the fastener.


CLS 470/37
TXT Formed by severing, i.e., cut type:
    Subject matter under subclass 34 having a step of penetrating stock
    material being used to form the fastener with a sharp forming instrument or
    separating a portion of stock material being used to form the fastener.


CLS 470/38
TXT Formed by heat treatment and metal shaping, i.e., wrought type:Subject
    matter under subclass 34 having a step of heating or cooling a fastener and
    a step of shaping the fastener.


CLS 470/39
TXT Spike type:
    Subject matter under subclass 38 wherein the fastener has substantially
    large dimensions such that the fastener can be used for securing
    substantially large structures or materials.


CLS 470/40
TXT Wire type:
    Subject matter under subclass 34 wherein the fastener is fabricated from an
    elongated piece of metal stock having a circular cross sectional dimension
    which is much smaller than the longitudinal dimension of the stock.


CLS 470/41
TXT Making washer:
    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the fastener comprises an annular
    element adapted to be placed beneath the bearing surface of a bolt head,
    nut, or similar article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162+,   for apparatuses for making washers.

    165+    for washer feeders, per se.

    197+    for washer forming die.

    206,    for washer arbors, per se.


CLS 470/42
TXT Lock-washer type:
    Subject matter under subclass 41 wherein the fastener is provided with
    means to secure same to another structure.


CLS 470/43
TXT APPARATUS HAVING SAFETY MECHANISM:
    Subject matter under the class definition for apparatus provided with means
    to prevent damage to either a human operator thereof or to the apparatus or
    any component thereof.


CLS 470/44
TXT APPARATUS HAVING AUTOMATIC CONTROL:
    Subject matter under the class definition for apparatus with:


    (A)     means for detecting a characteristic of the work part to be
    assembled, the assembled product, the assembling apparatus, or the
    environment of the assembling apparatus affecting its operation,
    hereinafter referred to as:  the sensor;

    (B)     means for initiating or modifying a force or impulse other than
    that generated or transmitted by the means for detecting; hereinafter
    referred to as:  the activator;

    (C)     means for regulating or modifying an operation of the assembling
    apparatus; hereinafter to as:  the controller.

    (1)     Note.  This definition requires a document to claim or disclose at
    least four instrumentalities for placement herein, i.e., an assembly
    apparatus, a sensor, an activator, and a controller.  For example, a
    document disclosing an assembly machine having a cam follower that makes
    and breaks an electrical circuit that energizes a motor which regulates or
    modified a part of the machine would be properly classified in this
    subclass.  However, a machine having a cam follower directly linked to a
    controller, whereby the follower movement directly effects the controller
    movement is improperly classified in this subclass due to the lack of an
    activator required by the definition; such an assembly apparatus would be
    properly classified in subclasses 48+ below.


CLS 470/45
TXT Having means sensing a condition or change in a condition:
    Subject matter under subclass 44 including:


    (A)     means to sense a condition of the work part, the work product, the
    apparatus or the environment of the apparatus; and

    (B)     means to sense a corresponding condition of information supply to
    the apparatus;

    (C)     means relate a sensed condition;

    (D)     means to regulate the operation of the apparatus in accordance with
    any difference between sensed conditions.


CLS 470/46
TXT For assembling fastener and washer:
    Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein apparatus is capable of
    associating a threaded or headed fastener with a perforated disk or annular
    component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49+,    for apparatuses for assembling fasteners with washers or other
    elements.


CLS 470/47
TXT APPARATUS HAVING MEANS FOR MEASURING OR TESTING:
    Subject matter under the class definition for apparatus provided with means
    for determining a qualitative or quantitative characteristic or condition
    of the apparatus or material being processed or operated on by the
    apparatus.


CLS 470/48
TXT APPARATUS FOR ASSEMBLING OR DISASSEMBLING FASTENER WITH ELEMENT:Subject
    matter under the class definition for apparatus associating or
    disassociating a fastener with means structured to co-operate and function
    with the fastener.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 700+ for machines for assembly.  See the
    notes to subclasses 700 for an explanation of the subject matter
    encompassed therein.

    81,     Tools, subclasses 54+ for machine wrenches or screwdrivers capable
    of turning rotatable work, e.g., bolts, nuts, screws, etc.


CLS 470/49
TXT Headed fastener with element, e.g., bolt with nut and washer:Subject matter
    under subclass 48 wherein the fastener comprises a securing device having
    an enlargement at an end of the device structured to function as a head
    therefor, i.e., a bolt, and further wherein the device is associated with
    means structured to co-operate and function with the device e.g., an
    internally threaded component such as nut, or a perforated disk or annular
    component such as a washer.


CLS 470/50
TXT Having telescoping means:
    Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein the means structured to co-operate
    with the device is associated with the device by the moving the
    co-operating means along the longitudinal axis of the securing device.


CLS 470/51
TXT Attaching cap to fastener:
    Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein the means structured to co-operate
    and function with the device comprises a covering for an end of the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184,    for nail or screw capping dies, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 243.5+ for machines, otherwise unprovided
    for, for assembling elements or parts by engaging a portion of one over
    another.  The machines of this subclass (Class 470 subclass 51) are so
    specialized as to make them proper for Class 470.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus for driving a member into work.


CLS 470/52
TXT Screw fastener:
    Subject matter under subclass 51 wherein the device comprises an externally
    threaded fastener having threads which converge to a point on an end of the
    fastener.


CLS 470/53
TXT Nail fastener:
    Subject matter under subclass 51 wherein the device comprises a structure
    having an impact receiving surface adapted to receive an axially applied
    force which causes the device to penetrate material, substructure, or other
    work desired to be fastened.


CLS 470/54
TXT Having nicking means:
    Subject matter under subclass 51 wherein the apparatus is provided with a
    component capable of forming a shallow notch, cut, or indentation in the
    covering.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60+,    for apparatus for head nicking screws and bolts.


CLS 470/55
TXT Having means to feed rectangular stock:
    Subject matter under subclass 51 wherein the apparatus is provided with a
    component capable of supplying work material, having a rectangular cross
    section, to the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    164,    for feeder or distributors, per se.


CLS 470/56
TXT Having rotatable workholder:
    Subject matter under subclass 51 wherein the apparatus is provided with a
    component capable of securing work material and further wherein the
    component is capable of rotating the work material relative to the
    remainder of the apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 345 for rotatable conveyor with
    means for aligning the conveyed load at a work station, and other
    subclasses for a rotatable conveyor.


CLS 470/57
TXT APPARATUS FOR MAKING EXTERNALLY THREADED FASTENER OR ARTICLE, E.G., SCREW,
    BOLT ETC.:Subject matter under the class definition for apparatus for
    manufacturing a securing device or element having an external helical ridge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, for machines capable of manufacturing machine screws
    but additionally capable of forming other similar parts or articles such as
    binding posts, spoke nipples, etc., particularly subclasses 33+.


CLS 470/58
TXT Screw fastener making:
    Subject matter under subclass 57 for apparatus for manufacturing a securing
    device, i.e., a fastener, having an external helical ridge which converges
    to point on an end of the device.


CLS 470/59
TXT Wooden screw:
    Subject matter under subclass 58 wherein the fastener is composed of
    cellulose extracted from interior part of a tree.


CLS 470/60
TXT Having head nicking:
    Subject matter under subclass 58 provided with a component capable of
    forming a shallow notch, cut, or indentation in a head of the fastener.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 64+ for shaping
    material by means of a toothed rotary cutter unprovided for elsewhere.


CLS 470/61
TXT And shaving means:
    Subject matter under subclass 60 further provided with a mechanism capable
    of securing work material and further wherein the mechanism is capable of
    rotating the work material relative to the remainder of the apparatus.


CLS 470/62
TXT And rotatable workholder:
    Subject matter under subclass 60 further provided with a mechanism capable
    of securing work material and further wherein the mechanism is capable of
    rotating the work material relative to the remainder of the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for horseshoe nail manufacturing machines having a rotary
    workholder; 129 for wire nail manufacturing machines having rotary
    workholders; for spike manufacturing machines having rotary workholders.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses.  Class 269 is the residual
    locus for patents to a device for clamping, supporting and/or holding an
    article(s) in position to be operated on or treated.  See notes therein for
    other related loci.


CLS 470/63
TXT Punch and die type:
    Subject matter under subclass 60 wherein the component comprises an first
    element, i.e., a punch, co-operating with a second element, i.e., a die,
    whereby the notch, cut or indentation is produced a blow or thrust applied
    to the punch as the fastener is held between the punch and die.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205,    bolt or rivet heading punches, per se.


CLS 470/64
TXT Having head shaving means:
    Subject matter under subclass 58 wherein the fastener is provided with an
    enlargement at one end of the fastener, i.e., a head, and wherein the
    apparatus is provided with a component capable of removing material in thin
    layers or slices from the head.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150,    for nail or rivet head finishing machines.


CLS 470/65
TXT Having pointing means:
    Subject matter under subclass 58 wherein the apparatus is provided with a
    component capable of producing a conical or conoidal point on the fastener.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80+,    for machines capable of pointing a blank by the use of
    threading-chaser which simultaneously threads the remainder of the blank.



CLS 470/66
TXT Having thread cutting means:
    Subject matter under subclass 58 wherein the apparatus is provided with a
    component capable of producing a helical ridge on the fastener.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111+,   screw threading dies, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    82,     Turning, for machines and processes limited to thread cutting
    operations in which the operation is limited to the Class 82 operation
    particularly subclasses 110+, and without any other operation associated
    with bolt or screw formation.  In addition, Class 82 provides for thread
    forming or cutting machines or devices which solely claim or disclose the
    cutting of threads on pipes or conduits.  Similar cutting machines or
    devices solely claiming or disclosing the cutting of threads on fasteners
    are proper in Class 470.  See the note relating to Class 470 in the Search
    Class notes of the Class Definitions Class 82.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 65+ for a thread
    milling machine.


CLS 470/67
TXT Portable:
    Subject matter under subclass 66 wherein the apparatus is capable of being
    transported with relative ease.


CLS 470/68
TXT And pointing means:
    Subject matter under subclass 66 wherein the apparatus is provided with a
    component capable of producing a conical or conoidal point on the fastener.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80+,    for machines capable of forming a point by a chasing-cutter while
    also threading the remainder of the screw.


CLS 470/69
TXT And severing means:
    Subject matter under subclass 66 wherein the apparatus is further provided
    with a mechanism capable of penetrating stock material being used to form
    the fastener by the use of a sharp forming instrument or separating a
    portion of stock material being used to form the fastener.


CLS 470/70
TXT Having plural dies:
    Subject matter under subclass 66 wherein the apparatus is further provided
    with a mechanism comprising two or more elements capable of cutting,
    shaping or stamping a portion of the fastener.


CLS 470/71
TXT Axial aligned:
    Subject matter under subclass 70 wherein the the longitudinal axes of the
    elements along a common line.


CLS 470/72
TXT Turret mounted:
    Subject matter under subclass 70 wherein the elements are installed on a
    rotatable device structured to hold and secure the elements during a
    cutting, shaping, or stamping operation.


CLS 470/73
TXT Having collapsible die:
    Subject matter under subclass 66 wherein the apparatus is further provided
    with a mechanism provided with two elements structured to cooperate to cut,
    shape, or stamp a portion of the fastener and further wherein the elements
    are capable of opening or closing with each other such that work material
    being used to form the fastener can be separated from the mechanism without
    having to unscrew the material from the mechanism.

    (1)     Note.  The elements or dies used to form the threads on the
    fastener are know in this art as "chasers".


CLS 470/74
TXT And bevel operator:
    Subject matter under subclass 73 wherein the elements are mounted on and
    interact with a wedgeshaped device such that axial movement of the device
    causes the elements to open or close allowing for the insertion or removal
    of the fastener.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, subclasses 37, 47, 48+, 50, 51+, 54, 56, 57,
    58+, and the subclasses indented under Socket type, Radially-reciprocating
    jaws, Moving-cam actuator (subclasses 69+).


CLS 470/75
TXT And cam operator:
    Subject matter under subclass 73 wherein the elements are mounted on and
    interact with a device in the form of an eccentrically shaped wheel mounted
    on a rotating shaft producing reciprocating motion causing the elements to
    open or close allowing for the insertion or removal of the fastener.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, subclasses 37, 47, 48+, 50, 51+, 54, 56, 57,
    58+, and the subclasses indented under Socket type, Radially-reciprocating
    jaws, Moving-cam actuator (subclasses 69+).


CLS 470/76
TXT Forming taper thread:
    Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein the apparatus is further provided
    with structure capable of producing a gradually smaller diameter thread
    from a shank portion to an end portion of the fastener.


CLS 470/77
TXT And lever closer:
    Subject matter under subclass 73 wherein the elements are mounted to
    interact with a device in the form of a generally long slender body
    pivotable about a fixed fulcrum, i.e., a lever, such that movement of the
    lever causes the elements to open or close allowing for the insertion or
    removal of the fastener.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, subclass 119 for similar lever operated chucks
    or sockets.


CLS 470/78
TXT Cone type:
    Subject matter under subclass 77 further wherein the device is provided
    with a structure having a surface generated by a line fixed at a point
    moving along the intersection with a fixed curve or plane, i.e., a cone,
    such that movement of the cone causes movement of the lever.


CLS 470/79
TXT And pivotable chaser carrier:
    Subject matter under subclass 73 further wherein the element are mounted on
    a device capable of rotating about a pivot point such that the pivot point
    is parallel to the axis of the elements.

    (1)     Note.  The art of this subclass should be distinguished from the
    machines of subclasses 77 & 78 in which the levers pivot.


CLS 470/80
TXT Having chaser cutter:
    Subject matter under subclass 66 wherein the component is capable forming
    the externally threaded ridge by using a sharp instrument to remove
    material from the fastener.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 27 and 57 for combined machines adapted
    for thread chasing.

    82,     Turning, subclasses 110+, for other thread chasing.


CLS 470/81
TXT Rotatable type:
    Subject matter under subclass 66 wherein the instrument is mounted on the
    component at a right angle of the fastener and further wherein the
    instrument is capable of moving in a circular path having the same circular
    pitch as the thread desired to produce on the fastener such that the
    instrument has a rolling motion along the fastener as the instrument moves
    along relative to fastener in the direction of the axis of the fastener.


CLS 470/82
TXT Having recessed cylindrical die block:
    Subject matter under subclass 66 wherein the component comprises a
    cylindrical structure having an external thread wherein the structure is
    capable of forming a thread by removing a portion of the structure on a
    line parallel to the axis of the structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    82,     Turning, subclass 13 for lathes for producing an axial pattern
    which is predetermined by that of a formed cutter or series of juxtaposed
    cutters.

    407,    Cutters, for Shaping, subclass 64 for a cutter comprised of an
    elongated member, arcuate about a center and having at its leading
    extremity a planar face intersecting the arcuate surface to form the
    cutting edge, which planar face is generally in a plane extending through
    the center, which cutter is adapted to cut such that the chip formed is
    directed to pass over the planar face.


CLS 470/83
TXT Having self releasable die holder:
    Subject matter under subclass 66 wherein the component is provided with
    means allowing it to be removed from the fastener with relative ease.


CLS 470/84
TXT Having thread swaging means:
    Subject matter under subclass 57 wherein the apparatus is provided with a
    component capable of forming a thread by shaping cold metal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 88+ for disclosure of "thread rolling",
    and subclass 394+ for disclosure of swaging.


CLS 470/85
TXT And reciprocable die:
    Subject matter under subclass 84 wherein the component comprises an
    internally threaded structure adapted to move back and forth along a
    direction at a right angle to the axis of the fastener to thereby engage
    and form a thread on the fastener.


CLS 470/86
TXT Having bolt pointing means:
    Subject matter under subclass 57 wherein the securing device or element
    comprises a fastener provided with a helical ridge and an enlargement at
    one end of the fastener, i.e., and further wherein the apparatus is
    provided with a component capable of shaping the end of fastener opposite
    the head.


CLS 470/87
TXT APPARATUS FOR MAKING INTERNALLY THREADED FASTENER, I.E., NUT:Subject matter
    under class definition for apparatus for manufacturing a fastener provided
    with an internal helical ridge, i.e., a nut.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses for machine for cold-punching
    nut-blanks.


CLS 470/88
TXT Castellated nut type:
    Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein the nut is provided with openings
    structured to co-operate with an element used to secure the nut to a
    fastened position.

    (1)     Note.  The openings on the nut usually take the form of slots cut
    or formed laterally through the nut to allow a cotter pin to be passed
    through the nut and co-operating lateral hole in the end of bolt to secure
    the nut in a locked position.


CLS 470/89
TXT Having forger:
    Subject matter under subclass 87 provided with means for shaping and
    heating metal.


CLS 470/90
TXT And plural rotatable dies:
    Subject matter under subclass 89 further provided with two mechanisms
    wherein each mechanism is provided with two co-operating mold elements
    capable of imparting or forming a shape or impression to the nut and
    further wherein the mechanisms are capable of rotary motion.


CLS 470/91
TXT And plural punches:
    Subject matter under subclass 89 further provided with two mechanisms
    wherein each mechanism is capable of imparting or forming a cavity in the
    nut.


CLS 470/92
TXT And coiler:
    Subject matter under subclass 89 further provided with two mechanisms
    capable of shaping wire or rod material into a circular configuration.


CLS 470/93
TXT And side swagger:
    Subject matter under subclass 89 further provided with two mechanisms for
    shaping the nut wherein the mechanism performs its shaping by moving a
    right angle to the axis of the nut.


CLS 470/94
TXT And mandrel:
    Subject matter under subclass 93 wherein the mechanism is further provided
    with a component capable of supporting the nut during a shaping step.


CLS 470/95
TXT And transfer means:
    Subject matter under subclass 89 further provided with a mechanism of
    moving the nut from one location to another location.


CLS 470/96
TXT Having tapper:
    Subject matter under subclass 87 provided with means capable of cutting
    threads in a nut by rotating and engaging the means with the nut.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 65+ for a thread
    milling machine or process.


CLS 470/97
TXT And reamer:
    Subject matter under subclass 96 further provided with a mechanism capable
    enlarging a hole in the nut.


CLS 470/98
TXT And work handler:
    Subject matter under subclass 96 further provided with a mechanism for
    moving the nut or work material.


CLS 470/99
TXT And multiple tap spindles:
    Subject matter under subclass 96 further provided with two mechanisms
    capable imparting motion to the thread cutting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 13+ for
    cutting of screw threads by machines including a plurality or rotating
    tools.


CLS 470/100
TXT Circular gang type:
    Subject matter under subclass 99 wherein the mechanisms are arranged in a
    circular manner either parallel to each other or radially in a single plane.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclass 35 for
    similar structure wherein the tools are rotated.


CLS 470/101
TXT And plural tap gripper:
    Subject matter under subclass 96 further provided with a mechanism having a
    pair jaws capable of gripping the means at several locations along the
    length of the means.

    (1)     Note.  The grippers of the subclass usually function at one end to
    hold  and drive the tap and at the other end to open to allow nut blanks to
    be fed along the tap.  Consequently, the machines of this subclass are made
    to operate continuously, the nut blanks being fed upon one end of the
    tapper and the finished nuts being discharged from the other end.


CLS 470/102
TXT And release means:
    Subject matter under subclass 96 further provided with a mechanism capable
    of disengaging the thread cutting means from its driver allowing tapped
    nuts to be discharged and the thread cutting means to be re-engaged with
    its driver.


CLS 470/103
TXT And yieldable tap driver:
    Subject matter under subclass 96 further provided with a mechanism capable
    of imparting motion to the thread cutting means and wherein the mechanism
    is structured to adjust or stop the motion upon the completion of a cutting
    step or upon incurring abnormal resistance to the cutting operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 467+ for wrenches or screwdrivers which yield
    upon predetermined overload.


CLS 470/104
TXT Feed nut type:
    Subject matter under subclass 103 wherein the nut or a nut blank is
    automatically feed to the means for cutting the threads.


CLS 470/105
TXT And finishing means:
    Subject matter under subclass 96 further provided with a mechanism capable
    of performing a metal working operation other than cutting threads.

    (1)     Note.  The machines of this subclass usually are combined machines
    which can perform various operations on the nut or nut blank such as facing
    the top or bottom, or milling the sides.


CLS 470/106
TXT Having broaching means:
    Subject matter under subclass 87 provided with means having a
    multiple-tooth, barlike cutting tool wherein the teeth are shaped to
    produce a desired surface or contour and the cutting is produced by
    configuring the teeth such that each tooth projects farther than the
    preceding tooth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS

    151,    for machines for finishing the sides of rough-forged bolt heads by
    driving them through a trimming die.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 244+ methods or
    machines for a general broaching operation.


CLS 470/107
TXT Having milling means:
    Subject matter under subclass 87 provided with means having rotary cutting
    tool with peripheral teeth wherein the nut or nut blank is fed through the
    periphery of the tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, methods or machines for a
    general milling operation.


CLS 470/108
TXT Having facing means:
    Subject matter under subclass 87 provided with means having a rotary
    cutting tool capable of removing material from flat surfaces on the nut or
    nut blank which surfaces are perpendicular to the rotational axis of the
    cutting tool.

    (1)     Note.  The patents of this subclass discloses means for feeding and
    discharging the nuts, and consequently are excluded from Class 82, Turning,
    the broad class of turning.


CLS 470/109
TXT Having transfer means:
    Subject matter under subclass 87 provided with a mechanism capable of
    moving the nut or nut blank from one location to another location.


CLS 470/110
TXT APPARATUS FOR MAKING HEADED FASTENER, E.G., NAIL, RIVET, ETC.:Subject
    matter under the class definition for apparatus for manufacturing a
    securing device or element, i.e., a fastener, wherein the fastener is
    provided with an enlargement at an end thereof wherein the enlargement is
    structured to function as a head.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass, and its indented subclasses, are proper for
    machines claiming the nominal manufacture of making a bolt or screw wherein
    there is only claimed or disclosed operations for forming the head or
    shank.  A disclosed or claimed machine having means to form threads on a
    screw or bolt would be proper in higher, preceding subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 318+ and 357 for disclosure of bolt
    heading.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclasses 51 and 82 for
    combined apparatus for forming and driving a rivet.


CLS 470/111
TXT Horseshoe nail making:
    Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein the fastener is structured for
    securing a shoe to the foot of a mammal in the family Equidae.

    (1)     Note.  The dies and other mechanisms of this subclass are
    especially designed to form horseshoe nails and are frequently constructed
    to simulate the peculiar drawing blow of a hand-hammer.


CLS 470/112
TXT Cut type:
    Subject matter under subclass 111 wherein the fastener is formed by a step
    of penetrating stock material being used to form the fastener with a sharp
    forming instrument or separating a portion of stock material being used to
    form the fastener.


CLS 470/113
TXT Having finishing means:
    Subject matter under subclass 112 further provided with a mechanism capable
    of performing a metal working operation for completing the fastener
    formation.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for machines for trimming, pointing,
    swaging, or otherwise completing the cut horseshoe nail.


CLS 470/114
TXT And cutter:
    Subject matter under subclass 113 further provided with a device capable of
    penetrating the fastener or separating a portion of the fastener from other
    material.


CLS 470/115
TXT And rotary workholder:
    Subject matter under subclass 113 further provided with a mechanism capable
    of securing work material and further wherein the mechanism is capable of
    rotating the work material relative to the remainder of the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for horseshoe nail making other than cut-type having a rotary
    workholder.


    129,    for wire nail making machines having a rotary workholder.

    135,    for spike making machines having a rotary workholder.


CLS 470/116
TXT Having chain drive:
    Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein the apparatus is provided with a
    mechanism capable of conveying fastener work material to shaping or forming
    devices wherein the conveying mechanism is a chain drive component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 345.1+ for endless conveyors
    with means for aligning the conveyed load at a work station, and other
    subclasses for an endless conveyor.


CLS 470/117
TXT Having roll forging means:
    Subject matter under subclass 111 wherein the apparatus is provided with a
    mechanism in the form of cylindrical structure capable shaping the fastener
    by the application of heat and pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 191+ especially subclass 198 for a
    tool-couple making a nail or spike by rolling.


CLS 470/118
TXT Travelling roll type:
    Subject matter under subclass 117 wherein the mechanism comprises a roller
    having a further capacity of lateral.

    (1)     Note.  The roller forgers of this subclass usually can move in a
    planetary motion thereby producing a force or "blow" to the workpiece which
    simulates the "blow" of a hand-held hammer.


CLS 470/119
TXT Having side swage means:
    Subject matter under subclass 111 wherein the apparatus is provided with a
    mechanism for shaping the fastener wherein the mechanism performs its
    shaping operation by moving at a right angle to the axis of the fastener.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147,    for general headed fastener making machines having a side swagger.


CLS 470/120
TXT Having rotary workholder:
    Subject matter under subclass 111 wherein the apparatus is provided with a
    mechanism capable of securing work material and further wherein the
    mechanism is capable of rotating the work material relative to the
    remainder of the apparatus.


CLS 470/121
TXT Wire nail making:
    Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein the fastener is formed from wire
    and the fastener is structured to have an impact receiving surface adapted
    to receive an axially applied force which causes the fastener to penetrate
    material, substructure, or other work desired to be fastened.

    (1)     Note.  The apparatus is this subclass usually makes nails by
    feeding wire for a coil to a header while the free end of the wire is fed
    to a pointer and then the nail is severed by suitable dies.


CLS 470/122
TXT String nail type:
    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the apparatus is capable of
    manufacturing two or more fasteners such that the fasteners are joined head
    to point allowing them to be easily separated from one another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclasses 82+ for apparatus
    for forming a string of members, e.g., nail, combined with means to sever
    and apply one of the members to work.


CLS 470/123
TXT Having multiple header means:
    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the apparatus is provided with a
    mechanism capable of forming a head on two or more fasteners during a
    single operation or engagement of the mechanism with fastener stock
    material.


CLS 470/124
TXT Opposite end former:
    Subject matter under subclass 123 wherein the mechanism is capable of
    simultaneously forming a point on an adjacent nail during the operation or
    engagement of the mechanism with fastener stock material.


CLS 470/125
TXT Having reciprocating die and header:
    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the apparatus is further provided
    with means having wire-gripping dies capable of reciprocating transversely
    of the line of feed of the wire to grip and release the wire and wherein
    the header is capable of reciprocating in the direction of the length of
    the nail to head the nail while being held by the gripping dies.

    (1)     Note.  The dies of this subclass usually point and sever as well as
    hold the nail.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141+,   for wrought fastener making machines having reciprocating dies and
    headers.


CLS 470/126
TXT And toggle closing dies:
    Subject matter under subclass 125 wherein the gripping-dies are actuated by
    a toggle linkage mechanism.


CLS 470/127
TXT And wedge closing dies:
    Subject matter under subclass 125 wherein the gripping-dies are opened and
    closed by the use of either a wedge structure or a diagonal cam slot both
    which are capable of engaging the dies and moving them to open and closed
    positions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142+,   for wrought fastener making machines having wedge closing dies.


CLS 470/128
TXT Having distributing means:
    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the apparatus is provided with
    means for disseminating formed fasteners from the apparatus such that the
    fasteners can be used in various fastening operations.

    (1)     Note.  The nails distributed by machines of this subclass are used
    in nailing shoe-heels, boxes, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclasses 82+ for a device for
    forming, feeding, or guiding and applying a member, e.g., nail, to work.


CLS 470/129
TXT Having rotary workholder:
    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the apparatus is provided with a
    mechanism capable of securing work material and further wherein the
    mechanism is capable of rotating the work material relative to the
    remainder of the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135,    for spike making machines having a rotary workholder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 345.1+ for rotatable conveyor
    with means for aligning the conveyed load at a work station, and other
    subclasses for a rotatable conveyor.


CLS 470/130
TXT Having spiral shank forming means:
    Subject matter under subclass 129 further with means capable of producing a
    helical rib on the fastener.


CLS 470/131
TXT Wrought  fastener making:
    Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein the fastener is formed by heating
    and shaping the fastener.

    (1)     Note.  The fasteners of this subclass are usually formed from
    heated stock rods or plates.


CLS 470/132
TXT Spike type:
    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the fastener has substantially
    large dimensions such that the fastener can be used for securing
    substantially large structures or materials.


CLS 470/133
TXT Having roller die:
    Subject matter under subclass 132 wherein the apparatus is provided with a
    shaping die in the form of cylindrical structure having metal shaping
    contours located in on the peripheral surface of the structure.

    (1)     Note.  The apparatus of this subclass usually are provided with
    additional means for heading, pointing, and performing other shaping
    operations on the fastener.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 191+ especially subclass 198 for a
    tool-couple making a nail or spike by rolling.


CLS 470/134
TXT Having pointing means:
    Subject matter under subclass 133 further provided with a mechanism for
    shaping that end of the fastener structured for penetrating material,
    substructure, or other work desired to be fastened.


CLS 470/135
TXT Having rotary workholder:
    Subject matter under subclass 133 further provided with a mechanism capable
    of securing work material and further wherein the mechanism is capable of
    rotating the work material relative to the remainder of the apparatus.


CLS 470/136
TXT Nail type:
    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the fastener being formed
    comprises a structure having an impact receiving surface adapted to receive
    an axially applied force which causes the fastener to penetrate material,
    substructure, or other work desired to be fastened.


CLS 470/137
TXT Header means:
    Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein one of the mechanisms capable of
    forming an enlargement at one end of the fastener structured to function as
    a head therefor, i.e., a header.


CLS 470/138
TXT And laterally movable carrier:
    Subject matter under subclass 137 further provided with a device capable of
    supporting and moving the header in a direction transverse to the operating
    direction of the forming components of the header.


CLS 470/139
TXT Bolt blank making:
    Subject matter under subclass 137 wherein the work material being formed is
    an intermediate article which is to undergo further forming operations
    resulting in a externally headed fastener structured to co-operate with and
    be secured by a internally threaded fastener.


CLS 470/140
TXT Having plural rotatable dies:
    Subject matter under subclass 110 further provided with two mechanisms
    wherein each mechanism is provided with two co-operating mold elements
    capable of imparting or forming a shape or impression to the fastener and
    further wherein the mechanisms are capable of rotary motion.


CLS 470/141
TXT Having reciprocating die and heading means:
    Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein the apparatus is further provided
    with means having fastener gripping dies capable of reciprocating
    transversely of the line of feed of the fastener to grip and release the
    fastener and wherein the means is capable of reciprocating in the direction
    of the length of the fastener to head the fastener while being held by the
    gripping dies.


CLS 470/142
TXT And toggle operator for die movement:
    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the gripping-dies are actuated by
    a toggle linkage mechanism.


CLS 470/143
TXT Bolt blank making:
    Subject matter under subclass 142 wherein the work material being formed is
    an intermediate article which is to undergo further forming operations
    resulting in a externally headed fastener structured to co-operate with and
    be secured by a internally threaded fastener.


CLS 470/144
TXT And wedge closing dies:
    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the gripping-dies are opened and
    closed by the use of either a wedge structure or a diagonal cam slot both
    which are capable of engaging the dies and moving them to open and closed
    positions.


CLS 470/145
TXT Bolt blank making:
    Subject matter under subclass 144 wherein the work material being formed is
    an intermediate article which is to undergo further forming operations
    resulting in a externally headed fastener structured to co-operate with and
    be secured by a internally threaded fastener.


CLS 470/146
TXT Making nail:
    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the fastener being formed
    comprises a structure having an impact receiving surface adapted to receive
    an axially applied force which causes the fastener to penetrate material,
    substructure, or other work desired to be fastened.


CLS 470/147
TXT Having side swagger:
    Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein the apparatus is provided with a
    mechanism for shaping the fastener wherein the mechanism performs its
    shaping operation by moving at a right angle to the axis of the fastener.


CLS 470/148
TXT Having punch means:
    Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein the apparatus is provided with a
    mechanism capable of imparting or forming a cavity in the fastener.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205,    for bolt or rivet head punches, per se.


CLS 470/149
TXT Forming cotter-slot:
    Subject matter under subclass 148 wherein the cavity is usually a
    longitudinal channel in the fastener capable of receiving a securing
    element used to secure the fastener, i.e., a cotter key.


CLS 470/150
TXT Having head finisher:
    Subject matter under subclass 110 provided with a mechanism capable of
    performing a metal working operation for completing the formation of a head
    on the fastener.


    (1)     Note.  This subclass  provides for machines for trimming. pointing,
    swaging, or otherwise completing the head on the fastener.


CLS 470/151
TXT Broach type:
    Subject matter under subclass 150 wherein the mechanism comprises a
    multiple-tooth, barb-like cutting tool wherein the teeth are shaped to
    produce a desired surface or contour and the cutting is produced by
    configuring the teeth such that each tooth projects farther than the
    preceding tooth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 244+, for the process
    of or machine for broaching, generally, and see the notes thereunder for
    other broaching.


CLS 470/152
TXT Having ejection means:
    Subject matter under subclass 110 provided with a mechanism capable of
    discharging a formed fastener from the apparatus.


CLS 470/153
TXT And blank shear or cutoff means:
    Subject matter under subclass 152 further provided with a device capable of
    severing fastener stock material into suitable lengths for headed fastener
    blanks.

    (1)     Note.  These devices are special tools applied to bolt and rivet
    machines and their operation and function are so specialized as to warrant
    placement in this class rather than Class 83, Cutting.


CLS 470/154
TXT Having transfer means:
    Subject matter under subclass 110 provided with a mechanism capable of
    moving the fastener or fastener blank from one location to another location.


CLS 470/155
TXT Having gauge:
    Subject matter under subclass 110 provided with a mechanism capable of
    measuring or determining the dimension of a component of the apparatus or
    of a workpiece.


CLS 470/156
TXT Having cutting means:
    Subject matter under subclass 110 provided with a mechanism capable of
    penetrating the fastener or separating a portion of the fastener from other
    material.


CLS 470/157
TXT Making cut-type nail:
    Subject matter under subclass 156 wherein the fastener being formed
    comprises a structure having an impact receiving surface adapted to receive
    an axially applied force which causes the fastener to penetrate material,
    substructure, or other work desired to be fastened.


CLS 470/158
TXT Tack strip making:
    Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the apparatus is capable of
    forming plural fasteners and which are formed such that the fasteners are
    laterally arranged and attached at their heads.

    (1)     Note.  The fasteners of this subclass have a comb-like appearance
    after formation and are used, primarily, in automatic nailing machines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 592+ and particularly subclasses 432+ for
    a method of making and/or applying a member, e.g., nail, staple, etc., to
    work.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclasses 93+ for apparatus
    for forming a member, e.g., nail by severing combined with means to apply
    the member.


CLS 470/159
TXT And heading means:
    Subject matter under subclass 157 further provided with a device capable of
    forming an enlargement at one end of the fastener structured to function as
    a head therefor.


CLS 470/160
TXT And pointing means:
    Subject matter under subclass 157 further provided with a device capable of
    forming that end of the fastener structured for penetrating material,
    substructure, or other work desired to be fastened.


CLS 470/161
TXT Forming shank slot:
    Subject matter under subclass 156 wherein the apparatus is capable of
    producing a longitudinal cavity in the fastener.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for screw head nicking milling machines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 64+ for shaping
    provided for elsewhere.


CLS 470/162
TXT APPARATUS FOR MAKING WASHER:
    Subject matter under the class definition for apparatus for manufacturing a
    article comprising an annular element adapted to be placed beneath the
    bearing surface of a bolt head, nut, or similar fastener.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses for machine for cold-punching
    nut-blanks and washers.


CLS 470/163
TXT Lock washer:
    Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein the article is provided with
    means to secure same to another bolt, nut, similar fastener or other
    structure.


CLS 470/164
TXT MATERIAL SUPPLY FEEDER OR DISTRIBUTOR:
    Subject matter under the class definition for:


    (A)     apparatus for providing nail, screw, nut, nail plate blanks, or
    similar stock material to apparatus for performing various manufacturing
    operations provided by this class on said blanks or stock material or;

    (B)     apparatus for separating finished articles from imperfect work or
    excess material and for conveying articles from apparatus of this class of
    receptacles for packing or otherwise disseminating said articles.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this and indented subclasses consists
    of patents claiming or disclosing subcombinational machines or devices used
    with forming or operating apparatuses of this class.  For example, patents
    claiming only a feeder for feeding work material to a shaping apparatus are
    found in this and indented subclasses.


CLS 470/165
TXT Nut and washer delivery means:
    Subject matter under subclass 164 wherein the blank or stock material is
    supplied to an apparatus of this class for performing a nut or washer
    forming operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, appropriate subclasses for machine for cold-punching nut
    blanks and washers.


CLS 470/166
TXT For forger:
    Subject matter under subclass 165 wherein the apparatus is capable of
    heating and shaping the blank or stock material.


CLS 470/167
TXT Nut feeder:
    Subject matter under subclass 165 wherein the blank or stock material is
    supplied to an apparatus for forming an internally threaded fastener.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 8+ for
    drilling machines with feed mechanism having means which in response to
    predetermined conditions during relative approach movement of tool and
    work, brings into operation a control means which reverses the direction of
    relative movement to withdraw tool and work; subclasses 62+ for drilling
    machines which feed the tool along the tool-axis; and subclasses 124+ for
    drilling machines which feed the tool along the tool-axis.


CLS 470/168
TXT Nail plate feeder:
    Subject matter under subclass 164 wherein the blank or stock material is
    supplied to an apparatus of this class for performing a nail plate forming
    operations.

    (1)     Note.  See the class definition of Class 221, Article Dispensing,
    in section IV thereof for a discussion of article feeding subcombinations
    of the subject matter of this class (10).  The feeding combinations in this
    and the indented subclasses are considered to be so specialized to the
    performance of the function of the work modifying machine of this class as
    the preclude classification in the general dispensing (feeding) class (221).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, see (1) Note, above.


CLS 470/169
TXT Having oscillator:
    Subject matter under subclass 168 wherein the apparatus is provided with
    means capable of moving a blank or stock material in a lateral vibratory
    motion such that the blank or material is formed with a taper from a head
    end to an opposite end.


CLS 470/170
TXT Having reverser:
    Subject matter under subclass 168 wherein the apparatus is provided with
    means capable of turning a formed plate over after a forming operation.


CLS 470/171
TXT And gear:
    Subject matter under subclass 170 wherein the means is provided with a
    toothed wheel used to effectuate the plate turning.


CLS 470/172
TXT Rack and pinion:
    Subject matter under subclass 171 wherein the means comprises a toothed
    wheel engageable and co-operating with a reciprocating rack.


CLS 470/173
TXT Segmental type:
    Subject matter under subclass 171 wherein the toothed wheel comprises a
    portion or arc section of a complete toothed wheel such that by oscillatory
    motion of the portion or arc section with an associated or co-operating
    rack produces reversing motion of the formed plate.


CLS 470/174
TXT Having roller or drum feeder with strap drive:
    Subject matter under subclass 168 wherein the plate is fed to forming
    device by a generally cylindrical structure such that the structure is
    rotated by strap material wound about the structure and further wherein the
    strap material is attached to a mechanism capable of moving the strap
    material is an oscillatory manner thereby rotatably moving the structure.


CLS 470/175
TXT Nipper and nose piece:
    Subject matter under subclass 168 wherein significance is attributed to
    that end of an nail plate feeder used to grip and hold a nail plate
    immediately adjacent to a nail plate forming device.

    (1)     Note.  The typical holder of this subclass would feed the nail
    plate to nail cutting shears for cutting of forming cut nails.


CLS 470/176
TXT Material infeed means:
    Subject matter under subclass 164 wherein the apparatus is provided with
    means capable of effecting axial movement between a die-head and stock
    material to thereby relieve the strain resulting from a feeding operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 62+ and
    129+ for drilling machines which feed the work or tool or both relative to
    one another along the axis of relative rotation of tool and work.


CLS 470/177
TXT Having gripper feed jaws:
    Subject matter under subclass 164 wherein the apparatus is provided with
    means comprising a pair of opposed hinged elements movable toward each
    other such as to be capable of holding a blank or stock material therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 468.2+ and 470.1+ for
    conveyors having load-gripping members.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 210+ for article dispensing devices
    not otherwise provided for in which a gripper type discharge assistant is
    used to grip an article and remove it from a source of supply to a point of
    use or delivery.


CLS 470/178
TXT Having reciprocating lifter:
    Subject matter under subclass 164 wherein the apparatus is provided with
    means capable of moving a element vertically and reciprocally to thereby
    elevate blanks or stock material and allow the blanks or material to be fed
    to a forming or operating device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 396+, 550.01+ and 582 for a
    conveyor which moves a load from a bin or hopper.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 164+, 190, 192, and 254 for various
    article dispensing devices not otherwise provided for which elevate
    articles in separating them from the source of supply.


CLS 470/179
TXT Having rotary disk:
    Subject matter under subclass 164 wherein the apparatus is provided with
    means in the form of a relative flat circular plate capable of rotation
    such that blanks or stock material received on the periphery of the plate
    can be carried or fed to a forming or operating device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 384+, 397, 441, 450, 480.1+,
    and 550.01+ for a rotating conveyor having load-receiving pockets.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 263+ for article dispensing devices
    not otherwise provided for having segregated chambers (i.e., trap chamber)
    structures to remove articles from a hopper source of supply, and
    subclasses 169+ for orienting type article dispensing devices in which
    articles are oriented by passing through openings or recesses in the
    peripheries of rotatable or oscillatable elements.


CLS 470/180
TXT Having inclined chute:
    Subject matter under subclass 164 wherein the apparatus is provided with
    means having an inclined chute allowing blanks, stock material, or formed
    articles to move down for feeding or sorting.

    (1)     Note.  The chutes usually have slots at the bottom allowing for
    blanks, stock material, or articles to hang supported by their heads.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, subclasses 2+ for
    chutes in general.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 389 for a power-driven conveyor
    combined with a chute in which the conveyed load is suspended for
    orientation, and subclass 311, 359+, 390 and 523+ for such a conveyor
    combined with a chute.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 156+ for article dispensing
    (feeding) not otherwise provided for, for feeding and orienting
    asymmetrical articles.


CLS 470/181
TXT TAP SPINDLE REVERSING DEVICE:
    Subject matter under the class definition for means capable of changing the
    direction of rotation of a cylindrical body, i.e., a spindle, used to carry
    and support a male templet screw capable of cutting threads, i.e., a tap,
    after a tapping operation is completed to thereby withdraw the tap from a
    work product.


CLS 470/182
TXT Having spur gears:
    Subject matter under subclass 181 wherein the means comprises two or more
    gears having teeth radially arrayed on their rims parallel to their axes,
    i.e., spur gears, wherein the gears are arranged such that an idler gear
    may be engaged with the spur gears and thereby introduce a change in
    direction of rotation of a driven gear and a spindle associated therewith.


CLS 470/183
TXT IMPLEMENT, E.G., DIE, ETC.:
    Subject matter under the class definition for means comprising an elemental
    component used in apparatus of superior subclasses to perform various
    functions of those apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  The patents in this and indented subclasses consist of
    patents drawn to die, tap, punch, or similar devices mountable in apparatus
    provided for higher in the classification schedule.


CLS 470/184
TXT Nail or screw capping die:
    Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein the device is specially adapted
    for forming and closing a nail and screw cap about the head of an article.


CLS 470/185
TXT Screw threading die:
    Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein the device is specially adapted
    for forming an external ridge on a fastener.


CLS 470/186
TXT Thread trimming:
    Subject matter under subclass 185 wherein the device is provided with
    structure capable of removing a portion of a formed thread thereby leaving
    a portion of the end of the fastener unthreaded.


CLS 470/187
TXT Radial chaser:
    Subject matter under subclass 185 wherein the device comprises a bar-like
    structure having shaping teeth at an inner end and capable of being
    radially mounted in a die-head or holder.


CLS 470/188
TXT Taper threading:
    Subject matter under subclass 187 wherein the device comprises a structure
    are capable of gradually receding during a threading operation thereby
    producing a tapered thread wherein said receding is effected either by a
    mechanism which moves the device away from the blank or stock material or
    which controls the withdrawal of the device from the blank or stock
    material due to pressure created by the threading operation.


CLS 470/189
TXT Having die-blade adjuster:
    Subject matter under subclass 188 wherein the device is further provided
    with a member capable of varying the position of the device with a die-head
    or holder.


CLS 470/190
TXT Adjustable:
    Subject matter under subclass 187 wherein the device is provided with a
    mechanism capable of varying the position of the device with the die-head
    or holder.


CLS 470/191
TXT Bolt or rivet forming die:
    Subject matter under subclass 183 specially adapted to form an externally
    threaded fastener structured to co-operate with and internally threaded
    fastener, or a fastener provided with an end structure consisting of a
    polyscrystalline metallic grain structure which when subjected to an
    externally applied force is plastically flowable.


CLS 470/192
TXT Nail forming die:
    Subject matter under subclass 183 specially adapted to form a fastener
    comprising a structure having an impact receiving surface adapted to
    receive an axially applied force which causes the fastener to penetrate
    material, substructure, or other work desired to be fastened.


CLS 470/193
TXT Horseshoe type:
    Subject matter under subclass 192 wherein the fastener is structured for
    securing a shoe to the foot of a mammal in the family Equidae.


CLS 470/194
TXT Cut:
    Subject matter under subclass 193 wherein the fastener is formed by a
    process having a step of penetrating stock material being used to form the
    fastener with a sharp forming instrument of separating a portion of stock
    material being used to form the fastener.


CLS 470/195
TXT Wire type:
    Subject matter under subclass 192 wherein the fastener is formed from an
    elongated piece of metal stock having a circular cross sectional dimension
    which is much smaller than the longitudinal dimension of the stock.


CLS 470/196
TXT Wrought type:
    Subject matter under subclass 192 wherein the fastener is formed by a
    process having a step of heating or cooling a fastener and a step of
    shaping the fastener.


CLS 470/197
TXT Nut or washer forming die:
    Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein a fastener being formed is either:


    (A)     provided with an internal helical ridge;

    (B)     comprises an annular element adapted to be placed beneath the
    bearing surface of a bolt head, nut, or similar article.


CLS 470/198
TXT Tap:
    Subject matter under subclass 183 otherwise unprovided for capable of
    forming an interior ridge in a blank or stock material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 281 for hand manipulated assembling or
    disassembling tools which have grippers for direct push or pull for tube
    applying or removing in which the gripping means is thread tapping.


CLS 470/199
TXT Combined:
    Subject matter under subclass 198 having means or structure capable of
    performing operations other than forming interior ridge forming.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 215+ for
    cutting dies which are rotated relative to the work during operation.


CLS 470/200
TXT Radially adjustable:
    Subject matter under subclass 198 wherein the component is capable of being
    moved in a radial direction relative to the blank or stock material being
    subjected to an operation of this class.


CLS 470/201
TXT Collapsible:
    Subject matter under subclass 198 wherein the component is structured such
    that it may be readily retracted toward the axis of the device to allow its
    withdrawal from a formed hole without reversing any rotary motion of the
    device.


CLS 470/202
TXT Cam core:
    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the device is actuated by a
    rotary mechanism which engages a eccentrically shaped surface axially or
    concentrically mounted relative to the device.


CLS 470/203
TXT Wedge core:
    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the device is actuated by a
    triangular shaped or conical surface which engages the device.


CLS 470/204
TXT Thread swage:
    Subject matter under subclass 198 wherein the device is capable of forming
    screw threads by shaping cold metal.


CLS 470/205
TXT Bolt or rivet heading punch:
    Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein the component is specially
    adapted for forming a head on either:


    (A)     an externally threaded fastener structured to co-operate with an
    internally threaded fastener, or

    (B)     a fastener provided with an end structure consisting of a
    polycrystalline metallic grain structure which when subjected to an
    externally applied force is plastically flowable.


CLS 470/206
TXT Nut or washer arbor:
    Subject matter under subclass 190 wherein the component is specially
    adapted for supporting a internally threaded fastener or an annular element
    adapted to be placed beneath the bearing surface of a bolt head, nut, or
    similar article during a forming operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    82,     Turning, subclasses 168+ for work driving and supporting mandrels
    placed between the centers of a lathe and driving hollow work pieces by
    engaging their interior surfaces.

    269,    Work Holders, appropriate subclasses.  Class 269 is the residual
    locus for patents to a device for clamping, supporting and/or holding an
    article (or articles) in position to be operated on or treated.  See notes
    there-under for other related loci.


CLS 470/207
TXT Die holder:
    Subject matter under subclass 190 wherein the component is specially
    adapted for supporting a device for cutting out, forming, or stamping
    material.


CLS 470/208
TXT Anvil:
    Subject matter under subclass 190 wherein the component is specially
    adapted for providing a generally flat, smooth hard material surface on
    which a metal blank or stock material may be shaped.

    (1)     Note.  An anvil usually consists of a very large block of iron or
    steel for hand forging of metal material.


CLS 470/209
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:
    Subject matter under the class definition otherwise unprovided for in
    superior subclasses.

              CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS

            The patents in the following collections have been placed without
    regard to their original classification or to their claimed subject matter.
     These collections, therefore, are only examples of the art encompassed by
    the definition and a thorough search for a desired concept should include a
    search in the preceding official subclasses.


CLS 470/900
TXT FLOATING WORKHOLDER:
    Art collection of apparatuses having a workholder capable of drifting
    during a forming operation of this class.


CLS 470/901
TXT PIPE OR ROD WORKHOLDER:
    Art collection of devices capable of holding a pipe or rod workpiece during
    a forming operation of this class.


CLS 470/902
TXT WORKHOLDER INDEX:
    Art collection of devices capable indicating or pointing to a position on a
    workholder.


CLS 470/903
TXT YIELDABLE SPINDLE:
    Art collection of devices for a spindle capable of yielding during a
    forming operation.


CLS 470/904
TXT TURRET:
    Art collection of devices for a turret for use with an apparatus of this
    class.


CLS 470/905
TXT WIRE COIL INSERT:
    Art collection of apparatuses or methods for forming a wire coil insert.


CLS 470/906
TXT NYLON PLUG LOCK:
    Art collection for a nylon plug insert.


CLS 470/907
TXT CLUTCH NUT FEEDER:
    Art collection for apparatuses or devices for feeding a clutch nut.


CLS 472/
TTL AMUSEMENT DEVICES

CLS 472/
TXT
    This class is the generic class providing for the amusement or recreation
    of human beings, and includes patents relating to devices of the type, the
    principal purpose of which is for the amusement, entertainment, or
    recreation of human beings, unless by analogy of structure or by other
    functions they are classified in other classes.

    (1)     Note.  The expression "for the amusement, entertainment, or
    recreation of human beings" includes either (a) those persons who are using
    or are otherwise directly involved with the amusement device or apparatus
    or (b) those persons who are observing or viewing (i.e., the audience or
    spectators) the persons who are using the amusement device or apparatus.

    (2)     Note.  This class includes, unless otherwise classified in other
    classes, patents relating to apparatus intended to be used at an amusement
    park or on the stage of a theater provided the function of the apparatus is
    for the amusement, entertainment, or recreation of human beings.

    (3)     Note.  This class also includes, unless otherwise classified in
    other classes, patents relating to the structure of the immediate playing
    area (i.e., the defined area in which the athletes or contestants are
    confined during the performance of an athletic, recreational, or sporting
    event) of a sports arena, ball game court, athletic or game playing field,
    or track provided the sole function is for the amusement, recreation, or
    entertainment of human beings.

    (4)     Note.  Also included in this class, unless otherwise classified in
    other classes, are patents relating to a building, or a part thereof,
    provided the sole function is for the amusement or entertainment of human
    beings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, appropriate subclasses for a
    sign, exhibit, or other display device of that class which may also be
    amusing in nature to perform its function of attracting and holding the
    attention of an observer.  Also see the Search Class notes under subclasses
    57 and 58 below.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 6+ for a building
    structure related to means forming the locus of a center of attraction,
    e.g., a stage or means forming a performing area.  This class (472) takes
    such structure which contributes to the attraction, e.g., scenery or
    devices used by a speaker or artist.  Also see the Search Class notes under
    subclasses 1, 48, and 75, below.

    104,    Railways, subclasses 53+ for an amusement railway.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or  Scaffold, subclasses 48+ for an escape
    chute for a person and subclasses 137+ for a body catcher or life net.

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, appropriate subclasses for a species of
    amusement device, commonly called a game, which involves a contest of skill
    and in which the result of such contest can be determined by the rules
    defined for the game.  See the Notes appended to the Class 463 definition
    for the relationship between the game Classes 273, 463, and 473.

    280,    Land Vehicles, appropriate subclasses for various types of land
    vehicles, especially subclasses 827+ for a simulation, for example, a
    progressive rocking horse; subclasses 841+ for a skate or ski; subclasses
    845+ for a sled; and subclass 47.1 for a person-supporting body connected
    to wheels so as to effect body rocking as the wheels rotate.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, appropriate subclasses for a device for
    supporting the weight of a person in a seated position in general.  Also
    see the Search Class notes under subclasses 95, 110, 114, 118, and 124
    below.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 17+ and 71 for
    pavement and road structure.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, appropriate subclasses for an
    apparatus or a process intended for the purpose of instruction or
    demonstration in general, and especially subclasses 29+ for apparatus
    intended to be used for the purpose of instructing or testing a person in
    the operation of a vehicle.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, appropriate subclasses for an
    aquatic device in general; particularly subclasses 129+ for a
    body-supporting buoyant device in general.  A buoyant device made to
    simulate an animal, fish, fowl, etc., or any part thereof, where such
    simulation is claimed, is proper for Class 472.  However, where such
    simulation is disclosed but not claimed, classification of the buoyant
    device is proper for Class 441.  See the (2) Note, under subclass 129 of
    Class 441, for a statement of this line.  Also see particularly subclasses
    65+ for a surfboard, aquaplane, or other device intended to be used for
    skimming or walking on the surface of a body of water.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, for a species of amusement device,
    commonly called a toy, which is principally intended for the amusement or
    recreation of a child wherein there is some physical interaction between
    the child and the toy.

    463,    Amusement Devices: Games, for a species of amusement device,
    commonly called a game, which involves a contest of skill and in which the
    result of such contest can be determined by the rules defined for the game.
     This is the residual class for a game.  See the Search note to Class 473
    definition below for the relationship between the game Classes 463 and 473.

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, for a game in which a ball,
    missile, or other such tangible game projectile (other than a simulation or
    representation thereof) is used during play of a game or sport.  The
    relationship between Class 463 and Class 473 is that Class 463 is the
    residual class for a game, while Class 473 provides only for a specific
    type of game in which a ball, missile, or other such tangible projectile is
    used during play thereof.  (However, note those exceptions specified in the
    Class 463 definition and its appended notes.)  Accordingly, if a game which
    uses a ball, missile, or other such tangible game projectile (other than a
    simulation or representation thereof) during play of the game is recited,
    then classification is in Class 473; otherwise, classification is in Class
    463. Furthermore, a game apparatus or means which uses a simulation or
    representation of a game or sport projectile (e.g., a light-ray simulation
    of a projectile or a videogame representation of a projectile, etc.) is
    classified in Class 463, since such simulation or representation of a
    projectile is not an actual or physical object which can be touched and
    handled (i.e., tangible) as required by Class 473.

    482,    Exercise Devices, appropriate subclasses for an apparatus intended
    to be operated by a human user for the purpose of conditioning or
    developing a muscle or participating in a track, field, or gymnastic
    activity.


CLS 472/1
TXT ROUNDABOUT:
    Subject matter under the class definition consisting of apparatus which
    carries a person or object along a circuitous path.

    (1)     Note.  The circuitous path is not necessarily circular in shape,
    but a person or object must be intended to be carried in a complete loop to
    be proper hereunder.  Apparatus rotating a person or object about an axial
    line passing therethrough is considered to be carrying the person or object
    along a circuitous path.  Oscillating amusement type swings which also
    permit a person or object to turn or twirl thereon are not proper hereunder.

    (2)     Note.  The roundabout may be used to stabilize or tow a person as
    the person travels by foot, skates, etc., along a circuitous path.  It may
    carry only a portion of the person's weight or may carry it only when the
    person falls or begins to fall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for an occupant propelled roundabout used as a trainer for foot
    travel which may be used to stabilize a baby, a novice, an invalid, etc.,
    learning or relearning how to walk, skate, etc.

    118+,   for an oscillating amusement type swing which permits a user to
    turn or twirl thereon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, for a card, picture, sign, or
    other display of that class which may be moved along a circuitous path,
    particularly subclasses 427+ for a special effect display and subclasses
    446+ for a changing exhibitor display.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), particularly subclasses 64+
    for a repositionable major section of a static structure, e.g., a revolving
    building section, etc.

    104,    Railways, particularly subclasses 35+ for a railway turntable,
    subclasses 53+ for an amusement railway vehicle which may travel along a
    circuitous track, and subclasses 74+ for a rotating car carried on a
    railway truck assembly.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, for railway rolling stock which may follow a
    circuitous path, particularly subclass 1.5 for a wheeled toy or model
    railway vehicle, subclass 28 for a railway locomotive carried turntable,
    subclass 157.2 for a toy or model railway truck, and subclass 238.2 for a
    toy or model railway rolling stock having a car body designed for a special
    purpose.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, particularly subclass 701 for animal breaking,
    training, or exercise apparatus which may cause the animal to follow a
    circuitous path.

    482,    Exercise Devices, particularly subclasses 51+ for exercise
    apparatus involving user translation or simulation thereof and which is not
    limited to a circuitous path (see the Search Class notes thereunder for
    related art areas found in other classes), subclass 144 for an exercise
    device which may be used to suspend and invert a person by pivoting the
    person about an axis, and subclasses 146+ for a swivelled foot platform
    which supports the entire body of a user for a muscle conditioning or
    developing purpose.


CLS 472/2
TXT With structure for causing reciprocal translation of roundabout along
    vertical path (e.g., elevator, etc.):Subject matter under subclass 1
    combined with means for rectilinearly raising and lowering the circuitous
    path apparatus along a pathway perpendicular to the horizon, i.e., a
    vertical pathway.

    (1)     Note.  The roundabout must be vertically raised or lowered as a
    unit to be proper for this subclass.  For example, a roundabout raised and
    lowered along an incline or having an occupant or article carriage raised
    and lowered separately from any rotating supporting carrier structure
    thereof would be found elsewhere under subclass 1.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for a roundabout having a carrier rotating about a vertical axis
    which includes a suspended occupant or article carriage that moves up and
    down.

    42,     for a roundabout having a disk, ring, or bowl carrier having an
    occupant or article carriage which moves up and down relative thereto.

    131,    for an amusement device having an occupant support, other than a
    roundabout, translatable along a vertical path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), for a portable or skeleton
    type tower, per se, particularly subclasses 111+ for a shaft extensible by
    mechanical motive means, e.g., by a motor, spring, pulley, crank, cable,
    etc., and subclasses 648.1+ for three-dimensional space-defining openwork.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, particularly subclasses 141+ for
    an elevating or lowering workman platform.

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    for elevator structure not specifically adapted for amusement purposes.


CLS 472/3
TXT Having feature for facilitating transport by vehicle structure:Subject
    matter under subclass 1 wherein the circuitous path apparatus includes
    means for enabling easy relocation by a travel conveyance, e.g., a trailer,
    truck, etc., or a travel enhancing component, e.g., a wheel, runner, etc.

    (1)     Note.  The roundabout may be in an operative condition while being
    transported or may be readily collapsible for movement between one
    operative location and another.

    (2)     Note.  A small or lightweight roundabout, per se, absent any
    feature which would otherwise make it easily transportable by, connected
    to, or part of, a vehicle structure is excluded from this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, particularly subclasses 35+ for a railway turntable and
    subclasses 74+ for a rotating car carried on a railway truck assembly.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, particularly subclass 28 for a railway
    locomotive carried turntable.


CLS 472/4
TXT And occupant propelled seesaw:
    Subject matter under subclass 1 combined with beam structure  which is
    mounted upon a horizontal fulcrum located intermediate opposing ends
    thereof and which is vertically oscillated by a person carried on one of
    the ends.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for an occupant propelled roundabout having a hemispherically
    shaped base which may also oscillate up and down on the ground or floor.

    30,     for a roundabout having a carrier rotated about both a vertical and
    a horizontal axis by a power source other than the occupant.

    106+,   for an amusement seesaw, per se.


CLS 472/5
TXT Seesaw operated drive structure helps maintain roundabout motion:Subject
    matter under subclass 4 wherein the vertically oscillating beam structure
    manipulates a force transmitting member, e.g., a gear, ratchet, camming
    surface, linkage, etc., to assist in sustaining circuitous movement of the
    apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  While the drive structure is needed only to help maintain
    the roundabout motion, it may be the only structure used by the occupant to
    propel the roundabout.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19+,    for an occupant operated drive structure which indefinitely
    maintains motion of the roundabout  without any contact with the ground
    except possibly when initially starting the motion.


CLS 472/6
TXT Powered toy type:
    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the circuitous path apparatus uses
    an energy source other than a human operator to propel an object along the
    circuitous path for the entertainment of a child.

    (1)     Note.  The toy roundabout may be powered by an electric motor, a
    wound spring motor, a gravity powered mechanism, etc., which may be
    initially cranked, started, lifted into position, etc., by a human operator
    as long as the human operator does not need to physically generate the
    power in an uninterrupted manner, i.e., continuously, while the toy
    roundabout is operating.  The human operator may be a person other than the
    child being entertained.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, for a rotating card, picture,
    sign, ornamental mobile, or other display apparatus not requiring
    interaction between the apparatus and a child viewing it, particularly
    subclasses 430+ for a rotatable, electromotor operated display which
    creates a special effect and subclasses 473+ for a rotatable, motor
    operated, or changing exhibitor.

    104,    Railways, particularly subclasses 53+ for an amusement railway
    which may travel along a circuitous path.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, for railway rolling stock which may be used
    to follow a circuitous path, particularly subclass 1.5 for a wheeled toy or
    model railway vehicle, subclass 157.2 for a toy or model railway truck, and
    subclass 238.2 for a toy or model railway rolling stock having a car body
    designed for a special purpose.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, particularly subclasses 30+ and 236+ for
    a toy roundabout wherein the motion of the toy requires active, continuous
    manipulation by a child, e.g., a hand crank which must be continuously
    turned by the child to keep the roundabout moving, etc., and subclass 227
    for an infant toy and means for retaining, attaching, or supporting it in
    the environment of the infant.  Also see the Class 446, class definition,
    Search Class note to Class 40.


CLS 472/7
TXT Having article completely supported by rotating tether, arm, or suspending
    structure:Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the entire object is
    carried by a swinging or revolving portion of an elongated flaccid,
    limblike, or hanging member.

    (1)     Note.  The structure to which the tether, arm, or suspending
    structure is rotatably anchored is often called a pylon, tower, pole,
    pedestal, etc., but is never a human being.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32+,    for a roundabout having a carrier which rotates about a vertical
    axis and which includes a suspended occupant or article carriage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting particularly subclasses 430+ and
    473+ for a motorized card, picture, sign, ornament, or other display object
    balancing mobile not requiring interaction by a child viewing it.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, particularly subclasses 30+ for a
    tethered, fixed-wing, toy aircraft where a child holds one end of the
    tether as the aircraft moves along a circuitous path.  Also see the Class
    446, class definition, Search Class note to Class 40.


CLS 472/8
TXT Article carried propulsion means:
    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein the object has its own individual
    energy source for propelling it along the circuitous path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for a roundabout having an occupant or article carriage which
    includes a movement causing energy source located thereon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, particularly subclass 33 for a child
    restrained, tethered, toy aircraft having a propulsion means carried
    thereon.


CLS 472/9
TXT Having altitude control structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 8 including means for varying the vertical
    elevation of the object above a ground surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for altitude control structure for a tethered or suspended article
    which does not carry its own propulsion means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, particularly subclasses 31+ for a child
    restrained, tethered, toy aircraft having a tether manipulated control or
    mechanism.


CLS 472/10
TXT Electric motor:
    Subject matter under subclass 8 wherein the individual energy source
    consists of an electrically driven prime mover.

    (1)     Note.  The electricity itself, which is used to run the motor, may
    come from a source not located on the object.


CLS 472/11
TXT Having altitude control structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 7 including means for varying the vertical
    elevation of the object above a ground surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for altitude control structure for an article completely supported
    by a rotating tether, arm, or suspending structure and which carries its
    own propulsion means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, particularly subclasses 31+ for a child
    restrained, tethered, toy aircraft having a tether manipulated control or
    mechanism.


CLS 472/12
TXT Article travels over stationary track or platform:
    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the object follows a circuitous
    path along a relatively static, underlying guide rail or floor supporting
    surface area of the apparatus.


CLS 472/13
TXT Marine:
    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the circuitous path apparatus
    carries a person or object on or through water.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, particularly subclasses 55+ for
    an aid for increasing user swimming stroke efficiency and subclasses 65+
    for water skimming or walking device propelled by a user or an external
    agent, e.g., a boat, etc.

    482,    Exercise Devices, particularly subclasses 55+ for apparatus used to
    condition or develop a muscle of a swimmer, subclass 71 for apparatus used
    to condition or develop a muscle used while a skier is being towed, and
    subclasses 72+ for apparatus used to condition or develop a muscle used
    when rowing a boat.


CLS 472/14
TXT Occupant propelled:
    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a person carried on the circuitous
    path apparatus physically causes circuitous movement to occur.

    (1)     Note.  Merely switching on or adjusting electrical, hydraulic, or
    other controls for a motorized roundabout is not considered to be occupant
    propulsion for this subclass.  If plural circuitous paths are followed, the
    occupant need only cause circuitous movement about one of the paths.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for an occupant propelled seesaw which operates drive structure to
    help maintain circuitous motion of a roundabout.


CLS 472/15
TXT Trainer for foot travel (e.g., for walking, skating, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 14 wherein the apparatus helps the circuitous
    movement causing person to learn to locomote in a step by step manner over
    an underlying surface area.

    (1)     Note.  The person may be a baby, a novice, an invalid, etc.,
    learning or relearning how to walk, skate, etc.  The roundabout may be used
    to stabilize the person during the learning process and may carry only a
    portion of the person's weight, or may carry it only when the person falls,
    or begins to fall.  Class 482, Exercise Devices, has similar art where the
    person is not limited to following a circuitous path.

    (2)     Note.  See the Class Definition and the Search notes thereunder of
    Class 297, Chairs and Seats, for the line between that class and Class 280,
    Land Vehicles, regarding similar apparatus found in those classes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, particularly subclass 62 for a railway vehicle traveling
    along a fixed track and used for physical training.

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, particularly subclasses 65+ for
    subject matter relating to a cane, stick, crutch, or the like designed to
    aid in human locomotion and to similar structure in umbrella shafts and
    swagger sticks when useful for aiding human locomotion and subclass 67 for
    a walker, per se, i.e., an aid to locomotion which is a free standing
    support having two handles by which it is gripped and is operated by
    lifting from, moving across and replacing on the ground, floor, or the like
    and which does not have a seat, path control or propulsion facilitating
    means, e.g., wheels, casters, etc.

    280,    Land Vehicles, particularly subclasses 7.1+ for a walker vehicle
    propelled by a seated occupant and convertible to a different device, e.g.,
    a stroller, etc., subclasses 43+ for a walker having retractable wheels,
    subclasses 87.021+ for  a wheeled walker propelled by the contact of a hand
    or foot of a child with a surface over which the walker travels and that is
    unrestricted as to path, except by a wheel or wheel mounting, subclasses
    200+ for a wheeled vehicle having other types of positive propelling means,
    subclasses 809+ for a skier or skater appliance or attachment including a
    hand held ski pole and subclasses 841+ for skates and skis, per se.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, particularly subclasses 5+ for a walker provided
    with a seat whereby the user may either stand or sit.  The seat may be
    occupied for resting between successive exercise periods of walking,
    skiing, skating, etc., and may include a mere recitation of wheels or
    running gear.  See (2) Note, above.

    482,    Exercise Devices, particularly subclasses 66+ for an occupant
    propelled support frame having a movement facilitating feature and subclass
    69 for user translation apparatus which suspends the occupant from above,
    e.g., by a body harness, etc.  See (1) Note, above.


CLS 472/16
TXT Having carrier rotating about horizontal axis:
    Subject matter under subclass 14 wherein the circuitous movement causing
    person is borne along on structure turning completely around an axial
    region which is perpendicular to vertical, i.e., horizontal.

    (1)     Note.  An angular transition to or from a loading or unloading
    position is permitted provided the carrier rotates about a horizontal axis
    thereafter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for a roundabout having a carrier rotating about both a horizontal
    and a vertical axis and which is not occupant propelled.

    44+,    for a roundabout having a carrier rotating about a horizontal axis
    and which is not occupant propelled, e.g., a ferris wheel, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    482,    Exercise Devices, particularly subclass 144 for an exercise device
    which may be used to suspend and invert a person by partially rotating the
    person about a horizontal axis.


CLS 472/17
TXT And orthoganal axis intersecting therewith:
    Subject matter under subclass 16 wherein the person bearing structure also
    turns completely around an additional axial region perpendicular to and
    passing through the horizontal axial region.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for a roundabout rotating about both a vertical axis and horizontal
    axis, but not propelled by an occupant thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    482,    Exercise Devices, particularly subclasses 144+ for an exercise
    device used to suspend a user upside down but intended to turn only
    partially about an axial region.


CLS 472/18
TXT Having carrier rotating about stationary inclined axis:
    Subject matter under subclass 14 wherein the circuitous movement causing
    person is borne along on structure turning completely around an axial
    region which is statically positioned at a given, acute angle with respect
    to vertical, i.e., inclined.

    (1)     Note.  An angular transition to or from a loading or unloading
    position is permitted provided the carrier rotates about a stationary
    inclined axis thereafter.


CLS 472/19
TXT By roundabout mounted drive structure used to maintain motion:Subject
    matter under subclass 14 wherein the circuitous movement causing person
    manipulates a circuitous path apparatus supported, force transmitting
    member to sustain the movement.

    (1)     Note.  While the person may give a starting push to the roundabout
    while standing on the ground and then jump onto the roundabout, the drive
    structure enables the person to propel the roundabout indefinitely
    thereafter without any contact with the ground.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for a seesaw operated drive structure which helps maintain motion
    of the roundabout.


CLS 472/20
TXT Occupant support pivotally suspended from above:
    Subject matter under subclass 19 wherein the circuitous movement causing
    person is carried upon structure hung below an axial region about which it
    may swing.

    (1)     Note.  The structure may be hung from a flaccid cable, rope, etc.,
    or a rigid rod, bar, etc., in a swinging manner thus maintaining the person
    in a generally upright position due to the effects of gravity thereon.
    While the occupant support may swing radially outwardly under the influence
    of centrifugal action, it is not required to do so to be proper for this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for a roundabout having a carrier rotating about a vertical axis
    and which includes a suspended, swinging carriage or support which follows
    a circular path under the influence of centrifugal action.

    45+,    for a roundabout having a carrier rotating about a horizontal axis
    and which includes a suspended occupant or article carriage, e.g., a ferris
    wheel, etc.

    118+,   for a mechanically actuated oscillating amusement type swing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, particularly subclasses 273+ for a seat having an
    oscillating suspension means which supports, or is supported by, a
    component other than the seat bottom, e.g., by an armrest, back, etc.


CLS 472/21
TXT Occupant bearing travel wheel driven by crank structure (e.g., pedaled
    cycle, etc.):Subject matter under subclass 19 wherein the circuitous
    movement causing person is carried by a rotating disk or rotating ring
    portion of the apparatus which is caused to ride along the circuitous path
    by the person rotating a force transmitting arm member, e.g., in the manner
    of a pedaled bicycle, tricycle, etc.

    (1)     Note.  While the travel wheel may not completely support the
    occupant, it must substantially carry the weight of the occupant to be
    proper for this subclass.  The wheel may travel over the ground or a floor,
    rail or other platform provided for it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for a roundabout having a traveling wheel or roll without force
    transmitting structure to drive it.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, particularly subclass 594.1 for crank
    and pedal structure.

    280,    Land Vehicles, particularly subclasses 259+ for a wheeled land
    vehicle having a rotary crank powered drive means.


CLS 472/22
TXT Endless belt or chain:
    Subject matter under subclass 19 wherein the force transmitting member is a
    closed loop arrangement formed from a flexible band, or a series of
    connected, relatively rigid links.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, for a power
    transmission using an endless belt or chain drive system.


CLS 472/23
TXT Ratchet:
    Subject matter under subclass 19 wherein the force transmitting member is a
    toothed wheel which interacts with a cooperating pawl engaging element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, particularly subclasses 575+ for a
    rachet arrangement, per se.


CLS 472/24
TXT Cooperating gears:
    Subject matter under subclass 19 wherein the force transmitting member is a
    rotatable toothed body, i.e., a gear, which meshes with an interacting
    engaging element, e.g., with another gear, a rack, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, particularly subclasses 640+ for
    gearing, per se.


CLS 472/25
TXT Having hemispherically shaped base:
    Subject matter under subclass 14 wherein the circuitous path apparatus
    includes an understructure generally configured in the form of a bottom
    portion of a globe and used for supporting the circuitous path apparatus
    upon a ground or floor surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40+,    for a roundabout having a carrier in the form of a disk, ring, or
    bowl which rotates about a vertical axis and which is not occupant
    propelled.

    95+,    for a rockable animal simulation having rider seat means and not
    intended for circuitous movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    482,    Exercise Devices, particularly subclasses 146+ for a swivelled foot
    platform used to condition or develop a muscle of a human user and which
    may have a hemispherically shaped base.


CLS 472/26
TXT Having traveling wheel or roll:
    Subject matter under subclass 14 wherein the circuitous path apparatus
    includes a ground or floor riding ring, disk, or other curved, rotating
    body for carrying the person along the circuitous path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for a roundabout having an occupant bearing travel wheel driven by
    crank type force transmitting structure, e.g., a pedaled cycle, etc.


CLS 472/27
TXT Having occupant or article carriage mounted propulsion means:Subject matter
    under subclass 1 wherein the circuitous path apparatus includes a person or
    object supporting conveyance which has its own individual energy source for
    causing movement of the person or object along the circuitous path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8+,     for a powered toy roundabout having an article completely supported
    by a rotatably anchored tether, arm, or suspending structure and carrying
    its own propulsion means.

    19+,    for occupant propelled drive structure used to maintain motion of a
    roundabout.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, particularly subclasses 53+ for a powered amusement
    railway vehicle which may propel itself along a circuitous track.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, particularly subclasses 2.1+ for an electrically
    driven, occupant controlled, freely movable vehicle used for an amusement
    purpose, e.g., intended to collide with another vehicle.


CLS 472/28
TXT Having freely moving occupant or article carriage on turning
    platform:Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the circuitous path
    apparatus includes an unattached, readily relocatable, person or object
    supporting conveyance for traveling on an underlying revolving floor
    structure.

    (1)     Note.  While the occupant or article carriage is unattached and
    freely moves along a circuitous path on the turning platform, it may be
    confined by an enclosure, guide rails, etc., to the extent necessary to
    prevent its falling off of the platform or to direct its movement along a
    certain path.


CLS 472/29
TXT Having carrier rotating about vertical axis (e.g., merry-go-round,
    etc.):Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the circuitous path apparatus
    includes person or object bearing structure turning completely around an
    upright, i.e., vertical, axial region.

    (1)     Note.  The vertical axis must remain vertical during routine
    operation of the roundabout.  An axis which changes its angular position
    with respect to vertical and merely passes through a vertical position is,
    therefore, excluded.  An angular transition to or from a loading or
    unloading position is permitted provided the roundabout turns about a
    vertical axis thereafter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for a roundabout having a carrier rotating about an axis having a
    changing position with respect to vertical during routine operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), particularly subclass 65 for a
    major section of a static structure which is rotatable about a vertical
    axis, e.g., a revolving building section, etc.

    104,    Railways, particularly subclass 75 for an amusement railway in
    which a car carried on a railway truck assembly rotates about a vertical
    axis.


CLS 472/30
TXT And about horizontal axis (e.g., turntable supported ferris wheel,
    etc.):Subject matter under subclass 29 wherein the person or object bearing
    structure also turns completely around an axial region perpendicular to
    vertical, i.e, horizontal.

    (1)     Note.  To be proper for this subclass the roundabout must be
    intended to carry the person or object completely around about both axes.
    A roundabout rotating completely about a vertical axis but only oscillating
    about a horizontal axis, for example, is found elsewhere under subclass 29.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for an occupant propelled roundabout having a carrier rotating
    about both a horizontal axis and an orthoganal axis intersecting therewith.

    45+,    for a roundabout having a carrier rotating about a horizontal axis
    and which includes a suspended occupant or article carriage, e.g., a ferris
    wheel, etc.


CLS 472/31
TXT About plural discrete, vertical axes:
    Subject matter under subclass 29 wherein the person or object bearing
    structure turns completely around more than one separate, upright, i.e.,
    vertical, axial region.


CLS 472/32
TXT Suspended occupant or article carriage type:
    Subject matter under subclass 29 wherein the person or object bearing
    structure utilizes a hanging conveyance to support the person or object.

    (1)     Note.  The suspended occupant or article carriage maintains a
    generally upright position due to the effects of gravity thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7+,     for a powered toy roundabout having an article completely supported
    by a rotating tether, arm, or suspending structure.

    27,     for an occupant or article carriage having its own propulsion means
    and which may be suspended.

    45+,    for a roundabout having a carrier rotating about a horizontal axis
    and which includes a suspended occupant or article carriage, e.g., a ferris
    wheel, etc.


CLS 472/33
TXT Circularly traveling, centrifugal swing:
    Subject matter under subclass 32 wherein the hanging conveyance follows an
    annular circuitous path while freely pivoting radially outwardly due to
    movement about the vertical axial region, i.e., under the influence of
    centrifugal action.

    (1)     Note.  The person or object bearing structure may employ a flaccid
    cable, rope, etc., or a rigid rod, bar, etc., suspended to permit
    centrifugal swinging of the hanging conveyance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for an occupant propelled roundabout having roundabout mounted
    drive structure and an occupant support pivotally suspended from above
    which may also swing radially outwardly under the influence of centrifugal
    action, but is not required to do so.

    118+,   for a mechanically actuated oscillating amusement type swing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, particularly subclasses 273+ for a seat having an
    oscillating suspension means which supports, or is supported by, a
    component other than the seat bottom, e.g., by an armrest, back, etc.


CLS 472/34
TXT Carriage moves repeatedly up and down:
    Subject matter under subclass 32 wherein the hanging conveyance raises and
    lowers a plurality of times while turning around the vertical axial region.

    (1)     Note.  The up and down movement may be along a vertical line, an
    elongated loop, etc., e.g., in the up and down manner of a merry-go-round
    horse, etc.  A rocking motion is considered to raise and lower a person or
    object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for structure which causes an entire roundabout to be raised or
    lowered along a vertical path.

    30,     for a carrier rotating about a vertical and a horizontal axis,
    e.g., a turntable supported ferris wheel, etc.

    42,     for a disk, ring, or bowl carrier having an occupant or article
    carriage which moves up and down relative thereto.


CLS 472/35
TXT Rotating platform:
    Subject matter under subclass 32 wherein the hanging conveyance is a
    turning floor surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for a carrier which rotates about a vertical axis and includes an
    occupant or article carriage which oscillates up and down and which may
    also have a revolving floor surface associated therewith.


CLS 472/36
TXT Using individual occupant or article carriage to ride on stationary track
    or platform:Subject matter under subclass 29 wherein the person or object
    bearing structure utilizes a distinct person or object supporting
    conveyance to move along the circuitous path upon a static, underlying
    guide rail or floor surface.

    (1)     Note.  While the carrier may carry plural occupants or articles on
    each carriage thereon, a disk, ring, or bowl type carrier which rotates as
    a whole about its central axis on a stationary track or platform is not
    considered proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40+,    for a disk, ring, or bowl carrier which may rotate as a whole about
    its central axis on a stationary track or platform.

    43,     for an occupant or article carriage which rides on a horizontally
    winding track or platform.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, particularly subclasses 53+ for a powered amusement
    railway vehicle which may propel itself along a circuitous track.


CLS 472/37
TXT Vertically undulating track or platform:
    Subject matter under subclass 36 wherein the rail or floor surface rises
    and falls in a wavelike manner along its length.

    (1)     Note.  The vertical undulating track or platform causes the
    occupant or article carriage riding thereon to likewise rise and fall as it
    travels therealong.  The undulations of the track or platform may vary in
    amplitude or frequency.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for a suspended occupant or article carriage which moves up and
    down, e.g., in the up and down manner of a merry-go-round horse, etc., as
    it moves about a vertical axis.

    43,     for an occupant or article carriage which rides on a horizontally
    winding track or platform.


CLS 472/38
TXT Outwardly varying path:
    Subject matter under subclass 36 wherein the distinct person or object
    supporting conveyance moves along a circuitous path which follows a
    laterally changing alignment with respect to the vertical axial region.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for an occupant or article carriage which rides on a horizontally
    winding track or platform but not rotate about a vertical axis.


CLS 472/39
TXT Using cantilevered arm arrangement to repeatedly move occupant or article
    up and down:Subject matter under subclass 29 wherein the person or object
    bearing structure utilizes a projecting beam mechanism mounted for turning
    near one end and directly supporting the person or object near its other
    unsupported end in order to raise and lower the person or object a
    plurality of times as the projecting beam mechanism turns about the
    vertical axial region.

    (1)     Note.  The cantilevered arm arrangement may consist of a single
    beam or a plurality of beams, trusses, etc., arranged to individually
    support a person or object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for structure which causes an entire roundabout to be raised or
    lowered along a vertical path.

    30,     for a carrier rotating about a vertical and a horizontal axis,
    e.g., a turntable supported ferris wheel, etc.

    34,     for a suspended carriage moving repeatedly up and down while
    rotating about a vertical axis.

    42,     for a disk, ring, or bowl carrier having an occupant or article
    carriage which moves up and down relative thereto.


CLS 472/40
TXT Disk, ring, or bowl:
    Subject matter under subclass 29 wherein the person or object bearing
    structure is a circular, generally flat platform, i.e., a disk or ring, or
    is a generally hemispherical, conical, or cylindrical configuration, i.e.,
    a bowl, which underlies and supports the person or object as it turns about
    its central axis.

    (1)     Note.  The disk, ring, or bowl may directly, or indirectly (i.e.,
    through an occupant or article carriage thereon), carry, or assist in
    carrying, the occupant or object along the circuitous path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for an occupant propelled roundabout having a hemispherically
    shaped base.

    28,     for a roundabout having a freely moving occupant or article
    carriage on an underlying turning platform.

    35,     for a carrier having a suspended occupant or article carriage
    consisting of a rotating platform.


CLS 472/41
TXT Concentric arrangement:
    Subject matter under subclass 40 wherein the disk, ring, or bowl is
    surrounded by another disk, ring, or bowl sharing a common vertical axial
    region.

    (1)     Note.  The concentric arrangement includes disks, rings, bowls, or
    a mixture thereof, which may rotate in different directions, elevations, or
    at different speeds relative to each other or which may slightly overlap in
    a radial direction.


CLS 472/42
TXT Employing occupant or article carriage moving repeatedly up and
    down:Subject matter under subclass 40 wherein the turning disk, ring, or
    bowl utilizes a person or object supporting conveyance which raises and
    lowers the person or object a plurality of times relative to the disk,
    ring, or platform.

    (1)     Note.  The up and down movement may be along a vertical line, an
    elongated loop, etc., e.g., in the up and down manner of a merry-go-round
    horse, etc.  A rocking motion is considered to raise and lower a person or
    object.  A rotating disk, ring, or bowl which is raised and lowered as a
    complete unit is found elsewhere under subclass 40.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for structure which causes an entire roundabout to be raised or
    lowered along a vertical path.

    34,     for a roundabout having a suspended occupant or article carriage
    which moves up and down.


CLS 472/43
TXT Occupant or article carriage follows stationary, horizontally winding,
    track or platform:Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the circuitous
    path apparatus consists of person or object supporting conveyance which
    travels along a static, laterally meandering, guide rail or floor surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for a roundabout carrier rotating about a vertical axis and using
    an individual occupant or article carriage riding on a stationary track or
    platform while following an outwardly varying path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, particularly subclasses 63+ for an amusement railway
    vehicle which may propel itself along a tortuous circuitous alignment.


CLS 472/44
TXT Having carrier rotating about horizontal axis:
    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the circuitous path apparatus
    includes person or object bearing structure turning completely around an
    axial region which is perpendicular to vertical, i.e., horizontal.

    (1)     Note.  The horizontal axis must remain horizontal during routine
    operation of the roundabout.  An axis which changes its angular position
    with respect to vertical and merely passes through a horizontal position
    is, therefore, excluded.  An angular transition to or from a loading or
    unloading position is permitted provided the carrier rotates about a
    horizontal axis thereafter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for a carrier which rotates about an axis having a changing angular
    position with respect to vertical during regular operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, particularly subclass 76 for an amusement railway in
    which a car carried on a railway truck assembly rotates about a horizontal
    axis.


CLS 472/45
TXT Having suspended occupant or article carriage (e.g., ferris wheel,
    etc.):Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein the person or object bearing
    structure includes a person or object supporting conveyance hanging
    therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  The suspended occupant or article carriage may be hung from
    a flaccid cable, rope, etc., or a rigid rod, bar, etc., in a swinging
    manner thus maintaining the person in a generally upright position due to
    the effects of gravity thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for a roundabout having occupant propelled drive structure mounted
    thereon along with a pivotally suspended occupant support.

    30,     for a roundabout having a carrier which rotates about both a
    vertical and a horizontal axis, e.g., a turntable supported ferris wheel,
    etc.

    32+,    for a roundabout having a carrier which rotates about a vertical
    axis and which includes a suspended occupant or article carriage and
    particularly subclass 33 for a centrifugal swing traveling along a circular
    path.


CLS 472/46
TXT About plural discrete, horizontal axes:
    Subject matter under subclass 45 wherein the person or object bearing
    structure turns completely about more than one separate, horizontal axial
    region.


CLS 472/47
TXT Having carrier rotating about an axis having varying angular
    orientation:Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the circuitous path
    apparatus includes person or object bearing structure turning completely
    around an axial region which has a changing angular position with respect
    to vertical during use.

    (1)     Note.  An axis which varies its angular position with respect to
    vertical only during a transition to or from a loading or unloading
    position, but remains at a constant orientation thereafter is excluded from
    this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29+,    for a roundabout having a carrier which rotates about a vertical
    axis during regular operation but which may change its angular orientation
    during a transition to or from a loading or unloading position.

    44+,    for a roundabout having a carrier which rotates about a horizontal
    axis during regular operation but which may change its angular orientation
    during a transition to or from a loading or unloading position.


CLS 472/48
TXT WALKWAY HAVING MOVABLE FLOOR OR STAIR STEP:
    Amusement device under the class definition either (a) comprising the
    surface of a room, hallway, or other passageway over which a person may
    walk and wherein at least a portion of the surface rotates, reciprocates,
    vibrates, collapses, or otherwise moves beneath the feet of the person so
    as to make walking over the surface difficult for the person; or (b)
    comprising a series of steps forming a stairway over which a person may
    walk and wherein at least one of the treads or at least a portion of a
    tread of the stairway vibrates, collapses under the weight of the person,
    or otherwise moves beneath the feet of the person so as to make walking up
    or down the stairway difficult for the person.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), particularly subclass 65 for a
    floor or floor section of a building which is rotatable about a vertical
    axis, subclass 71 for a building floor structure composed of hingedly
    connected sections, subclass 183 for a building stair structure composed of
    interconnected, relatively movable components, and subclasses 184+ for a
    building stair structure with an additional building feature.


CLS 472/49
TXT PARACHUTE-DROP SIMULATOR:
    Amusement device under the class definition intended to allow the user of
    the device to experience a sensation of retarded descent to the ground in a
    manner similar to that experienced by a parachutist who is making a
    parachute jump using a real parachute.

    (1)     Note.  Some of the devices in this subclass either have a canopy
    similar in appearance to that of a conventional parachute or which function
    in much the same manner as a conventional parachute.  But in either case,
    the devices in this subclass are generally incapable of being used by a
    parachutist to jump out of a flying aerial vehicle nor are they intended to
    be used for such purpose.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137,    for an amusement device intended to simulate a free fall to the
    ground.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    appropriate subclasses for elevator of general utility.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 142+ for a parachute, per se.


CLS 472/50
TXT HAVING TRIP-RELEASE SUPPORTING PERSON AGAINST GRAVITY:
    Amusement device under the class definition comprising a movable or
    collapsible means for supporting the weight of a person against the force
    due to gravity and further comprising a trippable or releasable lock or
    latch means for holding the person-supporting means against movement due to
    gravity; so that, when the weight of a person is supported by the support
    means and subsequently the lock or latch means is tripped or released, the
    support means drops, falls, or collapses from a position in which it
    supports the weight of the person to a position in which it no longer
    supports the weight of the person thereby allowing the person to fall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for an amusement device in the form of a walkway having a
    collapsible floor or floor section or a collapsible stair step, which
    device may have a trip-release mechanism associated therewith.

    49,     for an amusement device intended to simulate a parachute jump out
    of a flying aerial vehicle, which device may have a trip-release mechanism
    associated therewith.

    51,     for various types of amusement devices intended to perpetrate a
    practical joke on an unsuspecting person.


CLS 472/51
TXT FOR PERPETRATING PRACTICAL JOKE OR INITIATION CEREMONY:
    Amusement device under the class definition comprising an apparently
    well-known and apparently innocuous device which operates or appears to
    operate in a well-known manner; which device, however, further includes a
    hidden function for producing a surprising or unexpected effect or
    sensation (in the nature of a gag or practical joke) upon an unsuspecting
    person (i.e., upon a person unacquainted with the hidden function of the
    device) who attempts to examine or use the device in the conventional
    manner for which it appears to be intended.

    (1)     Note.  The surprising or unexpected effect or sensation is usually
    in the nature of a mischievous trick played on an unsuspecting person to
    cause him to feel embarrassment or indignity to the amusement of onlookers.

    (2)     Note.  Also included herein is a device particularly adapted for
    use in ceremonies for initiating candidates for membership into secret
    societies, clubs, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     for an amusement device having a trip-release means for supporting
    the weight of a person, which device may include a trip-release means of
    the type which is released unbeknownst to the person, thereby surprising
    the unsuspecting person when he or she falls.

    57+,    for an amusement device for creating an illusion in the mind of
    either the user or the observer of the device.


CLS 472/52
TXT Unexpectedly expels fluid or powder (e.g., into face of victim,
    etc.):Amusement device under subclass 51 wherein the surprising or
    unexpected effect or sensation produced by the device includes a forcible
    propulsion of a liquid, gas, or pulverulent material into the atmosphere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    222,    Dispensing, subclass 79 for a water gun which may unexpectedly
    expel fluid.


CLS 472/53
TXT And produces unexpected noise:
    Amusement device under subclass 52 which produces an additional surprising
    or unexpected effect or sensation in the form of a loud, harsh, or
    detonating sound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for a practical joke or initiation device which produces an
    unexpected noise.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 398+ for a detonating device
    which may unexpectedly detonate and which is intended for use by a child.


CLS 472/54
TXT Unexpectedly falls apart or projects movable or free part:
    Amusement device under subclass 51 wherein the surprising or unexpected
    effect or sensation produced by the device either (a) includes the device
    unexpectedly coming apart into plural component portions when the person
    attempts to use the device in the manner for which it appears to be
    intended; or (b) includes means to unexpectedly eject or extend a movable
    portion of the device outwardly relative to the rest of the device.

    (1)     Note.  The movable part may either be attached or unattached to the
    rest of the device when it is ejected or extended.


CLS 472/55
TXT User contacted by attached projected part:
    Amusement device under subclass 54 wherein the movable portion is connected
    to the rest of the device and remains so connected whenever it is
    unexpectedly    ejected    or    extended;    and wherein the movable
    portion, upon its being ejected or extended, unexpectedly touches or
    otherwise engages the person unacquainted with the device whenever the
    person attempts to use or operate the device in the manner for which it
    appears to be intended.


CLS 472/56
TXT Produces unexpected noise, vibration, or electric shock:
    Amusement device under subclass 51 wherein the surprising or unexpected
    effect or sensation produced by the device is in the form of (a) a loud,
    harsh, or detonating sound; (b) small, rapid back and forth motions or
    oscillations of at least a portion of the device; or (c) an electric
    current passed through at least a portion of the body of the person
    unacquainted with the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for a practical joke or initiation device which unexpectedly expels
    fluid or powder and which also produces an unexpected noise.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 398+ for a detonating device
    which may unexpectedly detonate and which is intended for use by a child.


CLS 472/57
TXT ILLUSION OR STAGE DEVICE:
    Amusement device under the class definition which is either (a) intended to
    deceive a person into believing, either by giving the person a physical
    sensation or a visual impression, that an event or an occurrence is real or
    is actually occurring when, in reality, the event or occurrence is not real
    or actually occurring; or (b) intended to be used on a means forming a
    performing area (i.e., on the stage of a theater) in order to facilitate
    the presentation of a theatrical performance.

    (1)     Note.  Since an amusement device intended to cause an illusion in
    the mind of a user or viewer of the device may or may not be intended to be
    used on a theatrical stage, a document directed to a specific
    illusion-causing device provided for in any of subclasses 58 through 74
    indented hereunder will be found in one of subclasses 58 through 74
    regardless of whether or not the illusion device is intended to be used on
    the stage of a theater.  On the other hand, subclasses 75 through 84
    indented hereunder will take a document directed to an amusement device
    intended to be used on the stage of a theater regardless of whether or not
    the device is also intended to cause an illusion in the mind of a person
    and provided the specific illusion caused by the device has not been
    provided for in any one of subclasses 58 through 74.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, appropriate subclasses for a costume or mask intended to
    be worn by an actor, particularly subclass 206 for a mask providing a false
    face for the wearer thereof.

    40,     Card, Picture, or  Sign Exhibiting, appropriate subclasses for a
    sign, exhibit, or other display device of that class which may also be
    amusing in nature to perform its function of attracting and holding the
    attention of an observer; especially subclasses 409+ for an attention
    attracting display device having free article movement (e.g., a snowfall
    simulator, etc.,); subclasses 411+ for a three-dimensional movable figure
    display device; subclasses 421+ for a two-dimensional movable figure
    display device; subclasses 427+ for an attention attracting display device
    having special effects as, for example, a display device which includes
    means to convey to the observer an illusion of movement of an object such
    as falling snow or water or flickering fire light; subclasses 446+ for a
    changing exhibitor type of display device; and subclasses 538+ for a dummy
    display device for attracting and holding the attention of a viewer in the
    form of an imitation article including a figure.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), particularly subclasses 6+ for
    a building structure or physical arrangement relating to a means forming
    the locus of a center of attraction, e.g., a theatrical stage or a means
    forming a performing area of a stadium, auditorium, or studio including a
    movable theatrical stage.  Also see the Search Class notes under subclass
    75 indented hereunder.

    104,    Railways, subclasses 82 through 86 for an amusement railway device
    involving an illusion.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, subclasses 85+ for an apparatus for
    producing a special illusionary effect for motion pictures.


CLS 472/58
TXT Alternative scenes provided by reflection from and transmission through
    transparent mirror:Amusement device under subclass 57 wherein the device
    includes a semitransparent reflective member which is capable of passing
    therethrough a light image of an illuminated first object or scene located
    behind it to an observer located substantially in front of it, and also
    capable of reflecting from its front surface a light image of an
    illuminated second object or scene located substantially in front of the
    member but off to the side of the observer and hidden from the direct view
    of the observer; and wherein the illusionary effect is created by operation
    of a control means (a) to selectively either permit or prevent ambient or
    artificial light to illuminate the first object or scene so that its image
    passes through the member to be seen by the observer, and (b) to
    selectively either permit or prevent ambient or artificial light to
    illuminate the second object or scene so that the reflection of it may be
    seen by the observer.

    (1)     Note.  The "object" which may be illuminated and thereby viewed by
    an observer or audience may be a person.  Further, the illumination of the
    first object or scene and the illumination of the second object or scene
    usually occurs alternately and in succession.

    (2)     Note.  The illusion-creating devices included here are capable of
    providing such transition effects as wipes and dissolving views, the
    appearance and disappearance of objects or scenes, the fading out or
    transformation of one object or scene into another object or scene, the
    illusion of different objects appearing to be in the same place (e.g., as
    appearing together on the same stage) whereas, in actuality the objects are
    located in different places, and the illusion of an object being in motion
    whereas, in actuality, it is at rest.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     for an amusement device in which an illusion is created by a mirror.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 442+ for a similar
    display device intended to attract and hold the attention of an observer by
    creating an illusion, and in which the illusion created may also be amusing
    or entertaining.  A device which is disclosed both for use as a display
    device and for use as an amusement or entertainment device is properly
    classifiable in subclasses 442+ of Class 40.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, particularly subclass 91 for a device for
    producing transition effects (e.g., wipes and dissolves) for the production
    of motion pictures.


CLS 472/59
TXT Person experiences illusion of being in motion (e.g., travel simulation,
    etc.):Amusement device under subclass 57 wherein the device is specifically
    intended to deceive a person into believing that he or she is taking a trip
    (e.g., the person believes he or she is traveling in a vehicle) or is
    otherwise moving (e.g., the person believes he or she is swinging on a
    swing) whereas, in actuality, the person is not taking a trip or traveling
    or otherwise moving in the manner that he or she believes.

    (1)     Note.  In order for the device to be classified here, the device
    must be of the type which attempts to make a person truly believe that it
    is he, himself, or she, herself, who is taking the trip or is otherwise in
    motion.  A device in which a person or an audience observes another person
    who appears to be traveling (e.g., an actor who appears to be traveling in
    an automobile on a theater stage) is not properly classifiable here.  Also,
    a device upon which a person pretends that he is traveling (e.g., a child
    sitting in or upon a simulated horse or vehicle which rocks back and forth)
    is merely pretense and not true deception and is, accordingly, not properly
    classifiable here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130,    for an amusement device which simulates an aerial or space vehicle
    or which simulates the movement thereof, but in which a person is not truly
    deceived into believing that he or she is actually traveling in such
    simulated vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclasses 82-85 for an amusement railway device for
    simulating a trip.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 29+ for a device which
    instructs or tests a person in the operation of a vehicle (e.g., a flight
    simulator, etc.).

    482,    Exercise Devices, subclasses 51+ for an exercise device involving
    user translation or physical simulation thereof (e.g., a bicycle, skiing,
    surfboarding simulator, etc.).


CLS 472/60
TXT By use of video or projected picture:
    Amusement device under subclass 59 wherein the device which causes a person
    to believe that he or she is in motion further includes either (a) a means
    for projecting upon a screen or other viewing surface a visual image of
    scenery which has been previously produced upon film or transparencies, or
    (b) a means for producing upon a television screen or other viewing surface
    a visual image of scenery which is being or has been produced by
    television; whereby the image of scenery is intended to be viewed by a
    person so as to further enhance the illusion of the person being in motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for a device which utilizes a video or projected picture to produce
    a visual illusion but in which the illusion is not intended to deceive a
    person into believing he or she is in motion and see the Search notes
    appended thereto.


CLS 472/61
TXT Illusion caused by video, projected picture, or special light
    effect:Amusement device under subclass 57 wherein the device which causes
    the deception includes (a) a means for projecting upon a screen or other
    viewing surface a visual image which has been previously produced upon film
    or transparencies; (b) a means for producing upon a television screen or
    other viewing surface a visual image which is being or has been produced by
    television; or (c) a means for producing and presenting to a person a
    peculiar, deceptive, or unusual visual image, which image relies upon light
    being produced, controlled, or used in a manner other than for mere
    illumination of an object or scene.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for a device which utilizes a video or projected picture to produce
    a visual illusion but in which the illusion is specifically intended to
    further deceive a person into believing he or she is in motion (e.g., the
    person believes he or she is taking a trip).  The devices in subclass 60
    include other means to cause a person to experience an illusion of being in
    motion (e.g., the person is an occupant of a simulated vehicle) in addition
    to the video or projected picture means which further enhance the illusion.

    65,     for a device for creating an illusion by visually imitating an
    event which occurs in nature (e.g., an imitation of the sun or moon rising
    or setting).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, appropriate subclasses for a motion
    picture projector, particularly subclasses 85+ for an apparatus for
    producing special illusionary special effects for motion pictures and
    subclasses 198+ for projection light sources used in the production of
    motion pictures.

    353,    Optics:  Image Projectors, appropriate subclasses for an image
    projector and particularly subclass 28 for a projector which projects an
    image on or near a real object.

    362,    Illumination, appropriate subclasses for a lighting device in
    general, and particularly subclass 84 for a lighting device or support
    therefor combined with a separate luminescent material, subclasses 145+ for
    a lighting device or support therefor combined with a static structure
    (e.g., arena lighting), and subclasses 230+ for decorative lighting.


CLS 472/62
TXT Maze or labyrinth:
    Amusement device under subclass 57 wherein the device creating the
    deception comprises an intricate, usually confusing, network of
    interconnecting passageways or pathways, some of which are blind and at
    least one leads to a goal (e.g., the goal might be to get out of the
    network); whereby a person enters the network of passageways and tries to
    reach the goal.


CLS 472/63
TXT Illusion caused by mirror:
    Amusement device under subclass 57 in which the illusion created by the
    device is visual and is effected by the use of a reflective member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for a device for creating an illusion in which a transparent
    reflective member is used to visually present alternative scenes or objects
    to an observer.

    62,     for a device for creating an illusion in which one or more
    reflective members may be used.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements,
    appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 364+ for a compound lens
    system including one or more curved reflective imaging elements and
    subclasses 838+ for a mirror, per se.  And see (1) Note under subclass 838
    of Class 359.


CLS 472/64
TXT Illusion caused by sound imitation or effect:
    Amusement device under subclass 57 wherein the device for creating an
    illusion includes a means to simulate the natural sound of some animal,
    object, or event.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98,     for a device in the form of a rockable animal simulation which has
    a rider seat (e.g., a rocking horse, etc.) and which includes animal sound
    simulation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, particularly subclasses 3+ for a sound
    stage, method, or accessory therefor which is used in the production of
    motion pictures.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, particularly subclasses 297+ for a figure
    toy having sounding means and subclasses 397+ for a toy device having means
    to generate sound and see the Search notes under subclass 397.

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, subclass 9 for an artificial larynx.


CLS 472/65
TXT Illusion caused by visual imitation of event occurring in nature (e.g.,
    rain, snow, fire, etc.):Amusement device under subclass 57 wherein the
    illusionary effect produced by the device is a simulation, which can be
    seen by a person, of an occurrence or phenomenon that is naturally produced
    or naturally exists in the external world; and wherein the means for
    producing the simulation is hidden from the person.

    (1)     Note.  The phenomenon or occurrence can be any one of a wide
    variety of events found in nature as, for example, rain, snow, fire, a
    tornado, a hurricane, a waterfall, a rainbow, the rising or the setting of
    the sun or moon, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for a device which produces an illusion which simulates an event
    that occurs naturally in nature, which device uses either a projected
    picture or special light effect.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, particularly subclasses 409+ for
    an attention attracting display device which may be amusing in nature and
    which has free article movement (e.g., a snowfall simulator, etc.,); and
    subclasses 427+ for an attention attracting display device having special
    effects as, for example, a display device which includes means to convey to
    the observer an illusion of movement of an object such as falling snow or
    water or flickering fire light.

    352,    Optics:  Motion Pictures, particularly subclasses 85+ for an
    apparatus for producing a special illusionary effect for the production of
    motion pictures.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 13+ for
    exhibiting apparatus which are encased or enclosed and which contain a
    product of nature or a replica thereof.


CLS 472/66
TXT Pyrotechnic display:
    Amusement device under subclass 57 in which the illusion is effected by a
    firework or other similar device designed to burn, explode, or otherwise
    produce a flame so as to produce a spectacular visual effect to an observer.


CLS 472/67
TXT Simulation of self-propelled object in liquid filled container (e.g.,
    Cartesian diver):Amusement device under subclass 57 wherein the illusion
    created by the device involves an imitative representation of an article
    apparently moving under its own power through a fluid medium (other than a
    gas) that is held within a receptacle, whereby the actual power for the
    movement of the article is not apparent to a person observing the movement.

    (1)     Note.  The devices included here are commonly called Cartesian
    divers.  The movement of the object through the liquid is generally caused
    by (a) pressure changes applied to the liquid within the container, (b)
    pressure changes within the object, or (c) density changes of the object
    relative to the surrounding liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 457+ for an amusement device
    which operates by use of the Cartesian diver principle and which is used to
    play a game.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 153+ for an aquatic toy device
    intended to be used by a child, and particularly subclasses 156+ for such
    an aquatic toy device in which a figure is apparently propelled through
    water by a propulsion means.


CLS 472/68
TXT Illusion caused by apparent levitation:
    Amusement device under subclass 57 wherein the illusion created by the
    device involves an object or a person being apparently suspended in mid air
    without any visible means of support, whereby the actual means supporting
    the object or person is not apparent to a person observing the illusion.


CLS 472/69
TXT Illusion caused by apparent penetration or severance:
    Amusement device under subclass 57 wherein the illusionary effect created
    by the device is the result of a deceptive visual impression of either (a)
    an article being passed into or through a relatively dense, visibly
    impervious object or person without any disruption to the surface of the
    object or person, whereby the means creating the deception is not apparent
    to a person observing the effect; or (b) an object or a person being
    divided or separated into two or more parts, whereby the means creating the
    deception is not apparent to a person observing the effect.


CLS 472/70
TXT Illusion caused by simulation of or attachment to human body part:Amusement
    device under subclass 57 wherein the illusion created by the device
    involves the device being either (a) an imitative representation of a
    portion of the anatomy of a human being, or (b) an imitative representation
    of an article which is specially configured or adapted to be connected to
    or mounted on a portion of the anatomy of a human being; whereby, the
    imitative representation, when presented or used in the manner intended, is
    intended to deceive or trick a person observing it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    for an amusement device which is body attached, worn, or carried;
    which device does not constitute a means for creating an illusion in the
    mind of a person observing it in use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    434,    Education and Demonstration, particularly subclasses 262+ for a
    device intended to instruct, or demonstrate to, a person a portion of the
    human anatomy.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, appropriate subclasses for a toy device
    intended for use by a child and which simulates a portion of an animate
    being.

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, appropriate subclasses for an artificial human
    body part, per se, which part is not intended to be used for amusement
    purposes.


CLS 472/71
TXT Illusion caused by apparent appearance or disappearance:
    Amusement device under subclass 57 wherein the illusionary effect created
    by the device involves an object or person either materializing into, or
    vanishing from, the view of an observer in a manner not apparent to the
    observer.


CLS 472/72
TXT Illusion caused by apparent change in color, printed matter, surface
    texture, or rigidity:Amusement device under subclass 57 wherein the
    illusionary effect created by the device involves (a) altering the external
    hue of an article, (b) altering the indicia located on the surface of an
    article so that the new indicia convey different information (e.g., a strip
    of newspaper having newsprint thereon is transformed into paper monetary
    currency), (c) altering the structural appearance of the surface (other
    than hue, shape, or form) of an article, or (d) altering the structural
    stiffness of an article; whereby the means by which the device alters the
    article is not apparent to a person observing the transformation.

    (1)     Note.  The indicia (i.e., the printed matter) located on an article
    may take any form.  For example, the indicia may be embossed or engraved on
    the article rather than being merely printed thereon.  The information
    conveyed by the indicia to a person viewing it may also take any form.  For
    example, the indicia on an article may denote the function of the article
    (e.g., the indicia on a piece of paper may denote it as being an item of
    paper monetary currency or as a grocery shopping list).


CLS 472/73
TXT Card trick illusion:
    Amusement device under subclass 57 wherein the illusionary effect created
    by the device involves a magical trick or astonishing feat being performed
    by a person who is using what appears to be a deck of conventional playing
    cards, whereby the means by which the trick or feat is performed is not
    apparent to a person observing the illusion.

    (1)     Note.  The devices included in this subclass are generally of two
    types.  In one type, an actual deck of conventional playing cards is used
    or manipulated by the device to perform magical tricks or astonishing feats
    with the conventional cards; but either the device itself is hidden from
    the observer, or the device is in view but keeps the manner of how it
    performs its trick or feat with the cards hidden from the observer.  In the
    other type, the deck of playing cards appears to be quite conventional to
    an observer, but the cards have been either physically altered or altered
    in the number of cards, arrangement of the suits, etc., in a manner not
    detectable by the observer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     71, or 72 above for other types of devices creating an illusionary
    effect in which playing cards may be used.


CLS 472/74
TXT Illusion caused by abnormal interior building structure appearing
    normal:Amusement device under subclass 57 wherein the illusionary effect
    created by the device involves a person entering into the inner portion
    (e.g., a furnished room) of an apparently conventionally constructed
    architectural housing arrangement (i.e., a building); and the person either
    physically experiences (e.g., the person has difficulty walking across the
    floor of a room) or visually observes (e.g., the person observes water
    running uphill) an event or an occurrence that, in his mind, cannot be
    possible; whereby the person experiencing or observing the illusion is
    unaware that the construction of the housing arrangement has been modified
    or altered to create the illusion.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a type of modified building structure included
    here would be an interior room of an otherwise conventionally built house
    having its floor sloped (i.e., forming an angle relative to the plane of
    the horizon), its ceiling conventionally parallel to the floor, and its
    walls conventionally at right angles to the floor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for an amusement device comprising a walkway having a movable floor
    or stair step, which device generally includes some building structure, and
    see the Search Class note thereunder.

    136,    for an amusement building structure or a part thereof, which
    building structure does not create an illusionary effect, and see the Notes
    thereunder.


CLS 472/75
TXT Stage apparatus or setting:
    Amusement device under subclass 57 which is specifically adapted for, and
    intended to be used on, a means forming the locus of a performing area
    (i.e., adapted for and used on the stage of a theater) in order to
    contribute to, enhance, or facilitate the presentation of a performance.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of devices included in this and the indented
    subclasses include devices commonly called stage appliances; stage settings
    (or sets, for short); stage scenery; stage properties (or props, for
    short); and the apparatus for either supporting or manipulating the
    scenery, the properties, the performers, or the stage curtains.

    (2)     Note.  Class 52 takes building structure related to a means forming
    the locus of a center of attraction, per se.  For example, Class 52 takes
    the constructional details relating to a means forming a performing area
    (e.g., a stage of a theater).  Class 472 takes devices which are intended
    to be used on a means forming the locus of a center of attraction, which
    devices are intended to contribute to, enhance, or facilitate the
    presentation of an attraction taking place on the center of attraction.
    For example, Class 472 takes such devices as stage scenery, settings,
    properties, and the devices for supporting or manipulating such scenery,
    settings, or properties; whereby such devices are intended to be used on a
    performing area (e.g., the stage of a theater) so as to contribute to,
    enhance, or facilitate the presentation of a performance taking place on
    the performing area (e.g., the stage).  Class 472 also includes building
    structure related to a means forming the locus of a center of attraction
    (e.g., the stage of a theater) which is combined with the additional means
    (e.g., stage settings, properties, etc.,) which contribute to, enhance, or
    facilitate the presentation of an attraction (e.g., a stage performance).
    And see the Search Class note below for examples of the types of stage
    construction (e.g., a movable, foldable, or collapsible stage) that Class
    52 provides for.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57+,    particularly subclasses 57 through 73 above for an amusement device
    specifically intended to create an illusionary effect in the mind of a
    person either using it or observing it, some of which devices are adapted
    to be used on a stage; and see particularly the Notes under subclass 57
    above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), particularly subclasses 6+ for
    a building structure related to a means forming the locus of a center of
    attraction (e.g., a means forming a performing area or the stage of a
    theater), per se; subclass 7 for a movable stage; appropriate subclasses
    for a floor structure which may be usable as a stage, especially subclass
    65 for a floor or floor section of a building which is rotatable about a
    vertical axis, subclass 71 for a floor structure composed of hingedly
    connected sections, and subclasses 262+ for a floor supported on vertical
    structures.  Also see the Search Class note under subclass 6.


CLS 472/76
TXT Having rapid movement:
    Amusement device under subclass 75 wherein the stage apparatus or setting
    includes means to permit a person, animal, imitation vehicle, or other
    object on the stage to appear, to an audience viewing the stage, to travel
    or otherwise move at an apparently rapid pace during a performance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 83 for an imitation amusement railway vehicle
    which simulates rapid movement.


CLS 472/77
TXT Shifting scenery or curtain:
    Amusement device under subclass 75 wherein the stage apparatus or setting
    includes a movable stage scenery element; or includes a means to move or
    relocate a movable stage scenery element, drape, or screen.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this and the indented subclasses are stage
    apparatus for moving or relocating a stage drape (i.e., a stage curtain) or
    an image projection screen for a motion picture projector.  However, this
    class (472) does not provide for a stage curtain, per se, nor does it
    provide for an image projection screen, per se.  See the Search Class notes
    below for the location of such devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, appropriate
    subclasses for a stage curtain, per se.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    443+ for an image projection screen, per se.


CLS 472/78
TXT Hoisting apparatus:
    Amusement device under subclass 77 wherein the means to move or relocate a
    movable stage scenery element, drape, or screen comprises a mechanically
    operated means to raise, lower, rearrange, or otherwise move the stage
    scenery element, drape, or screen from one position to another position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for a movable stage scenery element which is merely pulled or moved
    along a track.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 264+ for apparatus for hauling or hoisting a load including a
    driven device which contacts and pulls on a cable.


CLS 472/79
TXT Guide, brace, or clip:
    Amusement device under subclass 77 wherein the means to move or relocate a
    movable stage scenery element, drape, or screen includes (a) a means to
    control the movement (e.g., a track) of a scenery element, drape, or
    screen; (b) a means to secure or hold a scenery element, drape, or screen
    in position; or (c) a means for gripping or grasping a portion  of a
    scenery element, drape, or screen so as to secure that portion against
    movement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., appropriate subclasses for a clip
    or clasp per se, which has general utility.


CLS 472/80
TXT Aerial suspension device:
    Amusement device under subclass 75 wherein the stage apparatus includes a
    mechanical means for freely hanging a performer or an object above the
    floor of the stage.


CLS 472/81
TXT Prop:
    Amusement device under subclass 75 wherein the stage apparatus or setting
    consists of a generally portable device commonly called a stage property
    which is used to assist or enhance a performance on the stage.


CLS 472/82
TXT Tank:
    Amusement device under subclass 81 wherein the stage property comprises a
    receptacle for containing water or other liquid, whereby an aquatic act may
    be performed on the stage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, appropriate subclasses for a
    water holding receptacle in general, and particularly subclasses 488+ for a
    tub bath.


CLS 472/83
TXT Simulates vehicle:
    Amusement device under subclass 81 wherein the stage property is an
    imitative representation of a mobile conveyance adapted to carry a person
    from one place to another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130,    for an amusement device which simulates an aircraft or space
    vehicle, and see the Search Notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships, appropriate subclasses for a marine vehicle in general.

    244,    Aeronautics, appropriate subclasses for an aerial or space vehicle
    in general.

    280,    Land Vehicles, appropriate subclasses for a land vehicle in general.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, appropriate subclasses for a toy device
    in the form of a simulated vehicle and which is intended for use by a child.


CLS 472/84
TXT Simulates animal:
    Amusement device under subclass 81 wherein the stage property is an
    imitative representation of an animate being other than a human being
    (i.e., a lower animal).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, particularly subclass 181 for a seat device which
    simulates an animal.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, particularly subclasses 268+ for a toy
    device which simulates any animate being including an animal, or which
    simulates a portion thereof, and wherein the toy device is intended for use
    by a child.


CLS 472/85
TXT RACETRACK:
    Amusement device under the class definition comprising a specifically
    prepared or laid out pathway or course used for a  competition of speed
    between opposing contestants thereon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, appropriate subclasses for a
    starting closure (i.e., a starting gate) used on a racetrack.

    104,    Railways, particularly subclass 60 for an amusement railway device
    used for racing.

    280,    Land Vehicles, appropriate subclasses for a vehicle which may be
    used for racing.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, particularly
    subclasses 89+ for a device for indicating the time of duration of a
    particular event.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 17+ and 71 for
    pavement and road structure.

    463,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 6  and 58+ for a simulated
    racing game.

    482,    Exercise Devices, subclasses 14+ for track or field sport apparatus
    used by a human being, particularly subclasses 15+ for jumping, vaulting,
    or hurdling apparatus and subclass 19 for a starting block for a runner.


CLS 472/86
TXT For nonhuman animal (e.g., horse racetrack, etc.):
    Amusement device under subclass 85 wherein at least one of the contestants
    is an animate being other than a human (i.e., a lower animal).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, particularly subclasses 416+ for an animal
    confining or housing device, especially subclasses 423+ thereunder for a
    starting gate used for starting an animal race when only so much of the
    course construction is claimed as is necessary to position or install the
    animal controlling elements; and subclasses 701, 702+, and 712+ for a
    device for breaking, training, or exercising an animal (e.g., a
    steeplechase device).


CLS 472/87
TXT For dog:
    Amusement device under subclass 86 wherein the animal contestant is a
    canine type of animal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, particularly subclasses 89+ for a suspended railway
    device and subclasses 118+ for a monorail railway device, each of which
    devices may be a lure carrier used for a dog race.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, particularly subclasses 141+ for a monorail
    carrier and subclasses 148+ for a suspended carrier, each of which devices
    may be a lure carrier used for a dog race.


CLS 472/88
TXT SURFACE FOR WHEELED OR GLIDING VEHICLE:
    Amusement device under the class definition comprising an underlying floor
    or ground riding surface having an upper surface which is specifically
    adapted and intended to support and be slidably or rollingly engaged by a
    mobile person-carrying conveyance which travels or coasts on a wheel or
    runner type support member over the surface.

    (1)     Note.  A wheeled or runner type vehicle, per se, is excluded from
    this Class entirely.  See the Search Class note to Class 280 below.
    However, a wheeled or runner type vehicle claimed in combination with
    structure of a surface specifically constructed and designed for use by
    such a vehicle is proper for classification here.

    (2)     Note.  Some of the devices included here are slides and chutes
    which are, at least in part, inclined and which are to be slid, coasted, or
    rolled down by a person riding in or on a vehicle which is adapted for such
    use and which is acted upon either by the influence of gravity or of
    inertia.  If the device classifiable here is a slide or chute, water or
    other means may be used on the upper surface thereof to reduce friction
    between the person-carrying vehicle and the slide support surface.

    (3)     Note.  For a document to be included here, the surface must either
    be claimed, per se, or claimed in combination with the vehicle used
    therewith.  Any device within which or upon which a person rides is
    sufficient to enable classification of the surface slidably or rollingly
    engaged thereby, even if the vehicle device is a mere mat upon which a
    person rides.  However, the clothing the person may be wearing is not
    considered to be a vehicle for classification here.  A slide of the type in
    which the body of a person engages the slidable surface either directly or
    through the medium of clothing is considered a body slide and is,
    accordingly, properly classifiable in this class (472), subclasses 116+
    below.  See the Search Note to subclasses 116+ below.

    (4)     Note.  Since a document may or may not claim the person-carrying
    vehicle in combination with the surface otherwise classifiable here, any
    disclosure that a person can ride in or upon a vehicle (even if it is only
    a mat) is sufficient to place the document here, rather than in subclasses
    116+ below.  Again see the Search Note to subclass 116+ below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85+,    for an amusement racetrack having a surface designed for
    competitive racing of wheeled or gliding vehicles.

    116+,   for an amusement body slide in which there is no disclosure of a
    person riding down the slide on a mat or other vehicle.  If there is any
    disclosure whatsoever of a person being able to coast down the slide riding
    in or upon a vehicle (even if it is only a mat) then classification in
    subclasses (88+) is proper. And see especially the Notes under subclasses
    116+ below.

    128+,   for an amusement aquatic device which may support the body of a
    person thereon, and see the Search notes thereunder for the location of an
    aquatic device which may carry a person over the surface of a body of water
    (e.g., a water ski, surfboard, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, particularly subclasses 53+ for an amusement railway
    device for use with a passenger-carrying vehicle in general, and subclasses
    69+ for an amusement railway device in the form of a chute intended for use
    with a passenger-carrying vehicle.

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, subclasses 2+ for a
    chute down which material may pass under the influence of gravity.

    280,    Land Vehicles, appropriate subclasses for a land vehicle within
    which or upon which a person rides in general, particularly subclasses 29+
    for a wheeled vehicle,  subclasses  841+  for  a   foot-attached vehicle
    (e.g., a ski, roller skate, ice skate, etc.), and subclasses 845+ for a
    runner type vehicle (e.g., a sled, toboggan, etc.).

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, particularly subclasses 17+
    and 71 for pavement and road structure.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, particularly subclasses 65+ for
    a water skimming vehicle device to allow a person to glide over the surface
    of a body of water (e.g., a water ski, surfboard, etc.).

    482,    Exercise Devices, particularly subclasses 51+ for an exercise
    device which simulates user translation (e.g., a skiing or surfboarding
    simulator).


CLS 472/89
TXT For wheeled vehicle (e.g., for bicycle, roller skate, etc.):Amusement
    device under subclass 88 wherein the surface is specifically adapted and
    intended to support and be rollingly engaged by a mobile, person-carrying
    conveyance having a wheel type support member upon which it rolls over the
    surface.

    (1)     Note.  Generally, the surfaces found here include bicycle,
    motorcycle, or automobile tracks; and roller skating or skateboarding rinks
    or tracks.


CLS 472/90
TXT For foot-attached gliding vehicle (e.g., ski slide, ice skating surface,
    etc.):Amusement device under subclass 88 wherein the surface is
    specifically adapted and intended to support and be slidably engaged by a
    mobile, person-carrying conveyance having a runner type support member upon
    which it slides or coasts over the surface, which conveyance being of the
    type which is affixed to a foot of the person riding it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for a surface over which a person slides or coasts while riding
    upon a sled or toboggan type of vehicle, and see the Search notes
    thereunder.

    89,     for a surface over which a person travels while riding upon a
    foot-attached roller skate type of vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, particularly subclass 235 for an ice skating rink.

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, for apparatus relating to the game
    of hockey, particularly subclasses 415+, 560+, 570, and 588.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, particularly subclasses 32+
    for a rubber or rubber-like pavement structure and subclasses 34+ for a
    module or block type pavement structure including portable mat type.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, particularly subclasses
    15+ for an artificial grass surface, per se.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, particularly subclasses 68+ for
    a foot-attached, water ski type vehicle adapted to glide or skim over the
    surface of a body of water.

    482,    Exercise Devices, particularly subclasses 70 and 71 for an exercise
    device which simulates Nordic, Alpine, or towed skiing.


CLS 472/91
TXT Surface moves as a whole or comprises rotatable or rollable
    elements:Amusement device under subclass 90 wherein the underlying floor or
    ground riding surface translates as a unit (e.g., an endless movable belt)
    or consists of a plurality of turnable or revolvable components (e.g.,
    revolvable rollers, balls, brushes, or ball bearings revolvable in sockets,
    etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, particularly subclasses
    35+ for a conveyor consisting of a series of rollers.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power Driven, appropriate subclasses for a power
    driven, endless-belt type conveyor.

    482,    Exercise Devices, particularly subclass 54 for a treadmill exercise
    device used for conditioning or developing a muscle  of a human user as he
    or she walks or runs thereon.


CLS 472/92
TXT SURFACE OR ENCLOSURE FOR ATHLETIC OR EXHIBITION EVENT (E.G., ARENA, TRACK,
    COURT, PLAYING FIELD, etc.):Amusement device under the class definition
    comprising an underlying floor or ground surface or comprising a laterally
    confining structure generally intended to surround such floor or ground
    surface (e.g., walls, ropes, netting, etc.); which floor or ground
    structure or laterally confining structure is specifically intended to
    define an area (e.g., a performing or exhibiting area) which is to be used
    for a sporting or displaying purpose by an athlete, contestant, or an
    exhibitor.

    (1)     Note.  A surface or enclosure proper hereunder is only involved
    with the immediate confines of the area upon which a sporting or displaying
    event occurs (e.g., the area constituting the center of attraction, per se)
    and does not include other building, stadium, arena, etc., structure such
    as bleachers, refrigeration means for ice rinks, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85+,    for a racetrack which may constitute a center of attraction wherein
    competitions of speed between opposing contestants may be held for the
    amusement or entertainment of spectators.

    88+,    for a surface for a wheeled or gliding vehicle, which surface may
    constitute a center of attraction wherein sporting, recreational, or
    exhibition events may be held for the amusement or entertainment of
    spectators; and see the Notes thereunder.

    136,    for a building or part thereof used for an amusement,
    entertainment, or recreation purpose and see the Search notes thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), particularly subclasses 6+ for
    a stadium or other building structure specialized to the presentation of an
    attraction or accommodation of an audience group; such building structure
    including (a) an arrangement of seats or slopes relative to the center of
    attraction (e.g., relative to the performing area), (b) a structure having
    means peculiar to the accommodation of the audience, or (c) a stage,
    screen, or area of activities which aid in the presentation of or serves as
    the locus of the center of attraction.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, particularly subclasses 416+ for a device which
    is specialized for the confining or housing of animals and subclasses 700,
    701, 702+, and 712+ for a device specialized for the breaking, training, or
    exercising of animals.

    368,    Horology:  Time Measuring Systems or Devices, particularly
    subclasses 89+ for a time interval device for indicating the time of
    duration of a particular event or for indicating the time upon termination
    of a predetermined time period.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, particularly subclasses 17+
    and 71 for pavement and road structure; and especially subclasses 32+ for a
    rubber or rubber-like pavement structure and subclasses 34+ for a module or
    block type pavement structure including portable mat type.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, particularly subclasses
    15+ for an artificial grass surface, per se.

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, for a game court (e.g., a tennis,
    basketball, volleyball, wallball court, etc.) or for an athletic or sports
    playing field (e.g., a baseball, football, or soccer field, golf course,
    hockey field, or rink, etc.), which court or field being used to play a
    game or sport in which a tangible projectile is used.


CLS 472/93
TXT Fight ring:
    Amusement device under subclass 92 wherein the underlying floor or ground
    surface or laterally confining structure is specifically adapted to support
    or confine opposing contestants as they battle with one another.


CLS 472/94
TXT Walled enclosure (e.g., racquetball or paddle tennis court, etc.):Amusement
    device under subclass 92 wherein the laterally confining structure
    comprises a generally upright barrier.

    (1)     Note.  The walled enclosure may include wire type netting structure
    to form a wire cage.

    (2)     Note.  The walled enclosure may merely prevent a ball, puck, etc.,
    from leaving its confines during an athletic event or may be used as a
    deflecting surface as part of the rules of a sporting contest.  If used for
    an exhibition purpose, it may be used to confine the exhibits or
    contestants (e.g., dangerous animals, etc.), or to keep an audience away
    from the exhibits or contestants.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    256,    Fences, appropriate subclasses for an upright building structure
    commonly called a fence.


CLS 472/95
TXT ROCKABLE ANIMAL SIMULATION HAVING RIDER SEAT MEANS (E.G., ROCKING HORSE,
    ETC.):Amusement device under the class definition in which the device is an
    imitative representation of an animate being other than a human being
    (i.e., a lower animal) or is an imitative representation of a part of such
    an animate being; which animal representation includes means to receive a
    person in a sitting position thereon (e.g., a seat); and wherein the device
    further includes means to cause or to permit rocking, bouncing, or
    oscillatory movement of the animal representation, a part thereof, or at
    least the seat means thereof; whereby the rocking, bouncing, or oscillatory
    motion of the animal representation is intended to be similar to the
    natural motion that the person would experience in riding the actual animal
    that is represented.

    (1)     Note.  A seat which is detached from the simulated animal, as in
    the simulation of a horse-drawn cart, is included here.

    (2)     Note.  A device which can move or translate over the ground or a
    floor surface is excluded from these subclasses and, in fact, is excluded
    from this class.  Such a device which can move or translate over the land
    or a floor is provided for in the vehicle classes as, for example, in Class
    280, Land Vehicles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135,    for an occupant operated rocking, oscillating, or bouncing
    amusement device which does not simulate an animal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 61 for an amusement railway device which
    simulates horseback riding.

    280,    Land Vehicles, particularly subclasses 1.13+ and 1.22+ for a land
    vehicle which simulates a figure as, for example, a horse, etc.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, particularly subclass 181 for a seat device which
    simulates a horse, other animal, vehicle, plant, or the like; subclasses
    195.1+ for a straddle type seat device (e.g., a saddle) which may rock,
    bounce, or oscillate; subclasses 258.1+ for a seat device provided with
    rockers; and subclasses 285+ for a seat device (e.g., a baby jumper) in
    which the back is resilient or is resiliently mounted or the back is
    mounted to another seat component, as a bottom, which component is
    resiliently mounted, whereby the movement of the seat or the back is in
    response to the movement of the occupant of the seat, especially subclass
    299 wherein the seat comprises a fabric one-piece resiliently supported
    bottom and back.  The devices in subclass 181 have merely simulation and
    the devices in subclasses 195.1+, 258+, and 285+ have merely rocking,
    bouncing, or oscillatory motion, with no other amusement feature.


CLS 472/96
TXT With power or externally operated rocking means:
    Amusement device under subclass 95 wherein the rocking movement of the
    animal simulation is caused by means of a power driven actuating mechanism
    or by a means actuated by other than the rider or occupant seated on the
    animal simulation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclass 33 for a chair, couch, or other support for
    moving the body in treatment thereof.


CLS 472/97
TXT Motor operated (e.g., mechanical bull, etc.):
    Amusement device under subclass 96 wherein the rocking movement of the
    animal simulation is caused by means of a power driven actuating mechanism.


CLS 472/98
TXT Having animal sound simulation:
    Amusement device under subclass 95 wherein the rockable animal simulation
    further includes a means for producing a noise or sound which is intended
    to be imitative or characteristic of the noise or sound that the actual
    animal would usually make (e.g., the snort, whinny, hoof beats, etc., of a
    horse).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, particularly subclasses 297+ for a figure
    toy having sounding means and subclasses 397+ for a toy device having means
    to generate sound and see the Search notes under subclass 397.


CLS 472/99
TXT Having relatively movable animal part:
    Amusement device under subclass 95 wherein a portion of the body (e.g., the
    head, tail, etc.,) of the rockable animal simulation either moves or is
    capable of being moved relative to the rest of the body of the simulation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, particularly subclasses 268+ for a figure
    toy which may have one or more movable body parts.


CLS 472/100
TXT Having safety feature:
    Amusement device under subclass 95 wherein the rockable animal simulation
    includes a means for protecting or preventing the person riding the
    simulation from injury, harm, or danger.


CLS 472/101
TXT Combined with disparate device:
    Amusement device under subclass 95 wherein the rockable animal simulation
    is connected to or includes structure (e.g., a water pistol, table, etc.)
    not commonly associated with such a rockable animal simulation.


CLS 472/102
TXT Having arcuate rocking base:
    Amusement device under subclass 95 in which the rockable animal simulation
    is mounted upon a floor-contacting support which is convexed,
    hemispherical, or otherwise curved upwardly on its floor-contacting
    surface, so that the animal simulation may rock back and forth in a manner
    similar to that of a rocker type chair.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for a seesaw which is mounted upon an arcuate rocker base.

    135,    for an occupant operated rocking or oscillating amusement device
    which does not simulate an animal and which may have a hemispherical or
    other arcuate type of base.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, particularly subclass 247 for plural related
    seats mounted on rockers and subclasses 258.1+ for a rocker mounted seat.


CLS 472/103
TXT Having spring support:
    Amusement device under subclass 95 wherein the rockable animal simulation,
    a part thereof, or at least the seat portion thereof is mounted upon
    resilient means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, particularly subclasses 195.1+ for a straddle
    type seat device (e.g., a saddle) supported by spring means of various
    types.


CLS 472/104
TXT Coiled type:
    Amusement device under subclass 103 wherein the resilient means is in the
    form of a helical or spirally wound resilient element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, particularly subclasses 208+ for a straddle type
    seat device (e.g., a saddle) which is coil-spring mounted.


CLS 472/105
TXT Plural coiled springs:
    Amusement device under subclass 104 wherein the resilient means includes at
    least two helical or spirally wound resilient elements.


CLS 472/106
TXT SEESAW:
    Amusement device under the class definition comprising an elongated member
    which is fulcrumed intermediate its ends about a transverse horizontal axis
    for vertical up and down movement of its ends, and wherein at least one of
    its ends thereof is intended to carry a person for riding thereon, so that
    the person may also be moved vertically up and down about the transverse
    horizontal axis while riding on the end of the elongated member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4+,     for a seesaw, the ends of which are also capable of rotating or
    otherwise moving in a circuitous path 360 degrees about a different
    (usually vertical) axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 79 for an amusement railway vehicle adapted to
    travel back and forth along a seesaw track and subclass 80 in which a
    wheeled railway vehicle is propelled along a track by means of a teetering
    seesaw member mounted on the vehicle.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 322+ for a toy seesaw having a
    figure simulation mounted on at least one of its ends for up and down
    movement thereof.


CLS 472/107
TXT Motor operated:
    Amusement device under subclass 106 wherein the up and down movement of the
    seesaw is caused by means of a power driven actuating mechanism.


CLS 472/108
TXT Foot, hand, or seat operated:
    Amusement device under subclass 106 wherein the up and down movement of the
    seesaw is caused by a means actuated by either the foot or the hand of the
    rider or caused by actuation of a means for receiving the weight of the
    rider in a sitting position.


CLS 472/109
TXT Having safety feature:
    Amusement device under subclass 106 wherein the seesaw includes a means for
    protecting the person riding on the seesaw from injury, harm, or danger.


CLS 472/110
TXT One person type:
    Amusement device under subclass 106 in which the seesaw is provided with a
    seat for receiving the weight of a person in a sitting position upon only
    one end thereof, and wherein the seesaw further includes a means acting
    upon the other end thereof to resist the motion of the other end while the
    person is riding the first end.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, particularly subclasses 371+ for a stand having a
    supporting surface at the end of a pivoted arm, subclasses 580+ for a
    tilting support surface biased by a resilient means to a predetermined
    position, and subclasses 592+ for a support having a resilient means which
    acts through an arm or lever.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, particularly subclasses 195.1+ for a straddle
    type seat (e.g., a saddle) which may rock, bounce, or oscillate; especially
    subclass 196 for a saddle type seat mounted on a cantilevered leaf spring;
    and subclasses 313+ for a seat mounted on the free end of an arm for
    resisted tilting movement about a pivot.


CLS 472/111
TXT Having horizontally maintained seat:
    Amusement device under subclass 106 wherein the seesaw includes a means for
    receiving the weight of a rider in a sitting position thereon (i.e., a
    chair or seat), and wherein the seesaw further includes a means for
    automatically keeping the rider sitting means level relative to the horizon
    during the up and down movement of the ends of the seesaw.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    114,    Ships,   subclasses   191+  for  a    self-
    leveling article of furniture intended for use on a ship, particularly
    subclass 194 for a chair which is self-leveling during the rolling and
    tossing motions of a ship.

    248,    Supports, particularly subclass 182.1 for a self-leveling article
    support in general.


CLS 472/112
TXT Having counterbalance means:
    Amusement device under subclass 106 wherein the seesaw includes a means to
    balance the ends of the elongated member upon its fulcrum point so that
    persons of varying weights may ride upon the ends of the elongated member.

    (1)     Note.  Several examples of the types of means for balancing a
    seesaw may be a weight means which is mounted to and shiftable along the
    length of the seesaw so as to change the length of the lever arm, a
    plurality of weight elements which may be added to or removed from one or
    more points along the length of the seesaw, a seat means which is mounted
    to and shiftable along the length of the seesaw so as to change the length
    of the lever arm, or the fulcrum point of the seesaw may be shiftable along
    the length of the seesaw so as to change the length of the lever arm.


CLS 472/113
TXT Spring assisted:
    Amusement device under subclass 106 wherein the seesaw includes a resilient
    means for aiding the up and down motion of the seesaw.


CLS 472/114
TXT Having arcuate base:
    Amusement device under subclass 106 in which the seesaw is mounted at
    substantially intermediate its ends upon a floor-contacting support which
    is convexed, hemispherical, or otherwise curved upwardly on its
    floor-contacting surface, so that the seesaw may rock back and forth in a
    manner similar to that of a rocker type chair.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for a rockable animal simulation having a rider seat means which is
    mounted upon an arcuate rocker base.

    135,    for an occupant operated rocking or oscillating amusement device
    which may have a hemispherical or other arcuate type of base.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, particularly subclass 247 for plural related
    seats mounted on rockers and subclasses 258.1+ for a rocker mounted seat.


CLS 472/115
TXT Collapsible:
    Amusement device under subclass 106 wherein the seesaw includes specific
    means to enable it to be folded up, knocked down into its component parts,
    or otherwise taken apart, so that the volume taken up by the seesaw may be
    reduced in order to provide, for example, for storage or portability of the
    seesaw.


CLS 472/116
TXT BODY SLIDE:
    Amusement device under the class definition comprising an inclined surface
    which is specifically adapted to receive the body of a person thereon so
    that the person may coast down the inclined surface under the influence of
    gravity.

    (1)     Note.  These subclasses do not include an amusement slide device of
    the type in which a person rides down the slide surface either located
    within or mounted upon a vehicular type of device.  An amusement slide
    device of the type in which a person rides down the slide within or upon a
    vehicle (e.g., within a toboggan, on a mat or sled, or upon skis or skates,
    etc.) is provided for in this class (472) in subclasses 88+ above.  A
    disclosure that a person may coast down an amusement slide while merely
    sitting down upon a mat is sufficient for placement in subclasses 88+ above.

    (2)     Note.  The clothing that a person is wearing while coasting down a
    body slide (e.g., a bathing suit or clothing a child may be wearing at a
    playground body slide) is not considered to be a vehicle type device for
    classification in subclasses 88+ above.  Accordingly, a slide device in
    which the body of a person engages the slide surface through the medium of
    clothing is properly classifiable here in these subclasses (116+) as a body
    slide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88+,    for an amusement device in which a person is intended to coast down
    an inclined surface using a vehicle, particularly subclass 88 for slide
    down which a person is intended to ride in a toboggan or upon a sled or mat
    means, and subclasses 90+ for a ski slide or chute down which a person is
    intended to coast using a foot-attached vehicle such as a ski or skate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclasses 69+ for an amusement railway device in the
    form of a chute intended for use with a passenger-carrying vehicle.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 48+ for an escape
    chute combined with a means utilizable by a person (e.g., a handrail or
    ladder) or with a means to sustain life (e.g., ventilation means).

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, subclasses 2+ for a
    chute down which material may pass under the influence of gravity.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 17+ and 71 for
    pavement and road structure.


CLS 472/117
TXT Water slide:
    Amusement device under subclass 116 including means to provide water upon
    the inclined surface in order to lubricate the surface, whereby a person
    may more easily coast down the surface.


CLS 472/118
TXT SWING:
    Amusement device under the class definition comprising a suspended surface
    for seating an occupant, which surface oscillates (i.e., moves to-and-fro)
    either irregularly or as a result of actuation by a mechanical means.

    (1)     Note.  Class 472 takes a swing (a) if it has an irregular
    oscillation or has a compound or erratic movement; (b) if the oscillation
    is effected by a mechanical means (i.e., effected by a motor or an actuator
    operated by a person); or (c) if the oscillatory suspender is connected
    only to the bottom component of the seat without passing through an
    armrest.  Class 297 takes a swing (a) if it is intended to be generally
    constrained to oscillate in a single plane with no compound or erratic
    movement; (b) if the oscillatory suspender is connected to and supports any
    component of a seat other than the bottom component (e.g., the suspender
    connected to the back, the armrest, or to side structure extending upwardly
    from the bottom of the seat); or (c) if the oscillatory suspender is
    connected to the bottom of the seat but also passes through the armrest
    thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 124+ for a couch hammock type swing and subclasses
    127+ for a support for a couch hammock.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 127+ for a stand, per se, or in combination
    with a mere oscillatable suspended platform; subclasses 317+ for a mere
    horizontal support and suspension means therefor; and see particularly
    subclass 370 for a stand having dependent oscillating links which carry a
    support surface.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 232+ for plural related seats mounted
    to permit oscillatory motion for the occupants; and particularly subclasses
    245+ for seats pivotally interconnected by a common footrest, the actuation
    of which causes the seats to oscillate; subclasses 273+ for a seat having
    an oscillating suspension means which supports or is supported by a
    component other than the bottom, e.g., an armrest or back; and particularly
    subclasses 274+ for a baby jumper type suspended oscillator.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclass 323 for a toy swing having a
    figure simulation mounted on the seat of the swing for oscillatory movement
    thereof.


CLS 472/119
TXT Motor operated:
    Amusement device under subclass 118 wherein the oscillation of the swing is
    effected by means of a power driven actuating mechanism.


CLS 472/120
TXT Having hand and foot operator:
    Amusement device under subclass 118 wherein the oscillation is effected by
    cojoined means actuated by the hand and foot of the occupant or by either
    the hand or the foot of the occupant.


CLS 472/121
TXT Having hand operator:
    Amusement device under subclass 118 wherein the oscillation is effected by
    a means actuated by the hand of the occupant.


CLS 472/122
TXT Cable grasp:
    Amusement device under subclass 121 wherein the hand actuated means is in
    the nature of a flexible element (e.g., a rope).


CLS 472/123
TXT Pulley mounted:
    Amusement device under subclass 122 wherein the flexible element moves over
    a sheave.


CLS 472/124
TXT Having foot operator with separate suspender:
    Amusement device under subclass 118 wherein the oscillation is effected by
    an actuator to which normally a force is applied by a foot; which actuator
    is suspended by means independent of the means which suspends the seating
    surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 245+ for a lawn swing provided with
    opposed seats and a common footrest suspended from a component of the swing
    or from the means which suspends the swing, and subclasses 273+ for a
    footrest-equipped swing in which the suspending means for the swing is
    connected to or through the arm, back or footrest.


CLS 472/125
TXT For plural occupants:
    Amusement device under subclass 118 either (a) which includes at least two
    distinct surfaces suspended for oscillation, each surface being capable of
    receiving an occupant in a seated position; or (b) the surface suspended
    for oscillation includes means for receiving at least two occupants in a
    seated position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclasses 232+ for plural related seats mounted
    to permit oscillatory motion for the occupants.


CLS 472/126
TXT SANDBOX TYPE:
    Amusement device under the class definition comprising a receptacle
    containing a quantity of loose granular material intended to be used by a
    child for recreational play.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclass 70 for a toy device which is
    intended to be used by a child to manipulate or play with sand as, for
    example, a toy shovel or pail or toy devices for molding the sand into
    various constructions.


CLS 472/127
TXT BODY-SUPPORTING SIMULATED LOG-ROLLING DEVICE (I.E., BIRLING
    DEVICE):Amusement device under the class definition comprising a means
    specifically intended to be an imitative representation of a length of tree
    trunk, and wherein the tree trunk representation means is horizontally
    disposed and is capable of supporting the weight of a person in standing
    position thereon and is further capable of being rotated about its
    longitudinal axis by the feet of the person while the person is supported
    thereon.

    (1)     Note.  The devices included in this subclass are commonly called
    Birling devices and are intended to simulate the practice of a person
    standing upon and rotating a log floating in a body of water with his or
    her feet.  This subclass includes rotatable log-simulation devices of the
    type used in a body of water and also types used on land, but does not
    include a device which translates over a land surface by rolling thereover.
     To be included in this subclass, the movement of a  rotatable
    log-simulation device must generally be only one of rotation about its
    longitudinal axis with little or no translation of its longitudinal axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128+,   for an aquatic amusement device in general, particularly subclass
    129 for a body-supporting buoyant device, and see the Search Class notes
    thereunder.


CLS 472/128
TXT AQUATIC:
    Amusement device under the class definition specifically adapted to be
    operated or used by a person either upon or beneath the surface of a body
    of water for the purpose of diversion, recreation, or entertainment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclass 79 for wave generators at
    an immobile location.

    434,    Education or Demonstration, subclasses 247+ for a device intended
    to teach or instruct a person in performing a physical activity as, for
    example, enabling a swimmer to learn or improve his or her diving skills;
    and particularly subclass 254 for enabling a person to learn or improve his
    or her swimming skills.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, appropriate subclasses for an
    aquatic device in general; particularly subclasses 129+ for a
    body-supporting buoyant device in general.  A buoyant device made to
    simulate an animal, fish, fowl, etc., or any part thereof, where such
    simulation is claimed, is proper for Class 472.  However, where such
    simulation is disclosed but not claimed, classification of the buoyant
    device is proper for Class 441.  See the (2) Note under subclass 129 of
    Class 441 for a statement of this line.  Also see particularly subclasses
    65+ for a surfboard, aquaplane, or other device intended to be used for
    skimming or walking on the surface of a body of water.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, particularly subclasses 153+ for an
    aquatic toy device intended to be used or operated by a child for its
    amusement or recreation.


CLS 472/129
TXT Body-supporting buoyant device:
    Amusement device under subclass 128 wherein the aquatic device is
    specifically adapted to float upon a body of water and is intended to keep
    a person using or operating the device from sinking beneath the surface of
    the water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for a body-supporting simulated log-rolling device which may also
    be used in a body of water to support the user thereof on the surface of
    the water.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, appropriate subclasses for an
    aquatic device in general; particularly subclasses 129+ for a
    body-supporting buoyant device in general.  A buoyant device made to
    simulate an animal, fish, fowl, etc., or any part thereof, where such
    simulation is claimed, is proper for Class 472.  However, where such
    simulation is disclosed but not claimed, classification of the buoyant
    device is proper for Class 441.  See the (2) Note under subclass 129 of
    Class 441 for a statement of this line.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 153+ for an aquatic toy device
    intended to be used or operated by a child for its amusement or recreation,
    which device includes no means for attaching to or supporting the body of
    the child.


CLS 472/130
TXT SIMULATES AIRCRAFT OR SPACE VEHICLE OR SIMULATES THE MOVEMENT
    THEREOF:Amusement device under the class definition wherein the device
    comprises a nonaerodynamic imitative representation of the shape, form, or
    movement of a mobile conveyance which is adapted to travel through the air
    or outer space (e.g., an aerial vehicle, spaceship, etc.); and wherein the
    imitative representation includes means to receive a person therein or
    thereon.

    (1)     Note.  The simulated aerial or space vehicle devices included
    herein have no aerodynamic capabilities.

    (2)     Note.  Most of the devices included here are intended to receive a
    person within a simulated cockpit of the vehicle represented and usually
    include a means to rock it back and forth or to oscillate it, so that the
    person within the device may experience movement or motions which are
    intended to represent the movement or motions that the person would
    experience if he or she were an occupant in an actual aerial or space
    vehicle.

    (3)     Note.  An amusement device which simulates an aerial or space
    vehicle and which is also capable of translating (e.g., rolling, etc.) over
    a land or floor surface is excluded from this subclass and also excluded
    from this class.  Such a device is properly classifiable in Class 280, Land
    Vehicles.  See the Search Class note hereunder which refers to Class 280.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    135,    for an occupant operated device capable of being rocked or
    oscillated in place by the occupant, the movement thereof being generated
    by the occupant moving or shifting his body about while occupying the
    device.  Also see the Search Notes thereunder for other rocking or
    oscillating devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, appropriate subclasses, for an aerial or space vehicle
    in general.

    280,    Land Vehicles, appropriate subclasses, for a land vehicle in
    general and particularly subclasses 1.12 and 1.21 for a wheeled simulation
    of an aircraft or space vehicle on which a child sits.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, particularly subclass 181 for a seat device which
    simulates a vehicle such as an aircraft.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, particularly subclass 28 for a device
    for instructing or demonstrating to a person the effect of wind upon the
    path of an aircraft, and subclasses 30+ for a device which instructs or
    tests a person in the operation of a flight vehicle.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, particularly subclass 7 for a toy device
    for use by a child in which the toy device is a simulation of a vehicle
    cockpit or of vehicle control, subclasses 30+ for a tethered fixed-wing toy
    aircraft device, subclasses 34+ for a toy device which is aerodynamically
    supported or retarded, subclasses 88 and 93+ for a construction toy device
    which may be assembled into an aerial or space vehicle, subclasses 211+ for
    a jet-propelled toy aircraft vehicle, subclass 225 for an inflatable toy
    device which simulates an aerial or space vehicle, and especially
    subclasses 230+ for an nonaerodynamic toy device which simulates an
    aircraft or space vehicle.


CLS 472/131
TXT OCCUPANT SUPPORT TRANSLATABLE ALONG VERTICAL PATH:
    Amusement device under the class definition wherein the device includes
    structure for receiving and holding the body of a person therein or
    thereupon and further includes means for rectilinearly raising and lowering
    the receiving and holding structure along a pathway perpendicular to the
    horizon, i.e., a vertical pathway.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for an amusement roundabout combined with structure for causing
    reciprocal translation of the roundabout as a unit along a vertical path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), for a portable or skeleton
    type tower, per se, particularly subclasses 111+ for a shaft extensible by
    mechanical motive means, e.g., by a motor, spring, pulley, crank, cable,
    etc., and subclasses 648.1+ for three-dimensional space-defining openwork.

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, particularly subclasses 141+ for
    an elevating or lowering workman platform.

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    for elevator structure not specifically adapted for amusement purposes.


CLS 472/132
TXT OPERATED BY OR USING LIVE ANIMAL:
    Amusement device under the class definition wherein the device is
    specifically adapted to be used in conjunction with an animate being other
    than a human for the purpose of entertaining a person; and wherein the
    device either (a) is actuated or otherwise used by the animate being for
    entertainment purposes, or (b) manipulates or controls the movement of the
    animate being for entertainment purposes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, appropriate subclasses for the care or training
    of live animals and particularly subclasses 712+ for a device intended to
    limit or restrain the free movement of an animal.


CLS 472/133
TXT BODY ATTACHED, WORN, OR CARRIED:
    Amusement device under the class definition which is specially configured
    or is provided with means whereby the device may be connected to or
    supported on a person.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes an amusement device which is
    attachable to the clothes of a person.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for a means for producing an illusion in which the device is
    attached to or simulates a human body part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, particularly subclasses 71+ for a head covering in
    general, and especially subclass 206 for an ornamental mask.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, particularly subclasses 26+ for a toy
    amusement device which is body-carried or worn by a child and see the
    Search Class notes thereunder.


CLS 472/134
TXT INFLATABLE OR PNEUMATIC:
    Amusement device under the class definition wherein either (a) the device
    comprises an enclosure formed from elastic or pliant material and whose
    shape is manifested by filling the enclosure with a gas; or (b) the device
    utilizes a gas under pressure (i.e., a compressed gas) for its operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 2.11+ for a building
    structure which is shaped or strengthened by fluid pressure.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, particularly subclasses 176+ for a toy
    device for use by a child which is operated by a relatively moving fluid or
    pressure differential, especially subclasses 180+ for such a toy device
    which includes a variable-size fluid chamber to move fluid, and subclasses
    220+ for a toy device for use by a child which is inflatable.


CLS 472/135
TXT OCCUPANT OPERATED ROCKING, OSCILLATING, OR BOUNCING DEVICE:
    Amusement device under the class definition wherein the device includes
    means for receiving and supporting the body of a person therein or
    thereupon and further includes means to permit back and forth rocking, up
    and down bouncing, or oscillatory movement of the device; whereby the
    device is caused to rock, bounce or oscillate in response to the person
    shifting or otherwise moving his or her body about while being supported
    within or upon the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95+,    for a rockable animal simulation having a rider seat means,
    especially subclass 102 for a rockable animal simulation mounted upon a
    hemispherical or other rocker type base and see the Search Class notes
    thereunder.

    110,    for a one person type seesaw in which an occupant can bounce up and
    down thereon.

    114,    for a seesaw mounted upon a hemispherical or other rocker type base
    for rocking movement thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, particularly subclasses 195.1+ for a straddle
    type seat device (e.g., a saddle) which may rock, bounce, or oscillate;
    subclass 247 for plural related seats mounted on rockers; subclasses 258.1+
    for a seat device provided with rockers; and subclasses 285+ for a seat
    device (e.g., a baby jumper) in which the back is resiliently mounted
    (e.g., by being connected to a resiliently mounted seat bottom), whereby
    the movement of the seat or back is in response to the movement of the
    occupant of the seat.


CLS 472/136
TXT BUILDING OR PART THEREOF:
    Amusement device under the class definition comprising an architectural
    housing arrangement in which a human being may enter (i.e., a building), or
    a portion thereof, which is intended to be used solely for an amusement,
    entertainment, or recreational purpose.

    (1)     Note.  A building claimed in combination with additional means
    which contributes to an amusement, entertainment, or recreation purpose
    (e.g., in combination with scenery or devices used by a speaker or artist,
    etc.) is proper for this subclass even if the building alone has no other
    special amusement, entertainment, or recreational aspect.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for an illusionary device having abnormal interior building
    structure which appears normal.

    92+,    for an enclosure for an athletic or exhibition event (e.g., an
    arena, track, court, playing field, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), for a general purpose or
    multipurpose building not limited to an amusement, entertainment, or
    recreational use.

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, particularly subclasses 87+ for a
    general purpose or multipurpose portable shelter (i.e., a tent or canopy)
    not limited to an amusement, entertainment, or recreational use.


CLS 472/137
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:
    Amusement device under the class definition which is not provided for under
    any of the preceding.


CLS 473/
TTL GAMES USING TANGIBLE PROJECTILE

CLS 473/
TXT
    This class, which is specific under Class 463, Amusement Devices:  Games,
    which, in turn, is specific under Class 472, Amusement Devices, includes:

    Apparatus or means relating to the type of amusement, recreational, or play
    activities commonly known as games or sports (a) in which one or more
    players or participants use a ball, missile, stream of water, or any other
    such body which occupies physical space and can be touched and thereby felt
    by the one or more players or participants (i.e., a tangible body) such
    that, during play of a game or sport, the ball, missile, or other such
    tangible body is thrown, rolled, shoved, impelled, propelled, projected, or
    otherwise put into motion by a nonexplosive force so as to achieve an
    objective set forth by rules defined for the particular game or sport and
    (b) wherein the result of playing such a game or sport can be indicated
    according to rules defined for the particular game or sport;

    Devices which are ancillary or appurtenant to the types of games or sports
    included herein, unless they are provided for elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  The ball, missile, or other such tangible body is (a)
    usually initially put into motion by an external force supplied either by a
    player of the game or sport or by other nonexplosive means (e.g., by a
    mechanically operated device, etc.) and (b) usually continues in motion
    under its own inertia (in the absence of intervention or interception by
    another external force or by a body) after having been put into motion.
    However, a self-propelled ball, missile, or other such tangible body may be
    included herein provided it is intended to be used in the play of a game or
    sport.

    (2)     Note.  Class 273, Amusement Devices:  Games, is currently being
    reclassified through a series of stages.  Upon completion of this
    reclassification, Class 273 will be abolished and replaced either by Class
    473 or by Class 463, Amusement Devices:  Games. Until this reclassification
    is completed, the portions of  Class 273 which are relevant to Class 473
    are to be considered an integral part of Class 473.  Specifically,
    subclasses 108+ and 317+ of the Class 273 schedule are to be considered as
    following in hierarchy after the last occurring subclass in the Class 473
    schedule.  The rest of the subclasses of the Class 273 schedule are, for
    the most part, to be considered as following in hierarchy after the last
    occurring subclass in the Class 463 schedule.  Also, since Class 273 has
    not been completely screened for all patents properly classifiable in
    present subclasses of Class 473, appropriate subclass(es) in Class 273
    should be considered for search purposes until such time that Class 273 is
    finally abolished.

    (3)     Note. In regard to devices or implements for striking, impelling,
    launching, or, otherwise, projecting a game projectile, the following
    applies: (a) Any projector device or implement which is combined with any
    other device, apparatus, or component used for a game or sporting purpose
    is included herein, (b) a striking type of projector implement which is
    used for a game or sporting purpose (such as a club, bat, racket, paddle,
    mallet, stick, etc.) and which is carried by (e.g., handheld) and manually
    manipulated by a user to strike and thereby project a game projectile such
    that substantially all of the force used to project the projectile is
    supplied by the user is, per se, included herein, (c) a throwing or
    flinging type of implement or device which is used for a game or sporting
    purpose and which is specifically adapted and intended to be used to both
    project a game projectile and to catch a game projectile after it has been
    projected (i.e., a combined projector-catcher device) is, per se, included
    herein, and (d) any projector device or implement (other than one which is
    operated by explosive means) which is used for a game or sporting purpose
    and which is specifically adapted and intended to project a game projectile
    so that it travels upon a playing surface substantially at all times (i.e.,
    the projectile is in contact with and moving over the playing surface
    either upon or immediately after projection) is, per se, included herein.
    See the Search Note to Class 124, Mechanical Guns and Projectors, below for
    the location of a centrifugally or mechanically operated device or
    implement, per se, for projecting a projectile into the air, which device
    or implement may be used to project a game projectile.

    (4)     Note.  Although not generally used during the play of the types of
    games or sports included herein, devices or implements which are used by a
    player to practice or train for one of the types of games or sports
    included herein are provided for in Class 473.  Since such practice and
    training devices or implements are designed to enable a player to improve
    or perfect his or her physical skills (e.g., motor skills, coordination,
    etc.) in the playing of any aspect of the game or sport for which it was
    designed for, they are included in Class 473 on the basis that they are
    ancillary or appurtenant to the types of games or sports provided for
    herein.

    (5)     Note.  A ball, marble, die, top, etc. which is intended to be used
    as a chance device alone or intended to be used as part of a chance device
    or game apparatus (e.g., a die used as a chance device to generate a random
    number, letter, etc., a marble used as part of a roulette-wheel apparatus,
    or a die used to generate a number, letter, etc. during play of a board
    game apparatus, etc.) is not considered to be a projectile proper for Class
    473 and is, therefore, excluded.  Likewise, a marble or the like used to
    operate a ``Rube Goldberg'' type of device, which device being used to play
    a game (for example, used in the play of a board game) is not considered to
    be a projectile proper for Class 473 and is, therefore, excluded.  An
    object (often a representation of a horse, vehicle, person, etc.) which is
    propelled during play of a propelled racing game is not considered to be a
    projectile proper for Class 473 and is, therefore, excluded.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 2+ for protective clothing to be worn by
    athletes such as a football helmet, a baseball or boxing glove, a knee pad,
    etc.

    42,     Firearms, for a projecting device which uses an explosive means to
    provide the projecting force.

    89,     Ordnance, for a projecting device which uses an explosive means to
    provide the projecting force.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, subclasses 501+ for an explosively
    propelled projectile.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 222 through 225 for a mechanical
    signal or indicator, per se, which is intended to form part of or to be
    used with a game device.

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, for a mechanically or centrifically
    operated projector device or implement, per se, which is used to project a
    projectile into or through the air as, for example, an archery bow, a
    slingshot, a baseball pitching machine, a tennis ball throwing machine, a
    clay pigeon throwing trap, or a fluid pressure, pinch, or centrifugally
    operated (e.g., a sling, etc.) type of projector device, etc.  And see the
    (3) Note above.

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, subclasses 154+ for a
    protective cover made of flaccid material, especially subclass 163 for a
    flaccid cover for a racquet.

    194,    Check-Actuated Control Mechanisms, for a game or chance device
    involving a recited detail of a coin-controlled mechanism.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, for an electrical
    switch, per se, especially subclasses 61.1+ for a switch responsive to the
    action of a game or amusement piece, Digest 2 for a body attached switch,
    Digest 3 for a coin operated switch, and Digest 23 for a game switch.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 315.1+ for a container
    for, or a package for containing, a sport implement, exercise device, or
    game, especially subclasses 315.9+ for such a container or package for a
    ball (e.g., for a bowling ball, etc.).

    221,    Article Dispensing, for an article dispenser, per se, such as might
    be used for or included as a subcombination of a game or chance device.

    235,    Registers, for a register, per se, intended for use in a game,
    particularly subclass 1 for a miscellaneous game counter, subclass 61 for
    an odds computer, subclass 78 for a game calculator having concentric
    totalizing disks mounted upon a single axis, subclass 88 for a game
    calculator having tabular indicia placed upon disks which rotate about
    their centers, subclass 90 for a cribbage board, subclass 91 for a device
    for operating a register involving a billiards or pool game device, and
    subclasses 439+ for a coded record sensor structure (e.g., a bar code
    reader, etc.).

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 108+ for a surface projectile
    game, a game component (e.g., a target, etc.) or accessory therefor other
    than a projectile per se, subclasses 317+ for an aerial projectile game, a
    game component (e.g., a target, etc.) or accessory therefor other than a
    projector or projectile per se, subclasses 236+ for a board game, a game
    piece or board therefor, subclasses 138.1+ for a chance device, whether or
    not a projectile is included therein, and even if it is not a game or
    subcombination element of a game, subclasses 292+ for a card or tile game,
    a card or tile therefor, subclasses 153+ for a puzzle, and subclass 161 for
    a fortune-telling device.  Class 273 is currently being reclassified
    through a series of stages.  Upon completion of this reclassification,
    Class 273 will be abolished and replaced either by Class 473 or by Class
    463, Amusement Devices: Games.  Until this reclassification is completed,
    the portions of Class 273 which are relevant to Class 473 are to be
    considered an integral part of Class 473.  Specifically, subclasses 108+
    and 317+ of the Class 273 schedule are to be considered as following in
    hierarchy after the last occurring subclass in the Class 473 schedule.  The
    rest of the subclasses of the Class 273 schedule are, for the most part, to
    be considered as following in hierarchy after the last occurring subclass
    in the Class 463 schedule.  Also, since Class 273 has not been completely
    screened for all patents properly classifiable in present subclasses of
    Class 473, appropriate subclass(es) in Class 273 should be considered for
    search purposes until such time that Class 273 is finally abolished.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 323 for a game-reporting
    (e.g., scoreboard, indicator, etc.) electric signaling system per se,
    subclass 825.19 for communication or control for the handicapped,
    subclasses 825.3+ for intelligence comparison such as used for
    authorization, access, identification, credit, etc., and other appropriate
    subclasses for audible, visual, or tactile communication.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, for a selectively controlled visual
    display system which may either form part of a game or not be limited to a
    game.  However, see the Search Note to Class 345 in the class definition of
    Class 463, Amusement Devices: Games, for an elaboration of the line between
    Class 345 and Class 463, the parent class for Class 473.   A selectively
    controlled visual display system combined with a game component of a game
    provided for in Class 473 (e.g., a golf club, golf ball, tennis court,
    tennis court net, etc.) or with a practice or training device therefor
    (e.g., a golf club swing training device, baseball bat swing training
    device, etc.) is proper for Class 473.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 410+
    for a calculating computer or data processing system, per se, which may be
    adapted to be used with, in, or for a game or amusement device, which
    computer or data processing system must include significant recitation of
    the calculating computer or data processing system.  However, see the
    Search Note to Class 364 in the class definition of Class 463, Amusement
    Devices: Games, for an elaboration of the line between Class 364 and Class
    463, the parent class for Class 473.  A computer or data processing system
    combined with a game component of a game provided for in Class 473 (e.g., a
    golf club, golf ball, tennis court, tennis court net, etc.) or with a
    practice or training device therefor (e.g., a golf club swing training
    device, baseball bat swing training device, etc.) is proper for Class 473.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 4 for a counter or register, per se, which
    is adapted to be controlled to accumulate a total involved in betting on
    the various possibilities involved in an event or to determine the odds
    involved in the payoff of the various possibilities and subclass 5 for a
    counter or register, per se, which is intended to be used with, in, or for
    a game or sport.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, particularly subclasses 17+
    and 71 for pavement and road structure which may be usable for a game
    surface.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, for stock material in the
    form of a single or plural layer web or sheet which may be used in the
    fabrication of products provided for in Class 473.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, particularly subclasses 11+ for
    teaching or demonstration of an aspect of an organized armed or unarmed
    conflict or shooting, subclasses 29+ for a vehicle simulator for
    instruction or demonstration purposes, subclasses 247+ for a means
    specifically adapted to teach or instruct a person in some aspect of a game
    or sport which involves physical activity. Class 473 and subclasses 108+
    and 317+ of Class 273, Amusement Devices: Games, contain devices which are
    to be used for practice by, or for perfecting the physical skill of, a
    person who already knows how to play the game, sport, or the like.  Class
    434 contains devices which are to be used for instructing an
    unknowledgeable person in some aspect of the game, sport, or the like.  A
    device which is used both for instruction and for practice or perfection of
    game skills is originally placed into Class 434 and cross-referenced into
    the Class 463 group of game classes (i.e., Classes 463, 473, or 273).

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, for a device known as a toy whose
    principle purpose is for the amusement or recreation of a child.  If the
    device is used for the amusement or recreation of a child and is also a
    game component (i.e., used in a competition or contest), then it is placed
    into the Class 463 group of game classes (i.e., Classes 463, 473, or 273).

    463,    Amusement Devices:  Games, for a game apparatus or means, in
    general.  The relationship between Class 473 and Class 463 is that Class
    463 is the residual class for games, while Class 473 provides only for
    those specific types of games in which a ball, missile, or other such
    tangible projectile (other than a simulation or representation thereof) is
    used during play thereof.  Accordingly, if a game (or a game component
    thereof) which uses a ball, missile, or other such tangible game projectile
    (other than a simulation or representation thereof) during play thereof is
    claimed or solely disclosed, then classification is in Class 473,
    otherwise, classification is in Class 463 or in the appropriate subclasses
    of Class 273, Amusement Devices:  Games, which follow behind the subclasses
    of Class 463.  However, note that Class 463 provides for (a) a game
    apparatus or means which uses a simulation or representation of a tangible
    projectile (e.g., a light-ray simulation of a projectile, a computer
    generated representation of a projectile, etc.), (b) a propelled racing
    game in which an object (often a representation of a horse, vehicle,
    person, etc.) is propelled during play thereof, and (c) a chance device,
    either per se or in combination with a game which does not use a tangible
    projectile, whether or not a projectile is included therein, and even if it
    is not a game or subcombination element of a game (these are, for the most
    part, still located in Class 273).   See also (5) Note above for further
    elaboration of exceptions to what is provided for in Class 473.

    472,    Amusement Devices, subclasses 92+ (a) for the structure or
    composition of a playing surface, per se (b) for the structure or
    composition of a peripheral boundary marking or enclosure, per se, of such
    a playing surface, or (c) for the combination of only a playing surface and
    a peripheral boundary marking or enclosure therefor, all of the above of
    which are limited to use for an athletic or exhibition event such as, for
    example, the playing of a game or sport thereon or therein.   Also see the
    Search Notes appended thereto.

    602,    Surgery:  Splint, Brace, or Bandage, for an orthopedic bandage used
    to treat an injured body portion such as to provide protection, support, or
    splinting of a strained, sprained, dislocated, deformed, or fractured body
    portion, particularly subclasses 5+ for a brace intended to urge a body
    portion into a natural or normal orientation, subclasses 20+ for a brace
    applied to a person's arm, wrist, or hand to treat a bone disorder or the
    muscles associated therewith, subclasses 23+ for a brace applied to a
    person's leg, ankle, or foot to treat a bone disorder or the muscles
    associated therewith, and subclasses 41+ for a bandaging device for
    treating an injured body portion, even though specially adapted for use in
    supporting the injured body or body member of a person so as to function in
    a proper manner during play of a game.


CLS 473/1
TXT BILLIARDS OR POOL:
    Subject matter under the class definition relating to a game which
    generally involves a horizontally disposed, planar playing surface bounded
    and defined by raised carom rails (i.e., bumper rails) for confining on the
    playing surface a plurality of balls which are being projected over the
    playing surface either into one another or rebounded off of the carom
    rails; the playing surface either (a) is continuous and has a continuous
    carom rail rim so that it is devoid of any pockets or other ball receiving
    receptacles (i.e., a billiard playing surface) or (b) has one or more
    pockets or receptacles adapted to receive therein or pass therethrough one
    or more of the balls (i.e., a pool or pocketed playing surface); in playing
    the game, at least one ball, commonly known as the cue ball, acts as a
    secondary projecting device and is used to strike and move over the playing
    surface one or more of the other balls, commonly known as object balls,
    which act as targets for the cue ball, the cue ball is first forcibly
    struck by a player aiming and manipulating a first projecting device,
    commonly known as a cue or cue stick, so as to project the cue ball either
    directly into engagement with the one or more of the object balls or by
    first banking or rebounding it off of one or more of the carom rails and
    then into engagement with the one or more of the object balls so as to move
    and either position the object balls in a specified arrangement on the
    playing surface or to pocket them, whereby the player may achieve a score
    according to the rules specified for the game.

    (1)     Note.  In a game of this type balls are usually used but it is to
    be understood that ball equivalents may be used in their stead provided
    that they act, other than the fact that they probably do not roll, in the
    same manner that balls would in playing the game.  That is, the ball
    equivalents should move one another about over the playing surface and
    should carom or rebound off of one another or the carom rails in the same
    manner as balls would.

    (2)     Note.  Usually, the initial projecting device (i.e., the cue) used
    to strike the cue ball is a long, tapering, tipped rod or stick but other
    types of cues that may be used include a mechanically operated cue, a
    mallet type cue, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, for a score totalizing apparatus, per se, intended for
    use in a game, particularly subclass 91 for a device for operating a
    register involving a billiards or pool game device.


CLS 473/2
TXT Practice device or device to aid in aiming cue or cue ball during shots
    (e.g., to assist in bank shots, etc.):Subject matter under subclass 1
    comprising either (a) a means to enable a player to improve or perfect his
    or her skills in the playing of any aspect of the game, or (b) a means to
    assist a player in determining the proper alignment or position that the
    cue device must be in so that the cue ball projected thereby moves in the
    desired direction, or (c) a means to assist a player in calculating or
    otherwise determining the direction or angle that the cue ball must be
    projected in order for it to, in turn, project the desired object ball or
    balls in the desired direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42+,    for a device known as a cue rest or bridge.  Although cue rests or
    bridges can somewhat be interpreted as assisting the player in aligning the
    cue during shots, they are not included here because their primary function
    is to aid in supporting the cue during difficult shots such as ones in
    which the player has difficulty in extending his or her cue supporting and
    guiding hand close enough to the cue ball to make a reasonably accurate
    shot.  That is, cue rests or bridges do not primarily function to enable a
    player to determine the proper alignment or position of the cue or the
    proper direction or angle that a cue ball must be projected to achieve the
    desired result.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    434,    Education and Demonstration, particularly subclasses 128+ for a
    means specifically adapted to teach or instruct a person in some aspect of
    playing a game which uses a gameboard or table such as chess or checkers,
    and subclasses 247+ for a means specifically adapted to teach or instruct a
    person in some aspect of a game or sport which involves physical activity.


CLS 473/3
TXT Adapted to be played on floor, ground, or court:
    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein, during play of the game, the
    playing surface is or is adapted to be located substantially on a surface
    that the player normally stands (e.g., on the floor, a rug, or the ground,
    etc.) or the playing surface comprises a court structure, either permanent
    or otherwise, which is located on such surface, whereby the player must use
    a mallet or club as the cue to strike the cue ball due to the playing
    surface being located at substantially his or her feet.

    (1)     Note.  Often the playing surface is of such size that the player
    stands on the playing surface during play of the game.


CLS 473/4
TXT Table or gameboard:
    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the playing surface along with its
    peripheral carom rails are the upper surface portion of a furniture
    structure known as a table which is particularly adapted for playing the
    game of billiards or pool, whereby the playing surface is located generally
    at a height of somewhat the same level as the trunk region of the player's
    body when the player is in standing position during play of the game; or
    wherein the playing surface along with its peripheral carom rails is a
    somewhat portable structure having no or very short legs or support
    structure, whereby the playing surface is adapted to be located on a
    support at approximately normal table height during play of the game.

    (1)     Note.  Also included herein, is a table or gameboard which presents
    its playing surface at, or adapted to be at, such a height that the player
    can play the game while in a sitting position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 188.2+ for an elevating or leveling device for
    furniture.


CLS 473/5
TXT With mechanical ball projector:
    Subject matter under subclass 4 wherein the table or gameboard is combined
    with a mechanically operated cue means for projecting or impelling the cue
    ball over the playing surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for a mechanically operated cue device, per se, for projecting a
    ball over the playing surface of a billiard or pool game.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, particularly subclasses 119+ for a
    surface projectile game device in which there is a mechanically operated
    means for projecting a ball over a playing surface, which projecting means
    is combined with and attached to the surface over which the ball is
    projected.


CLS 473/6
TXT Convertible between billiard and pool (i.e.,  between pocketed and
    nonpocketed):Subject matter under subclass 4 either (a) wherein the table
    or gameboard is convertible from a billiard playing surface to a pool
    playing surface, or vice versa, whereby either the game of billiards or
    pool can be played on the same table or gameboard; or (b) comprises a
    device for converting a table or gameboard from a billiard playing surface
    to a pool playing surface, or vice versa, whereby either the game of
    billiards or pool can be played on the same table or gameboard.


CLS 473/7
TXT Using pocket blocking device positionable only in vicinity of pocket (e.g.,
    pocket plug, rail piece, etc.):Subject matter under subclass 6 either (a)
    wherein a table or gameboard having a pocketed playing surface includes a
    means removably located within a ball receiving pocket or removably located
    only at or only in front of the ball entry portion of a ball receiving
    pocket, whereby a ball moving over the playing surface during play of the
    game is prevented from entering the ball receiving pocket; or (b) wherein
    such a means for preventing a ball from entering a pocket is provided for
    use with such a pocketed table or gameboard.

    (1)     Note.  The pocket blocking device may be attached to the table or
    gameboard in such a manner that it may be shifted at will into or out of
    ball blocking position or it may be a separate device which is placed into
    or removed from ball blocking position as desired.


CLS 473/8
TXT Using interchangeable, shiftable, reversible, or removable cushion
    rails:Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein a table or gameboard having a
    pocketed playing surface includes or there is provided for use with the
    table or gameboard (a) carom rails which, when placed in position on the
    playing surface, prevent a ball moving over the playing surface from
    entering the pockets of the playing surface and other carom rails which,
    when placed in position on the playing surface, allow a ball moving over
    the playing surface to enter the pockets; (b) carom rails which are movably
    mounted or invertibly mounted on the playing surface whereby, when they are
    in one position, prevent a ball moving over the playing surface from
    entering the pockets and, when they are in the other position, allow a ball
    moving over the playing surface to enter the pockets; or (c) additional
    carom rails which, when removably placed in position inside the regular
    carom rails of the playing surface, prevent a ball moving over the playing
    surface from entering the pockets.


CLS 473/9
TXT Invertible playing surface:
    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the table or gameboard includes a
    planar body having a playing surface located on the opposite sides thereof,
    one playing surface having pockets for playing the game of pool and the
    other playing surface being devoid of pockets for playing the game of
    billiards, and wherein the planar body may be reversed at will so as to
    present uppermost the playing surface desired for the game to be played.


CLS 473/10
TXT Convertible to another type of furniture or to different type of game
    playing surface:Subject matter under subclass 4 either (a) wherein the
    table or gameboard is convertible from a billiard or pool game apparatus to
    either another article of furniture such as a dining table, desk, sofa,
    etc., or to another playing surface for playing a game other than billiards
    or pool such as bowling, golf, chess, etc.; or (b) comprises a device for
    converting a table or gameboard from a billiard or pool game apparatus to
    such another article of furniture or to such another playing surface for
    playing a game other than billiards or pool.

    (1)     Note.  It is to be understood that a billiard or pool table or
    gameboard which has been converted to another article of furniture or to a
    different type of game playing surface usually can be converted back to its
    original form.


CLS 473/11
TXT Rail vertically raised or lowered relative to bed:
    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein the conversion process involves
    vertically moving at least one carom rail bounding and defining the playing
    surface of a billiard or pool table or gameboard between an upper,
    upstanding position relative to the playing surface to a lowered, no longer
    upstanding position relative to the playing surface.


CLS 473/12
TXT Vertically movable playing surface:
    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein the conversion process involves
    raising or lowering the playing surface.


CLS 473/13
TXT Detachable or hinged rail:
    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein the conversion process involves
    either attaching or removing at least one carom rail or rotating at least
    one carom rail about an axis to a first position which provides one
    converted form or to a second position which provides the second converted
    form.


CLS 473/14
TXT Convertible to different type of game playing surface:
    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein at least the playing surface of
    the table or gameboard is convertible from a billiard or pool game
    apparatus to another playing surface for playing a game other than
    billiards or pool such as, for example, bowling, golf, chess, etc.


CLS 473/15
TXT Readily foldable or collapsible:
    Subject matter under subclass 4 wherein the table or gameboard includes
    means to enable it, or a portion thereof, to be readily rolled up, folded,
    or otherwise collapsed into a volume which is less than what is taken up
    when the game is being played.


CLS 473/16
TXT Rotatable playing surface:
    Subject matter under subclass 4 wherein the playing surface is mounted on a
    supporting structure and either (a) is mounted on the supporting structure
    in such a manner that it is adapted to be readily pivoted (i.e., turned)
    about an axis located in or passing through the supporting structure, or
    (b) the supporting structure itself contains means to enable the playing
    surface to be readily pivoted or turned about an axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10+,    for a table or gameboard in which the playing surface thereof may
    be pivoted about an axis to effect conversion to another type of furniture
    or to a different type of game playing surface.

    15,     for a billiard or pool table or gameboard in which the playing
    surface thereof may be pivoted about an axis to effect the folding or
    collapsing of the table or gameboard.


CLS 473/17
TXT Having pocket or other target with ball actuated indicator:
    Subject matter under subclass 4 wherein the playing surface includes at
    least one receptacle or other target means adapted to receive or be engaged
    by a ball projected and thereby moving on the playing surface; and wherein
    the receptacle or target means includes means associated therewith which is
    actuated or operated by the ball to indicate to the player that the
    projected ball has entered the receptacle or engaged the target means.

    (1)     Note.  The mere visual presence of a ball residing in a pocket or
    striking the target or the mere observance that a ball entered and passed
    through a pocket opening or other target is not sufficient for inclusion
    herein.


CLS 473/18
TXT Playing surface having unconventional peripheral configuration defined by
    the carom rails:Subject matter under subclass 4 wherein the playing surface
    which is bounded and defined by the upstanding carom rail rim has, when
    viewed in plan, a planar shape other than rectangular, the planar shape of
    the playing surface of a conventional billiard or pool table or gameboard
    being considered to be a rectangle having two parallel sides longer than
    the other two parallel sides.

    (1)     Note.  A table or gameboard having playing surface which has a
    square peripheral configuration is included herein, even though a plane
    figure having a square shape is mathematically considered to be a species
    of a rectangle having all of its sides of equal length.


CLS 473/19
TXT Attachment or accessory providing plural pockets or other targets located
    at only one end of playing surface:Subject matter under subclass 4
    comprising a device or other means adapted to be used with and attached to
    or placed upon one end of the playing surface of a billiard or pool table
    or gameboard having a conventionally shaped playing surface, which device
    or means providing a plurality of ball receiving receptacles or ball
    engaging points of aim located at one end of the playing surface, whereby
    the game to be played utilizes only those receptacles or points of aim
    located at the said one of the playing surface.

    (1)     Note.  As noted in the immediately preceding subclass, a billiard
    or pool playing surface having a conventional planar shape is considered to
    be one which is rectangular in shape, the rectangular shape being of the
    type having two parallel sides longer than the other two parallel sides.


CLS 473/20
TXT Playing surface having unconventional number, entrance opening, or
    arrangement of pockets or having additional or shiftable carom or bumper
    means thereon:Subject matter under subclass 4 (a) wherein the table or
    gameboard has a playing surface having ball receiving pockets and wherein
    (1) the number of pockets disposed on the playing surface, (2) the specific
    locations of the pockets on the playing surface, or (3) the shape of the
    ball receiving openings of the pockets on the playing surface differ from
    the number, arrangement, or opening shape of the pockets of the playing
    surface of a conventional or standard pocketed pool table or gameboard; a
    conventional or standard pocketed pool table or gameboard having a
    rectangularly shaped playing surface with six pockets thereon, one pocket
    being located at each of the corners of the playing surface and one pocket
    being located in the middle of each of the longitudinal sides of the
    playing surface, and the ball receiving openings of the pockets being
    generally circular in shape; or (b) wherein the playing surface has located
    thereon, in addition to the peripheral carom rails defining the playing
    surface, at least one additional means for rebounding a ball therefrom; or
    wherein at least one of the peripheral carom rails, a portion thereof, or
    an additional ball rebounding means located on the playing surface is so
    mounted on the playing surface that it may be moved over the surface by a
    ball striking and rebounding from it.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for the structural details of a ball receiving pocket located in or
    on a table or gameboard.


CLS 473/21
TXT Table attached ball rack:
    Subject matter under subclass 4 including a means for storing the balls
    that are used in playing the game and wherein either the means is attached
    to the table or gameboard as a part thereof or is a separate means that is
    intended to be attached to the table or gameboard.


CLS 473/22
TXT With conveying chutes interconnecting pockets with ball rack:Subject matter
    under subclass 21 wherein the playing surface has ball receiving
    receptacles located thereon or therein and wherein the table or gameboard
    includes conveying troughs, channels, guideways, or other plural chute
    means for carrying balls from the receptacles to at least one ball storage
    rack which is common to at least two of the receptacles.

    (1)     Note.  Usually, all of the pockets are connected by conveying
    chutes to a common ball storage rack.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for the structural details of a ball receiving pocket located in or
    on a table or gameboard.


CLS 473/23
TXT With means to distinguish or identify each ball pocketed:
    Subject matter under subclass 22 wherein the table or gameboard includes
    means associated therewith to detect that a ball has been pocketed during
    play of the game; the game further utilizing a set of balls in which each
    ball has a detectable characteristic which is different from the
    characteristic of every other ball of the set; and wherein the detection
    means further includes means to determine the particular characteristic and
    therefor the identity of each ball from every other ball that is pocketed.


CLS 473/24
TXT Coin controlled:
    Subject matter under subclass 22 wherein the table or gameboard includes
    means associated therewith (a) to prevent unauthorized use of the table or
    gameboard for playing a game, (b) to limit the amount of time that the
    table or gameboard may be used to play a game, or (c) to limit the number
    of games that may be played; and wherein the prevention or limiting means
    is controlled by a mechanism which accepts a predetermined number of units
    or amount of monetary currency to release the prevention or limiting means
    so that a game or games may be played.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for a table or gameboard having an unauthorized use prevention,
    time limiting, or number-of-games limiting means which is not under the
    control of a coin-release mechanism.

    52+,    for a ball, per se, particularly subclass 53 for a ball having a
    characteristic enabling it to be mechanically separated from other balls.


CLS 473/25
TXT With means to segregate or separately store balls pocketed by each player
    or team:Subject matter under subclass 22 wherein the ball rack includes
    means or the table or gameboard includes additional means to at least
    temporarily store the balls pocketed by each particular player or team of
    players separately from the balls pocketed by any other player or team.


CLS 473/26
TXT Ball rack also constitutes or includes spotting rack:
    Subject matter under subclass 22 wherein the ball rack, in addition to
    storing the balls used in the game, either also functions as a means or
    includes means associated therewith to facilitate grouping the balls in
    formation on the playing surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for a ball spotting rack which either is combined with or also
    functions as a ball carrying or storage means.


CLS 473/27
TXT With means to prevent unauthorized use of table or to limit playing time or
    number of games played:Subject matter under subclass 4 wherein the table or
    gameboard includes means associated therewith (a) to prevent unauthorized
    use of the table or gameboard for playing a game, (b) to limit the amount
    of time that the table or gameboard may be used to play a game, or (c) to
    limit the number of games that may be played.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for a table or gameboard having an unauthorized use prevention,
    time limiting, or number-of-games limiting means which is under the control
    of a coin-release mechanism.


CLS 473/28
TXT Pocket structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 4 relating to the structural details of at
    least one ball receiving receptacle located on or in the playing surface of
    a pool table or gameboard.

    (1)     Note.   The ball receiving pocket or receptacle either may be one
    in which a ball enters and is held therein or is one in which a ball enters
    and passes therethrough to, for example, a chute or trough which leads to a
    ball storage rack attached to the pool table or gameboard.


CLS 473/29
TXT Playing surface structure (i.e., bed structure):
    Subject matter under subclass 4 relating to the structural details of the
    playing surface, commonly known as the bed, of a billiard or pool table or
    gameboard.


CLS 473/30
TXT Device for securing playing surface covering (e.g., for securing billiard
    table cloth, etc.):Subject matter under subclass 29 relating to a device or
    other means for securing a covering material, usually consisting of a
    fabric material, in place on the bed.


CLS 473/31
TXT Rail structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 4 relating to the structural details of the
    peripheral carom rails or bumper rails which bound and define the playing
    surface of a pool or billiard table or gameboard.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6+,     particularly subclass 8 for a table or gameboard which is
    convertible between billiards and pool and in which the rails are
    interchangeable, shiftable, reversible, or removable to effect or
    facilitate the conversion.

    10+,    for rail structure details of a table or gameboard which is
    convertible to another type of furniture or to play a different type of
    game, particularly subclass 11 in which the rails are raised or lowered to
    effect the conversion and subclass 13 in which the rails are detachable or
    hinged so as to facilitate the conversion.


CLS 473/32
TXT Cushioned portion thereof:
    Subject matter under subclass 31 relating to the cushioning or padded
    portion of the carom rail or bumper rail upon which a ball moving over the
    playing surface may impinge and be rebounded or caromed therefrom.


CLS 473/33
TXT Frame or leg structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 4 either (a) relating to the structure of the
    table or gameboard, commonly known as the frame, upon which the bed or
    playing surface and the carom rails or bumper rails are supported or (b)
    relating to the structural details of at least one leg of a table or
    gameboard which is mounted upon at least one supporting leg, or relating to
    the attachment of the one or more legs to the rest of the table or
    gameboard.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for a table or gameboard which is readily foldable or collapsible
    and in which the legs thereof, if there are any, may be pivotally or
    removably attached.


CLS 473/34
TXT Dust cover therefor:
    Subject matter under subclass 4 comprising a protective covering means
    specifically adapted to cover at least the playing surface of a billiard or
    pool table or gameboard when it is not in use to play a game.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclass 115 for a cover adapted
    to be used on a portable shelter.


CLS 473/35
TXT Cue chalker:
    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising a means specifically adapted to
    facilitate the application of chalk or an analogous material to the
    ball-striking surface of a cue (i.e., to the cue tip) so as to increase the
    friction between the cue tip and a ball whenever the ball is struck by the
    cue.

    (1)     Note.  Also included herein is a structure, such as a specially
    designed block, formed from chalk or an analogous material which is
    specifically designed and intended for use in the chalking of cue tips.


CLS 473/36
TXT Chalk holder:
    Subject matter under subclass 35 comprising a means for holding,
    containing, or otherwise carrying the chalk or analogous material.


CLS 473/37
TXT With means for automatically applying chalk:
    Subject matter under subclass 36 wherein the chalk holder includes means
    for automatically applying the chalk to the cue tip whenever the tip
    engages the chalk or the holder therefor.


CLS 473/38
TXT Flexibly tethered:
    Subject matter under subclass 36 wherein the chalk holder is fastened to a
    support by means of a cord or an equivalent elongated, flaccid member.


CLS 473/39
TXT Secured to generally fixed support:
    Subject matter under subclass 36 wherein the chalk holder is attached to a
    generally immovable support.

    (1)     Note.  The support may be a table or gameboard or may be the
    ceiling or wall structure of a building or room.


CLS 473/40
TXT Ball spotting rack:
    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising a device for facilitating the
    grouping of a plurality of balls in formation on the playing surface of a
    table or gameboard.


CLS 473/41
TXT With ball carrying or storage means:
    Subject matter under subclass 40 wherein the spotting rack either is
    combined with or also functions as a means (a) to transport a plurality of
    balls as a group from one place to another or (b) to store a plurality of
    balls when they are not being used during play of the game.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for a ball rack attached to a table or gameboard, which ball rack
    either includes or also functions as a ball spotting rack.


CLS 473/42
TXT Cue rest:
    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising a device, commonly known as a
    cue rest or bridge, for supporting the cue during the time the player is in
    the act of projecting a ball located on the playing surface (i.e., during
    the time the player is making a shot).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for a billiard or pool game practice device or a device used in
    such a game to aid the player in aiming the cue or cue ball during shots;
    and see the Search Note appended thereto for the line distinction between
    the subject matter contained in that subclass and the cue rests or bridges
    contained herein.


CLS 473/43
TXT Hand attached or engaged by hand in vicinity of cue supporting
    portion:Subject matter under subclass 42 wherein either (a) the cue rest or
    bridge is secured to at least a portion of the player's hand during a shot
    or; (b) the cue rest or bridge includes means located in the vicinity of
    the cue supporting portion thereof adapted and intended to receive at least
    a portion of a player's hand during a shot.


CLS 473/44
TXT Cue:
    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising a projecting device, commonly
    known as a cue or cue stick, for projecting or impelling a ball located on
    the playing surface of a billiard or pool table or gameboard.

    (1)     Note.  Usually, the projecting device (i.e., the cue) used to
    strike a ball, usually the cue ball, is a long, tapering, tipped rod or
    stick but other types of cues that may be used include a mechanically
    operated cue or a mallet type cue.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for a device specifically adapted and intended to be used for
    resurfacing, cleaning, or trimming the ball-projecting tips of cues.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 494 for a billiard cue trimmer classifiable
    therein which is adapted to shape an end of a billiard cue stick.

    273,    Amusement Devices: Games, subclass 129 for a device or implement
    adapted to project or impel a game projectile for travel upon a playing
    surface of a surface projectile game.


CLS 473/45
TXT Mechanically operated:
    Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein the cue includes a mechanical
    means for projecting or impelling a ball over the playing surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for a mechanically operated cue device combined with a table or
    gameboard used to play billiard or pool games.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, particularly subclasses 16+ for a
    device for projecting a projectile into or through the air, which
    projecting device is spring operated.

    273,    Amusement Devices: Games, particularly subclasses 119+ for a
    surface projectile game device in which there is a mechanically operated
    means for pro-jecting a ball over a playing surface, which projecting means
    is combined with and attached to the surface over which the ball is
    projected; and subclass 129 for a projecting device adapted for use in
    projecting or impelling a projectile over the playing surface of a surface
    projectile game.


CLS 473/46
TXT Disparate attachment therefor or convertible to or combined with disparate
    device:Subject matter under subclass 44 (a) wherein the cue includes
    structure enabling it to be converted to or from a device which no longer
    functions as a cue (e.g., a combined billiard cue and walking cane, etc.),
    or (b) comprises a structure which is combined with or adapted to be
    removably attached to a cue whereby the structure is not commonly
    associated with a cue (e.g., a scorekeeping, glove, or cue tip scuffing
    means).


CLS 473/47
TXT With user adjustable or changeable weight:
    Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein the cue includes a player
    shiftable or player replaceable weight member whereby the player may alter
    the balance or the total weight of the cue as desired.


CLS 473/48
TXT Axially telescopic:
    Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein the cue is an elongated, tapering
    rod or stick member composed of at least two elongated, axially shiftable
    sections, whereby at least one of the sections slides within or axially
    toward another section so that the cue may be extended or compressed along
    its longitudinal axis.

    (1)     Note.  A cue having a shock absorber means, such as a compressible
    spring means, and composed of at least two axially shiftable sections which
    axially shift so as to absorb the shock of striking a ball is included
    herein.


CLS 473/49
TXT Tip or tip fastener therefor:
    Subject matter under subclass 44 either relating to the structural details
    of the ball striking portion of the cue, commonly known as the cue tip, or
    relating to a means for securing the ball striking portion of the cue to
    the rest of the cue.


CLS 473/50
TXT Clamp or press:
    Subject matter under subclass 49 relating to a device for clamping or
    otherwise securely holding the tip to the rest of the cue during setting of
    a cement, glue, or analogous adhesive means used to fasten the tip to the
    rest of the cue.


CLS 473/51
TXT Striking portion formed of material other than leather:
    Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein the portion of the tip which
    directly contacts a ball during projection thereof is composed of a
    material other than the tanned or dressed hide of an animal.


CLS 473/52
TXT Ball:
    Subject matter under subclass 1 relating to the structural details of a
    generally spherical member (i.e., a ball) which is specifically adapted for
    use in playing a game of billiards or pool.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125+,   for a ball adapted for use in the game of bowling.

    280+,   for a practice projectile used to practice for the game of golf.

    351+,   for a ball used in the game of golf.

    413,    for a ball used in the game of croquet.

    422+,   for a projectile used to practice or train for a playing field or
    court game such as soccer, hockey, etc.

    569+,   for a game projectile, in general (often a ball), which is used to
    play a game or sport.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or  Sign Exhibiting, subclass 327 for a game ball
    carrying indicia other than means (a) to indicate the portion of the ball
    to be hit by a projecting device, (b) to indicate its location on a playing
    field, or (c) for a series of balls carrying interrelated indicia to be
    used in playing a game.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, for making
    a ball by lamination and see especially subclasses 145+ for a method which
    includes the step of encapsulation of a permanently fluent material in
    hollow lamina.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 315.9+ for a receptacle
    or package for a sporting or game ball.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for a carbon compound composition
    product intended for use as a game ball, bat, pin, or billy or as any part
    thereof (e.g., a bowling pin coating, etc.).

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    for a process within the class definition for shaping or molding plastic
    materials.


CLS 473/53
TXT Having characteristic enabling ball to be mechanically separated from other
    balls:Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein the ball has some physical
    attribute such as size, weight, presence or amount of magnetic or
    magnetically susceptible material, etc. which is different from any other
    ball used in playing a game of pool, which physical attribute enables a
    means associated with a pool table or gameboard to detect the attribute of
    a pocketed ball and to segregate it in a location on the pool table or
    gameboard (e.g., a ball rack) different from the location where other
    pocketed balls are stored.

    (1)     Note.  Usually, it is the cue ball that has the unique physical
    attribute so that when a scratch occurs (i.e., when the cue ball is
    unintentionally pocketed during a shot), the cue ball may be returned to
    the player(s) in order that the game may continue.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22+,    particularly subclass 23 in which the table or gameboard includes
    means to distinguish or identify each ball pocketed, subclass 24 in which
    the table or gameboard usually includes means to identify and return to the
    player(s) a pocketed cue ball, and subclass 25 in which the table or
    gameboard may include a means to identify and separately store the balls
    pocketed by each player or team.


CLS 473/54
TXT BOWLING:
    Subject matter under the class definition relating to a contest of skill in
    which a contestant (i.e., a bowler) directs a generally spherical ball
    (i.e., a bowling ball) along a planar surface (i.e., a bowling alley)
    either (a) at one or more upstanding elongate targets (e.g., ten pins, duck
    pins, etc.) set upon a playing field (i.e., a bed) with the goal of
    toppling as many targets as possible or (b) at one or more other target
    means which are intended to represent, simulate, or otherwise mimic such
    topplable, elongate targets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 222-225 for a mechanical signal
    or indicator, per se, which is intended to form part of or to be used with
    a game device.

    194,    Check-Actuated Control Mechanisms, for a game or chance device
    involving the particulars of a coin control mechanism.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.1+ for an
    electrical switch, per se, responsive to the action of a game or amusement
    piece.

    235,    Registers, for a score totalizing apparatus, per se, intended for
    use in a game, particularly subclass 1 for a miscellaneous game counter and
    subclass 91 for a device for operating a register which may involve a
    bowling game device.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, particularly subclass 323 for a game
    reporting electric signaling system, per se, used with a bowling game
    device and subclasses 286.01+ for an electric signaling system, per se,
    which may form part of a game.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, for a selectively controlled visual
    display system not limited to a game.  If the term "game" or the like
    appears in the claim, then classification is in Class 473, then
    classification is in the Class 463 group of classes (i.e., Classes 463,
    473, or 273).

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 410+
    for a calculating computer or data processing system, per se, which is
    adapted to be used with, in, or for a game or amusement device, which
    computer or data processing system must include significant recitation of
    the calculating computer or data processing system and must have only
    nominal claim recitation of the game or amusement device.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 4 for a counter or register, per se, which
    is adapted to be controlled to accumulate the totals involved in betting on
    the various possibilities involved in an event and/or to determine the odds
    involved in the payoff of the various possibilities; and subclass 5 for a
    counter or register, per se, which is adapted to be used with, in, or for a
    game or sport.


CLS 473/55
TXT Practice or assist device:
    Apparatus under subclass 54 for training the bowler to improve his/her
    game, or for aiding the bowler who is physically impaired.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    434,    Education and Demonstration, particularly subclasses 128+ for a
    means specifically adapted to teach or instruct a person in some aspect of
    playing a game which uses a gameboard or table such as chess or checkers,
    and subclass 249 for a means specifically adapted to teach or instruct a
    person in some aspect of the game of bowling.

    602,    Surgery:  Splint, Brace, or Bandage, subclasses 41+ for a bandaging
    device, even though specially adapted for use in supporting the body or
    body member of a person so as to function in a proper manner in playing a
    game.


CLS 473/56
TXT For handicapped person:
    Apparatus under subclass 55 for aiding the bowler who is physically
    impaired.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    602,    Surgery:  Splint, Brace, or Bandage, subclasses 41+ for a bandaging
    device, even though specially adapted for use in supporting the body or
    body member of a person so as to function in a proper manner in playing a
    game.


CLS 473/57
TXT Selective pin setter:
    Apparatus under subclass 55 having means for upstanding one or more targets
    on the playing field in a pattern of the bowler's choosing, generally
    consisting of less than a full complement of targets.


CLS 473/58
TXT Ball path indicator:
    Apparatus under subclass 55 having means to actively display the route
    along the alley that a previously rolled bowling ball has taken on its
    course towards the target, or means for showing the bowler a preferred
    route along which to roll the bowling ball.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115+,   for permanent indicia located on a bowling alley or board.


CLS 473/59
TXT Bowler worn or carried:
    Apparatus under subclass 55 supported by the bowler during game play which
    may be securable to the bowler's body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 455+ for protective clothing to be worn by
    athletes such as a football helmet, a baseball or boxing glove, a knee pad,
    etc.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, particularly subclasses 101+ for a
    package or article carrier which is carried or worn by an animate bearer.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, particularly subclasses
    137+ for an article carrier which is adapted to be gripped and carried by
    the hand of a person.


CLS 473/60
TXT Including means for positive engagement with ball:
    Apparatus under subclass 59 for interlockingly gripping the bowling ball.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a device supported by the bowler having
    means to interfit with or encircle the bowling ball.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127+,   for a bowling ball with means especially adapted to facilitate the
    manual grasping and holding of the ball by the bowler.


CLS 473/61
TXT Finger support or guide:
    Apparatus under subclass 59 having means to brace or position a digit of
    the bowler's bowling ball throwing hand.


CLS 473/62
TXT Wrist support or guide:
    Apparatus under subclass 59 having means to brace or position the bowler's
    ball throwing hand with respect to the bowler's bowling ball throwing arm.


CLS 473/63
TXT Arm or elbow support or guide:
    Apparatus under subclass 59 having means to brace or position the bowler's
    bowling ball throwing limb with respect to either the medial joint therein
    or the bowler's torso.


CLS 473/64
TXT Handling of pin or pin representation:
    Subject matter under subclass 54 either (a) relating to the treatment,
    manipulation, sensing, or indicating of the target or (b) relating to means
    which is intended to mimic the treatment, manipulation, sensing, or
    indicating of the target or target representation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, for a power driven conveyor apparatus
    adapted to handle or manipulate one or more articles so as to transport
    them from one location to another.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, for an apparatus adapted to grip,
    handle, or manipulate articles.


CLS 473/65
TXT Including electrical cycle sequence control:
    Apparatus under subclass 64 having circuitry for the flow of electrical
    energy which regulates the actions of the apparatus as a whole.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for patents claiming function
    regulating circuitry, per se, when the function relates to the overall
    operation of the apparatus, or pin handling apparatus combined with said
    circuitry.

    (2)     Note.  Circuitry, per se, or pin handling apparatus combined
    therewith to regulate or initiate a single action of the apparatus will be
    classified under the subclass providing for apparatus relating to that
    action.


CLS 473/66
TXT Including means for conserving energy:
    Apparatus under subclass 64 having means for reducing the energy consumed
    for operation.


CLS 473/67
TXT With indicator:
    Apparatus under subclass 64 having active means for visual, auditory, or
    tactile presentation of a condition or state of the game or target.

    (1)     Note.  Passive displays, such as mere indicia, will be classified
    under the subclass providing for the pin handling structure, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 222-225 for a mechanical signal
    or indicator, per se, which is intended to form part of or to be used with
    a game device.

    194,    Check-Actuated Control Mechanisms, for a game or chance device
    involving the particulars of a coin control mechanism.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 61.1+ for an
    electrical switch, per se, responsive to the action of a game or amusement
    piece.

    235,    Registers, for a score totalizing apparatus, per se, intended for
    use in a game, particularly subclass 1 for a miscellaneous game counter,
    subclass 78 for a game calculator having concentric totalizing disks
    mounted upon a single axis, subclass 88 for a game calculator having
    tabular indicia placed upon disks which rotate about their centers, and
    subclass 91 for a device for operating a register involving a billiards or
    pool game device.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, particularly subclass 323 for a game
    reporting electric signaling system, per se, used with a bowling game
    device and subclasses 286.01+ for an electric signaling system, per se,
    which may form part of a game.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, for a selectively controlled visual
    display system not limited to a game.  If the term "game" or the like
    appears in the claim, then classification is in the Class 463 group of
    classes (i.e., Classes 463, 473, or 273).

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 410+
    for a calculating computer or data processing system, per se, which is
    adapted to be used with, in, or for a game or amusement device, which
    computer or data processing system must include significant recitation of
    the calculating computer or data processing system and must have only
    nominal claim recitation of the game or amusement device.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 4 for a counter or register, per se, which
    is adapted to be controlled to accumulate the totals involved in betting on
    the various possibilities involved in an event and/or to determine the odds
    involved in the payoff of the various possibilities; and subclass 5 for a
    counter or register, per se, which is adapted to be used with, in, or for a
    game or sport.


CLS 473/68
TXT Tethered or pivotal pin:

    Apparatus under subclass 67 wherein the target is attached to the
    manipulating structure therefor by an elongate flexible member or a hinge.


CLS 473/69
TXT Pinfall:

    Apparatus under subclass 67 wherein the means for presentation is
    qualitatively or quantitatively representative of the toppled targets.


CLS 473/70
TXT Score:

    Apparatus under subclass 69 wherein the means for presentation is
    quantitatively representative of the fallen targets.


CLS 473/71
TXT Including electromechanical calculating means:

    Apparatus under subclass 70 having means for summing the number of fallen
    targets comprising means for converting electrical energy into mechanical
    energy.

    (1)     Note.  Patents claiming indicators of the type classified herein
    have a moving part, such as a stepper relay, electric motor, etc. which
    counts the number of fallen targets.


CLS 473/72
TXT Foul:
    Apparatus under subclass 67 wherein the means for presentation is
    representative of the bowler trespassing onto the bowling alley when
    throwing the bowling ball.


CLS 473/73
TXT Pin setter:
    Apparatus under subclass 64 having means for placing a plurality of targets
    onto the playing field in a prescribed pattern in such a manner that the
    targets may be subsequently toppled by the bowling ball.


CLS 473/74
TXT Rollable, translatable, or simulative target:
    Apparatus under subclass 73 wherein the target towards which the bowling
    ball is rolled is either a ball, a target generally in a state of constant
    motion, or a target which mimics a topplable object.

    (1)     Note.  An object which mimics a topplable object could be, for
    example, an electrical switch or light beam in the playing field which when
    struck by the bowling ball actuates an electromechanically operated target
    to topple, or which turns off a light behind a lighted display
    corresponding to the switch or light beam.


CLS 473/75
TXT Pivotal pin:
    Apparatus under subclass 73 wherein the target is hingedly secured within
    the playing field of the apparatus.


CLS 473/76
TXT Pivot substantially at base of pin:
    Apparatus under subclass 75 wherein the hinged securement is generally made
    at the bottom of the target.


CLS 473/77
TXT With spring detent:
    Apparatus under subclass 75 including resilient means for retaining the
    target out of the field of play after it has been struck by the bowling
    ball.


CLS 473/78
TXT Tethered pin:
    Apparatus under subclass 73 wherein the target is secured within the
    playing field of the apparatus by means of an elongate flexible element
    (e.g., a cable, cord, rope, etc.).


CLS 473/79
TXT Tethered at base of pin:
    Apparatus under subclass 78 wherein the elongate flexible element passes
    through the bottom of the target.


CLS 473/80
TXT Including reset lever or crank:
    Apparatus under subclass 79 having means pivotable or rotatable about a
    point to place the elongate flexible element into tension so as to upright
    a toppled target.


CLS 473/81
TXT Including means to remove dead wood:
    Apparatus under subclass 78 having means to remove from the playing field a
    toppled target while leaving any untoppled targets in place.


CLS 473/82
TXT Pin biased away from bed:
    Apparatus under subclass 81 wherein the target has a force normally applied
    thereto to remove it from the playing field and is temporarily secured to
    the playing field by means strong enough (e.g., magnetism, hooks, etc.) to
    overcome the force.

    (1)     Note.  When a target is struck by the bowling ball the temporary
    securement is broken and the force normally applied to the target removes
    it from the playing field.


CLS 473/83
TXT Manually loadable:
    Apparatus under subclass 73 for placing a target into the field of play
    which is chargeable with a target by a human operator (i.e., a pinboy).


CLS 473/84
TXT Including means to upright pin:
    Apparatus under subclass 83 having means provided for uprighting a target
    placed therein at an inclined angle.


CLS 473/85
TXT Magnetic force acts on pin:
    Apparatus under subclass 73 wherein a magnetic field exists between the
    target and the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  The force exerted by the magnet is typically for
    manipulating the target.


CLS 473/86
TXT For alternative pin sets:
    Apparatus under subclass 73 having means for replacing a full complement of
    targets with another of a different type or quality.


CLS 473/87
TXT Including means to lift live wood:
    Apparatus under subclass 73 having means to remove an untoppled target from
    the playing field and to subsequently return it to the playing field after
    the removal of any toppled targets.


CLS 473/88
TXT With compensation for pin offset:
    Apparatus under subclass 87 having means to return the target to the
    playing field at substantially the location from which it was removed.

    (1)     Note.  Often a target is struck by the bowling ball and though it
    fails to topple it is displaced from its initial placement (i.e., it walks).


CLS 473/89
TXT Including distributor:
    Apparatus under subclass 73 having means for mechanically arranging a group
    of targets into a pattern prior to placing the group onto the playing field.


CLS 473/90
TXT Including means to convey pin to distributor:
    Apparatus under subclass 89 having means to transport the targets to the
    pattern arranging means.


CLS 473/91
TXT Including elevator:
    Apparatus under subclass 90 having means raise a toppled target from the
    height of the playing field to the height of the pattern forming means.

    (1)     Note.  Means for transporting a target to the pattern forming means
    which simultaneously raises a toppled target from the playing field is
    classified herein.


CLS 473/92
TXT With compensation for pin offset:
    Apparatus under subclass 64 having means for grasping an untoppled target
    on the playing field in such a manner as not to disturb the position of the
    target on the playing field.


CLS 473/93
TXT Pit cushion or actuator therefor:
    Apparatus under subclass 64 mounted beyond the bed for absorbing the
    momentum of the bowling ball, or means attached thereto for initiating the
    target manipulating apparatus in response to being struck by the bowling
    ball subsequently to passing beyond the end of the bed.


CLS 473/94
TXT Pin guide or conveyor:
    Apparatus under subclass 64 for conducting or transporting the target.


CLS 473/95
TXT Distributor:
    Apparatus under subclass 94 for positioning a plurality of targets in a
    prescribed pattern into an apparatus for placing the targets onto the
    playing field.


CLS 473/96
TXT Pivotable chute or conveyor:
    Apparatus under subclass 95 wherein the means for positioning the targets
    comprises a target conducting or transporting means which is angularly
    positionable about a point.


CLS 473/97
TXT Elevator:
    Apparatus under subclass 94 comprising means for raising a toppled target
    from the height of the playing field to the height of an apparatus for
    placing the target onto the playing field.


CLS 473/98
TXT With ball separator:
    Apparatus under subclass 97 including means for segregating the target from
    the bowling ball.


CLS 473/99
TXT And ball handling:
    Apparatus under subclass 94 including means for manipulating the bowling
    ball.


CLS 473/100
TXT Sweep:
    Apparatus under subclass 94 for removing any targets from the playing field.


CLS 473/101
TXT Pin sensor:
    Apparatus under subclass 64 comprising means for detecting the position or
    state (i.e., toppled or untoppled) of a target on the playing field.


CLS 473/102
TXT Pin spot:
    Apparatus under subclass 64 comprising means for supporting the target
    thereon which is mountable within the playing field.


CLS 473/103
TXT Including means for positive pin alignment:
    Apparatus under subclass 102 having means interengagable with the target so
    as to precisely position the target thereon.


CLS 473/104
TXT Retractable peg:
    Apparatus under subclass 103 wherein the interengagable means comprises a
    pilot which is temporarily projectable into a complementary hole in the
    target and withdrawable therefrom.


CLS 473/105
TXT Socket-type:
    Apparatus under subclass 103 wherein the interengagable means comprises a
    depression in the surface of the supporting means shaped to receive a
    complementary surface of the target.


CLS 473/106
TXT Ball handling or diverting means:
    Subject matter under subclass 54 specifically adapted for guiding,
    manipulating, or deflecting the generally spherical ball directed by the
    bowler (a) during the time it is on its path toward the one or more targets
    as directed, (b) during its return back to the bowler, (c) during the time
    after it has either struck or missed the one or more targets but before it
    has been sent on its return back to the bowler, or (d) during the time it
    is being propelled or directed (e.g., by a mechanically operated means).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125+,   for a bowling ball, per se, which is provided with a grip or handle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, for a power driven conveyor apparatus
    adapted to handle or manipulate one or more articles so as to transport
    them from one location to another.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, for an apparatus adapted to grip,
    handle, or manipulate articles.


CLS 473/107
TXT Mechanical projector:
    Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein a machine or tool is used to
    propel or direct the ball toward the one or more targets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, particularly subclasses 119+ for a
    surface projectile game device in which there is a mechanically operated
    means for projecting a ball over a playing surface, which projecting means
    is combined with and attached to the surface over which the ball is
    projected; and subclass 129 for a projecting device adapted for use in
    projecting or impelling a projectile over the playing surface of a surface
    projectile game.


CLS 473/108
TXT Tethered ball:
    Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein the ball is secured generally
    within the confines of the playing field by means of an elongate flexible
    member (e.g., a cable, cord, rope, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139+,   for a tethered projectile used to practice for, or play, a golf
    game.

    423+,   for a practice or training device for a playing field or court
    game, which device includes a tethered projectile.

    575+,   for a tethered game projectile, in general.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, particularly subclasses 331+ for an
    aerial projectile tethered to a target.


CLS 473/109
TXT Means to change or curve ball path:
    Subject matter under subclass 106 comprising a means for altering the route
    or track of the directed ball during the time it is approaching the one or
    more targets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, particularly subclasses 121 and 124 for
    a surface projectile ball game with a return course.


CLS 473/110
TXT Ball return:
    Subject matter under subclass 106 comprising means specifically adapted for
    sending the ball back to the bowler after it has either struck or missed
    the one or more targets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, particularly subclasses 395 and 396+ for
    an aerial projectile game device combined with or to be used with a target,
    which device is adapted to return a projectile back to the area from which
    it was projected; and subclasses 121 and 124 for a surface projectile ball
    game with a ball return course.


CLS 473/111
TXT Ball lift or elevator:
    Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein the ball return means includes
    means to raise the ball up to a higher level so as, for example, to
    facilitate the return of the ball to the bowler by gravity.


CLS 473/112
TXT Mechanical means for ball retarding or arresting:
    Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein the ball return means includes a
    machine or tool for slowing or reducing the speed or momentum of the
    returning ball as it approaches the bowler.


CLS 473/113
TXT Gutter structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 106 comprising means specifically adapted to
    capture a directed ball on an errant or misdirected path.

    (1)     Note.  A bowling surface or alley having specific gutter structure
    is provided for in this subclass rather than in subclasses 115+ below.

    (2)     Note.  Generally, a gutter is provided adjacent each side of the
    bowling surface or alley.


CLS 473/114
TXT Backstop, division board, or adjunct therefor:
    Subject matter under subclass 106 comprising means for diverting or
    deflecting the ball from its directed path (a) after the ball has either
    struck or missed the one or more targets and thereby passed the target(s),
    or (b) after it has left the alley.

    (1)     Note.  The adjunct found in this subclass is generally a cushion or
    other replaceable shock-absorbing means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109,    for a means to change or curve the ball path of a bowling ball as
    it is approaching the target(s).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclass 404 for an aerial projectile
    target which is adapted to be penetrated by aerial projectiles, which
    penetrable target is combined with a projectile-backstop means for stopping
    or catching projectiles impacting on the target; and subclass 410 for an
    aerial projectile backstop, per se, which comprises means to stop, trap, or
    catch a projected aerial projectile.


CLS 473/115
TXT Alley or board structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 54 comprising a planar structure (i.e., a
    bowling alley) specifically adapted to support a directed ball during its
    travel toward the one or more targets.

    (1)     Note.  An alley or board structure which is combined with a ball,
    pin, or target structure is provided for in this subclass or in the
    subclasses indented hereunder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for an alley or board structure which includes specific gutter
    structure.


CLS 473/116
TXT Portable game board, table, or alley:
    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein the alley or board structure is
    capable of being easily carried or moved.

    (1)     Note.  Most of the patents found in this subclass relate to bowling
    gameboards, tables, or alleys specifically designed for use in the user's
    home or yard.


CLS 473/117
TXT With nonwooden alley surface or lining:
    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein the planar structure has a
    surface layer or coating composed of a material other than wood.

    (1)     Note.  An alley or board structure which is made from a wooden
    material but which has a specifically-recited surface coating thereon such
    as, for example, wax or urethane is included in this subclass.


CLS 473/118
TXT Pin:
    Subject matter under subclass 54 comprising means specifically adapted for
    use as an upstanding elongate target for a bowling ball directed along a
    bowling alley thereat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115+,   for an alley or board structure which is combined with a ball, pin,
    or target structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 331 for a process of repairing,
    reconstructing, or otherwise restoring a bowling pin.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for a carbon compound composition
    product intended for use as a game ball, bat, pin, or billy or as any part
    thereof (e.g., a bowling pin coating, etc.).

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    for a process within the class definition for shaping or molding plastic
    materials.

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 118+, particularly subclass
    127 for a target used in a surface projectile ball game apparatus.


CLS 473/119
TXT Composite structure (e.g., distinct layers, components, joint,
    etc.):Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein the pin is constructed of
    diverse materials or of assembled parts, which parts are made either of
    diverse materials or of similar or identical material.

    (1)     Note.  Generally, a composite possesses structural or functional
    properties not present in any individual component thereof.


CLS 473/120
TXT With reinforcing filament, fiber, or fabric:
    Subject matter under subclass 119 wherein the composite pin is strengthened
    (a) by an elongate threadlike material or (b) by a textile product thereof.


CLS 473/121
TXT With metal shell or skin:
    Subject matter under subclass 119 wherein the composite pin has a metallic
    covering or outer layer.


CLS 473/122
TXT With wooden component:
    Subject matter under subclass 119 wherein the composite pin has at least
    one part or layer made from a wooden material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and its indents provide for a composite pin
    structure incorporating sawdust or wooden fibers.


CLS 473/123
TXT Laminated or attached wooden components:
    Subject matter under subclass 122 wherein the composite pin includes plural
    adjacent and joined parts or portions made from wooden material.

    (1)     Note.  Generally, the wooden components are glued together but in
    some cases the components are mechanically secured together.


CLS 473/124
TXT With end or bottom reinforcing preform:
    Subject matter under subclass 122 wherein the composite pin includes
    diverse strengthening means attached to the end or bottom portions thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Generally, it is the ends of the pin (i.e., either the top
    or bottom portions) which are prone to splitting or excessive wear.

    (2)     Note.  The reinforcing preform, per se, for a bowling pin is
    provided for herein unless elsewhere provided for.


CLS 473/125
TXT Ball:
    Subject matter under subclass 54 relating to the structural details of a
    generally spherical member (i.e., a bowling ball) which is specifically
    adapted for use by the bowler in the game of bowling.

    (1)     Note.  Attachments and adjuncts for use on or with a bowling ball
    are provided for in this subclass and its indents unless elsewhere provided
    for.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52+,    for a ball adapted for use in the game of billiards or pool.

    115+,   for an alley or board structure which is combined with a ball, pin,
    or target structure.

    280+,   for a practice projectile used to practice for the game of golf.

    351+,   for a ball used in the game of golf.

    413,    for a ball used in the game of croquet.

    422+,   for a projectile used to practice or train for a playing field or
    court game such as soccer, hockey, etc.

    569+,   for a game projectile, in general (often a ball) which is used to
    play a game or sport.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 327 for a game ball
    carrying indicia other than means (a) to indicate the portion of the ball
    to be hit by a projecting device, (b) to indicate its location on a playing
    field, or (c) for a series of balls carrying interrelated indicia to be
    used in playing a game.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, for making
    a ball by lamination and see especially subclasses 145+ for a method which
    includes the step of encapsulation of a permanently fluent material in
    hollow lamina.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 315.9+ for a receptacle
    or package for a sporting or game ball, particularly subclass 315.91 for a
    receptacle or package for a bowling ball.

    260,    Chemistry  of Carbon Compounds, for a carbon compound composition
    product intended for use as a game ball, bat, pin, or billy or as any part
    thereof (e.g., a bowling pin coating, etc.).

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    for a process within the class definition for shaping or molding plastic
    materials.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclass 249 for a means specifically
    adapted to teach or instruct a person in some aspect of the game of bowling.


CLS 473/126
TXT With weight block:
    Subject matter under subclass 125 wherein the ball includes a preform
    specifically adapted to balance or add the necessary mass thereto.


CLS 473/127
TXT With specific grip means:
    Subject matter under subclass 125 comprising means especially adapted for
    facilitating the manual grasping and holding the bowling ball by the bowler.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55+,    for apparatus adapted to aid a bowler who is physically impaired or
    to train a bowler in improving his\her game.

    60,     for a bowler worn or carried means adapted for training a bowler in
    improving his/her game or for aiding a bowler who is physically impaired,
    which practice or assist means includes a means to interlockingly grip a
    bowling ball.

    61,     for a bowler worn or carried means adapted for training a bowler in
    improving his/her game or for aiding a bowler who is physically impaired,
    which practice or assist means includes a means to brace or position a
    digit of the bowler's throwing hand.


CLS 473/128
TXT Thumb or finger hole grip:
    Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein the ball includes at least one
    recess therein for the purpose of receiving at least one digit of the hand
    of the bowler in order to facilitate holding of the ball by the bowler.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 509+ for a gauge adapted to
    determine the position of the holes to be made in an undrilled bowling ball
    so that the undrilled bowling ball can be marked and drilled to custom fit
    it to an individual, particularly subclass 510 for a gauge which includes a
    simulated bowling ball, which gauge is used to determine the spacing
    between the thumb and the fingers used by the individual to grip a bowling
    ball.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclass 1 for a
    method of drilling a bowling ball and Digest 1 for a bowling ball drill.


CLS 473/129
TXT Size or depth adjusting means:
    Subject matter under subclass 128 wherein the thumb or finger hole grip is
    provided with a selectively variable, shape-conformable instrumentality.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130,    for a thumb or finger hole grip means which is adjustable by means
    of interchangeable inserts or bushings.


CLS 473/130
TXT Removable insert or bushing:
    Subject matter under subclass 128 wherein the thumb or finger hole grip
    includes a separable component or thimble.

    (1)     Note.  Separable components, per se, for a bowling ball finger grip
    are found in this subclass unless provided for elsewhere.


CLS 473/131
TXT GOLF:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a method, a playing
    area, playing equipment, a practice device, or auxiliary device used by a
    player or located on the playing area, not otherwise provided for
    elsewhere, that is for playing or practicing a game wherein a player
    strikes a ball by a stroke or a number of strokes to advance the ball from
    a ball striking location to one of a plurality of sequentially numbered
    putting holes, and plays a number of such holes sequentially with the
    object, on each hole, of advancing the ball from the ball striking location
    into the putting hole in the fewest number of strokes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 161.2 for a golf glove.

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclass 508 for a gauge to analyze a golf
    club.

    36,     Boots, Shoes and Leggings, subclass 127 for a golf shoe.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 915 for a collection of
    patents relating to golf club identification.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 12.02 for testing a golf ball by
    impact, and subclass 65.03 for specific types of golf club testing.

    101,    Printing, Digest 40 for a collection of patents relating to
    printing on golf balls.

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 2 for apparatus for making golf clubs.

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, subclass 159 for a golf
    cart or bag cover, and subclass 160 for a golf club cover.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for a method of making a golf ball.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 371+ for a turf repair handtool of
    general application and not specified for use by a golfer.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 315.2+ for a golf bag,
    and subclass 315.9 for a golf ball receptacle.

    211,    Supports: Racks, subclass 70.2 for a golf club rack.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, for a carrier attached to a golf
    cart, and subclass 918 for a collection of patents for a golf tee or ball
    marker carrier.

    248,    Supports, subclass 96 for a golf bag holder.

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 108.2+ for a simulated golf
    game which uses a surface projectile, subclass 245 for a board game which
    simulates play of the game of golf, and subclass 317.2 for a simulated golf
    game which uses an aerial projectile.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 47.26 for a wheeled golf pull cart, and
    Digest 5 for a collection of patents on motorized golf carts, and Digest 6
    for a collection of patents on wheeled golf club carriers.

    283,    Printed Matter, subclass 49 for a golf score card.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 19.2 for a pole
    mounted golf ball retriever.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclass 252 for a golf-teaching
    device, and see the line note at the top of this (473) class.

    463,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 2+ for a simulated golf game
    which uses a simulated projectile and which includes means for processing
    electronic data (e.g., a computer or video golf game, etc.) and subclasses
    49+ for a simulated projectile game or for a target or accessory therefor
    (e.g., a game which uses a simulation of a golf ball, etc.).

    D21,    Games, Toys, and Sports Goods, appropriate subclasses for design
    patents relating to golf.


CLS 473/132
TXT Ball feeding means and tee:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the equipment or device comprises
    means for holding a spherical projectile in position to be struck by the
    player at an elevation above the surface where the player stands, and
    further comprises structure for delivering the projectile to the holding
    means and positioning it thereon.


CLS 473/133
TXT Adjustable tee height:

    Subject matter under subclass 132 wherein the holding means includes a part
    to regulate the vertical elevation of the projectile so that the projectile
    may be struck at any of a plurality of selected elevations.


CLS 473/134
TXT Condition responsive feeding means:

    Subject matter under subclass 132 comprising means to sense a condition or
    change in condition of the projectile or the delivering and positioning
    structure; and, in response to such sensing, effect a control function on
    the structure.


CLS 473/135
TXT Pneumatic:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 wherein the structure is operated by
    power derived from positive or negative pressure of air or another gas.


CLS 473/136
TXT Electrical:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 wherein the structure is operated by
    power derived from electrical current


CLS 473/137
TXT Pivotal arm ball feed:

    Subject matter under subclass 132 wherein the delivering and positioning
    structure includes an elongated member pivotal about a fixed axis.


CLS 473/138
TXT Projectile tethered to swingable implement:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 comprising an object to be struck by the
    player, and further including a cord for attaching the object to an
    instrument to be swung by the player to limit the distance the object moves
    away from the player upon being struck.


CLS 473/139
TXT Anchored (e.g., tethered, etc.) projectile:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the equipment or device comprises
    an object to be struck by the player with a swingable implement, and
    further comprises attachment means for attaching the object to a fixed
    structure to limit the distance the object moves away from the player upon
    being struck.


CLS 473/140
TXT With electrical sensor or electrical indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 including means operated by electrical
    current to detect a condition of the object; or means operated by
    electrical current to provide a player with information concerning a
    condition of the object.


CLS 473/141
TXT Pictorial flight path image display:

    Subject matter under subclass 140 including a screen for providing the
    player with a visual image of the flight path of the object or a visual
    image of a simulated flight path of the object.


CLS 473/142
TXT Spool for tether:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 and further including a reel for winding
    attachment means to permit a flexible cord attachment means to be wound
    between elongated and stored positions.


CLS 473/143
TXT Force or direction indicator and tether:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 further including a device for providing
    the player with information concerning the impact power with which the
    object is struck, or information concerning the path of travel of the
    object, and wherein the attachment means is a flexible cord.


CLS 473/144
TXT Linear spring indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 143 wherein the device comprises a resilient
    part which is stretched or compressed along a straight line.


CLS 473/145
TXT Force or direction indicator associated with projectile moving around a
    horizontal axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein the attachment means is attached
    to the fixed structure in such a manner so as to constrain the object for
    movement about an axis parallel with the horizon; and further including a
    device for providing the player with information concerning the impact
    power with which the object is struck, or information concerning the path
    of travel of the object.


CLS 473/146
TXT Force or direction indicator associated with projectile moving around a
    vertical axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein the attachment means is attached
    to the fixed structure in such a manner as to constrain the object for
    movement about an axis perpendicular with the horizon; and further
    including a device for providing the player with information concerning
    then impact power with which the object is struck, or information
    concerning the path of travel of the object.


CLS 473/147
TXT Spherical projectile attached to tether:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein the object is a ball and wherein
    the attachment means is a flexible cord.


CLS 473/148
TXT Plural projectiles:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 and further including a second object to
    be struck by the player; the second object either being attached to the
    first object or to a second attachment means.


CLS 473/149
TXT Projectile moves around vertical axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein the attachment means is attached
    to the fixed structure in such a manner as to constrain the object for
    movement about an axis perpendicular to the horizon.


CLS 473/150
TXT Projectile addressing surface and target, or distance marker (e.g., course,
    putting green with cup, driving range, miniature golf course, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the equipment or device comprises
    a location where an object to be struck by the player is positioned prior
    to being struck, and further comprises a member at which the object is
    aimed; or comprises a structure to provide the player with information
    concerning the distance the object has traveled from the player, or the
    distance from the member at which the object is aimed.


CLS 473/151
TXT Electrical sensor or electrical indicator responsive to swingable implement
    or projectile:

    Subject matter under subclass 150 including means operated by electrical
    current to detect a condition of an instrument to be swung by the player or
    to detect a condition of an object to be struck by the instrument; or to
    provide a player with information concerning a condition of the instrument
    or condition of the object.


CLS 473/152
TXT Sensor is projectile responsive (e.g., free-flight detection means, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 151 wherein the detection means is to detect
    a condition of the object to be struck by the player.


CLS 473/153
TXT Projectile in receiver indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 152 wherein the member at which the object is
    aimed comprises a receptacle, and wherein means is provided to inform the
    player that the object is in the receptacle.


CLS 473/154
TXT Target impact responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 152 including means to detect that the object
    has struck the member at which the object was aimed.


CLS 473/155
TXT Including sensor responsive to projectile on addressing surface or in
    flight (e.g., tee-target time detection, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 152 including means to detect a condition of
    the object while it is at the location to be struck; or including means to
    detect a condition of the object while it is moving toward the member at
    which it is aimed.


CLS 473/156
TXT Pictorial flight path image display:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 including a screen for providing the
    player with a visual image of the flight path of the object or a visual
    image of a simulated flight path of the object.


CLS 473/157
TXT Non-earth fairway:

    Subject matter under subclass 150 wherein a surface formed of material
    other than ground or grass extends between the struck location and the
    member at which the object is aimed.


CLS 473/158
TXT And obstacle (e.g., miniature golf course windmill, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 157 and further including a structure
    positioned to potentially interfere with the travel of the object between
    the struck location and the member at which the object is aimed.


CLS 473/159
TXT Target is surface positioned aperture:

    Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the member at which the object is
    aimed comprises means defining an opening in the surface.


CLS 473/160
TXT Selectively contourable (e.g., slope simulating surface, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 159 including means to change the slope of
    the surface to influence the path of travel of the object over the surface.


CLS 473/161
TXT Motor actuation:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein the slope changing means is
    actuatable by a machine that produces motion.


CLS 473/162
TXT Collapsible (e.g., for storage etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein the surface is particularly
    structured so as to facilitate reduction in the area occupied thereby.


CLS 473/163
TXT Projectile return:

    Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein structure is provided to move the
    object from the opening defining means toward the location at which the
    object was struck.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166,    182, 191, and 194, for projectile return with other combinations.


CLS 473/164
TXT Projectile rebounds off target:

    Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the member at which the object is
    aimed is so structured as to permit the object to carom from it.


CLS 473/165
TXT Particular projectile (e.g., reduced flight balls, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 150 wherein significance is attributed to
    structure of the object to be struck.


CLS 473/166
TXT Projectile return:

    Subject matter under subclass 150 wherein structure is provided to move the
    object from the member at which the object is aimed toward the location at
    which the object was struck.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163,    182, 191, and 194, for projectile return with other combinations.


CLS 473/167
TXT Fairways extending radially from centrally located addressing surface or
    target:

    Subject matter under subclass 150 comprising a first central location for
    striking the object, and including a plurality of members at which the
    object is to be aimed spaced at circumferential positions around the first
    central location; or comprising a second central location for the member at
    which the object is to be aimed is located, and including a plurality of
    object striking locations spaced at circumferential positions around the
    second central location.


CLS 473/168
TXT Plural addressing surfaces (e.g., driving range, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 150 including a plurality of locations where
    the object to be struck is positioned.


CLS 473/169
TXT Having sequential play (e.g., regulation earth course, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 168 wherein the locations are arrived at, one
    after the other, by the player.


CLS 473/170
TXT Upstanding target (e.g., wicket, bucket, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 169 wherein the member at which the object is
    aimed extends above a playing surface.


CLS 473/171
TXT Putting green:

    Subject matter under subclass 168 wherein the location where the object is
    to be struck, and the member at which the object is aimed, is on a grass
    surface where the object is intended to be struck only by an implement for
    rolling the object along the surface without elevating it above the surface.


CLS 473/172
TXT Upstanding target:

    Subject matter under subclass 150 wherein the member at which the object is
    aimed extends above a playing surface.


CLS 473/173
TXT Target or obstacle (e.g., putting hole, hole marker, sand trap, etc.):


    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the equipment or device comprises
    a member at which an object to be struck by the player is aimed, or
    comprises a structure positioned to potentially interfere with the travel
    of the object in its movement toward the member at which it is aimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150,    for a target combined with a projectile addressing surface.


CLS 473/174
TXT Target on putting surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 173 wherein the member is located on a
    surface where the object is intended to be struck only by an implement for
    rolling the object along the surface without elevating it above the
    surface.


CLS 473/175
TXT Receiver is cup in earth (e.g., regulation hole in green, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 174 wherein the surface is dirt or grass, and
    the member is a receptacle defining an opening in the surface.


CLS 473/176
TXT Having cup marker (e.g., flag pin, etc.) or with sensor responsive to
    projectile:

    Subject matter under subclass 175 further including a device to provide
    visual indication as to where the receptacle is located on the surface, or
    including means to detect a condition of the object.


CLS 473/177
TXT And projectile removal:

    Subject matter under subclass 176 and further including means to eject the
    object from the receptacle.


CLS 473/178
TXT Electrical actuation (e.g., solenoid, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein the ejecting means is powered by
    electrical current.


CLS 473/179
TXT Cup diameter restriction means (e.g., filler plug, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 175 wherein a part is provided to reduce the
    size of the opening.


CLS 473/180
TXT Receiver or projectile responsive indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 174 wherein the member is a retainer for
    confining the object when it arrives at the position at which it is aimed,
    or including means to provide information to the player regarding the
    condition or location of the object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    for an electrical projectile responsive sensor or indicator
    combined with an addressing surface or target.


CLS 473/181
TXT Selectively adjustable approach surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 180 wherein means is provided to alter the
    slope of the surface on which the object is rolled.


CLS 473/182
TXT Projectile return:

    Subject matter under subclass 180 and further including means to move the
    struck object from the retainer toward the location at which it was struck.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163,    166, 191, and 194, for projectile return with other combinations.


CLS 473/183
TXT Electrical actuation:

    Subject matter under subclass 182 wherein the moving means is powered by
    electrical current.


CLS 473/184
TXT Gravity:

    Subject matter under subclass 182 wherein the moving means is gravitational
    force.


CLS 473/185
TXT Plural receivers:

    Subject matter under subclass 180 and further including a second retainer.


CLS 473/186
TXT Displaceable by projectile impact:

    Subject matter under subclass 180 wherein the retainer or the information
    supplying means comprises a part which is movable upon being struck by the
    object.


CLS 473/187
TXT Resilient or pivotal portion arranged in a circle to retain projectile:


    Subject matter under subclass 186 wherein the part is circular and has a
    property of elasticity or includes elements circumferentially arranged and
    pivotally mounted; thereby, to define a round opening for receiving and
    retaining the object.


CLS 473/188
TXT Top of projectile engaged:

    Subject matter under subclass 187 wherein the part or elements contact the
    uppermost surface of the object to retain it.


CLS 473/189
TXT Pivotal element:

    Subject matter under subclass 186 wherein the part is mounted so as to be
    movable about a fixed axis.


CLS 473/190
TXT Projectile responsive sensor (e.g., target impact indicator, etc.):


    Subject matter under subclass 173 comprising means to detect a condition of
    the object to be struck by the player.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    for an electrical projectile responsive sensor and indicator
    combined with an addressing surface or target, and subclass 180 for a
    projectile responsive indicator on a putting surface.


CLS 473/191
TXT And projectile return:

    Subject matter under subclass 190 and further including means to move the
    struck object from the member at which the object was aimed toward the
    player.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163     166, 182, and 194, for projectile return with other combinations.


CLS 473/192
TXT Electrical sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 190 wherein said detection means is powered
    by electrical current.


CLS 473/193
TXT Projectile adheres to target:

    Subject matter under subclass 190 wherein the object to be struck by the
    player sticks to the member at which it was aimed.


CLS 473/194
TXT Projectile return:

    Subject matter under subclass 173 and further including means to move the
    struck object from the member at which it was aimed toward the player.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163,    166, 182, and 191, for projectile return with other combinations.


CLS 473/195
TXT Projectile receiving aperture (e.g., goal opening, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 173 wherein the member at which the object is
    aimed comprises structure defining an opening for receiving the object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159,    for an aperture in a nonearth fairway.

    175,    for a cup in a putting surface


CLS 473/196
TXT Aperture forming surface forms plane parallel to support surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 195 wherein the structure is constructed to
    be positioned so that an axis normal to a flat surface formed by the
    opening is vertical to a surface on which the structure is positioned
    (e.g., the ground, etc.).


CLS 473/197
TXT Net:

    Subject matter under subclass 173 wherein the member at which the object is
    aimed is formed from an open mesh fabric.


CLS 473/198
TXT Moving projectile responsive sensor or indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein said equipment or device includes
    means to detect a condition of a struck object during movement thereof; or
    including means to provide information to the player concerning movement of
    the struck object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS,

    152,    for an electrical projectile responsive sensor or indicator
    combined with an addressing surface or target.

    180,    for a projectile responsive indicator on a putting surface, and
    subclass 190 for a projectile responsive indicator combined with a target.


CLS 473/199
TXT Electrical:

    Subject matter under subclass 198 wherein the detection or information
    supplying means is powered by electrical current.


CLS 473/200
TXT Indicator integral with projectile:

    Subject matter under subclass 198 wherein the information supplying means
    forms a part of the structure of the struck object.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280,    for a practice projectile, per se, where the projectile provides no
    information to the player, and subclass 353 for locator means forming a
    part of a struck projectile.


CLS 473/201
TXT Hand on grip positioning aid or grip indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the equipment or device comprises
    structure to assist the player in properly placing his or her hands on a
    gripping portion of an instrument to be swung by the player; or means for
    providing information to the player regarding the placement of his or her
    hands on the instrument.


CLS 473/202
TXT With electrical sensor or electrical indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the assisting structure or the
    information supplying means is provided with a detection or information
    supplying device operated by electrical current.


CLS 473/203
TXT Integral handle having finger conforming configurations:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the gripping portion is shaped to
    correspond to the curvature of a player's fingers when grasping the
    instrument, and wherein said gripping portion cannot be separated from the
    remainder of the instrument without destroying the instrument.


CLS 473/204
TXT Angularly related integral grip portions:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the gripping portion has a first
    longitudinal axis, and the instrument has a stem portion having a second
    longitudinal axis connected to the first axis; and wherein the first and
    second axes diverge from a common point, and wherein the gripping portion
    and the stem portion can not be separated from each other without
    destroying the instrument.


CLS 473/205
TXT Worn on hand (e.g., glove, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the assisting structure or the
    information supplying means comprise a member which is positioned on the
    players hand prior to grasping the instrument.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 161.2 for standard golf gloves lacking
    positioning aids or grip indicators.


CLS 473/206
TXT Removably attachable to swingable implement:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the assisting structure or the
    information supplying means is connected to the implement to form a part
    thereof but is easily separable therefrom without destroying the implement.


CLS 473/207
TXT Practice device attachable to body:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 comprising a device particularly adapted
    to be used by the player in improving his or her performance skills and not
    intended to be used in competitively playing the game; and wherein said
    device includes means for connecting it to the body of the player prior to
    the time a player grasps a swingable implement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266,    for a body movement or position indicator which engages, but is not
    attached, to a part of the body.


CLS 473/208
TXT Attachable to head, neck, or mouth:

    Subject matter under subclass 207 wherein said connecting means is for
    connecting the device to the head, neck, or mouth of the player.


CLS 473/209
TXT Electrical:

    Subject matter under subclass 208 wherein said device is powered by
    electrical current.


CLS 473/210
TXT Sighting element (e.g., eyeglasses, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 208 wherein said device functions to direct
    the visual focus of the player.


CLS 473/211
TXT With displaceable indicator responsive to head movement:

    Subject matter under subclass 208 wherein said device includes a part which
    reacts to movement of the head of the player by shifting between first and
    second positions; and wherein the shifting of said part provides
    information to the player regarding his or her body movement.


CLS 473/212
TXT Attachable to arm, hand, or wrist:

    Subject matter under subclass 207 wherein said connecting means is for
    connecting the device to the arm, hand, or wrist of the player.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205,    for means worn on a player's hand for aiding in positioning his or
    her hand on a grip.


CLS 473/213
TXT Wrist:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 wherein the connecting means is for
    connecting the device to the wrist of the player.


CLS 473/214
TXT Spans elbow:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 wherein the device includes a portion
    which extends across the elbow of the player.


CLS 473/215
TXT Attachable to hips, torso, or waist:

    Subject matter under subclass 207 wherein said connecting means is for
    connecting the device to the hips, torso, or waist of the player.


CLS 473/216
TXT Waist encircling belt anchored to static structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 215 wherein said device includes a band worn
    about the waist of the player, and wherein said band includes a part
    attaching it to an immovable member.


CLS 473/217
TXT Attachable to foot:

    Subject matter under subclass 207 wherein said connecting means is for
    connecting the device to the foot of the player.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclass 127 for standard golf shoes.


CLS 473/218
TXT Foot positioning aid and indicator associated with swingable implement:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein said equipment or device
    comprises structure to assist or provide information to the player in
    positioning his or her feet to properly address or strike a spherical
    object; and further comprises means to assist or provide information to the
    player concerning a position or feature of an instrument which a player
    uses to strike a projectile.


CLS 473/219
TXT Practice swingable implement or indicator associated with swingable
    implement:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein said equipment or device
    comprises either (1) a first instrument which is swung by the player and
    not intended to be used in playing the game competitively, or (2) a second
    instrument, which is swung by the player in playing the game competitively
    and which further includes means to assist or provide information to the
    player concerning a position or feature of the second instrument, or (3)
    means cooperating with the first or second instrument to provide
    information to the player.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201,    for indicator structure to position a player's hands on a grip for
    positioning or alignment purposes, and subclass 266 for a foot positioning
    aid and an indicator associated with a swingable implement.


CLS 473/220
TXT With lighting (e.g., laser, etc.) means attachable to or integral with
    swingable implement:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 wherein the first or second instrument
    has an illuminating device secured thereto or forming a part thereof.


CLS 473/221
TXT With electrical sensor or electrical indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 which includes a device operated by
    electrical current to detect a condition of the first or second instrument;
    or to provide a player with information concerning a condition of the first
    or second instrument.


CLS 473/222
TXT Sensor positioned apart from implement to interact with a separate
    cooperating sensor means attachable to or integral with implement:

    Subject matter under subclass 221 wherein the device is spaced from the
    swingable instrument, and wherein a cooperating detector is secured to or
    forms part of the swingable instrument to interact with the device.


CLS 473/223
TXT Integral with or attachable to swingable implement:

    Subject matter under subclass 221 wherein the device is secured to or forms
    part of the first or second swingable implement.


CLS 473/224
TXT Audible indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 223 wherein the device produces a sound heard
    by the player.


CLS 473/225
TXT Sensor integral with projectile addressing surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 221 wherein the device forms part of a
    location where an object to be struck by the player is positioned prior to
    being struck.


CLS 473/226
TXT Device attachable to or integral with swingable implement:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 which includes a structure secured to or
    forming part of the first or second swingable instrument.


CLS 473/227
TXT Nonhandle element engageable with body:

    Subject matter under subclass 226 wherein the structure includes a part,
    other than the gripping portion of the instrument, which is adapted to
    contact the body of the player.


CLS 473/228
TXT Air resistance device (e.g., airfoil etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 226 wherein the structure comprises a part
    which reacts in opposition against the atmosphere when the instrument is
    swung.


CLS 473/229
TXT Anchored (e.g., tethered, etc.) swingable implement:

    Subject matter under subclass 226 wherein the structure comprises means for
    fixedly attaching the first or second instrument to a fixed structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258+,   for structure which does not fixedly attach to a club, but merely
    serves as a barrier which a club engages during the course of a swing.


CLS 473/230
TXT Wheel:

    Subject matter under subclass 226 wherein the structure comprises a rolling
    member for supporting the first or second instrument for movement along a
    support surface.


CLS 473/231
TXT Adjustable swingable implement or swing or position aid:

    Subject matter under subclass 226 wherein the structure comprises parts on
    the first or second instrument which are movable with respect to each other
    to change their relative position on the instrument; or wherein the
    structure is to provide the player with information concerning a
    characteristic of the motion of the instrument while it is being swung; or
    to provide the player with information concerning the location of the first
    or second instrument with respect to the player or another device.


CLS 473/232
TXT Alterable shaft provides swing force indication:

    Subject matter under subclass 231 wherein the first or second swingable
    instrument includes a longitudinal stem extending from a gripping portion
    and wherein the stem portion is constructed to bend, pivot, or extend along
    its longitudinal axis to provide the player with information concerning the
    force with which the instrument is swung.


CLS 473/233
TXT Swing speed indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 231 wherein the structure is to provide the
    player with information concerning the velocity with which the first or
    second instrument is swung.

    (1)     Note.  This is the proper location for the combination of an
    accelerometer type device with a club.


CLS 473/234
TXT Audible:

    Subject matter under subclass 233 wherein the information comprises a sound
    heard by the player.


CLS 473/235
TXT Projectile retained by head of swingable implement during swing:

    Subject matter under subclass 231 wherein the first or second swingable
    instrument has an object striking end, and wherein an object struck by the
    player is held by the object striking end after the object has been struck.


CLS 473/236
TXT Projection on face of swingable implement head provides reduced striking
    area:

    Subject matter under subclass 231 wherein the first or second swingable
    instrument has a striking face for striking an object, and wherein the
    striking face has a protuberance thereon for limiting the surface area on
    the face available for desirable object advancing strike, thereby,
    providing information to the player when the limited surface area has not
    been contacted by the object.


CLS 473/237
TXT Indication is a mark made by implement swing:

    Subject matter under subclass 231 wherein the first or second swingable
    instrument carries a device that provides a trace visible to the player for
    providing information regarding a swing path of the instrument, or wherein
    a surface of an object striking face on the instrument is modified (e.g.,
    with chalk etc.) to provide a player with information concerning the
    position on the face where the object has struck it.


CLS 473/238
TXT Adjustable implement, or static position indicator (e.g., with respect to
    the golfer, projectile, or target, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 231 wherein the structure comprises parts on
    the first or second instrument which are movable with respect to each other
    to change their relative position on the instrument or wherein the
    structure is for providing information to the player concerning the
    location of the first or second instrument with respect to the player or
    another device prior to an object being struck by the instrument.


CLS 473/239
TXT Adjustable shaft length:

    Subject matter under subclass 238 wherein the first or second instrument
    comprises a longitudinal stem extending between a grip portion and an
    object striking portion, and wherein means is provided to alter the
    longitudinal extent of the stem.


CLS 473/240
TXT Reflective element:

    Subject matter under subclass 238 wherein the structure comprises a surface
    (e.g., a mirror etc.) to bend back light to provide the player with a
    visual swing image.


CLS 473/241
TXT Bubble leveler:

    Subject matter under subclass 238 wherein the structure comprises a globule
    of gas trapped in a liquid to provide the player with information
    concerning proper horizontal orientation of the first or second instrument.


CLS 473/242
TXT Integral with or attachable to swingable implement head:

    Subject matter under subclass 238 wherein the structure is secured to or
    forms a portion of an object striking end of the first or second swingable
    instrument.


CLS 473/243
TXT Self-standing implement:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 wherein the object striking end includes
    a portion permitting the instrument to stand erect without support from the
    player.


CLS 473/244
TXT Selectively adjustable positioning means:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 wherein a part on the object striking end
    is movable with respect to another device to change their relative
    positions.


    (1)     Note. Disclosure of an adjustable club head feature (e.g., blade,
    etc.) is in fact indicia since the position of the head itself is providing
    information to the player as to the club configuration. Therefore, this is
    the proper locus for all adjustable club heads (e.g., loft, lie etc.) even
    if there is no mention of use as a practice club or any recited indicia.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324,    for club head features which are adjustable during manufacturing or
    assembly to change the position of head elements prior to being permanently
    secured together.


CLS 473/245
TXT Adjustable loft angle:

    Subject matter under subclass 244 wherein the object striking end of the
    first or second swingable instrument includes an object striking surface,
    and wherein the movement is to alter the angle of inclination of the object
    striking surface with respect to the horizontal.


CLS 473/246
TXT And adjustable lie angle:

    Subject matter under subclass 245 wherein the swingable instrument includes
    a longitudinal stem extending from the object striking end toward a grip
    portion, and wherein additional means is provided to alter the angle of
    inclination of the stem with respect to the horizontal.


CLS 473/247
TXT Longitudinal bore in head receives elongated member about which head pivots:

    Subject matter under subclass 245 wherein the object striking end comprises
    a toe portion and a heel portion, and wherein an elongated pin extending
    between the toe and heel portion forms a pivotal axis for pivoting the
    object striking surface to adjust the angle of inclination.


CLS 473/248
TXT Adjustable lie:

    Subject matter under subclass 244 wherein the first or second swingable
    instrument includes a longitudinal stem extending from the object striking
    end toward a grip portion; and wherein altering means is provided to alter
    the angle of inclination of the stem with respect to the horizontal.


CLS 473/249
TXT Surface on head simulates ball:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 wherein the structure is shaped like a
    sphere.


CLS 473/250
TXT Having transparent or translucent element:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 wherein the structure comprises a part
    which is capable of transmitting light with or without diffusion of light
    passing through the part.


CLS 473/251
TXT Used for putting:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 wherein the first or second instrument is
    designed to roll the object to be struck along a surface without elevating
    the object above the surface.


CLS 473/252
TXT Horizontally spaced linear indicia perpendicular to projectile striking
    face:

    Subject matter under subclass 251 wherein the structure comprises first and
    second lines horizontally spaced from each other and extending in a
    direction perpendicular to the horizontal extent of an object striking face
    to provide a player with information concerning proper relative location
    between the object striking face and the object to be struck.


CLS 473/253
TXT And vertically spaced apart indicia:

    Subject matter under subclass 252 and further comprising an additional mark
    vertically spaced from the first and second lines to provide a player with
    relative location information.


CLS 473/254
TXT Vertically spaced apart indicia:

    Subject matter under subclass 251 wherein the structure comprises first and
    second marks spaced vertically from each other to provide a player with
    information concerning proper relative location between an object striking
    face and an object to be struck.


CLS 473/255
TXT T-shaped head:

    Subject matter under subclass 251 wherein the object striking end comprises
    an object striking face extending between a toe portion and a heel portion,
    and wherein the object striking end further comprises an elongated part
    extending rearwardly from a junction with the object striking face midway
    between the toe and heel portion.


CLS 473/256
TXT Particularly weighted practice implement:

    Subject matter under subclass 226 wherein significance is attributed to a
    particular weight or weight distribution of the first instrument, or
    significance is attributed to a weighting device attachable to the second
    instrument, and wherein the weighting device is removed from the second
    instrument before using it to play the game; the weight, weight
    distribution or weighting device being to facilitate a practice swing or
    exercising by the player.

    (1)     Note. This subclass is the locus for adjustable practice weighting
    attachments. If a regulation club is used for practice by inserting a
    separate attachable weight that simply increases the swing weight of the
    club, and the combination can only be used for practice swings, then it is
    proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334+,   for regulation clubs with adjustable weight means which are
    intended to be used during a game.


CLS 473/257
TXT Swingable implement swing path indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 wherein the information providing means
    cooperating with the first or second instrument is for providing
    information concerning a path of travel, or a desired path of travel, of
    the swung implement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218,    for a foot positioning aid and an indicator associated with a
    swingable implement.


CLS 473/258
TXT Head or shaft continuously engaged during swing:

    Subject matter under subclass 257 wherein the first or second instrument
    comprises a longitudinal stem extending from an object striking end, and
    wherein the information providing means comprises a structure having a
    surface which contacts the stem or the object striking end during the
    entire path of travel of the swung instrument.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229,    for practice clubs which are fixedly attached to a static structure.


CLS 473/259
TXT Closed loop:

    Subject matter under subclass 258 wherein the surface comprises a generally
    ovular or circular configuration.


CLS 473/260
TXT Swingable implement head engaged:

    Subject matter under subclass 258 wherein the structure contacts the object
    striking end of the instrument.


CLS 473/261
TXT Barrier which monitors swingable implement head movement:

    Subject matter under subclass 257 wherein the first or second instrument
    comprises an object striking end, and wherein the information providing
    means comprises a first structure adapted to be contacted by the instrument
    to provide the player with information concerning the motion of the object
    striking end.


CLS 473/262
TXT Barrier is projectile addressing surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 261 wherein the first structure forms a
    surface on which an object to be struck is supported.


CLS 473/263
TXT Self-righting:

    Subject matter under subclass 261 wherein the first structure is
    constructed so that it is in a first position prior to being contacted by
    the object striking end, moves to a second position upon being contacted by
    the object striking end, and then returns to the first position without any
    player assistance.


CLS 473/264
TXT Plural barriers, vertically spaced apart:

    Subject matter under subclass 261 and further comprising a second structure
    separated from the first structure in a vertical direction and adapted to
    be contacted by the instrument, to provide the player with vertical
    distance information.


CLS 473/265
TXT Plural barriers, horizontally spaced apart:

    Subject matter under subclass 261 and further comprising a second
    structure, separated from the first in a horizontal direction and adapted
    to be contacted by the instrument to provide the player with horizontal
    distance information.


CLS 473/266
TXT Body movement or position indicator (e.g., stance aids etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the equipment or device includes
    means to provide the player with information concerning a static or a
    moving condition or desired condition of a part of the body of the player.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218,    for a foot positioning aid combined with an indicator associated
    with a swingable implement.


CLS 473/267
TXT Reflective device:

    Subject matter under subclass 266 wherein the information providing means
    comprises a surface (e.g., a mirror, etc.) to bend back light to provide
    the player with a visual image.


CLS 473/268
TXT Sighting device directing golfer's visual focus toward a point to restrain
    head movement:

    Subject matter under subclass 266 wherein the information providing means
    comprises a member which assists the golfer in aiming his eyesight at a
    particular object to provide the player with information concerning the
    desired position of his or her head.


CLS 473/269
TXT Responsive to weight shift:

    Subject matter under subclass 266 which reacts depending on the amount of
    weight supported by one or the other of the legs of the player.


CLS 473/270
TXT Foot positioning aid:

    Subject matter under subclass 266 wherein the information providing means
    comprise a structure that provides information to the player regarding the
    location or desired location of the player's foot.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217,    for subject matter which is fixedly attached (e.g., worn) by the
    player for aiding in positioning the players foot.


CLS 473/271
TXT Having separate body engageable member:

    Subject matter under subclass 270 which further includes another part that
    is adapted to contact a part of the player's body other than his or her
    foot.


CLS 473/272
TXT Selectively adjustable with pivotal members:

    Subject matter under subclass 270 wherein the structure includes two parts
    which are connected together in such a manner that the parts may be moved
    to different relative positions with respect to each other, and wherein the
    parts are connected pivotal about an axis.


CLS 473/273
TXT Selectively adjustable with linearly slidable member (e.g., telescopically
    extendable):

    Subject matter under subclass 270 wherein the structure includes two parts
    which are connected together in such a manner that the parts may be moved
    to different relative positions with respect to each other, and wherein the
    parts are connected so as to be movable along a straight line with respect
    to each other.


CLS 473/274
TXT Engaged with head or neck:

    Subject matter under subclass 266 wherein the information providing means
    includes a part which is adapted to contact the head or neck of the player.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208,    for subject matter which is fixedly attached or worn by the player
    for aiding in positioning the player's body.


CLS 473/275
TXT And separate body engageable member:

    Subject matter under subclass 274 which further includes a part which is
    adapted to contact another portion of the body of the player.


CLS 473/276
TXT Engaged with arm or shoulder:

    Subject matter under subclass 266 wherein the information supplying means
    includes a part which is adapted to contact the arm or shoulder of the
    player.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212,    for subject matter which is fixedly attached (e.g., worn) by the
    player for aiding in positioning the players body.


CLS 473/277
TXT Engaged with hips, torso, or waist:

    Subject matter under subclass 266 wherein the information supplying means
    includes a part which is adapted to contact the torso, hips, or waist of
    the player.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215,    for subject matter which is fixedly attached (e.g., worn) by the
    player for aiding in positioning the players body.


CLS 473/278
TXT Practice projectile addressing surface (e.g., driving mat etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the device comprises a structure
    which is used to improve the performance skills of the player and not
    intended to be used in playing the game competitively wherein the structure
    comprises a member providing a location for placement of an object to be
    struck by the player.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262,    for the combination of a projectile addressing surface with an
    indicator, and subclass 387 for a tee used in playing the game.


CLS 473/279
TXT Selectively adjustable (e. g., tiltable etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 278 and further including means to alter the
    location of one portion of the member with respect to another portion of
    the member.


CLS 473/280
TXT Practice projectile:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the device comprises a structure
    which is used to improve the performance skills of the player and not
    intended to be used in playing the game competitively and wherein the
    structure is an object to be struck by the player.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165,    for a projectile combined with an addressing surface and target.


CLS 473/281
TXT Having air resistance device:

    Subject matter under subclass 280 wherein the object so constructed that a
    part thereof reacts with the atmosphere to alter its trajectory after being
    struck.


CLS 473/282
TXT Club or club support:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the playing equipment comprises
    an instrument, or an element thereof, which is swung by the player to
    strike the ball in playing the game competitively or the auxiliary device
    comprises means to brace or carry the instrument.


CLS 473/283
TXT And scorekeeping device:

    Subject matter under subclass 282 wherein said instrument or said auxiliary
    device further includes means to indicate the player's score.


CLS 473/284
TXT And tee:

    Subject matter under subclass 282 wherein said instrument or said auxiliary
    device further includes means for holding a ball in position to be struck
    by the player at an elevation above the surface where the player stands.


CLS 473/285
TXT And ball position marker:

    Subject matter under subclass 282 wherein said instrument or auxiliary
    device further includes a means to contain a tag to indicate the location
    of a player's ball after it has come to rest on a putting green or fairway
    surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    406     for a ball position marker.


CLS 473/286
TXT And turf repair tool or ball retriever:

    Subject matter under subclass 282 wherein said instrument or said auxiliary
    device further includes either (1) means to mend a soil or grass portion
    disturbed as a result of a swing of the instrument or an impact of the
    ball, or (2) means to collect the ball.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling, Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 19.2+ for a
    ball retriever, per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    408,    for a player manipulated turf repair tool.


CLS 473/287
TXT Club set:

    Subject matter under subclass 282 and further comprising at least two
    separately useable instruments or at least two separately usable elements
    thereof.


CLS 473/288
TXT Interchangeable handle, striking face, or shaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 287 wherein said two separately usable
    elements comprise either (1) separately useable portions adapted to be
    grasped by a player's hands, (2) separately usable ball contacting
    surfaces, or (3) separately usable elongated members extending
    longitudinally from the portion to the surface, and wherein one of said
    separately usable elements is adapted to be removed and replaced on said
    instrument by another of said separately usable elements to enable a player
    to alter the playing characteristics of the instrument.


CLS 473/289
TXT Particular correlated shaft flexural characteristic:

    Subject matter under subclass 287 wherein said two instruments or two
    elements thereof comprises two elongated members extending longitudinally
    from a portion adapted to be grasped by a player and wherein significance
    is attributed to an elastic displacement property (e.g., modulus of
    elasticity, area moment of inertia, torsional stiffness, etc.) relationship
    between the members.


CLS 473/290
TXT Particular correlated head characteristic:

    Subject matter under subclass 287 wherein said two instruments or two
    elements thereof comprise two ball-striking portions, and wherein
    significance is attributed to a relationship between the portions.


CLS 473/291
TXT Mass distribution:

    Subject matter under subclass 290 wherein said relationship is material
    density and its dispersal throughout the portions.


CLS 473/292
TXT Head, shaft, and handle having particular combined center of gravity:

    Subject matter under 282 wherein the instrument comprises (1) a portion to
    be grasped by the player, (2) a ball-striking portion, and (3) an elongated
    member connecting the portions, and wherein significance is attributed to a
    point about which the instrument balances.


CLS 473/293
TXT Player faces target (e.g., croquet style putter etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 282 wherein the instrument is constructed to
    be used in a manner such that a plane formed by the player's two feet and
    head upon addressing the ball is substantially normal to a line drawn from
    the plane to the putting hole.


CLS 473/294
TXT Hands spaced apart on handle:

    Subject matter under subclass 282 wherein the instrument comprises a
    portion adapted to be grasped by the hands of the player so that in
    intended use, the hands do not contact each other.


CLS 473/295
TXT Rotatable handle:

    Subject matter under subclass 282 wherein the instrument comprises a
    portion to be grasped by the hands of the player, wherein the portion is
    adapted to be moveable angularly relative to an elongated member extending
    longitudinally therefrom.


CLS 473/296
TXT Longitudinally adjustable handle or shaft

    Subject matter under subclass 282 wherein the instrument comprises an
    elongated member extending from a portion adapted to be grasped by the
    hands of the player toward a ball-striking portion wherein either the
    grasping portion or the member is linearly movable along its axis with
    respect to a ball-striking portion of the instrument.


CLS 473/297
TXT Particularly weighted handle:

    Subject matter under subclass 282 wherein the instrument comprises a
    portion to be grasped by the hands of the player, and wherein significance
    is attributed to a mass characteristic of the portion.


CLS 473/298
TXT Grip or handle having particular nonwinding attachment to shaft (e.g.,
    quick detachable, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 282 wherein the instrument comprises a first
    portion to be grasped by the player's hands, herein significance is
    attributed to means for connecting said first portion to an elongated
    member extending longitudinally therefrom, said connecting being
    accomplished in a manner other than wrapping a web of material about the
    elongated member.


CLS 473/299
TXT Reattachable:

    Subject matter under subclass 298 wherein the portion is adapted to be
    disconnected from the elongated member and reconnected thereto.


CLS 473/300
TXT Grip:

    Subject matter under subclass 282 wherein significance is attributed to a
    portion of said instrument adapted to be grasped by a hand of the player.


CLS 473/301
TXT Spiral winding:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein the portion comprises a helically
    wrapped material.


CLS 473/302
TXT Having recess or projection:

    Subject matter under subclass 301 wherein the helically wrapped material
    comprises a depression or ridge formed to assist the player in grasping the
    instrument.


CLS 473/303
TXT Having longitudinal recess or projection:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein the portion comprises a
    depression or ridge positioned parallel to an axis from an end of the
    portion opposite a ball striking end to an end of the portion adjacent a
    ball striking end such that the depression or ridge assists the player in
    grasping the instrument.


CLS 473/304
TXT One piece head and shaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 282 wherein the instrument comprises a ball
    striking portion and an elongated member extending longitudinally
    therefrom, wherein the member and the portion are formed integrally from a
    single composition of material.


CLS 473/305
TXT Head and shaft connection:

    Subject matter under subclass 282 wherein the instrument comprises means to
    affix a ball striking portion to an elongated member extending
    longitudinally therefrom and wherein said affixing means forms a part of or
    contacts the elongated member.

    (1)     Note.  The mere nominal recital of a hosel is not enough to make
    classification in this or indented subclasses proper. Significance has to
    be attributed to the connection. For example, a claim which names "a head
    comprising a hosel for connecting a shaft thereto..." but lacks any further
    description of the hosel is not classifiable here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for joint
    connections of general utility.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    324+,   for club heads, per se.


CLS 473/306
TXT Threaded shaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 305 wherein the affixing means comprises
    internal or external spiral projections located on said elongated member
    which mate with internal or external spiral projections on the striking
    portion.


CLS 473/307
TXT Detachable and reattachable:

    Subject matter under subclass 305 wherein the affixing means is constructed
    so that a player can selectively disconnect the striking portion from the
    elongated member and reconnect it thereto without destroying the instrument.


CLS 473/308
TXT Sleeve or winding engaged over outside of joint, hosel, and shaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 305 wherein the ball-striking portion
    comprises a socket for receiving the elongated member, and wherein the
    affixing means comprises either a hollow cylindrical structure or a
    spirally wrapped element placed over an exterior surface of the socket and
    the elongated member, such that the structure or the element substantially
    covers a junction formed by the socket and the member.


CLS 473/309
TXT Joint formed with sleeve engaging shaft and hose1:

    Subject matter under subclass 305 wherein the affixing means comprises a
    hollow cylindrical structure in contact with the elongated member.


CLS 473/310
TXT Resilient sleeve engaging hosel and outer shaft wall:

    Subject matter under subclass 309 wherein the hollow cylindrical structure
    is formed of a flexible elastomeric material and contacts the socket and an
    exterior diameter of the elongated member.


CLS 473/311
TXT Shaft contacts sole:

    Subject matter under subclass 305 wherein the striking portion comprises a
    ground-engaging structure in direct physical engagement with the elongated
    member.


CLS 473/312
TXT Having core (e.g., weight, etc.) positioned in head engaging shaft end:

    Subject matter under subclass 305 wherein the affixing means comprises a
    solid cylindrical structure positioned within an interior surface of the
    elongated member.


CLS 473/313
TXT Putter:

    Subject matter under subclass 305 wherein the ball-striking portion
    comprises structure to strike the ball such that the ball traverses along a
    putting green surface and remains on the surface of the green throughout
    its entire traversal.


CLS 473/314
TXT Particular relationship between shaft longitudinal axis and head
    orientation:

    Subject matter under subclass 305 wherein significance is attributed to the
    relative position between the elongated member and the striking portion.


CLS 473/315
TXT Noncircular shaft end wall engages hosel:

    Subject matter under subclass 305 wherein the affixing means comprises a
    socket in the striking portion for receiving the end of the elongated
    member and the end received in the socket has a cross-sectional shape other
    than circular.


CLS 473/316
TXT Shaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 282 wherein significance is attributed to an
    element which comprises an elongated member extending longitudinally from a
    gripping portion to a ball- striking portion.


CLS 473/317
TXT Reduced air resistance:

    Subject matter under subclass 316 wherein the elongated member includes
    structure to lessen the effect of an interaction between the member and the
    atmosphere as the instrument is swung by the player.


CLS 473/318
TXT Including nonmetallic material or vibratory wave modifying feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 316 wherein the elongated member comprises a
    material having an elemental constituency other than metal, or includes
    means to dampen, amplify, or direct the formation or transmission of an
    oscillatory impulse produced during movement of the member.


CLS 473/319
TXT Filament (e.g., fiber, etc.) or sheet wrapped about shaft longitudinal axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 318 wherein the elongated member is formed of
    (1) at least one slender, flexible element or (2) a flattened web of
    material, such that the element or web is layered about a centerline of the
    elongated member.


CLS 473/320
TXT Including metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 319 wherein the elongated member comprises a
    metal or a metal compound.


CLS 473/321
TXT And metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 318 wherein the elongated member comprises a
    metal or a metal compound.


CLS 473/322
TXT Sections connected along longitudinally extending seam:

    Subject matter under subclass 318 wherein the elongated member comprises
    first and second distinct pieces each extending from an end proximate a
    gripping portion to an end proximate a ball-striking portion and wherein
    the first piece is connected to the second piece along a junction line
    extending from the gripping portion end to the ball-striking portion end.


CLS 473/323
TXT Shaft tapered in steps:

    Subject matter under subclass 316 wherein the elongated member comprises a
    first section adjacent a second section along a longitudinal axis of the
    member, said first section having a perimeter greater than the second
    section, and wherein, in traversing along the axis, the perimeter of the
    first section increases abruptly to the perimeter of the second section.


CLS 473/324
TXT Head:

    Subject matter under subclass 282 wherein significance is attributed to an
    element which comprises a ball-striking portion.


CLS 473/325
TXT Plural striking faces:

    Subject matter under subclass 324 wherein the ball-striking portion
    comprises at least two surfaces which are separately usable to contact the
    ball.


CLS 473/326
TXT Liquid interior:

    Subject matter under subclass 324 wherein the ball-striking portion
    encloses a fluid with properties of flowability and a low tendency to
    disperse, and wherein the fluid remains in a fluid state when the
    instrument is used by the player.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    346,    for heads that are formed using a hardenable liquid resinous or
    foamable material.


CLS 473/327
TXT Reduced air resistance:

    Subject matter under subclass 324 wherein the ball-striking portion
    includes structure to lessen the effect of an interaction between the
    portion and the atmosphere as the instrument is swung by the player.


CLS 473/328
TXT Reduced ground resistance:

    Subject matter under subclass 324 wherein the ball-striking portion
    includes structure to lessen the effect of an interaction between the
    portion and a surface on which the ball rests as the instrument is swung by
    the player.


CLS 473/329
TXT Striking face surface deforms upon impact (e.g., resilient, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 324 wherein the ball striking portion
    includes a surface which displaces a predetermined amount when striking the
    ball.


CLS 473/330
TXT Curved, grooved, or roughened striking face:

    Subject matter under subclass 324 wherein the ball-striking portion
    comprises a surface adapted to contact the ball wherein the surface
    includes (1) a concave or convex shape, (2) a striation, or (3) a
    non-smooth texture.


CLS 473/331
TXT Plural grooves:

    Subject matter under subclass 330 wherein the ball-contacting surface
    comprises plural striations spaced from each other.


CLS 473/332
TXT Vibratory wave (e. g., shock wave, etc.) modifying feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 324 further including means to dampen,
    amplify, or direct the formation or transmission of an oscillatory impulse
    produced when the portion impacts the ball.


CLS 473/333
TXT With element displaceable with respect to another head element during swing:

    Subject matter under subclass 324 wherein the ball striking portion
    comprises a first and second part, and wherein the first part is adapted to
    move in relation to the second part during the swing.


CLS 473/334
TXT Selectively adjustable weighting element:

    Subject matter under subclass 324 wherein the ball-striking portion
    comprises means for a player to change the mass characteristics of the
    portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242,    for club heads with weighting attachments that are used for
    practice.

    256,    for a particularly weighted practice implement.


CLS 473/335
TXT Embedded in head:

    Subject matter under subclass 334 wherein the changing means comprises
    structure contained within a periphery formed by the ball-striking portion.


CLS 473/336
TXT Elongated horizontal bore:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein the structure comprises a duct
    having an axis which extends substantially parallel to a ground engaging
    surface of the ball-striking portion.


CLS 473/337
TXT Perpendicular to projectile striking face:

    Subject matter under subclass 336 wherein the axis of the duct is normal to
    a ball contacting surface.


CLS 473/338
TXT In vertical bore access by sole:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein the structure comprises a duct
    having an axis extending substantially normal to a ground engaging surface
    of the ball-striking portion, and wherein the changing means can only be
    implemented by the player through the ground-engaging surface.


CLS 473/339
TXT In vertical bore access through top:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein the structure comprises a duct
    having an axis extending substantially normal to an upper surface of the
    ball-striking portion, and wherein the changing means can only be
    implemented by the player through the upper surface.


CLS 473/340
TXT Putter:

    Subject matter under subclass 324 wherein the ball-striking portion
    comprises structure to strike the ball such that the ball traverses along a
    putting green surface and remains on the surface of the green throughout
    its entire traversal.


CLS 473/341
TXT Toe and heel weighting:

    Subject matter under subclass 340 wherein the ball-striking portion
    comprises a ball contacting surface with a center of percussion location,
    and is mass distributed toward longitudinal ends of said surface such that
    said portion is constructed to strike the ball effectively at points spaced
    from the location.


CLS 473/342
TXT Striking face insert:

    Subject matter under subclass 324 wherein the ball-striking portion
    comprises a distinct ball contacting surface which is separately connected
    to surrounding parts of the ball-striking portion, and wherein the
    ball-contacting surface is formed of diverse material or has a diverse
    characteristic than the surrounding parts.


CLS 473/343
TXT Wood composition:

    Subject matter under subclass 324 wherein the ball-striking portion
    comprises a hardened cellulosic fibrous material.


CLS 473/344
TXT Having particular sole plate:

    Subject matter under subclass 343 wherein significance is attributed to a
    distinct ground engaging surface of the ball-striking portion.


CLS 473/345
TXT Hollow body:

    Subject matter under subclass 324 wherein the ball-striking portion
    comprises a surface defining an enclosed cavity, wherein the cavity is
    inaccessible from outside the portion when the instrument is used by the
    player.


CLS 473/346
TXT With internal support rib or injected material:

    Subject matter under subclass 345 wherein the surface cavity comprises
    either a reinforcing spar or a substance introduced into said cavity at a
    pressure greater than atmospheric pressure.


CLS 473/347
TXT Embedded fiber composition:

    Subject matter under 324 wherein the ball-striking portion comprises a
    substance with multiple, slender, flexible elements encased therein, said
    substance and elements together forming a composite material.


CLS 473/348
TXT Including metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 347 wherein the ball-striking portion further
    comprises a metal or a metal compound.


CLS 473/349
TXT Particular material composition or mass distribution:

    Subject matter under subclass 324 wherein significance is attributed to
    either (1) elemental constituents of the portion or (2) material density
    and its dispersal throughout the portion.


CLS 473/350
TXT Recess or cavity behind striking face:

    Subject matter under subclass 349 wherein the ball-striking portion
    comprises a ball contacting surface and a hole or depressed region located
    opposite said surface.


CLS 473/351
TXT Ball:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the playing equipment comprises a
    spherical object struck by the player in playing the game competitively.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200,    for a moving projectile indicator which is integral with the
    projectile, and subclass 280 for a practice projectile.


CLS 473/352
TXT Buoyant:

    Subject matter under subclass 351 wherein the spherical object has such a
    specific gravity that it will float upon a surface of water.


CLS 473/353
TXT Having locator means:

    Subject matter under subclass 351 wherein the spherical object comprises
    structure for assisting the player in finding the spherical object when the
    object has come to rest after being struck.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200,    for a moving projectile indicator integral with the projectile.


CLS 473/354
TXT Liquid interior:

    Subject matter under subclass 351 wherein the spherical object comprises
    means defining a cavity enclosed by a cover, and wherein the cavity
    contains a liquid which remains in a liquid state when the object is in use.


CLS 473/355
TXT Hollow pockets between spherical core and cover:

    Subject matter under subclass 351 wherein the spherical object comprises a
    central innermost spherical portion surrounded by a ball-striking surface,
    and wherein a space between the innermost portion and the ball-striking
    surface includes a plurality of spaces devoid of any liquid or solid
    material.


CLS 473/356
TXT Wound interior:

    Subject matter under subclass 351 wherein the spherical object includes an
    inner structure surrounded by a striking surface, and wherein the inner
    structure comprises an elongated filamentary or bandlike material which is
    wrapped in coils about itself.


CLS 473/357
TXT Surrounding nonwound spherical core:

    Subject matter under subclass 356 wherein the wrapped material surrounds an
    innermost spherical portion which is hollow or which is formed by material
    which has not been wrapped in coils.


CLS 473/358
TXT Hollow core:

    Subject matter under subclass 357 wherein the innermost spherical portion
    is devoid of any liquid or solid material.


CLS 473/359
TXT Metal core or winding:

    Subject matter under subclass 357 wherein the innermost spherical portion
    is formed of metal, or wherein the elongated filamentary or bandlike
    material is metal.


CLS 473/360
TXT Wound wire:

    Subject matter under subclass 359 wherein the elongated filamentary or
    bandlike material is metal.


CLS 473/361
TXT Plural diverse layers between core and cover:

    Subject matter under subclass 357 comprising first and second spherical
    strata between the innermost spherical core and the striking surface, and
    wherein the first spherical strata has a different physical (e.g., tension,
    shape of winding, etc.) or chemical (e.g., king of material, chemical
    composition, etc.) characteristic than the second spherical strata.


CLS 473/362
TXT Diverse tension in wound layers:

    Subject matter under subclass 361 wherein both the first and second
    spherical strata are formed of elongated filamentary or bandlike material
    wrapped in coils, and wherein the material in the first strata has a
    different tautness than the material of the second strata.


CLS 473/363
TXT Nonwound layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 361 wherein the first or second spherical
    strata is formed of a solid, uncoiled material or composition.


CLS 473/364
TXT Plural diverse nonwound layers:

    Subject matter under subclass 363 wherein both the first and second
    spherical strata are formed of a solid, uncoiled material or composition
    and wherein the first strata has a different physical (e.g., hardness,
    elasticity, etc.) or chemical (e.g., kind of material, chemical
    composition, etc.) characteristic than the second strata.


CLS 473/365
TXT Having particular cover:

    Subject matter under subclass 357 wherein significance is attributed to a
    physical (e.g., hardness, elasticity, etc.) or chemical (e.g., kind of
    material, chemical composition, etc.) characteristic of the striking face.


CLS 473/366
TXT Wound wide band:

    Subject matter under subclass 357 wherein the elongated wrapped material
    has a width dimension which is substantially greater than a thickness
    dimension.


CLS 473/367
TXT Interior includes injected or compressed material:

    Subject matter under subclass 351 wherein the spherical object includes a
    spherical striking surface enclosing an interior portion; and wherein the
    interior portion comprises a material which has been forced in a fluid or
    semi-solid state into an opening, in a preformed spherical striking
    surface; or wherein the interior portion comprises a material which has
    been pressed from a first volume to a second, smaller volume.


CLS 473/368
TXT Injected material:

    Subject matter under subclass 367 wherein the interior portion comprises a
    material which has been forced in a fluid or semisolid state into an
    opening in a preformed spherical striking surface.


CLS 473/369
TXT Injected gas:

    Subject matter under subclass 368 wherein the material forced into the
    opening is a gas.


CLS 473/370
TXT Diverse layer between spherical core and cover:

    Subject matter under subclass 367 wherein the interior portion comprises a
    first innermost spherical portion formed of a material having a first
    physical (e.g., hardness, elasticity, etc.) or chemical (e.g., kind of
    material, chemical composition, etc.) characteristic, and wherein the
    interior portion further comprises a spherical strata positioned between
    the first innermost spherical portion and the striking surface; and wherein
    the spherical strata is formed of a material having a different physical
    (e.g., hardness, elasticity, etc.) or chemical (e.g., kind of material,
    chemical composition, etc.) characteristic than the innermost spherical
    portion.


CLS 473/371
TXT Particular unitary or layered construction:

    Subject matter under subclass 351 wherein either (1) the entire spherical
    object is formed from a single material or composition, (2) an interior
    portion beneath a striking surface is formed from a single material or
    composition, or (3) an interior portion beneath a striking surface includes
    a distinct spherical strata of material positioned concentrically around an
    innermost spherical core.


CLS 473/372
TXT Containing metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 371 wherein at least a part of the spherical
    object is formed of metal or a metal composition.


CLS 473/373
TXT Diverse layer between spherical core and cover:

    Subject matter under subclass 372 wherein the interior portion comprises a
    first innermost spherical portion formed of a material having a first
    physical (e.g., hardness, elasticity, etc.) or chemical (e.g., kind of
    material, chemical composition, etc.) characteristic, and wherein the
    interior portion further comprises a spherical strata positioned between
    the first innermost spherical portion and the striking surface, and wherein
    the spherical strata is formed of a material having a different physical
    (e.g., hardness, elasticity, etc.) or chemical (e.g., kind of material,
    chemical composition, etc.) characteristic than the innermost spherical
    portion.


CLS 473/374
TXT Diverse layer between spherical core and cover:

    Subject matter under subclass 371 wherein the interior portion comprises a
    first innermost spherical portion formed of a material having a first
    physical (e.g., hardness, elasticity, etc.) or chemical (e.g., kind of
    material, chemical composition, etc.) characteristic, and wherein the
    interior portion further comprises a spherical strata positioned between
    the first innermost spherical portion and the striking surface, and wherein
    the spherical strata is formed of a material having a different physical
    (e.g., hardness, elasticity, etc.) or chemical (e.g., kind of material,
    chemical composition, etc.) characteristic than the innermost spherical
    portion.


CLS 473/375
TXT Hollow core:

    Subject matter under subclass 374 wherein the innermost spherical portion
    is devoid of any liquid or solid material.


CLS 473/376
TXT Plural diverse layers:

    Subject matter under subclass 374 and further including a second distinct
    spherical strata positioned between the first innermost spherical portion
    and the striking surface.


CLS 473/377
TXT Diverse cover and interior:

    Subject matter under subclass 371 wherein the interior portion is formed
    from a material having a different physical (e.g., hardness, elasticity
    etc.) or chemical (e.g., kind of material, chemical composition, etc.)
    characteristic than the material of the striking surface.


CLS 473/378
TXT Particular cover (e.g., size, material, dimple pattern, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 351 wherein significance is attributed to a
    physical (e.g., size, resiliency, dimple pattern, etc.) or chemical (e.g.,
    kind of material, chemical composition, etc.) characteristic of a striking
    surface on the spherical object.


CLS 473/379
TXT Icosahedral dimple pattern:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 wherein the striking surface includes a
    plurality of depressions, imaginary lines divide the striking surface into
    a polyhedron having twenty (20) faces, and significance is attributed to a
    physical property (e.g., size number, etc.) of the depressions arranged in
    each of the faces.


CLS 473/380
TXT Cuboctahedral dimple pattern:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 wherein the ball-striking surface
    includes a plurality of depressions; imaginary lines divide the striking
    surface into a polyhedron having eight (8) triangular faces and six square
    faces, and significance is attributed to a physical property (e.g., size
    number, etc.) of the depressions arranged in each of the faces.


CLS 473/381
TXT Dodecahedral dimple pattern:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 wherein the ball-striking surface
    includes a plurality of depressions; imaginary lines divide the striking
    surface into a polyhedron having twelve (12) faces, and significance is
    attributed to a physical property (e.g., size number, etc.) of the
    depressions arranged in each of the faces.


CLS 473/382
TXT Octahedral dimple pattern:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 wherein the ball striking surface
    includes a plurality of depressions; imaginary lines divide the striking
    surface into a polyhedron having eight (8) faces, and significance is
    attributed to a physical property (e.g., size number, etc.) of the
    depressions arranged in each of the faces.


CLS 473/383
TXT Particular dimple detail:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 wherein the striking surface includes a
    plurality of depressions, and significance is attributed to a physical
    property (e.g., size number, etc.) of the depressions.


CLS 473/384
TXT Depth or width:

    Subject matter under subclass 383 wherein the physical property is (1) a
    distance the depression extends below the striking surface; or (2) the
    longest distance from one side to the other of the depression measured on
    the striking surface.


CLS 473/385
TXT Containing metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 wherein the striking surface is formed of
    metal or a metal composition.


CLS 473/386
TXT Tee setting device:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the equipment or device comprises
    structure for facilitating insertion, into a surface in a vicinity where
    the player stands, of a device for holding an object to be struck by the
    player above the surface.


CLS 473/387
TXT Tee:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the playing equipment comprises a
    holder for holding an object to be struck by the player above a surface in
    the vicinity where the player stands.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132,    for a combined ball feeding means and tee.

    257,    for a tee with direction indicator.

    278,    for a practice tee.


CLS 473/388
TXT Folded flat stock material:

    Subject matter under subclass 387 wherein a blank, from which the holder is
    formed, is initially of generally planar construction and the blank is
    formed into object holding ability by bending the blank.


CLS 473/389
TXT Separable from pack containing plural tees:

    Subject matter under subclass 388 wherein a plurality of such blanks are
    detachably interconnected with each other.


CLS 473/390
TXT Plural:

    Subject matter under subclass 387 and further comprising another holder for
    holding an object to be struck by the player above a surface in the
    vicinity where the player stands or wherein the holder has means defining
    two separately useable ball-holding surfaces.


CLS 473/391
TXT Separable or separately movable:

    Subject matter under subclass 390 wherein the holders are initially
    interconnected but detachable from each other, or are separated and
    individually movable with respect to each other.


CLS 473/392
TXT Projectile supporting surface horizontally offset from vertical insertable
    shank:

    Subject matter under subclass 387 wherein the holder includes first,
    second, and third portions, said first portion comprising a support for the
    projectile, said second portion comprising a leg insertable into a surface
    in the vicinity where the player stands and having an axis vertically
    oriented with respect to said surface, and said third portion comprising
    means interconnecting said first and second portions so that said first and
    second portions are horizontally spaced from each other before the
    projectile has been struck.


CLS 473/393
TXT Tether:

    Subject matter under subclass 392 wherein the third portion comprises an
    elongated, flexible cord or chain.


CLS 473/394
TXT Restrained by auxiliary weight:

    Subject matter under subclass 387 and further including a separate weight
    attached to the holder to limit its flight if struck by the player.


CLS 473/395
TXT Wire:

    Subject matter under subclass 387 wherein the device is formed from an
    elongated bent strand.


CLS 473/396
TXT Relatively movable sections:

    Subject matter under subclass 387 wherein the holder includes first and
    second parts which are movable with respect to each other.


CLS 473/397
TXT Pivotable about distinct horizontal axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 396 wherein said first and second parts are
    interconnected along an identifiable axis which extends parallel to the
    surface on which the player stands.


CLS 473/398
TXT Elevation guide:

    Subject matter under subclass 396 wherein relative movement of said first
    and second parts is to change the vertical distance between the object to
    be struck and the surface above which it is supported.


CLS 473/399
TXT Particular biodegradable or frangible material:

    Subject matter under subclass 387 wherein the device is formed of a
    material which accelerates its decomposition by natural biological process,
    or which shatters if impacted by an implement swung by the player.


CLS 473/400
TXT Elevation guide for insertable shank:

    Subject matter under subclass 387 including a leg extending from a struck
    object supporting portion, said leg being insertable into a surface in the
    vicinity where a player stands, and wherein said leg includes structure to
    predetermine the depth the leg is inserted into the surface.


CLS 473/401
TXT Plural diverse materials:

    Subject matter under subclass 387 wherein the holder comprises a first
    portion having a physical (e.g., hardness, elasticity, etc.) or chemical
    (e.g., kind of material, chemical composition, etc.) characteristic which
    is different than a second portion of the device.


CLS 473/402
TXT Shank extends below level of projectile addressing surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 387 wherein the holder includes a leg which
    extends downwardly from a struck object supporting portion, and wherein a
    part of the leg is inserted below the surface in the vicinity where the
    player stands.


CLS 473/403
TXT At acute angle with surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 402 wherein a longitudinal axis of the leg is
    at an angle less than 90_ with respect to the plane of the surface.


CLS 473/404
TXT Green slope indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the equipment or device includes
    means to provide the player with information concerning degree of
    inclination of a putting surface.


CLS 473/405
TXT Accessory device located on projectile addressing surface (e.g., tee block,
    direction indicator, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the auxiliary device is
    positioned on the surface in the vicinity where an object to be struck by
    the player is positioned prior to being struck.


CLS 473/406
TXT Ball position marker:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the equipment or device comprises
    means to indicate the location of a player's ball after it has come to rest
    on a putting green or fairway surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    285,    for a golf club combined with a position marker.


CLS 473/407
TXT Club selection, ball direction, or distance indicating aid:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the equipment or device comprises
    means to provide information to the player concerning (1) selection of an
    implement used to strike a ball, (2) geographical direction that the ball
    should be struck, or (3) distance that the ball will travel.


CLS 473/408
TXT Player manipulated turf repair tool:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the equipment or device comprises
    means to mend a soil or grass portion disturbed as a result of a swing of
    the instrument or an impact of the ball.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286,    for a golf club combined with a turf repair tool.


CLS 473/409
TXT Method

    Subject matter under subclass 131 comprising a method of (1) using the
    auxiliary device, (2) playing the game, or (3) practicing the game.


CLS 473/410
TXT CROQUET; GAME ELEMENT OR ACCESSORY THEREFOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to a game which involves
    a series of three or more targets scattered over and extending above the
    surface of a playing area upon which one or more players can stand and move
    thereover; and wherein the one or more players, using a player worn or
    carried ball-striking implement (usually a mallet or club), strike a game
    ball in an attempt to roll it over the surface so as to cause the ball to
    either strike or pass through each of the targets in a prescribed order.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    273,    Amusement Devices: Games, subclasses 118+ for a ball game in which
    a table or board is used to play a game having rules of play and game
    objectives similar to those of full-sized croquet.


CLS 473/411
TXT Arch type of goal or target, per se (i.e., croquet wicket):

    Subject matter under subclass 410 consisting solely of at least one target
    which comprises a generally inverted, generally U-shaped member extending
    upwardly from the surface of the playing area.


CLS 473/412
TXT Player-carried, nonmechanical projector, per se (e.g., a mallet, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 410 consisting solely of at least one
    ball-striking implement which comprises a generally T-shaped member in
    which the vertical portion of the T-shaped member constitutes a
    hand-gripped handle portion and the cross member of the T-shaped member has
    a ball-striking face on each end thereof, and wherein the player holds the
    handle portion so that the T-shaped striking implement is in a generally
    upside-down orientation when it is swung by the player to thereby strike
    the ball.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    293,    for an implement similar to a croquet mallet for striking a golf
    ball in playing the game known as golf.

    558,    for a player held and powered mallet, in general (e.g., a polo
    mallet, etc.), for striking and thereby projecting a projectile during play
    of a game.


CLS 473/413
TXT Ball, per se:

    Subject matter under subclass 410 consisting solely of at least one game
    ball which has a generally spherical configuration so that it may roll over
    the surface of the playing area upon being impacted by the player.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52+,    for a ball projectile used in a billiard or pool game.

    125+,   for a ball projectile used in a bowling game.

    351+,   for a ball projectile used in the game of golf.

    569+,   for a game projectile, in general, used in numerous other games
    such as baseball, tennis, basketball, football, hockey, lacrosse, pinball
    games, etc.


CLS 473/414
TXT HOPSCOTCH:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to a game involving a
    compartmented playing area and a game projectile, which game comprises a
    playing area defined by lines forming a diagram having several
    compartments, and wherein the player first tosses the projectile into one
    of the compartments and then moves from one compartment to another in a
    prescribed manner.


CLS 473/415
TXT PLAYING FIELD OR COURT GAME; GAME ELEMENT OR ACCESSORY THEREFOR OTHER THAN
    PROJECTOR OR PROJECTILE, PER SE:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to a directly
    interactive and competitive game or sport in which two or more opposing
    players or teams of players located upon or within a playing area
    manipulate or otherwise use a game projectile during play of the game or
    sport, and over which playing area at least one of the two or more opposing
    players or teams, in trying to achieve the game objective, moves, either
    while manipulating the projectile or while interacting with, reacting to,
    or responding to another player who is manipulating the projectile or to
    movement of the projectile itself whenever it is free of the players'
    direct control, which game or sport includes any one of or a combination of
    the following:



    (a)     a game component (e.g., a convertible goal or target device, etc.)
    which has a configuration that is adapted and intended to be changed so
    that it, in one configuration thereof, is a game component which is
    intended to be used in or for a game or sport included herein and, in
    another configuration thereof, is either a game component or a practice or
    training device that is intended to be used in or for a diverse type of
    game or sport which also uses a game projectile, which diverse type of game
    or sport is either a different game or sport included herein or a game or
    sport not included herein;

    (b)     a kit of parts which is adapted and intended to be assembled or
    reassembled into a first game component intended to be used in or for a
    game or sport included herein and into either a second game component or a
    practice or training device which is intended to be used in or for a
    diverse type of game or sport which also uses a projectile, which diverse
    type of game or sport is either a different game or sport included herein
    or a game or sport not included herein;

    (c)     a game component (other than a projector or projectile, per se)
    which is used during play of a game or sport included herein; or

    (d)     an ancillary device or means (e.g., a cover for a playing field or
    court, etc.) which is adapted and intended to be used with or for a game
    component during the times that the game or sport is not being played
    (i.e., before or after the game or sport is played or during a time out)
    unless it is provided for elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.   A game or sport of the type to be included in this and the
    indented subclasses, must involve a game projectile, whether or not
    claimed.  The projectile used by the two or more opposing players or teams
    of players may be manipulated in such a manner that it may be thrown,
    carried, struck, kicked, pushed, etc. by any portion of a player's body or
    by a projector device carried by a player as dictated by the rules defined
    for the game. However, the projectile must, at some point in time during
    play of the game or sport, be free of the player's direct control as, for
    example, when the projectile is thrown or otherwise projected either
    through the air or for movement over the playing area toward a goal or
    target or toward another player.

    (2)     Note.  The statement ``directly interactive and competitive game or
    sport" referred to above is defined herein to mean that the opposing
    players or teams of players play the game or sport generally simultaneously
    (other than at such times as, for example, a penalty kick in a soccer game,
    etc.).  Thus, for example, a game or sport in which a player, located upon
    or within a playing area, projects a projectile toward a goal or target and
    subsequently moves over the playing area to the location of the projected
    projectile for retrieval or reprojection thereof (as in the games of
    hopscotch, croquet, golf, horseshoes, etc.) is not considered to be a
    playing field or court game or sport as defined herein and is, therefore,
    excluded because the player is not moving over the playing area either
    while manipulating the projectile or while interacting with, reacting to,
    or responding to another player who is manipulating the projectile or to
    movement of the projectile itself. Further, most simple target games in
    which the players take turns in projecting or impelling a game projectile
    toward a goal or target in order to achieve a score higher that another
    player, although a competition in a broad sense, are excluded from these
    subclasses because the players are not directly interacting with another
    player at the same time during play of the game (i.e., there is no
    interference from an opposing player of the game) or because a player and
    his opponent are not both moving over the playing area at the same time
    during play of the game.

    (3)     Note.  A simple game of throw-and-catch in which the players may
    incidentally move over a playing area is not considered to be a playing
    field or court game or sport and is, therefore, excluded because the
    movement is caused by unintentional inaccuracy of the thrower in attempting
    to throw the projectile to the catcher.

    (4)     Note.  A game component which is used in a playing field or court
    game included herein, is defined as a device or means which is used during
    the times that the game or sport is being played.  Although the following
    list is not to be considered as exhaustive, such a game component may
    include any of one of the following devices or means:



    (a)     a playing area of indeterminate extent or a playing area defined by
    a visually (e.g., marked) or otherwise sensory distinct enclosing
    peripheral boundary or by an enclosure. However, this type of game
    component is, per se, excluded from these subclasses since it is
    classifiable elsewhere.  That is, this type of game component, to be
    included here, must be combined with another game component which is
    included herein. See (6) Note below for a further discussion of this line.
    Such additional game component may be a court dividing net as in a tennis
    court, another interior playing field or court dividing means that breaks
    the playing area into compartments, sub-areas, or sections, as the ten yard
    line markings on a football field, a goal or target device, a game
    projectile, a projectile impelling device manipulated by a player, etc.;

    (b)     a structure, per se (e.g., a net, barrier, etc.) or a visually or
    otherwise sensory distinct means, per se (e.g., a marked line, etc.) which
    is adapted and intended to break the playing area into compartments,
    subareas, or sections;

    (c)     a goal or target, per se, for providing a point of aim for a game
    projectile projected thereat by a player;

    (d)     a player-held and powered, nonmechanical implement adapted and
    intended to project a game projectile (e.g., a bat, tennis racket, polo
    mallet, hockey stick, etc.).  However, this type of game component is, per
    se, excluded from these subclasses since it is classifiable elsewhere. That
    is, this type of game component, to be included here, must be combined with
    another game component which is included herein;

    (e)     a game projectile (e.g., a ball, hockey puck, badminton
    shuttlecock, etc.).  However, this type of game component is, per se,
    excluded from these subclasses since it is classifiable elsewhere.  That
    is, this type of game component, to be included here, must be combined with
    another game component which is included herein;

    (f)     a football kicking tee, per se, which is used once in a while
    during play of an American football game;

    (g)     a means, per se, used by a player when projecting a game projectile
    for enhancing the movement of the projectile after projection thereof
    (e.g., a means that a player uses to assist in causing a pitched baseball
    to curve during flight);

    (h)     a base, per se, adapted and intended to be located on or within a
    playing area used in a game involving base running (e.g., a base to be
    located at a corner of the diamond-shaped playing area used in playing the
    game of baseball, etc.);

    (i)     a strike-zone detector (e.g., a detector for determining whether or
    not a ball pitched toward a batter located in the vicinity of home plate is
    within the strike zone in a baseball-type game, etc.) provided that it is
    claimed in combination with another game component classifiable herein
    (e.g., with the home plate, etc.); or

    (j)     a boundary detector (e.g., a ball-out-of-bounds detector for use on
    a tennis court, etc.) provided that it is claimed in combination with
    another game component classifiable herein (e.g., with the tennis court,
    tennis court net, etc.).

    (5)     Note.  An accessory (i.e., an ancillary device or means) is
    generally not considered to be a game component unless it is convertible or
    is part of a kit of parts, as specified in parts (a) and (b) of the
    definition above.  An accessory, per se, intended to be used with or for a
    game component used in a game or sport included herein, is often classified
    with the component it is intended to be used with or for, unless it is
    provided for elsewhere.  For example, a press for a tennis racket is
    included under the subclasses providing for the tennis rackets which, in
    turn, is included under the subclasses providing for player-held and
    powered, nonmechanical projectors for projecting an aerial projectile into
    or through the air by striking.  On the other hand, a cover, per se, for a
    playing field or court included herein is classified herein by itself near
    the end of the group of subclasses under this mainline subclass.  Also, it
    should be kept in mind that some accessory devices or means are
    classifiable elsewhere as, for example, in other classes.

    (6)     Note.  The playing area itself, the peripheral boundary or
    enclosure itself, or both may be included in this and the indented
    subclasses provided that at least one other game component intended to be
    used in or for a playing field or court game or sport as defined above is
    also claimed in combination therewith. For example, a ball or a goal
    combined with a particular floor structure, a walled enclosure combined
    with a game racket, or a football field combined with a peripheral boundary
    marking and with an interior yard line marking would be included herein.
    However, a particular floor, field, or court structure per se, a particular
    walled enclosure per se, a peripheral boundary marking per se, or a
    particular floor, field, or court structure combined only with a particular
    walled enclosure or peripheral boundary marking would not be included
    herein.

    (7)     Note.  A means which is specifically adapted and intended to enable
    a player of a playing field or court game included herein to improve or
    perfect his or her physical skills (e.g., motor skills, coordination, etc.)
    in the playing of any aspect of the game or sport (i.e., a practice or
    training device) is included herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44+,    for a projecting implement or apparatus used in playing the surface
    projectile game known as billiards or pool.

    52+,    for a ball used in playing a billiard or pool game.

    107,    for a mechanical projecting device used in playing the surface
    projectile game known as bowling.

    125+,   for a ball used in playing a bowling game.

    219+,   for a practice swingable implement used (by a player of the game
    known as golf) to improve or perfect his or her skill in playing the game.

    280+,   for a practice projectile used by a player of golf to improve or
    perfect his or her skill in playing the game.

    282+,   for a projecting implement used in playing a golf game.

    351+,   for a ball used in playing a golf game.

    410+,   for a projecting implement (e.g., a mallet, etc.) or a ball used in
    playing the surface projectile game known as croquet.

    516+,   for a player held and powered, nonmechanical, game projector, per
    se, which is used by a player to strike and thereby propel, impel, launch,
    or otherwise project a projectile into the air during play of a projectile
    game or sport.

    569+,   for a game projectile, per se, in general which is thrown,
    propelled, impelled, launched, or otherwise projected by a player during
    play of a projectile game or sport.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), for an arena, stadium, or
    other building structure of general utility.

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, for a mechanically or centrifically
    operated projector device or implement, per se, which is used to project a
    projectile into or through the air as, for example, an archery bow, a
    slingshot, a baseball pitching machine, a tennis ball throwing machine, a
    clay pigeon throwing trap, or a fluid pressure, pinch, or centrifugally
    operated (e.g., a sling, etc.) type of projector device, etc.  And see the
    (3) Note in the class definition of  Class 473 above.

    273,    Amusement Devices: Games, for another game which also uses a
    tangible projectile, particularly subclasses 108+ for surface projectile
    game or apparatus therefor (other than a projectile, per se), subclasses
    108.1+ for such a surface projectile game that mimics some aspect or the
    scoring of a playing field or court game such as the sports known as
    baseball, basketball, football, hockey, tennis, soccer, etc., subclass 129
    for a projector used to project a projectile in such a surface projectile
    game, subclasses 317+ for an aerial projectile game or apparatus therefor
    (other than a projectile per se or a device or implement, per se, for
    projecting such a projectile), and subclasses 317.1+ for such an aerial
    projectile game that mimics some aspect or the scoring of a playing field
    or court game such as the sports noted above.  Class 273 is currently
    undergoing reclassification and will eventually be replaced either by this
    Class 473 or Class 463, Amusement Devices: Games. Until this
    reclassification is completed, the subject matter of Class 273 relating to
    games or sports which use a tangible projectile is to be considered as
    following in hierarchy the last occurring subclass of the Class 473
    schedule.  Specifically, subclasses 108+ and 317+ of the Class 273 schedule
    are to be considered as following in hierarchy after the last occurring
    subclass in the Class 473 schedule.

    463,    Amusement Devices: Games, for a game apparatus or means, in
    general.  The relationship between Class 473 and Class 463 is that Class
    463 is the residual class for games, while Class 473 provides only for
    those specific types of games in which a ball, missile, or other such
    tangible projectile (other than a simulation or representation thereof) is
    used during play thereof.  Accordingly, if a game (or a game component
    thereof) which uses a ball, missile, or other such tangible game projectile
    (other than a simulation or representation thereof) during play thereof is
    claimed or solely disclosed, then classification is in Class 473;
    otherwise, classification is in Class 463 or in the appropriate subclasses
    of Class 273, Amusement Devices: Games, which follow behind the subclasses
    of Class 463.  However, note that Class 463 provides for (a) a game
    apparatus or means which uses a simulation or representation of a tangible
    projectile (e.g., a light-ray simulation of a projectile, a computer
    generated representation of a projectile, etc.), (b) a propelled racing
    game in which an object (often a representation of a horse, vehicle,
    person, etc.) is propelled during play thereof, and (c) a chance device,
    either per se or in combination with a game which does not use a tangible
    projectile, whether or not a projectile is included therein, and even if it
    is not a game or subcombination element of a game (these are, for the most
    part, still located in Class 273).

    472,    Amusement Devices, subclasses 92+ (a) for the structure or
    composition of a playing surface, per se (b) for the structure or
    composition of a peripheral boundary structure, marking, or enclosure per
    se, for such a playing surface, or (c) for the combination of only a
    playing surface and a peripheral boundary structure, marking, or enclosure;
    all of the above of which are limited to use for an athletic or exhibition
    event such as, for example, the playing of a game or sport thereon or
    therein.  Also see the Search Notes appended thereto.

    482,    Exercise Devices, for a device adapted and intended to be used by a
    player of a playing field or court game for the sole purpose of
    strengthening or exercising his or her muscles so as to improve play of the
    game.  If the device is adapted to be used along with a game component (as,
    for example, a weight to be attached to a baseball bat or a kicking
    exercise device intended for use with a soccer ball or football, etc.),
    then the device is classifiable in Class 473.  Also, if the device is
    intended to be used either for exercising or for warmup by the player, then
    the device is classifiable in Class 473.

    602,    Surgery: Splint, Brace, or Bandage, for a device adapted and
    intended to be used for the treatment of a disorder or injury of a portion
    of the human body, particularly subclasses 5+ for an immobilization
    appliance (e.g., a splint, brace, etc.) for treating a disorder or injury
    of a body portion.


CLS 473/416
TXT Having game element combined with or convertible to game element or
    practice or training device for different type of projectile game:

    Subject matter under subclass 415 comprising either (a) a game component
    which is used in playing a playing field or court game in accordance with a
    first set of rules combined on a common support or frame with another game
    component, or a portion thereof, of a different construction which is used
    to play or practice any other game or sport in accordance with a different
    set of rules or (b) a collection of components which are so constructed
    that at least some of the components may be and are specifically intended
    to be assembled, reassembled, or adjusted to form a game component which is
    used in playing a playing field or court game in accordance with a first
    set of rules and at least some of which collection of components are
    specifically intended to be assembled, reassembled, or adjusted to also or
    alternatively form another game component, or a portion thereof, which is
    used to play or practice any other game or sport in accordance with a
    different set of rules (e.g., a collection of components which can be
    assembled to form a soccer goal and reassembled to form a football goal).

    (1)     Note. The second game component, with which the game component used
    in a playing field or court game is combined or which may be alternatively
    formed from the collection of components used to form the game component
    used in a playing field or court game, need not necessarily be used in a
    playing field or court game (e.g., a basketball goal which is combined with
    a dart board).


CLS 473/417
TXT Means removably supporting projectile in position to be struck and thereby
    projected by player (e.g., batting tee, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 415 comprising a structure adapted to support
    a game projectile relative to the ground so that it may readily be struck
    and thereby impelled by a player of a playing field or court game or by a
    player practicing or training for such a game, which supporting structure
    is in the form of (a) a means having an underlying projectile receiving
    seat upon which the projectile is intended to removably rest, (b) an
    overhead member having means for removably suspending the projectile
    therefrom, or (c) an overhead member for engaging the top of the projectile
    so that the projectile is removably held between the overhead member and
    either the ground or an underlying member or mechanism upon which the
    projectile removably rests or by which the projectile is removably held.

    (1)     Note.  The support structure may be an upwardly extending column or
    stream of fluid, the seat being formed when and where the fluid impinges
    upon or interacts with the projectile.

    (2)     Note.  The term ``removably" as it is used above means that the
    projectile (a) is merely freely resting upon the support structure, (b) is
    releasably attached to the support structure (e.g., by means of a tether
    releasably supporting a projectile in suspended position, etc.), or (c) is
    releasably held by the support structure (e.g., held between an overlying
    member and the ground or an underlying member or mechanism, etc.).


CLS 473/418
TXT Projectile suspended or is supported by column of fluid:

    Projectile supporting structure under subclass 417 in the form of either
    (a) an overhead member having means for removably suspending the projectile
    therefrom or (b) an upwardly extending column or stream of fluid, the seat
    being formed when and where the fluid impinges upon or interacts with the
    projectile.

    (1)     Note.  If the projectile supporting structure provides both an
    underlying seat upon which the projectile rests and an overhead means for
    also supporting a projectile from above as, for example, for supporting a
    tip of a football in an upwardly facing direction, then the projectile is
    not considered to be suspended and is, therefore, excluded from this
    subclass.  That is, a projectile that is supported in a suspended fashion
    is considered to have no underlying means of support.


CLS 473/419
TXT Having means engaging top of projectile (e.g., kicking trainer or tee,
    etc.):

    Projectile supporting means under subclass 417 in which the projectile
    supporting structure is in the form of an overhead member for engaging the
    top of the projectile so that the projectile is removably held between the
    overhead member and either the ground or an underlying member or mechanism
    upon which the projectile removably rests or by which the projectile is
    removably held.


CLS 473/420
TXT For projectile intended to be projected by kicking (e.g., kicking trainer
    or tee, etc.):

    Projectile supporting means under subclass 417 which is specifically
    adapted and intended to support a projectile or its equivalent in such a
    manner as to enable a user of the means to strike the projectile or its
    equivalent with at least one of his or her feet.

    (1)     Note.  The projectile supporting means may be used for the purpose
    of supporting a projectile in a kicking position during play of a playing
    field or court game as, for example, for the kicking of extra points or
    field goals in an American football game or it may be used for the purpose
    of enabling a player of a playing field or court game to improve or perfect
    the action of kicking a projectile (i.e., a practice or training device).


CLS 473/421
TXT Batting backstop or cage:

    Subject matter under subclass 415 either
    (a) comprising a walled or screened partial enclosure intended to be
    positioned generally behind, beside, or above a baseball batter in order to
    limit or intercept the travel of a projectile which has been pitched or hit
    to the rear, sides, or above the batter for protecting persons or things
    outside the area bounded by the partial enclosure, the partial enclosure
    being open in at least an area generally in front of the batter or (b)
    comprising a walled or screened full enclosure which does not bound or
    enclose a playing field or court and within which a batter stands while
    practicing batting a projectile.


CLS 473/422
TXT Practice or training device:

    Subject matter under subclass 415 comprising a means specifically adapted
    and intended to enable a player of a playing field or court game to improve
    or perfect his or her physical skills (e.g., motor skills, coordination,
    etc.) in the playing of any aspect of the game or sport.

    (1)     Note.  Even though goals, targets, projectors, projectiles, or
    other game elements, per se, which are normally used during the play of a
    playing field or court game or sport could also be used for practice or
    training, they are classifiable in appropriate subclasses other than this
    group of subclasses (i.e., 422+) unless a feature intended to enhance their
    practice or training function is specifically claimed or solely disclosed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207+,   for a practice device, used by a person to practice for an aspect
    of the game of golf, attachable to the body of a person.

    219+,   for a practice swingable implement or indicator associated with a
    swingable implement, which implement or indicator being used by a person to
    practice for an aspect of the game of golf.

    278+,   for a practice projectile-addressing surface used by a person to
    practice for an aspect of the game of golf.

    280+,   for a practice projectile used by a person to practice for an
    aspect of the game of golf.

    416,    for a playing field or court game having a game component combined
    with or convertible to a game component or a practice or training device
    for a different type of projectile game or sport.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, for a mechanically or centrifically
    operated projector device or implement, per se, which is used to project a
    projectile into or through the air as, for example, an archery bow, a
    slingshot, a baseball pitching machine, a tennis ball throwing machine, a
    clay pigeon throwing trap, or a fluid pressure, pinch, or centrifugally
    operated (e.g., a sling, etc.) type of projector device, etc.


CLS 473/423
TXT Tethered projectile:

    Practice or training device under subclass 422 comprising a projectile or a
    tangible means simulating a projectile which is adapted and intended to
    enable a practicing or training player to improve or perfect (a) the action
    of propelling, throwing, rolling, impelling, sliding, pushing, or otherwise
    projecting a game projectile, (b) the action of catching a game projectile,
    or (c) the action of grasping and pulling a game projectile; which
    projectile or tangible means simulating a projectile is attached or has
    means intended to be attached to an elongated means which, in turn, is
    secured or is intended to be secured to an anchoring means (such as a
    support, etc.) or to a body portion of the player, whereby the projectile
    or tangible means simulating a projectile is constrained for movement
    within the extent of the elongated means whenever it is propelled,
    projected, etc., caught, or grasped and pulled by the player.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    for golf game apparatus comprising a projectile tethered to a
    swingable implement.

    139+,   for golf game apparatus comprising an anchored (e.g., tethered,
    etc.) projectile.

    575+,   for a projectile having an attached or a means for attaching
    thereto a tether, elongated flaccid streamer, or the like, which projectile
    is intended to be used for playing a game which uses a game projectile but
    not intended to be used for practice or training purposes.


CLS 473/424
TXT Tether attached to means adapted to be held by, carried by, or attached to
    person:

    Tethered projectile under subclass 423 wherein the elongated means is
    secured to an element intended to be held by, carried by, or secured (e.g.,
    worn, etc.) to either a person using the practicing or training device or a
    person assisting the person using the practice or training device.

    (1)     Note.  The person held, carried, or attached element may be formed
    in or by a portion of the elongated means itself, such as a portion of the
    elongated means formed into a knot or loop which is intended to be gripped
    by the hand or attached to the wrist of the person, provided that it is
    expressly disclosed that the elongated means is intended to be held by,
    carried by, or attached to the person manipulating the device.


CLS 473/425
TXT Person held, carried, or attached means is nonmechanical projector:

    Tethered projectile device under subclass 424 wherein the person held,
    carried, or attached element is a manually manipulated implement for
    striking, impelling, or otherwise projecting a projectile and wherein
    substantially all of the force used to strike, impel, or otherwise project
    the projectile is supplied by the person.


CLS 473/426
TXT Projectile tethered between opposed tether sections:

    Tethered projectile device under subclass 423 wherein the elongated means
    includes at least two portions extending in generally opposite directions
    from the projectile, a distal part of each portion being, or intended to
    be, attached to an anchoring means, and a proximal part of each portion
    being fixed to, at, or about the projectile.


CLS 473/427
TXT Projectile continuously driven in closed orbit prior to being struck:

    Tethered projectile device under subclass 423 comprising a motive means for
    constantly moving the projectile along a closed path prior to the impact
    imparted thereupon by the practicing or training player.

    (1)     Note. The motive means may be power-operated (e.g., by an electric
    motor, etc.) or hand-operated (e.g., by a hand crank, etc.).


CLS 473/428
TXT Projectile slidable along a line:

    Tethered projectile device under subclass 423 wherein the projectile is
    mounted to the elongated member by means allowing it to shift position
    along the length of the elongated member.

    (1)     Note.  A device in which the elongated member itself is comprised
    of two or more relatively sliding sections will be found in subclass 423
    above unless the projectile itself is also slidable relative to at least
    one of the sections.


CLS 473/429
TXT Tether pivotally attached for orbital revolution:

    Tethered projectile device under subclass 423 wherein a portion of the
    elongated means, remote from the point of its attachment to the projectile,
    is secured to the anchor means by a pivotal connection which permits the
    tether and the projectile to orbitally revolve about the anchor means (or
    at least about the connection to the anchor means) similar to the manner in
    which the earth orbitally revolves about the sun.

    (1)     Note.  If the tether is of the type comprising a flaccid cord,
    rope, etc. from which the projectile is suspended and the connection to the
    anchor means is by means of swivel which permits the tether to rotate only
    about its own axis similar to the manner in which the earth rotates about
    its own axis, then this type of tether is excluded from this subclass.

    (2)     Note. If the tether is of the type comprising a flaccid cord, rope,
    etc. from which the projectile is suspended, then the portion of the tether
    which is secured to the anchor means must itself be capable of rotating
    about an axis (e.g., by means of a rotatable collar, ring, swivel, eyelet,
    etc. or by means of a loosely fitting looped portion thereof).  A flaccid
    cord, rope, etc, which is tightly tied or knotted to a portion of the
    anchor means is not considered to be a pivotal connection proper for this
    subclass as indicated in the Search note below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    430,    for a tethered-projectile type of practice or training device in
    which the projectile is suspended by the tether but in which the connection
    to the anchor means is not by means of a pivotal connection.


CLS 473/430
TXT Projectile suspended by tether:

    Tethered projectile device under subclass 423 wherein the projectile is
    hung from the anchoring means by the elongated means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    418,    for a teeing means removably supporting a projectile in position to
    be struck and thereby projected by a player, which teeing means being of
    the type for removably suspending the projectile therefrom and which teeing
    means may either be intended to be used to play a game (e.g., for a teeball
    game, etc.) or be intended to enable a player to practice or train for play
    of a game (e.g., a batting practice device, etc.).

    429,    for a tethered projectile device used by a player to practice or
    train for play of a game, which device may be of the type for suspending
    the projectile therefrom but in which the tether is pivotally secured to
    the anchor means to permit the tether and the projectile orbitally revolve
    about the anchor means or a portion thereof.


CLS 473/431
TXT Having projectile return means:

    Practice or training device under subclass 422 having a means to cause a
    projectile which has been projected, struck, slid, propelled, thrown, etc.
    by and away from a practicing or training player to be moved back to a
    point located in the general vicinity of the player for the purpose of
    providing more ready retrieval of the projectile by the player.


CLS 473/432
TXT Return chute:

    Practice or training device under subclass 431 wherein the projectile
    return means comprises an inclined or otherwise vertically oriented trough,
    passage, or the like down which the projectile moves due to the influence
    of a gravitational force acting thereon.

    (1)     Note. The inclined or otherwise vertically oriented trough,
    passage, or the like must function to direct the projectile back toward the
    practicing or training player. If the projectile return means includes an
    inclined or otherwise vertically oriented trough, passage, or the like
    which merely serves to deliver the projectile to another part of the return
    means for subsequent projection or return to the player by another method
    (e.g., a projectile delivered by a chute to a mechanically operated kicker
    device which projects the projectile back to the user, etc.), then such a
    trough, passage, etc. is considered to be a mere transfer means and not a
    projectile return means and is, therefore, excluded from this and the
    indented subclass.


CLS 473/433
TXT With or for basketball-type goal:

    Practice or training device under subclass 432 wherein the return chute is
    attached to or intended to be associated with an elevated, horizontally
    disposed hoop which serves to simulate a goal of the type which is used to
    receive a projectile projected thereat during play of the game or sport
    commonly known as basketball.


CLS 473/434
TXT Deflector:

    Practice or training device under subclass 431 wherein the projectile
    return means comprises a surface which acts as a reaction surface against
    which the projectile, upon impacting thereon, is caused to deflect or
    bounce away therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  Although a device in the form of a projectile-stopping net
    or the like (due to its resilience, an inclined lower portion thereof,
    etc.) may function to a small degree to move the projectile a limited
    extent in a direction toward the practicing or training player, the device
    is not considered to be a deflector type of projectile return means proper
    for this and the indented subclass unless the projectile is returned to a
    point located in the general vicinity of the player.


CLS 473/435
TXT Planar:

    Practice or training device under subclass 434 wherein the entire reaction
    surface is flat and, if comprised of more than one section, the reaction
    surfaces of all the sections lie in a common plane.


CLS 473/436
TXT Using moving arm or rotating wheel:

    Practice or training device under subclass 431 in which the force used to
    return the projectile is supplied by or through means of a movable armlike
    member or a rotatable wheellike member which engages the surface of the
    projectile and, respectively, moves or rotates in order to apply the
    impelling force upon the projectile.


CLS 473/437
TXT Weight externally mounted by user to manually held and swung projector for
    warmup or exercise:

    Practice or training device under subclass 422 comprising a body having the
    quality of heaviness and which is so constructed and configured to enable
    attachment thereof to the external surface of an implement, intended to be
    carried by and swung by a user during play of a playing field or court game
    to strike, propel, impel, or otherwise project a game projectile, which
    body being intended to temporarily increase the overall weight of the
    implement so that it may be swung by a user to increase the strength,
    flexibility, or elasticity of the muscles involved in swinging the
    implement or to warm up such muscles prior to use of the implement in play
    of the game.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256,    for similar structure used by a user thereof to take practice
    swings with a golf club.

    457,    for a practice bat used to practice for a game in which play
    involves base running (e.g., baseball, etc.).

    463,    for a practice racket or paddle used to practice for a game using a
    field or court having dividing means thereon for separating opponents
    (e.g., for tennis, volleyball, table tennis, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    482,    Exercise Devices, particularly subclasses 93+ for an apparatus
    intended to perform a similar function but which is not specifically
    constructed and configured for attachment to a manually held and swung
    projector used in play of a game.


CLS 473/438
TXT For football or rugby:

    Practice or training device under subclass 422 comprising a means adapted
    and intended to enable a practicing or training player to improve or
    perfect his or her play of any aspect of the game commonly known in the
    United States of America as football or the game commonly known as rugby.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    446,    for a practice or training device intended for enabling a person to
    improve play in the game of soccer (also called football or association
    football in many other countries).


CLS 473/439
TXT Projectile target or stop:

    Practice or training device under subclass 438 (a) comprising a point of
    aim for, and which is intended to indicate the correctness or accuracy of
    aim of, a projectile when propelled thereat by a person practicing or
    training for the game of football or rugby or (b) comprising a means spaced
    from a person for arresting the movement of, trapping, or catching a
    projectile when propelled thereat by a person practicing or training for
    the game of football or rugby.


CLS 473/440
TXT Running grid or resistance course:

    Practice or training device under subclass 438 (a) comprising a generally
    horizontally disposed, elevated lattice defining a course of openings sized
    to receive the feet and legs of a user and through which course a user is
    intended to run or (b) comprising a peripheral framework having opposed
    side members spaced apart a distance sufficient to enable a user to run
    therebetween, which side members further have a plurality of resilient or
    resiliently mounted and generally opposed members mounted to and extending
    inwardly therefrom so that they provide a resistance to the passage of a
    user passing between the side members.


CLS 473/441
TXT Blocking, tackling, or charging device:

    Practice or training device under subclass 438 comprising a means adapted
    and intended to enable a practicing or training player to improve or
    perfect his or her ability to tackle, block, or charge an opposing player
    or to avoid the tackle, block, or charge of an opposing player.


CLS 473/442
TXT Suspended or suspendible dummy:

    Practice or training device under subclass 441 comprising a padded or
    resilient body adapted and intended to simulate a live player and wherein
    the body is hung or is adapted to be hung from an overhead support for
    training the user in the art of tackling, blocking, or charging an opposing
    player or in the art of avoiding being tackled, blocked, or charged by an
    opposing player.

    (1)     Note.  An overhead support for such a dummy is also included herein.


CLS 473/443
TXT Suspension movable in horizontal plane:

    Practice or training device under subclass 442 wherein the overhead support
    is mounted for movement in a plane generally parallel to the ground or
    floor or the dummy is mounted for sliding movement in such a plane along
    the overhead support.


CLS 473/444
TXT Self-erecting or person-supported dummy:

    Practice or training device under subclass 441 comprising a padded or
    resilient body adapted and intended to simulate a live player for training
    a user in the art of tackling or blocking an opposing player and wherein
    the body either (a) includes, is mounted to, or is intended to rest on an
    underlying surface and extend generally vertically upwardly therefrom,
    which body further includes or is connected to the underlying surface by
    means to cause the body to return to a generally vertically upward
    orientation whenever forces applied to the body causing it to be deflected
    from such vertical orientation are removed; or (b) includes means for a
    person to hold the body in a position on or above a practice surface.


CLS 473/445
TXT Dummy mounted on support enabling traverse over ground or floor during
    training (e.g., charging sled, etc.):

    Practice or training device under subclass 441 comprising a base configured
    or having means to facilitate sliding or rolling movement thereof over a
    surface on which the base is located and comprising a user-engageable
    padded or resilient body adapted and intended to simulate a live player,
    and wherein the body is located above and connected to the base for
    engagement by a user for training the user in the art of tackling,
    blocking, or charging an opposing player or in the art of avoiding being
    tackled, blocked, or charged by an opposing player.


CLS 473/446
TXT For game using apertured or pocketed goal or target (e.g., for hockey,
    soccer, polo, lacrosse, etc.):

    Practice or training device under subclass 422 comprising a means adapted
    and intended to enable a practicing or training player to improve or
    perfect his or her play of any aspect of a playing field or court game
    involving impelling, sliding, rolling, propelling, throwing, or otherwise
    projecting a game projectile into or through an apertured or pocketed goal
    or target.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 476 below for the definition of a goal or
    target, and see subclass 478 below for the definition of a goal or target
    which is apertured or pocketed.


CLS 473/447
TXT For game using elevated, horizontally disposed goal or target (e.g., for
    basketball, etc.):

    Practice or training device under subclass 446 comprising a means to enable
    the practicing or training player to improve or perfect his or her play of
    any aspect of a playing field or court game which uses, during play
    thereof, an apertured or pocketed goal or target which is located
    vertically above and spaced apart from the plane of the surface of the
    playing area upon or over which the game or sport is played, and wherein
    the apertured or pocketed goal or target is so disposed such that the plane
    of the projectile entrance opening thereof is generally parallel to the
    plane of the surface of the playing area.

    (1)     Note.  The vertical spacing between the apertured or pocketed goal
    or target and the plane of the playing surface must exceed the dimension of
    the game projectile.


CLS 473/448
TXT Hoop-opening reducer or means for improving arch of ball shot toward goal
    or target:

    Practice or training device under subclass 447 either (a) comprising a
    means to reduce the size of the opening of an elevated, apertured or
    pocketed goal or target, or (b) comprising a means adapted and intended to
    enable a practicing or training player to improve or perfect the action of
    impelling, propelling, throwing, or otherwise projecting a projectile into
    or through an elevated, apertured or pocketed goal or target by permitting
    the projectile to enter the goal or target only if it follows a course
    having a proper trajectory.


CLS 473/449
TXT Rebound or tipping trainer:

    Practice or training device under subclass 447 comprising a means to enable
    the practicing or training player to improve or perfect either (a) the
    action of retrieving and gaining control of a game projectile which has
    been deflected from another game component or a player or (b) the action of
    applying a light touch or blow to a projectile which has been deflected
    from the goal or target so as to return the projectile toward the goal or
    target.


CLS 473/450
TXT Player worn or carried:

    Practice or training device under subclass 447 wherein the practicing or
    training means is born upon or by the player while practicing or training.


CLS 473/451
TXT For game in which play involves base running (e.g., for baseball, cricket,
    etc.):

    Practice or training device under subclass 422 comprising a means
    specifically adapted and intended to enable a player to improve or perfect
    his or her skill in the play of a playing field or court game of the type
    in which at least one of the objectives of the game is for one or more
    offensive players to successfully traverse the playing field or court, in
    accordance with the rules of the game, from a first defined station on the
    field or court to a second defined station on the field or court in
    response to a first game action and before a second game action occurs
    (e.g., in response to the pitching or hitting of the game projectile, etc.).


CLS 473/452
TXT Foot positioner (e.g., stance, stride device, etc.):

    Practice or training device under subclass 451 comprising means to
    demarcate the proper position or movement that one or more of a player's
    feet should attain before, during, or after performance of an action
    involved during play of the game.


CLS 473/453
TXT Bat swing analyzer or guide:

    Practice or training device under subclass 451 comprising either (a) a
    means, separate from a bat-type projecting implement, for detecting and
    displaying to a user at least one aspect of bat movement or position when
    it is swung in a manner similar to the manner in which it should ideally be
    swung in an attempt to hit a projectile during play of the game or (b) a
    means to constrain a bat-type projecting implement, when it is swung in
    practice, to follow the same path it should ideally follow when it is swung
    during play of the game.


CLS 473/454
TXT Pitcher's target:

    Practice or training device under subclass 451 comprising a structure
    constituting a point of aim for, and which is intended to indicate the
    correctness of aim of, a user in directing a game projectile thereat so
    that the user may improve or perfect his or her skill in throwing (i.e.,
    pitching) a projectile past a player (i.e., a batter) who is attempting to
    hit the thrown projectile during play of the game.


CLS 473/455
TXT With electrically operated or actuated indicator:

    Practice or training device under subclass 454 wherein the pitcher's target
    includes an electrically actuated or operated means (a) for indicating that
    a thrown projectile has reached the target, (b) for indicating the location
    of the point on the target which a thrown projectile has reached, or (c)
    for indicating the location of the point relative to and spaced from the
    target which a thrown projectile has passed by the target.

    (1)     Note.  The electrically actuated or operated indicating means may
    include means located on, near, or at distance from the target for sensing
    the presence of the projectile as it comes into proximity with or in the
    vicinity of the target, which sensing means is actuated whenever a
    projectile comes into proximity therewith or into the vicinity thereof to
    electrically actuate or operate the indicating means.


CLS 473/456
TXT Having subdivided strike zone:

    Practice or training device under subclass 454 wherein the pitcher's target
    includes an area corresponding to the ``strike zone" (e.g., the rectangular
    area above home plate defined by an upper horizontal edge at the armpit
    height of a batter, a lower horizontal edge at a point just above the knees
    of the batter, an inner vertical edge above the edge of home plate proximal
    the batter, and an outer vertical above the distal edge of home plate,
    etc.), through which some portion of the projectile must pass when pitched
    by the pitcher to attain a ``strike" against the batter, which strike zone
    is subdivided into a plurality of smaller zones.


CLS 473/457
TXT Practice bat:

    Practice or training device under subclass 451 comprising a handheld,
    elongated implement intended to be swung by a user in imitation of the act
    of swinging a bat-type projector during the attempt to hit a projectile
    during play ofthe game, which implement is specifically constructed and
    arranged or possesses a feature to enhance the practice or training
    function thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    437,    for a weight externally mounted by a user to a manually held and
    swung projector implement to take practice swings for warmup or exercise.


CLS 473/458
TXT Player worn or carried:

    Practice or training device under subclass 451 having means to enable the
    user thereof to wear the device on, or carry the device by, at least a
    portion of his or her body during at least some duration of time while the
    user is practicing or training therewith.


CLS 473/459
TXT For game using field or court having dividing means thereon for separating
    opponents (e.g., for tennis, volleyball, table tennis, etc.):

    Practice or training device under subclass 422 comprising a means
    specifically adapted and intended to enable a player to improve his or her
    skill in the play of a game which is played on a field or court having
    means (e.g., a net, line, zone, etc.) adapted and intended to break the
    playing area into two or more compartments, subareas, or sections, which
    compartments, subareas, or sections function to separate opposing players
    from one another during play of the game.


CLS 473/460
TXT Projectile collector for field or court (e.g., trough, ball sweeper, etc.):

    Practice or training device under subclass 459 comprising means associated
    with the field or court for removing projectiles from the field or court or
    from adjacent areas thereof and directing them to a common collection
    location.


CLS 473/461
TXT Racket or paddle swing analyzer or guide:

    Practice or training device under subclass 459 comprising either (a) a
    means, separate from a racket or paddle-type projecting implement, for
    detecting and displaying to a user at least one aspect of racket or paddle
    movement or position when it is swung in a manner similar to the manner in
    which it should ideally be swung in an attempt to hit a projectile during
    play of the game, or (b) a means to constrain a racket or paddle-type
    projecting implement, when it is swung in practice, to follow the same path
    it should ideally follow when it is swung during play of the game.


CLS 473/462
TXT Projectile target:

    Practice or training device under subclass 459 comprising a structure
    constituting or defining a point of aim for, and which is intended to
    indicate the correctness of aim of, a user in directing a game projectile
    thereat so that the user may improve or perfect his or her skill in
    projecting a projectile during play of the game.


CLS 473/463
TXT Practice racket or paddle:

    Practice or training device under subclass 459 comprising a handheld
    implement intended to be swung by a user in imitation of the act of
    swinging a racket or paddle-type projector during the attempt to hit a
    projectile during play of the game, which implement is specifically
    constructed and arranged or possesses a feature to enhance the practice or
    training function thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    437,    for a weight externally mounted by a user to a manually held and
    swung projector implement to take practice swings for warmup or exercise.


CLS 473/464
TXT Player worn or carried:

    Practice or training device under subclass 459 having means to enable the
    user thereof wear the device on, or carry the device by, at least a portion
    of his or her body during at least some duration of time while the user is
    practicing or training therewith.


CLS 473/465
TXT Having at least two different types of game elements used in same game:

    Playing field or court game under subclass 415 comprising at least two
    diverse types of game components (e.g., a playing area combined with a goal
    or target, with a field or court dividing means, with a projectile, with a
    projector, etc. or a projector combined with a projectile, etc.) which are
    adapted and intended to be used in a playing field or court game or sport
    which is played according to a single set of rules (e.g., played according
    to the rules of any one of the games of basketball, soccer, hockey,
    baseball, tennis, etc.).


CLS 473/466
TXT For game in which court or field is body of water (e.g., water polo, water
    volleyball, etc.):

    Playing field or court game under subclass 465 wherein the player(s) play
    the game or sport while being located in or on a playing area comprising a
    body of water.


CLS 473/467
TXT Having boundary detector (e.g., ball-out-of-bounds detector for tennis
    court, etc.):

    Playing field or court game under subclass 465 wherein one of the game
    components is or comprises means for detecting the location of a moving
    game component or a player relative to (a) a peripheral boundary of a
    playing field or court, or (b) a structure (e.g., a net, etc.) or a
    visually or otherwise sensory distinct means which breaks the playing area
    into compartments, subareas, or sections.

    (1)     Note. To be classified herein, the boundary detector means must be
    claimed in combination with at least one other game component.

    (2)     Note.  A target is not considered to be a peripheral boundary
    structure or a visually or otherwise sensory distinct means which breaks
    the playing field or court into compartments, subareas, or sections, even
    though such a target may be located in, on, or form a part thereof.
    Accordingly, see the appropriate target subclasses for a detector means for
    detecting the location of a game element or user relative to a target.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    570,    for a game projectile (e.g., a ball, etc.) which has means
    specifically intended to actuate a boundary detecting means.  Usually, but
    not necessarily so limited, the projectile is a tennis ball having an
    electrically conductive surface which, upon striking a boundary of a tennis
    court, completes an electrical circuit of the boundary detector so as to
    activate it.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 323 for a boundary detector,
    per se.


CLS 473/468
TXT For game in which play involves base running (e.g., baseball, cricket,
    etc.):

    Game components under subclass 465 adapted and intended for use in a game
    of the type in which at least one of the objectives of the game is for one
    or more players to successfully traverse the playing field or court, in
    accordance with the rules of the game, from one defined station on the
    field or court to at least a second defined station on the field or court
    in response to a first game action and before a specified second game
    action occurs (e.g., in response to the hitting or pitching of a game
    projectile, etc.).


CLS 473/469
TXT Having field or court dividing barrier with apertured goal or target
    therein or thereon:

    Playing field or court game under subclass 465 comprising a structure which
    divides the playing area into two or more compartments, subareas, or
    sections, which structure extends along substantially the entire (or at
    least most of the) width or length of the playing area, the dividing
    structure further either has an opening extending therethrough or includes
    another means which defines an opening, which opening is large enough to
    permit a game projectile to pass entirely therethrough from one
    compartment, subarea, or section into another; and wherein, during play of
    the game, the players purposefully attempt to pass the game projectile
    through the opening so as to achieve a game objective.


CLS 473/470
TXT For game using goal or target for projectile (e.g., football, rugby, etc.):

    Playing field or court game under subclass 465 wherein the game or sport is
    played on a playing area having either a defined structure associated
    therewith or having a compartment, subarea, or section located thereon over
    or within which the players do not normally move; which defined structure
    or compartment, etc. constitutes a point of aim for, and which is intended
    to indicate the correctness of aim of, a game projectile when propelled
    thereat by a player, so that whenever, in accordance with the rules defined
    for the game or sport, the projectile hits, enters, or passes through the
    structure or compartment, etc., the score of a player or team is
    incremented, or when a specified number of projectiles assigned to a player
    or team hits, enters, or passes through the structure or compartment, etc.,
    the game ends for at least that player or team.


CLS 473/471
TXT For game in which goal or target is peripherally located aperture or pocket
    (e.g., hockey, soccer, lacrosse, polo, etc.):

    Playing field or court game under subclass 470 wherein the game or sport is
    played on a playing area having at least one goal or target located on or
    in the immediate vicinity of the outer limit of the playing area and
    wherein the goal or target (a) comprises a structure having an opening
    defined therein, which opening is so dimensioned that it will allow a
    projected game projectile to enter and pass entirely therethrough, (b)
    comprises such a structure having an attached projectile-receiving
    receptacle which extends in a direction away from the opening so that a
    projected game projectile, after having passed through the plane of the
    opening, will come to rest within the receptacle, or (c) comprises a
    structure having an opening defined therein, which opening is so
    dimensioned that it will allow a projected game projectile to enter and
    come to rest within the opening.

    (1)     Note.  A portion of the playing surface itself may form a portion
    of the boundary of the opening as, for example, on a soccer field, the
    ground portion thereof which supports a soccer goal also serves to provide
    the lower boundary of the opening of the goal.


CLS 473/472
TXT For game in which peripheral goal or target is elevated and horizontally
    disposed (e.g., basketball, etc.):

    Playing field or court game under subclass 471 wherein the peripheral,
    apertured, or pocketed goal or target is located vertically above and
    spaced apart from the plane of the surface of the playing area; and wherein
    the goal or target is so disposed such that the plane of the projectile
    entrance opening thereof is generally parallel to the plane of the surface
    of the playing area.

    (1)     Note.  The vertical spacing between the apertured or pocketed goal
    or target and the plane of the playing surface must exceed the dimension of
    the game projectile.


CLS 473/473
TXT For game using field or court having dividing means thereon for separating
    opponents (e.g., a net used for volleyball, etc.):

    Playing field or court game under subclass 465 wherein the game or sport is
    played on a playing area having means adapted and intended to break the
    playing area into two or more compartments, subareas, or sections; which
    compartments, subareas, or sections function to separate opponents playing
    a competitive playing field or court game from one another.

    (1)     Note.  The field- or court-dividing means may comprise a net,
    fence, wall, rope, chain, curtain, or a line or zone marking located on or
    otherwise located within the confines of the playing area or located in the
    vicinity of the boundary of the playing area.

    (2)     Note.  Although the field- or court-dividing means is usually
    located within the confines of the playing area, it may also comprise means
    located at or in the vicinity of the outer boundary marking structure or
    enclosure.  However, this type of dividing means must still function to at
    least help break the playing area into two or more compartments, subareas,
    or sections.  An example of this type of field- or court- dividing means
    might be one or more markers spaced along the length of a field or court
    for assisting in defining real or imaginary lines across the width of the
    playing area of the field or court.


CLS 473/474
TXT For game also using projectors carried by players (e.g., tennis, badminton,
    etc.):

    Playing field or court game under subclass 473 in which the players use a
    player-worn or otherwise player-carried game implement which is manipulated
    by the players during play of the game or sport so as to propel the game
    projectile.

    (1)     Note.  A player-worn article of clothing or protective equipment
    (such as a glove or shoe) is not a projector unless it includes structure
    specifically adapted and intended to facilitate propelling a projectile
    (e.g., a glove having a flat area thereon which is specifically intended to
    be used to contact a projectile so as to propel it).


CLS 473/475
TXT Table tennis:

    Playing field or court game under subclass 474 wherein the game or sport
    uses a generally horizontally disposed, projectile bounce surface
    positioned centrally between two or more opposing players and elevated
    above a playing field or court divided into compartments and wherein the
    projectile bounce surface has a portion thereof located above each
    compartment.


CLS 473/476
TXT Goal or target structure for projectile; element thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 415 (a) comprising a defined structure
    constituting a point of aim for, and which is intended to indicate the
    correctness of aim of, a game projectile when propelled thereat by a
    player, so that whenever, in accordance with the rules defined for the game
    or sport, the projectile hits, enters, or passes through the structure, the
    score of a player or team is incremented, or when a specified number of
    projectiles assigned to a player or team hits, enters, or passes through
    the structure the game ends for at least that player or team, or (b)
    comprising a constituent part of the point of aim unless it is provided for
    elsewhere (e.g., the backboard part or the netting part of a basketball
    goal, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  A constituent part of a goal or target structure (e.g., the
    rebound or backboard portion or the net portion of a basketball goal,
    etc.), the supporting structure for the goal or target, or the supporting
    structure for the rebound or backboard portion of goal or target (e.g., the
    means supporting the backboard portion or the hoop portion of a basketball
    goal, etc.) is included herein unless it is provided for elsewhere.
    However, a support, per se, which is of general utility, even if disclosed
    as being capable of supporting a goal or target or a rebound surface
    therefor, is classifiable as indicated in the Search Class note below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, for a support structure per se, of general utility, even
    if disclosed as being capable of supporting a goal or target or a rebound
    surface therefor.


CLS 473/477
TXT For football or rugby (e.g., goal post, etc.):

    Goal or target structure under subclass 476
    (a) comprising a structure defined by a generally horizontal, elevated
    crossbar having two laterally spaced apart, generally vertical uprights
    extending therefrom and wherein the structure defines a target for the
    projectile in the games commonly known in the United States of America as
    football and rugby, or (b) comprising the supporting structure for such a
    target or an appurtenance thereof or therefor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 139+ for protective padding for a post,
    in general. If the padding is claimed, per se, even if solely disclosed as
    being used for a football goal post, then classification is in Class 267.
    That is, to be included in Class 473, the padding for a post must be
    claimed in combination with the football goal post.


CLS 473/478
TXT Apertured or pocketed goal or target (e.g., for hockey, soccer, polo,
    lacrosse, etc.):

    Goal or target structure under subclass 476 which (a) comprises a structure
    having an opening defined therein, which opening is so dimensioned that it
    will allow a projected game projectile to enter and pass entirely
    therethrough, (b) comprises such a structure having an attached
    projectile-receiving receptacle which extends in a direction away from the
    opening so that a projected game projectile, after having passed through
    the plane of the opening, will come to rest within the receptacle, or (c)
    comprises a structure having an opening defined therein, which opening is
    so dimensioned that it will allow a projected game projectile to enter and
    come to rest within the opening.

    (1)     Note.  A portion of the playing surface itself may form a portion
    of the boundary of the opening as, for example, on a soccer field, the
    ground portion thereof which supports a soccer goal also serves to provide
    the lower boundary of the opening of the goal.


CLS 473/479
TXT Goal or target is elevated and horizontally disposed (e.g., for basketball,
    etc.):

    Apertured or pocketed goal or target structure under subclass 478 wherein
    the goal or target is located, during play of the game or sport, vertically
    above and spaced apart from the plane of the surface of the playing area
    and is so disposed such that the plane of the projectile entrance opening
    thereof is generally parallel to the plane of the surface of the playing
    area.

    (1)     Note.  The vertical spacing between the apertured or pocketed goal
    or target and the plane of the playing surface must exceed the dimension of
    the game projectile.

    (2)     Note.  A constituent part of an apertured or pocketed goal or
    target structure (e.g., the rebound or backboard portion or the net portion
    of a basketball goal, etc.), the supporting structure for the apertured or
    pocketed goal or target, or the supporting structure for the rebound or
    backboard portion of an apertured or pocketed goal or target (e.g., the
    means supporting the backboard portion or the hoop portion of a basketball
    goal, etc.) is included herein unless it is provided for elsewhere.
    However, a support, per se, which is of general utility, even if disclosed
    as being capable of supporting a goal or target or a rebound surface
    therefor, is classifiable as indicated in the Search Class note below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, for a support structure per se, of general utility, even
    if disclosed as being capable of supporting a goal or target or a rebound
    surface therefor.


CLS 473/480
TXT With goal indicator:

    Apertured or pocketed goal or target structure under subclass 479 further
    comprising means associated therewith for detecting and indicating that a
    projectile has passed into or through the goal or target opening.

    (1)     Note.  The mere visual presence of a projectile residing in a
    pocket of a pocketed goal or target or the mere observance that a
    projectile has passed through a goal or target opening is not sufficient
    for inclusion herein.


CLS 473/481
TXT Backboard or support structure therefor:

    Apertured or pocketed goal or target structure under subclass 479 (a)
    comprising a generally vertically oriented rebound surface of determinate
    dimensions against which a projectile may be bounced to deflect the
    projectile through the entrance opening of the elevated, horizontally
    disposed goal or target, which rebound surface being further intended to
    have such apertured or pocketed goal or target attached or mounted adjacent
    thereto or (b) comprising a structure for mounting or supporting such
    rebound surface unless elsewhere provided for.

    (1)     Note. A backboard or the support structure therefor which is
    claimed in combination with a hoop structure, and in which combination such
    backboard or the support structure therefor is recited in name only will be
    found as indicated in the Search note below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    485+,   for a hoop type of goal or for the net, pocket, or support
    structure therefor in which a backboard or the support structure therefor
    may be recited in name only.


CLS 473/482
TXT Suspended:

    Backboard or support structure therefor under subclass 481 wherein the
    mounting or supporting structure is adapted to hang or otherwise support
    the backboard from above.


CLS 473/483
TXT With height adjustment feature:

    Backboard or support structure therefor under subclass 481 wherein the
    mounting or supporting structure includes means to enable the goal or
    target to be located in any one of a number of positions which are
    vertically and variably spaced from the plane of the playing area.


CLS 473/484
TXT Having parallelogram linkage:

    Backboard or support structure therefor under subclass 483 wherein the
    height adjustment mechanism comprises at least two vertically spaced-apart
    links, each link being pivoted about a horizontal axis at one end to a
    support member and at the other end to a backboard.


CLS 473/485
TXT Hoop or the net, pocket, or support structure therefor:

    Apertured or pocketed goal or target structure under subclass 479 relating
    to (a) the means defining the entrance opening of the goal or target
    structure, (b) a means for suspending a net, receptacle, screen, curtain,
    shield, or the like from the means defining the entrance opening, (c) a
    net, receptacle, screen, curtain, shield, or the like adapted to be
    suspended from the means defining the entrance opening for slowing the
    descent of, constraining the movement of, or capturing a projectile which
    has passed through the means defining the entrance opening, or (d) a means
    for mounting or attaching the means defining the entrance opening to a
    backboard or to a support unless elsewhere provided for.


CLS 473/486
TXT Breakaway hoop:

    Goal or target hoop structure under subclass 485 comprising means to
    facilitate deflection of the hoop upon the application thereto of a force
    sufficient to inflict injury to a player or damage to the hoop or to the
    backboard or mounting or support structure to which the hoop is attached or
    mounted.


CLS 473/487
TXT Having means for mounting over edge of support:

    Hoop support structure under subclass 485 comprising means for mounting the
    hoop over the top edge of a relatively thin, somewhat planar structure
    which is oriented in an upright position (e.g., a door, wall, etc.).


CLS 473/488
TXT Quick mount hoop:

    Goal or target hoop structure under subclass 485 comprising means to
    facilitate the rapid mounting, removal, or interchange of a hoop or of a
    hoop to and from a vertically oriented rebound surface (i.e., a backboard)
    or other hoop support structure without the need of tools.

    (1)     Note.  Quick mount hoops generally do not use permanent or
    semipermanent fasteners such as nails, screws, bolts, etc., but rather rely
    upon an interlocking or frictional fit between a component on the hoop and
    a component on the backboard or other hoop support.  They may have an
    ancillary locking component such as a pin, detent, or even a bolt and nut
    to lock the hoop and backboard or other support components together to
    prevent accidental separation, and a tool may be provided to facilitate
    manipulation of the hoop or locking component from a remote location (e.g.,
    to extend the reach of a person mounting, removing, or interchanging a hoop
    beyond such person's unaided reach), but such a tool must not be required
    to separate or join the components.


CLS 473/489
TXT Removable net-mounting subassembly:

    Subject matter under subclass 485 relating to a structure adapted and
    intended to rest on a hoop for suspending a net, receptacle, screen,
    curtain, shield, or the like from the hoop.


CLS 473/490
TXT Means for dividing field or court into compartments; element thereof or
    accessory therefor (e.g., a net, marking strip, marked line, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 415 comprising means adapted and intended to
    break the playing area into two or more compartments, subareas, or sections
    or comprising a component part thereof or an ancillary means therefor
    unless elsewhere provided for.

    (1)     Note.  The field- or court-dividing means may comprise a net,
    fence, wall, rope, chain, curtain, or a line or zone marking located on or
    otherwise located within the confines of the playing area or located in the
    vicinity of the boundary of the playing area.

    (2)     Note. Although the field- or court-
    dividing means is usually located within the confines of the playing area,
    it may also comprise means located at or in the vicinity of the outer
    boundary marking structure or enclosure.  However, this type of dividing
    means must still function to at least help break the playing area into two
    or more compartments, subareas, or sections.  An example of this type of
    field or court dividing means might be one or more markers spaced along the
    length of a field or court for assisting in defining real or imaginary
    lines across the width of the playing area of the field or court.  For
    example, the numerical yardline markers which are spaced every ten yards
    along the length of the playing field used in the play of an American
    football game, in conjunction with the lines marked across the width of the
    field, function to assist in the location of the ball or a player on the
    field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    465+,   for a playing field or court game having at least two or more
    different types of game components used in the same game and in which the
    game or sport is played on a playing area having a means for dividing the
    playing area into two or more compartments, subareas, or sections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, for a stock material
    product in the form of a single or plural layer web or sheet, particularly
    subclasses 245+ and 411.1+ for a plural layer web product not provided for
    elsewhere.


CLS 473/491
TXT Net attachable to game table:

    Subject matter under subclass 490 wherein the field or court dividing means
    is a flexible expanse of reticulated or meshlike material or a sheet of
    flexible material, and wherein the dividing means includes means to secure
    it to, and between the ends of, an elevated, generally horizontally
    disposed surface of a table used in playing a game.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    475,    for the subject matter of this subclass (491) combined with a table
    used in playing a playing field or court game.


CLS 473/492
TXT Net post:

    Subject matter under subclass 490 comprising a generally elongated
    structure upstanding from a playing field or court for supporting a
    dividing means in the form of a flexible expanse of reticulated or meshlike
    material, or a sheet of flexible material in position over a playing
    surface.


CLS 473/493
TXT With net-tightening means:

    Subject matter under subclass 492 including a mechanical apparatus for
    applying a longitudinal tensioning force directly to a net or to a cable,
    wire, rope, or like element to which a net is attached.

    (1)     Note.  A user graspable element (e.g., a handle, etc.) attached to
    a net, cable, etc. for improving the user's grip on the net, cable, etc.
    while he or she is applying a manual pulling force on the net, cable, etc.,
    is not considered to be a mechanical apparatus unless it also provides some
    mechanical advantage or force-multiplying effect (e.g., a lever, etc.).

    (2)     Note.  A longitudinal tensioning force is a force generally
    parallel to the surface of the playing field or court on or over which the
    net is mounted.


CLS 473/494
TXT Net, with net, or for net:

    Subject matter under subclass 490 (a) wherein the field or court dividing
    means is a flexible expanse of reticulated or meshlike material or a sheet
    of flexible material, (b) comprises a structure or means combined such
    material, or (c) comprises a structure or means specifically adapted and
    intended to be used for or with such material.


CLS 473/495
TXT Net center stay:

    Subject matter under subclass 494 comprising means for affixing a central
    portion of a net to the playing surface of the field or court.


CLS 473/496
TXT Table-tennis table:

    Subject matter under subclass 415 comprising
    a generally horizontally disposed projectile bounce surface intended to be
    positioned centrally between two or more players and elevated above a
    playing field or court which is divided into compartments, subareas, or
    sections and wherein the projectile bounce surface has a portion thereof
    positioned above each compartment, subarea, or section.


CLS 473/497
TXT Pitching rubber or mound:

    Subject matter under subclass 415 comprising either (a) an elongated,
    generally rectangular block of firm resilient material mounted or intended
    to be mounted in or on the ground at a pitching location on a baseball
    playing field, or (b) means for forming a raised area at a pitching
    location on an otherwise generally level baseball playing field so as to
    simulate the mound of earth normally provided at that location on an
    earthen baseball playing field.


CLS 473/498
TXT Cricket wicket:

    Subject matter under subclass 415 comprising a set of stumps topped by two
    crosspieces at which the ball is bowled in the game commonly known as
    cricket or comprising any part thereof.


CLS 473/499
TXT Base for game in which play involves base running (e.g., for baseball,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 415 comprising a body adapted and intended to
    be positioned on the surface of a playing field or court to define a
    station, from which a player starts or attempts to reach while traversing
    the playing field in response to a first game action and before a specified
    second game action occurs (e.g., in response to the hitting or pitching of
    the game projectile, etc.).


CLS 473/500
TXT With indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 499 wherein the base includes means for
    indicating contact with the base by a portion of the body of a base runner
    or fielder.


CLS 473/501
TXT Breakaway:

    Subject matter under subclass 499 comprising means for normally anchoring
    the base fixedly to the playing field, which anchoring means includes means
    to permit the base to pivot, rotate, or slide relative to, or separate
    from, the anchoring means in response to forces exerted against the base
    for mitigating potential damage to the base or injury to a player.

    (1)     Note.  The main body of the base as a whole must move relative to
    the anchoring means. A base main body which is constructed of a yieldable
    material so as to deform in response to forces exerted against it but which
    does not move as a whole relative to the anchoring means will be found in
    the outdent subclass as indicated in the Search note below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    499,    for a base main body which is constructed of a yieldable material
    so as to deform in response to forces exerted against it but which does not
    move as a whole relative to the anchoring means.


CLS 473/502
TXT Flag belt (e.g., for use in football game without tackling, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 415 comprising a belt for encircling a player
    (usually a player playing a game similar to the game commonly known as
    football in the U.S.A.) and one or more tabs secured to the belt, which
    tab(s) is intended to be grabbed by an opposing player to cause separation
    of the grabbed tab from the belt or separation of the belt from the player.


CLS 473/503
TXT Projectile catcher other than combined projector-catcher device:

    Subject matter under subclass 415 comprising means other than an article of
    apparel (e.g., a baseball glove, etc.) which is held by or carried on the
    body of a player only for catching a game projectile moving through the air
    during play of a playing field or court game.

    (1)     Note.  A player-held device which is used to both catch an aerial
    projectile moving through the air and project the projectile back into the
    air (i.e., a combined projector-catcher device) is specifically excluded
    from this subclass even if it (e.g., a lacrosse stick, etc.) is intended to
    be used to play a playing field or court game.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    505+,   for a combined projector-catcher implement which is held and so
    manipulated by a player to both catch an aerial projectile moving through
    the air and project the projectile back into the air.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, for a body guard or protector, in general, particularly
    subclass 19 for a baseball glove.

    273,    Amusement Devices: Games, subclass 412 for a user manipulated
    device which is used solely for the purpose of catching a projectile moving
    through the air.


CLS 473/504
TXT Cover for playing field or court (e.g., for baseball field, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 415 comprising a removable surface covering
    having one or more flexible webs, which covering is intended, according to
    the size, material, and quality of the same, to cover, in substantially
    immediate overlying relationship, a substantial portion of a playing field
    or court so as to protect the covered portion from the elements of weather
    or preserve the quality of the covered portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for a dust cover for protectively covering the playing surface of a
    billiard or pool table or gameboard when it is not in use to play a game
    thereon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclass 115 for a cover used on a
    portable shelter.

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, subclasses 154+ for a
    protective cover, in general, made of flaccid material.


CLS 473/505
TXT PLAYER HELD DEVICE FOR BOTH PROJECTING AND CATCHING AERIAL PROJECTILE; PART
    THEREOF OR ACCESSORY THEREFOR (I.E., COMBINED PROJECTOR-CATCHER DEVICE):

    Subject matter under the class definition (a) comprising a handheld or
    body-mounted implement for throwing, impelling, launching, or otherwise
    projecting a projectile into or through the air and wherein the implement
    is either (1) also used to capture or trap a projectile already moving
    through the air, or (2) includes an additional means to capture or trap a
    projectile already moving through the air; (b) comprising a constituent
    part of such an implement; or (c) comprising an ancillary means adapted and
    intended to be used with or for such implement not elsewhere provided for.

    (1)     Note.  The terms ``catch," ``capture," and "trap" as used herein
    mean that the primary function of the projector-catcher implement is to be
    so manipulated by the user to stop or intercept a game projectile during
    its flight through the air and that the implement carries and holds the
    intercepted projectile therein or thereon so that it may again be thrown,
    impelled, launched, or otherwise projected into the air from the implement
    upon manipulation thereof by the user. However, the implement may include
    means so that it may, at times, be also used to scoop a projectile off the
    ground so as to project it into the air provided that the implement also
    has means to carry or hold the projectile therein or thereon prior to
    projection thereof.

    (2)     Note.  A ``catcher" as defined herein is distinguished from a
    ''target" in that a catcher is manipulated by the user in an effort to
    catch or intercept and trap the projectile while a target is merely an
    aiming point for a projectile projected thereat.  Any movement of a target
    is intended to make the target more difficult to be struck by a projectile
    aimed and projected thereat.

    (3)     Note.  The term ``catching" embraces catchers in the form of
    pocket-type receptacles (with or without outlet passages), open-bottomed
    pockets which trap and retain a projectile therein (i.e., apertured
    catchers which have apertures smaller than the projectile), and rodlike or
    hooked appendages.

    (4)     Note. These combined projector-catcher implements may be used in a
    number of ways. For example, an impaling type of projector-catcher
    implement consisting merely of a rodlike member having a gripping portion
    may be used by (a) a user to launch a projectile removably impaled upon the
    rodlike member into the air and subsequently manipulated to catch (i.e.,
    impale) the launched projectile upon the same rodlike member, (b) a user
    having two such rodlike members, one in each hand, and the projectile is
    launched by the user from the rodlike member in one hand to be caught by
    the rodlike member in the other hand, or (c) two or more users therefor,
    each having one such rodlike member and the projectile is launched into the
    air from the rodlike member held by one user to be caught by (i.e., impaled
    upon) the rodlike member held by another user.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    503,    for a means, other than an article of apparel (e.g., a baseball
    glove, etc.), adapted to be held or carried by a player of a playing field
    or court game for the sole purpose of catching a game projectile during
    play of the game.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, subclass 5 for a projecting
    implement, per se (e.g., a sling, etc.) which is held in the hand of a
    person and caused to throw a missile into or through the air by a
    centrifugal or swinging movement of the person's arm.

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclass 412 for a user manipulated
    device, other than an article of apparel (e.g., a baseball glove, etc.),
    which is used solely for the purpose of catching a game projectile moving
    through the air.


CLS 473/506
TXT With tethered projectile:

    Subject matter under subclass 505 wherein the projector-catcher implement
    has one end of an elongated member attached thereto which, in turn, has an
    aerial projectile attached to the other end thereof so that the projectile
    is constrained for movement within the extent of the elongated member
    whenever it is thrown, impelled, launched, or otherwise projected into the
    air from the implement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclass 329 for a handheld manipulating
    implement having an aerial projectile tethered thereto and having an
    aperture formed therein so that the projectile is intended to be passed
    entirely through the aperture upon manipulation of the implement and
    subclass 330 for a handheld manipulating implement having an aerial
    projectile tethered thereto, which implement is intended to merely strike
    the projectile so as to project it into the air or the implement is
    intended to be struck by the aerially moving projectile upon manipulation
    of the implement. The latter implements are usually a paddle member having
    a handle extending therefrom and having a resilient projectile tethered
    thereto.


CLS 473/507
TXT Having pocketed catcher:

    Subject matter under subclass 506 wherein the catcher part of the implement
    is either (a) in the form of a closed-bottom receptacle which is intended
    to stop and retain the projectile therein, or (b) in the form of a through
    aperture which is somewhat smaller in dimension than the projectile so as
    to stop, trap, and retain the projectile therein.


CLS 473/508
TXT Having elastic tether:

    Subject matter under subclass 507 wherein the tether is a resilient
    flexible member or is secured to a resilient means (e.g., a spring-powered
    rewinding mechanism, etc.) attached to the implement.


CLS 473/509
TXT Having projectile conducting means between separate entrance and exit
    (e.g., continuous orbit, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 505 wherein the projector part and the
    catcher part of the implement are spaced apart from one another but are
    interconnected by a passageway, conduit, trackway, or surface formed in the
    implement for conducting the projectile, when caught, from the catcher part
    to the projector part while remaining with the implement.


CLS 473/510
TXT Both projector and catcher are pocketed:

    Subject matter under subclass 505 wherein either (a) the projector part is
    also used as the catcher part and is in the form of either a closed-bottom
    receptacle or an apertured receptacle, the aperture of the apertured
    receptacle having a dimension somewhat smaller than the projectile, whereby
    the receptacle, in performing its catching function, is intended to stop,
    trap, and retain the projectile therein, or (b) the projector part and the
    catcher part are separate portions of the implement and are both in the
    form of a closed-bottom receptacle, an apertured receptacle, or a
    combination of both a closed-bottom receptacle and an apertured receptacle,
    the aperture of the apertured receptacle having a dimension somewhat
    smaller than the projectile, whereby the catcher part of the implement, in
    performing its catching function, is intended to stop, trap, and retain the
    projectile therein.


CLS 473/511
TXT With mechanical projection:

    Subject matter under subclass 510 wherein the projector part comprises or
    includes a mechanically operated means associated with the receptacle for
    achieving or assisting the impelling or launching of a projectile into the
    air.

    (1)     Note.  Also included in this subclass are projector-catcher
    implements formed from a flexible sheet means which is flexed by the user
    to achieve or assist the propelling or launching of a projectile resting on
    the sheet means. The flexible sheet means either has a closed-bottom
    receptacle formed therein or located thereon so as to form a closed-bottom
    receptacle.  The flexing of the sheet means by the user (e.g., the pulling
    upon the ends of the sheet means so as to tension or stretch it) causes a
    projectile resting thereon to be propelled or launched into the air and,
    therefore, constitutes a mechanically operated means to propel or launch a
    projectile.


CLS 473/512
TXT Pocket-to-pocket type:

    Subject matter under subclass 510 wherein the receptacle of the projector
    part and the receptacle of the catcher part are separate portions of the
    implement so that the projectile is launched into the air from the
    projector-part receptacle and caught by the catcher-part receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  The catcher part of the implement may comprise plural
    receptacles.


CLS 473/513
TXT Having pocket with laterally facing opening (e.g., lacrosse stick, jai alai
    cesta, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 510 wherein the projector part and the
    catcher part are combined into a single closed-bottom receptacle which is
    used both to catch a projectile moving through the air and to propel or
    launch the projectile back into the air and wherein the implement includes
    an elongated handle member attached to and extending outwardly from the
    closed bottom receptacle such that the open portion of the receptacle faces
    in a direction generally perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the
    handle member, whereby the implement as a whole has a general configuration
    somewhat similar to a spoon-shaped utensil.

    (1)     Note.  The closed-bottom receptacle which constitutes both the
    projector and catcher parts of the implement may be quite large relative to
    the projectile and this receptacle may itself have a secondary
    closed-bottom receptacle formed therein for holding and retaining a
    projectile at rest therein.  Many lacrosse sticks are exemplary of this
    type of implement.  When the implement is manipulated to project a
    projectile, a projectile resting in the secondary receptacle is moved out
    into the main receptacle and projected therefrom, mainly by centrifugal
    forces.  When the implement is manipulated to catch a projectile moving
    through the air, the implement is manipulated so that the bottom of the
    main receptacle intercepts (thereby stopping) the flight of the projectile,
    whereupon the projectile drops by gravity into the secondary holding
    receptacle so that it may again be projected.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, subclass 5 for a projecting
    implement, per se (e.g., a sling, etc.), which is held in the hand of a
    person and caused to throw a missile into or through the air by a
    centrifugal or swinging movement of the person's arm.


CLS 473/514
TXT Having impaling, hooking, or ensnaring type catcher:

    Subject matter under subclass 505 wherein the projector-catcher implement
    comprises or includes a protrusion, rod, bar, ring, hook, or the like means
    for removably receiving thereupon an aerially moving projectile having
    cooperating complementary means (e.g., the projectile having an aperture
    therein for mating with the protrusion, comprising or having a hook member
    for being caught upon the bar, rod, hook, or ring, or comprising two parts
    interconnected by a flexible member or tether so that it may drape itself
    over the bar or rod, etc.) adapting it to be impaled upon the protrusion or
    hooked upon, draped over, or otherwise ensnared by the rod, bar, ring,
    hook, or the like means upon manipulation of the implement by the user; and
    wherein the protrusion, rod, bar, ring, hook, or the like means is so
    configured and adapted to enable the impaled, hooked, draped, or otherwise
    ensnared projectile to be reprojected back into the air upon manipulation
    of the implement by the user.


CLS 473/515
TXT Having pocketed catcher connected to but spaced apart from projector:

    Subject matter under subclass 505 wherein the projector part and the
    catcher part are disposed at different locations upon the implement and
    wherein the catcher part is either (a) in the form of a closed-bottom
    receptacle which is intended to stop and retain the projectile therein or
    (b) in the form of an apertured receptacle comprising a through-aperture
    dimensioned somewhat smaller than the projectile so that the projectile is
    intended to be stopped and retained within the aperture of the receptacle.


CLS 473/516
TXT PLAYER HELD AND POWERED, NONMECHANICAL PROJECTOR, PER SE, FOR PROJECTING
    AERIAL PROJECTILE BY STRIKING; PART THEREOF OR ACCESSORY THEREFOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition (a) comprising an implement, per
    se, which is held and used by, or worn on the body of and used by, a player
    during play of a game or sport in which a game projectile is intended to
    move through the air during play of such game or sport, which implement is
    intended to enable the player to impart an impact upon the projectile so as
    to thereby propel, impel, launch or otherwise project the projectile into
    the air, through the air, or already moving through the air such that
    substantially all of the force used to impact the projectile is supplied by
    the player; (b) comprising a constituent part of such a player held or worn
    impact implement; or (c) comprising an ancillary means adapted and intended
    to be used with or for such player held or worn impact implement not
    elsewhere provided for.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44+,    for a projecting implement or apparatus (e.g., a billiard or pool
    cue, etc.) used in playing the surface projectile game known as billiards
    or pool.

    107,    for a mechanically operated projecting device used in playing the
    surface projectile game known as bowling.

    118+,   for a bowling pin, per se, used as a target in playing the game of
    bowling.

    131,    for a nonswingable implement or device used to project a ball in
    playing the projectile game known as golf.

    219+,   for a practice swingable implement used by a player to improve or
    perfect his or her skill in playing the game of golf.

    282+,   for a swingable implement (i.e., a golf club) used to project a
    projectile (i.e., a golf ball) in playing the game of golf.

    412,    for a player-carried, nonmechanical projector (e.g., a croquet
    mallet, etc.) used in playing the surface projectile game known as croquet.

    415+,   for a practice swingable implement per se, or for a swingable
    implement or other device for projecting a projectile which is combined
    with at least one other game component, which implement or device is used
    in playing or practicing for a playing field or court game such as
    baseball, basketball, football, soccer, tennis, racquetball, lacrosse,
    etc.).

    505+,   for a player held or worn implement (e.g., a lacrosse stick, jai
    alai cesta, etc.) adapted both to project a projectile into the air and to
    catch a projectile already moving through the air.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, for an implement, per se, or a
    mechanically operated apparatus, per se, adapted to impel or throw a
    projectile into or through the air in which the propelling agent is
    nonexplosive, particularly subclass 5 for a device adapted to be held in
    the hand of a person and caused to throw a missile by a centrifugal or
    swinging movement of the person's arm (e.g., a sling, etc.), and subclass
    79 for a device having a movable member which is impacted by a user to be
    moved into forcible contact with a missile to thereby transmit the
    user-provided impact force to the missile in order to propel it into or
    through the air.

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, subclasses 154+ for a
    protective cover made of flaccid material, especially subclass 163 for a
    flaccid protective cover for a racquet (e.g., a tennis racquet, etc.).

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 315.1+ for a container
    for, or a package for containing, a sport implement, exercise device, or
    game.

    273,    Amusement Devices: Games, subclasses 108+ for a surface projectile
    game in which a projectile travels at all times over the playing surface
    during play of the game, which projectile is projected over the playing
    surface either by a player using a player manipulated implement in which
    the player supplies the projecting force or by a mechanically powered
    projecting device (see particularly subclasses 119+ thereunder for a
    mechanically powered projector combined with and attached to the playing
    surface and subclass 129 thereunder for a projecting implement per se or
    for a mechanically operated projector per se); and subclasses 317+ for a
    projecting device or implement combined with at least one other game
    component which is used in an aerial projectile game (see particularly
    subclass 405 thereunder for a mechanical projector combined with a target).


CLS 473/517
TXT Having projectile retrieving means:

    Subject matter under subclass 516 wherein the projecting implement includes
    means for temporarily engaging and holding a projectile thereto for the
    purpose of picking a projectile up from a playing surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    286,    for a golf club or auxiliary device combined with a ball retriever.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 19.2 for a ball
    retriever, per se.


CLS 473/518
TXT Body attachable:

    Subject matter under subclass 516 wherein the projecting implement has
    means for enabling securement to a body part of a player so that it, once
    secured, will remain secured to the player in a usable position without
    continued effort by the player.


CLS 473/519
TXT With user shiftable, adjustable, or interchangeable weight for use during
    play or with freely shiftable mass for increasing impact force:

    Subject matter under subclass 516 (a) comprising at least one weight
    element which is attached, or is intended to be attached, to the projecting
    implement during play, which weight element is further adapted and intended
    to be either (1) moved or released for movement to a different location on
    the implement by a user of the implement, either before or during use of
    the implement, so as to change the overall balance of the implement during
    use thereof, or (2) added to or substituted for another similar weight
    element by a user of the implement, either before or during use of the
    implement, so as to change the overall weight or balance of the implement
    during use thereof, or (b) comprising a body of material which is movable
    from one location on or in the implement to a second location on or in the
    implement as the implement is moved by a user to strike a projectile so
    that the implement will impart a greater impetus to the projectile when it
    is struck.


CLS 473/520
TXT With sound-deadening, vibration-damping, or shock-absorbing feature other
    than projectile- or hand-contact surface or with rebound reducing feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 516 wherein the projecting implement (a)
    comprises means, other than the outermost surface or layer of the part of
    the implement which is intended either to make contact with a projectile
    when it is struck (e.g., a rubber layer on the striking surface of a table
    tennis paddle, etc.) or to be grasped by a user thereof (e.g., a rubber
    grip strip wound around a tennis racket handle, etc.), specified as
    absorbing or attenuating vibrations of any frequency induced in the
    implement when it strikes a projectile or for preventing or reducing
    auditory or direct transmittal of such vibrations to the body of the user,
    or (b) comprises means intended to lessen or offset the force tending to
    cause the implement to bounce off a projectile when the implement and
    projectile contact each other.

    (1)     Note. A racket or paddle (whose construction as a whole is
    disclosed as (a) absorbing, attenuating, or blocking the transmission of
    vibrations than; (b) having fewer, lesser, lower, etc., vibrations than; or
    (c) reducing rebound over another racket or paddle having some other
    overall construction) is not classifiable here unless a clearly identified
    component(s) or feature(s) (whose disclosed function is to absorb,
    attenuate, or block the transmission of vibrations or to reduce rebound) is
    present.


CLS 473/521
TXT For racket or paddle:

    Subject matter under subclass 520 wherein the sound deadening, vibration
    damping, shock absorbing, or rebound reducing feature is adapted and
    intended to be in or with a projecting implement commonly known as a racket
    or paddle, which racket or paddle comprises a thin, broad, generally flat,
    projectile- striking member having a maximum length and width which are
    more or less equal (e.g., oval-shaped, etc.) and having a length and width
    which are each many times greater than the thickness of the member and
    wherein the striking member further (a) comprises a substantially rigid,
    generally flat, platelike element or is formed from a flexible sheet
    secured across a surrounding peripheral supporting frame (i.e., a paddle),
    or (b) is composed of a plurality of spaced apart, elongated strings,
    stringlike elements, or their equivalent stretched in an intersecting,
    parallel, radial, or concentric arrangement across a surrounding peripheral
    supporting frame to form a resilient web within the frame periphery (i.e.,
    a racket).

    (1)     Note. See the Notes appended to subclass 524 below for a further
    elaboration of the type of projectile-striking implement that is considered
    to be a racket or paddle.


CLS 473/522
TXT Contacts string:

    Subject matter under subclass 521 wherein the racket or paddle has a
    projectile-striking surface composed of a plurality of spaced apart,
    elongated strings, stringlike elements, or their equivalent stretched in an
    intersecting, parallel, radial, or concentric arrangement across a
    surrounding peripheral supporting frame to form a resilient web within the
    frame periphery and wherein the actual sound deadening, vibration damping,
    shock absorbing, or rebound reducing element itself touches at least one
    string, etc., of the strung striking surface.


CLS 473/523
TXT In, under, or contacting grip:

    Subject matter under subclass 521 wherein the racket or paddle includes a
    means adapted and intended to enable a user to grasp and thereby hold the
    racket or paddle in his or her hand during its use in playing a game and
    wherein the actual sound-deadening, vibration-damping, shock-absorbing, or
    rebound-reducing element itself touches, is located within, or is located
    beneath the graspable means.


CLS 473/524
TXT Racket or paddle; accessory therefor (e.g., a tennis racket, tennis racket
    press, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 516 either (a) wherein the projecting
    implement comprises a thin, broad, generally flat, projectile-striking
    member having a maximum length and width which are more or less equal
    (e.g., oval-shaped, etc.) and having a length and width which are each many
    times greater than the thickness of the member, and wherein the striking
    member further (1) comprises a substantially rigid, generally flat,
    platelike element or is formed from a flexible sheet secured across a
    surrounding peripheral supporting frame (i.e., a paddle), or (2) is
    composed of a plurality of spaced apart, elongated strings, stringlike
    elements, or their equivalent stretched in an intersecting, parallel,
    radial, or concentric arrangement across a surrounding peripheral
    supporting frame to form a resilient web within the frame periphery (i.e.,
    a racket), or (b) comprises an ancillary means adapted and intended to be
    used with or for such projecting implement not elsewhere provided for.



    (1)     Note. Paddles and rackets typically have a shaft or other member
    extending from the edge of the striking member to provide a means to enable
    a user to grip the implement and to extend the reach of the user.  Where
    such a shaft or other member is present and the length thereof exceeds
    about five times the maximum length or width dimension of the striking
    member, the implement is to be considered to be a mallet or club
    (classifiable below) provided that it also fits the definition of a mallet
    or club as defined in the respective subclasses 558 or 559 below.

    (2)     Note.  A flexible sheet may either be solid or be woven, knitted,
    etc., from one or more strands of material where the adjacent strands (or
    runs of the same strand) touch or have a gap therebetween no greater than
    the width of a strand.  If the gap exceeds the width of a strand, the
    implement is to be considered to be a strung-surface racket rather than a
    flexible-sheet paddle.


CLS 473/525
TXT Having striking faces attached to the ends of intermediate handle:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 wherein the racket or paddle comprises at
    least two distinct and spaced-apart striking members connected to each
    other by a hand-gripping means extending therebetween, a different end of
    the handgrip means being secured to each striking member.


CLS 473/526
TXT Having handle at an angle to, offset from, or nonradially oriented relative
    to plane of striking member:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 wherein the racket or paddle has,
    attached to the striking member, a means having a longitudinal axis and
    having at least a portion thereof adapted and intended to be grasped by a
    user during use of the racket or paddle and wherein the longitudinal axis
    of the graspable means (a) intersects the plane within which the striking
    member lies (i.e., at an angle to), (b) lies in a plane parallel to and
    spaced outside of the region located between, and spaced apart from, the
    planes defined by the broad opposed surfaces of the striking member (i.e.,
    offset from), or (c) lies on or between the planes defined by the broad
    opposed surfaces of the striking member and does not intersect either the
    center of geometry or the center of gravity of the striking member.

    (1)     Note.  A racket or paddle with a curved handle is considered to
    meet the definition above if a straight line extending between the ends of
    the handle meets any of the tests in parts (a), (b), or (c) above.


CLS 473/527
TXT Paddle:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 wherein the striking member (a) comprises
    a substantially rigid, generally flat, platelike element or (b) is formed
    from a flexible sheet secured across a surrounding peripheral supporting
    frame (i.e., a paddle).

    (1)     Note.  A flexible sheet may either be solid or be woven, knitted,
    etc. from one or more strands of material where the adjacent strands (or
    runs of the same strand) touch or have a gap therebetween no greater than
    the width of a strand.  If the gap exceeds the width of a strand, the
    implement is to be considered to be strung-surface racket rather than a
    flexible-sheet paddle.


CLS 473/528
TXT Projectile striking surface is flexible sheet secured to peripheral frame:

    Subject matter under subclass 527 wherein the striking surface of the
    striking member comprises a pliable or resilient membrane or expanse of
    material spanning the opening defined by a generally closed perimeter wall
    of the surrounding peripheral supporting frame and wherein the membrane or
    expanse of material is secured at or in the vicinity of its edge to or
    adjacent the perimeter wall of the supporting frame.

    (1)     Note.  A flexible sheet may either be solid or be woven, knitted,
    etc., from one or more strands of material where the adjacent strands (or
    runs of the same strand) touch or have a gap therebetween no greater than
    the width of a strand.  If the gap exceeds the width of a strand, the
    implement is to be considered to be strung-surface racket rather than a
    flexible-sheet paddle.


CLS 473/529
TXT Having resilient blade facing:

    Subject matter under subclass 527 wherein the striking member comprises
    plural layers and wherein the outermost layer (or layers) comprises a
    surface covering of resilient material.


CLS 473/530
TXT Blade having means to enhance friction upon impacted projectile (e.g., to
    enhance English upon projectile, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 527 wherein the projectile contact surface of
    the striking member includes means to increase the grip of the surface on
    the projectile while in contact therewith.


CLS 473/531
TXT Folding or detachable shaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 wherein the striking member includes a
    shaft and a means for either (a) releasably attaching the shaft to the
    striking member, or (b) permitting the shaft to pivot relative to the
    striking member from a position extending outwardly from the edge of the
    striking member to a position generally overlying or surrounding the
    striking member whereby the releasably attaching or pivoting means enables
    the implement to be more compactly stored.


CLS 473/532
TXT Having replaceable string frame:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 wherein the striking member comprises a
    strung surface formed by a plurality of spaced apart, elongated strings,
    stringlike elements, or their equivalent stretched in an intersecting
    arrangement across a surrounding peripheral subframe and wherein the
    strings, stringlike elements, or their equivalent and the subframe are
    releasably mounted as a unit to a surrounding or coterminous main
    supporting frame.


CLS 473/533
TXT Double strung (i.e., having striking faces formed from two spaced-apart,
    planar sets of strings):

    Subject matter under subclass 524 wherein the striking member is formed
    from two generally coextensive strung surfaces supported in a spaced-apart
    relationship from each other by the surrounding peripheral supporting frame.


CLS 473/534
TXT With adjustable string-tensioning means:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 comprising a means combined with a
    racket, either by being incorporated in the racket or attached to the
    racket while it is being used during play, which means is adapted to
    variably apply a tensile force to one or more strings of the racket for the
    purpose of changing the tautness in the one or more strings.

    (1)     Note. A means for changing the tension of the one or more strings
    may include a means for expanding or contracting the surrounding peripheral
    supporting frame of the racket.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    556     and 557, for a stringing or string stretching device, either per se
    or combined with a racket, which device is adapted to be used with a racket
    while it is being strung or restrung, such device not being part of, or
    combined with, a racket while it is being used during play of a game.


CLS 473/535
TXT Fiber reinforced plastic frame:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 wherein the frame is formed from a
    composite material comprising a stranded, filamentary, or fibrous web of
    reinforcing material disposed in a hardened matrix of formable organic
    synthetic or processed material.


CLS 473/536
TXT Plural fiber compositions:

    Subject matter under subclass 535 wherein the composite material includes
    reinforcing fibers of different chemical makeup.


CLS 473/537
TXT Having dimensional characteristic or other parameter specified by a number,
    numeric variable, or mathematical formula (e.g., location of center of
    gravity, elastic modulus of a string, weight of racket, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 524 wherein any one of the set of physical
    properties whose values determine the characteristics or behavior of a
    racket, a part thereof, or a combination of parts thereof is designated (a)
    by a numeral or combination of numerals, (b) by a symbol representing a
    number, or (c) by a numerical or symbolic mathematical statement or
    expression.

    (1)     Note.  A number, numeric variable, or numeric formula which
    designates only the number of rackets or parts thereof (e.g., three
    rackets; ten strings; two rackets, one having one handle and the other
    having two handles; etc.) is not considered to specify a dimensional
    characteristic or parameter and is, therefore, not included in this and the
    indented subclass.

    (2)     Note.  A number or mathematical formula may be expressed in any
    number system or by the word equivalent thereof (e.g., II+II=IV, two plus
    two equals four, etc.).


CLS 473/538
TXT Of handle or grip:

    Subject matter under subclass 537 wherein the number, numeric variable, or
    mathematical formula specifies a dimensional characteristic or other
    parameter of either (a) the portion of the racket frame intended to be
    grasped by a user thereof or (b) a covering for such graspable portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201+,   for golf game equipment or device comprising structure relating to
    a hand-on-grip positioning aid or grip indicator.

    300+,   for golf club structure in which significance is attributed to the
    portion of the club adapted to be grasped by a hand of a player.

    549+,   for handle or grip structure for a racket, in general.

    568,    for a bat-type striking implement in which significance is
    attributed to the grip portion thereof.


CLS 473/539
TXT Elongated string-hole liner (e.g., grommet, bushing, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 524 comprising an elongate tubular member
    extending, or intended to extend, into a hole which, in turn, extends into
    or through the peripheral supporting frame of a racket, which tubular
    member being for the purpose of guiding, protecting, spacing, or cushioning
    a string where it passes through or into the frame.


CLS 473/540
TXT Having string mounting feature other than mere through-holes lying in
    string plane:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 relating to
    (a) means for securing a string to the racket frame, (b) means for guiding
    a string through or about the racket frame, (c) means for protecting a
    string from contact by the racket frame, or (d) a specified arrangement of
    string holes extending into or through the racket frame.

    (1)     Note. A specified arrangement of string holes passing entirely
    through the racket frame and wherein the centers of all such holes lie in a
    common plane is excluded herefrom unless some additional string mounting
    feature is also specified.

    (2)     Note. A specified arrangement of strings is excluded from this and
    the indented subclasses even if such specified string arrangement would
    require a means for mounting, guiding, or protecting the string or would
    require an arrangement of string holes herein provided for, unless the
    means for mounting, guiding, or protecting the string or the string hole
    arrangement is claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    543,    for a specified arrangement of strings for a racket, and see (2)
    Note above.


CLS 473/541
TXT Extending radially inward from inner frame edge:

    Subject matter under subclass 540 comprising a means for securing, guiding,
    or protecting a string and wherein the means extends from the racket frame
    into the space bounded by the frame whereby the string is located entirely
    within that bounded space.


CLS 473/542
TXT Having nonplanar string-hole pattern or arrangement in frame:

    Subject matter under subclass 540 comprising a specified arrangement of
    string holes extending into or through the racket frame and wherein the
    centers of the string holes lie in two or more spaced or intersecting
    planes.


CLS 473/543
TXT Prefabricated string assembly, means to prevent relative movement or wear
    at crossover points of strings, or having one or more strings with
    specified characteristic or arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 (a) comprising an array of strings
    associated together and placeable as a unit into the space bounded by the
    frame of a racket for subsequent securement thereto, (b) comprising a
    device to anchor the strings of the web of a racket to each other in order
    to reduce or eliminate relative movement therebetween, (c) comprising a
    device to reduce wear on a string of a racket at the point it crosses
    another string, (d) comprising a string in combination with a racket frame
    and wherein any characteristic of the string (e.g., material, surface
    configuration, etc.) is specified, or (e) comprising strings in combination
    with a racket frame and wherein the layout of the strings relative to each
    other or to the racket frame is specified.

    (1)     Note. A string, per se, is excluded herefrom unless (a) the string
    is expressly disclosed for use in the string web of a racket intended for
    striking a game projectile, and (b) the string possesses a surface
    characteristic (e.g., bumps, tackiness, low friction coating, etc.)
    expressly disclosed either to interact with the projectile (e.g., to
    enhance the grip of the string on the projectile, etc.) or to interact with
    another string at the point at which they cross (e.g., to prevent relative
    movement between the strings, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 364+ for a
    coated or structurally defined strand, filament, or fiber, and see
    especially the Notes thereunder for other possible locations for a strand,
    filament, or fiber (as, for example, in a composition or music class).


CLS 473/544
TXT Nonmetallic frame having metallic reinforcement or frame composed of
    metal-plastic composite:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 wherein the frame either (a) is made of
    nonmetallic material and includes a metallic element for strengthening some
    portion of the frame or (b) consists essentially of metallic and plastic
    components bonded or mechanically secured together.


CLS 473/545
TXT Metallic frame:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 wherein the frame consists essentially of
    metallic material.


CLS 473/546
TXT Throat wedge, bridge, or reinforcement:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 comprising (a) a usually somewhat
    triangularly shaped filler piece located in and filling the
    generallyY-shaped area of the frame of a racket where the shaft portion
    merges into the head portion (i.e., the throat area of the frame), (b) a
    usually curved member spanning the gap in the head portion of a racket
    between the legs of a generally Y-shaped throat area of the frame of a
    racket, or (c) means to strengthen the throat area of the frame of a racket.


CLS 473/547
TXT Having laminated frame:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 wherein the frame comprises a plurality
    of superposed layers of material united together.


CLS 473/548
TXT String guard, frame bumper or guard, or specified shaft to head connection:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 (a) comprising a means for covering the
    portion of a string exposed along the upper, lower, or outer edge of the
    head portion of the frame so that the string may be protected from abrasion
    or wear, (b) comprising a resilient means for covering the upper, lower, or
    outer edge of a frame so that the frame may be cushioned or protected upon
    its being impacted against another object, or (c) relating to the
    connection of the shaft portion of the frame to the head portion of the
    frame.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305+,   for a particular head and shaft connection for a golf club.

    562,    for a particular stick to blade joint construction for a club.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, for a joint connection of general utility.


CLS 473/549
TXT Handle or grip structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 524 relating to the construction of the
    portion of a racket frame intended to be grasped by a user thereof or
    relating to a covering for such graspable portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201+,   for golf game equipment or device comprising structure relating to
    a hand-on-grip positioning aid or grip indicator.

    300+,   for golf club structure in which significance is attributed to the
    portion of the club adapted to be grasped by a hand of a player.

    538,    for a racket-type striking implement in which a dimensional
    characteristic or other parameter of the handle or grip portion thereof is
    specified by a number, numeric variable, or mathematical formula.

    568,    for a bat-type striking implement in which significance is
    attributed to the grip portion thereof.


CLS 473/550
TXT Dispensing, cooled, or externally ventilated:

    Subject matter under subclass 549 including
    (a) a means to deal out portions of a material from within the handle or
    grip to a location on the outer surface of the racket or externally of the
    racket, (b) a means to extract heat from the handle, grip, or air within
    the handle or grip, or (c) a means to provide an air flow path from the
    grip or handle to the exterior of the racket.


CLS 473/551
TXT Having hand or finger conforming contour, through-hole for finger, portion
    overlying back of hand, projecting hand stop or positioner spaced from
    butt, wrist strap, or nonstandard transverse cross section:

    Subject matter under subclass 549 wherein the handle or grip has (a) a
    surface configuration intended to match the gross shape of a user's hand or
    finger so as to provide a form fit with the user's hand or finger, (b) a
    hole extending entirely therethrough, through which a user is intended to
    extend at least one finger for anchoring the user's hand and racket
    together, (c) a portion spaced outwardly from and extending over the
    surface area of the handle or grip whereby, upon the user gripping the
    racket in a normal manner, the extending portion overlies the back of his
    or her hand, (d) a knob, protrusion, bump, ledge, or similar formation
    extending above the general surface of the handle or grip and located ahead
    of the butt of the handle, which knob, protrusion, bump, ledge, or similar
    formation is intended to form an abutment engageable by the side (as
    opposed to the top or bottom) of a user's hand or finger to help the user
    properly locate his or her hand on the racket or limit longitudinal or
    rotational movement of the racket in his or her hand, (e) a strap or
    similar element intended to encircle the wrist of a user so as to tether
    the racket to the user to prevent its separation from the user in the event
    the user loses his or her grip on the racket, or (f) a gross peripheral
    cross-sectional shape (as cut through the handle or grip at a right angle
    to its longitudinal axis thereof) which is other than a square, rectangle,
    circle, or equiangular octagon.

    (1)     Note. A means for mounting a wrist strap or similar element to the
    handle or grip of a racket is also included herein.

    (2)     Note. Pores, small ventilation holes, grooves, bumps, ridges,
    knurling, etc. (e.g., the ridge created where the adjacent runs of a
    wound-strip type of grip overlap, etc.) formed in or on the surface of a
    handle or grip and which are small (e.g., shallow, narrow, short, etc.)
    relative to the dimensions of a user's hand or finger, are not considered
    to constitute a hand or finger conforming contour or a projecting hand stop
    and are not considered to create a nonstandard cross-sectional shape. Such
    pores, small ventilation holes, grooves, bumps, ridges, knurling, etc.
    formed in or on the surface of a handle or grip may be (and often are) for
    the purpose of improving the frictional characteristics thereof in order to
    improve the user's grip upon the handle or grip of a racket.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201+,   for golf game equipment or device comprising structure relating to
    a hand-on-grip positioning aid or grip indicator.

    553,    for a wrist strap or similar element, per se, intended for use in a
    racket or paddle.


CLS 473/552
TXT Grip or handle longitudinally or rotationally adjustable relative to head
    or shaft or changeable in length:

    Subject matter under subclass 549 (a) comprising a means, other than or in
    addition to the resilience of the material of the grip or handle itself,
    (1) for adjusting the position of the grip or handle along or about the
    longitudinal axis of the shaft of a racket or (2) for indexing,
    interlocking, or clamping the grip to the handle or shaft or the handle to
    the shaft in any one of a plurality of discrete positions or (b) comprising
    a means for adjusting the length of the grip or handle to make it either
    longer or shorter at the user's option.

    (1)     Note.  Both (a) a spirally wound strip type of grip of fixed length
    or of stretchable material which may be wound about the handle or shaft
    with different pitches (thus changing the length of the handle or shaft
    which is covered by the grip) or wound at different longitudinal positions
    along the handle or shaft and (b) a tubular grip of fixed length or
    stretchable material which can simply be slipped over the handle or shaft
    to a greater or lesser extent or in different rotational positions are
    excluded herefrom unless they include an additional mechanism for adjusting
    their position (e.g., a position-adjusting screw, etc.) or for indexing,
    interlocking, or clamping them at any one of a plurality of discrete
    positions (e.g., a rib on the inside of a tubular grip for seating in one
    of a plurality of grooves in the handle or shaft).


CLS 473/553
TXT Accessory for use with racket or paddle (e.g., used with or for tennis
    racket, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 524 comprising an ancillary device adapted
    and intended to be used with or for a racket or paddle not elsewhere
    provided for.

    (1)     Note.  An ancillary device, unless it is classifiable elsewhere,
    considered proper for these subclasses is defined as (a) any device
    intended to be attached to, carried by, or associated with a racket or
    paddle when it is being used for its function of striking a projectile,
    which device is not capable of either enabling or enhancing the racket or
    paddle's primary function as an implement for striking a projectile (e.g.,
    a score keeping device or radio attached to a tennis racket, etc.), (b) any
    device intended to assemble, assist in the assembly of, maintain, or
    protect a racket or paddle when it is not being used for its function of
    striking a projectile (e.g., a tennis racket press, stringing device,
    etc.), or (c) any device intended to be attached to or carried by a racket
    or paddle when it is not being used for its function of striking a
    projectile (e.g., a ball carrier attachable to a table tennis paddle, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, subclass 163 for a
    protective cover for a racquet made of flaccid material.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 315.1 for a container for,
    or a package for containing, a racquet.


CLS 473/554
TXT Press:

    Subject matter under subclass 553 comprising two spaced apart frame
    structures or plates and a means cooperating with the frame structures or
    plates for clamping the frame of a racket or paddle or the head portion
    thereof between the frame structures or plates so as to prevent warping of
    the frame of the racket or paddle or the head portion thereof.


CLS 473/555
TXT Racket frame holder or support for use while stringing:

    Subject matter under subclass 553 (a) comprising a means adapted to be
    secured to the frame of a racket for holding the frame in position or for
    preventing distortion of the frame while it is being strung or restrung or
    (b) comprising a means for supporting such position holding or distortion
    preventing means.


CLS 473/556
TXT With stringing or string-stretching device:

    Subject matter under subclass 555 wherein the racket frame holder or
    support is combined with (a) a means for threading one or more
    striking-surface strings of a racket through or about the frame of the
    racket, (b) a means for applying or maintaining the desired degree of
    tension to or on one or more striking-surface strings of a racket while it
    is being strung or restrung, or (c) a means for temporarily displacing a
    previously strung striking-surface string or strings of a racket from the
    plane of the striking surface in order to facilitate the threading an
    additional string through or about the frame of a racket.


CLS 473/557
TXT Stringing or string-stretching device:

    Subject matter under subclass 553 comprising (a) a means for threading one
    or more striking-surface strings of a racket through or about the frame of
    the racket, (b) a means for applying or maintaining the desired degree of
    tension to or on one or more striking-surface strings of a racket while it
    is being strung or restrung, or (c) a means for temporarily displacing a
    previously strung striking-surface string or strings of a racket from the
    plane of the striking surface in order to facilitate the threading of an
    additional string through or about the frame of a racket.


CLS 473/558
TXT Mallet:

    Subject matter under subclass 516 wherein the projecting implement
    comprises an elongated shaft having a projectile striking head at one end
    thereof which is either (a) generally in the form of a sphere, cube, or
    other generally regular geometric shape or (b) a crossbar which, together
    with the shaft, forms a generally T-shaped implement and wherein an
    imaginary line, which passes through the center of a projectile striking
    area of the head and which is perpendicular to a reference plane located
    either tangentially to that center (if the striking area is curved) or
    congruently with the plane of the striking area (if the striking area is
    flat), intersects the shaft or an imaginary extension thereof through the
    head.


CLS 473/559
TXT Club:

    Subject matter under subclass 516 wherein the projecting implement
    comprises an elongated shaft having a projectile striking head at one end
    thereof such that an imaginary line, which passes through the center of a
    projectile striking area of the head and which is perpendicular to a
    reference plane located either tangentially to that center (if the striking
    area is curved) or congruently with the plane of the striking area (if the
    striking area is flat), is offset from (i.e., does not intersect) the shaft
    or an imaginary extension thereof through the head.


CLS 473/560
TXT Having elongated blade (e.g., hockey stick, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 559 wherein the projectile striking head of
    the club comprises a long, thin, bladelike member having a length many
    times greater than its width and a width many times greater than its
    thickness.


CLS 473/561
TXT Fiber reinforced:

    Subject matter under subclass 560 wherein the club having an elongated
    blade includes a composite material comprising a stranded, filamentary, or
    fibrous web of reinforcing material disposed in a hardened matrix of
    material.


CLS 473/562
TXT Stick to blade joint construction:

    Subject matter under subclass 560 relating to how the elongated blade
    portion of the club is connected to the shaft portion thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305+,   for a particular head and shaft connection for a golf club.

    548,    for a specified shaft to head connection for a racket.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, for a joint connection of general utility.


CLS 473/563
TXT Blade construction or accessory:

    Subject matter under subclass 560 relating to the arrangement of parts or
    elements of the elongated blade of the club or relating to a device
    ancillary or appurtenant to such elongated blade (e.g., a removable blade
    facing, a cover, protector, or adapter for the blade, etc.).


CLS 473/564
TXT Bat (e.g., baseball bat, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 516 wherein the projecting implement
    comprises a shaft and a striking head which (a) is located at one end of
    the shaft, (b) is formed by a continuation of the shaft, or (c) constitutes
    the shaft and wherein the shaft and head are both elongated members having
    a length substantially greater than the width, thickness, or diameter
    thereof.


CLS 473/565
TXT Having elongated blade (e.g., cricket bat, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 564 wherein the striking portion of the bat
    comprises a flat, thin member having a length many times greater than its
    width and a width many times greater than its thickness.


CLS 473/566
TXT Of metallic-shell structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 564 wherein the bat is a generally hollow
    body formed from a metallic material.


CLS 473/567
TXT Of plastic composition:

    Subject matter under subclass 564 wherein the bat is generally composed of
    at least one synthetic resinous material.


CLS 473/568
TXT Grip:

    Subject matter under subclass 564 relating to the surface treatment of the
    portion of the bat intended to be grasped by a user thereof or relating to
    a covering over such user graspable portion, which surface treatment of or
    covering over the graspable portion of the bat being intended to improve
    the user's grasp thereupon.


CLS 473/569
TXT PROJECTILE, PER SE; PART THEREOF OR ACCESSORY THEREFOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising (a) a body, per se,
    constituting a missile which is intended to be propelled, thrown, impelled,
    launched, or otherwise projected by a player who is playing a game or sport
    in an attempt to achieve a defined game objective, the achievement of which
    requires some degree of skill on the part of the player, (b) a constituent
    part of such a missile, or (c) an ancillary means adapted and intended to
    be used with or for such a missile not elsewhere provided for.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52+,    for a projectile used in playing the surface projectile game known
    as billiards or pool.

    125+,   for a projectile used in playing the surface projectile game known
    as bowling.

    131+,   for a projectile used in playing the projectile game known as golf,
    particularly subclasses 139+ for an anchored projectile, subclasses 280+
    for a practice projectile, and subclasses 351+ for a golf ball.

    413,    for a ball used in playing the surface projectile game known as
    croquet.

    414,    for a projectile used in playing the game known as hopscotch.

    415+,   for a game projectile combined with at least one other game
    component or for a practice projectile, which projectile is used in
    playing, or for practicing for, a playing field or court game such as
    baseball, basketball, football, soccer, tennis, racquetball, lacrosse, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 327 for a game ball
    carrying indicia (a) other than means to indicate the portion of the ball
    to be hit by a projecting implement or device (e.g., by a golf club, etc.),
    (b) other than means to indicate its location on a playing field or court
    (e.g., on a golf course, etc.), or (c) other than a series of balls
    carrying interrelated indicia to be used in playing a game.

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, subclasses 154+ for a
    protective cover made of flaccid material.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, for the
    making of a projectile such as a ball by lamination, and see especially
    subclasses 145+ for a method which includes the step of encapsulation of a
    permanently fluent material in hollow lamina.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 315.1+ for a container
    for, or a package for containing, a sport implement, exercise device, or
    game, especially subclasses 315.9+ for such a container or package for a
    ball.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for a carbon compound composition
    product intended for use as a game ball, bat, pin, or billy or as any part
    thereof (e.g., a coating for a ball, etc.).

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes, for
    a process covered by the class definition for shaping or molding plastic
    materials.

    273,    Amusement Devices: Games, subclasses 108+ for a game in which a
    projectile moves over a playing surface at all times during play of the
    game, which projectile is combined with at least one other game component
    (e.g., a playing surface, target, projector, etc.) and subclasses 317+ for
    a game in which a projectile is projected into or through the air during
    play of the game, which projectile is combined with at least one other game
    component (e.g., a playing surface, target, projector, etc.).  Note
    particularly subclasses 362+ thereunder for a target which also acts as a
    projectile by virtue of its being projected into the air (e.g., a clay
    pigeon, etc.).

    482,    Exercise Devices, subclasses 20+ for a projectile used in a
    throwing type of field sport, particularly subclass 20 for a javelin,
    subclass 21 for a discus, and subclass 22 for a shot in the form of a ball.


CLS 473/570
TXT With light-emitting, electrical, magnetic, or rotatable inertial means or
    having boundary-detector activating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 569 wherein the projectile (a) includes a
    means for producing and giving off electromagnetic radiation (e.g., by
    incandescence, luminescence, etc.) capable of being visually perceived by
    the human eye;(b) includes an electrical circuit or component; (c) is or
    includes a means (i.e., a magnet or electromagnet) having or for producing
    the force field effects of a magnet; (d) has a body rotatably mounted
    therein or thereto which, when set in motion, produces a gyroscopic effect
    upon the projectile whenever the projectile is in motion (usually in free
    flight through the air), such gyroscopic effect being usually for the
    purpose of maintaining, or resisting forces attempting to change, the
    projectile's axis of rotation while it is in translational motion; or(e)
    includes a means for causing, whenever the projectile is in motion during
    play or practice of a game upon or within a game playing area, actuation of
    a means for detecting the location of the projectile relative to (1) a
    peripheral boundary of the playing area or (2) a structure (e.g., a net,
    etc.) or a visually or otherwise sensory distinct means which breaks the
    playing area into compartments, subareas, or sections.

    (1)     Note. Usually, but not necessarily so limited, a projectile having
    a boundary-detector activating means is a tennis ball having an
    electrically conductive surface which, upon striking a boundary of a tennis
    court, completes an electrical circuit of the boundary detector so as to
    activate it.

    (2)     Note.  A target is not considered to be a peripheral boundary
    structure or a structure or a visually or otherwise sensory distinct means
    which breaks the playing field or court into compartments, subareas, or
    sections, even though such a target may be located in, on, or form a part
    thereof.  Accordingly, see the appropriate target subclasses for a detector
    means for detecting the location of a game element or user relative to a
    target.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    467,    for a boundary detector in combination with at least one other game
    component (e.g., in combination with a tennis court, a net portion thereof,
    or a ball for use therewith, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclass 348.3 for a target having
    magnetized material for adherence thereto of a projectile having magnetized
    or magnetically susceptible material or for a target made from a material
    adapted for adherence thereto of a projectile having magnetized material.
    Such a projectile combined with such a target will be found in subclass
    348.3.


CLS 473/571
TXT With sound-producing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 569 wherein the projectile includes means
    specifically designed and intended to produce a vibratory disturbance in
    the pressure and density of the fluid through which the projectile moves,
    which vibratory disturbance is capable of being detected by the organ of
    hearing of an animal.


CLS 473/572
TXT Having suction cup:

    Subject matter under subclass 569 wherein the projectile has a resilient
    cupshaped means thereon so that, when the open portion of the cupshaped
    means thereof strikes or is forcibly engaged with a relatively smooth
    surface, the resilience of the cupshaped portion will cause the pressure of
    the fluid trapped between the interior surface of the cupshaped means and
    the relatively smooth surface to be reduced below that located outside of
    the cupshaped means thereby causing the projectile to adhere to the surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclass 348.2 for a target having one
    or more suction cups for adherence thereto of a cooperating projectile or
    having a cooperating surface adapted for adherence thereto of a projectile
    having a suction cup thereon.  Such a projectile combined with such a
    target will be found in subclass 348.2.


CLS 473/573
TXT Having bristled, hooked, or looped surface for adherence to complementarily
    surfaced means (e.g., VelcroR material, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 569 wherein at least a portion of the surface
    of the projectile is made from, or the projectile has attached thereto, a
    material comprising a very large number of closely spaced projecting
    bristles, hooks, or loops and wherein the material is intended to interlock
    with complementary projecting bristles, loops, or hooks disposed upon at
    least a portion of the surface of an object so as to cause the projectile
    or a portion thereof to adhere to the object.

    (1)     Note.  The expression ``interlock with" is intended to include (due
    to the structural similarity of closely spaced bristles and closely spaced
    hooks or loops) the adherence of a projectile having projecting bristles
    which is intended to be engaged with, and thereby adhered to, an object
    also having projecting bristles even though the adherence of the projectile
    to the object is primarily due to frictional forces between the respective
    sets of bristles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclass 348.4 for a target for an
    aerial projectile game, which target having a material comprised of many
    closely spaced bristles, hooks, or loops for interlocking adherence to a
    cooperating projectile having at least a surface portion thereof comprised
    of many closely spaced complementary bristles, loops, or hooks.  Such a
    projectile combined with such a target will be found in subclass 348.4.


CLS 473/574
TXT Having means for nonpenetrating adherence to complementarily surfaced means
    (e.g., tacky surface, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 569 wherein at least a portion of the surface
    of the projectile is made from, or the projectile has attached thereto, a
    means adapted and intended to enable the projectile, or a portion thereof,
    to stick to or otherwise adhere to a cooperative surface without puncturing
    the cooperative surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    273,    Amusement Devices: Games, subclass 348.5 for a target having means
    for nonpenetrating adherence thereto of a complementarily surfaced
    projectile (e.g., a target having a tacky surface or having a surface for
    adhering thereto a projectile having a tacky surface, etc.).  Such a
    projectile combined with such a target will be found in subclass 348.5.


CLS 473/575
TXT Having attached or means for attaching thereto tether, elongated flaccid
    streamer, or the like:

    Subject matter under subclass 569 wherein the projectile either (a) is
    secured or has means adapted and intended to be secured to an elongated
    means which, in turn, is secured or is intended to be secured to an
    anchoring means (such as a support, etc.) or to a body portion of a user of
    the projectile, whereby the projectile is constrained for movement within
    the extent of the elongated means whenever it is projected or otherwise
    manipulated by the user thereof, or (b) is secured or has means adapted and
    intended to be secured to one end of a long, limp (i.e., pendant, nonstiff,
    or nonrigid) filament, strand, narrow ribbon, narrow strip of material, or
    like piece of material or to one end of a bundle of such filaments,
    strands, ribbons, strips of material, etc. whereby, whenever the projectile
    is moving through the air, the long, limp filament, strand, ribbon, strip
    of material, like piece of material, or bundle thereof is caused to extend
    its length outwardly from, and to trail behind, the moving projectile in a
    manner similar in appearance to that of a banner, pennant, or flag that is
    fluttering or flying in a breeze.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108+,   for a tethered bowing ball.

    138,    for golf game apparatus involving a projectile tethered to a
    swingable implement.

    139+,   for golf game apparatus involving an anchored (e.g., tethered,
    etc.) projectile.

    423+,   for a projectile or a simulation thereof which is attached or
    adapted to be attached to an elongated tether, which projectile or
    simulation thereof is used to enable a practicing or training player to
    improve or perfect his or her skill in some action involving manipulating a
    game projectile during play of a game.

    506+,   for a combined projector-catcher device or implement having a
    projectile tethered thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclass 317.8 for an aerial projectile
    game which mimics one or more aspects of the game of baseball and in which
    a tethered ball or projectile is used, subclass 329 for an aerial
    projectile game in which a projectile is tethered to a handheld, apertured
    manipulator, subclass 330 for an aerial projectile game in which a
    projectile is flexibly tethered to a handheld manipulator, and subclasses
    331+ for an aerial projectile game in which a projectile is tethered to a
    target.


CLS 473/576
TXT Attached tether, streamer, or the like has means adapted to be held by,
    carried by, or attached to person:

    Subject matter under subclass 575 wherein the projectile has a tether,
    streamer, or the like secured thereto and wherein the tether, streamer, or
    the like, in turn, either is secured to, or has a portion thereof formed
    into, an element intended to be held by, carried by, or secured (e.g.,
    worn, etc.) to a person who is manipulating the projectile.

    (1)     Note. The person held, carried, or attached element may be formed
    in or by a portion of the tether, streamer, or the like itself, such as a
    portion of the tether, streamer, or the like formed into a knot or loop
    which is intended to be gripped by the hand or attached to the wrist or
    finger of the person, provided that it is expressly disclosed that the
    tether, streamer, or the like is intended to be held by, carried by, or
    attached to the person manipulating the projectile.


CLS 473/577
TXT Scattershot, material dispensing upon impact, openable to expose interior
    chamber, or having parts adapted to move away from, or be separated from,
    one another upon impact:

    Subject matter under subclass 569 (a) wherein the projectile includes a
    means for carrying a plurality of additional secondary projectiles
    therewith and includes a means to release or project the secondary
    projectiles therefrom whenever the projectile is projected into the air or
    while the projectile is moving through the air (scattershot), (b) wherein
    the projectile includes a means, actuated by contact with a surface
    (usually a target), for producing smoke or flame, or for releasing a
    liquid, gaseous, or particulate material carried by the projectile, (c)
    wherein the projectile includes a means to render visible to a person a
    previously enclosed and concealed area or space located within the interior
    portion of the projectile, (d) wherein the projectile includes a plurality
    of interconnected parts which are movable relative to one another (e.g.,
    hinged together, etc.) and includes a means, actuated by contact with a
    surface (usually a target), to enable portions of the interconnected parts
    to move away from or spread apart from one another while remaining attached
    to one another, or (e) wherein the projectile includes a plurality of
    detachably interconnected parts and includes a means, actuated by contact
    with a surface (usually a target), to enable the interconnected parts to be
    completely detached from and be moved away from one another with no
    connection therebetween.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    581,    for an arrow or dart having fluid- conducting means.

    594,    for a projectile containing, or adapted to contain, a liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclass 363 for a target which is
    adapted to fly or move freely through the air and which either (a) has a
    means to release a liquid, gaseous, or particulate material upon being
    struck by an aerial projectile, or (b) has a means for producing smoke or
    flame upon being struck by an aerial projectile and subclass 380 for a
    target used with aerial projectiles which either is frangible or is formed
    from a plurality of detachably interconnected elements.


CLS 473/578
TXT Arrow, dart, or shuttlecock; part thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 569 wherein the projectile is in the form of
    an elongated missile which is intended to be projected into the air for
    movement therethrough by a bow, crossbow, blowgun, racket, or other
    projector or by a user's hand, foot, or other body part and wherein the
    missile includes two or more of the following components: a
    target-contacting head portion, feathering or other flight guiding,
    retarding, stabilizing, or controlling means, or a means for either
    engaging the projecting portion of a projector or engaging a user's hand,
    foot, or other body part whenever such hand, foot, or other body part is
    used for projection of the missile.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this and the indented subclasses are the
    component parts of arrows, darts, and shuttlecocks, such as the
    target-contacting head portion, the feathering or other flight guiding,
    retarding, stabilizing, or controlling means, the projector-engaging
    portion (e.g., the nock portion of an arrow, racket-engaging portion of a
    shuttlecock, etc.) or the portion intended to be engaged by a user's hand,
    foot, or other body part whenever the complete missile is intended to be
    projected thereby (e.g., the head portion of a shuttlecock, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    43,     Fishing, Trapping and Vermin Destroying, subclass 6 for a harpoon
    or spear used for fishing, etc.

    294,    Handling: Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 61 for a spear
    used in handling articles, as for grasping them by piercing them; and
    subclasses 126 + for a harpoon-type hay fork.

    482,    Exercise Devices, subclass 20 for a javelin used for throwing in a
    track and field sport.


CLS 473/579
TXT Shuttlecock (e.g., badminton shuttlecock, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 578 wherein the elongated missile comprises
    (a) a head portion located at one end thereof which is adapted to be struck
    to thereby drive the missile through the air either by the impacting
    portion of a projector (e.g., by a user held racket, etc.) or by the hand,
    foot, knee, or other body part of a user, and (b) an aerodynamic tail
    portion connected to or by the head end portion, which tail portion being
    composed of feathering or other flight guiding, retarding, stabilizing, or
    controlling means which extends away from the head end portion of the
    missile.


CLS 473/580
TXT Having independent feathers or vanes:

    Subject matter under subclass 579 wherein the aerodynamic tail portion of
    the missile either (a) is composed of a plurality of discrete feathers or
    vane members usually connected together at or by the head end portion of
    the missile, or (b) is composed of a unitary (often sheetlike) member which
    is connected to the head end portion of the missile and slit, splayed,
    formed, etc. in such a manner that a plurality of discrete vane members are
    produced.

    (1)     Note.  The assembly of discrete feathers or vane members may also
    be encircled or at least partially connected together by a cord, thread,
    disc, etc., in the region of the tail portion that extends from the
    aerodynamic-acting part (i.e., the actual feathered or vaned part) to the
    head end portion. For example, the quill portions an assembly of discrete
    feathers are often encircled by a cord or thread at a region just below the
    feathered portions so as to preserve the classical truncated cone-shape of
    a feathered-tail type of shuttlecock.


CLS 473/581
TXT Having fluid-conducting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 578 wherein the elongated missile has a
    target-contacting head portion located at one end thereof and has a
    fluid-conducting passage formed or located therein or thereon which extends
    from a location adjacent to the target-contacting head portion to a
    location adjacent to the tail end portion, which fluid-conducting passage
    is also in fluid communication with the exterior surface of the missile so
    that, whenever the missile strikes and penetrates into the interior of a
    target having fluid contained therein or adapted to have fluid received
    therein, fluid may be passed between the interior and the exterior of the
    target.

    (1)     Note.  Projectiles having a fluid-conducting means are usually used
    to let out blood or air from an animal whenever the projectile strikes and
    penetrates into the interior of the animal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    577,    for a projectile, which may be an arrow or dart, having means for
    dispensing material upon impact (e.g., a tranquilizing dart or arrow or a
    scent or poison dispensing arrow or dart, etc.).

    594,    for a projectile containing, or adapted to contain, a liquid.


CLS 473/582
TXT Head structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 578 either
    (a) consisting of the target-contacting head portion, per se, of an
    elongated missile intended to have such target-contacting head portion
    located at one end thereof, or (b) relating to the target-contacting head
    portion of an elongated missile having such target-contacting head portion
    located at one end thereof whenever significance is attributed to such head
    portion.

    (1)     Note. A document, in order to be placed in this and the indented
    subclasses, must claim significant target-contacting head structure. A mere
    disclosure of such head structure or such head merely named in a claim is
    not sufficient to place a document in this and the indented subclasses.


CLS 473/583
TXT Broadhead:

    Subject matter under subclass 582 wherein the target-contacting head
    portion comprises a sharp, razorlike blade means adapted to cut a target.


CLS 473/584
TXT Having interchangeable blade:

    Subject matter under subclass 583 including a means for attaching the
    razorlike blade means to the elongated missile and wherein the blade means
    is removably mounted to the attaching means to enable replacement of the
    blade means with other identical blade means.


CLS 473/585
TXT And vane structure (i.e., flight guiding or stabilizing means):

    Subject matter under subclass 582 wherein the elongated missile includes,
    in addition to the target-contacting head portion, feathering or other
    flight guiding, retarding, stabilizing, or controlling means.

    (1)     Note.  A named recitation in a claim or the disclosure of a
    document of feathering or other flight guiding, retarding, stabilizing, or
    controlling means is sufficient to place a document in this subclass once
    the document has met the requirements of subclass 582.


CLS 473/586
TXT Vane structure (i.e., flight guiding or stabilizing means):

    Subject matter under subclass 578 either
    (a) consisting of the feathering or other flight guiding, retarding,
    stabilizing, or controlling means, per se, of an elongated missile intended
    to have such feathering or other flight guiding, etc. means, or (b)
    relating to the feathering or other flight guiding, retarding, stabilizing,
    or controlling means of an elongated missile having such feathering or
    other flight guiding, etc. means whenever significance is attributed to
    such feathering or other flight guiding, etc. means, which feathering or
    other flight guiding, retarding, stabilizing, or controlling means is
    intended to (1) maintain the missile airborne or aloft for longer periods
    of time, (2) stabilize the missile, (3) provide aerodynamic drag upon the
    missile, or (4) cause the missile to produce one or more aerodynamic
    actions typical of aircraft.

    (1)     Note. A document, in order to be placed in this subclass, must
    claim significant feathering, vane, or other flight guiding, retarding,
    stabilizing, or controlling structure.  Such feathering, vane, or other
    flight guiding, retarding, stabilizing, or controlling structure merely
    named in a claim or merely disclosed in a document is not sufficient to
    place a document in this subclass.


CLS 473/587
TXT Curling stone:

    Subject matter under subclass 569 wherein the projectile comprises a
    relatively heavy, either oblately shaped or disk-shaped body (usually made
    from stone or iron) having a player graspable means (usually a handle)
    located in the vicinity of its upper pole surface and having its lower pole
    surface flattened or otherwise provided with means whereby the projectile
    may readily slide over a generally flat, icy or the like surface, which
    projectile being intended to be used in the play of the game commonly known
    as curling in which players play the game upon an icy or the like surface
    by launching at least one of the projectiles by means of its handle or
    other player graspable means so that it slides freely over the surface
    toward a target located at a distance from the point of projection of the
    projectile.

    (1)     Note. The projectile may have some form of antifrictional means for
    simulating sliding action thereof over a flat, icy surface. For example,
    the projectile may have one or more ball bearings rollably mounted in, and
    extending partially outwardly from, the lower surface thereof for
    supporting the projectile upon a flat surface formed from a material other
    than ice whereby, when the projectile is projected upon a flat surface
    other than ice, it will move over the surface by means of the rotation of
    its supporting ball bearings to give the appearance of a projectile sliding
    over an icy surface.


CLS 473/588
TXT Disk- or ring-shaped (e.g., ice hockey puck, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 569 wherein the projectile comprises a body
    having a generally flattened shape and a generally regular continuous
    peripheral configuration.

    (1)     Note.  The projectile need not have a circular peripheral
    configuration but must be generally flattened in form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclass 126 for surface projectile game
    apparatus in which a projectile having the shape of a disk or ring is used
    and subclass 353 for a tiddlywink-type game in which disk-shaped
    projectiles are used.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 46+ for a spinning disk (e.g.,
    a flying saucer, etc.) adapted to be spun and sailed through the air for
    general amusement (but nongame-playing) purposes.

    482,    Exercise Devices, subclass 21 for a discus which is flung by a user
    in a track and field sport.


CLS 473/589
TXT Ring-shaped (e.g., deck-tennis quoit, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 588 wherein the body has a relatively large,
    interiorly located aperture extending entirely through the body from top to
    bottom when it is positioned horizontally.

    (1)     Note. Although most rings have an annular configuration, it is not
    necessary that they be so configured. For example, a body having a
    triangularly shaped outer periphery and a relatively large aperture passing
    therethrough which is centrally located and circularly shaped is considered
    to be a ring proper for this subclass.  Also, the geometric center of the
    relatively large aperture need not coincide with the geometric center of
    the body as a whole.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    506+,   for a projector-catcher implement having an aerial projectile
    tethered thereto, which projectile may be in the form of a ring or a
    ringlike body.

    591,    for a projectile commonly known as a horseshoe.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclass 332 for a ring or a ringlike
    projectile which is tethered either to a target device or to a means
    associated with a target device and subclasses 336+ for a ring or a
    ringlike projectile in combination with a pegged target.


CLS 473/590
TXT Boomerang:

    Subject matter under subclass 569 wherein the projectile has an aerodynamic
    configuration intended to act in a manner such that when the projectile is
    thrown into the air by a person or a projecting device, the projectile
    moves along a continuous, looped path and, while remaining airborne,
    returns either directly to, or to a point in the vicinity of, the person or
    projecting device.

    (1)     Note. Merely throwing any kind of projectile (e.g., a baseball,
    etc.) vertically into the air so that it will return along substantially
    the same path to the thrower or merely throwing a projectile (e.g., a
    resilient ball, etc.) against a surface so that it will rebound therefrom
    back along substantially the same path to the thrower does not mean the
    projectile has the unique aerodynamic properties of a boomerang and is,
    therefore, not proper for inclusion in this subclass.


CLS 473/591
TXT Horseshoe:

    Subject matter under subclass 569 wherein the projectile comprises a body
    having two or more interconnected arms defining between them an opening
    (often generally U-shaped) which is adapted to partially encircle a
    post-type target member whenever the projectile is thrown thereat.


CLS 473/592
TXT Tipcat:

    Subject matter under subclass 569 wherein the projectile comprises a body
    having a configuration such that, when it is lying upon a flat surface, one
    edge portion thereof is capable of being raised into the air whenever the
    opposite edge is forcibly struck or pressed upon (often the body is
    elongated and tapered at one or both ends thereof or simply tapered in
    configuration), which projectile is intended to be used in the play of the
    game commonly known as tipcat in which the projectile, while lying upon a
    support surface, is intended to be forcibly struck from above on an end or
    edge portion thereof by a bat, club, or other handheld striking implement
    so that it is flipped end-over-end or edge-over-edge into the air and
    either(a) thereby projected directly toward one or more distantly located
    targets or fielders, or(b) subsequently reprojected toward one or more
    distantly located targets or fielders by being again batted by the bat,
    club, or other handheld striking implement while it is still in the air.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclass 341.1 for an aerial projectile
    game apparatus or accessory therefor (other than a projectile per se or a
    striking type of projector implement therefor, per se).  A tipcat
    projectile combined with any other game component (e.g., combined with a
    target, a support for the projectile, an implement for striking and thereby
    projecting the projectile, etc.) will be found in subclass 341.1.


CLS 473/593
TXT Having self-contained means for inflating, pressurizing, reinflating, or
    repressurizing projectile with fluid or comprising reinflating or
    repressurizing method:

    Subject matter under subclass 569 (a) wherein the projectile comprises a
    fluid-filled hollow body or comprises a hollow body adapted and intended to
    be filled with fluid and wherein the projectile includes a mechanism or
    device located either in the wall portion or the hollow portion of the body
    for actively increasing the quantity or pressure of that fluid, or (b)
    comprising a process for replacing fluid lost from the interior of a
    fluid-filled projectile.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    610,    for a projectile or a part thereof comprising a hollow,
    fluid-impervious shell, core, or bladder, which projectile or part thereof
    further including a sealable opening, valve, or inflation tube through
    which it may be filled or refilled with a fluid.


CLS 473/594
TXT Having loose internal element, containing or adapted to contain liquid, or
    comprising spherically configured ball having variable or eccentric center
    of gravity:

    Subject matter under subclass 569 either
    (a) wherein the projectile has a hollow internal volume and the hollow
    volume (1) contains at least one solid element movable therein, or(2)
    contains a liquid therein or is expressly disclosed as intended to contain
    a liquid therein, or (b) wherein the projectile has generally spherical
    outer configuration and (1) the center of gravity of the spherical
    projectile is not coincident with the center of geometry of the projectile,
    or (2) the location of the center of gravity of the spherical projectile
    can change.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    577,    for a projectile having a means for dispensing a material upon
    impact.

    581,    for an arrow or dart having fluid- conducting means.


CLS 473/595
TXT Having means other than ellipsoidal spheroid shape (e.g., football shaped,
    etc.) to produce erratic or unpredictable rebounding or rolling thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 569 wherein the projectile includes a means
    for enabling the projectile, after it has been projected by a user thereof,
    either (a) to bounce off or be deflected from a surface in an unusual,
    irregular, random, or unforeseen manner, or (b) to move by rotating about
    one or more of its axes over (i.e., roll over) a supporting surface in an
    unusual, irregular, random, wandering, or unforeseen manner.

    (1)     Note.  Projectiles having the configuration of or similar to an
    ellipsoidal spheroid (e.g., having the configuration of or somewhat similar
    to the configuration of a football type of projectile used in the game
    known in North America as ``football") are specifically excluded from this
    subclass.


CLS 473/596
TXT Having handle or surface configuration for enhancing user's handgrip
    thereon:

    Subject matter under subclass 569 either
    (a) wherein the projectile has a part spaced apart from the outer surface
    thereof which is designed especially to be grasped by the hand of a user,
    or (b) wherein the outer surface of the projectile has a shape or contour
    which is designed especially to increase the grip of a user's hand thereon.


CLS 473/597
TXT Grip-enhancing means comprises closure or seam of casing or cover or
    comprises simulation of such closure or seam (e.g., lacing of football
    casing, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 596 wherein
    (a) the projectile includes an opening in the outermost layer thereof and
    includes a means to close the opening, (b) the outer surface layer of the
    projectile comprises a plurality of sections fitted together along their
    adjacent edges, or(c) the projectile includes an imitation of either such
    opening and closing means therefor or such fitted together outer surface
    sections thereof; and wherein the opening and closing means of the
    projectile, the fitted together outer surface sections of the projectile,
    or the imitation of either is expressly disclosed as enhancing the grip of
    a user's hand on the projectile.


CLS 473/598
TXT Comprising casing or cover having stitched seam or laced closure; blank for
    such casing or cover (e.g., casing of baseball, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 569 (a) comprising an enclosing outermost
    layer or envelope overlaid or intended to be overlaid over the centrally
    disposed part of a projectile of the type having a centrally disposed
    member enclosed by an outermost layer or envelope and wherein the outermost
    layer or envelope either (1) is formed from two or more pieces of sheetlike
    material which have been joined to one another at or near to their adjacent
    edges by sewing with thread, string, yarn, gut, filament, cord, or the
    like, or (2) has an opening formed therein, the edges of which have, at
    least somewhat, been drawn together by drawing a string, ribbon, cord, gut,
    or the like through eyelets or their equivalent located near the edges of
    the opening, (b) comprising one or more pieces of sheetlike material
    intended to be prepared to be made, when joined to others by sewing with
    thread, string, yarn, gut, filament, cord, or the like, into such an
    enclosing outermost layer or envelope having two or more pieces of
    sheetlike material joined together by sewing, or(c) comprising a piece of
    sheetlike material intended to be prepared to be made, either by itself or
    when joined to others, into such an enclosing outermost layer or envelope
    having an opening formed therein.


CLS 473/599
TXT For distensible bladder (e.g., casing of football, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 598 wherein the casing or cover having a
    stitched seam or laced closure is specifically intended to enclose, define
    the shape of, and limit the size of a centrally disposed member in the from
    of a flexible and expandable, fluid-retaining bag, sack, etc. (e.g., a
    balloon, etc.).


CLS 473/600
TXT Having solid core within outer cover; core or cover therefor (e.g.,
    baseball, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 569 (a) wherein the projectile comprises a
    centrally disposed member composed of a substantially solid or foamed
    material which is devoid of any single void greater than about ten percent
    of the total volume of the projectile and wherein the centrally disposed
    member is overlaid by an enclosing outermost layer or envelope of material,
    (b) comprising such centrally disposed member for such a projectile, or (c)
    comprising such outermost enclosing layer or envelope for such a projectile.

    (1)     Note. Both the core or cover may themselves each be made up from
    one or more layers or windings of material, and there may be one or more
    additional layers or windings of material located between the core and
    cover.


CLS 473/601
TXT And having intermediate layer between core and cover or having core or
    cover composed of plural layers:

    Subject matter under subclass 600 (a) wherein there is a layer or winding
    of material located between the core and the cover or (b) wherein either
    the core itself or the cover itself is made up from two or more layers or
    windings of material.


CLS 473/602
TXT Having plural intermediate layers, at least one being of material diverse
    from material of core, cover, or another intermediate layer; or having core
    or cover composed of three or more layers, at least two being of diverse
    materials:

    Subject matter under subclass 601 (a) wherein there are at least two layers
    or windings of material located between the core and the cover, and either
    (1) the intervening layers or windings are not all of the same material, or
    (2) at least one of the intervening layers or windings is of a material
    different from the material of the core or from the material of the cover,
    or (b) wherein either the core itself or the cover itself is made up of at
    least three layers or windings and at least one of the layers or windings
    is of a material different from the material of at least one other layer or
    winding.


CLS 473/603
TXT Having fluid-retaining bladder removable from within enclosing cover or
    casing (e.g., football, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 569 wherein the projectile comprises a
    flexible and distensible fluid-retaining bag, sack, etc. (e.g., a balloon,
    etc.) removably retained within a shape-defining and size-limiting
    enclosing envelope.

    (1)     Note. The outer envelope (i.e., the cover or casing) may itself be
    flexible and somewhat distensible, but if it is, it must be much less
    freely distensible than the bladder, whereby when fluid is introduced into
    the bladder, it can expand to contact the inside of the envelope and then
    is restrained against further significant distension by the envelope.

    (2)     Note.  The bladder and envelope are usually unattached to each
    other, although they may be attached (as by a detachable adhesive) in such
    a way as to not impair removability of the bladder from the envelope.


CLS 473/604
TXT Having hollow core or bladder enclosed within cover (e.g., basketball,
    soccer ball, tennis ball, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 569 wherein the projectile comprises a
    centrally disposed member having therein at least one void greater than
    about ten percent of the total volume of the projectile and wherein the
    centrally disposed member is overlaid by an enclosing outermost layer or
    envelope of material.

    (1)     Note. Both the core or cover may themselves each be made up from
    one or more layers or windings of material, and there may be one or more
    additional layers or windings of material located between the core and
    cover.


CLS 473/605
TXT And having intermediate layer composed of wrapping of strands or strips
    between cover and core or bladder:

    Subject matter under subclass 604 wherein there is a layer of material
    located between the core or bladder and the cover, which layer of material
    comprises either (a) a long, (substantially longer than any circumference
    or periphery of the core or bladder) thin or narrow length of material
    (e.g., string, cord, fiber, ribbon, or the like material, etc.) wound many
    times around the core or bladder so as to cover substantially the entire
    outer surface of the core or bladder, or (b) a number of short, (shorter
    than any circumference or periphery of the core or bladder) thin or narrow
    lengths of material (e.g., string, cord, fiber, ribbon, or the like
    material, etc.) laid in abutting or overlapping relationship to each other
    so as to cover substantially the entire outer surface of the core or
    bladder.


CLS 473/606
TXT Cover is composed of feltlike, napped, or cloth material (e.g., tennis
    ball, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 604 wherein the cover (a) is composed of a
    fabric material formed by matting or compressing together a mass of natural
    or synthetic fibers, (b) has an outer layer of material having a soft
    fuzzy, downy, or hairy outer surface, or (c) has an outer layer of fabric
    material formed by weaving, knitting, or pressing together natural or
    synthetic fibers.


CLS 473/607
TXT Comprising cover for core; blank or closure therefor:

    Subject matter under subclass 569 (a) comprising an enclosing outermost
    layer or envelope intended to be overlaid over the centrally disposed part
    of a projectile of the type having a centrally disposed member enclosed by
    an outermost layer or envelope, (b) comprising a piece of material intended
    to be prepared to be made, either by itself or when joined to others, into
    such an enclosing outermost layer or envelope, or (c) comprising a means
    for closing an opening located in such an outermost layer or envelope.


CLS 473/608
TXT Closure therefor:

    Subject matter under subclass 607 comprising a means for closing an opening
    located in the cover part of a projectile of the type having a central core
    enclosed by a cover.


CLS 473/609
TXT Having hollow, fluid-impervious shell, core, or bladder:

    Subject matter under subclass 569 (a) comprising (1) a hard or tough
    enclosing layer either forming part of or constituting a projectile
    (shell), (2) a centrally disposed member intended to be overlaid by an
    enclosing outermost layer or envelope (core), or (3) a flexible and
    distensible bag, sack, or the like either forming part of or constituting a
    projectile (bladder);(b) which shell, core, or bladder contains a void
    greater than about ten percent of the total volume of the shell, core, or
    bladder; and(c) which shell, core, or bladder is substantially impervious
    to passage therethrough of a liquid or gas intended to occupy the void.


CLS 473/610
TXT With sealable opening, valve, or inflation tube for insertion of fluid
    (e.g., beach ball, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 609 wherein the shell, core, or bladder
    includes an aperture communicating between the exterior thereof and the
    void for the insertion or egress of fluid into or from the void and (a) a
    means for completely closing off the aperture to prevent reflux of fluid
    from the void, (b) a mechanical device located in the opening for starting,
    stopping, or regulating the flow of fluid into or from the void, or (c) a
    hollow flexible cylinder or pipe extending from the aperture, which
    cylinder or pipe is capable of being tied off to prevent flow of fluid into
    or from the void.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes the combination of an opening, valve, or
    inflation tube and a projectile. Compare this with subclass 611 below which
    takes (a) an opening, valve, or inflation tube, per se, or (b) an opening,
    valve, or inflation tube and only so much of a projectile as is necessary
    to define the opening, valve, or inflation tube.


CLS 473/611
TXT Comprising opening, valve, or inflation tube for insertion of fluid:

    Subject matter under subclass 569 comprising (a) a breech or aperture for
    use in a game projectile for allowing passage of fluid into or from within
    the projectile (opening), (b) a mechanical device for use in a game
    projectile for starting, stopping, or regulating the flow of fluid into or
    from within the projectile (valve), or (c) a hollow flexible cylinder or
    pipe for use in a game projectile, which cylinder or pipe is capable of
    being tied off to prevent flow of fluid into or from within the projectile
    (inflation tube); and wherein the opening, valve, or inflation tube is
    intended to form part of or be used in a game projectile for introducing
    fluid into, or allowing escape of fluid from, the projectile.

    (1)     Note. This subclass takes (a) an opening, valve, or inflation tube,
    per se, or (b) an opening, valve, or inflation tube and only so much of a
    projectile as is necessary to define the opening, valve, or inflation tube.
    Compare this with subclass 610 above which takes the combination of an
    opening, valve, or inflation tube and a projectile.


CLS 473/612
TXT Having visible skeletal structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 569 wherein the projectile comprises an
    exposed array of interconnected or interwoven elements defining an outer
    surface resembling a structural framework, which surface is defined by gaps
    or openings which extend between adjacent elements and which are
    substantially uniformly or symmetrically distributed about the surface, and
    wherein the framework type of surface is capable of being readily seen by a
    person's sense of sight whenever the projectile is viewed thereby.


CLS 473/613
TXT Having fluid-dynamic means other than stitched seam or textured surface to
    alter, stabilize, or retard passage of projectile through the fluid (e.g.,
    spiral fluting to impart spin, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 569 wherein the projectile includes a means
    expressly disclosed as being intended to positively interact with the fluid
    through which the projectile is intended to travel for the purpose of
    changing or controlling its path of travel (including increasing or
    decreasing the length of that path) or for the purpose of increasing or
    maintaining the stability of the projectile during such travel (e.g., a
    projectile having spiral fluting to impart spin to the projectile in order
    to enhance its gyroscopic stability).

    (1)     Note. Although a stitched seam or textured surface disposed upon
    the surface of a projectile (e.g., the stitched seam on the surface of a
    baseball, etc.) may constitute a fluid-dynamic means to alter, stabilize,
    or retard the passage of the projectile through the fluid in which it is
    moving, projectiles having such stitched seam or textured surface are
    specifically excluded from this subclass.


CLS 473/614
TXT Having projections extending outwardly from external surface or consisting
    of a mass of radially oriented filaments:

    Subject matter under subclass 569 wherein the projectile includes one or
    more gross protuberances extending outwardly from the surface (as opposed
    to simply a textured surface) of the projectile or wherein the projectile
    consists almost entirely of a bunch of strands extending generally radially
    outwardly from a common gathering locus.


CLS 473/615
TXT Player held or worn means for enhancing movement of projected projectile
    (e.g., a handheld, ball-curving assist means, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 569 comprising an accessory independent of
    but intended to cooperate with a projectile whenever it is thrown or
    otherwise projected, which accessory is intended to enhance a component of
    movement (e.g., spin, curvature in flight, speed, etc.) of the projectile
    whenever it is thrown or otherwise projected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    613,    for an aerial projectile which itself has means for enhancing its
    movement as it moves through the air.

    FOREIGN ART COLLECTIONS

    The definitions for FOR 100-FOR 229 below correspond to the definitions of
    the abolished subclassesunder Class 273 from which these collections were
    formed. See the Foreign Art Collections schedule for specific
    correspondences.  [Note:  The titles and definitions for indented art
    collections include all the details of the one(s) that are hierarchically
    superior.]


CLS 473/FOR100
TXT Foreign art collection including devices  relating to the game of
    basketball.


CLS 473/FOR102
TXT Foreign art collection including devices relating to the game of baseball.


CLS 473/FOR103
TXT Foreign art collection including devices for perfecting the
    playing of the game.


CLS 473/FOR110
TXT Foreign art collection including devices relating to protecting
    covers for the playing field.


CLS 473/FOR111
TXT  Foreign art collection including devices for the use of a pitcher
    for assisting in making a thrown ball take a curve.


CLS 473/FOR112
TXT  Foreign art collection including devices relating to the game of tennis.


CLS 473/FOR113
TXT  Foreign art collection including devices which are used in
    playing that form of tennis known as table tennis.


CLS 473/FOR114
TXT  Foreign art collection including devices relating to strips used
    to mark the outline of a tennis court.


CLS 473/FOR124
TXT  Foreign art collection including devices relating to the game of football.


CLS 473/FOR129
TXT Foreign art collection including devices relating to the game of croquet.


CLS 473/FOR130
TXT Foreign art collection including devices in which the game is
    played on a table and board.


CLS 473/FOR131
TXT  HOPSCOTCH:

    Foreign art collection including apparatus relating to the game of
    hopscotch.


CLS 473/FOR132
TXT HOCKEY:

    Foreign art collection including apparatus relating to the game of hockey.


CLS 473/FOR133
TXT FENCING:

    Foreign art collection including apparatus under the class definition
    relating to the game of fencing.


CLS 473/FOR134
TXT Foreign art collection including devices known as balls.


CLS 473/FOR135
TXT Foreign art collection including balls for use in playing baseball.


CLS 473/FOR139
TXT  Foreign art collection including balls for use in playing tennis.


CLS 473/FOR143
TXT  Foreign art collection including balls for use in playing
    football or basketball.


CLS 473/FOR168
TXT Foreign art collection including devices comprising bats, mallets,
    rackets, and billies.


CLS 473/FOR169
TXT Foreign art collection including devices used in playing baseball.


CLS 473/FOR171
TXT Foreign art collection including devices used in playing tennis,
    commonly known as rackets.


CLS 473/FOR172
TXT Foreign art collection including devices for holding a tennis
    racket which also act as a press to hold the racket against warping.


CLS 473/FOR173
TXT Foreign art collection including devices relating to means for
    improving the grip of the racket against slipping the player's hand.


CLS 473/FOR174
TXT Foreign art collection including devices used in table tennis.


CLS 473/FOR186
TXT  Foreign art collection including devices relating to the game of croquet.


CLS 473/FOR187
TXT Foreign art collection including devices relating to clubs or
    billies used by police officers.


CLS 473/FOR196
TXT Combined projector and catcher:

    Foreign art collection including apparatus comprising a handheld projector
    means for throwing or launching a projectile into the air and wherein the
    projector means is either (a) also used as means for catching a thrown or
    launched projectile, or (b) includes an additional means for catching a
    thrown or launched projectile.


CLS 473/FOR197
TXT Tethered projectile:

    Foreign art collection including apparatus wherein the projectile is
    secured by a tether to the projector-catcher means.


CLS 473/FOR198
TXT Pocketed catcher:

    Foreign art collection including apparatus under subclass 319 wherein the
    catcher means is either (a) in the form of a closed bottom receptacle which
    is intended to stop and retain the projectile, or (b) in the form of a
    through-aperture which is intended to stop, trap, and retain the projectile.


CLS 473/FOR199
TXT Elastic tether:

    Foreign art collection including apparatus wherein the tether is flexible
    and is comprised of elastic or resilient means.


CLS 473/FOR200
TXT Separate entrance and exit (e.g., continuous orbit, etc.):

    Foreign art collection including apparatus wherein the projector means and
    the catcher means are separate but interconnected by a passageway, conduit,
    trackway, or surface formed in the apparatus for conducting the projectile,
    when caught, from the catcher means to the projector means while remaining
    with the apparatus.


CLS 473/FOR201
TXT Pocketed projector and catcher:

    Foreign art collection including apparatus wherein either (a) the projector
    means is also used as the catcher means and is in the form of either a
    closed-bottom receptacle or an apertured receptacle, the receptacle, in
    performing its catching function, is intended to stop, trap, and retain the
    projectile, or (b) the projector means and the catcher means are separate
    portions of the apparatus and both the projector means and the catcher
    means are in the form of either a closed-bottom receptacle or an apertured
    receptacle, the catcher means receptacle being intended to stop, trap, and
    retain the projectile.


CLS 473/FOR202
TXT Mechanical projection:

    Foreign art collection including apparatus wherein the projector means
    includes a mechanically operated means associated with the receptacle for
    achieving or assisting the launching of a projectile into the air.


CLS 473/FOR203
TXT Pocket-to-pocket:

    Foreign art collection including apparatus wherein the receptacle of the
    projector means and the receptacle of the catcher means are separate
    portions of the apparatus so that the projectile is launched from one
    receptacle and caught by another receptacle.


CLS 473/FOR204
TXT Transversely extending pocket (e.g., lacrosse stick):

    Foreign art collection including apparatus wherein the projector means is
    also used as the catcher means and the projector-catcher means is in the
    form of a closed-bottom receptacle, and wherein the apparatus includes an
    elongated handle member attached to and extending outwardly from the
    closed-bottom receptacle such that the open portion of the receptacle faces
    in a direction generally perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the
    handle member so that the apparatus has a general configuration somewhat
    similar to a spoon-shaped utensil.


CLS 473/FOR205
TXT Impaling, hooking, or ensnaring type catcher:

    Foreign art collection including apparatus wherein (a) the
    projector-catcher means is in the form of a rodlike protrusion and the
    projectile includes means adapting the projectile to be received upon the
    rodlike protrusion, or (b) the projector-catcher means includes means to
    trap or ensnare a projectile in flight, which trapping or ensnaring means
    is configured to allow reprojection of the trapped or ensnared projectile
    upon manipulation of the apparatus by the user; and the projectile has
    cooperating means adapted to be removably trapped or ensnared upon the
    projector-catcher means.


CLS 473/FOR206
TXT Pocketed catcher-separate projector:

    Foreign art collection including apparatus wherein the catcher means is
    either (a) in the form of a closed-bottom receptacle which is intended to
    stop and retain the projectile, or (b) in the form of a through-aperture
    which is intended to stop, trap, and retain the projectile, and wherein the
    projector means and the catcher means are separate but interconnected
    portions of the apparatus.


CLS 473/FOR207
TXT Tipcat game, projectile therefor, or accessory:

    Foreign art collection including game in which a generally elongated
    projectile, which is initially lying at rest on a surface or projectile
    support structure, is intended to be struck from above on an end portion
    thereof by handheld striking implement so that it is projected end over end
    into the air either (a) directly toward a distant area or target, or (b)
    reprojected toward a distant area or target by being again struck or batted
    by the striking implement while the projectile is in the air.


CLS 473/FOR208
TXT Projectile or target having suction cup:

    Foreign art collection including apparatus including either (a) a
    projectile having resilient cup-shaped means thereon so that, when the
    projectile strikes a target surface or other projectile-receiving surface,
    it will adhere to and be retained on the target surface or
    projectile-receiving surface, or (b) a target device comprising a surface
    having resilient cup shaped means thereon so that a projectile, upon
    striking the cup shaped means, will adhere to and be retained upon the
    cup-shaped means.


CLS 473/FOR209
TXT Projectile or target having magnetized material for adherence therebetween:

    Foreign art collection including apparatus including either (a) a
    projectile formed from or having thereon a magnet, which projectile is
    intended to be used with a target device or other projectile-receiving
    surface comprising a magnet or magnetically susceptible material, so that
    the projectile, or a separable portion thereof, will adhere to and be
    retained upon the target device or projectile-receiving surface upon
    contact therewith; or (b) a target device formed from or having thereon a
    magnet, which target device is intended to be used with a projectile formed
    from or having thereon a magnet, or magnetically susceptible material, so
    that the projectile, or a separable portion thereof, will adhere to and be
    retained upon the target device upon contact therewith.


CLS 473/FOR210
TXT Projectile or target having complementary bristled, micro-hooked,
    or looped material for adherence therebetween (e.g., VelcroR material,
    etc.):

    Foreign art collection including apparatus including either (a) a
    projectile formed from or having thereon a material containing a very large
    number of closely spaced bristles, microsized hooks, or microsized loops
    thereon, and the projectile is intended to be used with a target device or
    other projectile-receiving surface having complementary projections or
    bristles, microsized loops, micro-sized hooks so that the projectile, or a
    separable portion thereof, will adhere to and be retained upon the target
    device or surface upon contact therewith; or (b) a target device comprising
    a surface formed from or having thereon a material containing a very large
    number of closely spaced bristles, microsized hooks, or microsized loops
    thereon, and the target device is intended to be used with a projectile
    having complementary projections or bristles, micro-sized loops, or
    microsized hooks so that the projectile, or a separable portion thereof,
    will adhere to and be retained upon the target device upon contact
    therewith.


CLS 473/FOR211
TXT Projectile or target having complementary means for nonpenetrating
    adherence therebetween (e.g., tacky surface, etc.):

    Foreign art collection including apparatus including either (a) a
    projectile formed from or having thereon nonpuncturing means for adhering
    and retaining the projectile, or a separable portion thereof, to a target
    surface without rupturing or forming an opening in the target surface, or
    (b) a target device comprising a surface formed from or having thereon
    nonpuncturable means for adhering and retaining thereon a projectile, or a
    separable portion thereof impacting upon but not penetrating into the
    surface.


CLS 473/FOR212
TXT Playing field or court game; or accessory therefor (e.g.,
    volleyball, soccer, etc.):

    Foreign art collection including apparatus including (a) a generally
    horizontal area defined by a marked boundary or enclosure, which area has a
    size sufficient to enable one or more participants located within the area
    to use an aerial projectile in playing a game or sport within the area, or
    (b) an accessory which is particularly adapted for use with a game or sport
    played within the area defined by a marked boundary or enclosure and which
    is intended to facilitate either the defining of the boundary or the
    further marking or defining of the area within the boundary into zones of
    play, or (c) means to enable a participant to practice or train for a game
    or sport normally played on or within the area defined by a marked boundary
    or enclosure.


CLS 473/FOR213
TXT Tethered projectile:

    Foreign art collection including projectile having an elongated tethering
    means secured thereto and wherein the tethering means either (a) is adapted
    to be secured to a support means for retaining the projectile thereto
    within the extent of the tethering means whenever the projectile is thrown,
    projected, impelled, or launched into the air, or (b) includes means
    adapted to be engageable with a body portion of the participant so as to
    retain the projectile to the body portion within the extent of the
    tethering means whenever the projectile is thrown, projected, impelled, or
    launched into the air.


CLS 473/FOR214
TXT Tethered to means engageable with human body part (e.g., handheld
    means or means attachable to human body part):

    Foreign art collection including projectile wherein the tethering means
    includes means adapted and intended to be engageable with a body portion of
    the participant so as to retain the projectile to the body portion within
    the extent of the tethering means whenever the projectile is thrown,
    projected, impelled, or launched into the air.


CLS 473/FOR215
TXT Scattershot projectile or beanbag projectile:

    Foreign art collection including projectile either (a) including means for
    carrying a plurality of additional projectiles therewith and wherein the
    projectile includes means to release or to project the additional
    projectiles therefrom whenever the projectile is thrown, projected,
    impelled, or launched into the air or while the projectile is moving
    through the air, or (b) comprising a flexible body filled with a quantity
    of loose particulate material.


CLS 473/FOR216
TXT Arrow, dart, shuttlecock, or element thereof:

    Foreign art collection including projectile or an element thereof in the
    form of an elongated missile adapted to be thrown, projected, impelled, or
    launched into the air by a bow, crossbow, or other projector, or by hand,
    and wherein the elongated missile includes two or more of the following
    elements; a target-contacting head portion, feathering or other flight
    guiding or stabilizing means, or projector engaging means.


CLS 473/FOR217
TXT Shuttlecock:

    Foreign art collection including elongated missile having, in addition to
    flight guiding or stabilizing means, a resilient end portion adapted to be
    struck by a projector, or by the hand or foot of a user.


CLS 473/FOR218
TXT Material dispensing upon impact or having fluid conducting means:

    Foreign art collection including elongated missile either (a) having means,
    actuated by contact with a target device, for producing smoke or flame, or
    for releasing a liquid, gaseous, or particulate material carried by the
    elongated missile, or (b) including a fluid passage extending from a
    location adjacent the target-contacting head portion to a location adjacent
    the tail end of the elongated missile; the fluid passage being also in
    fluid communication with locations on the outer surface of the elongated
    missile; so that when the elongated missile strikes and penetrates into a
    target, fluid may be passed between the interior of the target and the
    exterior of the target by means of the fluid passage formed in or on the
    elongated missile.


CLS 473/FOR219
TXT Head structure:

    Foreign art collection including elongated missile either (a) consisting of
    the target-contacting head end portion of the elongated missile, or (b)
    comprising the target-contacting head end portion of the elongated missile
    whenever significance is attributed to the head end portion of the
    elongated missile.


CLS 473/FOR220
TXT And vane structure (i.e., flight guiding or stabilizing means):

    Foreign art collection including elongated missile further comprising the
    feathering or other flight guiding or stabilizing means of the elongated
    missile in addition to the target-contacting head portion.


CLS 473/FOR221
TXT Broadhead:

    Foreign art collection including head structure wherein the
    target-contacting head portion comprises a sharp, razorlike blade means
    adapted to cut a target.


CLS 473/FOR222
TXT Interchangeable blade:

    Foreign art collection including a means for attaching the razorlike blade
    means to the elongated missile aaand wherein the blade means are removably
    mounted to the attaching means to enable replecement of the blade means
    with other identical blade means.


CLS 473/FOR223
TXT Vane structure (i.e., flight guiding or stabilizing means):

    Foreign art collection including elongated missile either (1) consisting of
    feathering or other flight guiding or stabilizing means, or (2) comprising
    feathering or other flight guiding or stabilizing means whenever
    significance is attributed to the guiding or stabilizing means of the
    elongated missile; and wherein the guiding or stabilizing means is intended
    to (a) maintain the elongated missile airborne or aloft for longer periods
    of time, (b) stabilize the missile, (c) provide drag on the missile, or (d)
    produce actions typical of aircraft.


CLS 473/FOR224
TXT Disc or ring projectile:

    Foreign art collection including projectile comprising a body having a
    generally flattened shape and a generally regular continuous peripheral
    configuration.


CLS 473/FOR225
TXT Ring:

    Foreign art collection including projectile wherein the flattened body has
    one or more apertures extending entirely through the body from top to
    bottom when it is positioned horizontally.


CLS 473/FOR226
TXT Boomerang projectile:

    Foreign art collection including projectile comprising a body having an
    aerodynamic configuration such that when the body is thrown by a thrower,
    the body returns along a continuous path to the thrower while still
    airborne.


CLS 473/FOR227
TXT Horseshoe projectile:

    Foreign art collection including projectile comprising a body having two or
    more interconnected arms defining between them a generally U-shaped opening
    which is adapted to partially encircle a post target member.


CLS 473/FOR228
TXT  Nonspherical projectile:

    Foreign art collection including projectile comprising a body in which the
    distance between at least one point on the peripheral surface of the body
    and the geometrical center of the body is different from the distance
    between all other points on the peripheral surface of the body and the
    geometrical center of the body.


CLS 473/FOR229
TXT Foreign art collection including devices comprising projectiles
    for use in surface projectile games.


CLS 474/
TTL ENDLESS BELT POWER  TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS  OR COMPONENTS

CLS 474/
TXT I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    A.      This is the generic class for a power transmission system wherein a
    power input pulley* is in driving engagement with a belt* for advancing the
    belt along an endless path of travel and wherein a power output pulley is
    engaged with the belt at a position along such endless path to be driven by
    the belt and supply power for driving a load; or for a component part or
    auxiliary device intended for use in such system and not provided for
    elsewhere.

    B.      This is also the generic class for structure, per se, in the form
    of a pulley*, guide roll* or other belt*-contacting structure for driving,
    guiding, tensioning, or shifting the belt, or for such structure in
    combination with a nominally claimed belt.

    II.     EXPLANATORY NOTES ON THE SCOPE AND FORMATION OF THE CLASS AND LINE
    NOTES WITH OTHER CLASSES

    (1)     Note.  A method or apparatus for manufacturing a device of this
    class is not found herein, but is found in an appropriate manufacturing
    class.  See, for example, Class 29, Metal Working, especially subclasses
    892+; Class 59, Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making; and Class 156,
    especially subclasses 137+.

    (2)     Note.  A nominal recitation of a load device in combination with
    and driven by the power transmission system defined in the above paragraph
    1 of the GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER will not exclude a
    patent from being placed in this class.

    (3)     Note.  A belt*, per se, is found in numerous classes as will be
    exemplified in the search and line notes below. Unless a line note is
    specifically provided in the SEARCH CLASS notes below, a patent claiming a
    belt, per se, is properly classified in this or another class providing for
    such belt if the sole disclosure is for subject matter provided for in such
    class, or in Class 428 depending on the line established between such class
    and Class 428.  If there is disclosure for multiple intended uses for the
    belt, one of which is for a power transmission system as defined in the
    above paragraph 1 of the GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER, then
    the patent is properly classified in this class (474) unless there is at
    least one claim specific to the intended use in another class, in which
    instance classification is in the other class.

    (4)     Note.  Classes 198, 226, and 254 provide specifically for a device,
    per se, in the nature of a pulley*, guide roll*, or other device for
    advancing, guiding, or directing a cable or web of flexible or articulated
    material, which may be endless, along an intended path of travel.  In Class
    198, the intended use of such device is in connection with an endless
    conveyor.  In Class 226, the intended use of such device is in connection
    with feeding of material of indefinite length to a station where an
    operation is to be performed on the material.  In Class 254, the intended
    use of such device is in connection with a cable for applying a pushing or
    pulling force to an object to be moved. In each of these classes, line
    notes should be inspected as to the line between themselves or between
    other classes.  However, the line between these other classes (198, 226,
    and 254) and this class (474) is as follows:

    (a)     If the sole disclosure of the device, per se, mentioned above is
    for intended use in a system provided for in paragraph 1 of the GENERAL
    STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER of this class (474) or if the disclosure
    is unclear as to intended use but it is apparent that the device may be
    used in said system, classification is in this class (474).

    (b)     If the sole disclosure of the device, per se, mentioned above is
    for intended use in connection with the kind of device identified above
    with regard to one of the other classes (198, 226, or 254), then
    classification is in such other classes.

    (c)     If there is disclosure of multiple intended uses for the device,
    one of which is appropriate for the system provided for in paragraph 1 of
    the GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER of this class (474), then
    classification is in this class unless there is at least one claim specific
    to the intended use in one of the other classes (198, 226, or 254), in
    which instance classification is in the other class.

    (5)     Note.  This class was formed from patents in Class 74, subclasses
    216.5-258 (inclusive), and in Class 74, subclasses 611 and 722.  Regarding
    class superiority as between this class (474) and Class 74, all subclasses
    appearing in the Class 74 schedule above subclass 640 are superior to the
    class.  Furthermore, a combination of a device of this subclass with a
    Class 74 device as may be found in Class 74, subclasses 650, 655,  661,
    664, 670,  718, 720, 721, 745+, or  190-216.3 (inclusive) is considered
    superior to this class.  This class is superior to all other subclasses in
    Class 74 indented under subclass 640 and to all other subclasses coordinate
    with Class 74, subclass 640, but lower in the Class 74 schedule than
    subclass 640.

    (6)     Note.  Caveat.  Other than the patents involved in the formation of
    this class as identified in (5) Note above, no other subclasses in Class 74
    or any other class were screened; and so, when appropriate other search
    areas in Class 74 and in the classes indentified in the Search Notes below
    should be given consideration.

    III.    GLOSSARY OF TERMS

    The following Glossary will define certain terms used in the class and
    subclass definitions of this class so as to facilitate understanding and
    simplify such definitions.

    BELT

    A power transferring member forming an endless loop and constructed of
    flexible material or of articulated rigid links to permit the member to
    conform to a radius of curvature of a pulley* drive face and intended, in
    use, to be driven in an endless path; and, by contact with the pulley drive
    face, to transmit power to or extract power from the pulley.

    PULLEY

    A device rotatable about an axis and having a drive face radially spaced
    from the axis of rotation for intended power transferring engagement with a
    belt* to drive the belt on its endless path or to extract power from the
    belt to drive an output load device.

    GUIDE ROLL

    A device rotatable about an axis and having a belt*-contacting face
    radially spaced from the axis of rotation for intended engagement with the
    belt to aid in directing the belt along an intended path of travel.  A
    guide roll, as distinguished from a pulley*, is not intended to provide
    driving power to, or extract power from, a belt.

    IV.     SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, particularly subclasses
    256.5+ for a cleaning device mounted to act on a moving surface, and see
    (1) Note following the definition of subclass 92 of this class (474) for a
    statement of the line.

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, particularly subclasses 210+ for sash cord
    guide.

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, particularly subclasses 244+ for a
    fiber drafting apron in the form of an endless band; and subclasses 240+
    for a variable speed device operating in connection with a fiber drafting
    roll.

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., particularly subclasses 31+ for a
    device for connecting opposite ends of a band to form a belt*.  A
    connector, per se, is in Class 24, but a connector claimed in combination
    with belt structure is in this class (474).

    29,     Metal Working, particularly subclasses 892+ for a method of making
    a pulley* or guide roll*.

    30,     Cutlery, particularly subclasses 380 and 381+ for a
    hand-manipulable cutting implement in the form of an endless band or chain.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, particularly subclass
    21 for an aparatus for forming an endless band by a twisting or twining
    operation; subclasses 104+ for a belt* power transmission for driving a
    spinning, twisting, or twining mechanism; and subclass 201 for an endless
    band formed by a spinning, twisting, or twining operation.

    59,     Chain, Staple, and Horseshoe Making, particularly subclasses 1+ for
    a method or apparatus for making a chain; and subclasses 78+ for a general
    purpose or ornamental chain.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 409.15 for apparatus to apply a
    deformable metal belt clip.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses for other
    power transmission systems and components, and see (5) Note in section II
    above.

    83,     Cutting, particularly subclasses 788+ for cutting device in the
    form of an endless band or chain.  Regarding Class 83 or any other cutting
    class, a patent claiming a belt*, per se, for carrying a cutting element is
    classified in this class (474) unless there is a claim reciting a cutting
    element, such as a cutting tip or blade which is to perform a cutting
    function.

    104,    Railways, subclasses 172.1+ and 173.1+ for chain or cable car
    propelling means.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, particularly subclasses 101+ for a rolling
    stock wheel or axle drive system in the form of a belt* and pulley* drive;
    and subclasses 105+ for a belt tightener for such a drive system.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, particularly subclass 36 for a
    coating or plastic composition used to enhance friction grip such as on a
    pulley*.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    particularly subclasses 137+ for a method of making a belt*, and see (1)
    Note in section II above.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, particularly subclasses 348+ for
    an endless band forming mold used in producing liquid laid fibrous
    products; subclass 257 for automatic control of transverse movement of such
    a forming mold; and subclass 273 for means to maintain a desired degree of
    tension in an endless forming surface.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, particularly subclasses 230, 231, 239, 241, 251,
    350+, 357, 366, and  373 for a motor vehicle including an endless band for
    transmitting drive to the wheels.

    184,    Lubrication, appropriate subclasses for lubrication systems in
    general, and particularly subclasses 15.1+ for a chain or cable lubricator.
     If the structure of a belt*, pulley* or guide roll* is modified for the
    purpose of facilitating admission of lubricant, classification is in Class
    474, but lubrication devices and systems are in Class 184.

    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, or Animal Powered, particularly subclass
    16 for a belt* intended to be driven by an animal treading on the belt.

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclasses 251+ for means for raising or lowering an elevator car which
    includes a car supporting cable.

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, particularly subclasses 63+
    for a trolley head mounted for rolling contact with an electric conductor.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, particularly subclasses 804+ for an
    endless conveyor, and see the line notes in section II above.  See also a
    listing of the other classes having structure pertinent to an endless
    conveyor following the definition of subclass 804 in Class 198, and a
    listing of classes pertinent to belt* tighteners following the definition
    of subclass 813 in Class 198.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, particularly subclasses 119.02+ for an endless
    cable clothesline with supporting and tightening structure.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for structure for driving or guiding material of indeterminate length, and
    see the line note in section II above.

    242,    Winding and Reeling, appropriate subclasses for a reel, spool,
    guide, or tensioning device used in connection with winding of flexible
    material.

    248,    Supports, particularly subclasses 646+ for a support for a movable
    machine wherein adjustability may provide a belt*-tensioning feature.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force,
    appropriate subclasses for a drum or guide intended to be used in
    connection with a cable for applying a pulling or pushing force to an
    object to be moved, and see the lines notes in section II above.

    280,    Land Vehicles, particularly subclasses 250 and 261 for a land
    vehicle having a belt or chain power transmission.

    305,    Wheel Substitutes for Land Vehicles, appropriate subclasses for an
    endless track intended for use as a wheel substitute on a land vehicle.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, for electric motor control, and
    particularly subclasses 6+ for control of tension in material being driven;
    subclass 10 for control of forward or reverse of a device being driven;
    subclass 11 for control for variable speed of a device being driven; and
    subclass 15 for electric motor driven gearing including belt and pulley
    drive systems.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 42 for control for
    a belt drive in such a system; and subclass 43 for control of belt slip.

    384,    Bearings, appropriate subclasses for bearings, per se, which may be
    used with a pully* or guide roll*.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 162+ for photoconductive belt
    members and subclasses 297+ for transfer, particularly subclass 313 for
    roller or belt electrostatic transfer.

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for connections, per
    se, and particularly subclasses 230+ for a connection between the side of a
    member and a rod extending transverse thereto.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for stock material, and see the reference to Class 474 in sections V and VI
    of the class definition of Class 428.

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 105 and 110+ for dental apparatus including
    an endless belt transmission.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 296+ for an abrading tool comprising an
    endless band; and subclass 311 for a tightener for an abrading band.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, particularly subclasses 51+ for a flexible connection
    between a shaft and a driven member.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components for planetary
    gear transmissions combined with a device of Class 474.

    477,    Interrelated Power Delivery Controls, Including Engine Control,
    especially subclasses 44+ for interrelated engine and belt-type
    transmission control.


    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 474/1
TXT CONTROL FOR FORWARD AND REVERSE:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein mechanism is provided for
    changing the direction of rotation of an output load driving member from
    clockwise to counterclockwise or vice versa.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 37 and 89.2+ for
    mechanical movements for motion conversion using belt and pulley drive
    means, and appropriate subclass under 640+ for other gearing and gearing
    combination having reversing means.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 10 for control of
    forward and reverse in a device being driven.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission  Systems or Components, appropriate
    subclasses, for planetary gearing systems having reversing means.






CLS 474/2
TXT Cyclical or sequential (e.g., machine controlled, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the mechanism functions to
    periodically change the direction of rotation of the load driving member
    according to a predetermined program without operator intervention.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for cyclical or sequential operation in a variable speed
    arrangement.


CLS 474/3
TXT Including device for shifting belt laterally of its direction of
    run:Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the mechanism includes a member
    for moving a belt* in either of opposite directions parallel to the
    longitudinal extent of the rotational axis of a pulley*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      80+, 83, 102+, and 122+, for other structure involving lateral
    shift of a belt such as for reversing the direction of rotation of a load
    driving member, for causing a change in speed ratio, for removing a belt
    from a pulley, or for correcting belt training deviation.



CLS 474/4
TXT Including separate belts for forward and reverse:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein separate belts* are selectively
    engageable in power transmitting relationship between a power input member
    and the power output load driving member, one of the belts being engaged
    when it is desired to drive the load driving member clockwise, and the
    other of the belts being engaged when it is desired to drive the load
    driving member counterclockwise.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73+,    for a variable speed drive arrangement using plural belts.

    84+,    for a belt and pulley drive including a plurality of separate belts.



CLS 474/5
TXT Belt selection by shifting or tightening belt:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 wherein selective engagement or
    disengagement of a belt* is accomplished by moving the belt into or from
    power transmitting engagement with a pulley*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for a device for tightening a belt on a pulley associated with a
    variable speed drive.

    101+,   for a device for adjusting belt tension.



CLS 474/6
TXT Including device for shifting belt laterally of its direction of
    run:Subject matter under subclass 5 wherein the mechanism includes a member
    for moving a belt* in either of opposite directions parallel to the
    longitudinal extent of the rotational axis of a pulley*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      80+, 83, 102+, and 122+, for other structure involving lateral
    shift of a belt such as for reversing the direction of rotation of a load
    driving member, for causing change in speed ratio, for removing a belt from
    a pulley, or for correcting belt training deviation.



CLS 474/7
TXT Including coaxial pulleys rotated in opposite directions by single endless
    belt simultaneously engaging both pulleys:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including two pulleys* mounted for rotation
    about a common axis and wherein a single endless belt* is in driving
    engagement with both pulleys, the belt being so arranged relative to the
    pulleys that movement of the belt along its path of travel concurrently
    drives one pulley in a clockwise direction and the other pulley in a
    counterclockwise direction.


CLS 474/8
TXT PULLEY WITH BELT-RECEIVING GROOVE FORMED BY DRIVE FACES ON RELATIVELY
    AXIALLY MOVABLE COAXIAL CONFRONTING MEMBERS (E.G., EXPANSIBLE CONE PULLEY,
    ETC.):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a pulley* includes a pair
    of separate components having belt*-engaging surfaces facing each other for
    receiving a belt in the space between such surfaces, the components being
    mounted for relative adjustment toward and away from each other in
    directions generally parallel to the longitudinal extent of the axis of
    rotation of the pulley to increase or decrease the extent of gripping force
    exerted by the surfaces on the belt or to increase or decrease the
    effective diameter of the pulley.


CLS 474/9
TXT Members are gripping jaws actuated during each rotation of pulley:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 wherein during each full revolution of the
    pulley* there is a first period of time when opposed belt*-engaging
    surfaces are in driving engagement with the belt, and a second period of
    time when opposed belt-engaging surfaces are out of driving engagement with
    the belt, and wherein the components are mounted for relative cyclical
    movement accomplished by interaction with the belt or by an auxiliary
    device, whereby during the second period of time the belt-engaging surfaces
    are separated to facilitate exit and entrance of the belt from and to the
    space between the surfaces, and whereby the belt engaging surfaces have
    relative movement to a position toward each other during the first period
    of time to increase the engagement force of the surfaces with the belt.


CLS 474/10
TXT Via relatively rotating cam and follower:

    zSubject matter under subclass 9 including relatively rotating elements
    having actuating surfaces in rolling or sliding engagement with each other,
    said actuating surfaces being so contoured with respect to each other, and
    so associated with respect to one of said belt*-engaging components that
    relative rotation between such actuating surfaces is converted into said
    relative cyclical movement of said one of said belt-engaging components.



CLS 474/11
TXT Speed responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 including means for sensing velocity or
    change of velocity of a load device or of a member operating in a drive
    train to drive the load device; and, responsive to such sensed velocity or
    change of velocity, said means acts to alter the relative axial position of
    said components.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50      and 70, for other arrangements using a speed responsive actuator in
    a belt and pulley drive system.


CLS 474/12
TXT And load responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 11 further including means for sensing
    resistance to movement or change in resistance to movement of a load device
    or of a member in a drive train to drive the load device; and, in response
    to such sensed resistance or change of resistance to movement, said means
    acts to alter the relative axial position of said components.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17+,    50, 70, and 109, for other arrangements using a load responsive
    actuator in a belt and pulley drive system.



CLS 474/13
TXT To centrifugal force:

    Subject matter under subclass 11 wherein the means for sensing the velocity
    or change of velocity is mounted for rotation with a rotatable member and
    includes a material or part movable outwardly by inertial force from the
    axis of rotation of the rotatable member.


CLS 474/14
TXT Via pivoted weight:

    Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein the part movable outwardly by
    inertial force comprises a device pivotal about a fixed axis.


CLS 474/15
TXT Via ball:

    Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein the part movable outwardly by
    inertial force comprises one or more spherically shaped devices.



CLS 474/16
TXT Via liquid:

    Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein the material movable outwardly by
    inertial force is a liquid.


CLS 474/17
TXT Load responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 including means for sensing resistance to
    movement or change in resistance to movement of a load device or of a
    member in a drive train to drive the load device; and, in response to such
    sensed resistance or change of resistance to movement, said means acts to
    alter the relative axial position of said components.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for a combined speed and load responsive device for altering the
    relative axial position of coaxial confronting drive faces.

    50,     70, and 109, for other arrangements using a load responsive
    actuator in a belt and pulley drive system.


CLS 474/18
TXT With actuator driven by electrical or fluid motor:

    Subject matter under subclass 17 wherein the means for altering the
    relative axial position of the components is accomplished with the help of
    force derived from or transmitted via electrical energy or the exertion of
    force upon a fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     51, 103+, and 110, for other arrangements using an electrical or
    fluid motor as a drive for an actuator in a belt and pulley drive system.


CLS 474/19
TXT Via relatively rotating cam and follower:

    Subject matter under subclass 17 wherein the means responsive to the sensed
    resistance or change of resistance to movement includes relatively rotating
    elements having actuating surfaces in rolling or sliding engagement with
    each other, said actuating surfaces being so contoured with respect to each
    other, and so associated with respect to one of said belt*-engaging
    components that relative rotation between such actuating surfaces is
    converted into axial movement of one of said belt-engaging components.




CLS 474/20
TXT Including interengaged threads:

    Subject matter under subclass 19 wherein each of the relatively rotating
    elements is generally cylindrical in cross sectional configuration, a
    cylindrical wall of one of the elements having an external helical ridge
    forming an actuating surface, and a cylindrical wall of the other of the
    elements having an internal helical ridge forming a cooperating actuating
    surface; the two cylindrical elements being coaxially mounted with the
    external ridge of one interengaged with the internal ridge of the other so
    that relative rotation of the elements also causes relative axial movement
    of the elements and axial movement of a component associated with the
    axially moved element.


CLS 474/21
TXT Including plural separate cam and follower pairs for adjusting plural
    members:

    Subject matter under subclass 19 including an additional pair of relatively
    rotating elements having actuating surfaces in rolling or sliding
    engagement with each other, the additional pair of actuating surfaces being
    so contoured with respect to each other, and so associated with respect to
    an additional belt*-engaging component that relative rotation between such
    additional pair of actuating surfaces is converted into axial movement of
    the additional belt-engaging component.


CLS 474/22
TXT Temperature responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 including means to sense a condition or
    change of condition as regards heat or coldness of a member operating in a
    pulley* drive train or in the environment surrounding the drive train; and,
    in response to such sensed condition, or change of condition, said means
    acts to alter the relative axial position of said components.


CLS 474/23
TXT Adjusted by power from pulley drive train:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 wherein an auxiliary device is constantly
    rotated during rotation of the pulley* by the same source which causes
    rotation of the pulley, and such device supplies the force for relative
    adjustment of the pulley components.

    (1)     Note.  The auxiliary device may be separated from the pulley or may
    be a component integrally connected to, or forming a part of, the pulley.

    (2)     Note.  For a patent to be placed herein a human operator may
    selectively initiate the adjustment such as by selective clutch engagment,
    but the auxiliary device provides the sole actuating force.  If a human
    operator provides the actuating force, even though such force may be
    multiplied as through levers, screws, etc., the patent is placed in
    subclasses below such as 29+ or 37+.


CLS 474/24
TXT And member has plural, relatively axially movable drive faces:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 wherein at least one of the components is
    formed of a plurality of elements each having a belt-engaging surface, the
    elements of each component being adjustable with respect to each other in
    directions generally parallel to the longitudinal extent of the pulley*
    axis.




CLS 474/25
TXT And pulley shiftable laterally of its axis of rotation:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 wherein a pulley* is mounted for movement
    in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal extent of the pulley axis
    of rotation, the pulley which is so mounted either being the pulley having
    adjustable components or another pulley in the drive train.


CLS 474/26
TXT Mounted on laterally shiftable motor:

    Subject matter under subclass 25 wherein the pulley* is mounted on the
    shaft of a device which supplies the primary source of power for driving
    the pulley, said device with its shaft and pulley being movable in a
    direction perpendicular to the longitudinal extent of this shaft axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114+,   for an adjustable mounted motor which is movable such as for
    affecting the extent of drive traction between the belt and pulley.


CLS 474/27
TXT Mounted on laterally shiftable countershaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 25 wherein first and second belts* in a drive
    train are arranged in series driving relationship via an intermediate shaft
    carrying first and second pulleys*, and wherein said intermediate shaft is
    mounted for movement in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal
    extent of the axis of the intermediate shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89,     for a device having plural belts in series driving relationship
    interconnected via a laterally shiftable countershaft.


CLS 474/28
TXT Fluid pressure actuator for adjustment of member:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 wherein the relative adjustment of said
    belt*-engaging components is accomplished by energy derived from or
    transmitted via the exertion of force upon a fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     51, 103+, and 110, for other arrangements using an electrical or
    fluid motor as a drive for an actuator in a belt and pulley drive system.


CLS 474/29
TXT Including actuator interconnecting plural pulleys on spaced shafts for
    simultaneous adjustment:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 wherein each of a pair of spaced shafts
    carries a pulley* having adjustable belt*-engaging components and wherein a
    common motion-inducing member is interlinked with each pulley to provide
    concurrent axial adjustment of at least one of the adjustable components on
    each of the pulleys.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52+,    for mechanism for simultaneously adjusting plural pulleys of the
    kind provided for in subclasses 47+.


CLS 474/30
TXT For axial adjustment of each member on each pulley:

    Subject matter under subclass 29 wherein the motion-inducing member is
    interlinked with the pulleys* to provide concurrent axial adjustment of
    each of the pair of belt*-engaging components on each of the pulleys.



CLS 474/31
TXT By dual lever mechanism:
    Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein the motion-inducing member
    includes a pair of arms each mounted for pivotal movement about its own
    axis; and wherein one of the arms is connected to one of the movable
    belt*-engaging components on each of the spaced pulleys*, and the other arm
    is connected to the other of the belt-engaging components on each of the
    spaced pulleys, so that simultaneous pivoting of the arms causes concurrent
    adjustment of each pair of belt-engaging components on each pulley.


CLS 474/32
TXT Plural members forming plural belt-receiving grooves on common axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 including at least three coaxial components
    having belt*engaging  surfaces arranged at intervals to define at least two
    circumferentially extending belt-receiving spaces between such surfaces
    along the axis of rotation of the components.


CLS 474/33
TXT With member common to plural grooves:

    Subject matter under subclass 32 wherein at least one of the components has
    belt*-engaging surfaces on each of opposite sides thereof so as to form a
    wall for two adjacent belt-receiving spaces.





CLS 474/34
TXT Plural members common to plural grooves:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 wherein at least two of the components
    each have belt*-engaging surfaces on each of opposite sides thereof.



CLS 474/35
TXT Axially spaced members simultaneously adjustable:

    Subject matter under subclass 32 wherein at least two of the components are
    mounted for concurrent movement in a direction parallel to the longitudinal
    extent of the axis of rotation.



CLS 474/36
TXT On bolt radially spaced from pulley axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 35 wherein means interconnecting said
    components includes one or more rodlike members extending in a direction
    generally parallel to the longitudinal extent of the axis of rotation and
    spaced radially from a shaft upon which the components are mounted.


CLS 474/37
TXT By manual actuator for one or both confronting members:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 having manually operated motion-inducing
    means for causing relative adjustment of said components toward and away
    from each other.


CLS 474/38
TXT With neutral condition of drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein said components are adjustable to
    a position where neither of the facing belt*-engaging surfaces are engaged
    with the belt, and wherein structure is provided separate from said
    components to facilitate supporting the belt to allow relative motion
    between the belt and the components.


CLS 474/39
TXT Screw actuated:

    Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein the motion-inducing means
    comprises two relatively rotatable members having interengaged helical
    threads, one of such members being fixed and the other rectilinearly
    movable in a direction parallel to the axis of rotation so that relative
    rotation between the members causes such rectilinear movement, and one of
    said members forming a part of or being interconnected to one of said
    adjustable components so that said rectilineal movement causes said
    relative adjustment of said components.


CLS 474/40
TXT With additional linkage in actuator drive train:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 wherein rectilineal motion is transmitted
    from said rectilinearly movable member to said axially adjustable component
    via a pivotally mounted lever.


CLS 474/41
TXT By opposite-handed screw threads engaging adjacent members:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 wherein each of the relatively axially
    adjustable components includes helical threads cooperating with helical
    threads of the relatively rotatable member, the helical threads being so
    arranged that relative rotation between the threaded members causes both
    components to move simultaneously axially toward each other or both to move
    simultaneously axially away from each other depending on the direction of
    rotation.


CLS 474/42
TXT With means to positively lock members in adjusted position:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 including an auxiliary device actuatable
    between hold and release positions for preventing relative rotation between
    said relatively movable motion-inducing members when said device is
    actuated to a hold position and for permitting relative rotation between
    said relatively movable motion-inducing members when said device is in a
    release position.


CLS 474/43
TXT Including lubrication or particular guide or bearing for movable member:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 wherein (1) structure is provided to
    facilitate lubrication of a surface of the movable component, or (23)
    wherein a separate device is mounted between the movable component and its
    support, (a) said separate device serving to guide movement of the movable
    component along a predetermined axial path relative to its support, or (b)
    said device comprises bearing structure facilitating relative movement
    between the movable component and its support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    184,    Lubrication, appropriate subclasses for lubrication in general; and
    see the reference to Class 184 under "SEARCH CLASS" in the class definition
    of Class 474 for a statement of the line between classes.

    384,    Bearings, appropriate subclasses for bearings, per se.


CLS 474/44
TXT Self-lubricated bearing:

    Subject matter under subclass 43 wherein said device comprises a
    self-sustaining sleeve which inherently has a low coefficient of friction,
    or which has been impregnated with a lubricant.


CLS 474/45
TXT With lubrication of support for movable member:

    Subject matter under subclass 43 wherein the structure is to facilitate
    injection of lubricant from an auxiliary source to a surface of the movable
    component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     for structure facilitating lubrication of a belt* or pulley*.





CLS 474/46
TXT With spring device:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 wherein significance is attributed to the
    structure of an auxiliary resilient device which engages a movable one of
    said relatively adjustable to components to bias said movable component in
    a direction generally parallel to the longitudinal extent of the axis of
    rotation of the pulley*.


CLS 474/47
TXT PULLEY WITH EXPANSIBLE RIM MEANS OR PULLEYS WITH ALTERNATELY USEABLE
    NESTABLE RIMS:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a pulley* includes a
    belt*-engaging surface of surfaces adjustably movable in a direction
    radially outward of the axis of rotation of the pulley to increase the
    effective diameter of the pulley; or wherein plural alternately usable
    pulleys are arrangeable with respect to each other in a manner such that a
    common radial line from the axis of rotation passes first through the
    belt-engaging surface of the inactive pulley then through the belt-engaging
    surface of the active pulley.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 571+ for expansible rim
    structure associated with winding or unwinding.


CLS 474/48
TXT Nestable rims of diverse kind (e.g., one grooved and the other cylindrical,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 47 wherein at least two of plural alternately
    useable pulleys* are different kinds of pulleys, the different kinds being:
    (a) those having a cylindrical belt-engaging surface, (b) those having a
    circumferentially grooved belt-engaging surface, or (c) those having
    circumferentially spaced belt-engaging teeth.


CLS 474/49
TXT Structure for variably adjusting radius of rim section:

    Subject matter under subclass 47 including motion-inducing mechanism for
    moving the belt*-engaging surface or surfaces of the pulley* radially
    outward.




CLS 474/50
TXT By actuator responsive to speed or load:

    Subject matter under subclass 49 including means for sensing a condition of
    velocity, change of velocity, resistance to movement, or change of
    resistance to movement of a load device or of a member operating in a drive
    train to drive the load device; and, in response to such sensed condition
    or change of condition, said means acts to actuate said motion-inducing
    mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11+,    17+, 70, and 109, for other arrangements using a load or speed
    responsive actuator in a belt and pulley drive system.




CLS 474/51
TXT By fluid pressure actuator or inflatable rim:

    Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein the motion-inducing mechanism is
    actuated by energy derived from or transmitted via the exertion of force
    upon a fluid; or wherein the belt*-engaging surface is expandible by
    introduction of a fluid therein to increase the effective diameter of the
    pulley*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     28, 103+, and 110, for other arrangements using an electrical or
    fluid motor as a drive for an actuator in a belt and pulley drive system.


CLS 474/52
TXT Including means interconnecting plural pulleys for simultaneous adjustment:

    Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein plural pulleys* each include
    adjustable belt*-engaging surface or surfaces, and wherein mechanism is
    provided for concurrently adjusting the surface or surfaces of each of the
    pulleys to increase or decrease the effective diameter of the pulleys.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    29+,    for mechanism for simultaneously adjusting plural pulleys of the
    kind provided for in subclasses 8+.


CLS 474/53
TXT Pulleys on spaced axes:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein the pulleys* are spaced from each
    other in a direction generally perpendicular to the longitudinal extent of
    the axis of rotation of the pulleys.


CLS 474/54
TXT By actuator having collar concentric with, and movable axially on, pulley
    axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein the motion-inducing mechanism
    includes a ringlike member positioned around the axis of rotation of the
    pulley* and movable in a direction parallel to the longitudinal extent of
    the pulley axis.



CLS 474/55
TXT Collar interconnected with rim sections via pivoted link:

    Subject matter under subclass 54 wherein the ringlike member is connected
    to the adjustable movable belt*-engaging surfaces via pivotable connecting
    means.


CLS 474/56
TXT By actuator having collar concentric with, and rotatable in plane
    perpendicular to pulley axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein the motion-inducing mechanism
    includes a ringlike member positioned around the axis of rotation of the
    pulley*, and rotatable around the pulley axis but fixed in regard to any
    movement in a direction parallel to the longitudinal extent of the pulley
    axis.




CLS 474/57
TXT Collar interconnected with rim sections via pivoted link:

    Subject matter under subclass 56 wherein the ringlike member is connected
    to the adjustably movable belt*-engaging surfaces via pivotable connecting
    means.



CLS 474/58
TXT POWER OUTPUT PULLEY SELECTIVELY SHIFTABLE TO DIFFERENT POWER OUTPUT
    LOCATIONS RELATIVE TO INPUT PULLEY:

    Subject matter under the class definition which includes a final driven
    pulley* in a drive train supplied with power via a power input pulley and a
    belt* or belts, the final driven pulley supplying power to drive a load
    device and being movably supported in such a manner as to facilitate moving
    the pulley to provide output power at different locations relative to the
    power input pulley.

    (1)     Note.  For a patent to be placed herein it must be the final output
    pulley and not only an intermediate pulley which is movable and the
    movement must be for the purpose of supplying output power at plural
    diverse locations and not merely to increase or decrease belt tension.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27      and 89, for a movable shaft carrying an intermediate pulley in a
    drive train; and see (1) Note above.

    113+,   for a pulley shiftable merely to increase or decrease belt tension,
    and see (1) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 105 and 110+ for dental apparatus including
    an endless belt power transmission.


CLS 474/59
TXT Pivotable about plural axes:

    Subject matter under subclass 58 wherein the final drive pulley* is mounted
    for pivotable movement about more than a single axis.



CLS 474/60
TXT Nonparallel axes:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the plural axes about which the
    final drive pulley* is pivoted, are angularly related with respect to each
    other.





CLS 474/61
TXT POWER INPUT AND OUTPUT PULLEYS ON NONPARALLEL AXES:

    Subject matter under the class definition which includes a driven pulley*
    in a drive train supplied with power via a power input pulley and a belt*
    or belts, and wherein the axis about which the driven pulley rotates is
    disposed at an angle relative to the axis about which the power input
    pulley rotates.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58+,    for structure wherein a power output pulley is selectively
    shiftable to different power-output locations relative to an input pulley
    whereby the axes of the pulleys may be angularly related.



CLS 474/62
TXT With common belt engaging both pulleys:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein a single belt* is in driving
    engagement with both of the angularly related pulleys*.



CLS 474/63
TXT And shiftable guide roll engaging belt run:

    Subject matter under subclass 62 including a guide roll* for contacting the
    belt at a location between the pulleys*, and wherein said guide roll is
    movably mounted for adjustment of its position relative to the angularly
    related pulleys.



CLS 474/64
TXT PLURAL TURNS OF SAME BELT ABOUT PULLEY AXIS:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a belt* and a pulley*
    or a belt and plural coaxially mounted pulleys, wherein the belt has
    multiple turns about rotational axis of the pulley or coaxial pulleys.



CLS 474/65
TXT With flexible belt-tracking guide helically coiled about pulley:

    Subject matter under subclass 64 and further including an auxiliary endless
    member capable of conforming to the curvature of a pulley* drive face, and
    being helically wound about the pulley axis and positioned between the
    belt* and pulley drive face to cause the belt turns to follow an intended
    path circumferentially about the pulley.



CLS 474/66
TXT Plural turns of same belt about axis of each of laterally spaced pulleys:

    Subject matter under subclass 64 including an additional pulley* or coaxial
    pulleys mounted for rotation about an axis spaced in a direction
    perpendicular to the longitudinal extent of the axis of the first-mentioned
    pulley or pulleys, and wherein a single belt* has multiple turns extending
    about each of the spaced axes.



CLS 474/67
TXT With guide roll:

    Subject matter under subclass 66 and further including a guide roll* for
    contacting the belt*.



CLS 474/68
TXT Plural guide rolls:

    Subject matter subclass 67 including an additional guide roll* mounted for
    rotation about an axis spaced from the axis of the first-mentioned guide
    roll.



CLS 474/69
TXT CONTROL FOR VARIABLE INPUT TO OUTPUT SPEED-RATIO:

    Subject matter under the class difinition wherein the mechanism is provided
    for changing the number or fractional number of revolutions made by an
    output load driving member for each revolution made by an input member, the
    output and input members being interconnected via a belt*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8+,     for a variable speed device using a pulley with a belt-receiving
    groove formed by drive faces on relatively axially movable coaxial
    confronting members.

    47+,    for a variable speed device using a pulley with expansible rim
    means or pulleys with alternately useable nestable rims.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses 240+ for speed changing in
    connection with a fiber drafting device.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclass 93 for speed
    adjustment of a driving mechanism.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses for other
    gearing and gearing combinations having control for variable speed.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 230 for a two-wheeled vehicle with change
    speed means between the motor and driven wheel.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 6+ for control of
    variable speed in a device being driven.



CLS 474/70
TXT Condition responsive (e.g., responsive to speed, load, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 69 including means which senses a condition
    or change of condition; and, in response thereto, said means acts to change
    the number or fractional number of revolutions made by the output load
    driving member for each revolution of the input member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11+,    17+, 50, and 109, for other arrangements using a load or speed
    responsive actuator in a belt and pulley drives system.


CLS 474/71
TXT Cyclical or sequential (e.g., machine controlled, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 69 wherein the mechanism functions to
    periodically change the number of fractional number of revolutions made by
    the output load driving member for each revolution made by the input member
    according to a predetermined program without operator intervention.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for cyclical or sequential operation in an arrangment for changing
    the direction of rotation of a load driving member.




CLS 474/72
TXT Including intermeshing gears in one drive train:

    Subject matter under subclass 69 wherein motion transmitting means between
    the input and output members includes cooperating wheellike members with
    intermeshing drive teeth, the cooperating wheel-like members being arranged
    in series or parallel drive relation with a belt* and pulley* drive.


CLS 474/73
TXT Including separate belt on each of coaxial pulleys selectively engaged in
    drive train:

    Subject matter under subclass 69 including plural pulleys* mounted for
    rotation about a common axis, each of said pulleys having its own belt* in
    driving engagement therewith so that the belts provide parallel drive paths
    between the input and output members, and said mechanism including means
    permitting operator selection as to which drive path is active to drive the
    output member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4+,     for a forward and reverse drive arrangement using plural belts.

    84+,    for a belt and pulley drive including a plurality of separate
    belts.


CLS 474/74
TXT With overrunning clutch:

    Subject matter under subclass 73 which further includes structure for
    coupling together first and second motion-transmitting members in the drive
    train in such a manner that the second member is driven by the first member
    for concurrent movement at the same rotational speed in a particular
    direction; but which structure enables, without operator intervention,
    relative rotation between the first and second members when the second
    member is driven or tends to be driven by auxiliary force in the particular
    direction at a rotational speed greater than the speed imported to the
    first member in the particular direction.


CLS 474/75
TXT Selection by tightening belt on selected pulley:

    Subject matter under subclass 73 wherein the operator selection means
    includes a device movable by the operator to increase the tension exerted
    on the belt* in the active drive path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for a device for tightening a belt on a selected pulley associated
    with a forward and reverse drive.

    101+,   for a device for adjusting belt tension.


CLS 474/76
TXT Selection by axially movable pin engaged in opening through selected pulley:

    Subject matter under subclass 73 wherein the operator selection means
    includes one or more rodlike elements shiftable in a direction parallel to
    the longitudinal extent of the axis of rotation of the pulleys*, and said
    pulleys include apertures for receiving said rod-like elements to couple a
    particular selected pulley in active driving engagement in the drive path.


CLS 474/77
TXT Including coaxial pulleys shiftable axially to align selected pulley with
    drive belt:

    Subject matter under subclass 69 including plural pulleys* mounted for
    rotation about a common axis and wherein means is provided for moving the
    pulleys in a direction parallel to the longitudinal extent of the common
    axis to properly position a selected pulley in a drive path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113+,   for a device for shifting a pulley such as to adjust belt tension
    or to cause engagement and disengagement of pulley with a belt.


CLS 474/78
TXT Including belt shiftable axially from one to another surface of stepped
    pulley or coaxial pulleys of different diameter:

    Subject matter under subclass 69 including a pulley* or plural coaxial
    pulleys mounted for rotation about an axis, said pulley or pulleys
    providing separate axially spaced belt* drive faces located different
    radial distances from the rotational axis; and further including a belt*
    mounted for movement in a direction parallel to the longitudinal extent of
    the rotational axis to permit selective placement of the belt on one or
    another of the separate axially spaced drive faces on the pulley or pulleys.



CLS 474/79
TXT And pulley pivotally mounted to facilitate belt shift:
    Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein the pulley* or pulleys is/are
    mounted for pivotable movement in a direction generally perpendicular to
    the longitudinal extent of the axis of rotation of the pulley to facilitate
    selective placement of the belt*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113+,   for a device for shifting a pulley such as to adjust belt tension
    or to cause engagement and disengagement of the pulley with a belt.


CLS 474/80
TXT And including belt-shifter mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 78 and further including a device for moving
    the belt* in the direction parallel to the longitudinal extent of the axis
    of rotation of the pulley.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      6, 83, 102+, and 122+, for other structure involving lateral shift
    of a belt such as for reversing the direction of rotation of a load driving
    member, for causing a change in speed ratio, for removing a belt from a
    pulley or for correcting belt training deviation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles, Fiber Preparation, subclass 241 for belt shifting to
    accomplish speed change in a fiber drafting device.


CLS 474/81
TXT For shifting belt from both power input and power output pulleys:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the belt*-moving device includes
    structure for moving the belt along spaced parallel axes in a direction
    parallel to the longitudinal extent of the axes, one of the axes being the
    rotational axis of a pulley* or pulleys for the driving belt, and the other
    of the axes being the rotational axis of a pulley or pulleys driven by the
    belt.



CLS 474/82
TXT Shifter mechanism including parallelogram linkage:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the belt-moving device includes
    four arms pivotally interconnected to form a four-sided figure, and wherein
    opposite sides of the device remain parallel to each other when the device
    is actuated to move the belt*.



CLS 474/83
TXT Including mechanism for shifting belt axially on spaced pulleys with
    tapering drive face:

    Subject matter under subclass 69 including separate pulleys* mounted for
    rotation about axes spaced from each other, the belt*-driving face of at
    least one of the pulleys being inclined at a substantially constant angle
    of inclination relative to the pulley axis; and further including a device
    for moving the belt in a direction parallel to the longitudinal extent of
    the axis of each pulley.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      6, 80+, 102+, and 122+, for other structure involving lateral shift
    of a belt such as for reversing the direction of rotation of a load driving
    member, for causing a change in speed ratio, for removing a belt from a
    pulley or for correcting belt training deviation.



CLS 474/84
TXT PLURAL BELTS OR PLURAL OUTPUT LOADS:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein power is extracted from
    plural locations in a belt* and pulley* drive to provide power for driving
    a plurality of devices; or wherein a belt and pulley drive includes a
    plurality of separate belts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4+,     for a forward and reverse drive arrangement with plural belts.

    73+,    for a variable speed drive arrangement using plural belts.



CLS 474/85
TXT Plural belts having interengaged drive surfaces:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 wherein plural belts* have surface
    portions contacting each other so that one belt drives the other.

    (1)     Note.  For a patent to be placed herein both belts must form a part
    of the power transmission path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    for an auxiliary endless band which functions to merely guide a
    belt* or to hold the belt in engagement with a pulley.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors, Power-Driven, subclass 833 for a conveyor belt engaged
    with the driving surface of a drive belt.



CLS 474/86
TXT Plural output loads:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 wherein power is extracted from plural
    locations in a belt* and pulley* drive to provide power for driving a
    plurality of devices.


CLS 474/87
TXT With common belt concurrently engaging input and plural output pulleys:

    Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein a belt* is driven by a power input
    pulley, and this same belt concurrently engages and drives plural output
    pulleys to provide power for driving a plurality of devices associated with
    the output pulleys.



CLS 474/88
TXT Plural belts in series via countershaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 wherein first and second belts* in a drive
    train are arranged in series driving relationship via an intermediate shaft
    carrying first and second pulleys* or carrying a single pulley having
    axially spaced belt-engaging surfaces.


CLS 474/89
TXT Countershaft laterally shiftable:

    Subject matter under subclass 88 wherein said intermediate shaft is mounted
    for movement in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal extent to the
    axis of the intermediate shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for a laterally movable countershaft in a drive train having a
    pulley* or pulleys of the kind provided for in subclasses 8+.


CLS 474/90
TXT STATIC ELECTRICITY ELIMINATOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein significance is
    attributed to structure for dissipating or preventing accumulation of
    electrical charges in a belt* or pulley*.



CLS 474/91
TXT STRUCTURE FACILITATING LUBRICATION OF BELT, PULLEY, OR GUIDE ROLL:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the sturcture of a belt*,
    pulley*, or guide roll* is provided to facilitate the admission of grease,
    oil, or other lubricant to the interface between relatively moving parts in
    the belt, pulley, or guide roll.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for structure facilitating lubrication of a pulley of the kind
    provided for in subclasses 8+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    184,    Lubrication, appropriate subclasses; and see the reference to Class
    184 under "SEARCH CLASS" in the class definition of Class 474 for a
    statement of the line between the classes.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 500+ for a lubrication feature
    associated with a conveyor.

    305,    Wheel Substitutes for Land Vehicles, subclasses 117+ for a
    lubrication feature.



CLS 474/92
TXT CLEANING DEVICE FOR BELT, PULLEY, OR GUIDE ROLL:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein significance is
    attributed to an auxiliary device mounted for association with a belt* and
    pulley* drive train for maintaining the cleanliness of the belt, pulley, or
    guide roll* during power transmission to a load device.

    (1)     Note.  For a patent to be placed herein, the cleaning device must
    be particularly adapted to be associated with a drive train to provide
    cleaning during power transmission.  If the device is of general utility
    and not particularly adapted to be mounted on an operating drive train,
    classification is in a class appropriate for cleaning of general utility
    such as Class 15 or 134.

    (2)     Note.  If the structure merely provides an opening through the
    drive face of a pulley whereby accumulated foreign matter on the bottom of
    a belt may pass through the opening, classification is not herein, but is
    with appropiate pulley subcombination structure classified below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185+,   for a pulley having a drive face formed of circumferentially spaced
    discrete elements so as to provide an opening through which foreign matter
    may pass, and see (2) Note above.

    188+    for a pulley having grooves or openings in a cylindrical drive
    face, and see (2) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 256.5+ for a
    scraper, wiper, or brush for a moving surface.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 494+ for a cleaning device for
    a conveyor.

    305,    Wheel Substitutes for Land Vehicles, subclasses 100+ for a cleaning
    feature.



CLS 474/93
TXT FLUID-IMPELLING MEANS (E.G., FOR COOLING, ETC.):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein significance is
    attributed to an auxillary device used in combination with a belt* and
    pulley* drive train, or to a particular surface configuration of a belt or
    pulley; which auxiliary device or particular surface configuration is for
    inducing the flow of a fluid, such as air, within, through, or around a
    belt or pulley.

    (1)     Note.  For a patent to be classified herein, the structure must be
    for inducing the flow of a fluid such a with the use of flow-directing
    vanes. If the structure merely provides air-escape openings or grooves in a
    belt or pulley, classification is in an appropriate belt or pulley
    subcombination subclass below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185+,   for a pulley having discrete circumferentially spaced drive faces,
    and see (1) Note above.

    188+,   for a pulley having grooves or openings in a cyclindrical drive
    face, and see (1) Note above.

    249+,   for a friction drive belt having nondriving grooves or depressions,
    and see (1) Note above.


CLS 474/94
TXT RESILIENT CONNECTION BETWEEN PULLEY OR GUIDE-ROLL RIM AND MOUNT:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a separate member
    connects the circumferential drive face fo a pulley* or guide roll* with
    its hub or supporting shaft, said member having an elastic property
    permitting limited relative movement between the pulley drive face and the
    hub or supporting shaft.

    (1)     Note.  For a patent to be placed herein, the entire circumference
    of the rim providing the belt-engaging surface or surfaces must be
    connected via the separate resilient member to the hub or supporting shaft
    for such limited relative movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163,    for positive drive pulley or guide roll having separate
    belt-engaging surfaces mounted for relative movement with respect to each
    other during operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, subclasses 51+ for a flexible connection between a shaft and
    driven member.



CLS 474/95
TXT HUB FORMED IN SECTIONS AND SEPARABLE BY MOVING SECTIONS RADIALLY APART
    (E.G., SPLIT PULLEY TO FACILITATE INSTALLATION, ETC.):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein means defining an opening
    for receiving a drive or support shaft through the center of a pulley* is
    formed of discrete parts separable from each other by movement of said
    parts radially outward from the longitudinal axis of the shaft.



CLS 474/96
TXT And severance lines for separable rim sections diametrically opposite each
    other:

    Subject matter under subclass 95 wherein the pulley* has a belt*-engaging
    face formed of the discrete members separable from each other, the
    belt-engaging faces of each of the separable members extending 180 degrees
    about the circumference of the pulley face.



CLS 474/97
TXT With spokes connecting hub section and rim section:

    Subject matter under subclass 96 wherein circumferentially spaced, radially
    extending arms interconnect the belt*-engaging members with the
    shaft-opening defining parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195+,   for a friction pulley including spokes connecting the hub and rim.



CLS 474/98
TXT Plural integral spokes:

    Subject matter under subclass 97 wherein at least two of the
    circumferentially spaced arms are formed as a unitary member, inseparable
    from each other.


CLS 474/99
TXT With discrete means connecting outer ends of integral spokes to rim:

    Subject matter under subclass 98 wherein significance is attributed to a
    separate connector device which is used to interconnect the radially
    outermost ends of the circumferentially spaced arms to the
    circumferentially extending belt*- engaging  members.





CLS 474/100
TXT AUXILIARY ENDLESS BAND FOR GUIDING BELT OR HOLDING BELT ENGAGED WITH PULLEY:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a closed-loop flexible or
    articulated member is provided to engage a belt* and cause the belt to
    follow an intended path of travel or to press a belt between the
    closed-loop member and a pulley* drive face to assure proper engagement of
    the belt with the pulley drive face, said closed-loop member following a
    different closed-loop path than said belt, or being separably mounted in
    engagement with the exterior surface of the belt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85,     for plural belts, each forming a part of power transmission path.

    248+,   for a friction drive belt having a link chain embedded therein a
    fixedly attached thereto.


CLS 474/101
TXT MEANS FOR ADJUSTING BELT TENSION OR FOR SHIFTING BELT, PULLEY, OR GUIDE
    ROLL:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the significance is
    attributed to: (a) a member other than a pulley* engageable with a belt*,
    and which is adjustable or relatively movable with respect to the belt in a
    direction which causes an increase or decrease in tensile stress in the
    belt or a take-up or any undesirable belt slack to maintain a desirable
    drive traction between the belt and pulley drive face; or (b) a device or
    structure for providing relative movement between a belt and pulley, to
    remove the belt from the pulley, to affect the extent of the drive traction
    between the belt and pulley, or to correct any deviation of the belt from a
    centered path of travel on the pulley.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5       and 75, for devices for altering belt tension associated with
    forward and reverse drives or variable speed drives.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses 250+ for tensioning a
    fiber drafting apron.

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 385 for means to adjust a guide pulley in a chain
    saw.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclass 105 for a
    tensioner for a driving band.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 814+ for means to tension an endless band or
    chain cutting device.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 105+ for a belt tightener in a
    wheel or axle drive.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclass 273 for means to
    maintain tension in an endless forming surface.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 231 for tensioning a drive belt for a
    motor-driven two-wheeled vehicle and subclasses 351, 357, 366, and 373 for
    belt drives in vehicles that may include tensioning.

    187,    Elevator, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclasses 264+ for means for raising or lowering an elevator car which
    includes a car supporting cable and separate means engaging and maintaining
    the tension of the cable.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 813+ for a tension adjuster
    for a conveyor belt; and see a listing of other areas of search following
    the definition of Class 198, subclass 813.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 119.02 for an endless cable clothesline
    including supporting and tightening structure.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate subclasses
    for a material tensioner associated with such material handling.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 410+ and 147+ for a
    tensioning device associated with winding, unwinding, or in general use for
    a running length of indefinite-length material.

    248,    Supports, subclasses 646+ for a support for a movable machine
    wherein adjustability may provide a belt-tensioning feature.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 6+ for control of
    tension in material being driven.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems, subclass 43 for control of
    belt slippage in a power generating mechanism.

    433,    Dentistry, subclass 111 for belt tensioner in an endless belt
    driving system for a dental apparatus.

    451,    Abrading, subclass 311 for a tightener for an abrading band.



CLS 474/102
TXT With sensor for controlling operation of shifter to correct belt training
    deviation:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 provided with auxiliary means which
    detects deviation of a belt* from a desired path of travel on a pulley*;
    and, in repsonse to such detection, actuates said device for returning the
    belt to the desired path of travel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      6, 80+, 83, and 122+, for other structure involving lateral shift
    of a belt such as for reversing the direction of rotation of a load driving
    member, for causing a change in speed ratio, for removing a belt from a
    pulley or for correcting belt training deviation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclass 257 for automatic
    control of transverse movement of an endless band forming mold.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 806+ for automatic control of
    conveyor belt training deviation.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 15+ for
    automatic control of devices to position advancing material laterally.




CLS 474/103
TXT Shifter driven by electrical or fluid motor:

    Subject matter under subclass 102 wherein force for actuating said device
    is derived from or transmitted via electrical energy or the extertion of
    force upon a fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     28, 51, and 110, for other arrangements using an electrical or
    fluid motor as a drive for an actuator in a belt and pulley drive system.





CLS 474/104
TXT Fluid motor:

    Subject matter under subclass 103 wherein force for actuating said device
    is derived from or transmitted via the exertion of force upon a fluid.


CLS 474/105
TXT Sensor actuates pawl-and-ratchet mechanism to operate shifter:

    Subject matter under subclass 102 wherein force for actuating said device
    is provided via a pawl-and-ratchet mechanism.






CLS 474/106
TXT Sensor includes rotatable belt-engaging surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 102 wherein the means for detecting belt*
    deviation includes an element having a face for contacting the belt* when
    the belt has deviated from a desired path of travel, said element being
    rotated about its own axis of rotation when contacted by the moving belt.



CLS 474/107
TXT Rotatable on same axis as shiftable guide roll or pulley:

    Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein axis of rotation of the rotatable
    element is coaxial with the axis of rotation of a movable guide roll* or
    pulley*.



CLS 474/108
TXT To initiate relative axial movement of belt-engaging surfaces of guide roll
    or pulley:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein the guide roll* or pulley*
    includes belt*-engaging faces movable with respect to each other in a
    direction parallel to the longitudinal extent of the axis of the guide roll
    or pulley, and wherein said rotation of said detector member causes
    relative movement of said belt-engaging faces to return the belt to a
    central path of travel.



CLS 474/109
TXT Load responsive tension adjuster or shifter:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 including means for sensing resistance to
    movement or change in resistance to movement of a load device or of a
    component in a drive train to drive the load device; and, in response to
    such sensed resistance or change of resistance to movement, said means acts
    to actuate said member or said device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11+,    17+, 50, and 70, for other arrangements using a load or speed
    responsive actuator in a belt and pulley drive system.



CLS 474/110
TXT Tension adjuster or shifter driven by electrical or fluid motor:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein force for actuating said device
    or said member is derived from or transmitted via electrical energy or the
    exertion of force upon a fluid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     28, 51, and 103+, for other arrangements using an electrical or
    fluid motor as a drive for an actuator in a belt and pulley drive system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclass 819 for fluid means to bias a pulley to tension
    on endless band or chain cutting device.



CLS 474/111
TXT Tension adjuster has surface in sliding contact with belt:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein said member has a nonrotatable
    face portion for contacting the belt*, whereby the belt slides over the
    face portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140,    for a belt guide having a surface in sliding contact with the belt.



CLS 474/112
TXT Pulley or guide roll has eccentric mount for shifting or tensioning
    movement:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein a guide roll* or pulley* is
    mounted on a support which is rotatably adjustable about an axis located
    radially inwardly of the belt*-engaging drive face of the pulley or guide
    roll, the axis of rotation of the pulley or guide roll being parallel to,
    but spaced radially from, the axis of rotation of the adjustable support so
    that movement of the support about its axis causes a shift of the axis of
    rotation of the pulley or guide roll.



CLS 474/113
TXT Pulley shifter:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein said device is operatively
    associated with a pulley* for changing the position of the pulley relative
    to a belt*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77      and 79, for devices for shifting a pulley associated with a
    variable speed drive.


CLS 474/114
TXT Pulley on shaft of adjustably mounted drive motor:

    Subject matter under subclass 113 wherein the pulley* is mounted on the
    drive shaft of a drive motor, and the motor is movably mounted to change
    the position of the pulley.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for an adjustably mounted motor used in connection with a drive
    train including a pulley having a belt-receiving groove formed by drive
    faces on relatively axially movable coaxial confronting members.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclasses 106 and 107 for an adjustably
    mounted motor for a belt tightener in a wheel or axle drive.


CLS 474/115
TXT Spring biased in belt-tensioning direction:

    Subject matter under subclass 114 wherein resilient means is provided to
    bias the drive motor in a direction tending to increase tensile stress in
    the belt*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    135, and 138, for other structure wherein a pulley or guide roll is
    spring biased in a belt-tensioning direction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 814 for a spring-biased
    tensioner in a conveyor.



CLS 474/116
TXT Pulley is vehicle drive pulley (e.g., bicycle sprocket, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 113 wherein the pulley* is a part of a drive
    train for propelling a vehicle.


CLS 474/117
TXT Spring biased in belt-tensioning direction:

    Subject matter under subclass 113 wherein resilient means is provided to
    bias the pulley* in a direction tending to increase tensile stress in the
    belt*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    135, and 138, for other structure wherein a pulley or guide roll is
    spring biased in a belt-tensioning direction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 814 for a spring-biased
    tensioner in a conveyor.



CLS 474/118
TXT Pulley shiftable into engagement with exterior of belt-surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 113 wherein a inner surface of a belt*
    defines an area within a closed loop, and said pulley* is located outside
    of said area and has a drive face shiftable into and out of contact with a
    surface of the belt opposite the inner surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121,    for a device for selectively shifting a belt so that its exterior
    surface is engaged or disengaged with a pulley.

    139,    for structure wherein a pulley is engaged with the exterior surface
    of a belt.



CLS 474/119
TXT Belt shifter for shifting belt laterally or for selective engagement and
    supported disengagement of belt with pulley:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein said device or structure is
    operatively associated with a belt* so as (a) to move the belt in a
    direction generally parallel to the axis of rotation of a pulley* about
    which the belt is entrained, or (b) to move the belt into and out of
    driving contact with the drive face of a pulley and support the disengaged
    belt completely removed from contact with the pulley face.


CLS 474/120
TXT Pulley has slot in groove-forming flange facilitating belt installation or
    removal:

    Subject matter under subclass 119 wherein a pulley* face includes opposed
    surfaces defining a circumferential belt*-receiving groove, and wherein at
    least one of said surfaces has a portion removed therefrom to form a belt
    passageway to aid in mounting or removing the belt into or from the groove.


CLS 474/121
TXT For shifting exterior surface of belt into engagement with pulley:

    Subject matter under subclass 119 wherein an inner surface of the belt*
    defines an area within a closed loop, and wherein said device is
    operatively associated with the belt to move the belt in a manner to engage
    or disengage a surface of the belt opposite the inner surface with the
    drive face of a pulley* located outside of the enclosed area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118,    for a device for selectively shifting a pulley into and out of
    engagement with the exterior surface of a belt.

    139,    for structure wherein a pulley is engaged with the exterior surface
    of a belt.



CLS 474/122
TXT For shifting belt laterally:

    Subject matter under subclass 119 wherein said device is so operatively
    associated with the belt as to move the belt* in a direction generally
    parallel to the axis of rotation of a pulley* about which the belt is
    entrained.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      6, 80+, 83, and 102+, for other structure involving lateral shift
    of a belt such as for reversing the direction of rotation of a load driving
    member, for causing a change in speed ratio, for removing a belt from a
    pulley or for correcting belt training deviation.



CLS 474/123
TXT By adjusting axial inclination of belt guide roll:

    Subject matter under subclass 122 wherein a guide roll* rotatable about its
    own axis is engaged with the belt*, and wherein said belt movement is
    accomplished by adjusting the angular orientation of the axis of rotation
    of the guide roll relative to the path of travel of the belt.



CLS 474/124
TXT With idler support having circumferentially spaced rollers to receive
    shifted belt:

    Subject matter under subclass 122 provided with a belt* support axially
    aligned with a pulley* to receive a belt* which has been removed from the
    pulley, said support including a plurality of members rotatable about their
    own axis and radially spaced in arcuate array about a line forming a
    continuation of the pulley axis.


CLS 474/125
TXT Including means for selectively clutching coaxial idler support to pulley:

    Subject matter under subclass 122 provided with a belt support axially
    aligned with a pulley* to receive a belt* which has been removed from the
    pulley, said support being mounted for rotation about an axis forming a
    continuation of the pulley axis; and said pulley and support including
    surfaces relatively movable between engaged and disengaged positions to
    cause the pulley and support to rotate as a unit when engaged or to permit
    independent rotation of the pulley and support when disengaged.


CLS 474/126
TXT Shifter actuated by screw or gear drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 122 wherein motion is transmitted to the
    device for moving the belt* via relatively movable components having
    interengaged helical threads or intermeshing teeth.


CLS 474/127
TXT Shifter actuated by flexible cable:

    Subject matter under subclass 122 wherein motion is transmitted to the
    device for moving the belt* via a flexible, elongated ropelike member.



CLS 474/128
TXT Shifter actuated by handle pivoted about fixed axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 122 wherein motion is transmitted to the
    device for moving the belt* via a lever intended to be grasped by an
    operator, said lever being mounted for pivotable movement about a fixed
    axis.


CLS 474/129
TXT And connector link between handle and shifter pivotable about spaced fixed
    axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 128 and further including an additional
    component interconnecting said lever with the device for moving the belt*,
    said component being mounted for pivotable movement about an axis spaced
    from the pivotable axis of the lever.


CLS 474/130
TXT Portable hand tool for removing or installing belt:

    Subject matter under subclass 119 wherein said device is to facilitate the
    application or removal of the belt* to or from a pulley*, said device being
    of a size and nature as to be readily transportable by an operator to any
    of several locations where it is desired to apply or remove a belt from a
    pulley.


CLS 474/131
TXT Guide roll forms belt-thickness gap with pulley:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein said member is a guide roll*,
    said guide roll being adjustable or biased to a position where it is spaced
    from the drive face of a pulley* a distance no greater than the thickness
    of a belt* passing between the guide roll and pulley to urge the belt into
    firm driving engagement with the pulley.



CLS 474/132
TXT Gravity actuated guide roll for tensioning belt:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein said member is a guide roll*
    engaged with the belt*; and wherein the weight of the guide roll, or the
    weight of an auxiliary mass associated with the guide roll, causes the
    guide roll to be continually biased in a direction to increase the tensile
    stress in the belt or to take up any undesirable slack in the belt.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 815 for a counterweight actuated
    tensioner in a conveyor.



CLS 474/133
TXT Guide roll mounted for movement of its axis along arcuate path to tension
    belt:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein said member is a guide roll*
    engaged with the belt*; and wherein said guide roll is movably supported
    for movement of its axis in a curved path to cause the guide roll change
    the tensile stress in the belt or to take up any undesirable slack in the
    belt.


CLS 474/134
TXT Plural guide rolls engaging single belt:

    Subject matter under subclass 133 wherein an additional guide roll* is
    engaged with the belt*.


CLS 474/135
TXT Guide roll spring biased in belt-tensioning direction:

    Subject matter under subclass 133 wherein resilient means is provided to
    bias guideroll *in the direction tending to increase tensil stress in the
    belt. *

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS

    115,    117, and 138, for other structure wherein a pulley or guide roll is
    spring biased in a belt-tensioning direction.

    SEARCH CLASS

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 814 for a spring biased
    tensioner in a conveyor.


CLS 474/136
TXT Guide roll mounted for movement of its axis along rectilinial path to
    tension belt:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein said member is a guide roll *
    engaged with the belt *, and whererin said guide roll is moveably supported
    for movement of its axis in a straight-line path to cause the guide roll to
    change the tensil stress in the belt or to take up any undesireable slack
    in the belt.




CLS 474/137
TXT Plural guide rolls engaging single belt:

    Subject matter under subclass 136 wherein an additional guide roll* is
    engaged with the belt*.



CLS 474/138
TXT Guide roll spring biased in belt-tensioning direction:

    Subject matter under subclass 136 wherein resilient means is provided to
    bias the guide roll* in a direction tending to increase tensile stress in
    the belt*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    117, and 135, for other structure wherein a pulley or guide roll is
    spring biased in a belt-tensioning direction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 814 for a spring-biased
    tensioner in a conveyor.


CLS 474/139
TXT PULLEY ENGAGES EXTERIOR SURFACE OF BELT:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein an inner surface of a
    belt* defines an area within a closed loop; and wherein a pulley* is
    located outside of said area and has a drive face in contact with a surface
    of the belt opposite the inner surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118,    for a device for selectively shifting a pulley into and out of
    engagement with the exterior surface of a belt.

    121,    for a device for selectively shifting a belt so that its exterior
    surface is engaged or disengaged with a pulley.



CLS 474/140
TXT BELT GUIDE HAS SURFACE IN SLIDING CONTACT WITH BELT:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a member having a
    nonrotatable face portion engageable with a belt* for guiding the belt
    along an intended path of travel whereby the belt slides over the face
    portion of the member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111,    for a belt tension adjusting device which has a surface in sliding
    contact with the belt.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, may include a nominal
    recitation of a supply or take-up coil (e.g., less than a support for such
    a coil or a cooperative relationship between a tension or exhaust detector
    and reel driving or reel stopping means, etc.), subclass 196.1 for a
    passive guide combined with a material feeder.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 615+ for a residual
    guide or guard that directs elongated flexible material that may be
    combined with more than nominal winding structure.



CLS 474/141
TXT PULLEY HAVING CIRCUMFERENTIALLY SPACED PORTIONS OF DRIVE FACE SPACED
    UNEQUAL DISTANCES FROM PULLEY AXIS OF ROTATION (E.G., ELLIPTICAL PULLEY,
    ETC.):

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a first distance between
    the axis of rotation of a pulley* and a first point on the pulley where a
    belt* is drivingly engaged is less than a second distance between the axis
    of the pulley and a second circumferentially spaced point on the pulley
    periphery where the belt is drivingly engaged.


CLS 474/142
TXT MAGNETIC ATTRACTION BETWEEN BELT AND PULLEY:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the engagement between
    the pulley* and belt* is enhanced by magnetic force.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 805 for a conveyor belt moved by
    a magnetic force.


CLS 474/143
TXT FABRIC DRIVE FACE ON BELT AND PULLEY:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein interengaging faces on a
    belt* and a pulley* are each of a material from interlaced or felted
    strands or fibers.


CLS 474/144
TXT GUARD OR HOUSING FOR BELT OR PULLEY:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a shield is associated
    with a belt* or pulley* to prevent injury or inadvertent contact with the
    belt or pulley or to protect the driven train from introduction of foreign
    matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 382 for guard means for a chain saw.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 606+ and 608+ for gear
    casings and guards.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 397+, 478, 544+, and 814+ for guards associated
    with a cutting device.


CLS 474/145
TXT Connected to belt:

    Subject matter under subclass 144 wherein the shield is attached to a belt*
    for movement therewith.


CLS 474/146
TXT Extending along entire length of belt run:

    Subject matter under subclass 144 wherein the shield has a longitudinal
    extent at least approximating the distance between a point where a belt*
    leaves a driving pulley* and a point where a belt engages a driven pulley.



CLS 474/147
TXT Individual tubular housings for opposite belt runs:

    Subject matter under subclass 146 wherein the shield comprises separate
    ductlike members, one of said ductlike members enclosing a belt* between a
    point where the belt leaves a driving pulley* and a point where the belt
    engages a driven pulley, and the other of said ductlike members enclosing
    the belt between a point where the belt leaves the driven pulley and a
    point where the belt engages the driving pulley.


CLS 474/148
TXT SYSTEM INCLUDING SPACED PULLEYS INTERCONNECTED BY A BELT:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a driving pulley*, a
    driven pulley and a belt* engaged with the driving and driven pulleys,
    whereby rotational power is transmitted from the driving to the driven
    pulley via the belt.



CLS 474/149
TXT Positive drive pulley and friction drive pulley connected by same belt:

    Subject matter under subclass 148 wherein one of said pulleys* has a drive
    face formed by circumferentially spaced, radially extending teeth or ridges
    for driving engagement with radially extending surfaces correspondingly
    spaced along the length of the belt*, and the other of said pulleys has a
    drive face including a surface for driving engagement with the same belt by
    frictional contact with the belt.


CLS 474/150
TXT With frame or mount for system:

    Subject matter under subclass 148 wherein significance is attributed to
    means by which the pulleys* and belt* are supported.




CLS 474/151
TXT AUXILIARY MEMBER REMOVABLY ATTACHED TO PULLEY OR GUIDE ROLL FOR PREVENTING
    LATERAL DISPLACEMENT OF BELT:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a device is provided for
    detachable mounting on a pulley* or guide roll* facilitating placement of a
    belt* on the pulley or guide roll when the device is detached and for
    preventing lateral displacement of the belt on the pulley or guide roll
    when the device is mounted on the pulley or guide roll.




CLS 474/152
TXT POSITIVE DRIVE PULLEY OR GUIDE ROLL:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a pulley or guide roll
    structure include a belt*-engaging drive face formed by circumferentially
    spaced, radially extending teeth or ridges intended for driving engagement
    with radially extending surfaces correspondingly spaced along the length of
    a belt.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 384+ for a guide pulley in a chain saw.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 834 for a positive drive pulley
    for a conveyor.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 52+, and
    particularly subclasses 76+ for a rotating sprocket wheel to advance
    material.


CLS 474/153
TXT With particular belt:

    Subject matter under subclass 152 also including structure of a belt*
    engageable with the pulley*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202+,   for positive drive belt, per se.



CLS 474/154
TXT Belt has spherical or hemispherical drive faces:

    Subject matter under subclass 153 wherein spaced surfaces along the length
    of the belt* have an approximate shape of a ball or a hemisphere, said
    surfaces being received in corresponding recesses defined by the pulley* or
    guide roll* ridges for driving engagement between the ridges and said
    surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203,    for a belt, per se, having spherical or hemispherical drive faces.



CLS 474/155
TXT Belt formed of rigid links:

    Subject matter under subclass 153 wherein the belt* is formed of inflexible
    components which are joined together to permit relative movement of the
    components so that the belt is capable of conforming to circumferential
    curvature of a pulley* or guide roll* drive face.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206+,   for a positive drive belt formed of rigid links.


CLS 474/156
TXT With sequential links pivoted about discrete pivot pin:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 wherein a separate rodlike member is
    inserted through aligned openings in contiguous ends of adjacent inflexible
    components, the longitudinal axis of said rodlike member providing a
    pivotable axis permitting relative movement of the inflexible components.


CLS 474/157
TXT And each link has integral surfaces forming inwardly opening groove:

    Subject matter under subclass 156 wherein each of the inflexible components
    is a unitary member having side walls spaced from each other in the
    direction of the longitudinal extent of the belt*, said side walls being
    interconnected by a top wall to define a cavity opening inwardly toward the
    drive face of the pulley* or guide roll* to receive a pulley or guide roll
    ridge or tooth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212+,   for a belt, per se, having integral surfaces forming an inwardly
    opening groove.



CLS 474/158
TXT And additional coaxial surface for engaging same belt in shifted condition
    or for engaging auxiliary belt, brake, or clutch member:

    Subject matter under subclass 152 wherein, in addition to the
    belt*-engaging drive face on the pulley* or guide roll*, an additional
    operative face is provided, said additional operative face either being
    formed integral with the pulley or guide roll or on a separate member
    mounted coaxially with the pulley or guide roll, said additional operative
    face operating either: (a) to receive a belt which has been shifted from
    the pulley or guide roll drive face; or (b) to receive an additional belt;
    or (c) to receive a member intended to impede rotation of the pulley or
    guide roll; or (d) to receive a member for selectively or intermittently
    engaging or disengaging the pulley or guide roll with another device during
    operation of the pulley.


CLS 474/159
TXT Coaxial surface is belt-engaging surface on friction drive pulley:

    Subject matter under subclass 158 wherein the additional operative face is
    a belt*-engaging face of a pulley for driving a belt by frictional contact
    between the belt and the drive face.


CLS 474/160
TXT Coaxial surface is belt-engaging surface on positive drive pulley of
    different circumference:

    Subject matter under subclass 158 wherein the additional operative face is
    a belt*-engaging face of a second pulley* of the same kind, and wherein the
    distance from the axis of rotation to the drive face of one of the pulleys
    is different than the distance from the axis of rotation to the drive face
    of the other of the pulleys.




CLS 474/161
TXT Having nonmetallic component:

    Subject matter under subclass 152 wherein the structure of the pulley* or
    guide roll* includes a part which is formed from material other than metal.


CLS 474/162
TXT Having belt-engaging surfaces on discrete circumferentially spaced,
    relatively movable or replaceable members:

    Subject matter under subclass 152 wherein the belt*-engaging drive face of
    the pulley* or guide roll*, is formed of separate components spaced
    circumferentially from each other about the perimeter of the pulley or
    guide roll, said components being mounted for relative motion or being so
    mounted as to facilitate separate individual removal and installation of
    the components.


CLS 474/163
TXT Movable with respect to each other during operation:

    Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein the components are mounted for
    relative motion with respect to each other while the pulley* or guide roll*
    is in driving engagement with a belt*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 62+ for a
    reciprocating or oscillating claw or finger associated with a device for
    advancing material.


CLS 474/164
TXT Having axially spaced sets of belt-engaging surfaces:

    Subject matter under subclass 152 wherein the drive face of the pulley* or
    guide roll* includes plural sets of circumferentially spaced, radially
    extending teeth or ridges intended for concurrent engagement with a common
    belt*, one of said sets being spaced from the other in a direction parallel
    to the longitudinal extent of the axis of rotation or the pulley or guide
    roll.


CLS 474/165
TXT With stationary support for pulley or guide roll:

    Subject matter under subclass 152 wherein significance is attributed to
    stationary mounting means for the pulley* or guide roll*.


CLS 474/166
TXT FRICTION DRIVE PULLEY OR GUIDE ROLL:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein pulley* or guide roll*
    structure includes a drive surface or drive surfaces for driving engagement
    with a belt* by frictional contact with the belt.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 210+ for a sash cord guide.

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 384+ for a guide pulley in a chain saw.

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, subclasses 63+ for a
    trolley wheel head mounted for rolling contact with a conductor.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 835 and 842+ for a friction
    drive pulley or guide roll for a conveyor belt.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 168+ for
    orbitally traveling material-engaging surface to advance material.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 600+ and 118+ for a
    winding drum or spool.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying a Pushing or Pulling Force,
    subclasses 264+ for a driving device which contacts and pulls on a cable;
    and subclasses 389+ for a device or member for contacting and guiding a
    moving cable.

    492,    Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere provided for, and
    see the search notes thereunder.



CLS 474/167
TXT With particular belt:

    Subject matter under subclass 166 also including structure of a belt*
    engageable with the pulley* or guide roll.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237+,   for a friction drive belt, per se.


CLS 474/168
TXT Including plural, coaxial, circumferential belt-receiving grooves:

    Subject matter under subclass 166 wherein two or more pairs of
    belt*-engaging surfaces are provided for rotation about a common axis, each
    of said pairs including circumferentially extending surfaces facing each
    other in an axial direction to drivingly engage a belt received in the
    space defined by such surfaces.

    (1)     Note.  A pair or belt-engaging surfaces as defined above may be
    separate surfaces on distinct members or may be radially extending surface
    portions of a common surface.


CLS 474/169
TXT Plural grooves of different circumferences:

    Subject matter under subclass 168 wherein the distance from the axis of
    rotation to a radially innermost point where a belt* engages one pair of
    surfaces is different than the distance from the axis of rotation to a
    radially innermost point where a belt engages another of the pairs of
    surfaces.


CLS 474/170
TXT Plural grooves formed in unitary member:

    Subject matter under subclass 168 wherein at least four of the surfaces
    forming two pairs of belt*-engaging surfaces are all integral parts of a
    common member.





CLS 474/171
TXT And additional coaxial surface for engaging same belt in shifted condition
    or for engaging auxiliary belt, brake, or clutch member:

    Subject matter under subclass 166 wherein, in addition to the
    belt*-engaging drive surface or  drive surfaces on the pulley*, and
    additional operative face is provided, said additional operative face
    either being formed integral with the pulley or on a separate member
    mounted coaxially with the pulley, said additional operative face operating
    either: (a) to receive a belt which has been shifted from the pulley drive
    surface or surfaces, or (b) to receive an additional belt; or (c) to
    receive a member intended to impede rotation of the pulley; or (d) to
    receive a member for selectively or intermittently engaging or disengaging
    the pulley with another device during operation of the pulley.




CLS 474/172
TXT Guide roll on axis perpendicular to top surface of belt for engaging side
    edge of belt:

    Subject matter under subclass 166 wherein a guide roll* is mounted for
    rotation about an axis extending at an angle of substantially ninety
    degrees to the plane of the outer surface of a belt*, said guide roll being
    positioned to contact a side edge of the belt.




CLS 474/173
TXT And additional guide roll for engaging top or bottom surface of belt:

    Subject matter under subclass 172 wherein another guide roll* is mounted in
    position to contact one of the surfaces extending between opposite side
    edges of the belt*.


CLS 474/174
TXT Pulley or guide roll including circumferential belt-receiving groove:

    Subject matter under subclass 166 wherein a pair of belt*-engaging surfaces
    are provided for rotation about a common axis, said pair including
    circumferentially extending surfaces facing each other in an axial
    direction to drivingly engage a belt received in the space defined by such
    surfaces.

    (1)     Note.  A pair of belt-engaging surfaces, as defined above, may be
    separate surfaces on distinct members or may be radially extending surface
    portions of a common surface.


CLS 474/175
TXT Groove formed by rugate or circumferen- tially spaced drive surfaces:

    Subject matter under subclass 174 wherein surfaces defining the
    belt*-receiving space are on separate components circumferentially spaced
    from each other, or wherein at least one of the surfaces defining the belt
    receiving spaces is roughened or includes alternating ridges and valleys to
    increase the extent of frictional grip on the belt.


CLS 474/176
TXT Groove formed by multiple, abutting, circumferentially connected members:

    Subject matter under subclass 174 wherein surfaces defining the
    belt*-receiving space are on separate components arranged circumferentially
    in sequence, and adjacent components abuting each other along a plane
    extending radially from the axis of rotation of the pulley* or guide roll*.



CLS 474/177
TXT And circumferentially continuous belt-engaging layer or insert of diverse
    material added on or between groove-forming flanges:

    Subject matter under subclass 174 wherein a component which has been shaped
    or arranged to provide the belt*-receiving space includes an added coating
    on the component or an additional member inserted into the belt-receiving
    space, said coating or additional member being formed of a material
    different from the material from which the component is formed, and said
    added coating or additional member being for drivingly engaging the belt
    and extending uninterruptedly around the circumference of the pulley* or
    guide roll*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclass 36 for a coating or
    plastic composition to enhance friction grip.


CLS 474/178
TXT Layer or insert of resilient material:

    Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein the coating or additional member
    is formed of a material having an elastic property.


CLS 474/179
TXT Including connected discrete axially spaced groove-forming flanges:

    Subject matter under subclass 174 wherein separate interconnected members
    have outer peripheral portions spaced axially apart and facing each other
    to provide the belt*-engaging surfaces.




CLS 474/180
TXT Connected via nesting cylindrical or conical surfaces integral with the
    flanges:

    Subject matter under subclass 179 wherein the separate members each has a
    conical or cylindrical portion formed integral with, and spaced radially
    inwardly from, the outer peripheral portion, the conical or cylindrical
    portion of one of the members being received within the conical or
    cylindrical portion of the other of the members.


CLS 474/181
TXT And abutting radial surfaces integral with the flanges:

    Subject matter under subclass 179 wherein the separate members each has a
    planar face formed integral with, and extending radially inwardly from, the
    outer peripherical portion, the planar face of one of the members being
    mounted in abutting relationship with the planar face of the other of the
    members.




CLS 474/182
TXT Including connector extending through opening in abutting surfaces:

    Subject matter under subclass 181 wherein the separate members are
    interconnected by a connector device which extends through an opening in
    one or both of the abutting planar faces of the members.


CLS 474/183
TXT Connector comprises tang integral with one of the surfaces:

    Subject matter under subclass l82 wherein the connector device comprises a
    tongue-like part formed integral with one of the planar faces and received
    into an opening in the other of the planar faces.



CLS 474/184
TXT Pulley or guide roll having plural, discrete belt-engaging faces for
    engaging flat belt:

    Subject matter under subclass 166 wherein a belt*-engaging surface is
    provided on each of separate members, the belt-engaging surfaces being so
    arranged as to provide a composite structure for intended engagement with a
    belt having a planar inwardly facing drive face.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95+,    for a pulley having discrete rim sections and wherein a hub portion
    is also formed in sections movable radially apart from each other.



CLS 474/185
TXT Circumferentially spaced faces:

    Subject matter under subclass l84 wherein the belt*-engaging surfaces are
    spaced from each other in a direction extending circumferentially about the
    axis of rotation of the pulley* or guide roll.



CLS 474/186
TXT And axially spaced faces:

    Subject matter under subclass 185 wherein belt*-engaging surfaces are also
    spaced from each other in a direction parallel to the longitudinal extent
    of the axis of rotation of the pulley* or guide roll*.


CLS 474/187
TXT Each face has continuous circumferential periphery:

    Subject matter under subclass 184 wherein the belt*-engaging surface of
    each of the members extends for 360 degrees circumferentially about the
    axis of rotation of the pulley* or guide roll*.




CLS 474/188
TXT Including grooves or openings in cylindrical belt-engaging surface (e.g.,
    for escape of air, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 166 wherein the drive surface is on a
    generally cylindrical unitary member, and wherein said drive surface has
    apertures or grooves formed therein and arranged in a pattern extending
    about the entire periphery of the member.





CLS 474/189
TXT Circumferentially extending grooves:

    Subject matter under subclass 188 wherein grooves in said drive surface
    extend for at least 360 degrees circumferentially about the axis of
    rotation of the pulley* or guide roll*.






CLS 474/190
TXT Including nonmetallic belt-engaging surface portion:

    Subject matter under subclass 166 wherein the surface intended for driving
    engagement with the belt* includes a material other than metal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclass 36 for a coating or
    plastic composition to enhance friction grip.




CLS 474/191
TXT Rubber:

    Subject matter under subclass 190 wherein the surface intended for driving
    engagement with the belt* is formed of rubber.




CLS 474/192
TXT With embedded metal layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein a component made of rubber which
    provides the driving surface has an additional metallic component embedded
    therein.




CLS 474/193
TXT Leather:

    Subject matter under subclass 190 wherein the surface intended for driving
    engagement with the belt* is formed of leather.


CLS 474/194
TXT Wood or paper:

    Subject matter under subclass 190 wherein the surface intended for driving
    engagement with the belt* is formed of wood or paper.


CLS 474/195
TXT With spokes connecting rim to hub:

    Subject matter under subclass 166 wherein a set of circumferentially
    spaced, radially extending arms extend between and interconnect a component
    providing the belt*-engaging surface with component providing the means by
    which the pulley* or guide roll* is mounted on a drive or support shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97+,    for a pulley including spokes connecting the hub and rim, and
    wherein the hub is formed in sections movable radially apart from each
    other.


CLS 474/196
TXT Plural spoke sets axially spaced:

    Subject matter under subclass 195 including an additional set of
    circumferentially spaced, radially extending arms which extend between and
    interconnect a component providing the belt*-engaging surface with a
    component providing the means by which the pulley* or guide roll* is
    mounted on a drive or support shaft, the two sets of arms being spaced from
    each other in a direction parallel to the longitudinal extent of the axis
    of rotation of the pulley or guide roll.


CLS 474/197
TXT Cylindrical rim interconnected to axially spaced support members:

    Subject matter under subclass 166 wherein a component has a belt*-engaging
    surface which is generally cylindrical in shape, and wherein a pair of
    separate members are provided with aligned openings for receiving a drive
    or support shaft for the pulley* or guide roll*, said members including
    radially extending surfaces spaced from each other in a direction parallel
    to the longitudinal extent of the shaft axis, and said members being
    rigidly connected to said component to mount said component in radially
    spaced relation from said shaft.


CLS 474/198
TXT With stationary support for pulley or guide roll:

    Subject matter under subclass 166 including the structure of a member which
    is immobile during operation of the pulley* or guide roll*, and which
    serves to mount the pulley or guide roll in desired position for engaging
    the belt*.


CLS 474/199
TXT And ball or roller bearing for mounting pulley or guide roll on support:

    Subject matter under subclass 198 wherein an antifriction device having
    balls or rollers is interposed between the pulley* or guide roll* and the
    mounting member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, appropriate subclasses for bearing or guide structure,
    per se.


CLS 474/200
TXT MOBIOUS BELT:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a belt* has a one-sided
    pulley*-engaging surface formed by holding a first end of an elongated band
    fixed, rotating the opposite end l80 degrees about an axis coincident with
    a centerline of the elongated band parallel to the long dimension thereof,
    and securing the opposite end to the first end.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclass 195 for a mobius strip typewritter
    ribbon, and see (1) Note therein for an explanation of mobius.



CLS 474/201
TXT BELT HAVING DRIVE SURFACES ON OPPOSITE SIDE EDGES OF STACKED PLATES HAVING
    PLANAR FACES PERPENDICULAR TO DIRECTION OF BELT MOVEMENT:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a belt* is formed of a
    plurality of flat bodies; each of said bodies including narrow top, bottom
    and side edges defining oppositely facing planar surfaces with planar
    surfaces of adjacent bodies abutting each other, said side edges being
    arranged for intended engagement with facing surfaces defining a
    circumferentially extending groove in a pulley*.


CLS 474/202
TXT POSITIVE DRIVE BELT:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein belt* structure includes
    means defining distinct pulley*-engaging surfaces spaced along the length
    of the belt for intended driving engagement of such surfaces sequentially
    with radially extending teeth or ridges of the pulley correspondingly
    spaced about the circumference of the pulley.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153,    for a positive drive belt combined with a pulley.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 380 and 381+ for a band or chain saw.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 788+ for an endless band or chain cutting
    device.

    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, and Animal Powered, subclass 16 for a belt
    intended to be driven by an animal treading on the belt.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 844.1+ for conveyor belt
    structure.

    305,    Wheel Substitutes for Land Vehicles, subclasses 157+ and 185+ for a
    track or tread.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 296+ for an abrading tool comprising an
    endless band.



CLS 474/203
TXT Drive surfaces on belt formed by spherical or hemispherical elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 202 wherein the pulley*-engaging surfaces on
    the belt have an approximate shape of a ball or hemisphere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154,    for a belt having spherical or hemispherical elements combined with
    a pulley.


CLS 474/204
TXT Drive surfaces on belt formed or interconnected by continuous flexible
    member:

    Subject matter under subclass 202 wherein the pulley*-engaging surfaces are
    formed as an integral part of, or interconnected by, a unitary band which
    extends the entire length to the belt*, said band being formed of a pliant
    material to permit the band to conform to the circumferential curvature of
    the pulley*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249+,   for a friction drive belt having grooves or openings therein such
    as for escape of air, flexibility, etc.


CLS 474/205
TXT Drive surfaces on longitudinally spaced teeth formed integral with flexible
    member:

    Subject matter under subclass 204 wherein alternating ridges and grooves
    are formed along the length of said band as an integral part thereof, said
    ridges providing said pulley*-engaging surfaces.


CLS 474/206
TXT Belt formed of rigid links:

    Subject matter under subclass 202 wherein the belt* is formed of inflexible
    components which are joined together to permit relative movement of the
    components so that the belt is capable of conforming to curvature of a
    pulley* drive face.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155+,   for a belt formed of rigid links combined with a positive drive
    pulley.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 850+ for a conveyor belt
    formed of rigid links.


CLS 474/207
TXT Including nonmetallic part:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 wherein the belt* includes a part formed
    of a material other than metal.


CLS 474/208
TXT Including wire member coiled about pivotal axis between links:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 including a part in the form of a thin
    strand helically wound about a transverse pivotal axis between
    longitudinally connected components forming the belt*.


CLS 474/209
TXT Including ball or roller bearing circumferentially spaced about pivotal
    axis between links:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 wherein a plurality of friction-reducing
    members in the form of balls or rollers are space circumferentially about
    the axis where longitudinally connected components are pivotally attached
    to each other.


CLS 474/210
TXT Links pivotable about diverse axes during operation (e.g., "universal"
    connection facilitating alignment with sprockets in diverse planes):

    Subject matter under subclass 206 wherein significance is attributed to a
    manner of interconnecting components to permit relative movement about more
    than one axis.


CLS 474/211
TXT Ball-and-socket connection:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein a component is provided with a
    part having a spherical or hemispherical surface received in a
    correspondingly shaped recess in an adjacent component to permit relative
    movement through nonparallel planes.


CLS 474/212
TXT Link including integral surface forming inwardly opening groove (e.g.,
    silent chain, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 206 wherein each of the inflexible components
    is a unitary member having side walls spaced from each other in the
    direction of the longitudinal extent of the belt*, said side walls being
    interconnected by a wall to define a cavity opening toward the drive face
    of the pulley* for receiving a pulley ridge or tooth.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157,    for a belt of this kind combined with a positive drive pulley.


CLS 474/213
TXT Plural links having laterally aligned groove-forming surfaces:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 wherein at least two of said components
    with said inwardly opening cavities are arranged with the surfaces defining
    the top and sidewalls aligned with each other in a direction traverse to
    the longitudinal extent of the belt*.


CLS 474/214
TXT Connector or bearing member extending through or positioned in laterally
    aligned openings in adjacent links is noncircular in traverse cross section:

    Subject matter under subclass 213 wherein adjacent components are each
    provided with an opening, the openings being aligned with each other in a
    direction traverse to the longitudinal extent of the belt* for receiving a
    separate connector or bearing member extending longitudinally through or
    positioned in the aligned openings, and said connection or bearing member
    having an external surface which is noncircular in a cross section taken on
    a plane traverse to the longitudinal extent of the connector or bearing
    member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    229,    for a connector for a belt of the kind provided in subclass 228,
    and wherein the connector is noncircular in traverse cross section.



CLS 474/215
TXT Multiple connector or bearing members extend through or positioned in
    common opening:

    Subject matter under subclass 214 wherein a plurality of separate connector
    or bearing members are arranged within a single opening.


CLS 474/216
TXT Concave surface of one connector or bearing member abuts convex surface of
    another connector or bearing member:

    Subject matter under subclass 215 wherein one of said connector or bearing
    members has an inwardly curving surface which abuts an outwardly curving
    surface connector or bearing member.


CLS 474/217
TXT Plural connector or bearing members with concave surface abut covex surface
    or surfaces on another connector or bearing member:

    Subject matter under subclass 216 wherein two of said connector or bearing
    members have an inwardly curving surface which abuts an outwardly curving
    surface or surfaces on another connector or bearing member.



CLS 474/218
TXT Including diverse member for interconnecting opposite ends to complete loop
    (e.g., repair link for broken chain, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 206 wherein a device is provided for
    interconnecting opposite ends of a plurality of sequentially longitudinally
    connected components to form a belt*, said device being different in
    structure than said components, and different in structure than other means
    interconnecting sequential components through the extent of the belt.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 31+ for a belt
    connector, per se .


CLS 474/219
TXT Including separate locking member for retaining link-connector in laterally
    aligned openings through adjacent links:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 wherein a retainer device is separably
    fastened to a laterally extending connector member for preventing
    inadvertent withdrawal of the connector member from a position within
    openings in longitudinally adjacent components, the openings being aligned
    in a lateral direction perpendicular to the longitudinal extent of the
    belt*.


CLS 474/220
TXT Common locking member retains longitudinally spaced connectors:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 wherein a single retaining device is
    fastened to at least two connector members spaced from each other in a
    direction parallel to the longitudinal extent of the belt*.


CLS 474/221
TXT Strandlike locking member (e.g., wire, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein the retaining device is in the
    form of a thin strand.


CLS 474/222
TXT Threaded connection between connector and locking member:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 wherein the retaining device includes a
    surface with a helically extending ridge which cooperates with a
    corresponding helically extending ridge on the connector member.



CLS 474/223
TXT Locking member received in annular groove extending entirely around
    circumference of connector:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 wherein the connector member has an outer
    surface provided with a groove extending 360 degrees about the longitudinal
    axis of the connector, and wherein said retaining device is received within
    said groove.


CLS 474/224
TXT Locking member includes portion disposed within opening which receives
    connector:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 wherein at least a portion of a surface
    on the retaining device extends within walls defining the opening or
    openings which receive the connector member.


CLS 474/225
TXT Locking member extends through all aligned openings:

    Subject matter under subclass 224 wherein the retaining device extends
    substantially the entire length of a passageway defined by the aligned
    openings.


CLS 474/226
TXT Link including discrete members forming laterally spaced sides of opening
    for pulley tooth:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 wherein a pulley*-tooth-receiving
    component is formed of separate parts spaced from each other in a direction
    transverse to the longitudinal extent of the belt* to define opposite sides
    of an opening intended to receive the tooth of the pulley.


CLS 474/227
TXT With particular structure facilitating disassembly of adjacent links:

    Subject matter under subclass 226 wherein significance is attributed to
    structure which facilitates dismantling sequentially arranged components
    from each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219+,   for structure including sequential links interconnected by a
    separate connector pin, and wherein a separate locking member, which may be
    removable, is provided to retain the connector pin in place.


CLS 474/228
TXT With discrete connector extending through laterally aligned apertures in
    adjacent links:

    Subject matter under subclass 226 wherein components forming the belt* each
    include means defining an aperture or apertures therein, the axis of said
    aperture or apertures being a line extending transversely perpendicular to
    the longitudinal extent of the belt, the aperture or apertures in one
    component being axially aligned with the aperture or apertures in an
    adjacent component, and said belt further including a separate connector
    member extending through the aligned apertures to interconnect adjacent
    components.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    234,    for a belt having links wherein opposite sides of an opening for a
    pulley tooth are formed as a unitary member, and having adjacent links
    interconnected by a connector pin or the like.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 851+ for a conveyor link with
    a pin connecting adjacent links.


CLS 474/229
TXT Connector has bearing surface which is noncircular in transverse cross
    section:

    Subject matter under subclass 228 wherein said connector member has an
    external surface which is noncircular in a cross section taken on a plane
    transverse to the longitudinal extent of the connector member, said
    external surface being arranged for relative oscillatory movement on a face
    of another member during operation of the belt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    214+,   for a connector for a belt of the kind provided in subclass 213,
    and wherein the connector is noncircular in transverse cross section.



CLS 474/230
TXT Connector connects sequential links each having discrete members forming
    laterally spaced sides:

    Subject matter under subclass 228 wherein sequential components are each
    formed of separate parts spaced from each other in a direction transverse
    to the longitudinal extent of the belt* to define an opening intended to
    receive the tooth of a pulley*, and wherein said connector member extends
    through axially aligned apertures in both of said sequential components to
    interconnect the components.


CLS 474/231
TXT With sleeve rotatable with respect to each link for engaging pulley tooth:

    Subject matter under subclass 230 wherein a generally cylindrical member is
    positioned coaxially with and around said connector member, said
    cylindrical member being relatively movable with respect to each of said
    components to provide a surface for engaging the tooth of a pulley*.




CLS 474/232
TXT Link including common member forming laterally spaced sides of opening for
    pulley tooth:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 wherein a pulley*-tooth-receiving
    component includes surface portions facing each other in a direction
    transverse to the longitudinal extent of the belt* to provide opposite
    sides of a pulley-tooth-receiving opening, said surface portions being
    formed as integral parts of a unitary member.


CLS 474/233
TXT With discrete member interconnecting sequential pulley-tooth-receiving
    links:

    Subject matter under subclass 232 wherein a separately attached connector
    member is used to connect sequential components having openings for
    receiving a pulley* tooth.


CLS 474/234
TXT Connector member inserted through lateral opening in pulley-tooth-receiving
    links:

    Subject matter under subclass 233 wherein a component having a
    pulley*-tooth-receiving opening is provided with an aperture extending
    through the component in a direction transverse to the longitudinal extent
    of the belt, and said connector member being received in said aperture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    228+,   for a belt having links formed of discrete side members forming an
    opening for a pulley tooth, and having adjacent links interconnected by a
    connector pin or the like.


CLS 474/235
TXT Common member surrounds opening for pulley tooth on all sides:

    Subject matter under subclass 232 wherein surface portions of a unitary
    member form an opening intended to completely surround the tooth of a
    pulley*.


CLS 474/236
TXT Member formed of sheet metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 235 wherein the member is constructed from a
    web or sheet of metal having a relatively thin uniform dimension between
    relatively broad planar faces.


CLS 474/237
TXT FRICTION DRIVE BELT:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein belt structure includes a
    drive surface or drive surfaces for driving engagement with a pulley* by
    frictional contact with the pulley.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    for a friction drive belt in combination with a friction drive
    pulley or guide roll.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclasses 244+ for a fiber drafting
    apron in the form of an endless band.

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 380 and 381+ for a band or chain saw.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclass 201 for an
    endless band formed by a spinning, twisting, or twining operation.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 788+ for an endless band or chain cutting
    device.

    185,    Motors:  Spring, Weight, and Animal Powered, subclass 16 for a belt
    intended to be driven by an animal treading thereon.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 844.1+ for a conveyor belt
    structure.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 296+ for an abrading tool comprising an
    endless band.


CLS 474/238
TXT Including plural interconnected and transversely spaced pairs of oppositely
    facing side-drive surfaces (e.g., plural "V-belts", etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 237 wherein the belt* includes plural pairs
    of driving surfaces, each pair including surfaces facing in opposite
    directions for intended engagement within a circumferentially extending
    pulley* groove defined by spaced belt-engaging faces, first and second
    pairs of surfaces being interconnected with each other, and said second
    pair of surfaces being spaced from said first pair of surfaces in a
    direction parallel to the longitudinal extent of the axis of the pulley
    with which the belt is intended to be engaged.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242+,   for a "V-belt" wherein longitudinally spaced drive faces are on
    separate members.

    265,    for a "V-belt".


CLS 474/239
TXT Having drive surface on helically coiled wire or cord:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 wherein the drive surface is formed as an
    integral part of an elongated strand helically wound about an axis so that
    the external surface of the belt has sequential ridges formed by sequential
    turns of the helix.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272,    for a belt having a drive surface formed of metal.


CLS 474/240
TXT Including plural interconnected members each having a drive surface facing
    in a common direction:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 wherein plural drive surfaces are each
    formed as integral parts of separate components, said components being
    interconnected so that a drive surface on one component faces in the same
    direction as the drive surface on an adjacent component.


CLS 474/241
TXT Forming imbricate structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 240 wherein the components are sequentially
    interconnected in shingled fashion with a first integral extension of each
    component overlapping one adjacent component on one side, and with a second
    integral extension of each component underlapping another adjacent
    component on the opposite side.


CLS 474/242
TXT Belt has oppositely facing side drive surfaces (e.g., "V-belt", etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 240 wherein said drive surfaces on said belt*
    are for intended engagement within a circumferentially extending pulley*
    groove defined by spaced belt-engaging faces, said belt including plural
    drive surfaces along one side thereof for intended engagement with a pulley
    face forming one side of the groove, and said belt also including plural
    drive surfaces along the opposite side thereof for intended engagement with
    a pulley face forming the other side of the groove.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238,    for a belt structure including plural interconnected and
    transversely spaced "V-belts."

    265,    for  a   "V-belt".


CLS 474/243
TXT Surfaces on ball or roller elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 wherein said drive surfaces are on
    components in the form of balls or rollers rotatable about their own axis.





CLS 474/244
TXT Oppositely facing surfaces are on pair of discrete elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 wherein a pair of said drive surfaces
    includes one surface formed as an integral surface of one component facing
    toward one side of said groove, and said pair includes another drive
    surface spaced directly across from said one surface in a direction
    parallel to the longitudinal extent of the pulley* axis and formed as
    integral surface of a separate component facing toward the other side of
    the groove.



CLS 474/245
TXT And sequential pairs are interconnected longitudinally by distinct pivot
    elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 244 wherein first and second pairs of
    components are interconnected by means allowing said first and second pair
    to pivot relative to each other about an axis extending perpendicular to
    the longitudinal extent of the belt*.



CLS 474/246
TXT Plural, inwardly facing drive surfaces along the direction transverse to
    longitudinal extent of belt:

    Subject matter under subclass 240 wherein the drive surfaces together form
    the innermost face of a closed loop of the belt*, and wherein separate
    components are interconnected and disposed relative to each other in a
    direction perpendicular to the longitudinal extent of the belt.



CLS 474/247
TXT And plural, inwardly facing drive surfaces along the direction parallel to
    longitudinal extent of belt:

    Subject matter under subclass 246 wherein separate components are
    interconnected and also disposed relative to each other in a direction
    along the longitudinal extent of the belt*.



CLS 474/248
TXT Including link-chain with coextensive continuous surface belt:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 wherein a drive surface is formed as an
    integral surface on a unitary component extending the entire length of the
    belt*, and wherein an elongated member formed of rigid pivotally connected
    links is embedded or fixedly connected to said component, said elongated
    member also extending the entire length of the belt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100,    for structure wherein an auxiliary endless band is removably
    mounted in engagement with the exterior surface of a belt to hold the belt
    in firm engagement with a pulley.



CLS 474/249
TXT Including groove openings or pockets formed in belt surface and arranged
    along entire length of belt (e.g., for flexibility, air escape, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 237 wherein a component providing an
    otherwise imperforate exposed face of the belt* has a groove, plural
    grooves, apertures, or depressions formed in such exposed face and arranged
    in a pattern, or extending, along substantially the entire length of the
    belt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204+,   for a belt having grooves or openings for intended positive drive
    engagement with teeth or ridges or a pulley.



CLS 474/250
TXT Grooves transversely extending on belt surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 249 wherein at least one exposed face of said
    component has plural grooves formed therein spaced along the length of the
    belt*, and said grooves extend in a direction substantially perpendicular
    to the longitudinal extent of the belt.


CLS 474/251
TXT And additional groove on opposite surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 250 wherein a face on said component opposite
    from said one face also has a groove or grooves formed therein.


CLS 474/252
TXT Groove continuous and longitudinally extending:

    Subject matter under subclass 249 wherein an exposed face of said component
    has a groove formed therein which extends substantially the entire length
    of the belt*.


CLS 474/253
TXT Including particular means connecting opposite ends to form loop:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 wherein the belt* is formed by
    interconnecting opposite ends of an elongated member, and wherein
    significance is attributed to the manner by which said opposite ends are
    interconnected.


CLS 474/254
TXT Connected by adhering surface on one end to surface on other end (e.g., by
    adhesive heat, seal, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 253 wherein the opposite ends are
    interconnected via a chemical bond.


CLS 474/255
TXT Including discrete connector:

    Subject matter under subclass 253 wherein the opposite ends are
    interconnected via a separate connector component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 31+ for a belt
    connector, per se.


CLS 474/256
TXT Connector comprises element inserted into longitudinal openings in belt
    ends:

    Subject matter under subclass 255 wherein each end of the member includes
    walls defining an opening which has an axial extent parallel to the
    direction of the longitudinal extent of the member, said openings in said
    opposite ends being axially aligned with each other when the ends are
    brought together, and wherein said connector component comprises a device
    inserted into the aligned openings.


CLS 474/257
TXT Connector comprises plate clamped externally of belt ends:

    Subject matter under subclass 255 wherein said connector component is in
    the form of a thin, flat device which overlaps and is interconnected with
    opposite ends of the member when the ends are brought together to form the
    loop.


CLS 474/258
TXT Connector comprises cord sewn through belt ends:

    Subject matter under subclass 255 wherein the connector component is the
    form of a separate strand which is interlaced through opposite ends of the
    member when the ends are brought together to form the loop.


CLS 474/259
TXT Drive surface on single sheet or web wound in plural, completely overlying
    convolutions:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 wherein the drive surface is formed as an
    integral surface on a thin, flat elongated piece of material, said material
    being wound or folded upon itself to include at least two complete wraps of
    the same piece of material about itself, and wherein the second wrap of the
    material completely covers the first wrap.




CLS 474/260
TXT Including embedded elongated strand having multiple components or layers of
    diverse materials:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 wherein separate cordlike member embedded
    interiorly of the drive surfaces of the belt and extending through
    substantially the entire length of the belt, said cordlike member being
    formed of separate interwound filaments of different materials or being
    impregnated or coated, prior to being embedded in the belt, with a material
    different from the material forming the cordlike member.



CLS 474/261
TXT Including plural superposed layers each having strands particularly
    oriented relative to belt dimension:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 wherein the belt* includes a first group
    of plural cords arranged at a first level in the belt, and a second group
    of plural cords arranged at a second level in the belt, the second level
    being disposed relative to the first level in a direction toward the
    outermost periphery of the belt, and the cords in the first level being
    formed as a part of a separate web or as separate components from the cords
    in the second level, and wherein significance is attributed to the
    directional orientation of the cords in each group as related to a length,
    width, or thickness dimension of the belt.


CLS 474/262
TXT Strand in the layers are oblique to longitudinal run of belt (e.g., plural
    layers of bias fabric, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 261 wherein the longitudinal centerline of
    the cords in each of the first and second layers is at an angle less than
    ninety degrees relative to the longitudinal centerline of the belt*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266+,   for a belt including at least one fabric layer.


CLS 474/263
TXT Including discrete embedded fibers:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 wherein said belt* includes multiple,
    slender, flexible elements dispersed within a plastic or rubberlike
    material, said elements having a length shorter than a width or thickness
    dimension of said belt, and said elements being noninterlinked with each
    other prior to being dispersed in the plastic or rubberlike material.

    (1)     Note.  Fibers which have been interlinked as by twisting, felting,
    etc., to form a structure longer than the length of the individual fibers,
    such as a cord or fabric, are not considered to be discrete fibers for
    purposes of this subclass.


CLS 474/264
TXT Including plural layers of different elastomeric materials:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 wherein the belt* includes at least two
    layers of material having an elastic, rubberlike property, the material in
    one of the layers being of different chemical composition than the material
    in the other of the layers.


CLS 474/265
TXT Having trapezodial cross section (e.g., "V-belt", etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 237 wherein a cross section of the belt*,
    taken on a plane perpendicular to the longitudinal extent of the belt, has
    the approximate shape of a trapezoid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238,    for belt structure including plural interconnected and transversely
    spaced "V-belts".

    242+,   for a "V-belt" wherein longitudinally spaced drive faces are on
    separate members.


CLS 474/266
TXT Including fabric web (e.g., knit, woven, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 237 wherein said belt* is formed from or
    includes a flat, elongated unitary piece of material, said material being
    formed of strands or fibers which have been knitted, woven, felted, or
    otherwise interlaced with each other to form said unitary piece of material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262,    for a belt including plural layers of bias fabric.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 846+ for an endless conveyor
    formed of a fabric.


CLS 474/267
TXT Fabric having particular knit or weave:

    Subject matter under subclass 266 wherein the material is formed from
    interlaced strands, and wherein significance is attributed to the manner in
    which such strands are arranged relative to each other.


CLS 474/268
TXT And additional coating, layer or reinforcement of diverse kind of material:

    Subject matter under subclass 266 wherein an additional material of
    different chemical construction than said elongated, unitary piece of
    material is coated or otherwise formed as a layer on said elongated,
    unitary piece of material.


CLS 474/269
TXT Additional material is leather:

    Subject matter under subclass 268 wherein the additional material is
    leather.


CLS 474/270
TXT Additional material is metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 268 wherein the additional material is metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272,    for a belt having a drive surface formed of metal.



CLS 474/271
TXT Additional material is rubber:

    Subject matter under subclass 268 wherein the additional material is
    rubber.


CLS 474/272
TXT Including metallic drive face:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 wherein the drive surface is formed of
    metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239,    for a belt having a drive surface on a helically coiled metal wire.

    270,    for a belt including a fabric layer and a metal layer.


CLS 474/273
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition not provided for in the previous
    subclasses.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 474/900
TXT PHASE VARIATOR:

    Structure wherein at rest or during operation a point on the periphery of a
    drive pulley* has a first positional relationship with respect to a point
    on the periphery of a driven pulley, and wherein means is provided for
    changing the positional relationship from said first positional
    relationship to a second positional relationship without changing effective
    drive circumference of either pulley.


CLS 474/901
TXT PULLEY OR GUIDE ROLL FOR TRACK OF ENDLESS TRACK VEHICLE:

    A pulley* or guide roll* intended to be used to drive or to guide a
    flexible or articulated endless member used as a wheel substitute for a
    land vehicle.


CLS 474/902
TXT PARTICULAR CONNECTION BETWEEN RIM AND HUB:

    Structure wherein significance is attributed to the manner in which a
    belt*-engaging component of a pulley* or guide roll* is interconnected to a
    component having an opening for receiving a drive or support shaft.


CLS 474/903
TXT PARTICULAR CONNECTION BETWEEN HUB AND SHAFT:

    Structure wherein significance is attributed to the manner of
    interconnecting a drive or support shaft with a component of a pulley* or
    guide roll receiving such shaft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses for connections, per
    se, and particularly subclasses 230+ for a connection between the side of a
    member and a rod extending transversely thereto.


CLS 475/
TTL PLANETARY GEAR TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS OR COMPONENTS

CLS 475/
TXT                CLASS DEFINITION



    I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER
    This is the class for planetary gear power transmission and elements
    thereof, such transmission being defined as an assembly of parts including
    interacting first and second gears each having a central axis and wherein,
    during at least one mode of operation, the axis of one of the gears follows
    a path extending around the axis of the other gear.

    II.     EXPLANATORY NOTES ON THE SCOPE OF THE CLASS

    (1)     Note.  A method or apparatus for manufacturing a device of this
    class is not found herein, but is found in an appropriate manufacturing
    class. See, for example, Class 29, Metal working, subclasses 893+ and the
    other subclasses in Class 29, directed to process and apparatus of
    mechanical manufacture.

    (2)     Note.  A nominal recitation of a device for applying power to, or
    receiving power from, a structure of this class will not exclude a patent
    from being placed in this class.



    III.    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 52 and 63+ for mechanical
    movements which may include planetary gearing, 640 for gearing of the
    "strain wave" type, and 843+ for a planetary gearing control interrelated
    with a motor control.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, for combinations of significant vehicle structure
    which may include planetary gearing, especially subclasses 6.2+ for
    steering by driving; 65.7 for an electric motor driven change speed
    gearing; 165 for the use of a fluid accumulator or flywheel to store and
    release energy; 233+ for a four wheel drive vehicle; 292+ and 374+ for
    spatial relationships of a transmission and a vehicle frame; and 369 and
    372 for planetary combinations.

    184,    Lubrication, for lubrication generally, and especially subclass
    6.12 which has not been screened for planetary gearing.

    188,    Brakes, for brakes*, per se.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses headed "INTERRELATED
    POWER DELIVERY CONTROLS", which may include planetary gearing controls
    combined with clutch* and motor controls; 3.21+ and 3.34 for an
    impeller-turbine type fluid drive in combination with a clutch* and brake*,
    respectively; 3.52+ for controls for a planetary transmission and coaxial
    clutch*; and 4+ for a transmission control and brake*.

    477,    Interrelated Power Delivery Controls, Including Engine Control, for
    interrelated control between an engine and a transmission, clutch, or brake.

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclasses 51+ for a transmission control of that type.

    IV      GLOSSARY OF TERMS
    The following glossary will define words or phrases used in the class and
    subclass definitions and are identified by an asterisk which appears after
    the word, or in the instance of a phrase, after the last word of the phrase:

    Bevel Gear:
    A gear having radial teeth extending in the same general direction as the
    rotational axis of the gear, but inclined with respect to the rotational
    axis of the gear.

    Brake:
    Mechanism to selectively or automatically stop a moving part with respect
    to a stationary part.

    Clutch:
    Mechanism to selectively or automatically couple two relatively moving
    parts together for common movement or to uncouple such parts.

    Condition Responsive:
    Mechanism to sense a condition or change of condition in the environment of
    a planetary gear transmission; and, in response to such sensing, effect a
    control function on the transmission or on a drive train* to or from such
    transmission.

    Differential Transmission:
    Mechanism having separate outputs driven simultaneously from a different
    member of a planetary gear transmission; the arrangement being such that a
    change in speed of one of the outputs, in at least one mode of operation,
    has a direct effect on the speed of the other output.

    Drive Train:
    Mechanism including a group of interconnected elements which transfers
    rotational power from a power source* to a load device*.

    Input Member:
    Mechanism which receives rotational power from a power source*, and
    transfers such rotational power to a planetary gear transmission.

    Load Device:
    Mechanism which receives rotational power from an output member* to put
    such rotational power to useful work.

    One-Way Brake:
    A brake* which automatically engages to stop a rotating part when the
    rotating part attempts to rotate in a first direction, but which permits
    rotation of the rotating part in a direction opposite to said first
    direction.

    One-Way Clutch:
    A clutch* which automatically couples two rotatable parts together for
    joint rotation when a first of said parts rotates in a first direction, but
    which automatically uncouples said parts when the first of said parts
    rotates in a direction opposite to said first direction, or uncouples said
    parts when the second part rotates faster than the first part.

    Orbit Gear:
    A gear mounted for rotation about the same axis as a planet carrier* and
    having a drive face contacting a drive face of a planet pinion* at a
    location radially outward from the rotational axis of the planet pinion*.

    Output Member:
    Mechanism which receives rotational power from a planetary gear
    transmission and transfers such rotational power to a load device*.

    Overdrive:
    Mechanism wherein an output member* is driven at a greater rotational
    velocity than the rotational velocity of an input member*.

    Planet Carrier:
    A device mounted for rotation about a first axis, and carrying a planet
    pinion*, the planet pinion having a second rotational axis.


    Planet Pinion:
    A gear mounted on a planet carrier*, said carrier rotatable about a first
    axis, and said gear rotatable about a second axis.

    Power Source:
    Agency for supplying rotational power to an input member* of a planetary
    gear transmission.

    Speed Ratio:
    Rotational velocity of an output member* divided by the rotational velocity
    of an input member*.

    Spur Gear:
    A gear having radially extending teeth on the rim, wherein the edges of the
    teeth extend in a direction generally parallel with rotational axis of the
    gear.

    Sun Gear:
    A gear mounted for rotation about the same axis as the rotational axis of a
    planet carrier* and having a drive face contacting a drive face of a planet
    pinion* between the axis of the planet pinion and the axis of the planet
    carrier.

    Underdrive:
    Mechanism wherein an output member* is driven at a slower rotational
    velocity than the rotational velocity of an input member*.

    Unitary Drive:
    Mechanism wherein an output member is driven at the same rotational
    velocity as an input member.

    Worm Gear:
    A gear having radial teeth on the rim with the edges of the teeth arranged
    as a helix extending around the rotational axis of the gear.


CLS 475/1
TXT INPUT FROM INDEPENDENT POWER SOURCES:
    Subject matter under the class definition including at least two power
    sources* which act separately or in unison.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for two power sources*, one of which starts the other and said one
    is subsequently driven by the other.

    267+,   for a flywheel which is, at times, used as a power source*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 698+ for a residual system of plural
    motors.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 661 and 665+ for related
    subjec t  matter.


CLS 475/2
TXT Condition responsive motor control:
    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a power source* is a motor which is
    condition responsive*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    477,    Interrelated Power Delivery Controls, Including Engine Control, for
    interrelated control between an engine and a transmission, clutch, or brake.


CLS 475/3
TXT Including manual input:
    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a power source* is human force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    349,    for related subject  matter.


CLS 475/4
TXT And electric motor input:
    Subject matter under subclass 3 wherein a power source* includes a motor
    driven by electricity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5       and 149+,       for related subject  matter.


CLS 475/5
TXT Including electric motor input:
    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a power source* includes a motor
    driven by electricity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for subject matter including a manual and electric drive.

    149+,   for a planetary transmission having an electric motor drive.


CLS 475/6
TXT Plural outputs:
    Subject matter under subclass 1 including means to drive at least two load
    devices*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332,    and see the search notes therein for related subject  matter.


CLS 475/7
TXT Worm gear in drive train:
    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a drive train* includes a worm
    gear*.


CLS 475/8
TXT One-way clutch or brake in drive train:
    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a drive train* includes a one-way
    clutch* or a one-way brake*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, for a one-way brake, per se.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, for a one-way clutch,  per  se.


CLS 475/9
TXT Bevel planet pinion in drive train:
    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a planetary gear transmission in a
    drive train* includes a planet pinion* which is a bevel gear*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    190+,   197, 230+, 273+, 306+, and 336, for related subject matter.


CLS 475/10
TXT Intermeshing planet pinions in drive train:
    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a drive train* includes a plurality
    of planet pinions* which intermesh with each other.


CLS 475/11
TXT ROTARY PLANETATING OUTPUT:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a load device* is
    connected to a planet pinion* for rotation about the axis of the planet
    pinion* and also for rotation about the axis of a planet carrier*.


CLS 475/12
TXT REVERSAL OF DIRECTION OF POWER FLOW CHANGES POWER TRANSMISSION TO ALTERNATE
    PATH:Subject matter under the class definition having two alternately
    usable power paths between a single input member* and a single output
    member* so arranged that (1) the interchange of the input and output
    relationship or (2) the change of direction of rotation of the input,
    changes the path through which the power is transmitted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    126,    for a valve, actuated in response to the reversal of rotation of an
    element of a planetary transmission, to control a fluid operated clutch or
    brake.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 810.1+ for means to effect
    this function with nonplanetary gearing.


CLS 475/13
TXT Input and output exchange functions:
    Subject matter under subclass 12 wherein in response to the interchange of
    roles between the input member* and output member* the path through which
    power is transmitted is changed.

    (1)     Note.  To be placed herein the transmission must have a useful load
    at each of its input and output ends. Most of the patents herein disclose
    either motor-generators or motor-pumps used to start an engine which in
    turn drives the generator or pump.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 810.2 for the exchange of
    input and output roles using nonplanetary gearing.

    290,    Prime-Mover Dynamo Plants, subclass 38 for gearing of this type
    combined with significant generator structure.


CLS 475/14
TXT CYCLICAL OR INTERMITTENT DRIVE:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein means is included to vary
    the rotational speed of a gear of a planetary transmission according to a
    predetermined pattern without operator intervention; or wherein means is
    included to provide driving force to a gear of a planetary transmission at
    predetermined intervals without operator intervention.


CLS 475/15
TXT Plural outputs:
    Subject matter under subclass 14 including means to drive at least two load
    devices*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332,    and see the search notes therein for related  subject  matter.


CLS 475/16
TXT With means to adjust cycle or drive during operation:
    Subject matter under subclass 14 which includes a control member, either
    manually or automatically operated during operation of the transmission, to
    alter a rotational speed pattern or driving force interval.


CLS 475/17
TXT Mutilated or noncircular gear in drive train:
    Subject matter under subclass 14 wherein a gear in a drive train* has an
    irregular pattern of gear teeth; or wherein the circumference of the gear
    rim is a shape other  than  round.


CLS 475/18
TXT STEERING BY DRIVING:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein plural drive trains* are
    utilized for driving two load devices* on opposite sides of a vehicle at
    different relative speed ratios* to cause turning.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for steering by driving where manual steering constitutes a second
    power input to the drive trains.

    223+,   for means to apply power to only one of two differential outputs
    for the purpose of steering.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 6.2+, for steering by driving combined
    with vehicle structure and see the (1) Note under subclass 6.2 for the line.

    477,    Interrelated Power Delivery Controls, Including Engine Control,
    subclass 1 for steering by driving with prime mover control.



CLS 475/19
TXT With condition responsive steer control:
    Subject matter under subclass 18 wherein means to cause turning is
    condition responsive*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    477,    Interrelated Power Delivery Controls, Including Engine Control, for
    steering by driving with prime mover control.


CLS 475/20
TXT With cooling or lubrication:
    Subject matter under subclass 18 provided with means to change the
    temperature of an element of, or means to apply or direct a lubricating
    fluid between, moving parts of a drive train*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159+,   for drive train* lubrication generally.

    161,    for drive train* cooling or heating.


CLS 475/21
TXT With infinitely variable drive:
    Subject matter under subclass 18 wherein at least one of the plural drive
    trains* includes a means to vary the speed ratio* steplessly.


CLS 475/22
TXT Variable drive is fluid drive:
    Subject matter under subclass 21 wherein the stepless ratio change is
    effected by the use of a hydraulic or pneumatic drive train*.


CLS 475/23
TXT Hydrostatic type:
    Subject matter under subclass 22 wherein the fluid drive train* includes an
    expansible chamber pump which transfers power via fluid to an expansible
    chamber motor to provide useful work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72+,    for the general combination of planetary gearing and hydrostatic
    drive.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 325+, for a pump and motor combination,
    per se.


CLS 475/24
TXT Plural pump-motor sets:
    Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein at least two pump-motor
    combinations are included in the plural drive trains*.


CLS 475/25
TXT Belt type:
    Subject matter under subclass 21 wherein said ratio varying means comprises
    an endless flexible band.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    210+,   for variable speed or direction belt transmission combined with a
    planetary transmission.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, appropriate
    subclasses, for steplessly variable belt transmissions, per se.


CLS 475/26
TXT Variable drive is friction drive:
    Subject matter under subclass 21 wherein the stepless ratio change is
    effected by a drive train* which includes toothless gearing that transmits
    force by frictional contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114+,   for fluid control of planetary friction gearing.

    185+,   for planetary friction gearing, per se.

    214+,   for nonplanetary variable speed or direction friction gearing
    combined with a planetary transmission.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    476,    Friction Gear Transmission Systems or Components, for variable
    speed nonplanetary friction gearing, per se.


CLS 475/27
TXT Fluid steer control:
    Subject matter under subclass 18 wherein the plural drive trains* include
    controlling clutches* or brakes* which are operated by hydraulic or
    pneumatic pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23+,    for the control of pump-motor units for steering   purposes.


CLS 475/28
TXT With plural power paths to a planetary transmission at each output:Subject
    matter under subclass 18 wherein the plural drive trains* include a
    planetary gear set adjacent each load device*, each gear set having one
    output member* and two input members*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21+,    for this combination with a steplessly variable drive.


CLS 475/29
TXT With planetary reaction brake steering:
    Subject matter under subclass 18 wherein means for driving one load device*
    at a speed ratio* different from the other load device includes a brake
    control for a planetary element of one of the drive trains.

    (1)     Note. The planetary element to be braked may not be an output
    member* and form a basis for classification in the subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224,    for means to apply power to only one of two differential outputs,
    while braking the other, for the purpose of steering.


CLS 475/30
TXT And carrier input to planetary gearing:
    Subject matter under subclass 29 wherein an input member* is a planet
    carrier*.

    (1)     Note.  The carrier input is usually part of a differential
    transmission*.


CLS 475/31
TXT FLUID DRIVE OR CONTROL OF PLANETARY GEARING:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein (1) a planetary
    transmission is combined with a hydraulic or pneumatic torque transmitting
    means to form a drive train*, or (2) means is provided to change the speed
    ratio* or otherwise regulate the operation of a planetary transmission and
    such means is actuated, at least in part, by hydraulic or pneumatic energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18+,    for fluid drive or control in a steering by driving arrangement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    477,    Interrelated Power Delivery Controls, Including Engine Control, for
    fluid drive or control of planetary gearing in combination with prime mover
    control.




CLS 475/32
TXT Diverse fluid drives:
    Subject matter under subclass 31 wherein at least two different types of
    fluid torque transmitting means are included in the drive train*.


CLS 475/33
TXT Plural impeller-turbine type fluid circuits:
    Subject matter under subclass 31 wherein two fluid torque transmitting
    means are present in the drive train* and each includes a rotary vaned pump
    which acts as an input element and a coaxial rotary vaned turbine which
    acts as an output element.

    (1)     Note.  For a more detailed description of this type of fluid drive
    see Class 60 subclass 330 and the notes thereunder.




CLS 475/34
TXT Fill and empty type:
    Subject matter under subclass 33 wherein one of the fluid torque
    transmitting means may be emptied or filled to change the speed ratio.




CLS 475/35
TXT Single impeller-turbine type fluid circuit divides or combines plural power
    paths:Subject matter under subclass 31 wherein the fluid torque
    transmitting means comprises at least three coaxial bladed elements forming
    a fluid filled torus, said elements being mechanically connected in power
    transmitting relationship to other parts of the drive train*.

    (1)     Note.  Normally the circuit includes an input element, or pump, and
    two or more output elements, or turbines. There may be additionally
    included one or more reaction elements, or stators, which function to
    redirect or guide the fluid within the circuit and thus change the
    transmitted torque, or a turbine may fulfill the function of both turbine
    and stator.


CLS 475/36
TXT Planetary gearing divides paths:
    Subject matter under subclass 35 wherein the planetary transmission
    includes a planetary gear set made up of at least three elements, one of
    said elements being directly connected to an input member* but rotatable
    relative to all elements of the fluid torque transmitting means, and each
    of the other two elements  constituting a power path within the drive
    train.*


CLS 475/37
TXT Three fluid outputs:
    Subject matter under subclass 35 wherein the fluid torque transmitting
    means includes at least three coaxial bladed elements each of which
    provides a mechanical power output to the drive train*.


CLS 475/38
TXT And stator:
    Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein the fluid torque transmitting
    means includes a fourth coaxial bladed element which is stationary during
    at least one mode of operation as it acts to guide or redirect the fluid
    within the torque transmitting means.


CLS 475/39
TXT Two fluid outputs and stator:
    Subject matter under subclass 35 wherein the fluid torque transmitting
    means includes four coaxial bladed elements, a first input element, two
    power output elements and a fourth reaction element, stationary during at
    least one mode of operation, which acts to guide or redirect the fluid
    within the torque transmitting means.


CLS 475/40
TXT With variable fluid drive control:
    Subject matter under subclass 39 wherein means are provided to change the
    path of the fluid within the torque transmitting means.

    (1)     Note.  This is usually accomplished by changing the angle or
    position of one of the blade elements.


CLS 475/41
TXT And mechanical drive path:
    Subject matter under subclass 39 wherein in addition to the two outputs
    from the fluid torque transmitting means a third power path is mechanically
    connected to the input member*, by-passing the fluid circuit.


CLS 475/42
TXT Control of or by fluid drive:
    Subject matter under subclass 35 wherein means is provided to regulate the
    operation of the fluid torque transmitting means or to affect the operation
    of a mechanical drive train* in response to a condition of the fluid torque
    transmitting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61+,    for  related  art  and see the notes thereunder.


CLS 475/43
TXT With speed or torque responsive clutch or brake control:
    Subject matter under subclass 35 wherein the drive train* is controlled by
    a clutch* or brake* which operates in response to the velocity or
    resistance to rotary movement of a transmission part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254+,   for other speed or torque responsive transmission controls.


CLS 475/44
TXT Stator rotatable in reverse direction to provide drive:
    Subject matter under subclass 35 wherein one of the coaxial bladed elements
    functions as a reaction member to modify the speed and direction of the
    fluid in the torque transmitting means in one mode of operation and also
    functions, when rotating in a direction opposite to an input element, of
    the fluid torque transmitting means to add torque to the drive train.


CLS 475/45
TXT Turbine braked, stator provides reverse drive:
    Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein the reverse rotation of the stator
    is enabled by braking a turbine and the transmitted force results in a
    reverse drive of a load device*.


CLS 475/46
TXT And adds torque in forward drive:
    Subject Matter under subclass 45 wherein in addition to its function as
    both reaction element and reverse drive output element, in one mode of
    operation, the stators` rotary force is transmitted to the load device* in
    the same direction as the input element.


CLS 475/47
TXT Impeller-turbine type fluid circuit and mechanical path in parallel:Subject
    matter under subclass 31 wherein the fluid torque transmitting means
    includes at least two coaxial bladed element forming a fluid filled torus,
    one functioning as an input element and the other as an output element and
    a separate mechanical drive train* is provided, by-passing the fluid torque
    transmitting means.

    (1)     Note.  A mere lock-up clutch* which connects the input and output
    elements of the fluid unit together is not here but in subclasses 59+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35+,    especially subclass 41, for a fluid drive and mechanical drive in
    parallel where, in addition, the fluid unit has either two inputs or two
    outputs.

    329+,   for other plural power path transmissions and see the notes
    thereunder.


CLS 475/48
TXT With control of or by the fluid circuit:
    Subject matter under subclass 47 wherein means is provided to regulate the
    operation of the mechanical drive train* in response to a condtion of the
    fluid torque transmitting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61+,    for related art and see the notes thereunder.


CLS 475/49
TXT Gearing controlled by fluid circuit condition:
    Subject matter under subclass 48 wherein means is provided to affect the
    mechanical drive train* in response to a condition of the fluid torque
    transmitting means.


CLS 475/50
TXT Fill and empty type fluid circuit:
    Subject matter under subclass 48 wherein the operation of the fluid torque
    transmitting means is regulated by controlling the amount of fluid
    contained    therein.


CLS 475/51
TXT With speed responsive control:
    Subject matter under subclass 47 wherein means is provided to regulate the
    operation of the drive train* dependent on the velocity of a part thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254+,   for other speed responsive controls and see  the  notes  therein.


CLS 475/52
TXT And nonplanetary gearing:
    Subject matter under subclass 47 wherein in addition to the fluid torque
    transmitting means and planetary transmission the drive train includes
    gearing of a type not falling under the class definition.

    (1)     Note.  The additional gearing may be either variable or single
    speed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66,     198, 207, 225, 302, and 343, for other combinations of planetary
    and nonplanetary  gearing.


CLS 475/53
TXT Planetary gearing divides paths:
    Subject matter under subclass 47 wherein gearing under the class definition
    is before the fluid torque transmitting means in the path of power
    transmission and is effective to split such path into parallel fluid and
    mechanical paths, an input element of said gearing being rotatable relative
    to all elements of said fluid torque transmitting means.


CLS 475/54
TXT Sun, orbit and carrier braked:
    Subject matter under subclass 47 wherein the planetary transmission is
    controlled by the braking of a sun gear*, an orbit gear* and a planet
    carrier*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    276     and 280+, for a similar planetary transmission without a fluid
    drive.


CLS 475/55
TXT Sun and orbit braked:
    Subject matter under subclass 47 wherein the planetary transmission is
    controlled by the braking of a sun gear* and an orbit gear*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277,    279 and 282+, for a similar planetary transmission without a fluid
    drive.


CLS 475/56
TXT Sun and carrier braked:
    Subject matter under subclass 47 wherein the planetary transmission is
    controlled by the braking of a sun gear* and a planet carrier*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278     and 284+, for a similar planetary transmission without a fluid
    drive.


CLS 475/57
TXT Orbit and carrier braked:
    Subject matter under subclass 47 wherein the planetary transmission is
    controlled by the braking of an orbit gear* and a planet carrier*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    279     and 286+, for a similar planetary transmission without a fluid
    drive.


CLS 475/58
TXT Orbits braked:
    Subject matter under subclass 47 wherein the planetary transmission is
    controlled by the braking of plural orbit gears*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    279     and 290+, for a similar planetary transmission without a fluid
    drive.


CLS 475/59
TXT Impeller-turbine type fluid circuit in series with planetary
    gearing:Subject matter under subclass 31 wherein the fluid torque
    transmitting means comprises a plurality of coaxial bladed elements forming
    a fluid filled torus having an input and an output, and only a single power
    path extends between said fluid drive and the planetary gearing.

    (1)     Note.  The fluid drive may include a lock-up clutch.


CLS 475/60
TXT And condition responsive control:
    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein means is provided to regulate the
    operation of the drive train* and such means is condition responsive*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254+,   for related subject matter and see the notes thereunder.


CLS 475/61
TXT Control of or by fluid circuit:
    Subject matter under subclass 60 wherein said means regulates the operation
    of the fluid torque transmitting means, or affects the operation of the
    mechanical drive train* in response to a condition of the fluid torque
    transmitting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42      and 48+, for related art.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    477,    Interrelated Power Delivery Controls, Including Engine Control,
    subclass 61 for this combination and a motor control.


CLS 475/62
TXT Controls responsive to relative impeller and turbine speeds:Subject matter
    under subclass 61 wherein the difference in velocities of the input and
    output of the fluid torque transmitting means regulate the operation of the
    drive train*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    477,    Interrelated Power Delivery Controls, Including Engine Control,
    subclass 61 for this combination and a motor control.



CLS 475/63
TXT System or servo fluid pressure controlled:
    Subject matter under subclass 62 wherein the relative input and output
    speeds of the fluid torque transmitting means affect or regulate a fluid
    control pressure.


CLS 475/64
TXT Fluid circuit controlled:
    Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein the condition responsive* means
    controls the fluid torque transmitting means.


CLS 475/65
TXT By lock-up clutch actuation:
    Subject matter under subclass 64 wherein the fluid torque transmitting
    means is controlled by mechanically connecting the input and output thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 3.21+ for the
    combination of impeller-turbine type fluid drive and clutch in the absence
    of a gear transmission.


CLS 475/66
TXT And nonplanetary gearing:
    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein in addition to the fluid torque
    transmitting means and planetary transmission the drive train* includes
    gearing of a type not falling under the class definition.

    (1)     Note.  Where the nonplanetary gearing forms a power path between
    the combination of subclass 59 and a differential* the patent has been
    placed in subclass 71.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     198+, 207+, 225, 302, and 343, for other combinations of planetary
    and nonplanetary gearing.


CLS 475/67
TXT With synchronizing of positive clutch or brake:
    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the two parts of a clutch* or a
    brake* are provided with toothed surfaces which intermesh when engaged and
    means is provided to reduce the relative movement between the two parts
    before such engagement to reduce the impact of engagement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139     and 303, for clutch or brake synchronizers in other planetary
    transmissions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 339+ for meshing assisters
    together with nonplanetary gearing.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 53.1+ for frictional
    synchronizing of positive  clutches.


CLS 475/68
TXT With nonratio brake:
    Subject matter under subclass 59 combined with a brake* which is utilized
    for a purpose other than effecting a particular speed ratio* in a planetary
    transmission.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18+     and 224, for brakes utilized in steering by driving.

    113,    175, 293, and 900, for other nonratio brake combinations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism,     subclass 888 for a nonratio brake
    together with a prime mover control.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 4+ for the combination
    of transmission control and  brake.


CLS 475/69
TXT Fluid circuit controlled:
    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the operation of the fluid torque
    transmitting means is regulated.


CLS 475/70
TXT Pressure controlled:
    Subject matter under subclass 69 wherein the fluid torque transmitting
    means is regulated by controlling the pressure within said means.


CLS 475/71
TXT And differential in series:
    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein a power path extends between the
    device of said subclass and a differential transmission*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198+,   for this combination without an impeller-turbine type fluid drive
    in series.


CLS 475/72
TXT Fluid pump and motor in one of plural paths to or from planetary
    gearing:Subject matter under subclass 31 wherein the drive train* consists
    of a transmission under the class definition having two power paths, one of
    which is a fluid torque transmitting drive comprising means to pressurize a
    fluid and means responsive to such pressure to convert such pressure to
    useful mechanical work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23+     for this type of drive used for steering by driving.

    329+    for other plural power path transmissions and see the notes
    thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 325+ for pump and motor combinations per
    se.

    477,    Interrelated Power Delivery Controls, Including Engine Control,
    subclass 52 for this combination together with prime mover control.


CLS 475/73
TXT Plural fluid power paths to planetary gearing:
    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the plural power paths are each
    input paths to the planetary gearing and each input path consists of a
    fluid drive.


CLS 475/74
TXT Plural outputs:
    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the drive train* includes means to
    drive two load devices*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18+,    for plural outputs in a steering by driving combination.

    332,    for other plural output transmissions and see the notes therein.


CLS 475/75
TXT Three pumps or motors:
    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein more than two fluid pressurizing
    or pressure converting means are utilized for transferring torque in the
    drive train*.


CLS 475/76
TXT Speed responsive control:
    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein means is provided to regulate the
    operation of the drive train* dependent on the velocity of a part thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254+,   for related subject matter and see the notes   there  under.


CLS 475/77
TXT Constant speed output:
    Subject matter under subclass 76 wherein the regulation is such that the
    load device* rotates at a constant velocity.


CLS 475/78
TXT Interrelated fluid unit and gear control:
    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein means are provided to regulate the
    operation of the fluid drive and planetary transmission and such regulation
    is interdependent or operated by a common    control.


CLS 475/79
TXT With constant speed ratio between input and one fluid unit:
    Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein an input member* has a constant
    speed ratio* with an input of the fluid drive in all conditions of
    operation.


CLS 475/80
TXT Plural speed ranges:
    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the fluid drive provides a
    stepless speed ratio* variation capability and wherein a speed ratio* of a
    planetary transmission is also variable to result in the stepless variation
    at a plurality of speed ratio*   l evels.


CLS 475/81
TXT With constant speed ratio between input and one fluid unit:
    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein an input member* has a constant
    speed ratio* with the fluid drive in all conditions of operation.


CLS 475/82
TXT Having single planet carrier:
    Subject matter under subclass 81 wherein the planetary transmission
    includes but one planet carrier*.

    (1)     Note.  A Planet carrier* may include more than one set of planet
    pinions* mounted thereon as long as the carrier is unitary.


CLS 475/83
TXT Pump and motor in series with planetary gearing:
    Subject matter under subclass 31 wherein a means to pressurize a fluid and
    means responsive to such pressure to convert such pressure to useful
    mechanical work is placed in tandem with a transmission under the class
    definition and a single power path extends there between.

    (1)     Note.  The claiming of a pump is not necessary for placement herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    91,     Motors:  Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 55 for related art and
    see the notes thereunder.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 305+ for this transmission combined with
    significant vehicle structure.


CLS 475/84
TXT Control of differential planetary gearing:
    Subject matter under subclass 31 wherein the operation of a differential
    transmission* is regulated by fluid means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220+,   for differential transmissions,* per se.


CLS 475/85
TXT Special fluid:
    Subject matter under subclass 84 wherein significance is attributed to the
    type of fluid, or the physical characteristics thereof, used to control the
    differential transmission*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160,    for a fluid which is used to lubricate a differential.


CLS 475/86
TXT By fluid operated mechanical clutch:
    Subject matter under subclass 84 wherein the differential is controlled by
    a fluid actuated mechanical clutch*.



CLS 475/87
TXT Operated by viscous drag:
    Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein the mechanical clutch* is
    controlled by the retarding force transmitted between two relatively
    rotating parts by a fluid medium.


CLS 475/88
TXT Operated by a pump responsive to differential action:
    Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein the mechanical clutch is
    controlled by fluid from a pressure source, such source being activated in
    response to relative rotation of the outputs of the differential
    transmission*.


CLS 475/89
TXT Fluid resistance controls relative rotation of outputs:
    Subject matter under subclass 84 wherein fluid in contact with relatively
    rotatable parts of the differential transmission* is effective to retard
    such  relative  rotation.


CLS 475/90
TXT Fluid pumped by differential gears:
    Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the gears of the differential
    transmission* act as pumps, to pressurize a fluid contained therein, the
    resistance to flow of such fluid acting to retard relative rotation of the
    differential outputs.


CLS 475/91
TXT Fluid resistance inhibits relative rotation:
    Subject matter under subclass 31 wherein either the weight or momentum of a
    fluid mass or a fluids resistance to flow, is effective to retard the
    rotation of an element of a planetary transmission.

    (1)     Note.  Both the subclasses hereunder and Class 192, Clutches and
    Power-Stop Control, subclass 61 contain planetary units including gear
    pumps so arranged that when fluid flow through the pump is unrestricted the
    unit slips, and as fluid flow is restricted relative rotation of the
    planetary elements is inhibited. Where the planet pinion of the unit drives
    a separate gear pump the art is found herein but where the planet pinion
    and cooperating sun and orbit together constitute the gear pump the art
    will be found in Class 192, subclass 61.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89,     for control of a differential transmission* by fluid resistance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 266+ for internal resistance motion retarders,
    per se.


CLS 475/92
TXT Fluid damper for reaction element:
    Subject matter under subclass 91 wherein a liquid or gas medium resists
    movement of an otherwise stationary planetary gear member.


CLS 475/93
TXT Valve inhibits fluid flow:
    Subject matter under subclass 91 wherein the resistance to fluid flow is
    controlled by a passage way that is opened to a variable degree.


CLS 475/94
TXT Speed or torque responsive valve control:
    Subject matter under subclass 93 wherein the variable opening of the valve
    is regulated by either the velocity or the resistance to rotary movement of
    a transmission part.


CLS 475/95
TXT Centrifugally actuated valve controls fluid clutch:
    Subject matter under subclass 94 wherein the valve is regulated by the
    speed of an element of the transmission as measured by centrifugal force
    and such regulation is effective to retard the rotation of one rotary
    element of a transmission with respect to another rotary element thereof.


CLS 475/96
TXT Clutch connects planet pinion and carrier:
    Subject matter under subclass 95 wherein the said one rotary element is a
    planet pinion* and the said another rotary element is a planet carrier*.


CLS 475/97
TXT With fluid brake control:
    Subject matter under subclass 95 wherein in addition to the clutch control
    means, resistance to fluid flow is utilized to retard the rotation of a
    planetary element with respect to a stationary element.


CLS 475/98
TXT Centrifugally actuated valve controls fluid brake:
    Subject matter under subclass 94 wherein the valve is regulated by the
    speed of an element of a transmission as measured by centrifugal force and
    such regulation is effective to retard the rotation of an element of the
    planetary transmission with respect to a stationary element.


CLS 475/99
TXT Interrelated valve control and mechanical clutch or brake:
    Subject matter under subclass 93 wherein there is provided means to
    regulate a valve, which is effective to retard an element of a planetary
    transmission, and means to operate a mechanical clutch* or brake*, the
    operation of one of said means affecting the other, or said means being a
    common means.


CLS 475/100
TXT Valve control and mechanical clutch:
    Subject matter under subclass 99 wherein the operation of the valve is
    related to the operation of a mechanical clutch*.


CLS 475/101
TXT Pump pressure engages mechanical clutch:
    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the valve controls the outlet of
    a fluid pressurizing device which in turn retards rotation of a planetary
    element and the pressurized fluid provides the force to engage a mechanical
    clutch*.


CLS 475/102
TXT Fluid brake(s) for plural planetary elements:
    Subject matter under subclass 93 wherein a valve controls the fluid flow
    from a pump which, in turn, retards the rotation of two elements of a
    planetary transmission with relation to a stationary element.


CLS 475/103
TXT Plural fluid clutches:
    Subject matter under subclass 93 wherein the transmission includes plural
    fluid clutches*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 61.  See the (1) Note
    under subclass 91 of Class 475.


CLS 475/104
TXT Fluid brake for planetary element:
    Subject matter under subclass 93 wherein the valve controls a fluid brake*.


CLS 475/105
TXT And fluid clutch:
    Subject matter under subclass 104 wherein there is also provided a fluid
    clutch*.


CLS 475/106
TXT Bevel gearing:
    Subject matter under subclass 104 wherein the planetary transmission
    includes a planet pinion* that is a bevel gear*.


CLS 475/107
TXT Sun or orbit braked:
    Subject matter under subclass 104 wherein  the planetary element braked is
    either a sun gear* or an orbit gear*.


CLS 475/108
TXT Fluid clutch includes gear type pump:
    Subject matter under subclass 93 wherein the valve is effective to restrict
    fluid flow from a fluid pressurizing means, said pressurizing means being
    operative to operate a fluid clutch* and said pressurizing means comprising
    interengaging rotating members.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 61.  See the (1) Note
    under subclass 91 of Class 475.

    418,    Rotary Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 54+ and 191+ for gear
    type pumps,  per   se.


CLS 475/109
TXT Planet clutched to carrier:
    Subject matter under subclass 93 wherein a pump is supported by a planet
    carrier* and is driven by a planet pinion*, the valve being effective to
    restrict flow from said pump.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     for this combination controlled by a speed responsive valve.


CLS 475/110
TXT With reversing means:
    Subject matter under subclass 109 wherein a means is also provided to
    change the direction of rotation of an output member*.


CLS 475/111
TXT Planet clutched to fluid flywheel:
    Subject matter under subclass 91 wherein a rotatable fluid containing
    housing concentric with the planetary transmission surrounds vaned elements
    connected to planet pinions*; the housing, when rotated, forming a radially
    outer layer of fluid that is effective to retard the rotation of the vaned
    elements relative to the housing.


CLS 475/112
TXT Fluid container connected to planet pinion:
    Subject matter under subclass 91 wherein a fluid containing housing is
    connected to a planet pinion*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255,    for an eccentrically weighted planet of a nonflui d  type.


CLS 475/113
TXT Impeller-turbine type fluid unit used as brake:
    Subject matter under subclass 91 wherein at least two coaxial bladed
    elements form a fluid filled torus, one of said elements being either
    stationary or its motion controlled to retard another of said elements
    which is connected to a rotary planetary element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclass 296, for impeller-turbine type brakes, per se.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 4 for related art.

    477,    Interrelated Power Delivery Controls, Including Engine Control,
    subclass 59 for hydrodynamic braking in combination with a motor control.


CLS 475/114
TXT Fluid control of friction planetary gearing:
    Subject matter under subclass 31 wherein the planetary transmission that is
    regulated by fluid pressure includes a toothless planet pinion* capable of
    transmitting force by frictional contact.


CLS 475/115
TXT Stepless ratio change controlled:
    Subject matter under subclass 114 wherein the planetary transmission is
    capable of a stepless speed ratio* change and such change is regulated by
    means of fluid pressure.


CLS 475/116
TXT Fluid controlled mechanical clutch or brake:
    Subject matter under subclass 31 wherein a clutch* or brake* operated by
    fluid pressure is effective to regulate the speed ratio* of the planetary
    transmission.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209,    for an interrelated control between a planetary and nonplanetary
    transmission.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 3.51+ for interrelated
    clutch and transmission controls wherein the clutch and transmission is in
    series and subclasses 4+ for transmission control and brake where the brake
    is effective to retard the load device*.


CLS 475/117
TXT Temperature responsive control:
    Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein the heat level of the
    transmission, a portion thereof or its surroundings affects the regulation
    thereof.


CLS 475/118
TXT Speed responsive control:
    Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein velocity of a transmission part
    affects a control for the clutch* or brake*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254+,   for other speed responsive transmission controls and see the notes
    thereunder.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 47+ for speed responsive valves, per se.

    477,    Interrelated Power Delivery Controls, Including Engine Control, for
    a prime mover control which may be combined with a speed responsive control.


CLS 475/119
TXT Safety device:
    Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein the control prevents the
    transmission or the means driving the transmission from being damaged.

    (1)     Note.  For example, the speed responsive means may prevent a shift
    valve or selector valve from shifting at too high a speed.


CLS 475/120
TXT Pressure control:
    Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein the control affects the force
    exerted by the fluid utilized to regulate the operation of the
    transmission.


CLS 475/121
TXT Ratio change:
    Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein the control is effective to
    change the speed ratio* of the transmission.


CLS 475/122
TXT Speed responsive valve control:
    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the speed ratio* change is
    effected by a valve which is moved in response to the velocity of a
    transmission part.


CLS 475/123
TXT Electrical control:
    Subject matter under subclass 122 wherein between the transmission part and
    the valve is an electrical or magnetic device.


CLS 475/124
TXT Centrifugal control:
    Subject matter under subclass 122 wherein the velocity of the transmission
    part is sensed by a centrifugal device.


CLS 475/125
TXT Torque responsive control:
    Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein force exerted to rotate a
    transmission part affects control of the clutch* or brake*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254+,   for other torque responsive transmission controls and see the notes
    there under.


CLS 475/126
TXT Responsive to torque reversal:
    Subject matter under subclass 125 wherein the control of the clutch* or
    brake* is affected by a valve and such valve is actuated responsive to a
    change in direction of rotation or relative rotation of a planetary drive
    transmission part or parts.


CLS 475/127
TXT Pressure regulation:
    Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein force exerted by the fluid that
    operates the clutch* or brake* is controlled.


CLS 475/128
TXT Valving controls shift timing:
    Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein means is provided to regulate the
    speed or sequence of engagement or disengagement of a clutch* or brake*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    477,    Interrelated Power Delivery Controls, Including Engine Control,
    especially subclasses 143+ for shift timing control combined with motor
    control.


CLS 475/129
TXT With fluid accumulator:
    Subject matter under subclass 128 which further includes a variable
    capacity chamber which is effective to control the buildup of fluid
    pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 30+ for accumulators, per se.


CLS 475/130
TXT Manual regulator:
    Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein means to regulate the pressure is
    controlled by human force.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    477,    Interrelated Power Delivery Controls, Including Engine Control, for
    pressure regulation which may be controlled by actuation of a vehicle
    accelerator pedal.


CLS 475/131
TXT Manually actuated ratio selector:
    Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein significance is attributed to a
    human operated device utilized to select a particular speed ratio*.


CLS 475/132
TXT Electrical:
    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein said device operates an
    electrical control.


CLS 475/133
TXT With safety valve:
    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein said device is a valve and means
    is associated with said valve to prevent damage to the transmission.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    for a safety device controlled in response to speed.


CLS 475/134
TXT Plural selector valves:
    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein said device includes a plurality
    of valves.


CLS 475/135
TXT Rotary valve:
    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein said device is a valve which
    turns about an axis.


CLS 475/136
TXT With ancillary pump or governor drive:
    Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein significance is attributed to a
    drive of an auxiliary pressurizing device or speed responsive valve
    utilized in fluid control for the transmission.


CLS 475/137
TXT Plural pumps:
    Subject matter under subclass 136 wherein more than one said device is
    driven to provide pressurized fluid for control of the transmission.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    477,    Interrelated Power Delivery Controls, Including Engine Control, for
    plural pumps used in transmission control which also includes motor control.


CLS 475/138
TXT With positive clutch or brake:
    Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein a clutch* or brake* includes two
    parts each having teeth which are capable, of meshing, one with the other,
    to effect a positive, as opposed to a frictional connection therebetween.

    (1)     Note.  The positive clutch* or brake* need not be fluid actuated to
    be found herein.


CLS 475/139
TXT And friction synchronizer:
    Subject matter under subclass 138 wherein frictional means is provided to
    equalize the speed of the two clutch* or brake* parts before the teeth
    thereof intermesh.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67      and 303, for other synchronizing clutches or brakes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 53+ for friction
    synchronizers, per se.


CLS 475/140
TXT Spring engaged, fluid released clutch or brake device:
    Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein two parts of the clutch* or
    brake* are separated by fluid pressure against the resistance of a spring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    144,    for one-way devices that may be placed in inoperative position by
    means of fluid pressure and operative position by means  of  a  spring.


CLS 475/141
TXT Plural devices simultaneously spring engaged:
    Subject matter under subclass 140 wherein more than one clutch or brake is
    engaged by spring pressure at the same time.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 4+ for related subject
    matter.


CLS 475/142
TXT Single fluid motor engages one device and releases other:
    Subject matter under subclass 140 wherein pressurized fluid is utilized to
    move a mechanical element and such element is effective to connect the two
    parts of a clutch* or brake* and disconnect the two parts of another
    clutch* or brake*.


CLS 475/143
TXT Expanding fluid motor chamber mechanically contracts second motor:Subject
    matter under subclass 116 wherein the clutch* or brake* is actuated by
    admitting pressurized fluid to an expansible chamber and the expansion of
    such chamber effects the collapse of a second fluid expansible chamber.

    (1)     Note.  To be placed here each fluid motor must control a different
    clutch* or brake*. A double acting motor for one clutch* or brake* is in
    subclass 146.


CLS 475/144
TXT Fluid controlled one-way devices:
    Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein the fluid pressure is operative
    to control a one-way clutch* or a one-way brake*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 82.1+ for one-way brakes, per se.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 41+ for one-way
    clutches, per se.


CLS 475/145
TXT Fluid motor controls device through cam or lever:
    Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein a chamber wall, expanded by
    pressurized fluid, is effective to actuate a clutch* or brake* through the
    medium of a cam or lever.


CLS 475/146
TXT Fluid motor structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 116 herein significance is attributed to the
    configuration, support or spatial arrangement of an expansible chamber
    motor or motors which effect the actuation of the clutch* or brake*.


CLS 475/147
TXT Radially expanding motor:
    Subject matter under subclass 146 wherein the fluid motor expands in a
    radial direction with respect to the rotary axis of the transmission.


CLS 475/148
TXT With one-way device:
    Subject matter under subclass 146 and further including a one-way clutch*
    or one-way brake*.


CLS 475/149
TXT ELECTRIC OR MAGNETIC DRIVE OR CONTROL:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein (1) the planetary
    transmission is combined with an electric motor or generator to form a
    drive train or (2) means is provided to change the speed ratio* or
    otherwise regulate the operation of the planetary transmission by means of
    electric or magnetic energy.

    (1)     Note.  Where the electric or magnetic energy regulates a fluid
    drive or a fluid control that in turn controls the transmission, the
    patents have been placed with the fluid drive or control under subclass 31.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4       and 5, for electric motor drives where plural power sources drives
    a planetary transmission.

    13,     for electric motors used as engine starters that are subsequently
    driven by the engine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 129+ and 150 for safety
    devices and overload controls that may turn off power from an electric
    motor.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 83 for the
    combination with significant dynamo-electric machine structure.

    318,    Electricity, Motive Power Systems, subclasses 12+ and 15 for Class
    310 structure having a significant electrical circuit.  See section IE6B of
    the class 318 definitions for the line with this class.


CLS 475/150
TXT Differential drive or control:
    Subject matter under subclass 149 wherein the electric or magnetic drive or
    control is associated with a differential transmission*.


CLS 475/151
TXT Plural power paths:
    Subject matter under subclass 149 wherein two power paths extend to or from
    a planetary transmission, between an input member* and an output member*,
    and one path includes an electric or magnetic drive.

    (1)     Note.  A clutch* that locks up the planetary transmission for
    unitary drive* is not considered a separate power path. See other
    subclasses under subclass 149.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for this type drive used in a steering by driving combination.

    47+     and 72+, for similar gearing arrangements but using a fluid drive
    as the variable transmission.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity, Motive Power Systems, subclass 8 for similar systems
    where the generated electricity is not wholly utilized in the
    motor-generator systems.


CLS 475/152
TXT With nonplanetary drive to electric or magnetic path:
    Subject matter under subclass 151 wherein the input member* is either
    directly connected to the input of the electric or magnetic path or
    drivingly connected thereto by gearing not coming under the class
    definition.


CLS 475/153
TXT With condition responsive control:
    Subject matter under subclass 149 herein the electric or magnetic drive or
    control is regulated by condition responsive* means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254+,   for other condition responsive* controls and see the notes
    thereunder.


CLS 475/154
TXT With electric or magnetic controlled brake:
    Subject matter under subclass 149 wherein the speed ratio* of the planetary
    transmission is regulated by means of an electrically or magnetically
    actuated brake*.


CLS 475/155
TXT And manual speed selector:
    Subject matter under subclass 154 wherein a human force operated device is
    used to choose the speed ratio* of the transmission.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132,    for a manually operated speed selector of the electrical type that
    in turn regulates a fluid control.


CLS 475/156
TXT Electric or magnetic device disengages brake:
    Subject matter under subclass 154 wherein the electric or magnetic energy
    is effective to separate one part of the brake* from the other.


CLS 475/157
TXT Electric or magnetic engaged brake and spring engaged lockup clutch:Subject
    matter under subclass 154 wherein the electric or magnetic energy is
    effective to engage the two parts of a brake* and a spring is effective to
    engage the two parts of a clutch* to provide unitary drive*.


CLS 475/158
TXT WITH INDICATOR OR ALARM:
    Subject matter under the class definition and further including a separate
    device for indicating a condition thereof or for providing a warning that
    an undesirable condition exists.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, for indicators and alarms in general.


CLS 475/159
TXT WITH LUBRICATION:
    Subject matter under the class definition provided with means for directing
    or applying a substance between moving parts to reduce friction between the
    moving parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for lubrication in a steering by driving combination.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    184,    Lubrication, for lubricating devices and systems in general.


CLS 475/160
TXT For differential planetary gearing:
    Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein the moving parts comprise a
    differential transmission*.


CLS 475/161
TXT WITH TRANSMISSION COOLING OR HEATING MEANS:
    Subject matter under the class definition and further including means to
    alter the temperature of an element thereof during operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for cooling or heating in a steering by driving combination.


CLS 475/162
TXT PLANET  PERIPHERY SURROUNDS AXIS OF INTERACTING GEAR (E.G., ECCENTRICALLY
    DRIVEN  TRANSMISSION):Subject matter under the class definition wherein a
    first gear has an axis which follows a path around the axis of a second
    gear, and wherein the external periphery of the first gear surrounds the
    axis of the second gear.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 640 for similar structure
    using a cam-operated flexible gear, sometimes referred to as "strain-wave"
    gearing.


CLS 475/163
TXT Wabbler transmission:
    Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein drive surfaces of the gears face
    each other in an axial direction.


CLS 475/164
TXT Single member has oppositely axially facing tooth sets:
    Subject matter under subclass 163 wherein one of the gears has tooth sets
    one each of oppositely axially  facing  surfaces.


CLS 475/165
TXT Friction gearing:
    Subject matter under subclass 162 in which rotary motion is transmitted
    from one of said gears to the other by frictional engagement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183+,   for related subject matter.


CLS 475/166
TXT Variable speed:
    Subject matter under subclass 165 wherein there is included means to vary
    the speed ratio*.


CLS 475/167
TXT Link chain gearing:
    Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein one of said gears comprises an
    endless member formed of interconnected links forming openings to receive
    cogs on the periphery of the other of said gears.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182,    for related subject matter.


CLS 475/168
TXT Gear teeth comprise rolling bodies:
    Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein surface contact between said
    first and second gears is via smooth surface cylinders or balls positioned
    between facing surfaces of said first and   second  gears.


CLS 475/169
TXT Means to change speed ratio between input and output:
    Subject matter under subclass 162 including means selectively or
    automatically actuated to vary the speed ratio*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     where the speed ratio* change is accompanied by an exchange in
    function of an input member* and an output member*.

    166,    for means to change the speed ratio* of friction   gearing.


CLS 475/170
TXT Variable eccentricity:
    Subject matter under subclass 169 wherein the varying of the speed ratio*
    includes means to vary the radius of said path.


CLS 475/171
TXT Plural power paths to planetary gearing:
    Subject matter under subclass 169 wherein a power transmitting path extends
    between an input member* and each of two elements of a planetary
    transmission whiile an output member* is driven by a third planetary
    element.


CLS 475/172
TXT Condition responsive control:
    Subject matter under subclass 169 wherein said means is affected by a
    condition responsive* control.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254+,   and see the search notes therein for related subject matter.


CLS 475/173
TXT Plural planetary elements braked:
    Subject matter under subclass 169 wherein said means includes structure for
    applying a brake* to two planetary elements.


CLS 475/174
TXT Plural outputs:
    Subject matter under subclass 162 including means to drive at least two
    load devices*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322,    see the search notes therein for related subject matter.


CLS 475/175
TXT With releasable clutch or brake:
    Subject matter under subclass 162 which further has a selectively or
    automatically actuatable clutch* or brake* in a drive train* for said gears.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68      and 900, for related subject matter, and 169+ for a clutch or brake
    to change speed ratio in this kind of gearing.


CLS 475/176
TXT Gear has plural circumferential tooth sets:
    Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein said first or second gear has a
    plurality of sets of drive teeth protecting therefrom, said sets being
    connected  to each other for common movement.


CLS 475/177
TXT Internal and external tooth sets:
    Subject matter under subclass 176 wherein the teeth of one of said sets of
    teeth project inwardly, and the teeth of the other of said sets of teeth
    project outwardly.


CLS 475/178
TXT Circumferentially spaced connector pins:
    Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein a plurality of peg-like elements
    are spaced about the axis of one of said gears to guide said gear for
    relative motion with respect to a stationary reaction element, or to guide
    said gear for relative motion with respect to another rotary member.


CLS 475/179
TXT Roller bearing surrounds pin:
    Subject matter under subclass 178 wherein said peg-like elements are guided
    for movement by roller bearings.





CLS 475/180
TXT Particular gear teeth:
    Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein significance is attributed to the
    configuration or material of a tooth used in one of said gears.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    344+,   for  related  subject  matter.


CLS 475/181
TXT Particular counterweight:
    Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein significance is attributed to the
    configuration, material or location of a mass to balance one of said gears
    or rotating drive train* members.


CLS 475/182
TXT PLANET PINION ENGAGES FLEXIBLE BELT OR CHAIN:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a planet pinion* has a
    driving surface which is in driving engagement with an endless pliant
    member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    for related subject  matter.


CLS 475/183
TXT PLANET PINION IS FRITION GEAR:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a planet pinion includes
    a drive surface which receives or transmits rotary motion to a mating gear
    by frictional contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for a friction drive in steering by driving, 114+ for fluid control
    of friction gearing, and 165+ for friction gearing in an eccentrically
    driven transmission.


CLS 475/184
TXT Plural outputs (e.g., differential):
    Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein plural load devices* are driven
    by the planetary transmission using said planet pinion*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332,    and see the search notes therein for related subject matter.


CLS 475/185
TXT Variable speed ratio (without slippage):
    Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein means is provided to change the
    speed ratio*.

    (1)     Note.  A patent is not considered appropriate for this or indented
    subclasses if slippage between contacting surfaces is the only way the
    speed ratio is changed.


CLS 475/186
TXT Condition responsive ratio change:
    Subject matter under subclass 185 wherein said ratio changing means is
    condition responsive*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254,    and see the search notes therein  for related subject matter.


CLS 475/187
TXT Releasably braked element:
    Subject matter under subclass 185 wherein said ratio changing means
    comprises a selectively actuatable brake* for an element of a planetary
    transmission.


CLS 475/188
TXT Plural elements releasably braked:
    Subject matter under subclass 187 which further include means to apply a
    second brake* to another element of said planetary transmission.


CLS 475/189
TXT Planet pinion is a ball:
    Subject matter under subclass 185 wherein said planet pinion* is a
    spherical element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    196,    for related subject matter.


CLS 475/190
TXT Planet pinion rotatable about axis at angle to axis of input or output
    gear:Subject matter under subclass 185 wherein said planet pinion* is
    mounted for rotation about an axis which is angularly related with respect
    to the rotational axis of a gear in driving relationship with said planet
    pinion*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      197, 230+, 251+, 273+, 306+, and 336, for related  subject  matter.


CLS 475/191
TXT Planet pinion is member having axis  fixed or adjustable to position
    perpendicular to axis of input or output gear:Subject matter under subclass
    190 wherein said angular relationship is a right angle and wherein said
    planet pinion* is either fixed or adjustable to said right  angle  position.


CLS 475/192
TXT Pinion engages facing concave surfaces (e.g., mounted in torus.):Subject
    matter under subclass 191 wherein a pair of gears in driving relationship
    with said planet pinion* include concave surfaces facing each other to
    define a cavity for said planet pinion*.


CLS 475/193
TXT Conical or frusto-conical planet  pinion:
    Subject matter under subclass 190 wherein said planet pinion* is in the
    shape of a cone or the frustum  of  a cone.


CLS 475/194
TXT Torque responsive means to increase contact pressure:
    Subject matter under subclass 193 including means for sensing resistance to
    movement or change in resistance to movement of a load device* or of a
    member in a drive train*; and, in response to such sensed resistance or
    change of resistance to movement, said means acts to increase pressure of
    frictional contact between said planet pinion* and a mating gear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195,    for related subject matter.


CLS 475/195
TXT Torque responsive means to increase contact pressure:
    Subject matter under subclass 183 including means for sensing resistance to
    movement or change in resistance to movement of a load device* or of a
    member in a drive train*; and, in response to such sensed resistance or
    change of resistance to movement, said means acts to increase pressure of
    frictional contact between said planet pinion* and a mating gear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194,    for related subject matter.


CLS 475/196
TXT Planet pinion is ball:
    Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein said planet pinion* is a
    spherical element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189,    for a spherical planet pinion in a variable ratio transmission.


CLS 475/197
TXT Planet pinion rotatable about axis at angle to axis of input or output
    gear:Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein said planet pinion* is
    mounted for rotation about an axis which is angularly related with respect
    to the rotational axis of a gear in driving relationship with said planet
    pinion*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      190+, 230+, 251+, 273+, 306+, and 336, for related subject matter.


CLS 475/198
TXT VARIABLE SPEED OR DIRECTION TRANSMISSION COMBINED WITH DIFFERENTIAL:Subject
    matter under the class definition wherein a differential transmission* is
    associated with another transmission capable of speed ratio* change or
    capable of reversing the direction of relative rotation between input and
    output shafts of said other transmission.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220+,   for differential planetary gearing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, for variable speed or direction
    transmissions.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, for
    non-planetary belt or chain gearing.


CLS 475/199
TXT Condition responsive:
    Subject matter inder subclass 198 wherein said speed ratio* change or said
    direction reversal is condition responsive*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254+,   and see the search notes therein   for related subject matter.


CLS 475/200
TXT Differential is beneath prime mover or transmission:
    Subject matter under subclass 198 wherein significance is attributed to
    locating said differential transmission* at a position below a power
    source* or under said other transmission.


CLS 475/201
TXT Differential is between prime mover and transmission in the path of power
    flow:Subject matter under subclass 198 wherein said differential
    transmission* is positioned relative to said other transmission and a power
    source* so that power flows in a direction from said power source* through
    said differential transmission* to said other transmission.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18+,    for this arrangement in a steering by driving combination.


CLS 475/202
TXT With universal joint in drive train:
    Subject matter under subclass 198 including connecting means between two
    shaft elements in a drive train*, said connecting means permitting rotation
    to be transmitted from one element to the other when the axes of said
    elements are misaligned or angularly related.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    464,    Rotary Shafts Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary, for universal joints in general.


CLS 475/203
TXT Plural selectively driveable gears surround differential:
    Subject matter under subclass 198 wherein input power to said differential
    transmission* is selectively supplied by either of two gears which encircle
    the external periphery of said differential transmission.


CLS 475/204
TXT Variable speed or direction transmission is planetary:
    Subject matter under subclass 198 wherein said other transmission is a
    planetary gear transmission as defined in the class definition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for this combination together with a fluid drive.


CLS 475/205
TXT Plural planetary units combined with differential:
    Subject matter under subclass 204 and further including a second planetary
    gear transmission.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for this combination together with a fluid drive.


CLS 475/206
TXT Transmission output shaft parallel to differential output shafts:Subject
    matter under subclass 198 wherein the axis of the output shaft of said
    other transmission extends in a direction parallel to the axis of output
    shafts of said differential transmission*.


CLS 475/207
TXT NONPLANETARY VARIABLE SPEED OR DIRECTION TRANSMISSION COMBINED WITH
    PLANETARY TRANSMISSION:Subject matter under the class definition which
    includes a power transmitting mechanism, other than a planetary gear
    transmission, having an input and an output shaft, and means capable of
    speed ratio* change between said shafts or capable of changing the
    direction of relative rotation of said shafts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52      and 66, for this combination with a fluid drive.

    80+,    for a transmission of the type found therein combined with a change
    speed non-planetary transmission.

    198+,   for a change speed or direction   transmission combined with a
    differential*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, for nonplanetary variable speed
    gearing.


CLS 475/208
TXT Condition responsive:
    Subject matter under the subclass 207 and further including a control which
    is condition responsive*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254,    and see the search notes therein for related subject matter.


CLS 475/209
TXT Interrelated control of in series transmissions:
    Subject matter under subclass 207 wherein a planetary gear transmission has
    first control means, and said power transmitting mechanism other than the
    planetary gear transmission has second control means; and wherein operation
    of one of said first or second control means affects the operation of the
    other of said control means.


CLS 475/210
TXT Nonplanetary transmission is belt or chain gearing:
    Subject matter under subclass 207 wherein said power transmitting mechanism
    includes a flexible endless member in a drive train*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission   Systems or Components, for
    nonplanetary belt or chain gearing.


CLS 475/211
TXT Plural power paths to planetary gearing:
    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein said power transmitting mechanism
    has at least two power output members leading therefrom, said power output
    members being connected to different elements of a planetary gear
    transmission to provide rotary input to either or both of said elements of
    said planetary transmission.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329+,   and see the search notes therein for related subject matter.


CLS 475/212
TXT Nonplanetary transmission is chain gearing:
    Subject matter under subclass 211 wherein said power transmitting mechanism
    comprises an endless member formed of rigid links.


CLS 475/213
TXT Nonplanetary transmission is chain      gearing:
    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein said power transmitting mechanism
    comprises an endless member formed of rigid links.


CLS 475/214
TXT Nonplanetary transmission is friction gearing:
    Subject matter under subclass 207 wherein said power transmitting mechanism
    includes a gear which receives or transmits rotary motion to a mating gear
    by frictional contact.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    476,    Friction Gear Transmission Systems or Components, for nonplanetary
    friction gearing, per se.


CLS 475/215
TXT Plural power paths to planetary gearing:
    Subject matter under subclass 214 wherein said power transmitting mechanism
    has at least two power output members leading therefrom, said power output
    members being connected to different elements of a planetary gear
    transmission to provide rotary input to either or both of said elements of
    said planetary gear transmission.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329+,   and see the search notes therein for related subject matter.


CLS 475/216
TXT Friction gear engages facing concave surfaces:
    Subject matter under subclass 215 wherein said power transmitting mechanism
    includes a gear between two members having facing concave surfaces.


CLS 475/217
TXT Nonplanetary transmission is disc and wheel:
    Subject matter under subclass 215 wherein one of said gears is in the form
    of a plate having a friction drive face, and the other said gear is
    generally cylindrical and has a friction drive surface on the rim thereof
    in contact with said face; said cylindrical gear being mounted for rotation
    about an axis generally perpendicular to a rotational axis of said plate,
    and the point of contact of said face with said rim being adjustable in a
    radial direction with respect to the axis of the plate to vary the speed
    ratio*.


CLS 475/218
TXT Plural power paths to planetary gearing:
    Subject matter under subclass 207 wherein said power transmitting mechanism
    has at least two power output members leading therefrom, said power output
    members being connected to different elements of a planetary gear
    transmission to provide rotary input to either or both of said elements of
    said planetary gear transmission.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80+,    for a transmission of the kind found therein combined with change
    speed nonplanetary transmission.

    329+,   and see the search notes therein  for related subject matter.


CLS 475/219
TXT Plural planetary units:
    Subject matter under subclass 207 which includes at least two planetary
    gear transmissions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52      and 66, for related art.

    80+,    for a transmission of the type found therein combined with a change
    speed nonplanetary transmission.


CLS 475/220
TXT DIFFERENTIAL PLANETARY GEARING:
    Subject matter under the class definition which includes a differential
    transmission* in a drive train*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      15, 18+, 71, 84+, 150, 160, 174, 184, and 198+ for other
    differential planetary gearing or combinations therewith.


CLS 475/221
TXT Differential or nondifferential planetary combined with differential (e.g.,
    two differentials):Subject matter under subclass 220 which includes at
    least two differential transmissions* or which includes a differnetial
    transmission* and another planetary gear transmission.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198+,   for a variable speed or direction transmission combined with a
    differential.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 233+ for four wheel drive vehicles which
    may include plural differentials.


CLS 475/222
TXT With universal joint in drive train:
    Subject matter under subclass 220 including connecting means between two
    shaft elements in said drive train*, said connecting means permitting
    rotation to be transmitted from one element to the other when the axes of
    said elements are misaligned or angularly related.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202     and 346+, for related subject matter.


CLS 475/223
TXT Including means to selectively apply rotational power to only one
    output:Subject matter under subclass 220 including means to disconnect one
    output from said differential transmission* while driving the other output,
    or including means to apply a brake* to one of said outputs while driving
    the other output.


CLS 475/224
TXT By braking other output:
    Subject matter under subclass 223 including means to apply a brake* to one
    of said outputs while driving the other output.


CLS 475/225
TXT With additio
    Gearset Between Differential Output and Load:
    Subject matter under subclass 220 including nonplanetary gearing between an
    output of said differential transmission and a load device*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    343,    and see the search notes therein for related subject matter.


CLS 475/226
TXT Planet pinion is worm gear:
    Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein a planet pinion* in said
    differential transmission* is a worm gear*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      304 and 333, for related subject matter.


CLS 475/227
TXT And spur gear on pinion:
    Subject matter under subclass 226 wherein said planet pinion* also includes
    a spur gear*.


CLS 475/228
TXT Worm drive on input shaft:
    Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein input power to said differential
    transmission* is supplied by a worm gear*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for related subject matter.


CLS 475/229
TXT And roller bearing supporting worm from casing:
    Subject matter under subclass 228 wherein said worm gear* is supported for
    rotation by ball bearings or cylindrical bearings positioned around the
    axis of said worm gear.


CLS 475/230
TXT Bevel gear differential:
    Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein said differential gearing* is
    formed by bevel gears*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      190+, 197, 273+, 306+, and 336, for related subject matter.


CLS 475/231
TXT With means to limit overspeed of one output (e.g., lock-up clutch):Subject
    matter under subclass 230 including means to restrict the amount the
    rotational velocity of one of the output members of said differential
    transmission* may exceed the rotational velocity of the other of said
    output members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86+,    for fluid actuated clutches* in differentials*

    150,    for electric or magnetic controlled differentials*

    249+,   for related subject matter.


CLS 475/232
TXT Centrifugal actuator:
    Subject matter under subclass 231 wherein said means for restricting said
    rotational velocity includes an element movable outwardly in response to
    inertial force caused by rotation of a part in said differential
    transmission*.


CLS 475/233
TXT Lock-up clutch between pinion and pinion carrier:
    Subject matter under subclass 231 wherein said means includes an element
    for directly locking a planet pinion* to a cage carrying said pinion or to
    a supporting pin for said pinion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     108, 109+, and 305, for related subject matter.


CLS 475/234
TXT By axial movement of output gear:
    Subject matter under subclass 231 wherein said restricting means is
    operated by movement of one said output members in a direction parallel to
    its axis of rotation.


CLS 475/235
TXT With spring bias on gear or clutch:
    Subject matter under subclass 234 including resilient means providing a
    force bias on said output gear, or on a clutch* therefor, in a direction
    parallel to its rotational axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240+,   for related subject matter.


CLS 475/236
TXT Particular gear shape or tooth interaction limits overspeed:Subject matter
    under subclass 231 wherein significance is attributed to a special shape of
    a gear tooth or to a special interaction beteween gear teeth to provide
    said restriction.


CLS 475/237
TXT Manual actuator:
    Subject matter under subclass 231 wherein said restricting means includes a
    member selectively actuatable by human force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250,    for related subject matter.


CLS 475/238
TXT Friction clutch:
    Subject matter under subclass 237 wherein said restricting means comprises
    a clutch* in which pressure and resultant friction 0zbetween faces of two
    relatively movable parts causes the parts to have common movement.


CLS 475/239
TXT Plate clutch:
    Subject matter under subclass 238 in which said relatively movable parts
    are in the form of discs.


CLS 475/240
TXT Spring bias on overspeed limiting means:
    Subject matter under subclass 231 wherein said restricting means include a
    resilient member urging a part thereof in one direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235,    for related subject matter.


CLS 475/241
TXT Helically coiled spring:
    Subject matter under subclass 240 wherein said resilient member is a wire
    coiled in the shape of a helix.


CLS 475/242
TXT Separate planet pinions or separate tooth set on same pinion for each
    output:Subject matter under subclass 230 wherein a separate planet pinion*
    is provided in said differential gearing* for each output thereof; or
    wherein a planet pinion has first and second tooth sets thereon, the first
    of said tooth sets engaging one of said outputs, and the second of said
    tooth sets engaging the other of said outputs.


CLS 475/243
TXT Output gear rotatable relative to axial support shaft:
    Subject matter under subclass 230 wherein one of the outpuit gears of said
    differential transmission* is rotatable relative to a shaft upon which the
    gear is mounted.


CLS 475/244
TXT Support shaft coupled to other output gear:
    Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein said shaft is connected to
    another of the output gears for joint rotation therewith.


CLS 475/245
TXT With roller bearing between output gear and shaft:
    Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein said output gear is supported for
    rotation on said shaft by ball-bearings or cylindrical bearings positioned
    around the axis of said shaft.


CLS 475/246
TXT With roller bearing between gear and its support:
    Subject matter under subclass 230 wherein at least one of said bevel gears*
    is supported for rotation by ball bearings or by cylindrical bearings
    surrounding the rotational axis of the bevel gear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    253     and 348, for related subject matter.


CLS 475/247
TXT Ball bearing:
    Subject matter under subclass 246 wherein said bearings are in the shape of
    a round ball.


CLS 475/248
TXT Spur gear differential:
    Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein said differential gearing* is
    formed of spur gear*.


CLS 475/249
TXT With means to limit overspeed of one output:
    Subject matter under subclass 248 including means to restrict the amount
    the rotational velocity of one of the output members of said differential
    transmission* may exceed the rotational velocity of the other of said
    output members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84+,    for fluid actuated clutches* in differentials*

    150,    for electric or magnetic controlled differentials*

    231+    for related subjected matter.


CLS 475/250
TXT Manual actuator:
    Subject matter under subclass 249 wherein said restricting means includes a
    member selectively actuatable by human force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237+,   for related subject matter.


CLS 475/251
TXT Pinion axis at angle intersecting axis of output:
    Subject matter under subclass 248 wherein the axis of rotation* of a planet
    pinion* in said differential gearing* extends at an angle with respect to
    the rotational axis of an output member of said differential gearing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    190+,   197, 273+, 306+, and 336, for related subject   matter.


CLS 475/252
TXT Intermeshing planet pinions:
    Subject matter under subclass 248 wherein said differential gearing*
    includes a plurality of planet pinions* having gear teeth which intermesh
    with  each  other.


CLS 475/253
TXT With roller bearing between gear and its support:
    Subject matter subclass 248 wherein at least one of said spur gears* is
    supported for rotation by ball bearings or by cylindrical bearings
    surrounding the rotational axis of said spur gear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246     and 348, for related subject matter.


CLS 475/254
TXT CONDITION RESPONSIVE CONTROL:
    Subject matter under the class definition together with a condition
    responsive* transmission regulating means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      19, 42, 43, 47, 51, 60, 76, 94, 117, 118, 125, 153, 186, 199, 208,
    and 232, for various transmission combinations including condition
    responsive* control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    477,    Interrelated Power Delivery Controls, Including Engine Control, for
    condition responsive transmission control also including motor control.


CLS 475/255
TXT Eccentrically weighted planet:
    Subject matter under subclass 254 wherein a planet pinion* includes an
    additional mass carried thereby at a location spaced from its axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    for a similar combination but using fluid as the eccentric weight.


CLS 475/256
TXT Downshift responsive to high speed limit:
    Subject matter under subclass 254 wherein a planetary transmission is
    regulated such that the attainment of an undersirable fast speed is
    prevented by changing the speed ratio* to rotate an output member* at a
    lower velocity.



CLS 475/257
TXT Speed responsive control adjusted or opposed by torque:
    Subject matter under subclass 254 wherein a planetary transmission is
    regulated in response to the velocity of one of its parts but such
    regulation is modified by the rotary effort exerted by a transmission part.


CLS 475/258
TXT Centrifugally controlled clutch or brake:
    Subject matter under subclass 254 wherein a clutch* or brake* is utilized
    to change the speed ratio* of a planetary transmission and the operation of
    such clutch* or brake* is controlled by the velocity of a transmission part
    as measured by the centrifugal force of a mass rotating with said part.


CLS 475/259
TXT One-way clutch or brake:
    Subject matter under subclass 258 wherein the clutch* or brake* controlled
    is a one-way clutch* or a one-way brake*.


CLS 475/260
TXT Centrifugal brake control:
    Subject matter under subclass 258 wherein the device controlled is a brake*.


CLS 475/261
TXT Positive clutch:
    Subject matter under subclass 258 wherein two parts of a controlled clutch*
    each include teeth-like elements thereon that mesh when the clutch is
    engaged so that torque is delivered positively, as opposed to frictionally,
    from one part to the other.


CLS 475/262
TXT Axially engaged friction clutch:
    Subject matter under subclass 258 wherein a controlled clutch* has two
    parts with frictional drive faces and the two parts of the controlled
    clutch* are moved, one relative to the other, in the direction of the
    transmission axis to engage or disengage their frictional surfaces.


CLS 475/263
TXT Overload release:
    Subject matter under subclass 254 including means to sense when torque to
    an output member* excedes a predetermined value; and, in response to such
    sensing, interrupt the flow of power through a drive train* power path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 56+, 129+ and 150 for
    related art.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, subclasses 30+ for an overload release coupling in a drive
    train.


CLS 475/264
TXT Spring applied friction drive establishing means:
    Subject matter under subclass 263 wherein a coupling, clutch* or brake* is
    utilized to establish a speed ratio* in a planetary transmission, such
    coupling, clutch* or brake* being of a non-positive, friction type and
    being engaged by a spring and disengaged in response to torque.

    (1)     Note.  In disengaging the coupling, clutch* or brake* a second
    coupling, clutch* or brake* may or may not be engaged.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140+    for a spring applied and fluid released clutch* or brake*

    301,    for a clutch* or brake* consisting of a helical spring.


CLS 475/265
TXT Drive establishing means is friction brake:
    Subject matter under subclass 264 wherein the speed ratio is established by
    a spring engaged brake*.


CLS 475/266
TXT Stepped, torque responsive ratio change:
    Subject matter under subclass 254 wherein a plurality of distinct speed
    ratios* are effected by the use of a plurality of clutches* or brakes* and
    the change from one ratio to another is in response to the turning effort
    of a part of a transmission.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for a stepped ratio change in response to the change in direction
    of an input member*.


CLS 475/267
TXT With flywheel or centrifugal weight control:
    Subject matter under subclass 254 wherein a planetary transmission is
    controlled in response to (1) the affect thereon of the inertia of a
    separate mass driven by a transmission part, or (2) the radially acting
    force produced in response to the speed of a transmission part by a
    separate mass driven by said part and spaced from the rotary axis of such
    part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255,    for eccentrically weighted planet pinions* and 258+ for
    centrifugally controlled clutch* or brake*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 165 for the use of a flywheel in a power
    delivery system together with significant vehicle structure.


CLS 475/268
TXT With planet axis at angle to axis of mating gear (e.g., bevel
    gears):Subject matter under subclass 267 wherein a planet pinion* axis
    extends at an angle with respect to the rotational axis of a gear that
    meshes with said planet pinion.


CLS 475/269
TXT WITH MEANS TO VARY DRIVE RATIO OR DISCONNECT DRIVE (E.G., BRAKE OR
    CLUTCH):Subject matter under the class definition which includes a
    ratio-changing device to provide at least two different speed ratios*; or
    wherein means are provided to disconnect the flow of power to an output
    member* while an input member* continues to rotate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91+,    for fluid-resistance type clutches* and brakes*.

    116+,   for fluid control of clutches* and brakes*.

    149+    for electrical control of clutches* and brakes*.


CLS 475/270
TXT Manual force provides reaction during drive:
    Subject matter under subclass 269 wherein a reaction force in a planetary
    gear transmission is provided by human force limiting or preventing
    rotation of an element in the transmission while another element in the
    transmission provides rotation to an output member*.


CLS 475/271
TXT Plural elements selectively braked:
    Subject matter under subclass 269 wherein an assemblage which comprises a
    planetary gear transmission or a plurality of planetary gear transmissions
    has at least two elements thereof which are provided with a brake*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173,    for a transmission including an eccentric type planetary gear set
    having plural planetary elements braked.


CLS 475/272
TXT With preselection:
    Subject matter under subclass 271 including a first manual controller
    actuatable to select a desired speed ratio* and a second manual controller
    effective to engage the said desired speed ratio*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    477,    Interrelated Power Delivery Controls, Including Engine Control,
    wherein a second manual controller may be a motor control, such as an
    accelerator pedal.


CLS 475/273
TXT Axis of planet pinion at angle to axis of mating gear (e.g., bevel
    gears):Subject matter under subclass 271 wherein the planetary gear
    transmission includes a planet pinion* having a rotational axis extending
    at an angle with respect to the rotational axis of an intermeshing gear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      190+, 197, 230+, 251+, 306+, and 336, for related subject matter.


CLS 475/274
TXT And additional planetary gearset having axis of pinion parallel to axis of
    mating gear:Subject matter under subclass 273 which includes another
    planetary gear transmission which has a planet pinion* with a rotational
    axis extending in a direction parallel to a rotational axis of an
    intermeshing gear.


CLS 475/275
TXT Transmission includes three relatively rotatable sun gears:
    Subject matter under subclass 271 wherein said assemblage includes at least
    three sun gears* which are relatively rotatable.


CLS 475/276
TXT With brake for sun, carrier and orbit:
    Subject matter under subclass 275 wherein one of said elelments provided
    with a brake* is one of said sun gears*; and two other of said elements
    provided with a brake are a planet carrier* and an orbit gear*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for this combination with a fluid drive in one of plural paths.


CLS 475/277
TXT With brake for plural sun gears:
    Subject matter under subclass 275 wherein at least two of said sun gears*
    are provided with a brake*.


CLS 475/278
TXT And brake for carrier:
    Subject matter under subclass 277 which further includes a brake* for a
    planet carrier*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for this combination with a fluid drive in one  of  plural  paths.


CLS 475/279
TXT With brake for plural orbits:
    Subject matter under subclass 275 wherein at least two orbit gears* are
    provided with a brake*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for this combination with a fluid drive in one of  plural  paths.


CLS 475/280
TXT Brake for sun, carrier and orbit:
    Subject matter under subclass 271 wherein said elements which are provided
    with a brake*, a sun gear*, a planet carrier* and an orbit gear*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for this combination with a fluid drive in one  of  plural  paths.


CLS 475/281
TXT Including one-way clutch or brake:
    Subject matter under subclass 280 wherein one-way clutch* or a one-way
    brake* is in a drive train* including said assemblage.


CLS 475/282
TXT Brake for sun and orbit:
    Subject matter under subclass 271 wherein said elements which are provided
    with a brake* are a sun gear* and an orbit gear*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS,SUBCLASS:

    55,     for this combination with a fluid drive in one of plural paths.


CLS 475/283
TXT Including one-way clutch or brake:
    Subject matter under subclass 282 wherein a one-way clutch* or a one-way
    brake* is in a drive train* including said assemblage.


CLS 475/284
TXT Brake for sun and carrier:
    Subject matter under subclass 271 wherein said elements which are provided
    with a brake* are a sun gear* and a planet carrier*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for this combination with a fluid drive in one of plural paths.


CLS 475/285
TXT Including one-way clutch or brake:
    Subject matter under subclass 284 wherein a one-way clutch* or a one-way
    brake* is in a drive including said assemblage.


CLS 475/286
TXT Brake for orbit and carrier:
    Subject matter undr subclass 271 wherein said elements which are provided
    with a brake* are an orbit gear* and a planet carrier*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for this combination with a fluid drive in one of plural paths.


CLS 475/287
TXT Including one-way clutch or brake:
    Subject matter under subclass 286 wherein a one-way clutch* or a one-way
    brake* is in a drive train* including said assemblage.


CLS 475/288
TXT Plural suns braked:
    Subject matter under subclass 271 wherein said elements which are provided
    with a brake* are at least two sun gears*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for this combination with a fluid drive in one of plural paths.


CLS 475/289
TXT Including one-way clutch or brake:
    Subject matter under subclass 288 wherein a one-way clutch* or a one-way
    brake* is in a drive train* including said assemblage.


CLS 475/290
TXT Plural orbits braked:
    Subject matter under subclass 271 wherein said elements which are provided
    with a brake* are at least two orbit gears*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for this combination with a fluid drive in one of plural paths.


CLS 475/291
TXT Including one-way clutch or brake:
    Subject matter under subclass 290 wherein a one-way clutch* or a one-way
    brake* is in a drve train* including said assemblage.


CLS 475/292
TXT Including one-way clutch or brake:
    Subject matter under subclass 271 wherein a one-way clutch* or a one-way
    brake* is in a drive train including said assemblage.


CLS 475/293
TXT Speed responsive clutch or brake:
    Subject matter under subclass 269 wherein a drive train* includes a clutch*
    having mechanism for controlling the coupling of two parts in response to
    the velocity of one of the parts; or which includes a brake* which controls
    a moving part in response to its velocity.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass are directed to a speed responsive
    brake* or clutch* in a drive train in advance of, or after a planetary gear
    transmission.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    254+,   and see the search notes therein for condition responsive control
    of a planetary gear transmission.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 3.51+ for a combination
    of transmission control and clutch control; and 4+ for a combination of
    transmission control and brake.


CLS 475/294
TXT Ratio shift initiated by reverse rotation of input shaft:
    Subject matter under subclass 269 wherein an input shaft is rotated in a
    first direction during both of said ratios*; and wherein means are provided
    for operating said ratio changing device by limited movement of said input
    shaft in a direction opposite to said first direction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 5+ for related subject
    matter combined with a back-pedaling brake.


CLS 475/295
TXT Plural outputs:
    Subject matter under subclass 269 which includes means to drive at least
    two load devices*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332,    and see the search notes therein for related subject matter.


CLS 475/296
TXT Plural drive ratios other than unity:
    Subject matter under subclass 269 wherein said different speed ratios are
    two overdrives*, or two underdrives*, or an underdrive* and an overdrive*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    271+,   for plural drive ratios obtained by selectively braking plural
    elements.


CLS 475/297
TXT Including one-way clutch or brake:
    Subject matter under subclass 296 wherein a one-way clutch* or a one-way
    brake* is included in said ratio changing device.


CLS 475/298
TXT Gear shiftable axially to disconnect or vary ratio:
    Subject matter under subclass 269 wherein said ratio changing device or
    said disconnecting means includes mechanism operable to move a gear of a
    planetary gear transmission in a direction parallel to the axis of rotation
    of the gear.


CLS 475/299
TXT Orbit shiftable relative to sun and carrier:
    Subject matter under subclass 298 wherein an orbit gear* is movable axially
    with respect to a stationary sun gear* and planet carrier*.



CLS 475/300
TXT Sun shiftable relative to orbit and carrier:
    Subject matter under subclass 298 wherein a sun gear* is movable axially
    with respect to a relatively stationary orbit gear* and planet carrier*.


CLS 475/301
TXT Brake or clutch on surface of helically coiled member:
    Subject matter under subclass 269 wherein a helically coiled resilient
    device has a frictional surface which expands or contracts into engagement
    with two relatively movable members to function as a clutch*, or which
    expand or contracts into engagement with a moveable and stationary member
    to function as a brake*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, for, per se.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 41 for this type clutch.


CLS 475/302
TXT Nonplanetary gearing combined with planetary:
    Subject matter under subclass 269 wherein a part of a drive train* leading
    to or from a planetary gear transmission includes nonplanetary gearing
    associated therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    343,    and see the search notes therein for related subject matter.


CLS 475/303
TXT With synchronizing clutch or brake:
    Subject matter under subclass 269 wherein a clutch* includes friction
    members to couple relatively moving parts to gradually achieve common
    rotation prior to positive coupling by intermeshing parts; or wherein a
    brake* includes friction members to gradually couple a rotating part to a
    stationary part prior to positive coupling by intermeshing parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     and see the search notes therein for related subject matter.


CLS 475/304
TXT Planet pinion is worm gear:
    Subject matter under subclass 269 including a planetary gear transmission
    in which a planet pinion is a worm gear*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      226+, and 333, for related subject matter.


CLS 475/305
TXT Including releasable clutch directly between planet pinion and
    carrier:Subject matter under subclass 269 including a clutch* acting
    between a planet pinion* and a planet carrier*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     108, 109+, and 233, for related subject matter.


CLS 475/306
TXT Brake for planetary transmission having axis of planet pinion at angle to
    axis of mating gear (e.g., bevel gears):Subject matter under subclass 269
    wherein a drive train* includes a planetary gear transmission which
    comprises a planet pinion* having a rotational axis extending at an angle
    with respect to the rotational axis of an intermeshing gear; and wherein
    one of said speed ratios* is provided by applying a brake* to one element
    of said planetary gear transmission.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      190+, 197, 230+, 251, 273+, and 336, for related subject matter.


CLS 475/307
TXT Including one-way clutch or brake:
    Subject matter under subclass 306 wherein said drive train* is provided
    with a one-way clutch* or a one-way brake*.


CLS 475/308
TXT And lock-up clutch:
    Subject matter under subclass 306 wherein of another said speed ratios is a
    unitary drive* which is provided by engaging a clutch*.


CLS 475/309
TXT Friction clutch:
    Subject matter under subclass 308 wherein said clutch* is of a type in
    which pressure and resultant friction between faces of two relatively
    movable parts causes the parts to have common movement.


CLS 475/310
TXT Plate clutch:
    Subject matter under subclass 309 in which said relatively moveable parts
    are in the form of discs.


CLS 475/311
TXT Sun braked:
    Subject matter under subclass 269 wherein a drive train* includes a
    planetary gear transmission, and wherein one of said speed ratios* is
    provided by applying a brake* to a sun gear* of said planetary gear
    transmission.


CLS 475/312
TXT Including one-way clutch or brake:
    Subject matter under subclass 311 wherein said drive-train* is provided
    with one-way clutch* or a one-way brake.


CLS 475/313
TXT Intermeshing planet pinions on single carrier:
    Subject matter under subclass 311 wherein said planetary gear transmission
    includes a planet carrier* for a plurality of planet pinions*, said planet
    pinions* having gear teeth which intermesh  with  each  other.


CLS 475/314
TXT And lock-up clutch:
    Subject matter under subclass 311 wherein another of said speed ratios* is
    a unitary drive* which is provided by engaging a clutch*.


CLS 475/315
TXT Friction clutch:
    Subject matter under subclass 314 wherein said clutch* is of a type in
    which pressure and resultant friction between faces of two relatively
    moveable parts causes the parts to have common movement.


CLS 475/316
TXT Plate clutch:
    Subject matter under subclass 315 in which said relatively movable parts
    are in the form of discs.


CLS 475/317
TXT Orbit braked:
    Subject matter under subclass 269 wherein a drive train* includes a
    planetary gear transmission, and wherein one of said speed ratios* is
    provided by applying a brake* to an orbit gear* of said planetary gear
    transmission.


CLS 475/318
TXT Including one-way clutch or brake:
    Subject matter under subclass 317 wherein said drive-train* is provided
    with a one-way clutch* or a one-way brake*.


CLS 475/319
TXT Intermeshing planet pinion on single carrier:
    Subject matter under subclass 317 wherein said planetary gear transmission
    includes a planet carrier* for a plurality of planet pinions* said planet
    pinions* having gear teeth which intermesh with each other.


CLS 475/320
TXT And lock-up clutch:
    Subject matter under subclass 317 wherein another of said speed ratios* is
    a unitary drive* which is provided by engaging a clutch*.


CLS 475/321
TXT Friction clutch:
    Subject matter under subclass 320 wherein said clutch* is of a type in
    which pressure and resultant friction between faces of two relatively
    moveable parts causes the parts to have common movement.


CLS 475/322
TXT Plate clutch:
    Subject matter under subclass 321 in which said relatively movable parts
    are in the form of discs.


CLS 475/323
TXT Carrier braked:
    Subject matter under 269 wherein a drive train* includes a planetary gear
    transmission, and wherein one of said speed ratios* is provided by applying
    a brake* to a planet carrier* of said planetary gear transmission.


CLS 475/324
TXT Including one-way clutch or brake:
    Subject matter under subclass 323 wherein said drive train* is provided
    with a one-way clutch* or a one-way brake*.


CLS 475/325
TXT Intermeshing planet pinions on single carrier:
    Subject matter under subclass 323 wherein said planetary gear transmission
    includes a planet carrier* for a plurality of planet pinions*, said planet
    pinion*, having gear teeth which intermesh with each other.


CLS 475/326
TXT And lock-up clutch:
    Subject matter under subclass 323 wherein another of said speed ratios is a
    unitary drive* which is provided by engaging a clutch*.


CLS 475/327
TXT Friction clutch:
    Subject matter under subclass 326 wherein said clutch* is of a type in
    which pressure nad resultant friction between faces of two relatively
    moveable parts cause the parts to have common movement.


CLS 475/328
TXT Plate clutch:
    Subject matter under subclass 327 in which said relatively moveable parts
    are in the form of discs.


CLS 475/329
TXT PLURAL POWER PATHS TO PLANETARY GEARING:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein rotational force from a
    power source* is split into at least two paths prior to reaching a
    planetary gear transmission; one of said paths providing rotational input
    power to a first element of the planetary gear transmission, and the other
    of said paths providing rotational input power to a second element of said
    planetary gear transmission.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     18+, 35+, 47+, 72+, 171, 211+, 215+, and 218, for related subject
    matter.

    343,    for similar art where there may be plural power paths extending
    from the planetary transmission.


CLS 475/330
TXT Plural planetary units:
    Subject matter under subclass 329 which includes at least two planetary
    gear transmissions.


CLS 475/331
TXT PLANETARY GEARING OR ELEMENT:
    Subject matter under the class definition including a planetary gear
    transmission or a device particularly adapted to be used with said
    planetary gear transmission.


CLS 475/332
TXT Plural outputs:
    Subject matter under subclass 331 including means to drive at least two
    load devices*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      15, 18+, 74, 174, 184, 220+, and 295, for related subject matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 11+ and 665+ for other
    plural output transmissions.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 53.1+ for power take-offs including
    significant vehicle structure.


CLS 475/333
TXT Planet pinion is worm gear:
    Subject matter under subclass 331 wherein a planet pinion* of said
    planetary gear transmission is a worm gear*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      226+ and 304, for related subject matter.


CLS 475/334
TXT Floating support annulus in rolling contact with planet pinion:Subject
    matter under subclass 331 which includes a ring surrounding the rotational
    axis of a planet carrier* and free to move with respect to said carrier;
    said ring contacting a smooth surface on a plurality of planet pinions*
    spaced about said planet carrier to aid in supporting said planet pinions.



CLS 475/335
TXT Toothed planet pinion has smooth bearing surface engaging raceway on sun or
    orbit gear:Subject matter under subclass 331 including a planet pinion*
    having gear teeth which intermesh with gear teeth on a sun gear* or on an
    orbit gear*; said planet pinion* being also provided with a smooth circular
    surface for engagement with a mating smooth circular surface on said sun
    gear* or orbit gear* to guide said planet pinion* in its travel path about
    said sun gear* or orbit gear*.


CLS 475/336
TXT Axis of planet pinion at angle intersecting rotational axis of mating gear
    (e.g., bevel gears):Subject matter under subclass 331 wherein said
    planetary gear transmission includes a planet pinion* having a rotational
    axis which extends at an angle of with respect to the rotational axis of a
    gear which meshes with said planet pinion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      190+, 197, 230+, 251, 273+, and 306+, for related subject matter.


CLS 475/337
TXT Plural planet carriers in series move at different speeds:
    Subject matter under subclass 331 including a plurality of planet
    carriers*, the output power of one of said planet carriers providing input
    power to the other of said planet carriers; and wherein the rotational
    velocity of one of said planet carriers is different than the other.


CLS 475/338
TXT Coaxial teeth around planet pinion engage axially spaced relatively
    rotatable gears:Subject matter under subclass 331 wherein a planet pinion*
    has an elongated set of gear teeth or plural axially spaced sets of gear
    teeth; said teeth of said planet pinion meshing with at least two gears
    rotatable with respect to each other and spaced from each other in a
    direction parallel to the rotational axis of the gears.


CLS 475/339
TXT Engage plural relatively rotatable sun gears:
    Subject matter under subclass 338 wherein said two gears are sun gears*.


CLS 475/340
TXT And orbit gear:
    Subject matter under subclass 339 which also includes an orbit gear*
    meshing with said planet pinion*.


CLS 475/341
TXT Engage plural relatively rotatable orbit gears:
    Subject matter under subclass 338 wherein said two gears are orbit gears*.


CLS 475/342
TXT And sun gear:
    Subject matter under subclass 341 which also includes a sun gear* meshing
    with said planet pinion*.


CLS 475/343
TXT Nonplanetary gearing combined with planetary:
    Subject matter under subclass 331 wherein a part of a drive train* leading
    to or from said planetary gear transmission includes non-planetary gearing
    associated therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     66, 198+, 207+, 225, and 302, for related subject matter.

    329+,   for this combination where there is provided two power paths to the
    planetary transmission.


CLS 475/344
TXT Particular gear tooth feature:
    Subject matter under subclass 331 wherein significance is attributed to the
    shape of a gear tooth, or to the material from which a gear tooth is formed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180,    for related subject matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 457+ for related subject
    matter.


CLS 475/345
TXT Nonmetallic or resilient:
    Subject matter under subclass 344 wherein said gear tooth is formed of a
    flexible material or of a material other than metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180,    for related subject matter.


CLS 475/346
TXT Floating or flexible coupling or support:
    Subject matter under subclass 331 wherein one of the gears in said
    planetary gear transmission is moveable in an axial or radial, nonrotary,
    direction with respect to another of the gears to accomodate proper
    alignment of the gears; or which include connecting means between two shaft
    elements in a drive train* which permits a limited amount of relative
    movement between said shaft elements or permits rotation of said shaft
    elements when they are misaligned or angularly related; or which provides a
    flexible support for said planetary gear transmission; or which provides a
    resilient connection between a gear and its supporting or driving member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202     and 222, for related subject matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    464,    Rotary Shafts Gudgeons Housing, and Flexible Couplings for Rotary
    Shafts etc., for flexible couplings, per se.


CLS 475/347
TXT Resilient member:
    Subject matter under subclass 346 which provides a resilient connection
    between a gear and its supporting or driving member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92,     for planetary reaction element having a fluid damper.


CLS 475/348
TXT Planet pinion supported by roller bearings:
    Subject matter under subclass 331 wherein a planet pinion* is supported for
    rotation by ball bearings or by cylindrical bearings surrounding the axis
    of the planet pinion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246+    and 253, for related subject matter.


CLS 475/349
TXT With manual input:
    Subject matter under subclass 331 wherein a power source* for driving said
    planetary gear transmission is human force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3+,     for related subject matter.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 475/900
TXT BRAKE FOR INPUT OR OUTPUT SHAFT:
    A collection of patents under the class definition relating to structure
    for applying a brake* to an input member* or to an output member*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18+     and 224, for output shaft brakes* used in steering by driving
    combinations.

    68      and 175, for brakes* in combination with the drives of those
    subclasses.

    113,    for fluid brakes* that may act on an input member*, or output
    member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, for brakes in general.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 4+ for combined
    transmission control and brake.

    477,    Interrelated Power Delivery Controls, Including Engine Control, for
    interrelated control between an engine and a transmission, clutch, or
    brake.


CLS 475/901
TXT PARTICULAR  MATERIAL:
    A collection of patents under the class definition wherein significance is
    attributed to a special kind of material used in a planetary gear
    transmission.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85,     180, and 344+, for related subject matter.


CLS 475/902
TXT Nonmetallic:
    A collection of patents under subclass 901 wherein the material is a
    material other than metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85,     180 and 344+, for related subject matter.


CLS 475/903
TXT STACKED PLANETARY GEARING:
    A collection of patents under the class definition relating to structure
    wherein first and second sun gears* are arranged so that the second sun
    gear is located radially outwardly from the first sun gear; and both sun
    gears are in a common plane bisecting the rotational axis of the sun gears.


CLS 475/904
TXT PARTICULAR MATHEMATICAL EQUATION:
    A collection of patents under the class definition wherein significance is
    attributed to using a mathematical equation to compute a structural or
    operational feature of planetary gear transmission.


CLS 476/
TTL FRICTION GEAR TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS OR COMPONENTS

CLS 476/
TXT

    I.      GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    This is the class for friction gear power transmission and elements
    thereof, such transmission being defined as an assembly of parts wherein
    rotary motion is transmitted from an input body to an output body by
    surface friction of rolling contact between parts associated with said
    input and output bodies.

     II.    EXPLANATORY NOTES ON THE SCOPE OF THE CLASS

    (1)     Note.  A method or apparatus for manufacturing a device of this
    class is not found herein, but is found in an appropriate manufacturing
    class.  See, for example, Class 29, Metal Working, subclasses 893+ and
    other subclasses in Class 29 directed to process and apparatus of
    mechanical manufacture.

    (2)     Note.  A nominal recitation of a device for applying power to, or
    receiving power from, a structure of this class will not exclude a patent
    from being placed in this class.

    III.            SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 721 for systems including
    plural power paths to or from friction gearing; subclass 745 for plural
    ratio change gearing in series, one of which may be friction gearing.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, for combinations of significant vehicle structure
    which may include friction gearing, especially subclass 368 for friction
    gearing combinations.

    184,    Lubrication, for lubrication generally, especially subclass 6.12
    for lubrication systems for gearing.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control,  subclasses 3.51+ for controls for
    a friction transmission and clutch; and subclasses 4+ for a transmission
    control and brake.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, for friction
    power transmission using an endless, flexible friction drive belt.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses 165+
    for an eccentrically driven friction gear; subclasses 183+ for planetary
    friction gearing; and subclasses 214+ for a nonplanetary friction gear
    transmission combined with a planetary transmission.

    477,    Interrelated Power Delivery Controls, Including Engine Control,
    especially subclasses 37+ for interrelated control between a motor and a
    continuously variable friction transmission.


CLS 476/1
TXT CONDITION RESPONSIVE RATIO CHANGE:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein means are provided to
    change the rotational velocity of the output body divided by the rotational
    velocity of the input body, said means having mechanism to sense a
    condition or change of condition in the environment of the friction gear
    transmission; and, in response to such sensing, effect said change of
    rotational velocity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

     477,   Interrelated Power Delivery Controls, Including Engine Control,
    especially subclasses 37+ for interrelated control between a motor and a
    continuously variable friction transmission.


CLS 476/2
TXT Fluid control:
    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein said means to change the rotational
    velocity are actuated by hydraulic or pneumatic energy.


CLS 476/3
TXT And electric or magnetic control:
    Subject matter under subclass 2 which further includes an electrical or
    magnetic actuator to influence said means to change the rotational velocity.


CLS 476/4
TXT Electric or magnetic control:
    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein said means to change the rotational
    velocity are actuated by electric or magnetic energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for electrical control combined with fluid control.


CLS 476/5
TXT Centrifugal actuator:
    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein said means include a mass rotatable
    about an axis with a member of said friction transmission; and wherein a
    component of force acting on said mass by said rotation in a direction away
    from said rotational axis is used to move a transmission component by said
    mass to effect said change of rotational velocity.


CLS 476/6
TXT RATIO CHANGE BY EXPANSION OR COMPRESSION OF FLEXIBLE FRICTION
    SURFACE:Subject matter under the class definition wherein at least one of
    said surfaces of a part in rolling contact is formed of pliable material;
    and wherein means are provided to change the radial distance from the axis
    of rotation of said part to its rolling contact surface by expanding or
    contracting its pliable surface so as to vary the rotational velocity of
    the output body divided by the rotational velocity of the input body.


CLS 476/7
TXT WITH FRICTION ENHANCING FLUID:
    Subject matter under the class definition and further including means for
    applying a flowable material to a rolling contact surface; said material
    having a characteristic that increases the resistance to relative slipping
    movement between said rolling contact surfaces.


CLS 476/8
TXT WITH LUBRICATION:
    Subject matter under the class definition and further including means for
    applying a substance between contacting moving parts to reduce friction
    between the contacting parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    184,    Lubrication, for lubricating devices and systems in general.


CLS 476/9
TXT FLUID CONTROL:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein means are provided to
    regulate the operation of said transmission, and such means is actuated by
    hydraulic or pneumatic energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for fluid control of condition responsive ratio change.


CLS 476/10
TXT Of toroidal transmission:
    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein said transmission includes first
    and second surfaces facing each other and having a common rotational axis,
    said first surface having a semicircular concave portion spaced from its
    rotational axis, and said second surface having a semicircular concave
    portion spaced from its rotational axis and facing said concave portion of
    said first surface so that said concave surface portions of said first and
    second surface together define a doughnut-shaped cavity surrounding said
    rotational axis; and said transmission further includes an idler member
    rotatable about its own axis and positioned in said cavity to transfer
    rotary motion from said first to said second surface.


CLS 476/11
TXT ELECTRIC OR MAGNETIC CONTROL:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein means are provided to
    regulate the operation of said transmission, and such means are actuated by
    electric or magnetic energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for electric or magnetic control of condition responsive ratio
    change.


CLS 476/12
TXT WITH INDICATOR OR ALARM:
    Subject matter under the class definition and further including a device
    for indicating a condition thereof or for providing a warning that an
    undesirable condition exists.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, for indicators and alarms in general.


CLS 476/13
TXT CYCLICAL OUTPUT:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein means are provided to
    vary the rotational speed of said output body according to a predetermined
    pattern without operator intervention.


CLS 476/14
TXT WITH TRANSMISSION COOLING OR HEATING MEANS:
    Subject matter under the class definition and also including means to alter
    the temperature of an element thereof during operation.


CLS 476/15
TXT FORWARD AND REVERSE:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein means are provided to
    drive said output body in both a clockwise and a counterclockwise
    direction.


CLS 476/16
TXT Flexible belt in drive train:
    Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein one of a group of interconnected
    elements providing rotary drive between said input and output bodies
    includes an endless flexible member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, for
    frictional power transmission via an endless flexible member.


CLS 476/17
TXT Drive in one direction by direct engagement of belt pulleys:Subject matter
    under subclass 16 wherein said endless flexible member extends between and
    drivingly engages a pair of wheels; and wherein means is provided to
    provide direct driving contact between surfaces of said wheels to drive
    said output body in said clockwise or counterclockwise direction.


CLS 476/18
TXT Variable speed in forward or reverse:
    Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein means are provided to change the
    rotational velocity of said output body in either said clockwise or
    counterclockwise direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47+     and 59+, for variable speed friction gearing wherein a reversing
    feature may be disclosed but not claimed.


CLS 476/19
TXT With toothed gears in drive train:
    Subject matter under subclass 18 wherein one of a group of interconnected
    elements providing rotary drive between said input and output bodies
    includes members having intermeshing teeth to transmit rotation from one to
    the other of said members.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, for gearing, per se, which has
    intermeshing teeth.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, for planetary
    gearing having intermeshing teeth.


CLS 476/20
TXT Stepped ratio change:
    Subject matter under subclass 18 wherein means are provided to vary the
    rotational velocity of the output body divided by the rotational velocity
    of the input body, said velocity being varied in a finite number of
    increments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59+,    for stepped ratio change friction gearing wherein a reversing
    feature may be disclosed but not claimed.


CLS 476/21
TXT Intermediate idler between input and output gears:
    Subject matter under subclass 18 wherein said rotary motion transmitting
    parts include a first element rotatable by said input body, a second
    element rotatably connected to said output body and a third element
    rotatable about its own axis; said third element having surface portions
    sequentially contacting said first and second elements to transmit rotary
    motion from said first element to said second element via said third
    element by surface friction of rolling contact between said third element
    and said first and second  elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50+,    for similar gearing wherein a reversing feature may be disclosed
    but not claimed.


CLS 476/22
TXT Idler between conoidal gears:
    Subject matter under subclass 21 wherein said first and second elements are
    in the shape of a cone or the frustum of a cone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for similar gearing wherein a reversing feature may be disclosed
    but not claimed.


CLS 476/23
TXT Idler between flat discs:
    Subject matter under subclass 21 wherein said first and second elements
    comprise flat circular plates with said third element contacting the flat
    surfaces of said plates.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for similar gearing wherein a reversing feature may be disclosed
    but not claimed.


CLS 476/24
TXT Driving and driven gears on perpendicular axes:
    Subject matter under subclass 18 wherein said rolling frictional contact is
    between a first part having a first rotational axis and a second part
    having a second rotational axis; said second axis being at an angle of
    ninety degrees relative to said  first  axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56+,    for similar gearing wherein a reversing feature may be disclosed
    but not claimed.


CLS 476/25
TXT Drive in forward direction by direct clutch:
    Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein means are provided to directly
    connect said input body to said output body for common directional
    rotation, with no ratio change, in one of said rotational  directions.


CLS 476/26
TXT Driving and driven gears on angularly related axes:
    Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein said rolling frictional contact is
    between a first part having a first rotational axis and a second part
    having a second rotational axis; said second rotational axis being
    different from and intersecting said first rotational axis.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68+,    for similar gearing wherein a reversing feature may be disclosed
    but not claimed.


CLS 476/27
TXT PLURAL GEARING IN SERIES:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein in addition to said parts
    transmitting rotary motion by surface friction of rolling contact there is
    located, in series therewith, a second assembly of elements transmitting
    rotary motion from the input body to the output body by rolling contact
    between engaging surfaces of said elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 745 for plural ratio change
    gearing in series.


CLS 476/28
TXT Flexible belt in drive train:
    Subject matter under subclass 27 wherein said second assembly of elements
    includes an endless flexible member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for a flexible belt in a drive train of forward and reverse gearing
    systems.


CLS 476/29
TXT Friction gearing is ratio change gearing:
    Subject matter under subclass 28 wherein said parts transmitting rotary
    motion by surface friction of rolling contact include means to vary the
    rotational velocity of the output body divided by the rotational velocity
    of the input body.


CLS 476/30
TXT Friction gearing is stepless ratio change:
    Subject matter under subclass 29 wherein said rotational velocity is varied
    in an infinite number of increments.


CLS 476/31
TXT Plural friction gearing in series:
    Subject matter under subclass 27 wherein said second assembly of elements
    also includes parts transmitting rotary motion by surface friction of
    rolling contact.


CLS 476/32
TXT Ratio change gearing and nonratio change gearing:
    Subject matter under subclass 31 wherein one of said assembly of parts
    transmits a constant rotational velocity; and wherein the other assembly of
    parts transmits a variable rotational velocity.


CLS 476/33
TXT Friction gearing is ratio change gearing:
    Subject matter under subclass 27 wherein said parts transmitting rotary
    motion by surface friction of rolling contact include means to vary the
    rotational velocity of the output body divided by the rotational velocity
    of the input body.


CLS 476/34
TXT One gear is toothed bevel gear:
    Subject matter under subclass 27 wherein said second assembly of elements
    includes members having intermeshing radial teeth transmitting rotary
    motion, and wherein the radial teeth on said members are inclined with
    respect to the rotational axis of said members.


CLS 476/35
TXT One gear is worm gear:
    Subject matter under subclass 27 wherein said second assembly of elements
    for transmitting rotary motion includes a rotary body having radial teeth
    on the rim, with the edges of the teeth arranged as a helix extending
    around the rotational axis of the body.


CLS 476/36
TXT FRICTION GEAR IS BALL:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein said rolling contact
    parts include a spherical element for transmitting rotary motion by surface
    friction of rolling contact between said spherical element and another
    element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclass 196 for
    a spherical friction planetary gear.


CLS 476/37
TXT With condition responsive means to vary contact pressure:
    Subject matter under subclass 36 including means to sense a condition or
    change of condition in the environment of said friction gear transmission;
    and, in response to such sensing, said means act to increase pressure of
    frictional contact between said rotary motion transmitting parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9+,     for condition responsive fluid control to increase contact
    pressure; and subclasses 41, 48, and 61+ for other transmissions having
    condition responsive pressure variation.


CLS 476/38
TXT Variable ratio:
    Subject matter under subclass 36 which includes means to change the
    rotational velocity of the output body divided by the rotational velocity
    of the input body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclass 189,
    for a spherical friction planetary gear having means for ratio change.


CLS 476/39
TXT FRICTION GEAR INCLUDES IDLER ENGAGING FACING CONCAVE SURFACES:Subject
    matter under the class definition wherein said rotary motion transmitting
    parts include a first rotatable element having a first concave surface, a
    second rotatable element having a second concave surface facing the concave
    surface of said first rotatable element so as to define a cavity
    therebetween, and a third rotatable element rotatable about its own axis
    and mounted in said cavity; said third rotatable element including surface
    portions in contact with said first and second concave surfaces to transmit
    rotary motion from said first element to said second element via said third
    element by surface friction of rolling contact between said contacting
    surfaces.


CLS 476/40
TXT Toroidal:
    Subject matter under subclass 39 wherein said first and second concave
    portions are radially spaced from the axis of rotation of said first and
    second elements so that said cavity is substantially doughnut-shaped and
    surrounds the axis of rotation of said first and second elements.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for fluid control of a toroidal transmission.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclass 192 for
    a frictional toric planetary gear system.


CLS 476/41
TXT With condition responsive means to vary contact pressure:
    Subject matter under subclass 40 including means to sense a condition or
    change of condition in the environment of said friction gear transmission;
    and, in response to such sensing, said means acts to increase pressure of
    frictional contact between said rotary motion transmitting parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for condition responsive fluid control to vary contact pressure in
    a toroidal transmission, and subclasses 37, 48, and 61+ for other condition
    responsive pressure variation.


CLS 476/42
TXT Plural toric cavities:
    Subject matter under subclass 40 which further includes an additional set
    of concave portions defining a second substantially doughnut-shaped cavity;
    said second cavity also including an element rotatable about its own axis
    and mounted in said second cavity.


CLS 476/43
TXT Including threaded means to adjust idler:
    Subject matter under subclass 40 wherein adjusting means are provided to
    change the position of said third element in said cavity; and wherein said
    adjusting means are actuated by rotary movement of a part having a surface
    in the form of a helix around the axis of rotation of the part.


CLS 476/44
TXT Including toothed gearing to adjust idler:
    Subject matter under subclass 40 wherein adjusting means are provided to
    change the position of said third element in said cavity; and wherein said
    adjusting means are actuated by movement of first toothed element that
    meshes with a second toothed element to move said second element and said
    adjusting means.


CLS 476/45
TXT Including spring means to bias friction surfaces into engagement:Subject
    matter under subclass 40 wherein one of said first, second, or third
    elements is biased into contact with another of said first, second, or
    third elements by a resilient member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65+,    for spring means to urge gears into engagement in other friction
    transmissions.


CLS 476/46
TXT Idler supported by roller bearing:
    Subject matter under subclass 40 wherein said third element is mounted for
    rotation relative to a holder by rotatable bearings spaced around the axis
    of rotation of said third element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for other transmissions having roller bearing support for friction
    gears.


CLS 476/47
TXT STEPLESS RATIO CHANGE:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein means are provided to
    vary the rotational velocity of the output body divided by the rotational
    velocity of the input body, said velocity being varied in an infinite
    number of increments.


CLS 476/48
TXT With condition responsive means to vary contact pressure:
    Subject matter under subclass 47 including means to sense a condition or
    change of condition in the environment of said friction gear transmission;
    and, in response to such sensing, said means act to increase pressure of
    frictional contact between said rotary motion transmitting  parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     41 and 61+, for other friction gearing transmissions having
    condition responsive means to vary contact pressure of the gears.


CLS 476/49
TXT Plural interdigitated disks on parallel axes:
    Subject matter under subclass 47 wherein said friction gear transmission
    includes a first plurality of plates spaced from each other along a first
    rotational axis; and a second plurality of plates spaced from each other
    along a second rotational axis; said second plates extending into the space
    between said first plates, and said second plates contacting said first
    plates to transmit rotary motion by surface friction of rolling contact.



CLS 476/50
TXT Intermediate idler between driving and driven gears:
    Subject matter under subclass 47 wherein said rotary motion transmitting
    parts include a first element rotatable by said input body, a second
    element rotatably connected to said output body, and a third element
    rotatable about its own axis; said third element having surface portions
    sequentially contacting said first and second elements to transmit rotary
    motion from said first element to said second element via said third
    element by surface friction of rolling contact between said third element
    and said first and second  elements.



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for similar structure in forward and reverse gearing.


CLS 476/51
TXT Idler between conoidal gears:
    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein said first and second elements are
    in the shape of a cone or the frustum of a cone.



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for similar structure in forward and reverse gearing.


CLS 476/52
TXT Idler is ring:
    Subject matter under subclass 51 wherein said third element is an endless
    band.


CLS 476/53
TXT Rigid:
    Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein said band is inflexible.


CLS 476/54
TXT Idler between flat disks:
    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein said first and second elements
    comprise flat circular plates with said third element contacting the flat
    surfaces of said plates.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for similar structure in forward and reverse gearing.


CLS 476/55
TXT Driving and driven gears on nonlinear angularly related axes:Subject matter
    under subclass 47 wherein said rolling frictional contact is between a
    first part having a first rotational axis and a second part having a second
    rotational axis; said second rotational axis being different from and
    intersecting said first rotational axis.


CLS 476/56
TXT Perpendicular:
    Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein said second axis is at an angle of
    ninety degrees relative to said first axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for similar structure in forward and reverse gearing.


CLS 476/57
TXT Disc and wheel:
    Subject matter under 56 wherein said first part is a flat, circular plate
    and said second part is a circular ring; and wherein rotary motion is
    transmitted by surface contact between the exterior round surface of the
    ring and the flat face of the plate.


CLS 476/58
TXT Disc on input shaft:
    Subject matter under subclass 57 wherein said plate is on said input body.


CLS 476/59
TXT STEPPED RATIO CHANGE:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein means are provided to
    vary the rotational velocity of the output body divided by the rotational
    velocity of the input body, said velocity being varied in a finite number
    of increments.


CLS 476/60
TXT Stepped motor shaft:
    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the input body comprises a shaft
    on a prime mover, said shaft having varied diameters spaced along its
    length.


CLS 476/61
TXT CONDITION RESPONSIVE MEANS TO VARY CONTACT PRESSURE:
    Subject matter under the class definition including means to sense a
    condition or change of conditions in the environment of said friction gear
    transmission; and, in response to such sensing, said means act to increase
    pressure of frictional contact between said rotary motion transmitting
    parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     41 and 48, for other condition responsive pressure variation in
    specific kinds of friction gearing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclass 195 for
    torque responsive means to vary contact pressure in a planetary friction
    transmission.


CLS 476/62
TXT Centrifugal actuator:
    Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein said means include a mass
    rotatable about an axis with a member of said friction transmission; and
    wherein a component of force acting on said mass by said rotation in a
    direction away from said rotational axis is used to move a transmission
    component by said mass to increase said frictional contact pressure.



CLS 476/63
TXT Ball actuator:
    Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein said means include a spherical
    member.


CLS 476/64
TXT FRICTION GEAR ON SHAFT OF MOVABLY MOUNTED MOTOR:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein one of said parts in
    frictional rolling contact is mounted on a prime mover shaft; and wherein
    said prime mover is adjustably mounted on a support therefor to change the
    position of said one of said parts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for a motor having a stepped shaft, wherein the motor may be
    movable to bring different stepped portions of the shaft into contact with
    a driven member to obtain a variable ratio.


CLS 476/65
TXT SPRING URGES CONTACTING GEARS INTO ENGAGEMENT:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein said parts transmitting
    rotary motion are biased into rolling contact with each other by a
    resilient member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for spring means to urge friction gears into engagement in a
    toroidal transmission.


CLS 476/66
TXT Coil spring:
    Subject matter under subclass 65 wherein said resilient member is a
    helically coiled wire.


CLS 476/67
TXT FRICTION TRANSMISSION OR ELEMENT:
    A transmission as defined in the class definition or a device particularly
    adapted to be used with said transmission.


CLS 476/68
TXT Friction gears on nonlinear angularly related axes:
    Subject matter under subclass 67 wherein said rolling frictional contact is
    between a first part having a first rotational axis and a second part
    having a second rotational axis; said second rotational axis being
    different from and intersecting said first rotational axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24      and 55, for other friction gear transmissions having gears on
    angularly related axes.


CLS 476/69
TXT Perpendicular axes:
    Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein said second axis is at an angle of
    ninety degrees relative to said first axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24      and 56+, for other friction gear transmissions having gears on
    perpendicular axes.


CLS 476/70
TXT Roller bearing between gear and support:
    Subject matter under subclass 67 wherein a part in rolling frictional
    contact is mounted for rotation relative to a holder, by rotatable bearings
    spaced about the axis of said part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for other transmissions having roller bearing support for friction
    gears.


CLS 476/71
TXT Flexible drive shaft:
    Subject matter under subclass 67 wherein a drive train between said input
    and output bodies including a bendable elongated member rotatable about its
    longitudinal axis to transmit torque.


CLS 476/72
TXT Particular friction surface:
    Subject matter under subclass 67 wherein significance is attributed to the
    configuration of the contacting portion said parts in rolling contact, or
    to the material from which said portion is formed.


CLS 476/73
TXT Metallic:
    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein said portion is, at least in part,
    formed from a metal.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTION


CLS 476/900
TXT OVERLOAD RELEASE:
    A collection of patents under the class definition relating to structure
    for interrupting the flow of power through a drive train when torque on the
    output means exceeds a predetermined limit.


CLS 477/
TTL INTERRELATED POWER DELIVERY  CONTROLS, INCLUDING ENGINE CONTROL

CLS 477/
TXT
      I.    GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER:
    This is the class for structure wherein operation of an engine* either
    regulates or is regulated by the operation of a clutch*, a gear
    transmission*, or a brake*.

     II.    STATEMENT OF CLASS FORMATION:
    This class was formed from patents in previously existing Classes 74 and
    192 related to interrelated controls between an engine and a transmission,
    clutch, or brake.  Therefore the line between this and other classes is the
    same as between Classes 74 and 192 and other classes.

    III.    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, especially subclasses 347+ and 445+ for interrelated
    control between a motor and a device of Class 60.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, for gearing, per se, and for control
    for gearing lacking interrelated motor control.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 319+ for devices to
    regulate engine speed in an internal combustion engine.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, for interrelated control between an engine and a
    transmission, clutch, or brake, and also including significant vehicle
    structure.

    188,    Brakes, for brakes, per se.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, for clutches and clutch operators.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, especially subclasses 3+ for
    the combination of a significant electrical motor and a load device; and
    see section I,E,6, of the main class definition for a statement of the line
    between the classes.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, for endless
    belt transmissions and control therefore, but lacking interrelated motor
    control.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, for planetary
    gear transmissions and control therefore, but lacking interrelated motor
    control.

    476,    Friction Gear Transmission Systems or Components, for friction gear
    transmissions and control therefore, but lacking interrelated motor control.

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclasses 51+ for vehicle transmission control including significant
    calculations but absent specific transmission control structure.


     IV.    GLOSSARY OF TERMS

            The following glossary will define words or phrases used in the
    class and subclass definitions and are identified by an asterisk which
    appears after the word, or in the instance of a phrase, after the last word
    of the phrase:

    Brake:
    Mechanism operable to stop a rotatable part with respect to a stationary
    part.  If a brake is used as a part of transmission (i.e., in a planetary
    transmission to change gear ratio or direction), such a brake is classified
    with transmission control rather than brake control.

    Clutch:
    Mechanism operable to couple two relatively rotatable parts together for
    common rotation or to uncouple such parts.  The clutch* as used in the
    definition of this class or subclasses is a clutch* that may be used
    without a gear transmission* or in advance of or behind a gear
    transmission* in a power train.  If a clutch is used as a part of
    transmission (i.e., in a planetary transmission to change gear ratio or
    direction), such a clutch is classified with transmission control rather
    than clutch control.

    Engine:
    A primary source of rotational energy.

    Gearing Power Path:
    Mechanism including relatively rotatable bodies having engaging surfaces or
    which are drivingly connected by a belt or chain whereby a rotatable body
    will impart to or receive rotary motion or power from another rotary body
    by rolling contact.

    Gear transmission:
    Mechanism including at least one gearing power path*, said mechanism being
    capable of changing the speed ratio* or rotational direction between a
    mechanical output of an engine* and a load*.

    Input shaft:
    Mechanism that receives rotational motion from an engine* and transfers
    such motion to a gear transmission* or to a clutch*.

    Load:
    Mechanism that receives rotational motion from a gear transmission* or
    clutch* to do useful work.

    Output shaft:
    Mechanism that receives rotational motion from a gear transmission* or
    clutch* and transfers such motion to a load*.

    Speed ratio:
    Rotational velocity of an output shaft* divided by the rotational velocity
    of an input shaft.*


CLS 477/1
TXT STEERING BY DRIVING:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a gear transmission* is
    provided to drive parallel vehicle wheels at different relative speeds to
    effect turning of the vehicle and such means either regulates or is
    regulated by an engine*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 6.2+ for steering by driving combined
    with significant vehicle structure.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses 18+
    for gearing of that type used for steering by driving.


CLS 477/2
TXT PLURAL ENGINES:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein more than one engine* is
    effective to regulate or be regulated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 69.6 for plural power plants specifically
    arranged on a vehicle frame.


CLS 477/3
TXT Electric engine:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein one of the engines* is electrically
    powered.


CLS 477/4
TXT With brake control:

    Subject matter under subclass 3 wherein means is provided to regulate the
    operation of a brake*, and such regulation is interrelated with that of an
    engine*.


CLS 477/5
TXT With clutch control:

    Subject matter under subclass 3 wherein means is provided to regulate the
    operation of a clutch* and such regulation is interrelated with that of an
    engine*.


CLS 477/6
TXT With clutch control:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein means is provided to regulate the
    operation of a clutch* and such regulation is interrelated with that of an
    engine*.


CLS 477/7
TXT ELECTRIC ENGINE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the engine* is
    electrically powered.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for plural engines, one or both of which may be electric.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 9+ for the
    combination of electric motor and motion or power transmitting mechanism
    driven thereby.  See section I,E,6, of the main class definition of Class
    318 for a statement of the line.


CLS 477/8
TXT With clutch control:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein means are provided to regulate a
    clutch* and such means affects or is affected by the engine* operation.


CLS 477/9
TXT With brake control:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 wherein a means to apply a brake* is
    provided and such means affects or is affected by the engine* or clutch*
    control.


CLS 477/10
TXT Stopped at end of cycle:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein a load* device is automatically
    halted after a predetermined amount of movement.


CLS 477/11
TXT Engine stopped at end of cycle:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 wherein the power to the engine* is
    automatically disconnected after a predetermined amount of motion.


CLS 477/12
TXT Common controller:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 wherein the engine* and clutch* are
    operated by a single actuator.


CLS 477/13
TXT Electric clutch:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 wherein the clutch* is activated by
    electrical means.


CLS 477/14
TXT Speed responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 wherein the regulation is affected by the
    velocity of a rotary part.


CLS 477/15
TXT With transmission control:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein the electric engine* is connected
    to a load* through a gear transmission* and the operation of the gear
    transmission* regulates  or is regulated by the operation of the engine.


CLS 477/16
TXT Load motion limit control:

    Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein the regulation of the engine* or
    gear transmission* takes place as the load* reaches a predetermined
    position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10      and 11, for limit stops including clutch control.


CLS 477/17
TXT Transmission change by moving engine.

    Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein the gear transmission* is
    regulated by changing the position of the engine* with relation to its
    support.


CLS 477/18
TXT Reversible engine:

    Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein the regulation of the engine*
    includes changing the direction of rotation of a shaft driven by the engine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 810.1 for a reversible motor
    effective to change the power path of a transmission.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclass 12 for
    a reversible motor effective to change the power path of a planetary
    transmission.


CLS 477/19
TXT Engine starting interlock:

    Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein a control for the gear
    transmission* regulates starting of the engine*.


CLS 477/20
TXT Condition responsive engine control:

    Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein the operation of the engine* is
    regulated in response to a variable parameter of the gear transmission* or
    load*.


CLS 477/21
TXT Brake engaged when engine energy deactivated, brake disengaged when engine
    energy activated:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein regulating means for the engine* is
    interrelated with regulatory means for a brake* such that (a) when the
    brake* is in a force applying position to prevent movement, the provision
    of driving energy to the engine* is discontinued and (b) when the brake* is
    removed from a force applying position, driving energy to the engine* is
    provided.


CLS 477/22
TXT Cam actuated brake:

    Subject matter under subclass 21 wherein the regulating means for the
    brake* comprises structure which converts rotational motion into
    translational motion by sliding engagement with an eccentric member.


CLS 477/23
TXT Electrically actuated brake:

    Subject matter under subclass 21 wherein the regulating means for the
    brake* is operated by electric current.


CLS 477/24
TXT Brake actuation opens switch to engine:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein regulating means is provided to
    govern operation of a brake*, and wherein movement of the brake regulating
    means to a force applying position interrupts flow of electricity to the
    engine.*


CLS 477/25
TXT Electrically actuated brake:

    Subject matter under subclass 24 wherein the regulating means uses electric
    current to move the brake* to a force applying position.


CLS 477/26
TXT Fluid actuated brake:

    Subject matter under subclass 24 wherein the regulating means uses the
    force of positively or negatively pressurized liquid or gas to move the
    brake* to a force applying position.


CLS 477/27
TXT Control means selectively operates engine energy input and brake:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein a regulating means for interrelated
    engine* and brake* control is operable to alternatively (a) vary an amount
    of driving energy provided to the engine* or (b) move the brake* to a force
    applying or release position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 469+ for lever and linking
    systems to control a device or devices.


CLS 477/28
TXT Fluid actuated brake:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 wherein the regulating means for the
    brake* uses the force of positively or negatively pressurized liquid or gas
    to move the brake* to a force applying position.


CLS 477/29
TXT Electrically actuated brake:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 wherein the regulating means for the
    brake* uses electric current to move the brake* to a force applying
    position.


CLS 477/30
TXT GAS TURBINE ENGINE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the engine* is of the
    type comprising a rotatable shaft carrying blades, which shaft is caused to
    rotate by the reaction on its blades of a moving gas generated by the
    burning of fuel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 39.01+ for gas turbine engines, per se.


CLS 477/31
TXT Continuously variable transmission:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein the gear transmission* is of a
    type having a steplessly changeable speed ratio*.


CLS 477/32
TXT WITH SUPERCHARGER:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the engine* is an
    internal combustion engine and includes means to increase the pressure of
    the air supply thereto.


CLS 477/33
TXT Manifold pressure control:

    Subject matter under subclass 32 wherein the intake pressure of the engine*
    is regulated or used as a regulating signal.


CLS 477/34
TXT TRANSMISSION CONTROL:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the operation of the
    engine* regulates or is regulated by the operation of a gear transmission*.


CLS 477/35
TXT Differential transmission:

    Subject matter under subclass 34 wherein the gear transmission* is of the
    planetary-type having at least three relatively rotatable elements, one
    element constituting an input and the other two outputs, such that a change
    in speed in one of the outputs has a direct effect on the speed of the
    other output.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 197 for wheel slip control during vehicle
    acceleration by reducing power to wheel; and subclasses 248+ for four-wheel
    drive with differential, where there is significant vehicle structure.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, for planetary
    gear transmission, per se, and particularly subclasses 220+ for
    differential transmissions.


CLS 477/36
TXT Plural outputs:

    Subject matter under subclass 34 wherein the gear transmission* is
    effective to drive two load* devices.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein as separate loads are the front and rear
    axle of a vehicle, as in a four wheel drive.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 234+ for four-wheel drive with
    significant vehicle structure.


CLS 477/37
TXT Continuously variable friction transmission:

    Subject matter under subclass 34 wherein the gear transmission* is of a
    type having a steplessly changeable speed ratio* and includes toothless
    gearing that transmits force by frictional contact.


CLS 477/38
TXT With fluid drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein the continuously variable friction
    transmission is combined with a hydraulic or pneumatic torque transmitting
    means.


CLS 477/39
TXT With clutch control:

    Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein the continuously variable friction
    transmission is combined with a means to regulate a clutch*.


CLS 477/40
TXT With brake control:

    Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein the continuously variable friction
    transmission is combined with a means to regulate a brake*.


CLS 477/41
TXT Interrelated control of diverse transmissions:

    Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein the continuously variable friction
    transmission is combined with a gear transmission* of a different type and
    the control of one gear transmission* affects the control of the other gear
    transmission*.


CLS 477/42
TXT Constant speed output:

    Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein the regulation of the engine* and
    gear transmission* result in a constant velocity of the transmission output
    shaft*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 170+ for cruise control in a vehicle
    with significant vehicle structure.


CLS 477/43
TXT Controlled by engine map:

    Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein the gear transmission* is
    regulated, at least in part, by a device providing a memory of desirable
    engine* performance.


CLS 477/44
TXT Belt-type:

    Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein the continuously variable friction
    transmission comprises an endless flexible band entrained about parallel
    pulleys.


CLS 477/45
TXT Fluid pressure control:

    Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein the belt drive is regulated by a
    device operated by pressure of a liquid or gas, and the regulation affects
    or is affected by the operation of an engine*.


CLS 477/46
TXT Ratio change controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 45 wherein the regulation of the fluid
    pressure is effective to change the transmission speed ratio*.


CLS 477/47
TXT Engine coast braking:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 wherein the speed ratio* change is in
    response to sensing that the load* is attempting to drive the engine*.


CLS 477/48
TXT With electric valve control:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 wherein regulation of the fluid pressure
    is affected by an electrically actuated valve.


CLS 477/49
TXT Duty ratio control:

    Subject matter under subclass 48 wherein the electrical regulation is by
    pulse width modulation of on-off signals to the valve.


CLS 477/50
TXT Fluid pressure control:

    Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein the steplessly variable friction
    transmission is regulated by a device operated by pressure of a liquid or
    gas.


CLS 477/51
TXT Fluid resistance inhibits rotation of planetary transmission element:

    Subject matter under subclass 34 wherein either the weight or momentum of a
    fluid mass or a fluids' resistance to flow is effective to retard the
    rotation of an element of a planetary transmission.

    (1)     Note.  See the definition of Class 475 for definition of a
    planetary gear set.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 61 for clutches of the
    gear pump-type.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses 91+
    for internal resistance-type clutches and brakes combined with planetary
    gearing.


CLS 477/52
TXT Including fluid drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 34 wherein the combination of a hydraulic or
    pneumatic torque transmitting means and a gear transmission* is
    interrelated with control of the engine*.


CLS 477/53
TXT Impeller-turbine-type:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein the fluid torque transmitting
    means is made up of at least two rotary coaxial vaned elements forming a
    fluid filled torus, one of the elements being an input element and the
    other an output element.


CLS 477/54
TXT Engine controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 53 wherein the engine* is regulated by a
    control signal from the fluid torque transmitting means or the gear
    transmission*.


CLS 477/55
TXT With countershaft gearing:

    Subject matter under subclass 53 wherein the gear transmission* comprises
    intermeshing gears on parallel shafts and wherein the axes of the shafts
    are fixed.

    (1)     Note.  This is to be distinguished from planetary gearing wherein
    an axis of a planetary gear is not fixed; but, instead, it rotates about
    another axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 718, 720, and 730.1+ for
    this type of transmission with a fluid drive but without an engine control.


CLS 477/56
TXT And turbine shaft brake:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein there is provided means to stop
    the output element of the fluid torque transmitting means.


CLS 477/57
TXT And clutch control:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein a clutch* is provided to connect
    the input and output elements of the fluid torque transmitting means or
    connect the input element to the gear transmission*, bypassing the fluid
    torque transmitting means.


CLS 477/58
TXT Control of or by fluid drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein the operation of the fluid torque
    transmitting means is regulated or a condition thereof is effective to
    regulate the gear transmission*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for control of the fluid drive by the regulation of a lockup or
    bypass clutch.


CLS 477/59
TXT With hydrodynamic braking:

    Subject matter under subclass 53 wherein an impeller-turbine unit is
    utilized to retard rotation of a load*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclass 113 for
    impeller-turbine units used as brakes for elements of planetary gear sets.


CLS 477/60
TXT With nonratio brake:

    Subject matter under subclass 53 wherein means is provided to stop a part
    of the gear transmission* or load from rotation and such stoppage does not
    directly change a gear speed ratio*.

    (1)     Note.  A nonratio brake is one that does not directly   effect a
    ratio change; e.g, anticreep, parking   brake, synchronization brake, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59,     for hydraulic brakes.


CLS 477/61
TXT Control responsive to fluid drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 53 wherein the gear transmission* is
    controlled by a condition of the fluid torque transmitting means.

    (1)     Note.  The gear transmission may be controlled, for example, by
    regulating a clutch* associated with the  fluid drive, a ratio changing
    clutch* or brake*, or   the system pressure of the gear transmission*
    control system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 731.1 for the combination of
    a fluid drive and nonplanetary gearing with a condition responsive control
    but no engine control.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components,   subclasses 42,
    49, and 61+ for the combination of       planetary gearing and fluid drive
    where a gear transmission is controlled by a condition of the fluid
    drive, but without an engine control.


CLS 477/62
TXT With clutch control:

    Subject matter under subclass 53 wherein a clutch* is operable to connect
    the input and output elements of the fluid torque transmitting means or to
    connect the input element thereof to the gear transmission*, bypassing the
    said fluid means.

    (1)     Note.  Where the clutch* control is responsive to a condition of
    the fluid drive see subclass 61.


CLS 477/63
TXT Disengaged during shift:

    Subject matter under subclass 62 wherein the clutch* is  regulated during a
    change in speed ratio* of the gear   transmission*.


CLS 477/64
TXT Speed responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 62 wherein operation of the clutch* is
    controlled in response to means detecting velocity or change in velocity of
    a part associated therewith.


CLS 477/65
TXT Electrical:

    Subject matter under subclass 64 wherein the detecting means   or control
    signal is operated by electrical current.


CLS 477/66
TXT With fluid unit vane control:

    Subject matter under subclass 53 wherein means is provided to regulate the
    angle or position of the vane(s) within the torus to change the speed and
    direction of the fluid therein.


CLS 477/67
TXT Fill and empty-type fluid units:

    Subject matter under subclass 53 wherein the fluid torque transmitting
    means may be emptied or filled for the purpose of changing the amount of
    slippage between the elements.

    (1)     Note.  These devices are often used in place of a  friction
    clutch*, for speed ratio* control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses 34,
    42, 50, 64, and 69 for planetary gearing and fill and empty-type fluid
    units in the absence of an engine control.


CLS 477/68
TXT Ratio control:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein the speed ratio of the fluid
    torque transmitting means is regulated by the engine*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 445+ for condition responsive  control of
    hydrostatic pump and motor units.


CLS 477/69
TXT With planetary transmission control:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein there is included a gear
    transmission* of the planetary type which is also regulated by the engine*.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 475 for the definition of, and structure involving
    planetary transmission, per se.


CLS 477/70
TXT With clutch control:

    Subject matter under subclass 34 wherein a means is provided to regulate a
    clutch* and said regulation is interrelated with that of the engine* or
    gear transmission*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7+,     for this combination with an electric motor.

    39+,    for this combination with a continuously variable friction
    transmission.

    57,     where the gearing is of the counter shaft-type and the clutch is
    associated with an impeller-turbine-type fluid drive.

    62,     where the gearing is of the planetary-type and the  clutch is
    associated with an impeller-turbine-type fluid drive

    166+,   for interrelated engine and clutch control in the absence of a gear
    transmission control.


CLS 477/71
TXT And brake control:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 wherein in addition to the interrelated
    engine*, gear transmission* and clutch* controls, means is provided to
    regulate a brake*, and such brake regulating means affects or is affected
    by at least one of the other controls.


CLS 477/72
TXT Temperature responsive control:

    Subject matter under subclass 71 wherein the heat level of or surrounding
    the engine*, gear transmission*, clutch*, or brake* is effective as a
    control signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76,     for temperature responsive control involving only engine, clutch,
    and gear transmission control.

    98,     for temperature control involving only engine and gear transmission
    control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclass 117 for
    temperature responsive control of a      planetary transmission.


CLS 477/73
TXT Engine controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 71 wherein the clutch*, brake*, or gear
    transmission* regulate operation of the engine*.


CLS 477/74
TXT Clutch controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 71 wherein the engine*, gear transmission*,
    or brake* regulate the operation of the clutch*.


CLS 477/75
TXT Gearing controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 71 wherein the engine*, clutch*, or brake*
    regulates the operation of the gear transmission*.


CLS 477/76
TXT Temperature responsive control:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 wherein means are       provided to sense
    a heat level and means responsive to such   sensing are provided to
    regulate the operation of the engine*, gear transmission*, or clutch*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for temperature responsive control involving an engine, gear
    transmission, clutch, and brake.

    98,     for temperature responsive control involving only an engine and
    gear transmission.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission System or Components, subclass 117 for
    temperature responsive control of a planetary gear transmission.


CLS 477/77
TXT Clutch, engine, and transmission controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 wherein means are provided to regulate the
    operation of a clutch*, an engine*, and a gear transmission*.


CLS 477/78
TXT Electronic digital control:

    Subject matter under subclass 77 wherein the operation is regulated with
    the use of a digital computer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclasses 51+ for vehicle transmission control including significant
    calculations but absent specific transmission structure.


CLS 477/79
TXT Clutch and transmission controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 wherein the engine* control  regulates the
    operation of a clutch* and a gear transmission*.


CLS 477/80
TXT Speed responsive control:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 wherein the regulation is affected by the
    velocity of a rotary part.


CLS 477/81
TXT With manual override:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the speed responsive control may
    be negated by manual means.


CLS 477/82
TXT Vacuum actuated clutch:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the clutch* is operated by a
    source of negative pressure.


CLS 477/83
TXT Clutch and engine controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 wherein the gear transmission*  control
    regulates the operation of a clutch* and an engine*.


CLS 477/84
TXT Speed responsive control:

    Subject matter under subclass 83 wherein the regulation is affected by the
    velocity of a rotary part.


CLS 477/85
TXT Plural speed signals:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 wherein the regulation is affected by the
    velocities of more than one rotary part.


CLS 477/86
TXT Clutch controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 wherein operation of the engine* or gear
    transmission* regulates the operation of a clutch*.


CLS 477/87
TXT Electric clutch:

    Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein the clutch* is actuated by
    electrical means.


CLS 477/88
TXT Vacuum actuated clutch:

    Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein the clutch* is actuated by a
    source of negative pressure.


CLS 477/89
TXT Electric control:

    Subject matter under subclass 88 wherein the negative pressure is
    controlled by electrical means.


CLS 477/90
TXT Engine controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 wherein operation of the clutch* or gear
    transmission* regulates the operation of an engine*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for a gear transmission and impeller-turbine-type fluid unit
    controlling an engine.

    73,     for the combination of a gear transmission, clutch, and brake
    controlling an engine.

    101,    for engine ignition control.

    107,    for engine control by a transmission, absent a clutch or  brake.


CLS 477/91
TXT Speed responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein the operation of the engine* is
    regulated by the velocity of a rotary part.


CLS 477/92
TXT With brake control:

    Subject matter under subclass 34 wherein means are provided to regulate a
    brake* and operation of said brake regulating mean is interrelated with the
    operation of the engine* or gear transmission*.


CLS 477/93
TXT Anticreep:

    Subject matter under subclass 92 wherein, in a vehicle drive, means are
    provided to prevent the vehicle from moving forward when the engine* is at
    idle and the vehicle is stopped.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for anticreep devices including only engine and transmission
    control.


CLS 477/94
TXT Brake controls transmission:

    Subject matter under subclass 92 wherein the means to regulate the brake*
    affect the operation of the gear transmission*.


CLS 477/95
TXT Pressure controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 wherein the gear transmission* is
    controlled by fluid and the means to or regulate the brake* affects the
    force exerted by the fluid.


CLS 477/96
TXT One control blocks another:

    Subject matter under subclass 92 wherein the operation of either the
    engine*, gear transmission*, or brake* is prevented  by the operation of
    one of the others.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    125,    where only engine and transmission controls are involved.


CLS 477/97
TXT Control by sensed ambient condition, pattern indicia, or external signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 34 wherein means are provided to sense (1) a
    condition or change in condition of the atmosphere surrounding the engine
    or gear transmission* or (2) the presence or absence of indicative means on
    a prescribed record or (3) a signal from a source not physically connected
    to the engine*, gear transmission* or load* or (4) the heat level of a part
    of the engine or gear transmission*; and, in response to the sensing,
    regulate the operation of the engine* or gear transmission*.


CLS 477/98
TXT Temperature control:

    Subject matter under subclass 97 wherein means are provided to sense a heat
    level, and means responsive to such sensing regulates the operation of the
    engine* or gear transmission*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72,     for other temperature responsive controls and see the search notes
    thereunder.


CLS 477/99
TXT Engine starting interlock:

    Subject matter under subclass 34 wherein the gear transmission*  control
    regulates starting of the engine*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for starting interlocks with electric motors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 271+ for interlocks with significant
    vehicle structure.


CLS 477/100
TXT Exhaust emission control:

    Subject matter under subclass 34 wherein the engine* is an internal
    combustion engine and regulation of the engine*  includes means to regulate
    the discharge of undesirable engine  waste gas constituents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    60,     Power Plants, subclasses 272+ for an internal combustion engine
    with treatment or handling of exhaust gas.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, appropriate subclasses for engine
    emission control in the absence of a gear      transmission.


CLS 477/101
TXT Engine ignition control for transmission change:

    Subject matter under subclass 34 wherein the engine* is of a type requiring
    periodic ignition for continued operation and the means to regulate the
    operation of the engine includes means to regulate or interrupt the
    periodic ignition to enable a gear transmission* speed ratio* change.


CLS 477/102
TXT Ignition advanced or retarded:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein the ignition takes place at a
    particular time with respect to the operation of the engine* parts and the
    regulation of the engine* includes  regulation of the ignition timing.


CLS 477/103
TXT Ignition intermitting and safety means limiting duration of intermission:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein the ignition is interrupted for a
    predetermined time regardless of whether the speed ratio* change is
    completed or not.


CLS 477/104
TXT Ignition intermitting controlled by manifold pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein the engine* is an air breathing
    engine* and means are provided to sense the pressure at the intake of the
    engine and in response thereto regulate the interruption of the periodic
    ignition.


CLS 477/105
TXT Ignition intermitting initiated by positioning accelerator:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein the interruption of the ignition
    is initiated by placing a manual control for energy input to the engine* in
    a predetermined position.


CLS 477/106
TXT Initiation inhibited by sensed condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 105 wherein means is provided to sense a
    condition or change in condition and in response thereto prevent the manual
    control from initiating the interruption of the ignition.


CLS 477/107
TXT Engine controlled by transmission:

    Subject matter under subclass 34 wherein means is provided to regulate a
    supply of energy to the engine* and such regulation  is affected by the
    operation of the gear transmission*.


CLS 477/108
TXT Constant output shaft speed:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein the engine* is regulated such
    that a load* shaft of the gear transmission* remains at an unchanging
    velocity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123,    Internal Combustion Engines, subclasses 319+ for engine speed
    regulation without transmission control.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 170+ for cruise control involving
    significant vehicle structure or lacking transmission control.


CLS 477/109
TXT Diminution during transmission change:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein energy input supplied to the
    engine* is modified by decreasing the supply while the gear transmission*
    speed ratio* is being changed.


CLS 477/110
TXT Responsive to transmission output condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein energy input supplied to the
    engine is regulated by a condition or change of condition of an output
    shaft* of the gear transmission*.


CLS 477/111
TXT Transmission setting contingent:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein means are provided to sense the
    selection of a particular gear transmission* speed ratio*, and, in response
    to such sensing, means are provided to affect the energy input supplied to
    the engine*.


CLS 477/112
TXT Change to neutral idles engine:

    Subject matter under subclass 111 wherein the means to sense the selection
    is capable of disengaging all speed ratios*, and, in response thereto, is
    effective to decrease energy input to the engine* to a minimum while
    allowing the engine* to continue operating.


CLS 477/113
TXT Engine input variable in neutral:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein energy supply to the engine* is
    changeable while all gear speed ratios* are disengaged.


CLS 477/114
TXT Anticreep:

    Subject matter under subclass 34 wherein in a vehicle drive, means are
    provided to prevent the vehicle from moving forward when the engine is at
    idle and the vehicle is stopped.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93,     wherein in addition to an engine and gear transmission, a brake is
    involved.


CLS 477/115
TXT Transmission controlled by engine:

    Subject matter under subclass 34 wherein the operation of the gear
    transmission* is regulated by the operation of the engine*.


CLS 477/116
TXT Shift from neutral shock control:

    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein a manual means is movable to a
    first position to effect engagement of a speed     ratio* of the gear
    transmission* or to a second position to   effect disengagement of all
    ratios and wherein means is provided  to limit impulsive forces within the
    gear transmission* when the gear transmission* is shifted between first and
    second positions.


CLS 477/117
TXT Pressure controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein the gear transmission* is
    regulated by pumped fluid and the said shift affects the force exerted by
    the fluid.


CLS 477/118
TXT Engine (coast) braking:

    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein a speed ratio* change is
    controlled in response to sensing that the load* is attempting to drive the
    engine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for engine braking with a belt transmission.


CLS 477/119
TXT Electric valve control:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein the speed ratio* change is
    controlled by an electrically operated valve.


CLS 477/120
TXT By acceleration:

    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein means for the regulation of the
    gear transmission* includes a signal responsive to the rate of change of
    velocity with respect to time of a gear transmission* part or a load*
    driven thereby.


CLS 477/121
TXT By input manifold pressure or engine fuel control:

    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein the engine* is an air breathing,
    fuel burning type and the gear transmission* is regulated by air pressure
    at the intake of the engine or by a means to feed the fuel.


CLS 477/122
TXT Selector-type:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein a manual means is provided to
    choose a gear speed ratio* of the gear transmission* but the change to said
    ratio is not effected until a manual control for fuel to the engine* is
    placed in a particular position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    136 and 141, for forced downshifts by placing the fuel control in a
    particular position and not preceded by a preselection of gear ratio.


CLS 477/123
TXT With positive shift means:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the gear transmission* uses
    toothed positively engaging elements to change from one speed ratio* to
    another, and including the sliding of a gear on  a shaft to effect ratio
    change.


CLS 477/124
TXT With  synchronization:

    Subject matter under subclass 123 wherein means are provided to equalize
    the speed of the parts of the engaging elements before they are engaged.


CLS 477/125
TXT Prevents unsafe or unintentional shift:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein means are provided to prohibit
    the changing of the speed ratio* of the gear transmission* when such change
    may harm the engine* or gear     transmission.


CLS 477/126
TXT Reverse inhibitor:

    Subject matter under subclass 125 wherein the speed ratio* change that is
    prohibited is that which would change the direction of rotation of a gear
    transmission* load* shaft.


CLS 477/127
TXT Shift valve control:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein a reciprocating valve is
    effective to trigger the actuation of a speed ratio* change  in the gear
    transmission* said valve being regulated by a signal  responsive to the
    input manifold pressure or engine fuel control.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the valve is controlled by both an engine signal and
    vehicle speed responsive signal.


CLS 477/128
TXT Hysteresis:

    Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein the regulation of the valve is
    such that should a given signal level be necessary to move the valve in one
    direction, movement in a second direction must overcome a greater signal
    level.

    (1)     Note.  This prevents ``hunting" by the valve.


CLS 477/129
TXT Electric control:

    Subject matter under subclass 128 wherein a signal used to regulate the
    valve is electric.


CLS 477/130
TXT Plural shift valves:

    Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein two valves are regulated by
    signals responsive to input manifold pressure or engine* fuel control to
    trigger actuation of two speed ratio* changes.


CLS 477/131
TXT Electric control:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein the signal is electric.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclasses 51+ for vehicle transmission control including significant
    calculations but absent specific transmission structures.


CLS 477/132
TXT Downshift control:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein significance is attributed to
    means for changing from a high speed ratio* to  a lower speed ratio*.


CLS 477/133
TXT Kickdown:

    Subject matter under subclass 132 wherein a forced downshift is effected by
    moving a manual engine* fuel control to a predetermined position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101+,   wherein addition to the downshift the periodic ignition is
    interrupted.

    122,    for the manual selection of gear ratio followed by actuation
    thereof by placement of a fuel control.

    136     and 141, for other kickdown combinations.


CLS 477/134
TXT Selector valve overrule:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein significance is attributed to a
    manual valve movable to choose various gear speed ratios* of the gear
    transmission* and movable to a predetermined position to prevent normal
    operation of a shift  valve.


CLS 477/135
TXT Downshift control:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein significance is attributed to
    means for changing from a high speed ratio* to a lower speed ratio*.


CLS 477/136
TXT Kickdown:

    Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein a forced downshift is effected by
    moving a manual engine* fuel control to a predetermined position.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 133 and the notes thereunder for other
    accelerator triggered controls.


CLS 477/137
TXT Selector valve overrule:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein significance is attributed to a
    manual valve movable to choose various gear speed ratios* of the gear
    transmission* and movable to a predetermined position to prevent normal
    operation of a shift valve.


CLS 477/138
TXT Electric control:

    Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein the signal is electric.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclasses 51+ for vehicle transmission control including significant
    calculations but absent specific transmission structure.


CLS 477/139
TXT Downshift control:

    Subject matter under subclass 138 wherein significance is attributed to
    means for changing from a high speed ratio* to a lower speed ratio*.


CLS 477/140
TXT Downshift control:

    Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein significance is attributed to
    means for changing from a high speed ratio*  to a lower speed ratio*.


CLS 477/141
TXT Kickdown:

    Subject matter under subclass 140 wherein a forced downshift is effected by
    moving a manual engine* fuel control to a predetermined position.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 133 and the notes thereunder for other
    accelerator triggered controls.


CLS 477/142
TXT Selector valve overrule:

    Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein significance is attributed to a
    manual valve movable to choose various gear speed ratios* of the gear
    transmission* and movable to a predetermined position to prevent normal
    operation of a shift valve.


CLS 477/143
TXT Servomotor timing:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein a speed ratio* of the gear
    transmission* is engaged by a fluid actuated piston forming a movable wall
    of a chamber and means is provided to regulate the buildup or release of
    fluid pressure in one or more of such chambers.


CLS 477/144
TXT Downshift:

    Subject matter under subclass 143 wherein significance is attributed to
    regulating pressure in the chamber on a shift from a high speed ratio* to a
    lower speed ratio*.


CLS 477/145
TXT With fluid accumulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 144 wherein a variable enclosed space is
    placed in communication with the chamber to control the buildup or release
    of fluid in such chamber.

    (1)     Note.  Included under this definition are ``trimmer" valves which
    exhaust pressure in a fluid line until pressure builds up in an adjoining
    chamber and shuts off the exhaust.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes And Tubular Conduits, subclasses 30+ for accumulators, per se.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclass 129 for
    accumulator control of planetary gearing  without an engine control.


CLS 477/146
TXT Electric valve control:

    Subject matter under subclass 145 wherein control of fluid to or from said
    chamber is by means of an electrically operated valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclasses 51+ for vehicle transmission control including significant
    calculations but absent specific transmission structure.


CLS 477/147
TXT Double acting servo:

    Subject matter under subclass 144 wherein the piston is actuated by fluid
    pressure to engage a gear speed ratio* and is also actuated by fluid
    pressure to disengage the said ratio.


CLS 477/148
TXT Speed responsive control:

    Subject matter under subclass 144 wherein the regulation of buildup or
    release of fluid pressure is controlled by the velocity of a gear
    transmission* part.


CLS 477/149
TXT Electric valve control:

    Subject matter under subclass 144 wherein control of fluid pressure to or
    from said chamber is by means of an electrically operated valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclasses 51+ for vehicle transmission control including significant
    calculations but absent specific transmission structure.


CLS 477/150
TXT With fluid accumulator:

    Subject matter under subclass 143 wherein a variable enclosed space is
    placed in communication with the chamber to control the buildup or release
    of fluid in such chamber.

    (1)     Note.  Included under this definition are ``trimmer" valves which
    exhaust pressure in a fluid line until pressure builds up in an adjoining
    chamber and shuts off the exhaust.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145,    for fluid accumulators associated with a downshift control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclasses 30+ for accumulators, per se.

     475,   Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclass 129 for
    accumulator control of planetary gearing without an engine control.


CLS 477/151
TXT Engine parameter controls back pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 150 wherein a movable piston functions to
    vary the capacity of the accumulator space, and a signal representing input
    manifold pressure or engine*  fuel control biases the piston to change the
    resistance to movement of the piston.


CLS 477/152
TXT Electric valve control:

    Subject matter under subclass 150 wherein control of fluid to or from said
    chamber is by means of an electrically operated valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclasses 51+ for vehicle transmission control including significant
    calculations but absent specific transmission structure.


CLS 477/153
TXT Double acting servo:

    Subject matter under subclass 143 wherein the piston is actuated by fluid
    pressure to engage a gear speed ratio* and is also actuated by fluid
    pressure to disengage the said ratio.


CLS 477/154
TXT Speed responsive control:

    Subject matter under subclass 143 wherein the regulation of buildup or
    release of fluid pressure is controlled by the velocity of a gear
    transmission* part.


CLS 477/155
TXT Electric valve control:

    Subject matter under subclass 143 wherein control of fluid pressure to or
    from the chamber is by means of an electrically operated valve.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    701,    Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    subclasses 51+ for vehicle transmission control including significant
    calculations but absent specific transmission structure.


CLS 477/156
TXT Transmission pressure controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the gear transmission* is
    controlled by fluid pressure which is regulated by engine* intake pressure
    or means to feed the fuel.


CLS 477/157
TXT Variable capacity pump:

    Subject matter under subclass 156 wherein a pump is the source of fluid
    pressure and the engine* intake pressure or fuel feed is effective to
    control the volumetric capacity of said pump.


CLS 477/158
TXT Line pressure controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 156 wherein a pump is the source of fluid
    pressure and feeds fluid to a valve effective to regulate said pressure in
    response to engine* intake pressure or fuel feed.


CLS 477/159
TXT Responsive to speed:

    Subject matter under subclass 158 wherein the valve is also influenced by
    the velocity of a gear transmission* part.


CLS 477/160
TXT Electric valve control:

    Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein the engine* intake pressure, fuel
    feed or velocity signal is an electric signal.


CLS 477/161
TXT Duty ratio control:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein the electric signal is variable
    and effective to variably regulate a fluid pressure by pulse width
    modulation of on-off signals to the valve.


CLS 477/162
TXT Transmission setting contingent:

    Subject matter under subclass 158 wherein the valve is also influenced by
    means sensing the particular gear speed ratio* engaged at that time.


CLS 477/163
TXT Electric valve control:

    Subject matter under subclass 158 wherein the engine* intake pressure or
    fuel feed signal is an electric signal.


CLS 477/164
TXT Electric valve control:

    Subject matter under subclass 156 wherein the engine intake   pressure or
    fuel feed signal is an electric signal.


CLS 477/165
TXT Engine control linkage mounted on manual gearshift lever:

    Subject matter under subclass 34 wherein a manual lever is utilized to
    regulate operation of a gear transmission* and the lever supports means
    movable relative thereto which means   is operative to regulate an engine*.


CLS 477/166
TXT CLUTCH CONTROL:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the operation of the
    engine* regulates or is regulated by the operation of a clutch*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5       and 6, for a clutch control in combination with plural engines.

    8+,     for clutch control in combination with an electric engine.

    39,     for clutch control in combination with a continuously variable
    friction transmission.

    57      and 62+, for clutch control in combination with a fluid drive and
    transmission.

    70+,    for clutch control in combination with transmission control.


CLS 477/167
TXT With starter:

    Subject matter under subclass 166 wherein an engine* starting  device is
    interrelated with the clutch* operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99,     for engine starting interlocked with transmission control.


CLS 477/168
TXT With fluid drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 166 wherein a hydraulic or pneumatic torque
    transmitting means is interrelated with clutch* control.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for clutch control interrelated with impeller-turbine fluid drive
    and countershaft gearing.

    62,     for clutch control interrelated with impeller-turbine fluid drive
    and transmission.


CLS 477/169
TXT Speed responsive control:

    Subject matter under subclass 168 wherein the clutch control is responsive
    to a signal derived from the velocity of a moving part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64+     for speed responsive clutch control in an impeller-turbine fluid
    drive in combination with a transmission.


CLS 477/170
TXT With brake control:

    Subject matter under subclass 166 wherein a brake* control is interrelated
    with clutch* and engine* control.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for brake control is combination with transmission and clutch
    control.


CLS 477/171
TXT Clutch controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 170 wherein means to control the clutch* is
    interrelated with the brake* control.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for brake control in combination with clutch and transmission
    control wherein the clutch is the controlled  element.


CLS 477/172
TXT And brake controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 171 wherein means are provided to control
    both the clutch* and the brake*.


CLS 477/173
TXT Engine controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 170 wherein means are provided to control the
    engine* and such means is interrelated with clutch* and brake* control.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73,     for brake control in combination with a transmission and clutch
    control wherein the engine is controlled.


CLS 477/174
TXT Condition responsive control:

    Subject matter under subclass 166 wherein the clutch* control is subject to
    an additional variable parameter.


CLS 477/175
TXT Speed responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 174 wherein the variable parameter is the
    velocity of a moving part.


CLS 477/176
TXT Slip rate control:

    Subject matter under subclass 175 wherein a speed differential  between
    parts of a clutch* is regulated.


CLS 477/177
TXT Overload release:

    Subject matter under subclass 174 wherein the additional parameter is
    torque experienced by the load*, and the clutch is disengaged when the
    torque exceeds a predetermined valve.


CLS 477/178
TXT Engine shut off:

    Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein motive power to the engine* is
    terminated upon disengagement of the clutch*.


CLS 477/179
TXT Electric clutch:

    Subject matter under subclass 166 wherein the clutch is actuated by
    electrical current.


CLS 477/180
TXT Regulated clutch engagement:

    Subject matter under subclass 166 wherein significant is attributed to
    timing of movement of clutch* element during engagement.


CLS 477/181
TXT Engine controlled by clutch control:

    Subject matter under subclass 166 wherein operation of the clutch*
    regulates operation of the engine*


CLS 477/182
TXT BRAKE CONTROL:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein operation of the engine*
    regulates or is regulated by the operation of a brake*.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for brake control in combination with plural engines.

    7+,     for brake control in combination with an electric engine.

    40,     for brake control in combination with a continuously variable
    friction transmission.

    52+,    for brake control in combination with a fluid drive and
    transmission.

    71+,    for combined transmission, brake, and clutch control.

    92+,    for combined transmission and brake control.

    170+,   for combined clutch and brake control.


CLS 477/183
TXT Sensed condition responsive control of engine or brake:

    Subject matter under subclass 182 including means to detect a parameter or
    change in a parameter and having means responsive thereto to regulate
    operation of the engine* or brake*.


CLS 477/184
TXT Brake:

    Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein operation of the brake* is
    regulated.


CLS 477/185
TXT And engine:

    Subject matter under subclass 184 wherein operation of the engine* is also
    regulated.


CLS 477/186
TXT Speed or acceleration responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 184 wherein the parameter is velocity or rate
    of change of velocity of a moving part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 180+ for speed responsive brake operators.

    303     ,Fluid-Pressure and Analogous  Brake System, subclasses 121+ for
    brakes regulated by a speed condition.


CLS 477/187
TXT Speed or accelerations responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein the parameter is velocity or rate
    of change of velocity of a moving part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186,    for interrelated engine and brake control wherein the brake is
    controlled in responsive to speed or acceleration, and see the search notes
    thereunder.


CLS 477/188
TXT Plural diverse brake means:

    Subject matter under subclass 182 including at least two operationally
    different and distinct brakes*, each having a regulation means, and at
    least one of the brake regulating means is interrelated with regulating
    means for the engine*.


CLS 477/189
TXT Engine energy control having adjusting and holding device, with means on
    brake control to override holding device:

    Subject matter under subclass 182 wherein engine* regulating means is
    operable to govern the energy input to the engine* and includes mechanism
    to set and lock the engine regulating means at a desired position; combined
    with apparatus to disengage the setting and locking mechanism
    simultaneously with activation of the brake*.


CLS 477/190
TXT Holding device engaged by electric means:

    Subject matter under subclass 189 wherein the setting and locking mechanism
    is actuated by a structure using electric current.


CLS 477/191
TXT Magnetic holding device:

    Subject matter under subclass 190 wherein a magnetic attracting force is
    used to prevent movement of the engine* regulating means.


CLS 477/192
TXT Mechanical holding device engaged by mechanical means:

    Subject matter under subclass 189 wherein the setting and locking mechanism
    includes structure to lock the engine* regulating means against movement
    and further includes a device to actuate the locking structure; wherein
    said structure and device is operated by force other than fluid pressure.


CLS 477/193
TXT Device or means including a threaded shaft, rack, or ratchet:

    Subject matter under subclass 192 wherein said structure or device
    comprises (a) a cylindrical bar with a continuous helical rib projecting
    from the external surface which is engaged by interfitting projections on a
    member for transferring force, (b) a bar with notch or teeth projecting
    transversely from a longitudinal surface which is engaged by interfitting
    projections on a member for transferring force, or (c) a unidirectionally
    rotatable force transmitting member.


CLS 477/194
TXT Brake control having holding device, with means on engine control to
    override holding device:

    Subject matter under subclass 182 wherein regulating means for the brake*
    includes mechanism to set and lock the brake regulating means at a desired
    position; combined with apparatus to disengage the setting and locking
    mechanism simultaneously with regulation of the engine*.


CLS 477/195
TXT Holding device responsive to motion, speed, or acceleration:

    Subject matter under subclass 194 including means to detect movement,
    velocity or rate of change of velocity, and having an actuator responsive
    to such detection to effect operation of the locking mechanism.


CLS 477/196
TXT Holding device comprising brake valve operated by solenoid:

    Subject matter under subclass 195 wherein the brake* is regulated by fluid
    under pressure flowing through a passage, and the locking mechanism
    comprises a fluid restricting device within the passage movable between
    open, shut, or partially open positions by structure comprising a ferrous
    core moved longitudinally inside a cylindrical coil of wire by magnetic
    force generated by flow of electric current in the wire.


CLS 477/197
TXT Holding device engaged by electric means:

    Subject matter under subclass 194 comprising structure using electric
    current to actuate the locking mechanism.


CLS 477/198
TXT Holding device comprising brake valve operated by solenoid:

    Subject matter under subclass 197 wherein the brake* is regulated by fluid
    under pressure flowing through a passage, and the locking mechanism
    comprises a fluid restricting device within the passage movable between
    open, shut, or partially open positions by structure comprising a ferrous
    core moved longitudinally inside a cylindrical coil of wire by magnetic
    force generated by flow of electric current in the wire.


CLS 477/199
TXT Brake engaged when engine energy deactivated, brake disengaged when engine
    energy activated:

    Subject matter under subclass 182 wherein regulating means for the engine*
    is interrelated with regulating means for the brake* such that (a) when the
    brake* is in a force applying position to prevent movement, the provision
    of driving energy to the engine* is discontinued and (b) when the brake* is
    removed from a force applying position, driving energy to the engine* is
    provided.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21+,    when the engine is an electric motor.


CLS 477/200
TXT Internal combustion engine:

    Subject matter under subclass 199 wherein the driving energy for the
    engine* is a combustible material which is burned to expand within a
    combustion chamber to drive a piston in the chamber.


CLS 477/201
TXT Controls brake valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the regulating means for the
    brake* moves the brake* into an operating position by the action of fluid
    flowing through a passage, and the regulating means of the engine* operates
    a fluid restricting device in the passage between open, shut, and partially
    open positions.


CLS 477/202
TXT Vacuum actuated brake:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the fluid within the passage is
    at a lower pressure than the environment so that as pressure is selectively
    removed therefrom environmental pressure moves the brake* into a force
    applying position.


CLS 477/203
TXT Brake condition change modifies engine condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 182 wherein a variation of a characteristic
    of the brake* regulates the engine*.


CLS 477/204
TXT Brake actuation interrupts ignition circuit of fluid engine:

    Subject matter under subclass 203 wherein the engine* is of a  type
    requiring periodic ignition of a fluid by flow of electric current, and
    wherein movement of the brake* to a force applying position produces a
    discontinuity in the flow of electric current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101+,   for engine ignition control for transmission charge.


CLS 477/205
TXT Brake actuation decreases or eliminates fluid energy input to engine:

    Subject matter under subclass 203 wherein the engine* is driven by fluid
    energy, and wherein movement of the brake* into a force applying position
    causes engine* regulating means to reduce or exclude the quantity of
    driving fluid supplied to the engine.


CLS 477/206
TXT By closing throttle valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 205 wherein the regulating means of the
    engine* includes a drive fluid passage having a restrictor operable between
    open, shut, or partially open positions, and wherein movement of an element
    of  the brake*moves the restrict or from an open to a shut or partially
    open position.


CLS 477/207
TXT By preventing increasing operation of engine energy control:

    Subject matter under subclass 205 wherein the engine* regulating means
    increases or decreases the quantity of driving fluid to the engine*, and
    wherein actuation  of the brake* prohibits the engine regulating means from
    increasing the quantity of driving fluid supplied to the engine.


CLS 477/208
TXT Decreasing fluid energy input to engine actuates brake:

    Subject matter under subclass 182 wherein the engine* is driven by fluid
    energy and wherein engine regulating means varies the quantity of driving
    fluid passing to the engine*, and wherein operation of the regulating means
    to reduce the quantity of driving fluid to the engine also moves the brake*
    into a force applying position.


CLS 477/209
TXT Control means selectively operates engine energy input and brake:

    Subject matter under subclass 182 wherein interrelated engine* and brake*
    regulating means alternatively (a) varies an amount of driving energy
    supplied to the engine and (b) moves the brake* into a force applying or
    releasing position.

    (1)     Note.  The interrelated regulating means usually comprises (a)
    single working element moveable by a human operator for alternative
    regulation of the engine or the brake; or (b) plural working elements
    engage able by a human foot wherein the foot is moveable in more than one
    direction for alternative regulation of the engine or of the brake.


CLS 477/210
TXT Foot operated control means:

    Subject matter under subclass 209 wherein the interrelated engine* and
    brake* regulating means are caused to function by   engagement with the
    terminal part of a human leg; i.e., foot.


CLS 477/211
TXT Engine and brake control including interconnected elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein the interrelated engine* and
    brake* regulating means comprises working members which are attached to
    each other and are independently operated by separate engagement with the
    foot.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 478.5 for two foot operated
    controllers for separate systems.


CLS 477/212
TXT Pivots and translates:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein the interrelated engine* and
    brake* regulating means comprises a single member-engaged by the foot, and
    the member is alternatively or simultaneously (a) turned about a relatively
    fixed axis and (b) moved linearly; i.e., translated.


CLS 477/213
TXT Pivots about intermediate fulcrum:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 wherein the relatively fixed axis is
    located between the ends of the member such that either end of the member
    can be moved about the axis.


CLS 477/214
TXT Pivots about two fulcrums:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein the interrelated engine* and
    brake* regulating means comprises a single member engaged by the foot,
    which member is alternatively (a) turned about a first relatively fixed
    axis and (b) turned about a second relatively fixed axis.


CLS 477/215
TXT Pivots about intermediate fulcrum:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein the interrelated engine* and
    brake* regulating means comprises a single member engaged by the foot,
    which member is turned about a relatively fixed axis, and the axis is
    located between the ends of the member such that either end of the member
    can be moved about the axis.


CLS 477/216
TXT Lever reciprocates on moveable supports at both ends:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein the interrelated engine* and
    brake* regulating means comprises a single member engaged by the foot which
    member is alternatively moved back and forth on each displaceably held
    terminus.


CLS 477/217
TXT Pivots for sequential operation:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein the interrelated engine* and
    brake* regulating means comprise a single member engaged by the foot
    whereby force is applied at one end only to turn that member about a
    relatively fixed axis and whereby initial turning movement regulates one of
    the engine* or brake*, and continued rotation regulates the other of the
    engine* or brake*.


CLS 477/218
TXT Control means including fluid passage:

    Subject matter under subclass 209 wherein the interrelated engine* and
    brake* regulating means includes a flow  path for liquid or gas.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 477/900
TXT CONTROL SIGNAL IS VEHICLE WEIGHT:

    A collection of patents under the class definition wherein the total mass
    of the vehicle regulates a power delivery control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 290 for vehicle safety promotion
    responsive to weight.


CLS 477/901
TXT CONTROL SIGNAL IS SLOPE:

    A collection of patents under the class definition wherein the angle of
    inclination of the road surface regulates a power delivery control.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42      and 108, for cruise control responsive to slope.


CLS 477/902
TXT CONTROL SIGNAL IS ENGINE PARAMETER OTHER THAN MANIFOLD
     PRESSURE OR FUEL CONTROL:

    A collection of patents under the class definition wherein a condition of
    the engine other than manifold pressure or fuel control regulates a power
    delivery control.


CLS 477/903
TXT CONTROL SIGNAL IS STEERING:

    A collection of patents under the class definition wherein mean to change
    the direction of travel of a vehicle regulates a power delivery control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 421 for condition modulated steering.


CLS 477/904
TXT CONTROL SIGNAL IS ACCELERATION:

    A collection of patents under the class definition wherein the time rate of
    change of the velocity of an element regulates a power delivery control.


CLS 477/905
TXT Acceleration of throttle signal:

    A collection of patents under subclass 904 wherein the element is the
    throttling element of an internal combustion engine.


CLS 477/906
TXT MEANS DETECTING OR AMELIORATING THE EFFECTS OF MALFUNCTION OR POTENTIAL
    MALFUNCTION:

    A collection of patents under the class definition wherein means are
    provided for sensing an abnormal condition or potentially abnormal
    condition and neutralizing a consequence of the abnormal condition or
    potentially abnormal condition.


CLS 477/907
TXT Redundant:

    A collection of patents under collection 906 wherein duplicate means are
    provided to neutralize the effects of an abnormal or potentially abnormal
    condition.


CLS 477/908
TXT IN SERIES TRANSMISSION:

    A collection of patents under the class definition wherein two or more
    transmissions are in series and their power delivery controls are
    interrelated.



CLS 482/
TTL EXERCISE DEVICES

CLS 482/
TXT This class provides for apparatus intended to be operated by a human user
    for the purpose of:

    (a)     facilitating the conditioning or developing of a muscle of the user
    by repetitive or continuous activity of the user or,

    (b)     participating in a track, field, gymnastic, or athletic activity,

    unless by analogy of structure or by other function the apparatus is
    classified elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  In some of the definitions of subclasses hereunder, the
    phrase "significance is attributed" is used to describe a function that is
    the primary use of the structure of patents therein. The structure of the
    apparatus may be capable of use for other purposes, but the claimed
    disclosure of the patent so placed indicates the intended primary function
    of the structure as that described by the title and definition of the
    subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Apparatus claimed for measuring the amount of force exerted
    while exercising with a Class 482 type exercise apparatus is proper for
    Class 482.  Apparatus intended for use only in measuring the strength of an
    individual for a testing purpose or for measuring the strength of an
    individual while exercising but not claiming any positive exerciser
    structure is found in Class 73, Measuring and Testing, subclasses 379.01+
    or other appropriate location.  A reference claiming a diagnostic or other
    exercise measurement type feature, e.g., pulse monitoring, repetition
    counting, respiratory function, etc., in addition to strength testing or
    claiming a feature related to monitoring stamina would generally be
    classified in this class (482) unless a placement controlling claim
    directed solely to use as a diagnostic device is present thus making it
    proper for Class 600, Surgery, subclasses 300+.

    (3)     Note.  Patents placed into this class in accordance with part (a)
    of this definition clearly show that the disclosed purpose is to condition
    or develop the user's own body through active user involvement, i.e., not
    caused by external stimulation.  Apparatus operated by a person or machine
    to move the body of the user, i.e., passive user involvement, for a similar
    purpose are classified as originals in Class 601, Surgery:  Kinesitherapy,
    e.g., subclasses 23+.

    (4)     Note.  Conditioning or developing a muscle includes helping a user,
    e.g., an infant or invalid, to walk or learn how to walk unless provided
    for elsewhere (see the Search Class notes under subclass 51).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, particularly subclasses 379.01+ for a device
    for measuring and testing of muscular strength.  See (2) Note above.

    84,     Music, subclasses 465+ for an exercise device for a musician.

    104,    Railways, particularly subclass 62 for a railway vehicle traveling
    along a fixed track and used for physical training.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, for a mechanical signal or indicator, per
    se.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, particularly subclasses 29+ for an exercise
    device for an animal.

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, particularly subclasses 65+ for a
    cane, stick, crutch, swagger stick, walker, etc. used to aid human
    locomotion.  Also see the Search Class notes under subclass 51 below.

    280,    Land Vehicles, for a wheeled walker, skates, skis, bicycle, or
    other land vehicle having user propelling structure.  Also see the Search
    Class notes under subclass 51.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, particularly subclasses 5+ for a walker provided
    with a seat whereby the user may either stand or sit.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, particularly subclasses 573+ for an
    electrical alarm or indicator responsive to a condition of a human body or
    animal.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, particularly
    subclasses 410+ for a computer or data processing system related to
    athletics or amusement and subclasses 413.01+ for a computer or system used
    in relation to a living organism, e.g., patient monitoring or diagnostic,
    etc.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, particularly subclasses 258+ for a
    device used for developing or testing coordination.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, particularly subclasses 55+ for
    a swimming aid to increase stroke efficiency and subclasses 65+ for a water
    skimming or walking device.

    472,    Amusement Devices, for an amusement device in general and
    particularly subclasses 1+ for an amusement roundabout, subclasses 85+  for
    a race track or accessory therefor, subclasses 92+ for a surface or
    enclosure for an athletic or exhibition event and subclass 136 for an
    amusement building or part thereof.

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, for a device related to a contest
    of skill and where the result can be determined based upon a rule, and
    subclasses 441+, in particular, for a tackling or blocking dummy used in
    football practice

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 300+ for apparatus used for the medical
    evaluation of the condition of a living body by a diagnostician.

    601,    Surgery:  Kinesitherapy, subclasses 23+ for a passively used
    exercise device (also see (3) note above).


CLS 482/1
TXT HAVING SPECIFIC ELECTRICAL FEATURE:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the apparatus includes a
    particular electrical component or arrangement, e.g., operating,
    controlling, monitoring, or indication circuitry, etc.

    (1)     Note.  To be proper for placement in this subclass as an original
    classification, the exercise equipment must have a significantly claimed
    electrical feature.  A mere recitation of a named electrical feature such
    as "motorized", "electric", "electrically powered", "electrically
    monitored", "electrical indicator", or "lighted", would be excluded from
    this subclass if no further details are claimed.  A cross reference copy
    based upon a more complete disclosure could, of course, be provided.

    (2)     Note.  The electrical feature may include a computer or computer
    related circuitry, display, feedback, or software.


CLS 482/2
TXT Electrical energy generator:
    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the apparatus transforms input
    energy of the user into electrical power.

    (1)     Note.  The electrical energy generated may be either alternating or
    direct current, i.e., A.C. or D.C. The ultimate use of the electrical
    energy generated need not be claimed.


CLS 482/3
TXT Pace setting indicator:
    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the electrical component or
    arrangement supplies a periodic signal for informing the user of a
    desirable rate of activity.

    (1)     Note.  A pace setting indicator is often called a "pace setter"
    although no structure for actually controlling the rate of activity of the
    user or the equipment is provided.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6       and 7, for circuitry which regulates the rate of movement of the
    apparatus.


CLS 482/4
TXT Equipment control:
    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the electrical component or
    arrangement regulates some parameter of the apparatus.


CLS 482/5
TXT Amount of resistance:
    Subject matter under subclass 4 wherein the electrical component or
    arrangement quantitatively regulates a force applied in opposition to the
    user.

    (1)     Note.  The amount of resistance may be controlled directly by the
    user or via a feedback system.


CLS 482/6
TXT Regulates rate of movement:
    Subject matter under subclass 5 wherein the force applied in opposition to
    the user by the apparatus is used to govern the speed, or change in speed,
    i.e., acceleration, of the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  The rate of movement of the exercise equipment may be
    controlled directly by the user or via a feedback system by varying the
    amount of resistance.  This subclass also includes exercise equipment
    wherein any of a range of operating rates may be selected by a user
    manipulating an electrical control which then varies the amount of
    resistance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for electrical equipment controlling the rate of movement of the
    apparatus in a manner other than by varying the amount of resistance.


CLS 482/7
TXT Rate of movement:
    Subject matter under subclass 4 wherein the electrical component or
    arrangement regulates the speed, or change in speed, i.e., acceleration, of
    the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  The rate of movement of the exercise equipment may be
    controlled directly by the user or via a feedback system.  This subclass
    also includes exercise equipment wherein any of a range of operating rates
    may be selected by a user manipulating an electrical control.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for electrical equipment regulating the rate of movement of the
    apparatus by varying the amount of resistance opposing the user.


CLS 482/8
TXT Monitors exercise parameter:
    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a conditioning, developing, track,
    field, gymnastic, or athletic feature is measured or indicated by the
    electrical component or arrangement when the apparatus is operated by the
    user.

    (1)     Note.  The exercise parameter being monitored may include features
    such as the amount of work being done, force being exerted, repetitions
    completed, distance traveled, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, particularly subclasses 379.01+ for devices
    for measuring and testing of muscular strength.  See Class Definition, (2)
    Note.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, particularly subclasses  500+ for an
    electrical condition responsive indicator and subclasses 815.4+ for an
    electrical visual indicator, per se.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, particularly
    subclasses 410+ for a computer or data processing system related to
    athletics or amusement and subclasses 413.01+ for a computer or system used
    in relation to a living organism, e.g., patient monitoring or diagnostic,
    etc.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 481+ for apparatus used for the medical
    evaluation of the cardiovascular condition of a living body by a
    diagnostician.


CLS 482/9
TXT To create or modify exercise regimen:
    Subject matter under subclass 8 wherein the measurement or indication is
    used by the electrical component or arrangement to establish or change a
    system of (1) conditioning or developing of the muscle of the user or (2)
    participation in the track, field, gymnastic, or athletic activity.


CLS 482/10
TXT FOR HEAD OR NECK:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein significance is
    attributed to conditioning or developing a muscle found in the region above
    a shoulder of the user,  i.e., a head or neck muscle.


CLS 482/11
TXT Face (e.g., jaw, lip, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein significance is attributed to
    conditioning or developing a muscle found on a front part of the head of
    the user between the top of the forehead and the bottom of the chin, i.e.,
    a face muscle.


CLS 482/12
TXT FOR THRUSTING A POINTED WEAPON (E.G., A FENCING FOIL, ETC.) OR SIMULATION
    THEREOF:Subject matter under the class definition wherein significance is
    attributed to conditioning or developing a muscle employed while
    manipulating an instrument with a tapered end or an imitation thereof,
    which is shoved, tapered end foremost, towards an opponent.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for an exercise device involving
    thrusting apparatus such as a fencing foil, bayonet, spear, or similar
    piercing weapon or a simulation of such a weapon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, for a cutting implement such as a knife, foil, sword, or
    spear, per se.

    42,     Firearms, particularly subclass 86 for a firearm combined with a
    bayonet.

    463,    Amusement Devices: Games, particularly subclass 47.1 for fencing
    game apparatus and subclasses 47.2+ for a striking type of weapon for use
    on a human being (e.g., a police club, billy, etc.), which weapon being
    often used in a thrusting manner.


CLS 482/13
TXT FOR IMPROVING RESPIRATORY FUNCTION:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein significance is
    attributed to conditioning or developing a muscle required for breathing or
    using the lungs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 538+ for a respiratory exercise device which
    includes a quantitative indicator of breath flow or lung capacity disclosed
    as a diagnostic device used for medical evaluation of a living body by a
    diagnostician.


CLS 482/14
TXT FOR TRACK OR FIELD SPORT:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the apparatus is related
    to an athletic activity involving a measured running, jumping, or throwing
    event, i.e., a track or field sport.

    (1)     Note.  The athletic activities known as field sports were
    originally performed in an open field, although some of such activities are
    now performed in a closed arena.  Wherever performed, however, they include
    such measured activities as running over a distance, jumping over one or
    more barriers or over a distance, or throwing any of various pieces of
    named equipment. The structural differences between the equipment found in
    each of the named subclasses are not necessarily large differences, and
    equipment intended for a particular activity could be used for a different
    purpose; but the differences are significant when considered in light of
    the special requirements peculiar to each of the named activities for which
    the equipment is intended to be used.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for a device related to jogging in general, i.e., not related to
    running over a measured distance in a track or field sport.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, particularly subclasses 441+ for a game
    apparatus dealing with physical ability.

    472,    Amusement Devices, for an amusement device in general and
    particularly subclasses 85+  for a race track or accessory therefor,
    subclasses 92+ for a surface or enclosure for an athletic or exhibition
    event and subclass 136 for an amusement building or part thereof.


CLS 482/15
TXT Jumping, vaulting, or hurdling:
    Subject matter under subclass 14 wherein the apparatus is related to an
    event in which the user springs or leaps clear of the ground or other
    support by a sudden muscular effort.

    (1)     Note.  Included under this subclass is structure related to a
    landing pit or pad used when jumping, vaulting or hurdling.


CLS 482/16
TXT Crossbar or support therefor:
    Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein the apparatus includes (1) an
    elongated horizontal member over which the user leaps or (2) structure for
    holding the member above the ground or a floor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for a vaulting horse over which a user may acrobatically jump.


CLS 482/17
TXT Including height adjustment feature:
    Subject matter under subclass 16 wherein the apparatus is provided with
    structure whereby the vertical distance between the ground or floor and the
    horizontal member may be varied.


CLS 482/18
TXT Vaulting pole or stop:
    Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein the apparatus includes (1) an
    elongated slender rod intended to help a user thereof leap into the air or
    (2) a member, stationary with respect to the ground, intended to receive
    one end of the rod as the user is thereby helped to leap.

    (1)     Note.  The user is usually vaulting over a horizontal bar.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for a structurally similar flexible pole secured to the ground and
    used for gymnastic exercise.


CLS 482/19
TXT Starting block for runner:
    Subject matter under subclass 14 wherein the apparatus includes a member
    securable to the surface of an athletic track for use as an abutment to
    facilitate a fast start from a starting line by the user in a foot race.

    (1)     Note. The starting block may permit quick disconnection and removal
    thereof from the track by a person other than the runner using it, thus
    helping to avoid any obstruction to the runner in a multilap event.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for a jogging accessory used when not running over a measured
    distance in a track or field sport.


CLS 482/20
TXT Throwing:
    Subject matter under subclass 14 wherein the apparatus is related to an
    event in which an object is flung or hurled by the user.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is an elongated, spearlike object,
    e.g., a javelin, an elongated rope or chain having at one end thereof a
    relatively heavy object, e.g., a hammer, etc., and a ground or floor
    supported member used to limit foot placement when throwing the object,
    e.g., a toe board, etc.


CLS 482/21
TXT Discus:
    Subject matter under subclass 20 wherein the flung or hurled object is a
    circular plate having a diameter that is relatively large compared to its
    thickness, i.e., a discus.


CLS 482/22
TXT Shot-put:
    Subject matter under subclass 20 wherein the flung or hurled object is a
    heavy spheroid, i.e., a shot.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, for a ball used in a game or
    sport, particularly subclasses 52+ for a ball used in the game of billiards
    or pool, subclasses 125+ for a ball used in the game of bowling, subclasses
    280+ for a projectile used to practice for the game of golf, subclasses
    351+ for a golf ball, subclasses 422+ for a projectile used to practice or
    train for a playing field or court game, and subclasses 569+ for a game
    projectile (often a ball), in general.


CLS 482/23
TXT GYMNASTIC:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein significance is
    attributed to the use of the apparatus for an acrobatic purpose by the user.

    (1)     Note.  The terms "gymnastic" and "acrobatic" have come to denote
    and describe various pieces of equipment such as a trapeze, bar, vaulting
    horse, diving board, trampoline, etc., that are used in physical activities
    known by similar names.  These activities are characterized by extreme
    movements of the user, who uses the equipment as a fulcrum or starting area
    to launch bodily through space, swing therefrom, or perform other such
    physical activity thereon.  The significance of the apparatus is more in
    the activity for which the apparatus is used than in the structural
    differences between the apparatus (see the Class Definition, (1) Note).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109,    for a club type exercise device which may be used for juggling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, particularly subclasses 441+ for a game
    apparatus dealing with physical ability.


CLS 482/24
TXT Trapeze or rings:
    Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein the acrobatic apparatus is either
    (1) a short, horizontal, swingable bar suspended at each end by a flaccid
    strand, e.g., a rope, etc., or (2) a pair of annular objects each suspended
    by a flaccid strand, e.g., a rope, etc., about which the user may move in
    an acrobatic manner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143+,   for a suspension device from which the user may freely hang.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclasses 118+ for an amusement
    swing.


CLS 482/25
TXT Vaulting or pommel horse:
    Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein the acrobatic apparatus is (1) a
    supported body used for jumping over or for another acrobatic purpose,
    i.e., a vaulting horse or (2) a supported body with a pair of handles
    mounted thereon for an acrobatic purpose, i.e., a pommel horse.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16+,    for a track or field sport in which a user jumps, vaults, or
    hurdles over a crossbar.

    34,     for a bar or rope for balancing upon.

    38+,    for a horizontal bar used for a gymnasts purpose.


CLS 482/26
TXT Projector:
    Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein the acrobatic apparatus is used to
    thrust the user  toward other acrobatic apparatus or into the air to help
    enhance movement by the user, e.g., in somersaulting, flipping, diving,
    bouncing, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    182,    Fire Escape, Ladder, or Scaffold, subclasses 137+ for a fire escape
    type body catcher having similar structure.


CLS 482/27
TXT Trampoline:
    Subject matter under subclass 26 wherein the acrobatic apparatus employs a
    strong, taut, flexible sheet of resiliently supported material to thrust
    the user into the air usually in a bouncing manner.

    (1)     Note.  Jogging trampolines are included under this subclass.


CLS 482/28
TXT Having foldable frame:
    Subject matter under subclass 27 wherein the flexible sheet of material is
    resiliently supported on a framework which can be bent over for more
    compact storage of the apparatus or for use of the apparatus in a different
    manner.


CLS 482/29
TXT With disparate structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 27 wherein an element, not directly related
    to the resiliently supported flexible sheet type apparatus or its support
    structure, is additionally provided for use therewith or as an enhancement
    thereof.


CLS 482/30
TXT Spring board:
    Subject matter under subclass 26 wherein the thrusting acrobatic apparatus
    is a thin, elongated, planar member secured near one end and cantilevered
    outwardly therefrom for propelling the user by employing either the
    resilient material of the planar member itself or a separate resilient
    element associated therewith.


CLS 482/31
TXT Spring external to board:
    Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein the thin planar member is provided
    with a separate resilient element to produce its thrust.


CLS 482/32
TXT Movable fulcrum:
    Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein the thin planar member pivots or
    bends about a support which is repositionable at plural locations between
    the secured end of the thin planar member and its cantilevered end to vary
    the amount of cantilever.


CLS 482/33
TXT Tower or pole for swinging upon:
    Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein the acrobatic apparatus is an
    upright, elongated, slender framework or rod with its bottom end held in
    place while its opposite end serves as a support for the user and is
    capable of oscillating back and forth as desired by the user.

    (1)     Note.  A tower or pole used for swinging upon with its bottom end
    held in place by another person is proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for a structurally similar flexible pole used to help launch a pole
    vaulter over a high bar.


CLS 482/34
TXT Bar or rope for balancing upon:
    Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein the acrobatic apparatus is an
    elongated, solid or flaccid, underlying member on which the user attempts
    to support and maintain the center of gravity of his/her body in a state of
    equilibrium.


CLS 482/35
TXT Play area climbing or traversing arrangement (i.e., for use by
    children):Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein the acrobatic apparatus
    is a structure mounted on a playground or floor for ascending, descending,
    or moving laterally upon by a juvenile user for his/her enjoyment.

    (1)     Note.  The combination of a play area climbing or traversing
    arrangement with a seesaw, slide, or swing is proper for this subclass
    where significance is attributed to the climbing or traversing structure.
    A mere ladder, set of steps, etc. used to climb onto a slide is not
    considered significant under this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for acrobatic apparatus which a user of any age may ascend or
    descend upon primarily by using an arm or hand.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclasses 106+ for a seesaw,
    subclasses 116+ for a slide, or subclasses 118+ for a swing, used for an
    amusement purpose.


CLS 482/36
TXT Having upright array of horizontally extending elements:
    Subject matter under subclass 35 wherein the structure for ascending,
    descending, or moving laterally upon includes a relatively vertical group
    of runglike components supported in a position perpendicular to vertical,
    i.e., horizontal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclasses 116+ for a slide having
    a mere ladder, set of steps, etc. used to climb upon the slide.


CLS 482/37
TXT Arm or hand type climbing arrangement:
    Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein the acrobatic apparatus is
    structure which the user may ascend or descend upon primarily by using an
    upper limb or terminal gripping portion of the user, i.e., an arm or hand.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35+,    for a play area climbing or traversing arrangement for a juvenile
    user.

    38,     for a horizontal bar used for an acrobatic purpose other than
    climbing.

    52+,    for stair climbing type exercise equipment.

    143+,   for a support of a nonacrobatic nature for suspending the user.


CLS 482/38
TXT Horizontal bar:
    Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein the acrobatic apparatus is a rod
    supported in a position perpendicular to vertical, i.e., horizontal.

    (1)     Note.  A horizontal chinning bar is proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15+,    for a jumping, vaulting or hurdling track or field device often
    including a horizontal member.

    34,     for a bar or rope for balancing upon.

    35+,    for a play area climbing or traversing arrangement often including
    a horizontal bar.

    37,     for an arm or hand type climbing arrangement often including a
    horizontal bar.


CLS 482/39
TXT Attached to vertical wall or associated structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 38 wherein the horizontal rod is supported by
    a portion of an upright planar construction, e.g., a room partition, side
    surface, etc., or related construction thereto, e.g., a door, window, jamb,
    etc.


CLS 482/40
TXT Door or door jamb:
    Subject matter under subclass 39 wherein the horizontal rod is supported by
    a movable closure mounted in a walk through passageway in the upright
    planar construction or by framing structure for surrounding a walk through
    passageway.


CLS 482/41
TXT Parallel bars:
    Subject matter under subclass 38 wherein the acrobatic apparatus includes a
    plurality of horizontal stationary rods spaced an equal distance apart from
    each other at all locations along their lengths.

    (1)     Note.  Horizontal, parallel dip bars are proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for a gymnastic horse having parallel pommel handles.


CLS 482/42
TXT Separately adjustable:
    Subject matter under subclass 41 wherein one of the stationary rods is
    movable to a different stationary position such that the equal distance is
    maintained.


CLS 482/43
TXT Harness for supporting user:
    Subject matter under subclass 38 wherein the acrobatic apparatus includes a
    strap, belt, or yokelike structure for holding the user while performing
    acrobatically on the horizontal rod.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    54,     Harness, for animal harnesses for a draft purpose alone or also
    having a breaking and training purpose.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, particularly subclasses 856+ and 907 for an
    animal harness in general.


CLS 482/44
TXT HAND, WRIST, OR FINGER:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein significance is
    attributed to conditioning or developing a muscle found in a region beyond
    a forearm of the user, i.e., a hand, wrist, or finger muscle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, subclasses 465+ for an exercise device for a musician.


CLS 482/45
TXT Involving wrist rotation:
    Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein a wrist must be moved in a turning
    motion to operate the apparatus.


CLS 482/46
TXT About axis perpendicular to forearm:
    Subject matter under subclass 45 wherein the wrist turning motion is around
    a rotational axis situated at approximately a right angle to an arm portion
    adjacent to the wrist being conditioned or developed.


CLS 482/47
TXT Having individual structure engaging each finger used:
    Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein the apparatus includes a separate
    component or portion for contacting and cooperating with each finger being
    employed.

    (1)     Note.  While plural fingers are normally used and engaged, a single
    finger alone may be used and engaged.


CLS 482/48
TXT Finger loop:
    Subject matter under subclass 47 wherein the separate component or portion
    encircles the finger being used in a ringlike manner.


CLS 482/49
TXT Grip:
    Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein the apparatus includes structure
    intended to be operated by the hand of the user for conditioning or
    developing a muscle used for grasping.


CLS 482/50
TXT Having weight feature (e.g., dumbbell, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein the grasp conditioning or
    developing structure further includes a part or portion which conditions or
    develops a muscle by providing a user opposing force derived from the force
    that gravity exerts upon its mass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93+,    for user manipulated weights in general and subclass 108, in
    particular, for a dumbbell, per se.


CLS 482/51
TXT INVOLVING USER TRANSLATION OR PHYSICAL SIMULATION THEREOF:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the apparatus is used to
    condition or develop a muscle employed as the user travels a distance or
    the user imitates bodily traveling a distance.

    (1)     Note.  The user may travel, or imitate traveling, the distance on
    foot, e.g., by walking, hopping, jogging, etc., in the water, e.g., by
    swimming, etc., or by using travel enhancing apparatus, e.g., snow or water
    skis, skates, bicycles, rowboats, surfboards, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Conditioning or developing a muscle includes helping the
    user, e.g., an infant, ambulant invalid, or novice to walk, ski, skate,
    etc., or learn how to walk, ski, skate, etc., unless provided for elsewhere
    (see Search notes below).

    (3)     Note.  See the Class Definition and the Search Class notes
    thereunder of Class 297, Chairs and Seats, for the line between that class
    and Class 280, Land Vehicles, regarding related apparatus found in those
    classes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14+,    for a device related to running over a measured distance in a track
    or field sport.

    27+,    for a trampoline used in gymnastics or for jogging in place.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, particularly subclass 62 for a rail guided vehicle
    traveling along a fixed track and used for physical training.

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, particularly subclasses 65+ for a
    cane, stick, crutch or the like designed to aid in human locomotion or to
    similar structure in umbrella shafts and swagger sticks when useful for
    aiding human locomotion and subclass 67 for a walker, per se, (i.e., an aid
    to locomotion which is a free standing support, having two handles by which
    it is gripped and is operated by lifting from, moving across and replacing
    on the ground, floor, etc., and which does not have a seat, path control,
    or propulsion facilitating means, e.g., wheels, casters, etc.).

    280,    Land Vehicles, particularly subclasses 7.1+ for a walker vehicle
    propelled by a seated occupant and convertible to a different device, e.g.,
    a stroller, etc., subclasses 43+ for a walker having retractable wheels,
    subclasses 87.021+ for  a wheeled, weight bearing, walker propelled by
    contact of a hand or foot of an occupant with a surface over which the
    walker travels and which is unrestricted as to path, except by a wheel or
    wheel mounting, subclasses 200+ for a wheeled vehicle having other types of
    positive propelling means, subclasses 638+ for a wheeled vehicle which
    allows a physical dimension thereof to vary, e.g., a folding vehicle, etc.,
    subclasses 809+ for a skier or skater appliance or attachment including a
    hand held ski pole and subclasses 841+ for a skate or ski, per se.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, particularly subclasses 5+ for a walker provided
    with a seat whereby the user may either stand or sit.  The seat may be
    occupied for resting between successive exercising periods of walking,
    skiing, skating, etc., and may include a mere recitation of wheels or
    running gear.  See (3) Note above.

    472,    Amusement Devices, subclasses 14+ for an occupant propelled
    roundabout device which carries the occupant along a circuitous path and
    which can enable the occupant to simulate travelling a distance, even if
    for an exercise purpose, subclass 48 for an amusement walkway or passageway
    having a movable floor or stair step, subclasses 85+  for a race track or
    accessory therefor, subclasses 92+ for a surface or enclosure for an
    athletic or exhibition event, subclass 127 for a body supporting simulated
    log rolling device, i.e., a birling device, subclass 130 for an aircraft or
    space vehicle amusement simulation or simulation of the movement thereof
    and subclass 136 for an amusement building or part thereof.


CLS 482/52
TXT Stair climbing:
    Subject matter under subclass 51 wherein significance is attributed to
    conditioning or developing a muscle employed as the user ascends or
    descends a set of steps or operates apparatus which imitates ascending or
    descending a set of steps.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35+,    for a play area climbing or traversing arrangement for a juvenile
    user.

    37,     for arm or hand type climbing arrangement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclass 48 for an amusement
    walkway or passageway having a movable floor or stair step.


CLS 482/53
TXT Utilizing fluid resistance:
    Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein a liquid or a gas is used to apply
    a force in opposition to the muscle of the user.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for bicycle riding type exercise apparatus using fluid resistance
    to apply a force in opposition to a muscle of the user.

    73,     for rowing type exercise apparatus using fluid resistance to apply
    a force in opposition to a muscle of the user.

    112+,   for a user manipulated, force resisting apparatus utilizing
    hydraulic or pneumatic force resistance and employing a confined liquid or
    gas.


CLS 482/54
TXT Treadmill for foot travel:
    Subject matter under subclass 51 wherein the muscle conditioning or
    developing apparatus is a movable surface, e.g., a roller, endless belt,
    etc., upon which the user may walk or run while remaining in essentially
    the same location relative to a fixed supporting surface, e.g., a floor,
    etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclass 48 for an amusement
    walkway or passageway having a movable floor or stair step and subclasses
    90+ for a surface for a skiing or a skating vehicle, e.g., for skis, ice or
    roller skates, etc., including a sloped treadmill used to imitate a ski
    slope.


CLS 482/55
TXT Swimming:
    Subject matter under subclass 51 wherein significance is attributed to
    conditioning or developing a muscle employed as the user directly propels
    his/her body through water, i.e., by swimming, or operates a mechanism
    which imitates swimming.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for a projector, e.g., a diving board, etc., which may be employed
    to thrust the user into the air for an acrobatic purpose.

    111,    for user manipulated force resisting apparatus using fluid
    resistance to oppose the user.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, particularly subclasses 55+ for
    a swimming aid to increase stroke efficiency.


CLS 482/56
TXT Out of water type:
    Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein the conditioning or developing of
    the muscle occurs without the user needing to enter any body of water.


CLS 482/57
TXT Bicycling:
    Subject matter under subclass 51 wherein significance is attributed to
    conditioning or developing a muscle employed as the user propels a tandem
    wheeled vehicle by foot pedals, i.e., pedals a bicycle, or operates
    apparatus which imitates foot pedaling a bicycle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115+,   for a frictional, user manipulated, force resisting apparatus
    having a rotating or arcuately oscillating member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, particularly subclasses 200+ for a bicycle, per se.

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclass 21 for an occupant
    propelled roundabout employing an occupant bearing travel wheel driven by
    crank structure, e.g., a pedaled cycle, etc.


CLS 482/58
TXT Utilizing fluid resistance:
    Subject matter under subclass 57 wherein a liquid or a gas is used to apply
    a force in opposition to the muscle of the user.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for stair climbing type exercise apparatus using fluid resistance
    to apply a force in opposition to a muscle of the user.

    73,     for rowing type exercise apparatus using fluid resistance to apply
    a force in opposition to a muscle of the user.

    111+,   for a user manipulated, force resisting apparatus using fluid
    resistance to oppose the user.


CLS 482/59
TXT Gas:
    Subject matter under subclass 58 wherein matter in a gaseous state, e.g.,
    air, etc., is used to apply the opposing force.


CLS 482/60
TXT Completely detached from user support:
    Subject matter under subclass 57 wherein the apparatus for conditioning or
    developing a muscle is entirely separate from any structure used to hold
    the user when operating the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  The user support need not be claimed and often consists of a
    chair, bed, floor, etc.


CLS 482/61
TXT Stand for converting bicycle:
    Subject matter under subclass 57 wherein a self supporting apparatus is
    used to support a bicycle type vehicle in a substantially spaced
    relationship to a generally horizontal supporting surface, e.g., a floor,
    etc., thus transforming the bicycle from a transporting vehicle into a
    relatively stationary apparatus for conditioning or developing a muscle of
    the user.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, particularly subclasses 127+ for a stand in general.

    280,    Land Vehicles, particularly subclasses 1.188, 7.1+, 30+, and 47.18
    for a land vehicle convertible to another device.


CLS 482/62
TXT Including upper body exercise feature:
    Subject matter under subclass 57 wherein structure for conditioning or
    developing a muscle located above the waist of the user is provided.

    (1)     Note.  While a muscle above the waist of the user may be somewhat
    involved in pedaling a bicycle, this subclass provides for exercising such
    a muscle in excess of what would be required by a bicycle foot pedaling
    motion alone.


CLS 482/63
TXT Utilizing specific resistance generating structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 57 wherein the force for opposing the user is
    derived through a particular force opposing component.

    (1)     Note.  Details of the resistance generating structure must be
    positively claimed for proper document classification herein as an original.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58+,    for similar apparatus which uses a liquid or gas to apply a user
    opposing force.


CLS 482/64
TXT Flywheel with braking band:
    Subject matter under subclass 63 wherein the particular force opposing
    component consists of a user propelled rotating wheel with a heavy rim
    having a circumferential edge in direct frictional engagement with a thin,
    elongated strip of flexible material.


CLS 482/65
TXT Wheel with edge engaging braking roller:
    Subject matter under subclass 63 wherein the particular force opposing
    component consists of a user propelled ring or disk, e.g., a tire,
    flywheel, etc., revolving about its central axis being radially and
    forcefully engaged along its circumferential edge by a round member
    revolving about an axis parallel to that of the ring or disk.


CLS 482/66
TXT Occupant propelled support frame having movement facilitating feature for
    foot travel:Subject matter under subclass 51 wherein the apparatus is a
    user relocatable, body holding assemblage including structure, e.g., a
    runner, caster, etc., for easing the relocation of the entire assemblage as
    the user moves along a land or floor surface in a step by step manner,
    e.g., in a walking or skating manner, etc.

    (1)     Note.  See the Search Class notes under subclass 51 of this class
    for other classes containing occupant propelled apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57+,    for apparatus propelled by the user through the use of foot pedals.

    69,     for a device which suspends the user from above and in which the
    user may propel himself along, but in which the entire supporting
    assemblage is not propelled by the user.

    72+,    for apparatus propelled by the user through the use of oars.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclass 15 for a trainer for foot
    travel, e.g., walking, skating, etc., limited to travel along a circuitous
    path, even if for an exercise purpose (see (2) Note of subclass 51 above).


CLS 482/67
TXT Armpit engaging:
    Subject matter under subclass 66 wherein the user body holding assemblage
    contacts an area under an arm at its connection to the body of the user.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, subclass 411.1 for an armpit engaging body rest
    for supporting a seated occupant.


CLS 482/68
TXT Rolling:
    Subject matter under subclass 66 wherein the relocation easing structure
    rotates as it is used.

    (1)     Note.  See the Class Definition and the Search Class notes
    thereunder of Class 297, Chairs and Seats, for the line between that class
    and Class 280, Land Vehicles, regarding related apparatus found in those
    classes.  Furthermore, a wheeled occupant propelled support frame used
    merely to stabilize or catch the occupant but never used to routinely
    support the weight of the occupant is not proper for Class 280 and is found
    in this subclass unless seat structure for Class 297 or roundabout
    structure for Class 472, Amusement Devices, is claimed thus causing
    classification therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     for an armpit engaging occupant propelled frame which may have
    rolling, propulsion facilitating structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, particularly subclasses 7.1+ for a walker vehicle
    propelled by a seated occupant and convertible to a different device, e.g.,
    a stroller, etc., subclasses 43+ for a walker having retractable wheels,
    subclasses 87.021+ for  a wheeled, weight bearing, walker propelled by
    contact of a hand or foot of an occupant with a surface over which the
    walker travels and which is unrestricted as to path, except by a wheel or
    wheel mounting.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, particularly subclasses 5+ for a walker provided
    with a seat whereby the user may either stand or sit.  The seat may be
    occupied for resting between successive exercising periods of walking,
    skiing, skating, etc., and may include a mere recitation of wheels or
    running gear.  See (1) Note above.

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclass 15 for an occupant
    propelled roundabout type trainer for foot travel, e.g., walking, skating,
    etc.


CLS 482/69
TXT Occupant suspended from above (e.g., by a body harness, etc.) for foot
    travel:Subject matter under subclass 51 wherein the user is supported in a
    hanging manner by structure positioned overhead as the user moves along a
    land or floor surface in a step by step manner, e.g., in a walking or
    skating manner, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66+,    for an occupant propelled frame which may suspend the occupant from
    above and in which the user propels the entire frame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclass 15 for a trainer for foot
    travel, e.g., walking, skating, etc., limited to travel along a circuitous
    path, even if for an exercise purpose (see (2) Note of subclass 51 above).


CLS 482/70
TXT Having separate foot engaging members reciprocating on parallel guide
    tracks, e.g., Nordic skiing simulator, etc.:Subject matter under subclass
    51 wherein the apparatus includes a pair of individual user foot contacting
    elements separately capable of controlled movement back and forth along a
    set of evenly spaced rail-like elements.

    (1)     Note.  The separate reciprocating foot engaging members permit the
    legs of the user to alternately move in a back and forth motion, e.g., to
    imitate leg motion necessary to propel a user when Nordic (cross country)
    skiing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for apparatus which may simulate Alpine (downhill) or towed, e.g.,
    water, etc., skiing in which the user provides only insignificant
    propelling force.  See the (1) Note thereunder.

    72,     for apparatus which may include track guided foot engaging members
    which must reciprocate in unison while simulating rowing a boat.


CLS 482/71
TXT Alpine or towed skiing:
    Subject matter under subclass 51 wherein significance is attributed to
    conditioning or developing a muscle employed as the user  rides a pair of
    long, flat, foot-attached runners and glides over a land or water surface
    while being propelled primarily by an external pulling force, e.g.,
    gravity, a pulling vehicle, etc., or operates apparatus which simulates
    such riding and gliding.

    (1)     Note.  The user generally only provides insignificant propelling
    thrust, e.g., for starting down a ski slope, for positioning prior to, or
    immediately after, skiing down a ski slope, etc.  Nordic (cross country)
    skiing, or the simulation thereof, which involves significant user
    generated propulsion, is thereby excluded from this subclass.  If a patent
    related to skiing exercise is silent as to the type of propulsion involved,
    it may be placed in this subclass, if not provided for in a subclass above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66+,    for an occupant propelled support frame having a movement
    facilitating feature and which may be used when skiing or simulating skiing.

    69,     for apparatus for suspending an occupant from above, e.g., a body
    harness, etc., which may be used when skiing or simulating skiing.

    70,     for apparatus having separate foot engaging members for
    reciprocating on parallel guide tracks in a manner similar to Nordic (cross
    country) skiing.

    146,    for a swivelled foot platform which supports the entire body of the
    user.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, particularly subclasses 601+ for snow ski apparatus
    and subclass 842 for a skate type vehicle intended to simulate skiing over
    snow but used on dry land.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, particularly subclasses 68+ for
    water ski apparatus.

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclasses 88+ for a surface for a
    skating or skiing vehicle, e.g., for skis, ice or roller skates, etc.


CLS 482/72
TXT Rowing:
    Subject matter under subclass 51 wherein significance is attributed to
    conditioning or developing a muscle employed as the user propels a boat
    through water with oars, i.e., rows, or operates apparatus which imitates
    rowing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for apparatus having separate foot engaging members for
    reciprocating on parallel guide tracks.


CLS 482/73
TXT Utilizing fluid resistance:
    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein a liquid or gas is used to apply a
    force in opposition to the user.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for a stair climbing type exercise apparatus using fluid resistance
    to apply a force in opposition to the user.

    58+,    for a bicycle type exercise apparatus using fluid resistance to
    apply a force in opposition to the user.

    111+,   for user manipulated force resisting apparatus utilizing fluid
    resistance to oppose the user.


CLS 482/74
TXT Jogging accessory:
    Subject matter under subclass 51 wherein significance is attributed to
    apparatus used to supplement or enhance the conditioning or developing of a
    muscle employed as the user runs.

    (1)     Note.  A weight worn or carried while running should not be
    classified as an original in this subclass since a weight of this type is
    frequently used for a wide variety of nonrunning exercises.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14+,    for apparatus involving running over a measured distance in a track
    or field sport, particularly subclass 19 for a starting block for a runner.

    27+,    for a trampoline which may be used for jogging in place.

    54,     for a treadmill which may be used to help simulate jogging.

    93+,    for weights which may be carried while jogging, particularly
    subclass 105 for weights worn on the body while exercising, e.g., jogging,
    etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, for a water bottle, per se, without any exercise
    enhancing feature.

    222,    Dispensing, for a water dispensing container, per se, without any
    exercise enhancing feature.


CLS 482/75
TXT Elevated walking device (e.g., stilts, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 51 wherein the apparatus separately supports
    each foot at a height above the ground as the user moves about in a step by
    step manner, e.g.,walking on a pair of long, foot supporting poles, etc.

    (1)     Note.  While the intended use of this type of apparatus is not
    always clearly set forth as being exercise, the apparatus has been
    historically considered to be a form of exercise or athletic device which,
    by its nature, often makes exercising more enjoyable.  A body attached
    stilt, regardless of intended use, is not proper for this subclass since it
    is provided for elsewhere (see the Search Class notes below).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for a device which often elevates a user and upon which the user
    bounces about a supporting surface, e.g., ground, floor, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, particularly subclasses 65+ for a
    cane, stick, crutch, or other walking aid.

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefore, subclasses 28+ for a body attached stilt.


CLS 482/76
TXT Stilt having specific step:
    Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein a long, foot supporting pole has
    attached thereto, a particular foot engaging, support member.

    (1)     Note.  To be proper for placement in this subclass as an original
    classification, the exercise equipment must have a significantly claimed
    step feature.  A mere recitation of a named step feature would be excluded
    from this subclass if no further details are claimed.  A cross reference
    copy based upon a more complete disclosure could, of course, be provided.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 243+ and 295.11+ for a device relating to a
    stilt step but of wide application as an adjustable bracket.


CLS 482/77
TXT Bouncing device:
    Subject matter under subclass 51 whereby the apparatus supports the user
    for bounding about on a supporting surface, e.g., ground, floor, etc.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for apparatus whose primary purpose
    is bouncing exercise.  Movement over the ground, floor, etc., is often in
    random directions as, for example, when a child sits on a large ball type
    apparatus and bounces vertically while moving randomly about in a
    horizontal direction.

    (2)     Note.  While the intended use of this type of apparatus is not
    always clearly set forth as being exercise, the apparatus has been
    historically considered to be a form of exercise or athletic device which,
    by its nature, often makes exercising more enjoyable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121+,   for a resilient, user manipulated, force resisting apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    297,    Chairs and Seats, particularly subclasses 274+ for an oscillating
    baby jumper type suspending apparatus.

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclass 135 for an occupant
    operated bouncing device wherein user translation over a floor or ground
    surface is limited by the device.


CLS 482/78
TXT User inside device:
    Subject matter under subclass 51 wherein the apparatus is large enough to
    substantially enclose the body of the user within its boundaries, while the
    user causes movement of the apparatus over a supporting surface, e.g.,
    ground, floor, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 206+ for a wheeled land vehicle operated
    with by a user located within the wheel and used primarily for travel.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, subclass 78 for a spheroidal or
    wheel-like water walking device which encircles a user and is used
    primarily for travel.


CLS 482/79
TXT FOR FOOT OR ANKLE:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein significance is
    attributed to conditioning or developing a muscle found in a region below a
    shin of the user, i.e., a foot or ankle muscle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146,    for a swivelled foot platform which supports the entire body of the
    user and is not significantly limited to conditioning or developing a
    muscle of the foot or ankle.


CLS 482/80
TXT Foot pedal pivots about single horizontal axis:
    Subject matter under subclass 79 wherein the foot or ankle muscle is
    conditioned or developed by using a foot engaging lever which swings about
    a lone axial region which is perpendicular to vertical, i.e., about a
    single horizontal axis.


CLS 482/81
TXT SKIPPING:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the user leaps over
    moving apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  While the intended use of this type of apparatus is not
    always clearly set forth as being exercise, the apparatus has been
    historically considered to be a form of exercise or athletic device which,
    by its nature, often makes exercising more enjoyable.


CLS 482/82
TXT Handheld jump rope:
    Subject matter under subclass 81 wherein the moving apparatus includes a
    flaccid, hand supported, line member swung in an arcuate path over the head
    and under a leaping foot of the user.

    (1)     Note.  The hands supporting the apparatus need not be those of the
    user.

    (2)     Note.  The line member may include a rigid portion or series of
    rigid portions, e.g., a chain, etc., as long as the member as a whole acts
    in a flaccid manner.


CLS 482/83
TXT STRIKING:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a muscle of the user is
    conditioned or developed by hitting the apparatus.


CLS 482/84
TXT Having indicator:
    Subject matter under subclass 83 wherein the apparatus includes structure
    for displaying a measure of intensity of user muscle conditioning or
    developing, e.g., quantity, quality, etc.

    (1)     Note.  In the Class Definition above see, (2) Note. for the line
    with Class 73, Measuring and Testing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for an exercise device including an electrical indicator.

    909,    for a mechanical indicator art collection having structure for
    displaying some exercise parameter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, particularly subclasses 379.01+ for a device
    for measuring and testing of muscular strength.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, for a mechanical signal or indicator, per
    se.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, particularly subclasses 573+ for an
    electrical alarm or indicator responsive to a condition of a human body or
    animal.


CLS 482/85
TXT Having bottom weighted rocker support:
    Subject matter under subclass 83 wherein the apparatus includes a heavy,
    rounded, ground engaging base portion which permits the apparatus to sway
    back and forth when hit by the user.


CLS 482/86
TXT Multidirectionally movable bag or pad:
    Subject matter under subclass 83 wherein the apparatus being hit is a
    filled flexible pouch or cushioned structure which, when hit, is capable of
    movement along a variety of paths depending on the alignment of the hit.


CLS 482/87
TXT Specifically supported:
    Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein the flexible pouch or cushioned
    structure is held or suspended by particular holding or suspending
    structure.

    (1)     Note.  To be proper for placement in this subclass as an original
    classification, a significant support feature must be claimed.  A mere
    recitation of a named support feature would be excluded from this subclass
    if no further details are claimed.  A cross reference copy based upon a
    more complete disclosure could, of course, be provided.


CLS 482/88
TXT On a person:
    Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein the holding or suspending
    structure is mounted on either the user or another human being, e.g., a
    sparring partner, etc.


CLS 482/89
TXT From connections above and below:
    Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein the holding or suspending
    structure is directly attached to the flexible pouch or cushioned structure
    at both upper and lower portions thereof.

    (1)     Note.  A bag or pad directly supported at only one location or
    elevation but indirectly supported through other supporting structure which
    is located both above and below it, e.g., floor and ceiling mounted support
    structure, etc., is excluded from this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for a bag or pad attached at multiple points to a user or other
    person, e.g.,a sparring partner, etc.


CLS 482/90
TXT By floor or ground only:
    Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein the holding or suspending
    structure rests on or is attached to an underlying horizontal surface,
    e.g., a floor or the ground, etc., alone.


CLS 482/91
TXT ISOMETRIC:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the human user applies
    pressure against apparatus which is in a stationary dynamic state and
    wherein the pressure of the user does not change the state.

    (1)     Note.  In using the isometric apparatus, the user exerts force by
    contraction of muscles, but does not move the apparatus except to an
    insignificant degree required to take up slack.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131+,   for a user manipulated force resisting apparatus which utilizes
    force resistance generated by the user alone.


CLS 482/92
TXT USER MANIPULATED FORCE RESISTING APPARATUS, COMPONENT THEREOF, OR ACCESSORY
    THEREFOR:Subject matter under the class definition (a) wherein the human
    user maneuvers pressure opposing structure by exerting an operating
    pressure thereupon to facilitate conditioning or developing of a muscle or
    (b) consisting of an essential part of, or adjunct used with, such pressure
    opposing structure.

    (1)     Note.  A component of a force resisting apparatus or an accessory
    used with an unclaimed or nominally claimed force resisting apparatus is
    classified with the particular type of force resisting apparatus disclosed
    unless specifically provided for elsewhere hereunder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93+,    for a belt or harness disclosed for use when lifting a weight,
    particularly subclass 106 if disclosed for use when lifting a barbell.

    133+,   for a frame which supports both the user and force resisting
    apparatus while force exerted by the user is transmitted through the frame
    and wherein details of the force resistance apparatus are not claimed.

    139,    for a user interface element wherein details of the force
    resistance apparatus are not  claimed.


CLS 482/93
TXT Utilizing weight resistance:
    Subject matter under subclass 92 wherein the pressure opposing structure
    derives its opposing pressure from the force which gravity exerts upon a
    mass as the user maneuvers the mass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for apparatus which requires the user to manipulate the inertia of
    a mass.

    133+,   for a frame which supports both the user and force resisting
    apparatus while force exerted by the user is transmitted through the frame
    and wherein details of the weight force resistance apparatus are not
    claimed.

    139,    for a user interface element wherein details of the weight force
    resistance apparatus are not  claimed.


CLS 482/94
TXT Including stationary support for weight:
    Subject matter under subclass 93 wherein the pressure opposing structure
    has a relatively immobile arrangement for holding the mass while the mass
    is being maneuvered or is at rest.

    (1)     Note.  The stationary support may be fixedly attached to a wall,
    door, ceiling, floor, post, the ground, etc., or may just rest upon a
    horizontal surface, e.g., a floor, the ground, etc., so long as it is
    relatively immobile with respect thereto.  While the support is stationary,
    it is not necessarily completely static and may have portions or components
    which move as the weight is being maneuvered.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133+,   for a frame which supports both the user and force resisting
    apparatus while force exerted by the user is transmitted through the frame
    and wherein details of the weight resistance apparatus are not claimed.


CLS 482/95
TXT Body part of user utilized as weight:
    Subject matter under subclass 94 wherein a portion of the physical anatomy
    of the user is used as the mass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38+,    for a horizontal gymnastic bar including a chinning bar which does
    not include any user manipulated force resisting apparatus.

    41+,    for parallel, horizontal, gymnastic bars including dip bars which
    do not include any user manipulated force resisting apparatus.

    141,    for a push-up device which does not include any user manipulated
    force resisting apparatus.

    142+,   for a support, e.g., bench, slant board, etc., used for supporting
    the body of the user.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, particularly subclass 75 for an orthopedic device designed
    to stretch the body or spinal column, suspend the head, etc.


CLS 482/96
TXT Entire body:
    Subject matter under subclass 95 wherein the mass is the complete physical
    anatomy of the user.


CLS 482/97
TXT Having lever carrying the weight:
    Subject matter under subclass 94 wherein the mass holding arrangement
    includes a member which is swung by the user about a fulcrum while it is
    bearing the mass to be maneuvered.


CLS 482/98
TXT Having guide around or through weight:
    Subject matter under subclass 94 wherein the mass holding arrangement
    includes a path restricting component which either substantially surrounds
    the mass or which passes in one side and out an opposite side of a
    substantially surrounding portion of the mass, as the mass is maneuvered.


CLS 482/99
TXT And flexible force transmitting linkage element:
    Subject matter under subclass 98 wherein the mass holding arrangement also
    includes a flaccid strand or chain used to help exert the operating
    pressure on the mass while it is being maneuvered.


CLS 482/100
TXT Pivoted user interface element:
    Subject matter under subclass 99 wherein the user exerts the operating
    pressure directly onto a portion of the pressure opposing structure which
    then swings about an axis.


CLS 482/101
TXT Track or way guided user interface element:
    Subject matter under subclass 99 wherein the user exerts the operating
    pressure directly onto a portion of the pressure opposing structure which
    then moves along a structurally controlled linear or curvilinear path,
    e.g., by sliding or rolling along a rail-like element, etc.


CLS 482/102
TXT Flexible element drawn out through exit guide:
    Subject matter under subclass 99 wherein the flaccid strand or chain is
    pulled outwardly from strand or chain path emergence controlling structure,
    e.g., a pulley, etc., associated with the pressure opposing structure.


CLS 482/103
TXT Relocatable exit guide:
    Subject matter under subclass 102 wherein the emergence controlling
    structure may be repositioned on the pressure opposing structure.


CLS 482/104
TXT Barbell support:
    Subject matter under subclass 94 wherein the mass holding arrangement holds
    a mass in the form of a shaftlike member having a weight connected to, or
    integral with, each end of the bar and which is maneuvered by both hands of
    the user, i.e., a barbell.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106+,   for a barbell, per se.

    133+,   for a common force transmitting frame for supporting both the body
    of the user and a nominal force resister.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, particularly subclasses 60.1+ for a rack used to
    store an article with an elongated portion, e.g., a bar, etc., in a nonuse
    position.


CLS 482/105
TXT Weight worn on body of user:
    Subject matter under subclass 93 wherein the mass is attached to a portion
    of the physical anatomy of the user during use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    74,     for a jogging accessory not involving carrying or wearing of a
    weight.

    139,    for a user interfacing element, e.g., a handle, belt, etc., for use
    with other user manipulated force resisting apparatus.


CLS 482/106
TXT Handheld bar with weight at each end (e.g., barbell, dumbbell, etc.) or
    component thereof:Subject matter under subclass 93 wherein the pressure
    opposing structure is (a) a shaftlike member gripped and supported by a
    hand of the user and having a mass connected to, or integral with, each end
    thereof or (b) an essential part thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94+,    for a static support for a claimed weight.

    104,    for a support, per se, used to hold a barbell.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, particularly subclasses 869+ for a restrainer or
    immobilizer used for protecting or restraining a patient or an infant.


CLS 482/107
TXT Having securing member (e.g., locking collar, etc.) for retaining weight on
    bar:Subject matter under subclass 106 including a fastening member attached
    to the shaftlike member to maintain the mass in a desired position thereon.

    (1)     Note.  A securing member having a sole, specifically disclosed
    utility of retaining a weight on a bar for an exercising purpose is proper
    for this subclass even if claimed more broadly.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, for retaining collars used on bars of a
    more general nature or disclosing plural specific uses and not claiming an
    exercise related embodiment.


CLS 482/108
TXT Bar held by single hand of user (e.g., dumbbell, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein the user must grip and support
    the shaftlike member with one hand alone, e.g., a dumbbell, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     for hand grip conditioning or developing apparatus combined with a
    weight feature, e.g., a dumbbell, etc.

    109,    for an exercise type club which is held in a hand at one end while
    the major weight is located at the opposite end.


CLS 482/109
TXT Club:
    Subject matter under subclass 93 wherein the pressure opposing structure is
    an elongated apparatus having a major amount of the mass being located near
    one end and which is held in the hand of the user at its opposite end.

    (1)     Note.  While a wooden, bottle-shaped "Indian" club or a juggling
    club is found in this subclass, the elongated apparatus may include any bar
    arrangement which is held at one end and weighted at the other end.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    463,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 47.2+ for a striking type of
    weapon for use on a human being (e.g., a police club, billy, etc.).

    473,    Games Using Tangible Projectile, subclasses 118+ for a bowling pin
    used as a target in a bowling game; subclasses 219+ for a swingable
    implement used to practice for the game of golf, especially subclass 256
    for a particularly weighted practice golf club; subclasses 282+ for a golf
    club; subclass 457 for a bat used to practice or train for a playing field
    or court game such as baseball; and subclasses 559+ for a player held and
    powered club used to strike and thereby project a projectile into the air.


CLS 482/110
TXT Utilizing inertial force resistance:
    Subject matter under subclass 92 wherein the pressure opposing structure
    derives its opposing pressure from the tendency of a motionless mass to
    remain motionless, a moving mass to remain in motion, or an accelerating or
    decelerating mass to resist a change in acceleration or deceleration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93+,    for apparatus which derives its opposing pressure from the force
    gravity exerts upon a mass as the user manipulates the mass.

    133+,   for a frame which supports both the user and force resisting
    apparatus while force exerted by the user is transmitted through the frame
    and wherein details of the inertial force resistance apparatus are not
    claimed.

    139,    for a user interface element wherein details of the inertial force
    resistance apparatus are not  claimed.


CLS 482/111
TXT Utilizing fluid resistance:
    Subject matter under subclass 92 wherein the pressure opposing structure
    derives its opposing pressure from a liquid or gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for apparatus in which significance is attributed to conditioning
    or developing a muscle employed while stair climbing or simulating stair
    climbing and which uses a fluid resistance.

    55+,    for apparatus in which significance is attributed to conditioning
    or developing a muscle employed while swimming or simulating swimming.

    73,     for apparatus in which significance is attributed to conditioning
    or developing a muscle employed while rowing or simulating rowing and which
    uses a fluid resistance.

    133+,   for a frame which supports both the user and force resisting
    apparatus while force exerted by the user is transmitted through the frame
    and wherein details of the fluid resistance apparatus are not claimed.

    139,    for a user interface element wherein details of the fluid
    resistance apparatus are not claimed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, particularly subclasses 55+ for
    a swimming aid to increase stroke efficiency in water.


CLS 482/112
TXT Confined hydraulic or pneumatic chamber:
    Subject matter under subclass 111 wherein the pressure opposing structure
    uses an enclosed liquid or gas compartment, e.g., a hydraulic or pneumatic
    cylinder, bag, etc., to enable the liquid or gas to oppose the user.

    (1)     Note.  While the chamber substantially encloses the liquid or gas,
    it may include an escape valve or port for releasing or admitting the
    liquid or gas as the apparatus is manipulated by the user.  The container
    does not contain the user.


CLS 482/113
TXT Including external conduit structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein the pressure opposing structure
    is provided with fluid duct-work circuitry outside the enclosed liquid or
    gas compartment to restrict liquid or gas flow to or from the compartment
    as it provides the pressure to oppose the user.


CLS 482/114
TXT Utilizing frictional force resistance:
    Subject matter under subclass 92 wherein the pressure opposing structure
    derives its opposing pressure from the opposition to relative movement of
    two surfaces in adjacent, e.g., rubbing, etc., contact as they tend to be
    moved relative to each other as the user maneuvers the pressure opposing
    structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133+,   for a frame which supports both the user and force resisting
    apparatus while force exerted by the user is transmitted through the frame
    and wherein details of the frictional force resistance apparatus are not
    claimed.

    139,    for a user interface element wherein details of the frictional
    force resistance apparatus are not claimed.


CLS 482/115
TXT Including rotating friction element:
    Subject matter under subclass 114 wherein one of the surfaces is on a
    member which turns about an axis.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are devices in which one of the
    members turns completely about an axis, i.e., 360 degrees or more, or
    oscillates, i.e., turns to and fro with less than 360 degrees of motion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57+,    for apparatus utilizing a bicycle type foot pedal crank.


CLS 482/116
TXT Having return mechanism:
    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein the pressure opposing structure
    includes a structural arrangement causing the turning member to go back
    toward a position held prior to being maneuvered by the human user.


CLS 482/117
TXT Ball and socket friction elements:
    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein one of the contacting surfaces is
    on a spherically shaped member and mates with the other surface which is on
    a partially surrounding member.

    (1)     Note.  Either of the ball or the socket contacting surfaces may be
    on the turning member.


CLS 482/118
TXT Disk or ring friction element or portion thereof:
    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein one of the contacting surfaces is
    on a flat, circular member having a diameter at least as great as its axial
    length., i.e., a disk or ring, or an arcuate segment thereof.


CLS 482/119
TXT Edge engaging braking element:
    Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein the other contacting surface is
    on a member which applies radial pressure to an arcuate perimeter portion
    of the disk, ring, or segment thereof.


CLS 482/120
TXT Including rope element wrapped about another element:
    Subject matter under subclass 114 wherein one of the surfaces is on a
    flaccid, filamentary member which is convoluted around a different member
    and moves therealong while in adjacent contact therewith.

    (1)     Note.  The different member may, for example, rotate at a
    peripheral speed slower than that of the rope, include curved surfaces
    which are in close contact with the moving rope, be a stationary
    cylindrical member, etc.


CLS 482/121
TXT Utilizing resilient force resistance:
    Subject matter under subclass 92 wherein the pressure opposing structure
    derives its opposing pressure from a yielding elastic element that opposes
    deformation thereof and tends to return to its original form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for a bouncing device which includes a resilient element for
    producing vertical bouncing of the equipment as it is operated by the user.

    133+,   for a frame which supports both the user and force resisting
    apparatus while force exerted by the user is transmitted through the frame
    and wherein details of the resilient force resistance apparatus are not
    claimed.

    139,    for a user interface element wherein details of the resilient force
    resistance apparatus are not  claimed.


CLS 482/122
TXT And user supplied counter force:
    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the pressure opposing structure
    also includes a first part engaged by a portion of the user exerting
    pressure thereon while an opposing part is engaged by another portion of
    the user to exert an equal opposing pressure thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131,    for apparatus wherein part of the user body is pitted against
    another part of the user body in direct one-to-one opposition.


CLS 482/123
TXT Against user occupied platform:
    Subject matter under subclass 122 wherein the opposing part of the pressure
    opposing structure is secured to a user supporting structure to exert the
    opposing pressure.

    (1)     Note.  The entire user body need not be supported by the platform.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133+,   for a frame which supports both the user and force resisting
    apparatus while force exerted by the user is transmitted through the frame
    and wherein details of the resilient force resistance apparatus are not
    claimed.


CLS 482/124
TXT Attached to user:
    Subject matter under subclass 122 wherein one of the user engaged parts of
    the pressure opposing structure is secured to one of the engaging portions
    of the user.


CLS 482/125
TXT User leg supplies counter force to user arm:
    Subject matter under subclass 122 wherein the pressure opposing structure
    uses a lower limb of the user to exert an equal opposing pressure against
    an upper limb of the user.


CLS 482/126
TXT Having pair of handles:
    Subject matter under subclass 122 wherein the pressure opposing structure
    includes hand engaging structure on both parts thereof to enable the user
    to grasp each part with a separate hand.


CLS 482/127
TXT Torsion type resister:
    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the yielding elastic element
    opposes deformation caused by the user applying a twisting pressure on it.


CLS 482/128
TXT Linearly compressed resister:
    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the yielding elastic element
    opposes deformation caused by the user applying a length shortening
    pressure on it along a straight line.


CLS 482/129
TXT Resilient component attached to stationary support:
    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein a part of the yielding elastic
    element is secured to a nonmoving structure which furnishes an unyielding
    opposing pressure.


CLS 482/130
TXT Stationary support serves as common support for user:
    Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein the nonmoving structure
    furnishing the unyielding opposing pressure is also configured to hold a
    portion of the body weight of the user.

    (1)     Note.  The stationary structure in this subclass provides all of
    the opposing force for the elastic member.  This distinguishes from the
    apparatus found in subclass 123 where the user on a platform provides the
    opposing force, e.g., due to the weight of the user, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133+,   for a frame which supports both the user and force resisting
    apparatus while force exerted by the user is transmitted through the frame
    and wherein details of the resilient force resistance apparatus are not
    claimed.


CLS 482/131
TXT Utilizing force resistance generated by user only:
    Subject matter under subclass 92 wherein the human user applies the
    operating pressure against pressure opposing structure which derives its
    opposing pressure solely from another part of the body of the user.

    (1)     Note.  The resisting force is normally derived from a muscle
    contraction.  Specifically included herein is a self-manipulated device
    wherein a self-applied stress, i.e., a force applied by a muscle, is
    resisted by a force that originates passively from strain, i.e.,
    deformation resulting from the force, within the body of the user, e.g., by
    stretching of the body, etc.  The parts of the body are pitted against each
    other in direct one-to-one relationship via a mechanical motion
    transmission means.  This distinguishes from the apparatus of subclasses
    122+, for example, where a spring is an intermediate component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     for isometric force resisting apparatus having dynamically
    stationary pressure opposing structure and wherein the pressure of the user
    does not change that state.  See the (1) Note under that subclass.

    122+,   for a resilient force resisting apparatus also utilizing a user
    supplied counter force.

    133+,   for a frame which supports both the user and force resisting
    apparatus while force exerted by the user is transmitted through the frame
    and wherein details of the force resistance apparatus are not claimed.

    139,    for a user interface element wherein details of the force
    resistance apparatus are not  claimed.


CLS 482/132
TXT Rolled by or against user:
    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the pressure opposing structure
    is facilitated in its use by a rounded ball, wheel, or cylinder type
    structure which rotates in tangential contact with either a support
    therefor or the body of the user.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is, for example, a carriage for a
    rotatable wheel used to support a part of the weight of the user while the
    user moves his/her body relative to a floor, wall, etc., and then returns
    to an original position, pulling and stretching the body against itself
    with the help of the rolling carriage.  Also included is a rotatable roller
    which the user moves his/her body against, thereby opposing one part of
    his/her against another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95,     for apparatus utilizing the body weight of the user as a
    manipulated weight resistance.


CLS 482/133
TXT Having common force transmitting support frame for user and for force
    resister:Subject matter under subclass 92 including a structure which
    sustains both the body of the user and the pressure opposing structure
    while transmitting the pressure exerted by the user through the structure
    to the pressure opposing structure.

    (1)     Note.  Nominal resister limitations may be claimed, e.g., a named
    weight, spring, etc. (see (1) Note under subclass 92).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    94+,    for user manipulated force resisting apparatus including statically
    supported weight resistance where details of the weight resistance
    apparatus are claimed.

    104,    for a support used to hold a barbell in position and which may
    additionally support the user.

    121+,   particularly subclass 130, for a user manipulated force resisting
    apparatus including a static support for the user and a resilient force
    resister where details of the resilient force resister are claimed.

    142,    for a support, e.g., bench, slant board, etc., which sustains the
    user during unconstrained exercise movements.


CLS 482/134
TXT Including stationary restraint for user:
    Subject matter under subclass 133 having an immobile holding means to
    prevent a body part of the user from moving while the user exerts pressure
    through another portion of the pressure transmitting structure.

    (1)     Note.  The body part of the user is held stationary to enable
    another body part of the user to be moved for an exercising purpose.  A
    mere chair or rest is not considered to positively restrain the user.


CLS 482/135
TXT Including single, movable, interface element following predetermined
    path:Subject matter under subclass 133 wherein the pressure transmitting
    structure has a solitary, relocatable, user engaging component travelling
    along a prescribed alignment.

    (1)     Note.  the movement along the predetermined path is usually
    intended to isolate a single muscle or muscle group.  Separate hand or foot
    engaging interface elements which act as a single element are included
    hereunder.   A single element used for both leg curl and leg extension
    exercises is proper for this subclass.


CLS 482/136
TXT Rotatably movable:
    Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein the relocatable user engaging
    component travels along an arcuate alignment about an axial region.


CLS 482/137
TXT About a horizontal axis:
    Subject matter under subclass 136 wherein the axial region is oriented
    perpendicular to vertical, i.e., horizontally.


CLS 482/138
TXT Including plural, movable, interface elements for multiple
    exercises:Subject matter under subclass 133 wherein the pressure
    transmitting structure has more than one relocatable, user engaging
    component for separately conditioning or developing the muscles of more
    than one part of the body of the user.

    (1)     Note.  The movement must occur during exercise, not as an
    adjustment to the exercise device.


CLS 482/139
TXT User interface element:
    Subject matter under subclass 92 wherein significance is attributed to a
    component of the pressure opposing structure which is directly engaged by
    the user.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for a handle or belt or other user
    worn or user handled element which is clearly part of an exercise
    apparatus, but in which the exerciser is of lesser significance than is the
    force resisting element to which it is attached (see (1) Note under
    subclass 92).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     for a skipping device often attached to the body of the user.

    105,    for a weight resistance device worn on the body of the user and in
    which significant weight resistance details are claimed.

    124,    for a resilient resistance device having a user supplied counter
    force and which is attached to the user and in which significant resilient
    resistance device details are claimed.

    126,    for a resilient resistance device having a user supplied counter
    force and which has a pair of handles to be grasped by the user and in
    which significant resilient resistance device details are claimed.


CLS 482/140
TXT SIT UP DEVICE:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the apparatus facilitates
    the conditioning or developing of a muscle of the user by the user raising
    and lowering his/her upper body between an upward facing prone position and
    a seated position primarily by contraction of the abdominal muscles, i.e.,
    while doing a sit up.


CLS 482/141
TXT PUSH UP DEVICE:
    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the apparatus facilitates
    the conditioning or developing of a muscle of the user who, while in a
    downward facing prone position, raises and lowers his/her upper body by
    alternately bending and straightening an arm, i.e., while doing a push up.


CLS 482/142
TXT SUPPORT FOR ENTIRE BODY OF USER (E.G., BENCH, SLANT BOARD, ETC.):Subject
    matter under the class definition wherein the apparatus sustains the
    complete weight of the user in a position to facilitate conditioning or
    developing a muscle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23+,    for a gymnastic type support upon which the user may raise or lower
    his/her body, particularly subclass 38 for a horizontal chinning bar and
    subclass 41 for horizontal, parallel dip bars.

    51+,    for apparatus involving user translation or physical simulation
    thereof which also often supports the entire body of the user during
    exercise.

    104,    for a barbell support, per se, or a barbell support combined with a
    support for the body of the user.

    133+,   for an exercise device having a frame that supports both a force
    resister and a user thereof.  Also see (1) Note thereunder.


CLS 482/143
TXT Suspension device:
    Subject matter under subclass 142 wherein the weight sustaining apparatus
    permits a part of the user body to hang freely from the apparatus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for a trapeze or rings about which the user may move in an
    acrobatic manner.

    38,     for a horizontal chinning bar.

    131,    for apparatus utilizing force resistance generated by the user
    alone to condition or develop a muscle and which may also stretch the body
    of the user.

    907,    for a collection of apparatus used to stretch the body of a user.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, particularly subclasses 71 and 75 for an orthopedic
    extension device which stretches or extends a body or spinal column for a
    therapeutic purpose.


CLS 482/144
TXT Body inversion:
    Subject matter under subclass 143 wherein the apparatus is used to hang the
    complete body of the user upside down.

    (1)     Note.  The inversion suspension device may pivot about a horizontal
    axis but, if used to carry the user in a complete loop, it is classified in
    Class 472, Amusement Devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, particularly subclasses 71 and 75 for an orthopedic
    extension device which may stretch or extend a body or spinal column by
    inversion of the user for a therapeutic purpose.

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclasses 16+ for an occupant
    propelled roundabout which may invert the occupant by rotating him/her
    completely about a horizontal axis (see (1) Note above).


CLS 482/145
TXT Including hold down for foot or ankle:
    Subject matter under subclass 142 wherein the weight sustaining apparatus
    has a portion secured thereto which embraces or surrounds a part of the
    body of the user below the shin, i.e., a foot or ankle, to constrain it
    against movement.

    (1)     Note.  The hold down is often provided to restrain the feet against
    moving while the torso is being manipulated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140,    for a sit up device often employing structure for holding a foot or
    ankle of a user and which may also support the entire body of the user.


CLS 482/146
TXT Swivelled foot platform:
    Subject matter under subclass 142 wherein the weight sustaining apparatus
    is mounted for arcuately oscillating movement relative to a supporting
    surface upon which both the user and the apparatus are supported, e.g., the
    ground, a floor, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for apparatus in which significance is attributed to conditioning
    or developing a muscle employed while skiing or simulating skiing and which
    involves swiveling.

    79,     for apparatus in which significance is attributed to conditioning
    or developing a muscle of the foot or ankle alone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclasses 14+ for an occupant
    propelled roundabout which may rotate in a complete loop or circle for an
    amusement purpose.


CLS 482/147
TXT Turns solely about vertical axis:
    Subject matter under subclass 146 wherein the weight sustaining apparatus
    arcuately oscillates only around an upright axial region, i.e., a vertical
    axis.


CLS 482/148
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:
    Subject matter under the class definition not provided for in any of the
    above subclasses.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 482/900
TXT ERGOMETER WITH FEEDBACK TO LOAD OR WITH FEEDBACK COMPARISON:Cross-reference
    art collection of documents relating to exercise apparatus which measures
    the amount of work done by a muscle under a controlled condition and then
    transmits it to a resistance applying structure or to structure which will
    evaluate it relative to another amount.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for exercise apparatus having a specific electrical feature which
    often includes feedback to a load applying device or with feedback
    comparison.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, particularly subclasses 300+ for a diagnostic testing
    device used for the medical evaluation of the condition of a living body by
    a diagnostician.


CLS 482/901
TXT HAVING COMPUTER CIRCUITRY:
    Cross-reference art collection of documents relating to exercise apparatus
    which includes electrical structure used to perform a data processing or
    calculating operation.

    (1)     Note.  The computer circuitry may be used to sense, analyze,
    control, or simulate operation of the exercise device.  A plurality of
    computers may be used to form a network.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for a claimed exercise device having a specific electrical feature
    which may include a computer or related circuitry, display, feedback, or
    software therefor.

    902,    for an exercise device art collection having computer circuitry and
    employing image apparatus to which significance is attributed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, particularly
    subclasses 410+ for a computer or data processing system related to
    athletics or amusement and subclasses 413+ for a computer or system used in
    relation to a living organism, e.g., patient monitoring or diagnostic, etc.


CLS 482/902
TXT Employing specific graphic or video display:
    Cross-reference art collection under subclass 901 wherein the data
    processing or calculating structure presents its output on a particular
    pictorial or televised image apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  The pictorial or televised image may be presented on a
    cathode ray tube (CRT), liquid crystal display (LCD), light emitting diodes
    (LED), etc., or by using a video processor or video tape controlled by the
    computer circuitry.  Significance should be attributed to the image
    apparatus for placement in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    901,    for an exercise art collection having computer circuitry and
    employing conventional or nominal image apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, appropriate subclasses for displaying
    image on any kind of output display device.

    348,    Television, subclasses 739+ for video display.

    349,    Liquid Crystal Cells, Elements and Systems, appropriate subclasses
    for utilizing liquid crystal display devices.


CLS 482/903
TXT UTILIZING ELECTROMAGNETIC FORCE RESISTANCE:
    Cross-reference art collection of documents relating to exercise apparatus
    which derives user opposing force from structure which generates electrical
    energy or which dissipates energy electrically.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this collection is a device using an
    electromagnetic, electrostatic or magnetostatic force or a permanent magnet
    to generate the opposing force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for exercise equipment having specific electrical operating,
    controlling, monitoring, or indication circuitry.


CLS 482/904
TXT REMOVABLY ATTACHED TO WHEELCHAIR, HOME FURNISHING, OR HOME
    STRUCTURE:Cross-reference art collection of documents relating to exercise
    apparatus which is intended to be secured temporarily to a wheeled, seated
    invalid carrying, vehicle, to a household article, e.g., a bed, chair,
    table, etc., or to specific building structure of a house, e.g., a door
    frame, door knob, etc.


CLS 482/905
TXT ARM WRESTLING:
    Cross-reference art collection of documents relating to exercise apparatus
    which is used while engaging in or practicing for an activity which pits an
    upper limb, i.e., an arm, of one person against the arm of another person
    in a contest of strength.

    (1)     Note.  Arm wrestling is a broad title for a variety of contests
    also known as wrist wrestling, Indian wrestling, hand wrestling, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, particularly subclass 452 for a
    competitive arm wrestling device.


CLS 482/906
TXT UTILIZING OPPONENT SUPPLIED RESISTANCE:
    Cross-reference art collection of documents relating to exercise apparatus
    which pits the force developed by one user against an opposing force
    generated by another user.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    905,    for arm wrestling apparatus which pits one person against another.


CLS 482/907
TXT STRETCHING:
    Cross-reference art collection of documents relating to exercise apparatus
    which enables the user to lengthen or extend a muscle or related body part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131,    for apparatus utilizing force resistance generated by the user
    alone to condition or develop a muscle and which may also stretch the body
    of the user.

    143+,   for a user suspension device which may be used to stretch the body
    of the user.


CLS 482/908
TXT ADJUSTABLE:
    Cross-reference art collection of documents relating to exercise apparatus
    which includes a feature permitting it to be altered in some manner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    42,     for a separately adjustable, parallel bar type of gymnastic
    apparatus.


CLS 482/909
TXT MECHANICAL INDICATOR:
    Cross-reference art collection of documents relating to exercise apparatus
    which includes structure for physically displaying some exercise parameter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for an exercise device including an electrical indicator.

    84,     for a striking type exercise device having an indicator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, particularly subclasses 200+ for a
    mechanical indicator used to display a parameter.


CLS 482/910
TXT PORTABLE EXERCISE DEVICE WITH CARRYING HANDLE, CASE, OR CABINET:

    A collection of art comprising documents relating to transportable exercise
    apparatus having either manually graspable toting means or a container or
    chest for storage during conveyance.


CLS 483/
TTL TOOL CHANGING

CLS 483/
TXT INDEX TO CLASS DEFINITIONS AND NOTES


    I       CLASS DEFINITION

    II      RELATIONSHIP TO MATERIAL HANDLING CLASSES

    III     RELATIONSHIP TO CLASSES MAKING USE OF A WORKPIECE MODIYING "TOOL"

    IV      RELATIONSHIP TO MATERIAL STORAGE CLASSES

    V       MISCELLANEOUS SEARCH NOTES

    I.      CLASS DEFINITION

            This is the generic class relating to a process or apparatus
    comprising use of either (A) means for supporting an implement in position
    for operative engagement with a workpiece combined with means to transfer
    the implement to or from that support, or (B) means for storing an
    implement in a position of repose remote from the operative position,
    combined with means to transfer the implement to or from the storage means.

    (1)     Note.  "Transfer" is used to designate a bodily conveying of the
    implement from one position to another.  The transfer means need not be
    distinct from both the means for supporting the implement in operative
    engagement and the storage means, i.e., the support  or storage means may
    comprise the transfer means.

    (2)     Note.  "Workpiece" includes material to be modified by the
    implement into a product of manufacture and may comprise a portion of stock
    material to be separated therefrom subsequent to modification, or material
    to be tested by use of an implement comprising a probe.

    (3)     Note.  "Operative engagement" refers to the relative
    implement-workpiece movement during mutual contact which the implement
    performs its intended function on the workpiece.

    (4)     Note.  "Implement" consists of a workpiece modifying device, (e.g.,
    a cutting, abrading, or deforming tool intended to remove material from the
    workpiece or plastically strain the workpiece during contact therewith).
    Note that an assembling tool (e.g., a wrench or a screwdriver) is not
    considered to be an implement to be transferred under this class.

    EXCEPTIONS:
    Because it is handled in the manner of the "implement" of this class, each
    of the following is treated as an implement in this class:

    (a)     a probe intended to detect or measure a parameter of the workpiece
    during contact therewith,

    (b)     a tool holder that supports a work engaging tool (e.g., chuck,
    collet or adapter),

    (c)     a work holder that supports a workpiece for rotation during
    treatment, (e.g., a chuck, collet or adapter).

    (d)     a nonfiller type electrode used for machining, e.g., for spot
    welding, electric discharge machining (i.e., by EDM), electro-chemical
    machining (i.e., by ECM), etc.


    (5)     Note.  The means for supporting the implement must be distinct from
    the means for storing, e.g., the mere recitation of a machine tool with a
    turret or other means to shift or index the implement is considered
    insufficient subject matter for original classification in this class.

    (6)     Note.  Transferring an implement of this class combined with
    transferring another member (e.g., an assembling tool) using the same
    transfer means is included in this class.

    (7)     Note.  This class was derived in 1991 from the art then stored in
    subclass 568 tool changer of Class 29, Metal Working.  It was assumed that
    all references appropriate for original classification in this class (Class
    483) were either as original or as cross-reference in that subclass.
    Inquiries were made of various Post Classifiers and Examiners, but NO ART
    WAS SCREENED THAT WAS NOT INCLUDED IN 29/568.

    II.     RELATIONSHIP TO MATERIAL HANDLING CLASSES

            Class 483 includes a process or apparatus comprising use of tool
    transfer means combined either with a support means where the tool is to
    engage a workpiece or with a storage means.  Also, this class includes
    "tool changing" combined with other material handling.

    Means to transfer a tool, per se, is to be found in the appropriate
    material handling class.

    Means to transfer a member other than a tool is to be found in the
    appropriate material handling class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, generally for apparatus for advancing a
    load over a predetermined path or path section.

    212,    Traversing Hoists, generally for apparatus or method for lifting
    and shifting a load from a suspended support.

    221,    Article Dispensing, generally for a process or apparatus for
    dispensing discrete objects from a supply.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, generally for a process or device for
    displacing an article with respect to a support or supply, or for a tool
    transfer device, per se.

    901,    Robots, (an art collection class) generally for a reprogrammable
    manipulator adapted for moving articles through programmed motions
    repetitively.


    III.    RELATIONSHIP TO CLASSES MAKING USE OF A WORKPIECE MODIFYING "TOOL"

            Class 483 includes use of a material treating tool combined with
    significantly recited tool changing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, for any of several metal working operations under
    that class definition which may be combined with, by name only, a tool
    changing process or apparatus.  The combination of Class 29 Metal Working
    with a significantly recited tool transfer device is to be found in this
    class (Class 483).

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, for manufacturing of an article from glass.

    72,     Metal Deforming, for shaping of preformed metal generally, search
    especially subclasses 238+ for apparatus for deforming by use of a roller
    couple combined with means to introduce or remove at least one roller with
    respect to the couple.  This is an exception to the general rule that the
    combination of a Class 72 process or apparatus with a Tool Changing process
    or apparatus is to be found in Class 483.

    82,     Turning, for cutting of rotating work.

    83,     Cutting, for subdividing a workpiece by use of a sharp cutting
    edge.  Search particularly subclass 481 for a cutting machine having a
    rotatable disc tool pair or tool and carrier with means to permit (as
    distinguished from transfer) replacement of the tool.  Search subclasses
    549+ for a cutting machine including plural tools selectively engaged by a
    single drive, especially subclass 552 for a turret from which the tool is
    not removed during cutting operation.  Search subclasses 563+ for a cutting
    machine including a particular drive means and provision for the tool to be
    displaced to an inactive position, other than for storage.

    100,    Presses, for a process or apparatus for compressing material
    without a shaping.

    140,    Wireworking, generally for a (a) combined process or apparatus for
    forming or shaping wire to form a wire product, (b) for assembling an
    article of wire, or (c) for means peculiar to the manufacture of an article
    from wire.

    142,    Wood Turning, for cutting of rotating wood.

    144,    Woodworking, generally for a process or apparatus including (a)
    combined operations in manufacturing an article from wood, or (b) for an
    operation peculiar to the making of an article from wood.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, for a tool support with a driver.

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 194+ for an
    electrolytic apparatus and especially subclass 224 for an ECM (i.e.,
    electro-chemical machining) apparatus with localized area applicators.

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 640+ for electrolytic erosion to
    change the shape or surface configuration of a workpiece (e.g., etching,
    polishing, etc.).

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 50+ for a process or apparatus of
    treating metal by electric heating.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    for a method of molding or shaping an article of flowable material,
    generally.  Note that shaping of metal or glass is generally provided for
    elsewhere.

    407,    Cutters, for Shaping, generally for a tool adapted for removing
    material from a workpiece.

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating, Axially Moving Tool, generally for a
    process or apparatus wherein a turning cutter removes material from a
    workpiece during relative axial infeed therewith.  Search subclass 35 for
    apparatus for removing material from a workpiece by an axially advancing,
    rotating cutter combined with a turret for plural cutters not removable
    from the turret during cutting.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, generally for a process or
    apparatus for removing material from a workpiece with a cutter to shape an
    article.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus, for
    means for molding or shaping an article of flowable material, generally.
    Note that means for shaping of metal or glass is generally provided for
    elsewhere.

    451,    Abrading, generally for a machine or process for removing material
    from a workpiece by abrading or polishing.

    IV.     RELATIONSHIP TO MATERIAL STORAGE CLASSES

            Class 483 includes a tool storage means combined with a tool
    transfer means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 372+ for a special
    receptacle for plural tools.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, especially subclasses 1.51+ for a power operated
    storage supply.


    VI.     MISCELLANEOUS SEARCH NOTES

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e. g., Buildings), subclasses 29+ for a building
    including means to move an article.

    81,     Tools, subclass 57.5 for a wrench or screwdriver carrying a turret
    head.

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, generally for a means of general utility for
    making a permanent or temporary connection between an article, such as a
    tool, and a holder.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, generally for a system
    including an electrical motor for actuating a tool changer or a control
    therefor and wherein the electrical motor, as claimed, is the sole and
    ultimate electric load device supplied to the system.


CLS 483/1
TXT PROCESS:
    Method under the class definition including transferring an implement to or
    from the support means or the storage means.


CLS 483/2
TXT WITH SAFETY MEANS:
    Apparatus under the class definition including means to protect a human
    operator from accidental injury.


CLS 483/3
TXT Guard:
    Apparatus under subclass 2 wherein the means to protect comprises a shield
    or barrier.


CLS 483/4
TXT WITH  MEANS TO REGULATE OPERATION BY MEANS OF REPLACEABLE INFORMATION
    SUPPLY (E.G., TEMPLET, TAPE, CARD, ETC.):Apparatus under the class
    definition comprising means to control the performance of the apparatus
    from    an    externally    exchangeable algorithm.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is an apparatus that is
    controlled, for example, by a computer wherein the computer may be
    programmed by inputting a stored set of instructions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses
    474.01+ for a control system for a machining device, particularly subclass
    474.21 for subject matter related to controlling tool selection and
    exchange.

    901,    Robots, subcollection 6 for apparatus wherein an arm motion
    controller exchanges information with another machine.


CLS 483/5
TXT Replaceable information comprising tool location:
    Apparatus under subclass 4 wherein the algorithm comprises address data for
    the particular position of the implement in the storage means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8+      for apparatus including a control means responsive to a detector
    for identifying tools.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 435+ for a machine which senses or analyzes
    coded information on a record.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, generally for a process
    or apparatus for static storage and retrieval of information, particularly
    subclasses 185.01+ for floating gate memory storage (e.g., flash memory).


CLS 483/6
TXT Including determining optimum tool access path:
    Apparatus under subclass 5 wherein the algorithm comprises instructions
    enabling the control means to decide the most desirable route between the
    transfer means and the address of the particular implement in the storage
    means.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the optimum tool access path is the shortest path.


CLS 483/7
TXT WITH CONTROL MEANS ENERGIZED IN RESPONSE TO ACTIVATOR STIMULATED BY
    CONDITION SENSOR:Apparatus under the class definition comprising means to
    regulate the performance of the apparatus or implement and a detector for
    monitoring the apparatus or implement performance which influences the
    means to regulate subsequently to detecting a predetermined state or level
    of the apparatus or implement performance.


CLS 483/8
TXT Responsive to tool identifying information:
    Apparatus under subclass 7 wherein the detector monitors means which
    distinguish the implement.

    (1)     Note.  Contained herein are patents having a detector primarily
    useful for locating a particular implement in the storage means.

    (2)     Note.  The means which distinguish may be a portion or adjunct of
    the implement, or may be distinct from the implement, e.g., indicia at  an
    address location on the storage means which identifies the implement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5+,     for apparatus including a programmable control means for inputting
    an address location of an address location of a tool in storage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 435+ for a machine which senses or analyses
    coded indicia on a record.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, generally for a process
    or apparatus for the static storage and retrieval of information,
    particularly subclasses 185.01+ for floating gate memory storage (e.g.,
    flash memory).


CLS 483/9
TXT Identifying information on tool or tool holder:
    Apparatus under subclass 8 wherein the implement, a portion thereof, or
    member, e.g., an adapter, permanently attached thereto comprises the means
    which distinguish.

    (1)     Note.  For an adapter to be "permanently attached" to the implement
    the apparatus must have no structure for separating the adapter from the
    implement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for apparatus wherein the detector monitors the implement, per se,
    or a particular feature of the  implement, e.g., wear.  When a particular
    feature of the implement such as diameter is monitored to determine the
    identity of the implement (e.g., to distinguish a one inch diameter from a
    two inch diameter implement) classification is proper in subclasses 8+.
    When the particular feature is monitored to determine whether it is within
    acceptable limits for a known implement classification is proper in
    subclass 10.


CLS 483/10
TXT Responsive to tool:
    Apparatus under subclass 7 wherein the detector monitors the implement or
    the condition thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are patents to apparatus having a detector
    for monitoring features of the implement not intended for implement
    identification purposes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for a detector which monitors the implement to determine its
    identity.


CLS 483/11
TXT Including means to monitor and control, i.e., adaptive machining:Apparatus
    under subclass 10 including means to detect a condition of the implement
    and to regulate the operation for optimum performance in response thereto,
    e.g., feedback control.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a detector responsive to chatter in a
    cutting tool with means to cause the apparatus to select a different
    cutting tool or reduce the cutting rate, etc., so as to minimize the
    chatter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 474.15
    for a control system for adaptive machining.


CLS 483/12
TXT WITH SIGNAL OR INDICATOR:
    Apparatus under the class definition comprising means for alerting a human
    operator of an existing or pending condition or state of the apparatus,
    e.g., an alarm, gage, warning light, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, generally for a mechanical signal or
    indicator, per se.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 815.1+ for an electrical
    annunciator.


CLS 483/13
TXT WITH MEANS TO CONDITION OR ADJUST TOOL OR TOOL SUPPORT:
    Apparatus under the class definition comprising means to treat the
    implement or the support means, or means for relatively varying the
    position of the implement on or within the support means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for apparatus which adjusts the implement in response to a control
    means responsive to an implement detector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 3+ for a
    machine which conditions by cleaning, particularly subclasses 300.1+ for a
    machine which cleans by application of an air blast or suction.


CLS 483/14
TXT WITH MEANS TO TRANSFER WORK:
    Apparatus under the class definition combined with means to move the
    workpiece to or from a workpiece support or storage means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 222+ for apparatus to move
    an article from a supply to a work treatment or inspection station.


CLS 483/15
TXT Plural machine tools, e.g., flexible manufacturing:
    Apparatus under subclass 14 comprising more than one implement support
    means, each mounted in a distinct device which recognizes both the
    implement and the workpiece and which brings them into operative engagement
    (i.e., "machine tool").

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are patents to apparatus having means to
    transfer the implement or workpiece between machine tools.

    (2)     Note.  A single device having a common support structure for more
    than one implement support means (e.g., a ganged or combination machine
    tool, etc.) is not considered to be a "plural machine tools".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for a rotary spindle machine tool with means to transfer a tool
    head, which may comprise means for supporting plural implements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 563+ for means to intermittently  feed
    work from one work station to another in plural, diverse manufacturing
    apparatus.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 474.11
    for a supervisory control for multiple tools.


CLS 483/16
TXT INCLUDING MACHINE TOOL OR COMPONENT:
    Apparatus under the class definition comprising a device, or a portion
    thereof, which includes structure for recognizing both the implement and
    the workpiece and which brings them into operative engagement, i.e.,
    "machine tool".

    (1)     Note.  Disclosure shall be relied upon for determining original
    classification of a patent in the subclasses indented hereunder when the
    claims are silent regarding the type of machine tool disclosed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58+,    for apparatus comprising an implement transfer means combined with
    a storage means for use with a machine tool.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 592+ for a process of manufacturing
    including use of a changeable tool, but not reciting tool changing;
    subclasses 592.1+ for a process of manufacturing an electrical device
    including use of a changeable tool, but not reciting tool changing;
    subclasses 428+ for a process of assembling including use of a changeable
    tool but not reciting tool changing; subclasses 33+ for combined metal
    working apparatus including a changeable tool but not positively reciting a
    tool changer; subclasses 700+ for assembling or disassembling apparatus
    including a changeable tool but not positively reciting a tool changer; and
    subclasses 728-764 for apparatus for assembling or disassembling an
    electrical device including a changeable tool but not positively reciting a
    tool changer.

    83,     Cutting, for a process or apparatus for dividing a workpiece into a
    multiplicity of parts, if not in combination with a process or apparatus
    for tool changing. Subclasses 549+ for a cutting machine including plural
    tools selectively engaged by a single drive, especially subclass 552 for a
    turret from which the tool is not removed during cutting operation.
    Subclasses 563+ for a cutting machine including a particular drive means
    and provision for the tool to be displaced to an inactive position, other
    than for storage.

    140,    Wireworking, subclass 1 for a combined wireworking apparatus, if
    not in combination with an apparatus for tool changing.

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, cross-reference art collection 900 for a means
    for making a connection between an article such as a tool and an article
    holder adapted for use with (but not in combination with) an automatic tool
    changer.


CLS 483/17
TXT Rotating work machine tool (e.g. screw machine, lathe, etc.):Apparatus
    under subclass 16 wherein the machine tool is intended to turn the
    workpiece about an axis while in operative engagement with the implement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    82,     Turning, subclasses 121+ for a lathe, generally, provided with a
    rotatable cylinder for housing and supporting plural guided cutters, but
    not combined with a tool changer.

    142,    Wood Turning, for a lathe for cutting wood, but not in combination
    with a tool changer.


CLS 483/18
TXT Tool support comprises rotary spindle:
    Apparatus under subclass 17 comprising a means for support which turns the
    implement about an axis while in operative engagement with the workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30+,    for apparatus comprising a rotary spindle machine tool such as a
    milling machine having no means for rotating the workpiece about an axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclass 35 for
    apparatus for removing material from a workpiece by an axially advancing,
    rotating cutter combined with a turret for plural cutters.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 50+ for a process or
    apparatus for cutting gears by using a rotary cutter.


CLS 483/19
TXT Tool having specific mounting or work treating feature:
    Apparatus under subclass 17 comprising an implement or portion thereof
    having (a) a detailed provision for attachment to a holder or (b)
    structurally limited to performing a particular function with respect to
    the workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  For original classification in this subclass a patent must
    claim more than a nominal recitation of a "cutting" tool or implement.

    (2)     Note.  A named "probe" is considered to have a "work treating
    feature".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31+,    for apparatus comprising a rotary spindle machine tool combined
    with means to transfer an implement having a specific mounting or work
    treating feature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 501+ for a contact member or
    probe to touch an object and measure a geometrical characteristic of the
    object.

    407,    Cutters, for Shaping, generally for a tool adapted to remove
    material from a workpiece.


CLS 483/20
TXT Workpiece holder (e.g., chuck or chuck jaw, collet, etc.):
    Apparatus under subclass 19 wherein the implement consists of a means for
    attaching a workpiece to the machine tool.

    (1)     Note.  The "implement" of this subclass is not the type structure
    normally considered to be a "tool" of the class title; however, the
    structure for moving a workpiece holder is so similar to that of this class
    that it is deemed to be best collected with the "tool changing" apparatus
    of this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, art collection 901 for a chuck or chuck jaw
    changer.


CLS 483/21
TXT Turning tool insert changer:
    Apparatus under subclass 19 wherein the implement consists essentially of a
    replaceably mounted cutting edge portion intended to be mounted in a
    nonrotary tool holder and intended to remove material from a turning
    workpiece during operative engagement therewith.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    407,    Cutters, for Shaping, subclasses 66+ for a "tool holder" for an
    inserted cutting tool and subclass 113 for a tool insert having plural,
    alternatively usable cutting edges.  Also, see the class definition for
    clarification of the terms "cutter" and "tool holder".


CLS 483/22
TXT Tool changer between tool support and matrix:
    Apparatus under subclass 17 comprising implement support and storage means,
    and wherein the transfer means is distinct from the support and storage
    means and moves the implement to the support means from the storage means
    or to the storage means from the support means.


CLS 483/23
TXT Plural matrices:
    Apparatus under subclass 22 comprising more than one storage means.


CLS 483/24
TXT Tool support comprises turret:
    Apparatus under subclass 22 wherein the means for support comprises a rigid
    body that simultaneously supports plural implements and is selectively
    indexable to present one for operative engagement with the workpiece.


CLS 483/25
TXT Linearly movable tool changer:
    Apparatus under subclass 24 wherein the implement is transferred along a
    straight line.


CLS 483/26
TXT Linearly movable tool changer:
    Apparatus under subclass 22 wherein the implement is transferred along a
    straight line.


CLS 483/27
TXT Direct tool exchange between tool support and matrix:
    Apparatus under subclass 17 including (a) means to support the implement in
    operative position combined with a storage means that comprises the
    transfer means; or (b) storage means for the implement combined with an
    operative support that comprises the transfer means.


CLS 483/28
TXT Reciprocating tool machine tool (e.g., broaching machine, shaping machine,
    etc.):Apparatus under subclass 16 wherein the machine tool brings the
    implement and workpiece together in operative engagement in repetitive
    linear strokes.

    (1)     Note.  A ram-carried, tube forming mandrel of an extrusion press is
    considered to reciprocate, even though it moves in only one direction
    during the forming operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 446+ for a deforming apparatus with
    means to position a deforming tool relative to a workpiece or a
    complementary tool.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 243+ for a broaching
    apparatus including means to selectively drive a tool from a group of tools
    and subclasses 288+ for a process or apparatus for planing.


CLS 483/29
TXT Including matrix:
    Apparatus under subclass 28 having means for storing an implement.


CLS 483/30
TXT Rotary spindle machine tool (e.g., milling machine, boring machine,
    grinding machine, etc.):Apparatus under subclass 16 wherein the means for
    supporting the implement turns about an axis simultaneously with supporting
    the implement in operative engagement with the workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for apparatus comprising a rotary spindle implement support and
    including means to rotate the workpiece about an axis during operative
    engagement with the implement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclass 35 for
    apparatus for removing material from a workpiece with an axially advancing
    rotating cutter combined with a turret for plural cutters.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclasses 64+ for a process or
    apparatus for milling.


CLS 483/31
TXT Tool having specific mounting or work treating feature:
    Apparatus under subclass 30 comprising an implement or portion thereof
    having (a) a detailed provision for attachment to a holder or (b)
    structurally limited to performing a particular function with respect to
    the workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  For original classification in this subclass a patent must
    claim more than a nominal recitation of a "cutting" tool or implement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19+,    for apparatus comprising a workpiece rotating machine tool combined
    with a means to transfer an implement having a specific mounting or
    workpiece treating feature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 501+ for a contact member or
    probe to touch an object and measure a geometrical characteristic of the
    object.

    407,    Cutters, for Shaping, subclasses 30+ for a cutting tool adapted for
    securement to a rotating spindle to turn the tool about an axis.


CLS 483/32
TXT Tool head:
    Apparatus under subclass 31 wherein the implement comprises an input shaft
    attachable to a rotary power source on the machine tool, an output shaft
    having means for attaching a workpiece modifying implement thereto, a power
    transmission means interconnecting the input and output shafts, and a
    housing stationarily attachable to the machine tool for supporting the
    transmission means and shafts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclass 230 for a milling
    apparatus including a detachable or repositionable tool head.


CLS 483/33
TXT Abrading wheel:
    Apparatus under subclass 31 wherein the implement consists of a circular
    work modifying tool having naturally formed cutting edges, adapted to turn
    about a central axis while in operative engagement with the workpiece so as
    to remove material therefrom, i.e., grinding.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, for an abrading machine without specific tool transfer
    means


CLS 483/34
TXT Including means for angularly orienting tool and spindle:
    Apparatus under subclass 31 wherein the implement and means for support
    comprise mutually complimentary coupling structure for positive torsional
    engagement therebetween, and the transfer means or machine tool comprises
    means for relative rotational positioning of the implement and support
    means so as to position the mutually complementary coupling structure for
    engagement.


CLS 483/35
TXT Spindle angularly oriented to align with tool:
    Apparatus under subclass 34 wherein the machine tool comprises means for
    turning the support means about its axis to effect the relative rotational
    positioning.


CLS 483/36
TXT Tool changer between spindle and matrix:
    Apparatus under subclass 30 comprising means for storing and supporting the
    implement, and wherein the transfer means moves the implement from the
    storage means to the support means or from the support means to the storage
    means.


CLS 483/37
TXT Plural matrices:
    Apparatus under subclass 36 comprising more than one physically distinct
    storage means.


CLS 483/38
TXT Including tool holder pivotable about axis:
    Apparatus under subclass 36 wherein the transfer means comprises means for
    gripping the implement rotatably mounted for advancing the implement during
    transfer along a circular arc centered about a spaced line, i.e., the pivot
    axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 680+ and 741+ for a
    general article handler having a swinging load support.


CLS 483/39
TXT Plural tool holders pivotable about a common axis:
    Apparatus under subclass 38 wherein the transfer means comprises more than
    one implement gripping means rotatably mounted for simultaneously advancing
    more than one implement during transfer along circular arcs centered about
    the pivot axis.


CLS 483/40
TXT Including intermediate tool changer:
    Apparatus under subclass 39 comprising a second transfer means arranged to
    transfer the implement to or from the transfer means or storage means.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are devices having plural transfer means and
    wherein the implement is serially handed off between the transfer means
    during the transfer operation.


CLS 483/41
TXT Intermediate tool changer includes tool holder pivotable about
    axis:Apparatus under subclass 40 wherein the intermediate transfer means
    comprises means for gripping the implement rotatably mounted for advancing
    the implement during transfer along a circular arc centered about a spaced
    line.


CLS 483/42
TXT Tool holders pivotable with respect to each other:
    Apparatus under subclass 39 wherein each gripping means is mounted for
    relative rotation therebetween.


CLS 483/43
TXT Tool holders pivotable about plural nonparallel axes:
    Apparatus under subclass 39 wherein the gripping means are rotatably
    mounted for advancing the implement during transfer along circular arcs
    centered about more than one angularly offset pivot axis.


CLS 483/44
TXT Linearly moveable tool holders:
    Apparatus under subclass 39 wherein the transfer means comprises means for
    advancing the gripping means along a straight line.


CLS 483/45
TXT Extensible tool holders:
    Apparatus under subclass 44 wherein the means for advancing the gripping
    means along a straight line comprises means for radially translating the
    gripping means with respect to the pivot axis.


CLS 483/46
TXT Translatable axis:
    Apparatus under subclass 44 wherein the means for advancing the gripping
    means along a straight line comprises means for laterally translating the
    pivot axis.


CLS 483/47
TXT Distinct tool changer for each tool:
    Apparatus under subclass 38 comprising a separate transfer means for every
    implement in the storage means.


CLS 483/48
TXT Including intermediate tool changer:
    Apparatus under subclass 38 comprising a second transfer means to transfer
    the implement to or from the transfer means or storage means.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are devices having plural transfer means and
    wherein the implement is serially handed off between the transfer means
    during the transfer operation.


CLS 483/49
TXT Linearly movable tool holder:
    Apparatus under subclass 38 wherein the transfer means comprises means for
    advancing the gripping means along a straight line.


CLS 483/50
TXT Tool holder pivotable about plural nonparallel axes:
    Apparatus under subclass 38 wherein the gripping means is rotatably mounted
    for advancing the implement during transfer along circular arcs centered
    about more than one angularly offset pivot axis.


CLS 483/51
TXT Including linearly translatable tool holder (e.g., shuttle, ram,
    etc.):Apparatus under subclass 36 wherein the transfer means comprises
    means for gripping the implement mounted for advancing the implement during
    transfer along a straight line.

     SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 749+ for an article
    handler having linear movement.


CLS 483/52
TXT Plural tool holders:
    Apparatus under subclass 51 wherein the transfer means comprises more than
    one gripping means for simultaneously advancing more than one implement
    during transfer.


CLS 483/53
TXT Orthogonally translatable:
    Apparatus under subclass 51 wherein the gripping means is mounted for
    advancing the implement during transfer along perpendicular straight lines.


CLS 483/54
TXT Direct tool exchange between spindle and matrix:
    Apparatus under subclass 30 comprising a support means and a storage means
    and wherein the support means or the storage means comprises the transfer
    means.


CLS 483/55
TXT Spindle comprises tool changer:
    Apparatus under subclass 54 wherein the support means comprises the
    transfer means.


CLS 483/56
TXT Matrix indexes selected tool to transfer position:
    Apparatus under subclass 55 comprising means to orient the storage means so
    as to present an implement selected for transfer to a location accessible
    to the transfer means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66+,    for apparatus comprising an indexing matrix combined with an
    implement transfer means for use with a machine tool.


CLS 483/57
TXT Including means to project tool from matrix:
    Apparatus under subclass 54 wherein the storage means comprises means for
    extending an implement selected for transfer away from the storage means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60+,    for apparatus comprising a matrix having an implement projecting
    means combined with an implement transfer means for use with a machine tool.


CLS 483/58
TXT TOOL TRANSFER TO OR FROM MATRIX:
    Apparatus under the class definition comprising a storage means, and
    wherein the transfer means advances the implement thereto or removes it
    therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16+,    for apparatus comprising a machine tool having a support means
    combined with an implement transfer means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclasses 1.51+ for an article support
    comprising means to reposition an article with respect to a load bearing
    stand.

    221,    Article Dispensing, generally for a process or apparatus for
    dispensing discrete objects from a supply means.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, generally for a means to displace an
    article with respect to a support or supply.


CLS 483/59
TXT Matrix including means to latch tool:
    Apparatus under subclass 58 wherein the storage means comprises means to
    secure the implement thereto.


CLS 483/60
TXT Matrix including means to project tool for transfer:
    Apparatus under subclass 58 wherein the storage means comprises means for
    extending the implement to be removed therefrom away from the storage means.

    (1)     Note.  The implement remains bodily attached to the storage means
    after it has been extended therefrom.


CLS 483/61
TXT Rectilinear:
    Apparatus under subclass 60 wherein the extending means translates the
    implement away from the storage means along a straight line.


CLS 483/62
TXT Pivoting:
    Apparatus under subclass 60 wherein the extending means rotates the
    implement away from the storage means along a circular arc.


CLS 483/63
TXT Plural matrices:
    Apparatus under subclass 58 comprising more than one storage means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 1.55 for plural article supports
    rotatable about a spindle.


CLS 483/64
TXT Including tool replenishing:
    Apparatus under subclass 63 wherein transfer means transfers the implement
    directly from one storage means to another.


CLS 483/65
TXT Including tool pot or adapter:
    Apparatus under subclass 58 wherein the storage means comprises an
    individual detachable receptacle for an implement stored therein, or means
    for fitting thereto an implement of different type, shape, or size than
    originally intended.


CLS 483/66
TXT Indexing matrix:
    Apparatus under subclass 58 comprising means to orient the storage means so
    as to present the implement for transfer to a location accessible to the
    transfer means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    82,     Turning, subclass 159 for a lathe attachment using a rotatable
    cylinder for housing plural guided cutters.


CLS 483/67
TXT Rotary disc:
    Apparatus under subclass 66 wherein the storage means comprises a
    cylindrical implement carrier of generally short axial extent mounted for
    turning about a central axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 1.53 for an article support rotatable
    about a spindle.


CLS 483/68
TXT Chain or belt:
    Apparatus under subclass 66 wherein the storage means comprises an endless
    linked or flexible implement carrier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 1.56 for an endless article carrier
    comprising a chain or belt.


CLS 483/69
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:
    Apparatus under the class definition not elsewhere provided for above.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 483/900
TXT GRIPPING PORTION ENGAGES TOOL SIMULTANEOUS WITH TOOL ROTATING IN SPINDLE:A
    collection of art wherein the transfer means is adapted for engaging the
    implement while the implements is mounted to a spinning tool support.


CLS 483/901
TXT ROBOT END EFFECTORS:
    A collection of art disclosing an implement or support means specially
    adapted for use by a robot.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    901,    Robots, subcollections 30+ for robot end effector.


CLS 483/902
TXT TOOL GRIPPERS:
    A collection of art wherein a means for temporarily securing the implement
    to the transfer means during transfer has particular significance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 86.4+ for a
    handling device comprising means for grasping a load.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 745.1+ for a cylindrical
    bar handling device.


CLS 492/
TTL ROLL OR ROLLER

CLS 492/
TXT

    I.      This is the generic class for a single device, not elsewhere
    provided for, which has a generally cylindrical  work contacting surface
    which surface revolves about the longitudinal axis of the cylinder with
    rolling motion relative to the surface of the work. The device here
    classified includes only that part of the roll or roller structure and its
    support which is rotatably mounted except that a cover or a pad, per se,
    that is disclosed or claimed solely for or in combination with such a roll
    or roller is included herein.  The device here classified may have more
    then a single roller as long as only a single side of a workpiece is
    contacted or treated during a single treatment cycle.

    (1)     Note.  The roll or roller herein classified is generally a treating
    or shaping device although this class is the generic locus for a roll or
    roller not elsewhere provided for.

    (2)     Note.  A pair of rolls or rollers acting on different sides of a
    workpiece simultaneously is classified according to its particular function
    and is not included herein.  See the pertinent references in section II,
    under "SEARCH CLASS".

    (3)     Note.  Incidental disclosure of a roll or roller, per  se, may also
    be found in those classes and   subclasses listed in section II, under
    "SEARCH CLASS".

    II.     The following search notes include all subclasses referring to
    rolls in the subclass title or definition.  Those classes and subclasses
    include roll making, but not setting forth such subject matter in a
    particular subclass is generally not included.  The search notes are
    divided into groups and are followed by an index by class number covering
    all the search classes mentioned.  The group of search notes are:

    A.      Roll or other rotary body, per se.

    1.      Method of making roll.

    2.      Roll with working surface.

    3.      Other rotary body.

    B.      Roll pair with working surfaces.

    C.      Other plural rolls or rollers.

    D.      Miscellaneous combinations including one or more rollers.

    A1.     Method Of Making Roll:

    The following classes provide for various roller making operations as
    indicated.  Classes directed to general working operations or to the
    working of specific materials although such classes may include roll making
    are generally not included in the following list unless a subclass is
    provided therein specific to roll making.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 23.1, for a process of applying and
    securing metallic teeth to the surface of a substantially cylindrical body,
    subclasses 402.01+ for a process of repairing a roll, generally, subclasses
    895+ for a process of  making a roller, and subclasses 898+ for a process
    of making a bearing or component thereof.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 236 for metal rolling with roller
    reconditioning or lubricating.

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements, Making, subclasses 107.1+ for a process
    of making a die roll.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, for a
    method of making a roll by lamination.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 25+ for a process of
    electrolytically coating a cylinder, a roll, or hollow article, and
    subclass 73 for a process of reproducing or forming a hollow body, roll, or
    ring by electrodeposition in which the final product bears a definite
    predetermined conformation dependent upon the particular shape of the
    deposition base, but does not remain with the base upon which the
    deposition is made.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 144+ for a process of bending a
    sheet or plate into a tubular shape and edge joining the meeting edges
    together by metallurgical means.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes, for
    molding and shaping of plastic materials within the class definition.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or Planing, subclass 305 for a machine for
    planing a groove in the curved surface of a roll to provide a scored
    surface; e.g., for forming the surface of a grinding roll, a crushing roll,
    etc.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 230+ for a process of coating the
    interior of a hollow article, including a roll, by other than immersion.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 49+ for a process of grinding a roll, roller,
    shaft, ball, sphere, or piston.

    A2.     Roll With Working Surface:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, subclass 111 for a food or dough roller having
    handles at either end (a) combined with an implement or tool having a
    diverse function or (b) having interchangeable or rearrangeable parts for
    conversion to an implement or tool having a diverse function.

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, subclasses 77 for a rotary machine or tool
    for burnishing a boot or a shoe and subclass 79.5 for a rotor for applying
    wax to a boot or a shoe and polishing the waxed area.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, particularly subclasses
    179+ for a rotary implement of the brush or broom type; i.e., having a head
    constructed for rotation and having a working surface collectively
    constituted of the assembled ends of separate elements such as bristles,
    splints, fibers, broomstraws, grass, or other stems arranged in parallel
    relation and adapted for cleaning or polishing by  brushing or scrubbing or
    for applying paint, powder, or other coating, coloring, or cleaning
    material and subclasses 230+ for a rotary implement under the class
    definition a working face composed of some sort of simple or compound
    fabric and adapted to act as a wiper, dauber, or polisher, or for applying
    a coating of fluid or powdered material.

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, particularly subclass 54 for a gin
    roller to the cylindrical surface of which fibers cling and are drawn out
    in detaching seed from cotton and like fibers, subclasses 94 and 97 for the
    structure of a rotary beating or pricking member which separates and cleans
    fibers by means of teeth or blades which strike or pull the material,
    subclass 128 for combing rolls in the form of a cylindrical body with comb
    teeth mounted on the surface thereof through which fibers are relatively
    drawn into straightened and parallel positions, and subclasses 258+ for the
    structure of a drawing roll, per se, the surface of which is usually
    arranged to travel and cooperate with another surface travelling at a
    different speed to engage and grip a fiber strip at spaced points and
    thereby cause the fibers to slip by each other and the strip to become
    attenuated.

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclasses 27+ for a roll or other
    device employed to finish cloth, the surface thereof treating the cloth by
    rubbing or friction.

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, particularly subclasses 126+, especially
    subclass 128 for the structure of a roller, per se, utilized in a roll pack
    felter, the surface of the roller working the material to be felted by
    entangling the fibers by rubbing and subclasses 219+ for a roll or other
    device utilized in a thread finishing operation which rubs the thread,
    usually with a smooth surface, to effect the finishing operation.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 17.1+ for a roller for treating metal
    foil.

    30,     Cutlery, Subclass 319 for a hand manipulated cutting tool of
    general utility including a blade in the form of a traveling roller and see
    the notes thereto for other location of a rotary blade cutting tool.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 95.3 for a
    rolling cylinder blotting device.

    37,     Excavating, subclass 224 for a cylindrical tool adapted to roll
    over and compress a layer of snow or ice.

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, particularly subclasses 63+ for an
    element of a smoothing machine, and subclass 100 for a smoothing roller
    implement whose surface irons or smoothes textile fabric.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 80 for a fishing
    net handling roller.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twinning, subclasses 112+ for a
    textile spinning or twisting roller.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 253+ for glass sheet or strip
    forming means including a roller, and subclass 370.1 for a roller, per se,
    for glassworking.

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, subclasses 190+ for knit roll padding and
    covering incorporating unknit materials which materials are usually held by
    the loops of a main fabric, but are not formed into any knitted loops and
    are frequently so incorporated as to be readily napped or to constitute
    pile loops providing a working surface of special characteristics.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 244+ for roller
    type washing wringer.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 67+ and 184+ for a roller-like tool
    having a shaped work-engaging surface.

    101,    Printing, particularly subclasses 348+ for an inking roller, having
    a disclosed function of applying ink to a printing surface.  See the search
    note to subclasses 375+ for a rolling contact printing member, the surface
    of which is capable of printing by rolling or rocking upon the work and
    subclass 415.1 for means for attaching to a roller support and stretching a
    flexible sheets employe in a printing operation, which means is commonly
    associated with a rotary support.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 410 for a roll type self-heating tool.

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 57 for a roller, per se, peculiar to a cigar or a
    cigarette making device, the roller being so utilized that its surface when
    rotated acts on the tobacco to form a cigar or cigarette, place a wrapper
    thereon, or perform an analogous operation.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, for a laminated tubular product.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, particularly subclasses 294+  and subclass 296
    for a rotary temple carried by the loom for removing the cloth as it is
    woven and subclasses 383+, particularly, subclasses 384, 408, and 420 for
    textile fabric disclosed as a pad or cover for an ironer roll surface.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical  Manufacture, subclass
    421 for a tire body stitching roller.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 309+ for a dandy roll
    acting on the product on the molding surface to imprint a design or
    watermark on the wet web.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 89+ for a hollow roll with a heat
    transfer device comprising a rotary drum.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclass 4 for a plant or clod
    crushing roller combined with an unearthing device, subclass 13 for a
    toothed pick-off roller, subclass 58 for an opposed plant extracting
    roller, subclasses 93, 95+, and 128 for a toothed rotary digger which combs
    through earth material to recover desired objects therefrom, subclasses 112
    and 129, for a rolling screen or drum separator, and subclass 116 for a
    clod-breaking roller for extractor or separator.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 518+ for a roller which has features
    relating to earth  working other than or in addition to earth compacting.

    184,    Lubrication, particularly, subclass 23 for a roller constituting a
    lubricating device intended to be placed upon an elevator car and in a
    position to lubricate the slideways of the same, and subclass 101 for a
    roller for applying lubricant to a bearing, the roller usually being
    covered with felt to bear and transmit the lubricant to bearings in contact
    with the roller surface.

    219,    Electric Heating, especially, subclass 244 for an electric heater,
    electric heating metal-working apparatus, electrically heated tool or
    instrument provided with a special radiating plate, including such a device
    known as a radiator, rotating cylinder, such as used in a ironing machine,
    etc., or other devices equipped with electric heating means not elsewhere
    classifiable.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, especially subclasses 12+ for a hat-shaping
    roller.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 293+ for a
    cylindrically shaped article or roller used as a comminuting element and
    which presents a peripheral comminuting surface to the material.

    396,    Photography, for a roller especially adapted for photograph
    processing.


    401,    Coating, Implements With Material Supply, subclass 197 for hollow
    porous roller in which the coating material flows therethrough.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 122+ for a roller
    used as a compacting device in the production or repair of a road.

    412,    Bookbinding:  Process and Apparatus, for a roller especially
    adopted for bookbinding.

     413,   Sheet Metal Container Making, appropriate subclass, for a roller
    especially adopted for metal can making.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    subclasses 363+ for a press forming or reshaping means including a roll,
    and subclass 471 for a roller having a significant shaping surface for
    non-metallic material.  Also see the search notes therein.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, for a stock material
    product in the form of a single or plural layer web or sheet and,
    especially, subclasses 34.1+ for a conduit, a cylinder, or a tube type
    article and subclasses 364+ for a coated or a structurally defined rod or
    strand which may take the form of a roll or a roller.

    451,    Abrading, appropriate subclasses for a grinding or abrading roller.

    452,    Butchering, subclass 145 for a hand roll especially adapted for
    tenderizing meat.

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, subclasses 25+ for a corn husking
    roller used in a corn husking machine, the surface of the roll acting on
    the corn to catch and hold the husks and pull them off, and subclass 130
    for a roll which snaps the crop material and separates  the product.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, subclass 133 for a roller die for making a and subclasses 185+
    for a screw threading die, per se.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web; subclass 463 for a corrugating roller; subclass 467
    for a surface treatment roller under the class definition; and subclass 471
    for a roller tool or tool support under the class definition.

    A3.     Other Rotary Body, per se:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 45+ for a roller or wheel used
    in a caster.

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclass 64.5 for a fiber preparation
    feeding roller, and subclass 112 for a carding cylinder.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 240 for a
    roll used as a work support under the class definition.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, particularly, subclasses 214+ for a
    friction wheel used in a friction transmission, the surface of the wheel
    frequently having a covering of friction material to enhance its frictional
    qualities and subclasses 572+ for a flywheel or rotor, such device being
    distinguished by features residing in and pertaining to inertia or momentum
    characteristics.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, particularly, subclass 330 for a passenger
    carrying car in the form of a ball or cylinder which is adapted to be
    rolled along a track and subclass 356 for a freight carrying receptacle in
    the form of a drum or cylinder adapted to be rolled along a track.

    114,    Ships, subclass 220 for a ship fender provided or formed with a
    freely rotating roller.

    144,    Woodworking, subclasses 246.1+ for a roll utilized in woodworking,
    the surface of which when in contact with the work serves to hold it from
    springing, lifting, or vibrating. Subclasses 250.1+ include such roll made
    up of independently-yielding parts to accommodate work irregular in cross
    section.

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 238+
    for a roll type device under the class definition upon which the material
    is accumulated in the form of a roll; e.g., a window shade roller.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclasses 89+ for a moveable roller provided with
    heat transfer means.

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting, subclass 131 for a lifting roller for a
    drop hammer.

    188,    Brakes, subclass 218 for a rotor, drum, or disc attached to or
    revolving with a wheel and to which a brake is applied.

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to Vehicles, subclass 56 for a trolley
    collector contact element of the roller type, the peripheral surface of the
    contact element providing rolling contact with the trolley wire.

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids, Guides, and Ways, subclass 37, for a
    roller particularly designed for use in a roller way.

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, subclasses 385+, 387, 501, 604+ 608, 611+,
    624+, 765, 779, 780+, 806+, 824+, 835, 842+, and 845 for a roller
    constituting the load moving element of a power-driven conveyor or
    constituting a guide, support, or other element of such conveyor and
    subclasses 359+ and 539 for a nondriven roller conveyor combined with a
    power-driven conveyor.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, subclasses 190+ for a
    roller or mount details therefor for feeding material without utilizing the
    leading or trailing ends to effect movement of the material.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 570+ for a coil holder
    about which elongated material is wound or unwound, and subclasses 118+ for
    a spool about which strand material is wound or unwound.

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for Applying Pushing or Pulling Force, for
    a roller especially adapted for pushing or pulling under the class
    definition.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, particularly subclass 275 for a roller
    particularly designed to serve as a rotary sheet feeding means and function
    to present a sheet to a desired position or remove it from a pack.

    293,    Vehicle Fenders, subclasses 17+ for a rotary drum or roller
    employed as a vehicle fender.

    295,    Railway Wheels and Axles, subclasses 1+ for a railway wheel.

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclasses 5+ for a wheel for a
    land vehicle.

    346,    Recorders, subclass 138 for a record receiver in the form of a drum.

    355,    Photocopying, subclass 133 for a roll or roller especially adapted
    for use in contact printing.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 221 for a
    roller adapted for discharging or preventing accumulation of electricity or
    electric charge.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 272+ for a
    recording tablet having a cylindrical record-bearing surface.

    384,    Bearings subclasses 565+ and 619 for a roller, per se, designed for
    use as a bearing element.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 279+ for development rollers,
    subclass 313 for transfer rollers, subclasses 330+ for heat and pressure
    rollers providing fixing, subclass 357 for cleaning an image surface by
    rollers, and subclasses 361+ for document handling.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, particularly subclasses 636+ for a feed
    roller and its support which feeds and holds paper directly in contact with
    the platen in a typewriting machine and subclasses 659+ includes a
    typewriter platen roll, usually in the form of a rotatable cylinder, the
    surface of which supports and carries the paper to a position to receive
    successive lines of printing and which receives the blow or impact of the
    type during the printing operation.

    407,    Cutters, for Shaping, subclasses 30+ for a rotary cutter to be used
    in a shaping machine.

    432,    Heating, subclass 246 for a feeding or conveying roller especially
    adapted for use in a high temperature environment.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 484+ and 490+ for a rotary cylindrical tool
    having a flexible or yielding work-contacting abrading periphery and
    subclasses 541+ for a rotary cylindrical tool used in an abrading machine,
    the tool being in the nature of a roller having a peripheral working
    surface for effecting abrading.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components,
    particularly, subclasses 152+ for a positive drive pulley or guide roll and
    subclasses 166+ for a friction drive pulley or guide roll.

    B.      Roll Pair with Working Surface

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 262 for a mop
    wringer employing one or more pressure rollers, the surfaces of the rollers
    acting on the mop to squeeze moisture therefrom.

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclass 49 for a  rolling squeeze
    gin in which fiber is caught and drawn between two surfaces in rolling
    contact, the angle of contact being such that the seed being separated from
    the fiber will not enter.

    29,     Metal working, subclass 81.03 for a plurality of roll elements
    utilized to bend or misshape a workpiece causing scale to break away from
    the surface thereof.

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, particularly, subclasses 49+ for a
    roller presser device having plural cooperating rolls wherein there is a
    single presser roller having contact with two or more pressing rollers, the
    material passing between and being pressed by the rolls and subclass 101
    for a smoothing implement consisting of opposed rollers between which
    textile material is passed effecting a smoothing thereof.

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 104+ for a corn picker or husker employing a
    pair of rotating rollers which act on an ear of corn to pinch or snap the
    ear from the stalk.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, particularly, subclass 99 for
    a squeezing machine of the roll type having a pair of rolls which effect a
    squeezing action on textiles passed therebetween while subjected to a
    liquid, subclasses 100+ for a squeezing machine having a roll and a bed
    made up of rollers which effect a squeezing action on textiles passed
    therebetween while subjected to a liquid, and subclasses 244+ for a roller
    type wringer, the surfaces of the opposed rolls of which act on textiles
    passed therebetween to express excess liquid from the material.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, subclass 43 for a leather working machine
    having a rotary tool, generally, with a smooth working periphery and
    commonly employed as a leather wringer or roller press for leather.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 199+ for a roller  couple or a rolling
    mill.

    76,     Metal Tools, and Implements, Making, particularly, subclass 27 for
    a saw-blade stretching and straightening machine comprising a pair of
    rollers or a roller and bed which effect a straightening and stretching of
    the blade when passed therebetween and subclass 89.2 for a swaging device
    employing a roller which act on metal causing it to flow to sharpen an edge
    thereof.

    84,     Music, subclass 94.1 for a cylinder provided with projecting pins
    used to pick the tuned sounding teeth of the combs of certain type musical
    instruments; e.g., Swiss music boxes.

    100,    Presses, subclasses 155+ for a roller type concurrent conveying and
    pressing press, not elsewhere provided for especially subclass 176 for at
    least two coating rotary bodies between  which material is compacted.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, particularly, subclasses 114+ for opposed rolls
    modifying a coating after application to the work and subclasses 224, 227+,
    and 249+ for opposed rotary applicators.

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 300+ for a device for treating tobacco with
    fluid or fluent material wherein a pair of rollers is employed, the tobacco
    being conveyed through the rollers after fluid treatment, wherein the
    rollers express the excess fluid therefrom.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclass 428 for metal casting  apparatus employing
    a roll pair, the surfaces of which shape the cross section of molten metal
    and support it until firm enough to retain said cross section, the shaped
    metal subsequently being continuously or substantially continuously
    withdrawn.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids,  subclasses 606+ for
    an automatic assorting device which employs spaced rollers forming gauging
    slots which pass articles whose maximum dimensions are less than the slot
    dimensions.

    226,    Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, for a method of or
    apparatus for feeding material without utilizing both the leading and
    trailing ends to effect movement of the material.

    366,    Agitating, subclasses 69+ for a rubber mixing or kneading mill
    including a roll.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,
    subclasses 363+ for a roll pair press forming or reshaping means; see the
    search notes thereunder.

    452,    Butchering, subclass 142 for coacting rollers especially adapted
    for tenderizing meat.

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating, subclass 130 for a pair of closely
    spaced rolls which snap the crop material and separates the product.

    C.      For Other Plural Rolls Or Rollers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclass 231 for a washboard
    having a rubbing surface of rollers.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 401+ for feeding and, in   particular, subclass
    436 for roller feed to a  cutting machine.

    100,    Presses, subclass 210 for a roll or platen press not elsewhere
    provided for.

    104,    Railways, particularly, subclass 135 for a slideway having a track
    surface made up of a series of rollers, subclass 168 for a car propelling
    means in which the propelling element consists of vertically or
    transversely extending live rolls, and subclass 245 for a derailment guard
    comprising nonload carrying guide rollers.

    131,    Tobacco, subclass 56 for a cigar or cigarette making machine having
    cooperating rolling surfaces comprised of a plurality of rollers.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, particularly, subclasses 780+ for a
    conveyor utilizing a series of rolls attached to an endless moving member
    and subclasses 804+ for a belt trough wherein the troughing means is a
    series of rollers.

    D.      Miscellaneous combinations including one or more rolls or rollers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, subclass 111 for a pastry type rolling pin with a
    combined or convertible feature.

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, particularly, subclass 8.3 for a lasting
    machine with driven rotating means for rubbing or carrying a shoe upper
    into conformity with a last, subclass 34 for a shoe sole laying and
    leveling machine utilizing a roller as a pressure applying member, subclass
    65 for a toe or heel molding machine utilizing a roller as a molding
    member, and subclass 77 for a boot or shoe burnishing machine employing a
    rotating tool.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 210.5 for a
    graining implement, per se, and see the notes thereto for the locus of
    other graining devices.

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware, subclasses 87+ and, specifically,
    subclasses 91, 106, and 107 wherein a roller is employed in a bracket as a
    guide or stay member.

    24,     Buckles, Buttons Clasps, etc., subclass 488 for a clasp utilizing a
    roll.

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, particularly subclasses 99+ for a
    device employing a roller for spreading or smoothing cloth.

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 7.3 for a rotary cutter or die for use in
    making a fence barb, and subclasses 17.1+ for a machine or a method for
    manufacturing foil or other thin sheet which may include rolling.

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, particularly, subclass 449 for a rule or
    ruler designed for parallel line work which is provided with a roller
    member to allow advance or movement of the rule from one line to the next
    while constantly maintaining the direction of the straightedge and
    subclasses 734+ and 772+ for a distance measuring device of the rolling
    contact type utilizing a roller.

    37,     Excavating, subclass 117.5 for a excavating scraper with a roller.

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, particularly,  subclasses 44+ for
    a roller presser.

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 116 for a calendar and
    a roll about which the calendar may be wound and subclasses 344+ for a copy
    holder including a roller in continuous engagement with web or sheet of
    copy to advance the copy therepast and, particularly, subclasses 345+ for
    one which includes a rotary pinch-pair of such feed rollers.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 253+ for  apparatus for forming a
    glass sheet from a plastic mass of glass by a rolling operation and
    subclass 370.1 for a glass working or treating roll, per se.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, particularly, subclasses 84+
    for a rotary scrubber employing a roll and subclasses 97+ for a squeezing
    device of the roll type.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, particularly, subclasses 13+ for a leather
    skiving and slitting device with a roller feed and subclasses 37+ for a
    device under the class definition utilizing a rotary tool in the treatment
    of leather.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 91+ for deforming of a rotating
    metallic workpiece by a rotating tool and a cooperating tool presenting an
    opposing concave surface.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 824 for compressional testing by
    applying a load to a specimen with a roller.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 824+ for a cutting tool guide employing roller
    elements.

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 462+ and 464+ for a
    rolling surface treating dairy food: subclasses 521, 522, and 605+ for a
    rotating conical or cylindrical surface used to remove the hulls from
    grain: subclasses 557+  for a seeder having a belt or roller which
    cooperates with another member to press out and remove the seeds;
    subclasses 574 and 575 for a roller type means for removing shells; and
    subclasses 585 and 640 for a roller that pulls off the skin of the food.

    100,    Presses, subclass 153 for a concurrent pressing and  conveying
    press, not elsewhere provided for, in which an endless conveyor coacts with
    a roll.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 392 for freight cars having a roll
    in a car doorway or on the floor  to facilitate freight handling.

    114,    Ships, subclass 181 for a hawse pipe wherein a friction roller is
    utilized.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, for coating apparatus employing  a rotary
    applicator.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 177 for a pipe structure.

    144,    Woodworking, particularly, subclass 255 for a woodbending machine
    with a roller bending member.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    421 for a tire building stitching device.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclass 11.1 for an evaporator designed
    to evaporate a liquid in film   or thin layer form, the film being spread
    or supported on a rotary drum or disc.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclass 368 for  a roller press
    and felt combination for squeezing a  wet web of fibrous material.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 133+ and see the subclasses there noted
    for an earth working implement utilizing diverse tools, wherein one of the
    tools comprises a roller.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 331+ for an earth
    boring bit or bit element including a  cutting or crushing roller or disc.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 20 for a motor vehicle provided with one
    or more rollers for supporting it.

    188,    Brakes, particularly subclass 25 for a velocipede brake wherein the
    brake shoe is a cylinder or other  rotating body, subclass 37 for a wheel
    and rail brake applied between the wheel and rail by a shoe-chock in the
    form of a roller, and subclass 39 for  brakes applied to the track, and not
    to the rail upon which the wheels run, wherein the brake shoe is a wheel or
    cylinder.

    211,    Supports:  Racks, subclass 151 for a shelf whose article supporting
    parts include a roller.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 52.1+ for a special machine for
    ironing a collar, cuff, or neckband which may have a roller as an ironing
    element.

    238,    Railways:  Surface Track, subclass 16 for a rail provided with
    rollers for engagement with a vehicle  wheel to hold the wheel to rail,
    particularly on a  curve.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclass 155 for a tension device
    under the class definition in which a rotary pulley, wheel, or disc is
    employed.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclass 162 for a protective chafe iron for a
    vehicle having a roller member.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 50+ for a stacked card
    dispensing cabinet utilizing a friction roller type ejector.

    384,    Bearings, subclasses 428+ for a rotary bearing mounting or support.

    413,    Sheet Metal Container Making, subclasses 1+ for a method of
    fabricating a sheet metal can.

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons, Housings, and Flexible Couplings for
    Rotary Shafts, subclass 184 for a  gudgeon, per se, and the manner of
    attaching a gudgeon to a shaft, roll, or the like.

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener, or Washer Making:  Process and
    Apparatus, particularly,     subclasses 117+ for roll forging means for
    making a horse shoe nails and subclass 133 for a spike machine partly
    forming a spike by means of a dies set in the periphery of a roll.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, particularly, subclasses 160+ for a box-making machine
    utilizing a rotary element for form scoring a fold line on a box blank and
    subclasses 257+ for a machine with a  roll carried opener for opening one
    end of a tube of bag length for further operation.

    601,    Surgery:  Kinesitherapy, subclasses 115+, 118+, 122+, 128, 129+,
    and 131+ for a massage device provided with a roller and designed to be
    rolled over the body.

    INDEX TO CLASSES REFERRED TO IN
    PRECEDING SECTION

    7,      Compound Tools, subclass 111

            for a combined or convertible

            pastry rolling pin.     A2, D

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making,

            rotary tool shoe lasting

            machine, sub. 8.3       D

            roller member sole

            laying and leveling

            machine, sub. 34        D

            roller type toe and

            heel molding machine,

            sub. 65         D

            rotary tool shoe burnishing

            machine, sub. 77        A2, D

            waxing or polishing rotor,

            sub.  79.5              A2

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing,

            and General Cleaning,

            rotary brush or broom,

            subs. 179+      A2

            graining implement sub. 210.5   D

            rotary fabric implement,

            subs.  230+     A2

            roller type mop wringer,

            sub. 262                B

    16,     Miscellaneous Hardware,

            roll or wheel used in caster,

            subs. 45+               A3

            wheel or wheel and guide

            roller in or for panel hanger,

            traveler, or track,

            subs.    87+            D

    19,     Textiles: Fiber Preparation,

            rolling squeeze gin, sub. 49    B

            gin roller, sub. 54     A2

             fiber preparation feeding roller

            sub.  64.5              A3

            beating rotor, sub. 94  A2

            picking rotor, sub. 97  A2

            carding cylinder, sub. 112      A3

            cylindrical comber, sub. 128    A2

            drawing roll, subs. 258+        A2

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc.,

            clasp utilizing roll,

            sub. 488                D

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing,

            rubbing device or roll,

            subs. 27 +      A2

            roller spreader, subs. 99+      D

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing,

            felter roller, subs. 126+       A2

            thread rubbing roll or device,

            subs. 219+      A2

    29,     Metal Working,

            rotary cutter or die

            for making a fence barb,

            sub. 7.3        D

            roller for treating metal

            foil, subs. 17.1+       A2, D

            applying or securing

            metallic teeth on a roll,

            sub. 23.1               A1

            scale-breaking roller,

            sub. 81.03              B

            repairing a roll,

            subs. 402.01+   A1

            making a roller, subs. 895+     A1

            making a bearing or

            component thereof,

            subs. 898+      A1

    30,     Cutlery,

            traveling roller blade cutter,

            sub. 319                A2

    33,     Geometrical Instruments,

            parallel line ruler provided

            with roller, sub. 449   D

            rolling contact distance

            measuring device

            subs. 734+ and 772+     D

    34,     Drying and Gas Vapor

            Contact With Solids,

            rolling cylinder blotting device,

            sub. 95.3               A2

            roll used as support element,

            sub. 240                A3

    37,     Excavating,

            excavating scraper with roller,

            sub. 117.5              D

            compressing roller for

            snow or ice, sub. 224   A2

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing,

            roller presser, subs. 44+       D

            opposed or cooperating roll type

            pressing or smoothing device,

            subs. 49+, 63+, and 101 A2, B

            implement with roller,

            sub. 100                A2

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting,

            roller for winding calendar,

            sub. 116                D

            roller display element,
    subs. 344+      D

    43,     Fishing, Trapping,

            and Vermin Destroying,

            fish net handling

            roller, sub. 8  A2

    56,     Harvesters,

            roller type corn picker,

            subs. 104+      B

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting,

            and Twinning, Textile spinning

            or twisting roller,

            subs. 112+      A2

    65,     Glass Manufacturing,

            glass molding device

            utilizing roller,

            subs. 253+      A2, D

            glassworking roller, per se,

            sub. 370.1              A2, D

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting,

            knit roll pad or cover

            incorporating unknit materials,

            subs. 190+      A2

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating

            Apparatus, rotary scrubbing

            device, subs. 84+       D

            roll type squeezing device,

            subs. 97+               D

            cooperating roll type

            squeezer or wringer,

            subs. 99, 100+, and 244+        A2, B

            roller washboard, sub. 231      C

    69,     Leather Manufactures,

            leather skiving and

            slitting device with roller feed,

            subs. 13+               D

            rotary tool leather

            working device, subs. 37+       D

            leather wringer or roller

            press for leather, sub. 43      B

    72,     Metal Deforming,

            shaping "roller",

            subs. 67+               A2

            "roller" concave,

            concave, subs. 91+,     D

            shaping  "roller"

            subs. 184+      A2

            roller-couple, subs. 199+       B

            roller reconditioning,

            subs. 236               A1

    73,     Measuring and Testing,

            compressional testing

            by roller, sub. 824     D

    74,     Machine Element or

            Mechanism, friction wheels,

            subs. 214+      A3

            flywheel or rotor, subs. 572+   A3

    76,     Metal Tools and Implements,

            Making, roller type saw-blade

            stretching and straightening

            device, sub. 27 B

            roller type tool sharpener,

            sub. 89.2               B

            process of making die roll,

            subs. 107.1+    A1

    83,     Cutting,

            roller feed to a cutting

            machine; subs. 401+     C

            roller guide for cutting tool,

            subs. 824+      D

    84,     Music,

            cylinder picker for comb

            teeth in music boxes,

            sub. 94.1               B

    99,     Foods and Beverages:

            Apparatus, roller surface

            treating dairy food,

            subs. 462+ and 464+     D

            rotating conical or

            cylindrical hull remover

            subs. 521, 522, and 605+        D

            seed remover with belt

            or roll presser,

            and subs. 557+  D

            nut removing rollers,

            subs. 574 and  575      D

            roller pulling external

            portion from food,

            subs. 585 and 640       D

    100,    Presses, belt and roller press,

            sub. 153                D

            roller press, subs. 155+        B

            roller or platen press,

            sub. 210                C

    101,    Printing,

            rolling contact printing

            member, subs. 375+      A2

            roller inker, subs. 348+        A2

            flexible sheet securing device

            associated with rotary supports,

            sub. 415.1              A2

    104,    Railways,

            roller track sledway,

            sub. 135                C

            live roll car propelling means,

            sub. 168                C

            guide roller derailment guards,

            sub. 245                C

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock,

            rolling passenger car body,

            sub.  330               A3

            rolling freight car body,

            sub. 356                A3

            freight contacting roller in

            freight car, sub. 392   D

    114,    Ships,

            hawse pipe with friction roller,

            sub. 181                D

            roller fender, sub. 220 A3

    118,    Coating Apparatus,

            coating apparatus with roll pair,

            subs. 114+, 224, 227+,

            and 249+                B

            coating apparatus employing

            rotary applicator,      D

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces,

            self-heating roller tool,

            sub. 410                A2

    131,    Tobacco,

            cooperating roller type cigar

            and cigarette making machine,

            sub. 56         C

            cigar and cigarette making

            machine roller, sub. 57 A2

            fluid tobacco treating

            device with expressing  roll,

            subs. 300+      B

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits,     A2

            pipe structure, sub. 177        D

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving,

            rotary temple, subs. 294+       A2

            textile fabric pad or

            cover for roll,

            subs. 383, 408, and 420 A2

    144,    Woodworking,

            feed or presser roll,

            subs. 246.1+ and 250.1+ A3

            wood bending machine with

            bending roller, sub. 255        D

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels,     A3

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and

            MiscellaneousChemical

            Manufacture,    A1

            tire body stitching roller,

            sub. 421                A2, D

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators

            for a film type evaporator

            utilizing a rotary drum or

            disc as a moving film

            support, sub. 11.1      D

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure,

            Partition, or Panel,

            roll type, subs. 238+   A

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber

            Liberation, dandy rolls,

            subs. 309+      A2

            roller press or felt,

            sub. 368                D

    164,    Metal Founding,

            cooperating roll type

            continuous casting apparatus,

            sub. 428                B

    165,    Heat Exchange,

            roll with heat transfer means,

            subs. 89+               A2

    171,    Unearthing Plants or

            Buried Objects,

            plant or clod crushing roller

            combined with unearthing

            device, sub. 13 A2

            opposed plant extracting

            rollers, sub. 58        A2

            toothed rotary digger for

            recovering buried objects,

            subs. 93, 95+, and 128  A2

            rolling screen or drum

            separator, subs. 112 and 129    A2

            clod-breaking roller for

            extractor or separator,

            sub. 116                A2

    172,    Earth Working,

            diverse earth working

            implement including rolling

            implement, subs. 133+   D

            roller with features other than

            or in addition to compacting,

            subs. 518+      A2, A3

    173,    Tool Driving or Impacting,

            Lifting roller for a drop

            hammer, sub. 131        A3

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the

            Earth, earth boring bit with

            roller, subs. 331+      D

    180,    Motor Vehicles,

            with one or more supporting

            roller, sub. 20 D

    184,    Lubrication,

            roller or rotary brush elevator

            guide lubricator,

            sub. 23         A2

            roller type bearing lubricator,

            sub. 101                A2

    188,    Brakes,

            velocipede brake with roller

            shoe, sub. 25   D

            wheel and rail brake with

            roller shoe chock, sub. 37      D

            track brake with rotary shoe,

            sub. 39         D

            brake rotor, drum, or disc,

            sub. 218                A3

    191,    Electricity:  Transmission to

            Vehicles, roller trolley

            collector, sub. 56      A3

    193,    Conveyors, Chutes, Skids,

            Guides, and Ways,

            roller for rollerway,

            sub. 37         A3

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven,

            live roll,

            subs. 780+, etc.        A3, C

            belt troughs comprising a

            series of rollers, subs. 804+   C

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes,

            Compositions Used Therein,

            and Methods of Preparing the

            Compositions, subs. 25+ A1

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and

            Assorting Solids,

            automatic assorting device

            employing spaced roller

            forming gauging slots,

            subs. 606+      B

    211,    Supports:  Racks,

            shelf with roller article-

            supporting member,

            sub. 151                D

    219,    Electric Heating,

            electrically heated rotating

            cylinder, sub. 244      A2

    223,    Apparel Apparatus,

            hat-shaping roller,

            subs. 12+               A2

            collar, cuff, or neckband

            ironer utilizing roller ironing

            element, subs. 52.1+    D

    226,    Advancing Material of

            Indeterminate Length,   B

            subs. 190+      A3

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding,

            bending sheet or plate into

            a tubular shape and

            metallurgically bonding

            together the meeting edges,

            subs. 144+      A1

    238,    Railways:  Surface Track,

            track curve provided with

            wheel engaging roller,

            sub. 16         D

    241,    Solid Material Comminution

            or Disintegration,

            cylindrical comminuting

            element, subs. 293+     A2

    242,    Winding and Reeling,

            fabric core or holder,

            subs. 68+               A3

            winding drum or sand reel,

            sub. 117                A3

            bobbin or spool, subs. 118+     A3

            wheel or pulley tension

            device, sub. 155        D

    254,    Implements or Apparatus for

            Applying Pushing or Pulling

            Force,          A3

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic

            Article Shaping or Treating:

            Processes, process of working,

            shaping, or molding of plastic

            material within the class

            definition              A1

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering,

            rotary feeding conveyor roll,

            sub. 275                A3

    280,    Land Vehicles,

            chafe iron with roller members,

            sub. 162                D

    293,    Vehicle Fenders,

            rotary drum or roller,

            subs. 17+               A3

    295,    Railway Wheels and Axles,

            railway wheels, subs. 1+        A3

    301,    Land Vehicles: Wheels

            and Axles,

            wheels, subs. 5+        A3

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure,

            dispensing cabinet with

            friction roller

            ejector, subs. 50+      D

    346,    Recorders,

            drum type record receiver,

            sub. 138                A3

    355,    Photocopying,

            roller for contact

            printing in combination

            with other photocopying

            means, sub. 133 A3

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems

            And Devices, electric

            discharging roller, sub. 221    A3

    366,    Agitating,

            for a roll couple mixing or

            kneading mill, subs. 69+        B

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage

            or Retrieval,

            cylindrical recording element,

            subs. 272+      A3

    384,    Bearings, rotary bearing mount

            or support subs. 428+   D

            roller structure, per se, for

            roller bearings,

            subs. 565+ and 619.     A3

    396,    Photography,

            roller for photograph

            processing      A2

    399,    Electrophotography,

            subclasses 279+ for

            development rollers,

            subclass 313 for transfer

            rollers, subclasses 330+

            for heat and pressure

            rollers providing fixing,

            subclass 357 for

            cleaning an image surface

            by rollers, and

            subclasses 361+ for

            document handling,      A3

    400,    Typewriting Machines,

            paper feed roller,

            subs. 636+      A3

            platen roll, subs. 659+ A3

    401,    Coating Implements With

            Material Supply, hollow porous

            coating roller, sub. 197        A2

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or

            Apparatus, subs. 122+   A2

    407,    Cutters, for Shaping,

            subs. 30+               A3

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling, or

            Planing, roll grooving device,

            sub. 305                A1

    412,    Bookbinding:

            Process and Apparatus,

            bookbinding roller,     A2

    413,    Sheet Metal Container Making,

            method of making sheet metal

            canster subs. 1+        A, D

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware

            Shaping or Treating: Apparatus,

            for roll press shaping or reshaping

            couples,

            subs. 363+      A2, B

            shaping roller, sub. 471        A2

    427,    Coating Processes,

            process of coating interior of

            hollow article,

            subs. 230+      A1

    428,    Stock Material or

            Miscellaneous Articles,

            conduit or tube type products,

            subs. 34.1+     A2

            coated or structurally defined

            rod or strand, subs. 364+       A2

    451,    Abrading, flexible

            rotary cylinder tool

            subs. 484+ and 494+     A3

            rigid rotary cylinder

            tool subs. 541+ A3

            process of grinding

            roll, roller, shaft, subs. 49+  A1

    452,    Butchering, hand roll for

            tenderizing meat, sub. 145      A2, B

    460,    Crop Threshing or Separating,

            corn husking roller,

            subs. 25+               A2

            crop-snapping and

            separating roll, sub. 130       A2, B

    464,    Rotary Shafts, Gudgeons,

            Housings, and Flexible

            Couplings for Rotary Shafts,

            for gudgeon for roll

            or roller, sub. 184     D

    470,    Threaded, Headed Fastener,

            or Washer Making:  Process

            and Apparatus,

            subs. 117+ for forging roll for

            making horse shoe nail. D

            sub. 133 for a roller die for

            shaping wrought

            fastener spike, D

            subs. 185+ for screw

            threading die,  A2

    474,    Endless Belt Power

            Transmission Systems or

            Components,     A3

    493,    Manufacturing Container

            or Tube From Paper; or

            Other Manufacturing From a

            Sheet or Web, box making

            machines with rotary

            formscoring element,

            subs. 160+      D

            bag making machine with

            roll carried tube end opener,

            subs. 257+      D

            corrugating roller,

            sub. 463                A2

            roller tool or tool support,

            sub. 471                A2

    601,    Surgery:  Kinesitherapy,

            roller-type body massage

            device, subs. 115+, 118+,

            122+, 128, 129+, and 131+       D


CLS 492/1
TXT METAL DEFORMING ROLL:
    Roll under the class definition especially adapted for mechanically
    treating metallic work by changing the shape or size of the work.

    (1)     Note.  A metal deforming roll which treats a single side of the
    metal workpiece during a single pass are found in this subclass.  These
    devices may have more than a single roll.  Opposed roll pairs and rollers
    which treat both sides of the metal during a single pass are found in Class
    72, Metal Deforming, subclasses 199+.

    (2)     Note.  A roll classified herein may be made of any
    material-metallic, nonmetallic, or composite thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 199+ for a process or apparatus for
    metal deforming by use of a roller or roller-like tool, also see (1) Note
    above.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 418+ for a roller especially adapted for
    continuous or semicontinuous casting.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 78+ for a roller for shaping powdered metal and subclasses 363+
    for a roller for shaping nonmetallic material.


CLS 492/2
TXT Antideflection means:
    Roll under subclass 1 including means for minimizing the distortion or
    deviation produced in the roll by the force or energy associated with the
    metal deforming.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for a roller including an inflatable chamber, not elsewhere
    provided for, having antideflection means.

    6+,     for a roller, not elsewhere provided for, having antideflection
    means.


CLS 492/3
TXT Specific composition:
    Roll under subclass 1 which is made of a specific metallic material,
    nonmetallic material, or composite thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for a concentric layered annular roll of specific composition, not
    elsewhere provided for.

    58,     for a single annular member of specific metallic composition.

    59,     for a single annular member of specific nonmetallic composition.


CLS 492/4
TXT WITH INFLATIBLE CHAMBER:
    Roll under the class definition which includes a sealed cavity filled with
    fluid under pressure or with hydrostatically incompressible fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 165 for a brush
    or broom which is collapsible for entrance through a narrow mouth of
    hollowware and expansible after entrance and subclass 213 for a rotary
    wiper or polisher of like nature.

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, for inflatable wheel or tire structure.

    295,    Railway Wheels and Axles, subclass 12 for a wheel under the class
    definition having a pneumatic device for supporting the wheel tread portion.

    451,    Abrading, subclass 505 for a rotary cylindrical abrading tool with
    a flexible or yielding periphery tensioned by inflation.


CLS 492/5
TXT Antideflection means:
    Roll under subclass 4 which includes means for minimizing the distortion or
    deviation produced in the roll by the force or energy associated with its
    usage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for a metal deforming roll with antideflection means.

    6+,     for a roll, not elsewhere provided for, with antideflection means.


CLS 492/6
TXT WITH ANTIDEFLECTION MEANS:
    Roll under the class definition which includes means for minimizing the
    distortion or deviation produced in the roll by the force or energy
    associated with its usage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for a metal deforming roll with antideflection means.

    5,      for a roll, with an inflatible chamber and having antideflection
    means.


CLS 492/7
TXT Rotatable relative to support shaft:
    Roll under subclass 6 wherein the outer surface of the roll or roller turns
    or spins independently.


CLS 492/8
TXT WITH MAGNETIC MEANS, PER SE:
    Roll under the class definition which includes specific magnet or
    electromagnetic structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    355,    Photocopying, subclass 133 for a roll or roller especially adapted
    for use in contact printing.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 279+ for development rollers,
    particularly subclass 282 for magnetic brush; subclass 313 for transfer
    rollers; subclasses 330+ for heat and pressure rollers providing fixing;
    subclass 356 for magnetic cleaning of imaging surface; subclass 357 for
    cleaning image surface by rollers; and subclasses 361+ for document
    handling.


CLS 492/9
TXT WITH MEASURING, TESTING, OR INDICATING MEANS:
    Roll under the class definition having means (a) for sensing or detecting,
    (b) for analyzing some condition of the roll or roller, or (c) for
    signaling the existence or degree of a specific parameter.

    (1)     Note.  A roll under this subclass is in nearly every instance a
    treating or shaping roller since there are numerous measuring, testing, or
    indicating classes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30+,    for a roll having surface indentations, projections, or slits.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 200+ for an indicator of the
    fact and of the direction of rotation of an element or mechanism, shaft,
    etc.


CLS 492/10
TXT Including signal or control means:
    Roll under subclass 9 having means (a) for communicating or transmiting
    information or (b) for regulating operation of the roll.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes a roll having a variegated surface.


CLS 492/11
TXT Including gauge:
    Roll under subclass 9 having a standard or scale of measurement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 501+ for a gauge including a
    roller and subclasses 700+ for a distance measuring roll.

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 669+ and see the subclasses there noted
    for an earth working tool, including a rolling tool, whose position with
    respect to the earth is determined by a wheel or wheel substitute.


CLS 492/12
TXT WITH IMPELLOR; E.G., FAN, PUMP:
    Roll under the class definition which has a rotating device used to force a
    fluid or fluid-like material in a given direction under pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    99,     Foods and Beverages:  Apparatus, subclasses 518+ for a grain
    hulling means having a fluid applying means associated therewith.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclasses 38+ for a
    comminuting means associated with a fluid means.

    416,    Fluid Reaction Surfaces (i.e., Impellers), for fan structure, per
    se.


CLS 492/13
TXT WITH HANDLE:
    Roll under the class definition having means adapted to be accommodated in
    the hand of the user to facilitate manipulation of the roll during working.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, for a hand manipulated
    roll with a working surface and see general class definition of this class
    (492), section A2, "SEARCH CLASS", for the line as to what is provided for
    in Class 15.


CLS 492/14
TXT Rolling pin or pastry roller:
    Roll under subclass 13 especially adapted for rolling out or shaping dough.

    (1)     Note.  The features in combination with the roll which are here
    included are limited to such features as are supported by the roll or its
    shaft and rotate with the roll.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    7,      Compound Tools, subclass 111 for a pastry-type rolling pin with a
    combined or convertible feature not provided for in Class 492.


CLS 492/15
TXT COMBINED; E.G., WITH DRIVING GEAR, WITH VIBRATING MEANS:
    Roll under the class definition claimed in combination with features other
    than the roll and its supporting shaft extension, such as work support
    extension, driving gears, locking means, vibrating means, damping means etc.

    (1)     Note.  The features in combination with the roll which are here
    included are limited to such features as are supported by the roll or its
    shaft and rotate with the roll.


CLS 492/16
TXT ROTATABLE RELATIVE TO SUPPORTING SHAFT:
    Roll under the class definition wherein the outer surface of the roll
    revolves around a center shaft which supports the roll.

    (1)     Note.  Class 384, Bearings, provides for a bearing or guide for a
    roll, or roll element supporting member and such bearing or guide combined
    with a support for the bearing or guide, the member supported by the
    bearing or guide may be included by name as a type of roll where no
    significant structure of the roll is claimed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclass 103 for a roller made up of a
    plurality of spindles so as to be (each) rotatable on a bowed supporting
    shaft for fabric web spreading.

    384,    Bearings, subclass 418 for a bearing and support for a roller
    conveyor.


CLS 492/17
TXT Coating treatment or applicator:
    Roll under subclass 16 which is especially adapted (a) for shaping or
    modifying a coating or (b) for applying a coating.

    (1)     Note.  Class 15, Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning,
    specifically provides for a coating device having a roll for transferring
    coating material from a source of supply to the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24+,    for a roll having a sheet edge holder, which roll is especially
    adapted for coating treatment or as an applicator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, especially subclasses
    104.93+ for a roll or roller coated or impregnated with material supply and
    subclasses 230+ for a rotary implement under the class definition having a
    working force composed of some sort of simple or compound fabric and
    adapted to act as a wiper, dauber, or polisher, or for applying a coating
    of fluid or powdered material.

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclass 103 for a roller made up of a
    plurality of spindles so as to be each rotatable on a bowed supporting
    shaft for fabric spreading.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, especially subclasses 224, 227+, and 249+ for
    opposed rotary applicators.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 279+ for development rollers,
    subclass 313 for transfer rollers, subclasses 330+ for heat and pressure
    rollers providing fixing, subclass 357 for cleaning image surface by
    rollers, and subclasses 361+ for document handling.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclass 197 for an hollow
    porous roller in which the coating material flows therethrough.


CLS 492/18
TXT Printing or copying:
    Roll under subclass 17 especially adapted for (a) producing readable matter
    or like communication of information of (b) reproducing or duplicating such
    matter or information.

    (1)     Note.  See the search notes under subclass 17.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for a roll having a sheet edge holder, which roll is especially
    adapted for printing or copying.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    355,    Photocopying, subclass 133 for a roll or roller especially adapted
    for use in contact printing.

    399,    Electrophotography, subclasses 279+ for development rollers,
    subclass 313 for transfer rollers, subclasses 330+ for heat and pressure
    rollers providing fixing, subclass 357 for cleaning image surface by
    rollers, and subclasses 361+ for document handling.


CLS 492/19
TXT Hand held or guided:
    Roll under subclass 17 which is manually manipulated by a human operator.

    (1)     Note.  Class 15, Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning,
    specifically provides for a coating device having a roll or roller for
    transferring coating material from a source of supply to the work.

    (2)     Note.  See the search notes under subclass 17.


CLS 492/20
TXT Paper treatment:
    Roll under subclass 16 especially adapted for working or shaping sheet
    material made of cellulose pulp or similar material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for a roll having a sheet edge holder, which roll is especially
    adapted for treating paper or skin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, for a roll especially adapted for assembling, bending,
    or surface treating sheet or web material or some article previously made
    from sheet or web material.


CLS 492/21
TXT WITH INTERNAL WEDGING EXPANDER:
    Roll under the class definition wherein the internal support for the
    working surface of the roll includes a tapering element and means
    enlargeable in circumference by the movement of such element relative
    thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4+,     for a roll expansible by fluid pressure.

    42,     for a roll the working surface of which is spring urged outwardly.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 165 for a brush
    or broom which is collapsible for entrance through a narrow mouth of hollow
    ware and expansible after entrance and subclass 213 for a rotary wiper or
    polisher of like nature.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 463+ and 504+ for an abrading tool under the
    class which is expansible.


CLS 492/22
TXT WITH SHEET EDGE HOLDER:
    Roll under the class definition which includes a sheet, strip, or tube
    element and means to grip or impale a marginal or edge portion of such
    element to hold it in the roll assembly.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes means to tension a roll cover axially
    of the roll by moving the edge holding ring axially of the roll.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for a roll having an internal anchor for an annular member.

    47,     for a roll having an end ring or reinforcement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclass 66 for a platen for a
    textile smoothing machine and a cover therefor, and subclass 140 for an
    ironing table cover securing means.

    101,    Printing, subclass 415.1 for a device to secure a flexible sheet
    employed in a printing operation to its support.

    160,    Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, subclasses 383+
    for a device under the class definition claiming an elongated element and
    means to fasten one edge only of a fabric thereto and see the notes thereto
    for other devices for fastening fabrics to elongated elements.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, subclasses 579+ for a device to
    secure an elongated material to a spool or other coil holder.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 496+ for a flexible rotary cylindrical
    abrading tool with abrading material covering sheet securing means.


CLS 492/23
TXT Wringer:
    Roll under subclass 22 especially adapted for mechanical pressing or
    otherwise removing liquid from treated material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 241+ for a wringer
    especially adapted for use in fluid treatment, moistening, washing,
    mercerizing, mordenting, or otherwise chemically treating textile fibers or
    products.


CLS 492/24
TXT Coating treatment or applicator:
    Roll under subclass 22 which is especially adapted for (a) shaping or
    modifying a coating or (b) applying a coating.

    (1)     Note.  Class 15, Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning,
    specifically provides for a coating device having a roll for transferring
    coating material from a source of supply to the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17+,    for a roll which is rotatable relative to its supporting shaft,
    which roll is especially adapted for coating treatment or as an applicator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, especially subclasses
    104.93+ for a roll or roller coated or impregnated with material supply and
    subclasses 230+ for a rotary implement under the class definition having a
    working face composed of some sort of simple or compound fabric and adapted
    to act as a wiper, dauber, polisher, or for applying a coating of fluid or
    powdered material.

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclass 103 for a roller made up of a
    plurality of spindles so as to be each rotatable on a bowed supporting
    shaft for fabric spreading.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, especially subclasses 224, 227+, and 249+ for an
    opposed rotary applicator.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclass 197 for a hollow
    porous roller in which the coating material flows therethrough.


CLS 492/25
TXT Printing or copying:
    Roll under subclass 24 especially adapted for (a) producing readable matter
    or like communication of information or (b) reproducing or duplicating such
    matter or information.

    (1)     Note.  See the search notes under subclass 24.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    355,    Photocopying, subclass 133 for a roll or roller especially adapted
    for use in photocopying when claimed in combination with other photographic
    or electrostatic copying structure.


CLS 492/26
TXT Skin or paper treating:
    Roll under subclass 22 especially adapted for working or shaping animal
    hide, sheet material made of cellulous pulp, or similar material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    20,     for a roll which is rotatable relative to its supporting shaft,
    which roll is especially adapted for treating skin or paper.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    69,     Leather Manufactures, especially subclass 20 for a leather working
    or processing tool and subclasses 37+ for a leather working or processing
    machine having a rotary tool.

    493,    Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other Manufacturing
    From a Sheet or Web, for a roll especially adapted for assembling, bending,
    or surface treating sheet or web material or some article previously made
    from sheet or web material.


CLS 492/27
TXT TAPERED OR BEVELED:
    Roll under the class definition which has a shaped, slanted, or inclined
    peripheral surface and the roll diameter diminishes or increases toward an
    end.


CLS 492/28
TXT WITH SPECIFIC ROLLER EXTERIOR SURFACE STRUCTURE:
    Roll under the class definition wherein the peripheral portion has raised,
    lowered, or irregular localized areas especially adapted for a purpose.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 103+ for a noncylindrical rotating tool
    deforming a rotating metallic workpiece and subclasses 191+ for a "roller"
    having surface irregularities (e.g., a rotary forging die).


CLS 492/29
TXT Pile or nap surface:
    Roll under subclass 28 in which the outer surface of the roll has
    externally exposed filament ends or loops of filament.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 179+ for a
    rotary brush or broom and subclasses 228+ for a wiper or polisher having
    working portions constituted by a fabric capable of acting as a mop.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 85+ for a
    stock material product in the form of a web or sheet and including a
    component with a pile or nap-type surface.


CLS 492/30
TXT Surface projections, indentations, or slits:
    Roll under subclass 28 in which the roll has a continuous outer surface
    which is generally cylindrical but has recesses or projections in or on it.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes a roll with a grained, serrated, or
    roughened surface or a roll of which  the surface has successive flats and
    arches.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 224 for a
    wiper, dauber, or polisher with a working face made up of fabric in layers
    spaced apart to form channels or depressions between pairs of layers.

    19,     Textiles:  Fiber Preparation, subclass 54 for a gin roller,
    subclass 97 for a picking roller, subclass 112 for a carding cylinder, and
    subclass 128 for a combining cylinder.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 221+ for a metal deforming roller
    having axially separated grooves each providing a distinct work engaging
    "pass".

    84,     Music, subclass 96, for a cylindrical comb with tuned teeth.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 627 for a currycomb that moves during
    use.

    171,    Unearthing Plants or Buried Objects, subclasses 13, 93, 95+, 116,
    and 128 for a toothed rotary cylinder used to separate desired objects from
    the earth or break up earth material.

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 122 for an earth working apparatus
    comprising a driven drum with teeth or blades, subclass 537 for a
    corrugated surface roller, and subclasses 540+ for a rolling earth working
    tool with circumferentially spaced teeth, tines, or blades.

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclass 41 for a wheel with a
    traction increasing device on the wheel-tread portion.


CLS 492/31
TXT Plural direction alignment of sets:
    Roll under subclass 30 whose surface has at least two sets of recesses or
    projections of substantially equal value with the dominant alignment of the
    sets being angularly related to each other to form a regular pattern on the
    surface of the roll similar to a checkerboard or the like.


CLS 492/32
TXT Outer screenlike layer over skeleton or perforate core; e.g., Dandy
    roll:Roll under subclass 31 in which the outer surface is a wire or other
    screenlike layer which overlies the main roll body which has perforations
    in its outer surface or is skeleton-like construction.

    (1)     Note.  The art term for these rolls is "Dandy Roll".


CLS 492/33
TXT Radially aligned:
    Roll under subclass 30 in which the recesses, projections, or slits have a
    dominant nonhelical alignment that lies in a plane perpendicular to the
    axis of the roll.


CLS 492/34
TXT With minor interruptions:
    Roll under subclass 33 in which the dominant recesses, projections, or
    slits are interrupted by minor projections or recesses whose alignment is
    at an angle to that of the major recesses or projections.


CLS 492/35
TXT Helically aligned:
    Roll under subclass 30 in which the recesses or projections have a dominant
    alignment that forms a helix about the axis of the roll.


CLS 492/36
TXT Longitudinally aligned:
    Roll under subclass 30 in which the recesses, projections, or slits have
    dominant alignment that is parallel to the axis of the roll.


CLS 492/37
TXT Irregular or uneven arrangement; e.g., etched, shot blasted:Roll under
    subclass 30 in which the recesses or projections have no dominant alignment
    but are irregular in arrangement and/or depth such as would be formed by
    sandblasting or etching the surface.


CLS 492/38
TXT CIRCUMFERENTIAL SECTORS OR SEGMENTS:
    Roll under the class definition which includes a series of members arranged
    circumferentially around the axis of rotation with the radially outwardly
    facing surfaces of the members substantially parallel to or forming the
    cylindrical outer surface of the roll.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for this subject matter where the roll also includes relatively
    movable mechanical elements for moving the segments radially inwardly and
    outwardly.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 181 for a
    rotary brush or broom head formed of material arranged in layers.

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 250.1 for a roll under the class definition
    made up of independently yielding parts.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 294 for a
    comminuting member with sectional or separable surface elements.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 542+ for a rotary cylindrical abrading tool
    comprised of a plurality of preformed blocks, the blocks being of the shape
    of circular segments.


CLS 492/39
TXT SPACED PLURAL ANNULARS ALONG COMMON SHAFT:
    Roll under the class definition in which the roll includes at least two
    separated and nonabutting annular treating members with nontreating spacers
    therebetween along the axis of rotation of the roll with the inner
    peripheries of the annuli surrounding such axis.

    (1)     Note.  In a roll of this subclass, generally the annulus is of
    substantially the same material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40+,    for a roll having axially stacked annular members and see the
    search notes thereunder.


CLS 492/40
TXT AXIALLY STACKED ANNULAR MEMBERS:
    Roll under the class definition in which the roll includes at least two
    abutting annular elements axially of one another along the axis of rotation
    of the roll with the inner peripheries of the annuli surrounding such axis.

    (1)     Note.  In the roll of this subclass, generally the annulus is of
    substantially the same material.  See subclasses 22+ for the subject matter
    of this subclass in which annulus is located adjacent the ends of a roll
    body and serves to hold a sheet thereon and subclass 47 for the subject
    matter of this subclass in which an annulus differing in material from a
    roll body portion between them is located adjacent the ends of the roll.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22+,    see (1) Note, above.

    47,     see (1) Note, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 181 for a
    rotary brush or broom head formed of material arranged in layers and
    subclass 223 for a wiper, dauber, or polisher made up of layers of fabric,
    the laminae being exposed at the work face.

    144,    Woodworking, subclass 250.1 for a roll under the class made up of
    independently yiedling parts.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 295 for a
    comminuting member with sectional or separable annular ring surface
    elements.


CLS 492/41
TXT Cloth or fabric member:
    Roll under subclass 40 in which the abutting annular elements are composed
    of textile materials.

    (1)     Note.  Felt material is excluded from this subclass and is found in
    the outdent-subclass 40.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22+,    for a roll with means to grip or impale the margin or edge of a
    sheet to hold it in the roll assembly.

    43,     for a roll having plural annular layers one of which is a spiral of
    cloth.


CLS 492/42
TXT WITH LEAF OR COIL SPRING MEMBER:
    Roll under the class definition in which the outer surface of the roll is
    supported radially by a mechanical spring or springs.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes a coil spring acting radially, the
    axis of the spring being disposed either radially or axially of the roll.
    It also includes a leaf spring acting radially of the roll and the
    cantilever being disposed either circumferentially or axially of the roll.
    It also includes a coil spring which is wound around the core so that the
    axis of the spring is helical axially of the roll.

    (2)     Note.  The spring layer is usually intermediate a central shaft and
    a surface cover so that the cover is resiliently or yieldingly supported.
    For a cover yieldingly supported, see this class, subclasses 4+ for a roll
    in which resilience is afforded by a fluid under pressure and subclasses
    49+ for a roll in which a solid resilient layer as of rubber underlies a
    cover layer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4+,     see (2) Note, above.

    49+,    see (2) Note, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 165 for a brush
    or broom which is collapsible for entrance through a narrow mouth of hollow
    ware and expansible after entrance and subclass 213 for a rotary wiper or
    polisher of like nature.

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels.

    295,    Railway Wheels and Axles, subclass 14 for a wheel of cooperation
    with a rail, which wheel includes a metallic spring tire cushion.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 484+ for a spring expanded abrading tool.


CLS 492/43
TXT WITH SPIRAL MEMBER:
    Roll under the class definition which includes an element wrapped around
    the longitudinal axis of the roll in a conical helix.

    (1)     Note.  For successive separate layers covering one another radially
    of the roll, see this class, subclasses 49+ and the notes thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49+,    see (1) Note, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 182 for a
    rotary brush or broom implement in which a brushing element is mounted in
    spiral arrangement.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 592 for metallic
    stock material which is spiral or has a spiral component.


CLS 492/44
TXT WITH HELICAL MEMBER:
    Roll under the class definition which includes an element wrapped around
    the longitudinal axis of the roll in a cylindrical helix.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes a cylindrical roll having a helically
    wound surface layer, the successive turns of which abut one another.  See
    this class, subclass 35, for a roll having a helically wound surface layer
    the successive turns of which are spaced from one another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4+,     for an inflatable roll which has a helical inflatable chamber such
    as a piece of tubing.

    35,     see (1) Note, above.

    42,     for this subject matter where the helical member is a strip spring
    or coil spring.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 182 for a
    rotary brush or broom or for a broom with a head having spirally mounted
    bristles or other brushing or sweeping elements and subclass 225 for a
    wiper, dauber, or polisher having as a working face the edge of a strip of
    fabric coiled upon itself.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 145+ for a process of making a
    tube by helically winding a ribbon and bonding the melting side edges
    together.


CLS 492/45
TXT WITH INTERNAL ANCHOR FOR ANNULAR MEMBER:
    Roll under the class definition in which an annular member is secured to
    another roll element internally of the outer surface of the roll.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass requires that a specific securing means be
    claimed.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes roll shafts or spindles which are
    contoured so as to interlock with a roll body molded around them.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22+,    for a roll which includes a sheet strip or tube element and means
    to grip or impale the margin or edge portion of such element to hold it in
    the roll assembly.

    40+,    for a roll with means to secure together abutting annular members.

    47,     for a roll having an end ring or reinforcement.


CLS 492/46
TXT WITH HEATING, COOLING, OR HEAT TRANSFER MEANS:
    Roll under the class definition which includes means especially adapted for
    (a) generating thermal energy, (b) dissipating or removing thermal energy,
    or (c) exchanging thermal energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, especially subclasses 89+ for a rotary drum with a
    movable heating or cooling surface.


CLS 492/47
TXT WITH END RING OR REINFORCEMENT:
    Roll under the class definition, which (a) includes annular member adjacent
    the ends, which members surrounding the axis of rotation, (b) includes
    specific structure for strenghtening the roll, or (c) has support for the
    working surface of the roll which is of greater rigidity near the roll ends
    than it is between them.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22+,    for a roll which includes a sheet, strip, or tube element and means
    including a ring surrounding the shaft to grip or impale a marginal or edge
    portion of such element to hold it in the roll assembly.

    40+,    for a roll with at least two abutting annular elements of
    substantially the same material axially of one another along the axis of
    rotation.

    45,     for a roll with internal anchor for an annular member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    301,    Land Vehicles:  Wheels and Axles, subclass 23 for a wheel with a
    demountable rim or detachable wheel section having fastening means for the
    section in the form of a removable side ring.

    403,    Joints and Connections, for means connecting a roll to a shaft and
    subclass 26 for a means connecting two rolls which means is rotatably
    journalled independently of the connection between the rolls.


CLS 492/48
TXT ROLL COVER, PER SE:
    Under the class definition, a cover or pad, per se, which is disclosed
    solely for a roll or claimed in combination with the roll.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for a roll whose surface is made up or circumferential sectors or
    segments.

    57+,    for a roll which is a single annular member, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, especially subclasses 63+ for a
    cover of a smoothing machine and subclasses 141+ for a cover or
    cover-securing means for an ironing table.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twinning, subclasses 112+ for a
    cover under the class definition.


CLS 492/49
TXT CONCENTRIC LAYERED ANNULUS:
    Roll under the class definition, which roll is made up of superposed rings
    having a common center.

    (1)     Note.  Generally the layers or rings are joined or bonded together
    into a composite structure.

    (2)     Note.  A patent claiming a roll merely by the composition of which
    it is made; i.e., with the roll being mentioned by name only, is classified
    in the composition classes where a composition class provides for such
    composition even though there is no claim to the composition, per se.  See
    Class 106, Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, main class definition for the
    classification of various compositions.

    (3)     Note.  In this subclass, the annuli are radially of one another.
    For plural annuli axially of one another, see this class, subclasses 40+,
    and the notes thereto.

    (4)     Note.  Many of the preceding subclasses include the subject matter
    of this subclass where one of the annular elements is of the nature
    indicated in the titles of these subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40+,    see (3) Note, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 181 for a
    rotary head brush or broom implement with the material forming the head
    arranged in layers.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, see (2) Note, above.

    138,    Pipes and Tubular Conduits, for a laminated tubular project.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclasses 145+ for a process of making a
    tube by helically winding a ribbon and bonding the melting edges together.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 661+ for type impact-receiving
    platens composed of sound deadening materials, and subclass 662 for a
    platen having a particular surface characteristic.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 364+ for a
    structurally defined or coated rod or strand that may be disclosed as a
    roll or roller, per se.


CLS 492/50
TXT Fiber or wire reinforced:
    Roll under subclass 49, which roll is structurally strengthened by means of
    elongated strand or rod material introduced as individual elements.

    (1)     Note.  Generally the reinforcement material is of a different
    composition than that of the bulk of the roll body.

    (2)     Note.  The elongated material need not have an especially long
    length but only have a length which is many times its width or thickness.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, for a similar structure.


CLS 492/51
TXT Mat or fabric internal layer:
    Roll under subclass 49, which roll has an inside stratum of tangled, woven,
    or braided fiber.

    (1)     Note.  Generally the mat or fabric layer is intended to strengthen
    or protect the structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, for a similar structure.


CLS 492/52
TXT Adhesive bonded or resin impregnated:
    Roll under subclass 51, which is joined together by nonmetallic paste,
    cement, or viscous polymerized synthetic material.

    (1)     Note.  The resin may be thermoplastic or thermosetting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, for a similar structure.


CLS 492/53
TXT Specific composition:
    Roll under subclass 49, which includes particular material or chemical
    composition.

    (1)     Note.  A patent claiming a roll merely by the composition of which
    it is made; i.e., with the roll being mentioned by name only, is classified
    in the composition classes where a composition class provides for such
    composition even though there is no claim to the composition, per se.  See
    Class 106, Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, main class definition for the
    classification of various compositions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, see (1) Note, above.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 661+ for type impact-receiving
    platens composed of sound deadening materials, and subclass 662 for a
    platen having particular surface characteristics.


CLS 492/54
TXT Specific metallic composition:
    Roll under subclass 53, which includes a particular metal alloy or
    composition containing metal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, for similar metallic material.


CLS 492/55
TXT With leather or fabric cover:
    Roll under subclass 53 which includes an outermost layer of (a) dressed or
    tanned animal hide or (b) textile material.


CLS 492/56
TXT With rubber or elastomer cover:
    Roll under subclass 53 which includes an outermost layer of an elastic
    solid polymer similar to natural rubber.


CLS 492/57
TXT SINGLE ANNULAR MEMBER, PER SE:
    Roll under the class definition in which the roll structure includes only
    one ring or layer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for a roll cover, per se, and see the search notes thereunder.


CLS 492/58
TXT Specific metallic composition:
    Roll under subclass 57 which is made of a particular metal alloy or metal
    base material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is not intended to include intermetallic
    compounds or other metal compositions which are devoid of free metals such
    as oxides, sulfide, nitrides etc.  Those patents may be found in subclasses
    57 and 59.

    (2)     Note.  A patent claiming a roll merely by the composition of which
    it is made; i.e., with the roll being mentioned by name only, is classified
    in the composition classes where a composition class provides for such
    composition even though there is no claim to the composition, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 661+ for type impact-receiving
    platens composed of sound deadening materials, and subclass 662 for a
    platen having particular surface characteristic.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, for similar metallic material.


CLS 492/59
TXT Specific nonmetallic composition:
    Roll under subclass 57, which is made of material devoid of free metal and
    which does not exhibit any substantive metallic properties.

    (1)     Note.  A patent claiming a roll merely by the composition of which
    it is made; i.e., with the roll being mentioned by name only, is classified
    in the composition classes where a composition provides for such
    composition even though there is no claim to the composition, per se.  See
    Class 106, Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, main class definition for the
    classification of various compositions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, see (1) Note, above.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 661+ for type impact-receiving
    platens composed of sound deadening materials, and subclass 662 for a
    platen having particular surface characteristic.


CLS 492/60
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:
    Roll under the class definition not elsewhere provided for.


CLS 493/
TTL MANUFACTURING CONTAINER  OR TUBE FROM PAPER; OR OTHER MANUFACTURING FROM A
    SHEET OR WEB

CLS 493/
TXT

    I.      Process or apparatus for forming an article of commerce, which
    article is a receptacle intended to encompass and hold contents from
    fibrous cellulose previously matted together in thin, planar form, commonly
    called paper, or from material that is similarly handled or deformed,
    without substantial thinning flow thereof, or for forming a hollow cylinder
    from fibrous cellulose previously matted together in thin, planar form, or
    from material that is similarly handled or deformed, without substantial
    thinning flow thereof.

    II.     Process or apparatus for forming generally planar or curvilinear,
    relatively thin, laterally limited material that is either longitudinally
    limited or unlimited (such material hereafter is called a sheet or web
    workpiece) into an article of commerce or into stock material in either of
    the following operations:

    A.      Assembling or Disassembling - (1) the act of juxtaposing or
    fastening together a sheet or web workpiece and another workpiece; or, (2)
    the act of disengaging a sheet or web workpiece from another workpiece to
    which it had previously been fastened.

    B.      Bending - the act of stressing a workpiece beyond its elastic
    limit, without substantial thinning flow, so that when stress is released
    the workpiece will not return to its original shape.

    C.      Flexing - the act of moving one portion of a workpiece with respect
    to another portion of that workpiece in order to place the respective
    portions of the workpiece in a desired positional relationship.

    D.      Surface treatment - a surface modification of a workpiece not
    penetrating deeply into the surface of the workpiece, which modification is
    not provided for elsewhere. Additionally, this class is the residual home
    for a process or apparatus for making a cigarette filter.

    (1)     Note.  The sheet or web to be formed into an article of commerce by
    the method or apparatus of this class may be of any material except when
    provided for elsewhere.  Specifically, note the search notes to other
    classes listed below.

    (2)     Note.  A member previously made from a sheet or web into a
    three-dimensional workpiece may be considered to be a sheet or web
    workpiece under the definition of this class if it is treated as a sheet or
    web.  For example, folding of a flap of a previously made container is
    included herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, for making a foot covering member from a
    sheet or web.

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 428+ for a process of and subclasses 700+
    for apparatus for assembling, generally; including assembling a sheet or
    web member with another member when (a) the members are handled in the
    manner of a nonsheet or web member (e.g., placing a window pane into a
    window frame or assembly therewith, etc.), (b) combined with metal
    deforming other than deforming a fastener to secure, or (c) combining an
    operation of that class (29) generally with an operation of this class
    (493).  Subclasses 33+, 592+, and 650 for combined operations in
    manufacturing an article from a nonsheet or web material as well as for the
    combination of construction of an article from a sheet or web, i.e., in the
    manner of this class (493) with an operation going beyond such
    construction.  See the note below to Class 227, Elongated-Member-Driving
    Apparatus, for classification of means to force a nail or staple into a
    workpiece even if the workpiece is a sheet or web if there is no other
    article making that is proper for this class (493).

    53,     Package Making, for a method of or apparatus for placing goods or
    materials in a container.  The container may serve to identify, protect, or
    allow unit handling of the goods or materials; and may comprise a simple
    band wrapped about the goods or materials.  The combination of making a
    container from sheet or web material with packaging will be found in Class
    53.  Apparatus for or the method of closing a filled package, even without
    any recognition of the contents, is to be found in Class 53.  Generally,
    the combination of making a sheet or web assembly will be found in this
    class (493) if the packaged material is a component of the package;
    however, search Class 53, subclasses 394+ for making a match book and match
    assembly, an exception to the general rule.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, for the process of or
    apparatus for making twisted or spirally wrapped cellulose tape.

    69,     Leather Manufactures, for making a product from leather.

    72,     Metal Deforming, the residual locus for plastic deformation
    (including bending) of metallic work (a) as simple metal stock or a blank,
    (b) in combination with nonmetal, as in the case of a paper and metal
    laminate, or (c) as unspecified or unidentified material which appears to
    be metal.

    100,    Presses, for a press not elsewhere provided for.

    112,    Sewing, for means to secure two sheets of cloth or clothlike
    material by a sequence of stitches.  The stitches of Class 112 may be made
    repeatedly in the same area, as is done in tacking a label of paper
    material to a cloth member.  Folding of nontextile combined with stitching,
    e.g., to secure the sheets of a book signature, is to be found in this
    class (493).

    144,    Woodworking, for shaping of wood, generally, including making a
    product from wood; also subclass 51 for manufacture of an ignitable match
    of paper.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, for
    securing two surfaces together, generally.  Class 156 is the generic home
    for surface bonding.  This class (493) is the generic home for making a
    product from a sheet or web comprising assembling, bending, flexing, or
    certain surface treatment.  Between the classes, Class 156 is directed
    primarily to the formation of stock material (with many exceptions) this
    class (493) is directed primarily to the formation of a finished article
    (but includes subcombinations and other exceptions). Class 156 has not been
    screened; however, the following is believed to generally represent the
    placement of the art.

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, particularly subclasses 430+ for a
    method or apparatus for winding a composite article and subclasses 570 +
    for convolutely winding a web to form a storage package.

    452,    Butchering, subclasses 21+ for an apparatus for or method of
    shirring a sausage casing with or without filling of the casing.



    A.      Class 156 includes:

    (1)     Bonding of sheet or web material surfaces (e.g., causing a supply
    of previously assembled labels to be united with a waxed paper carrier).

    (2)     Bonding of sheet or web material surfaces combined with bringing
    together two work surfaces in the formation of stock material, e.g.,
    bringing together then bonding a first and a second web.

    (3)     Bonding of sheet or web surfaces (with or without bringing the
    surfaces together) combined with bending in formation of an indeterminate
    length stock material, e.g., spirally twisting and bonding adjacent
    convolutions of a paper strip to form an indefinite length pipe or other
    article; or, forming laminated stock material comprising corrugating a
    generally planar sheet of material and bonding a second and a third sheet
    to the top and bottom thereof.

    (4)     Bonding a sheet or web surface to another surface combined with
    bringing the surfaces together in the labelling of an article.  A postage
    stamp is considered to be a label, as is a decorative layer secured to an
    article by adhesive bonding.  Note that this is an exception to the general
    line regarding bringing together and bonding a sheet or web to another
    member in forming an article.

    B.      Class 493 includes:

    (1)     Bringing together a sheet or web member and another member, e.g.,
    placing a partition member inside a box.

    (2)     Bending or flexing a sheet or web in forming an article of commerce
    (e.g., bending a flap in the formation of a box from a box blank; or,
    twisting and abutting adjacent convolutions of a paper strip and then
    cutting the product to length in the formation of a drinking straw).

    (3)     Bringing together a sheet or web member and another member and
    bonding the two members together in the formation of an article of commerce
    (e.g., placing a partition member inside a box and gluing the partition
    member to the box; assembling and uniting a handle to a paperlike article;
    or, bringing a tape to a box and bonding that tape to the box to secure the
    integrity of the box).  An exception to this line is the application of a
    label, postage stamp, or decorative layer to an article by adhesive bonding
    which is to be found in Class 156, especially subclasses 556+. Such a
    device which also serves another function, such as sealing a container
    closed, which would otherwise be proper for this class (493), will also be
    found in Class 156.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, for paper making especially
    subclasses 123+ for uniting of wet paper sheets; subclass 197 for the
    method of decurling or flexing, bending, straightening, or decurling
    combined with paper making or as an ancillary operation to paper making.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, for making of clothing from a sheet or web.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, for means to force a nail or
    staple into a workpiece (or into a stack of workpieces that are not
    individually treated) even if the workpiece is a sheet or web if there is
    not other operation of this class (493), e.g., no assembling, bending,
    flexing, or surface treatment.  Assembling of a first workpiece which is a
    web or sheet and a second workpiece combined with driving a staple to
    secure the relationship of the first and second workpiece is to be found in
    this class (493).  Similarly, engaging a first portion of a workpiece and
    engaging a second portion of a workpiece and driving an elongated fastener
    into the portions to secure them together will be found in this class (493).

    229,    Envelopes, Wrappers, and Paperboard Boxes, for a container made
    from paper.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    for the step of forming a sheet or web into an article of commerce, e.g.,
    bag, box, etc., or into stock material if the step involves a thinning (or
    thickening) flow of the material. Commonly, shaping moist previously made
    paper or paperlike material or shaping sheet or web material in a heated
    die involves a thinning flow and will be found in Class 264.  Shaping of
    this class (493) involves only incidental thinning flow.  For example,
    drawing a planar sheet into a cup shape is proper for Class 264; folding
    radiating portions of a sheet to form a conical shape is proper for this
    class.  If it is not clear from the disclosure that there is a thinning
    flow of the material, shaping of such material will be found in this class
    (493).



    A Class 264 operation combined with an operation of this class will be
    found in this class (493) unless both operations are done in the same die,
    which will be found in Class 264.

    270,    Sheet-Material Associating, for bringing sheets of paper having
    printed material thereon together so that the printed material of one of
    the sheets corresponds to the printed material of the other sheet, even
    when combined with an operation of this class (493).

    412,    Bookbinding:  Process and Apparatus, for processes and apparatuses
    for assembling, bending, or flexing of sheet or web material peculiar to
    the manufacture of a book.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus, for
    apparatus for forming sheet or web material into an article of commerce or
    into stock material, e.g., bag, box, etc., involving thinning (or
    thickening flow of the material).  Commonly, means for shaping sheet or web
    material in a heated die involves a thinning flow and will be found in
    Class 425.  Shaping of this class (493) involves only incidental thinning
    flow.  For example, apparatus for drawing a planar sheet into a cup shape
    is proper for Class 425; apparatus for folding radiating portions of a
    sheet to form a generally conical shape is proper for this class (493).  If
    it is not clear from the disclosure that there is thinning flow of the
    material, the device for shaping such material is to be found in this class
    (493).



    Apparatus for performing a Class 425 operation combined with apparatus to
    perform an operation of this class generally will be found in this class
    (493) unless both operations are done in the same mold which will be found
    in Class 425.


CLS 493/1
TXT CONTROL OF OPERATION BY USE OF TEMPLET, TAPE, CARD, OR OTHER REPLACEABLE
    INFORMATION SUPPLY:

    Method or apparatus under the class definition including detecting the
    characteristics (e.g., physical, electrical, etc.) of a member carrying
    operation instructions for the apparatus, which member is removable from
    both the workpiece and the organized structure of the apparatus, and
    regulating, as a direct result of said detection, the operation of the
    apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes utilizing a prepared information
    supply that is to be removably placed in the apparatus.  This subclass does
    not include utilizing the characteristics of a permanent part of the
    apparatus, such as a cam or gear, to influence the operation of other parts.


CLS 493/2
TXT With sensing of numerical information and regulation without mechanical
    connection between sensing means and regulated means (i.e., numerical
    control):

    Method or apparatus under subclass 1 including detecting information on the
    removable member, which information is in binary (digital) form or code
    readable by a detecting means, wherein the detected information is utilized
    to regulate the apparatus by means other than a mechanical linkage.


CLS 493/3
TXT CONTROL MEANS ENERGIZED IN RESPONSE TO ACTIVATOR STIMULATED BY CONDITION
    SENSOR:

    Method or apparatus under the class definition including:  (a) detecting
    any of the following characteristics; a state or property, a change in a
    state or property, or the occurrence of a predetermined event in any of the
    following:  a workpiece, a product of the apparatus, the apparatus itself,
    or the environment of the apparatus affecting the operation thereof; and,
    (b) initiating, as a direct result of said detection, a signal other than
    that generated or transmitted by the detecting means; and, (c) regulating
    or modifying, as a direct result of said initiation, the operation of the
    apparatus, or to actuate a signal or alarm.


CLS 493/4
TXT Cigarette filter making:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 3 including forming of an article of
    commerce adapted to be secured to or integrated with the end of a tubular
    or rodlike tobacco or tobaccolike product, which article is intended to
    restrict, entrap, or alter components of the flow of gases and combustion
    products from the tubular or rodlike tobacco or tobaccolike product when
    burning to thereby modify the composition or condition of gases and
    combustion products passing therethrough.

    (1)     Note.  This class is the residual home for the making of a
    cigarette filter, even if the filter is not constructed of paper sheet or
    web material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39+,    for making a cigarette filter, generally.


CLS 493/5
TXT Responsive to temperature:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 3 including detecting a thermal
    condition.


CLS 493/6
TXT Responsive to assembling or coating operation:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 3 including detecting a characteristic
    of the product of a station which station either serves to juxtapose or
    fasten together two workpieces or serves to bring a flowable material into
    covering engagement with a workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for assembling dissimilar filter materials in making a cigarette
    filter.

    67+,    for assembling a rigid container combined with cutting, breaking,
    tearing, or abrading by a rotary tool.

    75+,    for assembling a rigid container combined with cutting, breaking,
    tearing, or abrading by a reciprocatory tool.

    84+,    for making a rigid container including assembly of distinct members.

    210+,   for making a pliable container including assembly of distinct
    members.

    297+,   for making a tube including assembly of distinct members.

    334+,   for assembling of distinct members combined with adhesive coating.

    343+,   for assembling of distinct members combined with cutting, breaking,
    tearing, or abrading.

    374+,   for assembling of distinct members, one of which is a sheet or web,
    generally.


CLS 493/7
TXT Responsive to flowable material (e.g., glue, ink for printer, etc.):

    Method or apparatus under subclass 6 including detecting a characteristic
    of a substance that flows as a liquid.


CLS 493/8
TXT Responsive to work material, the product or means engaging the work
    material or the product:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 3 including detecting a characteristic
    of a workpiece, the formed article, or of the structure that engages a
    workpiece of the formed article.


CLS 493/9
TXT By use of pneumatic sensor:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 8 including the use of a detecting means
    responsive to air striking it or emanating from it or responsive to
    pressure or vacuum in a supply line, which supply line is for release of
    air to or vacuum from the atmosphere.


CLS 493/10
TXT By use of photocell condition sensor:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 8 including use of detecting means
    responsive to luminous energy and adapted to emit electrical impulses to
    regulate the operation of the apparatus.


CLS 493/11
TXT Responsive to mark or indicia on work:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 10 including detecting a surface
    characteristic of a workpiece, which surface characteristic has been
    previously formed on the workpiece to be sensed by this detector, or which
    surface characteristic is a recognizable intelligence (e.g., printed
    matter, machine readable code, etc.) feature for which the detector is
    adapted to respond.


CLS 493/12
TXT Responsive to defective or missing work:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 10 including detecting a characteristic
    of a workpiece, which characteristic would indicate that the workpiece is
    faulty or including to detecting the absence of a workpiece or the absence
    of a portion of a workpiece.


CLS 493/13
TXT Plural sensors:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 10 including a first detecting means and
    including a second detecting means.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is not intended to exclude more than two
    detectors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17+,    for an operation of this class including use of plural sensors
    generally.


CLS 493/14
TXT Plural interrelated sensors:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 13 wherein the first detecting means and
    the second detecting means are interconnected to cooperate in regulating an
    operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18+,    for plural interrelated sensors, generally used in an operation of
    this class.


CLS 493/15
TXT Photocell and diverse-type sensor:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 14 including a detecting means
    responsive to luminous energy and including another detecting means
    responsive to a condition other than luminous energy.


CLS 493/16
TXT To eject defective work material or product:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 8 including detecting a characteristic
    of the workpiece or article, which characteristic indicates that the
    workpiece or article is faulty and including removing from the apparatus
    any such faulty material.


CLS 493/17
TXT By use of plural sensors:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 8 including a first detecting means and
    including a second detecting means.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is not intended to exclude more than two
    detectors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13+,    for an operation of this class including the use of a photocell and
    another sensor.


CLS 493/18
TXT Plural interrelated sensors:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 17 wherein the first detecting means and
    the second detecting means are interconnected to cooperate in regulating an
    operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14+,    for plural sensors including a photocell, used in a operation of
    this class.


CLS 493/19
TXT Sensing opposite edges of planar work:
    Method or apparatus under subclass 18 including detecting one of the
    margins of a sheet or web workpiece and detecting the margin directly
    across the workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for a first detector sensing a first wall of a container or a
    tubular blank and a second detector sensing an opposing wall.


CLS 493/20
TXT Opposite side edges:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 19 wherein the sheet or web workpiece is
    translated through the apparatus and wherein the detected margins comprise
    the lateral extent of the sheet or web perpendicular to the direction of
    movement thereof.


CLS 493/21
TXT To actuate timer:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 8 wherein the regulated structure
    includes a timepiece.


CLS 493/22
TXT To actuate cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading means:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 8 including regulation of means to
    pierce a workpiece, means to apply bending force to sever a workpiece,
    means to apply tensile force to sever a workpiece, or a crystalline tool
    applied to a workpiece to remove portions therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56+,    for making a rigid container combined with cutting, breaking,
    tearing, or abrading.

    194+,   for making a pliable container including heat sealing combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading of indeterminate length work.

    199+,   for making a pliable container including heat sealing combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading.

    227+,   for making a pliable container combined with cutting, breaking,
    tearing, or abrading.

    287+,   for making a tube combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or
    abrading.

    324,    for an operation of this class combined with printing or
    photographic reproduction and cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading.

    340,    for an operation of this class combined with cutting, breaking,
    tearing or abrading, generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, for cutting by use of a sharp cutting tool, generally
    including severing.

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, for subdividing by the application
    of bending or tautening forces.

    451,    Abrading, for engaging a workpiece by a crystalline tool to remove
    surface portions from the workpiece.


CLS 493/23
TXT To actuate folder:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 8 including regulating of apparatus
    comprising means to bendingly stress a workpiece beyond its elastic limit
    along a line to form a permanent crease along a predetermined line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    405+,   for folding of a sheet or web generally, and see the search notes
    thereunder for other search locations.


CLS 493/24
TXT Sensing indeterminate length work supply:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 8 including detecting a characteristic
    of a workpiece having no more than one recognized longitudinal end.

    (1)     Note.  A spool or coil of work is considered to be "indeterminate
    length".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for an operation of this class utilizing a first and a second
    sensor, one of which is a surface contacting sensor for indeterminate
    length work.

    77+,    for making a rigid container including bringing and indeterminate
    length member together with another member combined with cutting, breaking,
    tearing, or abrading by a reciprocatory tool.

    97+,    for making a rigid container including assembly with an
    indeterminate length workpiece.

    354+,   for bringing an indeterminate length workpiece together with
    another member combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading.

    380+,   for assembling of this class wherein one workpiece is of
    indeterminate length.

    404,    for folding an indeterminate length workpiece by a roller.

    410+,   for overfolding or unfolding an indeterminate length workpiece.


CLS 493/25
TXT Responsive to size of work or product:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 8 including detecting a length, area, or
    volume of workpiece or produced article.


CLS 493/26
TXT Responsive to weight of work or product:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 8 including detecting the gravitational
    attraction of a workpiece or produced article.


CLS 493/27
TXT To stop machine:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 8 including regulating by termination
    operation of the apparatus.


CLS 493/28
TXT Responsive to count:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 8 including detecting the number of
    workpieces or the number of produced articles.


CLS 493/29
TXT To actuate material advancing means:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 8 including regulating the operation of
    structure serving to bring a workpiece to the machine, to carry a workpiece
    through the machine, or to carry a produced article away from the machine.


CLS 493/30
TXT Responsive to machine element:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 3 including detecting a characteristic
    of a component of the apparatus.


CLS 493/31
TXT Malfunctioning machine element:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 30 including detecting a characteristic
    of the component indicative of an undesired condition.


CLS 493/32
TXT Responsive to stress of machine element:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 31 including detecting force acting on
    the component or the reaction of the component to force.


CLS 493/33
TXT To stop machine:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 32 including regulating by terminating
    operation of the apparatus.


CLS 493/34
TXT To adjust machine element to preselected position:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 30 including regulating movement of an
    operationally stationary component of the apparatus from a first fixed
    location or orientation to a second fixed location or orientation, or
    regulating to change the

    limits of movement of an operationally moving component.


CLS 493/35
TXT Responsive to count of machine element:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 30 including detecting the number of
    times the component has moved.


CLS 493/36
TXT Responsive to timer:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 30 wherein the component of the
    apparatus that is detected is a time piece.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus responsive to a mechanical or electrical clock is
    included herein.

    (2)     Note.  Apparatus including a clocklike mechanism that is driven by
    movement of operational structure of the apparatus is not included herein.


CLS 493/37
TXT WITH MEASURING OR TESTING:

    Method or apparatus under the class definition combined with (a)
    determining a physical characteristic of a workpiece or formed article; or,
    (b) comparing a physical characteristic of the workpiece or formed article
    with a known standard.

    (1)     Note.  A known standard may be referred to as a "control".


CLS 493/38
TXT SAFETY:

    Method or apparatus under the class definition including recognition of any
    condition that might endanger the operative and accordingly make provision
    to limit that danger.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for means to protect a component of the apparatus.


CLS 493/39
TXT CIGARETTE FILTER MAKING:

    Method or apparatus under the class definition including an article
    constructed to be secured to or integrated with the end of a tubular or
    rodlike tobacco or tobaccolike product, which article is intended to
    restrict, entrap, or alter components, of the flow of gases and combustion
    products from the tubular or rodlike tobacco or tobaccolike product when
    burning to thereby modify the composition or condition of such gases and
    combustion products passing therethrough.

    (1)     Note.  The article to restrict, entrap, or alter flow of gases and
    combustion products shall herein after be referred to as a "filter".

    (2)     Note.  This class is the residual home for making a cigarette
    filter, even if the filter is not constructed of sheet or web material.
    Therefore, a patent directed to the making of such a cigarette filter will
    be found herein unless provided for elsewhere.

    (3)     Note.  A cigarette is any rodlike article of tobacco or tobaccolike
    material intended to be manually manipulated directly to the mouth of the
    user.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for making a cigarette filter including use of a control means
    energized in response to an activator stimulated by a condition sensor.

    374+,   for assembling a filter, generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, for manufacture of a detachable cigarette filter,
    e.g., a water bottle-type tobacco smoke filter, a hookah, a cigarette
    holder having a filter, etc.

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 280+ for means for making a cigarette filter
    combined with means for recognizing (or engaging) a tobacco product.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    for a method of forming material to be used as the filler material of a
    cigarette filter.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating: Apparatus, for
    apparatus for forming material to be used as the filler material of a
    cigarette filter.


CLS 493/40
TXT Filter having indicator or inspection means:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 39 wherein the filter formed is provided
    with means to show a condition of that filter, or of the gases or
    combustion products passing therethrough, or with means to allow the user
    to observe the interior of that filter.


CLS 493/41
TXT With application of heat to secure wrapper:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 39 including supplying thermal energy to
    the filter to cause a sheet or web encasing member to be fastened to or
    about that filter.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is both "heat sealing" and heat drying of
    adhesive.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein is securing filtering components to the
    paper encasing member.

    (3)     Note.  The "wrapper" or "encasing member" of this subclass may
    serve to enclose the entire cigarette and hold both the tobacco and the
    filter or may serve to enclose only the components of the filter or the
    tobacco.  Note that recognition (or engagement) of tobacco or tobaccolike
    material is excluded from this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129,    for making a rigid container with application of adhesive and heat
    sealing.

    133+,   for making a rigid container including heat sealing.

    189+,   for making a pliable container including heat sealing.

    274,    for making a tube with coating and heating.

    332,    for making an article of this class, generally including
    application of adhesive and heating or drying.

    341,    for an operation of this class including heat sealing combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading.

    393,    for securing a sheet or web workpiece and another workpiece by
    application of heat.


CLS 493/42
TXT With shaping or compacting of filter material:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 39 combined with trimming or deforming
    material being formed into a filter, or including pressing adjacent units,
    e.g., fibers, of material being formed into a filter closer together, to
    give the filter a configuration to better effect the flow of gases
    therethrough.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes shaping of filter material with
    thinning flow of the material only if combined with assembling of filter
    components.

    (2)     Note.  Cutting or severing may be "shaping" in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    395+,   for bending to shape a filter paper, generally, if there is no
    thinning flow of the material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    for a method of compacting to shape a mass of particulate or fibrous
    material other than when making a cigarette filter component.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 406+ for apparatus for compacting to shape a mass of particulate
    or fibrous material other than when making a cigarette filter component.


CLS 493/43
TXT Including heating:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 42 including applying energy to raise
    the thermal activity of the material being made into a filter.


CLS 493/44
TXT Including fluid contact for forming:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 42 including subjecting the material
    being formed to direct engagement therewith of a gas or liquid to assist in
    such forming operation.


CLS 493/45
TXT Cutting continuous length rod into determinate lengths:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 42 wherein the configuration of the
    material being formed is that of a shaft having no more than one recognized
    end, including severing to longitudinally subdivide such shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    287+,   for making a product from a sheet or web combined with cutting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, for cutting a rod to length, generally.


CLS 493/46
TXT Prior to assembly with other cigarette filter material:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 42 including deforming or pressing
    together adjacent units of filter material and subsequently bringing that
    material into positional relationship with other filter material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include recognition of tobacco.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    131,    Tobacco, subclasses 280+ for manufacture of a cigarette including
    recognition of (or engagement with) tobacco.


CLS 493/47
TXT By assembling dissimilar filter materials (e.g., fiber and powdered
    charcoal, etc.):

    Method or apparatus under subclass 39 comprising juxtaposing or fastening
    together portions of different types of filter material.

    (1)     Note.  A tobacco or filter wrapping paper is not considered to be a
    filter material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for a operation of this class including assembling or coating and
    the use of control means responsive to that assembling or coating.

    67+,    for assembling a rigid container combined with cutting, breaking,
    tearing, or abrading by a rotary tool.

    75+,    for assembling a rigid container combined with cutting, breaking,
    tearing, or abrading by a reciprocatory tool.

    84+,    for making a rigid container including assembly of distinct members.

    210+,   for making a pliable container including assembly of distinct
    members.

    297+,   for making a tube including assembly of distinct members.

    334+,   for assembling of distinct members combined with adhesive coating.

    343+,   for assembling of distinct members combined with cutting, breaking,
    tearing, or abrading.

    374+,   for assembling of distinct members, one of which is a sheet or web,
    generally.


CLS 493/48
TXT With application of forced air, vacuum or vibration to assist handling:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 47 including applying higher or lower
    than atmospheric pressure air to the material being assembled, or including
    imparting short distance, rapid, to-and-fro movement to the material being
    assembled or to structure for transport of the material to aid in transport
    of the material.


CLS 493/49
TXT Including plasticizer, adhesive, coating, or impregnant:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 47 wherein at least one of the different
    materials comprises (a) material to cause another material to be changed to
    the plastic state, (b) material to secure two solid components together by
    adhesive bonding, (c) flowable material to form a layer over another
    material, or (d) flowable material to be absorbed into another material.

    (1)     Note.  Adsorption is included in this subclass.


CLS 493/50
TXT Filter of fibrous material:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 39 comprising forming a filter from
    material having generally elongated, textilelike strands.


CLS 493/51
TXT CONTAINER MAKING:

    Method or apparatus under the class definition comprising the step of or
    means for performing a final operation in the construction of a receptacle
    intended to serve to encompass and hold material or an article.

    (1)     Note.  The "final operation" required in the definition of this
    subclass may be considered to be that operation that changes something less
    than a container into a container.  For example, closing the bottom of a
    tube forms a container if it is intended to hold goods, and that step alone
    will be found herein; whereas, placing a handle on a previously formed
    container or on a blank to be formed into a container will not be found in
    this and the indented subclasses unless claimed in combination with a step
    which may be considered to be the required "final operation".

    (2)     Note.  Making a container hold material better is considered to be
    the "final" operation required by the definition of this subclass; e.g.,
    lining a container, applying a lid to a container, etc., makes the
    container hold material better and is considered to be proper for this and
    the indented subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  A common folder for holding sheet material, with a front and
    back cover is not considered to be a container because it does not
    encompass the contained article; however, a similar folder with straps on
    the sides to attach the upper corners of the front and back covers is a
    container because it does encompass the contained article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186+,   for making a pliable container and for making an envelope or closed
    folder, e.g., a record envelope, even if the wall thereof is rigid,
    provided the envelope or folder is formed at its margin with a single fold
    only, thereby making no allowance for the thickness of the contents.


CLS 493/52
TXT Rigid container, (e.g., box, carton, cup, cap, etc.):

    Method or apparatus under subclass 51 including making a receptacle that is
    intended to generally retain its shape during use.

    (1)     Note.  A small container made of heavy paper may be a rigid
    container while a large container made of the same heavy paper is pliable.
    It is the intent of the construction that determines placement of a patent
    in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  In order to avoid unnecessary splitting of similar art, it
    has been determined to consider any envelope or folder as a "pliable
    container" even if the wall portions are rigid, e.g., a photograph record
    envelope.


CLS 493/53
TXT With printing or photographic reproduction:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 52 combined with placing recognizable
    indicia on a workpiece or product.

    (1)     Note. Included herein is placing recognizable indicia on a
    workpiece or product by coating, impressing, or application of or exposure
    of photosensitive materials.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    137,    for making a pliable container combined with printing.

    270,    for tube making combined with printing.

    320+,   for making a product from sheet or web material, generally,
    combined with printing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, for placing recognizable indicia on sheet or web material
    without any other working of the sheet or web.


CLS 493/54
TXT On material prior to assembly with container:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 53 wherein the placing of recognizable
    information is done on a workpiece that is not part of a receptacle but is
    intended to be subsequently juxtaposed or secured to a receptacle or
    receptacle component.


CLS 493/55
TXT On material to be erected to become container:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 53 wherein the placing of recognizable
    information is done on a workpiece web to be formed into a receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188,    for printing on material, then erecting that material into a
    pliable container.


CLS 493/56
TXT With cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 52 combined with piercing into a
    workpiece with a sharp tool; forcibly ripping one portion of a workpiece by
    bending or a tensile stress; or, engaging a workpiece by a crystalline tool
    to remove surface portions from that workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for cutting breaking, tearing, or abrading combined with an
    operation of this class including use of work or product responsive control
    means.

    194+,   for making a pliable container including heat sealing combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading of indeterminate length work.

    199+,   for making a pliable container including heat sealing combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading.

    227+,   for making a pliable container combined with cutting, breaking,
    tearing, or abrading.

    287+,   for making a tube combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or
    abrading.

    324+,   for an operation of this class combined with printing or
    photographic reproduction and cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, for cutting by use of a sharp cutting tool, generally
    including severing.

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, for subdividing by the application
    of bending or tautening forces.

    451,    Abrading, for engaging a workpiece by a crystalline tool to remove
    surface portions from the workpiece.


CLS 493/57
TXT By randomly manipulated implement:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 56 including using a device to pierce,
    rip, or remove surface portions from a workpiece, which device is moved
    about at the will of the operative to perform the intended operation.


CLS 493/58
TXT And embossing:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 56 combined with or including forming of
    a design in relief of a previously planar surface of a workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  The patent of this subclass may include an operation of this
    class (49 comprising engraving by a piercing, separating, or crystalline
    tool or may include an operation of this class (493) combined with
    piercing, separating, or engaging by a crystalline tool even when combined
    with an operation involving a thinning flow of the workpiece.


CLS 493/59
TXT And form-scoring:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 56 combined with (a) pressing a line in
    one surface of a workpiece and thereby raising a corresponding line on the
    opposite surface; or, (b) pressing a line in one surface of a workpiece
    with no significant change in the opposite surface configuration, wherein
    the material of the workpiece under that line becomes more compacted, such
    that there is no thinning flow of the workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160+,   for making a rigid container including scoring.

    240+,   for making a pliable container including scoring.

    396+,   for form-scoring of sheet or web material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 879+ for scoring by a sharp cutting edge,
    wherein there is not significant deformation of the work.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    for the method of shaping sheet or web work by a thinning flow of the work,
    as in embossing.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus, for
    means to shape sheet or web work by a thinning flow of the work, as in
    embossing.


CLS 493/60
TXT Rotary cutting, breaking, tearing, abrading, or form-scoring tool:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 59 including piercing, ripping, engaging
    with a crystalline tool, or forming a crease line in work by a member in
    engagement with the workpiece which member is adapted to move about an axis
    more than 360_ to perform the respective operation.


CLS 493/61
TXT Reciprocating cutting, breaking, abrading, or form-scoring tool:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 59 including piercing, ripping, engaging
    with a crystalline tool or forming a crease line in work by a member in
    engagement with the workpiece, which member is adapted to move to-and-fro
    to perform the respective operation.


CLS 493/62
TXT Severing of web into blanks:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 61 including piercing, ripping, or
    engaging with a crystalline tool to subdivide an elongated planar workpiece
    into shorter lengths to later be shaped into a receptacle.


CLS 493/63
TXT Perforating:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 56 including piercing a single work
    surface; thus forming a crater in the work or forming  cleft through to the
    opposite work surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 866+ for use of a tool to pierce a single work
    surface and form a crater, without paper working.


CLS 493/64
TXT By rotary tool:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 56 including piercing, ripping, or
    engaging by a crystalline tool by a member in engagement with the workpiece
    which member is adapted to move about an axis more than 360_ to perform the
    respective operation.


CLS 493/65
TXT On travelling carrier:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 64 wherein the member in engagement with
    the workpiece is rotatably supported on a structure that is adapted to
    support and move therewith along a prescribed path with respect to the
    workpiece during operation.


CLS 493/66
TXT Flexibly mounted rotary tool:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 64 wherein the member in engagement with
    the workpiece is supported for rotation about an axis such that the member
    may pliably move to change the position of the axis.


CLS 493/67
TXT Including assembling of distinct members: Method or apparatus under
    subclass 64 including juxtaposing or fastening together a plurality of
    workpieces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for an operation of this class including assembling or coating and
    the use of control means responsive to that assembling or coating.

    47+,    for assembling dissimilar filter materials in making a cigarette
    filter.

    75+,    for assembling a rigid container combined with cutting, breaking,
    tearing, or abrading by a reciprocatory tool.

    84+,    for making a rigid container including assembly of distinct members.

    210+,   for making a pliable container including assembly of distinct
    members.

    297+,   for making a tube including assembly of distinct members.

    334+,   for assembling of distinct members combined with adhesive coating.

    343+,   for assembling of distinct members combined with cutting, breaking,
    tearing, or abrading.

    374+,   for assembling of distinct members, one of which is a sheet or web,
    generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 418+ for a conveyor for
    establishing and moving a group of items; and subclass 644 for means for
    conveying a signature.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, for a device specific to
    driving a fastener into a sheet or web; or into a stack of sheets or webs,
    with no recognition of more than one sheet or web.


CLS 493/68
TXT And folding:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 67 comprising bendingly stressing a
    sheet or web workpiece beyond its elastic limit along a line to form a
    permanent crease.

    (1)     Note.  Folding of cloth is included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69+,    for making a rigid container including folding combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading by a rotary tool.

    79+,    for making a rigid container including folding combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading by a reciprocatory tool.

    151,    for making a rigid container including coating with an adhesive and
    folding.

    162+,   for making a rigid container including folding.

    231+,   for making a pliable container including folding combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading.

    243+,   for making a pliable container including folding.

    353,    for folding combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading
    by a composite tool.

    356+,   for folding combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading,
    generally.

    405+,   for folding, generally, of a sheet or web.


CLS 493/69
TXT Including folding:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 64 comprising bendingly stressing a
    sheet or web workpiece beyond its elastic limit along a line to form a
    permanent crease.

    (1)     Note.  Folding of cloth is included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for making a rigid container including folding and assembling
    combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading by a rotary tool.

    79+,    for making a rigid container including folding combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading by a reciprocatory tool.

    151,    for making a rigid container including coating with an adhesive and
    folding.

    162+,   for making a rigid container including folding.

    231+,   for making a pliable container including folding combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading.

    243+,   for making a pliable container including folding.

    353,    for folding combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading
    by a composite tool.

    356+,   for folding combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading,
    generally.

    405+,   for folding, generally, of a sheet or web.


CLS 493/70
TXT Of flap:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 69 wherein formation of the crease is to
    bend over an extending edge of a workpiece.


CLS 493/71
TXT With means to advance work or product:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 69 combined with use of means to
    transport a workpiece progressively from a remote location toward or
    through a treating station or to transport a formed article away from a
    treating station.

    (1)     Note.  Movement of a workpiece toward a working tool to effect a
    treating operation is considered to be work infeed rather than work
    advancing and is therefor not the concept of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     for making a rigid container including folding combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading by a reciprocatory tool and with
    means to advance work.

    125,    for making a rigid container including securing work surfaces, use
    of supply hopper, use of a suction-type handling means and use of conveyor
    to advance work to a folder.

    142+,   for making a rigid container including securing work surfaces with
    simultaneous pressing and advancing of the work while adhesive dries or
    sets.

    147,    for making a rigid container including securing work surfaces and
    advancing the work or product.

    161,    for making a rigid container including form-scoring and
    continuously advancing the work with the form-scoring tool moving with the
    work during operation thereof.

    180+,   for making a rigid container including folding and advancing of the
    work or product.

    196+,   for making a pliable container with heat sealing and cutting,
    breaking, tearing, or abrading and advancing of work or product.

    201+,   for making a pliable container cutting, breaking, tearing, or
    abrading and advancing of work or product.

    302,    for making a tube and advancing the formed tube along its axis.

    357+,   for folding combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading
    with means to advance the work or product.

    400+,   for scoring with work or product advancing or positioning.

    416+,   for folding including work or product advancing.


CLS 493/72
TXT Continuous advance:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 71 wherein the sheet or web is
    transferred without stopping toward, through, or away from the location at
    which it is stressed beyond its elastic limit.


CLS 493/73
TXT By reciprocatory tool:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 56 wherein the member in engagement with
    the workpiece to perform the piercing, ripping, or engagement with a
    crystalline tool function is constructed to move to-and-fro when in
    operation.


CLS 493/74
TXT Severing of web into blanks:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 73 wherein the member in engagement with
    the workpiece functions to subdivide an elongated planar member into
    shorter lengths to later be shaped into a receptacle.


CLS 493/75
TXT Including assembling of distinct members:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 73 including juxtaposing or fastening
    together a plurality of workpieces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for an operation of this class including assembling or coating and
    the use of control means responsive to that assembling or coating.

    47+,    for assembling dissimilar filter materials in making a cigarette
    filter.

    67+,    for assembling a rigid container combined with cutting, breaking,
    tearing, or abrading by a rotary tool.

    84+,    for making a rigid container including assembly of distinct members.

    210+,   for making a pliable container including assembly of distinct
    members.

    297+,   for making a tube including assembly of distinct members.

    334+,   for assembly of distinct members combined with adhesive coating.

    343+,   for assembling of distinct members combined with cutting, breaking,
    tearing, or abrading.

    374+,   for assembling of distinct members, one of which is a sheet or web,
    generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 418+ for a conveyor for
    establishing and moving a group of items; and subclass 644 for means for
    conveying a signature.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, for a device specific to
    driving a fastener into a sheet or web; or into a stack of sheet or webs,
    with no recognition of more than one sheet or web.


CLS 493/76
TXT Comprising bringing two members together: Method or apparatus under
    subclass 75 including juxtaposing a first and a second workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    344,    for bringing two members together combined with cutting, breaking,
    tearing, or abrading.

    379,    for bringing two members together under this definition, generally.


CLS 493/77
TXT Indeterminate length member:
    Method or apparatus under subclass 76 wherein at the time of being brought
    into juxtaposed relationship at least one of the workpieces is of such
    lengths that no more than one end is recognized (engaged).

    (1)     Note.  A spool or coil of work is considered to be "indeterminate
    length".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for an operation of this class including use of a sensor responsive
    to indeterminate length work.

    97,     for making a rigid container including assembly with an
    indeterminate length workpiece.

    354+,   for bringing an indeterminate length workpiece together with
    another combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading.

    380+,   for bringing length together with another member, generally, under
    the definition of this class.

    410+,   for refolding or unfolding an indeterminate length workpiece.


CLS 493/78
TXT Member comprising adhesive backed tape: Method or apparatus under subclass
    77 wherein at the time of being brought into juxtaposed relationship the
    workpiece having no more than one recognized end has a previously applied
    coating of material adapted to chemically unite therewith and bond that
    workpiece to another member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for making a rigid container including folding and assembling
    combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading by a rotary tool.

    69+,    for making a rigid container including folding combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading by a rotary tool.

    116+,   for making a rigid container including securing two distinct
    members together using adhesive backed tape.

    151,    for making a rigid container including coating with an adhesive and
    folding.

    162+,   for making a rigid container including folding.

    231+,   for making a pliable container including folding combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading.

    243+,   for making a pliable container including folding.

    347,    for application of an adhesive backed tape to another member
    combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading.

    353,    for folding combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading
    by a composite tool.

    356+,   for folding combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading,
    generally.

    382,    for application of an adhesive backed tape to another member.

    405+,   for folding, generally, of a sheet or web.


CLS 493/79
TXT Including folding:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 73 including bendingly stressing a
    workpiece beyond its elastic limit along a line to form a permanent crease.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for making a rigid container including folding and assembling
    combined with cutting, breaking, earing, or abrading by a rotary tool.

    69+,    for making a rigid container including folding combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading by a rotary tool.

    151,    for making a rigid container including coating with an adhesive and
    folding.

    162+,   for making a rigid container including folding.

    231+,   for making a pliable container including folding combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading.

    243+,   for making a pliable container including folding.

    353,    for folding combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading,
    by a composite tool.

    356+,   for folding combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading,
    generally.

    405+,   for folding, generally, of a sheet or web.


CLS 493/80
TXT Of flap:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 79 wherein formation of the crease is to
    bend over an extending edge of a workpiece.


CLS 493/81
TXT With means to advance work or product:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 79 combined with use of means to
    transport a workpiece progressively from a remote location toward or
    through a treating station or to transport a formed article away from a
    treating station.

    (1)     Note.  Movement of a workpiece toward a working tool to effect a
    treating operation is considered to be work infeed rather than work
    advancing and is therefor not the concept of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71+,    for making a rigid container including folding combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading by a rotary tool and with means to
    advance work.

    125,    for making a rigid container including securing work surfaces, use
    of a supply hopper, use of a suction-type handling means and use of a
    conveyor to advance work to a folder.

    142+,   for making a rigid container including securing work surfaces with
    simultaneous pressing and advancing of the work while adhesive dries or
    sets.

    147,    for making a rigid container including securing work surfaces and
    advancing the work or product.

    161,    for making a rigid container including scoring and continuously
    advancing the work with the scoring tool moving with the work during
    operation thereof.

    180+,   for making a rigid container including folding and advancing of the
    work or product.

    196+,   for making a pliable container with heat sealing and cutting,
    breaking, tearing, or abrading and advancing of work or product.

    201+,   for making a pliable container cutting, breaking, tearing, or
    abrading and advancing of work or product.

    301,    for making a tube and advancing the formed tube along its axis.

    357+,   for folding combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading
    with means to advance the work or product.

    400+,   for form-scoring with work or product advancing or positioning.

    416+,   for folding including work or product advancing.


CLS 493/82
TXT With scrap material separation or removal:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 56 combined with segregating or carrying
    away an unused or waste portion of a workpiece or product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83,     for manufacture of a rigid container with scrap material separation
    or removal, but without cutting, breaking, tearing or abrading.

    342,    for manufacture of a product from a sheet or web combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading and with scrap material separation
    or removal.

    373,    for manufacture of an article from a sheet or web with scrap
    material separation or removal, generally.


CLS 493/83
TXT With scrap material separation or removal: Method or apparatus under
    subclass 52 combined with segregating or carrying away an unused or waste
    portion of a workpiece or product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     for manufacture of a rigid container with scrap material separation
    or removal and with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading.

    373,    for manufacture of an article from a sheet or web with scrap
    material separation or removal, generally.


CLS 493/84
TXT Assembling of distinct members:
    Method or apparatus under subclass 52 including juxtaposing or fastening
    together a plurality of workpieces.

    (1)     Note.  The workpieces of this and the indented subclasses are
    totally separate and distinct.  A first and a second surface of a single
    workpiece are not considered to be separate workpieces, no matter how far
    spaced from each other.

    (2)     Note.  A fastener, e.g., a staple or a rivet, is considered to be a
    workpiece when assembled to a paper workpiece; however, see the search note
    to Class 227 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for an operation of this class including assembling or coating and
    the use of control means responsive to that assembling or coating.

    47+,    for assembling dissimilar filter materials in making a cigarette
    filter.

    67+,    for assembling a rigid container combined with cutting, breaking,
    tearing, or abrading by a rotary tool.

    75+,    for assembling a rigid container combined with cutting, breaking,
    tearing, or abrading by a reciprocatory tool.

    210+,   for making a pliable container including assembly of distinct
    members.

    297+,   for making a tube including assembly of distinct members.

    334+,   for assembling of distinct members combined with adhesive coating.

    343+,   for assembling of distinct members combined with cutting, breaking,
    tearing, or abrading.

    374+,   for assembling of distinct members, one of which is a sheet or web,
    generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 428+ for methods of and subclasses 700+
    for apparatus for assembling or disassembling.  Class 29 is the generic
    home for assembling.  See the search notes under subclasses 428 and 700 for
    other locations of specific types of assembling.  Also see the line notes
    under the definition of this class.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, for
    uniting a first and a second web by adhesive bonding without assembling or
    bending in forming an article of commerce or with or without assembling or
    bending in forming united stock material.  See the line notes under the
    definition of this class.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, for a device specific to
    driving a fastener into a sheet or web; or into a stack of sheets or webs,
    with no recognition of more than one sheet or web.


CLS 493/85
TXT With extruding, drawing, or attenuating:
    Method or apparatus under subclass 84 combined with forcing material
    through an orifice or pulling, pushing, or stretching material to thicken
    or thin the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    293,    for tube making combined with extruding, drawing, or attenuating.

    338,    for an operation of this class, generally, combined with extruding,
    drawing, or attenuating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    for a method of forming material by forcing it through an orifice or
    wherein there is thinning or thickening flow of the material.  See the line
    note under the definition of this class (493).

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus, for
    apparatus for forming material by forcing it through an orifice or wherein
    there is thinning or thickening flow of the material.  See the line note
    under the definition of this class (493).


CLS 493/86
TXT Applying cutting or tearing edge to container:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 84 wherein one of the workpieces is
    sharp and is intended to serve to sever or tear contents that will be
    placed in the receptacle in its intended use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    377,    for an assembling operation of this class wherein one of the
    workpieces is a tear strip.


CLS 493/87
TXT Applying discharge assist means (e.g., valve, pour spout, etc.):

    Method or apparatus under subclass 84 wherein one of the workpieces is
    intended to ultimately function in the removal of contents from the
    receptacle by directing or permitting movement of the contents.


CLS 493/88
TXT Including handle or suspension means:
    Method or apparatus under subclass 84 wherein one of the workpieces is
    intended to serve as a grip on the receptacle to be engaged by a person
    carrying the receptacle or is intended to serve as structure whereby the
    receptacle may be hung.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226,    for making a pliable container including assembling a handle
    therewith.

    909,    for an art collection including making of a rigid container having
    a handle or suspension means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 428+ for a method of assembling,
    generally including assembling a container and a handle; and subclass 774
    for apparatus to assemble a handle to a container.


CLS 493/89
TXT Including structural reinforcement:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 84 wherein one of the workpieces is
    intended to make the receptacle physically stronger.


CLS 493/90
TXT Including internal partition:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 84 wherein one of the workpieces is
    intended to serve to divide the space within the receptacle and provide a
    compartment for acceptance of material to be packaged in the receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  An egg carton made of a container and separate partition is
    included in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The partition of this subclass is a separate member from the
    wall of the container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136,    for forming a one-piece-blank into a compartmentized container in
    which the container is held in erected condition by interfitting of
    container portions.

    391,    for assembling container partitions, or assembling a previously
    formed container with a partition, without forming the container.

    912,    for an art digest of related operations.


CLS 493/91
TXT Intersecting partitions:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 90 wherein the space within the
    receptacle is divided by a workpiece extending in a first direction and by
    a second workpiece or another portion of the same workpiece extending in a
    direction to cross or abut the first workpiece.


CLS 493/92
TXT Single shaped partition adapted to touch packaged material on three sides:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 90 wherein the space within the
    receptacle is divided by a workpiece that is adapted to

    wrap at least 270_ about material to be packaged in the receptacle.


CLS 493/93
TXT Liner:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 84 wherein one of the workpieces
    comprises a member intended to extend about the inside of the receptacle to
    restrict engagement of the contents of the receptacle from the inner
    surface of the receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  The inner member of this subclass may cover the entire or
    less surface of the receptacle; however, it is not self-sufficient to hold
    the contents without the receptacle.

    (2)     Note. Included herein is assembling a preformed container and a
    preformed liner, even without additional "container making".

    (3)     Note.  Manipulation of a container having a liner, e.g., closing
    the flaps, is not considered to be assembling of the liner and the
    container for this and the indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    309+,   for opening the end of a liner for assembly with the end of a rigid
    container without placing the liner inside the container.


CLS 493/94
TXT Partial liner (e.g., fly liner, bottom gasket, etc.):

    Method or apparatus under subclass 93 wherein engagement of the contents
    with the inside of the receptacle is restricted to limited areas.


CLS 493/95
TXT Liner permanently secured to wall:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 93 wherein the workpiece restricting
    engagement of the contents with other surfaces of the receptacle is bonded
    to the surface of the receptacle in such a way as to preclude ready removal.

    (1)     Note.  If the liner is to be applied to a blank before the blank is
    erected, bonding must take place over only a limited area of the liner.
    Bonding over the entire surface of the liner would form a laminated blank,
    rather than a lined blank.


CLS 493/96
TXT Prior to erecting of container:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 95 wherein the workpiece for restricting
    engagement is intended to be bonded to the surface of the receptacle before
    formation of the receptacle.


CLS 493/97
TXT With indeterminate length work supply:
    Method or apparatus under subclass 96 wherein being brought into
    juxtaposition or when being fastened together with another workpiece, one
    workpiece is of such length that no more than one end thereof is recognized.

    (1)     Note.  A spool or coil of work is considered to be "indeterminate
    length".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for an operation of this class utilizing a first and a second
    sensor, one of which is a surface contacting sensor for indeterminate
    length work.

    24+,    for an operation of this class including use of a sensor responsive
    to indeterminate length work.

    77+,    for making a rigid container including bringing an indeterminate
    length member together with another member combined with cutting, breaking,
    tearing, or abrading by a reciprocatory tool.

    97,     for making a rigid container including assembly with an
    indeterminate length workpiece.

    193+,   for making a pliable container including heat sealing of
    indeterminate length work.

    335,    for an operation of this class combined with coating an
    indeterminate length workpiece.

    345+,   for bringing an indeterminate length workpiece together with
    another member combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading.

    380+,   for assembling of this class wherein one workpiece is of
    indeterminate length.

    404,    for folding an indeterminate length workpiece by a roller.

    410+,   for overfolding or unfolding an indeterminate length workpiece.


CLS 493/98
TXT Assembling by wrapping container about premade liner:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 95 including providing a member for
    restricting engagement of the contents of the formed receptacle with the
    receptacle, which member is in substantially its final shape, and then
    encompassing a sheetlike member thereabout and at the same time forming the
    sheetlike member into a receptacle.


CLS 493/99
TXT Secured at container seam:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 95 including bringing together and
    bonding together edges of sheet work material along a line in the formation
    of a receptacle and including bonding the contents restricting member to
    the receptacle along the same line.


CLS 493/100
TXT Premade liner and premade container:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 93 wherein the workpiece for restricting
    engagement is given its final form before assembly with the receptacle and
    wherein the receptacle is given its final shape before assembly with the
    workpiece for restricting engagement.


CLS 493/101
TXT With venting or vacuumizing of container to allow assembly with liner:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 100 including providing a closable
    opening in the receptacle or restricting member to allow escape of air
    captured between the receptacle and restricting member or including means
    to remove the air from the area between the receptacle and the restricting
    member to ease the placement of the restricting member into the receptacle.


CLS 493/102
TXT Including application of distinct closure:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 84 comprising placing a separate member
    over an opening in the receptacle to cover the opening.

    (1)     Note.  Application of a cover over an opening may serve as the
    operation completing a tube into a container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139,    for interfitting of an integral tab to close and secure an opening
    in a container.

    156+,   for closing an end of a rigid, nonrectangular container.


CLS 493/103
TXT Closure having metallic portion:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 102 wherein a part of the covering
    member is made of metal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, for the combination of assembling with metal
    deforming, other than metal deforming to bring about securement of
    assembled components.


CLS 493/104
TXT Nonrectangular cross section container:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 102 wherein the receptacle made is of a
    shape such that the horizontal margins are other than would be described by
    two pairs of parallel lines meeting at right angles.

    (1)     Note.  A rectangular solid container is excluded from this
    subclass, even if it includes a domed or irregular top.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149,    for making a nonrectangular cross section rigid container with
    coating.

    152+,   for making a nonrectangular cross section rigid container,
    generally.


CLS 493/105
TXT By use of turret mandrel carrier:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 104 including use of a male member on
    which the receptacle or covering member is placed or over which the
    receptacle or covering member is made, which male member is supported for
    pivotal movement about an axis to and from the position at which the
    covering member is placed over an opening in the receptacle.


CLS 493/106
TXT And frustoconical form:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 105 wherein the male member includes a
    surface of a shape which may be described as generated by a line extending
    from and pivoting about a point and following a circle that is normal to
    another line extending from the point to the center of the circle, which
    shape is cut off before reaching the point of generation.


CLS 493/107
TXT Rotary form:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 106 including turning the male member
    about its central axis when in use.


CLS 493/108
TXT Circular cross section container:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 104 wherein the shape retaining
    receptacle made is of a shape such that a cross section therethrough may be
    defined by a point revolving about a fixed center.


CLS 493/109
TXT With bending to secure closure:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 108 including stressing a member beyond
    its elastic limit to cause more permanent engagement of the member over an
    opening with the receptacle.


CLS 493/110
TXT Including laminating or coating of container blank:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 84 (a) including superposing multiple
    workpieces before formation thereof into the shape of a single receptacle,
    or (b) combined with placing a layer of flowable material on the surface of
    a workpiece, which layer is intended to become a part of that surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128+,   for making a rigid container including securing and the application
    of an adhesive.

    148+,   for making a rigid container with coating.

    220+,   for making a pliable container including assembling of distinct
    members and coating.

    264+,   for making a rigid container with application of adhesive or
    securing by adhesive.

    272+,   for making a tube with coating.

    328+,   for an operation of this class, generally, with coating.


CLS 493/111
TXT Including wrapping of container:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 84 including making a receptacle and
    encasing the receptacle or a portion of the receptacle with a sheet of
    material generally conforming thereto.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is making a box within a box whether or not
    the boxes are secured together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93+,    for placing a liner inside a container wherein the liner is not
    self-sufficient to hold the contents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 203+ for wrapping a container to form a
    package thereof.


CLS 493/112
TXT Including use of rotary container support:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 111 wherein the means supporting the
    receptacle against the force of gravity is adapted to turn about an axis
    360_ or more.


CLS 493/113
TXT Including use of reciprocatory container support:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 111 wherein the means supporting the
    receptacle against the force of gravity is adapted to move to-and-fro in a
    straight line or about an axis.


CLS 493/114
TXT Securing:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 84 including fastening plural workpieces
    together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121+,   for making a rigid container including securing a first and a
    second surface of a single workpiece together.

    189+,   for making a pliable container including heat sealing.

    393+,   for assembling of two workpieces by securing, generally.

    394,    for securing a first and a second surface of a single workpiece
    together.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 428+ for the process of and subclasses
    700+ for apparatus for the general application of a fastener (e.g., a paper
    clip) to work, if there is no recognition of more than one sheet or web.
    See the search note for Class 29 under the definition of this class.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, for
    securing two workpieces together by adhesive bonding, generally; for
    adhesive bonding combined with assembling, bending, or flexing in the
    formation of a web of stock material; and for assembling and adhesively
    bonding an article with a postage stamp or a label.  See the search note to
    Class 156 under the definition of this class.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, for application of a nail or
    staple to work even if the work is a sheet or web if there is no other
    working (e.g., bending) of the sheet or web and no recognition of more than
    one sheet or web.


CLS 493/115
TXT By application of district securing member:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 114 including making a first workpiece
    into a receptacle and intimately engaging therewith a second workpiece
    intended to function to fasten the workpieces together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    383+,   for making a product from a sheet or web generally including use of
    a distinct securing member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, for application of a nail or
    staple to work even if the work is a sheet or web, if there is no other
    working of the sheet or web (e.g., bending) and no recognition of more than
    one sheet or web.


CLS 493/116
TXT Tape:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 115 wherein the workpiece intended to
    perform the fastening function is weblike in shape and is coated on at
    least one side with adhesive.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     for making a rigid container including application of an adhesive
    backed tape combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading by a
    reciprocatory tool.

    347,    for application of an adhesive backed tape to another member
    combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading.

    382,    for application of an adhesive backed tape to another member.


CLS 493/117
TXT Applied to moving work:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 116 including applying the weblike
    fastening workpiece to the other workpiece at an assembly station, as the
    other workpiece moves within the station.


CLS 493/118
TXT Material penetrating member:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 115 wherein the fastening workpiece
    includes a sharp edge and is intended to fasten by the act of that edge
    piercing into the other workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    351,    for assembling by causing one member to pierce into another to
    which it is assembled, combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or
    abrading.

    384+,   for using a work penetrating fastening member to secure other
    members together.

    392,    for assembling by causing one member to pierce into another to
    which it is assembled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, for application of a nail or
    staple to work even if the work is a sheet or web, if there is no other
    working (e.g., bending) of the sheet or web and there is no recognition of
    more than one sheet or web.


CLS 493/119
TXT Bifurcated member:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 118 wherein the fastening workpiece
    includes two sharp edges and is intended to fasten by the act of both edges
    piercing into the other workpiece at the same time.


CLS 493/120
TXT Including use of work supply hopper:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 84 including the use of a compartment to
    hold a substantial number of workpieces as a ready supply for assembly with
    other workpieces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    348,    for assembling of an article from sheet or web material and another
    workpiece including use of a work supply hopper, combined with cutting,
    breaking, tearing, or abrading.


CLS 493/121
TXT Securing:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 52 including fastening two portions of a
    workpiece together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114+,   for securing two workpieces together in the formation of a rigid
    container.

    264+,   for making a pliable container including securing by adhesive.

    325,    for printing or photographic reproduction combined with cutting,
    breaking, tearing, or abrading and with securing.

    393,    for assembling of two workpieces by securing, generally.

    394,    for securing a first and a second surface of a single workpiece
    together.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 428+ for the process of and subclasses
    700+ for apparatus for the general application of a fastener (e.g., a paper
    clip) to work if there is no recognition of more than one sheet or web.
    See the search note to Class 29 under the definition of this class.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, for
    securing two workpieces together by adhesive bonding, generally; for
    adhesive bonding combined with assembling, bending, or flexing in the
    formation of a web of stock material; and for assembling and adhesively
    bonding an article with a postage stamp or label. See the search note to
    Class 156 under the definition of this class.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, for application of a nail or
    staple to work even if the work is a sheet or web, if there is no other
    working of the sheet or web and no recognition of more than one sheet or
    web.


CLS 493/122
TXT Including use of work blank supply hopper:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 121 including the use of a compartment
    to hold a substantial number of sheet or web workpieces as a ready supply
    for making a receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181+,   for making a container with folding and feeding a work blank from a
    hopper.


CLS 493/123
TXT And use of vacuum to handle work:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 122 including applying reduced pressure
    to a portion of a workpiece so that atmospheric pressure acting on an
    opposing portion thereof assists in manipulation of the workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     for making a rigid container including assembling of distinct
    members by use of vacuum to manipulate a workpiece.

    181,    for making a rigid container with folding and feeding a work blank
    from a hopper by use of a suction-type blank handling means.


CLS 493/124
TXT To place blank onto folder:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 123 including use of manipulating means
    using the application of reduced pressure to transport a sheet or web
    workpiece from a remote position to a position where it is ready for
    engagement by means to bendingly stress the workpiece beyond its elastic
    limit along a predetermined line.


CLS 493/125
TXT With conveyor for advance to folder:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 123 combined with use of means
    particularly adapted to move one workpiece after another from a remote
    position to a folding station.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71+,    for making a rigid container including folding combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading by a rotary tool and with means to
    advance work.

    81,     for making a rigid container including folding combined with
    cutting,    breaking, tearing, or abrading by a reciprocatory tool and with
    means to advance work.

    142+,   for making a rigid container including securing work surfaces with
    simultaneous pressing and advancing of the work while adhesive dries or
    sets.

    147,    for making a rigid container including securing work surfaces and
    advancing the work or product.

    161,    for making a rigid container including scoring and continuously
    advancing the work with the scoring tool moving with the work during
    operation thereof.

    180+,   for making a rigid container including folding and advancing of the
    work or product.

    196+,   for making a pliable container with heat sealing and cutting,
    breaking, tearing, or abrading and advancing of the work or product.

    201+,   for making a pliable container with cutting, breaking, tearing, or
    abrading and advancing of work or product.

    302,    for making a tube and advancing the formed tube along its axis.

    357+,   for folding combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading
    with means to advance the work or product.

    400+,   for scoring with work or product advancing or positioning.

    416+,   for folding including work or product advancing.


CLS 493/126
TXT And means to transfer blank to folder:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 122 combined with the use of means to
    move a sheet or web workpiece from a remote position to a folding station.


CLS 493/127
TXT Comprising folder:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 126 wherein the means to move the
    workpiece to the folding station is the same means which effects forming a
    crease or fold in the workpiece.


CLS 493/128
TXT With application of adhesive:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 121 combined with coating a surface of a
    workpiece with material that is intended to chemically bond that surface to
    another surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for making a rigid container including assembling of distinct
    members and laminating or coating a container blank.

    148+,   for making a rigid container with coating.

    220+,   for making a pliable container including assembling of distinct
    members and coating.

    264+,   for making a rigid container with application of adhesive or
    securing by adhesive.

    272+, for making a tube with coating.

    328+,   for an operation of this class, generally, with coating.


CLS 493/129
TXT And heat sealing:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 128 combined with applying thermal
    energy to raise the thermal level of a surface of a workpiece and thereby
    causing that surface to be fastened to another surface of a workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is both "heat sealing" and heat drying of
    adhesive.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for making a cigarette filter including application of heat to
    secure the wrapper thereto.

    133+,   for making a rigid container including heat sealing.

    189+,   for making a pliable container including heat sealing.

    274,    for making a tube with coating and heating.

    332,    for making an article of this class, generally including
    application of adhesive and heating or drying.

    341,    for an operation of this class including heat sealing combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading.

    393,    for securing a sheet or web workpiece and another workpiece by
    application of heat.


CLS 493/130
TXT With work advance between application of adhesive and securing:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 128 including coating the workpiece with
    material to chemically bond one surface to another in a first station and
    fastening one surface of the workpiece to another in a second station,
    combined with the step of or means for moving the workpiece from the first
    to the second station.


CLS 493/131
TXT Application of adhesive to moving work:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 130 including coating the workpiece with
    material to chemically bond when the workpiece is in motion.


CLS 493/132
TXT By applicator having surface engaging and moving with work:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 131 including use of means in physical
    contact with the workpiece to transfer chemical bonding material thereto,
    which means has a component of movement with the workpiece during transfer
    of the bonding material.


CLS 493/133
TXT Including heat sealing:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 121 including raising the thermal level
    of a surface of a workpiece and thereby causing that surface to be fastened
    to another surface of a workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is both "heat sealing" by fusion of the work
    surface and heat drying of adhesive.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for making a cigarette filter including application of heat to
    secure the wrapper thereto.

    129+,   for making a rigid container with application of adhesive and heat
    sealing.

    189+,   for making a pliable container including heat sealing.

    274,    for making a tube with coating and heating.

    332,    for making an article of this class, generally including
    application of adhesive and heating or drying.

    341,    for an operation of this class including heat sealing combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading.

    393,    for securing a sheet or web workpiece and another workpiece by
    application of heat.


CLS 493/134
TXT By direct application of fluid:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 133 including raising the thermal level
    of a surface of a workpiece by a flow of gaseous or liquid material
    thereagainst.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191,    for making a pliable container including heat sealing and cooling
    by direct application of fluid.

    192,    for making a pliable container including heat sealing by direct
    application of fluid.


CLS 493/135
TXT Of moving work:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 133 including raising the thermal level
    while the workpiece is in motion.


CLS 493/136
TXT By interfitting of container portions:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 121 wherein fastening is accomplished by
    positioning a portion of a workpiece under another portion to restrict
    movement thereof.


CLS 493/137
TXT Interlocking tab and slot:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 136 wherein the workpiece is provided
    with an elongated opening and is provided with a protuberance to interfit
    therewith including the operation of bringing about such interfitting of
    the receptacle portions.


CLS 493/138
TXT Including integral internal partition:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 137 wherein the receptacle made includes
    a portion extending across to compartmentize the internal chamber.


CLS 493/139
TXT Integral interlocking closure:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 137 wherein the portion of the
    receptacle being fastened is adapted to cover an external opening of the
    receptacle and wherein the interfitting of the portions is to secure that
    cover portion in the closed position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102+,   for closing a container by assembling a distinct closure therewith.

    156+,   for closing an end of a rigid, nonrectangular container.


CLS 493/140
TXT Inwardly folded flange:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 136 wherein fastening is accomplished by
    turning a marginal extremity of a workpiece toward the interior of the
    receptacle to overlap and fasten another portion of the receptacle.


CLS 493/141
TXT Including means to press work while adhesive sets or dries:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 121 including use of means to force a
    first portion of a workpiece against a second portion for a period of time
    to allow a liquid coating of a chemical bonding agent between the two
    surfaces to solidify.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128+,   for making a rigid container including securing combined with the
    application of adhesive.


CLS 493/142
TXT Work advancing during pressing:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 141 wherein the workpiece is moved
    through the apparatus as the work portions are forced together.

    (1)     Note.  Movement of a workpiece toward a working tool to effect a
    treating operation is considered to be work infeed rather than work
    advancing and is therefor not the concept of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71+,    for making a rigid container including folding combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading by a rotary tool and with means to
    advance work.

    81,     for making a rigid container including folding combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading by a reciprocatory tool and with
    means to advance work.

    125,    for making a rigid container including securing work surfaces, use
    of a supply hopper, use of a suction-type handling means and use of a
    conveyor to advance work to a folder.

    147,    for making a rigid container including securing work surfaces and
    advancing the work or product.

    161,    for making a rigid container including scoring and continuously
    advancing the work with the scoring tool moving with the work duration
    operation thereof.

    180+,   for making a rigid container including folding and advancing of the
    work or product.

    196+,   for making a pliable container with cutting, breaking, tearing, or
    abrading and advancing of work or product.

    201+,   for making a pliable container with cutting, breaking, tearing, or
    abrading and advancing of work or product.

    302,    for making a tube and advancing the formed tube along its axis.

    357+,   for folding combined with cutting breaking, tearing, or abrading
    with means to advance the work or product.

    400+,   for securing with work or product advancing or positioning.

    416+,   for folding including work or product advancing.


CLS 493/143
TXT Plunger-and die-type press:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 142 comprising use of a female member
    and a male member wherein the male member is adapted to move and carry the
    workpiece through the female member and cooperate therewith to force the
    work portions together.


CLS 493/144
TXT Roller-type press:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 142 including use of a member adapted to
    turn

    more than 360_ about an axis, the member having a peripheral surface of
    constant distance from the axis, which member is to rollingly engage the
    workpiece and force the work portions together.


CLS 493/145
TXT Manually actuated press:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 141 wherein the means to force the work
    portions together is either driven by the energy of the operative or is
    caused to be driven in direct response to the action of the operative,
    whereby the means is under the constant control of the operative.


CLS 493/146
TXT Manually driven:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 145 wherein the means to force the work
    portions together is driven by the energy of the operative.


CLS 493/147
TXT With means to advance work or product:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 121 combined with use of means to
    transport a workpiece progressively from a remote location toward or
    through a treating station or to transport a previously made receptacle
    away from a treating station.

    (1)     Note.  Movement of a workpiece toward a working tool to effect a
    treating operation is considered to be work infeed rather than work
    advancing and therefor not the concept of this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  "Treating" as used herein includes assembling, bending,
    surface treatment, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71+,    for making a rigid container including folding combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading by a rotary tool and with means to
    advance work.

    81,     for making a rigid container including folding combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading by a reciprocatory tool and with
    means to advance work.

    125,    for making a rigid container including securing work surfaces, use
    of a supply hopper, use of a suction-type handling means and use of a
    conveyor to advance work to a folder.

    142+,   for making a rigid container including securing work surfaces with
    simultaneous pressing and advancing of the work while adhesive dries or
    sets.

    161,    for making a rigid container including scoring and continuously
    advancing the work with the scoring tool moving with the work during
    operation thereof.

    180+,   for making a rigid container including folding and advancing of the
    work or product.

    196+,   for making a pliable container with heat sealing and cutting,
    breaking, tearing, or abrading and advancing of work or product.

    201+,   for making a pliable container with cutting, breaking, tearing, or
    abrading and advancing of work or product.

    302,    for making a tube and advancing the formed tube along its axis.

    357+,   for folding combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading
    with means to advance the work or product.

    400+,   for scoring with work or product advancing or positioning.

    416+,   for folding including work or product advancing.


CLS 493/148
TXT With coating:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 52 combined with placing a layer of
    flowable material on the surface of a workpiece, which layer is intended to
    unite with that surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for making a rigid container including assembling of distinct
    members and laminating or coating a container blank.

    128+,   for making a rigid container including securing and the application
    of an adhesive.

    220+,   for making a pliable container including assembling of distinct
    members and coating.

    264+,   for making a rigid container with application of adhesive or
    securing by adhesive.

    272+,   for making a tube with coating.

    328+    for an operation of this class, generally, with coating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, for apparatus for placing a layer of flowable
    material on the surface of a sheet or web with no other working of the
    sheet or web.

    427,    Coating Processes, for the step of placing a layer of flowable
    material on the surface of a sheet or web with no other working of the
    sheet or web.


CLS 493/149
TXT On nonrectangular cross section container: Method or apparatus under
    subclass 148 wherein the receptacle formed is of a shape such that the
    horizontal margins are other than would be described by two pairs of
    parallel lines meeting at right angles.

    (1)     Note.  A rectangular solid container is excluded from this
    subclass, even if it includes a domed or irregular top.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104+,   for making a nonrectangular rigid container including assembling of
    a container body and a distinct closure.

    152+,   for making a nonrectangular rigid container, generally.


CLS 493/150
TXT Adhesive:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 148 wherein the flowable material is
    intended to unite with the surface of the workpiece and to subsequently
    fasten that surface to another surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115+,   for assembling a rigid container, applying a distinct securing
    member and applying an adhesive.

    276,    for making a tube combined with coating with an adhesive.

    331+,   for making an article from a sheet or web combined with application
    of an adhesive coating.


CLS 493/151
TXT And folding:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 150 including bendingly stressing a
    workpiece beyond its elastic limit along a line to form a permanent crease.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for making a rigid container including folding and assembling
    combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading by a rotary tool.

    69+,    for making a rigid container including folding combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading by a rotary tool.

    79+,    for making a rigid container including folding combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading by a reciprocatory tool.

    162+,   for making a rigid container including folding.

    231+,   for making a pliable container including folding combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading.

    243+,   for making a pliable container including folding.

    353,    for folding combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading
    by a composite tool.

    356+,   for folding combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading
    generally.

    405+,   for folding, generally, of a sheet or web.


CLS 493/152
TXT Nonrectangular cross section container:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 52 wherein the receptacle made is of a
    shape such that the horizontal margins are other than would be described by
    two pairs of parallel lines meeting at right angles.

    (1)     Note.  A rectangular solid container is excluded from this
    subclass, even if it includes a domed or irregular top.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104+,   for making a nonrectangular cross section rigid container including
    assembling of a container body and a distinct closure.

    149,    for making a nonrectangular rigid container, with coating.


CLS 493/153
TXT Noncircular cross section:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 152 wherein the rigid receptacle made is
    further of a shape such that a horizontal section therethrough is other
    than one described by a curved line equidistant from a center.


CLS 493/154
TXT By use of conical former (e.g., pleating, etc.):

    Method or apparatus under subclass 152 including use of a member to give
    shape to a receptacle, which member includes a surface of a tapered shape
    which may be described as generated by a line extending from and pivoting
    about a point and following a circle that is normal to another line
    extending from the point to the center of the circle.


CLS 493/155
TXT Rotary former:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 154 wherein the member adapted to give
    its generally circular tapered shape to the receptacle turns about its
    geometrical axis during such shaping.


CLS 493/156
TXT End closing:
    Method or apparatus under subclass 152 wherein the receptacle made has a
    body portion having upper and lower ends, including covering one of the
    ends.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102+,   for closing a container by assembling a distinct cover therewith.

    139,    for interfitting of an integral tab to close and secure an opening
    in a container.

    308,    for closing the end of a tube that is not a container.


CLS 493/157
TXT By folding over end of tube:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 156 wherein the receptacle made has a
    generally elongated tubular body and wherein closing is accomplished by
    collapsing one end thereof and then bending the body to form a crease line
    to thereby close the body.


CLS 493/158
TXT Edge crimping or curling:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 152 including turning under to conceal
    the unfinished edge of a sheet or web workpiece from a generally sharp edge
    to form a generally or rounded edge.

    (1)     Note.  Crimping or curling the end of a cylinder by a tool acting
    on one part of the periphery is included herein even though, in theory,
    there may be thinning flow, to avoid splitting of similar art.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    for a method of edge crimping or curling with stretching of material as in
    curling the end of a cylinder in a dip.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus, for
    apparatus for edge crimping or curling with stretching of material as in
    curling the end of a cylinder in a die.


CLS 493/159
TXT By relative rotation of work and tool about work axis:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 158 including (a) turning a workpiece
    about an axis passing generally through its center for engagement by a tool
    that is not turning about the axis, or (b) turning a tool about an axis
    passing generally through the center of a workpiece for engagement with a
    workpiece that is not turning about that axis.


CLS 493/160
TXT Including form-scoring:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 52 including (a) pressing a line in one
    surface of a workpiece and thereby raising a corresponding line surface;
    or, (b) pressing a line in one surface of a workpiece with no significant
    change in the opposite surface configuration, wherein the material of the
    workpiece under that line becomes more compacted, such that there is no
    thinning flow of the workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59+,    for making a rigid container with cutting and scoring.

    240+,   for making a pliable container including scoring.

    396+,   for form-scoring of sheet or web material, generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 879+ for scoring by a sharp cutting edge,
    wherein there is no significant deformation of the work.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    for the method of shaping sheet or web work by a thinning flow of the work,
    as in embossing.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus, for
    means to shape sheet or web work by a thinning flow of the work, as in
    embossing.


CLS 493/161
TXT Continuous advance with form-scoring tool moving with work:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 160 wherein the workpiece moves without
    stopping during the line pressing operation through a line pressing
    station, including use of a line pressing tool, a portion of which moves in
    the direction of workpiece movement when in operational engagement
    therewith.

    (1)     Note.  Movement of a workpiece toward a working tool to effect a
    treating operation is considered to be work infeed rather than work
    advancing and is therefor not the concept of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71+,    for making a rigid container including folding combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading by a rotary tool and with means to
    advance work.

    81,     for making a rigid container including folding combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading by a reciprocatory tool and with
    means to advance work.

    125,    for making a rigid container including securing work surfaces, use
    of a supply hopper, use of a suction type handling means and use of a
    conveyor to advance work to a folder.

    142+,   for making a rigid container including securing work surfaces with
    simultaneous pressing and advancing of the work while adhesive dries or
    sets.

    147,    for making a rigid container including securing work surfaces and
    advancing the work or product.

    180+,   for making a rigid container including folding and advancing of the
    work or product.

    196+,   for making a pliable container with heat sealing and cutting,
    breaking, tearing, or abrading and advancing of work or product.

    201+,   for making a pliable container with cutting, breaking, tearing, or
    abrading and advancing of the work or product.

    302,    for making a tube and advancing the formed tube along its axis.

    357+,   for folding combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading
    with means to advance the work or product.

    400+,   for scoring with work or product advancing or positioning.

    416+,   for folding including work or product advancing.


CLS 493/162
TXT Folding:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 52 including bendingly stressing a
    workpiece beyond its elastic limit along a line to form a permanent crease.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for making a rigid container including folding and assembling
    combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading by a rotary tool.

    69+,    for making a rigid container including folding combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading by a rotary tool.

    79+,    for making a rigid container including folding combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading by a reciprocatory tool.

    151,    for making a rigid container including coating with an adhesive and
    folding.

    231+,   for making pliable container including folding combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading.

    243+,   for making a pliable container including folding.

    353,    for folding combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading
    by a composite tool.

    356+,   for folding combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading,
    generally.

    405+,   for folding, generally, of a sheet or web.


CLS 493/163
TXT By mandrel or endless carrier:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 162 including use of a male forming
    member about which a sheet or web workpiece is wrapped by bending stress
    without thrust of the forming member, which forming member is mounted on a
    support member to be indexed or continuously moved about a closed loop.


CLS 493/164
TXT Assembly of plural mandrels turning about fixed axis:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 163 including a plurality of male
    forming members on each of which at least a portion of a sheet or web
    workpiece is bendingly stressed without thrust from the respective forming
    member, which forming members are mounted on a single support member, which
    support member is rigid and is adapted to turn continuously or be indexed
    about a pivot line to reposition the forming members.


CLS 493/165
TXT To form gable top on container:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 164 wherein the forming member is
    adapted to form a receptacle having upper portion comprising a single ridge
    created by a pair of diverging side walls.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is partial forming of a gable top without
    actual closing thereof, to allow for subsequent filling of the formed
    receptacle.


CLS 493/166
TXT Folder driven by stationary cam:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 164 wherein, as the support turns about
    a fixed axis, nonmoving structure is engaged which serves to move a member,
    which member in turn engages the sheet or web workpiece and forms a crease
    therein.


CLS 493/167
TXT By plunger:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 162 including use of a male forming
    member on which a sheet or web workpiece is wrapped by bending stress as a
    result of thrust of that member.

    (1)     Note.  A bladelike member including an elongated folding edge may
    be considered to be a plunger or male forming member for this subclass.


CLS 493/168
TXT Forming hollow wall or 270_ folded edge:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 167 of making a receptacle having a side
    formed of an inner and outer layer to enclose an open space or having a
    marginal lip that is formed of a bent overedge that extends about at least
    three sides of enclosed space.


CLS 493/169
TXT Plural interrelated plungers (e.g., making separate cover and container):

    Method or apparatus under subclass 167 including use of a first male
    forming member on which a sheet or web workpiece is wrapped by bending
    stress as a result of thrust of that member and including use of a second
    male forming member on which a sheet or web workpiece is wrapped by bending
    stress as a result of thrust of that member wherein the first forming
    member is adapted to form a first workpiece portion and the second
    workpiece portion such that the product of the first member is made to
    interfit with the product of the second member.


CLS 493/170
TXT Flowable plunger or reaction member:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 167 (a) wherein the male forming member
    is adapted to yieldably change shape during the bending operation; or, (b)
    including a backing member against which the male forming member is adapted
    to force the work for bending, which backing member is adapted to yieldably
    change shape during the bending operation.


CLS 493/171
TXT Expandable or contractable plunger or reaction member:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 167 (a) wherein the male forming member
    is adapted to be modified to change the size or shape thereof; or, (b)
    including a backing element against which the male forming member is
    adapted to force the workpiece for bending, which backing element is
    adapted to be modified to change the size or shape thereof.


CLS 493/172
TXT Orbitally moving plunger or reaction member:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 167 (a) wherein the male forming member
    is adapted to move as a body about a closed loop; or, (b) including a
    backing element against which the male forming member is adapted to force
    the work for bending, which backing element is adapted to move as a body
    about a closed loop.


CLS 493/173
TXT Continuously orbiting:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 172 wherein the male forming member or
    the backing element is adapted to move without stopping during the bending
    operation about the closed loop.


CLS 493/174
TXT And reciprocatory reaction member:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 167 including use of a backing element
    against which the male forming member is adapted to force the work for
    bending, which backing element is adapted to move to-and-fro in a straight
    line or about a pivot point.


CLS 493/175
TXT By mandrel:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 162 including use of a male forming
    member about which a sheet or web workpiece is wrapped by bending stress
    without thrust of the forming member.

    (1)     Note.  A mandrel is similar in structure to a plunger, but is not
    intended to form work by force applied to the mandrel, rather is intended
    to serve as a reaction member onto which work is formed.


CLS 493/176
TXT And reciprocatory armlike tool:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 175 including use of a member adapted to
    engage the sheet or web workpiece and form the work about the male forming
    member, which member is generally elongated, is unsupported at one end and
    is adapted to move to-and-fro either in a straight line or about a pivot
    point during the bending operation.


CLS 493/177
TXT Work moving transversely to fold line during folding:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 162 wherein the sheet or web workpiece
    is caused to travel in a direction normal to the line along which it is
    creased, as the crease is formed.


CLS 493/178
TXT Work moving parallel to fold line during folding:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 162 wherein the sheet or web workpiece
    is caused to travel in the same direction as the line along which it is
    creased, as the crease line is formed.


CLS 493/179
TXT On endless conveyor belt or chain:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 178 wherein travel of the workpiece is
    effected by being supported on a surface which is, or is part of, an
    integral or concatenated band that is trained about a plurality of
    separated, noncoaxial pulleys or sprockets.


CLS 493/180
TXT With means to advance work or product:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 162 combined with use of means to
    transport a workpiece progressively from a remote location toward or
    through a treating station or to transport a previously made receptacle
    away from a treating station.

    (1)     Note.  Movement of a workpiece toward a working tool to effect a
    treating operation is considered to be work infeed rather than work
    advancing and is therefor not the concept of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71+,    for making a rigid container including folding combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading by a rotary tool and with means to
    advance work.

    81,     for making a rigid container including folding combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading by a reciprocatory tool and with
    means to advance work.

    125,    for making a rigid container including securing work surfaces, use
    of a supply hopper, use of a suction-type handling means and use of a
    conveyor to advance work to a folder.

    142+,   for making a rigid container including securing work surfaces with
    simultaneous pressing and advancing of the work while adhesive dries or
    sets.

    147,    for making a rigid container including securing work surfaces and
    advancing the work or product.

    161,    for making a rigid container including scoring and continuously
    advancing the work with the scoring tool moving with the work during
    operation thereof.

    196+,   for making a pliable container with heat sealing and cutting,
    breaking, tearing, or abrading and advancing of work or product.

    201+,   for making a pliable container cutting, breaking, tearing, or
    abrading and advancing of work or product.

    302,    for making a tube and advancing the formed tube along its axis.

    357+,   for folding combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading
    with means to advance the work or product.

    400+,   for scoring with work or product advancing or positioning.

    416+,   for folding including work or product advancing.


CLS 493/181
TXT Of flattened tubular blank:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 180 wherein a sheet or web workpiece has
    previously been formed into the shape of a tube having opposite walls
    pressed down to touch each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    269+,   for formation of a tubular blank.


CLS 493/182
TXT By endless conveyor belt or chain:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 180 wherein the movement of the
    workpiece toward or movement of the product away from the working station
    is effected by the workpiece being supported on a surface which is, or is
    part of, an integral or concatenated band that is trained about a plurality
    of separated, noncoaxial pulleys or sprockets.


CLS 493/183
TXT End flap folding:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 162 wherein the formation of the crease
    is to bend over an extending edge of a workpiece to close the end of the
    formed receptacle.


CLS 493/184
TXT Forming gable top:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 183 including making a receptacle having
    at the upper portion thereof a single ridge created by a pair of diverging
    walls.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is partial forming of a gable top without
    actual closing thereof, to allow for subsequent filling of the formed
    receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    452,    for forming a gable top without formation of a container.


CLS 493/185
TXT Including crushing or crumpling:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 52 including stressing a workpiece
    beyond its elastic limit and bending of the workpiece, but not along any
    predetermined line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    407,    for folding combined with crushing or crumpling.

    464,    for crushing or crinkling of sheet or web material generally.


CLS 493/186
TXT Pliable container, (e.g., bag, envelope, etc.):

    Method or apparatus under subclass 51 including making a receptacle that is
    flaccid and is not intended to retain its shape during use.

    (1)     Note.  A small container made of heavy paper may be a rigid
    container while a large container made of the same heavy paper is pliable.
    It is the intent of the construction that determines placement of patents
    in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  In order to avoid unnecessary splitting of similar art, it
    has been determined to consider any envelope or folder as a "pliable
    container" even if the wall portions are rigid, e.g., a photograph record
    envelope.


CLS 493/187
TXT With printing or photographic reproduction:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 186 combined with placing recognizable
    indicia on a workpiece or on a previously made receptacle, e.g., by
    coating, impressing, or application of or exposure of photosensitive
    materials.

    (1)     Note.  Placing a patterned decorative coating on a workpiece
    combined with container making is included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for making a rigid container combined with printing.

    270,    for tube making combined with printing.

    320+,   for making a product from sheet or web material, generally,
    combined with printing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, for placing recognizable indicia on sheet or web material
    without any other working of the sheet or web.


CLS 493/188
TXT On work material:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 187 including placing indicia on the
    workpiece prior to construction into a receptacle.


CLS 493/189
TXT Including heat sealing:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 186 combined with or comprising raising
    the thermal level of a surface of a workpiece causing that surface to be
    secured to another workpiece surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for making a cigarette filter including application of heat to
    secure the wrapper thereto.

    129+,   for making a rigid container with application of adhesive and heat
    sealing.

    133+,   for making a rigid container including heat sealing.

    274,    for making a tube with coating and heating.

    332,    for making an article of this class, generally including
    application of adhesive and heating or drying.

    341,    for an operation of this including heat sealing combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading.

    393,    for securing a sheet or web workpiece and another workpiece by
    application of heat.


CLS 493/190
TXT And cooling:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 189 combined with or comprising lowering
    the thermal level of a surface of the workpiece.


CLS 493/191
TXT Heating or cooling by direct application of fluid:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 190 including raising or lowering the
    thermal level of a surface of the workpiece by a flow of gaseous or liquid
    material thereagainst.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    for making a rigid container including securing by heat sealing, by
    direct application of fluid.

    192,    for making a pliable container including heat sealing by direct
    application of fluid.


CLS 493/192
TXT By direct application of fluid:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 189 including raising the thermal level
    of a surface of the workpiece by a flow of gaseous or liquid material
    thereagainst.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    for making a rigid container including heat sealing by direct
    application of fluid.

    191,    for making a pliable container including heat sealing and cooling
    by direct application of fluid.


CLS 493/193
TXT Including supplying indeterminate length work:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 189 including bringing a workpiece to
    the heat sealing action wherein the workpiece is a web of such length that
    the apparatus does not engage (recognize) both the leading end and the
    trailing end of the workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  A spool or coil of work is considered to be "indeterminate
    length".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for an operation of this class utilizing a first and a second
    sensor, one of which is a surface contacting sensor for indeterminate
    length work.

    24+,    for an operation of this class including use of a sensor responsive
    to indeterminate length work.

    97+,    for making a rigid container including assembling a liner
    permanently secured to wall with other portions of the container from an
    indeterminate length work supply.

    380+,   for assembling of this class wherein one workpiece is of
    indeterminate length.

    410+,   for refolding or unfolding an indeterminate length workpiece.

    434,    for folding an indeterminate length workpiece by a roller.


CLS 493/194
TXT And cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 193 combined with piercing into a
    workpiece with a sharp tool; forcibly ripping one portion of a workpiece by
    bending or tensile stress; or, engaging a workpiece by a crystalline tool
    to remove surface portions from that workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading combined with an
    operation of this class including use of work or product responsive control
    means.

    56+,    for making a rigid container combined with cutting, breaking,
    tearing, or abrading.

    199+,   for making a pliable container including heat sealing combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading.

    227+,   for making a pliable container combined with cutting, breaking,
    tearing, or abrading.

    287+,   for making a tube combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or
    abrading.

    324,    for an operation of this class combined with printing or
    photographic reproduction and cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading.

    340+,   for making a product of sheet or web material generally, combined
    with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, for cutting by use of a sharp cutting tool, generally,
    including severing.

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, for subdividing by the application
    of bending or tautening forces.

    451,    Abrading, for engaging a workpiece by a crystalline tool to remove
    surface portions from the workpiece.


CLS 493/195
TXT At separate station from heat sealing:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 194 including one work receiving
    location at which the workpiece surfaces are secured together by the
    application of thermal energy and another distinct, work receiving location
    at which the piercing, ripping or engagement by a crystalline tool occurs.


CLS 493/196
TXT With means to advance work or product:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 195 combined with use of means to
    transport a workpiece progressively from a remote location toward or
    through a treating station or to transport a product away from a treating
    station.

    (1)     Note.  Movement of a workpiece toward a working tool to effect a
    treating operation is considered to be work infeed rather than work
    advancing and is therefor not the concept of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71+,    for making a rigid container including folding combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading by a rotary tool and with means to
    advance work.

    81,     for making a rigid container including folding combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading by a reciprocatory tool and with
    means to advance work.

    125,    for making a rigid container including securing work surfaces, use
    of a supply hopper, use of a suction-type handling means and use of a
    conveyor to advance work to a folder.

    142+,   for making a rigid container including securing work surfaces with
    simultaneous pressing and advancing of the work while adhesive dries or
    sets.

    147,    for making a rigid container including securing work surfaces and
    advancing work or product.

    161,    for making a rigid container including scoring and continuously
    advancing the work with the scoring tool moving with the work during
    operation thereof.

    180+,   for making a rigid container including folding and advancing of the
    work or product.

    201+,   for making a pliable container cutting, breaking, tearing, or
    abrading and advancing of work or product.

    302,    for making a tube and advancing the formed tube along its axis.

    357+,   for folding combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading
    with means to advance the work or product.

    400+,   for scoring with work or product advancing or positioning.

    416+,   for folding including work or product advancing.


CLS 493/197
TXT Including work advance during heat sealing:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 196 including transferring the work
    progressively through the location at which the thermal level is raised, at
    the time of such raising of the thermal level of the workpiece surface.


CLS 493/198
TXT With means to receive interconnected products:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 193 including means to which the
    indeterminate length product is transferred, without being separated into
    individual elements.


CLS 493/199
TXT And cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 189 combined with piercing into a
    workpiece with a sharp tool; forcibly ripping one portion of a workpiece by
    bending or tensile stress; or, engaging a workpiece by a crystalline tool
    to remove surface portions from that workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading combined with an
    operation of this class including use of work or product responsive control
    means.

    56+,    for making a rigid container combined with cutting, breaking,
    tearing, or abrading.

    194+,   for making a pliable container including heat sealing combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading of indeterminate length work.

    227+,   for making a pliable container combined with cutting, breaking,
    tearing, or abrading.

    287+,   for making a tube combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or
    abrading.

    324,    for an operation of this class combined with printing or
    photographic reproduction and cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading for
    an operation of this class combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or
    abrading, generally.

    340+,   for making a product of sheet or web material generally, combined
    with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, for cutting by use of a sharp cutting tool, generally,
    including severing.

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, for subdividing by the application
    of bending or tautening forces.

    451,    Abrading, for engaging a workpiece by a crystalline tool to remove
    surface portions from the workpiece.


CLS 493/200
TXT At separate station from heat sealing:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 199 including one workpiece receiving
    location at which the surfaces are secured together by the application of
    thermal energy and another distinct workpiece receiving location at which
    the piercing, ripping, or engagement by as crystalline tool occurs.


CLS 493/201
TXT With means to advance work or product:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 200 combined with use of means to
    transport a workpiece progressively from a remote location toward or
    through a treating station or to transport a formed receptacle away from a
    treating station.

    (1)     Note.  Movement of a workpiece toward a working tool to effect a
    treating operation is considered to be work infeed rather than work
    advancing and is therefor not the concept of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71+,    for making a rigid container including folding combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading by a rotary tool and with means to
    advance work.

    81,     for making a rigid container including folding combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading by a reciprocatory tool and with
    means to advance work.

    125,    for making a rigid container including securing work surfaces, use
    of a supply hopper, use of a suction-type handling means and use of a
    conveyor to advance work to a folder.

    142+,   for making a rigid container including securing work surfaces with
    simultaneous pressing and advancing of the work while adhesive dries or
    sets.

    147,    for making a rigid container including securing work surfaces and
    advancing the work or product.

    161,    for making a rigid container including scoring and continuously
    advancing the work with the scoring tool moving with the work during
    operation thereof.

    180+,   for making a rigid container including folding and advancing of the
    work or product.

    196+,   for making a pliable container with heat sealing and cutting,
    breaking, tearing, or abrading and advancing of work or product.

    302,    for making a tube and advancing the formed tube along its axis.

    357+,   for folding combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading
    with means to advance the work or product.

    400+,   for scoring with work or product advancing or positioning.

    416+,   for folding including work or product advancing.


CLS 493/202
TXT Including work advance during heat sealing:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 201 wherein the thermal level of the
    workpiece surface is raised to effect securement of that surface with
    another surface of said workpiece as the workpiece is in motion.


CLS 493/203
TXT Composite heat sealing and severing:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 199 wherein the means for securing the
    surfaces is the same means that performs the piercing, ripping, or
    engagement by a crystalline tool, i.e., during operation the component that
    performs the securing is fixed to partake of the same motion as the
    component that performs the other operation.


CLS 493/204
TXT With vertical stacking of product:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 203 combined with placing the product
    one on top of the other in an aligned relationship.


CLS 493/205
TXT Heat sealing by means moving with work:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 189 wherein the sheet or web workpiece
    is adapted to move during application of thermal energy thereto, and
    wherein the means for raising the thermal level includes a surface engaging
    the workpiece and moving therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199+,   for making a pliable container with cutting, breaking, tearing, or
    abrading and with heat sealing by a heat sealing means moving with the work.

    203,    for making a pliable container with cutting, breaking, tearing, or
    abrading and with heat sealing by a composite means moving with the work.


CLS 493/206
TXT By oppositely moving work gripping means:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 189 comprising workpiece engaging
    surfaces each adapted to move toward the workpiece and toward each other to
    squeeze the workpiece therebetween.


CLS 493/207
TXT By yieldable, heated means:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 189 including a member from which energy
    is to flow to the workpiece surface which member is urged toward the
    workpiece by means intended to yield.


CLS 493/208
TXT By rotary heat sealer:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 189 including use of means to raise the
    thermal level of the sheet or web workpiece, which means turns about an
    axis through more than 360_ during operation.


CLS 493/209
TXT By Reciprocatory heat sealer:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 189 including use of means to raise the
    thermal level of the sheet or web workpiece, which means moves to-and-fro
    along a straight line or about a fixed pivot point during operation.


CLS 493/210
TXT Assembling of distinct members:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 186 including juxtaposing or fastening
    together a plurality of workpieces.

    (1)     Note.  The workpieces of this and the indented subclasses are
    totally separate and distinct.  A first and a second surface of a workpiece
    are not considered to be separate workpieces, no matter how far spaced from
    each other.

    (2)     Note.  A fastener, e.g., a staple or a rivet, is considered to be a
    workpiece when assembled to a paper workpiece; however, see the search note
    to Class 227 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for an operation of this class including assembling or coating and
    the use of control means responsive to that assembling or coating.

    47+,    for assembling dissimilar filter material in making a cigarette
    filter.

    67+,    for assembling a rigid container combined with cutting, breaking,
    tearing, or abrading by a rotary tool.

    75+,    for assembling a rigid container combined with cutting, breaking,
    tearing, or abrading by a reciprocatory tool.

    84+,    for making a rigid container including assembly of distinct members.

    297+,   for making a tube including assembly of distinct members.

    334+,   for assembling of distinct members combined with coating by an
    adhesive.

    343+,   for assembling of distinct members combined with cutting, breaking,
    tearing, or abrading.

    374+,   for assembling of distinct members, one of which is a sheet or web,
    generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 428+ for methods of and subclasses 700+
    for apparatus for assembling or disassembling.  Class 29 is the generic
    home for assembling.  See the search notes under subclasses 428 and 700 for
    other location of specific types of assembling.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, for
    uniting a first and a second web by adhesive bonding without assembling or
    bending in forming an article of commerce or with or without assembling or
    bending in forming united stock material.  See the line notes under the
    definition of this class.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, for a device specific to
    driving a fastener into a sheet or web; or into a stack of sheets or webs,
    with no recognition of more than one sheet or web.


CLS 493/211
TXT With extruding, drawing, or attenuating:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 210 combined with forcing a workpiece
    through an orifice or pulling or with pushing, or stretching a workpiece to
    thicken or thin that workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85,     for making a rigid container by assembling combined with extruding,
    drawing, or attenuating.

    293,    for tube making combined with extruding, drawing, or attenuating.

    338,    for an operation of this class combined with extruding, drawing, or
    attenuating, generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    for a method of forming material by forcing it through an orifice or
    wherein there is thinning or thickening flow of the material.  See the line
    note under the definition of this class (493).

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus, for
    apparatus for forming material by forcing it through an orifice or wherein
    there is thinning or thickening flow of work material.  See the line note
    under the definition of this class (493).


CLS 493/212
TXT Means to facilitate opening of container:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 210 wherein one of the workpieces being
    brought together is used to provide access to the interior of the formed
    receptacle.


CLS 493/213
TXT Reclosable means (e.g., valve):

    Method or apparatus under subclass 212 wherein the receptacle formed is not
    only capable of providing access to its interior but is capable of then
    being restored to a condition restricting access.


CLS 493/214
TXT Closure securing element:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 210 including a separate workpiece
    intended to cover an opening in the completed receptacle or wherein the
    sheet or web workpiece includes a portion intended to cover an opening in
    the completed receptacle including another workpiece to fasten the covering
    workpiece or workpiece portion in a closed position.


CLS 493/215
TXT Plastically deformable:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 214 wherein the fastening workpiece is
    generally rigid (not flaccid) and is adapted to be stressed beyond its
    elastic limit to perform the fastening function.


CLS 493/216
TXT Return envelope or message card and main envelope:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 210 for forming a member and a
    receptacle, for the insertion of sheet material, wherein the member and a
    receptacle are attached to each other and wherein the member is intended to
    be inserted inside the receptacle to be subsequently taken out of and
    detached away from the receptacle for information transmitting use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, for placing a second envelope in a first envelope,
    if they are not attached to each other.


CLS 493/217
TXT Liner:

    Method of apparatus under subclass 210 wherein one of the workpieces
    comprises a member intended to extend about the inside of the receptacle to
    restrict engagement of the contents of the receptacle from the inner
    surface of the receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  The inner member of this subclass may cover the entire or
    less surface of the container; however, it is not self-sufficient to hold
    the contents without the container.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein is assembling a preformed container and a
    preformed liner.


CLS 493/218
TXT Bottom to square-bottom-folded bag:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 210 wherein the receptacle formed is one
    presenting an open cavity of substantial thickness, having an opening at
    the top, and is comprised of four side walls connected normally to a
    rectangular bottom, which receptacle is folded with pleats in two opposite
    walls so that the bottom lays against one of the unpleated walls and is the
    same width as the width of the folded receptacle; i.e., the width of the
    unpleated walls, and wherein one of the workpieces comprises a substantial
    portion of the rectangular bottom.


CLS 493/219
TXT Bottom to satchel-bottom-folded bag:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 210 wherein the receptacle formed is one
    presenting an open cavity of substantial thickness, having an opening at
    the top, and comprised of four side walls connected normally to a
    rectangular bottom, which receptacle is folded by forcing two opposite
    walls outwardly to form a crease along their vertical center such that the
    side margin of the folded receptacle extends along a folded wall, then
    turns  inward 45_  toward the bottom margin, which it intersects at 45_;
    and wherein one of the workpieces comprises a substantial portion of the
    rectangular bottom.


CLS 493/220
TXT With coating:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 210 combined with placing layer of
    flowable material on a surface of a workpiece, which layer is intended to
    become a part of that surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for making a rigid container including assembling of distinct
    members and laminating or coating a container blank.

    128+,   for making a rigid container including securing and the application
    of an adhesive.

    148+,   for making a rigid container combined with coating.

    264+,   for making a rigid container with application of adhesive or
    securing by adhesive.

    272+,   for making a tube combined with coating.

    328+,   for making an article from a sheet or web material, combined with
    coating, generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, for apparatus for placing a layer of flowable
    material on the surface of sheet or web work with no means for working of
    the sheet or web.

    427,    Coating Processes, for the step of placing a layer of flowable
    material on the surface of sheet or web work with no other working of the
    sheet or web.


CLS 493/221
TXT Application of adhesive to secure handle or suspension means:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 200 including placing a flowable
    material on a surface of a sheet or web workpiece, which material is
    intended to unite with the surface to subsequently chemically unite a
    receptacle and means to serve as a grip on the receptacle to be engaged by
    a person carrying the receptacle or is intended to serve as structure
    whereby the receptacle may be hung.


CLS 493/222
TXT Means to permit visual inspection of contents (e.g., window, etc.):

    Method or apparatus under subclass 210 wherein one of the workpieces
    brought together or fastened together is intended to allow a user to look
    inside and observe the contents of the completed receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    905,    for an art collection of patents relating to the construction of a
    rigid container having a window.

    919,    for an art collection of patents relating to the construction of a
    pliable container having a window.


CLS 493/223
TXT With cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 210 combined with piercing into a
    workpiece with a sharp tool; forcibly ripping one portion of a workpiece by
    bending or tensile stress or, engaging a workpiece by a crystalline tool to
    remove surface portions from the workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading combined with an
    operation of the class including use of work or product control means.

    56+,    for making a rigid container with cutting, breaking, tearing, or
    abrading.

    194+,   for making a pliable container including heat sealing combined with
    cutting breaking, tearing, or abrading of indeterminate length work.

    199+,   for making a pliable container including heat sealing combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading.

    227+,   for making a pliable container combined with cutting, breaking,
    tearing, or abrading.

    287+,   for making a tube combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or
    abrading.

    324,    for an operation of this class, combined with printing or
    photographic reproduction and with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading.

    340+,   for an operation of this class, generally combined with cutting,
    breaking, tearing, or abrading.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, for cutting by use of a sharp cutting tool, generally,
    including severing.

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, for subdividing by the application
    of bending or tautening forces.

    451,    Abrading, for engaging a workpiece by a crystalline tool to remove
    surface portions from the workpiece.


CLS 493/224
TXT Subdividing web of material:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 223 wherein a workpiece is supplied as
    an elongated member and wherein the piercing, ripping, or engaging with a
    crystalline tool serves to sever the elongated member to predetermined
    lengths.


CLS 493/225
TXT Drawstring to close container:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 210 wherein one of the workpieces being
    brought together or secured together is generally strandlike and is
    intended to encircle the opening of the receptacle and constrict to close
    the opening.


CLS 493/226
TXT Handle or suspension means:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 210 wherein one of the workpieces is
    intended to serve as a grip on the receptacle to be engaged by a person
    carrying the receptacle or is intended to serve as structure whereby the
    receptacle may be hung.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for assembling a handle or suspension means with a rigid container.

    926,    for an art collection of the making of a pliable container having a
    handle or suspension means.


CLS 493/227
TXT With cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 186 combined with piercing into a
    workpiece with a sharp tool; forcibly ripping one portion of a workpiece by
    bending or tensile stress; or, engaging a workpiece by a crystalline tool
    to remove surface portions from that workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading combined with an
    operation of this class including work or product responsive control means.

    56+,    for making a rigid container combined with cutting, breaking,
    tearing, or abrading.

    194+,   for making a pliable container including heat sealing combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading of indeterminate length work.

    199+,   for making a pliable container including heat sealing combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading.

    287+,   for making a tube combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or
    abrading.

    324,    for an operation of this class combined with printing or
    photographic reproduction and cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading.

    340+,   for making a product of sheet or web material generally, combined
    with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, for cutting by use of a sharp cutting tool, generally,
    including severing.

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, for subdividing by the application
    of bending or tautening forces.

    451,    Abrading, for engaging a workpiece by a crystalline tool to remove
    surface portions from the workpiece.


CLS 493/228
TXT Including form-scoring:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 227 comprising (a) pressing a line in
    one surface of a workpiece and thereby raising a corresponding line on the
    opposite surface; or, (b) pressing a line in one surface of a workpiece
    with no significant change in the opposite surface configuration, wherein
    the material of the workpiece under that line becomes compacted, such that
    there is no thinning flow of the workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59+,    for making a rigid container with cutting and form-scoring.

    160+,   for making a rigid container including form-scoring.

    228+,   for making a pliable container combined with cutting, breaking,
    tearing, or abrading and form-scoring.

    240+,   for making a pliable container including form-scoring.

    355,    for form-scoring combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or
    abrading.

    396,    for bending combined with form-scoring.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 879+ for scoring by a sharp cutting edge,
    wherein there is no significant deformation of the work.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    for the method of shaping sheet or web work by a thinning flow of the work,
    as in embossing.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus, or
    means to shape sheet or web work by a thinning flow of the work, as in
    embossing.


CLS 493/229
TXT Notching of work edge:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 228 wherein the piercing, ripping, or
    engaging with a crystalline tool is to form a recession or slit in a margin
    of a sheet or web workpiece.


CLS 493/230
TXT Partial severance to form interconnected products:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 228 including piercing, ripping, or
    engaging with a crystalline tool to form a weakened line along which a
    workpiece is to be subdivided later to provide individual articles.


CLS 493/231
TXT Including folding:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 227 including bendingly stressing a
    sheet or web workpiece beyond its elastic limit along a line to form a
    permanent crease.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for making a rigid container including folding and assembling
    combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading by a rotary tool.

    69+,    for making a rigid container including folding combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading by a rotary tool.

    79+,    for making a rigid container including folding combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading by a reciprocatory tool.

    151,    for making a rigid container including container coating with an
    adhesive and folding.

    162+,   for making a rigid container including folding.

    243+,   for making a pliable container including folding.

    353,    for folding combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading
    by a composite tool.

    356+,   for folding combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading,
    generally.

    405+,   for folding, generally, of a sheet or web.


CLS 493/232
TXT Notching of work edge:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 231 including piercing, ripping, or
    engaging with a crystalline tool to form a recession or slit in a margin of
    a sheet or web workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237,    for making a pliable container including notching the work edge,
    generally.


CLS 493/233
TXT Partial severance to form interconnected products:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 231 including piercing, ripping, or
    engaging the workpiece with a crystalline tool to form a weakened line
    along which the work is to be later divided to provide individual articles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238+,   for making a pliable container with partial severance to form
    interconnected products without folding.


CLS 493/234
TXT With application of tension to tear container from web:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 233 including ripping one portion of the
    workpiece from another along the weakened portion to form plural pieces by
    a tautening action.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238,    for making a pliable container with partial severance to form
    interconnected products and then application of tension to tear one product
    from a web, without folding.


CLS 493/235
TXT Severing of container or container blank from web:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 231 including subdividing a finished
    receptacle or a sheet from a web.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239,    for making a pliable container and severing a container or
    container blank from a web.


CLS 493/236
TXT By severing means moving with work:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 235 wherein the workpiece is in motion
    at the time of being subdivided and wherein means to subdivide the work has
    a component of movement therewith.


CLS 493/237
TXT Notching on work edge:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 227 including piercing, ripping, or
    engaging with a crystalline tool to form a recession or slit in a margin of
    a sheet or web workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    232,    for forming a pliable container including notching the work edge,
    including folding.


CLS 493/238
TXT Partial severance to form interconnected products:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 227 including piercing, ripping, or
    engaging the workpiece with a crystalline tool to form a weakened line
    along which the workpiece is to be subdivided later to provide individual
    articles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233+,   for making a pliable container including folding, forming a web
    into a tube and partial severance to form interconnected products.


CLS 493/239
TXT Severing of container or container blank from web:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 227 including subdividing a finished
    receptacle or a workpiece from a stock material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235,    for making a pliable container, forming a web into a tube and
    severing of a container or container blank from a web.


CLS 493/240
TXT Including form-scoring:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 186 including (a) pressing a line in one
    surface of a workpiece and thereby raising a corresponding line on the
    opposite surface; or, (b) pressing a line in one surface of a workpiece
    with no significant change in the opposite surface configuration, wherein
    the material of the workpiece under that line becomes more compacted, such
    that there is no thinning flow of the workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59+,    for making a rigid container with cutting and form-scoring.

    160+,   for making a rigid container including form-scoring.

    396+,   for form-scoring of sheet or web material, generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 879+ for scoring by a sharp cutting edge,
    wherein there is no significant deformation of the work.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    for the method of shaping a sheet or web work by a thinning flow of the
    work, as in embossing.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus, for
    means to shape sheet or web work by a thinning flow of the work, as in
    embossing.


CLS 493/241
TXT By rotary tool:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 240 wherein the pressing of a line is
    done by a member turning about an axis more than 360_.


CLS 493/242
TXT By reciprocatory tool:

    Method or Apparatus under subclass 240 wherein the pressing of a line is
    done by a member moving to-and-fro along a straight line or about a fixed
    pivot.


CLS 493/243
TXT Including folding:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 186 including bendingly stressing a
    workpiece beyond its elastic limit along a line to form a permanent crease.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for making a rigid container including folding and assembling
    combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading by a rotary tool.

    69+,    for making a rigid container including folding combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading by a rotary tool.

    79+,    for making a rigid container including folding combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading a reciprocatory tool.

    151,    for making a rigid container including coating with an adhesive and
    folding.

    162+,   for making a rigid container including folding.

    231+,   for making a pliable container including folding combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading.

    353,    for folding combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading,
    by a composite tool.

    356+,   for folding combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading,
    generally.

    405+,   for folding, generally, of a sheet or web.


CLS 493/244
TXT Of previously folded material (e.g., refolding, etc.):

    Method or apparatus under subclass 243 comprising bendingly stressing a
    sheet or web workpiece beyond its elastic limit along a line to form a
    permanent crease, wherein the sheet or web had previously been provided
    with a permanent crease along the same line.


CLS 493/245
TXT Flap:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 244 wherein the permanent crease formed
    is to provide a projecting closing member for the receptacle to be turned
    out of alignment with a wall of the receptacle when the crease is formed.


CLS 493/246
TXT Plural folding stations folding noncontinuously advancing work:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 243 including intermittently moving a
    workpiece form a first location in which a permanent crease is formed in
    the workpiece and a second location, distinct from the first location,
    where a permanent crease is formed in the workpiece.


CLS 493/247
TXT With work turret:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 246 including means to transport the
    sheet or web workpiece form the first creasing location to the second
    creasing location, which means is rigid and turns about an fixed axis.


CLS 493/248
TXT By infeeding work to passive folder:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 243 including use of means to cause the
    sheet or web workpiece to move into engagement with and be creased by
    creasing means which creasing means is inactive during operation.


CLS 493/249
TXT By buckling:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 243 comprising application of
    compressive stress to the workpiece parallel to the planar surfaces thereof
    causing the workpiece to yield in columnar failure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    419,    for folding of a sheet or web, generally, by buckling.


CLS 493/250
TXT By mandrel or plunger:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 243 including use of (a) a male forming
    member about which the sheet or web workpiece is wrapped without thrust of
    the forming member; or, (b) a male forming member on which the sheet or web
    workpiece is shaped as a result of thrust of that member.

    (1)     Note.  A mandrel is similar in structure to a plunger, but it is
    not intended to form work by force applied to the mandrel, rather is
    intended to serve as a reaction member onto which work is formed.


CLS 493/251
TXT Three point, continuous 180_ folding:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 250 including (a) use of a male forming
    member about which a sheet or web workpiece is to be wrapped without thrust
    and a pair of surfaces engaging the workpiece laterally outwardly on the
    opposite side of the workpiece from the location of the male forming member
    to exert bending force on the workpiece by movement of at least one of the
    surfaces of the pair; or, (b) use of a male forming member on which a sheet
    or web workpiece is shaped as a result of thrust of that member and a pair
    of reaction surfaces engaging the workpiece laterally outwardly on the
    opposite side from the location of the male forming member to exert bending
    force on the workpiece by movement of the forming member; wherein the
    workpiece is caused to wrap about the forming member on at least three
    sides in a single action.


CLS 493/252
TXT Mandrel having rectangular surface:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 250 wherein a male forming member about
    which the sheet or web workpiece is wrapped without thrust includes a work
    shaping surface that is generally planar and is bounded by four sides
    meeting at right angles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 558+ for a machine to open a preformed
    but collapsed bag and subsequently fill the bag; subclasses 563+, for a
    machine to form a package about a hollow mandrel; subclasses 220+ for a
    machine which packages an article by moving the article and the wrapper
    through a cover wiping passage or pocket to form the initial folds of the
    wrap; and subclass 384.1 for apparatus for opening a preformed but
    collapsed bag.


CLS 493/253
TXT Forming triangularly folded container surface:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 250 wherein the male forming member is
    of a configuration to be particularly adapted to give a shape to the sheet
    or web workpiece so that at least one portion of the product is planar and
    has three sides.


CLS 493/254
TXT Central fold:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 243 including forming a crease line
    parallel to and equidistance from a opposite pair of the marginal portions
    of the sheet or web workpiece, or of a predominate portion of the workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is dividing a workpiece or a predominate
    portion of a workpiece into two equal areas on opposite sides of a fold
    line.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 545+ for apparatus for forming a package
    by confining the contents within a progressively seamed cover formed from a
    continuous web or webs.


CLS 493/255
TXT Tube opening and closing:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 243 comprising manipulating a flattened
    cylindrical workpiece at an end portion to pull one wall away form an
    opposite wall and further manipulating the cylindrical workpiece seal the
    end portion and thereby make a container.


CLS 493/256
TXT Including application of fluid pressure or vacuum to work:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 255 wherein manipulation of the
    cylindrical workpiece is effected by application of surrounding flowable
    medium to a surface of the workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  Removal or air pressure by use of a vacuum so that air
    pressure on opposing work surfaces moves the workpiece is considered to be
    proper for this subclass.


CLS 493/257
TXT By roller having gripper engaging end edge of tube:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 255 wherein manipulation of the
    flattened, cylindrical workpiece is effected by engagement of a peripheral
    cylindrical surface of a member turning more than 360_ about an axis and by
    a member mounted on the turning member serving to squeeze and thereby hold
    a leading or trailing portion of the workpiece against the peripheral
    surface of the turning member.


CLS 493/258
TXT And having side fold gripper:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 257 wherein manipulation of the
    flattened, cylindrical workpiece is further effected by another member
    mounted on the turning member serving to squeeze and thereby hold a fold
    line at the side of the workpiece against the peripheral surface of the
    turning member.


CLS 493/259
TXT By means engaging end edge of tube:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 255 wherein manipulation of the
    flattened, cylindrical workpiece is effected by engagement of a leading or
    trailing portion thereof.


CLS 493/260
TXT Closing of flap:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 243 comprising manipulation of a
    projecting portion of the workpiece about a crease

    line to serve to restrict access to the interior of the formed receptacle.


CLS 493/261
TXT Multiple flaps:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 260 comprising manipulation of a
    plurality of projecting portions of the workpiece about their respective
    crease lines to restrict access to the interior of the formed receptacle.


CLS 493/262
TXT Container moving transversely to fold:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 261 wherein the workpiece is in motion
    and wherein the crease line of one of the extending portions is normal to
    the direction of movement as its extending portion is manipulated
    thereabout.


CLS 493/263
TXT And parallel to another fold:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 262 wherein the crease line of a second
    extending portion is aligned with the direction of workpiece movement.


CLS 493/264
TXT With application of adhesive or securing by adhesive:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 186 including coating of a surface of a
    workpiece with material intended to bond that surface to another surface of
    a workpiece or including bonding of a surface of a workpiece that has
    previously been coated with a bonding material to another surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for making a rigid container including assembling of distinct
    members and laminating or coating a container blank.

    128+,   for making a rigid container including securing and the application
    of an adhesive.

    148+,   for making a pliable container including assembling of distinct
    members and coating.

    220+,   for making a pliable container including assembling of distinct
    members and coating.

    272+,   for making a tube with coating.

    328+,   for an operation of this class, generally, with coating.


CLS 493/265
TXT And drying:

    Method or apparatus under the subclass 264 wherein the bonding material, as
    applied to the workpiece includes material to make it flowable, comprising
    removing by evaporation the material that made the bonding material
    flowable.


CLS 493/266
TXT Application by work contacting applicator (e.g., roller, brush, etc.):

    Method or apparatus under subclass 264 including use of means to place the
    coating on the work which means acts directly by engagement with the work.


CLS 493/267
TXT Method:

    Process under subclass 186.


CLS 493/268
TXT Means to assist manual manipulation:

    Apparatus under subclass 186 including use of means to aid the operative to
    facilitate random movement of a workpiece.


CLS 493/269
TXT TUBE MAKING:

    Method or apparatus under the class definition for forming a sheet or web
    workpiece into the shape of a hollow cylinder, wherein the cylinder may be
    circular, oval, or polygonal in cross section and may have one cross
    sectional dimension at one axial location and a different cross sectional
    dimension at another axial location.

    (1)     Note.  The tube made by the method or apparatus of this subclass
    may be pressed down flat to virtually eliminate any interior space, if the
    purpose of the tube is to ultimately provide an open interior.

    (2)     Note.  The tube made by the method or apparatus of this subclass is
    considered to be closed when considered in cross section, i.e., a sheet of
    material is folded to close back on itself and is fastened along abutting
    edges.  Therefor, if a tubelike member is to be taped but not yet been
    taped, it is not yet a completed tube and the method or apparatus for
    making such an incomplete tube is not proper for placement in this
    subclass.  See, for example, subclass 395.  On the other hand, if a tube in
    intended to be used without securing the abutting edges, the method of
    apparatus for forming that tube will be found in this and the indented
    subclasses if the edges merely abutting face each other, since such a
    product is considered to be a complete tube.


CLS 493/270
TXT With printing or photographic reproduction:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 269 combined with placing recognizable
    indicia on the workpiece or product, e.g., by coating, impressing, or
    application of or exposure of photosensitive materials.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for making a rigid container combined with printing.

    187+,   for making a pliable container combined with printing.

    320+,   for making a product from sheet or web material, generally,
    combined with printing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, for placing recognizable indicia on sheet or web material
    without any other working of the sheet or web.


CLS 493/271
TXT With minute size change of formed tube:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 269 comprising changing, very slightly,
    a dimension of the formed hollow cylinder.

    (1)     Note.  The operation of this subclass normally involves mere
    modification of a surface of the tube without significant thinning flow or
    removal or a portion of the work.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    287+,   for making a tube and shaving that tube to size.

    293,    for making a tube combined with causing a thinning flow of the
    material, to change the dimensions of the cylindrical member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    for a method of reducing the size of a tube including thinning (or
    thickening) flow of the material.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus, for
    apparatus for reducing the size of a tube including thinning (or
    thickening) flow of the material.


CLS 493/272
TXT With coating:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 269 combined with placing a layer of
    flowable material on the surface of the workpiece, which layer is intended
    to become part of that surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for making a rigid container including assembling of distinct
    members and laminating or coating a container blank.

    128+,   for making a rigid container including securing and the application
    of an adhesive.

    148+,   for making a rigid container combined with coating.

    220+,   for making a pliable container including assembling of distinct
    members and coating.

    264+,   for making a rigid container with application of adhesive or
    securing by adhesive.

    328+,   for making a paper article combined with coating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, for apparatus for placing a layer of flowable
    material on the surface of paper work with no paper working means.

    427,    Coating Processes, for the step of placing a layer of flowable
    material on the surface of paper work with no paper working operation.


CLS 493/273
TXT Applied externally of formed tube:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 272 wherein after formation of the
    hollow cylinder flowable material is applied to the outer surface thereof.


CLS 493/274
TXT And heating or drying:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 272 combined with applying thermal
    energy to the workpiece or to the flowable material; or combined with
    allowing the vapor pressure of the flowable material to cause the material
    to solidify.

    (1)     Note.  Heat applied in this subclass may be to soften thermoplastic
    coating material, to cure thermosetting coating material, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for making a cigarette filter including application of heat to
    secure the wrapper thereto.

    129+,   for making a rigid container with application of adhesive and heat
    sealing.

    133+,   for making a rigid container including heat sealing.

    189+,   for making a pliable container including heat sealing.

    332,    for making an article of this class, generally including
    application of adhesive and heating or drying.

    341,    for an operation of this class including heat application combined
    with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading.


CLS 493/275
TXT By immersion:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 272 including use of a vessel for
    holding the flowable material and including passing the surface on which
    the layer is applied into the vessel to cause the layer to be applied
    thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329,    for an operation of this class, combined with coating by immersion,
    generally.


CLS 493/276
TXT Adhesive:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 272 wherein the flowable material is
    intended to unite with a surface of the workpiece and to subsequently
    fasten that surface to another surface of a workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31+,    for making an article from a sheet or web combined with application
    of an adhesive coating.

    150+,   for making a rigid container combined with application of an
    adhesive coating.


CLS 493/277
TXT By work engaging applicator:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 276 wherein the flowable fastening
    material is applied to the workpiece by a member coming in contact with the
    workpiece.


CLS 493/278
TXT Rotary applicator:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 277 wherein the member for application
    of the flowable fastening material turns about an

    axis more than 360_.


CLS 493/279
TXT Having adhesive transferring roller:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 278 including an additional member
    turning about an axis, which additional member includes a circular
    peripheral surface adapted to rollingly engage the workpiece contacting
    applying member to supply the flowable fastening material thereto.


CLS 493/280
TXT Nondriven roller:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 279 wherein the additional member is
    caused to turn about its axis only by engagement with the moving flowable
    fastening material applying member.


CLS 493/281
TXT And having scraper:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 279 also including a passive blade
    adapted to engage the flowable fastening material applying member or the
    additional member to remove surplus flowable material therefrom.


CLS 493/282
TXT Coacting with opposed work engaging roller:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 278 including a member rotatable about
    an axis more than 360_ having a circular periphery adapted to engage the
    workpiece on the surface directly opposite from the surface engaged by the
    flowable fastening material applying member.


CLS 493/283
TXT Nondriven roller:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 282 wherein the rotatable member
    engaging the surface of the workpiece opposite from that engaged by the
    flowable fastening material applying member is caused to rotate by
    engagement with the workpiece.


CLS 493/284
TXT Brush:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 278 wherein the member for application
    of the flowable fastening material is provided with bristles which extend
    outwardly therefrom and engagement with the workpiece for application of
    the flowable fastening material thereto.


CLS 493/285
TXT Plural applicators:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 278 wherein flowable fastening material
    is applied to a workpiece by a member in engagement therewith and turning
    about an axis more than 360_ and wherein flowable fastening material is
    applied to a workpiece by another independent means.


CLS 493/286
TXT And plural sources of adhesive:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 285 wherein a first flowable fastening
    material from a first supply is applied to a workpiece by a member in
    engagement therewith and turning about an axis more than 360_ and wherein a
    second flowable fastening material from a second supply is applied to a
    workpiece by another independent means.


CLS 493/287
TXT With cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 269 combined with piercing into a
    workpiece with a sharp tool; forcibly ripping one portion of a workpiece by
    bending or tensile stress; or, engaging a workpiece by a crystalline tool
    to remove surface portions from that workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading combined with an
    operation of this class including work or product responsive control means.

    56+,    for making a rigid container combined with cutting, breaking,
    tearing, or abrading.

    194+,   for making a pliable container including heat sealing combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading of indeterminate length work.

    199+,   for making a pliable container including heat sealing combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading.

    227+,   for making a pliable container combined with cutting, breaking,
    tearing, or abrading.

    340+,   for making a product of sheet or web material generally, combined
    with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, for cutting by use of a sharp cutting tool, generally,
    including severing.

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, for subdividing by the application
    of bending or tautening forces.

    451,    Abrading, for engaging a workpiece by a crystalline tool to remove
    surface portions from the workpiece.


CLS 493/288
TXT Severing of formed tube to length:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 287 including forming a hollow cylinder
    and subsequently subdividing the cylinder, thereby establishing the
    longitudinal extent of the formed cylinder.


CLS 493/289
TXT By severing means moving with work:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 288 wherein the hollow cylinder is in
    advancing motion when being subdivided and wherein the means for
    subdividing includes a subdividing edge having a component of motion with
    the cylinder motion during such subdividing action.


CLS 493/290
TXT During relative rotation between work and severing means about work axis:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 288 including (a) turning the hollow
    cylinder about its axis to engage its periphery with a subdividing edge, or
    (b) orbiting a subdividing edge about the axis of the hollow cylinder to
    engage the periphery of the hollow cylinder with the subdividing edge.


CLS 493/291
TXT With surface treatment (e.g., polishing, burnishing, etc.):

    Method or apparatus under subclass 269 combined with modification of a
    surface of the sheet or web workpiece or the product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    271,    for surface treatment of a formed cylinder to make a precise change
    in a dimension of that cylinder.

    467+,   for surface treatment of a sheet or web, generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, for burnishing of materials other than a sheet or
    web, generally.


CLS 493/292
TXT Tube including metal component:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 269 for making a hollow cylinder
    including a portion that is known chemically as a metal.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is assembling a metal (including foil) with
    a nonmetal in the formation of a tube.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, for forming an article, including forming a tube,
    of metal or of a metal/nonmetal laminate including bending or drawing of
    the metal.


CLS 493/293
TXT With extruding, drawing, or attenuating:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 269 combined with forcing work material
    through an orifice or pulling, pushing, or stretching work material to
    thicken or thin the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    338+,   for an operation of this class, generally, combined with extruding,
    drawing, or attenuating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    for a method of forming material by forcing it through an orifice or
    wherein there is thinning or thickening flow of work material.  See the
    line note under the definition of this class (493).

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus, for
    apparatus for forming material by forcing it through an orifice or wherein
    there is thinning or thickening flow of work material.  See the line note
    under the definition of this class (493).


CLS 493/294
TXT With lining of tube:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 269 including bringing together a first
    and a second workpiece wherein the first is to be a hollow cylinder and the
    second is to extend about the inside of the cylinder to restrict engagement
    of contents of the cylinder from the inner surface of the cylinder.

    (1)     Note.  The inner member of this subclass may cover the entire or
    less surface of the cylinder; however, it is not self-sufficient to hold
    the contents without the cylinder.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein is assembling a preformed cylinder and a
    preformed liner, even without additional "tube making".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93+,    for placing a liner inside a rigid container, including placing a
    cup-shaped liner inside a cylindrical container, since that is considered
    to be "container making" in that subclass.


CLS 493/295
TXT Polygonal cross section tube:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 269 including forming a hollow cylinder
    having at least two planar longitudinally extending surfaces.


CLS 493/296
TXT Frustoconical tube:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 269 including forming an open cylinder
    of greater dimension at one end than at the other.


CLS 493/297
TXT Assembling of distinct members:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 269 including juxtaposing or fastening
    together a plurality of workpieces.

    (1)     Note.  The workpieces of this and the indented subclasses are
    totally separate and distinct.  A first and a second surface of a workpiece
    are not considered to be separate workpieces, no matter how far spaced from
    each other.

    (2)     Note.  A fastener, e.g., a staple or a rivet, is considered to be a
    workpiece when assembled to a paper workpiece; however, see the search note
    to Class 227 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for an operation of this class including assembling or coating and
    the use of control means responsive to that assembling or coating.

    47+,    for assembling dissimilar filter materials in making a cigarette
    filter.

    67+,    for assembling a rigid container combined with cutting, breaking,
    tearing, or abrading by a rotary tool.

    75+,    for assembling a rigid container combined with cutting, breaking,
    tearing, or abrading by a reciprocatory tool.

    84+,    for making a rigid container including assembly of distinct members.

    210+,   for making a pliable container including assembly of distinct
    members.

    334+,   for assembling of distinct members combined with cutting, breaking,
    tearing, or abrading.

    374+,   for assembling of distinct members, one of which is a sheet or web,
    generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 428+ for methods of and subclasses 700+
    for apparatus for assembling or disassembling.  Class 29 is the generic
    home for assembling. See the search notes under subclasses 428 and 700 for
    other locations of specific types of assembling.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, for
    uniting a first and a second web by adhesive bonding without assembling or
    bending in forming an article of commerce or with or without assembling or
    bending in forming united stock material.  See the line notes under the
    definition of this class.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, for a device specific to
    driving a fastener into a sheet or web; or into a stack of sheets or webs,
    with no recognition of more than one sheet or web.


CLS 493/298
TXT With plural, orbiting work supply reels:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 297 including a first and a second
    workpiece, each comprising a wound web or spool, each of which spools is
    caused to travel about the cylinder axis and thereby to wrap the workpieces
    into the shape of a hollow cylinder.


CLS 493/299
TXT Spiral winding:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 269 comprising coiling a generally
    planar, elongated sheet or web workpiece about an imaginary axis while
    continuously moving the supply of work axially with respect to the formed
    hollow cylinder so that adjacent convolutions are axially offset from each
    other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, particularly subclasses 430+ and
    470+ for helical winding on an article core or spool.


CLS 493/300
TXT Orbiting work supply reel:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 299 including a wound spool of a sheet
    or web workpiece which is caused to travel about the cylinder axis and
    thereby to wrap the workpiece into the shape of a hollow cylinder.


CLS 493/301
TXT And advancing by wrapping belt:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 299 including use of an endless member
    adapted to partially encircle the formed hollow cylinder and move with the
    cylinder along its axis thereabout.


CLS 493/302
TXT With advancing of tube axially:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 269 combined with transporting a formed
    hollow cylinder progressively away from the location at which it was formed
    by moving the cylinder in the direction parallel to its axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71+,    for making a rigid container including folding combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading by a rotary tool and with means to
    advance work.

    81,     for making a rigid container including folding combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading by a reciprocatory tool and with
    means to advance work.

    125,    for making a rigid container including securing work surfaces, use
    of a supply hopper, use of a suction-type handling means and use of a
    conveyor to advance work to a folder.

    142+,   for making a rigid container including securing work surfaces with
    simultaneous pressing and advancing of the work while adhesive dries or
    sets.

    147,    for making a rigid container including securing work surfaces and
    advancing the work or product.

    161,    for making a rigid container including scoring and continuously
    advancing the work with the scoring tool moving with the work during
    operation thereof.


CLS 493/303
TXT Convolute winding:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 269 comprising coiling an elongated
    sheet or web workpiece upon itself so that each subsequent progressive
    convolution is of greater (or lesser) radial dimension from the cylinder
    axis than the previous one, so that the formed hollow cylinder is comprised
    of at least two radially overlapping convolutions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, particularly subclasses 570+ for
    convolute winding on spool or core.


CLS 493/304
TXT By use of external guide member:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 303 including use of an element adapted
    to engage the surface of the sheet or web workpiece facing away from the
    cylinder axis to direct the workpiece to configuration about that axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    460+,   for an external guide member adapted to divert a continuously
    moving workpiece to curl about an axis.


CLS 493/305
TXT By use of plural mandrels:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 303 including use of a first member
    about which a sheet or web workpiece is wrapped to be shaped into a hollow
    cylinder and including a second member about which a sheet or web workpiece
    is wrapped to be shaped into a hollow cylinder.


CLS 493/306
TXT On turret:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 305 wherein the first member about which
    a sheet or web workpiece is wrapped and the second member about which a
    sheet or web workpiece is wrapped are mounted on a common support to be
    indexed about an axis from a first position to a second position, one of
    which positions present one member for the wrapping function and one of
    which positions present the other member for the wrapping function.


CLS 493/307
TXT By manually driven or manipulated means:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 303 wherein the hollow cylinder is
    formed by apparatus that is forced to perform the coiling function by
    energy supplied directly by an operative, or by apparatus that is movable
    randomly by the operative during the time of forming of the hollow cylinder.


CLS 493/308
TXT Including closing end of tube:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 269 including blocking the otherwise
    open end of at least one end of the cylinder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51+,    for making a cylindrical member having a closed end, wherein the
    product is intended to serve as a container of goods.

    102+,   for closing a container by assembling a distinct closure therewith.

    156+,   for making a nonrectangular rigid container including end closing.


CLS 493/309
TXT CONTAINER OR TUBE ERECTING OPENING, OR COLLAPSING:

    Method or apparatus under the class definition including repositioning one
    wall of a previously made receptacle or hollow cylinder with respect to
    another (a) to make the interior enclosed space larger; (b) to provide
    access to the interior of the receptacle or hollow cylinder; or, to make
    the interior enclosed space smaller.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses contain what are known as
    "flattened tubular containers" which have been made into the tubular form
    in a prior operation and have been stacked for storage and shipment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51+,    for erecting a tube combined with closing an end of the tube to
    form a container; and for making a container combined with erecting the
    container.


CLS 493/310
TXT Including overfolding or reverse bending:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 309 comprising (a) movement of one wall
    with respect to an adjacent wall farther than is need so that upon release
    of the moving force the wall will move by residual stress back to the
    desired position; or,(b)movement of one wall of a workpiece 180_ with
    respect to an adjacent wall where the final position of the wall is to be
    90_ from either the first or the second position.


CLS 493/311
TXT Collapsing:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 309 including repositioning the walls of
    a previously formed receptacle or hollow cylinder to make the interior
    enclosed space smaller.


CLS 493/312
TXT Cellular container:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 309 wherein the member whose walls are
    repositioned is a compartmentized receptacle.


CLS 493/313
TXT By direct application of vacuum or fluid pressure:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 309 wherein repositioning of one wall
    with respect to another is effected by (a) removing atmospheric pressure
    from one side of an area of the wall so that atmospheric pressure on the
    opposite side causes the wall to move; or, (b) by direct application of
    superatmospheric pressure to one side of an area of the wall to cause the
    wall to move.


CLS 493/314
TXT Internal fluid pressure to erect container or tube:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 313 including repositioning the walls of
    a previously formed receptacle or hollow cylinder comprising application of
    superatmospheric pressure to the inwardly facing sides of the walls of the
    receptacle or hollow cylinder to make the interior enclosed space larger.


CLS 493/315
TXT Orbital movement of work contacting vacuum applying means:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 313 including structure to engage the
    sheet or web workpiece and encircle the area from which atmospheric
    pressure is removed, which structure is adapted to move in a closed loop
    path.


CLS 493/316
TXT Oscillating movement of work contacting vacuum means:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 313 including structure to engage the
    sheet or web workpiece and encircle the area from which atmospheric
    pressure is removed, which structure is adapted to move to-and-fro about a
    fixed pivot.


CLS 493/317
TXT Compound movement:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 316 wherein the structure to engage the
    sheet or web workpiece also moves in a second manner at the same time as
    the to-and-fro movement.


CLS 493/318
TXT By orbital means:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 309 including structure to engage the
    sheet or web workpiece to bring about relative repositioning of the sides
    thereof, which structure is adapted to move in a closed loop path.


CLS 493/319
TXT Endless belt or chain:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 318 wherein the structure adapted to
    move in a closed loop path includes a workpiece engaging surface which is,
    or is part of, an integral or concatenated band that is trained about a
    plurality of separated, noncoaxial pulleys or sprockets.


CLS 493/320
TXT WITH PRINTING OR PHOTOGRAPHIC REPRODUCTION:

    Method or apparatus under the class definition combined with placing
    recognizable indicia on a workpiece or product.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is placing recognizable indicia on a
    workpiece or product by coating, impressing, or application of or exposure
    of photosensitive materials.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for making a rigid container combined with printing.

    187+,   for making a pliable container combined with printing.

    270,    for tube making combined with printing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, for placing recognizable indicia on sheet or web material
    without any other working of the sheet or web.


CLS 493/321
TXT By rotary printer:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 320 wherein recognizable indicia is
    placed on the sheet or web workpiece by a member turning more than 360_
    about a fixed axis and  rollingly engaging the workpiece with a radially
    outwardly facing surface.


CLS 493/322
TXT By bed and travelling cylinder printer:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 320 wherein the recognizable indicia is
    placed on the sheet or web workpiece by a device for supporting the
    workpiece and by a member adapted to turn about an axis to traverse the
    workpiece and the work support.


CLS 493/323
TXT Selective type printer:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 320 wherein recognizable indicia is
    placed on the workpiece or product, including means to support a member
    adapted to press directly against the workpiece or product, which member is
    one of a plurality in the support from which the operative may choose for a
    particular desired indicia arrangement.


CLS 493/324
TXT And cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 320 combined with piercing into a
    workpiece with a sharp tool; forcibly ripping a portion of a workpiece by
    bending or tensile stress; or, engaging a workpiece by a crystalline tool
    to remove surface portions from that workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading combined with an
    operation of this class including work or product responsive control means.

    56+,    for making a rigid container combined with cutting, breaking,
    tearing, or abrading.

    194+,   for making a pliable container including heat sealing combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading of indeterminate length work.

    199+,   for making a pliable container including heat sealing combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading.

    227+,   for making a pliable container combined with cutting, breaking,
    tearing, or abrading.

    287+,   for making a tube combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or
    abrading.

    340+,   for an operation of this class combined with cutting, breaking,
    tearing, or abrading, generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, for cutting by use of a sharp cutting tool, generally,
    including severing.

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, for subdividing by the application
    of bending or tautening forces.

    451,    Abrading, for engaging a workpiece by a crystalline tool to remove
    surface portions from the workpiece.


CLS 493/325
TXT With securing:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 324 including causing a first surface of
    a sheet or web workpiece to intimately engage a second surface of that
    workpiece to thereby fasten the two surfaces together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114+,   for securing two workpieces together in the formation of a rigid
    container.

    121+,   for securing two surfaces of a workpiece together in the formation
    of a rigid container.

    393,    for assembling of two workpieces by securing, generally.

    394,    for securing a first surface and a second surface of a single
    workpiece together.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 428+ for the process of and subclasses
    700+ for apparatus for the general application of a fastener (e.g., a paper
    clip) to work, even if the work is a sheet or web and no recognition of
    more than one sheet or web.  See the search note to Class 29 under the
    definition of this class.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, for
    securing two workpieces together by adhesive bonding, generally; for
    adhesive bonding combined with assembling, bending, or flexing in the
    formation of a web of stock material, and for assembling and adhesively
    bonding an article with a postage stamp or label. See the search note to
    Class 156 under the definition of this class.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, for application of a nail or
    staple to work even if the work is a sheet or web, if there is no other
    working of the sheet or web and no recognition of more than one sheet or
    web.


CLS 493/326
TXT WITH OR INCLUDING SURFACE PREPARATION FOR COATING:

    Method or apparatus under the class definition comprising or combined with
    modification of a surface of a workpiece to make that surface more suitable
    for application of a layer of flowable material thereto, which layer will
    become part of that surface or to remove a layer previously applied
    material from a surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    328+,   for an operation of this class combined with coating of a
    previously prepared surface.


CLS 493/327
TXT Removal of previously applied coating:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 326 wherein the surface modification
    comprises delaminating or destroying a layer on the surface of the
    workpiece, which surface was previously applied as a flowable material to
    become a part of that surface.


CLS 493/328
TXT WITH COATING:

    Method or apparatus under the class definition combined with placing layer
    of flowable material on the surface of a workpiece, which layer is intended
    to become a part of that surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for making a rigid container including assembling of distinct
    members and laminating or coating a container blank.

    128+,   for making a rigid container including securing and the application
    of an adhesive.

    148+,   for making a rigid container combined with coating.

    220+,   for making a pliable container combined with assembling and coating.

    264+,   for making a rigid container with application of adhesive or
    securing by adhesive.

    272+,   for making a tube combined with coating.

    326,    for surface preparation combined with coating of that surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, for apparatus for placing a layer of flowable
    material on the surface of workpiece with no other means for treating the
    workpiece.

    427,    Coating Processes, for the step of placing a layer of flowable
    material on the surface of a workpiece with no other treating of the
    workpiece.


CLS 493/329
TXT By immersion:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 328 including use of a vessel for
    holding the flowable material and including passing the surface on which
    layer is applied into the vessel to cause the layer to be applied thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    275,    for making a tube including coating a portion thereof by immersion.


CLS 493/330
TXT Plural diverse materials:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 328 including placing a layer of a first
    flowable material on a surface of a workpiece and including placing a layer
    of a second flowable material on a surface of a workpiece wherein the first
    flowable material and the second flowable material are of different,
    distinct characteristics.


CLS 493/331
TXT Adhesive:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 328 wherein the flowable material is
    intended to unite with the surface of the workpiece and to subsequently
    fasten that surface to another surface of a workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150+,   for making a rigid container combined with application of an
    adhesive coating.

    276,    for making a tube combined with coating of an adhesive.


CLS 493/332
TXT With heating or drying:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 331 combined with (a) the application
    applying of thermal energy to the workpiece or to the flowable material; or
    combined with (b) allowing the vapor pressure of the flowable material to
    cause the material to solidify.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for making a cigarette filter including application of heat to
    secure the wrapper thereto.

    129+,   for making a rigid container with application of adhesive and heat
    sealing.

    133+,   for making a rigid container including heat sealing.

    189+,   for making a pliable container including heat sealing.

    274+,   for making a tube with coating and heating.

    341,    for an operation of this class including heat sealing combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading.


CLS 493/333
TXT Applied in a repeating pattern:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 331 including the application of the
    flowable material to the workpiece intermittently in a predetermined cycle
    so that the layer is applied only to limited areas of the workpiece;
    wherein the cycle is predetermined at least in part by characteristics of
    the means applying the flowable material.

    (1)     Note.  The coating of this subclass is similar to that of a
    printing device in that restriction of the coating is made by the
    characteristics of the applicator rather than solely by the characteristics
    of the workpiece.  For example, coating of the projecting flap of
    sequentially presented workpieces by a roller under which the flap passes
    is not proper for this subclass since there is no characteristic of the
    applicator to cause intermittent application of the coating; whereas,
    coating of sequentially presented envelope flaps by a rotary device with
    raised surface portions is proper for this subclass since the intermittent
    application is brought about at least in part by the characteristics of the
    applicator.


CLS 493/334
TXT With assembling of distinct members:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 331 including juxtaposing of fastening
    together a plurality of workpieces.

    (1)     Note.  The workpiece of this and the indented subclasses are
    totally separate and distinct.  A first and a second surface of a workpiece
    are not considered to be separate workpieces, no matter how far spaced from
    each other.

    (2)     Note.  A fastener, e.g., a staple or a rivet, is considered to be a
    workpiece when assembled to a paper workpiece; however, see the search note
    to Class 227 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for an operation of this class including assembling or coating and
    the use of control means responsive to that assembling or coating.

    47+,    for assembling dissimilar filter materials in making a cigarette
    filter.

    67+,    for assembling a rigid container combined with cutting, breaking,
    tearing, or abrading by a rotary tool.

    75+,    for assembling a rigid container combined with cutting, breaking,
    tearing, or abrading by a reciprocatory tool.

    84+,    for making a rigid container including assembly of distinct members.

    210+,   for making a pliable container including assembly of distinct
    members.

    297+,   for making a tube including assembly of distinct members.

    343+,   for assembling of distinct members combined with cutting, breaking,
    tearing, or abrading.

    374+,   for assembling of distinct members, one of which is a sheet or web,
    generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 428+ for methods of and subclasses 700+
    for apparatus for assembling or disassembling.  Class 29 is the generic
    home for assembling.  See the search notes under subclasses 428 and 700 for
    other locations of specific types of assembling.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, for
    uniting a first and a second web by adhesive bonding without assembling or
    bending in forming an article of commerce or with or without assembling or
    bending in forming united stock material.  See the line notes under the
    definition of this class.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 418+ for a conveyor for
    establishing and moving a group of items; and subclass 644 for means for
    conveying a signature.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, for a device specific to
    driving a fastener into a sheet or web; or into a stack or sheets or webs,
    with no recognition of more than one sheet or web.


CLS 493/335
TXT Indeterminate length work:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 334 wherein the workpiece is a web of
    such length that the apparatus does not engage (recognize) both the leading
    end and the trailing end of the workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  A spool or coil of work is considered to be "indeterminate
    length".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for an operation of this class utilizing a first and second sensor,
    one of which is a surface contacting sensor for indeterminate length work.

    24+,    for an operation of this class including the use of a sensor
    responsive to indeterminate length work.

    97,     for making a rigid container including assembling therewith a liner
    permanently secured to a wall of the container with use of an indeterminate
    length work supply.

    193+,   for making a pliable container including heat sealing of
    indeterminate length work.

    380+,   for assembling of this class wherein one workpiece is of
    indeterminate length.

    404,    for folding an indeterminate length workpiece by a roller.

    410+,   for overfolding or unfolding an indeterminate length workpiece.


CLS 493/336
TXT By work contacting applicator:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 331 wherein the flowable material is
    applied to the surface of the sheet or web workpiece by means which
    transfers the flowable material thereto by direct engagement therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128,    for making a rigid container including the application of adhesive.


CLS 493/337
TXT Comprising roller:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 336 wherein the means in engagement with
    the workpiece for transfer of the flowable material thereto turns about a
    central axis and has a circular peripheral surface that rollingly engages
    the workpiece.


CLS 493/338
TXT WITH EXTRUDING, DRAWING, OR ATTENUATING:

    Method or apparatus under the class definition combined with forcing
    material through an orifice or with pulling, pushing, or stretching
    material to change the thickness of the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85,     for making a rigid container by assembling combined with extruding,
    drawing, or attenuating.

    211,    for making a pliable container including assembling and extruding,
    drawing, or attenuating.

    293,    for tube making combined with extruding, drawing, or attenuating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    for a method of forming material by forcing it through an orifice or
    wherein there is thinning or thickening flow of the material.  See the line
    note under the definition of this class (493).

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus, for
    apparatus for forming material by forcing it through an orifice or wherein
    there is thinning or thickening flow of work material.  See the line note
    under the definition of this class (493).


CLS 493/339
TXT Method:

    Process under subclass 338.


CLS 493/340
TXT WITH CUTTING, BREAKING, TEARING, OR ABRADING:

    Method or apparatus under the class definition combined with piercing into
    a workpiece with a sharp tool; forcibly ripping a portion of a workpiece by
    bending or tensile stress or, engaging a workpiece by a crystalline tool to
    remove surface portions from that workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading combined with an
    operation of this class including use of work or product control means.

    56+,    for making a rigid container combined with cutting, breaking,
    tearing, or abrading.

    194+,   for making a pliable container including heat sealing combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading of indeterminate length work.

    199+,   for making a pliable container including heat sealing combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading.

    223+,   for making a pliable container including assembling and cutting,
    breaking, tearing, or abrading.

    227+,   for making a pliable container combined with cutting, breaking,
    tearing, or abrading.

    287+,   for making a tube combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or
    abrading.

    324,    for an operation of this class combined with printing or
    photographic reproduction and with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, for cutting by use of a sharp cutting tool, generally,
    including severing.

    225,    Severing by Tearing or Breaking, for subdividing by the application
    of bending or tautening forces.

    451,    Abrading, for engaging a workpiece by a crystalline tool to remove
    surface portions from the workpiece.


CLS 493/341
TXT Including application of heat:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 340 including raising the thermal level
    of the workpiece, product, or environment.


CLS 493/342
TXT With scrap material separation or removal:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 340 combined with carrying away any
    unused or waste portions of work material after formation of a product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     for manufacture of a rigid container with scrap material separation
    or removal and with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading.

    83,     for manufacture of a rigid container with scrap material separation
    or removal, but without cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading.

    373,    for manufacture of an article from a sheet or web with scrap
    material separation or removal, generally.


CLS 493/343
TXT Including assembling or disassembling of distinct members:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 340 (a) including juxtaposing or
    fastening together a sheet or web workpiece and another workpiece; or (b)
    including disengaging a sheet or web workpiece and another workpiece to
    which it had previously been fastened.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for an operation of this class including assembling or coating and
    the use of control means responsive to that assembling or coating.

    47+,    for assembling dissimilar filter materials in making a cigarette
    filter.

    67+,    for assembling a rigid container combined with cutting, breaking,
    tearing, or abrading by a rotary tool.

    75+,    for assembling a rigid container combined with cutting, breaking,
    tearing, or abrading by a reciprocatory tool.

    84+,    for making a rigid container including assembly of distinct members.

    210+,   for making a pliable container including assembly of distinct
    members.

    297+,   for making a tube including assembly of distinct members.

    334+,   for assembly of distinct members combined with adhesive coating.

    374+,   for assembling of distinct members, one of which is a sheet or web,
    generally.


CLS 493/344
TXT Comprising bringing two members together:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 343 including juxtaposing a first and a
    second workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76,     for making a rigid container including bringing two members
    together combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading by a
    raciprocatory tool.

    379,    for bringing two members together under this class definition,
    generally.


CLS 493/345
TXT Indeterminate length member:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 344 wherein at the time of being brought
    into juxtaposed relationship at least one of the workpieces is of such
    length that no more than one end is recognized (engaged).

    (1)     Note.  A spool or coil of work is considered to be "indeterminate
    length".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for an operation of this class including use of a sensor responsive
    to indeterminate length work.

    77+,    for making a rigid container including bringing an indeterminate
    length member together with another member combined with cutting, breaking,
    tearing, or abrading by a reciprocatory tool.

    97,     for making a rigid container including assembly with an
    indeterminate length workpiece.

    380+,   for bringing an indeterminate length member together with another
    member, generally, under the definition of this class.

    410+,   for refolding or unfolding an indeterminate length workpiece.


CLS 493/346
TXT Plural indeterminate length members:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 345 wherein at the time of being brought
    into juxtaposed relationship at least two of the workpieces are of such
    that no more than one end thereof is recognized (engaged).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    381,    for juxtaposing plural indeterminate length members, generally.


CLS 493/347
TXT Member comprising adhesive backed tape:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 345 wherein at the time of being brought
    into juxtaposed relationship the workpiece having no more than one
    recognized end has a previously applied coating of material adapted to
    chemically unite therewith and bond that workpiece to another member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     for making a rigid container including application of an adhesive
    backed tape combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading by a
    reciprocatory tool.

    116+,   for making a rigid container, including securing two distinct
    members together using adhesive backed tape.

    382,    for application of an adhesive backed tape to another member.


CLS 493/348
TXT Including use of work supply hopper:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 345 including the use of a compartment
    to hold a substantial number of workpieces as a ready supply for assembly
    with other workpieces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for assembling of distinct members in the making of a rigid
    container including use of a work supply hopper.


CLS 493/349
TXT And securing by interfitting:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 344 including juxtaposing a plurality of
    workpiece wherein at least one of the workpiece is pliable and is caused to
    conform to and generally encase another workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    386+,   for wrapping one workpiece about another, generally.


CLS 493/350
TXT And securing by interfitting:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 344 wherein fastening is accomplished by
    positioning a portion of a workpiece under another portion of a workpiece
    to restrict movement thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    390,    for interfitting to secure distinct workpieces, generally.


CLS 493/351
TXT Work penetrating member:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 350 wherein a workpiece includes a sharp
    edge and is intended to fasten by the act of that edge piercing into the
    other workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  Penetration of this subclass is for the purpose of bringing
    about assembly and not for the purpose of forming an opening in the pierced
    workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118+,   for making a rigid container including use of a material
    penetrating fastening member.

    384+,   for using a work penetrating fastening member to secure other
    members together.

    392,    for assembling by causing one member to pierce into another to
    which it is assembled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, for application of a nail or
    staple to work even if the work is a sheet or web, if there is not other
    working (e.g., bending) of the sheet or web and there is no recognition of
    more than one sheet or web.


CLS 493/352
TXT And with bending:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 340 including stressing a sheet or web
    workpiece beyond its elastic limit so that when that stress is released the
    sheet or web workpiece will not return to its original shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    394+,   for bending a sheet or web, generally.


CLS 493/353
TXT By use of composite cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading tool and
    folding tool:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 352 including means to stress the
    workpiece beyond its elastic limit along a predetermined line to form a
    permanent crease and including means to pierce, or engage with a
    crystalline tool, wherein the two means are an integral unit having no
    relative movement of the functioning surfaces when performing either
    operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for making a rigid container including folding and assembling
    combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading by a rotary tool.

    69+,    for making a rigid container including folding combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading by a rotary tool.

    79+,    for making a rigid container including folding combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading by a reciprocatory tool.

    151,    for making a rigid container including coating with an adhesive and
    folding.

    162+,   for making a rigid container including folding.

    231+,   for making a pliable container including folding combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading.

    243+,   for making a pliable container including folding.

    356+,   for folding combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading,
    generally.

    405+,   for folding, generally, of a sheet or web.


CLS 493/354
TXT By use of composite cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading tool and
    form-scoring or crushing tool:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 352 including means to stress the
    workpiece beyond its elastic limit serving to press a line into a surface
    of the workpiece or serving to form a permanent crease in the work along a
    previously undetermined line and including means to pierce, rip, or engage
    with a crystalline tool, wherein the two means are an integral unit having
    no relative movement of the functioning surfaces when performing either
    operation.


CLS 493/355
TXT Form-scoring:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 352 comprising (a) pressing a line in
    one surface of a workpiece and thereby raising a corresponding line on the
    opposite surface; or, (b) pressing a line in one surface of a workpiece
    with no significant change in the opposite surface configuration, wherein
    the material of the workpiece under that line becomes more compacted, such
    that there is not thinning flow of the workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59+,    for making a rigid container with cutting and scoring.

    160+,   for making a rigid container including scoring.

    228+,   for making a pliable container combined with cutting, breaking,
    tearing, or abrading and scoring.

    240+,   for making a pliable container including scoring.

    396+,   for scoring a sheet or web, generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 879+ for scoring by a sharp cutting edge,
    wherein there is no significant deformation of the work.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    for the method of shaping sheet or web work by a thinning flow of the work,
    as in embossing.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus, for
    means to shape sheet or web work by a thinning flow of the work, as in
    embossing.


CLS 493/356
TXT Folding:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 352 comprising bendingly stressing a
    sheet or web workpiece beyond its elastic limit along a line to form a
    permanent crease.

    (1)     Note.  Folding of cloth is included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for making a rigid container including folding and assembling
    combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading by a rotary tool.

    69+,    for making a rigid container including folding combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading by a rotary tool.

    79+,    for making a rigid container including folding combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading by a reciprocatory tool.

    151,    for making a rigid container including coating with an adhesive and
    folding.

    162+,   for making a rigid container including folding.

    231+,   for making a pliable container including folding combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading.

    243+,   for making a pliable container including folding.

    353,    for folding combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading
    by a composite tool.

    405+,   for folding, generally, of a sheet or web.


CLS 493/357
TXT With means to advance work or product:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 356 combined with use of means to
    transport a workpiece progressively from a remote location toward or
    through a treating station or to transport a formed article away form a
    treating station.

    (1)     Note.  Movement of a workpiece toward a working tool to effect a
    treating operation is considered to be work infeed rather than work
    advancing and is therefor not the concept of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71+,    for making a rigid container including folding combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading by a rotary tool and with means to
    advance work.

    81,     for making a rigid container including folding combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading by a reciprocatory tool and with
    means to advance work.

    125,    for making a rigid container including securing work surfaces, use
    of a supply hopper, use of a suction-type handling means and use of a
    conveyor to advance work to a folder.

    142+,   for making a rigid container including securing work surfaces with
    simultaneous pressing and advancing of the work while adhesive dries or
    sets.

    147,    for making a rigid container including securing work surfaces and
    advancing the work or product.

    161,    for making a rigid container including scoring and continuously
    advancing the work with the scoring tool moving with the work during
    operation thereof.

    180+,   for making a rigid container including folding and advancing of the
    work or product.

    196+,   for making a pliable container with heat sealing and cutting,
    breaking, tearing, or abrading and advancing of work or product.

    201+,   for making a pliable container with cutting, breaking tearing, or
    abrading and advancing of work or product.

    302,    for making a tube and advancing the formed tube along its axis.

    357+,   for folding combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading
    with means to advance the work or product.

    400+,   for scoring with work or product advancing or positioning.

    416+,   for folding including work or product advancing.


CLS 493/358
TXT Continuous advance with endless belt folder surface moving with work:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 357 wherein the crease in the workpiece
    is formed by a surface that is, or is part of, an integral or concatenated
    band and is trained about a plurality of separated, noncoaxial pulleys or
    sprockets, and wherein the workpiece forming surface has a component of
    movement with the moving workpiece.


CLS 493/359
TXT Continuous advance with rotary folder surface moving with work:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 357 wherein the crease in the workpiece
    is formed by a surface of a member turning more than 360_ about an axis,
    which surface has a component of movement with the moving workpiece.


CLS 493/360
TXT Folding by roller:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 357 wherein the crease forming surface
    of the member turning about an axis is circular and extends all the way
    about that axis at the same distance therefrom and wherein the surface
    engages the workpiece in the manner of a wheel with no relative movement
    between the workpiece and the surface of the member.


CLS 493/361
TXT Plural cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading stations:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 340 including a first location for
    piercing, ripping, or engaging with a crystalline tool and including a
    second location for piercing, ripping, or engaging with a crystalline tool.


CLS 493/362
TXT With advancing work from first to second station:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 361 wherein a workpiece is treated at
    the first location and then progressively moved to the second location.


CLS 493/363
TXT Making plural, separate cuts by distinct cutting edges:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 340 including piercing a workpiece at a
    selected location in a work surface and piercing a workpiece at a second
    selected location in a work surface wherein both piercing actions are
    preformed at a single work station.


CLS 493/364
TXT Engaging work on opposite sides:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 363 including means for piercing a sheet
    or web workpiece on one planar surface and including means for piercing the
    opposing planar surface of that sheet or web.


CLS 493/365
TXT Rotary cutter:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 364 wherein at least one of the piercing
    actions is done by a sharp edge of a tool turning about an axis more than
    360_.


CLS 493/366
TXT By relatively adjustable cutting edges or cutting and scoring edges:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 363 wherein piercing is effected by a
    first sharp edge and by a second relatively repositionable sharp edge; or
    wherein piercing is effected by a first edge that is sharp and a surface
    groove is formed by a second relatively repositionable edge.


CLS 493/367
TXT On rotary tool support:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 366 wherein the first and second sharp
    edges are mounted on a carrier member turning about an axis more than 360_
    during the piercing action.


CLS 493/368
TXT Adjustable circumferentially:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 367 wherein a piercing edge and a
    surface grooving edge or another piercing edge are relatively
    repositionable about the carrier.


CLS 493/369
TXT Of moving work:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 340 wherein the workpiece is in motion
    during piercing, ripping, or engaging with a crystalline tool.


CLS 493/370
TXT By rotary tool:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 340 wherein piercing, ripping, or
    engaging by a crystalline tool is effected by a member in engagement with
    the workpiece and rotating more than 360_ about an axis.


CLS 493/371
TXT With flexibly mounted cutter:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 370 including use of a piercing edge
    mounted on a member turning more than 360_ about an axis, which edge is
    part of a member adapted to yield within its elastic limit to allow limited
    movement of the piercing edge with respect to the remainder of the rotary
    member.


CLS 493/372
TXT By reciprocatory tool:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 340 wherein piercing, ripping, or
    engaging by a crystalline tool is effected by a member in engagement with
    the workpiece and moving to-and-from along a straight line or about a fixed
    pivot.


CLS 493/373
TXT WITH SCRAP MATERIAL SEPARATION OR REMOVAL:

    Method or apparatus under the class definition combined with segregating or
    carrying away an unused or waste portion of a workpiece or product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     for scrap removal combined with cutting, severing, or abrading in
    the manufacture of a rigid container.

    83,     for scrap removal in the manufacture of a rigid container,
    generally.

    342,    for manufacture of a product from a sheet or web combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading and with scrap removal.


CLS 493/374
TXT ASSEMBLING OR DISASSEMBLING OF DISTINCT MEMBERS:

    Method or apparatus under the class definition (a) including juxtaposing or
    fastening together a sheet or web workpiece and another workpiece; or, (b)
    including disengaging a sheet or web workpiece from another workpiece to
    which it had previously been fastened.

    (1)     Note.  The workpieces of this subclass are totally separate and
    distinct.  A first and a second surface of a workpiece are not considered
    to be separate workpieces, no matter how far spaced from each other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for an operation of this class assembling or coating and the use of
    control means responsive to that assembling or coating.

    47+,    for assembling dissimilar filter materials in making a cigarette
    filter.

    67+,    for assembling a rigid container combined with cutting, breaking,
    tearing, or abrading by a rotary tool.

    75+,    for assembling a rigid container combined with cutting, breaking,
    tearing, or abrading by a reciprocatory tool.

    84+,    for making a rigid container including assembly of distinct members.

    210+,   for making a pliable container including assembly of distinct
    members.

    297+,   for making a tube including assembly of distinct members.

    334+,   for assembling of distinct members combined with adhesive coating.

    343+,   for assembling of distinct members combined with cutting, breaking,
    tearing, or abrading.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 428+ for methods of and subclasses 700+
    for apparatus for assembling or disassembling.  Class 29 is the generic
    home for assembling.  See the search notes under subclasses 428 and 700 for
    other locations of specific types of assembling.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, for
    uniting a first and a second web by adhesive bonding without assembling or
    bending in forming united stock material.  See the line notes under the
    definition of this class.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 418+ for a conveyor for
    establishing and moving a group of items; and subclass 644 for means for
    conveying a signature.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, for a device specific to
    driving a fastener into a sheet or web; or into a stack of sheets or webs,
    with no recognition of more than one sheet or web.


CLS 493/375
TXT Of tag or label to tether or to article:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 374 wherein one of the workpieces is
    intended to serve to designate a characteristic of the product and wherein
    the other workpiece is either a member to extend from the first workpiece
    to attach that workpiece to a third workpiece or is the workpiece to which
    the first workpiece is attached.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, for
    attaching a label to an article or to stock material by adhesive bonding.
    Also see the line note under the definition of this class (493) pointing
    out that applying a label by adhesive bonding is proper for Class 156, even
    though an article of commerce is produced.


CLS 493/376
TXT By passing tether through tag or label and article in single stroke:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 375 wherein the first, second, and third
    workpieces are positioned relative to one another by causing the second or
    extending workpiece to move through an opening, which it may form, in the
    first workpiece and through an opening, which it may form in the third
    workpiece during a single movement.

    (1)     Note.  The piercing of this workpiece is intended to enable an
    assembling, rather than piercing to form an opening in a workpiece.  Such a
    piercing operation is indistinguishable from one in which textile fibers
    are separated to enable passage of a tether and therefor has been placed in
    this subclass rather than the subclass of cutting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    340+,   for assembling combined with intentional piercing.


CLS 493/377
TXT Including tear strip:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 374 wherein one of the workpieces is
    intended to serve to form a part of an impassable wall and is further
    intended to be ruptured to provide access through the wall or is further
    intended to serve to rupture the wall of another workpiece to which it is
    attached.


CLS 493/378
TXT Including cutting or tearing edge:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 374 wherein one of the workpieces is
    sharp and is intended to serve to sever or tear a sheet or web after
    formation of a desired article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86,     for making a rigid container including assembling therewith a tear
    strip.


CLS 493/379
TXT Comprising bringing two members together:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 374 including juxtaposing a first and a
    second workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76,     for making a rigid container including bringing two members
    together combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading by a
    reciprocatory tool.

    344,    for bringing two members together combined with cutting, breaking,
    tearing, or abrading.


CLS 493/380
TXT Indeterminate length member:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 379 wherein at the time of being brought
    into juxtaposed relationship at least one of the workpieces is of such
    length that no more than one end is recognized (engaged).

    (1)     Note.  A spool or coil of work is considered to be "indeterminate
    length".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for an operation of this class including use of a sensor responsive
    to indeterminate length work.

    77+,    for making a rigid container including bringing an indeterminate
    length member together with another member combined with cutting, breaking,
    tearing, or abrading by a reciprocatory tool.

    97,     for making a rigid container including assembly with an
    indeterminate length workpiece.

    345+,   for bringing an indeterminate length workpiece together with
    another member combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading.

    410+,   for refolding or unfolding an indeterminate length workpiece.


CLS 493/381
TXT Plural indeterminate length members:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 380 wherein at the time of being brought
    into juxtaposed relationship at least two of the workpieces are of such
    that no more than one end thereof is recognized (engaged).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    346,    for cutting combined with juxtaposing plural indeterminate length
    members.


CLS 493/382
TXT Member comprising adhesive backed tape:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 380 wherein at the time of being brought
    into juxtaposed relationship the workpiece having no more than one
    recognized end has a previously applied coating of material adapted to
    chemically unite therewith and bond that workpiece to another member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     for making a rigid container including application of an adhesive
    backed tape combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading by a
    reciprocatory tool.

    116+,   for making a rigid container, including securing two distinct
    members together using adhesive backed tape.

    347,    for application of an adhesive backed tape to another member
    combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading.

    382,    for application of an adhesive backed tape to another member.


CLS 493/383
TXT Including distinct securing member:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 379 wherein one of the workpieces is
    intended to fasten.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115+,   for making a rigid container including use of a distinct securing
    member.


CLS 493/384
TXT Material penetrating member:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 383 wherein the fastener includes a
    sharp edge and is intended to fasten by the act of that edge piercing into
    the other workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  Penetration of this subclass is for the purpose of bringing
    about assembly and not for the purpose of forming an opening in the pierced
    workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118+,   for making a rigid container including use of a material
    penetrating fastening member.

    351,    for assembling by causing one member to pierce into another to
    which it is assembled, combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or
    abrading.

    384+,   for using a work penetrating fastening member to secure other
    members together.

    392,    for assembling by causing one member to pierce into another to
    which it is assembled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, for application of a nail or
    staple to work even if the work is a sheet or web, if there is no other
    working (e.g., bending) of the sheet or web and there is no recognition of
    more than one sheet or web.


CLS 493/385
TXT Bifurcated securing member:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 384 wherein the fastener includes two
    sharp edges and is intended to fasten by the act of both edges piercing
    into the other workpiece at the same time.


CLS 493/386
TXT Wrapping one member about another member:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 379 including juxtaposing a plurality of
    workpiece wherein at least one of the workpiece is pliable and is caused to
    conform to and generally encase another workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    349,    for cutting combined with wrapping one workpiece about another.

    386+,   for wrapping one workpiece about another, generally.


CLS 493/387
TXT Including convex or recessed surface (e.g, eyeglass case):

    Method or apparatus under subclass 386 wherein the workpiece being
    conformed to is generally rigid and three-dimensionally bulged or caved in
    so that the pliable member must be caused to conform to that shape.


CLS 493/388
TXT By use of rotary work support:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 386 including use of a structure to
    support the workpiece being conformed to which structure is adapted to turn
    about an axis more than 360_.


CLS 493/389
TXT By use of reciprocatory work support:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 386 including use of a structure to
    support the workpiece being conformed to, which structure is adapted to
    move to-and-fro about an axis or in a straight line.


CLS 493/390
TXT And securing by interfitting:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 379 wherein fastening is accomplished by
    positioning a portion of a workpiece under another portion of a workpiece
    to restrict movement thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    350+,   for cutting combined with interfitting to secure distinct members.


CLS 493/391
TXT Assembling container partitions:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 390 wherein at least one of the
    workpieces is intended to serve to divide the interior of a receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90+,    for making a rigid container combined with placing partitions
    therein.

    912,    for an art digest of related operations.


CLS 493/392
TXT Work penetrating member:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 390 wherein a workpiece includes a sharp
    edge and is intended to fasten by the act of that edge piercing into the
    other workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  Penetration of this subclass is for the purpose of bringing
    about an assembly and not for the purpose for forming an opening in the
    pierced workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118+,   for making a rigid container including use of a material
    penetrating fastening member.

    351,    for assembling by causing one member to pierce into another to
    which it is assembled, combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or
    abrading.

    384+,   for using a work penetrating fastening member to secure other
    members together.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, for application of a nail or
    staple to work even if the work is a sheet or web, if there is no other
    working (e.g., bending) of the sheet or web and there is no recognition of
    more than one sheet or web.


CLS 493/393
TXT Securing:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 374 including fastening a first
    workpiece to a second workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114+,   for securing two workpieces together in the formation of a rigid
    container.

    121+,   for securing two surfaces of the same workpiece together in the
    formation of a rigid container.

    394,    for securing two surfaces of the same sheet or web workpiece
    together in the formation of a product, generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 428+ for the process of and subclasses
    700+ for apparatus for the general application of a fastener (e.g., a paper
    clip) to work, even if the work is a sheet or web, if there is no other
    working (e.g., bending) of the sheet or web.  See the search note to Class
    29 under the definition of this class.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, for
    securing two workpieces together by adhesive bonding, generally; for
    adhesive bonding combined with assembling, bending, or flexing in the
    formation of a web of stock material; and for assembling and adhesively
    bonding an article with a postage stamp or a label.  See the line note to
    Class 156 under the definition of this class.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, for application of a nail or
    staple to work even if the work is a sheet or web if there is no other
    working (e.g., bending) of the sheet or web and no recognition of more than
    one sheet or web.


CLS 493/394
TXT SECURING:

    Method or apparatus under the class definition including fastening a
    portion of a workpiece to another portion of that workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114+,   for securing two workpieces together in the formation of a rigid
    container.

    121+,   for making a rigid container including securing a first and a
    second surface of a single workpiece together.

    393,    for assembling of two workpieces by securing, generally.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 428+ for the process of and subclasses
    700+ for apparatus for the general application of a fastener (e.g., a paper
    clip) to work, even if the work is a sheet or web, if there is no other
    working of the sheet or web and no recognition of more than one sheet or
    web.  See the search note Class 29 under the definition of this class.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, for
    securing two workpieces together by adhesive bonding generally; for
    adhesive bonding combined with assembling, bending, or flexing in the
    formation of a web or stock material; and for assembling and adhesively
    bonding an article with a postage stamp or a label.  See the search note to
    Class 156 under the definition of this class.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, for application of a nail or
    staple to work even if the work is a sheet or web, if there is no other
    working of the sheet or web and no recognition of more than one sheet or
    web.


CLS 493/395
TXT BENDING:

    Method or apparatus under the class definition including stressing a
    workpiece beyond its elastic limit, without substantial thinning flow, so
    that when that stress is released the workpiece will not return to its
    original shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    352,    for bending of a sheet or web combined with cutting, breaking,
    tearing, or abrading.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    for a step of bending a sheet or web with thinning or thickening in a flow.


CLS 493/396
TXT Form-scoring:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 395 comprising (a) pressing a line in
    one surface of a workpiece and thereby raising a corresponding line on the
    opposite surface; or, (b) pressing a line in one surface of a workpiece
    with no significant change in the opposite surface configuration, wherein
    the material of the workpiece under that line becomes more compacted, such
    that there is no thinning flow of the workpiece.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59+,    for making a rigid container with cutting and form-scoring.

    160+,   for making a rigid container including form-scoring.

    228+,   for making a pliable container combined with cutting, breaking,
    tearing, or abrading and form-scoring.

    240+,   for making a pliable container including form-scoring.

    355,    for form-scoring combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or
    abrading.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 879+ for scoring by a sharp cutting edge,
    wherein there is no significant deformation of the work.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    for the method of shaping sheet or web work by a thinning flow of the work,
    as in embossing.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus, for
    means to shape sheet or web work by a thinning flow of the work, as in
    embossing.


CLS 493/397
TXT With folding:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 396 combined with stressing the sheet or
    web beyond its elastic limit along a line to form a crease.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151,    for making a rigid container including coating with an adhesive and
    folding.

    162+,   for making a rigid container including folding.

    231+,   for making a pliable container including folding combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading.

    243+,   for making a pliable container including folding.

    353+,   for folding combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading
    by use of a composite tool.

    356,    for folding combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading,
    generally.

    405+,   for folding, generally, of a sheet or web.


CLS 493/398
TXT Plural work stations:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 397 including a first location at which
    the sheet or web is stressed beyond its elastic limit and a second location
    to which or from which the sheet or web is transferred for other
    modification.


CLS 493/399
TXT Folding along score line:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 398 wherein a line is first pressed into
    the sheet or web and subsequently a crease is formed along that line.


CLS 493/400
TXT With means to advance or position work or product:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 396 combined with use of means to
    transport a web workpiece progressively from a remote location toward or
    through a treating station or to transport an article in which a line has
    been pressed away from a treating station or including means to reorient
    the workpiece or the produced article.

    (1)     Note.  Movement of a workpiece toward a working tool to effect a
    treating operation is considered to be work infeed rather than work
    advancing and is therefor not the concept of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71+,    for making a rigid container including folding combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading by a rotary tool and with means to
    advance work.

    81,     for making a rigid container including folding combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading by a reciprocatory tool and with
    means to advance work.

    125,    for making a rigid container including securing work surfaces, use
    of a supply hopper, use of a suction-type handling means and use of a
    conveyor to advance work to a folder.

    142+,   for making a rigid container including securing work surfaces with
    simultaneous pressing and advancing of the work while adhesive dries or
    sets.

    147,    for making a rigid container including securing work surfaces and
    advancing the work or product.

    161,    for making a rigid container including scoring and continuously
    advancing the work with the scoring tool moving with the work during
    operation thereof.

    180+,   for making a rigid container including folding and advancing of the
    work or product.

    196+,   for making a pliable container with heat sealing and cutting,
    breaking, tearing, or abrading and advancing of work or product.

    201+,   for making a pliable container with cutting, breaking, tearing, or
    abrading and advancing of work or product.

    302,    for making a tube and advancing the formed tube along its axis.

    357+,   for folding combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading
    with means to advance the work or product.

    416+,   for folding including work or product advancing.


CLS 493/401
TXT Continuous advance:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 400 wherein the sheet or web is
    transferred without stopping toward, through or away from the location at
    which it is stressed beyond its elastic limit.


CLS 493/402
TXT By rotary tool having surfaces moving with work:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 401 wherein the sheet or web transfer is
    effected by engagement of a surface of a rigid member turning about a fixed
    axis, which surface is intended to engage and cause the sheet or web to
    move therewith through the part of the movement of the surface.


CLS 493/403
TXT Roller:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 402 wherein the surface comprises the
    periphery of a rigid circular member turning about a fixed axis passing
    through its center, which surface is adapted to rollingly engage and
    transfer the sheet or web.


CLS 493/404
TXT Form-scoring along intersecting lines:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 396 comprising pressing a first line
    into the work surface and pressing a second line into the work surface such
    that the first and second lines meet or cross.


CLS 493/405
TXT Folding:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 395 comprising bendingly stressing a
    sheet or web workpiece beyond its elastic limit along a line to form a
    permanent crease.

    (1)     Note.  Folding of cloth is included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for making a rigid container including folding and assembling
    combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading by a rotary tool.

    69+,    for making a rigid container including folding combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading by a rotary tool.

    79+,    for making a rigid container including folding combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading by a reciprocatory tool.

    151,    for making a rigid container including coating with an adhesive and
    folding.

    162+,   for making a rigid container including folding.

    231+,   for making a pliable container including folding combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading.

    243+,   for making a pliable container including folding.

    353,    for folding combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading
    by a composite tool.

    356+,   for folding combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading,
    generally.


CLS 493/406
TXT And tautening or smoothing:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 405 including application of tensile
    force on the sheet or web workpiece or including treatment to cause the
    sheet or web to be more truly planar.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    26,     Textiles:  Cloth Finishing, subclasses 71+ for smoothing a running
    length of textile material without folding.

    38,     Textiles:  Ironing or Smoothing, subclasses 102+, especially
    subclasses 102.1+ for tautening to smooth a single sheet.


CLS 493/407
TXT With crushing or crumpling:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 405 comprising bendingly stressing a
    sheet or web workpiece beyond its elastic limit to form a permanent crease
    and further stressing a sheet or web workpiece beyond its elastic limit but
    not along any predetermined line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185,    for crushing or crumpling of sheet or web material in the formation
    of a rigid container.

    464,    for crushing or crumpling in forming a product from a sheet or web,
    generally.


CLS 493/408
TXT Overfolding:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 405 comprising stressing the workpiece
    along the desired crease line further than desired so that upon release of
    the stress the workpiece will return by internal stress (or memory) to the
    desired position.


CLS 493/409
TXT Refolding or unfolding:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 405 comprising stressing the workpiece
    along a crease line formed by a previous operation (a) to again crease the
    workpiece, or (b) to reposition the portions of the workpiece extending
    away from the crease line to lie in a common plane.


CLS 493/410
TXT Of indeterminate length work:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 409 wherein at the time the crease line
    is formed the workpiece is a web of such length that no more than one end
    thereof is recognized (engaged).

    (1)     Note.  A spool or coil of work is considered to be "indeterminate
    length".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24+,    for an operation of this class including use of a sensor responsive
    to indeterminate length work.

    77+,    for making a rigid container including bringing an indeterminate
    length member together with another member combined with cutting, breaking,
    tearing, or abrading by a reciprocatory tool.

    97+,    for making a rigid container including assembly with an
    indeterminate length workpiece.

    345+,   for bringing an indeterminate length workpiece together with
    another member combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading.

    380+,   for assembling of this class wherein one workpiece is of
    indeterminate length.

    410+,   for refolding or unfolding an indeterminate length workpiece.


CLS 493/411
TXT Including use of swinging work guiding means (e.g., zigzag folding, etc.):

    Method or apparatus under subclass 410 including use of means to direct the
    web workpiece by physical engagement therewith, which means alternates
    to-and-from to direct a portion of the workpiece in a first direction and
    then to direct a succeeding portion of the workpiece in a second direction,
    such that succeeding portions of the workpiece are alternately laid one
    upon the other in a regular order by application of stress along previously
    made crease lines extending generally normal to the direction of workpiece
    movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    413+,   for folding other than along previously made crease lines using a
    swinging work guiding means.


CLS 493/412
TXT With elevating work support:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 410 including use of means to support
    the workpiece, which means is adapted to be raised as the workpiece is
    withdrawn therefrom.


CLS 493/413
TXT Folding of indeterminate length work by swinging work guiding means (e.g.,
    zigzag, folding, etc.):

    Method or apparatus under subclass 405 wherein at the time a crease line is
    formed the workpiece is a web of such length that no more than one end
    thereof is recognized (engaged) including use of means to direct the
    workpiece by physical engagement therewith, which means alternates
    to-and-fro to direct a portion of the workpiece in a first direction and
    then to direct a succeeding portion of the workpiece in a second direction,
    such that succeeding portions of the workpiece are alternately laid one
    upon the other in a regular order including the application of stress to
    form subsequent crease lines extending generally normal to the direction of
    workpiece movement.

    (1)     Note.  Stress may be applied to the workpiece of this subclass by
    the weight of work laid thereupon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    411,    for folding along previously made crease lines by a swinging work
    guide means.


CLS 493/414
TXT Swinging passage:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 413 wherein the directing means engages
    both planar surfaces of the web workpiece at all times to positively guide
    the first and succeeding portions of the workpiece.


CLS 493/415
TXT Defined by feed roll pair:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 414 wherein the element in engagement
    with each planar surface turns about an axis more than 360_ and rollingly
    engages the workpiece with a radially outwardly facing peripheral surface
    positioned in a circle about the axis.


CLS 493/416
TXT With means to advance work or product:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 405 combined with use of means to
    transport a workpiece progressively from a remote location toward or
    through a treating station or to transport a formed article away from a
    treating station.

    (1)     Note.  Movement of a workpiece toward a working tool to effect a
    treating operation is considered to be work infeed rather than work
    advancing and is therefor not the concept of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71+,    for making a rigid container including folding combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading by a rotary tool and with means to
    advance work.

    81,     for making a rigid container including folding combined with
    cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading by a reciprocating tool and with
    means to advance work.

    125,    for making a rigid container including securing work surfaces, use
    of a supply hopper, use of a suction-type handling means and use of a
    conveyor to advance work to a folder.

    142+,   for making a rigid container including securing work surfaces with
    simultaneous pressing and advancing of the work while adhesive dries or
    sets.

    147,    for making a rigid container including securing work surfaces and
    advancing the work or product.

    161,    for making a rigid container including scoring and continuously
    advancing the work with the scoring tool moving with the work during
    operation thereof.

    196+,   for making a pliable container with heat sealing and cutting,
    breaking, tearing, or abrading and advancing of the work or product.

    201+,   for making a pliable container with cutting, breaking, tearing, or
    abrading and advancing of the work or product.

    302,    for making a tube and advancing the formed tube along its axis.

    357+,   for folding combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading
    with means to advance the work or product.

    400+,   for scoring with work or product advancing or positioning.


CLS 493/417
TXT And provision to precisely align for folding:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 416 wherein the work transferring means
    is adjustable with respect to the crease line forming means so that the
    crease line will be formed in the workpiece in the exact desired location
    of the workpiece.


CLS 493/418
TXT Folding by direct application of vacuum or fluid:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 416 including (a) application of reduced
    pressure to certain portions of a sheet or web workpiece so that
    atmospheric pressure acting on an opposing portion thereof effects the
    stress to form a crease line in the workpiece; or, (b) application of
    increased pressure from a flowable medium to effect the stress to form a
    crease line in the workpiece.


CLS 493/419
TXT Folding by buckling:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 416 comprising application of
    compressive stress to the workpiece parallel to planar surfaces thereof to
    cause the workpiece to yield in columnar failure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249,    for making a pliable container including folding by buckling.


CLS 493/420
TXT Buckle chute folding:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 419 including a passageway along which
    the sheet or web workpiece is to slide, which passageway has a blocked end
    to be abutted by the moving sheet or web to create compressive force along
    the direction of movement of the workpiece so that the workpiece ends to
    bend transversely to the direction of movement, which passageway includes
    an opening in its bottom upstream from the blocked end, so that the
    workpiece bends back on itself as it falls down through the opening.


CLS 493/421
TXT Plural folding operations making multiple folds:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 420 including bendingly stressing a
    sheet or web workpiece beyond its elastic limit at a first crease line and
    bendingly stressing a sheet or web workpiece beyond its elastic limit at a
    second time or location to form a second crease line.


CLS 493/422
TXT Continuous advance with folder moving with work:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 416 including means to cause the
    workpiece to continue movement without stopping during the time the crease
    line is formed wherein the means to apply stress and form a crease line
    includes a work engaging surface that is also in motion so that during such
    application of stress the work engaging surface includes a component of
    movement with the movement of the workpiece.


CLS 493/423
TXT Folding by endless belt:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 422 wherein the work engaging crease
    forming surface is, or is part of, an integral or concatenated band and is
    trained about a plurality of separated, noncoaxial pulleys or sprockets.


CLS 493/424
TXT Rotary folder:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 422 wherein the work engaging surface
    forming a crease line in the workpiece turns more than 360_ about an axis.


CLS 493/425
TXT Having radial folding blade:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 424 wherein the work engaging surface is
    part of an extension and faces away from the axis about which it turns.


CLS 493/426
TXT Radially moving folding blade:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 425 wherein the extension not only turns
    about an axis but moves toward or away from that axis to effect the crease
    forming operation.


CLS 493/427
TXT Fold off-roll-type folder:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 426 wherein the member turning about an
    axis includes a circular peripheral surface on which a sheet or web
    workpiece is laid in conforming contact combined with an extension member
    adapted to rotate therewith and move outwardly from the axis to form a
    crease line in the workpiece and push at least the engaged portion of the
    workpiece away from the peripheral surface.


CLS 493/428
TXT And cooperating, registering cylinder:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 427 combined with another member turning
    about a second axis, which member includes a circular peripheral surface
    and including a workpiece receiving pocket, which other member is adapted
    to interfit with the first member so that as they turn about their
    respective axes the outwardly moving extension interfits with the pocket to
    effect formation of a crease line in a workpiece therebetween.


CLS 493/429
TXT Plural folding blades:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 428 including more than one outwardly
    moving crease forming extension.


CLS 493/430
TXT For zigzag folding:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 429 particularly adapted to forming
    regularly spaced, alternately turned crease lines transverse to a generally
    elongated sheet or web workpiece.

    (1)     Note.  The second outwardly moving extension may be a part of the
    second rotating member and would accordingly cooperate with a pocket in the
    first rotating member.


CLS 493/431
TXT Planetary blade:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 427 wherein the outwardly moving crease
    forming extension is supported to turn about a second axis which is on the
    member turning about the first axis.


CLS 493/432
TXT And cooperating, registering cylinder:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 425 combined with another member turning
    about a second axis which member includes a work receiving pocket adapted
    to interfit with the extension of the first member so that as the members
    turn about their respective axes the outwardly moving extension interfits
    with the pocket to effect formation of a crease line in a workpiece
    therebetween.


CLS 493/433
TXT For zigzag folding:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 432 particularly adapted to forming
    regularly spaced, alternately turned crease lines transverse to a generally
    elongated sheet or web workpiece.


CLS 493/434
TXT Folding by roller:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 424 wherein the crease forming surface
    of the member turning about an axis is circular and extends all the way
    about that axis at the same distance therefrom and wherein the surface
    engages the workpiece in a manner of a wheel with no relative movement
    between the workpiece and the surface of the member.


CLS 493/435
TXT Roller couple:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 434 including a second member turning
    about a second axis extending all the way about that axis at the same
    distance therefrom and wherein the surface engages the workpiece in the
    manner of a wheel with no relative movement therebetween; wherein the first
    and second members turning about their respective axes grippingly engage a
    single workpiece therebetween to cooperate and form a crease line.


CLS 493/436
TXT Continuous advance past folder:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 416 including means to cause the sheet
    or web workpiece to continue movement without stopping during the time the
    crease line if formed.


CLS 493/437
TXT Reciprocatory folder:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 436 wherein the means to effect the
    forming of the crease line moves to-and-fro in a straight line or about a
    fixed pivot during operation.


CLS 493/438
TXT Folding by passive reaction member:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 436 including utilizing the energy of a
    moving sheet or web workpiece by use of means to effect the formation of a
    crease line, which means is stationary during formation of the crease line.


CLS 493/439
TXT Folding indeterminate length work:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 438 wherein at the time the crease line
    is formed the workpiece is a web of such length that no more than one end
    thereof is recognized (engaged).

    (1)     Note.  A spool or coil of work is considered to be "indeterminate
    length".


CLS 493/440
TXT Plural folding actions:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 439 including forming a second crease
    line by a separate, distinct operation.


CLS 493/441
TXT Folding by endless belt:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 416 wherein the work engaging, crease
    forming surface is, or is part of an integral or concatenated band that is
    trained about a plurality of separated, noncoaxial pulleys or sprockets.


CLS 493/442
TXT Folding by roller:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 416 wherein the crease forming member
    turns about an axis and includes a circular surface extending equidistant
    about that axis and wherein the surface engages the workpiece in the manner
    of a wheel with no relative movement between the workpiece and the surface
    of the member.


CLS 493/443
TXT Roller passive reaction member:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 442 wherein the member turns about an
    axis that does not advance over the surface of the workpiece during
    operation and is not driven to rotate by means other than the work surface
    movement during operation.


CLS 493/444
TXT With reciprocatory folding knife:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 443 combined with a blade member adapted
    to move to-and-fro in a straight line or about a fixed axis to cooperate
    with the member turning about an axis to form a crease line in a workpiece.


CLS 493/445
TXT Reaction member comprising roller pair yieldably biased together:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 444 including the first member that
    turns about an axis and including a second member that turns about a second
    axis, which second member includes a circular surface extending equidistant
    about the second axis and is positioned such that the workpiece passes
    between the turning members in response to force exerted by the member that
    moves to-and-fro, which axes are yieldably urged toward each other.


CLS 493/446
TXT Folding by passive reaction member:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 416 utilizing the energy of a moving
    sheet or web workpiece by use of means to effect the formation of a crease
    line, which means is stationary during formation of the crease line.


CLS 493/447
TXT Including multiple reaction members each presenting one or more shaping
    edges:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 446 including first means having a
    workpiece engaging surface to effect formation of a crease line, which
    first means is stationary during formation of a crease line; and including
    a second means having a workpiece engaging surface to effect formation of a
    crease line, which second means is stationary during formation of a crease
    line.


CLS 493/448
TXT And provision to allow one reaction member to move relative to another
    (e.g., zigzag folding, etc.):

    Method or apparatus under subclass 447 including provision to permit one of
    the work engaging surface of the stationary crease forming means to move
    with respect to another work engaging surface of a stationary crease
    forming means during the forming operation.

    (1)     Note.  The movement of the stationary member is done in response to
    force exerted by the workpiece in being folded, not to effect the folding
    operation and is accordingly not considered to be conflicting terms.


CLS 493/449
TXT And cooperating plunger:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 446 combined with means to force the
    workpiece against the stationary member to form a crease line therein,
    which means is adapted to have the workpiece wrapped thereabout so that the
    workpiece is given shape conforming to the shape of the forcing means.


CLS 493/450
TXT By direct application of vacuum or fluid pressure:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 405 including (a) application of reduced
    pressure to certain portions of a sheet or web workpiece so that
    atmospheric pressure acting on an opposing portion thereof effects the
    stress to form a crease line in the workpiece; or, (b) application of
    increased pressure from a flowable medium to effect the stress to form a
    crease line in the workpiece.


CLS 493/451
TXT By plural relatively movable folding edges approaching work from same side
    (e.g., zigzag folding, etc.):

    Method or apparatus under subclass 405 wherein the stress is applied to
    form a crease line by a first member moving toward work surface from a
    given direction and stress is applied to form a crease line by a second
    member moving toward the same work surface from generally the same
    direction.


CLS 493/452
TXT Forming gable top:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 405 including formation of the upper
    portion of a receptacle having a single ridge created by a pair of
    diverging walls.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184,    for forming a rigid container including forming a gable top.


CLS 493/453
TXT Including folding end flap:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 405 including forming a crease line at
    the base of a protuberance extending from the margin of the sheet or web
    workpiece at the greatest rectilinear dimension thereof.


CLS 493/454
TXT By rotary member:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 405 including application of stress to
    form a crease line by a member turning about an axis more than 360_.


CLS 493/455
TXT By passive reaction member:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 405 utilizing the energy of a moving
    sheet or web workpiece by use of means to effect the formation of a crease
    line, which means is stationary during formation of the crease line.


CLS 493/456
TXT Including multiple shaping edges on reaction member:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 455 including means having a first
    workpiece engaging surface to effect formation of a crease line and having
    a second workpiece engaging surface to effect formation of a crease line.


CLS 493/457
TXT And cooperating reciprocatory folder:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 455 combined with means to cooperate
    with the stationary means to apply stress to form a crease line in the
    workpiece, which means moves to-and-fro in a straight line or about a fixed
    pivot.


CLS 493/458
TXT Sequential, diverse folds:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 405 comprising bendingly stressing a
    sheet or web workpiece beyond its elastic limit along a line to form a
    first permanent crease and subsequently bendingly stressing the sheet or
    web workpiece beyond its elastic limit along a line to form a second
    permanent crease, wherein the first and second creases are formed by
    nonidentical means.


CLS 493/459
TXT Pulling over an edge (e.g., curling, etc.):

    Method or apparatus under subclass 395 comprising the application of
    tensile forces to the workpiece and drawing that workpiece over a
    projecting member to put greater forces on the surface of the workpiece
    facing away from the projecting member than on the surface of the workpiece
    facing toward the projecting member to stress the workpiece beyond its
    elastic limit thereof.


CLS 493/460
TXT Deflecting:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 395 including movement of a sheet or web
    workpiece along a direction parallel to the planar surfaces thereof and
    engaging the sheet or web workpiece to divert sequentially presented work
    portions from the original direction to stress the sheet or web workpiece
    beyond its elastic limit thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    178,    for folding by deflecting in the formation of a rigid container.


CLS 493/461
TXT Of longitudinally moving work:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 460 wherein the workpiece is a sheet or
    web including a pair of planar surfaces of greater extent in one direction
    that in the other comprising moving the workpiece in the direction parallel
    to the greatest dimension to stress the sheet or web workpiece beyond the
    elastic limit thereof.


CLS 493/462
TXT To form convolute coil (e.g., paper "log", etc.):

    Method or apparatus under subclass 461 wherein subsequent portions of the
    workpiece are diverted about an axis to form convolutions that are wrapped
    one radially upon the other.


CLS 493/463
TXT Corrugating:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 395 comprising stressing a sheet or web
    workpiece beyond its elastic limit to cause it to assume the shape of an
    undulating series of arcuate waves.


CLS 493/464
TXT Crushing or crumpling:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 395 including stressing a sheet or web
    workpiece beyond its elastic limit and causing bending to occur but not
    along any predetermined line.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185,    for crushing or crumpling of sheet or web material in the formation
    of a rigid container.

    395+,   for corrugating without forming sharp fold lines.

    407,    for folding combined with crushing or crinkling.


CLS 493/465
TXT FLEXING:

    Method or apparatus under the class definition including moving one portion
    of a workpiece with respect to another portion of that workpiece in order
    to place the respective portions of the workpiece in a desired positional
    relationship.


CLS 493/466
TXT To present part of workpiece for securing to another part:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 465 wherein one portion of the workpiece
    is brought into positional relationship with another portion of the
    workpiece so that the two work portions may be attached one to the other.


CLS 493/467
TXT SURFACE TREATMENT:

    Method or apparatus under the class definition including a surface
    modification of a workpiece not penetrating deeply into the surface of the
    workpiece which modification is not provided for elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291+,   for tube making combined with surface treatment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing and General Cleaning, subclasses 209.1+ for
    removing foreign material by steel wool.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, for means to coat the surface of a sheet or web.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 341 for a method of applying water or other solvent to sheet or
    web work to polish the surface thereof.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, for a randomly manipulated
    means for coating a sheet or web.

    427,    Coating Processes, for the method of coating a sheet or web.

    451,    Abrading, for engaging a workpiece by a crystalline tool to remove
    surface portions from the workpiece.


CLS 493/468
TXT TOOL OR TOOL SUPPORT:

    Subcombinational apparatus under the class definition including means for
    engaging a workpiece to assemble, bend, flex, or treat; or including means
    for partaking of all the motion of such workpiece engaging means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    269,    Work Holders, subclasses 86+ for a work supporting member having
    relatively movable jaws; subclasses 289+ for a work underlying support,
    generally; and, subclasses 290+ for a work underlying support combined with
    a tool-couple element.


CLS 493/469
TXT Adapted to be magnetically manipulated:

    Apparatus under subclass 468 wherein the means for engaging the workpiece
    is particularly adapted to be moved when in engagement with the workpiece
    or when out of engagement with the workpiece by the direct urging of
    magnetic force.


CLS 493/470
TXT Adapted to be heated or cooled:

    Apparatus under subclass 468 wherein the means for engaging the workpiece
    is particularly adapted to be supplied with or to yield thermal energy.


CLS 493/471
TXT Rotary:

    Apparatus under subclass 468 wherein the means for engaging the workpiece
    is to be turned about an axis more than 360_ during operation.


CLS 493/472
TXT With ejector or stripper:

    Apparatus under subclass 468 combined with means to force foreign material
    out of a recess in or off the surface of the work engaging means.


CLS 493/473
TXT Plural tools or tool supports:

    Apparatus under subclass 468 including first and second means for engaging
    the workpiece to assemble, bend, flex, or treat; or including first and
    second means for partaking of all the motion of such workpiece engaging
    means, wherein the first and second means are relatively movable during
    operation.


CLS 493/474
TXT Expandable or collapsible:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 468 wherein the means for engaging the
    workpiece or the means partaking of all motion of such workpiece engaging
    means is, in each operation, enlarged or reduced in size to present its
    surfaces for workpiece engagement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    475,    for tool structure including multiple components, one being
    repositionable relative to the other.


CLS 493/475
TXT Adjustable:

    Apparatus under subclass 468 wherein the means for engaging the workpiece
    or the means partaking of all motion of such workpiece engaging means is
    made of multiple members at least one of which is respositionable relative
    to another.


CLS 493/476
TXT Folder:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 475 wherein the means for engaging the
    workpiece or the means partaking of all motion of such workpiece engaging
    means serves to form a crease line in the workpiece by causing the
    workpiece to conform to the shape of that work engaging means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    405+,   for apparatus including a folding tool combined with a reaction
    surface to cooperate with the folding tool in forming a crease line in a
    workpiece, and for the method of forming sheet or web work, generally.


CLS 493/477
TXT MACHINE FRAME:

    Method or apparatus under the class definition including structure relative
    to which a tool of this class moves during operation, which  structure is
    for supporting the weight of the tool or work or for counteracting the
    thrust of the tool, and maintaining orientational relationship of
    components of the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  The foundation structure upon which a machine is mounted
    (e.g., the floor of a building) is not considered a part of the machine,
    per se.


CLS 493/478
TXT Adjustable:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 477 wherein the structure is made of
    multiple members, at least one of which is positionable relative to another.


CLS 493/479
TXT Plural, simultaneous adjustments:

    Method or apparatus under subclass 478 wherein relative positioning of one
    member relative to another causes additional

    relative position of other members, corresponding to the first positioning.


CLS 493/480
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Method or apparatus under the class definition not provided for above.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS

    The following subclasses are collections of published disclosures
    pertaining to various specified aspects of the cutting art which aspects do
    not form appropriate bases for subclasses in the foregoing classification
    (i.e., subclasses superior hereto in the schedule), wherein original copies
    of patents are placed on the basis of proximate function of the apparatus.
    These subclasses assist a search based on remote function of the apparatus
    and may be further assistance to the searcher, either as a starting point
    in searching this class or as an indication of further related fields of
    search inside or outside the class.  Thus, there is here provided a second
    access for retrieval of a limited number of types of disclosures.

    (1)     Note.  Disclosures are placed in these subclasses for their value
    as references and as leads to appropriate main or secondary fields of
    search, without regard to their original classification or their claimed
    subject matter.

    (2)     Note.  The disclosures found in the following subclasses are
    examples, only, of the indicated subject matter, and in no instance do they
    represent the entire extent of the prior art.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180+,   for making a rigid container including folding and advancing of the
    work or product.

    196+,   for making a pliable container with heat sealing and cutting,
    breaking, tearing, or abrading and advancing of work or product.

    201+,   for making a pliable container with heat sealing and cutting,
    breaking, tearing, or abrading and advancing of work or product.

    357+,   for folding combined with cutting, breaking, tearing, or abrading
    with means to advance the work product.

    400+,   for scoring with work or product advancing or positioning.

    416+,   for folding including work or product advancing.


CLS 493/901
TXT RIGID CONTAINER:

    Operation involving the construction of a receptacle that is intended to
    generally retain its shape during operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52+,    for a method or apparatus for performing a step which takes
    material that is less than a rigid container and makes it into a rigid
    container.


CLS 493/902
TXT Dished:

    Operation under subclass 901 involving the construction of a receptacle by
    forming a planar portion into a three-dimensional shape to hold goods.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is a shaping or folding operation in which
    surplus material is folded back on itself with or without direct control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    for the method of forming a dished shape product of sheet or web including
    drawing of the material.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus, for
    apparatus for forming a dished shaped product of sheet or web material
    including drawing of the material.


CLS 493/903
TXT Insulated thermally:

    Operation under subclass 901 involving the construction of a receptacle
    having a wall specifically intended to resist the flow or heat therethrough.


CLS 493/904
TXT Cushioned:

    Operation under subclass 901 involving the construction of a receptacle
    intended to yield when encountering a force either inside or outside the
    receptacle and limit

    shock transmitted through the walls of the receptacle.


CLS 493/905
TXT Having window:

    Operation under subclass 901 involving the construction of a receptacle
    having an opening in its wall for observation of the contents thereof
    without opening the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222,    for making a pliable container having an inspection window.

    919,    for an art collection of patents relating to the construction of a
    pliable container having a window.


CLS 493/906
TXT Having multilayer wall:

    Operation under subclass 901 involving the construction of a receptacle
    constructed so that a cross section through the wall would yield multiple,
    distinct (i.e., not completely bonded together) sheets of material.

    (1)     Note.  Folding of flaps over the wall would yield multiple layers
    of material, but such construction is not intended to be placed in this
    subclass.


CLS 493/907
TXT Lined:

    Operation under subclass 906 involving the construction of a receptacle
    combined with an inner member to restrict the engagement of the contents of
    the holder with the inner surface of the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92,     for method or apparatus including making a rigid container and
    assembling therewith a liner.


CLS 493/908
TXT Covered:

    Operation under subclass 906 involving the construction of a receptacle
    combined with a member generally about the outside of the receptacle.


CLS 493/909
TXT Having handle or suspension means:

    Operation under subclass 901 involving the construction of a receptacle
    having provision to allow the receptacle to be gripped by a person or to
    allow the

    receptacle to be held against gravity otherwise.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87,     for making a rigid container having a handle or suspension means.


CLS 493/910
TXT Cigarette container:

    Operation under subclass 901 involving the construction of a receptacle in
    which cigarettes are to be marketed.


CLS 493/911
TXT Flip-top:

    Operation under subclass 910 wherein the receptacle includes a reclosable
    rigid cover.


CLS 493/912
TXT Having internal partition:

    Operation under subclass 901 involving construction of a receptacle having
    interior dividing walls.


CLS 493/913
TXT Egg container:

    Operation under subclass 912 involving construction of a receptacle in
    which eggs are to be stored.


CLS 493/914
TXT Eyeglass container:

    Operation under subclass 901 involving construction of a receptacle in
    which eyeglasses are to be stored.


CLS 493/915
TXT Match container:

    Operation under subclass 901 involving construction of a receptacle in
    which ignitable matches are to be stored or marketed.


CLS 493/916
TXT PLIABLE CONTAINER:

    Operation involving the construction of a receptacle that is flaccid and is
    not intended to retain its shape during use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186+,   for making a pliable container form something that is less than a
    container.


CLS 493/917
TXT Envelope:

    Operation under subclass 916 involving the construction of a receptacle
    that in use consists of a front planar and a rear planar wall connected
    together about the periphery of each.

    (1)     Note.  The connection of the front and rear wall may be a fluted
    section to allow expansion of the container but is intended to be as small
    as practical.


CLS 493/918
TXT Expandable:

    Operation under subclass 917 involving construction of a receptacle with
    easement means to provide greater interior volume to the receptacle.


CLS 493/919
TXT Having window:

    Operation under subclass 917 involving construction of a receptacle having
    provision to allow visual inspection of the contents without opening the
    receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222,    for making a pliable container including assembling a window member
    therewith.

    905,    for an art collection of patents relating to the construction of a
    rigid container having a window.


CLS 493/920
TXT Having plural compartments:

    Operation under subclass 917 involving construction of a receptacle having
    the interior divided structurally into a plurality of spaces.


CLS 493/921
TXT Having integrally formed insert:

    Operation under subclass 917 involving construction of a receptacle and a
    member inside the receptacle that is a part of the receptacle at the time
    of formation but is subsequently removed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216,    for similar operation including forming an envelope having an
    integral return envelope therein.


CLS 493/922
TXT Having liner:

    Operation under subclass 917 involving construction of a receptacle
    combined with an inner member to restrict the engagement of the contents of
    the receptacle with the inner surface of the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93+,    for a method or apparatus including  the making of a rigid
    container and assembling therewith a liner.


CLS 493/923
TXT With opening means (e.g., tear, strip, valve, etc.):

    Operation under subclass 917 involving construction of a receptacle having
    provision to allow access to the interior of the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212+,   for making a pliable container including assembling therewith an
    opening means.


CLS 493/924
TXT Requiring external support during filling:

    Operation under subclass 916 involving the construction of a receptacle
    that is intended to be mounted in support structure during insertion of
    contents thereinto.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is an operation in the construction of a
    vacuum cleaner bag, a garbage disposal bag, etc.


CLS 493/925
TXT Having mesh or window opening:

    Operation under subclass 916 involving the construction of a receptacle
    having provision to allow visual inspection of the contents without opening
    the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222,    for making a pliable container including assembling a window member
    therewith.


CLS 493/926
TXT Having handle or suspension means:

    Operation under subclass 916 involving construction of a receptacle having
    provision to allow the receptacle to be gripped by a person or to allow the
    holder to be held against gravity otherwise.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226,    for making a pliable container combined with assembling a handle or
    suspension means therewith.


CLS 493/927
TXT Reclosable:

    Operation under subclass 916 involving the construction of a receptacle
    having provision to allow the receptacle to be opened and closed repeatedly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213,    for making a pliable container including assembling a reclosable
    opening means therewith.


CLS 493/928
TXT With draw string:

    Operation under subclass 927 wherein the provision to allow the receptacle
    to be closed includes a pliable member extending about the opening of the
    receptacle which is adapted to be shortened to pull the opening closed.


CLS 493/929
TXT With valve:

    Operation under subclass 927 wherein the provision to allow the receptacle
    to be closed includes a member extending into the receptacle in the closed
    condition and extending out of the receptacle when in the opened condition
    to serve as a pouring spout.


CLS 493/930
TXT Having tear strip:

    Operation under subclass 916 wherein the receptacle includes a portion that
    is adapted to be pulled by a user to rip a wall of the receptacle and
    thereby provide access to the contents of the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212,    for making a pliable container including assembling a tear strip
    therewith.


CLS 493/931
TXT Having plural compartments:

    Operation under subclass 916 involving construction of a receptacle having
    the interior divided structurally into a plurality of spaces.


CLS 493/932
TXT Having plural openings:

    Operation under subclass 916 involving construction of a receptacle
    including more than one access to the contents.


CLS 493/933
TXT Having multilayered wall:

    Operation under subclass 916 involving construction of a receptacle
    constructed so that a cross section through wall would yield multiple,
    distinct (i.e., not completely bonded together) sheets of material.

    (1)     Note.  Folding of flaps over the wall would yield multiple layers
    of material, but such construction is not intended to be placed in this
    subclass.


CLS 493/934
TXT Parallelepiped or tetrahedron shape:

    Operation under subclass 916 involving the construction of an receptacle
    having the shape of (a) a prism with six sides, all of which are
    parallelograms, or (b) a three-dimensional figure made of only four planar
    surfaces.

    (1)     Note.  A commonly used eraser is parallelepiped, a triangular
    pyramid is a tetrahedron.


CLS 493/935
TXT Covering bag (e.g. garment protector, etc.):

    Operation under subclass 916 involving the construction of a receptacle
    that is intended to be placed over a specific type of article, rather than
    to support that article.


CLS 493/936
TXT Square bottom:

    Operation under subclass 916 involving the construction of a receptacle
    that when erected has a rectangular bottom and when folded has gussets
    along the sides so that the outer limit of the side wall is aligned with
    the outer limit of the bottom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218,    for making a square bottom bag including assembling the bottom
    therewith.


CLS 493/937
TXT TEXTILE:

    Operation involving the use of material of woven fibers.


CLS 493/938
TXT Apparel:

    Operation under subclass 937 involving working with a garment to be worn by
    a person or animal.


CLS 493/939
TXT APPAREL SUPPORT:

    Operation involving the construction of a member to be used in holding a
    garment to be worn by a person or animal against the force of gravity when
    the garment is not on a person or animal.


CLS 493/940
TXT BELLOWS:

    Operation involving the construction of a three-dimensional member
    including an interior chamber and side walls that are zigzag folded to
    allow the volume of the interior chamber to change.


CLS 493/941
TXT FILTER:

    Operation involving the construction of a member intended to restrict the
    flow of a gaseous or fluid medium therethrough to separate material
    therefrom.


CLS 493/942
TXT CLEANING IMPLEMENT (E.G., BRUSH, DUST MOP, ETC.):

    Operation involving the construction of a member intended to be used to
    remove foreign material.


CLS 493/943
TXT CANDY STICK:

    Operation involving the construction of a member adapted to be united with
    a confection and adapted to serve as a handle gripped by a person consuming
    that confection.


CLS 493/944
TXT APERTURE CARD OR DISPLAY DEVICE WITH WINDOW:

    Operation involving the construction of a member of nontransparent material
    which member has an opening for passage of light therethrough.


CLS 493/945
TXT COIN HOLDER:

    Operation involving the construction of a member for support or storage of
    a circular disc which disc is to be used as coinage.


CLS 493/946
TXT PHONOGRAPH RECORD JACKET:

    Operation involving the construction of a member for support or storage of
    a circular disc used for the recording of information.


CLS 493/947
TXT FILE FOLDER:

    Operation involving the construction of a member having a first planar side
    and a second planar side connected together along a fold line which member
    is intended to receive sheet material for storage between the two sides.


CLS 493/948
TXT IGNITING FUSE:

    Operation involving the construction of an elongated member of combustible
    material which is adapted to be ignited at one end and burn at a
    predictable rate to carry the flame to the other end thereof.


CLS 493/949
TXT ELECTRICAL INSULATION:

    Operation involving the construction of a member or of material that is
    intended to be relatively poor conductor of electrical current.


CLS 493/950
TXT LAMP SHADE:

    Operation involving the construction of a member to be used to cover an
    illuminating member to establish the amount and the direction of radiation
    therefrom.


CLS 493/951
TXT SEEDLING CONTAINER:

    Operation involving the construction of a receptacle in which seeds are to
    be planted for horticultural purposes.


CLS 493/952
TXT PHOTO CORNER MOUNT:

    Operation involving the construction of a member to be mounted on a planar
    sheet, which member includes a pocket to receive a corner of a photograph
    and thereby hold the photograph in position on the planer sheet.


CLS 493/953
TXT STENCIL OR OUTLINE GUIDE:

    Operation involving the construction of a member that is to establish by
    its peripheral configuration the movement of an otherwise randomly
    manipulated implement.


CLS 493/954
TXT SPOOL:

    Operation involving the construction of a generally cylindrical member
    intended for the storage of web or strand material wrapped thereabout.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    242,    Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, particularly subclasses 322, 407+,
    600+, and 118+ for a spool for a reel or other winding use.


CLS 493/955
TXT DECORATION ARTICLE:

    Operation involving the construction of a member having the purpose of
    influencing the appearance of other structure when used therewith, merely
    by the presence of the member.


CLS 493/956
TXT Having appearance of living plant (e.g., christmas tree, etc.):

    Operation under subclass 955 involving the construction of a member that is
    intended to look like a tree, a shrub, a flower, or a portion of such a
    member.


CLS 493/957
TXT Festoon:

    Operation under subclass 955 involving the construction of an elongated
    member adapted to be supported at spaced points along its length and
    allowed to drape therebetween.


CLS 493/958
TXT Garland:

    Operation under subclass 955 involving the construction of an elongated
    member adapted to be supported at one point.


CLS 493/959
TXT TOY OR AMUSEMENT ARTICLE:

    Operation involving the construction of a member intended to be used for
    entertainment.


CLS 493/960
TXT TOILET ARTICLE:

    Operation involving the construction of a member in personal hygiene.


CLS 493/961
TXT TAG, MARKER, OR LABEL:

    Operation involving the construction of a member to be used to indicate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, digest
    1-51 for an art digest of label applying.


CLS 493/962
TXT CLOSURE (E.G., TIE STRING, VALVE, ETC.):

    Operation involving the construction of a member that is to be used to
    close a container.


CLS 493/963
TXT OPENER (E.G., TEAR STRIP, ETC.):

    Operation involving the construction of a member that is to become a part
    of a container and is to sever the wall of the container to provide access
    to the contents.


CLS 493/964
TXT PALLET:

    Operation involving the construction of a movable member on which an
    article is to be placed for handling or storage.


CLS 493/965
TXT Flat or "boat" (for candy, crackers, etc.):

    Operation under subclass 964 wherein the movable member is adapted to be
    wrapped about the article.


CLS 493/966
TXT HONEYCOMB STRUCTURE:

    Operation involving the construction of material having parallel tubular
    passages therein.


CLS 493/967
TXT DUNNAGE, WADDING, STUFFING, OR FILLING EXCELSIOR:

    Operation involving sheet or web material that has been forced into an
    undefined, generally irregular mass to fill an area.


CLS 493/968
TXT STRUCTURAL SHAPE:

    Operation involving the construction of a member or stock material of a
    shape stronger than sheet or web shape.


CLS 494/
TTL IMPERFORATE BOWL: CENTRIFUGAL SEPARATORS

CLS 494/
TXT

    I.      SCOPE OF THE CLASS:

    Apparatus and process, not provided for elsewhere, for the breaking up or
    subdividing of material, which material comprises a mixture of fluids or
    fluent substances, into two or more components by utilizing a rotatable,
    receptacle-like member having a generally solid wall, and commonly termed a
    bowl, for subjecting the material to centrifugal force.

    II.     EXPLANATORY NOTES:

    (1)     Note.  When the material is subjected to centrifugal force, the
    usual tendency is for the heavier component(s) (e.g., the "heavies") to
    move outwardly from the axis of rotation of the member and the lighter
    component(s) (e.g., the "lights") to move inwardly toward the axis.  When
    plural heavier components of more than one density are present in the
    material, the outward movement ordinarily results in stratification, with
    the most dense component forming the layer nearest the wall, and so forth.
    When the heavier component, or one or more of a plurality thereof, is
    particulate in nature, the resulting layer, or layers, tends to be more or
    less solid.

    (2)     Note.  Most frequently, the member is capable of receiving and
    holding the material while at rest, and thus is truly a receptacle; in some
    instances (e.g., a member in the form of a open-ended cylinder), however,
    it can receive and hold material only when in its operating (i.e.,
    rotating) mode.

    (3)     Note.  The use of the phrase "generally solid" to describe the wall
    of the member is not intended to infer that the wall behaves as anything
    other than an imperforate surface insofar as the separating function is
    concerned; rather, the purpose of the qualifying word is to acknowledge
    that there sometimes are one or more openings (e.g., discharge apertures)
    in the wall which serve a nonseparating function. See also (2) Note of
    subclass 43 in regard to this matter.

    III.    GLOSSARY

    BOWL

    A receptacle-like member having generally-imperforate sidewalls and
    constituting that portion of a SEPARATOR within which the subdividing of
    material into two or more components takes place, or, at least, commences.
    Ordinarily considered as part of the member are such devices or structure
    as are either affixed thereto or integral therewith.  The art term, rotor,
    is sometimes used to mean approximately the same as BOWL.  (See (2) Note
    and (3) Note of the Class Definition and (2) Note of subclass 43).

    SEPARATOR

    The combination of a BOWL plus such other devices or structure not clearly
    a part of the BOWL as are necessary to constitute apparatus of the kind
    capable of subdividing material by subjecting it to centrifugal force
    within the BOWL.  The art terms, centrifuge and centrifugal, are sometimes
    used to mean approximately the same as SEPARATOR.

    IV.     SEARCH CLASS NOTES, INCLUDING STATEMENTS OF THE LINES WITH CERTAIN,
    CLOSELY RELATED CLASSES:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 279 for a hand tool which is particularly
    adpated for applying or removing component parts of a centrifugal separator.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclasses 312+ for a
    process of that class which involves subjecting the material being treated
    to centrifugal force, and subclasses 58+ for apparatus which utilizes
    centrifugal force.

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 23+ for a machine
    of that class which is combined with a liquid extractor and wherein the
    extractor is centrifugal in nature.  A centrifugal extractor, per se, for
    treating textiles also is in that area (23+) if of the imperforate bowl
    type, inasmuch as the mixture involved is not one which this class (494)
    provides for.  However, if the extractor is perforate in nature, it may be
    proper for Class 210 (e.g., subclasses 360.1+).

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, for processes involving steps resulting
    in separation of a gas from a fluid mixture comprising (a) a gas and solid
    or liquid particles entrained therein, (b) a liquid and gas entrained
    therein, or (c) a plurality of gases. However, gas separation processes
    that use an imperforate bowl, centrifugal separator are proper for Class
    494.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, for apparatus used in separation of a
    gas from a fluid mixture comprising (a) a gas and solid or liquid particles
    entrained therein, (b) a liquid and gas entrained therein, or (c) a
    plurality of gases. However, gas separation apparatus that is an
    imperforate bowl, centrifugal separator is proper for Class 494.

    99,     Foods and Beverages: Apparatus, subclasses 452+ for apparatus of
    that class utilized for the mechanical, fluid or heat treatment of dairy
    food. Prominent in this class (494), however, is the separating of raw milk
    into one or more heavier components (e.g., skim milk) and one or more
    lighter components (e.g., cream).

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, subclass 19 for apparatus of that
    class for treating sacchariferous material involving the treatment of sugar
    crystals and wherein the apparatus includes means for applying centrifugal
    force, and subclass 56 for a process of that class directed to the
    separation, in a mechanical manner, of impurities from a sugar solution and
    wherein centrifugal force is relied upon to separate impurities from a
    sugar solution which is of a different specific gravity than the impurities.

    184,    Lubrication, subclasses 6.24+ for a system of lubrication which is
    provided with means for treating the lubricant of the system and wherein
    the treatment is in the nature of purification, which may involve a
    separating operation.

    196,    Mineral Oils: Apparatus, subclass 14.5 for apparatus of that class
    for separating wax from a peteroleum oil for either recovering the wax or
    purifying the oil, and subclasses 46+ for apparatus adapted for separating
    either impurities or nonmineral oil components from mineral oil.  While the
    treating of a nominally mentioned oil by merely subjecting it to the action
    of an imperforate bowl, centrifugal separator does not go beyond the scope
    of this class (494), the apparatus of Class 196 and the processes of Class
    208, below, involve more; for example, (a) apparatus, or process,
    respectively, pertaining to an additional, chemical treatment of the oil,
    or (b) specific properties (e.g., the composition) of the oil or of one or
    more of its components.

    208,    Mineral Oils: Processes and Products, appropriate subclasses, for a
    process of that class for the recovery or treatment (including separating)
    of naturally occuring mineral oil, which process results in the production
    of a purified or modified oil or of coke; see the search  note to Class
    196, above, for the relationship of this class (494) to Class 208.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, appropriate
    subclasses, for process and apparatus for separating solid materials and
    assorting or segregating them in grades or classes according to physical
    characteristics. The relationship of Class 209 with this class (494) is
    explained in (6) Note of the class definiion of Class 209, which reads as
    follows:



    "This class does not include apparatus or methods which involve the use of
    bowls or receptacles rotating at speed high enough to develop sufficient
    centrifugal force to separate one class of solids from others unless there
    is "amalgamation" invovled, in which case such apparatus or methods are
    classifiable in subclasses 60 and 199 of this class.  Cases not falling
    within the exception noted are classifiable in Class 494, Imperforate Bowl:
     Centrifugal Separators.  This class, however, does include some borderline
    cases where it is not clear that the separation of the classes of solids is
    wholly dependent upon centrifugal force generated by high speed rotation of
    the receptacle."

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 360.1+ for apparatus
    of that class wherein the constituents of a mixture are separated by
    passing the mixture through a medium having openings (i.e., a filter) and
    wherein the medium is adapted for rapid movement about an axis of rotation,
    subclasses 781+ for a process of that class for separating one constituent
    of either a liquid-liquid or a liquid-solid mixture and wherein motion,
    relative to its support or housing, is imparted to the filter medium and
    further wherein the mixture is caused to pass through the medium by
    centrifugal force, and subclasses 787+ for a process for separating one
    constituent of either a liquid-liquid or a liquid-solid mixture and wherein
    centrifugal force is developed by cyclonic movement of the mixture (but not
    involving movement of the filter); also, see the search note to Class 68,
    above, for another reference to Class 210.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses, for process or apparatus of that class when combined with
    process or apparatus for the separation of material.  The relationship of
    that class (241) to the material separating classes is explained in Section
    8 of the class definition thereof, which reads, in part, as follows:


            "Class 241 is superior to the material separation classes and,
    therefore, provides for processes and apparatus in which comminution is
    combined with steps or means to separate the material into classes
    according to the physical characteristics of its components, before,
    during, or after the comminuting operation.  See subclasses 9+, 24 and 68+
    or, if the separation involves applying a fluid to the material, subclasses
    19, 20 and 38+."

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 72 for apparatus of that class
    comprising means for analyzing a liquid or solid sample and wherein the
    means includes a centrifuge.


    V.      OTHER CLASSES HAVING SUBCLASSES ENCOMPASSING CENTRIFUGAL DEVICES OR
    CENTRIFUGAL FORCE:

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 76+.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 535+.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 52+.

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, subclasses 4+.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 17 and 33.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclass
    74.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, subclass 6.1+.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclass 384.

    164,    Metal Founding, subclasses 114+, 175 and 286+.

    184,    Lubrication, subclasses 43, 70 and 77.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 80.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 7.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 8, 114, 270 and 311.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 204 and 227+.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, subclasses 427+ and 433.

    366,    Agitating, subclass 263.

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, subclasses 13+, 25 and 89.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 240.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 465+ and 506.

    VI.     INDEX OF CLASSES REFERRED TO:

    Class   Reference appears in
    29      IV, 43
    34      IV
    55      10, 11, 13, 23,
            31, 35, 38
    57      V
    62      14
    68      IV, 82
    73      V, 10
    74      82
    95      37
    99      IV
    118     V
    124     V
    127     IV
    134     V
    156     V
    159     V
    162     V
    164     V
    165     13
    184     IV, 15
    196     IV, V, 36
    198     53
    200     V
    208     IV
    209     IV
    210     IV, 1, 10, 11, 13, 16,
            22, 23, 31, 35, 36, 37, 46, 58, 82
    219     13
    239     V
    241     IV
    264     V
    266     V
    324     10
    366     V
    415     V
    422     IV, 16, 22
    424     16
    427     V
    451     V
    604     16


CLS 494/1
TXT WITH CONDITION RESPONSIVE MEANS:

    Apparatus under the class definition provided with means which reacts to a
    condition, or a change of condition, of the separator, or the environment
    of the separator, or the material entering, within, or departing from the
    separator, the reaction of the means serving as a response to the condition
    or the change therein.

    (1)     Note.  The means may range from a relatively sophisticated system
    for controlling the operation of the separator, which system may include a
    means to sense a condition and a means to respond to the information
    sensed, to a mere element of the separator, which element, by virtue of,
    for example, (a) its design or (b) the material of which it is formed
    inherently reacts to a condition to which it is exposed, subjected, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for a separator provided with cyclic or time control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 97+ for apparatus of
    that class which is responsive to flow, fluid pressure, or material level,
    and subclasses 143+ for apparatus which has automatic control.


CLS 494/2
TXT For controlling outlet valve:

    Apparatus under subclass 1 wherein the means is one which serves to
    operate, or to regulate the operation of, a valve which controls an outlet
    of the separator, usually located on the receptacle-like member.


CLS 494/3
TXT In response to location of inner boundary of heavy component: Apparatus
    under subclass 2 wherein the condition to which the means reacts is the
    locus defining the innermost extent to which stratification of the heavier
    component of the material has progressed within the member.

    (1)     Note.  While the inner boundary of one component usually coincides
    with the outer boundary of another component, and therefore represents
    their interface, the inner boundary of the heavier component sometimes
    lends itself to being located more precisely.


CLS 494/4
TXT In response to centrifugal force:
    Apparatus under subclass 2 wherein the condition to which the means reacts
    is the effect of the force imposed upon it by the rotation of the member.

    (1)     Note.  The means may be no more than a normally-closed or a
    normally-open valve which is caused by the force to which is subjected to
    change to its opposite mode.


CLS 494/5
TXT For controlling inlet valve:

    Apparatus under subclass 1 wherein the means is one which serves to
    operate, or to regulate operation of, a valve which controls an inlet of
    the separator, which valve occasionally is located on the receptacle-like
    member.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is art wherein the condition to which the
    means reacts is the weight of the bowl or its contents.


CLS 494/6
TXT In response to level of liquid-type material in bowl or in reservoir for
    supplying bowl:

    Apparatus under subclass 5 wherein the condition to which the means reacts
    is the location of the surface of a quantity of material to be, or being,
    separated, which surface is that formed by the material when it is in
    either the receptacle-like member or in a container which furnishes (e.g.,
    meters) it to the member, and which material is in the nature of either a
    liquid or a slurry.


CLS 494/7
TXT For controlling drive of (a) bowl or (b) driven means within bowl:

    Apparatus under subclass 1 wherein the means is one which serves to
    operate, or to regulate the operation of, a motor, transmission or other
    device which drives either (a) the receptacle-like member or (b) a
    conveyor, an agitator or other driven device located in the member.

    (1)     Note.  The function and operation of a driven means within the bowl
    is discussed at length in (2) Note and (3) Note of subclass 50 below.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein is art wherein the condition to which the
    means reacts is an excessive vibration on the part of the bowl.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     as explained in the reference thereto appearing in (1) Note above.


CLS 494/8
TXT In response to load imposed upon driven means:

    Apparatus under subclass 7 wherein the condition to which the means reacts
    is the effort (e.g., the torque) which the conveyor, agitator or other
    driven device in the member must develop to move the material which it
    engages therein.


CLS 494/9
TXT In response to speed of bowl or rotarily-driven means therewithin:

    Apparatus under subclass 7 wherein the condition to which the means reacts
    is the velocity, usually expressed in revolutions per minute, at which
    either the member, or a device therein which is driven rotatably, turns, or
    a change in that value.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is art wherein the condition to which the
    means reacts is the difference between the speed of the bowl and that of
    the rotarily-driven means.


CLS 494/10
TXT WITH MEANS FOR INDICATING, INSPECTING, MEASURING, SIGNALING, OR TESTING:

    Apparatus under the class definition provided with means for carrying out,
    or for facilitating the carrying out of, those purposes ordinarily
    associated with the functions of indicating, inspecting, measuring,
    signaling, or testing, which means might comprise, but are not limited to,
    a tachometer, a viewing port, a scale, an audible or visual alarm, or a
    viscosimeter, respectively.

    (1)     Note.  Obviously, the functions may not be mutually exclusively
    insofar as the means for carrying them out are concerned; hence, the fact
    that it may not be possible to restrict the association of a particular
    means to only one, specific function is immaterial.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclass 270 for apparatus of that class provided
    with sampling, weighing, testing or metering means, and subclasses 274+ for
    apparatus provided with signals and indicators (including inspection means).

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses, for measuring or
    testing means peculiar to that class.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 85+ for apparatus
    peculiar to that class which is provided with alarm, indicator, register,
    recorder, signal or inspection means.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses, for
    measuring and testing means peculiar to that class.


CLS 494/11
TXT WITH CYCLIC OR TIME CONTROL MEANS: Apparatus under the class definition
    provided with means for causing the separator, or a component thereof, to
    operate in accordance with (a) a predetermined sequence of events (e.g.,
    program control by a cam), or (b) the progression of time (e.g., the length
    of time to be alloted to each of one or more phases of the separating
    function) as  determined by a device having at least the capability of
    establishing a time interval (e.g., a timer) and possibly having also the
    capability of relating the time interval to the time of day (e.g., a
    clock-timer).

    (1)     Note.  The term "automatic" frequently is utilized in describing
    the operation of the art of this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The reference to a "cam" in (a) above is not intended to
    infer that a cam may not be found elsewhere in the class; see, for example,
    subclasses 47+ below, where the "other movement" may result from the use of
    a cam.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47+,    as explained in the reference thereto appearing in (2) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 271+ for apparatus of that class which
    is provided with timing or changeable programming means.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 138+ for apparatus of
    that class which is provided with time control.


CLS 494/12
TXT INCLUDING MEANS OR STRUCTURE FOR PROMOTING SAFETY:

    Apparatus under the class definition which includes a provision in the
    nature of a device or element, or merely a structural feature, which is
    indicated as being intended to reduce or eliminate one or more hazards of a
    kind associated with the separator, especially during its operation.

    (1)     Note.  If mere strength of the bowl wall, for example, is involved,
    and there is no express statement relating that property to safety,
    classification in subclass 81 below, rather than here (12), is proper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     as explained in the reference thereto appearing in (1) Note above.


CLS 494/13
TXT WITH MEANS FOR EXHANGING HEAT:

    Apparatus under the class definition provided with means for changing the
    heat content of either the material or the separator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 267+ for apparatus of that class
    provided with means for heating or cooling a gas, or with insulation.

    165,    Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses, for process and apparatus
    for transferring heat from one material to another.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 175+ for apparatus of
    that class provided with a heater or a heat exchanger.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 389 for a heating device of that class
    which is associated with a container or an enclosure for material to be
    heated and wherein the container or enclosure is adapted to be rotated
    about an axis.


CLS 494/14
TXT Comprising or including means for cooling: Apparatus under subclass 13
    wherein the means for changing the heat content comprises or includes a
    device, fluid or system for reducing the heat content.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclasses, for process and apparatus
    peculiar to removing heat from a substance, or the product of such removal,
    or the handling of the latter as a stored product.


CLS 494/15
TXT WITH MEANS FOR LUBRICATING:

    Apparatus under the class definition provided with means for furnishing
    antifriction material to one or more regions thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The material ordinarily is of a fluid or a fluent nature;
    e.g., oil, grease, graphite.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    184,    Lubrication, appropriate subclasses, for lubrication and
    lubricators, generally.


CLS 494/16
TXT INCLUDING PLURALITY OF MINIATURE BOWLS (E.G., TEST TUBES) DISTRIBUTED ABOUT
    A ROTATABLE CARRIER AND READILY REMOVABLE THEREFROM:

    Apparatus under the class definition which includes two or more, extremely
    small, receptacle-like members for receiving the mixture and holding it
    during separation, and a revolving support for holding, at intervals spaced
    therearound, the members and further wherein the members are retained by
    the support in such a manner that they may be more or less easily
    disengaged therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  The members most frequently comprise test tubes into which
    may be placed blood samples for separation into, for example, red cells and
    plasma.

    (2)     Note.  The spacing of the containers on the support is such that
    the assembly will remain balanced.

    (3)     Note.  Including in this and the indented subclasses is art
    directed to only a subcombination of the revolving support and/or the
    receptacle-like member.

    (4)     Note.  In view of the uniqueness of the art of this area (16+),
    cross-referencing between this area and the other principal areas of the
    class is, for the most part, neither appropriate nor beneficial.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 782 for a process of
    that class for separating one constituent of either a liquid-liquid or a
    liquid-solid mixture and wherein motion, relative to its support or
    housing, is imparted to the filter medium and further wherein the mixture
    is caused to pass through the medium by centrifugal force and additionally
    wherein the mixture comprises blood.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 44+ for a device of that class for
    treating transfusible blood.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 529+
    for a composition of that class wherein the active ingredient is an animal
    tissue extract of undetermined constitution and further wherein the
    composition contains either a blood extract or a structurally undetermined
    component obtained from blood.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 4+ for apparatus or process relating to the
    drawing of blood from the body and which may include the treating of the
    drawn blood and the returning of the product of the treatment of the body.


CLS 494/17
TXT And means for introducing either material or auxiliary fluid into bowls:

    Apparatus under subclass 16 which includes also means for feeding either
    (a) the material which is to be separated or (b) one or more fluids, which
    fluid or fluids are not initially a part of the material to be separated,
    to the members.

    (1)     Note.  While not initially a component of the material supplied for
    separation, the fluid of this subclass sometimes becomes an
    indistinguishable part of either the material or a separated component
    thereof.

    (2)     Note.  Typical of the art of this subclass is the supplying of a
    liquid for "washing" a sample of blood.


CLS 494/18
TXT Including conduit of flexible umbilical cable type:

    Apparatus under subclass 17 which further includes a flaccid, tubular
    element for conducting the mixture or other fluid from a stationary supply,
    or supply connection, to or from the receptacles while they are rotating
    with the carrier.

    (1)     Note.  The development and use of a conduit of this nature is
    generally considered to reduce certain maintenance and contamination
    problems inherent in the rotating seal which it eliminates.


CLS 494/19
TXT And means for rotating each bowl about own axis:

    Apparatus under subclass 16 which includes also means for imparting rotary
    movement, about its principle axis, to each of the members.

    (1)     Note.  Here, the centrifugal force for causing separation of the
    mixture is developed in part by the revolving of the support and in part by
    the additional turning of each member about its own axis.


CLS 494/20
TXT Having bowls, or holders therefor, pivotably attached to carrier for
    tilting during rotation of carrier:

    Apparatus under subclass 16 wherein either each member, or each of a
    plurality of receivers provided with accomodations for one or more members,
    is joined to the support in a manner (e.g., pivoted at a locus above the
    center of gravity of the member or the receiver) whereby the lower portion
    of each member or receiver will swing, about a horizontal axis, outwardly
    and upwardly when acted upon by the centrifugal force developed by the
    revolving of the support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for related art but wherein, for example, (a) the outward and
    upward movement of the lower portion of the member is not in the nature of
    turning about an axis, or (b) each member is fixedly supported at a
    predetermined degree of tilt.


CLS 494/21
TXT Comprising flexible bowls embraced by pockets provided therefor in carrier:
    Apparatus under subclass 16 wherein the members are flaccid in nature and
    are held within cavities, compartments or the like located in the revolving
    support.

    (1)     Note.  Prior to being filled with the mixture, the member of this
    subclass may be collapsed; i.e., flat.  Upon filling, it assumes the shape
    of its cavity, thereby sometimes resembling a liner therefor.  The
    confinement thus provided enables the member to withstand the centrifugal
    force to which it is subjected.


CLS 494/22
TXT INCLUDING INTRODUCTION OF DIFFERING-WEIGHT FLUIDS (E.G., LIQUIDS) FOR
    COUNTERCURRENT FLOW:

    Apparatus under the class definition which includes supplying to the bowl
    two or more fluids, usually two liquids but sometimes a liquid and a gas,
    which differ in specific gravity and which difference enables radially
    outwardly movement of the heavier fluid to take place more or less
    simultaneously with radially inwardly movement of the lighter fluid.

    (1)     Note.  A principle function of the opposing flow is to achieve
    intimate contact of one fluid with another, which fluids most frequently
    are two, immiscible or partly immiscible liquids, and which contact is
    sometimes described in terms of one fluid acting as a solvent upon the
    other.

    (2)     Note.  The purpose of the intimate contact (occasionally described
    as "sliding surface contact") and subsequent separation sometimes is to
    promote a chemical reaction between the liquids, or, occasionally, it may
    be for transferring one or more components from one liquid to the other.

    (3)     Note.  Separators of the countercurrent flow type are particularly
    useful in separating liquids whose specific gravities differ so slightly
    that separation in a conventional separator might prove impractical.

    (4)     Note.  Separating apparatus of the kind perculiar to this subclass
    is sometimes identified as an "extractor" (where two liquids are involved)
    or an "evaporator" (where a liquid and a gas are involved).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 799, for a process of
    that class for separating one constituent of a liquid-liquid mixture and
    wherein the liquids are immiscible.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 258+ for apparatus of that class
    having means for separating or dissolving a material constituent and
    wherein the means is of the liquid-liquid contact kind and further wherein
    the means includes a rotating chamber.


CLS 494/23
TXT WITH MEANS FOR FURNISHING    AUXILIARY FLUID TO MATERIAL OR APPARATUS:

    Apparatus under the class definition provided with means for introducing,
    or for facilitating the introduction of, one or more fluids, which fluid or
    fluids are not initially a part of the material intended to undergo
    separation, to the material or to one or more components or elements of the
    separator.

    (1)     Note.  While not constituting a portion of the material as supplied
    for separation, the fluid of this subclass sometimes becomes an
    indistinguishable part of either that material or a separated component
    thereof.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this and the indented subclasses, especially
    subclasses 27+ is the introducing of a fluid for a cleaning purpose.

    (3)     Note.  Suction is not considered to be the introduction of a fluid
    within the concept of this and the indented subclasses; note, however, that
    suction for the purpose of reducing the pressure in a housing for a bowl is
    provided for in subclass 61 below.

    (4)     Note.  The furnishing of a fluid for actuating a component (e.g., a
    valve) of the separator is included in this and the indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13+,    for a separator provided with means for exchanging heat, which
    means may involve a fluid in the nature of a medium of heat exchange.

    15,     for a separator provided with means for lubricating, which means
    may involve a fluid in the nature of a lubricant.

    17,     for a separator which includes a plurality of miniature bowls
    distributed about a rotatable carrier and readily removable therefrom and
    wherein means is provided for introducing either the material or an
    auxiliary fluid into the bowls.

    61,     as explained in the reference thereto appearing in (3) Note above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 261+ for apparatus of that class
    provided with inlet means for a diverse fluid or solid.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 198.1+ for apparatus
    of that class provided with means to add treating material.


CLS 494/24
TXT Energy of fluid utilized for driving bowl:
    Apparatus under subclass 23 wherein the fluid is under pressure or
    otherwise possesses energy, and wherein that property of the fluid is used
    for imparting rotation to the member.

    (1)     Note.  The fluid may serve only to enhance the rotation of a bowl
    which is provided also with driving means of a different nature.

    (2)     Note.  Most commonly, a fixed or adjustable nozzle is utilized to
    direct the fluid against one or more regions of the member, which regions
    may be particularly adapted to receive and react to the force of the fluid.


CLS 494/25
TXT Gas other than air:

    Apparatus under subclass 23 wherein the fluid introduced is in the nature
    of a gas, and wherein the gas has a composition which serves to distinguish
    it from that gas commonly considered to constitute "air".


CLS 494/26
TXT Air at atmospheric, or greater, pressure:
    Apparatus under subclass 23 wherein the fluid introduced is air which is at
    either the pressure normal to the region in which the separator is located
    or a pressure which is elevated from that pressure.

    (1)     Note.  See (3) Note of subclass 23 above.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass is a body of art which is
    concerned with counteracting the derogatory effect on the separating
    process caused by the movement of air within a housing provided for the
    bowl, which movement is created most frequently by the friction developed
    between the rotating bowl and the air surrounding it.  The means making
    this particular art proper for this subclass usually comprises an inlet for
    admitting outside air to the housing, which latter air is utilized to at
    least partially overcome the undesired results (e.g., intermingling, or
    loss, of liquids which have been separated) of the movement of the air
    already in the housing.

    (3)     Note.  As a sidelight to (2) Note., it can be observed that an
    aperture for admitting air, if located in a lower region of the housing,
    may serve also as an outlet for unwanted substances (e.g., liquids, foreign
    particles) which otherwise would accumulate there.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60+,    especially subclasses 60 and 63 for a separator which includes an
    exterior housing for the rotatable bowl, which subclasses include a
    collection of art that is concerned with the movement of only that air
    which already is in housing, as contrasted with the situation discussed in
    (2) Note above.


CLS 494/27
TXT Liquid:

    Apparatus under subclass 23 wherein the fluid introduced is in the nature
    of a liquid.

    (1)     Note.  See the reference to this subclass (27) contained in (2)
    Note of subclass 23 above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     as explained in the reference thereto appearing in (1) Note above.


CLS 494/28
TXT Moving radially inwardly toward axis of rotation of bowl:

    Apparatus under subclass 27 wherein the liquid flows from one or more
    regions removed from the axis about which the member turns (e.g., an inlet
    on the periphery of the member) in the direction of that axis.

    (1)     Note.  The countercurrent flow provided for in subclass 22 above
    represents another provision for radially inwardly flow of fluid, but is to
    be distinguished from the subject matter of this subclass (28) on the basis
    that there (22) the flow is that of one of the two fluids which are
    essential to the separation, whereas here the radially inwardly flow is
    that of an auxiliary fluid (i.e., an auxiliary liquid).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     as explained in the reference thereto appearing in (1) Note above.


CLS 494/29
TXT Furnished at plural locations:

    Apparatus under subclass 27 wherein the liquid is introduced at more than
    one place.

    (1)     Note.  Most commonly, the liquid is introduced into the member,
    and, most frequently, by utilizing plural conduits.

    (2)     Note.  Two or more different liquids may be involved.


CLS 494/30
TXT Including one or more valves in incoming path:

    Apparatus under subclass 27 wherein at least one valve is provided for
    controlling the liquid which is enroute to the separator.


CLS 494/31
TXT INCLUDING PLURALITY OF SEPARATE AND DISTINCT BOWLS:

    Apparatus under the class definition which includes two or more
    receptacle-like members, no one of which members is contained in whole or
    in part in any other member, and each of which members serves as the locus
    of a separating function.

    (1)     Note.  The separating functions taking place in the members
    sometimes are identical; however, they are more likely to differ in, for
    example, the king or the phase or the degree of separation.

    (2)     Note.  "Separate" is not intended to exclude an externally touching
    (e.g., a rolling contact) relationship between two or more of the members.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16+,    for a separator which includes a plurality of miniature bowls
    (e.g., test tubes) distributed about a rotatable carrier and readily
    removable therefrom.

    44,     for a separator wherein the rotatable bowl comprises a plurality of
    bowls which are partly or wholly within one another.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 482+ for apparatus of that class
    including plural separators.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 294+ for apparatus of
    that class including diverse, distinct separators, and subclasses 322+ for
    apparatus including plural, distinct separators.


CLS 494/32
TXT And means external of bowls for conducting material therebetween:

    Apparatus under subclass 31 which includes means (e.g., a conduit, surface,
    etc.) for enabling material to move from one member to another, which means
    is located, at least in part, outside of one or both of the members with
    which it is associated.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are instances wherein material moves back to
    a member which it occupied at an earlier stage of the separating function;
    e.g., "feedback".


CLS 494/33
TXT Having bowls equally spaced from a central axis of rotation for orbitting
    thereabout:Apparatus under subclass 31 wherein the members describe a
    common path as they turn about an axis from which each member is
    equidistantly removed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16+,    as explained in the reference thereto appearing in subclass 31
    above, and with the further observation that the bowls of that area (16+)
    are spaced from and turn about a central axis of rotation.


CLS 494/34
TXT Having bowls spaced along common axis of rotation:
    Apparatus under subclass 31 wherein the members occupy successive, but not
    overlapping, positions along the axis about which they turn.

    (1)     Note.  While the driving means here typically is a shaft common to
    each of the members, concentric shafts are sometimes utilized.


CLS 494/35
TXT BOWLS AND MEANS EXTERNAL THEREOF FOR RECIRCULATING MATERIAL:

    Apparatus under the class definition wherein a receptacle-like member is
    provided with means, located at least in part outside thereof, for
    conducting material away from the member and subsequently returning all or
    a part of that material to the member.

    (1)     Note.  The material leaving and later returning to the member may
    constitute, for example, (a) material for which a higher degree of
    separation is desired than could be obtained by passing through the member
    once, or (b) material which was in excess of the separating capacity of the
    member upon the occasion of its initial entry therinto, or (c) leakage
    which has been collected.

    (2)     Note.  The outside means may include a driven device (e.g., a pump)
    for moving the material.

    (3)     Note.  The means, while outside, at least in part, of the member,
    is not necessarily outside of any such structure as may be provided for
    enclosing the member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for a separator which includes a plurality of separate and distinct
    bowls and which also includes means external of the bowls for conducting
    material therebetween.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclasses 338+ for apparatus of that class
    provided with recycle means.

    210,    Liquid Purification on Separation, subclasses 194+ for apparatus of
    that class involving recirculation.


CLS 494/36
TXT WITH MEANS FOR FILTERING:

    Apparatus under the class definition provided with means for removing an
    undesired or unintended constituent (e.g., particles of a solid) from
    material which is enroute to, or within, or enroute from, a separator, and
    wherein the means is a medium of a porous or perforate nature which is
    placed in the flow path of the material and prevents the constituent from
    continuing to accompany the remainder of the material.

    (1)     Note.  The means usually is in the nature of a screen, sieve,
    strainer, or the like (e.g., a fibrous batt).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, subclass 46.1, for apparatus of that
    class adapted for separating either impurities or nonmineral oil components
    from mineral oil and wherein the apparatus is provided with filtering means.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 348+, for apparatus
    of that class including a filter.


CLS 494/37
TXT PROCESS:

    Method under the class definition of (a) breaking down a mixture into two
    or more component parts by means of an imperforate bowl, centrifugal
    separator or (b) operating an imperforate bowl centrifugal separator for
    such a purpose.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation: Processes, for processes of gas separation other
    than those using an imperforate bowl, centrifugal separator.

    210,    Liquid Purification on Separation, subclasses 600+ for processes of
    that class.


CLS 494/38
TXT INCLUDING SEALING MEANS:

    Apparatus under the class definition which includes means for preventing
    the unintended movement of a gas, liquid or solid to or from, or from one
    region to another of, the separator.

    (1)     Note.  The tendency of a substance to move stems frequently from
    the existence of a pressure differential between the regions; however,
    other phenomena (e.g., gravity) may be responsible, instead.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass 38 is a seal of other than a
    structural barrier type; e.g., a liquid seal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    55,     Gas Separation, subclass 355 for apparatus of that class provided
    with a liquid trap seal or valve.

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process, subclasses 345+ for a seal between relatively movable parts (i.e.,
    a dynamic seal).


CLS 494/39
TXT For protecting evacuated, bowl-enclosing housing against gaseous
    infiltration:

    Apparatus under subclass 38 wherein the means comprises a device or element
    for preventing the leakage or air or any other gas at ambient pressure
    into, and thereby raising the absolute pressure within, a structure in
    which the pressure has been reduced to less than atmospheric and within
    which the bowl is located.

    (1)     Note.  A common reason for providing an evacuated region for the
    bowl is to reduce the resistance of air to the bowl's rotational movement,
    as in the instance, for example, of an ultraspeed centrifuge.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note of subclass 23 above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     as explained in the reference thereto appearing in (2) Note above.


CLS 494/40
TXT Comprising seal, or element cooperating therewith, movable axially for
    controlling outlet on periphery of bowl:

    Apparatus under subclass 38 wherein the means comprises either a seal
    (e.g., a gasket) or an element (e.g., a surface for engaging the seal),
    which is movable in a direction paralleling the axis of the member for the
    purpose of opening or closing one or more apertures located, usually, on a
    line representing a circumference of the member.

    (1)     Note.  In some instances, either the seal or the cooperating
    element is a component of a movable portion (e.g., one of the hemispheres
    of a spherical bowl) of the member.

    (2)     Note.  Sealing of the kind found in this subclass occasionally is a
    hallmark of a "closed centrifuge."  In that event, it may be associated
    with conditions such as (a) a positive pressure in the bowl (as developed,
    for example, by feeding into the bowl under pressure), (b) pressure at the
    outlet resulting from flow resistance in a conduit receiving the discharge,
    (c) avoiding leakage which might otherwise develop as a result of lateral
    motion of the bowl induced, for example, by vibrations encountered at
    higher speeds of rotation, or (d) a necessity for preventing air from
    getting into the material being discharged (and thus, in some instances,
    avoiding "frothing").


CLS 494/41
TXT For sealing between stationary and moving elements:
    Apparatus under subclass 38 wherein one region moves relative to the
    surrounding area and the other region does not.


CLS 494/42
TXT INCLUDING DRIVEN MEANS AT LEAST PARTIALLY EXTERNAL OF BOWL FOR MOVING
    MATERIAL THERETO OR THEREFROM:

    Apparatus under the class definition which includes means (e.g., a pump, a
    screw conveyor) which is located either (a) entirely outside the
    receptacle-like member, or (b) partly outside the member and having a
    portion extending thereinto, and wherein the means serves to move the
    material either (a) toward, or toward and into, or (b) away from, or out of
    and away from, the member.

    (1)     Note.  In the majority of instances, the means of this subclass is
    not driven by the drive shaft of the member.


CLS 494/43
TXT ROTATABLE BOWL:

    Apparatus under the class definition comprising the receptacle-like member,
    or one or more elements or portions thereof, of a separator, which member
    is (a) generally closed insofar as its sidewall structure is concerned and
    (b) sugjected to turning about its principal axis for

    causing material supplied to it to be divided into two or more components.

    (1)     Note.  While termed a "bowl," and described as "receptacle-like,"
    the member may range from a sphere to an open cylinder.

    (2)     Note.  "Generally closed," as used in describing the sidewall
    structure, is intended to exclude openings which are the essence of a
    separating function (e.g., as in separating by filtering), but is not
    intended to exclude, for example, an opening which is utilized for
    discharging one or more of the products of a separating operation performed
    within the bowl.

    (3)     Note.  Where means or structure comprising subject matter for any
    one of subclasses 82, 83 or 84 below is present, the claiming of the bowl
    in name only shall not be deemed to mandate original classification here
    (43).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16+,    for a bowl of the kind utilized by a separator which includes a
    plurality of miniature bowls distributed about a rotatable carrier and
    readily removable therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 279 as explained in the reference thereto
    appearing in section IV of the class definition above.


CLS 494/44
TXT Comprising plurality of bowls partly or wholly within one another:

    Apparatus under subclass 43 wherein the member comprises two or more
    receptacle-like members, which members at least partially enclose one
    another.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is art wherein the enclosed
    member, or one of a plurality thereof, may not bear much resemblance to a
    "bowl" in the sense that the term generally is used in the class, but in
    which art that member is consistently described and treated as comprising a
    bowl, drum, rotor, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Although it is the exception rather than the rule for the
    enclosed member, or one of a plurality thereof, to be driven differently
    (e.g., independently, oppositely, separately) than the enclosing member,
    those instance in which it does occur may present an overlapping
    relationship with regard to the art of subclasses 50+ below, especially
    subclass 52 thereof.  For example, a body of art which exists in that area
    discloses a drum-like device (sometimes termed a "deflector") which is
    within the member and is driven differently therefrom; however, that art is
    distinguishable, at least in part, from the art of this subclass (44) by
    the fact that the material to be separated never enters the drum (i.e., the
    separation takes place within the space between the outer surface of the
    drum wall and the inner surface of the member wall).

    (3)     Note.  The enclosed member, or one of a plurality thereof,
    sometimes bears a strong physical resemblance to the art of subclasses 66
    through 80, below, especially subclasses 77+ thereof, and, in some
    instances, is classified here (44) rather than there only on the basis of
    having been accorded "member" status for the reason described in (1) Note
    above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31+,    for a separator which includes a plurality of separate and distinct
    bowls.

    50+,    especially subclass 52 thereof, as explained in the reference
    thereto appearing in (2) Note above.

    66      through 80, especially subclasses 77+ thereof, as explained in the
    reference thereto appearing in (3) Note above.


CLS 494/45
TXT Including flexible, removable lining therein:

    Apparatus under subclass 43 including structure within the member in the
    nature of a membrane which (a) serves to line all or some portion of the
    interior of the member, (b) is elastically or plastically deformable, and
    (c) is adapted to be inserted into or taken out of the member.

    (1)     Note.  The membrane may be container-like in form.

    (2)     Note.  The lining of this subclass is not related to, and should
    not be confused with, the art term, "liner", which frequently is applied to
    certain structure within the member such, for example, as that provided for
    in subclasses 66 through 80 below.

    (3)     Note.  Included in this subclass is art directed to the
    subcombination of the membrane.


CLS 494/46
TXT Including bearing means adapted to enable bowl to establish dynamic axis of
    rotation: Apparatus under subclass 43 which includes one or more surfaces
    which engage either the member or an element (e.g., the drive spindle)
    thereof and which surfaces are so constructed, mounted, etc., as to permit
    the member, when placed in rotation, to define, as the axis about which it
    turns, a line which may be slightly offset, in whole or part, from that
    line which appears to represent its geometric center when at rest.

    (1)     Note.  The purpose here is to allow the axis of rotation to be
    dictated by the center of gravity of the rotating mass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 363 for apparatus of
    that class wherein the constituents of a mixture are separated by passing
    the mixture through a medium having openings, (i.e., a filter) and wherein
    the medium is capable of movement and further wherein the medium is adapted
    for rapid movement about an axis of rotation and additionally wherein
    adjustable means is provided to position the center of gravity of the
    structure on the geometric axis of rotation.

    384,    Bearings, subclass 193 for a bearing for a rotary element wherein
    the contact involed is of a sliding or a line nature and further wherein
    the bearing is adapted to receive a load imposed in the direction of the
    axis of rotation and additionally wherein the load is a thrust load on a
    vertical shaft and lastly wherein the bearing and the shaft are given
    limited relative motion to allow for oscillation of the shaft about its
    vertical axis.


CLS 494/47
TXT Including means for imparting other movements to bowl in whole or in part
    before, during or after its axial rotation: Apparatus under subclass 43
    which includes means for moving the member, or at least one portion thereof
    relative to another portion, in some manner other than its customary
    turning about its principal axis, and wherein the means may act either
    during the time the member is turning or prior to or subsequent to such
    time.

    (1)     Note.  If the means acts during rotation of the member, the other
    movement probably plays a part in the separating function; if, on the other
    hand, the means acts at some other time, the other movement is likely to be
    for a purpose not directly related to the separating.

    (2)     Note.  For the purposes of this subclass, vibration is considered
    to constitute movement.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    19,     for a separator which includes a plurality of miniature bowls
    (e.g., test tubes) which are distributed about a rotatable carrier and are
    readily removable therefrom and wherein means is provided for rotating each
    bowl about its own axis, also.

    33,     for a separator which includes a plurality of separate and distinct
    bowls and wherein the bowls are equally spaced from a central axis for
    rotating about that axis, also.

    46,     for a separator having a rotatable bowl which includes bearing
    means adapted to enable the bowl to establish a dynamic axis of rotation,
    the result of which may be a slight lateral shifting of the axis and,
    therefore, of the bowl.


CLS 494/48
TXT Axial movement of one portion of bowl wall relative to another (e.g., for
    discharging):

    Apparatus under subclass 47 wherein the wall of the member is subdivided in
    an axial direction for creating at least two separable parts, and the means
    moves at least one of the parts axially away from or toward at least one
    other of the parts.

    (1)     Note. The movement provided for herein frequently is related to
    providing an exit for material leaving the member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for a separator which includes sealing means, and wherein the means
    comprises a seal, or a member coacting therewith, which is movable axially
    for controlling an outlet on the periphery of the bowl.


CLS 494/49
TXT Driven by energy of material supplied:
    Apparatus under subclass 43 wherein the energy for causing the member to
    turn about its axis is derived, in whole or in part, from the pressure or
    other energy possessed by the material to be, being, or which has been,
    separated.


CLS 494/50
TXT Including driven material-moving means therein:
    Apparatus under subclass 43 which includes driven means located within the
    member for imparting movement to all or any portion of the material
    contained in the member, which movement differs in either form or function
    from that caused by the rotation of the member about its axis.

    (1)     Note.  The movement of the material by the means of this area (50+)
    may be for such purposes as agitating, distributing, expelling, mixing, or
    merely transporting.

    (2)     Note.  The means of this area frequently is identified in the art
    as a "conveyor".  However, in view of the variety of purposes served by the
    means, the term "conveyor" is believed to be unnecessarily restrictive,
    and, accordingly, has not been relied upon in this reclassification of the
    art.

    (3)     Note.  For the movement imparted by the means to differ from that
    resulting from the rotation of the member, the means must either move in
    some fashion other than rotating about an axis, or, if of the rotating
    kind, must, for example, (a) turn about an axis which is not the same as
    the axis of the member, or (b) turn in a different direction than the
    member, or (c) turn at a different speed (not uncommonly, a differential as
    small as one rpm) than the member.  Inasmuch as the instance noted in (c)
    is the most simple and straightforward manner in which to obtain a
    difference in movement, and, therefore, is the one most commonly utilized,
    the differential is sometimes merely disclosed and not claimed.

    (4)     Note.  Included in this and the indented subclasses is a small
    amount of art wherein the means is not positively driven; for example, the
    means may be caused to move by (a) its engagement with material contained
    in the bowl, or (b) its frictional contact with a positively driven
    element, such as a feed tube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for a separator wherein the rotatable bowl comprises a plurality of
    bowls which are located partly or wholly within one another and wherein at
    least one of the bowls may be driven relative to at least one other bowl;
    also, see the reference to this area (50+) appearing in (2) Note thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    366,    Agitating, appropriate subclasses, for process and apparatus for
    operating on fluid, visious, plastic, or fluent particulate material for
    causing portions of the material to move irregularly with respect to each
    other so as to intermix, and particularly subclasses 219+, for an agitator
    having a movable mixing chamber.


CLS 494/51
TXT Plural driven means:

    Apparatus under subclass 50 wherein two or more driven means, at least two
    of which means are independent of one another in one or more
    characteristics, are present.

    (1)     Note.  The following are considered to exemplify, but are not
    intended to limit, the interpretation of "independent":  (a) a
    reciprocating means and a rotating means, (b) a plurality of rotating
    means, at least one being driven at a different speed, or in a different
    direction, than at least one other thereof, (c) a plurality of rotating
    means, at least one having a different axis of rotation than at least one
    other thereof, or (d) a plurality of rotating means driven by a common
    shaft, at least one serving to impart movement (1) in a different direction
    than another (e.g., a conveying screw segment having a left-handed thread
    and another segment having a right-handed thread) or (2) of a different
    nature than another (e.g., conveying by one, stirring by another).


CLS 494/52
TXT Rotatably driven coaxially with bowl but differing as to direction or
    speed: Apparatus under subclass 50 wherein the driven means is one which is
    rotated about an axis, and wherein that axis coincides with the axis of
    rotation of the member, and further wherein the means is driven in a
    direction, or at a speed, which differs from the direction, or the speed,
    of the member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for a separator wherein the rotatable bowl comprises a plurality of
    bowls which are located partly or wholly within one another and wherein at
    least one of the bowls may be driven relative to at least one other bowl;
    also, see the reference to this subclass (52) appearing in (2) Note thereof.


CLS 494/53
TXT Including element having helical blade:
    Apparatus under subclass 52 wherein the driven means includes a
    material-engaging portion which is in the nature of a screw thread; e.g., a
    screw conveyor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 657+ for a conveyor section of
    that class in the nature of a screw.


CLS 494/54
TXT Modified blade:

    Apparatus under subclass 53 wherein the portion is so altered or changed as
    to be structurally dissimilar, in one or more respects, to a conventional
    screw thread, the alterations or changes being for a purpose related to the
    portion's function in the separating operation.

    (1)     Note.  The modification may be found in the external surface of the
    portion, or it may involve the interior thereof; in the latter instance,
    however, the inner region of the "blade" portion of the thread, rather than
    merely the interior of the "shaft" upon which it is formed, must be
    involved.


CLS 494/55
TXT Including plurality of discrete pushing or scraping elements moving
    proximate to material collecting surface of bowl: Apparatus under subclass
    52 wherein the driven means includes two or more separate (i.e.,
    noncontinuous), material-engaging elements (e.g., blades, plows), which
    elements force material from their path as they travel adjacent those
    portions of the member upon which the material tends to accumulate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for a related material-moving means which may, as in this subclass
    (55), move material in a pushing or scraping manner, but wherein the
    material-engaging portion is in the nature of a screw thread.


CLS 494/56
TXT Including discharge-related structure in nature of (a) outlet having device
    for controlling quantity of flow, (b) element associated with pickup of
    material and adjustable for varying quality of flow, or (c) static scraper
    or the like for engaging material in moving bowl: Apparatus under subclass
    43 which includes structure that is involved in either the preparation for
    departure, of the departure, or both, of material from the member and which
    structure takes the form of (a) an exit passage which includes a valve or
    like device for varying the amount of material moving through the passage,
    or (b) an element which is related to the gathering of material that is to
    be conducted out of the member and which element is repositionable or
    otherwise adjustable for changing the ratio of the lighter component or
    components to the heavier component or components in the material gathered,
    or (c) a blade or similiar abutment which, except for purposes of
    repositioning, is stationary relative to a member which is turning about
    its axis and serves to dislodge (e.g., peel off) material being moved
    against it by the member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for a separator which is provided with means which is responsive to
    a condition for the purpose of controlling an outlet valve.

    40,     for a separator which includes sealing means and wherein the means
    comprises a seal, or an element cooperating therewith, which is movable
    axially for controlling an outlet on the periphery of the bowl.

    48,     for a separator wherein the rotatable bowl includes means for
    imparting other movement to the bowl, in whole or in part, before, during
    or after its axial rotation and wherein the movement is the axial shifting
    of one portion of the bowl wall relative to another portion thereof (e.g.,
    for the discharging of material).


CLS 494/57
TXT Element associated with pickup of material and adjustable for varying
    quality of flow: Apparatus under subclass 56 comprising an element which is
    related to the gathering of material that is to be conducted out of the
    member and which element is repositionable or otherwise adjustable for
    changing the ratio of the lighter component or components to the heavier
    component or components in the material gathered.

    (1)     Note.  The repositioning ordinarily involves movement in a
    direction radially of the member.

    (2)     Note.  The element may be merely the free end of a pickup tube,
    which end can be relocated in a radial direction. In another instance, the
    element may be a perforated cover for the end of such a tube, which cover
    is threadedly engaged with the tube and may be moved radially of the member
    by changing the amount of its threaded engagement with the tube.  In still
    another instance, the element may be an externally- threaded bushing having
    an axial passage and threadedly engaged with an aperture in the wall of the
    member, and wherein, in the instance of vertically-oriented member, (a) a
    horizontally-arranged bushing may be rotated about its axis to vary its
    distance from the axis of the member, or (b) a vertically-arranged bushing,
    having its passage eccentric of its axis, may be rotated about its axis for
    varying the offset of its passage from the axis of the member.

    (3)     Note.  Occasionally, the regulation of the quantity of material
    exiting from the member at one or more locations may be utilized to vary
    the quality of material departing from the member, the departure usually
    taking place at a location or locations other than the first mentioned one
    or ones.  Art of this nature may be found in subclass 56 above.

    (4)     Note.  Although the art of this subclass sometimes identifies the
    adjustable element as a "paring device" or "skimmer," this subclass is by
    no means residual to such a component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     as explained in the reference thereto appearing in (3) Note above.


CLS 494/58
TXT Static scraper or the like for engaging material in moving bowl:

    Apparatus under subclass 56 comprising a blade or similar abutment which,
    except for purposes of repositioning, is stationary relative to a member
    which is turning about its axis, and serves to dislodge (e.g., peel off)
    material being moved against it by the member.

    (1)     Note.  Although the functional movement is that of the material
    rather than that of the blade, the latter is repositionable for certain
    purposes; for example:  (a) for moving it out of the interior of the member
    when not needed for dislodging material, or (b) for adjusting it relative
    to the surface of the material for determining the depth to which the
    material will be removed.

    (2)     Note.  The material dislodged by the blade may be either material
    which is to be recovered or material which is merely to be disposed of; in
    the latter instance, the dislodging may be more nearly in the nature of an
    operation which infers, at least, a cleaning function.

    (3)     Note.  Included here is the means, if any, for repositioning the
    blade.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 372+ for apparatus of
    that class in the nature of a filter and wherein the extractor includes a
    provision for discharging residue and additionally wherein the provision
    comprises a residue engaging means (e.g., a doctor blade), and subclasses
    391+ for a filter which is removable and is provided with cleaning means
    (see especially indented subclasses 396+ wherein the means may be in the
    nature of a scraper).


CLS 494/59
TXT And structure to receive or guide material loosened:

    Apparatus under subclass 58 comprising structure which either accumulates,
    or provides a path for the movement of, material which has been dislodged
    by the blade.


CLS 494/60
TXT Including housing for bowl:

    Apparatus under subclass 43 wherein the member is provided with structure
    for enclosing or shrouding it to one degree or another.

    (1)     Note.  The structure of this subclass usually serves to support the
    member.

    (2)     Note.  The structure may or may not be identified by terminology
    such as "housing," "casing," etc.

    (3)     Note.  As discussed in (2) Note of subclass 26 above and in the
    search  note to this subclass (60) appearing there, this subclass contains
    art which relates to the movement, in the housing, of air which already is
    present there.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     as explained in the reference thereto appearing in (3) Note above.


CLS 494/61
TXT With means for reducing, and maintaining, pressure in housing below that of
    environment: Apparatus under subclass 60 wherein the enclosing or shrouding
    structure is provided with means for (a) at least partially evacuating the
    structure relative to its surroundings and (b) keeping it approximately at
    that degree of evacuation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for a separator provided with means for furnishing an auxillary
    fluid and wherein that fluid is a gas other than air.  In this regard, it
    should be noted that, in the event that the gas is intended to replace air
    as the fluid present in the interior of the structure, it may be necessary
    to first draw off some portion of the air.

    39,     for a separator which includes sealing means for protecting an
    evacuated, bowl-enclosing housing against gaseous infiltration.


CLS 494/62
TXT Serving to support bowl from above:
    Apparatus under subclass 60 wherein the enclosing or shrouding structure
    includes a provision for suspending the member.


CLS 494/63
TXT For vertically-oriented bowl, and having plural receivers at top for
    separated components: Apparatus under subclass 60 wherein the enclosing or
    shrouding structure has an upper portion which comprises two or more
    compartments, into each of which is fed a separate component of the
    material.

    (1)     Note.  In their common form, the compartments are in stacked
    relationship, with the lower one serving to close the open top of the
    structure.

    (2)     Note.  Each compartment ordinarily is provided with a spout for the
    exit of the component.

    (3)     Note.  In the language of the art, "cover" is a term commonly
    applied to such a compartment.


CLS 494/64
TXT Having structural provision for facilitating cleaning (e.g., quick
    take-apart):

    Apparatus under subclass 43 wherein the member has, as an aspect of its
    structure, one or more features which are intended to expedite, simplify or
    otherwise contribute to (e.g., by affording accessibility) the removal of
    material therefrom, frequently material which has accumulated therein
    during a separating operation.

    (1)     Note.  While the art of this subclass almost invariably includes a
    reference to "cleaning", an expression of that nature should not be
    interpreted as meaning, necessarily, that the material is not wanted;
    further in this regard, see (2) Note of subclass 58 above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23+,    for a separator provided with means for furnishing auxiliary fluid,
    and particularly subclasses 27+ thereof wherein the additional fluid is a
    liquid; see also the reference to cleaning which appears in (2) Note of
    subclass 23.

    58,     as explained in the reference thereto appearing in (1) Note above.


CLS 494/65
TXT Vertically-oriented, and including structural provision for bottom entry of
    material:

    Apparatus under subclass 43 wherein the member is one which turns about a
    vertical axis, and wherein the member includes structure defining an inlet
    or the like whereby material enters the member through that portion thereof
    which is lowermost.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is concerned only with the locus of entry,
    which often bears no relationship to the region within the member at which
    the material is released for movement therewithin; for example, the
    material may enter through the bottom but remain within a feed tube until
    it reaches an upper region of the member.

    (2)     Note.  The inlet or the like may or may not include a device (e.g.,
    a valve) for controlling the entry of material.

    (3)     Note.  Usually shown in the art of this subclass is the conduit
    (e.g., a hollow drive spindle) for conducting material to the inlet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5+,     for a separator provided with condition responsive means for
    controlling an inlet valve.

    23+,    for a separator provided with means for furnishing auxiliary fluid,
    as contrasted with the admission here (65) of material.


CLS 494/66
TXT Including structure located within bowl and defining axially-extending,
    helical flow path:

    Apparatus under subclass 43 wherein the member includes internal structure
    which moves with it and serves to establish a route for the movement of at
    least part of the material, and wherein the route established is in the
    form of a helix which parallels the axis of rotation of the member.

    (1)     Note.  Frequently, the structure of this subclass is tubular in
    nature, but it may be, instead, rodlike, striplike, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for a separator wherein the rotatable bowl comprises a plurality of
    bowls which are partly or wholly within one another, and see (3) Note
    thereof for an explanation of the resemblance which sometimes exists
    between the art of that subclass (44) and that of this subclass (66).

    53+,    for a separator wherein the rotatable bowl includes driven
    material-moving means therewithin and wherein the means is driven
    rotatably, and coaxially with the bowl, but differs in direction or speed
    from the rotation of the bowl and further wherein the means includes an
    element having a helical blade.


CLS 494/67
TXT Including structure located within vertically-oriented bowl and extending
    outwardly from central region (e.g., axis) thereof:

    Apparatus under subclass 43 wherein the member turns about a generally
    vertical axis and includes internal structure which moves with it, and
    wherein the structure is so formed and positioned as to extend away from
    either (a) the axis of rotation of the member, or (b) a locus somewhat
    removed from the axis, in a manner whereby it is directed, at least in
    part, toward a sidewall of the member.

    (1)     Note.  The phrase, "a locus somewhat removed from the axis", is
    necessitated by the fact that the region immediately surrounding the axis
    is sometimes (a) an open space, or (b) occupied by an element such as a
    feed tube.

    (2)     Note.  Although the structure of this and the indented subclasses
    extends in the direction of a sidewall of the member, it is the exception
    rather than the rule for it to engage therewith.

    (3)     Note.  The sturcture of this area usually presents a surface across
    which one or more components of the material flow when the member is
    turning about its axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for a separator wherein the rotatable bowl comprises a plurality of
    bowls which are partly or wholly within one another, and see (3) Note
    thereof for an explanation of the resemblance which sometimes exists
    between the art of that subclass (44) and that of this area (67+).


CLS 494/68
TXT Comprising plurality of elements, each concentrically encircling axis of
    bowl and spaced therealong:

    Apparatus under subclass 67 wherein the internal structure comprises, at
    least in part, a plurality of elements which are centered on and extend
    around the vertical axis of the member and which are arrayed (e.g., nested,
    stacked, etc.) along that axis in such a manner that at least a slight gap
    exists between any two adjacent elements.

    (1)     Note.  Although the elements have the axis as their geometric
    center, they frequently do not originate at the axis, as discussed in (1)
    Note of subclass 67 above.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     as explained in the reference thereto appearing in (1) Note above.


CLS 494/69
TXT Each extended generally normally to region, and having surface displaying
    three-dimensional configuration:

    Apparatus under subclass 68 wherein theoutward extension of each of the
    elements is at more or less of a right angle to the axis, or to a locus
    somewhat removed from the axis, and wherein each element has at least one
    of its two, principal (i.e., more or less axially-facing) surfaces formed
    with a pattern which includes a depth (i.e., a normal-to-the-surface)
    dimension.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note of subclass 73 below.

    (2)     Note.  See (2) Note of subclass 73 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73,     as explained in the reference thereto appearing in each of (1) Note
    and (2) Note above.


CLS 494/70
TXT Each extending away from region with significant downward, as well as
    significant outward, component (e.g., nested cones): Apparatus under
    subclass 68 wherein each of the elements shows, in section, a profile which
    is directed not only appreciably outwardly, but also appreciably
    downwardly, as the element extends away from the axis, or from a locus
    somewhat removed from the axis.

    (1)     Note.  The initial downward and outward direction of the element
    often results in imparting thereto the appearance of a cone, or, more
    specifically, a truncated cone.

    (2)     Note.  The presence of a relatively small, inwardly- or
    downwardly-directed "flange" at the inner periphery of one or more of the
    elements is not considered to exclude such a group of elements from this
    and the indented subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  While the downwardly and outwardly profile usually is linear
    in appearance, it occasionally shows as a line having some degree of
    curvature (e.g., the sides of the "cone" are bulged).

    (4)     Note.  Frequently, structure is provided for spacing adjacent
    elements from one another; for a further discussion of this structure, see
    (2) Note of subclass 73 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73,     as explained in the reference thereto appearing in (4) Note above.


CLS 494/71
TXT And the plurality divided vertically into two or more, physically separate
    or functionally distinct groups:

    Apparatus under subclass 70 wherein the plurality of elements comprise at
    least two groups of elements, one above another, and wherein the manner in
    which the groups can be differentiated may lie either (a) in the fact that
    one group is spaced from another group or (b) in the fact that one group
    plays a somewhat different role (e.g., is utilized at a different time) in
    the separating function than does another group.


CLS 494/72
TXT And extending therebeyond generally downwardly:

    Apparatus under subclass 70 wherein each element extends additionally,
    beyond the downward and outward portion, in a direction which is at least
    principally, if not exclusively, downward.

    (1)     Note.  The plurality of additional extensions of this subclass
    often presents the appearance of a plurality of concentric cylinders (if
    directed exclusively downward) or near-cylinders (if directed principally
    downward).


CLS 494/73
TXT And one or more elements having surface displaying three-dimensional
    configuration: Apparatus under subclass 70 wherein at least one of the
    elements has one or both of its two, principal (i.e., more or less
    axially-facing) surfaces formed with a pattern which includes a depth
    (i.e., a normal-to-the-surface) dimension.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the pattern will appear on both surfaces, inasmuch
    as it is most commonly formed by stamping; e.g., a corrugated surface.

    (2)     Note.  There mere provision of an occasional dimple in one or both
    of the surfaces of an element, for the purpose of spacing it from the
    elements adjacent to it, is not considered to constitute subject matter for
    this subclass.  On the other hand, some of the structure utilized for
    spacing elements from one another is more complex, especially that which
    not only spaces the elements but also guides the flow of material which is
    passing therebetween, which structure does, indeed, present a
    three-dimensional aspect that is properly classifiable here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for a separator having a rotatable bowl which is
    vertically-oriented and includes structure which extends outwardly from the
    central region (e.g., the axis) thereof and wherein the structure comprises
    a plurality of elements, each of which concentrically encircles the axis of
    the bowl and is spaced vertically therealong, and further wherein each
    element extends generally normally to the central region and has a surface
    which displays a three-dimensional configuration; see also the reference to
    this subclass (73) appearing in each of (1) Note and (2) Note thereof.

    70,     in regard to the reference to this subclass (73) appearing in (4)
    Note thereof.


CLS 494/74
TXT Comprising plurality of axially-extending, plate-like elements, each having
    its inner edge lying along central region:

    Apparatus under subclass 67 wherein the internal structure comprises, at
    least in part, a plurality of elements which (a) parallel the axis of the
    member, (b) have length (i.e., height) and width dimensions, especially the
    former, which greatly exceed their thickness dimension, and (c) each have
    the edge thereof which faces toward the interior of the member located
    proximate to either the axis or a locus parallel thereto and somewhat
    removed therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  For the purposes of this area (74+), "platelike" is not
    restricted to describing only an element which appears, in a horizontal
    section, as a straight line; in fact, indented subclass 75 provides for an
    element which shows, in such a section, as a curved line of one form or
    another.

    (2)     Note.  Subclass 79 below provides for a plurality of elements which
    may be structurally similar to the elements of this area (74+), but which
    lack the association with the central region of the member that is required
    here (74+). In some instances that lack of association results from the
    fact that the elements of that subclass (79) may originate at the wall of
    the member and extend inwardly, to one degree or another, therefrom.  In
    the event that the presence, or absence, of an association with the central
    region is not clear, the doubt should be resolved in favor of
    classification here (74+).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     as explained in the reference thereto appearing in (2) Note above,
    and see, especially, (2) Note of that subclass (79).


CLS 494/75
TXT And each extending outwardly in curve of changing or constant radius:

    Apparatus under subclass 74 wherein that dimension (i.e., width) of each
    element which extends outwardly describes, in a horizontal section, a
    nonlinear path in the nature of either a spiral or an arc of a circle.

    (1)     Note.  By virtue of their curvature, the elements of this subclass
    intersect radial lines of the member.

    (2)     Note.  The elements may be resilient in nature, in which event
    their curvature may be the result of their being forced, distortably, into
    position within the member.


CLS 494/76
TXT Including plurality of axially-extending, tubular elements located within
    vertically-oriented bowl:

    Apparatus under subclass 43 wherein the member turns about a generally
    vertical axis and includes internal structure which moves with it, and
    wherein that structure comprises, at least in part, a plurality of elements
    which parallel the axis and are in the nature of hollow cylinders.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for a separator wherein the rotatable bowl comprises a plurality of
    bowls which are partly or wholly within one another, and see (3) Note
    thereof for an explanation of the resemblance which sometimes exists
    between the art of that subclass (44) and that of this area (76+).


CLS 494/77
TXT Each element concentric with axis of bowl: Apparatus under subclass 76
    wherein each of the elements has, as its center, the axis of the member,
    whereby the elements are located one within another.

    (1)     Note.  The annular space between adjacent elements sometimes is
    subdivided by one or more vertical partitions into two or more,
    less-than-annular spaces, the purpose being to break up or prevent flow in
    a direction circumferentially of the elements.


CLS 494/78
TXT And at least one element having other-than-circular periphery:

    Apparatus under subclass 77 wherein one or more of the elements describes,
    in horizontal section, something other than a mere circle.

    (1)     Note.  The formation of the sidewall of an element in such a manner
    as to show, in plan, a periphery which comprises peaks and valleys, or the
    like, often is done for the purpose of increasing the surface area of the
    element.


CLS 494/79
TXT Including plurality of axially-extending, plate-like elements located
    within vertically-oriented bowl:

    Apparatus under subclass 43 wherein the member turns about a generally
    vertical axis and includes internal structure which moves with it, and
    wherein that structure comprises, at least in part, a plurality of elements
    which (a) parallel the axis of the member and (b) have length (i.e.,
    height) and width dimensions, especially the former, which greatly exceed
    their thickness dimension.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note of subclass 74 above, which is applicable here
    (79), also.

    (2)     Note.  See (2) Note of subclass 74 above for an explanation of the
    relationship between the platelike elements of that area (74+) and those of
    this subclass (79).  It may be observed, additionally, that the platelike
    elements of this subclass (79) are somewhat more likely to be in the nature
    of vanes for accelerating material than they are to be, as in the instance
    of the 74+ area, surfaces forming paths of flow for material moving away
    from or toward the axis of rotation  of the member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for a separator wherein the rotatable bowl comprises a plurality of
    bowls which are partly or wholly within one another, and see (3) Note
    thereof for an explanation of the resemblance which sometimes exists
    between the art of that subclass (44) and that of this subclass (79).

    74+,    as explained in the reference thereto appearing in (1) Note and (2)
    Note above.


CLS 494/80
TXT Including plurality of shelf-like elements located within
    vertically-oriented bowl and extending generally horizontally inwardly from
    wall thereof:

    Apparatus under subclass 43 wherein the member turns about a generally
    vertical axis and includes internal structure which moves with it, and
    wherein that structure comprises, at least in part, a plurality of elements
    which (a) have more or less planar, upwardly-facing surfaces and (b) extend
    more or less normally from the inner surface of the sidewall of the member
    toward the axis thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The elements sometimes are rather abbreviated in their
    inward extent, in which event they may more nearly resemble distorted
    grooves formed in the sidewall surface.


CLS 494/81
TXT Material of bowl wall:

    Apparatus under subclass 43 wherein the wall of the member is claimed in
    terms of the chemical, mechanical, metallurgical, or physical
    characteristics or properties of the substance or substances of which it is
    formed.

    (1)     Note.  Exemplary of the art of this subclass is the claiming of the
    wall in terms of (a) the composition of the material utilized for making
    it, (b) its strengthening by the use of reinforcing elements or by
    laminating, or (c) its increased resistance to corrosion or wear by the
    provision of a coating (e.g., a plating) or a lining (e.g., a film).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for a separator which includes means or structure for promoting
    safety, and see the reference to this subclass (81) appearing in (1) Note
    thereof.


CLS 494/82
TXT INCLUDING VIBRATION DAMPING MEANS: Apparatus under the class definition
    which includes means for reducing, eliminating or counteracting the
    development of unintended movement (e.g., oscillatory, reciprocatory) on
    the part of the separator or a component thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The development of the unintended movement may indicate the
    existence of a condition of imbalance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7,      for a separator provided with condition-responsive means for
    controlling the drive of either the bowl or a driven means within the bowl,
    and see especially (2) Note of that subclass.

    43,     particularly in regard to the reference to this subclass (82)
    appearing in (3) Note thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    68,     Textiles:  Fluid Treating Apparatus, subclasses 23.1+ for a machine
    of that class combined with a liquid extractor and wherein the extractor is
    of the centrifugal type and is provided with means to control or isolate
    vibration.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 573 for a machine element in
    the nature of a flywheel or rotor which is provided with balancing means.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 144 for apparatus of
    that class which has automatic control and wherein the control is
    responsive to vibration or unbalance, and subclass 363 for apparatus in the
    nature of a filter and wherein the filter is movable and comprises a
    centrifugal extractor and further wherein the extractor is provided with an
    adjustable rotation stabilizer.


CLS 494/83
TXT INCLUDING BEARING STRUCTURE:

    Apparatus under the class definition which includes one or more devices for
    aligning, supporting or otherwise holding a component which is subject to
    movement (e.g., linear, rotary) relative to a component which is
    stationary, and isolating, to one degree or another, the effect of the
    movement of the one upon the nonmovement of the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     particularly in regard to the reference to this subclass (83)
    appearing in (3) Note thereof.

    46,     for a separator wherein the rotatable bowl includes bearing means
    adapted to enable the bowl to establish a dynamic axis of rotation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    384,    Bearings, appropriate subclasses for bearings, per se.


CLS 494/84
TXT INCLUDING SPECIFIC DEVICE OR STRUCTURE FOR DRIVING OR CONTROLLING BOWL:

    Apparatus under the class definition which includes a prime mover, gear
    train, clutch, brake, or the like, for starting, rotating, or stopping, or
    otherwise regulating the speed of, the member, which prime mover, etc., is
    either claimed with specificity or else is claimed broadly but disclosed in
    detail.

    (1)     Note.  A nominal recital of, for example, "an electric motor",
    absent a disclosure of particular characteristics, properties, or structure
    thereof, is not sufficient for classification here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for a separator provided with means for furnishing auxiliary fluid
    thereto and wherein energy possessed by that fluidis utilized for driving
    the bowl.

    43,     particularly in regard to the reference to this area (84) appearing
    in (3) Note thereof.

    47+,    for a separator wherein the rotatable bowl includes means for
    imparting other movement to the bowl, in whole or in part, either before,
    during or after its axial rotation.


CLS 494/85
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Apparatus under the class definition not otherwise provided for.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 494/900
TXT INVOLVING MIXTURE CONTAINING ONE OR MORE GASES:

    Separating apparatus wherein at least one gas is present in the mixture
    entering the apparatus.


CLS 494/901
TXT INVOLVING MIXTURE CONTAINING OIL:

    Separting apparatus wherein oil of one kind or another is present in the
    mixture entering the apparatus.


CLS 494/902
TXT INVOLVING THE USE OF MERCURY:

    Separating apparatus wherein mercury is utilized, directly or indirectly,
    to contribute to, supplement, etc., the functioning of the apparatus.


CLS 501/
TTL COMPOSITIONS:  CERAMIC

CLS 501/
TXT

    I.      STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    II.     GLOSSARY

    III.    CLASSIFICATION LINES AND SEARCH NOTES TO OTHER CLASSES

    A.      Lines with and search notes to compound, composition, and material
    classes.

    1.      Compounds.

    2.      Composition or material.

    B.      Lines with and search notes to article or product classes.

    C.      Lines with and search notes to process and apparatus classes.

    1.      General relation with process and apparatus classes.

    2.      Relation with special classes involving ceramics.

    D.      Lines and search notes to special classes.

    I.      STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    This is the generic class for:

    A.      Glass compositions and compositions for making glass, i.e., glass
    batch compositions, devitrified glass-ceramic compositions and processes
    for producing such compositions. These compositions may be regarded as
    thermoplastic compositions.

    B.      Refractory compositions comprising primarily earthy, inorganic
    materials, and/or elemental carbon.

    C.      Fired clay containing compositions in the nature of porcelain,
    earthenware, and similar materials. These compositions may be  regarded as
    thermosetting compositions.

    D.      See the Glossary for the definition of the term "ceramic".

    (1)     Note.  Optional ingredients. Disclosures reciting an optional
    ingredient, such as a statement that a composition includes a range of
    concentration of the ingredient, including zero percent as the lower end of
    the range (i.e., containing or comprising   0 - X percent by weight of that
    ingredient) are classified in a more generic subclass and cross-referenced
    to an indented subclass which provides for the presence of that ingredient.
     As an example, a refractory composition which comprises  0 - 10 percent of
    silicon carbide might be classified as an original in subclass 87 and
    cross-referenced in subclass 88.

    (2)     Note.  Mol percent and weight percent.  When in a disclosure
    otherwise classifiable in subclasses 54, 55, 73, 121, or 131 recites the
    concentration of the material specified in the subclass title is in mol
    percent rather than weight percent, it may be necessary to calculate the
    equivalent weight percent to classify the disclosure properly.

    II.     GLOSSARY

    (1)     Note.  The meaning to be given to the various "art" terms appearing
    in this class, but which have not been included in the Glossary below, is
    the same as that generally accepted or in common usage.  However, certain
    terms employed in this class, which are included below, have been assigned
    definitions tailored to meet the needs of this class and therefore those
    may be more restricted or less limited or even altogether different from
    those in common usage.

    ALKALINE EARTH METAL
    Alkaline Earth Metal is considered to be generic to calcium, strontium, and
    barium. In this class (501), magnesium is not considered to be an alkaline
    earth metal and compositions containing magnesium compounds are generally
    provided for apart from those of alkaline earth metals.

    CERAMIC
    Inorganic compositions which are heat treated to harden them during their
    manufacture or subsequent use by firing, calcining, sintering, or fusion of
    at least a portion of the inorganic material, including glass compositions,
    fired clay compositions which form, e.g., porcelain or brick, and
    refractories.  Such materials typically, but not necessarily, include
    earthy materials, such as metal (and especially mixed metal) silicates.

    CLAY
    The naturally occurring earthy materials (or artificial compositions having
    generally equivalent chemical and physical properties) containing a
    substantial proportion (30 percent or more) of colloidal particles (under
    .002mm.), and which becomes plastic when mixed with water and which plastic
    material is capable of being hardened when fired and containing a major
    proportion of hydrated aluminum silicates which are derived by the
    weathering or decomposition of granite or other feldspathic rock.

    (1)     Note.  Many natural materials are considered to be clays, e.g.,
    kaolin, fire clays, ball clays, china clays, bentonite, fuller's earth,
    bauxite, montmorillonite, halloysite, and argillaceous earths.

    (2)     Note.  Typical clay containing ceramic compositions or articles
    are, e.g., common or face brick, structural blocks, porcelain bricks,
    pottery, china, terra cotta, tile, sewer pipe, and some coating and filling
    compositions.

    EARTHENWARE, PORCELAIN
    These terms designate fine grained or fully vitreous, high fired white or
    translucent ceramic materials, frequently, but not always containing clay
    or similar plastic components.  Among many terms used to designate somewhat
    similar materials are stoneware, earthenware, porcelain, pottery, china,
    whiteware, tile, crockery, sanitaryware, terra cotta, bisque, rakuware, and
    slip cast ware.  They are not intended for use in the high temperature or
    corrosive environments where materials referred to as refractories are
    typically employed.

    FIBER
    A slender, elongated structure of relatively small, uniform diameter having
    a much greater length, which may have a relatively short finite length or
    an indeterminate length.

    FRIT
    A glass composition in a powdered or granulated state prepared by fusing
    the glass and quenching it in a cold liquid. Frits form an important part
    of the batches used in compounding glazes and enamels.

    GLASS
    Inorganic compositions which solidify from the molten state without
    crystallizing, to have that molecular disorder characteristic of the glass
    state, which have no definite melting point, are incapable in the solid
    state of permanent deformation, which fracture when subjected to
    deformation tension and include as components at least one "glass former"
    material.

    (1)     Note.  Typical glass formers are, e.g., oxides of silicon,
    beryllium, boron, germanium, phosphorus, vanadium, lead, tin, zinc,
    zirconium, and titanium, as well as such nonoxide compounds as GeS, metal
    fluorides, or iodides, and some metallic selenides, tellurides, arsenides,
    and phosphides.  These compositions may also include other oxides devoid of
    glass forming tendencies, e.g., oxides of alkali metals, alkaline earth
    metals, and magnesium.

    (2)     Note.  Many ceramic compositions containing primarily slag, the by
    product of metal refining and smelting are considered to be glasses.

    (3)     Note.  Neither transparency to light nor the absence of color are
    necessary for a composition to be considered as a glass for the purpose of
    this class.

    (4)     Note.  Water glass, Plexiglas, and isinglass are not considered to
    be glass for the purpose of classification in Class 501.

    (5)     Note.  Organic, noncrystalline solid materials, such as synthetic
    resins which may be referred to as organic glasses, e.g., Plexiglas, are
    not considered to be glass for the purpose of classification in Class 501.

    PORE FORMING (POROUS, MULTICELLULAR)
    These terms embrace porous compositions, compositions intended to be
    further treated to make them porous or processes for effecting the porosity
    or multicellularity. A positive step for causing porosity must be recited
    and porosity which is the result of including a naturally porous material
    in the composition is not classified in the pore-forming subclasses of this
    class (501).

    RARE EARTH ELEMENT
    As used in this class (501), this term encompasses those elements having
    atomic numbers from 57 through 71 inclusive, and 89+. Thus, the following
    elements are herein treated as rare earth elements:  lanthanum, cerium,
    praesodymium, neodymium, promethium, samarium, europium, gadolmium,
    terbium, dysprosium, holmium, erbium, thulium, ytterbium, lutecium,
    actinium, thorium, protoactinium, uranium, neptunium, and plutonium.

    REFRACTORY
    Compositions which are specifically formulated to be resistant to abrasion,
    corrosion and physical or chemical disintegration when subjected to high
    temperatures, chemically corrosive environments and/or rapid temperature
    changes.

    (1)     Note.  Refractory materials are typically used to produce furnace
    and kiln linings, fire brick, kiln furniture and saggers, and pyroceramic
    cones.

    (2)     Note.  Among naturally occurring materials widely used in making
    refractory products are, e.g., magnesite, dolomite, and chrome-  magnesite.

    VITREOUS, VITRIFY
    Vitrification is the progressive fusion of the particles in a ceramic body.
     As vitrification progresses, the proportion of glassy bond increases and
    the apparent porosity of the substance decreases.  Glass in a massive form
    (rather than in a frit or powder) and procelain are considered to be fully
    vitrified.

    III.    CLASSIFICATION LINES AND SEARCH NOTES TO OTHER CLASSES

    A.      Lines with and search notes to compound, compositions, and material
    classes.

    1.      A compound, per se, is classified in a compound class regardless of
    utility.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 157.15+ for processes of preparing a specific
    compound utilizing a wave energy process.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses for
    inorganic compound or nonmetallic element disclosed or claimed having a
    utility in a Class 501 composition.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, the series for synthetic
    resin, per se, even though such resin is disclosed or claimed as having a
    Class 501 utility.  A resin,  per se, is one containing no intentional
    additive to perfect it for a Class 501 purpose.  See the remainder of the
    class (260) for an organic compound having a Class 501 utility not provided
    for elsewhere.  This portion of Class 260 is being reclassified into the
    530 to 570 series of classes.  See the search notes thereunder.  Especially
    see Class 526 for polymers of unsaturated monomers only, per se, even if
    disclosed or claimed as having a Class 501 utility.

    2.      Composition or Material.

    A.      The following general lines exist between Class 501 and other
    composition or material classes or with classes containing patents wherein
    the claims recite a composition limited to an art use provided for in that
    class.

    (1)     A composition having no art use claimed, but disclosed as having a
    single art use is classified with the art use.

    (2)     Compositions which are disclosed as having a plurality of functions
    provided for in different main classes and only a single use, property, or
    function is claimed, are placed in the composition class providing for such
    claimed use, property, or function and cross- referenced to other classes
    for disclosed uses, properties, or functions when desirable.

    (3)     A list of superiority of composition classes appears in the main
    class definition of Class 252 Compositions (5) Note.  This note in Class
    252 explains classification of a generic composition with several disclosed
    uses.

    504,    Plant Protecting and Regulating Compositions.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products.

    71,     Chemistry: Fertilizers

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof.

    252,    Compositions,  subclasses 9+.

    44,     Fuel and Igniting Devices.

    148,    Metal Treatment.

    508,    Solid Antifriction Devices, Materials Therefor, Lubricant and
    Separant Compositions for Moving Solid Surfaces, and Miscellaneous Mineral
    Oil Compositions

    106,    Compositions: Coating or Plastic, subclasses 1.05 to 38.9.

    501,    Compositions: Ceramic.

    106,    Compositions: Coating or Plastic, subclasses 122 - 316, 600 - 823.

    51,     Abrading Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers.

    252,    Compositions (nonspecial uses or functions).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures subclasses 230+ for consolidated metal powders containing a
    nonmetallic component, including the so-called cermets.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 600+ for alkali metal
    silicate containing coating or plastic compositions other


             than ceramic compositions; subclasses 638+ for inorganic settable
    coating or plastic compositions which are not ceramic, e.g., Portland
    cements, albuminous cements, plaster of Paris, and slag cements;
    particularly subclasses 739+ for Portland cement; subclasses 772+ for
    cementitious materials made from gypsum; subclasses 288+ for fillers,
    pigments, or aggregates which may be used to produce ceramic compositions;
    subclass 312 for opacifiers for enamel; and subclass 313 for fluxes to be
    used in producing ceramic compositions.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 62 for heat or sound insulating
    compositions; subclasses 62.3+ for barrier layer compositions; subclasses
    62.51+ for magnetic compositions; subclass 62.9 for piezoelectric
    compositions; subclass 300 for optical filter compositions; subclasses
    301.17+ for lasing compositions; subclasses 410+ for catalysts or solid
    adsorbent compositions; and subclasses 500+ for electrically emissive or
    conductive compositions.  The general line between Class 252 and the class
    (501) is that if a specific use provided for in Class 252 is disclosed,
    whether or not other uses are disclosed, the composition is classified in
    Class 252, whether claimed broadly or in terms of the 252 use.

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses for cleaning compositions, including detergents, for use on
    solid materials.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Classes 523 and 524 for a Synthetic Resin or Natural Rubbers
    containing a filler which may be a ceramic material.

    (4)     This superiorty list is not intended as a complete list and will be
    expanded or added to as the relationship between classes containing
    compositions and the above listed classes is determined.

    (5)     Compositions which are disclosed as having a plurality of uses,
    properties, or functions provided for in different main classes noted in
    (3) above and there are no claims to any use, property, or function are
    placed in Class 252, Compositions.

    (6)     It is the general rule of classification to classify a process of
    preparing a composition along with the composition.  In these circumstances
    where only a process of preparing a composition is claimed and there is no
    claim to a composition, the claims would be classified identically as if
    there were a composition claimed (notes 1, 2, 3, and 4 above).

    B.      Lines with and search notes to articles or product classes.

    1.      As a general rule, a product (article) is classified with the class
    specifically providing for the same or a generic class which can take the
    same.

    2.      Class 501, Compositions:  Ceramic, provides for an article or
    product defined in terms of its compositions.

    3.      An article or product defined by section III,B,2 supra, combined
    with significant structure for another class will be classified in the
    class providing for the structure and crossed to Class 501.

    4.      Subject matter involving multiple claimed inventions, i.e., claims
    for both Class 501 and classes mentioned in section III,A,2, or III,B,3
    supra, will be classified in said class and crossed to Class 501.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    13,     Electric Furnaces, subclass 35 for furnace linings.

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 345 for structured cutlery articles defined in
    part in terms of the materials of its makeup.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses for
    structures of that class made of ceramic material.

    55,     Gas Separation, appropriate subclasses for apparatus having ceramic
    filtering material, especially subclasses 522+; particularly subclass 523
    for specific media material, ceramic or sintered.

    71,     Chemistry:  Fertilizers, appropriate subclasses for fertilizers
    containing ceramic material.

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclasses 262+ for
    electrical contacts composed of named material.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 280+ for
    electrolytic electrodes.

    249,    Static Molds, subclass 134 for molds having named material
    classifiable, per se, in this class (501).

    252,    Compositions, subclass 62 for sound or heat insulators defined by
    their composition which is other than ceramic.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    appropriate subclasses for those devices which contain ceramic material,
    including subclasses 700, 701+, especially 703 and 705 for ceramic housing
    or package materials.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, subclasses 94+ and 100+ for
    porous contact devices in the form of a mass or sheet.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, appropriate subclasses for electrical
    resistors having ceramic material.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements,
    appropriate subclasses for articles of that class having ceramic materials,
    especially glass, which may be classified, per se, in this class (501).

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 320 and
    321.1+ for fixed capacitors having ceramic and glass materials.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclasses 409+ for nuclear fuels with significant structural features
    which may be made of a named ceramic composition.  However, ceramic
    compositions, per se, which may be useful to construct nuclear fuel
    elements are classified in this class (501).

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 17+ for
    preparation of pavements; and subclasses 72+ for processes of preparing
    road structures which may involve a Class 501 composition.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 304.4+ for
    stock material containing one cellular or porous component which may
    comprise a ceramic composition; subclass 426 for nonstructural laminated
    stock material which includes a glass composition; subclasses 446+ for
    nonstructural laminated stock material which includes a composition
    including silicon or a compound of silicon; and 539.5, for stock material
    containing free metal particles and ceramic particles wherein there is a
    metal continuous phase interengaged with a nonmetal continuous phase as a
    result, e.g., of a sintering operation.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process, appropriate subclasses for chemical current producing structures
    which may comprise a ceramic component and for processes of producing
    electric current by chemical means utilizing or producing a ceramic
    composition.

    433,    Dentistry, appropriate subclasses for ceramic dental articles.

    505,    Superconductor Technology:  Apparatus, Material, Process,
    subclasses 100+ for high temperature (Tc  30 K) superconducting materials,
    per se, or subclasses 300+ for processes of producing same.

    C.      Process and Apparatus Classes

    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, subclass 230 for physical processes
    pertaining to ceramic material.

    29,     Metal Working, appropriate subclasses for a process of making
    articles having ceramic material.

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, for process and
    apparatus for drying ceramic material.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, appropriate subclasses for glass working or
    treating.  See the class definition of Class 65 for the line between
    Classes 65 and 501, especially the Glossary therein for the definitions of
    glass working and glass treating, subclasses 2+ for such process of making
    fibers or filaments; subclasses 19+ for processes employing slag;
    subclasses 21+ for bead making; subclass 22 for preforming; subclass 33 for
    devitrifying or vitrifying crystalline glass; subclasses 36+ for fusion
    bonding of glass to a preformed part, subclasses 60.1+ for a process
    involving glass working or treating, as well as coating; and subclasses
    134+ for processes of purifying or homogenizing molten glass.

    71,     Chemistry:  Fertilizers, appropriate subclasses for process of
    using ceramic materials in fertilizers.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder  Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 201+ for pyrometallurgy process involving sintering a
    metal and nonmetal.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses for
    nonceramic coating or plastic compositions, especially subclasses 74+ for
    alkali metal silicate containing compositions; subclasses 85+ for inorganic
    settable compositions; particularly subclasses 100+ for Portland cement
    making; subclasses 109+ for making cementitious materials from gypsum;
    subclass 312 for opacifiers intended for inclusion in enamel compositions;
    and subclass 313 for fluxes intended to be used in ceramic compositions.

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 323 for refractory type baffle or heat retainer
    structure of a furnace and subclasses 338+ for brick element.

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes and non-coating apparatus for
    growing therein-defined single-crystal of all types of materials, including
    ceramic.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, appropriate subclasses for stoves and furnaces
    which may contain a ceramic element, especially subclass 400 for fireless
    cookers which are heat accumulators; subclasses 204+ for body warmers; and
    subclass 273.5 for ovens.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclass 18 for process of
    using apparatus of the class of particular composition.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses for
    process and apparatus using ceramic material in a liquid separation
    operation.

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, for methods of chemically etching
    ceramic materials.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 73+ for a slag composition being used
    as an environment for electric heating.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses for process or apparatus for comminuting materials.  See section
    2 of the Class 241 definition for the class line.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    for processes of molding or shaping compositions of matter which include
    significant molding or shaping operation.  The line between this class
    (501) and Class 264 is as follows:  Class 501 takes processes of making
    compositions within the class definition even though including the step of
    molding, when such step is claimed broadly.  Broad references to extruding,
    spinning into a setting medium (without naming the medium) or sheeting in a
    claim to the preparation of a composition of matter, are considered broad
    molding steps.  Also the statement that heat and pressure are used during
    the molding, whether or not specific temperatures or specific pressures are
    recited, is not considered sufficient of itself to take a patent claiming a
    process of preparing a composition out of this class (501).  See especially
    subclasses 239+ for shaping or molding a ceramic article; and digest 39 for
    processes of treating clay before and after molding.  For a detailed
    discussion of the line between Class 264 and the composition classes, see
    the definitions of Class 264 and the notes to subclasses 603+ therein.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclass 280 for linings for metallurgical
    apparatus.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 75+ for processes
    of treating earth or a roadway in situ including the application of a
    ceramic material thereto, and see the note to Class 501 in the main class
    definition of Class 404.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 263+ for processes and
    apparatus for chemical treatment of earth formations in situ to condition
    the formation or to prevent undesired movement thereof.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 245.1+ for non-coating
    crystallization apparatus not including means for chemical reaction not
    provided for elsewhere and subclasses 129+ for non-coating crystallization
    apparatus including means for chemical reaction and not provided for
    elsewhere.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    appropriate subclasses for apparatus for shaping or treating ceramic
    compositions other than glass.

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclasses for processes of coating
    with ceramic compositions.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electric Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process, subclasses 247+ for battery separators which may comprise a
    ceramic material.

    432,    Heating, subclasses 1+ for a residual process of heating or
    calcining an object or material which is clearly distinct from the
    composition and for processes and apparatus for the firing of ceramic
    materials not involving the shaping thereof.

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 28+ for an abrading process using ceramic
    materials.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the containment and storage of hazardous or toxic waste
    which may involve vitrification.

    D.      Special Classes

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 228+ for consolidated metal powders which may contain
    a ceramic material in which the metal particles form a continuous phase,
    but the ceramic particles do not form a continuous phase.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 38 for glass
    containing wire mesh reinforcement; subclasses 426+ for plural layer stock
    material in which at least one layer contains a glass; and subclass 539.5
    for sintered compacts comprising both metal or alloy particles and ceramic
    particles in which there is present a metal continuous phase interengaged
    with a ceramic continuous phase.

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    appropriate subclasses for glass fiber fabric.


CLS 501/1
TXT CERAMIC COMPOSITIONS:

    Compositions under the class definition other than Portland cement or
    cementitious material prepared from gypsum, having an inorganic base, which
    are heat treated to effect hardening or fusion followed by hardening when
    cooled either during their manufacture or during subsequent use by firing,
    calcining, sintering, or fusion of at least part of the inorganic material,
    and processes not elsewhere classified for their production.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are glass compositions, refractory materials
    employed in furnace and crucible walls, kiln-fired clay products, and
    similar materials.

    (2)     Note.  Ceramic dielectrics, such as those containing barium
    titanate, are classified in this or indented subclasses unless they are
    disclosed or claimed as being piezoelectric, in which case, they are
    classified in Class 252, Compositions, subclass 62.9, or in Class 310,
    Electric Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 8+ if claimed as having a
    particular shape which is particular to the piezoelectric property.  If the
    ceramic dielectric is claimed or disclosed broadly as having piezoelectric
    properties, the ceramic dielectric is not classified here either as an
    original or a cross reference, but is classified in appropriate class
    provided for the piezoelectric composition, e.g., Class 252 or Class 310 as
    noted above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclasses for
    cast monoliths or ceramic members characterized by significant structural
    configuration.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 228+ for consolidated compositions of metals or alloys
    including those containing ceramic or refractory or other nonmetallic
    components, e.g. cermets.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 739+ for the making
    of Portland cement; subclasses 772+ for the preparation of cementitious
    materials from gypsum; and subclass 313 for fluxes which are to be used in
    the production of ceramic compositions.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 301.4+ for inorganic luminescent
    compositions.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclass for processes, within the class definition, including
    a significant molding operation or a significant treatment of a molded
    article.  In particular, see subclasses 30, 31+, 43+, 125, and 603+
    therein. For a detailed discussion of the line between Class 264 and the
    composition classes, see the definitions of Class 264 and the notes to
    subclasses 56+ therein.


CLS 501/2
TXT Devitrified glass ceramics:

    Compositions under subclass 1 containing a crystalline phase embedded in a
    glassy (amorphous) phase, which crystalline phase is produced by cooling a
    molten glass composition to a temperature which causes a portion only of
    the composition to crystallize while the remainder of the composition (the
    matrix) solidifies in the amorphous or glassy state.

    (1)     Note.  The crystalline phase is typically uniformly dispersed
    throughout the glassy phase and it must constitute at least 50 percent by
    weight of the total composition.

    (2)     Note.  The subclasses indented hereunder are established on the
    basis of the nature of the crystalline phase. Patents placed as originals
    in the indented subclasses may be cross-referenced when appropriate in
    other subclasses of this class on the basis of the nature of the glassy
    matrix phase.

    (3)     Note.  Documents classified as originals in this and indented
    subclasses are cross-referenced on the basis of the chemical nature of the
    glass composition disclosed into subclasses 40, 41+, and/or 53+, as
    appropriate.

    (4)     Note.  Documents classified as originals in this and indented
    subclass which are directed to optical glass compositions are
    cross-referenced to subclasses 900+.


CLS 501/3
TXT Halogen containing crystalline phase (e.g., fluormica, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 2 in which the crystalline phase includes a
    halogen atom.

    (1)     Note.  The crystalline phase may comprise, e.g., fluormica, etc.


CLS 501/4
TXT Silica containing crystalline phase (e.g., stuffed quartz, cristobalite,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the crystalline phase comprises
    silica.

    (1)     Note.  The crystalline phase may comprise, e.g., the so-called
    stuffed quartz, cristobalite (a crystalline form of SiO2), etc.


CLS 501/5
TXT Binary, ternary, quaternary, etc., metal silicate crystalline phase (e.g.,
    mullite, diopside, sphene, plagioclase, slagcerams free of alumina, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the crystalline phase comprises
    silicates of two or more metals.

    (1)     Note.  The crystalline phase may comprise, e.g., diopside
    (CaMgSiO6), sphene (CaTiSiO5), plagioclase (atriclinic feldspar), a
    slagceram free of Al2 O3, etc.


CLS 501/6
TXT Alkali metal aluminosilicate crystalline phase:

    Compositions under subclass 5 in which the silicate comprises an alkali
    metal aluminosilicate.


CLS 501/7
TXT Lithium aluminosilicate (e.g., spodumene, eucryptite, petalite, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 6 in which the alkali metal aluminosilicate
    comprises a lithium aluminosilicate.

    (1)     Note.  The aluminosilicate may be, e.g., spodumene
    (Li,Na)2Al2Si4O12), eucryptite (LiAlSiO4), petalite    (Li2O.Al2O3.8SiO2),
    etc.


CLS 501/8
TXT Divalent metal oxide aluminosilicate crystalline phase (e.g., anorthite,
    slagcerams, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 5 in which the silicate comprises a divalent
    metal oxide aluminosilicate.

    (1)     Note.  The silicate may be an aluminosilicate of an alkaline earth
    metal, magnesium, zinc, or zirconium, e.g., anorthite (CaAl2Si2O3), a
    slagceram, etc.


CLS 501/9
TXT Magnesium aluminosilicate (e.g., cordierite, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 8 in which the silicate comprises a magnesium
    aluminosilicate.

    (1)     Note.  The silicate may be, e.g., cordierite (Mg4Al8O6(SiO3)10, etc.


CLS 501/10
TXT Nonsilica and nonsilicate crystalline phase (e.g., spinel, barium titanate,
    etc.): Compositions under subclass 2 in which the crystalline phase does
    not include silica or a silicate.

    (1)     Note.  The crystalline phase may comprise, e.g., spinel (MgAl2O4),
    gaehnite (ZnAl2O4), franklinite (Fe, Zn, Mn) Fe2O4) chromite (FeCr2O4),
    barium titanate (BaTiO3), etc.


CLS 501/11
TXT Glass compositions, compositions containing glass other than those wherein
    glass is a bonding agent, or glass batch forming compositions:

    Compositions under subclass 1 which comprise a glass or compositions
    intended to be heat treated so as to form a glass.

    (1)     Note.  To be classified herein, the chemical nature of the glass
    composition must be unspecified.

    (2)     Note.  A typical disclosure appropriate for this subclass might be,
    e.g., a product by process claim, etc.

    (3)     Note.  Compositions containing both glass and nonglass materials in
    which the glass serves merely as a binder for particles of the other
    material are not included herein, but are classified on some other basis.

    (4)     Note.  This and indented subclasses include compositions of enamels
    and glazes, etc., which are glasses.

    (5)     Note.  Documents classified as originals in this and indented
    subclasses which disclose optical glass compositions are cross-referenced
    in subclasses 900+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 134+ for processes of purifying or
    homogenizing molten glass.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 2.1+ for envelopes for electric lamps,
    electronic tubes and similar devices which are made of glass.  Where no
    more is claimed than an envelope of a specific composition of glass the
    patent is classified in this class (501).  Where the composition is claimed
    and also some structure of the envelope, the patent is classified in Class
    220.


CLS 501/12
TXT Made by gel route:

    Compositions under subclass 11 which have been prepared by a method other
    than melting including at least one step in which the glass forming
    ingredients are in a gel or sol state, and glass making processes involving
    such a step.

    (1)     Note.  Documents classified as originals in this subclass are
    cross-referenced on the basis of the chemical nature of the glass
    composition disclosed into subclasses 40, 41+, and/or 53+, as appropriate.

    (2)     Note.  Documents classified as originals in this subclass which
    disclose optical glass compositions are cross-referenced in subclasses 900+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 134+ for processes of homogenizing
    or purifying molten glass.


CLS 501/13
TXT Radiation color change responsive:
    Compositions under subclass 11 which are capable of reversibly changing
    color or darkening in response to the presence of electromagnetic radiation
    and which if darkened thereby fade when the electromagnetic radiation is
    removed.

    (1)     Note.  Documents classified as originals in this subclass are
    cross-referenced on the basis of the chemical nature of the glass
    composition disclosed into subclasses 40, 41+, and/or 53+, as appropriate.

    (2)     Note.  Documents classified as originals in this subclass which
    disclose optical glass compositions are cross-referenced in subclasses 900+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 300 for optical filter compositions and
    subclass 600 for other radiation sensitive compositions.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclass 13 for imaged products containing an image within a
    transparent base.


CLS 501/14
TXT Enamels, glazes, or fusion seals (e.g., raw, fritted, or calcined
    ingredients):

    Compositions under subclass 11 disclosed as vitreous enamels, or glazes, or
    similar compositions which are intended for use as seals between glass
    and/or metal components of various devices.

    (1)     Note.  The compositions in this and indented subclasses have
    typically been cross-referenced below on the basis of their specific
    ingredient content, e.g., to subclasses 21+ for frit compositions, subclass
    40 for nonoxide glasses, subclasses 41+ for nonsilica and nonsilicate
    containing oxide glasses, and subclasses 53+ for Si02 containing glasses.

    (2)     Note.  Documents classified as originals in this and indented
    subclasses which disclose optical glass compositions are cross-referenced
    in subclasses 900+.

    (3)     Note.  See Class 520, Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers,
    appropriate subclasses, particularly Class 523, subclass 170 for a
    composition containing a synthetic resin or Natural Rubbers and having
    utility as an enamel composition for glass or for a medium or binder in the
    preparation of glass enamel or to processes of preparing said composition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclass 312 for opacifiers for
    enamels, per se.

    427,    Coating Processes, for processes of enameling with vitreous enamel
    compositions.


CLS 501/15
TXT Fusion seals (frit plus material other than glass):

    Compositions under subclass 14 disclosed for use as seals between other
    ceramic glass, and/or metal components of various devices, and containing a
    frit plus some other ingredient which is not a glass.

    (1)     Note.  These compositions are sometimes disclosed as glass solders.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17+,    for glass compositions containing a frit plus a material other than
    glass which are not disclosed as seal glasses.


CLS 501/16
TXT Plural diverse frits:
    Compositions under subclass 14 comprising two or more distinct frits having
    different compositions.


CLS 501/17
TXT Frit plus material other than glass (e.g., color, opacifier, mill
    additions, etc.): Compositions under subclass 14 which comprise a frit
    pulse at least one other material which is not a glass.

    (1)     Note.  The other material may be, e.g., an opacifying agent, a
    coloring agent, or any material added during the milling or other
    comminuting operation to enhance that process or to improve the properties
    of the product of that process.


CLS 501/18
TXT Titanium zirconium compound as other material:

    Compositions under subclass 17 which contain a compound of titanium or
    zirconium as the other material.


CLS 501/19
TXT Free metal as other material:

    Subject matter under subclass 17 in which the other material is a free
    metal.

    (1)     Note.  The free metal may be, e.g., in the form of copper flakes,
    aluminum powder, etc.

    (2)     Note.  See the class definition of this class (501) for the general
    lines between this class and other composition classes, especially 29, 75,
    and 428, relative to cermets, powder metallurgy compacts and similar
    materials.


CLS 501/20
TXT With vehicle or suspending agent (i.e., slip):

    Compositions under subclass 17 which contain a liquid vehicle or a
    suspending agent.

    (1)     Note.  Such a composition containing a liquid vehicle is frequently
    referred to as a slip.


CLS 501/21
TXT Chemically specified frit compositions:
    Compositions under subclass 14 which are in a powdered or comminuted form,
    defined in terms of their chemical content.


CLS 501/22
TXT Lead containing:

    Compositions under subclass 21 which include lead or a lead compound.


CLS 501/23
TXT And titanium or zirconium:

    Compositions under subclass 22 which additionally include titanium or
    zirconium or a compound of either of them.


CLS 501/24
TXT Phosphorus containing:

    Compositions under subclass 21 which contain phosphorus or a compound of
    phosphorus.


CLS 501/25
TXT Halogen containing:

    Compositions under subclass 21 which include a halogen atom, either as a
    free element or in the form of a halogen compound.


CLS 501/26
TXT Zinc containing:

    Compositions under subclass 21 which include zinc or a zinc compound.


CLS 501/27
TXT Glass batch forming compositions (i.e., glass batch compositions):

    Compositions under subclass 11 which are intended to be heated sufficiently
    for its ingredients to fuse into a glass.

    (1)     Note.  The ingredients of the batch may include a previously
    prepared glass, such as scrap glass or cullet.

    (2)     Note.  These compositions are sometimes referred to as glass
    furnace charges.


CLS 501/28
TXT Slag containing:

    Compositions under subclass 27 which comprise slag, the nonmetallic by
    product from various metallurgical processes.


CLS 501/29
TXT Pellet or agglomerate containing:
    Compositions under subclass 27 which include at least one ingredient in the
    form of shaped particles, e.g., pellets, granules, briquettes, nodules, etc.


CLS 501/30
TXT Halogen containing:

    Compositions under subclass 27 which include a free halogen or a halogen
    compound.


CLS 501/31
TXT Uncombined silica containing (e.g., sand):
    Compositions under subclass 27 which contain uncombined silica as an
    ingredient of the batch.

    (1)     Note.  The uncombined silica is typically disclosed to be sand.


CLS 501/32
TXT Glass and material other than glass (e.g., crystal glass, opal glass,
    etc.): Compositions under subclass 11 which contain a glass and at least
    one ingredient which is not a glass, wherein the nonglass ingredient is not
    dissolved in the glass.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes such materials as, e.g., two phase
    glasses, opal glass, crystal glass, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Documents classified as originals in this subclass are
    cross-referenced on the basis of the chemical nature of the glass
    composition disclosed into subclasses 40, 41+, and/or 53+ as appropriate.

    (3)     Note.  Documents classified as originals in this subclass which
    disclose optical glass compositions are cross-referenced in subclasses 900+.


CLS 501/33
TXT Beads:

    Subject matter under subclass 11 wherein the glass is present in the form
    of discrete lumps or small shaped self-supporting pieces larger than what
    may be considered as powder or compositions specifically intended to be
    made into beads.

    (1)     Note.  Documents classified as originals in this and indented
    subclasses are cross-referenced on the basis of the chemical nature of the
    glass composition disclosed into subclasses 40, 41+, and/or 53+, as
    appropriate.

    (2)     Note.  Documents classified as originals in this and indented
    subclasses which disclose optical glass compositions are cross-referenced
    in subclasses 900+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclass 21 for processes of making glass
    beads and balls, including hollow ones, by a process of glass working
    classified in Class 65.


CLS 501/34
TXT Reflective:

    Beads or glass compositions for forming beads under subclass 33 which are
    intended for use as reflective elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses for
    coating or plastic compositions containing such beads.


CLS 501/35
TXT Fibers:

    Compositions under subclass 11 which are in the form of fibers or which are
    disclosed for use in manufacturing fibers.

    (1)     Note.  Documents classified as originals in this and indented
    subclasses are cross-referenced on the basis of the chemical nature of the
    glass composition disclosed into subclasses 40, 41+, and/or 53+, as
    appropriate.

    (2)     Note.  Documents classified as originals in this and indented
    subclasses which disclose optical glass compositions are cross-referenced
    in subclasses 900+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for glass fiber batts used for insulation, filters, and other applications.


CLS 501/36
TXT Mineral fibers (e.g., slag wool, rock wool, mineral wool, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 35 which are disclosed as slag wool, rock wool,
    or mineral wool, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for glass batch forming compositions comprising slag.


CLS 501/37
TXT Optical fibers:

    Fibers under subclass 35 which are intended to be used as conductors of
    light in fiber optics applications.

    (1)     Note.  Such fibers may have the so-called core and clad
    construction, and where the core and cladding components are defined in
    terms of their composition without recitation of specific optics use
    enhancing structural features, they are classified herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    385,    Optical Waveguides, appropriate subclasses for fiber optics
    reciting significant optical structure.


CLS 501/38
TXT Titanium or zirconium containing:

    Fibers under subclass 35 comprising titanium, zirconium, or a compound of
    one of these elements.


CLS 501/39
TXT Pore-forming:

    Compositions under subclass 11 which are porous, or which are to be further
    treated to produce multicellular products or processes for producing porous
    glass products.

    (1)     Note.  To be classified herein, a process or composition must
    involve a specific step to form the pores.  Where the porosity is due
    merely to the presence of a naturally porous ingredient it is classified on
    some other basis.

    (2)     Note.  Documents classified as originals in this and indented
    subclasses are cross-referenced on the basis of the chemical nature of the
    glass composition disclosed into subclasses 40, 41+, and/or 53+, as
    appropriate.

    (3)     Note.  Documents classified as originals in this and indented
    subclasses which disclose optical glass compositions are cross-referenced
    in subclasses 900+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80+,    for pore-forming of ceramics other than glass compositions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, subclass
    296 for pore-forming  abrasive tool compositions.

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, especially subclasses 20 through 22 and 30 for
    making porous glass by processes which include glass working operations
    classified in that class (65).


CLS 501/40
TXT Nonoxide glasses (e.g., fluoride glasses, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 11 consisting solely of materials other than
    oxides.

    (1)     Note.  The glass may comprise, e.g., binary or ternary halides,
    sulfides, or nitrides of germanium, selenium, or tellurium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 304+ and 403 for so-called alloy
    glasses or glassy alloys which contain only metals in an amorphous solid
    state.


CLS 501/41
TXT Nonsilicate oxide glasses:

    Compositions under subclass 11 which contain oxides of elements other than
    silicon and which do not contain any silica or silicate.


CLS 501/42
TXT Germanium containing:

    Compositions under subclass 41 containing germanium or a germanium compound.


CLS 501/43
TXT Halogen containing:
    Compositions under subclass 41 containing a halogen or halogen compound.


CLS 501/44
TXT Fluorine and phosphorus containing:
    Compositions under subclass 43 in which the halogen is fluorine and the
    composition additionally contains phosphorus or a phosphorus compound.


CLS 501/45
TXT Phosphorus containing:

    Compositions under subclass 41 containing phosphorus or a compound of
    phosphorus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for similar compositions containing fluorine in addition to the
    phosphorus.


CLS 501/46
TXT And titanium, zirconium, vanadium, tungsten, or molybdenum:

    Compositions under subclass 45 additionally containing titanium, zirconium,
    vanadium, tungsten, or molybdenum, or a compound of any of these elements.


CLS 501/47
TXT And boron:

    Compositions under subclass 45 additionally containing boron or a boron
    compound.


CLS 501/48
TXT And aluminum or beryllium:

    Compositions under subclass 45 additionally containing aluminum or
    beryllium or a compound of either of them.


CLS 501/49
TXT Boron containing:

    Compositions under subclass 41 containing boron or a boron compound.


CLS 501/50
TXT And yttrium or rare earth (i.e., elements with atomic numbers 39, 57-71, or
    89+): Compositions under subclass 49 additionally containing yttrium or a
    rare earth in elemental or compound form.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are compositions including yttrium,
    lanthanide, actinide, or transactinide elements or compounds of any such
    elements. Specifically included are yttrium, lanthanium, cerium,
    praesodymium, neodymium, promethium, samarium, europium, gadolinium,
    terbium, dysprosium, holmium, erbium, thulium, ytterbium, lutecium,
    actinium, thorium, protoactinium, uranium, neptunium, and plutonium.


CLS 501/51
TXT And zirconium, titanium, tantalum, or niobium:

    Compositions under subclass 50 additionally containing zirconium, titanium,
    tantalum, or niobium, or a compound of any of these elements.


CLS 501/52
TXT And aluminum or beryllium:

    Compositions under subclass 49 additionally containing aluminum or
    beryllium, or a compound of either of these elements.


CLS 501/53
TXT Silica containing:

    Compositions under subclass 11 containing

    silica (SiO2).

    (1)     Note.  The silica is typically present in combination with metallic
    oxides, i.e., in the silicate, mixed silicate, or polysilicate form.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass takes claims to silica containing glass
    compositions which do not specify the percent by weight content of the
    silica in the total composition.  Where such content is specified,
    classification takes place into subclasses 54, 55+, or 73+.

    (3)     Note.  In the subclasses indented hereunder, a disclosure of the
    weight percent of SiO2 in the composition which is in the form of a range
    extending on both sides of the 40 percent and/or 90 percent limit recited
    in the titles of subclasses 54, 55, and 73, is classified or
    cross-referenced in such a way that an official copy appears in appropriate
    subclasses on both sides of that limit.  For example, a disclosure of 28-42
    percent SiO2 content is classified in subclasses 55+ and cross-referenced
    in subclasses 73+.


CLS 501/54
TXT More than 90 percent by weight silica:
    Subject matter under subclass 53 wherein the silica comprises over 90
    percent by weight of the total composition.


CLS 501/55
TXT 40 percent-90 percent by weight silica:
    Compositions under subclass 53 wherein the silica content is at least 40
    percent but not more than 90 percent by weight of the total composition.


CLS 501/56
TXT And halogen or nitrogen:

    Compositions under subclass 55 additionally containing a halogen or
    nitrogen or a compound of either.


CLS 501/57
TXT Fluorine:

    Compositions under subclass 56 containing fluorine or a fluorine compound.


CLS 501/58
TXT And boron:

    Compositions under subclass 57 additionally containing boron or a boron
    compound.


CLS 501/59
TXT And aluminum:

    Compositions under subclass 58 additionally containing aluminum or an
    aluminum compound.


CLS 501/60
TXT And lead:

    Compositions under subclass 55 additionally containing lead or a lead
    compound.


CLS 501/61
TXT And boron:

    Compositions under subclass 60 additionally containing boron or a boron
    compound.


CLS 501/62
TXT And aluminum:

    Compositions under subclass 60 additionally containing aluminum or an
    aluminum compound.


CLS 501/63
TXT And phosphorus, niobium, or tantalum:
    Compositions under subclass 55 additionally containing phosphorus, niobium,
    or tantalum or a compound of any of these elements.


CLS 501/64
TXT And yttrium or rare earth (i.e., elements with atomic numbers 39 or 57-71):
    Compositions under subclass 55 additionally containing yttrium or a rare
    earth in elemental or compound form.

    (1)     Note.  Specifically included herein are compositions containing
    yttrium, lanthanium, cerium, praesodymium, neodymium, promethium, samarium,
    europium, gadolinium, terbium, dysprosium, holmium, erbium, thulium,
    ytterbium, or lutecium in elemental or compound form.


CLS 501/65
TXT And boron:

    Compositions under subclass 55 additionally containing boron or a boron
    compound.


CLS 501/66
TXT And aluminum:

    Compositions under subclass 65 additionally containing aluminum or an
    aluminum compound.


CLS 501/67
TXT And zinc or zirconium:

    Compositions under subclass 66 additionally containing zinc or zirconium or
    a compound of either of these elements.


CLS 501/68
TXT And aluminum or iron compound:

    Compositions under subclass 55 additionally containing compounds of
    aluminum or of iron.


CLS 501/69
TXT And divalent metal oxide (e.g., oxides of zinc, cadmium, beryllium,
    alkaline earth metal, magnesium, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 68 additionally containing an oxide of a
    divalent metal.

    (1)     Note.  The divalent metal may be, e.g., zinc, cadmium, beryllium,
    an alkaline earth metal, magnesium, etc.


CLS 501/70
TXT Calcium oxide containing:

    Compositions under subclass 69 in which the divalent metal oxide is calcium
    oxide.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes, for example, many glass compositions
    which are identified as common sheet or container glass, such as the well
    known soda-lime glasses.


CLS 501/71
TXT And chromium, nickel, or cobalt:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 wherein the composition further includes
    chromium, nickel, or cobalt or a compound of one of those elements.

    (1)     Note.  The compositions classified herein are typically colored
    glasses or glasses which selectively absorb light.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for similar compositions containing oxides of metals other than
    chromium, nickel, or cobalt.


CLS 501/72
TXT And divalent metal oxide (e.g., oxides of zinc, cadmium, beryllium,
    alkaline earth metal, magnesium, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 55 containing an oxide of a divalent metal.

    (1)     Note.  The divalent metal (may be, e.g., zinc, cadmium, beryllium,
    an alkaline earth metal or magnesium).


CLS 501/73
TXT Less than 40 percent by weight silica:
    Compositions under subclass 53 containing silica in an amount equal to less
    than 40 percent by weight of the total composition.


CLS 501/74
TXT And lead:

    Compositions under subclass 73 which contain lead or a lead compound.


CLS 501/75
TXT And boron:

    Compositions under subclass 74 additionally containing boron or a boron
    compound.


CLS 501/76
TXT And zinc:

    Compositions under subclass 75 additionally containing zinc or a zinc
    compound.


CLS 501/77
TXT And boron:

    Compositions under subclass 73 which contain boron or a boron compound.


CLS 501/78
TXT And rare earth (i.e., elements with atomic number 39 or 57-71):

    Compositions under subclass 77 additionally containing a rare earth element
    or a compound of any rare earth element.

    (1)     Note.  For the purpose of this classification, rare earth elements
    are those having atomic numbers 39 or 57-71.


CLS 501/79
TXT And zinc:

    Compositions under subclass 77 additionally containing zinc or a zinc
    compound.


CLS 501/80
TXT Pore-forming:

    Compositions under subclass 1 other than glass compositions which are
    multicellular, or which are to be further treated to produce multicellular
    products, or processes for producing such products.

    (1)     Note.  A positive pore-forming step is required for classifying a
    claim herein and porosity due to the presence of a naturally porous
    substance is not sufficient for inclusion herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for pore-forming involving glass compositions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, subclass
    296 for porous abrading tool and process for making such.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 228+ for consolidated metal and ceramic powder
    materials, including, e.g., cermets, wherein there is a continuous metal
    phase and processes of making same.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 601+ for pore-forming
    and porous compositions comprising an alkali metal silicate; subclasses
    672+ for pore-forming involving settable hydraulic cements; and subclass
    122 for pore-forming involving other coating or plastic compositions.

    520,    Synthetic Resins for Natural Rubbers, in particular Class 521,
    subclasses 50+ for porous product and pore-forming processes.


CLS 501/81
TXT By use of organic combustible material:
    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the porosity results from
    combustion of an organic combustible material, e.g., hair, tar, pitch, etc.


CLS 501/82
TXT Of resin or vegetable origin material:
    Subject matter under subclass 81 in which the organic combustible material
    is either a natural or synthetic resin or is a material of vegetable origin.

    (1)     Note.  The combustible material may be, e.g., shellac, a
    polystyrene resin, coal, an alginate, etc.


CLS 501/83
TXT Of cellulosic material:

    Subject matter under subclass 82 in which the combustible material contains
    cellulose or a reaction product thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Such material may be, e.g., cork, wood, sawdust, nutshells,
    bark, straw, chaff, collodion, etc.


CLS 501/84
TXT By gas blowing, foaming agent, or in situ reactive gas generation:

    Processes under subclass 80 which include blowing a gaseous material
    through a molten ceramic composition, or which employ a foaming agent, or
    which employ materials which interact to yield a gas, which gas lends
    porosity to the composition and compositions to be used in such processes.


CLS 501/85
TXT By volatilizing or heat expansion of water or other noncombustible material:

    Processes under subclass 80 wherein porosity results from volatilization or
    expansion caused by heating of water or other noncombustible material
    contained in the composition, and compositions to be used in such processes.


CLS 501/86
TXT Synthetic precious stones (e.g., single crystals, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 1 which are artificial precious stones, which
    are usually formed by the solidification of a melted composition containing
    ingredients giving the desired appearance, and processes for preparing such
    products except those forming single-crystals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, subclasses 295+ for physical
    processes of crystallizing inorganic chemical compounds or non-metal
    elements and where a single-crystal is not intended.  The products, per se,
    are generally classified as chemical compounds.  The process of de-twinning
    is classified in Class 117.  Methods preventing decomposition of crystals
    by enclosing the crystals in an environment rich in the decomposition
    product (e.g., ammonium salt surrounded by ammonia gas) are classified with
    the crystal product.

    63,     Jewelry, subclass 32 for jewelry in which the invention lies in the
    gem.

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes and non-coating apparatus for
    growing therein-defined single-crystal of all types of materials, including
    inorganic or organic.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 301.17 for laser compositions.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclass 446 for synthetic
    diamonds and their manufacture.


CLS 501/87
TXT Carbide or oxycarbide containing:

    Compositions under subclass 1 which include at least one compound which is
    a binary compound of a metal directly bonded to carbon (i.e., a carbide) or
    is a ternary compound of a metal, carbon, and oxygen of the type:  2(ZrO2)C
    or ZrO.C (i.e., an oxycarbide or carboxide).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, for a
    composition specialized for use as an abrasive. Patents containing claims
    to the abrasive function as well as claims to a function or use
    specifically provided for in Class 501 (e.g. refractory) are placed in this
    class (501) as originals and cross-referenced to Class 51 , especially
    subclasses 307+ for abrasive compositions which may include carbides.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 439+ for carbide
    compound, per se.


CLS 501/88
TXT Silicon carbide:

    Compositions under subclass 87 which contain a silicon carbide, e.g., SiC.


CLS 501/89
TXT And aluminum compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 88 additionally comprising a compound of
    aluminum.

    (1)     Note.  The aluminum compound may be, for example, Al2O3 or clay.


CLS 501/90
TXT And carbonaceous material:

    Subject matter under subclass 88 additionally comprising a material
    containing free carbon.

    (1)     Note.  The free carbon containing material may be, for example,
    graphite or tar.


CLS 501/91
TXT And different carbide:

    Compositions under subclass 88 which contain a carbide of an element other
    than silicon in addition to the silicon carbide.


CLS 501/92
TXT And boride, silicide, nitride, or oxynitride:

    Compositions under subclass 88 which contain a silicide, boride, nitride,
    or oxynitride, in addition to silicon carbide.

    (1)     Note.  A silicide is a binary compound of a metal or other more
    positive element with silicon, e.g., Mg2Si.

    (2)     Note.  A boride is a binary compound of boron with a more positive
    element, e.g., Mg3B2, Si3B4.

    (3)     Note.  A nitride is a binary compound of nitrogen with a metal,
    e.g.,    Mg3N2.

    (4)     Note.  An oxynitride is a ternary compound of nitrogen, oxygen and
    a more positive element of the form Si2ON2.


CLS 501/93
TXT Plural carbides (i.e., carbides of plural metals) containing:

    Compositions under subclass 87 which include at least two different carbide
    compounds.


CLS 501/94
TXT Refractory:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 directed to refractory compositions and
    processes for their preparation.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary in the class definition of this class for
    the definition of the term "refractory".

    (2)     Note.  Among the art terms used to describe materials classified
    herein are:  refractories, heat resistant materials, or linings, furnace
    linings, firebrick, pyroceramic cones, kiln brick, kiln linings, kiln
    furniture, and saggers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87+,    for ceramic refractory compositions which contain a carbide or
    oxycarbide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, subclass
    307 for the use of inorganic material which may contain a ceramic
    composition being used as an abrasive material within the class definition.

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclass 596 for building
    blocks with significant structural features which may comprise a refractory
    composition.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclass 301 for furnace linings which contain chemicals having a
    refining effect on molten metal.

    373,    Electric Furnaces, subclasses 71+ and 137 for electric furnace
    linings, per se, defined structurally.

    451,    Abrading, subclass 28 for the use of an abrading material which may
    contain a ceramic composition being used in an abrading process under the
    class definition.

    508,    Solid Antifriction Devices, Materials Therefor, Lubricant and
    Separant Compositions for Moving Solid Surfaces, and Miscellaneous Mineral
    Oil Compositions, for lubricant compositions which may contain a refractory
    abrasive ingredient.

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses for cleaning compositions comprising an abrasive or scouring
    component which may include a refractory material.


CLS 501/95.1
TXT Fiber or fiber containing:

    Compositions under subclass 94 which are in the form of a fiber or filament.

    (1)     Note. This subclass does not encompass methods of making fibers,
    per se. Such processes are generally classified in the appropriate material
    class (e.g., Class 520 series, Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, for
    synthetic resin fibers).


CLS 501/95.2
TXT Composites (continuous matrix with dispersed fiber phase):

    Compositions under subclass 95.1 which are characterized by having fibers
    as a dispersed phase in a continuous matrix.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95.1,   for processes for preparing refractory fiber compositions, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, for methods of coating and impregnation of
    fibers under the class definition.

    520     through 528, Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, for synthetic
    resin fibers.


CLS 501/95.3
TXT Whisker containing:

    Compositions under subclass 95.2 characterized as having whiskers in a
    continuous matrix.

    (1)     Note. Whiskers are short, bristly hairlike fibers characterized by
    high tensile strength and single crystal structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    95.1,   for making refractory whisker compositions, per se.


CLS 501/96.1
TXT Boride, silicide, nitride, oxynitride, carbonitride, or oxycarbonitride
    containing:

    Compositions under subclass 94 comprising at least one compound which is a
    boride, silicide, nitride, oxynitride, carbonitride, or oxycarbonitride.

    (1)     Note. A silicide is a binary compound of a metal or other more
    positive element with silicon (e.g., Mg2Si, etc.).

    (2)     Note. A boride is a binary compound of boron with a more positive
    element (e.g., Mg3B2, Si3B4, etc.).

    (3)     Note. A nitride is a binary compound of nitrogen with a metal
    (e.g., Mg3N2, etc.).

    (4)     Note. An oxynitride is a ternary or quaternary inorganic compound
    of nitrogen, oxygen, and a more positive element of the type GAOBNC or
    GAJBOCND wherein G and J are the more positive elements, and A, B, C, and D
    are greater than zero.

    (5)     Note. A carbonitride is a ternary inorganic compound of nitrogen,
    carbon, and a more positive element of the type GACBNC wherein G is the
    more positive element, and A, B, and C are greater than zero.

    (6)     Note. An oxycarbonitride is a quaternary inorganic compound of
    oxygen, carbon, nitrogen, and a more positive element of the type GAOBCCND,
    wherein G is the more positive element, and A, B, C, and D are greater than
    zero.


CLS 501/96.2
TXT From organometallic precursor:

    Subject matter under subclass 96.1 produced from an organometallic
    precursor.

    (1)     Note. The claims need not specify production from an
    organometallic precursor.  The requirement of this subclass may be
    satisfied by reference to the specification.


CLS 501/96.3
TXT Boride or silicide containing:

    Compositions under subclass 96.1 in which a component is a boride, a
    silicide, or mixture thereof.


CLS 501/96.4
TXT Boron nitride containing:

    Compositions under subclass 96.1 in which a component is boron nitride (BN).


CLS 501/96.5
TXT Silicon oxynitride, silicon carbonitride, or silicon oxycarbonitride
    containing (i.e.,SiAOBNC, SiACBNC, or SiAOBCCND):

    Compositions under subclass 96.1 in which a component is silicon oxynitride
    (SiAOBNC), silicon carbonitride (SiACBNC), or silicon oxycarbonitride
    (SiAOBCCND).

    (1)     Note. A, B, C, D must be greater than zero.


CLS 501/97.1
TXT Silicon nitride containing (Si3N4):

    Compositions under subclass 96.1 in which a component is silicon nitride
    (Si3N4).


CLS 501/97.2
TXT With trivalent metal compound (e.g., yttrium, rare earth, or aluminum
    compound, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 97.1 additionally containing a trivalent metal
    compound.

    (1)     Note. Si3N4 plus an aluminum compound is not the same as SiAlON.

    (2)     Note. This subclass provides for the combination of Si3N4, per se,
    with an additional compound of a trivalent metal. Silicon aluminum
    oxynitride, a single compound, does not meet this criterion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98.1,   for silicon aluminum oxynitride.


CLS 501/97.3
TXT With alkaline earth metal compound:

    Compositions under subclass 97.2 additionally containing an alkaline earth
    metal compound.


CLS 501/97.4
TXT Composites (continuous matrix with dispersed phase):

    Compositions under subclass 97.1 characterized by having a dispersed phase
    in a continuous matrix, wherein silicon nitride may be either the dispersed
    phase or the continuous matrix, or may be in either the dispersed phase or
    in the continuous matrix.


CLS 501/98.1
TXT Silicon aluminum oxynitride containing (i.e., SiAlON compounds):

    Compositions under subclass 96.1 in which silicon aluminum oxynitride
    (SiAlON) is found.


CLS 501/98.2
TXT With rare earth or alkaline earth metal compound:

    Compositions under subclass 98.1 in which a rare earth or alkaline earth
    metal compound is found.


CLS 501/98.3
TXT Composites (continuous matrix with dispersed phase):

    Subject matter under subclass 98.1 characterized by having a dispersed
    phase in a continuous matrix, wherein SiAlON may be either the dispersed
    phase or the continuous matrix, or may be in either the dispersed phase or
    in the continuous matrix.


CLS 501/98.4
TXT Aluminum nitride containing (AlN):

    Subject matter under subclass 96.1 in which aluminum nitride (AlN) is found.


CLS 501/98.5
TXT With alkaline earth metal compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 98.4 additionally containing an alkaline
    earth metal compound.


CLS 501/98.6
TXT Composites (continuous matrix with dispersed phase):

    Subject matter under subclass 98.4 characterized by having a dispersed
    phase in a continuous matrix, where aluminum nitride may be either the
    dispersed phase or the continuous matrix, or may be in either the dispersed
    phase or in the continuous matrix.


CLS 501/99
TXT Elemental carbon containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 wherein the refractory composition
    comprises elemental carbon.

    (1)     Note.  The carbon source may be in the form of, e.g., tar, pitch,
    coke, or graphite.


CLS 501/100
TXT And aluminum compound (e.g., clay, aluminum oxide, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 99 wherein the refractory composition
    additionally includes a compound of aluminum.

    (1)     Note.  The aluminum compound may comprise, e.g., clay or Al2O3.


CLS 501/101
TXT And alkaline earth metal or magnesium compound (e.g., dolomite, magnesium
    oxide, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 99 wherein the refractory composition
    additionally includes a compound of an alkaline earth metal or of magnesium.

    (1)     Note.  The alkaline earth metal compound may be, e.g., dolomite
    (CaMg(CO3)2) or lime (CaO) and the magnesium compound may be, e.g.,
    magnesia (MgO).


CLS 501/102
TXT Zirconium compound containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 wherein the composition includes a
    compound of zirconium.


CLS 501/103
TXT Zirconium oxide:

    Subject matter under subclass 102 comprising an oxide of zirconium.

    (1)     Note.  The zirconium oxide is frequently disclosed to be ZrO2.


CLS 501/104
TXT And alkaline earth metal or magnesium compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 103 further including a compound of an
    alkaline earth metal or magnesium.


CLS 501/105
TXT And aluminum compound (e.g., clay, aluminum oxide, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 103 further including a compound of aluminum.

    (1)     Note.  The aluminum compound may be, e.g., clay or Al2O3.


CLS 501/106
TXT Zirconium silicate:

    Subject matter under subclass 102 comprising a silicate of zirconium.

    (1)     Note.  The zirconium silicate may be disclosed to be, e.g., zircon
      (ZrSiO4).


CLS 501/107
TXT And aluminum compound (e.g., clay, aluminum oxide, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 106 further including a compound of aluminum.

    (1)     Note.  The aluminum compound may be, e.g., clay, or alumina (Al2O3).


CLS 501/108
TXT Magnesium compound containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 comprising a compound of magnesium.


CLS 501/109
TXT With organic material in starting mixture: Subject matter under subclass
    108 additionally comprising an organic compound or other organic substance
    in the starting mixture.

    (1)     Note.  The organic substance must no longer be present as such in
    the final product to be classifiable herein.


CLS 501/110
TXT And iron or chromium compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 109 additionally comprising a compound of
    iron or chromium.


CLS 501/111
TXT And phosphorus compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 additionally comprising a compound of
    phosphorus.


CLS 501/112
TXT And iron compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 additionally comprising a compound of
    iron.


CLS 501/113
TXT Dolomite containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein the magnesium compound comprises
    dolomite

    (CaMg(CO3)2).


CLS 501/114
TXT And chromium compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 additionally comprising a compound of
    chromium.


CLS 501/115
TXT Fused cast or fused material containing:
    Subject matter under subclass 114 wherein the composition is in solid block
    form or a portion of the composition is comprised of previously fused
    material.


CLS 501/116
TXT Chemical binder containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 114 wherein the ceramic particles are bonded
    to each other at least in part by a chemical substance other than that of
    the ceramic particles themselves.

    (1)     Note.  The chemical binder may be, e.g., sodium silicate.


CLS 501/117
TXT And chromium compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 additionally comprising a compound of
    chromium.


CLS 501/118
TXT And aluminum compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 additionally comprising a compound of
    aluminum.


CLS 501/119
TXT Aluminum compound other than clay:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein the aluminum compound is other
    than clay.

    (1)     Note.  The aluminum compound may be, for example, aluminum oxide,
    or chloride.


CLS 501/120
TXT Spinel or other aluminate:

    Subject matter under subclass 119 wherein the aluminum compound is spinel
    (MgAl2O4) or another aluminate.


CLS 501/121
TXT Less than 90 percent by weight magnesium compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein the magnesium compound comprises
    less than 90 percent by weight of the total composition.


CLS 501/122
TXT And silicon compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 additionally comprising a compound of
    silicon.


CLS 501/123
TXT Alkaline earth metal compound containing: Subject matter under subclass 94
    wherein an alkaline earth metal compound is included in the composition or
    is employed in the process of preparing the composition.


CLS 501/124
TXT Hydraulic cement containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 123 including a hydraulic cement.

    (1)     Note.  The hydraulic cement may be, e.g., of the Portland cement or
    calcium aluminate cement type.


CLS 501/125
TXT And aluminum compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 123 further comprising a compound of aluminum.

    (1)     Note.  The aluminum compound may be, e.g., aluminum chloride.


CLS 501/126
TXT Trivalent metal compound (e.g., iron oxide, chromium oxide, trivalent rare
    earth oxide, etc.) containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 containing a compound of a trivalent metal.

    (1)     Note.  The trivalent compound, may be, for example, an oxide of
    trivalent iron, trivalent chromium, or a trivalent rare earth.


CLS 501/127
TXT Aluminum compound (e.g., clay, aluminum oxide, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 126 wherein the trivalent metal is aluminum.


CLS 501/128
TXT And silicon compound other than clay:
    Subject matter under subclass 127 additionally containing a compound of
    silicon other than clay.


CLS 501/129
TXT And silica-clay mixtures:

    Subject matter under subclass 128 wherein the silicon compound is silica
    and the aluminum compound is clay.


CLS 501/130
TXT And clay containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 128 comprising clay.


CLS 501/131
TXT Less than 40 percent by weight clay:
    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein the clay is present in a
    concentration greater than zero percent and less than 40 percent by weight
    of the total composition.


CLS 501/132
TXT Chromium compound containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 126 comprising a compound of chromium.


CLS 501/133
TXT Silica containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 wherein the refractory composition
    comprises silica.


CLS 501/134
TXT Titanate, zirconate, stannate, niobate, or tantalate or oxide of titanium,
    zirconium, tin, niobium, or tantalum containing (e.g., dielectrics, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising a titanate, zirconate, stannate,
    niobate, or tantalate compound or an oxide of titanium, zirconium, tin,
    niobium, or tantalum.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the compositions in this and indented subclasses are
    disclosed as being useful as dielectric materials.


CLS 501/135
TXT Alkaline earth or magnesium containing:
    Compositions under subclass 134 containing a compound of an alkaline earth
    or magnesium.


CLS 501/136
TXT Titanate containing:

    Compositions under subclass 135 which include a titanate compound, i.e., a
    salt of titanic acid (H2TiO3).

    (1)     Note.  Compositions which contain an oxide of titanium but no
    titanate are classified in other subclasses.


CLS 501/137
TXT Barium titanate:

    Compositions under subclass 136 in which the titanate compound is a barium
    titanate.


CLS 501/138
TXT And divalent metal oxide other than alkaline earth oxide or magnesium
    oxide: Subject matter under subclass 137 additionally containing an oxide
    of a divalent metal other than an alkaline earth metal or magnesium.

    (1)     Note. The Alkaline earth includes calcium, strontium and barium.


CLS 501/139
TXT And trivalent metal oxide:

    Subject matter under subclass 137 additionally containing an oxide of a
    trivalent metal.


CLS 501/140
TXT Elemental sulfur containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the ceramic composition includes
    elemental sulfur, e.g., as a binder.

    (1)     Note.  Compositions classified herein are typically prepared by
    cooling a ceramic composition containing molten sulfur.


CLS 501/141
TXT Clay containing (e.g., porcelain, earthenware, etc.):

    Compositions or methods for their preparation under subclass 1 which
    include a clay ingredient.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the compositions classified herein are described as
    constituting porcelain or earthenware.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127+,   for refractory compositions including clay.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 468 and 486+ for
    fillers, pigments, and aggregates comprising clay.


CLS 501/142
TXT And phosphorus (e.g., bone china, etc.):
    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the composition further includes
    phosphorus or a compound of phosphorus.

    (1)     Note.  Some of the compositions classified herein are described as
    constituting bone china.


CLS 501/143
TXT And flint or feldspar:

    Compositions under subclass 141 additionally containing flint or feldspar.


CLS 501/144
TXT Kaolin (e.g., ball clay, fire clay, etc.) containing:

    Compositions under subclass 143 additionally containing kaolin.

    (1)     Note.  The kaolin may be disclosed as ball clay, fire clay, china
    clay, porcelain clay, bolus alba, terra alba, white bole, or argilla.


CLS 501/145
TXT Clay pretreatment:

    Processes for treating clay under subclass 141 directed to the enhancement
    of its properties when subsequently used as a component of a ceramic
    composition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 468 and 486+ for
    treatment of clay to enhance its use as an ingredient of a coating or
    plastic composition, e.g., as a paper filler.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 449+ for treatment of clay to prepare,
    e.g., activated clay and clay catalysts.


CLS 501/146
TXT Chemical pretreatment:

    Subject matter under subclass 145 in which a pretreatment of the clay
    includes treatment thereof with a treating agent in addition to or other
    than water, which agent reacts chemically with the clay.


CLS 501/147
TXT Using alkaline compound treating agent:
    Compositions under subclass 146 wherein the treating agent comprises a
    compound of an alkali forming metal or an amine or ammonium compound.

    (1)     Note.  The alkali forming metal may be an alkali metal, an alkaline
    earth metal or magnesium.


CLS 501/148
TXT Using organic substance as treating agent: Subject matter under subclass
    146 wherein the treating agent is an organic compound or material.


CLS 501/149
TXT Water pretreatment:

    Subject matter under subclass 145 wherein the clay is treated with water
    which does not contain a chemical treating agent.

    (1)     Note.  Such treatment may take place at other than ambient
    temperature and/or pressure.


CLS 501/150
TXT Heat treatment:

    Subject matter under subclass 145 wherein clay is treated at an elevated
    temperature below that necessary to cause vitrification and in the absence
    of added water or ingredients which react chemically with the clay.


CLS 501/151
TXT Fluorine containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 which includes fluorine or a fluorine
    compound.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are, e.g., polycrystalline fluoride
    materials, such as fluoaluminate dielectric materials and micaceous
    ceramics not otherwise classifiable.


CLS 501/152
TXT Yttrium, lanthanide, actinide, or transactinide containing (i.e., atomic
    numbers 39 or 57-71 or 89+):Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising in
    elemental form or in a compound thereof an element having an atomic number
    of 39, 57-71, or 89+.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are compositions including yttrium,
    lanthanide, actinide, or transactinide elements or compounds of any such
    elements. Specially included are yttrium, lanthanlum, cerium, praesodymium,
    neodymium, promethium, samarium, europium, gadolinium, terbium, dysprosium,
    holmium, erbium, thulium, ytterbium, lutecium, actinium, thorium,
    protoactinium, uranium, neptunium, and plutonium.


CLS 501/153
TXT Aluminum compound containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising aluminum or a compound of
    aluminum.


CLS 501/154
TXT Silicon compound containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising silicon or a compound of silicon.


CLS 501/155
TXT Composed of waste material:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising materials retrieved as residues
    from other processes or as scraps.

    (1)     Note.  Slag, red mud and clinker are common terms used in the art
    which would be suitable for use with a composition or process of this
    subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    252+ for the solidification, vitrification, or cementation of hazardous or
    toxic waste.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS
    PERTAINING TO OPTICAL GLASSES IN
    SUBCLASSES 13, 40, 41+, AND 53+.


CLS 501/900
TXT Optical glass (e.g., silent on refractive index and/or abbe number):

    Cross-reference copies of original patents in the above enumerated
    subclasses which disclose optical glass compositions wherein neither the
    refractive index nor the Abbe number is disclosed.

    (1)     Note.  Disclosures of optical glass compositions reciting a
    refractive index or Abbe number are cross-referenced in the indented
    subclasses 901 through 906.


CLS 501/901
TXT Having R.I. at least 1.8:

    This subclass takes cross-references of patents which are originals in
    subclasses enumerated above disclosing an optical glass composition or
    method of making same having a refractive index of at least 1.8.


CLS 501/902
TXT Having abbe number at least 70:

    This subclass takes cross-reference of patents which are originals in
    subclasses enumerated above disclosing an optical glass composition or
    method of making same having an Abbe number of at least 70.


CLS 501/903
TXT Having refractive index less than 1.8 and abbe number less than 70:

    This subclass takes cross-reference copies of patents which are originals
    in the above enumerated subclasses disclosing an optical glass composition
    or method of making same having a refractive index of less than 1.8 and an
    Abbe number of less than 70.


CLS 501/904
TXT Infrared transmitting or absorbing:

    This subclass takes cross-references of patents which are originals in
    subclasses enumerated above disclosing an optical glass composition or
    method of making same disclosed as having the property of or being
    specifically formulated to enhance the transmission or absorption of
    radiation in the infrared portion of the electromagnetic spectrum.

    (1)     Note.  The infrared portion of the spectrum is considered to
    include 14,000 - 15,000 A5 or 1012 - 1014 HZ.


CLS 501/905
TXT Ultraviolet transmitting or absorbing:

    This subclass takes cross-references of patents which are originals in
    subclasses enumerated above disclosing an optical glass composition or
    method of making same disclosed as having the property of or being
    specifically formulated to enhance the transmission or absorption of
    radiation in the ultraviolet portion of the electromagnetic spectrum.  The
    ultraviolet portion of the spectrum is considered to include 4,000 - 40,000
    A5 or 1015 - 1017 HZ.


CLS 501/906
TXT Thorium oxide containing:

    Optical glasses which comprise thorium
    oxide (ThO2).


CLS 502/
TTL CATALYST, SOLID SORBENT, OR  SUPPORT THEREFOR:  PRODUCT  OR PROCESS OF
    MAKING

CLS 502/
TXT I.      This class provides for (1) a mixture of materials intended to
    catalyze a reaction or to sorb a component of a fluid or (2) certain single
    materials specifically structured to catalyze a reaction or sorb a
    component.

    (1)     Note.  Except as indicated in the title and definition, the
    subclasses in this class provide for both a product and a process of making
    the product.

    In this schedule some subclasses, namely 6, 8+, 104+ and 151 provide for
    methods only and a claim to a product must be classified in another
    subclass, while other subclasses, e.g., 11+, 20+, and 418+ although
    developed on a process theme, provide also for the products of the process.
     Except for those situations in which a subclass for a specific process is
    provided a method of making a composition of this class is classified with
    the composition, per se.

    II.     GLOSSARY:

    (1)     Note.  The meaning to be given to the various "art" terms appearing
    in this class, but which have not been included in the glossary below, is
    the same as that generally accepted or in common usage.  However, certain
    terms employed in this class, which are included below, have been assigned
    definitions tailored to meet the needs of this class and therefore those
    may be more restricted or less limited or even altogether different from
    those in common usage.

    ACTIVATED
    The state or condition of a material which has been treated or acted upon
    to enable it to function as intended.  In general a change is effected
    which is discernible often only in the ability to perform such function.
    For instance, activated charcoal.

    ACTIVE CARBON
    Sorbent form compressing carbon with either additive or porous structure
    enhancing sorbability.

    ANIMAL CHARCOAL
    See Bone Black

    BONE BLACK
    Solid residue from chafing bones - @10%carbon, 80% Ca3(PO4), used
    particularly in decolorizing sugar solutions.

    CATALYST
    An agent which affects or effects a chemical reaction by its presence in
    the reaction mass (other than by dissolving or dispersing the reactants)
    generally being recoverable from the products as if it did not enter into
    the reaction and merely provided the impetus for reaction of other
    materials.  While it was originally thought that a catalyst did not enter
    the reaction and instead provided sites at which the reactants, per se,
    interacted, it is understood now that at least some transitory
    intermediates may involve the catalyst.  The catalyst, however does not
    contribute substance to the desired final product even though it may remain
    inseparable from such product.

    CATALYZE
    Affecting, effecting, promoting, or initiating a reaction by being
    present-generally by presenting a contact surface and usually recoverable
    from the product in essentially unchanged form and operating other than by
    merely acting as a solvent.  The strict classical concept of a catalyst is
    not rigidly adhered to now and the catalyst may disappear, change or be
    included as an incidental moiety in the final product.  A catalyst may
    inhibit one reaction while promoting or allowing another reaction but an
    agent strictly preventing or retarding a reaction is a preservative for
    Class 252 Compositions, subclasses 380+.  Examples of these retardants or
    inhibitors are anti-oxidant and anti-knock compositions.  An agent that
    encourages a reaction by dispersing the reactants such as a more effective
    solvent is not a catalyst.  A catalyst may be gaseous, liquid or solid.

    CHAR
    Carbonaceous reside from pyrolysis of organic material generally of a hard
    burned pitch appearance.

    CLAY
    A naturally occurring hydrated aluminum silicate originally derived from
    the earth, having physical properties due at least in part to the size and
    distribution of colloidal particles, and properties including plasticity.
    Thirty or more percent of the particles are under 0.002mm in diameter.

      (1)   Note. The use of the term clay in a document is considered to meet
    the above definition.

      (2)   Note. Terms recognized as clay:  attapulgite, bentonite, fuller's
    earth, halloysite, illite kaolin, montmorillonite, mullite.

      (3)   Note.  Some earthy silicon compounds that are not clay or zeolite
    include:

    Asbestos        Kieselgahr

    Diaspore        Mica

    Diatomaceous earth      Quartz

    Diatomite       Sand

    Feldspar        Silica

    Guhr


    METAL
    An element that is not designated a nonmetal as listed infra.  Nonmetals
    are H, B, C, Si, N, P, O, S, Se, Te, Halogens (F, Cl, Br, I, At,) and noble
    gases (He, Ne, Ar, Kr, Xe, Rn).  The various types or groups of metals are
    as set out at the beginning of the schedule.

    ORGANIC
    A compound in which carbon is bonded to (1) a second carbon; (2) at least
    one atom of hydrogen or halogen; or (3) nitrogen by a single or double
    bond; except cyanic and (HOCN) cyanogen (NCCN), cyanamide (H2NCN), cyanogen
    halide (HalCN), hydrocyanic acid (HCN) isocyanic acid (HNCO) fulminic acid
    (HCNO) and metal carbides (MeCCMe).  See class definition of Class 260.

    SORB
    The attracting and holding of a constituent of a contacting fluid, on the
    surface, within pores, or throughout its mass by a material of solid
    character.  The sorbing is often selective, preferentially attracting a
    component and not attracting another but it may apply to a complete fluid.
    The sorbent may comprise a solid impregnated with a normally liquid
    material in which the mixture has a solid property but does not encompass a
    solution of a solid in a liquid.

    SPECIFICALLY STRUCTURED
    Having shape or size designed or calculated to increase the catalysis or
    sorbency of a material, generally by presenting a greater surface area per
    unit volume or a pore size of critical dimensions.  Examples of
    specifically structured single materials are Raney nickel and activated
    carbon. Since porosity and specific pore size are inherent in zeolites,
    critical dimensions of the pores of a Zeolite alone are not considered to
    constitute specific structure.

    ZEOLITE
    A hydrous alumino silicate characterized by a three dimensional framework
    of Si04 and Al04 tetrahedra, cross-linked by the sharing of oxygen atoms
    being chemically balanced by a cation, usually sodium or calcium and of
    crystalline structure such that openings or pores allow access to a
    relatively large absorption area inside the crystal.  The cation may be ion
    exchanged for other metal ions, ammonia, an amine or hydrogen.  Zeolites
    may be activated for sorption by driving off the water of hydration.

      (1)   Note. Terms Recognized as being Zeolite:

    Analcite        Levynite


    Cancrinite      Mesolite


    Chabazite       Mordenite

    Clinotilolite   Natrolite


    Cordierite      Offretite


    Edingtonite     Paulingite


    Erionite                Phillipsite


    Faujasite       Ptilolite


    Ferrierite      Scolecite


    Gmelinite       Thomsonite


    Heulandite      ZSM


    Laumontite      ZK


      (2)   Note.  See the list in (3) Note attached to the definition of Clay,
    supra for some silicon compounds not treated as clays or zeolites in this
    class (502).

    SYNONYMS OF THE ELEMENTS



    Alabamine - astatine    Erythronium - vanadium

    Aldebaranium - ytterbium        Ferrum  -  iron

    Argentum - silver       Florentium - illinium

    Aurum -  gold   Glucinum - beryllium

    Austrium - impure gallium       Hydrargyrum - mercury

    Cassiopeium - Iutecium  Illinium - promethium

    Celtium - lutecium      Kalium - potassium

    Columbium - niobium     Masurium - technetium

    Demonium - dysprosium   Natrium - sodium

    Deuterium - hydrogen    Neoytterbium - ytter-
            bium

    Didymium - neodymium    Niobium - Columbium   and praseodymium

    Dwi-manganese - rheniu  Niton - radon

    Eka-aluminum - gallium  Plumbum - lead

    Eka-boron - scandium    Radium emanation -
            radon

    Eka-cesium - virginium  Stannum - tin

    Eka-iodine -alabamine   Stibium - antimony

    Eka-manganese -         Tritiumum - hydrogen
    masurium

    Eka-silicon - germanium Virginium - francium

    Eka-tantalum -  Wolfran - tungsten
    protactinium



    III.    Class Lines With and Search Notes to Other Classes

    A.      General Guideline

    1. Classes directed to element or
    compound  Superiority is dependent on comprehensiveness.
    A patent claiming a new compound and a composition of this class including
    such compound is placed here as an original and cross referenced to the
    compound class. A patent claiming a new compound or process of making it,
    and a composition of this class which is used in making the compound is
    placed in the compound class as an original and cross-referenced here.

    2.      Composition Classes:  The classification of a patent with claims of
    equal comprehensiveness classifiable in several composition classes is
    determined by the superiority of composition classes as listed in the
    Manual of Classification pages 1-6 and the definition of Class 252,
    Compositions, (5) Note in which there is a explanation of the
    classification of patents directed to a composition with multiple uses.

    B.      Classes Providing for Related Matter

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, for a process of dyeing, bleaching or cleaning a
    textile which may utilize a catalyst or sorbent.

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, for a composition designed to
    initiate or sustain a flame and which may include a catalyst or sorbent.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 90+ for processes of gas
    separation using solid sorbents.  Class 95 will take the combination of gas
    separation using a solid sorbent and regenerating the solid sorbent.

    96,     Gas Separation:  Apparatus, subclasses 108+ for solid sorbent
    apparatus for gas separation.  Class 502 will take zeolite or other solid
    sorbent compositions having details of the physical characteristics of the
    composition itself (e.g., porosity, particle size, etc.).  Class 502 will
    also take zeolite or other solid sorbent compositions that are layered,
    laminated, or otherwise affixed to another zeolite or other solid sorbent
    composition or to a support material.  Class 96 takes apparatus having (a)
    an inlet for the fluid mixture to be treated, (b) a means effective to
    cause separation into constituent parts, and (c) an outlet for at least one
    constituent separate and distinct from an outlet for another constituent or
    a single outlet used at different times to remove the separated
    constituents.  The means causing separation into constituent parts confines
    the zeolite or other solid sorbent composition inside an enclosure that
    contains the fluid mixture being separated.  Class 96 also takes filter
    elements having zeolite or other solid sorbent compositions held in an open
    structure or rim that encases, holds, or borders the zeolite or other solid
    sorbent composition or held on a skeletal structure.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, particularly subclasses 171+ for material used
    for absorbing moisture from an animal waste product, i.e., excrement or
    urine.

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, for a process using a sorbent in
    refining.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, for a composition of
    that class which may include a catalyst or sorbent.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes Thermolytic, for a process producing char
    or a carbon residue which may have catalytic or sorbent properties.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, for an electrode of that
    class which may be catalytic or a process of treating an electrolyte of
    that class which may include sorbing.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, for a process which may
    employ a catalyst or sorbent in treating petroleum.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, for a process which may utilize
    a catalyst or sorbent in treating water or liquids in general.

    252,    Compositions, for a composition of general or of some specific
    utilities and the relative position of this class (502) with the various
    uses and functions provided for in that class.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds (or the 520 and 530-570 series of
    classes incorporated therein) for either an organic compound which may be
    used as a catalyst or sorbent or a process using a catalyst or sorbent in
    making or purifying an organic compound.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, for either an inorganic compound
    which may be used as a catalyst or sorbent and especially subclasses 700+
    for a zeolite or a process using a catalyst to make an inorganic compound.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    for a food which may include a sorbent.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Compositions, or Product
    Thereof, for a light sensitive composition which may include a catalyst.

    435,    Chemistry Molecular Biology and Microbiology, for an enzyme or a
    method using an enzyme.

    518,    Chemistry:  Fischer-Tropsch Processes; or Purification or Recovery
    of Products Thereof, for a process of that class using a catalyst and see
    especially subclasses 701, 707, 709, 713, to 721 and subclass 722 for a
    process using a sorbent.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, for a process in which a
    catalyst or sorbent may be used to produce a hydrocarbon.

    C.      Classes Which May Have Catalytic or  Sorbent Functions:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 23.2+ for gas analysis by use of
    a sorbent.

    206,    Special Receptacles or Package, subclasses 0.7 and 204 for a
    container of that class including a sorbent.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, subclass 900 for an alloy which
    may sorb hydrogen.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, particularly subclasses 30, 69+, 88+, 122,
    177+, 190+, 211+, and 312 for a process using, or apparatus including, a
    catalyst or sorbent.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, Digest 13 and 16 for specific
    techniques which may be useful in using or regenerating a catalyst or
    sorbent.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, appropriate
    subclasses for chemical analysis or testing processes involving the use of
    a sorbent.


CLS 502/1
TXT HAVING FOREIGN OR DIVERSE FUNCTION (E.G., PREVENT CORROSION, ETC.):

    Composition under the class definition having utility in addition to
    catalysis or sorbency.

    (1)     Note.  The diverse function may comprehend myriad uses, e.g.,
    impart color, etc., but a claimed function provided for in Class 252,
    Compositions in the schedule higher than subclass 478 is superior and will
    govern classification.

    (2)     Note.  Some wick compositions may be classified here on the basis
    of a heat conductivity in addition to sorbency, but the bulk of wick
    compositions are classified in subclasses 400+.

    (3)     Note.  A composition intended to function as an ignitor by
    catalytic and incandescing action is proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 1 for a generically claimed composition
    having several disclosed uses and the appropriate subclass for a
    composition having a claimed utility provided for in that class schedule
    down to subclass 194, inclusive.  See (5) Note of that class (252)
    definition for an explanation of placement of a patent to a generic
    composition.


CLS 502/2
TXT With structure having utility in addition to support or carrier:

    Composition under subclass 1 having a shape or dimension serving a purpose
    other than as a carrier for or to enhance the surface contact area of
    catalytic or sorbent material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for a nominally claimed (a) self
    cleaning oven wall or (b) exhaust muffler with catalytic activity.

    (2)     Note.  The foreign or diverse function is usually provided by the
    physical form of the composition in this subclass, while the other function
    in subclass 1 is usually due to the chemical nature of the composition.


CLS 502/3
TXT TO BE USED AS A MELT:

    Composition under the class definition intended to function in the liquid
    phase, and which at standard temperature and pressure would be solid.

    (1)     Note.  To be classified here, a patent must include a claim
    reciting the liquid phase, or molten feature.

    (2)     Note.  A sorbent which would normally be solid at room temperature
    but is claimed as a liquid or melt is classifiable here.


CLS 502/4
TXT IN FORM OF A MEMBRANE:

    Composition under the class definition claimed in terms designating a
    relatively thin, flexible film.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 500.21 for a membrane
    for treating liquids, in general, and water, in particular, by selective
    diffusion therethrough of components of the liquid.


CLS 502/5
TXT IRRADIATION BY, OR APPLICATION OF, ELECTRICAL, MAGNETIC OR WAVE ENERGY:

    Process of preparing or perfecting a composition under the class definition
    by subjecting it to a flow or current of electrons, a sonic, magnetic, or
    electromotive field, or bombardment by sub atomic particles or radiant
    energy (e.g., ion implantation, ultra sonic vibration, actinic light,
    X-rays, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    522,    for a cross-reference art collection of compositions of this class,
    activated for use, by radiant energy.


CLS 502/6
TXT CONTROL RESPONSIVE TO SENSED CONDITION:

    Processes under the class definition involving a process control which is
    responsive to a sensed condition, (e.g., temperature, pressure, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  A process of regenerating a composition of this class with
    automatic control of temperature is classifiable here.


CLS 502/7
TXT BIOSPECIFIC MATERIAL, OR PRODUCED BY ENZYME OR MICROORGANISM:

    Composition under the class definition peculiarly adapted to affect or bind
    a unique or very narrow spectrum of biological material, or produced by a
    living plant or animal of a size normally visible only through a microscope.

    (1)     Note.  Microorganism includes bacterium, yeast, fungus, virus and
    unicellular alga.

    (2)     Note.  A composition in which a catalytic function is supplied only
    by an enzyeme is classifiable in Class 435,  Chemistry:  Molecular Biology
    and Microbiology.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, appropriate
    subclasses especially 183+, for an enzyme (also known as a biological
    catalyst), per se, or a process using an enzyme, and see the definition of
    that class (435) for lines with other classes involving enzymes, and
    subclass 815 for a cross-reference art collection for a process of
    separating enzymes.


CLS 502/8
TXT FORMING OR TREATING A SPHERE, PROCESS  ONLY:

    Method under the class definition in which catalytic, sorbent, or carrier
    material is shaped as an orb or ball, or such material so shaped, is
    processed to perfect it for a utility of this class.

    (1)     Note.  The material may be a catalyst precursor or a carrier, per
    se, claimed or disclosed solely for use in a composition of this class.

    (2)     Note.  This and the indented subclass provide for process only, and
    a claim to a sphere of a composition of this class must be classified in
    this schedule on some other basis, generally being crossed down to the
    appropriate class providing for the composition.


CLS 502/9
TXT Forming other than by liquid immersion:

    Method under subclass 8 in which the spherical shape is imparted by solid
    or gaseous means.

    (1)     Note.  Some examples of methods provided for in this subclass are
    cutting, rolling, spraying, or atomizing, shot tower dropping, etc.


CLS 502/10
TXT Treating preformed sphere only:

    Process under subclass 8 in which a previously made sphere is subjected to
    the action of an agent which perfects it for use as a catalyst or sorbent.

    (1)     Note.  The agent may be chemical or physical.


CLS 502/11
TXT INCLUDING ION EXCHANGING, EXCEPT ZEOLITES  OR PRODUCT THEREOF:

    Process under the class definition in which a dissociably charged chemical
    moiety is released by the composition and a different charged moiety of the
    same polarity is captured, effecting a reversible chemical replacement
    reaction.

    (1)     Note.  While an ion exchange process for a zeolite for this class
    is not classifiable here, such a process involving a clay is classifiable
    here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60+,    for a process of making a catalytic or sorbent zeolite composition
    which may include an ion exchange step.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 179 and 184 for an ion exchanging
    composition.

    521,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 25 for an ion
    exchange synthetic resin.


CLS 502/12
TXT For regenerating or rehabilitating catalyst or sorbent:

    Process, under subclass 11, of treating a composition which has been in
    use, to restore it to a state of intended function.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, for processes of
    regenerating catalysts or adsorbents by drying only.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, appropriate subclasses for a
    process of carbonizing by thermolytic distillation.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, for apparatus for making or reactivating
    bone black and other carbonaceous adsorbents by destructive distillation.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, for processes of converting
    or refining mineral oils which also includes the steps of reactivating the
    catalyst or adsorbent used in the process.


CLS 502/20
TXT REGENERATING OR REHABILITATING CATALYST OR SORBENT:

    Process of treating a composition under the class definition, which has
    been in use, to restore it to a state of intended function by (a) removing
    accumulated extraneous material, (b) replacing a lost essential or
    perfecting component, (c) rearranging disturbed elements into a former
    functionally useful configuration, or (d) subjecting spent material to a
    force or environment serving to make it again active for its intended
    function.

    (1)     Note.  A steam treatment which is claimed to activate spent carbon
    sorbent is provided for in this or an indented subclass even though there
    is no disclosure of removal of contaminant or addition of material.

    (2)     Note.  Combinations of regeneration or reactivation of an adsorbent
    and the recovery of the adsorbed material are classified on the basis of
    the material recovered.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas Vapor Contact With Solids, for processes of
    regenerating catalysts or adsorbents by drying only.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, appropriate subclasses for a
    process of carbonizing by thermolytic distillation.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, for apparatus for making or reactivating
    bone black and other carbonaceous adsorbents by destructive distillation.

    208,    Mineral oils:  Processes and Products, for processes of converting
    or refining mineral oils which also includes the steps of reactivating the
    catalyst or adsorbent used in the process.


CLS 502/21
TXT Including segregation of diverse particles:

    Process under subclass 20 wherein components of the catalyst or sorbent are
    separated on the basis of specific gravity, density, size, shape, or other
    property of differing discrete small bodies of the composition.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes abrasion with segregation of the
    catalyst or sorbent from abraded particles.  It also includes segregation
    of catalyst and foreign particles such as dust.

    (2)     Note.  Flotation separation is an example of a process classifiable
    here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, for methods of
    segregation of particles of general utility.


CLS 502/22
TXT Treating with a liquid or treating in a liquid phase, including dissolved
    or suspended:

    Process under subclass 20 in which the catalyst or sorbent is contacted
    with a liquid or wherein treatment is effected in a liquid medium.

    (1)     Note.  In a liquid medium includes either dissolved or suspended
    catalyst or sorbents.

    (2)     Note.  The treating reagent is itself a liquid, is dissolved or
    suspended in a liquid or is added to a catalyst or sorbent which is
    dissolved or suspended in a liquid carrier, or is itself a liquid,
    including molten.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for a catalyst which functions in a molten state.


CLS 502/23
TXT "Wet air combustion" oxidation of material submerged in liquid:

    Process under subclass 22 in which the catalyst or sorbent is subjected to
    dissolved oxygen under pressure and heat, below the critical temperature,
    such that autogenic oxidation is effected.

    (1)     Note.  Generally undesired extraneous carbonaceous material is
    converted to water and carbon oxides.

    (2)     Note.  The process is also known by several terms such as
    "flameless combustion", "submerged combustion", etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 761 for a similar
    process in which liquid is treated by oxidation of components in the liquid
    phase.


CLS 502/24
TXT Including intended dissolution or precipitation of a substantial amount of
    an ingredient of the ultimate composition:

    Process under subclass 22 in which an essential component of the
    composition is (1) dissolved in a solvent or by reaction, or (2) caused to
    come out of solution in a solid phase, permitting separation from reaction
    products and/or extraneous material or providing such component in an
    effective form.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass requires an intentional
    dissolution of a component of the composition and does not include
    incidental etching of an active material during an acid treating to clean
    the metal surface.

    (2)     Note.  A process in which additional active material may be added
    by precipitation is not proper for this subclass.  The material
    precipitated must have been present in the original catalyst composition,
    though possibly in a different form.


CLS 502/25
TXT Using salt or alkaline substance:

    Process under subclass 22 in which the material utilized is capable of
    supplying a nonprotonic positive ion.

    (1)     Note.  The treating material of the subclass generally gives a
    basic or neutral pH, but may include soaps (salts of carboxylic acids) and
    acid salts (e.g., NaHSO4, CaHPO4).

    (2)     Note.  The use of a base to neutralize a previous acid treatment is
    provided for in this subclass.


CLS 502/26
TXT Ammonia or derivative thereof:

    Process under subclass 25 in which the alkaline material or salt comprises
    NH3 or a derivative thereof e.g., amine, amide, or quaternary ammonium salt.


CLS 502/27
TXT Using acid:

    Process under subclass 22 in which a proton donor is utilized.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     for a process using a halogen acid in the gaseous state.


CLS 502/28
TXT Organic:

    Process under subclass 27 in which the acid contains carbon as set out in
    the term "organic" in the glossary.


CLS 502/29
TXT Organic liquid:

    Process under the subclass 22 in which the treating agent is a liquid
    carbon compound as set out in the term organic in the glossary.

    (1)     Note.  The bulk of the disclosures in this subclass are directed to
    solvent washing or extracting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    21,     for a flotation separating of particles process which may include
    an organic liquid.


CLS 502/30
TXT And gas addition thereto:

    Process under subclass 29 which includes the step of subjecting the
    composition to the action of a gas.

    (1)     Note.  The gas treatment may be concurrent with the liquid
    treatment.


CLS 502/31
TXT Hydrocarbon:

    Process under subclass 29 in which the liquid used comprises a compound
    composed of only hydrogen and carbon.


CLS 502/32
TXT Halogen containing:

    Process under subclass 29 in which the organic material contains a
    nonmetallic element from GP. VII.


CLS 502/33
TXT Oxygen containing:

    Process under subclass 29 in which the organic material contains element
    number 8.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for a process utilizing an organic acid which may contain oxygen.


CLS 502/34
TXT Gas or vapor treating:

    Process under subclass 20 in which the treating material is a readily
    diffusive fluid, tending to expand indefinitely and with molecules in free
    movement.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for the use of normally liquid
    material which becomes gaseous under the prevailing conditions (e.g.,
    temperature above its boiling point).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for the use of a gas in conjunction with an organic liquid to
    regenerate a catalyst or sorbent.


CLS 502/35
TXT Using halogen containing substance including liquids vaporizable upon
    contacting spent catalyst or sorbent:

    Process under subclass 34 in which the treating material includes a
    nonmetallic element of GP. VII, free or in a compound, in gaseous form or
    as a liquid vaporizable upon contacting the spent material being
    regenerated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, for a catalytic or sorbent
    process of that class which may include regeneration of the catalyst or
    sorbent and see especially subclass 140.


CLS 502/36
TXT Fluorine containing:

    Process under subclass 35 in which the halogen is element number 9.


CLS 502/37
TXT Simultaneously or subsequently adding free oxygen or use of oxyhalogen
    compound:

    Process under subclass 35 in which uncombined element number 8 is
    introduced with or after the halogen material, or a halogen compound
    including element number 8 is a treating agent.


CLS 502/38
TXT Treating with free oxygen containing gas:

    Process under subclass 34 in which the gas includes uncombined element
    number 8.


CLS 502/39
TXT And forming useful by-product:

    Process under subclass 38 in which a second material or energy of value,
    apart from the catalyst or sorbent composition is obtained.

    (1)     Note.  The by-product forming does not include recovering or
    separating of a reaction product or a sorbed component resulting from the
    process in which the composition of this class became spent. See (2) Note
    of subclass 20.  The by-product includes e.g., collected carbon oxide gas
    from combustion of carbonaceous material fouling a catalyst or heat of
    oxidation used to provide a source of power.  The use of heat generated in
    a process of rehabilitation to preheat the treating agent, sorbent, or
    catalyst is not considered to be forming a by-product.


CLS 502/40
TXT And adding heat by admixing solid heat carrier:

    Process under subclass 38 in which a transfer of heat is effected by
    intimately contacting the spent material and/or treating gas with
    extraneous material having a higher temperature.

    (1)     Note.  Extraneous solid material includes recycled regenerated
    material which may be mixed with incoming spent material to cool such
    regenerated material and preheat the spent material.


CLS 502/41
TXT In gaseous suspension, (e.g., fluidized bed, etc.):

    Process under subclass 38 wherein particles of material are contacted by a
    column of gas rising at a velocity which supports them in a state of
    turbulence.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, Dig. 16 for a collection of
    fluidization techniques.


CLS 502/42
TXT And substantially complete oxidation of carbon monoxide to carbon dioxide
    within regeneration zone:

    Process under subclass 41 in which is recited a positive step or condition
    serving to ensure that any carbon monoxide produced is further reacted to
    form carbon dioxide before leaving the site of the regeneration process.

    (1)     Note.  A process which is claimed to meet legally acceptable
    emission standards for carbon monoxide is classifiable here.


CLS 502/43
TXT Plural distinct serial combustion stages:

    Process under subclass 41 including two or more sequential steps of
    energetic oxidation.

    (1)     Note.  The serial combustion stages may occur in the same or
    different reaction zones by, in the first case, utilizing distinctly
    differing combustion conditions or, in the second case, causing a
    continuous flow of material through different reaction zones.


CLS 502/44
TXT Indirectly heating or cooling spent material within regeneration zone or
    prior to entry into regeneration zone:

    Process under subclass 41 employing a heat exchanger to change the
    temperature of the sorbent or catalyst before or during contact with the
    treating gas.

    (1)     Note.  Heating of the treating gas, autogenous heating and directly
    contacting the material with a heating or cooling medium do not satisfy the
    requirement of indirectly heating the spent material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40,     for a similar process in which heat is added by use of an admixed
    solid heat carrier.


CLS 502/45
TXT Moving bed (e.g., vertically or horizontally, etc., moving bulk material):

    Process under subclass 38 in which the spent material is contacted by the
    gas while progressing or being carried as a relatively compact mass.

    (1)     Note.  The moving bed may be supported on a belt or be a continuous
    flow of material through a zone and includes a rising column of material
    supported by sequentially added catalyst or sorbent. Additionally rotary
    motion is included, as in a rotary kiln or screw conveyor.

    (2)     Note.  Disclosures for this subclass will either be silent as to
    relative movement of gas and spent material or indicate all such relative
    movement to be equivalent. Specified relative movement between gas and
    material is provided for in an indented subclass.


CLS 502/46
TXT Generally concurrent flow of oxygen containing gas and material:

    Process under subclass 45 in which the treating fluid and the catalyst or
    sorbent move along the same path and in the same direction.


CLS 502/47
TXT Generally countercurrent flow of oxygen containing gas and material:

    Process under subclass 45 in which the treating fluid and the catalyst or
    sorbent are fed in opposite directions.


CLS 502/48
TXT Generally transverse (i.e., lateral) flow of oxygen containing gas relative
    to material:

    Process under subclass 45 in which the treating fluid travel is normal (at
    a right angle) to the direction of catalyst or sorbent feed.

    (1)     Note.  The gas may contact the material from above, below or a side.


CLS 502/49
TXT Plural distinct oxidation stages:

    Process under subclass 38 including a second treatment of the spent
    material with an oxidizing agent differing in either location or reaction
    condition.

    (1)     Note.  Recitation of two or more stages differing in temperature,
    pressure, or oxygen content is considered to indicate plural distinct
    stages.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41+,    for a similar plural stage oxidation process using a fluidized bed.

    50,     for a second reactive gas treatment other than oxidation (e.g.,
    reduction, replacement etc.).


CLS 502/50
TXT Reactive gas treating after oxidation:

    Process under subclass 38 in which, subsequent to the gaseous oxidation,
    the spent material is subjected to reaction with a nonoxidizing gas.


CLS 502/51
TXT Oxidation gas comprises essentially steam and oxygen:

    Process under subclass 38 in which water vapor is intentionally added to
    the free oxygen containing gas.


CLS 502/52
TXT With control of oxygen content in oxidation gas:

    Process under subclass 38 in which the concentration of oxygen is
    maintained at or adjusted to a predetermined parameter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for a process in which the oxygen is automatically controlled.

    42,     for a fluidized process in which sufficient oxygen is maintained to
    ensure elimination of carbon monoxide.


CLS 502/53
TXT Elemental hydrogen:

    Process under subclass 34 in which the treating fluid includes free element
    number one.


CLS 502/54
TXT Ammonia or derivative thereof:

    Process under subclass 34 in which the treating fluid comprises the
    compound of nitrogen and three atoms of hydrogen or its substituted or
    additive forms including ammonium salts, amines and salts thereof, amides,
    and quaternary compounds.


CLS 502/55
TXT Steam:

    Process under subclass 34 in which the treating fluid consists essentially
    of vaporized water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for a similar process using steam added to air or other free oxygen
    containing gas.


CLS 502/56
TXT By heat:

    Process under subclass 20 in which regeneration or rehabilitation is
    effected by an increase in temperature.

    (1)     Note.  The processes of this subclass may include the use of a
    solid treating agent, but the use of a liquid or gas treating agent is
    provided for in subclasses higher in the schedule.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22+,    for a liquid treating process which may include heating.


CLS 502/60
TXT ZEOLITE OR CLAY, INCLUDING GALLIUM ANALOGS:

    Composition under the class definition which contains a naturally occurring
    earthy aluminum silicate having the characteristics set out in the glossary
    term "clay" or "zeolite" or a synthetic replica of the natural material, or
    similar materials which contain gallium rather than aluminum.

    (1)     Note.  A synthetic zeolite, per se, is provided for in Class 423,
    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, and subclass 700 definition explains the
    distinction between what is considered a zeolite compound and a mixture.
    For placement in this class (502) a zeolite must be admixed with something
    or be claimed in terms of structure, sufficient to cause classification in
    Class 428 rather than in Class 423.  A simple ion exchange operation is
    considered to give a different zeolite compound still proper for Class 423.
     A subsequent reduction of an exchanged ion is considered to comprise a
    mixture, proper for a composition class.  Because particular pore size
    and/or shape is an inherent property of a zeolite, recitation of pore
    structure peculiar to catalysis or sorption, by itself, is not sufficient
    for placement in this class (502).  This contrasts with classification of
    Raney type catalysts and activated carbon sorbents.

    (2)     Note.  See Main Class Glossary Definitions, for definition of clay
    and zeolite:

    (3)     Note.  A better understanding of zeolites may be had by consulting
    such literature as:  Zeolite Molecular Sieves, O. W. Breck, John Wiley and
    Sons, 1974.

    (4)     Note.  Some earthly silicon compounds that are not clay or zeolite
    include:

    Asbestos        Guhr

    Diaspore        Kieselguhr

    Diatomaceous    Mica earth

    Diatomite       Quartz

    Feldspar        Sand

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 179 and 184 for a zeolite composition used
    in ion- exchange.


CLS 502/61
TXT Gallium containing:

    Composition under subclass 60 which includes element 31.

    (1)     Note.  The gallium may be elemental or in a compound and either in
    addition to the clay or zeolite or may replace some or all of the aluminum
    in clay or zeolite.


CLS 502/62
TXT Including organic component:

    Composition under subclass 60 which includes a carbon compound as set out
    in the glossary term "organic".


CLS 502/63
TXT And additional Al or Si containing component:

    Composition under subclass 60 including along with either a clay or a
    zeolite, element 13 or 14 or a compound of such element.

    (1)     Note.  The additional Al or Si component may include a clay or
    zeolite of a different source but does not include a naturally occurring
    clay of mixed Aluminum silicates.


CLS 502/64
TXT Zeolite:

    Composition under subclass 63 in which a component comprises zeolite.


CLS 502/65
TXT And rare earth metal (Sc, Y or Lanthanide) containing:

    Composition under subclass 64 which includes scandium, yttrium, or a
    lanthanide.


CLS 502/66
TXT And Group VIII (Iron Group or Platinum Group) metal containing:

    Composition under subclass 64 containing an iron group or platinum group
    metal.


CLS 502/67
TXT Mixed zeolites:

    Composition under subclass 64 which the additional Al or Si is in the form
    of a second zeolite.


CLS 502/68
TXT Mixed with clay:

    Composition under subclass 64, in which the additional Al or Si is in the
    form of clay.

    (1)     Note.  The zeolite may be synthesized from a clay which is
    positively recited as remaining in excess.


CLS 502/69
TXT Heterogeneous arrangement:

    Composition under subclass 64 in which components are claimed as occupying
    spatially distinct areas.

    (1)     Note.  Such terms as layered, coated particles, discrete areas
    etc., are considered to describe a heterogeneous arrangement.


CLS 502/70
TXT Gelling in presence of zeolite:

    Process under subclass 64 in which a lyophilic sol containing zeolite is
    partially coagulated or a product of such process.


CLS 502/71
TXT ZSM type:

    Composition under subclass 64 in which the zeolite is synthetic, analogous
    to a product originally produced by using an organic template.


CLS 502/72
TXT Mixed clays:

    Composition under subclass 63 containing different earthy materials as
    encompassed by the glossary term "clay"

    (1)     Note.  This subclass requires a deliberate admixture of clays and
    does not encompass a naturally occurring mixture of clays.


CLS 502/73
TXT And Group III or rare earth metal (Al, Ga, In, Ti, Sc, Y) or Lanthanide
    containing:

    Composition under subclass 60 including aluminum, gallium, scandium,
    yttrium, indium, thallium or a lanthanide.


CLS 502/74
TXT And Group VIII (Iron Group or Platinum Group) containing:

    Composition under subclass 60 including an iron group or a platinum group
    metal.


CLS 502/75
TXT Including chemical reduction of exchanged cation:

    Process under subclass 60 in which a positive ion which has replaced an
    original ion gains electrons or product of such process.

    (1)     Note.  The bulk of art in this subclass is concerned with
    exchanging alkali metal ions in zeolite and reducing the new ion to the
    free metal.


CLS 502/76
TXT Coprecipitation:

    Process under subclass 60 in which different solutes are simultaneously
    thrown out of solution.


CLS 502/77
TXT ZSM type:

    Composition under subclass 60 containing a synthetic zeolite of the type
    originally produced using an organic template or a zeolite analogous
    thereto.


CLS 502/78
TXT Mordenite type:

    Composition under subclass 60 in which a zeolite comprises 4 or 5 membered
    rings of SiO4 and AlO4 tetahedra, so arranged that the crystal lattice
    comprises pores and channels running parallel along the crystal axis to
    give a tubular configuration without intersections allowing access to the
    cavities in only one direction.

    (1)     Note.  Mordenite generally has a silica to alumina ratio of about 8
    to about 12.


CLS 502/79
TXT Faujasite type (e.g., X or Y, etc.):

    Composition under subclass 60 in which a zeolite is characterized by having
    a silica to alumina ratio of about 2.5 to about 7 and a very open
    framework, comprising truncated octahedra (B cages) characteristic of
    sodalite linked by hexagonal prisms forming super cages, and a

    pore size of approximately 60 to 150 A.

    (1)     Note.  The type of zeolite is generally determined by X-ray
    diffraction and the patterns may be found in the literature cited in the
    notes to subclass 60. Faujasite type includes X, Y, Z 14 and H S.


CLS 502/80
TXT Clay:

    Composition under subclass 60 containing the earthy hydrous aluminum
    silicate as set out in the Glossary term "clay".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, particularly subclasses 173 for material used for
    absorbing moisture from an animal waste product, i.e., excrement or urine,
    and having a clay component.


CLS 502/81
TXT Acid treating:

    Process under subclass 80 in which the clay is contacted with an acid or
    the product of such process.


CLS 502/82
TXT Plural acid treatment:

    Process under subclass 81 in which the clay is treated with a second acid
    or product of such process.

    (1)     Note.  The treatment may involve the use of the same acid more than
    once or different acids either simultaneously or sequentially.


CLS 502/83
TXT Sulfuric or hydrochloric acid:

    Process under subclass 81 in which the treatment is effected by either
    hydrochloric or sulfuric acid.


CLS 502/84
TXT And metal, metal oxide, or metal hydroxide:

    Composition under subclass 80 in which the clay is associated with an
    element listed as one of the metals of Group I to VIII, lanthanides or
    actinides in the table at the top of the class schedule, free or as the
    oxide or hydroxide.


CLS 502/85
TXT Activating treatment:

    Process under subclass 60 in which a zeolite is subjected to an agent which
    prepares it for a sorbent or catalytic function.

    (1)     Note.  The agent may be a chemical substance or a physical
    treatment.


CLS 502/86
TXT Utilizing ammonium ions:

    Process under subclass 85 in which a compound containing the dissociable
    moiety comprising nitrogen and four hydrogen atoms contacts the Zeolite.


CLS 502/87
TXT Support per se:

    Composition under subclass 60 in which a zeolite has no catalytic or
    sorbent property and is intended only to support other material which has
    such property.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    439,    for other materials within the preview of Class 502 which serve as
    carriers or supports, per se.


CLS 502/100
TXT CATALYST OR PRECURSOR THEREFOR:

    Composition under the class definition which is a catalyst* or which is
    claimed or disclosed to be useful solely as an essential component of a
    catalyst composition or method of making such a composition.

    *GLOSSARY TERM

    (1)     Note.  A precursor is classified with the complete disclosed
    catalyst composition.  If a composition is disclosed or claimed as both a
    catalyst, per se, and as a precursor for another catalyst, it is classified
    in the first appearing subclass providing for any complete catalyst
    composition. In this regard, a composition comprising a Group VIII metal
    compound claimed or disclosed for use solely as a Ziegler catalyst is
    classifiable in subclass 103, rather than in subclass 100.

    (2)     Note.  Included hereunder as catalysts are compositions employed to
    modify the course of a reaction so as to yield a different product than
    that which would be otherwise obtained, even though the modifying
    composition will not, per se, cause the reaction to take place. (c.f. pat.
    no. 4,125,481 to a molecular weight regulating mixture of mercaptan and
    emulsifier).

    (3)     Note.  This and indented subclasses include inventions directed to
    negative catalysts, and also known as inhibitors, except preservatives
    (e.g., octane improvers of antioxidants etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    520,    for a collection of art directed to controlling production of
    various possible products.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Composition:  Coating or Plastic, subclass 1.11 for a sensitizing
    composition for activating a substrate to be subsequently electrolessly
    metal plated and which may have a catalytic function.

    252,    Compositions, for a composition intended to preserve a material,
    e.g., an anti-oxidant or for an octane improver composition which controls
    the rate of combustion in an internal combustion engine.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses for
    inorganic compounds, per se, which may be useful as catalysts.


CLS 502/101
TXT Making catalytic electrode, process only:

    Method or process under subclass 100 for manufacturing an electrode having
    catalytic properties, generally for use in an electrolytic or fuel cell.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for the catalytic
    composition, per se, and a copy of a patent containing a claim to a
    catalytic electrode composition must be placed in the appropriate subclass
    e.g., 300.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy subclass 280 for an
    electrode of that class which may be catalytic.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product and
    Process subclasses 40+ for an electrode of that class.


CLS 502/102
TXT Plural component system comprising A - Group I to IV metal hydride or
    organometallic compound - and B - Group IV to VIII metal, lanthanide or
    actinide compound - (i.e., alkali metal, Ag, Au, Cu, alkaline earth metal,
    Be, Mg, Zn, Cd, Hg, Sc, Y, Al, Ga, In, Tl, Ti, Zr, Hf, Ge, Sn or Pb hydride
    or organometallic compound and Ti, Zr, Hf, Ge, Sn, Pb, V, Nb, Ta, As, Sb,
    Bi, Cr, Mo, W, Po, Mn, Tc, Re, Iron group, Platinum group, atomic number 57
    to 71 inclusive or atomic number 89 or higher compound):

    Composition under subclass 100 which contains (1) a metal hydride or a
    compound in which a carbon atom of an organic compound is bonded directly
    to a metal atom combined with (2) a compound of a Group IV to Group VIII
    metal or a metal of atomic number 57 to 71 inclusive or 89 to 103 inclusive
    or process of making same.

    (1)     Note.  Compounds in which a metal is completed with the electrons
    of an organic carbon to carbon multiple bond are considered to have carbon
    bonded directly to metal e.g., Bi-allyl or cyclopentadienyl complexes etc.

    (2)     Note.  The metal hydride or organometallic compound includes a
    metal of Groups I to IV and the other metal compound includes a metal of
    groups IV to VIII, an actinide or lanthanide as set out in the list
    preceding the schedule.


CLS 502/103
TXT Component A metal is Group IA, IIA or IIIA and component B metal is Group
    IVB to VIIB or VIII (i.e., alkali metal, alkaline earth Metal, Be, Mg, Al,
    Ga, In or Tl and Ti, Zr, Hf, V, Nb, Ta, Cr, Mo, W, Mn, Tc, Re, the iron
    Group or Platinum group) (e.g., Ziegler Catalyst, etc.):

    Composition under subclass 102 wherein the metal hydride or the
    organometallic compound contains Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs, Fr, Be, Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba,
    Ra, Al, Ga, In, or Tl bonded directly to hydrogen or carbon atom of an
    organic compound combined with a compound of Ti, Zr, Hf, V, Nb, Ta, Cr, Mo,
    W, Mn, Tc, Re, Fe, Co, Ni, Ru, Rh, Pd, Os, Ir, Pt, and a process of making
    same.

    (1)     Note.  These catalyst are often referred to in the art as "Ziegler"
    catalysts and are commonly employed to ploymerize olefins to form resins.


CLS 502/104
TXT Preparing catalyst or precursor:

    Methods, claimed for preparing a catalyst or precursor, under subclass 103.

    (1)     Note.  To be originally classified hereunder, a patent must contain
    a claim to a process of preparing a catalyst or precursor.

    (2)     Note.  The method for preparing the precursor is classifiable with
    the intended complete catalyst, see definition of 100 (1) Note.


CLS 502/105
TXT Including comminuting (e.g., milling, grinding, etc.):

    Process under subclass 104 which includes a step of mechanically breaking
    up a solid ingredient of the catalyst.

    (1)     Note.  This process generally employs such apparatus as rod or ball
    mills, etc.


CLS 502/106
TXT Fluidized bed feature:

    Process under subclass 104 wherein either (a) a fluidized bed is employed
    in the manufacture of a catalyst or (b) a catalyst is made which is
    disclosed or claimed as useful when employed in a fluidized bed process.


CLS 502/107
TXT Including heating to higher temperature:

    Process under subclass 104 wherein after an initial mixing or reacting of
    ingredients, the temperature of the system is increased by the application
    of outside heat, with or without the addition of additional materials.


CLS 502/108
TXT Utilizing hydrocarbon containing unsaturation not part of benzene ring:

    Process under subclass 104 wherein during the manufacture of the catalyst a
    compound containing only carbon and hydrogen and which contains
    unsaturation which is not part of a benzene ring is added.


CLS 502/109
TXT Utilizing high molecular weight synthetic polymer:

    Process under subclass 104 wherein a high molecular weight synthetic
    polymer made up of numerous smaller molecules is added to the catalyst
    system.


CLS 502/110
TXT Including plural additions of component A:

    Process under subclass 104 wherein two or more separate additions of a
    Group Ia to Group IIIa metal hydride or organometallic compound are made at
    separate times.

    (1)     Note.  The Group Ia to Group IIIa compounds added at the separate
    additions may be the same or different substances.


CLS 502/111
TXT Utilizing water or compound containing hydroxyl bonded to carbon:

    Process under subclass 104 including a step of adding a compound which
    contains a hydroxyl group bonded to carbon e.g., alcohol, phenol,
    carboxylic acid, etc. or water to the catalytic composition.


CLS 502/112
TXT Containing iodine:

    Composition under subclass 103 containing an atom of iodine.


CLS 502/113
TXT Containing two or more different component b metals:

    Composition under subclass 103 which contains two or more different Group
    IVb to Group VIIb or Group VIII metals which may be in different compounds
    or part of a single complex compound.


CLS 502/114
TXT Containing hydrides or organometallic of two or more different component A
    metals:

    Composition under subclass 103 which contains two or more different Group
    Ia to Group IIIa metals bonded directly to hydrogen or organic carbon.
    These metals may be in different compounds or in the same complex compound
    e.g., LiAlH4 etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for a process of adding different Component A metals in separate
    steps to make a catalyst.


CLS 502/115
TXT Magnesium containing:

    Composition under subclass 114 in which one of the Group Ia to Group IIIa
    metals bonded to hydrogen or organic carbon is magnesium.


CLS 502/116
TXT And compound containing silicon-hydrogen or silicon-carbon bond:

    Composition under subclass 115 which additionally contains a compound in
    which silicon is bonded directly to hydrogen or carbon.


CLS 502/117
TXT Component B metal is other than titanium or vanadium:

    Composition under subclass 103 which does not contain either element 22 or
    element 23 in the component B.


CLS 502/118
TXT And a third component C (i.e., an additive other then a saturated
    hydrocarbon or an aromatic hydrocarbon free of aliphatic or cycloaliphatic
    unsaturation):

    Catalyst composition under subclass 103 which contains an added substance
    not provided for specifically by subclass 103 other than a saturated
    compound of carbon and hydrogen only, or other than a benzene ring
    containing compound containing no other unsaturation and containing only
    carbon and hydrogen.

    (1)     Note.  Exemplary additives include olefins, cycloalkenes,
    alkeneylaromatics, dihdro naphthlene, substituted hydrocarbons and
    inorganic compounds etc.  The composition may include an alkyl, cycloalkyl
    or aromatic compound in addition to the unsaturated compound but these
    latter do not alone qualify as additives for this subclass.


CLS 502/119
TXT Nonmetallic inorganic halogen containing:

    Composition under 118 in which the additive is halogen, elemental or
    combined with a nonmetal other than carbon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    for an iodine containing Ziegler catalyst.


CLS 502/120
TXT Elemental oxygen or nonmetallic inorganic oxygen-containing material, other
    than water:

    Composition under subclass 118 in which the additive is oxygen, elemental
    or combined with a nonmetal other than organic carbon and excluding water.

    (1)     Note.  Organic has the same meaning as defined in Class 260 and
    does not include carbonate, carbon monoxide or carbon dioxide which are
    provided for in this subclass.


CLS 502/121
TXT Nonmetallic organic phosphorous containing:

    Composition under subclass 118 in which phosphorous combined with a
    metal-free moiety including carbon-bonded to a second carbon, hydrogen,
    halogen or nitrogen by a single or double bond.


CLS 502/122
TXT Nonmetallic organic sulfur containing:

    Composition under subclass 118 in which sulfur is combined with a
    metal-free moiety including carbon bonded to a second carbon, hydrogen,
    halogen or nitrogen by a single or double bond.


CLS 502/123
TXT Nonmetallic organic nitrogen containing:

    Composition under subclass 118 in which nitrogen is combined with a
    metal-free moiety including carbon bonded to a second carbon, hydrogen,
    halogen or nitrogen by single or double bond.


CLS 502/124
TXT Including element in addition to carbon, hydrogen, and nitrogen (e.g.,
    nitro, etc.):

    Composition under subclass 123 in which the nitrogen compound additionally
    includes an element other than hydrogen.


CLS 502/125
TXT Nonmetallic organic oxygen containing:

    Composition under subclass 118 in which oxygen is combined with a
    metal-free moiety including carbon bonded to a second carbon, hydrogen,
    halogen or nitrogen by a single or double bond.


CLS 502/126
TXT Ether:

    Composition under subclass 125 in which the oxygen is bonded to two
    noncarbonylic carbons.


CLS 502/127
TXT Ester:

    Composition under subclass 125 in which the oxygen is bonded to two carbon
    atoms, one of which is carbonylic.


CLS 502/128
TXT Nonmetallic organic halide:

    Composition under subclass 118 in which a nonmetallic Group VII element is
    bonded to a metal free moiety including carbon.


CLS 502/129
TXT Metal compound other than that which could be produced in situ by reaction
    of a Group IA, IIA, or Group IIIA metal compound present with a titanium or
    vanadium compound present:

    Composition under subclass 118 wherein the additive is a metal compound
    excluding any compound which could be made by reaction of a Group Ia to
    IIIa metal compound present as required by subclass 103 with a titanium or
    vanadium compound present.

    (1)     Note.  It must be noted that in many instances when the basic
    catalyst ingredients required by subclass 103 are combined, some reaction
    takes place, generally, with reduction of the Group IVb to Group VIIb or
    Group VIII metal compound to a lower valence state with elimination of
    hydride or organo groups from the Group Ia to IIIa metal compound and their
    replacement with the anionic group removed from the Group IVb or Group VIIb
    or Group VIII metal compound.  Thus, for example, TiCl4 + AlClE+2  TiCl3 +
    AlCl3 In this circumstance, the external addition of AlCl3 would not be
    provided for hereunder, but the addition of AlBr3 or NaCl would be
    classified hereunder, since these substances could not possibly be made by
    the above reaction.


CLS 502/130
TXT Lead compound:

    Composition under subclass 129 in which the metal has atomic number 82.


CLS 502/131
TXT Tin compound:

    Composition under subclass 129 in which the metal has atomic number 50.


CLS 502/132
TXT Aluminum compound:

    Composition under subclass 129 in which the metal has atomic number 13.


CLS 502/133
TXT Magnesium compound:

    Composition under subclass 129 in which the metal has atomic number 12.


CLS 502/134
TXT Halogen containing:

    Composition under subclass 133 in which the Mg compound includes a nonmetal
    of Group VII.


CLS 502/150
TXT Organic compound containing:

    Composition under subclass 100 which contains a compound containing two
    atoms of carbon bonded together, an atom of carbon bonded to at least one
    atom of hydrogen or halogen, or an atom of carbon bonded to an atom of
    nitrogen by a single or double bond.

    (1)     Note.  See the term organic in the glossary for a complete
    definition.

    (2)     Note.  To be classified in this or an indented subclass, a
    composition must contain an organic compound as defined above or a method
    which produces a composition in which an organic compound is present.  A
    method of making a catalyst in which an organic compound is employed, which
    organic compound is removed or destroyed later in the process leaving a
    composition with no organic constituent, or the composition with no organic
    constituent, or the composition so produced, is placed below in the
    appropriate subclass based on the material remaining.  A cross-reference
    art collection appears at the end of the schedule for a process of this
    type.

    (3)     Note.  The term "calcining" in a process or "calcined" in a product
    shall be interpreted as meaning that any organic substances that were
    present are either removed or destroyed in the absence of any specific
    indication to the contrary.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    506+,   for a process of making an inorganic catalyst by a method which
    employs a fugitive organic substance, removed or destroyed later in the
    process.


CLS 502/151
TXT Method of making including comminuting of solid material (e.g., grinding,
    crushing, etc.):

    Process under subclass 150 wherein solid starting material or product is
    reduced in size by physical means.

    (1)     Note.  When a reaction or mixing process involving a solid starting
    material or producing a solid product is carried out in a device wherein
    the starting material or product is impacted by solid media, e.g., ball or
    rod mill etc., it will be conclusively presumed that comminution takes
    place and the patent placed in this subclass.


CLS 502/152
TXT Organic compound including carbon-metal bond:

    Composition under subclass 150 containing an organic compound having a
    metal atom bonded to a carbon atom of the compound.

    (1)     Note.  Complexes of metal atoms with the pi-electrons of a carbon
    to carbon double bond, e.g., pi-allyl or cyclopetadienyl complexes etc.,
    are included within the scope of this subclass.


CLS 502/153
TXT Diverse metals bonded to carbon:

    Composition under subclass 152 which contains either a single organic
    compound containing two or more different metals bonded to carbon, or two
    or more organic compounds having different metals bonded to carbon.


CLS 502/154
TXT Including metal compound containing different metal than that bonded to
    carbon:

    Composition under subclass 153 including a second metal chemically bound to
    an element other than carbon (e.g., as in a salt, alcoholate, oxide, etc.).


CLS 502/155
TXT Including phosphorus or sulfur or compound containing nitrogen or
    phosphorus or sulfur:

    Composition under subclass 152 including element 15 or 16, free or
    chemically bound or a compound containing element number 7.


CLS 502/156
TXT Including alcohol, phenol, or ether:

    Composition under subclass 152 including a constituent which has oxygen
    bonded to a non carbonylic carbon, the other valence being occupied by
    hydrogen or a similar carbon or which has been produced by use of such
    oxygen containing compound.


CLS 502/157
TXT Alkali metal bonded to carbon:

    Composition under subclass 152 in which the metal is alkali.


CLS 502/158
TXT Compound with silicon-hydrogen bond or organic compound with silicon-carbon
    bond:

    Composition under subclass 150 containing element number 14 chemically
    attached to element number one or to an atom of element number 6 in a
    compound which meets the Glossary term organic.


CLS 502/159
TXT Resin, natural or synthetic, polysaccharide or polypeptide:

    Composition under subclass 150 containing macromolecules of recurring units
    of carbohydrates, -amino acids, condensed inter-active molecules or
    unsaturated addition polymers or solid or semi-solid viscous secretions of
    plants.


CLS 502/160
TXT Peroxygen compound containing:

    Composition under subclass 150 in which a compound includes a linked pair
    of oxygen atoms.


CLS 502/161
TXT With metal carbonyl or carbon monoxide complex:

    Composition under subclass 150 including the partially oxidized
    carbon-monoxide or a metal compound including the C=O moiety.


CLS 502/162
TXT Organic phosphorus or nitrogen, except the ammonium ion:

    Composition under subclass 150 in which an organic compound contains
    elements number 7 or 15 with the proviso that no more than three of the
    valences of element 7 are occupied by hydrogen.

    (1)     Note.  Quaternary ammonium compounds are provided herein, see
    subclass 164, but the ammonium ion (NH4)+ is excluded.


CLS 502/163
TXT Phthalocyanine:

    Composition under subclass 162 including the porphine formed by isoindole.


CLS 502/164
TXT Quaternary ammonium or phosphonium:

    Composition under subclass 162 in which the nitrogen or phosphorus has four
    valence satisfied by organic moieties.


CLS 502/165
TXT Copper containing:

    Composition under subclass 162 which includes element number 29.


CLS 502/166
TXT Rhodium containing:

    Composition under subclass 162 which includes element number 45.


CLS 502/167
TXT Organic nitrogen containing:

    Composition under subclass 162 in which an organic compound, as set out in
    the Glossary, includes element number 7.


CLS 502/168
TXT Organic sulfur compound:

    Compound under subclass 150 in which an organic compound, as set out in the
    Glossary includes element number 16.


CLS 502/169
TXT With metal halide:

    Composition under subclass 150 including a compound comprising a metal and
    halogen, each as set out in the table at the beginning of the schedule.


CLS 502/170
TXT With metal carboxylate or metal compound and carboxylic acid or anhydride:

    Composition under subclass 150 in which a compound contains the RCOOX group
    where R is a radical or an organic compound, X is a metal, hydrogen or acyl
    group of an acid and in which there is a metal compound when X is not a
    metal.


CLS 502/171
TXT Organic compound contains metal (e.g., Na-O-Ethyl, etc.):

    Composition under subclass 150 in which an organic compound contains metal
    as set out in the list at the top of the schedule.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152+,   for a composition including a carbon-metal bond.

    161,    for a metal carbonyl containing composition.

    170,    for a composition containing a metal carboxylate.


CLS 502/172
TXT Alcohol, phenol, ether, aldehyde or ketone:

    Composition under subclass 150 in which an organic compound has oxygen
    singly bonded to a carbon and hydrogen or a second carbon or doubly bonded
    to a carbon.


CLS 502/173
TXT Elemental metal in organic dispersing medium:

    Composition under subclass 150 in which a metal, as set out at the top of
    the schedule, in the free state is distributed throughout the organic
    material.


CLS 502/174
TXT Inorganic carbon containing:

    Composition under subclass 100 which contains element 6, in the free state
    or combined with elements such that the compound does not meet the
    definition of organic in the Glossary.


CLS 502/175
TXT Cyanide:

    Composition under subclass 174 in which the carbon is bound to nitrogen by
    a triple bond.


CLS 502/176
TXT Hydroxycarbonate:

    Composition under subclass 174 in which a compound includes both a hydroxyl
    and a

    carbonate ion e.g., CO3-M-OH.

    (1)     Note.  These compounds are sometimes referred to as basic
    carbonates.


CLS 502/177
TXT Carbide:

    Composition under subclass 174 including binary compound of carbon and a
    metal or metalloid.


CLS 502/178
TXT Silicon carbide:

    Composition under subclass 177 in which the carbide is of element number 14.


CLS 502/179
TXT Group Va (N, P, As, Sb, Bi) containing:

    Composition under subclass 178 including one of elements number 7, 15, 33,
    51, or 83.


CLS 502/180
TXT Elemental carbon:

    Composition under subclass 174 in which the carbon is in the free state.

    (1)     Note. Bone black, generally considered to be a form of carbon,
    includes approximately 80% calcium phosphate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    416+,   for a free carbon containing sorbent composition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    201,    Distillation:   Processes, Thermolytic, for a process of producing
    carbon by destructive distillation.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclass 445 for elemental
    carbon, per se, and processes of producing carbon.


CLS 502/181
TXT And halogen containing:

    Composition under subclass 180 which includes a halogen as set out in the
    list at the beginning of the schedule.


CLS 502/182
TXT And metal, metal oxide, or metal hydroxide:

    Composition under subclass 180 which includes a metal as set out in the
    list at the beginning of the schedule, free or combined with oxygen or with
    hydrogen and oxygen.


CLS 502/183
TXT Of Group II (i.e., alkaline Earth, Be, Mg, Zn, Cd or Hg):

    Composition under subclass 182 in which the metal is an alkaline earth,
    Beryllium, Magnesium, Zinc, Cadmium or Mercury.


CLS 502/184
TXT Of Group I (i.e., alkali, Ag, Au or Cu):

    Composition under subclass 182 in which the metal is an alkali, copper,
    gold or silver.


CLS 502/185
TXT Of Group VIII (i.e., iron or platinum group):

    Composition under subclass 182 in which the metal is from the iron or
    platinum group.


CLS 502/200
TXT Nitrogen compound containing:

    Composition under subclass 100 containing chemically combined element
    number 7.


CLS 502/201
TXT Nitrate:

    Composition under subclass 200 in which the nitrogen is part of a radical
    comprising three oxygen atoms.


CLS 502/202
TXT Boron or compound containing same:

    Composition under subclass 100 which contains element number 5.


CLS 502/203
TXT Boron halide:

    Composition under subclass 202 in which the boron is chemically united to a
    halogen as set out in the list at the beginning of the schedule.


CLS 502/204
TXT And Group VI metal containing (i.e., Cr, Mo, W or Po):

    Composition under subclass 202 in which there is a Group VI metal free or
    chemically combined.


CLS 502/205
TXT And bismuth containing:

    Composition under subclass 204 which also includes element number 83.

    (1)     Note.  The Bismuth may be combined with either or both the boron or
    group VI metal.


CLS 502/206
TXT Molybdenum containing:

    Composition under subclass 204 in Which the group VI metal is element
    number 42.


CLS 502/207
TXT And Group VIII metal containing (i.e., iron or platinum group):

    Composition under subclass 202 in which there is an iron or platinum group
    metal.


CLS 502/208
TXT Phosphorous or compound containing same:

    Composition under subclass 100 including element number 15.


CLS 502/209
TXT And vanadium containing:

    Composition under subclass 208 additionally including element number 23,
    free or chemically combined.


CLS 502/210
TXT And Group VI metal (i.e., Cr, Mo, W or Po):

    Composition under subclass 208 additionally including a group VI metal as
    set out in the list at the beginning of the schedule.


CLS 502/211
TXT Molybdenum:

    Composition under subclass 210 in which the metal is element number 42.


CLS 502/212
TXT And bismuth containing:

    Composition under subclass 211 which also includes element number 83, free
    or chemically combined.


CLS 502/213
TXT And Group VIII metal containing (i.e., iron or platinum group):

    Composition under subclass 208 additionally including an iron or platinum
    group metal.


CLS 502/214
TXT And silicon containing:

    Composition under subclass 208 which includes element number 14, free or
    combined.


CLS 502/215
TXT Selenium or tellurium or compound containing same:

    Composition under subclass 100 including either element 34 or 52, free or
    chemically combined.


CLS 502/216
TXT Sulfur or compound containing same:

    Composition under subclass 100 including element 16, either free or
    chemically combined.


CLS 502/217
TXT Sulfate:

    Composition under subclass 216 in which the sulfur is combined with four
    oxygen atoms to form a divalent ion.


CLS 502/218
TXT And Group I metal containing (i.e., alkali, Ag, Au or Cu):

    Composition under subclass 217 including a alkali metal, copper, gold or
    silver, free or chemically combined.


CLS 502/219
TXT And Group VI metal containing (i.e., Cr, Mo, W or Po):

    Composition under subclass 216 including a group VI metal as listed at the
    beginning of the schedule, free or chemically combined.


CLS 502/220
TXT Molybdenum containing:

    Composition under subclass 219 in which the metal is element number 42.


CLS 502/221
TXT And Group VIII metal containing (i.e., or iron or platinum group):

    Composition under subclass 219 additionally including an iron group or
    platinum group metal, free or chemically combined.


CLS 502/222
TXT And Group VIII metal containing (i.e., iron or platinum group):

    Composition under subclass 216 additionally including an iron group or
    platinum group metal, free or chemically combined.


CLS 502/223
TXT Platinum group (i.e., Ru, Rh, Pd, Os, Ir, Pt):

    Composition under subclass 222 in which the metal is element number 44, 45,
    46, 76, 77, or 78.


CLS 502/224
TXT Halogen or compound containing same:

    Composition under subclass 100 including a halogen as listed at the
    beginning of the schedule, free or chemically combined.


CLS 502/225
TXT Copper halide:

    Composition under subclass 224 in which the halogen is combined with
    element number 29.


CLS 502/226
TXT And Group II metal (i.e., alkaline earth, Be, Mg, Zn, Cd or Hg):

    Composition  under subclass 224 including a metal of group II as listed at
    the beginning of the schedule, free or chemically combined.


CLS 502/227
TXT Any Group IV metal (i.e., Ti, Zr, Hf, Ge, Sn or Pb):

    Composition under subclass 224 including a metal of group IV as listed in
    the beginning of the schedule, free or chemically combined.


CLS 502/228
TXT And Group VI metal (i.e., Cr, Mo, W or Po):

    Composition under subclass 224 including a metal of Group VI as listed at
    the beginning of the schedule, free or chemically combined.


CLS 502/229
TXT And Group VIII metal (i.e., iron or platinum group):

    Composition under subclass 24 containing a metal of the iron group or the
    platinum group, free or chemically combined.


CLS 502/230
TXT Platinum group (i.e., Ru, Rh, Pd, Os, Ir or Pt):

    Composition under subclass 229 in which the metal is element number 44, 45,
    46, 76, 77, or 78.


CLS 502/231
TXT And Group III metal (i.e., Sc, Y, Al, Ga, In or Te):

    Composition under subclass 224 including a metal of Group III as listed at
    the beginning of the schedule, free or chemically combined.

    (1)     Note.  Metal silicates are classified as a mixture of silicon
    dioxide and a metal oxide.  Illustration:  magnesium silicate is classified
    as SiO2 and MgO  and will be found in subclass 251.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60+,    for a composition including a clay or zeolite.


CLS 502/232
TXT Silicon containing or processing of making:

    Composition under subclass 100 containing element number 14 free or
    chemically combined.

    (1)     Note.  Metal silicates are classified as a mixture of silicon
    dioxide and a metal oxide.  Illustration:  a composition with magnesium
    silicate is classified as SiO2 and MgO and will be found in subclass 251.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60+,    for a composition including a clay of zeolite.


CLS 502/233
TXT Forming silica gel:

    Process under subclass 232 in which an amorphous form of hydrate silica is
    produced; generally by precipitation or coagulation of a silica sol or
    decomposition of a silicate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8+,     for a process of making or treating a sphere which may include
    formation of a silica gel.

    400+,   especially 407+ for a sorbent composition in which silica gel is a
    constituent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 315.6 for a silica gel composition or
    process of preparation which is not disclosed as being a catalyst or solid
    sorbent.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclass 335 for silica gel, per
    se, in the dried state.


CLS 502/234
TXT Coprecipitating:

    Process under subclass 233 which includes the simultaneous precipitation of
    another material with the precipitation of the silica gel.


CLS 502/235
TXT Group III or rare earth metal, metal oxide, or metal hydroxide containing
    (i.e., Sc, Y, Al, Ga, In, Tl or lanthanide):

    Process under subclass 234 which includes the precipitation of a Group III
    or Rare Earth Metal, Metal Oxide or Hydroxide simultaneously with the
    precipitation of the silica gel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263,    for a catalyst which is a mixture of silica gel and a group III
    metal, oxide or hydroxide.


CLS 502/236
TXT Group IV metal, metal oxide, or metal hydroxide (i.e., Ti, Zr, Hf, Ge, Sn,
    Pb):

    Process under the subclass 234 which includes the precipitation of a Group
    IV metal, metal oxide or hydroxide simultaneously with precipitation of the
    silica gel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242,    for a catalyst which is a mixture of silica gel and a group IV
    metal, metal oxide or hydroxide.


CLS 502/237
TXT Metal, metal oxide, or metal hydroxide containing:

    Process under subclass 233 wherein the precipitation is effected in the
    presence of a metal, metal oxide or hydroxide or the metal or metal
    compound is added subsequently to the precipitation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204,    for a particular metal, metal oxide or hydroxide with silica, per
    se.


CLS 502/238
TXT Of Group III metal (i.e., Sc, Y, Al, Ga, In or Tl):

    Process under subclass 237 including a Group III or rare earth metal, metal
    oxide or hydroxide.


CLS 502/239
TXT Of Group IV metal (i.e., Ti, Zr, Hf, Ge, Sn or Pb):

    Process under subclass 237 including a Group IV metal, metal oxide or
    hydroxide.


CLS 502/240
TXT With metal, metal oxide, or metal hydroxide:

    Composition under subclass 232 including a metal, metal oxide or hydroxide.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses include compositions comprising
    synthetically produced silicates and processes of making such compositions
    except those processes involving the formation of silica gel, for which,
    see subclasses 233+.


CLS 502/241
TXT Of Group VII (i.e., Mn, Tc, or Re):

    Composition under subclass 240 including a group VII metal, metal oxide or
    Hydroxide.


CLS 502/242
TXT Of Group IV (i.e., Ti, Zr, Hf, Ge, Sn or Pb):

    Composition under subclass 240 including a group IV metal, metal oxide or
    hydroxide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    236,    for a mixtures of silica gel and a group IV metal oxide produced by
    coprecipitation process.

    239,    for mixtures of silica gel and a group IV metal, metal oxide or
    hydroxide added after formation of the silica gel.


CLS 502/243
TXT Of Group I (i.e., Alkali, Ag, Au or Cu):

    Composition under subclass 240 including a group I metal, metal oxide or
    hydroxide.


CLS 502/244
TXT Of copper:

    Composition under subclass 243 which contains copper, copper oxide or
    hydroxide.


CLS 502/245
TXT And Group VIII metal containing (i.e., iron or platinum group):

    Composition under subclass 244 which also includes a group VIII metal,
    metal oxide or hydroxide.


CLS 502/246
TXT Of Group V (i.e., V, Nb, Ta, As, Sb or Bi):

    Composition under subclass 240 including a group V metal, metal oxide or
    hydroxide.


CLS 502/247
TXT Of vanadium:

    Composition under subclass 246 which contains vanadium, vanadium oxide or
    hydroxide.


CLS 502/248
TXT And Group VI metal (i.e., Cr, Mo, W or Po):

    Composition under subclass 247 which also includes a group VI metal, metal
    oxide or Hydroxide.


CLS 502/249
TXT Of antimony or bismuth:

    Composition under subclass 246 in which the metal or compound thereof is
    antimony or bismuth.


CLS 502/250
TXT Of Group II (i.e., alkaline earth, Be, Mg, Zn, Cd or Hg):

    Composition under subclass 240 including a group II metal, metal oxide or
    hydroxide.


CLS 502/251
TXT Magnesium:

    Composition under subclass 250 which contains magnesium, magnesium oxide or
    hydroxide.


CLS 502/252
TXT And Group VIII metal containing (i.e., iron or platinum group):

    Composition under subclass 251 which also includes a group VIII metal,
    metal oxide or hydroxide.


CLS 502/253
TXT Of zinc, cadmium, or mercury:

    Composition under subclass 250 which contains zinc, cadmium or mercury or
    the oxide or hydroxide thereof.


CLS 502/254
TXT Of Group VI (i.e., Cr, Mo, W or Po):

    Composition under subclass 240 including a group VI metal, metal oxide or
    hydroxide.


CLS 502/255
TXT Molybdenum:

    Composition under subclass 254 which contains molybdenum, molybdenum oxide
    or hydroxide.


CLS 502/256
TXT Chromium:

    Composition under subclass 254 which contains chromium, chromium oxide or
    hydroxide.


CLS 502/257
TXT And Group VIII metal containing (i.e., iron or platinum group):

    Composition under subclass 256 which also includes a group VIII metal,
    metal oxide or hydroxide.


CLS 502/258
TXT Of Group VIII (i.e., iron or platinum group):

    Composition under subclass 240 including a group VIII metal, metal oxide or
    hydroxide.


CLS 502/259
TXT Nickel:

    Composition under subclass 258 in which the metal or metal compound
    comprises nickel.


CLS 502/260
TXT Cobalt:

    Composition under subclass 258 in which the metal or metal compound
    comprises cobalt.


CLS 502/261
TXT Platinum Group (i.e., Ru, Rh, Pd, Os, Ir or Pt):

    Composition under subclass 258 which contains a platinum group metal, metal
    oxide or hydroxide.


CLS 502/262
TXT Platinum or palladium:

    Composition under subclass 261 in which the free metal or compound
    comprises element 46 or 78.


CLS 502/263
TXT Of Group III or lanthanide group (i.e., Sc, Y, Al, Ga, In, Te, or atomic
    number 57 to 71 inclusive):

    Composition under subclass 240 including a group III or lanthanide metal,
    free or combined with oxygen or hydrogen and oxygen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    235,    mixture of silica gel and group III or rare earth metal oxide
    produced by coprecipitation process.


CLS 502/300
TXT Metal, metal oxide or metal hydroxide:

    Composition under subclass 100 which contains a metal* either as the free
    element or combined with oxygen or with hydrogen and oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  A metal metallate is considered to be a mixture of a metal
    oxide with a metal or other metal oxide.  For example, a composition
    comprising nickel chromate is considered to include nickel oxide and
    chromium oxide.

    (2)     Note.  This and indented subclasses do not provide for a metal
    hydride, per se, unless mixed with a metal, or oxide or hydroxide thereof.

    (3)     Note.  See the Glossary under metal for synonyms or archaic terms
    for elements provided in this or an indented subclass.

    (4)     Note.  This subclass is residual for a catalyst composition
    comprising an actinic or group VII (other than manganese) metal, oxide or
    hydroxide not containing a metal provided for in an indent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100+,   for a catalyst comprising a metal hydride and 102+ for a metal
    hydride in combination with a compound of a metal from Group IV  to Group
    VIII, a lanathanide or an actinide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, for ferrous alloy of structural or general utility.

    106,    Composition:  Coating or Plastic, subclass 1.11 for a sensitizing
    composition for activating a substrate to be subsequently electrolessly
    metal plated and which may have a catalytic function.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Composition, for an alloy of general utility.


CLS 502/301
TXT Raney type:

    Composition under subclass 300 prepared by removing a metal from an alloy,
    leaving the remaining metal behind as the catalyst.

    (1)     Note.  The remaining catalytic metal is generally in a highly
    active porous or finely divided state.

    (2)     Note.  The metal may be removed by any method, e.g., dissolving out
    by chemical means or by volatilization, etc.

    (3)     Note.  If a metal catalyst is named a "Raney" catalyst, it will be
    presumed to be proper for this subclass unless it is positively disclosed
    to be made by a method not within the scope of the definition of this
    subclass.


CLS 502/302
TXT Of lanthanide series (i.e., atomic number 57 to 71 inclusive):

    Composition under subclass 300 in which the metal is selected from those
    with atomic numbers 57 to 71 (La, Ce, Pr, Nd, Pm, Sm, Eu, Gd, Tb, Dy, Ho,
    Er, Tm, Yb, Lu).

    (1)     Note.  The metals Lanthanum and Actinium are not included in Group
    III for purposes of this class (502) but are considered with the
    lanthanides and actinides respectively.


CLS 502/303
TXT Lanthanum:

    Composition under subclass 302 in which the lanthanide is the first of the
    series - element number 57.


CLS 502/304
TXT Cerium:

    Composition under subclass 302 in which the lanthanide is the second of the
    series - element number 58.


CLS 502/305
TXT Of Group VI (i.e., Cr, Mo, W or Po):

    Composition under subclass 300 in which the metal is one of Cr, Mo, W, or
    Po.


CLS 502/306
TXT And Group II metal containing (i.e., alkaline earth, Be, Mg, Zn, Cd or Hg):

    Composition under subclass 305 which additionally includes an alkaline
    earth metal, Be, Mg, Zn, Cd, or Hg.


CLS 502/307
TXT Zinc:

    Composition under subclass 306 in which the additional metal is element
    number 30.


CLS 502/308
TXT And Group IV metal containing (i.e., Ti, Zr, Hf, Ge, Sn or Pb):

    Composition under subclass 305 which additionally includes one of Ti, Zr,
    Hf, Ge, Sn, or Pb.


CLS 502/309
TXT Titanium containing:

    Composition under subclass 308 in which the additional metal is element
    number 22.


CLS 502/310
TXT Tin containing:

    Composition under subclass 308 in which the additional element is element
    number 50.


CLS 502/311
TXT And Group V metal containing (i.e., V, Nb, Ta, As, Sb or Bi):

    Composition under subclass 305 which additionally includes one of V, Nb,
    Ta, As, Sb, or Bi.


CLS 502/312
TXT Vanadium containing:

    Composition under subclass 311 in which the additional metal is element
    number 23.


CLS 502/313
TXT And Group VIII metal containing (i.e., iron or platinum group):

    Composition under subclass 305 which additionally contains an iron group or
    a platinum group metal.


CLS 502/314
TXT Iron group metal and Group III metal containing (i.e., Fe, Co or Ni and Sc,
    Y, Al, Ga, In or Tl):

    Composition under subclass 313 in which the Group VIII metal is Fe, Co, or
    Ni and additionally includes one of Sc, Y, Al, Ga, In or Tl.


CLS 502/315
TXT Nickel containing:

    Composition under subclass 313 in which the Group VIII metal is element
    number 28.


CLS 502/316
TXT Iron containing:

    Composition under subclass 313 in which the Group VIII metal is element
    number 26.


CLS 502/317
TXT And Group I containing (i.e., alkali, Ag, Au or Cu):

    Composition under subclass 305 which additionally includes an alkali metal,
    Cu, Ag, or Au.


CLS 502/318
TXT Copper containing:

    Composition under subclass 317 in which the Group I metal is element number
    29.


CLS 502/319
TXT Of chromium:

    Composition under subclass 305 in which the Group VI metal is element
    number 24.


CLS 502/320
TXT And Group III metal containing (i.e., Sc, Y, Al, Ga, In or Tl):

    Composition under subclass 319 which additionally includes Sc, Y, Al, Ga,
    In, or Tl.


CLS 502/321
TXT Of molybdenum:

    Composition under subclass 305 in which the Group VI metal is element
    number 42.


CLS 502/322
TXT And Group III metal containing (i.e., Sc, Y, Al, Ga, In or Tl):

    Composition under subclass 321 which additionally includes Sc, Y, Al, Ga,
    In or Tl.


CLS 502/323
TXT And Group III metal containing (i.e., Sc, Y, Al, Ga, In or Tl):

    Composition under subclass 305 which additionally includes Sc, Y, Al, Ga,
    In, or Tl.


CLS 502/324
TXT Of manganese:

    Composition under subclass 300 in which the metal, oxide or hydroxide is
    element number 25.


CLS 502/325
TXT Of Group VIII (i.e., iron or platinum group):

    Composition under subclass 300 in which the metal, oxide or hydroxide is of
    the iron group or of the platinum group.


CLS 502/326
TXT Of platinum group metal and of iron group (i.e., Ru, Rh, Pd, Os, Ir, or Pt
    and Fe, Co or Ni):

    Composition under subclass 325 in which there is at least one metal, oxide,
    or hydroxide from each of the iron group and the platinum group.

    (1)     Note.  To be classifiable here, a patent must claim for example
    iron oxide and platinum; a mixture of iron and nickel or a mixture of
    rhodium and palladium are not proper for this subclass.


CLS 502/327
TXT And Group III metal containing (i.e., Sc, Y, Al, Ga, In or Te):

    Composition under subclass 326 which additionally includes Sc, Y, Al, Ga,
    In, or Tl.


CLS 502/328
TXT And Group II metal containing (i.e., alkaline earth, Be, Mg, Zn, Cd or Hg):

    Composition under subclass 325 which additionally includes an alkaline
    earth metal Be, Mg, Zn, Cd, or Hg.


CLS 502/329
TXT Zinc containing:

    Composition under subclass 328 in which the additional metal is element
    number 30.


CLS 502/330
TXT And Group I metal containing (i.e., alkali, Ag, Au or Cu):

    Composition under subclass 325 additionally including a metal of Group I as
    listed at the beginning of the schedule, free or as the oxide or hydroxide.


CLS 502/331
TXT Copper containing:

    Composition under subclass 330 in which the metal is element number 29.


CLS 502/332
TXT And Group III metal containing (i.e., Sc, Y, Al, Ga, In or Tl):

    Composition under subclass 325 additionally containing a metal of Group III
    as listed at the beginning of the schedule, free or as the oxide or
    hydroxide.


CLS 502/333
TXT Of palladium:

    Composition under subclass 332 in which the additional metal is element
    number 46.


CLS 502/334
TXT Of platinum:

    Composition under subclass 332 in which the additional metal is element
    number 78.


CLS 502/335
TXT Of nickel:

    Composition under subclass 332 in which the additional metal is element
    number 28.


CLS 502/336
TXT Of iron:

    Composition under subclass 332 in which the additional metal is element
    number 26.


CLS 502/337
TXT Of nickel:

    Composition under subclass 325 in which the additional metal is element
    number 28.


CLS 502/338
TXT Of iron:

    Composition under subclass 325 in which the additional metal is element
    number 26.


CLS 502/339
TXT Of palladium or platinum:

    Composition under subclass 325 in which the additional metal is element
    number 46 or 78.


CLS 502/340
TXT Of Group II (i.e., alkaline earth, Be, Mg, Zn, Cd or Hg):

    Composition under subclass 300 in which the additional metal is from Group
    II as listed at the beginning of the schedule.


CLS 502/341
TXT And Group III metal containing (i.e., Sc, Y, Al, Ga, In or Tl):

    Composition under subclass 340 in which there is also a metal from Group
    III as listed at the beginning of the schedule.


CLS 502/342
TXT Of zinc:

    Composition under subclass 341 in which the additional metal is element
    number 30.


CLS 502/343
TXT Of zinc:

    Composition under subclass 340 in which the additional metal is element
    number 30.


CLS 502/344
TXT Of Group I (i.e., alkali, Ag, Au or Cu):

    Composition under subclass 300 containing a metal of Group I as listed in
    the beginning of the schedule.


CLS 502/345
TXT Of copper:

    Composition under subclass 344 in which the additional metal is element
    number 29.


CLS 502/346
TXT And Group III metal containing (i.e., Sc, Y, Al, Ga, In or Tl):

    Composition under subclass 345 additionally containing a metal or compound
    thereof from Group III as listed at the beginning of the schedule.


CLS 502/347
TXT Of silver:

    Composition under subclass 34 in which the additional metal is element
    number 47.


CLS 502/348
TXT And Group III metal containing (i.e., Sc, Y, Al, Ga, In or Tl):

    Composition under subclass 347 additionally containing a metal from Group
    III as listed at the beginning of the schedule.


CLS 502/349
TXT Of Group IV (i.e., Ti, Zr, Hf, Ge, Sn, or Pb):

    Composition under subclass 300 including a metal of Group IV as listed at
    the beginning of the schedule.


CLS 502/350
TXT Of titanium:

    Composition under subclass 349 in which the metal is element number 22.


CLS 502/351
TXT And Group III metal containing (i.e., Sc, Y, Al, Ga, In or Tl):

    Composition under subclass 350 additionally including a metal of Group III
    as listed at the beginning of the schedule.


CLS 502/352
TXT Of tin:

    Composition under subclass 349 in which the additional metal is element
    number 50.


CLS 502/353
TXT Of Group V (i.e., V, Nb, Ta, As, Sb or Bi):

    Composition under subclass 300 in which the metal is from Group V as listed
    at the beginning of the schedule.


CLS 502/354
TXT And Group III metal containing (i.e., Sc, Y, Al, Ga, In, or Tl):

    Composition under subclass 353 additionally including a metal of Group III
    as listed at the beginning of the schedule.


CLS 502/355
TXT Of Group III (i.e., Sc, Y, Al, Ga, In or Ti):

    Composition under subclass 300 in which the metal is from Group III as
    listed at the beginning of the schedule.


CLS 502/400
TXT SOLID SORBENT:

    Composition under the class definition in nonfluent phase which serves to
    attract and hold on its surface, within its pores, or throughout its mass a
    material which is generally fluent.

    (1)     Note.  The material is reversibly held and does not react with the
    sorbent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, particularly subclasses 171+ for material used
    for absorbing moisture from an animal waste product, i.e., excrement or
    urine.


CLS 502/401
TXT Organic:

    Composition under subclass 400 in which a constituent is a compound in
    which an atom of carbon is bonded to hydrogen, a halogen, a second atom of
    carbon or to nitrogen by a single or double bond as set out in the Glossary
    term "organic".


CLS 502/402
TXT Synthetic resin:

    Composition under subclass 401 in which the organic material is polymeric,
    derived by the addition across ethylenic unsaturation or the condensation
    of reactive components, or a polymer which could be made by such addition
    or condensation reaction.

    (1)     Note.  These compositions include essentially material which, per
    se, is classifiable in the Class 520 series of classes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, for a material, per se, of
    that class which is cellular form could inherently be sorbent.


CLS 502/403
TXT Protein:

    Composition under subclass 401 in which the organic material comprises a
    chain of acylyated alpha-amino acids.


CLS 502/404
TXT Carbohydrate:

    Composition under subclass 401 in which the organic material is a poly
    hydroxy mono-aldehyde or mono-ketone generally of the empirical formula Cn
    (H2O)m or a polymeric anhydride hydrolyzable to such aldehyde or ketone and
    wherein n is at least 5.


CLS 502/405
TXT Inorganic gel containing:

    Composition under subclass 400 in which an inorganic material, usually a
    metal or silicon oxide in relatively minor amount is distributed in
    suspension in water, appearing to be solid while the water constitutes as
    much as 95 to 99% of the mixture.

    (1)     Note.  A true gel is considered a composition, but a completely
    dried gel is no more than a compound and classifiable in Class 423.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclass for a
    completely dried inorganic gel.


CLS 502/406
TXT Having specifically intended extraneously added iron group (i.e., Fe, Co,
    Ni) component:

    Composition under subclass 400 in which the free metal or a compound of
    element number 26, 27 or 28 is deliberately included and not incidentally
    present as an impurity or part of another ingredient.


CLS 502/407
TXT Silicon containing:

    Composition under subclass 400 in which there is element number 14, free or
    chemically combined.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60+,    for a clay or zeolite composition.

    405,    for a silica gel sorbent.


CLS 502/408
TXT Acid treated:

    Composition under subclass 407 in which the silicon material is contacted
    with a proton donor.


CLS 502/409
TXT Quartz:

    Composition under subclass 407 containing crystalline silicon dioxide.


CLS 502/410
TXT Magnesium silicate (e.g., asbestos, vermiculite, etc.):

    Composition under subclass 407 in which the silicon is chemically combined
    with magnesium and oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  The silicate may include an other element e.g., Magnesium
    Aluminum silicate.


CLS 502/411
TXT Having extraneously added alkali metal or alkaline earth metal:

    Composition under subclass 407 to which an alkali or alkaline earth metal
    as listed in the schedule has been added.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    410,    for a magnesium silicate sorbent composition.


CLS 502/412
TXT Diatomaceous earth:

    Composition under subclass 407 wherein the silicon containing material is a
    diatomaceous earth.


CLS 502/413
TXT Free carbon containing:

    Composition under subclass 407 additionally, containing carbon in elemental
    form.


CLS 502/414
TXT Aluminum containing:

    Composition under subclass 400 including element number 13, free or
    chemically combined.


CLS 502/415
TXT Alumina (i.e., dialuminum trioxide):

    Composition under subclass 414 containing the compound dialuminum trioxide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    405,    for an alumina gel sorbent composition.


CLS 502/416
TXT Free carbon containing:

    Composition under subclass 400 comprising "activated" carbon or containing
    the element with atomic number 6 in substantially elemental form.

    (1)     Note.  While relatively pure carbon is provided for in Class 423,
    subclass 445, the term "activated" will be construed as indicating a
    composition comprising carbon and unidentified components, functioning as a
    sorbent for this class.

    (2)     Note.  Charred, coked, pyrolyzed, or incompletely combusted organic
    material, which may retain some chemically bound carbon will be considered
    as being in substantially elemental form for this subclass.


CLS 502/417
TXT And specified added active sorbent material:

    Composition under subclass 416 to which a material, not found in the
    original source or carbon, has been added to enhance sorbability by its
    presence.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass requires a named additive intended to
    contribute to the function by its presence and not by its action on carbon
    and does not include an activating agent such as nitric acid added during
    an activating process.

    (2)     Note.  Animal or bone black is 80% Ca3 (PO4)2, and a patent
    claiming a mixture of its with another source of carbon is proper for this
    subclass.


CLS 502/418
TXT Process utilizing solid or liquid source carbonizable material, or product
    thereof:

    Process under subclass 416 in which the sorbent is produced by (a)
    chemically reacting to a nongaseous carbon compound to produce elemental
    carbon or (b) adding to or removing from elemental carbon, some other
    material or chemically or physically treating such carbon to enhance its
    sorbability.

    (1)     Note.  A disclosure of material which may be shaped or pelletized
    is an indication of solid or viscous material.  An oil is not considered
    solid or viscous, however a process including spraying an acid sludge on
    cake particles is considered to utilize solid or viscous material.

    (2)     Note.  Such processes as destructive distillation, charring,
    pyrolysis etc. to produce a sorbent (e.g., activated) carbon are provided
    for in this or an indented subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, for destructive distillation
    in general.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, for apparatus in which a process of this
    subclass may be carried out.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating Processes,
    subclasses 29.1+ for carbonizing and Shaping.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclass 455 for carbonizing to
    pure carbon.


CLS 502/419
TXT Producing diverse useful byproduct:

    Process under subclass 418 in which the production or collection of a
    different useful material or energy (e.g., heat) is positively claimed.

    (1)     Note.  The positive recitation of collection of volatiles and use
    of these as fuel in an upstream phase is considered to give a diverse by
    product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    201,    Distillation:  Processes Thermolytic appropriate subclasses for a
    process of coking which may also produce a byproduct fuel gas.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products appropriate, subclasses for
    production of tar or pitch from mineral oil.


CLS 502/420
TXT Temperature vs. time factor:

    Process under subclass 418 in which a relationship between the amount and
    the duration of heat is positively recited e.g., rise from x to x1 in y
    hours.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    436,    for a process including 2 distinct heating stages.


CLS 502/421
TXT Including recycling product or intermediate thereof to prior stage of
    process:

    Processes under subclass 418 wherein at least a portion of a product is
    used in an earlier stage of the process.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include the use of products or
    intermediates as fuel in the process.  See subclass 422.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    422,    for use of part of source as fuel.


CLS 502/422
TXT Including diverting part of source to providing fuel for process:

    Process under subclass 418 in which the starting material is physically
    divided, one part being burned, thereby providing heat or treating agents
    used in converting the remainder of the material to the desired composition.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for a process in which fines are
    screened and burned to carbonize the layer of particles of starting
    material.


CLS 502/423
TXT Adding nongaseous inorganic, or inorganic yielding component prior to or
    during process:

    Process under subclass 418 including by admixing a liquid or solid
    material, which is, per se, inorganic or which yields an inorganic
    constituent such as by decomposition, with the carbonable material before
    or while the latter material is being converted to carbon.


CLS 502/424
TXT Zinc containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 423 in which the inorganic component includes
    element number 30.


CLS 502/425
TXT Phosphorus containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 423 in which the inorganic component includes
    element number 15.


CLS 502/426
TXT Acid:

    Subject matter under subclass 423 in which the inorganic component is a
    proton denor.


CLS 502/427
TXT Alkali metal, alkaline earth metal or magnesium containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 423 including element number 12, an alkali or
    alkaline earth metal, as set out in the list at the beginning of the
    schedule, free or in the combined state.


CLS 502/428
TXT Including pelletizing or briquetting and subsequently comminuting:

    Process under subclass 418 in which a material of indefinite or mixed size
    or shape is molded or agglomerated into shaped pieces by compression or a
    similar operation and the pieces then subdivided.

    (1)     Note.  A step or operation such as charring may be performed
    between the pelletizing and the comminuting or the comminuting may
    immediately follow the pelletizing.


CLS 502/429
TXT Using carbonaceous binder:

    Process under subclass 428 in which a carbon containing material is
    utilized in making a shapeable mass or to hold together particles of the
    material in briquettes.

    (1)     Note.  Aqueous solutions of sugar or starch or pitch are examples
    of carbonaceous binders.


CLS 502/430
TXT Treating with gas:

    Process under subclass 418 in which the material is contacted with a
    specified fluid above its fluid boiling point at the conditions of the
    treatment.


CLS 502/431
TXT Fluidized bed having specified parameter:

    Process under subclass 430 in which a column of gas rises at a velocity to
    support particles of material in a state of turbulence and a rate,
    distance, temperature, or other condition is positively recited.

    (1)     Note.  A specified composition is not  considered a parameter for a
    fluidized bed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41+,    for a fluidized bed process of regenerating a sorbent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, Digest 16 for a collection of art
    on fluidized bed techniques.


CLS 502/432
TXT Specified atmosphere:

    Process under subclass 430 in which the composition of the gas is recited.

    (1)     Note.  The claim may recite an upper limit or a range of
    percentages.


CLS 502/433
TXT Including free oxygen:

    Process under subclass 432 in which uncombined element number 8 is recited,
    either diatomic or as ozone.


CLS 502/434
TXT And subsequent diverse gas:

    Process under subclass 433 in which after treatment with the oxygen
    containing gas, the carbon source material is contacted with a different
    gas, which may also contain oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  The treatment with diverse gas may be in the same or a
    different zone and may employ the same constituents in a different mixture
    - i.e., other percentages or ingredients.


CLS 502/435
TXT Exposure to hot flue or exhaust gas:

    Process under subclass 432 in which the material is bathed in (treated by
    contact with) the products of an adjacent and upstream combustion.


CLS 502/436
TXT Diverse temperatures:

    Process under subclass 418 in which material is heated at two clearly
    distinct temperatures or ranges of temperatures.

    (1)     Note.  A process in which material is subjected to heat which may
    increase or decrease during the treatment does not suffice for placement
    here.  The process must recite two heating stages which differ
    unequivocally e.g., at 900_ and 15000_ or 600_ to 900_ and 1200 to 1500_.


CLS 502/437
TXT Specified source (e.g., peach pit, etc.):

    Composition under subclass 418 characterized by the original material
    carbonized to form the free carbon and not limited to a specific process by
    which it is produced.


CLS 502/438
TXT Chemically reducing an oxide or product thereof:

    Process under subclass 416 in which electrons are supplied to a carbon atom
    bound to an oxygen atom, to give elemental carbon.


CLS 502/439
TXT MISCELLANEOUS (E.G., CARRIER OR SUPPORT, PER SE, OR PROCESS OF MAKING,
    ETC.):

    Product under the class definition serving as a substrate for the catalyst
    or sorbent and the process of preparing the same.

    (1)     Note.  A patent claiming (disclosing) a carrier or support acting
    as either a catalyst, or sorbent is placed in the first appearing subclass
    providing for the function and crossed in the other subclasses providing
    for the other functions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Composition, subclass 1 for a patent having only generic claims(s)
    and plural disclosures, e.g., support for catalyst or sorbent, filler,
    pigment, etc.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 310+ for an element for that class
    having a catalyst coated, laminated, etc. thereto.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 502/500
TXT STABILIZED:

    Collection of art under the class definition disclosing some feature which
    functions to prolong or maintain a desired property of a composition of
    this class, such as activity or resistance to deterioration.


CLS 502/501
TXT For multi-regenerability:

    Collection of art under subclass 500 in which the desired property is the
    ability of the material to be regenerated (after being used or spent) a
    plurality of times.


CLS 502/502
TXT Crystallinity:

    Collection of art under subclass 500 in which the composition retains a
    particular, desired crystal phase.


CLS 502/503
TXT Crush strength:

    Collection of art under subclass 500 in which the composition is enable to
    withstand weight and/or pressure and resists fracturing or being compacted.


CLS 502/504
TXT Abrasion resistance:

    Collection of art under subclass 500 in which the desired property is an
    ability of the material to retain its integrity under conditions usually
    contributing to spalling or attrition.


CLS 502/506
TXT METHOD OF MAKING INORGANIC COMPOSITION UTILIZING ORGANIC COMPOUND (EXCEPT
    FORMIC, ACETIC, OR OXALIC ACID OR SALT THEREOF):

    Collection of art under the class definition disclosing a process of making
    a composition of this class in which a transitory organic compound is used.

    (1)     Note.  See Glossary for definition of organic.

    (2)     Note.  The organic compound may serve as a solvent which is
    physically separated from the final composition or may be an intermediate
    reactant, removed or destroyed chemically, as by calcination,
    precipitation, etc.

    (3)     Note.  The use of an acetate, formate or oxalate is so conventional
    that disclosure of the use of these materials is not collected here.


CLS 502/507
TXT Synthetic resin, natural resin, polysaccaride, or polypeptide:

    Process under subclass 506 in which the organic compound is macro-molecular
    film-or fiber-forming or moldable material, manmade or existing in nature
    of a polymer of alpha-amino acids or of repeating carbohydrate units.

    (1)     Note.  These materials are sometimes used as binders and removed
    from the shaped final material.


CLS 502/508
TXT Sulfur containing organic compound:

    Process under subclass 506 in which the organic material contains element
    number 16.


CLS 502/509
TXT Nitrogen containing organic compound:

    Process under subclass 506 in which the organic material includes element
    number 7.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159,    for a process using a resin, natural, or synthetic, polysaccharide
    or polypeptide.

    507,    for a process using a polypeptide or a resin that may include
    nitrogen.


CLS 502/510
TXT Also containing hydroxyl bonded to carbon, e.g., carboxylic acid, etc:

    Process under subclass 509 in which the organic nitrogen compound also
    includes the -OH group which may form an alcohol, a phenol, hydroxamic acid
    or carboxylic acid.


CLS 502/511
TXT Two or more nitrogen atoms bonded to different carbon atoms:

    Collections of art under subclass 509 in which a second nitrogen atom is
    bonded to a different carbon atom than that to which the first nitrogen is
    bonded.


CLS 502/512
TXT Carboxyl acid or salt thereof other than formic, acetic, or oxalic acid:

    Collection of art under subclass 506 in which the organic material includes
    the moiety - COX in which X is hydrogen, a metal or the nitrogen of ammonia
    or an amine radical.


CLS 502/513
TXT Alcohol, phenol, or ether or metallate thereof:

    Collection of art under subclass 506 in which a carbon of the organic
    compound is singly bonded to an oxygen atom, the other valence of which is
    satisfied by hydrogen, carbon or a metal.


CLS 502/514
TXT PROCESS APPLICABLE EITHER TO PREPARING OR TO REGENERATING OR TO
    REHABILITATING CATALYST OR SORBENT:

    Collection of art under the class definition disclosing operations which
    are claimed or shown to be useful in the original production or in the
    restoration of a composition having a utility of this class.

    (1)     Note.  A process of treating carbon with steam which is disclosed
    as activating it abinitio or as reactivating a spent carbon sorbent is
    classifiable here.


CLS 502/515
TXT SPECIFIC CONTAMINANT REMOVAL:

    Collection of art under the class definition directed to regenerating or
    rehabilitating a composition of this class and concerned primarily with
    freeing the composition of some specific material usually called a "poison".


CLS 502/516
TXT Metal contaminant removal:

    Collection of art under subclass 515 in which the poison or contaminant
    comprises an element (or compound thereof) which exhibits a positive ionic
    property is set out in the Glossary as a metal.


CLS 502/517
TXT Sulfur or sulfur compound removal:

    Collection of Art under subclass 515 in which the element number 16 or a
    compound of such element is removed from the composition.


CLS 502/518
TXT Carbonaceous contaminant:

    Collection of art under subclass 515 in which the material removed
    comprises a substantial amount of element number 6 in relatively free
    state, or partially oxidized organic material known as char.


CLS 502/519
TXT REAGENT GRADE  (E.G., ULTRA PURE):

    Collection of art disclosing compositions of this class (generally
    sorbents) which are free of any components which could contaminate or
    interfere in subsequent chemical reactions or analysis.

    (1)     Note.  An example of art to be found here is an ash free sorbent
    used in chemical analysis.


CLS 502/520
TXT SUPPRESSED SIDE REACTIONS:

    Collection of art under the class definition disclosing a composition
    exhibiting selectivity from among several possibly sorbable materials or
    competing reactions normally expected under the conditions of use of the
    composition.

    (1)     Note.  Exemplary is a catalyst which inhibits the formation of
    butyne in a reaction to give butadiene from butane.


CLS 502/521
TXT METAL CONTAMINANT PASSIVATION:

    Collection of art under the class definition directed to a process of
    counteracting the undesired effect of a metal in a catalyst or sorbent,
    without removing said metal.


CLS 502/522
TXT RADIANT OR WAVE ENERGY ACTIVATED:

    Collection of art under the class definition disclosing a composition of
    this sorbent under the influence of energy capable of being transmitted
    through space of which is transmitted in regular pulses (i.e., quanta).


CLS 502/523
TXT MISCELLANEOUS SPECIFIC TECHNIQUES OF GENERAL APPLICABILITY:

    Collection of art under the class definition disclosing steps or methods
    which effect a useful or desirable property of function irrespective of the
    material acted upon.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes treatments of catalysts, sorbent
    and/or supports in general such as methods of coating, activating mixing,
    conditioning or increasing surface area.  An example is patent no. 513,109
    disclosing a method of applying a myriad of catalytic material on various
    supports.


CLS 502/524
TXT SPINEL:

    Collection of art under the class definition disclosing the particular
    crystalline structure of mixed metal oxides of the formula AB2O4 in which A
    is a divalent metal e.g., Mg, Zn, Mn or ferrous iron and B is a trivalent
    metal such as Al, Cr, or ferric iron.


CLS 502/525
TXT PEROVSKITE:

    Collection of art under the class definition disclosing the particular
    crystalline structure of mixed metal oxides of ABO3 in which A is a
    divalent or rare earth metal and B is a transition metal, generally of
    cubic structure.


CLS 502/526
TXT SORBENT FOR FLUID STORAGE, OTHER THAN AN ALLOY FOR HYDROGEN STORAGE:

    Collection of art under the class definition disclosing sorbent material
    designed to retain a fluid (often a pressurized gas as acetylene) for
    release as a fluid at a desired time.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 194, for a humidostatic composition.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, pertinent, subclass for an alloy
    claimed or disclosed as a hydrogen storing medium, whether by sorption or
    by chemical reaction, i.e., hydride formation.  See especially subclass 900.


CLS 502/527
TXT PECULIAR STRUCTURE OR PHYSICAL FORM:

    Collection of art under the class definition disclosing novel or specific
    shape of the material of the composition.

    (1)     Note.  Placement of nominal honeycomb, pellet, chips, rings, balls,
    etc. in this subclass is discouraged.  Honeycomb of specific dimension or
    an irregular or analogous (e.g., octagon shape or individual particles with
    modular surface on the other hand should be considered classifiable here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8+,     for a process only of forming or treating a sphere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, for apparatus which may include a catalyst or
    sorbent of specific shape.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, especially subclasses
    357+ for a specifically shaped particle.


CLS 503/
TTL RECORD RECEIVER HAVING PLURAL INTERACTIVE LEAVES OR  A COLORLESS COLOR
    FORMER,  METHOD OF USE, OR DEVELOPER  THEREFOR

CLS 503/
TXT
    Material which is used to form a visible record by a reactive or
    interactive, usually chemical or physico-chemical, phenomenon or a method
    of using such a material to form a record.  The formation phenomenon is one
    of the following:

    1.      The chemical sexomposition of a colorless substance to form a
    substance having color.



    2.      The chemical combing of two or more colorless chemical moleties to
    produce a substance having color.



    3.      The chemical of (1) or (2) above, to form a color different from an
    original color.



    4.      The chemical or physico-chemical complementarity between the bottom
    surface of one sheet of a record receiver and the top surface of an
    adjacent sheet with which the first sheet id associated.

    Generally, the phenomenon in cases 1-4 is thought about by the application
    to the record receiver of heat and/or pressure in the areas to be "marked".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, subclasses 134+ for record receivers of other type and
    the definitions to that subclass for the identity of other classes or
    subclasses where other record receivers may be placed.

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclasses for a method of making a
    record receiver as herein, by coating substrate, and especially subclasses
    213.3+ for a process of making a solid microcapsule by coating.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 402.2+ and
    402.24 for composite microcapsules; and subclasses 411.1+ for composite
    material in general, many of which may be used in or as record receivers;
    see especially subclasses 488.1+ for so-called "carbon paper", and some
    other paper coated with transferable material.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, appropriate subclass for radiation-sensitive (photographic)
    materials in general, including those intended to be used for making a
    record by imagewise exposure to a radiant heat source, e.g., a laser.
    Where a receiver is claimed which can function due to conductive imagewise
    heating or radiant imagewise heating, the patent is classified in Class 430
    and cross-referenced here (Class 503).

    462,    Books, Strips, and Leaves for Manifolding, see especially
    subclasses 17+, 55+ and 66+ for plural leaf  paper sets including transfers
    and receiving sheets.


CLS 503/200
TXT HAVING A COLORLESS COLOR FORMER, DEVELOPER THEREFORE OR METHOD OF USE:

    Material which is used to form a visible record by causing a substance to
    react chemically to form a color where there was no color, or to form a
    different color from the original, or a method of using such material.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the color change occurs when a colorless chemical
    entity, called a "color former" is brought to a different state of
    electronic equilibrium by contacting the entity with a "developer generally
    are kept separate on the unused recording material, for example, by
    confining each reactant to a different, mating surface of a plurality of
    sheets, by confining one or more of the reactants to "microcapsules", etc.
    The reactants are brought into contact by the application of pressure,
    heat, etc., to localized areas of the recording material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 636+ for a dye composition in general.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 315.01+ for a microencapsulated liquid
    product.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 4.1+ for a liquid encapsulation process to make a microcapsule.


CLS 503/201
TXT Method of use, kit or combined with marking instrument or organ:

    Subject matter under subclass 200, directed to a method of using a
    recording material of the present type; such recording material in
    combination with other articles which may at one time or another be used
    with material; or such material in combination with an instrument or part
    of the human body which can transmit the energy, for example, heat,
    pressure, etc., needed to cause recording to take place.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 223+ for an assemblage or
    kit in general.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclasses 237+ for a typewriter ribbon,
    whether claimed in combination with a typewriter or not.


CLS 503/202
TXT Color developed by mere decomposition of color-former:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 in which the color-former is such that
    breaking up the color-former molecule) (e.g., by ionization, etc.) is
    sufficient to form a color without the need for the color-former molecule
    or fragment of it to react with another molecule.


CLS 503/203
TXT Duplicating master:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the product is such that it can
    be used to produce further copies of the record by a "printing", that is, a
    nonphotographic, technique.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, subclasses 112 and 127+ for stencil plates; subclasses
    453+ and 463.1+ for lithographic printing plates and elements, and 368+ for
    printing members.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, appropriate subclasses for light sensitive materials suitable for
    imagewise reproduction of visible materials and especially subclass 5 for a
    radiation mask and/or a method of making it.


CLS 503/204
TXT Plural colors or plural diverse systems:

    Subject mattter under subclass 200 in which the final recording is in two
    or more colors, other than the color of the background, or two or more
    distanct shades of a simgle "color" or in which the recording takes place
    by using two or more different color-producing systems; e.g., a pressure
    responsive system plus a heat-responsive system; a carbonless system plus a
    "carbon paper" type system, etc.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for a mere mixture of color
    formers and/or developers.


CLS 503/205
TXT Having a color desensitizer:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein a named substance which
    chemically deactivates one or both of the reactants is employed to reduce,
    extinguish or prevent the formation of a colored substance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    214,    for a recording material wherein color formation is prevented by
    the use of a named physical barrier, e.g., microcapsules to isolate the
    reactants.


CLS 503/206
TXT Component noncoextensive with substrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein one layer of the recording
    material does not entirely cover an adjacent layer of the material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for those materials which have
    color-forming or development reagents on only a portion of a sheet of
    wherein certain portions are masked.


CLS 503/207
TXT Having nonreactant particles or defined size:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 in which the recording material contains
    particles, other than merely color-former particles or developer particles,
    which particles are designated as having a particular relative or absolute
    size.

    (1)     Note.  The size-designated particles often are larger than any
    reactive particles in the recording material, so that they may serve to
    protect reactive particles from unwanted contact, e.g., "stilt" particles,
    etc.


CLS 503/208
TXT Having constituent defined in terms of melting temperature:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein a composition which makes up part
    of the recording material has, as one of its constituents, a compound or
    mixture or macromolecule which is characterized by its melting temparature.

    (1)     Note.  The recording material included herein generally are those
    designed for color development in response to localized heating, for
    example, by an electric stylus.


CLS 503/209
TXT Having nonchromogenic liquid spread-control or transfer-improving agent or
    component, color modifier, stabilizer or preservative:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 which contains a substance, other than
    that which reacts to form a color, which can affect (a) the spreading of a
    liquid constituent of the recording material, (b) the transfer of a
    constituent from one part, or (c) the darkness, lightness, or other visual
    property of the final colored mark, or prevent changes in the mark in the
    finished record.


CLS 503/210
TXT Heavy metal reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 in which the color is developed by a
    chemical change in a compound containing a metal having a specific gravity
    greater than 4.0.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded here, by the definition of "heavy metal", are the
    alkli metals, the alkaline earth metals, magnesium and aluminum.


CLS 503/211
TXT Metal of atomic number 22 - 30:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein the metal is titanium, vanadium,
    chromium, manganese, iron, cobalt, nickel, copper or zinc.


CLS 503/212
TXT Zinc:

    Subject matter under subclass 211 in which the heavy metal is zinc.


CLS 503/213
TXT Identified solvent or dispersant for color-former other than mere mineral
    oil:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 in which the color-former is dissolved or
    dispersed in a named mineral oil having an additive or in a liquid other
    than mineral oil named in the claims.


CLS 503/214
TXT Identified reactant isolating material or capsule wall material or binder
    resin:

    Subject matter under subclass  200 in which the finely-divided color-former
    masses and/or the developer particles are protected from contact with other
    materials by use of a material named in the claims; are enclosed or
    encapsulated by a material named in the claims or are held to each other or
    to 9 other substances by a material named in the claims.


CLS 503/215
TXT Synthetic resin capsule walls:

    Subject matter under subclass 214 in which the composition of a synethic
    resin which serves to encapsulate a reactant is named.


CLS 503/216
TXT Identified organic electron acceptor (developer) other than phenolic resin:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 in which a claim names an organic
    material (other than a synthetic resin made from a mixture which includes
    phenol) which organic material has acid characteristics sufficient to bring
    out the color of a color-former contacted therewith.


CLS 503/217
TXT And identified color-former:

    Subject matter under subclass 216 in which a claim names a substance which,
    under the influence of contact with the developer, changes from colorless
    or otherwise ineffective for to a colored form or other state suitable for
    recording information.


CLS 503/218
TXT Identified color-former:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein a substance is named in the
    claims which changes from a colored form or other state suitable for
    recording information.


CLS 503/219
TXT And identified inorganic electron acceptor (developer) other than mere clay:

    Subject matter under subclass 218 in which a claim names an inorganic
    material other than clay, which has acid characteristics sufficent to bring
    out the color-former contacted therewith.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for clay which has been subjected to
    a specified treatment to alter or enchance its activity or characteristics.


CLS 503/220
TXT Furanone moiety-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 218 wherein the color-former contains the
    phthalide or furanone moiety, viz:


CLS 503/221
TXT Fluoran or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the color-former is
    0-phenolphthalien anhydride

    (dihydroxydiphenyl phthalide anhydride) or compound derived from it by
    substitution for a hydrogen.


CLS 503/222
TXT Molecule having plural fluorans or more than three rings fused together:

    Subject matter under subclass 221 in which the color former compound has in
    its molecule two or more fluoran moieties, or has a polycyclo ring system
    in which a ring shares two of its carbon atoms with one other ring, and two
    more of its carbons with second other ring.


CLS 503/223
TXT Azole moiety-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 218 which contain the moiety


CLS 503/224
TXT Polyphenylmethane moiety-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 218 in which the color-former molecule has a
    single acyclic carbon atom between at least two benzene rings.


CLS 503/225
TXT Identified electron acceptor (developer):

    Subject matter under subclass 200 in which a claim names a material which
    has acid chaaracteristics sufficient to bring out the color of a
    color-former contacted therewith.


CLS 503/226
TXT Spatial relationship specified between color-former and developer:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the relative distance between
    color-former and developer is specified; e.g., both in the same layer, on
    opposite sides of the same carrier sheet, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    214,    for a recording material of this type having a named material
    keeping the color-former and the developer apart.


CLS 503/227
TXT HAVING PLURAL INTERACTIVE LEAVES:

    Material which is used to form a visible record comprising plural leaves so
    associated that the bottom surface of a top leaf, so as to produce a mark,
    usually upon the application of pressure in a direction normal to the plane
    of the leaves.

    (1)     Note.  The interaction may comprise any chemical or physical
    phenomenon and is usually dependent upon the complementarity of the
    composition or physical characteristics of the facing surfaces; in the
    usual case a frangible transfer surface on one sheet mates with the
    adhesive surface of a receiver sheet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200,    for similar subject matter where one of the said surfaces provides
    a colorless color-forming material for development by a reactant material
    in said other surface.


CLS 504/
TTL PLANT PROTECTING AND REGULATING COMPOSITIONS

CLS 504/
TXT I.      STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    II.     CLASSIFICATION LINES WITH AND SERACH NOTES TO OTHER CLASSES

    III.    GLOSSARY

    IV.     CLASSIFICATION GUIDELINES FOR THIS CLASS

    V.      SEARCHING OF FOREIGN PATENTS IN THIS CLASS

    I.      STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    This class provides for compositions for treating living terrestrial and
    aquatic plants or their habitats for the purpose of stimulating or
    inhibiting growth, or any regulating action on plant growth, and the
    processes of using such compositions or compounds, per se, for such
    purposes which are not more than their mere application to the plant or
    habitat.  The compositions or compounds included in this class will alter
    the plant growth through a chemical modification of the plant metabolism.

    This class also provides for:

    (1)     Seeds coated or impregnated with agricultural chemicals other than
    fertilizers, e.g., antidotes, plant growth regulators, micro-organisms,
    fungicides, disinfectants, etc.

    (2)     Processes and their products which are of definite fertilizer value
    and are also insecticides, fungicides, or deodorants.  These patents are
    cross-referenced to Classes 424 and 514.

    (3)     Antidotal compositions, i.e., compositions which contain compounds
    capable of protecting cultivated plants from being damaged by herbicidal
    chemicals without affecting the herbicidal action of said chemicals against
    the weeds or unwanted plants to be controlled.

    (4)     Soil life extenders, i.e., compositions which contain a herbicide
    and a compound useful for extending the soil life of said herbicide.

    (5)     Compositions for preserving cut flowers.

    (6)     Compositions for stimulating or increasing the sprouting of seeds,
    roots, tubers, or bulbs.

    (7)     Compositions for regulating aquatic plants, particularly algae.

    (8)     Compositions for regulating plant growth which use micro-organisms
    or products derived therefrom.

    II.     CLASSIFICATION LINES WITH AND SEARCH NOTES TO OTHER CLASSES

    A.      General Guidelines

    (1)     Compositions which are disclosed as having a plurality of functions
    provided for in different main classes and only a single use, property, or
    function is claimed, are originally classified in the composition class
    providing for such claimed use, property, or function and cross-referenced
    to other classes for disclosed uses, properties, or functions when
    desirable.

    (2)     Compositions which are disclosed as having a plurality of uses,
    properties, or functions provided for in different main classes, and have
    claims to each of several uses, properties, or functions provided for in
    different main classes, are originally classified with the composition
    class coming first in the order of superiority of composition classes
    listed in the main class definition of Class 252, Compositions, (5) Note.

    B.      Classes Providing for Related Matter

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 57.6 for processes of treating the soil
    and its product (1) which do not involve the application of a specific
    plant growth regulating composition to terrestrial or aquatic plants or
    their habitats, or (2) which are more than mere application of a specific
    composition to the plant or the soil, e.g., include some mechanical
    manipulation of the plant or soil.  Search particularly subclass 57.6 for
    coated or impregnated seeds not more specifically provided for elsewhere.

    71,     Chemistry: Fertilizers, for compositions having a nutrient or
    fertilizing effect on plant growth and methods of using such compositions,
    and for compositions of seeds and fertilizers. Compositions which include a
    plant stimulant and a fertilizer are classified in Class 504.

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclasses for
    electrical or wave energy methods involving chemical reactions which are
    caused by more than the mere thermal effects of the electrical or wave
    energy for the preparation of compounds or elements useful for plant growth
    regulating compositions.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses for processes of application of insecticides, fungicides,
    fumigants, disinfectants, etc., to plants or soil as well as seeds coated
    with a Class 424 composition wherein the seed functions as a bait material.
     Compositions which include a plant growth regulator and a biocide are
    classified in Class 504.  If claims are drawn to a "pesticide" composition
    or method without specifically reciting the nature of the "pest" to be
    controlled or eradicated, the patent is placed as an original in Class 424
    or 514 when only a Class 424 or 514 type of "pest" (e.g., fungi, insect,
    rodent, etc.) is revealed in the patent disclosure.  However, if both Class
    504 and Class 424 or 514 types of "pest" are specifically disclosed or if
    no disclosure is made as to the specific type of pest, the patent is placed
    in Class 504 as an original and cross-referenced to Class 424 or 514.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, for making,
    separating, or purifying substances by processes that include
    fermentations;  for processes of making or treating living organisms,
    enzymes, or ferments; and for compositions or apparatus for use in such
    processes.

    514,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses for processes of application of insecticides, fungicides,
    fumigants, disinfectants, etc., to plants or soil as well as seeds coated
    with a Class 514 composition wherein the seed functions as a bait material.
     Compositions which include a plant growth regulator and a biocide are
    classified in Class 504.  If claims are drawn to a "pesticide" composition
    or method without specifically reciting the nature of the "pest" to be
    controlled or eradicated, the patent is placed as an original in Class 424
    or 514 when only a Class 424 or 514 type of "pest" (e.g., fungi, insect,
    rodent, etc.) is revealed in the patent disclosure.  However, if both Class
    504 and Class 424 or 514 types of "pest" are specifically disclosed or if
    no disclosure is made as to the specific type of pest, the patent is placed
    in Class 504 as an original and cross-referenced to Class 424 or 514.

    800,    Multicellular Living Organisms and Unmodified Parts Thereof,
    appropriate subclasses for living multicellular organisms, e.g., plants,
    etc., and separated or severed parts thereof that have not undergone any
    modification or treatment subsequent to their separation, e.g., untreated
    seeds, etc.

    935,    Genetic Engineering:  Recombination DNA Technology, Hybrid or Fused
    Cell Technology, and Related Manipulations of Nucleic Acids, which provides
    a search collection for processes of altering the genetic structure of
    micro-organisms; genes and methods of modifying genes and their expression;
    vectors and methods of modifying vectors; methods of introducing DNA into a
    cell; micro-organisms, per se, which have had their genetic sequence
    altered by recombinant DNA techniques or by cell fusion or by uptake of
    DNA; testing; separation techniques;  apparatus; methods of use of vectors
    or of the genetically engineered micro-organisms;  and methods of gene
    therapy or genetic modification of living organisms.



    III.    GLOSSARY

    The organic chemical structure terminology used in this class is consistent
    with that used in the Glossary for Class 532 - Organic Compounds -- Part of
    the Class 532-570 Series (Published May 22, 1984 in Addendum No. 1 - Order
    No. 946).

    PLANT
    The term plant refers to all physical parts of a plant, including seeds,
    seedlings, saplings, roots, tubers, stems, stalks, foliage, and fruits.

    PLANT GROWTH
    Plant growth includes all phases of development from seed germination to
    natural or induced cessation of life.

    HERBICIDE
    The term denotes a compound or composition which adversely affects the
    growth or the life span of a plant.

    ACTIVE
    The expression active as used herein denotes a plant growth regulating
    effect.

    ORGANIC
    The term organic denotes compounds containing carbon, which are further
    characterized by the presence in a molecule thereof of two carbon atoms
    bonded together;  or one atom of carbon bonded to at least one atom of
    hydrogen or halogen;  or one atom of carbon bonded to at least one atom of
    nitrogen by a single or double bond.

    (1)     Note.  Compounds included within this definition, but not
    considered organic are hydrocyanic acid, cyanogen, isocyanic acid,
    cyanamide, dicyanamide, cyanogen halides, isothiocyanic acid, fulminic
    acid, and metal carbides.

    POTENTIATOR or SYNERGIST
    The terms denote an agent (A) which will cooperatively act with an active
    ingredient for this class (B) to the extent that the total effect (A+B)
    will be greater than the sum of the two effects taken independently.

    IV.     CLASSIFICATION GUIDELINES FOR THIS CLASS

    In this class the chemical structure of the ingredient disclosed as having
    a utility set forth in section I above, is used as the primary basis of
    classification.  Processes of using compositions or compounds, per se, and
    processes of making compositions, not provided for elsewhere are classified
    in the first appearing subclass providing for the particular active
    ingredient being employed or prepared.

    The subclasses drawn to plural active ingredients include compositions
    which contain two or more active plant growth regulating agents, e.g., two
    or more herbicides.

    No weight is given to a synergist or potentiator agent in classifying a
    composition for this class unless the synergist or potentiator agent is
    also an active plant growth regulator.

    A patent claiming a Class 504 active ingredient broadly in terms of its
    function in combination with a specific adjuvant or carrier has been
    classified as original in the first appearing subclass providing for any
    one of the disclosed specific active ingredients and cross-referenced to
    all other subclasses providing for the remaining disclosed active
    ingredients.

    V.      SEARCHING OF FOREIGN PATENTS IN THIS CLASS

    The foreign patents for subclasses 100 and 103-357 of Class 504 have been
    placed in the International Patent Classification System (in subclass A01N)
    and will be searched in that system according to its rules of
    classification.


CLS 504/100
TXT SEEDS COATED WITH AGRICULTURAL CHEMICALS OTHER THAN FERTILIZERS:Products
    under the class definition which comprise seeds coated or impregnated with
    agricultural chemicals other than fertilizers, e.g., antidotes, safeners,
    plant growth regulators, micro-organisms, fungicides, bactericides,
    disinfectants, etc.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an agricultural chemical provided for herein
    is:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 57.6 for coated seeds not more
    specifically provided for elsewhere.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, for seeds
    coated or impregnated with a Class 424 composition wherein the seed
    functions as a bait material, as well as, for processes of treating a seed
    with a biocide.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 4 for processes of coating of seeds,
    plants, etc., when the coating composition has no affect upon growth
    character of the plant or when the coating process is more than the mere
    application of a specific composition to the plant or seed.


CLS 504/101
TXT FERTILIZERS WITH INSECTICIDE, FUNGICIDE, DISINFECTANT, OR
    DEODORANT:Products under the class definition which are of definite
    fertilizer value and are also insecticides, fungicides, deodorants, or
    disinfectants.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses
    76.1+ for deodorant compositions which are not applied to the living body
    and which function by destroying the odor-causing organism or by
    desensitizing the olfactory mechanism.


CLS 504/102
TXT From sewage, human, or animal excrements (e.g., night soil, manure, guano,
    etc.):Products under subclass 101 in which  fertilizer is derived from
    sewage, human, or animal excrement.


CLS 504/103
TXT ANTIDOTES (E.G., SAFENERS, ANTAGONISTS, ETC.):
    Compositions under the class definition containing antidotes, which are
    compounds capable of protecting cultivated plants from being damaged by
    herbicidal chemicals without affecting the herbicidal action of said
    chemicals against the weeds or unwanted plants to be controlled.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an antidotal compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/104
TXT Hetero ring containing antidote:
    Compositions under subclass 103 wherein the antidotal compound contains a
    hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an antidotal compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/105
TXT Hetero ring is six-membered including nitrogen:
    Compositions under subclass 104 in which the hetero ring is six-membered
    and has nitrogen as a ring member.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of antidotal compounds provided for herein are:



CLS 504/106
TXT Hetero ring is five-membered having two or more ring hetero atoms of which
    at least one is nitrogen (e.g., thiazoles, etc.):Compositions under
    subclass 104 in which the hetero ring is five-membered and has two or more
    hetero atoms as ring members, at least one of which is nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of antidotal compounds provided for herein are:



CLS 504/107
TXT Having -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen, bonded directly to ring nitrogen of
    the five-membered hetero ring:Compositions under subclass 106 wherein a
    -C(=X)- group, in which X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium), is bonded directly to the ring nitrogen of the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of antidotal compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 504/108
TXT Oxygen containing hetero ring:
    Compositions under subclass 104 wherein the hetero ring has oxygen as a
    ring member.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of antidotal compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 504/109
TXT Antidote contains cyano or isocyano bonded directly to carbon:Compositions
    under subclass 103 wherein the antidotal compound contains carbon bonded
    directly to a cyano (-CN) or isocyano (-NC) group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an antidotal compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/110
TXT Antidote contains -C(=X)X-, wherein the X's are the same or diverse
    chalcogens (e.g., carbamates, thiocarbamates, carboxylic acids,
    etc.):Compositions under subclass 103 in which the antidotal compound
    contains a -C(=X)X- group, wherein the X's are the same or diverse
    chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of antidotal compounds provided for herein are:



CLS 504/111
TXT Antidote contains organic nitrogen compound wherein the nitrogen, other
    than as nitro or nitroso, is attached directly or indirectly to carbon by
    nonionic bonding:Compositions under subclass 103 in which the antidotal
    compound contains an organic compound wherein nitrogen, other than as nitro
    or nitroso (-NO2 or -NO), is attached directly or indirectly to carbon by
    nonionic bonding

    (1)     Note.  A nitro or nitroso group may be attached directly or
    indirectly to carbon by nonionic bonding, provided that a nitrogen which is
    not part of a nitro or nitroso group is also so attached.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of antidotal compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 504/112
TXT Carboxamides (i.e., R-C(=O)NH2, wherein R is hydrogen or carbon, and
    substitution may be made for the hydrogens on the nitrogen only;  e.g.,
    dichloracetamides, etc.):Compositions under subclass 111 which contain
    R-C(=O)NH2, wherein R is hydrogen or carbon, and substitution may be made
    for the hydrogens on the nitrogen only.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an antidotal compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/113
TXT PLANT GROWTH REGULATORS WITH SOIL LIFE EXTENDERS:
    Compositions under the class definition which contain a plant growth
    regulator (e.g., a herbicide) and a compound useful for extending the soil
    life of said plant growth regulator.

    (1)     Note.  Soil conditioners are not considered to be soil life
    extenders.


CLS 504/114
TXT COMPOSITIONS FOR PRESERVATION OR MAINTENANCE OF CUT FLOWERS:Compositions
    under the class definition for maintaining the freshness of flowers that
    have been severed from a living  plant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 4 for processes of coating a plant
    member or animal specimen for ornamental effect or preservation.


CLS 504/115
TXT Containing organic nitrogen compounds:
    Compositions under subclass 114 which contain an organic nitrogen compound,
    i.e., one in which nitrogen is attached directly or indirectly, by nonionic
    bonding, to carbon of an organic compound.


CLS 504/116
TXT PLANT GROWTH REGULATING COMPOSITIONS (E.G., HERBICIDES, ETC.):Compositions
    under the class definition not more specifically provided for elsewhere,
    for treating growing or living terrestrial or aquatic plants or their
    habitats for the purpose of stimulating, defoliating, inhibiting,
    retarding, or killing said plants and the processes of using such
    compositions or compounds, per se, for such purposes, which are not more
    than the mere application of the compositions or compounds to the plant or
    habitat.

    (1)     Note.  The compositions of this subclass include those compositions
    which find utility for activating the germination of seeds, bulbs, tubers,
    and roots, for desuckering plants and sucker control, for affecting the
    color of the fruit, etc., as well as processes of using compounds, per se,
    for such purposes.

    (2)     Note.  Only those compositions which alter the plant through a
    chemical modification of the plant metabolism such as auxins are herein
    included.  The line between a chemical which causes a plant metabolism
    response and a fertilizer or plant food is somewhat difficult, but for
    purposes of this class the following applies: (1) compositions having only
    a fertilizing affect and (2) compositions which are disclosed as having
    both a stimulating and fertilizing action and wherein the composition taken
    as a whole merely exhibits its stimulating affect as a response to the
    fertilizing action and wherein no disclosure is made as to the specific
    response, except for general statements as to "stimulating and fertilizing
    affects," are not in this or indented subclasses, but may be found in the
    appropriate fertilizer subclass in Class 71, Chemistry:  Fertilizers.
    Compositions which include a plant stimulant as well as a fertilizer or
    biocide (insecticide, fungicide, etc.) are classified in this or indented
    subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  Compositions which are added to prevent or cure mineral or
    plant food deficiencies are excluded from this and indented subclasses.
    For example, the addition of iron chelates to cure or prevent iron
    chlorosis may be found in the appropriate fertilizer subclass in Class 71,
    Chemistry: Fertilizers.

    (4)     Note.  The terms "mere application" or "mere use" as employed
    herein include such recited process steps as dusting, spraying, injecting,
    drilling, wetting, spreading, etc., and combinations thereof.  Limitations
    relating to amounts, time, or physical forms of the compositions as applied
    are included herein.  For example, the treatment with a specific
    composition "at the imminence of abscission" to prevent abscission is
    classified with the composition.

    (5)     Note.  In the indented subclasses the primary basis of
    classification is on the chemical structure of the compound employed in the
    claimed subject matter which is disclosed to possess a utility for this
    subclass.

    (6)     Note.  For the purposes of this and related subclasses the term
    hetero ring denotes the presence of a ring whose members are composed of at
    least one carbon and one or more atoms of the elements taken from the group
    consisting of nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, selenium, and tellurium.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, for processes of treating the soil and its
    products involving (1) some mechanical manipulation of the soil or plant
    over and above the application of a specific composition, or (2) which do
    not involve the application of a specific composition, or (3) which are
    more than the mere application of a specific composition to the plant or
    the soil.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses for processes of application of insecticides, fungicides,
    fumigants, disinfectants, etc., to plants or soil as well as seeds coated
    or impregnated with a Class 424 composition wherein the seed functions as
    bait material.

    514,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses for processes of application of insecticides, fungicides,
    fumigants, disinfectants, etc., to plants or soil as well as seeds coated
    or impregnated with a Class 514 composition wherein the seed functions as
    bait material.


CLS 504/117
TXT Micro-organisms or from micro-organisms (e.g., fermentates, fungi,
    bacteria, viruses, etc.):Compositions under subclass 116 which contain
    micro-organisms or products derived from micro-organisms or fermentation
    processes as the active ingredient.

    (1)     Note.  Products derived from micro-organisms whether their
    structure is known or not are included herein.  Most such products appear
    to be heterocyclic oxygen compounds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    292,    for compositions containing active six-membered hetero oxygen
    compounds which are not disclosed as being products of micro-organisms or
    fermentation processes.


CLS 504/118
TXT Plural active ingredients:
    Compositions under subclass 116 which contain two or more active plant
    growth regulating agents.


CLS 504/119
TXT Inorganic active ingredient containing:
    Compositions under subclass 118 which contain at least one inorganic active
    element or compound and one or more additional active ingredients.


CLS 504/120
TXT Inorganic active ingredient contains heavy metal or aluminum:Compositions
    under subclass 119 wherein the inorganic active ingredient is elemental
    aluminum, elemental metal having a specific gravity greater than four, or
    inorganic compounds thereof.


CLS 504/121
TXT With an organic active ingredient:
    Compositions under subclass 120 which contain, in addition to the inorganic
    active ingredient, an organic active compound.


CLS 504/122
TXT Inorganic active ingredient contains boron:
    Compositions under subclass 119 wherein the inorganic active ingredient is
    elemental boron or an inorganic compound thereof.


CLS 504/123
TXT With an organic active compound:
    Compositions under subclass 119 which contain, in addition to the inorganic
    active ingredient, an organic active compound.


CLS 504/124
TXT Hetero ring containing:
    Compositions under 123 wherein the organic active compound contains a
    hetero ring.


CLS 504/125
TXT Containing -C(=X)X- or -C(=X)NH-, wherein the X's are the same or diverse
    chalcogens and substitution may be made for hydrogen only (e.g.,
    phenoxyacetic acids, ureas, etc.):Compositions under subclass  123 in which
    the organic active compound contains a -C(=X)X- or -C(=X)NH- group, wherein
    the X's are the same or diverse chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium,
    or tellurium) and substitution may be made for hydrogen only.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 504/126
TXT Heavy metal or aluminum containing active ingredient:
    Compositions under subclass 118 wherein an organic active ingredient
    contains aluminum or a metal having a specific gravity greater than four.


CLS 504/127
TXT Phosphorus containing active ingredient wherein the phosphorus is other
    than solely as part of an inorganic ion in an addition salt:Compositions
    under subclass 118 wherein an organic active ingredient contains phosphorus
    attached directly or indirectly to carbon by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Inorganic phosphorus salts of the organic active ingredient
    are excluded herefrom and classified with the active organic moiety.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/128
TXT With an active heterocyclic compound:
    Compositions under subclass 127 which contain in addition to the
    organo-phosphorus active ingredient, an active heterocyclic compound.


CLS 504/129
TXT Hetero ring containing active ingredient:
    Compositions under subclass 118 wherein an organic active ingredient
    contains a hetero ring.


CLS 504/130
TXT Hetero ring is six-membered including nitrogen:
    Compositions under subclass 129 wherein the hetero ring is six-membered and
    has nitrogen as a ring member.


CLS 504/131
TXT The hetero ring also contains sulfur (e.g., benzothiadiazinones,
    etc.):Compositions under subclass 130 wherein the six-membered hetero ring
    also has sulfur as a ring member.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/132
TXT With additional hetero ring active ingredient:
    Compositions under subclass 131 which contain, in addition to the active
    six-membered hetero ring compound, an additional active hetero ring
    compound.


CLS 504/133
TXT The hetero ring consists of three nitrogens and three carbons:Compositions
    under subclass 130 wherein the six-membered hetero ring consists of three
    ring nitrogens and three ring carbons.


CLS 504/134
TXT With additional hetero ring active ingredient:
    Compositions under subclass 133 which contain, in addition to the active
    six-membered hetero ring compound, an additional active hetero ring
    compound.


CLS 504/135
TXT With an active ingredient containing -C(=X)X-, wherein the X's are the same
    or diverse chalcogens (e.g., thiocarbamates, carbamates, carboxylic acids,
    etc.):Compositions under subclass 133 which contain, in addition to the
    active six-membered hetero ring compound, an active compound which has a
    -C(=X)X- group, wherein the X's are the same or diverse chalcogens (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of the additional active compound is:


CLS 504/136
TXT The hetero ring consists of two nitrogens and four carbons:
    Compositions under subclass 130 wherein the six-membered hetero ring
    consists of two ring nitrogens and four ring carbons.


CLS 504/137
TXT 1, 2-diazines (e.g., pyridazones, etc.):
    Compositions under subclass 136 wherein the six-membered hetero ring has
    nitrogens in the 1- and 2-positions and carbons in the remaining four
    positions.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/138
TXT Hetero ring is five-membered including nitrogen:

    Compositions under subclass 129 wherein the hetero ring is five-membered
    and has nitrogen as a ring member.


CLS 504/139
TXT Plural ring nitrogens in the hetero ring:

    Compositions under subclass 138 wherein the hetero ring contains at least
    two ring nitrogens.


CLS 504/140
TXT Oxygen containing hetero ring:

    Compositions under subclass 129 wherein the hetero ring has oxygen as a
    ring member.


CLS 504/141
TXT Cyano, isocyano, cyanate, isocyanate,  thiocyanate, or isothiocyanate
    (i.e., -CN, -NC, -OCN, -NCO, -SCN, or -NCS) containing active ingredient:

    Compositions under subclass 118 wherein an organic active ingredient
    contains a cyano (-CN), isocyano (-NC), cyanate (-O-CN), isocyanate (-NCO),
    thiocyanate (-S-CN), or isothiocyanate (-NCS) group.


CLS 504/142
TXT Active ingredient contains -C(=X)X-, wherein the X's are the same or
    diverse chalcogens:Compositions under subclass 118 in which an organic
    active ingredient contains a -C(=X)X- group, wherein the X's are the same
    or diverse chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).


CLS 504/143
TXT Nitrogen bonded directly to the carbon of the -C(=X)X- group (e.g.,
    carbamates, thiocarbamates, etc.):Compositions under subclass 142 wherein
    the carbon of the -C(=X)X- group is bonded directly to nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/144
TXT Carbocyclic ring bonded directly to the carbon of the -C(=X)X- group (e.g.,
    benzoic acids, etc.):Compositions under subclass 142 wherein the carbon of
    the -C(=X)X- group is bonded directly to a carbocyclic ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/145
TXT Oxygen is bonded directly to a benzene ring and is part of an acyclic chain
    between the benzene ring and the -C(=O)O- group (e.g.,
    2,4-dichlorophenoxyacetic acids, naphthoxypropionic acids,
    etc.):Compositions under subclass 142 in which oxygen is bonded directly to
    a benzene ring and is also part of an acyclic chain between the benzene
    ring and the -C(=O)O- group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/146
TXT With an active ingredient containing nitrogen, other than as nitro or
    nitroso, wherein the nitrogen is attached directly or indirectly to carbon
    by nonionic bonding:Compositions under subclass 145 which contain an
    additional active organic compound wherein carbon is attached directly or
    indirectly to nitrogen, other than as  nitro or nitroso (-NO2 or -NO), by
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  A nitro or nitroso group may be attached directly or
    indirectly to carbon by nonionic bonding, provided that a nitrogen which is
    not part of a nitro or nitroso group is also attached.


CLS 504/147
TXT Nitrogen or halogen attached indirectly to the carbon of the -C(=X)X- group
    by acyclic nonionic bonding:Compositions under subclass 142 wherein the
    carbon of the -C(=X)X- group is attached indirectly to nitrogen or halogen
    by acyclic nonionic bonding.


CLS 504/148
TXT Active ingredient contains nitrogen, other than as nitro or nitroso,
    wherein the nitrogen is attached directly or indirectly to carbon by
    nonionic bonding:Compositions under subclass 118 wherein an organic active
    ingredient contains carbon attached directly or indirectly to nitrogen,
    other than as nitro or nitroso (-NO2 or -NO), by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  A nitro or nitroso group may be attached directly or
    indirectly to carbon by nonionic bonding, provided that a nitrogen which is
    not part of a nitro or nitroso group is also so attached.


CLS 504/149
TXT Carboxamides (i.e., R-C(=O)NH2, wherein R is hydrogen or carbon, and
    substitution may be made for the hydrogens on the nitrogen only;  e.g.,
    dichloroacetamides, etc.):Compositions under subclass 148 which contain
    R-C(=O)NH2, wherein R is hydrogen or carbon, and  substitution may be made
    for the hydrogens on the nitrogen only.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an active ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 504/150
TXT Aquatic plant regulator (e.g., algicides, etc.):
    Compositions under subclass 116 which are designed or intended for
    positively or negatively influencing the life span of aquatic plants.

    (1)     Note.  Algicides are included herein.

    (2)     Note.  Patents disclosing the treatment of slime are not included
    herein unless algae is specifically disclosed to be a component of the
    slime.

    (3)     Note.  Compositions intended to be applied to a surface for the
    prevention or inhibition of algae growth thereon, e.g., antifouling marine
    coating compositions, are not included herein, but are classified in the
    appropriate composition class and cross-referenced here if necessary.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 1.4 for algae culture and subclass 62 for
    process of fostering plant growth in a nutrient solution.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 15.05+ for
    antifouling coating compositions.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclass 161 for biocidal
    processes and products for slime control in paper making.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 601+, especially 636,
    753+, and 764 processes for destroying micro-organisms in a liquid medium
    which are more than the mere addition of a compound or composition to said
    liquid.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, particularly
    subclasses 257.1+ for subject matter directed to a composition having
    utility as an algal culture medium (i.e., media for maintenance, growth,
    production, etc.) or a technique for preparing or using the same.


CLS 504/151
TXT Inorganic active ingredient containing:
    Compositions under subclass 150 wherein the active aquatic plant regulating
    agent is an element or an inorganic compound.


CLS 504/152
TXT Heavy metal or aluminum containing active ingredient:
    Compositions under subclass 150 wherein the active aquatic plant regulating
    agent is an organic compound which contains aluminum or a metal having a
    specific gravity greater than four.

    (1)     Note.  Arsenic is considered a heavy metal.


CLS 504/153
TXT Boron, silicon, or phosphorus containing active ingredient wherein the
    boron, silicon, or phosphorus is other than solely as part of an inorganic
    ion in an addition salt:Compositions under subclass 150 in which the active
    aquatic plant regulating agent contains an organic compound wherein boron,
    silicon, or phosphorus is attached directly or indirectly to carbon by
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Inorganic boron, silicon, or phosphorus salts of the active
    aquatic plant regulating agent are excluded herefrom and classified with
    the active organic moiety.


CLS 504/154
TXT Hetero ring containing active ingredient:
    Compositions under subclass 150 wherein the active aquatic plant regulating
    agent contains a hetero ring.


CLS 504/155
TXT Hetero ring includes nitrogen:
    Compositions under subclass 154 wherein the hetero ring contains nitrogen
    as a ring member.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/156
TXT Hetero ring is five-membered (e.g., thiadiazoles, etc.):
    Compositions under subclass 155 wherein the hetero ring is five-membered.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/157
TXT Active ingredient contains -C(=X)X-, wherein the X's are the same or
    diverse chalcogens (e.g., carbamates, thiocarbamates, carboxylic acids,
    etc.):Compositions under subclass 150 in which the active aquatic plant
    regulating agent contains a -C(=X)X- group, wherein the X's are the same or
    diverse chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/158
TXT Active ingredient contains nitrogen, other than as nitro or nitroso,
    wherein the nitrogen is attached directly or indirectly to carbon by
    nonionic bonding:Compositions under subclass 150 in which the active
    aquatic plant regulating agent contains an organic compound wherein carbon
    is attached directly or indirectly to nitrogen, other than as nitro or
    nitroso (-NO2 or -NO), by nonionic bonding.


    (1)     Note.  A nitro or nitroso group may be attached directly or
    indirectly to carbon by nonionic bonding, provided that a nitrogen which is
    not part of a nitro or nitroso group is also so attached.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/159
TXT Having -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen, bonded directly to the nitrogen
    (e.g., carboxamides, etc.):Compositions under subclass 158 which contain a
    -(C=X)- group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium), bonded directly to the nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/160
TXT Chalcogen attached directly or indirectly to the nitrogen by nonionic
    bonding:Compositions under subclass 158 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is attached directly or indirectly to the
    nitrogen by nonionic bonding.


CLS 504/161
TXT Active ingredient contains a ketone, aldehyde, ether, or hydroxy group,
    wherein the H of the hydroxy group may be replaced by a substituted or
    unsubstituted ammonium or a Group IA or IIA light metal:Compositions under
    subclass 150 in which the active aquatic plant regulating agent contains a
    -C(=O)- group, a -HCH-O-HCH- group, or an -OH group, wherein substitution
    may be made for hydrogen only and the hydrogen of the -OH group may be
    replaced by a substituted or unsubstituted ammonium ion or a Group IA or
    IIA light metal.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 504/162
TXT Abscission agent, defoliant, or dessicant:
    Compositions under subclass 116 which are designed or intended for
    facilitating or causing fruit, blossom, or leaf drop, or for dessicating a
    living plant, e.g., premature drying.


CLS 504/163
TXT Inorganic active ingredient containing:
    Compositions under subclass 162 wherein the active abscission, defoliant,
    or desiccant agent is an element or an inorganic compound.


CLS 504/164
TXT Boron, silicon, heavy metal, or aluminum containing active
    ingredient:Compositions under subclass 162 wherein the active abscission,
    defoliant, or desiccant agent is an organic compound which contains boron,
    silicon, aluminum, or a metal having a specific gravity greater than four.

    (1)     Note.  Arsenic is considered a heavy metal.


CLS 504/165
TXT Phosphorus containing active ingredient wherein the phosphorus is other
    than solely as part of an inorganic ion in an addition salt:Compositions
    under subclass 162 in which the active abscission, defoliant, or desiccant
    agent contains an organic compound wherein phosphorus is attached directly
    or indirectly to carbon by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Inorganic phosphorus salts of the active abscission,
    defoliant, or desiccant agent are excluded herefrom and classified with the
    active organic moiety.


CLS 504/166
TXT Hetero ring containing active ingredient:
    Compositions under subclass 162 wherein the active abscission, defoliant,
    or desiccant agent contains a hetero ring.


CLS 504/167
TXT Hetero ring is six-membered including nitrogen:
    Compositions under subclass 166 wherein the hetero ring is six-membered and
    has nitrogen as a ring member.


CLS 504/168
TXT Plural ring nitrogens in the hetero ring:
    Compositions under subclass 167 wherein the hetero ring contains at least
    two ring nitrogens.


CLS 504/169
TXT Hetero ring is five-membered having two or more ring hetero atoms of which
    at least one is nitrogen:Compositions under subclass 166 in which the
    hetero ring is five-membered and has two or more hetero atoms as ring
    members, at least one of which is nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/170
TXT Ring chalcogen in the hetero ring:
    Compositions under subclass 169 wherein the hetero ring also has chalcogen
    as a ring member.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/171
TXT Active ingredient contains -C(=X)X-, wherein the X's are the same or
    diverse chalcogens:Compositions under subclass 162 in which the active
    abscission, defoliant, or desiccant agent contains a -C(=X)X- group,
    wherein the X's are the same or diverse chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium).


CLS 504/172
TXT Nitrogen or additional chalcogen bonded directly to the carbon of the
    -C(=X)X- group (e.g., thiocarbamates, carbamates, xanthates,
    etc.):Compositions under subclass 171 wherein the carbon of the -C(=X)X-
    group is bonded directly to nitrogen or an additional chalcogen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 504/173
TXT Active ingredient contains nitrogen, other than as nitro or nitroso,
    wherein the nitrogen is attached directly or indirectly to carbon by
    nonionic bonding:Compositions under subclass 162 in which the active
    abscission, defoliant, or desiccant agent contains an organic compound
    wherein carbon is attached directly or indirectly to nitrogen, other than
    as nitro or nitroso (-NO2 or -NO), by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  A nitro or nitroso group may be attached directly or
    indirectly to carbon by nonionic bonding, provided that a nitrogen which is
    not part of a nitro or nitroso group is also so attached.


CLS 504/174
TXT Stunting or dwarfing agent:
    Compositions under subclass 116 which are designed or intended for
    retarding, suppressing, or inhibiting the rate of growth or size,
    particularly the height, of the plant.


CLS 504/175
TXT Phosphorus containing active ingredient wherein the phosphorus is attached
    directly or indirectly to carbon by nonionic bonding:Compositions under
    subclass 174 wherein the active stunting or dwarfing agent contains carbon
    attached directly or indirectly to phosphorus by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Salts of an organic active stunting or dwarfing agent with an
    inorganic phosphorus compound are classified with the active organic moiety.


CLS 504/176
TXT Hetero ring containing active ingredient:
    Compositions under subclass 174 wherein the active stunting or dwarfing
    agent contains a hetero ring.


CLS 504/177
TXT Hetero ring is six-membered including nitrogen:
    Compositions under subclass 176 wherein the hetero ring is six-membered and
    has nitrogen as a ring member.


CLS 504/178
TXT Chalcogen, nitrogen, or -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen, bonded directly to
    ring carbon of the six-membered hetero ring:Compositions under subclass 177
    in which chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium),
    nitrogen, or -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen, is bonded directly to a ring
    carbon of the six-membered hetero ring.


CLS 504/179
TXT Hetero ring is five-membered including nitrogen:
    Compositions under subclass 176 wherein the hetero ring is five-membered
    and has nitrogen as a ring member.


CLS 504/180
TXT Plural ring nitrogens in the hetero ring:
    Compositions under subclass 179 wherein the hetero ring contains at least
    two ring nitrogens.


CLS 504/181
TXT Oxygen attached indirectly to the five-membered hetero ring by acyclic
    nonionic bonding:Compositions under subclass 180 wherein the five-membered
    hetero ring is attached indirectly to oxygen by acyclic nonionic bonding.


CLS 504/182
TXT Active ingredient contains -C(=X) X-, wherein the X's are the same or
    diverse chalcogens:Compositions under subclass 174 wherein the active
    stunting or dwarfing agent contains a -C(=X) X- group, where the X's are
    the same or diverse chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium).


CLS 504/183
TXT Active ingredient contains organic nitrogen, other than as nitro or
    nitroso, wherein the nitrogen is attached directly or indirectly to carbon
    by nonionic bonding:Compositions under subclass 174 in which the active
    stunting or dwarfing agent contains an organic compound wherein carbon is
    attached directly or indirectly to nitrogen, other than as nitro or nitroso
    (-NO2 or -NO), by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  A nitro or nitroso group may be attached directly or
    indirectly to carbon by nonionic bonding, provided that a nitrogen which is
    not part of a nitro or nitroso group is also attached.


CLS 504/184
TXT Desuckering or sucker control agent:
    Compositions under subclass 116 containing a desuckering or sucker control
    agent which inhibits, retards, destroys, or removes sucker growth from a
    living plant.


CLS 504/185
TXT Hetero ring containing active ingredient:
    Compositions under subclass 184 wherein the active desuckering or sucker
    control agent contains a hetero ring.


CLS 504/186
TXT Active ingredient contains organic nitrogen, other than as nitro or
    nitroso, wherein the nitrogen is attached directly or indirectly to carbon
    by nonionic bonding:Compositions under subclass 184 in which the active
    desuckering or sucker control agent contains an organic compound wherein
    carbon is attached directly or indirectly to nitrogen, other than as nitro
    or nitroso (-NO2 or -NO), by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  A nitro or nitroso group may be attached directly or
    indirectly to carbon by nonionic bonding, provided that a nitrogen which is
    not part of a nitro or nitroso group is also so attached.


CLS 504/187
TXT Inorganic active ingredient which contains boron, silicon, phosphorus,
    heavy metal, or aluminum:Compositions under subclass 116 wherein an
    inorganic active ingredient contains elemental boron, silicon, phosphorus,
    aluminum, or metal having a specific gravity greater than four, or an
    inorganic compound of one of these elements.


CLS 504/188
TXT Inorganic active ingredient is elemental nitrogen, elemental sulfur, or is
    a compound of nitrogen or sulfur:Compositions under subclass 116 wherein an
    inorganic active ingredient is elemental nitrogen, elemental sulfur, or is
    a compound of nitrogen or sulfur.


CLS 504/189
TXT Organic active compound containing:
    Compositions under subclass 116 containing an organic compound as an active
    plant growth regulating agent.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are organic substances of unknown
    constitution.


CLS 504/190
TXT Heavy metal or aluminum containing:
    Compositions under subclass 189 wherein the organic active compound
    contains aluminum or a metal having a specific gravity greater than four.

    (1)     Note.  Arsenic is considered a heavy metal.


CLS 504/191
TXT Hetero ring containing:
    Compositions under subclass 190 which contain a hetero ring.


CLS 504/192
TXT Group IV or V heavy metal (e.g., Sn, As, Ti, etc.):
    Compositions under subclass 190 wherein the heavy metal is germanium, tin,
    lead, titanium, zirconium, hafnium, arsenic, antimony, bismuth, vanadium,
    niobium, or tantalum.


CLS 504/193
TXT Boron or silicon containing:
    Compositions under subclass 189 wherein the organic active compound
    contains boron or silicon.


CLS 504/194
TXT Phosphorus containing wherein the phosphorus is other than solely as part
    of an inorganic ion in an addition salt:Compositions under subclass 189
    wherein the organic active compound contains phosphorus attached directly
    or indirectly to carbon by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Salts of the organic active compound with an inorganic
    phosphorus compound are classified with the active organic moiety.


CLS 504/195
TXT Hetero ring containing:
    Compositions under subclass 194 which contain a hetero ring.


CLS 504/196
TXT Ring chalcogen in the hetero ring (e.g., morpholines, etc.):Compositions
    under subclass 195 wherein the hetero ring has chalcogen as a ring member.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/197
TXT Plural ring nitrogens in the hetero ring:
    Compositions under subclass 195 wherein the hetero ring contains at least
    two ring nitrogens.


CLS 504/198
TXT Having -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen, bonded directly to the
    phosphorus:Compositions under subclass 194 wherein the phosphorus is bonded
    directly to a -C(=X)- group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium).


CLS 504/199
TXT Nitrogen bonded directly to the phosphorus:
    Compositions under subclass 194 wherein the phosphorus is bonded directly
    to nitrogen.


CLS 504/200
TXT Plural nitrogens bonded directly to the phosphorus:
    Compositions under subclass 199 wherein phosphorus is bonded directly to
    two or more nitrogens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/201
TXT Nitrogen attached indirectly to the phosphorus by acyclic nonionic
    bonding:Compositions under subclass 194 wherein the phosphorus is attached
    indirectly to nitrogen by acyclic nonionic bonding.


CLS 504/202
TXT The nitrogen is part of a cyano or isocyano group:
    Compositions under subclass 201 in which the nitrogen is part of a cyano
    (-CN) or isocyano (-NC) group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/203
TXT Nitrogen or chalcogen bonded directly to the nitrogen:
    Compositions under subclass 201 wherein the nitrogen is bonded directly to
    nitrogen or chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 504/204
TXT Having -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen, bonded directly to the
    nitrogen:Compositions under subclass 201 which contain a -(C=X)- group,
    wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium),
    bonded directly to the nitrogen.


CLS 504/205
TXT Additional -C(=X)- or additional nitrogen attached indirectly to the
    phosphorus by acyclic nonionic bonding:Compositions under subclass 204
    wherein the phosphorus is attached indirectly to an additional -C(=X)-
    group or an additional nitrogen by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/206
TXT Containing -C(=X)X-, wherein the X's are the same or diverse chalcogens
    (e.g.,  N-phosphonomethylglycines, etc.):Compositions under subclass 201
    which contain a -C(=X)X- group, wherein the X's are the same or diverse
    chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/207
TXT Carbon bonded directly to the phosphorus:
    Compositions under subclass 194 wherein the phosphorus is bonded directly
    to carbon.


CLS 504/208
TXT Halogen attached indirectly to the phosphorus by acyclic nonionic
    bonding:Compositions under subclass 207 wherein the phosphorus is attached
    indirectly to halogen by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/209
TXT Hetero ring containing:
    Compositions under subclass 189 wherein the organic active compound
    contains a hetero ring.


CLS 504/210
TXT Acyclic urea or thiourea bonded directly to ring carbon of the hetero ring
    (i.e., HNH-C(=X)-NH-, wherein X is sulfur or oxygen and substitution may be
    made for hydrogen only):Compositions under subclass 209 in which a
    HNH-C(=X)-NH- group, wherein X is sulfur or oxygen and substitution may be
    made for hydrogen only, is bonded directly to a ring carbon of the hetero
    ring.

    (1)     Note.  Isoureas, isothioureas, pseudoureas, and pseudothioureas are
    not provided for in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:

    (3)     Note.  The acyclic urea or thiourea may itself be substituted by
    cyclic substituents.


CLS 504/211
TXT Sulfonyl bonded directly to the urea or thiourea nitrogen (e.g.,
    N-phenylsulfonyl-N'- pyridinylureas, etc.):Compositions under subclass 210
    wherein the urea or thiourea nitrogen is bonded directly to a sulfonyl,
    -S(=O)-, group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/212
TXT The hetero ring consists of three nitrogens and three carbons:Compositions
    under subclass 211 wherein the hetero ring consists of three ring nitrogens
    and three ring carbons.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/213
TXT Additional hetero ring containing:
    Compositions under subclass 212 which contain an additional hetero ring.


CLS 504/214
TXT The hetero ring consists of two nitrogens and four carbons:
    Compositions under subclass 211 wherein the hetero ring consists of two
    ring nitrogens and four ring carbons.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/215
TXT Additional hetero ring containing:
    Compositions under subclass 214 which contain an additional hetero ring.


CLS 504/216
TXT The hetero ring is five-membered including nitrogen:
    Compositions under subclass 210 wherein the hetero ring is five-membered
    and has nitrogen as a ring member.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/217
TXT Plural ring nitrogens and a single ring chalcogen in the hetero ring (e.g.,
    1, 3, 4-thiadiazoles, etc.):Compositions under subclass 216 wherein the
    five-membered hetero ring has at least two ring nitrogens and only one ring
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) as ring members.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/218
TXT Hetero ring contains at least seven members including nitrogen:Compositions
    under subclass 209 which contain a hetero ring having at least seven ring
    members of which one or more is nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/219
TXT Additional hetero ring containing:
    Compositions under subclass 218 which contain an additional hetero ring.


CLS 504/220
TXT Having -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen, bonded directly to ring nitrogen of
    the hetero ring:Compositions under subclass 218 in which -C(=X)-, wherein X
    is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), is bonded
    directly to a ring nitrogen.


CLS 504/221
TXT Hetero ring is six-membered including nitrogen and sulfur:
    Compositions under subclass 209 wherein the hetero ring is six-membered and
    has nitrogen, sulfur, and carbon as ring members.


CLS 504/222
TXT Plural ring nitrogens in the hetero ring (e.g., thiadiazines,
    etc.):Compositions under subclass 221 wherein the hetero ring contains at
    least two ring nitrogens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/223
TXT Hetero ring is six-membered including nitrogen and oxygen:
    Compositions under subclass 209 wherein the hetero ring is six-membered and
    has nitrogen, oxygen, and carbon as ring members.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 504/224
TXT 1, 4-oxazines (including hydrogenated):
    Compositions under subclass 223 wherein the six-membered hetero ring has
    oxygen in the 1-position, nitrogen in the 4-position, and carbons in the
    remaining four positions.


CLS 504/225
TXT Additional hetero ring containing:
    Compositions under subclass 224 which contain an additional hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for herein is:


CLS 504/226
TXT Nitrogen or -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalogen, bonded directly to ring
    nitrogen of the oxazine ring:Compositions under subclass 224 in which
    nitrogen or -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium), is bonded directly to ring nitrogen of the oxazine
    ring.


CLS 504/227
TXT Hetero ring is six-membered consisting of three nitrogens and three
    carbons:Compositions under subclass 209 which contain a hetero ring
    consisting of three ring nitrogens and three ring carbons.


CLS 504/228
TXT Polycyclo ring system having the six-membered hetero ring as one of the
    cyclos:Compositions under subclass 227 wherein the hetero ring is one of
    the cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/229
TXT Asymmetrical (e.g., 1, 2, 4-triazines, etc.):
    Compositions under subclass 227 in which two of the ring nitrogens of the
    six-membered hetero ring are bonded directly to each other.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/230
TXT Additional hetero ring containing:
    Compositions under subclass 227 which contain an additional hetero ring.


CLS 504/231
TXT Nitrogen bonded directly to ring carbon of the six-membered hetero
    ring:Compositions under subclass 227 wherein nitrogen is bonded directly to
    a ring carbon of the six-membered hetero ring.


CLS 504/232
TXT Plural nitrogens bonded directly to ring carbons of the six-membered hetero
    ring:Compositions under subclass 231 wherein at least two nitrogens are
    bonded directly to ring carbons of the six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/233
TXT Chalcogen, -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen, or cycloalkyl bonded directly
    to one of the nitrogens:Compositions under subclass 232 in which chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), -C(=X)-, wherein X is
    chalcogen, or cycloalkyl is bonded directly to one of the nitrogens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/234
TXT The nitrogens are further bonded to hydrogen or hydrocarbyl
    only:Compositions under subclass 232 wherein only hydrogen or hydrocarbon
    radicals can satisfy the remaining valences of the nitrogens.


CLS 504/235
TXT Hetero ring is six-membered consisting of two nitrogens and four carbons
    (e.g., 1, 4-diazines, etc.):Compositions under subclass 209 which contain a
    six-membered hetero ring consisting of two ring nitrogens and four ring
    carbons.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/236
TXT 1, 2-diazines (including hydrogenated):
    Compositions under subclass 235 wherein the six-membered hetero ring has
    nitrogens in the 1- and 2-positions, and carbons in the remaining four
    positions.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/237
TXT Nitrogen attached directly to the diazine ring by nonionic
    bonding:Compositions under subclass 236 wherein the diazine ring is
    attached directly to nitrogen by nonionic bonding.


CLS 504/238
TXT Chalcogen bonded directly to ring carbon of the diazine ring:Compositions
    under subclass 236 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium) is bonded directly to a ring carbon of the diazine ring.


CLS 504/239
TXT 1, 3-diazines (including hydrogenated):
    Compositions under subclass 235 wherein the six-membered hetero ring has
    nitrogens in the 1- and 3-positions, and carbons in the remaining four
    positions.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/240
TXT Polycyclo ring system having the diazine ring as one of the
    cyclos:Compositions under subclass 239 wherein the diazine ring is one of
    the cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 504/241
TXT Three or more ring hetero atoms in the polycyclo ring system:Compositions
    under subclass 240 wherein the polycyclo ring system includes at least one
    ring hetero atom in addition to the two ring nitrogens of the diazine ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/242
TXT Chalcogen bonded directly to ring carbon of the diazine ring:Compositions
    under subclass 239 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium) is bonded directly to a ring carbon of the diazine ring.


CLS 504/243
TXT Plural chalcogens bonded directly to ring carbons of the diazine ring
    (e.g., uracils, etc.):Compositions under subclass 242 wherein at least two
    chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) are bonded
    directly to ring carbons of the diazine ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/244
TXT Hetero ring is six-membered consisting of one nitrogen and five
    carbons:Compositions under subclass 209 which contain a six-membered hetero
    ring consisting of one ring nitrogen and five ring carbons.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/245
TXT Polycyclo ring system having the six-membered hetero ring as one of the
    cyclos:Compositions under subclass 244 wherein the six-membered hetero ring
    is one of the cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 504/246
TXT Bicyclo ring system having the six-membered hetero ring as one of the
    cyclos:Compositions under subclass 245 in which the polycyclo ring system
    consists of exactly two rings.


CLS 504/247
TXT Quinolines or isoquinolines (including hydrogenated):
    Compositions under subclass 246 wherein the bicyclo ring system is
    characterized by having a six-membered carbocyclic ring orthofused to two
    carbons of the six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/248
TXT Piperidines:
    Compositions under subclass 244 in which the six-membered hetero ring,
    consisting of one ring nitrogen and five ring carbons, contains no double
    bonds between ring members, i.e., the piperidine ring.


CLS 504/249
TXT Having -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen, bonded directly to ring nitrogen of
    the piperidine ring:Compositions under subclass 248 in which -C(=X)-,
    wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), is
    bonded directly to the ring nitrogen of the piperidine ring.


CLS 504/250
TXT Plural pyridine or partially hydrogenated pyridine rings:
    Compositions under subclass 244 which contain at least two of the
    six-membered hetero rings, each consisting of one nitrogen and five carbons
    and having at least one double bond between ring members, i.e., pyridine or
    partially hydrogenated pyridine rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/251
TXT Additional hetero ring containing:
    Compositions under subclass 244 which contain an additional hetero ring.


CLS 504/252
TXT The additional hetero ring is five-membered including nitrogen:Compositions
    under subclass 251 wherein the hetero ring is five-membered and has
    nitrogen as a ring member.


CLS 504/253
TXT Plural ring nitrogens in the additional hetero ring:
    Compositions under subclass 252 wherein the additional hetero ring contains
    at least two ring nitrogens.


CLS 504/254
TXT Chalcogen bonded directly to ring carbon of the six-membered hetero
    ring:Compositions under subclass 244 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to a ring carbon of the
    six-membered hetero ring.


CLS 504/255
TXT Nitrogen, other than as nitro or nitroso, or -C(=X)-, wherein X is
    chalcogen, bonded directly to ring carbon of the six-membered hetero
    ring:Compositions under subclass 254 in which nitrogen, other than as nitro
    or nitroso (-NO2 or -NO), or -C(=X)- wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to a ring carbon of the
    six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  A nitro or nitroso group may be bonded directly to a ring
    carbon of the six-membered hetero ring, provided that a nitrogen which is
    not part of a nitro or nitroso group is also so attached.


CLS 504/256
TXT Benzene ring bonded directly to the chalcogen:
    Compositions under subclass 254 wherein the chalcogen is bonded directly to
    a benzene ring.


CLS 504/257
TXT Containing -C(=X)NH-, wherein X is chalcogen and substitution may be made
    for hydrogen only:Compositions under subclass 256 which contain a -C(=X)NH-
    group, wherein X is chalcogen and substitution may be made for hydrogen
    only.


CLS 504/258
TXT Containing -C(=X)X-, wherein the X's are the same or diverse
    chalcogens:Compositions under subclass 256 which contain a -C(=X)X- group,
    wherein the X's are the same or diverse chalcogens.


CLS 504/259
TXT Nitrogen or sulfur attached directly or indirectly to the -C(=X)X- group by
    acyclic nonionic bonding:Compositions under subclass 258 wherein the
    -C(=X)X- group is attached directly or indirectly to nitrogen or sulfur by
    acyclic nonionic bonding.


CLS 504/260
TXT Nitrogen, other than as nitro or nitroso, or -C(=X)-, wherein X is
    chalcogen, bonded directly to ring carbon of the six-membered hetero
    ring:Compositions under subclass 244 in which nitrogen, other than as nitro
    or nitroso (-NO2 or -NO),  or  -C(=X)-,  wherein X is chalcogen (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to a ring carbon
    of the six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  A nitro or nitroso group may be bonded directly to a ring
    carbon of the six-membered hetero ring, provided that a nitrogen which is
    not part of a nitro or nitroso group is also so attached.


CLS 504/261
TXT Hetero ring is five-membered having two or more ring hetero atoms of which
    at least one is nitrogen:Compositions under subclass 209 wherein the hetero
    ring is a five-membered ring having two or more ring hetero atoms of which
    at least one is nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 504/262
TXT 1, 2, 4-thiadiazoles (including hydrogenated):
    Compositions under subclass 261 in which the five-membered hetero ring has
    sulfur in the 1-position, nitrogens in the 2- and 4-positions and carbons
    in the remaining two positions.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for compounds containing the
    following ring which may have double bonds between its members:


CLS 504/263
TXT 1, 3, 4-thiadiazoles (including hydrogenated):
    Compositions under subclass 261 in which the five-membered hetero ring has
    sulfur in the 1-position, nitrogens in the 3- and 4-positions, and carbons
    in the remaining two positions.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for compounds containing the
    following ring which may have double bonds between its members:


CLS 504/264
TXT Diazole ring (including hydrogenated) attached directly to the thiadiazole
    ring by nonionic bonding:Compositions under subclass 263 wherein a
    five-membered hetero ring consisting of two nitrogens and three carbons is
    attached directly to the thiadiazole ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/265
TXT Oxadiazoles (including hydrogenated):
    Compositions under subclass 261 in which the five-membered hetero ring
    consists of two ring nitrogens, one ring oxygen, and two ring carbons.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/266
TXT 1, 3-thiazoles (including hydrogenated):
    Compositions under subclass 261 in which the five-membered hetero ring has
    sulfur in the 1-position, nitrogen in the 3-position, and carbons in the
    remaining three positions.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for compounds containing the
    following ring which may have a double bond between its members:


CLS 504/267
TXT Benzothiazoles (including hydrogenated):
    Compositions under subclass 266 wherein the compounds have the following
    ring system in which the bonds between the ring members may be single or
    double bonds:


CLS 504/268
TXT Nitrogen attached directly to the thiazole ring by nonionic
    bonding:Compositions under subclass 267 wherein nitrogen is attached
    directly to the thiazole ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 504/269
TXT 1, 2-thiazoles (including hydrogenated):
    Compositions under subclass 261 in which the five-membered hetero ring has
    sulfur in the 1-position, nitrogen in the 2-position, and carbons in the
    remaining three positions.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for compounds containing the
    following ring which may have double bonds between its members:


CLS 504/270
TXT 1,3-oxazoles (including hydrogenated):
    Compositions under subclass 261 in which the five-membered hetero ring has
    oxygen in the 1-position, nitrogen in the 3-position, and carbons in the
    remaining three positions.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for compounds containing the
    following ring which may have double bonds between its members:


CLS 504/271
TXT 1, 2-oxazoles (including hydrogenated):
    Compositions under subclass 261 in which the five-membered hetero ring has
    oxygen in the 1-position, nitrogen in the 2-position, and carbons in the
    remaining three positions.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for compounds containing the
    following ring which may have double bonds between its members:


CLS 504/272
TXT 1, 2, 4-triazoles (including hydrogenated):
    Compositions under subclass 261 in which the five-membered hetero ring has
    nitrogens in the 1-, 2-, and 4-positions and carbons in the remaining two
    positions.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for compounds containing the following


            ring which may have double bonds between its members:


CLS 504/273
TXT Chalcogen, nitrogen, or -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen, bonded directly to
    ring carbon of the triazole ring:Compositions under subclass 272 in which
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), nitrogen, or
    -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen, is bonded directly to a ring carbon of the
    triazole ring.


CLS 504/274
TXT Nitrogen or acyclic carbon chain containing carbon to carbon unsaturation
    attached directly or indirectly to the triazole ring by acyclic nonionic
    bonding:Compositions under subclass 272 wherein the triazole ring is
    attached directly or indirectly to nitrogen or an acyclic carbon chain
    containing carbon to carbon unsaturation by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/275
TXT 1, 3-diazoles (including hydrogenated):
    Compositions under subclass 261 in which the five-membered hetero ring has
    nitrogens in the 1- and 3-positions and carbons in the remaining three
    positions.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for compounds containing the
    following ring which may have double bonds between its members:


CLS 504/276
TXT Polycyclo ring system having the diazole ring as one of the cyclos (e.g.,
    benzimidazoles, etc.):Compositions under subclass 275 wherein the diazole
    ring is one of the cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/277
TXT Chalcogen or nitrogen bonded directly to ring carbon of the diazole
    ring:Compositions under subclass 275 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) or nitrogen is bonded directly to a ring
    carbon of the diazole ring.


CLS 504/278
TXT Plural chalcogens bonded directly to ring carbons of the diazole
    ring:Compositions under subclass 277 wherein at least two chalcogens (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) are bonded directly to ring carbons
    of the diazole ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/279
TXT Having -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen, bonded directly to ring carbon of
    the diazole ring:Compositions under subclass 275 in which -C(=X)-, wherein
    X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), is bonded
    directly to a ring carbon of the diazole ring.


CLS 504/280
TXT 1, 2-diazoles (including hydrogenated):
    Compositions under subclass 261 in which the five-membered hetero ring has
    nitrogens in the 1-  and 2-positions and carbons in the remaining three
    positions.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for compounds containing the
    following ring which may have double bonds between its members:


CLS 504/281
TXT Polycyclo ring system having the diazole ring as one of the
    cyclos:Compositions under subclass 280 wherein the diazole ring is one of
    the cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 504/282
TXT Chalcogen or nitrogen bonded directly to ring carbon of the diazole
    ring:Compositions under subclass 280 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) or nitrogen is bonded directly to a ring
    carbon of the diazole ring.


CLS 504/283
TXT Hetero ring is five-membered consisting of one nitrogen and four
    carbons:Compositions under subclass 209 which contain a five-membered
    hetero ring consisting of one ring nitrogen and four ring carbons.


CLS 504/284
TXT Polycyclo ring system having the five-membered hetero ring as one of the
    cyclos (e.g., indoles, etc.):Compositions under subclass 283 wherein the
    hetero ring is one of the cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/285
TXT The ring nitrogen is bonded directly to two ring carbons of the same cyclo
    which carbons are members of one cyclo only (e.g., isoindoles, hydrogenated
    isoindoles, etc.):Compositions under subclass 284 wherein the ring nitrogen
    of the five-membered hetero ring is bonded directly to two ring carbons of
    the same cyclo, which carbons are members of one cyclo only.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/286
TXT Benzene ring bonded directly to the ring nitrogen of the five-membered
    hetero ring:Compositions under subclass 285 wherein the ring nitrogen of
    the five-membered hetero ring is bonded directly to a benzene ring.


CLS 504/287
TXT Having -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen, bonded directly to the
    five-membered hetero ring:Compositions under subclass 283 in which -C(=X)-,
    wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), is
    bonded directly to the five-membered hetero ring.


CLS 504/288
TXT Sulfur containing hetero ring:
    Compositions under subclass 209 which contain a hetero ring having sulfur
    as a ring member.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/289
TXT The hetero ring is five-membered:
    Compositions under subclass 288 wherein the hetero ring is five-membered.


CLS 504/290
TXT Plural ring hetero atoms in the hetero ring:
    Compositions under subclass 289 wherein the hetero ring contains at least
    one ring hetero atom in addition to the ring sulfur.


CLS 504/291
TXT Oxygen containing hetero ring:
    Compositions under subclass 209 which contain a hetero ring having oxygen
    as a ring member.


CLS 504/292
TXT The hetero ring is six-membered:
    Compositions under subclass 291 wherein the hetero ring is six-membered.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for active ingredients which contain six-membered hetero oxygen
    compounds derived from micro-organisms or fermentation processes.


CLS 504/293
TXT Plural ring oxygens in the hetero ring:
    Compositions under subclass 292 in which the hetero ring contains at least
    two ring oxygens.


CLS 504/294
TXT The hetero ring is five-membered:
    Compositions under subclass 291 wherein the hetero ring is five-membered.


CLS 504/295
TXT Plural ring oxygens in the hetero ring:
    Compositions under subclass 294 in which the hetero ring contains at least
    two ring oxygens.


CLS 504/296
TXT Polycyclo ring system having the hetero ring as one of the cyclos (e.g.,
    methylenedioxyphenyls, etc.):Compositions under subclass 295 wherein the
    hetero ring is one of the cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/297
TXT Polycyclo ring system having the hetero ring as one of cyclos:Compositions
    under subclass 294 wherein the hetero ring is one of the cyclos of a
    polycyclo ring system.


CLS 504/298
TXT Bicyclo ring system having the hetero ring as one of the
    cyclos:Compositions under subclass 297 in which the polycyclo ring system
    consists of exactly two rings.


CLS 504/299
TXT Chalcogen or -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen, bonded directly to the hetero
    ring:Compositions under subclass 294 in which chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), or -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen, is
    bonded directly to the hetero ring.


CLS 504/300
TXT Containing -NH-C(=X)X-, wherein the X's are the same or diverse chalcogens
    and substitution may be made for hydrogen only (e.g., carbamates,
    thiocarbamates, etc.):Compositions under subclass 189 in which the organic
    active compound contains the NH-C(=X)X- group, wherein the X's are the same
    or diverse chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) and
    substitution may be made for hydrogen only.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/301
TXT Plural -NH-C(=X)X- groups:
    Compositions under subclass 300 wherein the organic active compound
    contains more than one -NH-C(=X)X- group.


CLS 504/302
TXT Nitrogen, cyano, chalcogen, or additional
    -C(=X)- bonded directly to the nitrogen:
    Compositions under subclass 300 wherein the nitrogen of the -NH-C(=X)X-
    group is bonded directly to nitrogen, cyano, chalcogen, or an additional
    -C(=X)- group.


CLS 504/303
TXT Nitrogen or additional chalcogen attached indirectly to the nitrogen by
    acyclic nonionic bonding:Compositions under subclass 300 wherein the
    nitrogen of the -NH-C(=X)X- group is attached indirectly to nitrogen or an
    additional chalcogen by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/304
TXT Benzene ring bonded directly to the nitrogen:
    Compositions under subclass 300 wherein the nitrogen of the -NH-C(=X)X-
    group is bonded directly to a benzene ring.


CLS 504/305
TXT Benzene ring attached indirectly to the nitrogen by nonionic
    bonding:Compositions under subclass 300 wherein the nitrogen of the
    -NH-C(=X)X- group is attached indirectly to a benzene ring by nonionic
    bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/306
TXT Containing -X-C(=X)X-, wherein the X's are the same or diverse chalcogens
    (e.g., carbonates, thiocarbonates, xanthates, etc.):Compositions under
    subclass 189 in which the organic active compound contains the-X-C(=X)X-
    group, wherein the X's are the same or diverse chalcogens (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/307
TXT Containing -C(=X)X-, wherein the X's are the same or diverse chalcogens,
    and at least one X is other than oxygen (e.g., thiocarboxylates,
    etc.):Compositions under subclass 189 in which the organic active compound
    contains the-C(=X)X- group, wherein the X's are the same or diverse
    chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) and at least one
    X is other than oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/308
TXT Carbon bonded directly to -NCX or -XCN, wherein X is chalcogen (e.g.,
    cyanate, thiocyanate, or isothiocyanate, etc.):Compositions under subclass
    189 in which the organic active compound contains a -NCX or -XCN group,
    wherein the X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium),
    bonded directly to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/309
TXT Cyano or isocyano bonded directly to carbon:
    Compositions under subclass 189 wherein the organic active compound
    contains carbon bonded directly to a cyano (-CN) or isocyano (-NC) group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/310
TXT Benzene ring bonded directly to the cyano or isocyano group:Compositions
    under subclass 309 wherein the cyano or isocyano group is bonded directly
    to a benzene ring.


CLS 504/311
TXT Two benzene rings bonded directly to the same oxygen (e.g., phenoxyphenyl
    compounds, etc.):Compositions under subclass 310 wherein a single oxygen is
    bonded directly to two benzene rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/312
TXT Nitrogen, other than as nitro or nitroso, attached indirectly to the cyano
    or isocyano group by nonionic bonding:Compositions under subclass 309
    wherein the cyano or isocyano group is attached indirectly to nitrogen,
    other than as nitro or nitroso (-NO2 or -NO), by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  A nitro or nitroso group may be attached indirectly to the
    cyano or isocyano group by nonionic bonding, provided that a nitrogen which
    is not part of a nitro or nitroso group is also attached.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/313
TXT Carboxylic acid ester (i.e., Z-C(=O) O-  wherein Z is hydrogen or an
    organic radical bonded to the -C(=O)- group by a carbon and the single
    bonded oxygen of the-C(=O)O- group is bonded directly to carbon, which
    carbon may be single bonded to any atom but may be multiple bonded only to
    carbon):Compositions under subclass 189 in which the organic active
    compound is of the formula Z-C(=O) O- wherein Z is hydrogen or an organic
    radical bonded to the -C(=O) - group by a carbon and the single bonded
    oxygen of the -C (=O) O- group is bonded directly to carbon which carbon
    may be single bonded to any atom but may be multiple bonded only to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/314
TXT Z contains a benzene ring:
    Compositions under subclass 313 wherein Z contains a benzene ring.


CLS 504/315
TXT Z contains sulfur or nitrogen, other than as nitro or nitroso, attached
    directly or indirectly to the benzene ring by nonionic bonding:Compositions
    under subclass 314 wherein Z contains a benzene ring attached directly or
    indirectly to sulfur or nitrogen, other than as  nitro or nitroso (-NO2 or
    -NO), by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  A nitro or nitroso group may be attached directly or
    indirectly to the benzene ring by nonionic bonding, provided that a
    nitrogen which is not part of a nitro or nitroso group is also so attached.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/316
TXT Z contains two benzene rings bonded directly to the same chalcogen (e.g.,
    phenoxybenzoates, etc.):Compositions under subclass 314 wherein Z contains
    two benzene rings bonded directly to the same chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/317
TXT Z contains oxygen bonded directly to the benzene ring and indirectly bonded
    to the -C(=O) O- group through an acyclic carbon or acyclic carbon chain
    (e.g., phenoxyacetates, etc.):Compositions under subclass 314 wherein Z
    contains oxygen bonded directly to the benzene ring and indirectly bonded
    to the-C(=O) O- group through an acyclic carbon or acyclic carbon chain.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 504/318
TXT The benzene ring is bonded directly to the carbon of the -C(=O) O- group
    (e.g., benzoates, etc.):Compositions under subclass 314 wherein the carbon
    of the -C(=O) O- group is bonded directly to the benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/319
TXT Z contains nitrogen, sulfur, or halogen attached indirectly to the -C(=O)
    O- group by nonionic bonding:Compositions under subclass 313 wherein Z
    contains nitrogen, sulfur, or halogen attached indirectly to the -C(=O) O-
    group by nonionic bonding.


CLS 504/320
TXT Carboxylic acid, carboxylic acid salt, carboxylic acid anhydride, or
    carboxylic acid halide:Composition under subclass 189 in which the organic
    active compound contains a -C(=O)-O-C(=O) -, -C (=O) - halo, wherein halo
    is halogen, or a -C (=O)-O- X group, wherein X is hydrogen or a cation.


CLS 504/321
TXT Benzene ring containing:
    Compositions under subclass 320 which contain a benzene ring.


CLS 504/322
TXT Nitrogen, other than as nitro or nitroso, attached directly or indirectly
    to the benzene ring by nonionic bonding:Compositions under subclass 321
    wherein the benzene ring is attached directly or indirectly to nitrogen,
    other than as nitro or nitroso (-NO2 or -NO), by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  A nitro or nitroso group may be attached directly or
    indirectly to the benzene ring by nonionic bonding, provided that a
    nitrogen which is not part of a nitro or nitroso group is also so attached.


CLS 504/323
TXT Oxygen is bonded directly to the benzene ring and is part of an acyclic
    chain between the benzene ring and a -C (=O) O- group (e.g., 2,
    4-dichlorophenoxyacetic acids, etc.):Compositions under subclass 321
    wherein oxygen is bonded directly to the benzene ring and is part of an
    acyclic chain between the benzene ring and a -C (=O) O- group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/324
TXT The benzene ring is bonded directly to the carbon of a -C (=O)O- group
    (e.g., benzoic acids, etc.):Compositions under subclass 321 wherein the
    carbon of a -C (=O) O- group is bonded directly to the benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/325
TXT Containing halogen bonded directly to carbon (e.g., trichloroacetates,
    etc.):Compositions under subclass 320 which contain carbon bonded directly
    to halogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/326
TXT Containing nitrogen, other than as nitro or nitroso, attached directly or
    indirectly to carbon by nonionic bonding:Compositions under subclass 189
    wherein the organic active compound contains carbon attached directly or
    indirectly to nitrogen, other than as  nitro or nitroso (-NO2 or -NO), by
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  A nitro or nitroso group may be attached directly or
    indirectly to carbon by nonionic bonding, provided that a nitrogen which is
    not part of a nitro or nitroso group is also so attached.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/327
TXT Ureas or thioureas (i.e., HNH-C (=X)-HNH, wherein X is oxygen or sulfur and
    substitution may be made for hydrogen only):Compositions under subclass 326
    which contain HNH-C(=X)-HNH, wherein X is oxygen or sulfur and substitution
    may be made for hydrogen only.

    (1)     Note.  Isoureas, isothioureas, pseudoureas, and pseudothioureas are
    not provided for in this subclass.


CLS 504/328
TXT Nitrogen or -C(=X)- attached directly to urea or thiourea nitrogen by
    nonionic bonding (e.g., biurets, semicarbazones, etc.):Compositions under
    subclass 327 wherein a urea or thiourea nitrogen is attached directly to
    nitrogen or -C(=X)- by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 504/329
TXT Sulfur attached directly or indirectly to urea or thiourea nitrogen by
    nonionic bonding:Compositions under subclass 327 wherein a urea or thiourea
    nitrogen is attached directly or indirectly to sulfur by nonionic bonding.


CLS 504/330
TXT Benzene ring attached directly or indirectly to urea or thiourea nitrogen
    by nonionic bonding:Compositions under subclass 327 wherein a urea or
    thiourea nitrogen is attached directly or indirectly to a benzene ring by
    nonionic bonding.


CLS 504/331
TXT Nitrogen, other than as nitro or nitroso, or  -C(=X) -, attached indirectly
    to the urea or thiourea nitrogen by nonionic bonding, or alicyclic ring
    attached directly or indirectly to urea or thiourea nitrogen by nonionic
    bonding:Compositions under subclass 330 wherein a urea or thiourea nitrogen
    is attached directly or indirectly to an alicyclic ring by nonionic
    bonding, or is attached indirectly to nitrogen, other than as nitro or
    nitroso (-NO2 or -NO), or -C(=X) - by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 504/332
TXT Plural benzene rings containing:
    Compositions under subclass 330 which contain two or more benzene rings.


CLS 504/333
TXT Containing -NH- (O=) S(=O)-, wherein substitution may be made for hydrogen
    only (e.g., sulfonamides, sulfamides, etc.):Compositions under subclass 326
    which contain the -NH-(O=) S(=O)- group, wherein substitution may be made
    for hydrogen only.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 504/334
TXT Carboxamides or thiocarboxamides (i.e.,  R-(C=X) NH2,  wherein X is oxygen
    or sulfur, R is carbon or hydrogen, and substitution may be made for
    hydrogen only):Compositions    under    326    which    containR- (C=X)
    NH2, wherein X is oxygen or sulfur, R is carbon or hydrogen, and
    substitution may be may for hydrogen only.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/335
TXT Plural R-C (=X) NH2 groups containing:
    Compositions under subclass 334 which contain two or more R-C(=X)NH2 groups.


CLS 504/336
TXT R contains benzene ring:
    Compositions under subclass 334 wherein R contains a benzene ring.


CLS 504/337
TXT The benzene ring is bonded directly to the carbon of the - (C=X)NH2 group
    (e.g., benzamides, etc.):Compositions under subclass 336 wherein the carbon
    of the - (C=X) NH2 group is bonded directly to the benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/338
TXT Chalcogen is bonded directly to the benzene ring and is part of an acyclic
    chain between the benzene ring and the -C (=X)NH2 group, (e.g.,
    phenoxyalkylamides, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 336 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to the benzene ring and is part
    of an acyclic chain between the benzene ring and the -C (=X) NH2 group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/339
TXT R is acyclic:

    Compositions under subclass 334 wherein R does not contain a ring.


CLS 504/340
TXT Halogen bonded directly to carbon in R (e.g., chloroacetamides, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 339 wherein a carbon atom in R is bonded
    directly to halogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/341
TXT Benzene ring bonded directly to the carboxamide or thiocarboxamide nitrogen:

    Compositions under subclass 340 wherein the carboxamide or thiocarboxamide
    nitrogen is bonded directly to a benzene ring.


CLS 504/342
TXT The carboxamide or thiocarboxamide nitrogen and a chalcogen are directly
    attached to the same acyclic carbon or acyclic carbon chain:

    Compositions under subclass 341 wherein an acyclic carbon or an acyclic
    carbon chain are attached to both a chalcogen and to the carboxamide or
    thiocarboxamide nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/343
TXT Nitrogen double bonded directly to carbon:

    Compositions under subclass 326 wherein carbon is double bonded directly to
    the nitrogen.


CLS 504/344
TXT Oximes (i.e, HCH=N-OH, wherein substitution may be made for hydrogen only):

    Compositions under subclass 343 which contain the -CH=N-O- group, wherein
    substitution may be made for hydrogen only:

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 504/345
TXT Quaternary ammonium containing:
    Compositions under subclass 326 which contain a pentavalent nitrogen bonded
    by four valences to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for herein is:


CLS 504/346
TXT Containing -N=N-, -NH-NH-, or -NH-X-, wherein X is chalcogen and
    substitution may be made for hydrogen only:Compositions under subclass 326
    which contain the -N=N-, -NH-NH-, or NH-X- group, wherein X is chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) and substitution may be made
    for hydrogen only.


CLS 504/347
TXT The nitrogen and a nitro group bonded directly to the same benzene ring
    (e.g., nitroanilines, etc.):Compositions under subclass 326 wherein a
    single benzene ring is bonded directly to both the nitrogen and a nitro
    group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/348
TXT Ketones or aldehydes:
    Compositions under subclass 189 wherein the organic active compound
    contains a -(C=O)- group bonded directly to two carbon atoms, to a carbon
    and a hydrogen atom or  to two hydrogen atoms.


CLS 504/349
TXT Sulfur, selenium, or tellurium compound (e.g., thioalcohols, mercaptans,
    etc.):Compositions under subclass 189 wherein the organic active compound
    contains sulfur, selenium, or tellurium.


CLS 504/350
TXT Chalcogen bonded directly to sulfur (e.g., sulfones, etc.):
    Compositions under subclass 349 which contain sulfur bonded directly to
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/351
TXT Ethers:
    Compositions under subclass 189 wherein the organic active compound
    contains an oxygen bonded directly to two carbon atoms.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 504/352
TXT Plural benzene rings bonded directly to the same oxygen:
    Compositions under subclass 351 wherein the same oxygen is bonded directly
    to two benzene rings.


CLS 504/353
TXT Hydroxy bonded directly to carbon (H of -OH may be replaced by a
    substituted or unsubstituted ammonium ion or a Group IA or IIA light
    metal):Compositions under subclass 189 in which the organic active compound
    contains carbon bonded directly to a hydroxy group, wherein the hydrogen of
    the -OH group may be replaced by a substituted or unsubstituted ammonium
    ion or a Group IA or IIA light metal.


CLS 504/354
TXT Benzene ring containing:
    Compositions under subclass 353 which contain a benzene ring.


CLS 504/355
TXT Nitro containing (e.g., nitrobenzenes, etc.):
    Compositions under subclass 189 wherein the organic active compound
    contains a -NO2 group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 504/356
TXT Halogenated hydrocarbons:
    Compositions under subclass 189 wherein the organic active compound
    contains carbon bonded to halogen.


CLS 504/357
TXT Hydrocarbons:
    Compositions under subclass 189 wherein the organic active compound
    consists of carbon and hydrogen only.


CLS 505/
TTL SUPERCONDUCTOR TECHNOLOGY: APPARATUS, MATERIAL, PROCESS

CLS 505/
TXT

    I.      Statement of Class Subject Matter

    II.     Search Notes

    A.      Subclass 1 and Art Collections 800+.

    B.      Classes providing search for superconductors functioning below 30 K.

    III.    Glossary

     *****************

    I.      STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    This is the generic class for subject matter involving (a) superconductor
    technology above 30 K and (b) Art collections involving superconductor
    technology.  Apparatus, devices, materials, and processes involving such
    technology are included herein.

    (1)     Note.  Precursors of high temperature (Tc  30 K) superconducting
    material under the class definition or process of producing the same are
    placed in this class if proportionally constituted to provide the desired
    superconducting product upon decomposition, heating, deoxygenation, or
    oxidation.

    II.     SEARCH CLASS:

    A.      The following class(es)/subclass(es) specifically provide for
    subject matter including superconductors functioning at temperatures of 30
    K and below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 599 for process of mechanical manufacture
    of a superconductor.

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, subclass 15.4 for
    cryogenic or superconductor apparatus with cooling or fluid feeding,
    subclass 15.5 for cable with cooling or fluid feeding, subclass 125.1 for
    superconductor conduit, cable or conductor structure.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 192.24 for forming
    a superconductor by coating, forming, or etching using  a sputtering
    operation.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclasses 31 through 36 for Josephson tunneling type superconductive
    devices (subclass 33 for high temperature type devices) and subclasses 661
    through 663 for devices with superconductive contacts or leads.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, subclass 360 for
    superconductive transformer or inductor.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 248 for
    superconductive magnetic measuring device (i.e., magnetometer).

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, subclasses 186 for a miscellaneous superconducting stable state
    circuit, subclasses 366+ for miscellaneous superconducting gating circuits,
    and subclasses 527+ for miscellaneous superconducting circuits.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 107 for superconductive solid state active
    element oscillator.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 99 for miscellaneous
    superconductive wave transmission line or network.

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 216 for superconductive magnet or electromagnet.

    336,    Inductor Devices, Dig. 1 for superconductive inductor.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 32 for superconductive resistance
    device responsive to magnetic field.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 19 for
    superconductor protective circuit and subclass 141 for control circuit for
    electromagnetic device(s) including superconductivity.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 160 for
    superconductive static information storage device, subclass 161 for
    superconductive thin film-type static information storage device, and
    subclass 162 for superconductive Josephson junction type static information
    storage device.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 176 for temperature
    measurement by electric or magnetic heat sensor including sensor having
    hysteresis or cryogenic property (e.g., ferromagnetism, superconductivity,
    etc.).

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 93 for a superconductive element with
    subject matter of the class.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, art collection 901 for
    superconductive alloy or metallic composition.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 62+ for process of coating to produce
    an electrical superconductor.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, art collection 930 for
    superconductive stock material.

    III.    GLOSSARY

    JOSEPHSON EFFECT
    the passage of paired electrons (Cooper pairs) through a weak connection
    (Josephson junction) between superconductors as in the tunnel passage of
    paired electrons through a thin dielectric layer separating two
    superconductors.

    JOSEPHSON  JUNCTION
    a weak connection between superconductors through which the Josephson
    effect is realized.

    SQUID
    Superconducting QUantum Interference Device

    SUPERCONDUCTING
    the state of a superconductor in which it exhibits superconductivity.

    SUPERCONDUCTIVE
    of, or pertaining, to, a material or device which is capable of exhibiting
    superconductivity.

    SUPERCONDUCTIVITY
    a property of a material that is characterized by zero electrical
    resistivity and, ideally, zero permeability.


CLS 505/100
TXT HIGH TEMPERATURE (Tc GREATER THAN 30 K) SUPERCONDUCTOR MATERIAL (I.E.,
    ELEMENT, COMPOUND, OR COMPOSITION), PER SE:

    An element, compound, or composition under the class definition having a
    critical temperature Tc of greater than 30 K.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300+,   for processes of making high temperature superconducting materials.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, particularly subclasses 500+ for electrically
    conductive compositions.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, for inorganic compounds and
    processes of producing same.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, for metal oxide containing compositions
    having glass or refractory properties as defined by Class 501.


CLS 505/110
TXT Having Tc greater than or equal to 150 K:

    Material under subclass 100 having a critical temperature Tc greater than
    or equal to 150 K.


CLS 505/120
TXT Thallium (Tl) containing:

    Material under subclass 100 having a thallium (Tl) constituent.


CLS 505/121
TXT Bismuth (Bi) containing:

    Material under subclass 100 having a bismuth (Bi) constituent.


CLS 505/122
TXT Organic polymer containing:

    Material under subclass 100 having a macro-molecule composed of an
    indefinite number of organic monomer units.


CLS 505/123
TXT Halogen [i.e., fluorine (Fl), chlorine (Cl), bromine (Br), iodine (I), or
    astatine (At)] containing:

    Material under subclass 100 having a fluorine (Fl), chlorine (Cl), bromine
    (Br), iodine (I), or astatine (At) constituent.


CLS 505/124
TXT Free metal containing:

    Material under subclass 100 having a metal in the zero valent state as a
    constituent.


CLS 505/125
TXT Copper (Cu) and oxygen (O) containing:

    Material under subclass 100 having copper (Cu) and oxygen (O) as
    constituents.


CLS 505/126
TXT Containing three atoms of copper to between six and seven atoms of oxygen
    [e.g.,  YCu3O(7-d), LaCu3O(6+d), etc.]:

    Material under subclass 125 having a compound formula indicating three
    atoms of copper (Cu) to between six and seven atoms of oxygen (O) [i.e.,
    YCu3O(7-d), LaCu3O(6+d), wherein d < 1].


CLS 505/150
TXT HIGH TEMPERATURE (Tc GREATER THAN 30 K) DEVICES, SYSTEMS, APPARATUS,
    COMPONENTS, OR STOCK, OR PROCESSES OF USING:

    Articles having structure under the class definition, such as devices,
    systems, apparatus, components, or stock, containing an element or means
    capable of operating as a superconductor at a critical temperature Tc of
    greater than 30 K, or processes of using the same.

    (1)     Note. Subclass 150 will take processes of using high temperature
    superconducting materials, per se, even if there is no indication as to
    what apparatus or device is involved with the use. For example, a process
    of using high temperature superconducting material to separate gaseous
    mixtures based upon differences in magnetic properties of the gaseous
    components goes in this subclass since no comparable apparatus subclass is
    provided hereinunder.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100+,   for an article having no structure and identified only by
    composition.


CLS 505/160
TXT Measuring or testing system or device:

    System or device under subclass 150 that is utilized for measuring or
    testing of mechanical, electrical, chemical, or physical properties.


CLS 505/161
TXT Bolometer:

    System or device under subclass 160 that detects temperature or amount of
    radiation by measuring changes in material (e.g., electrical properties,
    etc.) caused by the amount of heat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing.


CLS 505/162
TXT Magnetic field sensing system or device (e.g., SQUID, etc.):

    System or device under subclass 160 that utilizes superconductor
    sensitivity of the quantum-mechanical phase to determine strengths of
    extremely small magnetic fields.

    (1)     Note. A Superconductor Quantum Interference Device, or SQUID, may
    consist of a loop of superconducting material containing two Josephson
    junctions in parallel. The input current I splits into the two halves of
    the loop. When the magnetic field-dependent and junction-dependent phase
    shifts along the paths of split currents I1 and I2 due to the presence of a
    magnetic field quantum mechanical interference, the rejoining output
    current results in a total current that is less than the algebraic sum of
    I1 and I2, enabling the measurement of the quantum flux.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    particularly subclasses 9+ for low temperature superconducting material
    containing active solid-state devices.

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, particularly subclass 248 for
    low temperature magnetometers.

    600,    Surgery, particularly subclasses 407+ for detecting nuclear or
    electromagnetic radiation, or subclass 410+ for magnetic resonance imaging.


CLS 505/163
TXT Significant cryogenic refrigeration system having superconductor component
    as part of the system or having a superconductor device or material to be
    cooled present therewith (e.g., Peltier effect device, etc.):

    Significant refrigeration system or device under subclass 150 containing a
    superconductor element (a) that operates as part of the system, such as for
    supplying electrical current or that participates directly in the cooling
    through a thermoelectric effect; or (b) that is present with the system as
    a device or material that is to be cooled; or process of using (a) or (b).

    (1)     Note. Merely reciting that a superconducting device or material is
    attached to a cryogenic refrigeration device or providing space or
    connection for flowing a cryogenic fluid will not be considered significant
    refrigeration structure unless structure is present that actually causes
    the refrigeration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, particularly subclasses 3.2+ for thermoelectric
    refrigeration device (e.g., Peltier effect device, etc.) and subclass 51.1
    for cryostatic device.

    174,    Electricity: Conductors and Insulators, particularly subclasses
    15.4+ and 125.1 for low temperature superconductors having cooling fluid
    feeding, circulating, or distributing means.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    particularly subclass 716 for active solid-state devices utilizing
    cryogenic coolant.


CLS 505/164
TXT Projectile or launching device or system:

    System or device under subclass 150 utilizing force of a magnetic field to
    propel an object with such force that the object continues moving through
    inertia when removed from the influence of the magnetic field or object,
    per se, capable of being propelled by such a device or system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    89,     Ordnance.

    104,    Railways, particularly subclasses 281+ for magnetically suspended
    car.

    114,    Ships, for propulsion and torpedo launching.

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors.


CLS 505/165
TXT System, device, or component utilizing suspension of superconducting
    particulate material in liquid (e.g., seal, pump, etc.):

    System, device, or component thereof under subclass 150 having means for
    utilizing a liquid suspension of particulate superconducting material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    277,    Seal for a Joint or Juncture, for a generic sealing means or
    process.

    417,    Pumps.


CLS 505/166
TXT Dynamoelectric machine (e.g., motor, generator, etc.), rotational  system
    or device (e.g., clutch, rotor, bearing, etc.), or components thereof:

    Apparatus under subclass 150 that converts mechanical energy to electrical
    energy or converts electrical energy to mechanical energy, system or device
    that rotates during load-bearing operation or mechanically communicates
    rotational force, or components thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems.

    322,    Electricity:  Single Generator Systems.

    323,    Electricity:  Power Supply or Regulation Systems, particularly
    subclass 360 for superconductor-type transformers or inductors.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, particularly subclass 216 for devices containing low
    temperature superconducting material.

    388,    Electricity:  Motor Control Systems.


CLS 505/170
TXT Information processing (e.g., logic circuits, computer, etc.), or
    information storage or retrieval system, device, or component (i.e., both
    dynamic and static):

    System, device, or component (i.e., both dynamic and static) under subclass
    150 that is utilized in information or data processing, storage, or
    retrieval.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, particularly
    subclass 404 for logic circuits, subclass 200.1 for nonlinear solid-state
    device circuit or system, subclass 201 for neuron circuit, or subclasses
    462 and 476 for low temperature superconductor devices.

    346,    Recorders.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, particularly subclasses
    160+ for systems with a superconducting component.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization.


CLS 505/171
TXT Recording by magnetism, magnetic record carriers, or recording head
    arrangements:

    Device or system under subclass 170 that records data utilizing magnetism,
    record carriers having thereon magnetic media utilized for storage or
    retrieval of information, or read or write head arrangements for
    magnetically recording.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, particularly subclass 74.5 for magnetographic head
    arrangements for recording magnetic field pattern in pictorial or graphic
    form on a magnetic medium for visible display, as by development, toning,
    or other techniques.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval.


CLS 505/180
TXT Device producing stimulated emission (e.g., laser, maser, etc.):

    Device under subclass 150 that utilizes a superconducting component to
    excite the oscillations of particles, or atoms or molecules between energy
    levels for generating coherent electromagnetic radiation in the
    ultraviolet, visible, infrared, or microwave region of the spectra.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204,    for device or system having circuitry for generation of
    oscillations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    330,    Amplifiers, particularly subclass 4 for maser-type amplifying
    device.

    331,    Oscillators, particularly subclasses 94.1+ for molecular or
    particle-type oscillators (i.e., maser).

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, for devices not having high temperature
    superconducting material present.


CLS 505/181
TXT Photoconductive, light transmissive, light emissive, or light responsive
    device or component:

    Device or component under subclass 150 (a) that is capable of being
    energized or modified by the application of light, (b) that permits light
    to pass through it, or (c) that emits light in response to passage of
    electrical current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, particularly subclasses 492.1+ for irradiation of
    objects or materials.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    containing low temperature superconducting material.

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, particularly subclass 99 for
    low temperature superconducting transmission lines and networks.


CLS 505/182
TXT Device or arrangement the operation of which is modified by changing
    optical properties (e.g., reflectivity, transmission, etc.) of
    superconductive material:

    Devices or arrangements under subclass 181 that respond to variation in the
    optical properties (e.g., reflectivity, transmission, etc.) of
    superconducting material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    332,    Modulators.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, for selective visual display
    communication systems.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements.


CLS 505/183
TXT Having optical waveguide:

    Device containing an element or element, per se, under subclass 181 that
    conveys light from one point to another through an optically transparent
    elongated structure (i.e., usually referred to as an optical fiber or
    waveguide) by modulated transmissions, interreflectance, or
    reflectorization.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements.

    385,    Optical Waveguides.


CLS 505/190
TXT Josephson junction, per se (e.g., point contact, bridge, barrier junction,
    SIS, SNS, SSS, etc.), or Josephson junction with only terminals or connect:

    Device, per se, under subclass 150 (a) consisting of a pair of
    superconductive regions separated by a thin, less conductive portion or gap
    capable of exhibiting electron or Cooper paired electron tunneling current
    flow between superconducting regions referred to as a Josephson junction,
    per se, or (b) Josephson junction combined with only terminals or contacts.

    (1)     Note.  Under certain conditions, a potential appears across the
    Josephson junction and high frequency radiation emanates from it. Under the
    influence of high frequency radiation, current flow through the Josephson
    junction may also be changed.

    (2)     Note.  One should not assume that all so-called barriers are
    indicative of Josephson junctions, which require a barrier sufficiently
    thin for tunneling of electrons. Moreover, in this art, a barrier can have
    other functions, such as a protective barrier to prevent poisoning or
    inactivation of superconductive material, or as an insulative barrier, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162,    for SQUID device containing a Josephson junction.

    170,    for information processing or storage or retrieval system, device,
    or component.

    191+,   for semiconductor or thin film solid-state devices that may contain
    a Josephson junction, such as a Josephson transistor.

    233+,   for layered structure containing a superconductor layer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    for devices containing low temperature superconducting Josephson junctions.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, particularly subclasses
    160+ for systems with a superconducting component.


CLS 505/191
TXT Semiconductor thin film device or thin film electric solid-state device or
    system (i.e., active or passive):

    Device or system under subclass 150 comprising an active or passive
    semiconductor or thin film electric solid-state device, or processes of
    using the same.

    (1)     Note.  An active or passive semiconductor or thin film electric
    solid-state device may be involved as a component in other devices or
    systems provided in subclasses 100 through 190 and 200+.

    (2)     Note.  Reciting the composition of layers will not be sufficient
    for placement in this subclass unless a function of a layer other than
    merely conducting, insulating, supporting, or protecting is identified or
    unless other than layer structure is present. Moreover, superconducting
    layered or coiled wire, tape, cable, or fiber with or without connect, pad,
    or connect structure is not sufficient for this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  One should not assume that all so-called barriers are
    indicative of Josephson junctions, which require a barrier sufficiently
    thin for tunneling of electrons. Moreover, in this art, a barrier can have
    other functions, such as a protective barrier to prevent poisoning or
    inactivation of superconductive material, as an insulative barrier, or
    barrier junction between semiconductors, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180+,   for solid-state device or component (a) that is capable of being
    energized or modified by the application of light, (b) that permits light
    to pass through it, or (c) that emits light in response to passage of
    electrical current.

    190,    for Josephson junction, per se, or Josephson junction with only
    terminal or connect.

    204,    for device or system with electronic circuitry for generation of
    oscillations.


    220,    for superconductor having metal connect, pad, connect structure, or
    patterned superconductor circuit.

    230+,   for layered stock having semiconductor layer, metal layer, second
    superconducting layer, insulating layer, or protective layers, and a
    superconducting layer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    for devices containing low temperature superconducting material.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, particularly
    subclasses 462 and 476 for low temperature superconductor devices in
    nonlinear solid-state device, circuit, or system.

    331,    Oscillators, subclass 107 for superconductive element and tunneling
    element oscillators.

    338,    Electrical Resistors, subclass 32 for magnetic field responsive
    devices, including Hall effect types and low temperature superconductive
    devices.

    365,    Static Information and Storage and Retrieval, particularly
    subclasses 160+ for systems with a superconducting component.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 74 for input circuits involving field-effect
    transistors; subclasses 79 and 117 for transfer means including a field
    effect transistor; and subclass 93 for low temperature superconductive
    elements.


CLS 505/192
TXT Capacitor or including capacitor:

    Device under subclass 191 that contains a capacitor or that is limited to a
    passive solid-state thin film component used in electrical and electronic
    circuits to store a charge of electricity, usually for very brief periods
    of time, with the ability to rapidly charge and discharge.

    (1)     Note.  A capacitor is usually considered a passive component since
    it does not rectify, amplify, or switch and because charge carriers do not
    undergo energy level changes therein, although some active solid-state
    devices function as voltage variable capacitors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    for devices that may contain a capacitor.

    361,    Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices, for passive-state
    devices, such as capacitors.


CLS 505/193
TXT Superconducting transistor (e.g., Josephson transistor, etc.):

    Device or system under subclass 191 that operates as a transistor having
    source, drain, and gate that includes a high temperature superconducting
    material as an integral portion of the transistor.

    (1)     Note.  Usually the superconductor material comprises the source or
    drain having a tunneling barrier therebe-tween that is under the influence
    of a gate electrode that determines the operation of the device or system.


CLS 505/200
TXT Electric discharge tube:

    Device under subclass 150 having a closed usually glass container under
    vacuum or containing a specific gas used for producing, influencing, or
    using a flow of electrons or ions to generate light or other
    electromagnetic radiation.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    315,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems.

    328,    Miscellaneous Electron Space Discharge Device Systems.

    330,    Amplifiers, for crossed field amplifier.

    331,    Oscillators, particularly subclass 107 for oscillators containing
    low temperature superconducting material.


CLS 505/201
TXT Antenna:

    A component under subclass 150 that is the portion of a radio transmitter
    or receiver station used for radiating or receiving radio waves to or from
    space.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183,    for optical waveguide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation).

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas.


CLS 505/202
TXT Electric communication system containing transmitter or receiver of pulse,
    digital, or electromagnetic radio, television, or radar wave form:

    System under subclass 150 that communicates information by sending or
    receiving through a transmission line or space (a) electrical pulse or
    digital signal, or (b) radio, television, radar, electromagnetic wave
    signals, or directional wave characteristics.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170,    for information processing or information storage or retrieval
    system, device, or component.

    181+,   for photoconductive, light transmissive, light emissive, or light
    responsive device or component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radio, Radio Navigation).

    358,    Facsimile.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, particularly subclass 99 for
    receivers with interference or noise reduction means containing low
    temperature superconducting material.

    455,    Telecommunications, for telecommunication systems that have a
    resonant cavity housing containing material.


CLS 505/203
TXT Electroacoustic transducer:

    Device or system under subclass 150 for converting (a) sound waves in the
    form of traveling stresses in an elastic medium (e.g., air, etc.) into an
    electric signal or (b) an electric signal into sound waves in the form of
    traveling stresses in an elastic medium (e.g., air, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201,    for antenna.

    202,    for electric communication system containing transmitter or
    receiver of pulse, digital, or electromagnetic radio, television, or radar
    wave form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, particularly subclass 167 for diaphragms containing low
    temperature superconducting material.

    367,    Communications, Electrical: Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 140+ for signal transducers that may be active solid-state
    devices, and including support structures, diaphragm, and pressure
    compensation means.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices,
    particularly subclasses 192+ for electromagnetic electroacoustic
    transducers containing low temperature superconducting material.


CLS 505/204
TXT Device or system with electronic circuitry for generation of oscillations:


    Device or system under subclass 150 that contains a circuit having
    inductance or capacitance and resistance arranged to produce a current that
    periodically reverses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180,    for maser containing a molecular or resonant-type oscillator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    331,    Oscillators, subclasses 94.1+ for molecular or resonant-type
    oscillators, or subclass 107 for oscillators containing low temperature
    superconducting material.


CLS 505/210
TXT High frequency waveguides, resonators, electrical networks, or other
    devices of the waveguide type (e.g., phase shifters, cavity filters, etc.):

    Devices, systems, or components under subclass 150 that are limited to high
    frequency electrical transmission line or cable arrangements, resonators,
    delay lines, and including devices having distributed inductance and
    capacitance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220,    for superconductor having metal connect, pad, connect structure, or
    patterned superconductor circuit.

    230,    for superconducting wire, tape, cable, or fiber, per se, that can
    produce magnetic effects as well as conduct electricity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, particularly subclass 99 for
    low temperature superconducting transmission lines and networks.


CLS 505/211
TXT Electrical energy storage device (e.g., accumulator, etc.), inductor,
    transformer, magnetic switch, magnetic ring, sphere, coil, or magnetic
    arrangement:

    Device under subclass 150 for storing electrical energy (e.g., accumulator,
    etc.), switching devices dependent on magnetism for operation, means for
    inducing current into wires or electrical storage devices, or magnetic ring
    or coil (i.e., which may include appended electrode, lead, or nominal
    refrigeration means); or organizations of magnets.

    (1)     Note.  Merely reciting that a superconducting device or material is
    attached to a cryogenic refrigeration device or providing space or
    connection for flowing a cryogenic fluid will not be considered significant
    refrigeration structure unless structure is present that actually causes
    the refrigeration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163,    for significant refrigeration system or device under subclass 150
    containing a superconductor element (a) that operates as part of the
    system, such as for supplying electrical current or that participates
    directly in the cooling through a thermoelectric effect, or (b) that is
    present with the system as a device or material that is to be cooled; or
    process of using (a) or (b).


    220,    for superconductor having metal connect, pad, connect structure, or
    patterned superconductor circuit.

    230+,   for superconducting wire, tape, cable, or fiber, per se, that can
    produce magnetic effects as well as conduct electricity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, particularly subclasses
    15.4+ and 125.1 for low temperature superconductors having cooling fluid
    feeding, circulating, or distributing means.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, particularly subclass 90.5
    for magnetic bearing structure containing low temperature superconducting
    material.

    323,    Electricity: Power Supply or Regulation Systems, particularly
    subclass 360 for systems including transformers or inductors containing low
    temperature superconducting material.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, particularly subclass 216 for devices containing low
    temperature superconducting material.

    336,    Inductor Devices.


CLS 505/212
TXT Truncated hollow spherical or truncated cylindrical flux source bodies
    (e.g., magic hemisphere, magic half-ring, etc.):

    Superconductor device, component, or stock under subclass 211 in the form
    of an azimuthally circumscribed section of a nonoccupied or hollow
    partially cut-off sphere or ring (e.g., hemispherical, quarter-spherical,
    etc.).


CLS 505/213
TXT Noncoiled hollow magnetic arrangement:

    Magnetic arrangement under subclass 211 that has a nonoccupied hollow
    center in which a magnetic flux can be generated and that is not
    manufactured by coiling or forming coils of superconducting wires.


CLS 505/220
TXT Superconductor having metal connect, pad, connect structure, or patterned
    superconductor circuit, per se:

    Device, component, or structure under subclass 150 having an attached metal
    connect, pad, or connect structure intended to serve as a junction for
    receiving electrical current from an external source or a patterned
    interconnection of superconductor, per se, used for joining parts of an
    electrical system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191+,   for semiconductor or thin film solid-state devices that may contain
    a Josephson junction, such as a Josephson transistor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity: Conductors and Insulators, particularly subclasses
    15.4+ and 125.1 for low temperature superconductors having cooling fluid
    feeding, circulating, or distributing means.


CLS 505/230
TXT Superconducting wire, tape, cable, or fiber, per se:

    Superconducting stock under subclass 150 in the form of a continuous rod,
    elongated flattened strip, multilayered elongated rod, or thread that may
    be used to conduct electrical current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    211,    for wire in the form of a coil.

    213,    for hollow noncoiled tube.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, particularly for low
    temperature superconducting wires with structure.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, for metal next to metal
    layers, or metal next to ceramic or oxide layers.


CLS 505/231
TXT Having plural superconducting wire or superconducting fiber component
    (e.g., multifilament wire, etc.):

    Superconducting stock under subclass 230 wherein there is more than one
    superconducting rod, tape, cable, or filament arranged together or
    encompassed by a protecting shield.


CLS 505/232
TXT Having nonsuperconducting core:

    Wire, tape, cable, coil, or fiber under subclass 230 wherein the center
    portion is made of nonsuperconducting material.


CLS 505/233
TXT Superconducting layer and organic or free carbon layer (i.e., adjacent or
    nonadjacent to superconductor):

    Stock or component under subclass 150 having a superconducting layer and
    also either an organic layer or a free carbon layer present.


CLS 505/234
TXT Superconductor next to superconductor:

    Stock or component under subclass 150 having one superconducting material
    immediately adjacent to a second superconducting material layer and wherein
    at least one of the superconducting materials is high temperature
    superconducting material.


CLS 505/235
TXT Superconductor layer and one semiconducting or silicon (Si) layer:

    Stock or component under subclass 150 having one superconducting layer and
    also either a semiconductor layer or a silicon (Si) layer.


CLS 505/236
TXT Superconductor layer next to free metal containing layer:

    Stock or component under subclass 150 having one superconducting layer
    immediately adjacent to a zero valent (i.e., free) metal containing layer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, particularly for low
    temperature superconducting wires with structure.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, for metal next to metal
    layers, or metal next to ceramic or oxide layers.


CLS 505/237
TXT Superconductor next to two or more nonsuperconductive layers:

    Stock or component under subclass 150 having one superconducting layer
    immediately adjacent to two or more nonsuperconducting layers.


CLS 505/238
TXT Superconductor next to layer containing non-superconducting ceramic
    composition or inorganic compound (e.g., metal oxide, metal nitride, etc.):

    Stock or component under subclass 150 having one superconducting layer
    immediately adjacent to a layer of nonsuperconducting composition made by
    firing of earthy raw materials (e.g., as glass or clay, etc.) or any
    nonsuperconducting chemical compound that does not contain carbon, with the
    exception of carbon dioxide or carbonate ion (e.g., metal oxide, metal
    nitride, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, particularly for low
    temperature superconducting wires with structure.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, for metal next to metal
    layers, or metal next to ceramic or oxide layers.


CLS 505/239
TXT Substrate for supporting superconductor:

    Stock under subclass 150 that consists of plural layers onto which a
    superconducting layer or preform is intended to be placed.

    (1)     Note.  A mandatory cross-reference should be placed in Class 428
    since the layered stock could be used for other purposes.

    (2)     Note.  Compositions or compounds, per se, that serve as substrates
    onto which superconducting material is deposited to control crystal
    structure of the superconductor layer (e.g., MgO, SrTiO3, YSZ, etc.) are
    classified as originals in the composition or compound classes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, for metal next to metal
    layers, or metal next to ceramic or oxide layers.


CLS 505/300
TXT PROCESSES OF PRODUCING OR TREATING HIGH TEMPERATURE (Tc GREATER THAN 30 K)
    SUPERCONDUCTOR MATERIAL OR SUPERCONDUCTOR CONTAINING PRODUCTS OR PRECURSORS
    THEREOF:

    Processes under the class definition of producing or treating high
    temperature (Tc  30 K) superconductor material or superconductor containing
    products or processes of producing or treating precursors thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Processes of using a device, system, or apparatus are placed
    under subclass 150 when the device is not specifically identified in the
    subclasses thereunder.

    (2)     Note.  Processes of using provided devices, systems, or apparatus
    are located in this schedule with the named devices, systems, or apparatus.


CLS 505/310
TXT With measuring or testing of superconducting properties:

    Process under subclass 300 that include among other operations a step of
    measuring or testing of superconducting characteristics.


CLS 505/320
TXT Producing lattice imperfection flux pinning sites or increasing critical
    current density through particle bombardment, electromagnetic wave energy,
    or using fissionable material:

    Process under subclass 300 wherein a lattice imperfection flux pinning site
    of the superconductor is produced or critical current density of the
    superconductor is increased as the result of exposure to particle
    bombardment, electromagnetic wave energy, or through the use of fissionable
    material.


CLS 505/325
TXT Utilizing particle (e.g., electron beam, ion, etc.) bombardment or
    electromagnetic wave energy (e.g., laser, etc.) treatment of selected
    regions to form conducting or insulating areas:

    Process under subclass 300 wherein treatment of selected regions by
    particle bombardment, or electromagnetic wave energy (e.g., laser, etc.)
    results in a patterning or differentiation of one area over another area by
    converting the area into superconducting material or by converting
    superconducting material into nonsuperconducting material.


CLS 505/329
TXT Producing Josephson junction, per se (e.g., point contact, bridge, barrier
    junction, SIS, SNS, SSS, etc.):

    Process under subclass 300 that is limited to the production of a Josephson
    junction, per se (i.e., a connection consisting of a pair of
    superconductive regions separated by a thin, less conductive portion or gap
    capable of exhibiting electron or Cooper paired electron tunneling current
    flow between superconducting regions).

    (1)     Note.  Under certain conditions, a potential appears across the
    Josephson junction and high frequency radiation emanates from it. Under the
    influence of high frequency radiation, current flow through the Josephson
    junction may also be changed.

    (2)     Note.  One should not assume that all so-called barriers are
    indicative of Josephson junctions, which require a barrier sufficiently
    thin for tunneling of electrons. Moreover, in this art, a barrier can have
    other functions, such as a protective barrier to prevent poisoning or
    inactivation of superconductive material, or as an insulative barrier, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    330,    for manufacture of a semiconductor device or thin film electric
    solid-state device containing more components than a single Josephson
    junction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, subclass 3 for producing a high Tc
    (>30oK) Josephson Junction and involving an etching step.


CLS 505/330
TXT Semiconductor device or thin film electric solid-state device manufacture:

    Process under subclass 300 wherein an active or passive semiconductor
    device or thin film solid-state device is manufactured.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    438,    Semiconductor Device Manufacturing, subclass 2 for processes of
    manufacture wherein a semiconductor substrate is conjoined with a
    low-temperature superconductive component, see notes therein.


CLS 505/400
TXT Using magnetic field (e.g., for aligning, texturizing, classifying, etc.):

    Process under subclass 300 wherein a magnetic field is utilized for any
    purpose (e.g., aligning, texturizing, classifying, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    particularly subclasses 405+ for shaping or treating processes with direct
    application of electrical or wave energy to work, and subclass 108 for
    orienting or aligning solid particles in fluent matrix material.


CLS 505/401
TXT Using sonic, ultrasonic, or vibrational energy (e.g., shock processing,
    vibration compacting, etc.):

    Process under subclass 300 wherein sonic, ultrasonic, or vibrational energy
    is used to treat the superconductor material or superconductor product for
    any purpose (e.g., shock processing, compacting, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    particularly subclasses 603+ for vitrifying or sintering of shaped
    particulate bodies, subclasses 84+ for process of shaping or treating using
    explosive force, subclasses 104+ for forming electrical articles by shaping
    electroconductive material, and subclasses 109+ for consolidating to shape
    particulate material.


CLS 505/410
TXT With material removal by etching, laser ablation, or mechanical abrasion:

    Process under subclass 300 wherein material is removed from a substrate (a)
    through chemical reaction, (b) by vaporization or decomposition due to the
    application of a laser, or (c) by mechanically wearing or grinding away a
    portion of preform to produce a pattern or shape.

    (1)     Note.  Completely dissolving a metal portion of a metal-clad
    superconducting composite structure or completely dissolving a mask or
    resist is considered proper for this subclass and its indents.

    (2)     Note.  Mechanically grinding to completely reduce a preform to
    particulate is excluded from this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    430,    for process of making wire, tape, cable, coil, or fiber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 129.1+ for
    processes of electroetching, or subclasses 192.32+ for processes of sputter
    etching.

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, subclass 3 for etching of high Tc
    (>30oK) superconductive material.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    particularly subclass 400 for processes of material removal for shaping
    that utilize laser ablation of a substrate.

     451,   Abrading, subclasses 28+ for a process of mechanical abrading.


CLS 505/411
TXT Utilizing plasma etching or sputter etching:

    Process under subclass 410 wherein material is removed (a) by chemical
    action of ionized gases in an equilibrium of positive or negative ions or
    chemical action of ionized gases in a vacuum (i.e., cold plasma), or (b)
    through momentum transfer elimination caused by the collision of ionized
    gases with the substrate.


CLS 505/412
TXT Laser ablation:

    Process under subclass 410 where material is removed from a substrate by
    vaporization or decomposition brought about by the action of a laser.


CLS 505/413
TXT Utilizing mask (e.g., photoresist, etc.):

    Process under subclass 410 wherein a shield is utilized during the etching
    process to protect at least a portion of a substrate from etchant, usually
    in a patterning operation.


CLS 505/420
TXT With glass forming, working, or treating:

    Process under subclass 300 wherein there is a glass shaping, reshaping, or
    heat treating operation to change the properties of glass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, for process of glass forming, working, or
    treating when high temperature superconducting material is not involved.


CLS 505/425
TXT Producing powder or short fiber (i.e., less than 15 cm) by spraying,
    dropping, or slinging of solution, suspension, or melt (e.g., spray-drying,
    atomizing, etc.):

    Process under subclass 300 wherein a liquid solution, suspension, or melt
    of superconducting material is subjected to atomizing, dropping, extruding,
    or disintegrating by centrifugal action to form by surface tension, or
    drying into (a) particulate, or (b) short (i.e., less than 15 cm) fiber
    form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    particularly subclasses 5+ for processes of shaping solid particulate
    material directly from molten or liquid mass.


CLS 505/430
TXT Process of making wire, tape, cable, coil, or fiber:

    Process under subclass 300 wherein the superconducting product produced is
    stock in the form of a rod, elongated flattened strip, multilayered
    elongated rod, coil, or thread that may be used to conduct electrical
    current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    410,    for removing metal-clad from superconducting wire by etching, laser
    ablation, or mechanical abrasion.


CLS 505/431
TXT Making multifilament:

    Process under subclass 430 that produces more than one superconducting rod,
    tape, cable, or filament arranged together or encompassed by a protecting
    shield.


CLS 505/432
TXT Isostatic pressing (e.g., HIP, hydrostatic pressing, etc.):

    Process under subclass 430 wherein the superconducting material, usually in
    particulate form, is compacted uniformly in all directions by the
    application of constant external fluid pressure to shape the
    superconducting material into a dense form.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    particularly subclasses 603+ for vitrifying or sintering of shaped
    particulate bodies, subclasses 84+ for process of shaping or treating using
    explosive force, subclasses 104+ for forming electrical articles by shaping
    electroconductive material, and subclasses 109+ for consolidating to shape
    particulate material.


CLS 505/433
TXT With metal deforming, metal wrapping, or metal coiling:

    Process under subclass 430 wherein there is a step of (a) reforming the
    shape of metal while in the solid state, (b) bending a thin solid metal
    foil to surround a preform, or (c) curling solid metal into a loop.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, particularly subclass 599 for combined operations
    involving metal deforming and production of low temperature superconducting
    articles or devices.


CLS 505/434
TXT With coating:

    Process under subclass 430 that includes a step of (a) applying or
    obtaining on a surface of a substrate a layer of differing composition, or
    (b) permeating a porous substrate with a material of composition differing
    from the original substrate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    440,    for coating with a sol-gel composition.

    446,    for coating utilizing an organometallic.

    452,    for coating or impregnating with a melt.

    470,    for other coating processes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, for processes of
    electroetching, electrophoretic coating, sputter etching, or sputter
    coating processes.

    205,    Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, for electroforming and electroplating processes.

    427,    Coating Processes, for coating or impregnating operations involving
    vapor deposition, immersion, etc.


CLS 505/440
TXT Utilizing sol or gel:

    Process under subclass 300 wherein (a) a liquid colloidal suspension, or
    (b) a colloid in which the disperse phase has combined with the continuous
    phase to produce a viscous, jellylike material, is utilized at any stage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    434,    for coating of a rod, elongated flattened strip, multilayered
    elongated rod, coil, or thread.

    446,    for coating utilizing an organometallic.

    452,    for coating or impregnating with a melt.

    470,    for other coating processes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    501,    Compositions: Ceramic, particularly subclass 12 for metal oxide
    containing ceramic compositions and processes of manufacturing same by the
    sol-gel route.


CLS 505/441
TXT With precipitating from solution:

    Process under subclass 300 in which there is a step of settling small
    particles out of a liquid suspension by gravity or centrifugal force.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    425,    for producing powder or small fiber (i.e., less than 15 cm) by
    spraying, dropping, or slinging of solution, suspension, or melt (e.g.,
    spray drying, atomizing, etc.).


CLS 505/445
TXT Using an organometallic intermediate (e.g., ligand, chelate, clathrate,
    etc.):

    Process under subclass 300 in which a compound of metal and an organic
    material is the transitional precursor to the superconductor final product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    510,    for precursor of high temperature superconductor material or stock,
    per se, or process of producing the precursor.


CLS 505/446
TXT Including coating step:

    Process under subclass 445 that includes a step of (a) applying or
    obtaining on a surface of a substrate a layer of differing composition, or
    (b) permeating a porous substrate with a material of composition differing
    from the original substrate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    434,    for coating of a rod, elongated flattened strip, multilayered
    elongated rod, coil, or thread.

    440,    for coating with a sol-gel composition.

    452,    for coating or impregnating with a melt.

    470,    for other coating processes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, for coating or impregnating operations involving
    vapor deposition, immersion, etc.


CLS 505/447
TXT Vapor deposition:

    Process under subclass 446 wherein the coating is applied or obtained by
    absorption or condensation of a gaseous material on a substrate, or by
    reaction of a gaseous material with a substrate.


CLS 505/450
TXT With melting:

    Process under subclass 300 wherein there is a step of heating to cause a
    change from solid to liquid state.

    (1)     Note.  Sintering or calcining in which only surface melting of
    particulate is involved is excluded from this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    490,    for sintering operations that involve surface melting and shaping
    or consolidating of particulate material.

    500,    for sintering operations that involve surface melting.


CLS 505/451
TXT With zone melting, zone solidification, or seed pulling:

    Process under subclass 450 wherein a small localized area is subjected to
    melting and solidification before an adjacent zone becomes melted or
    wherein a single crystal seed is utilized to pull a solidifying single
    crystal mass from a melt (e.g., Czochralski, etc.).


CLS 505/452
TXT And coating or impregnating with melt:

    Process under subclass 450 wherein a melt is utilized in a step of (a)
    applying or obtaining on a surface of a substrate a layer of differing
    composition, or (b) permeating a porous substrate with a material of
    composition differing from the original substrate.

    (1)     Note.  Melting for vaporization preparatory to vapor deposition
    coating is excluded from this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    434,    for coating of a rod, elongated flattened strip, multilayered
    elongated rod, coil, or thread.

    440,    for coating with a sol-gel composition.

    446,    for coating utilizing an organometallic.

    470,    for other coating processes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, for coating or impregnating operations involving
    vapor deposition, immersion, etc.


CLS 505/460
TXT Producing fullerene (i.e., C60) type superconductor or analog thereof:

    Process under subclass 300 wherein the superconducting material is a doped
    or nondoped 60 carbon hollow, closed-caged molecule resembling a
    Buckminster Fuller geodesic dome or a homologous series of hollow,
    closed-caged molecules usually having 60 or more carbon atoms, referred to
    as fullerenes.

    (1)     Note.  While, at this time, several fullerenes fail to meet the
    Class 505 requirement of Tc  30 K, Ebbsen, et al., Nature, 1991, 352 222,
    have disclosed fullerenes doped with cesium (Cs) or rubidium (Rb) having Tc
     30 K as required by the class definition.


CLS 505/461
TXT Producing halogen [i.e., fluorine (Fl), chlorine (Cl), bromine (Br),
    astatine (At)] containing superconductor:

    Process under subclass 300 wherein the superconducting material
    incorporates halogen [i.e., fluorine (Fl), chlorine (Cl), bromine (Br),
    astatine (At)].


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    434,    for coating of a rod, elongated flattened strip, multilayered
    elongated rod, coil, or thread.

    440,    for coating with a sol-gel composition.

    446,    for coating utilizing an organometallic.

    452,    for coating or impregnating with a melt.

    470+,   for coating processes.


CLS 505/470
TXT Coating:

    Process under subclass 300 that includes a step of (a) applying or
    obtaining on a surface of a substrate a layer of differing composition, or
    (b) permeating a porous substrate with a material of composition differing
    from the original substrate.

    (1)     Note.  Complete oxidation of a material forming a new composition
    is not considered a coating process, even though it may be a coating that
    is completely oxidized. However, if oxidation occurs simultaneously with
    deposition of a material upon a substrate, this is viewed as a coating
    operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    434,    for coating of a rod, elongated flattened strip, multilayered
    elongated rod, coil, or thread.

    440,    for coating with a sol-gel composition.

    446,    for coating utilizing an organometallic.

    452,    for coating or impregnating with a melt.

    460,    for doping or coating of fullerenes.

    461,    for doping or coating of superconducting materials with halogen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, for processes of
    electroetching, electrophoretic coating, sputter etching, or sputter
    coating processes.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, for electroforming and electroplating processes.

    427,    Coating Processes, for coating or impregnating operations such as
    vapor deposition, screen printing, immersion, etc.


CLS 505/471
TXT Printing (e.g., screen printing, etc.) or application with solid coating
    means:

    Process under subclass 470 wherein coating material is applied to a
    substrate in a nonuniform desired pattern, or applied through the use of a
    solid coating means that carries the coating material into contact with the
    substrate with deposition thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    440,    for coating with a sol-gel composition.


CLS 505/472
TXT Electrolytic or electrophoretic coating:

    Process under subclass 470 involving the use of electrolysis wherein a
    chemical change is brought about by chemical reaction that produces a
    coating on a substrate or involving the use of an electrical current to
    cause migration and deposition of a charged particle upon a substrate
    (i.e., electrophoretic coating).


CLS 505/473
TXT Vapor deposition:

    Process under subclass 470 wherein a material in a gaseous state (e.g.,
    vapor, mist, smoke, etc.) is utilized to form a coating upon a substrate by
    absorption, condensation, or reaction.


CLS 505/474
TXT Laser evaporative (i.e., ablative) coating:

    Process under subclass 473 wherein a laser is directed to a target to form
    the vapor that is utilized to coat a substrate.


CLS 505/475
TXT Sputtering:

    Process under subclass 473 wherein a target is bombarded by ions in a
    vacuum to remove material from the target by momentum transfer and to
    deposit the material as a coating on a substrate.


CLS 505/476
TXT RF sputtering (e.g., 13.56 MHz, etc.):

    Process under subclass 475 wherein radio frequency electromagnetic wave
    energy (e.g., 13.65 MHz, etc.) is utilized to energize the sputtering
    operation.


CLS 505/477
TXT Using plasma:

    Process under subclass 473 wherein a gaseous vapor of ions in equilibrium
    or a vapor of ions in vacuum in nonequilibrium state referred to as a
    ``cold plasma" is utilized while coating a substrate.


CLS 505/480
TXT Utilizing electromagnetic wave energy, ion, or plasma:

    Process under subclass 300 wherein electromagnetic energy, ion, or a
    gaseous vapor of ions in equilibrium or a vapor of ions in vacuum in
    nonequilibrium state referred to as a ``cold plasma" is utilized for any
    purpose not provided hereinabove.

    (1)     Note.  Complete oxidation of a material forming a new composition
    is not considered a coating process. If oxidation occurs simultaneously
    with deposition of a material upon a substrate, this is viewed as a coating
    operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    411,    for plasma or sputter etching.

    470,    for coating operations that may include utilization of
    electromagnetic wave energy, ion, or plasma simultaneously with a coating
    step.

    475,    for sputter coating.

    477,    for plasma coating.


CLS 505/481
TXT Including exothermic reaction or ignition of binder:

    Process under subclass 300 wherein heat is evolved as a result of a
    chemical reaction or wherein an organic containing binder for
    superconducting precursors or superconducting material is burned (i.e.,
    oxidized) to remove the binder.


CLS 505/482
TXT Treating with high pressure oxygen:

    Process under subclass 300 wherein oxygen or an oxygen enriched gas is
    utilized under higher than atmospheric pressure, usually during conversion
    of superconductor precursor to the superconducting state.

    (1)     Note.  Complete oxidation of a material forming a new composition
    is not considered a coating process. If oxidation occurs simultaneously
    with deposition of a material upon a substrate, this is viewed as a coating
    operation.


CLS 505/483
TXT Utilizing fluid bed:

    Process under subclass 300 in which a bed of particulate material is kept
    in gaseous suspension at any stage in the process.


CLS 505/490
TXT Shaping or consolidating (e.g., pelletizing, compacting, etc.):

    Process under subclass 300 wherein a superconducting body having a definite
    form or configuration is produced from plastic or solid material utilizing
    a molding surface.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is the compacting of solid particulate
    precursors of superconducting material or particulate superconducting
    material to produce shaped bodies (e.g., pellets, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    425,    for producing powder or short fiber.

    450,    for melting and shaping operations that exclude sintering or
    calcining.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    particularly subclasses 603+ for vitrifying or sintering of shaped
    particulate bodies, subclasses 84+ for process of shaping or treating using
    explosive force, subclasses 104+ for forming electrical articles by shaping
    electroconductive material, and subclasses 109+ for consolidating to shape
    particulate material.


CLS 505/491
TXT Utilizing isostatic pressure (e.g., HIP, etc.) or specified pressure:

    Process under subclass 490 wherein a constant high pressure is applied
    during the shaping or consolidating of the material or wherein there is a
    specified pressure utilized during the shaping or consolidating of the
    material being shaped.


CLS 505/492
TXT Bismuth (Bi) or thallium (Tl) containing:

    Process under subclass 490 wherein the superconducting material contains a
    bismuth (Bi) or thallium (Tl) constituent.


CLS 505/500
TXT Heating, annealing, or sintering:

    Process under subclass 300 that includes a step of heating, annealing, or
    surface melting of particulate material by positive application of heat
    with uniting through contiguous surface phase and retention of some
    particulate identity.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    450,    for melting operations that exclude sintering or calcining.

    490,    for sintering operations that involve the combination of surface
    melting and shaping or consolidating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    particularly subclasses 603+ for vitrifying or sintering of shaped
    particulate bodies, subclasses 84+ for process of shaping or treating using
    explosive force, subclasses 104+ for forming electrical articles by shaping
    electroconductive material, and subclasses 109+ for consolidating to shape
    particulate material.


CLS 505/501
TXT Bismuth (Bi) or thallium (Tl) containing:

    Process under subclass 500 wherein the superconducting material contains a
    bismuth (Bi) or thallium (Tl) constituent.


CLS 505/510
TXT PRECURSOR OF HIGH TEMPERATURE (Tc GREATER THAN 30 K) SUPERCONDUCTOR
    MATERIAL OR STOCK, PER SE, OR PROCESS OF PRODUCING THE PRECURSOR:

    Substances (i.e., if proportionally constituted to provide the desired
    superconducting product upon decomposition, heating, deoxygenation, or
    oxidation) that form high temperature (Tc  30 K) superconductor material
    under the class definition, stock (e.g., target, etc.) containing the same,
    or process of producing the same.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, particularly subclasses 500+ for electrically
    conductive compositions.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, for inorganic compounds and
    processes of producing same.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, for metal oxide containing compositions
    having glass or refractory properties as defined by Class 501, and
    processes of producing same.


CLS 505/511
TXT Target for coating:

    Precursor under subclass 510 that will be eroded or vaporized to provide
    coating material for deposition.


CLS 505/512
TXT Organometallic (e.g., ligand, clathrate, oxalate, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 510 wherein the precursor is an
    organometallic or contains organometallic.

               CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 505/700
TXT HIGH Tc (ABOVE 30 K) SUPERCONDUCTING DEVICE, ARTICLE, OR STRUCTURED STOCK:

    Art collection under the class definition comprising an electrical or
    magnetic device, article or structured stock which incorporates
    superconducting material having a superconducting transition temperature
    greater than 30 K.


CLS 505/701
TXT Coated or thin film device (i.e., active or passive):

    Subject matter under subclass 700 which includes a coating or film of high
    temperature superconducting material as a layer on a substrate.


CLS 505/702
TXT Josephson junction present:

    Subject matter under subclass 701 having a Josephson junction (i.e.,
    connection between two superconducting materials through which electrons
    tunnel).  Examples include microbridges (i.e., narrow region of
    superconducting material between two larger regions of superconducting
    material) or a superconducting-dielectric-superconducting sandwich.


CLS 505/703
TXT Microelectronic device with superconducting conduction line:

    Subject matter under subclass 701 in which a superconducting layer or line
    is used to transmit current within a microelectronic device (e.g.,
    interconnect in a printed circuit or semiconductor device).


CLS 505/704
TXT Wire, fiber, or cable:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein the superconducting material
    forms at least part of a wire, fiber, or cable.


CLS 505/705
TXT Magnetic coil:

    Subject matter under subclass 704 wherein the wire or cable in the shape of
    a ring, spiral or helix acts or is capable of acting as an electromagnet.


CLS 505/706
TXT Contact pads or leads bonded to superconductor:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 which include a pad or wire lead for
    coupling current to the superconducting material.


CLS 505/725
TXT PROCESS OF MAKING OR TREATING HIGH Tc (ABOVE 30 K) SUPERCONDUCTING SHAPED
    MATERIAL, ARTICLE, OR DEVICE:

    Art collection under the class definition limited to the methods of making
    or treating superconducting shaped material, article or device.


CLS 505/726
TXT Measuring or testing of superconducting property:

    Process under subclass 725 wherein the superconducting properties of the
    superconducting material is tested or measured.


CLS 505/727
TXT Using magnetic field:

    Process under subclass 725 in which a magnetic field is used during forming
    or treating of the superconducting material, article or device.

    (1)     Note.  Such techniques include magnetic separation of
    superconducting material from nonsuperconducting material and magnetic
    alignment of superconducting material.


CLS 505/728
TXT Etching:

    Process under subclass 725 involving the removal of superconducting
    material by any chemical or heating procedure that delineates a pattern or
    shape.


CLS 505/729
TXT Growing single crystal (e.g., epitaxy, bulk):

    Process under subclass 725 in which a superconducting single crystal or
    single crystal film is formed (e.g., epitaxial growth, bulk solid-state
    growth, seed pulling).


CLS 505/730
TXT Vacuum treating or coating:

    Process under subclass 725 which utilizes a vacuum to treat or coat a
    substrate (e.g., plasma spraying, molecular beam epitaxy, ion implantation).


CLS 505/731
TXT Sputter coating:

    Process under subclass 730 in which ions from a plasma or ion beam erode a
    target material under vacuum to deposit a coating or film (e.g., Magnetron,
    D.C., A.C., reactive sputtering) on a substrate.


CLS 505/732
TXT Evaporative coating with superconducting material:

    Process under subclass 730 wherein superconducting material is vaporized
    with heat to deposit a coating or film on a substrate.


CLS 505/733
TXT Rapid solidification (e.g., quenching, gas-atomizing, melt-spinning,
    roller-quenching):

    Process under subclass 725 in which a molten or melted superconducting
    material or superconducting precursor material is rapidly cooled or
    quenched.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass, the use of quenching without
    indication of speed will be sufficient for placement.  Moreover, the use of
    the techniques of gas atomization, melt-spinning or roller-quenching will
    be considered rapid solidification.


CLS 505/734
TXT From organometallic precursors (e.g., acetylacetonates):

    Process under subclass 725 in which an organometallic material (e.g.,
    acetate, acetylactonate, neodecanoate) is an intermediate or starting
    material utilized in the production of the superconducting material.


CLS 505/735
TXT By sol-gel process:

    Process under subclass 734 in which a colloidal dispersion (i.e., sol) is
    produced and a subsequent operation produces a gel from which
    superconducting material is formed.  The gellation stage usually involves a
    controlled hydrolysis and polycondensation of alkoxide precursors.


CLS 505/736
TXT From free metal precursors:

    Process under subclass 725 wherein at some stage in the recited process
    free metal was a precursor or starting material from which the
    superconducting material was produced.


CLS 505/737
TXT From inorganic salt precursors (e.g., nitrates):

    Process under subclass 725 wherein at some stage in the process for making
    the superconductor material an inorganic metal salt (e.g., nitrates) served
    as an intermediate or starting material.


CLS 505/738
TXT By precipitating:

    Process under subclass 737 wherein a solid metal salt precipitate is caused
    to be formed from a solution of inorganic reactants and the inorganic salt
    thus precipitated is treated in subsequent operations to produce
    superconducting material.


CLS 505/739
TXT Molding, coating, shaping or casting of superconducting material:

    Process under subclass 725 wherein the superconducting material or the
    superconducting precursor material is subjected to a molding, coating,
    shaping or casting operation.


CLS 505/740
TXT To form wire or fiber:

    Process under subclass 739 wherein a wire or fiber is formed.


CLS 505/741
TXT Coating or casting onto a substrate (e.g., screen printing, tape casting):

    Process under subclass 739 in which (e.g., screen printing, tape casting) a
    substrate is coated or a layer or film is cast onto a substrate to shape
    the layer or film.


CLS 505/742
TXT Annealing:

    Process under subclass 725 in which the superconducting material or
    superconducting precursor material is annealed or subjected to a
    post-melting, post-sintering, or post-condensation heating operation,
    usually in air or a controlled oxygen environment, to produce or perfect
    the superconducting composition or compound.


CLS 505/775
TXT HIGH Tc (ABOVE 30 K) SUPERCONDUCTING MATERIAL:

    Art collection under the class definition containing a superconducting
    compound or composition having a superconducting transition temperature
    greater than 30 K or a precursor therefor.

    (1)     Note.  A physical mixture of diverse material with the
    superconducting compound or composition is provided herein under in
    subclass 785.  If diverse material is incorporated into the superconducting
    crystalline structure (i.e., doping), the inclusion thereof in the
    microstructure will not be considered, for the purpose of classification a
    physical mixture, and proper classification will go to the subclasses above
    785.  In essence, doped superconducting material will be considered a
    superconducting composition if it retains superconductivity.


CLS 505/776
TXT Containing transition metal oxide with rare earth or alkaline earth:

    Material under subclass 775 which contains as part of the compound or
    composition a transition metal and either a Rare Earth (i.e., Sc, Y, La,
    Ce, Pr, Nd, PM, Sm, Eu, Gd, Tb, Dy, Ho, Er, Tm, Yb, Lu) or an Alkaline
    Earth (i.e., Ca, Sr, Ba, Ra).


CLS 505/777
TXT Lanthanum (La) - (e.g., La2Cu04):

    Material under subclass 776 wherein the Rare Earth is Lanthanum (La) (e.g.,
    La2Cu04).


CLS 505/778
TXT Alkaline earth (i.e., Ca, Sr, Ba, Ra) - [e.g., La(2-x)Ba(x)Cu04]:

    Material under subclass 777 wherein the material contains, in addition to
    the Lanthanum (La), an Alkaline Earth (i.e., Calcium (Ca), Strontium (Sr),
    Barium (Ba) or Radium (Ra).


CLS 505/779
TXT Other rare earth (i.e., Sc, Y, Ce, Pr, Nd, Pm, Sm, Eu, Gd, Tb, Dy, Ho, Er,
    Tm, Yb, Lu) and alkaline earth (i.e., Ca, Sr, Ba, Ra):

    Material under subclass 776 containing another Rare Earth i.e., Scandium
    (Sc), Yttrium (Y), Cerium (Ce), Praseodymium (Pr), Neodymium (Nd),
    Promethium (Pm), Samarium (Sm), Europium (Eu), Gadoinium (Gd), Terbium
    (Tb), Dysprosium (Dy), Holmium (Ho), Erbium (Er), Thulium (Tm), Ytterbium
    (Yb) and Lutetium (Lu) and Alkaline Earth i.e., Calcium (Ca), Strontium
    (Sr), Barium (Ba) or Radium (Ra) but not any Lanthanum (La).


CLS 505/780
TXT Yttrium (Y) and barium (Ba) - (e.g., YBa2Cu307):

    Material under subclass 779 wherein the Rare Earth is Yttrium (Y) and the
    Alkaline Earth is Barium (Ba).


CLS 505/781
TXT Noble metal (i.e., Ag, Au, Os, Ir, Pt, Ru, Rh, Pd) or chromium (Cr),
    manganese (Mn), iron (Fe), cobalt (Co) or nickel (Ni) - [e.g.,
    YBa2Cu(3-x)Fe(x)O(y)]:

    Material under subclass 780 containing a noble metal i.e., Silver (Ag),
    Gold (Au), Osmium (Os), Iridium (Ir), Platinum (Pt), Ruthenium (Ru),
    Rhodium (Rh) or Palladium (Pd) or one or more of the Iron Group metals
    i.e., Chromium (Cr), Manganese (Mn), Iron (Fe), Cobalt (Co) or Nickel (Ni).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    785,    composition containing superconducting material and diverse
    nonsuperconducting material when the noble metal is a diverse metal which
    is not part of the superconducting composition.


CLS 505/782
TXT Bismuth (Bi) - (e.g., BiCaSrCuO):

    Material under subclass 776 containing Bismuth (Bi).


CLS 505/783
TXT Thallium (Tl) - (Tl2CaBaCu308):

    Material under subclass 776 that contains Thallium (Tl) - (e.g.,
    Tl2CaBaCu308).


CLS 505/784
TXT Bismuth (Bi) - (e.g., BaKBiO):

    Material under subclass 775 that contains Bismuth (Bi) - (e.g., BaKBiO).


CLS 505/785
TXT Composition containing superconducting material and diverse
    nonsuperconducting material:

    Material under subclass 775 containing superconducting material and diverse
    nonsuperconducting material.

    (1)     Note.  Material implanted into the microstructure of the
    superconducting material as by "doping" will not be considered subject
    matter for this subclass and such "doped" superconducting material will be
    included in the above subclasses as long as the "doped" material does in
    fact remain superconducting.  Lacking an indication to the contrary
    "doping" will not be considered as a coating which would be proper under
    subclass 700 as structured stock.


CLS 505/800
TXT MATERIAL, PER SE, PROCESS OF MAKING SAME:

    Art collection under the class definition including, (a) substance(s) used
    to make a superconductor, (b) process of making the substance(s), or (c)
    the combination of (a) and (b).


CLS 505/801
TXT Composition:  (Classes 75, 252, 501):

    Subject matter under subclass 800 involving a mixture of plural substances.


CLS 505/802
TXT Organic:

    Subject matter under subclass 801 consisting of a mixture of carbon
    compounds or natural substances.


CLS 505/803
TXT Magnetic:

    Subject matter under subclass 801 wherein the composition exhibits magnetic
    properties.


CLS 505/804
TXT Amorphous alloy:

    Subject matter under subclass 801 involving a solid noncrystalline
    substance without geometrical shape in the form of an alloy.


CLS 505/805
TXT Alloy or metallic:  (Class 420, 420/901):

    Subject matter under subclass 801 involving an alloy or metallic mixture.


CLS 505/806
TXT Niobium base (Nb):

    Subject matter under subclass 805 composed at least 50 percent of Niobium
    (Nb).


CLS 505/807
TXT Powder: (Class 75):

    Subject matter under subclass 801 involving an aggregation of loose small
    solid particles.


CLS 505/808
TXT Liquid crystal:  (Class 252):

    Subject matter under subclass 801 in the form of a liquid crystal.


CLS 505/809
TXT Ceramic:  (Class 501):

    Subject matter under subclass 801 in the form of ceramic matter.


CLS 505/810
TXT Compound:  (Class 423):

    Subject matter under subclass 800 consisting of a substance whose molecules
    are made up of unlike atoms and whose constituents cannot be separated by
    physical means.


CLS 505/811
TXT Organic:  (Classes 520 - 570):

    Subject matter under subclass 810 consisting of a substance whose base is
    carbon atom(s).


CLS 505/812
TXT Stock:  (Class 428/930):

    Subject matter under subclass 800 consisting of either a composition or a
    compound having recited structure sufficient to make it more than either a
    composition or compound, but said structure being insufficient to classify
    the same as either a product or apparatus under the rules of classification.


CLS 505/813
TXT Wire, tape, or film:

    Subject matter under subclass 812 in the form of wire, tape, or film


CLS 505/814
TXT Treated metal:  (Class 148/400+):

    Subject matter under subclass 812 wherein the stock is a metal which has
    been treated to modify the characteristics thereof.


CLS 505/815
TXT Process of making, per se:

    Subject matter under subclass 800 limited to the method of making the same,
    per se.


CLS 505/816
TXT Sputtering, including coating, forming, or etching:  (Class 204/192.24):

    Subject matter under subclass 815 consisting of the process of sputtering
    which may include coating, forming, or etching.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    818,    for other coating processes.


CLS 505/817
TXT Forming Josephson element:

    Subject matter under subclass 816 for making a Josephson junction element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    832,    874 and 922, for Josephson junction device or mechanical
    manufacture of same.


CLS 505/818
TXT Coating:  (Classes 204, 427/62):

    Subject matter under subclass 815 involving a coating operation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    816,    for coating by sputtering.


CLS 505/819
TXT Vapor deposition:

    Subject matter under subclass 818 involving coating with a vapor.


CLS 505/820
TXT And etching:

    Subject matter under subclass 818 involving removal of material from a
    substrate.


CLS 505/821
TXT Wire:

    Subject matter under subclass 818 wherein a wire is coated.


CLS 505/822
TXT Shaping:  (Classes 148, 264):

    Subject matter under subclass 815 involving a molding (i.e., shaping
    operation).


CLS 505/823
TXT Powder metallurgy:  (Class 419):

    Subject matter under subclass 815 involving the production of metal, or
    metal containing product, from powder(s) by a sintering or like operation.


CLS 505/824
TXT Battery, thermo or photo-electric:  (Class 136):

    Subject matter under subclass 815 involving the production of
    thermoelectric or photoelectric batteries.


CLS 505/825
TXT APPARATUS, PER SE, DEVICE, PER SE, OR PROCESS OF MAKING OR OPERATING SAME:

    Art collection under the class definition involving, (a) apparatus, per se,
    or (b) superconductor device, per se, or (c) a process of making or of
    operating either (a) or (b) or the combination thereof.


CLS 505/826
TXT Coating:  (Class 118):

    Subject matter under subclass 825 for performing a coating operation.


CLS 505/827
TXT Code converter:  (Class 340):

    Subject matter under subclass 825 including means for, (a) originating or
    emitting a coded set of discrete signals, or (b) translating one code into
    another code wherein the signal information content remains unchanged,
    though the format may differ.


CLS 505/828
TXT Modulator:  (Class 332), demodulator, or detector:  (Class 329):

    Subject matter under subclass 825 including means either, (a) to effect a
    process of modifying some characteristic of an electrical signal so that it
    varies in step with an instantaneous value of another signal to convey
    information, or (b) to operate on a modulated signal to recover the
    modulating signal.


CLS 505/829
TXT Electrical computer or data processing system:  (Class 364):

    Subject matter under subclass 825 including electrical apparatus and
    corresponding methods for performing data processing operations in which
    there is a significant change in the data, or for performing calculation
    operations.


CLS 505/830
TXT Electrical pulse counter, pulse divider, or shift register:  (Class 377):

    Subject matter under subclass 825 including a circuit or device for (a)
    making a count of electrical pulses, (b) producing output pulses which are
    a fraction of the number of input pulses (i.e., pulse divider), or (c)
    serially transforming information stored in and through a storage medium
    (i.e., shift register).


CLS 505/831
TXT Static information storage system or device:  (Class 365, 365/160):

    Subject matter under subclass 825 including apparatus or a corresponding
    process for storage and retrieval of information which does not require
    relative motion between the storage element and the information source.


CLS 505/832
TXT Josephson junction type:  (Class 365/162):

    Subject matter under subclass 831 wherein the storage system includes an
    electrical element, known as a Josephson junction -- a weak connection
    between superconductors through which the passage of paired electrons
    (Cooper pairs) is achieved -- which store information in the form of the
    presence or absence of a persistent current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    861,    864 and 865, for a Josephson junction device used in a nonlinear
    solid-state device system or circuit.

    874,    for a Josephson junction active solid- state device.


CLS 505/833
TXT Thin film type:  (Class 365/161):

    Subject matter under subclass 831 wherein the storage system includes an
    electrical element consisting of a thin film of conductive or insulative
    material deposited on a supporting material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    862,    for thin film-type electrical element used for switching in a
    nonlinear solid state device circuit.


CLS 505/834
TXT Plural (e.g., memory matrix, etc.):  (Class 365/161):

    Subject matter under subclass 833 including two or more thin film storage
    elements.


CLS 505/835
TXT Content addressed (i.e., associative memory type):  (Class 365/49, 161):

    Subject matter under subclass 834 wherein storage locations within the
    storage system are identified by their contents rather than by addresses.


CLS 505/836
TXT Location addressed (i.e., word organized memory type):  (Class 365/161):

    Subject matter under subclass 834 wherein each storage location contains a
    group of characters, called a word, arranged such that each position, or
    group of positions, in the word contains specific information and is
    addressed by a character, or characters, which identifies the location of
    the word.


CLS 505/837
TXT Random access (i.e., bit organized memory type):  (Class 365/161):

    Subject matter under subclass 834 wherein the storage elements can be
    addressed in random sequence.


CLS 505/838
TXT Plural:  (e.g., memory matrix, etc.):   (Class 365/160):

    Subject matter under subclass 831 including two or more static information
    storage systems or devices.


CLS 505/839
TXT Content addressed (i.e., associative memory type):  (Class 365/160):

    Subject matter under subclass 838 wherein storage locations within the
    storage system or device are identified by their contents rather than by
    addresses.


CLS 505/840
TXT Location addressed (i.e., word organized memory type):  (Class 365/160):

    Subject matter under subclass 838 wherein each storage location contains a
    group of characters, called a word, arranged such that each position, or
    group of positions, in the word contains specific information and is
    addressed by a character, or characters, which identifies the location of
    the word.


CLS 505/841
TXT Random access (i.e., bit organized memory type: (Class 365/160):

    Subject matter under subclass 838 wherein the storage locations within the
    storage system or device can be addressed in random sequence.


CLS 505/842
TXT Measuring and testing:  (Classes 73, 324, 356, and 374):

    Subject matter under subclass 825 comprising a method or apparatus for
    calibrating, inspecting, measuring, sampling, or testing.


CLS 505/843
TXT Electrical: (Class 324):

    Subject matter under subclass 842 wherein the method or apparatus for
    calibrating, inspecting, measuring, sampling, or testing either, (a)
    detects an electrical property of matter, or (b) detects a nonelectrical
    property by using an electrical principle of operation.


CLS 505/844
TXT Nuclear magnetic resonance (NMR) system or device:  (Class 324):

    Subject matter under subclass 843 wherein the energy interchange between
    precessing atomic particles and a surrounding variable magnetic field is
    measured at a preferred (resonant) frequency.


CLS 505/845
TXT Magnetometer:  (Class 324/248):

    Subject matter under subclass 843 wherein the electrical property of matter
    which is detected is the direction or intensity of a magnetic field.


CLS 505/846
TXT Using superconductive quantum interference device (i.e., SQUID):  (Class
    324/248):

    Subject matter under subclass 845 wherein the direction or intensity of a
    magnetic field is sensed by a device, known as a SQUID, comprised of a
    superconducting loop containing one or two weak links, known as Josephson
    junctions, which permit conduction through a thin dielectric layer by
    quantum mechanical tunneling.


CLS 505/847
TXT Thermal:  (Class 374):

    Subject matter under subclass 842 wherein the method or apparatus for
    calibrating, inspecting, measuring, sampling, or testing is designed to
    detect the kinetic energy of atoms or molecules within a body of matter.


CLS 505/848
TXT Radiant energy application:  (Class 250):

    Subject matter under subclass 825 including means for using, generating,
    controlling, or detecting energy propagated in the form of electromagnetic
    waves or travelling subatomic, atomic, or molecular particles.


CLS 505/849
TXT Infrared responsive electric signaling:  (Class 250/338+):

    Subject matter under subclass 848 including means to generate an electrical
    signal in response to irradiation by electromagnetic waves in the infrared
    range (approximately 760 nanometers to one millimeter).


CLS 505/850
TXT Protective circuit:  (Class 361/19):

    Subject matter under subclass 825 including means for electrically
    providing for the safety and protection of an electrical system or device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    872,    for a superconductor magnetic field shield which protects an
    electrical device or circuit from ambient magnetic fields.


CLS 505/851
TXT Control circuit for electromagnetic device:  (Class 361/141):

    Subject matter under subclass 825 comprising a circuit for the control of a
    relay or other electromagnetic device.


CLS 505/852
TXT Electric motor control:  (Class 318):

    Subject matter under subclass 825 wherein an electrical circuit or device,
    which controls the operation of an electric motor includes superconducting
    components.


CLS 505/853
TXT Oscillator:  (Class 331):

    Subject matter under subclass 825 including means for initiating and
    maintaining an electrical signal or an electromagnetic wave having a
    strictly periodic repetitious frequency.


CLS 505/854
TXT With solid state active element: (Class 331/107):

    Subject matter under subclass 853 wherein the electrical signal is
    generated by a circuit composed of semiconductors such as solid state
    diodes or transistors.

    (1)     Note.  Active devices include transistors and diodes but exclude
    impedance only devices such as resistors, capacitors, and inductors, which
    are considered to be passive devices.


CLS 505/855
TXT Amplifier:  (Class 330):

    Subject matter under subclass 825 wherein a variable electrical current or
    voltage input signal is applied to a device (i.e., amplifier) which
    controls a source of electrical energy applied to the same device from
    which is derived an enhanced output signal having substantially the same
    wave-form as the input signal.


CLS 505/856
TXT Electrical transmission or interconnection system:  (Class 307):

    Subject matter under subclass 825 wherein circuitry for the transmission of
    electricity between or among various active electrical devices is provided
    and a portion of the circuitry, one or more of the devices, or any
    combination thereof, is operated in a state of superconductivity.


CLS 505/857
TXT Nonlinear solid state device system or circuit:  (Class 307/200+):

    Subject matter under subclass 856 whose specific function is not provided
    for elsewhere comprising circuits or devices which include solid state
    devices or components through which charge carriers are conducted, the
    current versus voltage characteristic of such device or component being
    nonlinear.

    (1)     Note.  This definition excludes linear resistors, capacitors,
    inductors, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    830,    for solid-state pulse counters, pulse dividers, and shift registers.

    854,    for solid-state oscillators.

    855,    for solid-state amplifiers.

    873+,   for active solid-state devices (e.g., transistors, diodes, etc.),
    per se.


CLS 505/858
TXT Digital logic:  (Class 307/476):

    Subject matter under subclass 857 wherein nonarithmetical operations (e.g.,
    selecting, sorting, matching, comparing, etc.) are performed using digital
    (i.e., discontinuous or discrete) electrical signal information.


CLS 505/859
TXT Function of AND, OR, NAND, NOR or NOT:  (Class 307/462):

    Subject matter under subclass  858 wherein the digital operations performed
    are limited to those defined by the Boolean operations of AND, OR, NAND,
    NOR or NOT.


CLS 505/860
TXT Gating (i.e., switching) circuit:  (Class 307/245):

    Subject matter under subclass 857 including means whereby one signal (a
    controlling signal) is used to control another signal (a controlled signal)
    by permitting, or preventing, the transmission of the controlled signal
    along a given path of the circuit.


CLS 505/861
TXT With josephson junction:  (Class 307/245):

    Subject matter under subclass 860 wherein the means of control is a device,
    known as a Josephson junction, which permits conduction through a thin
    dielectric layer by quantum mechanical tunneling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    832,    for Josephson junctions used in static information storage systems.

    864     and 865, for Josephson junctions used in nonlinear solid state
    device circuits of other utilities.

    874,    for Josephson junction active solid state devices.


CLS 505/862
TXT With thin film device:  (Class 307/245):

    Subject matter under subclass 860 wherein the means of control includes an
    electrical element consisting of a thin film of conductive or insulative
    material deposited on a supporting material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    833,    for thin film-type electrical elements used in static information
    storage circuits.


CLS 505/863
TXT Stable state circuit for signal shaping, converting, or generating:  (Class
    307/277):

    Subject matter under subclass 857 including circuit means capable of at
    least one or more distinct current conductive stable states for, (a)
    producing an output signal having a particular waveform; or (b) modifying
    either, (1) a constant (DC) input, or (2) the waveform of a time varying
    (AC) input signal.

    (1)     Note.  The modified form or shape is not merely one of magnitude
    such as would result from a change in amplitude or frequency, but is the
    result of the modification or conversion of one waveform into a waveform of
    significantly different form a shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    853+,   for circuits capable of free-running or self-sustained oscillation,
    per se.


CLS 505/864
TXT With Josephson junction: (Class 307/277):

    Subject matter under subclass 863 wherein the waveform modifying circuit or
    device includes a device, known as a Josephson junction, which permits
    conduction through a thin dielectric layer by quantum mechanical tunneling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    832,    for Josephson junction-type devices used in static information
    storage systems.

    861     and 865, for Josephson junction devices used in nonlinear solid
    state device circuits of other utility.

    874,    for Josephson junction active solid state devices.


CLS 505/865
TXT With Josephson junction:  (Class 307/306):

    Subject matter under subclass 857 wherein at least one of the active
    circuit elements or devices includes a device, known as a Josephson
    junction, which permits conduction through a thin dielectric layer by
    quantum mechanical tunneling.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    832,    for Josephson junction-type devices used in static information
    storage systems.

    861     and 864, for Josephson junction devices used in nonlinear solid
    state device circuits of other utility.

    874,    for Josephson junction active solid state devices.


CLS 505/866
TXT Wave transmission line, network, waveguide, or microwave storage device
    (Class 333/99):

    Subject matter under subclass 825 including systems or devices which
    transmit, guide, or store electromagnetic energy.


CLS 505/867
TXT Electric power conversion system:  (Class 363):

    Subject matter under subclass 825 including means to perform a sequence or
    combination of at least two of the operations of, (a) current conversion,
    (b) phase conversion, or (c) frequency conversion.


CLS 505/868
TXT Current conversion:  (Class 363/14):

    Subject matter under subclass 867 wherein a conversion system includes
    means to change alternating current into direct current, or vice versa.


CLS 505/869
TXT Power supply, regulation, or energy storage system:  (Class 323):

    Subject matter under subclass 825 wherein an electrical source is coupled
    to an electrical load circuit and means are provided to store
    electromagnetic energy or to supply or control either, (a) the magnitude of
    the voltage or the current in the load circuit, or (b) the phase angle
    between the voltage and the current in the load circuit.


CLS 505/870
TXT Including transformer or inductor: (Class 323/360):

    Subject matter under subclass 869 wherein the load circuit is supplied with
    electricity by a transformer, an inductor, or a combination of the two.


CLS 505/871
TXT Magnetic lens:  (Class 250/396):

    Subject matter under subclass 825 including means to deflect, scan, spread,
    or focus a beam of electrically charged particles.


CLS 505/872
TXT Magnetic field shield:  (Class 307/91):

    Subject matter under subclass 825 including means to contain or otherwise
    limit the spatial distribution of a magnetic field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    850,    for superconductor protective circuits, per se.


CLS 505/873
TXT Active solid state device:  (Class 257):

    Subject matter under subclass 825 wherein a superconductive material forms
    a part of a solid state device such as a transistor or diode.

    (1)     Note.  Active devices include transistors and diodes but exclude
    impedance only devices such as resistors, capacitors, and inductors, which
    are considered to be passive devices.


CLS 505/874
TXT With Josephson junction (e.g., SQUID, etc.):  (Class 257):

    Subject matter under subclass 873 including a device, known as a Josephson
    junction, which permits conduction by quantum mechanical tunneling through
    a thin dielectric layer situated between two superconductors.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    832,    for Josephson junction-type devices used in static information
    storage systems.

    861,    864 and 865, for Josephson junction devices used in nonlinear solid
    state device circuits of various utility.


CLS 505/875
TXT Combined with housing and cryogenic fluid cooling:  (Class 257):

    Subject matter under subclass 873 including, (a) fluid means to cool the
    device to the critical temperature for superconductivity, and (b) means to
    house the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    878,    for electrical generator or motor structure of the rotary
    dynamoelectric type with superconductive temperature cooling means.

    883,    for housings for plural diverse electrical components, per se.

    885,    for cooling of superconductors, per se.


CLS 505/876
TXT Electrical generator or motor structure:  (Class 310):

    Subject matter under subclass 825 wherein one or more structural members of
    an electric motor or generator exhibit superconductivity during operation
    of the motor or generator.


CLS 505/877
TXT Rotary dynamoelectric type:  (Class 310/40+):

    Subject matter under subclass 876 wherein the motor or generator includes a
    working member which rotates about an axis under the influence of
    electromagnetic forces.


CLS 505/878
TXT With cooling:  (Class 310/52+):

    Subject matter under subclass 877 wherein means are provided for cooling
    one or more structural members of the motor or generator in order to
    establish a state of superconductivity within the member(s).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    875,    for active solid state superconductive devices combined with a
    housing and cryogenic cooling means.

    885,    for cooling of superconductors, per se.


CLS 505/879
TXT Magnet or electromagnet:  (Class 335/216):

    Subject matter under subclass 825 comprising, (a) structure of permanent
    magnets, electromagnets, or a combination of the two types, or (b) magnets
    or electromagnets adapted for use as a source of magnetic flux for
    performing mechanical work.


CLS 505/880
TXT Inductor:  (Class 336/DIG 1):

    Subject matter under subclass 825 comprising one or more coils, with or
    without a permeable core, whose sole purpose is to introduce inductance
    into an electrical circuit.

    (1)     Note.  Both transformers and inductive reactors are included herein.

    (2)     Note.  Excluded are inductor devices designed to, (a) produce a
    magnetic field which radiates energy not returned to the device, or (b)
    perform mechanical work.


CLS 505/881
TXT Resistance device responsive to magnetic field:  (Class 338/32):

    Subject matter under subclass 825 wherein a superconductive material forms
    a part of a resistor whose electrical resistance can be changed in
    proportion to the strength of an applied magnetic field.


CLS 505/882
TXT Circuit maker and breaker:  (Class 200):

    Subject matter under subclass 825 including devices of general application
    which are used for closing or opening electrical circuits and the
    combination of such devices with their operating means.


CLS 505/883
TXT Housing and mounting assembly with plural diverse electrical components:
    (Class 361/331+):

    Subject matter under subclass 825 comprising structures for enclosing or
    supporting plural diverse electrical components.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    875,    for housings combined with active solid state devices and cooling
    means.

    885,    for apparatus for mounting, supporting, or housing superconductors,
    per se.


CLS 505/884
TXT Conductor:  (Class 174):

    Subject matter under subclass 825 comprising details of the structure of
    superconductors or of apparatus for mounting, supporting, or housing
    superconductors, per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    875,    for active solid state superconductor devices combined with a
    housing and cryogenic fluid cooling.

    883,    for housings and mounting assemblies with plural diverse electrical
    components.


CLS 505/885
TXT Cooling, or feeding, circulating, or distributing fluid; in superconductive
    apparatus:  (Class 174/15):

    Subject matter under subclass 884 including means for bringing a cooling
    fluid into thermal contact with a superconductor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    875,    for active solid state superconductor devices combined with a
    housing and cryogenic fluid cooling.

    878,    for rotary dynamoelectric-type electrical generator or motor
    structure with cooling.


CLS 505/886
TXT Cable:  (Class 174/15):

    Subject matter under subclass 885 wherein the superconductor is in the form
    of a cable.


CLS 505/887
TXT Conductor structure: (Classes 174/126 and 128):

    Subject matter under subclass 884 including details of the structure of
    superconductors other than the structure providing for cooling or fluid
    feeding.


CLS 505/888
TXT Refrigeration:  (Class 62):

    Subject matter under subclass 825 including (a) process or apparatus
    peculiar to removing heat from a substance; (b) the resultant product of
    part a; or (c) process or apparatus peculiar to handling the latter as a
    stored product.


CLS 505/889
TXT Utilizing rare earth material:

    Subject matter under subclass 888 wherein a material containing the
    chemical element Yttrium with atomic *number 39 or any of the group of
    chemical elements with atomic numbers 58 to 71 inclusive is used to remove
    heat.


CLS 505/890
TXT Heat pipe device:

    Subject matter under subclass 888 wherein the apparatus includes an
    intermediate fluent heat exchanger for removing thermal energy, which
    intermediate heat exchanger employs solid or particulate material.


CLS 505/891
TXT Magnetic or electrical effect cooling:

    Subject matter under subclass 888 wherein electromagnetic force is used to
    directly remove heat.


CLS 505/892
TXT Magnetic device cooling:

    Subject matter under subclass 888 wherein the substance having heat removed
    therefrom is itself an electromagnetic apparatus.


CLS 505/893
TXT Spectrometer:
    Subject matter under subclass 892 wherein the electromagnetic apparatus
    being cooled is a spectroscope.


CLS 505/894
TXT Cyclic cryogenic system (e.g., Sterling, Gifford-McMahon, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 888 wherein the heat is removed by means of a
    generally closed repeating sequence of operations.


CLS 505/895
TXT With regenerative heat exchanger:

    Subject matter under subclass 894 which includes an intermediate fluent
    means for trans- ferring thermal energy.


CLS 505/896
TXT Special refrigerant compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 888 wherein a particular unusual material
    consisting of atoms or ions of two or more different chemical elements in
    definite proportions and generally having properties unlike its constituent
    chemical elements is utilized for removing heat.


CLS 505/897
TXT Cryogenic media transfer:

    Subject matter under subclass 888 specially adapted for handling and moving
    very low temperature material used for removing heat.


CLS 505/898
TXT Cryogenic envelope:

    Subject matter under subclass 888 including structure or housing for
    preserving or maintaining a very low temperature.


CLS 505/899
TXT Method of cooling:

    Subject matter under subclass 888 including processes specially adapted for
    (a) removing heat from a substance; (b) maintaining a very low temperature
    environment; or (c) preserving such an environment.


CLS 505/900
TXT Heat exchange:  (Class 165):

    Subject matter under subclass 825 including a process or device specially
    adapted for transferring thermal energy from one material to another
    material or the environment.


CLS 505/901
TXT Heat pipe:

    Subject matter under subclass 900 wherein an intermediate fluent heat
    exchanger removes or transfers thermal energy, which intermediate heat
    exchanger employs solid or particulate material.


CLS 505/902
TXT Railway (e.g., rapid transit, etc.):  (Class 104):

    Subject matter under subclass 825 including (a) railroad rolling stock and
    track, each of which is modified for interrelation and cooperation with
    each other; (b) amusement or rapid transit railroad type apparatus; (c)
    process, fixture, or appliance specially adapted for use with a or b; and
    (d) any miscellaneous feature relating to a or b not elsewhere classified.


CLS 505/903
TXT Suspension (e.g., magnetic, electrodynamic, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 902 wherein the railway system vehicle is
    adapted to travel along a guideway while held above the guideway by means
    of electromagnetic or other dynamic force.


CLS 505/904
TXT Guidance means (i.e., in addition to the track):

    Subject matter under subclass 903 for structure or means, other than the
    track, which structure or means is especially adapted for regulating or
    directing the course of the railway vehicle.


CLS 505/905
TXT Motor structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 903 including particular propulsion means for
    causing or producing motion.


CLS 505/906
TXT Switching device (i.e., electrical not railway stock diverting):

    Subject matter under subclass 903 including means or structure for making
    and breaking an electrical circuit or to divert electrical current from one
    conductor to another.


CLS 505/907
TXT Support structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 903 for a fixture, appliance, or feature
    which carries the weight of an article or otherwise holds or steadies an
    article against the pull of gravity.


CLS 505/908
TXT Method of operation:

    Subject matter under subclass 903 including a process of directing,
    causing, or allowing a railway system or an essential part thereof to
    function.


CLS 505/909
TXT Power plant:  (Class 60):

    Subject matter under subclass 825 involving the driving of a load by means
    of conversion of heat, pressure, radiant, gravitational, or other energy
    source into mechanical motion.


CLS 505/910
TXT Pump:  (Class 417):

    Subject matter under subclass 825 including process or apparatus especially
    adapted for moving a slurry, fluent material, or the like, if moved in a
    manner not inconsistent with the handling of fluid, from one place or
    location to another place or location different from whence it came.


CLS 505/911
TXT Fluid reaction surface (i.e., impeller):  (Class 416):

    Subject matter under subclass 825 including a working structure which
    interacts with a working fluid so as to cause reactive movement of the
    working structure or, alternatively, reactive movement of the working fluid.


CLS 505/912
TXT Metal founding:  (Class 164):

    Subject matter under subclass 825 including process or apparatus (a) for
    shaping fluid metallic material; (b) for shaping of fluent material to
    produce a mold to carry out a; (c) for shaping a fluent material to produce
    a form or pattern to be used in b: (d) for treating, mixing, or
    mechanically working a metallic material while molding or while the
    metallic material is in a mold; or (e) not elsewhere provided for to
    perfect or effect a or b.


CLS 505/913
TXT Casting process:

    Subject matter under subclass 912 including a process of shaping fluent
    metallic material against a forming surface.


CLS 505/914
TXT Using magnetic or electric field:

    Subject matter under subclass 913 wherein an energy quantity such as an
    electromagnetic wave or an electric field is applied directly to the work
    material.


CLS 505/915
TXT Making composite product:

    Subject matter under subclass 913 including a process of producing a
    multilayered article having at least two distinct zones of metal of the
    same or different materials.


CLS 505/916
TXT Continuous casting:

    Subject matter under subclass 913 wherein a portion of a cast product is
    removed from a forming mold or surface as a further contiguous portion is
    cast.


CLS 505/917
TXT Mechanically manufacturing superconductor:  (Classes 29, 72, and 228):

    Subject matter under subclass 825 for mechanically manufacturing a
    superconductor including (a) process or apparatus for metal working,
    shaping, or deforming; (b) process or apparatus for metal fusion bonding,
    by means other than electric heating, two juxtaposed or engaging
    form-sustaining work parts or  (c) combined diverse process or apparatus of
    a and b; or (d) combined diverse mechanical manufacturing process or
    apparatus not elsewhere classified.


CLS 505/918
TXT With metallurgical heat treating:

    Subject matter under subclass 917 including thermal treatment, other than a
    simple anneal or stress relief, to effect a permanent chemical or physical
    change in the properties of a metal workpiece.


CLS 505/919
TXT Reactive formation of superconducting intermetallic compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 918 wherein the heat treating creates a
    superconducting layer or portion thereof by means of a chemical reaction
    involving two or more metallic constituents, at least one of which is
    generally supplied by diffusion.


CLS 505/920
TXT Utilizing diffusion barrier:

    Subject matter under subclass 919 wherein the actual transport, i.e.,
    diffusion, of discrete atoms through the lattice of the workpiece is
    directly regulated generally to minimize undesired side reactions produced
    by the heat treating.


CLS 505/921
TXT Metal working prior to treating:

    Subject matter under subclass 919 wherein metal deforming or shaping is
    done before the heat treating creates the superconducting intermetallic
    compound.


CLS 505/922
TXT Making Josephson junction device:

    Subject matter under subclass 917 for manufacturing a device or article
    having the Josephson effect, i.e., the tunneling of electron pairs through
    a thin insulating barrier between two superconducting materials.


CLS 505/923
TXT Making device having semiconductive component (e.g., integrated circuit,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 917 for manufacturing a device or article
    which includes a solid crystalline material whose electrical conductivity
    is intermediate between that of a metal and that of an insulator, ranging
    from about 105 mhos to 10 - 7 mhos per meter, and is generally strongly
    temperature dependent.


CLS 505/924
TXT Making superconductive magnet or coil:

    Subject matter under subclass 917 for manufacturing (a) a spiral or helical
    arrangement of superconducting material or (b) an electromagnet whose
    winding is made of a superconductor.


CLS 505/925
TXT Making superconductive joint:

    Subject matter under subclass 917 for manufacturing a superconducting
    device or article having a junction of two superconductors or other
    superconducting paths for current, which junction, per se, is
    superconducting.


CLS 505/926
TXT Mechanically joining superconductive members:

    Subject matter under subclass 917 for manufacturing a superconducting
    device or article having a junction of two superconductors, which junction
    is an assembly or uses a separate fastener part.


CLS 505/927
TXT Metallurgically bonding superconductive members:

    Subject matter under subclass 917 for manufacturing a superconducting
    device or article having a junction of two superconductors, which junction
    is effected by metal fusion welding.


CLS 505/928
TXT Metal deforming:

    Subject matter under subclass 917 including a metal working or shaping step.


CLS 505/929
TXT By extruding:

    Subject matter under subclass 928 wherein the metal deforming includes
    forcing the metal work through an orifice of a die to produce a
    continuously formed product.


CLS 505/930
TXT By drawing:

    Subject matter under subclass 928 wherein the metal deforming includes
    pulling the metal work through a die to reduce the work's cross section.


CLS 505/931
TXT Classifying, separating, and assorting solids using magnetism:  (Class 209):

    Subject matter under subclass 825 including method or apparatus, which sets
    apart, distributes into groups of like kind, or segregates solid materials
    by means of electromagnetic force, which causes the solid material to be
    separated according to the degree of responsivity to such force.


CLS 505/932
TXT Separating diverse particulates:

    Subject matter under subclass 931 for separating different types of unlike
    particles or very small pieces.


CLS 505/933
TXT In liquid slurry:

    Subject matter under subclass 932 wherein the diverse particulates to be
    separated are supplied in free-flowing pumpable suspension in a liquid.


CLS 505/950
TXT MANUFACTURING SYSTEM OR APPARATUS FOR MAKING HIGH TEMPERATURE (I.E., Tc
    GREATER THAN 30 K) SUPERCONDUCTOR PRODUCT, DEVICE, ARTICLE, OR STOCK (I.E.,
    WHICH SYSTEM OR APPARATUS DOES NOT ITSELF CONTAIN A SUPERCONDUCTING
    COMPONENT):

    Cross-reference art collection of systems or apparatus utilized for the
    manufacturing of high temperature (Tc  30 K) superconductor product,
    article, or stock that is not itself a superconductor product, device,
    article, or stock and that does not contain a superconducting component.


CLS 505/951
TXT NPL PLUS FP HIGH TEMPERATURE (Tc GREATER THAN 30 K) SUPERCONDUCTOR:
    MATERIAL (I.E., ELEMENT, COMPOUND, OR COMPOSITION) DEVICES, SYSTEMS,
    APPARATUS, COMPONENTS, STOCK, PROCESSES OF USING SAME, OR PROCESSES OF
    PRODUCING OR TREATING HIGH TEMPERATURE (Tc GREATER THAN 30 K)
    SUPERCONDUCTOR MATERIAL OR SUPERCONDUCTOR CONTAINING PRODUCTS OR PRECURSORS
    THEREOF:

    Cross-reference art collection of nonpatent literature and foreign patents
    for high temperature (Tc  30 K) superconductors including material (i.e.,
    element, compound, or composition), devices, systems, apparatus,
    components, stock, processes of using same, or processes of producing or
    treating high temperature (Tc  30 K) superconductor material or
    superconductor containing products or precursors thereof.

    (1)     Note.  This collection of prior art, due to its unique origin and
    chronological numbering of nonpatent literature, is retained intact
    providing a backup file. Accession numbering found on the earlier nonpatent
    literature is linked to a bibliographic file enabling the identification
    and reordering of lost copies. This subclass may eventually be eliminated.


CLS 507/
TTL EARTH BORING, WELL TREATING, AND OIL FIELD CHEMISTRY

CLS 507/
TXT (1)     Compositions of matter for use in earth boring, well treating, or
    preventing contaminant deposits in petroleum oil conduits having or not
    having structure, physical form, or heterogeneous arrangement of components.

    (2)     Processes of making, or processes peculiar to making such
    compositions and for which there is no provision elsewhere.

    (3)     Mere methods of use of said compositions or of a compound in earth
    boring, well treating, or in preventing contaminant deposits in petroleum
    oil conduits.

    NOTE

    (1)     Note.  In this class, each composition and the processes that are
    peculiar to making the same are classified based on the whole composition
    and its complete or primary function or quality, and such processes are
    classified with the corresponding composition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, for compositions thereof or
    materials or ingredients used in the making of coating or plastic
    compositions which are not elsewhere classified (e.g., cement, etc.).

    127,    Sugar, Starch and Carbohydrates, for processes for refining and
    manufacturing sugar, starch, and other carbohydrates.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, for washing or cleaning
    processes which include the use of detergents for contacting liquids with
    solids.

    137,    Fluid Handling, for miscellaneous processes of handling materials
    in flow lines.

    166,    Wells, for processes of treating or operating a well.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, for processes of drilling wells.
    See Notes under the definition for Class 507, subclass 100.

    184,    Lubrication, for lubricating processes.

    208,    Mineral Oils: Processes and  Products.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, for conditioning well fluids
    above ground.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 302+ for colloids with uses nonspecific to
    earth boring.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds.

    366,    Agitating, for processes of mixing materials by agitation.
    Manipulative mixing processes for compounding a composition from a
    plurality of ingredients are properly classified in Class 366 only if the
    ingredients are not sufficiently identified to form a basis for
    classification in Class 507 or other appropriate composition classes.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 258+ for a method of
    earth treatment or control.

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions.

    422,    Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing, Preserving or Sterilizing, and
    Chemical Apparatus, for processes of corrosion inhibition nonspecific to
    earth boring.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, for compounds and nonmetallic
    elements, including processes for their manufacture.

    427,    Coating Processes, for coating processes, in general.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles.

    435,    Chemistry: Molecular Biology and Microbiology, for processes of
    making chemical compounds which include fermentation or ferments or other
    compositions for use in such processes or processes of making them, also
    for compositions comprising enzymes or microorganisms which are not
    specific to earth boring.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, for resins and rubbers, per
    se, and for resin containing compositions, the use or utility of which is
    not specifically provided for elsewhere.




CLS 507/90
TXT PREVENTING CONTAMINANT DEPOSITS IN PETROLEUM OIL CONDUITS:
     Composition under the class definition specialized and designed for
    addition to petroleum oils during transportation through conduits to
    prevent fouling or clogging of the conduits due to components of the
    petroleum oils precipitating out during the transportation, or method of
    preparation, or mere method of use of said composition or a compound for
    the purposes mentioned above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also includes those processes of treating the
    oils during transportation with nonmineral oil additives which are
    distinguished by the composition employed and do not include any
    significant manipulative steps.  The broad steps of introducing the
    additives and using pressure or other means recited by name only to
    continue conveyance of the oil through the conduit will not take the patent
    out of the scope of this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, appropriate subclasses for processes
    of treating fuel oils to prevent corrosion of pipelines used to transport
    such fuel oils.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 13 for miscellaneous processes of handling
    materials in flow lines wherein flow of the fluent material is facilitated
    by the addition of material which affects the flow characteristics of the
    fluent material or by the application of heat or other forms of energy.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclass 47 for processes of
    preventing corrosion of the equipment during chemical conversion of mineral
    oils, subclasses 177+ for processes of preventing corrosion of equipment by
    refining the mineral oil to remove impurities which may cause such
    corrosion, and subclass 370 for miscellaneous treatments of mineral oils
    during transportation through conduits.

    252,    Compositions,  subclasses 387+ for an anti-corrosion composition of
    general utility.

    508,    Solid Antifriction Devices, Materials Therefor, Lubricant and
    Separant Compositions for Moving Solid Surfaces, and Miscellaneous Mineral
    Oil Compositions, subclasses 110+, for mineral lubricating oil compositions
    which contain additives for preventing corrosion of the pipe lines during
    transportation of the oil.


CLS 507/100
TXT EARTH BORING:
    Earth boring composition under the class definition which is (a) a liquid,
    gas, or fluid solid composition or compositional additive therefor which is
    specialized and designed for use in earth boring while drilling is in
    progress, e.g., a well drilling mud; (b) process of preparing said
    composition; or (c) mere method of use of said composition or a compound
    for the purpose of (a) above.

    (1)     Note.  An earth boring additive consisting of a single compound is
    classified in one of the compound classes (e.g., Classes 260, 423,  etc.).

    (2)     Note.  Examples of compositional additives included in this and the
    indented subclasses:

            filter/water loss reducing agents, lost circulation controlling
    agents, packer fluids, corrosion inhibitors, gas hydrate inhibitors,
    lubricant additives for prevention of stuck pipe, other agents disclosed as
    useful in the physical or chemical control of the well fluid or borehole
    environment while drilling.

    (3)     Note.  Methods of use included in this and the indented subclasses
    are those whose operative steps are limited to:

      (a)   preparative steps of the fluid or additive prior to or concurrent
    with injection into the wellbore,

      (b)   mere circulation or injection of a compound or composition while
    drilling, or

     (c)    mere mixing of a compound or composition with a circulating fluid.


            The mere circulation of a drilling fluid encompasses the pumping of
    said fluid into and out of the wellbore and returning said fluid back into
    the well.  The recitation of a universal practice, such as the mere removal
    of cuttings from the fluid, does not take a method claim out of this
    subclass.

            Required characteristics of the borehole environment will not take
    a method claim out of this subclass, e.g., temperature, presence of
    specific materials, or conditions of the earthen formation.

    (4)     Note.  Where a component is generically presented in inconsistent
    or functional terms (e.g., surfactant, fluid loss control agent, etc.) in
    some of the claims, any material(s) later specified as encompassed within
    the scope of said terms will limit said terms for classification purposes.
    For example, if claim 1 calls for a surfactant and claim 2 specifies the
    surfactant as being a PEG ether, and there are no other claims specifying
    the surfactant differently, then the original claim is classified in
    subclass 136 and the general rules of cross-referencing still follow.

    (5)     Note.  The following rule applies to subclasses 101-139.
    Traditional rules of classification require no mandatory cross-references
    beyond the lowest controlling claim covered by this schedule.  It is
    strongly recommended that documents be cross-referenced according to all
    appropriate subclasses, mandatory or not, based on all discrete organic
    components of the claimed composition. For example, a composition
    comprising hydroxyethylcellulose, a higher fatty acid, and lignite is
    classified in subclass 107 as the original and additional cross-references
    in subclasses 114 and 138 are highly recommended.

    (6)     Note.  When both ions of a salt are organic, each ion is
    classifiable as a separate component.  This is based on the fact that when
    in solution the two ions of a salt separate into two distinct components,
    each one having a distinct function.  For example in this schedule, fatty
    acid salts of imidazoline are classified first on the nitrogen-containing
    imidazoline cation and second on the fatty acid anion.  However, if a salt
    is presented that contains an organic ion with an organic counterion
    alternatively with an inorganic counterion and the organic counterion is
    not controlling for classification purposes, then only the former organic
    ion will be classified.

    (7)     Note.  Lost circulation agents are included herein which may or may
    not be used while drilling is in progress. There is sufficient confusion
    over the difference between lost circulation and fluid loss to warrant the
    above exception.

    (8)     Note.  Patents are classified in this and the indented subclasses
    based on the materials introduced into the wellbore.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclasses 244.1+, for well processes involving more
    manipulative detail than in (3) Note, above.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, for processes involving a positive
    recitation of boring or cutting the earth and the (3) Note, above; subclass
    42 for processes of testing, measuring, etc., by release of an indicating
    agent in the drilling fluid; subclass 53 for processes of enlarging an
    existing borehole; subclass 54 for processes of fluid circulation entirely
    below ground; subclasses 58+ for processes comprising earth sampling steps;
    subclasses 61+ for directional drilling processes; subclass 64 for
    processes comprising a chemical reaction in situ; subclasses 65+ for
    processes of boring with fluid involving more than the conventional use of
    fluid; subclas 66 for processes of treating spent or used fluid which has
    been returned to the earth surface from the borehole; subclass 67 for
    processes involving fluid erosion; subclass 68 for processes of treating a
    gaseous drilling fluid to prevent agglomerating or werting by liquid
    naturally on the borehole; subclass 69 for processes comprising the use of
    liquid and gaseous materials; subclass 70 for processes comprising drilling
    with two or more liquids which remain separated in the borehole; subclass
    71 for processes of drilling with a gaseous fluid; subclass 72 for
    processes to prevent circulation losses.

    260,    Chemistry, Carbon Compounds, for preparative methods of organic
    carbon compounds devoid of a method of use step in earth boring.

    423,    Chemistry, Inorganic, for preparative methods of inorganic
    compounds devoid of a method of use step in earth boring.

    508,    Solid Antifriction Devices, Materials Therefor, Lubricant and
    Separant Compositions for Moving Solid Surfaces, and Miscellaneous Mineral
    Oil Compositions, particularly subclasses 110+, for lubricants in general.


CLS 507/101
TXT Contains enzyme or living microorganism: Composition under subclass 100
    comprising an enzyme or a microorganism which is living when injected into
    the wellbore.

    (1)     Note. Cross-referencing within Class 507 according to all remaining
    organic components of the composition is strongly recommended.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclass 246 for processes involving the use of a
    microorganism.

    435,    Chemistry: Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 183+ for
    enzyme containing compositions and subclasses 243+ for microorganism
    containing compositions nonspecific to earth boring.


CLS 507/102
TXT Contains intended gaseous phase at entry into wellbore:

    Compositions under subclass 100 which have an intentional gaseous phase
    present as they are initially placed in the wellbore.

    (1)     Note.  Drilling fluids comprising the unintended presence of a gas,
    especially when such presence is avoided, are classified according to the
    other composition components.

    (2)     Note.  A claimed composition with the intended creation of a gas
    inside the wellbore by in situ reaction is classified according to the
    components present at entry into the wellbore.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclasses 270 and 270.2 for injecting gaseous gel and
    surfactant; subclass 300 for well processes including the creation of a gas
    inside the wellbore by in situ reaction; and subclasses 401+ for injecting
    a gas or gas mixture.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclass 69 for processes
    comprising the use of liquid and gaseous materials and subclass 71 for
    processes of drilling with a gaseous fluid.


CLS 507/103
TXT Contains organic component:
    Composition under subclass 100 including an organic component which is one
    having carbon therein and which is further characterized by the presence in
    the molecule of (a) two carbon atoms bonded together, (b) one atom of
    carbon bonded to at least one atom of hydrogen or halogen, or (c) one atom
    of carbon bonded to at least one atom of nitrogen by a single or double
    bond, with the proviso that hydrocyanic acid, cyanogen, isocyanic acid,
    cyanamide, cyanogen halides, isothiocyanic acid, metal carbides, and
    graphite are excluded from being organic compounds.

    (1)     Note.  Components or compositions thereof reciting heavy
    distillation products (i.e., bottoms or pitch) of an originally specified
    material are classified according to said original material unless said
    products are otherwise identified.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of components included in this subclass which are
    not provided for below are:  petrolatum, paraffin, nonfatty waxes, rubber,
    organometallic complexes, and other compounds devoid of provided for
    functional groups, such as lower fatty (i.e., those having less than 7
    carbons) organic acids, etc.

    (3)     Note.  When a generic oil (e.g., mineral oil, fuel oil, etc.) is
    disclosed as part of a composition, the composition is classified according
    to the other components.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    910,    for a composition with an oil continuous phase containing no
    aqueous phase.


CLS 507/104
TXT Organic component is cellular or fibrous material derived from plant or
    animal source (e.g., wood, nutshell, paper, leather, cotton, etc.):
    Composition under subclass 103 which contains a cellular or fibrous
    material derived from a plant or animal source, such as wood, nutshell,
    seed, cotton, paper, leather, hair, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Cellular material includes naturally occurring material
    which still retains a certain amount of the original tissue structure of
    the plant or animal.

    (2)     Note.  Grinding, pulverizing, and comminuting does not result in
    the loss of original tissue structure of such material, whereas extracting
    generally results in the loss of original tissue structure in at least one
    of the products (i.e., the product being extracted).  In an extraction,
    however, some original tissue structure may not be destroyed, i.e., the
    material from which a product is being extracted may retain structure.

    (3)     Note.  Fossilized materials are not included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    for earth boring compositions comprising enzymes or living
    microorganisms.

    107,    for fossilized humates.

    112+,   for cellulose or derivatives thereof, which in the absence of
    information to the contrary, is presumed devoid of cell structure.

    131+,   for proteins containing no phosphorous, which in the absence of
    information to the contrary, is presumed devoid of cell structure.


CLS 507/105
TXT Organic component contains fluorine bonded directly to carbon: Composition
    under subclass 103 containing a component having a direct carbon to
    fluorine bond.


CLS 507/106
TXT Organic component is lignin or humate or derivative thereof (e.g., tannin,
    quebracho extract, etc.): Composition under subclass 103 which is a lignin
    or humate component comprising humic or polyphenolic containing substances
    or derivatives thereof (e.g., tannins, lignins, quebracho extract, pulp
    liquor, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is a graft copolymer comprising a
    humate component grafted onto a polymer or resin.


CLS 507/107
TXT Humate component is fossilized (e.g., lignite, leonardite, brown coal,
    etc.): Composition under subclass 106 wherein the humate component is
    fossilized (e.g., lignite, leonardite, brown coal, ASTM Type IV coal, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is a fossilized humate component
    grafted onto a polymer or resin.


CLS 507/108
TXT Lignin or humate component contains sulfur or is reacted with substance
    containing sulfur (e.g., lignosulfonate, etc.): Composition under subclass
    107 wherein the lignin or humate component contains sulfur or has been
    reacted with a substance containing sulfur (e.g., lignosulf(on)ate,
    sulfoalkylated humates, such as sulfomethylated quebracho, sulfite liquor,
    etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is a humate component containing
    sulfur or reacted with sulfur which is also grafted onto a polymer or resin.

    (2)     Note.  The final component need not contain sulfur.


CLS 507/109
TXT Includes metal compound other than an alkali or alkaline earth metal
    compound (e.g., Al, Cr, Fe, Mn, Cu, etc.): Composition under subclass 108
    wherein said composition contains a metal compound other than an alkali or
    alkaline earth metal compound.

    (1)     Note.  Alkali or alkaline earth metals include Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs,
    Fr, Be, Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba, and Ra.

    (2)     Note.  Included within this subclass are compositions which contain:


      (i)   a lignin or humate component containing sulfur or reacted with a
    substance containing sulfur, and

      (ii)  a metal other than alkali or alkaline earth metal,
    regardless of whether the two components (i and ii) are part of the same
    compound.


CLS 507/110
TXT Organic component is carbohydrate or derivative thereof (e.g., sugar or
    gum, such as galactomannan, xanthan, etc.) or carboxylic acid ester of an
    alcohol which has five or more hydroxy groups bonded directly to carbons:
    Composition comprising a compound under subclass 103 containing an organic
    component which is a carbohydrate or derivative thereof or a carboxylic
    acid ester of an alcohol which has five or more hydroxy groups bonded
    directly to carbons (e.g., sorbitan alkylate, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Carbohydrate denotes a compound with the empirical formula
    Cx(H20)y, wherein x is 5 or more and y is 5 or more, or derivative thereof
    (e.g., isolated gums, (poly)saccharides, sugars, etc.).

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass is a carbohydrate or derivative
    which is grafted onto a polymer or resin.


CLS 507/111
TXT Carbohydrate is starch or derivative thereof:
    Composition under subclass 110 wherein said carbohydrate is starch or a
    derivative thereof such as modified starch.


CLS 507/112
TXT Carbohydrate is cellulose or derivative thereof: Composition under subclass
    110 wherein said carbohydrate is cellulose or a derivative thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for fibrous cellulose in which the fibrous character has been
    retained from an original plant or animal source (e.g., paper, cotton,
    etc.).


CLS 507/113
TXT Carboxyalkylcellulose (e.g., CMC, CMHEC, etc.):
    Composition under subclass 112 wherein said cellulose derivative is a
    carboxyalkylcellulose (e.g., carboxymethylcellulose (CMC), etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Also included in this subclass is a carboxyalkylcellulose
    which has been further derivatized (e.g.,
    hydroxyethylcarboxymethylcellulose (CMHEC), etc.).


CLS 507/114
TXT Hydroxyalkylcellulose (e.g., HEC, etc.):
    Composition under subclass 112 wherein said cellulose derivative is a
    hydroxyalkyl ether cellulose (e.g., hydroxyethylcellulose (HEC), etc.).


CLS 507/115
TXT Carbohydrate is hydroxyalkyl ether derivative (e.g., HPG, etc.):
    Composition under subclass 110 wherein said carbohydrate derivative is a
    hydroxyalkyl ether carbohydrate (e.g., hydroxypropylguar (HPG), etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for hydroxyalkylcellulose.


CLS 507/116
TXT Ester is higher fatty or carboxylic acid ester (e.g., sorbitan oleate,
    etc.): Composition under subclass 110 wherein said ester is a higher fatty
    or carboxylic acid ester of an alcohol having five or more hydroxy groups
    bonded directly to carbons.

    (1)     Note.  A higher fatty acid denotes a monocarboxylic acid containing
    an unbroken chain of at least seven carbon atoms bonded to a carboxyl
    group.


CLS 507/117
TXT Organic component is solid synthetic resin:
    Composition under subclass 103 wherein the organic component is a solid
    synthetic resin.

    (1)     Note.  A solid synthetic resin for the purpose of this class is a
    polymer which is described as a solid as such or described in one of the
    following terms:

            1. coagulated 2. elastic 3. elastomeric 4. friable 5. meltable 6.
    molten 7. powder 8.  rubber 9. thermoplastic.

            A wax is not considered to be a solid even if defined by one or
    more of the above terms.

    (2)     Note. In this area, the classification is dependent on the first
    appearing monomer which is either part of the polymeric backbone or has
    been reacted subsequent to polymerization, such as a graft or block
    copolymer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106+,   for humate, lignin, lignite, or  lignosulfonate graft copolymers.

    112+,   for carbohydrate or gum graft  copolymers.

    136,    for polyalkoxylates (e.g.,  polyalkoxylated alkylphenol, etc.)  or
    PEGtype polymers.


CLS 507/118
TXT Resin is polymer derived from ethylenic monomers only (e.g., maleic,
    itaconic, etc.): Composition under subclass 117 containing a resin which is
    a polymer derived from ethylenically unsaturated monomers only.

    (1)     Note.  Crosslinking an ethylenic polymer with a nonethylenic
    crosslinking agent will not take the polymer out of this subclass.

    (2)     Note. The ethylenically unsaturated monomer requires the presence
    of two aliphatic carbon atoms bonded together by a double or triple bond.
    See Class 526, subclass 72, for a detailed discussion of polymers from only
    ethylenic monomers.


CLS 507/119
TXT Polymer derived from acrylic acid monomer or derivative:
    Composition under subclass 118 containing a polymer derived from at least
    one acrylic acid monomer or derivative, (e.g., from CH2=C(R)-X, wherein X
    is carbonyl, etc.,  and R is H or alkyl).

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are methacrylate polymers, etc.


CLS 507/120
TXT Nitrogen is attached directly or indirectly to the acrylic acid monomer or
    derivative by nonionic bonding (e.g., acrylamide, acrylonitrile, etc.):

    Composition under subclass 119, wherein nitrogen is attached to the acrylic
    moiety through direct or indirect nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  A composition with nitrogen as part of a mere counterion to
    an ethylenic moiety is not a basis for including such a composition in this
    subclass.  For example, ammonium polyacrylates are included in subclass 119.


CLS 507/121
TXT Sulfur is attached directly or indirectly to the acrylic acid monomer or
    derivative by nonionic bonding (e.g., acrylamidoalkane sulfonates, etc.):

    Composition under subclass 120 wherein both nitrogen and sulfur are
    attached to the acrylic moiety through direct or indirect nonionic bonding,
    (e.g., acrylamidoalkylsulfonates, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  A composition with nitrogen and/or sulfur as part of a mere
    counterion to an ethylenic moiety is not a basis for including such a
    composition in this subclass.  For example, poly
    (N,N,N-trialkyl-aminoalkylacrylate) sulfate salt is included in subclass
    120.


CLS 507/122
TXT Sulfur is attached directly or indirectly to the ethylenic monomer by
    nonionic bonding:  Composition under subclass 118, wherein said polymer
    contains sulfur attached to an ethylenic moiety directly or indirectly by
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  A composition with sulfur as part of a mere counterion to an
    ethylenic moiety is not a basis for including such a composition in this
    subclass.  For example, a poly(vinylpyridinium) sulfate is included in
    subclass 123.


CLS 507/123
TXT Hetero nitrogen ring is attached directly or indirectly to the ethylenic
    monomer by nonionic bonding:  Composition under subclass 118 wherein said
    polymer contains a nitrogen containing hetero ring which is attached to an
    ethylenic moiety directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  A hetero ring as part of a mere counterion to an ethylenic
    moiety is not a basis for including such a composition in this subclass.
    For example, a pyridinium poly(vinyl sulfate) is classified in subclass
    122.  An additional crossreference in subclass 130 is highly recommended
    (see subclass 100, (5) Note).

    (2)     Note.  The term "hetero ring" denotes a ring having carbon and at
    least one atom from the group consisting of nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, and tellurium as ring members and contains no other element as a
    ring member.  As the term relates to this subclass, nitrogen must be one of
    the hetero atoms in the ring.


CLS 507/124
TXT Polymer contains vinyl alcohol unit:

    Composition under subclass 118 wherein said polymer comprises at least one
    vinyl alcohol unit.

    (1)     Note.  In the absence of information to the contrary, a hydrolysis
    product of polyvinyl acetate is polyvinyl alcohol and is provided for
    herein.


CLS 507/125
TXT Carbocyclic ring is attached directly or indirectly to the ethylenic
    monomer by nonionic bonding (e.g., styrene, vinyl toluene, etc.):
    Composition under subclass 118 wherein said polymer contains a carbocyclic
    ring which is attached to an ethylenic moiety directly or indirectly by
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  A composition with a carbocyclic ring as part of a mere
    counterion to an ethylenic moiety is not a basis for including such a
    composition in this subclass.  For example, a tetraphenylammonium
    poly(vinyl phosphonate) is classified in subclass 118.   An additional
    crossreference in subclass 129 is highly recommended (see subclass 100, (5)
    Note).


CLS 507/126
TXT Organic component is asphalt or a component or derivative thereof:

    Composition under subclass 103 wherein said organic component is asphalt or
    a component or derivative thereof.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for GILSONITE (a tradename for an
    asphaltite), manjak, bitumen, brown asphalt, asphaltenes, maltenes,
    macadem, etc.


CLS 507/127
TXT Organic component contains silicon attached directly or indirectly to
    carbon by nonionic bonding: Composition under subclass 103 wherein silicon
    is attached to organic carbon directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are silicones, siloxanes,
    organosilanes, alkylsilicates, etc.

    (2)     Note.  A composition with silicon as part of a mere counterion to
    an ionic compound is not a basis for including such a composition in this
    subclass.  For example, a quaternary ammonium silicate is included in
    subclass 129.


CLS 507/128
TXT Organic component contains phosphorous attached directly or indirectly to
    carbon by nonionic bonding: Composition under subclass 103 wherein
    phosphorous is attached to carbon directly or indirectly by nonionic
    bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are alkyl phosphates, phosphonates,
    phosphatides (e.g., lecithin), etc.

    (2)     Note.  A composition with phosphorous as part of a mere counterion
    to an ionic compound is not a basis for including such a composition in
    this subclass.

            For example, a quaternary ammonium phosphate is included in
    subclass 129.


CLS 507/129
TXT Organic component contains nitrogen attached directly or indirectly to
    carbon by nonionic bonding: Composition under subclass 103 wherein nitrogen
    is attached to carbon directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  A composition with nitrogen as part of a mere counterion to
    an ionic compound is not a basis for including such a composition in this
    subclass.  For example, an ammonium alkylsulfonate is included in subclass
    135; however, if the ammonium cation is a quaternary alkylammonium, then
    placement is in subclass 129.   An additional crossreference in subclass
    135 is highly recommended (see subclass 100, (5) Note).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140+,   for cyanate and isocyanate salts.


CLS 507/130
TXT Nitrogen is part of a hetero ring:
    Composition under subclass 129 wherein said component contains nitrogen as
    part of a hetero ring (e.g., methylene blue, imidazoline, pyridine,
    piperidine, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  The term "hetero ring" denotes a ring having carbon and at
    least one atom from the group consisting of nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, and tellurium as ring members and contains no other element as a
    ring member.  For the purposes of this subclass, the hetero ring requires
    the presence of nitrogen.


CLS 507/131
TXT Oxygen is attached directly or indirectly to carbon by nonionic bonding:

    Composition under subclass 129 wherein the organic component contains
    nitrogen and oxygen, both of which are attached to carbon directly or
    indirectly by nonionic bonding (e.g., alkanolamines, amino acids, EDTA,
    etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Nitrogen and/or oxygen as part of a mere counterion to an
    ionic compound does not bring the composition into this subclass (for
    example, an alkylmagnesium nitrate is classified in subclass 103, above).

    (2)     Note.  Solid inorganic oxides treated with a nitrogen containing
    organic compound are not covalently linked unless there is disclosure to
    the contrary and are classified in subclass 129.


CLS 507/132
TXT Organic component contains a nitrogen attached directly to oxygen by
    nonionic bonding (e.g., nitroaromatic, amineoxide, etc.): Composition under
    subclass 131 wherein the organic component contains a direct nitrogen to
    oxygen nonionic bond, (e.g., trimethylamine oxide, nitroaromatics,
    nitrosoaromatics, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Nitrogen and/or oxygen as part of a mere counterion to an
    ionic compound is not a basis for including a composition in this subclass
    (for example, an alkylmagnesium nitrate is classifiable in subclass 103,
    above).


CLS 507/133
TXT Organic component contains an ether linkage:

    Composition under subclass 131 wherein the organic component contains an
    ether linkage; i.e., two carbons directly bonded to the same oxygen atom
    (e.g., polyoxyalkyleneamines, etc.).


CLS 507/134
TXT Organic component contains sulfur attached directly or indirectly to carbon
    by nonionic bonding: Composition under subclass 103 wherein the organic
    component contains sulfur directly or indirectly attached to carbon by
    nonionic bonding (e.g., sulfates, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Sulfur as part of a counterion to an ionic compound is not a
    basis for including a composition in this subclass (for example, a
    quaternary alkylarsonium sulfate is classifiable in subclass 103).

    (2)     Note.  An organic material which has been sulfurized without
    identification of a direct carbon-sulfur bond is classifiable herein,
    whereas an organic material which has been sulfonated is sufficient
    identification of a carbon-sulfur bond to allow placement of such a
    component in subclass 135.


CLS 507/135
TXT Organic component contains a sulfur attached directly to carbon by nonionic
    bonding (e.g., sulfonate, etc.): Composition under subclass 134 wherein the
    organic component contains a sulfur which is attached to a carbon directly
    by nonionic bonding (e.g., sulfonates, thiols, mercaptans, thioethers,
    etc.).


CLS 507/136
TXT Organic component contains ether linkage (e.g., PEG ether, etc.):

    Composition under subclass 103 wherein the organic component contains an
    ether linkage to organic carbon  (e.g., cyclic ethers, such as pyrans,
    furans, crown ethers, etc.; linear ethers; and polyethers, such as
    polyalkoxylated alkylphenols, polyalkylene glycols, etc.).


CLS 507/137
TXT Organic component contains a carbocyclic group (e.g., cyclic alkyl,
    aromatic, tall oil, etc.): Composition under subclass 103 wherein the
    organic component contains at least one identified ring of carbon atoms
    (e.g., cyclic alkyls, aromatics, tall oils, such as abietic acid containing
    compositions, etc.).


CLS 507/138
TXT Organic component is a fat, fatty alcohol, fatty oil, ester-type wax, fatty
    still residue, or higher fatty acid or salt thereof: Composition under
    subclass 103 wherein the organic component is a fat, fatty alcohol, fatty
    oil, ester-type wax, fatty still residue, or higher fatty acid, including
    salts thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Definitions:

      (a)   By "fats" and "fatty oils" are meant the glycerides of higher fatty
    acids, including naturally occurring mixtures thereof present in a single
    oil or fat.

     (b)    By "ester-type waxes" are meant waxes which are essentially esters
    in chemical structure, e.g., beeswax, montan wax, carnauba wax, spermaceti,
    etc.

     (c)    By "higher fatty acid" is meant a monocarboxylic acid containing an
    unbroken chain of at least 7 carbon atoms bonded to a carboxyl group, e.g.,
    lauric, palmitic, stearic, oleic, ricinoleic, linoleic, and behenolic, etc.
     Where there are several unbroken chains of carbon atoms bonded to the
    carboxyl group, one of the chains must contain at least 7 carbon atoms.

     (d)    By "fatty still residues" it is intended to include the bottoms,
    tars, or pitches resulting from distillation of fats, oils, and waxes.

     (e)    By "fatty alcohol" is meant an alcohol containing an unbroken chain
    of at least 7 carbon atoms bonded to a hydroxy group.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    for carbohydrate esters of fatty acids.

    137,    for tall oil, rosin, rosin acids, resin acids, abietic acids, and
    other organic components containing carbocyclic groups.


CLS 507/139
TXT Organic component contains an alcohol group: Composition under subclass 103
    wherein the organic component contains an alcohol linkage to organic carbon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131,    for alkanolamines and other nitrogen containing alcohols.

    138,    for fatty alcohols.


CLS 507/140
TXT Contains inorganic component other than water or clay:
    Compositions under subclass 100 containing an inorganic component other
    than water or clay.

    (1)     Note.  The term "clay" encompasses the following:  fuller's earth,
    bentonite, montmorillonite, attapulgite, palygorskite, halloysite, illite,
    kaolinite, hectorite, sepiolite, etc.

    (2)     Note.  The compositions proper for this and the indented subclasses
    may contain water or clay, but they must also contain an inorganic
    component in addition to the water or clay.

    (3)     Note.  For the purposes of this and the indented subclasses, the
    term ``water" does not include seawater brine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145,    for a composition containing normal seawater brine without the
    addition of any of the components proper for subclasses 100 through 144.


CLS 507/141
TXT Inorganic component contains soluble potassium salt:
    Composition under subclass 140 wherein the inorganic component contains a
    potassium ion which is soluble in the boring medium.

    (1)     Note.  The composition of this subclass must contain potassium ion
    other than as a mere component in a normal seawater brine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145,    for a composition containing normal seawater brine without the
    addition of any of the components proper for subclasses 100 through 144.


CLS 507/142
TXT Inorganic component contains phosphorous: Composition under subclass 140
    wherein the inorganic component contains phosphorous.

    (1)     Note.  The composition of this subclass must contain phosphorous
    other than as a mere component of a normal seawater brine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145,    for a composition containing normal seawater brine without the
    addition of any of the components proper for subclasses 100 through 144.


CLS 507/143
TXT Inorganic component is elemental metal or alloy:
    Composition under subclass 140 wherein the inorganic component is an
    elemental metal or alloy.

    (1)     Note.  A metal is defined as a material having a continuous phase
    of any element of the periodic table except hydrogen, noble gas, a halogen,
    a chalcogen (oxygen, sulfur, selenium, tellurium), nitrogen, phosphorous,
    carbon, and boron.

    (2)     Note.  An alloy is defined as a mixture of two or more metallic
    elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145,    for a composition containing normal seawater brine without the
    addition of any of the components proper for subclasses 100 through 144.


CLS 507/144
TXT Inorganic component is asbestos:
    Composition under subclass 140 wherein the inorganic component is asbestos.

    (1)     Note.  Asbestos is a fibrous magnesium and/or iron silicate
    containing calcium.  The term encompasses amanthius, earth or stone flax,
    chrysotile, anthophyllite, amosite, actinolite, tremolite, and crocidolite
    in the surpentine or amphibole forms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    145,    for a composition containing normal seawater brine without the
    addition of any of the components proper for subclasses 100 through 144.


CLS 507/145
TXT Inorganic component is soluble in boring medium:
    Composition under subclass 140 wherein the inorganic component is soluble
    in the boring medium.


CLS 507/200
TXT WELL TREATING:

    Well treating compositions under the class definition which are (a) liquid,
    gas, or fluid solid (e.g., powder, etc.) compositions or compositional
    additives therefor and which are specialized and designed for use in well
    treating; (b) processes of preparing such compositions; or (c) mere methods
    of use of said compositions or of a compound for the purpose of (a) above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and those indented hereunder also include
    those processes of treating wells which are distinguished primarily by the
    compositions employed and do not include any significant manipulative step.
     The inclusion of the broad steps of introducing the composition into a
    well, producing the well, or the broad removal of the spent material from
    the well in a conventional manner will not take a patent out of this or the
    indented subclasses.  See the SEARCH CLASS reference to Class 507 which is
    found in Class 166, subclass 244.1, for further discussion of significant
    manipulative steps.

    (2)     Note.  Compositions employed for consolidating a formation in a
    well or for cementing a well are in Class 106, Compositions: Coating or
    Plastic; Class 523, Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers; and Class 524,
    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers.

    (3)     Note.  Compositions which are designed to be used to enhance the
    permeability of producing formations by producing flow channels (e.g.,
    fracturing, removal or prevention of deposits, acidizing, water flooding,
    treatment with surfactant, anticorrosion, etc.) are classified in this and
    the indented subclasses.

    (4)     Note.  A well treating additive consisting of a single compound is
    classified in one of the compound classes (e.g., Classes 260, 423, etc.).

    (5)     Note.  Required characteristics of the borehole environment will
    not take a method claim out of this or the indented subclasses (e.g.,
    temperature, presence of specific materials, or conditions of the earthen
    formation).

    (6)     Note.  Where a component is generically presented in inconsistent
    or functional terms (e.g., surfactant, fluid loss control agent, etc.) in
    some of the claims, any material(s) later specified as encompassed within
    the scope of said terms will limit said terms for classification purposes.
    For example, if claim 1 calls for a surfactant and claim 2 specifies the
    surfactant as being a PEG ether, and there are no other claims specifying
    the surfactant differently, then the original claim is classified in
    subclasses 261+.

    (7)     Note.  The following rule applies to subclasses 203 through 268.
    It is strongly recommended that documents be cross-referenced according to
    all appropriate subclasses, mandatory or not, based on all discrete organic
    components of the claimed composition.  For example, a composition
    comprising hydroxyethylcellulose, a higher fatty acid, and lignite is
    classified in subclass 206 as the original and additional cross-references
    in subclasses 216 and 265 are highly recommended.

    (8)     Note.  When both ions of a salt are organic, each ion is
    classifiable as a separate component.  This is based on the fact that when
    in solution the two ions of a salt separate into two distinct components,
    each one having a distinct function.  For example, in this schedule, fatty
    acid salts of imidazoline are classified first on the nitrogen-containing
    imidazolinium cation and second on the fatty acid anion.  However, if a
    salt is presented that contains an organic ion with an organic counterion
    alternatively with an inorganic counterion, and the organic counterion is
    not controlling for classification purposes, then classification will be
    based only on the former organic ion.

    (9)     Note.  Chelated, complexed, and coordinated organic moieties with
    metal are considered to have some nonionic character in the bond between
    the metal and the organic moiety (i.e., there is usually some amount of
    electron sharing or donating).  As such, these chelated, complexed, and
    coordinated metals are classified as if the metal is part of the compound.

    (10)    Note.  It is very strongly recommended that all compositions having
    an intended utility which is specified in the cross-reference art
    collection (i.e., 901 through 907 and 920 through 940) be cross-referenced
    into these subclasses.

    (11)    Note.  If the only disclosed utility of the composition claimed is
    to a process classifiable in Class 166, a cross-reference to Class 166 is
    strongly recommended.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100+,   for earth boring compositions and processes which involve no more
    than the mere use of such compositions.  Included in these compositions are
    lost circulation compositions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 638+ for a coating or
    plastic composition containing an inorganic settable ingredient which is
    not a synthetic resin or natural rubber.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 244.1+ for significantly claimed steps of well
    treating or operating.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 319+ for the breaking of aqueous petroleum
    colloidal systems.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for organic compounds, per se, and
    for preparative methods of organic compounds devoid of a method-of-use step
    pertaining to well treating.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, for preparative methods of
    inorganic compounds devoid of a method-of-use step pertaining to well
    treating.

    523,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 130+ for a
    composition having utility in consolidating a formation in a well or in
    cementing a well or to processes of preparing said composition.

    524,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 2+ for a water
    settable inorganic composition containing a synthetic resin or natural
    rubber.


CLS 507/201
TXT Contains enzyme or living micro-organism:

    Compositions under subclass 200 containing an enzyme or a micro-organism
    which is living when placed in the well.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclass 246 for well processes proper for Class 166
    according to the Class 166 main class definitions involving the use of a
    micro-organism.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 183+ for
    enzyme containing compositions and subclasses 243+ for compositions
    containing micro-organisms which are nonspecific to well treating and
    subclasses 262+ for compositions containing enzymes or micro-organisms used
    to destroy hazardous or toxic waste; liberate, separate, or purify a
    preexisting compound or composition; or to clean objects or textiles.


CLS 507/202
TXT Contains intended gaseous phase at entry into wellbore:

    Compositions under subclass 200 which have an intentional gaseous phase
    present as they are initially placed in the wellbore.

    (1)     Note.  Well treating fluids comprising the unintended presence of a
    gas, especially when such presence is avoided, are classified according to
    the other composition components.

    (2)     Note.  A claimed well treating composition with the intended
    creation of a gas inside the wellbore by in situ reaction is classified
    according to the components present at entry into the wellbore.

    (3)     Note.  A well treating composition described as being saturated
    with a gas is not a sufficient indication of a discrete gaseous phase being
    present.  Compositions saturated with a gas are placed elsewhere in this
    schedule based on the other composition components.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclasses 270 and 270.2 for injecting gaseous gel and
    surfactant; subclass 300 for well processes including the creation of a gas
    inside the wellbore by in situ reaction; and subclasses 401+ for injecting
    a gas or gas mixture.


CLS 507/203
TXT Contains organic component:

    Compositions under subclass 200 including a component having carbon therein
    and which is further characterized by the presence in the molecule of (a)
    two carbon atoms bonded together or (b) one atom of carbon bonded to at
    least one atom of hydrogen or halogen or (c) one atom of carbon bonded to
    at least one atom of nitrogen by a single or double bond, with the proviso
    that hydrocyanic acid, cyanogen, isocyanic acid, cyanamide, cyanogen
    halides, isothiocyanic acid, metal carbides, and graphite are excluded from
    being organic compounds.

    (1)     Note.  Components or compositions thereof reciting heavy
    distillation products (i.e., bottoms or pitch) of an originally specified
    material are classified according to said original material unless said
    products are otherwise identified.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of components included in this subclass which are
    not provided for below are petrolatum, paraffin, rubber, organometallic
    complexes, and other compounds devoid of provided-for functional groups.

    (3)     Note.  When a generic oil (e.g., mineral oil, fuel oil, etc.) is
    disclosed as part of a composition, the composition is classified according
    to the other components.

    (4)     Note.  Chelated, complexed, and coordinated organic moieties with
    metal are considered to have some nonionic character in the bond between
    the metal and the organic moiety (i.e., there is usually some amount of
    electron sharing or donating).  As such, these chelated, complexed, and
    coordinated metals are classified as if the metal is part of the compound.


CLS 507/204
TXT Organic component is cellular or fibrous material derived from plant or
    animal source (e.g., wood, nutshell, paper, leather, cotton, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 203 which contain a cellular or fibrous
    material derived from a plant or animal source such as wood, nutshell,
    seed, cotton, paper, leather, hair, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Cellular material includes naturally occurring material
    which still retains a certain amount of the original tissue structure of
    the plant or animal.

    (2)     Note.  Grinding, pulverizing, and comminuting does not result in
    the loss of original tissue structure of such material, whereas extracting
    generally results in the loss of original tissue structure in at least one
    of the products (e.g., the product being extracted).  In an extraction,
    however, some original tissue structure may not be destroyed (i.e., the
    material from which a product is being extracted may retain structure).

    (3)     Note.  Fossilized materials are not included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201,    for well treating compositions containing enzymes or living
    micro-organisms.

    206,    for fossilized humates.

    214+,   for cellulose or derivatives thereof, which, in the absence of
    information to the contrary, are presumed devoid of cell structure.

    244,    for proteins containing no phosphorous, which, in the absence of
    information to the contrary, are presumed devoid of cell structure.


CLS 507/205
TXT Organic component contains fluorine bonded directly to carbon:

    Compositions under subclass 203 containing a component having a direct
    carbon to fluorine bond.


CLS 507/206
TXT Organic component is lignin or humate or derivative thereof (e.g., tannin,
    quebracho extract, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 203 which contain a lignin or a humate
    component comprising humic or polyphenolic containing substances or
    derivatives thereof (e.g., lignite, leonardite, tannins, lignins, quebracho
    extract, pulp liquor, brown coal, etc.).

    (1)     Note.   Included in this subclass is a graft copolymer comprising a
    lignin or humate component grafted onto a polymer or resin.


CLS 507/207
TXT Lignin or humate component contains sulfur or is reacted with substance
    containing sulfur (e.g., lignosulfonate, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 206 wherein the humate or lignin component
    contains sulfur or has been reacted with a substance containing sulfur
    (e.g., lignosulfonate, lignosulfate, sulfoalkylated humates such as
    sulfomethylated quebracho, sulfite liquor, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is a lignin or humate component
    containing sulfur or reacted with sulfur which is also grafted onto a
    polymer or resin.

    (2)     Note.  The final component need not contain sulfur.


CLS 507/208
TXT Includes metal compound other than an alkali or alkaline earth metal
    compound (e.g., Al, Cr, Fe, Mn, Cu, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 207 which contain a metal compound where the
    metal is other than an alkali or alkaline earth metal (e.g., Al, Cr, Fe,
    Mn, Cu, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Alkali or alkaline earth metals include Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs,
    Fr, Be, Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba, and Ra.

    (2)     Note.  Included within this subclass are compositions which contain:

    (i)     a lignin or humate component containing sulfur or reacted with a
    substance containing sulfur, and

    (ii)    a metal other than alkali or alkaline earth metal,

            regardless of whether the two components (i and ii) are part of the
    same compound.


CLS 507/209
TXT Organic component is carbohydrate or derivative thereof (e.g., sugar or
    gum, such as galactomannan, etc.) or carboxylic acid ester of an alcohol
    which has five or more hydroxy groups bonded directly to carbons:

    Compositions under subclass 203 containing an organic component which is a
    carbohydrate or derivative thereof or a carboxylic acid ester of an alcohol
    which has five or more hydroxy groups bonded directly to carbons (e.g.,
    sorbitan alkylate, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Carbohydrates are compounds which are saccharides whose
    monomeric units are polyhydroxy monoaldehydes or polyhydroxy monoketones
    having the empirical formula Cn(H20)n (wherein n is five or six) or the
    corresponding cyclic hemiacetals thereof, or the reaction derivatives
    thereof in which the carbon skeleton and the carbonyl function or
    hemiacetal function of the saccharide unit are not destroyed.


CLS 507/210
TXT Carbohydrate has been grafted onto solid synthetic resin:

    Compositions under subclass 209 wherein the carbohydrate has been grafted
    onto a solid synthetic resin.


CLS 507/211
TXT Carbohydrate is polysaccharide:

    Compositions under subclass 209 wherein the carbohydrate is a
    polysaccharide.

    (1)     Note.  For the purposes of this and the indented subclasses, a
    polysaccharide is a saccharide with two or more sugar moieties covalently
    bonded to each other.


CLS 507/212
TXT Polysaccharide is starch or derivative thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 211 wherein the polysaccharide is starch or a
    derivative thereof such as modified starch or cationic starch.


CLS 507/213
TXT Polysaccharide is a xanthan (e.g., scleroglucans, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 211 wherein the polysaccharide is a xanthan
    such as scleroglucan, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Xanthans are polysaccharide gums composed of D-glucosyl,
    D-mannosyl, and D-glucosyluronic acid residues and differing proportions of
    O-acetyl and pyruvic acid acetal.  The primary structure consists of a
    cellulose backbone with trisaccharide side chains, with the repeating unit
    being a pentasaccharide.


CLS 507/214
TXT Polysaccharide is cellulose or derivative thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 211 wherein the polysaccharide is cellulose or
    a derivative thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204,    for fibrous cellulose in which the fibrous character has been
    retained from an original plant or animal source (e.g., paper, cotton,
    etc.).


CLS 507/215
TXT Carboxyalkylcellulose (e.g., CMC, CMHEC, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 214 wherein the cellulose derivative is a
    carboxyalkylcellulose (e.g., carboxymethylcellulose (CMC), etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Also included in this subclass is a carboxyalkylcellulose
    which has been further derivatized (e.g.,
    hydroxyethylcarboxymethylcellulose (CMHEC), etc.).


CLS 507/216
TXT Hydroxyalkylcellulose (e.g., HEC, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 214 wherein said cellulose derivative is a
    hydroxyalkylcellulose (e.g., hydroxyethylcellulose (HEC), etc.).


CLS 507/217
TXT Polysaccharide is hydroxyalkyl ether derivative (e.g., HPG, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 211 wherein the polysaccharide is a
    hydroxyalkyl ether carbohydrate derivative (e.g., hydroxypropylguar (HPG),
    etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216,    for hydroxyalkylcellulose.


CLS 507/218
TXT Ester is higher fatty or carboxylic acid ester (e.g., sorbitan oleate,
    etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 209 wherein the ester is a higher fatty or
    carboxylic acid ester of an alcohol having five or more hydroxy groups
    bonded directly to carbons.

    (1)     Note.  A higher fatty acid denotes a monocarboxylic acid containing
    an unbroken chain of at least seven carbon atoms bonded to a carboxyl group.


CLS 507/219
TXT Organic component is solid synthetic resin:

    Compositions under subclass 203 wherein the organic component is a solid
    synthetic resin.

    (1)     Note.  A solid synthetic resin is a polymer which is described as a
    solid or is described in one of the following terms:

            a.      coagulated

            b.      elastic

            c.      elastomeric

            d.      friable

            e.      meltable

            f.      molten

            g.      powder

            h.      rubber

            i.      thermoplastic

            A wax is not considered to be a solid even if defined by one or
    more of the above terms.

    (2)     Note.  In this area, the classification is dependent on a monomer
    which is either part of the polymeric backbone or has been reacted
    subsequent to polymerization, such as a graft or block copolymer, and
    appears first in the instant schedule.  A monomer is a material which
    occurs in a polymer as a repeating unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206+,   for humate, lignin, lignite, or lignosulfonate graft copolymers.

    209+,   for carbohydrate or gum graft copolymers.

    261,    for polyalkoxylates (e.g., polyalkoxylated alkylphenol, etc.) or
    PEG-type polymers which are not resins.


CLS 507/220
TXT Resin is polymer derived from phenolic and aldehydic monomers:

    Compositions under subclass 219 wherein the resin is a  polymer derived
    from phenolic and aldehydic monomers.


CLS 507/221
TXT Resin is polymer derived from ethylenic monomers only (e.g., maleic,
    itaconic, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 219 wherein the resin is a polymer derived from
    ethylenically unsaturated monomers only.

    (1)     Note.  The ethylenically unsaturated monomer requires the presence
    of two aliphatic carbon atoms bonded together by a double or triple bond.
    See Class 526, subclass 72, for a detailed discussion of polymers from only
    ethylenic monomers.

    (2)     Note.  Cross-linking an ethylenic polymer with a nonethylenic
    cross-linking agent will not take the polymer out of this subclass.


CLS 507/222
TXT Polymer derived from monomer having quaternary ammonium group:

    Compositions under subclass 221 wherein the polymer has been derived from
    an ethylenic monomer containing a quaternary ammonium group and where the
    ammonium nitrogen is attached to the ethylenic monomer by direct or
    indirect nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  A quaternary ammonium moiety which contains no nonionic bond
    to the polymer is classified primarily according to functional groups which
    are covalently bound to the polymer.  A cross-reference to subclass 240 is
    strongly recommended.


CLS 507/223
TXT Nitrogen of the quaternary ammonium group is a member of a hetero ring:

    Compositions under subclass 222 wherein the nitrogen is a member of a
    hetero ring.


CLS 507/224
TXT Polymer derived from acrylic acid monomer or derivative:

    Compositions under subclass 221 containing a polymer derived from at least
    one acrylic acid monomer or derivative (e.g., from CH2=C(R)-X, wherein X is
    carbonyl,etc., and R is H or alkyl, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are methacrylate polymers, etc.


CLS 507/225
TXT Nitrogen is attached directly or indirectly to the acrylic acid monomer or
    derivative by nonionic bonding (e.g., acrylamide, acrylonitrile, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 224 wherein nitrogen is attached to the acrylic
    moiety through direct or indirect nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  A composition with nitrogen as part of a mere counterion to
    an ethylenic moiety is not a basis for including such a composition in this
    subclass.  For example, ammonium polyacrylates are included in subclass 224.


CLS 507/226
TXT Sulfur is attached directly or indirectly to the acrylic acid monomer or
    derivative by nonionic bonding (e.g., acrylamidoalkane sulfonates, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 225 wherein both nitrogen and sulfur are
    attached to the acrylic moiety through direct or indirect nonionic bonding
    (e.g., acrylamidoalkylsulfonates, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  A composition with nitrogen or sulfur as part of a mere
    counterion to an ethylenic moiety is not a basis for including such a
    composition in this subclass. For example, poly
    (N,N,N-trialkylaminoalkylacrylate sulfate salt is included in subclass 225.


CLS 507/227
TXT Sulfur is attached directly or indirectly to the ethylenic monomer by
    nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 221 wherein the polymer contains sulfur
    attached to an ethylenic moiety directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  A composition with sulfur as part of a mere counterion to an
    ethylenic moiety is not a basis for including such a composition in this
    subclass.  For example, a poly(vinylphosphonium) sulfate is included in
    subclass 221.


CLS 507/228
TXT Monomer contains benzene ring and sulfonate group:

    Compositions under subclass 227 wherein the monomer contains a benzene ring
    and a sulfonate group.


CLS 507/229
TXT Hetero nitrogen ring is attached directly or indirectly to the ethylenic
    monomer by nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 221 wherein the polymer contains a nitrogen
    containing hetero ring which is attached to an ethylenic moiety directly or
    indirectly by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  A hetero ring as part of a mere counterion to an ethylenic
    moiety is not a basis for including such a composition in this subclass.
    For example, a pyridinium poly(vinyl sulfate) is classified in subclass
    227.  An additional cross-reference in subclass 240 in accordance with the
    (8) Note under subclass 200 is highly recommended.

    (2)     Note.  The term ``hetero ring" denotes a ring having carbon and at
    least one atom from the group consisting of nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, and tellurium as ring members; and contains no other element as a
    ring member.  As the term relates to this subclass, nitrogen must be one of
    the hetero atoms in the ring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242,    for organic N-heterocyclic cations to polymeric anions.


CLS 507/230
TXT Polymer contains vinyl alcohol unit:

    Compositions under subclass 221 wherein the polymer contains a vinyl
    alcohol unit.

    (1)     Note.  In the absence of information to the contrary, a hydrolysis
    product of polyvinyl acetate is polyvinyl alcohol and is provided for
    herein.


CLS 507/231
TXT Carbocyclic ring is attached directly or indirectly to the ethylenic
    monomer by nonionic bonding (e.g., styrene, vinyl toluene, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 221 wherein the polymer contains a carbocyclic
    ring which is attached to an ethylenic moiety directly or indirectly by
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  A composition with a carbocyclic ring as part of a mere
    counterion to an ethylenic moiety is not a basis for including such a
    composition in this subclass.  For example, a tetraphenylammonium
    poly(vinyl phosphonate) is classified in subclass 221.  An additional
    cross-reference in subclass 240 in accordance with the (8) Note under
    subclass 200 is highly recommended.


CLS 507/232
TXT Organic component is asphalt or a component or derivative thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 203 wherein the organic component is asphalt or
    is a component or derivative of the asphalt.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for Gilsonite# which is a trade name
    for an asphaltite, manjak, bitumen, brown asphalt, asphaltenes, maltenes,
    macadam, etc.


CLS 507/233
TXT Organic component contains silicon attached directly or indirectly to
    carbon by nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 203 wherein silicon is attached to organic
    carbon directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  A composition with silicon as part of a mere counterion to
    an ionic compound is not a basis for including such a composition in this
    subclass.  For example, a quaternary ammonium silicate is included in
    subclass 240.


CLS 507/234
TXT Organic component contains a direct carbon to silicon bond:

    Compositions under subclass 233 containing silicon directly bonded to
    carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are silicones, siloxanes,
    organosilanes, etc.


CLS 507/235
TXT Organic component contains phosphorous attached directly or indirectly to
    carbon by nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 203 wherein phosphorous is attached to carbon
    directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  A composition with phosphorous as part of a mere counterion
    to an ionic compound is not a basis for including such a composition in
    this subclass.  For example, a quaternary ammonium phosphate is included in
    subclass 240.


CLS 507/236
TXT Organic component contains nitrogen attached directly or indirectly to
    carbon by nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 235 wherein nitrogen and phosphorous are
    attached to carbon directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are phosphatides (e.g., lecithin),
    phosphoramides, etc.


CLS 507/237
TXT Organic component contains a direct carbon to phosphorous nonionic bond
    (e.g., phosphonate, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 235 wherein the organic component contains a
    direct nonionic carbon to phosphorous bond.


CLS 507/238
TXT Organic component is a phosphate ester:

    Compositions under subclass 235 wherein the organic component is a
    phosphate ester.


CLS 507/239
TXT Organic component contains nitrogen attached directly or indirectly to
    carbon by nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 203 wherein nitrogen is attached to carbon
    directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  A composition with nitrogen as part of a mere counterion to
    an ionic compound is not a basis for including such a composition in this
    subclass.  For example, an ammonium alkylsulfonate is included in subclass
    259; however, if the ammonium cation is a quaternary alkylammonium, then
    placement is in subclass 240.  An additional cross-reference in subclass
    259 in accordance with the (8) Note under subclass 200 is highly
    recommended.


CLS 507/240
TXT Organic component is quaternary ammonium salt:

    Compositions under subclass 239 wherein the organic component is a
    quaternary ammonium salt.


CLS 507/241
TXT Organic component contains plural carboxylic acid, ester, or salt groups
    attached directly or indirectly to nitrogen by nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 239 wherein the organic component contains
    plural carboxylic acid groups, carboxylic acid ester groups, or carboxylic
    acid salt groups which are attached to nitrogen directly or indirectly by
    nonionic bonding.


CLS 507/242
TXT Nitrogen is part of a hetero ring:

    Compositions under subclass 239 wherein said component contains nitrogen as
    part of a hetero ring (e.g., methylene blue, pyridine, piperidine, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  The term ``hetero ring" denotes a ring having carbon and at
    least one atom from the group consisting of nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, and tellurium as ring members; and it contains no other element
    as a ring member.  For the purposes of this subclass, the hetero ring
    requires the presence of nitrogen.


CLS 507/243
TXT Plural heteroatoms in the ring:

    Compositions under subclass 242 wherein there are two or more heteroatoms
    in the hetero ring (e.g., imidazoline, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  The ring heteroatoms are selected from nitrogen, oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, and tellurium.  For the purposes of this subclass, at
    least one of the heteroatoms must be nitrogen.


CLS 507/244
TXT Oxygen is attached directly or indirectly to carbon by nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 239 wherein the organic component contains
    nitrogen and oxygen both of which are attached to carbon directly or
    indirectly by nonionic bonding (e.g., alkanolamines, amino acids, ureas,
    amides, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Nitrogen or oxygen as part of a mere counterion to an ionic
    compound does not bring the composition into this subclass. (For example,
    an alkylmagnesium nitrate is classified in subclass 203 above.)

    (2)     Note.  Solid inorganic oxides treated with a nitrogen containing
    organic compound are not nonionically bonded unless there is disclosure to
    the contrary and are classified in subclasses 239+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    269+,   for cyanate salts.


CLS 507/245
TXT Organic component contains a nitrogen attached directly to oxygen by
    nonionic bonding (e.g., nitroaromatic, amineoxide, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 244 wherein the organic component contains a
    direct nitrogen to oxygen nonionic bond (e.g., trimethylamine oxide,
    nitroaromatics, nitrosoaromatics, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Nitrogen and/or oxygen as part of a mere counterion to an
    ionic compound is not a basis for including a composition in this subclass.
     (For example, an alkylmagnesium nitrate is classifiable in subclass 203
    above.)

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    269+,   for isocyanate salts.


CLS 507/246
TXT Organic component contains an ether linkage:

    Compositions under subclass 244 wherein the organic component contains an
    ether linkage; i.e., two carbons directly bonded to the same oxygen atom
    (e.g., polyoxyalkyleneamines, etc.).


CLS 507/247
TXT Sulfur is attached directly or indirectly to carbon by nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 239 wherein the organic component contains
    sulfur which is attached to carbon directly or indirectly by nonionic
    bonding (e.g., thioureas, etc.).


CLS 507/248
TXT Organic component consists only of carbon, hydrogen, and nitrogen:

    Compositions under subclass 239 wherein the organic component includes only
    carbon, hydrogen, and nitrogen.


CLS 507/249
TXT Organic component contains carbon double or triple bonded to nitrogen
    (e.g., cyano, nitrilo, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 248 wherein the nitrogen atom is double or
    triple bonded to carbon (e.g., a cyano or nitrilo compound, etc.).


CLS 507/250
TXT Organic component is acyclic:

    Compositions under subclass 248 wherein the organic component does not
    contain a ring structure.


CLS 507/251
TXT Organic component contains plural nitrogen atoms attached directly or
    indirectly to carbon by nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 250 wherein the organic component contains two
    or more nitrogens (e.g., polyamines, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246,    for polyamines having an ether linkage.


CLS 507/252
TXT Organic component contains sulfur attached directly or indirectly to carbon
    by nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 203 wherein the organic component contains
    sulfur attached to carbon directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Sulfur as part of an inorganic counterion to an ionic
    compound is not a basis for including a composition in this subclass. (For
    example, a quaternary alkylarsonium sulfate is classifiable in subclass
    203.)


CLS 507/253
TXT Organic component contains ether linkage (i.e., C-O-C):

    Compositions under subclass 252 wherein the organic component contains two
    carbons directly bonded to the same oxygen (i.e.,C-O-C).

    (1)     Note.  An ether is an organic compound having the general structure
    C-O-C wherein the carbon bonded to the oxygen atom cannot be double bonded
    to oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium or triple bonded to nitrogen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257,    for thioethers containing no oxygen ether linkage.


CLS 507/254
TXT The sulfur is part of a sulfate group:

    Compositions under subclass 253 wherein the sulfur in the organic component
    is part of a sulfate group.

    (1)     Note.  The presence of an inorganic anion sulfate group is not a
    basis for placement in this subclass.  See the (1) Note in subclass 252.


CLS 507/255
TXT The sulfur is part of a sulfonate group:

    Compositions under subclass 253 wherein the sulfur in the organic component
    is part of a sulfonate group.


CLS 507/256
TXT Organic component contains a sulfur attached directly to carbon by nonionic
    bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 252 wherein the organic component contains a
    sulfur which is attached to a carbon directly by nonionic bonding.


CLS 507/257
TXT Plural alkyls attached directly to the same sulfur atom or to a chain of
    sulfur atoms by nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 256 wherein two or more alkyls are nonionically
    bonded directly to the same sulfur atom or to a chain of sulfur atoms
    (e.g., thioethers, dialkyl polysulfides, etc.).


CLS 507/258
TXT Alkyl and hydrogen attached directly to the same sulfur atom or to a chain
    of sulfur atoms by nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 256 wherein an alkyl and a hydrogen are
    nonionically bonded directly to the same sulfur atom or to a chain of
    sulfur atoms (e.g., thiols, mercaptans, etc.).


CLS 507/259
TXT The sulfur is part of a sulfonate group:

    Compositions under subclass 256 wherein the sulfur is part of a sulfonate
    group.


CLS 507/260
TXT Organic component is polycarboxylic acid, ester, or salt thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 203 wherein the organic component is a
    polycarboxylic acid, a polycarboxylic acid ester, or a salt thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241,    for EDTA, NTA, and other polycarboxyl compounds containing nitrogen.


CLS 507/261
TXT Organic component contains ether linkage (e.g., PEG ether, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 203 wherein the organic component contains two
    carbons bonded directly to the same oxygen (e.g., cyclic ethers such as
    pyrans, furans, crown ethers, etc.; linear ethers; and polyethers such as
    polyalkoxylated alkylphenols, polyalkylene glycols, etc.).


CLS 507/262
TXT Organic component contains a carbocyclic group:

    Compositions under subclass 261 wherein the organic component contains at
    least one homocyclic carbon ring which may be aliphatic or aromatic.


CLS 507/263
TXT Organic component contains a carbocyclic group (e.g., cycloaliphatic,
    aromatic ring, tall oil, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 203 wherein the organic component contains at
    least one ring of carbon atoms (e.g., cycloaliphatics and aromatic rings,
    tall oils such as abietic-acid-containing compositions, etc.).


CLS 507/264
TXT Organic component is a phenol:

    Compositions under subclass 263 wherein the organic component contains a
    hydroxy group bonded directly to a benzene ring which benzene ring may be
    substituted or unsubstituted and may be part of a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are catechol, resorcinol, etc.


CLS 507/265
TXT Organic component is a fat, fatty alcohol, fatty oil, ester-type wax, fatty
    still residue, or higher fatty acid or salt thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 203 wherein the organic component is a fat,
    fatty alcohol, fatty oil, ester-type wax, fatty still residue, or higher
    fatty acid, including salts thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Definitions:

    (a)     By ``fats" and ``fatty oils" are meant the glycerides of higher
    fatty acids, including naturally occurring mixtures thereof present in a
    single oil or fat.

    (b)     By ``ester-type waxes" are meant waxes which are essentially esters
    in chemical structure (e.g., beeswax, montan wax, carnauba wax, spermaceti,
    etc.).

    (c)     By ``higher fatty acid" is meant a monocarboxylic acid containing
    an unbroken chain of at least seven carbon atoms bonded to a carboxyl group
    (e.g., lauric, palmitic, stearic, oleic, ricinoleic, linoleic, and
    behenolic, etc.).  Where there are several unbroken chains of carbon atoms
    bonded to the carboxyl group, one of the chains must contain at least seven
    carbon atoms.

    (d)     By ``fatty still residues" it is intended to include the bottoms,
    tars, or pitches resulting from distillation of fats, oils, and waxes.

    (e)     By ``fatty alcohol" is meant an alcohol containing an unbroken
    chain of at least seven carbon atoms bonded to a hydroxy group.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218,    for carbohydrate esters of fatty acids.

    263,    for tall oil, rosin, rosin acids, resin acids, abietic acids, and
    other organic components containing carbocyclic groups.


CLS 507/266
TXT Organic component contains an alcohol group:

    Compositions under subclass 203 wherein the organic component contains a
    hydroxy group directly bonded to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An alcohol is an organic compound having the general
    structure -C-OH wherein the carbon atom bound to the oxygen atom of the
    hydroxyl group cannot be double bonded to oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium, or triple bonded to nitrogen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    244,    for alkanolamines and other nitrogen-containing alcohols.

    265,    for fatty alcohols.


CLS 507/267
TXT Organic component contains carboxylic acid, ester, or salt thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 203 wherein the organic component contains a
    carboxylic acid, a carboxylic acid ester, or a carboxylic acid salt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241,    for nitrogen-containing polycarboxylic acids (e.g., EDTA, etc.).

    260,    for polycarboxylic acids (e.g., malonic acid, maleic acid, etc.).

    265,    for carboxylic acids with a chain of seven or more carbon atoms
    (e.g., fatty acids, etc.)

    266,    for hydroxy-containing carboxylic acids (e.g., lactic acid, etc.).


CLS 507/268
TXT Organic component contains a carbonyl group (e.g., aldehyde, ketone, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 203 wherein the organic component contains an
    oxygen double bonded to carbon.


CLS 507/269
TXT Contains inorganic component other than water or clay:

    Compositions under subclass 200 containing an inorganic component which is
    neither water nor clay.

    (1)     Note.  The compositions proper for this and the indented subclasses
    may contain water or clay, but they must also contain an inorganic
    component in addition to the water or clay.

    (2)     Note.  For the purposes of this and the indented subclasses, the
    term ``water" does not include seawater brine.

    (3)     Note.  The term ``clay" encompasses the following:  fuller's earth,
    bentonite, montmorillonite, attapulgite, palygorskite, halloysite, illite,
    kaolinite, hectorite, sepiolite, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277,    for a composition containing normal seawater brine without the
    addition of any of the components proper for subclasses 201 through 276 in
    this class.


CLS 507/270
TXT Inorganic component is elemental metal or alloy:

    Compositions under subclass 269 wherein the inorganic component is an
    elemental metal or an alloy.

    (1)     Note.  An alloy is a mixture of two or more metallic elements.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277,    for a composition containing normal seawater brine without the
    addition of any of the components proper for subclasses 201 through 276 in
    this class.


CLS 507/271
TXT Inorganic component contains Ti, Zr, V, Cr, Mn, Fe, or Ni:

    Compositions under subclass 269 wherein the inorganic component has
    titanium (Ti), zirconium (Zr), vanadium (V), chromium (Cr), manganese (Mn),
    iron (Fe), or nickel (Ni).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277,    for a composition containing normal seawater brine without the
    addition of any of the components proper for subclasses 201 through 276 in
    this class.


CLS 507/272
TXT Inorganic component contains copper or zinc:

    Compositions under subclass 269 wherein the inorganic component has copper
    or zinc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277,    for a composition containing normal seawater brine without the
    addition of any of the components proper for subclasses 201 through 276 in
    this class.


CLS 507/273
TXT Inorganic component contains boron:

    Compositions under subclass 269 wherein the inorganic component has boron.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277,    for a composition containing normal seawater brine without the
    addition of any of the components proper for subclasses 201 through 276 in
    this class.


CLS 507/274
TXT Inorganic component contains phosphorous:

    Composition under subclass 269 wherein the inorganic component has
    phosphorous.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277,    for a composition containing normal seawater brine without the
    addition of any of the components proper for subclasses 201 through 276 in
    this class.


CLS 507/275
TXT Inorganic component contains arsenic or antimony:

    Compositions under subclass 269 wherein the inorganic component has arsenic
    or antimony.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277,    for a composition containing normal seawater brine without the
    addition of any of the components proper for subclasses 201 through 276 in
    this class.


CLS 507/276
TXT Inorganic component contains potassium:

    Compositions under subclass 269 wherein the inorganic component has
    potassium.

    (1)     Note.  The composition of this subclass must contain potassium
    other than as a mere natural component in a normal seawater brine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277,    for a composition containing normal seawater brine without the
    addition of any of the components proper for subclasses 201 through 276 in
    this class.


CLS 507/277
TXT Inorganic component is soluble in the well treating medium:

    Compositions under subclass 269 wherein the inorganic component is soluble
    in the well treating medium.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS
    RELATING TO SUBCLASSES 90 THROUGH 277


CLS 507/901
TXT ORGANICALLY MODIFIED INORGANIC SOLID:
    Subject matter wherein the composition contains an organically modified
    inorganic solid.


CLS 507/902
TXT CONTROLLED RELEASE AGENT:
    Subject matter wherein the composition contains a controlled release agent.


    (1)     Note.  Said agent is a component in a form such as stick, capsule,
    or solid matrix, etc., for release in a delayed, sustained, or otherwise
    controlled manner.


CLS 507/903
TXT CROSSLINKED RESIN OR POLYMER:
    Subject matter wherein the composition contains a crosslinked resin or
    polymeric material.

    (1)     Note.  Material may be crosslinked before injection into a borehole
    or may include agents for intentional crosslinking within the borehole.


CLS 507/904
TXT PROCESS OF MAKING FLUIDS OR ADDITIVES THEREFOR:
    Subject matter which includes a process of making well fluids or additives
    therefor.

    (1)     Note.  The mere mixing of components is excluded; however, a
    critical manner of mixing or order of adding components is included.  See
    this class, subclass 901, for a method of organic modification of an
    inorganic solid.  Excluded from this art collection is the synthesis of a
    single organic compound wherein said compound is isolated and identified.


CLS 507/905
TXT NONTOXIC COMPOSITION:
    Subject matter wherein the composition is intentionally nontoxic.

    (1)     Note.  Intended for this collection is subject matter wherein there
    is a disclosure of a relative lack of toxicity of the whole composition to
    any living organism in comparison with art accepted alternatives.


CLS 507/906
TXT SOLID INORGANIC ADDITIVE IN DEFINED PHYSICAL FORM:
    Subject matter wherein the composition contains a solid inorganic additive
    in a defined physical form.

    (1)     Note.  The degree of fineness, per se, (e.g., a size or diameter
    measurement) is insufficient to define physical form.

    (2)     Note.  Said solid additive usually is in a defined form for
    functional purposes.  Forms such as spheres, cones, disks, rods, etc., are
    included.


CLS 507/907
TXT INDICATING MEANS (E.G., DYE, FLUORESCING AGENT, ETC.):
    Subject matter wherein the composition contains an intentionally included
    indicating means, e.g., dye, fluorescing agent, etc.

    (1)     Note.  These indicating means are included to indicate the
    condition of the fluid, e.g., contamination, rheology, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129+,   for dyes having an organic nitrogen.  For example, methylene blue
    has an N-heterocycle and is placed in subclass 130.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS
    RELATING TO SUBCLASSES 100 THROUGH 145


CLS 507/910
TXT EARTH BORING FLUID DEVOID OF DISCRETE AQUEOUS PHASE:
    Subject matter wherein the earth boring fluid is devoid of a discrete
    aqueous phase.

    (1)     Note.  In the absence of disclosure to the contrary, oil-based
    drilling fluids with less than 10 percent water have no discrete aqueous
    phase.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS
    RELATING TO SUBCLASSES 200 THROUGH 277


CLS 507/920
TXT BIOCIDAL:

    Subject matter wherein the well treating composition is intended to be
    biocidal.


CLS 507/921
TXT SPECIFIED BREAKER COMPONENT FOR EMULSION OR GEL:

    Subject matter wherein the well treating composition is intended to break
    an emulsion or gel or to uncrosslink a polymer.


CLS 507/922
TXT FRACTURE FLUID:

    Subject matter wherein the well treating composition is intended to be
    injected under sufficient pressure to create fractures or fissures in the
    well walls.


CLS 507/923
TXT Fracture acidizing:

    Subject matter under art collection 922 wherein the fracturing operation is
    conducted in the presence of an acidic fracture fluid which is intended to
    hydrolyze downhole.


CLS 507/924
TXT With specified propping feature:

    Subject matter under art collection 922 wherein the fracture fluid contains
    a specified propping feature which is usually a solid which holds the
    fissures or crevices open after the fracturing operation.


CLS 507/925
TXT COMPLETION OR WORKOVER FLUID:

    Subject matter wherein the well treating composition is intended to be used
    in a generically disclosed workover or completion operation.

    (1)     Note.  A well completion fluid is one generally used in accessing
    formations which are thought to contain the desired material (i.e., oil)
    and they allow for the influx of said desired material into the wellbore.

    (2)     Note.  A narrowly suggested workover application (i.e., fracturing,
    enhanced oil recovery, acidizing, etc.) is not intended for this subclass.


CLS 507/926
TXT PACKER FLUID:

    Subject matter wherein the well treating composition is intended to be
    applied to the well walls to maintain stability of the well, yet will also
    permit fluids to pass through said walls.


CLS 507/927
TXT WELL CLEANING FLUID:

    Subject matter wherein the well treating composition is intended to remove
    deposits which accumulate in a well during use or which prevent or diminish
    the accumulation of deposits which would otherwise occur during the use of
    a well.

    (1)     Note.  Well cleaning indicates removal of a contaminant from the
    well or prevention of deposit of such contaminant in the well.


CLS 507/928
TXT Spacing slug or preflush fluid:

    Subject matter under art collection 927 wherein the well cleaning fluid is
    (i) a slug of fluid intended to separate a previous fluid from a following
    fluid, sometimes because of the incompatability of the two fluids, or (ii)
    a fluid intended to remove a filter cake which is no longer desired.


CLS 507/929
TXT Cleaning organic contaminant:

    Subject matter under art collection 927 wherein the well cleaning fluid is
    for cleaning an organic component from the well.


CLS 507/930
TXT Organic contaminant is asphaltic:

    Subject matter under art collection 929 wherein the well cleaning fluid is
    for cleaning an asphaltic residue from the well.


CLS 507/931
TXT Organic contaminant is paraffinic:

    Subject matter under art collection 929 wherein the well cleaning fluid is
    for cleaning a  paraffinic residue from the well.


CLS 507/932
TXT Cleaning sulfur deposits:

    Subject matter under art collection 927 wherein the well cleaning fluid is
    for cleaning a sulfur deposit from the well.


CLS 507/933
TXT ACIDIZING OR FORMATION DESTROYING:

    Subject matter wherein the well treating composition is intended to treat
    the geological formation of the well with acid or to destroy or dissolve
    the geological formation by chemical reaction.


CLS 507/934
TXT With inhibitor:

    Subject matter under art collection 933 wherein the acidizing or formation
    destroying composition includes a material added specifically to inhibit
    undesirable activity caused by the acid (e.g., corrosion, etc.).


CLS 507/935
TXT ENHANCED OIL RECOVERY:

    Subject matter wherein the well treating composition is directly or
    indirectly useful in obtaining oil from an oil bearing formation after
    primary recovery is complete (i.e., after the oil ceases to enter the well
    on its own).


CLS 507/936
TXT Flooding the formation:

    Subject matter under art collection 935 wherein the well treating
    composition is intended to be injected into an oil bearing formation from
    one well in order to force the oil into at least one other well.


CLS 507/937
TXT With emulsion:

    Subject matter under art collection 936 wherein the flooding composition is
    an emulsion intended to be injected into an oil bearing formation in order
    to enhance oil recovery.


CLS 507/938
TXT With microemulsion:

    Subject matter under art collection 937 wherein the emulsion is a
    microemulsion.

    (1)     Note.  A microemulsion has particles from 0.01 to 0.20 micrometers
    (10 to 200nm) in size.  Furthermore, a disclosure of micellar dispersion or
    transparent emulsion is synonymous with microemulsion for the purposes of
    this subclass.


CLS 507/939
TXT CORROSION INHIBITOR:

    Subject matter wherein the well treating composition prevents or decreases
    corrosion in the well.


CLS 507/940
TXT FREEING STUCK OBJECT FROM WELLBORE:

    Subject matter wherein the well treating composition is intended to aid in
    the removal of an object which has become jammed or stuck in the wellbore
    (e.g., part of drill string, etc.).


CLS 508/
TTL SOLID ANTI-FRICTION DEVICES, MATERIALS THEREFOR, LUBRICANT OR SEPARANT
    COMPOSITIONS FOR MOVING SOLID SURFACES, AND MISCELLANEOUS MINERAL OIL
    COMPOSITIONS

CLS 508/
TXT This class is an integral part of Class 252, as shown by the position of
    the box identifying this class in the Class 252 schedule.  As such, this
    class is subject to the Class Definition and Notes of Class 252.

    Class Definition

    A.      GENERAL STATEMENT

    Patents for compositions which contain a claim to a lubricant, or, if
    containing no claims limited to a use provided for elsewhere, disclose
    their use as lubricants, whether or not other uses are disclosed, are
    placed in this subclass or indented subclasses as original patents, and
    cross-referenced wherever desirable.

    This class provides for:

    (I)     compositions of matter which are solid antifriction devices or
    articles described in terms of their chemical composition,

    (II)    materials from which said solid antifriction devices or articles
    are fashioned,

    (III)   compositions which serve as lubricants or separants for moving
    solid surfaces,

    (IV)    compositions of mineral oils admixed with non-hydrocarbon materials
    and not limited to a function or utility provided for elsewhere in Class
    252 or any other class.

    B.      DETAILED STATEMENT

    (I)     The solid antifriction devices or articles described in terms of
    their chemical composition are characterized by having a lubricant material
    as a permanent part of the article or device.  This permanence may be
    accomplished by permanent coating, impregnation into the interstices of the
    article or device, or by being part of the composition of matter from which
    the article or device is fashioned.  The articles and devices are further
    characterized by retention of their shape during use.

            The type of solid antifriction article or device provided for
    herein is exemplified by: bearings, rings, seals, journal boxes, bushings,
    brakes, clutches, gun wads, or liners for bearings, brakes or clutches.

            Any processes of making such solid antifriction articles or
    devices, or peculiar to making such articles or devices, for which there is
    no provision elsewhere are provided for herein.

            Mere or nominal use of such solid antifriction articles or devices
    as lubricating elements is provided for herein, if there is no provision
    elsewhere.

    (II)    The discussion of solid antifriction articles and devices in B.
    (1), supra, is generally applicable also to the materials from which these
    articles and devices are fashioned.

            The materials provided for herein from which said solid
    antifriction articles or devices are made are the aggregate materials, not
    individual components of the materials or anything less than the entirety
    of the material suitable to be fashioned into said article or device.

    (III)   The lubricant or separant compositions for moving solid surfaces
    provided for herein may be liquid, plastic, or fluent compositions
    specialized and designed for use between two relatively moving surfaces and
    in contact therewith for reducing friction therebetween or preventing said
    surfaces from contacting each other.  The compositions must include at
    least one component that is not a hydrocarbon (except if the hydrocarbon is
    a solid synthetic polymer).

            Any process of making such compositions, or peculiar to making such
    compositions, for which there is no provision elsewhere is provided for
    herein.

    (IV)    This class is the generic home for mineral oils admixed with
    non-hydrocarbon materials and not limited to a function or utility provided
    for elsewhere in Class 252 or any other class.  Examples of such
    compositions are mineral oils mixed with antioxidants, corrosion
    inhibitors, gum inhibitors, stabilizers, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Components of compositions, if described purely in
    functional terms such as "antioxidant," "VI improver," etc., will not be
    considered as determinative of classification.  In other words, one should
    not classify a claim in a particular subclass of this class by referring to
    the specification for the chemical structure identity of a component
    described in the claims in purely functional language.  If the claims of a
    patent are devoid of chemical structure for the components of a
    composition, the original classification of the patent will be subclass 200
    or subclass 220, assuming that the patent claims are not provided for in
    another class or classes.

    (2)     Note.  Mere or nominal methods of use of a chemical compound as a
    lubricant or separant within the meaning of the class definition are
    classified in this class.

    (3)     Note.  When the expression "organic compound" is used in this
    class, it means a compound which meets the requirements of the Class 260
    class definition, i.e., the molecule is characterized by two carbons bonded
    together, one atom of carbon bonded to at least one atom of hydrogen or
    halogen, or one atom of carbon bonded to at least one atom of nitrogen by a
    single or double bond.  Certain compounds are exceptions to this rule,
    i.e., HCN, CN-CN, HNCO, HNCS, cyanogen halides, cyanamide, fulminic acid
    and metal carbides.  Said exceptions and all other chemical compounds shall
    be regarded as inorganic.

    (4)     Note.  When the term "hydrocarbon" is used in this class, it means
    an organic compound which consists exclusively of carbon and hydrogen.

    (5)     Note.  The organic chemical structure terminology used in this
    class is consistent with that used in the Glossary for the Class 532 -
    Organic Compounds - part of the Class 532-570 Series (Published May 22,
    1984 in Addendum No. 1-Order No. 946) except as otherwise noted.

    (6)     Note.  A list of superiority of some composition classes appears in
    the main class definition of Class 252, Compositions: (5) Note.  This note
    in Class 252 explains classification of a generic composition with several
    disclosed uses.

    (7)     Note.  When a component of a composition classified in this Class
    is of indeterminate chemical structure, the following principles shall
    apply to the classification thereof:

    (a)     a number of subclasses herein provide for components of a
    composition described in terms of their being reaction products of
    indeterminate structure derived from the reaction of a particular type
    compound of known structure.

    (b)     a composition component of indeterminate structure that can not be
    classified as described in (a), supra, shall be classified by considering
    two additional possible methods for classifying it and employing the one
    which results in the highest classification in the class.  The two methods
    are:

    1.      Classify according to a partial structure known to be part of the
    component.

    2.      Classify based on a reactant utilized to make the component, and
    place in the highest reactant classification, with priority given to
    organic reactants.  If no organic reactants are used, classify based on the
    highest inorganic reactant classification.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 404 for a process of breaking in an engine
    using a break-in lubricant.

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclasses 300+ particularly (5)
    Note to subclass 300 for the line between Class 44 and this class (252).

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, appropriate subclasses for a bearing containing a continuous
    phase of metal made by consolidating metal particles, particularly subclass
    231 for such a bearing containing  molybdenum disulfide or other solid or
    other solid lubricant.

    102,    Ammunition and Explosives, particularly subclass 511 for such
    devices embodying lubricants wherein there is claimed the structure of the
    device which is more than a mere recitation of the composition or of a
    carrier including a lubricant.

    184,    Lubrication, for lubricating processes or apparatus.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 14+ for
    compositions consisting of mineral oils or mixtures thereof, regardless of
    the use or function, as for example, fuels, lubricating oils, etc.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 71+ for similar compositions which are
    heat exchange, low freezing or pour point or high boiling.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 570+, for fluent dielectric compositions
    ("insulating oils") which contain a hydrocarbon and a nonhydrocarbon.

    384,    Bearings, appropriate subclasses for bearings that include
    lubricants and significant structure of the bearing.  Bearings that include
    lubricants when claimed solely in terms of the composition of which they
    are composed are classified in this class (Class 252).

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions, appropriate subclasses for a
    bearing distinguished solely by its alloy or metallic composition.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Class 523, subclasses 149+ for a composition containing a
    synthetic resin or natural rubbers having utility as a friction element or
    to processes of preparing said composition.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclasses 1+ for a composition
    consisting only of hydrocarbons, regardless of the use or function, as for
    example, fuels, lubricating oils, etc.  Such hydrocarbons may not be solid
    synthetic polymers.


CLS 508/100
TXT SOLID ANTIFRICTION DEVICE, ARTICLE  OR MATERIAL THEREFOR (i.e., SHAPED
    SOLID ARTICLES WHICH RETAIN THEIR SHAPE DURING USE, SUCH AS BEARINGS,
    RINGS, SEALS, JOURNAL BOXES, BUSHINGS, BRAKES, CLUTCHES, GUN WADS, JOURNAL
    BEARINGS, OR LINERS FOR BEARINGS, BRAKES OR CLUTCHES, OR MATERIAL THEREFOR,
    WHEREIN A LUBRICANT IS A PERMANENT PART OF THE SOLID ANTIFRICTION DEVICE,
    ARTICLE  OR MATERIAL, WHETHER BY PERMANENT COATING, IMPREGNATION INTO THE
    INTERSTICES THEREOF, OR BY BEING PART OF THE COMPOSITION) (E.G., SYNTHETIC
    RESIN TYPE SOLID ANTIFRICTION DEVICES, ETC.):

    Antifriction devices, articles or materials therefor under the class
    definition which, in the case of the articles or devices, are:  (1) solid,
    (2) shaped, (3) shape-retaining during use and (4) characterized by having
    a lubricant substance as a permanent part of the device or article, which
    permanence may be accomplished by permanent coating, impregnation into the
    interstices thereof, or by being part of the composition from which the
    article or device is fashioned; the materials therefor are the aggregate
    materials which differ from the articles or devices only in that they have
    not been shaped.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and its indents provide for a backing which is
    coated with a layer of lubricating substance, provided that not enough
    structure is recited to warrant classification elsewhere.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass and its indents provide for a backing which is
    coated with plural layers only if (a) each layer is a lubricant layer, and
    (b) not enough structure is recited to warrant classification elsewhere.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass and its indents provide for articles, devices
    or materials therefor wherein a composition containing metal powder is
    sintered, compacted or compressed, only if a lubricant substance is (1)
    layered or (2) impregnated on or into the composition after the composition
    is sintered, compacted or compressed.


CLS 508/101
TXT Animal or plant matter  (e.g., blood, hair, skin, wood, hemp, cotton,
    paper, lard, castor oil, shellac, glue, beeswax, etc.):

    Devices, articles, or materials under subclass 100 which contain animal or
    plant matter.


CLS 508/102
TXT With graphite or elemental carbon:

    Devices, articles, or materials under subclass 101 which contain, in
    addition to the animal or plant matter of indeterminate structure,
    elemental carbon or graphite.


CLS 508/103
TXT Elemental or alloyed metal:

    Devices, articles, or materials under subclass 100 which contain elemental
    metal or alloyed metal.


CLS 508/104
TXT With fluorine compound:

    Devices, articles, or materials under subclass 103 which contain, in
    addition to the elemental or alloyed metal, a fluorine compound.


CLS 508/105
TXT With  graphite, coal, or elemental carbon:

    Devices, articles, or materials under subclass 103 which contain, in
    addition to the elemental or alloyed metal, elemental carbon, coal or
    graphite.


CLS 508/106
TXT Halogen compound:

    Devices, articles, or materials under subclass 100 which contain a halogen
    compound.


CLS 508/107
TXT Silicon compound:

    Devices, articles, or materials under subclass 100 which contain a silicon
    compound.


CLS 508/108
TXT Heavy metal or aluminum compound (e.g., MoS2, etc.):

    Devices, articles, or materials under subclass 100 which contain a heavy
    metal compound or an aluminum compound.

    (1)     Note.  Arsenic is considered a heavy metal.

    (2)     Note.  Heavy metals are those whose specific gravity is greater
    than 4.0.


CLS 508/109
TXT Graphite, coal, or elemental carbon:

    Devices, articles, or materials under subclass 100 which contain elemental
    carbon, coal, or graphite.


CLS 508/110
TXT LUBRICANTS OR SEPARANTS FOR MOVING SOLID SURFACES AND MISCELLANEOUS MINERAL
    OIL COMPOSITIONS (E.G., WATER CONTAINING, ETC.):

    Compositions under the class definition which are miscellaneous mineral oil
    compositions, or are lubricants or separants for moving solid surfaces.

    (1)     Note.  Compositions classifiable in this subclass contain at least
    one component that is not a hydrocarbon (except as a solid synthetic
    polymer) or a mineral oil.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass and its indents provide not only for
    compositions of lubricants, per se, but also for compositions of additives
    intended to enhance the lubricating properties of a lubricant base.  An
    example of such an additive composition is a viscosity improving additive
    composition.

    (3)     Note.  Since additives to lubricant compositions may serve more
    than a single purpose, the primary basis of classification for this
    subclass and its indents is the chemical structure of the nonhydrocarbon
    ingredients of the composition.

    (4)     Note.  In classifying compositions in this and indented subclasses,
    all ingredients intentionally present in the composition are given equal
    weight for purposes of classification without regard to the amount present
    or whether the component is a lubricant additive or lubricant base.

    (5)     Note.  An example of a composition provided for herein is an
    emulsion of a hydrocarbon oil and water.


CLS 508/111
TXT Processes of purifying or recovering used lubricant compositions, and
    purified or recovered products thereof:

    Processes under subclass 110 which are directed to the chemical or physical
    treatment of used lubricant compositions of this class for the purpose of
    purification or recovery, or to lubricant compositions described in terms
    of a method of purification or recovery thereof after use.

    (1)     Note.  To be classified herein, the process can not simply be for
    the purification or recovery of a mineral oil or hydrocarbon lubricating
    base. The composition whose purification or recovery is desired must
    include at least one component that is not a hydrocarbon (except if the
    hydrocarbon is a solid synthetic polymer).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, various subclasses, for the
    purification and recovery of mineral oils, per se.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclasses 800+, for the
    purification and recovery of mixtures of hydrocarbons that are neither
    mineral oils nor solid synthetic polymers.


CLS 508/112
TXT Halogenated graphite, or microorganism metabolic product or culture product
    of indeterminate structure:

    Compositions under subclass 110 which contain a product of indeterminate
    structure resulting from a micro-organism culture medium or from a
    micro-organism's metabolic process, or which contain halogenated graphite.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are fluorinated
    graphite, and the indeterminate product of yeast fermentation of a water,
    wood-pulp, rye-meal, and glue mixture.


CLS 508/113
TXT Graphite, coal, or elemental carbon:

    Compositions under subclass 110 which contain elemental carbon, coal or
    graphite.


CLS 508/114
TXT With silk, sponge, hair, skin, leather, meat, or fibrous plant matter
    (e.g., cork, bamboo, bark, sawdust, cotton, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 113 which contain, in addition to the graphite,
    coal, or elemental carbon, at least one of fibrous plant matter, meat,
    leather, skin, hair, sponge or silk.

    (1)     Note.  Meat is intended to indicate the flesh of animals.

    (2)     Note.  Sponge is intended to encompass natural sponge, or synthetic
    sponge which is identified as sponge rather than as a particular chemical
    substance.  If a component is  identified both as sponge and in terms of
    its chemical structure, said component should be classified as an original
    here and should be cross-referenced to the appropriate chemical structure
    subclass.

    (3)     Note.  Hair is intended to encompass the fine, threadlike
    outgrowths from the skin of an animal; skin is intended to encompass the
    outer covering or integument of an animal body.

    (4)     Note.  Fibrous plant matter indicates plant matter in which the
    plant fibers have not been destroyed.

    (5)     Note.  Chemically modified cellulose (e.g. CMC, cellulose ethers,
    etc.) is not considered as fibrous plant matter.


CLS 508/115
TXT With naturally occurring resin, salt thereof, agar, natural rubber, tar,
    pitch, animal glue, turpentine, or carbohydrate gum:

    Compositions under subclass 113 which contain, in addition to the graphite,
    coal or elemental carbon, at least one of carbohydrate gum, turpentine,
    animal glue, pitch, tar, natural rubber, agar, naturally occurring resins,
    or salts of naturally occurring resins.

    (1)     Note.  For the definition of naturally occurring resin, see the
    definition of subclass 200 in Class 530, Chemistry: Natural Resins or
    Derivatives; Peptides or Proteins: Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof.

    (2)     Note.  Animal glue is intended to encompass the normally impure
    animal matter of proteinaceous nature which found early use as an adhesive,
    etc. A substance identified as "glue", without further elucidation, will be
    construed as animal glue.

    (3)     Note.  Carbohydrate gum is intended to encompass the complex
    carbohydrate mucilaginous plant stem excretions which normally yield sugar
    on hydrolysis.  Examples are gum arabic and gum tragacanth.  A substance
    identified as gum, without further elucidation, will be construed as
    carbohydrate gum.

    (4)     Note.  Tar and pitch are generally considered as mineral oils for
    purposes of classification.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, especially subclasses 18+
    for lubricating compositions which are mixtures of mineral oils only.


CLS 508/116
TXT With organic -C(=O)O- compound:

    Compositions under subclass 113 which contain, in addition to the graphite,
    coal, or elemental carbon, an organic -C(=O)O- compound.

    (1)     Note.  An organic -C(=O)O- compound is one in which the carbon of
    the -C(=O)O- is, or is attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding
    to, the carbon of an organic compound.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.

    (3)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is castor oil.


CLS 508/117
TXT Phosphorus, nitrogen, or halogen attached directly or indirectly to the
    -C(=O)O- group by nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 116 wherein the -C(=O)O- group of the
    organic-C(=O)O- compound is attached directly or indirectly to phosphorus,
    nitrogen, or halogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are (1) vinyl
    pyrrolidone-hexyl methacrylate copolymers and (2) lecithin.


CLS 508/118
TXT The organic -C(=O)O- compound is a polymer resulting from polymerization of
    an olefinic double bond (e.g., ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer,
    polyacrylate, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 116 wherein polymerization of an olefinic
    double bond in a monomer containing the -C(=O)O- group affords the organic
    -C(=O)O- compound.


CLS 508/119
TXT The organic -C(=O)O- compound is sulfurized, or elemental sulfur is present
    (e.g., sulfurized sperm oil, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 116 wherein (1) elemental sulfur is present in
    addition to the organic -C(=O)O- compound and the graphite, coal, or
    elemental carbon, or (2) the organic -C(=O)O- compound present is
    sulfurized.

    (1)     Note.  Sulfurized compounds are generally the result of reaction of
    sulfur or sulfur chloride with the original compound.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is sulfurized
    sperm oil.


CLS 508/120
TXT The organic -C(=O)O- compound is a naturally occurring carboxylic acid
    ester wax, or a reaction product thereof of indeterminate structure (e.g.,
    beeswax, spermaceti, lanolin, degras, Japan wax, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 116 wherein the organic -C(=O)O- compound is
    (1) a reaction product of a naturally occurring carboxylic acid ester wax,
    which product is of indeterminate structure, or (2) a naturally occurring
    carboxylic acid ester wax, per se.


CLS 508/121
TXT With boron or silicon compound:

    Compositions under subclass 116 which contain, in addition to the organic
    -C(=O)O- compound and the graphite, coal or elemental carbon, a compound
    which contains boron or silicon.

    (1)     Note.  Example of components provided for herein are borax and
    silica.


CLS 508/122
TXT The organic -C(=O)O- compound is a carboxylic acid or salt thereof, or
    inorganic base is present with the organic -C(=O)O- compound:

    Compositions under subclass 116 wherein (1) inorganic base is present in
    addition to the organic -C(=O)O- compound and the graphite, coal, or
    elemental carbon, or (2) the organic -C(=O)O- compound is a carboxylic acid
    or salt thereof.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is zinc
    stearate.


CLS 508/123
TXT With elemental or alloyed metal:

    Compositions under subclass 113 which contain, in addition to the graphite,
    coal, or elemental carbon, an elemental metal or a metal alloy.


CLS 508/124
TXT With silicon compound:

    Compositions under subclass 123 which contain, in addition to the elemental
    metal or metal alloy and the graphite, coal, or elemental carbon, a
    compound that contains silicon.


CLS 508/125
TXT With boron compound or elemental sulfur:

    Compositions under subclass 113 which contain, in addition to the graphite,
    coal, or elemental carbon, a boron compound or elemental sulfur.


CLS 508/126
TXT With silicon compound:

    Compositions under subclass 113 which contain, in addition to the graphite,
    coal, or elemental carbon, a compound that contains silicon.


CLS 508/127
TXT With non-silicon inorganic compound (except water):

    Compositions under subclass 126 which contain, in addition to the silicon
    compound and the graphite, coal, or elemental carbon, an inorganic compound
    (excluding water) that does not contain silicon.

    (1)     Note.  See the (3) Note in the class definition for the definition
    of organic compound.  Any chemical compound not regarded as organic therein
    shall be considered inorganic.

    (2)     Note.  Water may be present as a component herein, providing that a
    further non-siliceous inorganic compound is present.


CLS 508/128
TXT With organic sulfur, phosphorus, or nitrogen compound:

    Compositions under subclass 113 which contain, in addition to the graphite,
    coal, or elemental carbon, an organic nitrogen compound, an organic
    phosphorus compound, or an organic sulfur compound.

    (1)     Note.  An organic nitrogen compound is one in which nitrogen is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.  Organic phosphorus compounds and organic sulfur compounds are
    similarly defined.

    (2)     Note.  See the (3) Note in the class definition for the definition
    of an organic compound.


CLS 508/129
TXT With inorganic compound (except water):

    Compositions under subclass 113 which contain, in addition to the graphite,
    coal or elemental carbon, an inorganic compound (except water).

    (1)     Note.  Water may be present as a component herein, provided that an
    additional inorganic compound is present.

    (2)     Note.  See the (3) Note in the class definition for the definition
    of an organic compound.  Any chemical compound not regarded as organic
    therein shall be considered inorganic.


CLS 508/130
TXT With organic oxygen or halogen compound:

    Compositions under subclass 113 which contain, in addition to the graphite,
    coal, or elemental carbon, an organic oxygen compound or an organic halogen
    compound.

    (1)     Note.  An organic oxygen compound is one in which oxygen is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.  Organic halogen compounds are similarly defined.

    (2)     Note.  See the (3) Note in the class definition for the definition
    of an organic compound.


CLS 508/131
TXT With synthetic polymer (e.g., ethylene-propylene copolymer, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 113 which contain, in addition to the graphite,
    coal, or elemental carbon, a polymer prepared by synthetic means.


CLS 508/132
TXT Tar, tar distillate, or chemically reacted tar or tar distillate:

    Compositions under subclass 110 which contain a chemically reacted tar, a
    chemically reacted tar distillate, a tar distillate, or tar.

    (1)     Note.  Tar and tar distillate are generally considered as mineral
    oils.

    (2)     Note.  An example of chemically reacted tar provided for herein is
    sulfurized tar.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, especially subclasses 18+
    for lubricant compositions which are mixtures of mineral oils only.


CLS 508/133
TXT Asphalt, pitch, pitch distillate, or chemically reacted asphalt or pitch
    (e.g., sulfurized, salified, reduced, blown, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 110 which contain chemically reacted asphalt,
    chemically reacted pitch, pitch distillate, pitch, or asphalt.

    (1)     Note.  Pitch, pitch distillate, and asphalt are generally
    considered as mineral oils.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, especially subclasses 18+
    for lubricant compositions which are mixtures of mineral oils only.


CLS 508/134
TXT With carboxylic acid or salt thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 133 which contain, in addition to the asphalt,
    pitch, pitch distillate, or chemically reacted asphalt or pitch, a
    carboxylic acid or salt thereof.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is lead
    naphthenate.


CLS 508/135
TXT Distillation residues of crude chemical reaction mixtures, or such residues
    chemically reacted (e.g., oxo still bottoms, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 110 which contain residues from distillation of
    crude chemical reaction mixtures, or the chemical reaction products of such
    residues.

    (1)     Note.  The reaction of carbon monoxide, olefin, and hydrocarbon is
    referred to as the "oxo" reaction.  Desired products are generally removed
    from the reaction mixture by a distillation process.  The residue remaining
    in the still pot after distillation, a mixture of diverse compounds, is an
    example of the materials encompassed by this subclass.


CLS 508/136
TXT Silicon dioxide, silicic acid, orthosilicate, or metasilicate, including
    surface-treated (e.g., clays, onium clays, estersils, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 110 which contain silicon dioxide, silicic
    acid, orthosilicate, or metasilicate; these materials may be present either
    per se or in a surface-treated state.

    (1)     Note.  Surface-treated encompasses both physical and chemical
    surface treatment.  Silicon dioxide, e.g., may be simply coated, or its
    outer layer may be made to chemically react with a surface treating agent.

    (2)     Note.  Silicon dioxide is also known as silica, SiO2.

    (3)     Note.  Silicic acids encompass inorganic compounds wherein silicon
    is bonded directly to a hydroxyl group.

    (4)     Note.  An inorganic compound is any compound not specified to be
    organic in (3) Note of the class definition.

    (5)     Note.  Orthosilicates (M4SiO4) and metasilicates (M2SiO3) may
    combine to form polysilicates, M being metal or in some cases ammonium.
    They are salts derived from silica or the silicic acids.  All the common
    clays are included under this umbrella.


CLS 508/137
TXT With non-siliceous boron compound as additional component or
    surface-treating agent:

    Compositions under subclass 136 which contain, in addition to the silicon
    dioxide, silicic acid, metasilicate, or orthosilicate, a compound that
    contains boron but does not contain silicon; the compound may be present as
    an additional component or as a surface-treating agent for the silicon
    dioxide, silicic acid, orthosilicate, or metasilicate.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are boron
    nitride, boric acid, and trialkyl borate.


CLS 508/138
TXT With non-siliceous fluorine-containing polymer as additional component or
    surface-treating agent (e.g., polytetrafluoroethylene, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 136 which contain, in addition to the silicon
    dioxide, silicic acid, orthosilicate, or metasilicate, a polymer that
    contains fluorine but does not contain silicon; the polymer may be present
    as an additional component or as a surface-treating agent for the silicon
    dioxide, silicic acid, orthosilicate, or metasilicate.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is
    polytetrafluoroethylene.


CLS 508/139
TXT With elemental sulfur, elemental metal, or alloy as additional component or
    surface-treating agent:

    Compositions under subclass 136 which contain, in addition to the silicon
    dioxide, silicic acid, orthosilicate or metasilicate, an alloy, elemental
    metal, or elemental sulfur; the elemental sulfur, alloy, or elemental metal
    may be present as an additional component or as a surface-treating agent
    for the silicon dioxide, silicic acid, orthosilicate, or metasilicate.


CLS 508/140
TXT Asbestos:

    Compositions under subclass 136 which contain asbestos, which may or may
    not be surface-treated.


CLS 508/141
TXT With non-siliceous inorganic heavy metal or aluminum compound as additional
    component or surface-treating agent (e.g., molybdenum disulfide, alumina,
    etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 136 which contain, in addition to the silicon
    dioxide, silicic acid, orthosilicate, or metasilicate, a compound which
    contains heavy metal or aluminum but does not contain silicon; the compound
    may be present as an additional component or as a surface-treating agent
    for the silicon dioxide, silicic acid, orthosilicate, or metasilicate.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are molybdenum
    sulfide and aluminum sulfate.

    (2)     Note.  Arsenic is considered a heavy metal.

    (3)     Note.  Heavy metals are those with a specific gravity greater than
    4.0.


CLS 508/142
TXT With carbohydrate or fibrous plant matter as additional component or
    surface-treating agent (e.g., starch, elm bark, cellulose compounds, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 136 which contain, in addition to the silicon
    dioxide, silicic acid, orthosilicate, or metasilicate, a carbohydrate or
    fibrous plant matter; the fibrous plant matter or carbohydrate may be
    present as an additional component or as a surface-treating agent for the
    silicon dioxide, silicic acid, orthosilicate, or metasilicate.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are dextrine and
    elm bark.


CLS 508/143
TXT With added water:

    Compositions under subclass 136 which contain, in addition to the silicon
    dioxide, silicic acid, orthosilicate, or metasilicate, water that has been
    intentionally added.


CLS 508/144
TXT With carboxylic acid, salt thereof, sulfonic acid, or salt thereof as
    additional component or surface-treating agent:

    Compositions under subclass 136 which contain, in addition to the silicon
    dioxide, silicic acid, orthosilicate, or metasilicate, a carboxylic acid, a
    carboxylic acid salt, a sulfonic acid, or a sulfonic acid salt; the
    carboxylic acid, sulfonic acid, or salts may be present as an additional
    component or as a surface-treating agent for the silicon dioxide, silicic
    acid, orthosilicate, or metasilicate.


CLS 508/145
TXT With triazine or triazole hetero ring compound as additional component or
    surface-treating agent:

    Compositions under subclass 136 which contain, in addition to the silicon
    dioxide, silicic acid, orthosilicate or metasilicate, a compound that
    contains a triazine hetero ring or a triazole hetero ring; the compound may
    be present as an additional component or as a surface-treating agent for
    the silicon dioxide, silicic acid, orthosilicate, or metasilicate.

    (1)     Note.  A triazine hetero ring consists of three ring carbons and
    three ring nitrogens.  A triazole hetero ring consists of two ring carbons
    and three ring nitrogens.


CLS 508/146
TXT With heterocyclic ring compound that has ring sulfur or has chalcogen
    double bonded to heterocyclic ring carbon as additional component or
    surface-treating agent; a heterocyclic ring is one having as ring members
    only carbon and at least one hetero atom selected from  chalcogen (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) and  nitrogen (e.g., thiadiazoles,
    cyclic carbonates, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 136 which contain, in addition to the silicon
    dioxide, silicic acid, orthosilicate, or metasilicate, a compound which has
    a heterocyclic  ring having ring sulfur or having chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) double bonded to hetero ring carbon; the
    compound may be present as an additional component or as a surface-treating
    agent for the silicon dioxide, silicic acid, orthosilicate, or metasilicate.


CLS 508/147
TXT With azo compound, inorganic phosphorus salt, or oxidate of undetermined
    composition as additional component or surface-treating agent:

    Compositions under subclass 136 which contain, in addition to the silicon
    dioxide, silicic acid, orthosilicate, or metasilicate, an azo compound, an
    inorganic compound that is a phosphorus salt, or an oxidate of
    indeterminate composition; the azo compound, inorganic compound, or oxidate
    may be present as an additional component or as a surface-treating agent
    for the silicon dioxide, silicic acid, orthosilicate, or metasilicate.

    (1)     Note.  An azo compound is an organic compound characterized by the
    group

    -N=N-

            wherein both nitrogens are acyclic and each is bonded directly to
    carbon.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/148
TXT Talc, mica, or ultramarine blue:

    Compositions under subclass 136 which contain talc, mica, or ultramarine
    blue, any of which may or may not be surface-treated.

    (1)     Note.  Talc is 3MgO-4SiO2-H2O.  It is also called soapstone, French
    chalk, steatite, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Ultramarine blue is of the approximate formula

    Na3Al3Si3-4S2O13


CLS 508/149
TXT Elemental halogen or elemental phosphorus:

    Compositions under subclass 110 which contain elemental phosphorus or
    elemental halogen.


CLS 508/150
TXT Elemental or alloyed metal:

    Compositions under subclass 110 which contain a metal alloy or elemental
    metal.


CLS 508/151
TXT With nitrogen, sulfur, or halogen compound:

    Compositions under subclass 150 which contain, in addition to the metal
    alloy or elemental metal, a compound that contains nitrogen, sulfur, or
    halogen.


CLS 508/152
TXT Elemental sulfur, selenium, or tellurium:

    Compositions under subclass 110 which contain elemental sulfur, elemental
    selenium, or elemental tellurium.

    (1)     Note.  The elemental sulfur must be elemental sulfur that is added
    to the composition.  Mineral oils, etc. that naturally contain a small
    amount of elemental sulfur do not meet the requirement of this subclass.


CLS 508/153
TXT With compound containing nitrogen, sulfur, phosphorus, boron, or halogen:

    Compositions under subclass 152 which contain, in addition to the elemental
    sulfur, elemental selenium, or elemental tellurium, a compound that
    contains nitrogen, sulfur, phosphorus, boron, or halogen.


CLS 508/154
TXT Inorganic compound (except water) (Overbased or carbonated organic acidic
    compounds are not classified in this subclass or its indents on the basis
    of inorganic overbasing or carbonating agents; the overbased or carbonated
    compounds are treated as complexes, and are classified with the particular
    organic acidic compound):

    Compositions under subclass 110 which contain an inorganic compound that is
    not (1) water or (2) an inorganic overbasing agent or inorganic carbonating
    agent used to overbase or carbonate an acidic organic compound.

    (1)     Note.  The compositions provided for by this subclass may contain
    water or an inorganic overbasing or carbonating agent, provided that there
    is also present an inorganic compound that is not water or an inorganic
    overbasing or carbonating agent.

    (2)     Note.  An inorganic compound is any chemical compound that is not
    within the definition of organic compound in (3) Note in the class
    definition.

    (3)     Note.  Overbased or carbonated organic acidic compounds are treated
    as complexes, and are classified with the particular acidic organic
    compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186,    for borated or boronated carbonated or overbased organic acid salts.

    391+    for overbased or carbonated sulfonates.

    460,    for overbased or carbonated carboxylates.

    574,    for overbased or carbonated phenol sulfides.


CLS 508/155
TXT The inorganic compound contains boron (e.g., boron nitride, boramine, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 154 wherein boron is in the inorganic compound.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are boramide,
    boron trifluoride, and titanium diboride.


CLS 508/156
TXT Oxygen bonded directly to the boron (e.g., metal borates, boric oxide,
    etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 155 wherein the boron is bonded directly to
    oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are boric acid
    and potassium borate.


CLS 508/157
TXT With triglyceride or naturally occurring ester wax (e.g., beeswax, palm
    oil, tallow, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 156 which contain, in addition to the inorganic
    boron compound, a naturally occurring ester wax or a triglyceride.

    (1)     Note.  To be classified herein as a naturally occurring carboxylic
    acid ester wax, a substance must either be characterized as a naturally
    occurring carboxylic acid ester wax or be known to be a naturally occurring
    carboxylic acid ester wax.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of known naturally occurring carboxylic acid ester
    waxes are lanolin, beeswax, carnauba oil, and spermaceti.

    (3)     Note.  Triglycerides are compounds wherein glycerine has been
    esterified with three molar proportions of the same or different carboxylic
    acid, carboxylic acid halide, etc.


CLS 508/158
TXT With carboxylic acid or salt thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 156 which contain, in addition to the inorganic
    boron compound, a salt of a carboxylic acid or a carboxylic acid, per se.


CLS 508/159
TXT With phosphorus compound:

    Compositions under subclass 156 which contain, in addition to the inorganic
    boron compound, a compound that contains phosphorus.


CLS 508/160
TXT With acyclic organic compound consisting of carbon, hydrogen, and oxygen
    (e.g., glycols, glycol ethers, alcohols, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 156 which contain, in addition to the inorganic
    boron compound, an acyclic organic compound that consists of carbon,
    hydrogen, and oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are aldehydes,
    ketones, ethers, and alcohols.


CLS 508/161
TXT The inorganic compound contains phosphorus or silicon (e.g., phosphorus
    sulfide, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 154 wherein silicon or phosphorus is in the
    inorganic compound.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are:

    SiH2Cl2

     and

     PCl3


CLS 508/162
TXT Oxygen bonded directly to the phosphorus (e.g., orthophosphoric acid,
    phosphate salts, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 161 wherein the phosphorus is bonded directly
    to oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are phosphoric
    acid and ammonium polyphosphate.


CLS 508/163
TXT With inorganic compound not containing phosphorus (except water):

    Compositions under subclass 162 which contain, in addition to the inorganic
    phosphorus compound, an inorganic compound that does not contain phosphorus
    and is not water.


CLS 508/164
TXT With carboxylic acid or salt thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 162 which contain, in addition to the inorganic
    phosphorus compound, a salt of a carboxylic acid or a carboxylic acid, per
    se.


CLS 508/165
TXT The inorganic compound contains heavy metal or aluminum:

    Compositions under subclass 154 wherein heavy metal or aluminum is in the
    inorganic compound.

    (1)     Note.  Arsenic is considered a heavy metal.

    (2)     Note.  Heavy metals are those with a specific gravity greater than
    4.0.

    (3)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are tungsten
    carbonyl and titanium dioxide.


CLS 508/166
TXT Sulfide, selenide, or telluride of heavy metal or aluminum (e.g.,
    lithopone, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 165 wherein the heavy metal or aluminum is
    present as a sulfide, a selenide or a telluride.


CLS 508/167
TXT The heavy metal is molybdenum or tungsten (e.g., molybdenum sulfide, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 166 which contain a sulfide, a selenide, or a
    telluride of molybdenum or tungsten.


CLS 508/168
TXT With organic nitrogen or halogen compound:

    Compositions under subclass 167 which contain, in addition to the inorganic
    molybdenum or tungsten compound, an organic nitrogen compound or an organic
    halogen compound.

    (1)     Note.  An organic nitrogen compound is one wherein nitrogen is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.  Organic halogen compound is similarly defined.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/169
TXT With sulfur compound or additional inorganic metal compound:

    Compositions under subclass 167 which contain, in addition to the inorganic
    molybdenum or tungsten compound, an additional inorganic compound
    containing  metal or a sulfur compound.


CLS 508/170
TXT Ammonium or additional diverse metal in the inorganic compound (e.g., alum,
    sodium molybdate, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 165 wherein the inorganic compound contains, in
    addition to heavy metal or aluminum, an additional diverse metal or
    ammonium.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are KMnO4 and
    ammonium uranate.


CLS 508/171
TXT The heavy metal is iron or lead:

    Compositions under subclass 165 wherein iron or lead is the heavy metal.


CLS 508/172
TXT Aluminum or zinc in the inorganic compound:

    Compositions under subclass 165 wherein zinc or aluminum is present in the
    inorganic compound.


CLS 508/173
TXT With organic compound containing silicon:

    Compositions under subclass 154 which contain, in addition to the inorganic
    compound, an organic  compound that contains silicon.

    (1)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.

    (2)     Note.  There are no restrictions on the type of bonding between
    silicon and the remainder of the compound.


CLS 508/174
TXT With organic phosphorus compound:

    Compositions under subclass 154 which contain, in addition to the inorganic
    compound, an organic phosphorus compound.

    (1)     Note.  An organic phosphorus compound is one wherein phosphorus is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/175
TXT With organic -C(=O)O- compound (e.g., ester waxes, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 154 which contain, in addition to the inorganic
    compound, an organic -C(=O)O- compound.

    (1)     Note.  An organic -C(=O)O- compound is one wherein the carbon of
    the -C(=O)O- group is, or is attached directly or indirectly by nonionic
    bonding to, the carbon of an organic compound.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/176
TXT The inorganic compound contains nitrogen:

    Compositions under subclass 175 wherein nitrogen is in the inorganic
    compound.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are sodium
    nitrite and ammonium carbonate.


CLS 508/177
TXT With organic nitrogen compound:

    Compositions under subclass 175 which contain, in addition to the inorganic
    compound and the organic -C(=O)O- compound, an organic nitrogen compound.

    (1)     Note.  An organic nitrogen compound is one wherein nitrogen is
    attached directly or indirectly to carbon of an organic compound by
    nonionic bonding.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/178
TXT The inorganic compound is a metal hydroxide or metal oxide:

    Compositions under subclass 175 wherein the inorganic compound is present
    as a metal hydroxide or as a metal oxide.

    (1)     Note.  To be provided for herein, the hydroxide or oxide must be
    present by intention, rather than merely in a trace amount remaining from,
    e.g., a saponification reaction.


CLS 508/179
TXT With organic nitrogen or sulfur compound:

    Compositions under subclass 154 which contain, in addition to the inorganic
    compound, an organic nitrogen or an organic sulfur compound.

    (1)     Note.  An organic nitrogen compound is one wherein nitrogen is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.  Organic sulfur compound is similarly defined.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/180
TXT The inorganic compound is a carbonate:

    Compositions under subclass 154 wherein the inorganic compound is a
    carbonate.


CLS 508/181
TXT PTFE (polytetrafluoroethylene):

    Compositions under subclass 110 which contain an addition homopolymer of
    tetrafluoroethylene, CF2=CF2.

    (1)     Note.  The addition polymers provided for herein have the general
    formula:

    (-CF2-CF2-)n


CLS 508/182
TXT With compound having ether group:

    Compositions under subclass 181 which contain, in addition to the
    polytetrafluoroethylene, a compound that contains an ether group.


CLS 508/183
TXT With silicon compound, or organic phosphorus or sulfur compound:

    Compositions under subclass 181 which contain, in addition to the
    polytetrafluoroethylene, an organic phosphorus compound, an organic sulfur
    compound, or an organic compound that contains silicon.

    (1)     Note.  An organic phosphorus compound is one wherein phosphorus is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.  Organic sulfur compound is similarly defined.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.

    (3)     Note.  The organic compound that contains silicon provided for
    herein can contain the silicon attached directly or indirectly to carbon of
    the organic compound by any type bonding.


CLS 508/184
TXT Azo compound (i.e., compound having two acyclic nitrogens double bonded to
    each other, and carbon single bonded to each of the nitrogens):

    Compositions under subclass 110 which contain the acyclic group -N=N-
    wherein each nitrogen is single bonded directly to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/185
TXT Boron:

    Compositions under subclass 110 which contain boron in an organic compound
    component.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:

    B(OC5H11)3

    (2)     Note.  This subclass and its indents provide for organic compound
    components containing boron, regardless of the type bonding between boron
    and the rest of the compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150+,   for compositions containing elemental boron.

    155+,   for compositions containing boron compounds that are inorganic.


CLS 508/186
TXT Borated or boronated carbonated or overbased organic acid salts (e.g.,
    borated overbased carbonated sulfonates, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 185 wherein boron is present in the component
    as a borated or boronated carbonated or overbased salt of an organic acid.

    (1)     Note.  The organic acids most generally employed herein are
    sulfonic acids and phenols.

    (2)     Note.  An overbased compound herein is one which an amount of metal
    (e.g., Mg, Ca, Ba, Sr) is present which is greater than the stoichiometric
    amount of metal which would be present if the organic acid were completely
    neutralized.

    (3)     Note.  A carbonated compound herein is the complex resulting from
    the reaction of carbon dioxide with a metal salt of an organic acid.

    (4)     Note.  The structure of the components provided for herein is
    generally not clear.  The components are generally described in terms of
    their method of synthesis.


CLS 508/187
TXT Phosphorus or silicon containing:

    Compositions under subclass 185 wherein the boron component also contains
    silicon or phosphorus.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:

    [(CH3O)2-P(S)S-CH2CH2-0]3B

    (2)     Note.  The components provided for herein are not subject to any
    restrictions relative to the bonding between the boron and the phosphorus
    or silicon.


CLS 508/188
TXT Nitrogen containing:

    Compositions under subclass 187 wherein the boron component contains (1)
    phosphorus and nitrogen or (2) silicon and nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  The components provided for herein are not subject to any
    restrictions relative to the bonding among the boron, phosphorus, and
    nitrogen or the boron, silicon, and nitrogen.


CLS 508/189
TXT Nitrogen containing (i.e., nitrogen and boron in the same compound):

    Compositions under subclass 185 wherein the boron component also contains
    nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  The components provided for herein are not subject to any
    restrictions relative to the bonding between the boron and the nitrogen.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein  is
    dibutylammon- ium tetrafluoroborate.


CLS 508/190
TXT The nitrogen is in a heterocyclic ring, which ring either appears in the
    compound or has been reacted with a boron compound; a heterocyclic ring is
    one having as ring members only carbon and at least one hetero atom
    selected from nitrogen and chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium):

    Compositions under subclass 189 wherein the nitrogen is present as a member
    of a heterocyclic ring, which ring either remains intact in the component
    or has been reacted with a boron compound.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is


CLS 508/191
TXT The nitrogen heterocyclic ring contains ring chalcogen (e.g., oxazoline
    compounds, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 190 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is also a ring member in the nitrogen heterocyclic
    ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is the borate
    salt of N-methyl morpholine.


CLS 508/192
TXT The nitrogen heterocyclic ring has chalcogen bonded directly to ring carbon
    adjacent to ring nitrogen (e.g., succinimide compounds, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 190 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to ring carbon adjacent to ring
    nitrogen of the nitrogen heterocyclic ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is the
    reaction product of a borated alkyl catechol and an alkyl succinimide.


CLS 508/193
TXT Sulfur containing:

    Compositions under subclass 189 wherein the boron component contains
    nitrogen and sulfur.

    (1)     Note.  The components provided for herein are not subject to any
    restriction relative to the bonding among the boron, nitrogen, and  sulfur.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/194
TXT Carbonyl containing:

    Compositions under subclass 189 wherein the boron component contains
    nitrogen and carbonyl, -C(=O)-.

    (1)     Note.  The components provided for herein are not subject to any
    restriction relative to the bonding among the boron, nitrogen, and carbonyl.


CLS 508/195
TXT Oxygen and nitrogen bonded directly to the same carbon atom or carbon chain
    (e.g., borated alkanolamines, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 189 wherein, in the boron component, a carbon
    atom or carbon chain is bonded directly to both nitrogen and oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is the
    reaction product of triethanolamine with orthoboric acid.


CLS 508/196
TXT With nitrogen heterocycle compound (e.g., thiadiazoles, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 195 which contain, in addition to the boron
    component, a nitrogen heterocycle compound.

    (1)     Note.  A nitrogen heterocycle is a ring whose ring members are
    carbon and at least one hetero atom selected from nitrogen and chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).  In this subclass, the
    heterocycle must contain ring nitrogen.


CLS 508/197
TXT Sulfur or halogen bonded indirectly to boron:

    Compositions under subclass 185 wherein the boron is bonded indirectly to
    sulfur or to halogen.

    (1)     Note.  The components provided for herein are not subject to any
    restrictions relative to the bonding by which the boron is indirectly
    attached to sulfur or halogen.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/198
TXT Carbonyl containing:

    Compositions under subclass 185 wherein the boron component also contains
    carbonyl, -C(=O)-.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is the
    reaction product of calcium alkyl salicylate and orthoboric acid.


CLS 508/199
TXT Plural oxygens bonded directly to the same saturated carbon atom or
    saturated carbon chain (e.g., borated 1,2-glycols, borated alkoxylated
    alcohols, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 185 wherein, in the boron component, a
    saturated carbon atom or a saturated carbon chain is bonded directly to
    plural oxygens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/200
TXT Benzene ring containing:

    Compositions under subclass 185 wherein the boron component contains a
    benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/201
TXT Compound of indeterminate structure, prepared by reacting a silicon
    compound of known structure:

    Compositions under subclass 110 which contain a compound of indeterminate
    structure, prepared by the reaction of a silicon compound of known
    structure.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are the reaction
    product of a poly (organo) silicone with an organic peroxide, and the
    reaction product of silicon disulfide with heptaldehyde.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161,    for compositions containing silicon compounds which are inorganic.


CLS 508/202
TXT Silicon (e.g., silicon esters, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 110 which contain silicon in an organic
    compound component.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:

    (2)     Note.  This subclass and its indents provide for organic compound
    components containing silicon, regardless of the type bonding between
    silicon and the remainder of the compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161,    for compositions containing silicon compounds that are inorganic.


CLS 508/203
TXT The silicon is in a ring:

    Compositions under subclass 202 wherein a ring has silicon as one of its
    members.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are
    cyclosiloxanes and


CLS 508/204
TXT Nitrogen attached directly or indirectly to the silicon by nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 202 wherein the silicon is attached directly or
    indirectly to nitrogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are:

    (CH3O)2Si(NH2)2

    and

    (CH3)2NC6H4Si(CH3)2C6H5


CLS 508/205
TXT Phosphorus or -C(=X), wherein X is chalcogen, attached indirectly to the
    silicon by nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 202 wherein the silicon is attached indirectly
    by nonionic bonding to phosphorus or to -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are:

    CH3(C4H9)2SiCH2P(C6H5)2

    and

    (C6H5)3Si-O-C(=O)-CF2-C(=O)O-Si(C6H5)3


CLS 508/206
TXT Halogen attached indirectly to the silicon by acyclic nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 202 wherein the silicon is attached indirectly
    to halogen by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:

    (ClC3H6O)4Si


CLS 508/207
TXT Carbon or hydrogen bonded directly to the silicon:

    Compositions under subclass 202 wherein the silicon is bonded directly to
    carbon or to hydrogen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are:

    (CH3)2SiH2

    and

    CH3Si(C6H5)3


CLS 508/208
TXT Two silicons bonded directly to the same chalcogen (e.g., methylphenyl
    silicone, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 207 wherein a single chalcogen atom (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to the silicon
    and to an additional silicon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/209
TXT With organic nitrogen compound:

    Compositions under subclass 208 which contain, in addition to the silicon
    compound, an organic nitrogen compound.

    (1)     Note.  An organic nitrogen compound is one wherein nitrogen is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/210
TXT The nitrogen is in a hetero ring:

    Compositions under subclass 209 wherein the nitrogen is a ring member of a
    hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  A hetero ring is one whose ring members are carbon and at
    least one hetero atom selected from nitrogen and chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).  In this subclass, the hetero ring must
    contain ring nitrogen.


CLS 508/211
TXT Having -C(=X), wherein X is chalcogen, bonded directly to the nitrogen:

    Compositions under subclass 209 wherein the nitrogen is bonded directly to
    -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium).


CLS 508/212
TXT With organic -C(=O)O- compound  (e.g., lithium 12-hydroxystearate, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 208 which contain, in addition to the silicon
    compound, an organic -C(=O)O- compound.

    (1)     Note.  An organic -C(=O)O- compound is one wherein the carbon of
    the -C(=O)O- is, or is attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding
    to, the carbon of an organic compound.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/213
TXT Heavy metal or aluminum in the organic -C(=O)O-  compound:

    Compositions under subclass 212 wherein the compound that contains the
    -C(=O)O- group also contains heavy metal or aluminum.

    (1)     Note.  Arsenic is considered a heavy metal.

    (2)     Note.  Heavy metals are considered to be those having a specific
    gravity greater than 4.0.


CLS 508/214
TXT The single bonded oxygen is bonded directly to an additional carbon (e.g.,
    carboxylic acid esters, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 212 wherein an additional carbon is bonded
    directly to the single bonded oxygen of the -C(=O)O- group.

    (1)     Note.  The most common type of additional component provided for
    herein is a carboxylic acid ester.


CLS 508/215
TXT With organic phosphorus, sulfur, or halogen compound:

    Compositions under subclass 208 which contain, in addition to the silicon
    compound, an organic phosphorus compound, an organic sulfur compound or an
    organic halogen compound.

    (1)     Note.  An organic phosphorus compound is one wherein phosphorus is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.  Organic sulfur compound and organic halogen compound are
    similarly defined.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/216
TXT Protein, carbohydrate, lignin, plant matter of indeterminate structure, or
    their reaction product of indeterminate structure:

    Compositions under subclass 110 which contain (1) carbohydrate, (2)
    protein, (3) lignin, (4) plant matter of indeterminate structure, or (5) a
    product of indeterminate structure prepared by reacting any of (1), (2),
    (3) or (4).

    (1)     Note.  See the Class 536 class definition for the definition of a
    carbohydrate.

    (2)     Note.  See the definition of subclass 350, Class 530 and its notes
    for the definition of a protein.

    (3)     Note.  See the definition of subclass 500, Class 530 for the
    definition of a lignin.

    (4)     Note.  Plant matter of indeterminate structure embraces both crude,
    unprocessed plant material and substances of indeterminate structure
    derived from processed or refined plant material.


CLS 508/217
TXT Animal protein (e.g., fish scales, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 216 which contain animal protein.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is animal protein in its raw and unprocessed
    forms (as in body parts or segments thereof), as well as in the form of
    partially or completely processed, refined, or isolated chemicals.


CLS 508/218
TXT Hair or leather:

    Compositions under subclass 217 wherein the animal protein is identified as
    hair or leather.


CLS 508/219
TXT Cellulose ether or cellulose ester (e.g., cellulose nitrate,
    carboxymethylcellulose, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 216 which contain esterified or etherified
    cellulose.


CLS 508/220
TXT With carboxylic acid or salt thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 216 which contain, in addition to the protein,
    carbohydrate, lignin, plant matter of indeterminate structure, or their
    reaction product of indeterminate structure, either a carboxylic acid or a
    salt of a carboxylic acid.


CLS 508/221
TXT Compound of indeterminate structure, prepared by reacting a heterocyclic
    compound of known structure; a heterocyclic ring is one having as ring
    members only carbon and at least one hetero atom selected from nitrogen and
    chalcogen (oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium):

    Compositions under subclass 110 which contain a compound of indeterminate
    structure, prepared by the reaction of a compound of known structure having
    a heterocyclic ring whose members are carbon and at least one hetero atom
    selected from nitrogen and chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium).


CLS 508/222
TXT The heterocyclic compound reactant contains a lactone or  cyclic carbonate
    ring:

    Compositions under subclass 221 wherein a lactone or a cyclic carbonate
    ring is present in the heterocyclic compound reactant.

    (1)     Note.  A lactone, for purposes of this subclass, is characterized
    by a hetero ring consisting of carbons and the -C(=O)O- group, e.g.

    (2)     Note.  A cyclic carbonate, for purposes of this subclass, is
    characterized by a hetero ring consisting of carbons and the -O-C(=O)O-
    group, e.g.,


CLS 508/223
TXT The heterocyclic compound reactant contains a three- or four-membered
    hetero ring (e.g., aziridine, epoxy compounds, oxetane, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 221 wherein a three- or four-membered hetero
    ring is present in the heterocyclic compound reactant.


CLS 508/224
TXT An additional reactant contains phosphorus:

    Compositions under subclass 223 wherein phosphorus is present in an
    additional reactant.


CLS 508/225
TXT An additional reactant contains nitrogen:

    Compositions under subclass 223 wherein nitrogen is present in an
    additional reactant.


CLS 508/226
TXT The heterocyclic compound reactant is sulfurized by means of an inorganic
    sulfurizing agent:

    Compositions under subclass 221 wherein an inorganic sulfurizing agent is
    reacted with the heterocyclic compound reactant.

    (1)     Note.  The most common inorganic sulfurizing agents are sulfur
    halide and elemental sulfur.


CLS 508/227
TXT An additional reactant contains phosphorus

    Compositions under subclass 221 wherein phosphorus is present in an
    additional reactant.


CLS 508/228
TXT The heterocyclic compound reactant has plural chalcogens bonded directly to
    ring carbons of the hetero ring (e.g., succinimides, anhydrides, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 227 wherein plural chalcogens are bonded
    directly to ring carbons of the hetero ring of the heterocyclic compound
    reactant.

    (1)     Note. The most common hetero ring reactants provided for herein are
    succinimide, succinic anhydride and maleic anhydride.


CLS 508/229
TXT An additional reactant is an aldehyde or ketone:

    Compositions under subclass 221 wherein an aldehyde or ketone is an
    additional reactant.


CLS 508/230
TXT An additional reactant is an inorganic compound containing heavy metal or
    aluminum (e.g., ammonium molybdate, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 221 wherein an inorganic compound which
    contains heavy metal or aluminum is an additional reactant.

    (1)     Note.  An inorganic compound is any compound not specified as
    organic in (3) Note in the class definition.

    (2)     Note.  Arsenic is considered a heavy metal.

    (3)     Note.  Heavy metals are metals whose specific gravity is greater
    than 4.0.


CLS 508/231
TXT The heterocyclic compound reactant contains a five-membered hetero ring
    with at least three ring hetero atoms (e.g., thiadiazole, benzotriazole,
    etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 221 wherein a five-membered hetero ring with at
    least three ring hetero atoms is present in the heterocyclic compound
    reactant.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of heterocyclic compound reactants provided for
    herein are triazoles, tetrazoles, oxadiazoles and thiadiazoles.


CLS 508/232
TXT The heterocyclic compound reactant contains  a carboxylic acid anhydride
    ring:

    Compositions under subclass 221 wherein a carboxylic acid anhydride ring is
    present in the heterocyclic compound reactant.

    (1)     Note.  A carboxylic acid anhydride ring, for  purposes of this
    subclass, is characterized by the presence of a -C(=O)-O-C(=O)- group as
    part of the ring structure.

    (2)     Note.  Maleic anhydride and succinic anhydride are the two most
    common carboxylic acid anhydride reactants provided for herein.


CLS 508/233
TXT An additional reactant is an alkadiene polymer:

    Compositions under subclass 232 wherein an alkadiene polymer is an
    additional reactant.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of polymer reactants provided for herein are
    homopolymers and copolymers of butadiene.


CLS 508/234
TXT The alkadiene polymer is a terpolymer of ethylene, monoolefin, and
    alkadiene:

    Compositions under subclass 233 wherein a terpolymer of ethylene,
    monoolefin and alkadiene is the alkadiene polymer additional reactant.

    (1)     Note.  The monoolefin may be a cycloolefin.


CLS 508/235
TXT An additional olefinic reactant is copolymerized with an unsaturated
    carboxylic acid anhydride so that the anhydride moiety forms part of the
    polymer backbone (i.e., addition polymerization):

    Compositions under subclass 232 wherein an unsaturated carboxylic acid
    anhydride is copolymerized by addition polymerization with an additional
    olefinic reactant so that the anhydride moiety forms part of the polymer
    backbone.

    (1)     Note.  Maleic anhydride is the most common unsaturated carboxylic
    acid anhydride reactant provided for herein.

    (2)     Note.  The additional olefinic reactant may be cycloolefinic.


CLS 508/236
TXT An additional reactant is a sulfur compound:

    Compositions under subclass 232 wherein a compound that contains sulfur is
    an additional reactant.


CLS 508/237
TXT With organic phosphorus compound:

    Compositions under subclass 232 which contain, in addition to the compound
    of indeterminate structure prepared by the reaction of the carboxylic acid
    anhydride reactant, an organic phosphorus compound.

    (1)     Note.  An organic phosphorus compound is one wherein phosphorus is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/238
TXT An additional reactant is a polyoxyalkylene compound:

    Compositions under subclass 232 wherein a polyoxyalkylene compound is an
    additional reactant.


CLS 508/239
TXT An additional reactant is a hydroxylamine or an alcoholic or phenolic
    hydroxy compound:

    Compositions under subclass 232 wherein an alcoholic hydroxy compound,
    phenolic hydroxy compound, or a hydroxylamine is an additional reactant.


CLS 508/240
TXT Nitrogen attached directly or indirectly to the hydroxy group by nonionic
    bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 239 wherein the hydroxy group of the additional
    reactant is attached directly or indirectly to nitrogen by nonionic bonding.


CLS 508/241
TXT An additional reactant is a copolymer having ethylene and acyclic olefin
    monomers (e.g., ethylene-alpha olefin copolymer or
    ethylene-butylene-styrene terpolymer grafted with maleic anhydride, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 232 wherein a copolymer having acyclic olefin
    and ethylene monomers is an additional reactant.


CLS 508/242
TXT An additional reactant is a phenol, a thiophenol, a carboxylic acid, or
    salt thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 221 wherein a phenol, a phenol salt, a
    thiophenol, a thiophenol salt, a carboxylic acid, or a carboxylic acid salt
    is an additional reactant.


CLS 508/243
TXT Heterocyclic ring compound; a heterocyclic ring is one having as ring
    members only carbon and at least one hetero atom selected from nitrogen and
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium):

    Compositions under subclass 110 which contain a compound having a hetero
    ring whose members are carbon and at least one hetero atom selected from
    nitrogen and chalcogen (i.e. oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are heterocyclic
    compounds having more than six or fewer than five ring atoms in the hetero
    ring, and having only carbon and nitrogen as ring members.


CLS 508/244
TXT The hetero ring contains six members including nitrogen and carbon (e.g.,
    pyridine, picoline salts, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 243 wherein the hetero ring is six-membered
    with only carbon and nitrogen as ring members.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are lauryl
    pyridinium chloride and picoline.  Picoline is methyl pyridine.


CLS 508/245
TXT Chalcogen in the hetero ring:

    Compositions under subclass 244 wherein the hetero ring with carbon and
    nitrogen ring members also has chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium,
    or tellurium) as a ring member.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are:


CLS 508/246
TXT The chalcogen is oxygen (e.g., oxazines, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 245 wherein the ring has nitrogen, carbon and
    oxygen as ring members.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are:


CLS 508/247
TXT Chalcogen attached directly to the hetero ring by nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 246 wherein the hetero ring is attached
    directly to chalcogen (i.e. oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) by
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are the copolymer
    of N-vinyl-3-morpholinone and butyl acrylate, and


CLS 508/248
TXT Acyclic nitrogen attached indirectly to the hetero ring by acyclic nonionic
    bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 246 wherein nitrogen, which is not a ring
    member, is attached indirectly to the hetero ring by acyclic nonionic
    bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/249
TXT Acyclic chalcogen attached indirectly to the hetero ring by acyclic
    nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 246 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium), which is not a ring member, is attached indirectly
    to the hetero ring by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is cobalt bis
    (morpholinodithiocarbamate).


CLS 508/250
TXT Morpholine, per se, hydrocarbyl-substituted morpholine, or salts thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 246 which contain morpholine, per se, salts
    thereof, hydrocarbyl substituted morpholine or salts thereof.


CLS 508/251
TXT Polycyclo ring system  which contains the hetero ring as one of the cyclos
    (e.g., phenothiazines, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 245 wherein the hetero ring is one of the
    cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Fused and bridged ring systems are considered to be
    polycyclo ring systems.  Two rings joined solely by a spiro linkage are not
    considered to form a polycyclo ring system.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is
    3,7-dibornylphenothiazine.


CLS 508/252
TXT With compound having saturated or unsaturated triazine, azole, or pyridine
    ring:

    Compositions under subclass 251 which contain, in addition to the polycyclo
    ring system having the hetero ring as one of the cyclos, a compound having
    a pyridine, triazine, or azole ring which may be saturated or unsaturated.

    (1)     Note.  The pyridine ring is six-membered consisting of five carbons
    and one nitrogen.  The triazine ring is six-membered consisting of three
    carbons and three nitrogens.  The azole ring is five-membered and has at
    least two ring hetero atoms, of which at least one must be nitrogen.


CLS 508/253
TXT With organic phosphorus compound:

    Compositions under subclass 251 which contain, in addition to the polycyclo
    ring system having the hetero ring as one of the cyclos, an organic
    phosphorus compound.

    (1)     Note.  An organic phosphorus compound is one wherein phosphorus is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/254
TXT With organic non-heterocyclic nitrogen compound:

    Compositions under subclass 251 which contain, in addition to the polycyclo
    ring system having the hetero ring as one of the cyclos, an organic
    nitrogen compound which does not contain a heterocyclic ring.

    (1)     Note.  An organic nitrogen compound is one wherein nitrogen is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/255
TXT Plural nitrogens in the hetero ring:

    Compositions under subclass 244 wherein the six-membered hetero ring has
    plural nitrogen ring members.

    (1)     Note.  An example of the type component provided for herein is
    monocyclic pyrimidine (1,3-diazine) compounds.


CLS 508/256
TXT Polycyclo ring system which contains the hetero ring as one of the cyclos:

    Compositions under subclass 255 wherein the hetero ring is one of the
    cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Fused and bridged ring systems are considered to be
    polycyclo ring systems.  Two rings joined solely by a spiro linkage are not
    considered to form a polycyclo ring system.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/257
TXT Triazines:

    Compositions under subclass 255 wherein the hetero ring consists of three
    carbons and three nitrogens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/258
TXT Nitrogen bonded directly to the triazine ring by nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 257 wherein the hetero ring is bonded directly
    to nitrogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/259
TXT 1,4-Diazines:

    Compositions under subclass 255 wherein the hetero ring consists of four
    carbons and two nitrogens, the nitrogens being in the 1- and 4-positions of
    the ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/260
TXT Nitrogen and  carbonyl attached indirectly to the 1,4-diazine ring by
    nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 259 wherein the 1,4-diazine ring is attached
    indirectly to both nitrogen and carbonyl, -C(=O)-, by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is poly
    (terephthaloyl piperazine), the repeating unit of which is:


CLS 508/261
TXT Polycyclo ring system which contains the hetero ring as one of the cyclos:

    Compositions under subclass 244 wherein the hetero ring is one of the
    cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Fused and bridged ring systems are considered to be
    polycyclo ring systems.  Two rings joined solely by a spiro linkage are not
    considered to form a polycyclo ring system.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/262
TXT Piperidines:

    Compositions under subclass 244 wherein the hetero ring is a completely
    saturated ring consisting of one nitrogen and five carbons.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/263
TXT Having -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen, bonded directly to the piperidine
    ring:

    Compositions under subclass 262 wherein the hetero ring is bonded directly
    to -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is zinc
    -N-pentamethylene dithiocarbamate.


CLS 508/264
TXT Vinyl pyridine polymer (e.g., polyvinylpyridine, vinyl-pyridine-alkyl
    acrylate copolymer, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 244 wherein the component containing the
    six-membered hetero ring results from homopolymerization or
    copolymerization of a vinyl pyridine.

    (1)     Note.  Homopolymerization or copolymerization normally occurs
    through the olefinic double bond.


CLS 508/265
TXT Non-pyridine organic nitrogen salt of the polymer, or a non-pyridine
    organic nitrogen compound is present:

    Compositions under subclass 264 which (1) contain, in addition to the vinyl
    pyridine polymer, a non-pyridine organic nitrogen compound, or (2) contain
    the vinyl pyridine polymer in the form of its salt with a non-pyridine
    organic nitrogen compound.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are (a) the N,
    N-dibutylcarbamic acid salt of lauryl methacrylate/2-methyl-5-vinyl
    pyridine copolymer, and (b) the combination of a vinyl pyridine/alkyl
    acrylate copolymer and an alkaline earth petroleum sulfonate-trialkylamine
    complex.

    (2)     Note.  An organic nitrogen compound is one wherein nitrogen is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.

    (3)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    organic compound.


CLS 508/266
TXT Nitrogen attached to the hetero ring directly or indirectly by acyclic
    nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 244 wherein the hetero ring is attached to
    nitrogen directly or indirectly by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are:


CLS 508/267
TXT Chalcogen or nitrogen attached indirectly to the hetero ring by nonionic
    bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 244 wherein the hetero ring is attached
    indirectly to nitrogen or chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium) by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are:


CLS 508/268
TXT The hetero ring contains five members including nitrogen and carbon (e.g.,
    polyvinylpyrrolidone, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 243 wherein the hetero ring is five-membered
    with carbon and nitrogen as ring members.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is the
    copolymer of N-vinyl pyrrolidone and cetyl vinyl ether.


CLS 508/269
TXT Plural hetero atoms in the hetero ring (e.g., pyrazoles, benzimidazoles,
    etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 268 wherein no more than three ring members of
    the hetero ring are carbons.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/270
TXT Chalcogen in the hetero ring (e.g., benzoxazoles, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 269 wherein the hetero ring with carbon and
    nitrogen ring members also has chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium,
    or tellurium) as a ring member.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/271
TXT The chalcogen is sulfur (e.g., 1,3-thiazole, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 270 wherein the hetero ring has nitrogen,
    carbon, and sulfur as ring members.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/272
TXT Plural nitrogens or plural sulfurs in the hetero  ring (e.g., thiadiazoles,
    etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 271 wherein the hetero ring has more than one
    nitrogen ring member or more than one sulfur ring member.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are:


CLS 508/273
TXT Acyclic sulfur bonded directly to the 2- and 5- positions of a
    1,3,4-thiadiazole ring or a hydrogenated 1,3,4-thiadiazole ring:

    Compositions under subclass 272 wherein the 2- and 5-positions of a 1, 3,
    4-thiadiazole ring or of a hydrogenated 1, 3, 4-thiadiazole ring are each
    bonded directly to acyclic sulfur.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/274
TXT Oxygen or nitrogen attached indirectly to one of the acyclic sulfurs by
    acyclic nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 273 wherein one of the acyclic sulfurs is
    attached indirectly to oxygen or nitrogen by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/275
TXT Polycyclo ring system which contains the hetero ring as one of the cyclos
    (e.g., benzothiazoles, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 271 wherein the hetero ring is one of the
    cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Fused and bridged ring systems are considered to be
    polycyclo ring systems.  Two rings joined solely by a spiro linkage are not
    considered to form a polycyclo ring system.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/276
TXT The 2-position of the hetero ring is substituted  by double bonded sulfur,
    a chain of sulfur atoms,  or -SH (wherein  H of -SH may be substituted by
    metal, ammonium, or substituted ammonium):

    Compositions under subclass 275 wherein double bonded sulfur, a chain of
    sulfur atoms, or -SH ( wherein H of -SH may be substituted by metal,
    ammonium, or substituted ammonium) is bonded directly to the 2-position of
    the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/277
TXT Chalcogen or nitrogen bonded directly to ring carbon of the hetero ring
    (e.g., 2-oxazolidinones, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 270 wherein a ring carbon of the hetero ring is
    bonded directly to nitrogen or to chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/278
TXT Exactly one double bond in the hetero ring (e.g., bis-2-oxazolines, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 270 wherein the hetero ring has exactly one
    double bond between ring members.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/279
TXT Three or four nitrogens in the hetero ring (e.g., 1,2,4-triazole,
    tetrazole, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 269 wherein the hetero ring has three nitrogen
    ring members or four nitrogen ring members.

    (1)     Note.  The components provided for herein are monocyclic
    tetrazoles, monocyclic 1,2,3-triazoles, and  monocyclic 1,2,4-triazoles.


CLS 508/280
TXT Polycyclo ring system which contains the hetero ring as one of the cyclos
    (e.g., alkyl benzotriazoles, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 279 wherein the hetero ring is one of the
    cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Fused and bridged ring systems are considered to be
    polycyclo ring systems.  Two rings joined solely by a spiro linkage are not
    considered to form a polycyclo ring system.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/281
TXT Chalcogen or nitrogen attached to the hetero ring directly or indirectly by
    acyclic nonionic bonding (e.g., methylene bis-benzotriazoles, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 280 wherein the hetero ring is attached
    directly or indirectly by acyclic nonionic bonding to nitrogen or to
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/282
TXT With organic phosphorus compound:

    Compositions under subclass 280 which contain, in addition to the hetero
    ring containing component, an organic phosphorus compound.

    (1)     Note.  An organic phosphorus compound is one wherein phosphorus is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/283
TXT The hetero ring is a monocyclic 1,3-diazole or a monocyclic hydrogenated
    1,3-diazole:

    Compositions under subclass 269 wherein the hetero ring is a saturated or
    unsaturated monocyclic 1,3-diazole ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/284
TXT Chalcogen or nitrogen bonded directly to ring carbon of the 1,3-hetero
    ring, or the 1,3-hetero ring has two double bonds between ring members:

    Compositions under subclass 283 wherein the hetero ring has two double
    bonds between ring members, or ring carbon of the hetero ring is bonded
    directly to nitrogen or to chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are:


CLS 508/285
TXT Having -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen, attached indirectly to the
    1,3-hetero ring by nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 283 wherein the hetero ring is attached
    indirectly by nonionic bonding to -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/286
TXT Organic phosphorus compound salt of the 1,3-hetero ring compound, or an
    organic phosphorus compound is present:

    Compositions under subclass 283 which (1) contain, in addition to the
    hetero ring component, an organic phosphorus compound, or (2) wherein the
    hetero ring component is in the form of a salt with an organic phosphorus
    compound.

    (1)     Note.  An organic phosphorus compound is one wherein phosphorus is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    organic compound.


CLS 508/287
TXT Plural oxygens double bonded directly to ring carbons of the hetero ring
    which are adjacent to the ring nitrogen:

    Compositions under subclass 268 wherein two carbons of the hetero ring,
    each adjacent to the ring nitrogen atom, are double bonded directly to
    oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/288
TXT Polycyclo ring system which contains the hetero ring as one of the cyclos
    (i.e., fused or bridged ring system):

    Compositions under subclass 287 wherein the hetero ring is one of the
    cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Fused and bridged ring systems are considered to be
    polycyclo ring systems.  Two rings joined solely by a spiro linkage are not
    considered to form a polycyclo ring system.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/289
TXT Sulfur attached directly or indirectly to the hetero ring by nonionic
    bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 287 wherein the hetero ring is attached to
    sulfur directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are:


CLS 508/290
TXT Additional oxygen attached directly or indirectly to the hetero ring by
    nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 287 wherein the hetero ring is attached to an
    additional oxygen directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are:


CLS 508/291
TXT Nitrogen attached indirectly to the hetero ring by nonionic bonding (e.g.,
    bis-succinimide compounds, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 290 wherein the

    hetero ring is attached indirectly to nitrogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/292
TXT The oxygen is part of an ether linkage or is bonded directly to a benzene
    ring:

    Compositions under subclass 291 wherein the oxygen is bonded directly to a
    benzene ring or is part of an ether linkage.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/293
TXT Nitrogen attached directly or indirectly to the hetero ring by nonionic
    bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 287 wherein the hetero ring is attached
    directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are:


CLS 508/294
TXT With organic phosphorus compound:

    Compositions under subclass 293 which contain, in addition to the hetero
    ring containing component, an organic phosphorus compound.

    (1)     Note.  An organic phosphorus compound is one wherein phosphorus is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/295
TXT With organic chalcogen or halogen compound:

    Compositions under subclass 293 which contain, in addition to the hetero
    ring containing component, an organic halogen compound or an organic
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) compound.

    (1)     Note.  An organic halogen compound is one wherein halogen is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.  Organic chalcogen compound is similarly defined.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    organic compound.


CLS 508/296
TXT Polycyclo ring system which contains the hetero ring as one of the cyclos
    (e.g., indigo, carbazole, phthalocyanine, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 268 wherein the hetero ring is one of the
    cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Fused and bridged ring systems are considered to be
    polycyclo ring systems.  Two rings joined solely by a spiro linkage are not
    considered to form a polycyclo ring system.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/297
TXT Having a -C(=X)X- group, wherein the X's are the same or diverse
    chalcogens, attached directly or indirectly to the hetero ring by acyclic
    nonionic bonding (e.g., vinylpyrrolidone-acrylate copolymers, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 268 wherein the hetero ring is attached
    directly or indirectly by acyclic nonionic bonding to a -C(=X)X- group,
    wherein the X's are the same or diverse chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are: a copolymer
    of N-vinyl pyrrolidone and lauryl meth-acrylate, and


CLS 508/298
TXT With metal compound, or organic phosphorus or sulfur compound:

    Compositions under subclass 297 which contain, in addition to the hetero
    ring containing component, an organic sulfur compound, an organic
    phosphorus compound, or an organic compound that contains metal.

    (1)     Note.  An organic sulfur compound is one wherein sulfur is attached
    directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.  Organic phosphorus compound is similarly defined.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/299
TXT Sulfur containing hetero ring:

    Compositions under subclass 243 wherein sulfur and carbon are ring members
    of the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are:


CLS 508/300
TXT Plural hetero atoms in the hetero ring (e.g., 1,3-dithiane, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 299 wherein the hetero ring has more than one
    ring hetero atom.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are:

    (2)     Note.  This subclass also provides for components having a hetero
    ring with more than six members, ring sulfur and ring nitrogen, e.g.,
    thiadiazepines, etc.


CLS 508/301
TXT Polycyclo ring system which contains the hetero ring as one of the cyclos
    (e.g., benzothiophenes, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 299 wherein the hetero ring is one of the
    cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Fused and bridged ring systems are considered to be
    polycyclo ring systems.  Two rings joined solely by a spiro linkage are not
    considered to form a polycyclo ring system.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/302
TXT The hetero ring is five-membered:

    Compositions under subclass 299 wherein the hetero ring consists of one
    ring sulfur and four ring carbons.


CLS 508/303
TXT Chalcogen bonded directly to ring carbon of the hetero ring:

    Compositions under subclass 302 wherein ring carbon of the hetero ring is
    bonded directly to chalcogen (i.e. oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/304
TXT Oxygen containing hetero ring (e.g., allyl glycidyl ether, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 243 wherein oxygen and carbon are ring members
    of the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/305
TXT Chalcogen double bonded directly to a ring carbon of the hetero ring which
    is adjacent to a ring oxygen (e.g., lactones, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 304 wherein a ring carbon of the hetero ring,
    which carbon is adjacent to a ring oxygen, is double bonded directly to
    chalcogen (i.e. oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/306
TXT And chalcogen double bonded directly to the other ring carbon of the hetero
    ring which is adjacent to the ring oxygen (e.g., maleic anhydride
    copolymers, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 305 wherein both carbons of the hetero ring
    that are adjacent to the ring oxygen are double bonded directly to
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/307
TXT The hetero ring contains at least five ring members (e.g., 1,3-dioxane,
    furan, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 304 wherein five or more ring members are
    present in the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides, inter alia, for components having a
    hetero ring with more than six members ring oxygen and ring nitrogen, e.g.,
    oxazepines, etc.


CLS 508/308
TXT Having -C(=O)O- attached directly or indirectly to the  hetero ring by
    nonionic bonding (e.g., sorbitan esters,  etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 307 wherein the hetero ring is attached
    directly or indirectly to a -C(=O)O- group by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are various
    carboxylic acid esters of sorbitans.


CLS 508/309
TXT The carbon of the -C(=O)O- group is bonded directly to the hetero ring
    (e.g., furoic acid, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 308 wherein the hetero ring is bonded directly
    to the carbon of the -C(=O)O- group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/310
TXT With organic nitrogen compound:

    Compositions under subclass 308 which contain, in addition to the hetero
    ring containing component, an organic nitrogen compound.

    (1)     Note.  An organic nitrogen compound is one wherein nitrogen is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/311
TXT With sulfonic or carboxylic acid, or salt thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 308 which contain, in addition to the hetero
    ring containing component,a carboxylic acid, carboxylic acid salt, sulfonic
    acid, or sulfonic acid salt.


CLS 508/312
TXT Organic oxidate of indeterminate composition:

    Compositions under subclass 110 which contain a compound of indeterminate
    structure prepared by oxidation of an organic compound or of a mixture of
    organic compounds.

    (1)     Note.  The oxidates of this subclass and its indents are generally
    complex mixtures.  An indication that the oxidate contains carboxylic acids
    is not sufficient to remove it from this subclass or its indents.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    organic compound.


CLS 508/313
TXT Substance oxidized contains nitrogen, chalcogen, halogen or phosphorus
    (e.g., oxidized sulfonate, phenol, ozonide, soap, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 312 wherein nitrogen, halogen, phosphorus, or
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is present in the
    substance oxidized.


CLS 508/314
TXT The substance oxidized is a carboxylic acid ester (e.g., blown lard oil,
    sperm oil, rapeseed oil, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 313 wherein a carboxylic acid ester is the
    substance oxidized.


CLS 508/315
TXT Carboxylic acid ester subsequently formed from alcohol or acid of the
    organic oxidate:

    Compositions under subclass 312 which contain a carboxylic acid ester
    subsequently formed from an alcohol or acid that is part of the organic
    oxidate of indeterminate composition.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for carboxylic acid esters of
    known structure, per se; such are classified as components in subclass 459
    and its indents.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass provides for components wherein an organic
    oxidate of indeterminate composition is made to undergo esterification (of
    either alcohol or carboxylic acid) to yield (1) a mixture, still of
    indeterminate composition, containing a carboxylic acid ester, or (2) a
    carboxylic acid ester of indeterminate composition.


CLS 508/316
TXT With an organic nitrogen compound, which may or may not be reacted with the
    organic oxidate (e.g., reaction of oxidized olefinic copolymer with amine,
    formaldehyde, and phenol, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 312 (1) which contain, in addition to the
    organic oxidate of indeterminate composition, an organic nitrogen compound
    or (2) wherein the organic oxidate of indeterminate composition is reacted
    with an organic nitrogen compound.

    (1)     Note.  An organic nitrogen compound is one wherein nitrogen is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.

    (2)     Note.  See the (3) Note in the class definition for the definition
    of organic compound.


CLS 508/317
TXT The organic oxidate is reacted with sulfur, a sulfur compound, halogen,
    phosphorus, or a phosphorus compound:

    Compositions under subclass 312 wherein sulfur, a sulfur compound, halogen,
    phosphorus, or a phosphorus compound is reacted with the organic oxidate of
    indeterminate composition.


CLS 508/318
TXT With sulfonic acid or salt thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 312 which contain, in addition to the organic
    oxidate of indeterminate composition, a sulfonic acid or salt thereof.


CLS 508/319
TXT With organic sulfur, phosphorus, or halogen compound:

    Compositions under subclass 312 which contain, in addition to the organic
    oxidate of indeterminate structure, an organic sulfur compound, an organic
    phosphorus compound, or an organic halogen compound.

    (1)     Note.  An organic sulfur compound is one wherein sulfur is attached
    directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.  Organic phosphorus compound and organic halogen compound are
    similarly defined.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/320
TXT With a phenol, phenol salt, carboxylic acid, or carboxylic acid salt:

    Compositions under subclass 312 which contain, in addition to the organic
    oxidate of indeterminate structure, a carboxylic acid, a carboxylic acid
    salt, a phenol, or a phenol salt.


CLS 508/321
TXT Salt of the organic oxidate:

    Compositions under subclass 312 wherein the organic oxidate of
    indeterminate composition has been salified, and exists in salt form.


CLS 508/322
TXT Sulfurized compound of indeterminate structure, which is a reaction product
    of an organic compound with sulfur halide, elemental sulfur, or metal
    polysulfide:

    Compositions under subclass 110 which contain a compound of indeterminate
    structure which has been prepared by the reaction of an organic compound
    with elemental sulfur, with a sulfur halide, or with a metal polysulfide.

    (1)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    organic compound.


CLS 508/323
TXT Both sulfur and sulfur halide are reacted with the organic compound:

    Compositions under subclass 322 wherein the organic compound is reacted
    with elemental sulfur and with sulfur halide, either simultaneously or
    sequentially in either order.


CLS 508/324
TXT Hydrogen sulfide or a salt thereof is also reacted with the organic
    compound:

    Compositions under subclass 322 wherein the organic compound is
    additionally reacted with hydrogen sulfide or with a salt thereof; said
    additional reaction can be prior to, simultaneous with or subsequent to
    sulfurization via elemental sulfur, sulfur halide, or metal polysulfide.


CLS 508/325
TXT Phosphorus or an inorganic phosphorus compound is reacted with the organic
    compound either together with or subsequent to the sulfurizing agent (e.g.,
    terpene-sulfur-phosphorus sulfide  reaction products, reaction product of
    sulfurized olefin with phosphorus sulfide, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 322 wherein the organic compound is also
    reacted with phosphorus  or an inorganic phosphorus compound, either
    simultaneously with or subsequent to sulfurization via elemental sulfur,
    sulfur halide, or metal polysulfide.


CLS 508/326
TXT The organic compound is an organic
    -C(=O)O- compound (e.g., sulfurized and phosphosulfurized sperm oil, fats,
    etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 325 wherein the organic compound sulfurized and
    reacted with phosphorus or an inorganic phosphorus compound is an organic
    -C(=O)O- compound.

    (1)     Note.  An organic -C(=O)O- compound is one in which the carbon of
    the -C(=O)O- group is, or is attached directly or indirectly by nonionic
    bonding to, the carbon of an organic compound.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/327
TXT With organic halogen compound:

    Compositions under subclass 326 which contain, in addition to the organic
    -C(=O)O- compound which is sulfurized and reacted with phoaphorus, an
    inorganic phosphorus compound, or an organic halogen compound.

    (1)     Note.  An organic halogen compound is one wherein halogen is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.


    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/328
TXT The organic compound is an organic  nitrogen compound (e.g., sulfurized
    nitriles, phosphatides, unsaturated amines, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 322 wherein the organic compound that is
    sulfurized is an organic nitrogen compound.

    (1)     Note.  An organic nitrogen compound is one wherein the nitrogen is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/329
TXT The organic compound is an organic  phosphorus or sulfur compound  (e.g.,
    sulfurized phosphate esters, sulfonates, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 322 wherein the organic compound that is
    sulfurized is an organic phosphorus compound or an organic sulfur compound..

    (1)     Note.  An organic phosphorus compound is one wherein phosphorus is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.  Organic sulfur compound is similarly defined.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/330
TXT The organic compound is rosin, tall oil, or a derivative thereof of
    indeterminate structure:

    Compositions under subclass 322 wherein tall oil, rosin, or a derivative
    thereof of indeterminate structure is the organic compound sulfurized.

    (1)     Note.  If a derivative of rosin or of tall oil is known by its
    exact structure, such a sulfurized derivative is classified according to
    the known structure which is sulfurized.


CLS 508/331
TXT The organic compound is a carboxylic acid or salt thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 322 wherein a carboxylic acid or a salt of a
    carboxylic acid is the organic compound sulfurized.


CLS 508/332
TXT The organic compound is an organic oxygen compound which does not contain a
    -C(=O)O- group, or is an organic  halogen compound (e.g., sulfurized
    pentadecenylphenol, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 322 wherein the organic compound sulfurized is
    an organic halogen compound, or is an organic oxygen compound that does not
    contain a -C(=O)O- group.

    (1)     Note.  An organic halogen compound is one wherein halogen is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.  Organic oxygen compound is similarly defined.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/333
TXT The oxygen compound is an ether or has hydroxy bonded  directly to acyclic
    or alicyclic carbon (e.g., sulfurized pine oil or cardanol ether, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 332 wherein an ether or a compound having
    hydroxy bonded directly to acyclic or alicyclic carbon is the organic
    compound sulfurized.


CLS 508/334
TXT With an organic nitrogen compound, which may or may not be reacted with the
    sulfurized compound:

    Compositions under subclass 322 (1) which contain, in addition to the
    sulfurized organic compound, an organic nitrogen compound or (2) wherein
    the sulfurized organic compound is reacted with an organic nitrogen
    compound.

    (1)     Note.  An organic nitrogen compound is one wherein nitrogen is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/335
TXT The nitrogen is attached directly or indirectly to -C(=X)-, wherein X is
    chalcogen, by nonionic bonding (e.g., phosphatides, amides, zinc diamyl
    dithiocarbamate, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 334 wherein
    -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium), is attached directly or indirectly to the nitrogen by nonionic
    bonding.


CLS 508/336
TXT With an organic -S(=O)(=O)O- compound, which may or may not be reacted with
    the sulfurized compound (e.g., sulfates, mahogany sulfonates, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 322 (1) which contain, in addition to the
    sulfurized organic compound, an organic  -S(=O)(=O)O- compound, or (2)
    wherein the sulfurized organic compound is reacted with an
    organic-S(=O)(=O)O-  compound.

    (1)     Note.  An organic -S(=O)(=O)O- compound is one in which
    the-S(=O)(=O)O- group is attached directly or indirectly by nonionic
    bonding to carbon of an organic compound.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/337
TXT With an organic phosphorus compound, which may or may not be reacted with
    the sulfurized compound:

    Compositions under subclass 322 (1) which contain, in addition to the
    sulfurized organic compound, an organic phosphorus compound, or (2) wherein
    the sulfurized organic compound is reacted with an organic phosphorus
    compound.

    (1)     Note.  An organic phosphorus compound is one wherein phosphorus is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/338
TXT The organic phosphorus compound is a phosphorus acid, a salt thereof, or an
    indeterminate reaction product of hydrocarbon and phosphorus sulfide:

    Compositions under subclass 337 wherein the organic phosphorus compound is
    an indeterminate reaction product of hydrocarbon and phosphorus sulfide, or
    is a phosphorus acid, or a salt of a phosphorus acid.


CLS 508/339
TXT With an organic -C(=O)O- compound, which may or may not be  reacted with
    the sulfurized compound:

    Compositions under subclass 322 (1) which contain, in addition to the
    sulfurized organic compound, an organic -C(=O)O- compound, or (2) wherein
    the sulfurized organic compound is reacted with an organic-C(=O)O- compound.

    (1)     Note.  An organic -C(=O)O- compound is one in which the carbon of
    the -C(=O)O- group is, or is attached directly or indirectly by nonionic
    bonding to, the carbon of an organic compound.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/340
TXT The organic -C(=O)O- compound is naphthenic acid or a salt thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 339 wherein the organic    -C(=O)O- compound is
    naphthenic acid, per se, or a salt of naphthenic acid.


CLS 508/341
TXT With organic halogen compound:

    Compositions under subclass 322 (1) which contain, in addition to the
    sulfurized organic compound, an organic halogen compound, or (2) wherein
    the sulfurized organic compound is reacted with an organic halogen compound.

    (1)     Note.  An organic halogen compound is one wherein halogen is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/342
TXT With an organic oxygen compound, which may or may not be  reacted with the
    sulfurized compound:

    Compositions under subclass 322 which (1) contain, in addition to the
    sulfurized organic compound, an organic oxygen compound, or (2) wherein the
    sulfurized organic compound is reacted with an organic oxygen compound.

    (1)     Note.  An organic oxygen compound is one in which oxygen is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/343
TXT Sulfurized mixture of hydrocarbon and carboxylic acid ester (i.e., products
    produced by sulfurizing a mixture containing both hydrocarbon and
    carboxylic acid ester):

    Compositions under subclass 322 wherein the organic compound is a component
    of a mixture of a carboxylic acid ester and a hydrocarbon, which mixture is
    sulfurized, resulting in a mixture of sulfurized hydrocarbon and sulfurized
    carboxylic acid ester.


CLS 508/344
TXT Sulfurized carboxylic acid ester:

    Compositions under subclass 322 wherein the organic compound sulfurized is
    a carboxylic acid ester.


CLS 508/345
TXT The carboxylic acid ester is a naturally occurring  triglyceride or a
    naturally occurring wax ester (e.g.,  sulfurized lard oil, degras, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 344 wherein the carboxylic acid ester is a
    naturally occurring wax ester or a naturally occurring triglyceride.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of naturally occurring ester waxes are lanolin,
    beeswax, degras, carnauba wax, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of naturally occurring triglycerides are corn oil,
    lard, soybean oil, palm oil, etc.


CLS 508/346
TXT Phosphosulfurized or phosphooxidized organic compound of indeterminate
    structure (i.e., indeterminate  reaction products of organic compounds with
    phosphorus sulfides or oxides):

    Compositions under subclass 110 which contain a compound of indeterminate
    structure which has been prepared by the reaction of an organic compound
    with a phosphorus sulfide or a phosphorus oxide.

    (1)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/347
TXT The organic compound is simultaneously reacted with an  inorganic
    phosphorus halide:

    Compositions under subclass 346 wherein an inorganic phosphorus halide and
    the phosphorus sulfide or oxide are simultaneously reacted with the organic
    compound.


CLS 508/348
TXT The organic compound is an organic  nitrogen compound (e.g.,
    phosphosulfurized nitriles, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 346 wherein the organic compound that is
    phosphosulfurized or phosphooxidized is an organic nitrogen compound.

    (1)     Note.  An organic nitrogen compound is one wherein nitrogen is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/349
TXT The organic compound is a phosphorus ester or an organic -S(=O)(=O)O-
    compound (e.g., phosphosulfurized petroleum mahogany sulfonates, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 346 wherein the organic compound that is
    phosphosulfurized or phosphooxidized is a phosphorus ester or an organic
    -S(=O)(=O)O- compound.

    (1)     Note.  A phosphorus ester is characterized by divalent chalcogen
    bonded to both phosphorus and carbon, wherein the carbon may be single
    bonded to any atom but may be multiple bonded only to additional carbon.

    (2)     Note.  An organic -S(=O)(=O)O- compound is one wherein
    the-S(=O)(=O)O- group is attached directly or indirectly by nonionic
    bonding to carbon of an organic compound.

    (3)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/350
TXT Phosphosulfurized or phosphooxidized mixture of hydrocarbon and organic
    oxygen compound:

    Compositions under subclass 346 wherein the organic compound is a component
    of a mixture of hydrocarbon and an organic oxygen compound, which mixture
    is phosphosulfurized or phosphooxidized, resulting in a mixture of
    phosphosulfurized or phosphooxidized hydrocarbon and phosphosulfurized or
    phosphooxidized organic oxygen compound.

    (1)     Note.  An organic oxygen compound is one wherein oxygen is attached
    directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic compound.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition of the definition of an
    organic compound.


CLS 508/351
TXT The organic compound is a carboxylic acid, salt, or ester (e.g.,
    phosphosulfurized oleic acid, etc.)

    Compositions under subclass 346 wherein the organic compound that is
    phosphosulfurized or phosphooxidized is a carboxylic acid, a carboxylic
    acid salt, or a carboxylic acid ester.


CLS 508/352
TXT The organic compound is a naturally occurring triglyceride or a naturally
    occurring wax ester (e.g., phosphosulfurized degras, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 351 wherein the organic compound that is
    phosphosulfurized or phosphooxidized is a naturally occurring wax ester or
    naturally occurring triglyceride.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of naturally occurring wax esters are lanolin,
    beeswax, spermaceti, carnauba wax, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of naturally occurring triglycerides are corn oil,
    lard, soybean oil, palm oil, etc.


CLS 508/353
TXT The organic compound contains -XH, wherein X is chalcogen, bonded directly
    to carbon and H of -XH may be replaced by metal (e.g., phosphosulfurized
    alkyl phenol sulfides, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 346 wherein the organic compound that is
    phosphosulfurized or phosphooxidized contains carbon bonded directly to
    -XH, wherein H of -XH may be replaced by metal and X is chalcogen (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are
    phosphosulfurized or phosphooxidized phenols, thiophenols, alcohols, and
    their salts, etc.


CLS 508/354
TXT The organic compound is a hydrocarbon:

    Compositions under subclass 346 wherein the organic compound that is
    phosphosulfurized or phosphooxidized is a hydrocarbon.


CLS 508/355
TXT With an organic nitrogen compound, which may or may not be reacted with the
    phosphosulfurized or phosphooxidized  hydrocarbon:

    Compositions under subclass 354 (1) which contain, in addition to the
    phosphosulfurized or phosphooxidized hydrocarbon, an organic nitrogen
    compound or (2) wherein the phosphosulfurized or phosphooxidized
    hydrocarbon is reacted with an organic nitrogen compound.

    (1)     Note.  An organic nitrogen compound is one wherein nitrogen is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/356
TXT The nitrogen is attached directly or indirectly to -C(=X)-, wherein X is
    chalcogen, by nonionic bonding (e.g., amides, aminocarboxylic acids, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 355 wherein
    -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium), is attached directly or indirectly to the nitrogen of the
    organic nitrogen compound by nonionic bonding.


CLS 508/357
TXT With an organic phosphorus compound, which may or may not  be reacted with
    the phosphosulfurized or phosphooxidized hydrocarbon:

    Compositions under subclass 354 (1) which contain, in addition to the
    phosphosulfurized or phosphooxidized hydrocarbon, an organic phosphorus
    compound or (2) wherein the phosphosulfurized or phosphooxidized
    hydrocarbon is reacted with an organic phosphorus compound.

    (1)     Note.  An organic phosphorus compound is one wherein phosphorus is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    organic compound.


CLS 508/358
TXT With an organic -S(=O)(=O)O- compound, which may or may not be reacted with
    the phosphosulfurized or phosphooxidized hydrocarbon:

    Compositions under subclass 354 (1) which contain, in addition to the
    phosphosulfurized or phosphooxidized hydrocarbon, an organic-S(=O)(=O)O-
    compound or (2) wherein the phosphosulfurized or phosphooxidized
    hydrocarbon is reacted with an organic-S(=O)(=O)O- compound.

    (1)     Note.  An organic -S(=O)(=O)O- compound is one wherein
    the-S(=O)(=O)O- group is attached directly or indirectly by nonionic
    bonding to carbon of an organic compound.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/359
TXT With an organic -C(=X)X- compound, wherein the X's may be  same or diverse
    chalcogens, which compound may or may not  be reacted with the
    phosphosulfurized or phosphooxidized  hydrocarbon:

    Compositions under subclass 354 (1) which contain, in addition to the
    phosphosulfurized or phosphooxidized hydrocarbon, an organic-C(=X)X-
    compound, wherein the X's may be the same or diverse chalcogens (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) or (2) wherein the
    phosphosulfurized or phosphooxidized hydrocarbon is reacted with such an
    organic -C(=X)X- compound.

    (1)     Note.  An organic -C(=X)X- compound is one wherein the carbon of
    the -C(=X)X- group is, or is attached directly or indirectly by nonionic
    bonding to, the carbon of an organic compound.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/360
TXT With an organic chalcogen compound, which may or may not be reacted with
    the phosphosulfurized or phosphooxidized hydrocarbon (e.g., phenols,
    alcohols, quinones, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 354 (1) which contain, in addition to the
    phosphosulfurized or phosphooxidized hydrocarbon, an organic chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) compound or (2) wherein the
    phosphosulfurized or phosphooxidized hydrocarbon is reacted with an organic
    chalcogen compound.

    (1)     Note.  An organic chalcogen compound is one in which chalcogen is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/361
TXT The phosphosulfurized or phosphooxidized hydrocarbon is reacted  with
    water, a base, a metal compound, or elemental metal (e.g., overbased
    phosphosulfurized hydrocarbon, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 354 wherein water, a base, a metal compound, or
    elemental metal is reacted with the phosphosulfurized or phosphooxidized
    hydrocarbon.


CLS 508/362
TXT Nitrogen and heavy metal, or nitrogen and aluminum, in the same compound:

    Compositions under subclass 110 which contain a compound containing heavy
    metal and nitrogen, or a compound containing aluminum and nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  Arsenic is considered a heavy metal.

    (2)     Note.  Heavy metals are considered to be those having a specific
    gravity greater than 4.0.

    (3)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are
    trioctylmethylammonium thiomolybdate and

    C6H5NHAsCl2


CLS 508/363
TXT The nitrogen is bonded directly to the carbon of a -C(=X)X- group, wherein
    the X's may be the same or diverse chalcogens (e.g., dithiocarbamates,
    etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 362 wherein the carbon of a -C(=X)X- group,
    wherein the X's may be the same or diverse chalcogens (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to the nitrogen.


CLS 508/364
TXT With organic nitrogen, phosphorus, or chalcogen compound:

    Compositions under subclass 363 which contain, in addition to the
    nitrogen-heavy metal or nitrogen-aluminum compound, an organic phosphorus
    compound, an organic nitrogen compound, or an organic chalcogen (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) compound.

    (1)     Note.  An organic phosphorus compound is one wherein phosphorus is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.  Organic nitrogen compound and organic chalcogen compound are
    similarly defined.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/365
TXT With metal compound:

    Compositions under subclass 364 which contain, further, an organic compound
    that contains metal.

    (1)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/366
TXT The nitrogen is multiple bonded to carbon, or is bonded  directly to
    additional nitrogen:

    Compositions under subclass 362 wherein carbon is multiple bonded to the
    nitrogen, or an additional nitrogen is bonded to the nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are:  the iron
    salt of N-nitroso phenyl hydroxylamine, and


CLS 508/367
TXT Containing -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen:

    Compositions under subclass 362 wherein the compound that contains nitrogen
    and heavy metal or nitrogen and aluminum also contains -C(=X)-, wherein X
    is chalcogen (i.e, oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:

    [(C8H17)2N-CH2CH2COO]2Pb


CLS 508/368
TXT Heavy metal or aluminum in an organic phosphorus compound having four
    chalcogens bonded directly to the phosphorus:

    Compositions under subclass 110 which contain an organic phosphorus
    compound which (1) contains heavy metal or aluminum and (2) has four
    chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) bonded directly
    to the phosphorus.

    (1)     Note.  An organic phosphorus compound is one wherein phosphorus is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.

    (2)     Note.  See (3)  Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.

    (3)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:

    (CH3O)2-P(S)S-Ti(OCH3)3


CLS 508/369
TXT The phosphorus is bonded indirectly to an additional diverse metal or to
    carbonyl (e.g., molybdenum-zinc dialkyldithiophosphates, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 368 wherein carbonyl or an additional diverse
    metal is bonded indirectly to the phosphorus.

    (1)     Note.  There are no restrictions relative to the type of bonding
    between the phosphorus and the carbonyl or additional metal.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are:

    [(CH3OC(O)CH2O-)2P(S)S]2Zn

    and

    ZnMo2O3[S(S)P(OAlkyl)2]6


CLS 508/370
TXT The phosphorus is attached indirectly to chalcogen by  nonionic bonding, or
    is part of a ring consisting of  phosphorus, carbon, and chalcogen:

    Compositions under subclass 368 wherein (1) the phosphorus is part of a
    ring consisting of phosphorus, carbon, and chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) or (2) chalcogen is attached indirectly to the
    phosphorus by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are:

    [(C9H19C6H4OCH2CH2O-)2P(=S)S]2Zn

    and


CLS 508/371
TXT The  heavy metal is zinc:

    Compositions under subclass 368 wherein zinc is the heavy metal.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is zinc
    dihexyl dithiophosphate.


CLS 508/372
TXT With organic sulfonate compound:

    Compositions under subclass 371 which contain, in addition to the
    zinc-organic phosphorus compound, an organic sulfonate compound.

    (1)     Note.  An organic sulfonate compound is one wherein an-S(=O)(O)O-
    group is attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of
    an organic compound.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/373
TXT With organic nitrogen compound:

    Compositions under subclass 372 which contain, in addition to the
    zinc-organic phosphorus compound and the organic sulfonate compound, an
    organic nitrogen compound.

    (1)     Note.  An organic nitrogen compound is one wherein nitrogen is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/374
TXT With organic -C(=X)X- compound, wherein the X's may be the same or diverse
    chalcogens:

    Compositions under subclass 372 which contain, in addition to the
    zinc-organic phosphorus compound and the organic sulfonate compound, an
    organic -C(=X)X- compound, wherein the X's may be the same or diverse
    chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An organic -C(=X)X- compound is one wherein the carbon of
    the -C(=X)X- group is, or is attached directly or indirectly by nonionic
    bonding to, the carbon of an organic compound.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/375
TXT With organic nitrogen compound:

    Compositions under subclass 371 which contain, in addition to the
    zinc-organic phosphorus compound, an organic nitrogen compound.

    (1)     Note.  An organic nitrogen compound is one wherein nitrogen is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/376
TXT The nitrogen is bonded directly to -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen (e.g.,
    amides, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 375 wherein
    -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium), is bonded directly to the nitrogen.


CLS 508/377
TXT With organic phosphorus compound that does not contain zinc:

    Compositions under subclass 371 which contain, in addition to the
    zinc-organic phosphorus compound, an organic phosphorus compound that does
    not contain zinc.


CLS 508/378
TXT With organic chalcogen compound that does not contain phosphorus:

    Compositions under subclass 371 which contain, in addition to the
    zinc-organic phosphorus compound, an organic chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) compound that does not contain phosphorus.

    (1)     Note.  An organic chalcogen compound is one wherein chalcogen is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/379
TXT The heavy metal is molybdenum, a rare earth metal, gold, silver, or mercury:

    Compositions under subclass 368 wherein molybdenum, a rare earth metal,
    gold, silver, or mercury is the heavy metal.


CLS 508/380
TXT With organic chalcogen compound that does not contain phosphorus:

    Compositions under subclass 368 which contain, in addition to the organic
    phosphorus compound, an organic chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium,
    or tellurium) compound that does not contain phosphorus.

    (1)     Note.  An organic chalcogen compound is one wherein chalcogen is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/381
TXT Heavy metal or aluminum in the same compound with alkali or alkaline earth
    metal:

    Compositions under subclass 110 wherein an alkali metal or an alkaline
    earth metal is present in the same organic compound as a heavy metal or
    aluminum.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:

    Li(C17H35CO2).2Al(OH)3

    (2)     Note.  Arsenic is considered a heavy metal.

    (3)     Note.  Heavy metals are those whose specific gravity is greater
    than 4.0.


CLS 508/382
TXT Heavy metal or aluminum bonded directly to carbon:

    Compositions under subclass 110 wherein carbon is bonded directly to heavy
    metal or to aluminum.

    (1)     Note.  Arsenic is considered a heavy metal.

    (2)     Note.  Heavy metals are those whose specific gravity is greater
    than 4.0.

    (3)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:

    (CH3)3Sn-Sn(C6H5)3


CLS 508/383
TXT The heavy metal or aluminum is bonded directly to carbonyl,  or is double
    bonded directly to chalcogen:

    Compositions under subclass 382 wherein carbonyl is bonded directly to the
    heavy metal or aluminum, or chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium) is double bonded directly to the heavy metal or aluminum.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are organo metal
    carbonyl compounds and

    (CH3)2Sn=S


CLS 508/384
TXT The heavy metal or aluminum is directly bonded only to carbon:

    Compositions under subclass 382 wherein only carbon is directly bonded to
    the heavy metal or aluminum.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is tetraphenyl
    tin.


CLS 508/385
TXT Heavy metal or aluminum naphthenate, in combination with an organic
    nitrogen, sulfur, or phosphorus compound:

    Compositions under subclass 110 which contain an organic nitrogen compound,
    an organic sulfur compound, or an organic phosphorus compound, in
    combination with a heavy metal or aluminum salt of naphthenic acid.

    (1)     Note.  Arsenic is considered a heavy metal.

    (2)     Note.  Heavy metals are those whose specific gravity is greater
    than 4.0.

    (3)     Note.  An organic nitrogen compound is one wherein nitrogen is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.  Organic sulfur compound and organic phosphorus compound are
    similarly defined.

    (4)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/386
TXT Organic -XCN or -N=C=X compound, wherein X is  chalcogen:

    Compositions under subclass 110 wherein
    -XCN or -N=C=X, wherein X in each instance is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), is attached directly or indirectly by
    nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic compound.

    (1)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are:

    C6H5-N=C=S

    and

    C6H5CH2SCN


CLS 508/387
TXT Compound of indeterminate structure, prepared by reacting an organic
    sulfonate compound of known structure:

    Compositions under subclass 110 which contain a compound of indeterminate
    structure, prepared by the reaction of a compound of known structure having
    carbon of an organic compound attached directly or indirectly by nonionic
    bonding to a sulfonate, -S(=O)(=O)O-, group.

    (1)     Note.  Components of indeterminate structure prepared by the
    reaction of organic sulfate compounds of known structure are provided for
    herein, because the sulfate group, -O-S(=O)(=O)O-, contains-S(=O)(=O)O-.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/388
TXT Organic sulfur compound, wherein the sulfur is single bonded directly to
    oxygen (e.g., sulfites, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 110 which contain a compound wherein sulfur is
    (1) single bonded directly to oxygen, and (2) is attached directly or
    indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic compound.

    (1)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is p-ethyl
    benzene sulfinic acid,

    C2H5C6H4S(O)OH


CLS 508/389
TXT The sulfur is part of an -O-S(=O)(=O)O- group (i.e., sulfates):

    Compositions under subclass 388 wherein the sulfur is present as part of a
    sulfate, -O-S(=O)(=O)O-, group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is sodium
    dodecyl sulfate,

    Na-O-S(=O)(=O)OC12H25


CLS 508/390
TXT The sulfur is part of an -O-S(=O)(=O)- group (i.e., sulfonates):

    Compositions under subclass 388 wherein the sulfur is present as part of a
    sulfonate, -S(=O)(=O)O-, group.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are light metal
    dinonyl naphthalene sulfonates and light metal mahogany sulfonates.


CLS 508/391
TXT Overbased or carbonated sulfonates:

    Compositions under subclass 390 wherein the organic -S(=O)(=O)O- compound
    is an overbased or carbonated sulfonic acid.

    (1)     Note.  An overbased compound herein is one in which an amount of
    metal (e.g., Mg, Ca, Ba, Sr) is present which is greater than the
    stoichiometric amount of metal which would be present if the sulfonic acid
    were completely neutralized.

    (2)     Note.  A carbonated compound herein is the complex resulting from
    the reaction of carbon dioxide with metal sulfonates.


CLS 508/392
TXT Prepared by addition of carbon dioxide, carbonic acid, or salt thereof to a
    reaction mixture containing alkylphenol, substituted alkylphenol or salt
    thereof and sulfonic acid or salt thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 391 wherein the overbased or carbonated
    sulfonate is prepared by forming a reaction mixture containing (1) a
    sulfonic acid or a salt thereof, and (2) an alkylphenol, a substituted
    alkylphenol or a salt thereof, and adding to said reaction mixture one of
    carbon dioxide, carbonic acid, or a salt thereof.


CLS 508/393
TXT Prepared by chemical reaction of existing overbased sulfonate in the
    absence of additional base (e.g.,  converting overbased sulfonate to
    non-newtonian or thixotropic composition; further reacting overbased
    sulfonate with carboxylic acid, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 391 wherein the overbased or carbonated
    sulfonate is prepared by chemically reacting a previously formed overbased
    sulfonate, which chemical reacting takes place in the absence of any
    additional base.


CLS 508/394
TXT Prepared with, or in the presence of, a halogen containing material:

    Compositions under subclass 391 wherein the overbased or carbonated
    sulfonate is prepared (1) by reacting a halogen containing material, or (2)
    in the presence of a halogen containing material.


CLS 508/395
TXT Prepared by addition of carbon dioxide, carbonic acid, or salt thereof to a
    reaction mixture prior to addition of sulfonic acid or salt thereof (i.e.,
    carbonating reaction mixture prior to addition of sulfonic acid or salt
    thereof):

    Compositions under subclass 391 wherein the overbased or carbonated
    sulfonate is prepared by adding a sulfonic acid or salt thereof to a
    reaction mixture in which carbon dioxide, carbonic acid, or a salt thereof
    is already present.


CLS 508/396
TXT Prepared with, or in the presence of, a nitrogen containing material:

    Compositions under subclass 391 wherein the overbased or carbonated
    sulfonate is prepared (1) by reacting a nitrogen containing material, or
    (2) in the presence of a nitrogen containing material.


CLS 508/397
TXT The nitrogen containing material is an ammonium salt or a substituted
    ammonium salt:

    Compositions under subclass 396 wherein an ammonium salt or a substituted
    ammonium salt serves as the nitrogen containing material.


CLS 508/398
TXT With nonhydrocarbon organic  compound in addition to those  remaining from
    overbasing process (e.g., antioxidants, VI improvers, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 391 which contain, in addition to the overbased
    or carbonated sulfonate and any material remaining from the overbasing
    process, an organic compound that is not a hydrocarbon.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is designed to encompass compositions which
    include (1) overbased or carbonated sulfonates, (2) any materials remaining
    from the overbasing process and (3) additional additives, which are
    nonhydrocarbon organic compounds.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/399
TXT The compound is an organic nitrogen compound:

    Compositions under subclass 398 wherein the nonhydrocarbon organic compound
    contains nitrogen which is attached directly or indirectly by nonionic
    bonding to carbon of the organic compound.


CLS 508/400
TXT The compound is a carboxylic acid ester (e.g., as  lubricant base, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 398 wherein a carboxylic acid ester is the
    nonhydrocarbon organic compound.


CLS 508/401
TXT Prepared by addition of carbon dioxide, carbonic acid, or salt thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 391 wherein the overbased or carbonated
    sulfonate is prepared by addition of carbon dioxide, carbonic acid, or a
    salt thereof to a reaction mixture containing a sulfonic acid or salt
    thereof, or by simultaneous addition of (1) carbon dioxide, carbonic acid,
    or a salt thereof and (2) sulfonic acid or salt thereof to a reaction
    mixture.

    (1)     Note.  The reaction mixture may not contain alkylphenol,
    substituted alkylphenol, or a salt thereof.  Such processes are provided
    for in subclass 392, supra.


CLS 508/402
TXT Multiple additions thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 401 wherein the overbased or carbonated
    sulfonate is prepared by a process utilizing multiple, separate additions
    of carbon dioxide, carbonic acid, or a salt thereof.


CLS 508/403
TXT The single bonded oxygen is bonded  directly to carbon (e.g., sulfonate
    esters, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 390 wherein carbon is bonded directly to the
    single bonded oxygen of the -S(=O)(=O)O- group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass encompasses primarily sulfonic acid esters.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:

    C6H5-SO2OC5H11,

            benzene sulfonic acid, amyl ester.


CLS 508/404
TXT Nitrogen attached directly or indirectly to the sulfonate group by nonionic
    bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 390 wherein the sulfonate group is attached
    directly or indirectly to nitrogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are sulfamic
    acids and

    C10H11-C(O)N(CH3)CH2CH2SO3H


CLS 508/405
TXT Non-sulfonate chalcogen attached indirectly to the sulfonate group by
    nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 390 wherein the sulfonate group is attached
    indirectly by nonionic bonding to chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) that is not part of a sulfonate group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:

    CH3OC(O)CH(SO3H)CH2C(O)OCH3


CLS 508/406
TXT Halogen attached indirectly to the sulfonate group by  nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 390 wherein the sulfonate group is attached
    indirectly to halogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:

    CF3SO2OLi


CLS 508/407
TXT With rosin, tall oil, or derivatives thereof of indeterminate structure:

    Compositions under subclass 390 which contain, in addition to the sulfonate
    group containing compound, rosin, tall oil, or derivatives of indeterminate
    structure thereof.

    (1)     Note.  If an additional component is identified as fatty acid(s)
    or abietic acid(s) of known structure derived from rosin or tall oil, such
    acids are classified on the basis of their structure.  If the acids are
    identified solely by reference to their source, they are classified here.


CLS 508/408
TXT With organic phosphorus compound (e.g., phosphate esters, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 390 which contain, in addition to the sulfonate
    group containing compound, an organic phosphorus compound.

    (1)     Note.  An organic phosphorus compound is one wherein phosphorus is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/409
TXT With carboxylic acid ester:

    Compositions under subclass 390 which contain, in addition to the sulfonate
    group containing compound, a carboxylic acid ester.


CLS 508/410
TXT Organic nitrogen compound salt of a sulfonic acid, or an organic nitrogen
    compound is present:

    Compositions under subclass 390 which (1) contain, in addition to the
    sulfonate group containing compound, an organic nitrogen compound or (2)
    which contain an organic nitrogen compound salt of a sulfonic acid.

    (1)     Note.  An organic nitrogen compound is one wherein nitrogen is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/411
TXT The organic nitrogen compound is a guanidine or a  carboxylic acid amide:

    Compositions under subclass 410 wherein the organic nitrogen compound is a
    carboxylic acid amide or a guanidine.

    (1)     Note.  A guanidine is

    NH2-C(=NH)NH2,

            wherein substitution may be made for hydrogen only.


CLS 508/412
TXT Chalcogen attached indirectly to the nitrogen by nonionic bonding (e.g.,
    trialkanolamines, phenol-aldehyde-amine condensates, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 410 wherein the nitrogen is attached indirectly
    by nonionic bonding to chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium).


CLS 508/413
TXT With organic -C(=O)O- compound:

    Compositions under subclass 390 which contain, in addition to the sulfonate
    containing compound, an organic -C(=O)O- compound.

    (1)     Note.  An organic -C(=O)O- compound is one wherein the  carbon of
    the -C(=O)O- group is, or is attached directly or indirectly by nonionic
    bonding to, carbon of an organic compound.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/414
TXT Ring bonded directly to the carbon of the -C(=O)O- group (e.g., phthalates,
    naphthenates, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 413 wherein the -C(=O)O- carbon is bonded
    directly to a ring.


CLS 508/415
TXT With compound having alcoholic or phenolic -OH, or salt thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 413 which contain, in addition to the organic
    -C(=O)O- compound and the sulfonate containing compound, a compound having
    an alcoholic or phenolic hydroxyl group, or a salt thereof.


CLS 508/416
TXT With organic halogen or non-sulfonate chalcogen compound (e.g.,
    haloparaffins, ethers, ketones, polyols, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 390 which contain, in addition to the sulfonate
    containing compound, an organic halogen compound or an organic chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) compound that does not
    contain a sulfonate group.

    (1)     Note.  An organic halogen compound is one wherein halogen is
    attached directly  or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an
    organic compound.  Organic chalcogen compound is similarly defined.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/417
TXT The non-sulfonate chalcogen compound is a phenol, or salt thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 416 wherein the organic chalcogen compound that
    does not contain a sulfonate group is a phenol or a salt of a phenol.


CLS 508/418
TXT Aluminum or heavy metal sulfonate salt:

    Compositions under subclass 390 which contain a heavy metal or an aluminum
    salt of a sulfonic acid.

    (1)     Note.  Arsenic is considered a heavy metal.

    (2)     Note.  Heavy metals are those whose specific gravity is greater
    than 4.0.


CLS 508/419
TXT Compound of indeterminate structure, prepared by reacting a compound having
    phos-phorus single bonded directly to chalcogen by nonionic bonding and
    attached directly or indirectly to carbon by nonionic bonding (e.g., by
    reaction of phosphorus acids and esters, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 110 which contain a compound of indeterminate
    structure, said compound being prepared by the reaction of a compound
    wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is single
    bonded directly to phosphorus by nonionic bonding, which phosphorus is
    attached directly or indirectly to carbon by nonionic bonding.


CLS 508/420
TXT A nitrogen compound is reacted with the phosphorus compound:

    Compositions under subclass 419 wherein the phosphorus compound is reacted
    with a nitrogen compound.


CLS 508/421
TXT Organic phosphorus compound, wherein the phosphorus is single bonded
    directly to chalcogen by nonionic bonding (e.g., phosphorus acids, esters,
    etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 110 which contain an organic phosphorus
    compound wherein phosphorus is (1) single bonded directly to chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) by nonionic bonding and is
    (2) attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an
    organic compound.

    (1)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:

    (C6H5)2P-O-C6H5


CLS 508/422
TXT The phosphorus is in a ring:

    Compositions under subclass 421 wherein the phosphorus is a member of a
    ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/423
TXT Additional phosphorus attached directly or indirectly to the phosphorus by
    nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 421 wherein an additional phosphorus is
    attached directly or indirectly to the phosphorus by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:

    [(C6H5O)2P-OCH2]4C


CLS 508/424
TXT Plural phosphori bonded to the same chalcogen or chain of  chalcogens
    (e.g., pyrophosphates, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 423 wherein a single chalcogen or a chain of
    chalcogens is bonded to plural phosphori.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:

    [(C2H5O)2P(S)S-]3P


CLS 508/425
TXT Nitrogen attached directly or indirectly to the phosphorus by nonionic
    bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 423 wherein the phosphorus is attached directly
    or indirectly to nitrogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:

    [(C6H5O)2P(O)]2NC12H25


CLS 508/426
TXT Having -C(=O)O- attached  indirectly to the phosphorus by nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 423 wherein the phosphorus is attached
    indirectly to-C(=O)O- by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:

    [(CH3O)2P(S)SCH2OC(O)]2CH2


CLS 508/427
TXT Nitrogen or halogen bonded directly to the phosphorus:

    Compositions under subclass 421 wherein the phosphorus is bonded directly
    to nitrogen or to halogen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are:

    (CH3O)2PNHCOOC2H5

    and

    CCl3P(O)(OH)Cl


CLS 508/428
TXT Nitrogen attached indirectly to the phosphorus by nonionic bonding (e.g.,
    phosphatides, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 421 wherein the phosphorus is attached
    indirectly to nitrogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:

    C7H15CONHCH2PO3H2


CLS 508/429
TXT Chalcogen attached indirectly to the phosphorus by nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 421 wherein the phosphorus is attached
    indirectly to chalcogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:

    (CH3O)2P(S)SCH2CH2OH


CLS 508/430
TXT The chalcogen, X, is part of a -C(=X)- group:

    Compositions under subclass 429 wherein the chalcogen, designated by X, is
    part of a -C(=X)- group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:

    S=P(SCH2COOCH3)3


CLS 508/431
TXT Plural carbons bonded directly to the chalcogen or to a chain of chalcogens:

    Compositions under subclass 429 wherein the chalcogen or a chain of
    chalcogens is bonded directly to plural carbons.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:

    [C8H17-(OCH2CH2)3-O]3P=O


CLS 508/432
TXT The chalcogen is sulfur, or the chain of chalcogens is  a chain of sulfurs:

    Compositions under subclass 431 wherein sulfur is the chalcogen, or a chain
    of sulfurs is the chain of chalcogens.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are:

    O=P(OCH2SCH3)3

    and

    C10H21-S-S-CH2P(O)(OCH3)2


CLS 508/433
TXT Divalent chalcogen double bonded directly to the phosphorus:

    Compositions under subclass 421 wherein the phosphorus of the organic
    phosphorus compound is double  bonded directly to divalent chalcogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:

    ClC6H4O-P(S)(OCH3)2


CLS 508/434
TXT Hydrogen bonded directly to the phosphorus:

    Compositions under subclass 433 wherein the phosphorus is bonded directly
    to hydrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/435
TXT Phosphorus acid salt with metal or ammonia (e.g., overbased or carbonated
    phosphorus acids, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 433 wherein the organic phosphorus compound is
    a phosphorus acid in the form of its salt with metal or ammonia.


CLS 508/436
TXT Organic nitrogen compound salt of phosphorus acid, or  organic nitrogen
    compound is present with phosphorus acid:

    Compositions under subclass 433 which (1) contain, in addition to the
    organic phosphorus compound present as a phosphorus acid, an organic
    nitrogen compound or (2) wherein the organic phosphorus compound is in the
    form of an organic nitrogen compound salt of an organic phosphorus acid.

    (1)     Note.  An organic nitrogen compound is one wherein nitrogen is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/437
TXT With organic -C(=O)O- compound:

    Compositions under subclass 436 which contain, in addition to the component
    of subclass 436, an organic -C(=O)O- compound.

    (1)     Note.  An organic -C(=O)O- compound is one wherein the carbon of
    the -C(O)O- group is, or is attached directly or indirectly by nonionic
    bonding to, the carbon of an organic compound.

    (1)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/438
TXT With organic nitrogen, sulfur, or halogen compound:

    Compositions under subclass 433 which contain, in addition to the organic
    phosphorus compound, an organic nitrogen compound, an organic sulfur
    compound, or an organic halogen compound.

    (1)     Note.  An organic nitrogen compound is one wherein nitrogen is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.  Organic sulfur compound and organic halogen compound are
    similarly defined.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/439
TXT With organic -C(=O)O- compound:

    Compositions under subclass 438 which contain, in addition to the organic
    phosphorus compound and the organic nitrogen compound, organic sulfur
    compound or organic halogen compound, an organic -C(=O)O- compound.

    (1)     Note.  An organic -C(=O)O- compound is one wherein the carbon of
    the -C(=O)O- group is, or is attached directly or indirectly by nonionic
    bonding to, the carbon of an organic compound.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/440
TXT With organic -C(=O)O- compound:

    Compositions under subclass 433 which contain, in addition to the organic
    phosphorus compound, an organic -C(=O)O- compound.

    (1)     Note.  An organic -C(=O)O- compound is one wherein the carbon of
    the -C(=O)O- group is, or is attached directly or indirectly by nonionic
    bonding to, the carbon of an organic compound.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/441
TXT Three divalent chalcogens single bonded directly to trivalent phosphorus:

    Compositions under subclass 421 wherein the phosphorus of the organic
    phosphorus compound is trivalent and is single bonded directly to three
    divalent chalcogens.

    (1)     Note.  The principal type of component provided for herein is
    phosphite esters, of the general formula:

    P(OR)3.


CLS 508/442
TXT With organic chalcogen or nitrogen compound:

    Compositions under subclass 441 which contain, in addition to the organic
    phosphorus compound, an organic chalcogen compound or an organic nitrogen
    compound.

    (1)     Note.  An organic chalcogen compound is one wherein chalcogen is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.  Organic nitrogen compound is similarly defined.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/443
TXT Organic -C(=X)X- compound, wherein the X's are the same or diverse
    chalcogens, with at least one X being sulfur:

    Compositions under subclass 110 which contain a compound wherein the carbon
    of a -C(=X)X-  group is, or is attached directly or indirectly by nonionic
    bonding to, the carbon of an organic compound, and wherein the X's may be
    the same or diverse chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium), with at least one X being sulfur.

    (1)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are:

    C5H11-C(O)S-SC(O)C5H11

    and

    (C6H5CSS)2Ca


CLS 508/444
TXT The single bonded chalcogen is bonded directly to an  additional carbon,
    which carbon may be single bonded to any  atom but may be multiple bonded
    only to carbon (i.e,  thiocarboxy esters):

    Compositions under subclass 443 wherein an additional carbon, which may be
    single bonded to any atom but may be multiple bonded only to carbon, is
    bonded directly to the single bonded X.

    (1)     Note.  The components provided for herein are esters of thiocarboxy
    compounds.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:

    C8H17-C(O)S-CH2-C(O)OCH3


CLS 508/445
TXT Chalcogen bonded directly to the carbon of the -C(=X)X-group (e.g.,
    xanthate esters, trithiocarbonate esters, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 444 wherein the carbon of the -C(=X)X- group is
    bonded directly to an additional chalcogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:

    CH3-O-C(S)-S-CH3


CLS 508/446
TXT Compound of indeterminate structure, prepared by reacting an organic cyano
    or isocyano compound of known structure:

    Compositions under subclass 110 which contain a compound of indeterminate
    structure, prepared by the reaction of an organic cyano compound or an
    organic isocyano compound of known structure.

    (1)     Note.  An organic cyano or isocyano compound is one wherein a cyano
    group (-CN) or an isocyano group (-N=C) is attached directly or indirectly
    to carbon of an organic compound by nonionic bonding.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/447
TXT Organic cyano or isocyano compound:

    Compositions under subclass 110 which contain a compound wherein a cyano
    group (-CN) or an isocyano group (-N=C) is attached directly or indirectly
    to carbon of an organic compound by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the of an organic
    compound.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is
    benzonitrile.


CLS 508/448
TXT Nitrogen attached directly or indirectly to the cyano group  by nonionic
    bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 447 wherein the cyano group is attached
    directly or indirectly to nitrogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are:

    CN-CH2-CONH2

    and

    NC-CH2CH2-CN


CLS 508/449
TXT Rosin, tall oil, or derivatives of indeterminate structure thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 110 which contain rosin, tall oil, or
    derivatives of indeterminate structure thereof.

    (1)     Note.  If a component is identified as fatty acid(s) or abietic
    acid(s) of known structure derived from rosin or tall oil, such acids are
    classified on the basis of their structure.  If the acids are identified
    solely by reference to their source, they are classified here.


CLS 508/450
TXT Purified or chemically reacted naturally occurring carboxylic acid ester
    wax (e.g., acidolized, hydrogenated, halogenated, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 110 which contain a naturally occurring
    carboxylic acid ester wax that has been chemically reacted or that has been
    purified.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of naturally occurring carboxylic acid ester waxes
    are lanolin, carnauba wax, beeswax, and sperma-ceti.


CLS 508/451
TXT Naturally occurring carboxylic acid ester wax (e.g., carnauba wax, lanolin,
    beeswax, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 110 which contain a naturally occurring
    carboxylic acid ester wax.

    (1)     Note.  To be classified herein, a component must be characterized
    as a naturally occurring carboxylic acid ester wax, or must be a substance
    known to be a naturally occurring carboxylic acid ester wax.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of known naturally occurring carboxylic acid ester
    waxes are lanolin, beeswax, carnauba oil, and spermaceti.


CLS 508/452
TXT Compound of indeterminate structure, prepared by reacting an organic
    -C(=O)O- compound of known structure:

    Compositions under subclass 110 which contain a compound of indeterminate
    structure, prepared by the reaction of an organic-C(=O)O- compound of known
    structure.

    (1)     Note.  An organic -C(=O)O- compound is one in which the carbon of
    the -C(=O)O- group is, or is attached directly or indirectly by nonionic
    bonding to, the carbon of an organic compound.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/453
TXT An aldehyde or azomethine is reacted with the -C(=O)O-compound:

    Compositions under subclass 452 wherein the -C(=O)O- compound is reacted
    with an aldehyde or with an azomethine.

    (1)     Note.  An azomethine is a compound of the type:


CLS 508/454
TXT A nitrogen compound is reacted with the
    -C(=O)O- compound:

    Compositions under subclass 452 wherein the -C(=O)O- compound is reacted
    with a compound that contains nitrogen.


CLS 508/455
TXT A polyhydroxy compound is reacted with the -C(=O)O- compound:

    Compositions under subclass 452 wherein the -C(=O)O- compound is reacted
    with a compound that contains plural hydroxy groups.


CLS 508/456
TXT Polymerized triglycerides:

    Compositions under subclass 452 wherein the compound of indeterminate
    structure is a polymerized triglyceride.


CLS 508/457
TXT Benzene ring compound reacted with the
    -C(=O)O- compound:

    Compositions under subclass 452 wherein the -C(=O)O- compound is reacted
    with a compound that contains a benzene ring.


CLS 508/458
TXT A reactant contains halogen:

    Compositions under subclass 452 wherein halogen is present in a reactant.


CLS 508/459
TXT Organic -C(=O)O- compound:

    Compositions under subclass 110 which contain a compound wherein the carbon
    of a -C(=O)O- group is, or is attached directly or indirectly by nonionic
    bonding to, the carbon of an organic compound.

    (1)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are oleic acid
    and stearic acid.


CLS 508/460
TXT Overbased or carbonated carboxylates:

    Compositions under subclass 459 wherein the organic -C(=O)O- compound is an
    overbased or carbonated carboxylic acid.

    (1)     Note.  An overbased compound herein is one in which an amount of
    metal (e.g., Mg, Ca, Ba, Sr) is present which is greater than the
    stoichiometric amount of metal which would be present if the carboxylic
    acid were completely neutralized.

    (2)     Note.  A carbonated compound herein is the complex resulting from
    the reaction of carbon dioxide with metal carboxylates.


CLS 508/461
TXT Phosphorus attached indirectly to the
    -C(=O)O- group by  nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 459 wherein the -C(=O)O- group is attached
    indirectly to phosphorus by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:

    O=P(CH2CH2COOCH2CH3)3


CLS 508/462
TXT Additional chalcogen bonded directly to the carbon or the oxy of the
    -C(=O)O- group (i.e., carbonates, percarboxylates):

    Compositions under subclass 459 wherein the oxy or the carbon of the
    -C(=O)O- group is bonded directly to additional chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are:

    C6H11-O-C(O)-O-C6H11

    and

    C6H5-C(O)-O-O-C(CH3)3

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    445,    for components which contain an organic -S-C(=O)O- ester compound


CLS 508/463
TXT Specified compound wherein the single bonded oxygen is bonded directly to
    an additional carbon, which carbon may be single bonded to any atom but may
    be multiple bonded only to carbon (i.e., specified carboxylic acid ester):

    Compositions under subclass 459 which contain a specified compound wherein
    an additional carbon is bonded directly to the single bonded oxygen, which
    carbon may be single bonded to any atom but may be multiple bonded only to
    carbon.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass encompasses carboxylic acid esters.

    (2)     Note.  The expression "specified compound" means that a carboxylic
    acid ester lubricant base component, in order to be classified in this
    subclass or its indents, must be structurally identified to the point where
     the component can be placed in this subclass or a specific indent on the
    basis of a complete structure.  This structure may be expressed generically
    or specifically, but it must be expressed in the claims.  Such descriptions
    as "ester," "carboxylic acid ester," "aryl ester," "aliphatic ester,"
    "substituted carboxylic acid ester," etc. will not be deemed sufficient to
    warrant classification in this subclass or its indents.  A generically
    expressed structure which would be properly classifiable herein may be
    exemplified by "an alkyl benzoate, substituted in the alkyl portion by
    halogen, amino or alkoxy." Such a generic expression allows identification
    of exact substances within its scope.

            When a carboxylic acid ester is present as a lubricant additive
    rather than as a lubricant base, placement of such an additive will be
    effected in the normal manner.


CLS 508/464
TXT Nitrogen bonded directly to the carbon of the -C(=O)O- group:

    Compositions under subclass 463 wherein the carbon of the -C(=O)O- group is
    bonded directly to nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:

    NH2-C(=O)O-(CH2CH2O)2-C(=O)-NH2


CLS 508/465
TXT Plural -C(=O)O- groups attached directly or indirectly to  each other by
    nonionic bonding (e.g., estolides of hydroxy carboxylic acids, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 463 wherein an additional -C(=O)O- group is
    attached directly or indirectly to the -C(=O)O- group by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  The additional -C(=O)O- group does not have to be present as
    part of a carboxylic acid ester group.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/466
TXT Polymer of alpha, beta-olefinically unsaturated dicarboxylic acid ester
    monomer, or of esterified alpha,  beta-olefinically unsaturated
    dicarboxylic acid or  anhydride monomer (e.g., copolymer of maleic acid
    ester and vinyl alkyl ether, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 465 wherein the compound having plural -C(=O)O-
    groups is a polymer prepared from an alpha,beta-olefinically unsaturated
    dicarboxylic acid ester monomer, or from an alpha, beta-olefinically
    unsaturated dicarboxylic acid or anhydride monomer which is esterified
    before, during, or after polymerization.

    (1)     Note.  The monomers are normally addition polymerized through the
    olefinic double bond.

    (2)     Note.  The polymers encompassed herein may be homopolymers or
    copolymers.

    (3)     Note.  Typical alpha, beta-olefinically unsaturated dicarboxylic
    ester monomers are maleates and fumarates.


CLS 508/467
TXT Monocarboxylic acid ester of  olefinically unsaturated alcohol is an
    additional monomer of the polymer (e.g., dialkyl  fumarate-vinyl acetate
    copolymer, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 466 wherein a monomer that is a monocarboxylic
    acid ester of an olefinically unsaturated alcohol forms a copolymer with
    the alpha, beta-olefinically unsaturated dicarboxylic monomer.

    (1)     Note.  More than two discrete olefinic-ally unsaturated monomers
    may form terpolymers, etc.

    (2)     Note.  A typical monocarboxylic acid ester of an olefinically
    unsaturated alcohol is vinyl acetate.


CLS 508/468
TXT Olefin or alpha, beta-olefinically unsaturated carboxylate is an
    additional monomer of the polymer (e.g., fumarate-ethylene or
    fumarate-acrylate copolymers, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 466 wherein an olefin monomer or an alpha,
    beta-olefinically unsaturated carboxylate monomer forms a copolymer with
    the alpha, beta-olefinically unsaturated dicarboxylic monomer.

    (1)     Note.  More than two discrete olefinic-ally unsaturated monomers
    may form terpolymers, etc.

    (2)     Note.  The alpha, beta-olefinically unsaturated carboxylate is
    typically an acrylate.


CLS 508/469
TXT Polymer of alpha, beta-olefinically unsaturated  carboxylate monomer (e.g.,
    polymethylmethacrylate, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 465 wherein the compound having plural -C(=O)O-
    groups is a polymer prepared from an alpha, beta-olefinically unsaturated
    carboxylate monomer.

    (1)     Note.  The monomers are normally addition polymerized through the
    olefinic double bonds.

    (2)     Note.  The polymers encompassed herein may be homopolymers or
    copolymers.

    (3)     Note.  Methyl methacrylate is a typical alpha, beta-olefinically
    unsaturated carboxylate monomer.


CLS 508/470
TXT Nitrogen attached indirectly to the
    -C(=O)O- groups by nonionic bonding (e.g., lauryl
    methacrylate-diethylaminomethyl-acryl copolymer, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 469 wherein the -C(=O)O- groups of the polymer
    are attached indirectly to nitrogen by nonionic bonding.


CLS 508/471
TXT Having -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen, bonded  directly to the nitrogen
    (e.g., acrylamide-methyl acrylate copolymer, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 470 wherein the nitrogen is bonded directly to
    -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium).


CLS 508/472
TXT Olefinically unsaturated compound that is not a carboxylic acid ester is an
     additional monomer of the polymer (e.g., ethylene-ethyl acrylate
    copolymer, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 469 wherein an olefinically unsaturated
    compound monomer that is not a carboxylic acid ester forms a copolymer with
    the alpha, beta-olefinically unsaturated carboxylate monomer.

    (1)     Note.  More than two discrete olefinic-ally unsaturated monomers
    may form terpolymers, etc.


CLS 508/473
TXT With hydrocarbon polymer, carboxylic acid, or  carboxylic acid salt:

    Compositions under subclass 469 which contain, in addition to the polymer
    of the alpha, beta olefinically unsaturated carboxylate monomer, a
    carboxylic acid, a carboxylic acid salt, or a hydrocarbon polymer.


CLS 508/474
TXT With non-acrylate organic chalcogen compound:

    Compositions under subclass 469 which contain, in addition to the polymer
    of the alpha, beta-olefinically unsaturated carboxylate monomer, an organic
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) compound that is
    not an acrylate.

    (1)     Note.  An organic chalcogen compound is one wherein chalcogen is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.

    (3)     Note.  An acrylate has the basic structure:

    H2C=CH-C(=O)O-,

            wherein substitution may be made for hydrogen only.


CLS 508/475
TXT Polymer of monocarboxylic acid ester of olefinically unsaturated alcohol
    (e.g., ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 465 wherein the compound having plural -C(=O)O-
    groups is a polymer prepared from a monocarboxylic acid ester of an
    olefinically unsaturated alcohol.

    (1)     Note.  The monomers are normally addition polymerized through the
    olefinic double bonds.

    (2)     Note.  The polymers encompassed herein may be homopolymers or
    copolymers.

    (3)     Note.  Vinyl acetate is a typical monocarboxylic acid ester of an
    olefinically unsaturated alcohol.


CLS 508/476
TXT Nitrogen attached indirectly to the
    -C(=O)O- groups by  nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 465 wherein the -C(=O)O- groups are attached
    indirectly to nitrogen by nonionic bonding.


CLS 508/477
TXT Benzene ring, chalcogen, or -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen, attached
    directly to the nitrogen by nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 476 wherein the nitrogen is attached directly
    to a benzene ring, chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium)
    or -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen, by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:

    HO-N-[CH2-S-CH2-C(=O)OCH3]2


CLS 508/478
TXT Benzene ring attached directly or indirectly to the  -C(=O)O- groups by
    nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 465 wherein the -C(=O)O- groups are attached
    directly or indirectly to a benzene ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/479
TXT The benzene ring is bonded directly to carbon of a -C(=O)O- group:

    Compositions under subclass 478 wherein carbon of a -C(=O)O- group is
    bonded directly to the benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/480
TXT Carbons of plural -C(=O)O- groups are bonded  directly to the same benzene
    ring (e.g., vanadium  salt of oleyl acid phthalate, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 479 wherein the benzene ring is bonded directly
    to carbons of plural -C(=O)O- groups.

    (1)     Note.  Phthalic acid monoesters are typical of the components
    provided for herein.


CLS 508/481
TXT Three or more -C(=O)O- groups attached indirectly  to each other by
    nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 480 wherein more than two -C(=O)O- groups are
    attached indirectly to each other by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/482
TXT Phthalic acid dialkyl ester:

    Compositions under subclass 480 which contain dialkyl esters of phthalic
    acid.

    (1)     Note.  Phthalic acid is o-benzene dicarboxylic acid.


CLS 508/483
TXT The benzene ring is bonded directly to the single  bonded oxygen of a
    -C(=O)O- group:

    Compositions under subclass 478 wherein a -C(=O)O- group is bonded directly
    to the benzene ring through its single bonded oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:

    [CH3C(=O)O-C6H4-]2S


CLS 508/484
TXT Cycloaliphatic ring attached directly to carbon of a -C(=O)O- group:

    Compositions under subclass 465 wherein carbon of a -C(=O)O- group is
    bonded directly to a cycloaliphatic ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/485
TXT Esterified alcohol is polyhydroxy alcohol (e.g.,  pentaerythritol
    tetraalkanoate, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 465 wherein a single bonded oxygen of one of
    the-C(=O)O- groups is the oxygen of an esterified polyhydroxy alcohol.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:

    CH3C(=O)O-(CH2)2-O-(CH2)2-O(O=)CCH3


CLS 508/486
TXT Esterified polyhydroxy alcohol is glycerol (i.e., glycerides):

    Compositions under subclass 485 wherein glycerol is the polyhydroxy alcohol.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is a
    halogenated triglyceride.


CLS 508/487
TXT With organic nitrogen or phosphorus compound:

    Compositions under subclass 486 which contain, in addition to the specified
    carboxylic acid ester, an organic nitrogen compound or an organic
    phosphorus compound.

    (1)     Note.  An organic nitrogen compound is one wherein nitrogen is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.  Similar considerations apply to an organic phosphorus compound.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/488
TXT With carboxylic acid or carboxylic acid salt:

    Compositions under subclass 486 which contain, in addition to the specified
    carboxylic acid ester, a carboxylic acid or a salt of a carboxylic acid.


CLS 508/489
TXT With organic non-carboxylic acid ester oxygen compound or halogen compound:

    Compositions under subclass 486 which contain, in addition to the specified
    carboxylic acid ester, an organic halogen compound or an organic oxygen
    compound that is not a carboxylic acid ester.

    (1)     Note.  An additional carboxylic acid ester may be present that is
    not the specified carboxylic acid ester of subclass 486, provided there is
    also present an organic halogen compound or an organic oxygen compound that
    is not a carboxylic acid ester.

    (2)     Note.  An organic oxygen compound is one wherein oxygen is attached
    directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.  An organic halogen compound  is similarly defined.

    (3)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/490
TXT With hydrocarbon polymer:

    Compositions under subclass 486 which contain, in addition to the specified
    carboxylic acid ester, a polymeric hydrocarbon.


CLS 508/491
TXT Naturally occurring triglyceride (e.g., tallow,  castor oil, corn oil,
    etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 486 which contain a naturally occurring
    triglyceride.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    486,    for naturally occurring triglycerides that have been chemically
    treated.


CLS 508/492
TXT Polycarboxylic acid esterifies polyhydroxy alcohol:

    Compositions under subclass 485 wherein the specified carboxylic acid ester
    is formed by the esterification of a polyhydroxy alcohol with a
    polycarboxylic acid.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:

    C18H35OOCC2H4COOC2H4OOCC2H4COOH


CLS 508/493
TXT With organic non-carboxylic acid ester chalcogen compound, nitrogen
    compound, or halogen compound:

    Compositions under subclass 492 which contain, in addition to the specified
    carboxylic acid ester, an organic nitrogen compound, an organic halogen
    compound, or an organic chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium) compound that is not a carboxylic acid ester.

    (1)     Note.  An additional carboxylic acid ester may be present that is
    not the specified carboxylic acid ester of subclass 492, provided there is
    also present one of an organic nitrogen compound, an organic halogen
    compound, or an organic chalcogen compound that is not a carboxylic acid
    ester.

    (2)     Note.  An organic nitrogen compound is one wherein nitrogen is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.  Organic halogen compounds and organic chalcogen compounds are
    similarly defined.

    (3)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/494
TXT Ether or thioether chalcogen attached indirectly to the -C(=O)O- groups
    (e.g.,  polyethyl-eneglycol esters, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 492 wherein the -C(=O)O- groups are attached
    indirectly to an ether or thioether chalcogen.


CLS 508/495
TXT With organic non-carboxylic acid ester chalcogen compound or nitrogen
    compound:

    Compositions under subclass 485 which contain, in addition to the specified
    carboxylic acid ester, an organic nitrogen compound or an organic chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) compound that is not a
    carboxylic acid ester.

    (1)     Note.  An additional carboxylic acid ester may be present that is
    not the specified carboxylic acid ester of subclass 485, provided there is
    also present one of an organic nitrogen compound or an organic chalcogen
    compound that is not a carboxylic acid ester.

    (2)     Note.  An organic nitrogen compound is one wherein nitrogen is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.  An organic chalcogen compound is similarly defined.

    (3)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/496
TXT Mono-, di-, or polyester of polycarboxylic acid:

    Compositions under subclass 465 wherein the specified carboxylic acid ester
    is a polycarboxylic acid ester which is mono-, di- or polyesterified.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/497
TXT Non-carboxylate chalcogen attached indirectly to the -C(=O)O- groups by
    nonionic bonding (e.g., tartaric acid esters, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 496 wherein the -C(=O)O- groups are attached
    indirectly to a chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium)
    that is not part of a -C(=O)O- group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/498
TXT With carboxylic acid or carboxylic acid salt:

    Compositions under subclass 496 which contain, in addition to the specified
    carboxylic acid ester, a carboxylic acid or a carboxylic acid salt.


CLS 508/499
TXT With hydrocarbon polymer, organic halogen compound, or organic
    non-carboxylic acid ester chalcogen compound:

    Compositions under subclass 496 which contain, in addition to the specified
    carboxylic acid ester, an organic halogen compound, a polymeric hydrocarbon
    or an organic chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium)
    compound that is not a carboxylic acid ester.

    (1)     Note.  An additional carboxylic acid ester may be present that is
    not the specified carboxylic acid ester of subclass 496, provided there is
    also present one of an organic halogen compound, a hydrocarbon polymer, or
    an organic chalcogen compound that is not a carboxylic acid ester.

    (2)     Note.  An organic halogen compound is one wherein halogen is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound. An organic chalcogen compound is similarly defined.

    (3)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/500
TXT Nitrogen attached indirectly to the
    -C(=O)O- group by nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 463 wherein the -C(=O)O- group is attached
    indirectly to nitrogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/501
TXT Chalcogen attached indirectly to the
    -C(=O)O- group by nonionic bonding (e.g., pentaerythritol monooleate, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 463 wherein the -C(=O)O- group is attached
    indirectly to chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) by
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/502
TXT The chalcogen and the carbon of the
    -C(=O)O- group are bonded to a single benzene ring (e.g., salicylic acid
    esters, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 501 wherein a single benzene ring is bonded to
    the chalcogen and to the carbon of the -C(=O)O- group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/503
TXT With carboxylic acid, carboxylic acid salt, or organic  nitrogen compound:

    Compositions under subclass 501 which contain, in addition to the specified
    carboxylic acid ester, a carboxylic acid, a carboxylic acid salt, or an
    organic nitrogen compound.

    (1)     Note.  An organic nitrogen compound is one wherein nitrogen is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/504
TXT Halogen attached indirectly to the
    -C(=O)O- group by  nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 463 wherein the -C(=O)O- group is attached
    indirectly to halogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:

    CCl3-CHCl-CHCl-COOCH3


CLS 508/505
TXT With hydrocarbon polymer or organic non-carboxylic acid ester  oxygen
    compound (e.g., polybutene, dimer carboxylic acids, alcohols, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 463 which contain, in addition to the specified
    carboxylic acid ester, a polymeric hydrocarbon or an organic oxygen
    compound that is not a carboxylic acid ester.

    (1)     Note.  An additional carboxylic acid ester may be present that is
    not the specified carboxylic acid ester of subclass 463, provided that
    there is also present one of a polymeric hydrocarbon or an organic oxygen
    compound that is not a carboxylic acid ester.

    (2)     Note.  An organic oxygen compound is one wherein oxygen is attached
    directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic compound.

    (3)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/506
TXT Plural -C(=O)O- groups attached directly or indirectly to each other by
    nonionic bonding (e.g., alkyl succinic acid, linoleic acid dimer, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 459 wherein an additional -C(=O)O- group is
    attached directly or indirectly to the -C(=O)O- group by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are oxalic acid
    and alkenyl succinic acid.


CLS 508/507
TXT Polymer of alpha, beta-olefinically unsaturated carboxylate monomer (e.g.,
    acrylic acid-butadiene copolymer, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 506 wherein the plural -C(=O)O- groups are in a
    polymer prepared from an alpha, beta-olefinically unsaturated carboxylate
    monomer.

    (1)     Note.  The monomers are normally addition polymerized through the
    olefinic double bond.

    (2)     Note.  The polymers encompassed herein may be homopolymers or
    copolymers.

    (3)     Note.  Acrylic acid is a typical alpha, beta olefinically
    unsaturated carboxylate monomer.


CLS 508/508
TXT Nitrogen attached indirectly to the
    -C(=O)O- groups by  nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 506 wherein the -C(=O)O- groups are attached
    indirectly to nitrogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:

    C10H21-NH-C(=O)-N(CH2COOH)2


CLS 508/509
TXT Halogen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium attached indirectly  to the
    -C(=O)O- groups by nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 506 wherein the -C(=O)O- groups are attached
    indirectly to halogen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/510
TXT Non-carboxylate oxygen attached indirectly to the -C(=O)O-  groups by
    nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 506 wherein the -C(=O)O- groups are attached
    indirectly by nonionic bonding to oxygen that is not part of a -C(=O)O-
    group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/511
TXT Organic nitrogen salt of a polycarboxylic acid, or with  organic nitrogen
    compound:

    Compositions under subclass 506 (1) which contain, in addition to the
    component having the additional -C(=O)O- group, an  organic nitrogen
    compound, or (2) which contain an organic nitrogen compound salt of a
    polycarboxylic acid.

    (1)     Note.  An organic nitrogen compound is one wherein nitrogen is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/512
TXT With organic monocarboxylate or non-carboxylate oxygen compound (e.g.,
    phenols, polyethers, hydroxystearates,  etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 506 which contain, in addition to the component
    having the additional -C(=O)O- group, an organic oxygen compound that
    contains one-C(=O)O- group or no -C(=O)O- group.

    (1)     Note.  An organic oxygen compound is one wherein oxygen is attached
    directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic compound.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/513
TXT Nitrogen attached to the -C(=O)O- group directly or  indirectly by nonionic
    bonding (e.g., carbamic acids, amino  acids, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 459 wherein the -C(=O)O- group is attached
    directly or indirectly to nitrogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are carbamic
    acids and 5-amino salicylic acid.


CLS 508/514
TXT Having additional -C(=O)- bonded directly to the nitrogen  (e.g., N-lauroyl
    sarcosine, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 513 wherein the nitrogen is bonded directly to
    a -C(=O)- group that is not the -C(=O)- of the-C(=O)O- group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:

    C8H17CON(CH3)CH2COOH


CLS 508/515
TXT The additional -C(=O)- is bonded directly to a benzene  ring, or additional
    nitrogen is attached indirectly to  the -C(=O)O- group by nonionic bonding
    (e.g.,  terephthalamates, polyamide acids, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 514 wherein (1) a benzene ring is bonded
    directly to the additional -C(=O)- group, or (2) the -C(=O)O- group is
    attached indirectly to an additional nitrogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are:

    CH3CONHCH2NHCOCH2COONa

    and


CLS 508/516
TXT Chalcogen attached indirectly to the
    -C(=O)O- group by  nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 459 wherein the -C(=O)O- is attached indirectly
    to chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) by nonionic
    bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:

    C2H5COCOONa


CLS 508/517
TXT Plural carbons bonded directly to the chalcogen (e.g.,  ethers, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 516 wherein the chalcogen is bonded directly to
    plural carbons.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:

    CH3CH2OCH2CH2COONa


CLS 508/518
TXT The chalcogen and the carbon of the
    -C(=O)O- group are  bonded to a single  benzene ring (e.g., salicylic acid
    salts, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 516 wherein the carbon of the -C(=O)O- group
    and the chalcogen are bonded to a single benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/519
TXT The chalcogen is in an -OH group bonded to an acyclic carbon (wherein H of
    -OH may be replaced by metal, ammonium, or substituted ammonium; e.g.,
    lithium-12-hydroxy stear-ate, saponified castor oil, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 516 wherein an acyclic carbon is bonded to the
    chalcogen, which is present as part of an -OH group (wherein the H of-OH
    may be replaced by metal, ammonium, or  substituted ammonium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is lithium
    -12-hydroxy stearate.

    (2)     Note.  Saponified castor oil is provided for herein.


CLS 508/520
TXT With ether or alcohol (except glycerin):

    Compositions under subclass 519 which contain, in addition to the -C(=O)O-
    compound, an alcohol (except glycerin) or an ether.

    (1)     Note.  Glycerin may be present in compositions of this subclass,
    provided that there is also present an ether or an alcohol that is not
    glycerin.


CLS 508/521
TXT With organic nitrogen compound (which may be present as  the amine salt of
    the acid), hydrocarbon polymer or  halohydrocarbon polymer:

    Compositions under subclass 519 which contain, in addition to the -C(=O)O-
    compound, a polymeric hydrocarbon, a polymeric halohydrocarbon, or an
    organic nitrogen compound (which may be present as the organic nitrogen
    compound salt of the -C(=O)O- compound).

    (1)     Note.  An organic nitrogen compound is one wherein nitrogen is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/522
TXT With hydrocarbon fatty acid or salt thereof, or complexes of such salt
    mixtures:

    Compositions under subclass 519 which contain, in addition to the -C(=O)O-
    compound, (1) a salt of a hydrocarbon fatty acid or a hydrocarbon fatty
    acid, per se, or (2) a complex formed from the -C(=O)O- compound and the
    hydrocarbon fatty acid salt or hydrocarbon fatty acid, per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    519,    for compositions containing saponified castor oil.


CLS 508/523
TXT Alkaline earth metal, aluminum, or heavy metal salt of the hydroxy
    carboxylic acid:

    Compositions under subclass 519 wherein the -C(=O)O- compound is in the
    form of a salt, the salifying agent being an alkaline earth metal,
    aluminum, or a heavy metal.

    (1)     Note.  Arsenic is considered as a heavy metal.

    (2)     Note.  Heavy metals are those with a specific gravity greater than
    4.0.


CLS 508/524
TXT Halogen attached indirectly to the
    -C(=O)O- group by nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 459 wherein the -C(=O)O- group is attached
    indirectly to halogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is

    Cl3C(CH2)10COOH


CLS 508/525
TXT Benzene ring bonded directly to the carbon of the -C(=O)O- group (e.g.,
    aluminum complex salts, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 459 wherein the carbon of the -C(=O)O- group is
    bonded directly to a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is benzoic
    acid.


CLS 508/526
TXT Benzene ring attached indirectly to the       -C(=O)O- group by nonionic
    bonding (e.g., phenylstearate salts, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 459 wherein the -C(=O)O- group is attached
    indirectly to a benzene ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is the calcium
    salt of phenyl stearic acid.


CLS 508/527
TXT Organic nitrogen salt of a carboxylic acid, or an organic  nitrogen
    compound is present:

    Compositions under subclass 459 which (1) contain, in addition to the
    -C(=O)O- compound, an organic nitrogen compound, or (2) wherein the
    -C(=O)O- compound is in the form of an organic nitrogen compound salt of a
    carboxylic acid.

    (1)     Note.  An organic nitrogen compound is one wherein nitrogen is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/528
TXT Having -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen, attached directly to the nitrogen
    (e.g., amides, polyureas, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 527 wherein the nitrogen is attached directly
    to -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium).


CLS 508/529
TXT Benzene ring bonded directly to the nitrogen:

    Compositions under subclass 527 wherein the nitrogen is bonded directly to
    a benzene ring.


CLS 508/530
TXT The nitrogen is part of an alkanolamine:

    Compositions under subclass 527 wherein the organic nitrogen compound is an
    alkanolamine.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:

    N(CH2CH2OH)3,

            which may be present as the cationic portion of a carboxylic acid
    salt.


CLS 508/531
TXT With phenol or salt thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 459 which contain, in addition to the -C(=O)O-
    compound, a phenol or a salt of a phenol.


CLS 508/532
TXT With ether or alcohol (except glycerin):

    Compositions under subclass 459 which contain, in addition to the -C(=O)O-
    compound, an alcohol (except glycerin) or an ether.

    (1)     Note.  Glycerin may be present in compositions of this subclass,
    provided that there is also present an ether or an alcohol that is not
    glycerin.


CLS 508/533
TXT With organic halogen or sulfur compound:

    Compositions under subclass 459 which contain, in addition to the -C(=O)O-
    compound, an organic halogen or an organic sulfur compound.

    (1)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.

    (2)     Note.  An organic sulfur compound is one wherein sulfur is attached
    directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.  Similar considerations apply to an organic halogen compound.


CLS 508/534
TXT With rubber, hydrocarbon polymer, petroleum resin, or  hydrocarbon wax
    (e.g., polyisobutylene, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 459 which contain, in addition to the -C(=O)O-
    compound, hydrocarbon wax, petroleum resin, polymeric hydrocarbon, or
    rubber.


CLS 508/535
TXT Mixture of salt of carboxylic acid of six or fewer carbons with salt of
    carboxylic acid of more than six carbons, or complexes of such mixtures:

    Compositions under subclass 459 which contain (1) a salt of a carboxylic
    acid of six or fewer carbon atoms, and (2) a salt of a carboxylic acid of
    more than six carbons, or contain a complex formed from (1) and (2).


CLS 508/536
TXT Mixture of carboxylic acid salts having different cations:

    Compositions under subclass 459 which contain carboxylic acid salts of more
    than one cation.


CLS 508/537
TXT One of the cations is aluminum or heavy metal:

    Compositions under subclass 536 wherein heavy metal or aluminum is one of
    the cations.

    (1)     Note.  Arsenic is considered a heavy metal.

    (2)     Note.  Heavy metals are those whose specific gravity is greater
    than 4.0.


CLS 508/538
TXT Naphthenic acid or salt thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 459 which contain a salt of a naphthenic acid
    or a naphthenic acid, per se.


CLS 508/539
TXT Carboxylate salt, with no free acid present:

    Compositions under subclass 459 which contain a salt a carboxylic acid, but
    do not contain a free carboxylic acid.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are alkaline
    earth metal carboxylates.


CLS 508/540
TXT Compound of indeterminate structure, prepared by reacting a compound of
    known structure having halogen attached directly to phosphorus or chalcogen
    by nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 110 which contain a compound of indeterminate
    structure, prepared by reacting a compound of known structure having
    phosphorus or chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium)
    attached directly to halogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is the
    reaction product of a cyclized polymer of a polyolefin with phosphorus
    trichloride.


CLS 508/541
TXT Organic selenium or tellurium compound:

    Compositions under subclass 110 which contain a compound wherein selenium
    or tellurium is attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to
    carbon of an organic compound.

    (1)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are:

    C2H5-Se-C2H5

    and

    C12H25-Te-C12H25


CLS 508/542
TXT Compound of indeterminate structure, prepared by reacting an aldehyde, a
    phenol or phenol salt, and ammonia or substituted ammonia (e.g., reaction
    of formaldehyde, phenol, and amine, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 110 which contain a compound of indeterminate
    structure which is prepared by reacting (1) ammonia or substituted ammonia,
    (2) a phenol or a phenol salt, and (3) an aldehyde.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the compounds of indeterminate structure provided
    for as components herein are the class of compounds known as Mannich bases.
     Many compounds which result from this type reaction, however, are of known
    structure. In this class, subclasses 556+ provide for many compounds of
    this type.


CLS 508/543
TXT Compound of indeterminate structure, prepared by reacting an organic
    nitrogen compound of known structure:

    Compositions under subclass 110 which contain a compound of indeterminate
    structure prepared by the reaction of an organic nitrogen compound of known
    structure.

    (1)     Note.  An organic nitrogen compound is one wherein nitrogen is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.

    (2)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.

    (3)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is the product
    of indeterminate structure resulting from the reaction of a nitrosophenol
    with an alkylene polyamine.


CLS 508/544
TXT An aldehyde is reacted with the organic nitrogen compound:

    Compositions under subclass 543 wherein the organic nitrogen compound is
    reacted with an aldehyde to yield the compound of indeterminate structure.


CLS 508/545
TXT Organic nitrogen compound:

    Compositions under subclass 110 which contain a compound wherein nitrogen
    is attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an
    organic compound.

    (1)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is
    dicyclohexyl amine.


CLS 508/546
TXT Additional nitrogen bonded directly to the nitrogen (e.g., hydrazines,
    semicarbazones, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 545 wherein the nitrogen is bonded directly to
    an additional nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/547
TXT Quaternary ammonium salts or N-oxides:

    Compositions under subclass 545 which contain an amine oxide or a
    quaternary ammonium compound.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are:

    and

    (CH3)3N+CH2CH2OH-OH


CLS 508/548
TXT Oxygen, sulfur, or phosphorus attached directly to the nitrogen by
    nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 545 wherein the nitrogen is attached directly
    to phosphorus or to oxygen or sulfur by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are:


CLS 508/549
TXT Nitro or nitroso bonded directly to carbon:

    Compositions under subclass 548 wherein carbon is bonded directly to a
    nitro or a nitroso group.


CLS 508/550
TXT Carbon double bonded directly to the nitrogen:

    Compositions under subclass 545 wherein the nitrogen is double bonded
    directly to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/551
TXT Having -C(=X)- bonded directly to the nitrogen, wherein X is oxygen or
    sulfur:

    Compositions under subclass 545 wherein
    -C(=X)-, wherein X is oxygen or sulfur,  is bonded directly to the nitrogen.


CLS 508/552
TXT Additional nitrogen bonded directly to the -C(=X)- group (e.g., ureas,
    etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 551 wherein the -C(=X)- group is further bonded
    directly to an additional nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/553
TXT Having -OH substituted benzene ring bonded directly to the -C(=X)- or to
    the nitrogen (wherein H  of -OH may be  replaced by metal, ammonium, or
    substituted ammonium; e.g., salicylamides, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 551 wherein
    either the nitrogen or the -C(=X)- group is bonded directly to a benzene
    ring that is further substituted by -OH (wherein H of -OH may be replaced
    by metal, ammonium or substituted ammonium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/554
TXT Plural nitrogens bonded directly to a single acyclic hydrocarbon chain
    (e.g., amides of ethylene diamine, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 551 wherein a single acyclic hydrocarbon chain
    is bonded directly to more than one nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:

    C7H15C(=O)NHCH2CH2NHCH2CH2NHC(=O)C7H15


CLS 508/555
TXT Additional oxygen or sulfur attached indirectly to the nitrogen by acyclic
    nonionic bonding (e.g., oxamides, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 551 wherein the nitrogen is attached indirectly
    to an additional oxygen or sulfur by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:

    HOCH2CH2CH2CONHC11H23


CLS 508/556
TXT Nitrogen attached indirectly to the nitrogen by nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 545 wherein the nitrogen is attached indirectly
    to an additional nitrogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/557
TXT Plural nitrogens bonded directly to a single benzene ring:

    Compositions under subclass 556 wherein a single benzene ring is bonded
    directly to plural nitrogens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/558
TXT Plural nitrogens bonded directly to a single acyclic hydrocarbon chain:

    Compositions under subclass 556 wherein a single acyclic hydrocarbon chain
    is bonded directly to plural nitrogens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/559
TXT Oxygen or sulfur attached indirectly to the nitrogen by acyclic nonionic
    bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 558 wherein the nitrogen is attached indirectly
    to oxygen or sulfur by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:

    NH2-CH2CH2-NH-CH2CH2-OH


CLS 508/560
TXT Oxygen or sulfur bonded directly to a benzene ring (e.g., aniline
    disulfide, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 556 wherein a benzene ring is bonded directly
    to oxygen or sulfur.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/561
TXT Oxygen or sulfur attached indirectly to the nitrogen by nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 545 wherein the nitrogen is attached indirectly
    by nonionic bonding to oxygen or sulfur.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/562
TXT The oxygen or sulfur is attached indirectly to the nitrogen by acyclic
    nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 561 wherein the nitrogen is attached indirectly
    to the oxygen or sulfur by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:

    C2H5-S-CH2CHOHCH2-NHCH3


CLS 508/563
TXT Benzene ring bonded directly to the nitrogen:

    Compositions under subclass 545 wherein the nitrogen is bonded directly to
    a benzene ring.


CLS 508/564
TXT Organic phosphorus compound:

    Compositions under subclass 110 which contain a compound wherein phosphorus
    is attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an
    organic compound.

    (1)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/565
TXT Compound of indeterminate structure, prepared by reacting an organic sulfur
    compound of known structure:

    Compositions under subclass 110 which contain a compound of indeterminate
    structure prepared by reacting a compound of known structure which has
    sulfur attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an
    organic compound.

    (1)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/566
TXT Compound of indeterminate structure, prepared by the reaction of a phenol,
    an aldehyde, and at least one of carbon disulfide, metal sulfide, or
    ammonium sulfide:

    Compositions under subclass 110 which contain a compound of indeterminate
    structure prepared by reacting (1) one of carbon disulfide, metal sulfide,
    or ammonium sulfide, (2) an aldehyde, and (3) a phenol.


CLS 508/567
TXT Organic sulfur compound (e.g., mercaptans, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 110 which contain a compound wherein sulfur is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.

    (1)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/568
TXT Sulfur multiple bonded to another, different, atom (e.g., thioketones,
    sulfones, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 567 wherein another, different, atom is
    multiple bonded to sulfur.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are:

    CH3S(=O)CH2OH

    and

    t-Bu-S-S(=O)-t-Bu


CLS 508/569
TXT Sulfides (i.e., plural carbons bonded directly to a single sulfur atom or
    sulfur chain):

    Compositions under subclass 567 wherein the sulfur atom, or a chain of
    sulfur atoms of which the sulfur atom is a part, is bonded directly to
    plural carbons.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are:


CLS 508/570
TXT Halogen, oxygen, or additional sulfur attached indirectly to the sulfur
    atom or sulfur chain by acyclic nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 569 wherein the sulfur atom or sulfur chain is
    attached indirectly by acyclic nonionic bonding to halogen, oxygen, or
    additional sulfur.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:

    C4H9CH(SC4H9)2


CLS 508/571
TXT Benzene ring attached indirectly to the sulfur atom or sulfur chain by
    acyclic nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 569 wherein the sulfur atom or sulfur chain is
    attached indirectly by acyclic nonionic bonding to a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:

    C6H5CH2-S-S-CH2C6H5


CLS 508/572
TXT Having plural -OH substituted benzene rings bonded directly to the sulfur
    atom or sulfur chain wherein H of -OH may be replaced by metal or ammonium;
    (e.g., sulfurized calcium alkylphenolates, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 569 wherein the sulfur atom or sulfur chain is
    bonded directly to plural benzene rings which are substituted by -OH
    (wherein H of -OH may be replaced by metal or ammonium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/573
TXT Halogen, a ring, carbonyl, or additional -OH bonded directly to one of the
    benzene rings:

    Compositions under subclass 572 wherein one of the benzene rings is bonded
    directly to halogen, a ring, carbonyl, or an additional -OH.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/574
TXT Overbased or carbonated (e.g., overbased sulfurized phenates, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 572 wherein the organic sulfur compound is
    overbased or carbonated.

    (1)     Note.  An overbased compound herein is one in which an amount of
    metal (e.g., Mg, Ca, Ba, Sr) is present which is greater than the
    stoichiometric amount of metal which would be present if the phenolic
    sulfur compound were completely neutralized.

    (2)     Note.  A carbonated compound herein is the complex resulting from
    the reaction of carbon dioxide with metal phenate.


CLS 508/575
TXT Compound of indeterminate structure, prepared by  reacting an organic
    oxygen compound of known structure:

    Compositions under subclass 110 which contain a compound of indeterminate
    structure, prepared by the reaction of an organic oxygen compound of known
    structure.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is the product
    of indeterminate structure prepared by the reaction of acetylacetone with
    stannic halide.

    (2)     Note.  An organic oxygen compound is one wherein oxygen is attached
    directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic compound.

    (3)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.


CLS 508/576
TXT The organic oxygen compound of known structure is a carboxylic acid halide:

    Compositions under subclass 575 wherein a carboxylic acid halide is the
    organic oxygen compound of known structure.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is the
    condensation product of sebacic acid dihalide and a petroleum fraction.


CLS 508/577
TXT Organic oxygen compound:

    Compositions under subclass 110 which contain a compound wherein oxygen is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.

    (1)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:





CLS 508/578
TXT Carbocyclic ring bonded directly to the carbon of a carbonyl group (e.g.,
    phenyl ketones, anthraquinones, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 577 wherein a carbonyl group, -C(=O)-, is
    bonded directly to a carbocyclic ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are:


CLS 508/579
TXT Ethers:

    Compositions under subclass 577 wherein an oxygen atom is bonded directly
    to two carbon atoms, i.e., is an ether oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein are
    polyoxyalkylene glycol.


CLS 508/580
TXT Ring bonded directly to the ether oxygen:

    Compositions under subclass 579 wherein the ether oxygen is bonded directly
    to a ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/581
TXT Two rings bonded directly to the ether oxygen:

    Compositions under subclass 580 wherein the ether oxygen is bonded directly
    to two rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/582
TXT Halogen attached indirectly to the ether oxygen by nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 579 wherein the ether oxygen is attached
    indirectly to halogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:

    CF3-O(CF2CF2O)nCF3


CLS 508/583
TXT Having -OH bonded directly to carbon (wherein H of -OH may be replaced by
    metal or ammonium):

    Compositions under subclass 577 wherein carbon is bonded directly to -OH (
    wherein H of -OH may be replaced by metal or ammonium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is isopropanol.


CLS 508/584
TXT Benzene ring bonded directly to the -OH group (e.g., beta-naphthol, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 583 wherein the -OH group is bonded directly to
    a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of components provided for herein are:


CLS 508/585
TXT Plural benzene rings bonded to each other, to the same acyclic carbon or to
    the same acyclic carbon chain (e.g., phenol-aldehyde condensates, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 584 wherein plural benzene rings are bonded to
    the same acyclic carbon, to the same acyclic carbon chain, or to each other.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/586
TXT The -OH group is in salt form:

    Compositions under subclass 584 wherein the -OH group is salified (i.e.,
    wherein H of -OH has been replaced by metal or ammonium).


CLS 508/587
TXT Halogen or additional -OH attached directly or indirectly to the benzene
    ring by nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 584 wherein additional -OH or halogen is
    attached directly or indirectly to the benzene ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:


CLS 508/588
TXT Organic halogen compound:

    Compositions under subclass 110 which contain a compound wherein halogen is
    attached directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to carbon of an organic
    compound.

    (1)     Note.  See (3) Note in the class definition for the definition of
    an organic compound.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is
    tetrachlorobenzene.


CLS 508/589
TXT Halogenated acyclic compound or halogenated petroleum fraction:

    Compositions under subclass 588 wherein an acyclic compound is halogenated
    or a petroleum fraction is halogenated.


CLS 508/590
TXT Fluorinated acyclic compound or fluorinated petroleum fraction (e.g.,
    trifluorochloroethyl-ene telomer, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 589 wherein an acyclic compound is fluorinated
    or a petroleum fraction is fluorinated.


CLS 508/591
TXT Solid hydrocarbon polymer:

    Compositions under subclass 110 which contain a polymeric component which
    is both solid and hydrocarbonaceous.

    (1)     Note.  The polymers provided for herein can be homopolymeric or
    copolymeric.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a component provided for herein is:
    polycyclopentadiene.

    (3)     Note.  Hydrocarbon polymers prepared by addition polymerization of
    olefinic hydrocarbon monomers will be presumed to be solid unless otherwise
    stated.


CLS 510/
TTL CLEANING COMPOSITIONS FOR SOLID SURFACES, AUXILIARY COMPOSITIONS THEREFOR,
    OR PROCESSES OF PREPARING THE COMPOSITIONS

CLS 510/
TXT This class is an integral part of Class 252, as shown by the position of
    the box identifying this class in the Class 252 schedule. As such, this
    class is subject to the Class Definition and Notes of Class 252, except as
    noted in the box.

    CONTENTS

    I.      STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    II.     CLASSIFICATION LINES WITH OTHER CLASSES

    A.      General class lines

    B.      Lines with other classes

    III.    SEARCH NOTES

    IV.     GLOSSARY

    V.      CLASSIFICATION GUIDELINES FOR THIS CLASS

    VI.     SUBCLASSES

    I.      STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    This class includes the following subject matter, not provided for
    elsewhere, when a utility set forth below is either (a) claimed or (b)
    solely disclosed.

    A.      CLEANING COMPOSITIONS FOR SOLID SURFACES which are specialized and
    designed for, or peculiar to, use in cleaning or removing foreign matter
    from solid surfaces.

    B.      AUXILIARY COMPOSITIONS, PER SE, for perfecting the cleaning
    compositions of this class or for perfecting a cleaning process (e.g.
    rinse- or dryer-added fabric softener compositions, etc.) for which there
    is no provision elsewhere.

    C.      COMPOSITIONS OF THIS CLASS DEFINED IN TERMS OF SPECIFIC PHYSICAL
    STRUCTURE (E.G., TABLET, COATED PARTICLE, ETC.) - The lines generally
    prevailing between the composition classes and the article classes are
    applicable to Class 510 unless otherwise indicated, with the exception that
    Class 510 provides for a composition, per se, defined in terms of specific
    structure, having a utility for Class 510.

    D.      PACKAGES of compositions of this class, or other articles which
    releasably enclose or support such compositions, for which there is no
    provision elsewhere.

    E.      PROCESSES OF PREPARING subject matter of A - D not provided for
    elsewhere.

    II.     CLASSIFICATION LINES WITH OTHER CLASSES

    A.      General class lines

    1.      Compound Classes

    a.      Where a patent claims a Class 510 utility in nominal terminology
    only (e.g., "A process of producing a biodegradable detergent compound")
    and there are no claims to a Class 510 method of use or a true mixture, the
    original has been placed with the compound claimed.

    b.      Where a patent claims a composition wherein, in addition to a
    compound, (i) another ingredient is recited, however broadly, or (ii)
    proportions are recited, the original has been placed in Class 510. Some
    examples of claims using broad terminology and included herewith are: "A
    cleaning composition comprising a surfactant of the formula," "with a
    detergent builder," "A cleaning composition comprising 1 to 5% of compound
    X," etc.

    2.      Composition Classes

            The following general lines exist between Class 510 and the other
    composition classes or with classes containing patents wherein the claims
    recite a composition limited to an art use provided for in that class.

    a.      Compositions which are disclosed as having a plurality of uses,
    properties, or functions provided for in different main classes and only a
    single use, property, or function is claimed, are placed in the composition
    providing for such claimed use, property, or function and cross-referenced
    to other classes for disclosed uses, properties, or functions when
    desirable.

    b.      A list of superiority of some composition classes appears in the
    main class definition of Class 252, Compositions, in the (5) Note. This
    note in Class 252 explains classification of a generic composition with
    several disclosed uses.

            This superiority list is not intended as a complete list and will
    be expanded or added to as the relationships between other classes
    containing compositions and the above listed classes are determined.

    3.      Process of Use Classes

            The following general lines exist between Class 510 and other
    classes providing for cleaning processes or containing patents wherein the
    claims recite a process of cleaning a solid substrate as provided for in
    that class.

    a.      Where a patent claims a cleaning composition and a nominal process
    of using the composition, the original has been placed with the claimed
    composition. Some examples of nominal terminology are: "applying the
    composition and removing it [by rinsing, wiping, etc.]," "immersing the
    article to be cleaned in a cleaning bath containing the composition," etc.

    b.      Where a cleaning composition, per se, is not claimed or where the
    claimed cleaning process involves significant process steps in using a
    claimed composition, the original has been placed with the claimed cleaning
    process. Examples of significant process steps include the use of a
    cleaning bath or medium at a specified non-ambient temperature, specified
    non-standard pretreatment and/or after-treatment step in addition to
    contact with the cleaning composition, etc.

    B.      Lines with related classes

    CLASS 8

    1.      Class 8, BLEACHING AND DYEING; FLUID TREATMENT AND CHEMICAL
    MODIFICATION OF TEXTILES AND FIBERS, provides for processes of bleaching,
    dyeing, cleaning, and laundering of textile materials. Class 8 also
    provides for optical brightener or blueing agent compositions.

    2.      Class 510 provides for compositions for cleaning or laundering
    textile materials, and for any accompanying method of use claims reciting
    the mere application of claimed composition.

    3.      Class 510 provides for cleaning compositions comprising a bleach,
    optical brightener, or blueing agent as a perfecting component.

    CLASS 15

    1.      Class 15, BRUSHING, SCRUBBING, AND GENERAL CLEANING, provides for
    cleaning implements coated or impregnated with a cleaning composition.

    2.      Class 510 provides for cleaning compositions enclosed in or
    supported on an inactive material which merely serves to dispense a
    required amount of the cleaning composition.

    CLASS 51

    1.      Class 51, ABRASIVE TOOL MAKING PROCESS, MATERIAL, OR COMPOSITION,
    provides for abrasive compositions, per se.

    2.      Class 510 provides for cleaning compositions which include an
    abrasive material as a perfecting component.

    CLASS 106

    1.      Class 106, COMPOSITIONS: COATING OR PLASTIC, provides for coating
    compositions which form a film of polish on the base or prevent the
    formation of fog, frost, or ice thereon.

    2.      Class 510 provides for cleaning compositions which include a
    component which deposits a film on the cleaned surface to provide a
    polished appearance or to prevent the formation of fog, frost, or ice on
    the surface.

    CLASS 134

    1.      Class 134, CLEANING AND LIQUID CONTACT WITH SOLIDS, provides for
    processes of cleaning solid surfaces.

    2.      Class 510 provides for compositions for cleaning solid surfaces, as
    well as any accompanying method of use claims reciting the mere application
    of the claimed composition.

    CLASS 206

    1.      Class 206, SPECIAL RECEPTACLE OR PACKAGE, provides for packages or
    containers wherein the material for the container or content is specified.

    2.      Class 510 provides for cleaning compositions or auxiliary
    compositions therefor which are enclosed in a defined package or container.

    CLASS 252

    1.      Class 252, COMPOSITIONS, provides for compositions which form a
    permanent finish on textile materials and for compositions which enhance
    the appearance of consumer textile goods.

            Class 510 takes textile cleaning and auxiliary compositions
    therefor having a fabric softening or antistatic component or a soil
    release or antisoiling component which is removed by subsequent laundering.

    2.      Class 252 provides for dust suppressing compositions for bulk
    materials and for compositions for coating or impregnating a substrate used
    for collecting fine solid particles by adherence.

            Class 510 takes compositions which bind or suppress dust in the
    course of a floor sweeping operation.

    3.      Class 252 provides for water-softening or water-purifying or
    scale-inhibiting agents and for optical brightening compositions.

            Class 510 takes cleaning compositions for solid surfaces which
    include a water-softening, scale-inhibiting or optical-brightening
    component, as well as for auxiliary compositions specifically designed for
    use with cleaning compositions which include a water-softening or
    scale-inhibiting component (e.g., detergent builder compositions, etc.) or
    an optical brightener (e.g., textile softening or antistatic compositions
    containing an optical brightener, etc.).

    4.      Class 252 provides for oxidative or reductive bleachant, oxidant,
    reductant, and deoxidant compositions.

            Class 510 takes cleaning compositions for solid surfaces and
    auxiliary compositions therefor which include a chemical bleach, oxidant,
    reductant, or deoxidant component.

    5.      Class 252 provides for foam suppressant compositions and for
    wetting, emulsifying, or colloid dispersing or stabilizing surfactant
    compositions.

            Class 510 takes cleaning compositions comprising a foam suppressing
    component or a surfactant component, as well as auxiliary surfactant
    compositions designed for use as a component in a cleaning composition.

    6.      Class 252 provides for solvent compositions and mere soap
    compositions having a general utility.

            Class 510 takes solvent containing compositions adapted for
    cleaning a solid surface as well as a cleaning composition which comprises
    soap as a component or consists of soap in a physical form suitable for
    direct use in cleaning (e.g., liquid, flake, bar, etc.).

    CLASS 424

    1.      Class 424, DRUG, BIO-AFFECTING AND BODY TREATING COMPOSITIONS,
    provides for biocidal compositions, including disinfectants or antiseptic
    compositions, per se.

            Class 510 takes cleaning compositions and auxiliary compositions
    therefor protected against biological attack by a Class 424 composition, or
    containing a biocidal or antiseptic component as a perfecting ingredient.

    2.      Class 424 provides for dentifrice compositions for oral use.

            Class 510 takes compositions for cleaning removable dentures.

    3.      Class 424 provides for shaving preparations, for medicated (e.g.,
    antidandruff, etc.) hair shampoo compositions, and for hair conditioning,
    antifly, or softening compositions, per se (e.g., creme rinse, etc.).

            Class 510 takes nonmedicated hair shampoo compositions, as well as
    shampoos comprising a conditioner, antistatic agent, or softener as a
    perfecting component which restores any natural moisture or suppleness lost
    in the cleaning process.

    4.      Class 424 provides for medicated or emollient skin treating
    compositions, per se (e.g., moisturizing cream, lotion, etc.).

            Class 510 takes nonmedicated compositions for cleansing human skin,
    as well as such cleansing compositions comprising an emollient as a
    perfecting component which restores any natural moisture and oils lost in
    the cleansing process.

    CLASS 435

    1.      Class 435, CHEMISTRY: MOLECULAR BIOLOGY AND MICROBIOLOGY, provides
    for enzymes, per se, which are not more specifically provided for
    elsewhere, and stabilized, immobilized, granular, or free-flowing enzyme
    compositions, unless a Class 510 utility is recited in the claim or is the
    sole utility disclosed. Class 435 also takes processes of cleaning using an
    enzyme and processes of preparing the above compositions.

    2.      Class 510 takes enzyme compositions which are claimed or solely
    disclosed for use as a perfecting component in a cleaning composition, as
    well as cleaning compositions containing enzymes.

    CLASS 514

    Class 514, DRUG, BIO-AFFECTING AND BODY TREATING COMPOSITIONS, is an
    integral part of Class 424 (after subclass 197.1) and follows the schedule
    hierarchy, retaining all pertinent definitions and class lines of Class 424.

    III.    SEARCH NOTES

    The following classes include art relating to this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 137+ for processes of cleaning or
    laundering textile materials; subclass 648 for optical brightening or
    blueing compositions for textile materials, per se; and subclass 94.16 for
    hair removing compositions and processes. See the main class definition for
    the compositions classified therein.

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, for dust cloths, mops,
    or other cleaning devices which include detergents.

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclass 640 for a composition which
    in the presence of burning solid fuel serves to prevent or remove deposits
    (e.g., soot, etc.) from the walls of combustion apparatus.

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, for a
    composition for grinding, polishing, or abrading.

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, for washing or cleaning
    processes which include use of detergents or other cleaning compositions
    included in Class 510.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 8.61+ for durable finishes for textile
    materials, including antistatic and textile softening compositions;
    subclasses 8.81+ for textile processing aid compositions, such as
    lubricants; subclass 8.91 for consumer-goods appearance enhancing
    compositions, such as antistatic sprays; subclasses 79.1+ for etching or
    brightening acidic or alkaline compositions; subclasses 88.1 and 88.2 for
    dust or particle adherent compositions; subclasses 175+ for water softening
    or purifying or scale-inhibiting agents which are not specifically adapted
    for use as detergent builders; subclasses 181.1+ for getter and gas or
    vapor generating compositions for electric lamps, electric space discharge
    devices, and other evacuated or gas or vapor filled containers; subclass
    321 for defoaming compositions; subclasses 351+ for mere wetting or colloid
    stabilizing agents; and subclass 367.1 for mere soap compositions not
    adapted for direct use as cleaning agents.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly subclasses 196+, 261+, and 268+, for a coating implement with
    material supply, used for cleaning.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 49+
    for an oral dentifrice, subclasses 70.1+ for a live hair treating
    composition other than a shampoo (e.g., a hair conditioner, etc.),
    subclasses 43+ and 73 for a shaving preparation, and subclass 78.04 for an
    ophthalmic preparation (e.g., for preserving a contact lens).

    514,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, for a medicated
    shampoo composition.

    IV.     GLOSSARY

    Note. The meaning to be given the various "art" terms appearing in this
    class, which have not been included in the GLOSSARY below, is the same as
    that generally accepted or in common usage. However, certain terms employed
    in this class (510), which are included below, have been assigned
    definitions tailored to meet the needs of this class and therefore these
    may be more restricted or less limited or even altogether different from
    those in common usage. Their use in any particular subclass is to be
    consistent with the meaning in this Glossary. See the glossary in Class 532
    for definitions of other chemical terms used in this Class.

    ANIONIC SUBSTITUENT

    Denotes that portion of an organic compound which is negatively charged in
    an aqueous solution at a neutral pH (i.e., pH=7) and is attached to the
    portion of the molecule of higher molecular weight by covalent bonding.
    Examples of common anionic substituents include carboxyl, sulfate, or
    phosphate monoester or sulfonate groups, as well as their salts, including
    betaines.

    CARBOXAMIDO

    Denotes a substituent wherein a trivalent nitrogen atom is single bonded to
    a carbonyl (-C(=O)-) group.

    CARBOXYL (Carboxylic Acid)

    Denotes the presence of a -C(=O)OH group.

    CATIONIC SUBSTITUENT

    Denotes that portion of an organic compound which is positively charged in
    an aqueous solution at a neutral pH (i.e., pH=7) and is attached to the
    portion of the molecule of higher molecular weight by covalent bonding.
    Examples of common cationic substituents include primary, secondary, or
    tertiary amino groups, as well as quaternary ammonium substituents.

    CORROSION (See METAL CORROSION)

    CREAM

    Denotes a thick, usually opaque, emulsion having little or no tendency to
    flow.

    GEL

    Denotes a colloidal solution of liquid in solid having a thick consistency
    with little or no tendency to flow.

    HETEROCYCLIC

    Denotes an organic compound wherein one or more carbon atoms are covalently
    bonded in a ring system with at least one hetero atom of oxygen, sulfur,
    nitrogen, selenium, or tellurium and having no other atoms in the ring.

    HIGHER FATTY ACID

    Denotes a monocarboxylic acid having an acyclic chain of at least seven
    uninterrupted carbons attached directly to the carboxyl carbon by covalent
    bonding.

    LIGNIN

    Denotes a material usually derived during paper pulp manufacture by
    separation of the cellulose from wood. Lignin is considered to be the
    binder for cellulose in wood. Lignin includes crude mixtures of lignose,
    lignone, and lignin. Lignin, per se, is a complex structure having some
    aromatic rings and phenolic groups.

    LIQUID

    Denotes a shapeless, fluid composition of high incompressibility. Included
    herein are pumpable or flowable slurries or suspensions.

    MACROSCOPIC

    Denotes a shape discernible by the naked eye.

    METAL CORROSION

    For purposes of this class, the term denotes impairment or deterioration of
    a metal surface, such as erosion, embrittlement, tarnishing, or
    discoloration, usually by chemical action.

    NONIONIC COMPOUND

    Denotes an organic compound devoid of cationic or anionic substituents and
    thus lacking any ionic charge at a neutral pH (i.e., pH=7).

    ORGANIC

    Denotes compounds containing carbon which are further characterized by the
    presence in a molecule thereof of two carbon atoms bonded together, or one
    atom of carbon bonded to at least one atom of hydrogen or halogen, or one
    atom of carbon bonded to at least one atom of nitrogen by a single or
    double bond.

    (1)     Note. Compounds included within this definition, but not considered
    organic for purposes of this class are hydrocyanic acid, cyanogen,
    isocyanic acid, cyanamide, dicyanamide, cyanogen halides, isothiocyanic
    acid, fulminic acid, and metal carbides.

    SOAP

    Denotes a water-soluble alkali metal (Li, Na, K, Rb, or Cs), ammonium or
    organic base salt (e.g., phosphonium, substituted ammonium, etc.) of an
    unsubstituted or hydroxy-substituted, saturated or unsaturated, higher
    fatty acid, or of rosin (abietic) acid, or of mixtures of any of these
    acids.

    SULFOXY

    Denotes a substituent having at least one oxygen atom double bonded to a
    tetravalent or hexavalent sulfur atom.

    SURFACE-ACTIVE AGENT (Surfactant)

    Denotes an organic compound which alters (usually reduces) the surface
    tension of a liquid, thus facilitating cleaning. Surface-active agents are
    commonly referred to as surfactants, emulsifiers, wetting agents, or simply
    detergents, as distinct from detergent compositions which include
    additional components, such as detergency builders or other cleaning
    auxiliaries. A surfactant molecule contains a hydrophobic (water-repelling)
    portion which is frequently an alkyl radical having a straight chain of
    eight or more carbons, and a hydrophilic (water-attracting) portion. For
    purposes of this class, the broad categories of surfactants are based on
    the nature of the hydrophilic portion of the molecule.


    (A)     An anionic (anion-active) surfactant, referred to in the schedule
    as "anionically substituted," includes a hydrophilic portion which is most
    commonly a water-soluble salt of a carboxylic or sulfonic acid, or of a
    long-chain alcohol ester of sulfuric, phosphoric, or phosphonic acid (e.g.,
    sodium higher alkyl sulfonate, etc.).

    (B)     A cationic (cation-active) surfactant includes a hydrophilic
    portion which is a cation (i.e., positively charged ion), such as an
    ammonium or quaternary ammonium salt, having a long-chain alkyl substituent
    (e.g., higher-alkyl quaternary ammonium salts, etc.).

    (C)     A nonionic surfactant includes a hydrophilic portion which commonly
    is a poly(ethylene oxide) moiety (i.e., polyether chain) attached to a
    hydrophobic portion which may be nonpolar or have a lower degree of
    polarity than the hydrophilic part, such as poly(propylene oxide), higher
    alkyl, etc.

    (D)     A zwitterionic, amphoteric, or ampholytic surfactant includes both
    an anionic and a cationic portion connected by a covalent bond, usually
    indirect (e.g., betaines, amino acids, etc.).

    (E)     Semipolar nonionic surfactants include water-soluble amine and
    phosphine oxides and sulfoxides.

    (F)     Soap, for purposes of this class, is an alkali metal, ammonium or
    organic base salt of an unsubstituted or hydroxy-substituted, saturated or
    unsaturated higher fatty acid, or of rosin (abietic) acid, or of mixtures
    of any of these acids. These salts are water-soluble and are considered to
    be anionic surfactants.

    V.      CLASSIFICATION GUIDELINES FOR THIS CLASS

    A.      In this class, the classification of a composition is based on its
    primary utility as (a) a cleaning agent or (b) an auxiliary agent for
    perfecting a cleaning composition or a given stage of a cleaning process.

    1.      Within category (a), above, the classification is based on (i) the
    claimed or solely disclosed utility for cleaning a specific substrate or
    removing a specific contaminant; or, for all-purpose cleaning compositions,
    or (ii) the presence of a specified perfecting component; (iii) the
    physical form of the claimed composition; (iv) the particular process of
    preparing the composition; and (v) the chemical nature of the components of
    the composition.

    2.      Within category (b) of section A, above, the classification is
    based on (i) the claimed or solely disclosed utility as a perfecting
    component for a cleaning composition or as an auxiliary composition for
    cleaning, with further placement according to criteria (ii), (iii), and (v)
    of section A, (i),  above.

    3.      Within category (v) of section A, (i), above, the chemical
    structure of the components of a composition disclosed as having a utility
    set forth in section A, (i), above, is used as the primary basis of
    classification. Processes of using compositions or compounds, per se, and
    processes of making the compositions, not provided for elsewhere, are
    classified in the first appearing subclass providing for the particular
    component being employed or prepared.

    B.      The rule followed in classifying a patent having separate claims to
    several species of a given ingredient which fall into different subclasses
    is that the patent is placed as an original in the first appearing subclass
    providing for the claimed subject matter and cross-referenced to the
    appropriate lower subclass(es). Where there are one or more indents under
    the generic subclass and one of the claimed species is not provided for
    specifically by any of these indents the patent is placed as original in
    the generic subclass, since this is the first appearing subclass providing
    for said individually claimed species. In classifying a patent containing
    Markush type claims (e.g., "group consisting of X and Y") and no species
    claims, the original patent is placed in the first appearing subclass
    providing for the species (members) in the Markush group. If, in addition
    to the Markush group, there are species claims, the first cited rule,
    governing a patent having separate species claims, is followed. The same
    rules apply to subject matter within the meaning of categories (i)-(iv) of
    section A, 1, above, by analogy with the "species" concept.

    C.      Patents claiming subject matter coming within the Special
    Subclasses 101 through 107 have been classified on the basis of the claimed
    or disclosed function and the chemical structure of the active component
    (i.e., fragrance or aroma enhancer), and include compositions which
    otherwise would fall within subclasses 108 through 537 as originals.

    D.      In determining the utility of a composition recited in broad terms
    (e.g., "a cleaning composition comprising," "a fabric softener composition
    comprising," etc.), use is made of the specific utility recited in any
    nominal method-of-use claims to determine placement of the patent within
    the categories of (a)(i) or (b)(i) of section A, above (e.g., the
    recitation of "a process of defluxing a printed circuit" or "a process of
    softening a fabric in the rinse cycle of an automatic washer" would place
    each patent in subclasses 175+ and 521+, respectively).

    E.      Mere presence of a surfactant component is insufficient for
    placement of a patent in subclasses 108 through 512 of this class, since
    surface-active agents are used in minor amounts as emulsifying, suspending,
    dispersing, etc., agents in many other compositions, such as bleaches,
    fabric softeners, etc. The placement of such a patent is determined by the
    ultimate utility of the claimed composition.

    F.      A patent claiming a cleaning or auxiliary composition without
    specifying its physical form has been placed as an original in the first
    subclass providing for the claimed composition as if a structureless powder
    were recited in the claims, and crossed into appropriate subclasses
    providing for any other disclosed or exemplified physical forms (e.g.,
    liquid, tablet, etc.).


CLS 510/100
TXT WITH SAFETY OR INDICATOR FEATURE:

    Compositions under the class definition which include a feature inherent in
    the composition, per se, rather than in the packaging, alerting the user to
    the presence of a hazardous material or to completion of a cleaning process
    or stage thereof.

    (1)     Note. Included among such features are, for example, color or odor
    change responsive to pH, concentration, presence of toxic materials,
    completion of the cleaning process, etc.


CLS 510/101
TXT WITH OXYGEN, HALOGEN, SULFUR, OR NITROGEN CONTAINING OR ETHYLENICALLY
    UNSATURATED COMPONENT WHICH IS A FRAGRANCE OR AROMA ENHANCER (E.G.,
    PERFUME, ORGANOLEPTIC MATERIAL, ETC.):

    Compositions under the class definition which include a specific component
    which functions as a fragrance or aroma enhancer and contains oxygen,
    halogen, sulfur, nitrogen, or ethylenic unsaturation.

    (1)     Note. Compositions merely reciting a perfume or odorant component,
    without specifying any of its chemical constituents, are excluded from this
    and indented subclasses for placement as originals.

    (2)     Note. This subclass is generic to both cleaning and auxiliary
    compositions for cleaning which contain a specific fragrance or aroma
    enhancing component.


CLS 510/102
TXT Ring in the component (e.g., benzene, 5-membered ring, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 101 wherein the specific fragrance or aroma
    enhancer component includes a ring.


CLS 510/103
TXT Heterocyclic ring:

    Compositions under subclass 102 wherein the ring includes chalcogen or
    nitrogen atom(s) in addition to carbon.

    (1)     Note. The chalcogen atoms completing the heterocyclic ring are
    selected from O, S, Se, and Te.


CLS 510/104
TXT Polycyclo ring system (e.g., camphor, cedar oil, borneol, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 102 wherein the specific fragrance or aroma
    enhancer component includes a system of two or more rings wherein two of
    the rings share at least two carbon atoms with each other.

    (1)     Note. Examples of such systems are bridged, orthofused, etc.,
    polycyclo ring systems.


CLS 510/105
TXT Acyclic carbonyl (-C(=O)-) attached directly or indirectly to the system by
    nonionic bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 104 wherein the polycyclo ring system includes
    an acyclic carbonyl containing substituent which is attached to the system
    by direct or indirect nonionic bonding.


CLS 510/106
TXT Six-membered alicyclic ring (e.g., menthol, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 102 wherein the ring in the specific component
    is alicyclic and contains six carbons.


CLS 510/107
TXT Carboxylic or thiocarboxylic ester function in the component:

    Compositions under subclass 101 wherein the specific fragrance or aroma
    enhancer component carries a carboxylic or thiocarboxylic ester substituent.

    (1)     Note. A thiocarboxylic ester function is an analog of a carboxylic
    ester wherein at least one oxygen of the -C(=O)O- group is replaced by
    sulfur.


CLS 510/108
TXT CLEANING COMPOSITIONS OR PROCESSES OF PREPARING (E.G., SODIUM BISULFATE
    COMPONENT, ETC.)

    Compositions under the class definition specialized and designed for, or
    peculiar to, use in cleaning or removing foreign matter from solid
    surfaces, or processes of preparing such compositions.

    (1)     Note. This is a generic subclass for all cleaning compositions,
    whether of all-purpose utility or tailor-made for cleaning a particular
    substrate or removing a single contaminant, as well as for processes of
    preparing the compositions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    513+,   for auxiliary compositions for cleaning.


CLS 510/109
TXT For cleaning a specific substrate or removing a specific contaminant (e.g.,
    for smoker's pipe, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 108 specialized and designed for, or peculiar
    to, cleaning a specifically identified substrate or removing a specifically
    identified contaminant.

    (1)     Note. Terms such as "hard surface" or "general household" cleaner
    are not considered to be specific for the purpose of placement of patents
    in this and indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note. For purposes of this and indented subclasses, the
    specifically identified substituent or contaminant must be either recited
    in the claims or must be solely disclosed.

    (3)     Note. For purposes of this and indented subclasses, the
    "contaminant" may constitute a material which no longer serves a useful
    function, such as old paint or photoresist material following exposure, or
    is deemed undesirable for personal reasons, such as fingernail polish.


CLS 510/110
TXT For removing radioactive or toxic chemical contaminant (e.g., chemical
    warfare agent, PCB's etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 109 specialized for removing a radioactive or
    toxic chemical contaminant from a solid surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    426,    Food or Edible Material: Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclass 286 for processes of removing a toxic chemical from a food
    product.


CLS 510/111
TXT For food product (e.g., shell egg, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 109 specialized for cleaning products intended
    for use as food.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    426,    Food or Edible Material: Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    appropriate subclasses for processes of cleaning a food product.


CLS 510/112
TXT For contact lenses:

    Compositions under subclass 109 specialized for cleaning contact lenses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclass 78.04
    for ophthalmic preparations used for disinfecting, sterilizing, or
    preserving contact lenses.


CLS 510/113
TXT Solid particulate component:

    Compositions under subclass 112 which include a component which is in the
    form of solid particles.


CLS 510/114
TXT Enzyme component of specific activity or source (e.g., protease; of
    bacterial origin, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 112 which include an enzyme component the
    activity or source of which is explicitly stated.

    (1)     Note. For placement in this subclass, the activity (e.g., protease,
    etc.) or source (e.g., of bacterial origin, etc.) of the enzyme component
    must be recited in the claims.

    (2)     Note. Compositions merely reciting an "enzyme" are excluded from
    placement in this subclass.


CLS 510/115
TXT Water-soluble peroxy, silicone resin, or polyvinyl pyrrolidone component:

    Compositions under subclass 112 which include a water-soluble component
    which is a peroxy compound, a silicone resin, or polyvinyl pyrrolidone.


CLS 510/116
TXT For removable dentures:

    Compositions under subclass 109 specialized for cleaning removable dentures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 49+
    for a dentifrice for oral use.


CLS 510/117
TXT Gas generating (e.g., effervescent):

    Compositions under subclass 116 which generate a gas in the course of
    cleaning.


    (1)     Note. The gas may facilitate cleaning merely by agitation of the
    cleaning solution (e.g., carbon dioxide, etc.), by oxidation or bleaching
    action (e.g., nascent oxygen, etc.), or both.


CLS 510/118
TXT Nail polish remover:

    Compositions under subclass 109 specialized for removing nail polish from
    human nails.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 364 for compositions usable as general,
    multipurpose solvents.


CLS 510/119
TXT For human scalp hair, scalp, or wig (e.g., shampoo, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 109 specialized for cleaning live human scalp
    hair, scalp, or natural or synthetic wigs.

    (1)     Note. This subclass and its indents includes shampoos which contain
    a nonmedicated hair conditioning, antistatic, softening, etc., component
    but have cleaning as their primary function.

    (2)     Note. Included herein are shampoo compositions designed to remove
    dandruff flakes but devoid of any biocidal component for treating the
    underlying cause.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses
    70.1+ for hair conditioning or rinse compositions devoid of any cleaning
    function and subclasses 43+ and 73 for all shaving preparations regardless
    of any soap or detergent content.

    514,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, for medicated
    shampoo compositions.


CLS 510/120
TXT Package, solid, or gas-propelled composition (e.g., powder, aerosol
    container, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 119 in the form of a package or of a solid, or
    which are dispensed by the release of pressurized gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 524.1+ for packages or
    containers, per se, wherein the material for the container or content is
    specified.


CLS 510/121
TXT Steroid or carbohydrate gum component (e.g., lanolin, guar gum, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 119 which include a steroid or carbohydrate gum
    as a component.


CLS 510/122
TXT Silicon, boron, or phosphorus containing organic component:

    Compositions under subclass 119 which include an organic component which
    contains silicon, boron, or phosphorus.


CLS 510/123
TXT Amine oxide, quaternary, or zwitterion nitrogen component (e.g., betaine,
    sultaine, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 119 which include an amine oxide, quaternary or
    zwitterion nitrogen component.


CLS 510/124
TXT With diverse amine oxide, quaternary, or zwitterion nitrogen component:

    Compositions under subclass 123 which include an amine oxide, quaternary,
    or zwitterion nitrogen component which is different from the component of
    subclass 123.


CLS 510/125
TXT With organic sulfoxy containing component (e.g., sulfate, sulfonate, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 123 which additionally include an organic
    component containing a covalently bonded sulfoxy substituent.


CLS 510/126
TXT Carboxamido containing component having an alkanol, carboxyl, or alkylamino
    substituent, or salt thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 119 which include a component having both a
    (-C(=O)N=) substituent and an alkanol, carboxyl (-C(=O)OH), or alkylamino
    substituent in a single compound, or salt of the component.


CLS 510/127
TXT Organic sulfoxy containing component (e.g., sulfate, sulfonate, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 119 which include an organic component
    containing a covalently bonded sulfoxy substituent.


CLS 510/128
TXT With a urea or with poly(oxyalkylene) containing component devoid of
    covalently bonded anionic substituents:

    Compositions under subclass 127 which additionally include a component
    which is urea (HHNC(=O)NHH, wherein substitution can be made for hydrogen
    only), or a component which has a polyoxyalkylene radical and is devoid of
    any covalently bonded anionic substituents.


CLS 510/129
TXT Soap component:

    Compositions under subclass 119 which include soap as a component.


CLS 510/130
TXT For human skin:

    Compositions under subclass 109 specialized for cleaning human skin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 43+
    and 73 for all shaving preparations, regardless of any soap or detergent
    content.


CLS 510/131
TXT With halogen, nitrogen, oxygen, or phosphorus containing antiseptic,
    biocidal, or deodorizing component:

    Compositions under subclass 130 which include an antiseptic, biocidal, or
    deodorizing component which contains halogen, nitrogen, oxygen, or
    phosphorus.


CLS 510/132
TXT Surgical scrub:

    Compositions under subclass 131 which are specialized for use as surgical
    scrub (e.g., cleaning and disinfecting hands, arms, etc., prior to or
    subsequent to performing surgery, etc.).


CLS 510/133
TXT Solid, shaped article (e.g., bar, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 131 which are solid and possess particular
    macroscopic physical shape other than mere granules.


CLS 510/134
TXT For removing adhesively attached material (e.g., bandage, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 130 specialized for facilitating the removal of
    a material that is attached to the skin by means of an adhesive.


CLS 510/135
TXT High-foaming bath composition (e.g., bubble bath, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 130 which produce copious lather in the bath
    water.


CLS 510/136
TXT Makeup remover:

    Compositions under subclass 130 specialized for removing makeup from human
    skin (e.g. removing mascara, pancake makeup, etc.).


CLS 510/137
TXT For a specific area of the body (e.g., face, ears, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 130 specialized for use on a particular area of
    the human body.

    (1)     Note. Terms such as "personal cleaning composition" are not
    considered to be specific for the purpose of placement of patents in this
    and indented subclasses, since they also read on shampoos, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 43+
    and 73 for all shaving preparations, regardless of any soap or detergent
    content.


CLS 510/138
TXT For hands:

    Compositions under subclass 137 specialized for cleaning hands.


CLS 510/139
TXT With particulate scrubbing or abrasive component (e.g., powdered pumice,
    etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 130 which include a specific particulate
    component having a scrubbing or abrasive function.


CLS 510/140
TXT With removable package, casing, receptacle, or in aerosol dispenser (e.g.,
    cake wrapper, casing gradually removable throughout use, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 130 which are enclosed in a package, casing, or
    receptacle which is removed prior to or in the process of cleaning, or
    which are packaged in an aerosol dispenser.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 524.1+ for packages or
    containers, per se, wherein the material for the container or content is
    specified.


CLS 510/141
TXT Solid, shaped article (e.g., bar, leaf, tablet, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 130 which are solid and possess particular
    macroscopic physical shape other than mere granules.


CLS 510/142
TXT With non-removable casing or coating integrally attached to the article
    exterior (e.g., ornamental design, encapsulating layer, etc.):

    Articles under subclass 141 to the exterior of which is integrally attached
    a casing or coating which is not removed prior to or during use of the
    article.


CLS 510/143
TXT With solid integral noncleanser core or insert (e.g., layer, matrix, etc.):

    Articles under subclass 141 which have a solid core or insert of
    noncleanser material integrally embedded in the article.


CLS 510/144
TXT Hollow or buoyant core or insert (e.g., air-holding sponge, etc.):

    Articles under subclass 143 wherein the core or insert is hollow or buoyant
    (e.g., floating soap, etc.)


CLS 510/145
TXT Floating, elastic, or malleable:

    Articles under subclass 141 which float on water or are capable of
    returning to their initial form after deformation or are capable of being
    shaped by manual pressure.


CLS 510/146
TXT Composite (e.g., having segments of different color, solubility,
    composition, etc.):

    Articles under subclass 141 which have distinct sections or segments
    differing in physical or chemical properties.


CLS 510/147
TXT Transparent or translucent:

    Articles under subclass 141 which transmit all or part of incident
    visible-spectrum radiation.


CLS 510/148
TXT Having discrete indentation or protuberance (e.g., embossed, etc.):

    Articles under subclass 141 the surface of which has one or more discrete
    indentations or protuberances.

    (1)     Note. The purpose of the irregular (e.g., concave or convex)
    surface is to form an ornamental design, facilitate handling of the
    article, hold the residue of a used detergent bar, etc.


CLS 510/149
TXT For comminuting soap dispenser:

    Articles under subclass 148 which are adapted to fit a dispenser which
    produces small particles of the composition, such as flakes or shavings, by
    mechanical action.


CLS 510/150
TXT Boron or phosphorus containing component:

    Articles under subclass 141 which include a component containing boron or
    phosphorus.


CLS 510/151
TXT Carbohydrate component (e.g., cellulose, guar gum, etc.):

    Articles under subclass 141 which include a component which is a
    carbohydrate.


CLS 510/152
TXT Soap component:

    Articles under subclass 141 which include soap as a component.


CLS 510/153
TXT With free higher fatty acid component:

    Articles under subclass 152 which also include a free higher (i.e.,
    water-insoluble) fatty acid as a component.

    (1)     Note. Examples of such articles include superfatted soaps.


CLS 510/154
TXT With lime-soap dispersant:

    Articles under subclass 152 which also include a specific component which
    disperses water-insoluble salts formed from soap in water which has a high
    content of minerals, such as calcium or magnesium salts.

    (1)     Note. The presence of a lime-soap dispersant prevents the formation
    of scum (e.g., bathtub ring) in the washing equipment, facilitates
    lathering, and prevents waste of the soap component.


CLS 510/155
TXT Plural surfactant components (e.g., organic sulfate and sulfonate,
    sulfonate and amine oxide, etc.):

    Articles under subclass 141 which include two or more different
    surface-active agents as components.


CLS 510/156
TXT Organic sulfoxy containing component (e.g., sulfate, sulfonate, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 141 which include an organic component
    containing a covalently bonded sulfoxy substituent.


CLS 510/157
TXT For waterless cleaning:

    Compositions under subclass 130 specialized for cleaning without the use of
    water.


CLS 510/158
TXT Cream, paste, or gel:

    Compositions under subclass 130 which are in the form of a cream, paste, or
    gel (i.e., semiliquid).


CLS 510/159
TXT Liquid composition:

    Compositions under subclass 130 which are liquids.


CLS 510/160
TXT For live animal (nonhuman):

    Compositions under subclass 109 specialized for cleaning nonhuman animals.

    (1)     Note. Examples of such compositions include pet shampoos,
    ear-cleaning compositions, etc.


CLS 510/161
TXT For medical or dental instruments or equipment (e.g., electronic
    hematological analyzer, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 109 specialized for cleaning instruments or
    equipment used in the practice of medicine or dentistry, and in their
    supporting professions, such as analytical laboratories.


CLS 510/162
TXT For semipermeable membrane or ion-exchange resin or equipment:

    Compositions under subclass 109 specialized for cleaning semipermeable
    membranes, ion-exchange resins, or equipment used in conjunction therewith.


CLS 510/163
TXT For optical mirror, lens, or mold therefor (e.g., eyeglasses, camera lens,
    etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 109 specialized for cleaning optical mirrors,
    optical lenses, or molds used for casting the mirrors or lenses.


CLS 510/164
TXT For synthetic resin lens or mold therefor:

    Compositions under subclass 163 wherein the lens is made of synthetic resin.


CLS 510/165
TXT For computer memory disk:

    Compositions under subclass 109 specialized for cleaning computer memory
    disks.


CLS 510/166
TXT For electrophotographic equipment or parts thereof (e.g., xerographic
    plate, hot roll fuser, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 109 specialized for cleaning equipment used in
    electrophotography, such as xerography, or various parts of the equipment.


CLS 510/167
TXT For magnetic tape or disk, recorder/playback head, or drive assembly
    therefor:

    Compositions under subclass 109 specialized for cleaning magnetic tapes or
    disks, magnetic recorder or playback heads, or drive assemblies therefor.


CLS 510/168
TXT For sound record (e.g., recording for phonograph, CD player, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 109 specialized for cleaning sound records.


CLS 510/169
TXT For photographic film or processing equipment:

    Compositions under subclass 109 specialized for cleaning photographic film
    or equipment used in processing the film to produce finished photographs.


CLS 510/170
TXT For ink recording or printing equipment, or mold therefor (e.g., ink jet
    recorder, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 109 specialized for cleaning equipment used in
    ink recording or ink printing, or molds used for producing such equipment.


CLS 510/171
TXT For lithographic printing plate:

    Compositions under subclass 170 specialized for cleaning plates used in
    producing lithographic prints.


CLS 510/172
TXT For silk printing screen:

    Compositions under subclass 170 specialized for cleaning screens used in
    silk printing.


CLS 510/173
TXT For typewriter:

    Compositions under subclass 170 specialized for cleaning ink typewriters.


CLS 510/174
TXT For removing ink, pencil, or writing fluid markings (e.g., ball pen fluid,
    printer's or magnetic ink, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 109 specialized for removing ink, pencil, or
    writing fluid markings from solid substrates.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    523,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers - Part of the Class 520 Series,
    subclass 161 for correction fluids used to cover up such markings.


CLS 510/175
TXT For printed or integrated electrical circuit, or semiconductor device:

    Compositions under subclass 109 specialized for cleaning printed or
    integrated electrical circuits or semiconductor devices, such as computer
    chips.


CLS 510/176
TXT For stripping photoresist material:

    Compositions under subclass 175 specialized for stripping photoresist
    material.

    (1)     Note. This subclass is intended to encompass compositions used to
    remove photoresist material used in manufacturing printed circuits, once
    the resist material has fulfilled its function.


CLS 510/177
TXT Azeotropic or azeotrope-like composition (e.g., for defluxing, etc.):

    Liquid compositions under subclass 175 which are substantially constant
    boiling and which approximate or duplicate the behavior of a
    single-substance solvent at a given temperature.

    (1)     Note. The distillates of azeotropes have the same composition as
    the original mixture.


CLS 510/178
TXT Nitrogen-containing component:

    Compositions under subclass 177 which include a component containing
    nitrogen.


CLS 510/179
TXT For laboratory or pharmaceutical glassware:

    Compositions under subclass 109 specialized for cleaning glass equipment
    used in various laboratories or in pharmacies or the pharmaceutical
    industry.


CLS 510/180
TXT For plate glass (e.g., window, mirror, windshield, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 109 specialized for cleaning rolled and
    polished glass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions: Coating or Plastic, subclass 13 for fog, frost, or
    ice preventive compositions, per se.


CLS 510/181
TXT Aqueous liquid composition:

    Compositions under subclass 180 which are liquid and contain water as a
    component.


CLS 510/182
TXT With aliphatic alcohol, ether, or ketone component:

    Compositions under subclass 181 which include an aliphatic alcohol, ether,
    or ketone component.


CLS 510/183
TXT For hydraulic power transmission system (e.g., automobile brake system,
    etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 109 specialized for cleaning hydraulic power
    transmission systems.


CLS 510/184
TXT For engine cooling system:

    Compositions under subclass 109 specialized for cleaning the cooling
    systems of engines.


CLS 510/185
TXT For interior of engine or parts thereof (e.g., crankcase, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 109 specialized for cleaning the interior of
    engines or their parts.


CLS 510/186
TXT Inorganic component (other than water):

    Compositions under subclass 185 which include an inorganic component which
    is not water.

    (1)     Note. Water may be present in the composition but does not
    constitute an inorganic component.


CLS 510/187
TXT Phenol, cyclic carbonate, or soap component:

    Compositions under subclass 185 which include a component which is a
    phenol, cyclic carbonate, or soap.


CLS 510/188
TXT For hydrocarbon or synthetic resin processing or conveying equipment (e.g.,
    for oil or gas pipe line, fractionating equipment, curable resin
    fabrication tools, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 109 specialized for cleaning equipment used in
    processing or conveying gaseous or liquid hydrocarbon materials or
    synthetic resins.


CLS 510/189
TXT For vehicle wheel, bumper, or tire:

    Compositions under subclass 109 specialized for cleaning the wheels,
    bumpers, or tires of vehicles.


CLS 510/190
TXT For firearm bore:

    Compositions under subclass 109 specialized for cleaning the bores of
    firearms.


CLS 510/191
TXT For toilet bowl or urinal:

    Compositions under subclass 109 specialized for cleaning toilet bowls or
    urinals.


CLS 510/192
TXT Flush dispensed:

    Compositions under subclass 191 which are dispensed into the toilet bowl or
    urinal by flush water.


CLS 510/193
TXT Synthetic resin or carbohydrate gum component (e.g., polyvinyl alcohol,
    poly (ethylene oxide) resin, guar gum, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 192 which include a component which is a
    synthetic resin or a carbohydrate gum.

    (1)     Note. This component is used to bind the active ingredients in the
    form of a solid block or other shape and to prevent their rapid dissolution.


CLS 510/194
TXT For mechanical garbage disposal unit or dishwasher interior:

    Compositions under subclass 109 specialized for cleaning the interior of a
    mechanical garbage disposal unit or of an automatic dishwasher.


CLS 510/195
TXT For household drain or sewer pipe:

    Compositions under subclass 109 specialized for cleaning household drains
    or sewer pipes.


CLS 510/196
TXT Exothermic (e.g., containing free metal, such as Al, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 195 which generate heat on contact with water.


CLS 510/197
TXT For removing heat-degraded food residue from solid surface (e.g., oven
    interior, grill, cooking pot exterior, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 109 specialized for removing food residues,
    which have been degraded (e.g., charred, carbonized, etc.) by heat, from
    solid surfaces which are usually inorganic.


CLS 510/198
TXT Gas-propelled composition or package:

    Compositions under subclass 197 which are dispensed by the release of
    pressurized gas, or packages enclosing such compositions (e.g., aerosol
    containers).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 524.1+ for packages or
    containers, per se, wherein the material for the container or content is
    specified.


CLS 510/199
TXT For removing fungal or algal growth from a substrate (e.g., removing mold,
    mildew, algae, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 109 specialized for cleaning a substrate of
    fungal or algal growth.


CLS 510/200
TXT For removing adhesively attached material or adhesive agent from a
    substrate (e.g., wallpaper, gummed label, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 109 specialized for producing a clean surface
    by the removal of an adhesive agent, or of adhesively attached material,
    from a substrate.


CLS 510/201
TXT For removing integral organic coating, sealant, or finish from a substrate
    (e.g., stripping paint, varnish, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 109 specialized for accomplishing or
    facilitating the removal of an organic protective or ornamental coating,
    sealant, or finish from a substrate to which it is integrally attached.

    (1)     Note. Many of these compositions function by loosening the coating,
    thus facilitating its removal by peeling, rinsing, etc.


CLS 510/202
TXT From metallic substrate:

    Compositions under subclass 201 specialized to operate on metallic
    substrate.


CLS 510/203
TXT Water-compatible concentrate or aqueous mixture thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 201 in the form of a concentrated composition
    which is compatible with water with which it is mixed prior to use or
    aqueous mixtures of such compositions in the form of solutions,
    dispersions, etc.

    (1)     Note. Prior to mixing with water, the composition may be in the
    form of a solid or a liquid concentrate.


CLS 510/204
TXT Halogenated hydrocarbon component:

    Compositions under subclass 201 which include a component which is a
    halogenated hydrocarbon.


CLS 510/205
TXT With wax component:

    Compositions under subclass 204 which additionally include a natural or
    synthetic hydrocarbon or ester wax component, such as paraffin, carnauba
    wax, etc.


CLS 510/206
TXT Aqueous component:

    Compositions under subclass 201 which include water as a component.


CLS 510/207
TXT With metal hydroxide or wax component:

    Compositions under subclass 206 which additionally include a metal
    hydroxide component or a wax component which is a natural or synthetic
    hydrocarbon or ester wax.


CLS 510/208
TXT Wax component:

    Compositions under subclass 201 which include a natural or synthetic
    hydrocarbon or ester wax component.


CLS 510/209
TXT With inorganic component:

    Compositions under subclass 208 which additionally include an inorganic
    component.


CLS 510/210
TXT With carboxylic acid or phenolic component, or salt thereof (e.g., carbolic
    acid, metal phenolate, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 208 which additionally include a component
    which is a carboxylic acid, a phenol, or a salt of any of these components.


CLS 510/211
TXT With carboxylic acid ester component (e.g., polymerized vegetable oil,
    etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 208 which additionally include a component
    which is an ester of a carboxylic acid.


CLS 510/212
TXT Amine, carboxamide, or metal hydroxide or alkoxide component (e.g.,
    pyrrolidone, pyridine, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 201 which include a component which is an amine
    or carboxamide or is a hydroxide or alkoxide of a metal.


CLS 510/213
TXT Liquid hydrocarbon component:

    Compositions under subclass 201 which include a liquid hydrocarbon
    component.


CLS 510/214
TXT For uncarpeted floor:

    Compositions under subclass 109 specialized for cleaning floors which are
    devoid of carpeting.


CLS 510/215
TXT For absorbing liquid or greasy matter (e.g., for removing oil, aqueous
    fluid, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 214 specialized for absorbing a liquid or
    greasy contaminant from an uncarpeted floor.

    (1)     Note. Such compositions may include sawdust, kitty litter, or other
    absorbent.


CLS 510/216
TXT Sweeping compound (i.e., for binding or suppressing dust during sweeping):

    Compositions under subclass 214 specialized for facilitating sweeping of
    uncarpeted floors by reducing the amount of dust that becomes airborne.


CLS 510/217
TXT For no-wax floor covering:

    Compositions under subclass 214 specialized for cleaning a floor covering
    which does not require waxing.


CLS 510/218
TXT For equipment used in processing, handling, storing, or serving edible
    product (e.g., dairy or brewery equipment, household utensils, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 109 specialized for cleaning equipment used in
    processing, handling, storing, or serving food and beverages.


CLS 510/219
TXT For glass or synthetic resin equipment or container (e.g., bottle, jar,
    pipeline, etc., made of polycarbonate, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 218 specialized exclusively for cleaning
    equipment or containers made of glass or synthetic resin.


CLS 510/220
TXT For use in automatic dishwasher:

    Compositions under subclass 218 specialized for use in an automatic
    dishwasher.


CLS 510/221
TXT Liquid, paste, or gel (e.g., slurry, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 220 which are in the form of a liquid, paste,
    or gel.


CLS 510/222
TXT Wax or phosphorus or silicon containing organic component:

    Compositions under subclass 221 which include an organic component which
    has a phosphorus or silicon containing substituent, or which is a natural
    or synthetic hydrocarbon or ester wax.


CLS 510/223
TXT Polycarboxylic acid component, or salt thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 221 which include a component having plural
    carboxyl substituents attached to one another by direct or indirect
    nonionic bonding, or a salt of such a component.


CLS 510/224
TXT Solid, shaped article (e.g., tablet, briquette, pellet, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 220 which are solid and possess particular
    macroscopic physical shape other than mere granules.


CLS 510/225
TXT Alkali metal hydroxide component:

    Compositions under subclass 224 which include a component which is a
    hydroxide of an alkali metal (Li, Na, K, Rb, or Cs).


CLS 510/226
TXT Enzyme component of specific activity or source (e.g., protease, ethanol
    oxidase, of bacterial origin, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 220 which include an enzyme component the
    activity or source of which is explicitly stated.

    (1)     Note. For purposes of this subclass, the activity (e.g., protease,
    etc.) or source (e.g., of bacterial origin, etc.) of the enzyme component
    must be recited in the claims.

    (2)     Note. Compositions merely reciting an "enzyme" are excluded from
    placement in this subclass as originals.


CLS 510/227
TXT With overglaze or glassware protection component (except alkali metal
    silicate):

    Compositions under subclass 220 which additionally include a component,
    other than an alkali metal silicate, which serves to protect the glaze on
    such articles as china, or prevents damage, such as etching, to glassware.


CLS 510/228
TXT Phosphorus, silicon, or sulfoxy containing organic component (e.g.,
    sulfate, sulfonate, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 220 which include an organic component having a
    phosphorus, silicon, or covalently bonded sulfoxy containing substituent.


CLS 510/229
TXT Polycarboxylic acid component, or salt thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 220 which include a component having plural
    carboxyl substituents attached to one another by direct or indirect
    nonionic bonding, or a salt of such a component.


CLS 510/230
TXT The component is a polymer (e.g., polyacrylic acid salt, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 229 wherein the carboxyl substituted component
    is polymeric.


CLS 510/231
TXT Halogen-free inorganic phosphorus containing component:

    Compositions under subclass 220 which include an inorganic component which
    contains phosphorus and is free from halogen.


CLS 510/232
TXT With inorganic silicon containing component:

    Compositions under subclass 231 which additionally include an inorganic
    component which contains silicon.


CLS 510/233
TXT With alkali metal hydroxide, carbonate, bicarbonate, or sesquicarbonate
    component:

    Compositions under subclass 232 which include a component which is a
    hydroxide, carbonate, bicarbonate, or sesquicarbonate of an alkali metal
    (Li, Na, K, Rb, or Cs).


CLS 510/234
TXT For in-place cleaning of stationary apparatus:

    Compositions under subclass 218 specialized for cleaning stationary
    apparatus without moving or disassembling the same.

    (1)     Note. Such stationary apparatus includes dairy or brewery
    pipelines, tanks, etc. The cleaning composition is pumped through the
    system.


CLS 510/235
TXT For manual dishwashing:

    Compositions under subclass 218 specialized for washing household utensils
    by hand.


CLS 510/236
TXT Abrasive, protein, or organic phosphorus containing component:

    Compositions under subclass 235 which contain a component which is an
    abrasive, a protein, or is an organic compound having a phosphorus
    containing substituent.


CLS 510/237
TXT Carboxamide, amine oxide, heterocyclic, quaternary, or zwitterion
    nitrogen-containing component:

    Compositions under subclass 235 which include a component which contains
    nitrogen and is a carboxamide, amine oxide, a heterocyclic compound,
    quaternary ammonium salt, or a zwitterion, such as betaine or sultaine.


CLS 510/238
TXT For grouted tile, bathtub, or porcelain or ceramic surface (e.g., ceramic
    bathroom tile, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 109 specialized for cleaning grouted tile,
    bathtubs, porcelain, or ceramic surfaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199,    for compositions for removing mold, mildew, or algal growth from a
    substrate.


CLS 510/239
TXT For enameled surface or acoustic material:

    Compositions under subclass 109 specialized for cleaning a  substrate
    carrying a baked-on vitreous coating on its surface, or for cleaning
    acoustic materials, such as porous tile, fabric, etc.


CLS 510/240
TXT For stonework, brickwork, or cementitious material (e.g., marble, granite,
    concrete, alabaster, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 109 specialized for cleaning stonework,
    brickwork, or cementitous surfaces.


CLS 510/241
TXT For removing foreign matter from surface carrying a protective or
    ornamental coating, finish, or adhesively attached covering (e.g., from
    painted or papered wall, automobile body, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 109 specialized for removing dirt from a
    surface which carries a protective or ornamental coating or finish or has a
    covering which is attached to it by an adhesive.


CLS 510/242
TXT Liquid composition (e.g., emulsion, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 241 which are in the form of a liquid.


CLS 510/243
TXT For clear or translucent plastic surface (e.g., Plexiglas# acrylic, Lexan#
    polycarbonate, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 109 specialized for cleaning a plastic surface
    which is clear or translucent.


CLS 510/244
TXT For nontextile synthetic resin, rubber, or fiberglass substrate (e.g.,
    vinyl, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 109 specialized for cleaning a substrate made
    of synthetic resin, rubber, or fiberglass which is other than a textile.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    276+,   for compositions designed for cleaning textile materials.


CLS 510/245
TXT For bare metal surface (e.g., degreasing composition, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 109 specialized for cleaning a metal surface
    which does not carry a permanent finish or coating.


CLS 510/246
TXT For glassware mold:

    Compositions under subclass 245 specialized for cleaning molds used in
    making glassware.


CLS 510/247
TXT For descaling the inner surface of equipment which is in continuous contact
    with water (e.g., boiler scale removal; for water storage tank, conduit,
    etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 245 specialized for removing scale which forms
    on the inner surface of equipment which in use remains in contact with
    water.


CLS 510/248
TXT Free element component (e.g., metal, carbon, sulfur, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 247 which include a component which is in free
    elemental form.


CLS 510/249
TXT Tannin, whole animal or plant material component, or crude extract thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 247 which include a component which is tannin,
    whole animal or plant material, or a crude extract of such material.


CLS 510/250
TXT With sugar, molasses, or starch component:

    Compositions under subclass 249 which additionally include a component
    which is sugar, molasses, or starch.


CLS 510/251
TXT With vegetable oil, hydrocarbon, fat, or phenolic component (e.g., mineral
    oil, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 249 which additionally include a component
    which is a vegetable oil, a hydrocarbon, a fat, or substituted or
    unsubstituted phenol.


CLS 510/252
TXT With alkali metal hydroxide, carbonate, or bicarbonate component:

    Compositions under subclass 249 which additionally include a component
    which is a hydroxide, carbonate, or bicarbonate of an alkali metal (Li, Na,
    K, Rb, or Cs).


CLS 510/253
TXT Free organic or inorganic acid component:

    Compositions under subclass 247 which include a component which is a free
    organic or inorganic acid.


CLS 510/254
TXT For use on nonferrous surface (e.g., aluminum, copper, tin plate, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 245 specialized for cleaning the surface of a
    metal or alloy which is other than iron or iron alloy.


CLS 510/255
TXT With corrosion inhibiting or solvent stabilizing component:

    Compositions under subclass 254 which include a component which inhibits
    corrosion of the surface being cleaned or stabilizes a solvent.

    (1)     Note. The stabilized solvent is usually a halogenated hydrocarbon
    which is stabilized against metal-catalyzed decomposition.


CLS 510/256
TXT With halogenated hydrocarbon, abrasive, coating, or polishing component:

    Compositions under subclass 254 which include a component which is a
    halogenated hydrocarbon, an abrasive, or is a coating agent or nonabrasive
    polishing agent, such as chalk.


CLS 510/257
TXT With inorganic fluorine containing component (e.g., HF, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 254 which include an inorganic component which
    contains fluorine.


CLS 510/258
TXT With corrosion or embrittlement inhibiting or solvent stabilizing component
    (e.g., pickling bath, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 245 which include a component which inhibits
    corrosion or embrittlement of the surface being cleaned, or stabilizes a
    solvent.

    (1)     Note. The stabilized solvent is usually a halogenated hydrocarbon
    which is stabilized against metal-catalyzed decomposition.


CLS 510/259
TXT Quaternary ammonium or heavy metal in the component (e.g., Zn, Sn, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 258 wherein the corrosion or embrittlement
    inhibiting component is a quaternary ammonium salt or contains a heavy
    metal compound (i.e., metal having a specific gravity of at least 4).


CLS 510/260
TXT Organic sulfonium group in the component:

    Compositions under subclass 258 wherein the corrosion or embrittlement
    inhibiting component is an organic compound containing a sulfonium
    substituent.


CLS 510/261
TXT Organic divalent sulfur containing substituent in the component (e.g.,
    sulfide, mercaptan, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 258 wherein the corrosion or embrittlement
    inhibiting component is an organic compound containing divalent sulfur.


CLS 510/262
TXT Heterocyclic ring in the component:

    Compositions under subclass 261 wherein the component containing divalent
    sulfur includes a heterocyclic moiety.


CLS 510/263
TXT Nitrogen containing substituent in the component (e.g., thiourea, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 261 wherein the component containing divalent
    sulfur also contains nitrogen.


CLS 510/264
TXT Organic nitrogen containing substituent in the component:

    Compositions under subclass 258 wherein the corrosion or embrittlement
    inhibiting component is an organic compound which contains nitrogen.


CLS 510/265
TXT Heterocyclic nitrogen in the component:

    Compositions under subclass 264 wherein the nitrogen is part of a
    heterocyclic ring.


CLS 510/266
TXT Plural inhibitor or stabilizer components:

    Compositions under subclass 264 which include at least one additional
    corrosion or embrittlement inhibiting or solvent stabilizing component.


CLS 510/267
TXT Ethylenically or acetylenically unsaturated substituent in the component
    (e.g., propargyl alcohol, ester, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 258 wherein the corrosion or embrittlement
    inhibiting component contains an ethylenically or acetylenically
    unsaturated substituent.


CLS 510/268
TXT Abrasive or polishing component:

    Compositions under subclass 245 which include a component which is an
    abrasive or is a nonabrasive polishing agent, such as chalk.


CLS 510/269
TXT Inorganic acid component (e.g., sodium bisulfate, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 245 which include a component which is an
    inorganic acid.


CLS 510/270
TXT With heavy metal containing component:

    Compositions under subclass 269 which additionally include a component
    containing a heavy metal (i.e., metal having a specific gravity of at least
    4).


CLS 510/271
TXT With hydrocarbon or halogen or oxygen containing organic solvent(e.g.,
    alcohol, ester, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 269 which additionally include an organic
    solvent component which is a hydrocarbon or includes a halogen or oxygen
    containing substituent.


CLS 510/272
TXT Alkali metal hydroxide component:

    Compositions under subclass 245 which include a component which is a
    hydroxide of an alkali metal (Li, Na, K, Rb, or Cs).


CLS 510/273
TXT Halogenated hydrocarbon component (e.g., degreasing composition, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 245 which include a component which is a
    halogenated hydrocarbon.


CLS 510/274
TXT Organic sulfoxy containing component:

    Compositions under subclass 245 which include an organic component
    containing a covalently bonded sulfoxy substituent.


CLS 510/275
TXT For leather, hair, feathers, fur, or straw (e.g., Panama hat, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 109 specialized for cleaning leather, hair,
    feathers, fur, or straw.


CLS 510/276
TXT For textile material (e.g., laundry detergent, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 109 specialized for cleaning a textile material
    which is either in the form of a fabric, finished article, such as a
    garment, or in the form of textile fiber, such as wool, or intermediate
    product, such as yarn.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 137+ for processes of cleaning or
    laundering textile materials.


CLS 510/277
TXT Multifunctional assembly (e.g., package with detergent and prespotter in
    separate containers, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 276 wherein two or more different cleaning
    compositions or different components thereof, or an auxiliary composition
    for cleaning and a cleaning composition, each of which is individually
    packaged or enclosed, are present in a single container or package for
    convenience in use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 524.1+ for packages or
    containers, per se, wherein the material for the container or content is
    specified.


CLS 510/278
TXT For pile fabric or upholstery (e.g., carpet, rug, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 276 specialized for cleaning a pile fabric or
    upholstery material, such as installed carpeting or upholstered furniture.


CLS 510/279
TXT Gas-propelled composition (e.g., aerosol, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 278 which are dispensed by the release of
    pressurized gas.


CLS 510/280
TXT Gel or liquid composition:

    Compositions under subclass 278 in the form of a gel or a liquid which may
    be a single-phase solution, an emulsion, etc.


CLS 510/281
TXT For removing stains (other than merely in the course of laundering or
    dry-cleaning operation):

    Compositions under subclass 276 specialized for removing localized stains
    other than merely in the course of a laundering or dry-cleaning operation.


CLS 510/282
TXT Prior to dry cleaning:

    Compositions under subclass 281 the use of which for localized stain
    removal precedes dry cleaning of the entire textile article.


CLS 510/283
TXT Prior to laundering (e.g., spotting stick, pre-spot, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 281 the use of which for the removal of
    localized stains precedes  laundering of the entire textile article.


CLS 510/284
TXT Aqueous component:

    Compositions under subclass 283 which include water as a component.


CLS 510/285
TXT Dry cleaning (e.g., using non-aqueous fluid, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 276 specialized for overall cleaning of textile
    materials by use of liquid compositions which are totally or nearly totally
    free of water.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclass 142 for processes of dry cleaning textile
    materials.


CLS 510/286
TXT With halogen, oxygen, or nitrogen containing bleach, oxidant, antiseptic,
    or biocidal component:

    Compositions under subclass 285 which additionally contain a chemical
    bleach or oxidant, or an antiseptic or biocidal component which contains
    halogen, oxygen, or nitrogen in its molecule.


CLS 510/287
TXT With metal corrosion inhibiting or textile treating component (other than
    mere cleaning) (e.g., antistatic or fabric softening, wrinkle reducing,
    optical brightener, lusterizing, etc., component):

    Compositions under subclass 285 which additionally include a component
    which inhibits corrosion of metal which comes in contact with the
    composition or which is a textile treating agent.


CLS 510/288
TXT Organic phosphorus containing component:

    Compositions under subclass 285 which include an organic component which
    contains phosphorus.


CLS 510/289
TXT Polyoxyalkylene containing surfactant devoid of covalently bonded anionic
    substituents:

    Compositions under subclass 285 which include a surfactant which is free of
    any covalently bonded anionic substituent and contains a polyoxyalkylene
    group.

    (1)     Note. See class definitions for further information on surfactants.

    (2)     Note. Included herein are, for example, polyethoxylated lauryl
    alcohol or lauryl amine.


CLS 510/290
TXT Sulfur-containing anionically substituted surfactant:

    Compositions under subclass 285 which include a sulfur-containing
    surfactant with a covalently bonded anionic substituent.

    (1)     Note. Included herein are, for example, sodium dodecyl benzene
    sulfonate or dodecyl sulfate.


CLS 510/291
TXT Aqueous component:

    Compositions under subclass 285 which include water as a component, which
    is usually present in minor amounts.


CLS 510/292
TXT For delicate material (e.g., wool, silk, fine fabrics, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 276 specialized for cleaning delicate textile
    materials or goods.


CLS 510/293
TXT Multiple-dose article (e.g., detergent-containing plastic bottle, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 276 in the form of an article which holds or
    comprises an amount of the composition sufficient for more than one
    cleaning operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 524.1+ for packages or
    containers, per se, wherein the material for the container or content is
    specified.


CLS 510/294
TXT Solid, shaped article (e.g., bar, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 293 which are solid and possess particular
    macroscopic physical shape.


CLS 510/295
TXT Dosing unit (e.g., detergent-impregnated water-insoluble substrate of
    fabric, tissue, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 276 in the form of a premeasured unit dose
    sufficient for a single cleaning operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 524.1+ for packages or
    containers, per se, wherein the material for the container or content is
    specified.


CLS 510/296
TXT All or part of the unit enclosure is made of water-sensitive material
    (e.g., water-soluble or dispersible envelope enclosing powdered detergent,
    etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 295 wherein the premeasured dose is contained
    in an enclosure at least part of which comprises a material which loses its
    physical integrity upon immersion in water (e.g., polyvinyl alcohol, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 524.7 for packages or
    containers, per se, made of water-soluble material.


CLS 510/297
TXT Pouchlike water-insoluble unit enclosure:

    Compositions under subclass 295 wherein the premeasured dose is contained
    in a pouchlike enclosure made of water-insoluble material, which may,
    however, be water-permeable so that the cleaning composition can be
    dispersed or dissolved in water.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 524.1+ for packages or
    containers, per se, wherein the material for the container or content is
    specified.


CLS 510/298
TXT Solid, shaped article (e.g., tablet, briquette, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 295 wherein the premeasured dose is in the form
    of a unitary solid article possessing particular macroscopic shape.


CLS 510/299
TXT With soil release or antisoiling component:

    Compositions under subclass 276 which additionally include a component
    which either retards resoiling of an article laundered therewith or
    facilitates the removal of newly accumulated soil in a subsequent
    laundering operation.


CLS 510/300
TXT Enzyme component of specific activity or source (e.g., protease, of
    bacterial origin, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 299 which additionally include an enzyme
    component the activity or source of which is explicitly stated.

    (1)     Note. For purposes of this subclass, the activity (e.g., protease,
    etc.) or source (e.g., of bacterial origin, etc.) of the enzyme component
    must be recited in the claims.

    (2)     Note. Compositions merely reciting an "enzyme" are excluded from
    this subclass.


CLS 510/301
TXT With photoactivator component or photobleaching function (e.g., porphine
    component, requiring use of visible or UV light, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 276 which additionally include a specific
    component which is a photoactivator or possesses a photobleaching function
    (i.e., requiring the presence of light).

    (1)     Note. Such compositions are primarily designed for operations
    wherein the laundered articles are line-dried, preferably outdoors.


CLS 510/302
TXT With oxygen or halogen containing chemical bleach or oxidant component:

    Compositions under subclass 276 which additionally include a chemical
    bleach or oxidant component which contains oxygen or halogen.

    (1)     Note. A chemical bleach may be an oxidizing agent (e.g., chlorine,
    inorganic peroxide, etc.) or a reducing agent, such as sodium hydrogen
    sulfite, sulfur dioxide, etc.


CLS 510/303
TXT Liquid composition:

    Compositions under subclass 302 which are in the form of a liquid.


CLS 510/304
TXT Nonaqueous liquid:

    Compositions under subclass 303 which are substantially free of water.


CLS 510/305
TXT Enzyme component of specific activity or source (e.g., lipase, of bacterial
    origin, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 302 which additionally include an enzyme
    component the activity or source of which is explicitly stated.

    (1)     Note. For purpose of this and indented subclasses, the activity
    (e.g., protease, etc.) or source (e.g., of bacterial origin, etc.) of the
    enzyme component must be recited in the claims.

    (2)     Note. Compositions merely reciting an "enzyme" are excluded from
    this and indented subclasses.


CLS 510/306
TXT Proteolytic enzyme:

    Compositions under subclass 305 wherein the component is a proteolytic
    enzyme (i.e., an enzyme which decomposes protein-containing contaminants,
    thus facilitating their removal).


CLS 510/307
TXT With oxygen, nitrogen, or sulfur containing optical brightener:

    Compositions under subclass 302 which additionally include a component
    containing oxygen, nitrogen, or sulfur which fluoresces and imparts a
    brighter, less dingy (e.g., white or bluish) hue to the laundered article.

    (1)     Note. Optical brighteners are also referred to as optical bleaches,
    which are distinct from chemical bleaches.


CLS 510/308
TXT With oxygen, nitrogen, or sulfur containing textile softening or antistatic
    component:

    Compositions under subclass 302 which additionally include a component
    which contains oxygen, nitrogen, or sulfur, and which reduces the amount of
    static in, or imparts a softer feel or hand to, articles laundered
    therewith.


CLS 510/309
TXT Peroxy component:

    Compositions under subclass 302 wherein the chemical bleach or oxidant
    component contains a peroxy substituent (i.e., -O-O-).


CLS 510/310
TXT Percarboxylic acid component or salt thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 309 wherein the peroxy component contains a
    percarboxylic acid substituent (-C(=O)-O-OH) or a salt of such an acid.


CLS 510/311
TXT With heavy metal containing catalyst or activator (e.g., containing Mn, Cu,
    Fe, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 309 which additionally include a heavy metal
    containing component (i.e., metal having a specific gravity of at least 4)
    which accelerates or facilitates the bleaching action, especially when
    washing at lower temperatures.


CLS 510/312
TXT With nitrogen or oxygen containing bleach precursor or activator (e.g.,
    ester, acid anhydride, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 309 which additionally include a nitrogen or
    oxygen containing component which acts as a precursor or activator for the
    peroxy bleach component by increasing its bleaching capacity, especially at
    lower washing temperatures.

    (1)     Note. The activator component may act as a percarboxylic acid or
    salt bleach precursor, such acid or salt being formed in the presence of an
    inorganic peroxide.


CLS 510/313
TXT Carbonyl single bonded to nitrogen in the activator or precursor (e.g.,
    amide, imide, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 312 wherein a carbonyl group is single bonded
    directly to the nitrogen atom of the activator or precursor component.


CLS 510/314
TXT Nitrogen multiple bonded to carbon in the activator or precursor (e.g.,
    cyano, imidoyl, trazino, etc., substituent):

    Compositions under subclass 312 wherein the activator or precursor
    component contains nitrogen which is bonded to carbon by a double or triple
    bond.


CLS 510/315
TXT With aluminosilicate component (e.g., synthetic zeolite, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 309 which additionally include a component
    which is a salt of an aluminosilicate.


CLS 510/316
TXT With soap component:

    Compositions under subclass 309 which include a component which is soap.


CLS 510/317
TXT With suds regulating or inorganic alkaline earth metal salt component:

    Compositions under subclass 309 which additionally include a component
    having a suds regulating function or which is the salt of an alkaline earth
    metal (Be, Mg, Ca, Sr, or Ba) with an inorganic acid.


CLS 510/318
TXT With polycarboxylic acid component, or salt or anhydride thereof (e.g.,
    carboxylic acid copolymer, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 309 which additionally include a component
    having plural carboxyl substituents attached to one another by direct or
    indirect nonionic bonding, or a salt or acid anhydride of such a component.


CLS 510/319
TXT With halogen, nitrogen, oxygen, or phosphorus containing antiseptic or
    biocidal component:

    Compositions under subclass 276 which additionally include an antiseptic or
    biocidal component which contains halogen, nitrogen, oxygen, or phosphorus.


CLS 510/320
TXT Enzyme component of specific activity or source (e.g., protease, of
    bacterial origin, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 276 which additionally include an enzyme
    component the activity or source of which is explicitly stated.

    (1)     Note. For purposes of this and indented subclasses, the activity
    (e.g., protease, etc.) or source (e.g., of bacterial origin, etc.) of the
    enzyme component must be recited in the claims.

    (2)     Note. Compositions merely reciting an "enzyme" are excluded from
    placement in this and indented subclasses as originals.


CLS 510/321
TXT Liquid composition (e.g., slurry, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 320 which are in the form of a liquid.


CLS 510/322
TXT With nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur containing textile softening or antistatic
    component:

    Compositions under subclass 320 which additionally include a component
    which contains oxygen, nitrogen or sulfur and which eliminates or reduces
    static electrical charge on, or imparts a softer feel or hand to, articles
    treated therewith in the course of laundering.


CLS 510/323
TXT With aluminosilicate component (e.g., ion-exchange zeolite, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 320 which include an aluminosilicate component,
    such as an alkali metal salt of an inorganic aluminosilicate.


CLS 510/324
TXT With nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur containing optical brightener:

    Compositions under subclass 276 which additionally include a component
    containing oxygen, nitrogen, or sulfur which fluoresces and imparts a
    brighter, less dingy (e.g., white or bluish) hue to the laundered article.

    (1)     Note. Optical brighteners are also referred to as optical bleaches,
    which are distinct from chemical bleaches.


CLS 510/325
TXT Liquid composition (e.g., slurry, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 324 which are in the form of a liquid.


CLS 510/326
TXT Process of preparing (other than mere combining of components):

    Processes under subclass 324 which involve specific process steps other
    than mere combining of components in any order.


CLS 510/327
TXT With nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur containing textile softening or antistatic
    component:

    Compositions under subclass 276 which additionally include a component
    which contains oxygen, nitrogen, or sulfur and which eliminates or reduces
    static electrical charge on, or imparts a softer feel or hand to, articles
    treated therewith in the course of laundering.


CLS 510/328
TXT Liquid composition (e.g., slurry, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 327 which are in the form of a liquid.


CLS 510/329
TXT Quaternary nitrogen or phosphorus, or heterocyclic nitrogen containing
    fabric softener or antistatic component:

    Compositions under subclass 328 which include a fabric softener or
    antistatic component which contains a quaternary nitrogen or phosphorus or
    a heterocyclic nitrogen substituent.


CLS 510/330
TXT Quaternary nitrogen or phosphorus, or heterocyclic nitrogen containing
    fabric softener or antistatic component:

    Compositions under subclass 327 which include a fabric softener or
    antistatic component which contains a quaternary nitrogen or phosphorus or
    a heterocyclic nitrogen substituent.


CLS 510/331
TXT Nonionic oxygen containing surfactant or polyacrylamide component:

    Compositions under subclass 330 which include a component which is a
    nonionic surfactant that contains oxygen, or which is polyacrylamide.

    (1)     Note. A nonionic surfactant is devoid of any anionic or cationic
    substituents.

    (2)     Note. See class definitions for further details on surfactants.


CLS 510/332
TXT Nitrogen single bonded to plural carbons in the component, or salt thereof
    (e.g., secondary or tertiary amine, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 327 wherein the textile softener or antistatic
    component contains nitrogen which is single bonded to more than one carbon.


CLS 510/333
TXT The component is a carboxamide or an amine oxide:

    Compositions under subclass 332 wherein the nitrogen containing component
    is a carboxamide or an amine oxide.


CLS 510/334
TXT Layered or swelling inorganic silicate containing component (e.g., smectite
    clay, bentonite, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 327 which include a component which is a
    layered or swelling inorganic silicate.

    (1)     Note. Such components usually impart a softer feel to the treated
    textile articles without imparting any antistatic properties.


CLS 510/335
TXT With component inhibiting corrosion of metal or vitreous enamel laundering
    equipment (other than inorganic silicate):

    Compositions under subclass 276 which additionally include a component
    which prevents the corrosion, such as tarnishing or discoloration, of metal
    or vitreous enamel laundering equipment which comes into contact with the
    cleaning agent, said component being other than an inorganic silicate salt.


CLS 510/336
TXT Gel, cream, or paste:

    Compositions under subclass 276 which are in the form of a gel, a cream, or
    a paste.


CLS 510/337
TXT Liquid composition (e.g., slurry, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 276 which are in the form of a liquid.


CLS 510/338
TXT Nonaqueous liquid:

    Compositions under subclass 337 which are substantially devoid of water.


CLS 510/339
TXT Alkali metal hydroxide or borate or whole plant or animal material
    component, or crude extract thereof (e.g., borax, sodium metaborate, flour,
    etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 337 which include a component which is a
    hydroxide or borate of an alkali metal (Li, Na, K, Rb, or Cs), or which is
    whole animal or plant material, or a crude extract of such material.


CLS 510/340
TXT Plural nonsoap organic surfactants (e.g., nonionic and anionically
    substituted, diverse nonionic surfactants, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 337 which include more than one organic
    surfactant other than soap.

    (1)     Note. See class definitions for further details on surfactants.


CLS 510/341
TXT Nitrogen containing organic surfactant devoid of covalently bonded anionic
    substituents (e.g., cationic, nonionic, etc., surfactant):

    Compositions under subclass 340 wherein at least one organic surfactant is
    devoid of any covalently bonded anionic substituents and contains nitrogen.


CLS 510/342
TXT Liquid alcohol or hydrocarbon component:

    Compositions under subclass 337 which include a liquid component which is
    an alcohol or a hydrocarbon.


CLS 510/343
TXT Colorant, soap, or organic silicon containing component:

    Compositions under subclass 337 which include a component which is a
    color-imparting substance, a soap or a silicon containing organic compound.


CLS 510/344
TXT Whole plant or animal material component or crude extract thereof (e.g.,
    glue, flour, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 276 which include a component which is whole
    animal or plant material, or a crude extract of such material.


CLS 510/345
TXT Alkali metal borate component (e.g., borax, sodium metaborate, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 276 which include a component which is an
    alkali metal salt of an oxygen containing inorganic acid of boron,
    generically known as borates.


CLS 510/346
TXT Sulfonium, phosphonium, or non-anionic sulfoxy containing organic component
    (e.g., sulfoxide, sulfonamide, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 276 which include an organic component which
    contains a sulfonium or phosphonium substituent or contains a covalently
    bonded sulfoxy substituent which does not form an anion in an aqueous
    solution at a neutral pH.


CLS 510/347
TXT Phosphate ester, wax, or organic silicon containing component (e.g.,
    defoamer, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 276 which include an organic component which
    has a silicon containing substituent, or which is a phosphate ester or a
    natural or synthetic hydrocarbon or ester wax.


CLS 510/348
TXT Titanium dioxide or inorganic alkaline earth metal salt component (e.g.,
    calcium or magnesium carbonate, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 276 which include a component which is titanium
    dioxide or is an inorganic salt of an alkaline earth metal (Be, Mg, Ca, Sr,
    or Ba).


CLS 510/349
TXT Coated, encapsulated, or impregnated particle component in a physically
    heterogeneous composition (e.g., coated or encapsulated particles mixed
    with powder, granules, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 276 which are physically heterogeneous and
    include as one of the components a particle which is coated, encapsulated,
    or impregnated with a diverse material.


CLS 510/350
TXT Nitrogen containing surfactant devoid of covalently bonded anionic
    substituents which is admixed with a diverse nonsoap surfactant:

    Compositions under subclass 276 which include a mixture of a surfactant
    other than soap with a diverse surfactant which is devoid of any covalently
    bonded anionic substituents and contains nitrogen.

    (1)     Note. Included herein, for example, are mixtures of higher fatty
    acid amides, such as di(hydroxyethyl) lauramide, with sodium sulfonates,
    such as dodecyl benzene sulfonate.


CLS 510/351
TXT Sulfur containing anionically substituted surfactant which is admixed with
    a diverse nonsoap surfactant:

    Compositions under subclass 276 which include a mixture of a surfactant
    other than soap with a diverse surfactant which includes at least one
    covalently bonded anionic substituent and contains sulfur.

    (1)     Note. Included herein, for example, are mixtures of sodium
    sulfonates, such as dodecyl benzene sulfonate, with polyethoxylated
    alcohols, such as lauryl alcohol.


CLS 510/352
TXT Plural sulfur-containing anionically substituted surfactants:

    Compositions under subclass 351 which include more than one surfactant each
    of which contains sulfur and at least one anionic substituent.


CLS 510/353
TXT Higher fatty acid component, or salt or glyceride ester thereof (e.g.,
    soap, vegetable oil, magnesium stearate, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 276 which include a component which is a higher
    fatty acid or its salt or a higher fatty acid ester of glycerine.


CLS 510/354
TXT With lime-soap dispersant:

    Compositions under subclass 353 which additionally include a component
    which disperses water-insoluble salts which are formed from soap in water
    having a high content of minerals, such as calcium or magnesium salts.

    (1)     Note. See (1) Note under subclass 154 for effects produced by the
    dispersant.


CLS 510/355
TXT With non-soap surfactant component:

    Compositions under subclass 353 which additionally include a surfactant
    component which is other than soap.

    (1)     Note. See class definition for the definition of soap.


CLS 510/356
TXT Oxygen containing surfactant devoid of covalently bonded anionic
    substituents (e.g., polyethoxylated alcohol, amine oxide etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 276 which include a surfactant which is free of
    covalently bonded anionic substituents and contains oxygen.


CLS 510/357
TXT Sulfur-containing, anionically substituted surfactant:

    Compositions under subclass 276 which include a surfactant which has at
    least one anionic substituent and contains sulfur.


CLS 510/358
TXT With higher fatty alcohol component:

    Compositions under subclass 357 which additionally include a component
    which is a fatty alcohol containing a straight chain of at least eight
    carbons.


CLS 510/359
TXT With inorganic phosphorus containing component:

    Compositions under subclass 357 which additionally include an inorganic
    component which contains phosphorus (e.g., builder salt, etc.).


CLS 510/360
TXT Poly(oxyalkylene) or plural carboxamido groups containing component (e.g.,
    polyvinyl pyrrolidone, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 276 which include a component which contains a
    poly(oxyalkylene) substituent or more than one carboxamido substituent.


CLS 510/361
TXT Polycarboxylic acid component, or acid anhydride or salt thereof (e.g.,
    sodium citrate, maleic anhydride polymer, polyacrylic acid, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 276 which include a component which contains
    more than one carboxyl group attached to one another by direct or indirect
    nonionic bonding, or an acid anhydride or salt of the component.


CLS 510/362
TXT For removing soap scum or curd or combustion residues (e.g., carbon
    deposits, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 109 specialized for removing deposits of
    water-insoluble salts of higher fatty acids or for removing combustion
    residues, such as carbon, from a solid surface.

    (1)     Note. The scum or curd residues are formed primarily by alkaline
    earth metal salts of fatty acids, and are also referred to as lime soaps.


CLS 510/363
TXT For removing stains caused by iron, aluminum, or protein containing
    material (e.g., rust, aluminum marks, blood, food, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 109 specialized for removing from a solid
    surface stains or marks caused by an iron, aluminum, or protein containing
    substance.


CLS 510/364
TXT For displacing organic liquid film from a solid surface:

    Compositions under subclass 109 specialized for removing an organic liquid
    film from a solid surface via displacement.


CLS 510/365
TXT For removing greasy or oily contaminant from a substrate:

    Compositions under subclass 109 specialized for removing from a substrate a
    greasy or oily contaminant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclasses 31 and 40 for
    processes of removing an oily or greasy contaminant.


CLS 510/366
TXT For removing asphalt, tar, or hardened cementitious material (e.g.,
    concrete, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 109 specialized for removing asphalt, tar, or
    hardened cementitious material from a substrate.

    (1)     Note. A hardened cementitious material is produced by drying a
    composition which includes an inorganic settable ingredient.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, subclass 40 for processes
    of removing tar.


CLS 510/367
TXT With oxygen or halogen containing chemical bleach or oxidant component:

    Compositions under subclass 108 which additionally include a chemical
    bleach or oxidant component which contains oxygen or halogen.

    (1)     Note. A chemical bleach may be an oxidizing agent (e.g., chlorine,
    inorganic peroxide, etc.) or a reducing agent, such as sodium hydrogen
    sulfite, sulfur dioxide, etc.


CLS 510/368
TXT With scrubbing or scouring component (e.g., containing an abrasive, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 367 which additionally include a component
    which facilitates cleaning by exerting a scrubbing or scouring action.


CLS 510/369
TXT Liquid composition (e.g., slurry, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 368 which are in the form of a liquid.


CLS 510/370
TXT Liquid, paste, foam, or gel (e.g., slurry, aerosol composition or package,
    etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 367 which are in the form of a liquid, a paste,
    foam, or a gel.


CLS 510/371
TXT Nonaqueous liquid:

    Compositions under subclass 370 wherein the liquid composition is
    substantially devoid of water.


CLS 510/372
TXT The bleach or oxidant component contains peroxy:

    Compositions under subclass 370 wherein the chemical bleach or oxidant
    component contains a peroxy group (-O-O-).


CLS 510/373
TXT Colorant, amine or phosphine oxide, or nonanionic sulfoxy containing
    organic component:

    Compositions under subclass 370 including a component which is a
    color-imparting substance, an amine or phosphine oxide, or contains a
    sulfoxy substituent which does not form an anion in an aqueous solution at
    a neutral pH.


CLS 510/374
TXT With enzyme component of specific activity or source (e.g., protease, of
    bacterial origin, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 367 which additionally include an enzyme
    component the activity or source of which is explicitly stated.

    (1)     Note. For purpose of this subclass, the activity (e.g., protease,
    etc.) or source (e.g., of bacterial origin, etc.) of the enzyme component
    must be recited in the claims.

    (2)     Note. Compositions merely reciting an "enzyme" are excluded from
    this subclass.


CLS 510/375
TXT The bleach or oxidant component contains peroxy:

    Compositions under subclass 367 wherein the chemical bleach or oxidant
    component contains a peroxy group (-O-O-).


CLS 510/376
TXT With heavy metal, nitrogen, or oxygen containing activator, catalyst, or
    precursor:

    Compositions under subclass 375 which additionally contain a component
    which contains a heavy metal, nitrogen, or oxygen and functions as an
    activator, catalyst, or precursor for the peroxy component.

    (1)     Note. See the definition for subclass 311 for details on the heavy
    metal containing catalyst or activator.

    (2)     Note. See the definition for subclass 312 for details on the bleach
    activator component.


CLS 510/377
TXT Aluminosilicate or soap component:

    Compositions under subclass 375 which include an aluminosilicate component,
    such as an alkali metal salt of an inorganic aluminosilicate, or which is
    soap.

    (1)     Note. An example of the aluminosilicate salt is a natural or
    synthetic zeolite.


CLS 510/378
TXT Perborate salt component:

    Compositions under subclass 375 wherein the peroxy component is a salt of
    perboric acid.


CLS 510/379
TXT Chlorine-containing bleach or oxidant component:

    Compositions under subclass 367 wherein the chemical bleach or oxidant
    component contains chlorine.


CLS 510/380
TXT The component is a hypochlorite salt:

    Compositions under subclass 379 wherein the chlorine-containing component
    is a salt of hypochlorous acid.


CLS 510/381
TXT The component is organic (e.g., chloro(iso)cyanurate derivative, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 379 wherein the chlorine-containing component
    is an organic compound.


CLS 510/382
TXT With halogen, nitrogen, oxygen, or phosphorus containing antiseptic or
    biocidal component:

    Compositions under subclass 108 which include an antiseptic or biocidal
    component which contains halogen, nitrogen, oxygen, or phosphorus.


CLS 510/383
TXT Liquid, paste, or gel:

    Compositions under subclass 382 which are in the form of a liquid, a paste,
    or a gel.


CLS 510/384
TXT Quaternary ammonium containing antiseptic or biocidal component:

    Compositions under subclass 383 wherein the antiseptic or biocidal
    component is a quaternary ammonium compound.


CLS 510/385
TXT Elemental iodine antiseptic or biocidal component:

    Compositions under subclass 383 wherein the antiseptic or biocidal
    component is elemental iodine.


CLS 510/386
TXT Hydroxyphenyl or halophenyl moiety in the antiseptic or biocidal component
    (e.g., phenol, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 383 wherein the antiseptic or biocidal
    component contains a hydroxyphenyl or halophenyl moiety.


CLS 510/387
TXT Halophenyl moiety in the antiseptic or biocidal component:

    Compositions under subclass 382 wherein the antiseptic or biocidal
    component contains a halophenyl moiety.


CLS 510/388
TXT Halogenated hydroxyphenyl moiety in the antiseptic or biocidal component:

    Compositions under subclass 387 wherein the antiseptic or biocidal
    component includes a halogen-containing phenol moiety.


CLS 510/389
TXT Soap component:

    Compositions under subclass 382 which include soap as a component.


CLS 510/390
TXT Heavy metal, heterocyclic nitrogen, or organic phosphorus containing
    antiseptic or biocidal component:

    Compositions under subclass 389 wherein the antiseptic or biocidal
    component is a compound which contains a heavy metal (i.e., having a
    specific gravity of at least 4), a nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring,
    or an organic phosphorus-containing substituent.


CLS 510/391
TXT Quaternary ammonium or sulfonium or iodine containing antiseptic or
    biocidal component (e.g., elemental iodine, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 382 wherein the antiseptic or biocidal
    component contains iodine or a quaternary ammonium or sulfonium substituent.


CLS 510/392
TXT Enzyme component of specific activity or source (e.g., protease; of
    bacterial origin; etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 108 which include an enzyme component the
    activity or source of which is explicitly stated.

    (1)     Note. For purposes of this and indented subclasses, the activity
    (e.g., protease, etc.) or source (e.g., of bacterial origin, etc.) of the
    enzyme component must be recited in the claims.

    (2)     Note. Compositions merely reciting an "enzyme" are excluded from
    placement in this and the indented subclass as originals.


CLS 510/393
TXT Liquid composition (e.g., slurry, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 392 which are in the form of a liquid.


CLS 510/394
TXT With nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur containing optical brightener, ultraviolet
    absorber, antistatic or fiber softening component:

    Compositions under subclass 108 which additionally include a component
    containing oxygen, nitrogen, or sulfur which absorbs ultraviolet radiation,
    or which fluoresces and imparts a brighter, less dingy (e.g., white or
    bluish) hue to a substrate, or which eliminates or reduces static
    electrical charge on the cleaned substrate, or imparts a softer feel to
    fibrous articles treated therewith in the course of cleaning.

    (1)     Note. Optical brighteners are also referred to as optical bleaches,
    which are distinct from chemical bleaches.

    (2)     Note. The optical brightener may be present to improve the
    appearance of the cleaning composition, per se, rather than brightening the
    substrate cleaned therewith.

    (3)     Note. The fibrous articles which are softened herein are generic in
    nature and include non-textile fibers, such as hair, etc.


CLS 510/395
TXT With scrubbing or scouring component (e.g., containing an abrasive, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 108 which additionally include a component
    which facilitates cleaning by exerting a scrubbing or scouring action.


CLS 510/396
TXT Cream; paste; gel; solid, shaped article; or gas-propelled composition
    (e.g., bar, aerosol, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 395 which are in the form of a cream, paste,
    gel, solid article possessing particular macroscopic physical shape, other
    than mere granules, or are in the form of a composition which is dispensed
    by the release of pressurized gas.


CLS 510/397
TXT Liquid composition (e.g., slurry, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 395 which are in the form of a liquid.


CLS 510/398
TXT Polycarboxylic acid component, or acid anhydride, salt, or ester thereof
    (e.g., maleic anhydride polymer, polyacrylic acid, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 397 which include a component which contains
    plural carboxyl groups attached to one another by direct or indirect
    nonionic bonding, or an acid anhydride, salt, or ester of the component.


CLS 510/399
TXT Soap component:

    Compositions under subclass 395 which include a component which is soap.


CLS 510/400
TXT With soil-release, anti-soiling, coating or nonabrasive polishing component
    (e.g., with polysiloxane, chalk, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 108 which additionally include a component
    which (a) retards resoiling of a surface cleaned therewith or (b)
    facilitates the removal of newly accumulated soil in a subsequent cleaning
    operation or (c) forms a coating on a surface cleaned therewith or (d) is a
    nonabrasive polishing agent.


CLS 510/401
TXT With metal-corrosion inhibiting component (i.e., preventing corrosion, such
    as tarnishing, discoloration, etc., of metal equipment which is in contact
    with the cleaning composition):

    Compositions under subclass 108 which additionally include a component
    which inhibits the corrosion of metal which comes into contact with the
    cleaning composition.


CLS 510/402
TXT Sulfur or nitrogen containing organic substituent in the component:

    Compositions under subclass 401 wherein the metal-corrosion inhibiting
    component is an organic compound which includes a sulfur or nitrogen
    containing substituent.


CLS 510/403
TXT Gel or malleable composition (e.g., plastic-like, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 108 which are in the form of a gel or are
    capable of being shaped by manual pressure.


CLS 510/404
TXT Cream or paste:

    Compositions under subclass 108 which are in the form of a cream or a paste.


CLS 510/405
TXT Liquid composition:

    Compositions under subclass 108 which are in the form of a liquid.


CLS 510/406
TXT Packaged or gas-propelled composition:

    Compositions under subclass 405 which are enclosed in a package or
    container or are dispensed by the release of pressurized gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 524.1+ for packages or
    containers, per se, wherein the material for the container or content is
    specified.


CLS 510/407
TXT Nonaqueous liquid:

    Compositions under subclass 405 which are substantially devoid of water.


CLS 510/408
TXT Azeotropic or azeotrope-like composition:

    Compositions under subclass 407 which are substantially constant boiling,
    and which approximate or duplicate the behavior of a single-substance
    solvent at a given temperature.

    (1)     Note. The distillates of azeotropes have the same composition as
    the original mixture.


CLS 510/409
TXT Nitrogen containing component:

    Compositions under subclass 408 which include a component which contains
    nitrogen.


CLS 510/410
TXT Ternary composition:

    Compositions under subclass 408 which consist of three distinct components.


CLS 510/411
TXT Oxygen containing component:

    Compositions under subclass 408 which include a component which contains
    oxygen.


CLS 510/412
TXT Halogenated hydrocarbon component:

    Compositions under subclass 407 which include a component which is a
    halogen-containing hydrocarbon.


CLS 510/413
TXT Polyoxyalkylene containing surfactant devoid of covalently bonded anionic
    substituents:

    Compositions under subclass 407 which include a surfactant which is free of
    any covalently bonded anionic substituents and contains a polyoxyalkylene
    group.


CLS 510/414
TXT Sulfur containing anionically substituted surfactant:

    Compositions under subclass 407 which include a surfactant which contains
    sulfur and includes an anionic substituent.

    (1)     Note. The distillates of azeotropes have the same composition as
    the original mixture.


CLS 510/415
TXT Azeotropic or azeotrope-like composition:

    Compositions under subclass 405 which are substantially constant boiling
    and which approximate or duplicate the behavior of a single-substance
    solvent at a given temperature.


CLS 510/416
TXT Opaque or pearlescent composition:

    Compositions under subclass 405 which are impervious to light or which have
    a pearly shine or gloss.


CLS 510/417
TXT Plural immiscible liquid phases (e.g., emulsion, oily and aqueous layers,
    etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 405 which have at least two liquid phases which
    are physically incompatible.


CLS 510/418
TXT Liquid and solid phases (e.g., suspension, slurry, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 405 which include at least one solid component
    which is insoluble in the liquid phase.


CLS 510/419
TXT With colorant component:

    Compositions under subclass 405 which include a component which is a
    color-imparting substance.


CLS 510/420
TXT Alkali metal or ammonium borate, or crude plant or animal material extract
    component (e.g., borax, sour milk, soap bark extract, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 405 which include a component which is an
    alkali metal or ammonium salt of a boron and oxygen containing inorganic
    acid, or is a crude extract of whole plant or animal material.


CLS 510/421
TXT Polyoxyalkylene containing surfactant devoid of covalently bonded anionic
    substituents:

    Compositions under subclass 405 which include a surfactant which is free of
    any covalently bonded anionic substituents and contains a polyoxyalkylene
    moiety.


CLS 510/422
TXT With diverse nonsoap surfactant:

    Compositions under subclass 421 which additionally include a diverse
    surfactant other than soap.

    (1)     Note. See the class definition for details on what constitutes soap.


CLS 510/423
TXT Nitrogen or phosphorus in surfactant devoid of covalently bonded anionic
    substituents:

    Compositions under subclass 422 wherein at least one organic surfactant
    contains nitrogen or phosphorus and is free of covalently bonded anionic
    substituents.


CLS 510/424
TXT Sulfur containing anionically substituted surfactant:

    Compositions under subclass 422 which include a surfactant which contains
    sulfur and a covalently bonded anionic substituent.


CLS 510/425
TXT With soap or diverse sulfur containing surfactant component:

    Compositions under subclass 424 which additionally include a component
    which is soap or a different surfactant which contains sulfur.

    (1)     Note. See class definitions for details on what constitutes soap.


CLS 510/426
TXT Sulfur containing anionically substituted surfactant:

    Compositions under subclass 405 which include a surfactant which contains
    sulfur and a covalently bonded anionic substituent.


CLS 510/427
TXT With diverse nonsoap surfactant:

    Compositions under subclass 426 which additionally include a diverse
    surfactant other than soap.

    (1)     Note. See the class definition for details on what constitutes a
    soap surfactant.


CLS 510/428
TXT Plural anionically substituted sulfur containing surfactants:

    Compositions under subclass 427 which include at least two distinct
    surfactants each of which contains sulfur and a covalently bonded anionic
    substituent.


CLS 510/429
TXT Sulfonate surfactant with sulfate monoester surfactant:

    Compositions under subclass 428 wherein the anionically substituted
    surfactants include a sulfonate and a sulfate monoester.


CLS 510/430
TXT With soap component:

    Compositions under subclass 426 which additionally include a component
    which is soap.


CLS 510/431
TXT Organic phosphorus containing component:

    Compositions under subclass 426 which include an organic component which
    contains phosphorus.


CLS 510/432
TXT Organic solvent component:

    Compositions under subclass 426 which include a component which is an
    organic solvent.


CLS 510/433
TXT Nitrogen in organic surfactant devoid of covalently bonded anionic
    substituents:

    Compositions under subclass 405 which include an organic surfactant which
    contains nitrogen and is free of any covalently bonded anionic substituents.


CLS 510/434
TXT Polycarboxylic acid component, or acid anhydride or salt thereof (e.g.,
    acrylic acid polymer, maleic anhydride, sodium citrate, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 405 which include a component which contains
    plural carboxyl groups attached to one another by direct or indirect
    nonionic bonding, or an acid anhydride or salt of the component.


CLS 510/435
TXT Ammonia or alkali metal hydroxide or carbonate component:

    Compositions under subclass 405 which include a component which is ammonia
    or is a hydroxide or carbonate of an alkali metal (Li, Na, K, Rb, or Cs).


CLS 510/436
TXT Organic phosphorus containing component:

    Compositions under subclass 405 which include an organic component which
    contains phosphorus.


CLS 510/437
TXT Higher fatty acid component or salt or ester thereof (e.g., soap, vegetable
    oil, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 405 which include a component which is a higher
    fatty acid or a salt or ester of such acid.


CLS 510/438
TXT Heterogeneous arrangement (e.g., mixture of macroscopic particles differing
    in physical or chemical composition, etc.; liquid component encapsulated in
    or sorbed on solid material, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 108 in the form of a particulate heterogeneous
    arrangement of two or more components which differ from each other
    chemically or physically.


CLS 510/439
TXT Package or dosing unit (e.g., sachet, wrapped cake soap, etc.):

    Arrangements under subclass 438 which are in the form of a package or of a
    premeasured unit dose sufficient for a single cleaning operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 524.1+ for packages or
    containers, per se, wherein the material for the container or content is
    specified.


CLS 510/440
TXT Bar or cake (e.g., having segments of different color, solubility, etc.):

    Arrangements under subclass 438 which are in the form or a bar or cake.


CLS 510/441
TXT Coated or encapsulated solid material, or process of preparing:

    Arrangements under subclass 438 which include a solid component which is
    coated with or encapsulated in a solid material of diverse chemical
    composition, or processes of preparing the arrangements.


CLS 510/442
TXT Aqueous coating agent:

    Arrangements under subclass 441 wherein the coating agent is applied from
    an aqueous medium, or processes of preparing the arrangements.


CLS 510/443
TXT Spray-dried component, or process of preparing (e.g., postdosed
    composition, etc.):

    Arrangements under subclass 438 which include a spray-dried component which
    is admixed with one or more diverse components, or processes of preparing
    the arrangements.

    (1)     Note. See the definition for subclass 452 for details on spray
    drying.


CLS 510/444
TXT Agglomerated product or component, or process of preparing:

    Products under subclass 438 which are granular or particulate in form and
    are made by binding together very fine particles, such as powder, by means
    of a liquid or liquefiable binder, such as aqueous sodium silicate, in an
    agitated environment, such as a fluidized bed; processes of preparing the
    products; or heterogeneous arrangements comprising an agglomerated
    component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry: Physical Processes, subclasses 313+ for processes of
    forming a nondetergent agglomerated product, per se.

    264,    Plastic or Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    subclasses 109+ for processes of forming nondetergent agglomerates, per se.


CLS 510/445
TXT Solid, shaped macroscopic article or structure (e.g., pellet, film, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 108 in the form of articles or structures which
    are solid, visible to the naked eye, and possess particular physical shape
    or structure.


CLS 510/446
TXT Of compacted powdery or granular material (e.g., tablet, briquette, etc):

    Articles under subclass 445 which are prepared by compacting or compressing
    powdery or granular material.


CLS 510/447
TXT Bar or cake:

    Articles under subclass 445 which are in the form of a bar or cake.


CLS 510/448
TXT With lime-soap dispersant:

    Articles under subclass 447 which include a component which disperses
    water-insoluble salts formed from soap in water having a high content of
    minerals, such as calcium or magnesium salts.


CLS 510/449
TXT Having discrete indentation or protuberance:

    Articles under subclass 447 the surfaces of which have one or more discrete
    indentations or protuberances.


CLS 510/450
TXT With anionically substituted non-soap surfactant and soap component:

    Articles under subclass 447 which include a surfactant that is other than
    soap and carries a covalently bonded anionic substituent, and a soap
    component.


CLS 510/451
TXT Extruded product, or process of preparing (e.g., noodles, etc.):

    Structures under subclass 445 which are shaped by extruding a semifluid
    material through an aperture having a particular shape, or processes of
    preparing the products.


CLS 510/452
TXT Spray-dried product, or process of preparing:

    Structures under subclass 445 in the form of a particulate product made by
    spraying a solution, melt, or slurry of cleaning composition ingredients
    into a heated atmosphere, or processes of preparing the products.

    (1)     Note. The heated atmosphere facilitates the removal of the liquid
    medium and formation of the solid particles, which are usually spherelike
    and hollow.


CLS 510/453
TXT Inorganic phosphorus containing component:

    Structures under subclass 452 which include an inorganic component which
    contains phosphorus.


CLS 510/454
TXT Soap component:

    Structures under subclass 452 which include soap as a component.


CLS 510/455
TXT Gas-filled void containing (e.g., foamed particle, hollow pellet, etc.):

    Structures under subclass 445 which are macroscopic, solid, and contain
    gas-filled voids which may be open or closed.


CLS 510/456
TXT Spray cooling process, or product thereof:

    Processes under subclass 108 wherein a particulate solid product is
    produced by spraying a hot melt, solution, or slurry of the cleaning
    composition components into a cool atmosphere, or products of such
    processes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    452+,   for spray-dried products and processes.


CLS 510/457
TXT Heat drying process, or product thereof:

    Processes under subclass 108 wherein a particulate solid product is
    produced by drying a solution or slurry of the cleaning composition
    components on an evaporative surface, such as a rotating drum or roll, or
    on a stationary hot plate, or products of such processes.

    (1)     Note. The dried composition is usually separated from the hot
    surface in the form of a sheet, or the like, and subsequently subdivided
    (e.g., by grinding) into particulate form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    452+,   for spray-dried products and processes.


CLS 510/458
TXT Process of making a soap containing composition by saponification of an
    ester, or product thereof:

    Processes under subclass 108 wherein a composition containing soap is
    produced by converting an ester of a higher fatty or rosin acid, usually a
    glyceride, such as animal fat or vegetable oil, into a salt of the acid and
    into the corresponding alcohol, usually by means of an alkaline material,
    such as sodium hydroxide; or products of such processes.

    (1)     Note. See the class definition for a definition of soap.


CLS 510/459
TXT With subsequent processing, or product thereof (e.g., postdosing of other
    components, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 458 wherein the saponification step is followed by
    an additional processing step or steps to obtain the finished product, or
    products of such processes.


CLS 510/460
TXT With boron or silicon containing inorganic component or cellular animal or
    plant material component (e.g., potato pulp, flour, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 458 which include a component which is inorganic
    and contains boron or silicon, or which is of animal or plant origin and
    retains its original cellular structure; or products of such processes.


CLS 510/461
TXT Specific organic component (e.g., triazines, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 108 which are in solid form and include an
    organic component in which at least one of the constituent atoms, in
    addition to carbon, is known or can be deduced with certainty.

    (1)     Note. For purposes of this and indented subclasses, the term
    "organic material" is considered too broad, as are materials recited in
    terms of mere function, such as "perfume," "anionic surfactant," etc.

    (2)     Note. See the class definition, paragraph IV, F, concerning
    placement of patents wherein the physical form of the composition is not
    explicitly recited in the claims.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403,    for compositions which are in the form of a gel and which are of
    general utility.

    404,    for compositions which are in the form of a cream or paste and
    which are of general utility.

    405+,   for liquid compositions which are of general utility.


CLS 510/462
TXT Cellular animal or plant material (e.g., tree bark, leather, flour,
    cellulose fiber, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 461 wherein the organic component is of animal
    or plant origin and retains its original cellular structure.


CLS 510/463
TXT Crude animal or plant material extract (e.g., pine oil, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 461 wherein the organic component is a crude,
    unrefined extract of animal or plant material.


CLS 510/464
TXT Lignin:

    Compositions under subclass 461 wherein the organic component is lignin.


CLS 510/465
TXT Boron in the component:

    Compositions under subclass 461 wherein the organic component contains
    boron.


CLS 510/466
TXT Silicon in the component:

    Compositions under subclass 461 wherein the organic component contains
    silicon.


CLS 510/467
TXT Phosphorus in the component:

    Compositions under subclass 461 wherein the organic component contains
    phosphorus.


CLS 510/468
TXT Phospholipid (e.g., lecithin, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 467 wherein the component is a phosphoric acid
    glycerol ester containing a higher fatty acid moiety.


CLS 510/469
TXT Carbon bonded directly to the phosphorus (e.g., phosphonic acid or salt or
    ester thereof, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 467 wherein the phosphorus is bonded directly
    to a carbon atom.


CLS 510/470
TXT Carbohydrate:

    Compositions under subclass 461 wherein the organic component is a
    carbohydrate.


CLS 510/471
TXT Containing carboxyl group or salt thereof (e.g., carboxymethyl cellulose,
    etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 470 wherein the carbohydrate contains a
    carboxyl substituent, or a salt of the substituent.


CLS 510/472
TXT With organic sulfoxy containing component:

    Compositions under subclass 471 which additionally contain an organic
    component containing a sulfoxy substituent.


CLS 510/473
TXT Cellulose:

    Compositions under subclass 470 wherein the carbohydrate is cellulose.


CLS 510/474
TXT Starch:

    Compositions under subclass 470 wherein the carbohydrate is starch.


CLS 510/475
TXT Synthetic polymer or natural rubber (other than polyether, such as
    polyethylene glycol, alkylene oxide condensation products, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 461 wherein the organic component is a
    synthetic polymer, other than a polyether, or is natural rubber.


CLS 510/476
TXT Carboxylic acid anhydride, free carboxyl group, or salt thereof in the
    polymer:

    Compositions under subclass 475 wherein the polymer contains a carboxylic
    acid anhydride or a free carboxyl substituent, or is a salt of the carboxyl
    substituent.


CLS 510/477
TXT Polycarboxylic acid component, or salt thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 461 wherein the organic component contains
    plural carboxyl substituents attached to one another by direct or indirect
    nonionic bonding, or is a salt of such substituents.


CLS 510/478
TXT With alkali metal carbonate or bicarbonate component:

    Compositions under subclass 477 which additionally contain a component
    which is a carbonate or bicarbonate salt of an alkali metal (Li, Na, K, Rb,
    or Cs).


CLS 510/479
TXT Ether group in the polycarboxylic component:

    Compositions under subclass 477 wherein the polycarboxylic component
    contains an ether substituent.


CLS 510/480
TXT Nitrogen attached to the polycarboxylic component by nonionic bonding
    (e.g., nitrilotriacetate salt, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 477 wherein the polycarboxylic component
    contains a nitrogen substituent which is attached to the component by
    nonionic bonding which may be direct or indirect.


CLS 510/481
TXT Soap:

    Compositions under subclass 461 wherein the organic component is soap.


CLS 510/482
TXT With lime-soap dispersant:

    Compositions under subclass 481 which include a component which disperses
    water-insoluble salts formed from soap in water having a high content of
    minerals, such as calcium or magnesium salts.


CLS 510/483
TXT Transparent or translucent composition, or process of preparing:

    Compositions under subclass 481 which transmit substantially all incident
    radiation in the visible spectrum range, or processes of preparing the
    compositions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147,    for transparent or translucent solid, shaped articles intended for
    use on human skin.


CLS 510/484
TXT With hydrocarbon or organic sulfoxy containing component:

    Compositions under subclass 481 which additionally contain a component
    which is a hydrocarbon or is an organic compound containing a sulfoxy
    substituent.


CLS 510/485
TXT With clay, aluminum, or heavy metal containing component:

    Compositions under subclass 481 which additionally include a component
    which is clay or contains aluminum or heavy metal.


CLS 510/486
TXT With boron, silicon, or phosphorus containing inorganic component:

    Compositions under subclass 481 which additionally include an inorganic
    component which contains boron, silicon, or phosphorus.


CLS 510/487
TXT Natural resin (e.g., rosin, shellac, tall oil, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 461 wherein the organic component is a natural
    resin.

    (1)     Note. Tall oil is included in this subclass because it comprises a
    mixture of higher fatty acids with rosin acids.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    481+,   for compositions which contain soaps of rosin acids.


CLS 510/488
TXT Carboxylic acid, or salt thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 461 wherein the organic component is a
    carboxylic acid or its salt.


CLS 510/489
TXT Sulfur attached indirectly to the carboxyl group by nonionic bonding, or
    salt thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 488 wherein the carboxyl or carboxylic salt
    group is attached indirectly to sulfur by nonionic bonding.


CLS 510/490
TXT Nitrogen attached indirectly to the carboxyl group by nonionic bonding, or
    salt thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 488 wherein the carboxyl or carboxylic salt
    group is attached indirectly to nitrogen by nonionic bonding.


CLS 510/491
TXT Higher fatty acid or salt thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 488 wherein the organic component is an
    optionally substituted higher fatty acid or its salt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    481+,   for cleaning compositions containing soap.


CLS 510/492
TXT Sulfur in the component:

    Compositions under subclass 461 wherein the organic component contains
    sulfur.


CLS 510/493
TXT Sulfoxy (e.g., dimethyl sulfoxide, sulfone, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 492 wherein at least one oxygen is double
    bonded to the sulfur.


CLS 510/494
TXT Nitrogen attached directly or indirectly to the sulfoxy group by nonionic
    bonding:

    Compositions under subclass 493 wherein the sulfoxy group is attached
    directly or indirectly to nitrogen by nonionic bonding.


CLS 510/495
TXT Sulfonic acid or sulfate monoester substituent in the component, or salt
    thereof:

    Compositions under subclass 493 wherein the organic component contains a
    sulfonic acid or sulfate monoester substituent or is a salt of the
    substituent.


CLS 510/496
TXT With nitrogen containing organic component devoid of covalently bonded
    anionic substituents:

    Compositions under subclass 495 which additionally include an organic
    component which is devoid of any covalently bonded anionic substituents and
    contains nitrogen.


CLS 510/497
TXT With nonionic hydroxy containing organic component (e.g., alcohol, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 495 which additionally include an organic
    component which contains a hydroxy substituent and is nonionic.


CLS 510/498
TXT With diverse sulfonic acid or sulfate monoester component, or salt thereof
    (e.g., sulfate and sulfonate, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 495 which include at least two distinct organic
    components, each carrying a sulfonic acid or sulfate monoester substituent,
    or a salt of the substituent.


CLS 510/499
TXT Nitrogen in the component (except triazines) (e.g., amine, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 461 wherein the organic component includes
    nitrogen, and is other than a triazine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    461,    for compositions which contain triazines.


CLS 510/500
TXT Heterocyclic nitrogen (except triazines):

    Compositions under subclass 499 wherein nitrogen forms part of a
    heterocyclic ring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    461,    for compositions which contain triazines.


CLS 510/501
TXT Amido nitrogen (e.g., urea, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 499 wherein the organic component contains an
    amido substituent (i.e., a carbonyl group, -C(=O)-, is bonded directly to
    the nitrogen).


CLS 510/502
TXT Hydroxy in the component:

    Compositions under subclass 501 wherein the amido-containing component also
    contains a hydroxy substituent.


CLS 510/503
TXT Amine oxide:

    Compositions under subclass 499 wherein the nitrogen containing component
    is an amine oxide.


CLS 510/504
TXT Quaternary ammonium:

    Compositions under subclass 499 wherein the organic component contains a
    quaternary ammonium substituent.


CLS 510/505
TXT Oxygen in the component (except substituted triazines):

    Compositions under subclass 461 wherein the organic component contains
    oxygen, other than as a triazine substituent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    461,    for compositions which contain a substituted triazine.


CLS 510/506
TXT Ether:

    Compositions under subclass 505 wherein the oxygen is present in the form
    of an ether substituent.


CLS 510/507
TXT Clay or inorganic aluminosilicate salt component (e.g., bentonite, zeolite,
    etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 108 which are solid and include an inorganic
    component which is clay or the salt of an aluminosilicate.


CLS 510/508
TXT Heavy metal or aluminum containing inorganic component:

    Compositions under subclass 108 which are solid and include an inorganic
    component which contains aluminum or a heavy metal (i.e., metal having a
    specific gravity of at least 4).


CLS 510/509
TXT Alkali metal carbonate, bicarbonate, or sesquicarbonate component:

    Compositions under subclass 108 which are solid and include a component
    which is a carbonate, bicarbonate, or sesquicarbonate of an alkali metal
    (Li, Na, K, Rb, or Cs).


CLS 510/510
TXT With inorganic phosphorus containing component:

    Compositions under subclass 509 which additionally include an inorganic
    component which contains phosphorus.


CLS 510/511
TXT Inorganic silicon containing component:

    Compositions under subclass 108 which are solid and include an inorganic
    component which contains silicon.


CLS 510/512
TXT With inorganic phosphorus containing component:

    Compositions under subclass 511 which additionally include an inorganic
    component which contains phosphorus.


CLS 510/513
TXT AUXILIARY COMPOSITIONS FOR CLEANING, OR PROCESSES OF PREPARING (E.G.,
    LAUNDERING AIDS, SUCH AS WRINKLE-REDUCING COMPOSITIONS, ETC.):

    Compositions under the class definition which: (a) constitute an
    intermediate composition of two or more components used in the manufacture
    of cleaning compositions, such as detergent builder compositions, or
    surfactant compositions specialized for use in cleaning agents; or (b) when
    used in the cleaning process or in a finishing step, improve the appearance
    or feel of the cleaned articles, such as dishwasher rinse or textile
    softening compositions; or (c) when used together with surfactants and
    other customary components of cleaning compositions, facilitate the removal
    of soil in the course of a current or subsequent cleaning operation, such
    as laundry sour, enzyme, or soil-release compositions.

    (1)     Note. Included in this and indented subclasses are compositions
    such as dishwasher rinses, textile softening or antistatic agents,
    soil-release or antisoiling agents, laundry sours, enzymes, detergent
    builders and surfactants, consonant with categories (a) through (c) of the
    subclass definition and specialized and designed for such utility, as well
    as any compositions within the purview of such criteria which are not
    provided for elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 175+ for water-softening or purifying or
    scale-inhibiting agents which are not specifically designed for use as
    detergent builders, subclass 321 for defoaming compositions, subclasses
    351+ for surfactants which are not specifically designed for use in
    cleaning compositions, and subclasses 186.1+ for oxidative bleach or
    oxidant compositions, per se.


CLS 510/514
TXT Dishwasher rinse composition:

    Compositions under subclass 513 specialized for use in the rinse cycle of
    an automatic dishwasher.

    (1)     Note. Such compositions promote even drainage of rinse water and
    prevent spotting of the cleaned articles upon drying.


CLS 510/515
TXT Textile softening or antistatic composition (e.g., for use in the wash
    cycle, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 513 designed to eliminate or reduce static
    electrical charge, or to impart a softer feel or hand to textile articles
    treated therewith in the course of, or subsequent to, a laundering or dry
    cleaning operation.


CLS 510/516
TXT With diverse textile treating component (e.g., laundry sour, optical
    brightener, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 515 which additionally include a component
    which performs a different textile treating function.


CLS 510/517
TXT Soil-release or antisoiling component:

    Compositions under subclass 516 wherein the diverse component either
    retards resoiling of an article treated therewith or facilitates the
    removal of newly accumulated soil in a subsequent cleaning operation.


CLS 510/518
TXT Halogen, nitrogen, oxygen, or phosphorus containing chemical bleach or
    oxidant or antiseptic, biocidal, or deodorant component:

    Compositions under subclass 516 wherein the diverse component is a chemical
    bleach or oxidant, or is an antiseptic, biocidal, or deodorant agent, and
    contains halogen, nitrogen, oxygen, or phosphorus.


CLS 510/519
TXT Dryer-activated composition or article (e.g., rupturable capsule, reusable
    dispenser, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 515 which are activated by heat of a clothes
    dryer and may be enclosed in a package or combined with a substrate.

    (1)     Note. Certain of these compositions may be enclosed in a package or
    dispenser which is added to the load to be laundered at the beginning of
    the wash cycle but the active composition is only released in the dryer.
    These are the so-called "through-the-wash" compositions and packages.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 524.1+ for packages or
    containers, per se, wherein the material for the container or content is
    specified.


CLS 510/520
TXT Water-insoluble, single-use solid substrate or enclosure, or composition
    combinable therewith (e.g., dryer sheet, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 519 which are dispensed in the dryer from a
    water-insoluble single-use enclosure or substrate, or compositions to be
    combined with the substrate or enclosure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 524.1+ for packages or
    containers, per se, wherein the material for the container or content is
    specified.


CLS 510/521
TXT Rinse-added composition:

    Compositions under subclass 515 which are added to the rinse water either
    in manual laundering or in an automatic washer.

    (1)     Note. Many of these compositions are incompatible with detergents
    and hence cannot be used in the wash cycle.


CLS 510/522
TXT Liquid composition:

    Compositions under subclass 521 which are in the form of a liquid.


CLS 510/523
TXT Package or encapsulated component:

    Compositions under subclass 522 which are enclosed in a package or
    dispenser or which include an encapsulated component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 524.1+ for packages or
    containers, per se, wherein the material for the container or content is
    specified.


CLS 510/524
TXT Nonionic polyoxyalkylene containing component (e.g., polyethylene glycol,
    etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 522 which include a component which contains a
    polyoxyalkylene substituent and is nonionic.


CLS 510/525
TXT Water-miscible organic solvent component (e.g., lower alkanol, ethylene
    glycol, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 522 which include an organic solvent component
    which is miscible with water.


CLS 510/526
TXT Acyclic hydrocarbon or nitrogen-free higher fatty acid component or ester
    or alcohol derived therefrom:

    Compositions under subclass 522 which include a component which is an
    acyclic hydrocarbon, or is a higher fatty acid devoid of nitrogen, or is an
    ester or an alcohol derived from such fatty acid.


CLS 510/527
TXT Liquid composition:

    Compositions under subclass 515 which are in the form of a liquid.


CLS 510/528
TXT Soil-release or antisoiling composition:

    Compositions under subclass 513 which, when used together with a cleaning
    or auxiliary agent, either retard the resoiling of an article treated
    therewith, or facilitate the removal of newly accumulated soil in a
    subsequent cleaning operation.


CLS 510/529
TXT Laundry sour composition:

    Compositions under subclass 513 which serve to neutralize excess alkalinity
    remaining from a cleaning agent.

    (1)     Note. Laundry sour compositions are used primarily in the rinse
    cycle in commercial laundries, where highly alkaline detergents are
    utilized in the main wash.


CLS 510/530
TXT Enzyme composition:

    Compositions under subclass 513 which include an enzyme component and are
    specialized and designed for incorporation with other components of a
    cleaning composition; the enzymes usually facilitate cleaning by degrading
    specific types of soil, such as protein, oil, or grease.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry: Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 174
    through 182 for carrier-bound or immobilized enzymes, and preparation
    thereof; subclass 187 for processes of preparing granular or free-flowing
    enzyme compositions; subclass 188 for processes of stabilizing an enzyme;
    and subclass 264 for processes of cleaning using an enzyme.


CLS 510/531
TXT Detergent builder composition:

    Compositions under subclass 513 specialized for use in conjunction with
    surfactants or other cleaning agents, such as alkaline substances, and
    which enhance the detergency of the surfactant or cleaning agent (e.g., by
    providing a water-softening effect by removing polyvalent metal ions, such
    as calcium).

    (1)     Note. See search notes under subclass 513 for other water-softening
    compositions.


CLS 510/532
TXT Aluminum or boron containing metal silicate component (e.g.,
    aluminosilicate, zeolite, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 531 which include a component which is a metal
    salt of a silicate which is combined with aluminum or boron.

    (1)     Note. The action of such components is usually via the ion-exchange
    mechanism, which immobilizes polyvalent metal ions.


CLS 510/533
TXT Polycarboxylic acid component, or salt thereof (e.g., nitrilotriacetic
    acid, polyacrylic acid, etc.):

    Compositions under subclass 531 which include a component which contains
    plural carboxyl substituents attached to one another by direct or indirect
    nonionic bonding, or is a salt of such substituents.


CLS 510/534
TXT Inorganic phosphorus containing component:

    Compositions under subclass 531 which include an inorganic component
    containing phosphorus.

    (1)     Note. Water-soluble salts of various phosphoric acids remove
    polyvalent metal ions by precipitation.


CLS 510/535
TXT Surfactant composition for cleaning agents (other than raw soap):

    Surface active compositions under subclass 513 which are not raw soap and
    which are specialized for use in cleaning compositions together with other
    auxiliary components, such as builders, fillers, etc.

    (1)     Note. See class definitions for further details on surfactants.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 367.1 for raw soaps and processes of making
    them.


CLS 510/536
TXT Sulfoxy containing anionically substituted surfactant component:

    Compositions under subclass 535 which include an organic surfactant
    component which includes a sulfoxy-containing anionic substituent.

    (1)     Note. The anionic substituent may be, for example, a sulfonate salt
    or sulfate monoester moiety.


CLS 510/537
TXT Liquid or paste composition:

    Compositions under subclass 536 which are in the form of a liquid or a
    paste.


CLS 512/
TTL PERFUME COMPOSITIONS

CLS 512/1
TXT Perfume Compositions intended to impart a pleasant odor, scent or aroma,
    processes of making or using a perfume composition.

    (1)     Note.  Perfume compositions usually include an active ingredient or
    enhancer and one or more adjuvants such as extenders, antioxidants,
    fixatives, etc.  Subclasses 2 and 3 are based on the active or enhancing
    organoleptic ingredient.  An active ingredient is a compound which imparts
    the aroma to the perfume compositions or enhances or augments the aroma of
    an existing perfume composition.  Fixatives and extenders are not
    considered to be active ingredients; an fixative slow down the rate of
    evaporation of a perfume by reducing the volatility, and an extender
    increases the volume of the perfume composition without diluting the aroma.

    (2)     Note.  Processes of extracting essential oils for use in perfumes
    from animal or plant sources are provided for here.

    (3)     Note.  Processes for the preparation of an odorant compound or
    odorant mixture that include a fermentation step or the use of an enzyme
    will be classified in Class 435.

    (4)     Note.  The perfume composition may be intended for application to a
    living body, clothing, are objects, etc.  For example, a flower fragrance
    may be applied to a person, a pine scent to a Christmas tree, etc.

    (5)     Note.  A patent having a claim to a perfume composition and a claim
    to an article or a composition having another utility in combination with
    the perfume composition is classified with the article or other
    composition, e.g., a perfumed detergent is classified with detergents.

    (6)     Note.  A claim to a perfume composition which includes a specified
    organoleptic compound of the composition is specified.  However, a
    compound, per se, is classified in a compound class regardless of the
    claimed utility.

    (7)     Note.  A process of utilizing a compound as a perfume is classified
    here with perfume compositions.

    (8)     Note.  Plant extracts and essential oils of unknown constitution
    which are disclosed as essences or odoriferous substances will be
    considered perfumes compositions even when they are from a single source
    provided no superior use is set forth.

    (9)     Note.  Broad terms such as "perfume" or "perfume oil" stated to be
    ingredients in cosmetics, etc., are not enough to warrant cross-referencing
    to perfume compositions.  Further, it is unnecessary to cross-reference
    patents which disclose an article combined with an old or traditional
    perfume such as a detergent which has an old essence like lavender oil
    therein should not be cross-referenced to this class.

    (10)    Note.  See the glossary in Class 532 for definitions of chemical
    terms used in Class 512 such as "acyclic, alicyclic and polycyclo ring
    system."

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 171.2 for a head covering with means to treat
    body fluids, e.g., perspiration, etc.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 5 for a process where an offensive
    odor is destroyed or masked.

    424     and 514, Drug, Bio-Affecting and body Treating Compositions,
    appropriate subclass for a pharmaceutical, disinfecting, cosmetic or body
    treating composition that includes a perfume compound or composition.

    426,    Food or Edible Material: Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclass 651 for a food composition with an essential oil and subclass 655
    for an animal or plant extract having Class 426 utility.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclass 377 for a process of
    demonstrating or exhibiting a perfume product.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, appropriate
    subclass for a process of preparing an odorant compound or odorant
    composition that includes a fermentation step or utilizes an enzyme.

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 101
    through 107 for perfume-containing cleaning compositions or auxilary
    compositions for cleaning, such as rinse-added fabric softeners, dryer
    sheets, etc.

    523,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 102 for composition
    of a synthetic resin and a perfume wherein the perfume is an integral
    component of the synthetic resin, e.g., resins with perfume compositions
    incorporated therein and whose sole purpose is to destroy the natural
    unpleasant smell of the resin.

    532     through 570,Organic Compounds, for a compound disclosed as a
    perfume or as an organoleptic ingredient in a perfume composition.


CLS 512/2
TXT Compositions under subclass 1 which include a chemical compound whose sole
    purpose is to prevent chemical change, or to extend the life of the perfume
    by retarding evaporation of the perfume active ingredient.


CLS 512/3
TXT Compositions under subclass 1 which includes a chemical compound whose sole
    purpose is to increase the volume of the perfume composition without
    affecting the fragrance of the composition.


CLS 512/4
TXT Compositions under subclass 1 which are nonliquid or are encapsulated.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes for example, are refresher gels
    containing a perfume material incorporated in a gelling agent; perfumed
    particles consisting of hydratable polymeric matrix with perfume material
    dispensed therein, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    523,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 102 for subject
    matter wherein a perfume composition is utilized to conceal the otherwise
    obnoxious odor or a solid resin.


CLS 512/5
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the active ingredient is a plant or
    an animal extract.

    (1)     Note.  This class provides for processes of extracting such
    extracts when not provided for elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    for plant or animal extracts disclosed or claimed to be flavoring agents.
    Extracts or essences which do not have any utility disclosed or claimed and
    which traditionally have been employed as flavorings, flavor enhancers,
    seasoning agents, food acidulates for condiments are classified in Class
    426.  An example is citrus oil which has been used for centuries as a
    flavoring agent.


CLS 512/6
TXT Compositions under subclass 1 wherein the active ingredient contains a
    cyano group.


CLS 512/7
TXT Compositions under subclass 1 wherein the active ingredient is compound
    which contains boron, metal or sulfur which is not a ring member.


CLS 512/8
TXT Compositions under subclass 1 wherein the active ingredient includes a
    ring, e.g., a cyclopentane ring.


CLS 512/9
TXT Compositions under subclass 8 in which the ring in the active ingredient is
    part of a spiro ring system, i.e., exactly two rings share one common ring
    member only.


CLS 512/10
TXT Compositions under subclass 8 in which the ring in the active ingredient
    includes a nitrogen atom as part of the ring.


CLS 512/11
TXT Compositions under subclass 8 wherein the ring in the active ingredient
    includes a chalcogen atom as a ring member (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium
    or tellurium).


CLS 512/12
TXT Compositions under subclass 11 wherein the ring in the active ingredient
    includes two or more diverse or identical chalcogens as ring members.


CLS 512/13
TXT Compositions under subclass 11 wherein the chalcogen containing ring is
    part of a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 512/14
TXT Compositions under subclass 8 wherein the ring consists of carbons and is
    part of a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 512/15
TXT Compositions under subclass 14 wherein an oxygen is double bonded directly
    to the polycyclo ring system.


CLS 512/16
TXT Compositions under subclass 14 wherein a carbonyl group is bonded directly
    to the polycyclo ring system.


CLS 512/17
TXT Compositions under subclass 16 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists
    of exactly two rings.


CLS 512/18
TXT Compositions under subclass 14 wherein a carbonyl group is attached
    indirectly to the polycyclo ring system by nonionic bonding.


CLS 512/19
TXT Compositions under subclass 14 wherein an oxygen is single bonded directly
    to the polycyclo ring system.


CLS 512/20
TXT Compositions under subclass 8 wherein the ring in the active ingredient is
    a benzene ring.


CLS 512/21
TXT Compositions under subclass 20 wherein contain carbonyl that is not part of
    a ring.


CLS 512/22
TXT Compositions under subclass 8 wherein the ring in the active ingredient is
    a six-membered alicyclic ring.


CLS 512/23
TXT Compositions under subclass 22 wherein oxygen is bonded directly to the
    six-membered alicyclic ring.


CLS 512/24
TXT Compositions under subclass 22 wherein carbonyl is bonded directly to the
    six-membered alicyclic ring.


CLS 512/25
TXT Compositions under subclass 1 wherein the active ingredient contains oxygen.


CLS 512/26
TXT Compositions under subclass 25 wherein the oxygen is part of a carbonyl
    group.


CLS 512/27
TXT Compositions under subclass 26 wherein the carbonyl group is part of an
    aldehyde or a ketone group.


CLS 514/
TTL DRUG, BIO-AFFECTING AND BODY TREATING COMPOSITIONS

CLS 514/
TXT Class 514 is an integral part of Class 424.  It incorporates all the
    definitions and rules as to subject matter of Class 424.

    CLASS DEFINITION


    (1)      Note.  GENERAL STATEMENT OF CLASS 514
                 SUBJECT MATTER:



    1.      (A)     Official subclasses 1-789 do not provide for
    cross-reference patents which are originally classified in Class 260
    (Compound area) or in the Class 530-570 series or in Class 585.
    Cross-reference patents that are originally classified in the Class 520
    series are allowed.

    (B)     The cross-reference rule elaborated above means that a specific
    compound having a disclosed or even specifically claimed utility (i.e.,
    compound X useful as an anti-cancer drug) will be classifiable only in
    Class 260 or in the Class 530-570 series or in class 585.

    2.      Official cross-reference art collections:

    (A)     Peptide and protein art collections (subclasses 800-809).

    (B)     Specifically disclosed disease condition and pharmaceutical effect
    (subclasses 810-935).

    The official cross-reference art collections subclasses 800-935 take
    patents dating from Jan.1, 1965.  These collections provide for data from
    all classes including Classes 260, 530-570, and Class 585.

    3.      Official cross-reference art collections:

    (A)     Subclasses 936-975 provide for specifically disclosed carrier
    specified nonbioactive ingredient (subclasses 936-975).

    This art collection provides (A) data from Class 260 (Compounds ) and
    Classes 530-570 series and Class 585 dating from Jan. 1, 1965, and (B) data
    from all other classes regardless of date.

    Class 514 and Class 424 differ in scope as to cross-referencing procedure.
    Those subclasses identified as Class 424 will accept cross-references from
    all classes including 424, 260, Classes 530-570 series and Class 585 as has
    been done in the past.  An exception within Class 424 are subclasses 1.11+
    wherein the 514 rule is respected and therefore cross-referencing is not
    accepted.

    (2)     Note.  SCHEDULE OUTLINE OF CLASS                514:

    The schedule is divided into a number of parts, each of which is distinct
    and provides for different types of subject matter.  The following is a
    breakdown of the major areas and indicates the type of subject matter
    provided therein.

    (A)     Subclasses 1-768 provide for the subject matter proper under Class
    424 containing a designated organic active ingredient (DOAI), methods of
    making such compositions and methods of using such compositions.  Also
    included herein are method of using a specified DOAI.

    (B)     Subclasses 769-771 provide for subject matter relating to a
    designated inorganic nonactive ingredient (See Glossary) other than water
    or designated elemental nonactive material (See Glossary).  These
    subclasses provide for compositions which may have an organic active
    material and which active material does not qualify as a DOAI as well as to
    methods of preparing or using such compositions.  These subclasses also
    provide for compositions containing a designated inorganic nonactive
    material other than water or designated elemental material and which
    composition qualifies as subject matter proper for Class 424 and is not
    provided higher in the classification schedule as well as to methods of
    preparing or using such compositions.

    (C)     Subclasses 772-788 provide for subject matter relating to a
    designated organic nonactive ingredient (See Glossary) other than a
    hydrocarbon.  These subclasses provide for compositions which may have an
    organic active material and which active material does not qualify as a
    DOAI as well as to methods of preparing or using such compositions.

    (D)     Subclass 789 is the miscellaneous subclass for subject matter
    proper in Class 424 or 514.  This subclass provides for compositions,
    methods of preparing or using same.

    (E)     Subclasses 800-809 are art collections pertaining to protein and
    peptide and relate to subject matter only in Class 514.

    (F)     Subclasses 810-935 are art collections pertaining to specifically
    disclosed disease condition and pharmaceutical effect and relate to subject
    matter only in Class 514.

    (G)     Subclasses 936-975 are art collections pertaining to specifically
    disclosed carrier system; physical form or specified nonbioactive
    ingredient and relate to subject matter only in Class 514.

    (3)     Note.  DESIGNATED ORGANIC ACTIVE INGREDIENT (DOAI) IS WHEN:

    (1)     The active ingredient is identified by at least one chemical atom,
    e.g., organic phosphorus compound, etc. or

    (2)     The active ingredient is identified as a generic type of chemical
    compound, e.g., alcohol, ether, etc.

    The term active denotes a physiological, pharmacological or biological
    effect.

    For purposes of this class organic active ingredient although inherently
    reciting the presence of a carbon atom is considered to be too broad and
    therefore will not be considered as DOAI's is as follows:  chalcogen,
    carboxylic acid, phosphorus containing, organic alkali or earth metal
    compound, hydrocarbon, halogenated hydrocarbon, etc.

    The following list below is not exhaustive and merely emumerates certain
    materials that will not be considered as DOAI's, e.g., organic compound,
    solvent, biocide, pharmaceutically active, medicine, preservative, diabetes
    active, pesticidal, active against rabies, antihistamine, anti-tussive,
    anti-caries, crystalline, antioxidant, etc.

    It is important to remember that function of a material or even amount,
    e.g., pharmaceutical, etc., even if specific, e.g., diabetes active, etc.,
    or 2% of a diabetes active ingredient, etc., does not meet any of the
    necessary criteria elaborated in 1 and 2 above.  Function or amount
    therefore does not qualify as rendering an ingredient as "Designated".

    (4)     Note.  RULES CONCERNING THE USE OF DOAI IN THE SCHEDULE:

    For purposes of Class 514, certain rules as to patent placement have been
    adopted.  These rules pertain only to the subject matter in Class 514 and
    are not to be extrapolated to areas in Class 424.

    The rules adopted pertaining to the use of the term  "DOAI" are as follows:

    (A)     In those subclasses which recite a designated organic active
    ingredient (DOAI) in the title, the indented subclasses merely pertain to a
    further elaboration of the DOAI and do not relate to any other ingredient.
    An example of this is (subclass 497 in Class 514) which recites nitrogen
    containing and is indented under (subclass 496) which recites mercury and
    which in turn is indented under (subclass 492) heavy metal containing DOAI.
     The meaning of (subclass 497) is that an active ingredient contains both
    nitrogen and mercury atoms as part of a single molecule.

    (B)     In those subclasses which recite "with" as in (subclass 168) under
    a specified DOAI, such use is consistent with the term as used in other
    classes in that, at least two separate materials must be present, one of
    which is the DOAI and the other "with" ingredient.  The "with" ingredient
    need not have an active function for Class 514 unless the subclass
    specifically requires an "active with ingredient" as in subclass 154.

    (5)     Note.  EXAMPLES OF PATENT PLACEMENT WITHIN THE CLASS:

    Patentee Claims:

    (A)     A biocide and starch as a carrier.  The original classification is
    with the starch in subclass 778, since a chemical atom of the biocide is
    not recited.

    (B)     2% of a biocide and starch as a carrier.  Same classification as in
    (A) above, since 2% is not considered sufficient to be DOAI.

    (C)     An organic phosphorus containing biocide and starch as carrier.
    Original classification is on the basis of the biocide since an atom is
    recited.  Entirely proper to look at disclosure to see the type of
    phosphorus compound encompassed by the term "organic phosphorus".

    (D)     A synergistic mixture of two biocides at least one of which is
    formaldehyde classifiable in subclasses 694+.  The disclosure recites that
    the other biocide can be a organic phosphorus compound classifiable in
    subclasses 75+.  Since the claim has only one DOAI recited (i.e.,
    formaldehyde) original classification is in the formaldehyde species.

    (E)     A synergistic mixture of two biocides one of which is formaldehyde
    and the other is malathion. Formaldehyde is classified in subclass 694 and
    malathion is classified in subclass 122.  The original is classified with
    malathion in subclass 122 as per normal classification rules.

    (6)     Note.  RULES CONCERNING PLACEMENT OF SALTS WITHIN CLASS 514 AND
    SEARCH THEREFORE:

    Classification Practice

    1.      Inorganic salts of organic materials are considered as organic and
    classified with the organic materials only, even when the organic material
    is not a DOAI by definition (see Glossary).  No weight in the
    classification system is given to the inorganic material.  However, when
    the inorganic segment of the salt is specifically claimed or disclosed as
    the only active segment of the salt molecule original classification is
    proper on the basis of the inorganic segment and cross-referenced to the
    organic material.

    Example 1.  R--R.  SO4

    classified on the basis of

    R--R segment only

    Example 2 Organic.  SO4

    or

    organic pesticide.  SO4 classified on the basis of the disclosed organic or
    organic pesticide material only.

    Example 3.      Organic.  SO4

    or

    Amine. SO4

    Wherein activity is recited only in the SO4 segment, original
    classification is with SO4 segment, cross-reference is highly desirable
    with the disclosed organic or amine material.

    2.      When a nonsalt DOAI material (see Glossary) as well as a salt
    thereof are claimed a prima facie nonrebuttal presumption is established
    that only the nonsalt active material is effective, even if the salt is
    specifically claimed and even if different 424 utility is noted for the
    specific salt.  The claims are classified as original with the nonsalt DOAI
    material and a cross-reference to the salt area, even if higher in the
    classification schedule is unnecessary.

    3.      When an organic salt of a DOAI is solely specifically claimed
    (i.e., nonsalt species of material is not claimed) the following
    classification rules will apply:

    (A)     Both segments of the solely claimed salt, i.e., anion and cation,
    are designated:

    (1)     Both segments are claimed or disclosed as active for the utility
    intended, or where no evidence is shown that a particular segment is active
    or inactive (both through claims or disclosure), the entire molecule will
    be considered a DOAI and classified on the basis of the first appearing
    segment in the schedule hierarchy, an example of this is the treatment of
    amine-critic acid:  Original classification with citric acid is proper
    since both segments of the molecule are active and since amine is
    classified lower in the 514 schedule hierarchy then citric acid.

    (2)     Only one particular segment is claimed or disclosed as active, the
    original classification is to the designated active segment and
    cross-referenced to the nonactive segment area if said nonactive segment is
    higher in the classification schedule.

    (B)     Only one segment of the solely claimed salt, i.e., anion or cation,
    is designated, the original classification is with the active segment, even
    if the active segment is nondesignated, e.g., "an amine salt of an organic
    compound" wherein the pesticide or organic compound is specifically claimed
    or disclosed to be active for the utility intended.  Classification is on
    the basis of the disclosed pesticide or the organic compound and
    cross-referenced to the amine area if the amine is higher in the schedule
    hierarchy than the disclosed species of the pesticide or organic compound.
    However, when the nondesignated segment is claimed as "a pharmaceutically
    acceptable acid (or base or equivalent thereof), e.g., "an amine salt of a
    therapeutically acceptable or compatible acid", no weight is given to the
    "acceptable or compatible acid" and classification is based only on the
    designated segment, i.e., the amine.

    Examination Practice

    Due to the nature of the system of classification elaborated above a search
    to be complete must at times entail searching in a multiplicity of
    subclasses.

    (1)     Claims drawn to solely a salt.  Claims are classified and searched
    as in (3) above.

    (2)     Claims drawn to a nonsalt DOAI and also to a salt thereof, either
    in a dependant claim or in a Markush group.  Classified only with the
    nonsalt species but searched in all salt species which are classified
    higher in the classification schedule than the nonsalt species.

    (7)     Note.  Frequently used terms in Class 514.  These terms have also
    been entered into the Index to the U. S. Patent Classification:

    Acronycines             285

    Allantion               390

    Amantadine              656

    Amphetamine             654

    Ampicillin              198

    Amprotropine            534

    Aspirin                 165

    Atropine                534

    Barbituric acid         270

    Benzocaine              535

    Benzomorphans           295

    Biotin                  387

    Capsaicin               627

    Cephalocporins          200+

    Chlorpheniramine        357

    Cholecalciferol         167

    Chrysanthemic acid      572

    Cobalamin               52

    Codeine         282

    Colchicine              629

    Cortisone               179

    Frequently used terms in Class 514.  These terms have also been entered
    into the Index of the U.S. Patent Classification (con.):

    Cupreine                305

    Cycloheximide           328

    Cyproheptadine          325

    Cysteine ester          550

    DDT                     748

    DDVP                    136

    Dextromethorphan        289

    Dyphylline              263

    Ephedrine               653

    Estradiol               182

    Fluspirilene            278

    Glaucine                284

    Glucamine               669

    Griseofulvin            462

    Hexachlorophene 735

    Hydrocortisone          179

    Isoniazid               354

    Malathion               122

    Melatonin               415

    Meperidine              330

    Methadone               648

    Methapyrilene           336

    Methomyl                477

    Morphinans              289

    Morphine                282

    Nandrolone              178+

    Niacinamide             355

    Nortestosterone         178

    Novocaine               535

    Oxolinic acid           291

    Parathion               132

    Pencillin G             199

    Perimidines             269

    Phenylephrine           653

    Phenyltoloxamine        651

    Pilocarpine             397

    Pimozide                323

    Piromidic acid          303

    Perdnisolone            179

    Procaine                535

    Progesterone            177

    Psoralen                455

    Frequently used in Class 514.  These terms have also been entered into the
    Index to the  U.S. Patent Classification (con.):

    Pteridine               249

    Purines                 261

    Quinicine               314

    Quinidine               305

    Quinine                 305

    Quinoxaline             249

    Riboflavins             251

    Salinomycin             460

    Scopolamine             291

    Tartaric acid           574

    Tetracycline            152

    Theophilline            263

    Thiamines               276

    Tocopherois             458

    Tryptophan              419

    Tyrosine                567

    Tripelennamine          352

    Uracil                  274

    Vinblastine             283

    Vincamine               283

    Viquidil                        314

    (8)     Note. GLOSSARY

    The following terms have been used in a number of subclass titles
    throughout Class 514.  For convenience, these often used terms have been
    arranged into a Glossary.  When any of these terms is used in particular
    subclass titles in Class 514, their meaning is to be consistent with the
    meaning in this Glossary.

    The Glossary of Class 424 has not been modified and therefore the Class 424
    Glossary is still appropriate for those subclasses identified as proper
    under Class 424.

    ACYCLIC
    Denotes a compound devoid of any ring-containing moiety.  Thus an acyclic
    chain may contain any atom as long as it is not a member of a ring.

    ALCOHOL
    Denotes an organic compound having the general structure C-OH wherein the
    carbon atom bound to the oxygen atom of the hydroxyl group cannot be
    doubled bonded to oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium or triple bonded
    to nitrogen.  The terms as used herein includes phenols.

    ALDEHYDE
    Denotes an organic compound having the general

    structure -C  -H  or  H-H  (n is 1 or more and wherein the carbon atom
    bonded to the n group is not double bonded to oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium, or triple bonded to nitrogen.

    ALICYCLIC RING OR RING SYSTEM
    This term denotes a carbocyclic ring which is not a benzene ring or a
    polycyclo carbocyclic ring system which does not have a benzene ring as one
    of the cyclos.

    AMINE-
    Denotes an organic compound having a nitrogen atom single or double bonded
    to a carbon atom and wherein the carbon atom bonded to the nitrogen atom is
    devoid of a double bond to oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium or triple
    bonded to nitrogen.  In addition, those compounds wherein the same nitrogen
    atom is bonded to a  group (X is O, S, Se, or Te) and to a carbon atom
    which is not double bonded to oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium, are
    not considered as being amines, e.g.,      - C, etc.

    Although amides may be considered chemically as amines, it has been found
    expedient for this class to exclude compounds containing only amide
    nitrogen herefrom.  Therefore, as used throughout this area, the term amide
    is not to be confused as being an amine.  A compound, however, which
    contains a nitrogen atom bonded to a non   carbon atom and which contains
    either a nitrogen atom bonded to a  group or an amide group, is considered
    as being an amine.

    AMINO NITROGEN
    Denotes any nitrogen in an organic compound other than a nitrogen in an
    inorganic ion of an addition salt, a nitro (=NO2) or nitroso (-NO).
    Component parts of an "adduct" will be considered to be attached to each
    other ionically except if it is clear that the mode of attachment is
    nonionic.

    ARYL RING OR RING SYSTEM
    This term denotes a benzene ring or a polycyclo carbocyclic ring system
    having a benzene ring as one of the cyclos.

    ATTACHED DIRECTLY OR BONDED DIRECTLY
    These terms are used to show that specified moieties are connected by bonds
    only.

    ATTACHED INDIRECTLY
    This term denotes that at least one atom, as well as bond, connects
    specified moieties.

    BENZENE RING
    This term includes in all cases except where there are explicit limitations
    to the contrary, substituted benzene rings, including substitution in the
    form of an additional fused or bridged ring or ring system.

    BICYCLO RING SYSTEM
    This term denotes a polycyclo ring system which contains exactly two rings.

    CARBOCYCLIC
    This term denotes a ring or ring system where all ring members are carbons.

    CHAIN
    This term denotes a plurality of atoms which connect specified groups or
    atoms.  The atoms of the chain must be nonionically attached to each other
    and to the specified groups or atoms.  If the chain may not include any
    ring members it will be designated as acyclic.  When the chain may include
    ring members the title will state that the chain may include a ring.  The
    chain ends where it attaches to the specified groups or atoms and does not
    include any part of them.  The chain may have substituents but the
    substituents are not part of the chain.

    DESIGNATED ELEMENTAL NONACTIVE INGREDIENT
    Denotes an elemental material either metallic or nonmetallic and which is
    identified by its chemical nature, e.g., iron, silver, etc., or is
    identified in a generic manner, e.g., alkali metal atom, etc.  The term
    nonactive as used herein denotes the absence of any physiological,
    pharmacological or biological affect attributed to the elemental material.

    DESIGNATED INORGANIC NONACTIVE INGREDIENT
    Denotes an inorganic compound which is identified by at least one chemical
    atom, e.g., sodium-containing, etc., or is identified as a generic type of
    inorganic chemical compound, e.g., alkali metal-containing, etc.  The term
    nonactive as used herein denotes the absence of any physiological,
    pharmacological or biological affect attributed to the inorganic material.

    DESIGNATED ORGANIC ACTIVE INGREDIENT (DOAI) DENOTES

    (1)     The active ingredient is identified by at least one chemical atom,
    e.g., organic phosphorus compound, etc., or

    (2)     The active ingredient is identified as a generic type of chemical
    atom, e.g., alcohol, ether, etc.

    The term active denotes the presence of a physiological, pharmacological or
    biological affect.

    DESIGNATED ORGANIC NONACTIVE INGREDIENT DENOTES

    (1)     A nonactive ingredient is identified by at least one chemical atom
    or (2) the nonactive ingredient is identified as a generic type of chemical
    compound, e.g., starch, etc.  The term nonactive denotes the absence of any
    physiological, pharmacological or biological affect attributed to the
    organic material.

    ETHER
    Denotes an organic compound having the general structure O wherein the
    carbon bound to the linking oxygen atom cannot be double bonded to oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium, or triple bonded to nitrogen.

    FATTY ACID
    Denotes an aliphatic monocarboxylic acid having an unbroken chain of at
    least seven carbon atoms bonded to the carboxyl group.

    FUSED OR BRIDGED RING SYSTEM
    Denotes a ring system having at least two rings which (a) share with each
    other two adjacent ring atoms, or (b) share with each other three or more
    ring atoms and wherein each ring having shared atoms is either a
    heterocyclic ring or a carbocyclic ring.

    HALOGENATED HYDROCARBON
    Denotes a compound containing only carbon, hydrogen, and halogen, or only
    carbon and halogen.

    HETERO RING
    Denotes the presence of one or more carbon atoms covalently bonded in a
    closed ring with at least one atom of oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium and having no other atoms in the ring.

    INCLUDING HYDROGENATED
    Denotes that a ring system which by definition has ring unsaturation
    possesses a degree of saturation which may be different than the ring
    system definition would normally indicate.

    KETONE
    Denotes an organic compound having the general structure -C-n  (n is 1 or
    more) and wherein the carbon atoms bonded to the n group are not double
    bonded to oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium.  Ketone as used
    throughout includes ketene.

    NONIONIC BONDING
    As used in regard to bonding or attachment of specified moieties denotes
    the absence of ionic bonding between the moieties.  If the moieties are
    attached directly, the bonds between them must be covalent or coordinate.
    If the moieties are attached indirectly, each atom of the connecting chain
    must be attached by covalent or coordinate bonding to another atom of the
    connecting chain or to one of the moieties.  However, the connecting chain
    may have substituents thereon which include ionic bonding.  Some examples
    will be given of compounds which could be classified in a subclass having
    the following titles:  "Oxygen attached indirectly to the six-membered
    hetero ring by nonionic bonding".  Two typical compounds which would by
    classified in such a subclass are:


    The following three compounds would also be classified in such a subclass
    but they are not typical.



    The three atypical examples are considered to meet the title since there is
    a chain of atoms between the hetero ring and the oxygen in which each atom
    is connected to the hetero ring, the oxygen, or another atom of the chain
    by nonionic bonding.  The ionic bonding between the ring nitrogen and the
    oxygen in the two betaine inner salts is additional and does not keep the
    betaines out of such a subclass.  However, a structure, such as


    is excluded since no oxygen is attached to the six-membered hetero ring by
    nonionic bonding.  The oxygen of an N-oxide, for example,

    is considered attached to the ring by nonionic bonding (coordinate bonding).

    POLYCYCLO RING SYSTEM
    This term denotes a compound which contains fused or bridged rings.  The
    polycyclo ring system must contain at least two rings and each ring of the
    system must share two or more of its atoms with another ring of the system.
     All ring members must be attached to each other by nonionic bonding.  The
    polycyclo ring system is usually only a moiety within a compound.  Indents
    such as bicyclo and tricyclo are meant to limit the number of rings or
    cyclos in the polycyclo ring system to exactly two rings and three rings,
    respectively.

    For polycyclo systems having bridges it should be remembered that the
    system is regarded as composed only of the smallest number of smallest
    rings that will account for all atoms and valences.  This is in accord with
    the nomenclature employed by The Ring Index.  Second Edition, (1960).

    An example of the use of this system of nomenclature is as follows.  The
    compound

    can also be written as

    Said compound should be considered as a (C4N-C4N-C2O) tricyclo system as in
    (1a), rather than as a (C4N-C4 NO-C2O) tricyclo system as possible seen in
    (1b).  The former interpretation is the one with the smallest number of
    smallest rings that accounts for all atoms and valences.  Some additional
    illustrative examples of the principle set forth above are:

    Compound II is considered as a bicyclo system composed of a C2N2O ring and
    a C4O ring; it is not considered a diazine ring for classification.
    Further, 3-aza-bicyclo [3.1.0] hexane

    is classified with pyrrolidines considering the structure a five-membered
    ring and a three-membered ring rather than with piperidines which would
    require considering it a six-membered ring.  However, see page XI of The
    Ring Index for an explanation of "valence bridges".



    Similarly, the structure is considered to be a pentacyclo ring system
    having three six-membered carbocyclic rings, one five-membered hetero ring
    consisting of one ring oxygen and four ring carbons, and one six-membered
    ring consisting of one ring nitrogen and five ring carbons.

    Betaine inner salts are sometimes shown as ring structures, e.g.,


    However, this is not a polycyclo ring system because nonionic bonding does
    not exist between the N and O atoms.  The bonding between them is ionic and
    such a compound is classified as:

    Additionally, a structure of the type:

    is considered to be a polycyclo ring system composed of five
    rings:C4N-C4O-C4N-C40-C12N2O2.

    SPIRO AND SPIRO RING SYSTEM
    These terms denote the sharing of one common ring member only by exactly
    two rings.  The following two structures are illustrative:


    A structure such as:

    is excluded because the "C" shared by two rings is also shared by a third
    ring.

    The common ring member must be attached to two ring members of each of the
    rings by nonionic bonding.  Therefore, structures such as:

    are also excluded from consideration as "spiro ring systems" because ionic
    bonding exists between the hetero ring atom and an acyclic atom (an oxygen
    atom in  both of these cases) in the formation of these betaine inner
    salts.  These structures will be considered and classified as:


    TRICYCLO RING SYSTEM
    This term denotes a polycyclo ring system which contains exactly three
    rings.


CLS 514/1
TXT DESIGNATED ORGANIC ACTIVE INGREDIENT CONTAINING (DOAI):

    Subject matter under Class 424 definition which contains a designated
    organic active ingredient, e.g., coal tar, coal tar oil, etc.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition of "DOAI".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    731,    for a composition containing creosote or a coal tar acid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclass 2 for a coal tar or
    coal tar oil which has the property of killing, repelling or preventing the
    growth of insects, fungi or bacteria and the process of preparing same.


CLS 514/2
TXT Peptide containing (e.g., protein, peptones, fibrinogen, etc.) DOAI:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 which contains a protein or its reaction
    product, e.g., peptides, peptones, fibrinogen, etc., wherein the protein
    molecule is not degraded to the constituent amino-acids.

    (1)     Note.  The term peptide unit used herein is intended to mean the
    group N-C-(=O) or beta-alanine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183+,   for ergot.

    192+,   for penicillin.

    200+,   for cephalosporins.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, subclass 112 for a protein, per se,
    of unknown structure and method of preparing same; and subclass 112.5 for a
    protein, per se, of known structure.

    930,    Peptide or Protein Sequence, subclasses 10+ for peptide or protein
    sequences or four or more amino acids.


CLS 514/3
TXT Insulin or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 identical to the extract of the pancreas,
    known as insulin or a derivative thereof, in which neither a peptide chain
    nor a disulfide link between chains is broken.

    (1)     Note.  While the position and/or kind of amino acids in the
    chain(s) may vary (depending on the animal from which derived), it appears
    that insulin contains at least an "A" chain of 21 acid units linked by
    disulfide moieties to a "B".  An additional disulfide moiety bridges the 6
    and 11 positions of chain A.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for an animal extract obtained from the pancreas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, subclass 112.5 for a polypeptide of
    known chemical structure, and subclass 112.7 for insulin, per se.


CLS 514/4
TXT With an additional active ingredient:

    Subject matter under subclass 3 which contains insulin and an additional
    active ingredient.

    (1)     Note.  For the subclass an organic potentiator for insulin is
    considered an active ingredient.


CLS 514/5
TXT Iodine containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 in which the peptide moiety contains iodine
    or the peptide moiety is reacted with or complexed to iodine containing
    compound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    930,    Peptide or Protein Sequence, subclass 22 for peptide or protein
    sequences containing an amino acid modified with a radioactive iodine and
    subclass 23 for sequences containing an amino acid modified with a regular
    iodine.


CLS 514/6
TXT Heavy metal containing (e.g., hemoglobin, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 2 which contains a heavy metal atom.

    (1)     Note.  See glossary for a definition of the term heavy metal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, subclasses 113+ for known
    polypeptide compound containing a heavy metal atom.

    930,    Peptide or Protein Sequence, subclass 25 for peptide or protein
    sequences containing an amino acid modified with a heavy metal.


CLS 514/7
TXT Phosphorus containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 which contains phosphorus in the peptide
    compound.


CLS 514/8
TXT Glycoprotein (carbohydrate containing):

    Subject matter under subclass 2 which contains a carbohydrate or derivative
    thereof attached to the peptide.


CLS 514/9
TXT Cyclopeptide:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the amino acid chain forms a cyclic
    structure; said cyclo structures can be formed by peptide bonding,
    disulfide bonding, hydrocarbon bonding or other types of connection that
    define the cyclo structures as having at least a dipeptide as an integral
    part thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    930,    Peptide or Protein Sequence, subclass 260 for peptides or proteins
    with intrachain cysteine-cysteine bridges and subclass 270 for other cyclic
    peptides or proteins.


CLS 514/10
TXT Bicyclic:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein a compound has two cyclic groups
    containing an amino acid chain.


CLS 514/11
TXT Monocyclic:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein a compound has only one cyclic
    group containing an amino acid chain.


CLS 514/12
TXT 25 or more peptide repeating units in known peptide chain structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein a peptide chain has 25 or more
    peptide units in an uninterrupted chain.


CLS 514/13
TXT 16 to 24 peptide repeating units in known peptide chain:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 which contains as uninterrupted peptide
    chain of 16 to 24 peptide units.


CLS 514/14
TXT 12 to 15 peptide repeating units in known peptide chain:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 which contains an uninterrupted peptide
    chain of 12 to 15 peptide units.


CLS 514/15
TXT 9 to 11 peptide repeating units in known peptide chain:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 which contains an uninterrupted peptide
    chain of 9 to 11 peptide units.


CLS 514/16
TXT 7 or 8 peptide repeating units in known peptide chain:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 which contains an uninterrupted peptide
    chain of 7 or 8 peptide units.


CLS 514/17
TXT 5 or 6 peptide repeating units in known peptide chain:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 which contains an uninterrupted peptide
    chain 5 or 6 peptide units.


CLS 514/18
TXT 3 or 4 peptide repeating units in known peptide chain:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 which contains an uninterrupted peptide
    chain of 3 or 4 peptide units.


CLS 514/19
TXT 2 peptide repeating units in known peptide chain:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 which contains an uninterrupted peptide
    chain of 2 peptide units.


CLS 514/20
TXT Guanidine containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 19 wherein the peptide compound contains the
    guanidine group.


CLS 514/21
TXT Produced by or extracted from animal tissue:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 which is derived from animal material.


CLS 514/22
TXT Lignin or derivative DOAI:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the organic active ingredient is
    lignin or a reaction derivative thereof, e.g., lignin sulfonate, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Lignin is a noncarbohydrate, polymeric substance found in
    wood.  It is isolated directly from wood or wood products or from the
    treatment of wood, e.g., waste sulfite liquor or black liquor.  The
    structure of the lignin monomer is not completely known.


CLS 514/23
TXT Carbohydrate (i.e., saccharide radical containing) DOAI:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the organic active ingredient is a
    saccharide or polysaccharide, the monomeric saccharide radical units of
    which contain at least five carbon atoms, or their reaction products
    wherein the carbon skeleton of the saccharide or polysaccharide of the unit
    is not destroyed.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is cellulose, cellulose derivatives, starch,
    starch derivatives, tannins, O-glycosides, N-glycosides and S-glycosides.

    (2)     Note.  Alcohols and acids corresponding to carbohydrates are
    excluded.

    (3)     Note.  Cascara sagrada is excluded herefrom and is classified with
    plant extracts in Class 424, subclass 195.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251,    for a composition containing riboflavin DOAI.


CLS 514/24
TXT S-glycoside:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein the saccharide is a thioacetal
    derivative of a cyclic form of sugars in which the hydrogen atom of the
    hemithioacetal sulfhydryl group has been replaced by an alkyl, aralkyl or
    aryl group.

    (1)     Note.  A S-glycoside is a compound having a sugar moiety connected
    to an aglycone moiety via sulfur.

    (2)     Note.  An aglycone is a noncarbohydrate material, e.g., benzene,
    indoxyl, alkyl, anthracene, etc.

    (3)     Note.  The cyclic sugars referred to in the definition are normally
    pyranoses or furanoses.

    (4)     Note.  Glycosides derived from aldoeses are referred to as
    aldosides, and those ketoses are ketosides.


CLS 514/25
TXT O-glycoside:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein the saccharide is an acetal
    derivative of a cyclic form of sugars in which the hydrogen atom of the
    hemiacetal hydroxyl has been replaced by an alkyl, aralkyl or aryl group.

    (1)     Note.  An O-glycoside is a compound having a sugar moiety connected
    to an aglycone moiety via oxygen.


CLS 514/26
TXT Cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 25 wherein an aglycone moiety of the
    glycoside contains a cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene  nucleus, i.e.,


CLS 514/27
TXT Oxygen of the saccharide radical bonded directly to a nonsaccharide hetero
    ring or a polycyclo ring system which contains a nonsaccharide hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 25 wherein a nonsaccharide hetero ring or a
    fused or bridged ring system which contains a nonsaccharide hetero ring is
    attached to an oxygen of the saccharide radical, e.g.,


CLS 514/28
TXT The hetero ring has 8 or more ring carbons:

    Subject mater under subclass 27 wherein the nonsaccharide hetero ring has
    eight or more ring carbon members.


CLS 514/29
TXT The hetero ring has exactly 13 ring carbons (e.g., erythromycin, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 28 wherein the nonsaccharide hetero ring has
    exactly 13 carbon atoms, e.g., erythromycin, etc.


CLS 514/30
TXT The hetero ring has exactly 15 ring carbons:

    Subject matter under subclass 28 wherein the nonsaccharide hetero ring has
    exactly 15 carbon atoms.


CLS 514/31
TXT The hetero ring has 20 or more ring carbons (e.g.,  nystatin, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 28 wherein the nonsaccharide hetero ring has
    20 or more ring carbon atoms, e.g., nystatin, etc.


CLS 514/32
TXT Oxygen of the saccharide radical bonded to a nonsaccharide hetero ring by
    acyclic carbon bonding:

    Subject matter under subclass 25 wherein a hetero ring or polycyclo ring
    system which contains a nonsaccharide hetero ring is directly linked to an
    oxygen of the saccharide radical directly through only acyclic carbon
    bonding, e.g.,


CLS 514/33
TXT Oxygen of the saccharide radical bonded directly to a polyclo ring system
    of three or more carbocyclic rings:

    Subject matter under subclass 25 wherein the oxygen of the saccharide
    radical is directly bonded to a polycyclo ring system of three or more
    carbocyclic rings.


CLS 514/34
TXT Oxygen of the saccharide radical bonded directly to a polycyclo ring system
    of four carbocyclic rings (e.g., daunomycin, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 33 wherein the oxygen of the saccharide
    radical is directly bonded to a polycyclo ring system of exactly four
    carbocyclic rings.


CLS 514/35
TXT Oxygen of the saccharide radical bonded directly to a cyclohexyl ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 25 wherein a cyclohexyl radical is bonded
    directly to an oxygen of the saccharide radical, e.g.,


CLS 514/36
TXT Two or more nitrogen atoms bonded directly to the cyclohexyl ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 35 wherein two or more nitrogen atoms are
    bonded directly to the cyclohexyl radical, e.g.,


CLS 514/37
TXT The nitrogen atoms are in N-C(=N)-N groups (e.g, streptomycin, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 36 wherein all the nitrogen atoms which are
    bonded directly to the cyclohexyl group are part of a N-C(=N)-N group,
    e.g.,


CLS 514/38
TXT Two saccharide radicals bonded through only oxygen to adjacent ring carbons
    of the cyclohexyl ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 36 wherein the cyclohexyl radical is
    separately, independently and directly bonded through only oxygen of two
    saccharide radicals at adjacent ring carbons, e.g.,


CLS 514/39
TXT Three or more saccharide radicals (e.g., neomycin, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 38 wherein the cyclohexyl radical is bonded
    directly or indirectly to three or more saccharide radicals, e.g.,



CLS 514/40
TXT Two saccharide radicals bonded through only oxygen to 4- and 6- positions
    of the cyclohexyl ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 36 wherein the cyclohexyl radical is
    separately, independently and directly bonded through only oxygen of two
    saccharide radicals at the 4- and 6- position carbons of the cyclohexyl
    ring, e.g.,


CLS 514/41
TXT Kanamycin or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 40 wherein the organic active ingredient is
    Kanamycin or a derivative thereof, i.e.,

    wherein R is NH2 and R' is NH2 or OH.


CLS 514/42
TXT N-glycoside:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein the saccharide is a glycosidic
    derivative or the cyclic form of saccharides or polysaccharides in which an
    aglycone portion is attached through nitrogen to the saccharide moiety by
    substituting it for the hemiacetal hydroxyl of the sugar.

    (1)     Note.  The aglycone can be noncyclic.


CLS 514/43
TXT Nitrogen containing hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 wherein the aglycone portion contains a
    nitrogen containing hetero ring.


CLS 514/44
TXT Polynucleotide (e.g., RNA, DNA, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 43 which has the following structure:

    wherein n is a whole number equal or greater than two, R' is H or OH and R"
    is purine or pyrimidine or a substituted purine or pyrimidine.

    (1)     Note.  Substituted pyrimidine or purine includes only those
    derivatives which are substituted on rather than in the respective ring
    position, i.e.,

            is present in the structure.  The internal ring bonding may be
    altered by tautomerism or by the addition of substituents without excluding
    a compound from this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    536,    Organic Compounds, appropriate subclasses for nucleosides,
    nucleotides and polynucleotides like RNA or DNA compounds as well as
    chemical methods for synthesizing these compounds.  Search specifically
    subclasses 23.1+ for fragments of DNA which could have utility in
    recombinant processes or gene therapy and subclasses 26.4+ for vitamin B-12
    and its derivatives.


CLS 514/45
TXT Purines (including hydrogenated) (e.g., adenine, guanine, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 43 wherein the hetero ring is a purine:


    or substituted purine.


CLS 514/46
TXT Adenosine or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 45 wherein the compound is adenosine:

    or derivative thereof.


CLS 514/47
TXT Phosphorus containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 wherein the adenosine or derivative
    thereof contains phosphorus.


CLS 514/48
TXT Phosphorus containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 45 wherein the purine compound contains
    phosphorus.


CLS 514/49
TXT Pyrimidines (including hydrogenated) (e.g., cytosine, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 43 wherein the hetero ring is a pyrimidine:


    or substituted pyrimidine.

    (1)     Note.  The above structure shows the position numbering used for 1,
    3-diazines.


CLS 514/50
TXT 2, 4-diketone pyrimidine or derivative (e.g., uracil, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein oxygen atoms are directly double
    bonded to the 2 and 4 positions of the pyrimidine ring, e.g.,


CLS 514/51
TXT Phosphorus containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein the 2, 4-diketone pyrimidine
    compound contains phosphorus.


CLS 514/52
TXT Phosphorus containing (e.g., vitamin B12, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 43 which contains phosphorus.


CLS 514/53
TXT Disaccharide:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein the organic active ingredient
    contains two saccharide radicals bonded via a glycosidic linkage and which
    on hydrolysis yields two units of monosaccharides (e.g., sucrose, lactose,
    maltose, etc.).


CLS 514/54
TXT Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein the organic active ingredient
    contains more than two saccharide radicals directly or indirectly bonded
    together.


CLS 514/55
TXT Chitin or derivative:

    Subject matter subclass 54 wherein the polysaccharide has the following
    repeating units:



    Repeating unit of chitin.


CLS 514/56
TXT Heparin or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 54 wherein the polysaccharide has the
    following repeating unit:

    wherein the degree of sulfation of the individual components in the
    polysaccharide chain, and derivatives thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Heparin is a substance which can be found in various tissues
    of mammals, especially the lung, spleen, liver and muscle, and has been
    used medicinally for coagulation of blood and metabolism of lipids.


CLS 514/57
TXT Cellulose or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 54 wherein the polysaccharide consists of
    repeating glucose units having the following structure:


CLS 514/58
TXT Dextrin or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 54 wherein the polysaccharide consists of
    various gummy polysaccharides produced by thermal or acid degradation of
    starch, and derivatives of such compounds.

    (1)     Note.  Dextrins are carbohydrates, intermediate between starch and
    sugars.  Degradation of dextrins yields maltose and glucose.

    (2)     Note.  Derivatives of dextrins which remain gummy polysaccharides
    are classified herein.


CLS 514/59
TXT Dextran or derivative:

    Subject matter subclass 54 wherein the polysaccharide is composed of
    D-glucose units which are linked by 1, 6 glucosidic bonds.

    (1)     Note.  Dextrin and dextrine are not variant spelling of "Dextran",
    instead they are respectively a starch hydrolysis product and a variant
    spelling of dextrin.

    (2)     Note.  Controlled hydrolysis of native dextran yields clinical
    dextran of lower molecular weight which is useful as a blood plasma
    substitute.


CLS 514/60
TXT Starch or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 54 wherein the polysaccharide has amylose and
    amylopectin as their main components.

    (1)     Note.  Starches are heterogeneous in that the amylose and
    amylopectin occur in different ratios to each other.

    (2)     Note.  Starches yield dextrins upon extensive thermal of acid
    degradation and yield glucose upon completed hydrolysis.


CLS 514/61
TXT Tri- or tetrasaccharide:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein a glucose moiety is substituted
    with one or more amino groups, or derivative thereof.


CLS 514/62
TXT Silicon containing DOAI:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein a glucose moiety is substituted
    with one or more amino groups, or derivative thereof.


CLS 514/63
TXT Silicon containing DOAI:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 in which the organic active ingredient
    contains silicon.


CLS 514/64
TXT Boron containing DOAI:

    Subject matter subclass 1 in which the organic active ingredient contains
    boron.


CLS 514/65
TXT Pyrethrum plant derived material or plant derive rotenone compound
    containing DOAI:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 which contains pyrethrum plant derived
    material or plant derived rotenone compound containing material, e.g.,
    ground pyrethrum flowers or extract of cube root or derris root, etc.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not contain chemically identified
    derivatives of naturally occurring pyrethrum plant derived material or
    plant derived rotenone containing material since such derivatives are
    classified on the basis of the chemical structure.

    (2)     Note.  Synthetically produced active compounds which would be
    identical with the active constituents of pyrethrum or rotenone containing
    plant such as derris root, cube root are not classified herein but are
    classified of the chemical structure of the synthetically produced
    compound.  See, for example, subclass 531 for allethrins.

    (3)     Note.  The active constituents of pyrethrum includes pyrethrins I
    and II, cinerins I and II and jasmolins I and II.


CLS 514/66
TXT With heterocyclic compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 65 which contains a heterocyclic compound in
    addition to the pyrethrum derived material or plant derived rotenone
    compound.


CLS 514/67
TXT Methlenedioxyphenyl group containing (e.g., piperonyl butoxide, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 66 which contains methylenedioxyphenyl group,
    e.g.,


CLS 514/68
TXT With carboxylic acid ester:

    Subject matter under subclass 65 which contains a carboxylic acid ester in
    addition to the pyrethrum derived material or plant derived rotenone
    compound.


CLS 514/69
TXT With carboxylic acid metal salt:

    Subject matter under subclass 65 which contains a carboxylic acid metal
    salt in addition to the pyrethrum derived material or plant derived
    rotenone compound.


CLS 514/70
TXT With organic nitrogen containing compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 65 which contains a nitrogen containing
    organic compound in addition to the pyrethrum derived material or plant
    derived rotenone compound.


CLS 514/71
TXT Sulfur containing organic nitrogen compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 wherein the nitrogen containing organic
    compound contains sulfur.


CLS 514/72
TXT With organic oxygen containing compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 65 which contains oxygen containing organic
    compound in addition to the pyrethrum derived material or plant derived
    rotenone compound.


CLS 514/73
TXT Phosphorus or halogen containing organic oxygen compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the oxygen containing organic
    compound contains phosphorus or halogen.


CLS 514/74
TXT With hydrocarbon or halohydrocarbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 65 which contains hydrocarbon or
    halohydrocarbon in addition to the pyrethrum derived material or plant
    derived rotenone compound.


CLS 514/75
TXT Phosphorus containing other than solely as part of an inorganic ion in an
    addition salt DOAI:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the organic active ingredient
    contains a phosphorus atom.

    (1)     Note.  Inorganic phosphorus salts of the organic active ingredient
    are excluded herefrom and classified with the active moiety.


CLS 514/76
TXT Amine addition salt of organic phosphorus containing acid:

    Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein the organic active ingredient is
    an amine addition salt of the phosphorus compound, wherein said salt
    forming group is the nitrogen atom of said amine, e.g.,


CLS 514/77
TXT Inner salt (e.g., betaine, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein the organic active ingredient is
    an inner salt, e.g.,





CLS 514/78
TXT Lecithins:

    Subject matter under subclass 77 wherein the inner salt contains the
    following structure


    wherein R is an organic radical.


CLS 514/79
TXT Nitrogen containing hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 75 in which the organo-phosphorus compound
    contains a heterocyclic ring containing nitrogen as a hetero atom.


CLS 514/80
TXT Polycyclo ring system having a ring nitrogen in the system:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 in which the organo-phosphorus compound
    contains a polycyclo ring system (bridged or fused), e.g.,


CLS 514/81
TXT Nonshared hetero atoms in at least two rings of the polycyclo ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 in which the organo-phosphorus compound
    contains a polycyclo ring system which contains nonshared

    hetero atoms in at least two rings of the polycyclo ring systems,  e.g.,


CLS 514/82
TXT Quinolinyl or isoquinolinyl (including hydrogenated):

    Subject matter under subclass 80 in which the organo-phosphorus compound
    contains a quinolinyl or isoquinolinyl group, (including hydrogenated).


CLS 514/83
TXT Hetero ring is three-membered consisting of one nitrogen and two carbons:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 in which the organo-phosphorus compound
    contains a three-membered heterocyclic ring which contains one nitrogen and
    two carbons.


CLS 514/84
TXT Hetero ring is six-membered consisting of three nitrogens and three carbons:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 in which the organo-phosphorus compound
    contains a six-membered heterocyclic ring which consists of three nitrogens
    and three carbons.


CLS 514/85
TXT Hetero ring is six-membered consisting of two nitrogens and four carbons:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 in which the organo-phosphorus compound
    contains a six-membered heterocyclic ring which consists of two nitrogens
    and four carbons.


CLS 514/86
TXT Nitrogen atoms occupy 1 and 3- positions:

    Subject matter under subclass 85 wherein the nitrogen atoms are at the 1-
    and 3- position of the six member ring, i.e., 1, 3-diazines.


CLS 514/87
TXT PX- bonded directly to 1, 3-diazine at 2-position (X is chalcogen):

    Subject matter under subclass 86 in which a


    PX- is bonded directly to the 1,3-diazine at the 2-position.  (X is
    chalcogen), e.g.,


CLS 514/88
TXT Two or more PX- groups attached to the same 1,3-diazine (X is chalcogen):

    Subject matter subclass 86 in which at least two PX's are bonded directly
    to the 1,3-diazine moiety, e.g.,


CLS 514/89
TXT Hetero ring is six-membered and includes only one ring nitrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 in which the organo-phosphorus compound
    contains a heterocyclic ring which has six members and includes only one
    therein, e.g.,


CLS 514/90
TXT Chalcogen in the six-membered hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 in which the organo-phosphorus compound
    contains a six-membered heterocyclic ring which also contains a chalcogen
    atom as well as the nitrogen, e.g.,


CLS 514/91
TXT Hetero ring is five-membered:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 in which the organo-phosphorus compound
    contains a heterocyclic moiety which has five members.


CLS 514/92
TXT Two or more hetero atoms in the five-membered ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 91 in which the organo-phosphorus compound
    contains a five-membered heterocyclic moiety which contains two or more
    hetero atoms.


CLS 514/93
TXT Triazoles (including hydrogenated):

    Subject matter under subclass 92 in which the organo-phosphorus compound
    contains a five-membered heterocyclic moiety which consists of three
    nitrogens and two carbons.


CLS 514/94
TXT Diazoles (including hydrogenated):

    Subject matter under subclass 92 in which the organo-phosphorus compound
    contains a five-membered heterocyclic moiety which contains two nitrogens
    and three carbons.


CLS 514/95
TXT Sulfur containing hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 75 in which the organo-phosphorus compound
    contains a heterocyclic ring which contains at least one sulfur atom as a
    ring member.


CLS 514/96
TXT Polycyclo ring system having the hetero ring as one of the cyclos:

    Subject matter under subclass 95 in which the organo-phosphorus compound
    contains a bridged or fused ring system which has a heterocyclic sulfur
    containing ring as one of the cyclos.


CLS 514/97
TXT Two or more sulfurs in the hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 95 in which  the organo-phosphorus compound
    contains at least two sulfur atoms as ring members.


CLS 514/98
TXT Oxygen in the hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 95 in which the organo-phosphorus compound
    contains a heterocyclic ring which contains at least one sulfur atom and at
    least one oxygen atom as ring members.


CLS 514/99
TXT Oxygen containing hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 75 in which the organo-phosphorus compound
    contains at least one oxygen atom as a ring member.


CLS 514/100
TXT Polycyclo ring system having the hetero ring as one of the cyclos:

    Subject matter under subclass 99 in which the organo-phosphorus compound
    contains a fused or bridged ring system which contains a heterocyclic
    oxygen-containing ring as one of the cyclos.


CLS 514/101
TXT Two or more oxygen in the hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 99 in which the organo-phosphorus compound
    contains a heterocyclic ring which contains at least two oxygen atoms as
    ring members.


CLS 514/102
TXT Two or more phosphorus atoms directly or indirectly bonded together by only
    covalent bonds:

    Subject matter under subclass 75 in which the organo-phosphorus compound
    contains at least two nonionically bonded phosphorus atoms.

    (1)     Note.  Organic phosphorus salts and complexes of a phosphorus
    containing compound and other compounds are


            excluded unless the phosphorus containing moiety has at least two
    nonionically bonded phosphorus atoms, e.g.,


CLS 514/103
TXT Phosphorus acid ester of polyhydric alcohol or thioalcohol(e.g., P-X-R-X-P
    group, etc., wherein X is chalcogen and R is the residue of the polyhydric
    alcohol or thioalcohol):

    Subject matter under subclass 102 in which the organo-phosphorus compound
    is a phosphorus acid ester of a polyhydric alcohol or thioalcohol, e.g.,
    P-X-(R) XP group, etc., wherein X is chalcogen and R is the residue of a
    polyhydric alcohol.


CLS 514/104
TXT Benzene ring in the alcohol moiety:

    Subject matter under subclass 103 in which the polyphosphorus compound
    corresponds to the structure -P-X-(R)-X-P-, wherein R is the residue of a
    polyhydric alcohol which is aromatic in nature (i.e., contains a benzene
    ring and wherein X is chalcogen).


CLS 514/105
TXT Phosphorus is part of a ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 102 in which a phosphorus atom is part of a
    ring, e.g.,


CLS 514/106
TXT P-O-P or P-S-P containing (e.g., anhydrides, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 102 which contains a polyphosphorus compound
    wherein two phosphorus atoms are linked to each other through  a single
    oxygen or sulfur (i.e., P-O-P OR P-S-P).


CLS 514/107
TXT Benzene ring containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 102 in which the phosphorus compound contains
    a benzene ring.


CLS 514/108
TXT Acyclic and contains at least one carbon atom between the phosphorus atoms:

    Subject matter under subclass 102 in which the phosphorus compound is
    acyclic and contains at least one carbon between the phosphorus atoms.


CLS 514/109
TXT P-X-X containing (X is chalcogen):

    Subject matter under subclass 75 in which the organo-phosphorus compound
    has a single phosphorus atom linked directly to a chalcogen atom which in
    turn is linked directly to another chalcogen atom, e.g.,

    wherein X is Chalcogen.


CLS 514/110
TXT Phosphorus is part of a ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 75 in which the organo-phosphorus compound
    contains the phosphorus atom as part of a ring, e.g.,


CLS 514/111
TXT Polycyclo ring system having the phosphorus containing ring as one of the
    cyclos:

    Subject matter under subclass 110 in which the organo-phosphorus compound
    contains a fused ring system or bridged ring system of which the phosphorus
    containing ring is a part, e.g.,


CLS 514/112
TXT Cyano or isocyano containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 75 in which the organo-phosphorus compound
    contains at least one nitrile or isonitrile radical bonded to a carbon.


CLS 514/113
TXT Cyano or isocyano bonded directly to a benzene ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 in which the nitrile or isonitrile radical
    bonded to a benzene ring.


CLS 514/114
TXT Nitrogen, other than nitro or nitroso, bonded indirectly to phosphorus:

    Subject matter under subclass 75 in which the organo-phosphorus compound
    contains a nitrogen, other than nitro or nitroso, which is not directly
    bonded to the phosphorus atom, e.g.,


CLS 514/115
TXT N-C(=X)-N containing (S is chalcogen):

    Subject matter under subclass 114 in which the organo-phosphorus compound
    contains the radical NN wherein X is chalcogen.


CLS 514/116
TXT Sulfur single bonded directly to nitrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 114 in which the organo-phosphorus compound
    contains a sulfur atom which is directly bonded to a nitrogen by a single
    bond.


CLS 514/117
TXT N-(=O)S(=O) containing (i.e., sulfonamides):

    Subject matter under subclass 116 in which the organo-phosphorus compound
    contains the sulfonamido group, e.g.,



CLS 514/118
TXT Phosphorus single bonded directly to nitrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 114 in which the organo-phosphorus compound
    contains a nitrogen which is directly bonded to a phosphorus atom by a
    single bond, e.g.,


CLS 514/119
TXT C(=O)N containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 114 in which the organo-phosphorus compound
    contains an amido group, e.g.,


CLS 514/120
TXT C=O other than as ketone or aldehyde, attached directly or indirectly to
    phosphorus:

    Subject matter under subclass 75 in which the organo-phosphorus compound
    contains a carbonyl group, other than as ketone or aldehyde, e.g.,


CLS 514/121
TXT Plural C=O groups, other than as ketone or aldehyde:

    Subject matter under subclass 120 wherein the organo-phosphorus compound
    contains two C=O groups which are other than a ketone or aldehyde, e.g.,



CLS 514/122
TXT Malathion:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the organo-phosphorus compound is
    malathion, i.e.,


CLS 514/123
TXT With N-C(=O)-O containing compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 122 wherein another compound is present,
    along with malathion, which has the N(C=O)-O group therein, e.g.,


CLS 514/124
TXT C=O, other than as ketone or aldehyde, attached to a benzene ring:

    Subject Matter under subclass 120 wherein the organo-phosphorus compound
    contains a C=O group other than as ketone or aldehyde attached directly to
    a benzene ring, e.g.,


CLS 514/125
TXT Ketone or aldehyde containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein the organo-phosphorus compound
    contains at least one carbonyl group in the form of an aldehyde or ketone.


CLS 514/126
TXT Sulfur not bonded directly to phosphorus:

    Subject matter under subclass 126 in which the organo-phosphorus compound
    contains sulfur and wherein said sulfur is not bonded directly to the
    phosphorus atom.


CLS 514/127
TXT Thioether, sulfoxide or sulfone:

    Subject matter under subclass 126 in which the organo-phosphorus compound
    contains sulfur in the form of a thioether, sulfoxide or sulfone group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains the groups:
    C-S-C; C- C, and C- C


CLS 514/128
TXT Sulfur bonded directly to a benzene ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein the sulfur is directly bonded to
    a carbon of a benzene ring.


CLS 514/129
TXT Oxygen bonded directly to a carbon or hydrogen and wherein the oxygen is
    not bonded directly to phosphorus:

    Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein the organo-phosphorus compound
    contains an oxygen which is bonded directly to a carbon or hydrogen and
    wherein the oxygen is not bonded to phosphorus, e.g .,


CLS 514/130
TXT The oxygen is bonded directly to a benzene ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein the oxygen therein is directly
    bonded to a benzene ring.


CLS 514/131
TXT Nitro group bonded to a carbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein the organo-phosphorus compound
    contains at least one nitro substituent bonded to a carbon.


CLS 514/132
TXT Nitro group is directly bonded to a benzene ring which benzene ring is
    either bonded directly bonded to phosphorus or indirectly bonded to
    phosphorus through a chalcogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the nitro is directly attached to
    a benzene ring which is directly bonded to phosphorus, or indirectly bonded
    to phosphorus through a chalcogen, e.g.,


CLS 514/133
TXT Two or more such benzene rings:

    Subject matter under subclass 132 wherein two or more such nitro
    substituted benzene rings are present.


CLS 514/134
TXT Acyclic carbon to carbon unsaturation:

    Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein the organo-phosphorus compound has
    at least one unsaturated group between adjacent carbon atoms and wherein
    said unsaturation is present other than as an aromatic compound, e.g.,


CLS 514/135
TXT Subject matter under subclass 134 wherein the unsaturation is in the form
    of a triple bond, e.g.,


CLS 514/136
TXT Phosphate ester having three ester groups (e.g., DDVP, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 134 wherein the organo-phosphorus compound is
    a triester of otho-phosphoric acid, e.g.,

    or sulfur analog thereof, etc.


CLS 514/137
TXT Nitrogen bonded directly to phosphorus:

    Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein the organo-phosphorus compound has
    at least one phosphorus to nitrogen bond.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118,    when another nitrogen atom other than nitro or nitroso is present
    in the molecule which nitrogen is not directly bonded to phosphorus.


CLS 514/138
TXT N-P-N or N-N-P containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 137 wherein the organo-phosphorus compound
    has a N-P-N or N-N-P chain therein.


CLS 514/139
TXT Phosphorus bonded directly to halogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein the organo-phosphorus compound has
    at least one phosphorus to halogen bond.


CLS 514/140
TXT (C)(R)P=X(-XC) containing (i.e., phosphinate) (X is chalcogen; R is
    C or H):

    Subject matter under subclass 75 in which the organo-phosphorus compound is
    an ester of phosphinic acid

    wherein R and R' are organic radicals and X is chalcogen.


CLS 514/141
TXT (CX-) (C) P=X (XH) OR (CX-) (R) P=X (XC) containing (e.g.,
    phosphonate, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 75 in which the organo-phosphorus compound is
    an ester of phosphonic acid.

    wherein R is an organic radical and X is chalcogen.


CLS 514/142
TXT (CX-)(C)P(C),(CX-)(RX-)P (C), (CX-) P (XH)(XH or (CX-)P(-XR)
    containing (X is chalcogen:  R is C or H) (e.g., phosphinite, phosphonite,
    phosphite, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 75 in which the organo-phosphorus compound is
    (a) an ester or phosphinous acid (i.e.,

    (b)  an ester of phosphonous acid

    or (c) an ester of phosphorus acid

    wherein R or R in any of the above formulas is an organic radical and X is
    chalcogen.


CLS 514/143
TXT Ester or (HX) P=X (XH) (XH) (X is chalcogen) (e.g., phosphate, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 775 in which the organo-phosphorus compound
    is an ester of an acid whose structural formula is

    wherein X is chalcogen.


CLS 514/144
TXT Triester:

    Subject matter under subclass 143 which the organo-phosphorus compound is a
    triester of orthophosphoric acid



    wherein X is chalcogen.


CLS 514/145
TXT Three benzene rings bonded directly to chalcogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 144 wherein the organo-phosphorus compound
    has three benzene rings attached directly to chalcogens which are bonded
    directly to a single phosphorus atom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146,    for the compound

    which is considered to have only two benzene rings attached to chalcogens
    which are bonded directly to phosphorus.


CLS 514/146
TXT Two benzene rings bonded directly to chalcogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 144 wherein the organo-phosphorus compound
    has at least two benzene rings attached directly to chalcogens which are
    bonded to a single phosphorus atom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    147,    for the compound


    which is considered to have only one benzene ring bonded to chalcogen which
    is bonded directly to phosphorus.


CLS 514/147
TXT One benzene ring bonded directly to chalcogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 144 wherein the organo-phosphorus compound
    has one benzene ring attached directly to a chalcogen which is directly
    bonded to a phosphorus atom.


CLS 514/148
TXT Diester:

    Subject matter under subclass 143 wherein the organo-phosphorus compound
    has the formula

    wherein R is an organic radical and X is chalcogen.


CLS 514/149
TXT Azoxy DOAI:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the active DOAI contains the azoxy
    group therein,i.e., - or -N=-linking two organicradicals through carbons
    thereof, e.g.,RN -, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter containing a -N=N- groups as part of a ring
    is classified in subclass 183.


CLS 514/150
TXT Acyclic nitrogen double bonded to acyclic nitrogen, acyclic nitrogen triple
    bonded to acyclic nitrogen or azide DOAI:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the active DOAI contains an acyclic
    nitrogen which is double or triple bonded to another acyclic nitrogen,
    i.e., -N=N- or --ANION




    (diazonium) or azide, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183,    for a -N=N- group as part of a hetero ring.


CLS 514/151
TXT Acyclic C-N=N-N containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 150 wherein the active ingredient contains
    the C-N=N-N grouping e.g.,

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter which contains -N=N-N- as part of a ring is
    classified in subclass 183.


CLS 514/152
TXT 3,10-dihydroxy-2-naphthacene carboxamide or derivative (e.g.,
    tetracycline, etc.) DOAI:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 which contains an active DOAI which has the
    3,10 dihydroxy-2-naphthacenecarboxamide nucleus, e.g., (tetracycline),


CLS 514/153
TXT With stabilizer or preservative:

    Subject matter under subclass 152 wherein an additional agent is present
    which is disclosedas a stabilizer or preservative for the
    3,10-dihydroxy-2-naphthacenecarboxamide compound.


CLS 514/154
TXT With an additional active ingredient (excludes reaction product or complex):

    Subject matter under subclass 152 which contain a compound and an
    additional active ingredient.

    (1)     Note.  Reaction products, complexes and mixtures comprising two or
    moreactive compounds which havethe 3,10-dihydroxy-2-naphthacenecarboxamide
    nucleus are included herein.


CLS 514/155
TXT Para-N-benzene - sulfoxy-N containing DOAI, and said benzene ring is not
    part of a polycyclo ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 which contains a DOAI which has the
    structural group

    and no ring of any type is fused onto the benzene nucleus, e.g.,
    sulfanilamide, p-nitrobenzenesulfonylhydrazone, etc.


CLS 514/156
TXT Hetero ring containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 wherein the active ingredient having at
    least one

    group also contains a heterocyclic group, e.g., sulfapyridine,


CLS 514/157
TXT The hetero ring is six-membered and includes at least two nitrogens and no
    other hetero atoms:

    Subject matter under subclass 156 wherein the heterocyclic ring has six
    members and includes at least two nitrogen and no other hetero atoms.


CLS 514/158
TXT The hetero ring is five-membered:

    Subject matter under subclass 156 wherein the heterocyclic group has five
    members, e.g., sulfamoxole,


CLS 514/159
TXT Ortho-hydroxybenzoic acid (i.e., salicylic acid) or derivative DOAI:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the organic active ingredient
    contains salicylic acid:

    or a derivative thereof which contains the moiety,

    said derivative being other than another ring fused onto the benzoic acid
    moiety or the ortho-hydroxybenzoic acid salts of a bioactive organic
    compound.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes ring structures derived from the
    carboxy and hydroxyl moieties.

    (2)     Note.  The ortho-hydroxybenzoic acid salts of organic compounds are
    excluded herefrom and are classified in the appropriate subclasses below
    based on the bioactive compound.


CLS 514/160
TXT With additional ortho-hydroxybenzoic acid compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein two or more bioactive organic
    compounds each having the moiety are present.

    (1)     Note.  The combination of salicylic acid and a salt thereof is in
    this subclass.


CLS 514/161
TXT With heterocyclic compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein a heterocyclic compound is
    present in addition to the salicylic acid compound.


CLS 514/162
TXT With organic nitrogen containing compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein an organic nitrogen compound is
    present in addition to the salicylic acid compound.


CLS 514/163
TXT With carboxylic acid, ester or metal salt thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein a carboxylic acid, ester or metal
    salt thereof is present in addition to the salicylic acid compound.


CLS 514/164
TXT With organic oxygen containing compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein an organic oxygen compound is
    present in addition to the salicylic acid compound.


CLS 514/165
TXT Aspirin, per se, (i.e., 2-(acetyloxy) benzoic acid):

    Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein the organic active ingredient is
    2-(acetyloxy benzoic acid):



CLS 514/166
TXT Nitrogen containing (e.g., anilides, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein the salicylic acid compound
    contains nitrogen, e.g., anilides, etc.


CLS 514/167
TXT 9,10-seco cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system (e.g., vitamin
    D, etc.) DOAI:

    Subject matter under subclass  wherein the organic active ingredient
    contains a 9, 10-seco-cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene  nucleus, i.e.,

    (1)     Note.  Such terms as "activated ergosterol", vitamin D,
    ergocalciferol, cholecalciferol and antirachitic vitamin will suffice for
    classification of an active ingredient in this subclass.


CLS 514/168
TXT With a vitamin type active ingredient:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 wherein an additional vitamin type active
    compound is present in addition to the 9, 10
    seco-cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene compound, e.g., vitamin A, etc.


CLS 514/169
TXT Cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system DOAI:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the organic active ingredient has
    the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene nucleus:

    and may contain double bond between its members.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is lanolin as the active ingredient.


CLS 514/170
TXT Plural compounds containing cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring systems:

    Subject matter under subclass 169 wherein two or more bioactive compounds
    are present each of which contains the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring
    system.


CLS 514/171
TXT With additional active ingredient:

    Subject matter under subclass 169 wherein an organic bioactive ingredient
    is present in addition to the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring containing
    compound.


CLS 514/172
TXT Hetero ring containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 169 wherein the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene
    ring containing compound contains a heterocyclic ring.  Included herein
    are:


CLS 514/173
TXT Spiro ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 172 wherein a spiro ring is attached directly
    or indirectly to a carbon of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene nucleus.


CLS 514/174
TXT -O-C-O- is part of a hetero ring (e.g., acetonide, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 172 wherein an -O-C-O- containing hetero ring
    is attached or fused to the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene nucleus.


CLS 514/175
TXT -C(=O)-O- is part of a hetero ring (e.g., lactone, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 172 wherein -O-C(=O)- is part of the hetero
    ring attached or fused to the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene nucleus.


CLS 514/176
TXT Nitrogen containing hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 172 wherein the hetero ring contains at least
    one nitrogen atom.


CLS 514/177
TXT Oxygen double bonded to a ring carbon or the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene
    ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 169 wherein a nuclear carbon of the
    cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene nucleus is bonded to an oxygen atom through a
    double bond (C=O).


CLS 514/178
TXT Oxygen single bonded to a ring carbon of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene
    ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 177 wherein one nuclear carbon of the
    cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene nucleus is bonded to an oxygen through a
    double bond and wherein another nuclear carbon atom of said
    cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene is bonded to at least one other oxygen
    through a single bond as, e.g., ether, hydroxy or alcoholate, etc.


CLS 514/179
TXT Modified C-ring (except methyl in 13-position) (e.g., double bond
    containing substituted, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 178 wherein the C-ring of the
    cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system contains a double bond or is
    substituted, other than -CH3 in 13-position, i.e., 18-methyl.

    (1)     Note.  For the purpose of this classification, the C-ring is
    defined as including positions 8, 9, 11, 12, 13, and 14.

    (2)     Note.  See subclass 169 for the numbering system of a
    cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene nucleus.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass contains for example:


CLS 514/180
TXT 9-position substituted:

    Subject matter under subclass 179 wherein the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene
    is substituted.


CLS 514/181
TXT 21-position substituted:

    Subject matter under subclass 178 wherein the carbon in the 21 position is
    directly bonded to an atom other than carbon or hydrogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 514/182
TXT Oxygen singly bonded to a ring carbon of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene
    ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 169 wherein a nuclear carbon of the
    cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene nucleus is bonded to an oxygen through a
    single bond


CLS 514/183
TXT Heterocyclic carbon compounds containing a hetero ring having chalcogen
    (i.e., O, S, Se, or Te) or nitrogen as the only ring hetero atoms DOAI:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 which includes a compound containing a ring
    composed of carbon and at least one element from the group consisting of
    nitrogen, sulfur, selenium, tellurium and oxygen as DOAI.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded herefrom are those carbon compounds wherein the
    only heterocyclic nucleus present is produced by salt formation between
    amino and acid groups, e.g., betaines, which are placed with the
    corresponding open chain compounds, particularly subclass 556.


CLS 514/184
TXT Heavy metal-containing (including salts):

    Subject matter under subclass 183 in which the heterocyclic compound
    includes a heavy metal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes salts.


CLS 514/185
TXT Polycyclo ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 184 wherein the heterocyclic compound which
    includes a heavy metal is a part of a fused ring or bridged ring system.


CLS 514/186
TXT Bicyclo ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 185 wherein the polycyclo system comprises
    only two rings.


CLS 514/187
TXT Quinolines or isoquinolines (including hydrogenated):

    Subject matter under subclass 186 in which the bicyclo forms a quinoline or
    isoquinoline ring or hydrogenated forms thereof, e.g.,


CLS 514/188
TXT Hetero ring is six-membered consisting of one nitrogen and five carbons:

    Subject matter under subclass 184 wherein the heterocyclic ring consists of
    five carbons and one nitrogen.


CLS 514/189
TXT Tin:

    Subject matter under subclass 184 wherein the heavy metal is tin.


CLS 514/190
TXT Mercury:

    Subject matter under subclass 184 wherein the heavy metal is mercury.


CLS 514/191
TXT Aluminum (including salts):

    Subject matter under subclass 184 in which the heterocyclic compound
    includes aluminum.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes salts.


CLS 514/192
TXT 1-thia-4-aza-bicyclo (3.2.0.) heptane ring containing (including
    dehydrogenated) e.g., penicillins, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein the heterocyclic compound
    contains a 1-thia- 4- aza-bicyclo (3.2.0) heptane ring system having the
    following structure,

    and may contain a double bond between ring members, e.g., penicillins, etc.

    (1)     Note.  The Ring Index uses a different system for numbering the
    ring members.  However, in the indents hereunder which refer to positions,
    the numbers shown in the definition are employed.

    (2)     Note.  Patents reciting broadly "penicillins", penicillin type" or
    "penicillin drugs" are placed herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 43 for
    processes of producing penicillin by microbial fermentation.

    540,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 304+ for a penicillin compound, per
    se.


CLS 514/193
TXT Spiro or addition polycyclo ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 192 which contains a spiro ring system, or an
    additional polycyclo ring system.


CLS 514/194
TXT 6,6-di-substituted:

    Subject matter under subclass 192 wherein the bicyclo heptane ring system
    contains two substituents other than hydrogen in 6-position.


CLS 514/195
TXT 3-position substituent contains -COOC- group:

    Subject matter under subclass 192 wherein a substituent in 3-position of
    the bicyclo heptane ring system contains a -COOC- group, e.g., ester, etc.


CLS 514/196
TXT 6-position substituent contains hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 192 wherein a substituent in 6-position of
    the bicyclo heptane ring system contains a hetero ring.


CLS 514/197
TXT 6-position substituent contains carbocyclic ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 192 wherein a substituent in 6-position of
    the bicyclo heptane ring system contains a carbocyclic ring.


CLS 514/198
TXT Ampicillin, per se, or salt thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 197 wherein the heterocyclic compound is
    ampicillin having the following structure.

    or salt thereof.


CLS 514/199
TXT Penicillin G, per se, or salt thereof (e.g., procaine penicillin G, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 197 wherein the heterocyclic compound is
    penicillin G or salt thereof, e.g.,


CLS 514/200
TXT 1-thia-5-aza-bicyclo (4.2.0) octane ring containing (including
    dehydrogenated) (e.g., cephalosporins, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein the heterocyclic compound
    contains a 1-thia-5-aza-bicyclo (4.2.0.) octane ring system having the
    following structure,

    and may contain double bond between ring members, e.g., cephalosporin, etc.

    (1)     Note.  The Ring Index uses a different system for numbering the
    ring members.  However, in the indents hereunder which refer to positions,
    the numbers shown in the definition are employed.


CLS 514/201
TXT 7,7-di-substituted:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the bicyclo octane ring system
    contains two substituents other than hydrogen in 7-position.


CLS 514/202
TXT Addition hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the bicyclo octane ring system
    contains an additional hetero ring.


CLS 514/203
TXT 3-Position substituent contains pyridine ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 202 wherein a substituent in 3-position of
    the bicyclo octane ring system contains a pyridine ring.


CLS 514/204
TXT 3-position substituent contains sulfur:

    Subject matter under subclass 202 wherein a substituent in 3-position of
    the bicyclo octane ring system contains sulfur, e.g.,


CLS 514/205
TXT The additional hetero ring is part of a polycyclo ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 204 wherein the additional hetero ring is
    part of a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 514/206
TXT 7-position substituent contains hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 204 wherein a substituent in 7-position
    contains a hetero ring.


CLS 514/207
TXT Alkyl, hydroxyalkyl, alkoxyalkyl, or alkanoloxyalkyl bonded directly to
    3-position:

    Subject matter under subclass 202 wherein alkyl, alkyl-OH, alkyl-O-alkyl,
    or alkyl-C(=O)-O-alkyl is bonded directly to 3-position of the bicyclo
    octane ring system.


CLS 514/208
TXT Sulfur containing substituent:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the bicyclo octane ring system
    contains sulfur.


CLS 514/209
TXT Alkyl, hydroxyalkyl, alkoxyalkyl, or alkanoloxyalkyl bonded directly to
    3-position:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein alkyl, alkyl-OH, alkyl-O-alkyl,
    alkyl-C(=O)-O-alkyl is bonded directly to 3-position of the bicyclo octane
    ring system.


CLS 514/210
TXT Hetero ring is four-membered and includes at least one nitrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 183 which contains a heterocyclic ring
    consisting of four atoms, at least one of which is nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  The heterocyclic ring may include other hetero atoms of the
    group set forth in the definition of subclass 183 and the relative
    positions of the hetero atoms may vary.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    540,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 121+, Class 548, subclasses 950+ for
    a compound which includes a four-membered hetero ring containing nitrogen.


CLS 514/211
TXT Hetero ring is seven-membered and includes at least one nitrogen and at
    least one hetero atom other than nitrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 183 which contains a heterocyclic ring
    consisting of seven atoms, at least one of which is nitrogen and at least
    one other hetero atom, other than nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  See glossary for definition of hetero atom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    540,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 488+ for a compound containing a
    hetero ring which includes nitrogen and sulfur ring atoms and subclasses
    544+ for a compound containing a hetero ring which includes nitrogen and
    oxygen ring atoms.


CLS 514/212
TXT Hetero ring is seven-membered consisting of one nitrogen and six carbon
    atoms:

    Subject matter under subclass 183 which contains a seven-membered
    heterocyclic ring consisting of six carbon atoms and one nitrogen atom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    540,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 484+ for a seven-membered ring
    compound containing a ring nitrogen.


CLS 514/213
TXT Polycyclic ring system having the seven-membered hetero ring as one of the
    cyclos:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 wherein the seven-membered hetero ring is
    one of the cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 514/214
TXT Ring nitrogen is shared by two or three of the cyclos:

    Subject matter under subclass 213 wherein the ring nitrogen of the
    seven-membered hetero ring is also a member of one or two additional cyclos
    in the polycyclo ring system.


CLS 514/215
TXT Additional hetero atom in the polycyclo ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 213 wherein the polycyclo ring system
    contains at least one ring hetero atom in addition to the ring nitrogen of
    the seven-membered hetero ring.


CLS 514/216
TXT Two of the cyclos share at least three ring carbons (i.e., bridged):

    Subject matter under subclass 213 wherein two cyclos of the polycyclo ring
    system share at least three ring carbons.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 514/217
TXT Tricyclo ring system having the seven-membered hetero ring as one of the
    cyclos:

    Subject matter under subclass 213 wherein the polycyclo ring system
    consists of exactly three rings.


CLS 514/218
TXT Hetero ring is seven-membered consisting of two nitrogen and five carbon
    atoms:

    Subject matter under subclass 183 which contains a seven-membered
    heterocyclic ring consisting of two nitrogen and five carbon atoms.


CLS 514/219
TXT Polycyclo ring system having the seven-membered hetero ring as one of the
    cyclos:

    Subject matter under subclass 218 wherein the seven-membered hetero ring is
    one of the cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 514/220
TXT Tricyclo ring system having the seven-membered hetero ring as one of the
    cyclos:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 wherein the polycyclo ring system
    consists of exactly three rings.


CLS 514/221
TXT Bicyclo ring system having the seven-membered hetero ring as one of the
    cyclos:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 wherein the polycyclo ring system
    consists of exactly two rings.


CLS 514/222.2
TXT Hetero ring is six-membered and includes at least nitrogen and sulfur as
    ring members:

    Subject matter under subclass 183 in which the hetero ring contains at
    least nitrogen and sulfur as ring hetero atoms and is six-membered.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an active ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 514/222.5
TXT Three or more ring hetero atoms in the six-membered hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 222.2 in which the six-membered hetero ring
    contains at least three ring hetero atoms.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an active ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 514/222.8
TXT Polycyclo ring system having the six-membered hetero ring as one of the
    cyclos:

    Subject matter under subclass 222.5 in which the six-membered hetero ring
    is one of the cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an active ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 514/223.2
TXT 1,2,4,-benzothiadiazine-1, 1-dioxides (including hydrogenated):

    Subject matter under subclass 222.8 in which the polycyclo ring system has
    the following basic structure, which may contain double bonds between ring
    members:

    (1)     Note.  An example of an active ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 514/223.5
TXT With additional active ingredient:

    Subject matter under subclass 223.2 in which, in addition to the 1,2,
    4-benzothiadiazine-1, 1-dioxide compound, an additional active ingredient
    is present.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for subject matter wherein plural
    nonidentical 1,2, 4-benzothiadiazine-1, 1-dioxide compounds are each
    present as active ingredients.


CLS 514/223.8
TXT 1,3,5-thiadiazines:

    Subject matter under subclass 222.5 in which the six-membered hetero ring
    has the following basic structure, which may contain double bonds between
    ring members:

    (1)     Note.  An example of an active ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 514/224.2
TXT Polycyclo ring system having the six-membered hetero ring as one of the
    cyclos (e.g., 1,3- and 1,4-benzothiazines, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 222.22 in which the six-membered hetero ring
    is one of the cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an active ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 514/224.5
TXT At least three cyclos in the polycyclo ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 224.2 in which the polycyclo ring system
    contains three or more cyclos.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an active ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 514/224.8
TXT Phenothiazines (including hydrogenated):

    Subject matter under subclass 224.5 in which the polycyclo ring system has
    the following basic structure, which may contain double bonds between ring
    members:

    (1)     Note.  An example of an active ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 514/225.2
TXT Hetero ring attached directly or indirectly to the phenothiazine ring
    nitrogen by acyclic nonionic bonding:

    Subject matter under subclass 224.8 in which the phenothiazine ring
    nitrogen is attached directly or indirectly to a hetero ring by acyclic
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a active ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 514/225.5
TXT The hetero ring is monocyclic piperidine:

    Subject matter under subclass 225.2 in which monocyclic piperidine is the
    hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an active ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 514/225.8
TXT The hetero ring contains plural ring nitrogens:

    Subject matter under subclass 225.2 in which the hetero ring contains more
    than one ring nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an active ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 514/226.2
TXT Chalcogen or nitrogen attached indirectly to the phenothiazine ring
    nitrogen by acyclic nonionic bonding:

    Subject matter under subclass 224.8 in which the phenothiazine ring
    nitrogen is attached indirectly to chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) or to nitrogen by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an active ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 514/226.5
TXT One of the cyclos is a 1, 2-thiazine (e.g., 1, 2-benzothiazines, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 224.2 in which a 1, 2-thiazines is one of the
    cyclos of the polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an active ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 514/226.8
TXT 1, 3-thiazines:

    Subject matter under subclass 222.2 in which the hetero ring has the
    following basic structure, which may contain double bonds between ring
    members:

    (1)     Note.  An example of an ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 514/227.2
TXT Chalcogen or nitrogen bonded directly to ring carbon of the six-membered
    hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 226.8 in which a ring carbon if the 1,
    3-thiazine ring is bonded directly to chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) or to nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an active ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 514/227.5
TXT 1, 4-thiazines:

    Subject matter under subclass 222.2 in which the hetero ring has the
    following basic structure, which may contain double bonds between ring
    members:

    (1)     Note.  An example of an active ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 514/227.8
TXT Additional hetero ring attached directly or indirectly to the 1, 4-thiazine
    by nonionic bonding:

    Subject matter under subclass 227.5 in which the 1, 4-thiazines is attached
    directly or indirectly by nonionic bonding to an additional hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an active ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 514/228.2
TXT Polycyclo ring system having the additional hetero ring as one if the
    cyclos:

    Subject matter under subclass 227.8 in which the additional hetero ring is
    one of the cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an active ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 514/228.5
TXT Three or more ring hetero atoms in the polycyclo ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 228.2 in which the polycyclo ring system
    contains at least three ring hetero atoms.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an active ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 514/228.8
TXT Hetero ring is six-membered and includes at least nitrogen and oxygen as
    ring hetero atoms (e.g., monocyclic 1, 2- and 1, 3-oxazines, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 183 in which the hetero ring contains at
    least nitrogen and oxygen as ring hetero atoms and is six-membered.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an active ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 514/229.2
TXT Three or more ring hetero atoms in the six-membered hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 228.8 in which the six-membered hetero ring
    contains at least three ring hetero atoms.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an active ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 514/229.5
TXT Polycyclo ring system having the six-membered hetero ring as one of the
    cyclos (e.g., maytansinoids, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 228.8 in which the six-membered hetero ring
    is one of the cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an active ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 514/229.8
TXT Tricyclo ring system having the six-membered hetero ring as one of the
    cyclos:

    Subject matter under subclass 229.5 in which the six-membered hetero ring
    is one of the cyclos of a tricyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an active ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 514/230.2
TXT Ring nitrogen shared by two of the cyclos:

    Subject matter under subclass 229.8 in which the tricyclo ring system
    contains a ring nitrogen which is shared by two of the cyclos.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an active ingredient provided for herein is:



CLS 514/230.5
TXT Bicyclo ring system having the six-membered hetero ring as one of the
    cyclos (e.g., 1 4-benzoxazines, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 229.5 in which the six-membered hetero ring
    is one of the cyclos of a bicyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an active ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 514/230.8
TXT Chalcogen bonded directly to ring carbon of 1, 4-oxazine ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 228.8 in which the six-membered hetero ring
    has the following basic structure which may contain double bonds between
    ring members:

    and in which chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is
    bonded directly to a ring carbon of the six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an active ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 514/231.2
TXT Morpholines (i.e., fully hydrogenated 1, 4-oxazines):

    Subject matter under subclass 228.8 in which the six-membered hetero ring
    has the following basic structure:

    (1)     Note.  An example of an active ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 514/231.5
TXT Additional hetero ring attached directly or indirectly to the morpholine
    ring by nonionic bonding:

    Subject matter under subclass 231.2 in which the morpholine ring is
    attached to an additional hetero ring by direct or indirect nonionic
    bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an active ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 514/231.8
TXT Plural morpholine rings attached directly or indirectly to each other by
    nonionic bonding:

    Subject matter under subclass 231.5 in which the compound contains two or
    more morpholine rings attached to each other by direct or indirect nonionic
    bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an active ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 514/232.2
TXT Additional hetero ring attached directly or indirectly to the morpholines
    by nonionic bonding:

    Subject matter under subclass 231.8 in which the morpholines are attached
    to an additional hetero ring by direct or indirect nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an active ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 514/232.5
TXT Polycyclo ring system having the additional hetero ring as one of the
    cyclos:

    Subject matter under subclass 232.2 in which the additional hetero ring is
    one of the cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an active ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 514/232.8
TXT Polycyclo ring system having the additional hetero ring as one of the
    cyclos:

    Subject matter under subclass 231.5 in which the additional hetero ring is
    one of the cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an active ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 514/233.2
TXT Ring nitrogen shared by two of the cyclos:

    Subject matter under subclass 232.8 in which two of the cyclos in the
    polycyclo ring system share a ring nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an active ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 514/233.5
TXT Bicyclo ring system having the additional hetero ring as one of the cyclos:

    Subject matter under subclass 232.8 in which the additional hetero ring is
    one of the cyclos of a bicyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an active ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 514/233.8
TXT Plural ring hetero atoms in the bicyclo ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 233.5 in which the bicyclo ring system
    contains two or more ring hetero atoms.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an active ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 514/234.2
TXT Three or more ring hetero atoms in the bicyclo ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 233.8 in which the bicyclo ring system
    contains at least three ring hetero atoms.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an active ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 514/234.5
TXT Plural ring nitrogens in the bicyclo ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 233.8 in which the bicyclo ring system
    contains two ring nitrogens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an active ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 514/234.8
TXT Quinoxalines (including hydrogenated):

    Subject matter under subclass 234.5 in which the bicyclo ring system has
    the following basic structure which may contain double bonds between ring
    members:

    (1)     Note.  An example of an active ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 514/235.2
TXT Ring nitrogen in the bicyclo ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 234.5 in which the bicyclo ring system
    contains a ring nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an active ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 514/235.5
TXT Ring nitrogen in the additional hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 231.5 in which the additional hetero ring
    contains a ring nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an active ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 514/235.8
TXT Plural ring nitrogens in the additional hetero ring (e.g., imidazole,
    pyrazine, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 235.5 in which the additional hetero ring
    contains plural ring nitrogens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an active ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 514/236.2
TXT Three or more ring hetero atoms in the additional hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 235.8 in which the additional hetero ring
    contains at least three ring hetero atoms.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an active ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 514/236.5
TXT The ring nitrogens are bonded directly to each other (e.g., pyridazine,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 235.8 in immediately adjacent to each other
    in the ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an active ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 514/236.8
TXT Ring chalcogen in the additional hetero ring (e.g., oxazole, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 235.5 in which the additional hetero ring
    also contains a ring chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of an active ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 514/237.2
TXT The additional hetero ring is attached indirectly to the morpholine ring by
    an acyclic chain having a hetero atom as a chain member:

    (1)     Note.  An example of an active ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 514/237.5
TXT Having -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen, bonded directly to the morpholine
    ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 231.2 in which the morpholine ring is bonded
    directly to-C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium,
    or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of an active ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 514/237.8
TXT Nitrogen attached indirectly to the morpholine ring by acyclic nonionic
    bonding:

    Subject matter under subclass 231.2 in which the morpholine ring is
    attached indirectly to nitrogen by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an active ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 514/238.2
TXT Chalcogen attached directly to the nitrogen by nonionic bonding:

    Subject matter under subclass 237.8 in which the nitrogen is attached
    directly to chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) by
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an active ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 514/238.5
TXT The nitrogen is double or triple bonded directly to carbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 237.8 in which carbon is bonded directly to
    the nitrogen by a double or triple bond.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an active ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 514/238.8
TXT Chalcogen attached indirectly to the morpholine ring by acyclic nonionic
    bonding:

    Subject matter under subclass 231.2 in which the morpholine ring is
    attached indirectly to chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium) by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an active ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 514/239.2
TXT The chalcogen is bonded directly to two carbon atoms:

    Subject matter under subclass 238.8 in which each of two carbon atoms is
    bonded directly to the chalcogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an active ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 514/239.5
TXT Carbocyclic ring attached indirectly to the morpholine ring by nonionic
    bonding:

    Subject matter under subclass 231.2 in which the morpholine ring is
    attached indirectly to a carbocyclic ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an active ingredient provided for herein is:


CLS 514/241
TXT Hetero ring is six-membered consisting of three nitrogens and three carbon
    atoms:

    Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein the active ingredient contains a
    six-membered heterocyclic nucleus consisting of three nitrogen atoms and
    three carbon atoms.


CLS 514/242
TXT Asymmetrical (e.g., 1,2,4-triazine, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 241 wherein the heterocyclic ring is
    asymmetrical e.g., (1,2,4- triazine)


CLS 514/243
TXT Polycyclo ring system having the hetero ring as one of the cyclos:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 wherein the triazine is a part of a fused
    ring or bridged ring system.


CLS 514/244
TXT Hexamethylenetetramines:

    Subject matter under subclass 241 wherein the active ingredient comprises
    the following structure (i.e., hexamethylenetertramines).


CLS 514/245
TXT Nitrogen bonded directly to ring carbon of the hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 241 wherein the six-membered heterocyclic
    compound has nitrogen bonded directly to at least one of the ring carbons.


CLS 514/246
TXT Polycyclo ring system having a 1,3,5-triazine as one of the cyclos:

    Subject matter under subclass 241 wherein the six-membered heterocyclic
    compound is a 1,3,5-triazine which is a part of a fused ring or bridged
    ring system.


CLS 514/247
TXT Hetero ring is six-membered consisting of two nitrogens and four carbon
    atoms (e.g., pyridazines, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein the active ingredient has a
    six-membered heterocyclic nucleus which consists of two nitrogen and four
    carbon atoms, e.g.,


CLS 514/248
TXT Polycyclo ring system having a 1,2-or 1,4-diazine as one of the cyclos:

    Subject matter under subclass 247 wherein the six-membered heterocyclic
    ring is a part of a fused ring or bridged ring system wherein the two
    nitrogens occupy the 1,2, or 1,4-positions of the diazine ring, e.g.,


CLS 514/249
TXT 1,4-diazine as one of the cyclos:

    Subject matter under subclass 248 wherein a 1,4-diazine ring is a part of
    the fused or bridged ring system.


CLS 514/250
TXT At least three rings in the polycyclo ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 249 wherein the active ingredient is a
    tricyclo and has the 1,4-diazine nucleus as one of the cyclos, e.g.,


CLS 514/251
TXT Isoalloxazine (e.g., riboflavins, vitamin B2, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 250 in which the 1,4, diazine is part of a
    radical having the following structure:

    (1)     Note.  In a derivative, the ring structure and carbonyl moieties
    must remain intact.  Any position on the ring may be substituted.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass provides for a vitamin B2 (or G) composition.

    (3)     Note.  A patent with a claim directed to a riboflavin composition
    will be placed here and not in subclass 23.


CLS 514/252
TXT 1,2- or 1,4-diazine compound having two or more hetero rings:

    Subject matter under subclass 247 which is a 1,2- or 1,4-diazine which has
    a heterocyclic substituent  ,  e.g.,


CLS 514/253
TXT Hetero ring other than 1,2- or 1,4-diazine is part of a polycyclo ring
    system:

    Subject matter under subclass 252 wherein the heterocyclic substituent is a
    part of a polycyclo substituent ,  e.g.,


CLS 514/254
TXT Diazine is bonded directly to the polycyclo ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 253 wherein the 1,2 or 1,4-diazine is bonded
    directly to the polycyclo system.


CLS 514/255
TXT 1,4-diazines:

    Subject matter under subclass 247 in which the ring nitrogen atoms occupy
    the 1,4 positions of the diazine nucleus, i.e.,


CLS 514/256
TXT 1,3-diazines (e.g., pyrimidines, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 247 in which the ring nitrogen atoms occupy
    the 1,3 positions of the diazine nucleus  i.e.,


CLS 514/257
TXT Polycyclo ring system having 1,3-diazine as one of the cyclos:

    Subject matter under subclass 256 in which the 1,3 - diazine is a part of a
    polycyclo ring system, e.g.,


CLS 514/258
TXT Bicyclo ring system having 1,3-diazine as one of the cyclos:

    Subject matter under subclass 257 in which the polycyclo is a bicyclo.


CLS 514/259
TXT Quinazolines (including hydrogenated):

    Subject matter under subclass 258 which contains the quinazoline nucleus,
    i.e.,


    or hydrogenated forms thereof.


CLS 514/260
TXT Nitrogen bonded directly to the 1,3-diazine at 2-position:

    Subject matter under subclass 259 wherein a nitrogen is directly bonded to
    the 2-position of the quinazoline nucleus, e.g.,


CLS 514/261
TXT Purines (including hydrogenated):

    Subject matter under subclass 258 wherein the active ingredient contains
    the purine nucleus, i.e.,

    or hydrogenated forms thereof.


CLS 514/262
TXT Chalcogen bonded directly to a ring carbon of the purine:

    Subject matter under subclass 261 wherein a chalcogen is directly bonded to
    a ring carbon of the purine nucleus, e.g.,


CLS 514/263
TXT At both 2- and 6-positions (e.g., theophylline, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 262 wherein carbons in the 2,6-positions of
    the purine nucleus are each bonded to chalcogen, e.g., xanthine, caffeine,
    theobromine, theophylline, etc.


CLS 514/264
TXT With an additional active ingredient or stabilizer:

    Subject matter under subclass 263 wherein another active ingredient or
    stabilizing agent for the purine compound is present in the composition.


CLS 514/265
TXT Additional hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 263 wherein the purine compound contains a
    substituent which is a heterocyclic ring or contains a heterocyclic ring.


CLS 514/266
TXT Additional hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 261 wherein the purine compound has a
    substituent which is a heterocyclic ring or contains a heterocyclic ring.


CLS 514/267
TXT Tricyclo ring system having 1,3-diazine as one of the cyclos:

    Subject matter under subclass 257 wherein the 1,3-diazine is a part of a
    tricyclo ring system.


CLS 514/268
TXT Perimidines (including hydrogenated):

    Subject matter under subclass 267 wherein the active ingredient contains
    the following structure:


CLS 514/269
TXT Pyrimidines with chalcogen bonded directly to a ring carbon of said
    pyrimidine moiety:

    Subject matter under subclass 256 wherein the 1,3-diazine has a chalcogen
    bonded directly to a ring carbon thereof, e.g.,


CLS 514/270
TXT Barbituric acid or derivative (including thioanalogs):

    Subject matter under subclass 269 wherein the 1,3-diazine is of the
    structure

    wherein X is oxygen or sulfur or the enol form thereof and R and/or R' are
    hydrogen, alkyl or aryl.

    (1)     Note.  For this subclass, the three keto groups must be present on
    the 1,3 diazine ring.


CLS 514/271
TXT Two or more barbituric acid compounds or with an additional active
    ingredient or stabilizer:

    Subject matter under subclass 270 which contains two or more compounds each
    having the

    moiety or one compound having said moiety and an additional organic active
    ingredient or stabilizing agent.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is the combination of barbituric acid and a
    salt thereof and complexes of two or more active ingredients, or active
    ingredient complexed with stabilizing agent.

    (2)     Note.  Potentiating and synergistic agents are considered active
    ingredients.

    (3)     Note.  See glossary for the definition of a stabilizing agent.


CLS 514/272
TXT Nitrogen bonded directly to the 1,3-diazine at 2-position:

    Subject matter under subclass 269 wherein a nitrogen is bonded directly to
    the 1,3-diazine at the  2- position, e.g.,


CLS 514/273
TXT The nitrogen is part of a hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 272 wherein the nitrogen is a part of a
    heterocyclic ring, e.g.,


CLS 514/274
TXT Chalcogen bonded directly to pyrimidine at 2-position:

    Subject matter under subclass 269 wherein a chalcogen is directly bonded to
    the 2-position of the pyrimidine.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes for example:


CLS 514/275
TXT Nitrogen bonded directly to the 1,3-diazine at 2-position by a single bond:

    Subject matter under subclass 256 wherein the nitrogen is directly bonded
    to the 1,3-diazine at the 2-position by a single bond.


CLS 514/276
TXT Thiamines (e.g., vitamin B1. etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 256 wherein the 1,3 diazine compound contains
    the structure:

    e.g., vitamin B1, etc.


CLS 514/277
TXT Hetero ring is six-membered consisting of one nitrogen and five carbon
    atoms:

    Subject matter under subclass 183 which contains a six-membered
    heterocyclic ring consisting of one nitrogen and five carbon atoms.


CLS 514/278
TXT Spiro ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 277 which contains a spiro ring system.


CLS 514/279
TXT Polycyclo ring system having the six-membered hetero ring as one of the
    cyclos:

    Subject matter under subclass 277 wherein the six-membered hetero ring is
    one of the cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 514/280
TXT Pentacyclo ring system having the six-membered hetero ring as one of the
    cyclos:

    Subject matter under subclass 279 wherein the polycyclo ring system
    consists of exactly five rings.


CLS 514/281
TXT Two of the cyclos share at least three ring members, (i.e., bridged):

    Subject matter under subclass 280 wherein two cyclos of the polycyclo ring
    system share at least three ring members.


CLS 514/282
TXT One of the five cyclos is five-membered and includes ring chalcogen (e.g.,
    codeine, morphine, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 281 wherein one of the pentacyclo ring system
    is a five-membered hetero ring which contains ring chalcogen, (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium).


CLS 514/283
TXT Ring nitrogen in the pentacyclo ring system is shared by five-membered
    cyclo and six-membered cyclo (e.g., vincamine, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 280 wherein the ring nitrogen of the
    six-membered hetero ring is additionally a member of a five-membered cyclo
    in the pentacyclo ring system.


CLS 514/284
TXT Tetracyclo ring system having the six-membered hetero ring as one of the
    cyclos:

    Subject matter under subclass 279 wherein the polycyclo ring system
    consists of exactly four rings.


CLS 514/285
TXT Plural hetero atoms in the tetracyclo ring system (e.g., acronycines, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 284 wherein the tetracyclo ring system
    contains at least one ring hetero atom in addition to the ring nitrogen of
    the six-membered hetero ring.


CLS 514/286
TXT Two of the cyclos share at least three ring members (i.e., bridged):

    Subject matter under subclass 286 wherein two cyclos of the polycyclo ring
    system share at least three ring members.


CLS 514/287
TXT Three or more hetero atoms in the tetracyclo ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 285 wherein the tetracyclo ring system
    contains at least two ring hetero atoms in addition to the ring nitrogen of
    the six-membered hetero ring.


CLS 514/288
TXT Ring carbon is shared by three of the cyclos:

    Subject matter under subclass 285 wherein one ring carbon is a member of
    three of the cyclos in the tetracyclo ring system (i.e., peri-fusion).


CLS 514/289
TXT Two of the cyclos share at least three ring members (i.e., bridged) (e.g.,
    morphinans etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 284 wherein two cyclos of the polycyclo ring
    system share at least three ring carbons.


CLS 514/290
TXT Tricyclo ring system having the six-membered hetero ring as one of the
    cyclos:

    Subject matter under subclass 279 wherein the polycyclo ring system
    consists of exactly three rings.


CLS 514/291
TXT Plural hetero atoms in the tricyclo ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 290 wherein the tricyclo ring system contains
    at least one ring hetero atom in addition to the ring nitrogen of the
    six-membered hetero ring.


CLS 514/292
TXT Plural ring nitrogens in the tricyclo ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 291 wherein the tricyclo ring system contains
    at least two ring nitrogens.


CLS 514/293
TXT Three or more hetero atoms in the tricyclo ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 292 wherein the tricyclo ring system contains
    at least three ring hetero atoms.


CLS 514/294
TXT Ring nitrogen is shared by two of the cyclos:

    Subject matter under subclass 290 wherein a ring nitrogen is a member of
    two of the cyclos in the tricyclo ring system.


CLS 514/295
TXT Two of the cyclos share at least three ring carbons (i.e., bridged) (e.g.,
    benzomorphans, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 290 wherein two cyclos of the polycyclo ring
    system share at least three ring carbons.


CLS 514/296
TXT Ring carbon is shared by each of the three cyclos (e.g.,
    1,8-naphthalimides, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 290 wherein a ring carbon is a member of each
    of the cyclos of the tricyclo ring system.


CLS 514/297
TXT Acridines (including hydrogenated):

    Subject matter under subclass 290 wherein the tricyclo ring system has the
    following basic structure, which may contain double bonds between ring
    members:


CLS 514/298
TXT Phenathridines (including hydrogenated):

    Subject matter under subclass 290 wherein the tricyclo ring system has the
    following structure, which may contain double bonds between ring members:


CLS 514/299
TXT Bicyclo ring system having the six-membered hetero ring as one of the
    cyclos:

    Subject matter under subclass 279 wherein the polycyclo ring system
    consists of exactly two ring.


CLS 514/300
TXT Plural hetero atoms in the bicyclo ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 299 wherein the bicyclo ring system includes
    at least one ring hetero atom in addition to the ring nitrogen of the
    six-membered hetero ring.


CLS 514/301
TXT Ring sulfur in the bicyclo ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein the bicyclo ring system contains
    ring sulfur.


CLS 514/302
TXT Ring oxygen in the bicyclo ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein the bicyclo ring system contains
    ring oxygen.


CLS 514/303
TXT Exactly three ring nitrogens in the bicyclo ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein the bicyclo ring system contains
    exactly three ring nitrogens.


CLS 514/304
TXT Tropanes (including nor or dehydro forms):

    Subject matter under subclass 299 wherein the bicyclo ring system has the
    following basic structure:


CLS 514/305
TXT Quinuclidines (including unsaturation):

    Subject matter under subclass 299 wherein the bicyclo ring system has the
    following basic structure, which may contain double bonds between ring
    members:


CLS 514/306
TXT Quinolizines (including hydrogenated):

    Subject matter under subclass 299 wherein the bicyclo ring system has the
    following basic structure, which may contain double bonds between ring
    members:


CLS 514/307
TXT Isoquinolines (including hydrogenated):

    Subject matter under subclass 299 wherein the bicyclo ring system has the
    following structure, which may contain double bonds between ring members.


CLS 514/308
TXT Plural isoquinoline ring systems attached directly or indirectly to each
    other by nonionic bonding:

    Subject matter under subclass 307 which contains at least two isoquinoline
    ring systems that are attached directly or indirectly to each other by
    nonionic bonding.


CLS 514/309
TXT Chalcogen attached directly to the six-membered hetero ring by nonionic
    bonding:

    Subject matter under subclass 307 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) is attached directly to the six-membered hetero ring
    of the isoquinoline ring system by nonionic bonding.


CLS 514/310
TXT Nitrogen, other than as nitro or nitroso, attached directly to the
    isoquinoline ring system by nonionic bonding:

    Subject matter under subclass 307 wherein nitrogen, except as a member of
    the nitro (-NO2) or nitroso (-NO) group, is attached directly to the
    isoquinoline ring system by nonionic bonding.


CLS 514/311
TXT Quinolines (including hydrogenated):

    Subject matter under subclass 299 wherein the bicyclo ring system has the
    following basic structure, which may contain double bonds between ring
    members:


CLS 514/312
TXT Chalcogen attached directly to the six-membered hetero ring by nonionic
    bonding:

    Subject matter under subclass 311 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) is attached directly to the six-membered hetero ring
    of the quinoline ring system by nonionic bonding.


CLS 514/313
TXT Nitrogen, other than as nitro or nitroso, attached directly to the
    six-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding:

    Subject matter under subclass 311 wherein nitrogen, except as a member of
    the nitro (-NO2) or nitroso (-NO) group, is attached directly to the
    six-membered hetero ring of the quinoline ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 514/314
TXT Additional hetero ring attached directly or indirectly to the quinoline
    ring system by nonionic bonding:

    Subject matter under subclass 311 wherein a hetero ring is attached
    directly or indirectly to the quinoline ring system by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are compounds which contain at least two
    quinoline ring systems that are attached directly or indirectly to each
    other by nonionic bonding.


CLS 514/315
TXT Piperidines:

    Subject matter under subclass 277 wherein the six-membered hetero ring,
    consisting of one nitrogen and five carbons, contains no double bonds
    between ring members, i.e., the piperidine ring.


CLS 514/316
TXT Plural piperidine rings:

    Subject matter under subclass 315 wherein the compound contains at least
    two piperidine rings.


CLS 514/317
TXT Additional ring containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 315 which contains an additional ring.


CLS 514/318
TXT The additional ring is a six-membered hetero ring consisting of one
    nitrogen and five carbon atoms:

    Subject matter under subclass 317 wherein the additional ring is a pyridine
    ring or partially hydrogenated pyridine ring.


CLS 514/319
TXT The additional ring is one of the cyclos in a polycyclo ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 317 wherein the additional ring is one of the
    cyclos in a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 514/320
TXT Hetero ring in the polycyclo ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 319 wherein the polycyclo ring system
    contains a hetero ring.


CLS 514/321
TXT Plural hetero atoms in the polycyclo ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 320 wherein the polycyclo ring system
    contains at least two ring hetero atoms.


CLS 514/322
TXT Plural ring nitrogens in the polycyclo ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 321 wherein the polycyclo ring system
    contains at least two ring nitrogen atoms.


CLS 514/323
TXT Ring nitrogen in the polycyclo ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 320 wherein the polycyclo ring system
    contains a ring nitrogen.


CLS 514/324
TXT Ring sulfur in the polycyclo ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 320 wherein the polycyclo ring system
    contains a ring sulfur.


CLS 514/325
TXT Polycyclo ring system is tricyclo-carbocyclic:

    Subject matter under subclass 319 wherein the polycyclo ring system
    consists of three carbocyclic rings.


CLS 514/326
TXT The additional ring is a hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 317 wherein the additional ring is a hetero
    ring.


CLS 514/327
TXT Chalcogen bonded directly to ring carbon of the piperidine ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 317 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) is bonded directly to a ring carbon of the
    piperidine ring.


CLS 514/328
TXT Plural chalcogens bonded directly to ring carbons of the piperidine ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein at least two chalcogens (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium) are bonded directly to ring carbons
    of the piperidine rings.


CLS 514/329
TXT Nitrogen attached directly to the piperidine ring by nonionic bonding:

    Subject matter under subclass 317 wherein nitrogen is attached directly to
    the piperidine ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 514/330
TXT C=X bonded directly to the piperidine ring (X is chalcogen):

    Subject matter under subclass 317 wherein a C=O, C=S, C=Se or C=Te group is
    bonded directly to the piperidine ring.


CLS 514/331
TXT Nitrogen attached indirectly to the piperidine ring nonionic bonding:

    Subject matter under subclass 317 wherein nitrogen is attached indirectly
    to the piperidine ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 514/332
TXT Plural six-membered hetero rings consisting of one nitrogen and five carbon
    atoms:

    Subject matter under subclass 277 which contains at least two of the
    six-membered hetero rings, each consisting of one nitrogen and five carbons
    and having at least one double bond between ring members, i.e., pyridine or
    partially hydrogenated pyridine rings.


CLS 514/333
TXT Additional hetero ring other than the six-membered hetero rings:

    Subject matter under subclass 332 containing an additional hetero ring
    other than the six-membered hetero rings consisting of one nitrogen and
    five carbon atoms.


CLS 514/334
TXT The six-membered rings are bonded directly to each other:

    Subject matter under subclass 332 wherein pyridine or partially
    hydrogenated pyridine rings are bonded directly to each other.


CLS 514/335
TXT Chalcogen bonded directly to a ring carbon of the six-membered hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 332 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen sulfur,
    selenium, tellurium) is bonded directly to a ring carbon of a pyridine or
    partially hydrogenated pyridine ring.


CLS 514/336
TXT Additional hetero ring containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 277 which contains an additional hetero ring
    in the compound other than the six-membered hetero ring consisting of one
    nitrogen and five carbons, i.e., an additional hetero ring other than a
    pyridine or partially hydrogenated pyridine ring.


CLS 514/337
TXT The additional hetero ring is one of the cyclos in a polycyclo ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 336 wherein the additional hetero ring is one
    of the cyclos in a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 514/338
TXT Plural hetero atoms in the polycyclo ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 337 wherein the polycyclo ring system
    contains at least two ring hetero atoms.


CLS 514/339
TXT Ring nitrogen in the polycyclo ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 337 wherein the polycyclo ring system
    contains one ring nitrogen.


CLS 514/340
TXT Ring nitrogen in the additional hetero ring (e.g., oxazole, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 336 wherein the additional hetero ring
    contains ring nitrogens.


CLS 514/341
TXT The additional hetero ring consists of two nitrogens and three carbons:

    Subject matter under subclass 340 wherein the additional hetero ring
    consists of two nitrogens and three carbons.


CLS 514/342
TXT Ring sulfur in the additional hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 340 wherein the additional hetero ring
    contains ring sulfur.


CLS 514/343
TXT The additional hetero ring consists of one nitrogen and four carbons (e.g.,
    nicotine, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 340 wherein the additional hetero ring
    consists of one nitrogen and four carbon atoms.


CLS 514/344
TXT Cyano bonded directly to the six-membered hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 277 which contains the -C=N group bonded
    directly to the six-membered hetero ring.


CLS 514/345
TXT Chalcogen bonded directly to ring carbon of the six-membered hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 277 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) is bonded directly to a ring carbon of the
    six-membered hetero ring.


CLS 514/346
TXT Chalcogen and cyclic nitrogen bonded directly to the same carbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 345 wherein  chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) and acyclic nitrogen are bonded directly to the same
    carbon.


CLS 514/347
TXT Chalcogen bonded directly to chalcogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 345 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) is bonded directly to chalcogen.


CLS 514/348
TXT Chalcogens bonded directly to at least two ring carbons of the six-membered
    hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 345 wherein chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) are bonded directly to at least two ring carbons of
    the six-membered hetero ring.


CLS 514/349
TXT Nitrogen attached directly to the six-membered hetero ring by nonionic
    bonding:

    Subject matter under subclass 345 wherein nitrogen is attached directly to
    the six-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 514/350
TXT C=O bonded directly to the six-membered hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 345 wherein a C=O group is bonded directly to
    the six-membered hetero ring.


CLS 514/351
TXT Nitrogen attached indirectly to the six-membered hetero ring by nonionic
    bonding:

    Subject matter under subclass 345 wherein nitrogen is attached indirectly
    to the six-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 514/352
TXT Nitrogen attached directly to the six-membered hetero ring by nonionic
    bonding:

    Subject matter under subclass 277 wherein nitrogen is attached directly to
    the six-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 514/353
TXT Plural acyclic nitrogens bonded directly to the same carbon or bonded
    directly to each other:

    Subject matter under subclass 352 wherein at least two acyclic nitrogens
    are bonded directly to the same carbon or single bonded directly to each
    other.


CLS 514/354
TXT C=O bonded directly to the six-membered hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 277 wherein a C=O group is bonded directly to
    the six-membered hetero ring.


CLS 514/355
TXT At 3-position:

    Subject matter under subclass 354 wherein the C=O group is attached
    directly to the 3-position of the six-membered hetero ring e.g.,


CLS 514/356
TXT C=O in a C(=O)O group (e.g., nicotinic acid, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 355 wherein the C=O is part of aO group.


CLS 514/357
TXT Nitrogen attached indirectly to the six-membered hetero ring by nonionic
    bonding:

    Subject matter under subclass 277 wherein nitrogen is attached indirectly
    to the six-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 514/358
TXT The ring nitrogen of the six-membered hetero ring is pentavalent (e.g.,
    quaternary pyridinium salts, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 277 wherein the ring nitrogen of the
    six-membered ring is pentavalent.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 514/359
TXT Five-membered hetero ring containing at least one nitrogen ring atom (e.g.,
    1,2,3-triazoles, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein the hetero ring is five-membered
    and contains at least one ring nitrogen, e.g., 1,2,3-triazoles, etc.


CLS 514/360
TXT Plural ring chalcogens in the hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 359 wherein the five-membered hetero ring
    contains at least two ring chalcogen atoms in addition to the ring nitrogen
    and ring carbon, etc., 1,2,4-dithiazoles, etc.


CLS 514/361
TXT Plural ring nitrogens and a single chalcogen in the hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 359 wherein the five-member hetero ring
    contains at least two ring nitrogens and only one ring chalcogen.


CLS 514/362
TXT 1,2,5-thiadiazoles (including hydrogenated):

    Subject matter under subclass 361 wherein the hetero ring is
    1,2,5-thiadiazole having the following structure


    or hydrogenated form thereof.


CLS 514/363
TXT 1,3,4,-thiadiazoles (including hydrogenated):

    Subject matter under subclass 361 wherein the hetero ring is
    1,3,4,-Thiadiazole having the following structure,

    or hydrogenated form thereof.


CLS 514/364
TXT Oxadiazoles (including hydrogenated):

    Subject matter under subclass 361 wherein the hetero ring contains one ring
    oxygen and two ring nitrogens as the only hetero atoms of the ring and may
    have a double bond between ring members, e.g.,


CLS 514/365
TXT 1,2-thiazoles (including hydrogenated):

    Subject matter under subclass 359 wherein the five-membered hetero ring is
    a 1,3-thiazole ring which includes the following basic ring structure,

    and may contain a double bond between ring members.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition of "including
    hydrogenated".


CLS 514/366
TXT Polycyclo ring system having the thiazole ring as one of the cyclos:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 wherein the 1,3-thiazole ring is a cyclo
    of a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 514/367
TXT Bicyclo ring system having the thiazole ring as one of the cyclos:

    Subject matter under subclass 366 wherein the polycyclo ring system
    consists of exactly two rings.


CLS 514/368
TXT Ring nitrogen is shared by the cyclos of the bicyclo ring system (e.g.,
    tetramisole, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 367 wherein the ring nitrogen is a member of
    both of the cyclos in the bicyclo ring system, e.g., tetramisole etc.


CLS 514/369
TXT Chalcogen bonded directly to ring carbon of the thiazole ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 wherein chalcogen is bonded directly to
    ring carbon of the 1,3-thiazole ring.


CLS 514/370
TXT Nitrogen bonded directly ring carbon of the thiazole ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 wherein nitrogen is bonded directly to
    ring carbon of the 1,3-thiazole ring.


CLS 514/371
TXT C=X bonded directly to the nitrogen which is bonded directly to the
    thiazole ring (X is chalcogen):

    Subject matter under subclass 370 wherein the nitrogen is bonded
    additionally directly to a C=O or C=S group.


CLS 514/372
TXT 1,2-thiazoles (including hydrogenated):

    Subject matter under subclass 359 wherein the five-membered hetero ring is
    a 1,2-thiazole ring which includes the following basic ring structure,

    and may contain a double bond between ring members.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition of "including
    hydrogenated".


CLS 514/373
TXT Polycyclo ring system having the thiazole ring as one of the cyclos:

    Subject matter under subclass 372 wherein the 1,2-thiazole ring is a cyclo
    of a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 514/374
TXT 1,3-oxazoles (including hydrogenated):

    Subject matter under subclass 359 wherein the five-membered hetero ring is
    a 1,3-oxazole ring which includes the following basic ring structure,

    and may contain a double bond between ring members.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition "including hydrogenated".


CLS 514/375
TXT Polycyclo ring system having the oxazole ring as one of the cyclos:

    Subject matter under subclass 374 wherein the 1,3-oxazole ring is a cyclo
    of a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 514/376
TXT Chalcogen bonded directly to ring carbon of the oxazole ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 374 wherein chalcogen is bonded directly to
    ring carbon of the 1,3-oxazole ring.


CLS 514/377
TXT Nitrogen bonded directly to ring carbon of the oxazole ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 374 wherein nitrogen is bonded directly to
    ring carbon of the 1,3-oxazole ring.


CLS 514/378
TXT 1,2-oxazoles (including hydrogenated):

    Subject matter under subclass 359 wherein the five-membered hetero ring is
    a 1,2-oxazole ring which includes the following basic ring structure,

    and may contain a double bond between ring members.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition "including hydrogenated".


CLS 514/379
TXT Polycyclo ring system having the oxazole ring as one of the cyclos:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 wherein the 1,2-oxazole ring is a cyclo
    of a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 514/380
TXT Chalcogen or nitrogen bonded directly to ring carbon of the oxazole ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 wherein chalcogen or nitrogen is bonded
    directly to ring carbon of the 1,2-oxazole ring.


CLS 514/381
TXT Tetrazoles (including hydrogenated):

    Subject matter under subclass 359 wherein the five-membered hetero ring
    consists of four ring nitrogens and one ring carbon and may have double
    bond between ring members.


CLS 514/382
TXT Additional Chalcogen Containing Hetero Ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 381 which contains an additional chalcogen
    containing hetero ring.


CLS 514/383
TXT 1,2,4-triazoles (including hydrogenated):

    Subject matter under subclass 359 wherein the five-membered hetero ring is
    1,2,4-triazole having the following structure,


    or hydrogenated form thereof.


CLS 514/384
TXT Chalcogen bonded directly to the triazole ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 383 wherein chalcogen is directly bonded to
    the 1,2,4-triazole.


CLS 514/385
TXT 1,3-diazoles:

    Subject matter under subclass 359 wherein the five-membered hetero ring is
    a 1,3-diazole ring which includes the following basic ring structure,

    and may contain a double bond between ring members.


CLS 514/386
TXT Divalent chalcogen or acyclic nitrogen double bonded directly to ring
    carbon of the diazole ring, or tautomeric equivalent:

    Subject matter under subclass 385 wherein a ring carbon of the 1,3-diazole
    ring is bonded directly by a double bond to divalent chalcogen or acyclic
    nitrogen, or to a group which may tautomerize thereto (e.g., hydroxyl,
    sulfhydryl, acyclic amino, etc.).

    (1)     Note.

    A.      All 1,3-diazoles having the following structure are classified in
    this and indented subclasses.

    X is chalcogen or NR

    A is N or CR'

    B is the remaining ring members of the 1,3-diazole

    R is H or a substituent

    R' is H or a substituent

    B.      The aminoimidazole, for example,

            is included in this subclass though its imino tautomer,

            may not be present in significant amounts.

    C.      Salts in which the labile hydrogen of, for example, an hydroxy,
    sulfhydryl or amino tautomer is replaced with a metal or amine salt are
    classified here.


CLS 514/387
TXT Polycyclo ring system having the diazole ring as one of the cyclos:

    Subject matter under subclass 386 wherein the 1,3-diazole ring is one of
    the cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 514/388
TXT Nitrogen double bonded directly at 2-position of the diazole ring, or
    tautomeric equivalent:

    Subject matter under subclass 387 wherein an acyclic nitrogen is double
    bonded directly to the ring carbon between two ring nitrogens of the
    1,3-diazole ring, or the amino tautomeric equivalent, e.g.,


CLS 514/389
TXT Divalent chalcogen or acyclic nitrogen double bonded directly at both 2-
    and 4-positions, or tautomeric equivalent (e.g., hydantoin, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 386 wherein the ring carbons at the 2- and
    4-positions of the 1,3-diazole ring are each bonded directly by a double
    bond to divalent chalcogen or acyclic nitrogen, or to a group which may
    tautomerize thereto (e.g., hydroxyl, sulfhydryl, acyclic amino, etc.).


CLS 514/390
TXT Chalcogen or nitrogen bonded directly at 1-, 3-, or 5-position by nonionic
    bonding:

    Subject matter under subclass 389 wherein chalcogen or nitrogen is bonded
    directly to a ring nitrogen, or to the ring carbon at 5-position of the
    1,3-diazole ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 514/391
TXT Benzene ring bonded directly to the diazole ring by nonionic bonding:

    Subject matter under subclass 389 wherein a benzene ring is bonded directly
    to 1,3-diazole ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 514/392
TXT Divalent chalcogen or acyclic nitrogen double bonded directly at
    2-position, or tautomeric equivalent:

    Subject matter under subclass 386 wherein the ring carbon between the two
    ring nitrogens of the 1,3-diazole ring is bonded directly by a double bond
    to divalent chalcogen or acyclic nitrogen, or to a group which may
    tautomerize thereto (e.g., hydroxyl, sulfhydryl, acyclic amino, etc.).


CLS 514/393
TXT Polycyclo ring system having the diazole ring as one of the cyclos:

    Subject matter under subclass 385 wherein the 1,3-diazole ring is one of
    the cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 514/394
TXT Benzo fused at 4,5-positions of the diazole ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 393 wherein the polyclo ring system contains
    a benzo ring which shares the carbons at 4- and 5-positions of the
    1,3-diazole ring, e.g., benzimidazoles, etc.


CLS 514/395
TXT Chalcogen or nitrogen bonded directly at 1-,2-, or 3-position of the
    diazole ring by nonionic bonding:

    Subject matter under subclass 394 wherein chalcogen or nitrogen is bonded
    directly to a ring nitrogen or 2-carbon of the benzo fused 1,3-diazole ring
    by nonionic bonding.


CLS 514/396
TXT Imidazoles:

    Subject matter under subclass 385 wherein the 1,3-diazole ring is imidazole
    which contains two double bonds between the ring members.


CLS 514/397
TXT Additional hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 396 which contains an additional hetero ring,
    e.g.,


CLS 514/398
TXT Chalcogen or nitrogen bonded directly to the imidazole ring by nonionic
    bonding:

    Subject matter under subclass 396 wherein chalcogen or nitrogen is bonded
    directly to the imidazole ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 514/399
TXT Chalcogen or nitrogen bonded indirectly to the imidazole ring by nonionic
    bonding:

    Subject matter under subclass 396 wherein chalcogen or nitrogen is bonded
    indirectly to the imidazole ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 514/400
TXT At imidazole ring carbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 399 wherein the chalcogen or nitrogen is
    bonded indirectly to a ring carbon of the imidazole ring and not through
    any of the hetero atoms.


CLS 514/401
TXT 2-imidazolines:

    Subject matter under subclass 385 wherein the 1,3-diazole ring contains one
    double bond between 2-carbon and 3-nitrogen.


CLS 514/402
TXT Additional hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 401 which contains an additional hetero ring,
    e.g.,


CLS 514/403
TXT 1,2-diazoles:

    Subject matter under subclass 359 wherein the five-membered hetero ring is
    a 1,2-diazole ring which includes the following basic ring structure,

    and may contain a double bond between ring members.


CLS 514/404
TXT Divalent chalcogen or acyclic nitrogen double bonded directly to ring
    carbon of the diazole ring, or tautomeric equivalent:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 wherein a ring carbon of the 1,2-diazole
    ring is bonded directly by a double bond to divalent chalcogen or acyclic
    nitrogen, or to a group which may tautomerize thereto (e.g., hydroxyl,
    sulfhydryl, acyclic amino, etc.).

    (1)     Note.

    A.      All 1,2-diazoles having the following structure are classified in
    this and indented subclasses.



    X is chalcogen or NR

    A is N or CR'

    B is the remaining ring members of the 1,2-diazole

    R is H or a substituent

    R' is H or a substituent

    B.      The hydroxy pyrazole, for example,

            is included in this subclass though its oxo tautomer,

            may not be present in significant amounts.

    C.      Salts in which the labile hydrogen of, for example, an hydroxy,
    sulfhydryl or amino tautomer is replaced with a metal ion or amine salt are
    classified here.


CLS 514/405
TXT Polycyclo ring system having the diazole ring as one of the cyclos:

    Subject matter under subclass 404 wherein the 1,2-diazole ring is one of
    the cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 514/406
TXT Pyrazoles:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 wherein the 1,2-diazole ring is pyrazole
    which contains two double bonds between ring members.


CLS 514/407
TXT Chalcogen or nitrogen bonded directly to the pyrazole ring by nonionic
    bonding:

    Subject matter under subclass 406 wherein chalcogen or nitrogen is bonded
    directly to the pyrazole ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 514/408
TXT The five-membered hetero ring consists of one nitrogen and four carbons:

    Subject matter under subclass 359 wherein the five-membered hetero ring
    consists of one nitrogen and four carbon atoms, e.g., pyrrolidine, etc.


CLS 514/409
TXT Spiro ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 408 which contains a spiro ring system, e.g.,



    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition of "spiro ring system".


CLS 514/410
TXT Polycyclo ring system having the five-membered hetero ring as one of the
    cyclos:

    Subject matter under subclass 408 wherein the five-membered hetero ring is
    one of the cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 514/411
TXT Tricyclo ring system having the five-membered hetero ring as one of the
    cyclos:

    Subject matter under subclass 410 wherein the polycyclo ring system
    consists of exactly three cyclos, e.g.,


CLS 514/412
TXT Bicyclo ring system having the five-membered hetero ring as one of the
    cyclos:

    Subject matter under subclass 410 wherein the polycyclo ring system
    consists of exactly two cyclos, e.g.,


CLS 514/413
TXT Ring nitrogen is shared by the cyclos of the bicyclo ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 412 wherein the ring nitrogen of the
    five-membered hetero ring is additionally a ring member of the other cyclo
    of the bicyclo ring system, e.g.,


CLS 514/414
TXT Additional hetero ring which is not part of the bicyclo ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 412 which contains an additional hetero ring,
    e.g.,


CLS 514/415
TXT The bicyclo ring system consists of the five-membered hetero ring and a
    benzene ring (e.g., indole, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 412 wherein the five-membered hetero ring and
    a benzene ring are the cyclos of the bicyclo ring system, e.g., indole,
    indoline, etc.


CLS 514/416
TXT The ring nitrogen is bonded directly to nonshared ring carbons of the
    five-membered hetero ring (e.g., isoindole, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 415 wherein the ring nitrogen is bonded
    directly to the two nonshared ring carbons of the five-membered hetero
    ring, e.g.,


CLS 514/417
TXT Plural chalcogens bonded directly to ring carbons of the five-membered
    hetero ring (e.g., phthalimide, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 416 wherein at least two chalcogens are
    bonded directly to ring carbons of the five-membered hetero ring, e.g.,
    phthalimide, etc.


CLS 514/418
TXT Chalcogen bonded directly to ring carbon of the five-membered hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 415 wherein chalcogen is bonded directly to
    ring carbon of the five-membered.


CLS 514/419
TXT C=X bonded directly or indirectly by an acyclic carbon or carbon chain to
    ring carbon of the five-membered hetero ring (e.g., trytophan, etc.) (X is
    chalcogen):

    Subject matter under subclass 415 wherein a C=X group (X is Chalcogen) is
    bonded directly or indirectly to a ring carbon of the five-membered hetero
    ring by an acyclic carbon or carbon chain, e.g.,


CLS 514/420
TXT Indomethacin, per se, or ester thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 419 wherein the compound is indomethacin,
    i.e.,

    or ester of the carboxyl group thereof.


CLS 514/421
TXT Chalcogen bonded directly to ring carbon of the five-membered hetero ring
    (e.g., adrenochrome, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 412 wherein chalcogen is bonded directly to
    ring carbon of the five-membered hetero ring, e.g.,


CLS 514/422
TXT Additional hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 408 which contains an additional hetero ring,
    e.g.,


CLS 514/423
TXT C=X bonded directly to the five-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding (X
    is chalcogen):

    Subject matter under subclass 408 wherein C=X (X is chalcogen) is bonded
    directly to the five-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 514/424
TXT Chalcogen bonded directly to the five-membered hetero ring by nonionic
    bonding:

    Subject matter under subclass 408 wherein chalcogen is bonded directly to
    the five-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 514/425
TXT Plural chalcogens bonded directly to the five-membered hetero ring by
    nonionic bonding:

    Subject matter under subclass 424 wherein at least two chalcogens are
    bonded directly to the five-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 514/426
TXT Nitrogen bonded directly to the five-membered hetero ring by nonionic
    bonding:

    Subject matter under subclass 408 wherein nitrogen is bonded directly to
    the five-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 514/427
TXT Two double bonds between ring members of the five-membered hetero ring
    (e.g., pyrrole, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 408 which contains two double bonds between
    ring members of the five-membered hetero ring, e.g., pyrrole, etc.


CLS 514/428
TXT Chalcogen bonded indirectly to the five-membered hetero ring by acyclic
    nonionic bonding:

    Subject matter under subclass 408 wherein chalcogen is bonded indirectly to
    the five-membered hetero ring by acyclic nonionic bonding, e.g.,


CLS 514/429
TXT Carbocyclic ring bonded directly to the five-membered hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 408 wherein a carbocyclic ring is bonded
    directly to the five-membered hetero ring.


CLS 514/430
TXT Sulfur containing hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein the hetero ring has sulfur as a
    ring hetero atom.

    (1)     Note.  Inner sulfonium salts, even when represented in cyclic form
    are excluded herefrom.


CLS 514/431
TXT The hetero ring has at least seven members:

    Subject matter under subclass 430 wherein the hetero ring has at least
    seven members.


CLS 514/432
TXT The hetero ring is six-membered:

    Subject matter under subclass 430 wherein the hetero ring is six-membered.


CLS 514/433
TXT Plural hetero atoms in the hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 432 wherein the hetero ring contains at least
    one ring hetero atom in addition to the ring sulfur.


CLS 514/434
TXT Polycyclo ring system having the hetero ring as one of the cyclos:

    Subject matter under subclass 433 wherein the hetero ring is one of the
    cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 514/435
TXT Three or more ring hetero atoms in the hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 433 wherein the six-membered hetero ring
    contains at least two ring hetero atoms in addition to the ring sulfur.


CLS 514/436
TXT Two ring sulfurs in the hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 433 wherein the six-membered hetero ring
    contains at least two ring hetero atoms in addition to the ring sulfur.


CLS 514/437
TXT Tricyclo ring system having the hetero ring as one of the cyclos:

    Subject matter under subclass 432 wherein the hetero ring is one of the
    cyclos of a polycyclo ring system consisting of exactly three cyclos.


CLS 514/438
TXT The hetero ring is five-membered:

    Subject matter under subclass 430 wherein the hetero ring is five-membered.


CLS 514/439
TXT Plural hetero atoms in the hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 438 wherein the hetero ring has at least one
    ring hetero atom in addition to the ring sulfur.


CLS 514/440
TXT Only two ring sulfurs in the hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 439 wherein the hetero ring contains exactly
    two ring sulfurs as the only hetero atoms present.


CLS 514/441
TXT Chalcogen bonded directly to ring carbon of the hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 440 wherein chalcogen is bonded directly to
    ring carbon of the hetero ring.


CLS 514/442
TXT Nitrogen bonded directly to the hetero ring by nonionic bonding:

    Subject matter under subclass 440 wherein nitrogen is bonded directly to
    the hetero ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 514/443
TXT Polycyclo ring system having the hetero ring as one of the cyclos:

    Subject matter under subclass 438 wherein the five-membered sulfur
    containing hetero ring is one of the cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 514/444
TXT Additional hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 438 wherein an additional hetero ring is
    present.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds Provided for herein are:


CLS 514/445
TXT Chalcogen bonded directly to ring carbon of the hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 438 wherein chalcogen is bonded directly to
    ring carbon of the hetero ring.


CLS 514/446
TXT Chalcogen bonded directly to ring sulfur by nonionic bonding:

    Subject matter under subclass 438 wherein chalcogen is bonded directly to
    ring sulfur of the hetero ring.


CLS 514/447
TXT Nitrogen bonded directly to the hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 438 wherein nitrogen is bonded directly to
    the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound within this definition:


CLS 514/448
TXT C=X bonded directly to the hetero ring (X is chalcogen):

    Subject matter under subclass 438 wherein C=X (X is chalcogen) is bonded
    directly to the hetero ring.


CLS 514/449
TXT Oxygen containing hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein the hetero ring contains a ring
    oxygen.


CLS 514/450
TXT The hetero ring has at least seven members:

    Subject matter under subclass 449 wherein the hetero ring has seven or more
    members.


CLS 514/451
TXT The hetero ring is six-membered:

    Subject matter under subclass 449 wherein the hetero ring is six-membered.


CLS 514/452
TXT Plural ring oxygens in the hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 451 wherein the six-membered hetero ring
    contains at least two ring oxygens.


CLS 514/453
TXT Polycyclo ring system having the hetero ring as one of the cyclos:

    Subject matter under subclass 451 wherein the six-membered hetero ring is
    one of the cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 514/454
TXT Tricyclo ring system having the hetero ring as one of the cyclos:

    Subject matter under subclass 453 wherein the polycyclo ring system
    consists of exactly three cyclos.


CLS 514/455
TXT Chalcogen bonded directly to ring carbon of the hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 454 wherein chalcogen is bonded directly to
    ring carbon of the hetero ring.


CLS 514/456
TXT Bicyclo ring system having the hetero ring as one of the cyclos (e.g.,
    chromones, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 453 wherein the polycyclo ring system
    consists of exactly two cyclos.


CLS 514/457
TXT Coumarins (including hydrogenated):

    Subject matter under subclass 456 wherein the bicyclo ring system has the
    following structure,


    or hydrogenated form thereof.


CLS 514/458
TXT Tocopherols (e.g., vitamin E, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 456 wherein the bicyclo ring system includes
    the following structure,

    or ether, ester of the hydroxyl group thereof, e.g.,

    (1)     Note.  The several tocopherols differ by methyl substitution on the
    benzo ring.


CLS 514/459
TXT Nitrogen containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 451 which contains nitrogen.


CLS 514/460
TXT Chalcogen bonded directly to ring carbon of the hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 451 wherein chalcogen is bonded directly to
    ring carbon of the hetero ring.


CLS 514/461
TXT The hetero ring is five-membered:

    Subject matter under subclass 449 wherein the hetero ring is five-membered.


CLS 514/462
TXT Spiro ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 461 which contains a spiro ring system, e.g.,


    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition of "spiro ring system."


CLS 514/463
TXT Plural ring oxygens in the hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 461 wherein the five-membered hetero ring
    contains at least two ring oxygens.


CLS 514/464
TXT Bicyclo ring system having the hetero ring as one of the cyclos (e.g.,
    methylenedioxyphenyl group, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 463 wherein the hetero ring is one of the
    cyclos of a bicyclo ring system, e.g.,


CLS 514/465
TXT The hetero ring is substituted:

    Subject matter under subclass 464 wherein the hetero ring contains
    substituents other than hydrogen.


CLS 514/466
TXT Nitrogen containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 464 which contains nitrogen, e.g.,


CLS 514/467
TXT Only two ring oxygens in the hetero ring which is not a polycyclo ring
    system (e.g., dioxolane, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 463 wherein the hetero ring contains only two
    oxygens as ring hetero atoms and is not a cyclo of  a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 514/468
TXT Polycyclo ring system having the hetero ring as one of the cyclos:

    Subject matter under subclass 461 wherein the five-membered hetero ring is
    one of the cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 514/469
TXT Bicyclo ring system having the hetero ring as one of the cyclos:

    Subject matter under subclass 468 wherein the polycyclo ring system
    consists of exactly two cyclos.


CLS 514/470
TXT Chalcogen or nitrogen bonded directly to the hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 469 wherein chalcogen or nitrogen is bonded
    directly to the hetero ring.


CLS 514/471
TXT Nitrogen containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 461 which contains nitrogen.


CLS 514/472
TXT The nitrogen bonded directly to the hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 471 wherein the nitrogen is bonded directly
    to the hetero ring.


CLS 514/473
TXT Chalcogen bonded directly to the hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 461 wherein chalcogen is bonded directly to
    the hetero ring.


CLS 514/474
TXT Ascorbic acid or derivative (e.g., vitamin c, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 473 which has the following structure,

    or derivative thereof.

    (1)     Note.  A derivative of ascorbic acid includes the replacement of
    hydroxyl hydrogen with acyl, alkyl or metal to give the ester, ether or
    alcoholate of a metal.


CLS 514/475
TXT The hetero ring is three-membered:

    Subject matter under subclass 449 wherein the oxygen containing hetero ring
    is three-membered.


CLS 514/476
TXT N-C (=X) X containing (X is chalcogen) DOAI:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the DOAI contains the grouping NX
    wherein X is chalcogen, e.g., H2NOH etc.


CLS 514/477
TXT N-C (=X)-X-N containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 476 wherein the active ingredient contains
    the grouping NXN wherein X is chalcogen, e.g., R2-NS-NH2, etc.


CLS 514/478
TXT N-C (=X)-X-C containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 476 in which the active ingredient is an
    ester of carbamic acid, i.e., H-XN (X is chalcogen) and which contains the
    NX-C group, e.g., etc.


CLS 514/479
TXT With an additional active ingredient:

    Subject matter under subclass 478 which contains a compound having the
    grouping

    grouping and an additional organic active ingredient.

    (1)     Note.  Synergistic and potentiating agents are considered active
    ingredients.


CLS 514/480
TXT Polycyclo ring system attached by nonionic bonding:

    Subject matter under subclass 478 wherein the compound contains a polycyclo
    ring system, e.g.,





    (1)     Note.  Compounds wherein the polycyclo system is ionically bonded
    to the moiety containing the

    grouping are excluded from this subclass.


CLS 514/481
TXT Naphthyl ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 480 wherein the compound contains a naphthyl
    ring system, e.g.,


CLS 514/482
TXT N-C(=X)-N, N-C (=N)N, N-N, nitrogen directly bonded to oxygen by nonionic
    bonding or cyano containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 478 which contains the grouping NN (e.g.,
    ureido);NN, (e.g., guanido); N-N (e.g., hydrazo, etc.), cyano or a nitrogen
    bonded directly to oxygen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example,


CLS 514/483
TXT Plural N-C(=X)-X groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 478 wherein the organic ingredient contains
    plural NX groups, e.g.,


CLS 514/484
TXT Ring in acid moiety:

    Subject matter under subclass 478 wherein the organic active ingredient has
    a ring in the acid moiety, e.g.,


CLS 514/485
TXT The ring is a benzene ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 484 wherein the ring is a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, e.g.,


CLS 514/486
TXT Phenoxy in acid moiety:

    Subject matter under subclass 485 wherein the benzene ring is a part of a
    phenoxy group, e.g.,


CLS 514/487
TXT The benzene ring attached to nitrogen through an acyclic carbon or carbon
    chain:

    Subject matter under subclass 485 wherein the benzene ring is attached to
    the nitrogen of the NXC group through an acyclic carbon or carbon chain.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, e.g.,


CLS 514/488
TXT Ring in alcohol moiety:

    Subject matter under subclass 485 wherein the organic active ingredient
    also contains a ring in the alcohol moiety.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, e.g.,


CLS 514/489
TXT Ring in alcohol moiety:

    Subject matter under subclass 478 wherein the active ingredient contains a
    ring in the alcohol moiety.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, e.g.,


CLS 514/490
TXT Ring attached directly to oxygen of N-C(=O)-O:

    Subject matter under subclass 489 wherein the ring is directly attached to
    the oxygen of the NO.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, e.g.,


CLS 514/491
TXT With an additional active ingredient:

    Subject matter under subclass 476 which contains a compound having the
    grouping NX and an additional organic active ingredient.

    (1)     Note.  Synergistic and potentiating agents are considered active
    ingredients.


CLS 514/492
TXT Heavy metal containing DOAI:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 in which the DOAI contains a heavy metal,
    i.e., a metal whose specific gravity is greater than 4.

    (1)     Note.  Many patents in this and indented subclasses are drawn to
    compositions containing heavy metal salts of organic compounds.


CLS 514/493
TXT Tin:

    Subject matter under subclass 492 in which the heavy metal is tin.


CLS 514/494
TXT Zinc:

    Subject matter under subclass 492 in which the heavy metal is zinc.


CLS 514/495
TXT Gold or silver:

    Subject matter under subclass 492 in which the heavy metal is gold or
    silver.


CLS 514/496
TXT Mercury:

    Subject matter under subclass 492 in which the heavy metal is mercury.


CLS 514/497
TXT Nitrogen containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 496 in which the heavy metal containing
    compound also contains a nitrogen atom.


CLS 514/498
TXT Lead:

    Subject matter under subclass 492 in which the heavy metal is lead.


CLS 514/499
TXT Copper:

    Subject matter under subclass 492 in which the heavy metal is copper.


CLS 514/500
TXT With an additional active ingredient:

    Subject matter under subclass 499 which contains a compound which contains
    copper and also an additional active ingredient.

    (1)     Note.  Synergistic and potentiating agents are considered active
    ingredients.


CLS 514/501
TXT Nickel or cobalt:

    Subject matter under subclass 492 in which the heavy metal is nickel or
    cobalt.


CLS 514/502
TXT Iron:

    Subject matter under subclass 492 in which the heavy metal is iron.


CLS 514/503
TXT Antimony or bismuth:

    Subject matter under subclass 492 in which the heavy metal is antimony or
    bismuth.


CLS 514/504
TXT Arsenic:

    Subject matter under subclass 492 in which the heavy metal is arsenic.


CLS 514/505
TXT Cadmium or chromium:

    Subject matter under subclass 492 in which the heavy metal is cadmium or
    chromium.


CLS 514/506
TXT Ester DOAI:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the DOAI is identical in structure
    with a compound formed by replacing the hydroxyl of an alcohol or phenol by
    an acid radical.


CLS 514/507
TXT R-C(=X)-N-X-C containing (e.g., hydroxamic acid ester, etc.) (R is C or H
    and X is chalcogen):

    Subject matter under subclass 506 in which the ester contains the following
    group:  RNXC, wherein R is carbon or hydrogen and X is chalcogen (e.g.,
    hydroxamic acid ester, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains for example:


CLS 514/508
TXT X-C=N containing (e.g., imidoester, etc.) (X is chalcogen):

    Subject matter under subclass 506 in which the ester contains the following
    group:

    X-C=N wherein X is chalcogen (e.g., imidoester, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains for example:


CLS 514/509
TXT (O=)N(=O)-O-C containing (e.g., nitrate ester, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 506 wherein the ester contains the group
    (O=)N(=O)-O-C.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains for example:


CLS 514/510
TXT Polycyclo ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 506 wherein the ester contains a polycyclo
    ring system in either the alcohol or acid portion of the molecule.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 514/511
TXT Two of the cyclos share at least three ring members (i.e., bridged):

    Subject matter under subclass 510 wherein the ester contains at least one
    bridged ring system in either the alcohol or acid portion of the molecule.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 514/512
TXT X-C(=X)-X containing (e.g., carbonic acid ester, thiocarbonic acid ester,
    etc.) (X is chalcogen):

    Subject matter under subclass 506 wherein the ester contains the group XX,
    wherein X is chalcogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 514/513
TXT C-C(=X)-X-C containing (X is chalcogen and at least one X is other than
    oxygen):

    Subject matter under subclass 506 wherein the ester contains the group
    group CXC wherein X is chalcogen and at least one is other than oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 514/514
TXT Carbon bonded to -NCX (e.g., cyanate, thiocyanate or isothiocyanate, etc.)
    (X is chalcogen):

    Subject matter under subclass 506 wherein the organic action ingredient
    contains a carbon which is directly bonded to -NCX or -XCN.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 514/515
TXT With an additional active ingredient:

    Subject matter under subclass 514 wherein the organic active ingredient
    contains a compound having the group -CNX or -XCN and an additional organic
    active ingredient.

    (1)     Note.  Synergistic and potentiating agents are considered active
    ingredients.


CLS 514/516
TXT Containing plural -NCX or -XCN groups or a cyano:

    Subject matter under subclass 514 in which the organic active ingredient
    contains plural -NCX or -XCN groups or a separate cyano group which is not
    a part of the -NCX or -XCN group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 514/517
TXT S-X-C containing (e.g., sulfates, etc.) (S is chalcogen):

    Subject matter under subclass 506 wherein the ester is derived from a
    sulfur oxygen acid function of the formula  RSOH, RXH,   ,  or

    wherein X= chalcogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 514/518
TXT S of S-X-C attached directly to a benzene ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 517 wherein the sulfur atom of the S-X-C is
    directly attached to a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains for example:


CLS 514/519
TXT Cyano or isocyano bonded directly to carbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 506 wherein the ester is the -C b N (cyano)
    or the -+ b C (isocyano also written as -N = C group) attached to a carbon.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 514/520
TXT Benzene ring containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 303 in which the cyano or isocyano containing
    compound also contains a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 514/521
TXT C=O other than as ketone or aldehyde:

    Subject matter under subclass 520 in which the cyano or isocyano and
    benzene ring containing compound also contains a C=D (carbonyl) other than
    as a ketone or aldehyde.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for examples:


CLS 514/522
TXT The cyano is bonded directly to a benzene ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 521 wherein the cyano group is bonded
    directly to a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 514/523
TXT Additional nitrogen other than cyano:

    Subject matter under subclass 520 wherein the cyano and benzene containing
    compound also contains an additional nitrogen other than as in a cyano or
    isocyano grouping.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 514/524
TXT The cyano is bonded directly to a benzene ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 523 wherein a cyano group is bonded directly
    to a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 514/525
TXT Two or more of the cyano groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 520 wherein the compound contains a benzene
    ring and at least two cyano groups.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 514/526
TXT Acyclic:

    Subject matter under subclass 519 wherein the cyano containing compound is
    acyclic.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 514/527
TXT C=O other than as ketone or aldehyde:

    Subject matter under subclass 526 wherein the acyclic cyano containing
    compound contains a C=O (carbonyl) other than as ketone or aldehyde.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 514/528
TXT C(=O)N containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 527 wherein the carbonyl group is present in
    the form of a carboxamide grouping,

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 514/529
TXT Z-C(=O)-O-Y wherein Z is hydrogen or an organic radical bonded to the C(=O)
    by a carbon and Y is an organic radical bonded to the oxygen by a carbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 506 wherein the ester is derived from a
    carboxylic acid of the formula ZO-Y wherein the Z and Y are organic
    radicals directly bonded by carbon atoms or Z is a hydrogen atom.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:

    (2)     Note.  A compound which contains plural radicals, is proper for the
    subclass hereunder if the Z (or Y) of any one of the radicals meets the
    requirements for Z (or Y) in the subclass.


CLS 514/530
TXT Z contains a cyclopentyl or cyclopentene ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 529 wherein the Z is or contains a
    cyclopentyl or cyclopentene moiety.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 514/531
TXT Z contains a cyclopropyl or cyclopropene ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 529 wherein Z is or contains a cyclopropyl or
    cyclopropene moiety.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains for example:

    (2)     Note.  A Compound which contains plural ZO-Y radicals is proper for
    the subclasses hereunder if the A (or Y) of any of the radicals meets the
    requirements for Z (or Y) in the subclass.


CLS 514/532
TXT Z-C(=O)-O-Y, wherein Z contains a benzene ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 529 wherein Z is or contains a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 514/533
TXT Compound contains two or more C(=O)O groups indirectly bonded together by
    only covalent bonds:

    Subject matter under subclass 532 wherein the ester contains two of more O-
    groups.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:

    (2)     Note. Exclude if formed because of ionic bonding, e.g.,


CLS 514/534
TXT Z or Y radical contains a nitrogen atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 532 wherein the Z or Y radical contains a
    nitrogen atom.

    (1)     Note.  The subclass contains, for example:


CLS 514/535
TXT The nitrogen of the Z radical is directly bonded to a benzene ring which is
    directly bonded to the C(=O) group:

    Subject matter under subclass 534 wherein the nitrogen of the Z radical is
    directly attached to a benzene ring which is directly attached to the C=O
    of the C(=O) -OY grouping.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 514/536
TXT With an agent to enhance topical adsorption  or with a stabilizing agent:

    Subject matter under subclass 535 wherein the composition includes an agent
    which acts as a stabilizer for the active ingredient therein or acts to
    enhance the topical absorption thereof.

    (1)     Note.  To be included herein the agent must be disclosed to have
    one of said functions.


CLS 514/537
TXT With an additional active ingredient:

    Subject matter under subclass 535 wherein an additional active ingredient
    is present along with the DOAI.


CLS 514/538
TXT Nitrogen bonded to carbon in Z moiety:

    Subject matter under subclass 534 wherein the nitrogen is bonded to a
    carbon in the Z radical.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 514/539
TXT Plural separated benzene rings in Z moiety:

    Subject matter under subclass 538 wherein the active ingredient contains
    two or more separate benzene rings in the Z radical.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 514/540
TXT Nitrogen in Y moiety:

    Subject matter under subclass 538 wherein at least one nitrogen atom is
    also present in the Y radical.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 514/541
TXT Aldehyde or ketone in Z or Y radical:

    Subject matter under subclass 538 wherein the active ingredient contains a
    ketone or aldehyde grouping in the Z or Y radical.


CLS 514/542
TXT Z radical contains two or more nitrogen atoms at least one of which forms a
    C(=X)N group (X is chalcogen):

    Subject matter under subclass 538 wherein the Z radical contains two or
    more nitrogen atoms, at least one of which is present in the form a C(=X)-N
    group, wherein X is chalcogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 514/543
TXT Z forms a phenoxyl alky or phenoxy alkenyl radical:

    Subject matter under subclass 532 wherein Z is a substituted or
    unsubstituted Phenoxy alkyl or phenoxy alkenyl radical.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:

            wherein an oxyalkyl or oxyalkenyl group is between the phenyl and
    carbonyl of the ester function.


CLS 514/544
TXT C(=O) attached directly through the carbon to a benzene ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 532 wherein the benzene ring is attached
    directly to the carbon of the C(=O)-OY.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 514/545
TXT Ketone in Z radical:

    Subject matter under subclass 532 wherein a ketone grouping is present in
    the Z moiety.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 514/546
TXT ZC(=O)OY, wherein Z is an acyclic radical bonded to the C=O by a carbon and
    Y is an organic radical bonded to the oxygen by a carbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 529 wherein Z is an acyclic directly bonded
    to the C+O by a carbon and Y is an organic radical directly bonded to the
    oxygen by a carbon.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:
    CH3O-CH2-CH-C2H5, etc.

    NO2


CLS 514/547
TXT Compound contains two of more C(=O)O groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 546 wherein the active ingredient contains
    two or more  groups.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 514/548
TXT Ring in alcohol moiety:

    Subject matter under subclass 547 wherein the Y moiety contains a
    carbocyclic ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 514/549
TXT Z radical contains carbon to carbon unsaturation:

    Subject matter under subclass 546 wherein the Z radical contains carbon to
    carbon unsaturation.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 514/550
TXT Z radical contains sulfur or halogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 546 wherein the Z radical contains a sulfur
    or halogen atom.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 514/551
TXT Z radical contains nitrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 546 wherein the Z radical contains a nitrogen
    atom.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 514/552
TXT Z contains an unbroken chain of a least seven carbon atoms bonded directly
    to the C(=O) group:

    Subject matter under subclass 546 which contains an ester of a higher fatty
    acid, i.e., a monocarboxylic acid containing an unbroken chain of at least
    seven acyclic carbon atoms bonded to a carboxylic group.


CLS 514/553
TXT Radical -XH acid, or anhydride, acid halide or salt thereof (X is
    chalcogen) DOAI:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 which contains a DOAI which has the
    structure M-A-X-H where A is sulfur, selenium, tellurium,

    wherein X,Y and Z are Chalcogens, n=1 or 2 and X is not identical to A,
    anhydride acid halide or salt thereof, M being any radical not provided for
    above.

    (1)     Note.  Unless otherwise provided for, the salt of an acid is
    classified on the basis of the corresponding acid.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass specifically provides for acyclic anhydrides
    and acyclic acyl halides.


CLS 514/554
TXT Amine addition salt of the acid:

    Subject matter under subclass 553 in which the active ingredient is an
    addition salt of an amine and an organic acid.

    (1)     Note.  For the purpose of this and indented subclasses, amines are
    compounds identical in constitution with the derivatives of ammonia (NH3)
    wherein the nitrogen atom thereof is bonded to at least one carbon of an
    organic radical.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 514/555
TXT Benzene ring in acid moiety:

    Subject matter under subclass 554 wherein the acid moiety contains a
    benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains for example:


CLS 514/556
TXT Inner quarternary ammonium salt (e.g., betaine, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 553 wherein the active ingredient is an inner
    quaternary ammonium salt, as in betaine.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 514/557
TXT Carboxylic acid, percarboxylic acid, or salt thereof (e.g., peracetic acid,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 553 wherein the active ingredient is a
    carboxylic acid (R-COOH), or percarboxylic acid (RO-OH) or salt thereof,
    and wherein R is hydrogen or an organic radical bonded to the C=O by a
    carbon.


CLS 514/558
TXT Higher fatty acid or salt thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 557 wherein the acyl group has an unbroken
    chain of at least seven acyclic carbon atoms bonded to the carbon of the
    carbonyl group, i.e., higher fatty acids.


CLS 514/559
TXT Ring containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 558 wherein the organic active ingredient
    contains a carbocyclic ring attached indirectly or directly to the higher
    fatty acid chain.


CLS 514/560
TXT Carbon to carbon unsaturation:

    Subject matter under subclass 558 wherein the chain of at least seven
    carbon atoms has carbon to carbon unsaturation.


CLS 514/561
TXT Nitrogen other than as nitro or nitroso nonionically bonded:

    Subject matter under subclass 557 wherein the organic active ingredient
    contains a nitrogen atom other than as nitro or nitroso nonionically bonded
    thereto.


CLS 514/562
TXT Sulfur nonionically bonded:

    Subject matter under subclass 561 wherein the organic active ingredient
    also contains a sulfur atom nonionically bonded thereto.


CLS 514/563
TXT RC)=O)N containing (i.e., carboxamide)

    (R is C or H):

    Subject matter under subclass 561 wherein at least one nitrogen is present
    in a carboxamido group, i.e., RC(=O)N, wherein R is C or H.


CLS 514/564
TXT Plural nitrogens nonionically bonded:

    Subject matter under subclass 561 wherein  at least two nitrogen atoms are
    nonionically bonded to the active ingredient.


CLS 514/565
TXT N-N or N=C(-N)N containing (e.g., hydrazines, hydrazones, or guanidines,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 564 wherein two nitrogens are singly bonded
    to each other (hydrazine or hydrazone grouping) or nitrogens are present
    which form the guanidino are present which form the guanidino grouping
    (N-C(=N)-N.


CLS 514/566
TXT Polycarboxylic acid:

    Subject matter under subclass 864 wherein the active ingredient has at
    least two C(=O)-O groups bonded to carbons of the active ingredient.

    (1)     Note.  The O groups can be bonded to the same or different carbons.


CLS 514/567
TXT Benzene ring nonionically bonded:

    Subject matter under subclass 561 wherein the active ingredient contains a
    benzene ring, nonionically bonded thereto.


CLS 514/568
TXT Benzene ring nonionically bonded:

    Subject matter under subclass 557 wherein the active ingredient contains a
    benzene ring, nonionically bonded thereto.


CLS 514/569
TXT Polycyclo ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 568 wherein the active ingredient has a fused
    or bridged ring system therein which is not ionically bonded.


CLS 514/570
TXT Carboxy or salt thereof only attached indirectly to the benzene ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 568 wherein a carboxyl or salt thereof is
    attached indirectly to a benzene ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  If plural benzene rings are present, the carboxyl or salt
    thereof must not be directly attached to any of the benzene rings.


CLS 514/571
TXT Ether oxygen single bonded to carboxylic acid, percarboxylic acid or salt
    thereof through an acyclic carbon or acyclic carbon chain:

    Subject mater under subclass 570 wherein the active ingredient contains an
    ether oxygen single bonded to a carboxylic or percarboxylic acid group or
    salt thereof through an acyclic carbon or acyclic carbon chain, e.g.,
    contains the group O-C=C-C(O)-OH, etc.


CLS 514/572
TXT Cyclic carboxylic acid containing three to five carbons or cyclic
    percarboxylic acid containing three to five carbons of salt thereof:

    Subject mater under subclass 557 wherein the active ingredient contains a
    nonionically bonded ring when has exactly 3, 4 or 5 carbon atoms.


CLS 514/573
TXT Cyclopentyl or cyclopentene (e.g., prostaglandins, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 572 wherein the ring is cyclopentyl or
    cyclopentene.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains certain prostaglandins, etc.


CLS 514/574
TXT Polycarboxylic acid or salt thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 557 wherein the active ingredient contains at
    least two  C(=O)-O groups bonded to the same or different carbons.


CLS 514/575
TXT Hydroxamic acid or salt thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 553 wherein the acid is hydroxamic acid on a
    salt thereof, i.e., RC(=O)- NOH, wherein R is hydrogen or an organic
    radical bonded to the C=O by a carbon.


CLS 514/576
TXT Benzene ring containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 553 wherein the active ingredient contains a
    benzene ring which is nonionically bonded.


CLS 514/577
TXT Polycyclo ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 576 wherein the active ingredient contains a
    fused or bridged ring system which is nonionically bonded.


CLS 514/578
TXT Acyclic acid or salt thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 553 wherein the radical -X-H acid compound is
    acyclic.


CLS 514/579
TXT Nitrogen containing other than solely as a nitrogen in an inorganic ion of
    an addition salt, a nitro or a nitroso, DOAI:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 which includes a compound containing
    nitrogen in a form other that as nitrogen in an inorganic ion of an
    addition salt, nitro or nitroso.

    (1)     Note.  This group of compounds includes for example, ureas,
    thioureas, amides, amidines, azines, hydrazones, carbodimides, oximes,
    hydroxylamines and amines, inter alia, as well as their inorganic acid
    salts.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is residual for alicyclic amines not
    specifically provided for below.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:

    (4)     Note.  If amino nitrogen is present, the compound may additionally
    contain nitro, nitroso or nitrogen in an inorganic ion of an addition salt.

    (5)     Note.  Component parts of an "adduct" will be considered to be
    attached to each other ionically, except if it is clear that the mode of
    attachment is nonionic.


CLS 514/580
TXT Thioureas (i.e., N-C(=S)-N:

    Subject matter under subclass 579 containing the grouping NN.

    (1)     Note.  N=N is not provided for in this subclass; see appropriate
    subclass and in particular subclass 631.


CLS 514/581
TXT Thiocarbazides or thiosemicarbazides (i.e., N-N-C(S=)-N), containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 580 containing the thiocarbazide radical:

    or the thiosemicarbazide radical:


CLS 514/582
TXT Thiocarbazones or thiosemicarbazones (i.e., C=N-N-C(=S)-N) containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 581 wherein the compound contains the
    thiocarbazone radical

    or the thiosemicarbazone radical


CLS 514/583
TXT Benzene ring containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 582 wherein the compound contains a benzene
    ring.


CLS 514/584
TXT C=O, sulfur or cyano attached directly to thiourea nitrogen by nonionic
    bonding:

    Subject matter under subclass 580 wherein a thiourea nitrogen has a
    carbonyl, sulfur or nitrile (cyano) group directly attached by nonionic
    bonding.


CLS 514/585
TXT Benzene ring containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 580 wherein the compound contains a benzene
    ring.


CLS 514/586
TXT Nitrogen attached indirectly to -C(=S)-group by nonionic bonding:

    Subject matter under subclass 585 which contains nitrogen in addition to
    thiourea nitrogen.


CLS 514/587
TXT Oxygen containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 585 which contains oxygen in the compound.


CLS 514/588
TXT Ureas (i.e., N-C(=O)N:

    Subject matter under subclass 579 which contains the grouping NN.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example, adducts of urea with
    inorganic compounds such as hydrogen peroxide or calcium nitrate.


CLS 514/589
TXT Nitro or nitroso bonded directly to amino nitrogen (e.g., nitramine,
    nitrosoamine, nitro-urea, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 588 containing a nitro or nitroso group
    bonded directly to an amino nitrogen.


CLS 514/590
TXT Carbazides or semicarbazides (i.e., N-N-C (=O)-N) containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 588 containing carbazides or semicarbazides
    having the grouping N-N--N-N or N-N--N, respectively.


CLS 514/591
TXT Biurets (i.e., N-C(=O)-N-C(=O)-N):

    Subject matter under subclass 588 containing biurets having the grouping
    NNN.


CLS 514/592
TXT Sulfur attached directly to urea nitrogen by nonionic bonding:

    Subject matter under subclass 588 containing sulfur attached directly to
    urea nitrogen by nonionic bonding.


CLS 514/593
TXT Sulfur is part of a substituent which contains additional nitrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 592 wherein the sulfur is part of a group
    attached to urea nitrogen which contains additional nitrogen.


CLS 514/594
TXT Additional C=O bonded directly to urea nitrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 558 wherein a urea nitrogen is directly
    bonded to a C=O group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 514/595
TXT Benzene ring containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 588 containing a benzene ring (i.e.,
    aromatic).


CLS 514/596
TXT Benzene ring bonded directly to urea nitrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 595 wherein a benzene ring is directly bonded
    to a urea nitrogen.


CLS 514/597
TXT Benzene ring is part of a substituent which contains nitrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 596 wherein the benzene ring is part of a
    substituent which contains additional nitrogen.


CLS 514/598
TXT Benzene ring is part of a substituent which contains oxygen:

    Subject matter under subclass 596 wherein the benzene ring is part of a
    substituent which contains oxygen.


CLS 514/599
TXT Thiocarboxamides (i.e., C(=S)-N):

    Subject matter under subclass 579 containing thiocarboxamides which have
    the grouping


CLS 514/600
TXT Sulfamides (i.e., N-(O=)S(=O)-N):

    Subject matter under subclass 579 containing diamides of sulfuric acid
    (i.e., sulfamides) which have the grouping


CLS 514/601
TXT Sulfonamides (i.e., Q-(O=)S(=O)-N,  wherein Q is a substituent and wherein
    any substituent attached to nitrogen will be referred to as E:

    Subject matter under subclass 579 containing sulfonamides which have the
    grouping

    wherein Q and E are substituents connected respectively to the S and N of
    the sulfonamide group.

    (1)     Note.  A compound which contains

    plural radicals, is proper for the subclass hereunder if the Q (or E) of
    any one of the radicals meets the requirements for Q (or E) in the,
    subclass.


CLS 514/602
TXT Contains benzene ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 601 where the sulfonic acid residue is
    aromatic (i.e., benzene ring containing).


CLS 514/603
TXT Nitrogen in Q:

    Subject matter under subclass 602 wherein the residue of the aromatic
    sulfonamide contains nitrogen, e.g.,


CLS 514/604
TXT Q is monocyclic:

    Subject matter under subclass 602 wherein the residue of the aromatic
    sulfonic acid is monocyclic, i.e., Q contains only one ring.


CLS 514/605
TXT Q is acyclic and benzene ring in a substituent E:

    Subject matter under subclass 601 wherein the sulfonic acid residue
    contains no ring and the substituent (E) bonded to the nitrogen portion of
    the sulfonamide group contains a benzene ring.


CLS 514/606
TXT N-S-S containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 579 which includes thiosulfenamides
    containing the grouping N-S-S.


CLS 514/607
TXT N-S-S containing or contains a nitrogen bonded directly to a S=O Group
    (e.g., sulfinamides, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 579 including a compound which contains two
    amino nitrogen nonionically bonded directly to the same sulfur or which
    contains sulfur doubly bonded to oxygen and directly attached to an amino
    nitrogen by nonionic bonding, as for example, sulfinamides, etc.


CLS 514/608
TXT Sulfur attached directly to amino nitrogen by nonionic bonding (e.g.,
    sulfenamides, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 579 containing sulfur bonded directly to an
    amino nitrogen by nonionic bonding, as for example sulfenamides.


CLS 514/609
TXT Cyanamides (i.e., compounds containing cyano bonded directly to amino
    nitrogen):

    Subject matter under subclass 579 containing cyanamides which have a cyano
    group bonded directly to an amino nitrogen.


CLS 514/610
TXT Nitramines (i.e., compounds containing nitro bonded directly to amino
    nitrogen):

    Subject matter under subclass 579 containing nitramines wherein a nitro
    group is attached directly to an amino nitrogen.


CLS 514/611
TXT Nitrosamines (i.e., compounds containing nitroso bonded directly to amino
    nitrogen):

    Subject matter under subclass 579 containing nitrosamines, wherein a
    nitroso group is attached directly to an amino nitrogen.


CLS 514/612
TXT Haloamines (i.e., compounds containing halogen attached directly to amino
    nitrogen by nonionic bonding):

    Subject matter under subclass 579 containing haloamines wherein halogen is
    attached directly to an amino nitrogen by nonionic bonding.


CLS 514/613
TXT Carboxamides (i.e., R-C(=O)-N,  wherein r is a radical having carbon bonded
    directly to the C(=O)-N or is hydrogen and wherein any substituent attached
    to nitrogen will be referred to as E):

    Subject matter under subclass 579 including carboxamides which have the
    grouping RN wherein R is either a radical having carbon bonded directly to
    the C=O or is hydrogen and wherein any substituent attached to nitrogen
    will be referred to as E.


CLS 514/614
TXT N-N containing (e.g., aminimine, hydrazine etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 613 which has the N-N grouping, e.g.,
    aminimines

    or another compound with contains the grouping N-N.


CLS 514/615
TXT R contains benzene ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 614 wherein the carboxylic acid residue
    (substituent R) contains a benzene ring.


CLS 514/616
TXT Plural carboxamide groups or plural C=O groups bonded directly to the same
    nitrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 613 containing more than one carboxamide
    group or containing plural carbonyls bonded directly to the same nitrogen.


CLS 514/617
TXT R contains benzene ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 613 wherein the residue of the carboxylic
    acid (R) contains a benzene ring.


CLS 514/618
TXT Sulfur in R:

    Subject matter under subclass 613 wherein the residue of the carboxylic
    acid (R) also contains sulfur.


CLS 514/619
TXT Nitrogen in R:

    Subject matter under subclass 617 wherein the carboxylic acid residue (R)
    also contains nitrogen.


CLS 514/620
TXT The nitrogen in R is an amino nitrogen attached indirectly to a ring by
    acyclic bonding:

    Subject matter under subclass 619 wherein the carboxylic acid residue (R)
    contains an amine nitrogen indirectly attached to a ring through a single
    atom or through an acyclic chain.


CLS 514/621
TXT C=O in R:

    Subject matter under subclass 617 wherein the carboxylic acid residue (R)
    contains a C=O group.


CLS 514/622
TXT C-O group in R:

    Subject matter under subclass 617 wherein the carboxylic acid residue (R)
    contains a C-O group.


CLS 514/623
TXT Plural alicyclic rings in R:

    Subject matter under subclass 613 wherein the carboxylic acid residue (R)
    contains more that one alicyclic ring.


CLS 514/624
TXT Three-membered ring in R:

    Subject matter under subclass 613 wherein the carboxylic acid residue (R)
    contains a three membered ring.


CLS 514/625
TXT R is acyclic:

    Subject matter under subclass 613 wherein the carboxylic acid residue (R)
    does not contain a ring.


CLS 514/626
TXT Nitrogen in R:

    Subject matter under subclass 625 wherein the carboxylic acid residue (R)
    contains nitrogen.


CLS 514/627
TXT Carbon to carbon unsaturation in R:

    Subject matter under subclass 625 wherein the carboxylic acid residue (R)
    contains a double or triple bond between two carbons.


CLS 514/628
TXT Halogen bonded directly to carbon in R:

    Subject matter under subclass 625 wherein the carboxylic acid residue (R)
    contains halogen bonded directly to carbon.


CLS 514/629
TXT R is hydrogen of a lower saturated alkyl of less that seven carbons:

    Subject matter under subclass 625 wherein the carboxylic acid residue (R)
    is from a lower fatty acid, i.e., a fatty acid of one to seven carbons
    containing a C of the carboxy group.


CLS 514/630
TXT A ring or polycyclo ring system in a substituent E is attached indirectly
    to the carboxamide nitrogen or to an amino nitrogen in substituent E by
    acyclic nonionic bonding:

    Subject matter under subclass 629 wherein the amino nitrogen containing
    residue contains a ring or a polycyclo ring system which is attached
    indirectly to the carboxamide nitrogen or to an additional amino nitrogen
    in the amino nitrogen containing residue by acyclic nonionic bonding.


CLS 514/631
TXT Amidines (i.e., N=C-N):

    Subject matter under subclass 579 containing amidines which have the
    grouping N=C-N.


CLS 514/632
TXT Amidino hydrazines or hydrazones (i.e., N=C-N-N or N-N=C-N):

    Subject matter under subclass 631 including a compound which is an amidino
    hydrazine containing the grouping N=C-N-N or an amidino hydrazone
    containing the grouping O-N=C-N.


CLS 514/633
TXT Amidoximes (i.e., ON=C-N):

    Subject matter under subclass 631 which included amidoximes containing the
    grouping O-N=C-N.


CLS 514/634
TXT Guanidines (i.e., N=C(-N)-N:

    Subject matter under subclass 631 which includes guanidines, containing the
    grouping NN.


CLS 514/635
TXT Biguanidines (i.e., N=C(-N)-N-(-N)C=N:

    Subject matter under subclass 634 which includes biguanidines, containing
    the grouping NNN.


CLS 514/636
TXT Polyamidines:

    Subject matter under subclass 631 wherein there is more than one amidine
    group.


CLS 514/637
TXT Benzene ring containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 631 wherein an amidine contains a benzene
    ring.


CLS 514/638
TXT Nitrogen double bonded directly to carbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 579 containing compounds which are
    characterized by the presence of the grouping C=N.


CLS 514/639
TXT Hydrazones (i.e., C=N-N):

    Subject matter under subclass 638 including the grouping C=N-N.


CLS 514/640
TXT Oximes (i.e., C=N-O):

    Subject matter under subclass 638 which includes compounds containing the
    grouping C=N-O.


CLS 514/641
TXT Aldimines or ketimines which contain a benzene ring (i.e., R-C=N wherein Ri
    is C or H):

    Subject matter under subclass 638 which includes aldimines of Ketimines
    containing a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains compounds having the group R-C=N
    wherein the R is either H or a substituent with C bonded directly to the C
    of said group.


CLS 514/642
TXT Quaternary ammonium containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 579 which contains compounds wherein a
    pentavalent nitrogen is bonded by four valences to carbon.


CLS 514/643
TXT Benzene ring containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 642 wherein the compound contains a benzene
    ring.


CLS 514/644
TXT Amine oxides:

    Subject matter under subclass 579 which contains compounds characterized by
    the structure.


CLS 514/645
TXT Nitroxides, oxyamines or hydroxyamines (i.e., N-O):

    Subject matter under subclass 579 containing compounds having the grouping
    N-O.


CLS 514/646
TXT Benzene ring containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 579 wherein the compound contains a benzene
    ring.


CLS 514/647
TXT Amine nitrogen and a ring bonded directly to the same ring and any other
    amino nitrogen in the compound is bonded directly to one of the rings:

    Subject matter under subclass 646 wherein a benzene ring is bonded directly
    to another ring and at least one amino nitrogen is bonded directly to one
    of the rings and any other amino nitrogen in the compound is also bonded to
    one of the rings.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains compounds having for example the
    group:


CLS 514/648
TXT Two aryl rings or aryl ring systems bonded directly to the same acyclic
    carbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 646 wherein two benzene rings or benzene
    containing polycyclos are bonded to the same acyclic carbon.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains for example the following group:


CLS 514/649
TXT Amino nitrogen attached to aryl ring or aryl ring system by an acyclic
    carbon or acyclic chain:

    Subject matter under subclass 646 wherein an amino nitrogen is indirectly
    bonded to an aryl ring system through a single carbon or through an acyclic
    chain.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes for example the following group:


CLS 514/650
TXT The aryl ring system is bonded directly to another ring or ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 649 wherein the aryl ring or ring system is
    bonded directly to another ring or ring system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains for example the group:


CLS 514/651
TXT Ether oxygen is part of the chain:

    Subject matter under subclass 649 wherein oxygen is a part of the chain.


CLS 514/652
TXT Alkanol group between the amino nitrogen and an ether oxygen which is
    bonded directly to the aryl ring or aryl ring system (i.e., aryloxy alkanol
    amines):

    Subject matter under subclass 651 wherein an alkanol group which is bonded
    directly to the aryl ring or aryl ring system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes for example, the group:

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    651,    for a compound containing the


CLS 514/653
TXT Hydroxy, bonded directly to carbon, attached directly or indirectly to the
    acyclic carbon or chain by acyclic nonionic bonding (e.g., beta hydroxy
    phenethylamines, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 649 wherein a hydroxy group, which is bonded
    directly to a carbon, is attached directly or indirectly to the acyclic
    carbon or chain by acyclic nonionic bonding.


CLS 514/654
TXT The chain consists of two or more carbons which are unsubstituted or have
    acyclic hydrocarbyl substituents only:

    Subject matter under subclass 649 wherein the chain consists of two or more
    carbons which are unsubstituted or substituted by acyclic hydrocarbon
    groups.


CLS 514/655
TXT The aryl ring or aryl ring system and amino nitrogen are bonded directly to
    the same acyclic carbon, which carbon additionally has only hydrogen or
    acyclic hydrocarbyl substituents bonded directly thereto:

    Subject matter under subclass 649 wherein an aryl ring or ring system and
    an amino nitrogen are both directly bonded to the same acyclic carbon which
    carbon additionally has only hydrogen or acyclic hydrocarbyl substituents
    bonded directly thereto.


CLS 514/656
TXT Polycyclo ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 646 which contains a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 514/657
TXT Bicyclo ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 656 wherein the polycyclo ring system is
    bicyclo.


CLS 514/658
TXT Two benzene rings bonded directly to the same nitrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 646 where two benzene rings are bonded
    directly to the same nitrogen.


CLS 514/659
TXT Alicyclic ring or ring system and amino nitrogen are attached indirectly by
    an acyclic carbon or acyclic carbon or acyclic chain:

    Subject matter under subclass 579 wherein an amino nitrogen is Indirectly
    bonded to an alicyclic ring or ring system through a single acyclic carbon
    or through an acyclic chain.


CLS 514/660
TXT Plural alicyclic rings:

    Subject matter under subclass 579 wherein there is more than one alicyclic
    ring.


CLS 514/661
TXT Polycyclo ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 660 wherein plural rings are in the form of a
    polycyclo ring system.


CLS 514/662
TXT Tricyclo ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 661 wherein the polycyclo ring system
    contains three rings in the polycyclo ring system.


CLS 514/663
TXT Acyclic:

    Subject matter under subclass 579 wherein the compound contains no ring.


CLS 514/664
TXT N-N containing (e.g., aminimine, hydrazine, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 663 containing the grouping N-N.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains for example the group


CLS 514/665
TXT Sulfur containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 663 wherein the compound contains sulfur.


CLS 514/666
TXT Aldehyde or ketone containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 663 wherein the compound contains an aldehyde
    or ketone group.


CLS 514/667
TXT C-O group containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 663 which contains a compound with a C-O
    group.


CLS 514/668
TXT Polyether:

    Subject matter under subclass 667 wherein the compound contains more than
    one C-O-C group.


CLS 514/669
TXT Polyhydroxy:

    Subject matter under subclass 667 wherein the compound contains more than
    one C-OH group.


CLS 514/670
TXT Monoether:

    Subject matter under subclass 667 wherein the compound contains only one
    C-O-C group.


CLS 514/671
TXT Carbon to carbon unsaturation:

    Subject matter under subclass 663 wherein the compound contains a double or
    triple bond between two carbons.


CLS 514/672
TXT Halogen bonded directly to carbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 663 wherein the compound contains a halogen
    bonded directly to carbon.


CLS 514/673
TXT Plural amino nitrogens:

    Subject matter under subclass 663 wherein the compound contains more than
    one amino nitrogen.


CLS 514/674
TXT Three or more amino nitrogens:

    Subject matter under subclass 673 wherein the compound contains three or
    more amino nitrogen.


CLS 514/675
TXT Ketone DOAI:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the organic active ingredient is a
    Ketone.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition of Ketone.


CLS 514/676
TXT Nitrogen containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 675 which contains a nitro or nitroso radical.


CLS 514/677
TXT Bicyclo ring system having a benzene ring as one of the cyclos:

    Subject matter under subclass 676 in which a benzene ring is part of a
    bicyclo ring system.


CLS 514/678
TXT Benzene ring containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 675 which contains a benzene ring.


CLS 514/679
TXT Plural rings:

    Subject matter under subclass 678 which contains at least two rings.


CLS 514/680
TXT Polycyclo ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 679 which contains a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 514/681
TXT Bicyclo:

    Subject matter under subclass 680 wherein the polycyclo ring system is a
    bicyclo ring system.


CLS 514/682
TXT Naphthyl ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 681 wherein the bicyclo ring system is a
    naphthyl ring system.


CLS 514/683
TXT Alicyclic ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 679 which contains at least one alicyclic
    ring.


CLS 514/684
TXT Five-membered alicyclic ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 683 which contains a five-membered alicyclic
    ring.


CLS 514/685
TXT C=O bonded directly to benzene ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 679 which  contains a  group directly bonded
    to a benzene ring.


CLS 514/686
TXT Two benzene rings bonded directly to the same C=O:

    Subject matter under subclass 685 wherein two benzene rings are directly
    bonded to the same  group.


CLS 514/687
TXT Oxygen single bonded to carbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 686 which contains C-O group.


CLS 514/688
TXT C=O bonded directly to benzene ring (e.g., acetophenone, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 678 wherein  is bonded directly to the
    benzene ring.


CLS 514/689
TXT Oxygen single bonded to carbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 688 which contains a C-O- group.


CLS 514/690
TXT Alicyclic ring containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 675 which contains an alicyclic ring.


CLS 514/691
TXT Plural alicyclic ring.

    Subject matter under subclass 690 which contains more than one alicyclic
    ring.


CLS 514/692
TXT Camphor or nuclear substituted derivative thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 691 which is camphor:

    or a nuclear substituted derivative thereof.


CLS 514/693
TXT Aldehyde DOAI:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 which includes an aldehyde.

    (1)     Note.  See Glossary for definition of aldehyde.


CLS 514/694
TXT Formaldehyde:

    Subject matter under subclass 693 containing formaldehyde having the
    grouping HH.


CLS 514/695
TXT With polycyclo compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 694 which also contains a polycyclo compound
    in admixture therewith.


CLS 514/696
TXT With alcohol:

    Subject matter under subclass 694 which also contains alcohol in admixture
    therewith.


CLS 514/697
TXT With nitrogen containing compound:

    Subject matter under subject 694 which also contains a nitrogen containing
    compound in admixture therewith.


CLS 514/698
TXT With preservative or stabilizer:

    Subject matter under subclass 693 which also contains a preserving or
    stabilizing agent in admixture therewith.


CLS 514/699
TXT Benzene ring containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 693 wherein the compound contains a benzene
    ring.


CLS 514/700
TXT Polycyclo ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 699 wherein the compound contains a polycyclo
    ring system.


CLS 514/701
TXT Acyclic carbon to carbon unsaturation:

    Subject matter under subclass 699 wherein the compound contains a double or
    triple bond between two carbons neither of which is a member of a ring.


CLS 514/702
TXT Sulfur containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 693 wherein the compound contains sulfur.


CLS 514/703
TXT Carbon to carbon unsaturation:

    Subject matter under subclass 693 wherein the compound contains a double or
    triple bond between two carbons.


CLS 514/704
TXT Nitrogen containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 693 wherein the compound contains nitrogen.


CLS 514/705
TXT Plural C=O groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 693 wherein the compound contains at least
    two of the following groups:  C=O.


CLS 514/706
TXT Sulfur, selenium or tellurium compound (e.g., thioalcohols, mercaptans,
    etc.) DOAI:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 which includes a compound containing
    sulfur, selenium or tellurium.


CLS 514/707
TXT Persulfide (e.g., R-S-S-R, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 706 in which the sulfur compound is one
    containing two or more sulfur atoms joined directly together.


CLS 514/708
TXT Oxygen bonded directly to sulfur (e.g., sulfoxides, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 706 wherein the compound contains oxygen
    directly bonded to sulfur.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes sulfoxides (S=O) for example.


CLS 514/709
TXT Plural oxygens bonded directly to the same sulfur (e.g., sulfones, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 708 wherein at least two oxygens are directly
    bonded to the same sulfur atom.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes sulfones (O=S=O) for example.


CLS 514/710
TXT Acyclic carbon to carbon unsaturation:

    Subject matter under subclass 709 wherein the compound contains a double or
    triple bond between two carbons neither of which is a member of a ring.


CLS 514/711
TXT Acyclic:

    Subject matter under subclass 708 wherein the compound does not contain a
    ring.


CLS 514/712
TXT Thioether:

    Subject matter under subclass 706 in which the compound has the R-S-R
    structure wherein the R's are diverse or identical organic radicals.


CLS 514/713
TXT Acyclic carbon to carbon unsaturation:

    Subject matter under subclass 712 wherein the compound contains a double or
    triple bond between two carbons neither of which is a member of a ring.


CLS 514/714
TXT Peroxide DOAI:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 which includes a compound containing an O-O
    group.


CLS 514/715
TXT Ether DOAI:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 which includes a compound containing an
    oxygen atom which is bonded to carbons of two discrete organic radicals and
    has the grouping R-O-R wherein the R's are diverse or identical organic
    radicals.


CLS 514/716
TXT Nitrogen containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 715 wherein the compound contains nitrogen.


CLS 514/717
TXT Benzene ring containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 715 wherein the compound contains a benzene
    ring.


CLS 514/718
TXT Plural oxygens:

    Subject matter under subclass 717 wherein the compound contains at least
    two oxygen atoms.


CLS 514/719
TXT Alicyclic ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 718 wherein the compound contains an
    alicyclic ring.


CLS 514/720
TXT Acyclic carbon to carbon unsaturation:

    Subject matter under subclass 718 wherein the compound contains a double or
    triple bond between two carbons neither of which is a member of a ring.


CLS 514/721
TXT Plural benzene rings:

    Subject matter under subclass 718 wherein the compound contains two or more
    benzene rings.


CLS 514/722
TXT Acyclic:

    Subject matter under subclass 715 wherein the compound does not contain a
    ring.


CLS 514/723
TXT Plural oxygens:

    Subject matter under subclass 722 wherein the compound contains at least
    two oxygen atoms.


CLS 514/724
TXT C-O group (e.g., alcohol, alcoholate, etc.) DOAI:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 which includes a compound containing a C-O-
    group.


CLS 514/725
TXT Vitamin a compound or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 724 wherein the compound is vitamin A,

    or the alcoholates thereof.


CLS 514/726
TXT Diphenyl-substituted acyclic alcohol or alcoholate:

    Subject matter under subclass 724 in which a hydroxyl group is attached to
    a single carbon atom, or to a chain of two or more carbon atoms, which link
    two phenyl groups.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 514/727
TXT Nitrogen containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 724 wherein the compound contains nitrogen.


CLS 514/728
TXT C of C-O- group is nuclear C of a benzene ring (e.g., phenol, phenolate,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 727 wherein the C-O- group of the compound is
    a

    carbon of the C-O group is a nuclear carbon of a benzene ring.


CLS 514/729
TXT Alicyclic ring containing:

    Subject matter under subclass  724 wherein the compound contains an
    alicyclic ring.


CLS 514/730
TXT Benzene ring containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 724 wherein the compound contains a benzene
    ring.


CLS 514/731
TXT C of C-O- group is nuclear C of a benzene ring (e.g., phenol, phenolate,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 730 wherein the C-O- group of the compound is
    a

    carbon of the C-O- group is a nuclear carbon of a benzene ring.


CLS 514/732
TXT Polycyclo ring system (e.g., naphthols, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 731 wherein the compound contains a polycyclo
    ring system.


CLS 514/733
TXT Acyclic carbon to carbon unsaturation:

    Subject matter under subclass 731 wherein the compound contains a double or
    triple bond between two carbons neither of which is a member of a ring.


CLS 514/734
TXT Two or more separate aryl-O- groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 731 wherein the compound contains at least
    two

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is not satisfied by the group


CLS 514/735
TXT Nuclear halogenated:

    Subject matter under subclass 734 wherein the compound contains a halogen
    bonded directly to a nuclear carbon of a benzene ring.


CLS 514/736
TXT Additional benzene ring containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 731 wherein the compound contains at least
    one benzene ring in addition to the


CLS 514/737
TXT Nuclear halogenated:

    Subject matter under subclass 731 wherein the compound contains a halogen
    bonded directly to a nuclear carbon of a benzene ring.


CLS 514/738
TXT Polyhydroxy:

    Subject matter under subclass 724 wherein the compound contains at least
    two -OH groups.


CLS 514/739
TXT Carbon to carbon unsaturation:

    Subject matter under subclass 724 wherein the compound contains a double or
    triple bond between two carbon atoms.


CLS 514/740
TXT Nitrogen containing compound DOAI:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 which includes a compound containing a
    nitrogen atom.


CLS 514/741
TXT Benzene ring containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 740 wherein the compound contains a benzene
    ring.


CLS 514/742
TXT Polynitro:

    Subject matter under subclass 740 wherein the compound contains at least
    two -NO2 groups.


CLS 514/743
TXT Halogenated hydrocarbon DOAI:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 which includes a compound consisting of
    carbon, hydrogen and halogen atoms or only of carbon and halogen atoms.


CLS 514/744
TXT Unsaturated aliphatic compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 743 wherein the compound contains no rings
    and contains a double or triple bond between two carbon atoms.


CLS 514/745
TXT Alkyne:

    Subject matter under subclass 744 wherein the compound contains a triple
    bond between two carbon atoms.


CLS 514/746
TXT Plural halogenated hydrocarbon compounds:

    Subject matter under subclass 744 wherein there is more than one
    halogenated hydrocarbon compound.


CLS 514/747
TXT Carbocyclic:

    Subject matter under subclass 743 wherein the halogenated hydrocarbon
    contains a ring in which all ring members are carbons.


CLS 514/748
TXT Two benzene rings directly attached to an acyclic hydrocarbon or acyclic
    halogenated hydrocarbon (e.g., D.D.T., etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 747 wherein the compound contains two phenyl
    substituents on an acyclic hydrocarbon or acyclic halogenated hydrocarbon
    and the phenyl groups are connected only through a carbon chain of the
    acyclic group.


CLS 514/749
TXT Fluorine containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 748 wherein the compound contains fluorine.


CLS 514/750
TXT With organic ether or -OH containing compound, non-DOAI:

    Subject matter under subclass 748 wherein there is an organic ether or -OH
    containing non-DOAI compound in addition to the halogenated hydrocarbon
    compound.


CLS 514/751
TXT Benzene ring containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 747 wherein the compound contains a benzene
    ring.


CLS 514/752
TXT Alkyne:

    Subject matter under subclass 751 wherein the compound contains a triple
    bond between two carbon atoms.


CLS 514/753
TXT Polycyclo ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 751 wherein the compound contains a polycyclo
    ring system.


CLS 514/754
TXT Plural benzene rings:

    Subject matter under subclass 751 wherein the compound contains at least
    two benzene rings.


CLS 514/755
TXT Polycyclo ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 747 wherein the compound contains a polycyclo
    ring system.


CLS 514/756
TXT Bicyclo:

    Subject matter under subclass 755 wherein the polycyclo ring system
    consists of exactly two rings.


CLS 514/757
TXT Two or more halogenated hydrocarbons:

    Subject matter under subclass 743 which includes at least two halogenated
    hydrocarbon compounds.


CLS 514/758
TXT Chlorine as only halogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 743 wherein the halogenated hydrocarbon
    compound contains chlorine and no other halogen atoms.


CLS 514/759
TXT Fluorine as only halogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 743 wherein the halogenated hydrocarbon
    contains only fluorine halogen atoms.


CLS 514/760
TXT Bromine and chlorine as only halogens:

    Subject mater under subclass 743 wherein the halogenated hydrocarbon
    contains bromine and chlorine atoms and no other halogen atoms.


CLS 514/761
TXT Bromine and fluorine as only halogens:

    Subject matter under subclass 743 wherein the halogenated hydrocarbon
    contains bromine and fluorine atoms and no other halogen atoms.


CLS 514/762
TXT Hydrocarbon DOAI:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 which includes a compound consisting of
    carbon and hydrogen atoms only.


CLS 514/763
TXT Carbocyclic:

    Subject matter under subclass 762 wherein the compound contains at least
    one ring in which all of the members are carbon.


CLS 514/764
TXT Benzene ring containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 763 wherein the compound contains a polycyclo
    ring system.


CLS 514/765
TXT Polycyclo ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 764 wherein the compound contains a polycyclo
    ring system.


CLS 514/766
TXT Polycyclo ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 763 wherein the compound contains a polycyclo
    ring system.


CLS 514/767
TXT With phosphorus containing non-DOAI:

    Subject matter under subclass 762 which also contains a non-DOAI phosphorus
    atom or compound in admixture therewith.


CLS 514/768
TXT With sulfur containing non-DOAI:

    Subject matter under subclass 762 which also contains a non-DOAI sulfur
    atom of compound in admixture therewith.


CLS 514/769
TXT DESIGNATED INORGANIC NONACTIVE INGREDIENT OR ELEMENTAL MATERIAL OTHER THAT
    WATER:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the composition contains
    an organic nonactive ingredient or elemental material other than water.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses provide for compositions which
    (a) do not contain a designated pharmacologically or biologically active
    ingredient or which (b) are solely disclosed or claimed as useful as inert
    additives or carriers for an active ingredient of this class, e.g., diluent
    or carrier.

    (2)     Note.  Within this subclass are compositions which may contain an
    organic active ingredient which does not meet the definition of the
    designated organic active ingredient (DOAI).

    (3)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition "DOAI".

    (4)     Note.  A Claim of the type:  "A pharmaceutical composition
    containing a medicament or drug and l-20 percent by weight of aluminum
    oxide and 5-20 percent by weight of sodium bicarbonate" is properly
    classified under the subclass.


CLS 514/770
TXT Siliceous or calcareous material (e.g., cloy, earth, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 769 wherein the nonbioactive inorganic
    compound contains silicon or calcium, e.g., clays, etc.


CLS 514/771
TXT Oxygen gas containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 769 which contains oxygen gas.


CLS 514/772
TXT DESIGNATED ORGANIC NONACTIVE INGREDIENT CONTAINING OTHER THAN HYDROCARBON:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the composition contains
    a nonbioactive organic compound.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses provide for compositions which
    (a) do not contain a pharmacologically or biologically active ingredient or
    which (b) are solely disclosed or claimed as useful as inert additives or
    carriers for an active ingredient of this class.  For example:  topical
    preparations, e.g., face cream, etc., which are not specifically provided
    for as special subclasses and which do not contain a designated active
    ingredient are classified in this and indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  Within this subclass are compositions which may contain an
    organic active ingredient which does not meet the definition of the
    designated organic active ingredient (DOAI).

    (3)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition of "DOAI".

    (4)     Note.  A claim of the type:  "A pharmaceutical composition
    containing a medicament or drug and 1-20 percent by weight glycerin, 1-10
    percent by weight ethyl alcohol and 5-10 percent by weight of an cationic
    surfactant" is properly classified under this subclass.


CLS 514/772.1
TXT Aftertreated solid synthetic organic polymer (e.g., grafting, blocking,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 772 wherein the designated organic nonactive
    ingredient is a solid synthetic organic polymer which has been
    aftertreated, e.g., a saponified starch acrylonitrile graft copolymer,
    polyacrylic acid neutralized with sodium hydroxide, etc.

    (1)     Note.  The chemical after treatment of a solid synthetic organic
    polymer may be to remove or add a group or element or a combination of both
    procedures.

    (2)     Note.  The starting solid polymer may be subjected to a number of
    aftertreating steps the sequence or numbers of which will not affect
    classification.  The important criteria is that every reaction be
    considered proceeding from the starting solid polymer to the final product.
     This is consistent with the classification rules set out in the Class 520
    Series.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    522,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, for the process of treating a
    solid polymer utilizing wave energy.

    525,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses for the
    aftertreatment of solid synthetic organic polymers.


CLS 514/772.2
TXT Polyvinyl alcohol:

    Subject matter under subclass 772.1 wherein the solid polymer is polyvinyl
    alcohol, e.g., obtained from the hydrolysis of polyvinyl acetate or
    copolymers thereof, etc.


CLS 514/772.3
TXT Solid synthetic organic polymer:

    Subject matter under subclass 772 wherein the designated organic nonactive
    ingredient is a solid synthetic polymer, e.g., a pharmaceutical preparation
    containing a bio-degradable polymer derived from a monomer mixture
    comprising 2, 2-bis (epsilon-caprolactone-4-yl) propane,
    gamma-valerolactone and epsilon-caprolactone, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78.01+, for a pharmaceutical composition which contains a solid synthetic
    organic polymer which functions as a designated organic active ingredient.

    78.08,  for a more thorough discussion on polymers which are proper for
    Classes 424, 514, and Class 520 Series.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    522,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, for the process of preparing a
    solid polymer utilizing wave energy.

    526,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, for the perparation of solid
    synthetic polymers derived from ethylenic monomers only, e.g., acrylic
    acid, etc.

    527,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, for the preparation of solid
    synthetic polymers derived from the reaction between a natural product and
    other chemical intermediates, e.g., a carbohydrate and polyisocyanate, a
    protein and an ethylenic reactant, etc.

    528,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 1+ for the
    preparation of a solid synthetic polymer derived from at least one
    saturated reactant, e.g., toluene diisocyanate and polyethylene glycol,
    etc.; subclasses 480+ treating a solid polymer merely with heat.


CLS 514/772.4
TXT Polymer from ethylenic monomers only:

    Subject matter under subclass 772.3 wherein the polymer is derived from
    ethylenic monomers only, e.g., a self-microencapsulating pesticidal
    composition contains polymethyl methacrylate, a cosmetic moisturizing
    composition contains a copolymer from acrolein and sodium acrylate, etc.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 424, subclass 78.17 for the definition of an
    ethylenic monomer.


CLS 514/772.5
TXT Heterocyclic monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 772.4 wherein the solid polymer is derived
    from a heterocyclic monomer, e.g., a cosmetic composition containing a
    copolymer derived from vinyl ether and maleic anhydride, a cosmetic
    emulsion containing a copolymer derived from vinylpyrrolidone, vinyl
    acetate, and vinyl myristate, etc.


CLS 514/772.6
TXT Carboxylic acid containing monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 772.4 wherein the solid polymer is derived
    from an ethylenically unsaturated monomer containing a carboxylic acid
    group, e.g., acrylic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, etc.


CLS 514/772.7
TXT Heterocyclic monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 772.3 wherein the solid polymer is derived
    from a heterocyclic monomer, e.g., ethylene oxide, etc.


CLS 514/773
TXT Peptide containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 772 wherein the nonbioactive organic compound
    is a peptide which is not degraded to the constituent amino acids, e.g.,
    collagen, etc.


CLS 514/774
TXT Gelatin or derivative:

    Subjects matter under subclass 773 wherein the peptide is gelatin or a
    derivative thereof.


CLS 514/775
TXT Casein (milk protein) or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 773 wherein the peptide is casein (milk
    protein) or a derivative thereof.


CLS 514/776
TXT Albumin or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 773 wherein the peptide is albumin or a
    derivative thereof.


CLS 514/777
TXT Carbohydrate or lignin, or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 772 wherein the nonbioactive organic compound
    is a carbohydrate or lignin or derivative thereof wherein the carbon
    skeleton of the carbohydrate is not destroyed except as noted below.

    (1)     Note.  Alcohols and acids corresponding to carbohydrates are
    excluded from this subclass and compositions containing such compounds are
    in appropriate subclasses below.

    (2)     Note.  Lignin is a noncarbohydrate, polymeric substance found in
    wood.  It is isolated directly from wood or wood products or from the
    compositions derived from the treatment of wood, e.g., waste sulfite liquor
    or black liquor.  The structure of the lignin monomer is not completely
    know.


CLS 514/778
TXT Starch or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 777 wherein the carbohydrate is a starch or
    derivative thereof.


CLS 514/779
TXT Algin or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 777 wherein the carbohydrate is algin or a
    derivative thereof.


CLS 514/780
TXT Locust bean gum:

    Subject matter under subclass 777 wherein the carbohydrate is locust bean
    gum.


CLS 514/781
TXT Cellulose of derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 777 wherein the carbohydrate is cellulose or
    a derivative thereof.


CLS 514/782
TXT Natural gum or resin:

    Subject matter under subclass 772 wherein the nonbioactive organic compound
    is a natural gum or resin, e.g., natural rubber, latex, rosin, etc.


CLS 514/783
TXT Plant extract or plant material of undetermined constitution:

    Subject matter under subclass 772 wherein the nonbioactive organic compound
    is a plant extract of plant product of undetermined chemical constitution
    including essential oils.

    (1)     Note.  An extract is considered to be of determined constitution
    when sufficient information as to its chemical structure is available to
    permit classification based upon its chemical structure.


CLS 514/784
TXT Carboxylic acid or salt thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 772 wherein the nonbioactive organic compound
    is a carboxylic acid or salt thereof.


CLS 514/785
TXT Carboxylic acid ester:

    Subject matter under subclass 772 wherein the nonbioactive organic compound
    is an ester of a carboxylic acid.


CLS 514/786
TXT Glyceride:

    Subject matter under subclass 785 wherein the ester is derived from
    glycerol.

    (1)     Note.  The fats and oils and mainly triglycerides of fatty acids,
    e.g., tripalmitin.


CLS 514/787
TXT Beeswax:

    Subject matter under subclass 785 wherein the ester is beeswax.


CLS 514/788
TXT Nitrogen containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 772 wherein the nonbioactive organic compound
    contains nitrogen, e.g., amines or amides.


CLS 514/788.1
TXT SOLID SYNTHETIC ORGANIC POLYMER DERIVED SOLELY FROM HYDROCARBON REACTANTS
    AS DESIGNATED ORGANIC NONACTIVE INGREDIENT CONTAINING:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the composition contains
    a solid synthetic organic polymer derived solely from hydrocarbon
    reactants, e.g., polystyrene, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses
    78.01+ for a pharmaceutical composition which contains a solid synthetic
    organic polymer which functions as a designated organic active ingredient;
    subclass 78.08 for a more thorough discussion on polymers which are proper
    for Classes 424, 514 and 520 Series.


CLS 514/789
TXT MISCELLANEOUS (E.G., HYDROCARBONS, ETC.):

    Subject matter under the class definition not otherwise provided for, e.g.,
    hydrocarbons, etc.

               CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS

    (1)     Note.  The following subclasses are collections of published
    disclosures pertaining to various specified aspects relating to drug,
    bioaffecting and body treating compositions and which aspects do not form
    appropriate bases for subclasses in the foregoing classification (i.e.,
    subclasses superior hetero in the schedule).  These disclosures relate to
    Class 514 subject matter only.

    (2)     Note.  The general outline of the developed cross-reference art
    collections is as follows:

    (A)     Subclasses 800-809 provide for disclosures relating to PEPTIDE AND
    PROTEIN.

    (B)     Subclasses 810-935 provide for disclosures drawn to SPECIFICALLY
    DISCLOSES DISEASE CONDITION AND PHARMACEUTICAL EFFECT.

    (1)     This are collection will take patents dating from January, 1965 to
    date, e.g., Classes 71, 424, 514, 260, and the 530-570 series, etc.

    (2)     References crossed into this are collection should have specific,
    disclosed compositions or examples of use.  A mere statement or mention of
    a utility or composition, unless actually claimed, is generally
    insufficient.

    (C)     Subclasses 936-975 are drawn to a number of various art concepts.

    (1)     Subclasses 936-947 drawn to LIQUID CARRIER, DILUENT OR SOLVENT,
    subclasses 948-956 drawn to SOLID CARRIER OR SOLID DILUENT, subclasses
    957-959 drawn to GASEOUS OR GAS EMITTING CARRIER OR PROPELLANT, subclasses
    960-965 drawn to PILL, LOZENGE, TABLET OR CAPSULE, subclasses 966-969 drawn
    to SUPPOSITORY BOUGIE OR BASE, subclasses 970-975 drawn to SPECIAL
    DESIGNATED INGREDIENT.

    (2)     These art collections provide (a) data from Class 260 (Compounds)
    and Classes 530-570 series and Class 585 dating from January 1, 1965, (b)
    and data from all other classes regardless of date.

    (3)     References crosses into these art collections should have specific,
    disclosed compositions or methods where the inventive concept or point of
    novelty resides in the carrier system, the form of the composition or have
    designated ingredients, e.g., stabilizers, etc.


CLS 514/800
TXT LHRH LIKE:

    Subject matter involving a compositions containing peptides that influence
    the release of lutenizing hormone.


CLS 514/801
TXT COLLAGEN, GELATIN OR DERIVATIVE THEREOF:

    Subject matter wherein the peptide composition contain collagen, gelatin of
    derivative.


CLS 514/802
TXT FIBRINOPEPTIDES, BLOOD-COAGULATION FACTORS OR DERIVATIVE:

    Subject matter wherein the peptide composition is related to
    fibrinopeptides, blood-coagulation factors or derivative.


CLS 514/803
TXT KININ OR DERIVATIVE:

    Subject matter wherein the peptide composition has Kinin-like activities.


CLS 514/804
TXT PHLEOMYCIN SERIES OR DERIVATIVE:

    Subject matter containing a phleomycin peptide or derivative.


CLS 514/805
TXT ADRENOCORTICOTROPIC HORMONE OR DERIVATIVE:

    Subject matter involving peptide composition having adrenocorticotropic
    activity.


CLS 514/806
TXT SOMATOSTATIN OR DERIVATIVE:

    Subject matter involving peptide compositions having somatostatin-like
    activity.


CLS 514/807
TXT OXYTOXIN, VASOPRESSIN OR DERIVATIVE:

    Subject matter involving peptide composition related to oxytoxin,
    vasopressin or a derivative thereof.


CLS 514/808
TXT CALCITONIN OR DERIVATIVES:

    Subject matter involving peptide composition related to calcitonin or a
    derivative thereof.


CLS 514/809
TXT ENKEPHALIN, ENDORPHIN OR DERIVATIVES:

    Subject matter involving neurological peptides related to enkephalin or
    endorphin.


CLS 514/810
TXT ADDICTION:

    Subject matter involving the treatment of the state of being devoted or
    given up to a practice or habit or to something habit forming to the extent
    that cessation causes severe trauma.


CLS 514/811
TXT Alcohol:

    Subject matter under subclass 810 wherein the addictive substance is
    alcohol.


CLS 514/812
TXT Narcotic:

    Subject matter under subclass 810 wherein the addictive substance is a
    narcotic.


CLS 514/813
TXT Tobacco:

    Subject matter under subclass 810 wherein the addictive substance is
    tobacco.


CLS 514/814
TXT ANEMIA:

    Subject matter involving the treatment of anemia.


CLS 514/815
TXT Sickle cell:

    Subject matter under subclass 814 wherein the anemic condition is sickle
    cell anemia.


CLS 514/816
TXT ANESTHETIC, GENERAL:

    Subject matter involving a general anesthetic effect.


CLS 514/817
TXT ANESTHETIC, TOPICAL:

    Subject matter involving a topical anesthetic effect.


CLS 514/818
TXT ANESTHETIC, LOCAL:

    Subject matter involving a local anesthetic effect.


CLS 514/819
TXT ANTACID, ORAL:

    Subject matter involving an antacid effect when administered orally.


CLS 514/820
TXT With antiflatulent:

    Subject matter under subclass 819 wherein an ingredient to yield an
    antiflatulent effect is also present.


CLS 514/821
TXT ANTIARRHYTHMIC:

    Subject matter involving the treatment or prevention of arrhythmia in a
    patient in need thereof.


CLS 514/822
TXT ANTICOAGULATION:

    Subject matter involving an anticoagulation effect.


CLS 514/823
TXT ANTIDOTE:

    Subject matter involving an antidote (prevents or counteracts) for a poison
    or other noxious substance.


CLS 514/824
TXT ARTERIOSCLEROSIS:

    Subject matter involving treatment of arteriosclerosis.


CLS 514/825
TXT ARTHRITIS:

    Subject matter involving treatment of arthritis.


CLS 514/826
TXT ASTHMA:

    Subject matter involving treatment or alleviation of the symptoms of asthma.


CLS 514/827
TXT ASTRINGENT, NONFACIAL:

    Subject matter involving an astringent effect.


CLS 514/828
TXT Topical for the skin:

    Subject matter under subclass 827 wherein the astringent is applied
    topically to the skin.


CLS 514/829
TXT BITE OR STING:

    Subject matter involving the treatment or alleviation of discomfort or
    other symptoms caused by a bite or sting.


CLS 514/830
TXT Insect:

    Subject matter under subclass 829 wherein the bite or sting is from an
    insect.


CLS 514/831
TXT Animal (nonpoisonous):

    Subject matter under subclass 829 wherein the bite or sting is from a
    nonpoisonous animal.


CLS 514/832
TXT BLOOD SUBSTITUTE:

    Subject matter involving a substance which is a substitute for blood or
    blood component.


CLS 514/833
TXT BLOOD PLASMA EXTENDER:

    Subject matter involving extending or increasing the amount of blood plasma
    in a patient in need thereof.


CLS 514/834
TXT COAGULANT:

    Subject matter involving the enhancing of coagulation.


CLS 514/835
TXT CARIES:

    Subject matter involving treatment or prevention of caries.


CLS 514/836
TXT CHELATE:

    Subject matter involving a material which acts as a chelating agent.


CLS 514/837
TXT CHOLERA:

    Subject matter involving the treatment or prevention of cholera.


CLS 514/838
TXT CIRRHOSIS:

    Subject matter involving the treatment or alleviation of the symptoms of
    cirrhosis of the liver.


CLS 514/839
TXT CONTACT LENS TREATMENT:

    Subject matter involving treatment of contact lens such as sterilization or
    cleaning.


CLS 514/840
TXT CHEMICAL STERILIZING:

    Subject matter under subclass 839 wherein a chemical agent is used for
    sterilizing the contact lens.


CLS 514/841
TXT CONTRACEPTIVE:

    Subject matter involving prevention of conception.


CLS 514/842
TXT Nonmammal:

    Subject matter under subclass 841 wherein conception is prevented in
    nonmammals, e.g., insects, etc.


CLS 514/843
TXT Female (mammal):

    Subject matter under subclass 841 wherein conception is prevented in a
    female mammal.


CLS 514/844
TXT COSMETIC, FACIAL:

    Subject matter involving facial cosmetics.


CLS 514/845
TXT Liquid make-up:

    Subject matter under subclass 844 wherein the cosmetic is a liquid make-up.


CLS 514/846
TXT Cleansing cream or lotion:

    Subject matter under subclass 844 wherein the cosmetic is a cleansing cream
    or lotion.


CLS 514/847
TXT Facial moisturizer:

    Subject matter under subclass 844 wherein the cosmetic is a facial
    moisturizer.


CLS 514/848
TXT Facial astringent:

    Subject matter under subclass 844 wherein the cosmetic has an astringent
    effect when applied to the face.


CLS 514/849
TXT COUGH AND COLD PREPARATION:

    Subject matter involving relief of the symptoms of a cough or a cold.


CLS 514/850
TXT Antitussive:

    Subject matter under subclass 849 involving suppression of coughing.


CLS 514/851
TXT CYSTIC FIBROSIS:

    Subject matter involving the treatment or prevention of cystic fibrosis.


CLS 514/852
TXT DANDRUFF:

    Subject matter involving the treatment or prevention of dandruff.


CLS 514/853
TXT DECONGESTANT:

    Subject matter involving a decongestant effect.


CLS 514/854
TXT Vasoconstrictor:

    Subject matter under subclass 853 wherein the decongestant is a
    vasoconstrictor.


CLS 514/855
TXT Expectorant:

    Subject matter under subclass 853 wherein the decongestant is an
    expectorant.

            DERMATITIS:

    Subject matter involving the treatment of the skin and problems related
    thereto.


CLS 514/858
TXT Athlete's foot:

    Subject matter involving the treatment or prevention of athlete's foot
    fungus.


CLS 514/859
TXT Acne:

    Subject matter involving the treatment or prevention of acne.


CLS 514/860
TXT Cellulitis:

    Subject matter involving the treatment of a cellulitis condition.


CLS 514/861
TXT Eczema:

    Subject matter involving the treatment of eczema.


CLS 514/862
TXT Poison (ivy, oak, sumac):

    Subject matter involving the treatment or prevention of poison ivy, poison
    oak, or poison sumac.


CLS 514/863
TXT Psoriasis:

    Subject matter involving the treatment or prevention of psoriasis.


CLS 514/864
TXT Seborrhea:

    Subject matter involving the treatment or prevention of seborrhea.


CLS 514/865
TXT Diaper rash:

    Subject matter involving the treatment or prevention of diaper rash.


CLS 514/866
TXT DIABETES:

    Subject matter involving the treatment or prevention of diabetes.


CLS 514/867
TXT DIARRHEA:

    Subject matter involving the treatment or alleviation of the symptoms of
    diarrhea in animals.


CLS 514/868
TXT DISTEMPER:

    Subject matter involving the treatment or prevention of distemper.


CLS 514/869
TXT DIURETIC:

    Subject matter involving substances which yield a diuretic effect.


CLS 514/870
TXT EDEMA:

    Subject matter involving the treatment or prevention of edema.


CLS 514/871
TXT Topical:

    Subject matter under subclass 870 wherein the treatment of prevention calls
    for topical application.


CLS 514/872
TXT EMESIS (MOTION SICKNESS-NAUSEA):

    Subject matter involving the treatment or prevention of emesis.


CLS 514/873
TXT EMOLLIENT:

    Subject matter involving a specified emollient.


CLS 514/874
TXT ESTROGENIC AGENT (NONCONTRACEPTIVE):

    Subject matter involving a chemical agent used to obtain an estrogenic
    effect when administered to a patient.


CLS 514/875
TXT FLEA CONTROL:

    Subject matter involving the control or prevention of fleas.


CLS 514/876
TXT Collar type:

    Subject matter under subclass 875 wherein the control and prevention is
    obtained from a collar type structure.


CLS 514/877
TXT GALLSTONE:

    Subject matter involving the treatment or prevention of gallstone.


CLS 514/878
TXT GERIATRICS:

    Subject matter involving the treatment or prevention of problems associated
    with aging.


CLS 514/879
TXT Senility:

    Subject matter under subclass 878 wherein the problem is senility.


CLS 514/880
TXT HAIR TREATMENT (THERAPEUTIC-SCALP):

    Subject matter involving application to the head or scalp of a therapeutic
    composition.


CLS 514/881
TXT Shampoo:

    Subject matter under subclass 880 wherein the composition is applied in the
    form of a shampoo.


CLS 514/882
TXT HEMORRHOID PREPARATION:

    Subject matter involving the treatment or alleviation of symptoms of
    hemorrhoids.


CLS 514/883
TXT HODGKIN'S DISEASE:

    Subject matter involving the treatment or prevention of Hodgkin's disease.


CLS 514/884
TXT HYPOGLYCEMIA:

    Subject matter involving the treatment or prevention of hypoglycemia.


CLS 514/885
TXT IMMUNE RESPONSE AFFECTING DRUG:

    Subject matter involving the enhancing or reducing of an immune response in
    a patient.


CLS 514/886
TXT INFLAMMATION, SKIN:

    Subject matter involving the treatment of skin inflammation.


CLS 514/887
TXT Topical treatment:

    Subject matter under subclass 886 wherein application is topically to the
    skin.


CLS 514/888
TXT INFLUENZA:

    Subject matter involving the treatment or prevention of influenza.


CLS 514/889
TXT INTERFERON INDUCER:

    Subject matter involving the inducement of the production of interferon.


CLS 514/890
TXT IRRITANT (E.G., TEAR GAS, ETC.):

    Subject matter involving production of an irritating effect.


CLS 514/891
TXT KIDNEY STONE:

    Subject matter involving the treatment or prevention of kidney stone.


CLS 514/892
TXT LAXATIVE:

    Subject matter involving the inducement of a laxative effect in a subject
    needing said treatment.


CLS 514/893
TXT LIVER DISORDER:

    Subject matter involving the treatment of liver disorder (excludes
    cirrhosis of the liver).


CLS 514/894
TXT Hepatitis:

    Subject matter under subclass 893 wherein the disorder is hepatitis.


CLS 514/895
TXT MALARIA:

    Subject matter involving the treatment or prevention of malaria.


CLS 514/896
TXT MEASLES:

    Subject matter involving the treatment or prevention of measles.


CLS 514/897
TXT Rubella:

    Subject matter under subclass 896 wherein the type of measles to be treated
    is rubella.


CLS 514/898
TXT MENINGITIS:

    Subject matter involving the treatment or prevention of meningitis.


CLS 514/899
TXT MENSTRUAL DISORDER:

    Subject matter involving the treatment, prevention or alleviation of
    symptoms of a menstrual disorder.

            MOUTH TREATMENT:

    Subject matter involving the treatment of the mouth.


CLS 514/900
TXT Periodontitis:

    Subject matter under mouth treatment involving the treatment or prevention
    of periodontitis.


CLS 514/901
TXT Mouthwash:

    Subject matter under mouth treatment involving the use of a mouthwash.


CLS 514/902
TXT Gingival:

    Subject matter under mouth treatment involving the treatment or prevention
    of disorders of the gingiva.


CLS 514/903
TXT MULTIPLE SCLEROSIS:

    Subject matter involving the treatment, prevention or alleviation of
    symptoms of multiple sclerosis.


CLS 514/904
TXT MULTIPLE VITAMINS:

    Subject matter involving a composition which contains two or more vitamins.


CLS 514/905
TXT With mineral:

    Subject matter under subclass 904 wherein the multiple vitamin composition
    also contains one or more minerals.


CLS 514/906
TXT MUSCLE RELAXANT:

    Subject matter involving a muscle relaxing effect.


CLS 514/907
TXT MUSCULAR DYSTROPHY:

    Subject matter involving the treatment, prevention or alleviation of
    symptoms of muscular dystrophy.


CLS 514/908
TXT LEUKEMIA:

    Subject matter involving the treatment or prevention of leukemia.


CLS 514/909
TXT OBESITY:

    Subject matter involving the treatment of obesity.


CLS 514/910
TXT Anorectic:

    Subject matter under subclass 909 wherein the treatment is a chemical means
    for reduction or suppression of appetite.


CLS 514/911
TXT Bulking agent:

    Subject matter under subclass 909 wherein a bulking agent is used to reduce
    food intake.


CLS 514/912
TXT OPHTHALMIC:

    Subject matter involving the treatment of an ophthalmic disorder.


CLS 514/913
TXT Glaucoma:

    Subject matter under subclass 912 wherein the ophthalmic disorder is
    glaucoma.


CLS 514/914
TXT Inflammation:

    Subject matter under subclass 912 wherein the ophthalmic disorder is
    inflammation.


CLS 514/915
TXT Wetting agent:

    Subject matter under subclass 912 wherein a composition acts as a wetting
    agent or an artificial tear.


CLS 514/916
TXT PYRETIC:

    Subject matter involving alleviating fever.


CLS 514/917
TXT RADIOACTIVE, ANTI-:

    Subject matter involving the treatment or counter-acting of the effect of
    exposure to a radioactive substance or source.


CLS 514/918
TXT REPELLENT:

    Subject matter involving the repelling of a living organism from any site
    or locus.


CLS 514/919
TXT Insect:

    Subject matter under subclass 918 wherein the organism beign repelled is an
    insect.


CLS 514/920
TXT Mammal:

    Subject matter under subclass 918 wherein the organism being repelled is a
    mammal.


CLS 514/921
TXT SHOCK:

    Subject matter involving the treatment of shock in a patient.


CLS 514/922
TXT SIDE EFFECT REDUCTION BY INCORPORATION OF A SECOND DESIGNATED INGREDIENT:

    Subject matter involving the reducing or eliminating of an undesirable side
    effect of a given drug by concurrent administration of a second designated
    compound.


CLS 514/923
TXT SLEEP AID (INSOMNIA):

    Subject matter involving inducing sleep.


CLS 514/924
TXT TUBERCULOSIS:

    Subject matter involving the treatment or prevention of tuberculosis.


CLS 514/925
TXT ULCER TREATMENT:

    Subject matter involving the treatment, alleviation of symptoms or
    prevention of an ulcer.


CLS 514/926
TXT Duodenal:

    Subject matter under subclass 925 wherein the ulcer is in the duodenal area
    of the digestive tract.


CLS 514/927
TXT Peptic:

    Subject matter under subclass 925 wherein the ulcer is a peptic ulcer.


CLS 514/928
TXT Topical:

    Subject matter under subclass 925 involving topical administration.


CLS 514/929
TXT VASODILATOR:

    Subject matter involving a dilation of the blood vessels on administration.


CLS 514/930
TXT VASOCONSTRICTOR (NONDECONGESTANT):

    Subject matter involving a constriction of the blood vessels.


CLS 514/931
TXT VENEREAL DISEASE:

    Subject matter involving treatment, alleviation of symptoms or prevention
    of a venereal disease.


CLS 514/932
TXT Gonorrhea:

    Subject matter under subclass 931 wherein the venereal disease is gonorrhea.


CLS 514/933
TXT Syphilis:

    Subject matter under subclass 931 wherein the venereal disease is syphilis.


CLS 514/934
TXT Virus:

    Subject matter under subclass 931 wherein the venereal disease is viral.


CLS 514/935
TXT UTERINE MOTILITY:

    Subject matter involving the increasing of fertility by increasing uterine
    motility.

            LIQUID CARRIER, DILUENT OR SOLVENT

    Specifically disclosed composition or method where the inventive concept or
    point of novelty resides in the carrier system which is in liquid form.
    This area of the art collection also includes those disclosures wherein
    specified ingredients are disclosed for the purpose of describing the
    carrier system used in combination with an active ingredient.


CLS 514/936
TXT DMSO CONTAINING:

    Subject matter involving using a composition which contains dimethyl
    sulfoxide as a designated nonactive ingredient.


CLS 514/937
TXT DISPERSION OR EMULSION:

    Subject matter involving a composition in the form of a dispersion or
    emulsion.


CLS 514/938
TXT Oil-water type:

    Subject matter under subclass 937 wherein the dispersion or emulsion
    contains both an oil and water.  This subclass covers both oil-in-water and
    water-in-oil type emulsions.


CLS 514/939
TXT Mineral oil-water type:

    Subject matter under subclass 938 wherein the oil is mineral oil.


CLS 514/940
TXT Quick break type:

    Subject matter under subclass 939 wherein the mineral oil emulsion is of
    the quick breaking type.


CLS 514/941
TXT Polyoxyalkylated compound containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 939 wherein the emulsion contains a
    polyoxyalkylated compound as the emulsifying agent.


CLS 514/942
TXT Organic sulfonate, sulfate or sulfite containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 939 wherein the emulsion contains an organic
    sulfonate, sulfate or sulfite compound as the emulsifying agent.


CLS 514/943
TXT Higher fatty acid or derivative containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 939 wherein the emulsion contains a higher
    fatty acid or a derivative thereof as the emulsifying agent.


CLS 514/944
TXT GEL:

    Subject matter involving a gel form and containing specified ingredients to
    give a gel.


CLS 514/945
TXT FOAM:

    Subject matter involving a foam and containing specified ingredients to
    form said foam.


CLS 514/946
TXT PENETRANT OR ABSORBENT (ENHANCES PENETRATION INTO SUBJECT TREATED):

    Subject matter involving the increasing or enhancing of the rate or amount
    of active ingredient absorbed into the treated subject.  This includes
    topical application as well as absorption through the digestive tract.


CLS 514/947
TXT Topical application:

    Subject matter under subclass 946 wherein application is to the skin and
    absorption is through the skin.

            SOLID CARRIER OR SOLID DILUENT

    Specifically disclosed composition or method where the inventive concept or
    point of novelty resides in the carrier system which is in the form of a
    solid.  This area of the art collection also includes those disclosures
    wherein specified ingredients are disclosed for the purpose of describing
    the carrier system used in combination with an active ingredient.


CLS 514/948
TXT SOLID CANDY TYPE:

    Subject matter involving an active ingredient in combination with a candy
    type base or carrier system.


CLS 514/949
TXT NATURALLY DERIVED CLAY (E.G., BENTONITE, ETC.):

    Subject matter involving the use of a natural clay as a solid carrier
    component.


CLS 514/950
TXT MACROMOLECULAR (OTHER THAN SYNTHETIC RESINS):

    Subject matter involving a solid carrier component which is a high
    molecular weight polymeric type material.


CLS 514/951
TXT POWDERS, GRANULES OR PARTICLES OF SPECIFIED MESH OR PARTICLE SIZE:

    Subject matter involving a composition in which an active ingredient is in
    combination with a solid carrier in the form of a powder, granule or
    particle of specified particle size or shape.


CLS 514/952
TXT Wettable:

    Subject matter under subclass 951 wherein the particles, powder or granules
    are intended to be readily mixed with water or other solvent.


CLS 514/953
TXT SHAPED FORMS ADAPTED FOR NONINGESTIBLE USE OTHER THAN SUPPOSITORY TYPE
    (E.G., FILMS, INSERTS, ETC.):

    Subject matter involving an active ingredient in combination with a solid
    carrier having a designated shape or form.


CLS 514/954
TXT Ocular:

    Subject matter under subclass 953 wherein the composition is for
    application to the eye.


CLS 514/955
TXT Biodegradable type:

    Subject matter under subclass 954 wherein the composition is biodegradable
    within the eye.


CLS 514/956
TXT Aural or otic (i.e., ear):

    Subject matter under subclass 953 wherein the composition is for
    application to the ear.

            GASEOUS OR GAS EMITTING CARRIER OR PROPELLANT

    Specifically disclosed composition or method where the inventive concept or
    point of novelty resides in the carrier system which is either gaseous or
    gas emitting.

    This area of the art collection also includes those disclosures wherein
    specified ingredients are disclosed for the purpose of describing the
    carrier system.


CLS 514/957
TXT VAPOR EMITTING COMPOSITION:

    Subject matter involving application or distribution of an active
    ingredient using a vapor or gas.


CLS 514/958
TXT FOR SMOKING OR INHALING:

    Subject matter involving a combination of an active ingredient with a
    carrier system which allows administration by smoking or inhaling.


CLS 514/959
TXT BREATHING GASES:

    Subject matter involving inhalation of a breathing gas such as oxygen
    containing gas and supplements thereto.

            PILL, LOZENGE, TABLET OR CAPSULE

    Specifically disclosed composition or method where the inventive concept or
    point of novelty resides in the carrier system which takes the form of a
    pill, lozenge, tablet or capsule.  This area of the art collection also
    includes those disclosures wherein specified ingredients are dissolved for
    the purpose of describing this form of carrier system used in combination
    with an active ingredient.


CLS 514/960
TXT SIGNIFICANT TABLET FORMULATION (E.G., DESIGNATED EXCIPIENT, DISINTEGRANT,
    GLYDENT OR LUBRICANT, ETC.):

    Subject matter involving designated nonactive ingredient which involves in
    a tableting process.


CLS 514/961
TXT Binder therefor:

    Subject matter under subclass 960 wherein the designated ingredient is a
    binder for the tableting process.


CLS 514/962
TXT CAPSULE (E.G., GELATIN, ETC.):

    Subject matter involving a capsuling material or composition.


CLS 514/963
TXT Microcapsule-sustained of differential release:

    Subject matter under subclass 962 wherein the capsule is microcapsule and
    which may allow for sustained or differential release of the active
    ingredient contained therein.


CLS 514/964
TXT SUSTAINED OR DIFFERENTIAL RELEASE TYPE:

    Subject matter involving a combination of an active ingredient and a
    carrier system which permits or results in a sustained or diffeential
    release of said active ingredient.


CLS 514/965
TXT Discrete particles in supporting matrix:

    Subject matter under subclass 964 wherein the combination consists of
    particles which are supported or held in a matrix or material for this
    purpose.

            SUPPOSITORY BOUGIE BASE

    Specifically disclosed composition or method of preparation wherein the
    composition is in the form of a suppository, bougy or a base therefor.  The
    group takes only those references wherein the inventive concept or point of
    novelty resides in the make-up of the carrier system rather than the active
    ingredient.


CLS 514/966
TXT RECTAL:

    Subject matter involving a form for rectal administration.


CLS 514/967
TXT VAGINAL:

    Subject matter involving a form for vaginal application or administration.


CLS 514/968
TXT URETHRAL:

    Subject matter involving a form for urethral application or administration.


CLS 514/969
TXT OINTMENT OR SALVE BASE:

    Subject matter involving a base which is to be combined with an active
    ingredient to give an ointment or salve base.

            SPECIAL DESIGNATED INGREDIENT

    Specifically disclosed or claimed composition or preparation which
    contains, in addition to the active ingredient, at least one special
    designated ingredient which has a purpose or is present other than as a
    carrier or excipient.


CLS 514/970
TXT CONTAINING DESIGNATED INGREDIENT TO STABILIZE AN ACTIVE INGREDIENT:

    Subject matter involving a designated ingredient which will act to
    stabilize an active ingredient.


CLS 514/971
TXT Crystallization point depressant or cold stabilizer containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 970 wherein said designated ingredient acts
    to stabilize the active ingredient from cold or to prevent crystallization
    of said active ingredient.


CLS 514/972
TXT Ultraviolet light stabilizer containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 970 wherein said designated ingredient acts
    to stabilize the active ingredient from the effect of ultraviolet light.


CLS 514/973
TXT Sulfur compound additive as stabilizer (e.g., sulfites, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 970 wherein the designated ingredient is a
    sulfur containing compound.


CLS 514/974
TXT CONTAINING DESIGNATED INGREDIENT TO REDUCE NOXIOUS EFFECTS OF ACTIVE
    INGREDIENT (E.G., TASTE, MASKING, ODOR REDUCING, ETC.):

    Subject matter involving a designated ingredient which is intended to
    reduce the noxious effects of the active ingredient present.


CLS 514/975
TXT CHARACTERIZED BY TYHE DESIGNATED SURFACTANT USED:

    Subject matter involving a designated ingredient which is to act as a
    surfactant.


CLS 518/
TTL CHEMISTRY:    FISCHER-TROPSCH  PROCESSES; OR PURIFICATION OR  RECOVERY OF
    PRODUCTS  THEREOF

CLS 518/
TXT

    I.      SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS CLASS

    This class provides for processes which include (a) the reaction of
    hydrogen with carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide or mixtures of these carbon
    oxides (Fischer-Tropsch synthesis) to yield one or more carbon compounds,
    e.g., hydrocarbons, alcohols, esters, acids, ketones, aldehydes, etc., or
    (b) the purification, separation, conversion or treatment of one or more of
    the products resulting from the Fischer-Tropsch synthesis, such as by
    saponification, oxidation, adsorption, solvent extraction, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Class 518 provides for Fischer-Tropsch synthesis in
    combination with separation and also for mere separation of the results of
    Fischer-Tropsch synthesis, except as shown below in the "Relationship with
    Other Classes".

    (2)     Note.  This Class 518 provides for a process which includes
    Fischer-Tropsch synthesis as well as making one or more reactants
    preliminary thereto.  The reactants (hydrogen, carbon monoxide or carbon
    dioxide) may be made separately or in admixture.

    (3)     Note.  Processes that include other reactants in addition to
    hydrogen, carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide or water will be classified with
    the compound produced.

    (4)     Note.  For the purpose of purification or recovery of a
    Fischer-Tropsch process product, Class 518 provides for any physical
    process required, but only two chemical processes are provided for, i.e.,
    hydrogenation with gaseous hydrogen and formation of oximes of the oxygen
    containing products.



    II.     RELATIONSHIPS WITH OTHER CLASSES

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions: Class 44 controls over Class 518 for
    Fischer-Tropsch synthesis if the product is set forth to be useful as a
    liquid or solid fuel and there is an additive present as required by Class
    44.

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating: Class 48 is superior to Class 518
    for Fischer-Tropsch synthesis when the result is set forth as being for
    heating or illumination.

    62,     Refrigeration: Class 518 controls classification over Class 62 for
    a process which includes both Fischer-Tropsch synthesis and refrigeration.
    However, merely treating the product of such synthesis by a Class 62
    process is in Class 62.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory: Class 518 controls
    classification over Class 203 for processes which include both
    Fischer-Tropsch synthesis and distillation.  Separation of the results of
    such synthesis by distillation is in Class 203 when the Fischer-Tropsch
    synthesis is not claimed.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy: Class 204 controls
    classification for the combination of Fischer-Tropsch synthesis followed by
    a Class 204 step and also for treating the product of such synthesis when
    the Fischer-Tropsch synthesis is not claimed; however, Class 204 steps
    followed by Fischer-Tropsch synthesis is in Class 518.

    252,    Compositions:  Class 252, subclass 373, provides for processes of
    making compositions of hydrogen and carbon monoxide or carbon dioxide.
    These are called synthesis gases and may be used for Fischer-Tropsch
    synthesis.  The combination of making these synthesis gases and using for
    Fischer-Tropsch synthesis is classified in Class 518.

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor: Product or Process of
    Making, for a catalytic composition, per se, which may be used in a process
    of this class and especially subclasses 20+ for a process of regenerating
    or rehabilitating a catalyst.

    520     through 528, 530, 532-570 and 585, Synthetic Resins and Natural
    Rubbers -- Part of the Class 520 Series; Chemistry: Natural Resins or
    Derivatives; Peptides or Proteins; Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof;
    Organic Compounds -- Part of the Class 532-570 Series; and Chemistry,
    Hydrocarbons.


            Class 518 is superior to these classes when compounds normally
    classified in them are formed by a Fischer-Tropsch reaction or are
    separated from the reaction mixture by any physical process or by one of
    the two chemical processes stated in (4) Note.  However, claims which
    include other chemical processes to separate or form compounds from the
    Fischer-Tropsch reaction mixture are classified with the compound formed.
    Patents having both types of claims are classified as originals in Class
    518 and cross-referenced to the appropriate compound class or classes.


CLS 518/700
TXT LIQUID PHASE FISCHER-TROPSCH REACTION:

    Processes under the class definition wherein the Fischer-Tropschreaction is
    carried out in the liquidstate.


CLS 518/701
TXT Rhodium containing catalyst utilized:

    Processes under subclass 700 wherein a catalyst containing rhodium is
    utilized for the Fischer-Tropsch reaction.


CLS 518/702
TXT WITH PRELIMINARY REACTION TO FORM HYDROGEN OR A CARBON OXIDE:

    Processes under the class definition which include a reaction to form
    hydrogen or a carbon oxide prior to the Fischer-Tropsch reaction.


CLS 518/703
TXT Gaseous oxygen utilized in the preliminary reaction:

    Processes under subclass 702 wherein gaseous oxygen is utilized in the
    preliminary reaction.


CLS 518/704
TXT Water utilized in the preliminary reaction: Processes under subclass 702
    wherein water is utilized in the preliminary reaction.


CLS 518/705
TXT TREATMENT OF FEED OR RECYCLE STREAM:

    Processes under the class definition wherein at least one reactant is
    treated prior to the Fischer-Tropsch reaction, such as removing sulfur
    therefrom, or processes wherein the recycle stream is treated prior to
    returning to the reaction zone.


CLS 518/706
TXT PLURAL ZONES EACH HAVING A FISCHER-TROPSCH REACTION:

    Processes under the class definition wherein Fischer-Tropsch reactions take
    place in two or more reaction zones.


CLS 518/707
TXT Diverse catalysts utilized in at least two zones:

    Processes under subclass 706 wherein different catalysts are utilized in at
    least two of the zones.


CLS 518/708
TXT Water utilized:

    Processes under subclass 706 wherein water is utilized in at least one of
    the zones.


CLS 518/709
TXT INCLUDING REGENERATION OF CATALYST:

    Processes under the class definition wherein a catalyst, after utilization,
    is recycled for reuse.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, especially subclasses 20+ for a process, per se, of regenerating
    a catalyst.


CLS 518/710
TXT Solvent utilized:

    Processes under subclass 709 wherein a solvent is utilized in the
    regeneration of a catalyst.


CLS 518/711
TXT WATER UTILIZED DURING THE FISCHER-TROPSCH STEP OF THE PROCESS:

    Processes under the class definition wherein water is utilized in the
    Fischer-Tropsch step of the process.

    (1)     Note.   The water may or may not react.


CLS 518/712
TXT TEMPERATURE CONTROL OR REGULATION OF THE FISCHER-TROPSCH REACTION:

    Processes under the class definition wherein some means or method is
    employed to control or regulate the reaction temperature.


CLS 518/713
TXT GROUP IB METAL CONTAINING CATALYST UTILIZED FOR THE FISCHER-TROPSCH
    REACTION (i.e., Cu, Ag, or Au):

    Processes under the class definition wherein a catalyst containing copper,
    silver, or gold is utilized for the Fischer-Tropsch reaction.


CLS 518/714
TXT GROUP VIB METAL CONTAINING CATALYST UTILIZED FOR THE FISCHER-TROPSCH
    REACTION (i.e., Cr, Mo, or W):

    Processes under the class definition wherein a catalyst containing
    chromium, molybdenum, or tungsten is utilized for the Fischer-Tropsch
    reaction.


CLS 518/715
TXT GROUP VIII METAL CONTAINING CATALYST UTILIZED FOR THE FISCHER-TROPSCH
    REACTION (i.e., Fe, Co, Ni, Ru, Rh, Pd, Os, Ir, or Pt):

    Processes under the class definition wherein a catalyst containing iron,
    cobalt, nickel, ruthenium, rhodium, palladium, osmium, iridium, or platinum
    is utilized for the Fischer-Tropsch reaction.


CLS 518/716
TXT Rhodium containing catalyst:

    Processes under subclass 715 wherein the catalyst contains rhodium.


CLS 518/717
TXT Group IA or IIA light metal containing material utilized during the
    fischer-tropsch step of the process (i.e., Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs, Be, Mg, Ca,
    Sr, or Ba):

    Processes under subclass 715 wherein a material containing lithium, sodium,
    potassium, rubidium, cesium, beryllium, magnesium, calcium, strontium, or
    barium is utilized in any way during the Fischer-Tropsch reaction.


CLS 518/718
TXT In the form of a salt:

    Processes under subclass 717 wherien a salt of a Group IA or IIA light
    metal is utilized.


CLS 518/719
TXT Iron containing catalyst:

    Processes under subclass 715 wherein a catalyst containing iron is utilized.


CLS 518/720
TXT Pretreatment of the catalyst:

    Processes under subclass 719 wherein the iron-containing catalyst is
    treated in some manner prior to use.


CLS 518/721
TXT The catalyst contains a metal in addition to the iron, or another material
    utilized contains a metal other than iron (e.g., as a promoter, retarder,
    etc.):

    Processes under subclass 719 wherein a metal, in addition to the iron, is
    utilized in any form, e.g., as part of the catalyst, in a promoter or
    retarder, etc.


CLS 518/722
TXT ADSORPTION WITH A SOLID MATERIAL:

    Processes under the class definition which include adsorption utilizing a
    solid material.


CLS 518/723
TXT SALT CONTAINING EXTRACTANT UTILIZED:

    Processes under the class definition which include utilizing a
    salt-containing material as an extractant.


CLS 518/724
TXT SOLVENT EXTRACTION UTILIZED:

    Processes under the class definition which include utilizing a solvent as
    an extractant.


CLS 518/725
TXT Alcohol containing extractant utilized:

    Processes under subclass 724 wherein the solvent utilized contains hydroxy
    groups.


CLS 518/726
TXT Hydrogenation with gaseous hydrogen to purify or recover:

    Processes under the class definition which include hydrogenation utilizing
    gaseous hydrogen to purify or recover the product(s) of the Fischer-Tropsch
    reaction.


CLS 518/727
TXT FORMING SALTS OR OXIMES OF OXYGEN CONTAINING COMPOUNDS TO PURIFY OR RECOVER:

    Processes under the class definition which include forming salts or oximes
    of the oxygen-containing compounds produced to purify or recover the
    products of the Fischer-Tropsch reaction.


CLS 518/728
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Processes under the class definition not provided for in any other subclass
    to purify or recover.


CLS 520/
TTL SYNTHETIC RESINS OR NATURAL RUBBERS -- PART OF THE CLASS 520 SERIES

CLS 520/1
TXT SYNTHETIC RESINS OR NATURAL RUBBERS:

    Subject matter involving synthetic resins, or natural rubbers preparation,
    or treatment thereof; compositions containing synthetic resins or natural
    rubbers preparation or treatment thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Class 520, Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers -- Part of
    the Class 520 Series, subclass 1, is to be considered as an integral part
    of Class 260, while retaining all pertinent definitions and class lines of
    Class 260.

    (2)     Note.  Class 520, Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers -- Part of
    the Class 520 Series, subclass 1, is the generic subclass for synthetic
    resins or natural rubbers. All the other classes of the 520 series, i.e.,
    521,522, 523, 524, 525, 526, 527, and 528 are indented thereunder.

            Retrieval of information in the Class 520 series is identical to
    retieval in any ordinary class that has subclasses rather than classes
    indented thereunder.  Each of the classes indented, e.g., 521, 523, 527,
    etc., merely recites an art area that for convenience of numbering has been
    categorized as a class rather than a conventional subclass.

    (3)     Note.  In this class and in the indented subclasses are placed all
    patents which are directed to the preparation and treatment of the
    so-called synthetic resins, or natural rubbers e.g. complex organic
    compounds produced from ingredients which are generally nonresinous and
    which final products simulate the natural resins.

    (4)     Note.  Some of the general types of subject matter within this
    class:

    a.      Synthetic resins, per se.

    b.      Processes of preparing a synthetic resin involving a chemical
    reaction including those chemical reactions which utilize energy.

    c.      Reactable compositions which form a product as in (a) above upon
    the addition of a catalyst or promoter, or which merely require the
    presence of heat and/or pressure and wherein all of the necessary reactants
    to form the final desired product are present, or processes of preparing.

    d.      Processes of purifying a synthetic resin or composition containing
    a synthetic resin by a chemical or physical process.

    e.      Process of reclaiming or recovering a synthetic resin.

    f.      Processes of treating a synthetic resin or specified intermediate
    condensation product (SICP, see the GLOSSARY) with a reactant, or product
    thereof.

    g.      Blends of synthetic resins, processes of preparing or treating.

    h.      Chemically reacted synthetic resins or processes of preparing.

    i.      Potentially reactable compositions which contain a synthetic resin
    or SICP and products of such a reaction, or processes of preparing.

    j.      Room vulcanizable potentially reactive compositions which merely
    require moisture and which are usually activated by heat and/or pressure to
    form a product proper herein, or processes of preparing.

    k.      Compositions of a nonreactant material and a solid polymer or SICP,
    processes of preparing or treating.

    l.      Processes of using a synthetic resin or composition containing a
    synthetic resin.

    m.      Compositions containing a structurally defined material, e.g.,
    coated web, or fiber having dimension, etc., which is dispersed in a matrix
    which is not identified by overall dimension or some structure (see Class
    428), or processes of preparing.

    n.      Single-layered products containing a resin or resin composition
    reciting no structure or dimension, or a fiber, filament, etc., which is no
    more than the material from which it is made.

    o.      Particles or a powder, per se, of a resin or resin composition
    which recites no dimensions.

    p.      Reactable compositions which form a product proper for this class
    and contain a photoinitiator or photosensitizer which are activated by wave
    energy or processes of preparing.



    It must be remebered that the list above is merely exemplary of the types
    of subject matter that may be found in this class. The list is by no means
    exhaustive.  All subject matter relating to synthetic resins is not to be
    found in this class, since other classes provide for claims involving
    synthetic resins, e.g., utility classes, separation classes, etc.  It
    should be also remembered that Class 520 maintains all the class lines and
    definitions of Class 260; see the notes to various classes in the main
    definition of Class 260.

    (5)     Note.  A general outline of the Class 520 series is as follows:



            Class 520, generic subclass 1, Class 521 provides for ion-exchange
    polymers, processes of reclaiming a synthetic resin, and for cellular
    synthetic resins.



            Class 522 provides for processes of preparing or treating a solid
    polymer utilizing wave energy and for compositions which contain a
    photosensitizer and which when reacted form a product proper for Class 520.



            Classes 523 and 524 provide for synthetic resins or specified
    intermediate condensation products admixed with a nonreactant material.



            Class 525 provides for certain combinations of polyesters and
    certain reactable materials, for blends of synthetic resins, and for
    chemical modified synthetic resins.



            Class 526 provides for certain manipulative processes which are
    generic to both ethylenic polymers and to condensation polymers, and also
    provides for polymers derived from ethylenic monomers only.



            Class 527 provides for polymers derived from at least one saturated
    material and certain special reactants, e.g., carbohydrates, proteins,
    natural resins, lignin, tannin, bituminous material, etc.



            Class 528 provides for polymers derived from at least one
    nonethylenic reactant, and also for processes of treating a polymer either
    derived from ethylenic or nonethylenic reactants wherein chemical bonds in
    the polymer are left unaffected.



            This list above is merely to be taken as a shorthand method in
    approaching the Class 520 series.  The areas above provide for processes of
    preparing the indicated products.  Once a class in the series is indicated
    as having subject matter in which one may be interested, it is best to
    consult the class scope to each of the areas or to look at the single
    indented subclasses under Class 520, subclass 1.



    GLOSSARY

    (6)     Note.  The following terms have been used in a number of subclasses
    throughout the Class 520 series.  For convenience, these often-used terms
    have been arranged into a Glossary.  When any of these terms is used in
    particular classes or subclasses in Class 520, their meaning is to be
    consistent with the means in this Glossary.



    ACYCLIC

    Denotes a compound devoid of any ring-containing moiety.

    ALCOHOL

    Denotes an organic compound having the general structure C-OH wherein the
    carbon atom bound to the oxygen atom of the hydroxyl group cannot be double
    bonded to oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium, or triple bonded to
    nitrogen.  The terms as used herein include phenols.

    ALDEHYDE

    Denotes an organic compound having the general structure C-n -H or H- n  -H
    (n is 1 or more) and wherein the carbon atom bonded to the n group is not
    double bonded to oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium, or triple bonded
    to nitrogen.

    ALDEHYDE DERIVATIVE

    Denotes:

    A.      Compounds having a X-CH2-OH group wherein X is other than carbon or
    hydrogen (e.g., paraformaldehyde, methyol derivatives of urea, etc.).

    B.      Heterocyclic compounds having only carbon, H, and oxygen as ring
    members in an alternating manner and in equal amount, i.e., O-    , e.g.,
    trioxane, etc.

    C.      Hexamethylene tetramine or urotropine or derivatives thereof, e.g.,

            A derivative for purposes of this subclass requires the basic ring
    structure of hexamethyl-enetetramine but wherein the hydrogen atoms may
    have been replaced by other atoms.

    D.      Compounds having a -CH2OH bonded to atoms other than C, H, or
    oxygen are regarded as being two compounds, for instance, a methylol
    derivative of melamine is regarded as a mixture of melamine and
    formaldehyde and methylol urea is regarded as being a mixture of urea and
    formaldehyde.

            A structurally unspecified novolak is proper for this area in that
    it is considered as a mixture of a phenol and an aldehyde.  If a novolak of
    specified structure is claimed to be prepared from specific reactants, then
    classification is proper on; the basis of the specific reactants.

    ALDEHYDE-TYPE

    An aldehyde-type reactant is limited to an aldehyde derivative or methylol
    derivative.

    AMINE

    Denotes an organic compound having a nitrogen atom single or double bonded
    to a carbon atom and wherein the carbon atom bonded to the nitrogen atom is
    devoid of a double bond to oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium or triple
    bonded to nitrogen.  In addition, those compounds wherein the same nitrogen
    atom is bonded to a group (X is O, S, Se, or Te) and to a carbon atom which
    is not double bonded to oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium, are not
    considered as being amines, e.g., -C-, etc.

    Although amides may be considered chemically as amines, it has been found
    expedient for these classes to exclude compounds containing only amide
    nitrogen herefrom.  Therefore, as used throughout this area, the term amide
    is not to be confused as being an amine.  A compound, however, which
    contains a nitrogen atom bonded to a non  carbon atom and which contains
    either a nitrogen atom bonded to a  group of an amide group, is considered
    as being an amine.

    An organic amine salt of a carboxylic acid has been classified as if it
    were a mixture of an amine and a carboxylic acid. An organic diamine salt
    of a dicarboxylic acid where the amine salt-forming groups are identical is
    considered as being a single amine compound, whereas, if the amine groups
    are different then they are regarded as two amine compounds.  Where the
    amine groups contain two or more nitrogen atoms bonded to the same or
    different noncarbonyl carbon atom then they are to be regarded as
    polyamines.

    ARYL

    Denotes a benzene ring or a carbocyclic ring system having a benzene ring
    as part of the system.

    BIOLOGICALLY ACTIVE POLYPEPTIDE

    Denotes polypeptide chains which have been built-up primarily from alpha-
    or beta-amino carboxylic acids and which exhibit biological activity
    similar to naturally occurring proteins or polypeptide; for example:
    hormone activity, e.g., insulin, etc.; immuno-activity, e.g., antigen or
    antibody, etc.; antibiotic activity, e.g., bacitracin or bleomycin, etc.;
    or antiviral, e.g., interferon, etc.

    Mere statements that a material demonstrates any of these activities is
    sufficient to create a presumption that a biologically active polypeptide
    is present.  On the other hand, a material merely disclosed as a
    polypeptide which has been built-up from amino acids will not be presumed
    to have biological activity, and will be placed in Class 520 according to
    the disclosed structure and function as appropriate.

    BLOCK COPOLYMER

    1.      The structure is given, i.e., to a long polymer backbone is attached
    or
    coupled to one or both of its terminal ends one or more polymers at least
    three reactant units in length or;

    2.      the copolymer is named as a block providing that the disclosure is
    otherwise silent as to its structure or if the structure is likewise given,
    it is consistent with that described above or;

    3.      the structure can be ascertained from the following limiting
    process conditions:

    (a)     Treating a nonterminated solid polymer, that is, one which is
    terminally active or "living", with an ethylenic reactant with subsequent
    polymerization to form additional blocks.  The process may be continued to
    produce higher order block copolymers.  For example, treating dilithiated
    polystyrene with butadiene to yield an ABA block coploymer;

    (b)     two or more nonidentical solid polymer chain ends are coupled
    directly or through the use of a chemical agent.  For example, the coupling
    of hydroxy terminated solid polybutadiene with hydroxy terminated
    polyethylene glycol terephthalate with phosgene.

    BLOCK-TYPE COPOLYMER

    1.      The structure is given, i.e., to a long solid polymer backbone
    possessing
    terminally active sites, i.e., contains functional groups or is a "living
    polymer" is attached or coupled through chemical reaction with those
    functional groups or sites an ethylenic reactant containing one or more
    functional groups or sites, for example, contacting hydroxy terminated
    polybutadiene glycol with allyl isocyanate, or

    2.      two or more identical solid polymer chain ends are coupled directly
    or
    through the use of a chemical agent. For purposes here, identical means
    those polymer segments which contain the same carbon backbone but differ in
    stereoregularity, e.g., isotactic, syndiotactic, a tactic, optical
    activity, or degree of polymerization. Thus, coupling lithium terminated
    polystyrene segments with molecular weights of 25,000 and 100,000,
    respectively, with stannic chloride is proper for this subclass.

    CARBOHYDRATES

    Denotes polyhydroxy aldehydes (i.e., aldoses) and polyhyroxy ketones (i.e.,
    ketoses) of the empirical formula Cx(H2O)x where x is five or more; and
    substances hydrolyzable to said polyhydroxy (aldehydes or ketones).
    Included herein for example:

    (a)     monosaccharide sugars such as pentoses, e.g., arabinose,
    arabinulose, etc.; hexoses, e.g., glucose, levulose, etc.; and the
    heptoses, e.g., mannoheptose, etc.

    (b)     disaccharides, e.g., lactose, maltose, sucrose, cellobiose, etc.

    (c)     trisaccharides, e.g., raffinose, etc.

    (d)     polysaccharides, e.g., starches, celluloses, dextrins,
    hemicelluloses, glycogen, inulin, etc.

    (e)     complex polysaccharides, e.g., gum arabic, pectins, etc.

    Excluded herefrom are lignin, tannin, and derivatives thereof.  Also
    excluded are the simple "triose" (i.e., glyceradehyde di-hydroxy acetone)
    or "tetrose" (i.e., erythrose, threose and keto tetroses) sugars since
    these sugars have less than five carbons; therefore, these materials are
    treated as polyhydroxy (aldehydes or ketones).

    CARBOHYDRATE DERIVATIVE

    Denotes reaction products of carbohydrates wherein the carbon skeleton of
    the carbohydrate is not destroyed.  Included herein are cellulose nitrate,
    cellulose acetate, cellulose ethers, viscose, cellulose xanthate, chitin,
    etc.

    CARBOXYLIC ACID OR DERIVATIVE

    A carboxylic acid denotes:

    A.      The structure C-n  -OH (n is 1 or more) and wherein the carbon atom
    bonded to the n  group is not double bonded to oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium, or triple bonded to nitrogen.

    B.      The structure H- n  -OH, n is 1 or more, e.g., formic acid.

    C.      The structure  n OH, n is an integer, e.g., oxalic acid, etc.

    A carboxylic acid derivative is limited to nitrile, ester, anhydride, salt,
    amide, imide, lactam, lactone, and acyl halide.

    A carboxylic acid anhydride denotes:



    A.      The structure C-n -O-n -C  wherein n is one or more and wherein the
    carbon atom bonded to the - n group is not double bonded to oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium.

    B.      The structure X-n  OC  wherein n is an integer, X is O- or a
    carboxylic acid derivative as defined in the (1) Note of this subclass.

    C.      The structure HO.

            In A., B., and C., the Ogroup may be joined together in a ring.

            A carboxylic acid ester denotes:

    A.      The structure -C-n -O-C, n is 1 or more, and the carbond atom
    bonded to the n  group and the carbon atom single bonded to the oxygen atom
    of the n -O- group are not double bonded to oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium, or not triple bonded to nitrogen.

    B.      The structure H-n -O-C wherein the carbon atom single bonded to the
    n -O- group is not double bonded to oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium,
    or triple bonded to nitrogen.

    C.      The structure X-n O-C , n is an integer and X is -C-OH or a
    derivative as defined in the (1) Note of this subclass.

            A carboxylic acid amide denotes:

    A.      The structure  C-n NH2, n is 1 or more and carbon bonded to the n
    group is not double bonded to oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium, or
    triple bonded to nitrogen.

    B.      The structure H-n -C-N, n is 1 or more.

    C.      The structure X-n-C-N, is an integer and X is a OH group or a
    derivative as defined in the (1) Note of this subclass.

            A nitrile derivative of a carboxylic  acid  de-

            notes:

            The structure.

            An acid chloride denotes:

    A.      The structure H-n -hal, n is 1 or more.

    B.      The structure X-n hal, n is an integer, and X is OH or a derivative
    as defined in the (1) Note of this subclass.

            The imide of a carboxylic acid denotes:

    The structure   n is 1 or more x is 1 or more,


    The lactam of a carboxylic acid denotes:

    The structure   n is 1 or more

    x is 1 or more,


    The lactone of a carboxylic acid denotes:

    The structurewhere n is 1 or more,

    and x is 1 or more and the carbon atom bonded to  group and the carbon atom
    single bonded to the oxygen atom of the  O- group are not double bonded to
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium, or triple bonded to nitrogen.



    The salt of a carboxylic acid denotes:

    A.      The structure   C-n  wherein X is 1 or more and the CO-group and
    the X component are held together primarily by ionic forces and wherein the
    carbon bondedto the group is not double bonded to oxygen, sulfur, selenium,
    or tellurium, or triple bonded to nitrogen.

    B.      The structure H- n   , n is 1 or more the  H--O-and the X component
    are held together primarily by ionic forces of attraction.

    C.      The structure Z-n , n is an integer.  Z is OH or a derivative as
    defined in the (1) Note of this subclass and the X component and the  (Z-n
    ) component ar held together primarily by ionic forces of attraction.

    In the above definitions of carboxylic acid and their derivatives certain
    compounds may have more than one function, e.g., a lactone is a species of
    ester, a lactam is a species of an amide.  Compounds which are multifaceted
    (i.e., more than one function) are classified on the basis of the
    first-appearing term provided in the subclass hierarchy.



    A polycarboxylic reactant requires the presence of at least two carboxylic
    acid groups, or of at least one carboxylic acid group and at least one
    carboxylic acid derivative, or at least two identical carboxylic acid
    derivatives, or at least two different carboxylic acid derivatives.



    An carboxylic acid anhydride having the general formula

    C-n-OC   wherein when the

    -n-OC- group is in a ring it is considered as being a polycarboxylic acid.
    Compounds having both an anhydride and a free carboxylic acid group are
    considered as being tricarboxylic acids, e.g.

    etc., and a compound containing two anhydride groups is considered as being
    a tetracarboxylic acid, e.g.,

    CHEMICAL TREATING AGENT

    Denotes a chemical material which is added to the formed solid polymer and
    which causes or is present during a process wherein a change in a bond of
    the polymer is effected.

    Claims reciting a "chemical treating agent" are classified on the basis of
    the first-appearing material utilized as part of the chemical agent.  No
    attempt has been made to classify on the basis of the chemically active
    material and therefore all materials in a composition are regarded equally
    (e.g., diluent, reactant, catalyst, etc.).

    Processes and products which refer to mere cross-linking, curing, or
    vulcanizing will be classified on the basis of the product treated.

    DIMER OR TRIMER OF AN ALIPHATIC MONOCARBOXYLIC ACID

    Denotes dimeric or trimeric fatty acids prepared, e.g., by free radical,
    ionic, thermal polymerization, etc., of a monomeric fatty acid which can be
    saturated or unsaturated monocarboxylic acid having at least eight carbon
    atoms.

    So-called "polymeric fatty" acids in the absence of other disclosure are
    presumed to be a mixture of dimers and trimers of aliphatic monocarboxylic
    acids.

    Included herin are reaction products of dimers or trimers wherein the dimer
    or trimer structure is not destroyed.

    Dimers or trimers of ethylenically unsaturated aliphatic monocarboxylic
    acids are presumed to be unsaturated in the absence of disclosure to the
    contrary.

    ETHER

    Denotes an organic compound having the general structure O wherein the
    carbon bond to the linking oxygen atom cannot be double bonded to oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium, or triple bonded to nitrogen.

    ETHYLENICALLY UNSATURATED

    Requires the presence of two carbon atoms bonded together by a double or
    triple bond, with the proviso that the double bond is not part of a benzene
    ring, for example, excluded hereby is:

    included herein are, e.g., coumarone, indene, etc.

    FATTY ACID

    Denotes an aliphatic monocarboxylic acid having an unbroken chain of at
    least seven carbon atoms bonded to the carboxyl group.

    Fatty acid glycerol ester denotes a mono-, di-, or tri-ester of a fatty
    acid with glycerol.  The so-called drying or semidrying oils are naturally
    occurring fatty acid glycerol esters, i.e., glycerides.  The drying or
    semidrying property relates to the degree of ethylenic unsaturation.

    Naturally occurring fatty acid glycerides (i.e., fats and fatty oils)
    include but are not limited to linseed oil, perilla oil, olive oil, otticia
    oil, soybean oil, fish oil, castor oil, tallow, and other natural
    glycerides:

    alfalfa Grapeseed       sesame

    apricot kernel  hempseed        stillingia

    beechnut        isano   sunflower

    bontio  ivory wood seed teaseed

    Brazil nut      jute seed       thistle seed

    candlenut       mustard seed    tobacco seed

    cedar nut       oat     tomato seed

    chaulmoogra     orange seed     walnut

    cherry kernel   plum kernel     wheat

    coconut poppyseed       wild rose seed

    corn            poyok

    cottenseed      rice

    croton seed     rye

    grapefruit seed safflower



    Naturally occurring fats and fatty oils are treated in Class 520 as fatty
    acid glycerol esters.

    A fatty acid derived from naturally occurring glyceride denotes the
    carboxylic acids normally obtained by saponification of the naturally
    occurring glycerides, i.e., oleic, linoleic, linolenic, licanic,
    eleostearic, ricinoleic, arachidic, stearic, palmitic, lauric, erucic,
    palmitoleic, capric, caprylic, myristic and clupanodonic acids.  Carboxylic
    acids specifically enumerated above will be treated as fatty acids derived
    from naturally occurring glycerides only where there is specific disclosure
    that the acid is derived from a naturally occurring glyceride source.

    Tall oil denotes the mixture of fatty acids, rosin, and unsaponifiable
    material obtained by treatment of Kraft (or sulfite) process black liquor.
    In Class 520 tall oil is usually treated as if it were a mixture of fatty
    acids derived from naturally occurring glycerides unless otherwise
    specifically stated; see Class 524, subclass 270 and compare Class 524,
    subclass 764.

    Fatty acid derived from tall oil denotes the fatty acid portion of tall oil

    In Class 520, derivatives or modifications of the fatty acid glycerol
    ester, fatty acid derived from a naturally occurring glyceride, tall oil,
    or fatty acids derived from tall oil are excluded, unless, except as
    specifically provided for in the following list:  salts of the fatty acid
    moiety, blown oils, refined oils and acids, stand oils, boiled oils, bodied
    oils, hydrogenated oils or acids, dehydrogenated oils or acids, dehydrated
    castor oil or dehydrated castor oil fatty acids.

    Sythetically produced fatty acids having the same structure as fatty acids
    derived from naturally occurring glycerides are included herein.

    Dimerized or trimerized or "polymeric" fatty acids are excluded as "fatty
    acids" for purposes of Class 520; similarly, adducts of fatty acids or
    fatty acid glycerol esters with alpha, beta ethylenically unsaturated
    carboxlic acids are excluded as "fatty acids".

    FUSED OR BRIDGED RING SYSTEM

    Denotes a ring system having at least two rings which (a) share with each
    other two adjacent ring atoms, or (b) share with each other three or more
    ring atoms and wherein each ring having shared atoms is either a
    heterocyclic ring or a carbocyclic ring.

    GLASS

    An amorphous, hard, brittle, often transparent material comprising a fused
    mixture of the silicates of the alkali and alkaline earth, or heavy metals.

    GRAFT COPOLYMER

    1.      The structure is given, i.e., to a long solid polymer backbone
    (substrate)
    is attached a pendant (nonterminal) polymer or copolymer (superstrate)
    having at least three reactant units in length or;

    2.      the copolymer is so named as a graft providing that the disclosure
    is otherwise silent as to the structure or, if structure is likewise
    recited, it is consistent with that required in A. above, or;

    3.      the structure can be ascertained from the following limiting
    process conditions:

    (a)     The disclosure states there is a reaction between a solid
    polymerized unsaturated reactant and an unpolymerized unsaturated reactant
    in the presence of a catalyst or;

    (b)     the disclosure does not state whether or not any reaction has
    occurred between the solid polymerized unsaturated reactant and the
    unpolymerized unsaturated reactant, but relates that a product is obtained
    which is inseparable by a variety of physical techniques such as,
    extraction, precipitation, ion exchange, etc.

            In the absence of one or more of these requirements the reaction is
    considered to produce a polymeric blend.

    GRAFT-TYPE COPOLYMER

    A.      The structure is given, i.e., to a long solid polymer backbone
    (substrate) possessing nonterminal active sites or functional groups is
    attached (grafted) through a chemical reaction with these functional groups
    or sites an ethylenic reactant containing one or more functional groups or
    active sites.  The reaction product may or may not possess unsaturated
    pendant groups depending on the mode of chemical reaction.  The following
    examples will illustrate this point:

    1.

    2.

    B.      The structure can be ascertained when:

    1.      There is disclosed a reaction between the solid polymerized
    unsaturated
    reactant and the unpolymerized unsaturated reactant which reaction uses
    specific art-recognized terms, e.g., "esterification, acylation,
    sulfonylation, cyanoethylection, addition to, reaction or condensation
    with, halogenation, nitration, sulfonation, alkylation, amination, etc.".
    Examples of these reactions would be:

            (a)

            (b)

    2.      There is disclosed an interaction between two or more solid polymers
    through their respective nonterminal functional groups or through the use
    of an intermediate reactant or chemical agent, e.g., causing salt, ester,
    amide, urea formation.  Examples of these reactions would be:

    (a)     Contacting polypropylene and polyethylene with benzoyl peroxide.

    (b)     Contacting polyvinylamine and polyallylamine with glyoxal.

    (c)     Contacting chloromethylated polystyrene with polyvinylamine.

    (d)     Contacting polyacrylic acid with polyvinylamine.

            In the absence of one or more of these requirements the reaction is
    considered to produce a polymeric blend.

            See the Glossary for the definition of the terms "specified
    intermediate condensation product" and "specified polymer-forming
    intermediates".

    HALOGENATED HYDROCARBON

    Denotes a compound containing only carbon, hydrogen, and halogen, or only
    carbon and halogen.

    HETEROCYCLIC

    Denotes an organic compound wherein one or more carbon atoms are covalently
    bonded in a ring system with at least one hetero atom of oxygen, sulfur,
    nitrogen, selenium, or tellurium and there are no other different atoms in
    the ring.

    KETONE

    Denotes an organic compound having the general structure  n   (n is 1 or
    more) and wherein the carbon atoms bonded to the n  group are not double
    bonded to oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium. Ketone as used throughout
    includes ketene, i.e., CH2=C=O

    LIGNIN

    Denotes a material usually derived during paper pulp manufacture by
    separation of the cellulose from wood.  Lignin is considered to be the
    binder for cellulose in wood. Lignin includes crude mixtures of lignose,
    lignone and lignin.  Lignin per se is a complex structure having some
    aromatic rings and phenolic groups.

    LIGNIN DERIVATIVE

    Denotes materials not otherwise provided for, derived from lignin or from
    sulfite or soda paper pulping processes, e.g., sodium lignosulfonate, waste
    sulfite liquor, black liquor, etc.

    METALS

    Are limited to elements of atomic numbers 3, 4, 11-13, 19-33, 37-51, 55-84,
    87, and higher.

    The Group IA metals are Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs, Fr.

    The Group IIA metals are Be, Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba, Ra.

    The Group IIIA metals are Ai, Ga, In, Ti.

    The Group IVA metals are Ge, Sn, Pb.

    The Group VA metals are As, Sb, Bi.

    The Group VIA metal is Po.

    The Group IB metals are Cu, Ag, Au.

    The Group IIB metals are Zn, Cd, Hg.

    The Group IIIB metals are Sc, Y, La, Ac.

    The Group IVB metals are Ti, Zr, Hf.

    The Group VB metals are V, Nb, Ta.

    The Group VIB metals are Cr, Mo, W.

    The Group VIIB metals are Mn, Tc, Re.

    The Group VIII metals are Fe, Ru, Os, Co, Rh, Ir, Nb, Pd, Pt.

    "Transition metal" is limited to elements of atomic numbers 21-29, 39-47,
    57-79, 89, and higher and does not include Zn, Cd, and Hg.

    METHYLOL OR METHYLOL DERIVATIVE

    Methylol or methylol derivative is limited to:

    1.      A compound containing a

    2.      A compound containing a T-(-O-A)n

    3.      A compound containing  a

            Y' and Y" are H or hydrocarbon groups; Z is H or a carbon atom.

            T - is an atom other than C or H.

            A - is a hydrogen or a carbon atom and which carbon atom is bonded
    to only H, carbon, or single bonded oxygen atoms.

            X - is H, part of an ether group, or an inorganic salt.

            N - is two or more, B is one or more.

    NATURAL RESIN

    Denotes:



    A.      Those materials which have been customarily employed as such in the
    paint, lacquer, varnish, adhesive, and ink trades.  Thus, "natural resin"
    is a term of art; anything described by the patentee as a natural resin and
    consistent with Class 260, subclasses 97+, unless otherwise specifically
    stated is included.

    B.      Natural resins include but are not limited to:  shellac, copals
    from various sources, e.g., congo, manila, etc.; amber, dammar, dead
    dammar, rosin (colophony), gum rosin, wood rosin, burgundy pitch, gurjun
    balsam, canada balsam, sandarac, mastic, accroides, benzoin, elemi,
    gamboge, gum thus, venice turpentine, bordeaux turpentine, abietic acid,
    pimaric acid, etc.

    C.      Tall oil, per se, is not treated as a natural resin unless the
    rosin content is specifically stated.  In the event the rosin content is
    not stated, tall oil is treated as an unsaturated fatty acid derived from
    naturally occurring glycerides.

    D.      Unless indicated to the contrary, "rosin" is presumed to be
    primarily abietic acid.

    NATURAL RESIN DERIVATIVE

    Denotes:



    A.      Heat decomposition products which contain a hydroaromatic nucleus
    and which are unprovided for elsewhere.

    B.      Materials described by patentee as natural resins.

    C.      Modifications wherein the carbon structure of the abietyl nucleus
    is retained, including but not limited to: abietyl amine, dehydroabietyl
    amine, abietyl alcohol, zinc abietate, hydrogenated rosin, dehydroabietic
    acid, disproportioned rosin, rosin esters, ester gum (i.e., triglyceride of
    rosin), polymerized ester gum, hydrogenated ester gum, oxidized ester gum,
    etc.

    D.      Other modified natural resins; for example, aceto- and
    butyro-copal, copal ester, etc.

    NONMETALS

    Denotes boron, oxygen, carbon, selenium, tellurium, nitrogen, sulfur,
    phosphorous, silicon, hydrogen, fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine,
    astatine, helium, neon, argon, krypton, xenon, and radon.

    ORGANIC COMPOUND

    Denotes all compounds having carbon therein and which are further
    characterized by the presence of (a) two carbon atoms bonded together, or
    (b) one atom of carbon bonded to at least one atom of hydrogen or halogen,
    or (c) one atom of carbon bonded to at least one atom of nitrogen by a
    single or double bond, with the proviso that hydrocyanic acid, cyanogen,
    isocyanic acid, cyanamide, cyanogen halides, isothiocyanic acid, and metal
    carbides are excluded as being organic compounds.

    PHENOLIC REACTANT

    The term phenolic reactant as used is intended to include the subject
    matter enumerated below:

    A.      A phenol for purposes of this subclass requires one or more -OH
    groups directly bonded to a nuclear carbon atom of a substituted or
    unsubstituted benzene ring, which benzene ring can be an individual benzene
    ring or can be part of a polycyclic ring system.

    B.      A phenol ether for purposes of this subclass requires one or more
    -O-C groups wherein the oxygen atom of the -O-C group is directly bonded to
    a nuclear carbon atom of a substituted or unsubstituted benzene ring and
    wherein the carbon atom of the -O-C group is not double bonded to oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium or triple bonded to nitrogen.  The benzene
    ring may be an individual benzene ring or may be part of a polycyclic ring
    system.  The following examples of phenol ether are within the definition
    set out above:

    (1)     The -O-C group may itself be part of a cyclic ring system, e.g.,

    (2)     The carbon of the -O-C group may be a ring atom of a cyclic or
    aromatic ring, e.g.,

    (3)     An inorganic phenolate is an inorganic salt of a phenol (see phenol
    1 above) wherein the hydrogen atom of a -OH group is replaced by a metal or
    an inorganic group.  Tannin or tannic acid is considered to be a
    polyhydroxy polycyclic carboxy-containing phenol.  Crysylic acid is
    considered to be cresol.  Coal tar extracts are considered to be an
    indefinable mixture of ingredients some of which are phenolic in nature.
    Cardanol and anacardic acids are phenolic derivatives.

    (4)     The carbon of the -O-C group may be a terminal  carbon  atom, e.g.,

            or may be the carbon atom of a chain, e.g.,

    POLYEPOXIDE

    Denotes a material having more than one 1,2-expoxy group per molecule.

    PROTEIN

    Denotes polypeptides composed of more than 100 amino acids or having
    molecular weights greater than 10,000.

    Included herein are, for example:

    A.      The so-called simple proteins which yield alpha-amino acids upon
    hydrolysis, e.g., albumins, globulins, glutelins, prolamines, histones,
    sceleroproteins, etc.

    B.      The conjugated proteins wherein protein is bound to some other
    molecule or group, e.g., nucleoproteins, glucoproteins, etc.

    C.      Derived proteins which are the cleaved products of proteins,
    excluding the monomeric alpha-amino acids themselves, e.g., proteins,
    metaproteins, coagulated proteins, proteoses, peptones, peptides, etc.

    D.      Reaction products wherein the protein has been reacted and wherein
    the final reaction product retains peptide linkages.

    SATURATED

    Denotes nonethyieniclly unsaturated; thus, for purposes of this class,
    materials containing an aryl structure, e.g., benzene, naphthalene, etc.,
    are treated as saturated materials unless otherwise excluded either
    specifically or hierarchically; compare ethylenically unsaturated.

    SPECIFIED INTERMEDIATE CONDENSATION PRODUCT

    Specified intermediate condensation product is limited to:

    1.      Reaction of an aldehyde or derivative and an amine or compound
    containing a
    N- or N group where R is hydrogen or hydrocarbon radical.

    2.      Reaction of an aldehyde or derivative and a phenolic material.

    3.      Reaction of an aldehyde or derivative and a ketone.

    4.      A compound containing a


            N-(-C-O-Z)n group.

    5.      A compound containing a T-(-O-A)n group.

    6.      A compound containing a group.


            Y' and Y" are H or hydrocarbon groups, Z is H or a carbon radical.

            T - is an atom other than H or C radical.

            A - is a hydrogen or carbon atom and which carbon atom is bonded to
    only H, carbon, or single bonded oxygen atoms.

            X - is H, part of an ether group, or an inorganic cation.

            N - is two or more, B is one or more.

    SPECIFIED MATERIAL

    Denotes the intentional and deliberate presence of a material (other than
    as a reactant monomer) during the polymerization reaction, which material
    may be removed subsequent to the polymerization, or which may remain with
    or in the final desired polymeric product.

    1.      The term "specified material" is limited to:

    a.      An amount of a material, e.g., 2 percent of a material, etc.

    b.      (1)     A recitation of at least one specified element in a
    compound or in elemental form, e.g., oxygen-liberating compound, peroxy
    compound, chlorine-containing, etc.

    (2)     Groups of elements which can be identified from the periodic table
    (other than metal or nonmetal), e.g., Group IA, transition metal,
    halogen-containing, etc.

    (3)     Compounds which have identified art meaning, e.g., alcohol, ethers,
    esters, etc.

    2.      Examples of material, which are described in mere functional terms
    and are
    thereby excluded as being a "specified material" since they do not meet the
    parameters set out in (a) and (b) above, are terms such as free radical
    catalyst, redox catalyst, emulsifier, dispersant, base, acid, organic
    medium, etc.

    3.      Water in any of its physical forms, inert gases (Group VIIIA),
    hydrocarbons, and chlorinated hydrocarbons are specifically excluded from
    this area as being specified material even if specifically recited as to
    name, e.g., chloroform, etc., or as to amount, e.g., 2 percent of
    chloroform, etc.  A search for these materials requires a search of the
    appropriate product area.  However, specific provision has been made in
    Class 526, subclass 208 for a mixture of a chlorinated hydrocarbon and
    water, and in Class 526, subclass 207 for a mixture of hydrocarbon and
    water.

    4.      Terms such as complex, coordination complex, chelate, sequestered,
    or
    adduct, and terms which are exemplary of these but which are not limited to
    the enumerated examples, such as sequestered complex, chelated compound,
    etc., are classified as are compounds, per se, when they are products of a
    metal or metal compound and a nonmetal organic compound.

    5.      The materials enumerated in 4. above are classified as separate
    compounds
    or elements when (a) the product is the reaction product of at least two or
    more metals, metal-containing compounds, or mixtures thereof, e.g., alloy,
    etc., or (b) when the product is the reaction of at least a metal or metal
    compound and an inorganic material.

    6.      Patents in this area are to be classified on the basis of the
    claimed final
    compound or composition that is introduced into the reaction zone and is in
    direct contact with any of the monomers therein.  If it is not possible to
    so classify the introduced material, classification is then made on the
    basis of the individual reactants used in the preparation of the unknown
    material.  In the event that the claims recite both the individual
    reactants and identify the product formed therefrom, then the original
    classification should be made in the subclass that provides for the known
    product and a cross-reference should be placed in the appropriate subclass
    that provides for the reactants.

    7.      Patents which claim an "in situ" preparation of "specified material"
    in the
    presence of the monomer are originally classified on the basis of the
    introduced reactants and cross-referenced to the prepared "specified
    material".

    SPECIFIED POLYMER-FORMING INGREDIENTS

    Specified polymer-forming ingredients are limited to:

    A.      Aldehyde or derivative and a phenolic material.

    B.      Aldehyde or derivative and an amine.

    C.      Aldehyde or derivative and a compound  containing N-.

    D.      Aldehyde or derivative and a hydrocarbon.

    E.      Polyepoxides.

    F.      Polyisocyanates and a polyol.

    G.      Polyisocyanates and a polyamine.

    H.      Polyisocyanates and a polycarbocyclic acid or anhydride.

    I.      Carbonic acid or carbonate and a polyol.

    J.      Hal--hal and a polyol.

    K.      Polycarboxlic acid or derivative and a polyol.

    L.      Polycarboxylic acid or derivative and a polyamine.

    M.      Aldehyde or derivative and a compound containing N group.

    TRANSITION METAL

    Denotes elements of atomic numbers 21-29, 39-47, 57-79, 89, and higher and
    does not include Zn, Cd, and Hg.

    (7)     Note.  To be classified in this or the indented subclasses a patent
    must contain a claim drawn to a solid synthetic resin.  Where a patent sets
    forth claims which are drawn to species that may or may not be synthetic
    resins as per disclosure, or where a patent contains only generic claims
    and the disclosure sets forth species which are appropriate as synthetic
    resins and species which are not, the patent is classified as an original,
    with the species which are nonresinous and cross-referenced to the
    appropriate resin area.  Where the claims or disclosures are devoid of any
    reference to a synthetic resin the claim is classified in the appropriate
    area in Class 260 providing for the material as a compound, or if a
    composition is claimed in an appropriate composition class other than Class
    260.

    (8)     Note.  Determination of whether a product is a resin proper for
    this area (Class 520) or a compound under Class 260.

    (A)     In the absence of disclosure to the contrary:

    1.      A polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only will be considered
    to be a
    solid polymer, per se, and proper for Class 520.

    2.      A polymer derived from at least one nonethylenic reactant will be
    considered to be a liquid and, therefore, properly classified in Class 260
    as a compound.  An exception to this rule pertains to certain low molecular
    weight polymers which despite being solids are nonetheless regarded as
    nonpolymeric and therefore excluded from Class 520.  Consider, for example,
    the low molecular weight polymers of organic isocyanates (nRNCO),
    formaldehyde (mCH2O), and acetaldehyde (pCH3CHO), respectively.  Organic
    isocyanates can be polymerized to produce isocyanurates (I), cyclic trimers
    where n=3.  Formaldehyde can be polymerized to produce the cyclic trimer,
    trioxane (II) where m=3.  Finally, acetaldehyde can be polymerized to
    produce the cyclic tetramer,  metaldehyde (III), where p=4.Despite being
    solids, these "polymers" are, in fact, compounds with sharp melting points,
    exhibiting no film-forming, elastomeric or other rheological properties and
    are therefore properly classified in the compound classes.

    (B)     A polymer is a solid when so stated or when it is described in one
    or more of the following terms.  This list is not to be taken as limiting a
    solid to the enumerated terms. Other terms in patents not noted below may
    be interpreted as being solid when proper description is given therein:

    1.  coagulated

    2.  brittle

    3.  ductile

    4.  Durran m.p

    5.  elastic

    6.  elastomer

    7.  fiber-forming

    8.  friable

    9.  fusible

    10. gum

    11. meltable

    12. melting point

    13. millable

    14.  molten

    15. pliable

    16. powder

    17. rubber

    18. rubbery

    19. thermoplastic

    20. thermoset

            A wax is not considered to be a solid even if defined by one or
    more of the above terms.

    (9)     Note.  Subject matter relating to determining whether a product
    derived from a natural rubber, protein, natural resin, natural gum,
    bituminous material, nonvolatile residue of distillation processes,
    naturally occurring fatty acids, fatty oils, fats, waxes and modified forms
    thereof, carbohydrates or derivatives, or tall oil or fatty acids derived
    from tall oil, is proper subject matter for this class (520) or for Class
    260.

    (A)     Rules pertaining to naturally occurring fatty acids, fats, fatty
    oils, or tall oil or fatty acids derived from tall oil.  In the absence of
    disclosure to the contrary, the following rules apply:

    1.      The reaction product of fatty acid or oil + SICP (or SICP
    ingredients) is
    presumed to be solid and classified in Class 525 or 528.

    2.      The reaction product of a fatty acid or oil + polyol +
    polycarboxylic acid
    or derivative is presumed to be a liquid and is classified in Class 554,
    Organic Compounds, subclasses 1+.

    3.      The reaction product of a fatty acid or oil + SPFI (other than SICP
    ingredients) is presumed to be a liquid and is classified in Class 554,
    Organic Compounds, subclasses 1+.

    4.      Ethylenic reactant + preformed reaction product of fatty acid +
    polyol +
    polycarboxylic acid or derivative is classified in Class 525, subclass 7,
    when the ethylenic reactant is not solely a fatty acid glycerol ester, a
    fatty acid derived from a naturally occurring glyceride, tall oil, or a
    tall oil fatty acid.

            This result is necessary in view of the old Class 260, subclass
    2.01, Note 2 rule. However, it is to be pointed out that the ethylenic
    reactant can be a natural resin, e.g., rosin, etc.  The rule in Class 525,
    subclass 7 is to be contrasted with situations elsewhere in Classes 526,
    528, and also in Class 525, where it often is appropriate to view a drying
    oil or drying oil acid as an ethylenic reactant so long as there is present
    a system of Class 520, subclass 1, in the absence of the fatty oil or acid.

            Example:  The reaction product of:  solid polyethylene glycol
    terephthalate + linseed oil is classified in Class 525, subclasses 10+.

            But:  If the polyester is not specifically disclosed as a solid or
    the reaction product is not disclosed as a solid prior to oxidative
    cross-linking (i.e., air drying) then the system is classified in Class
    554, Organic Compounds, subclasses 1+.

    5.      The reaction product of a fatty acid or oil + ethylenic monomer is
    presumed
    to be a liquid and is placed in Class 560, Organic Compounds, subclasses 1+
    or Class 562, Organic Compounds, subclasses 400+, respectively.  If
    formation of a solid polymer (prior to air drying) is disclosed, the
    material is classified in Class 526.

            SEARCH CLASS:
    560,    Organic Compounds, for styrene copolymerized with a fatty acid
    glyceride to form a liquid material.562,        Organic Compounds, for a
    styrene copolymerized with a fatty acid to form a liquid material.

    6.      A fatty acid or oil + maleic acid yields a reaction product. The
    reaction
    product admixed with styrene is presumed to yield a liquid product, which
    product is classified in Class 560 Organic Compounds, subclasses 76+ or
    Class 562, Organic Compounds, subclasses 488+, respectively.  A solid would
    be placed in Class 526.

    7.      Polymerized fatty acids or oil, e.g., dimer or trimer fatty acids,
    etc.,
    are not treated as fatty acids for purposes of Class 520.  However, in
    recognition of the historical treatment of these materials as derivatives
    of fats and the effect of this under former Class 260, subclass 2.01, Note
    2, the following rules are offered:

    (a)     Solid materials produced from dimerized or trimerized fatty acids
    together with a SPFI or SICP or ethylenic monomer other than solely a fatty
    acid or oil are treated as solid polymers for the purpose of Class 520,
    subclass 1.

    (b)     Materials produced from dimerized or trimerized fatty acids with
    otherwise incomplete specified polymer-forming system (SPFI) are classified
    as appropriate in Class 562, Organic Compounds, subclasses 400+ without
    regard to consideration of solid or liquid.

    B.      Rules pertaining to natural resins or derivatives.  In the absence
    of disclosure to the contrary, the following rules apply:

    1.      Natural resin or natural resin derivative is defined in the
    Glossary.

    2.      Reaction product of natural resins with ethylenic reactants are
    presumed to
    produce a solid polymer proper for Class 527, subclass 600, with the
    exception that reaction products of natural resins or derivatives
    (including hydrogenated rosin) with solely terpenes and/or polycarboxylic
    acids, anhydrides, or halides are treated, per se, as derivatives of
    natural resins for purposes of Class 530, subclass 214. The practical
    effect of this is that abietic acid copolymerized with malelic anhydride is
    classified, per se, in Class 530, subclass 214.  However, rosin + maleic +
    styrene is classified in Class 526, subclass 238.3.

    3.      A natural resin reacted with an ingredient which introduces
    ethylenic
    unsaturation (other than in section B, 2 situation above), e.g., rosin
    ester of allyl alcohol, is a monomer for purposes of Class 526.  Thus,
    polymers of these materials are classified in Class 526; however, natural
    resins are assumed to be ethylenically unsaturated.  For example, the
    reaction product of a natural resin + SICP is presumed to be a solid and is
    classified in Class 525.

    4.      A natural resin reacted with a material to introduce a functional
    group
    provided for on the SPFI listing is not presumed to be a solid polymer for
    purposes of Class 520 unless admixed with any additional ingredient
    necessary to complete the SPFI system.

    5.      A reaction product of a natural resin + SPFI ingredients is presumed
    to be
    a solid and proper for Class 527, subclasses 600+.

    6.      A reaction product of a natural resin + ethylenic reactant (other
    than
    those excluded in section B, 2  above) + nonethylenic reactant is presumed
    to produce a solid polymer proper for Class 527.

    7.      The reacton product of a natural resin with a reactant which
    introduces
    functional groups that are part of a SPFI system and wherein the other
    necessary ingredient of the SPFI system is subsequently introduced,
    produces a product which is presumed to be solid and is proper for Class
    527.

    C.      Rules pertaining to natural rubber, protein, natural gum,
    bituminous material, lignin or tannin, nonvolatile residue of distillation
    processes, waxes, and modified forms thereof, and carbohydrates or
    derivatives.  In the absence of disclosure to the contrary, the following
    rules apply.  For purposes of convenience, the group of materials above has
    been treated as a single entity and has been categorized as being selected
    materials.  The rules that follow relating to selected materials apply to
    each of the materials above:

    1.      The reaction of a selected material + SICP (or SICP ingredients) is
    presumed to be a solid and is classified in Class 527.

    2.      The reaction product of a selected material + SPFI ingredients is
    presumed
    to be a solid polymer and proper for class 527.

    3.      The reaction product of a selected material + ethylenic reactant is
    presumed to be a solid polymer and proper for Class 527.

    4.      The reaction product of a selected material + ethylenic reactant +
    nonethylenic reactant is presumed to produce a solid polymer proper for
    Class 527.

    5.      A selected material which is reacted so as to increase or decrease
    ethylenic unsaturation, but not to leave the material devoid of any
    unsaturation, produces a monomer proper for Class 526 which, if
    homopolymerized or copolymerized with an ethylenic reactant only, produces
    a polymer proper for Class 526.

    6.      The reaction product of selected material which introduces
    functional
    groups that are part of a SPFI system and wherein the other necessary
    ingredient of the SPFI system is subsequently introduced, produces a
    product which is presumed to be solid and is proper for Class 527.

            An example of such a situation is the treatment of sucrose with
    ethylene oxide to produce a sucrose polyether polyol which is subsequently
    treated with a polyisocyanate.

            The reactions enumerated above, when dealing with multiple
    materials, may be simultaneous or sequential.  For example, a selected
    material may be reacted with a polyol and then subsequently halogenated,
    which product is then in turn reacted with a polycarboxylic acid. The
    polycarboxylic acid and polyol reactant are a SPFI system. Therefore, the
    product produced is presumed to be solid and proper for Class 527.

            The reactions enumerated above all pertain to SPFI, SICP, ethylenic
    reactants, or to materials which introduce functional groups which are part
    of a SPFI system, and to which another material is added that completes the
    necessary ingredients that comprise a SPFI system.  Any other reaction with
    the above materials, other than where the patentee specifically states that
    materials are present which will form a solid polymer under the conditions
    of reaction if the materials enumerated above were absent, is excluded as
    being a polymer proper for Class 520.

    (10)    Note.  Classification lines and search notes to other (a) compound,
    (b) composition, (c) method of preparing, and (d) polymerizable composition
    classes.

    (A)     A synthetic resin, per se, is classified herein as a compound
    regardless of utility.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclasses for
    producing a product of this class by other than a wave energy process.
    Class 204 is superior to this class, therefore a patent claiming in the
    alternative a process of preparing an organic compound and a synthetic
    resin or natural rubber in the presence of wave energy is classified for
    original purposes in Class 204 and cross-referenced to this class (520) on
    the basis of wave energy and the synthetic resin or natural rubber species.
    In the situation where an altenative prcess claim is presented as well as a
    specific process claim to the synthetic resin or natural rubber , and there
    is no specific claim to the nonsynthetic resin or nonnatural rubber
    species, and the process is directed to wave energy, the same rule of
    original patent placement applies.  Any process step involving
    electrolysis, electric current, electro-osmosis, electophoresis,
    electostatic field, electrical discharge, or magnetic field and also
    involving the preparing or treating or a synthetic resin or natural rubber
    is properly classified in Class 204, even if the wave energy step involved
    is subsequent to the 204 step.  Combinations of chemical processes falling
    within the definition of Class 520 (other than wave energy) and those
    methods falling within the definitions of Class 204, are classified in
    Class 204 when the chemical process steps are preparatory to the Class 204
    process and are classified in Class 520 when the 204 method is precedent to
    the Class 520 chemical step.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 174+ for
    a carrier bound or immobilized enzyme or cell, even if attached to a
    synthetic resin.



    (B)     Composition: The following general lines exist between Class 520
    and other composition classes or with classes containing patents wherein
    the claims recite a composition limited to an art use provided for in that
    class.

    1.      A composition having no art use claimed, but disclosed as having a
    single
    art use is classified with the art use.

    2.      Compositions which are disclosed as having a plurality of functions
    provided for in different main classes and only a single use, property, or
    function is claimed, are placed in the composition class providing for such
    claimed use, property, or function and cross-referenced to other classes
    for disclosed uses, properties, or functions when desirable.

    3.      Compositions which are disclosed as having a plurality of uses,
    properties,
    or functions provided for in different main classes, and there are claims
    to a plurality of such several uses, properties, or functions, are placed
    in the composition class coming first in the following order of superiority.

    504,    Plant Protecting and Regulating Compositions

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions

    426,    Food or Edible Material: Processes, Compositions, and Products.

    71,     Chemistry: Fertilizers.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic compositions or Charges.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or Product.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 9+.

    44,     Fuel and Related Composition.

    148,    Metal Treatment.

    252,    Compositions (special uses or functions) to subclass 194.

    502,    Catalyst or Solid Sorbent.

    252,    Compositions (special uses or functions), subclass 478 and those
    following, except subclasses 302+, 363.5+, 364, 365+, 367+, 372, 378 R,P.

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles ad Fibers.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 1.05 to 38.9.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 600-316.

    451,    Abrading.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures (Alloys).

    420,    Alloys or Metallic Compositions

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures (rest of class).

    518,    Chemistry: Fischer-Tropsch Processes; or Purification or Recovery
    of Products Thereof

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers: Series of Classes.

    260,    Chemistry  of Carbon Compounds:  Series of Classes.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products.

    252,    Compositions (nonspecial uses or functions) i.e. subclasses
    182.11+, 183.11+, 302+, 363.5, 364, 365+, 367, 372, 378 R,P, 380, 408.1,
    600.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds (mixture subclasses).

    4.      Class 520 is the residual class for compositions containing a
    polymer
    proper for Class 520.  Any composition containing a polymer proper for
    class 520 and having a claimed utility, property, or function which is
    unprovided for in any of the classes superior to Class 520 on the (B, 3)
    list above is proper for class 520.  Class 520 is also the proper home for
    any composition having a polymer proper for Class 520 where the disclosure
    is limited to a single disclosed utility, property, or function which is
    unprovided for in any of the classes superior to Class 520 on the (B, 3)
    list. A claim that fails to recite a utility, property, or function and
    wherein the disclosure is generic to a number of utilities, properties, or
    functions, some of which are provided for specifically by classes higher on
    the list than Class 520 and others that are provided in Class 520, or that
    are not provided for in any other composition area on the list, should
    generally be cross-referenced into this class (520) on the unprovided or
    provided for utilities, properties, or functions enumerated in the
    disclosure.

    5.      In Class 430, certain disclosures have been excluded, (see section
    III, A,
    (4) therein).  In the circumstance enumerated in Class 430, the patent
    would be classified in Class 520 rather than Class 252 when the composition
    contains a polymer proper for Class 520.

    6.      It is a general rule of classification to classify a process of
    preparing a
    composition along with the composition.  In these circumstances where only
    a process of preparing a composition is claimed and there is no claim to a
    composition, the claims would be classified identically as if there were a
    composition claimed.

            An exception to the general rule above is Class 435, Chemistry:
    Molecular Biology and Microbiology, wherein an enzymatic reaction may have
    produced a particular resin composition.  The composition is properly
    classified in Class 520, while the process is classified in Class 435.

    7.      This superiority list is not intended as a complete list and will be
    expanded or added to as the relationship between classes containing resin
    compositions and Class 520 is determined.

            Class 435 is not on the above list and  may contain a resin
    composition  and see the notes between Class 520 and Class 435.

    (C)     A method of preparing a synthetic resin involving a chemical
    reaction is subject matter proper for Class 520.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes for growing therein-defined
    single-crystal of all types of materials, including inorganic or organic.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclasses for
    producing a product of this class by other than a wave energy process.
    Class 204 is superior to this class, therefore a patent claiming in the
    alternative a process of preparing an organic compound and a synthetic
    resin or natural rubber in the presence of wave energy is classified for
    original purposes in Class 204 and cross-referenced ro this class (520) on
    the basis of wave energy and the synthetic resin or natural rubber species.
     In the situation where an alternative process claim is presented as well
    as a specific process claim to the nonsynthetic resin or nonnatural rubber
    species, and the process is directed to wave energy, the same rule of
    original patent placement applies.  Any process step involving electolysis,
    electric current, electro-osmosis, electolphoresis, electrostati field,
    electrical discharge, or magnetic field and also involving  the preparing
    or treating  or a synthetic resin or natural rubber is properly classified
    in Class 204, even if the wave energy step involved is subsequent to the
    204 step.  Combination of chemical processes falling within the definition
    of Class 520 (other than wave energy) and those methods falling within the
    the definitions of Class 204, are classified in Class 204 when the chemical
    process steps are preparatory to the Class 204 process and are classified
    in Class 520 when the 204 method is precedent to the Class 520 chemical
    step.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, for a process of
    preparing a synthetic resin utilizing a microorganism, tissue cell culture,
    or enzyme.  (See the (22) Note of Class 260).



    (D)     A polymerizable composition that produces a synthetic resin proper
    for Class 520 is classified in this class, i.e., when all necessary
    ingredients are present to produce the synthetic resin, e.g., all monomers
    catalyst, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 182.11+ and 183.11+ for a polymerizable
    composition which is devoid of a necessary reactant or catalyst needed to
    produce the desired synthetic resin.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, for a polymerizable composition which is radiation sensitive and
    limited by claims or disclosure for use in radiation imagery.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, for a polymerizable
    composition containing a microorganism, tissue cell culture, or enzyme.
    (See (22) Note of Class 260.)



    (11)    Note.  The mere fact that the heat and/or pressure is claimed as
    being carried out in a mold or on a surface will not exclude the patent
    from this class; however, inclusion of any specific molding or coating
    steps other than the mere application of heat and/or pressure will be taken
    by the molding or coating class, as the case may be, and see Class 264,
    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes; (31) Note
    in the class definition of Class 260; and the class definition of Class 264
    and Class 427, Coating Processes; (37) Note in the class definitions of
    Class 427.  Classes 264 and 427 provide for nominal molding and coating
    operations, respectively, when a Class 520 compound or composition is not
    claimed.

    (12)    Note.  Class 520 provides for a composition containing a synthetic
    resin for treating textile materials, as for example, compositions for
    oiling or lubricating, rendering antistatic, softening, and silk-soaking,
    excepting detergent, bleaching and mere wetting compositions.  Patents
    which claim a resin composition intended for textile treating and also
    claim (a) processes involving no more than mere application of the
    composition to a textile material, or mere application combined with a
    broadly stated textile operation, and/or (b) textile products characterized
    essentially by the application of the composition, are classified herein.
    For patents which claim only processes of application and/or products
    thereof, or a significant process of applying these compositions, see Class
    8, Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers.  Class 427, Coating Processes, and Class 428, Stock
    Material or Miscellaneous Articles.  For the lines between these classes,
    see the definition of the respective classes.

    (13)    Note.  This class (520) specifically provides the Si-C or Si-H
    containing compositions containing reactants which are claimed as being
    moisture curable; see Class 528, subclasses 10+, and for moisture curable
    N=C=X (X is chalcogen) and liquid polysulfide compositions, respectively.

    (14)    Note.  This class (520) provides for a nonstructured single layered
    web or sheet.


CLS 521/
TTL SYNTHETIC RESINS OR NATURAL RUBBERS -- PART OF THE CLASS  520 SERIES

CLS 521/
TXT I.      GLOSSARY - CLASSES 521,  525,  526, and 528

    The following terms have been used in a number of subclasses throughout
    this part of the classification schedule.  For convenience,  the following
    terms have been arranged into a Glossary.  When any of these terms are used
    in particular subclasses in Classes 521,  526,  and 528,  their meaning is
    to be consistent with the meaning enumerated in this Glossary.

    ALCOHOL
    Denotes an organic compound having the general structure wherein the carbon
    atom bound to the oxygen atom of the hydroxyl group cannot be double bonded
    to oxygen,  sulfur,  selenium,  or tellurium or triple bonded to nitrogen.
    The term as used herein includes phenols.

    ALDEHYDE

    Denotes an organic compound having the general structure (n is 1 or more)
    and wherein the carbon atom bonded to the group is not double bonded to
    oxygen, sulfur,  selenium,  or tellurium,  or triple bonded to nitrogen.

    ALDEHYDE DERIVATIVE

    Denotes:



    A.      Compounds having a X-CH2 -OH group wherein X is other than carbon
    or hydrogen (e.g.,  paraformaldehyde,  methylol derivatives of urea,  etc.).

    B.      Heterocyclic compounds having only carbon,  H,  and oxygen as ring
    members in an alternating manner and in equal amount, i.e., e.g.,
    trioxane,  etc.

    C.      Hexamethylenetetramine or urotropine or derivatives thereof,  e.g.,
    etc.

    A derivative for purposes of this subclass requires the basic ring
    structure of hexamethylenetetramine but wherein the hydrogen atoms may have
    been replaced by other atoms.


    Compounds having a -CH2 OH bonded to atoms other than C,  H,  or oxygen are
    regarded as being two compounds,  for instance,  a methylol derivative of
    melamine is regarded as a mixture of melamine and formaldehyde and methylol
    urea is regarded as being a mixture of urea and formaldehyde. A
    structurally unspecified novolak is proper for this area in that it is
    considered as a mixture of a phenol and an aldehyde.  If a novolak of
    specified structure is claimed to be prepared from specific reactants,
    then classification is proper on the basis of the specific reactants.

    ALDEHYDE-TYPE

    An aldehyde-type reactant is limited to an aldehyde derivative or methylol
    derivative.

    AMINE

    Denotes an organic compound having a nitrogen atom single or double bonded
    to a carbon atom and wherein the carbon atom bonded to the nitrogen atom is
    devoid of a double bond to oxygen,  sulfur,  selenium,  or tellurium or
    triple bonded to nitrogen.  In addition,  those compounds wherein the same
    nitrogen atom is bonded to a       group (X is O,  S,  Se,  or Te) and  to
    a carbon atom which is not double bonded to oxygen,  sulfur,  selenium,  or
    tellurium,  are not considered as being amines, e.g., although amides may
    be considered chemically as amines,  it has been found expedient for these
    classes to exclude compounds containing only amide nitrogen here from.
    Therefore,  as used throughout this area,  the term amide is not to be
    confused as being an amine.  A compound,  however, which contains a
    nitrogen atom bonded to a non-C- carbon atom and which contains either a
    nitrogen atom bonded to a -C- group or an amide group,  is considered as
    being an amine. An organic amine salt of a carboxylic acid has been
    classified as if it were a mixture of an amine and a carboxylic acid.  An
    organic diamine salt of a dicarboxylic acid where the amine salt-forming
    groups are identical is considered as being a single amine compound,
    whereas if the amine groups are different then they are regarded as two
    amine compounds.  Where the amine groups contain two or more nitrogen atoms
    bonded to the same or different noncarbonyl carbon atom then they are to be
    regarded as polyamines.

    BLOCK COPOLYMER:

    1.      The structure is given,  i.e.,  to a long polymer backbone is
    attached or coupled to one or both of its terminal ends one or more
    polymers at least three reactant units in length or;

    2.      the copolymer is named as a block providing that the disclosure is
    otherwise silent as to its structure or,  if the structure is likewise
    given,  it is consistent with that described above or;

    3.      the structure can be ascertained from the following limiting
    process conditions:

    (a)     Treating a nonterminated solid polymer,  that is,  one which is
    terminally active or "living",  with an ethylenic reactant with subsequent
    polymerization to form additional blocks.  The process may be continued to
    produce higher order block copolymers.  For example,  treating dilithiated
    polystyrene with butadiene to yield an ABA block copolymer;

    (b)     two or more nonidentical solid polymer chain ends are coupled
    directly or through the use of a chemical agent.  For example,  the
    coupling of hydroxy terminated solid polybutadiene with hydroxy terminated
    polyethylene glycol terephthalate with phosgene.

    BLOCK-TYPE COPOLYMER:

    1.      The structure is given,  i.e.,  to a long solid polymer backbone
    possessing terminally active sites,  i.e.,  contains functional groups or
    is a "living polymer" is attached or coupled through chemical reaction with
    those functional groups or sites an ethylenic reactant containing one or
    more functional groups or sites, for example,  contacting hydroxy
    terminated polybutadiene with allyl isocyanate or;

    2.      two or more identical solid polymer chain ends are coupled directly
    or through the use of a chemical agent. For purposes here,  identical means
    those polymer segments which contain the same carbon backbone but differ in
    stereoregularity,  e.g.,  isotactic,  syndiotactic,  atactic,  optical
    activity,  or degree of polymerization. Thus,  coupling lithium terminated
    polystyrene segments with molecular weights of 25, 000 and 100, 000,
    respectively,  with stannic chloride is proper for this subclass.

    CARBOXYLIC ACID OR DERIVATIVE

    A carboxylic acid denotes:

    A.      The structure and wherein the carbon atom bonded  to the  group is
    not double bonded to oxygen, sulfur,  selenium, or tellurium or triple
    bonded to nitrogen.

    B.      The structure  n is 1 or more,  e.g., formic acid.

    C.      The structure n is an integer,  e.g.,  oxalic acid,  etc.

    A carboxylic acid derivative denotes:



    Is limited to nitrile,  ester,  anhydride, salt,  amide,  imide,  lactam,
    lactone,  and acyl halide.



    A carboxylic acid anhydride denotes:

    A.      The structure wherein n is one or more and wherein the carbon atom
    bonded to the group is not double bonded to oxygen,  sulfur,  selenium,  or
    tellurium.

    B.      The structure wherein n is aninteger, X is or a carboxylic acid
    derivative as defined in the (1) Note of this subclass.

    C.      The structure

    In A.,  B.,  and C.,  the  group may be joined together in a ring.

    A carboxylic acid ester denotes:

    A.      The structure n is 1 or more, and the carbon atom bonded to the
    group and the carbon atom single bonded to the oxygn atom of the group are
    not double bonded to oxygen,  sulfur,  selenium,  or tellurium,  or not
    triple bonded to nitrogen.

    B.      The structure wherein the carbon atom single bonded to the group is
    not double bonded to oxygen,  sulfur,  selenium,  or tellurium,  or triple
    bonded to nitrogen.

    C.      The structure,  n is an integerand  or a derivative as defined in
    the (1) Note of this subclass

    A carboxylic acid amide denotes:

    A.      The structure,  n is 1  or more and carbon bonded to the  group is
    not double bonded to oxygen,  sulfur,  selenium,  or tellurium,  or triple
    bonded to nitrogen.

    B.      The structure,  n is 1 or more.

    C.      The structure,  n is an integer

    and group or a derivative as defined in the (1) Note of this subclass.

    A nitrile derivative of a carboxylic acid denotes:

    The structure,  n is an integer and

    the carbon bonded to the group is not double bonded to oxygen,  sulfur,
    selenium,  or tellurium.

    An acid chloride denotes:

    A.      The structure, n is 1or more.

    B.      The structure, n is an integer,

    integer, and or a derivative as defined in the (1) Note of this subclass.

    The imide of a carboxylic acid denotes:

    The structure n is 1 or more x is 1 or more

    The lactam of a carboxylic acid denotes:

    The structure n is 1 or more x is 1 or more

    The lactone of a carboxylic acid denotes:

    The structure where n is 1 or more, and x is 1 or  more, and the carbon
    atom bonded to  group and the carbon atom single bonded to the oxygen atom
    of the group are not double bonded to oxygen,  sulfur,  selenium,  or
    tellurium,  or triple bonded to nitrogen.

    The salt of a carboxylic acid denotes:

    A.      The structure wherein X is 1 or more and the group and the X
    component are held together primarily by ionic forces and the carbon bonded
    to the     group is not double bonded to oxygen,  sulfur,  selenium,  or
    tellurium,  or triple bonded to nitrogen.

    B.      The structure,  n  is 1  or more the and the X component are held
    together primarily by ionic forces of attraction.

    C.      The structure, is an  integer, or a derivative as defined in the
    (1) Note of this subclass and the X component and the component are held
    together primarily by ionic forces of attraction. If the above definitions
    of carboxylic acid and their derivatives certain compounds may have more
    than one function,  e.g.,  a lactone is a species of ester,  a lactam is a
    species of an amide.  Compounds which are multifaceted (i.e.,  more than
    one function) are classified on the basis of the first appearing term
    provided in the subclass hierarchy.

    A polycarboxylic reactant requires the presence of at least two carboxylic
    acid groups,  or of at least one carboxylic acid group and at least one
    carboxylic acid derivative, or at least two identical carboxylic acid
    derivatives,  or at least two different carboxylic acid derivatives.

    An anhydride having the general formula

    wherein the group is in a ring is considered as being a polycarboxylic
    acid.  Compounds having both an anhydride and a free carboxylic acid group
    are considered as being tricarboxylic acids,  e.g., etc., and a compound
    containing two anhydride groups is considered as being a tetracarboxylic
    acid, e.g., etc.

    CHEMICAL TREATING AGENT

    Denotes a chemical material which is added to the formed solid polymer and
    which causes or is present during a process wherein a change in a bond of
    the polymer is effected. Claims reacting a "chemical treating agent" are
    classified on the basis of the first-appearing material utilized as part of
    the chemical agent.  No attempt has been made to classify on the basis of
    the chemically active material and therefore all materials in a composition
    are regarded equally (e.g.,  diluent,  reactant,  catalyst,  etc.).
    Processes and products which refer to mere cross-linking,  curing,  or
    vulcanizing will be classified on the basis of the product treated.

    ETHER

    Denotes an organic compound having the

    general structure wherein the carbon bound to the linking oxygen atom
    cannot be double bonded to oxygen,  sulfur,  selenium,  or tellurium,  or
    triple bonded to nitrogen.

    ETHYLENICALLY UNSATURATED

    Requires the presence of two carbon atoms bonded together by a double or
    triple bond,  with the proviso that the double bond is not part of an
    aromatic ring,  or of a ring which shares a double bond with an aromatic
    ring,  e.g.,,  etc.

    GRAFT COPOLYMER

    1.      The structure is given i.e.,  to a longsolid polymer backbone
    (substrate) is attached a pendant (nonterminal) polymer or copolymer
    (superstrate) having at least three reactant units in length or;

    2.      the copolymer is so named as a graft providing that the disclosure
    is otherwise silent as to the structure or,  if structure is likewise
    recited,  it is consistent with that required in A. above or;

    3.      the structure can be ascertained from the following limiting
    process conditions:

    (a)     The disclosure states there is a reaction between a solid
    polymerized unsaturated reactant and an unpolymerized unsaturated reactant
    in the presence of a catalyst or;

    (b)     the disclosure does not state whether or not any reaction has
    occurred between the solid polymerized unsaturated reactant and the
    unpolymerized unsaturated reactant,  but relates that a product is obtained
    which is inseparable by a variety of physical techniques such as,
    extraction,  precipitation,  ion exchange,  etc.

    In the absence of one or more of these requirements the reaction is
    considered to produce a polymeric blend.

    GRAFT-TYPE COPOLYMER

    A.      The structure is given,  i.e.,to a long solid polymer backbone
    (substrate) possessing nonterminal active sites or functional groups is
    attached (grafted) through a chemical reaction with these functional groups
    or sites an ethylenic reactant containing one or more functional groups or
    active sites.  The reaction product may or may not possess unsaturated
    pendant groups depending on the mode of chemical reaction.  The following
    examples will illustrate this point:

    B.      The structure can be ascertained when:

    1.      There is disclosed a reaction between the solid polymerized
    unsaturated reactant and the unpolymerized unsaturated reactant which
    reaction uses specific art-recognized terms,  e.g.,  "esterification,
    acylation,  sulfonylation,  cyanoethylection,  addition to,  reaction or
    condensation with halogenation,  nitration,  sulfonation,  alkylation,
    amination,  etc.: Examples of these reactions would be:

    2.      There is disclosed an interaction between two or more solid
    polymers through their respective nonterminal functional groups or through
    the use of an intermediate reactant or chemical agent,  e.g.,  causing
    salt,  ester,  amide,  urea formation.  Examples of these reactions would
    be:

    (a)     Contacting polypropylene and polyethylene with benzoyl peroxide.

    (b)     Contacting polyvinylamine and polyallylamine with glyoxal.

    (c)     Contacting chloromethylated polystyrene with polyvinylamine.

    (d)     Contacting polyacrylic acid with polyvinylamine.



    In the absence of one or more of the requirements the reaction is
    considered to produce a polymeric blend.

    See the Glossary for the definition of the terms "specified intermediate
    condensation product" and "specified polymer-forming intermediates".

    HETEROCYCLIC

    Denotes an organic compound wherein one or more carbon atoms are covalently
    bonded in a ring system with at least one hetero atom of oxygen,  sulfur,
    nitrogen,  selenium,  or tellurium and there are no other different atoms
    in the ring.

    KETONE

    Denotes an organic compound having the general

    structure (n is 1 or more) and wherein the carbon atoms bonded to the group
    are not double bonded to oxygen,  sulfur,  selenium,  or tellurium. Ketone
    as used throughout includes ketene.

    METALS

    Are limited to elements of atomic numbers 3,  4,  11-13,  19-33,  37-51,
    55-84,  87,  and higher.

    The Group IA metals are Li,  Na,  K,  Rb,  Cs,  Fr.

    The Group IIA metals are Be,  Mg,  Ca,  Sr,  Ba,  Ra.

    The Group IIIA metals are Al,  Ga,  In,  Tl.

    The Group IVA metals are Ge,  Sn,  Pb.

    The Group VA metals are As,  Sb,  Bi.

    The Group VIA metal is Po.

    The Group IB metals are Cu,  Ag,  Au.

    The Group IIB metals are Zn,  Cd,  Hg.

    The Group IIIB metals are Sc,  Y,  La,  Ac.

    The Group IVB metals are Ti,  Zr,  Hf.

    The Group VB metals are V,  Nb,  Ta.

    The Group VIB metals are Cr,  Mo,  W.

    The Group VIIB metals are Mn,  Tc,  Re.

    The Group VIII metals are Fe,  Ru,  Os,  Co,  Rh,  Ir,  Nb,  Pd,  Pt.

    "Transition metal" is limited to elements of atomic numbers 21-29,  39-47,
    57-79,  89,  and higher and does not include Zn,  Cd,  and Hg.

    METHYLOL OR METHYLOL DERIVATIVE

    Methylol or methylol derivative is limited to:

    1.      A compound containing a

    2.      A compound containing a

    3.      A compound containing a

    Y' and Y" are H or hydrocarbon groups; Z is H or a carbon atom.

    T - is an aotm other than C or H.

    A - is a hydrogen or a carbon atom and which carbon atom is bonded to only
    H,  carbon,  or single bonded oxygen atoms.

    X - is H,  part of an ether group,  or an inorganic salt.

    N - is two or more,  B is one or more.

    NONMETALS

    Denote boron,  oxygen,  carbon,  selenium,  tellurium,  nitrogen,  sulfur,
    phosphorus,  silicon,  hydrogen,  fluorine,  chlorine,  bromine,  iodine,
    astatine,  helium,  neon,  argon,  krypton,  xenon,  and radon.

    ORGANIC COMPOUND

    Denotes all compounds having carbon therein and which are further
    characterized by the presence in a molecule of (a) two carbon atoms bonded
    together or (b) one atom of carbon bonded to at least one atom of hydrogen
    or halogen; or (b) one atom of carbon bonded to at least one atom of
    nitrogen by a single or double bond,  with the proviso that hydrocyanic
    acid,  cyanogen,  isocyanic acid,  cyanamide,  cyanogen halides,
    isothiocyanic acid,  and metal carbides are excluded as being organic
    compounds.

    PHENOLIC REACTANT

    The term phenolic reactant as used is intended to include the subject
    matter enumerated below:

    A.      A phenol for purposes of this subclass requires one or more -OH
    groups directly bonded to a nuclear carbon atom of a substituted or
    unsubstituted benzene ring,  which benzene ring can be an individual
    benzene ring or can be part of a polycyclic ring system.

    B.      A phenol ether for purposes of this subclass requires one or more
    -O-C groups wherein the oxygen atom of the -O-C group is directly bonded to
    a nuclear carbon atom of a substituted or unsubstituted benzene ring and
    wherein the carbon atom of the -O-C group is not double bonded to oxygen,
    sulfur,  selenium,  or tellurium or triple bonded to nitrogen.  The benzene
    ring may be an individual benzene ring or may be part of a polycyclic ring
    system.  The following examples of phenol ether are within the definition
    set out above.

    (1)     The -O-C group may itself be part of a cyclic ring system e.g., etc.

    (2)     The carbon of the -O-C group may be a ring atom of a cyclic or
    aromatic ring,  e.g., etc.

    (3)     An inorganic phenolate is an inorganic salt of a phenol (see phenol
    1 above) wherein the hydrogen atom of a -OH group is replaced by a metal or
    an inorganic group.  Tannin or tannic acid is considered to be a
    polyhydroxy polycyclic carboxy-containing phenol.  Crysylic acid is
    considered to be cresol.  Coal tar extracts are considered to be an
    indefinable mixture of ingredients some of which are phenolic in nature.
    Cardanol and anacardic acids are phenolic derivatives.

    (4)     The carbon of the -O-C group may be a terminal carbon atom,  e.g.,
    or may be the carbon atom of a chain,  e.g., etc.

    SPECIFIED INTERMEDIATE CONDENSATION PRODUCT Specified intermediate
    condensation product is limited to:

    1.      Reaction of an aldehyde or derivative and an amine or compound
    containing a group.

    2.      Reaction of an aldehyde or derivative and a phenolic material.

    3.      Reaction of an aldehyde or derivative and a ketone.

    4.      A compound containing  group.

    5.      A compound containing a  group.

    6.      A compound containing a group.

    Y' and Y" are H or hydrocarbon groups,  Z is H or a carbon radical.

    T - is an atom other than H or C radical.

    A - is a hydrogen or carbon atom and which carbon atom is bonded to only H,
     carbon,  or single bonded oxygen atoms.

    X - is H,  part of an ether group,  or an inorganic cation.

    N - is two or more,  B is one or more.

    SPECIFIED POLYMER-FORMING INGREDIENTS

    Specified polymer-forming ingredients are limited to:

    A.      Aldehyde or derivative and a phenolic material.

    B.      Aldehyde or derivative and an amine.

    C.      Aldehyde or derivative and a compound containing

    D.      Aldehyde or derivative and a hydrocarbon.

    E.      Polyepoxides.

    F.      Polyisocyanates and a polyol.

    G.      Polyisocyanates and a polyamine.

    H.      Polyisocyanates and a polycarbocylic acid or anhydride.

    I.      Carbonic acid or carbonate and a polyol.

    J.      Hal-C-hal and a polyol.

    K.      Polycarboxlic acid or derivative and a polyol.

    L.      Polycarboxylic acid or derivative and a polyamine.

    M.      Aldehyde or derivative and a compound containing N-S group.

    SPECIFIED MATERIAL

    Denotes the intentional and deliberate presence of a material (other than
    as a reactant monomer) during the polymerization reaction,  which material
    may be removed subsequent to the polymerization,  or which may remain with
    or in the final desired polymeric product.

    A.      The term "specified material" is limited to:

    1.      An amount of a material,  e.g.,  two percent of a material,  etc.

    2.      a.      A recitation of at least one specified element in a
    compound or in elemental form,  e.g.,  oxygen liberating compound,  peroxy
    compound,  chlorine-containing,  etc.

    b.      Groups of elements which can be identified from the periodic table
    (other than metal or nonmetal),  e.g.,  Group IA,  transition metal,
    halogen-containing,  etc.

    c.      Compounds which have identified art meaning,  e.g.,  alcohol,
    ethers,  esters,  etc.

    B.      Examples of material which are described in mere functional terms
    and are thereby excluded as being a "specified material" since they do not
    meet the parameters set out in (1) and (2) above are terms such as free
    radical catalyst,  redox catalyst,  emulsifier,  dispersant,  base,  acid,
    organic medium,  etc.

    C.      Water in any of its physical forms,  inert gases (Group VIIIA),
    hydrocarbons and chlorinated hydrocarbons are specifically excluded from
    this area as being specified material even if specifically recited as to
    name,  e.g.,  chloroform,  etc.,  or as to amount,  e.g.,  two percent of
    chloroform.  A search for these materials requires a search of the
    appropriate product area.

    II.     GUIDELINES - CLASSES 521,  525,  526,  and 528

    Those processes and resultant products which involve a polymerization
    process in the presence of a specified nonpolymerizable material may on
    certain occasions be classified in those Class 260 subclasses which are
    identified as being with "subclasses",  i.e.,  3+,  6+,  9+,  17.5,  18+,
    24+,  28+,  29.1+,  37+,  and 45.7+.

    The following guidelines are to be used in determining whether a claim is
    proper for the "with" subclasses (denoted for purposes herein as being
    compositions) or for Class 525,  526,  or 528,  appropriate subclasses
    therein.

    (A)     A general rule for purposes of distinguishing between the "with"
    area of Class 260 and Class 525,  526,  or 528 is that patent claims have
    generally been classified on the terms in the claims and such terms have
    been generally given their normal and customary meaning,  unless the terms
    thereby would be inconsistent with the disclosure taken as a whole,  e.g.,
    claim is to a resinous product having certain properties,  the disclosure
    indicates that the desired result is due to the admixture of the resin and
    an additive,  classification would be proper in the "with" area.

    (B)     The disclosure required for placement into the "with" area
    (compositions) is more than mere statements such as that the "specified
    material" can be left in the final product or that the material added
    remains as an impurity without having any detrimental effect on the polymer
    characteristics.  For purposes of placement of claims involving
    polymerization process there must be a specified desirous intent to form a
    composition with the additive.

    (C)     When any doubt remains or is unresolved as to whether the
    "specified material" meets the required test as to forming a composition
    then that doubt is to be resolved by classifying the claims into Class 525,
     526,  or 528.

    (D)     In those instances where the patentee is desirous of forming either
    a composition or a Class 525,  526,  or 528 compound,  classification is
    then proper in the composition area with cross-referencing into Class 525,
    526 or 528.


CLS 521/25
TXT Subject matter under Class 520,  subclass 1 drawn to a solid ion-exchange
    polymeric material containing ionic groups exchangeable with other ionic
    groups.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are ion-exchange solid polymeric
    materials which are claimed as such or which are disclosed as having a
    utility as an ion-exchange polymer as well as processes of making such
    materials. Included in this class are polymeric materials,  mixtures,  and
    compositions which can be converted to ion-exchange materials by chemical
    reactions,  processes of making such compositions,  as well as mixtures of
    materials at least one of which is an ion-exchange material or is capable
    of forming an ion-exchange material and wherein the intent is to form an
    ion-exchange material.  Also,  this subclass includes amphoteric solid
    ion-exchange polymeric materials.

    (2)     Note.  The ionic groups can be acidic and/or basic groups thereby
    forming cationic,  anionic or amphoteric ion-exchange polymeric materials.
    Typical cationic groups are:  Sulfonic acid (-SO3H),  carboxylic acid
    (-COOOH),  hydroxyl (-OH),  phosphonic (-PO3H2) groups and typical anionic
    groups are -NH2,   =NH, --N groups as well as quaternary groups such as
    quaternary ammonium,  sulfonium,  phosphonium,  arsonium,  antimonium or
    hydrosulfide groups.

    (3)     Note.  Each of the subclasses herein provide for ion-exchange
    products with the exception of subclass 26 which is drawn solely to
    processes of regenerating.  In those instances wherein only ion-exchange
    products are claimed and wherein the product claims fail to recite a mode
    of preparation,  then such products are to be classified on the basis of
    the disclosure as to the process of preparing the particular ion-exchange
    product.

    (4)     Note.  Purification of an ion-exchange polymer (A) to physically or
    chemically remove impurities therefrom (without chemically modifying the
    polymer) is classified on the basis of the ion-exchange polymer (B) which
    is purified.

    (5)     Note.  The line between this subclass and Class 210 as well as the
    compound and compositions classes is as follows:



    (A)     When a patent contains a claim to an ion-exchange polymer and also
    a claim to a process involving the mere treatment of a liquid therewith,
    event though the specific nature of the liquid is claimed,  the patent is
    classified in Class 521 and cross-referenced to the appropriate treating
    class. If all the claims are drawn to a process of treating liquids with
    ion-exchange polymers, or any claim includes a significant treatment step,
    the patent is classified in the appropriate treating class and
    cross-referenced to this class (521) when necessary.

    (B)     If a chemical reaction occurs so as to produce a new desirous
    material,  then the patent is classified as an original in the class
    providing for that particular material,  i.e.,  in the compound classes if
    a compound and in the composition classes if a new composition,  with the
    proviso that if an organic compound proper for Class 260 is produced then
    that patent is still classified in this area and is cross-referenced into
    the appropriate organic compound area.


CLS 521/26
TXT Subject matter under subclass 25 directed to a used ion-exchange polymer
    which used ion-exchange polymer is subjected to a chemical treatment to
    effect regenerating to essentially its original ion-exchange polymeric form.

    (1)     Note.  Regenerating is meant to include chemical treatment of a
    used ion-exchange polymer thereby rendering the treated polymer to assume
    essentially its original ion-exchange polymeric form.

    (2)     Note.  Purification of a contaminated ion-exchange polymer by
    physical or chemical means is classified with the ion-exchange polymer
    purified.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    523,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 310+ for a process
    of forming a desirable composition of a polymer involving the use of
    ion-exchange or sorptive material or semipermeable membrane in the process.

    528,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 482 for the treatment
    of a polymer with an ion-exchange material to effect purification of the
    polymer.


CLS 521/27
TXT Subject matter under subclass 25 wherein the ion-exchange polymer is in the
    form of a membrane.

    (1)     Note.  By membrane is meant a thin sheet or film generally having
    some degree of permeability, and which may be homogenous or heterogenous in
    structure, and the the latter case the ion-exchange material is a component
    of a composition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 500.21, (2) Note for
    the lines between this class (521) and other classes with respect to
    membranes defined by composition.


CLS 521/28
TXT Subject matter under subclass 25 wherein a previously formed solid
    ion-exchange polymer is admixed with (1) a different ion-exchange polymer,
    or (2) with a material which is inert towards the ion-exchange polymer and
    wherein there is an intent to form a desirous composition therewith.

    (1)     Note.  The material admixed with the ion-exchange polymer as in (2)
    above can include materials capable of becoming ion-exchange materials on
    further processing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25+,    for an admixture of an ion-exchange material and a material which
    is inert to the ion-exchange material and is intended to be removed in a
    later processing operation.

    30+,    for an admixture of an ion-exchange material and a reactant which
    is intended to chemically modify the ion-exchange polymer.


CLS 521/29
TXT Subject matter under subclass 25 wherein the ion-exchange polymer is
    characterized by having a defined size or shape.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for (1) processes of producing
    ion-exchange polymers having defined shape or dimension, or (2) for
    ion-exchange polymer having a desired shape or dimension.

    (2)     Note.  Ion-exchange polymers having a defined shape produced by
    suspension polymerization (bead or pearl) are excluded from this subclass
    and are classified below on the basis of the particular reactants
    polymerized.

    (3)     Note.  Included in this subclass are ion-exchange polymers having
    defined geometric shape such as spherical, granular, filamental, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, for a particular
    ion-exchange polymer having a defined dimension or for ion-exchange
    polymers having structure sufficient for placement in that class.


CLS 521/30
TXT Subject matter under subclass 25 wherein a solid polymer is ionically
    modified by using a reactive chemical agent so as to form an ion-exchange
    polymer.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are chemical modifications of a
    preformed ionic polymer by ionic interchange, as well as modifications of
    ionic polymers by oxidation, reduction, hydrolyzation, saponification and
    the like.

    (2)     Note.  Patents are placed in this area on the basis of the original
    monomers that were reacted to produce a solid polymer.

    (3)     Note.  When an aftertreated product is claimed which has no
    specific indent subclass provided, for example, a carboxylated
    polyacrylonitrile, such patent is placed in subclass 31 as an original
    since the original solid polymer has been derived from only an
    ethylenically unsaturated reactant, i.e., acrylonitrile, and since the
    aftertreatment involved no nitrogen or sulfur reactant.  If, however, a
    polymer is initially carboxylated and then reacted with a sulfur material
    the patent is placed in subclass 33.  In addition, if a carboxylated
    polyacrylonitrile is further treated with a sulfur material, the patent is
    placed in subclass 33.


CLS 521/31
TXT Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein the ion-exchange polymer is
    derived by the polymerization of only ethylenically unsaturated reactants.

    (1)     Note.  See "GLOSSARY" for a definition of the term "ethylenically
    unsaturated".


CLS 521/32
TXT Subject matter under subclass 31 wherein the solid polymer is chemically
    treated with a nitrogen-containing material.

    (1)     Note.  The nitrogen-containing material usually renders the polymer
    anionic in character.


CLS 521/33
TXT Subject matter under subclass 31 wherein the solid polymer is chemically
    treated with a sulfur-containing material.

    (1)     Note.  The sulfur-containing material usually renders the polymer
    cationic in character.


CLS 521/34
TXT Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein the solid polymer is derived from
    a 1, 2-epoxy-containing reactant.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this class are alkylene oxides, epichlorhydrin
    and derivatives thereof.


CLS 521/35
TXT Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein the solid polymer is derived from
    an aldehyde or derivative thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See "GLOSSARY" for a definition of the term "aldehyde".

    (2)     Note.  See Class 528, subclass 230 for a clarification of the term
    "aldehyde derivative."


CLS 521/36
TXT Subject matter under subclass 35 wherein the solid polymer is chemically
    treated with a nitrogen-containing material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    525,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 472+ for a chemical
    modification of a solid polymeric material derived from an aldehyde or
    derivative thereof.


CLS 521/37
TXT Subject matter under subclass 35 wherein the solid polymer is chemically
    treated with a sulfur-containing material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    525,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 472+ for chemical
    modification of a solid polymer derived from an aldehyde or derivative
    thereof.


CLS 521/38
TXT Subject matter under subclass 25 wherein an ion-exchange polymer is derived
    from ethylenically unsaturated monomers only.


CLS 521/39
TXT Subject matter under subclass 25 wherein an ion-exchange polymer is derived
    from an aldehyde or derivative thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See "GLOSSARY" for a definition of the term "aldehyde".

    (2)     Note.  See Class 528, subclass 230 for a clarification of the term
    "aldehyde derivative".


CLS 521/40
TXT PROCESS OF TREATING SCRAP OR WASTE PRODUCT CONTAINING SOLID ORGANIC POLYMER
    TO RECOVER OR PRODUCE A SOLID POLYMER THEREFROM: Subject matter under Class
    520,  subclass 1 involving (a) process of recovery or producing solid
    organic synthetic polymer from polymeric scrap or waste product,  or (b)
    process of preparing solid organic synthetic polymer from polymeric scrap
    or waste product by degradation of the polymeric scrap or waste product to
    monomer or low molecular weight prepolymer of a physically unseparated
    (i.e,  nonfractionated) mixture thereof which is then reacted with another
    chemical species to generate another solid synthetic organic polymer.

    (1)     Note.  Only those patents with process claims of treating scrap or
    waste product of synthetic resins of the Class 520,  subclass 1 type are
    classified herein.  A patent with claims drawn to a process of reclaiming,
    recovering,  or regenerating would be classified herein since it would
    inherently require a scrap or waste product.  However, a patent with a
    claim drawn only to a process of separating would not be classified herein
    since a scrap or waste product is not inherently required.  Process claims
    which require a reclaimed material are also classified herein, provided the
    reclaimed material is of the Class 521 type.  For these patents the
    disclosure of how the material was reclaimed, if stated, and the claims
    themselves are used for the original classification.  A patent which claims
    a process using an unclaimed scrap or waste product is classified herein
    only if the scrap or waste product is the sole disclosure in the
    specification. For example, a patent which claims a process of reacting
    component A with component B where component A is a phenolic resin and
    component B is either natural rubber, styrene-butadiene copolymer, or
    rubber tire waste product would not be classified (as an original) herein.
    However, if composition A was drawn only to rubber tire waste product, the
    patent would be classified herein.

    (2)     Note.  The terms "polymer" and "polymeric" refer either to homo- or
    copolymers.

    (3)     Note.  A process of recovering or producing refers to a process in
    which a nonworkable polymeric scrap or waste product is converted to a
    workable (i.e., nonscrap or -waste) solid synthetic polymer.

    (4)     Note.  A process of recovering specifically refers to a process
    wherein the chemical bonds of the polymer in the polymeric scrap or waste
    product are not extensively broken, i.e., the molecular weight of the
    intermediate and final products are not substantially different from the
    molecular weight of the polymer contained in the scrap or waste product.
    Included under the definition of recovering is the process of treating a
    polymeric scrap or waste product with either a solid polymer or solid
    polymer forming system to produce a solid polymer containing material.
    Processes of recovering polymeric scrap or waste product by mere grinding,
    or grinding and mixing with another material, etc., are also place herein.
    Search subclasses below for comminuted "virgin" solid polymer or in Class
    241 for comminution processes and apparatus.

    (5)     Note.  A process of producing specifically refers to the process
    wherein the chemical bonds of the polymer in the polymeric scrap or waste
    product are extensively broken, i.e., the molecular weight of the
    intermediate is substantially different from the molecular weight of the
    polymer contained in the scrap or waste product.  Such low molecular
    weight oligomers or prepolymers are physically unseparated mixtures (see
    Note 7 below) and are then allowed to undergo further polymerization in
    order to obtain a solid synthetic organic polymer.

    (6)     Note.  A polymer scrap or waste product refers to a solid product
    which is unuseable (or functionless) in its present form (i.e., without
    undergoing one of the three treatments above) due to at least one of a wide
    variety of impurities and/or undesirable constituent(s) or due to
    prevailing physical or chemical properties (e.g., degree of crosslinking,
    insolubility, etc.).  Patents which employ only synonyms for scrap or waste
    product such as "by-product", "discard", "reject", etc., are classified
    herein provided they meet the above and below-stated requirements.

    (7)     Note.  A physically unseparated mixture refers to a desired
    degradation fragment consisting of a mixture of compounds, polymers,  or
    other constituents which are reasonably known or are hypothecated.  Patents
    relating to physically separated oligomers or low molecular weight
    prepolymers from degradation processes are excluded herefrom, regardless if
    they are or are not utilized in further polymerization processes.

    (8)     Note.  The polymeric scrap or waste product must contain a polymer
    from Class 521, i.e., a synthetic resin, to be classified herein.  A
    process drawn to a polymeric scrap or waste product, where said polymeric
    scrap or waste product contains a mixture of a synthetic resin and a resin
    not normally classified in Class 521, would be classified herein.

    (9)     Note.  A process drawn to treating a polymeric scrap or waste
    product to obtain a liquid product is excluded herefrom.  However, if a
    liquid product is recovered which is polymerized in an additional step to
    produce a product proper for Class 521, such subject matter would be proper
    for this subclass.

    (10)    Note.  A process drawn to treating a polymeric scrap or waste
    product to obtain a product containing a solid synthetic organic polymer
    normally found in Class 521, along with a variety of other products, would
    be classified herein.

    (11)    Note.  A process related to the recovery of two or more polymers
    and/or prepolymers from a scrap or waste material containing two or more
    polymers and/or prepolymers are classified as an original under the polymer
    or prepolymer which appears first in the schedule below even if said
    polymer is not the desirable product to be recovered, for example, a patent
    claiming treating a polyester scrap comprising a base layer of polyester
    and a sublayer of nondesirable polyvinyl chloride would be classified in
    subclass 46.5 which is the polyvinyl chloride subclass.

    (12)    Note.  A treating material is defined to be any material, reactant
    or nonreactant, which comes into contact with the scrap or waste product.
    Thus, a nonscrap or waste solid polymer may be a treating agent.

    (13)    Note.  A process related to the treatment of scrap or waste product
    with another material is classified with the first-appearing material in
    the schedule, regardless of the order performed.  For example, a synthetic
    rubber scrap product treated with a fluorinated alcohol to yield a
    reclaimed material which is mixed with an acrylonitrile-butadiene copolymer
    would be classified in subclass 42.  On the other hand, a rubber scrap
    dissolved in methanol and then treated with polyethylene would be
    classified in subclass 44.

    (14)    Note.  A process of treating a scrap or waste product, where said
    scrap or waste product is a phenolic resin, such as a phenolformaldehyde
    novolak or resole, is classified in subclass 40.

    (15)    Note.  A process of treating a scrap or waste product, wherein said
    scrap or waste product is a urea-formaldehyde resin, is classified in
    subclass 40.

    (16)    Note.  A process of treating a scrap or waste product, wherein said
    scrap or waste product is unspecified, is classified in subclass 40.

    (17)    Note.  Subclasses 40 through 49.8 are only for the processes of
    treating scrap or waste products.  Products of these processes are
    classified in the appropriate classes below, i.e., either Class 523, 524,
    525, 526, 527, or 528.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, appropriate subclasses for a process of treating a
    polymeric scrap or waste product to obtain a nonresinous product or polymer
    having a special utility exemplified by Class 8.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, appropriate subclasses for a
    process of treating a polymeric scrap or waste product, said scrap or waste
    product being a coating or plastic composition, such as an alkyd-modified
    resin.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, appropriate
    subclasses for a process of comminution wherein the larger mass, before
    comminution is made up of a plurality of dissimilar materials, and
    following comminution and separation, the constituent parts of the same
    mass are recombined.

    252,    Compositions, appropriate subclasses for a process of treating a
    polymeric scrap or waste product to obtain a composition having a special
    utility proper for Class 252.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 37+ for a process of recycling of a reclaimed polymeric scrap or
    waste product involving a process proper for Class 264.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses for a process of treating a polymeric scrap or waste product to
    obtain a composition having a utility proper for Class 424.

    521,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 40+ for a process
    of treating a polymeric scrap or waste product to obtain a natural rubber,
    e.g., a process of treating a blend of natural and synthetic rubber to
    recover the natural rubber.

    523,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 129 for a process
    wherein a filler or nonreactive organic additive is obtained from municipal
    waste product which is then blended with a synthetic resin.

    525,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses for a
    process of treating a polymeric scrap or waste product to obtain a
    physically separated solid oligomer or solid prepolymer which is then
    reacted with another material as an aftertreatment.

    526     and 528, Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate
    subclasses for a process of treating a polymeric scrap or waste product to
    obtain a physically separated liquid oligomer or liquid prepolymer which is
    then reacted with another material as an aftertreatment; or for products
    which are the result of a Class 521, subclasses 40+ process.


CLS 521/40.5
TXT Process of treating scrap or waste product containing at least one polymer
    derived from ethylenic unsaturated monomers only: Subject matter under
    subclass 40 wherein the scrap or waste product contains at least one
    polymer which is derived from only ethylenic unsaturated monomers.


CLS 521/41
TXT Treating rubber (or rubberlike materials)or polymer derived from a monomer
    having at least two ethylenic unsaturated moieties: Subject matter under
    subclass 40.5 wherein the scrap or waste product either contains rubber (or
    rubberlike materials) or is derived for a monomer having at least two
    points of ethylenic unsaturation.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are processes of treating a polymeric scrap
    or waste product which is a mixture of two synthetic resins, e.g.,
    polyacrylo-nitrile or poly (methyl) methacrylate and a polymer derived for
    a monomer having at least two points of ethylenic unsaturation, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    40.5,   for a process of treating a polymeric scrap or waste product, said
    polymeric scrap or waste product being derived solely from a monoolefinic
    unit which is not provided for below, e.g., polyacrylonitrile, poly
    (methyl) methacrylate, etc.


CLS 521/41.5
TXT Treating with organic phosphorus-containing material:

    Subject matter under subclass 41 wherein the process requires an organic
    phosphorus containing material.


CLS 521/42
TXT Treating with organic nitrogen-containing material:

    Subject matter under subclass 41 wherein the process requires an organic
    nitrogen-containing material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes the use of an organic
    nitrogen-containing material as a solvent, catalyst, or other function.


CLS 521/42.5
TXT Treating with organic chalcogen-containing material:

    Subject matter under subclass 41 wherein the process requires an organic
    chalcogen-containing material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes use of an organic chalcogen material
    as a solvent, catalyst, or other function.

    (2)     Note.  Chalcogen is defined to be any one (or combination) of the
    following oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium.


CLS 521/43
TXT Containing organic sulfur:

    Subject matter under subclass 42.5 wherein the organic chalcogen material
    contains sulfur.


CLS 521/43.5
TXT Containing carboxylic acid or anhydride group:

    Subject matter under subclass 42.5 wherein the organic chalcogen material
    is a carboxylic acid or the anhydride thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See the glossary under carboxylic acid for a definition of
    the term "carboxylic acid or anhydride".


CLS 521/44
TXT Containing hydroxyl group:

    Subject matter under subclass 42.5 wherein the organic chalcogen material
    contains the hydroxyl moiety, -OH.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes alcohols, ROH, and phenols, ArOH.


CLS 521/44.5
TXT Treating with hydrocarbon or halogenated hydrocarbon material:

    Subject matter under subclass 41 wherein the process requires a hydrocarbon
    or a halogenated hydrocarbon.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes the use of a hydrocarbon or
    halogenated hydrocarbon as solvent.


CLS 521/45
TXT Treating with steam or water:

    Subject matter under subclass 41 wherein the process requires steam or
    water that has been substantially purified.

    (1)     Note.  A process which requires a 6N acid would not be classified
    herein but a process which requires a 6N acid followed by a spraying or
    washing of water would be classified herein.


CLS 521/45.5
TXT Treating with mechanical action and in the absence of a chemically reactive
    additive or solvent:

    Subject matter under subclass 41 wherein the process involves mechanical
    action and wherein chemical active materials or solvents are not utilized.

    (1)     Note.  Recovery of polymers solely by means of heat is considered
    to be mechanical action.

    (2)     Note.  Although chemically active materials and solvents have been
    excluded herefrom, chemically nonactive additives which may effect the
    process are included, e.g., dyes, fillers, pigments, etc.


CLS 521/46
TXT Treating polymer derived from a monomer containing only carbon, hydrogen,
    and halogen or only carbon and halogen; or treating a polymer which has
    been derived from at least one hydrocarbon and which has been subsequently
    halogenated:

    Subject matter under subclass 40.5 wherein the scrap or waste product
    contains a halogenated hydrocarbon.

    (1)     Note.  The sequence of obtaining the halogenated polymeric scrap or
    waste product, i.e., whether the halogenated polymer was obtained by
    polymerizing a halogenated monomer or by halogenating the polymer itself,
    is considered to be immaterial.  Note, however, the polymeric scrap or
    waste product must be halogenated before the scrap or waste product is
    treated to recover or produce the solid polymer to be classified herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for a process of treating a waste or scrap material where said
    waste or scrap material contains a halogenated hydrocarbon.


CLS 521/46.5
TXT Treating polymer derived from vinyl chloride monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 wherein the polymeric scrap or waste
    product is derived from at least one monomer which is vinyl chloride.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein would be a scrap or waste product either
    containing a mixture of polyethylene and polyvinyl chloride or a vinyl
    chloride-vinyl acetate copolymer.


CLS 521/47
TXT Treating polymer derived from hydrocarbon monomers only:

    Subject matter under subclass 40.5 wherein the olefinic units (and hence
    the polymeric scrap or waste product) contain only carbon and hydrogen.


CLS 521/47.5
TXT Treating polysiloxane:

    Subject matter under subclass 40 wherein the scrap or waste product
    contains polysiloxane.


CLS 521/48
TXT Treating polyester:

    Subject matter under subclass 40 wherein the scrap or waste product
    contains a polyester whose polymer backbone was derived through the direct
    formation of the ester linkage, i.e.,

     - O  , and must link through the carbonyl group.

    (1)     Note.  Polymerization of di- or higher esters of polycarboxylic
    acids, lactones, lactides, glycolide, hydroxy-substituted carboxylic acids
    or derivatives; or condensation of polyols with polycarboxylic acids or
    derivatives and polyketenes all produce polyesters proper for this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  A mere disclosure of a polyester in which the method of
    making said polyesters is not claimed or disclosed is presumed to lie
    within the definition of this subclass.


CLS 521/48.5
TXT Treating with alcohol:

    Subject matter under subclass 48 wherein said polyester scrap or waste
    product is treated with an alcohol.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes the use of an alcohol as solvent.


CLS 521/49
TXT Treating polyurethane, polyurea (excluding urea-formaldehyde polymers):
    polyisocyanurate or polycarbodimide:

    Subject matter under subclass 40 wherein the scrap or waste product
    contains either a polyurethane, polyurea, polylsocyanurate, or a
    polycarbodimide.

    (1)     Note.  A polyurethane is defined to be a polymer containing the
    moiety,

    -N- - O -, and is generally prepared for a polyocyanate and a polyol or
    from a bishaloformate and a diamine.

    (2)     Note.  A polyurea is defined to be a polymer containing the
    moiety,-NN-, and is generally prepared from either a diamine and a
    dilsocyanate, a diamine and urea, a diamine and phosgene or a
    bishaloformate and a diamine.

    (3)     Note.  A polyisocyanurate is defined to be a polymer containing the
    cyclic moiety                       Oand is generally derived from a
    polyisocyanate.

    (4)     Note.  A polycarbodiimide is defined to be a polymer containing the
    moiety, -N=C=N-, and is generally defined from two or more polyisocyanates.

    (5)     Note.  A mere disclosure of a polyurethane, polyurea,
    polyisocyanurate or polycarbodimide in which the method of making said
    polymer is not claimed or disclosed is presumed to lie within the
    definition of this subclass.


CLS 521/49.5
TXT Treating with alcohol or amine:

    Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein said polymeric scrap or waste
    product is treated with an alcohol or amine.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes the use of an alcohol or amine as
    solvent.


CLS 521/49.8
TXT Treating polycarbonamide:

    Subject matter under subclass 40 wherein the scrap or waste product
    contains a polycarbonamide.

    (1)     Note.  A polycarbonamide is defined to be a polymer containing
    either at leasttwo or more N- units, e.g., nylon 6, nylon 6-6 or a
    polyimide unit,N, and is generally derived either from an amino carboxylic
    acid or derivative; a diamine and a dicarboxylic acid; or a dicarboxylic
    acid derivative, a diacid halide, and a diamine; or is derived from the
    condensation of lactams.

    (2)     Note.  A mere disclosure of a polycarbonamide in which the method
    of making said polycarbonamide isn't claimed or disclosed is presumed to
    lie within the definition of this subclass.


CLS 521/50
TXT CELLULAR PRODUCTS OR PROCESSES OF PREPARING A CELLULAR PRODUCT, E.G.,
    FOAMS, PORES, CHANNELS, ETC.:

    Subject matter under Class 520, subclass 1, drawn to cellular products
    containing at least one solid synthetic polymer or to processes of
    preparing a cellular product containing at least a solid synthetic polymer.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes in addition to cellular products or
    processes of preparing same for (1) processes of preparing a composition
    which is capable of forming a cellular product upon exposure to heat or
    pressure, or to the composition, per se, or for (2) processes of treating a
    cellular product with a material which reacts with or forms a desired
    composition therewith, or purifies or treats in some other manner the
    cellular product and is not elsewhere provided for or cellular products
    thereof; or (3) processes of preparing a composition which is capable of
    forming a cellular product by removing a material therefrom without
    expansion of the composition or to the composition, per se.

    (2)     Note.  Included within the definition of cellular products are
    foamed products and products which contain pores, cavities, voids,
    interstices, or fissures.

    (3)     Note.  In order to be proper for this subclass the final product
    must be a cellular product and must contain a solid synthetic polymer.
    Destruction of the cellular product as by grinding, etc., and wherein a
    noncellular solid polymer is recovered is excluded herefrom. Solid polymer
    as used throughout this schedule does not exclude polymers which would be
    solid except that under the conditions of use their physical state has been
    changed to satisfy the process conditions required, e.g., molten, dissolved.

    (4)     Note.  In order to be proper for this and the indented subclasses
    hereunder, those claims which recite a cell forming composition must recite
    that the composition has been perfected in some manner that is specific to
    the cellular property, e.g., adding a blowing agent, adding of cell
    stabilizing surfactants, etc. Compositions which are complete or near
    complete and which merely require the application of heat or the addition
    of air are proper for classification herein.

    (5)     Note.  The general line between this area and other areas of Class
    520 is that claims to preparing, treating, or to a porous or cellular
    product is as follows:

    (A)     When a cellular containing product is inherently produced in a
    polymerization process (no control of process parameters so as to produce a
    cell containing product) then one must look to the specification to see if
    the use of the final cellular product is consistent with the use normally
    associated with a cellular product. If use is consistent with uses
    associated with a cellular product, classification is proper in this area.

    (B)     When a cellular product is claimed which is the product of a
    noncellular-type polymerization process, e.g., bead, pearl, etc., and
    wherein no later step is involved to introduce pores or any additional cell
    structure therein, then classification is as enumerated in (5A) above.

    (6)     Note.  A general outline of subclasses 50 - 189 is as follows:

    (A)     Subclass 50 provides for all subject matter within the subclass
    definition.

    (B)     Subclass 51 provides for processes of preparing a cellular product
    only.

    (C)     Subclass 52 provides for all subject matter pertinent to a
    reticulated product, e.g., processes, products, etc.

    (D)     Subclasses 53 - 55 provide for processes of treating; or for
    treated cellular products; or for compositions containing a cellular
    product and a treating agent; or processes of preparing such a composition.

    (E)     Subclasses 56 - 77 provided for processes of preparing a cellular
    product for cell forming compositions or processes of preparing.

    (F)     Subclasses 78 - 81 provide for processes of preparing a cellular
    product.

    (G)     Subclasses 82 - 133 provide for processes of preparing a cellular
    product in the presence of a stated ingredient; for cell forming
    compositions containing a stated ingredient; or processes of preparing a
    cell forming composition.

    (H)     Subclasses 134 - 189 provide for cellular products; for processes
    of preparing a cellular product in the absence of a stated ingredient; for
    a cell forming composition devoid of a stated ingredient or processes of
    preparing same; for processes of treating a cellular product with a
    material which neither reacts with the cellular product nor which is
    intended to form a composition therewith.

    (7)     Note.  The term "stated ingredient" denotes the intentional and
    deliberate presence of an ingredient (other than a monomer or reactant
    which forms the polymer backbone) during a cell forming process.


    I.      The term "stated ingredient" is limited to:

    A.      An amount of a material, e.g., 2 percent of a material, etc.

    B.      (1)     A recitation of at least one specified element in compound
    or in elemental form, e.g., oxygen-liberating compound, peroxy compound,
    chloride-containing, etc.

    (2)     Groups of elements which can be identified from the periodic table
    (other than metal or nonmetal), e.g., Group IA, transition metal,
    halogen-containing, etc.

    (3)     Compounds which have identified art meaning, e.g., alcohol, ethers,
    ester, etc.

    II.     Examples of materials which are described in mere functional terms
    and are thereby excluded as being "stated ingredient" since they do not
    meet the parameters set out in I, A and B above are terms such as free
    radical catalyst, redox catalyst, emulsifier, dispersant, base, acid,
    organic medium, blowing agent, etc.

    (8)     Note.  Patents which claim an "in situ" preparation of the "stated
    ingredient" in the presence of the monomer or reactants which form the
    backbone polymer are classified on the materials which are introduced and
    co-react to form the "in situ" stated ingredient.

    (9)     Note.  Patents in this area are to be classified on the basis of
    the claimed final compound or composition that is introduced into the
    reaction zone and is in direct contact with any of the monomers or
    reactants therein.  If it is not possible to so classify the introduced
    material, classification is then made on the basis of the individual
    reactants used in the preparation of the unknown material. In the event
    that the claims recite both the individual reactants and identify the
    product formed there from, then the original classification should be made
    in the subclass that provides for the known product and a cross-reference
    should be placed in the appropriate subclass that provides for the
    reactants.

    (10)    Note.  Claims to an after-treated product are classified on the
    basis of the actual monomers or reactants used in the preparation of the
    polymer to be after-treated rather than on the after-treated polymer, per
    se.  Furthermore, polymers which are to be after-treated and which already
    have been exposed to a preliminary after-treatment step, (e.g., halogenated
    polymer, alkylated polymer, etc.) are classified on the basis of the
    unsaturated monomers or reactants used in the preparation of the polymer.

    (11)    Note.  Subject matter drawn to mixed solid polymers or to mixtures
    of a solid polymer and a polymer forming system incorporates for the most
    part the definitions of Class 525. Enumerated below are types of subject
    matter properly classifiable in Class 521, subclasses 50+ and which have
    been specifically enumerated so as to clarify any discrepancy in the Class
    525 definitions.

    (A)     A mixture of similar types or different types of solid polymers.

    (B)     A mixture of a solid polymer and a resinifiable intermediate
    condensation product, the latter being known to form a solid polymer under
    the conditions of the reaction if the performed solid polymer were not
    present.

    (C)     A mixture of a solid polymer and reactable materials, the latter
    materials being known to react to form a solid polymer under the conditions
    of the reaction if the preformed polymer were not present.

    (D)     A mixture of a solid polymer and a resinifiable intermediate, the
    latter combining with the solid polymer and polymerizing under the
    conditions of the reaction.

    (E)     A mixture of a solid polymer and reactable materials, the latter
    combining with the solid polymer and polymerizing under the conditions of
    the reaction.

    (F)     A mixture of a solid polymer and an ethylenic reactant.

    (G)     In (A) above any difference is sufficient to render the polymers
    nonidentical, even if both are made of the same monomeric materials.  This
    includes, e.g., two polystyrenes of different density or crystallinity, two
    diene rubbers of different Mooney viscosity, etc.

    (H)     In general, reactable materials (or monomer), as used herein are
    distinguished from a resinifiable intermediate condensation product by the
    fact that the former is a definite compound of certain composition or
    structure, whereas the latter is the result of a reaction of one or more
    nonresinous materials to yield a product which is not a specific compound,
    but rather a complex mixture of products identifiable only on the basis of
    the average properties of the whole product. Complex nonresinous materials
    which are known to react only by first breaking down to simple compounds
    are considered nonresinous materials (e.g., paraformaldehyde).

    (I)     Polymer forming system or polymer forming ingredients as used
    throughout the schedule are generic terms and include (1) reactable
    materials which form polymers, or (2) intermediate resinfication
    condensation producers, polymers, or (3) ethylenic reactants which react
    with the polymer.

    (J)     The resinous, resinifiable or polymerizable reaction product of a
    plurality of nonresinous materials of any type is not included here, but is
    considered a copolymer or co-condensation product and placed in this class,
    as is appropriate.

    (K)     The above notes pertain in particular to Class 521, subclasses 54,
    59, 69, 75, 81, and 134+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, for a synthetic pigment, filler
    or aggregate


            containing voids or cavities and, in particular, subclasses 409
    wherein it is coated (encapuslated or dispersed) with a stated material.

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, for etching processes used in the
    manufacturing of a porous or perforated article.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 4.1+ for liquid encapsulation, e.g., microencapsulating a liquid
    within a microcapsule wall derived from a synthetic polymer, etc. However,
    if the core material is disclosed to be an expanding (blowing) agent see
    Class 521, subclass 50, (4) Note for limitations to those subclasses.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 213.3+ for solid encapsulation e.g.,
    microencapsulating a solid with a microcapsule wall derived from a
    synthetic polymer, etc.  However, if the core material is disclosed to be
    an expanding (blowing) agent see Class 521, subclass 50, (4) Note for
    limitations to those subclasses.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 402.2+ and
    402.24 for microcapsuless with liquid and solid cores respectively.
    However, if the core material is disclosed to be an expanding (blowing)
    agent see Class 521, subclass 50, (4) Note for a limitation to those
    subclasses.

    523,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, in particular, subclass 218
    for a hollow nonsynthetic polymeric or polymeric or hollow nonpolymeric
    material in admixture with a polymer of that class.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclass 255
    for the use of a polymer, resin, or foam in the containment of hazardous or
    toxic waste.


CLS 521/50.5
TXT Compositions to be polymerizied by wave energy in order to prepare a
    cellular product wherein said composition contains a rate-affecting
    material; or compositions to be modifed by wave energy to prepare a
    cellular product wherein said composition contains a rate-affecting
    material; or processes of preparing or treating a solid polymer utilizing
    wave energy in order to prepare a cellular product:

    Subject matter under Class 521, subclass 50 including one of the following:

    (a)  processes of polymerizing a monomer to from a cellular solid polymer
    in the presence of wave energy; (b) processes of reacting a cellular solid
    polymer with a chemical reactant in the presence of wave energy in order to
    produce a modified polymer; (c) processes of treating a cellular solid
    polymer with wave energy wherein the wave energy causes a chemical reaction
    to precede; (d) polymerizable compositions to be treated with wave to form
    a celluilar product wherein a photoinitator or photosensitizer is or either
    specifically or nominally.

    (1)     Note.  To be classified herein the composition to be polymerized or
    reacted must have a photointator photosensitizer claimed in addition to the
    polymer to be treated or the monomers to be polymerized.


CLS 521/51
TXT Processes of preparing a cellular product having an integral skin:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 involving a process of preparing a
    cellular product having an integral skin.

    (1)     Note.  An integral skin is defined as a surface layer of increased
    density as compared with a central core or layer, and which skin is formed
    contemporaneously with the central core or layer and from the same cell
    forming ingredients.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 45.1+ for multi-step processes of forming cellular product
    having an integral skin, or for processes of forming a product having an
    integral skin involving a significant molding or shaping step.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, in particular subclasses
    212+ and 304.4+ for a cellular product having an integral skin.


CLS 521/52
TXT Reticulated cellular product or processes of preparing a reticulated
    cellular product:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 involving a reticulated cellular product.

    quit(1) Note.  This subclass provides for all inventions not elsewhere
    provided, drawn to a reticulated product other than where the reticulated
    product is subsequently destroyed.

    (2)     Note.  A reticulated cellular product is one which corresponds to a
    closed cell structure but wherein the cell windows have been substantially
    removed.  An example of a reticulated product is:

    Figure 1 (reticulated)

    Figure 2 (nonreticulated)

    Number 10 is the polymer product.

    Number 11 is the skeletal structure.

    Number 12 is the cell membrane.

    (3)     Note.  The reticulated product may be the result of a direct cell
    forming process or may be the result of the after-treating of a previously
    formed cellular product.


CLS 521/53
TXT Treating a cellular solid polymer by adding a material thereto which reacts
    with the polymer or forms a composition therewith, or products of said
    treating process:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein a previously formed solid cellular
    polymer is treated with a material so as to form a desired composition
    therewith or so as to chemically modify the cellular product by a change in
    chemical bonds therein.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass and the indented subclasses
    thereunder is the addition of a foaming agent to a partially expanded
    product.  See in particular subclasses 56+ for the addition of a foaming
    agent to a partially expanded bead.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    Appropriate product, subclasses 134 - 189 for processes of purifying a
    cellular product by the addition of material thereto or for processes of
    treating with a material wherein no chemical reaction with the cellular
    product or desired composition with the cellular product is produced, e.g.,
    contacting with a particular drying gas, etc.


CLS 521/54
TXT Treating a cellular solid polymer by adding a solid polymer or solid
    polymer-forming composition:

    Subject matter under subclass 53 wherein (1) an additional solid polymer is
    added to the previously formed cellular polymer, or (2) wherein
    polymer-forming ingredients are added to the previously formed solid
    cellular polymer.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 521, subclass 50, (11) Note therein, for
    definition of the terms incorporated by (1) and (2) above.


CLS 521/55
TXT Treating a cellular solid polymer by adding a material thereto which forms
    a composition therewith:

    Subject matter under subclass 53 wherein a material is added to the
    previously formed solid cellular material so as to form a desired
    composition therewith.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 567 for a web or sheet, e.g., of porous
    polymer, impregnated with a defined liquid dielectric.


CLS 521/56
TXT Particle which is expandible, process of preparing an expandible particle,
    or process of expanding a particle to form a cellular product:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein a cellular product is produced
    from a particle.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides (1) for processes of forming a
    cellular product from an expandible particle; (2) for a particle which is
    claimed as being capable of forming a cellular product; or (3) for
    processes of preparing a particle which is capable of being formed into a
    cellular product.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not require that the continuous phase of
    the particle be a solid synthetic polymer. It is sufficient if the particle
    merely contains a solid synthetic polymer.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass requires that the particle nature be retained
    in the final cellular product and not be destroyed during or prior to the
    cell-forming step, e.g., melting particles for extruding is excluded
    herefrom, etc.

    (4)     Note.  This subclass includes the process of treating a preexpanded
    particle so as to subsequently expand said particle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     for processes of forming a cellular product from particles which
    are either completely or partially melted during extrusion.  The term
    "extrusion", per se, connotes destruction of the particulate structure
    unless the disclosure indicates to the contrary.

    82+,    for forming a cellular product from bulk handled particulate
    material whose particulate nature is destroyed prior to or during the
    cell-forming step.



    Appropriate subclasses for a sintering sheet having structure insufficient
    for placement into Class 428.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes, for
    a process of agglomerating or sintering wherein a sheet product may be
    formed having voids therein.

    427,    Coating Processes, for processes involving more than the mere
    coating of a particulate material and wherein said particulate material is
    nonexpandible.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, for mere processes of
    coating and for coated particles which are non-expandible.


CLS 521/57
TXT Including step of surface coating a particle or process of expanding a
    surface coated particle:

    Subject matter under subclass 56 wherein (1) a particle of a solid
    polymeric material is surface coated and wherein the particle or the
    coating is expandible or is expanded in a later processing step; or (2) a
    particle is coated with a polymeric containing material and the base or
    coating is expandible or expanded in a later processing step.

    (1)     Note.  The coating may be continuous or discontinuous.  It may be
    formed from a solid as in a powder coating or may be formed from a fluent.

    (2)     Note.  The surface coating may be applied precedent to or
    subsequent to a step of impregnating a particle with a blowing agent.


CLS 521/58
TXT Expanding utilizing plural expansions steps:

    Subject matter under subclass 56 wherein the expansion steps occur in a
    plurality of stages.

    (1)     Note.  A continuous expansion step is not considered as being a
    "plurality of stages" and is properly classified elsewhere.


CLS 521/59
TXT Expandible system contains two or more solid polymers or at least one solid
    polymer and at least one polymer-forming system:

    Subject matter under subclass 56 wherein two or more solid polymers are
    present during the cell-forming operation, or wherein, in addition to the
    solid particulate polymer, additional polymer-forming ingredients are
    present.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes "block" or "graft" copolymers.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 521, subclass 50 (11) Note therein for a
    definition of the terms "two or more solid polymers or polymer-forming
    ingredients".


CLS 521/60
TXT Adding expanding agent subsequent to solid polymer formation:

    Subject matter under subclass 56 wherein the expanding agent is added to a
    previously formed solid polymer, e.g., impregnating a particle with a
    blowing agent, etc.


CLS 521/61
TXT Process of preparing a cellular product by removal of material from a solid
    polymer- containing matrix without expanding the matrix; composition which
    is nonexpandible and is designed to form a cellular product by said
    process; or process of preparing said composition:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein a cellular product is produced by
    removing a material from a polymeric composition containing a solid polymer
    and wherein removal is accomplished without the composition being expanded.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for (1) processes of forming a
    cellular product by removal of a material from a previously formed solid
    polymer composition; or (2) a solid polymer containing composition which is
    claimed as being capable of preparing a cellular product by removal of
    material therefrom; or (3) processes of preparing the composition of (2)
    above.

    (2)     Note.  In general, the operations proper for this subclass are
    characterized as leaching, extracting, evaporation, etc.

    (3)     Note.  Two step processes wherein an additional cell-forming
    operation is accomplished subsequent to the removal operation are proper
    herein unless an additional material is added subsequent to the removal
    which reacts with the polymer or forms a desired composition therewith, in
    which case classification in Class 521, subclasses 53+ would be proper.

    (4)     Note.  Processes involving a temporary base wherein a polymeric
    composition is placed on a temporary base and where the base is merely used
    as a work holder and is subsequently removed after the cell-forming
    operation of the polymeric composition are proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 41+ for a process claim involving preparing a cellular article
    by removal of material from a sheet, film, or oriented or stretched fiber.
    Terms in claims such as forming a "mass", "forming an article", "forming a
    desired shape", or "shaping in a mold to provide a product of desired
    shape" preparatory to the removal operation are considered insignificant
    process limitations and such claims are proper for Class 521.

    427,    Coating Processes, for a process of permanently coating a base and
    removing material from the coating, from the base, or from both, to produce
    a cellular product.


CLS 521/62
TXT Mixture of solid polymers present during cell formation:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein two or more polymers are present
    during the cell-forming operation.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes "block" or "graft" copolymers.

    (2)     Note.  One of the polymers may be formed "in situ".

    (3)     Note.  One of the polymers may be partially or completely removed
    during the cell-forming operation.


CLS 521/63
TXT Cellular product-forming process wherein the removable material is present
    or is produced in situ during the solid polymer formation step:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein the material removed to form the
    cellular structure is present during the solid polymer formation or is
    formed during the polymer-forming process.


CLS 521/64
TXT Removing a liquid to form a cellular product:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein the material removed to form the
    cellular structure is at least in part a liquid, e.g., extraction,
    evaporation, etc.


CLS 521/65
TXT Process of forming a cellular product from an aqueous latex, aqueous
    dispersion, aqueous emulsion containing a solid polymer; process of
    preparing a latex, dispersion, or emulsion containing a solid polymer which
    is designed to be formed into a cellular product, or composition thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein a cellular product is produced
    from an aqueous latex, aqueous dispersion, or aqueous emulsion containing a
    solid polymer.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides (1) for processes of forming a
    cellular product from an aqueous latex, aqueous emulsion, or aqueous
    dispersion containing a solid polymer; (2) for an aqueous latex, aqueous
    dispersion, or aqueous emulsion, of a preformed solid polymer which is
    claimed as being capable of preparing a cellular product; or (3) for
    processes of preparing an aqueous latex, aqueous emulsion, or aqueous
    dispersion which is capable of being formed into a cellular product, e.g.,
    polymerizing a material and forming a polymer containing latex thereby and
    subsequently treating to form a cellular product, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Excluded from this area are processes involving preparing a
    latex, emulsion, or dispersion which is destroyed as by coagulation,
    precipitation or any other manner prior to the cell-forming step.


CLS 521/66
TXT Treating a latex, dispersion, or emulsion containing a solid polymer at 32o
    f. or below, e.g., freezing, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 5 wherein a step is included of treating the
    aqueous latex, aqueous emulsion, or aqueous disperison at a temperature of
    320F. or below.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are coagulation or agglomeration by freezing
    of an aqueous latex, emulsion, or dispersion, or the addition of materials
    which are at or below 320F. to an aqueous latex, dispersion, or emulsion.

    (2)     Note.  The treating for purposes of this subclass must integrally
    involve the aqueous latex, aqueous dispersion, or aqueous emulsion.


CLS 521/67
TXT Adding -N=C=X material to a latex, dispersion, or emulsion containing a
    solid polymer:

    Subject matter under subclass 65 wherein an -N=C=X material (X is a
    chalcogen)is added to an aqueous latex, aqueous dispersion, or aqueous
    emulsion containing a solid polymeric material.

    (1)     Note.  The -N=C=X material may be added at any stage of cure with
    the proviso that it must be added to an aqueous latex, emulsion, or
    dispersion which is capable of expansion or of further expansion as a
    latex, emulsion, or dispersion.


CLS 521/68
TXT Adding fibrous material to a latex dispersion, or emulsion containing a
    solid polymer:

    Subject matter under subclass 65 wherein a fibrous material is added to an
    aqueous latex, aqueous disperison, or aqueous emulsion containing a solid
    polymeric material, or wherein a fibrous material is part of an aqueous
    latex, aqueous emulsion, or aqueous dispersion containing a previously
    formed solid polymeric material.


CLS 521/69
TXT Latex, dispersion, or emulsion contains an additional solid polymer-forming
    system: Subject matter under subclass 65 wherein, in addition to at least
    one solid polymer initially present in the aqueous latex, emulsion, or
    dispersion, there is also present a reactant or reactants which under the
    condition of the reaction and in the absence of the initial polymer would
    form an additional solid polymer.

    (1)     Note.  Reactants which form or are known to form initial solid
    polymers are included herein as being an additional solid polymer forming
    system.  (See Class 521, subclass 50 (11) Note therein).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for processes of preparing a cellular product from a composition
    containing two or more previously formed solid polymers.


CLS 521/70
TXT Latex, dispersion, or emulsion contains two or more solid polymers:

    Subject matter under subclass 65 wherein two or more solid polymers are
    present in an aqueous latex, aqueous dispersion, or aqueous emulsion.

    (1)     Note.  The solid polymers may be in the same or different phase.


CLS 521/71
TXT Solid polymer is derived from a conjugated diene monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 65 wherein the solid polymer which is part of
    the aqueous latex, aqueous emulsion, or aqueous dispersion is derived from
    at least a reactant having two or more conjugated ethylenic groups.


CLS 521/72
TXT Utilizing cell forming agent other than air:

    Subject matter under subclass 65 wherein an agent other than air, per se,
    is utilized as a means to generate a cellular product.

    (1)     Note.  The agent may be directly introduced into the aqueous latex,
    aqueous emulsion, or aqueous dispersion or may be formed in situ.


CLS 521/73
TXT Process of preparing a cellular product of a plastisol of a solid polymer
    derived solely from ethylenically unsaturated monomers; forming a plastisol
    of a solid polymer derived solely from an ethylenically unsaturated monomer
    which is designed to be formed into a cellular product, or composition
    thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein a cellular product is produced
    from a nongelled plastisol containing a solid polymer derived solely from
    ethylenically unsaturated monomers.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides (1) for processes of forming a
    cellular product from a plastisol composition; (2) for plastisol
    compositions which will form a cellular product; or (3) for processes of
    preparing a cellular forming plastisol composition.

    (2)     Note.  A plastisol is a dispersion of solid polymeric particles in
    a plasticizer at ambient temperature and which dispersion gels upon heating.

    (3)     Note.  Patent claims are placed herein when the term "plastisol" is
    employed in the claim or when the term "plasticize" is employed and there
    is evidence in the disclosure that a plastisol is intended.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82+,    for processes involving a stated ingredient wherein a gelled
    material is ground to a powder and processed.


CLS 521/74
TXT By incorporation of material in gaseous state:

    Subject matter under subclass 73 wherein a material in a gaseous state is
    introduced into the plastisol composition.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is the introduction of air as by beating or
    whipping.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73+,    for processes wherein a gas is formed in situ in a plastisol
    composition.


CLS 521/75
TXT System contains two or more solid polymers or contains at least one solid
    polymer and at least one polymer-forming system:

    Subject matter under subclass 73 wherein the plastisol composition contains
    at least two solid polymers, or at least one solid polymer and at least one
    additional solid polymer-forming system.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 521, subclass 50, (11) Note therein, for a
    definition of the terms "two solid polymers or polymer- forming system".


CLS 521/76
TXT Preparing a cellular product utilizing a stated ingredient which is surface
    coated or is a discrete solid particle containing a fluid encapsulated
    therein, processes of forming an expandible composition, containing said
    stated ingredient or composition therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein cell formation is achieved or
    initiated in the presence of (1) a material which is surface coated; or (2)
    a material which consists of a particle comprising a fluent material
    encapsulated in a shell.

    (1)     Note.  The material can be present for any purpose, e.g., reactant,
    solid polymer, stated ingredient, etc.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass provides (1) for processes of forming cellular
    products in the presence of a material which is surface coated or in the
    presence of an encapsulated fluid; or (2) compositions which are capable of
    forming a cellular product and which compositions contain an encapsulated
    fluid or surface coated material; or (3) processes of preparing a cellular
    forming composition containing a surface coated material or encapsulated
    fluent material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    77,     for a process of preparing a cellular material involving the
    decomposition of a solid polymer.

    82+,    or 99+, for the preparation of a cellular material involving the
    use of an impregnated molecular sieve.


CLS 521/77
TXT Preparing a cellular product by decompostion of a solid polymer; or process
    of forming a composition containing a solid polymer which decomposes so as
    to subsequently form a cellular polymer, or composition therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein cell formation is achieved or
    initiated by decomposing in whole or part a solid synthetic polymer so as
    to form cells in an additional polymer or to form cells in the polymer
    undergoing decomposition.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides (1) for processes of forming cellular
    products in the presence of a decomposing solid polymer; (2) for
    compositions which are capable of forming a cellular product which
    composition contains a solid polymer capable of decomposition; or (3) for
    processes of preparing a cellular forming composition containing a
    decomposable solid polymer.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes a single solid polymer which
    decomposes so to form materials which will form cells in the decomposition
    product and is still a solid polymer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    for a cellular product which is the result of decomposing a solid
    polymer in the presence of a different solid polymer and wherein the
    decomposed polymer is still a solid polymer.


CLS 521/78
TXT Preparing a cellular product by spraying a solid polymer containing
    material:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 drawn to processes of cell formation
    wherein cell formation is achieved or initiated by a step of projecting
    into a gaseous atmosphere in a manner whereby temporary or permanent solid
    or liquid particles are formed (1) a solid polymer in liquid state (e.g.,
    molten, dissolved, etc.), or (2) solid polymer-forming materials.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass but not limited thereto are
    processes of taking solid particles and dissolving same and spraying, as
    well as melting of solid particles and spraying.

    (2)     Note.  Processes involving a projecting step wherein cell formation
    and projecting are incidental to each other, e.g., no cell formation
    initiated or achieved during the projecting step, etc. are not proper for
    this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for compositions which are to
    be used in preparing cellular product even if claimed as being capable of
    preparing a cellular product by spraying or for cellular products which are
    the result of a spraying procedure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56+,    for processes of preparing a cellular product wherein a solid
    particle is expanded and retains its individual particle identity or
    wherein individual particles are expanded and coalesce to form an expanded
    product.

    65+,    for processes of spraying or projecting an aqueous emulsion,
    dispersion, or latex.


CLS 521/79
TXT Extruding a solid polymer containing material to form a cellular product:


    Subject matter under subclass 50 drawn to processes of cell formation
    wherein said cell formation is achieved or initiated by a step of extrusion
    of a molten or liquid material from a region of high pressure through an
    orifice into a region of lower pressure.

    (1)     Note.  Spinning, per se, is proper for this subclass as a
    specialized form of extrusion wherein a fiber or filament is produced.

    (2)     Note.  Processes involving an extrusion step wherein cell formation
    and extrusion are incidental to one another, e.g., no cell formation
    initiated or achieved during the extruding step, etc., are not proper for
    this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass mere removal of material from
    a chamber by a step recited as "extrusion" is not proper herein unless
    there is an intent to shape the removed material by the "extrusion step."

    (4)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for compositions which are to
    be used in preparing a cellular product even if claimed as being
    extrudable, or for cellular products which are the result of an extruding
    procedure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    subclasses 41+ for processes of preparing a composite article wherein at
    least one member of the composite is of a porous nature; and subclasses
    109+ for processes of bonding either cellular or noncellular particles of
    solid particles together so as to form a layer and wherein the solid
    particles may have voids between the bonded particles.


CLS 521/80
TXT Including solid polymer formation in or during extruding step:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 wherein a solid polymer is formed during
    the extruding step.

    (1)     Note.  Solid polymer formation does not include cross-linking or
    vulcanizing of a previously formed solid polymer.


CLS 521/81
TXT System contains a mixture of solid polymers or at least one solid polymer
    and at least one solid polymer-forming system:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 wherein a mixture of polymers or
    polymer-forming ingredients is employed during the extrusion step.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes mixed resins, graft copolymer, or
    block copolymers.  See Class 521, subclass 50, (11) Note therein, for a
    definition of the terms "mixture of polymers or polymer-forming
    ingredients".


CLS 521/82
TXT Process of forming a cellular product subsequent to solid polymer formation
    in the presence of a stated ingredient, noncellular composition capable of
    forming a cellular product and containing a stated ingredient, or process
    of preparing same:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein cells are formed subsequent to the
    formation of a solid polymer and wherein the cell formation is performed in
    the presence of a stated ingredient.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides (1) for processes of forming cellular
    products in the presence of a stated ingredient; or (2) for solid polymer
    containing compositions which will form cells and which contain a stated
    ingredient; or (3) for processes of preparing a polymer containing
    composition which contains a stated ingredient and wherein said composition
    can be made into a cell containing product.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass embodies for the most part the term "stated
    ingredient" as defined in subclass 50.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass relates to both nonreactive and reactive
    materials.  In this regard it is to be noted that the use of the term
    "stated ingredient" is in the context of materials present during the
    cell-forming operation and which operation is subsequent to solid polymer
    formation; hence it is proper to regard a cross-linking agent or a system
    of additional polymer forming ingredient as being "stated ingredients" when
    such materials are present and are in admixture with a solid polymer and
    cell formation is occurring.

    (4)     Note.  When a material is consumed prior to the cell-forming
    operation, such material is not to be regarded as a stated ingredient.
    However, when a material is added to a solid polymer with the intent that
    such material be present in some degree during the cell-forming operation
    then such a material is to be regarded as a stated ingredient.

    (5)     Note.  An exception to the stated ingredient rule is that a solid
    polymer proper for Class 520, subclasses 1+ or any of the indents
    thereunder is not to be regarded as a "stated ingredient" for another solid
    polymer.

    (6)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass a polymer derived from only
    ethylenically unsaturated monomers is presumed to be a solid polymer unless
    contradicted by the patent specification.

    (7)     Note.  Materials which are present during the cell-forming
    operation but which are known to form solid polymers apart from the solid
    polymer originally present are regarded as being "stated ingredients" for
    purposes of this subclass.  Furthermore, it is highly desirable that
    cross-reference additions be placed in subclasses 99+ on the basis of any
    other "stated ingredient" present.

    (8)     Note.  Carbohydrates, proteins, fats, natural resins, asphaltic,
    bituminous materials are always regarded as being "stated ingredients" for
    purposes of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76,     for processes of preparing cellular materials which may involve the
    use of a stated ingredient containing a coating of a solid synthetic
    polymer.

    77,     for cell forming processes utilizing a solid polymer decomposable
    so as to either form a cellular product of itself or to assist in the
    preparation of cells of an additional solid polymer.

    134+,   for a process of preparing a cellular product involving two or more
    solid polymers and in the absence of a "stated ingredient".

    143     through 189, for processes of preparing a cellular product in the
    absence of a "stated ingredient".


CLS 521/83
TXT Ingredient is asphaltic, bituminous, or water settable inorganic material,
    e.g., cement, plaster of paris, etc:

    Subject matter under subclass 82 wherein the stated ingredient contains an
    asphaltic, bituminous, or water settable inorganic material.

    (1)     Note.  Asphaltic or bituminous refers to solid or semi-solid
    materials which are often black or dark brown and which occur naturally, or
    are obtained by refining petroleum, or are the components of coal which are
    soluble in organic solvents.

    (2)     Note.  As used herein the terms asphaltic or bituminous include
    asphaltides, asphalt, asphaltic pyrobitumens, ozokerite, earth pitch,
    mineral pitch, petroleum asphalt, gilsonite, etc.

    (3)     Note.  Water settable inorganic material denotes a material
    hardenable by hydration so as to produce a solid mass, e.g., cement,
    concrete, plaster of Paris, etc.  It furthermore includes systems in any
    state of cure and which are present for any purpose. If any doubt exists in
    a claim as to whether an inorganic ingredient is water settable, such doubt
    should be resolved by classifying the claim into the appropriate subclass
    below.


CLS 521/84.1
TXT Ingredient is protein, carbohydrate, or natural resin:

    Subject matter under subclass 82 wherein the stated ingredient is a
    protein, carbohydrate, natural resin, or  derivatives thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See the GLOSSARY in Class 520, subclass 1 for the definition
    of protein, carbohydrate, natural resin, or derivatives of these materials.


CLS 521/85
TXT Ingredient contains a boron or phosphorus atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 82 wherein the stated ingredient contains at
    least one atom of boron or phosphorus.


CLS 521/86
TXT Ingredient is organic silicon compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 82 wherein the stated ingredient is an
    organic compound containing at least one silicon atom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     for the use of elemental silicon or an inorganic silicon compound
    as stated ingredients.


CLS 521/87
TXT Ingredient is aldehyde or ketone:

    Subject matter under subclass 82 wherein the stated ingredient is a ketone
    or aldehyde.

    (1)     Note.  See "GLOSSARY" for a definition of the term "aldehyde" or
    "ketone".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for the use of trioxane or paraformaldehyde as stated ingredients.

    97,     for the use of ketene as a stated ingredient.


CLS 521/88
TXT Ingredient is ether, alcohol, or inorganic alcoholate, e.g., phenol, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 82 wherein the stated ingredient contains a
    -C-O-C- group, a C-OH group (X is an inorganic radical), and wherein none
    of the carbon atoms which are single bonded to the oxygen atom as
    enumerated above are double bonded to a chalcogen atom (O, S, Se, or Te) or
    triple bonded to a nitrogen atom, e.g., epoxy compounds, morpholines,
    cyclic anhydrides, etc.


CLS 521/89
TXT Ingredient contains a sulfur atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 82 wherein the stated ingredient contains a
    sulfur atom.


CLS 521/90
TXT Ingredient is a heterocyclic compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 82 wherein the stated ingredient contains a
    heterocyclic ring.

    (1)     Note.  See "GLOSSARY" in Class 521 for a definition of the term
    "heterocyclic ring".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for an epoxy compound, morpholine, or cyclic anhydride, utilized as
    a stated ingredient.

    89,     for a heterocyclic compound having a sulfur atom as a ring atom
    utilized as a stated ingredient.


CLS 521/91
TXT Ingredient contains a silicon atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 82 wherein the stated ingredient contains a
    silicon atom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86,     for a stated ingredient which is an organic compound containing a
    silicon atom.


CLS 521/92
TXT Ingredient contains a metal atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 82 wherein the stated ingredient contains a
    metal atom.


CLS 521/93
TXT Metal atom is part of an organic compound: Subject matter under subclass 92
    wherein the metal atom is part of an organic compound.


CLS 521/94
TXT Ingredient is a nitrogen containing compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 82 wherein the stated ingredient is a
    nitrogen containing compound.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes ammonium salts.


CLS 521/95
TXT Nitrogen compound contains a nitrogen atom bonded to a nitrogen or oxygen
    atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 94 wherein the nitrogen compound contains (1)
    at least one nitrogen atom bonded directly to another nitrogen atom, or (2)
    at least one nitrogen atom bonded directly to an oxygen atom, e.g., azo,
    azide, nitrate, etc.


CLS 521/96
TXT Ingredient contains an -O-O- group:

    Subject matter under subclass 82 wherein the stated ingredient is a
    compound which contains an -O-O- structure, e.g., peroxide, etc.


CLS 521/97
TXT Ingredient contains a carbon atom double bonded to oxygen, e.g., carbon
    dioxide, carboxylic acid, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 82 wherein the



    stated ingredient contains a  group, etc., carbonates, carbon dioxide,
    carboxylic acids, etc.


CLS 521/98
TXT Ingredient contains only C and H atoms, only C and halogen atoms, or only
    C, H, and halogen atoms:

    Subject matter under subclass 82 wherein the stated ingredient contains (1)
    only carbon and hydrogen atoms, or (2) only carbon, hydrogen, and halogen
    atoms, or (3) only carbon and halogen atoms.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes the stated ingredient proper for this
    subclass in any physical state.


CLS 521/99
TXT Cellular product formation prior to or during solid polymer formation in
    the presence of a stated ingredient other than water:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein cells are formed prior to, or
    during the solid polymer formation and wherein the cell formation is
    performed in the presence of a stated ingredient.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides (1) for processes of forming cellular
    products in the presence of a stated ingredient; or (2) for polymer-forming
    compositions which will form cells and which contain a stated ingredient;
    or (3) for processes of preparing a polymer-forming composition which
    contains a stated ingredient and wherein said composition can be made into
    a cellular product.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass embodies for the most part the term "stated
    ingredient" as defined in subclass 50.  Certain exceptions do exist and are
    noted.

    (A)     Water in any of its physical forms is excluded herefrom as being a
    stated ingredient.

    (B)     Materials which are categorized as curing, cross-linking, or
    chain-extenders are excluded herefrom and are to be considered as
    polymer-forming additives.

    (C)     (1)     In processes wherein an isocyanate is a reactant a further
    exception to the stated ingredient definition is that a compound containing
    only a single

                    C-XH, C-NH2,
    -C=NH, or CXH group (wherein X is a chalcogen) is always considered as
    being a reactant rather than as a stated ingredient.

    (2)     In those processes wherein an isocyanate is a reactant a compound
    containing two or more

                    C-XH,C-NH2, -C=
    NH, or CXH groups or combination of such groups (wherein X is a chalcogen)
    is always considered as being a reactant rather than as a stated ingredient.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134     through 189, for a cellular product which has been prepared in the
    presence of a stated ingredient.


CLS 521/100
TXT Ingredient is water settable inorganic composition:

    Subject matter under subclass 99 wherein the stated ingredient contains an
    inorganic material hardenable by hydration so to produce a solid mass,
    e.g., cement, concrete, plaster of Paris, etc.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes systems having cement, concrete,
    plaster of Paris in any stage of cure.

    (2)     Note.  The water settable ingredient can be present for any purpose.

    (3)     Note.  If any doubt exists in a claim as to whether an inorganic
    ingredient is water settable, such doubt should be resolved by classifying
    the claim into the appropriate subclass below.


CLS 521/101
TXT Ingredient is bituminous or asphaltic material:

    Subject matter under subclass 99 wherein the stated ingredient contains an
    asphaltic or bituminous material.

    (1)     Note.  Asphaltic or bituminous refers to solid or semi-solid
    materials which are often black or dark brown and which occur naturally, or
    are obtained by refining petroleum, or are the components of coal which are
    soluble in organic solvents.

    (2)     Note.  As used herein the terms asphaltic or bituminous include
    asphalt, asphaltides, asphaltic pyrobitumens, ozokerite, earth pitch,
    mineral pitch, petroleum asphalt, gilsonite, etc.


CLS 521/102
TXT Ingredient is a protein containing material:

    Subject matter under subclass 99 wherein the stated ingredient contains a
    protein or a protein reaction product, e.g., gelatin, silk, etc.

    (1)     Note.  A protein reaction product requires at the minimum the
    presence of a peptide group, i.e., an amide linkage between the amino
    radical of one amino acid and the carboxyl radical of another amino acid.


CLS 521/103
TXT Ingredient contains a boron atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 99 wherein the stated ingredient contains a
    boron atom.


CLS 521/104
TXT Boron trihalide or complex thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 103 wherein the stated ingredient is boron
    trihalide or is an organic or inorganic complex thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The halogen atoms may be the same as in boron trichloride,
    or they may be different.


CLS 521/105
TXT Boron atom is part of an organic compound: Subject matter under subclass
    103 wherein the boron atom is part of an organic compound.


CLS 521/106
TXT Ingredient Contains a Phosphorus Atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 99 wherein the stated ingredient contains a
    phosphorus atom.


CLS 521/107
TXT Phosphorous atom is part of an organic compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein the phosphorus atom is part of an
    organic compound.


CLS 521/108
TXT Organic phosphorus compound contains a phosphorus atom bonded to an atom
    other than oxygen:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein the organic phosphorus compound
    contains at least one phosphorus atom bonded to an element which is other
    than oxygen.


CLS 521/109.1
TXT Ingredient is carbohydrate, or natural resin:

    Subject matter under subclass 99 wherein the stated ingredient is a
    carbohydrate, or natural resin, or derivatives thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Note See the GLOSSARY in Class 520, subclass 1 for the
    definition of carbohydrate, natural resin, or derivatives of these
    materials.


CLS 521/110
TXT Ingredient contains a silicon atom as part of an organic compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 99 wherein the stated ingredient is an
    organic compound containing at least one silicon atom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    for an inorganic compound containing silicon which is a stated
    ingredient.


CLS 521/111
TXT Organic silicon atom compound contains an atom other than oxygen, hydrogen,
    silicon or carbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein the organic silicon compound
    contains an atom other than carbon, hydrogen, oxygen, or silicon.


CLS 521/112
TXT Organic silicon compound contains an ether group:

    Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein the organic silicon compound
    contains a-C-O-C- group and wherein neither of the carbon atoms single
    bonded to the oxygen atom is double bonded to a chalcogen atom.


CLS 521/113
TXT Ingredient is aldehyde or ketone:

    Subject matter under subclass 99 wherein the stated ingredient is a ketone
    or aldehyde.

    (1)     Note.  See "GLOSSARY" for a definition of the term "aldehyde" or
    "ketone".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for the use of trioxane or paraformaldehyde as stated ingredients.

    130,    for the use of ketone as a stated ingredient.


CLS 521/114
TXT Ingredient contains a -C-X-C- group wherein X is a chalcogen atom and none
    of the C atoms bonded to the chalcogen are double bonded to an additional
    chalcogen atom: Subject matter under subclass 99 wherein the stated
    ingredient contains a -C-X-C- group wherein X is a chalcogen atom, and
    wherein one of the carbon atoms bonded to the chalcogen atom are double
    bonded to an additional chalcogen atom.


CLS 521/115
TXT -C-X-C- compound contains a nitrogen atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 114 wherein the -C-X-C ingredient contains a
    nitrogen atom.


CLS 521/116
TXT -C-X-C- compound contians a -C-XH group wherein X is a chalcogen atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 114 wherein the C-X-C ingredient contains a
    C-XH group.


CLS 521/117
TXT Ingredient contains a -C-XH group wherein X is a chalcogen atom and the
    carbon atom is not double bonded to a chalcogen atom, phenol, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 99 wherein the stated ingredient contains a
    C-XH group, wherein X is a chalcogen atom, and wherein the carbon atom
    bonded to the chalcogen atom of the XH group is not double bonded to an
    additional chalcogen atom.


CLS 521/118
TXT -C-XH ingredient contains a nitrogen atom: Subject matter under
    subclass 117 wherein the C-XH ingredient contains a nitrogen atom.


CLS 521/119
TXT Ingredient is inorganic halogen containing material:

    Subject matter under subclass 99 wherein the stated ingredient contains a
    halogen atom either as elemental halogen or as part of an inorganic halogen
    compound.


CLS 521/120
TXT Ingredient contains a sulfur atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 99 wherein the stated ingredient contains a
    sulfur atom.


CLS 521/121
TXT Sulfur atom is part of an organic compound: Subject matter under subclass
    120 wherein the sulfur atom is part of an organic compound.


CLS 521/122
TXT Ingredient contains a silicon atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 99 wherein the stated ingredient contains a
    silicon atom.


CLS 521/123
TXT Ingredient contains a metal atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 99 wherein the stated ingredient contains a
    metal atom.


CLS 521/124
TXT Metal atom is part of an organic compound: Subject matter under subclass
    123 wherein the metal atom is part of an organic compound.


CLS 521/125
TXT Organic metal compound contains a group I or Group II metal atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 124 wherein the metal atom which is part of
    the organic compound is a Group I or Group II metal.

    (1)     Note.  Group I and Group II metal atoms are:

    Group IA is limited to L, Na, K, Ru, Cs, Fr.

    Group IIA is limited to Be, Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba, Ra.

    Group IB is limited to Cu, Ag, Au.

    Group IIB is limited to Zn, Cd, Hg.


CLS 521/126
TXT Organic metal compound contains tin:
    Subject matter under subclass 124 wherein a tin atom is part of the organic
    compound.


CLS 521/127
TXT Tin compound is dibutyl tin dilaurate or stannous octoate:

    Subject matter under subclass 126 wherein the organic tin compound is
    dibutyl tin dilaurate or stannous octoate.


CLS 521/128
TXT Ingredient is a nitrogen containing compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 99 wherein the stated ingredient is a
    nitrogen containing compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    for the use of nitrogen gas as a stated ingredient.


CLS 521/129
TXT Nitrogen compound contains a nitrogen atom bonded to three carbon atoms and
    wherein none of the carbon atoms are double bonded to oxygen:

    Subject matter under subclass 128 wherein the nitrogen compound contains at
    least one nitrogen atom which is bonded to three carbon atoms and wherein
    none of the carbon atoms bonded to the nitrogen atom are double bonded to
    oxygen.


CLS 521/130
TXT Ingredient contains a carbon atom double bonded to oxygen, e.g., carboxylic
    acid, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 99 wherein

    the stated ingredient contains a  group, e.g., carbonates, CO2, carboxylic
    acids, etc.


CLS 521/131
TXT Ingredient contains only carbon and hydrogen atoms, only C and halogen
    atoms, or only C, H, and halogen atoms:

    Subject matter under subclass 99 wherein the stated ingredient contains (1)
    only carbon and hydrogen atoms, or (2) only carbon, hydrogen, and halogen
    atoms, or (3) only carbon and halogen atoms.


CLS 521/132
TXT Said ingredient is substantially nonvolatile material, e.g., hydrocarbon
    waxes, greases, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the stated ingredient which
    contains (1) only carbon and halogen atoms, or (2) only carbon, hydrogen,
    and halogen atoms, or (3) only carbon and halogen atoms, is a solid or
    liquid and has slight or no tendency to pass into a gaseous state under the
    contemplated conditions of the process.

    (1)     Note.  Materials proper for this subclass are often described as
    plasticizers, flame retardants, lubricants, waxes, greases, oils, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Where any doubt occurs as to whether appreciable
    volatization occurs under the contemplated process conditions, such doubt
    should be resolved by placing the document into subclass 131.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131,    for a material chemically proper for this subclass, but which is
    described as a blowing agent.


CLS 521/133
TXT Ingredient is gaseous at ambient conditions, e.g., air, oxygen, etc.:


    Subject matter under subclass 99 wherein the stated ingredient is a gas at
    normal room temperature and pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130,    for carbon dioxide as a stated ingredient.


CLS 521/134
TXT Cellular product derived from two or more solid polymers or from at least
    one solid polymer-forming system:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 involving a cellular product derived from
    mixed solid polymers or from a solid polymer and at least one
    polymer-forming system or process of preparing such a cellular product;
    compositions containing mixed solid polymers or a solid polymer and a
    polymer-forming system or processes of preparing and which are capable of
    forming a cellular product; processes of treating a cellular product
    derived from mixed solid polymers or from a solid polymer and a
    polymer-forming system with a material which neither reacts with the
    cellular product to change or modify chemical bonds therein or neither
    forms a desired composition with the cellular product or products of such a
    treatment; processes of treating a cellular product derived from mixed
    solid polymers or from a solid polymer and a polymer-forming system without
    the addition of a material thereto whereby a physical or chemical change in
    the cellular product may be effected or products which are the result of
    such a treatment.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 521, subclass 50 for a definition of the term
    mixed solid polymer or for system of a polymer and a polymer-forming system.

    (2)     Note.  Patents are placed away in this and the indented subclasses
    on the basis of the first appearing polymer or polymer-forming system
    provided in the schedule array.  Each polymer-forming system is to be
    equated to the solid polymer that would be prepared if the polymer-forming
    system were polymerized.

            This and the indented subclasses includes mixtures of polymers
    wherein one of said polymers may act as a filler, preservative, etc., for
    the other polymer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     for a process of treating a cellular mixed polymer with a material
    so as to modify or change chemical bonds in the cellular polymer, or
    wherein a polymer-forming system is added to a cellular polymer to form a
    desired composition therewith, or for cellular products which are the
    result of such a treating process.


CLS 521/135
TXT At least one polymer is derived from reactant containing two or more three
    membered heterocyclic rings having two carbon atoms and one chalcogen atom
    or polymer-forming system contains the same type of reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 wherein at least one of the polymers in
    the mixture is derived from a reactant which contains two or more - -
    groups and wherein X is

    a chalcogen atom.


CLS 521/136
TXT At least one polymer is derived from an aldehyde or derivative or wherein
    the polymer-forming system contains the same type of reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 wherein at least one of the polymers is
    derived from an aldehyde or aldehyde derivative.

    (1)     Note.  See "GLOSSARY" for a definition of the term aldehyde, and
    see Class 528, subclass 230 for a definition of the term "aldehyde
    derivative".


CLS 521/137
TXT At least one polymer is derived from a -N=C=X reactant wherein X is a
    chalcogen atom or wherein the polymer-forming system contains the same type
    of reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 wherein at least one of the polymers is
    derived from a -N=C=X reactant and wherein X is a chalcogen atom.


CLS 521/138
TXT At least one polymer is derived from a polycarboxylic acid or derivative
    and polyol or wherein the polymer-forming system contains the same type of
    reactants:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 wherein at least one of the polymers is
    the reaction product of a polycarboxylic acid or derivative and a polyol.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 528, subclasses 271 and 272 for a definition of
    the term polycarboxylic acid or derivative.

    (2)     Note.  Polymeric products which are the result of the
    polymerization of a polycarboxylic acid as a sole reactant are included in
    this subclass.


CLS 521/139
TXT At least one polymer is derived from an ethylenically unsaturated aromatic
    reactant or wherein the polymer-forming system contains the same type of
    reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 wherein at least one of the polymers is
    derived from an ethylenically unsaturated aromatic reactant.


CLS 521/140
TXT At least one polymer is derived from reactant containing two or more
    ethylenic groups or wherein the polymer-forming systems contains the same
    type of reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 wherein at least one of the polymers is
    derived from a reactant containing two or more ethylenic groups.


CLS 521/141
TXT Cellular vinyl alcohol polymer:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 involving a cellular polymer derived from
    vinyl alcohol or process of preparing; composition containing a vinyl
    alcohol polymer and which composition is capable of forming a cellular
    product or processes of preparing same; processes of treating a cellular
    polymer derived from a vinyl alcohol polymer with a material which neither
    reacts with the cellular polymer to change or modify chemical bonds therein
    or neither forms a desired composition with the cellular polymer; or
    products of such a treatment; processes of treating a cellular polymer
    derived from a vinyl alcohol containing polymer without the addition of a
    material thereto whereby a physical or chemical change in the polymer may
    be effected or products which are the result of such treatment.

    (1)     Note.  A vinyl alcohol containing polymer requires at least 3
    ()groups in the polymeric molecule.

    (2)     Note.  Vinyl alcohol polymers for the most part herein are prepared
    by the partial hydrolysis or saponification of polymers of vinyl esters
    (particularly homo or interpolymerized vinyl acetate).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for a process of treating a cellular polymer with a material so as
    to modify or change chemical bonds in the cellular polymer or wherein a
    material is added to a cellular polymer to form a derived composition
    therewith, or for cellular products which are the result of such a treating
    process.


CLS 521/142
TXT Cellular product derived from ethylenically unsaturated reactants only:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 involving a cellular polymer-derived from
    only reactants which contain ethylenic unsaturation or process of
    preparing; composition containing a polymer derived from only reactants
    containing ethylenic unsaturation or from polymerizable reactants
    containing only ethylenic unsaturation and which composition is capable of
    preparing a cellular product or processes of preparing same: processes of
    treating a cellular polymer derived from only ethylenic reactants with a
    material which neither reacts with the cellular polymer to change or modify
    chemical bonds therein or neither forms a desired composition with the
    cellular polymer or products of such a treatment; processes of treating a
    cellular polymer derived from only ethylenic reactants without the addition
    of a material thereto whereby a physical or chemical change in the polymer
    may be effected or products which are the result of such a treatment.

    (1)     Note.  Ethylenic unsaturation includes the acetylenic linkage
    (-C=C-).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for a process of treating a cellular polymer with a material so as
    to modify or change chemical bonds in the cellular polymer or wherein a
    material is added to a cellular polymer to form a desired composition
    therewith, or for cellular products which are the result of such a treating
    process.


CLS 521/143
TXT From acyclic mono-unsaturated hydrocarbon as only reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 142 wherein only
    mono-ethylenically-unsaturated acyclic hydrocarbons are utilized as
    reactants.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are homopolymers of ethylene as well as
    interpolymers of ethylene with other mono-unsaturated acyclic hydrocarbons.


CLS 521/144
TXT Interpolymer:

    Subject matter under subclass 143 wherein two or more
    mono-ethylenically-unsaturated acyclic hydrocarbons are utilized as
    reactants.


CLS 521/145
TXT From acyclic mono-unsaturated halogenated reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 142 wherein an acyclic
    mono-ethylenically-unsaturated halogenated hydrocarbon is a reactant.


CLS 521/146
TXT From aromatic reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 142 wherein an ethylenically unsaturated
    aromatic material is a reactant.


CLS 521/147
TXT With Oxygen or nitrogen containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 146 wherein the ethylenically unsaturated
    aromatic reactant is reacted with at least an oxygen or nitrogen containing
    ethylenically unsaturated reactant.


CLS 521/148
TXT With conjugated diene reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 146 wherein the ethylenically unsaturated
    aromatic reactant is reacted with a conjugated diene reactant.

    (1)     Note.  A conjugated diene for purposes of this subclass requires at
    least two ethylenic bonds separated from each other by a single
    nonethylenic bond, e.g., -C=C-C=C-C-

    (2)     Note.  A compound having at least one conjugated unit as in (1)
    Note above is sufficient for placement into this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  A compound such as a triene is proper herein if it contains
    at least one conjugated unit.


CLS 521/149
TXT From oxygen containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 142 wherein a solid polymer is derived from
    at least one reactant containing an oxygen atom.


CLS 521/150
TXT From reactant containing two or more ethylenic unsaturated groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 142 wherein a solid polymer is derived from
    at least one reactant containing two or more ethylenic groups.


CLS 521/151
TXT Cellular polymer derived from tar, pitch, bitumen, asphalt, or plant
    material of unknown constitution, e.g., nut shell liquor, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 involving a cellular polymer derived from
    at least one reactant which is identified as a tar, pitch, bitumen,
    asphalt, or as a plant material of substantially undefined chemical
    identity or process of preparing; compositions containing a polymer derived
    from a reactant identified as a tar, pitch, bitumen, asphalt, or as a plant
    material of substantially undefined chemical identity or contain a
    polymerizable reactant identified as tar, pitch, bitumen, asphalt, or plant
    material of substantially undefined chemical constitution and which
    composition is capable of preparing a cellular product or process of
    preparing same.  Processes of treating a cellular polymer derived from at
    least one reactant which is identified as a tar, bitumen, asphalt, or as a
    plant material of substantially undefined chemical identity with a material
    which neither reacts with the cellular polymer to change or modify chemical
    bonds therein or neither forms a desired composition with the cellular
    polymer or products of such a treatment; processes of treating a cellular
    polymer derived from at least one reactant which is identified as a tar,
    pitch, bitumen, asphalt, or as a plant material of substantially undefined
    chemical constituent without the addition of a material thereto whereby a
    physical or chemical change in the polymer may be effected or products
    which are the result of such a treatment.

    (1)     Note.  Tars are the result of thermal decomposition of wood in the
    substantial absence of oxygen.

    (2)     Note.  Asphalt or bitumen refers to solid or semi-solid materials
    which are often black or dark brown and which occur naturally or are
    obtained by refining petroleum or are the components of coal which are
    soluble in organic solvents.  The terms also apply to residual materials
    such as coal, asphaltic, pyrobitumens, ozokerite, tar, pitch, e.g.,
    asphalt, earth pitch, mineral pitch, petroleum asphalt, gilsonite, etc.

    (3)     Note.  The types of plant material which are proper for this
    subclass are those whose composition and constitution are not sufficiently
    determined to enable their classification in the later subclasses on the
    basis of a particular reactant.

    (4)     Note.  Materials which are substantially known as to chemical
    constitution are excluded from this subclass and are classified below in
    the schedule on the basis of the first specific reactant which is part of
    the chemical composition.  If any doubt exists as to whether a material is
    of sufficient chemical identity so as to be classified as a specific
    reactant then such doubt is to be resolved by classifying the claim as an
    original in this area and cross referencing to the appropriate reactant
    area.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for a process of treating a cellular polymer with a material so as
    to modify or change chemical bonds in the cellular polymer or wherein a
    material is added to a foamed polymer to form a desired composition
    therewith, or for cellular products which are the result of such a treating
    process.

    180,    for Cardanol, anacardic acid or derivatives, tannins or tannic
    acid, or cresylic acid as reactants.


CLS 521/152
TXT Cellular product derived from boron containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 involving a cellular polymer derived from
    at least one reactant which contains a boron atom or process of preparing;
    composition containing a polymer derived from a reactant containing a boron
    atom or containing polymerizable reactant containing a boron atom and which
    composition is capable of preparing a cellular product or processes of
    preparing same; processes of treating a cellular polymer derived from a
    boron containing reactant with a material which neither reacts with the
    cellular polymer to change or modify chemical bonds therein or neither
    forms a desired composition with the cellular polymer or products of such a
    treatment; processes of treating a cellular polymer derived from a boron
    containing polymer without the addition of a material thereto whereby a
    physical or chemical change in the polymer may be effected or products
    which are the result of such a treatment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for a process of treating a cellular polymer with a material so as
    to modify or change chemical bonds in the cellular polymer or wherein a
    material is added to a cellular polymer to form a desired composition
    therewith, or for cellular products which are the result of such a treating
    process.


CLS 521/153
TXT Cellular product derived from aluminum or heavy metal containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 involving a cellular polymer derived from
    at least one reactant which contains an aluminum or heavy metal atom or
    process of preparing; composition containing a polymer derived from a
    reactant containing an aluminum or heavy metal atom or from a polymerizable
    reactant containing an aluminum or heavy-metal atom and which composition
    is capable of preparing a cellular product; processes of treating a
    cellular polymer derived from an aluminum or heavy metal containing
    reactant with a material which neither reacts with the cellular polymer to
    change or modify chemical bonds therein or neither forms a desired
    composition with the cellular polymer or products of such a treatment;
    processes of treating a cellular polymer derived from an aluminum or heavy
    metal containing polymer without the addition of material thereto whereby a
    physical or chemical change in the polymer may be effected or products
    which are the result of such a treatment.

    (1)     Note.  Heavy metal denotes a metal atom having a specific gravity
    greater than four.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for a process of treating a cellular polymer with a material so as
    to modify or change chemical bonds in the cellular polymer or wherein a
    material is added to a cellular polymer to form a desired composition
    therewith, or for cellular products which are the result of such a treating
    process.


CLS 521/154
TXT Cellular product derived from silicon containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 involving a cellular polymer derived from
    at least one reactant which contains a silicon atom or process of
    preparing; composition containing a polymer derived from a reactant
    containing a silicon atom or containing a polymerizable reactant containing
    a silicon atom and which composition is capable of preparing a cellular
    product or processes of preparing same; processes of treating a cellular
    polymer derived from a silicon containing reactant with a material which
    neither reacts with the cellular polymer to change or modify chemical bonds
    therein or neither forms a desired composition with the cellular polymer or
    products of such a treatment; processes of treating a cellular polymer
    derived from a silicon containing polymer without the addition of a
    material thereto whereby a physical or chemical change in the polymer may
    be effected or products which are the result of such a treatment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for a process of treating a cellular polymer with a material so as
    to modify or change chemical bonds in the cellular polymer or wherein a
    material is added to a cellular polymer to form a desired composition
    therewith, or for cellular products which are the result of such a treating
    process.


CLS 521/155
TXT Cellular product derived from a -N=C=X containing reactant wherein X is a
    chalcogen atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 involving a cellular polymer derived form
    at least one reactant which contains a -N=C=X group (X is a chalcogen)or
    process of preparing; composition containing a polymer derived from a
    reactant containing a -N=C=X group or involving a polymerizable reactant
    containing a -N=C=X (X is a chalcogen)group and which composition is
    capable of preparing a cellular product or processes of preparing same;
    processes of treating a cellular polymer derived from a -N=C=X (X is a
    chalcogen)containing reactant with a material which neither reacts with the
    cellular polymer to change or modify chemical bonds therein or neither
    forms a desired composition with the cellular polymer or products of such a
    treatment; processes of treating a cellular polymer derived from a -N=C=X
    reactant without the addition of a material thereto whereby a physical or
    chemical change in the polymer may be effected or products which are the
    result of such a treatment.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also provides for those functional derivatives
    of isocyanates which are generally known as blocked, masked, or hidden
    isocyanates.  These materials are those which revert on heating to the
    -N=C=X group, (e.g., urethanes or ureides of phenols, alkanols, lactams,
    oximes, etc.).

    (2)     Note.  Where a -N=C=X group is produced by an in situ reaction or a
    decomposition reaction (other than blocked, masked, or hidden isocyanates),
    those patents have been placed as originals in the subclass which provides
    for the compound prior to its decomposition or on the basis of the
    reactants undergoing the in situ reaction, e.g., carbonates or oxalates,
    etc.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass includes those compounds wherein the nitrogen
    (-N=C=X) may or may not be bonded to a carbon atom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for a process of treating a cellular polymer with a material so as
    to modify or change chemical bonds in the cellular polymer or wherein a
    material is added to a cellular polymer to form a desired composition
    therewith, or for cellular products which are the result of such a treating
    operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    528,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 44+ for a
    noncellular polymer derived from a -N=C=X containing reactant.


CLS 521/156
TXT With three-membered heterocyclic reactant containing two carbon atoms and a
    hetero atom (i.e., nitrogen or a chalcogen atom):

    Subject matter under subclass 155 wherein a compound containing a -  (X is
    nitrogen

    or a chalcogen atom) group is reacted with a -N=C=X containing material.


CLS 521/157
TXT With a C XH or C X  C, reactant wherein X is a chalcogen atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 wherein a compound containing a

     C XH or C X  C, (X is a chalcogen) group is reacted with a -N=C=X
    containing material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172+,   for a cellular product which is the result of the reaction between
    -N=C=X containing compound and a carboxylic acid ester reactant.


CLS 521/158
TXT With a Ketone, Aldehyde, or Aldehyde Derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 wherein a ketone, aldehyde, or aldehyde
    derivative is reacted with a -N=C=X containing material.

    (1)     Note.  See "GLOSSARY" for a definition of the term "aldehyde" or
    "ketone"; and see Class 528, subclass 230 for an explanation of the term
    aldehyde derivative.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163+,   for a polyarylene polyamine as a reactant which polyarylene
    polyamine has been prepared by the reaction of formaldehyde and an aromatic
    amine.


CLS 521/159
TXT N=C=X reactant having at least two C- - groups, e.g., prepolymers, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 wherein the -N=C=X (X is chalcogen)
    reactant contains at

    least two C-NH groups.

    (1)     Note.  Patents for the most part herein concern the after treatment
    of a prepolymer having a terminal -N=C=X group.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155     through 158 and 160 through 177, for products and processes where a
    prepolymer is inherently prepared in an ongoing polymerization reaction and
    is subsequently modified, but where no intent has been made to recognize or
    identify the prepolymer intermediate.


CLS 521/160
TXT Two or more N=C=X reactants:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 wherein two or more -N=C=X (X is a
    chalcogen)containing materials are employed.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are those conventional
    commercial compositions which are mixtures of toluene disocyanate (e.g., 2,
    4 and 2, 6 TDi, 20/80 percent and 35/65 percent, etc.).  However, mixtures
    of stereo and position isomers are included herein if proportions are
    recited.


CLS 521/161
TXT N=C=X reactant contains a heterocyclic ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 wherein the -N=C=X reactant contains a
    heterocyclic ring.

    (1)     Note.  See "GLOSSARY" for a definition of the term "heterocyclic"
    ring.


CLS 521/162
TXT N=C=X reactant contains atoms other than carbon and hydrogen and other than
    nitrogen and chalcogen as part of the N=C=X group:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 wherein the -N=C=X reactant contains
    atoms other than carbon and hydrogen and atoms other than nitrogen or
    chalcogen as part of the -N=C=X moiety.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for
    -N=C=X reactants containing atoms other than C, H, N, or chalcogen, and for
    -N=C=X compounds wherein nitrogen or chalcogen are present but are not part
    of the -N=C=X moiety.


CLS 521/163
TXT With nitrogen containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 wherein a nitrogen containing material is
    reacted with a -N=C=X containing reactant.


CLS 521/164
TXT Nitrogen reactant contains a C-XH group wherein X is a chalcogen atom and
    wherein the C atom is not double bonded to a chalcogen atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 163 wherein the nitrogen reactant contains a
    C-XH (X is a chalcogen) group and wherein at least one carbon atom that may
    be bound to a -XH group is not double bonded to a chalcogen atom.  Included
    herein are alcohols, etc.


CLS 521/165
TXT Phosphorus containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 164 wherein a phosphorus containing material
    is employed as a reactant.

    (1)     Note.  The phosphorus containing material may be in the same
    compound as the nitrogen atom or may be in a separate reactant.


CLS 521/166
TXT Nitrogen reactant contains a nitrogen containing heterocyclic ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 164 wherein a heterocyclic compound
    containing a nitrogen atom as a ring atom is employed as a reactant.

    (1)     Note.  See "GLOSSARY" for a definition of the term "heterocyclic"
    compound.


CLS 521/167
TXT Nitrogen reactant contains a N-(C-C-O)- group:

    Subject matter under subclass 164 wherein the nitrogen reactant contains a
    N-(C-C-O- group.

    (1)     Note.  A nitrogen compound which has been reacted with a reactant
    containing a 1, 2 epoxy group is considered the absence of disclosure to
    the contrary as containing a N-(C-C-O)- group.


CLS 521/168
TXT With phosphorus containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 wherein a phosphorus containing material
    is reacted with a -N=C=X reactant.


CLS 521/169
TXT Phosphorus reactant contains a -O-(C-C-O)- group:

    Subject matter under subclass 168 wherein
    the phosphorus reactant contains a
    -O-(C-C-O)- group.

    (1)     Note.  A phosphorus compound which has been reacted with a reactant
    containing a 1, 2 epoxy group is considered in the absence of disclosure
    tothe contrary as containing a-O-(C-C-O)- group.


CLS 521/170
TXT With -XH reactant wherein X is a chalcogen atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 wherein a -XH (X is a chalcogen
    containing material) is reacted with a -N=C=X containing material.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass the -XH material need not be
    bonded to a carbon atom.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes but is not limited to mercaptans,
    glycols, and carbonic acid as reactants.


CLS 521/171
TXT -XH reactant contains a halogen atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 170 wherein the -XH (X is a chalcogen)
    reactant contains a halogen atom.


CLS 521/172
TXT -XH reactant contains a  group, e.g., carboxylic acid ester, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 170 wherein XH

     reactant contains a  (X is a chalcogen atom) group.


CLS 521/173
TXT With non  containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 172 wherein in

    addition to the -N=C=X and   containing reactant there is present a

    third reactant which is devoid of any  group.


CLS 521/174
TXT -XH reactant contains a C-X-C group:

    Subject matter under subclass 170 wherein the -XH reactant contains a
    -C-X-C group (X is a chalcogen).


CLS 521/175
TXT C-X-C reactant contains a carbohydrate group:

    Subject matter under subclass 174 wherein the -XH containing -C-X-C-
    reactant contains a carbohydrate group.


CLS 521/176
TXT With non -C-X-C- containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 174 wherein at least one reactant which is
    other than a -N=C=X containing reactant and is other than a reactant
    containing both a -XH and a -C-X-C group is utilized.


CLS 521/177
TXT C-X-C reactant contains a carbocyclic ring, e.g., aromatic, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 174 wherein the -XH containing -C-X-C-
    reactant contains a carbocyclic ring.


CLS 521/178
TXT Cellular product derived from a reactant containing two or more
    three-membered heterocyclic rings wherein two of the ring members are
    carbon atoms and the remaining ring member is a chalcogen atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 involving a cellular polymer derived from
    at least one



    reactant containing two or more--  groups (X is a chalcogen) or process of
    preparing composition containing a polymer derived from a reactant
    containing two or more

    -- groups or involving a polymerizable reactant containing two or more

    -- (X is a chalcogen) groups and which composition is capable of forming a
    cellular product or processes of preparing same; pro-


    cesses of treating a cellular polymer derived from a reactant containing
    two or more

    -- groups (X is a chalcogen) with a material which neither reacts with the
    cellular polymer to change or modify chemical bonds therein or neither
    forms a desired composition with the cellular polymer or products of such a
    treatment; processes of treating a cellular polymer derived from a reactant
    containing two or more

    -- groups without the addition of a material thereto whereby a physical or
    chemical change in the polymer may be effected or products which are the
    result of such a treatment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for a process of treating a cellular polymer with a material so as
    to modify or change chemical bonds in the cellular polymer or wherein a
    material is added to a cellular polymer to form a desired composition
    therewith, or for cellular products which are the result of such a treating
    operation.


CLS 521/179
TXT With X containing reactant wherein X is a chalcogen atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 178 wherein the said three-membered
    heterocyclic

    material is reacted with a X containing reactant and wherein X is a
    chalcogen atom.


CLS 521/180
TXT Cellular product derived from a phenol, phenol ether, or inorganic
    phenolate reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 involving a cellular polymer derived from
    at least one reactant which is a phenol, phenol ether, or inorganic
    phenolate or process of preparing; composition containing a polymer derived
    from a phenol, phenol ether, or inorganic phenolate or involving a
    polymerizable phenol, phenol ether or inorganic phenolate and which
    composition is capable of forming a cellular product or processes of
    preparing same; processes of treating a cellular polymer derived from a
    phenol, phenol ether, or inorganic phenolate with a material which neither
    reacts with the cellular polymer to change or modify chemical bonds therein
    or neither forms a desired composition with the cellular polumer or
    products of such a treatment; processes of treating a cellular polumer
    without the addition of a material thereto whereby a physical or chemical
    change in the polymer may be effected or products which are the result of
    such a treatment.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 528, subclass 86 for a definition of the term
    phenol, phenol ether, or inorganic phenolate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for a process of treating a cellular polymer with a material so as
    to modify or change chemical bonds in the cellular polymer or wherein
    material is added to a cellular polymer to form a desired composition
    therewith, or for cellular products which are the result of such a treating
    process.


CLS 521/181
TXT With reactant which is an aldehyde or aldehyde derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 180 wherein the phenol, phenol ether, or
    inorganic phenolate is reacted with a aldehyde or derivative.



    (1)     Note. (A)  See "GLOSSARY" for a definition of the term "aldehyde":

                      (B)   An "aldehyde derivative" is:



    (1)     A compound having a -X-CH2-OH group wherein X is other than carbon
    or hydrogen (e.g. para- formaldehyde, methylol derivatives of urea, etc.).

    (2)     A heterocyclic compound having only carbon and oxygen as ring
    members in an inalternating manner and in equal amount, i.e.,

     e.g., trioxane.

    (3)     Hexamethylenetetramine (CH2)6N4, known also as methenamine,
    hexamine, formine,

    amino form, hexamethyleneamine and urotropin, and its derivatives.

            A derivative for purposes of this subclass requires the basic ring
    structure of hexamethylenetetramine but wherein the hydrogen atoms may have
    been replaced by other atoms.

    (2)     Note.  Compounds having a -CH2OH group bonded to atoms other than
    C, H or oxygen are regarded as being two compounds; for instance, a
    methylol derivative of melamine is regarded as a mixture of melamine and
    formaldehyde and methylol urea is regarded as being a mixture of urea and
    formaldehyde.

    (3)     Note.  A unspecified novolak or resole is proper for this area in
    that it is a mixture of a phenol and an aldehyde. If a novolak or resole of
    specified structure is claimed as a reactant, then classification is proper
    based on the structure of the specific reactant.


CLS 521/182
TXT Cellular product derived from a -C X       containing reacting wherein x is
    a chalcogen atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 involving a cellular polymer derived from
    at least one

    reactant containing a-C   X    group (X is a chalcogen) or processes of
    preparing; composition containing a polymer derived from a

     -C   X    (X is a chalcogen) reactant or

    involving a polymerizable  reactant and which composition is capable of
    forming a cellular product or processes of preparing same; processes of
    treating a cellular polymer derived



    from a -CX (X is a chalcogen) reactant with a material which neither reacts
    with the cellular polymer to change or modify chemical bonds therein or
    neither forms a desired composition with the cellular polymer, or products
    of such a treatment; processes of treating a cellular polymer without the
    addition of a material whereby a physical or chemical change in the polymer
    may be effected or products which are the result of such a treatment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for a process of treating a cellular polymer with a material so as
    to modify or change chemical bonds in the cellular polymer or wherein a
    material is added to a cellular polymer to form a desired composition
    therewith, or for cellular products which are the result of such a treating
    operation.


CLS 521/183
TXT Nitrogen containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 182 wherein at least one reactant contains a
    nitrogen atom.

    (1)     Note. The nitrogen atom may be part of the  C   X   reactant or may
    be part of an additional co-reactant.


CLS 521/184
TXT Nitrogen reactant contains at least two amino nitrogen atoms:

    Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein at least one reactant contains
    two or more amine groups.

    (1)     Note.  See "GLOSSARY" for a definition of the term "amine".

    (2)     Note.  An amine proper for this subclass requires (a) at least two
    distinct nitrogen atoms bonded to at least two distinct carbon atoms, or
    (b) the presence of at least two nitrogen atoms bonded to the same carbon
    atom. Each nitrogen atom single or double-bonded in the manner set forth
    above and consistent with the (1) Note above is an amine.


CLS 521/185
TXT Carbocyclic -C   X  containing reactant:
    Subject matter under subclass 184 wherein the

    -C    X  containing reactant is part of a compound which contains a
    carbocyclic ring.


CLS 521/186
TXT Cellular product derived from reactant - which is an aldehyde derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 involving a cellular polymer derived from
    at least one aldehyde or derivative as a reactant or processes of
    preparing; composition containing a polymer derived from an aldehyde or
    derivative as a reactant or involving a polymerizable aldehyde or
    derivative and which composition is capable of forming a cellular product
    or processes of preparing; processes of treating a cellular polymer derived
    from an aldehyde or derivative with a material which neither reacts with
    the cellular polymer to change or modify chemical bonds therein or neither
    forms a desired composition with the cellular polymer or products of such a
    treatment; processes of treating a cellular polymer without the addition of
    a material whereby a physical or chemical change in the polymer may be
    effected or products which are the result of such a treatment.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 528, subclass 230 for a definition of the term
    aldehyde derivative, and see "GLOSSARY" for a definition of the term
    "aldehyde".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for processes of treating a cellular polymer with a material so as
    to modify or change chemical bonds in the cellular polymer or wherein a
    material is added to a cellular polymer to form a desired composition
    therewith, or for cellular products which are the result of such a treating
    operation.


CLS 521/187
TXT Nitrogen containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 186 wherein at least one reactant contains a
    nitrogen atom.

    (1)     Note.  The nitrogen atom may be part of the aldehyde or derivative
    or may be part of an additional co-reactant. Hexamethylenetetramine
    although an aldehyde derivative is excluded from this subclass as being a
    nitrogen containing reactant.


CLS 521/188
TXT Nitrogen reactant contains a -NN group wherein X is a chalcogen atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 187 wherein the

    nitrogen reactant contains a -N N moiety wherein X is a chalcogen atom.


CLS 521/189
TXT Cellular product derived from reactant containing a carbon to chalcogen
    bond: Subject matter under subclass 50 involving a cellular polymer derived
    from at least one

    reactant containing aor (X is a chalcogen atom) group or processes of
    preparing; composition containing a polymer derived from at least one
    reactant containing a

    or group or involving a polymerizable

    reactant containing a or reactant (X is a chalcogen) and which composition
    is capable of forming a cellular product or process of preparing same;
    processes of treating a cellular



    polymer derived from a or  (X is a chalcogen) reactant with a material
    which neither reacts with the cellular polymer to change or modify chemical
    bonds therein or neither forms a desired composition with the cellular
    polymer or products thereof; processes of treating a cellular polymer
    without the addition of a material whereby a physical or chemical change in
    the polymer may be effected or products which are the result of such a
    treatment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53+,    for process of treating a cellular polymer with a material so as to
    modify or change chemical bonds in the cellular polymer or wherein a
    material is added to a cellular polymer to form a desired composition
    therewith; of for cellular products which are the result of such a treating
    operation.

               CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS

    The following subclasses are collections of published disclosures
    pertaining to various aspects of art relating to cellular polymers which do
    not form an appropriate base for subclass classification in the
    classification schedule.

    (1)     Note.  Disclosures have been placed for value as a search aid and
    in no instance do they represent the entire extent of the prior art.


CLS 521/901
TXT CELLULAR POLYMER CONTAINING A CARBODIIMIDE STRUCTURE:

    Subject matter involving cellular products containing the carbodiimide
    structure, i.e., -N-C=N-.


CLS 521/902
TXT CELLULAR POLYMER CONTAINING AN ISOCYANURATE STRUCTURE:

    Subject matter involving cellular products containing the isocyanurate
    structure, i.e.,


CLS 521/903
TXT CELULAR POLYMER HAVING REDUCED SMOKE OR GAS GENERATION:

    Subject matter involving cellular products which are designed to have
    reduced smoke or gas generation upon burning.


CLS 521/904
TXT POLYURETHANE CELLULAR PRODUCT HAVING HIGH RESILIENCY OR COLD CURE PROPERTY:

    Subject matter involving cellular polyurethane products having high
    resiliency or cold cure property.


CLS 521/905
TXT HYDROPHILIC OR HYDROPHOBIC CELLULAR PRODUCT:

    Subject matter involving a cellular polymer which has a specific affinity
    for or aversion to water, i.e., possessing hydrophilic or hydrophobic
    properties.


CLS 521/906
TXT POLYURETHANE CELLULAR PRODUCT CONTAINING UNREACTED FLAME-RETARDANT MATERIAL:

    Subject matter involving a cellular polyurethane polymer having
    incorporated therein a nonreactive material which enhances the ability of
    the polyurethane to withstand combustion or the effects of fire.


CLS 521/907
TXT NONURETHANE FLAMEPROOFED CELLULAR PRODUCT:

    Subject matter involving a nonpolyurethane cellular product having specific
    flameproof properties.


CLS 521/908
TXT NUCLEATING AGENT FOR CELLULAR PRODUCT:

    Subject matter involving specified nucleating agents utilized in preparing
    cellular products.


CLS 521/909
TXT BLOWING-AGENT MODERATOR, E.G., KICKERS, ETC.:

    Subject matter involving an agent which is not generally by itself a
    blowing agent and which retards, modifies, accelerates, or in other manner
    affects the blowing characteristics of utilized blowing agent.


CLS 521/910
TXT PLURAL BLOWING AGENTS FOR PRODUCING NONPOLYURETHANE CELLULAR PRODUCTS:

    Subject matter involving preparing a nonpolyurethane cellular product by
    utilizing two or more distinct blowing agents either together or at
    different times.


CLS 521/911
TXT SURFACANT FOR OTHER THAN POLYURETHANE CELLULAR PRODUCT:

    Subject matter involving specified surfactants utilized in preparing
    nonpolyurethane cellular products.


CLS 521/912
TXT SEPARATED REACTIVE MATERIALS UTILIZED IN PREPARING CELLULAR PRODUCT:

    Subject matter involving utilizing two or more reactive materials which are
    generally separated from each other by some barrier layer.


CLS 521/913
TXT CELL FORMING IN ABSENCE OF EXTERNAL HEAT:

    Subject matter involving a cell forming process wherein the cells are
    generated in the absence of externally applied heat.


CLS 521/914
TXT POLYURETHANE CELLULAR PRODUCT FORMED FROM A POLYOL WHICH HAS BEEN DERIVED
    FROM AT LEAST TWO 1, 2 EPOXIDES AS REACTANTS:

    Subject matter involving polyurethane cellular products derived from at
    least one polyether polyol which polyether polyol has been prepared from at
    least two 1, 2 alkylene oxides.


CLS 521/915
TXT UTILIZING ELECTRICAL OR WAVE ENERGY DURING CELL FORMING PROCESS:

    Subject matter involving preparing a cellular product under the influence
    of electrical or wave energy.


CLS 521/916
TXT CELLULAR PRODUCT HAVING ENHANCED DEGRADABILITY:

    Subject matter involving a cellular product which has been formulated or
    prepared with the intent that said cellular product will be easily degraded
    for ecological or for any other purpose.


CLS 521/917
TXT SPECIALIZED MIXING APPARATUS UTILIZED IN FORMING PROCESS:

    Subject matter involving mixing apparatus specialized or uniquely adapted
    to forming cellular products.


CLS 521/918
TXT PHYSICAL AFTER-TREATMENT OF A CELLULAR PRODUCT:

    Subject matter involving physically treating a cellular product.


CLS 521/919
TXT SINTERED PRODUCT:

    Subject matter involving a product having voids therebetween and which
    products are usually formed by agglomerating or uniting particles together.


CLS 521/920
TXT CELLULAR PRODUCT CONTAINING A DYE OR PIGMENT:

    Subject matter involving a cellular product having incorporated therein a
    dye or a pigment.


CLS 521/921
TXT PREPARING A NONPOLYURETHANE CELLULAR PARTICLE FROM A NONPARTICULATE
    MATERIAL:

    Subject matter involving processes of preparing a particulate
    nonpolyurethane cellular product from a nonparticulate, noncellular
    material.


CLS 522/
TTL SYNTHETIC RESINS OR NATURAL RUBBERS -- PART OF THE CLASS 520 SERIES

CLS 522/1
TXT COMPOSITIONS TO BE POLYMERIZED BY WAVE ENERGY WHEREIN SAID COMPOSITION
    CONTAINS A RATE-AFFECTING MATERIAL; OR COMPOSITIONS TO BE MODIFIED BY WAVE
    ENERGY WHEREIN SAID COMPOSITION CONTAINS A RATE-AFFECTING MATERIAL; OR
    PROCESSES OF PREPARING OR TREATING A SOLID POLYMER UTILIZING WAVE ENERGY:

    Subject matter under Class 520, subclass 1 involving processes of (1)
    preparing a solid polymer in the presence of wave energy is employed to
    induce the polymerization; or (2) chemically modifying a solid polymer with
    a chemical reactant in the presence of wave energy is employed to induce
    the reaction; or (3) modifying a solid polymer by wave energy wherein the
    wave energy induces a chemical reaction in the solid polymer; and
    compositions of (1), (2) and (3) to be polymerized or reacted provided a
    photoinitiator or photosensitizer is present.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this class the following abbreviation has
    been adopted in the schedule and in the definitions:

    DNRM - designated nonreactant material.

    (2)     Note.  GENERAL SUMMARY OF SUBJECT MATTER WITHIN THIS CLASS The
    following types of claimed subject matter are proper for this class:



    a.      A claim drawn to a process of making a photopolymerizable
    composition of reactant A plus photoiniator or photosensitizer.

    b.      A claimed drawn to a photopolymerizable composition of reactant A
    plus photoinitiator.

    c.      A claim drawn to a process of irradiating reactant

    A with or without a photoinitiator or photosensitizer being present.



    d.      A claim drawn to a photopolymerizable composition of reactant A
    plus photoinitiator or photosensitizer and any other material, e.g.,
    filler, solvent, etc.

    In a,b,c and d above, A can be a monomer, low molecular weight condensation
    or addition product, or solid polymer.  The sole proviso is that the final
    product be a solid polymer as is required under Class 520, subclass 1.
    When a claim so expressly states a monomer or polymer is considered to be a
    photoinitiator or photosensitizer.

    The recitation of a specified amount of photoinitiator or photosensitizer
    is unnecessary for purposes of classification in this class.

    (3)     Note.  The term designated nonreactant material as used in Class
    522 is a material wherein at least one of the chemical atoms can be deduced
    with certainty.  For purposes of this class, organic material although
    inherently reciting the presence of a carbon atom is considered to be too
    broad.  An exemplary list of materials to be regarded as DNRM's is as
    follows:  metal hydrate, chalcogen, carboxylic acid, peroxy, peroxide,
    latex, alkali or alkaline earth metal, transition metal, halogen, proten
    donor, sulfiede, drying oil, fat, fatty acid or ester, water, carbon
    black, etc.  This list is by no means limited to the above examples.



    The following list below is not exhaustive and merely enumerates certain
    materials that will not be condsidered as DNRM's, e.g., organic compound,
    metal containing, inorganic compound, organometallic compound, solvent,
    wax, magnetic, hydrophobic, hydrophillic, antiplasticizer, plasticizer,
    filler, preservative, antioxidant, antiozonant, stablizer, lubricant,
    fibrous additive, particulate additive, liquid, solid, gas, dispersant,
    emulsifier, crystalline, plastic, flourescent, phosphorescent, liminescent,
    deliquescent, drier, dessicant, humectant, blue color,numerically described
    without providing a chemical atom, Lewis acid or base, mineral, organic
    solvent, cosolvent, Ziegler or Natta catalysts, alfin catalyst, free
    radical, amphoteric, anionic, ionic, denaturant, electrostatic, dielectric,
    conductor, insulator, etc.

    (4)     Note.  To be properly classified in Class 522 a compound must have
    a photoinitiator or photosensitizer claimed in addition to the monomer to
    be polymerized or the polymer to be treated.  For example, a claim drawn to
    a photopolymerizable composition comprising an ethylenically unsaturated
    monomer plus a photoinitiator is properly classified herin, whereas a claim
    drawnto a substituted benzophenone autopolymerizable composition is not
    properly classifiable in 522.  The requirement for proper classification is
    separateness of monomer or polymer and photoinitiator or phtosensitizer.  A
    material described as being both a photoinitiator or photosenitizer and a
    reactant and a seperate monomer or solid polymer is a proper composition
    for this subclass.  Products which are the result of a wave energy process
    are normally excluded from Class 522 and are classified in other areas of
    the 520 series.  An exception to this would be situation wherein a further
    wave energy step is comtemplated and the formed product is is admixture
    with a photoinitiator or photosensitizer.

    (5)     Note.  The term "wave energy" includes radiations as well as wave
    energies transmitted by various mediums and embraces electromagnetic waves
    or radiations, ultrasonic and supersonic waves, nuetrons, protons, duetron
    and other corpuscular radiations.

    (A) The term "electromagnetic waves" as employed herein includes, e.g.,
    X-rays and gammarays; ultraviolet, infrared, and visible light rays, and
    short electric and radio waves.  Energy which produces merely a thermal
    effect or heat waves, per se, is excluded.

    (B) Unless stated to the contrary microwave energy is considered to
    produced merely a thermal effect and is not proper for Class 522.

    (6)     Note.  SCHEDULE OUTLINE OF CLASS 522.



    The schedule is divided into a number of parts, each of which is distinct
    and provides for different types of subject matter.  The following is a
    breakdown of the major areas and indicates the type of subject matter
    provided therein:

    (1)     Subclass 1 is the generic subclass for the class.

    (2)     Subclass 2 - 5 (manipulative process areas) provides for certain
    designated processes of preparing or treating a polymer or compositions
    therefore.  This area has no generic subclass an therefore documents not
    covered under the ambit of the provided subclasses are classified below on
    some other basis.

    (3)     Subclasses 6 - 70 (specified rate-affecting material area) provides
    for processes of preparing or treating polymers or compositions therefore
    wherein a rate-affecting material is utilized simultaneously with the wave
    energy and wherein at least one rate-affecting material is designated by at
    least one atom, e.g., a nitrogen-containing photoinitiator, etc.  The
    specified rate-affecting material are is further subdivided into the
    following:


    (a)     Subclasses 7 - 30 provide for two or more rate-affecting materials,
    only one of which need be specifically claimed.

    (b)     Subclasses 8 - 10 provide for either (1) at least two
    rate-affecting material containing a keto group which is not part of a
    ring, e.g., benzophenone, etc., or (ii) the combination of one
    rate-affecting material containing a keto group which is not part of a ring
    plus a rate-affecting material referred to as a "photoinitiator or
    photosensitizer".  The basic premise of these subclasses is that a
    rate-affecting material identified as a "photoinitiator or photosensitizer"
    is to be equated with a rate-affecting material containing a keto group
    wherein the keto group is not part of a ring.

    (c)     Subclass 11 provides for the combination of a rate-affecting
    material containing a keto group not part of a ring plus a broadly claimed
    rate-affecting material, other than "photoinitiator or photosensitizer",
    e.g., the combination of a benzophenone and a curing catalyst would be
    proper for this subclass, etc.

    (d)     Subclasses 12 - 23 provide for the combination of either (1) a
    rate-affecting material containing a keto group not part of a ring plus a
    rate-affecting material wherein at least one atom is designated; or (2) a
    rate-affecting material referred to as a "photoinitiator or
    photosensitizer" plus a rate-affecting material wherein at least one atom
    is designated.  The basis of classification in these subcalsses is with the
    latter ingredient of the aforementioned combinations.

    (e)     Subclasses 24 - 30 provide for the combination of two or more
    rate-affecting materials neither one of which contains a keto group not
    part of a ring.  The basis of classification in these subclasses is with
    the first appearing ratr-affecting material provided in the schedule
    hierarchy.

    (f)     Subclasses 31 - 70 provided for specified rate-affecting material.

    (4)     Subclasses 71 - 86 (designated nonreactant areas) provide for
    processes of preparing or treating polymers, or compositions therefore,
    wherein a  designated nonreactant material is present when the wave energy
    is applied.

    (5)     Subclasses 87 - 189 (preparation or treatment of polymer area)
    provide for processes or compositions therefore of the following categories:

    (a)     Subclasses 87 - 108 provide specifically for proteins and
    carbohydrates as reactants and for treating a terminally unsaturated
    polyurethane, ethylenically unsaturated siloxane, polysiloxane, polyester
    or polypoxide derivative.

    (b)     Subclasses 109 and 110 provide for chemically modifying a blend of
    two or more solid polymers by a chemical reactant.

    (c)     Subclasses 111 and 112 provide for treating a blend of two or more
    solid polymers.

    (d)     Subclasses 113 - 147 provide for chemically modifying a solid
    polymer by a chemical reactant in the presence of wave energy.

    (e)     Subclasses 148 - 166 provide for treating a solid polymer in the
    presence of wave energy wherein a chemical reaction occurs.

    (f)     Subclasses 167 - 189 provide for the preparation of a solid polymer
    by utilizing wave energy.

    (6)     Subclasses 901 - 915 are cross-reference art collections pertaining
    to subject matter proper for Class 522.

    (7)     Note.  GENERAL RULES AS TO PATENT PLACEMENT AND RULES PERTAINING TO
    OTHER AREAS IN CLASS 520.

    (A) The step in a process claim utilizing the wave energy is the proper
    basis for classification purposes.  For example:

    (1)     A claim drawn to processes of polymerixing ethylene in the presence
    of carbon black (DNRM) by wave energy is properly classified in subclass
    71, whereas a claim drawn to polymerizing ethylene in the presence of wave
    energy followed by treating the product with carbon black (DNRM) is
    properly classified in subclass 189.

    (2)     A claim drawn to trearing polyacrylonitrile with vinyl chloride in
    the presence of energy is properly classified in subclass 124, whereas a
    claim drawn to treating a graft polyacrylonitrile-vinyl chloride copolymer
    with wave energy is properly classified in subclass 149.

    (3)     A claim drawn to the process of making polyethylene by polymerizing
    ethylene in the presence of wave energy followed by chemically treating
    said product with halogen (with no wave energy present) would be classified
    in subclass 189.

    (4)     A claim drawn to the process of reacting polyethylene with halogen
    in the presence of wave energy following by the addition of carbon black
    would be classified in subclass 133.

    (B) A process of treating a solid polymer with wave energy followed by the
    addition of a chemical reactant is presumed, in the absence to the contrary
    to proceed entirely by wave energy and is classified in subclasses 113-147;
    however, a process of treating an irradiated polymer with a chemical
    reactant is properly classified in Class 525.  Additionally a process of
    treating a reactant with wave energy followed by adding a solid polymer and
    reacting therewith is presumed in the absence of information to the
    contrary to proceed entirely by wave energy and is classified in this class.

    A process of treating a preirradiated polymer (no wave energy process step
    recited) is properly classified in Classes 523-525 when no further wave
    energy step is claimed.  For example:

    (1)     A process of mixed a preirradiated polymer with a DNRM is properly
    classified in Class 524.

    (2)     A process for treating a preirradiated polymer with an ethylenic
    monomer is properly classified in Class 525.

    (C) Claims drawn to the utilization of wave energy to initiate a chemical
    reaction followed by the application of heat are proper for Class 522.  For
    example, a process of partially polymerizing a monomer of
    methylfluoroacrylate by wave energy followed by treatment with heat to
    complete the polymerization is classified in subclass 182.

    (D)Classification in Class 522 is on the first solid polymer prepared.  For
    instance, a process of chemically modifying a solid polymer derived from
    ethylene only, by sulfonating, (nonwave energy process) and then
    subsequently reacting said sulfonated polymer with elemental halogen using
    wave energy is proper in subclass 133, since the first solid polymer
    prepared is polyethylene.  Subclass 132 does provide for a halogenated
    polymer which is subsequently reacted in that the language of the subclass
    is "contains" rather than "derived".  In subclass 154 the language is
    "derived" and therefore if a halogenated polyethylene is treated using wave
    energy classification in subclass 161 is proper since the first solid
    polymer is prepared from ethylene.

    (E)The utilization of wave energy to induce a chemical reaction which
    thereby proceeds without the assistance of further wave energy is
    considered to be proper subject matter for this class; for example, a claim
    drawn to utilizing wave energy to activate a peroxide in order to generate
    free radicals, wherein the free radicals promote a chemical reaction is
    classified herein.

    (F)     A claim drawn to a specific photoinitiator such as a benzophenone
    with no mention in the claim of the functionality of the substance as a
    photoinitiator is classified herein if the disclosure teaches the use of
    benzophenone as a photoinitiator.

    (G) A combination of chemical process steps not involving wave energy
    followed by a subsequent chemical reaction involving wave energy is
    classified herein provided the product is proper subject matter for Class
    520, subclass 1.

    (H) The combination of Class 204 wave energy step followed by a Class 522
    wave energy step is classified herein; for example, a claim drawn to a
    process of utilizing wave energy to synthesize a monomer which is
    subsequently polymerized in the presence of wave energy is classified
    herein.

    (I)     The utilization of wave energy to generate heat, whereby the heat
    generates or induces a chemical reaction is not considrered to be "a
    chemical reaction induced by wave energy" and thus is not proper subject
    matter for Class 522.  The process, however, is proper in Class 520,
    subclass 1 if a solid polymer is produced.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, for bleaching or dyeing; fluid treatment and chemical
    modification of textiles and fibers wherein use is made of electrical
    radiant or wave energy other than electrolysis, for which see Class 205,
    subclasses 689+.

    128,    Surgery, for electrical or wave energy treatment of the living
    human body and apparatus specialized therefor.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclasses for
    producing a product of the type provided for in Class 520 by other than a
    wave energy process.  Class 204 is superior to Class 520; therefore, a
    patent claiming in the alternative a process of preparing an organic
    compound and a synthetic resin or natural rubber in the presence of wave
    energy is classified for original purposes in Class 204 and
    cross-referenced to Class 520.   In the situation where an alternative
    process claim is presented along with a specific process claim to the
    synthetic resin or natural rubber, there is no specific claim to the
    nonsynthetic resin or nonnatural rubber species, and the process is
    directed to wave energy, the same rule of original patent placement
    applies.  Any process step involving electrolysis, an electric current,
    electro-osmosis, electrophoresis, an electrostatic field, an electrical
    discharge, or a magnetic field and also involving the preparing or treating
    of a synthetic resin or natural rubber is proper for Class 204, even when
    the wave energy step involved is subsequent to a Class 204 step.
    Combinations of chemical process steps falling within the definition of
    Class 520 (other than those involving wave energy) and process steps
    falling within the definition of Class 204 are proper for Class 204 when
    the Class 520 process steps are preparatory to the Class 204 process steps
    and are proper for Class 520 when the Class 204 process steps are
    preparatory to the Class 520 process steps.

    252,    Compositions, for electrical or wave energy methods, other than
    electrolytic for the preparation of dispersions.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 131+ for polymerization apparatus.

    427,    Coating Processes, for processes of coating a substrate followed by
    curing the coating using electrical or wave energy.  Included in Class 427
    are processes of producing a coating by application of wave energy
    chemistry to a base material which supplies a part or all of the coating,
    e.g., conversion of the surface of a polymeric material to produce a film
    thereon by the application of wave energy, etc.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, appropriate subclasses for radiation sensitive compositions and
    elements and for processes of exposing said composition or elements to wave
    energy using an imagewise exposure technique.  Class 522 provides for
    compositions and processes involving use of radiation for polymerizing
    compositions having a photoinitiator or photosensitizer or for modifying
    polymers. Class 430 provides for compositions solely disclosed, or claimed
    for radiation imagery.  Compositions and processes not involving radiation
    imagery, or disclosing both a radition imagery use, and another use are
    placed in Class 522 and cross-referenced to Class 430.  Also, see Class 430
    classification line for compositions with art claimed, especially, multiple
    use (Class 430, III A 2a).

    525     through 528, Synthetic  Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate
    subclasses for process.


CLS 522/2
TXT Processes of forming or modifying a solid polymer by laser; or compositions
    therefore:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 involving the use of light amplified by
    stimulated emission of radiation, i.e., laser, or composition therefore.

    (1)     Note.  This area provides for a specific wave energy process, i.e.,
    laser.  In order for a wave energy process to be classified herein as an
    original, there must be a claim to the noted process or the total
    disclosure in the patent must be directed to the specific process.  The
    wave energy process in the claim need not be limited to the provided
    specific process if the claim specifically recites the process of this
    subclass.  Processes not claimed or solely disclosed are classified below
    on some other aspect.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass provides for compositions perfected so as to
    be utilized with a laser.  See the (4) Note under subclass 1.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes, subclass 65 for process of using a
    laser in combination with chemical etchant.


CLS 522/3
TXT Processes of forming or modifying a solid polymer wherein specific mixing,
    stirring, agitating, movement of material or directional orientation is
    employed; or compositions therefore:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 involving specific mixing, stirring,
    agitating, movement of material or directional orientation; or compositions
    therefor.

    (1)     Note.  The steps of mixing, stirring, agitating, movement of
    material or directional orientation must involve a direct relationship with
    wave energy and not be ancillary to the wave energy  exposure.  For
    instance, mixing two ingredients under specific conditions to merely form a
    composition which is then exposed to a form of wave energy is not proper
    for this subclass; howerver, mixing of the same ingredients under the same
    conditions while said formed composition is exposed to wave energy is
    proper herein.

    (2)     Note.  Specified for purposes of this subclass requires the naming
    of a movement imparting rotor, stirrer, impeller or any other device in
    terms of its specific dimension, design, size, or shape therefor, or
    requires the recitation of a reactor of a design to facilitate movement or
    agitation; or requires a positive recitation in the claims as to velocity
    or designated time of mixing, said time being either continuous or
    intermittent.

    (3)     Note.  Directional orientation includes adding material
    horizontally, tangentially, from above or below, etc.

    (4)     Note.  This subclass also provides for those compositions perfected
    so as to be utilized is a process involving the requirments of this
    subclass.  See the (4) Note under subclass 1.


CLS 522/4
TXT Process of forming or modifying a solid polymer by wave energy wherein at
    least two distinct external radiant  energy sources are utilized; or
    compositions therefore:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 involving the use or at least two distinct
    energy sources; or compositions therefore.

    (1)     Note.  The two sources or energy maybe utilized in any manner,
    e.g., successive, or concurrent, etc.  Each of the energy sources must
    cause a chemical reaction of its own right or must potentiate, accelerate,
    or have a synergistic affect in regard to the chemical reaction involved.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass also provides for those compositions perfected
    so as to be utilized in a process involving the requirements or this
    subclass. See the (4) Note under subclass 1.

    (3)     Note.  "Distinct" as used in this subclass includes the same type
    of energy either derived from one or more sources when said energy is used
    at different energy levels or wave length levels. It also includes the same
    type of energy derived from two different generating sources.


CLS 522/5
TXT Processes of forming or modifying a solid polymer by wave energy wherein a
    temperature less than 0xC (32xF) or greater than 250xC(482xF) is employed;
    or compositions therefore:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 involving a temperature less than 0xC
    (32xF) or greater than 250xC (482xF); or compositions therefore.

    (1)     Note.  The temperature conditions required must involve a direct
    relationship with wave energy.  For instance treatment of a material by
    wave energy and subsequent physical treatment at the temperature lower than
    0xC is not proper subject matter for this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  A process performed while "frozen" or under "cryogenic"
    conditions will be placed herein unless there is a disclosure that the
    temperature is greateer than 32xF.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass also provides for those compositions perfected
    so as to be utilized in a process involving the requirements of this
    subclass.  See the (4) Note. under subclass 1.


CLS 522/6
TXT Compositions to be polymerized or modified by wave energy wherein said
    composition contains at least one specified rate-affecting material; or
    processes of preparing or treating a solid polymer utilizing wave energy in
    the presence of a least one specified rate-affecting material, e.g.,
    nitrogen containing photosensitizer, oxygen containing photoinitiator, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein said process or composition to be
    polymerized or modified requires, in addition to the wave energy source, at
    least one specified rate-affecting material.

    (1)     Note.  A rate-affecting material is a material which either affects
    the rate of reaction, permits reduced amount of wave energy, increases or
    decreases the degree of polymerization, cure, cross-linking, or grafting,
    or scavenges or provides storage stability of reactive materials or
    inhibits reaction; and includes photoinitiator, photosinsitizer, activator,
    dark storage stabilizer, accelerator, inhibitor, or initiator reducing
    agent, retarder, photoreducible dye, sensitizing auxilliary, electron
    donor, generator, or curing catalyst.

    (2)     Note.  A curing agent is presumed to be cross-linking agent and is
    not considered to be a rate-affecting material.  A curing catalyst, on the
    other hand is considered to be a rate-affecting material.

    (3)     Note.  A specified rate-affecting material is a rate-affecting
    material (see (1) Note) wherein at least one of the chemical atoms can be
    deduced with certainty.


    The following are examples of specified rate-affecting materials:

    benzophenone

    oxygen containing curing catalyst
    a metal oxide containing inhibitor



    The following are examples or rate-affecting materials which are not
    specified:

    a metal containing rate-affecting material

    an organic containing rate-affecting material

    an inorganic catalyst

    an organometallic catalyst

    a Lewis acid or base catalyst

    a Ziegler catalyst

    (4)     Note.  A compound not claimed although solely disclosed as a
    rate-affecting material is considered to be a proper specified
    rate-affecting material.  For example, a claim drawn to a process of
    preparing a solid polymer in the presence of wave energy and a metal oxide
    is disclosed as functioning in a catalyst capacity.

    (5)     Note.  Unless disclosed to the contrary, a benzophenone or
    derivative thereof is presumed to be a specified rate-affecting material
    though not claimed or disclosed as having catalytic activity.

    (6)     Note.  Pigmented materials which function only to change the
    quantity of radiation received are considered to be DNRM's and are properly
    classified in subclass 71.


CLS 522/7
TXT Contains two or more rate-affecting materials, at least one of which is
    specified:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein at least two rate-affecting
    materials are claimed; at least one rate-affecting material is specified.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a patent properly classified in this subclass
    is a photoinitiator and a metal oxide curing catalyst.


CLS 522/8
TXT At least two specified rate-affecting material containing keto group not
    part of a ring; or contains nonspecified photoinitiator or photosensitizer
    and a specified ketone containing material wherein the keto group is not
    part of a ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein either (a) at least two
    rate-affecting materials are specified and each of which contains at least
    one organic keto group not part of a ring system, or (b) the combination of
    one specified rate-affecting material containing at least one organic keto
    group not part of a ring system plus a rate-affecting material designated
    as either a "photosensitizer" or "photoinitiator".

    (1)     Note.  Examples of combinations of rate-affecting materials proper
    for this subclass include:

    (b)     acyloin photoinitiator + benzophenone

    (c)     diaminobenophenone photosensitizer+ benzophenone

    (d)     a mixture of benzophenone and Michler's ketone as the photoinitiator

    (2)     Note.  A material having a keto group as part of a ring may still
    be proper for this subclass if in fact an additional keto group is present
    which is not part of a ring, e.g.,

    (3)     Note.  Ring as used in this subclass includes heterocyclic rings,
    carbocyclic, or any other ring system.

    (4)     Note.  See the Glossary in Class 520 for a definition of the term
    "ketone".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for a ketone containing a C=O group wherein the C of the C=O is
    part of a carbocyclic ring and there are no other keto moities.


CLS 522/9
TXT With a heterocyclic specified rate-affecting material:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 which includes an additional specific
    rate-affecting material which is heterocyclic.

    (1)     Note.  See the Class 520 Glossary for the definition of
    "heterocyclic".

    (2)     Note.  An example of a patent proper for this subclass is one
    having the combination of (a) a 2,2, '-deithiobis-(benzothiozole)
    sensitizer (b) aromatic ketone photosensitizer and an (c) aromatic ketone
    photosensitizer.


CLS 522/10
TXT With a tertiary amine specific rate-affecting material:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 which includes an additional specific
    rate-affecting material which contains a trivalent nitrogen atom bonded to
    three atoms which are other than hydrogen.


CLS 522/11
TXT Contains compound containing keto group not part of a ring and nonspecified
    rate-affecting material other than mere photoinitiator or photosensitzer:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein one rate-affecting material
    containing at least one organic keto group not part of a ring, e.g.,

    and the other rate-affecting material is one wherein none of the chemical
    atoms can be deduced from the claim with certainty and wherein the
    rate-affecting material which is not chemically stated is other than a
    photoinitiator or phtosensitizer.

    (1)     Note.  A material having a keto group as part of a ring may still
    be proper for this subclass if in fact an additional keto group is present
    which is not part of a ring, e.g.,

    (2)     Note.  Ring as used in this subclass includes heterocyclic rings.

    (3)     Note.  See the Glossary in Class 520 for a definition of the term
    "Ketone".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8+,     for a system containing a specified rate-affecting material
    containing at least one keto group not part of a ring in combination with a
    rate-affecting material designated merely as a "photoinitiator" or
    "photosensitizer".


CLS 522/12
TXT Contains compounds containing keto group not part of ring and a specified
    rate-affecting material; or contains a specified rate-affecting material
    and a nonspecified photoinitiator or photosensitizer:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein either (a) one rate-affecting
    material contains a keto group not part of a ring plus a specified
    rate-affecting material or (b) one specified rate-affecting material plus a
    rate-affecting material designated merely as a "photoinitiator" or
    "photosensitizer".

    (1)     Note.  Classification in indented subclasses 13 - 23 is based upon
    the first-appearing specified rate-affecting material.  The following are
    examples of proper classification in those areas:

    (a)     peroxide catalyst + benzoin ethyl ether catalyst, subclass 13

    (b)     Mn2(CO) 10+

    subclass 22.

    (c)     resorcinol monobenzoate + photoinitiator, subclass 21.

    (2)     Note.  A material having a keto group as part of a ring may still
    be proper for this subclass if in fact an additional keto group is present
    which is not part of a ring, e.g.,

    (3)     Note.  Ring as used in this subclass includes heterocyclic rings,
    carbocyclic, or any other ring system.

    (4)     Note.  See the Glossary in Class 520 for a definition of the term
    "ketone"

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8+,     for the combination of either two rate-affecting materials both of
    which contain a keto group not part of ring or one specified rate-affecting
    material containing a keto group not part of a ring plus a rate-affecting
    material designated merely as a "photoinitiator" or photosensitizer".


CLS 522/13
TXT Specified rate-affecting material is a peroxide or azo compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 12 wherein the specified rate-affecting
    material contains a -O-O- or N=n group.


CLS 522/14
TXT Specified rate-affecting material is an amide or tertiary amine:

    Subject matter under subclass 12 wherein the specified rate-affecting
    material is an amide of a carboxylic acia or a nitrogen compound having a
    nitrogen atom substituted by three organic radicals, i.e., R3N.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary in Class 520 for a definition of ther term
    "amine".

    (2)     Note.  See the Glossary in Class 520 under carboxylic acid or
    derivative for a definition of the term "carboxylic acid amide".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS SUBCLASS:

    15,     for nitrogen containing onium group compounds as rate-affecting
    materials.


CLS 522/15
TXT Specified rate-affecting material contains onium group:

    Subject matter under subclass 12 wherein the specified rate-affecting
    material is an onium group containing compound.


CLS 522/16
TXT Specified rate-affecting material is heterocyclic:

    Subject matter under subclass 12 wherein the specified rate-affecting
    material is a heterocyclic ring compound.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary in Class 520, subclass 1 for a definition
    of the term "heterocyclic ring".


CLS 522/17
TXT Specified rate-affecting material contains sulfur:

    Subject matter under subclass 12 wherein the specified rate-affecting
    material contains a sulfur atom.


CLS 522/18
TXT Specified rate-affecting material contains phosphorus, arsenic, antimony or
    nitrogen atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 12 wherein the specified rate-affecting
    material contains at least one atom of phosphorus, arsenic, antimony or
    nitrogen.


CLS 522/19
TXT Specified rate-affecting material is an aldehyde or aldehyde derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 12 wherein the specified  rate-affecting
    material is an aldehyde or aldehyde derivative.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary in Class 520 subclass 1 for a definition of
    the term "aldehyde" or "aldehyde derivative".


CLS 522/20
TXT Specified rate-affecting material is a carboxylic acid or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 12 wherein the specified  rate-affecting
    material is a carboxylic acid or derivative.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary in Class 520, subclass 1 for a definition
    of the term "carboxylic acid or derivative".  By schedule hierarchy the
    derivatives in this area are limited to acyclic anhydrides, esters and
    salts.


CLS 522/21
TXT Specified rate-affecting material contains C-OH or C-O-C group:

    Subject matter under subclass 12 wherein the specified rate-affecting
    material contains a C-OH or C-O-C Group.


CLS 522/22
TXT Specified rate-affecting material contains an inorganic compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 12 wherein the specified rate-affecting
    material is an inorganic compound.

    (1)     Note.  "Inorganic" for purposes of this subclass are those
    compounds that do not meet the definition of "organic" as noted in the
    Glossary under Class 520, subclass 1.


CLS 522/23
TXT Specified rate-affecting material contains only carbon and hydrogen or
    halogen and at least one atom of carbon is bonded to hydrogen or a halogen
    atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 12 wherein the specified rate-affecting
    material contains at least one atom of carbon bonded to at least one atom
    of hydrogen or halogen and wherein no other diverse atoms are present.


CLS 522/24
TXT Specified rate-affecting material is a peroxide:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein at least one of the specified
    rate-affecting materials contains a O-O group.


CLS 522/25
TXT Specified rate-affecting material contains onium group:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein at least one of the specified
    rate-affecting materials is an onium group containing compound.


CLS 522/26
TXT Specified rate-affecting material is heterocyclic:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein at least one of the specified
    rate-affecting materials contains a heterocyclic ring.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary in Class 520 subclass 1 for a definition of
    the term "heterocyclic ring".


CLS 522/27
TXT Specified rate-affecting material contains sulfur:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein at least one of the specified
    rate-affecting materials contains a sulfur atom.


CLS 522/28
TXT Specified rate-affecting material contains phosphorus, arsenic, antimony or
    nitrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein at least one of the specified
    rate-affecting materials contains an atom of phosphorus, arsenic, antimony,
    or nitrogen.


CLS 522/29
TXT Specified rate-affecting material is a metal-containing organic compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein at least one of the specified
    rate-affecting materials is organic and contains at least one metal atom.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary in Class 520, subclass 1 for a definition
    of the terms "organic" and "metal".


CLS 522/30
TXT Specified rate-affecting material is organic:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein at least one of the specified
    rate-affecting materials is organic.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary in Class 520, subclass 1 for a definition
    of the term "organic".


CLS 522/31
TXT Specified rate-affecting materials contains onium group:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the specified rate-affecting
    material is an onium group containing compound.


CLS 522/32
TXT Diazonium containing material:

    Subject matter under subclass 31 wherein the specified rate-affecting
    material contains a -N=N salt group.


CLS 522/33
TXT Specified rate-affecting material contains a ketone group -c- (CO)n -c-,
    the (CO)n not  being part of a ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the specified rate-affecting
    material contains at least one keto group which is not part of a ring
    system.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary in Class 520 for a difinition of the term
    "ketone".  The type of ketone materials excluded from this subclass are,
    for instance, those where oxygen is solely double bonded to a carbon atom
    and which carbon atom is part of a carbocyclic ring, or any other ring
    system.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass are those compounds which may
    contain two or more ketone moieties and wherein one of the C=O groups is
    part of a part of a ring system and wherein at least one C=O group is not.


CLS 522/34
TXT Containing ethylenic unsaturation:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 wherein the ketone compound is
    ethylenically unsaturated.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary in Class 520, subclass 1 for a definition
    of the term "ethylenically unsaturated".


CLS 522/35
TXT Contained in polymeric rate-affecting material, e.g., synthetic resin, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 wherein the ketone containing material is
    polymeric in nature.

    (1)     Note.  The polymeric material may be liquid or solid.


CLS 522/36
TXT Containing two or more ketone groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 wherein the ketone compound contains at
    least two ketone groups.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this class, a compound containing a -CC
    group, wherein * is two or more, is considered as being a plural ketone
    containing compound.  Additionally, a compound containing a -CCC- group is
    considered as having two ketone groups may be part of a ring system as long
    as another ketone group is present which is acyclic.


CLS 522/37
TXT Adjacent (C=O) * groups where * is at least two:

    Subject matter under subclass 36 wherein the ketone compound contains
    compound contains the structure C-(O)*-C wherein * is at least two.


CLS 522/38
TXT Containing phosphorus:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 wherein the ketone compound contains at
    least one atom of phosphorus.


CLS 522/39
TXT Containing nitrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 wherein the ketone compound contains at
    least one atom of nitrogen.


CLS 522/40
TXT Containing C-CO-CHOH, e.g., benzoin, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 wherein the ketone compound contains the
    structure C, e.g., benzoin, etc.


CLS 522/41
TXT Containing C-CO-CHOH-CHOR wherein R is organic:

    Subject matter under subclass 40 wherein the ketone compound contains the
    structure C wherein R is organic.


CLS 522/42
TXT Containing C-CO-C(R)(OH) wherein R is organic:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 wherein the ketone compound contains the
    structure C, wherein R is organic.


CLS 522/43
TXT Containing C-CO-C(H)(OR) wherein R is organic, e.g., benzoin methyl ether,
    etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 wherein the ketone compound contains the
    structure C, wherein R is organic,

    e.g., benzoin methyl ether, etc.


CLS 522/44
TXT Containing C-CO-C(R)(OR) wherein R is organic, e.g., diethyoxacetophenone,
    etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 wherein the ketone compound contains the
    structure C, wherein R is organic,

    e.g.,

    (1)     Note.  Diethoxyacetophenone is considered proper for this subclass
    unless specifically identified as to where the ether linkages are connected
    and which, if specified, differ from that required by the definition of
    this subclass.


CLS 522/45
TXT Containing halogen, e.g., chloroacetone, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 wherein the ketone compound contains at
    least one atom of halogen.

    (1)     Note.  Halogen is limited to fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine or
    astatine.


CLS 522/46
TXT At least two aryl groups connected directly to same carbonyl carbon, e.g.,
    benzophenone, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 wherein the ketone compound contains the
    structure RR, wherein both R groups are aryl.


CLS 522/47
TXT Specified rate-affected material is a quinone:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the


    specified rate-affecting material contains the structure, i.e.


CLS 522/48
TXT Quinone ring is part of polynuclear system, e.g., anthraquinone, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 47 wherein the

    group is bonded at least two of its carbon atoms with additional atoms
    which form a ring therewith.


CLS 522/49
TXT Specified rate-affecting material contains chalogen other than as oxygen:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the specified rate-affecting
    material contains an atom of sulfur, selenium or tellurium.


CLS 522/50
TXT Hetero nitrogen ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein the chalcogen compound contains at
    least one heterocyclic nitrogen ring.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary in Class 520, subclass 1 for a definition
    of the term "heterocyclic nitrogen ring.

    (2)     Note.  The chalcogen atom can be part of the heterocyclic nitrogen
    ring.


CLS 522/51
TXT Containing mercapto or mercaptide group, e.g., (thio) mercaptobenzoxazole,
    etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein sulfur is present as C-SH or C-S
    metal and wherein the carbon atoms bonded to sulfur are not double bonded
    to a chalcogen atom.


CLS 522/52
TXT Containing halogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 the heterocyclic ring compound contains at
    least one halogen atom.

    (1)     Note.  Halogen is limited to fluorine, cholrine, bromoine, iodine
    or astatine.


CLS 522/53
TXT Hetero sulfur ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein sulfur is present as an atom in a
    heterocyclic ring.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary in Class 520, subclass 1 for a definition
    of the term "heterocyclic ring".


CLS 522/54
TXT C-(S)* -C wherein* is at least two:

    Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein sulfur is present as C-(S)*-C and
    wherein * is at least two.


CLS 522/55
TXT Sulfide:

    Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein sulfur is present as C-S-C or
    Me-S-Me (Me is a monovalent metal) and wherein the carbon atoms bonded to
    the sulfur are not double bonded to chalcogen.


CLS 522/56
TXT Mercapto group attached directly to aromatic ring, e.g., thiophenol, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein sulfur is present as C-SH and
    wherein the carbon atom bonded to the sulfur is part of an aryl ring.


CLS 522/57
TXT Nitrogen containing compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein the chalcogen compound also
    contains a nitrogen atom.


CLS 522/58
TXT Sulfenate, e.g., R-O-S-R, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein sulfur is present as part of a
    R-O-S-R group, wherein R is part of an organic radical, e.g., sulfenate,
    etc.


CLS 522/59
TXT (O=S=O), e.g., sulfuryl or sulfonyl containing, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein sulfur is double bonded to at
    least two oxygen atoms, e.g., sulfur dioxide, etc.


CLS 522/60
TXT Specified rate-affecting material is a peroxide:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the specified rate-affecting
    material contains at least one -O-O- group.


CLS 522/61
TXT Hydroperoxide:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 wherein the specified rate-affecting
    compound contains at least one -O-O-H group.


CLS 522/62
TXT Specified rate-affecting material contains a C-N=N-C group:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the specified rate-affecting
    material contains at least one -N=N- and wherein the nitrogen atoms are
    directly bonded to carbon atoms of discrete organic radicals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     for compounds which contain the N=N group bonded to atoms so that a
    hetercyclic ring is formed thereby.


CLS 522/63
TXT Specified rate-affecting material contains nitrogen or oxygen atom in
    heterocyclic ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the specified rate-affecting
    material contains oxygen or nitrogen in a heterocyclic ring.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary in Class 520, subclass 1 for a definition
    of the term "heterocyclic ring".


CLS 522/64
TXT Specified rate-affecting material contains nitrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the specified rate-affecting
    material contains at least one phosphorus atom.


CLS 522/65
TXT Specified rate-affecting material contains nitrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the specific rate-affecting
    material contains at least one nitrogen atom.


CLS 522/66
TXT Specified rate-affecting material contains metal atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the specified rate-affecting
    material contains at least one metal atom.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary in Class 520 subclass 1 for a definition of
    the term "metal".


CLS 522/67
TXT Specified rate-affecting material contains halogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the specified rate-affecting
    material contains at least one haloglen atom.

    (1)     Note.  Halogen is limited to fluorine, chlorine, iodine, bromine or
    astatine.


CLS 522/68
TXT Specified rate-affecting material contains oxygen:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the specified rate-affecting
    material contains at least one oxygen atom.


CLS 522/69
TXT Phenolic, e.g., hydroquinone, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein the oxygen atom is part of a
    phenolic group.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary in Class 520, subclass 1 under "phenolic
    reactant" for a definition of the term "phenolic".


CLS 522/70
TXT Specified rate-affecting material contains only carbon and hydrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the specified rate-affecting
    material is composed solely of carbon and hydrogen atoms.


CLS 522/71
TXT Processes of preparing or treating a solid polymer by wave energy in the
    presence of a designated nonreactant material (DNRM); or composition
    therefore:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 involving the preparation or treatment of a
    solid polymer in the presence of wave energy and in the presence of a
    designated nonreactant material (DNRM); or a composition to be polymerized
    to produce a solid polymer in the presence of a DNRM; or a composition
    containing a solid polymer to be modified in the presence of a designated
    nonreactant material (DNRM).

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 1 (3) Note for a definition and examples of the
    term "designated nonreactant material" (DNRM).

    (2)     Note.  For proper classification in this subclass the designated
    nonreactant material must be present during the wave energy treatment and
    must exercise a function subsequent to the wave energy step.  A material
    which functions prior to the wave energy step and which function is
    destroyed or not intended subsequent to the wave energy step is not proper
    for this subclass.  For example; a process of polymerizing ethylene by wave
    eneregy in the presence of carbon black intended as a filler is properly
    classified in subclass 71.  A process of mixing irradiated polyethylene
    with halogen in the presence of wave energy followed by the addition of
    carbon black is properly classified in subclass 189.

    (3)     Note.  By schedule exclusion the subject matter in this area may
    have a nonspecified rate-affecting material included.

    (4)     Note.  In the subclasses below which recite a designated
    nonreactant material (DNRM) in the title, the indented subclasses merely
    pertain  to a further elaboration of the DNRM and do not relate to any
    other material.

    (5)     Note.  This subclass provides for compositions perfected as to be
    utilized in a process involving wave energy and a DNRM material.  See the
    (4) Note under subclass 1.


CLS 522/72
TXT Carbohydrate or derivative DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 71 wherein the DNRM material is a
    carbohydrate or derivative.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary in Class 520, subclass 1 for a definition
    of the term "carbohydrate".  A derivative of a carbohydrate must retain the
    carbohydrate skeleton.


CLS 522/73
TXT Coal, asphaltic, or bituminous material DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 71 wherein the DNRM is coal or a derivative;
    or is a bituminous material or derivative or extract thereof; or is a
    bituminous material or a derivative or extract thereof; or is a fatty still
    residue.

    (1)     Note.  Included within the subclass are oil shale or shale material
    from which oil has or has not been recovered as well as stearine pitch,
    coke products, coal tar and pitches.

    (2)     Note.  Chemical compounds which are the results of a synthesis
    reaction utilizing a petroleum or coal source as a reactant are not the
    type of material which will generally qualify as a DNRM under this
    subclass, and see in particular subclass 80 for a hydrocarbon DNRM which is
    derived from coal.

    (3)     Note.  Included within this subclass are materials generally
    described as asphalt.  Asphalt derived from natural deposits, e.g.,
    gilsonite, etc., coal or petroleum is included herein.

    (4)     Note.  Bituman refers to solid or semisolid materials which are
    often black or dark brown and which occur naturally or are obtained by
    refining petroleum or are the components of coal which are soluble in
    organic solvents.  The term also applies generically to include natural and
    synthetic asphalts, tar and pitches.  For example, natural asphalts such as
    Trinidad, Bermuda, gilsonite, graphamite and Cuban, etc.  Petroleum asphalt
    may be used such as these obtained from California crudes, Smack over
    Arkansas crudes, Mid-Continental air-blown oils, Mexican petroleum
    asphalts, tarry residues known as cracked asphalts by-products during the
    cracking of gas oil, or other heavier petroleum fractions to obtain
    gasoline or other lighter fractions, etc.  Further still, bituminous
    materials may be used as coal tar, wood tar, petroleum pitches, and pitches
    obtained from various industrial processes such as a fatty acid pitch, etc.

    (5)     Note.  Materials which are substantially known as to chemical
    constitution are excluded from this subclass and are classified below in
    the schedule on the basis of chemical constitution.  If any doubt exists as
    to whether a material is of sufficient chemical identity so as to be
    classified as a specific DNRM, then such doubt is to be resolved by
    classifying the claim as an original in this area and cross-referencing to
    the appropriate DNRM area.  Certain hydrocarbon materials which have been
    designated as not being proper herein are hydrocarbon petroleum
    distillation products, petroleum and petroleum crude oils.


CLS 522/74
TXT Organic DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 71 wherein the DNRM is an organic compound.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary in Class 520, subclass 1 for definition of
    the term "organic compound".


CLS 522/75
TXT Heterocyclic ring containing DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 74 wherein the organic DNRM  compound is
    heterocyclic.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary in Class 520, subclass 1 for definition of
    the term "heterocyclic".


CLS 522/76
TXT Phosphorus containing DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 74 wherein the organic DNRM compound contains
    at least one phosphorus atom.


CLS 522/77
TXT Silicon containing DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 74 wherein the organic DNRM compound contains
    at least one silicon atom.


CLS 522/78
TXT Nitrogen containing DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 74 wherein the organic DNRM compound contains
    at least one nitrogen atom.


CLS 522/79
TXT Oxygen containing DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 74 wherein the organic DNRM compound contains
    at least one oxygen atom.


CLS 522/80
TXT Carbon and hydrogen only containing DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 74 wherein the organic DNRM compound is
    composed solely of carbon and hydrogen atoms.


CLS 522/81
TXT Heavy metal containing DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 71 wherein the DNRM contains a heavy metal
    atom in either elemental or inorganic compound form.

    (1)     Note.  Heavy metal is limited to those metal elements that have a
    specific gravity greater than 4.0.


CLS 522/82
TXT Phosphorus or sulfur containing DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 71 wherein the DNRM contains oxygen in either
    elemental or inorganic compound form.


CLS 522/83
TXT Oxygen containing DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 71 wherein the DNRM contains oxygen in either
    elemental or inorganic compound form.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is the stated presence of air or the stated
    presence of oxygen in air.


CLS 522/84
TXT Water:

    Subject matter under subclass 83 wherein oxygen is present as water in any
    of its physical forms.


CLS 522/85
TXT Reacting an ethylenic monomer in the presence of a solid polymer:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 wherein an ethylenic monomer is reacted in
    the presence of a solid polymer and wherein water is present as a DNRM.


CLS 522/86
TXT Treating a solid polymer:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 wherein a solid polymer is modified and
    wherein water is present as a DNRM.


CLS 522/87
TXT Processes involving protein as reactant or as solid polymer; or
    composiktions therefore:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 involving the preparation of a protein
    containing solid polymer; or the chemical modification of a solid polymer
    derived from a protein; or the modification of a solid polymer by reaction
    with a protein; or compositions therefore.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary in Class 520, subclass 1 for a definition
    of the term "protein" and see the (8) Note in Class 520, subclasses 1+ for
    the type of polymer containing a protein that qualifies as a synthetic
    resin for Class 520, subclasses 1+.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass provides for compositions.  See the (4) Note
    under subclass 1.


CLS 522/88
TXT Processes involving carbohydrates as reactant or as solid polymer; or
    compositions therefore:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 involving the preparation of a carbohydrate
    containing solid polymer; or the chemical modification of a solid polymer
    drived from a carbohydrate; or the modification of a solid polymer by
    reaction with a carbohydrate; or composition therefore.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary in Class 520, subclass 1 for a definition
    of the term "carbohydrate"" and see the (8) Note in Class 520, subclass 1
    for the type of polymer containing a carbohydrate that qualifies as a
    synthetic resin under Class 520, subclass 1.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass provides for compositions.  See the (4) Note
    under subclass 1.


CLS 522/89
TXT Preparing a polymer from carbohydrate and ethylenic reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 88 involving solid polymer formation from a t
    least one ethylenic reactant and at least one carbohydrate reactant.


CLS 522/90
TXT Processes involving a polyurethane having terminal ethylenic unsaturation
    as reactant or as solid polymer; or compositions therefore:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 involving treating a polyurethane having at
    least one terminal ethylenic group to form a solid polymer therefrom; or
    chemically modifying a solid polymer derived from a ployurethane reactant
    having at least one terminal ethylenic group; or chemically modifying a
    solid polymer by reaction with a

    polyurethane reactant containing at least one terminal ethylenic group; or
    compositions therefore.

    (1)     Note.  Terminal ethylenic as used herein denotes a carbon atom
    bonded to an adjacent carbon through either a double or triple bond and
    wherein at least one of the linked carbons is not bonded to another carbon
    atom either directly or indirectly through a noncarbon atom, with the
    proviso that indirect does not include the double or triple bond, e.g.,1 2
    3 4 C-C=C-N-C does not contain terminal unsaturation since carbon 2 is
    bonded directly to carbon 1 and since carbon 3 is indirectly bonded to
    carbon 4 through nitrogen.

    NH2

            1    2    3

    (2)     Note. HN-C=C-C3 contains a terminally unsaturated group since
    carbon 1 is not bonded to any other carbon atom other than 2.

    (3)     Note.  A polyurethane for purposes of this subclass requires a
    minimum of two urethane groups, i.e., HNO- but only one of the end units of
    the molecule need be terminally unsaturated.

    (4)     Note.  This subclass provides for compositions.  See the (4) Note
    under subclass 1.

    (5)     Note.  The unsaturated polyurethane can be a solid polymer devoid
    of ethylenic urethane groups which is modified to form unsaturated terminal
    groups and urethane linkages, and which is subsequently exposed to wave
    energy.

    (6)     Note.  See the Glossary is Class 520, subclass 1 for the definition
    of the term "ethylenically unsaturated".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113+,   134+, 150+, and 162+, for modifying a solid polymer derived from an
    unsaturated polyurethane reactant.


CLS 522/91
TXT With a polysioxane reactant or polymer:

    Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein the unsaturated polyurethane is
    reacted with a Si-O-Si to form a solid polymer or in the presence of a
    solid polymer derived from a , and wherein C  is the carbon of an organic
    radical.


CLS 522/92
TXT With a reactant containing ethylenic unsaturation derived from poly
    1,2-epoxide or polymer:

    Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein the unsaturated polyurethane is
    reacted to form a solid polymer with a material containing ethlenic
    unsaturation and which ethylenic material has been derived from a plural
    1,2 expoxy containing material, or is reacted in the presence of a solid
    polymer containing ethylenic unsaturation and which ethylenic material has
    been derived from a plural 1,2 epoxy containing material.


CLS 522/93
TXT With polycarboxylic acid or derivative and a polyol, a condensate or solid
    polymer thereof reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein the unsaturated polyurethane is
    reacted with a polycarboxylic acid or derivative and a polyol or a
    condensate thereof so as to form a solid polymer; or wherein the
    polyurethane is reacted in the presence of a solid polymer derived from a
    polycarboxylic acid or derivative and a polyol.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary in Class 520, subclass 1 for a definition
    of the term "carboxylic acid or derivative".


CLS 522/94
TXT With aldehyde derivative reactant, condensate or solid polymer thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein the unsaturated polyurethane is
    reacted with an aldehyde derivative or condensate thereof to form a solid
    polymer therewith; or wherein a unsaturated polyurethane is reacted in the
    presence of a solid polymer derived from an aldehyde or aldehyde derivative.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary in Class 520, subclass 1 for a definition
    of the term "aldehyde or aldehyde derivative".


CLS 522/95
TXT With solid polymer derived solely from ethylenic monomers:

    Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein the unsaturated polyurethane is
    reacted in the presence of a solid polymer derived from  ethylenic monomers
    solely.


CLS 522/96
TXT With ethylenic reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein the unsaturated urethane is
    reacted in the presence of an ethylenic reactant.

    (1)     Note. Included in this subclass are solid polymers as reactants
    which may contain residual ethlenic unsaturation and were prepared from at
    least one nonethylenic reactant.


CLS 522/97
TXT Polyurethane has an oxygen other than as part of a urethane or carboxylic
    acid ester group:

    Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein the unsaturated polyurethane
    contains at least one oxygen atom which is other than as an oxygen atom in
    a NH-C-O or -C-(C)-0-C- group, where * is at least one.


CLS 522/98
TXT Polyurethane has at least one nonterminal ethylenic group:

    Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein the unsaturated polyurethane
    contains at least one nonterminal ethylenic group.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 90 (1) and (2) Notes for an explanation of the
    term "terminal".


CLS 522/99
TXT Processes involving a polysiloxane having ethylenic unsaturation as
    reactant or as solid polymer; or compositions therefore:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 involving treating a
      group containing material having ethylenic unsaturation so as to form a
    solid polymer therefrom; or chemically modifying a solid polymer derived
    from a C     C


    Si-O-S reactant containg ethylenic unsaturation; or chemically modifying a
    solid polymer with a C    C    Si-O-Si reactant containing ethylenic
    unsaturation; or composition therefore, and C is a carbon of an organic
    radical.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for compositions.  See the (4) Note
    under subclass 1.

    (2)     Note.  See the Glossary in Class 520, subclass 1 for a definition
    of the term "ethylenically unsaturated".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148,    for a process of modifying a solid polymer derived from a silicon
    containing reactant.


CLS 522/100
TXT Processes involving an ethylenically unsaturated material derived from poly
    1,2-epoxide as reactant or a solid polymer; or compositions therefore:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 involving treating an ethylenically
    unsaturated material derived from a poly 1,2-epoxide so as to form a solid
    polymer therefrom; or chemically modifying a solid polymer derived from a
    reactant containing ethylenic unsaturation and derived from a
    1,2-polyepoxide; or chemically modifying a solid polymer with a reactant
    containing ethylenic unsaturation and derived from a 1,2-polyepoxide; or
    compositions therefor.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for compositions.  See the (4) Note
    under subclass 1.

    (2)     Note.  The ethylenically unsaturated reactant need not contain
    1,2-epoxide groups if in fact it were derived from an epoxide material.

    (3)     Note.  See the Glossary in Class 520, subclass 1 for a definition
    of the term "ethylenically unsaturated".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113+,   134+, 150+, and 162+, for a process of modifying a solid polymer
    derived from an unsaturated reactant derived from a 1,2-polyepoxide.


CLS 522/101
TXT With polycarboxylic acid or derivative and a polyol, condensate or solid
    polymer thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 involving the treatment of the
    unsaturated 1,2-polyepoxide with a polycarboxylic acid or derivative and a
    polyol or condesate thereof so as to form a solid polymer therewith; or
    wherein the unsaturated 1,2-polyepoxide derived material is reacted with s
    solid polymer derived from a polycarboxylic acid or derivative and a polyol.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary in Class 520, subclass 1 for a definition
    of the term "carboxylic acid or derivative".


CLS 522/102
TXT With solid polymer derived solely from ethylenically unsaturated monomers:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the unsaturated material derived
    from the poly 1,2-epoxide is reacted with a solid polymer derived from
    ethylenically unsaturated reactants only.


CLS 522/103
TXT With ethylenic reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the unsaturated material derived
    from the poly 1,2-epoxide is reacted with an ethylenically unsaturated
    reactant.


CLS 522/104
TXT Processes involving an ethylenically unsaturated polyester derived from a
    polycarboxylic acid or derivative and polyol, condensate or solid polymer
    thereof; or compositions therefore:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 involving forming an unsaturated solid
    polymer from at least one polycarboxylic acid or derivative and polyol or
    condensate therof; or chemically modifying a solid polymer containing
    ethylenic unsaturation derived from at least one polycarboxylic acid or
    derivative and polyol or condensate thereof; or chemically modifying a
    solid polymer by treating with an unsaturated or saturated polycarboxylic
    acid or derivative and with a unsaturated or saturated polyol or codensate
    therof with the proviso that at least the carboxylic acid or derivative, or
    polyol is unsaturated; or compositions therefore.

    (1)     Note.  See the (4) Note in subclass 1 for and explanation of the
    types of composition proper for this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The ethylenic unsaturation in the polymer need not be
    introduced by the polycarboxylic acid or derivative or polyol component,
    but can be in another reactant which is present during solid polymer
    formation.

    (3)     Note.  The polycarboxylic acid or derivative and polyol need not be
    reacted with the solid polymer concurrently but may be added in a
    sequential manner.

    (4)     Note.  See the Glossary in Class 520, subclass 1 for a definition
    of the term "carboxylic acid or derivative".

    (5)     Note.  A polyol contains two or more C-OH groups wherein the carbon
    atom bonded to the -OH moiety is not double bonded to a chalcogen atom.


CLS 522/105
TXT With aldehyde or aldehyde derivative reactant or polymer thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 104 wherein an aldehyde or aldehye derivative
    reactant is involved in the process.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary in Class 520, subclass 1 for a definition
    of the term "aldehyde or derivative".

    (2)     Note. The aldehyde or derivative reactant can be part of a solid
    polymer or can be a reactant with the polyol and polycarboxylic acid before
    solid polymer formation or subsequent to solid polymer formation.


CLS 522/106
TXT With solid polymer derived from ethylenically unsaturated monomers only:

    Subject matter under subclass 104 wherein a solid polymer derived from
    ethylenically unsaturated reactant only is involved.


CLS 522/107
TXT With ethylenic reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 104 wherein an ethylenically unsaturated
    material is reacted with the condensate or solid polymer formed from the
    reactant of a polycarboxylic acid or derivative and a polyol.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are solid polymers which contain
    residual unsaturation as reactants and which were prepared from a least one
    nonethylenic reactant.


CLS 522/108
TXT Condensate or solid polymer contains oxygen other than as part of a
    carboxylic acid ester moiety:

    Subject matter under subclass 104 wherein the solid polymer or condensate
    of the reaction of a polyol and a polycarboxylic acid or derivative
    contains oxygen atoms which are not part of a carboxylic acid ester moiety.


CLS 522/109
TXT Processes of chemically modifying a blend of two or more solid polymers in
    the presence of a chemical reactant; or compositions therefore:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein at least two solid polymers are
    chemically modified in the presence of a material which reacts therewith;
    or compositions therefore.

    (1)     Note.  See the (4) Note in subclass 1 for the type of composition
    proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    111,    for a process of chemically modifying a mixture of solid polymers
    wherein the disclosure indicates that only one of the solids polymeres is
    chemically modified.


CLS 522/110
TXT At least one solid polymer derived from ethylenic monomers only wherein at
    least one of the monomers has at least two ethylenic groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 109 wherein at least one of the solid
    polymers is derived from ethylenically unsaturated reactants only and at
    least one of the ethylenic reactants contains two or more ethylenically
    unsaturated groups.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary in Class 520, subclass 1 for a definition
    of the term "ethylenically unsaturated".


CLS 522/111
TXT Processes of treating a blend of two or more solid polymers or reacting one
    solid polymer; or reacting one solid polymer with another solid polymer; or
    compositions therefore:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein at least two solid polymers are
    modified or are reacted with one another; or compositions thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See the (4) Note in subclass 1 for the type of compositions
    proper for this subclass.


CLS 522/112
TXT At least two solid polymers derived from ethylenic monomers only:

    Subject matter under subclass 111 wherein at least two solid polymers are
    derived from ethylenically unsaturated monomers only.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary in Class 520, subclass 1 for a definition
    of the term "ethylenically unsaturated".


CLS 522/113
TXT Processes of chemically modifying a solid polymer derived only from
    ethylenically unsaturated monomers by treating polymer with a chemical
    reactant; or compositions therefore:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a solid polymer derived from
    ethylenic monomers only is chemically modified by treating said solid
    polymer with a material which reacts therewith; or compositions therefore.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary in Class 520, subclass 1 for a definition
    of the term "ethylenically unsaturated".

    (2)     Note.  This subclass provides for compositions.  See the (4) Note
    under subclass 1.


CLS 522/114
TXT Chemical reactant is ethylenically unsaturated:

    Subject matter under subclass 113 wherein the material which reacts with
    the solid polymer is ethylenically unsaturated.


CLS 522/115
TXT Phosphorus:

    Subject  matter under subclass 114 wherein the ethylenically unsaturated
    reactant contains at least one phosphorus atom.


CLS 522/116
TXT Nitrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 114 wherein the ethylenically unsaturated
    reactant contains at least one nitrogen atom.


CLS 522/117
TXT Chemical reactant has two or more ethylenic groups:

    Subject matter under subclasss 116 wherein the nitrogen reactants contains
    at least two ethylenic groups.


CLS 522/118
TXT Sulfur:

    Subject matter under subclass 114 wherein the ethylenically unsaturated
    reactant contains at least one sulfur atom.


CLS 522/119
TXT Chemical reactant has two or more ethylenic groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein the sulfur reactant contains at
    least two ethylenic groups.


CLS 522/120
TXT Oxygen:

    Subject matter under subclass 114 wherein the ethylenically unsaturated
    reactant contains at least one oxygen atom.


CLS 522/121
TXT Chemical reactant has two or more ethylenic groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 120 wherein the oxygen reactant contains at
    least two ethylenic groups.


CLS 522/122
TXT Hetero oxygen:

    Subject matter subclass 120 wherein the oxygen reactant contains at least
    one oxygen atom which is part of a heterocyclic group.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary in Class 520, subclass 1 for a definition
    of the term "heterocyclic".


CLS 522/123
TXT Contains C-OH group other than as part of a COO-moiety:

    Subject matter under subclass 120 wherein the oxygen reactant contains an
    oxygen atom which is part of a C-OH group and wherein the carbon atom
    bonded to the -OH group is not double bonded to oxygen.


CLS 522/124
TXT Carbon, hydrogen and halogen or carbon and halogen only:

    Subject matter under subclass 114 wherein the ethylenically unsaturated
    reactant is composed solely of carbon, hydrogen and halogen or solely of
    carbon and halogen.

    (1)     Note.  Halogen is limited to fluorine, chlorine, iodine, bromine or
    astatine.


CLS 522/125
TXT Carbon and hydrogen only:

    Subject matter under subclass 114 wherein the ethylenically unsaturated
    reactant is composed solely of carbon and hydrogen.


CLS 522/126
TXT Chemical reactant contains nitrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 113 wherein the material which reacts with
    the solid polymer contains at least one nitrogen atom.


CLS 522/127
TXT Chemical reactant contains sulfur:

    Subject matter under subclass 113 wherein the material which reacts with
    the solid polymer contains at least one sulfur atom.


CLS 522/128
TXT Elemental sulfur:

    Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein elemental sulfur is a reactant.


CLS 522/129
TXT Chemical reactant contains oxygen:

    Subject matter under subclass 113 wherein the material which reacts with
    the solid polymer contains at least one oxygen atom.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is the stated use of water in any of its
    physical forms, or the stated use of oxygen in air as a reactant.


CLS 522/130
TXT Contains C=O moiety:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein the oxygen reactant contains at
    least one carbon atom double bonded to oxygen, i.e.,



CLS 522/131
TXT Chemical reactant is elemental halogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 113 wherein the material which reacts with
    the solid polymer is elemental halogen.

    (1)     Note.  Compounds which liberate halogens are not proper for this
    subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Halogen is limited to fluorine, chlorine, iodine, bromine
    and astatine.


CLS 522/132
TXT Solid polymer treated contains halogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the solid polymer reacted with
    elemental halogen contains at least one halogen atom.

    (1)     Note.  The solid polymer may have been derived from a halogen
    containing monomer or may have been treated with a halogen containing
    material so as to introduce halogen atoms therein prior to the reaction
    with elemental halogen.


CLS 522/133
TXT Solid polymer derived from single monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the solid polymer is derived from
    a single mononer.


CLS 522/134
TXT Processes of chemically modifying a solid polymer or SICP derived from a
    least one saturated monomer by treating solid polymer or SICP with a
    chemical reactant; or compositions therefore:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a solid polymer derived from at
    least one nonethylenically unsaturated reactant or SICP is chemically
    modified by treating said solid polymer or SICP with a material which
    reacts therewith; or compositions therefore.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for compositions.  See the (4) Note
    under subclass 1.

    (2)     Note.  See the Glossary in Class 520, subclass 1 for a definition
    of the term "specified intermediate condensation product (SICP)".


CLS 522/135
TXT Chemical reactant is ethylenically unsaturated:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 wherein the material which reacts with
    the solid polymer is ethylenically unsaturated.


CLS 522/136
TXT Nitrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein the ethylenically unsaturated
    reactant contains at least one nitrogen atom.


CLS 522/137
TXT Chemical reactant has two or more ethylenic groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 136 wherein the nitrogen reactant contains at
    least two ethylenic groups.


CLS 522/138
TXT Hetero nitrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 136 wherein the nitrogen reactant contains at
    least one nitrogen atom which is part of a heterocyclic ring.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary in Class 520, subclass 1 for a definition
    of the term "heterocyuclic ring".


CLS 522/139
TXT N-C=O containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 136 wherein the nitrogen reactant contains a
    nitrogen atom as part of a N-O= group.


CLS 522/140
TXT Two or more N-C=O Groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein the nitrogen reactant contains
    two or more N-C=O groups.


CLS 522/141
TXT Chalcogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein the ethylenically unsaturated
    reactant contains at least one chalcogen atom.

    (1)     Note.  Chalcogen is limited to oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium.


CLS 522/142
TXT Chemical reactant has two or more ethylenic groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the chalcogen reactant contains
    at least two ethylenic groups.


CLS 522/143
TXT Hetero oxygen:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the chalcogen reactant contains
    an oxygen atom which is part of a heterocyclic ring.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary in Class 520, subclass 1 for a definition
    of the term "heterocyclic ring".


CLS 522/144
TXT Carboxylic acid or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the chalcogen reactant contains
    an oxygen atom as part of a carboxylic acid or derivative and moiety.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary in Class 520, subclass 1 for a definition
    of the term "carboxylic acid or derivative".


CLS 522/145
TXT Chemical reactant has two or more ethylenic groups and contains only carbon
    and hydrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein the ethylenic unsaturated
    reactant contains only carbon and hydrogen atoms and at least two ethylenic
    groups.


CLS 522/146
TXT Chemical reactant contains chalcogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 wherein the material that reacts with the
    solid polymer contains at least one chalcogen atom.

    (1)     Note.  Chalcogen is limited to oxygen, sulfur, selenium and
    tellurium.

    (2)     Note.  In the absence of information to the contrary oxygen in air
    is not considered to be a reactant.


CLS 522/147
TXT Chemical reactant contains halogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 wherein the material that reacts with the
    solid polymer contains at least one halogen atom.

    (1)     Note.  Halogen is limited to flourine, chlorine, iodine, bromine or
    astatine.


CLS 522/148
TXT Processes of treating a solid polymer or SICP derived from silicon
    containing reactant; or compositions therefore:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a solid polymer or SICP derived
    from at least one silicon reactant is treated; or compositions therefor.

    (1)     Note.  See the note (4) in subclass 1 for the type of composition
    proper for this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  See the Glossary in Class 520, subclass 1 for the definition
    of the term "specified intermediate condensation product (SICP)".


CLS 522/149
TXT Processes of treating a reaction product of a solid polymer and ethylenic
    reactant; or compositions therefore, e.g., graft-or graft-type polymer,
    etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a solid polymer which is the
    product of at least one solid polymer and an ethylenically unsatuated
    reactant is treated; or compositions therefore, e.g., graft copolymer, etc.

    (1)     Note.  See the (4) Note in subclass 1 for the type of composition
    proper for this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  See the Glossary in Class 520, subclass 1 for a definition
    of the term "ethylenically unsaturated".


CLS 522/150
TXT Processes of treating a solid polymer derived from ethylenic monomers only;
    or compositions therefore:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a solid polymer derived from
    ethylenically unsaturated monomers only is chemically modified in the
    absence of a material which reacts therewith; or compositions therefore.

    (1)     Note.  See the (4) Note in subclass 1 for the type of composition
    proper for this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  See the Glossary in Class 520, subclass 1 for a definition
    of the term "ethylenically unsaturated".

    (3)     Solid polymers which are chemically modified (nonwave energy step)
    and which are treated with wave energy subsequent to the chemical treatment
    are classified on the basis of the first solid polymer.  An example of this
    would be halogenating polyethylene with wave energy.  Classification is
    proper in subclass 161.


CLS 522/151
TXT Solid polymer derived from nitrogen containing monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 150 wherein the solid polymer is derived from
    at least one nitrogen containing ethylenic monomer.


CLS 522/152
TXT Nitrogen containing monomer contains oxygen:

    Subject matter under subclass 151 wherein the nitrogen containing ethylenic
    monomer also contains at least one atom of oxygen.


CLS 522/153
TXT Solid polymer derived from carboxylic acid or derivative monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 150 wherein the solid polymer is derived from
    at least one ethylenically unsaturated carboxylic acid derivative.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary in Class 520, subclass 1 for a definition
    of the term "carboxylic acid or derivative".


CLS 522/154
TXT Oxygen other than as part of carboxylic acid or derivative moiety:

    Subject matter under subclass 153 wherein addition to the carboxylic acid
    or carboxylic acid derivative moiety there is additionally present in the
    same molecule an oxygen atom which is not part of a carboxylic acid or
    carboxylic acid derivative moiety.


CLS 522/155
TXT Solid polymer derived from halogen containing monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 150 wherein the solid polymer is derived from
    at least one ethylenically unsaturated monomer containing at least one
    halogen atom.

    (1)     Note.  Halogen is limited to fluorine, chlorine, iodine, bromine or
    astatine.


CLS 522/156
TXT Halogen is fluorine:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 wherein at least one of the halogen atoms
    is fluorine.


CLS 522/157
TXT Solid polymer derived from monomer containing only carbon and hydrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 150 wherein the solid polymer is derived from
    at least one ethylenically unsaturated monomer which contains only carbon
    and hydrogen atoms.


CLS 522/158
TXT At least one reactant contains two or more ethylenic groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the unsaturated monomer
    containing at least two ethylenic groups.


CLS 522/159
TXT Polyisoprene or natural rubber:

    Subject matter under subclass 158 wherein the solid polymer is derived
    solely from isoprene or the product to be treated is natural rubber or a
    modified form thereof, e.g., rubber hydrochloride, etc.


CLS 522/160
TXT Carbocyclic ring containing, e.g., styrene, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the unsaturated monomer
    containing only carbon and hydrogen atoms contains at least one carbocyclic
    ring, e.g., styrene, etc.


CLS 522/161
TXT Derived from ethylene:

    Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the solid polymer derived from
    ethylene.


CLS 522/162
TXT Processes of treating a solid polymer or SICP derived from at least one
    nonethylenic reactant or compositions therefore:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a solid polymer or SICP derived
    from at least one nonethylenic reactant is chemically modified in the
    absence of a material which reacts therewith, or compositions therefore.

    (1)     Note.  See the (4) Note in subclass 1 for the type of composition
    proper for this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  See the Glossary in Class 520, subclass 1 for the definition
    of the term "specified intermediate condensation product (SICP)".


CLS 522/163
TXT Solid polymer or SICP derived from reactant having halo-C(=O)-halo,
    halo-C(=O)-O, or -O-C(=O)-O-group:

    Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein the solid polymer or SICP
    modified is formed from at least one reactant

    containing a halo hal, haloO or

    -OO- group.



    -O-C-O-group.


CLS 522/164
TXT Solid polymer or SICP derived from polycarboxylic acid or derivative and
    organic amine or from organic amine salt of a polycarboxylic acid:

    Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein the solid polymer or SICP
    modified is formed from at least two reactants, at least one of which is a
    polycarboxylic acid or derivative and at least one of which is an organic
    amine, or from at least one reactant which is an amine salt or a
    polycarboxylic acid.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary in Class 520, subclass 1 for definition of
    the term "carboxylic acid or derivative".  Also the term "polycarboxylic"
    can be found under the above heading.

    (2)     Note.  See the Glossary in Class 520, subclass 1 for as definition
    of the term "amine".


CLS 522/165
TXT Solid polymer or SICP derived from polycarboxylic acid or derivative and
    polyol:

    Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein the solid polymer or SICP
    modified is formed from at least two reactants, at least one of which is a
    polycarboxylic acid or derivative and at least one of which is a polyol.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary in Class 520, subclass 1 for a definition
    of the term "carboxylic acid or derivative".  The term "polycarboxylic" can
    be found under the heading.

    (2)     Note.  A polyo contains two or more C-OH groups wherein the carbon
    atom bonded to the oxygen of the -OH moiety is not double bonded to a
    chalcogen atom.


CLS 522/166
TXT Solid polymer or SICP derived from at least one heterocyclic monomer or
    aldehyde derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein the solid polymer or SICP
    modified is formed from at least one reactant containing a heterocyclic
    ring or is formed from an aldehyde or aldehyde derivative.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary in Class 520, subclass 1 for a definition
    of the terms "heterocyclic ring or aldehyde or aldehyde derivative".


CLS 522/167
TXT Processes of preparing a solid polymer from heterocyclic nitrogen monomer;
    or compositions therefore, e.g., carbazole, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a monomer containing a nitrogen
    atom as part of a heterocyclic ring is polymerized so as to form a solid
    polymer; or compositions therefore.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary in Class 520, subclass 1 for a definition
    of the term "heterocyclic ring".

    (2)     Note.  See the (4) Note in subclass 1 for the type of composition
    proper for this subclass.


CLS 522/168
TXT Processes of preparing a solid polymer from a heterocyclic chalcogen
    monomer; or compositions therefore:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a monomer containing a chalcogen
    atom as part of a heterocyclic ring is polymerized so as to form a solid
    polymer; or compositions therefore.

    (1)     Note.  Chalcogen is limited to oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurim.

    (2)     Note.  See the Glossary in Class 520, subclass 1 for a definition
    of the term "heterocyclic".

    (3)     Note.  See the (4) Note in subclass 1 for the type of composition
    proper for this subclass.


CLS 522/169
TXT Two or more hetero atoms in hetero ring at least one of which is oxygen:

    Subject matter under subclass 168 wherein the heterocyclic reactant
    contains at least two hetero atoms in the same hetero ring and wherein at
    least one of said hetero atoms is oxygen.


CLS 522/170
TXT 1,2-Epoxy:

    Subject matter under subclass 168 wherein the heterocyclic reactant
    contains a 3-membered hetero ring composed of one oxygen and two carbon
    atoms.


CLS 522/171
TXT Processes of preparing a solid polymer from at least one phosphorus
    containing monomer; or compositions therefore:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a monomer containing at least at
    least one phosphorus atom polymerized so as to as to form a solid polymer;
    or compositions therefore.

    (1)     Note.  See the (4) Note in subclass 1 for the type of composition
    proper for this subclass.


CLS 522/172
TXT Processes of processes of preparing a solid polymer from at least one
    silicon containing monomer; or compositions therefore:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a monomer containing at least one
    silicon atom is polymerized so as to form a solid polymer; or compositioins
    therefore.

    (1)     Note.  See the (4) Note in subclass 1 for the type of composition
    proper for this subclass.


CLS 522/173
TXT Processes of preparing a solid polymer from at least one nitrogen
    containing monomer; or compositions therefore:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a monomer containing at least one
    atom of nitrogen is polymerized so as to form a solid polymer; or
    compositions therefore.

    (1)     Note.  See the (4) Note in subclass 1 for the type of composition
    proper for this subclass.


CLS 522/174
TXT Nitrogen containing reactant contains a N-C=O or N=C=O moiety:

    Subject matter under subclass 173 wherein the nitrogen monomer polymerized
    contains a N-C=O or N=C=O moiety.


CLS 522/175
TXT Acrylamide or methacrylamide:

    Subject matter under subclass 174 wherein the N-C=O reactant is acrylamide
    or methacrylamide.


CLS 522/176
TXT Organic polyamine and polycarboxylic acid or derivative or from an organic
    amine salt of a polycarboxylic acid:

    Subject matter under subclass 173 wherein an organic polyamine and a
    polycarboxylic acid or derivative are reacted so to form a solid polymer;
    or from at least one reactant which is an organic amine salt of a
    polycarboxylic acid.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary in Class 520, subclass 1 for a definition
    of the term "carboxylic acid or derivative".  Also the definition of the
    term "polycarboxylic" can be found under above heading.

    (2)     Note.  See the Glossary in Class 520, subclass 1 for a definition
    of the term "amine".


CLS 522/177
TXT Acrylonitrile or methacrylonitrile:

    Subject matter under subclass 173 wherein the nitrogen reactant is
    acrylonitrile or methacrylonitrile.


CLS 522/178
TXT Process of preparing a solid polymer from at least one oxygen containing
    monomer; or compositions therefore:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a monomer containing at least one
    atom of oxygen is polymerized so as to form a solid polymer; or
    compositions therefore.

    (1)     Note.  See the (4) Note of subclass 1 for the type of composition
    proper for this subclass.


CLS 522/179
TXT Polycarboxylic acid or derivative and polyol, or condensate thereof, e.g.,
    dimethylterephthalate, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 178 wherein a polycarboxylic acid or a
    derivative thereof and a polyol, or a condensate thereof, are reacted so as
    to form a solid polymer.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary in Class 520, subclass 1 for a definition
    of the term "carboxylic acid or derivative".  Also the definition of the
    term "polycarboxylic" can be found under the above heading.

    (2)     Note.  A polyol contains two or more C-OH groups wherein the carbon
    atom bonded to the -OH moiety is not double bonded to a chalcogen atom.


CLS 522/180
TXT Sulfur containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 178 wherein the oxygen reactant also contains
    a sulfur atom.


CLS 522/181
TXT Ether group:

    Subject matter under subclass 178 wherein the oxygen atom is part of a
    C-O-C group and wherein the carbon atoms bonded to the oxygen atom are not
    bonded to oxygen, selenium, or tellurium.


CLS 522/182
TXT Carboxylic acid or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 178 wherein the oxygen atom is part of a
    carboxylic acid or derivative group.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary in Class 520, subclass 1 for a definition
    of the term, "carboxylic acid or derivative".


CLS 522/183
TXT Oxygen other than as part of a COO-group:

    Subject matter under subclass 182 wherein the carboxylic acid or derivative
    contains an oxygen atom which is not part of a carboxylic acid or
    derivative group.


CLS 522/184
TXT Processes of preparing a solid polymer from ethylenic reactants only; or
    compositions therefore:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a solid polymer is derived by
    polymerizing reactants all of which are ethylenically unsaturated.

    (1)     Note.  See the (4) Note in subclass 1 for the type of composition
    proper for this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  See the Glossary in Class 520, subclass 1 for a definition
    of the term "ethylenically unsaturated".


CLS 522/185
TXT Carbon, hydrogen and halogen only reactant contains at leasst three carbon
    atoms:

    Subject matter under subclass 184 wherein at least one reactant containing
    at least three carbon atoms composed solely of carbon, hydrogen and halogen
    is polymerized.

    (1)     Note.  Halogen is limited to fluorine, chlorine, iodine, bromine
    and astatine.


CLS 522/186
TXT At least one reactant contains two or more ethylenic groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 184 wherein an ethylenic reactant containing
    two or more ethylenic groups is polymerized.


CLS 522/187
TXT At least one reactant contains halogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 184 wherein an ethylenic reactant which
    contains at least one halogen atom is polymerized.

    (1)     Note.  Halogen is limited to fluorine, chlorine, iodine, bromine
    and astatine.


CLS 522/188
TXT Derived from aromatic hydrocarbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 184 wherein an ethylenic reactant composed
    only of carbon and hydrogen atoms and which contains an aryl ring is
    polymerized.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary in Class 520, subclass 1 for a definition
    of the term "aryl".


CLS 522/189
TXT Derived from ethylene only:

    Subject matter under subclass 184 wherein the sole reactant polymerized is
    ethylene.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


    The following subclasses are collections of published disclosures
    pertaining to various aspects of art relating to wave energy, and which
    aspects do not form an appropriate base for subclass classification in the
    classification schedule.

    (1)     Note.  Disclosures are placed for value as a search aid and in no
    instance do they represent the entire extent of the prior art.


CLS 522/901
TXT DARK STORAGE STABILIZER:

    Subject matter involving the use of a material that protects in the dark a
    photoreactable composition from chemical change.


CLS 522/902
TXT AIR INHIBITION:

    Subject matter involving reaction problems due to the presence of air
    during a wave energy step.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    915,    for the use of an inert gas, steam, nitrogen gas, or carbon dioxide
    as replacement atmospheres for air.


CLS 522/903
TXT REMOVAL OF RESIDUAL MONOMER:

    Subject matter wherein polymers contaminated with monomer are treated by a
    wave energy step so as to remove any residual monomer.


CLS 522/904
TXT MONOMER OR POLYMER CONTAINS INITIATING GROUP:

    Subject matter wherein the monomer selected to be reacted or a polymer to
    be treated contains functional groups which are sensitive to wave energy
    and thereby assist the chemical reaction upon exposure to wave energy to
    proceed.


CLS 522/905
TXT BENZOPHENONE GROUP:

    Subject matter under subclass 904 wherein the monomer or

    polymer contains the RR groups wherein R is an aryl group.


CLS 522/906
TXT PREPARING SHRINKABLE MATERIAL:

    Subject matter involving treating material with wave energy so as to impart
    shrinkable propeerties thereto.


CLS 522/907
TXT INVOLVING PRECURSOR OF AN ULTRAVIOLET ABSORBER E.G., RESORCINOL
    MONOBENZOATE, ETC.:

    Subject matter wherein a material which is present during a wave energy
    step is converted to an ultraviolet absorber, e.g., resorcinol monobenzoate
    rearranges to a phenone so as to become an ultraviolet stabilizer, etc.


CLS 522/908
TXT DENTAL UTILITY:

    Subject matter involving treating material for use in dentistry, e.g.,
    plate or bridge manufacture, tooth filling, etc.


CLS 522/909
TXT SOLVENTLESS INK:

    Subject matter involving an ink in which all liquid components are
    reactable to wave energy.


CLS 522/910
TXT TREATMENT THROUGH AN EXTERNAL FILTER OR MASK (NONPHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESS):

    Subject matter relating to passing wave energy through a nonimaging mask or
    filter.


CLS 522/911
TXT SPECIFIED TREATMENT INVOLVING ONE MEGARAD OR LESS:

    Subject matter relating to specific processes of treating materials so as
    to cause a chemical reaction involving wave energy of one megarad (1 MRAD)
    or less.

    (1)     Note. Specific for purposes of this subclass is limited to examples
    involving 1 MRAD or less and not to generic disclosures wherein a range is
    recited and one of the range can include the subject matter of this
    subclass.


CLS 522/912
TXT POLYMER DERIVED FROM ETHYLENIC MONOMERS ONLY:

    Subject matter under subclass 911 wherein the exemplified treatment
    involving one megarad or less is applied to ethylenic monomers only or to a
    polymer derived from ethylenic monomers only.


CLS 522/913
TXT NUMERICALLY SPECIFIED DISTINCT WAVELENGTH:

    Subject matter relating to reactions involving wave energy whose wave
    length is specifically recited or wherein a very narrow waveband is recited.

    (1)     Note.  Specific for purposes of this subclass is limited to
    examples involving a single wavelength

    and does not include wave energy that is narrowly defined by a specifiec
    band of wavelength, e.g., visible light, microwave, near or for u.v., etc.


CLS 522/914
TXT WAVELENGTH OF 200 NANOMETERS OR LESS:

    Subject matter under subclass 913 wherein the exemplified treatment
    involves wave energy having a wavelength of 200 nanometers or less.


CLS 522/915
TXT INVOLVING INERT GAS, STEAM, NITROGEN GAS, OR CARBON DIOXIDE:

    Subject matter wherein wave energy is transmitted through a medium of an
    inert gas, steam, nitrogen gas, or carbon dioxide and which medium is in
    direct contact with the material treated by the wave energy.

    (1)     Note.  Nitrogen gas or carbon dioxide in air is not considered as
    being nitrogen gas or carbon dioxide for this subclass.


CLS 523/
TTL SYNTHETIC RESINS OR NATURAL  RUBBERS --  PART OF THE CLASS   520 SERIES

CLS 523/1
TXT PROCESSES OF PREPARING A DESIRED OR INTENTIONAL COMPOSITION OF AT LEAST ONE
    NONREACTANT MATERIAL AND AT LEAST ONE SOLID POLYMER OR SPECIFIED
    INTERMEDIATE CONDENSATION PRODUCT, OR PRODUCT THEREOF:

    Subject matter under Class 520, subclass 1 involving preparing a desired or
    intentional composition of at least one nonreactant material and at least
    one solid polymer or specified intermediate condensation product, or
    product thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The terms desired and intentional have been used
    interchangeably throughout the schedule and definitions.  Class 523,
    subclass 1 incorporates all of the subject matter of Class 523 and Class
    524.

    (2)     Note.  For purposes of this class, the following abbreviations have
    been used in the schedule and definitions:

      SICP - specified intermediate condensation product (consistent with
    Glossary)

      SPFI - specified polymer-forming ingredients (consistent with Glossary)

      SP - solid polymer (consistent with Class 520, subclass 1)

      NRM - nonreactant material (defined in Class 523, subclass 1)

      DNRM - designated nonreactant material (defined in Class 523, subclass 1)

    (3)     Note.  GENERAL SUMMARY OF SUBJECT MATTER WITHIN THIS CLASS

    (A)     In order for a patent claim to be proper for Class 523, subclass 1
    there must be a desire or intent to produce a composition of a solid
    polymer or SICP and a nonreactant material (NRM), this includes the
    treatment of a composition to produce a desire or intentional composition.
    The NRM may be added to the solid polymer, to a SICP, to SPFI, or to
    materials specifically denoted as forming solid polymers.

    1.)     A desired composition is formed when the nonreactive material is
    desired to be present or operative in the ultimate system under
    consideration.  An ingredient present only as an innocuous impurity,
    residue, or by-product signifies a composition but not a desired
    composition.

    2.)     Statements that a material may be left in the polymer composition
    or that a material is inert or inoffensive therein are not the type of
    statements that qualify to bring a patent into this area.  There must be a
    desirous and deliberate attempt to incorporate these materials in some
    degree.

    3.)     Adding of materials, all of which are to be removed in a later
    process, is not, per se, forming a desired or intended composition.
    However, the intended removal of some and the intended inclusion of some of
    the materials would be within the purview of this class.

    4.)     Patentees' statements as to functions of material, e.g., catalyst,
    reactant, solvent, etc., are to be taken literally and are to be followed.
    An exception to this rule is in those subclasses wherein specialized rules
    have been enumerated.

    5.)     An added material which disappears completely so that the final
    composition prior to use is devoid of the material or of a reaction product
    or residue thereof is not classified as an NRM.  An example of this is the
    use of a blowing agent to mix a composition without foaming.

    6.)     Coating compositions are specially included as compositions proper
    for this class, although the final product after application may be no more
    than a solid polymer on a substrate.  Coating compositions are a general
    exception to the type of compositions that are provided in this class, in
    that for the most part, the added material usually stays with the polymer
    and can be found with it during the use of the polymer.

    7.)     For purposes of this class, a nonreactant material has a restricted
    meaning and is other than the following:

    (A)     A solid polyme.

    (B)     Specified intermediate condensation product.

    (C)     Specified polymer-forming ingredients.

    (D)     Ethylenic reactant.

    (E)     Material disclosed to form a solid polymer either with nonspecified
    polymer-forming reactants or with specified polymer-forming reactants.

    (F)     Material disclosed as chemically reacting with a solid polymer or
    solid specified intermediate condensation product, so as to add or remove
    atoms therefrom.

    (G)     Material disclosed as assisting in chemical reaction, e.g.,
    solvents, catalysts, potentiators, etc.

    (H)     Natural rubber or modified natural rubber.

    8.)     Materials in 7 (C) - 7 (G) above may in certain instances be
    regarded as nonreactants, such as when the disclosure of the patent is of a
    nature as to recite at least a function for the added material besides
    acting as a reactant or assisting in a reaction.  For instance, a
    disclosure noting the use of a catalyst in greater than necessary
    quantities so that a desired residue is achieved after all reaction has
    occurred which results in a stabilized product would be proper herein.

    9.)     To be considered a nonreactant material, the added material must
    not react with the solid polymer, natural or modified rubber, SPFI, or
    solid SICP. This does not mean that the nonreactant material need be
    totally unreactive.  For instance, it can react with itself or with another
    material in the composition and still be considered a nonreactive material
    if the final product after the reaction has occurred is desired.

    10.)    For purposes of this class, the addition of a thixotropic agent to
    a composition is sufficient to qualify as the preparation of a desired
    composition.

    11.)    Physical or chemical treatment of a previously formed composition
    without the addition of a NRM is included herein if a desired or
    intentional composition is thereby formed.

    (4)     Note.  SCHEDULE OUTLINE OF CLASS 523 AND CLASS 524

    (A)     The schedule is divided into a number of parts, each of which is
    distinct and provides for different types of subject matter.  The following
    is a breakdown on the major areas and indicates the type of subject matter
    provided therein:


CLS 523/1
TXT Class 523, subclass 1 (generic subclass)

    (a)     Class 523, subclasses 100-181 (utility area) provide for certain
    designated utilities.  This area has no generic subclass, and utilities
    which are not enumerated are classified in the subclasses below on some
    other basis.  In order for a patent to be classified herein as an original,
    there must be a claim to the noted utility or the total disclosure in the
    patent must be directed to the provided for utility. this area provides for
    the composition or for methods of preparing or treating the composition.
    The utility in the claim need not be limited to the provided utility as in
    a claim wherein two or more functions are ascribed to a composition.  This
    area does not differentiate (except where specifically enumerated) between
    compositions as a result of admixing with a solid polymer or a composition
    as a result of in situ preparation of a desired composition.

            Patents where the disclosure specifically states the essentiality
    of a combination of multiple ingredients for the claimed utility to be
    effective, yet where the claims are limited to a subcombination of said
    ingredients (a polymer or SICP plus a nonreactant material) would be
    classified in subclasses 100-181 provided that the desired utility is
    claimed or solely disclosed.

    (b)     Class 523, subclasses 200-223 (physical characteristics area)
    provide for certain physical characteristics of the nonreactant material or
    of certain materials which are in admixture with the nonreactant material.
    The scope of the subclasses varies to designate what is the physical
    characteristic necessary and what part of the total composition must
    possess this characteristic. This area has no generic subclass, and
    physical characteristics which are not specifically enumerated in the
    schedule are classified below on some other basis.  This area provides for
    the composition and also for the process of preparing same.  This area does
    not differentiate (except where specifically enumerated) between a
    composition as a result of admixing with a solid polymer or a composition
    as a result of in situ preparation of a desired composition.

    (c)     Class 523, subclasses 300-353 (manipulative processes area) provide
    for certain designated processes of preparing or treating a composition.
    This area does not provide for products, e.g., product by process claims,
    etc. This area has no generic process subclass and therefore processes not
    covered under the ambit of the provided subclasses are classified below on
    some other basis.  This area does not differentiate (except where
    specifically enumerated) between a composition which is a result of
    admixing with a solid polymer or a composition as a result of in situ
    preparation of a desired composition.

            For processes falling under subclasses 300 to 353, the process
    steps which are the basis for classification must relate to treating or
    forming the desired composition. Preliminary process steps, relating to
    ingredients which are not themselves intentional compositions for purposes
    of Class 523, subclass 1, are not controlling for purposes of
    classification and such processes are classified below on some other basis.

    (d)     Class 523, subclass 375 (radioactive or inert gas compound area) is
    a special subclass for radioactive additives or for inert gas compounds.
    This area provides for compositions as well as processes of preparing or
    treating. This area is generic to any composition (i.e., in situ or
    admixing).

    (e)     Class 523, subclasses 400-468 (epoxy area) are subclasses for
    admixing a NRM with a material containing more than one epoxy group per
    mole. These subclasses provide for compositions as well as processes of
    preparing or treating same.  This area does not differentiate between solid
    or nonsolid polymers derived from epoxy-containing materials or the
    treatment of solid or nonsolid polymers to produce an epoxy-containing
    material.

    (f)     Class 523, subclasses 500-527 (polyester and unsaturated reactant
    area) are subclasses for preparing a composition of a nonreactant material
    and a polyester together with an unsaturated reactant. This area is
    analogous to the area above (epoxy) in that solid or liquid polyesters have
    not been separated and are treated identically.  This area, as the area
    above provides for compositions, processes of preparing or treating.

    (g)     Class 524, subclass 1 (generic subclass for admixing a preformed
    solid polymer or a preformed SICP with a nonreactant material) provides for
    processes of preparing a composition, for the composition prepared, or for
    processes of chemically treating a composition or the chemically treated
    compositions thereof.  Each of the subclasses below, unless otherwise
    indicated, provides for compositions as well as processes.

    (1)     Subclasses 2-79 are subclasses which provide for certain special
    concepts, e.g., protein or biologically active polypeptide additive,
    carbohydrate, or derivative additive, etc.

    (2)     Subclasses 80-456 provide for admixing a designated nonreactant
    material with a solid polymer or SICP.  These subclasses also exclude
    certain materials which could be considered "designated" since a chemical
    atom is noted. The materials excluded are limited to those enumerated below:

      a.    TiO2 - in any form

       b.   Carbon - in any form, e.g., carbon black, lamp black, graphite, etc.

      c.    Halogenated hydrocarbon

     d.     Hydrocarbon

     e.     Silica, in any form, e.g., SiO2, glass, quartz, sand, novaculite,
    etc.

     f.     Water in any of its physical forms

    (3)     Subclasses 457-461 are a special area which provides for
    polymerizing in the presence of a preformed SICP or solid polymer and in
    the presence of a nonreactant material so as to form an aqueous dispersion,
    latex, suspension, or emulsion.

    (4)     Subclasses 462-473 are a special area which provides for certain
    halogenated hydrocarbons which have been excluded by subclasses 80-456 as
    nonreactant materials.

    (5)     Subclasses 474-491 are a special area which provides for certain
    hydrocarbons which have been excluded by subclasses 80-456 as nonreactant
    materials.

    (6)     Subclasses 492-494 are a special area which provides for certain
    silicon materials as nonreactants which have been excluded by subclasses
    80-456.

    (7)     Subclasses 495 and 496 are a special area which provides for carbon
    as a nonreactant material when certain specific numerical limitations are
    claimed.  Carbon as a nonreactant material has been excluded by subclasses
    80-456.

    (8)     Subclass 497 is a special area which provides for TiO2 as a
    nonreactant additive when certain specific numerical limitations are
    claimed.  TiO2 as a nonreactant materialhas been excluded by subclasses
    80-456.

    (9)     Subclasses 498-612 provide for solid polymers or SICP admixed with
    nonreactant materials. Since certain common species (e.g., SiO2, glass,
    water, etc.) have been excluded from subclasses 80-456 above and since
    those same subclasses above also exclude an amount of material as being a
    DNRM, per se, those materials in combination with a polymer or SICP are
    provided for in this area.  This area also provides for processes of
    preparing its own compositions or for processes of treating compositions
    proper for this area.  Patents in this area are placed on the basis of the
    reactants originally present in preparing the solid polymer or SICP, e.g.,
    mixing chlorinated polyethylene with carbon black is classified with
    ethylene, etc.

    (h)     Class 524, subclass 650 provides for adding an inorganic water
    settable material to a solid polymer-forming system. The water settable
    ingredient may be a reactant or nonreactant. This subclass provides for
    compositions as well as processes of preparing or treating.

            Class 524, subclasses 700-848 (broadly) (i, j k, l, m below) are
    the subclasses for adding a NRM to a solid polymer-forming system;
    so-called in situ compositions.  These subclasses provide for processes for
    preparing a composition, for the composition prepared, or for processes of
    chemically treating a composition or the chemically treated compositions
    thereof.  Each of the subclasses indicated provides for compositions as
    well as processes.

            The following is a more detailed description of subclasses 700-848.

    (i)     Subclasses 700-796 provide for polymerizing in the presence of a
    designated nonreactant material.  This area, however, excludes certain
    materials which could be considered "designated" since a chemical atom is
    recited (i.e., carbon, TiO2, water, hydrocarbon, SiO2, ass).

    (j)     Subclasses 797-799 provide for polymerizing in the presence of a
    NRM, carbon, TiO2, water, hydrocarbon, SiO2, or glass when the chemical
    reactants forming the solid polymer are protein or biologically active
    polypeptide, natural resins, lignin, or tannin.

    (k)     Subclasses 800-846 are subclasses for adding water to a
    polymer-forming system and forming a polymer composition therewith.
    Classification in this area is primarily on the monomer system utilized.

    (l)     Subclasses 847 and 848 are subclasses drawn to processes of
    polymerizing in the presence of certain hydrocarbons, or in the presence of
    carbon, TiO2, glass, or SiO2, which is described by specific numerical
    limitations.

    (m)     Subclasses 849-881 are subclasses for polymerizing a monomer system
    in the presence of a NRM or in the presence of carbon, TiO2, glass, or SiO2.

            Classification in this area is primarily on the monomer system
    utilized.

    (B)     Subclasses 900-924 are cross-reference art collections pertaining
    to subject matter in Class 523, subclass 1.

    (5)     Note.  RULES FOR DETERMINING WHETHER A DESIRED OR INTENTIONALLY
    FORMED COMPOSITION OR A PROCESS OF PREPARING A DESIRED OR INTENTIONALLY
    FORMED COMPOSITION IS PROPER SUBJECT MATTER FOR CLASS 523, SUBCLASS 1 OR IS
    PROPER SUBJECT MATTER FOR CLASSES 525, 526, 527, OR 528.

            Class 523, subclass 1 provides basically for two types of subject
    matter:

    (A)     Admixing a preformed solid polymer or SICP with a nonreactant
    material.

    (B)     Admixing a nonreactant material with a reactant and then
    polymerizing said reactant so as to form a polymer proper for Class 520,
    subclass 1 in the presence of the nonreactant material; so-called in situ
    system.

            Included under (5) Note, (A) above as to process is:


CLS 523/1
TXT Mixing a nonreactant material with a solid polymer or SICP to produce a
    desired composition when:

    a.      a specified amount of nonreactant material is noted, e.g., 2 per
    cent of an emulsifier, etc., or

    b.      a relationship amount exists between the solid polymer or SICP and
    the NRM, e.g., two times the amount of polymer to additive, etc., or

    c.      adding nonreactant material which is identified in the claims by
    more than mere function, e.g., organic plasticizer, hydrocarbon solvent,
    metal filler, etc., or

    d.      adding nonreactant material which is identified by at least one
    chemical atom, e.g., sulfuric acid, water, hydrocarbon, etc., or

    e.      adding nonreactant material which is identified as a generic type
    of chemical compound, e.g., alcohol, ether, etc., or

    f.      the nonreactant material is mixed with the SICP or solid polymer
    and the process of brining the two materials together is more than a mere
    statement of mixing or blending, or

    g.      two or more process steps are claimed, e.g., polymerizing followed
    by blending, mixing two polymers followed by adding or cooling, etc.

            Included under (5) Note, (B) above as to process is:


CLS 523/1
TXT Polymerizing in the presence of a nonreactant material to produce a desired
    composition when:

    a.      a specified amount of nonreactant material is noted, e.g., 4 per
    cent of a NRM, etc., or

    b.      a relationship amount exists between the reactants and the NRM, or

    c.      the nonreactant material is identified in the claim by more than
    mere function, e.g, organic plasticizer, metal filler, etc., or

    d.      the NRM is identified by at least one chemical atom, e.g., halogen,
    water, etc., or

    e.      A step of polymerizing in the presence of a nonreactant material
    recites some process parameter.

            Class 520, subclass 1 provides for compositions which are prepared
    utilizing nonreactant materials enumerated in (5) Note, A, 1, a-e, and (5)
    Note, B, 1, a-d.

            Products, e.g., products by process, etc., which are the result of
    processes involving nonreactant materials which do not fit under the type
    of nonreactant materials required in (5) Note, A, 1, a-e, and (5) Note, B,
    1, a-d are classified below in Classes 525, 526, 527, and 528.

            Under the guidelines enumerated above, it is quite possible for a
    process of preparing a composition to be classified in Class 523, subclass
    1 while the composition produced is classified in another class under the
    520 series.

    (6)     Note.  RELATIONSHIP OF THE TERMS "NOREACTANT MATERAL" (NRM) AND
    "DESIGNATED NONREACTANT MATERIAL" (DNRM)

            The distinction in the subclasses below which recite designated
    nonreactant material and those that recite NRM is that:

    (A)     Nonreactant material is when:

    1.      a specified amount of nonreactant material is noted, e.g., 6 per
    cent of a filler, etc., or

    2.      a relationship amount exists between the solid polymer or SICP and
    the NRM, e.g., two times the amount of polymer to additive, etc., or

    3.      the NRM is identified in the clam by more than mere function, e.g.,
    organic plasticizer, hydrocarbon solvent, metal filler, etc., or

    4.      the NRM is identified by at least one chemical atom, e.g., sulfuric
    acid, water, hydrocarbon, etc., or

    5.      the NRM is identified as a generic type of chemical compound, e.g.,
    alcohol, ether, etc.

    (B)     Designated nonreactant material is a material wherein at least one
    of the chemical atoms can be deduced with certainty.  Materials noted in
    (6) Note, A, 4 and 5 above would be considered as DNRM's as well as would
    by hydrocarbon solvent in (6) Note, A, 3 above.  For purposes of this
    class, organic material although inherently reciting the presence of a
    carbon atom is considered to be too broad.  An exemplary list of materials
    to be regarded as DNRM's is as follows: metal hydrate, chalcogen,
    carboxylic acid, peroxy, peroxide, latex, alkali or alkaline earth metal,
    transition metal, halogen, proton donor, sulfide, drying oil, fat, fatty
    acid or ester, water, carbon black, etc.  This list is by no means limited
    to the above noted examples.

            The following list below is not exhaustive and merely enumerates
    certain materials that will not be considered as DNRM's, e.g, organic
    compound, metal containing, inorganic compound, organometallic compound,
    solvent, wax, magnetic, hydrophobic, hydrophillic, antiplasticizer,
    plasticizer, filler, preservative, antioxidant, antiozonant, stabilizer,
    lubricant, fibrous additive, particulate additive, liquid, solid, gas,
    dispersant, emulsifier, crystalline, plastic, fluorescent, phosphorescent,
    luminescent, deliquescent, drier, dessicant, humectant, blue color,
    numerically described without providing a chemical atom, Lewis acid or
    base, mineral, organic solvent, co-solvent, Ziegler or Natta catalysts,
    alfin catalyst, free radical, amphoteric, anionic, ionic, denaturant,
    electrostatic, dielectric, conductor, insulator, etc.

    (7)     Note.  GENERAL RULES AS TO PATENT PLACEMENT

    (A)     In those situations wherein a material reacts with another material
    to give an in situ product, original classification is as follows:  If the
    materials reacted occur higher in the subclass array than the material
    which is the result of the reaction, then classification is proper on the
    basis of the original reactants.  It would be desirable in either event to
    cross-reference the reactant or product produced.

    (B)     A combination of treating a polymer composition containing a NRM
    that is prepared by an in situ preparation with another nonreactant
    material places the document in the area provided for an admixing a
    preformed solid polymer with a NRM.

    (C)     Carbon (in any of its allotropic forms), titanium dioxide, silica,
    glass, sand, quartz, water, benzene, xylene, or toluene will be regarded in
    the absence of any disclosure to the contrary as being nonreactive with a
    solid polymer, SICP, or SPFI.

    (D)     An ingredient having a defined function as a solvent, dispersing
    medium, or flux will be regarded in the absence of disclosure to the
    contrary as being nonreactant when added to a preformed solid polymer or
    performed SICP and as forming a desired composition therewith.

    (E)     An ingredient having a defined function as a solvent, dispersing
    medium, or flux will be regarded in the absence of disclosure to the
    contrary as not forming a desired composition with a solid polymer when
    such materials are added to a SPFI system.  There must be an expressed
    intent to incorporate these materials with the solid polymer when the
    polymer is subsequently formed.

    (F)     Addition of a material during polymer formation and in which the
    disclosure is silent as to reaction or nonreaction (other than SPFI,
    catalyst, curing agent) will be regarded as a reactant.

    (G)     In those situations where a material is added during polymerization
    and is a nonreactant, such patent will not be placed in this class but
    rather in Classes 525, 526, 527, or 528 unless a recitation is made in the
    disclosure that a composition is in fact obtained and is desired.

    (H)     Components of a solid polymer-forming system which are not, per se,
    the type that qualify as solid polymer-forming ingredients (SPFI) are not
    considered NRM's.

    (I)     Ingredients which are not the necessary solid polymer-forming
    ingredients (SPFI) but which are disclosed as reacting with specified
    polymer-forming ingredient system are not considered NRM's.

    (J)     In the absence of disclosure to the contrary, an ingredient having
    a defined utility as a plasticizer, filler, dye, pigment, or preservative
    (other than a solid polymer, SPFI, or SICP) will be regarded as being
    nonreactive (with the solid polymer, SPFI, or SICP).

    (K)     In the absence of disclosure to the contrary, a peroxy compound, an
    ethylenic compound, or sulfur when added to a solid polymer will be
    regarded as reactants.

    (L)     Reacting a material with a filler, modifier, etc., is presumed to
    alter the chemical nature of the filler, modifier, etc., and thereby
    produce a new and different chemical entity.  However, surface modification
    when specially designated as such, or coating or impregnating a material
    such as a filler, is presumed as forming a composition of the filler,
    modifier, etc., and the coating or impregnating agent or as a composition
    of the substrate material and the surface modified chemical entity.

    (M)     A coupling or bridging agent is presumed to act as a chemical
    reactant between the polymer and additive and, if technically viewed, no
    composition would result therefrom.  For purposes of this class, however,
    the use of a coupling or bridging agent between a polymer and an additive
    is viewed as a surface phenomenon and therefore a composition does in fact
    result between (a) the polymer which is chemically linked to the coupling
    or bridging agent, and (b) the additive.  Classification on the basis of
    the additive is therefore proper.

    (N)     Natural rubber, per se, or modifed forms thereof or mixtures of
    natural rubber wherein there is no polymer proper for Class 520, subclass
    1, are to be found in Class 524, subclass 575.5.  When, however, a final
    polymer is proper for Class 520, subclass 1, then a natural rubber or
    modified form thereof in a composition therewith is to be considered as if
    it were derived from a monomer containing two ethylenic groups, i.e.,
    polyisoprene.  The following are examples drawn to the patent placement of
    natural rubber in this class.

    (1)     Natural rubber + glass + polybutadiene - - -> is to be found in
    Class 524, subclass 526.  This composition is considered as a mixture of
    two polymers derived from ethlenic reactants only.

    (2)     Natural rubber reacted with styrene - - -> modified natural rubber
    to which glass is added. This composition is to be found in Class 524,
    subclass 534. The reaction of natural rubber and an ethylenic   reactant is
    considered to be a product proper for Class 520, subclass 1.

    (3)     Natural rubber + glass is to be found in Class 524, subclass 575.5.


    (8)     Note. RULES CONCERNING THE USE OF DNRM IN THE SCHEDULE For purpose
    of this class, certain rules as to patent placement have been adopted.
    These rules only pertain to the subject matter under Class 523, subclass 1,
    and are not to be extrapolated to other areas in the 520 series or to any
    other class.

            The rules adopted pertain to the use of the term "DNRM", are as
    follows:

            In those subclasses which recite a designated nonreactant material
    (DNRM) in the title, the indented subclasses merely pertain to a further
    elaboration of the DNRM nd do not relate to any other material.  An example
    of this is subclass 159 in Class 524 which recites nitrogen and is indented
    under aryl group (subclass 158) which is in turn indented under sulfur
    bonded directly to three oxygen atoms DNRM (subclass 157).  The proper
    meaning of subclass 159 is that a single nitrogen containing compound also
    containing at least one aryl group and at least one sulfur atom bonded to
    three oxygen atoms is utilized as a DNRM.

            In those subclasses which recite "containing .......DNRM", the use
    of the work "containing" is consistent with the general use in other
    classes. An example of this is subclass 759 in class 524, which recites,
    "........... containing carboxylic acid or derivative DNRM", and is
    indented under subclass 755, ether compound DNRM.  The proper meaning of
    subclass 759 is that a single DNRM compound may be present which has both
    ether and carboxylic acid or derivative groups, or that two separate DNRM's
    may be present, one of which contains an ether group and the other a
    carboxylic acid or derivative group.

            In those subclasses which recite "with", under a specified DNRM,
    such use is consistent with the term as used in other classes, in that, at
    least two separate materials must be present, one of which is the DNRM and
    the other the "with" material.

    (9)     Note.  EXAMPLES OF PATENT PLACEMENT WITHIN THIS CLASS

            Patenten claims:

    (A)     Polyethylene admixed with 2 per cent of a stabilizer.  Original
    classification is with the polymer in Class 524, subclass 585.  This patent
    initially is proper for Class 524, subclass 1; however, it does not meet
    the limitations of Class 524, subclass 80, since 2 per cent is not
    sufficient to be considered DNRM.

    (B)     Polyethylene admixed with 2 per cent of a stabilizer and a
    hydrocarbon solvent.  Same result as in (A) above, since 2 per cent of a
    stabilizer is not considered sufficient to be DNRM and hydrocarbon has been
    specifically excluded from class 524, subclass 80.

    (C)     Polyethylene admixed with 2 per cent carbon black and water.  Same
    result as in (A) above; both carbon black and water have been specifically
    excluded as DNRM's in class 524, subclass 80.

    (D)     Polyethylene admixed with a halogenating agent and with a
    phosphorus stabilizer for the halogenated polyethylene.  Since a
    halogenating agent cannot be considered a NRM, classification is solely on
    the basis of the phosphorus stabilizer.

    (E)     Polyethylene admixed with stabilizer composition consisting of an
    organophosphorus additive and an organotin compound.  Since both additives
    qualify as DNRM's, in that, a chemical atom is known in each of the
    additives, original classification in the phosphorus subclass would be
    proper in Class 524, subclass 115 rather than in the tin subclass (subclass
    178) which is lower in the schedule array.

    (F)     Polyetheylene admixed with a stabilizer compound consisting of an
    organic compound and an organotin compound.  Disclosure notes that an
    organophosphorus compound can be one of the organic compounds.  Since the
    claim is not limited to any organic compound and an organic compound is not
    a DNRM under Class 524, subclass 80, original classification is proper with
    the organotin compound in Class 524, subclass 178.  The sole criterion to
    be evaluated is whether the material added is a DNRM.  Only those materials
    which are DNRM's are to be evaluated for classification purposes.

    (G)     Polyethylene admixed with a combination of an organophosphorus
    stabilizer and an organotin stabilizer.  Disclosure is limited to
    polymerizing ethylene in the presence of the phosphorus stabilizer and
    after solid polymer formation, admixing the organotin stabilizer therewith.
    Classification is on the basis of the organotin stabilizer for the reason
    that admixing with a performed solid polymer or SICP is superior in the
    classification array to in situ polymer formation. No weight can be given
    for original classification purposes in class 524, subclass 1, to the fact
    that the organophosphorus was added during the solid polymer formation
    state.  A cross-reference to class 524, subclass 706, may be appropriate to
    cover the subject matter relating to the adding of the phosphorus material.

            The difference between Class 524, subclasses 1+ and class 524,
    subclasses 700+ is the time of addition.  If a nonreactant material
    intended to be in the final product is added subsequent to polymerization,
    classification in this area is proper; if it is added during polymer
    formation, it is proper in class 524, subclasses 700+.

            If a patent claims a composition of a polymer and NRM, it will be
    necessary to scrutinize the disclosure of the document to ascertain the
    time when the NRM was added, since classification is primarily based on the
    process of preparing the intended composition.  Disclosures which are
    generic to adding to a preformed polymer or to forming a polymer in situ in
    the presence of a NRM should be placed in this area as an original in Class
    524, subclasses 1+ and cross-referenced into Class 524, subclasses 700+.

            In Class 524, subclasses 268, 273, 278, and 279 are noted as
    containing a particular chemical atom.  Classification in these subclasses
    is not only on the monomer utilized in preparing the polymer but also on
    any subsequent treatment to incorporate the desired chemical atom therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    525,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses for a
    mixture of a synthetic resin appropriate under Class 520, subclass 1, and a
    natural rubber (i.e., polyisoprene), and for patents in whcih a dispersing
    medium of flux is polymerizable or resinifiable to produce the same
    synthetic resin as that dispersed, or for a synthetic resin disclosed as a
    filler, dye, pigment, or preservative in another synthetic resin.

    526,    527, and 528, Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate
    subclasses for a composition of a polymer proper for those classes admixed
    with a broadly claimed nonreactant material not identifiable by a chemical
    atom or amount; or for a process of preparing a composition wherein the
    nonreactant material is not identifiable by a chemical atom or amount and
    wherein the process of forming the composition recites no process condition
    other than mere polymerizing.  See subclass 1 of Class 523 for the
    distinction between that class and this area, and see in particular, Note
    (6) B; and subclasses 480+ of Class 528 for processes of treating a polymer
    not involving a chemical modification of the polymer, by the addition of a
    material thereto, and for chemically modifying material other than the
    polymer.  Subclasses 480+ also provide for processes of admixing with a
    broadly claimed nonreactant material.  See subclass 1 of Class 523 for the
    distinction between that class and this area, and see in particular, Note
    (6) B.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclass 255
    for a polymer composition containing hazardous or toxic waste used to
    contain the waste and prevent its release into the environment.


CLS 523/100
TXT Food or tobacco contact composition or process of preparing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a composition having utility as a
    food or tobacco contact composition is claimed or solely disclosed or to
    processes of preparation thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 1 for an explanation of patent placement
    referring to "claimed or solely disclosed".

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes food-packaging materials, such as,
    compositions useful for sandwich bags, or nonedible waxy materials to be
    deposited on the surface of edible fruit to reduce their shrinkage, but
    excludes sealant compositions for sealing can ends which are not intended
    to be in direct contact with the food or beverage.

    (3)     Note.  Compositions not solely disclosed or claimed as food or
    tobacco contact materials are placed as appropriate in Classes 523 and 524
    hereinbelow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, for containers with specified
    structure designed to hold a particular article or set of articles, or
    materials.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    for food products in combination with nonfood materials such as package
    structures, inedible casings, liners, and infusion bags.


CLS 523/101
TXT Food release coating:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein said composition functions as a
    food release agent.

    (1)     Note.  A solid polymer, such as a polytetrafluoroethylene, mixed
    with an additive, which is used to release food from a frying pan without
    the use of grease, would be classified herein.


CLS 523/102
TXT Odor masked, odor reduced or perfumed composition or process of preparing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a composition having utility as an
    odor masking, odor reducing, or perfuming composition is claimed or solely
    disclosed, said odor masking, odor reducing, or perfuming composition
    containing an ingredient which provides a perfumed fragrance which thereby
    conceals an otherwise obnoxious odor, or to processes of preparation
    thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 1 for an explanation of patent placement
    referring to "claimed or solely disclosed".

    (2)     Note.  Included herein are odor-masking or odor-reducing
    compositions containing a solid polymer or SICP or a composition comprising
    a perfume of the Class 252 type plus a solid polymer or SICP.  A perfume is
    defined to be a composition specialized for the purpose of imparting a
    pleasant odor.  When the solid polymer of SICP is an essential component of
    the perfuming composition, see Class 512, subclasses 1-27 and see the
    related search class note thereto below.

    (3)     Note.  A composition which is not solely disclosed as an odor
    masked, odor reduced, or perfumed composition is placed as appropriate in
    Classes 523 and 524 hereinbelow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses
    76.1+ for deodorant compositions which are not applied to the living body
    which function by chemical combination with the odor-causing principle or
    by destroying the odor-causing organism or by desensitizing the olfactory
    mechanism.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    appropriate subclasses for a composition having a utility as a perfume or
    flavor for foods.

    512,    Perfume Compositions, subclasses 1-27 for a composition related to
    a perfume, per se.


CLS 523/103
TXT Compositions having reduced health risks upon exposure thereto during
    incidental handling or body contact or process of preparing; other than
    friction elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a composition having utility
    effective in reducing health risks in materials which are frequently
    handled or in close contact with the body is claimed or solely disclosed or
    to processes of preparation thereof and wherein said composition is other
    than a friction element.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes compositions which are either old
    compositions modified to reduce health risks on exposure, or are novel
    compositions designed to replace compositions with deleterious effects. For
    example, a composition which reduces the carcinogenicity of carbon black
    would be classified herein.

    (2)     Note.  See subclass 1 for an explanation of patent placement
    referring to "claimed or solely disclosed".

    (3)     Note.  A composition not solely disclosed or claimed as having
    reduced health risk is placed in Classes 523 and 524 hereinbelow.

    (4)     Note.  A coating composition for application to surfaces containing
    a bitter testing component such as denatonium benzoate would be classified
    herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    for a composition having utility effective in reducing the clotting
    of blood.

    149+,   for a friction element composition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses for a composition having utility as an anticarcinogenic drug,
    per se; or for a composition of the Class 424 type which has a taste or
    smell signal or is a chemical irritant, emetic, or detoxicant.


CLS 523/105
TXT Nonmedicated composition specifically intended for contact with living
    animal tissue or process of preparing; other than apparel:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a nonmedicated composition having
    utility specifically intended to be in contact with animal living tissue is
    claimed or solely disclosed or to processes of preparation thereof other
    than apparel.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 1 for an explanation of patent placement
    referring to "claimed or solely disclosed".

    (2)     Note.  The phrase "composition having utility specifically intended
    to be in contact with animal living tissue", refers to an intentional or
    desired composition which has been designed or formulated by specifically
    taking into account the contact of said composition with living tissue
    during the ordinary use for which the composition or ultimate article
    therefrom is made. Subject matter in subclasses 106-120 is presumed, absent
    to the contrary, to lie within the meaning of this phrase.

    (3)     Note.  Included herein are compositions utilized as adhesives for
    adhering textile materials to the skin, such as a nylon stocking, to
    prevent irritation to the skin.  Excluded herein are adhesives which are
    not solely disclosed to come into contact with living tissue.

    (4)     Note.  Living tissue is defined to be all internal and external
    tissue, including blood, except for hair and nails.

    (5)     Note.  Apparel for purposes of this subclass is any material
    normally worn externally on the body for warmth or decoration and includes,
    but is not limited to, clothing, shoes, jewelry, etc.

    (6)     Note.  Search Classes 523 and 524, in the appropriate subclasses
    for a nonmedicated composition specifically intended to come into contact
    with the body and wherein such contact is not solely disclosed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 160, and 161 for processes and compositions
    for removing hair or fur from a living animal body.

    128,    Surgery, appropriate subclasses for methods of treatment of the
    living body and apparatus used in the inspection and treatment of diseases,
    wounds, and other abnormal conditions of the bodies of men and lower
    animals; and for a composition used in sutures where the claim has either
    significant structure or a significant physical property characterizing
    said suture.  The mere use of the terms "filament" or "fiber" or suture,
    per se, is considered significant structure to be placed in Class 128.
    Numerical indices of tensile strength, handleability, sterility, density,
    or denier are other examples of significant characteristic physical
    properties proper of Class 128.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses for (A) a drug or bio-affecting composition capable of either
    (1) preventing, alieviating, treating, or curing abnormal and pathological
    conditions of the living body, (2) maintaining, increasing, decreasing,
    limiting, or destroying a physiologic body function, (3) diagnosing a
    physiological condition or state by an in vivo test or in vitro
    antigen-antibody test, or (4) controlling or protecting an environment or
    living body by attracting, disabling, inhibiting, killing, modifying,
    repelling, or retarding an animal or microorganism; or (B) a body-treating
    composition generally intended for deodorizing, protecting, adorning, or
    grooming a body.

    433,    Dentistry, appropriate subclasses for methods, apparatus,
    implements, and devices relating to the treatment of teeth or gums or the
    replacement of teeth.

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, appropriate subclasses for artificial parts for a
    human body adapted to replace or supplement missing or defective body parts.


CLS 523/106
TXT Contact lens making composition:

    Subject matter under subclass 105 wherein said composition relates to those
    used in making contact lenses, e.g., a composition containing hydroxyethyl
    methacrylate copolymers, etc.

     (1)    Note.  This subclass provides for a contact lens composition
    containing its own preserving agent when it is clearly specified and
    restricted for that use.  See below under SEARCH CLASS 424 and 514 for the
    exceptions to this.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclass 507 for the process of dyeing a contact lens
    or product thereof.

    351,    Optics: Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, appropriate
    subclasses for methods of and instruments for fitting contact lenses and
    structural features and adaptations for contact lenses, such as coloring a
    portion of the lens to absorb part of the visible spectrum; subclasses 160+
    for eye contact lens.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 1-43 for generic processes of
    deodorizing, preserving, or sterilizing contact lenses or compositions
    thereof.

    424,    Drugs, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclass 429
    for a contact lens with special physical form, e.g., one which is coated or
    impregnated, etc.; subclass 78.04 for compositions containing a bio-active
    polymer broadly claimed for (1) disinfecting, sterilizing or preserving a
    contact lens or (2) bio-active polymer in admixture with a polymer
    composition to be used in making a contact lens.  Such a composition would
    usually  be classified in  Class 523 but, in most cases, said composition
    likewise reduces or eliminates eye injury or irritation to the contact lens
    wearer or (3) for topically treating the eye of a living animal.

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 112+ for
    compositions used for the mere cleaning of contact lenses.

    514,    Drug Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses for (1) a contact lens composition which contains a nonbioactive
    polymer admixed with a medicament or (2) a composition with or without a
    nonbioactive polymer used to sterilize a contact lens composition to reduce
    or eliminate any eye injury.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 290 for a method of applying a body treating or
    removing material or subclasses 294+ for a method of application to the eye
    or eye socket.


CLS 523/107
TXT Silicon-containing organic polymer:

    Subject matter under subclass 105 wherein said composition contains an
    organic silicon-containing polymer.


CLS 523/108
TXT Polymer of a heterocyclic N-vinyl polymerizable compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein said composition contains a
    polymer derived from a heterocyclic N-vinyl monomer, e.g., N-vinyl lactam,
    etc.


CLS 523/109
TXT Dental or body impression taking material:

    Subject matter under subclass 105 wherein said composition is useful to
    take impressions of the mouth or other body member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    249,    Static Molds, appropriate subclasses for a static implement having
    structure intended for shaping fluent material only, wherein the structure
    is so arranged as to define a space or cavity for retaining the fluent
    material and wherein the fluent material initially having no definite form
    conforms to the shape of the space or cavity.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses for molding, casting, and plastic-shaping processes
    in general.

    433,    Dentistry, subclass 214 for a structurally defined material useful
    in making an impression of part of the dental cavity.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses for
    compositions containing a synthetic resin used in preparing molds and
    models from which impressions can be made and not intended for contact with
    the wearer of the device.


CLS 523/111
TXT Composition for use in tape adhesives, binder or impregnate for a body
    fluid absorbent device:

    Subject matter under subclass 105 wherein said composition is to be used as
    a tape adhesive, binder, or impregnate for a body fluid adsorbent device,
    e.g., a surgical adhesive tape, etc.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes a composition used in a tampon or
    other sanitary device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, appropriate subclasses for bandages or body applicators
    which contain a medicine and are claimed in terms of more structure than a
    randomly distributed single layer on a base material or randomly
    impregnated base material.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses, e.g., subclasses 447+ for bandages or body applicators which
    contain a specific or nominally recited ingredient which is either randomly
    distributed in a single layer on a base material or randomly impregnated in
    a base material; subclass 77 for an adhesive trapping composition; and
    subclass 78.06 for a composition containing a solid synthetic organic
    polymer, with or without a designated organic active ingredient, used to
    form a barrier layer or film on living animals to ward off harmful or
    disturbing agents, e.g., radiation, animals, insects, etc

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a singly or plural layer web or
    sheet; and especially subclasses 185+, 190, 193, and 196+ for such a
    product embodying a component of mechanically interengaged (e.g., woven,
    knitted) strands.

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 181+ and 304+ for a woven or knit fabric.

    514,    Drug Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, for compositions
    containing an active ingredient used to treat burns, open wounds, or
    lesions with or without a solid synthetic organic bio-inactive polymer.


CLS 523/112
TXT Nonthrombogenic:

    Subject matter under subclass 105 wherein said composition has the effect
    of preventing the clotting of blood.

    (1)     Note.  Compositions which can be used to prepare articles in
    association with whole blood, for example, storage bottles, blood pouches,
    tubes, probes, cannulas, catheters, etc., and which are disclosed as having
    antithrombogenic utility are included herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, in particular, subclasses 363+ for
    containers for blood having significant claimed structural features.


CLS 523/113
TXT Composition suitable for use as tissue or body member replacement,
    restorative, or implant:

    Subject matter under subclass 105 wherein said composition, which is
    fixated or situated in or on the body, is suitable for use as a tissue or
    body member replacement, restorative, or implant.

    (1)     Note.  Compositions for prosthetic devices are examples of the
    compositions which would be included herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    433,    Dentistry, appropriate subclasses, methods, apparatus, implements,
    and devices directed to dental replacements, restoratives, or implants.

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, appropriate subclasses for artificial parts for a
    human body adapted to replace or supplement missing or defective body parts.


CLS 523/114
TXT Composition which anchors by ingrowth of surrounding tissue:

    Subject matter under subclass 113 wherein said composition assists in the
    process of anchoring the restorative, replacement, or implant in the bone
    or other body tissue with the resulting intergrowth or invasion occurring
    at the corresponding contact surfaces under in vivo conditions.


CLS 523/115
TXT Composition suitable for use as tooth or bone replacement, restorative, or
    implant:

    Subject matter under subclass 113 wherein said composition is used
    specifically in a tooth or bone replacement, restorative, or implant.

    (1)     Note.  Denture and artificial teeth compositions are included
    herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 171, 199.1, 200.1, 201.1, and 202.1+ for
    methods, apparatus, implements, and devices relating to the treatment of
    teeth or gums or the replacement of teeth, including those relating to
    denture, denture base, and artificial teeth compositions (See Note I, C in
    the main definition Class 433 for the general line).


CLS 523/116
TXT Cement or filling composition:

    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein said composition is used either
    as a cement or a filling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclass 35 for dental fillings
    or cement compositions which do not contain a synthetic resin.

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 180-183 and 228.1 for methods of applying
    cement or filler compositions to the teeth.


CLS 523/117
TXT Radio- or X-ray opaque:
    Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein said composition exhibits a high
    absorptivity for X-rays or radio rays.


CLS 523/118
TXT Sealant or adhesive:
    Subject matter under subclass 113 wherein said composition is to be used as
    a sealant or adhesive.

    (1)     Note.  Tissue sealants, which seal one tissue to another, are
    included herein.


CLS 523/120
TXT Denture plate repair, adhesive, cushion, or modification composition (e.g.,
    modification of denture base to improve fit, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 105 wherein said composition is used as a
    denture plate adhesive, denture plate liner, denture plate cushion, or to
    repair or modify denture plates.

    (1)     Note.  A composition which is used to provide supplemental denture
    material to fill in the spaces between the high points of the jaw ridge is
    classified herein.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein are denture plate liners used to repair or
    modify denture plates, and see subclass 120 below for a denture plate
    liner, per se.

    (3)     Note.  Denture plate adhesives are generally used to secure
    dentures within the mouth.  Denture plate liners are generally used to
    decrease irritation of the gums.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 167-170 and 180-183 for methods, apparatus,
    implements, and devices directed to denture plate adhesives, liners, or
    cushions (See Note I, C in the main definition of Class 433 for the general
    line).


CLS 523/121
TXT Aperture affecting composition, e.g, earplug, dilator, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 105 wherein said composition is used to
    affect a body aperture.

    (1)     Note.  Compositions used to fabricate an earplug which is to be
    inserted into the ear to seal the auditory canal of the ear are classified
    herein.


CLS 523/122
TXT Composition having ingredient providing biocidal or biostatic protection
    thereto or process of preparing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a composition containing a
    synthetic resin and an ingredient which prevents the commencement of
    biocidal deterioration from fungi, bacteria, or other organism of the resin
    is claimed or solely disclosed or to processes of preparation thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 1 for an explanation of patent placement
    referring to "claimed or solely disclosed".

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, a composition
    containing a polyurethane rubber and an ingredient which prevents the
    attack of a fungus on the rubber.

    (3)     Note.  A composition which is not claimed or solely disclosed as a
    coating, fiber, or film-forming composition having an ingredient which
    provides biocidal protection is placed in Classes 523 and 524 as
    appropriate hereinbelow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    71,     Chemistry:  Fertilizers, appropriate subclasses for fertilizers.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 15.05+ for a
    nonsynthetic resinous composition containing an agent or material
    specifically designed to render the coating or plastic composition
    resistant to the effects of an unwarranted organism.

    252,    Compositions, appropriate subclasses for a biocide-containing
    composition which has a mere cleaning function.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses for a pest-repelling composition, per se, and for certain coated
    substrates wherein the substrate functions as an applicator or carrier for
    the composition and wherein the general intent is to provide a pesticidal
    or pest-repelling effect rather than a means to protect the carrier or
    substrate.

    504,    Plant Protecting and Regulating Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses for compositions relating to the treatment of plants for the
    purpose of defoliating or retarding growth, especially subclasses 101+ for
    a composition claimed as fertilizer in combination with a biocide or
    fungicide.


CLS 523/123
TXT Plant receptacle composition or process of preparing:
    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a composition having utility as a
    plant receptacle composition is claimed or soley disclosed or to processes
    of preparation thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 1 for an explanation of patent placement
    referring to "claimed or solely disclosed".

    (2)     Note.  A plant receptacle is a pot, box, or other container adapted
    to hold earth or soil in which a plant or crop is grown.

    (3)     Note.  A composition which is not solely disclosed as useful, in
    preparing a plant receptacle, is placed in Classes 523 and 524 as
    appropriate hereinbelow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclasses 66+ for an apparatus or process
    directed to a pot, box, or other container adapted to hold earth or soil in
    which a plant is grown.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses for processes having significant molding steps.


CLS 523/124
TXT Composition containing an additive which enhances degradation by
    environmental stimuli or process of preparing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a composition is claimed or soley
    disclosed as having enhanced degradability by exposure to environmental
    stimuli or to processes of preparation thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Environmental stimuli includes but are not limited to
    sunlight, heat, oxygen, moisture, radiation, organisms, etc.

    (2)     Note.  See subclass 1 for an explanation of patent placement
    referring to "solely disclosed or claimed".

    (3)     Note.  A composition which is pretreated by another chemical
    species in order to commence the degradation process is included herein.

    (4)     Note.  Included herein are degradable agricultural mulches devoid
    of fertilizer content, as well as compositions which contain a material
    which generates oxygen by which an organic polymer composition is broken
    into smaller fragments, so that the smaller fragments can then be degraded
    by microorganisms or other environmental stimuli.

    (5)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass, the solid polymer need not be
    the material having enhanced degradability.

    (6)     Note.  A composition which contains a material which generates
    oxygen, by which an organic polymer composition is broken into smaller
    fragments; or a composition which is not solely disclosed to be degradable
    by environmental stimuli, is placed in Classes 523 and 524 as appropriate
    hereinbelow.


CLS 523/125
TXT By light, heat, or radiation:

    Subject matter under subclass 124 wherein said composition is degraded or
    wherein the degradability of the composition is enhanced by the presence of
    light, heat, or radiation.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes compositions degraded by solar or
    ionizing radiation or electromagnetic wave exposure.


CLS 523/126
TXT Containing organic salt of a transition metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 125 wherein said composition contains an
    organic salt of a metal of atomic number 21-30, 39-47, 57-79, or 89 or
    higher.

    (1)     Note.  The organic salt may either be a reactant or a nonreactant
    material.


CLS 523/127
TXT Containing organohalogenated additive:

    Subject matter under subclass 125 wherein said composition contains a
    halogen-containing organic additive.

    (1)     Note.  The halogen organic component may either be a reactant or a
    nonreactant material.


CLS 523/128
TXT Containing carbohydrate or cellular material derived from plant or animal:

    Subject matter under subclass 124 wherein said composition is degraded by
    or in the presence of a carbohydrate or a cellular material derived form a
    plant or animal source, e.g., tree bark, fibers, etc.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "carbohydrate".

    (2)     Note.  See Class 524, subclass 9 for a definition of the term
    "cellular material".


CLS 523/129
TXT Composition containing nonresinous organic material derived from municipal
    solid waste disposal system or process of preparing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a composition is claimed or soley
    disclosed as containing municipal solid waste products or processes of
    preparation thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Municipal waste for purposes of this subclass is the solid
    waste product resulting from towns, cities, or other habitable areas, and
    is not intended to including waste products from mills, factories, etc.

    (2)     Note.  See subclass 1 for an explanation of patent placement
    referring to "claimed or solely disclosed".

    (3)     Note.  A composition wherein a nonreactant material, obtained from
    a scrap or waste product, is mixed with a synthetic resin, is classified
    herein.

    (4)     Note.  A composition wherein the nonreactant material is the
    residue of a pyrolysis or incineration process is included herein.

    (5)     Note.  A composition which is not solely disclosed as involving a
    municipal solid waste product is placed in classes 523 and 524 as
    appropriate hereinbelow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    521,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 40+ for a process
    of treating a scrap or waste product to recover a synthetic resin therefrom.

    524,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 34 for a composition
    wherein the nonreactant material is obtained from paper plant waste
    material.


CLS 523/130
TXT Composition for plugging pores in wells or other subterranean formations;
    consolidating formations in wells or cementing a well or process of
    preparing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a composition having utility in
    sealing fissures or crevices in stone, rock, or other subterranean
    formations, or in consolidating a formation in a well, or in cementing a
    well is claimed or solely disclosed or to processes of preparation thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 1 for an explanation of patent placement
    referring to "claimed or solely disclosed".

    (2)     Note.  Compositions used to produce a bond between the casing and
    the well wall are considered as well cements and are therefore classified
    herein.

    (3)     Note.  A composition which is not solely disclosed as a composition
    for plugging pores in wells or other substerranean formations, or for
    consolidating formations in wells, or cementing a well, is placed as
    appropriate in classes 523 and 524 hereinbelow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    166,    Wells, subclasses 244.1+ for processes with significantly claimed
    steps of well treating or operating which involves more than the mere use
    of such compositions; or subclasses 285+ for methods of cementing,
    plugging, or consolidating the earth around a well bore.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 65+ for processes of
    utilizing liquid, plastic, or fluent compositions to penetrate the earth's
    surface.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 263+ for a method of
    applying a composition directly to an earth formation to fill a
    subterranean cavity within the formation.

    507,    Earth Boring, Well Treating, and Oil Field Chemistry, subclasses
    100+ for liquid, plastic, or fluent compositions specialized and designed
    for use in earth boring or well fracturing, e.g., well drilling mud, etc.,
    and subclasses 200+ for earth or well treating compositions which are other
    than those used for plugging the pores of the well, for consolidating a
    formation in a well, or for cementing a well.


CLS 523/131
TXT Composition for treating unconsolidated or loose strata, e.g., sand
    consolidation, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein the composition is used to treat
    unconsolidated, incompetent, or loose strata, such as sand in a well.


CLS 523/132
TXT Composition for in situ soil conditioning or treating or process of
    preparing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a composition has utility in situ
    as a soil conditioner or stabilizer.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are compositions such as those designed to
    penetrate, compact, or cement soil, or to alter the soil to a state of fine
    aggregates which thereby permits passage of air or water, or to perfect the
    substrate to be capable of growth of living matter. To be proper herein, a
    composition must be claimed or solely disclosed as having a utility
    necessary for this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  See subclass 1 for an explanation of patent placement
    referring to "claimed or solely disclosed".

    (3)     Note.  The term "soil" is used in a general sense to refer to the
    various sands, clays, silts, or loams in the various parts of the earth.

    (4)     Note.  Agricultural mulch compositions devoid of fertilizer are
    classified herein.

    (5)     Note.  A composition which is not solely disclosed as a soil
    conditioning or stabilizing composition is places as appropriate in Classes
    523 and 524 hereinbelow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124+,   for degradable argicultural mulch devoid of fertilizer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    299,    Mining or In Situ Disintegration of Hard Material, appropriate
    subclasses for a process or apparatus for recovering valuable material from
    the earth or disintegrating hard material in situ.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    treating or otherwise working with the earth when limited to the making,
    installing, repairing or maintaining of a highway, pathway, or walking
    structure; especially note subclasses 76+ which relate to processes of
    conglomerating or combining minute surface particles or earth components
    into larger aggregate units or into relatively firm masses in said
    construction.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, appropriate subclasses for methods
    of utilizing soil stabilizing or conditioning compositions in the earth's
    formation.


CLS 523/134
TXT Battery container or battery container cover composition or process of
    preparing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a compsotion having utility as a
    battery container or battery container cover composition is claimed or
    solely disclosed or to processes of preparation thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 1 for an explanation of patent placement
    referring to "claimed or solely disclosed".

    (2)     Note.  A composition which is not solely disclosed as a battery
    container or battery container cover composition is placed as appropriate
    in Classes 523 and 524 hereinbelow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, appropriate subclasses for a battery
    container or battery container cover having more than a mere "nominal"
    inclusion of structure; especially note subclasses 524.1+ for acid proof
    receptacles; subclass 333 for a battery package; and subclasses 328+ for an
    electrical article.

    429,    Chemistry: Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process, appropriate subclasses for a special receptacle having battery
    structure.


CLS 523/135
TXT Solar energy absorption or solar reflection composition or process of
    preparing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a composition having utility as a
    solar energy reflector or absorber is claimed or solely disclosed or to
    processes of preparation thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 1 for an explanation of patent placement
    referring to "claimed or solely disclosed.

    (2)     Note.  A composition utilized to minimize heat buildup in the
    interior of objects exposed to sunlight, by reflecting the solar heat,
    would be classified herein.

    (3)     Note.  A composition which is not solely disclosed as a solar
    energy reflector or absorber is placed as appropriate in Class 523 and 524
    hereinbelow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, subclass 93 for
    processes or apparatus for separating liquids from solids or contacting
    solids with gases or vapor by treating with solar energy.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 235.1 for processes or apparatus utilizing
    solar energy to remove heat from a substance.


CLS 523/136
TXT Composition sensitive to or resistant to radioactive material or cathode
    rays (e.g., electron bombardment, etc.) or process of preparing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a composition which is resistant
    to, yet does not absorb radioactive materials or cathode rays is claimed or
    solely disclosed or to processes of preparation thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 1 for an explanation of patent placement
    referring to "claimed or solely disclosed".

    (2)     Note.  A composition which is not solely disclosed as being
    resistant to radioactive materials or cathode rays is placed as appropriate
    in Classes 523 and 524 hereinbelow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 515.1 for methods of using and apparatus
    for X-ray shields which absorb energy propagated in the form of
    electromagnetic waves or traveling subatomic, atomic, or molecular
    particles.

    252,    Compositions, for special use compositions of that class containing
    a synthetic resin and see in particular subclasses 582-589 for compositions
    specialized for use as optical filters including those which filter ray
    energy outside the visible spectrum, such as ultraviolet, infrared, or
    X-rays; subclasses 301.16+, especially subclass 301.35 for optical
    brighteners or organic luminescent compositions containing a synthetic
    resin; subclass 478 for shielding compositions which may contain a
    synthetic resin designed to prevent the passage of X-ray radiation and
    alpha, beta, or gamma rays and other energy sources which are released in
    nuclear transformation; and subclasses 600+ for compositions which do not
    contain a synthetic resin but are responsive to radiation.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 4+
    for a X-ray contrast composition; and subclasses 59+ for a sun or radiation
    screening composition to be applied to a living body, such as sun lotion.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 160 for coating processes wherein the
    coating has X-ray properties.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, appropriate subclasses, and see in particular subclasses 269+ and
    495.1+ for compositions which are affected by radiation to form an image
    and for processes of making images from compositions affected by radiation,
    and the resultant products thereof.


CLS 523/137
TXT Electromagnetic wave absorbing composition or process of preparing
    (excludes visible IR or UV portions of spectrum):

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a composition which absorbs
    electromagnetic waves (excluding the visible, IR or UV portions, of the
    electromagnetic spectrum) is claimed or solely disclosed or to processes of
    preparation thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 1 for an explanation of patent placement
    referring to "claimed or solely disclosed".

    (2)     Note.  A composition which absorbs electromagnetic waves which is
    not solely disclosed is placed as appropriate in Classes 523 and 524
    hereinbelow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 515.1 for methods of using and apparatus
    for X-ray shields which absorb energy propagated in the form of
    electromagnetic waves of traveling subatomic, atomic, or molecular
    particles.

    252,    Compositions, for special use compositions of that class containing
    a synthetic resin and see in particular subclasses 582-589 for compositions
    specialized for use as optical filters including those which filter ray
    energy outside the visible spectrum, such as ultraviolet, infrared, or
    X-rays; subclasses 301.16+, epsecially subclass 301.35 for optical
    brightners or organic luminescent compositions containing a synthetic
    resin; subclass 478 for shielding compositions which may contain a
    synthetic resin designed to prevent the passage of X-ray radiation and
    alpha, beta, and gamma rays and other energy energy sources which are
    released in nuclear transformations; and subclasses 600+ for compositions
    which do not contain a synthetic resin but are responsive to radiation.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 4+
    for a X-Ray contrast composition; and subclasses 59+ for a sun or radiation
    screening composition to be applied to a living body, such as sun lotion.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 160 for coating process wherein the
    coating has X-ray properties.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemisty: Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, appropriate subclasses, and see in particular subclasses 269+ and
    495.1+ for compositions which are affected by radiation to form an image
    and for processes of making images from compositions affected by radiation,
    and the resultant products thereof.


CLS 523/138
TXT Composition for contact with hot propulsion or exhaust gas or process of
    preparing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a composition which is to be in
    contact with either a hot propulsion gas or exhaust has is claimed or
    solely disclosed or to processes of preparation thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 1 for an explanation of patent placement
    referring to "claimed or solely disclosed".

    (2)     Note.  Included herein are compositions which line the combustion
    chamber of a rocket motor or the exhaust system of an autombile or space
    vehicle.

    (3)     Note.  Ablative compositions which are to be in contact with hot
    propulsion or exhaust gases are included herein.

    (4)     Note.  A compositions which is to be in contact with hot propulsion
    or exhaust gases which is not solely disclosed is placed as appropriate in
    Classes 523 and 524 hereinbelow.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    179,    for an ablative composition not designed to be in contact with hot
    propulsion or exhaust gases.


CLS 523/139
TXT Composition related to metal foundry molding or metallurgical furnace or
    process or preparing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a composition having utility in the
    casting or metals or in metallurgical furnaces is claimed or solely
    disclosed or to processes of preparation thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 1 for an explantion of patent placement
    referring to "claimed or solely disclosed".

    (2)     Note.  Compositions drawn to separate components of a foundry
    system such as resin coated sands, binders, or powdered facing agents, as
    well as the composite foundry system, are classified herein.

    (3)     Note.  Compositions relating to foundry molding with no reference
    to glass or metal are assumed to be metal foundry molding compositions are
    thus classified herein.

    (4)     Note.  A composition solely disclosed as not having utility in the
    casting of metals or in metallurgical furnaces is placed as appropriate in
    Classes 523 and 524 hereinbelow.


CLS 523/140
TXT Hot-top or taphole plug composition or process of preparing:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein the composition is used as or in
    hot-tops of ingot molds or for plugging tapholes of black furnaces.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139     or 142+, for compositions relating to tundishes with no reference
    to hot-tops.


CLS 523/141
TXT Composition for metallurgical furnace or oven or process of preparing:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein the composition is for a
    metallurgical furnace or oven apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclass 301.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 500+ for compositions for lining electric
    furnaces or for linings recited only in terms of their composition when the
    composition, in addition, has the property of being electrically conductive.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 30 for processes of furnace lining formation or repair.


CLS 523/142
TXT Organic polyisocyanate or derived from polyisocyanate:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein the composition contains or
    reacts with a compound containing two or more N=C=X groups (wherein X is a
    chalcogen, i.e., O, S, Se, or Te) or wherein a solid polymer has been
    derived from a reactant containing two or more N=C=X groups (wherein X is a
    chalcogen, i.e., O, S, Se, or Te).

    (1)     Note.  Polyurethanes absent a disclosure to the contrary are
    presumed to be prepared from polyisocyanates and as such are properly
    classifiable herein.


CLS 523/143
TXT Phenolic, amine or ketone condensate with aldehyde:

    Subject matter under subclass 142 wherein the composition contains or
    reacts with a phenol-aldehyde, aldehyde-ketone, or amine-aldehyde
    condensate.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are condensation products formed from
    aldehydes or aldehyde derivatives.  See the Glossary for a definition of
    the term "aldehyde or aldehyde derivative".


CLS 523/144
TXT Furan-type material:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein the composition contains or
    reacts with a resin or monomer derived from a furan-type material.

    (1)     Note.  Furan-type material is limited to furan or to derivatives
    containing a five-membered hetero ring having four carbon atoms and one
    oxygen atom and also having two double bonds within the hetero ring, e.g.,
    furan, furfuryl alcohol, etc.


CLS 523/145
TXT Phenolic or amine or ketone condensate with aldehyde:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein the composition contains or
    reacts with a phenol-aldehyde, aldehyde-ketone, or amine-aldehyde,
    condensate.


CLS 523/146
TXT With or derived from carboxlic acid or salt thereof or organic sulfur
    material:

    Subject matter under subclass 145 wherein the composition contains or
    reacts with a carboxylic acid, carboxylic acid salt, or organic sulfur
    material.

    (1)     Note.  A composition using benzenesulfonic acid as curing catalyst
    would be classified herein.

    (2)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "carboxylic
    acid or carboxylic acid salt".


CLS 523/147
TXT With or derived from organic hydroxy group containing material containing
    eight or more carbon atoms:

    Subject matter under subclass 145 wherein the composition contains or
    reacts with an organic hydroxyl group containing material having more than
    seven carbon atoms.

    (1)     Note.  A composition for foundry molds wherein the resin binder is
    the reaction product or phenol, formaldehyde, and sucrose would be
    classified herein.


CLS 523/148
TXT Polyester bases:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein the composition contains a solid
    polymer derived from at least one polyol and at least one polycarboxylic
    acid.


CLS 523/149
TXT Friction element composition process of preparing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a composition having utility as a
    friction element is claimed or solely disclosed or ton processes of
    preparation thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 1 for an explanation of patent placement
    referring to "claimed or solely disclosed".

    (2)     Note.  Any composition used to enhance friction is condsidered to
    be a friction element for this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  A composition which is not solely disclosed as a friction
    element composition is placed as appropriate in Classes 523 and 524
    hereinbelow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    51,     Abrasive Tool Making Process, Material, or Composition, for an
    abrasive material or composition.

    508,    Solid Antifriction Devices, Materials Therefor, Lubricant or
    Separant Compositions for Moving Solid Surfaces, and Miscellaneous Mineral
    Oil Compositions, subclasses 110+ for liquid, plastic, or fluent
    compositions specialized and designed for use between two moving surfaces
    for reducing friction therebetween or for preventing the surfaces from
    contacting each other.

    451,    Abrading, for apparatus and processes of abrading.


CLS 523/150
TXT Nonskid or nonslip composition for vehicle or pedestrian movement:

    Subject matter under subclass 149 wherein the composition imparts
    nonskidding or nonslipping properties to surfaces used in pedestrian or
    vehicular movement.

    (1)     Note.  Compositions to be applied to a fisherman's boat, to the
    bottom of a shoe, a wood deck, or a concrete floor in order to provide a
    nonslip or nonskid surface are examples of compositions for this subclass
    as well as are treaded surfaces or walks.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclasses 19+ for pavement
    structure relating to characteristics which tend to reduce skidding or
    render the traffic surface nonslippery.

    474,    Endless Belt Power Transmission Systems or Components, subclasses
    190+ for pulleys including a composition on the rim to increase the
    traction on the belt.


CLS 523/152
TXT For wheeled vehicle:

    Subject matter under subclass 149 wherein the composition is used as a
    friction element for autombiles, trains, trailers, roller skates
    skateboards, or other wheeled vehicles.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 149 for an explanation of "friction element".

    (2)     Note.  Asbestos is a group of impure magnesium silicate minerals
    which occur in fibrous form.  Included with the term asbestos are
    amianthus, earth flax, mountain cork stone flax, fibrous actinolite,
    amphibole, chrysotile.

    (3)     Note.  Serpentine asbestos is the mineral chrysotile.

    (4)     Note.  Amphibole asbestos includes the minerals, tremolite,
    actinolite, amosite, crocidolite, and anthopyllite.

    (5)     Note.  For placement of patents in subclasses 152 through 159 only,
    the classification should be based upon the specification along with the
    claims. Thus, the specification and the claims should be read to determine
    if asbestos or an organic or inorganic material is present or absent.  A
    patent which does not claim asbestos but wherein the disclosure is limited
    to asbestos would be originally classified into an asbestos containing
    subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, appropriate subclasses, particularly
    subclasses 208+ for antiskid tires.

    188,    Brakes, subclasses 250+ for a brake element having significant
    brake structure and which brake element may include as an element a lining
    or facing of traction or friction compostion.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 107 for clutches having
    significant clutch structure which clutches may include as an element a
    lining or facing of a traction or friction composition.


CLS 523/153
TXT Containing fibrous or polycrystalline refractory oxide:

    Subject matter under subclass 152 wherein the composition contains a
    refractory oride, either fibrous or polycrystalline in nature.

    (1)     Note.  Single metal or double metal oxides or mixtures thereof of
    thoria, urania, yitria, titania, chromia, magnesia, calcia, alumina,
    zirconia, and of the alkaline earth or rare earth oxides are examples of
    refractory oxides for this subclass.  Only those oxides however in fibrous
    or polycrystalline form are included herein.

    (2)     Note.  See (2) Note under subclass 152 for placement of patents
    containing asbestos.


CLS 523/155
TXT Composition devoid of asbestos:

    Subject matter under subclass 152 wherein the composition does not contain
    asbestos.

    (1)     Note.  See (2) Note under subclass 152 for placement of patents
    concerning asbestos.


CLS 523/156
TXT Containing at least two organic materials, e.g., binder plus other organic
    material, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 wherein the composition contains at least
    two organic materials.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is an asbestos-free compostion containing
    two organic binders.

    (2)     Note.  The organic material may be in monomeric or polymeric form
    and may be either liquid, solid, or gas.


CLS 523/157
TXT Containing at least two organic materials, e.g., binder plus other organic
    material etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 152 wherein the composition contains at least
    two organic materials.

    (1)     Note.  See notes under subclass 152 for placement of patents
    concerning asbestos.

    (2)     Note.  The organic material may be either solid, liquid, or gas and
    may be in monomeric or polymeric form.

    (3)     Note.  An example of a composition for this subclass would be two
    solid polymers plus asbestos or a friction element or a solid polymer,
    organic binder, and asbestos.


CLS 523/158
TXT Composition contains a phenolic, amine, or ketone condensate with aldehyde
    plus a polymer derived from ethylenic monomers only:

    Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the composition contains a
    phenol-aldehyde, amine-aldehyde, or ketone-aldehyde, condensate and a solid
    polymer derived solely from ethylenic monomers.

    (1)     Note.  See (2) Note under subclass 152 for placements of patents
    concerning asbestos.


CLS 523/159
TXT Containing asbestos and at least one inorganic material:

    Subject matter under subclass 152 wherein the composition contains asbestos
    and at least one other inorganic nonreactive material.

    (1)     Note.  See (2) Note under subclass 152 for placement of patents
    concerning asbestos.


CLS 523/160
TXT Printing ink composition for glass or ceramic substrate or process of
    preparing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a composition having utility as an
    ink for either a glass or ceramic substrate is claimed or solely disclosed
    or to processes of preparation thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 1 for an explanation of patent placement
    referring to "claimed or solely disclosed".

    (2)     Note.  An ink composition which is not solely disclosed to be used
    on a glass or ceramic substrate is placed as appropriate in Classes 523 and
    524 hereinbelow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 20+ for ink
    compositions not containing synthetic resins for either glass or ceramic
    substrates.


CLS 523/161
TXT Invisible, ballpoint, or typewriter ink compositions or process of
    preparing; or composition for correction ribbons or correction fluids or
    process of preparing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a composition having utility as an
    invisible ink, ballpoint ink, typewriter ink, or a composition having,
    utility as a correction ribbon or correction fluid is claimed or solely
    disclosed, or to processes of preparation thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 1 for an explanation of patent placement
    referring to "claimed or solely disclosed".

    (2)     Note.  A invisible ink is a material to be used on a surface and
    which requires an activating means so as to become visible.

    (3)     Note.  A composition for a correction ribbon or correction fluid is
    used to rectify mistakes on printed matter or duplicated matter.

    (4)     Note.  An ink composition which is not solely disclosed as being of
    an invisible nature or for ballpoint or typewriter use or a composition
    which is not solely disclosed for use in a correction ribbon or correction
    fluid is placed as appropriate in Classes 523 and 524 hereinbelow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 20+ for a ballpoint
    or typographic ink composition not containing a synthetic resin; and
    subclass 21 for an ink composition not containing a synthetic resin and
    which produces invisible characters when used, but which becomes visible
    when subjected to the action of heat, light, or other subsequent treatment.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 301.16+ for inks containing a fluorescent
    or phosphorescent material which become visible when subjected to
    excitation, e.g., ultraviolet light, etc.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 209+ for the
    combination of a ball-point pen and ink particularly suitable for such an
    implement (e.g., viscous ink).


CLS 523/164
TXT Lead pencil or marking crayon composition or process of preparing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a composition having utility as the
    writing material in a lead pencil or crayon composition is claimed or
    solely disclosed or to processes of preparation thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 1 for an explanation of patent placement
    referring to "claimed or solely disclosed".

    (2)     Note.  A composition which is not solely disclosed as useful as the
    marking material in a lead pencil or crayon is placed as appropriate in
    Classes 523 and 524 hereinbelow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 19+ for a lead pencil
    or crayon composition not containing a synthetic resin.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 49+ for pencils
    wherein significant structure of the pencil is claimed.


CLS 523/166
TXT Composition for puncture proof tire liner or in emergency tire repair
    (e.g., tire inflation, etc.) or process of preparing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a composition having utility as
    either a puncture sealant for a pneumatic tire or a composition used in the
    emergency repair of vehicular tires is claimed or solely disclosed or to
    processes of preparation thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 1 for an explanation of patent placement
    referring to "claimed or solely disclosed".

    (2)     Note.  Included herein are inflating compositions.

    (3)     Note.  A composition which is not solely disclosed for a puncture
    proof liner or for use in emergency tire repair is placed as appropriate in
    Classes 523 and 524 hereinbelow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclass 33 for leak stopping
    coating or plastic compositions not containing a synthetic resin.

    152,    Resilient Tires and Wheels, appropriate subclasses for puncture
    proof tire liner compositions in combination with the pneumatic tire, per
    se; not especially subclasses 502+ for self-healing materials provided for
    in the tire body or within the cavity of the tire; subclasses 367+ for
    devices for application to a tire surface for covering a puncture or
    blowout; and subclasses 415+ for devices combined with vehicle or wheel
    structure for inflating pneumatic tires.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    94+ for processes directed to restoring a damaged or defective article or
    material by a laminating procedure; and in particular subclasses 95+ for
    repairing a toroidally shaped article.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 36 for processes of molding, casting, or plastic shaping a
    nonmetallic material in which a worn, damaged, or used article is restored
    or repaired for reuse in a similar capacity without altering or destroying
    the overall configuration of the article.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 11+ for tire-repairing apparatus; subclasses 17+ for
    tire-recapping, rebeading or sidewall-replacing means; and subclasses 28.1+
    for tire or tire tube reshaping, resizing, or vulcanizing performs.


CLS 523/167
TXT Composition utilized in the manufacturing or repairing of shoes (excluding
    shoe heels or soles or polish) or process of preparing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a composition having utility in the
    manufacturing or repairing of shoes is claimed or solely disclosed or to
    processes or preparation thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 1 for an explanation of patent placement
    referring to "claimed or solely disclosed".

    (2)     Note.  Shoe sole or heel compositions as well polishes are excluded
    from this subclass; however, compositions used to cover a heel or sole and
    bases for heels are included herein.

    (3)     Note.  A composition which is not solely disclosed as useful in the
    manufacturing or repairing of shoes is placed as appropriate in Classes 523
    and 524 hereinbelow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    12,     Boot and Shoe Making, appropriate subclasses for a process of
    manufacturing or repairing a foot covering and apparatus used in said
    manufacturing or repairing.

    36,     Boot, Shoes, and Leggings, appropriate subclasses for shoes and
    shoe elements such as soles, heels, or insoles.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 3+ for shoe polishes
    (not containing a synthetic resin); and subclass 38 for a coating or
    plastic composition specifically designed for a filling in the bottom of
    shoes or soles.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for processes and apparatus for forming laminated
    articles including shoe parts of elements.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 244 for a process of uniting a shoe part to an upper.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    appropriate subclasses for a means to mold a shoe heel or sole, per se, as
    a composite, into a disclosed diverse shoe part.

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclasses for a process of coating
    in general, including coating leather.


CLS 523/168
TXT Optical glass cementing or slide mounting composition or process of
    preparing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a composition having utility as a
    cement either for cementing optical glass or for mounting specimens on
    glass slides is claimed or solely disclosed or to processes of preparation
    thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 1 for an explanation of patent placement
    referring to "claimed or solely disclosed".

    (2)     Note.  Cement compositions for mounting material for histological,
    pathological, or bacteriological specimens onto glass slides is classified
    herein.

    (3)     Note.  A composition used as a cement either for cementing optical
    glass or for mounting specimens of glass slides and which is not solely
    disclosed for those purposes and for compositions to secure labels onto
    glass is placed as appropriate in Classes 523 and 524 hereinbelow.


CLS 523/169
TXT Antifogging or water repellent composition for optical or windshield
    application or process of preparing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a composition having utility to
    preserve visibility though a windshield or other optical device either by
    preventing the buildup of fog or rendering the surface hydrophobic thereby
    causing the surface to repel water is claimed or solely disclosed or to
    processes of preparation thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 1 for an explanation of patent placement
    referring to "claimed or solely disclosed".

    (2)     Note.  An antifogging or water repellent composition and which is
    not solely disclosed for those purposes is placed as appropriate in Classes
    523 and 524 hereinbelow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclass 13 for a coating or
    plastic composition not containing a synthetic resin specialized in
    preventing the formation of fog, frost, or ice on a surface of a window.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 70 for a frost-preventing, ice-thawing,
    thermostatic, thermophoric, or cryogenic composition.


CLS 523/170
TXT Glass enamel composition or process of preparing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a composition having utility either
    as an enamel composition for a glass substrate or as a medium or binder in
    the production of glass enamel is claimed or solely disclosed or to
    processes of preparation thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 1 for an explanation of patent placement
    referring to "claimed or soley disclosed".

    (2)     Note.  An enamel for purposes of this subclass is a vitrifiable or
    glaze forming composition.

    (3)     Note.  A glass enamel composition and which is not solely disclosed
    for that purpose is placed as appropriate in Classes 523 and 524
    hereinbelow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclass 312 for a material or
    ingredient specifically designed to produce opacity in glass in the form of
    vitreous enamels or glazes.


CLS 523/171
TXT Composition having opalescent, pearlescent, or variegated color or process
    of preparing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a composition having at least two
    distinct colors or exhibiting opal-like or pearl-like coloration is claimed
    or solely disclosed or to processes of preparation thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 1 for an explanation of patent placement
    referring to "claimed or solely disclosed".

    (2)     Note.  A composition having opalescent, pearlescent, or variegated
    color and which is not solely disclosed as having those properties is
    placed as appropriate in Classes 523 and 524 hereinbelow.


CLS 523/172
TXT Pavement or sign marking or reflex reflecting composition or process of
    preparing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a composition utilized either as an
    applied marking for pavements, e.g., roads, streets, highways, aircraft
    landing strips, etc., or for signs, e.g., for defining traffic lanes,
    pedestrian crosswalks, traffic instruction, etc., or as an applied
    reflex-reflector is claimed or solely disclosed or to processes of
    preparation thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 1 for an explanation of patent placement
    referring to "claimed or solely disclosed".

    (2)     Note.  A reflex-reflector composition is defined to be either a
    composition applied to a reflective surface to return light back toward its
    source in a brilliant cone with the axis of the cone essentially common
    with the incident beam of light or a composition to exhibit to a viewer
    both true daytime color and true nighttime color.

    (3)     Note.  A road surface paving composition is not considered to be a
    pavement marking composition and is therefore excluded herein and see in
    particular Class 524, subclasses 59+ for asphalt containing compositions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, appropriate subclasses for signs
    which impart information either permanently affixed to a road or merely
    mounted nearby.

    404,    Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for a
    road component used in the construction, maintenance, or repair of roads
    with significant structural description.


CLS 523/173
TXT Cable filling or flooding composition or process of preparing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a composition having utility as a
    filling or flooding composition for cables (especially, but not restricted
    to, telecommunication cables which are particularly subject to the ingress
    of water) is claimed or solely disclosed or to processes of preparation
    thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 1 for an explanation of patent placement
    referring to "claimed or solely disclosed".

    (2)     Note.  A composition which is not solely disclosed as useful in
    cable filling or flooding is placed as appropriate in Classes 523 and 524
    hereinbelow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    174,    Electricity:  Conductors and Insulators, appropriate subclasses for
    a combination of a structurally claimed conductor either coated or covered
    with a dielectric.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 570+ for a fluid dielectic not containing
    a synthetic resin.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclasses 500+ for a composite plastic cable molding apparatus.


CLS 523/174
TXT Phonograph record molding composition or process of preparing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a composition having utility as a
    phonograph record molding composition or a phonograph record, per se, is
    claimed or solely disclosed or to processes of preparation thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 1 for an explanation of patent placement
    referring to "claimed or solely disclosed".

    (2)     Note.  Included herein are phonograph record compositions, per se,
    without significant structure.

    (3)     Note.  A molding composition which is not solely disclosed as
    useful in preparing a phonograph record is placed as appropriate in classes
    523 and 524 hereinbelow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclass 36 for a process of repairing or restoring articles which have
    utility in making sound producing records; subclasses 106+ for a process of
    molding or shaping an article to produce sound reproducing grooves on its
    surface, and subclasses 239+ for molding operations which produce articles,
    per se, and which have utility in making sound producing records.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 272+ for a
    composition with sufficient claimed structure for records of sound or
    having such records formed in or on them.  The mere presence of "sound
    grooves" but not the structure thereof is not considered significant sound
    record structure.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a disc of the type used in producing a sound record wherein some
    specific structure is recited, e.g., grooves, center hole, or circular
    shape, but does not include sound.


CLS 523/175
TXT Liquid-solid drag reduction composition or process of preparing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a composition having utility
    related to improving drag reduction formations or systems which are
    effective for reducing the dynamic drag of turbulent fluid in contact witha
    surface is claimed or solely disclosed or to processes of preparation
    thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 1 for an explanation of patent placement
    referring to "claimed or solely disclosed".

    (2)     Note.  Drag reduction is defined to be the increase in the
    volumetric flow rate of a fluid at a constant pressure drop due to the
    addition of a solid polymeric material of relatively high molecular weight.
     The mere mention of a "drag reduction" composition is sufficient to place
    a patent in this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  A composition which is not solely disclosed to be useful in
    drag reduction is placed as appropriate in Classes 523 and 524 hereinbelow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 13 for processes of handling fluid
    materials, including gas and liquids, in which the flow of fluent materials
    is facilitated by the addition of material to the fluid for the purposes of
    affecting the flow characteristics of the fluent material.


CLS 523/176
TXT Anaerobic adhesive or thread sealing composition or process of preparing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a composition having utility as an
    anaerobic adhesive or thread sealant is claimed or solely disclosed or to
    processes of preparation thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 1 for an explanation of patent placement
    referring to "claimed or solely disclosed".

    (2)     Note.  An anaerobie adhesive is defined to be an adhesive which
    remains liquid in the presence of air but which polymerizes upon the
    exclusion of air to form a hard, durable resin with adhesive properties.  A
    thread sealant is defined to be composition designed to obtain an adequate
    seal at high pressures for a threaded connection, such as a pipe joint.

    (3)     Note.  A composition which is not solely disclosed as being an
    anaerobic adhesive or thread sealant is placed as appropriate in Classes
    523 and 524 hereinbelow.


CLS 523/177
TXT Coating or adhesive composition for application to a wet or contaminated
    surface (e.g., underwater or oil-contaminated, etc.) or process of
    preparing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a composition intended for
    application to a wet or contaminated surface is claimed or solely disclosed
    or to processes of preparation thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 1 for an explanation of patent placement
    referring to "claimed or solely disclosed".

    (2)     Note.  Paint or repair compositions which are to be applied
    underwater, and coatings and adhesives designed for oil-contaminated
    surfaces are examples of compositions classified in this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  A coating or adhesive composition intended for application
    to a wet or contaminated surface and which is not solely disclosed for that
    purpose is placed as appropriate in Classes 523 and 524 hereinbelow.


CLS 523/179
TXT Intumescent coating or ablative composition or process of preparing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a composition having utility as an
    ablative or an intumescent coating composition is claimed or solely
    disclosed, or to processes of preparation thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 1 for an explanation of patent placement
    referring to "claimed or solely disclosed".

    (2)     Note.  An intumescent coating composition is defined to be a
    composition which contains, in addition to a synthetic resin, an additive
    (such as a phosphate containing or a carbonific or other carbon-yielding
    material) which intumesces (i.e., froths or puffs in such a manner that a
    considerably swollen solid cellular residue is produced, which is
    noncombustible) when heat or fire is applied thereto.

    (3)     Note.  An ablative composition is one which tends to limit
    convective heat transfer from a high temperature source to a lower
    temperature source on a substrate to which the composition has been applied.

    (4)     Note.  This subclass does not provide a for a fire-retardant
    composition which does not state the ability of the composition to
    intumesce or ablate.

    (5)     Note.  A coating composition which is not solely disclosed as being
    ablative or intumescent is placed as appropriate in Classes 523 and 524
    hereinbelow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 15.05+ for a coating
    composition (not containing a synthetic resin) which when applied to a
    surface forms a hard tenacious adherent film and which contains a
    fireproofing or biocidal agent.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 601+ for a composition which is
    specialized and designed for use in treating materials to make them less
    combustible or more resistant to fire.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a stock material product in the form of a single-layered shaped web or
    sheet or a plural-layered web or sheet which is intumescent.


CLS 523/180
TXT Solid propellant binder composition or process of preparing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a composition having utility as a
    binder in a solid propellant composition is claimed or solely disclosed or
    to processes of preparation thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 1 for an explanation of patent placement
    referring to "claimed or solely disclosed".

    (2)     Note.  An aerosol spray composition is not included under the
    definition of this subclass and is therefore excluded herein.

    (3)     Note.  A composition which is not solely disclosed as a binder in a
    solid propellant composition is placed as appropriate in Classes 523 and
    524 hereinbelow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, especially
    subclasses 2+ for an explosive or thermitic composition where a particular
    shape or structure of either an ingredient of the composition, a
    solid-solid suspension, or a compacted or bonded mass of ingredients is
    defined.


CLS 523/181
TXT Composition devoid of magnetic materials and suitable for preparation of
    magnetic tape recording or process of preparing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a composition having utility as a
    magnetic-tape recording composition is claimed or solely disclosed or to
    processes of preparation thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 1 for an explanation of patent placement
    referring to "claimed or solely disclosed".

    (2)     Note.  A "magnetic-tape recording composition" is defined to be a
    composition for magnetic purposes and contains a synthetic resin but does
    not contain a magnetic material (a material which gives the composition the
    property of magnetism is classified in Class 252, subclasses 62.51+).

    (3)     Note.  A composition which is not solely disclosed to be used in
    the preparation of a magnetic tape is placed as appropriate in Classes 523
    and 524 hereinbelow.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    148,    Metal Treatment, subclasses 100+ for a process of altering the
    magnetic property of a material which has at least one free metal or alloy
    component.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 62.51+ for a composition containing a
    synthetic resin and a magnetic material.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 502, 548 and 599 for a process of
    utilizing a magnetic force or field to form a magnetic recording device or
    medium; and subclasses 127+ for a process of wherein the base or the
    coating is disclosed as having magnetic properties.


CLS 523/200
TXT Process of forming a composition of a solid polymer or solid
    polymer-forming system by admixing a product in the form of a surface
    coated, impregnated, encapsulated, or surface modified fiber, sheet,
    particle, or web, with a material; or composition which is the result of
    said admixing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a composition is formed by admixing
    a material with a product, which product is a surface coated fiber, sheet,
    particle, or web; or an impregnated fiber, sheet, particle, or web; or an
    encapsulated or surface modified fiber, sheet, particle, or web; or the
    composition formed by any of the aforementioned mixing operations.

    (1)     Note.  The product itself as recited above may contain a synthetic
    resin or material proper for Class 520, subclass 1, e.g., surface coated
    polymer particle, or the polymer may surface coat another polymer or
    nonpolymeric material.  It is also permissible for this subclass that the
    polymeric material proper for Class 520, subclass 1 be admixed with a
    product which is a surface coated, impregnated, encapsulated, or surface
    modified product as noted above but which product itself is devoid of a
    polymer proper for class 520, subclass 1.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass requires the admixing of a product proper for
    this subclass with a material to form a composition wherein at least one
    ingredient of the composition is nonreactive with a polymer proper for
    Class 520, subclass 1.  The nonreactive material may be the material or the
    product.

    (3)     Note.  Compositions proper for this subclass either (a) must recite
    some process language consistent with an admixing process proper for this
    area, or (b) must be dependent totally or in part on a claim which recites
    a process proper for this area.

    (4)     Note.  This subclass does not require that the product admixed be
    in the same physical or chemical state after the completion of the process
    as when said product was admixed with the material so as to form a
    composition therewith. For instance, the material may be ground up, further
    polymerized, transitory, etc.

    (5)     Note.  A solid polymer-forming system is a single reactant or
    mixture of reactants which are disclosed or claimed as being capable of
    forming a solid polymer proper for Class 520, subclass 1 under the
    conditions recited in the claims or which in the absence of a claimed
    recitation are disclosed in the specification.  See Class 520, subclass 1
    for a further elaboration of the type of subject matter proper therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    521,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 50+ for a material
    impregnated or capsulated in a solid polymer.


CLS 523/201
TXT Solid polymer particle enclosed in layer of diverse solid polymer, e.g.,
    core-shell, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein a product containing a layer of a
    solid polymer enveloping a diverse solid polymer is admixed with a material
    so as to form a composition therewith or the composition formed from such
    as admixing process.

    (1)     Note.  The solid polymer which envelops the diverse solid polymer
    need not be in a contiguous relationship therewith, nor does the solid
    polymer need to be the outermost layer of a multilayer product.

    (2)     Note.  The polymer need not completely surround the substrate
    polymer, but must substantially surround the polymer.

    (3)     Note.  A core-shell polymer is considered as a layer of a polymer
    enclosing a diverse polymer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206,    for a product involving two or more solid polymers but wherein the
    relationship of the polymers is not of one enveloping the other.


CLS 523/202
TXT Product having a monomeric ethylenic reactant material:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein a product containing an ethylenic
    reactant material is admixed with a material so as to form a composition
    therewith or the composition formed from such an admixing process.

    (1)     Note.  The ethylenic reactant material may be polymerized in a step
    subsequent to the admixing process.


CLS 523/203
TXT Silicon ethylenic reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 202 wherein the ehtylenic reactant material
    contains a silicon atom.


CLS 523/204
TXT Product having an inorganic material surface coated onto an organic
    substrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein a product containing an inorganic
    material surface coated onto an organic substrate is admixed with a
    material so as to form a composition therewith or the composition formed
    from such an admixing process.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass, the inorganic material must
    be in a contiguous relationship with the organic substrate.


CLS 523/205
TXT Product having a solid synthetic polymer or solid polymer-forming system:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein a product containing a solid
    synthetic polymer or solid polymer-forming system is admixed with a
    material so as to form a composition therewith or the composition formed
    from such an admixing process.


CLS 523/206
TXT Product having two or more solid synthetic polymers, or a solid polymer and
    a solid polymer-forming system:

    Subject matter under subclass 205 wherein a product containing two or more
    solid polymers, or at least one solid polymer and a solid polymer-forming
    system is admixed with a material so as to form a composition therewith or
    the composition formed from such an admixing process.


CLS 523/207
TXT Solid polymer or solid polymer-forming system is encapsulated in or
    impregnated in a nonreactant material:

    Subject matter under subclass 205 wherein a product containing a solid
    polymer or solid polymer-forming system, impregnated in or encapsulated in
    a nonreactant material, is admixed with a material so as to form a
    composition therewith or the composition formed from such an admixing
    process.


CLS 523/208
TXT Solid polymer or solid polymer-forming system is or derived from an
    aldehyde or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 205 wherein a product containing a solid
    polymer derived from an aldehyde or derivative or containing a solid
    polymer-forming system containing an aldehyde or derivative, is admixed
    with a material so as to form a composition therewith or the composition
    formed from such an admixing process.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition of the term "aldehyde or
    derivative".


CLS 523/209
TXT Product having a silicon atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 205 wherein the product contains a silicon
    atom.


CLS 523/210
TXT Product having a material encapsulated in or impregnated in a nonreactant
    material:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein a product which contains a
    material encapsulated or impregnated in a nonreactant material is admixed
    with another material so as to form a composition therewith or the
    composition formed from such an admixing process.


CLS 523/211
TXT Reactant or catalyst is material encapsulated or impregnated:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein the material encapsulated in, or
    impregnated into the nonreactive material is a reactant or catalyst.

    (1)     Note.  The term "reactant" as used herein is consistent with the
    term in subclass 1 of this class.


CLS 523/212
TXT Product having a silicon atom as part of an organic compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein a product containing a silicon
    atom as part of an organic compound is admixed with another material so as
    to form a composition therewith, or the composition formed from such an
    admixing process.


CLS 523/213
TXT Silicon containing organic material having an atom other than Si, C, H, or
    oxygen:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 wherein the silicon organic compound
    contains at least one atom which is other than silicon, carbon, hydrogen,
    or oxygen.


CLS 523/214
TXT Product having glass:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 wherein the product contains glass.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "glass".


CLS 523/215
TXT Product having elemental carbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein a product containing elemental
    carbon in any of its allotropic forms is admixed with a material so as to
    form a composition therewith, or the composition formed from such an
    admixing process.


CLS 523/216
TXT Product having a silicon atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein a product containing a silicon
    atom is admixed with a material so as to form a composition therewith, or
    the composition formed from such an admixing process.


CLS 523/217
TXT Glass:

    Subject matter under subclass 216 wherein the product contains glass.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "glass".


CLS 523/218
TXT Process of forming a composition having a nonreactant material selected for
    its special void characteristic; or composition containing same, e.g.,
    syntactic foam, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a nonreactant or nonsolid polymer
    material which is described as having at least one void therein is admixed
    with a material so as to form a composition therewith, or the composition
    formed from such an admixing process, e.g., syntactic foams, etc.

    (1)     Note.  A material will not be considered as having a void therein
    unless it is specifically noted in the claims or solely described in the
    specification as having voids.

    (2)     Note.  Included within the definition of void are those materials
    described as containing cells, pores, cavities, interstices or fissures.

    (3)     Note.  Included herein are those processes wherein the void may be
    subsequently filled or destroyed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   for a material encapsulated or impregnated in a matrix or for a
    filled void.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    521,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 50+ for a solid
    synthetic polymer containing a void therein and which void containing
    polymer is not the result of the addition of a nonpolymeric void or
    cell-containing material; and in particular for subclasses 53+ for the
    addition of a material to a cellular solid polymer.


CLS 523/219
TXT Glass void:

    Subject matter under subclass 218 wherein the void containing material is
    glass.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition of the term "glass".

    (2)     Note.  Included herein are hollow glass beads or glass balloons.


CLS 523/220
TXT Process of forming a composition having two or more solid materials having
    defined physical dimensions or surface areas; or composition containing
    same:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein two or more solid materials having
    numerically defined physical dimensions or surface areas are admixed either
    together or with another material so as to form a composition, or to the
    product formed from such an admixing process.

    (1)     Note.  The solid materials may be reactants, polymers, or
    nonreactant materials.  Included herein are also mixtures wherein only
    solid polymers are described as having a size or surface area.


CLS 523/221
TXT Two or more solid synthetic polymers having defined physical dimension or
    surface area:

    Subject matter under subclass 220 containing two or more solid polymers
    having numerically defined physical dimensions or surface areas.


CLS 523/222
TXT Process of forming a composition having a fiber which is twisted, coiled,
    or involves specific mechanically interengaged fibers other than fibers
    solely of glass; or composition containing same, e.g., textiles, cloth,
    fiber bundles, mats, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a fiber which is coiled, twisted,
    or mechanically interengaged with other fibers and which fiber is other
    than fibers solely of glass is admixed with a material so as to form a
    composition or to the product formed from such an admixing process.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are materials described as textiles, cloths,
    fiber bundles, mats, webs, etc.


CLS 523/223
TXT Process of forming a composition of a spheroidal material having physical
    dimension or composition containing same:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a material which has numerically
    defined spheroidal shape is admixed with a material so as to form a
    composition therewith, or to the product formed such an admixing process.

    (1)     Note.  A material will not be considered as being spheroidal in
    shape unless it is claimed as such or solely described in the sepcification
    as having such a shape.


CLS 523/300
TXT Utilizing direct application of magnetic, electrical, or wave energy:

    Process under subclass 1 wherein a desired or intentional composition is
    prepared utilizing a step of directly applying magnetic, electrical, or
    other wave energy, including wave energy produced by the decay of
    radioactive isotopes or by impact of a beam of highly energetic particles
    or the impact of a laser beam.

    (1)     Note.  The energy employed must be applied directly to the
    intentional composition or to an ingredient of said composition.

    (2)     Note.  When the energy is not applied directly but is used to
    generate heat or other kinetic energy which is transferred to the desired
    composition or its ingredients, then search the appropriate subclasses
    hereinbelow.

    (3)     Note.  Sonic and ultrasonic wave energy are included herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 157.15+ for
    processes preparing a specific compound utilizing a wave energy process.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 12+ for coating processes involving
    direct application.


CLS 523/303
TXT Controlling process in response to a stated measurement or test:

    Process under subclass 1 wherein control of the treatment or formation of
    an intentional or desired composition is altered in response to a stated
    measurement or test.

    (1)     Note.  Measurement or test must be described in more than mere
    nominal terms.  For example, "reacting until an acid value of 100 is
    reached" is not sufficient since the acid valve is a merely nominally
    stated desired result; however, a claim which describes specific
    measurement and specific means for responding to the measurement would be
    placed herein.

    (2)     Note.  The control aspect relates to treating a previously formed
    composition or altering or maintaining the ingredient make-up of a
    composition in response to a stated measurement or test, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 500+
    for chemical process control systems involving data processing systems,
    calculating computers designed for use in chemistry or chemical engineering
    or for solution of problems in these areas wherein the claim disclosure
    does not include an algorithm peculiar to the specific art.


CLS 523/305
TXT Adding material to maintain a stated equilibrium condition wherein the
    added material does not merely displace an equal amount from the treatment
    zone:

    Process under subclass 1 of treating or forming a desired or intentional
    composition wherein nondisplacing material is added in order to maintain a
    stated equilibrium condition.

    (1)     Note.  The material does not merely displace an equal amount from
    the zone as in a series of weirs but replaces material which has been
    removed by some other mechanism, e.g., distillation, etc.

    (2)     Note.  The state equilibrium is a desired condition and any
    nonspecific means of measuring this equilibrium is included.  If the
    equilibrium condition is measured according to a specific test or
    measurement then the process is classified in subclass 303 supra.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    343,    for looped flow system.


CLS 523/306
TXT Utilizing energy potential described as obtained as waste or by-product
    from a prior or concurrent operation:

    Process under subclass 1 of treating or forming a desired or intentional
    composition utilizing energy potential described as obtained as waste or
    by-product from a prior or concurrent operation, e.g., energy cascading,
    etc.

    (1)     Note.  Mere cascading of streams from vessel to vessel is not
    sufficient unless the intent is to capture otherwise waste energy
    potential. Intent will not be presumed but must be shown by the description
    in the patent claims.

    (2)     Note.  The process herein should be with recovery or recycling of
    an unusual energy source thus specific intent is required.


CLS 523/307
TXT Utilizing a temperature greater than 250#C (482#F) or less than 0#C:

    Process under subclass 1 wherein an intentional composition is treated or
    formed at a temperature specified at either below 32#F or above 482#F,
    i.e., 0#C or above 250#C.

    (1)     Note.  A process performed while "frozen" or under "cryogenic"
    conditions will be placed herein unless there is a disclosure that the
    temperature is greater than 32#F.


CLS 523/309
TXT With removal or communition of material at a temperature greater than 250#C
    or less than 0#, e.g., freeze drying, etc.:

    Process under subclass 307 wherein there is a step of removing a material
    from the system or in particulating a material, and wherein the removal or
    particulation step must be at the specified temperature.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are, e.g., latex concentration processes and
    freeze drying processes, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    340,    for removal of material at reduced pressure and temperature greater
    than 32#F and less than 428#F, e.g., vacuum stripping, etc.


CLS 523/310
TXT Utilizing an ion exchanger or a solid sorptive material or semipermeable
    membrane:

    Process under subclass 1 of treating or forming an intentional or desired
    composition including a step of treating with an ion exchanger or solid
    sorptive mateial or semipermeable membrane.

    (1)     Note.  Ion exchanger materials include, e.g., ion exchange organic
    polymers and other ion exchange materials such as synthetics and clays and
    modified clays.

    (2)     Note.  The ion exchanger material must contain ionic groups
    exchangeable with other ionic groups.

    (3)     Note.  Sorptive materials include molecular sieves such as zeolites
    which are a class of natural or manufactured hydrated silicates of aluminum
    and either sodium or calcium or both, of the type Na2O.Al2O3.nSiO2 - .xH2O,
    which will accept and retain molecules that are small and/or slender enough
    to pass through the pores, thus separating them from a mixture with larger
    or bulkier molecules.

    (4)     Note.  When the ion exchanger material chemically reacts with the
    solid polymer or solid polymer-forming system, there must be other
    chemically inert ingredients ultimately present; otherwise, the reaction
    would be classified in Class 525 below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    528,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 480+ for treatment
    of polymers with ion exchange or sorptive material.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, subclass 820 for purification
    of hydrocarbon liquids by sorption; and subclass 833 for purification by
    ion exchange.


CLS 523/312
TXT Utilizing quiescent treatment condition:

    Process under subclass 1 wherein the intentional or desired composition is
    treated or formed utilizing at least one quiescent treatment condition,
    e.g., quiescent cooling, etc.

    (1)     Note.  A quiescent condition involves not stirring or otherwise
    subjecting the system to shear as during flow, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    313,    for mixing under conditions which avoids or minimize turbulence or
    shear, e.g., laminar flow, etc.


CLS 523/313
TXT Utilizing mixing in a manner designed to avoid or minimize turbulence or
    shear, e.g., laminar flow, etc.:

    Process under subclass 1 wherein a desired or intentional composition is
    treated or formed utilizing mixing which is performed in a manner
    intentionally designed to avoid or minimize turbulence, e.g., laminar flow
    or low shear, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Laminar flow is specified nonturbulent flow for purposes of
    this subclass.


CLS 523/315
TXT Utilizing streams or masses moving relative to each other at a described
    angle of coincidence other than mere pouring, e.g., countercurrent mixing,
    etc.:

    Process under subclass 1 of treating or forming a desired or intentional
    composition wherein the motion of forming or treating said composition is
    described by the angle of coincidence of two or more streams or masses in
    motion relative to each other than mere pouring.

    (1)     Note.  Angle of coincidence refers to the contact of streams or
    masses of material which are in motion relative to each other.

    (2)     Note.  The angle of coincidence can be described qualitatively,
    e.g, stream A mixed transversely into stream B; or quantitatively, e.g.,
    stream A mixed with stream B at an angle of 30# between the streams, etc.

    (3)     Note.  Some aspect of the angle must be described rather than that
    which is merely inherent in "mixing" at all possible angles.

    (4)     Note.  Where the gravitationally falling mass is in the form of a
    "curtain" or sheetlike path, directing a stream of material "toward" the
    curtain is a sufficient qualitative description of the angle since a family
    of angles relative to the vertical is described.

    (5)     Note.  Included herein is countercurrent mixing, i.e., the relative
    direction of flow is substantially 180# apart.


CLS 523/318
TXT Utilizing stream or mass moving in a described attitude of presentment
    relative to a zone, vessel, or another apparently stationary mass or
    stream, excluding mere "pouring into", e.g., from above, below,
    tangentially, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the motion of treating or forming
    said desired or intentional composition is described by attitude of
    presentment to a zone or vessel or stream, e.g., adding material
    horizontally, tangentially, or from above or from below, etc., other than
    mere "pouring into".

    (1)     Note.  The attitude of presentment can be described qualitatively,
    e.g., from above, from below, etc., or quantitatively, e.g., adding at an
    angle 30# from a normal to the transverse axis of the vessel, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Attitude of presentment refers to contact with a zone,
    vessel, or apparently stationary mass.

    (3)     Note.  An apparently stationary mass is a material whose center of
    gravity is not in motion relative to the moving mass; however, the
    apparently stationary mass may have internal motion, e.g, a stirred mass or
    a fluidized bed of material.


CLS 523/319
TXT Utilizing treating or forming motion described by numerical data other than
    mere temperature, pressure, time, or amounts of material:

    Process under subclass 1 of treating or forming a desired or intentional
    composition wherein the motion involved with said treating or forming is
    described by numerical data other than mere temperature, pressure, amount
    of material, or time.

    (1)     Note.  The numerical data must describe motion on a macro scale,
    i.e., more than mere thermal or kinetic molecular motion.

    (2)     Note.  The numerical data must describe motion directly, e.g.,
    velocity or acceleration; or indirectly, e.g., shear rate or Reynolds
    number or amount of mixing energy expanded.

    (3)     Note.  The numerical data should describe the treating or mixing
    motion as to intensity or quantity of energy or turbulence imparted but not
    simply treatment duration, temperature, or amounts of material mixed.

    (4)     Note.  Pressure, per se, does not describe motion unless there is
    movement in repsonse thereto, e.g., compressing the mixture into a shape at
    6000 psi, etc.

    (5)     Note.  The list of excluded numerical data is not intended to be
    complete since any numerical data is intended to be excluded herefrom if
    there is no description of motion, e.g., concentration, or grinding to a
    given particle size, etc., is excluded unless somehow related to motion or
    intensity of motion.


CLS 523/322
TXT Rotational rate (RPM) or velocity:

    Process under subclass 319 wherein the treating or mixing motion is
    described by a specified rotational rate or velocity.


CLS 523/323
TXT Work input, e.g., horsepower-hour/pound, etc.:

    Process under subclass 319 wherein the treating or mixing motion is
    described by a specified work input, e.g., horsepower-hour/pound, etc.


CLS 523/324
TXT Utilizing a treatment zone specifically described by shape (other than
    nominally helical) or at least a part of which zone is specifically
    described by dimension, material, proportion, or angle of orientation:

    Process under subclass 1 wherein a desired or intentional composition is
    treated or formed utilizing a treatment zone or vessel or portion of zone
    or vessel specifically described by shape (other than nominally helical,
    dimension, material, or angle of orientation to the earth or other surface.

    (1)     Note.  Mere statement that a vessel is made of metal or plastic is
    not sufficient for this subclass, however, specific classes of metals or
    plastics, e.g., noble metal or polyolefin, etc., would be.

    (2)     Note.  Relative statements of size, e.g., large, small, thick,
    thin, etc., are not given weight unless a relative proportional statement
    is made, e.g., base is three times wider than the height, etc.

    (3)     Note.  Angle of orientation relates to the earth or some other
    surface, e.g., vertical, upright, normal, horizontal, level, inclined,
    slanted, sloped, pitched, etc., these terms are assumed to relate to the
    earth's surface. Angle of orientation of a zone can be used to described
    the orientation of the longer axis of the zone or vessel.

    (4)     Note.  If no angle of orientation is stated in the claim then
    classification will be made on another basis.

    (5)     Note.  Reference to a class of treating apparatus, e.g., roll mill,
    ball mill, etc., is not a specific shape or description sufficient for this
    subclass; however, a roll of 6 inches in diameter would be sufficient.  See
    (6) Note.

    (6)     Note.  The dimension of the zone or vessel relates to the size,
    volume, cross-sectional area or proportional relationship.  An example of a
    proportional relationship would be the description of a helical zone by
    relative arrangement of helical flights.

    (7)     Note.  Specific shape of the zone or vessel other than merely
    "helical" is sufficient for this subclass.  Also excluded are the nominal
    terms "extruder", "screw extruder", or "worm extruder".

    (8)     Note.  Ball, hammer, or rod mills, are excluded herefrom since
    these terms do not specifically describe the shape of the zone or vessel.

    (9)     Note.  Mere statement that a zone or vessel is "elongated" is not
    sufficient.


CLS 523/326
TXT Adding steam or hot water (T> 60#C, i.e., 140#F):

    Process under subclass 1 of treating or forming a desired or intentional
    composition wherein steam or hot water directly contacts said composition.

    (1)     Note.  The hot water is hot water, per se, and not a hot aqueous
    solution or mixture.

    (2)     Note.  Hot water is defined as having a temperature greater than
    about 60#C, (i.e., 140#F).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    528,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 499+ for a process
    of contacting a solid polymer or resinifiable intermediate condensation
    product with water.


CLS 523/328
TXT Removal of material by treatment with hot water or steam, e.g., steam
    stripping, etc.:

    Process under subclass 326 wherein steam or hot water is employed to remove
    material from the composition, e.g., steam distillation, hot water
    extraction, etc., or steam stripping, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    528,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 500 for a process of
    steam stripping or steam distilling a solid polymer or resinifiable
    intermediate condensation product.


CLS 523/330
TXT Utilizing a gaseous stream to suspend to agitate a particulate solid
    polymer composition, e.g., fluidized bed, etc.:

    Process under subclass 1 of treating or forming a desired or intentional
    composition wherein a gaseous steam is utilized to suspend or agitate a
    particulate solid polymer composition, e.g., fluidized bed or gaseous
    carrier, etc.

    (1)     Note.  For example, included herein are various drying processes
    involving use of a gas stream such as spray drying, fluid bed drying, or
    jet drying.


CLS 523/331
TXT Drying a composition which is situated on a moving substrate or drying
    utilizing a thin film evaporator:

    Process under subclass 1 of treating or forming a desired or intentional
    composition wherein there is (a) a step of drying a composition which is
    situated as a film or layer ona moving substrate, e.g., drum drying, etc.,
    or (b) a step of removal of material using a thin film evaporator.


CLS 523/332
TXT Extracting material from solid polymer latex or aqueous dispersion or
    suspension with a liquid nonreactant material, e.g., solvent stripping
    coprecipitation, etc.:

    Process under subclass 1 wherein a solid polymer latex or aqueous
    dispersion is extracted with a liquid solvent to remove material.

    (1)     Note.  The product of this process must be a product under subclass
    1, i.e., an intentional or desired composition.

    (2)     Note.  The liquid solvent need not be a solvent for the solid
    polymer but merely a liquid nonreactant which serves as an extractant for
    the material being removed.

    (3)     Note.  The extraction step relates to removal of material which is
    dissolved or dispersed in the extractant liquid.


CLS 523/333
TXT Admixing a nonreactive additive ingredient in the form of a slurry,
    dispersion, or suspension (liquid-solid); said slurry, dispersion or
    suspension containing no solid polymer or SICP:

    Process under subclass 1 of treating of forming a desired or intentional
    composition by admixing the nonreactant in the form of a solid-liquid
    slurry, suspension, or dispersion and wherein said slurry, suspension, or
    dispersion is devoid of any solid polymer (SP) or specified intermediate
    condensation product (SICP).

    (1)     Note.  Slurry, suspension, or dispersion indicates at least a two
    phase solid-liquid system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    524,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 501 for admixing of
    aqueous latices containing SP or SICP.


CLS 523/334
TXT Slurried, dispersed, or suspended ingredient admixed with previously formed
    latex, aqueous dispersion or aqueous suspension of a solid polymer:

    Process under subclass 333 wherein the slurried, dispersed or suspended
    ingredient is mixed with a previously formed latex or aqueous dispersion or
    aqueous suspension of a solid polymer.

    (1)     Note.  Simultaneous addition of slurried ingredients to solid
    polymer and water is placed in subclass 333 above.


CLS 523/335
TXT Creaming, agglomerating, or coalescing a solid polymer latex or aqueous
    dispersion wherein solid polymer latex or aqueous dispersion is the result:

    Process under subclass 1 wherein an aqueous dispersion or latex of a solid
    polymer is treated by a step of creaming, agglomerating, or coalescing
    which step does not destroy the latex or aqueous dispersion.

    (1)     Note.  Creaming relates to separation of a latex into a cream layer
    having most of the dispersed solid polymer and a layer having most of the
    aqueous components of the latex; however, the cream layer remains a latex
    or aqueous dispersion.

    (2)     Note.  Agglomerating or coalescing refers to regulation of the
    particle size of the dispersed solid polymer particles in the latex.

    (3)     Note.  The creamed, agglomerated, or coalesced latex, dispersion or
    suspension can be coagulated, broken, or otherwise destroyed in a later
    step.


CLS 523/336
TXT Inverting phase relationships or reapportioning the distribution of
    ingredients among phases:

    Process under subclass 1 of treating or forming an intentional or desired
    composition with a step of inversion of an initial phase relationship,
    i.e., a continuous phase becomes a dispersed phase; or a step of
    reapportionment of the distribution of ingredients among the phases.


CLS 523/337
TXT Inversion to form water-in-oil system:

    Process under subclass 336 wherein said inversion step forms a water
    dispersed in oil system, i.e., the aqueous phase is discontinuous.


CLS 523/339
TXT With removal of a phase:

    Process under subclass 336 wherein at least one phase is removed partially
    or completely.

    (1)     Note.  The phase removal step is generally subsequent to the phase
    inversion step.


CLS 523/340
TXT Removing material at reduced pressure, e.g., flashing, sublimination, spray
    drying, etc.:

    Process under subclass 1 of treating or forming an intentional or desired
    composition wherein material is removed at reduced pressure, e.g.,
    flashing, sublimation, etc., to yield a product which is an intentional or
    desired composition.

    (1)     Note.  Use of the term "stripping" is presumed to indicate removal
    of materials under vacuum unless there are other factors disclosed which
    permit another inference.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes both vacuum distillation or
    evaporation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, for processes of
    vacuum freeze drying.

    528,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 480+ for polymer
    purification by vacuum stripping, flashing, or sublimation.


CLS 523/342
TXT With step of spraying or centrifuging:

    Process under subclass 340 wherein there is a step of spraying or
    centrifuging before, during, or after the removal of material at reduced
    pressure.


CLS 523/343
TXT Treating an intentional composition with a step of removing and recycling
    material into the composition:

    Process under subclass 1 of treating a previously formed desired or
    intentional composition with a step of removing material and recycling said
    material into the composition.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for loops in a flowing system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305,    wherein recycling is to achieve a stated equilibrium other than
    mere displacement equilibrium.


CLS 523/344
TXT Multistep operation achieved within a stated interval of time, e.g., total
    cycle time, etc.:

    Process under subclass 1 wherein an intentional or desired composition is
    treated or formed by a multistep operation which is achieved within a
    stated interval of time, e.g., mixing, devolatilizing, and extruding
    accomplished within a specified time period, etc.

    (1)     Note.  A single step of specified duration, e.g., mixing for five
    minutes or heating for two minutes, etc., is not sufficient for purposes of
    this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  A specified time interval for a series of steps which are
    themselves a subunit of a claimed process is sufficient for this subclass
    so long as the subunit relates to manipulation or formation of an
    intentional composition.  On the other hand, if the subunit of the claimed
    process is some preliminary operation, e.g., mixing of nonpolymeric
    ingredients or preparation of the solid polymer, etc., then mere statements
    of a time interval for such subunit (or routine) is not sufficient for this
    subclass.

    (3)     Note.  An open-ended range for the time interval is sufficient for
    this subclass, e.g., total time is "at least" or "greater than" or "up to"
    six hours, etc.

    (4)     Note.  Plural time interval steps are sufficient even if not in a
    "subunit" of the process so long as each time interval step relates to an
    operation which forms or treats an intentional composition.


CLS 523/346
TXT Utilizing plural mixing operations of specified varying intensity, e.g.,
    intensity of each mixing is reduced, etc.:

    Process under subclass 1 wherein an intentional or desired composition is
    treated or formed utilizing plural mixing operations, at least two of which
    vary in intensity as compared to each other, e.g., a series of mixing
    operations specified to be of decreasing intensity, etc.


CLS 523/347
TXT Utilizing plural discrete pressures different than ambient:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein treatment or formation of the
    desired or intentional composition involves discrete plural steps at
    pressures different than ambient.

    (1)     Note.  Process steps at ambient pressure can be included herein so
    long as there are plural steps at nonambient pressure.

    (2)     Note.  Pressure can be elevated or reduced.

    (3)     Note.  A continuous development of pressure is excluded herefrom
    unless there is a high or low "plateau" stated, e.g., 30 psi operation,
    increased to 60 psi and operation at 60 psi, etc.


CLS 523/348
TXT Utilizing plural interconnected distinct forming or treating zones or
    locations other than nominal screw extruder, e.g., zones interconnected
    parallel or having varying flow velocity, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a desired or intentional
    composition is treated or formed in a process utilizing plural
    interconnected distinct forming or treating zones.

    (1)     Note.  A mere screw extruder is excluded herefrom since the zones
    are not necessarily distinct; however, an extruder specifically described
    as having a plurality of distinct zones is included herein.

    (2)     Note.  The interconnected zones can be arranged in series or in
    parallel relationship.

    (3)     Note.  Distinctness of zones is indicated by language showing
    either physical separation, differing configuration, the assignment of
    different function, or distinctness of location within a physically
    continuous zone (e.g., points A and B in an extruder zone, etc.

    (4)     Note.  Interconnected indicates physical connection enabling
    directed flow of fluent materials therebetween.


CLS 523/351
TXT Utilizing plural mixing operations in preparation of a solid polymer inert
    ingredient concentrate, e.g., master batch, etc.:

    Process under subclass 1 wherein a desired or intentional composition is
    treated or formed utilizing plural mixing operations to produce a master
    batch of solid polymer with an inert ingredient.

    (1)     Note.  The mixing process must either be (a) specifically described
    as a master batching, or (b) the intention of a subsequent further mixing
    step of the concentrate with additional material must be specified in the
    claim.  In either case, plural mixing steps must be recited in the
    formation of the master batch.

    (2)     Note.  Plural mixing steps includes plural stages of blending, etc.


CLS 523/352
TXT Utilizing multistage coagulation of a solid polymer latex:

    Process under subclass 1 wherein a solid polymer latex is coagulated in
    stages, e.g., by a multistep or by treatment or addition of coagulant
    material to obtain a crumb rubber intentional composition, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Multistage coagulation includes any process involving plural
    stages of completion of the degree of coagulation of the latex.


CLS 523/353
TXT Utilizing plural discrete mixing operations in specifically described
    distinct noninterconnected zones:

    Process under subclass 1 wherein the intentional or desired composition is
    treated or formed utilizing mixing involving two or more distinct
    noninterconnected locations or zones.

    (1)     Note.  The term mixing relates to the admixture of materials or to
    imparting motion to a system which serves to increase or maintain the
    homogeneity of the system.

    (2)     Note.  Two mixing operations described as performed "separately"
    will be presumed to be performed in distinct zones or locations, e.g.,
    "separately" mixing A with B and C with D "parallel", or "concurrent"
    mixing are presumed to be in discrete noninterconnected zones.

    (3)     Note.  Distinctness is indicated by langage showing physical
    separation of the mixers or by independently performed mixing operations
    upon different compositions or batches.

    (4)     Note.  Noninterconnected indicates that the mixers are not joined
    physically, e.g., as by conduits, etc.


CLS 523/375
TXT Radioactive or Group VIIIA atom containing NRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a radioactive element or a
    radioactive compound or wherein an inert or noble gas or a compound thereof
    NRM is in admixture with a solid polymer or specified intermediate
    condensation product.

    (1)     Note.  Radioactive materials are those which exhibit spontaneous
    nuclear disintegration with emission of radioactive particles and which
    comprise (a) an element or compound which contains an element which has an
    atomic number of at least 84, or (b) the compound or an element which has
    been treated to render an isotope thereof radioactive.

    (2)     Note.  An inert or noble gas or compound thereof contains at least
    one element whose atom number is 2, 10, 18, 36, 54, or 86, i.e., He, Ne,
    Ar, Kr, Xe, Rn.


CLS 523/400
TXT Process of forming a composition containing a nonreactive material (NRM)
    and a polymer containing more than one 1,2-epoxy group, or a preformed
    polymer derived from or admixed with a reactant containing more than one
    1,2-epoxy group; or with a polymer derived from an epihalohydrin and a
    polyhydrin phenol or polyol; or composition or product thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 concerning the process of forming a
    composition containing a nonreactive material (NRM) admixed with at least
    one polymer containing more than one 1,2-epoxy group; or with a polymer
    derived from or admixed with a reactant containing more than one 1,2-epoxy
    group; or with a polymer derived from an epihalohydrin and a polyhydric
    phenol or polyol; or composition or product thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Polymers anticipated here would be of the type containing
    two or more 1,2-epoxy groups, e.g., phenol-formaldehyde resin etherified
    with epichlorohydrin, polyglycidyl methacrylate, epoxidized polybutadiene,
    polyglycidyl ethers of bis-phenol diglycidyl ether, or from the reaction of
    epichlorohydrin with resorcinol or 1,4-dimethylolcyclohexane, etc.

    (2)     Note.  For purposes of classification here epoxidized soybean oil
    (triglycerides of oleic, linoleic, linolenic acids, etc.) if used as a
    reactant will be considered as a plural epoxide in view of its inherent
    plural unsaturation.  Likewise, the epoxidation of other plural unsaturated
    materials, e.g., polybutadiene, in the absence of disclosure to the
    contrary, will produce a plural epoxide reactant.

    (3)     Note.  The presence of a polyfunctional epoxy compound, e.g,
    epoxidized peanut oil, which functions as a heat or light stabilizer in
    given compositions is classified elsewhere, e.g., Class 524, subclass 114,
    etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500+,   and Class 524 for compositions containing or derived from the
    excluded 1,2-epoxy polymers, e.g., polypropylene oxide, polystyrene oxide,
    etc., and a (NRM).


CLS 523/401
TXT Contains inorganic water settable material NRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein the composition contains an
    inorganic water settable material as a nonreactive material, e.g., a
    hydraulic cement comprising an aqueous emulsion of an epoxy resin
    (condensation product of epichlorohydrin and a polyhydric alcohol),
    emulsifier, polyfunctional primary amine curing agent and Portland cement,
    etc.


CLS 523/402
TXT Product contains water, per se, or water of hydration as designated
    nonreactive material (DNRM):

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein the composition contains water or
    water of hydration as the DNRM.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass is water which is used as a
    solvent for a catalyst or appears as a hydrate therewith since such
    materials are not considered to be additives in forming a desired
    composition.


CLS 523/403
TXT Two or more polymers containing more than one 1,2-epoxy group, two or more
    polymers derived from reactants containing more than one 1,2-epoxy group,
    or combination thereof or one of said polymers and a reactant containing at
    least one 1,2-epoxy group:

    Subject matter under subclass 402 wherein the composition contains two or
    more polymers each containing more than one 1,2-epoxy group, two or more
    polymers derived from reactants containing more than one 1,2-epoxy group,
    or combination thereof; or one of said polymers admixed with a reactant
    containing at least one 1,2-epoxy group, e.g., a mixture of the
    polyglycidyl ether of bisphenol A diglycidyl ether admixed either with an
    epoxidized soybean oil or epichlorohydrin, etc.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of classification, an epoxidized soybean oil or
    other unsaturated triglycerides will be assumed as plural epoxy materials.


CLS 523/404
TXT With organic nitrogen or organic sulfur reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 wherein the composition contains an
    organic nitrogen or organic sulfur compound as reactant, e.g., protein, etc.


CLS 523/406
TXT Solid polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only (includes in situ
    reactants from plural 1,2-epoxides):

    Subject matter under subclass 402, wherein the composition contains a solid
    polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only, e.g., polystyrene, etc.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes those ethylenic reactants prepared in
    situ, i.e., preliminary reactions prior to the polymerization step, e.g.,
    reaction of acrylic acid with Epon 828 and subsequently polymerized with
    styrene, etc.  Had the epozy polymer been a solid, the reaction with
    acrylic acid and subsequent polymerization is not applicable here and is
    classifiable below or in subclass 402.


CLS 523/407
TXT Polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only is graft, graft-type, block,
    or block-type copolymer:

    Subject matter under subclass 406 wherein the solid polymer is a graft,
    graft-type, block, or block-type copolymer, e.g.,
    polybutadiene-co-graft-polystyrene-acrylonitrile, etc.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition to "graft and graft-type
    copolymer" and "block and block-type copolymer".


CLS 523/408
TXT Two or more polymers derived from ethylenic reactants only:

    Subject matter under subclass 406 wherein the composition contains two or
    more polymers derived from ethylenic reactants only, e.g., a mixture of
    polystyrene and polymethyl methacrylate, etc.


CLS 523/409
TXT Polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only derived from
    reactant-containing chalcogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 406 wherein the composition contains a
    polymer derived from ethylenic ractants only, at least one of which
    contains chalcogen, e.g., polyacrylic acid, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Chalcogen for purposes of this subclass includes oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium.


CLS 523/410
TXT Polymer derived from ethylenic reactant only derived from
    reactant-containing oxygen heterocycle:

    Subject matter under subclass 409 wherein the polymer derived from
    ethylenic reactants only is derived from at least one reactant which
    contains an oxygen heterocyclic, e.g., polystyrene-maleic anhydride, etc.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "heterocyclic".


CLS 523/411
TXT Polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only derived from
    reactant-containing nitrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 409 wherein the polymer derived from
    ethylenic reactants only is derived from a nitrogen-containing reactant.

    (1)     Note.  The nitrogen atom may be in the same reactant as the
    chalcogen atom or may be in a separate nitrogen, nonchalcogen-containing
    reactant which is copolymerized with a chalcogen-containing reactant.


CLS 523/412
TXT Polymer from ethylenic reactants only derived from reactant-containing
    carboxylic acid ester:

    Subject matter under subclass 409 wherein the polymer derived from
    ethylenic reactants only is derived from a reactant containing a carboxylic
    acid ester group, e.g., polymethylmethacrylate, polystyrene-vinyl acetate,
    etc.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary under carboxylic acid or derivative for a
    definition of the term "carboxylic acid ester".


CLS 523/413
TXT Polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only derivedffrom plural
    unsaturated reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 406 wherein the solid polymer from ethylenic
    reactants only is one derived from a plural unsaturated reactant, e.g.,
    polybutadiene, poly(styrene-divinyl benzene), etc.


CLS 523/414
TXT Polymer contains more than one 1,2-epoxy group or one derived from reactant
    containing more than one 1,2-epoxy group is further derived from or reacted
    with organic nitrogen or sulfur compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 402 wherein the composition contains a
    polymer containing more than one 1,2-epoxy group or a polymer derived from
    a reactant containing more than one 1,2-epoxy group and is further derived
    from or reacted with an organic nitrogen or organic sulfur compound, e.g.,
    a glycidyl polyether of bisphenol A cured with diethylene triamine, etc.


CLS 523/415
TXT Organic nitrogen compound contains isocyanate group:

    Subject matter under subclass 414 wherein the organic nitrogen compound
    contains at least one -N=C=O group or a blocked form thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Included within the term isocyanate are the blocked
    isocyanates; and see Class 528, subclass 45 for an explanation thereof.


CLS 523/416
TXT Organic nitrogen compound is amine-aldehyde condensation product:

    Subject matter under subclass 414 wherein the organic nitrogen compound is
    an amine-aldehyde condensation product, e.g., melamine-formaldehyde resin,
    hexamethylol-melamine or any methylolated amine, etc.


CLS 523/417
TXT Two or more organic nitrogen compounds as reactants:

    Subject matter under subclass 414 wherein the composition contains two or
    more organic nitrogen compounds as reactants, e.g., a mixture of
    ethanolamine and ethylenediamine, etc.


CLS 523/418
TXT Organic nitrogen compound contains N-(C)*-(C=O)- group where *=0, 1, 2. . .
    , e.g., protein, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 414 wherein the composition contains a
    nitrogen compound which contains the N group wherein n=0, 1, 2, e.g.,
    protein, amide hydrazide, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein also are the nitrogen heterocycles with this
    functionality.


CLS 523/420
TXT Organic nitrogen compound contains three or more nitrogen atoms other than
    as solid polymer, e.g., diethylene triamine, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 414 wherein the organic nitrogen compound
    contains three or more nitrogen atoms other than as contained in a solid
    polymer wherein the nitrogen is a repeating group, e.g., diethylene
    triamine, tetraethylene pentamine, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is liquid polyacrylonitrile while solid
    polyacrylonitrile is classified in subclass 406 above.


CLS 523/421
TXT Organic nitrogen compound contains element other than C, H, O, or N:

    Subject matter under subclass 414 wherein the organic nitrogen compound
    contains an element other than C, H, O, or N.


CLS 523/423
TXT Polymer is graft, graft-type, block, or block-type copolymer:

    Subject matter under subclass 402 wherein the compositions contains a
    graft, graft-type, block, or block-type copolymer.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for definitions for the terms "graft,
    graft-type, block, or block-type copolymer".


CLS 523/424
TXT Polymer is phenol-aldehyde condensation product:

    Subject matter under subclass 402 wherein the composition contains a
    phenol-aldehyde condensate or polymer thereof.


CLS 523/425
TXT Polymer derived from silicon reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 402 wherein the composition contains a
    polymer derived from a silicon-containing reactant, e.g.,
    organopolysiloxanes, etc.

    (1)     Note.  A polymer derived from a silicon reactant need not be solid,
    but if it is a liquid there should be disclosure that it is curable to
    produce a solid polymer.


CLS 523/426
TXT Carboxylic acid, ester, or salt thereof DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 402 wherein the composition contains a
    carboxylic acid, ester, or salt thereof as DNRM, e.g., polyethylene-glycol
    monoacetate, sodium laurate, etc.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "carboxylic
    acid, ester, or salt".


CLS 523/427
TXT Composition wherein two or more polymers or a polymer and a reactant all
    contain more than one 1,2-epoxy group, or product thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein the composition contains two or
    more polymers or a polymer and a reactant all of which contains more than
    one 1,2-epoxy group or product thereof, e.g., an epoxy resin of a
    diglycidyl ether of an aliphatic diol and an epoxy resin from bisphenol A,
    etc.


CLS 523/428
TXT With reactant nitrogen or salt compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 427 wherein the 1,2-epoxy reactant or
    1,2-epoxy polymer are treated with an organic nitrogen or sulfur compound.


CLS 523/429
TXT Organic nitrogen compound contains N-heterocycle:

    Subject matter under subclass 428 wherein the organic nitrogen compound
    contains a nitrogen heterocycle, e.g., melamine-formaldehyde condensation
    product, etc.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "heterocyclic".


CLS 523/433
TXT Polymer derived from reactant containing element other than C, H, O, or N
    or chlorine-containing reactant of three or more carbon atoms:

    Subject matter under subclass 427 wherein the composition contains a
    polymer derived from a reactant containing an element other than C, H, O, N
    or other than a chlorine-containing reactant of less than three carbon
    atoms, e.g., chloroprene, polydiphenylsiloxanes, etc.


CLS 523/434
TXT Polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only:

    Subject matter under subclass 427 wherein the composition contains a
    polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only, e.g., polymethyl
    methacrylate, etc.


CLS 523/435
TXT Solid polymer derived from reactant containing element other than C, H, O,
    or N or chlorine-containing reactant of three or more carbon atoms:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein the composition contains a solid
    polymer derived from a reactant other than C, H, N, O, or other than a
    chlorine-containing reactant of less than three carbons atoms, e.g.,
    chloroprene, polyvinylidene fluoride, etc.


CLS 523/436
TXT Polymer is graft, graft-type, block, or block-type:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein the composition contains a
    polymer that is a graft, graft-type, block, or block-type copolymer, e.g.,
    A-B-A copolymer of styrene and butadiene, etc.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition to the terms "graft,
    graft-type, block, or block-type copolymers".


CLS 523/437
TXT Two or more polymers derived from ethylenic reactants only:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein the composition contains two or
    more solid polymers derived from ethylenic reactants only, e.g., polymethyl
    methacrylate admixed with polybutadiene-styrene, etc.


CLS 523/438
TXT Polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only derived from plural
    unsaturated reactants:

    Subject matter under subclass 437 wherein a polymer derived from ethylenic
    reactants only is derived from a plural unsaturated reactant, e.g.,
    butadiene, 1,4-divinylbenzene, etc.


CLS 523/439
TXT Polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only derived from heterocyclic
    reactant other than 1,2-epoxy solely:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein the composition contains a
    polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only and wherein the reactant is a
    non 1,2-epoxy heterocycle, e.g., poly(2-methyl-5- vinylpridine), etc.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "heterocyclic".


CLS 523/440
TXT Designated nonreactive material (DNRM) has numerically specified
    characteristics, e.g., particle size, density, etc., other than viscosity,
    m.p., b.p., molec. wt., chemical composition or percentage range:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein the composition contains a DNRM
    having numerically specified limitations, e.g., particle size, density,
    etc., other than viscosity, melting point (m.p.), boiling point (b.p.)
    molecular weight (molec. wt.), chemical composition, or percentage range.


CLS 523/442
TXT Heavy or transition metal or compound thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 440 wherein the DNRM having numerical
    limitations contains a heavy or transition metal or compound thereof, e.g.,
    antimony oxide, copper, nickel, etc.

    (1)     Note.  A heavy metal is limited to those elements having a specific
    gravity which is four or greater; and see the Glossary for a definition of
    "transition metal".


CLS 523/443
TXT Silicon:

    Subject matter under subclass 440 wherein the DNRM having numerical
    limitations contains a silicon atom, e.g., silica, mica, clay, etc.


CLS 523/444
TXT Glass:

    Subject matter under subclass 443 wherein the silicon-containing material
    is a glass, e.g., fiber glass 0.060 inch in length, etc.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "glass".


CLS 523/445
TXT Boron DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 440 wherein the DNRM contains boron, e.g.,
    boron nitride, etc.


CLS 523/446
TXT Biologically derived cellular material other than cereal, cotton or
    diatomaceous earth DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein the DNRM is biologically derived
    cellular material other than cereal, cotton, or diatomaceous earth, e.g.,
    cork, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    447,    for a DNRM which is cereal or cotton.

    466+,   for diatomaceous earth.


CLS 523/447
TXT Carbohydrate or derivative including tannin or derivative DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein the DNRM is a carbohydrate or
    derivative.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "carbohydrate
    or derivative".

    (2)     Note.  Included herein are tannins and tannin derivatives as well
    as farinaceous meals or flours, starch, etc.; and see Class 560, subclass
    68 for a definition of tannin or derivative.


CLS 523/448
TXT Cellulose derivative containing -C(=O) or N:

    Subject matter under subclass 447 wherein the carbohydrate DNRM contains
    repeating glucose units having the following structure:

    and wherein R1 to R5 at least one of which

    is a R6, e.g., -OCH3, etc., or wherein one or more of the -OR groups has
    been substituted with another atom or group containing nitrogen, e.g.,
    -NH2, -C-NH2, etc.


CLS 523/449
TXT Protein or biologically active polypeptide DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein the DNRM is a protein or
    biologically active polypeptide, e.g., animal glue, etc.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "protein or
    biologically active polypeptide".


CLS 523/450
TXT Coal, asphaltic, or bituminous material DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein the DNRM is coal, bituminous, or
    asphaltic material.

    (1)     Note.  The term bitumen refers to solid or semisolid materials
    which are often black or dark brown and which occur naturally or are
    obtained by refining petroleum or are the components of coal which are
    soluble in organic solvents. The term also applies generically to include
    natural and synthetic asphalts, tar, and pitches.  For example, natural
    asphalts such as Trinidad, Bermuda, gilsonite, grahamite, and Cuban, etc.
    Petroleum asphalt may be used such as these obtained from California
    crudes, Smack over Arkansas crudes, Mid-Continental air-blown oils, Mexican
    petroleum asphalts, tarry residues known as cracked asphalts by-products
    during the cracking of gas oil, or other heavier petroleum fractions to
    obtain gasoline or other lighter fractions, etc.  Further still, bituminous
    materials may be used such as coal tar, wood tar, petroleum pitches, and
    pitches obtained from various industrial processes such as a fatty acid
    pitch, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Included within the subclass are oil shale or shale material
    from which oil has or has not been recovered as well as stearine pitch,
    coke products, coal tar and pitches.

    (3)     Note.  Included within this subclass are materials generally
    described as asphalt.  Asphalt derived from natural deposits, e.g.,
    gilsonite, etc., coal, or petroleum is included herein.


CLS 523/451
TXT Phosphorus DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein the DNRM is a phosphrous
    compound, e.g., triphenyl phosphite, zinc phosphate, etc.


CLS 523/452
TXT Phosphorus directly bonded to nitrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 451 wherein the phosphorus compound contains
    a phosphorus-to-nitrogen bond, e.g., (PNCl2)3, etc.


CLS 523/453
TXT Organic sulfur compound DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein the DNRM is an organic compound
    containing sulfur, e.g., benzene sulfonic acid sodium salt, etc.


CLS 523/454
TXT Ketone or aldehyde DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein the DNRM contains a ketone or
    aldehyde group, e.g., acetone, acetaldehyde, etc.


CLS 523/455
TXT Boron DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 440 wherein the DNRM contains boron, e.g.,
    boron nitride, etc.

    (1)     Note.  See Glossary for a definition of the term "carboxylic acid
    or derivative".

    (2)     Note.  A heavy metal atom is an element having a specific gravity
    of four or greater.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    456,    for a carboxylic acid or derivative containing a heavy metal atom.


CLS 523/456
TXT Organic chalcogen compound DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein the DNRM is an organic compound
    containing a chalcogen atom, e.g., ethylene glycol monobutyl ether, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Chalcogen for purposes of this subclass is limited to
    oxygen, selenium, or tellurium.


CLS 523/457
TXT Elemental metal or metal compound other than as silicate DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein the DNRM contains an elemental or
    metal compound thereof other than as a silicate, e.g., strontium-aluminum
    alloy, barium sulfate, magnesium oxide, calcium carbonate, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    466+,   for a silicate DNRM such as glass, mica, asbestos, etc.


CLS 523/458
TXT Transition metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 457 wherein the metal or compound thereof
    contains a transition metal atom, e.g., titanium dioxide, ferric oxide, etc.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "transition
    metal".


CLS 523/459
TXT Heavy metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 457 wherein the metal or compound thereof
    contains a heavy metal, e.g., zinc sulfide, etc.

    (1)     Note.  A heavy metal atom is an element having a specific gravity
    of four or more.


CLS 523/460
TXT Group VA metal (As, Sb, Bi):

    Subject matter under subclass 459 wherein the heavy metal is a Group VA
    metal, i.e., arsenic, antimony, or bismuth, e.g., antimony oxide, etc.


CLS 523/461
TXT Organic nitrogen compound DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein the DNRM is an organic compound
    containing nitrogen, e.g., an azo dye, etc.


CLS 523/462
TXT Halogenated hydrocarbon or other than carbon tetrachloride, chloroform
    methylene chloride DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein the DNRM is a halogenated
    hydrocarbon other than carbon tetrachloride, chloroform, or methylene
    chloride, or mixtures thereof, e.g., hexabromobutadiene, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400,    for a DNRM which is carbon tetrachloride, chloroform, methylene
    chloride, or mixtures thereof.


CLS 523/463
TXT Hydrocarbon other than xylenes, benzene, or toluene DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein the DNRM is a hydrocarbon other
    than xylenes, benzene, or toluene, e.g., microcrystalline wax, hydrocarbon
    oil, etc.


CLS 523/464
TXT Hydrocarbon having ethylenic unsaturation:

    Subject matter under subclass 463 wherein the hydrocarbon contains
    ethylenic unsaturation, e.g., d-limonene, etc.


CLS 523/465
TXT Hydrocarbon wax:

    Subject matter under subclass 463 wherein the DNRM is a hydrocarbon wax,
    e.g., paraffin wax, microcrystalline wax, etc.

    (1)     Note.  To be classified herein, a material must be claimed or
    disclosed as being a wax.


CLS 523/466
TXT Inorganic Si-O bond DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein the DNRM is an inorganic material
    which contains a silicon-to-oxygen bond, e.g., silica, glass, etc.


CLS 523/467
TXT Polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only:

    Subject matter under subclass 466 wherein the composition contains a
    polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only, e.g., polyethylene,
    polybutadiene, etc.


CLS 523/468
TXT Elemental carbon DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein the DNRM is elemental carbon in
    any of its allotropic forms.


CLS 523/500
TXT Process of forming a composition of an ethylenically unsaturated reactant
    or ethylenically unsaturated polymer admixed with nonreactive material
    (NRM) and a polyester whose polymer backbone was derived through the direct
    formation of the ester linkage, e.g., polyethylene terephthalate,
    polycaprolactone, etc., or product thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the composition contains an
    ethylenically unsaturated reactant or ethylenically unsaturated polymer
    admixed with a nonreactive material (NRM) and a polyester whose polymer
    backbone was derived through the direct formation of the ester linkage,

    i.e., -O and must link through the carbonyl group.

    (1)     Note.  Polymerization of di- or higher esters of polycarboxylic
    acids, lactones, lactides, glycolides, hydroxy-substituted carboxylic acids
    or derivatives, condensation of polyols with polycarboxylic acids or
    derivatives and polyketenes all produce polyesters proper for this
    subclass. Excluded here are those products wherein solid polyester
    formation does not link through the ester carbonyl and along the polymer
    backbone, e.g., polyester urethanes prepared through the condensation of
    polyhydroxy terminated esters with a polyisocyanate, esterification of
    polycarboxylic acids or derivatives with polyepoxides, esterification of
    monomers, or polymers containing plural hydroxyl groups, e.g.,
    pentaerythritol with monocarboxylic acids, or ethylenic polymerization of
    unsaturated esters.

    (2)     Note.  The polyester can be a solid or a liquid polymer.

    (3)     Note.  Included herein are processes or compositions which are the
    result of the formation of a polyester in the presence of a NRM and the
    subsequent blending of an ethylenic reactant or ethylenic polymer therewith.

    (4)     Note.  Where a reaction is indicated between a polyester and an
    ethylenically unsaturated reactant, such a reaction may occur prior to,
    concurrent with, or subsequent to the addition of a nonreactive material.
    For example, the reaction between polyethyleneglycol maleate with
    dicyclopentadiene and subsequently blended with 2 percent fiber glass is
    properly classified here.

    (5)     Note.  Unless otherwise indicated, addition polymers derived
    respectively from mono- and plural-ethylenically unsaturated reactants will
    be respectively considered saturated and unsaturated.  Thus, when blended
    with a DNRM and an appropriate polyester the composition containing the
    saturated polymer is not classified here while the unsaturated polymer is.

    (6)     Note.  An ethylenically unsaturated polymer may be one whose
    unsaturation was retained during or introduced after polymerization, e.g.,
    polymerization of butadiene, transesterification of hydroxy-terminated
    polyethylene terephthalate with methyl acrylate, dehydrohalogenation of
    polyvinylidene chloride, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    525,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 10+ for the
    admixture of an ethylenically unsaturated reactant admixed with either a
    polyester derived from a saturated di- or higher ester of a polycarboxylic
    acid as sole reactant or admixed with a polyester derived from a
    polycarboxylic acid or anhydride with a polyol wherein at least one of the
    reactants is saturated; and subclasses 242+ for the admixture of an
    ethylenically unsaturated reactant admixed with the polyester derived from
    ethylenically unsaturated reactants only.


CLS 523/501
TXT Product contains water, per se, or water of hydration as DNRM or admixed
    with other designated nonreactant material:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein the composition contains water as
    the designated nonreactive material either singly or in combination with
    other designated nonreactant materials.

    (1)     Note.  The water, however, may function both as a reactant as well
    as an inert material with the proviso that its latter role is clearly
    specified or claimed.  Thus, if a composition calls for the use of
    Al2(SO4)3 (alum) or MgSO4 as a DNRM, no weight is given to the fact that
    these materials are used in their hydrated state.  The hydrate must be
    claimed or its importance stated.  Water which accompanies a chemical
    reactant used in reacting with any or all of the components proper for this
    subclass is not considered to be a designated nonreactive material.  For
    example, the hydrolysis of hydroxy-terminated polyethylene glycol
    terephthalate with aqueous sodium hydroxide and subsequently blended with
    polybutadiene will not produce a composition containing an inert material.


CLS 523/502
TXT Composition contains water-in-oil or oil-in-water mixture:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein the composition contains or is
    prepared as an water-in-oil or oil-in-water emulsion, i.e., a fluid in
    which one liquid forms minute droplets suspended in the other liquid.

    (1)     Note.  A polymer suspension product prepared in part from an
    emulsified ingredient will not be considered as an emulsion but as a
    suspension, i.e., finely divided particles floating in a liquid and kept in
    this state by Brownian movement is classified in subclasses 501+.


CLS 523/503
TXT Organic nitrogen DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein an organic nitrogen compound is
    present as a DNRM, e.g., dimethyl glyoxime, etc.


CLS 523/504
TXT Organic chalcogen DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein an organic chalcogen compound is
    present as a DNRM, e.g., polyhydric alcohols, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Chalcogen is limited to oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium.


CLS 523/505
TXT Metal compound other than silicate as DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 501 wherein a metal-containing compound other
    than derived from a silicate is present as a DNRM, e.g., iron oxide, zinc
    oxide, etc.


CLS 523/506
TXT Phosphorus DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein a phosphorus-containing material
    is present as a DNRM, e.g., red phosphorus, trimethyl-phosphate, phosphonic
    acid, etc.


CLS 523/507
TXT Organic sulfur DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein an organic sulfur-containing
    compound is present as a DNRM, e.g., alkyl sulfones, sulfonated phenols,
    etc.


CLS 523/508
TXT Organic compound containing nitrogen DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein an organic nitrogen-containing
    compound is present as a DNRM, e.g., a lubricant which is an amine
    end-block dimethyl silicon fluid, etc.


CLS 523/509
TXT Carbohydrate or derivative including tannin or derivative DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein a carbohydrate or derivative is
    present as a DNRM, e.g., cellulose butyrate, dextran, rice hulls, etc.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "carbohydrate
    or derivative".

    (2)     Note.  Tannin or derivative is treated as a carbohydrate proper for
    this area; and see Class 560, subclass 68 for a definition of "tannin or
    derivative".


CLS 523/510
TXT Phenol, phenol ether or phenolate salt, DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein a phenol, phenol ether, or
    phenolate salt is present as a DNRM, e.g., resorcinol, anisole, etc.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 528, subclass 86 for a definition of the terms
    "phenol, phenol ether, or phenolate salt".


CLS 523/511
TXT Organic chalcogen other than metallocarboxylate salt, e.g., diethylene
    glycol, etc., DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein the organic DNRM contains a
    chalcogen atom other than as part of a metallocarboxylate salt, e.g.,
    diethyleneglycol, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Chalcogen for purposes of this subclass is limited to
    oxygen, selenium, or tellurium.

    (2)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "metal".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    514+,   for an organic compound containing a chalcogen atom as part of a
    metallocarboxylate salt.


CLS 523/512
TXT Elemental metal or elemental carbon DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein the DNRM is elemental metal or
    elemental carbon in any of its allotropic forms.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "metal".


CLS 523/513
TXT Designated nonreactive material (DNRM) has numerically specified
    characteristic, e.g., particle size, density, etc., other than viscosity,
    m.p., b.p., molec. wt., chemical composition or percentage range:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein the composition contains a DNRM
    having numerically specified limitations, e.g., particle size, density,
    etc., other than viscosity, melting point (m.p.), boiling point (b.p.),
    molecular weight (molec. wt.), chemical composition or percentage range.


CLS 523/514
TXT Metal atom other than as silicate DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein a material containing a metal
    atom other than one found in a silicate is present as a DNRM, e.g.,
    magnesium oxide, etc.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "metal".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    521,    for a DNRM in the form of a metal silicate other than glass, e.g.,
    mica, sand, etc.


CLS 523/515
TXT Transition metal atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 514 wherein a material containing a
    transition metal atom is present as a DNRM, e.g., zirconium oxide, iron
    oxide, titanium dioxide, etc.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "metal".


CLS 523/516
TXT Heavy metal atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 514 wherein a material containing a heavy
    metal atom is present as a DNRM, e.g., zinc stearate, organo antimony
    halide, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Heavy metals are those with a specified gravity equal to or
    greater than four.


CLS 523/517
TXT Halogenated hydrocarbon other than methylene chloride, chloroform, or
    carbon tetrachloride DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein a halogenated hydrocarbon
    exclusive of methylene chloride, chloroform, or carbon tetrachloride or
    mixtures thereof is present as a DNRM.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "halogenated
    hydrocarbon".


CLS 523/518
TXT Bituminous, coal, or hydrocarbon other than benzene, toluene, or xylene or
    mixtures thereof DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 where the DNRM is bituminous, coal, or a
    hydrocarbon other than benzene, toluene, or xylene or a mixture other than
    of the specified excluded hydrocarbons.

    (1)     Note.  The term bitumen refers to solid or semisolid materials
    which are often black or dark brown and which occur naturally or are
    obtained by refining petroleum or are the components of coal which are
    soluble in organic solvents. The term also applies generically to include
    natural and synthetic asphalts, tar, and pitches.  For example, natural
    asphalts such as Trinidad, Bermuda, glisonite, grahamite and Cuban, etc.
    Petroleum asphalt may be used such as these obtained from California
    crudes, Smake over Arkansas crudes, Mid-Continental air-blown oils, Mexican
    petroleum asphalts, tarry residues known as cracked asphalts by-products
    during the cracking of gas, oil, or other heavier petroleum fractions to
    obtain gasoline or other lighter fractions, etc.  Further still, bituminous
    materials may be used such as coal tar, wood tar, petroleum pitches, and
    pitches obtained from various industrial processes such as a fatty acid
    pitch, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Included within the subclass are oil shale or shale material
    from which oil has or has not been recovered as well as stearine pitch,
    coke products, coal tar and pitches.


CLS 523/521
TXT Inorganic silicon atom other than glass DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein inorganic silicon other than as
    found in glass is present as a DNRM, e.g., kaolin, chrysotile asbestos, etc.


CLS 523/522
TXT Contains graft, graft-type, block, or block-type copolymer:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein the composition contains a graft
    graft-type, block, or block-type copolymer.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition to "graft, and
    graft-type copolymer" and "block and block-type copolymer".


CLS 523/523
TXT Contains solid polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only, one of which
    contains chalcogen; or solid polymer reacted with ethylenic
    reactant-containing chalcogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein the composition contains a solid
    polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only wherein at least one of the
    reactants contains chalcogen, e.g., polyethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer,
    etc.; or a solid polymer reacted with an ethylenic reactant containing a
    chalcogen atom, e.g., reacting methyl acrylate with polyethylene glycol
    maleate, phenol-formaldehyde novolak with methyl methacrylate, polymethyl
    methacrylate with styrene, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Chalcogen for purposes of this subclass includes oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium.


CLS 523/526
TXT Contains polymer derived from ethylenically unsaturated reactant only:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein the composition contains a
    polymer derived from ethylenically unsaturated reactants only, e.g.,
    styrene, etc.


CLS 523/527
TXT Glass DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein the composition contains glass as
    a DNRM, e.g., fiber glass, etc.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "glass".


CLS 524/
TTL SYNTHETIC RESINS OR NATURAL RUBBERS -- PART OF THE CLASS 520 SERIES

CLS 524/1
TXT Adding a NRM to a preformed solid polymer or preformed specified
    intermediate condensation product, composition thereof; or process of
    treating or composition thereof:

    Subject matter under Class 523, subclass 1 wherein a nonreactant material
    (NRM) is admixed with a preformed solid polymer (SP) or preformed specified
    intermediate condensation product (SICP), or the product of such an
    admixing process.

    (1)     Note.  In many instances wherein a composition is claimed the
    claims do not indicate the mode of production of the composition.  In the
    absence of such information it is necessary to review the disclosure to
    determine the mode of preparation of the composition. If it is disclosed
    that the composition can be prepared by admixing a NRM with a preformed
    solid polymer or specified intermediate, a notation into this area is
    required.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass and the indented subclasses hereunder provide
    for chemical or physical treatments and the products thereof of
    compositions containing a solid polymer or a preformed specified
    intermediate composition and a NRM when the claims fails to recite the mode
    of preparation of the composition and the specification is as noted in the
    (1) Note, above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclass 255
    for polymer or resin containing compositions which contain hazardous or
    toxic waste to prevent its release into the environment.


CLS 524/2
TXT Water settable inorganic compound as nonreactive material:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the added nonreactant material is
    an inorganic material hardenable by hydration to produce a solid mass,
    e.g., Portland cement, gypsum cement, etc.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes an inorganic material claimed or
    disclosed by the term "cement" or "setting agent", e.g., aluminum oxide
    cement, etc.


CLS 524/3
TXT Solid polymer or specified intermediate condensation product derived from
    reactant-containing atom other than C, H, O, N, or halogen and which is
    devoid of a fused or bridged ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein a solid polymer or specified
    intermediate condensation product derived from at least one reactant
    containing an atom other than carbon, hydrogen, oxygen, nitrogen, or
    halogen, and which reactant is devoid of fused or bridged-ring system is
    present.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "fused- or
    bridged-ring system".


CLS 524/4
TXT Solid polymer or specified intermediate condensation product derived from
    at least one oxygen-containing reactant and which is devoid of a fused-ring
    or bridged-ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein a solid polymer or specified
    intermediate condensation product is derived from at least one oxygen
    containing reactant and devoid of fused-or bridged-ring system is present.


CLS 524/5
TXT Derived from carboxylic acid or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 wherein at least one of the oxygen
    reactants of the solid polymer or specified intermediate product is a
    carboxylic acid or derivative.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition for the terms "carboxylic
    acid or derivative".


CLS 524/6
TXT Derived from phenolic compound or aldehyde-containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 wherein at least one of the oxygen
    reactants of the solid polymer or specified intermediate condensation
    product is an aryl-OH containing compound or a compound containing an
    aldehyde group.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "aldehyde".


CLS 524/7
TXT Solid polymer derived from halogen-containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein a solid polymer derived from a
    halogen containing reactant is present.


CLS 524/8
TXT Solid polymer derived from ethylenically unsaturated hydrocarbon only:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein a solid polymer derived from
    ethylenically unsaturated hydrocarbon monomer only is present.


CLS 524/9
TXT Cellular material derived from plant or animal source DNRM other than
    cotton, farinaceous meals or flours, blood, diatomaceous earth, chalk, or
    other fossilized matter:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a solid polymer or specified
    intermediate condensation product is admixed with a designated nonreactant
    naturally occurring material or chemically modified naturally occurring
    material and wherein the natural or modified material still retains a
    certain amount of the original tissue structure of the animal or plant.

    (1)     Note.  Included within the term are materials which are chopped,
    cut, comminuted, pulverized, milled, sliced, etc.  Included herein is
    soybean and wood flour.

    (2)     Note.  An extract is considered to be devoid of original cellular
    structure.

    (3)     Note.  Although cotton, whole blood, farinaceous meals and flours,
    and diatomaceous earth or chalk may have cellular structure they have been
    specifically excluded from this subclass and are to be found in other
    subclasses in this schedule.  See subclass 21 for blood, subclass 34 for
    cotton, subclasses 47+ for farinaceous meals or flours, and subclass 448
    for diatomaceous earths.

    (4)     Note.  In the absence of information to the contrary a protein is
    presumed to be devoid of cellular structure unless indicated otherwise.

    (5)     Note.  In the absence of information to the contrary a cellulose or
    cellulose derivative is considered to be devoid of cellular structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17+,    for a proteinaceous extract.

    21,     for whole blood.

    35+     and 47+, for a cellulosic extract or starch extract respectively.

    702+,   wherein cellular material from biological source is present as DNRM
    during formation of a solid polymer or SICP.


CLS 524/10
TXT Animal derived:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein the cellular DNRM is derived from a
    plant source.


CLS 524/11
TXT Leather:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein the cellular DNRM is the hide or
    skin of an animal, i.e., leather.


CLS 524/12
TXT Hair removed from pelt, e.g., wool, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein the cellular DNRM is hair that has
    been removed from the skin or pelt of an animal, e.g., wool, etc.


CLS 524/13
TXT Wood or wood cellulose fiber, or flour:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein the cellular DNRM is wood or wood
    cellulose fiber or flour derived from wood cellulose.

    (1)     Note.  In the absence of information of the contrary cellulose or
    derivatives thereof will be assumed to be devoid of cellular structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35+,    for a cellular product devoid of cellular structure.


CLS 524/14
TXT At least one solid polymer or SICP derived from at least one nonethylenic
    reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein the wood or wood cellulose fiber
    or flour is admixed with a solid polymer or specified intermediate
    condensation product derived from at least one nonethylenic reactant.


CLS 524/15
TXT Vegetable shell, hull, or cob ingredient, e.g., nut shells, pits, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein the cellular DNRM is a vegetable
    shell, hull, or cob ingredient.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are shell, hull, or cob materials which need
    not be specifically removed from the original vegetable material, as well
    as materials which have been removed from the vegetable and then admixed
    with the polymer or SICP.


CLS 524/16
TXT Bark or cork:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein the cellular DNRM is bark or cork.

    (1)     Note.  Bark is any portion of a stem or root of a tree outside of
    the cambrium circle.

    (2)     Note.  Cork is the exterior layer of the bark of certain trees.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13+,    for wood to which the bark or cork is still attached.


CLS 524/17
TXT Protein or biologically active polypeptide DNRM excluding wheat flour or
    natural cereals which may contain protein ingredient:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a solid polymer or specified
    intermediate condensation product is admixed with a designated nonreactant
    material which is a protein or a biologically active polypeptide.

    (1)     Note.  Cereal flours which may contain protein have been excluded
    herefrom and can be found under carbohydrates in subclasses 47+.

    (2)     Note.  Glue absent disclosure to the contrary is considered as
    being animal derived and is classified in subclass 21.

    (3)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "protein or
    biologically active polypeptide".


CLS 524/18
TXT With natural resin or carbohydrate DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 17 wherein the protein or polypeptide DNRM is
    admixed with an additional DNRM which is a natural resin or a modified form
    thereof or carbohydrate.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is shellac, copal, rosin, etc.

    (2)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term carbohydrates
    or natural resin.


CLS 524/19
TXT Hydrocarbon material DNRM which is nonsolid polymer, e.g., wax, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 17 wherein the protein or polypeptide DNRM is
    admixed with a hydrocarbon DNRM and which hydrocarbon DNRM is other than a
    solid polymer, e.g., hydrocarbon wax, etc.


CLS 524/20
TXT Two or more diverse proteins or polypeptides:

    Subject matter under subclass 17 wherein the DNRM contains at least two
    proteins, two polypeptides, or at least one protein and at least one
    polypeptide NRM.


CLS 524/21
TXT Animal derived protein or polypeptide other than casein, e.g., blood, egg
    albumin, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 17 wherein the protein or polypeptide DNRM is
    other than casein or a derivative thereof and is derived from an animal
    source.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is blood, egg albumin, glue, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Glue absent disclosure to the contrary is considered as
    being animal derived and proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25+,    for a casein or derivative.


CLS 524/22
TXT Gelatin:

    Subject matter under subclass 21 wherein the protein is gelatin or a
    derivative thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Gelatin is a protein obtained from collagen by usually
    boiling skin, ligaments, tendons or bones with water.


CLS 524/23
TXT Solid polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only:

    Subject matter under subclass 22 wherein the gelatin DNRM is admixed with a
    solid polymer derived form ethylenic reactants only.


CLS 524/24
TXT Derived from carboxylic acid or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein at least one of the ethylenic
    reactants is a carboxylic acid or derivative.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "carboxylic
    acid or derivative.


CLS 524/25
TXT Casein or derivative or soy protein:

    Subject matter under subclass 17 wherein the protein or polypeptide DNRM is
    casein or derivative or a protein or polypeptide derived form the soybean
    plant.

    (1)     Note.  Casein is the principal protein in milk.  It is a
    phosphoprotein consisting of about 15 amino acids and has a molecular
    weight ranging from 75,000 to 375,000.


CLS 524/26
TXT Solid polymer or SICP derived from carboxylic acid or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 25 wherein the casein or soy protein DNRM is
    admixed with at least one solid polymer or specified intermediate
    condensation derived from at least one carboxylic acid or derivative.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "carboxylic
    acid or derivative".


CLS 524/27
TXT Carbohydrate or derivative DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a solid polymer or specified
    intermediate condensation product is admixed with a designated nonreactant
    material which is a carbohydrate, or derivative.

    (1)     Note.  Included within the definition are cellulose, starch,
    farinaceous meals or flours, sugars, 0-glycosides, n-glycosides, and
    s-glycosides.

    (2)     Note.  Tannins, lignins, and derivatives thereof have been excluded
    herein from being carbohydrates and are found below in subclasses 72+.

    (3)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term carbohydrate
    or derivative.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72+,    for lignins or tannins utilized as DNRM's materials and appropriate
    subclasses below for sugar acids or sugar alcohols as well as carbohydrate
    reaction products which contain fewer than five carbon atoms, or for
    carbohydrate reaction products wherein the carbohydrate nucleus has been
    destroyed.


CLS 524/28
TXT Algin or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 wherein the carbohydrate DNRM is algin or
    a derivative thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Algin is a carbohydrate product usually extracted from giant
    brown seaweed (e.g., giant kelp, etc.).


CLS 524/29
TXT Atom other than O, H, C, S, or Group IA metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 wherein the carbohydrate DNRM contains an
    atom other than oxygen, hydrogen, carbon, sulfur, or a group IA metal atom
    (Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs).


CLS 524/30
TXT Atom other than N, O, H, C, S, or Group IA metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 29 wherein the carbohydrate DNRM contains an
    atom other than nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, hydrogen, carbon, or a Group IA
    metal atom.


CLS 524/31
TXT Cellulose derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 29 wherein the carbohydrate is a nitrogen
    compound containing repeating glucose units, which repeating units have the
    following structure:


CLS 524/32
TXT Solid polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only:

    Subject matter under subclass 31 wherein the carbohydrate is mixed with a
    solid polymer derived from only ethylenic reactants.


CLS 524/33
TXT Solid polymer or SICP derived from at least one aldehyde or aldehyde
    derivative reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 31 wherein the carbohydrate is admixed with a
    solid polymer or specified intermediate condensation product derived from
    at least one aldehyde or aldehyde derivative.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "aldehyde or
    aldehyde derivative".


CLS 524/34
TXT Paper plant solid waste material or cotton, e.g., white liquor, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 wherein the carbohydrate is a material in
    a paper making process, e.g., paper, etc., or is cotton.


CLS 524/35
TXT Cellulose:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 wherein the carbohydrate contains
    repeating glucose units, which repeating units have the following structure:

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31+,    for a NRM which is a nitrogen containing cellulose compound.


CLS 524/36
TXT Sulfur containing ester, e.g., viscose, xanthate, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 35 wherein the cellulose DNRM contains at
    least one sulfur atom.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is viscose as a DNRM and which is usually
    made by reacting carbon disulfide with the sodium salt of cellulose to
    yield a xanthate, which forms a viscous collodial solution in dilute
    aqueous alkali.



    This subclass provides for the colloidal solution as well as the cellulose
    xanthate.


CLS 524/37
TXT Carboxylic acid ester:

    Subject matter under subclass 35 wherein the cellulose contains at least
    one carboxylic acid ester group therein.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "carboxylic
    acid ester group".


CLS 524/38
TXT Mixed carboxylate ester:

    Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein the cellulose contains at least
    two diverse carboxylic acid ester groups.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are, e.g., cellulose acetate butyrate,
    cellulose butyrate benzoate, etc.


CLS 524/39
TXT Acetate:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 wherein at least one of the carboxylic
    acid ester groups  of

    the cellulose is a -O - - CH3 group.


CLS 524/40
TXT At least one solid polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 wheren the carbohydrate is mixed with a
    solid polymer derived from only ethylenic reactants.


CLS 524/41
TXT Acetate:

    Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein the cellulose contains at least one

    -O-- CH3 group.


CLS 524/42
TXT Ether group containing, other than solely linking of carbohydrate groups
    directly to each other:

    Subject matter under subclass 35 wherein the cellulose has the general
    formula R-O-R', wherein R-O- is a cellulose moiety and R' is a carbon atom
    of a noncarbohydrate containing organic radical.


CLS 524/43
TXT Hydroxyalkyl:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 wherein the cellulose has the general
    formula R-O-R'-OH wherein R-O- is a cellulose moiety and -R'-OH is a
    noncarbohydrate containing organic radical wherein a carbon of the R' group
    is directly bonded to an oxygen of the O-R group.


CLS 524/44
TXT Hydroxyethyl:

    Subject matter under subclass 43 wherein the R'-OH group of the cellulose
    DNRM contains the -O-C-C-OH group.


CLS 524/45
TXT Carboxyalkyl or alkali metal salt thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 wherein the cellulose DNRM has the general
    formula

    R-O-R'--OH or R-O-R'- metal, wherein R-O- is a cellulose moiety and

    - R'--OH or -R'- metal are noncarbohydrate containing organic radicals and
    wherein a carbon of the R' group is directly bonded to an oxygen atom of
    the O-R group.


CLS 524/46
TXT Alkyl:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 wherein the cellulose DNRM has the general
    formula R-O-R', wherein R-O- is a cellulose moiety and R' is a carbon atom
    of a noncarbohydrate containing acyclic organic moiety.


CLS 524/47
TXT Starch or derivative or farinaceous meal or flour:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 wherein the carbohydrate DNRM is a
    compound containing amylose and amylopectin as its main components or
    derivatives thereof; or wherein the DNRM is a farinaceous meal or flour.

    (1)     Note.  Starches are heterogenous in that the amylose and
    amylopectin occur in different ratios to each other.

    (2)     Note.  Starches yield dextrin upon extensive degradation and yield
    glucose upon complete hydrolysis.

    (3)     Note.  Farinaceous meal or flour is intended to include the starch
    products derived from cereal grains and cereal grasses (e.g., corn, wheat,
    rice, oats, barley, sorghum, etc.) and starch materials derived from tuber
    plants (e.g., potato, yams, arrowroot, etc.).

    (4)     Note.  Included herein are starch fractions such as amylose and
    amylopectin as well as modified starches (e.g., thin boiling starches,
    etc.).

    (5)     Note.  Although some farinaceous materials, e.g., flour, contain
    minor amounts of proteinaceous materials, such materials will be considered
    proper for this area rather than in the protein area in subclass 17.

    (6)     Note.  Some farinaceous materials contain minor amounts of dextrin;
    however, a patent will not be placed in subclass 48 unless the patent
    specifically desires or delineates dextrin as a desired feature.


CLS 524/48
TXT Dextrin or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 47 wherein the starch is a gummy
    polysaccharide produced by thermal or acid degradation of starch, and
    derivatives of such compounds.

    (1)     Note.  Dextrins are carbohydrates, intermediate between starch and
    sugars. Degradation of dextrin yields maltose and glucose.


CLS 524/49
TXT Aldehyde reaction product:

    Subject matter under subclass 47 wherein the starch contains at least two
    aldehyde groups and is the product generally resulting from the reaction
    between starch or a derivative thereof and a reactant containing the
    functional group

    --OH and derivatives of such compounds.


CLS 524/50
TXT Ether group, other than solely linking of carbohydrate groups directly to
    each other:

    Subject matter under subclass 47 wherein the starch has the general formula
    R-O-R', wherein -R-O is a starch moiety and R' is a carbon atom of a
    noncarbohydrate containing organic radical and which carbon is not directly
    bonded to a chalcogen atom by a double bond.


CLS 524/51
TXT Ester:

    Subject matter under subclass 47 wherein the starch is a compound resulting
    from the reaction of a hydroxyl group of a starch and an acid.


CLS 524/52
TXT Solid polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only:

    Subject matter under subclass 47 wherein the carbohydrate is mixed with a
    solid polymer derived from only ethylenic reactants.


CLS 524/53
TXT At least one carboxylic acid ester:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein the solid polymer derived from
    ethylenic reactants only is derived from at least one carboxylic acid ester.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "carboxylic
    acid ester".


CLS 524/54
TXT Dextran or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 wherein the carbohydrate is higher
    molecular weight polysaccharide containing D-glucose units linked
    predominately as      D (1! 6).

    (1)     Note.  Dextrans yield only glucose on hydrolysis but differ from
    starch and glycogen as to molecular structure.

    (2)     Note.  Dextrans are a group of compounds differing according to the
    bacteria used to ferment the sugar.


CLS 524/55
TXT Gum or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 wherein the carbohydrate is a highly
    branched polysaccharide composed of two or more monosaccharides and which
    are exudations of plants which are produced by the plant to cover wounds
    and to prevent attack by organisms.


CLS 524/56
TXT Disaccharide or trisaccharide, e.g., sucrose, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 wherein the carbohydrate contains only two
    or three monomeric units each of which contains at least five carbon atoms.

    (1)     Note.  Included within the definition of the di- and tri-
    saccharides are, e.g., sucrose, lactose, maltose, cellobiose, etc.


CLS 524/57
TXT Ester:

    Subject matter under subclass 56 wherein the di or trisaccharide is a
    compound resulting from the reaction of a hydroxyl group of a di or
    trisaccharide and an acid.


CLS 524/58
TXT Monosaccharide, e.g., glucose, fructose, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 wherein the carbohydrate contains only a
    single unit containing at least five or more carbon atoms.

    (1)     Note.  Included within the definition of a monosaccharide are,
    e.g., glucose, fructose, ribose, etc.


CLS 524/59
TXT Coal, bituminous additive, extract, or derivative thereof; or oil shale; or
    fatty still residue DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a solid polymer or specified
    intermediate condensation product is admixed with a designated nonreactant
    material which is coal or a derivative or extract thereof; or is a
    bituminous material or a derivative or extract thereof; or is a fatty still
    residue.

    (1)     Note.  Included within the subclass are oil shale or shale material
    from which oil has or has not been recovered as well as stearine pitch,
    coke products, coal tar and pitches.

    (2)     Note.  Chemical compounds which are the result of a synthesis
    reaction utilizing a petroleum or coal source as a reactant are not the
    type of material which will generally qualify as a DNRM under this
    subclass, and see in particular subclasses 474+ for a hydrocarbon DNRM
    which is derived from coal.

    (3)     Note.  Included within this subclass are materials generally
    described as asphalt.  Asphalt derived from natural deposits, e.g.,
    gilsonite, etc., coal or petroleum is included herein.

    (4)     Note.  Bitumen refers to solid or semisolid materials which are
    often black or dark brown and which occur naturally or are obtained by
    refining petroleum or are the components of coal which are soluble in
    organic solvents. The term also applies generically to include natural and
    synthetic asphalts, tar and pitches.  For example, natural asphalts such as
    Trinidad, Bermuda, glisonite, grahamite and Cuban, etc. Petroleum asphalt
    may be used such as these obtained from California crudes, Smack over
    Arkansas crudes, Mid-Continental air-blown oils, Mexican petroleum
    asphalts, tarry residues known as cracked asphalts by-products during the
    cracking of gas oil, or other heavier petroleum fractions to obtain
    gasoline or other lighter fractions, etc.  Further still, bituminous
    materials may be used such as coal tar, wood tar, petroleum pitches, and
    pitches obtained from various industrial processes such as a fatty acid
    pitch, etc.

    (5)     Note.  Materials which are substantially known as to chemical
    constitution are excluded from this subclass and are classified below in
    the schedule on the basis of chemical constitution.  If any doubt exists as
    to whether a material is of sufficient chemical identify so as to be
    classified as a specific DNRM, then such doubt is to be resolved by
    classifying the claim as an original in this area and cross-referencing to
    the appropriate DNRM area.  Certain hydrocarbon materials which have been
    designated as not being proper herein are hydrocarbon waxes, fluxing oils,
    low molecular weight addition polymers, hydrocarbon petroleum distillation
    products, petroleum and petroleum crude oils.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    64,     for a material designated as asphaltene.


CLS 524/60
TXT With water additive DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the DNRM is in admixture with free
    water as a DNRM.


CLS 524/61
TXT With nitrogen containing additive DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 wherein a nitrogen containing DNRM is in
    admixture with the DNRM and water DNRM.


CLS 524/62
TXT With hydrocarbon DNRM additive which is nonresinous and which is
    nonbituminous, or noncoal derived, e.g., cutback asphalt, kerosene,
    paraffin wax, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the DNRM is admixed with a DNRM
    which is a hydrocarbon material and which is other than coal or a
    bituminous material or a hydrocarbon material proper for this subclass as a
    designated nonreactant material.

    (1)     Note.  Specific hydrocarbon compounds although derived from coal or
    bituminous material have been specifically excluded from subclass 59 as not
    proper therein (see Notes 2 and 5).  Such materials, however, will qualify
    for this subclass when in admixture with a designated nonreactant material
    which is proper under the definiiton of subclass 59.

    (2)     Note.  Included within this subclass as hydrocarbon materials are
    hydrocarbon waxes, fluxing oils, low molecular weight hydrocarbon addition
    polymers, hydrocarbon petroleum distillation products, petroleum, petroleum
    crude oils, etc.


CLS 524/63
TXT Coke additive:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the DNRM is coke.

    (1)     Note.  Coke for purposes of this subclass is the carbonaceous
    reside (70-78%) remaining after the volatile constituents have been removed
    by destructive distillation from coal, petroleum, pitch, or other
    carbonaceous material.


CLS 524/64
TXT Asphaltene or maltene additive:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the DNRM is asphaltene or a
    maltene additive.

    (1)     Note.  It is recognized that asphaltene or maltene occur in asphalt
    and that therefor every asphaltene product would have these constituents.
    For purposes of this subclass, there must be an expressed desire to limit
    other than completely removed or increase or in some other way select that
    added material for its critical maltene or asphaltene content.

    (2)     Note.  Asphalt is a collodial system which has a disperse phase and
    a continuous phase.  The components of highest molecular weight, i.e.,
    micelles constitute the disperse phase and are known as asphaltenes.  The
    continuous or intermicellular phase represents the compounds of lower
    molecular weight and are called maltenes.


CLS 524/65
TXT Coal derived additive, e.g., lignite, etc:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the DNRM is coal or a material
    derived therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  Solid resin materials produced by subjecting coal tar
    distillate fractions to elevated temperature and pressure are not deemed to
    be resins for purposes of Class 520, subclass 1 and therefore can be a DNRM
    when admixed with a solid polymer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    474+,   appropriate subclasses for specific chemical compounds or mixtures
    which are coal derived.

    498     through 612, for a solid polymer or specified intermediate
    condensation product in admixture with a hydrocarbon derived from coal and
    which hydrocarbon fails to meet the definition of subclasses 474+.


CLS 524/66
TXT Tar or pitch:

    Subject matter under subclass 65 wherein the DNRM is a mixed aromatic
    hydrocarbon product obtained by the distillation of bituminous coal.


CLS 524/67
TXT Oil shale:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the DNRM is oil shale rock.

    (1)     Note.  Oil shale is a sedimentary rock that contains little or no
    oil and contains organic material derived from aquatic organisms, waxy
    spores, and pollen grains which are converted to oil by thermal cracking.
    The pyrobituminous organic material which forms oil by pyrolysis is called
    kerogen.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein is oil shale which contains the organic
    material as well as spent oil shale rock.


CLS 524/68
TXT Two or more solid polymers, or graft or graft-type, or block or block-type
    solid copolymer:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the DNRM is admixed with two or
    more solid polymers, or with a block, block-type, graft or graft-type solid
    copolymer.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the terms "block,
    block-type, graft or graft-type solid copolymer".

    (2)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass, a SICP is treated as a solid
    polymer.


CLS 524/69
TXT Solid polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only at least one of which
    contains a carboxylic acid or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the DNRM is admixed with a solid
    polymer derived from only ethylenic reactants at least one of which is a
    carboxylic acid or derivative.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "carboxylic
    acid or derivative".


CLS 524/70
TXT Solid polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only, at least one of which
    is propylene:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the DNRM is admixed with a solid
    polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only, at least one of which is
    propylene.


CLS 524/71
TXT Solid polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only, at least one of which
    is a hydrocarbon other than ethylene:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the DNRM is admixed with a solid
    polymer derived form ethylenic reactants only at least one of which is a
    hydrocarbon other than ethylene.


CLS 524/72
TXT Lignin or tannin or derivative DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a solid polymer or specified
    intermediate condensation product is admixed with a designated nonreactant
    material which is lignin or tannin or derivative thereof:

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "lignin or
    derivative", and Class 560, subclass 68 for a definition of the term
    "tannin or derivative".

    (2)     Note.  Lignin derivatives include those generally recovered from
    sulfite spent liquors of the wood-pulping industry, e.g., lignosulfonate,
    etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13+,    for compositions wherein the lignin is associated with a
    carbohydrate which contains some cellular structure, e.g., wood flour,
    hydrolyzed wood, etc.


CLS 524/73
TXT Reaction product of lignin or tannin or derivative with an oxygen or
    nitrogen containing organic reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the DNRM is a reaction product of
    a lignin or tannin or derivative and an organic reactant containing an
    oxygen or nitrogen atom, e.g., formaldehyde reacted lignin, etc.


CLS 524/74
TXT Solid polymer or specified intermediate condensation product derived from a
    phenolic compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein a solid polymer or a specified
    intermediate condensation product derived from a phenolic monomer is
    present, e.g., resole resin, etc.


CLS 524/75
TXT Solid polymer contains halogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the DNRM is admixed with a
    halogen-containing solid polymer.

    (1)     Note.  To be proper herein, the solid polymer need not be derived
    from a halogen-containing reactant.


CLS 524/76
TXT Solid polymer derived from ethylenically unsaturated hydrocarbon only:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein a solid polymer derived from
    ethylenically unsaturated hydrocarbon monomer only is present.


CLS 524/77
TXT Natural resin or modified forms thereof other than rosin or its modified
    forms DNRM, e.g., shellac, dammar, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a solid polymer or specified
    intermediate condensation product is admixed with a designated nonreactant
    material which is a natural resin and is other than a rosin or a modified
    form thereof, e.g., shellac, dammar, copal, etc.

    (1)     Note.  The material "vinsol" is included herein as a natural resin
    since rosin has been separated from the resinous pinewood extract which is
    the raw material.  Wood tar, wood pitch, or pine tar are excluded herefrom
    unless disclosure specifically denotes these materials as being resinous.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     for wood tar, wood pitch, or pine tar not disclosed as being
    resinous.

    270+,   for rosin or tall oil as a DNRM, e.g., colophony, abietic acid, etc.

    485,    for a DNRM which is turpentine, turpentine oil, oil of turpentine,
    or spirits of turpentine.


CLS 524/78
TXT Residue of undetermined constitution derived from destructive distillation
    of a plant or animal source or plant or animal extract of undetermined
    constitution DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a solid polymer or specified
    intermediate condensation product is admixed with a designated nonreactant
    material, which material is a residue of undetermined constitution and is
    obtained from a destructive distillation process or from solvent extraction
    of a plant or animal source, e.g., pine tar, wood tar, or pitch, etc.

    (1)     Note.  The residue obtained must be the material obtained directly
    by the destructive distillation or solvent extraction step.  Any subsequent
    step to remove by solvent extraction or by any other means in order to
    obtain a fraction which may yield a residue, such as by evaporation of the
    solvent, is not proper herein and will be classified below on the
    particular fraction obtained.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    485,    for a DNRM which is turpentine, turpentine oil, oil of turpentine,
    or spirits of turpentine.


CLS 524/79
TXT DNRM is derived from pyrolysis of previously formed solid synthetic polymer:

    Subject matter or specified intermediate condensation product is admixed
    with a designated nonreactant material which is the product resulting from
    the decomposition of a solid synthetic polymer by heat.


CLS 524/80
TXT DNRM which is other than silicon dioxide, glass, titanium dioxide, water,
    halohydrocarbon, hydrocarbon, or elemental carbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the added nonreactant material is a
    designated nonreactant material (DNRM), and wherein the designated
    nonreactant material is other than silicon dioxide, glass, hydrated silicon
    dioxide, water in any of its physical states, elemental carbon in any of
    its physical states, compounds containing only carbon and hydrogen, or
    compounds containing only carbon, hydrogen, and halogen, or only carbon and
    halogen.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 523, subclass 1 for a definition of the term
    designated nonreactant material.

    (2)     Note.  Mixtures of the excluded DNRM materials are also excluded
    herefrom and are searchable in the appropriate subclasses below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    462+,   for a DNRM organic compound containing a fluorine or iodine atom,
    and only carbon and/or hydrogen atoms.

    464+,   for a DNRM organic compound containing a chlorine or bromine atom,
    and only carbon and/or hydrogen atoms.

    474+,   for a mixture of hydrocarbons or a numerically described
    hydrocarbon DNRM.

    492+,   for a numerically defined inorganic silicon-containing DNRM.

    495+,   for an elemental carbon DNRM which is numerically defined.

    497+,   for titanium dioxide DNRM which is numerically defined.

    498     thru 612, for a solid polymer or SICP admixed with a nonreactant
    material and for a solid polymer or SICP admixed with DNRM's which are
    excluded from subclasses 80+.


CLS 524/81
TXT Organic DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the designated nonreactant
    material is an organic material.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "organic".


CLS 524/82
TXT Sulfur atom as part of a hetero ring DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 81 wherein the organic designated nonreactant
    material is a compound containing a hetero ring with at least one sulfur
    atom in the ring.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition of a "heterocyclic
    compound".

    (2)     Note.  The hetero ring herein may be fused or bridged to a ring
    system.


CLS 524/83
TXT Hetero ring contains sulfur and at least one diverse hetero atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 82 wherein the hetero ring contains at least
    one hetero atom other than sulfur, i.e., oxygen, nitrogen, selenium, or
    tellurium.


CLS 524/84
TXT Five-membered sulfur ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 82 wherein the hetero ring is a five-membered
    ring.


CLS 524/85
TXT Three-memered sulfur ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 82 wherein the hetero ring is a
    three-membered ring.


CLS 524/86
TXT Nitrogen atom as part of a hetero ring DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 81 wherein the organic designated nonreactant
    material is a compound containing a hetero ring with at least one nitrogen
    atom in the ring.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition of a "heterocyclic
    compound".


CLS 524/87
TXT Nitrogen ring directly fused or bridged to a ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein the hetero nitrogen ring is
    directly fused or bridged to a ring system.

    (1)     Note.  A ring system herein may contain more than one ring.

    (2)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "fused- or
    bridged-ring system".


CLS 524/88
TXT Tetrabenzoporphyrazine nucleus containing, e.g., phthalocyanine, etc:

    Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein the fused or bridged nitrogen ring
    system contains a tetrabenzoporphyrazine nucleus (four benzopyrrole nuclel
    joined by four nitrogen atoms, e.g., phthalocyanine pigment


CLS 524/89
TXT Nitrogen ring is part of a ring system having three or more rings fused or
    bridged together:

    Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein the fused or bridged nitrogen ring
    system contains at least three rings.


CLS 524/90
TXT Nitrogen ring is part of a ring system having five or more rings fused or
    bridged together:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the fused or bridged nitrogen ring
    system has at least five rings.


CLS 524/91
TXT Three or more nitrogen atoms in the fused or bridged ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein the fused or bridged hetero
    nitrogen ring containing ring system contains three or more nitrogen atoms.

    (1)     Note.  The nitrogen atoms may be in the same ring or different
    rings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    92+,    for a compound containing two or more fused- or bridged-ring
    nitrogen containing systems wherein each of the fused or bridged ring
    systems contains no more than two hetero nitrogens.


CLS 524/92
TXT Two nitrogen atoms in the fused or bridged ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein the fused- or bridged-hetero ring
    containing ring system contains only two nitrogen atoms.


CLS 524/93
TXT 1,3-diazole:

    Subject matter under subclass 92 wherein the fused- or bridged-hetero ring
    containing ring system contains a 1,3-diazole ring, e.g., imidazole;


CLS 524/94
TXT Five-membered nitrogen containing ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein the fused- or bridged-hetero ring
    is a five-membered nitrogen containing ring.


CLS 524/95
TXT At least one diverse hetero atom in same ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein the hetero ring contains at least
    one hetero atom other than nitrogen, i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium.


CLS 524/96
TXT Six-membered nitrogen ring having at least one diverse hetero atom, e.g.,
    morpholine, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 95 wherein the hetero ring is a six-membered
    nitrogen containing ring, e.g., morpholine, etc.


CLS 524/97
TXT Two or more nitrogen rings:

    Subject matter under subclass 96 wherein the heterocyclic compound contains
    at least one nitrogen hetero-containing ring in addition to the
    six-membered hetero ring.


CLS 524/98
TXT Nitrogen ring having at least seven ring members:

    Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein the nitrogen hetero ring contains
    at least seven ring members, e.g., caprolactam, etc.


CLS 524/99
TXT Six-membered nitrogen ring, e.g., pyridine, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein the nitrogen hetero ring is a
    six-membered ring, e.g., pyridine, etc.


CLS 524/100
TXT Six-membered nitrogen ring having two or more ring nitrogen atoms:

    Subject matter under subclass 99 wherein the six-membered N hetero ring
    contains two or more ring nitrogen atoms.


CLS 524/101
TXT Three oxygen atoms are directly bonded to three nuclear carbon atoms of the
    nitrogen ring, e.g., (iso) cyanurate, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein three nuclear carbon atoms of the
    six-membered hetero ring are directly bonded to three oxygen atoms  ,  e.g.,


CLS 524/102
TXT Two or more nitrogen rings:

    Subject matter under subclass 99 wherein the heterocyclic compound contains
    at least one hetero nitrogen containing ring in addition to the
    six-membered hetero ring.


CLS 524/103
TXT Nonhetero nitrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 102 wherein the heterocyclic compound
    contains a nitrogen atom other than the nitrogen atom in a hetero ring.


CLS 524/104
TXT Five-membered nitrogen ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein the nitrogen hetero ring is a
    five-membered ring.


CLS 524/105
TXT Two or more nitrogen rings:

    Subject matter under subclass 104 wherein the heterocyclic compound
    contains at least one nitrogen hetero ring in addition to the five-membered
    hetero ring.


CLS 524/106
TXT Five-membered nitrogen ring having two or more ring nitrogen atoms:

    Subject matter under subclass 104 wherein the five-membered hetero ring
    contains at least two ring nitrogen atoms, e.g.,


CLS 524/107
TXT At least one chalcogen atom as part of a hetero ring (chalcogen=O, Se, Te)
    DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 81 wherein the organic designated nonreactant
    material is a compound containing a hetero ring with at least one chalcogen
    atom (i.e., oxygen, selenium, or tellurium) in the ring.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition of a "heterocyclic
    compound".

    (2)     Note.  The hetero ring herein may be fused or bridged to a ring
    system; and see the Glossary for a definition of "fused or bridged".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277,    for a beeswax containing a lactone.


CLS 524/108
TXT Two or more chalcogen atoms in the same hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein the hetero ring contains at least
    two chalcogen atoms therein.


CLS 524/109
TXT Two or more chalcogen rings:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein the heterocyclic compound
    contains two or more hetero rings.

    (1)     Note.  Fused or bridged rings sharing one or more hetero chalcogen
    atoms are viewed as containing two heterocyclic rings.

    (2)     Note.  Epoxidized plural unsaturated fatty acids or esters, in the
    absence of information to the contrary, are viewed as containing at least
    two epoxy rings, e.g., epoxidized soybean oil, and are therefore proper for
    this subclass.


CLS 524/110
TXT Six-membered chalcogen ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein the hetero ring is a six-membered
    ring.


CLS 524/111
TXT Five-membered chalcogen ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein the hetero ring is a
    five-membered ring.


CLS 524/112
TXT Cyclic polycarboxylic acid anhydride:

    Subject matter under subclass 111 wherein the five-membered hetero ring
    contains an oxygen hetero atom as part of a cyclic polycarboxylic acid
    anhydride ,  e.g.,

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary under carboxylic acid or derivative for the
    definition of an "anhydride".


CLS 524/113
TXT Tetrahydrofuran per se:

    Subject matter under subclass 111 wherein the five-membered hetero ring is
    tetrahydrofuran, per se, i.e., C4H8O.


CLS 524/114
TXT Three-membered chalcogen ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein the hetero ring is a
    three-membered ring.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are epoxidized monounsaturated fatty acid
    oils.


CLS 524/115
TXT Phosphorus organic compound DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 81 wherein the organic designated nonreactant
    material is a compound containing a phosphorus atom.


CLS 524/116
TXT Phosphorus is part of a covalent ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein the phosphorus atom is covalently
    bonded in a ring system.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass, a ring system may contain a
    ring atom other than carbon or phosphorus.

    (2)     Note.  See appropriate subclasses below for a phosphorus atom as
    part of a chelation ring.


CLS 524/117
TXT Oxygen ring atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein the phosphorus ring contains at
    least one oxygen ring atom,   e.g.,


CLS 524/118
TXT Halogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 wherein the phosphorus ring compound
    contains a halogen atom.


CLS 524/119
TXT Two or more phosphorus rings:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 wherein the phosphorus ring compound
    contains two or more phosphorus rings, e.g.,


CLS 524/120
TXT Spiro ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 119 wherein the phosphorus compound contains
    a spiro ring system, e.g., distearyl pentaerythritol diphosphite,

    (1)     Note.  A spiro ring denotes the sharing of one common ring member
    only by exactly two rings.


CLS 524/121
TXT Two or more phosphorus atoms directly or indirectly bonded together by only
    covalent bonds:

    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein the phosphorus compound contains
    two or more phosphorus atoms bonded directly or through other atoms to each
    other by only covalent bonds,    e.g.,


CLS 524/122
TXT Phosphorus double bonded to an atom other than C or O:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein at least one of the phosphorus
    atoms is double bonded to an atom other than carbon or oxygen.


CLS 524/123
TXT Phosphorus bonded directly to three chalcogen atoms and having only one P-C
    linkage e.g., phosphonate, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the phosphorus is directly bonded
    to three chalcogen atoms (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium),
    and a single carbon atoms, e.g., 1-hydroxyethane, 1,1-diphosphonic acid,


CLS 524/124
TXT Nitrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 123 wherein the phosphorus compound contains
    a nitrogen atom.


CLS 524/125
TXT Aryl group:

    Subject matter under subclass 123 wherein the phosphorus compound contains
    an aryl group.


CLS 524/126
TXT Phosphorus bonded directly to only two chalcogen atoms and having at least
    one P-C linkage, e.g., phosphinate, phosphonite, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein a phosphorus is directly bonded
    to only two chalcogen atoms (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium)
    and at least one carbon atom, e.g.,


CLS 524/127
TXT Phosphorus bonded directly to four chalcogen atoms, e.g., phosphate, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein a phosphorus is directly bonded
    to four chalcogen atoms only (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium),
    e.g., a bis-phosphate compound,


CLS 524/128
TXT Phosphorus bonded directly to three chalcogen atoms only, e.g., phosphite,
    etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein a phosphorus is directly bonded
    to three chalcogen atoms only (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium),  e.g.,


CLS 524/129
TXT Phosphorus directly bonded to at least one chalcogen and only H or C, e.g.,
    phosphine oxide, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein a phosphorus is directly bonded
    to at least one chalcogen atom (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium) and only to hydrogen or carbon atom  s,  e.g.,


CLS 524/130
TXT Phosphorus bonded to three chalcogen atoms and having only one P-C linkage:

    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein the phosphorus is directly bonded
    to three chalcogen atoms (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) and
    a single carbon atom.


CLS 524/131
TXT Chalcogen other than directly bonded to P:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein the phosphorus compound contains
    a chalcogen atom other than the chalcogen directly bonded to phosphorus.


CLS 524/132
TXT Aryl group:

    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein the phosphorus compound contains
    an aryl group.


CLS 524/133
TXT Phosphorus bonded to only two chalcogen atoms and having at least one P-C
    linkage:

    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein the phosphorus is directly bonded
    to two chalcogen atoms only (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium)
    and at least one carbon atom.


CLS 524/134
TXT Sulfur:

    Subject matter under subclass 133 wherein the phosphorus compound contains
    a sulfur atom, e.g.,


CLS 524/135
TXT Aryl group:

    Subject matter under subclass 133 wherein the phosphorus compound contains
    an aryl group.


CLS 524/136
TXT Pentavalent phosphorus atom directly bonded to at least one oxygen atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein the phosphorus is a pentavalent
    phosphorus atom directly bonded to at least one oxygen atom.


CLS 524/137
TXT P directly bonded to S:

    Subject matter under subclass 136 wherein the phosphorus is directly bonded
    to a sulfur atom.


CLS 524/138
TXT P Directly Bonded to Two or More N:

    Subject matter under subclass 136 wherein the phosphorus is directly bonded
    to two or more nitrogen atoms,  e.g.,

    phosphorus acid-tris-dimethyl amide, etc.


CLS 524/139
TXT Phoshorus directly bonded to at least one O and at least one H or C only:

    Subject matter under subclass 136 wherein the phosphorus is directly bonded
    to at least one hydrogen or carbon atom and no other atom, e.g.,

    bis(p-dodecylphenyl) phosphite, etc.


CLS 524/140
TXT P directly bonded to oxygen only:

    Subject matter under subclass 136 wherein the phosphorus is directly bonded
    to oxygen atoms only.


CLS 524/141
TXT Aryl group:

    Subject matter under subclass 140 wherein the phosphorus compound contains
    an aryl group.


CLS 524/142
TXT Halogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the phosphorus compound contains
    a halogen atom.


CLS 524/143
TXT Cresyl phosphate, e.g., di, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the phosphorus compound is a
    cresyl phosphate, e.g., dicresyl phosphate, etc.


CLS 524/144
TXT Halogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 140 wherein the phosphorus compound contains
    a halogen atom.


CLS 524/145
TXT -C-O-P-O-C or C-O-P-OH group, e.g., phosphate ester, lecithin, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 140 wherein the phosphorus compound is a
    phosphorus ester having at least two ester groups (i.e., C-O-P-O-C), or a
    phosphorus ester having a single ester group (i.e., C-O-P-OH).

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is lecithin.


CLS 524/146
TXT Phosphorus directly bonded to sulfur:

    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein the phosphorus atom is directly
    bonded to a sulfur atom, e.g., tris (octadecyl thioglycolyl) phosphite, etc.


CLS 524/147
TXT Phosphorus directly bonded to oxygen:

    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein the phosphorus atoms is directly
    bonded to an oxygen atom.


CLS 524/148
TXT Atom other than C, O, H, P, or Hal:

    Subject matter under subclass 147 wherein the phosphorus compound contains
    an atom other than C, O, H, P, or halogen.


CLS 524/149
TXT Halogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 147 wherein the phosphorus compound contains
    a halogen atom.


CLS 524/150
TXT Five or more aryl groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 147 wherein the phosphorus compound contains
    five or more aryl groups.

    (1)     Note.  The aryl group herein may be part of a fused- or
    bridged-ring system, e.g., naphthalene contains two aryl groups, etc.


CLS 524/151
TXT Two or more aryl groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 147 wherein the phosphorus compound contains
    two or more aryl groups.

    (1)     Note.  The aryl group herein may be part of a fused- or
    bridged-ring system, e.g., naphthalene contains two aryl groups.


CLS 524/152
TXT OH group:

    Subject matter under subclass 151 wherein the phosphorus compound contains
    a hydroxyl group (i.e., -OH).


CLS 524/153
TXT Triphenyl phosphite per se:

    Subject matter under subclass 151 wherein the phosphorus compound is
    triphenyl phosphite, per se (i.e., C18H15O3P).


CLS 524/154
TXT Phosphorus directly bonded to carbon atoms only:

    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein the phosphorus atom is directly
    bonded to carbon atoms only.


CLS 524/155
TXT Organic compound having a sulfur bonded directly ot oxygen DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 81 wherein the organic designated nonreactant
    material is a compound containing a sulfur atom directly bonded to at least
    one oxygen atom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280+,   for a thio carbonic acid.

    282+,   for a thio acid.


CLS 524/156
TXT Sulfur bonded directly to four oxygen atoms:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 wherein a sulfur atom is directly bonded
    to four oxygen atoms.


CLS 524/157
TXT Sulfur bonded directly to three oxygen atoms:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 wherein a sulfur atom is directly bonded
    to three oxygen atoms.


CLS 524/158
TXT Aryl group:

    Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the sulfur compound contains an
    aryl group.


CLS 524/159
TXT Nitrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 158 wherein the sulfur compound contains a
    nitrogen atom.


CLS 524/160
TXT Fused or bridged ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 158 wherein the sulfur compound contains a
    fused- or bridged-ring system.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "fused- or
    bridged-ring system".


CLS 524/161
TXT Metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 158 wherein the sulfur compound contains a
    metal atom.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "metal".


CLS 524/162
TXT At least two separate aryl groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 161 wherein the metal containing sulfur
    compound contains at least two aryl groups.


CLS 524/163
TXT Halogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein the sulfur compound contains a
    halogen atom.


CLS 524/164
TXT Halogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 161 wherein the sulfur compound contains a
    halogen atom.


CLS 524/165
TXT Halogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the sulfur compound contains a
    halogen atom.


CLS 524/166
TXT Metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the sulfur compound contains a
    metal atom.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "metal".


CLS 524/167
TXT Sulfur bonded directly to two oxygen atoms, e.g., sulfones, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 wherein a sulfur atom is directly bonded
    to two oxygen atoms, e.g., sulfone, etc.


CLS 524/168
TXT Sulfur bonded directly to nitrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 wherein a sulfur atom is directly bonded
    to a nitrogen atom.


CLS 524/169
TXT Aryl group which is not fused or bridged:

    Subject matter under subclass 168 wherein the sulfur compound contains at
    least one aryl group which is not part of a fused- or bridged-ring system.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition of a "fused- or
    bridged-ring system".


CLS 524/170
TXT Aryl group:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 wherein the sulfur compound contains an
    aryl group.


CLS 524/171
TXT Oxygen atom other than as part of a sulfur bonded directly to two oxygen
    atoms:

    Subject matter under subclass 170 wherein the aryl sulfur compound contains
    an oxygen atom which is other than as part of a SO2 group.


CLS 524/172
TXT Atom other than C, H, S, O, or metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 170 wherein the aryl containing sulfur
    compound contains an atom other than carbon, hydrogen, sulfur, oxygen, or a
    metal.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "metal".


CLS 524/173
TXT Sulfur directly bonded to oxygen and devoid of an aryl group, e.g.,
    dimethyl sulfoxide, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 wherein the sulfur compound is devoid of
    an aryl group, e.g., dimethyl sulfoxide, etc.


CLS 524/174
TXT Organic compound having at least one metal atom directly bonded to a carbon
    or hydrogen atom DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 81 wherein the organic designated nonreactant
    material compound is a compound containing at least one metal to hydrogen
    bond or at least one metal to carbon bond.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definiiton of the term "metal".


CLS 524/175
TXT Heavy metal directly bonded to carbon or hydrogen atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 174 wherein the heavy metal compound contains
    at least one heavy metal to carbon or heavy metal to hydrogen bond.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "heavy metal".


CLS 524/176
TXT Transition metal (at no. 21-29, 39-47, 57-79):

    Subject matter under subclass 175 wherein the heavy metal compound contains
    at least one transition metal atom.

    (1)     Note.  Transition metal for purposes of this subclass is limited to
    those elements of atomic number 21-29, 39-47, 57-79.

    (2)     Note.  The transition metal for purposes of this subclass need not
    be bonded to the C or H atom.  It is sufficient that a transition metal
    atom be in a compound wherein at least one heavy metal atom is bonded to a
    carbon or hydrogen atom.


CLS 524/177
TXT Group VA metal (Sb, Bi, As):

    Subject matter under subclass 175 wherein the heavy metal compound contains
    at least one Group VA metal atom (Sb, Bi, As).

    (1)     Note.  The Group VA metal atom for purposes of this subclass need
    not be bonded to the C or H atom.  It is sufficient that a Group VA metal
    atom be in a compound wherein at least one heavy metal atom is bonded to a
    carbon or hydrogen atom.


CLS 524/178
TXT Tin atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 175 wherein the heavy metal compound contains
    at least one atom of tin.

    (1)     Note.  The tin atom for purposes of this subclass need not be
    bonded to a carbon or hydrogen atom.  It is sufficient for purposes of this
    subclass that a tin atom be in a compound wherein a heavy metal is bonded
    to a carbon or hydrogen atom.


CLS 524/179
TXT At least one sulfur atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 178 wherein the tin compound contains at
    least one sulfur atom.


CLS 524/180
TXT Sulfur directly bonded to tin:

    Subject matter under subclass 179 wherein at least one tin atom is directly
    bonded to a sulfur atom.

    (1)     Note.  The tin atom bonded to sulfur need not be bonded directly to
    carbon or hydrogen.


CLS 524/181
TXT With additional tin compound DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 180 wherein the sulfur containing tin
    compound is admixed with a tin compound DNRM.


CLS 524/182
TXT At least two tin atoms:

    Subject matter under subclass 180 wherein the sulfur tin compound contains
    at least two tin atoms.


CLS 524/183
TXT Boron organic compound DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 81 wherein the organic designated nonreactant
    material is a compound containing at least one boron atom.


CLS 524/184
TXT Atom other than B, O, H, or C:

    Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein the boron compound contains at
    least one atom which is other than boron, carbon, oxygen, or hydrogen.


CLS 524/185
TXT Atom is N:

    Subject matter under subclass 184 wherein the boron compound contains at
    least one nitrogen atom.


CLS 524/186
TXT Organo nitrogen compound other than unsubstituted ammonium salt as sole
    nitrogen atom DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 81 wherein the organic designated nonreactant
    material is a nitrogen compound containing at least one nitrogen atom other
    than as an  unsubstituted ammonium (NH4+) salt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284+,   for an unsubstituted ammonium salt of a carboxylic acid as a
    designated nonreactant material.


CLS 524/187
TXT Contains rosin or derivative DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 186 wherein the organic nitrogen DNRM
    contains an abietyl moiety therein or wherein the nitrogen DNRM is admixed
    with an abietyl DNRM containing compound.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 270 for a definition of the term "abietyl
    moiety".


CLS 524/188
TXT Silicon atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 186 wherein the nitrogen compound contains a
    silicon atom.


CLS 524/189
TXT Nitrogen to nitrogen bond:

    Subject matter under subclass 186 wherein the nitrogen compound contains at
    least two nitrogen atoms which are bonded directly to one another.


CLS 524/190
TXT N=N group:

    Subject matter under subclass 189 wherein the nitrogen compound contains a
    N=N group.


CLS 524/191
TXT X=C-N group wherein X is a chalcogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 189 wherein the nitrogen compound contains a
    X=C-N group wherein X is a chalcogen atom.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "chalcogen
    atom".

    (2)     Note.  The C-N group may be a separate gorup from the N-N group or
    the C-N group can be part of the N-N group as in C-N-N-.


CLS 524/192
TXT Two or more N-N bonds:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the nitrogen compound contains at
    least two N-N groups.


CLS 524/193
TXT Aryl-OH:

    Subject matter under subclass 192 wherein the nitrogen compound contains at
    least one aryl ring and wherein at least one nuclear carbon atom of the
    aryl ring is directly bonded to an oxygen atom of the hydroxyl group.


CLS 524/194
TXT Aryl-OH:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the nitrogen compound containing
    a N-N group also contains at least one aryl ring; and wherein at least one
    nuclear carbon atom of an aryl ring is bonded to an oxygen atom of a
    hydroxly group.


CLS 524/195
TXT N=C=N or N=C-N group, e.g., carbodiimide, isourea, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 186 wherein the nitrogen compound contains at
    least one N=C=N or N=C-N group, e.g., carbodiimide, isoureas, etc.


CLS 524/196
TXT N=C=X group wherein X is a chalcogen, e.g., isocyanate, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 186 wherein the nitrogen compound contains at
    least one N=C=X group wherein X is a chalcogen atom, e.g., isocyanate, etc.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "chalcogen
    atom".


CLS 524/197
TXT At least one solid polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only:

    Subject matter under subclass 196 wherein the nitrogen compound is mixed
    with at least one solid polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only.


CLS 524/198
TXT N-(C=O)-O-, e.g., urethane, carbamate, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 186 wherien the nitrogen compound contains at
    least one

    N--O- group, e.g., urethane, carbamate, etc.


CLS 524/199
TXT Oxygen other than as part of a N(C=O)-O- group:

    Subject matter under subclass 198 wherein the nitrogen compound contains an
    additional oxygen atom which is not the oxygen of a

    N--O- group.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are N-C-O compounds containing phenol oxygen
    groups, ketone oxygen groups, etc.


CLS 524/200
TXT Atom other than N, H, C, or O:

    Subject matter under subclass 198 wherein the nitrogen compound contains an
    atom which is other than N, C, O, or H.


CLS 524/201
TXT N(C=X)X wherein X is a chalcogen, e.g., thiocarbamate, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 186 wherein the nitrogen compound contains at
    least one

    N--X- group wherein X is a chalcogen atom, e.g., thiocarbamate, etc.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "chalcogen
    atom".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198,    for a N--X compound as a DNRM wherein both of the X atoms are
    oxygens.


CLS 524/202
TXT Metal or ammonium group:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the nitrogen compound contains a
    metal or ammonium group.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "metal".


CLS 524/203
TXT With chalcogen nonreactive organic compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the nitrogen compound containing
    at least one metal or ammonium group is admixed with an additional NRM
    containing a chalcogen atom.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are mixtures of two or more -X compounds at
    least one of which is a metal or ammonium containing, or the use of phenol,
    or other chalcogen containing NRM in admixture with a -X metal or ammonium
    compound.


CLS 524/204
TXT Heavy metal or aluminum:

    Subject matter under subclass 186 wherein the nitrogen compound contains at
    least one heavy metal or aluminum atom.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "heavy metal".


CLS 524/205
TXT Nitrile group:

    Subject matter under subclass 186 wherein the nitrogen compound contains at
    least one C=N group.


CLS 524/206
TXT Nitrogen atom other than as part of a nitrile group:

    Subject matter under subclass 205 wherein the nitrogen compound contains a
    nitrogen atom which is not part of the C=N group.


CLS 524/207
TXT Atom other than C, H, or N:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 wherein the nitrogen compound contains an
    atom which is other than C, H, or N.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are C=N compounds containing oxygen such as
    in amide or ether form.


CLS 524/208
TXT Atom other than C, H, or N:

    Subject matter under subclass 205 wherein the nitrogen compound contains an
    atom other than C, H, or N.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are C=N compounds containing atoms such as
    oxygen, sulfur, etc.


CLS 524/209
TXT Two or more nitrile groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 205 wherein the nitrogen compound contains
    two or more C=N groups.


CLS 524/210
TXT N-C=X group wherein X is a chalcogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 186 wherein the nitrogen compound contains at
    least one

    N-- group wherein X is a chalcogen atom.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "chalcogen
    atom".


CLS 524/211
TXT N-(C=X)N, e.g., Urea, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein the nitrogen compound contains at
    least one


    N--N group.

    (1)     Note.  The N--N group may be in X addition to a -N- group or the
    -N--N group may be part of the N- group.


CLS 524/212
TXT Two or more -N-(C=X)N groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 211 wherein the nitrogen compound contains at
    least two

    -N--N- groups.


CLS 524/213
TXT Atom other than C, N, H, or chalcogen; or contains nitrogen or chalcogen
    atom other than as part of a N(C=X)N group:

    Subject matter under subclass 211 wherein

    the N--N compound contains an atom other than H, N, C, or chalcogen; or
    contains a chalcogen or nitogen atom which is not part

    of the -N--N group.


CLS 524/214
TXT Carboxyclic group:

    Subject matter under subclass 211 wherein

    the N--N compound contains a ring composed solely of carbon atoms.


CLS 524/215
TXT With water NRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 211 wherein

    the N--N compound is in admixture with free water as a nonreactant material.


CLS 524/216
TXT At least one solid polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only:

    Subject matter under subclass 211 wherein

    the N--N compound is mixed with at least one solid polymer derived from
    ethylenic reactants only.


CLS 524/217
TXT N atom other than as part of a N-C=X group:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein

    the N- compound contains at least two nitrogen atoms and wherein at least
    one of the nitrogen atoms

    is not part of the N- groups.


CLS 524/218
TXT C=X group other than as part of a N-C=X group:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein

    the N- compound contains a -- group which

    is not part of the -N- group.


CLS 524/219
TXT (C=X)X group:

    Subject matter under subclass 218 wherein

    the N- compound contains a --X group.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198,    for a N--O NRM.

    201,    for a N--X NRM.


CLS 524/220
TXT C-O-C group:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein

    the N-  compound contains a -C-O-C- group.


CLS 524/221
TXT C-OH group:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein

    the N- compound contains a C-OH group.


CLS 524/222
TXT Aryl -OH group:

    Subject matter under subclass 221 wherein

    the N- compound contains at least one aryl ring and wherein at least one of
    the nuclear carbons of the aryl ring is directly bonded to the oxygen atom
    of a hydroxyl group.


CLS 524/223
TXT Two or more N-C=X groups or two or more C-OH groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 221 wherein

    the -N- compound contains two or more

    N- groups or two or more C-OH groups.


CLS 524/224
TXT At least one solid polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only:

    Subject matter under subclass 221 wherein

    the N- compound is mixed with at least one solid polymer derived form
    ethylenic reactants only.


CLS 524/225
TXT Atom other than N, C, H, or oxygen:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein

    the N- compound contains at least one atom which is other than N, C, H, or
    oxygen.


CLS 524/226
TXT Carbocyclic group:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein

    the N-- compound contains at least one ring composed solely of carbon
    atoms, e.g., aryl, etc.


CLS 524/227
TXT Two or more N-C=O groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein

    the N- compound contains two or more

    N- groups.


CLS 524/228
TXT At least one solid polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only:

    Subject matter under subclass 227 wherein

    the -N- compound is mixed with at least one solid polymer derived from
    ethylenic reactants only.


CLS 524/229
TXT At least one solid polymer derived from acyclic monoethylenic hydrocarbon
    reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 228 wherein at least one of the reactants
    used in the preparation of the solid polymer derived from ethylenic
    reactants only is an acyclic monoethylenic hydrocarbon reactant.


CLS 524/230
TXT N-(C=O)alkyl wherein alkyl group contains eight or more carbon atoms:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein

    the N-- compound contains an N--R group, wherein the R group is an alkyl
    radical and wherein the alkyl radical has at least eight carbon atoms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226,    wherein the N- compound contains an aryl or cycloaliphatic ring.


CLS 524/231
TXT Two or more organo N-C=O compounds DNRM or with nonreactant organo nitrogen
    compound DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 230 wherein

    the N--R compound is in admixture with another designated nonreactant
    material which is organic and contains at least one nitrogen atom.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are mixtures of

            two or more N--R compounds or

            the admixture of one N--R compound and a diverse nonamide organo
    nitrogen compound.


CLS 524/232
TXT At least one solid polymer derived from ethylenic hydrocarbon reactants
    only:

    Subject matter under subclass 230 wherein the N--R compound is mixed with
    at least one solid polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only and at
    least one of the ethylenic reactants of the solid polymer is an unsaturated
    hydrocarbon reactant.


CLS 524/233
TXT Dialkyl amides, e.g., dimethyl formamide, dimethyl acetamide, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein


    the N-- compound is a dialkyl amide, e.g., dimethyl formamide, dimethyl
    acetaminde


CLS 524/234
TXT Two or more N-C nitrogen nonreactant materials or with an organo oxygen or
    nitrogen-containing nonreactant material:

    Subject matter under subclass 233 wherein the amide is admixed with an
    organo oxygen or nitrogen containing NRM.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are mixtures of two or more -N--R compounds
    at least one of which is a dialkyl amide or the admixtrue of a dialkyl
    amide and a diverse nonamide organo nitrogen or oxygen containing NRM.


CLS 524/235
TXT At least one solid polymer derived from nitrile-containing ethylenic
    reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 233 wherein the nitrogen compound is mixed
    with at least one solid polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only and
    at least one of the ethylenic reactants contains a nitrile group, i.e.,
    C-C=N.


CLS 524/236
TXT Trivalent or tetravalent nitrogen atom other than unsubstituted ammonium:

    Subject matter under subclass 186 wherein the nitrogen compound contains at
    least one nitrogen atom having either a valency of three or four and is
    other than an unsubstituted ammonium (NH4+) salt, e.g., dimethyl glyoxime,
    pyridine N-oxide, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284+,   for an unsubstituted ammonium salt of a carboxylic acid as a
    designated nonreactant material.


CLS 524/237
TXT C(N)3, -C=NH, or C=N-C group:

    Subject matter under subclass 236 wherein the nitrogen compound contains at
    least one carbon atom bound directly to three nitrogen atoms; or contains
    at least one NH or NC group wherein the nitrogen atom of said group is
    bound to a carbon atom through a double bond.


CLS 524/238
TXT (C=X)X group wherein X is chalcogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 236 wherein the nitrogen compound contains at
    least one

    -X group wherein X is a chalcogen atom.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "chalcogen
    atom".

    (2)     Note.  Included herein is (R3NH)+ (acetate)-.


CLS 524/239
TXT Two or more (C=X)X groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 238 wherein the nitrogen compound contains at
    least two

    -X groups.


CLS 524/240
TXT Aryl group:

    Subject matter under subclass 238 wherein the nitrogen compound contains at
    least one aryl group.


CLS 524/241
TXT C=X group where X is chalcogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 236 wherein the nitrogen compound contains at
    least one

     group wherein X is chalcogen.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "chalcogen".


CLS 524/242
TXT Two or more C=X groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 241 wherein the nitrogen compound contains at
    least two

      groups.


CLS 524/243
TXT C-O-C group:

    Subject matter under subclass 236 wherein the nitrogen compound contains at
    least oneC-O-C group.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238,    for a N compound containing a -O group.


CLS 524/244
TXT C-OH:

    Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein the nitrogen compound contains
    both a C-O-C group and a C-OH group.


CLS 524/245
TXT Two or more C-OH groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 244 wherein the nitrogen compound contains at
    least two-C-OH groups.


CLS 524/246
TXT Aryl group:

    Subject matter under subclass 243 wherien the nitrogen compound contains at
    least one aryl group.


CLS 524/247
TXT C-OH group:

    Subject matter under subclass 236 wherein the nitrogen compound contains at
    least oneC-OH group.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238,    for a nitrogen compound containing a

    -O group.


CLS 524/248
TXT Aryl-OH group:

    Subject matter under subclass 247 wherein the nitrogen compound contains at
    least one aryl ring and wherein at least one of the nuclear carbons of the
    aryl ring is directly bonded to the oxygen atom of a hydroxyl group.


CLS 524/249
TXT Two or more nitrogen atoms or two or more C-OH groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 247 the nitrogen compound contains at least
    two nitrogen atoms or two or more C-OH groups.


CLS 524/250
TXT Four or more C-OH groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 249 wherein the nitrogen compound contains at
    least fourC-OH groups.


CLS 524/251
TXT N, C, and H atoms only:

    Subject matter under subclass 236 wherein the nitrogen compound contains
    only atoms of carbon, nitrogen, and hydrogen.


CLS 524/252
TXT Two or more nitrogen atoms:

    Subject matter under subclass 251 wherein the nitrogen compound contains at
    least two nitrogen atoms.


CLS 524/253
TXT With water NRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 252 wherein the plural nitrogen compound is
    admixed with free water as a nonreactant material (NRM).


CLS 524/254
TXT Aryl:

    Subject matter under subclass 252 wherein the plural nitrogen compound
    contains at least one aryl group.


CLS 524/255
TXT Two or more separate aryl ring systems:

    Subject matter under subclass 254 wherein the plural nitrogen compound
    contains at least two separate aryl ring systems.

    (1)     Note.  To be proper for this subclass, there must be at least two
    separate ring systems, each of which contains an aryl group.  A naphthalene
    or polyaromatic ring system is not to be considered as having separate aryl
    ring systems.


CLS 524/256
TXT At least one aryl ring which is part of a fused or bridged ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 255 wherein the plural nitrogen compound
    contains an aryl ring as part of a bridged- or fused-carbocyclic ring
    system.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "fused or
    bridged".


CLS 524/257
TXT Aryl:

    Subject matter under subclass 251 wherein the nitrogen compound contains at
    least one aryl group.


CLS 524/258
TXT Two or more separate aryl ring systems:

    Subject matter under subclass 257 wherein the nitrogen compound contains at
    least two separate aryl ring systems.

    (1)     Note.  To be proper for this subclass, there must be at least two
    separate systems, each of which contains an aryl group.  A naphthalene or
    polyaromatic ring system is not to be considered as having separate ring
    systems.


CLS 524/259
TXT Nitrogen as part of a nitro group:

    Subject matter under subclass 186 wherein the nitrogen compound contains at
    least one nitrogen atom which has a valence of five and wherein the
    pentavalent nitrogen is part of a nitro group, i.e., -C-NO2.


CLS 524/260
TXT Nitro compound has an atoms other than C, H, N, or O; or has an oxygen or
    nitrogen atom other than as part of a nitro group:

    Subject matter under subclass 259 wherein the pentavalent compound contains
    at least one atom which is other than C, H, N, or oxygen; or contains an
    atom of oxygen or nitrogen which is not part of the pentavalent C-NO2 group.


CLS 524/261
TXT Organic silicon compound having at least one oxygen atom DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 81 wherein the organic designated nonreactant
    material is a compound containing at least one silicon atom and at least
    one oxygen atom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     for an organic silicon designated nonreactant material containing
    only silicon, carbon, and hydrogen atoms.


CLS 524/262
TXT Atom other than Si, O, C, of H:

    Subject matter under subclass 261 wherein the silicon compound contains an
    atom therein which is other than silicon, oxygen, carbon, or hydrogen.


CLS 524/263
TXT Halogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 262 wherein the silicon compound contains at
    least one halogen atom.


CLS 524/264
TXT Ethylenic group:

    Subject matter under subclass 261 wherein the silicon compound contains at
    least one ethylenic unsaturated group.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "ethylenic
    group".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    523,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 203 for an ethylenic
    silicon reactant which is coated onto a nonreactant material and is
    intended to couple a polymer with the nonreactant material.


CLS 524/265
TXT Oxygen atom other than as Si-O-Si and at least one Si-C or Si-H group:

    Subject matter under subclas 261 wherein the silicon compound contains at
    least one silicon atom bonded to a hydrogen or carbon atom, and contains an
    oxygen atom other than as directly linking two silicon atoms together.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are compounds such   as :



CLS 524/266
TXT Silicon containing SICP or solid polymer:

    Subject matter under subclass 265 wherein a solid polymer or specified
    intermediate condensation product (SICP) derived from a silicon containing
    reactant is mixed with the silicon compound.


    See the Glossary for a definition of the term "specified intermediate
    condensation product".


CLS 524/267
TXT Two or more si atoms and at least one Si-C or Si-H group:

    Subject matter under subclass 261 wherein the silicon compound contains at
    least two silicon atoms and has at least one silicon atom bonded to a
    hydrogen or carbon atom.


CLS 524/268
TXT Silicon containing SICP or solid polymer:

    Subject matter under subclass 267 wherein a solid polymer or specified
    intermediate condensation product (SICP) derived from a silicon containing
    reactant is mixed with the silicon compound.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definiton of the term "specified
    intermediate condensation product".


CLS 524/269
TXT Solid polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only:

    Subject matter under subclass 267 wherein a solid polymer derived from
    ethylenic reactants only is mixed with the silicon compound.


CLS 524/270
TXT Rosin or tall oil or modified forms thereof as DNRM, e.g., colophony,
    abietic acid, ester gum, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 81 wherein the organic designated nonreactant
    material is a compound containing an abietyl or modified abietyl moiety,
    e.g., rosin ester, metal salt of rosin, colophony, etc.; or is tall oil or
    a modified form thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Rosin is the distilled or extracted residue from the
    exudation of certain species of pine, and its principal constituent is
    abietic acid.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes tall oil which contains abietic acid
    and fatty acids.

    (3)     Note.  All abietyl or substituted abietyl moieties are considered
    as being modified forms of rosin and as such are properly classified herein.

    (4)     Note.  Abietyl as used herein includes the modified, e.g.,
    hydrogenated, etc., as well as the nonmodified abietyl ring compounds.


CLS 524/271
TXT Two or more solid polymers or at least one solid polymer and at least one
    specified intermediate condensation product:

    Subject matter under subclass 270 wherein the abietyl containing compound
    is mixed with two or more solid polymers or specified intermediate
    condensation products; or with at least one solid polymer and at least one
    specified intermediate condensation product.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "specified
    intermediate condensation product".


CLS 524/272
TXT Solid polymer derived from at least one ethylenic compound containing a
    carboxylic acid or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 270 wherein the abietyl containing compound
    is mixed with a solid polymer derived form at least oen ethylenic monomer
    which is a carboxylic acid or a derivative thereof.

    (1)     Note. See the Glossary for the definition of the terms "carboxylic
    acid" and a "carboxylic acid derivative".


CLS 524/273
TXT Solid polymer contains halogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 270 wherein the abietyl containing compound
    or tall oil is mixed with a solid polymer derived from a halogen containing
    monomer or with a nonhalogen derived polymer which has been modified by a
    halogen-containing material so as to incorporate halogen atoms therein.


CLS 524/274
TXT Solid polymer derived from ethylenically unsaturated hydrocarbon only:

    Subject matter under subclass 270 wherein the abietyl containing compound
    or tall oil is mixed with a solid polymer derived from ethylenically
    unsaturated hydrocarbon monomers.


CLS 524/275
TXT Oxygen wax DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 81 wherein the organic designated nonreactant
    material is a wax which contains an oxygen atom or an oxygen containing
    component.

    (1)     Note.  A wax is an ester of a high molecular weight monocarboxylic
    acid and a monohydric alcohol, or a mixture containing an oxygen compound
    disclosed as being a wax.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes naturally occurring waxes, e.g.,
    beeswax which contains lactones, etc., and carnauba wax and candelilla wax
    which contains resins.

    (3)     Note.  Oxidized microcrystalline wax is classified herein.

    (4)     Note.  To be classified herein, a material must be disclosed or
    claimed as being a wax.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84+,    for a carboxylic acid ester not disclosed or claimed as being a wax.

    487+,   for a hydrocarbon containing wax.


CLS 524/276
TXT With water NRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 275 wherein water as a nonreactant material
    is present in addition to the oxygen containing wax.


CLS 524/277
TXT Carnauba wax, beeswax, montan wax, or oxidized microcrystalline wax or
    modified forms thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 275 wherein the oxygen containing wax is
    carnauba wax, beeswax, montan wax, or oxidized microcrystalline wax or
    chemically modified forms thereof.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes chemically modified carnauba wax,
    beeswax, montan wax, or oxidized microcrystalline wax which are still
    disclosed as being waxes.


CLS 524/278
TXT Solid polymer contains halogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 277 wherein the wax is mixed with a solid
    polymer derived from a halogen containing monomer, or with a nonhalogen
    derived polymer which has been modified by a halogen containing material so
    as to incorporate halogen atoms therein.


CLS 524/279
TXT Solid polymer contains nitrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 277 wherein the wax is mixed with a solid
    polymer derived from a nitrogen containing monomer, or with a nonnitrogen
    derived solid polymer which has been modified by a nitrogen containing
    material so as to incorporate nitrogen atoms therein.


CLS 524/280
TXT X(C=X)X wherein X is chalcogen DNRM, e.g., carbonate, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 81 wherein the organic designated nonreactive
    material is a compound containing at least one

    X--X group and wherein the x atom may be the same or different chalcogen
    atom, i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are carbonates.


CLS 524/281
TXT Aryl group:

    Subject matter under subclass 280 wherein the

    X--X compound contains at least one aryl group.


CLS 524/282
TXT C(C=X)X wherein at least one X is a chalcogen other than oxygen DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 81 wherein the organic designated nonreactant
    material

    contains at least one C--X group, wherein X is a chalcogen atom (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), and wherein at least one of the X
    atoms is other than oxygen, e.g., n-butyl dithlofumarate, etc.


CLS 524/283
TXT Oxygen atom which is not part of the
    -C(C=X)X group:

    Subject matter under subclass 282 wherein

    the DNRM having at least one C--X group contains at least one oxygen atom
    which is

    not part of the C--X group.


CLS 524/284
TXT Carboxylic acid or derivative and wherein the derivative is other than a
    metal salt DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 81 wherein the organic designated nonreactant
    material is a carboxylic acid or its derivative which is other than a metal
    salt.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition of a "carboxylic acid or
    derivative".

    (2)     Note.  A carboxylic acid derivative for purposes of this subclass
    is limited to carboxylic acid esters, carboxylic acid linear anhydrides,
    carboxylic acid halides, and nonmetal salts of a carboxylic acid.

    (3)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass, a metal salt of a carboxylic
    acid includes a metal salt having an organic substituent directly attached
    to the metal atom, e.g., R-O-Pb-O--R, and therefore such compound is
    excluded herefrom, see in particular subclass 330 for such a compound when
    the R of the RO group is aryl.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    381,    for sodium lactate.

    394,    for sodium stearate.


CLS 524/285
TXT Cycloaliphatic group or bridged or fused ring system, e.g., camphoric acid,
    etc:

    Subject matter under subclass 284 wherein the carboxylic acid or derivative
    contains a carbocyclic ring other than as aryl; or contains a bridged- or
    fused-ring system, e.g., camphoric acid, etc.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "fused or
    bridged ring".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    270+,   for abietic acid (rosen) or a modified form thereof.


CLS 524/286
TXT Naphthenic acid or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 285 wherein the carboxylic acid is a mixture
    of monocyclic or fused or bridged monocarboxylic hydrocarbon acids
    described as naphthenic acid or derivatives thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    285,    for a purified monocyclic or fused or bridged hydrocarbon
    carboxylic acid.


CLS 524/287
TXT Aryl group:

    Subject matter under subclass 284 wherein the carboxylic acid or derivative
    contains an aryl group, e.g., benzolc acid, etc.

    (1)     Note.  The aryl group herein may be in the carboxylic acid or in
    the derivative moiety or in both the carboxylic and the derivative moiety.


CLS 524/288
TXT Atom other than C, H, or O:

    Subject matter under subclass 287 wherein the carboxylic acid or derivative
    contains an atom other than carbon, hydrogen, or oxygen, e.g., butyl benzyl
    tetrachlorophthalate, etc.


CLS 524/289
TXT Sulfur:

    Subject matter under subclass 288 wherein the carboxylic acid or derivative
    contains a sulfur atom.


CLS 524/290
TXT Oxygen atom other than as part of a carboxylic acid or ester group:

    Subject matter under subclass 287 wherein the carboxylic acid or derivative
    contains an oxygen atom other than as part of a COOH or COOR group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes a linearacid anhydride group (i.e., -
    O -).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    for a cyclic anhydride.


CLS 524/291
TXT OH group other than as part of a COOH Group, e.g., salicyclic acid, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 290 wherein the oxygen atom is part of a
    hydroxyl group which is other than the hydroxyl group of a COOH group,
    e.g., propyl galiate, phenyl salicylate, etc.


CLS 524/292
TXT Carbonyl of a carboxylic acid or ester group directly attached to an aryl
    group, e.g., dipropylene glycol dibenzoate, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 290 wherein a carboxylic acid or ester
    derivative contains a COOH or COOR group directly attached to the aryl
    group through the carbonyl of the COOH or COOR group, e.g., dipropylene
    glycol dibenzoate, etc.


CLS 524/293
TXT Carboxylic acid or ester groups each directly attached to separate aryl
    groups through the carbonyl of the carboxylic acid or ester group:

    Subject matter under subclass 287 wherein a carboxylic acid or ester
    derivative contains two or more discrete aryl groups each aryl having one
    or more COOH or COOR group directly attached thereto through the carbonyl
    group of the COOH or COOR group, e.g., glycerol tribenzoate.


CLS 524/294
TXT Two or more carboxylic acids or esters groups each directly attached to a
    nuclear carbon of the same aryl group through the carbonyl of the
    carboxylic acid or ester group:

    Subject matter under subclass 287 wherein a carboxylic acid or ester
    derivative contains a single aryl group having two or more COOH or COOR
    groups each directly attached to the aryl ring through the carbonyl group
    of the COOH or COOR group.


CLS 524/295
TXT A single aryl group:

    Subject matter under subclass 294 wherein the carboxylic acid or ester
    derivative contains only one aryl group, e.g., trilsodecyl trimellitate,
    etc.


CLS 524/296
TXT Only two carboxylic acid or ester groups directly attached to an aryl
    group, e.g., phthalic acid, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 295 wherein the single aryl group contains
    only two COOH or COOR groups each of which are directly attached through
    the carbon atom of the COOH or COOR group to the aryl ring, e.g.,
    di(2-ethyl hexyl phthalate, etc.).


CLS 524/297
TXT Dioctyl or dibutyl ester, e.g., di(2-ethylhexyl) phthalate, etc:

    Subject matter under subclass 296 wherein the ester derivative is dioctyl
    or dibutyl phthalate.

    (1)     Note.  The term "octyl" or "butyl" for the purposes of this
    subclass includes all the branched isomers, e.g., 2-ethylhexyl, etc.


CLS 524/298
TXT Three or more carboxylic acid or ester groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 296 wherein the carboxylic acid or ester
    derivative contains three or more COOH or COOR groups, only two of which
    are directly attached through the carbon atom of the COOH or COOR group to
    the aryl ring,   e.g., etc.


CLS 524/299
TXT Two or more aryl groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 287 wherein the carboxylic acid or ester
    derivative contains two or more aryl groups, e.g., dibenzyl alkenyl
    succinate, etc.


CLS 524/300
TXT Two or more carbon atoms:

    Subject matter under subclass 284 wherein the carboxylic acid or derivative
    contains at least two carbon atoms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    284,    for formic acid.


CLS 524/301
TXT Metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein the carboxylic acid or derivative
    contains a metal atom.


CLS 524/302
TXT Sulfur, e.g., factice, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein the carboxylic acid or derivative
    contains a sulfur atom, e.g., thioglycolic acid, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is factice which is vulcanized drying oil
    usually produced by treatment of drying oil with sulfur or SC12.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155+,   for a sulfur containing organic compound having a sulfur atom
    directly bonded to oxygen.

    280,    for thio carbonic acids.

    282,    for thio acids.


CLS 524/303
TXT Only two carboxylic acid or ester groups, e.g., distearyl thiodipropionate,
    etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 302 wherein the sulfur-containing carboxylic
    acid or ester contains only two COOH or COOR groups, e.g., distearyl
    thiodipropionate, etc.


CLS 524/304
TXT With a nonreactive material:

    Subject matter under subclass 303 wherein a nonreactive material is in
    addition to the sulfur-containing carboxylic acid or derivative.


CLS 524/305
TXT Nonreactive material contains atom other than C, H, or O:

    Subject matter under subclass 304 wherein the nonreactive material contains
    an atom other than carbon, hydrogen, or oxygen.


CLS 524/306
TXT Ester having at least two carboxylic acid ester groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein the carboxylic acid derivative is
    a carboxylic acid ester having at least two COOR groups.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition of a "carboxylic acid
    ester".


CLS 524/307
TXT Atom other than C, H, or O:

    Subject matter under subclass 306 wherein the carboxylic acid ester
    contains an atom other than carbon, hydrogen, or oxygen.


CLS 524/308
TXT Oxygen atom other than as part of a carboxylic acid ester group:

    Subject matter under subclass 306 wherein the carboxylic acid ester
    contains an oxygen atom other than as part of a carboxylic acid ester
    group, e.g., diethylene glycol dipropionate, ethoxyethyl maleate, etc.


CLS 524/309
TXT C=O Group other than as part of COO group:

    Subject matter under subclass 308 wherein the carboxylic acid ester
    contains a carbonyl group other than as part of a COO group, e.g., a
    diester of levulinic acid, etc.


CLS 524/310
TXT OH group other than as part of a COOH Group, e.g., castor oil, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 308 wherein the carboxylic acid ester
    contains a hydroxyl group which is other than part of a carboxylic acid
    group, e.g., ricinoleic acid, castor oil, etc.


CLS 524/311
TXT Three or more carboxylic acid ester groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 306 wherein the carboxylic acid ester
    contains three or more carboxylic acid ester groups.


CLS 524/312
TXT Derived from glycerol:

    Subject matter under subclass 311 wherein the carboxylic acid ester is
    derived from glycerol.


CLS 524/313
TXT Fatty acid triglyceride, e.g., drying oil, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 312 wherein the carboxylic acid ester is a
    fatty acid triglyceride, e.g., drying oil, linseed oil, tung oil, etc.


CLS 524/314
TXT Ester derived from dicarboxylic acid:

    Subject matter under subclass 306 wherein the carboxylic acid ester is an
    ester of a dicarboxylic acid, e.g., dialkyl fumarate, di-n-hexyl adipate,
    etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306,    for a compound containing two carboxylic acid ester groups which is
    the reaction product of a diol and a monocarboxylic acid.


CLS 524/315
TXT Carboxylic acid ester:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein the carboxylic acid derivative is
    a carboxylic acid ester.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition of a "carboxylic acid
    ester".


CLS 524/316
TXT Atom other than C, H, or O:

    Subject matter under subclass 315 wherein the carboxylic acid ester
    contains an atom other than carbon, hydrogen, or oxygen.


CLS 524/317
TXT Oxygen atom other than as part of a carboxylic acid group, e.g., glycolic
    ester, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 315 wherein the carboxylic acid ester
    contains an oxygen atom other than as part of a carboxylic acid ester group.


CLS 524/318
TXT Acyl group of the carboxylic acid has at least fifteen carbon atoms, e.g.,
    butyl stearate, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 315 wherein the carboxylic acid ester is
    derived from a carboxylic acid having at least fifteen carbon atoms, e.g.,
    stearic acid esters, etc.


CLS 524/319
TXT Halogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein the carboxylic acid or derivative
    contains a halogen atom.


CLS 524/320
TXT Oxygen atom other than as part of a COOH or derivative group:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein the carboxylic acid or derivative
    contains an oxygen atom other than as part of a COOH or derivative group,
    e.g., lactic acid, tartaric acid, etc.


CLS 524/321
TXT Two or more carboxylic acid or derivative groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein the carboxylic acid or derivative
    contains two or more -COO- groups, e.g., fumaric acid, maleic acid, etc.


CLS 524/322
TXT Acyl group of the carboxylic acid or derivative has at least fifteen carbon
    atoms, e.g., stearic acid, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein the carboxylic acid or derivative
    is derived from a carboxylic acid having at least fifteen carbon atoms,
    e.g., stearic acid, etc.


CLS 524/323
TXT Aryl-OH or salt or aryl-o-metal bond DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 81 wherein the organic designated nonreactant
    material is (a) a phenolic compound containing a hydroxyl group directly
    attached to the nuclear carbon of an aryl group or its salt, or (b) a
    compound containing an aryl-O-M (M-metal) group, e.g.,

    aryl-O-Pb-O-, etc.

    (1)     Note.  A cyclic salt of a phenolic compound,   e.g.,  etc.,

    is not considered a heterocyclic ring system and therefor is properly
    classified here.

    (2)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "metal".


CLS 524/324
TXT Fused or bridged ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 323 wherein the designated nonreactant
    material contains a fused- or bridged-ring system, e.g.,
    butyl-4-methyl-6-indanyl phenol, etc.

    (1)     Note.  A fused or bridged ring system for this subclass requires at
    least two fused or bridged carbocyclic rings. See the Glossary.

    (2)     Note.  In the absence of information to the contrary, the reaction
    product of a phenolic compound and a material containing a fused or bridged
    ring system is presumed to form a compound containing a fused- or
    bridged-ring system and is properly classifiable herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327+,   for a cyclic metal salt of a phenolic compound, e.g., antimonyl
    p-phenyl catecholate, etc.


CLS 524/325
TXT Fused or bridged ring system having at least three rings:

    Subject matter under subclass 324 wherein a fused- or bridged-ring system
    contains three or more rings.


CLS 524/326
TXT Cycloaliphatic group:

    Subject matter under subclass 323 wherein the designated nonreactant
    material contains a carbocyclic ring other than as aryl.


CLS 524/327
TXT Metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 323 wherein the designated nonreactant
    material contains a metal atom, e.g., triphenyl arsenite, etc.


CLS 524/328
TXT Group VIII metal (i.e., Fe, Ru, Os, Co, Rh, Ir, Ni, Pd, Pt):

    Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein the metal is a Group VIII metal
    atom (i.e., Co, Fe, Ru, Os, Rh, Ir, Ni, Pd, Pt).


CLS 524/329
TXT Group IVA metal (i.e., Ge, Sn, Pb):

    Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein the metal   is   a   Group   IVA
     metal   atom   (i.e.,

    Ge, Sn, Pb), e.g., Ar-O-Pb-O--R, etc.


CLS 524/330
TXT Atom other than C, H, O, or halogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 323 wherein the designated nonreactant
    contains an atom other than carbon, hydrogen, oxygen, or halogen.


CLS 524/331
TXT Two or more sulfur atoms:

    Subject matter under subclass 330 wherein the designated nonreactant
    contains at least two sulfur atoms.


CLS 524/332
TXT S-S linkage:

    Subject matter under subclass 331 wherein the sulfur compound contains a
    sulfur-sulfur linkage.


CLS 524/333
TXT Two or more separate aryl-OH groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 330 wherein the designated nonreactant
    contains two or more separate aryl-OH groups.


CLS 524/334
TXT Oxygen other than as part of an aryl-OH group:

    Subject matter under subclass 323 wherein the designated nonreactant
    material contains an oxygen atom which is other than as part of an aryl-OH
    group.


CLS 524/335
TXT C=O group:

    Subject matter under subclass 334 wherein the designated nonreactant
    material contains a carbonyl group.


CLS 524/336
TXT A single C=O group:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein the carbonyl compound contains
    only one carbonyl group, e.g., 2-hydroxy-benzophenone, etc.


CLS 524/337
TXT Aryl group having two or more OH groups directly attached to nuclear
    carbons thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 336 wherein the carbonyl compound contains an
    aryl group having two or more hydroxyl groups directly attached to nuclear
    carbons of the aryl group, e.g., 2,4,5-trihydroxy-acetophenone, etc.


CLS 524/338
TXT Two or more aryl-OH groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 336 wherein the carbonyl compound contains
    two or more aryl-OH groups, e.g., 2,2-dihydroxybenzophenone, etc.


CLS 524/339
TXT C-O-C linkage:

    Subject matter under subclass 334 wherein the designated nonreactant
    material contains an ether linkage (i.e., C-O-C-).


CLS 524/340
TXT Aryl compound having only one aryl ring and having one or more oh groups
    directly attached to nuclear carbons of the aryl:

    Subject matter under subclass 339 wherein the ether compound contains only
    one aryl ring and wherein at least one of the nuclear carbons of the aryl
    ring is directly attached to the oxygen atom of a hydroxyl group.


CLS 524/341
TXT Halogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 323 wherein the designated nonreactant
    material contains a halogen atom.


CLS 524/342
TXT Two or more separate aryl-OH groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 323 wherein the designated nonreactant
    material contains two or more separate aryl-OH groups.


CLS 524/343
TXT Only two aryl-OH groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 342 wherein the designated nonreactant
    material contains only two aryl-OH groups.


CLS 524/344
TXT Aryl group other than as part of an aryl-OH:

    Subject matter under subclass 343 wherein the designated nonreactant
    material contains in addition to the two aryl-OH groups an aryl group which
    is other than as part of an aryl-OH group.


CLS 524/345
TXT Polyhydric aryl-OH compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 323 wherein the designated nonreactant
    material contains two or more hydroxyl groups directly attached to the
    nuclear carbon of the same aryl group, e.g., catechol, etc.


CLS 524/346
TXT 1,3-dihydroxy, e.g., resorcinol, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 345 wherein the designated nonreactant
    material contains only two hydroxyl groups and where the hydroxyl groups
    are directly attached to the 1,3 position of the same aryl group.


CLS 524/347
TXT 1,4-dihydroxy, e.g., hydroquinone, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 345 wherein the designated nonreactant
    material contains only two hydroxyl and wherein the hydroxyl groups are
    directly attached to the 1,4 position of the same aryl group, e.g.,
    hydroquinone, etc.


CLS 524/348
TXT Two or more aryl-OH DNRM compounds:

    Subject matter under subclass 323 wherein two or more compounds each
    containing aryl-OH groups are utilized as designated nonreactant materials,
    e.g., a mixture of m-cresol and p-cresol, etc.


CLS 524/349
TXT Three or more substituents on the aryl-OH compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 323 wherein the designated nonreactant
    material contains a substituted aryl wherein three or more of the hydrogen
    atoms of the aryl have been substituted by other than a hydroxy group and
    wherein one of the hydrogen atoms of the aryl has been substituted by a
    hydroxy group, e.g., 2,6-di-t-p-cresol,etc.


CLS 524/350
TXT With other nonreactive material:

    Subject matter under subclass 349 wherein in addition to the substituted
    aryl there is also present another nonreactive material.


CLS 524/351
TXT Two substituents on the aryl-OH compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 323 wherein the designated nonreactant
    material contains a substituted aryl wherein two of the hydrogen atoms of
    the aryl have been substituted by other than a hydroxy group and wherein
    one of the hydrogen atoms of the aryl has been substituted by a hydroxy
    group.


CLS 524/352
TXT A single substituent on the aryl-OH compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 323 wherein the designated nonreactant
    material contains a substituted aryl wherein one of the hydrogen atoms of
    the aryl has been substituted by other than a hydroxy group and wherein one
    of the hydrogen atoms of the aryl has been substituted by a hydroxy group.


CLS 524/353
TXT With nonreactive organic material:

    Subject matter under subclass 352 wherein in addition to the substituted
    aryl compound there is also present a nonreactive organic material.


CLS 524/354
TXT Aldehyde DNRM, i.e., C-(C=O) H:

    Subject matter under subclass 81 wherein the designated nonreactive
    material is a compound containing at least one aldehyde group.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "aldehyde".


CLS 524/355
TXT Aryl:

    Subject matter under subclass 354 wherein the aldehyde compound contains at
    least one aryl group herein.


CLS 524/356
TXT Ketone or ketene DNRM, i.e., C(C=O) or C=C=O:

    Subject matter under subclass 81 wherein the designated nonreactive
    material contains at least one ketone or ketene group.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "ketone or
    ketene".


CLS 524/357
TXT Two or more C(C=O)C groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 356 wherein the designated nonreactant
    compound contains at least two ketone groups.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this class, acompound containing a -C-n-C-
    group, wherein n is two or more, is considered as being a plural ketone
    containing compound.  Additionally, a compound containing a -C--C-C- group
    is considered as having two ketone groups.


CLS 524/358
TXT Carbocyclic ring wherein at least two of the nuclear carbons thereof are
    double bonded directly to oxygen atoms so as to form two or C=O groups
    therewith, e.g., quinone, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 357 wherein the plural ketone compound
    contains at least one carbocyclic ring wherein at least two of the nuclear
    carbon atoms of the ring are double bonded directly to oxygen so as to form
    ketone groups therewith, e.g., quinone, benzoquinone, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    357,    for a plural ketone containing compound having a fused- or
    bridged-ring system wherein plural oxygen atoms are double bonded to the
    individual rings of the ring system that comprises the overall fused- or
    bridged-ring system and wherein no single individual ring is double bonded
    to two or more oxygen atoms.


CLS 524/359
TXT Carbocyclic ring, e.g., benzophenone, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 356 wherein the designated nonreactant
    material contains at least one ring system composed solely of carbon atoms.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are aryl or cycloaliphatic ring systems
    wherein a ketone or ketene group is bonded directly or indirectly thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    360,    for a ring system wherein one of the nuclear carbon atoms of the
    carbocyclic ring is double bonded directly to an oxygen atom so as to form
    a C=O group therewith.


CLS 524/360
TXT Carbocyclic ring wherein one of the nuclear carbons thereof is double
    bonded directly to an oxygen atom so as to form a C=O group therewith,
    e.g., cyclohexanone, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 359 wherein the designated nonreactant
    material contains a carbocyclic ring wherein a single nuclear carbon atom
    of the carbocyclic ring is bonded directly to an oxygen atom by a double
    bond so as to form a C=O group therewith.


CLS 524/361
TXT Only C, H, and oxygen atoms:

    Subject matter under subclass 356 wherein the ketone or ketene is composed
    solely of carbon, hydrogen, and oxygen atoms.


CLS 524/362
TXT Ten or more carbon atoms:

    Subject matter under subclass 361 wherein the ketone or ketene contains at
    least ten carbon atoms.


CLS 524/363
TXT Two or more C=O DNRM containing compounds:

    Subject matter under subclass 361 wherein the ketone or ketene is admixed
    with an additional ketone or ketene nonereactive material.


CLS 524/364
TXT With water, hydrocarbon, halohydrocarbon, or organic oxygen containing
    nonreactive material:

    Subject matter under subclass 361 wherein the ketone or ketene is admixed
    with an additional nonreactant material which is water, hydrocarbon,
    halohydrocarbon, or an organic oxygen containing material.


CLS 524/365
TXT Solid polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only:

    Subject matter under subclass 361 wherein a solid polymer derived from
    ethylenic reactants only is mixed with the ketone or ketene compound.


CLS 524/366
TXT C-O-C compound DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 81 wherein the organic designated nonreactant
    material is a compound containing a C-O-C group, e.g., ether, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107+,   for a cyclic ether or an epoxide.

    284+,   for a carboxylic acid or ester or noncyclic anhydride.


CLS 524/367
TXT Fused or bridged ring system or a cycloaliphatic group:

    Subject matter under subclass 366 wherein the C-O-C compound contains a
    fused- or bridged- ring system or a cycloaliphatic ring.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of a "fused- or
    bridged-ring system".


CLS 524/368
TXT Atom other than C, H, O, or halogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 366 wherein the C-O-C compound contains an
    atom other than carbon, hydrogen, oxygen, or halogen.


CLS 524/369
TXT Aryl group other than as part of a phenoxy group:

    Subject matter under subclass 366 wherein the C-O-C compound contains an
    aryl group other than the nuclear carbon of an aryl directly attached to an
    oxygen atom, e.g.,


CLS 524/370
TXT Aryl-o-aryl:

    Subject matter under subclass 366 wherein the C-O-C compound contains an
    aryl-O-aryl group, e.g., diphenyl oxide, etc.


CLS 524/371
TXT Halogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 370 wherein the aryl-O-aryl compound contains
    a halogen atom.


CLS 524/372
TXT Two or more phenoxy groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 366 wherein the C-O-C compound contains two
    or more discrete aryl-O- groups.


CLS 524/373
TXT Halogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 372 wherein the C-O-C compound contains a
    halogen atom.


CLS 524/374
TXT At least two diverse halogen atoms:

    Subject matter under subclass 373 wherein the halogen compound contains at
    least two diverse halogen atoms.


CLS 524/375
TXT Phenoxy group:

    Subject matter under subclass 366 wherein the C-O-C compound contains an
    aryl-O group.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327,    for a metal salt of a phenolic compound wherein the oxygen atom of
    the aryl-O- group is directly attached to a metal atom, e.g., C6H5ONa, etc.


CLS 524/376
TXT OH group, e.g., cellosolve, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 366 wherein the C-O-C compound contains a
    hydroxyl group.


CLS 524/377
TXT Two or more OH groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 376 wherein the hydroxyl containing compound
    contains two or more hydroxyl groups.


CLS 524/378
TXT Only C, H, and O atoms:
    Subject matter under subclass 366 wherein the C-O-C compound contains only
    carbon, hydrogen, and oxygen atoms.


CLS 524/379
TXT Carbon atom single bonded to an oxygen atom and wherein the carbon atom is
    not double bonded to a chalcogen atom DNRM, e.g., alcohols, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 81 wherein the organic designated nonreactant
    is a compound containing at least one carbon atom which is bonded directly
    an oxygen atom by a single bond and wherein the carbon atom is not double
    bonded to a chalcogen atom.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are alcohols, alcoholates, etc.


CLS 524/380
TXT Halogen or ethylenic unsaturation:

    Subject matter under subclass 379 wherein the C-O compound contains at
    least one halogen atom or at least one ethylenic group.


CLS 524/381
TXT Non C-OH oxygen atom, or element other than, c, o, or h, e.g., tartaric
    acid metal salt, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 379 wherein the C-O compound contains at
    least one oxygen atom which exist other than as part at a C-OH group, or
    wherein the C-O compound contains at least one element which is other than
    carbon, oxygen, or hydrogen.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are the metal salts of hydroxy carboxylic
    acids which have been excluded from subclasses 284+.


CLS 524/382
TXT Heavy metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 381 wherein the C-O compound contains a heavy
    metal atom.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "heavy metal".


CLS 524/383
TXT Carbocyclic ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 379 wherein the C-O compound contains at
    least one ring system composed solely of carbon atoms.


CLS 524/384
TXT Aryl group:

    Subject matter under subclass 383 wherein the C-O compound contains an aryl
    ring system.


CLS 524/385
TXT Only a single -C-OH group and at least six carbon atoms:

    Subject matter under subclass 379 wherein the C-O compound contains only
    one -C-OH group and at least six carbon atoms.


CLS 524/386
TXT At least two -OH groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 379 wherein the C-O compound contains at
    least two -OH groups.


CLS 524/387
TXT At least four -OH groups, e.g., pentaerythritol, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 386 wherein the C-O compound contains at
    least four -OH groups, e.g., pentaerythritol, sorbitol, etc.


CLS 524/388
TXT At least one solid polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only:

    Subject matter under subclass 386 wherein a solid polymer derived from
    ethylenic reactants only is mixed with the -OH compound.


CLS 524/389
TXT Two or more compounds containing -OH groups or with water NRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 379 wherein there are present two or more C-O
    compounds or wherein the C-O compound is admixed with water as a
    nonreactant material.


CLS 524/390
TXT With hydrocarbon or halogenated hydrocarbon NRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 379 wherein the C-O compound is in admixture
    with a nonreactant hydrocarbon or halogenated hydrocarbon material.


CLS 524/391
TXT Solid polymer or SICP derived from at least one nonethylenic reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 379 wherein a solid polymer derived from at
    least one nonethylenic reactant or a specified intermediate condensation
    product is admixed with the C-O compound.


CLS 524/392
TXT Organic chalcogen other than oxygen as DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 81 wherein the organic designated nonreactant
    material is a compound containing at least one chalcogen atom which is
    other than oxygen.


CLS 524/393
TXT Atom other than S, C, H, or a metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 392 wherein the designated nonreactant
    material contains at least one atom which is other than sulfur, carbon,
    hydrogen, or a metal.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "metal".


CLS 524/394
TXT Oxygen atom or metal atom DNRM, e.g., metal stearate, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 81 wherein the organic designated nonreactant
    material is a compound containing at least one oxygen or metal atom.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "metal".


CLS 524/395
TXT Atom other  than C, O, H, or a metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 394 wherein the oxygen or metal compound
    contains at least one atom which is other than carbon, oxygen, hydrogen, or
    a metal.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are halogen containing salts, etc.


CLS 524/396
TXT Carbocyclic group, e.g., aryl, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 394 wherein the oxygen or metal compound
    contains at least one ring system composed solely of carbon atoms.


CLS 524/397
TXT Ethylenic group, or at least two (C=O)O groups bonded to each other
    directly or only by carbon atoms:  Subject matter under subclass 394
    wherein the oxygen or metal compound contains at least one ethylenic group,
    or at least two O

    -O groups bonded to each other directly or bonded solely by carbon atoms.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are oxalic acid salts or salts of
    polycarboxylic acids.


CLS 524/398
TXT Transition metal atom (atomic no. 21-29, 39-47, 57-79):

    Subject matter under subclass 394 wherein the metal compound contains at
    least one transition metal atom.

    (1)     Note.  The transistion metals for this subclass are limited to
    atomic numbers 21-29, 39-47, and 57-79.


CLS 524/399
TXT Heavy metal or aluminum (atomic no. 13, 30-33, 48-51, 80-83):

    Subject matter under subclass 394 wherein the metal compound contains at
    least one heavy metal or aluminum atom.

    (1)     Note.  The metal atoms limited to this subclass have atomic numbers
    13, 30-33, 48-51, and 80-83.


CLS 524/400
TXT Group IIA metal atom (Be, Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba):

    Subject matter under subclass 394 wherein the metal compound is a Group IIA
    metal atom (Be, Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba).


CLS 524/401
TXT Inorganic compound devoid of a silicon atom DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the designated nonreactant
    material is an inorganic compound which is devoid of any silicon atoms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     for an elemental nonmetal designated nonreactant material.

    439+,   for an elemental metal or metal alloy designated nonreactant
    material.

    442+,   for a silicon containing designated nonreactant material, e.g.,
    clay, etc.

    492+,   for glass or silicon dioxide designated nonreactant material having
    numeric limitations.


CLS 524/402
TXT Chalcogen atom other than sulfur or oxygen DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein the inorganic nonreactant
    material is a compound containing at least one chalcogen atom which is
    other than sulfur or oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is subject matter relating to selenium or
    tellurium inorganic compounds.


CLS 524/403
TXT At least one element of the lanthanide series (atomic no. 57-71) or
    contains a noble metal atom (i.e., Au, Ag, Hg, Pt, Pd, Ir, Rh, Ru, Os) DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein the inorganic designated
    nonreactant material contains at least one lanthanide atom (at, no. 57-71)
    or at least noble metal atom (Au, Ag, Hg, Pt, Pd, Ir, Rh, Ru, Os).


CLS 524/404
TXT Boron atom DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein the inorganic designated
    nonreactant material is a compound containing at least one boron atom.


CLS 524/405
TXT Boron directly bonded to oxygen:

    Subject matter under subclass 404 wherein the inorganic designated
    nonreactant material contains at least one boron atom directly bonded to an
    oxygen atom.


CLS 524/406
TXT Group VIB metal atom DNRM (i.e., Cr, Mo, W):

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein the inorganic designated
    nonreactant material is a compound containing at least one Group VIB metal
    (Cr, Mo, W).


CLS 524/407
TXT Chromium:

    Subject matter under subclass 406 wherein the Group VIB metal atom is
    chromium in a chromium compound.


CLS 524/408
TXT Group V metal atom DNRM (i.e., V, Nb, Ta, As, Bi, Sb):

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein the inorganic designated
    nonreactant material is a compound containing at least one Group V metal
    atom (V, Nb, Ta, As, Bi, Sb).


CLS 524/409
TXT Antimony:

    Subject matter under subclass 408 wherein the Group V metal atom is
    antimony in an antimony compound.


CLS 524/410
TXT Atom other than Sb and oxygen:

    Subject matter under subclass 409 wherein the antimony compound contains at
    least one atom which is other than oxygen and antimony.


CLS 524/411
TXT With halogenated nonreactant material:

    Subject matter under subclass 409 wherein the antimony compound is admixed
    with an additional halogenated nonreactant material.


CLS 524/412
TXT Halogen atom other than Cl:

    Subject matter under subclass 411 wherein the halogenated nonreactant
    material contains a halogen atom other than chlorine.


CLS 524/413
TXT Transition metal other than Group VIII DNRM, i.e., Sc, Ti, Mn, Cu, Y, Zr,
    Tc, Hf, Re):

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein the inorgnic designated
    nonreactant material is a compound containing a transition metal other than
    a Group VIII transition metal atom.

    (1)     Note.  By schedule exclusion, the transition metal atoms proper for
    this subclass are limited to atomic numbers 21, 22, 25, 29, 39, 40, 43, 72,
    and 75 and reflect as such; Sc, Ti, Mn, Cu, Y, Zr, Tc, Hf, and Re.

    (2)     Note.  The Group VIII transition metal atom excluded herein are Fe,
    Co, and Ni.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    431,    for a Group VIII transition metal oxide.

    435,    for other Group VIII transition metal compounds as designated
    nonreactant materials.


CLS 524/414
TXT Phosphorus atom DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein the inorganic designated
    nonreactant material is a compound containing a phosphorus atom.


CLS 524/415
TXT Atom other than P, O, H, or a metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 414 wherein the inorganic nonreactant
    material contains at least one atom which is other than phosphorus, oxygen,
    hydrogen, or a metal atom.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "metal".


CLS 524/416
TXT Ammonium phosphate:

    Subject matter under subclass 415 wherein the phosphorus compound is
    ammonium phosphate, i.e., (NH4)2HPO4.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    415,    for phosphate monobasic, i.e., NH4H2PO4 and phosphate tribasic,
    i.e., (NH4)3PO4.


CLS 524/417
TXT Phosphorus atom directly bonded to four oxygen atoms, e.g., phosphoric
    acid, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 414 wherein the phosphorus compound contains
    at least four oxygen atoms directly bonded to a single phosphorus atom.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are phosphoric acid and phosphate salts
    thereof.


CLS 524/418
TXT Sulfur atom DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein the inorganic designated
    nonreactant material is a compound containing at least one sulfur atom.


CLS 524/419
TXT Two or more sulfur atoms, or at least one atom other than S, O, H, or a
    metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 418 wherein the sulfur compound contains at
    least two sulfur atoms or at least one atom which is other than sulfur,
    oxygen, hydrogen, or a metal atom.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "metal".


CLS 524/420
TXT Devoid of an oxygen atom, e.g., sulfide, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 418 wherein the sulfur compound is devoid of
    an oxygen atom.


CLS 524/421
TXT At least one hydrogen atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 418 wherein the sulfur compound contains at
    least one hydrogen atom.


CLS 524/422
TXT Sulfuric acid:

    Subject matter under subclass 421 wherein the sulfur compound is sulfuric
    acid.


CLS 524/423
TXT Sulfate group, e.g., calcium sulfate, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 418 wherein the sulfur compound contains at
    least one sulfate group, i.e., (SO4).


CLS 524/424
TXT Carbon atom DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein the inorganic designated material
    is a compound containing at least one carbon atom.


CLS 524/425
TXT Calcium carbonate, e.g., limestone, marble, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 424 wherein the carbon compound is calcium
    carbonate.

    (1)     Note.  Limestone is proper herein in that it consists mainly of
    calcium carbonate.


CLS 524/426
TXT Solid polymer derived from at least one diene monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 425 wherein a solid polymer derived from at
    least one monomer containing at least two ethylenic groups is admixed with
    the calcium carbonate.


CLS 524/427
TXT Solid polymer derived from unsaturated hydrocarbon monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 425 wherein a solid polymer derived form at
    least one unsaturated hydrocarbon monomer is admixed with the calcium
    carbonate.


CLS 524/428
TXT Nitrogen aton DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein the inorganic designated
    nonreactant material is a compound containing at least one nitrogen atom.


CLS 524/429
TXT Nitrogen directly bonded to an oxygen atom, e.g., nitric acid, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 428 wherein the nitrogen atom is directly
    bonded to at least one oxygen atom, e.g., nitric acid, etc.


CLS 524/430
TXT A single type of metal atom and only oxygen atoms DNRM, e.g., metal oxide,
    etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein the inorganic designated
    nonreactant material is a compound solely of oxygen and a single type of
    metal atom.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are metal oxides, peroxides, etc.


CLS 524/431
TXT Transition metal atom (i.e., Fe, Co, Ni):

    Subject matter under subclass 430 wherein the single type of metal atom is
    a Group VIII transition metal atom.

    (1)     Note. By schedule exclusion the only type of transition metals
    proper for this subclass are Fe, Co, and Ni.


CLS 524/432
TXT Group IIB metal atom (i.e., Zn or Cd):

    Subject matter under subclass 430 wherein the single type of metal atom is
    a Group IIB metal atom.

    (1)     Note.  By schedule exclusion only Zn and Cd can be found in this
    subclass since Hg compounds are to be found in subclass 403.


CLS 524/433
TXT Group IIA metal atom (i.e., Be, Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba):

    Subject matter under subclass 430 wherein the single type of metal atom is
    a Group IIA metal atom (Be, Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba).


CLS 524/434
TXT Heavy metal atom DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein the inorganic designated
    nonreactant material is a compound containing a heavy metal atom.

    (1)     Note.  By schedule exclusion the only type of heavy metals proper
    for this subclass are Fe, Co, Ni, Zr, Cd, Ge, Sn, Pb, Po.


CLS 524/435
TXT Transition metal atom (i.e., Fe, Co, Ni):

    Subject matter under subclass 434 wherein the heavy metal atom is a
    transition metal atom (Fe, Co, Ni) containing compound.


CLS 524/436
TXT Group IIA metal DNRM (i.e., Be, Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba):

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein the inorganic designated
    nonreactant material is a compound containing a Group IIA metal atom (Be,
    Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba).


CLS 524/437
TXT Aluminum DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein the inorganic designated
    nonreactant material is a compound containing an aluminum atom.


CLS 524/438
TXT Nonmetal compound DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein the inorgnaic designated
    nonreactant material is a compound which is devoid of any metal atoms.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definiiton of the term "metal".


CLS 524/439
TXT Elemental metal DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the designated nonreactant
    material is an elemental metal atom.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "metal".

    (2)     Note.  Alloys are considered to be mere mixtures of elemental
    metals for instance brass (Cu and Zn) or bronze (Cu and Sn).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     wherein the designated nonreactant is an elemental nonmetal.


CLS 524/440
TXT Transition metal atom DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 439 wherein the designated nonreactant
    material is an elemental transition metal atom, e.g., brass, bronze, etc.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "transition
    metal atom".


CLS 524/441
TXT Aluminum DNRM:
    Subject matter under subclass 439 wherein the designated nonreactant
    material is elemental aluminum.


CLS 524/442
TXT Soil or inorganic silicon DNRM (other than silicon dioxide, glass, quartz,
    novaculite or silicon dioxide type):

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein a solid polymer or specified
    intermediate condensation product is admixed with a designated nonreactant
    material which is an inorganic compound containing silicon.

    (1)     Note.  Soil is by definition an inorganic silicon containing
    material although it may contain certain organic values.

    (2)     Note.  SiO2 (quartz, novaculite and other silica type material) and
    glass have been excluded from this subclass and have been classified below
    on some other basis.  See for instance, subclasses 492+ for glass or silica
    having numerical limitations and see appropriate product subclasses for the
    admixture of a nonnumerically defined glass or SiO2 and a solid polymer or
    SICP.


CLS 524/443
TXT Atom other than Si, O, H, Al, Fe, or a Group IA or IIA metal  atom DNRM,
    e.g., slag, mineral wool, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 442 wherein the inorganic silicon material is
    a compound containing at least one atom which is other than silicon,
    oxygen, hydrogen, aluminum, iron, or a Group IA (Li, Na, K, Rb, Ca) or
    Group IIA (Be, Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba) metal atom.


CLS 524/444
TXT Aluminum atom DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 442 wherein the inorganic silicon compound
    contains at least one aluminum atom.


CLS 524/445
TXT Clay, e.g., fullers earth, fire clay, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 444 wherein the inorganic silicon-aluminum
    nonreactant material is a clay.

    (1)     Note.  Clays are aluminum silicate-bearing rocks which harden when
    fired and are plastic when wet. Included within the term clay are kaolin or
    china clay, ball clay, bentonite, fullers earth, dusting clay, calcined
    clays, fire clay, etc.  For purposes of this subclass, a material will be
    considered a clay when it is named as such or is accepted in the art as a
    clay material.


CLS 524/446
TXT With water NRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 445 wherein the clay is admixed with free
    water as a nonreactant material (NRM).


CLS 524/447
TXT Kaolin or bentonite:
    Subject matter under sublcass 445 wherein the clay DNRM is kaolin or
    bentonite.

    (1)     Note.  Kaolin clay is primarily composed of kaolinite.  Kaolin has
    a wide variety of names which include china clay, white bole, bolus alba,
    argilla, porcelain clay, white clay, and terra alba.

    (2)     Note.  Bentonite contains a substantial amount of the clay mineral
    montmorillonite and has the ability to swell gently by absorption of water.


    Other names for bentonite are wilkenite and colloidal clay.


CLS 524/448
TXT Diatomite or diatomaceous earth, e.g., kieselguhr, infusorial earth, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 444 wherein the silicon-aluminum nonreactant
    material is diatomite or diatomaceous earth.

    (1)     Note.  Diatomite or diatomaceous earth is a soft earthy rock
    composed of the siliceous skeletons of small aquatic plants called diatoms.
     Included within the term are kieselguhr, siliceous earth, tripolite, and
    infusorial earth.


CLS 524/449
TXT Mica:

    Subject matter under subclass 444 wherein the silicon-aluminum DNRM is mica.

    (1)     Note.  Mica is a group of silicates characterized physically as
    flat, six-sided monoclinic crystals, all of which contain hydroxy, an
    aluminum silicate, and an alkali.  Included within the term mica are
    biotite, muscovite, phlogopite, zinnwaldite, isinglass, and muscovy glass.


CLS 524/450
TXT Metal atom other than aluminum, e.g., zeolites, etc.:
    Subject matter under subclass 444 wherein the silicon-aluminum nonreactant
    material contains a nonaluminum metal atom, e.g., zeolites, etc.


CLS 524/451
TXT Talc (soapstone) DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 442 wherein the inorganic silicon material is
    talc.

    (1)     Note.  Talc is a magnesium silicate (3MgO.4SiO2.H2O).  Included
    within the term talc are talcum, steatite, mineral graphite, soapstone,
    rensselaerite, potstone, and French chalk.


CLS 524/452
TXT Asbestos DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 442 wherein the inorganic silicon material is
    asbestos.

    (1)     Note.  Asbestos is a group of impure magnesium silicate minerals
    which occur in fibrous form.  Included within the term asbestos are
    amianthus, earth flax, mountain cork, stone flax, fibrous actinolite,
    amphibole, and chrysolite.

    (2)     Note.  Serpentine asbestos is the mineral chrysotile.

    (3)     Note.  Amphibole asbestos includes the minerals:  tremolite,
    actinolite, amosite, crocidolite, and anthophyllite.


CLS 524/453
TXT Aldehyde-nitrogen SICP or solid polymer thereof:
    Subject matter under subclass 452 wherein an asbestos DNRM is admixed with
    aldehyde-nitrogen SICP or solid polymer thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a further elaboration of the term
    "SICP".


CLS 524/454
TXT SICP or solid polymer thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 452 wherein an asbestos DNRM is admixed with
    a SICP or solid polymer thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for an elaboration of the term "SICP".


CLS 524/455
TXT Halogen containing polymer:

    Subject matter under subclass 452 wherein an asbestos DNRM is admixed with
    a halogen containing solid polymer.

    (1)     Note.  The halogen herein may be introduced into the polymer
    subsequent to its formation as by halogenation or the halogen atom may be
    part of the original reactant or monomers, e.g., vinyl chloride, etc.


CLS 524/456
TXT Group IIA metal atom DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 442 wherein the inorganic silicon containing
    material additionally contains a Group IIA metal atom (Be, Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba).


CLS 524/457
TXT Polymerizing an ethylenic monomer in the presence of a preformed SICP or
    solid polymer and in the presence of a nonreactive material so as to form
    an aqueous dispersion, latex, suspension, or emulsion therewith; or product
    thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a desired aqueous dispersion,
    latex, suspension, or emulsion is formed by polymerization of ethylenically
    unsaturated monomer only in the presence of a preformed solid polymer or
    SICP and at least one nonreactive material.

    (1)     Note.  The nonreactive material can be water or any other NRM.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    525,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses for
    treatment of a preformed solid polymer or SICP with an ethylenically
    unsaturated reactant.

    526,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 201+ for
    preparation of solid polymer from ethylenic reactants only by
    polymerization in the presence of a previously formed solid polymer as a
    specified material.


CLS 524/458
TXT Polymerizing in the presence of water and in the presence of a solid
    polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only:

    Subject matter under subclass 457 wherein water is a nonreactive material
    present during said polymerization and the said preformed solid polymer is
    from ethylenically unsaturated monomers only.


CLS 524/459
TXT Solid polymer utilized contains vinyl alcohol units:

    Subject matter under subclass 458 wherein a preformed solid polymer
    contains vinyl alcohol units.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 525, subclass 56 for a definition of the term
    "vinyl alcohol".


CLS 524/460
TXT Solid polymer utilized is derived from an unsaturated carboxylic acid or
    salt:

    Subject matter under subclass 458 wherein said preformed solid polymer is
    derived from an ethylenically unsaturated carboxylic acid or salt.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "carboxylic
    acid or salt".


CLS 524/461
TXT Polymerizing in the presence of a solid polymer derived from ethylenic
    reactants only:

    Subject matter under subclass 457 wherein said preformed solid polymer is
    from ethylenically unsaturated reactants only.


CLS 524/462
TXT Mixing with fluorine- or iodine-containing organic compound or composition;
    or product thereof DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the designated nonreactant material
    is an organic compound containing at least one fluorine or iodine atom.


CLS 524/463
TXT Contains two or more fluorine or iodine DNRM organic compounds:

    Subject matter under subclass 462 wherein the composition contains two or
    more DNRM organic compounds containing fluorine or iodine atoms.


CLS 524/464
TXT Mixing with chlorine- or bromine-containing organic compound-hydrocarbon
    mixture or composition or product thereof DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the designated nonreactant material
    is a composition containing nonreactive chlorine or bromine organic
    material admixed with at least one hydrocarbon nonreactant material.


CLS 524/465
TXT Mixing with two or more chlorine- or bromine-containing organic compounds;
    or with a chlorine- or bromine-containing organic compound other than
    carbon tetrachloride, chloroform, or methylene chloride, and having
    numerical limitations other than amount, e.g., included herein are m.p.,
    b.p., m.w., structure, etc., or composition or product thereof, DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the designated nonreactive material
    is either a combination of two or more chlorine- or bromine-substituted
    organic compounds; or is a single chlorine- or bromine- substituted organic
    compound with numerical limitations other than amount.

    (1)     Note.  A numerical limitation is one which limits the compound in
    some way, e.g., density, optical rotation, m.p. b.p., etc.  If the name or
    structure only are given then the numerical limitation is inherent, e.g.,
    1,2-dichloroethane possesses 70% chlorine.  Also, "an organic compound
    containing 70% chlorine" is sufficient to classify here.

    (2)     Note.  The use of carbon tetrachloride, chloroform, or methylene
    chloride alone is not classified herein although they have inherent
    numerical limitations (see (1) Note above), but any combination of them are.

    (3)     Note.  A combination of two or more chlorine- or bromine-containing
    organic compounds does not require, per se, any numerical limitation.

    (4)     Note.  An amount of materials, e.g., 2 per cent of a halogenated
    hydrocarbon, is not sufficient for this subclass, and see subclasses
    498-612 below for such subject matter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    498     through 612, for the admixture of a solid polymer or specified
    intermediate condensation and carbon tetrachloride, chloroform, or
    methylene chloride, or for the combination of a solid polymer or specified
    intermediate condensation product and a chlorinated or brominated organic
    compound not described by numerical limitations which identify the
    halogen-containing compound.


CLS 524/466
TXT Two or more chloring- or bromine-containing organic compounds:

    Subject matter under subclass 465 wherein the designated nonreactant
    material is a composition containing at least two chlorine- or
    bromine-substituted hydrocarbons or mixtures thereof, e.g., chlorinated
    paraffin wax mixed with chloroform, etc.


CLS 524/467
TXT Chlorine or bromine organic compound containing a bridged, fused, or
    cycloalphatic ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 465 wherein the chlorine or bromine organic
    compound contains a bridged or fused or cycloaliphatic ring, e.g.,
    chlorinated naphthalene, etc.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "bridged or
    fused".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    470,    for an aromatic chlorine or bromine compound.


CLS 524/468
TXT Chlorine or bromine organic compound containing ethylenic unsaturation:

    Subject matter under subclass 465 wherein the chlorine or bromine organic
    compound contains ethylenic unsaturation.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "ethylenic
    unsaturation".


CLS 524/469
TXT Bromine-containing organic compound:
    Subject matter under subclass 465 wherein the organic compound contains at
    least one bromine atom.


CLS 524/470
TXT Chlorine-containing aromatic compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 465 wherein the organic compound contains at
    least one chlorine atom and at least one aryl ring, e.g., chlorobenzene,
    etc.


CLS 524/471
TXT Aromatic compound containing two or more aromatic rings:

    Subject matter under subclass 470 wherein the organic compound is a
    chlorine compound containing at least two aromatic rings.


CLS 524/472
TXT Chlorine-containing wax:

    Subject matter under subclass 465 wherein the composition contains a
    chlorinated wax.

    (1)     Note.  To be classified herein, a material must be disclosed or
    claimed as being a wax.


CLS 524/473
TXT Organic compound containing two or more chlorine atoms:

    Subject matter under subclass 465 wherein the designated nonreactant
    material is a composition wherein two or more chlorine atoms are present in
    an organic compound, e.g., o-dichlorobenzene, etc.


CLS 524/474
TXT Mixing two or more hydrocarbons; or a hydrocarbon other than benzene,
    toluene, or xylene per se and having numerical limitations other than
    amount, e.g., included herein are m.p., b.p., viscosity, structure, m.w.,
    etc., or composition or product thereof, DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the composition contains two or
    more designated nonreactive hydrocarbons or wherein the composition
    contains a single hydrocarbon excluding benzene, toluene, or xylene with
    numerical limitations other than merely an amount, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Benzene, toluene, or xylene alone are not classified here
    despite their inherent numerical limitations, i.e., percentage composition.
    Mixtures, however, of the above ingredients would be proper in subclass 476.

    (2)     Note.  A numerical limitation is one which limits the compound in
    some way, e.g., refractive index, b.p., m.p., viscosity, molecular weight,
    aniline number, etc.  If the name or structure only are given then the
    numerical limitation is inherent, e.g., naphthalene possesses 94% carbon or
    6% hydrogen, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    485,    for a DNRM which is turpentine, turpentine oil, oil of turpentine,
    or spirits of turpentine.

    498     through 612,  for compositions which contain an inert hydrocarbon
    described only by amount or nominal terms, e.g., naphtha, paraffin,
    kerosene, etc.


CLS 524/475
TXT With water NRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 474 wherein the composition contains water as
    a nonreactant material.

    (1)     Note.  The water may be introduced in any manner, e.g., solution,
    dispersion, emulsion, steaming, humidifying, hydration of a chemical
    compound, etc.


CLS 524/476
TXT Two or more hydrocarbons:

    Subject matter under subclass 474 wherein the composition contains at least
    two designated nonreactive hydrocarbons, e.g., naphthalene and toluene, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Naturally occurring mixtures per se, e.g., naphthenics,
    raffinates, aromatics, white spirit, naphthas, paraffins, xylenes,
    kerosenes, paraffin wax, high and low melting waxes, turpentine, etc., are
    classified only when there is some limitation, e.g., 75% ortho and 25% para
    xylene mixture, a paraffin oil containing 20% aromatic hydrocarbon, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    525,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses for
    mixtures containing solid polymeric hydrocarbons and a solid polymer,
    specified intermediate condensation product, specified polymer-forming
    ingredients or process of preparing or treating said composition.


CLS 524/477
TXT At least two solid hydrocarbons:

    Subject matter under subclass 476 wherein at least two of the designated
    nonreactant hydrocarbons are solids at ambient temperature.


CLS 524/478
TXT At least one microcrystalline wax:

    Subject matter under subclass 477 wherein one of the solid hydrocarbons is
    a microcrystalline wax.

    (1)     Note.  The term "microcrystalline wax" refers to a wax material
    which is obtained usually from the residual product of the vacuum
    distillation of lubricating oils.  In general, microcrystalline waxes
    contain very minor quantities of straight chain paraffinic hydrocarbons.

    (2)     Note.  To be place herein, the disclosure or claim must recite a
    "microcrystalline wax".


CLS 524/479
TXT Mixture contains three or more waxes:

    Subject matter under subclass 478 wherein the composition contains three or
    more hydrocarbon waxes.


CLS 524/480
TXT Mixture contains microcrystalline wax having specified melting point:

    Subject matter under subclass 478 wherein the composition contains a
    microcrystalline wax having a specified melting point.

    (1)     Note.  A range of melting points is included within the term
    specified melting point.


CLS 524/481
TXT Unsaturated hydrocarbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 474 wherein the composition contains an
    ethylenically unsaturated hydrocarbon as a designated nonreactant material.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "ethylenically
    unsaturated".


CLS 524/482
TXT Unsaturated hydrocarbon contains a bridged or fused ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 481 wherein the designated nonreactant
    material is an unsaturated hydrocarbon which contains a bridged or fused
    ring, e.g., indene, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is to be found the various types of
    turpentines, usualy a mixture of aplha and beta pinenes, diterpene, etc.

    (2)     Note.  See the Glossary for or a definition of the term "bridged
    and fused rings".


CLS 524/483
TXT Unsaturated hydrocarbon contains plural unsaturation:

    Subject matter under subclass 481 wherein the designated nonreactant is an
    unsaturated hydrocarbon which contains plural unsaturation, e.g., liquid
    polybutadiene, etc.


CLS 524/484
TXT Aromatic hydrocarbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 474 wherein the designated nonreactant is an
    aromatic hydrocarbon other than benzene, toluene, or xylene per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    476,    for a mixture of benzene and toluene as designated nonreactants.


CLS 524/485
TXT Aromatic hydrocarbon contains a bridged or fused ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 484 wherein the designated nonreactant
    contains a bridged or fused ring, e.g., naphthalene, etc.


CLS 524/486
TXT Aromatic hydrocarbon contains two or more aromatic rings:

    Subject matter under subclass 484 wherein the designated nonreactant is a
    hydrocarbon containing two or more aromatic rings. e.g., biphenyl,
    terphenyl, etc.


CLS 524/487
TXT Hydrocarbon wax:

    Subject matter under subclass 474 wherein the designated nonreactant is a
    hydrocarbon wax.

    (1)     Note.  To be classified herein, a material must be disclosed or
    claimed as being a wax.


CLS 524/488
TXT Microcrystalline wax:

    Subject matter under subclass 487 wherein the composition contains a
    microcrystalline wax.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 478 for a discussion of the term
    "microcrystalline wax".


CLS 524/489
TXT Wax having melting point about 1200F (400C):

    Subject matter under subclass 487 wherein the composition contains a
    hydrocarbon wax with a claimed melting point above 1200F or 490C.


CLS 524/490
TXT Hydrocarbon having a specified name molecular weight or chain length:

    Subject matter under subclass 474 wherein the designated nonreactant
    material is named a hydrocarbon, or one having either a claimed numerical
    weight or a claimed specified chain length (the number may also reflect a
    range or average).

    (1)     Note.  The molecular weight may be expressed in any of the
    art-recognized terms or units, e.g., viscosity-average vapor pressure
    osmometry, weight average, etc., and the chain length may be linear,
    cyclic, or branched.


CLS 524/491
TXT Hydrocarbon having a specified viscosity:

    Subject matter under subclass 474 wherein the designated nonreactant
    material is a liquid hydrocarbon having a claimed specific viscosity
    expressed in any of the units generally recognized in the art, e.g.,
    centistokes, Saybolt universal seconds, etc.


CLS 524/492
TXT Mixing inorganic silicon-containing material having color or numerical
    limitations other than amount, e.g., included herein are m.p., chemical
    composition, particle size, surface area, etc., or composition or product
    thereof, DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the designated nonreactant material
    is an inorganic silicon-containing material having claimed numerical
    limitations other than amount, e.g., m.p., particle size, etc., or wherein
    the claim recite a special color or composition or product thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    498     through 612, for a particular crystalline structure of a silicon
    inorganic compound, e.g., novaculite, quartz, etc., wherein the claims fail
    to recite a numerical limitation.

    847,    for a process of polymerizing in the presence of a silicon
    inorganic DNRM which may be novaculite, quartz, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    523,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 200+ for inert
    inorganic silicon-containing materials that have been surface coated,
    impregnated, or encapsulated.


CLS 524/493
TXT Inorganic silicon-containing material having specified dimension:

    Subject matter under subclass 492 wherein the designated nonreactant
    material is a silicon compound having specified dimension, e.g., silicon
    monoxide having a particle size of from 10-100 millimicrons, etc.


CLS 524/494
TXT Material contains glass:

    Subject matter under subclass 493 wherein the designated nonreactant
    inorganic silicon-containing material having specified dimensions is glass,
    e.g., fiber glass 2cm in length, etc., or it may be a glass per se without
    any special limitations but admixed with at least one inorganic
    silicon-containing compound which does recite a numerical limitation proper
    for this subclass.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "glass".


CLS 524/495
TXT Mixing with carbon, e.g., graphite, etc., having numerical limitations
    other than amount, e.g., included herein are particle size, surface area,
    etc., or composition or product thereof, DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the designated nonreactant material
    is carbon in any of its allotropic forms, having claimed numerical
    limitations other than amount, e.g., carbon particles with surface area of
    about 200 square millimicrons, or a tensile stength of 100,000 psi at 250C,
    etc.

    (1)     Note.  Included within the term "claimed numerical limitations"
    are, e.g., size, cross-sectional area, etc. However, since carbon is an
    element, terms such as density, atomic number, and other terms which are
    inherent, are excluded from this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    498     through 612, for the admixture of a preformed solid polymer or SICP
    with carbon having no claimed numerical limitations.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    523,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 200+ for a carbon
    particle that has been surface coated, impregnated, or encapsulated.


CLS 524/496
TXT Carbon particle having specified dimension:

    Subject matter under subclass 495 wherein teh designated nonreactant
    material is a carbon particle having specified dimensions, e.g., carbon
    particles of about 1,000 millimicron is size, etc.


CLS 524/497
TXT Mixing with titanium dioxide material having numerical limitations other
    than amount, e.g., included herein are particle size, etc., composition or
    product thereof, DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the designated nonreactant is TiO2
    having claimed numerical limitations other than amount.

    (1)     Note.  Included within the term numerical limitations are, e.g.,
    size, dimension, cross-sectional area, etc., but not m.p., or density.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   for TiO2 that has been surface coated, impregnated, or encapsulated.

    498     through 612, for the admixture of a preformed solid polymer or SICP
    with TiO2 having no claimed numerical limitation.

    847,    for a process of polymerizing in the presence of anatase as a DNRM.


CLS 524/498
TXT Solid polymer or solid SICP derived from or reacted with protein or
    biologically active polypeptide or product thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 which involves the addition of a
    nonreactant material to a solid polymer or SICP derived from a protein or
    polypeptide or wherein a nonreactant material is added to a polymer which
    has been modified by chemical interaction with a protein or biologically
    active polypeptide.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a further elaboration of the term
    "protein or biologically active polypeptide".


CLS 524/499
TXT Solid polymer derived from monomer from unsaturated petroleum hydrocarbon
    fraction or product thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 which involves the addition of a
    nonreactant material to a solid polymer derived from a mixture of
    hydrocarbons which have been obtained from a petroleum hydrocarbon fraction.


CLS 524/500
TXT Containing two or more solid polymers; solid polymer or SICP and a SICP,
    SPFI, or an ethylenic reactant or product thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 which involves the mixing of a nonreactant
    material with two or more solid polymers; or with a solid polymer and an
    ethylenic reactant, specified intermediate condensation product (SICP), or
    specified polymer-forming ingredients (SPFI); or with two specified
    intermediate condensation products (CISP); or with a specified intermediate
    condensation product and specified polymer-forming ingredients or ethylenic
    reactant.

    (1)     Note.  The included combinations may be tabulated in a more easily
    recognizable form as follows:

    Combination Proper for Subclass 500.

    1. P1 + P2

    2. P + SICP

    3. P + SPFI

    4. P + ER

    5. SICP1 + SICP2

    6. SICP + SPFI

    7. SICP + ER

    (2)     Note. P = Solid polymer


    SICP =  Specified intermediate  condensation
                    product

    SPFI =   Specified polymer-forming ingredi-                        ents

    ER   =   Ethylenic reactant

    A polymer is a solid when so stated or when it is described in one or more
    of the following terms.  This list is not to be taken as limiting a solid
    to the enumerated terms.  Other terms in patents not noted below may be
    interpreted as being solid when proper description is given therein:


    1.      coagulated      11.     meltable

    2.      brittle 12.     melting point

    3.      ductile 13.     millable

    4.      Durran m.p.     14.     molten

    5.      elastic 15.     pliable

    6.      elastomer       16.     powder

    7.      fiber-forming   17.     rubber

    8.      friable 18.     rubbery

    9.      fusible 19.     thermoplastic

    10.      gum     20.     thermoset



    A wax is not considered to be a solid even if defined by one or more of the
    above terms.


    Specified intermediate condensation product is limited to the following:



    A)      Reactants noted in categories 1-3 below either as enumerated or
    with additional reactants, with the proviso that at least one of the
    reactants noted in 1-3 must be saturated, or

    B)      to the materials having the formulas set forth in categories 4-6.
    It must be remembered for purposes of classification that the structural
    formulas noted in 4-6 below are methylol compounds or derivatives thereof
    and are to be regarded as being a mixture of an aldehyde and the
    appropriate other reactant or reactants, with the proviso that at least one
    of the reactants used in preparing the methylol compound be saturated.  In
    this regard, a methylol phenol is classified as if it were a mixture of
    formaldehyde and phenol, and methylol urea is classified as if it were a
    mixture of formaldehyde and urea.

    1.      Reaction of an aldehyde or aldehyde derivative and/or an amine or
    compound
    containing a

            N- or N- moiety (X is chalcogen).

    2.      Reaction of an aldehyde or aldehyde derivative and a phenolic
    material.

    3.      Reaction of an aldehyde or aldehyde derivative and a ketone.

    4.      A compound containing N --O-Z n

    5.      A compound containing a
    T -CH2-O-A n

    6.      A compound  containing a


    Y' and Y" are H or hydrocarbon groups.



    T -     is an atom other than H or carbon of a carbon-substituted radical.

    A -     is a hydrogen or carbon atom and which carbon is bonded to only H,
    carbon, or single bonded to oxygen atoms.

    X -     is H, part of an ether group, or an inorganic cation.

    N -     is two or more, B is one or more.

    Z -     is a H or carbon radical.

            See the (5) Note below for a further clarification of the term
    specified intermediate condensation product.

    Specified Polymer-Forming Ingredients are Limited to: Those materials
    listed below under fourteen (14) different categories wherein at least one
    of each necessary reactants be utilized and that at least one be saturated.

    The term "poly" as noted in the specified polymer-forming ingredients area
    below is meant to include only reactants which are either (a) monomeric and
    in any physical state, or (b) polymeric but in a nonsolid physical state.
    The term "poly" designates that at least two of the required functional
    groups are present.

    In the classification schedule the term "necessary ingredients" has been
    utilized in some subclasses to include the combination of materials
    enumerated below (1-14) which must be present to have specified
    polymer-forming ingredients.

    1.      Aldehyde or aldehyde derivative and a phenolic material.

    2.      Aldehyde or aldehyde derivative and an organic amine.

    3.      Aldehyde or aldehyde derivative and

            a N-- containing moiety (X is chalcogen).

    4.      Aldehyde or aldehyde derivative and a hydrocarbon.

    5.      Epoxides containing more than one 1,2-epoxy group per mole.

    6.      Organic Compounds containing more than one -N=C=X (X is chalcogen
    atom) and
    a organic polyol.

    7.      Organic compounds containing more than one -N=C=X (X is chalcogen)
    and an
    organic polyamine.

    8.      Organic compound containing more than one -N=C=X (X is chalcogen)
    and a
    polycarboxylic acid or anhydride.

    9.      Carbonic acid halocarbonate or a carbonate and a polyol.

    10.      Hal -- hal and a polyol.

    11.      Polycarboxylic acid or derivative and a polyol.

    12.      Polycarboxylic acid or derivative and a polyamine.

    13.      Aldehyde or aldehyde derivative and a compound containing an

            organic N- moiety.

    14.      Aldehyde or aldehyde derivative and a ketone.

    (3)     Note.  An aldehyde derivative for purposes of this subclass
    includes:

    a.      Compounds having a X-CH2OH group wherein X is other than carbon or
    hydrogen.  Included herein are paraformaldehyde, methylol derivatives of
    urea, nylon, and polyacrylaminde, etc.

    b.      Heterocyclic compounds having only carbon and oxygen as ring atoms
    in an alternating manner and in equal amount,

            i.e., (--O-)n.  Included herein is trioxane.

    c.      Hexamethylenetetramine or its derivatives, e.g.,

            A derivative of this type requires the basic ring structure of
    hexamethylenetetramine but wherein the hydrogen atoms may have been
    replaced by other atoms.

    (4)     Note.  Compounds having a methylol group (-CH2OH) bonded to atoms
    other than carbon, oxygen, or hydrogen are regarded for this subclass as
    being two compounds, one of which is formaldehyde.  For instance, a
    methylol derivative of melamine is regarded as being a mixture of melamine
    and formaldehyde.  Methylol urea is regarded as being a mixture of
    formaldehyde and urea.

    (5)     Note.  Paraformaldehyde polymer is regarded as a formaldehyde
    reactant.

    (6)     Note.  A resole is considered to be a specified intermediate
    condensation product even if the structure is recited.  However, a novolak
    is considered to be a solid phenol-aldehyde polymer.

    (7)     Note.  Compounds containing ethylenic unsaturation are not
    considered to be specified intermediate condensation products (see
    structures 4-6 under specified intermediate condensation products above)
    nor are methylol or methylol derivatives, per se.

    (8)     Note.  When nonpolymeric reactants A, B, and C, none of which is a
    specified intermediate condensation product, are mixed simultaneously under
    controlled conditions such that in a first stage one or two (e.g., A and/or
    B) of the reactants are caused to react to form a solid intermediate
    condensation product and the other reactants are caused to react later in
    the process, the claim is classified on the basis of the reactants which
    were introduced initially and not

            on the intermediate solid product unless a material is added
    subsequent to the formation of the solid intermediate and prior to the
    reaction of the final reactants.

    (9)     Note.  A specified intermediate condensation product has been
    limited to a condensation product of an aldehyde with at least one of
    phenol, phenol ether, inorganic phenolate,

            N--, N--containing reactant (X is chalcogen) or ketone wherein the
    condensation product contains a plurality of methylol groups (-CH2OH) or
    the partially or fully etherified product thereof (-CH2OR).  In those
    instances where it is unknown from the claims or disclosure whether
    methylol or etherified methylol groups are present, the document has been
    considered to have methylol groups and crossed to where it would be
    classified if no methylol groups were present.

    (10)    Note.  For purposes of this class all solid polymers are regarded
    as being reactants.

    (11)    Note.  For purposes of this subclass natural rubber or a modified
    form thereof is treated as polyisoprene when admixed with a solid polymer,
    specified intermediate condensation products specified polymer-forming
    ingredients or ethylenic monomers, and see Class 523, subclass 1 for patent
    placement in this class involving natural rubber or a modified form thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    543     through 612, for an admixture of a NRM and a solid polymer or SICP
    modified by a chemical reactant which chemical reactant is other than a
    solid polymer, SICP, SPFI, or ethylenic reactant.


CLS 524/501
TXT Producing an aqueous system by mixing two or more aqueous emulsions,
    suspensions, dispersions, or solutions, or any of the above in admixture
    with one another and wherein each individually contains a solid polymer or
    SICP:

    Process under subclass 500 of producing an aqueous composition by admixing
    at least two aqueous systems each containing a solid polymer or SICP, said
    aqueous systems being in the form of an emulsion, suspension, dispersion,
    or solution.

    (1)     Note.  A rubber latex is deemed to be an aqueous system for
    purposes of this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes, e.g., blends of natural rubber latex
    with synthetic rubber latex, etc.


CLS 524/502
TXT At least one solid polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 which involves the mixing of a
    nonreactant material with a solid polymer derived from ethylenic reactants
    only.

    (1)     Note.  A chemically modified ethylenic polymer, e.g., halogenated
    butadiene, etc., is considered as being proper herein in that initially a
    solid polymer from only ethylenic reactants is present.  No weight for
    purposes of classification herein has been given to polymers which have
    been treated chemically to introduce atoms or to remove atoms which were
    part of the original polymer derived from ethylenic monomers.


CLS 524/503
TXT Polyvinyl alcohol:

    Subject matter under subclass 502 wherein a solid polymer containing vinyl
    alcohol units and an additional solid polymer, SICP, SPFI, or ethylenic
    reactant is admixed with a NRM.

    (1)     Note.  A vinyl alcohol-containing polymer requires at least three
    CH2-CH-OH groups in the polymer chain.

    (2)     Note.  Vinyl alcohol polymers for the most part herein are prepared
    by the partial hydrolysis or saponification of polymers of vinyl esters,
    particularly homo- or interpolymeric-vinyl acetate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    557,    for a NRM in admixture with polyvinyl alcohol when there is no
    additional solid polymer, SICP, SPFI, or ethylenic reactant.


CLS 524/504
TXT Solid graft or solid graft-type copolymer with other solid polymer, SICP,
    or SPFI:

    Subject matter under subclass 502 wherein a NRM together with a solid graft
    or solid graft-type copolymer and an additional solid polymer, SICP, or
    SPFI is present.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "graft or
    graft-type copolymer".

    (2)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass, the graft or graft-type
    copolymer need not be derived from ethylenic reactants only.  It is
    sufficient for purposes of this subclass that a solid polymer derived from
    ethylenic reactants only be present.


CLS 524/505
TXT Solid block or solid block-type copolymer with other solid polymer, SICP or
    SPFI:

    Subject matter under subclass 502 wherein the NRM together with a solid
    block or block-type copolymer and an additional solid polymer, SICP, or
    SPFI is present.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "block or
    block-type copolymer".

    (2)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass, the block or block-type
    copolymer need not be derived from ethylenic reactants only.  It is
    sufficient for purposes of this subclass that a solid polymer derived from
    ethylenic reactants only be present.


CLS 524/506
TXT With solid polymer derived from at least one Si-H or Si-C reactant wherein
    at least one of the reactants forming the solid polymer is saturated; or
    with SPFI or SICP derived from a Si-H or Si-C reactant wherein at least one
    of the necessary reactants is saturated:

    Subject matter under subclass 502 wherein in addition to the NRM and solid
    polymer derived form ethylenic reactants only there is additionally present
    (a) a solid polymer derived from a saturated Si-H or Si-C reactant, or (b)
    a solid copolymer derived from a Si-C or Si-H reactant wherein at least one
    of the reactants forming the solid copolymer is saturated, or (c) specified
    polymer-forming ingredients wherein at least one of the necessary
    polymer-forming ingredients contains a Si-C or Si-H bond and at least one
    of the necessary polymer-forming ingredients is saturated or a reaction
    product thereof, or (d) a specified intermediate condensation product
    containing a Si-C or Si-H bond.


CLS 524/507
TXT With solid polymer derived from at least one -N=C=X (X is chalcogen)
    reactant wherein at least one of the reactants forming the solid polymer is
    saturated; or with SPFI or SICP derived from a -N=C=X reactant wherein at
    least one of the necessary reactants is saturated:

    Subject matter under subclass 502 wherein in addition to the NRM and solid
    polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only there is additionally present
    (a) a solid polymer derived from a saturated -N=C=X (X is chalcogen)
    reactant, or (b) a solid copolymer derived from a -N=C=X containing
    reactant wherein at least one of the reactants forming the solid copolymer
    is saturated, or (c) specified polymer-forming ingredients wherein at least
    one of the necessary ingredients contains a -N=C=X group and at least one
    of the necessary polymer-forming ingredients is saturated or a reaction
    product or condensate thereof, or (d) a specified intermediate condensation
    product which contains a -N=C=X group.


CLS 524/508
TXT With solid polymer derived from at least one reactant wherein at least one
    of the reactants forming the solid polymer is a phenol or inorganic
    phenolate; or with SPFI or SICP derived from phenol or inorganic phenolate
    wherein at least one of the necessary reactants is saturated:

    Subject matter under subclass 502 wherein in addition to the NRM and solid
    polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only there is additionally present
    (a) a solid polymer derived form a saturated phenol or inorganic phenolate,
    or (b) a solid copolymer derived from a phenolic-containing reactant
    wherein at least one of the reactants forming the solid copolymer is
    saturated, or (c) specified polymer-forming ingredients wherein at least
    one of the necessary ingredients is a phenol or inorganic phenolate, and at
    least one of the necessary polymer-forming ingredients is saturated, or a
    reaction product or condensate thereof, or (d) a specified intermediate
    condensation product containing a phenolic group.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 528, subclass 86 (Note 1A and 1C) for a definition
    of the terms "phenol" and "inorganic phenolate".


CLS 524/509
TXT With aldehyde or aldehyde-type reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 508 wherein the solid polymer or SICP derived
    from a phenol or inorganic phenolate is also derived from an aldehyde or
    derivative, or wherein one of the solid polymer-forming ingredients is a
    phenol or inorganic phenolate and at least one of the other necessary
    ingredients is an aldehyde or derivative.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term
    "aldehyde-derivative".


CLS 524/510
TXT Water DNRM containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 509 wherein water is utilized as a designated
    nonreactant material.


CLS 524/511
TXT Ethylenic polymer derived from at least one reactant containing two or more
    ethylenic groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 509 wherein the solid polymer from ethylenic
    reactants only is derived from at least one reactant containing two or more
    ethylenic groups.


CLS 524/512
TXT With solid polymer derived from at least one reactant wherein at least one
    of the reactants forming the solid polymer is an aldehyde or derivative; or
    with SPFI or SICP derived from an aldehyde or derivative wherein at least
    one of the necessary reactants is saturated:

    Subject matter under subclass 502 wherein in addition to the NRM and solid
    polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only there is additionally present
    (a) a solid polymer derived from a saturated aldehyde or derivative
    (including methylol ethers or condensate thereof), or (b) a solid copolymer
    derived from an aldehyde or aldehyde derivative reactant wherein at least
    one of the reactants forming the solid copolymer is saturated, or (c)
    specified polymer-forming ingredients wherein at least one of the necessary
    polymer-forming ingredients contains an aldehyde or derivative group and at
    least one of the necessary polymer-forming ingredients is saturated or a
    reaction product or condensate thereof, or (d) a specified intermediate
    condensation product which contains an aldehyde or aldehyde derivative
    group.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition of the terms "aldehyde
    or aldehyde derivative".


CLS 524/513
TXT With polycarboxylic acid or derivative and a polyol at least one of which
    is saturated or with solid polymer thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 502 wherein in addition to the NRM and solid
    polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only there is additionally present
    (a) a solid polymer derived from at least one polycarboxylic acid or
    derivative and at least one polyol and wherein at least one of the
    reactants forming the solid polymer is saturated, or (b) polymer-forming
    ingredients wherein at least one of the necessary reactants is a
    polycarboxylic acid or derivative and at least one of the necessary
    reactants is a polyol and at least one of the necessary polymer-forming
    ingredients is saturated, or a reaction product thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "derivative".


CLS 524/514
TXT With polycarboxylic acid or derivative and a polyamine, or with
    nitrogen-containing carboxylic acid or derivative reactant at least one of
    which is saturated or with solid polymer thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 502 wherein in addition to the NRM and solid
    polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only there is additionally present
    (a) a solid polymer derived from a saturated imide, lactam, aminocarboxylic
    acid, or amine salt of a saturated carboxylic acid, or (b) a solid polymer
    derived from at least one imide, lactam, aminocarboxylic acid, or amine
    salt of a polycarboxylic acid, or polycarboxylic acid and a polyamine and
    wherein at least one of the reactants forming the solid polymer is
    saturated, or (c) polymer-forming ingredients wherein at least one of the
    necessary reactants is a polyamine and at least one of the necessary
    reactants is a polycarboxylic acid or derivative and at least one of the
    necessary polymer-forming ingredients is saturated.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "derivative".


CLS 524/515
TXT Two or more solid polymers derived from ethylenic reactants only:

    Subject matter under subclass 502 wherein in addition to the NRM there is
    additionally present two or more solid polymers derived from ethylenic
    reactants only.

    (1)     Note.  A reaction product of two or more solid polymers derived
    from ethylenic reactants admixed with a NRM is considered as being
    equivalent to a blend of two or more solid ethylenic polymers and as such
    is properly classifiable herein.

    (2)     Note.  A blend of three or more solid polymers at least two of
    which are derived from ethylenic reactants only is properly classifiable
    herein on the basis of the two ethylenic polymers. Classification in this
    area is solely on the basis of reactants utilized in preparing the
    ethylenic polymers.

    (3)     Note.  This area provides for blends or reaction products of two or
    more ethylenic polymers which have been chemically modified. Classification
    in this area, however, is solely on the basis of the ethylenic monomers
    utilized in preparing the ethylenic polymers.

    (4)     Note.  Placement in this subclass is on the basis of the ethylenic
    reactants used in the preparation and not on the basis of ethylenic
    reactants which may be reacted with a mixture of solid polymers from
    ethylenic reactants only.

    (5)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are multistep
    polymerization-postpolymerization processes which occur in the presence of
    a single preformed solid polymer from ethylenic reactants only and an
    ethylenic reactant which affords a polymeric mixture.  For example,
    lithiation of stryene in the presence of polyethylene to yield solid
    lithium-terminated polystyrene followed by its reaction with butadiene to
    produce block (polybutadiene-polystyrene) in admixture with polyethylene
    would be classified in subclasses 529+.  This subclass, however, does
    include in subclass 525 metalation of polystyrene blended with
    polybutadiene which is subsequently contacted with butadiene.


CLS 524/516
TXT Solid polymer derived from nitrogen heterocycle monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 515 wherein at least one of the ethylenic
    polymers is derived from an ethylenic compound containing a nitrogen
    heterocycle.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "heterocycle".


CLS 524/517
TXT Solid polymer from oxygen heterocycle monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 515 wherein at least one of the ethylenic
    polymers is derived from an ethylenic compound containing an oxygen
    heterocycle.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "heterocycle".


CLS 524/518
TXT Solid polymer derived from fused or bridged ring monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 515 wherein at least one of the ethylenic
    polymers is derived from an ethylenic reactant containing a fused- or
    bridge-ring system.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "fused- or
    bridged-ring system".


CLS 524/519
TXT Solid polymer derived from halogen-containing monomer other than vinyl or
    vinylidene chloride:

    Subject matter under subclass 515 wherein at least one of the ethylenic
    polymers is derived from an ethylenic reactant containing at least one
    halogen atom other than as vinyl chloride or vinylidene chloride.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    527,    for a solid polymer derived from vinyl or vinylidene chloride.


CLS 524/520
TXT Fluorine containing monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 519 wherein at least one of the ethylenic
    reactants contains a fluorine atom.


CLS 524/521
TXT Solid polymer derived from a monomer containing an atom other than C, O, H,
    or chlorine:

    Subject matter under subclass 515 wherein at least one of the ethylenic
    polymers is derived from an ethylenic reactant containing at least one atom
    other than carbon, oxygen, hydrogen, or chlorine.


CLS 524/522
TXT Solid polymer derived from carboxylic acid- containing monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 515 wherein at least one of the ethylenic
    polymers is derived from an ethylenic reactant containing at least one
    carboxylic acid group.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "carboxylic
    acid".


CLS 524/523
TXT Solid polymer derived from carboxylic acid ester monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 515 wherein at least one of the ethylenic
    polymers is derived from an ethylenic reactant which contains a carboxylic
    acid ester group.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "carboxylic
    acid ester".


CLS 524/524
TXT Ester derived from an unsaturated alcohol and a saturated acid, e.g., vinyl
    acetate, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 523 wherein the ester reactant is derived
    from an unsaturated alcohol and a saturated carboxylic acid, e.g., vinyl
    acetate, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    523,    for an acrylic ester as a reactant.


CLS 524/525
TXT Solid polymer derived from monomer containing two or more ethylenic groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 515 wherein at least one of the ethylenic
    polymers is derived from an ethylenic reactant containing two or more
    ethylenic groups.


CLS 524/526
TXT Two or more polymers derived from reactant containing two or more ethylenic
    groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 525 wherein at least two polymers are derived
    from reactants containing two or more ethylenic groups.

    (1)     Note.  The reactant containing two or more ethylenic groups may be
    the same or different.  For instance, a blend of two different
    polybutadiene polymers would be proper herein.


CLS 524/527
TXT Solid polymer derived from chlorine-containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 515 wherein at least one of the ethylenic
    polymers is derived from vinyl chloride or vinylidene chloride.


CLS 524/528
TXT Solid polymer derived from acyclic hydrocarbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 515 wherein at least one of the ethylenic
    polymers is derived from an ethylenic reactant containing only carbon and
    hydrogen atoms and which reactant is devoid of a carbocyclic ring.


CLS 524/529
TXT Solid polymer drived from ethylenic monomers only admixed with ethylenic
    monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 502 which involves the mixing of an NRM and a
    solid polymer, which polymer has been derived from ethylenic monomers only
    and has been further reacted with an ethylenic monomer; or wherein a NRM is
    admixed with a solid polymer derived from ethylenic monomers only and a
    separate ethylenic monomer.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses generally contain subject
    matter relating to graft and block copolymers.

    (2)     Note.  Patents in this area are placed in the first subclass that
    provides for the solid polymer or ethylenic monomer. No distinction has
    been made as to whether the monomer is part of the substrate polymer or the
    superstrate monomer.  No distinction has been made as to amounts of
    materials.

    (3)     Note.  This and indented subclasses also contain those products and
    compositions derived from contacting of solid polymers from ethylenic
    reactants only with ethylenic materials wherein the ethylenic reactant
    interacts with the polymer without undergoing simultaneous or subsequent
    polymerization.


CLS 524/530
TXT Ethylenic monomer contains a nitrogen heterocycle:

    Subject matter under subclass 529 wherein the ethylenic reactant is a
    nitrogen heterocycle.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "heterocycle".


CLS 524/531
TXT Ethylenic monomer contains a chalcogen heterocycle:

    Subject matter under subclass 529 wherein the ethylenic reactant is a
    chalcogen (S, O, Se, Te) containing heterocycle.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "heterocycle".


CLS 524/532
TXT Ethylenic monomer contains a fused or bridged ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 529 wherein the ethylenic reactant contains a
    fused or bridged ring system.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "fused- or
    bridged-ring system".


CLS 524/533
TXT Ethylenic monomer contains at least one carboxylic acid ester group:

    Subject matter under subclass 529 wherein the ethylenic reactant contains a
    carboxylic acid ester group.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "carboxylic
    acid ester".


CLS 524/534
TXT Ethylenic monomer contains at least two ethylenic groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 529 wherein the ethylenic reactant contains
    at least two ethylenic groups.


CLS 524/535
TXT Ethylenic monomer contains at least one atom which is other than C, H, or O:

    Subject matter under subclass 529 wherein the ethylenic reactant contains
    at least one chemical atom which is other than carbon, hydrogen, or oxygen.


CLS 524/536
TXT Ethylenic monomer is an acyclic hydrocarbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 529 wherein the ethylenic reactant is a
    hydrocarbon which is devoid of a ring system.


CLS 524/537
TXT Solid polymer or SICP derived from an
    -O-(C=O)O- or hal-(C=O)-O-containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 which involves the mixing of a NRM
    together with a solid polymer or SICP derived from a -O-(C=O)O- or
    hal-(C=O)-O containing reactant and an additional solid polymer, SICP,
    SPFI, or an ethylenic reactant is present.


CLS 524/538
TXT Solid polymer or SICP derived from at least one nitrogen-containing
    carboxylic acid or derivative reactant or from a carboxylic acid or
    derivative and a polyamine:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 which involves the mixing of a NRM
    together with a solid polymer or SICP derived from a nitrogen-containing
    carboxylic acid or derivative or from a carboxylic acid or derivative and a
    polyamine containing reactant and an additional solid polymer SICP, SPFI,
    or an ethylenic reactant is present.

    (1)     See the Glossary for a definition of the term "carboxylic acid or
    derivative".


CLS 524/539
TXT Solid polymer or SICP derived from at least one carboxylic acid or
    derivative reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 which involves the mixing of a NRM
    together with a solid polymer or SICP derived from a carboxylic or
    derivative reactant and an additional solid polymer SICP, SPFI, or an
    ethylenic reactant is present.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "carboxylic
    acid or derivative".


CLS 524/540
TXT Solid polymer or SICP derived from at least one phenol or inorganic
    phenolate reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 which involves the mixing of a NRM
    together with a solid polymer or SICP derived from a phenol or inorganic
    phenolate containing reactant and an additional solid polymer, SICP, SPFI,
    or an ethylenic reactant is present.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 528, subclass 86, (1) Note, A and C for a
    definition of the term "phenol or inorganic phenolate".


CLS 524/541
TXT Aldehyde or derivative reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 540 wherein the solid polymer or SICP is
    derived from a phenol or inorganic phenolate and an aldehyde or aldehyde
    derivative.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "aldehyde or
    aldehyde derivative".


CLS 524/542
TXT Solid polymer or SICP derived from at least one aldehyde or derivative or
    ketone reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 which involves the mixing of a NRM with a
    solid polymer or SICP derived from an aldehyde or derivative or ketone
    containing reactant, and an additional solid polymer SICP, SPFI, or an
    ethylenic reactant is present.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "aldehyde or
    derivative".


CLS 524/543
TXT Polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 which involves the mixing of a NRM with a
    solid polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only.

    (1)     Note.  In the absence of a subclass specifically reciting chemical
    modified polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only, a modified polymer
    is classified as if it were untreated. For instance, admixing a chlorinated
    polybutadiene with a NRM would be classified in subclass 572 rather than in
    subclass 552.


CLS 524/544
TXT From fluorine-containing monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 543 wherein the solid polymer is derived from
    at least one fluorine-containing ethylenic monomer.


CLS 524/545
TXT Fluorine-containing monomer contains F and C only or only F, C, and H:

    Subject matter under subclass 544 wherein the fluorine monomer contains
    only fluorine and carbon atoms; or only fluorine, carbon, and hydrogen
    atoms.


CLS 524/546
TXT Four or more fluorine atoms:

    Subject matter under subclass 545 wherein the fluorine monomer containing
    only carbon and fluorine atoms, or only carbon, fluorine, and hydrogen
    only, contains at least four fluorine atoms.


CLS 524/547
TXT From reactant-containing atom other than O, N, C, halogen, or hydrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 543 wherein the solid polymer is derived from
    an ethylenic monomer containing an atom other than carbon, hydrogen,
    halogen, nitrogen, or oxygen.


CLS 524/548
TXT From heterocyclic monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 543 wherein the solid polymer is derived from
    an ethylenic monomer containing at least one heterocyclic ring.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition of the term
    "heterocyclic".


CLS 524/549
TXT Five-membered oxygen ring, e.g., coumarone-indene, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 548 wherein the heterocyclic monomer contains
    at least one five-membered heterocyclic ring having at least one oxygen
    atom in the ring.


CLS 524/550
TXT From acetylenic monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 543 wherein the solid polymer is derived from
    a monomer containing a C=C moiety.


CLS 524/551
TXT From halogen-containing monomer containing three or more carbon atoms and
    wherein at least one halogen atom is present in other than salt form:

    Subject matter under subclass 543 wherein the solid polymer is derived from
    an ethylenic monomer containing at least three carbon atoms and at least
    one halogen atom with the proviso that at least one of the halogen atoms
    present is not part of a salt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    567+,   for a solid polymer derived from vinyl or vinylidene halide.


CLS 524/552
TXT Diene:

    Subject matter under subclass 551 wherein the halogen monomer contains at
    least two ethylenic groups.


CLS 524/553
TXT From cycloaliphatic or fused or bridged ring monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 543 wherein the solid polymer is derived from
    an ethylenic monomer which contains a carbocyclic ring which is other than
    as an aryl ring, or is derived from a fused- or bridged-ring containing
    monomer.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "fused- or
    bridged-ring system".


CLS 524/554
TXT Cycloaliphatic, fused, or bridged monomer contains at least two unsaturated
    groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 553 wherein the cycloaliphatic, fused, or
    bridged monomer contains at least two ethylenic groups.


CLS 524/555
TXT From nitrogen-containing monomer other than acrylonitrile or
    methacrylonitrile:

    Subject matter under subclass 543 wherein the solid polymer is derived from
    an ethylenic monomer containing at least one nitrogen atom and which is
    other than acrylonitrile or methacrylonitrile.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    565+,   for a solid polymer derived from acrylonitrile or methacrylonitrile
    monomer.


CLS 524/556
TXT From carboxylic acid or ester thereof monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 543 wherein the solid polymer is derived from
    an ethylenic monomer which is a carboxylic acid or carboxylic acid ester.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the terms "carboxylic
    acid or ester".


CLS 524/557
TXT Polyvinyl alcohol or modified forms thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 556 wherein the solid polymer derived from a
    carboxylic or derivative is modified so as to produce polyvinyl alcohol.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 525, subclass 56 for a definition of the term
    "polyvinyl alcohol".

    (2)     Note.  The polyvinyl alcohol may be added to the NRM or may be
    produced subsequently to the addition of the NRM to the solid polymer.


CLS 524/558
TXT Acid or ester contains an oxygen atom which is other than part of a free
    carboxyl group or carboxylic acid ester group:

    Subject matter under subclass 556 wherein the carboxylic acid or ester
    monomer contains at least one oxygen atom which is not part of  a

    --OH or -O-R group.


CLS 524/559
TXT Ester contains two or more ester groups or at least one carboxylic ester
    group and at least one free acid group; or carboxylic acid contains two or
    more free carboxyl groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 556 wherein the monomer contains at least two
    carboxylic acid ester groups, two or more carboxylic acid groups, or at
    least one carboxylic acid group and at least one carboxylic acid ester
    group.


CLS 524/560
TXT From ester derived from at least one unsaturated carboxylic acid and a
    saturated alcohol, e.g., methyl methacrylate, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 556 wherein the monomer is a carboxylic acid
    ester derived from an unsaturated monocarboxylic acid and a saturated
    alcohol.


CLS 524/561
TXT Interpolymerized with diverse carboxylic acid ester:

    Subject matter under subclass 560 wherein an ester derived from an
    unsaturated monocarboxylic acid and a saturated alcohol is interpolymerized
    with a diverse carboxylic acid ester.

    (1)     Note.  The diverse ester may be derived from an unsaturated acid
    and a saturated alcohol, or may be derived form a saturated carboxylic acid
    and an unsaturated alcohol, or the acid and alcohol may both be unsaturated.


CLS 524/562
TXT Interpolymerized with hydrocarbon containing a single ethylenic group:

    Subject matter under subclass 560 wherein an ester derived from an
    unsaturated monocarboxylic acid and a saturated alcohol is interpolymerized
    with a hydrocarbon monomer containing only one ethylenic group.


CLS 524/563
TXT From ester derived from ethylenically unsaturated alcohol and saturated
    carboxylic acid, e.g., vinyl acetate, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 556 wherein the monomer is a carboxylic acid
    ester derived from a saturated monocarboxylic acid and an unsaturated
    alcohol.


CLS 524/564
TXT Interpolymerized with diverse carboxylic acid ester or with carboxylic acid
    reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 563 wherein an ester derived form a saturated
    carboxylic acid and an unsaturated alcohol is interpolymerized with a
    monocarboxylic acid ester or with a carboxylic acid containing monomer.

    (1)     Note.  The diverse ester may be derived from a saturated
    monocarboxylic acid and an unsaturated alcohol, or may be derived from an
    unsaturated acid and an unsaturated alcohol.


CLS 524/565
TXT From acrylonitrile or methacrylonitrile monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 543 wherein the solid polymer is derived from
    acrylonitrile or methacrylonitrile monomer.


CLS 524/566
TXT Inorganic nonreactive material:

    Subject matter under subclass 565 wherein an inorganic NRM is admixed with
    the solid polymer.


CLS 524/567
TXT From halogen-containing monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 543 wherein the solid polymer is derived from
    a halogen monomer containing two carbon atoms.


CLS 524/568
TXT Vinylidene chloride:

    Subject matter under subclass 567 wherein the halogen monomer is vinylidene
    chloride.


CLS 524/569
TXT Plasticizer additive:

    Subject matter under subclass 567 wherein the composition contains a
    plasticizer.

    (1)     Note.  A plasticizer is any chemical agent which is added to a
    synthetic resin in order to impart flexibility, workability, stretchability
    or a related property to the synthetic resin.

    (2)     Note.  The mere use the term "plasticizer" in the absence of
    information to the contrary is presumed to lie within the definition of
    this subclass.


CLS 524/570
TXT From hydrocarbon monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 543 wherein the solid polymer is derived from
    at least one hydrocarbon monomer.


CLS 524/571
TXT Conjugated diene hydrocarbon monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 570 wherein the hydrocarbon monomer contains
    at least two ethylenic groups and at least two of the ethylenic groups
    exist as -C=C-C=C- in the compound.


CLS 524/572
TXT Adding nonreactive material to chemically modified solid polymer:

    Subject matter under subclass 571 wherein a solid polymer derived from a
    -C=C-C=C- hydrocarbon containing monomer is chemically modified prior to
    admixing with the NRM.


CLS 524/573
TXT Interpolymer of two or more diene monomers:

    Subject matter under subclass 571 wherein a -C=C-C=C-hydrocarbon monomer
    has been interpolymerized with at least one hydrocarbon containing at least
    two ethylenic groups.

    (1)     Note.  The hydrocarbon containing at least two ethylenic groups may
    be a conjugated or nonconjugated diene.


CLS 524/574
TXT Interpolymer with at least one aliphatic hydrocarbon monomer, e.g., butyl
    rubber, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 571 wherein a -C=C-C=C- hydrocarbon monomer
    has been interpolymerized with at least a hydrocarbon monomer which is
    devoid of a carbocyclic ring, e.g., butyl rubber, etc.


CLS 524/575
TXT Interpolymer with at least one aromatic hydrocarbon monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 571 wherein a -C=C-C=C- hydrocarbon monomer
    has been interpolymerized with at least one hydrocarbon monomer which
    contains an aryl ring.


CLS 524/575.5
TXT Natural rubber:

    Subject matter under subclass 571 wherein the polymer derived from a
    conjugated diene hydrocarbon monomer is natural rubber.


CLS 524/576
TXT Adding nonreactive material to chemically modified solid polymer:

    Subject matter under subclass 570 wherein the solid polymer derived from at
    least one hydrocarbon monomer is chemically modified prior to admixing of
    the nonreactant material therewith.

    (1)     Note.  It is not necessary for this subclass that a positive
    process step of chemically modifying the polymer be claimed.  It is
    sufficient if the polymer has been chemically reacted (e.g., halogenated
    polymer, sulfonated polymer, etc.) prior to the admixing step.


CLS 524/577
TXT From aromatic hydrocarbon monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 570 wherein the solid polymer is derived from
    an aryl containing hydrocarbon monomer.


CLS 524/578
TXT Interpolymer with at least one aliphatic hydrocarbon monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 577 wherein an aryl containing hydrocarbon
    monomer has been interpolymerized with a hydrocarbon monomer which is
    devoid of a carbocyclic ring.


CLS 524/579
TXT From hydrocarbon containing four or more carbon atoms:

    Subject matter under subclass 570 wherein the solid polymer is derived from
    a hydrocarbon monomer containing at least four carbon atoms.


CLS 524/580
TXT Adding nonreactive material to solid polymer and subsequently chemically
    modifying the polymer or product:

    Subject matter under subclass 570 wherein the solid polymer derived from at
    least one hydrocarbon monomer is admixed with a nonreactant material prior
    to a chemical modification of the solid polymer, e.g., curing, vulcanizing,
    etc.


CLS 524/581
TXT Solid polymer derived from ethylene:

    Subject matter under subclass 580 wherein the solid polymer is derived from
    ethylene.


CLS 524/582
TXT From propylene as sole reactant monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 570 wherein the solid polymer is solely
    derived from propylene.


CLS 524/583
TXT Organic NRM additive:

    Subject matter under subclass 582 wherein an organic nonreactant material
    is admixed with the solid polypropylene.


CLS 524/584
TXT Inorganic additive other than water or NRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 582 wherein an inorganic nonreactant material
    which is other than water is admixed with the solid polypropylene.


CLS 524/585
TXT From ethylene as sole reactant monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 570 wherein the solid polymer is solely
    derived from ethylene.


CLS 524/586
TXT Inorganic NRM additive:

    Subject matter under subclass 585 wherein an inorganic nonreactant material
    is admixed with the solid polyethylene.


CLS 524/587
TXT High density polymer:

    Subject matter under sublcass 585 wherein the density of the formed
    polyethylene polymer is more than 0.935.

    (1)     Note.  The term density refers to density as measured by ASTMD 1505
    or specific gravity and is not to be confused with terms such as "apparent
    density" or "bulk density".

    (2)     Note.  In the absence of a specific disclosure of density, all
    polymers produced by a free radical-yielding catalyst, e.g., peroxy, azo,
    or redox, etc., are presumed to be low density and are excluded herefrom.


CLS 524/588
TXT From silicon-containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 which involves the mixing of a nonreactant
    material with a solid polymer or SICP derived from at least one silicon
    containing reactant.


CLS 524/589
TXT From -N=C=X reactant or blocked N=C=X reactant (X is chalcogen):

    Subject matter under subclass 1 which involves the mixing of a nonreactant
    material with a solid polymer or SICP derived from at least one reactant
    containing a -N=C=X group wherein X is a chalcogen atom.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also provides for those functional derivatives
    of isocyanates which are generally known as blocked, masked, or hidden
    isocyanates.  These materials are those which revert on heating to the
    -N=C=X group (e.g., urethanes or ureides of phenols, alkanols, etc.).


CLS 524/590
TXT With reactant containing at least one C-OH, (C=O)-OH or -C-O-C- Group:

    Subject matter under subclass 589 wherein the solid polymer or SICP is
    derived from the -N=C=X reactant and a reactant containing


    at least one C-OH, -OH, or -C-O-C- group.


CLS 524/591
TXT Water DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 590 wherein water as a DNRM is admixed with
    the solid polymer or SICP.


CLS 524/592
TXT From ketone or ketene reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 which involves the mixing of a nonreactant
    material with a solid polymer or SICP derived form at least one ketone
    reactant.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "ketone".

    (2)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass, a reactant having a ketene
    (C=C=O) group is considered as being a ketone.


CLS 524/593
TXT From aldehyde or derivative reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 which involves the mixing of a nonreactant
    material with a solid polymer or SICP derived from at least one aldehyde or
    aldehyde derivative reactant.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "aldehyde or
    derivative".


CLS 524/594
TXT With phenol or inorganic phenolate:

    Subject matter under subclass 593 wherein the solid polymer or SICP is
    derived from the aldehyde or aldehyde derivative reactant and at least one
    phenol or inorganic phenolate reactant.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 528, subclass 86, (1) Note, A and C for a
    definition of the terms phenol or inorganic phenolate.


CLS 524/595
TXT Containing reactant having atom other than C, H, or O:

    Subject matter under subclass 594 wherein the solid polymer or SICP is
    derived from at least one reactant containing an atom other than carbon,
    hydrogen, or oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  The reactant containing the atom which is other than carbon,
    hydrogen, or oxygen can be the phenol or the aldehyde or another reactant.


CLS 524/596
TXT Water DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 594 wherein water as a DNRM is admixed with
    the solid polymer or SICP.


CLS 524/597
TXT Nitrogen-containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 593 wherein the solid polymer or SICP is
    derived form the aldehyde or aldehyde derivative reactant and at least one
    nitrogen-containing reactant.


CLS 524/598
TXT Water DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 597 wherein water as a DNRM is admixed with
    the solid polymer or SICP.


CLS 524/599
TXT From carboxylic acid or derivative reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 which involves the mixing of a nonreactant
    material with a solid polymer derived from at least one carboxylic acid or
    derivative.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition of the term "carboxylic
    acid or derivative".


CLS 524/600
TXT Carboxylic acid contains three or more acid groups or derivative thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 599 wherein the solid polymer is derived from
    a carboxylic acid containing three or more

    --OH groups or three or more derivative

    groups, or a combination of -OH and derivative groups which is three or
    more.


CLS 524/601
TXT From dicarboxylic acid or derivative and at least one polyol; or from a
    diester of a polycarboxylic acid as sole reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 599 wherein the solid polymer is derived from
    a polyol and from a carboxylic acid containing two carboxylic acid groups,
    or from a derivative containing two carboxylic acid derivative groups, or
    from a reactant containing a carboxylic acid group and a derivative group;
    or wherein the solid polymer is derived from a dicarboxylic acid diester as
    the sole solid polymer-forming reactant.


CLS 524/602
TXT Nitrogen-containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 601 wherein at least one of the reactant
    forming the solid polymer contains a nitrogen atom.

    (1)     Note.  The nitrogen reactant may be a third reactant which is not a
    carboxylic acid or derivative group reactant or the polyol containing
    reactant.


CLS 524/603
TXT Reactant contains atom other than C, H, or O:

    Subject matter under subclass 601 wherein at least one of the reactants
    forming the solid polymer contains an atom other than carbon, hydrogen, or
    oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  The reactant containing an atom other than carbon, hydrogen,
    or oxygen may be a third reactant which is not a carboxylic acid or
    derivative reactant or the polyol containing reactant.


CLS 524/604
TXT At least one polyol containing only two -C-OH groups reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 601 wherein the polyol reactant contains only
    two C-OH groups.


CLS 524/605
TXT Derived from terephthalic acid or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 604 wherein the carboxylic acid or derivative
    contains two carboxylic acid or derivative groups in para-position to each
    other and which carboxylic acid or derivative groups are directly bonded to
    nuclear carbon atoms of the same aryl ring.


CLS 524/606
TXT Nitrogen-containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 599 wherein the solid polymer is derived form
    at least one nitrogen-containing reactant, e.g., nylon, etc.

    (1)     Note.  The carboxylic acid or derivative need not be the
    nitrogen-containing reactant.


CLS 524/607
TXT Two or more carboxylic acids or derivatives, or two or more
    nitrogen-containing compounds:

    Subject matter under subclass 605 wherein the solid polymer is derived from
    at least two carboxylic acids, two carboxylic acid derivatives, or at least
    one carboxylic acid and at least one carboxylic acid derivative; or wherein
    the solid polymer is derived from at least two nitrogen-containing
    reactants.


CLS 524/608
TXT Water DNRM containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 606 wherein water as a DNRM is admixed with
    the solid polymer.


CLS 524/609
TXT From sulfur-containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 which involves the mixing of a nonreactant
    material with a solid polymer derived from at least one sulfur-containing
    reactant.


CLS 524/610
TXT From reactant-containing atom other than N, C, H, O, or halogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 which involves the mixing of a nonreactant
    material with a solid polymer derived from at least one reactant containing
    an atom other than nitrogen, carbon, hydrogen, oxygen, or a halogen.


CLS 524/611
TXT From phenol reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 which involves the mixing of a nonreactant
    material with a solid polymer derived from at least one phenol reactant.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 528, subclass 86, (1) Note, A, for a definition of
    the term "phenol".


CLS 524/612
TXT From at least one oxygen or nitrogen-containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 which involves the mixing of a nonreactant
    material with a solid polymer derived from at least one oxygen or
    nitrogen-containing reactant.


CLS 524/650
TXT Inorganic water settable material containing:

    Subject matter under Class 523, subclass 1 wherein an inorganic water
    settable ingredient hardenable by hydration to produce a solid mass is
    present during formation of at least one solid polymer or SICP, e.g.,
    Portland cement, gypsum cement, etc.

    (1)     Note.  In the instant subclass the inorganic water settable
    ingredient can be a reactant with the solid polymer or SICP forming system
    so long as there is present at least one material which is nonreactive
    (NRM).


CLS 524/700
TXT Preparation of intentional or desired composition by formation of a solid
    polymer (SP) or SICP in presence of a designated nonreactant material
    (DNRM) other than solely water, hydrocarbon, silicate dioxide, glass,
    titanium dioxide, or elemental carbon, composition thereof; or process of
    treating or composition thereof:

    Subject matter under Class 523, subclass 1 wherein the desired or
    intentional composition has been produced by formation of at least one
    solid polymer or SICP in the presence of a designated nonreactant material
    other than solely H2O, hydrocarbon, SiO2, glass, TiO2, or element carbon.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 523, subclass 1 for a definition of DNRM.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein are processes of preparing the composition,
    the composition itself, as well as processes of chemically reacting or
    purifying a composition, and the product of such a process when a
    composition is the result.

    (3)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of  "glass".

    (4)     Note.  Mixtures of the excluded DNRM materials are also excluded
    herefrom and are to be found below in subclasses 797-881.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclass 255
    for polymer or resin containing compositions which contain hazardous or
    toxic waste to prevent its release into the environment.


CLS 524/701
TXT Boron-containing DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein elemental boron or at least one
    boron compound is present as a designated nonreactant material during
    formation of the solid polymer or SICP.


CLS 524/702
TXT Cellular material derived from biological source as DNRM other than
    farinaceous flour or cotton or diatomaceous earth:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein there is present, during
    formation of a solid polymer or SICP, at least one designated nonreactant
    material which is derived from a biological source and which retains at
    least some cell structure, and excluding farinaceous flour, cotton, or
    diatomaceous earth.

    (1)     Note.  For a complete definition of this material, including all
    the excluded cellular substances, see subclass 9.


CLS 524/703
TXT Corncob, bark, or cork:

    Subject matter under subclass 702 wherein the biological material which
    retains cell structure is corncob, bark, or cork.

    (1)     Note.  See subclasses 15 and 16 for the definition of "corncob,
    bark, and cork".


CLS 524/704
TXT Protein or biologically active polypeptide as DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein a protein or a biologically
    active polypeptide is present as a designated nonreactant material during
    formation fo a solid polymer or SICP.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the terms "protein" and
    "biologically active polypeptide".


CLS 524/705
TXT Coal or bituminous material, extract or derivative thereof, oil shale, or
    fatty still residue thereof, as DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein coal, bituminous material,
    extract or derivative thereof, oil shale, or fatty still residue is present
    as a designated nonreactant material during formation of a solid polymer or
    SICP.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 59 for the definition of these DNRM materials.


CLS 524/706
TXT P-containing DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein elemental phosphorus or a
    phosphorus containing compound is present as a designated nonreactant
    during formation of a solid polymer or SICP.


CLS 524/707
TXT Nitrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 706 wherein the phosphorus compound also
    contains at least one nitrogen atom.


CLS 524/708
TXT Phosphorus bonded directly to nitrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 707 wherein there is at least one phosphorus
    atom bonded directly to nitrogen in the DNRM compound.


CLS 524/709
TXT Tri organo phosphine or phosphonium compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 706 wherein the phosphorus compound is R--R
    where each

    R is an organic group bound to P through a carbon linkage, e.g., P(CH3)3,
    etc., or (PR'4)X where X is any anion and R' is H or an organic group bound
    to P through a +  - carbon linkage, e.g., P(CH3)4 Cl, etc.


CLS 524/710
TXT Organic compound having phosphorus bonded directly to oxygen or sulfur:

    Subject matter under subclass 706 wherein there is at least one designated
    nonreactive organic compound which contains at least one phosphorus atom
    bonded directly to oxygen or sulfur, i.e., P-(O) or P-(S).


CLS 524/711
TXT Containing a metal atom DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 710 wherein the designated nonreactant P-(O)
    or P-(S) containing organic compound has at least on metal atom bonded
    thereto, or where there is present an additional metal atom containing DNRM.


CLS 524/712
TXT Containing halogen DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 710 wherein the nonreactive organic P-(O) or
    P-(S) compound has at least one halogen atom bonded thereto; or where there
    is present an additional halogen containing DNRM.


CLS 524/713
TXT Containing phenol or carboxylic acid or derivative DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 706 wherein the phosphorus compound contains
    an aryl-OH

    or salt thereof, or -OH group or derivatives; or where there is present an
    additional DNRM which is an aryl-OH or salt or carboxylic acid or
    derivative.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definiiton of the term "carboxylic
    acid or derivative".


CLS 524/714
TXT N-containing organic compound excluding unsubstituted ammonium as sole
    nitrogen in DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein a nitrogen containing organic
    compound having N other than NH4+ as the sole nitrogen is present as a
    designated nonreactive material during formation of a solid polymer or SICP.


CLS 524/715
TXT N=N linkage, e.g., azo dyes, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 714 wherein the organic compound containing
    nitrogen has at least one N=N linkage.


CLS 524/716
TXT Carbohydrate or derivative. e.g., nitrocellulose, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 714 wherein the nitrogen-containing organic
    compound is a nitrogen-containing carbohydrate or derivative, e.g.,
    nitrocellulose, chitin, etc.


CLS 524/717
TXT Heterocyclic structure other than per se N-alkyl pyrrolidone:

    Subject matter under subclass 714 wherein the organic compound containing
    nitrogen has at least one heterocyclic structure other than N-alkyl
    pyrrolidone.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition of "heterocyclic".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    726,    for N-alkyl pyrrolidone, per se, as DNRM.


CLS 524/718
TXT Hetero nitrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 717 wherein the heterocyclic compound
    containing nitrogen has at least one heterocylic ring having at least one
    nitrogen as a heteroatom.


CLS 524/719
TXT Containing hetero chalcogen DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 718 wherein the compound containing nitrogen
    in a heterocyclic ring further contains at least one chalcogen atom in a
    hetero ring, or wherein there is an additional heterocyclic chalcogen
    compound as a DNRM.

    (1)     Note.  Chalcogen is limited to oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium.


CLS 524/720
TXT Plural hetero N, i.e., same or different ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 718 wherein the compound containing nitrogen
    in a heterocyclic ring contains more than one heterocyclic nitrogen atom as
    either members of one ring or in two or more rings.


CLS 524/721
TXT Containing aryl-OH or salt thereof DNRM: Subject matter under subclass 714
    wherein the organic compound containing nitrogen has an aryl-OH or salt
    thereof attached thereto, or where there is present an additional DNRM
    which is a compound having aryl-OH or salt thereof.

    (1)     Note.  "Aryl" denotes a monovalent aromatic hydrocarbon radical,
    e.g.,





            , etc.
    Included herein are phenyl, naphthyl, tolyl, etc.

    (2)     Note.  The OH or salt group is directly attached to the aromatic
    ring, e.g., or etc.


CLS 524/722
TXT Amine nitrogen directly bonded to aromatic ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 714 wherein the nitrogen containing organic
    compound has an amine nitrogen directly bonded to an aromatic ring, e.g.,




    (1)     Note.  Amine is defined in the Glossary.


CLS 524/723
TXT Sulfur e.g., sulfonamides, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 714 wherein the nitrogen containing organic
    compound has at least one sulfur atom, e.g., R-SO2-N, etc.


CLS 524/724
TXT ROH or COOH or salt thereof, e.g., alkanol amine or amino acid, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 714 wherein the N-containing organic compound
    has at least one

    -OH, C-OH, or salt (e.g., alkoxide or carboxylate) attached thereto.

    (1)     Note.  The R group in the R-OH refers to the nitrogen containing
    residue. Similarly, the COOH group is attached to a nitrogen containing
    residue.


CLS 524/725
TXT Nitrile:

    Subject matter under subclass 714 wherein the nitrogen containing organic
    compound has at least one -C N group.


CLS 524/726
TXT Formamide or N, N-dialkyl amide or N-alkyl pyrrolidone:

    Subject matter under subclass 714 wherein the nitrogen containing organic
    compound is

    where alkyl is an aliphatic hydrocarbon moiety.


CLS 524/727
TXT With metal-containing material DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 726 wherein there is additionally present a
    metal containing material as a DNRM.


CLS 524/728
TXT (C=O)N:

    Subject matter under subclass 714 wherein the nitrogen containing organic
    compound has at

    least one -N group.


CLS 524/729
TXT X(C=X)X wherein X is chalcogen DNRM, e.g., carbonate, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein an organic compound having at
    least one

    X--X group where X is chalcogen, e.g., organic carbonates, etc., is present
    as a DNRM during formation of a solid polymer or SICP.

    (1)     Note. Chalcogen is limited to oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium.


CLS 524/730
TXT DNRM contains Si-C, Si-H, contains DNRM metal-C or metal-H bond or organic
    compound containing Si:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein a compound having at least one
    Si-C, Si-H, metal-C or metal-H bond or an organic compound containing Si is
    present as DNRM during formation of a solid polymer or SICP.


CLS 524/731
TXT Diorgano siloxane contains units of -[(R)Si(R)-O-] * where * is subscript
    two or more:

    Subject matter under subclass 730 wherein the organic silicon compound
    contains two

    siloxane oil, etc.

    (1)     Note.  R is preponderately a hydrocarbon radical.


CLS 524/732
TXT Carbohydrate or derivative as DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein a carbohydrate or derivative is
    present as DNRM during formation of a solid polymer or SICP.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition of "carbohydrate or
    derivative".


CLS 524/733
TXT Cellulose or derivative, e.g., cotton, paper pulp, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 732 wherein the carbohydrate is cellulose or
    a derivative.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 35 for the definition of "cellulose".


CLS 524/734
TXT Starch or derivative, farinaceous flour or meal:

    Subject matter under subclass 732 wherein the carbohydrate is a starch or a
    derivative, or farinaceous flour or meal.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 9 for the definition of "farinaceous flour or
    meal".

    (2)     Note.  See subclass 47 for the definition of "starch".


CLS 524/735
TXT Lignin, tannin, or derivative as DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein lignin, tannin, or a derivative
    of these is present as DNRM during formation of a solid polymer or SICP.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "lignin or
    derivative", and see Class 560, subclass 68 for a definition of "tannin or
    derivative".


CLS 524/736
TXT Aryl-OH or salt thereof as DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein a compound having at least one
    -OH group or salt thereof directly bonded to an aromatic carbocyclic
    nucleus, i.e., phenol compound, is present as DNRM during formation of a
    solid polymer or SICP,  e.g.,




    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    755,    for DNRM having aryl ether linkages.


CLS 524/738
TXT Plural separate aryl-OH groups or polyhydric aryl-OH, or salts thereof,
    e.g., resorcinol, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 736 wherein the phenol compound or salt
    thereof contains two or more -OH groups or salts directly bonded to the
    same of separate aromatic carbocyclic nucleus.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are, e.g., resorcinol, bisphenol A, etc.


CLS 524/739
TXT Plural separate aryl-OH or salt groups bonded through carbon or a
    chalcogen-containing radical, e.g., bisphenol A, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 738 wherein the phenol compound or salt
    thereof has plural separate aryl-OH groups or salts thereof bonded together
    through carbon or a chalcogen containing radical.


CLS 524/740
TXT Aryl-OH or salt compound having at least one chalcogen containing
    substituent, e.g., hydroxy anisole, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 736 wherein the phenol compound or salt
    thereof has at least one chalcogen containing substituent, e.g.,


CLS 524/741
TXT Aryl-OH or salt compound having two or more substituents:

    Subject matter under subclass 736 wherein the phenol compound or salt has
    two or more substituents bonded to the aromatic carbocyclic nucleus, e.g.,



CLS 524/742
TXT Elemental or organic sulfur compound as DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein elemental sulfur or an organic
    compound containing at least one sulfur atom is present as DNRM during
    formation of a solid polymer or SICP.


CLS 524/743
TXT Sulfone, e.g., sulfolane, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 742 wherein the sulfur containing organic
    compound is a sulfone, e.g.,


CLS 524/744
TXT DMSO with additional oxygen or halogen compound DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 742 wherein dimethyl sulfoxide is mixed with
    an additional oxygen or halogen containing DNRM.


CLS 524/745
TXT Sulfate, sulfonate ester, sulfonic acid, or salt thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 742 wherein the sulfur containing organic
    compound is a sulfate

    ester, e.g., ROOR or ROH, etc.

    sulfonic acid or ester, e.g. R-OH, etc.

    or a salt of these materials.


CLS 524/746
TXT Halogenated:

    Subject matter under subclass 745 wherein the organic sulfate, sulfonic,
    sulfonate, or salt has at least one halogen atom.


CLS 524/747
TXT Containing ether or hydroxyl group DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 745 wherein the organic sulfate, sulfonic
    acid, sulfonate, or salt thereof has an ether or OH group bonded thereto;
    or wherein there is present an additional DNRM which has an ether group or
    hydroxyl group.

    (1)     Note.  Hydroxyl group is C-OH wherein the carbon is not doubly
    bonded to a chalcogen.


CLS 524/748
TXT Containing COOH or salt thereof or ester thereof DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 745 wherein the sulfur   containing   organic
      compound   has  a

    -OH, -O-+salt or -OR group where R is an alcohol residue bonded thereto, or
    wherein there is present as an additional DNRM at least one carboxylic
    acid, salt, or ester.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition to the terms "carboxylic
    acid, salt, or ester".


CLS 524/750
TXT Mercaptan, mercaptide or thioether, e.g., aryl-SH, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 742 wherein the sulfur containing organic
    compound is R-SH, R-SX or R-S-R wherein X is a cation, e.g., metal or NH+,
    etc., and R is the carbon of an organic radical.


CLS 524/751
TXT Heterocyclic chalcogen compound as DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein a heterocyclic chalcogen ring
    containing material is present as DNRM during formation of a solid polymer
    or SICP.

    (1)     Note.  By schedule exclusion, the remaining chalcogen atoms proper
    for this subclass are oxygen, selenium, or tellurium.

    (2)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "heterocyclic".


CLS 524/752
TXT With organic chalcogen compound, hydrocarbon, or halogenated hydrocarbon
    DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 751 wherein there is present as an additional
    DNRM an organic chalcogen compound, hydrocarbon, or halogenated hydrocarbon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    753,    for the TWEEN R and SPAN R materials which are mixtures of
    heterocyclic chalcogen compounds.


CLS 524/753
TXT Carboxylic acid ester linkage, e.g., oxyalkylated sorbitan ester, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 751 wherein said heterocyclic chalcogen
    compound has at least one carboxylic acid ester linkage.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are SPAN R which is a mixture of esters of
    fatty acids with various hexitol anhydrides (e.g., sorbitan, etc.) derived
    from sorbitol:



            TWEEN R is oxyalkylated SPAN R


CLS 524/754
TXT Plural hetero oxygen:

    Subject matter under subclass 751 wherein the heterocyclic chalcogen
    compound contains two or more oxygen atoms in the same heterocyclic ring or
    two or more oxygen containing heterocyclic rings.


CLS 524/755
TXT Ether compound DNRM, e.g., aryl ether, dimethylether, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein a compound having at least one
    C-O-C linkage where neither carbon is doubly bonded to chalcogen, e.g.,





    or CH3-O-CH3, etc., is present as DNRM during formation of a solid polymer
    or SICP.


CLS 524/757
TXT Mixture of ether compounds; or only two ether oxygens bonded to a carbon
    atom, e.g., formal acetal, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 755 wherein there are at least two ether
    compounds as DNRM; or wherein the ether compound has at least one carbon
    atom which has only two ether linkages attached to the carbon,

    e.g., -C-O--O-C-, etc.


CLS 524/758
TXT Halogenated:

    Subject matter under subclass 755 wherein the ether compound has at least
    one halogen atom attached thereto.


CLS 524/759
TXT Containing carboxylic acid or derivative DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 755 wherein the ether compound has at least
    one carboxylic acid or derivative group attached thereto, or wherein there
    is present an additional DNRM which is a carboxylic acid or derivative:

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "carboxylic
    acid or derivative:.


CLS 524/760
TXT Carboxylic acid or derivative has two or more ether linkages:

    Subject matter under subclass 759 wherein the carboxylic acid or derivative
    has at least two ether linkages attached thereto.


CLS 524/761
TXT Containing hydroxyl group DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 755 wherein the ether compound has at least
    one hydroxyl group attached thereto, or wherein there is present as an
    additional DNRM a hydroxyl bearing compound other than water.


CLS 524/762
TXT Two or more ether linkages in the hydroxyl group bearing molecule:

    Subject matter under subclass 761 wherein the hydroxyl group bearing
    molecule has two or more ether linkages, e.g., hydroxyl terminated
    polyether, etc.


CLS 524/763
TXT Oxygen containing wax as DNRM, e.g., carnauba, montan, ceresin, bees wax,
    oxidized petroleum wax, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein an oxygen containing wax is
    present as DNRM during formation of a solid polymer or SICP.

    (1)     Note.  To be classified herein, a material must be disclosed or
    claimed as being a wax.


CLS 524/764
TXT Natural resin or derivative as DNRM, e.g., rosin, shellac, etc., excluding
    tall oil per se:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein a natural resin or derivative
    including rosin and derivatives is present as DNRM during formation of a
    solid polymer or SICP.

    (1)     Note.  Natural resin or derivative is defined as in subclass 77
    except that rosin or its derivatives is included herein.


CLS 524/765
TXT Alcohol compound as DNRM, i.e., R-OH:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein an alcohol compound is present as
    DNRM during formation of a solid polymer or SICP.

    (1)     Note.  Alcohol is R-OH where R is-- not having chalcogen double
    bonded directly thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    736,    for phenol compounds.

    779,    for metal alkoxides.


CLS 524/766
TXT Two or more alcohols:

    Subject matter under subclass 765 wherein there are at least two alcohols
    as DNRM's.


CLS 524/767
TXT With water NRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 765 wherein water is present as an additional
    NRM.


CLS 524/768
TXT With hydrocarbon or halogenated hydrocarbon NRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 765 wherein there is additionally present a
    hydrocarbon or halogenated hydrocarbon as a NRM.


CLS 524/769
TXT Chalcogen other than as R-OH:

    Subject matter under subclass 765 wherein the alcohol compound has a
    chalcogen atom in addition to the oxygen in the hydroxy group.


CLS 524/770
TXT Ketone or aldehyde as DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein a ketone or aldehyde is present
    as DNRM during formation of a solid polymer or SICP.

    (1)     Note.  "Aldehyde and ketone" are defined in the Glossary.


CLS 524/771
TXT With hydrocarbon or halogenated hydrocarbon NRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 770 wherein there is additionally present a
    hydrocarbon or halogenated hydrocarbon NRM.


CLS 524/772
TXT Carboxylic acid or derivative, e.g., acetoacetic acid or ester or salt
    thereof, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 770 wherein the ketone or aldehyde has
    attached thereto a carboxylic acid group or derivative.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "carboxylic
    acid or derivative".


CLS 524/773
TXT Carboxylic acid or derivative not containing a heavy metal atom as DNRM,
    e.g., anhydride, acyl halide, ester or salt, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein a carboxylic acid or derivative
    not having a heavy metal atom attached thereto is present as DNRM during
    formation of a solid polymer or SICP.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition for the term "carboxylic
    acid or derivative".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    780+,   for heavy metal compounds having therein carboxylic acid or
    derivative groups.


CLS 524/774
TXT Cycloaliphatic group, e.g., dimer acids containing thirty six carbon atoms,
    tall oil, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 773 wherein the carboxylic acid or derivative
    has attached thereto a cycloaliphatic group.

    (1)     Note.  The C36 dimer acids are typically derived by polymerization
    of C18 fatty acids.


CLS 524/775
TXT Aryl group:

    Subject matter under subclass 773 wherein the carboxylic acid or derivative
    has attached thereto an aryl group.


CLS 524/776
TXT Solid polymer derived from ethylenic monomers only:

    Subject matter under subclass 775 wherein the solid polymer produced is
    from ethylenically unsaturated monomers only.


CLS 524/777
TXT Group IA, unsubstituted ammonium, or Group IIA  salt:

    Subject matter under subclass 773 wherein the carboxylic derivative is a
    Group IA, NH4+ or Group IIA salt.

    (1)     Note.  The IA and IIA metals proper herein are Li, Na, K, Rb, Be,
    Ca, Sr, and Ba.


CLS 524/778
TXT Solid polymer or SICP derived from at least one nonethylenic monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 777 wherein the solid polymer or SICP which
    is produced is derived from at least one monomer which is not ethylenically
    unsaturated.


CLS 524/779
TXT Elemental metal or metal compound not containing silicon DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein an elemental metal or metal
    compound which does not contain a silicon atom is present as DNRM during
    formation of a solid polymer or SICP.

    (1)     Note.  The term "elemental metal" includes alloys, e.g., steel, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    789+,   for silicon containing inorganic metal compounds as DNRM.


CLS 524/780
TXT Heavy metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 779 wherein the metal or metal compound is or
    contains a metal atom having a specific gravity greater than four.


CLS 524/781
TXT Copper:

    Subject matter under subclass 780 wherein the metal atom is copper in
    elemental or compound form.


CLS 524/783
TXT Group IV or Group IIB, i.e., Ge, Sn, Pb, Zr, Ti, Hf, Zn, Cd, Hg:

    Subject matter under subclass 780 wherein the metal atom is Ge, Sn, Pb, Ti,
    Zr, Hf, Zn, Cd, or Hg, in elemental or compound form.


CLS 524/784
TXT Tin:

    Subject matter under subclass 783 wherein the metal atom is tin in
    elemental or compound form.


CLS 524/785
TXT Group VIII, i.e., Fe, Ru, Os, Co, Rh, Ir, Ni, Pd, Pt:

    Subject matter under subclass 780 wherein the metal atom is Fe, Co, Ni, Ru,
    Rh, Pd, Os, Ir, or Pt in elemental or compound form, i.e., Group VIII.


CLS 524/786
TXT Al:

    Subject matter under subclass 779 wherein the metal atom is aluminum in
    elemental or compound form.


CLS 524/787
TXT Inorganic metal compound having S, C, or N, e.g., KSCN, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 779 wherein the metal compound is inorganic
    and has at least one atom of carbon, sulfur, or nitrogen.


CLS 524/788
TXT Calcium, e.g., CaCO3, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 787 wherein the inorganic metal compound
    contains calcium.


CLS 524/789
TXT Elemental silicon, soil, or inorganic silicon compound as DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein elemental silicon, soil, or an
    inorganic silicon compound is present as DNRM during formation of a solid
    polymer or SICP.


CLS 524/790
TXT With reactive coupling agent:

    Subject matter under subclass 789 wherein the solid polymer or SICP is
    formed in the additional presence of a coupling agent which has sites
    reactive with both a portion of the elemental silicon, soil, or inorganic
    silicon compound DNRM and with the solid polymer, or SICP-forming system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   for systems wherein an inorganic filler is surface modified with a
    coupling agent prior to admixture with the solid polymer, SICP, or solid
    polymer-forming system.


CLS 524/791
TXT Alkali or alkali earth silicate:

    Subject matter under subclass 789 wherein the inorganic silicon DNRM is an
    alkali or alkali earth silicate.


CLS 524/792
TXT Halogenated hydrocarbon DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclas 700 wherein a compound which contains only
    carbon and halogen atoms or only carbon, halogen, and hydrogen atoms is
    present as DNRM during formation of a solid polymer or SICP.


CLS 524/793
TXT Halogenated hydrocarbon contains ethylenic unsaturation:

    Subject matter under subclass 792 wherein the halogen DNRM contains
    ethylenic unsaturation.

    (1)     Note.  The ethylenically unsaturated halogen material is presumed
    to be a reactant during formation of a solid polymer; therefore, to be
    placed herein there must be specific disclosure that the material is a
    nonreactant.


CLS 524/794
TXT With water NRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 792 wherein in addition to the halogen DNRM
    there is present water as a NRM.


CLS 524/795
TXT Fluorinated:

    Subject matter under subclass 792 wherein the DNRM contains a fluorine atom.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are perfluorinated hydrocarbons, fluro,
    chloro-hydrocarbons, etc.


CLS 524/796
TXT Nitrogen, halogen, or compounds thereof DNRM:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein nitrogen, halogen, or a compound
    having at least one nitrogen or halogen atom is present as DNRM during
    formation of a solid polymer or SICP.


CLS 524/797
TXT Solid polymer or SICP derived from protein or biologically active
    polypeptide and ethylenic monomer or SPFI:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the desired or intentional
    composition is produced by formation of a solid polymer or SICP by reaction
    of protein or biologically active polypeptide with an ethylenic monomer or
    SPFI in the presence of at least one nonreactant material (NRM).

    (1)     Note.  See Class 523, subclass 1 for the definition of nonreactant
    material.

    (2)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition of the terms "protein or
    biologically active polypeptide".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    498,    for systems of the instant subclass subsequently admixed with solid
    polymer or SICP.


CLS 524/798
TXT Solid polymer or SICP derived from natural resin or natural resin
    derivative and ethylenic monomer or SPFI, e.g., shellac, rosin, etc.:

    Subject matter under Class 523, subclass 1 wherein the desired or
    intentional composition is produced by formation of a solid polymer or SICP
    by reaction of a natural resin or natural resin derivative with an
    ethylenic monomer of SPFI in the presence of at least one nonreactant
    material (NRM).

    (1)     Note.  See Class 523, subclass 1 for the definition of nonreactant
    material (NRM).

    (2)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition of the term "natural
    resin or derivative".


CLS 524/799
TXT Solid polymer or SICP derived from lignin or tannin and ethylenic monomer
    or SPFI:

    Subject matter under Class 523, subclass 1 wherein the desired or
    intentional composition is produced by formation of a solid polymer or SICP
    in the presence of at least one nonreactant material (NRM) by reaction of
    lignin, tannin, or derivatives with ethylenic monomer or specified polymer-
    forming ingredients (SPFI).

    (1)     Note.  See Class 523, subclass 1 for the definition of nonreactant
    material NRM.

    (2)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition of the term lignin or
    derivatives; and see Class 560, subclass 68 for a definition of the term
    tannin or derivative.

    (3)     Note.  Placed herein are aqueous systems of reaction products of
    ligning, tannins, or lignosulfonates with SPFI.  For this purpose, terms
    such as "tanning extract" or "reaction product" are assumed to result in
    aqueous systems unless the claim recites removal of water.


CLS 524/800
TXT Preparation of intentional or desired composition by formation of solid
    polymer or SICP in the presence of water as a designated nonreactant
    material (DNRM), or products thereof:

    Subject matter under Class 523, subclass 1 wherein a desired or intentional
    composition is produced by formation of a solid polymer or SICP in the
    presence of water as a designated nonreactant material or products thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are chemically aftertreated products and the
    process of chemically aftertreating where no NRM is added subsequent to the
    initial in situ solid polymer formation.


CLS 524/801
TXT Process of preparing water-in-oil emulsion or dispersion or product thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 800 wherein the process of forming a solid
    polymer or SICP in the presence of water results in the formation of a
    water-in-oil emulsion or dispersion or products thereof.


CLS 524/802
TXT Aqueous carboxyl-bearing solid polymer or SICP composition chemically
    treated with aziridine, mono 1,2-epoxide, or cyclic sulfonium compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 800 wherein the solid polymer or SICP which
    has been prepared in the presence of water is a carboxyl-bearing polymer
    which is subsequently chemically treated with an aziridine (i.e., ) ,

    or mono 1,2-epoxide (i.e.,  ) or cyclic sulfonium compound


CLS 524/803
TXT Polyvinyl alcohol or partially hydrolyzed polyvinyl acetate or chemically
    modified forms thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 800 wherein the intentional or desired
    composition, which is prepared by formation of a solid polymer or SICP in
    the presence of water, contains polyvinyl alcohol (PVA) or chemically
    modified PVA.

    (1)     Note.  A vinyl alcohol polymer requires at least three CH2-CH-OH
    groups in the polymer chain.


CLS 524/804
TXT Solid polymer derived from ethylenic monomers only:

    Subject matter under subclass 800 wherein a solid polymer from
    ethylenically unsaturated monomers only is formed in the presence of water
    as a designated nonreactive material.

    (1)     Note.  "Ethylenically unsaturated" is defined in the Glossary.


CLS 524/805
TXT Fluorine containing monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 804 wherein there is at least one
    ethylenically unsaturated monomer containing fluorine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    526,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 242+ for solid
    polymer obtained only from ethylenic monomers, at least one of which
    contains fluorine.


CLS 524/806
TXT Silicon-containing monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 804 wherein there is at least one
    ethylenically unsaturated monomer containing silicon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    526,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 279 for solid
    polymers obtained only from ethylenic monomers, at least one of which
    contains silicon.


CLS 524/807
TXT Monomer-containing element other than C, H, O, N, S, Hal, or Group IA metal
    atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 804 wherein there is at least one
    ethylenically unsaturated monomer containing an atom other than S, C, O, N,
    H, halogen, or Group IA metal atom (Li, Na, K, Rb, or Cs).

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are monomers containing, e.g., phosphorus,
    etc.


CLS 524/808
TXT Monomer contains nitrogen atom as part of a heterocyclic ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 804 wherein there is at least one
    ethylenically unsaturated monomer which contains at least one nitrogen atom
    as part of a heterocyclic ring.

    (1)     Note.  "Heterocyclic" is defined in the Glossary.


CLS 524/809
TXT Two or more nitrogen atoms in a single ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 808 wherein there are two or more nitrogen
    atoms in the same heterocyclic ring.


CLS 524/811
TXT Monomer contains chalcogen atom as part of heterocyclic ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 804 wherein at least one ethylenically
    unsaturated monomer contains at least one chalcogen atom as a member of a
    heterocyclic ring.

    (1)     Note.  "Heterocyclic" is defined in the Glossary.


CLS 524/812
TXT N-containing monomer other than unsubstituted ammonium as sole nitrogen,
    acrylamide, methylol acrylamide, acrylonitrile and the corresponding
    methacryl compounds or mixtures thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 804 wherein there is at least one nitrogen
    containing monomer which is other than acrylamide, methylol acrylamide,
    acrylonitrile, methacrylamide, methylol methacrylamide, methacrylonitrile,
    monomer having NH4 as  the sole nitrogen, or mixtures of any of these.


CLS 524/813
TXT Nitrogen-carbon-oxygen bond containing monomer, e.g., allyl isocyanate,
    etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 812 wherein there is at least one monomer
    containing nitrogen directly bonded to carbon and which carbon is directly
    bonded to oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  Any possible number of bonds are included, e.g.,-N=C=O,
    -N--, etc.


CLS 524/814
TXT N-monomer contains S:

    Subject matter under subclass 812 wherein there is at least one monomer
    containing both nitrogen and sulfur atoms.


CLS 524/815
TXT Quaternary nitrogen-containing monomer, e.g., tetramethyl ammonium, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 812 wherein there is at least one monomer
    containing NR4 wherein each R is linked to the nitrogen through a carbon
    atom.


CLS 524/816
TXT N-monomer contains carboxylic acid or salt thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 812 wherein at least one nitrogen containing
    monomer contains a carboxylic acid or salt thereo.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "carboxylic
    acid or salt thereof".


CLS 524/817
TXT S-containing monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 804 wherein at least one monomer contains
    sulfur.


CLS 524/818
TXT Aldehyde or ketone containing monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 804 wherein at least one monomer contains an
    aldehyde or ketone group.

    (1)     Note.  "Aldehyde" is as defined in the Glossary.

    (2)     Note.  "Ketone" is as defined in the Glossary.

    (3)     Note.  Search this class (524) as appropriate hereinbelow for
    monomers which are aldehyde derivatives; and see the Glossary for the
    definition of the term "aldehyde derivative".


CLS 524/819
TXT Hydrocarbon monomer with carboxylic acid, salt, or nonnitrogen containing
    derivative monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 804 wherein there is at least one hydrocarbon
    monomer in combination with at least one monomer which has a carboxylic
    acid group, salt, or is a nonnitrogen containing derivative thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The nonnitrogen containing derivatives of carboxylic are
    esters and acyclic anhydrides.


CLS 524/820
TXT With N monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 819 wherein at least one nitrogen containing
    monomer is present in addition to said hydrocarbon monomer and said
    carboxylic acid, salt, or derivative monomer.


CLS 524/821
TXT Hydrocarbon monomer contains at least two ethylenic groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 820 wherein at least one hydrocarbon monomer
    contains at least two ethylenically unsaturated groups.


CLS 524/822
TXT Two or more hydrocarbon monomers:

    Subject matter under subclass 819 wherein there are at least two different
    ethylenically unsaturated hydrocarbon monomers.


CLS 524/823
TXT Two or more monomers-containing carboxylic acid or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 819 wherein there are at least two different
    carboxylic acid or derivative monomers.


CLS 524/824
TXT Aromatic monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 823 wherein there is at least one aromatic
    ethylenically unsaturated monomer, e.g., styrene, etc.


CLS 524/825
TXT With halogenated hydrocarbon monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 819 wherein there is additionally present at
    least one ethylenically unsaturated monomer containing at least one halogen
    atom.


CLS 524/827
TXT N-containing monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 804 wherein there is at least one nitrogen
    containing ethylenically unsaturated monomer.


CLS 524/828
TXT With hydrocarbon monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 827 wherein there is additionally present at
    least one ethylenically unsaturated hydrocarbon monomer.


CLS 524/829
TXT Two or more N monomers:

    Subject matter under subclass 827 wherein there are at least two different
    ethylenically unsaturated nitrogen containing monomers.


CLS 524/831
TXT With unsaturated carboxylic acid or ester monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 827 wherein there is additionally present at
    least one monomer which is an ethylenically unsaturated carboxylic acid or
    ester thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "carboxylic
    acid or ester".


CLS 524/832
TXT Monomer is carboxylic acid or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 804 wherein there are at least one
    ethylenically unsaturated monomer which is a carboxylic acid or derivative.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "carboxylic
    acid or derivative".


CLS 524/833
TXT Two or more carboxylic acids or derivatives:

    Subject matter under subclass 832 wherein there are at least two different
    monomers which are ethylenically unsaturated carboxylic acids or
    derivatives thereof.


CLS 524/834
TXT Halogenated hydrocarbon monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 804 wherein there is at least one
    ethylenically unsaturated, halogenated hydrocarbon monomer.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "halogenated
    hydrocarbon".


CLS 524/835
TXT Two or more halogenated hydrocarbon monomers:

    Subject matter under subclass 834 wherein there are at least two different
    ethylenically unsaturated, halogenated hydrocarbon monomers.


CLS 524/836
TXT Hydrocarbon monomer only:

    Subject matter under subclass 804 wherein all monomers are ethylenically
    unsaturated hydrocarbons.


CLS 524/837
TXT Solid polymer or SICP derived from Si-containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 800 wherein there is at least one
    silicon-containing reactant in the solid polymer or SICP formed in the
    presence of water as a DNRM:


CLS 524/838
TXT N-containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 837 wherein there is at least one
    nitrogen-containing reactant.


CLS 524/839
TXT Solid polymer or SICP derived from -N=C=X containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 800 wherein there is at least one N=C=X
    containing reactant in the solid polymer or SICP formed in the presence of
    water as a DNRM.

    (1)     Note.  X is chalcogen and is limited to oxygen, sulfur, selenium,
    or tellurium.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein are, e.g., isocyanate reactants, etc.


CLS 524/840
TXT N=C=X reactant has ionic group attached thereto, e.g., carboxyl, sulfonic,
    etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 839 wherein at least one N=C=X reactant has
    ionic groups attached thereto.

    (1)     Note.  Ionic groups included herein are, e.g., (-O)-, (SO3)-, etc.


CLS 524/841
TXT Solid polymer or SICP derived from a phenolic reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 800 wherein there is at least one phenolic
    reactant in the solid polymer or SICP formed in the presence of water as
    DNRM.

    (1)     Note.  "Phenolic reactant" is defined in the Glossary.


CLS 524/842
TXT With carbohydrate reactant, e.g., starch, cellulose, or sugar, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 841 where there is at least one carbohydrate
    or derivative as a reactant in addition to said phenolic reactant.

    (1)     Note.  "Carbohydrate or derivative" is defined in the Glossary.


CLS 524/843
TXT Solid polymer or SICP derived from an aldehyde or aldehyde derivative
    reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 800 wherein there is at least one aldehyde or
    derivative reactant in the said solid polymer or SICP formed in the
    presence of water as DNRM.

    (1)     Note.  "Aldehyde or derivative" is defined in the Glossary.


CLS 524/844
TXT With carbohydrate reactant, e.g., starch, cellulose, cork, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 843 wherein there is at least one
    carbohydrate or derivative as a reactant in addition to said aldehyde or
    derivative.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for the term "carbohydrate or derivative".


CLS 524/845
TXT Solid polymer derived from a reactant which is a carboxylic acid or
    derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 800 wherein there is at least one carboxylic
    acid or derivative reactant in said solid polymer formed in the presence of
    water as DNRM.

    (1)     Note. "Carboxylic acid or derivative" is defined in the Glossary.


CLS 524/846
TXT Polymer of an ethylenic reactant with a saturated reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 800 wherein there is at least one solid
    polymer of an ethylenic unsaturated reactant with a saturated reactant,
    said solid polymer formed in the presence of water as DNRM.


CLS 524/847
TXT Carbon, titanium dioxide, glass, or silicon dioxide having specified
    crystalline form or numerical limitation other than amount, e.g., included
    herein are particle size, shape, etc., as DNRM:

    Subject matter under Class 523, subclass 1 wherein said desired or
    intentional composition is produced by formation of a solid polymer or SICP
     in the presence of a designated nonreactive material which is carbon,
    TiO2, glass, or SiO2 having specified form or numerical limitations other
    than amount.

    (1)     Note.  Designation of a particular crystalline form, e.g., anatase,
    cristobalite, diamond, graphite, etc., is treated in the same way as a
    designation of a material having a specified family of physical properties
    and is therefore sufficient for inclusion herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    849     through 881, for compositions produced by formation of a solid
    polymer or SICP in the presence of a specified amount of a designated
    nonreactive material which is carbon, TiO2, glass, or SiO2.


CLS 524/848
TXT Hydrocarbon material other than solely a fused ring or cyloaliphatic
    hydrocarbon, benzene, toluene, or xylene or mixture thereof; said material
    or mixture of materials having specified numerical limitations other than
    amount, e.g., included herein are m.p., b.p., viscosity, particle size,
    etc., as DNRM:

    Subject matter under Class 523, subclass 1 wherein said desired or
    intentional composition is produced by formation of a solid polymer or SICP
    in the presence of a designated nonreactive material which is at least one
    hydrocarbon material having specified numerical properties other than
    amount and other than benzene, toluene, xylene, or solely a fused ring or
    cycloaliphatic hydrocarbon or mixtures solely consisting of the excluded
    species.

    (1)     Note.  Designation of a hydrocarbon compound by name, e.g., heptane
    or n-heptane, etc., is treated as a designation of a material having a
    specified family of physical properties and is therefore sufficient for
    inclusion herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    849     through 881, for compositions produced by formation of a solid
    polymer or SICP in the presence of a fused ring or cycloaliphatic
    hydrocarbon, benzene, toluene or xylene or a specified amount of a
    designated nonreactive hydrocarbon material or for mixtures solely
    consisting of the excluded species.


CLS 524/849
TXT Solid polymer from ethylenic monomer only, said polymer formed in the
    presence of a nonreactant material:

    Subject matter under Class 523, subclass 1 wherein said desired or
    intentional composition is produced by formation of a solid polymer from
    ethylenically unsaturated monomers only in the presence of at least one
    nonreactant material.


CLS 524/850
TXT N-containing monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 849 wherein at least one ethylenically
    unsaturated monomer contains nitrogen.


CLS 524/851
TXT Halogen-containing monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 849 wherein at least one ethylenically
    unsaturated monomer contains halogen.


CLS 524/852
TXT Chalcogen atom containing monomer other than ether oxygen as sole chalcogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 849 wherein at least one ethylenically
    unsaturated monomer contains a chalcogen atom other than ether oxygen as
    the sole chalcogen.

    (1)     Note.  Chalcogen is limited to oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium.


CLS 524/853
TXT Carboxylic acid or derivative monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 852 wherein there is at least one
    ethylenically unsaturated carboxylic acid or derivative as monomer.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "carboxylic
    acid or derivative".


CLS 524/854
TXT Monomer containing at least two carboxylic acid or derivative groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 853 wherein there is at least one
    ethylenically unsaturated monomer which has two or more carboxylic acid or
    derivative groups.


CLS 524/855
TXT From unsaturated hydrocarbon monomer solely:
    Subject matter under subclass 849 wherein all monomers are ethylenically
    unsaturated hydrocarbons.


CLS 524/856
TXT Contains two or more ethylenic unsaturated groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 855 wherein at least one monomer has two or
    more ethylenically unsaturated groups.


CLS 524/857
TXT Boron or metal-containing reactant forming a solid polymer or SICP in the
    presence of a nonreactant material:

    Subject matter under Class 523, subclass 1 wherein said desired or
    intentional composition is produced by formation of a solid polymer or SICP
    from at least one boron or metal-containing reactant in the presence of a
    nonreactant material.


CLS 524/858
TXT Si-containing reactant forming a solid polymer or SICP in the presence of a
    nonreactant material:

    Subject matter under Class 523, subclass 1 wherein said desired or
    intentional composition is produced by formation of a solid polymer or SICP
    from at least one silicon-containing reactant in the presence of a
    nonreactant material.


CLS 524/859
TXT Silicate containing compound as sole Si-containing reactant, e.g., ortho
    silicate esters, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 858 wherein all silicon-containing reactants
    contain at least one

    -O--O- structure.

    (1)     Note.  Included are, e.g., ortho silicate esters, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Silicate structure in siloxane material is conventionally
    depicted as SiO4/2 to indicate four-shared oxygens.


CLS 524/860
TXT Poly (di organo siloxane) reactant, i.e., [R-Si(R)-O]-* where R is an
    organic radical and * is subscript two or more:

    Subject matter under subclass 858 wherein there is at least one reactant
    containing




    radical and the subscript * is two or more.


CLS 524/861
TXT Si-H containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 860 wherein there is at least one Si-H
    containing reactant.


CLS 524/862
TXT With ethylenically unsaturated reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 861 wherein at least one ethylenically
    unsaturated reactant is present in addition to the Si-H reactant.


CLS 524/863
TXT Poly (di organo siloxane) reactant has at least one SiO other than as
    Si-O-Si, e.g., Si-O-C, or SiOH group, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 860 wherein said poly(di organo siloxane)
    reactant has at least one Si-O-A linkage where A is an atom other than Si.

    (1)     Note.  Included are, e.g., Si-O-C, Si-OH, etc.; these are the
    so-called hydrolyzable groups.


CLS 524/864
TXT With N-containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 863 wherein at least one nitrogen-containing
    reactant is present in addition to the Si-O-A reactant.


CLS 524/865
TXT With ethylenic unsaturated reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 863 wherein an ethylenically unsaturated
    reactant is present in addition to the Si-O-A reactant.


CLS 524/866
TXT Ethylenically unsaturated reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 860 wherein there is at least one
    ethylenically unsaturated reactant.


CLS 524/868
TXT Heterocyclic reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 858 wherein there is at least one
    heterocyclic reactant.

    (1)     Note.  "Heterocyclic" is defined in the Glossary.


CLS 524/869
TXT N-containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 858 wherein there is at least one reactant
    which contains nitrogen.


CLS 524/871
TXT N=C=X containing reactant forming a solid polymer or SICP in the presence
    of a nonreactant material (X is chalcogen):

    Subject matter under Class 523, subclass 1 wherein said desired or
    intentional composition is produced by formation of a solid polymer or SICP
    from at least one N=C=X containing reactant in the presence of a
    nonreactive material.

    (1)     Note.  X is chalcogen, i.e., O, S, Se, or Te, e.g., isocyanate, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein are the so-called "blocked" isocyanates
    which regenerate free isocyanate during the course of the reaction, e.g.,
    phenol blocked isocyanates, etc.


CLS 524/872
TXT Two or more N=C=X containing reactants (other than conventional isomer
    mixtures):

    Subject matter under subclass 871 wherein there are at least two N=C=X
    containing reactants.

    (1)     Note.  Commercially conventional isomer ratios such as 80:20 2,4-;
    2,6- toluene diisocyanate are excluded herefrom since these isomer mixtures
    are inherent in the method of isocyanate preparation.


CLS 524/873
TXT Aliphatic or cycloaliphatic N=C=X compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 871 wherein there is at least one compound
    where the -N=C=X group is linked to a carbon which is a member of an
    aliphatic or cycloaliphatic group.


CLS 524/874
TXT With N-containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 871 wherein there is at least one
    nitrogen-containing reactant present in addition to the -N=C=X reactant.


CLS 524/875
TXT With two or more alcohol hydroxyl compounds:

    Subject matter under subclass 871 wherein there are at least two C-OH
    compounds where the carbon is not doubly bonded to chalcogen present in
    addition to the -N=C=X reactant.


CLS 524/876
TXT Phenolic reactant forming a solid polymer or SICP in the presence of a
    nonreactant material:

    Subject matter under Class 523, subclass 1 wherein said desired or
    intentional composition is produced by formation of a solid polymer or SICP
    from at least one phenolic reactant in the presence of a nonreactant
    material.

    (1)     Note.  "Phenolic reactant" is defined in the Glossary.


CLS 524/877
TXT Aldehyde or derivative or ketone as reactant forming a solid polymer or
    SICP in the presence of a nonreactant material:

    Subject matter under Class 523, subclass 1 wherein said desired or
    intentional composition is produced by formation of a solid polymer or SICP
    from at least one aldehyde or derivative or ketone reactant in the presence
    of a nonreactant material.

    (1)     Note.  "Aldehyde or derivative" is defined in the Glossary.

    (2)     Note.  "Ketone" is defined in the Glossary.


CLS 524/878
TXT Carboxylic acid or derivative, excluding nitrile as sole derivative as
    reactant forming a solid polymer in the presence of a nonreactant material:

    Subject matter under Class 523, subclass 1 wherein said desired or
    intentional composition is produced by formation of a solid polymer from at
    least one carboxylic acid or derivative excluding nitrile derivative as
    reactant in the presence of a nonreactant material.

    (1)     Note.  "Carboxylic acid or derivative" is defined in the Glossary.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    523,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 1 for a nitrile
    containing reactant.


CLS 524/879
TXT Nitrogen-containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 878 wherein there is at least one
    nitrogen-containing reactant.


CLS 524/881
TXT Ethylenically unsaturated compound or compound containing element other
    than C, H, O, or N (e.g., P, S, etc.) as reactant forming a solid polymer
    in the presence of a NRM:

    Subject matter under Class 523, subclass 1 wherein said desired or
    intentional composition is produced by formation of a solid polymer from at
    least one compound containing an atom other than C, H, O, or N in the
    presence of a nonreactant material or from at least one ethylenically
    unsaturated compound with at least one non(ethylenically unsaturated)
    compound in the presence of a nonreactant material.

    (1)     Note.  Included are reactants containing, e.g., P, S, etc.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS

    The following subclasses are collections of published disclosure pertaining
    to various aspects of art relating to intentional compostions involving
    solid polymers or specified intermediate condensation products, and which
    aspects do not form an appropriate base for subclass classification in the
    classification schedule.

    (1)     Note.  Disclosures are placed for value as a search aid and in no
    instance do they represent the entire extent of the prior art.


CLS 524/900
TXT ANTIGEN-ANTIBODY:

    Subject matter involving polymer-protein compositions having antigen or
    antibody activity.


CLS 524/901
TXT ELECTRODEPOSITABLE COMPOSI-
    TIONS:

    Subject matter involving compositions which are depositable upon
    application of an electric field.


CLS 524/902
TXT ELECTROSTATIC SPRAY:

    Subject matter under subclass 901 involving electrostatic spray
    compositions.


CLS 524/903
TXT AEROSOL COMPOSITIONS:

    Subject matter involving compositions suitable for use as aerosols.


CLS 524/904
TXT POWDER COATING COMPOSITIONS:

    Subject matter wherein the composition is suitable for application as a
    powder coating, e.g., fluidized bed, etc.


CLS 524/905
TXT ETCH MASKING COMPOSITIONS:

    Subject matter involving composition suitable as an etch mask.


CLS 524/906
TXT MULTIPACKAGE COMPOSITIONS:

    Subject matter wherein the various components of a composition are arranged
    in separate packages or compartments intended for subsequent admixture.


CLS 524/907
TXT ADDITIVE OF SPECIFIED SHAPE OTHER THAN FIBER, PARTICLE, OR POWDER:

    Subject matter wherein the composition contains an additive of specified
    shape.


CLS 524/908
TXT COMPOSITION HAVING SPECIFIED SHAPE, E.G., ROD, STICK, OR BALL, ETC., AND
    OTHER THAN SHEET, FILM, OR FIBER:

    Subject matter wherein the overall composition has a specified shape, e.g.,
    rod, stick, or ball, etc., and is other than a sheet, film, or powder.


CLS 524/909
TXT REVERSE OSMOSIS MEMBRANE COMPOSITIONS, E.G., DESALINIZATION, ETC.:

    Subject matter wherein the composition is suitable for use in a reverse
    osmosis membrane.


CLS 524/910
TXT ANTISTATIC COMPOSITIONS:

    Subject matter wherein the composition has antistatic property.


CLS 524/911
TXT Composition to apply to a substrate to be destaticized:

    Subject matter under subclass 910 involving compositions to apply to a
    substrate to be destaticized.


CLS 524/912
TXT Contains metal, boron, phosporus, or silicon:

    Subject matter under subclass 910 involving antistatic compositions
    containing metal, boron, phosphorus, or silicon atoms.


CLS 524/913
TXT Contains nitrogen nonreactant material:

    Subject matter under subclass 910 involving antistatic compositions
    containing nitrogen atoms in the nonreactant material.


CLS 524/914
TXT FLOOR COVERING COMPOSITIONS:

    Subject matter involving compositions suitable for use as floor coverings.


CLS 524/915
TXT CARPET BACKING ADHESIVES:

    Subject matter involving compositions suitable for use as carpet backing
    adhesives.


CLS 524/916
TXT HYDROGEL COMPOSITIONS:

    Subject matter involving hydrogel compositions.


CLS 524/917
TXT OIL SPILL RECOVERY COMPOSITIONS:

    Subject matter involving compositions suitable for use in oil spill
    recovery.


CLS 524/918
TXT WOOD PATCHING COMPOSITION:

    Subject matter involving compositions suitable for patching wood, e.g.,
    wood putty or filler, etc.


CLS 524/919
TXT METAL PATCHING COMPOSITIONS, E.G., BODY SOLDER, ETC.:

    Subject matter involving compositions suitable for metal patching, e.g.,
    body putty, etc.


CLS 524/920
TXT COILABLE PIPE COMPOSITIONS:

    Subject matter involving compositions suitable for making coilable pipe,
    e.g., coilable pvc pipe, etc.


CLS 524/921
TXT ELASTIC MEMORY OR HEAT SHRINKABLE COMPOSITIONS:

    Subject matter involving compositions which are heat shrinkable or have
    elastic memory.


CLS 524/922
TXT FLOCCULATING, CLARIFYING, OR FINING COMPOSITIONS:

    Subject matter involving compositions suitable for flocculating,
    clarifying, or fining.


CLS 524/923
TXT TREATING OR PREPARING A NONAQUEOUS DISPERSION OR EMULSION OF A SOLID
    POLYMER OR SPECIFIED INTERMEDIATE CONDENSATION PRODUCT:

    Subject matter involving treating or preparing nonaqueous dispersions or
    emulsions of solid polymer or SICP.


CLS 524/924
TXT TREATING OR PREPARING A NONAQUEOUS SOLUTION OF A SOLID POLYMER OR SPECIFIED
    INTERMEDIATE CONDENSATION PRODUCT:

    Subject matter involving treating or preparing a nonaqueous solution of a
    solid polymer or SICP.


CLS 524/925
TXT NATURAL RUBBER COMPOSITIONS HAVING NONREACTIVE MATERIALS (DNRM) OTHER THAN:
    CARBON, SILICON DIOXIDE, GLASS TITANIUM DIOXIDE, WATER, HYDROCARBON:

    Subject matter involving natural rubber compositions having a DNRM.


CLS 524/926
TXT With water as NRM, exemplified:

    Subject matter under subclass 925 involving rubber compositions containing
    water as well as a DNRM.  The system is either claimed or appears in an
    operative embodiment.


CLS 524/927
TXT Before 1930:

    Subject matter under subclass 926 wherein the patent is before 1930.


CLS 524/928
TXT Before 1930, exemplified:

    Subject matter under subclass 925 wherein the patent is before 1930 and the
    system is either claimed or appears in an operative embodiment.


CLS 524/929
TXT Natural rubber broadly disclosed, nonclaimed:

    Subject matter under subclass 925 wherein there is no claim or
    exemplification of a natural rubber containing composition.


CLS 525/
TTL SYNTHETIC RESINS OR NATURAL RUBBERS -- PART OF THE CLASS 520 SERIES

CLS 525/
TXT This class (525) provides for all processes or products wherein a solid
    polymer is chemically modified or admixed with an additional solid polymer.
     It also provides for processes or products involving nonsolid specified
    intermediate condensation products which are admixed with an additional
    specified intermediate condensation product or specified polymer forming
    ingredients.  In addition, this class provides for vinyl alcohol polymers
    or modified forms thereof and for polyesters admixed with an ethylenic
    reactant.  Listed below are rules to be followed in placing patents into
    and in determining the appropriate subclasses to be searched in Class 525:



    ETHYLENIC POLYMERS: The following rules applicable to subclasses 55-388:

    (A)     When a polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only is not
    specified as a liquid or terms which are generally regarded as indicating a
    liquid, e.g., wax, waxy, etc., it will be regarded as being a solid, e.g.,
    polyethylene, polystyrene, etc.

    (B)     Products are classified on the basis of their preparation.  A
    product identified by a structure is to be placed with the process of its
    preparation, for instance, a product identified as


            and which product from the disclosures is prepared by the reaction
    of polyacryloamide and formaldehyde is classified on the basis of
    polyacryloamide reacted with formaldehyde in a case involving rubber, e.g.,
    halogenated, etc., classification is on the basis of a solid polymer
    derived from isoprene.

    (C)     All subclasses are based on a process of mixing.  Products, per se,
    therefore are classified on the basis of the process of mixing.

    (D)     All solid polymers (subclasses 191+) are classified on the basis of
    the initial solid polymer derived from ethylenic reactants, e.g., a mixture
    of a halogenated polybutadiene and polyethylene is classified as an
    original in subclass 232 rather than as a halogen containing reactant
    (e.g., subclass 213).

    (E)     A process of halogenating polybutadiene and subsequently blending
    same with polyethylene is classified as in (D) above.

    (F)     In those subclasses which require the combination of two or more
    reactants, e.g., subclass 165 or subclass 178, etc., the two reactants need
    not be added simultaneously to the ethylene polymer, nor need they be
    reacted together prior to addition with the ethylenic polymer.  They may be
    added subsequently, or there may be an intermediate reactant which is not,
    per se, the type required in these subclasses (e.g., other than amine,
    polycarboxylic acid, polyol, etc.). However, if the intermediate reactant
    is provided higher in the schedule, e.g., isocyanate, polyepoxide, it is
    classified in the higher provided subclass, etc.

    (G)     Compositions which have been admixed and are not in a reacted state
    are classified on the basis of the reactants in the schedule hierarchy.

    (H)     The following rules are applicable to subclasses 100+, 107+, 123+,
    132+, 153, 154+, 165+, and 178+.  Each of the above subclasses provide for:

    (1)     The reaction of an ethylenic polymer and a saturated reactant
    required by that subclass or polymer thereof, e.g., aldehyde, phenols, etc.

    (2)     The physical blend of an ethylenic polymer and a solid polymer
    derived from a saturated reactant required by that subclass.

    (3)     The physical blend of an ethylenic polymer and a solid polymer
    derived from at least one ethylenic reactant required by that subclass and
    at least one saturated coreactant.

    (4)     The mixture of an ethylenically unsaturated polymer and a specified
    intermediate condensation product, specified polymer forming ingredients,
    or solid polymer thereof, which is other than solely derived from ethylenic
    materials and wherein an ingredient required by that subclass is ethylenic
    and is part of the specified intermediate condensation product, specified
    polymer forming ingredient system, or solid polymer; or wherein the
    material required by that subclass is ethylenic and is in addition to a
    solid polymer, polymer forming ingredient system, or intermediate
    condensation containing at least one saturated reactant.

    (a)     Excluded from these subclasses are those processes or products
    wherein an ethylenic polymer is admixed with ethylenic material (e.g.,
    polyacrolein or acrolein) only or polymers thereof.

    (b)     Included herein are those situations wherein a treatment is
    effected on a polymer with part of a specified polymer forming ingredient
    system and in which a later reactant is added which forms a specified
    polymer-forming ingredient system therewith.  The ehtylenic reactant which
    is required by that subclass can be part of the polymer-forming ingredient
    system or it may be part of the specified intermediate condensation product.

    CONDENSATES - PROCESSES: The following rules are applicable to subclasses
    389-540.

    (A)     Processes of preparing products are classified with the product in
    the absence of any specified process subclass.

    (B)     Processes of treating a previously treated product are classified
    on the basis of the original solid polymer originally formed, e.g.,
    treating a starting halogenated polyamide with an epoxy is classified as an
    original in the first appearing subclass of the schedule that provides for
    treating a polyamide with a halogen or epoxy, etc. If the process of
    preparing the starting materials is not claimed and the claimed step is
    provided in a lower subclass than the process if claimed of preparing the
    starting material, then a cross-reference into the claimed process is
    appropriate, e.g., Schedule reads as follows:

    Polyamide

    treating with halogen treating with epoxy

            Claim reads:

    Halogenated polyamide is treated with an epoxy, the original is placed into
    the halogen subclass and should be cross-referenced into the epoxy
    subclass; however, if the steps of halogenating and epoxidizing are
    claimed, the original is placed into the halogenating subclass and a
    cross-reference into the epoxy subclass is deemed to be optional.

    (C)     When a condensate polymer is not specified as a solid or identified
    by properties which identify it as a solid e.g., melting point, etc., then
    it is a liquid and as such is treated as a reactant.

    (D)     When a condensate polymer is noted in generic terms or is
    identified by a trade name or manufacturer, it is to be regarded as follows:

    polyester =     reaction product of a saturated dicarboxylic acid or
    derivative and ethylene glycol.



    polyamide =     reaction product of a saturated dicarboxylic acid or
    derivative and a diamine.



    polyamide =     identified as a nylon 6 is the reaction product of a
    caprolactam.



    polyphenylene   oxide = reaction product of a monohydric phenol.



    polyarylene     sulfide = polyphenylene sulfide reaction product of an
    alkali metal sulfide reactant and a halogenated aromatic reactant.



    polyoxymethylene   =  formaldehyde polymer.



    polycarbonate  =  reaction product of
     halhal  or  OO

            and a dihydric aromatic dialcohol.



    polyurethane =  R-(N=C=X)2(X is chalcogen) and ethylene glycol.



    polyurea =      R-(N=C=X)2(X is chalcogen) and a diamine.



    novalac =       reaction of formaldehyde and a monohydric phenol.



    resole =        reaction of formaldehyde and a monohydric phenol.



    aminoplast  =   reaction of formaldehyde and an amine.



    phenoplast  =   reaction of formaldehyde and a monohydric phenol.



    (E)     In a multistep process of treating a polymer the first appearing
    step of treating in the schedule array provides for the original placement.

    Claim reads:

            polyamide treated sequentially with X, Y, and Z

    Schedule reads:

            polyamide

            Y       original with Y which is first
            appearing subclass in schedule

            Z

            X

    (F)     In those processes wherein two reactants are required to treat a
    solid polymer material, e.g., polyamide treated with a polyol and a
    polycarboxylic acid, the polyol and carboxylic acid can be added
    concurrently, sequentially, or even an intermittent step of adding material
    between the addition of the polyol and polycarboxylic acid may be involved.

    (G) (1) In a multistep process wherein materials are reacted together and
    an intermediate solid polymer is formed which is subsequently reacted, all
    of the materials recited up to the step of preparing the intermediate solid
    polymer are regarded as reactants in preparing a solid polymer, and all
    materials which are reacted with the intermediate solid polymer are
    regarded as treating agents.



    A + BC (no identity recited) to solid

    C + D[E]  Intermediate solid polymer
    [E] hal" hal [E]

    (2)     Reactants to prepare intermediate solid polymer are A, B, and D.

    A + BC  (no identity recited as to solid nature)



    C + DE  D is a solid polymer higher in schedule array than (C) if it were a
    solid polymer, therefore classified as original with (D)



    (3)     A + BC  (no identity as to solid nature)

    C + DE  D is a solid polymer lower in the schedule array than C if C was
    solid.



            Classified as original with (D) and cross-referenced to (C).  In
    this situation (C) is regarded for cross-referencing purposes as if it were
    a solid.

    (H)     A process of preparing a reactable composition is classified on the
    basis of the reactants involved in preparing the composition.

    PRODUCTS - CONDENSATES

    (A)     All products must be classified on the basis of their preparation
    as indicated by the disclosure.  All product claims must first be changed
    into process language in order to be properly classified into the schedule.

    (B)     When products are to be classified all rules to processes described
    hereinbefore are applicable.

    (C)     A method of preparing a polymerizable composition is classified as
    a process on the basis of the reactants recited in preparing the
    polymerizable composition.

    ETHYLENIC OR CONDENSATION POLYMERS For purposes of classification:

    (A)     A solid polymer is always considered as being a reactant.

    (B)     A solid polymer is always classified on the reactants utilized in
    its preparation, e.g., natural rubber is classified as based on isoprene.

    (C)     In this class once the solid polymer is identified, all
    modifications thereof are included in the indents thereunder "specified as
    mixed".  For instance, mixing a solid polyphenylene oxide with a silicon
    modified polyester is classified in subclass 393.  Subclass 393 provides
    for processes starting with or treating a solid polyphenylene oxide with a
    silicon containing reactant and subsequently admixing same with a silicon
    or nonsilicon containing polyester, or for processes of admixing a solid
    polyphenylene oxide with a silicon containing polyester, or treating a
    mixture of a solid polyphenylene oxide and polyester with a silicon
    containing reactant.

    (D)     Processes wherein two or more reactants (ethylenic or nonethylenic)
    are reacted at preferential conditions so that one reactant forms a solid
    polymer while the other reactant is substantially unchanged and which other
    reactant is then subsequentially reacted with the formed solid polymer are
    classified in Class 526, 527 or 528.  When, however, such a product is
    admixed with an additional solid polymer, specified polymer forming
    ingredients, or with a specified intermediate condensation product it is
    proper for this class (525).  When the product is derived from ethylenic
    monomers only and is identified as a block or graft polymer and is
    subsequently admixed with an additional solid polymer, specified
    intermediate condensation product, or specified polymer forming
    ingredients, it is classified in this class (525) as if it were a block or
    graft copolymer. When the patentee discloses that a polymeric mixture is
    prepared by the interpolymerization of two or more reactants, A + B
    polymer, AB + polymer A, etc., such a product or process is proper in Class
    526, 527, or 528.

    (E)     Aftertreatment of a solid inorganic polymer with an organic
    compound to form an organic group containing polymer is proper in Class
    526, 527 or 528.  To be proper for this class (525) a solid organic polymer
    must be chemically treated.

    (F)     Patents in subclasses 192-196, 337, 338, and 503-508 which recite
    "chemical treating agent" are classified as follows:

    (1)     A "chemical treating agent" for purposes of this class is a
    chemical material which is added to the formed polymer and which causes or
    is present during a process wherein a change in a bond of the polymer is
    effected.

    (2)     These subclasses provide for all chemical aftertreatments of a
    previously formed polymer derived from only ethylenic monomers when such
    aftertreatments are performed in the presence of a chemical agent,
    including treatments that are performed with chemical agents that are not
    specific as to identity or amount of the chemical agent, with the exception
    of mere reference to cross-linking, curing, or vulcanizing.

    (3)     Claims are classified in these subclasses on the basis of the
    first-appearing material utilized as part of the chemical agent.  No
    attempt has been made to classify on the basis of the chemically active
    material and therefore all materials in a composition are regarded equally
    (e.g., diluent, reactant, catalyst, etc.).

    (4)     Claims to a composition or method of preparing (e.g., polymer plus
    a chemical reactive material) are classified as if they were process claims
    and as if the actual process has gone to completion.

    (G)     This class (525) includes processes of preparing solid polymers or
    resinifiable intermediate condensation products from a mixture of reactants
    wherein one of the initial reactants is used in an excessive amount with
    the expressed purpose of being used in a subsequent step to form with an
    added reactant a specified polymer-forming mixture.  The original reaction
    mixture must produce a solid polymer or resinifiable intermediate
    condensation product and the process must recite the addition of the added
    reactant which, together with the excess of original reactant, forms the
    specified polymer-forming ingredients.


CLS 525/7
TXT ETHYLENICALLY UNSATURATED REACTANT ADMIXED WITH  A PREFORMED REACTION
    PRODUCT DERIVED FROM: (A) AT LEAST ONE POLYCARBOXYLIC ACID, ESTER, OR
    ANHYDRIDE; (B) AT LEAST ONE FATTY ACID GLYCEROL ESTER, A FATTY ACID OR SALT
    DERIVED FROM A NATURALLY OCCURRING GLYCERIDE, TALL OIL, OR A TALL OIL FATTY
    ACID:

    Subject matter under Class 520, subclass 1 which are polyester-unsaturated
    reactant mixtures wherein (a) the polyester is prepared from a
    polycarboxylic acid, ester, or anhydride, and a polyol, and at least one
    fatty acid glycerol ester, a fatty acid or salt derived from a naturally
    occurring gylceride, tall oil, or a fatty acid derived from tall oil, and
    (b) there is at least one unsaturated reactant other than solely fatty
    glyceride, an unsaturated fatty acid or salt derived from a naturally
    occurring fatty glyceride, tall oil, or an unsaturated fatty acid derived
    from tall oil, or mixtures thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Dehydrated castor oil or dehydrated castor oil fatty acids
    are treated as if they were unsaturated naturally occurring glyceride or
    unsaturated fatty acids derived from naturally occurring fatty glycerides.

    (2)     Note.  A buffering agent to improve storage stability is regarded
    as a catalytic agent and therefore treated as specified material.

    (3)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "specified
    material", and the term "fatty acid" for a definition of other terms used
    herein.


CLS 525/7.1
TXT Mixed in the presence of a specified material:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein a specified material is present.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "specified
    material".


CLS 525/7.2
TXT Mixed with silicon-containing reactant or polymer derived therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein there is additionally present a
    silicon-containing reactant or a silicon-containing solid polymer, SICP, or
    SPFI therefrom.


CLS 525/7.3
TXT Mixed with aldehyde or derivative as reactant or polymer derived therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein there is additionally present an
    aldehyde or derivative as reactant or a SP, SICP, or SPFI therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of "aldehyde" or
    "derivative".


CLS 525/7.4
TXT Mixed with previously formed solid polymer or SPFI:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein there is additionally present
    another SP or SPFI system.


CLS 525/8
TXT ETHYLENICALLY UNSATURATED REACTANT ADMIXED WITH A PREFORMED REACTION
    PRODUCT DERIVED FROM: (A) AT LEAST ONE POLYCARBOXYLIC ACID, ESTER, OR
    ANHYDRIDE; (B) AT LEAST ONE POLYHYDROXY COMPOUND AND; (C) AT LEAST ONE
    NATURAL  RESIN, PROTEIN OR BIOLOGICALLY ACTIVE POLYPEPTIDE, OR CARBOHYDRATE
    OR DERIVATIVE:

    Subject matter under Class 520, subclass 1 wherein an ethylenically
    unsaturated reactant is admixed with a preformed polyester formed from a
    polyol; polycarboxylic acid, ester, or anhydride; and a natural resin,
    protein, biologically active polypeptide, carbohydrate or derivative.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for the terms "natural resin or
    derivative", "protein or biologically active polypeptide", and
    "carbohydrate or derivative".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54.1+,  for a system under Class 525, subclass 50 containing chemically
    combined protein or biologically active polypeptide and a polyester or
    polyester forming SPFI system.

    54.2+   for a preformed solid polyester (or polyester derived from
    ethylenic reactants only) chemically treated with a carbohydrate or
    derivative.

    54.3+   for a previously formed solid polyester containing chemically
    combined carbohydrate admixed with a SP, SICP, or chemical treating agent.

    54.4+   for a system under Class 525, subclass 50 containing chemically
    combined natural resin or derivative and a polyester or polyester forming
    SPFI system.

    54.5+   for a system under Class 525, subclass 50 containing chemically
    combined coal, bituminous material or fatty still residue and a polyester
    or polyester forming SPFI system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    527,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses for
    polyesters containing chemically bound: cellular material derived from
    plants or animals (100+); protein or biologically active polypeptide
    (200+); carbohydrate or derivative (300+); lignin or tannin (400+); coal or
    bituminous material (500+); or natural resin (600+).


CLS 525/10
TXT ETHYLENICALLY UNSATURATED REACTANT ADMIXED WITH EITHER (A) A POLYMER
    DERIVED FROM A SATURATED DI- OR HIGHER ESTER OF A POLYCARBOXYLIC ACID AS
    SOLE REACTANT, OR (B) REACTION PRODUCT OF ONLY POLYCARBOXYLIC ACIDS OR
    ANHYDRIDES WITH ONLY COMPOUNDS HAVING AT LEAST TWO HYDROXY GROUPS AT LEAST
    ONE OF WHICH IS SATURATED AND WHEREIN THE REACTION PRODUCT FORMED IS NOT
    AFTERTREATED PRIOR TO ADMIXTURE WITH THE UNSATURATED REACTANT EXCEPT WITH A
    POLYCARBOXYLIC ACID POLYCARBOXYLIC ACID ANHYDRIDE, OR A POLYOL, AND WHEREIN
    NO SOLID POLYMER DERIVED FROM ETHYLENIC REACTANTS ONLY IS MIXED THEREWITH:

    Subject matter under Class 520, subclass 1 involving a polymer derived from
    nonethylenic di- or higher esters of a polycarboxylic acid as sole
    reactant, or the reaction product of only polycarboxylic acids or
    anhydrides with only compounds having at least two hydroxy groups, at least
    one of which is saturated, mixed with at least one ethylenically
    unsaturated reactant and wherein the polymer or reaction product formed
    from the di- or higher ester or from the polycarboxylic acid or anhydride
    and polyhydroxy compound is not aftertreated prior to mixing with the
    unsaturated reactant except with a polycarboxylic acid, polycarboxylic acid
    anhydride, or a polyhydroxy compound, and wherein no solid polymer derived
    from ethylenic reactants only is mixed therein; processes of preparing or
    reacting the above mixtures and compositions resulting from the mixing or
    reacting processes.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are all polyester-unsaturated reactant
    mixtures defined above except those cases in which the document specified
    that a mere diester is formed.

    (2)     Note.  In those instances in which the polyester is aftertreated
    with reactants other than those defined above prior to mixing with the
    unsaturated reactant, search this class, subclasses 418+ if a solid polymer
    is formed and Class 528 if the polyester is not a solid.

    (3)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass is a mixture of a polymer
    derived from an unsaturated carboxylic acid ester as sole reactant, e.g.,
    diallyl phthalate, diallyl maleate, etc., and an ethylenic reactant.  A
    polymer such as polydiallyl phthalate is from an ethylenic reactant only
    and is therefore excluded from this and indented subclasses, and is
    provided for in subclasses 242+.

    (4)     Note.  Excluded from this and the indented subclasses are those
    unsaturated reactants which have been prereacted and are part of a
    specified polymer-forming system, e.g., liquid reaction product of
    unsaturated diisocyanate and a polyol, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55+,    for a solid polymer derived from ethylenic monomers only mixed with
    the polyester-unsaturated reactant mixture.


CLS 525/11
TXT Mixed in presence of specified material or a polymerizable composition
    contains a specified material:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein a polymer derived from a di- or
    higher ester of a polycarboxylic acid as sole reactant or derived from a
    polycarboxylic acid or anhydride and polyhydroxy compound is mixed with an
    ethylenic reactant in the presence of a specified material which is not a
    reactant or wherein the polymerizable polyester-unsaturated reactant
    composition contains a specified material.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "specified
    material".  The term as used usually includes solvents, catalysts,
    inhibitors, accelerators, etc.


CLS 525/12
TXT Specified material contains boron or silicon atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 11 wherein the specified material contains a
    silicon or boron atom.


CLS 525/13
TXT Specified material contains metal atom other than from group IA metal atom
    (Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs, Fr):

    Subject matter under subclass 11 wherein the specified material contains a
    metal atom other than Group IA metal atom (Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs, Fr).


CLS 525/14
TXT Material contains group IB metal atom (Cu, Ag, Au):

    Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein the specified material contains a
    Group IB metal atom (Cu, Ag, Au).


CLS 525/15
TXT Material contains group IIB metal atom (Zn, Cd, Hg) or IIIA metal atom (Al,
    Ga, In, Tl):

    Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein the specified material contains a
    Group IIB or IIIA metal atom (Zn, Cd, Hg, Al, Ga, In, Ti).


CLS 525/16
TXT Material contains group VB metal atom (V, Nb, Ta):

    Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein the specified material contains a
    Group VB metal atom (V, Nb, Ta).


CLS 525/17
TXT Material contains group VIII metal atom (Fe, Co, Ni, Ru, Rh, Pd, Os, Ir,
    Pt): Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein the specified material
    contains a Group VIII metal atom (Fe, Co, Ni, Ru, Rh, Pd, Os, Ir, Pt).


CLS 525/18
TXT Material contains group IVA metal atom (Ge, Sn, Pb):

    Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein the specified material contains a
    Group IVA metal atom (Ge, Sn, Pb).


CLS 525/19
TXT Material contains group IIA metal atom (Be, Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba, Ra):

    Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein the specified material contains a
    Group IIA metal atom (Be, Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba, Ra).


CLS 525/20
TXT Specified material contains phosphorus atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 11 wherein the specified material contains
    phosphorus atom.


CLS 525/21
TXT Specified material contains ketone group:
    Subject matter under subclass 11 wherein the specified material contains a
    ketone group.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "ketone".


CLS 525/22
TXT Specified material contains an aldehyde or derivative thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 11 wherein the specified material contains an
    aldehyde group or is a derivative thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "aldehyde or
    derivative".


CLS 525/23
TXT Specified material contains sulfur atom:
    Subject matter under subclass 11 wherein the specified material contains a
    sulfur atom.


CLS 525/24
TXT Sulfur is part of heterocyclic ring:
    Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein a sulfur atom is present as part
    of a heterocyclic ring.


CLS 525/25
TXT Specified material contains nitrogen atom: Subject matter under subclass 11
    wherein the specified material contains a nitrogen atom.


CLS 525/26
TXT Nitrogen is part of heterocyclic ring:
    Subject matter under subclass 26 wherein a nitrogen atom is part of a
    heterocyclic ring.


CLS 525/27
TXT Specified material contains a peroxy group, i.e., -O-O-:

    Subject matter under subclass 11 wherein the specified material contains a
    peroxy group, i.e., -O-O-.


CLS 525/28
TXT Mixed with -N C=X reactant or polymer derived therefrom (X is chalcogen):

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein a polymer derived from di- or
    higher ester of polycarboxylic acid as sole reactant or derived from
    polycarboxylic acid or anhydride and polyhydroxy compound is mixed with an
    ethylenic reactant and, additionally, is mixed with a -N C=X reactant or
    polymer derived thereof (X is chalcogen).

    (1)     Note.  The term -N C=X reactant includes blocked or masked
    isocyanates. See subclass 395 for a discussion of terms.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein are polyester unsaturated monomer mixtures
    which are aftertreated with an isocyanate reactant.  In those instances
    wherein the solid polyester is reacted with the isocyanate prior to mixing
    with the unsaturated reactant, see this class, subclass 440.


CLS 525/29
TXT Mixed with silicon-containing reactant or polymer derived therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein a polymer derived from a di- or
    higher ester of polycarboxylic acid as sole reactant or derived from
    polycarboxylic acid or anhydride and polyhydroxy compound is mixed with an
    ethylenic reactant and is additionally mixed with a silicon-containing
    reactant or polymer derived therefrom.


CLS 525/30
TXT Mixed with a solid polymer or specified intermediate condensation product
    derived from at least one amine-, N-C(=X)- or N-S(-O)- containing reactant
    and at least one aldehyde or aldehyde-type reactant (X is chalcogen):

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein a polymer derived from a di- or
    higher ester of polycarboxylic acid as sole reactant or derived from
    polycarboxylic acid or anhydride and polyhydroxy compound is mixed both
    with an ethylenic reactant and with an

    amine and/or reactant containing a N or N moiety (X is chalcogen) and an
    aldehyde or aldehyde-type reactant or reaction product thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the terms "amine",
    "aldehyde", or aldehyde-type reactant".


CLS 525/31
TXT Mixed with an 1,2-epoxy compound containing more than one 1,2-epoxy group
    per mole or polymer derived therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein a polymer derived from a di- or
    higher ester of polycarboxylic acid as sole reactant or derived from
    polycarboxylic acid or anhydride and polyhydroxy compound is mixed with an
    ethylenic reactant and additionally is mixed with an epoxy compound
    containing more than one 1,2-epoxy group per mole or polymer derived
    therefrom.


CLS 525/32
TXT Mixed with a phenolic reactant and an aldehyde or aldehyde-type reactant or
    reaction product thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein a polymer derived from a di- or
    higher ester of a polycarboxylic acid as sole reactant or derived from
    polycarboxylic acid or anhydride and polyhydroxy compound is mixed with an
    ethylenic reactant and additionally is mixed with a phenol and an aldehyde
    or aldehyde-type reactant or the reaction product thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the terms
    "polycarboxylic acid, phenolic, aldehyde or aldehyde-type."


CLS 525/32.1
TXT Polymer derived from polycarboxylic acid and polyhydroxyl compound is
    derived from at least one polycarboxylic acid reactant which is a dimer or
    trimer of an ethylenically unsaturated aliphatic monocarboxylic acid having
    at least ten carbon atoms; or adducts of said unsaturated monocarboxylic
    acid with an alpha, beta ethylenically unsaturated carboxylic acid or
    derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein at least a portion of the
    polycarboxylic acid or anhydride is (a) a dimer or trimer of an ethylenic
    unsaturated aliphatic monocarboxylic acid having at least ten carbon atoms,
    or (b) adducts of said unsaturated monocarboxylic acid with an alpha, beta
    ethylenically unsaturated carboxylic acid or derivative.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary under "fatty acid" for terms used in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168+,   for a system under Class 525, subclass 50 wherein the ethylenic
    group containing polycarboxylic acid or derivative is a dimer or trimer of
    an ethylenically unsaturated monocarboxylic acid having at least ten carbon
    atoms since these dimers and trimers are assumed to be ethylenically
    unsaturated materials unless otherwise specifically described as saturated
    or hydrogenated so as to substantially remove all residual unsaturation.


CLS 525/32.2
TXT Ethylenic reactant or polymer derived from polycarboxylic acid or anhydride
    and polyol is derived from a carbohydrate or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein a carbohydrate or derivative is
    chemically incorporated into the system either as the ethylenic reactant,
    or as part of a polymer derived from a polycarboxylic acid or anhydride
    polyol, and a carbohydrate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    526,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 238.2+ for a
    polymer produced from an ethylenic monomer having carbohydrate or
    derivative chemically bonded thereto.

    527,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 300+ for polyester
    resins containing chemically bound carbohydrate or derivatives.


CLS 525/33
TXT Polymer derived from polycarboxylic acid and polyhydroxy compound is
    derived from at least one polycarboxylic acid containing at least three
    carboxyl groups or more than one anhydride group:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein a polymer derived from a
    polycarboxylic acid or anhydride and polyhydroxy compound is derived from
    at least one polycarboxylic acid containing at least three carboxyl groups
    or more than one anhydride group.

    (1)     Note.  Included here also is a polycarboxylic acid containing an
    anhydride and a carboxylic acid.


CLS 525/34
TXT Polymer derived from polyhydroxy reactant and polycarboxylic acid is
    derived from at least one reactant containing at least three hydroxyl
    groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein a polymer derived from a
    polycarboxylic acid or anhydride and polyhydroxy compound is derived from
    at least one polyhydroxy compound containing at least three hydroxyl groups.


CLS 525/35
TXT Polymer derived from polycarboxylic acid or anhydride and polyhydroxy
    compound is derived from at least two polycarboxylic acid reactants or two
    polycarboxylic acid anhydrides or mixture thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein a polymer derived from
    polycarboxylic acid or anhydride and polyhydroxy compound is derived from
    at least two polycarboxylic acid reactants or anhydride reactants or a
    mixture thereof.


CLS 525/36
TXT At least one of said polycarboxylic acid reactants or anhydrides contains
    ethylenic unsaturation:

    Subject matter under subclass 35 wherein at least one of the polycarboxylic
    acid or anhydride reactants contains ethylenic unsaturation.


CLS 525/37
TXT Polymer mixed with unsaturated reactant containing phosphorus atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 36 wherein the unsaturated reactant mixed
    with the polyester contains phosphorus.


CLS 525/38
TXT Polymer mixed with unsaturated reactant containing nitrogen atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 36 wherein the unsaturated reactant mixed
    with the polyester contains nitrogen.


CLS 525/39
TXT Polymer mixed with unsaturated reactant containing carboxylic acid, ester,
    salt, or anhydride group:

    Subject matter under subclass 36 wherein the unsaturated reactant mixed
    with the polyester is a carboxylic acid, ester, salt, or anhydride.


CLS 525/40
TXT Polymer mixed with unsaturated reactant containing aryl ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 36 wherein the unsaturated reactant mixed
    with the polyester contains an aryl ring, e.g., styrene, etc.


CLS 525/41
TXT Polymer derived from polycarboxylic acid or anhydride and polyhydroxy
    compound is derived from at least two polyhydroxy compounds:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein a polymer derived from
    polycarboxylic acid or anhydride and polyhydroxy compound is derived from
    at least two polyhydroxy compounds.


CLS 525/42
TXT Polymer derived from polycarboxylic acid or anhydride and polyhydroxy
    compound is derived from polyhydroxy compound containing ether linkage:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein a polymer derived from a
    polycarboxylic acid or anhydride and polyhydroxy compound is derived from a
    polyhydroxy compound containing at least one ether linkage, e.g., hydroxy
    terminated low molecular weight polyethylene oxide, etc.


CLS 525/43
TXT Polymer derived from polycarboxylic acid or anhydride, and polyhydroxy
    compound wherein at least one of the reactants contains ethylenic
    unsaturation:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein a solid polymer derived from
    polycarboxylic acid or anhydride and polyhydroxy compound is derived from
    at least one reactant containing ethylenic unsaturation.


CLS 525/44
TXT Polymer mixed with unsaturated reactant containing two or more unsaturated
    groups: Subject matter under subclass 43 wherein the unsaturated reactant
    mixed with the polyester contains at least two unsaturated groups.


CLS 525/45
TXT Wherein unsaturated reactant contains three nitrogen atoms in the same ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein the unsaturated reactant mixed
    with the polyester contains three nitrogen atoms in the same ring.


CLS 525/46
TXT Polymer mixed with unsaturated reactant containing nitrogen atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 43 wherein the unsaturated reactant mixed
    with polyester contains a nitrogen atom.


CLS 525/47
TXT Unsaturated reactant contains nitrogen heterocycle:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 wherein an unsaturated nitrogen
    heterocyclic reactant is mixed with the polyester, e.g., N-Vinyl
    pyrolidone, etc.


CLS 525/48
TXT Polymer mixed with unsaturated carboxylic acid, ester, salt, or anhydride:

    Subject matter under subclass 43 wherein the unsaturated reactant mixed
    with polyester is a carboxylic acid, ester, salt, or anhydride.


CLS 525/49
TXT Polymer mixed with unsaturated aromatic compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 43 wherein the unsaturated reactant mixed
    with the polyester contains an aryl ring, e.g., styrene, etc.


CLS 525/50
TXT MIXING OF TWO OR MORE SOLID POLYMERS; MIXING OF SOLID POLYMER OR SPECIFIED
    INTERMEDIATE CONDENSATION PRODUCT WITH SPECIFIED INTERMEDIATE CONDENSATION
    PRODUCT OR SPECIFIED POLYMER-FORMING INGREDIENTS; MIXING OF SPECIFIED
    INTERMEDIATE CONDENSATION PRODUCT WITH AN ETHYLENIC AGENT; MIXING OF SOLID
    POLYMER WITH A CHEMICAL TREATING OR ETHYLENIC AGENT; OR PROCESSES OF
    FORMING OR REACTING; OR THE RESULTANT PRODUCT OF ANY OF THE ABOVE
    OPERATIONS:

    Subject matter under Class 520, subclass 1 which other involves the mixing
    of a solid polymer with other solid polymers, with a specified intermediate
    condensation product (SICP), with specified polymer-forming ingredients
    (SPFI), with an ethylenic reactant, or with a chemical treating agent; or
    the mixing of a specified intermediate condensation product with a diverse
    specified intermediate condensation product, with specified polymer-forming
    ingredients, or with an ethylenic reactant; or processes or producing, or
    the resultant product of any of the above mixtures.



    The above combinations may be tabulated in a more easily recognizable form
    as follows:



    Combination Proper for Subclasses 50+

    1.      P1+P2

    2.      P + SICP

    3.      P + SPFI

    4.      P + ER

    P =     Solid polymer

    5.      P + CTA

    6.      SICP1+SICP2

    7.      SICP + SPFI

    8.      SICP + ER

    P =     Solid Polymer

    SICP =  Specified intermediate
    condensa-                                tion product

    SPFI =  Specified polymer-forming
                    ingredients

    ER =    Ethylenic reactant

    CTA =   Chemical treating agent



    A polymer is a solid when so stated or when it is described in one or more
    of the following terms.  This list is not to be taken as limiting a solid
    to the enumerated terms.  Other terms in patents not noted below may be
    interpreted as being solid when proper description is given therein:

    1.      coagulated      10.     gum

    2.      brittle 11.     meltable

    3.      ductile 12.     melting point

    4.      Durran m.p.     13.     millable

    5.      elastic 14.     molten

    6.      elastomer       15.     pliable

    7.      fiber-forming   16.     powder

    8.      friable 17.     rubber

    9.      fusible 18.     rubbery

    19.     thermoplastic

    20.     thermoset



    A wax is not considered to be a solid even if defined by one or more of the
    above terms.



    Specified intermediate condensation product is limited to the following:



    (A) Reactants noted in categories 1-3 below either as enumerated or with
    additional reactants, with the proviso that at least one of the reactants
    noted in 1-3 must be saturated, or (B) to the materials having the formulas
    set forth in categories 4-6.  It must be remembered for purposes of
    classification that the structural formulas noted in 4-6 below are methylol
    compounds or derivatives thereof and are to be regarded as being a mixture
    of an aldehyde and the appropriate other reactant or reactants, with the
    proviso that at least one of the reactants used in preparing the methylol
    compound be saturated.  In this regard, a methylol phenol is classified as
    if it were a mixture of formaldehyde and phenol, and methylol urea is
    classified as if it were a mixture of formaldehyde and urea.

    1.      Reaction of an aldehyde or aldehyde derivative and/or an amine or
    compound containing

             an N or N moiety (X is chalcogen).

    2.      Reaction of an aldehyde or aldehyde derivative and a phenolic
    material.

    3.      Reaction of an aldehyde or aldehyde derivative and a ketone.

    4.      A compound containing

    5.      A compound containing a

    6.      A compound containing a

    Y" and Y" are or hydrocarbon groups.

    T - is an atom other than H or carbon of a carbon-substituted radical.

    A - is a hydrogen or carbon atom and which carbon is bonded to only H,
    carbon, or single-bonded to oxygen atoms.

    X - is H, part of an ether group, or an inorganic cation.

    N -is two or more, B is one or more.

    Z -is a H or carbon radical.



    See the (5) Note below for a further clarification of the term specified
    intermediate condensation product.



    Specified Polymer-Forming Ingredients are Limited to: Those materials
    listed below under fourteen (14) different categories wherein at least one
    of each necessary reactants be utilized and that at least one be saturated.



    The term "poly" as noted in the specified polymer-forming ingredients area
    below is meant to include only reactants which are either (1) monomeric and
    in any physical state, or (2) polymeric but in a nonsolid physical state.
    The term "poly" designates that at least two of the required functional
    groups are present.



    In the classification schedule the term "necessary ingredients" has been
    utilized is some subclasses to include the combination of materials
    enumerated below (1-14) which must be present to have specified
    polymer-forming ingredients.

    1.      aldehyde or aldehyde derivative and a phenolic material

    2.      aldehyde or aldehyde derivative and an organic amine

    3.      aldehyde or aldehyde derivative and a

            C- containing moiety (X is chalcogen)

    4.      aldehyde or aldehyde derivative and a hydrocarbon

    5.      epoxides containing more than one 1, 2-epoxy group per mole

    6.      organic compounds containing more than one -N=C=X (X is chalcogen
    atom) and an organic polyol

    7.      organic compounds containing more than one -N=C=X (X is chalcogen)
    and an organic polyamine

    8.      organic compound containing more than one -N=C=X (X is chalcogen)
    and a poly carboxylic acid or anhydride

    9.      carbonic acid halocarbonate or a carbonate and a polyol

    10.      halhal and a polyol

    11.      polycarboxylic acid or derivative and a polyol

    12.      polycarboxylic acid or derivative and a polyamine

    13.     aldehyde or aldehyde derivative and a compound containing an

            organic N moiety

    14.     aldehyde or aldehyde derivative and a ketone

    15.      Materials which, present in the composition are either claimed or
    disclosed
    as being coreactable to form a solid  polymer.

    (1)     Note.  An aldehyde derivative for purposes of this subclass
    includes:

    a.      Compounds having a X-CH2OH group wherein X is other than carbon or
    hydrogen.  Included herein are paraformaldehyde, methylol derivatives of
    urea, nylon, and polyacrylamide, etc.

    b.      Heterocyclic compounds having only carbon and oxygen as ring atoms
    in an alternating manner and in equal amount, i.e.,

            (O-)n.  Included herein is trioxane.

    c.      Hexamethylenetetramine or its derivatives, e.g.,

            A derivative of this type requires the basic ring structure of
    hexamethylenetetramine but wherein the hydrogen atoms may have been
    replaced by other atoms.

    (2)     Note.  Compounds having a methylol group (-CH2OH) bonded to atoms
    other than carbon, oxygen, or hydrogen are regarded for this subclass as
    being two compounds, one of which is formaldehyde.  For instance, a
    methylol derivative of melamine is regarded as being a mixture of melamine
    and formaldehyde.  Methylol urea is regarded as being a mixture of
    formaldehyde and urea.

    (3)     Note.  Paraformaldehyde polymer is regarded as a formaldehyde
    reactant.

    (4)     Note.  A resole is considered to be a specified intermediate
    condensation product even if the structure is recited.  However, a novolak
    is considered to be a solid phenolaldehyde polymer.

    (5)     Note.  Compounds containing ethylenic unsaturation are not
    considered to be specified intermediate condensation products (see
    structures 4-6 under specified intermediate condensation products above)
    nor are methylol or methylol derivatives, per se.

    (6)     Note.  When nonpolymeric reactants A, B, and C, none of which is a
    specified intermediate condensation product, are mixed simultaneously under
    controlled conditions such that in a first stage one or two (e.g., A
    and/orB) of the reactants are caused to react to form a solid intermediate
    condensation product and the other reactants are caused to react later in
    the process, the claim is classified on the basis of the reactants which
    were introduced initially and not on the intermediate solid product unless
    a material is added subsequent to the formation of the solid intermediate
    and prior to the reaction of the final reactants.

    (7)     Note.  A specified intermediate condensation product has been
    limited to a condensation product of an aldehyde with at least one of
    phenol, phenol either, inorganic phenolate,

            N,   N- containing reactant (X is chalcogen) or ketone wherein the
    condensation product contains a plurality of methylol groups (-CH2OH) or
    the partially or fully etherified product thereof (-CH2OR).  In those
    instances where it is unknown from the claims or disclosure whether
    methylol or etherified methylol groups are present, the document has been
    considered to have methylol groups and crossed to where it would be
    classified if no methylol groups were present.

    (8)     Note.  For purposes of this class all solid polymers are regarded
    as being reactants.

    (9)     Note. Natural rubber is a solid polymer proper for this class. A
    natural rubber or modified form thereof is considered as if it were derived
    from a monomer containing two ethylenic groups, i.e., isoprene. The
    following are examples drawn to the patent placement of natural rubber in
    this class (525).



    a.      Natural rubber + polybutadiene is classified in Class 525, subclass
    232.  This composition is considered as mixture of two polymers both of
    which are derived from ethylenic reactants only.

    b.      Natural rubber + styrene reactant is classified in Class 525,
    subclasses 313+.

    c.      Natural rubber + polyol + polycarboxylic acid or derivative is
    classified in Class 525, subclasses 165+.

    (10)    Note. In order for a patent to be proper for Class 525, subclasses
    50+, there must be a Desire or Intent to produce a composition of two or
    more solid polymers; thus heating a solid polymer by admixing with a heated
    fluidized bed of another solid polymer would not be classified herein since
    there is no Intent or Desire to produce a composition; see Class 528,
    subclasses 480+, for this concept.  Similarly the other mixing for forming
    or reacting processes of Class 525, subclasses 50+, require an ultimate
    Desire or Intent to produce a mixture or reaction product.  See Classes 526
    to 528 for processes of in the presence of a previously formed solid
    polymer as a specified material, where there is no intent to form a
    composition or reaction product therewith.



    SEARCH CLASS:

    528,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 480+ for removing
    contaminants or undesirable materials from a solid polymer and wherein the
    polymer is not chemically modified.


CLS 525/51
TXT Effecting a change in a process in response to a measurement or test:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein a process parameter is determined
    and some process parameter is altered in response to the determination.

    (1)     Note.  A test or measurement performed by a human being with a
    subsequent control operation is proper herein.

    (2)     Note.  Treating a material to a certain condition without a defined
    inanimate measurement, test, inspection, or control, e.g., temperature, pH,
    etc., is not proper subject matter for this subclass.


CLS 525/52
TXT Utilizing a tubular or loop reactor:
    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein a reaction is effected in a loop
    or tubular reactor.

    (1)     Note.  A loop reactor for purposes of this subclass is an apparatus
    wherein reactant material is circulated in a continuous path within a
    single or multicoiled or spiraled structure which has at least one inlet
    and outlet means and at least one reaction zone.

    (2)     Note.  A tubular reactor for purposes of this subclass is an
    apparatus wherein a reactant material flows in an essentially linear
    direction in a tube or series of interconnected tubes, which tube or tubes
    are of small diameter in relation to their length and wherein each tube has
    at least one inlet and outlet means and one or more reaction zones.


CLS 525/53
TXT Utilizing an apparatus with two or more physically distinct zones:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein a reaction is effected in at least
    two or more physically distinct zones (e.g., regions, stages, etc.), said
    zones being part of a single reactor which has a plurality of such
    physically distinct zones or such zones may be part of separate reactors
    which are interconnected at some point.

    (1)     Note.  For the most part the patents herein relate to advancement
    of materials from one zone to another so as to effect progressive degree of
    reaction and which are usually advanced until the degree of reaction is
    brought to the desired state.


CLS 525/54
TXT Removing and recycling material from one zone to another:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein a portion of material is removed
    from a zone wherein material is undergoing a reaction and the removed
    material either with something added to it, removed from it, or the removed
    material, per se, is added to a zone wherein a reaction is occurring.


CLS 525/54.1
TXT Containing chemically combined protein or biologically active polypeptide:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein a protein or biologically active
    polypeptide is chemically combined with the polymer system.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition of "protein or
    biologically active polypeptide".

    (2)     Note.  The proteinaceous material can be present as a chemical
    constituent of a SP or SICP, as a reactant with a SP, SICP, or SPFI system,
    or as an ethylenic agent (in the case of a protein modified to have
    ethylenic groups).


CLS 525/54.11
TXT Solid polymer treated by stepwise reaction with naturally occurring alpha
    or beta amino acid or a material which contains a residue of said amino
    acid, e.g., a functionally protected amino acid, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 54.1 wherein the biologically active
    polypeptide is generated by stepwise treatment of a preformed solid polymer
    with a naturally occurring alpha or beta amino acid or a material which
    contains a residue of said amino acid, or product of such a process.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, appropriate
    subclasses for making and using enzymes.


CLS 525/54.2
TXT Previously formed solid polymer chemically reacted with carbohydrate or
    derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein a carbohydrate or derivative is
    chemically reacted with a previously formed solid polymer (e.g., includes
    solid (SICP, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition of "carbohydrate or
    derivative".


CLS 525/54.21
TXT Cellulose or derivative as chemical reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 54.2 wherein cellulose or a derivative of
    cellulose (e.g., carboxy methyl cellulose, etc.) is chemically reacted with
    a previously formed solid polymer.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 524, subclass 35 for the definition of cellulose
    or derivative.


CLS 525/54.22
TXT Previously formed solid polymer is derived from N=C=X reactant or contains
    N=C=X group wherein X is chalcogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 54.21 wherein a N=C=X reactant is a precursor
    for the solid polymer or the solid polymer contains N=C=X groups, and
    wherein X is a chalcogen atom (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  So-called "Blocked" isocyanates are included herein since
    presumably free N=C=X is regenerated prior to reaction.


CLS 525/54.23
TXT Previously formed solid polymer is derived from ethylenically unsaturated
    reactants only:

    Subject matter under subclass 54.21 wherein only ethylenically unsaturated
    compounds are precursors for the solid polymer.


CLS 525/54.24
TXT Starch, starch flour or meal, or derivative as chemical reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 54.2 wherein the carbohydrate material is a
    starch, a starch containing flour or meal (i.e., farinaceous flour) or a
    derivative thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 524, subclass 47 for a definition of starch or
    derivative.


CLS 525/54.26
TXT Previously formed solid polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only:

    Subject matter under subclass 54.24 wherein the previously formed solid
    polymer is derived solely from ethylenically unsaturated reactants.


CLS 525/54.3
TXT Previously formed solid polymer containing chemically combined carbohydrate
    admixed with a chemical treating or ethylenic agent, SPFI, SICP, or solid
    polymer:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein a solid polymer having chemically
    bound carbohydrate (or derivative) is treated by admixing with any of:  (a)
    chemical treating agent, (b) ethylenic agent, (c) solid polymer, (d) SPFI,
    or (e) SICP.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of "carbohydrate or
    derivative".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    526,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 238.2+ for solid
    polymers prepared by polymerization of ethylenically unsaturated monomers
    having carbohydrate or derivative chemically bonded thereto.

    527,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 300+ for solid
    polymer prepared from carbohydrates or derivatives wherein at least one of
    the reactants is saturated.


CLS 525/54.31
TXT Carbohydrates containing polymer is derived from starch, or starch
    containing flour or meal:

    Subject matter under subclass 54.3 wherein the carbohydrate is starch,
    farinaceous flour or meal or a derivative thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 524, subclass 47 for the definition of a starch or
    derivative or farinaceous flour or meal.


CLS 525/54.32
TXT Carbohydrate containing polymer derived from acrylonitrile:

    Subject matter under subclass 54.31 wherein the carbohydrate containing
    polymer is derived from acrylonitrile, e.g., a polymer of acrylonitrile
    modified starch, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54.31,  for a polymer derived from methacrylonitrile.


CLS 525/54.4
TXT Containing chemically combined natural resin or derivative thereof other
    than tall oil:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein there is a chemically combined
    natural resin or natural resin derivative.

    (1)     Note.  Natural resins include such materials as have customarily
    been employed as such in the paint, lacquer, varnish, adhesive, and ink
    trades. Examples of these materials are: shellac, rosin, abietic acid, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Rosin derivatives are materials which retain the abietyl
    ring structure even though hydrogenated or substituted, e.g., zinc
    resinate, abietyl alcohol, disproportionated rosin, colophony,
    dehydroabietic acid, etc.

    (3)     Note.  The natural resin or derivative can be present as a chemical
    constituent of a SP or SICP, a reactant with a SP, SICP, or SPFI system, or
    as an ethylenic agent.

    (4)     Note.  Tall oil, per se, is not treated herein as a natural resin
    unless a substantial rosin content is specifically stated; otherwise, tall
    oil as a reactant is treated as an unsaturated fatty acid in the subclasses
    herein below.


CLS 525/54.41
TXT Shellac:

    Subject matter under subclass 54.4 wherein the natural resin is shellac or
    a derivative thereof.


CLS 525/54.42
TXT Previously formed solid polymer chemically reacted with natural resin or
    derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 54.4 wherein a natural resin or a derivative
    or a natural resin is chemically reacted with a previously formed solid
    polymer.

    (1)     Note.  The previously formed solid polymer can itself contain
    chemically combined natural resin or derivative.


CLS 525/54.44
TXT At least one previously formed solid polymer derived from ethylenic
    monomers only:

    Subject matter under subclass 54.42 wherein at least one solid polymer is
    present which is derived from ethylenic monomers only.


CLS 525/54.45
TXT Previously formed polymer containing chemically combined natural resin or
    derivative admixed with an ethylenic agent or a chemical treating agent
    other than SICP or SPFI:

    Subject matter under subclass 54.4 wherein a solid polymer derived from a
    natural resin or derivative is subsequently admixed with a chemical
    treating agent or an ethylenic agent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54.4,   for a chemical treating agent which is a SICP or SPFI.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    526,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 238.3 for solid
    polymers derived from ethylenic monomer having a natural resin chemically
    bonded thereto.

    527,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 600+ for solid
    polymers derived from natural resin or derivative.


CLS 525/54.5
TXT Chemically combined coal, bituminous material, extract or derivative
    thereof; oil shale; or fatty still residue:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein the resin system has chemically
    bound thereto coal, bituminous material or extract thereof or a fatty still
    residue.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 524, subclasses 59 and 705 for a definition of
    these materials.

    (2)     Note.  Oil shale derivative similarly treated would be placed
    herein.

    (3)     Note.  The material proper for this subclass, e.g., coal, etc., can
    be present as:  a chemical constituent of a SP or SICP, a reactant with a
    SP, SICP or SPFI system, or as an ethylenic agent (in the case of coal,
    etc., modified to have ethylenic groups).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    526,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 290 for solid
    synthetic polymer derived from ethylenically unsaturated coal, bituminous
    material, extract or derivative thereof; or from unsaturated fatty still
    residue where all monomers present are ethylenically unsaturated.

    527,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 500 for solid
    synthetic polymer derived from coal or bituminous material, extract thereof
    or fatty still residue.


CLS 525/55
TXT At least one solid polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 which involves mixing of a solid polymer
    derived from ethylenic reactants only with (a) a solid polymer, (b)
    specified polymer-forming ingredients or a specified intermediate
    condensation product, or (c) a chemical treating agent or an ethylenic
    reactant; or processes of reacting or the product formed by any of the
    mixing operations or any of the reacting processes.


CLS 525/56
TXT Polyvinyl alcohol:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 involves polymeric products containing
    vinyl alcohol units, processes of preparing wherein the final desired
    product is a polymer containing vinyl alcohol units; composition of a
    polymer containing vinyl alcohol units and a solid polymer, specified
    polymer-forming ingredients, a specified intermediate condensation product,
    chemically reactive material, or ethylenic reactant; or processes of
    preparing such a composition; composition of a precursor polymer and a
    reactive material which, under disclosed conditions, will prepare a vinyl
    alcohol polymer and processes of preparing such a composition.

    (1)     Note.  A vinyl alcohol-containing polymer requires at least three

            CH2-H groups

            in the polymeric chain.

    (2)     Note.  Vinyl alcohol polymers for the most part herein are prepared
    by the partial hydrolysis or saponification of polymers of vinyl esters,
    particularly homo- or interpolymeric-vinyl acetate. Any subsequent chemical
    treatment to polyvinyl alcohol will be assumed to have left unreacted
    alcohol groups. For this reason, polymers such as polyvinyl acetal,
    polyvinyl butyral, etc., will be found here.

    (3)     Note.  Claims to a polymer admixed with a chemically reactive
    material or the process of preparing such a composition are classified in
    this area as if the actual process has gone to completion. As such, these
    types of claims are classified in the appropriate indented process area,
    rather than on the basis of the final treated product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    526,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, and in particular, subclass
    202 for a process of polymerizing an ethylenic monomer in the presence of a
    vinyl alcohol polymer wherein there is no intent to react the vinyl alcohol
    polymer with the polymerizable monomer or to form a composition therewith.

    528,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 480+ for processes
    involving the treatment of a vinyl alcohol polymer-containing material,
    without destroying the integrity of the polymer.


CLS 525/57
TXT With solid polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only:

    Subject matter under subclass 56 wherein polyvinyl alcohol is mixed with at
    least one solid polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only, e.g.,
    polymethyl methacrylate, etc.


CLS 525/58
TXT With specified intermediate condensation product, specified polymer-forming
    ingredients, or polymer thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 56 wherein polyvinyl alcohol is mixed with a
    specified intermediate condensation product, specified polymer-forming
    ingredients, or polymers thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary or subclass 50 for a definition of the
    terms "specified intermediate condensation product" and "specified
    polymer-forming ingredients."


CLS 525/59
TXT With ethylenic reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 56 wherein poly-vinyl alcohol is mixed with
    an ethylenic reactant, e.g., acrylic acid, acrylamide, etc.


CLS 525/60
TXT Interpolymers:

    Subject matter under subclass 56 drawn to polymeric products only, wherein
    vinyl acetate has been copolymerized with at least one coreactant and the
    resultant copolymer subsequently hydrolyzed to

    produce (CH2-H) units.


CLS 525/61
TXT Chemical modification utilizing a chemical treating agent:

    Subject matter under subclass 56 drawn to processes of chemically modifying
    homopolymers and copolymers of vinyl alcohol using a chemical treating
    agent, e.g., treating polyvinyl alcohol with aldehydes to give polyacetate
    or with PC15 to substitute the hydroxyl group,with chlorine atoms, etc.


CLS 525/62
TXT Processes only of preparing polyvinyl alcohol:

    Subject matter under subclass 56 wherein a nonvinyl alcohol unit precursor
    polymer is modified so as to prepare a vinyl alcohol-containing polymer
    therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  For the most part the patents herein relate to subsequent
    aftertreatment of polymeric vinyl carboxylates.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for processes of chemically modifying a vinyl alcohol
    unit-containing polymer.


CLS 525/63
TXT Mixing of solid graft or graft-type copolymer with other solid  polymers
    wherein one of said solid polymers is not derived from ethylenic reactants
    only; mixing of said polymer mixture with a chemical treating agent; or
    mixing of graft or graft-type copolymer with a specified intermediate
    condensation product or specified polymer-forming ingredients; or processes
    of forming or reacting; or the resultant product or any of the above
    operation:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 which involves mixing of a solid graft or
    graft-type copolymer with other solid polymer(s) wherein the solid polymer,
    graft, or graft-type copolymer(s) is not derived exclusively from ethylenic
    reactants; or mixing of said polymeric mixture with a chemical treating
    agent; or mixing of graft or graft-type copolymer with a specified
    intermediate condensation product or with specified polymer-forming
    ingredients, or polymer thereof; or processes of forming or the resultant
    product of any of the above mixtures.

    (1)     Note.  A nonethylenically polymerized solid graft, solid graft-type
    or nongraft polymer is one which was obtained as a solid other than from
    ethylenic polymerization exclusively. This would include, for example, such
    polymers as ethylene-carbon monoxide copolymer, ethylene-ethylene oxide
    block copolymer, caprolactam-styrene graft copolymer and the typical poly
    condensation polymers, e.g., polyesters, polyamines and polyurethanes, etc.

    (2)     Note.  The product derived from the reaction of a solid polymer
    substrate from ethylenic reactants only and a nonethylenic reactant to form
    a graft or graft-type copolymer is not considered as being of the type
    derived from ethylenic reactants only. Similarly, the product obtained
    obtained from graft copolymerizing an ethylenic reactant onto a solid
    polymer not derived exclusively from ethylenic reactants is also not
    considered as being a graft or graft-type copolymer derived from ethylenic
    reactants only.

            For purposes of classification a polymer is classified as:



    A.      A graft copolymer when:

    1.      The structure is given, i.e., to a long solid polymer backbone
    (substrate)
    is attached a pendant (nonterminal) polymer or copolymer superstrate with
    at least three reactant units in length or,

    2.      the copolymer is so named as a graft providing that the disclosure
    is otherwise silent as to the structure or, if structure is likewise
    recited, it is consistent with that required in A.1 above or,

    3.      the structure can be ascertained from the following limiting
    process conditions:

    a.      The disclosure states there is a reaction between a solid
    polymerized unsaturated reactant and an unpolymerized unsaturated reactant
    in the presence of a catalyst or,

    b.      the disclosure does not state whether or not any reaction has
    occurred between the solid polymerized unsaturated reactant and the
    unpolymerized unsaturated reactant, but relates that a product is obtained
    which is inseparable by a variety of physical techniques such as,
    extraction, precipitation, ion exchange, etc.  In the absence of one or
    more or these requirements the reaction is considered to produce a
    polymeric blend.

    B.      A graft-type copolymer when:

    1.      The structure is given, i.e., to a long solid polymer backbone
    (substrate)
    possessing nonterminalactive sites or functional groups is attached
    (grafted) through a chemical reaction with these functional groups or sites
    an ethylenic reactant containing one or more functional groups or active
    sites.  The reaction product may or may not possess unsaturated pendant
    groups depending on the mode of chemical reaction.  The following examples
    will illustrate this point:

    2.      The structure can be ascertained when:

    a.      There is disclosed a reaction between the solid polymerized
    unsaturated reactant and the unpolymerized unsaturated reactant which
    reaction uses specific art-recognized terms, e.g., "esterfication,
    acylation, sulfonylation, cyanoethylection, addition to, reaction or
    condensation with, halogenation, nitration, sulfonation, alkylation,
    amination, etc."  An example of these reactions would be:

    b.      There is disclosed an interaction between two or more solid
    polymers through their respective nonterminal functional groups or through
    the use of an intermediate reactant or chemical agent, e.g., causing salt,
    ester, amide, urea formation.  Examples of these reactions would be:

    1.      Contacting polypropylene and polyethylene with benzoyl peroxide

    2.      Contacting polyvinylamine and polyallylamine with glyoxal

    3.      Contacting chloromethylated polystyrene with polyvinyla-mine

    4.      Contacting polyacrylic acid with polyvinylamine

            In the absence of one or more of these requirements the reaction is
    considered to produce a polymeric blend.

            See the Glossary or subclass 50 for the definition of the terms
    "specified intermediate condensation product" and "specified
    polymer-forming ingredients".


CLS 525/64
TXT Solid graft or graft-type copolymer derived from ethylenic reactants only:

    Subject matter under subclass 63 wherein the solid graft or graft-type
    copolymer was derived from a solid polymer derived from only ethylenically
    unsaturated reactants which was subsequently reacted with ethylenic
    reactants, e.g., styrene and acrylonitrile graft-copolymerized onto poly
    (butadiene-styrene), etc.

    (1)     Note.  The preparation of a graft copolymer from all or some of its
    constituents in the presence of a solid polymer derived from ethylenic
    reactants only would be classified elsewhere.  For example, the process of
    grafting styrene and acrylonitrile onto polybutadiene in the presence of
    polyethylene is classified in subclass 193 while the process of preparing
    graft copolymer from the constituent reactant noted above in the presence
    of polyethylene would be classified in subclasses 242+.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass provides for all graft or graft-type
    copolymers wherein a solid polymer from ethylenic reactants only is treated
    with polymer-forming ingredients in any sequence.  For instance, this
    subclass would provide for a graft or graft-type copolymer prepared by
    treating a solid polymer from ethylenic reactants only with ethylene glycol
    followed by reacting with maleic anhydride; or wherein the polymer is first
    reacted with maleic anhydride followed by reaction with ethylene glycol.
    This subclass also provides for graft or graft-type copolymers which are
    prepared by treating a solid polymer from ethylenic reactants only
    concurrently with ethylene glycol and maleic anhydride.


CLS 525/65
TXT With saturated 1,2-epoxy reactant containing more than one 1,2-epoxy group
    per mole or polymer derived therefrom; or with solid copolymer derived from
    at least one unsaturated 1,2-epoxy reactant wherein the epoxy reactant
    contains more than one 1,2-epoxy group per mole and at least one saturated
    reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 64 wherein, in addition to the solid graft or
    graft-type copolymer derived from ethylenic reactants only, there is also
    present (a) a saturated polyepoxide reactant or polymer thereof, or (b) a
    solid polymer derived from at least one saturated reactant and at least one
    unsaturated 1,2-epoxy reactant, e.g., a mixture of
    butadiene-styrene-acrylonitrile graft copolymer with trioxaneglycol
    diglycidyl ether copolymer, etc.

    (1)     Note.  A saturated polyepoxide is by definition a specified
    polymer-forming ingredient; and see the Glossary or subclass 50 for the
    definition of other terms noted as specified polymer-forming ingredients.


CLS 525/66
TXT With solid polymer derived from at least one nitrogen-containing reactant
    wherein at least one of the reactants forming the solid polymer is
    saturated; or with specified polymer-forming ingredients wherein at least
    one of the necessary ingredients contains a nitrogen atom or with a
    reaction product thereof; or with nitrogen-containing specified
    intermediate condensation product:

    Subject matter under subclass 64 wherein, in addition to the solid graft or
    graft-type copolymer derived from ethylenic reactants only, there is also
    present (a) a reactant or a solid copolymer derived from a
    nitrogen-containing reactant and wherein at least one of the reactants
    forming the solid copolymer is saturated, or (b) specified polymer-forming
    ingredients wherein at least one of the necessary polymer-forming
    ingredients contains a nitrogen atom and at least one of the necessary
    polymer-forming ingredients is saturated or a reaction product or
    condensate thereof, e.g., a mixture of butadiene-styrene-acrylonitrile
    graft copolymer admixed with nylon 6, etc.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 50 or the Glossary for the definition of the
    term "specified polymer-forming ingredients".


CLS 525/67
TXT With solid polymer derived from at least one


    halhal, -OO- or halO- reactant wherein at least one of the reactants
    forming the solid polymer is saturated; or with specified polymer-forming
    ingredients wherein at least one of the necessary ingredients is a

    halhal, -OO, or halO- containing reactant or reaction product thereof; or
    with a specified intermediate condensation product


    containing a hal or -OO- group: Subject matter under subclass 64 wherein,
    in addition to the solid graft or graft-type, copolymer derived from
    ethylenic reactants only, there is also present (a) a solid polymer

    derived from a saturated halhal, -OO-,

    or halO- reactant or a solid copolymer


    derived from a halhal, -OO-, or halO- containing reactant wherein at least
    one of the reactants forming the solid copolymer is saturated, or (b)
    specified polymer-forming ingredients wherein at least one of the necessary
    polymer-forming ingredients contains a

    halhal, -OO, or halO- group and at least one of the necessary
    polymer-forming ingredients is saturated or a reaction product thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 50 or the Glossary for the definition of the
    term "specified polymerforming ingredients".


CLS 525/68
TXT With solid polymer derived from at least one phenolic reactant wherein at
    least one of the reactants forming the solid polymer is saturated: or with
    specified polymer-forming ingredients wherein at least one of the necessary
    ingredients is a phenolic reactant or with a reaction product thereof; or
    with phenolic-containing specified intermediate condensation product:

    Subject matter under subclass 64 wherein, in addition to the solid graft or
    graft-type copolymer derived from ethylenic reactants only, there is also
    present (a) a solid polymer derived from a saturated phenolic reactant or a
    solid copolymer derived from a phenolic-containing reactant wherein at
    least one of the reactants forming the solid copolymer is saturated, or (b)
    specified polymer-forming ingredients wherein at least one of the necessary
    polymer-forming ingredients contains a phenolic group and at least one of
    the necessary polymer-forming ingredients is saturated or a reaction
    product thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 50 or the Glossary for the definition of the
    term "specified polymer-forming ingredients".

    (2)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition of the term "phenolic".


CLS 525/69
TXT Solid graft of graft-type copolymer contains backbone derived from
    ethylenic reactants only:

    Subject matter under subclass 63 wherein the graft copolymer substrate is
    derived from ethylenically unsaturated reactants only, e.g.,
    epsilon-caprolactone graft polymerized onto styrene-2-hydroxyethyl
    methacrylate copolymer, etc.


CLS 525/70
TXT Mixing of solid graft or graft-type copolymer derived from ethylenic
    reactants only with other solid polymer derived from ethylenic reactants
    only; or treating said mixture with chemical treating agent; or processes
    of forming or reacting; or the resultant product of any of the above
    operations:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 which involves the mixing of a solid
    graft-type copolymer derived from ethylenic reactants only with other solid
    polymers derived from ethylenic reactants only; or treating said polymer
    mixture with a chemical treating agent; or process of forming or reacting;
    or the resultant product of any of the above mixtures.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include those reactions which involve
    the preparation of a graft or graft-type copolymer in the presence of
    another solid ethylenic polymer.  For example, the product obtained from a
    mixture of polyvinyl chloride and butadiene, styrene, and acrylonitrile to
    afford the final product mixture of polyvinylchloride and polybutadiene
    grafted to polystyrene-acrylonitrile would be classified in subclass 313.
    Similarly, if the same product were obtained by aftertreating a mixture of
    polyvinyl chloride and polybutadiene with styrene and acrylonitrile, the
    product or process would be classified in subclass 193.

    (2)     Note.  See subclass 63 for a definition of the terms "graft" or
    "graft-type copolymer".

    (3)     Note.  This subclass provides for the mixing of two or more solid
    polymers at least one of which is a graft-type copolymer and both being
    derived from ethylenic reactants only.  This subclass does not exclude the
    aftertreatments of ethylenic polymers or graft or graft-type copolymers
    with nonethylenic materials.  However, classification in this area is based
    only on ethylenic materials, e.g., halogenated polybutadiene grafted with
    maleic anhydride. For purposes of classification in this area, only
    polybutadiene and maleic anhydride are to be considered in making the graft
    copolymer and not the halogenated polybutadiene.

    (4)     Note.  "Solid polymer" as used in this subclass is generic and
    includes a nongraft polymer as well as a graft or graft-type polymer all of
    which were produced only from ethylenic reactants.


CLS 525/71
TXT Contains two or more graft or graft-type copolymers or a graft or a
    graft-type copolymer and at least one block or block-type copolymer:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 wherein the mixture contains two or more
    graft or graft-type copolymers (or mixture thereof), a graft or graft-type
    copolymer, and at least one block or block-type copolymer.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 88 for the definition of a "block or block-type
    copolymer".


CLS 525/72
TXT Mixture contains solid polymer derived from reactants containing an atom
    other than C, H, O, N, or chlorine:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 wherein a solid polymer is derived from or
    has been reacted with an ethylenic reactant containing an element other
    than carbon, hydrogen, oxygen, nitrogen, and chlorine.


CLS 525/73
TXT Mixture contains solid polymer derived from reactant containing nitrogen
    heterocycle: Subject matter under subclass 70 wherein a solid polymer is
    derived from or has been reacted with an ethylenic reactant containing a
    nitrogen heterocycle, e.g., 2-methyl-5-vinylpyridine, n-vinyl pyrrolidone,
    etc.


CLS 525/74
TXT Mixture contains solid polymer derived from reactant containing oxygen
    heterocycle: Subject matter under subclass 70 wherein a solid polymer is
    derived from or has been reacted with an ethylenic reactant containing an
    oxygen heterocycle, e.g., maleic anhydride, glycidyl acrylate, etc.


CLS 525/75
TXT Mixture contains solid polymer derived from reactant containing a fused- or
    bridged-ring system or from cycloaliphatic reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 wherein a solid polymer is derived from or
    has been reacted with an ethylenic reactant which contains a fused- or
    bridged-ring system, or a cycloaliphatic system, e.g., dicyclopentadiene,
    etc.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 526, subclass 280 for a definition of the term
    "fused- or bridged-ring system".


CLS 525/76
TXT Mixture contains solid polymer derived from chlorine-containing reactant
    other than from vinyl(idene) chloride:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 wherein a solid polymer is derived from or
    has been reacted with an ethylenic reactant containing halogen other than
    vinyl chloride or vinylidene chloride, e.g., 1-chloroacrylonitrile, etc.


CLS 525/77
TXT Mixture contains solid polymer derived from reactant containing nitrogen
    other than from (meth)acrylonitrile:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 wherein a solid polymer is derived from or
    has been reacted with an ethylenic reactant containing nitrogen other than
    from (meth)acrylonitrile, e.g., acrylamide, etc.


CLS 525/78
TXT Mixture contains solid polymer derived from reactant containing carboxylic
    acid group:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 wherein a solid polymer is derived from or
    has been reacted with an ethylenic reactant containing a carboxylic acid
    group, e.g., acrylic acid, etc.


CLS 525/79
TXT Mixture contains solid polymer derived from reactant containing ether or
    hydroxyl group:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 wherein a solid polymer is derived from or
    has been reacted with an ethylenic reactant containing an ether or hydroxyl
    group, e.g., vinyl ether, etc.


CLS 525/80
TXT Mixture contains solid polymer derived from reactant containing carboxylic
    acid ester group:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 wherein a solid polymer is derived from or
    has been reacted with an ethylenic reactant containing a carboxylic acid
    ester group, e.g., methyl methacrylate, vinyl acetate, etc.


CLS 525/81
TXT Reactant contains at least two ester groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the ethylenic reactant contains
    two ester groups, e.g., diallyl phthalate, etc.


CLS 525/82
TXT Ester derived from a polyol:

    Subject matter under subclass 81 wherein the ethylenic carboxylic acid
    reactant ester is derived from a polyol, e.g., ethylene glycol diacrylate,
    etc.


CLS 525/83
TXT Substrate polymer derived from hydrocarbon containing plural unsaturation:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the graft or graft-type
    copolymer's substrate is derived from a hydrocarbon reactant containing
    plural unsaturation, e.g., butadiene, etc.


CLS 525/84
TXT Polymer substrate derived from hydrocarbon reactants only:

    Subject matter under subclass 83 wherein the graft or graft-type
    copolymer's substrate is derived only from ethylenic hydrocarbon reactants
    one of which must be plural unsaturated e.g., butadiene, etc.


CLS 525/85
TXT Polymer substrate derived from an unsaturated carboxylic acid ester:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the graft or graft-type
    copolymer's substrate is a polymer derived from an ethylenically
    unsaturated carboxylic acid ester, e.g., methyl methacrylate, etc.


CLS 525/86
TXT Mixture contains solid polymer derived from nonaromatic reactant containing
    plural ethylenically unsaturated groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 wherein a solid polymer is derived from or
    has been reacted with a plural unsaturated reactant which does not contain
    an aryl group, e.g., butadiene, etc.


CLS 525/87
TXT Solid polymer other than graft or graft-type derived from nonaromatic
    plural ethylenically unsaturated reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein the mixture contains, in addition
    to the graft copolymer or graft-type copolymer, a nongrafted solid polymer
    derived from a plural ethylenically unsaturated reactant which is devoid of
    any aryl group, e.g., butadiene, etc.


CLS 525/88
TXT Mixing of solid block or block-type copolymer with other solid polymer;
    mixing of said polymer mixture with a chemical treating agent; mixing of a
    block or block-type copolymer with specified intermediate condensation
    product or with specified polymer-forming ingredients; or processes of
    forming or reacting; or the resultant product of any of the above
    operations:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 which involves the mixing of a solid block
    or block-type copolymers with other solid polymer(s); mixing of said
    polymer mixture with a chemical treating agent; mixing of block or
    block-type copolymer with a specified intermediate condensation product or
    with specified polymerforming ingredients or their polymers; or processes
    of mixing or forming; or the resultant product of any of the above mixtures.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of classification a polymer is classified as:



    A.      A block copolymer when:

    1.      The structure is given, i.e., to a long polymer backbone is attached
    or
    coupled to one or both of its terminal ends one or more chemically
    dissimilar polymers at least three reactant units in length or,

    2.      the copolymer is named as a block providing that the disclosure is
    otherwise silent as to its structure or, if the structure is likewise
    given, it is consistent with that described above or,

    3.      the structure can be ascertained from the following limiting
    process conditions:

    (a)     Treating a nonterminated solid polymer, that is, one which is
    terminally active or "living", with an ethylenic reactant with subsequent
    polymerization to form additional blocks. The process may be continued to
    produce higher order block copolymers.  For example, treating dilithiated
    polystyrene with butadiene to yield an ABA block copolymer.

    (b)     Two or more chemically dissimilar nonidentical solid polymer chain
    ends are coupled directly or through the use of a chemical agent.  For
    example, the coupling of hydroxy-terminated solid polybutadiene with
    hydroxy terminated polyethylene glycol terephthalate using phosgene.

    B.      A block-type copolymer when:

    1.      The structure is given, i.e., to a long solid polymer backbone
    possessing
    terminally active sites, e.g., contains functional groups or is a "living
    polymer", etc., is attached or coupled through chemical reaction with those
    functional groups or sites an ethylenic reactant containing one or more
    functional groups or sites, for example, contacting hydroxy terminated
    polybutadiene with allyl isocyanate or,

    2.      two or more identical solid polymer chain ends are coupled directly
    or
    through the use of a chemical agent.  For purposes here, identical means
    those polymer segments which contain the same backbone but differ, e.g., in
    stereoregularity, isotacticity syndiotacticity, atacticity, optical
    activity, or degree of polymerization.  Thus, coupling lithium terminated
    polystyrene segments with molecular weights of 25,000 and 100,000
    respectively with stannic chloride is proper for this subclass.

            Failure to meet one or more of these requirements, the reaction is
    considered to produce a polymeric blend.  For example, contacting lithium
    terminated polystyrene with ethylene oxide followed by blending with
    polyacrylic acid places the product blend in subclass 221.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary or subclass 50 for the definitions of the
    terms "specified intermediate condensation product" and "specified
    polymer-forming ingredients".  Patents which describe the aftertreatment of
    solid polymer from ethylenic reactants only with a nonethylenic agent are
    classified according to the reactants first leading to formation of the
    solid polymer.  However, if the aftertreating agent is an ethylenic
    reactant, it is given equal weight with these reactants used in making the
    solid polymer. Additionally, in subclasses 93 to 99, solid polymer is
    generic and is meant to include an ethylenic block, block-type, or nonblock
    polymer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191+,   for a product wherein the same solid polymer from ethylenic
    reactants only is coupled utilizing a coupling agent and subsequently
    blended with a different solid polymer derived from ethylenic reactants
    only.


CLS 525/89
TXT Mixture contains two or more solid block or block-type copolymers:

    Subject matter under subclass 88 wherein the mixture contains at least two
    solid block copolymers or block-type copolymers.

    (1)     Note.  There must be at least one solid polymer derived from
    ethylenically unsaturated reactants only.  However, the required solid
    polymer from ethylenic reactants only need not be in block- or block-type
    form.  An example of the mixture required for this subclass could consist
    of solid polyethylene and ethylene oxidebutyrolactone block copolymer.
    Unless stated to the contrary, in the absence of any disclosure, the
    polymer block shall be assumed to be a solid when derived from ethylenic
    reactants only and a liquid when derived other than only from ethylenic
    reactants.


CLS 525/90
TXT Mixture contains solid block copolymer wherein at least one block is
    derived from ethylenic reactants only and at least one block is derived
    from at least one saturated reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 88 wherein the block copolymer contains at
    least one block ethylenic reactants only and at least one block from at
    least one saturated reactant, e.g., dimethylsiloxane-styrene block
    copolymer, etc.


CLS 525/91
TXT Block derived from at least one saturated reactant containing a heterocycle:

    Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein block polymer from at least one
    saturated reactant is derived from a heterocyclic reactant, e.g.,
    butadiene-butyolactone block copolymer, etc.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "heterocyclic"
    reactant.


CLS 525/92
TXT Mixture contains solid polymer derived from at least one saturated
    reactant, specified intermediate condensation product, or specified
    polymer-forming ingredients: Subject matter under subclass 88 wherein the
    mixture contains a solid polymer from ethylenic reactants only, specified
    intermediate condensation product, specified polymer-forming ingredients or
    polymers thereof, e.g., polycarbonate from bisphenol A and phosgene, etc.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary or subclass 50 for the definition of the
    terms "specified intermediate condensation product" or "specified
    polymer-forming ingredients".


CLS 525/93
TXT Mixture contains solid polymer derived from reactant containing chalcogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 88 wherein the solid polymer is derived from
    or has been reacted with an ethylenic reactant containing a chalcogen atom
    (O, S, Sc, and Te), e.g., acrylic acid, etc.


CLS 525/94
TXT Solid block or block-type copolymer derived from reactant containing
    carboxylic acid ester group:

    Subject matter under subclass 93 wherein the solid block or block-type
    copolymer contains a polymer block derived from a reactant containing a
    carboxylic acid ester group, e.g., methyl acrylate, etc.


CLS 525/95
TXT Mixture contains solid block or block-type copolymer derived from
    ethylenically unsaturated hydrocarbon reactants only at least one of which
    contains at least four carbon atoms:

    Subject matter under subclass 88 wherein the solid block or block-type
    copolymer is derived from ethylenic hydrocarbon reactants only and at least
    one of the hydrocarbon reactants contains at least four carbon atoms, e.g.,
    a mixture of polyethylene with block (polyethylene-polybutene-1), etc.


CLS 525/96
TXT With solid polymer derived from reactant containing an atom other than C or
    H: Subject matter under subclass 95 wherein, in addition to the solid block
    or block-type copolymer, there is at least one solid polymer derived from a
    reactant containing elements other than carbon and hydrogen, e.g., a
    mixture of poly(styrene-acrylonitrile) with block
    (polybutadiene-polystyrene), etc.


CLS 525/97
TXT Mixture contains solid polymer derived from reactant containing a fused- or
    bridged-ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 95 wherein the mixture contains a solid
    polymer derived from a reactant which contains a fused- or bridged-ring
    system, e.g., a mixture of block (polyethylene-polypropylene) with
    poly(butadiene-ethylidene-norbornene), etc.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition of the term "fused- or
    bridged-ring system".


CLS 525/98
TXT Solid block or block-type copolymer derived reactant containing plural
    unsaturation: Subject matter under subclass 95 wherein the block or
    block-type copolymer is derived from a plural ethylenically unsaturated
    reactant, e.g., a mixture of polystyrene with block
    (polybutadiene-polystyrene), etc.


CLS 525/99
TXT With solid polymer derived from reactant containing plural unsaturation:

    Subject matter under subclass 98 wherein, in addition to the solid block or
    block-type copolymer, there is present a solid polymer derived from a
    plural ethylenically unsaturated reactant, e.g., block
    (polybutadiene-polystyrene) with poly(butadiene-butene-1), etc.


CLS 525/100
TXT With saturated Si-C or Si-H reactant or polymer thereof; or with solid
    copolymer derived from at least one Si-C or Si-H reactant wherein at least
    one of the reactants forming the solid copolymer is saturated; or with
    specified polymer-forming ingredients wherein at least one of the necessary
    ingredients contains a Si-C or Si-H bond or with a reaction product
    thereof; or with a specified intermediate condensation product containing a
    Si-H or Si-C bond:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein, in addition to the solid polymer
    derived from ethylenic reactants only, there is additionally present (a) a
    saturated reactant containing a Si-C or Si-H bond or a polymer thereof, or
    (b) a solid copolymer derived from a Si-C or Si-H-containing reactant
    wherein at least one of the reactants forming the solid copolymer is
    saturated, or (c) specified polymer-forming ingredients wherein at least
    one of the necessary polymer-forming ingredients contains an Si-C or Si-H
    bond and at least one of the necessary polymer forming ingredients is
    saturated or a reaction product thereof, or (d) a specified intermediate
    condensation product containing an Si-C or Si-H bond.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the terms "specified
    intermediate condensation product" and "specified polymer-forming
    ingredients".


CLS 525/101
TXT Contacting with nonsilicon-containing specified intermediate condensation
    product, nonsilicon-containing specified polymer-forming ingredient, or
    polymer thereof; or with two or more solid polymers:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the solid polymer from ethylenic
    reactants only is contacted with a nonsilicon specified intermediate
    condensation product or nonsilicon polymer-forming ingredients or their
    polymers thereof; or is contacted with two or more solid polymers.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary or subclass 50 for a definition of the
    terms "specified intermediate condensation product" or "specified
    polymer-forming ingredients".


CLS 525/102
TXT Si-H or Si-C reactant contains an atom other than C, H, O, or Si bonded to
    a carbon atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the Si-H or Si-C bond-containing
    reactant or polymer thereof contains an atom other than C, H, or O bonded
    to carbon e.g., 3,3,3-trifluoromethyl propyl siloxane, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Elements that are other than C, H, or O and are incorporated
    into the polymer by non Si-H a Si-C containing reactants are not considered
    for this subclass.  The elements required must be part of a Si-H or Si-C
    reactant.


CLS 525/103
TXT Solid polymer from ethylenic reactants only is derived from heterocyclic
    reactant: Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the solid polymer from
    ethylenic reactants only is derived from or has been reacted with an
    ethylenically unsaturated heterocyclic reactant, e.g., N-Vinyl pyrrolidine,
    etc.


CLS 525/104
TXT Solid polymer from ethylenic reactants only is derived from reactant
    containing halogen atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the solid polymer from ethylenic
    reactants only is derived from or has been reacted with an ethylenic
    reactant containing a halogen atom, e.g., tetrafluoroethy-lene, etc.


CLS 525/105
TXT Solid polymer from ethylenic reactants only is derived from plural
    unsaturated hydrocarbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the solid polymer from ethylenic
    reactants only is derived from or has been reacted with an ethylenic
    reactant which is a plural unsaturated hydrocarbon.


CLS 525/106
TXT Solid polymer from ethylenic reactants only is derived from unsaturated
    hydrocarbon: Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the solid polymer
    from ethylenic reactants only is derived from or has been reacted with an
    ethylenic hydrocarbon, e.g., styrene, etc.


CLS 525/107
TXT With saturated 1, 2-epoxy reactant containing more than one 1, 2-epoxy
    group per mole or polymer derived therefrom; or with solid copolymer
    derived from at least one saturated reactant and at least one unsaturated
    1, 2-epoxy reactant wherein the epoxy reactant contains more than one 1,
    2-epoxy group per mole:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein, in addition to the solid polymer
    derived from ethylenic reactants only, there is additionally present (a) a
    reactant containing more than 1, 2-epoxy group or polymer thereof, or (b) a
    solid copolymer derived from at least one saturated reactant and an
    unsaturated reactant containing more than one 1, 2-epoxy groups per mole

    (1)     Note.  The 1, 2-epoxy reactant may be an epoxidized solid polymer.


CLS 525/108
TXT Contacting two or more solid polymers derived from ethylenic reactants only
    with a poly 1, 2-epoxy-containing reactant; or contacting a solid polymer
    derived from ethylenic reactants only with a poly 1, 2-epoxy-containing
    reactant and subsequently contacting with an additional polymer derived
    from ethylenic reactants only:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein two or more solid polymers
    derived from ethylenic reactants only are contacted with a reactant
    containing more than one 1, 2-epoxy group per mole, or polymer containing
    more than one epoxy group per mole; or contacting a solid polymer derived
    from ethylenic reactants only with said 1, 2-epoxy compound and
    subsequently contacting with an additional solid polymer derived from
    ethylenic reactants only.


CLS 525/109
TXT With phenolic reactant or polymer thereof and is free of 1, 2-epoxy groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein there is an additional reactant
    present which is a phenolic material or polymer therefor and which material
    or polymer is free of any 1, 2-epoxy group, e.g., polyvinyl chloride mixed
    with a phenol-formaldehyde resin and the diglycidyl ether of bis-phenol A,
    etc.


CLS 525/110
TXT With reactant which is an aldehyde, aldehyde derivative, or polymer
    thereof, and which is free of an 1, 2-expoxy group (included herein are
    alkylated methylol groups):

    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein there is an additional reactant
    present which is an aldehyde or aldehyde derivative, or polymer thereof,
    and which reactant is free of any 1, 2-expoxy groups.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "aldehyde
    derivative".


CLS 525/111
TXT With reactant which is free of an 1, 2-expoxy group and which contains a
    -N=C=X group or polymer thereof (X is chalcogen); or with a polyol and a
    polycarboxylic acid or reaction product thereof which is free of an 1,
    2-epoxy groups:Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein there is an
    additional reactant present which is free of any 1, 2-epoxy group and which
    contains more than one -N=C=X (X is chalcogen) group or polymer thereof; or
    with a polyol and a polycarboxylic acid or derivative or with a reaction
    product thereof and which reactants or polymer are free of any 1, 2-epoxy
    groups, e.g., polyurethanes, polyesters, etc.


CLS 525/111.5
TXT With a reactant which is a fatty acid glycerol ester, a fatty acid or salt
    derived from a naturally occurring glyceride, tall oil, or a fatty acid
    derived from tall oil:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein there is, in addition, at least
    one reactant which is a fatty acid glycerol ester, or a fatty acid or salt
    thereof derived from a naturally occurring glyceride, tall oil, or a fatty
    acid derived from tall oil.

    (1)     Note.  The contacting of the polymer with the fatty acid material
    can be prior, concurrent, or subsequent to contacting with the poly 1,
    2-epoxide material.

    (2)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "fatty acid"
    and the other materials proper for this subclass.


CLS 525/112
TXT Contacting polymer from ethylenic reactants only with ethylenic reactant
    wherein said contacting is either concurrent with or subsequent to the
    contacting with the saturated poly 1, 2-epoxy reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein a solid polymer from ethylenic
    reactants only is contacted with an ethylenic reactant and said contacting
    is either concurrent with or subsequent to the contacting of the solid
    polymer from ethylenic reactants only with a saturated reactant containing
    more than one 1, 2-epoxy group per mole.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107+,   for contacting of a solid polymer from ethylenic reactants only
    with an ethylenic reactant only followed by contacting with a reactant
    containing more than 1, 2-epoxy group per mole.


CLS 525/113
TXT With nitrogen-containing reactant, or wherein the poly 1, 2-epoxy reactant
    contains a nitrogen atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein there is, in addition, a
    nitrogen- containing reactant which can be added at any time to the solid
    polymer from ethylenic reactants only; or wherein the reactant which
    contains more than one 1, 2- epoxy group per mole contains nitrogen, e.g.,
    a mixture of poly (styrene-acrylic acid), poly (epichlorohydrin-bisphenol
    A) and ethylene diamine.


CLS 525/114
TXT With additional heterocyclic reactant free of 1, 2-epoxy group:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein there is, in addition, a non-1,
    2-epoxy heterocyclic reactant which an be added at any time to the solid
    polymer from ethylenic reactants only, e.g., phthalic anhydride, etc.


CLS 525/115
TXT Poly 1, 2-epoxy reactant contains an atom other than C, H, or O:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein the reactant which contains more
    than one 1, 2-epoxy group per mole contains an element other than C, H, or
    O.


CLS 525/116
TXT Polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only derived from reactant
    containing an atom other than C, H, N, O, or halogen: Subject matter under
    subclass 107 wherein has been derived solid polymer from ethylenic
    reactants only or reacted with an ethylenic reactant which contains an
    element other than C, H, O, N, or halogen.


CLS 525/117
TXT Polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only derived from heterocyclic
    reactant: Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein the solid ethylenic
    polymer is derived from or has been reacted with an ethylenic reactant
    containing a heterocyclic ring.


CLS 525/118
TXT Polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only derived from reactant
    containing an alcohol or ether group (includes phenols): Subject matter
    under subclass 107 wherein the solid ethylenic polymer is derived from or
    has been reacted with an ethylenic reactant containing a hydroxyl group
    (includes aryl type).


CLS 525/119
TXT Polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only derived from reactant
    containing a -COOH group:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein solid polymer from ethylenic
    reactants only is derived from or has been reacted with an ethylenic
    reactant containing a carboxylic acid group.


CLS 525/120
TXT Polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only derived from nonaromatic
    monoolefin: Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein the mixture contains
    a solid polymerized ethylenic reactant which is a nonaromatic monoolefin,
    e.g., ethylene, propylene, or butene-1.


CLS 525/121
TXT Polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only derived from reactant
    containing a halogen atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein the solid polymer has been
    derived from or has been reacted with an ethylenic reactant containing a
    halogen atom.


CLS 525/122
TXT Polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only derived from unsaturated
    hydrocarbon: Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein the solid polymer
    has been derived from or has been reacted with an ethylenic hydrocarbon.


CLS 525/123
TXT With saturated -N=C=X (X is chalcogen) reactant or polymer thereof; or with
    solid copolymer derived from at least one -N=C=X reactant wherein at least
    one of the reactants forming the solid copolymer is saturated; or with
    specified polymer-forming ingredients wherein at least one of the necessary
    ingredients contains a -N=C=X group or with a reaction product thereof; or
    with specified intermediate condensation product containing a -N=C=X group:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein, in addition to the solid polymer
    derived from ethylenic reactants only, there is additionally present (a) a
    saturated -N=C=X (X is chalcogen) reactant or a polymer thereof, or (b) a
    solid copolymer derived from a -N=C=X -containing reactant wherein at least
    one of the reactants forming the solid copolymer is saturated, or (c)
    specified polymer-forming ingredients wherein at least one of the necessary
    ingredients contains a -N=C=X group and at least one of the necessary
    polymer-forming ingredients is saturated or a reaction product or
    condensate thereof, or (d) a specified intermediate condensation product
    which contains a -N=C=X group.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the terms "specified
    polymer-forming ingredients" and "specified intermediate condensation
    product".

    (2)     Note.  Included here under isocyanates are blocked isocyantes.
    See, in particular, under subclass 124.


CLS 525/124
TXT Blocked isocyanate reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 123 wherein the -N=C=X containing reactant is
    blocked.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 528, subclass 45, for a definition of the term
    "blocked".


CLS 525/125
TXT Contacting two or more solid polymers derived from ethylenic reactants only
    with a -N=C=X Reactant or polymer thereof; or contacting a polymer derived
    from an ethylenic reactant only with a -N=C=X reactant or polymer thereof
    and subsequently adding thereto a solid polymer derived only from ethylenic
    reactants:

    Subject matter under subclass 123 wherein two or more solid polymers
    derived from ethylenic reactants only are contacted with a
    -N=C=X-containing reactant or polymer derived therefrom; or contacting a
    solid polymer derived from ethylenic reactant only with a -N=C=X-containing
    reactant or polymers therefrom and subsequently contacting with an
    additional solid polymer from ethylenic reactants only.


CLS 525/126
TXT Contacting solid polymer from ethylenic reactants only with ethylenic
    reactant wherein said contacting is either concurrent with or subsequent to
    contacting of said solid polymer with the -N=C=X reactant or polymer
    thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 123 wherein a solid polymer from ethylenic
    reactants only is contacted with an ethylenic which is devoid of any -N=C=X
    group and wherein said contacting is either concurrent with or subsequent
    to the contacting of the solid polymer with the -N=C=X containing reactant;
    or wherein the solid polymerized ethylenic reactant is contacted
    simultaneously with an unsaturated-N=C=X-containing reactant and with a
    saturated coreactant and wherein the-N=C=X reactant and the saturated
    coreactant are necessary ingredients of a specified polymer-forming
    ingredient system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123+,   for contacting a polymer from ethylenic reactant only followed by
    contact with a -N=C=X reactant.


CLS 525/127
TXT Contacting with a -N=C=X containing reactant which has been previously with
    an organic compound containing a hydroxyl,

    amine, or O- group:

    Subject matter under subclass 123 wherein the solid polymer from ethylenic
    reactants only is contacted with a -N=C=X-containing reactant which -N=C=X
    reactant has been previously reacted with an organic reactant containing a

    hydroxyl, amine or O- group (X is chalcogen).

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "hydroxyl and
    amine" group.


CLS 525/128
TXT  -N=C=X reactant has been previously reacted with an organic amine:

    Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein the -N=C=X-containing reactant
    has been previously reacted with an organic amine.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of an "organic amine".


CLS 525/129
TXT Solid polymer from ethylenic reactants only derived from halogen-containing
    reactant: Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein the solid polymer has
    been derived from or reacted with an ethylenic reactant containing a
    halogen atom.


CLS 525/130
TXT Solid polymer from ethylenic reactants only derived from hydrocarbon
    reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein the solid polymer has been
    derived from or reacted with an ethylenic hydrocarbon.


CLS 525/131
TXT Contacting with -N=C=X-containing reactant and with additional organic
    reactant containing a hydroxyl or amine group: Subject matter under
    subclass 123 wherein the solid polymer from ethylenic reactants only is
    contacted both with a N=C=X-containing reactant and a OH or organic
    amine-containing reactant.

    (1)     Note.  The contacting with the two necessary reactants can be
    concurrent or in any other manner.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123,    for a process involving contacting a solid polymer from ethylenic
    reactants only with a solid polymer which is the reaction product of a
    -N=C-X-containing reactant and a

            OH or -NH-containing reactant.


CLS 525/132
TXT With saturated phenolic reactant or polymer thereof; or with solid
    copolymer derived from at least one phenolic reactant wherein at least one
    of the reactants forming the solid copolymer is saturated; or with
    specified polymer-forming ingredients wherein at least one of the necessary
    ingredients is a phenolic reactant or with a reaction product thereof; or
    with a specified intermediate condensation product containing a phenolic
    group:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein, in addition to the solid polymer
    derived from ethylenic reactants only, there is additionally present (a) a
    saturated phenolic reactant or a polymer thereof, or (b) a solid copolymer
    derived from a phenolic-containing reactant wherein at least one of the
    reactants forming the solid copolymer is saturated, or (c) specified
    polymer-forming ingredients wherein at least one of the necessary
    ingredients contains a phenolic group and at least one of the necessary
    ingredients is saturated or a reaction product or condensate thereof, or
    (d) a specified intermediate condensation product containing a phenolic
    group.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 528, subclass 86 for a definition of the term
    "phenolic reactant".

    (2)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the terms "specified
    polymer-forming ingredients" and "specified intermediate condensation
    product".


CLS 525/133
TXT Contacting two or more solid polymers with a phenolic reactant; or
    contacting a solid polymer with a phenolic reactant and subsequently
    contacting the treated polymer with an additional solid polymer:

    Subject matter under subclass 132 wherein either a solid ethylenically
    polymerized polymer is (a) contacted with one other solid polymer and a
    phenolic reactant, or (b) is contacted first with a phenolic reactant and
    subsequently with one other solid polymer.

    (1)     Note.  The other solid polymer may be one derived other than only
    from ethylenic reactants, e.g., polyester, polyamide, etc.


CLS 525/133.5
TXT With a reactant which is a fatty acid glycerol ester, a fatty acid or salt
    derived from a naturally occurring glyceride, tall oil, or a fatty acid
    derived from tall oil:

    Subject matter under subclass 132 wherein there is, in addition, at least
    one reactant which is a fatty acid glycerol ester, or a fatty acid or salt
    thereof derived from a naturally occurring glyceride, tall oil, or a fatty
    acid derived from tall oil.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of "fatty acid" and the
    materials proper for this subclass.


CLS 525/134
TXT Contacting additionally with aldehyde or aldehyde-type reactant or polymer
    therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 132 wherein the solid polymer from ethylenic
    reactants only is contacted, in addition, with an aldehyde or aldehyde-type
    reactant or polymer thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term
    "aldehyde-type".


CLS 525/135
TXT At least two distinct phenols, phenol ethers, inorganic phenolates, or
    mixtures thereof prior to reaction with aldehyde or aldehyde-type reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 132 wherein the solid polymer from ethylenic
    reactants only is contacted with an aldehyde or aldehyde-type reactant or
    polymer thereof.


CLS 525/136
TXT Phenolic reactant prior to contact with aldehyde or aldehyde-type reactant
    contains an atom other than C, H, or O:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 wherein there is present prior to
    contacting with the aldehyde or aldehyde-type a phenolic reactant
    containing an element other than C, H, or O, e.g., 2,2'-methylenebis (4
    -chloro-6-methylolphenol),


CLS 525/137
TXT Phenolic reactant prior to contact with aldehyde or aldehyde-type reactant
    contains at least two aryl rings each of which contains phenolic
    substituents:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 wherein there is present prior to contact
    with the aldehyde or aldehyde-type phenolic reactant containing at least
    two aryl rings each of which contains a phenolic OH group.

    (1)     Note.  The rings may be fused as in 1, 8-dihydroxy naphthalene or
    as in bisphenol A.  Diphenyl ether is not considered as having two phenolic
    moieties.  However, the following two compounds identified below would be
    considered as having two phenolic moieties.


CLS 525/138
TXT With nonethylenic, nonaldehyde, or nonaldehyde-type reactant containing an
    atom other than C, H, or O:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 wherein there is present an additional
    reactant which is not ethylenic, nor an aldehyde or derivative thereof,
    e.g., pretreating phenol and formaldehyde with lead oxide and wherein the
    resulting lead oxide-containing condensate is blended with butyl rubber,
    etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136,    for a lead-containing phenolic used as a reactant.


CLS 525/139
TXT Solid polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only is derived from
    reactant containing at least two ethylenic groups: Subject matter under
    subclass 134 wherein the solid polymer is derived from or reacted with an
    ethylenic reactant containing plural unsaturated bonds.


CLS 525/140
TXT Phenolic reactant has at least two nuclear carbon atoms directly bonded to
    extracyclic carbon atoms which extracyclic carbon atoms are not part of a
    methylol group:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein the phenolic reactant has at
    least two of its six nuclear carbon atoms bonded directly to extracyclic
    carbon atoms and which carbon atoms are not part of a methylol group, e.g.,
    3,4,5-trialkyl phenol, etc.


CLS 525/141
TXT Solid polymer from ethylenic reactants only is derived from both a reactant
    containing two ethylenic groups and an acyclic monoethylenic hydrocarbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein the solid polymerized plural
    ethylenic reactant was interpolymerized with an acyclic monoethylenic
    hydrocarbon reactant, e.g., poly(butadiene-propylene), etc.


CLS 525/142
TXT Solid polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only is derived from a
    nitrogen-containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 wherein the solid polymer is derived from
    or reacted with a nitrogen-containing ethylenic reactant, e.g., acrylamide,
    2-vinylpyridine, etc.


CLS 525/143
TXT Solid polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only is derived from a
    reactant containing a carboxylic acid or derivative thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 wherein the solid polymer is derived from
    or reacted with an ethylenic reactant containing a carboxylic acid group or
    derivative thereof, e.g., acrylic acid, maleic acid, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    142,    wherein the acid derivative is nitrogen-containing, e.g., a
    nitrile, amide, etc.


CLS 525/144
TXT Solid polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only is derived from a
    reactant containing at least one halogen atom: Subject matter under
    subclass 134 wherein the solid polymer is derived from or reacted with an
    ethylenic reactant containing a halogen-atom, e.g., tetrafluorethylene,
    vinyl(idene) chloride, etc.


CLS 525/145
TXT Solid polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only is derived from an
    acyclic hydrocarbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 wherein the solid polymer is derived from
    or reacted with an unsaturated acyclic hydrocarbon.


CLS 525/146
TXT With a -OO- or halhal group-containing reactant or polymer thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 132 wherein the solid polymerized ethylenic
    reactant is contacted with a reactant containing a carbonate (-OO-),
    halocarbonate (-OCl) group or carbonyl halide (halhal) or polymers thereof.


CLS 525/147
TXT Two or more diverse phenolic reactants, or phenolic reactant contains an
    atom other than C, H, or O:

    Subject matter under subclass 146 wherein there are two or more different
    phenolic reactants, or a phenolic reactant which contains an element other
    than C, H, or O.


CLS 525/148
TXT Solid polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only is derived from a
    reactant containing a carboxylic acid or derivative thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 146 wherein the solid polymer is derived from
    or reacted with an ethylenic reactant containing a carboxylic acid group or
    a derivative thereof, e.g., acrylic, acid, etc.


CLS 525/149
TXT Contains ethylenic reactant other than from a solid polymer derived from
    ethylenic reactants only, e.g., reaction product from a phenol and
    unsaturated hydrocarbon, etc.: Subject matter under subclass 132 wherein
    there is an additional reactant which is ethylenically unsaturated or is an
    ethylenically unsaturated polymer not derived solely from ethylenic
    reactants.


CLS 525/150
TXT Phenolic reactant contains a phosphorus or sulfur atom or with phosphorus-
    or sulfur-containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 132 wherein the phenolic reactant contains
    phosphorus or sulfur, or wherein a nonphenolic nonethylenic reactant
    contains phosphorus or sulfur.


CLS 525/151
TXT Solid polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only is derived from a
    reactant containing at least one halogen atom: Subject matter under
    subclass 132 wherein the solid polymer is derived from or reacted with an
    ethylenic reactant containing halogen.


CLS 525/152
TXT Solid polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only is derived from a
    reactant containing a polycyclic ring system or two or more ethylenic
    groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 132 wherein the solid polymer is derived from
    or reacted with an ethylenic reactant which contains a fused- or
    bridged-ring system or plural unsaturated groups, e.g., butadiene,
    dicyclopentadiene, etc.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "fused- and
    bridged-ring system".


CLS 525/153
TXT With saturated ketone reactant or polymer thereof; or with solid copolymer
    derived from at least one ketone reactant wherein at least one of the
    reactants forming the solid copolymer is saturated; or with specified
    polymer-forming ingredients wherein at least one of the necessary
    ingredients is a ketone or with a reaction product thereof; or with a
    specified intermediate condensation product containing a ketone group:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein, in addition to the solid polymer
    derived from ethylenic reactants only, there is additionally present (a) a
    saturated ketone reactant or a polymer thereof, or (b) a solid copolymer
    derived from a ketone-containing reactant wherein at least one of the
    reactants forming the solid copolymer is saturated, or (c) specified
    polymer-forming ingredients wherein at least one of the necessary
    polymer-forming ingredients contains a ketone group and at least one of the
    necessary polymer-forming ingredients is saturated or a reaction product
    thereof, or (d) a specified intermediate condensation product which
    contains a ketone group.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the terms "specified
    polymer-forming ingredients", "specified intermediate condensation
    product", and a "ketone".


CLS 525/154
TXT With saturated aldehyde or aldehyde derivative (including methylol ethers
    or condensates) reactant or solid polymer thereof; or with solid copolymer
    derived from at least one aldehyde or aldehyde derivative reactant wherein
    at least one of the reactants forming the solid copolymer is saturated; or
    with specified polymer-forming ingredients wherein at least one of the
    necessary ingredients is an aldehyde or aldehyde derivative reactant or
    with a reaction product thereof, or with specified intermediate
    condensation product containing an aldehyde or aldehyde derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein, in addition to the solid polymer
    derived from ethylenic reactants only, there is additionally present (a) a
    saturated aldehyde or aldehyde derivative (including methylol ethers or
    condensates) reactant or a polymer thereof, or (b)  a solid copolymer
    derived from an aldehyde or aldehyde derivative reactant wherein at least
    one of the reactants forming the solid copolymer is saturated, or (c)
    specified polymer-forming ingredients wherein at least one of the necessary
    polymer-forming ingredients contains an aldehyde or derivative group and at
    least one of the necessary polymer-forming ingredients is saturated or a
    reaction product or condensate thereof, or (d) a specified intermediate
    condensation product which contains an aldehyde or aldehyde derivative
    group.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition of the terms "Aldehyde
    or aldehyde derivative". "specified polymer-forming ingredients", and
    "specified intermediate condensation product".


CLS 525/155
TXT Contacting two or more solid polymers derived from ethylenic reactants only
    with an aldehyde or aldehyde-type reactant; or contacting a polymer derived
    from ethylenic reactants only with an aldehyde or aldehyde-type reactant
    and subsequently contacting with a solid polymer derived from ethylenic
    reactants only:

    Subject matter under subclass 154 wherein a solid polymer from ethylenic
    reactants only is contacted with an aldehyde reactant, aldehyde derivative,
    or polymer thereof concurrently or subsequently to the contacting with
    another solid polymer from ethylenic reactants only.


CLS 525/156
TXT Contacting with a hydrocarbon and an aldehyde or aldehyde derivative as
    reactants at least one of which is saturated, their condensate or solid
    polymer thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 154 wherein the solid polymer from ethylenic
    reactants only is contacted with a hydrocarbon and an aldehyde or aldehyde
    derivative as reactants, aldehyde-hydrocarbon condensate or the
    corresponding solid polymer thereof. The hydrocarbon reactant may not be a
    solid polymer from ethylenic reactants only, e.g., polyvinyl-naphthalene
    which is then further condensed with formaldehyde. However, it can be vinyl
    naphthalene condensed with formaldehyde and subsequently contacted with a
    solid polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155,    for the reaction of an aldehyde with a solid polymer from ethylenic
    reactants only subsequently mixed with a chemically dissimilar solid
    polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only.


CLS 525/157
TXT Contacting with an amine, a material containing

    a N or N (X is chalcogen) reactant and an aldehyde or aldehyde derivative
    at least one of which is saturated, their condensate or solid polymer
    thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 154 wherein the polymer from ethylenic
    reactants only is contacted with an amine, a material containing a

    N or N moiety and an aldehyde or aldehyde derivative as reactants, their
    condensate or solid polymer thereof (X is chalcogen).


CLS 525/158
TXT Reactant, condensate, or solid polymer contains an element other than C, H,
    N, or O; or wherein a co-reactant is not an aldehyde, or aldehyde-type
    reactant alcohol, amine, or reactant containing a N group:

    Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the condensate or corresponding
    solid polymer thereof contains an element other than C, H, O, or N; or
    wherein a co-reactant is not an aldehyde, aldehyde-type, alcohol, amine, or
    N group-containing reactant.


CLS 525/159
TXT Reactant derived from alcohol containing an aryl group or eight or more
    carbon atoms: Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the reactant is
    derived from an alcohol containing at least eight carbon atoms or one which
    contains an aromatic ring other than as a phenol, e.g., polymethyl acrylate
    and a condensate from n- octanol, formaldehyde and melamine, etc.


CLS 525/160
TXT Solid polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only contains an element
    other than C, H, O, or N:

    Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the solid polymer is derived from
    or is reacted with an ethylenic reactant containing an element other than
    C, H, O, or N, e.g., vinyl sulfonamide,

    CH2=CH-SO2NH2, etc.


CLS 525/161
TXT Solid polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only derived from reactant
    containing a heterocyclic ring or a fused- or bridged-ring system excluding
    an anhydride group which produces the fused- or bridged-ring system or
    heterocyclic ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the solid polymer is derived from
    or reacted with ethylenic reactant containing a heterocyclic ring, fused-
    or bridged-ring system other than solely from cyclic anhydrides.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are ethylenic reactants that
    contain a single heterocyclic ring and which ring is a cyclic anhydride.
    Also excluded from this subclass are those compounds which are bridged or
    fused solely by virtue of a cyclic anhydride ring fused or bridged to
    another ring.  This subclass does include cyclic anhydride rings when in
    combination with other heterocyclic rings or compounds which may have a
    ring system such as,

    (2)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "fused- and
    bridged-ring systems".


CLS 525/162
TXT Solid polymer derived from ethylenic reactant only derived from reactant
    containing hydroxyl or ether group:

    Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the solid polymer from ethylenic
    reactants only is derived from or reacted with an ethylenic reactant
    containing an ether or hydroxyl group, e.g., 2-hydroxyethyl acrylate, etc.


CLS 525/163
TXT Solid polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only containing a carboxylic
    acid, ester, or anhydride group:

    Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the solid polymer from ethylenic
    reactants only is derived from or has been reacted with an ethylenic
    reactant containing a carboxylic acid, ester, or anhydride group.


CLS 525/164
TXT Solid polymer derived from unsaturated hydrocarbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the solid polymer from ethylenic
    reactants only is derived from or has been reacted with an ethylenic
    hydrocarbon.


CLS 525/165
TXT With polycarboxylic acid or derivative and a polyol at least one of which
    is saturated, a condensate or solid polymer thereof; or with solid polymer
    derived from at least one polycarboxylic acid or derivative and at least
    one polyol wherein at least one of the reactants forming the solid polymer
    is saturated:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein, in addition to the solid polymer
    derived from ethylenic reactants only, there is additionally present (a) a
    solid polymer derived from at least one polycarboxylic acid or derivative
    and at least one polyol and wherein at least one of the reactants forming
    the solid polymer is saturated, or (b) polymer-forming ingredients wherein
    at least one of the necessary reactants is a polycarboxylic acid or
    derivative and at least one of the necessary reactants is a polyol and at
    least one of the necessary polymer-forming ingredients is saturated, or a
    reaction product thereof.


CLS 525/166
TXT Two or more solid polymers present other than derived from a polycarboxylic
    acid or derivative and a polyol:

    Subject matter under subclass 165 wherein there are present in the mixture
    two or more solid polymers other than those derived from condensations of a
    polycarboxylic acid or derivative and a polyol.


CLS 525/167
TXT Polycarboxylic acid or derivative or polyol contains an atom other than C,
    H, or O; or wherein a polycarboxylic acid or derivative or polyol or
    condensate thereof is reacted with a reactant containing atoms other than
    C, H, or O prior to blending with the solid polymer; or wherein a
    coreactant with the polycarboxylic acid or derivative or polyol contains an
    atom other than C, H, or O: Subject matter under subclass 165 wherein the
    polycarboxylic acid or derivative or polyol contains an element other than
    C, H, or O; or wherein the polycarboxylic acid or derivative, polyol or
    reaction product thereof is reacted with a compound containing elements
    other than C, H, or O prior to blending with the solid polymerized
    ethylenic reactant; or wherein the coreactant with the polycarboxylic acid,
    derivative, or polyol contains an element other than C, H, or O.


CLS 525/167.5
TXT With a reactant which is a fatty acid glycerol ester, a fatty acid or salt
    derived from a naturally occurring glyceride, tall oil , or a fatty acid
    derived from tall oil:

    Subject matter under subclass 165 wherein there is at least one reactant
    which is a fatty acid glycerol ester, or a fatty acid or salt thereof
    derived from a naturally occurring glyceride, tall oil, or a fatty acid
    derived from tall oil.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "fatty acid"
    and the materials proper for this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The recited fatty material is reacted with the solid polymer
    derived from ethylenic reactants only; or with the polycarboxylic acid or
    derivative or polyol, or with the condensate or solid polymer thereof.


CLS 525/168
TXT Polycarboxylic acid or derivative, polyol, or other co-reactant contains an
    ethylenic group; or wherein a condensate thereof has been prepared from a
    polycarboxylic acid or derivative and a polyol and subsequently reacted
    with an ethylenic reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 165 wherein the polycarboxylic acid or
    derivative thereof, polyol or other coreactant contains an ethylenic group;
    or wherein an ethylenic material contacts the polyol or polycarboxylic acid
    or reaction product thereof prior to contacting the solid polymer from
    ethylenic reactants only; and wherein said ethylenic material is not a
    solid polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only.


CLS 525/169
TXT Solid polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only derived from at least
    one reactant containing an atom other than C, H, or O:

    Subject matter under subclass 168 wherein the solid polymer is derived from
    or has been reacted with an ethylenic reactant containing an element other
    than C, H, or O.


CLS 525/170
TXT Solid polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only derived from at least
    one reactant containing an oxygen atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 168 wherein the solid polymer is derived from
    or has been reacted with an ethylenic reactant containing an oxygen atom.


CLS 525/171
TXT Solid polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only derived from at least
    one hydrogen reactant containing at least two ethylenic groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 168 wherein the solid polymer is derived from
    or has been reacted with an ethylenic hydrocarbon, e.g., butadiene, etc.


CLS 525/172
TXT Polycarboxylic acid or derivative contains three or more carboxylic acid
    groups or derivatives thereof, or wherein a polyol contains at least three
    hydroxyl groups: Subject matter under subclass 165 wherein the
    polycarboxylic acid contains at least three carboxylic groups or derivative
    thereof; or wherein the polyol contains at least three hydroxyl groups.


CLS 525/173
TXT From two or more polyols:

    Subject matter under subclass 165 wherein two or more polyols are utilized,
    e.g., mixture of propylene and butylene glycol, etc.


CLS 525/174
TXT From two or more carboxylic acids or derivatives thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 165 wherein two or more carboxylic acids or
    their derivatives are utilized.


CLS 525/175
TXT Solid polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only derived from at least
    one reactant containing an atom other than C, H, O, or hal:

    Subject matter under subclass 165 wherein the solid polymer is derived from
    or has been reacted with an ethylenic reactant containing an element other
    than C, H, O, or halogen.


CLS 525/176
TXT Solid polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only derived from at least
    one reactant containing an oxygen atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 165 wherein the solid polymer is derived from
    or has been reacted with an ethylenic reactant containing an oxygen atom.


CLS 525/177
TXT Solid polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only derived from
    unsaturated hydrocarbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 165 wherein the solid polymer is derived from
    or has been reacted with an ethylenic reactant which is a hydrocarbon.


CLS 525/178
TXT With a polycarboxylic acid or derivative and a polyamine or the
    corresponding salt thereof; or with a lactam; or with an aminocarboxylic
    acid; or with the corresponding polymers; and wherein the monomer or
    polymer was derived from at least one saturated reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein in addition to the solid polymer
    derived from ethylenic reactants only, there is additionally present (a) a
    polycarboxylic acid or derivative and a polyamine at least one of which is
    saturated or a polymer or condensate thereof; or a saturated lactam or
    polymer thereof; or a saturated aminocarboxylic acid or polymer thereof, or
    an amine salt of a saturated carboxylic acid or polymer thereof; or (b) a
    solid polymer derived from at least one lactam, aminocarboxylic acid, amine
    salt of a polycarboxylic acid, or polycarboxylic acid and a polyamine and
    at least one of the reactants forming the solid polymer is saturated.


CLS 525/179
TXT Two or more solid polymers other than prepared from a polycarboxylic acid
    or derivative and a polyamine, a lactam, an aminocarboxylic acid or
    derivative, or from a polyamine salt of a polycarboxylic acid: Subject
    matter under subclass 178 wherein there are at least two solid polymers
    present which are other than derived from the reaction of a polyamine and a
    polycarboxylic acid or derivative, or from a lactam, or from an
    aminocarboxylic acid or derivative, or from an amine salt of a
    polycarboxylic acid, e.g., in subclass 178, e.g., an applicable mixture
    would be polystyrene, poly(methyl methacrylate) and nylon-6.


CLS 525/180
TXT Polycarboxylic acid or derivative contains three or more carboxylic acid
    groups; or polyamine contains three or more amino groups; or from an
    amino-containing polycarboxylic acid or derivative other than amine solely
    in salt form; or from polyamino carboxylic acid or derivative other than
    wherein amino groups are solely in salt form:

    Subject matter under subclass 178 wherein the polycarboxylic acid or
    derivative contains at least three carboxylic acid groups or derivatives,
    or wherein a polyamine contains at least three amino groups; or wherein the
    polycarboxylic acid contains at least one amine group excluding those
    appearing in the form of nonzwitterionic cation.  Thus, structure I below
    is permitted while structure II is not,

    or from a carboxylic acid containing at least two amino groups excluding
    those appearing in the form of non-zwitterionic cation.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition of the term "carboxylic
    acid and amine group".


CLS 525/181
TXT With ethylenically unsaturated reactant; or reactant contains a
    heterocyclic ring other than solely as a lactam or cyclic anhydride of a
    polycarboxylic acid:

    Subject matter under subclass 178 wherein a reactant contains an ethylenic
    group; or reactant contains a heterocyclic ring other than solely as an
    anhydride or lactam, e.g., maleic acid.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are ethylenic monomers that
    contain a single heterocyclic ring and which ring is a cyclic anhydride.
    This subclass does not exclude a cyclic anhydride ring when in combination
    with a noncyclic anhydride ring.

    (2)     Note.  The ethylenic reactant may be introduced subsequent to the
    solid polymer and therefore be required subject matter for subclass 178.


CLS 525/182
TXT Solid polymer derived from ethylenically unsaturated reactant only is one
    derived from a reactant containing a heterocyclic ring and is other than
    solely a cyclic anhydride of a polycarboxylic acid:

    Subject matter under subclass 178 wherein the solid polymer is derived from
    or has been reacted with an ethylenic reactant which is a heterocyclic
    compound other than solely as a carboxylic acid anhydride, e.g.,
    N-vinylpyrrolidone, glycidyl methacrylate and N-vinylcarbazole, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are ethylenic monomers that
    contain a single heterocyclic ring and which ring is a cyclic anhydride.
    This subclass does not exclude a cyclic anhydride when in combination with
    a noncyclic anhydride ring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183,    for a solid polymer derived from maleic anhydride.


CLS 525/183
TXT Solid polymer derived from ethylenically unsaturated reactant only is
    derived from a reactant containing a carboxylic acid or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 178 wherein the solid polymer is derived from
    or has been reacted with an ethylenic reactant containing a carboxylic acid
    or derivative thereof.


CLS 525/184
TXT Solid polymer derived from ethylenically unsaturated hydrocarbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 178 wherein the solid polymer is derived from
    or has been reacted with an ethylenic reactant which is a hydrocarbon.


CLS 525/185
TXT With additional solid polymer derived from at least one nonethylenic
    reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein the solid polymer derived from
    ethylenic reactants only is contacted with an additional solid polymer
    derived from at least one nonethylenic reactant, e.g., a copolymer derived
    from carbon monoxide and ethylene, etc.


CLS 525/186
TXT At least one reactant which forms additional polymer contains a
    heterocyclic ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 185 wherein the additional solid polymer is
    derived from a heterocyclic reactant.


CLS 525/187
TXT Heterocyclic ring is an 1,2-epoxy ring:
    Subject matter under subclass 186 wherein the heterocyclic reactant is a
    1,2-epoxy (oxirane) compound, e.g., epichlorohydrin, etc.


CLS 525/188
TXT At least one reactant which forms additional polymer contains a phosphorus
    atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 185 wherein the additional solid polymer is
    derived from a reactant containing phosphorus.


CLS 525/189
TXT At least one reactant which forms additional polymer contains a sulfur
    atom: Subject matter under subclass 185 wherein the additional solid
    polymer is derived from a reactant containing sulfur.


CLS 525/190
TXT At least one reactant which forms additional polymer contains a carboxylic
    acid or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 185 wherein the additional solid polymer is
    derived from a reactant which is a carboxylic acid or derivative.


CLS 525/191
TXT Polymer mixture of two or more solid polymers derived from ethylenically
    unsaturated reactants only; or mixtures of said polymer mixture with a
    chemical treating agent; or products or processes of preparing any of the
    above mixtures:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 which concerns mixing of two or more solid
    polymers derived from ethylenically unsaturated reactants only, a mixture
    of said polymer mixture with a chemical treating agent, or processes of
    forming or the resultant product of any of the above mixtures.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are multi-step
    polymerization-postpoly-merization processes which occurs in the presence
    of a single preformed solid polymer from ethylenic reactants only and an
    ethylenic reactant which affords a polymeric mixture.  For example,
    lithiation of styrene in the presence of polyethylene to yield solid
    lithium-terminated polystyrene followed by its reaction with butadiene to
    produce block (polybutadiene-polystyrene) in admixture with polyethylene
    would be classified in subclasses 242+.  This subclass does, however
    include in subclass 193, metalation of polystyrene blended with
    polybutadiene which is subsequently contacted with butadiene.

    (2)     Note. Placement of a patent in this subclass is on the basis of the
    ethylenic reactants used in the preparation of solid polymer and not on the
    basis of ethylenic reactants which may be reacted with a mixture of solid
    polymers from ethylenic reactants only.


CLS 525/192
TXT Treating polymer or polymer mixture with a chemical treating agent other
    than solid polymer:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 drawn to processes of treating a polymer
    or polymer mixture with a chemical agent.

    (1)     Note.  A chemical agent is a material which can react with the
    polymer to cause a modification in the polymer's chemical structure.
    Proper for this subclass would be, e.g., chemical reactions as
    halogenation, sulfonation, nitration, vulcanization, etc. Additionally, the
    treating agent if an ethylenic reactant, may preferentially homo- or
    copolymerize with other reactants to produce additional polymers.  A patent
    which claims both product and process for producing a polymeric mixture
    containing a graft copolymer starting with two ethylenically derived
    polymers and an ethylenic reactant, requires that the original be
    classified here and should be crossed into the graft copolymer subclasses
    63+ area.  See Class 523, subclasses 1+ for a mixture of polymers with
    nonpolymeric material whose only purpose is, e.g., to enhance
    processibility of the polymers, stabilize against deterioration or aid
    deterioration after a given time (prodegradant), or act as a nucleating or
    crystallizing agent, etc.  Search Class 528, subclasses 480+ for the
    treating of polymeric mixture in order to destroy residual catalyst or
    remove or neutralize impurities.  However, the neutralization of a
    polymeric salt with an acid or base is classified here. Included here also
    are processes wherein one or more polymers are chemically aftertreated and
    subsequently blended with themselves or with other polymers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199     through 241,  for a product which is the result of treating a
    process proper for subclasses 192+.


CLS 525/193
TXT Agent contains an ethylenic group:

    Subject matter under subclass 192 wherein the treating agent is
    ethylenically unsaturated.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are polymers which were obtained only from
    ethylenic reactants as treating agents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70+,    for a polymeric mixture containing a graft copolymer derived from
    ethylenic reactants only; or for a process or product obtained by treating
    an ethylenic reactant which reacts with the polymer and which resultant
    product is admixed with an additional solid polymer.

    88+,    for a polymeric mixture containing a block copolymer derived from
    ethylenic reactants only or for a process or product obtained by treating a
    mixture of polymers having functional terminal ends or with a coupling
    agent and subsequently contacting said product with an additional solid
    polymer.


CLS 525/194
TXT Agent is an organic material:

    Subject matter under subclass 192 wherein the chemical treating agent is
    organic material.


CLS 525/195
TXT Contains a metal atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 194 wherein the organic treating agent is one
    which also contains a metal atom in an inorganic or organic compound, e.g.,
    trialkyl aluminum, etc.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for the elements considered as being metals.


CLS 525/196
TXT Agent contains a metal atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 192 wherein the chemical treating agent
    contains a metal atom.


CLS 525/197
TXT Specified blending process:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 drawn to processes which involve
    specified blending operations associated with preparing the polymeric
    mixture.

    (1)     Note.  The blending operation must be accompanied by some specific
    process limitations.  Thus, if blending is accomplished by a simple "melt
    or fusion" blending then it is necessary to state a required temperature
    range. Similarly, if blending is accomplished by dissolving the polymers in
    one or more solvents, then it is necessary to specify at least the nature
    of the solvents, e.g., 2:1 solvent mixture of carbontetrachloride-benzene
    or 2:1 solvent mixture of halogenated hydrocarbon with aromatic
    hydrocarbon. In a multistep blending operation which includes heating, it
    is not necessary that the temperature be specified. Also, permissible are
    blending processes wherein heating is the only step but which do not
    disclosed specified temperatures when the polymers or polymer system are
    required to conform to certain parameters.  For example, polymers A and B
    are heated above their glass transition temperatures (Tg) and then blended;
    or polymer A is heated to viscosity V1and polymer B is heated viscosity V2
    and then blended.  Terms such as ". . . blending and heating . . "or". . .
    mixing and vulcanizing . . ." are specific enough to be classified here.
    Some indication as to mixing at a given r.p.m. or vulcanizing at a given
    temperature would be adequate information.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199     through 241,  for a product which is the result of a specified
    blending process.


CLS 525/198
TXT With subsequent physical treatment:

    Subject matter under subclass 197 wherein the blending process is
    accompanied by a subsequent physical treatment, e.g., masticating
    (crushing), prilling (pelletizing), evaporation of solvent, shearing,
    rolling, pressing, milling, granulating, etc.


CLS 525/199
TXT Solid polymer derived from fluorine-containing ethylenic reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the mixture contains a solid
    polymer derived from an unsaturated fluorine-containing reactant, e.g.,
    vinylidene fluoride, vinyl fluoride, etc.


CLS 525/200
TXT Fluorine reactant contains atoms other than C, H, or Hal:

    Subject matter under subclass 199 wherein the unsaturated
    fluorine-containing reactant contains elements other than carbon, hydrogen,
    or halogen, e.g., pentafluoroethyl acrylate, etc.


CLS 525/201
TXT Solid polymer derived from metal-containing ethylenic reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the mixture contains a solid
    polymer derived from a metal-containing ethylenic reactant, e.g., sodium
    acrylate, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221,    for a mixture containing a metal-containing polymer produced by the
    neutralization of polyacrylic acid with metal hydroxide.


CLS 525/202
TXT Solid polymer derived from reactant containing an acetylenic group:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the mixture contains a solid
    polymer derived from a reactant containing an acetylenic group, e.g.,
    polyacetylene, sometimes called cuprene, etc.


CLS 525/203
TXT Solid polymer derived from ethylenic reactant containing a heterocyclic
    nitrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the mixture contains a solid
    polymer derived from an ethylenic reactant containing a nitrogen
    heterocycle, e.g., 2-vinyl pyridine, etc.


CLS 525/204
TXT Heterocyclic reactant contains at least two hetero atoms in a single ring
    and at least one of which is nitrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 203 wherein the nitrogen heterocycle contains
    two or more atoms in the same ring and wherein at least one of the hetero
    atoms is nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  The hetero ring may contain two or more nitrogen atoms or at
    least one nitrogen atom and at least one diverse hetero atom as oxygen, etc.


CLS 525/205
TXT Heterocyclic reactant is an imide or lactam:

    Subject matter under subclass 203 wherein the nitrogen heterocycle is an
    imide or a lactam, e.g., maleimide, N-vinyl pyrrolidone, etc.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "imide or
    lactam".


CLS 525/206
TXT Solid polymer derived from reactant containing a chalcogen atom (O, S, Se,
    Te) as part of a heterocyclic ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the mixture contains a solid
    polymer derived from an ethylenic reactant containing a chalcogen (O, S,
    Se, Te) heterocycle, e.g., coumarone, furfuryl acrylate, etc.


CLS 525/207
TXT Heterocyclic reactant contains anhydride group:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 wherein the chalcogen heterocycle
    contains an anhydride group, e.g., maleic anhydride, etc.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for the term "anhydride".


CLS 525/208
TXT Heterocyclic reactant contains 1, 2-epoxy group:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 wherein the chalcogen heterocycle
    contains two carbon atoms and one chalcogen atom, e.g., glycidyl acrylate,
    allyl glycidyl ether, etc.


CLS 525/209
TXT Solid polymer derived from reactant containing elements other than C, H, O,
    N, S, or Cl:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the mixture contains a solid
    polymer derived from an ethylenic reactant containing elements other than
    carbon, hydrogen, nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, or chlorine, e.g.,
    bis(beta-chorethyl)-vinylphosphonate (CLCH2CH2)2CH=CH2, etc.


CLS 525/210
TXT Solid polymer derived from reactant containing a fused- or bridged-ring
    system: Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the mixture contains a
    solid polymer derived from a reactant containing a fused-or bridged-ring
    system, e.g., indene, pinene, etc.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 526, subclass 280 for a definition of the term
    "fused- or bridged-ring system.


CLS 525/211
TXT Fused- or bridged-ring reactant contains at least two ethylenic groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein a solid polymer is derived from a
    fused- or bridged-ring reactant which contains plural ethylenically
    unsaturated groups, e.g., dicyclopentadiene, etc.


CLS 525/212
TXT Solid polymer derived from sulfur-containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the mixture contains a solid
    polymer derived from an ethylenic reactant containing sulfur.


CLS 525/213
TXT Solid polymer derived from chlorine-containing reactant other than vinyl
    (idene) chloride:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the mixture contains a solid
    polymer derived from a reactant containing halogen other than vinyl
    vinylidene chloride, e.g., alphachloroacrylonitrile, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239,    for a mixture containing a solid polymer derived from vinyl or
    vinylidene chloride.


CLS 525/214
TXT Halogenated hydrocarbon other than vinyl- (idene) chloride:

    Subject matter under subclass 213 wherein the halogen-containing ethylenic
    reactant, which is other than vinyl or vinylidene chloride, is a
    halogenated hydrocarbon, e.g., 1,2-dichloroethylene, etc.


CLS 525/215
TXT Halogenated hydrocarbon contains at least two ethylenic groups and is
    devoid of an aryl ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 214 wherein the halogenated hydrocarbon
    contains plural ethylenically unsaturated groups, and is free of any
    aromatic group, e.g., 2-chloroprene, etc.


CLS 525/216
TXT Solid polymer derived from cycloaliphatic-containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the mixture contains a solid
    polymer derived from an ethylenic reactant containing a cycloaliphatic
    group, e.g., cyclopentene, etc.


CLS 525/217
TXT Solid polymer derived from reactant containing nitrogen atom other than
    from (meth)acrylonitrile:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the mixture contains a solid
    polymer derived from an ethylenic reactant containing nitrogen, other than
    as acrylonitrile or methacrylonitrile, e.g., 2-cyanoethyl-acrylate, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    238,    for a solid polymer derived from acrylonitrile or methacrylonitrile.


CLS 525/218
TXT Nitrogen reactant contains a carboxylic acid amide group:

    Subject matter under subclass 217 wherein the nitrogen-containing ethylenic
    reactant contains a carboxylic acid amide group, e.g., acrylamide, etc.


CLS 525/219
TXT Solid polymer derived from reactant containing a phenolic group:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the mixture contains a solid
    polymer derived from an ethylenic reactant containing an aromatic hydroxyl
    or aromatic ether group.


CLS 525/220
TXT Solid polymer derived from reactant containing a carbonyl acid or
    derivative: Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the mixture contains
    a solid polymer derived from an ethylenic reactant which contains a
    carbonyl group () other than as part of a carboxylic acid or derivative,
    e.g., methylisopropenyl ketone, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    221     and 222+, for a mixture containing a solid polymer derived from a
    carboxylic acid or derivative.


CLS 525/221
TXT Solid polymer derived from reactant containing a carboxylic acid group:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the mixture contains a solid
    polymer derived from an ethylenic reactant which contains a carboxylic acid
    group, e.g., acrylic acid, maleic acid, etc.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "carboxylic
    acid".


CLS 525/222
TXT Solid polymer derived from reactant containing a carboxylic acid ester
    group: Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the mixture contains a
    solid polymer derived from an ethylenic reactant which contains a
    carboxylic acid ester group, e.g., vinyl acetate, etc.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "carboxylic
    acid ester".


CLS 525/223
TXT Ester contains an oxygen atom other than as part of a carboxylic acid ester
    group: Subject matter under subclass 222 wherein the ester reactant
    contains an oxygen atom other than as part of a carboxylic acid ester
    group, e.g., 2-hydroxyethyl acrylate, etc.


CLS 525/224
TXT Ester derived from both an unsaturated carboxylic acid and an unsaturated
    alcohol: Subject matter under subclass 222 wherein the ester reactant is
    derived both from an unsaturated carboxylic acid and an unsaturated
    alcohol, e.g., dially fumarate, etc.


CLS 525/225
TXT Ester contains at least two carboxylic acid ester groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 222 wherein the ester reactant contains at
    least two ester groups, e.g., dibutyl maleate, dimethyl itaconate, etc.


CLS 525/226
TXT Ester derived from polyol:

    Subject matter under subclass 225 wherein the reactant is derived from a
    polyol, e.g., ethylene glycol diacrylate, etc.


CLS 525/227
TXT Ester derived from an unsaturated carboxylic acid:

    Subject matter under subclass 222 wherein the reactant is derived from an
    unsaturated carboxylic acid, e.g., ethyl acrylate, n-propyl crotonate, etc.


CLS 525/228
TXT At least two polymers derived from carboxylic acid ester reactants:

    Subject matter under subclass 227 wherein the polymeric mixture contains
    two or more solid polymers derived from carboxylic acid esters and at least
    one of said esters is derived from an unsaturated carboxylic acid, e.g.,
    poly(butadiene-methyl acrylate) mixed with poly(methyl methacrylate), etc.


CLS 525/229
TXT Ester derived from an unsaturated alcohol: Subject matter under subclass
    228 wherein at least one of the solid polymers is derived from an ester
    reactant containing a moiety derived from an unsaturated alcohol, e.g., a
    mixture of poly(methyl methacrylate-vinyl acetate) and poly(butyl
    acrylate-vinyl acetate), etc.


CLS 525/230
TXT Polymer derived from nitrogen-containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 227 wherein a solid polymer is derived from a
    nitrogen-containing reactant, e.g., acrylonitrile, etc.


CLS 525/231
TXT Solid polymer derived from oxygen-containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the mixture contains a solid
    polymer derived from an ethylenic reactant containing oxygen, e.g., vinyl
    methyl ether, etc.


CLS 525/232
TXT Solid polymer derived from reactant containing at least two ethylenic
    groups and is devoid of aryl ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the mixture contains a solid
    polymer derived from an ethylenic reactant which contains at least two
    ethylenic groups and is free of an aromatic group, e.g., butadiene,
    isoprene, etc.


CLS 525/233
TXT Polymer derived from nitrogen-containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 232 wherein a solid polymer is derived from a
    nitrogen-containing ethylenic reactant, e.g., acrylonitrile, etc.


CLS 525/234
TXT At least two polymers derived from nitrogen-containing reactants:

    Subject mixture under subclass 233 wherein the polymeric mixture contains
    at least two solid polymers derived from nitrogen-containing reactants,
    e.g., poly(butadiene-acrylonitrile) mixed with
    poly(vinylchloride-acrylonitrile), etc.


CLS 525/235
TXT Polymer derived from halogen-containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 232 wherein a solid polymer is derived from
    vinyl chloride or vinylidene chloride.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199+    and 213+, for a polymer derived from a halogen-containing reactant
    other than vinyl or vinylidene chloride.


CLS 525/236
TXT At least two polymers derived from reactants containing two or more
    ethylenic groups and devoid of an aryl ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 232 wherein the polymeric mixture contains
    two or more solid polymers derived from reactants which contain two or more
    ethylenic groups and no aromatic group.


CLS 525/237
TXT At least one of three polymers is derived from two or more reactants:

    Subject matter under subclass 236 wherein at least one solid polymer is
    derived from two or more reactants, e.g., poly(butadiene-styrene), etc.


CLS 525/238
TXT Solid polymer derived from (meth)acrylonitrile:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the mixture contains a solid
    polymer derived from (meth)acrylonitrile.


CLS 525/239
TXT Solid polymer derived from vinyl(idene) chloride:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the mixture contains a solid
    polymer derived from vinyl(idene) chloride.


CLS 525/240
TXT Solid polymer derived from ethylene or propylene:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the mixture contains a solid
    polymer derived from ethylene or propylene.


CLS 525/241
TXT Solid polymer derived from an aromatic hydrocarbon reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the mixture contains a solid
    polymer derived from an aromatic hydrocarbon, e.g., styrene, etc.


CLS 525/242
TXT Polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only mixed with ethylenic reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein a solid polymer derived from
    ethylenically unsaturated reactants only is mixed with an ethylenic
    reactant, processes of mixing, or the resultant product of any of the above
    mixture, e.g., graft copolymerization of poly(styrene-butadiene) with
    acrylonitrile or the block copolymerization of polystyrene with butadiene,
    etc.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses contain as shown above graft
    and block copolymers whenever prepared according to the limitations set
    forth under this subclass.  Thus, the process and product of preparing a
    mixture of graft poly(butadiene-styrene-polystyrene-acrylonitrile) with
    poly(styrene-acrylonitrile) starting with polybutadiene and styrene and
    acrylonitrile, is classified here.

    (2)     Note.  This and indented subclasses also contain polymers prepared
    from a combination of ethylenic reactants mixed with nonethylenic reactants
    when reacted in the presence of ethylenically polymerized polymers, e.g.,
    ethylene-ethylene oxide copolymer, propylene-sulfur dioxide copolymer.
    However, for the process of mixing such polymers see this class, subclass
    185.  Product claims are classified on the basis of ethylenic reactants
    either in the polymerized or unpolymerized state and cross-referenced to
    the nonethylenic reactant as being specified materials in this class,
    subclasses 244+. Process claims, of course, are classified according to
    claimed specified materials and, if lacking, then they are classified on
    the basis of the product.

    (3)     Note.  This and indented subclasses also contain those products and
    compositions derived from the contacting of solid polymers from ethylenic
    reactants only with ethylenic materials wherein the ethylenic reactant
    interacts with the polymer without undergoing simultaneous or subsequent
    polymerization, e.g., treating poly(2-hydroxethyl-acrylate) with acrylyl
    chloride or polyacrylic acid with allylamine, etc.

    (4)     Note.  Patents in the area are placed in the first subclass that
    provides for the solid polymer or ethylenic monomer. No distinction has
    been made as to amounts of required materials.  Solid polymers from
    ethylenic reactants only are classified on the basis of the initial
    ethylenic reactants utilized in preparing same.  No weight, for purposes of
    classification, has been given to polymers which have been post-treated
    chemically to introduce atoms therein or remove atoms which were part of
    the original polymer prior to introduction of the ethylenic monomer.  For
    instance, the product obtained by halogenating polybutadiene and
    subsequently mixing same with vinyl chloride, is classified in subclass 313
    on the basis of butadiene.

    (5)     Note.  In those subclasses titled "Block" such as 280, 294, 299,
    314, 318, 321, and 323 the requirement for placement of a document therein
    is that the required ethylenic material as noted by the subclass title be
    in the block portion of the polymer and not in the graft portion of the
    molecule.

    (6)     Note.  An ethylenic reactant is exactly that as defined in Class
    520 Class Definition I, Glossary and is included herein: "Requires the
    presence of two carbon atoms bonded together by a double or triple bond,
    with the proviso that the double bond is not part of an aromatic ring, or
    of a ring which shares a double bond with an aromatic ring."
    "Additionally, an aromatic compound is exactly that as defined in Class
    260, Main Class Definition, and is included therein:"  The term aromatic
    denotes a compound which contains a benzene nucleus whether or not it is
    condensed with other rings.  Reactants such as furan, thiophene and pyrrole
    would thus meet the requirements for a ethylenically unsaturated compound.


CLS 525/243
TXT Reactions with ethylenic reactants in two or more diverse phases, e.g.,
    bulk, emulsion, melt, solution, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 wherein one or more polymerization
    reactions occur in two or more distinct phases.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass typically covers those manipulative processes
    involving multiphase preparation of modified polymers, notably graft
    copolymers, e.g., prepolymerizing by mass polymerization of polybutadiene
    dissolved in styrene and then dispersing the mixture in an aqueous solution
    containing a suspending agent and finally polymerizing the suspended
    prepolymer mixture until substantially all the reactant has been
    polymerized to afford the final product, etc.


CLS 525/244
TXT Contacting a solid polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only with an
    ethylenic reactant in the presence of a specified material:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 drawn to processes wherein a solid
    polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only is contacted with an
    ethylenic reactant and a specified material.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "specified
    material".


CLS 525/245
TXT Specified material contains transition metal atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 244 wherein the specified material contains a
    transition metal atom, i.e., the elements of atomic numbers 21-29, 39-47,
    57-79, and 89 and higher and does not include Zn, Cd, and Hg.

    (1)     Note.  The transition metal atom may be in elemental or compound
    form.


CLS 525/246
TXT In presence of water:

    Subject matter under subclass 245 wherein a transition metal atom, water,
    and an ethylenic reactant are simultaneously in contact with a solid
    polymer from ethylenic reactant only.

    (1)     Note.  The amount of water present during the polymerization
    process is of no significance, e.g., diluent, catalyst, activator, etc.
    The introduction of water may not be explicitly stated but only implied,
    e.g., the introduction of 37% formalin solution and 37% commericial
    hydrochloric acid.  Nevertheless, these materials are generally recognized
    as containing water.


CLS 525/247
TXT Contains nontransition metal atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 245 wherein a transition metal atom is in
    contact with a nontransition metal atom at some time during the contacting
    process.

    (1)     Note.  The term nontransition metal is intended to include all
    metals other than the transition metal encompassed within subclass 245.

    (2)     Note.  The nontransition metalatom may be in the same compound as
    the transition metal atom or in a different compound, or it may exist in
    elemental form.


CLS 525/248
TXT Specified material contains a carbon or hydrogen atom bonded directly to a
    metal atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 244 wherein the specified material contains a
    metal-to-carbon or metal-to-hydrogen bond, e.g., NaH, CH3CH2Li, etc.


CLS 525/249
TXT Metal atom is aluminum:

    Subject matter under subclass 248 wherein the metal associated with the
    metal-to-carbon or metal-to-hydrogen bond is aluminum, e.g., Al(C3H7)3, etc.


CLS 525/250
TXT Metal atom is Group IA metal atom (Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs, Fr):

    Subject matter under subclass 248 wherein the metal associated with the
    metal-to-carbon or metal-to-hydrogen bond is a Group IA (L, Na, K, Rb, Cs,
    Fr) metal atom.


CLS 525/251
TXT Specified material contains a boron atom: Subject matter under subclass 244
    wherein the specified material contains a boron atom, e.g.,
    boron-trifluoride etherate complex, etc.


CLS 525/252
TXT Specified material is a carbohydrate or is a solid synthetic polymer not
    intended to be in the final product:

    Subject matter under subclass 244 wherein the specified material is a
    carbohydrate or is a solid synthetic polymer not intended to be in the
    final product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    523     and 524, Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, for polymer
    composition containing carbohydrates as a nonreacted material.

    526,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 200-203 for
    polymerization processes utilizing carbohydrates and synthetic polymers not
    intended to be in the final product.


CLS 525/253
TXT Material contains a free alcohol group or is alcoholate thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 252 wherein the specified solid synthetic
    polymer contains a free alcohol group or is an alcoholate salt thereof,
    e.g., polyvinyl alcohol, etc.


CLS 525/254
TXT Specified material contains silicon atom:
    Subject matter under subclass 244 wherein the specified material contains a
    silicon atom.


CLS 525/255
TXT Specified material contains a phosphorus atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 244 wherein the specified material contains a
    phosphorus atom.


CLS 525/256
TXT Specified material contains a heterocyclic ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 244 wherein the specified material contains a
    heterocyclic ring, e.g., ethylene oxide, etc.


CLS 525/257
TXT Specified material contains a ketone group: Subject matter under subclass
    244 wherein the specified material contains a ketone group.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "ketone".


CLS 525/258
TXT Specified material contains an ether group: Subject matter under subclass
    244 wherein the specified material contains an ether group, e.g.,
    polyethylene-glycol, etc.


CLS 525/259
TXT Specified material contains an organic nitrogen compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 244 wherein the specified material contains a
    nitrogen atom, which is part of an organic compound, e.g.,
    dimethylacetamide, etc.


CLS 525/260
TXT Organic nitrogen compound contains an azo group, i.e., -N=N-:

    Subject matter under subclass 259 wherein the organic compound contains an
    azo group, i.e., -N=N-.


CLS 525/261
TXT Specified material contains an organic sulfur compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 244 wherein the specified material contains a
    sulfur atom as part of an organic compound, e.g., betamercapto propionic
    acid, etc.


CLS 525/262
TXT Specified material contains a carboxylic acid or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 244 wherein the specified material contains a
    carboxylic acid or derivative thereof.


CLS 525/263
TXT Specified material contains a peroxy group, i.e., -O-O-:

    Subject matter under subclass 244 wherein the specified material contains a
    peroxy group, i.e., -O-O-, e.g., di-tertiary butyl peroxide, etc.


CLS 525/264
TXT Contains nonperoxy compound or inorganic peroxy compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 263 wherein the specified material contains a
    nonperoxy compound (i.e., in addition to the peroxy compound) or is an
    inorganic peroxy compound.


CLS 525/265
TXT Aromatic or cycloaliphatic peroxy compound: Subject matter under subclass
    263 wherein the peroxy group is part of an aromatic or cycloaliphatic
    compound, e.g., benzoyl peroxide, etc.


CLS 525/266
TXT Specified material contains an organic chalcogen compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 244 wherein the specified material is an
    organic compound which contains a chalcogen atom (O, S, Se, Te).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261,    for a specified material containing a sulfur atom as part of an
    organic compound.


CLS 525/267
TXT Including step of preparing a polymer in the presence of a specified
    material and in the absence of a preformed polymer derived from ethylenic
    reactant only:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 drawn to processes which include the step
    of initially preparing a polymer in the presence of a specified material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass excludes the presence of a preformed polymer
    derived from ethylenic reactants only.  This subclass is to be clearly
    distinguished from subclass 244 wherein the solid polymer, whether or not
    prepared in situ, is contacted both by an ethylenic reactant and a
    specified material.  In the present subclasses the in situ prepared polymer
    is contacted with an ethylenic reactant.  Typically, the polymer is not
    isolated or purified but is further reacted with an ethylenic reactant.
    For example, styrene is contacted with lithium butyl catalyst which results
    in formation of lithium terminated polystyrene block. The in situ-prepared
    polymer is then reacted with butadiene to produce polybutadiene-polystyrene
    block copolymer.

    (2)     Note.  The specified material must present at some time prior to
    the completion of the in situ polymerization of the initial polymer and may
    remain during the final reaction with the ethylenic reactant.

    (3)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition of the term "specified
    material".


CLS 525/268
TXT Specified material contains a transition metal atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 267 wherein the specified material contains a
    transition metal atom.

    (1)     Note.  See either subclass 245 or the Glossary for the definition
    of the term "transition metal atom".


CLS 525/269
TXT Transition metal is other than group IVB, VB, or VIB metal atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 268 wherein the transition metal atom is
    other than from Groups IVB, VB, or VIB.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are elements Ti, Zr, Hf, V, Nb,
    Ta, Cr, Mo, and W.


CLS 525/270
TXT With nonmetal nonhydrocarbon compound: Subject matter under subclass 268
    wherein, in addition to the transition metal, there is present a nonmetal,
    nonhydrocarbon compound, e.g., tetrakis (dialkyl amino) silane, etc.


CLS 525/271
TXT Specified material contains a group IA atom in elemental form, or bonded to
    hydrogen or carbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 267 wherein the specified material contains a
    Group IA metal in elemental form, or is bonded to hydrogen or carbon, e.g.,
    NaH, CH3Li, etc.


CLS 525/272
TXT Contains an atom other than group IA, C, or H:

    Subject matter under subclass 271 wherein the specified material contains
    an element other than from Group IA, C, or H.

    (1)     Note.  The word "contains" reads generically on the element whether
    found as an integral part of the specified material required for this
    subclass or in addition to the specified material.

    (2)     Note.  Metal borohydrides, e.g., LiBH4 are classified as if they
    are hydrides of boron and of the metal atom.

    (3)     Note.  Metal hydrides, e.g., NaAlH4 are classified as if they are
    mixed hydrides of aluminum and of the other metal.


CLS 525/273
TXT Specified material contains a compound containing a peroxy group, i.e.,
    -O-O-: Subject matter under subclass 267 wherein the specified material
    contains a peroxy group, i.e., -O-O-.


CLS 525/274
TXT Ethylenic reactant contains a metal atom: Subject matter under subclass 242
    wherein the ethylenic reactant contains a metal atom.


CLS 525/275
TXT Ethylenic reactant contains an acetylenic group:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 wherein the ethylenic reactant contains
    an acetylenic (-C=C-) group.


CLS 525/276
TXT Ethylenic reactant contains a fluorine atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 wherein the ethylenic reactant contains
    fluorine, e.g., tetrafluoroethylene, polyvinylidene fluoride, etc.


CLS 525/277
TXT Ethylenic reactant contains a carbonate group:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 wherein the ethylenic reactant contains a
    carbonate (-OO-) group, wherein the group may be linear, as in diallyl
    carbonate (CH2=CHCH2OO-CH2-CH=CH2) or cyclic, as in vinylene carbonate
    (CH=CH), etc.


CLS 525/278
TXT Ethylenic reactant contains a carbamate group:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 wherein the ethylenic reactant contains a
    carbamate group, wherein the carbamate group may be linear as in N-vinyl
    tert-butyl carbamate

    (CH2=CH-NHO-t-Bu) or cyclic, as in N-vinyl-2-oxazolidone, etc.


CLS 525/279
TXT Ethylenic reactant contains nitrogen heterocycle:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 wherein the ethlenic reactant contains a
    nitrogen heterocycle, e.g., 4-vinyl pyridine, etc.

    (1)     Note. An ethylenically unsaturated nitrogen heterocyclic compound
    may contain a carbon-to-carbon double bond outside (exo) or inside (endo)
    the ring containing the nitrogen atom (s), e.g., N-vinylpyrrolidone, 1, 2-,
    1, 3- and 1, 4-, diazine, pyridine, etc.

    (2)     Note.  See this class, subclass 242 for definItions to the terms
    "ethylenically unsaturated" and "aromatic compound".


CLS 525/280
TXT Block copolymer:

    Subject matter under subclass 279 wherein the solid polymer is a block
    copolymer derived from an ethylenic reactant containing a nitrogen
    heterocycle, e.g., (poly-2-methyl-3-vinylpyridine-poly-styrene) block
    copolymer, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Grafted poly-2-vinyl-pyridine onto
    (poly-styrene-poly-butadiene) block copolymer is not proper for this
    subclass but in subclass 279 since the block portion is devoid of a
    nitrogen reactant.


CLS 525/281
TXT Nitrogen heterocycle contains at least two nitrogen atoms in the same ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 279 wherein the nitrogen heterocycle contains
    at least two nitrogen atoms in a single ring, e.g., triallyl cyanurate, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Compounds of the type, would also be classified here if it
    is disclosed to be a reactant.


CLS 525/282
TXT Imide:

    Subject matter under subclass 279 wherein the nitrogen heterocycle contains
    an imide group, e.g., maleimide, etc.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "imide".


CLS 525/283
TXT Lactam:

    Subject matter under subclass 279 wherein nitrogen heterocycle contains a
    lactam group, e.g., N-vinyl pyrrolidone, etc.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "lactam".


CLS 525/284
TXT Ethylenic reactant contains a chalcogen heterocycle:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 wherein the ethylenic reactant contains a
    chalcogen heterocycle (chalcogen atom being O, S, Se, and Te).


CLS 525/285
TXT Cyclic anhydride:

    Subject matter under subclass 284 wherein the chalcogen heterocycle
    contains an anhydride group, e.g., maleic anhydride, etc.


CLS 525/286
TXT Three-membered ring containing two carbon and one chalcogen atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 284 wherein the chalcogen heterocycle
    consists of only two carbon atoms and one chalcogen atom, e.g., glycidyl
    methacrylate, etc.


CLS 525/287
TXT Ethylenic reactant contains a phosphorus atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 wherein the ethylenic reactant contains a
    phosphorus atom, e.g., bis (beta-chloroethyl) vinyl phosphonate (CH2=CH-
    P(O) (O CH 2CH2CL)2), etc.


CLS 525/288
TXT Ethylenic reactant contains atoms other than C, H, O, N, S, or CL:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 wherein the ethylenic reactant contains
    an element other than C, H, O, N, S, or chlorine.


CLS 525/289
TXT Ethylenic reactant contains a fused- or bridged-ring system:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 wherein the ethylenic reactant contains a
    fused- or bridged-ring system, e.g., 5-ethylidene 2-norbornene, etc.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 526, subclass 280 for a definition of the term
    "fused- or bridged-ring system".


CLS 525/290
TXT Dicyclopentadiene-containing group:

    Subject matter under subclass 289 wherein the fused-ring system contains
    the dicyclopentadiene moiety.


CLS 525/291
TXT Ethylenic reactant contains a sulfur atom: Subject matter under subclass
    242 wherein the ethylenic reactant contains sulfur.


CLS 525/292
TXT Ethylenic reactant contains a chlorine atom and is other than vinyl(idene)
    chloride: Subject matter under subclass 242 wherein the ethylenic reactant
    contains chlorine and is other than vinyl(idene) chloride, e.g.,
    chloroprene, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    317+,   for solid polymer derived from vinyl or vinylidene chloride.


CLS 525/293
TXT Ethylenic material contains a nitrogen atom and is other than
    (meth)acrylonitrile:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 wherein the ethylenic material contains a
    nitrogen atom and is other than meth(acrylonitrile), e.g.,
    dimethylaminoethyl acrylate, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242,    for a solid polymer derived from methacrylonitrile or acrylonitrile.


CLS 525/294
TXT Block copolymer derived from nitrogen-containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 293 wherein the polymer is a block copolymer
    derived from a nitrogen-containing reactant.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for the grafting of a
    nitrogen-containing reactant onto a nonnitrogen containing block copolymer.


CLS 525/295
TXT Nitrogen atom is part of a nitrile group and is other than acrylonitrile or
    (meth)acrylonitrile:

    Subject matter under subclass 293 wherein the nitrogen atom is part of a
    nitrile group and is other than (meth)acrylonitrile, e.g., vinylidene
    cyanide, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    242,    for a solid polymer derived from methacrylonitrile or acrylonitrile.


CLS 525/296
TXT Nitrogen atom is part of an amide group:
    Subject matter under subclass 293 wherein a nitrogen atom is part of a
    carboxylic acid amide group, e.g., acrylamide, etc.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "carboxylic
    acid amide" under carboxylic acid or derivative.


CLS 525/297
TXT Ethylenic reactant contains a cycloaliphatic group:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 wherein the ethylenic reactant contains a
    cyclialophatic group, e.g., cyclopentene, etc.


CLS 525/298
TXT Ethylenic reactant contains an oxygen atom: Subject matter under subclass
    242 wherein the ethylenic reactant contains an oxygen atom, e.g., acrolein,
    etc.


CLS 525/299
TXT Block copolymer derived from oxygen-containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 298 wherein the polymer is a block copolymer
    derived from an ethylenic reactant containing an oxygen atom.

    (1)     Note.  The product obtained by grafting polymethyl vinyl ketone
    (via methyl vinyl ketone as reactant) onto styrene-butadiene block
    copolymer is not classified here but in subclass 300.  However, the product
    obtained by block copolymerizing methyl vinyl ketone-polystyrene is
    classified here. To be proper for this subclass, the block copolymer must
    be derived from an unsaturated oxygen-containing reactant.


CLS 525/300
TXT Oxygen atom is part of a ketone or ketene group:

    Subject matter under subclass 298 wherein the oxygen atom is part of a
    ketone or ketene group, e.g., methyl vinyl ketone, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Ketene readily forms a dimer known as diketene.  Chemical
    studies indicate that diketene is composed mainly of vinylaceto-B-lactone
    (I) and B-crotonalactone (II).  Therefore, a patent   disclosing,

            that a ketene dimer was used as a reactant would be classified in
    subclass 284, a chalcogen heterocycle.


CLS 525/301
TXT Oxygen atom is part of a carboxylic acid group:

    Subject matter under subclass 298 wherein the oxygen atom is part of a
    carboxylic acid group, e.g., acrylic acid, etc.


CLS 525/301.5
TXT Unsaturated fatty acid derived from a naturally occurring glyceride, tall
    oil, or an unsaturated fatty acid derived from tall oil:

    Subject matter under subclass 301 wherein the carboxylic acid group
    containing ethylenic reactant is an unsaturated aliphatic acyclic
    monocarboxylic acid derived from a naturally occurring fatty glyceride or
    is derived from tall oil or is tall oil, per se.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "fatty acid"
    and the other materials proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302+,   for a fatty acid glycerol ester.

    305,    for systems wherein the ester containing at least two carboxylic
    acid groups is a naturally occurring di- or tri-glyceride, e.g., linseed
    oil, castor oil, etc.


CLS 525/302
TXT Oxygen atom is part of a carboxylic acid ester group:

    Subject matter under subclass 298 wherein the oxygen atom is part of a
    carboxylic acid ester group, e.g., vinyl benzoate, etc.


CLS 525/303
TXT Ester contains an oxygen atom other than as a carboxylic acid ester group:

    Subject matter under subclass 302 wherein the carboxylic acid ester
    contains a noncarboxylic acid ester type oxygen atom, e.g., 2-hydroxyethyl
    acrylate diethyleneglycol di-acrylate (O(CH2- OCOCH=CH2)2), etc.


CLS 525/304
TXT Ester contains at least two carboxylic acid ester groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 302 wherein the carboxylic acid ester
    contains at least two carboxylic acid ester groups, e.g., dimethyl maleate,
    etc.


CLS 525/305
TXT Ester is derived from a polyol:

    Subject matter under subclass 304 wherein the carboxylic acid ester is
    derived from a polyol, e.g., ethylene glycol diacrylate, etc.


CLS 525/306
TXT Ester is derived from an unsaturated alcohol:

    Subject matter under subclass 304 wherein the carboxylic acid ester is
    derived from an unsaturated alcohol, e.g., diallyl maleate, diallyl
    succinate, etc.


CLS 525/307
TXT Ester is derived from an unsaturated carboxylic acid and an unsaturated
    alcohol: Subject matter under subclass 302 wherein the carboxylic acid
    ester is derived from an unsaturated carboxylic acid and an unsaturated
    alcohol, e.g., allyl methacrylate, etc.


CLS 525/308
TXT Ester is derived from an unsaturated carboxylic acid:

    Subject matter under subclass 302 wherein the carboxylic acid ester is
    derived from an unsaturated carboxylic acid, e.g., methyl methacrylate, etc.


CLS 525/309
TXT Ester derived from an unsaturated carboxylic acid is reacted in the
    presence of a solid polymer:

    Subject matter under subclass 308 wherein the unsaturated ester is reacted
    in the presence of a solid polymer.

    (1)     Note.  The ester may also be present in the solid polymer, but it
    must be present either as an unpolymerized reactant or as a liquid polymer,
    e.g., poly(styrene-methyl methacrylate) is treated with either butyl
    acrylate or liquid poly(methyl acrylate), etc.


CLS 525/310
TXT Ester reactant derived from an unsaturated carboxylic acid is reacted in
    the presence of a solid polymer substrate derived from a polyene
    hydrocarbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 309 wherein the solid polymer is derived from
    a plural unsaturated hydrocarbon reactant, e.g., grafting methyl acrylate
    onto solid poly(butadiene-styrene).


CLS 525/311
TXT Ester reactant derived from an unsaturated alcohol is reacted in the
    presence of a solid polymer:

    Subject matter under subclass 302 wherein a carboxylic acid ester reactant
    derived from an unsaturated alcohol is reacted in the presence of a solid
    polymer, e.g., contacting poly(acrylonitrile-styrene) with vinyl acetate,
    etc.


CLS 525/312
TXT Oxygen atom is part of an ether group:
    Subject matter under subclass 298 wherein the oxygen atom is part of an
    ether group, e.g., divinyl ether, etc.


CLS 525/313
TXT Ethylenic reactant contains at least two unsaturated groups and is devoid
    of an aromatic group:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 wherein the ethylenic reactant contains
    at least two unsaturated groups and is free of an aromatic group, e.g.,
    mixing polyvinylchloride with butadiene, etc.


CLS 525/314
TXT Block copolymer derived from reactant containing at least two unsaturated
    groups and is free of an aromatic group:

    Subject matter under subclass 313 wherein the polymer is a block copolymer
    derived from an ethylenic reactant containing at least two ethylenic groups
    which ethylenic reactant is free of an aromatic group, e.g., block
    copolymer of (polybutadiene-polypropylene).

    (1)     Note.  To be proper for this subclass the block copolymer itself
    must be derived from a necessary reactant for this subclass.  Treating a
    block copolymer derived from styrene and acrylonitrile with a nonaromatic
    plural unsaturated reactant is classified in subclasses 313+.


CLS 525/315
TXT Ethylenic reactant reacted in the presence of a solid polymer substrate
    derived from reactant containing two unsaturated groups and is devoid of an
    aromatic group:

    Subject matter under subclass 313 wherein the initial solid polymer derived
    from a reactant containing at least two ethylenic groups and is free of an
    aromatic group and which solid polymer is reacted with an ethylenic
    reactant.


CLS 525/316
TXT Ethylenic reactant is an aromatic hydrocarbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 315 wherein the ethylenic reactants reacted
    with the solid polymer is an aromatic reactant, e.g.,
    poly(butadiene-styrene) reacted with styrene, etc.


CLS 525/317
TXT Ethylenic reactant is vinyl(idene) chloride:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 wherein the ethylenic reactant is vinyl
    chloride or vinylidene chloride.


CLS 525/318
TXT Block copolymer derived from vinyl(idene) chloride:

    Subject matter under subclass 317 wherein the polymer is a block copolymer
    derived from vinyl chloride or vinylidene chloride.

    (1)     Note.  To be proper for this subclass, the initial block copolymer
    must be derived from vinyl or vinylidene chloride.


CLS 525/319
TXT Ethylenic reactant is acyclic hydrocarbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 wherein the ethylenic reactant is an
    acyclic hydrocarbon.


CLS 525/320
TXT Acyclic hydrocarbon contains five or more carbon atoms:

    Subject matter under subclass 319 wherein the acyclic hydrocarbon contains
    at least five carbon atoms, e.g., 4-methyl-hexene-1, etc.


CLS 525/321
TXT Block copolymer derived from acyclic hydrocarbon containing five or more
    carbon atoms:

    Subject matter under subclass 320 wherein the polymer is a block copolymer
    derived from an unsaturated acyclic reactant having at least five carbon
    atoms.

    (1)     Note.  To be proper for this subclass, the initial block copolymer
    must be derived from an acyclic hydrocarbon containing five or more carbon
    atoms.


CLS 525/322
TXT Acyclic hydrocarbon is propylene:

    Subject matter under subclass 319 wherein the acyclic hydrocarbon is
    propylene.


CLS 525/323
TXT Block copolymer derived from propylene:
    Subject matter under subclass 322 wherein the polymer is a block copolymer
    derived from propylene.

    (1)     Note.  To be proper for this subclass, the initial block copolymer
    must be derived from propylene.


CLS 525/324
TXT Acyclic hydrocarbon is ethylene:

    Subject matter under subclass 319 wherein the acyclic reactant is ethylene.


CLS 525/326.1
TXT Chemically after treated solid polymers derived from ethylenically
    unsaturated monomers only:

    Product under subclass 55 wherein a solid polymer solely derived from
    ethylenically unsaturated monomers has been chemically modified by a
    treatment in the presence of a chemical treating agent.

    (1)     Note.  The following rules apply in classifying a claim into this
    area of the Class 525 schedule:

    (A)     For purposes of clarification in this part of the schedule,
    subclasses 326.1 to 334.1 are deemed to be chemically modified product
    subclasses; and subclasses 337 to 388 are deemed to be chemical
    modification process subclasses.

    (B)     Patents that claim a chemically treated product and process,
    wherein both the product and the process are specifically provided for in
    the schedule, are classified in the product area (326.1 to 334.1) and cross
    referenced to the process area (337 to 388).

    (C)     Patents that claim both a product (326.1 to 334.1) and a provided
    for process (337 to 388) and wherein the product is claimed in process
    terms are classified on the basis of the product (326.1 to 334.1) and
    cross-referenced to the process (337 to 388) on the basis of the chemical
    treating agent first appearing in the classification hierarchy; see also
    (5) Note (A) infra.

    (D)     Patents that claim a chemically modified product solely in process
    terms are classified on the basis of the product (326.1 to 334.1) and are
    desireably cross-referenced to the process (337 to 388) on the basis of the
    chemical treating agent first appearing in the classification hierarchy.

    (E)     Patents that claim nominally vulcanized, cured or crosslinked solid
    polymers from ethylenic monomers only, (or nominal process claims directed
    to vulcanizing, curing or cross-linking) are classified as polymers as
    appropriate in Class 526; see also Class 526, subclass 72 (1) Note (A8).

    (F)     Patents that claim vulcanized, cured or cross-linked solid polymers
    from ethylenic monomers only, wherein the vulcanizing, curing or
    cross-linking agent is identified by an atom (e.g., sulfur containing
    vulcanizing agent, etc.), by an amount (e.g., cured using 2% by weight of a
    vulcanizing agent, etc.) or by a significant process step (e.g., cured by
    heating to 605C in presence of a vulcanizing agent, etc.) are classified as
    chemically modified products (326.1 to 334.1).



    (2)     Note.  Claims to an aftertreated product are classified on the
    basis of the initial monomers or monomers that are polymerized; except
    where certain chemical modifications or chemical treating agents are
    specifically provided for as an indented subclass under a monomer.  In
    certain cases this determination is made from the disclosure.  An example
    of such a situation is a treated halogenated polyethylene wherein the
    disclosure recites halogenation of a previously formed polyethylene
    polymer.  In this case, classification is made on the basis of polyethylene
    rather than on halogenated polyethylene.

    (3)     Note.  Vulcanizable compositions are not subject matter for this
    subclass unless prior to the vulcanization or cross-linking step there is
    present a chemically modified solid polymer derived from ethylenic monomers
    only.

    (4)     Note.  The final product need not contain an atom of the chemical
    treating agent employed. For example, polyvinyl chloride which has been
    treated with a dehalogenating agent, is classified in subclass 331.5.

    (5)     Note.  Examples of patent placement within this and the indented
    subclasses.  Patentee claims:

    (A)     Polyethylene which has been chlorosulfonated by treatment with SO2
    and CL2 at elevated temperature and pressure.  There are also claims
    directed to this process of chlorosulfonation of polyethylene.  The
    original classification is in subclass 333.9 with a mandatory
    cross-reference to subclass 344.  This represents an inversion of the
    classification rule and process versus product in hierarchy of class 526.

    (B)     A vulcanizable polyethylene composition comprising a mixture of
    polyethylene and zinc oxide as vulcanizing agent.  The original
    classification is with the process subclass 373 since this product claim
    does not encompass a chemically modified solid polymer.

    (C)     A vulcanizable chlorosulfonated polyethylene composition comprising
    a mixture of chlorosulfonated polyethYlene and zinc oxide as vulcanizing
    agent.  Disclosure states that the chlorosulfonated polyethylene is
    prepared by modification of previously formed solid polyethylene.  The
    original classification of this product is in  subclass 333.9 since the
    product claim encompasses a chemically modified solid polymer, i.e.,
    chlorosulfonated polyethylene.

    (6)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition of Chemical Treating
    Agent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    337     through 388, for vulcanizable or cross-linkable compositions

    SEARCH CLASS:

    526,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 78+ for process of
    adding material to the zone of an ongoing polymerization of ethylenically
    unsaturated monomers.  Such added materials are often identified as chain
    stoppers, chain terminators or chain transfer agents.



    (7)     Note.  For purpose of this subclass, material which is solely
    described as a rubber or elastomer is presumed to be a diene rubber, and is
    therefor proper for subclass 333.1 indented hereunder.

    (8)     Note.  A material is presumed to be a rubber if it is described as
    an elastomer or if Mooney viscosity is given.


CLS 525/326.2
TXT Polymer derived from fluorine monomer:

    Products under subclass 326.1 wherein a solid polymer derived from a
    fluorine containing ethylenic unsaturated monomer has been chemically
    modified.


CLS 525/326.3
TXT Vulcanized or crosslinked in presence of chemical treating agent:

    Products under subclass 326.2 wherein a chemical modification is described
    as vulcanization or cross-linking using a chemical treating agent.

    (1)     Note.  The terms curing or hardening are presumed to be synonymous
    with vulcanizing or cross-linking in the absence of disclosure to the
    contrary. For the instant subclass, any other language will be sufficient
    which shows that the chemical modification changes the system from
    thermoplastic (or soluble) to thermosetting (or insoluble).  The term
    chain-extending is presumed not to express cross-linking in the absence of
    disclosure to the contrary.

    (2)     Note.  Vulcanizable compositions are not subject matter for this
    subclass unless prior to the vulcanization or cross-linking step there is
    present a chemically modified solid polymer derived from ethylenic monomers
    only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    337     through 388, for vulcanizable or cross-linkable compositions.


CLS 525/326.4
TXT Halogen containing chemical treating agent; or dehalogenated:

    Product under subclass 326.2 wherein a halogen containing treating agent is
    employed; or wherein a chemical treating agent is present during a step of
    removal of halogen.


CLS 525/326.5
TXT Polymer derived from silicon monomer:
    Product under subclass 326.1 wherein a solid polymer derived from a silicon
    containing ethylenic unsaturated monomer has been chemically modified.


CLS 525/326.6
TXT Polymer derived from monomer containing atom other than:  C, H, N, O, S,
    halogen or group IA or IIA carboxylate:

    Product under subclass 326.1 wherein the solid polymer which has been
    chemically modified is derived from a monomer which contains an atom other
    than C, H, N, O, S, halogen, or carboxylates of groups IA or IIA metals.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are for example monomers which contain
    phosphorus, etc.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 525 subclass 366 for the definition of Group IA
    and IIA metals.


CLS 525/326.7
TXT Polymer derived from monomer containing nitrogen atom as part of a
    heterocyclic ring:

    Product under subclass 326.1 wherein a solid polymer which has been
    chemically modified is derived from a monomer which contains a nitrogen
    atom as part of a heterocyclic ring.


CLS 525/326.8
TXT Oxygen atom in ring or bonded directly to the nuclear carbon of ring
    monomer:

    Product under subclass 326.7 wherein the heterocyclic monomer contains (1)
    an oxygen atom in the hetero ring, or (2) an oxygen atom directly attached
    to a nuclear carbon atom of the hetero ring.


CLS 525/326.9
TXT Lactam monomer, e.g., vinyl pyrrolidone, etc.:

    Product under subclass 326.8 wherein the heterocyclic monomer is a lactam.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition of the term "lactam".


CLS 525/327.1
TXT 6 membered ring containing 5 carbons and 1 nitrogen monomer, e.g.,
    vinyl pyridine, etc.

    Product under subclass 326.7 wherein the heterocyclic monomer contains a 6
    membered ring having 5 carbons and 1 nitrogen atom.


CLS 525/327.2
TXT Polymer derived from monomer containing chalcogen as part of heterocyclic
    ring other than soley as cyclic anhydride of ethlenically unsaturated
    dicarboxylic acid: Product under subclass 326.1 wherein a solid polymer
    which has been chemically modified is derived from a monomer which contains
    chalcogen as part of a heterocyclic ring and other than solely as a cyclic
    anhydride of an ethylenically unsaturated dicarboxylic acid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327.4,  for chemically modified solid polymers derived from cyclic
    anhydrides of ethylenic dicarboxylic acids.


CLS 525/327.3
TXT Three membered chalcogen ring monomer, e.g., oxirane, etc.

    Product under subclass 327.2 wherein the heterocyclic monomer contains a
    three membered ring having two carbons and one chalcogen atom.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is e.g., glycidyl acrylate, etc.


CLS 525/327.4
TXT Polymer derived from carboxylic acid anhydride monomer:

    Product under subclass 326.1 wherein a solid polymer which has been
    chemically modified is derived from a monomer which has a carboxylic acid
    anhydride group.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition of the term carboxylic
    acid anhydride.


CLS 525/327.5
TXT Sulfur containing chemical treating agent:

    Product under subclass 327.4 wherein a sulfur containing chemical treating
    agent has been employed.


CLS 525/327.6
TXT Nitrogen containing chemical treating agent other than unsubstituted
    ammonium as sole nitrogen:

    Product under subclass 327.4 wherein a nitrogen containing chemical
    treating agent other than an unsubstituted ammonium compound has been
    employed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327.8,  for use of unsubstituted ammonium compound as a hydrolyzing or
    neutralizing agent.


CLS 525/327.7
TXT Esterified, i.e., preparation of COOR linkage:

    Product under subclass 327.4 wherein a chemical modification of the solid
    polymer is described as esterification.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass, esterification denotes
    formation of a carboxylic acid ester groupOR, e.g., lactone structure, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Reaction of carboxylic anhydride group with an alkylene
    oxide group is presumed to be esterification.


CLS 525/327.8
TXT Hydrolyzed; neutralized; or metal containing chemical treating agent:

    Product under subclass 327.4 wherein a chemical modification of the solid
    polymer is described as hydrolysis or neutralization; or wherein a metal
    containing chemical treating agent has been employed.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass, hydrolysis relates to
    addition of water to open the anhydride structure with formation of two
    carboxyl groups.  In the absence of disclosure otherwise, treatment of
    anhydride with an aqueous system is presumed to result in a hydrolysis of
    the anhydride structure.

    (2)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass, neutralization relates to the
    reaction of an acid group, e.g., carboxyl, phosphonic, etc., with a base to
    form a salt.  The bases include alkali, alkaline earth, or ammonium
    hydroxides.

    (3)     Note.  The metal containing chemical treating agent need only be
    present during a chemical modification step; included in this subclass,
    however, are systems wherein a metal atom becomes chemically bonded to the
    solid polymer. The chemical bond can be ionic or covalent in nature, or any
    of the "complex" bonding mechanisms as in ii (pi) bonding, coordination,
    etc.


CLS 525/327.9
TXT Polymer for unsaturated petroleum hydrocarbon fraction as monomer:

    Product under subclass 326.1 wherein a solid polymer which has been
    chemically modified is prepared by the polymerization of a mixture of
    hydrocarbons derived from a petroleum hydrocarbon fraction.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes chemically modified polymers wherein
    added material is interpolymerized with a petroleum hydrocarbon fraction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327.2,  for chemically modified interpolymer of coumarone and indene.

    332.1,  for a chemically modified polymer derived from a diene monomer
    wherein at least one monomer contains a fused or bridged ring or at least
    one cycloaliphatic structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    526,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 290 for the
    polymerization of a mixture of hydrocarbons derived from a petroleum
    hydrocarbon fraction.


CLS 525/328.1
TXT Polymer derived from acetylenic monomer:

    Product under subclass 326.1 wherein a solid polymer which has been
    chemically modified is derived from an acetylenic monomer.


CLS 525/328.2
TXT Polymer derived from monomer containing nitrogen other than: unsubstituted
    ammonium, acrylonitrile, acrylamide, methylolacrylamide, and the
    corresponding methacryl materials: Product under subclass 326.1 wherein the
    solid polymer which has been chemically modified is derived from a nitrogen
    containing monomer other than:   NH4+ as sole nitrogen, acrylonitrile,
    acrylamide, methylol acrylamide, methacrylonitrile, mathacrylamide and
    methylol methacrylamide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    328.8,  for methylol acrylamide or methylol methacrylamide polymers.

    329.1+, for acrylonitrile or methacrylonitrile polymers.

    329.4+, for acrylamide or methacrylamide polymers.

    329.5+  and 329.9+, for polymers derived from NH4+ containing salt monomers.


CLS 525/328.3
TXT At least one monomer containing two or more ethylenic groups:

    Product under subclass 328.2 wherein at least one monomer contains two or
    more ethylenic groups.


CLS 525/328.4
TXT Monomer containing two or more nitrogen atoms, or two or more nitrogen
    containing monomers:

    Product under subclass 328.2 wherein a monomer contains two or more
    nitrogen atoms; or wherein there are two or more nitrogen containing
    monomers.

    (1)     Note.  The additional nitrogen containing monomer can be any
    ethylenic monomer which contains nitrogen, including those excluded from
    subclass 328.2.


CLS 525/328.5
TXT Polymer derived from sulfur monomer:
    Product under subclass 326.1 wherein the chemically modified solid polymer
    is derived from a sulfur containing thylenic monomer.


CLS 525/328.6
TXT Polymer derived from ketone monomer:
    Product under subclass 326.1 wherein the chemically modified solid polymer
    is derived from an ethylenically unsaturated ketone.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition of ketone.


CLS 525/328.7
TXT Polymer derived from aldehyde monomer:

    Product under subclass 326.1 wherein the chemically modified solid polymer
    is derived an ethylenic monomer which is an aldehyde.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition of aldehyde.


CLS 525/328.8
TXT Polymer derived from alcohol monomer:
    Product under subclass 326.1 wherein the chemically modified solid polymer
    is derived from an ethylenically unsaturated monomer which contains an
    alcohol group.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass, an alcohol group is defined
    as -C- OH where the C is not directly double bonded to another chalcogen
    atom. Included herein are for example allyl alcohol or vinyl salicylate.


CLS 525/328.9
TXT Polymer derived from ether monomer:

    Product under subclass 326.1 wherein the chemically modified solid polymer
    is derived from an ethylenically unsaturated ether monomer.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition of ether.


CLS 525/329.1
TXT Polymer derived from acrylonitrile or methacrylonitrile monomer:

    Product under subclass 326.1 wherein the chemically modified solid polymer
    is derived from acrylonitrile or methacrylonitrile monomer.


CLS 525/329.2
TXT Interpolymers:

    Product under subclass 329.1 wherein the solid polymer is derived from an
    additional ethylenic monomer interpolymerized with the acrylonitrile or
    methacrylonitrile.


CLS 525/329.3
TXT Contains monomer having two or more ethylenic groups:

    Product under subclass 329.2 wherein the solid interpolymer has been
    derived from at least one monomer containing two or more ethylenic groups.


CLS 525/329.4
TXT Polymer derived from acrylamide or methacrylamide monomer:

    Product under subclass 326.1 wherein the chemically modified solid polymer
    is derived from acrylamide or methacrylamide monomer.


CLS 525/329.5
TXT Polymer derived from carboxylic acid or derivative monomer other than:
    vinyl acetate; or acrylic-or methacrylic-acid, or derivatives: Product
    under subclass 326.1 wherein the solid polymer, which has been chemically
    modified, is obtained from an ethylenic monomer which is a carboxylic acid
    or derivative other than:  vinyl acetate; or acrylic or methacrylic acid or
    derivatives.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition of the terms carboxylic
    acid and carboxylic acid derivative.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    329.7+  and 330.3+, for chemically modified solid polymers based upon
    derivatives of acrylic or methacrylic acid, e.g., acrylyl chloride or ethyl
    acrylate, etc. and subclasses 330.3+ for polymers derived from vinyl
    acetate.


CLS 525/329.6
TXT Butene dioic acid or derivative monomer:

    Product under subclass 329.5 wherein the carboxylic acid monomer is a
    butene dioic acid or derivative.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass, butene dioic acid is defined
    as a dicarboxylic acid having only four carbon atoms and one ethylenic
    unsaturation.

    (2)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition of the terms "carboxylic
    acid derivative" and "ethylenically unsaturated".


CLS 525/329.7
TXT Polymer derived from acrylic or methacrylic acids, acid halides or salt
    monomers:

    Product under subclass 326.1 wherein the chemically modified solid polymer
    is derived from acrylic or methacrylic acids, acrylic or methacrylic acid
    halide or salt monomers thereof.


CLS 525/329.8
TXT Sulfur or phosphorous containing chemical treating agent:

    Product under subclass 329.7 wherein a sulfur or phosphorous containing
    chemical treating agent has been employed.


CLS 525/329.9
TXT Nitrogen containing chemical treating agent:

    Product under subclass 329.7 wherein a nitrogen containing chemical
    treating agent is employed.


CLS 525/330.1
TXT Esterified, i.e., preparation of COOR linkage:

    Product under subclass 329.7 wherein a chemical modification of the solid
    polymer is described as esterification.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass, esterification denotes
    formation of a carboxylic acid ester groupOR.

    (2)     Note.  Reaction of carboxylic acid group with an alkylene oxide
    group is presumed to be esterification.

    (3)     Note.  Included herein is formation of e.g., lactone structures,
    etc.


CLS 525/330.2
TXT Hydrolyzed; neutralized; or metal containing chemical treating agent:

    Product under subclass 329.7 wherein a chemical modification of the solid
    polymer is described as hydrolysis or neutralization; or wherein a metal
    containing chemical treating agent has been employed.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass, hydrolysis relates to the
    addition of water to a carboxylic acid chloride or carboxylic acid ester to
    form a free carboxyl group.



    Chemical treatment of acid chloride containing polymer with an aqueous
    system is presumed to be hydrolysis in absence of disclosure otherwise.



    Chemical treatment of ester containing polymer with aqueous acid or base is
    presumed to be hydrolysis in absence of disclosure otherwise.

    (2)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass, neutralization relates to
    reaction of an acid group, e.g., carboxyl, etc., with a base to form a
    salt.  The bases include alkali or alkaline earth hydroxides.

    (3)     Note.  The metal containing chemical treating agent need only be
    present during a chemical modification step; included in this subclass
    however, are systems wherein a metal atom becomes chemically bonded to the
    solid polymer. The chemical bond can be ionic or covalent in nature, or any
    of the "complex" bonding mechanisms as in ii (PI) bonding, coordination,
    etc.


CLS 525/330.3
TXT Polymer derived from acrylic or methacylic ester or vinyl acetate monomer:

    Product under subclass 326.1 wherein the chemically modified solid polymer
    is derived from ethylenically unsaturated carboxylic ester monomer; i.e.,
    vinyl acetate; or acrylic or methacrylic esters.


CLS 525/330.4
TXT Sulfur or phosphorus containing chemical treating agent:

    Product under subclass 330.3 wherein a sulfur or phosphorus containing
    chemical treating agent has been employed.


CLS 525/330.5
TXT Nitrogen containing chemical treating agent:

    Product under subclass 330.3 wherein a nitrogen containing chemical
    treating agent has been employed.


CLS 525/330.6
TXT Alcoholized; transesterified; hydrolyzed; or metal containing chemical
    treating agent; e.g., saponified, etc.:

    Product under subclass 330.3 wherein a chemical modification of the solid
    polymer is described as alcoholysis, transesterification, or hydrolysis; or
    wherein a metal containing chemical treating agent has been employed.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass, alcohoysis relates to the
    reaction of an alcohol with a carboxylic acid ester to yield a new ester
    and alcohol.

    (2)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass transesterification or ester
    interchange relates to reaction of two esters to form two new esters by
    exchange of alcohol residues.

    (3)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass, hydrolysis relates to
    addition of water to an ester to form an alcohol and a carboxylic acid.
    This reaction can be either acid or base catalysed.

    (4)     Note.  Alkaline hydrolysis of an ester is called saponification.


CLS 525/330.7
TXT Polymer derived from halogen monomer:
    Product under subclass 326.1 wherein the chemically modified solid polymer
    has been derived from halogen containing ethylenically unsaturated monomer.


CLS 525/330.8
TXT At least one monomer contains two or more ethylenic groups:

    Product under subclass 330.7 wherein at least one monomer contains two or
    more ethylenic groups.

    (1)     Note.  The monomer containing two or more double bonds need not
    contain halogen.


CLS 525/330.9
TXT Vulcanized or crosslinked, in the presence of a chemical treating agent,
    e.g., cured, etc:

    Products under subclass 330.8 wherein a chemical modification is described
    as vulcanization or cross-linking using a chemical treating agent.

    (1)     Note.  The terms curing or hardening are presumed to be synonymous
    with vulcanizing or cross-linking in the absence of disclosure to the
    contrary. For the instant subclass, any other language will be sufficient
    which shows that the chemical modification changes the system from
    thermoplastic (or soluble) to thermosetting (or insoluble).  The term
    chain-extending is presumed not to express cross-linking in the absence of
    disclosure to the contrary.

    (2)     Note.  Vulcanizable compositions are not subject matter for this
    subclass unless prior to the vulcanization or cross-linking step there is
    present a chemically modified solid polymer derived from ethylenic monomers
    only.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    337     through 388, for vulcanizable or cross-linkable compositions.


CLS 525/331.1
TXT Nitrogen containing chemical treating agent:

    Product under subclass 330.9 wherein a nitrogen containing material is
    present as chemical treating agent.


CLS 525/331.2
TXT Halogen containing chemical treating agent:

    Product under subclass 330.8 wherein a halogen containing chemical treating
    agent has been employed.


CLS 525/331.3
TXT Nitrogen containing chemical treating agent:

    Product under subclass 330.8 wherein a nitrogen containing chemical
    treating agent has been employed.


CLS 525/331.4
TXT Monomer contains chlorine:

    Product under subclass 330.7 wherein at least one ethylenically unsaturated
    monomer contains chlorine.


CLS 525/331.5
TXT Vinyl chloride or vinylidene chloride:

    Product under subclass 331.4 wherein the chlorine containing monomer is
    vinyl chloride or vinylidene chloride.


CLS 525/331.6
TXT Halogen containing chemical treating agent:

    Product under subclass 331.5 wherein a halogen containing chemical treating
    agent has been employed.


CLS 525/331.7
TXT Ethylene-propylene terpolymer, e.g., EPT, EPDM, EPR, etc.:

    Product under subclass 326.1 wherein the solid polymer which has been
    chemically modified is an ethylene-propylene terpolymer.

    (1)     Note.  An ethylene-propylene terpolymer has at least one monomer in
    addition to ethylene and propylene.

    (2)     Note.  Ethylene-propylene terpolymers are often described as
    ethylene-propylene terpolymer rubber, e.g., EPT OR EPDM rubber.

    (3)     Note.  Chemically modified material solely described as
    ethylene-propylene rubber (EPR) is placed herein as a terpolymer since a
    rubber is to be treated as a diene polymer in the absence of disclosure to
    the contrary; compare with the definition of subclass 331.9, (1) Note.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333.7,  for chemically modified copolymer of ethylene with propylene.


CLS 525/331.8
TXT Sulfur containing chemical treating agent:

    Product under subclass 331.7 wherein a sulfur containing chemical treating
    agent is employed.


CLS 525/331.9
TXT Polymer derived from monomer containing at least two ethylenic groups or
    diene rubber:

    Product under subclass 326.1 wherein the solid polymer, which has been
    chemically modified, is either described as a diene rubber or is derived
    from a monomer which contains at least two ethylenic groups.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass, material which is solely
    described as a rubber or elastomer is presumed to be a diene rubber, and is
    therefor proper for subclass 333.1.

    (2)     Note.  A material is presumed to be a rubber if it is described as
    an elastomer or if a Mooney viscosity is given.

    (3)     Note.  A material merely described as a rubber without describing
    the constituents thereof is proper for subclass 333.1


CLS 525/332.1
TXT Monomer contains non-conjugated diene group, or at least one fused or
    bridged ring or at least one cycloaliphatic structure:

    Product under subclass 331.9 wherein said diene monomer contains
    nonconjugated ethylenic groups, or wherein at least one monomer contains a
    fused or bridged ring or a cycloaliphatic structure.

    (1)     Note.  Nonconjugated ethylenic groups denotes monomers wherein two
    or more ethylenically unsaturated groups are (a) separated from each other
    either by an aromatic ring, e.g., divinyl benzene, or (b) separated by at
    least one carbon atom of an acyclic carbon chain which carbon atom is not
    part of a methine group, e.g., -C=C-C-C=C-, etc., or (c) wherein two
    ethylenically unsaturated groups share a single carbon atom, etc.,  C=C=C

    (2)     Note.  Included herein are monomers containing ethylene groups
    which are


            both conjugated an nonconjugated, e.g., myrcene:

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333.3,  for chemically after treated solid copolymers of aromatic
    hydrocarbon monomers with monomers containing a fused or bridged ring or a
    cycloaliphatic structure and only one ethylenic group.


CLS 525/332.2
TXT Divinyl  benzene:

    Product under subclass 332.1 wherein the nonconjugated ethylene monomer is
    divinyl benzene.

    (1)     Note.  Divinyl benzene is often described as a cross-linking agent
    for a base polymer, e.g., polystyrene cross-linked with divinyl benzene,
    etc.  Such systems will be presumed to have been prepared by
    interpolymerization of, e.g., styrene monomer with monomeric divinyl
    benzene in absence of specific disclosure that the divinyl benzene is
    reacted with the previously formed base polymer; compare subclasses
    525/242+.


CLS 525/332.3
TXT Halogen containing chemical treating agent:

    Product under subclass 331.9 wherein a halogen containing chemical treating
    agent has been employed.


CLS 525/332.4
TXT Sulfur containing chemical treating agent:

    Product under subclass 332.3 wherein a sulfur containing material is
    present as a chemical treating agent.

    (1)     Note.  Said sulfur containing material may be either a halogenating
    agent or an additional nonhalogen containing material.


CLS 525/332.5
TXT Vulcanized in the presence of a chemical treating agent, e.g., cured,
    crosslinked, etc.:

    Product under subclass 331.9 wherein said solid polymer is vulcanized in
    the presence of a chemical treating agent.

    (1)     Note.  The terms curing or hardening are presumed to be synonymous
    with vulcanizing or cross-linking in absence of disclosure to the contrary.
     For the instant subclass, any other language will be sufficient which
    shows that the chemical modification changes the system from thermoplastic
    (or soluble) to thermosetting (or insoluble).  The term chain-extending is
    presumed not to express cross-linking in absence of disclosure to contrary.


CLS 525/332.6
TXT Sulfur containing chemical treating agent:

    Product under subclass 332.5 wherein a sulfur containing material is
    present as a chemical treating agent.


CLS 525/332.7
TXT Nitrogen containing chemical treating agent:

    Product under subclass 332.6 wherein a nitrogen containing material is
    present as a chemical treating agent.

    (1)     Note.  The nitrogen atom can be present as a separate compound or
    as part of the sulfur containing material.


CLS 525/332.8
TXT Interpolymer with aliphatic hydrocarbon monomer (includes additional diene
    monomer):

    Product under subclass 331.9 wherein said monomer containing at least two
    ethylenic groups is interpolymerized with an ethylenically unsaturated
    aliphatic hydrocarbon monomer.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are interpolymers of two or more aliphatic
    diene monomers.


CLS 525/332.9
TXT Interpolymer with aromatic hydrocarbon:

    Product under subclass 331.9 wherein said monomer containing at least two
    ethylenic groups is interpolymerized with an ethylenically unsaturated
    aromatic hydrocarbon monomer.


CLS 525/333.1
TXT Isoprene or diene rubber other than butadiene rubber:

    Product under subclass 331.9 wherein the solid polymer which has been
    chemically modified is described  as a diene rubber other than butadiene or
    is derived from isoprene monomer.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass, materials nominally described
    as a rubber or elastomer are presumed to be a diene rubber other than
    butadiene.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331.9,  for a rubbery copolymer of Butadiene.

    333.2,  for a rubbery homopolymer of Butadiene.


CLS 525/333.2
TXT Butadiene homopolymer:

    Product under subclass 332.1 wherein the sole monomer is butadelene, i.e.,
    butadiene homopolymer.


CLS 525/333.3
TXT Polymer derived from aromatic hydrocarbon monomer, e.g., styrene, etc.:

    Product under subclass 326.1 wherein the chemically modified solid polymer
    has been derived from an ethylenically unsaturated aromatic hydrocarbon
    monomer.


CLS 525/333.4
TXT Halogenated polymer:

    Product under subclass 333.3 wherein the said solid polymer has been
    halogenated.

    (1)     Note.  The halogen is introduced subsequent to formation of the
    solid polymer.

    (2)     Note.  Halogen must be present in the final product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333.6   for quaternized polystyrene produced by reacting an amine with post
    halogenated polystyrene produced by reacting an amine with post halogenated
    polystyrene followed by reaction with quaternizing agent.


CLS 525/333.5
TXT Sulfur containing chemical treating agent:

    Product under subclass 333.3 wherein a sulfur containing chemical treating
    agent has been employed.


CLS 525/333.6
TXT Nitrogen containing chemical treating agent:

    Product under subclass 333.3 wherein a nitrogen containing chemical
    treating agent has been employed.


CLS 525/333.7
TXT Polymer derived from acyclic hydrocarbon monomer only:

    Product under subclass 326.1 wherein the chemically modified solid polymer
    has been derived solely from an acyclic hydrocarbon monomer.


CLS 525/333.8
TXT Air, elemental oxygen, ozone or peroxide chemical:

    Product under subclass 333.7 wherein air, elemental oxygen, ozone or a
    peroxide compound has been employed as a chemical treating agent.


CLS 525/333.9
TXT Sulfur containing chemical treating agent:

    Product under subclass 333.7 wherein a sulfur containing chemical treating
    agent has been employed.


CLS 525/334.1
TXT Halogenated polymer:

    Product under subclass 333.7 wherein said solid polymer has been
    halogenated.

    (1)     Note.  The halogen is introduced subsequent to formation of the
    solid polymer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    570,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 101+, for acyclic halogenated
    hydrocarbons, e.g., halogenated liquid polyisobutylene, etc.


CLS 525/337
TXT Chemical treating agent contains boron or boron-containing compound other
    than boron trihalide or nonmetal complex thereof: Subject matter under
    subclass 55 wherein the chemical treating is performed in the presence of
    boron, per se, or in the presence of a boron-containing compound, said
    boron compound being other than (a) boron trihalide, per se, (b) or a boron
    trihalide complexed with a nonmetal organic moiety.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for boron trihalide ether, per se.

    385,    for a boron trihalide ether complex.


CLS 525/338
TXT Chemical treating agent contains elemental hydrogen or an elemental
    hydrogen-liberating compound, e.g., hydrogenation, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein the chemical treating is performed
    in the presence of hydrogen or in the presence of a hydrogen liberating
    compound, e.g., hydrogenating, etc.

    (1)     Note.  The hydrogen liberating compound must under the anticipated
    process conditions, liberate elemental hydrogen.

    (2)     Note.  The ionization of hydrogen containing materials is not
    considered as being an elemental hydrogen liberating process and such
    compounds are therefore classified elsewhere in the schedule.


CLS 525/339
TXT Treating in the presence of an elemental metal or inorganic metallic
    compound: Subject matter under subclass 338 wherein the chemical treating
    performed in the presence of an elemental metal or in the presence of an
    inorganic metal-containing compound.


CLS 525/340
TXT Chemical treating agent contains a phosphorus atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein the chemical treating is performed
    in the presence of a phosphorus or in the presence of a
    phosphorus-containing compound.


CLS 525/341
TXT Contains a sulfur atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 340 wherein the chemical treating is
    performed in the presence of a compound which contains at least one
    phosphorus atom and at least one sulfur atom.


CLS 525/342
TXT Chemical treating agent contains a silicon atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein the chemical treating is performed
    in the presence of silicon or in the presence of a silicon-containing
    compound.


CLS 525/343
TXT Chemical treating agent contains a sulfur atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein the chemical treating is performed
    in the presence of a sulfur-containing atom.


CLS 525/344
TXT Inorganic sulfur compound contains sulfur atom bonded to at least two
    oxygen atoms: Subject matter under subclass 343 wherein the chemical
    treating is performed in the presence of an inorganic sulfur compound which
    contains at least one sulfur atom bonded to at least two oxygen atoms.


CLS 525/345
TXT With peroxide, ozone, or free oxygen:
    Subject matter under subclass 343 wherein the chemical treating is
    performed in the presence of at least two materials, one of which is a
    sulfur-containing material, and one of which is free oxygen, ozone, or a
    compound containing an -O-O- group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes only those processes wherein there is
    a desired and intentional contact between air and the polymer to be treated.


CLS 525/346
TXT With sulfur-free organic compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 343 wherein the chemical treating is
    performed in the presence of at least two materials, one of which is a
    sulfur-containing material, and one of which is an organic compound which
    is devoid of sulfur atoms.


CLS 525/347
TXT Sulfur-free organic compound contains a heterocyclic nitrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 346 wherein the organic compound which is
    devoid of sulfur contains a nitrogen atom as a ring member of a
    heterocyclic ring compound.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "heterocyclic
    ring".


CLS 525/348
TXT Sulfur-containing heterocyclic compound:
    Subject matter under subclass 343 wherein the chemical treating is
    performed in the presence of a heterocyclic compound which contains at
    least one sulfur atom.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "heterocyclic
    compound".

    (2)     Note.  The sulfur atom for purposes of this subclass need not be
    part of the heterocyclic ring system.


CLS 525/349
TXT Heterocyclic ring contains sulfur and nitrogen atoms:

    Subject matter under subclass 348 wherein a compound containing at least
    one sulfur atom and at least one nitrogen atom as ring members of a single
    heterocyclic ring is present during a chemical treating operation.


CLS 525/350
TXT Mercaptan or mercaptide:

    Subject matter under subclass 343 wherein the chemical treating is
    performed in the presence of a mercaptan or mercaptide thereof.

    (1)     Note.  A mercaptan denotes an organic compound having the general
    structure -C-SH wherein the carbon atom bound to the sulfur atom of the
    thiol group is not double bonded to oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium,
    or triple bonded to nitrogen.

    (2)     Note.  A mercaptide denotes a salt of a mercaptan.


CLS 525/351
TXT Organic compound contains sulfur and nitrogen atoms:

    Subject matter under subclass 343 wherein the chemical treating is
    performed in the presence of an organic compound which contains at least
    one sulfur atom and at least one nitrogen atom.


CLS 525/352
TXT One or more sulfur atoms of the nitrogen-containing compound are double
    bonded to carbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 351 wherein the chemical treating is
    performed in the presence of an organic compound which contains at least
    one atom of sulfur and at least one nitrogen atom, with the proviso that at
    least one sulfur atom therein is double bonded to a carbon atom, i.e., .


CLS 525/353
TXT Sulfur compound contains sulfur atom bonded to at least two oxygen atoms,
    e.g., sulfonate, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 343 wherein the chemical treating is
    performed in the presence of a compound which has at least one sulfur atom
    bonded to at least two oxygen atoms, e.g., sulfonate, sulfate, etc.


CLS 525/354
TXT Elemental sulfur or inorganic sulfur compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 343 wherein the chemical treating is
    performed in the presence of elemental sulfur on in the presence of an
    inorganic sulfur-containing compound.


CLS 525/355
TXT Chemical treating agent contains hydrogen halide, elemental halogen,
    organic halogen-containing compound, or compound containing only halogen
    atoms:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein the chemical treating is performed
    in the presence of a compound containing only hydrogen and halogen atoms,
    or in the presence of elemental halogen, or in the presence of an organic
    halogen-containing compound; or in the presence of a compound solely
    composed of diverse halogen atoms.


CLS 525/356
TXT Treating in the presence of elemental halogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 355 wherein the chemical treating is
    performed in the presence of elemental halogen.


CLS 525/357
TXT Treating in the presence of a metal or metal containing compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 356 wherein the chemical treating is
    performed in the presence of a metal or metal-containing compound.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a clarification of the term "metal".


CLS 525/358
TXT Treating in the presence of water:

    Subject matter under subclass 356 wherein the chemical treating is
    performed in the presence of water.


CLS 525/359.1
TXT Treating in the presence of organic halogen-containing compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 355 wherein the chemical treating is
    performed in the presence of a halogen-containing organic compound.


CLS 525/359.2
TXT Organic halogen-containing compound contains a hetero ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 359.1 wherein the halogen-containing compound
    contains at least one nitrogen, sulfur, oxygen, selenium, or tellurium atom
    as part of a heterocyclic ring.


CLS 525/359.3
TXT Organic halogen-containing compound contains oxygen:

    Subject matter under subclass 359.1 wherein the halogen-containing compound
    contains at least one oxygen atom.


CLS 525/359.4
TXT Organic halogen-containing compound contains a (C=O)O group or an aromatic
    group:

    Subject matter under subclass 359.3 wherein said compound contains either a
    (C=O)O group or an aryl group.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    292,    for a halogenated benzoquinone.


CLS 525/359.5
TXT Organic halogen-containing compound contains only carbon, hydrogen, and
    halogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 359.1 wherein the chemical-treating compound
    contains either carbon, hydrogen and halogen only, or carbon and halogen
    only.


CLS 525/359.6
TXT Organic halogen-containing compound contains an aromatic group:

    Subject matter under subclass 359.5 wherein said chemical-treating compound
    contains at least one aryl group.


CLS 525/360
TXT Chemical treating agent contains elemental metal or metal-containing
    compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein the chemical treating is performed
    in the presence of an elemental metal or in the presence of a compound
    containing a metal.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a clarification of the term "metal".


CLS 525/361
TXT Two or more diverse elemental metals or compounds thereof; or same metal in
    two or more distinct compounds; or diverse metals in same compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 360 containing a compound which has two or
    more diverse metal atoms, or a mixture of two or more diverse elemental
    metals, or a mixture of the same or diverse metal atoms in two or more
    distinct compounds, or a mixture of an elemental metal and a metal compound.


CLS 525/362
TXT Elemental metal or inorganic compound thereof only:

    Subject matter under subclass 361 containing only elemental metals, or only
    inorganic metal compounds, or only an elemental metal and an inorganic
    metal compound.

    (1)     Note.  Compounds which are free of metal atoms are included herein
    when in admixture with elemental metals or inorganic metal compounds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    361,    for a mixture of an metal containing organic compound and an
    elemental metal or metal containing inorganic compound.


CLS 525/363
TXT Aluminum or group IIB (Zn, Cd, Hg) metal or compound thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 362 containing aluminum or a Group IIB (Zn,
    Cd, Hg) elemental metal or inorganic compound thereof.


CLS 525/364
TXT Organometallic compound and elemental metal or inorganic compound thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 361 containing at least one organometallic
    compound and at least an elemental metal or inorganic compound thereof.


CLS 525/365
TXT Aluminum metal or compound thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 364 containing elemental aluminum or a
    compound thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The aluminum atom can be in the form of a free metal or in
    the form of an inorganic or organic compound.


CLS 525/366
TXT Contains group IA (Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs, Fr) or group  IIA (Be, Mg, Ca, Sr,
    Ba, Ra) elemental metal or compound thereof: Subject matter under subclass
    360 containing a Group IA (Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs, Fr) or Group IIA (Be, Mg, Ca,
    Sr, Ba, Ra) elemental metal or compound thereof.


CLS 525/367
TXT Elemental metal or inorganic metal compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 366 containing an elemental metal or an
    inorganic compound thereof.


CLS 525/368
TXT Metal oxide:

    Subject matter under subclass 367 containing a metal oxide.

    (1)     Note.  Oxides for this subclass are binary compounds consisting of
    only a metal atom and oxygen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    361+,   for an oxide containing two diverse metal atoms.


CLS 525/369
TXT Metal hydroxide:

    Subject matter under subclass 367 containing an inorganic metal hydroxide,
    i.e., Me+OH-.


CLS 525/370
TXT Contains group IB (Cu, Ag, Au), IIB (Zn, Cd, Hg,) IIIA (Al, Ga, In, Tl), IV
    (Ti, Zr, Hf, Ge, Sn, Pb), and VIII (Fe, Co, Ni, Ru, Rh, Pd, Os, Ir, Pt)
    elemental metal or compound thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 360 containing a Group IB (Cu, Ag, Au), IIB
    (Zn, Cd, Hg), IIIA (Al, Ga, In, Tl) IVB (Ti, Zr, Hf), IVA (Ge, Sn, Pb) or
    Group VIII (Fe, Co, Ni, Ru, Rh, Pd, Os, Ir, Pt) metal atom.


CLS 525/371
TXT Elemental metal or inorganic compound thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 370 containing an elemental metal or
    inorganic compound thereof.


CLS 525/372
TXT Metal oxide:

    Subject matter under subclass 371 containing a metal oxide.

    (1)     Note.  Oxides for this subclass are binary compounds consisting of
    only a metal atom and oxygen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    361+,   for an oxide containing two diverse metal atoms.


CLS 525/373
TXT Group IIB metal (Zn, Cd, Hg) oxide:

    Subject matter under subclass 372 wherein the oxide is solely composed of a
    Group IIB (Zn, Cd, Hg) metal atom and oxygen.


CLS 525/374
TXT Chemical treating agent is a nitrogen-containing compound:

    Subject matter under subclass under subclass 55 wherein the chemical
    treating is performed in the presence of a nitrogen-containing compound.


CLS 525/375
TXT Contains nitrogen atom in a heterocyclic ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 374 wherein the chemical treating agent
    contains a compound having at least one atom of nitrogen and carbon in the
    same ring and wherein the other atoms of the ring may be oxygen, selenium,
    or tellurium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    343+,   for treating in the presence of a heterocyclic sulfur-containing
    compound.


CLS 525/376
TXT Nitrogen-containing compound has at least one nitrogen-to-nitrogen bond:

    Subject matter under subclass 374 wherein the nitrogen compound contains a
    nitrogen atom bonded to at least one atom of nitrogen, e.g., azo,
    hydrazine, N2F4, etc.


CLS 525/377
TXT Nitrogen-containing compound contains at least one nitrile or isonitrile
    group; or a nitrogen-to-oxygen bond which is other than as an amine or
    ammonium salt:

    Subject matter under subclass 374 wherein the chemical treating is
    performed in the presence of a compound containing a -C=N or a -N=C group,
    or wherein a nitrogen atom is directly bonded to an oxygen atom.


CLS 525/378
TXT Ammonia, ammonium hydroxide, or salts thereof:

    Treatment under subclass 374 wherein the nitrogen-containing compound is
    ammonia, ammonium hydroxide, or an organic or inorganic ammonium salt.


CLS 525/379
TXT Organic amine:

    Treatment under subclass 374 wherein the organic nitrogen compound contains
    an amine group.

    (1)     Note.  An amine denotes an organic compound having a nitrogen atom
    singly or double bonded to a carbon atom and wherein the carbon atom bonded
    to the nitrogen atom is devoid of a double bond to oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium or triple bond to nitrogen. In addition, those
    compounds wherein the same nitrogen atom is bonded to a () group (X is O,
    S, Se, or Te) and to a carbon atom which is not double-bonded to oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium, are not considered as being amines, e.g.,
    C-N, etc.  Although amides may be considered chemically as amines, it has
    been found expedient for these classes to exclude compounds containing only
    amide nitrogen herefrom.  Therefore, as used throughout this area, the term
    amide is not to be confused with an amine.  A compound, however, which
    contains a nitrogen atom bonded to a non  carbon atom and which contains
    either a nitrogen atom bonded to a () group or an amide group, is
    considered as being an amine, e.g., NH2NH-CH2-NH2,  etc.


CLS 525/380
TXT Amine contains a hydroxyl group:

    Subject matter under subclass 379 wherein the amine compound contains a
    hydroxyl group.

    (1)     Note.  A hydroxyl group is identical in meaning to an alcohol in
    the Glossary.


CLS 525/381
TXT Three or more amine groups:

    Treatment under subclass 379 wherein the amine compound contains three or
    more amine groups.

    (1)     Note.  An amine proper for this subclass requires (a) at least
    three distinct nitrogen atoms bonded to at least two distinct carbon atoms,
    or (b) the presence of at least three nitrogen atoms bonded to the same
    carbon atom. Each nitrogen atom single or double bonded is an amine group
    in the manner set forth above and consistent with the (1) Note in subclass
    379.


CLS 525/382
TXT Two amine groups:

    Treatment under subclass 379 wherein the amine compound contains two amine
    groups.

    (1)     Note.  An amine proper for this subclass requires (a) at least two
    distinct nitrogen atoms bonded to at least two distinct carbon atoms, or
    (b) the presence of at least two nitrogen atoms bonded to the same carbon
    atom. Each nitrogen atom single or double bonded as set forth above and
    consistent with the (1) Note in subclass 379, is an amine group.


CLS 525/383
TXT Chemical treating agent contains elemental oxygen or oxygen-containing
    compound: Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein the chemical treating is
    performed in the presence of oxygen or in the presence of an oxygen
    containing compound.


CLS 525/384
TXT Oxygen compound contains at least one alcohol group:

    Subject matter under subclass 383 wherein the chemical treating agent is an
    alcohol.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a clarification of the term "alcohol".


CLS 525/385
TXT Oxygen compound contains an ether group: Subject matter under subclass 383
    wherein the oxygen compound is an ether.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a clarification of the term "ether".


CLS 525/386
TXT Oxygen compound is a carboxylic acid, ester, anhydride, or lactone thereof:
    Subject matter under subclass 383 wherein the oxygen-containing compound is
    a carboxylic acid, ester thereof, anhydride thereof, or a lactone thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a clarification of the term "carboxylic
    acid, carboxylic acid ester, anhydride, or lactone".


CLS 525/387
TXT Oxygen compound contains a peroxy group (-O-O-):

    Subject matter under subclass 383 wherein the oxygen-containing compound
    contains at least one oxygen atom bonded directly to another oxygen atom,
    i.e., -O-O-.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    388,    for processes of treating in the presence of air, oxygen, or ozone.


CLS 525/388
TXT Specified oxygen-containing compound is air, elemental oxygen, or ozone:

    Subject matter under subclass 383 wherein the oxygen-containing compound is
    identified as air, as elemental oxygen, or as ozone.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes only those processes wherein there is
    a desired and intentional contact between air and the polymer to be treated.


CLS 525/389
TXT Solid polymer derived from reactant containing atoms other than C, H, N,
    Si, P, chalcogen, halogen, or an alkali or alkaline earth metal in salt
    form:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 involves the process of mixing a solid
    polymer derived from a reactant containing elements other than C, H, N, P,
    Si, chalcogen or halogen with an additional solid polymer, with specified
    polymer-forming ingredients, specified intermediate condensation product,
    chemical treating agent, or with an ethylenic agent; processes of reacting
    the above mixtures of products resulting from the mixing or reacting
    processes.

    (1)     Note.  Chalcogen is limited to oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium.

    (2)     Note.  See subclass 50 or the Glossary for a definition of the
    terms "specified polymer-forming ingredients" or "specified intermediate
    condensation product".


CLS 525/390
TXT Solid polymer derived solely from phenolic reactants wherein none of the
    reactants contains a plurality of methylol groups or derivatives thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 involving processes of mixing a solid
    polymer derived from phenolics as sole reactants wherein none of the
    reactants forming the solid polymer contains a plurality of methylol groups
    or is a derivative thereof with an additional solid polymer, with specified
    polymer-forming ingredients, with a specified intermediate condensation
    product, chemical treating agent, or with an elthylenic agent; or processes
    of forming or reacting, or the resultant products of any of the above
    mixtures.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes solid polymers prepared from a
    multiplicity of phenolic reactants.

    (2)     Note.  The term "phenolic reactant" is limited to phenols, phenol
    ether, and phenolate salt.

    (a)     A phenol for purposes of this subclass requires one or more -OH
    groups directly bonded to a nuclear carbon atom of a substituted or
    unsubstituted benzene ring, which benzene ring can be an individual benzene
    ring or can be part of a polycyclic ring system.

    (b)     A phenol ether for purposes of this subclass requires one or more
    -O-C groups wherein the oxygen atom of the -O-C  group is directly bonded
    to a nuclear carbon atom of a substituted or unsubstituted benzene ring and
    wherein the carbon atom of the -O-C  group is not double-bonded to oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium or triple-bonded to nitrogen.  The benzene
    ring may be an individual benzene ring or may be part of a polycyclic ring
    system.  The following examples of phenol ether are within the definition
    set out above.

    (1)     The -O-C group may itself be part of a cyclic ring system, e.g.,

    (2)     The carbon of the -O-C  group may be a ring atom of a cyclic or
    aromatic ring, e.g.,

    (3)     The carbon of the -O-C group may be a terminal carbon atom, e.g.,


            or may be the carbon atom of a chain, e.g.,

    (c)     An inorganic phenolate salt is an inorganic salt of a phenol see
    (phenol (1) Note) above wherein the hydrogen atom of an -OH group is
    replaced by a metal or an inorganic group.

    (3)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "methylol or
    derivative".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    480+,   for solid polymers derived from a phenolic reactant containing a
    plurality of methylol groups from a derivative thereof.

    (4)     Note.  See the Glossary or subclass 50 for a definition of the
    terms "specified polymer-forming ingredients" or "specified intermediate
    condensation product".


CLS 525/391
TXT Mixed with ethylenically unsaturated reactant or polymer derived therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 390 wherein the solid phenolic polymer is
    mixed with an ethylenically unsaturated agent or polymer derived therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132+,   for a solid polymer from a phenolic reactant admixed or reacted
    with a solid polymer derived from ethylenic reactants only.


CLS 525/392
TXT Unsaturated aromatic reactant or polymer thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 391 wherein an unsaturated reactant or
    polymer derived therefrom contains an aromatic group.


CLS 525/393
TXT Mixed with silicon-containing reactant or polymer derived therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 390 wherein the solid phenolic polymer is
    mixed with a silicon-containing reactant or polymer derived therefrom.


CLS 525/394
TXT Mixed with -OO-, halO-, or halhal reactant or polymer derived therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 390 wherein the solid phenolic polymer is
    mixed with a -OO-, halO, or halhal-containing reactant or polymer thereof.


CLS 525/395
TXT Mixed with -N=C=X-containing reactant or polymer therefrom (X is chalcogen):

    Subject matter under subclass 390 wherein the solid phenolic polymer is
    mixed with a -N=C=X or blocked -N=C=X-containing reactant or polymer
    derived therefrom (X is a chalcogen).

    (1)     Note.  Blocking a -N=C=X (masked, hidden, etc.) is utilized to
    render the -N=C=X group inert by conversion to an inactive group.  The
    process of reactivation usually involves merely heating so as to revert the
    blocked reactant to a   C-N=C=X-containing reactant.  The usual mode of
    rendering the -N=C=X reactant inert is to convert it to the form of a  NO-
    group.


CLS 525/396
TXT Mixed with 1, 2-epoxy containing reactant or polymer therefrom, or wherein
    polymer contains at least one 1, 2-epoxy group: Subject matter under
    subclass 390 wherein the solid phenolic polymer is mixed with a 1, 2-epoxy
    group-containing reactant or polymer derived therefrom, or wherein a
    polymer contains at least one 1, 2-epoxy group.


CLS 525/397
TXT Mixed with carboxylic acid or derivative reactant or polymer derived
    therefrom: Subject matter under subclass 390 wherein the solid phenolic
    polymer is mixed with a carboxylic acid or derivative or polymer derived
    therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "carboxylic
    acid or derivative".


CLS 525/398
TXT Solid polymer derived from aldehyde, aldehyde derivative, or low molecular
    weight polymer thereof as sole reactant and wherein none of the reactants
    contains a plurality of methylol groups or derivatives thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 involves processes of mixing solid polymer
    derived from an aldehyde, aldehyde derivative, or low molecular weight
    polymers thereof as sole reactants wherein none of the reactants contains
    plural methylol groups or is a derivative thereof, with an additional solid
    polymer, with specified polymer-forming ingredients, with a specified
    intermediate condensation product, with a chemical treating agent or with
    ethylenic agent; processes of reacting these mixtures or products resulting
    from the mixing or reacting processes.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes homo- or copolymers of only aldehyde
    or aldehyde derivative reactants.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes solid polymers prepared from a
    multiplicity of aldehyde or aldehyde derivative reactants.

    (3)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "aldehyde".

    (4)     Note.  An aldehyde derivative for purposes of this subclass
    includes:

    (a)     Compounds having X-CH2OH group wherein X is other than carbon or
    hydrogen.  Included herein are paraformaldehyde, methylol derivative of
    urea, etc.

    (b)     Heterocyclic compounds having only carbon and oxygen as ring atoms
    in an alternating manner and in equal amount, i.e., (O-)n.  Included herein
    is trioxane. (c) Hexamethylenetetramine or derivative e.g.,

            a derivative of this type requires the basic ring structure of
    hexamethylenetetramine but wherein the hydrogen atoms may have been
    replaced by other atoms.

    (5)     Note.  Compounds having a methylol group (-CH2OH) bonded to atoms
    other than carbon, oxygen, or hydrogen are regarded for this subclass as
    being a mixture of two compounds one of which is formaldehyde.  For
    instance, a methylol derivative of melamine is regarded as being a mixture
    of melamine and formaldehyde.  Methylol urea is regarded as being a mixture
    of formaldehyde and urea.

    (6)     Note.  Solid paraformaldehyde polymers will be regarded as
    monomeric formaldehyde.

    (7)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the terms "methylol" or
    "methylol derivative".

    (8)     Note.  See the Glossary or subclass 50 for a definition of the
    terms "Specified polymer-forming ingredients" or "specified intermediate
    condensation product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    526,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 315 for a polymer
    derived from an ethylenically unsaturated aldehyde as sole reactant or for
    an interpolymer derived from only ethylenically unsaturated reactants
    wherein at least one of the ethylenically unsaturated reactants contains an
    aldehyde group.

    528,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 403 for heterocyclic
    oxygen-containing reactants such as dioxolane, dioxepan, etc.; and
    subclasses 480+ for processes of treating a polymer not involving a
    chemical modification of the polymer, by the addition of a material
    thereto, and for chemically modifying material other than the polymer.
    Subclasses 480+ also provide for processes of admixing with a broadly
    claimed nonreactant material.  (See Class 523, subclass 1 for the
    distinction between that class and this area, and see in particular, Note
    (6), B.)


CLS 525/399
TXT Mixed with -N=C=X-containing reactant or polymer derived therefrom (X is
    chalcogen): Subject matter under subclass 398 wherein a solid polymer
    derived from an aldehyde or aldehyde derivative is mixed with -N=C=X or
    blocked -N=C=X reactant or polymer derived therefrom (X is chalcogen).

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 395 for a discussion of the term "blocked".


CLS 525/400
TXT Mixed with carboxylic acid or derivative reactant or polymer derived
    therefrom: Subject matter under subclass 398 wherein a solid polymer
    derived from an aldehyde or aldehyde derivative is mixed with a carboxylic
    acid or derivative reactant or polymer derived therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "carboxylic
    acid or derivative".


CLS 525/401
TXT Mixed with ethylenically unsaturated reactant or polymer derived therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 398 wherein a solid polymer derived from an
    aldehyde or derivative is mixed with an ethylenically unsaturated reactant
    or polymer derived therefrom.


CLS 525/402
TXT Solid polymer derived from aldehyde or derivative containing halogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 398 wherein the solid polymer is derived from
    an aldehyde or aldehyde derivative which contains halogen.


CLS 525/403
TXT Solid polymer derived from 1,2-epoxy compound containing only one 1,2-epoxy
    group as sole reactant and wherein none of the reactants contains a
    plurality of methylol groups or derivatives thereof: Subject matter under
    subclass 50 involves processes of mixing a solid polymer derived only from
    1,2-epoxy compounds all of which contains only a single 1,2-epoxy group and
    none of which contains a plurality of methylol or methylol derivative
    groups with an additional solid polymer with specified polymer-forming
    ingredients, with a specified intermediate condensation product, with a
    chemical treating agent or with an ethylenic reactant; processes of
    reacting the above mixtures; or products resulting from the mixing or
    reacting processes, e.g., polyepihalohydrin, ethylene oxide-epihalohydrin
    copolymer, etc.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes solid polymers prepared from a
    multiplicity of reactants all of which contain a single 1,2-epoxy group.

    (2)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are any 1,2-epoxy reactants
    which contain a plurality of methylol or methylol derivative groups.  See
    the Glossary for the definition of "methylol derivative".

    (3)     Note.  This subclass includes homo- or co-polymers of only
    1,2-epoxy reactants containing a single 1,2-epoxy group.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    526,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 273 for homopolymers
    of glycidyl acrylate.


CLS 525/404
TXT Mixed with ethylenically unsaturated reactant or polymer therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 wherein the solid polymer derived from
    1,2-epoxy reactants only containing a single 1,2-epoxy group is mixed with
    an ethylenically unsaturated reactant or polymer thereof.


CLS 525/405
TXT Mixed with aldehyde or aldehyde derivative reactant or polymer therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 wherein the solid polymer derived from
    1,2-epoxy reactants only containing a single 1,2-epoxy group is mixed with
    an aldehyde or aldehyde derivative reactant or polymer derived therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "aldehyde or
    aldehyde derivative".


CLS 525/406
TXT Contains amine-, N, or N-containing reactant (X is chalcogen):

    Subject matter under subclass 405 which also contains an amine-, N, or N-S
    containing reactant (X is chalcogen).

    (1)     Note.  The amine-, N, or N-S- containing reactant need not be added
    simultaneously with the aldehyde or aldehyde derivative reactant.


CLS 525/407
TXT Mixed with 1,2-epoxy reactant containing more than one 1,2-epoxy group per
    mole or polymer derived therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 wherein the solid polymer derived from
    1,2-epoxy reactant only containing a single 1,2-epoxy group is mixed with
    an epoxy reactant containing more than one 1,2-epoxy group per mole or
    polymer derived therefrom.


CLS 525/408
TXT Mixed with carboxylic acid or derivative or polymer derived therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 wherein the solid polymer derived from
    1,2-epoxy reactants only containing a single 1,2-epoxy group is mixed with
    a carboxylic acid or derivative reactant or polymer derived therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "carboxylic
    acid or derivative".


CLS 525/409
TXT Solid polymer derived only from 1,2-epoxy reactants containing only C, H,
    and O: Subject matter under subclass 403 wherein the solid polymer is
    derived from only 1,2-epoxy reactants which contain only carbon, hydrogen,
    and oxygen atoms, e.g., ethylene oxide-propylene oxide copolymer, ethylene
    oxide-glycidyl methacrylate copolymer, etc.


CLS 525/410
TXT Solid polymer derived from hetero-O-cyclic compounds as sole reactant
    wherein at least one reactant contains a hetero-O-ring other than solely as
    a 1,2-epoxy or anhydride, and wherein none of the reactants contains a
    plurality of methylol groups or derivative thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 involves processes of mixing a solid
    polymer derived from only hetero-O-cyclic reactants and wherein at least
    one reactant thereof contains a hetero-O-ring other than solely as a
    1,2-epoxy or anhydride and wherein none of the reactants contain a
    plurality of methylol groups or is a derivative thereof with additional
    solid polymer, specified polymer-forming ingredients, specified
    intermediate condensation product, chemical treating agent or ethylenic
    agent; processes of reacting the above mixtures; or products resulting from
    the mixing or reacting processes, e.g., dioxane homopolymers,
    trioxane-ethylene oxide copolymers, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Cyclic anhydrides and 1,2-epoxy groups are not considered as
    being hetero-O-cyclic and proper for this subclass.  When these groups are
    present, however, there must be an additional hetero-O-ring present.  This
    additional ring may be part of the 1,2-epoxy or anhydride group-containing
    compound or it may be a separate compound which is devoid of 1,2-epoxy or
    anhydride ring.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes homo- or co-polymers of only
    hetero-O-cyclic compounds.


CLS 525/411
TXT Mixed with carboxylic acid or derivative reactant or polymer therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 410 wherein the solid polymer derived from
    only hetero-O-cyclic reactant is mixed with a carboxylic acid or derivative
    reactant or polymer derived therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "carboxylic
    acid or derivative".


CLS 525/412
TXT Mixed with unsaturated reactant or polymer therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 410 wherein solid polymer derived from only
    hetero-O-cyclic reactant is mixed with an ethylenically unsaturated
    reactant or polymer derived therefrom.



CLS 525/413
TXT Mixed with -OO- or halreactant or polymer derived therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 410 wherein the solid polymer derived from
    only hetero-O-cyclic reactant is mixed with a -OO- or hal reactant or
    polymer derived therefrom.


CLS 525/414
TXT Mixed with aldehyde or aldehyde derivative or polymer derived therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 410 wherein the solid polymer derived from
    only hetero-O-cyclic reactant is mixed with an aldehyde or aldehyde
    derivative reactant or polymer derived therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the terms "aldehyde or
    aldehyde derivative".


CLS 525/415
TXT Solid polymer derived from carboxylic acid cyclic ester, e.g., lactone,
    etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 410 wherein the solid polymer is derived from
    only hetero-O-cyclic reactants which is derived from a carboxylic acid
    ester, i.e., -()n-O- (n is one or more and is part of a heterocyclic ring
    and the carbon atom single-bonded to the oxygen atom of the -()n-O- group
    is not double bonded to oxygen, sulfur, selenium, tellurium, or
    triple-bonded to nitrogen).


CLS 525/416
TXT Solid polymer derived from hydrocarbon or halogenated hydrocarbon as sole
    reactant or mixture thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 involves processes of mixing solid polymer
    derived from only hydrocarbons or halogenated hydrocarbon reactants or
    mixtures thereof with additional solid polymer, with specified
    polymer-forming ingredients, with specified intermediate condensation
    product, with chemical treating agent, or with ethylenic agent; processes
    or products resulting from the above mixing processes.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for a solid copolymer derived from
    hydrocarbons and halogenated hydrocarbons, e.g., dichlorobenzene-xylene
    copolymers, etc., or for solid polymers derived from only hydrocarbons or
    halogenated hydrocarbons.


CLS 525/417
TXT Solid polymer derived from heterocyclic materials as sole reactants wherein
    each of the heterocyclic materials contains a hetero ring other than solely
    as a lactam, 1,2-epoxy or carboxylic acid anhydride and wherein none of the
    reactants contains a plurality of methylol groups or derivatives thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 involving processes of mixing a solid
    polymer derived from heterocyclic materials as sole reactants other than
    solely as a lactam, 1,2-epoxy, or carboxylic acid anhydride, with an
    additional solid polymer and wherein none of the heterocyclic materials
    contains a plurality of methylol groups or derivatives thereof, with
    specified intermediate condensation product, with specified polymer-forming
    ingredients, with chemical treating agent or with ethylenic agent;
    processes or products resulting from the mixing processes, e.g.,
    polyepisulfide, polyethylenimine, etc.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not regard a lactam, 1,2-epoxy group, or
    cyclic carboxylic acid anhydride as being heterocyclic and, therefore, when
    these groups are present must be part of a compound which contains a
    heterocyclic group proper for this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are any heterocyclic reactants
    which contain a plurality of methylol groups or derivatives thereof and see
    the Glossary and subclass 398 for a definition of the terms "methylol" and
    "methylol derivative".

    (3)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "lactam".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    509+,   for methylolated melamine since this is not considered a single
    reactant but a mixture of two reactants, namely, melamine and formaldehyde.


CLS 525/418
TXT Solid polymer derived from at least one carboxylic acid or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 involves processes of mixing a solid
    polymer derived from at least one carboxylic acid or derivative with
    additional solid polymer, with specified polymer-forming ingredients, with
    an intermediate condensation product, chemical treating agent or with
    ethylenic agent; processes of reacting the above mixtures or products
    resulting from the above processes.

    (1)     Note.  A derivative of a carboxylic acid is limited to a nitrile,
    ester, anhydride, salt, amide, imide, lactam, lactone, and acyl halide; and
    see the Glossary for definitions of these terms.

    (2)     Note.  In the above definitions of carboxylic acid and their
    derivatives certain compounds may have more than one function, e.g., a
    lactone is a species of esters, a lactam is a species of an amide.
    Compounds which are multifunctional are classified on the basis of the
    first appearing function provided in the subclass hierarchy.

    (3)     Note.  A polycarboxylic acid reactant for purposes of this subclass
    requires the presence of at least two carboxylic acid groups.  A
    polycarboxylic derivative requires at least one carboxylic acid group and
    at least one carboxylic acid derivative, or at least two identical
    carboxylic acid derivatives, or at least two different carboxylic acid
    derivatives (see (1) Note above or the Glossary for an explanation of the
    term "derivative").

    (4)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass an anhydride having the
    general formula, -Cn-O-C-C-, which may be linear or cyclic, is considered
    as being a polycarboxylic acid.  A compound having both an anhydride and a
    free carboxylic acid is considered as being a tricarboxylic acid, e.g.,


            and a compound containing two anhydride groups is considered as
    being a tetracarboxylic acid, e.g.

    (5)     Note.  An imide is considered as being a dicarboxylic acid
    derivative.

    (6)     Note.  An organic amine salt of a carboxylic acid has been
    classified as if it were a mixture of an amine and a carboxylic acid.  An
    organic diamine salt of a dicarboxylic acid where the amine salt-forming
    groups are identical is considered as being a single amine compound,
    whereas if the amine groups are different then they are regarded as two
    amine compounds.  Where the compound contains two or more nitrogen atoms
    bonded to the same or different noncarbonyl carbon atom then they are to be
    regarded as polyamines.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term
    "amine", and see Class 528, subclass 263, (2) Note for an explanation of
    the term "polyamine".


CLS 525/419
TXT Solid polymer derived from at least one lactam; from an amino carboxylic
    acid or derivative; or from a polycarboxylic acid or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 418 wherein the solid polymer derived from a
    carboxylic acid or derivative, is derived from at least one lactam, from an
    amino carboxylic acid or derivative, or from a polycarboxylic acid or
    derivative.


CLS 525/420
TXT Solid polymer derived from an amino carboxylic acid or derivative; from a
    polyamine and a polycarboxylic acid or derivative from at least one lactam;
    or from a polyamine salt of a polycarboxylic acid:

    Subject matter under subclass 419 wherein the solid polymer is derived from
    amino carboxylic acid or derivative, from a polyamine reactant and a
    polycarboxylic acid reactant or derivative, from at least one lactam
    reactant, or from a polyamine salt of a polycarboxylic acid.


CLS 525/420.5
TXT Solid polymer derived from a polycarboxylic acid which is a dimer or trimer
    of an aliphatic acyclic monocarboxylic acid having at least ten carbon
    atoms or adducts of unsaturated aliphatic acyclic monocarboxylic acids,
    having ten carbon atoms with an alpha, beta ethylenically unsaturated
    carboxylic acid or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 wherein the solid polymer is derived from
    a polycarboxylic acid which is a dimer or trimer of an aliphatic acyclic
    monocarboxylic acid having at least ten carbon atoms or an adduct of an
    unsaturated aliphatic acyclic monocarboxylic acids, having ten carbon atoms
    with an alpha, beta ethylenically unsaturated carboxylic acid or derivative.

    (1)     Note.  Hydrogenated forms of the dimer and trimer acids are
    included herein.

    (2)     Note.  The solid polymer containing the dimer, trimer, or adduct
    polycarboxylic acid need not be the solid polymer described in subclass
    420, and see the Glossary for a definition of dimer or trimer of an
    aliphatic carboxylic acid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    528,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 339.5 for polyamides
    from, e.g., dimer acid, adipic acid and a polyamine, etc.

    562,    Organic Compounds, subclass 509 for adducts of fatty acids with
    alpha, beta ethylenically unsaturated dicarboxylic acids and for the dimer
    or trimer, per se.

    564,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 152+ for polyamides, per se, produced
    from dimer acid and polyamines.


CLS 525/421
TXT Solid polymer derived from reactant containing ethylenic unsaturation:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 wherein the solid polymer is derived from
    a reactant containing ethylenic unsaturation.

    (1)     Note.  The ethylenically unsaturated reactant may be the carboxylic
    acid or may be an additional reactant, e.g., maleic anhydride,
    1,4-diaminobutene-2, etc.


CLS 525/422
TXT Solid polymer derived from imide reactant: Subject matter under subclass
    421 wherein the solid polymer is derived from an imide reactant.


CLS 525/423
TXT Mixed with reactant containing more than one 1,2-epoxy group per mole or
    polymer derived therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 wherein the solid polymer is mixed with a
    reactant containing more than one 1,2-epoxy group per mole or polymer
    derived therefrom.


CLS 525/424
TXT Mixed with -N=C=X reactant or polymer derived therefrom (X is chalcogen):

    Subject matter under subclass 420 wherein the solid polymer is mixed with
    an -N=C=X or blocked -N=C=X reactant or polymer derived therefrom (X is
    chalcogen).

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 395 for a discussion of the term "blocked".


CLS 525/425
TXT Mixed with polycarboxylic acid or derivative and polyhydroxy reactant or
    polymer therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 wherein the solid polymer is mixed with a
    polycarboxylic acid or derivative reactant and a polyhydroxy reactant or
    reaction product resulting therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  It is unnecessary for the polycarboxylic acid and
    polyhydroxy reactant to be added to the solid polymer simultaneously.  The
    only requirement is that both reactants be added to the solid polymer
    sometime during the mixing and/or reacting processes.


CLS 525/426
TXT Mixed with ethylenically unsaturated reactant or polymer therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 wherein the solid polymer is mixed with
    an ethylenically unsaturated reactant or polymer derived therefrom.


CLS 525/427
TXT Mixed with aldehyde or aldehyde derivative reactant or polymer therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 wherein the solid polymer is mixed with
    an aldehyde or aldehyde derivative reactant or polymer derived therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  Hexamethylenetetramine is regarded for this subclass as an
    aldehyde derivative and not as an amine reactant.  Reactions therewith are
    in this subclass rather than in subclass 428.


CLS 525/428
TXT Contains amine, N-C-, N-S-containing reactant or polymer thereof (X is
    chalcogen):

    Subject matter under subclass 427 which contains an amine, N, N-containing
    reactant (X is chalcogen) which is not in the solid polymer backbone or a
    polymer thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The amine, N or N- containing reactant can be part of, or in
    addition to, the aldehyde or aldehyde derivative reactant.


CLS 525/429
TXT Contains phenolic reactant or polymer thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 427 which contains a phenolic reactant (which
    is not in the solid polymer backbone) or a polymer thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The phenolic reactant or polymer thereof can be in addition
    to the aldehyde or aldehyde derivative or can be in the same compound.  See
    the Glossary for a definition of the term "phenolic".


CLS 525/430
TXT Mixed with a reactant containing a single 1,2-epoxy group per mole or
    polymer derived therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 wherein the solid polymer is mixed with a
    reactant containing only one 1,2-epoxy group per mole or polymer derived
    therefrom.


CLS 525/431
TXT Mixed with silicon reactant or polymer derived therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 wherein the solid polymer is mixed with a
    silicon-containing reactant or polymer derived therefrom.


CLS 525/432
TXT Mixed with additional polycarboxylic acid and a polyamine; amino carboxylic
    acid or derivative; polyamine salt of a polycarboxylic acid; lactam; or
    polymer derived therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 wherein the solid polymer is mixed with a
    polycarboxylic acid and a polyamine, with an amino carboxylic acid, with a
    polyamine salt of a polycarboxylic acid, with a lactam, or with a polymer
    of the materials derived above.


CLS 525/433
TXT Mixed with OO, hal, or halhal reactant or polymer derived therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 wherein the solid polymer is mixed with a
    -OO, hal-C, or halhal reactant or polymer derived therefrom.


CLS 525/434
TXT Solid polymer derived from hydroxyl group-containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 wherein the solid polymer derived from an
    amino carboxylic acid, from a polyamine reactant and a polycarboxylic acid
    or derivative, from at least one lactam reactant, or from a polyamine salt
    of a polycarboxylic acid, is also derived from a hydroxy-containing
    reactant.


CLS 525/435
TXT Solid polymer derived from compound containing more than two amine groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 wherein solid polymer is derived from a
    compound containing more than a two amine groups.


CLS 525/436
TXT Solid polymer derived from compound containing more than two carboxylic
    acid groups or derivatives thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 wherein the solid polymer is derived from
    a compound containing more than two carboxylic acid groups or from a
    derivative of a carboxylic acid, e.g.,


CLS 525/437
TXT Solid polymer derived from polyhydroxy reactant and polycarboxylic acid or
    derivative reactant; or derived from di- or higher ester of a
    polycarboxylic acid as sole reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 419 wherein the solid polymer is derived from
    a polyhydroxy reactant and a polycarboxylic acid or derivative reactant; or
    from a di- or higher ester of a polycarboxylic acid as sole reactant.


CLS 525/438
TXT Mixed with reactant containing more than one 1,2-epoxy group per mole or
    polymer derived therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 437 wherein the solid polymer derived from a
    polycarboxylic acid or derivative reactant and a polyhydroxy reactant or
    from a di- or higher ester of a polycarboxylic acid as sole reactant is
    mixed with a reactant containing more than one 1,2-epoxy group per mole or
    polymer derived therefrom.


CLS 525/439
TXT Mixed with -OO, hal, or halhal reactant or polymer derived therefrom; or
    wherein solid polymer is derived from ahalhal, -OO-, or halO-, a
    polycarboxylic acid or derivative and a polyhydroxy reactant: Subject
    matter under subclass 437 wherein the solid polymer derived from a
    polycarboxylic acid or derivative and a polyhydroxy reactant or from a di-
    or higher ester of polycarboxylic acid as sole

     reactant is mixed with -OO-, hal, halhal-containing reactant or polymer
    thereof; or wherein the solid polymer is derived from a polycarboxylic acid
    or derivative, a polyhydroxy reactant and a -OO, hal, halhal-containing
    reactant.


CLS 525/440
TXT Mixed with -N=C=X reactant or polymer derived therefrom (X is chalcogen);
    or wherein solid polymer is derived from a -N=C=X reactant and also a
    polycarboxylic acid or derivative and a polyhydroxy reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 437 wherein the solid polymer derived from
    polycarboxylic acid or derivative reactant and polyhydroxy reactant or from
    a di- or a higher ester or a polycarboxylic acid as sole reactant is mixed
    with-N=C=X or blocked N=C=X reactant or polymer derived therefrom; or
    wherein the solid polymer is derived from a polycarboxylic acid or
    derivative reactant, a polyhydroxy reactant, and a -N=C=X or blocked N=C=X
    reactant (X is chalcogen).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes solid polyol, polycarboxylic acid
    derived from polyester mixed with isocyanate reactant as well as solid
    polymer derived from polyol, polycarboxylic acid and diisocyanate mixed
    with a chemical treating agent.

    (2)     Note.  See subclass 395, for a discussion of the term "blocked".


CLS 525/441
TXT Mixed with aldehyde or aldehyde derivative reactant or polymer derived
    therefrom: Subject matter under subclass 437 wherein the solid polymer
    derived from polycarboxylic acid or derivative reactant and polyhydroxy
    reactant or from a di- or higher ester of a polycarboxylic acid as sole
    reactant is mixed with an aldehyde or aldehyde derivative reactant or
    polymer derived therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the terms "aldehyde or
    aldehyde derivative".


CLS 525/442
TXT Contains phenolic reactant or polymer thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 441 which contains a phenolic reactant which
    is not in the solid polymer backbone or a polymer thereof.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, a mixture of a solid
    polymer derived from a polyhydroxy reactant and a polycarboxylic acid
    reactant or from a di- or higher ester of a polycarboxylic acid as sole
    reactant with either a phenolic reactant or polymer thereof and an aldehyde
    or aldehyde derivative or polymer thereof or a reaction product of a
    phenolic reactant and an aldehyde or aldehyde derivative or wherein the
    phenolic moiety is in the same compound as is the aldehyde moiety.


CLS 525/443
TXT Contains an amine-, N-C-, or N-S- containing reactant or polymer thereof (X
    is chalcogen):

    Subject matter under subclass 441 which contains an amine-, N, or N-
    containing reactant (X is chalcogen) or polymer thereof.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, a mixture of a solid
    polymer derived from a polyhydroxy reactant and a polycarboxylic acid
    reactant or from a di- or higher ester of a polycarboxylic acid as sole
    reactant with an amine-,C- or N-containing reactant or solid polymer
    thereof and an aldehyde or aldehyde derivative or polymer thereof; or the
    reaction product of an amine-,C-, or N-containing reactant with an aldehyde
    or aldehyde derivative.

    (2)     Note.  Hexamethylenetetramine is regarded for this subclass as an
    aldehyde reactant.  Reactions therewith are in subclass 441 rather than in
    this subclass.


CLS 525/444
TXT Mixed with polycarboxylic acid or derivative and polyhydroxy reactant or
    polymer thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 437 wherein the solid polymer derived from a
    polycarboxylic acid or derivative reactant and a polyhydroxy reactant or
    from a di- or higher ester of a polycarboxylic acid as sole reactant is
    mixed with an additional polycarboxylic acid or derivative reactant and a
    polyhydroxy reactant or reaction product thereof.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for blends of two or more solid
    polycarboxylic acid-polyhydroxy compound polyesters as well as a solid
    polyester and polycarboxylic acid and a polyhydroxy compound.


CLS 525/444.5
TXT Solid polymer derived from or system contains a reactant which is a fatty
    acid glycerol ester, a fatty acid or salt derived from a naturally
    occurring glyceride, tall oil, or fatty acid derived from tall oil: Subject
    matter under subclass 444 wherein (a) a solid polymer is derived from a
    reactant which is a fatty acid glycerol ester, a fatty acid or salt thereof
    derived from a naturally occurring glyceride, tall oil, or fatty acid
    derived from tall oil; or (b) wherein the system contains a reactant noted
    in (a) above as a separate reactant or as an additional reactant with the
    polycarboxylic acid derivative and polyhydroxy reactant or polymer thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "fatty acid"
    and the other materials proper for this subclass.


CLS 525/445
TXT Mixed with ethylenically unsaturated reactant or polymer therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 437 wherein the solid polymer derived from a
    polycarboxylic acid or derivative and polyhydroxy reactant or from a di- or
    higher ester of a polycarboxylic acid as sole reactant is mixed with an
    ethylenically unsaturated reactant or polymer derived therefrom.


CLS 525/446
TXT Mixed with silicon-containing reactant or polymer derived therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 437 wherein the solid polymer derived from
    polycarboxylic acid or derivative reactant and polyhydroxy reactant or from
    a di- or higher ester of a polycarboxylic acid as sole reactant is mixed
    with a silicon-containing reactant or polymer derived therefrom.


CLS 525/447
TXT Solid polymer derived from polycarboxylic acid or derivative and a
    polyhydroxy compound derived from reactant containing ethylenic
    unsaturation:

    Subject matter under subclass 437 wherein the solid polymer derived from a
    polycarboxylic acid or derivative reactant, polyhydroxy, or additional
    reactant is derived from a reactant containing ethylenic unsaturation.

    (1)     Note.  The ethylenic unsaturation may be present in the
    polycarboxylic acid or derivative reactant, the polyhydroxy reactant, or an
    additional reactant.


CLS 525/448
TXT Solid polymer derived from polycarboxylic acid or derivative and
    polyhydroxy compound is derived from two or more polycarboxylic acids or
    derivatives:

    Subject matter under subclass 437 wherein the solid polymer derived from a
    polycarboxylic acid or derivative reactant and polyhydroxy reactant is
    derived from two or more polycarboxylic acids or derivatives as reactants.


CLS 525/449
TXT Mixed with 1,2-epoxy reactant or polymer derived therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 419 wherein solid polymer derived from a
    polycarboxylic acid or derivative is mixed with 1,2-epoxy reactant or
    polymer derived therefrom.


CLS 525/450
TXT Solid polymer derived from hydroxy-containing carboxylic acid or derivative
    reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 418 wherein the solid polymer is derived from
    a hydroxyl-containing carboxylic acid or derivative reactant, e.g., lactic
    acid, etc.


CLS 525/451
TXT Solid polymer derived from carboxylic acid or derivative derived from
    ethylenically unsaturated reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 418 wherein a solid polymer derived from a
    carboxylic acid or derivative is derived from an ethylenically unsaturated
    reactant.

    (1)     Note.  The unsaturation can be in the carboxylic acid or in an
    additional reactant.


CLS 525/452
TXT Solid polymer derived from -N=C=X reactant (X is chalcogen):

    Subject matter under subclass 50 involving processes of mixing a solid
    polymer derived from a -N=C=X of blocked -N=C=X reactant with an additional
    solid polymer, with specified polymer-forming ingredients, or with a
    specified intermediate condensation product, chemical treating agent, or
    with an ethylenic agent; processes or products resulting from the above
    mixing processes (X is chalcogen).

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 395 for a discussion of the term "blocked".


CLS 525/453
TXT Solid polymer derived from -N=C=X reactant and polyhydroxy reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 452 wherein the solid polymer dericed fron a
    N=C=X or blocked N=C=X reactant is also derived from a polyhydroxy reactant.


CLS 525/454
TXT Mixed with carboxylic acid or derivative reactant or polymer derived
    therefrom; or with heterocyclic reactant containing more than one
    heterocyclic ring; or polymer therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 453 wherein a solid polymer derived fron a
    -N=C=X or blocked -N=C=X reactant and polyhydroxy reactant is mixed with a
    carboxylic acid or derivative reactant or polymer derived therefrom, or
    with a hetercyclic reactant containing more than one heterocyclic ring or
    polymer thereof, e.g., polyurethanes mixed with a carboxylic acid reactant,
    etc.


CLS 525/455
TXT Mixed with ethylenically unsaturated reactant or polymer therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 453 wherein a solid polymer derived from a
    -N=C=X reactant and polyhydroxy reactant is mixed with an ethylenically
    unsaturated reactant or polymer derived therefrom.


CLS 525/456
TXT Mixed with aldehyde or aldehyde derivative reactant or polymer therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 453 wherein a solid polymer derived from a
    N=C=X or blocked N=C=X reactant and polyhydroxy reactant is mixed with an
    aldehyde or aldehyde derivative reactant or polymer derived therefrom.


CLS 525/457
TXT Mixed with -N=C=X reactant or polymer therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 453 wherein a solid polymer derived fron
    -N=C=X or blocked -N=C=X reactant and polyhydroxy reactant is mixed with a
    -N=C=X or blocked -N=C=X reactant or polymer derived therefrom (X is
    chalcogen).


CLS 525/458
TXT Contains polyhydroxy reactant; or additional polymer derived from -N=C=X
    and polyhydroxy reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 457 which contains a solid polymer derived
    from a -N=C=X reactant and polyhydroxy reactant and additional reactants at
    least one of which is a -N=C=X or blocked -N=C=X or blocked -N=C=X reactant
    and at least one of which is polyhydroxy reactant or a polymer thereof.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes blends of solid polyurethanes, a
    solid polyurethane with a nonsolid polyurethane and a solid polyurethane
    with a polyisocyanate and a polyhydroxy reactant.


CLS 525/459
TXT Solid polymer derived from -N=C=X reactant and polyhydroxy reactant also
    derived from polyamine reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 453 wherein the solid polymer derived from a
    -N=C=X or blocked -N=C=X reactant and polyhydroxy reactant is also derived
    from a polyamine reactant (X is chalcogen).


CLS 525/460
TXT Solid polymer derived from -N=C=X reactant and polyhydroxy reactant derived
    from polyhydroxy reactant containing an ether group:

    Subject matter under subclass 453 wherein the solid polymer is derived fron
    a -N=C=X or blocked -N=C=X reactant and from a polyhydroxy reactant
    containing an ether group (X is chalcogen), e.g., solid polyurethane formed
    from polyisocyanate and liquid hydroxy-terminated polyalkylene oxide, etc.


CLS 525/461
TXT Solid polymer derived from -OO- or halcontaining reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 involving processes of mixing solid
    polymer derived from -OO- or hal reactant with additional solid polymer,
    specified polymer-forming ingredients, specified intermediate condensation
    product, chemical treating agent, or ethylenic agent; processes of reacting
    the above mixtures or products resulting from the above processes.


CLS 525/462
TXT Solid polymer derived from -OO- or hal-C containing reactant and
    polyhydroxy reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 461 wherein the solid polymer is derived from
    -OO- or hal-C- reactant and a polyhydroxy reactant.


CLS 525/463
TXT Mixed with reactant containing more than one 1,2,-epoxy group per mole or
    polymer derived therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 462 wherein a solid polymer derived from -OO-
    or hal reactant and polyhydroxy reactant is mixed with a reactant
    containing more than one 1,2-epoxy group per mole or polymer derived
    therefrom.


CLS 525/464
TXT Mixed with silicon-containing reactant or polymer derived therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 462 wherein a solid polymer derived from -OO-
    or      hal reactant and polyhydroxy reactant is mixed with a
    silicon-containing reactant or polymer derived therefrom.


CLS 525/465
TXT Mixed with aldehyde or aldehyde derivative reactant or reaction product
    therefrom: Subject matter under subclass 462 wherein solid polymer derived
    from -OO- or hal containing reactant and polyhydroxy reactant is mixed with
    an aldehyde or aldehyde derivative reactant or polymer derived therefrom.


CLS 525/466
TXT Mixed with polycarboxylic acid or derivative and polyhydroxy reactants or
    polymer thereof; or di- or higher ester of polycarboxylic acid as sole
    reactant or polymer therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 462 wherein a solid polymer derived from -OO-
    or hal reactant and polyhydroxy reactant is mixed with a polycarboxylic
    acid or derivative reactant and a polyhydroxy reactant or polymer derived
    therefrom; or mixed with a polymer derived from a di- or higher ester of a
    polycarboxylic acid as a sole reactant.


CLS 525/467
TXT Mixed with nitrogen-containing reactant or polymer therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 462 wherein a solid polymer derived from -OO-
    or hal reactant and polyhydroxy reactant is mixed with a
    nitrogen-containing reactant or polymer derived therefrom.


CLS 525/468
TXT Mixed with ethylenically unsaturated reactant or polymer therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 462 wherein a  solid polymer derived from
    -OO- or hal reactant and polyhydroxy reactant is mixed with an
    ethylenically unsaturated reactant or polymer derived therefrom.


CLS 525/469
TXT Solid polymer derived from -OO- or hal and polyhydroxy reactant derived
    from at least two polyhydroxy reactants: Subject matter under subclass 462
    wherein a solid polymer derived from -OO- or hal reactant and polyhydroxy
    reactant is derived from at least two polyhydroxy reactants.


CLS 525/470
TXT Solid polymer derived from -OO- or  hal reactant and polyhydroxy reactant
    contains an atom other than C, H, O, or halogen bonded to a -C- group:

    Subject matter under subclass 462 wherein a solid polymer derived from -OO-
    or hal reactant and a polyhydroxy reactant is derived from a reactant
    containing an atom other than C, H, or O or other than a reactant
    containing a halogen atom wherein the halogen atoms are solely bonded to a
    carbonyl group, i.e., .


CLS 525/471
TXT Solid polymer derived from ketone reactant and wherein none of the
    reactants forming the solid polymer contains an aldehyde group or is an
    aldehyde-type reactant or polymer derived therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 involving processes of mixing a solid
    polymer derived from a ketone reactant and wherein none of the reactants
    forming the solid polymer is an aldehyde or aldehyde-type reactant or
    polymer derived therefrom, with an additional solid polymer, with a
    chemical treating agent, with specified polymer-forming ingredients,
    specified intermediate condensation product, or with ethylenic agent;
    processes of forming or reacting the above mixtures, or products resulting
    from the above processes.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "ketone".

    (2)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "aldehyde-type
    reactant".


CLS 525/472
TXT Solid polymer derived from aldehyde or aldehyde-type reactant and wherein
    none of the reactants forming the solid polymer contains a phenol, amine-,
    -N, -N-, or ketone group or a condensate thereof except when an amine group
    appears in hexamethylenetetramine or a derivative thereof (X is chalcogen):

    Subject matter under subclass 50 involving processes of mixing a solid
    polymer derived from an aldehyde or aldehyde-type reactant and wherein none
    of the reactants forming the solid polymer contains a phenol, amine, ketone
    group, or is a polymer thereof other than wherein the amine group is
    hexamethylenetetramine or a derivative thereof, with additional solid
    polymer, with specified polymer-forming ingredients, with specified
    intermediate condensation products, with chemical treating agent, or with
    ethylenic agent; processes of reacting or forming the above mixtures, or
    products resulting from the above processes.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 398 for the definition of the term
    "aldehyde-type reactant."


CLS 525/473
TXT Solid polymer derived from aldehyde or aldehyde-type reactant containing
    atoms other than C, H, or O and, wherein when hexamethylenetetramine or
    derivative is a reactant, there is additionally present a reactant
    containing atoms other than C, H, or O:

    Subject matter under subclass 472 wherein a solid polymer derived from
    aldehyde or aldehyde-type reactant contains atoms other than carbon,
    hydrogen, an oxygen and, when hexamethylenetetramine or derivative thereof
    is a reactant, there is additionally present a reactant containing atoms
    other than carbon, hydrogen, and oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "aldehyde-type
    reactant".


CLS 525/474
TXT Solid polymer derived from silicon-containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 involving processes of mixing solid
    polymer derived from a silicon-containing reactant, with additional solid
    polymer, with specified polymer-forming ingredients, with specified
    intermediate condensation product, with chemical treating agent, or with
    ethylenic agent; processes of forming or reacting the above mixtures or
    products resulting from the above processes.


CLS 525/475
TXT Mixed with aluminum- or heavy metal-containing reactant or polymer
    therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 474 wherein a solid polymer derived from a
    silicon-containing reactant is mixed with an aluminum- or a heavy
    metal-containing reactant or polymer derived therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "heavy metal".


CLS 525/476
TXT Mixed with reactant containing more than one 1,2-epoxy group per mole or
    polymer derived therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 474 wherein a solid polymer derived from a
    silicon-containing reactant is mixed with a reactant containing more than
    1,2-epoxy group per mole or polymer derived therefrom.


CLS 525/477
TXT Mixed with silicon-containing reactant or polymer therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 474 wherein a solid polymer derived from a
    silicon- containing reactant is mixed with a silicon- containing reactant
    or polymer derived therefrom.


CLS 525/478
TXT Wherein one of said silicon materials contains Si-H bond:

    Subject matter under subclass 477 wherein at least one of the
    silicon-containing materials contains Si-H bond.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass, the Si-H bond may be present in either the
    solid silicon polymer or the silicon-containing reactant or polymer.


CLS 525/479
TXT Mixed with ethylenically unsaturated reactant or polymer derived therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 474 wherein a solid polymer derived from a
    silicon reactant is mixed with an ethylenically unsaturated reactant or
    polymer derived therefrom.


CLS 525/480
TXT Solid polymer or specified intermediate condensation product derived from
    at least one phenolic reactant and at least one aldehyde or aldehyde-type
    reactant or polymer therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 involves processes of mixing a solid
    polymer or specified intermediate condensation product derived from at
    least one phenolic reactant and at least one aldehyde or aldehyde-type
    reactant or polymer thereof, with an additional solid polymer, with an
    additional specified intermediate condensation product, with specified
    polymer-forming ingredients, or with ethylenic agent; processes of mixing
    solid polymer derived from at least one phenolic reactant and at least one
    aldehyde or aldehyde-type reactant or polymer thereof with a chemical
    treating agent; processes of forming or reacting the above mixtures, or
    products resulting from the above processes.

    (1)     Note.  When a nonsolid specified intermediate condensation product
    is involved, the chemical treating agent must be a solid polymer, a
    specified intermediate condensation product, or part of a specified
    polymer-forming ingredient system or be an ethylenic agent.

    (2)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the terms "specified
    polymer-forming ingredients", "specified intermediate condensation
    product", "aldehyde-type reactant", or "chemical treating agent".


CLS 525/481
TXT Mixed with reactant containing more than one 1,2-epoxy group per mole or
    polymer derived therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 480 wherein a solid polymer or specified
    intermediate condensation product derived from at least one phenolic
    reactant and at least one aldehyde or aldehyde-type reactant is mixed with
    a reactant containing more than one 1,2-epoxy group per mole or polymer
    derived therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    496,    for the reaction of a phenolic-aldehyde polymer and reactant
    containing a single 1,2-epoxy group.


CLS 525/482
TXT Phenolic-aldehyde or phenolic-aldehyde-type reaction product modified with
    1,2-monoepoxide prior to mixing with reactant containing more than one
    1,2-epoxy group per mole or polymer derived therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 481 wherein the solid polymer or specified
    intermediate condensation product derived from at least one phenolic
    reactant and at least one aldehyde or aldehyde-type reactant or polymer
    therefrom, is modified by reaction with a 1,2-monoepoxide prior to mixing
    said material with a reactant containing more than one 1,2-epoxy group per
    mole or polymer derived therefrom.


CLS 525/483
TXT Contains sulfur-containing reactant or polymer therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 482 wherein sulfur is present either as a
    reactant or as part of the solid polymer or specified intermediate
    condensation product.


CLS 525/484
TXT Contains nitrogen reactant or polymer therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 482 wherein nitrogen is present either as a
    reactant or as part of the solid polymer or solid intermediate condensation
    product.


CLS 525/485
TXT With specified material:

    Subject matter under subclass 481 wherein a specified material is present
    in the mixture.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "specified
    material".


CLS 525/486
TXT Specified material contains nitrogen:
    Subject matter under subclass 485 wherein the specified material contains a
    nitrogen atom.


CLS 525/487
TXT With silicon-containing reactant or polymer derived therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 481 wherein a solid polymer or specified
    intermediate condensation product derived from at least one phenolic
    reactant and at least one aldehyde or aldehyde-type reactant is mixed with
    a reactant containing more than one 1,2-epoxy group per mole or polymer
    derived therefrom, is also mixed with an additional silicon-containing
    reactant or polymer derived therefrom.


CLS 525/488
TXT With carboxylic acid or derivative reactant or polymer derived therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 481 wherein a solid polymer or specified
    intermediate condensation product derived from at least one phenolic
    reactant and at least one aldehyde or aldehyde-type reactant mixed with a
    reactant containing more than one 1,2-epoxy group per mole or polymer
    derived therefrom is further mixed with a carboxylic acid or derivative
    reactant or polymer derived therefrom.


CLS 525/489
TXT With additional aldehyde or aldehyde-type reactant or polymer therefrom
    which is distinct from aldehyde or aldehyde-type reactant used in forming
    solid polymer or specified intermediate condensation product or with
    nitrogen-containing reactant: Subject matter under subclass 481 wherein a
    solid polymer or specified intermediate condensation product derived from
    at least one phenolic reactant and at least one aldehyde or aldehyde-type
    reactant is mixed with a reactant containing more than one 1,2-epoxy group
    per mole or polymer derived therefrom is also mixed with an additional
    aldehyde or aldehyde-type reactant or polymer reactant derived therefrom
    which is distinct from the aldehyde in the solid or specified intermediate
    condensation product; or with a nitrogen-containing reactant or polymer
    derived therefrom.


CLS 525/490
TXT Wherein phenolic-aldehyde or phenolic-aldehyde-type solid polymer or
    specified intermediate condensation product contains nitrogen or ethylenic
    unsaturation:

    Subject matter under subclass 481 wherein a solid polymer or specified
    intermediate condensation product is derived from at least one phenolic
    reactant and at least one aldehyde or aldehyde-type reactant and which
    contains or is derived from a nitrogen or ethylenically unsaturated
    material.


CLS 525/491
TXT Mixed with additional aldehyde or aldehyde-type reactants which are part of
    a specified polymer-forming ingredient system or polymer thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 480 wherein a solid polymer or specified
    intermediate condensation product derived from at least one phenolic
    reactant and at least one aldehyde or aldehyde-type reactant is mixed with
    an additional aldehyde or aldehyde-type polymer, specified intermediate
    condensation product, or aldehyde or aldehyde-type reactants which are part
    of a specified polymer-forming ingredient system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    503,    for a mixture of a solid polymer derived from a phenolic reactant
    and an aldehyde or aldehyde-type reactant with an aldehyde treating agent
    which treating agent is not an aldehyde condensate nor a mixture of
    specified polymer-forming ingredients, e.g., a mixture of a solid
    phenol-aldehyde polymer and paraformaldehyde, etc.


CLS 525/492
TXT Additional material is a hydrocarbon- aldehyde- or
    hydrocarbon-aldehyde-type polymer, condensate, or reactants therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 491 wherein the additional aldehyde material
    is a hydrocarbon-aldehyde or hydrocarbon-aldehyde-type polymer, condensate,
    or reactants.


CLS 525/493
TXT Additional material is ketone-aldehyde- or ketone-aldehyde-type polymer,
    condensate, or reactants thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 491 wherein the additional aldehyde or
    aldehyde-type material, condensate, or reactants is a ketone-aldehyde- or
    aldehyde-type polymer, condensate, or reactants.


CLS 525/494
TXT Contains nitrogen-containing reactants or polymer therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 493 which contains a nitrogen-containing
    reactant or polymer.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass, the nature of the nitrogen is
    insignificant in that it may be either a part of the polymer, specified
    polymer-forming reactant system, or an independent material.


CLS 525/495
TXT Additional material is amine-, N-C- or N-S- containing reactant -aldehyde
    or -aldehyde derivative polymer, condensate, or reactants therefrom (X is
    chalcogen):

    Subject matter under subclass 491 wherein the additional material is an
    amine and/N or N- containing reactant aldehyde oraldehyde-type polymer,
    condensate, or reactants (X is chalcogen).


CLS 525/496
TXT Contains 1,2-epoxy-containing reactant or polymer derived therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 495 which contains a reactant containing a
    single 1,2-epoxy group or polymer derived therefrom.


CLS 525/497
TXT Heterocyclic nitrogen reactant or polymer therefrom, e.g., melamine, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 495 which contains a hetero-N-cyclic reactant
    or polymer derived therefrom, e.g., melamine, etc.


CLS 525/498
TXT NN-containing reactant or polymer, e.g., urea, etc. (X is chalcogen):

    Subject matter under subclass 495 which contains a NN reactant or polymer
    derived therefrom (X is chalcogen) e.g., urea, etc.


CLS 525/499
TXT Contains sulfur reactant or polymer therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 495 which contains a sulfur-containing
    reactant or polymer derived therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass, the sulfur may be present either as part
    of the phenolic-aldehyde or aldehyde-type polymer or condensate, as part of
    the amine or N aldehyde or aldehyde-type polymer or condensate, or as a
    separate reactant or as a chemical treating agent.


CLS 525/500
TXT Wherein the phenolic-aldehyde- or phenolic-aldehyde-type solid polymer or
    specified intermediate condensation product is derived from a reactant or
    polymer containing an atom other than C, H, or O: Subject matter under
    subclass 491 wherein the phenol-aldehyde or aldehyde-type solid polymer or
    specified intermediate condensate is derived from a reactant or polymer
    containing an atom other than carbon, hydrogen, or oxygen.


CLS 525/501
TXT Additional phenol-aldehyde- or -aldehyde-type polymers, condensation
    product or reactants therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 491 wherein the additional aldehyde or
    aldehyde-type reactant polymer, condensate, or reactants is a
    phenolic-aldehyde or an aldehyde-type polymer condensate or reactants.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides, for example, for mixtures of two
    solid phenol-aldehyde polymers, a solid phenol-aldehyde polymer with either
    a phenol-aldehyde specified intermediate condensation product or phenol and
    an aldehyde, or a phenol-aldehyde specified intermediate condensation
    product with a phenol and an aldehyde.


CLS 525/501.5
TXT Mixed with reactant which is a fatty acid glycerol ester, a fatty acid or
    salt derived from a naturally occurring glyceride, tall oil, or a fatty
    acid derived from tall oil; or the reaction product of any of the above
    with a polycarboxylic acid or ester forming derivative and a polyhydroxy
    compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 480 wherein there is at least one reactant
    which is a fatty acid glyceride, a fatty acid or salt thereof derived from
    a naturally occurring glyceride, tall oil, or a fatty acid derived from
    tall oil, or a reaction product of any of these materials with a
    polycarboxylic acid or ester and a polyol.

    (1)     Note.  The so-called drying or semidrying oil modified phenolic
    resins are placed herein if an unsaturated fatty acid or oil is added to a
    solid polymer or preformed SICP.

    (2)     Note.  Dehydrated castor oil fatty acids are included herein as
    fatty acids derived from a naturally occurring glyceride.

    (3)     Note.  Placed herein are, e.g., mixtures of phenol-formaldehyde
    resin (SICP) with an ethylenic agent such as an unsaturated fatty acid
    glyceride or unsaturated fatty acid derived therefrom, e.g., linseed oil or
    linseed fatty acid, etc.  However, a phenolic SICP (not described as a
    solid polymer) admixed with a saturated fatty glyceride or saturated fatty
    acid, e.g., coconut oil or coconut fatty acids, etc., is classified in
    Class 528, subclass 158.5, since Class 525, subclasses 50+ do not encompass
    an admixture of a liquid SICP with a chemical treating agent; therefore,
    when saturated fatty glycerides or saturated fatty acid derived therefrom
    are reactants in the system of this subclass there must additionally be
    present a complete system for Class 525, subclass 480.

    (4)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "fatty acid"
    and for the other materials proper for this subclass.


CLS 525/502
TXT Mixed with unsaturated reactant or polymer derived therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 480 wherein a solid polymer or specified
    intermediate condensation product derived from a phenolic reactant and an
    aldehyde or aldehyde-type reactant is mixed with an ethylenically
    unsaturated reactant or polymer derived therefrom.


CLS 525/503
TXT Mixed with aldehyde or aldehyde-type chemical treating agent:

    Subject matter under subclass 480 wherein a solid polymer or specified
    intermediate condensation product derived from at least one phenolic
    reactant and at least one aldehyde or an aldehyde-type reactant is mixed
    with an aldehyde or aldehyde-type treating agent.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes, as an example, a mixture of a solid
    phenol-aldehyde polymer and a chemical treating agent, such as a catalyst,
    as well as a mixture of a resinifiable phenol-aldehyde intermediate
    condensate with polymer-forming ingredients (necessary for this subclass).
    However, a mixture of a specified intermediate condensation product of
    phenol and an aldehyde with a nonsolid specified treating agent such as an
    aldehyde-containing material would not be placed here but rather in Class
    528, subclasses 129+.


CLS 525/504
TXT Mixed with nitrogen-containing chemical treating agent:

    Subject matter under subclass 480 wherein a solid polymer or specified
    intermediate condensation product derived from at least one phenolic
    reactant and an aldehyde or aldehyde-type reactant is mixed with a
    nitrogen-containing chemical treating agent or polymer derived therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note under subclass 480 for an explanation of the
    term "chemical treating agent".


CLS 525/505
TXT Mixed with sulfur-containing chemical treating agent:

    Subject matter under subclass 480 wherein a solid polymer or specified
    intermediate condensation product with at least one phenolic reactant and
    at least one aldehyde or aldehyde-type reactant is mixed with a
    sulfur-containing chemical treating agent or polymer derived therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note under subclass 480 for an explanation of the
    term "chemical treating agent".


CLS 525/506
TXT Mixed with a boron- or polyvalent metal-containing chemical treating agent:
    Subject matter under subclass 480 wherein a solid polymer or specified
    intermediate condensation product derived from at least one phenolic
    reactant and at least one aldehyde or aldehyde-type reactant is mixed with
    a boron- or polyvalent metal-containing chemical treating agent or polymer
    derived therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note under subclass 480 for an explanation of the
    term "chemical treating agent".


CLS 525/507
TXT Mixed with an 1,2-epoxy-containing chemical treating agent:

    Subject matter under subclass 480 wherein a solid polymer or specified
    intermediate condensation product derived from at least one phenolic
    reactant and at least one aldehyde or aldehyde-type reactant is mixed with
    1,2-epoxy-containing chemical treating agent or polymer derived therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note under subclass 480 for an explanation of the
    term "chemical treating agent".


CLS 525/508
TXT Mixed with carboxylic acid- or derivative-containing chemical treating
    agent:

    Subject matter under subclass 480 wherein a solid polymer or specified
    intermediate condensation product derived from at least one phenolic
    reactant and at least one aldehyde or aldehyde-type reactant is mixed with
    a carboxylic acid or derivative chemical treating agent or polymer derived
    therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note under subclass 480 for an explanation of the
    term "chemical treating agent".


CLS 525/509
TXT Solid polymer or specified intermediate condensation product derived from
    at least one amine-, N or N- containing reactant and at least one aldehyde
    or aldehyde-type reactant (X is chalcogen): Subject matter under subclass
    50 involves processes of mixing a solid polymer or specified intermediate
    condensation product derived from at least one amine and/N or N- containing
    reactant and at least one aldehyde or aldehyde-type reactant or polymer
    thereof with an additional solid polymer, with additional specified
    intermediate condensation product, with specified polymer-forming
    ingredients or with ethylenic agent; processes of mixing solid polymer
    derived from at least one amine and/N or N- containing reactant and at
    least one aldehyde or aldehyde-type reactant or polymer thereof with a
    chemical treating agent; or products resulting from the above mixing
    processes (X is chalcogen).

    (1)     Note.  In this and the indented subclasses, an amine and/N-C- or O
    N-S-aldehyde, or aldehyde-type condensate must be a solid in order for a
    mixture thereof and a chemical treating agent to be classified herein.  A
    mixture of a nonsolid condensation product of an amine and/N or N-
    containing reactant and an aldehyde with a chemical treating agent, e.g., a
    catalyst, etc., is classified in Class 528.  See the Glossary and (1) Note
    of subclass 480 of this class.


CLS 525/510
TXT Mixed with reactant containing more than one 1,2-epoxy group per mole or
    polymer derived therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 509 wherein a solid polymer or specified
    intermediate condensation product derived from at least one amine
    and/N(X)-, or N- containing reactant and at least one aldehyde or
    aldehyde-type reactant is mixed with a reactant containing more than one
    1,2-epoxy group per mole or polymer derived therefrom.


CLS 525/511
TXT With specified material:

    Subject matter under subclass 510 which further contains a specified
    material.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "specified
    material".


CLS 525/512
TXT Amine-, N or N- containing reactant (X is chalcogen), aldehyde or
    aldehyde-type condensation product or polymer thereof contains atoms other
    than C, H, O, N or S: Subject matter under subclass 510 wherein the amine
    and/N or N- containing reactant-aldehyde, -aldehyde-type solid polymer or
    specified intermediate condensation product contains an atom other than
    carbon, hydrogen, oxygen, nitrogen, or sulfur.


CLS 525/513
TXT With sulfur-containing reactant or polymer therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 510 which also contains a sulfur-containing
    reactant or polymer derived therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  In this subclass, the sulfur-containing reactant or polymer
    derived therefrom must be an ingredient separate and distinct from the two
    required ingredients, i.e., the aminoplast or the 1,2-epoxy material.


CLS 525/514
TXT With carboxylic acid or derivative reactant or polymer derived therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 510 which also contains a carboxylic acid or
    derivative reactant or polymer derived therefrom.


CLS 525/515
TXT Mixed with additional aldehyde or aldehyde-type solid polymer; or specified
    intermediate condensation product; or aldehyde or aldehyde-type reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 509 wherein a solid polymer or specified
    intermediate condensation product derived from at least one amine and/N or
    N- containing reactant and at least one aldehyde or aldehyde-type reactant
    is mixed with an additional aldehyde or aldehyde-type solid polymer or a
    specified intermediate condensate, or aldehyde or aldehyde-type reactant (X
    is chalcogen).


CLS 525/516
TXT Contains a phenolic reactant or polymer thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 515 which contains a phenolic reactant or
    polymer thereof.


CLS 525/517
TXT Amine-, N or N- containing reactant-aldehyde or -aldehyde-type polymer or
    condensation product contains atoms other than C, H, O, N, or S (X is
    chalcogen):

    Subject matter under subclass 515 wherein the amine-, N or N- containing
    reactant aldehyde, -aldehyde-type solid polymer or specified intermediate
    condensation product contains an atom other than carbon, hydrogen, oxygen,
    nitrogen, or sulfur (X is chalcogen).


CLS 525/517.5
TXT Mixed with a reactant which is a fatty acid glycerol ester, a fatty acid or
    salt derived from a naturally occurring glyceride, tall oil, or a fatty
    acid derived from tall oil; or the reaction product of any of the above
    with a polycarboxylic acid or ester forming derivative and a polyhydroxy
    compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 509 wherein a reactant which is a fatty acid
    glyceride, a fatty acid derived from a naturally occurring glyceride, tall
    oil, or a fatty oil or salt thereof or a reaction product of any of these
    materials with a polycarboxylic acid or ester and a polyol.

    (1)     Note.  The so-called oil modified alkyl resins are treated herein
    in the same manner as fatty glycerides or the fatty acid derived therefrom.

    (2)     Note.  Dehydrated castor oil fatty acids are included herein.

    (3)     Note.  Placed herein are mixtures of SICP (e.g., aminoplast resin,
    etc.) with an ethylenic agent such as unsaturated fatty acid glycerides or
    unsaturated fatty acids derived therefrom, e.g., linseed oil or linseed
    fatty acid, etc.  However, an aminoplast SICP (not described as a solid
    polymer) admixed with a saturated fatty glyceride or saturated fatty acid,
    e.g., coconut oil or coconut fatty acid, etc., is placed in Class 528,
    subclass 245.5 since Class 525, subclasses 50+ do not encompass an
    admixture of a liquid SICP with a chemical treating agent; therefore, when
    saturated fatty glycerides or saturated fatty acid derived therefrom are
    reactants in the system of this subclass there must additionally be a
    complete system for Class 525, subclass 509.

    (4)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "fatty acid"
    and for the other materials proper for this subclass.


CLS 525/518
TXT Mixed with unsaturated reactant or polymer derived therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 509 wherein a solid polymer or specified
    intermediate condensation product derived from at least one amine-, N or N-
    containing reactant and at least one aldehyde or aldehyde-type reactant is
    mixed with an ethylenically unsaturated reactant or polymer derived
    therefrom (X is chalcogen).


CLS 525/519
TXT Mixed with carboxylic acid or derivative reactant or polymer therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 509 wherein a solid polymer or specified
    intermediate condensation product derived from at least one amine-, N or N-
    containing reactant and at least one aldehyde or aldehyde-type reactant is
    mixed with a carboxylic acid or derivative or polymer derived therefrom (X
    is chalcogen).


CLS 525/520
TXT Contains -N=C=X reactant or polymer therefrom (X is chalcogen):

    Subject matter under subclass 519 which contains a N=C=X reactant or
    polymer derived therefrom (X is chalcogen).


CLS 525/521
TXT Solid polymer or specified intermediate condensation product derived from
    at least one ketone reactant and at least one aldehyde or aldehyde
    derivative reactant: Subject matter under subclass 50 involves processes of
    mixing a solid polymer or specified intermediate condensation product
    derived from at least one ketone reactant and at least one aldehyde or
    aldehyde derivative or polymer thereof as reactant, with additional solid
    polymer, with additional specified intermediate condensation product, with
    specified polymer-forming ingredients or with ethylenic agent; processes of
    mixing solid polymer derived from at least one ketone reactant and at least
    one aldehyde reactant with a chemical treating agent; or processes of
    forming or reacting or products resulting from any of the above mixtures.

    (1)     Note.  In this and indented subclasses a condensate of a ketone
    reactant and an aldehyde or aldehyde derivative reactant must be a solid
    polymer in order for a mixture of a ketone-aldehyde condensate and a
    chemical treating agent to be classified herein.  A mixture of a nonsolid
    ketone-aldehyde condensate and a chemical treating agent, such as a
    catalyst, would be placed in Class 528. See the Glossary and (1) note of
    subclass 480 of this class.


CLS 525/522
TXT Mixed with reactant containing more than one 1,2-epoxy group per mole or
    polymer derived therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 521 wherein a solid polymer or specified
    intermediate condensation product derived from at least one ketone and at
    least one aldehyde or derivative reactant is mixed with a reactant
    containing more than one 1,2-epoxy group per mole or polymer derived
    therefrom.


CLS 525/523
TXT Solid polymer contains more than one 1,2-epoxy group or is derived from
    reactant containing at least one 1,2-epoxy group: Subject matter under
    subclass 50 involves processes of mixing a solid polymer containing more
    than one 1,2-epoxy group per mole or solid polymer derived from a reactant
    containing at least one 1,2-epoxy group with additional solid polymer, with
    specified polymer-forming ingredients, with chemical treating agent, or
    with ethylenic agent; or products resulting from the above mixing processes.


CLS 525/524
TXT Mixed with a reactant containing more than one 1,2-epoxy group per mole or
    polymer derived therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 523 wherein a solid polymer derived from
    reactant containing at least one 1,2-epoxy group or solid polymer
    containing more than one 1,2-epoxy group is mixed with a reactant
    containing more than one 1,2-epoxy group per mole or polymer derived
    therefrom.


CLS 525/525
TXT Wherein at least one of said 1,2-epoxy reactants or polymer derived
    therefrom contains atoms other than C, H, or O: Subject matter under
    subclass 524 wherein at least one of said 1,2-epoxy reactants or polymer
    derived therefrom contains an atom other than carbon, hydrogen, or oxygen.


CLS 525/526
TXT Contains nitrogen atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 525 wherein at least one of the 1,2-epoxy
    containing reactants or polymers contains nitrogen.


CLS 525/527
TXT Contains halogen atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 525 wherein at least one of the 1,2-epoxy
    containing reactants or polymers contains halogen.


CLS 525/528
TXT Mixed with -N=C=X-containing reactant or polymer therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 523 wherein a solid polymer containing more
    than one 1,2-epoxy group or derived from reactant containing at least one
    1,2-epoxy group is mixed with an -N=C=X-containing reactant or polymer
    derived therefrom (X is chalcogen).


CLS 525/529
TXT Mixed with unsaturated reactant or polymer derived therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 523 wherein a solid polymer containing more
    than one 1,2-epoxy group or derived from reactant containing at least one
    1,2-epoxy group is mixed with an ethylenically unsaturated reactant or
    polymer derived therefrom.


CLS 525/530
TXT Wherein unsaturated reactant is a carboxylic acid or derivative or polymer
    derived therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 529 wherein the unsaturated reactant or
    polymer derived therefrom is a carboxylic acid or derivative.


CLS 525/531
TXT Wherein unsaturated reactant contains only one free carboxyl group:

    Subject matter under subclass 530 wherein an unsaturated reactant contains
    only one free carboxylic acid group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides, for example, mixtures of solid
    polymeric polyepoxides and either the monoester of an unsaturated
    di-carboxylic acid or an unsaturated monocarboxylic acid.


CLS 525/532
TXT Contains polyol reactant or polymer derived therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 530 which contains polyhydroxy-containing
    reactant or polymer derived therefrom.


CLS 525/533
TXT Mixed with carboxylic acid or derivative reactant or polymer therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 523 wherein a solid polymer containing more
    than one 1,2-epoxy groups or derived from reactant containing at least one
    1,2-epoxy group is mixed with a carboxylic acid or derivative reactant or
    polymer derived therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclasses 403-409 for solid polymer derived
    from 1,2-epoxy compounds containing only one 1,2-epoxy group as only
    reactant, wherein said reactants do not contain plural methylol or plural
    methylol derivative groups.


CLS 525/534
TXT Solid polymer derived from phenolic reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 involves processes of mixing a solid
    polymer derived from a phenolic reactant with additional solid polymer,
    with specified polymer-forming ingredients, with chemical treating agent,
    or with ethylenic agent; or products resulting from the above mixing
    processes.


CLS 525/535
TXT Solid polymer derived from sulfur-containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 involves processes of mixing a solid
    polymer derived from a sulfur-containing reactant with additional solid
    polymer with specified polymer-forming ingredients, specified intermediate
    condensation product, with chemical treating agent, or with an ethylenic
    agent; or products resulting from the above mixing processes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    537,    for a process of mixing a solid polyphenylene sulfide with a
    chemical treating agent, with an additional solid polymer, with
    polymer-forming ingredients, or with an ethylenic agent when the disclosure
    is silent as to the mode of preparation of the polyphenylene sulfide or
    when such polymer is disclosed as being the reaction product of an alkali
    metal sulfide and a halogenated aromatic reactant.


CLS 525/536
TXT Solid polymer derived from sulfur dioxide and ethylenically unsaturated
    reactant: Subject matter under subclass 535 wherein the solid polymer is
    derived from the reaction of sulfur dioxide and an ethylenically
    unsaturated reactant.


CLS 525/537
TXT Solid polymer derived from alkali metal sulfide and halogenated aromatic
    reactant, e.g., polyarylene sulfide, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 535 wherein the solid polymer is derived from
    the reaction of an alkali metal sulfide-containing reactant and a
    halogenated aromatic reactant.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes polymers such as polyphenylene
    sulfide.  In the event that the patent is silent with regard to how the
    polymer is prepared it will be assumed that it is prepared from an alkali
    metal sulfide and a halogenated aromatic reactant and will be placed herein.


CLS 525/538
TXT Solid polymer derived from phosphorus-containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 involves processes of mixing a solid
    polymer derived from a phosphorus-containing reactant with additional solid
    polymer, with specified polymer-forming ingredients, with chemical treating
    agent or with ethylenic agent; processes of reacting the above mixtures or
    products resulting from the above mixing processes.


CLS 525/539
TXT Solid polymer derived from at least one unsaturated reactant and at least
    one saturated reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 involves processes of mixing a solid
    polymer derived from at least one ethylenically unsaturated reactant and at
    least one saturated reactant, with additional solid polymer, with specified
    polymer-forming ingredients, with chemical treating agent or with ethylenic
    agent; or products resulting from the mixing processes.


CLS 525/540
TXT Solid polymer derived from nitrogen-containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 involves processes of mixing a solid
    polymer derived from a nitrogen-containing reactant with additional solid
    polymer, with specified polymer-forming ingredients, with chemical treating
    agent or with ethylenic agent; or products resulting from the above mixing
    processes.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 525/901
TXT RADIAL BLOCK:

    Subject matter under Class 525 involving a radial block copolymer.


CLS 525/902
TXT CORE-SHELL:

    Subject matter under Class 525 involving a core-shell copolymer.


CLS 525/903
TXT INTERPENETRATING NETWORK:

    Subject matter under Class 525 involving polymers consisting of an
    interpenetrating network.


CLS 525/904
TXT ACTIVATION OF PREFORMED POLYMER IN ABSENCE OF MONOMER, FOR SUBSEQUENT
    POLYMERIZATION THEREON (E.G., TRAPPED RADICALS):

    Subject matter under Class 525 which involves the activation of a preformed
    polymer, in the absence of a monomer, for subsequent polymerization therein.


CLS 525/905
TXT POLYPHENYLENE OXIDE:

    Subject matter under Class 525 involving a polyphenylene oxide polymer.


CLS 525/906
TXT POLYSULFONE:

    Subject matter under Class 525 involving a polysulfone polymer.


CLS 525/907
TXT POLYCARBODIIMIDE:

    Subject matter under Class 525 involving a polycarbodiimide polymer.


CLS 525/908
TXT POLYMER CONTAINING A HYDANTOIN GROUP:
    Subject matter under Class 525 involving a polymer containing the hydantoin
    group, i.e.,


CLS 525/909
TXT POLYMER HAVING A HETEROCYCLIC RING WITH AT LEAST THREE DIFFERENT ELEMENTS
    WITHIN THE RING:

    Subject matter under Class 525 involving a polymer containing a
    heterocyclic ring with at least three different elements within the ring.


CLS 525/910
TXT POLYMER FROM ETHYLENIC MONOMERS ONLY, HAVING TERMINAL UNSATURATION:

    Subject matter under Class 525 involving an ethylenically polymerized
    polymer with terminal unsaturation.


CLS 525/911
TXT POLYMER FROM ETHYLENIC MONOMERS ONLY, HAVING TERMINAL FUNCTIONAL GROUP
    OTHER THAN UNSATURATION:

    Subject matter under Class 525 involving a polymer derived from ethylenic
    monomers only and having saturated terminal functional groups.


CLS 525/912
TXT POLYMER FROM NONETHYLENIC MONOMERS ONLY, HAVING PENDANT UNSATURATED GROUP:

    Subject matter under Class 525 involving a polymer derived form
    monoethylenic monomers only, having a pendant unsaturated group.


CLS 525/913
TXT POLYMER OF ETHYLENIC MONOMERS HAVING PENDANT GLYCIDYL GROUP:

    Subject matter under Class 525 involving a polymer derived from ethylenic
    monomers having a pendant glycidyl group.


CLS 525/914
TXT POLYMER FROM CONJUGATED DIENE HYDROCARBONS OR HALOHYDROCARBONS HAVING MORE
    THAN 50% 1,2-MICROSTRUCTURE:

    Subject matter under Class 525 involving a polymer derived from conjugated
    diene hydrocarbon or conjugated halogenated diene hydrocarbon, said polymer
    having more than 50  1,2-microstructure.


CLS 525/915
TXT POLYMER FROM MONOETHYLENIC CYCLIC HYDROCARBON:

    Subject matter under Class 525 involving a polymer derived from a
    monoethylenic cyclic hydrocarbon.


CLS 525/916
TXT POLYMER FROM ETHYLENIC MONOMERS ONLY, HAVING CATIONIC GROUP:

    Subject matter under Class 525 involving a polymer derived from ethylenic
    monomers only, having a cationic group.


CLS 525/917
TXT POLYMER FROM AT LEAST ONE NONETHYLENIC MONOMER HAVING CATIONIC GROUP:

    Subject matter under Class 525 involving a polymer prepared by cationic
    polymerization.


CLS 525/918
TXT POLYMER PREPARED BY CATIONIC POLYMERIZATION:

    Subject matter under Class 525 involving a polymer prepared by cationic
    polymerization.


CLS 525/919
TXT IONOMER RESINS (CARBOXYLATE SALT-CONTAINING COPOLYMERS):

    Subject matter under Class 525 involving a polymer containing a carboxylate
    salt group, e.g., ionomer resins, etc.


CLS 525/920
TXT POLYURETHANE HAVING TERMINAL ETHYLENIC UNSATURATION:

    Subject matter under Class 525 involving a polyurethane polymer with
    terminal ethylenic unsaturation.


CLS 525/921
TXT POLYESTER HAVING TERMINAL ETHYLENIC UNSATURATION OTHER THAN
    POLYESTERURETHANES:

    Subject matter under Class 525 involving a polyester with terminal
    ethylenic unsaturation, said polymer being other than polyesterurethanes.


CLS 525/922
TXT POLYEPOXIDE HAVING BEEN REACTED TO YIELD TERMINAL ETHYLENIC UNSATURATION:

    Subject matter under Class 525 involving a polyepoxide which has been
    reacted to yield a polymer with terminal ethylenic unsaturation.


CLS 525/923
TXT AMINOPLAST HAVING TERMINAL ETHYLENIC UNSATURATION:

    Subject matter under Class 525 involving an aminoplast with terminal
    ethylenic unsaturation.


CLS 525/924
TXT PHENOPLAST HAVING TERMINAL ETHYLENIC UNSATURATION:

    Subject matter under Class 525 involving a phenoplast with terminal
    ethylenic unsaturation.


CLS 525/925
TXT POLYMER FROM AT LEAST ONE NONETHYLENIC MONOMER HAVING TERMINAL ETHYLENIC
    UNSATURATION OTHER THAN POLYURETHANES, POLYESTERS, POLYEPOXIDES,
    AMINOPLASTS, AND PHENOPLASTS:

    Subject matter under Class 525 involves a polymer derived from at least one
    nonethylenic monomer and which polymer has terminal ethylenic unsaturation
    and is other than a polurethane, polyester, polyepoxide, aminoplast, or
    phenoplast.


CLS 525/926
TXT POLYAMIDE CONTAINING A PLURALITY OF OXYALKYLENE GROUPS:

    Subject matter under Class 525 involves a polyamide mixed with a polymer
    containing oxyalkylene groups.


CLS 525/927
TXT POLYAMIDE ADMIXED WITH OXYALKYLENE CONTAINING POLYMER:

    Subject matter under Class 525 involves a polyamide mixed with a polymer
    containing oxyalkylene groups.


CLS 525/928
TXT POLYIMIDE OR POLYAMIDE-ACID FORMED BY CONDENSATION OF A POLYAMINE WITH A
    POLYCARBOXYLIC ACID HAVING AT LEAST THREE CARBOXYL GROUPS OR DERIVATIVES
    THEREOF: Subject matter under Class 525 involves a polyimide- or
    polyamide-acid formed by the condensation of a polyamine with a
    polycarboxylic acid having at least 3 carboxyl groups, anhydride thereof,
    or derivative thereof.


CLS 525/929
TXT POLYIMIDE FORMED BY ADDITION OF POLYAMINE TO AN UNSATURATED BIS-IMIDE:

    Subject matter under Class 525 involves a polyimide formed by the addition
    of a polyamine to an unsaturated bis-imide.


CLS 525/930
TXT REACTION PRODUCT OF A POLYHYDRIC PHENOL AND EPICHLOROHYDRIN OR DIEPOXIDE,
    HAVING A MOLECULAR WEIGHT OF OVER 5,000 (E.G., PHENOXY RESINS):

    Subject matter under Class 525 involves a reaction product of a polyhydric
    phenol and an epichlorohydrin diepoxide, which reaction product has a
    molecular weight of over 5,000, e.g., phenoxy resins, etc.


CLS 525/931
TXT BLEND OF STATED INCOMPATIBILITY:

    Subject matter under Class 525 involves a polymeric mixture wherein the
    ingredients are generally incompatible with one another.


CLS 525/932
TXT BLEND OF MATCHED OPTICAL PROPERTIES:
    Subject matter under Class 525 involves a polymeric mixture with matched
    optical properties.


CLS 525/933
TXT BLEND OF LIMITED GAS PERMEABILITY:

    Subject matter under Class 525 involves a polymeric mixture with limited
    gas permeability.


CLS 525/934
TXT POWDERED COATING COMPOSITION:

    Subject matter under Class 525 involves a powdered coating composition.


CLS 525/935
TXT MATRIX ADMIXED WITH SYNTHETIC FIBER:
    Subject matter under Class 525 involves a matrix mixed with a synthetic
    fiber.


CLS 525/936
TXT ENCAPSULATED CHEMICAL AGENT:

    Subject matter under CLass 525 involves an encapsulated chemical treating
    agent.


CLS 525/937
TXT UTILITY AS BODY CONTACT (IMPLANT, CONTACT LENS, I.U.D., ETC.):

    Subject matter under Class 525 involves a polymer which has utility as a
    body contact material, e.g., inplant, contact lens, etc.


CLS 525/938
TXT POLYMER DEGRADATION:

    Subject matter under Class 525 involves a polymer degradation.


CLS 525/939
TXT MULTIPACKAGE SYSTEM:

    Subject matter under Class 525 involves a multipackaged system.


CLS 525/940
TXT HYDROGENATION OF A POLYMER:

    Subject matter under Class 525 involves a hydrogenated polymer.


CLS 525/941
TXT POLYMER MIXTURE CONTAINING BLOCK COPOLYMER IS MIXED OR REACTED WITH
    CHEMICAL TREATING AGENT:

    Subject matter under Class 525 involves a polymeric mixture which contains
    a block copolymer and which is further mixed or reacted with a chemical
    treating agent.


CLS 525/942
TXT POLYMER DERIVED FROM NITRILE, CONJUGATED DIENE AND AROMATIC CO-MONOMERS:

    Subject matter under class definition involving a polymer derived from
    ethylenic reactants only derived from a nitrile, conjugated nonaromatic
    hydrocarbon and aromatic hydrocarbon, e.g., included herein are the "ABS"
    resins, grafts, blocks, and any other combination proper for Class 525, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    526,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 335+ for a polymer
    derived from hydrocarbon monomer containing at least two ethylenic groups.


CLS 526/
TTL SYNTHETIC RESINS OR NATURAL RUBBERS -- PART  OF THE CLASS 520 SERIES

CLS 526/
TXT This class (526) provides for all processes of preparing polymers from only
    ethylenically unsaturated monomers and for all products thereof when such
    products and processes are not provided in higher subclasses in the Class
    260 schedule hierarchy.  In addition, Class 526 (subclasses 59-71) provides
    for certain polymerization processes which are applicable to any type of
    reactant or monomer.


CLS 526/59
TXT Subject matter under Class 520, subclass 1 wherein a process parameter is
    determined and some polymerization process parameter is altered in response
    to the determination.

    (1)     Note.  A test or measurement performed by a human being with a
    subsequent control operation is proper herein.

    (2)     Note.  Treating a material to a certain condition without a defined
    inanimate measurement, test, inspection, or control, e.g., temperature, pH,
    etc., is not proper subject matter for this subclass and classification of
    such a process will be accorded on some other basis.


CLS 526/60
TXT Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein a polymerization process parameter
    is altered in response to the composition or composition property and
    wherein the composition property is other than density, per se.

    (1)     Note.  Included within the definition of composition or composition
    property is the determination of the identity of a component or the
    relative amount of a component in a stream, electrical conductivity, redox,
    potential, pH measurement, molecular weight, melt index, optical
    properties, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59,     for a process involving measurement of density, per se, followed by
    a control operation in response to the measurement.


CLS 526/61
TXT Processes under subclass 59 wherein a polymerization process parameter is
    altered in response to a determination of temperature or pressure.


CLS 526/62
TXT Subject matter under Class 520, subclass 1 wherein the polymerization
    reaction takes place in (1) a reactor of specified material; or (2) a
    reactor part is of a specified material; or (3)wherein the reactor or part
    of the reactor has been treated in some manner.

    (1)     Note.  Specified material includes a recitation that the reactor
    material be free from certain specified material.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein but not limited to the enumerated examples
    are stainless steel and glass-lined reactors, reactor parts such as
    titanium stirrers, and reactors that have been subjected to a specified
    wash or the application of a coating material.


CLS 526/63
TXT Subject matter under Class 520, subclass 1 wherein heat exchange or
    reduction of particle size of a polymerizing polymer is effected by direct
    contact of said polymerizing polymer with an inert-solid mass which solid
    is not an internal part of the polymerization apparatus or of the
    processing apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  "Inert-solid mass" includes steel shot and ceramic rollers.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not include indirect cooling or heating,
    e.g., cooling outside of reactor so as to cool reactor contents, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for breakdown of shearing of a polymerizing polymer utilizing a
    stirrer or some other means which means or stirrer is part of the apparatus
    or processing equipment.


CLS 526/64
TXT Subject matter under Class 520, subclass 1 wherein polymerization is
    effected in a loop or tubular reactor.

    (1)     Note.  A loop reactor for purposes of this subclass is an apparatus
    wherein polymerization material is circulated in a continuous path within a
    single or multicoiled or spiraled structure which has at least one inlet
    and outlet means and at least one reaction zone.

    (2)     Note.  A tubular reactor for purposes of this subclass is an
    apparatus wherein polymerizable material flows in an essentially linear
    direction in a tube or series of interconnected tubes, which tube or tubes
    are of small diameter in relation to their length and wherein each tube has
    at least one inlet and outlet means and one or more polymerization reaction
    zones.


CLS 526/65
TXT Subject matter under Class 520, subclass 1 wherein polymerization is
    effected in at least two or more physically distinct zones, (e.g., regions,
    stages, etc.) said zones being part of a single reactor which has a
    plurality of such physically distinct zones or such zones may be part of
    separate polymerization reactors which are interconnected at some point.

    (1)     Note.  For the most part patents herein relate to advancement of
    polymerizing materials from one zone to another so as to effect a
    progressive degree of polymerization and which are usually advanced until
    the degree of polymerization is brought to the desired state.


CLS 526/66
TXT Subject matter under subclass 65 wherein material (e.g., monomer, catalyst,
    etc.) is added to a zone containing polymerizable material therein, said
    polymerizable material being in a state undergoing active polymerization
    and wherein said material is added in a sequential or incremental manner.

    (1)     Note.  "Sequential or incremental" addition requires (1) the
    addition of material involving a halting, interruption, or pausing in the
    addition of the same material followed by a resumption of addition; or (2)
    the addition of materials to a polymerization zone followed by the addition
    of materials distinct from the previous material, or (3) the addition of
    disproportionate amounts of materials so that the addition of one is
    completed prior to the completion of the addition of the other material.


CLS 526/67
TXT Subject matter under Class 520, subclass 1 wherein a portion of material is
    removed from a zone wherein material is undergoing polymerization and the
    removed material either with something added to it, removed from it, or the
    removed material, per se, is added to a zone wherein an active
    polymerization is occuring.


CLS 526/68
TXT Subject matter under subclass 67 wherein monomer is removed from and
    recycled back to an ongoing polymerization reaction zone.

    (1)     Note.  The removal herein need only involve a monomer.  For
    instance, removing material containing monomer admixed with diluent and the
    recycling of both would be proper herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for processes involving removing catalyst or catalyst component
    together with monomer and recycling of only the catalyst.

    70,     for processes involving removing monomer and diluent and recycling
    only the diluent.


CLS 526/69
TXT Subject matter under subclass 67 wherein a catalyst or catalyst constituent
    is removed from and recycled back to an ongoing polymerization zone.

    (1)     Note.  The removal herein need not solely involve a catalyst or
    catalyst constituent.  For instance, removing a catalyst admixed with a
    diluent and the recycling of both would be proper herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for processes involving removing a catalyst or catalyst component
    and a diluent and the recycling of only the diluent.


CLS 526/70
TXT Subject matter under subclass 67 wherein a diluent or diluent component is
    removed from and recycled back to an ongoing polymerization zone.


CLS 526/71
TXT Subject matter under Class 520, subclass 1 wherein only nonpolymerizable
    material is removed during the polymerization reaction.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass is the removal of polymerized
    materials admixed with nonpolymerized or nonpolymerizable material.


CLS 526/72
TXT Subject matter under Class 520, subclass 1 involving polymers derived from
    ethylenically unsaturated monomers only and processes of polymerizing same;
    polymerizing compositions containing ethylenically unsaturated monomers
    only and processes of preparing polymerizable compositions.

    (1)     Note.  The following rules apply in classifying a claim into this
    area of the Class 526 schedule.



    (A)     For purposes of clarification in this schedule, subclasses 59-238
    will be deemed to be process subclasses, and subclasses 239-352 will be
    indicated as being product subclasses.

    (A1)    Patents that claim a product and process, wherein both the product
    and the process are specifically provided for in the schedule, are
    classified in the process area (59-238) and cross-referenced to the product
    area (239-352).

    (A2)    Patents that claim a provided for process (59-238) and a
    nonprovided for process (other than 89) but where the monomers being
    polymerized are provided (239- 352) and are classified in the process area
    (59-238) and cross-referenced into the product area on the basis of the
    first appearing monomer in the schedule that is being polymerized (239-352).

    (A3)    Patents that claim both a provided for (239-352) product and a
    process of polymerizing (59-238) and wherein the product is claimed in
    process terms are classified on the basis of the process (59-238) and
    cross-referenced to the first appearing monomer in the schedule utilized in
    preparing the polymer.

    (A4)    Patents that claim a product solely in process terms are classified
    on the basis of the process (59-238) when said process is provided in the
    schedule and cross-referenced to the first appearing monomer in the
    schedule utilized in preparing the polymer.

    (A5)    Patents that claim a product in process terms and wherein the
    process is not provided in subclasses (59-238) are classified on the basis
    of the first appearing monomer in the schedule utilized in preparing the
    polymer.

    (A6)    Patents that claim a polymerizable composition or the preparation
    of a polymerizable composition are classified on the basis of the first
    apearing monomer (239-352) in the schedule that is part of the
    polymerizable composition.

    (A7)    Patents that claim a polymer only are classified on the basis of
    the first appearing monomer in the schedule (239-352) that has been
    polymerized in preparing the polymer.

    (A8)    Patents that claim merely vulcanizing, curing, or cross-linking of
    a polymer proper for this area, without the presence of a specified
    vulcanizing, curing, or cross-linking agent, or the amount of the chemical
    agent or the vulcanized, cured or cross-linked product of such a reaction
    are classified on the basis of the first appearing monomer in the schedule
    (239-352) that has been polymerized in preparing the polymer.

    (A9)    Patents that claim a polymer which is the result of a degradation
    of a polymer proper for this area (239-352) and wherein the degradation has
    been effected in the absence of any chemical agent are classified on the
    basis of the initial first appearing monomer in the schedule (239-352) that
    has been polymerized in preparing the previously-formed polymer that is
    degraded.

    (2)     Note.  Each product subclass, subclasses 239-352 unless
    specifically limites in its title, includes homopolymers and interpolymers.

    (3)     Note.  "Interpolymerized" as used throughout the product area
    subclasses 239-352 includes all combinations of the necessary monomers as
    required in the definition of the particular subclass in combination with
    any other monomer not provided for in a higher subclass of the schedule.

    (4)     Note.  A monomer for purposes of this subclass is a material which
    occurs in a polymer as a repeating unit and is present in at least three
    units and as used herein "monomer" is meant to exclude catalyst residues,
    chain transfer agents, etc; however, a nonethylenic carbohydrate or
    nonethylenic protein which is present during polymerization of an ethylenic
    monomer and which is described as chemically bonded to the polymer is
    proper subject matter for Class 527, subclasses 313+.

    (5)     Note.  This subclass provides for processes wherein an
    ethylenically unsaturated monomer is undergoing polymerization and
    concurrently therewith is reacting with a second ethylenic material, which
    second ethylenic material does not enter into the polymer backbone, e.g.,
    polymerizing acrylic acid in the presence of allyl alcohol so that the
    final polymer is a polymerized acrylic acid having ester groups which are
    derived from the unsaturated alcohol.

    (6)     Note.  The sole requirement for the products of this subclass is
    that the polymerization reaction involve only ethylenic unsaturated
    monomers.  Note, however, that the actual polymerization mechanism need not
    involve the ethylenically unsaturated group, e.g., polymerization of a
    glycidyl methylacrylate may involve the double bond in one instance and in
    another instance may involve the ring opening of the epoxy group, etc.

    (7)     Note.  The treatment of a liquid polymer derived from an
    unsaturated monomer which is to be further polymerized is regarded as
    involving polymerization rather than as an after-treatment of a polymeric
    polymer and is therefore classified in this area as against the chemical
    after-treatment area, Class 525, subclasses 326.1+.

    (8)     Note. In subclasses 239-352 each indent of a specific form of "from
    monomer" only refers to species of that type monomer and not to other
    monomers that may be interpolymerized therewith. When other monomers which
    are not species of the "from monomers" are to be taken into account the
    subclass has been identified as "interpolymerized."

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72+,    for processes for adding material to an ongoing polymerization
    process or where preformed liquid polymers are further polymerized so as to
    form a final polymerized product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    525,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 242+, for products
    resulting from or involving a polymer derived from only ethylenic monomers
    reacted with an ethylenically unsaturated reactant, or for products
    resulting from or involving a polymer derived from at least only ethylenic
    monomers reacted in the presence of an ethylenically unsaturated monomer.
    Subclasses 242+ also provides for the processes of preparing products
    properly classifiable within the subclass.

    528,    Snythetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 480+ for processes
    of treating a polymer not involving a chemical modification of the polymer,
    by the addition of a material thereto and for chemically modifying
    materials other than the ethylenic polymer.  Subclasses 480+ also provide
    for the processes of admixing with a broadly claimed nonreactant material.
    (See subclass 1 of Class 523 for the distinction between that class and
    this area, and see in particular, Note 6 B.).


CLS 526/73
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the polymerization reaction is
    effected using at least two different pressures or at least two different
    temperatures.

    (1)     Note.  The temperature or pressure must be increased or decreased
    under controlled conditions so that the temperature or pressure is
    maintained for a definite period of time prior to the raising or lowering
    of the temperature or pressure.

    (2)     Note.  The mere recitation of a range of temperatures or pressures
    is not considered sufficient to be considered as being different
    temperatures or pressures.


CLS 526/74
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein material that would normally form
    during a polymerization reaction and which would clog or foul the
    polymerization equipment is removed from or is prevented or inhibited from
    forming by the use of a nonpolymerizable material, which material is other
    than a hydrocarbon or halogenated hydrocarbon used in solvent or diluent
    amount.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein but not limited to the specific examples are
    patents which specifically claim the use of materials to remove or inhibit
    forming of fouling materials by solvents, surfactant surface treatments
    during polymerization, or maintaining a fluid film between the
    polymerization equipment and the polymerizing materials.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for a process of polymerizing in reactor or defined material or in
    reactor which has been treated prior to polymerization therein.

    89+,    for processes of polymerizing in a specific diluent or solvent
    wherein reaction buildup is alleviated by the inherent use of a solvating
    material; and for processes of polymerizing in a hydrocarbon or halogenated
    hydrocarbon diluent together with a specific material wherein the
    hydrocarbon or halogenated hydrocarbon may prevent fouling of the reactor.
    Subclasses 239-352, appropriate product for processes of polymerizing in a
    hydrocarbon or chlorinated hydrocarbon diluent or solvent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    528,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 484, for processes of
    removing buildup on reactor or processing equipment subsequent to
    polymerization.


CLS 526/75
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72 which includes the chemical synthesis of a
    monomer or a prepolymer and subsequent polymerization thereof.

    (1)     Note.  A prepolymer for purposes of the subclass is a
    low-molecular-weight- polymeric material prepared from a single source
    product and which is regarded as an intermediate reactant rather than as a
    final product and which is further polymerizable by a continuation of the
    same reaction as used in preparing said prepolymer.

    (2)     Note. Included herein are processes involving dimerization or
    trimerization of monomer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, appropriate subclasses, for a method
    of preparing a polymerizable monomer or prepolymer.


CLS 526/76
TXT Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein the monomer or prepolymer is
    derived from a petroleum fraction.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are processes of recovering hydrocarbon
    materials from a crude-natural source followed by a chemical reaction,
    e.g., dimerization, etc., and subsequent final polymerization.


CLS 526/77
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72 which includes the step of purifying the
    ethylenic monomer.

    (1)     Note.  Purification for this subclass may be for any number of
    reasons, e.g., removing impurities which inhibit polymerization, removing
    impurities which may be undesirable in the final polymer, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this sublass are processes involving physical
    treatments, e.g., distillation, sorbent extraction, etc., as well a
    processes involving chemical interaction of the impurity or undesired
    constituents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     for processes of chemically modifying a monomer or prepolymer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    528,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 480+, for processes
    of purifying a polymer by either a chemical or physical process.


CLS 526/78
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein material which is added to a zone,
    said zone containing material therein which is undergoing polymerization,
    and the addition of the material is other than by the continuous addition
    of the material contained in the initial change.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes herein addition proper for this subclass
    involves any of the following:  (1) the addition of material to a
    polymerization zone and continuing the polymerization without any
    subsequent addition, or (2) the addition of materials to a polymerization
    zone followed by the addition of materials distinct from the previous
    material either in whole-amount or in the addition of the same material in
    different concentration, or (3) the addition of material to terminate
    polymerization, or (4) the addition of material with the addition involving
    a halting, interruption, pausing, or suspending of adding material at any
    time during the polymerization reaction or (5) the addition of a material
    to a zone wherein all of the other necessary materials are present except
    the one being added.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72+,    for a method of polymerization involving the continuous addition of
    material to a zone.


CLS 526/79
TXT Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein the material is added in an
    incremental or sequential manner.

    (1)     Note.  "Sequential or incremental" addition requires (1) the
    addition of material involving a halting interruption, or pausing in the
    addition of the same material followed by a resumption of addition; or (2)
    the addition of materials to a polymerization zone followed by the addition
    of material distinct from the previous materials; or (3) the addition of
    disproportionate amounts of material so that the addition of one is
    completed prior to the completion of the addition of the other material.


CLS 526/80
TXT Subject matter under subclass 79 wherein the polymerization reaction is
    effected in the presence of water.


CLS 526/81
TXT Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the added material is devoid of
    monomer.


CLS 526/82
TXT Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein the added material terminates or
    retards the polymerization reaction, e.g., polymerization inhibitor,
    terminator, chain-transfer agent, short-stopper, etc.


CLS 526/83
TXT Subject matter under subclass 82 wherein the added terminating or
    inhibiting material contains a nitrogen-containing compound.


CLS 526/84
TXT Subject matter under subclass 82 wherein the added terminating or retarding
    material contains an oxygen-containing compound.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes the use of water, per se, as a
    retarding or terminating agent.


CLS 526/85
TXT Subject matter under subclass 82 wherein the added terminating or retarding
    material contains a sulfur atom.


CLS 526/86
TXT Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein the added material is the catalyst
    or a part of the catalyst system.


CLS 526/87
TXT Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein the added material is an
    ethylenically unsaturated monomer.


CLS 526/88
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the polymerization process
    involves specific mixing, stirring, agitating, or the movement of material.

    (1)     Note.  Specified for purposes of this subclass requires the naming
    of a movement-imparting rotor, stirrer, impeller or any other device in
    terms of its specified dimension, design, size, or shape thereof, or
    requires the recitation of a reactor of a design to facilitate movement or
    agitation; or requires a positive recitation in the claims as to velocity
    or designated time of mixing, said time being either continuous or
    intermittent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72+,    for mere agitating during a polymerization reaction.


CLS 526/89
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein an ethylenically unsaturated
    monomer is polymerized in the presence of a specified material.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for an explanation of the term "specified
    material".


CLS 526/90
TXT Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the specified material contains at
    least one transition metal atom.

    (1)     Note.  "Transition metal" for purposes of this subclass is limited
    to elements of atomic numbers 21-29, 39-47, 57-79, and 89 and higher and
    does not include Zn, Cd, and Hg.

    (2)     Note.  "Nontransition metal" as used throughout this schedule is
    intended to include all metals other than the transition metals encompassed
    within the (1) Note above.

    (3)     Note.

    (A)     Nontransition metal atom-to-carbon bond as used throughout this
    schedule includes all compounds that contain at least one carbon atom
    bonded to at least one nontransition metal atom.

    (B)     Nontransition metal hydride as used through this schedule includes
    all compounds that contain at least one hydrogen atom bonded to at least
    one nontransition metal.

    (C)     Included within the scope of compounds encompassed by the
    definition of (A) and (B) above are those compounds having two or more
    nontransition metal atoms wherein additionally one of said atoms is bonded
    to a carbon or hydrogen atom and wherein one of said nontransition metal
    atoms is not bonded to a hydrogen or carbon atom.

    (4)     Note.

    (A)     Metal borohydrides, e.g., LiBH4, Ti(BH4)3, etc., are classified as
    if they are hydrides of boron and of the metal atom.

    (B)     NonMixed metal hydrides, e.g., NaA1H4, Ca (ALH4)2, etc., are
    classified as if they are hydrides of aluminum and of the other metal.

    (C)     In those instances where a carbon atom has replaced at least one or
    more hydrogen atoms of compounds as elaborated in 4A above, then
    classification is made as if these compounds are alternatively bonded to a
    boron atom and to a metal, and in those cases wherein a carbon atom has
    replaced at least one or more hydrogen atoms of compounds as elaborated in
    4(B) above, then classification is made as if these compounds are
    alternatively bonded to either one of the metal atoms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132,    for a mixture of LiBH4 and Ti Cl4.

    159,    for a mixture of NaAl H4 and Ti Cl4.


CLS 526/91
TXT Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein transition material is in contact
    with water during the polymerization reaction.

    (1)     Note.  The amount of water present during the polymerization
    reaction is of no significance, e.g., diluent, catalyst, activator, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Water of hydration, per se, is not considered as being water
    for this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  The use of a catalyst system or other material which has
    been prepared in the presence of water is not proper for this subclass
    unless it is understood that free water remains after the material has been
    formed.


CLS 526/92
TXT Subject matter under subclass 91 wherein the transition metal atom is
    bonded to at least one carbon atom; or wherein the transition metal
    material is in admixture with a compound that contains at least one metal
    atom bonded to a carbon atom.


CLS 526/93
TXT Subject matter under subclass 91 wherein at least one atom is a Group VIII
    metal, i.e., Fe, Co, Ni, Ru, Rh, Pd, Os, Ir, Pt.


CLS 526/94
TXT Subject matter under subclass 93 wherein (1) the transition metal atom
    exists as a part of a sulfur-containing organic compound; or (2) the
    transition metal material is in admixture with an organic sulfur-containing
    compound.


CLS 526/95
TXT Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein the specified material contains a
    transition metal atom as part of a binary compound solely composed of a
    single transition metal and oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are supports for active ingredients wherein
    the support may be an oxide of a transition metal, e.g., thoria, titania,
    etc.

    (2)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are the peroxides of a
    transition metal.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass includes reaction products or reaction
    mixtures of transition metal oxides wherein the surface of the transition
    metal oxide may be modified (e.g., TiO2 chemically bonded to TiCl4 on its
    surface)but wherein the material is still regarded as being in oxide form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172,    for a binary peroxide containing a transition metal and oxygen.


CLS 526/96
TXT Subject matter under subclass 95 wherein the specified material contains at
    least two transition metal atoms, one of said transitional metal atoms
    being in elemental form or as part of a nonbinary oxide compound.


CLS 526/97
TXT Subject matter under subclass 96 wherein the specified material contains a
    nontransition metal in elemental form, or in the form of a hydride, or as a
    compound wherein the nontransition metal is bonded directly to a carbon
    atom.


CLS 526/98
TXT Subject matter under subclass 95 wherein the specified material contains
    elemental halogen or a nonmetal halogen-containing compound.


CLS 526/99
TXT Subject matter under subclass 95 wherein the specified material contains at
    least one aluminum compound having an aluminum atom bonded to halogen, and
    wherein said same aluminum atom is not bonded to a carbon or hydrogen atom.


CLS 526/100
TXT Subject matter under subclass 95 wherein the specified material contains at
    least one nonmetallic, organic, nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur or
    phosphorus-containing compound.


CLS 526/101
TXT Subject matter under subclass 95 wherein the specified material consists of
    at least two transition metal oxides, at least two of said transition metal
    oxides being other than oxides of Ti, Zr, Hf, or Th.

    (1)     Note.  Proper for this subclass are ternary sytems containing three
    transitional metal oxides wherein one of the oxides is of Ti, Zr, Hf or Th
    and wherein the other two oxides are not of those transition metals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for a mixture of a Group VIII oxide and an oxide of Ti, Zr, Hf, or
    Th.

    104,    for a mixture of a Group VIB oxide and/or oxide of Ti, Zr, Hf, or
    Th.


CLS 526/102
TXT Subject matter under subclass 95 wherein the specified material contains an
    elemental nontransitional heavy metal or a compound of a nontransition
    heavy metal.


CLS 526/103
TXT Subject matter under subclass 95 wherein the specified material contains an
    oxide of a Group VIII metal, i.e., Fe, Co, Ni, Ru, Rh, Pd, Os, Ir, Pt.


CLS 526/104
TXT Subject matter under subclass 95 wherein the specified material contains an
    oxide of a Group VIB metal, i.e., Cr, Mo, W.


CLS 526/105
TXT Subject matter under subclass 104 wherein the specified material contains
    an elemental nonheavy metal, or contains a hydride of a nonheavy metal, or
    contains a compound having a nonheavy metal to carbon bond.


CLS 526/106
TXT Subject matter under subclass 104 wherein the specified material contains
    an oxide of chromium.


CLS 526/107
TXT Subject matter under subclass 95 wherein the specified material contains an
    oxide of a Group IVB metal, i.e., Ti, Zr, Hf.


CLS 526/108
TXT Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein the specified material contains a
    transition metal in elemental form.

    (1)     Note.  Included within the term elemental metal are alloys.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for processes of polymerizing in a reactor wherein one of the
    reactor surfaces which contacts the polymerizing material is a transition
    metal in elemental form.


CLS 526/109
TXT Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein the specified material contains
    an elemental transition metal in admixture with a compound that contains an
    -O-O-group.


CLS 526/110
TXT Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein the specified material contains
    an elemental transition metal which is in admixture with a nontransition
    metal, or is in admixture with a hydride of a nontransition metal, or is in
    admixture with a compound of a nontransition metal wherein a nontransition
    metal atom is directly bonded to a carbon atom.


CLS 526/111
TXT Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein the specified material contains
    at least one nonmetallic material which contains a nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur
    or phosphorus atom.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this area is the use of nitrogen or air as
    merely carrier or blanket gases.


CLS 526/112
TXT Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein the specified material contains
    an elemental transition metal which is in admixture with a transition metal
    compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for an admixture of two or more elemental transition metal atoms,
    e.g., alloys, etc.


CLS 526/113
TXT Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein the specified material contains
    (1) two compounds having diverse transition metal atoms; or (2) a single
    compound having at least two diverse transition metal atoms therein, e.g.,

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118+,   for a specified material containing two or more compounds of the
    same transition metal.


CLS 526/114
TXT Subject matter under subclass 113 wherein the specified material contains a
    nontransition metal in elemental form, or contains a hydride of a
    nontransition metal, or contains a compound of a nontransition metal
    wherein a nontransition metal atom is directly bonded to a carbon atom.


CLS 526/115
TXT Subject matter under subclass 114 wherein at least one of the transition
    atoms present is a Group VIII element, i.e., Fe, Co, Ni, Ru, Rh, Pd, Os,
    Ir, Pt.


CLS 526/116
TXT Subject matter under subclass 114 wherein at least one of the transition
    metal atoms present is a Group IVB atom and wherein at least one of the
    different transition metal atoms present is a Group VB atom, e.g., TiCl4
    and VOCL3, etc.

    (1)     Note. A Group IV atom is Ti, Zr, Hf. A Group VB atom is V, Nb, Ta.


CLS 526/117
TXT Subject matter under subclass 113 wherein at least one of the transition
    metal atoms present is a Group VIII element, i.e., Fe, Co, Ni, Ru, Rh, Pd,
    Os, Ir, Pt.


CLS 526/118
TXT Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein the specified material contains at
    least two different transition metal compounds, each of said compounds
    containing the same transition metal atom.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are compositions containing two
    or more distinct compounds of the same transition elements when such
    compositions are the result of a reaction wherein a part of the original
    transition metal compound is converted to a different compound form, e.g.,
    partial reduction of TiCl4 with AlR3, to form a mixture of TiCl4 and TiCl3,
    etc.  However, a patent claim wherein TiCl4 and TiCl3 are separately added
    would be proper herein.


CLS 526/119
TXT Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein the specified material contains a
    nontransition metal in elemental form, or contains a hydride of a
    nontransition metal, or contains a compound of a nontransition metal
    wherein a nontransition metal atom is directly bonded to a carbon atom.


CLS 526/120
TXT Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein (1) the specified material
    contains a transition metal compound which is in admixture with a compound
    containing a heavy metal atom and which heavy metal is other than a heavy
    metal atom directly bonded to a carbon atom or to a hydrogen atom; or (2)
    wherein a transition metal containing compound additionally contains at
    least one heavy metal atom in the same molecule, which heavy metal atom is
    not directly bonded to a hydrogen or carbon atom, e.g., mercuric tungstate,
    or a mixture of NiCl2 and ZnCl2, etc.


CLS 526/121
TXT Subject matter under subclass 120 wherein the specified material contains a
    nontransition metal in elemental form, or contains a hydride of a
    nontransition metal, or contains a compound of a nontransition metal
    wherein a nontransition metal atom is directly bonded to a carbon atom.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are compounds which may contain
    two heavy metal atoms and wherein one of the metal atoms may be attached to
    a carbon or hydrogen atom and wherein the other heavy metal atom is not
    attached to a hydrogen or carbon atom.


CLS 526/122
TXT Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the heavy metal compound contains
    a halogen atom, e.g., SnCl4, (R-O)3SnCl, etc.


CLS 526/123.1
TXT Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein the specified material contains a
    transition metal compound which is in admixture with a Group IA or IIA
    metal compound, which compound is other than a Group IA or Group IIA metal
    hydride or compound containing a Group IA or Group IIA metal atom bonded
    directly to a carbon atom; or wherein a transition metal-containing
    compound additionally contains at least one Group IA or Group IIA metal
    atom in the same molecule, which Group IA or Group IIA metal atom is not
    bonded directly to a hydrogen or carbon atom; e.g., Ca(NR2)2, NaNH2, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are compounds which may contain
    two alkali metal atoms and wherein one of the alkali metal atoms may be
    attached to a carbon or hydrogen atom and wherein the other alkali metal
    atom is not attached to a carbon or hydrogen atom; e.g., NaCH2CH2ONa, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    167,    for a specified material containing a transition metal compound and
    an elemental Group IA or Group IIA metal atom.


CLS 526/124.1
TXT Subject matter under subclass 123.1 wherein the specified material contains
    a nontransition metal in elemental form, or contains a hydride of a
    nontransition metal, or contains a compound of a nontransition metal
    wherein the nontransition metal is directly bonded to a carbon atom.

    (1)     Note. Examples of substances provided for herein as contained in
    the specified material are: lithium metal, MgH2, Al(C2H5)3, and C2H5MgCl.


CLS 526/124.2
TXT Subject matter under subclass 124.1 wherein the specified material contains
    a magnesium compound having no carbon to magnesium or hydrogen to magnesium
    bonds.

    (1)     Note. Examples of substances provided for herein as contained in
    the specified material are:  MgCl2, MgO, and Mg(OC2H5)2.


CLS 526/124.3
TXT Subject matter under subclass 124.2 wherein  an additional specified
    material is present; i.e., there are four or more specified materials
    present.

     (1)    Note. See GLOSSARY for an explanation of the term "specified
    material."

    (2)     Note. This subclass provides, inter alia, for the combination of
    TiCl4, MgCl2, Al(CH3)3 and an additional specified material such as
    Al(C2H5)3, PCl3 or alcohol.

    (3)     Note. Material such as
    Mgm Ti(OR) mXp[ED]q wherein R is hydrocarbon, X is halogen and ED is a
    specified material such as a carboxylic acid ester will be considered to
    represent a mixture of specified materials rather than a unitary compound.
    In this particular mixture, ED represents the additional specified material
    which satisfies the requirement of this subclass.

    (4)     Note. For purpose of this and indented subclasses, materials such
    as MgCl2#2H2O are generally regarded as constituting two specified
    materials; i.e., MgCl2 and H2O.  In subclass 124.4, however, MgCl2 2H2O is
    considered as a single specified material.


CLS 526/124.4
TXT Subject matter under subclass 124.3 wherein there is present (1) two
    different magnesium compounds neither of which contains a carbon to
    magnesium or a hydrogen to magnesium bond, or (2) a Group IA metal or
    nonmagnesium Group IIA metal compound, neither of which contains  a bond
    between carbon or hydrogen and the Group IA or Group IIA metal.

    (1)     Note. An example of (1), supra, is the combination of MgCl2 and
    Mg(OC2H5)2.  An example of (2), supra, is MgCl2  KCl 6H2O.


CLS 526/124.5
TXT Subject matter under subclass 124.3 wherein the additional specified
    material is an inorganic compound that contains oxygen and silicon or
    oxygen and aluminum.

    (1)     Note. Examples of additional specified materials provided for
    herein are SiO2, Al2O3, and H3Si-O-SiH3.


CLS 526/124.6
TXT Subject matter under subclass 124.5 wherein an organic material that
    contains boron, silicon, nitrogen, phosphorus or chalcogen is present and
    does not contain metal.

    (1)     Note. Examples of material provided for herein are B(C2H5)3, ethyl
    acetate, CH3SiHCl2, etc.

    (2)     Note. Chalcogen is defined as oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium.


CLS 526/124.7
TXT Subject matter under subclass 124.3 wherein there are present plural
    non-transition elemental metals, hydrides thereof, or compounds of a
    non-transition metal wherein the non-transition metal is bonded directly to
    a carbon atom or to a hydrogen atom, or mixtures thereof.

    (1)     Note. Examples of combinations provided for herein are: (1) lithium
    metal and Al(C2H5)3, (2) MgH2 and C2H5MgCl, (3) Mg(C2H5)2 and Mg(CH3)2, (4)
    lithium metal and calcium metal.


CLS 526/124.8
TXT Subject matter under subclass 124.7 wherein an organic material that
    contains boron, silicon, nitrogen, phosphorus or chalcogen is present and
    does not contain metal.

    (1)     Note. Chalcogen is defined as oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium.


CLS 526/124.9
TXT Subject matter under subclass 124.3 wherein the additional specified
    material is an organic material that contains boron, silicon, nitrogen,
    phosphorus or chalcogen and does not contain metal.

    (1)     Note. Chalcogen is defined as oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium.


CLS 526/125.1
TXT Subject matter under subclass 124.9 wherein an organic aluminum compound
    which is devoid of any bonds between the aluminum and carbon or hydrogen
    atoms is present.

    (1)     Note. Examples of compounds provided for herein are Al(OC2H5)3 and
    Al[N(C2H5)2]2Cl.


CLS 526/125.2
TXT Subject matter under subclass 124.9 wherein a compound which contains only
    (1) carbon, hydrogen and halogen atoms, or (2) carbon and halogen atoms is
    present.

    (1)     Note. Examples of compounds provided for herein are CCl4 and CHCl3.


CLS 526/125.3
TXT Subject matter under subclass 124.9 wherein an organic material which
    contains boron or silicon but does not contain metal is present.

    (1)     Note. Examples of materials provided for herein are B(OC2H5)3,
    Si(C2H5)4, and Si(CH3)Cl3.


CLS 526/125.4
TXT Subject matter under subclass 124.9 wherein an inorganic material having no
    bonds between hydrogen and metal is present.

    (1)     Note. Examples of materials provided for herein are HSiCl3, MgCl2
    H2O and BCl3.


CLS 526/125.5
TXT Subject matter under subclass 125.4 wherein the inorganic material is an
    aluminum halide.


CLS 526/125.6
TXT Subject matter under subclass 124.9 wherein there are at least two
    different organic materials present, each contains nitrogen, phosphorus or
    chalcogen and does not contain metal.

    (1)     Note. Examples of combinations of materials provided for herein are
    (1) P(OC2H5)3 and C2H5OH, and (2) CH3OH and C2H5OH.

    (2)     Note. Chalcogen is defined as oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium.


CLS 526/125.7
TXT Subject matter under subclass 124.3 wherein the additional specified
    material is a compound which contains only (1) carbon, hydrogen and halogen
    atoms, or (2) carbon and halogen atoms.

    (1)     Note. Examples of compounds provided for herein are CCl4 and CHCl3.


CLS 526/125.8
TXT Subject matter under subclass 124.3 wherein the additional specified
    material is an inorganic material having no bonds between hydrogen and
    metal.


CLS 526/126
TXT Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein the specified material contains a
    transition metal compound which is in admixture with a silicon-containing
    material, or wherein the transition metal compound additionally contains at
    least one silicon atom therein.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are those processes that claim the use of
    silica.


CLS 526/127
TXT Subject matter under subclass 126 wherein the specified material contains a
    nontransition metal in elemental form, or contains a hydride of a
    nontransition metal, or contains a compound of a nontransition metal
    wherein a nontransition metal atom is directly bonded to a carbon atom.


CLS 526/128
TXT Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein the silicon-containing material
    is a nonmetallic organic compound.


CLS 526/129
TXT Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein the silicon-containing material
    is an inorganic oxygen-containing compound, e.g., H3Si-O-SiH3, etc.


CLS 526/130
TXT Subject matter under subclass 126 wherein a the silicon-containing material
    is an inorganic oxygen-containing compound, e.g., SiO2, H3Si-O-SiH3, etc.


CLS 526/131
TXT Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein the specified material contains a
    transition-metal compound which is in admixture with a boron-containing
    material, or wherein the transition-metal compound, additionally, contains
    at least one boron atom therein.


CLS 526/132
TXT Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the specified material contains a
    nontransition metal in elemental form, or contains a hydride of a
    nontransition metal, or contains a compound of a nontransition metal
    wherein a nontransition metal atom is directly bonded to a carbon atom,
    e.g., transition-metal compound and LiBH4, etc.


CLS 526/133
TXT Subject matter under subclass 132 wherein the boron compound contains at
    least one halogen atom, e.g., B3N3H3Cl3 (trichlorobora-zole), etc.


CLS 526/134
TXT Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the boron compound contains a
    boron to hydrogen bond, or a boron to carbon bond, e.g., Ti(BH4)3, TiCl4
    and B(C2H5)3, etc.


CLS 526/135
TXT Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein the specified material contains a
    transition metal compound in admixture with at least one
    nonmetal-containing material having at least one atom of nitrogen,
    phosphorus, oxygen, sulfur, selenium, tellurium, or halogen.

    (1)     Note.  Nitrogen gas, per se, is not a basis for classification
    herein.  Such claims are classified elsewhere on some other basis.

    (2)     Note.  Patents which disclose air but do not specifically claim air
    as a needed component of the composition are excluded herefrom and will be
    classified elsewhere on some other basis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    91,     for a process of polymerizing in the presence of water and a
    transition metal or transition metal compound.


CLS 526/136
TXT Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein the specified material contains a
    nontransition metal in elemental form, or contains a hydride of a
    nontransition metal, or contains a compound of a nontransition metal
    wherein a nontransition metal atom is directly bonded to a carbon atom.


CLS 526/137
TXT Subject matter under subclass 136 wherein the nonmetal material is
    elemental halogen or is a nonmetallic-inorganic-halogen-containing compound.


CLS 526/138
TXT Subject matter under subclass 136 wherein the nonmetal material is
    elemental oxygen or is a nonmetallic inorganic-oxygen-containing compound.


CLS 526/139
TXT Subject matter under subclass 136 wherein the nonmetal material is an
    organic compound containing at least one phosphorus atom.


CLS 526/140
TXT Subject matter under subclass 136 wherein the nonmetal material is an
    organic compound containing at least one sulfur atom.


CLS 526/141
TXT Subject matter under subclass 136 wherein the nonmetal material is an
    organic compound containing at least one nitrogen atom.


CLS 526/142
TXT Subject matter under subclass 136 wherein the nonmetal material is an
    organic compound containing at least one oxygen atom.


CLS 526/143
TXT Subject matter under subclass 142 wherein the nonmetal oxygen compound
    contains at least a halogen atom in the same molecule as the oxygen atom.


CLS 526/144
TXT Subject matter under subclass 136 wherein the nonmetal material is an
    organic compound containing at least one halogen atom.


CLS 526/145
TXT Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein the nonmetal material is
    elemental phosphorus or is a phosphorus-containing compound.


CLS 526/146
TXT Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein the nonmetal material is
    elemental sulfur or is a sulfur-containing compound.


CLS 526/147
TXT Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein the nonmetal material is a
    nitrogen-containing compound.


CLS 526/148
TXT Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein the specified material contains a
    transition metal compound (1) in admixture with two or more diverse
    elemental nontransition metals; or (2) in admixture with at least two
    different nontransition metal hydride compounds; or (3) in admixture with
    at least two different nontransition metals to carbon-bonded compounds; or
    (4) in admixture with a nontransition elemental metal and a nontransition
    metal hydride compound or a nontransition metal-to-carbon-bonded compound;
    or (5) is in admixture with a nontransition metal hydride compound and a
    nontransition metal-to-carbon-bonded compound.

    (1)     Note.  Different for purposes herein regards to the compounds of a
    nontransition metal bonded to hydrogen or carbon is meant to include the
    same nontransition metal existing in different compounds, e.g., one being
    the hydride and the other containing a nontransition metal to carbon bonds,
    or even two different compounds of the same nontransition metal each bonded
    to carbon, but in different compounds, or in different hydride forms.


CLS 526/149
TXT Subject matter under subclass 148 wherein the specified material contains
    an atom of a Group VA (As, Sb, Bi)metal in elemental form, or contains a
    hydride of a Group VA metal, or contains a compound of a Group VA metal
    wherein the Group VA metal is directly bonded to a carbon atom.


CLS 526/150
TXT Subject matter under subclass 148 wherein the specified material contains
    an atom of a Group IVA (Ge, Sn, Pb)metal in elemental form, or contains a
    hydride of a Group IV metal, or contains a compound of a Group IVA metal
    wherein the Group IVA metal atom is directly bonded to a carbon atom.


CLS 526/151
TXT Subject matter under subclass 148 wherein the specified material contains
    an atom of a Group IIIA (Al, Ga, In, Tl)metal in elemental form, or
    contains a hydride of a Group IIIA metal, or contains a compound of a Group
    IIIA metal wherein the Group IIIA metal is directly bonded to a carbon atom.


CLS 526/152
TXT Subject matter under subclass 151 wherein in addition to the Group IIIA
    material the specified material contains at least one Group IA element in
    elemental form, or contains a hydride of a Group IA metal, or contains a
    compound of a Group IA metal wherein the Group IA metal is directly bonded
    to a carbon atom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123.1+, for a compound of a Group IA element wherein the Group IA element
    is not bonded to any hydrogen or carbon atoms.


CLS 526/153
TXT Subject matter under subclass 151 wherein the specified material contains
    (1) two or more Group IIIA metals in elemental form, two or more Group IIIA
    metal hydrides, or two or more compounds which contain a carbon to Group
    IIIA metal bond; or (2) a mixture composed of at least two of any of the
    Group IIIA materials noted in (1).


CLS 526/154
TXT Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein (1) the specific material contains
    a transition metal compound which is in admixture with a compound of
    aluminum, which aluminium compound is other than the hydride or other than
    a compound wherein an aluminum atom is directly bonded to a carbon atom, or
    (2) wherein a transition metal-containing compound additionally contains at
    least one aluminum atom in the same molecule, which aluminum atom is not
    directly bonded to a hydrogen or carbon atom.


CLS 526/155
TXT Subject matter under subclass 154 wherein the specified material contains a
    nontransition metal in elemental form, or contains a hydride of a
    nontransition metal, or contains a compound of a nontransition metal
    wherein the nontransition metal atom is directly bonded to a carbon atom.


CLS 526/156
TXT Subject matter under subclass 155 wherein the specified material contains
    an inorganic oxygen-containing compound of aluminum.


CLS 526/157
TXT Subject matter under subclass 155 wherein the specified material contains
    aluminum trihalide.


CLS 526/158
TXT Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the transition metal compound
    contains at least one atom of a Group IVA metal, i.e., Ti, Zr, Hf.


CLS 526/159
TXT Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein the specified material contains a
    nontransition metal in elemental form, or contains a hydride of a
    nontransition metal, or contains a compound of a nontransition metal
    wherein the nontransition metal atom is directly bonded to a carbon atom,
    e.g., TiCl4 and LiAlH4, etc.


CLS 526/160
TXT Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein a transition metal atom is bonded
    to a carbon atom, e.g., Ti(CR3)3, tetra lithium ferrocenyl, etc.


CLS 526/161
TXT Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein a transition metal compound
    contains at least one atom of phosphorus, sulfur, or nitrogen, in the same
    molecule as the transition metal atom, e.g., titanium nitride, MoS2, ferric
    hydrosulfate, etc.


CLS 526/162
TXT Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein at least one carbon atom is
    directly bonded to a nontransition metal atom and the molecule contains in
    addition at least one ethylenic unsaturated moiety.

    (1)     Note.  See "GLOSSARY" for the definition of an "ethylenic
    unsaturated" moiety.


CLS 526/163
TXT Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein at least one nontransition metal
    is bonded to a hydrogen or carbon atom and the same molecule contains in
    addition at least one atom of phosphorus, nitrogen or sulfur, e.g.,
    AlH3.N(CH3)3, H2Al.N(CH3)2.


CLS 526/164
TXT Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein the transition metal of the
    transition metal compound is a Group IB, IIIB, or VIIB atom, or has an
    atomic number of 58-71, or 90 and higher.


CLS 526/165
TXT Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein a nontransition metal compound
    which has at least one nontransition metal to carbon contains (1) at least
    two atoms of the same nontransition metal; or (2) at least two diverse
    nontransition atoms, e.g., Sb(C2H5)4ClAl2(C2H5)6, LiAlR4, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are those compounds that contains a repeat
    unit, e.g., (CH2AlR)n, etc.


CLS 526/166
TXT Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein a group IVA or Group VA metal
    atom is directly bonded to an atom of hydrogen or carbon.


CLS 526/167
TXT Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein the nontransition metal atom
    exists in elemental form.


CLS 526/168
TXT Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein in addition to the nontransition
    metal compound there is also present elemental carbon.


CLS 526/169
TXT Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein the transition metal compound
    contains a Group VB, VIB, or VIII metal atom.


CLS 526/169.1
TXT Transition metal is Group VIII:
    Subject matter under subclass 169 wherein the transition metal compound
    contains a Group VIII metal atom.


CLS 526/169.2
TXT Transition metal is vanadium:
    Subject matter under subclass 169 wherein the transition metal compound
    contains a vanadium atom.


CLS 526/169.3
TXT At least one monomer is nonhydrocarbon material:
    Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein at least one monomer is other
    than a hydrocarbon.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes the interpolymerized product of a
    hydrocarbon monomer and a nonhydrocarbon monomer as well as homopolymeric
    products of nonhydrocarbon monomers.


CLS 526/170
TXT Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein the specified material contains at
    least one transition metal atom bonded to a carbon atom.


CLS 526/171
TXT Subject matter under subclass 170 wherein the transition metal is a Group
    VIII metal.


CLS 526/172
TXT Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein the transition metal compound
    contains at least one atom of phosphorus, sulfur nitrogen or oxygen
    chemically combined therewith.


CLS 526/173
TXT Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the specified material contains an
    elemental alkali metal, and alkali metal hydride, or a compound containing
    an alkali metal bonded to a carbon atom.

    (1)     Note.  Alkali metal is limited to the elements of Group IA and as
    such is limited to Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs and Fr.

    (2)     Note.  Subclasses 176-182 may include compounds wherein the alkali
    metal is bonded to a carbon or hydrogen atom and in the same molecule there
    is also present at least one of the necessary elements required under the
    definitions of these subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90+,    for processes of polymerizing in the presence of a transition metal
    atom and a Group IA element or compound thereof.


CLS 526/174
TXT Subject matter under subclass 173 wherein the specified material contains
    two or more different alkali metals in elemental or compound form and at
    least one of the alkali metals is a free alkali metal, alkali metal
    hydride, or a compound containing an alkali metal atom bonded to a carbon
    atom.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are compounds which contain two diverse
    alkali metals in a single compound or alloy.


CLS 526/175
TXT Subject matter under subclass 173 wherein the specified material contains
    (1) an elemental alkali metal admixed with a compound of the same alkali
    metal; or (2) wherein an alkali metal hydride or compound containing an
    alkali metal-to-carbon bond is admixed with another compound of the same
    alkali metal, e.g., Na and sodium t-dodecyl mercaptide, or butyl lithium
    and LiH, etc.


CLS 526/176
TXT Subject matter under subclass 173 wherein the specified material contains a
    heavy metal atom.


CLS 526/177
TXT Subject matter under subclass 173 wherein the specified material contains
    aluminum, e.g., LiAlH4, etc.


CLS 526/178
TXT Subject matter under subclass 173 wherein the specified material contains
    boron or silicon, e.g., LiBH4. etc.


CLS 526/179
TXT Subject matter under subclass 173 wherein the specified material contains
    phosphorus.


CLS 526/180
TXT Subject matter under subclass 173 wherein the specified material contains a
    nitrogen-containing compound.


CLS 526/181
TXT Subject matter under subclass 173 wherein the specified additive contains
    oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes only specified compositions wherein
    there is a desired and intentional contact between air and the Group IA
    material and does include the use of air as a blanket or carrier gas.


CLS 526/182
TXT Subject matter under subclass 173 wherein the specified additive contains a
    halogen atom.


CLS 526/183
TXT Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the specified material contains a
    metal atom bonded to a carbon atom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    192,    for a polymerization process in the presence of a heavy
    metal-containing organic compound wherein the metal is not bonded to a
    carbon atom.


CLS 526/184
TXT Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein the carbon to metal bonded
    compound is in admixture with a compound that contains a -O-O- group or in
    admixture with free oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes only specified compositions wherein
    there is a desired and intentional contact between air and the compound
    having a carbon atom bonded to a metal atom and does not include the use of
    air as a blanket or carrier gas.


CLS 526/185
TXT Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein the specified material contains a
    compound wherein an atom of aluminum is bonded to a carbon atom.


CLS 526/186
TXT Subject matter under subclass 185 wherein the specified material contains
    at least one atom of aluminum not bonded to a carbon atom.


CLS 526/187
TXT Subject matter under subclass 185 wherein the specified material contains a
    Group IA or Group IIA metal atom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173+,   for a specified material containing a Group IA metal atom in
    elemental form, Group IA hydride, or compound containing a Group IA metal
    bonded to a carbon atom.


CLS 526/188
TXT Subject matter under subclass 185 wherein the specified material contains a
    heavy metal atom.


CLS 526/189
TXT Subject matter under subclass 185 wherein the specified material contains
    phosphorus, nitrogen, sulfur, or oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this area is the use of nitrogen or air as
    carrier or blanket gases.


CLS 526/190
TXT Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein the specified material contains a
    heavy metal atom bonded to a carbon atom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188,    for an admixture of an organoaluminum compound together with an
    organo heavy metal compound.


CLS 526/191
TXT Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the specified material contains a
    metal in elemental form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108+,   for a specified material containing an elemental transition metal.

    173+,   for an specified material containing an elemental Group IA metal.


CLS 526/192
TXT Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the specified material contains at
    least a heavy metal atom as part of an organic compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS

    90+,    for a specified additive containing a transition metal atom.

    176,    for a specified additive containing a heavy metal atom and at least
    one atom of an elemental Group IA metal, hydride thereof, or carbon atom
    bonded to a Group IA metal atom.

    183,    for a process of polymerizing in the presence of a metal compound
    wherein a metal atom is directly bonded to a carbon atom of an organic
    radical.


CLS 526/193
TXT Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the specified material contains at
    least one atom of phosphorus in an organic compound.


CLS 526/194
TXT Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the specified material contains
    silicon, tellurium, selenium, or a Group VIIIA atom.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes use of clays and diatomaceous earths
    as part of a specified material.


CLS 526/195
TXT Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the specified material contains a
    compound of boron which boron compound is other than (1) boron trihalide,
    per se; or (2) boron trihalide complexed with a nonmetal organic moiety.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237+,   for a polymerization process in the presence of boron trihalide,
    per se, or boron trihalide complexed with a nonmetal organic moiety, e.g.,
    boron trihalide-etherate complex, etc.


CLS 526/196
TXT Subject matter under subclass 195 wherein the boron compound contains at
    least one boron atom bonded to a carbon or hydrogen atom.


CLS 526/197
TXT Processes under subclass 196 wherein the boron compound is in admixture
    with free oxygen or with a compound that contains an -O-O- group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes only specified compositions wherein
    there is a desired and intentional contact between air and the boron
    compound and does not include the use of air as a blanket or carrier gas.


CLS 526/198
TXT Subject matter under subclass 196 wherein the boron compound contains at
    least one atom of phosphorus, sulfur, or nitrogen in the same molecule; or
    wherein the boron compound is in admixture with an elemental form of
    phosphorus or sulfur; or wherein the boron compound is in admixture with a
    compound form of phosphorus, sulfur, or nitrogen.


CLS 526/199
TXT Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the specified material contains a
    protein or a protein-reaction product, e.g., gelatin, silk, etc.

    (1)     Note.  A protein reaction product requires at the minimum the
    presence of a peptide group, i.e., an amide group between the amino radical
    of one amino acid and the carboxyl radical of another amino acid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215,    for a polymerization process in the presence of a
    nitrogen-containing carboxylic acid, salt, ester, or anhydride thereof.


CLS 526/200
TXT Processes under subclass 89 wherein the specified material contains a
    carbohydrate or reaction product thereof, e.g., cellulose, starch, etc.

    (1)     Note.  A carbohydrate "reaction product" requires that the basic
    carbohydrate skeleton not be destroyed.


CLS 526/201
TXT Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the specified material contains at
    least one distinct normally solid preformed polymer which has been derived
    from at least one ethylenically unsaturated material.

    (1)     Note.  Polymers proper for this subclass must be either distinct
    from the polymers formed either in the nature or amounts of individual
    monomers therein, or in the manner in which they are formed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for a process of polymerizing in the presence of a transition
    metal-containing material and a preformed ethylenic polymer.

    204,    for a process of polymerizing in the presence of a
    melamine-formaldehyde reaction product.

    208,    for a process of polymerizing in the presence of a
    urea-formaldehyde reaction product.

    213+,   for a process of polymerizing in the presence of a reaction product
    of a saturated carboxylic acid and a polyhydric alcohol.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    525,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 50+, for a process
    of polymerizing an ethylenically unsaturated monomer in the presence of a
    solid preformed polymer wherein the intent is to form a resinous
    composition containing the previously formed polymer or wherein the
    preformed polymer reacts with the ethylenic monomer to form a modified
    previously formed solid polymer.


CLS 526/202
TXT Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the preformed normally solid
    polymer contains at least one free hydroxyl group or nonheavy metal salt
    thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The preformed polymer intended primarily for this subclass,
    but not limited thereto, is of the type that has been formed by the
    hydrolysis or after-treatment of a preformed polyvinyl acetate polymer and
    is known generally as polyvinyl alcohol.


CLS 526/203
TXT Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the preformed normally solid
    polymer is derived from at least one ethylenically unsaturated
    polycarboxylic acid.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the term "carboxylic acid".


CLS 526/204
TXT Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the specified material contains a
    compound which has one or more carbon atoms covalently bonded in a closed
    ring with at least one atom of oxygen, sulfur, or nitrogen and which has no
    other atoms in the ring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194,    for a compound having selenium or tellurium atoms in a heterocyclic
    ring.


CLS 526/205
TXT Subject matter under subclass 204 wherein the ring containing compound has
    at least one atom of sulfur and nitrogen in a single closed ring.


CLS 526/206
TXT Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein (1) the polymerization reaction is
    conducted in the presence of a halogenated hydrocarbon wherein at least one
    halogen atom is not chlorine or (2) wherein the polymerization is conducted
    in the presence of a halogenated hydrocarbon and water.

    (1)     Note.  A halogenated hydrocarbon is a compound (1) solely composed
    of halogen and carbon atoms; or  (2) of halogen, carbon, and hydrogen atoms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    appropriate product subclasses (239-352), for a process of polymerizing in
    the presence of a chlorinated hydrocarbon.


CLS 526/207
TXT Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the specified additive contains
    water and a compound solely composed of carbon and hydrogen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    appropriate product subclasses (239 - 352), for a process of polymerizing
    in the presence of a hydrocarbon.


CLS 526/208
TXT Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the specified additive is a ketone
    or aldehyde.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the term "aldehyde" or
    "ketone".

    (2)     Note.  Included herein as being proper for this subclass are
    urea-formaldehyde reaction products.


CLS 526/209
TXT Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the polymerization reaction is
    conducted in the presence of at least one compound which contains at least
    one oxygen atom bonded to two discrete organic radicals and having the
    general formula, i.e., -C-O-C-.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the term "ether".

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes ethers derived from phenols.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass does not include nonmetallic ether complexes
    of a boron trihalide or of an aluminum trihalide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213+,   for a polymerization process in the presence of a carboxylic acid,
    R - OR ester, salt or anhydride thereof.

    237+,   for a process of polymerizing in the presence of an etherate
    complex of boron trihalide or aluminum trihalide, e.g., BF3 -etherate, etc.


CLS 526/210
TXT Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the specified material contains a
    hydroxyl group bonded to carbon or wherein the hydrogen atom of a hydroxyl
    group has been replaced by a metal.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the term "alcohol".

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes phenols.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    192,    for polymerization in the presence of a compound wherein the
    hydrogen atom of a hydroxyl group has been replaced by a heavy metal.

    237+,   for a process of polymerizing in the presence of an alcohol or
    alcoholate complex of boron trihalide or aluminum trihalide, e.g.,
    BF3-alcoholate, etc.


CLS 526/211
TXT Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein the hydroxyl-containing compound
    contains at least one atom of nitrogen or sulfur therein.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes a sulfur or nitrogen salt of an
    alcohol group.


CLS 526/212
TXT Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein the hydroxy compound contains a
    single hydroxyl group or salt thereof.


CLS 526/213
TXT Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the specified material contains at
    least one compound which has a carboxylic acid group, salt, ester, or
    anhydride thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the term "carboxylic acid".

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes oxalic acid, formic acid and
    derivatives thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    192,    for a polymerization process in the presence of a compound wherein
    the hydrogen atom of a carboxylic acid group has been replaced by a heavy
    metal atom.

    227+,   for an organic per-acid.

    237+,   for an organic complex or boron trihalide or aluminum trihalide
    wherein the organic portion of the complex is derived from a carboxylic
    acid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    525,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 1+, for a resin
    composition containing a fat, fatty oil acid or salt thereof as an
    additive, or for a fat, fatty oil, fatty oil acid or salt thereof which is
    capable of reacting with or is part of a resinous material (See Class 260,
    subclass 398, (3) SEARCH CLASS 520).


CLS 526/214
TXT Subject matter under subclass 213 wherein the specified material contains
    (1) a halogen or sulfur substituted carboxylic acid; or (2) an ester, salt,
    or anhydride of a sulfuror halogen substituted carboxylic acid.


CLS 526/215
TXT Subject matter under subclass 213 wherein the specified material contains
    (1) a nitrogen-containing carboxylic acid; or (2) an ester, salt or
    anhydride of a nitrogen-containing carboxylic acid.


CLS 526/216
TXT Subject matter under subclass 213 wherein the specified material contains a
    carboxylic acid which is devoid of any aromatic or cycloaliphatic group, or
    contains an ester, salt, or anhydride of a carboxylic acid whch is devoid
    of any aromatic or cycloaliphatic group.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204+,   for a specified material containing a heterocyclic compound having
    carboxylic acid group of for an ester, salt, or anhydride derivative
    thereof.


CLS 526/217
TXT Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the specified material contains an
    organic compound having at least one nitrogen atom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199,    for a polymerization process in the presence of a polypeptide.

    211,    for a polymerization process in the presence of a
    nitrogen-containing alcohol or alcoholate.

    215,    for a polymerization process in the presence of a
    nitrogen-containing carboxylic acid, salt, ester, or anhydride thereof.


CLS 526/218.1
TXT Organic compound contains N=N or N-N group:

    Subject matter under subclass 217 wherein the specified material contains
    at least two atoms of nitrogen which are bonded to each other by a single
    or double bond, e.g., 1, 1-dimethylhydrazine, p-dimethylaminoazobenzene,
    etc.


CLS 526/219
TXT Subject matter under subclass 218.1 wherein the organic nitrogen containing
    compound having the -N-N or N=N group has at least one atom of sulfur or
    oxygen chemically bound therein.


CLS 526/219.1
TXT Organic N=N or N-N Group-containing compound contains carbocyclic group or
    element other than C, H, or N:

    Subject matter under subclass 218.1 wherein the compound containing either
    the N=N or N-N group also contains either a carbocyclic group, e.g.,
    benzene, cyclopropyl or cyclohexyl group, etc. or an element other than C,
    H, or N, e.g., the hydrochloride salt of 2, 2'-diguanyl-2, 2' -azopropane,
    etc.


CLS 526/219.2
TXT N=N or N-N group-containing compound is a catalyst admixed with at least
    one other catalyst, co-catalyst, or accelerator, e.g., redox catalyst, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 218.1 wherein the N=N or N-N group-containing
    compound is part of a catalyst system, i.e., admixed with another catalyst,
    co-catalyst or accelerator, e.g., 1, 1-dimethylhydrazine and hydrogen
    peroxide, azobisisobutyronitrile and benzoyl peroxide, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein also are those systems wherein a monomer is
    first complexed with a catalyst and the complexed monomer is copolymerized
    in the presence of a free radical initiator with at least one other
    monomer, e.g., zinc chloride-acrylonitrile complex copolymerized in the
    presence of benzoylperoxide with 2-methyl-1-pentene, etc.


CLS 526/219.3
TXT Contains specified ingredient other than the N=N or N-N group-containing
    compound or water, or defined hydrocarbon or defined halogenated
    hydrocarbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 218.1 wherein the polymerization process uses
    a specified material in addition to one containing an N=N or N-N group,
    e.g., an admixture of azobisisobutyronitrile dissolved in benzene or
    toluene, etc.

    (1)     Note.  A patent which recites a polymerization process which
    utilizes (a) a material proper for subclasses 218.1+ in combination with
    either a specified or nonspecified amount of "hydrocarbon or
    halohydrocarbon" will not be classified here but will be found in 219.6 or
    218.1+.  However, proper for this subclass when either the hydrocarbon or
    halohydrocarbon is defined in some degree, e.g., dihalogenated,
    dibrominated, contains specified chain length, boiling or freezing point
    range, etc.

    (b)     a "free radical" catalyst with either a specified or nonspecified
    amount of "hydrocarbon or halohydrocarbon" will be classified with the
    polymer providing this was the only remaining basis for classification.
    See Class 520, subclass 1, Glossary, (6) Note for a further elaboration on
    the limitations on the use of these materials in this class.


CLS 526/219.4
TXT Ingredient contains halogenated hydrocarbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 219.3 wherein the polymerization process uses
    a halogenated hydrocarbon in addition to the compound  containing the N=N
    or N-N group, e.g., azobisisobutyronitrile in admixture with ethylene
    dichloride, etc.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 219.3, (1) Note and (2) Note for
    the limitations set out in using a halogenated hydrocarbon.


CLS 526/219.5
TXT Ingredient contains water, e.g., an emulsion, dispersion, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 219.3 wherein the polymerization process uses
    water in addition to the compound containing the N=Nor N-N group, e.g., an
    aqueous emulsion polymerization process using azobisisobutyronitrile
    catalyst, etc.


CLS 526/219.6
TXT Azobisisobutyronitrile (AIBN):
    Subject matter under subclass 218.1 wherein the compound which contains the
    N=N or N-N group is azobisisobutyronitrile (AIBN)or the same compound
    described in chemically equivalent terms, i.e., 2,
    2-azobisisobutyronitrile, 2, 2-azobis(2-methylpropionitrile), alpha, alpha
    - azodisobutyronitrile, dinitrile azoisobutyrate, azodisobutyric acid
    nitrile, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Where a patent recites a process of utilizing AIBN both to
    polymerize a monomer as well as foam the resulting polymer, classification
    is proper for Class 521, subclasses 50+.


CLS 526/220
TXT Subject matter under subclass 217 wherein the nitrogen containing organic
    compound has at least one atom of sulfur or oxygen chemically bound therein.


CLS 526/221
TXT Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the specified material contains at
    least one compound having a heavy metal atom therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90+,    for a polymerization process in the presence of a transition metal
    atom.

    188,    for a polymerization processs in the presence of an organoaluminum
    compound which may also contain a heavy metal therein, or in presence of a
    composition of an organoaluminum compound and an elemental or compound form
    of a heavy metal.

    190,    for a polymerization process in the presence of a heavy
    metal-organocarbon bond.

    191,    for a polymerization process in the presence of an elemental heavy
    metal.

    192,    for a polymerization process in the presence of an organic compound
    which contains a heavy metal therein.


CLS 526/222
TXT Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the specified material contains an
    organic compound having at least one sulfur atom therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189,    for an organoaluminum compound which may contain an atom of sulfur.

    198,    for an organoboron-containing compound which may contain an atom of
    sulfur.

    211,    for a sulfur-containing alcohol or alcoholate.

    214,    for a sulfur-containing carboxylic acid, salt, ester, or anhydride
    thereof.

    219,    for an organic nitrogen-containing compound which has at least one
    N-N or N=N group and which may have a sulfur atom therein.

    220,    for an organic nitrogen compound which has at least one atom of
    sulfur therein.


CLS 526/223
TXT Subject matter under subclass 222 wherein the organic sulfur compound
    contains at least one -S-S- or O-O group or chemically bound therewith.


CLS 526/224
TXT Processes under subclass 222 wherein the organic sulfur-containing compound
    is a mercapatan, i.e., -C-SH.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass the carbon atom bound to the
    -SH group cannot be double bonded to oxygen or sulfur.


CLS 526/225
TXT Subject matter under subclass 222 wherein the organic sulfur compound
    contains at least one hexvalent sulfur atom, e.g., sulfonic acids,
    sulfonates, organo sulfates, etc.


CLS 526/226
TXT Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the specified material contains a
    compound of aluminum which aluminum compound is other than (1) aluminum
    trihalide, per se; or (2) aluminum trihalide complexed with a nonmetal
    organic moiety.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    237+,   for a polymerization process in the presence of aluminum trihalide,
    per se, or aluminum trihalide complexed with a nonmetal organic moiety.


CLS 526/227
TXT Subject matter under subclass 89 the specified material contains a compound
    having at least one -O-O- group.

    (1)     Note.  Processes wherein a known peroxide is formed in situ by the
    reaction of a peroxide and another compound are classified on the basis of
    the peroxide that is utilized to form the in situ peroxide and
    cross-reference to the in situ formed peroxide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90+,    for a transition metal compound admixed with a peroxide compound or
    for a compound containing a transition metal and an -O-O- group therein.

    184,    for an organometallic compound admixed with a peroxy compound.

    197,    for a boron compound other than a boron trihalide or nonmetallic
    organic complex, per se, admixed with a peroxy compound.

    223,    for an organosulfur compound containing an -O-O- group therein.


CLS 526/228
TXT Subject matter under subclass 227 wherein the specified material contains
    two or more distinct compounds having an -O-O- group therein.


CLS 526/229
TXT Subject matter under subclass 227 wherein the -O-O- group-containing
    compound is inorganic in nature, e.g., sodium persulfate, percarbonates,
    etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90+,    for a transition metal peroxide.

    195,    for a polymerization reaction in the presence of sodium perborate.


CLS 526/229.5
TXT Nitrogen- or halogen-containing inorganic -O-O- compound free of sulfur, or
    wherein an O-O- compound is in admixture with a compound devoid of sulfur
    and containing a N, halogen or P atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 229 wherein the -O-O- group is part of a
    sulfur-free inorganic nitrogen- or halogen-containing compound, or wherein
    an inorganic compound containing the -O-O- group is in admixture with a
    sulfur-free nitrogen, halogen, or phosphorus compound.


CLS 526/230
TXT Subject matter under subclass 227 wherein the -O-O- group-containing
    compound contains an R-O-O-H group.


CLS 526/230.5
TXT Peroxy carbonate:

    Subject matter under subclass 227 wherein the -OO group-containing compound
    contains a C-OC-O- group or a -OO-O- group.


CLS 526/231
TXT Subject matter under subclass 227 wherein the -O-O- compound has at least
    one halogen atom chemically combined therewith.


CLS 526/232
TXT Subject matter under subclass 227 wherein the -O-O- containing compound has
    at least one aromatic group therein.


CLS 526/232.1
TXT Benzoyl peroxide:

    Subject matter under subclass 232 wherein the -O-O- group-containing
    compound is benzoyl peroxide , i .e.,


CLS 526/232.3
TXT Two or more peroxy groups in same compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 227 wherein the -O-O- group-containing
    compound contains at least two -O-O- groups.


CLS 526/232.5
TXT Cycloaliphatic or ethylenically unsaturated peroxy-containing compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 227 wherein the -O-O- group-containing
    compound contains a carbon ring which is other than an aryl, or contains an
    ethylenically unsaturated group.


CLS 526/233
TXT Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the specified material contains
    elemental phosphorus or an inorganic compound containing phosphorus therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90+,    for a transition metal-containing material containing a phosphorus
    atom or admixed with a phosphorus atom.

    179+,   for an elemental alkali metal atom admixed with a
    phosphorus-containing material, and for a Group IA hydride or Group IA
    organometallic compound containing a phosphorus.

    183+,   for a phosphorus-containing organo metallic material wherein the
    metal is other than a transition metal or Group IA metal.

    193+,   for a material containing an organic phosphorus-containing compound.


CLS 526/234
TXT Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the specified material is
    elemental sulfur or an inorganic compound containing sulfur therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90+,    for a transition metal material containing a sulfur atom.

    183+,   for a sulfur-containing organometallic material wherein the metal
    is other than a transition metal or Group IA metal.


CLS 526/235
TXT Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the specified additive contains
    oxygen, air, or ozone.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include the use of air as a blanket
    or carrier gas.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    227+,   for a polymerization reaction in the presence of an
    oxygen-liberating peroxide compound.


CLS 526/236
TXT Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the specified material contains an
    inorganic nitrogen compound.


CLS 526/237
TXT Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the specified material contains
    (1) elemental halogen; or (2) a boron halide or nonmetallic organic complex
    thereof; or (3) a hydrogen halide; or (4) an aluminum trihalide or a
    nonmetallic organic complex thereof; or (5) a compound containing only
    halogen atoms; or (6) a metallic halide other than transition metal,
    aluminum or a nontransition heavy metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195+,   for polymerizing in the presence of a boron compound which is other
    than boron trihalide or a nonmetallic organic complex thereof.

    221,    for polymerizing in the presence of a halide of a heavy metal.

    226,    for polymerizing in the presence of an aluminum compound which is
    other than aluminum trihalide or a nonmetallic organic complex thereof.


CLS 526/238
TXT Subject matter under subclass 237 wherein at least one monomer is other
    than a hydrocarbon.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes the inter-polymerization of a
    hydrocarbon monomer and a nonhydrocarbon monomer as well as homopolymers of
    nonhydrocarbon monomers.


CLS 526/238.1
TXT From protein or biologically active polypeptide containing monomer:Subject
    matter under subclass 72 wherein at least one ethylenic monomer has
    chemically bonded thereto a protein or biologically active polypeptide, or
    wherein said protein or biologically active polypeptide has been modified
    so as to introduce ethylenic unsaturation.

    (1)     Note. The terms "protein" and "biologically active polypeptide" are
    defined in the Glossary.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, for processes of
    preparing and using enzymes.

    527,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 100+ and 200+ for
    solid polymers containing chemically reacted protein material and wherein
    there is also at least one nonethylenically unsaturated reactant.


CLS 526/238.2
TXT From carbohydrates, tannin or derivative containing monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein at least one ethylenic monomer has
    chemically bonded thereto a carbohydrate or derivative, or tannin or
    derivative; or wherein said carbohydrate or tannin or derivative has been
    modified so as to introduce ethylenic unsaturation therein.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of "carbohydrate or
    derivative" or "tannin or derivative".


CLS 526/238.21
TXT Cellulose or derivative containing monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 238.2 wherein the monomer contains cellulose
    or derivative.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 524, subclass 35 for a definition of cellulose.


CLS 526/238.22
TXT Starch or derivative containing monomer, e.g., starch-acrylamide, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 238.2 wherein the monomer contains starch or
    a starch material or derivative.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 524, subclass 47 for a definition of starch or
    starch material (e.g., cereal or starch flour, etc.) or derivative.


CLS 526/238.23
TXT Mono- or di-saccharide containing monomer, e.g., allyl sucrose,
    etc.:Subject matter under subclass 238.2 wherein the carbohydrate is a
    mono- or di- saccharide monomer.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 524, subclass 56 for a definition of di-saccharide.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 524, subclass 58 for a definition of a
    mono-saccharide.


CLS 526/238.3
TXT From natural resin or derivative containing monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein at least one ethylenic monomer has
    chemically bonded thereto a natural resin or derivative thereof; or wherein
    an ethylenically unsaturated natural resin is copolymerized with an
    additional ethylenic monomer.

    (1)     Note.  Resin copolymerized with another ethylenic monomer which is
    not a natural resin or natural resin derivative is classified herein.
    Also, rosin copolymerized with another ethylenic monomer which is a natural
    resin having synthetically introduced ethylenic unsaturation is classified
    herein.  See Class 520, subclass 1 for a further elaboration of the subject
    matter relating to natural resin or derivatives thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    527,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 600+ for synthetic
    resins derived from natural resins proper for that class.

    530,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 200+ for nonsolid
    polymeric or nonpolymeric) reaction products of natural resins or
    derivatives with unsaturated terpenes and/or unsaturated polycarboxylic
    acids, halides, or anhydrides.


CLS 526/239
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the unsaturated monomer contains
    at least one boron atom.


CLS 526/240
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the unsaturated monomer contains
    at least one metal atom.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes unsaturated compounds wherein the
    metal atoms are convalently or ionically bound.


CLS 526/241
TXT Subject matter under subclass 240 wherein at least one of the metal atoms
    is a transition metal.

    (1)     Note.  See note under subclass 90 for a clarification of the term
    "transition metal".


CLS 526/242
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the unsaturated monomer contains
    at least one fluorine atom.


CLS 526/243
TXT Fluorine-containing monomer contains a sulfur atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 wherein the fluorine monomer contains at
    least one sulfur atom.


CLS 526/244
TXT Fluorine-containing monomer is a ketone or aldehyde:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 wherein the fluorine monomer contains an
    aldehyde or ketone group.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the terms "aldehyde" or
    "ketone".

    (2)     Note.  A reactant having a =C=C=O group is regarded as being a
    ketone when the carbon atom bonded to the (=C=O)group meets the parameters
    set forth in the (1) Note above.


CLS 526/245
TXT Subject matter under subclass 242 wherein the fluorine monomer contains a
    single carboxylic acid ester group.


CLS 526/246
TXT Subject matter under subclass 245 wherein the alcohol portion of the
    carboxylic ester moiety contains at least one ether group, e.g.,

    -  -O - R - O - R , etc.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes ethers derived from aromatic alcohols.


CLS 526/247
TXT Subject matter under subclass 242 wherein the fluorine monomer contains an
    ether oxygen atom connecting two carbon atoms.


CLS 526/248
TXT Subject matter under subclass 242 wherein the fluorine monomer contains at
    least one nitrogen atom.


CLS 526/249
TXT Subject matter under subclass 242 wherein the fluorine monomer contains at
    least one halogen atom which is other than fluorine, e.g.,
    trichlorofluoroethylene, etc.


CLS 526/250
TXT Subject matter under subclass 242 wherein the fluorine monomer contains (1)
    atoms only of carbon, fluorine and hydrogen; or (2) atoms only of carbon
    and fluorine.


CLS 526/251
TXT Subject matter under subclass 250 wherein the fluorine monomer contains at
    least one aromatic ring.


CLS 526/252
TXT Subject matter under subclass 250 wherein the fluorine monomer contains at
    least two moieties wherein a carbon atom is bonded to another carbon atom
    by a double or triple bond.


CLS 526/253
TXT Subject matter under subclass 250 wherein the fluorine monomer contains at
    least five fluorine atoms.


CLS 526/254
TXT Subject matter under subclass 253 wherein the fluorine monomer contains
    only atoms of carbon and fluorine.


CLS 526/255
TXT Subject matter under subclass 250 wherein the fluorine monomer contains at
    least two fluorine atoms.


CLS 526/256
TXT From monomer containing sulfur atom as part of a heterocyclic ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein an unsaturated monomer contains
    one or more carbon atoms covalently bonded in a ring system with at least
    one hetero atom of oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium and
    there are no other atoms in the ring, with the proviso that at least one of
    the atoms in the ring is sulfur.


CLS 526/257
TXT Sulfur-containing ring contains additional hetero atom, i.e., N, O, Se, Te:

    Subject matter under subclass 256 wherein at least one hetero ring contains
    as hetero atoms therein at least one sulfur atom and at least one atom of
    oxygen, nitrogen, selenium, or tellurium.


CLS 526/258
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein an unsaturated monomer contains
    one or more carbon atoms covalently bonded in a ring system with at least
    one hetero atom or oxygen, nitrogen, selenium or tellurium and there are no
    other atoms in the ring, with the proviso that at least one of the hetero
    atoms is nitrogen.


CLS 526/259
TXT Subject matter under subclass 258 wherein the monomer contains a fused or
    bridged ring system, and wherein at least one atom thereof is nitrogen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280+,   for a monomer containing nitrogen atom which is part of a bridged
    or fused ring compound and wherein the nitrogen atom is extracyclic to the
    ring system and for a more thorough definition of what is meant by a fused
    or bridged ring system.


CLS 526/260
TXT Subject matter under subclass 258 wherein the ring system contains five or
    six atoms and at least one of the atoms besides carbon and nitrogen, is
    oxygen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    275+,   for a ring compound containing a phosphorous atom in the ring.


CLS 526/261
TXT Subject matter under subclass 258 wherein the ring system contains at least
    three nitrogen atoms.


CLS 526/262
TXT Imide monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 258 wherein at least one nitrogen
    heterocyclic ring contains an imide group.

    (1)     Note.  An imide for purposes of this subclass denotes a
    heterocyclic ring, i.e.,   wherein n is 1 or more and wherein x is 1 or
    more.


CLS 526/263
TXT Subject matter under subclass 258 wherein the nitrogen atom of a ring
    system is bonded either directly or indirectly to an extracyclic
    unsaturated group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes only directly bonded unsaturated
    groups as in C= C-or only indirectly unsaturated bonded groups as in CH2=C
    - C -  and is not meant to include unsaturated groups which are bonded to
    nonnitrogen ring atoms, e.g.,

    (2)     Note.  Extracyclic as used herein is meant to exclude those
    compounds wherein the heterocyclic nitrogen compound contains unsaturation
    solely in the ring.  The extracyclic unsaturation as required for this
    subclass can exist in a ring compound which is bonded to the nitrogen atom
    of the ring either directly or indirectly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258+,   for a nitrogen-containing heterocyclic monomer wherein the
    ethylenic unsaturation is linked indirectly to the nitrogen atom in a ring
    through other atoms in the heterocyclic ring system.


CLS 526/264
TXT Subject matter under subclass 263 wherein the nitrogen ring system contains
    only carbon atoms and a single nitrogen atom in the ring and wherein said N
    atom is bonded to a carbon atom in the ring which is doubly bonded to an
    extracyclic oxygen atom ( N) and there are no oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium atoms doubly bonded directly to any other carbon atoms of the
    ring system, e.g.,


CLS 526/265
TXT Subject matter under subclass 258 wherein the nitrogen-containing ring
    contains six atoms and wherein only one of the atoms is nitrogen.


CLS 526/266
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein an unsaturated monomer contains at
    least one or more carbon atoms covalently bonded in a ring system with at
    least one hetereo atom of oxygen, selenium or tellurium and there are no
    other atoms in the ring, with the proviso that at least one of the hetero
    atoms is oxygen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    260,    for a 5- or 6-membered heterocyclic ring containing at least one
    atom of oxygen and nitrogen therein.

    275,    for a ring compound containing a phosphorus atom in the ring.


CLS 526/267
TXT Subject matter under subclass 266 wherein the interpolymer is formed from
    at least two monomers, one of said monomers being a coumarone type material
    and the other monomer is of the indene type.

    (1)     Note.  The polymers herein need not contain coumarone, per se, and
    indene, per se.  It is sufficient for this subclass if derivatives of these
    compounds are polymerized.  Derivatives are considered as being those
    products wherein the hydrogen atoms of these compounds have been replaced
    by other functional groups.

    (2)     Note.  Patents herein generally apply to those resins that are
    obtained by polymerizing mixtures of material containing coumarone and
    indene which have been obtained in coal-tar refining.


CLS 526/268
TXT Subject matter under subclass 266 wherein a bridged or fused ring monomer
    contains an oxygen atom adjoining two carbons in the same bridged or fused
    ring system, with the proviso that the adjoined carbon atoms are not double
    bonded to oxygen, selenium, or tellurium, e.g.,

    (1)     Note.  A bridged or fused ring system for purposes of this subclass
    requires that a ring system be attached at two different carbon atoms of
    its nuclear skeleton to an atom or chain of atoms which when taken together
    with the nuclear carbon atoms forms an additional ring structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    273,    for an unsaturated compound containing an epoxy group.


CLS 526/269
TXT Hetero-oxygen ring compound contains a Carbonate group, i.e., -OO- as ring
    atoms:

    Subject matter under subclass 266 wherein the unsaturated monomer has at
    least one heterocyclic ring which contains as ring atoms thereof a -OO-
    group, i.e., cyclic carbonate.


CLS 526/270
TXT Subject matter under subclass 266 wherein an unsaturated monomer contains
    at least one hetero oxygen in a hetero ring containing five atoms.


CLS 526/271
TXT Subject matter under subclass 270 wherein the 5-membered ring contains two
    carbonyl groups bonded to the same oxygen atom so as to form a hetero ring
    with the bonded oxygen atom, e.g.,


CLS 526/272
TXT Subject matter under subclass 271 wherein the 5-membered oxygen-containing
    ring is interpolymerized with at least one unsaturated monomer which is
    solely composed of hydrogen and carbon atoms.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes interpolymers and other interpolymers
    wherein other unsaturated monomers, in addition to a hydrocarbon monomer,
    are polymerized with the unsaturated heterocyclic oxygen-containing
    compound.


CLS 526/273
TXT Subject matter under subclass 266 wherein the unsaturated monomer contains
    at least one hetero oxygen atom in a ring containing three atoms.


CLS 526/274
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the unsaturated monomer contains
    at least one phosphorus atom.


CLS 526/275
TXT Subject matter under subclass 274 wherein the phosphorus atom is part of a
    ring system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258+,   for an unsaturated monomer containing a nitrogen atom in a
    heterocyclic ring.

    266+,   for an unsaturated monomer containing an oxygen atom in a
    heterocyclic ring.


CLS 526/276
TXT Subject matter under subclass 274 wherein the phosphorus atom is covalently
    bonded to a nitrogen atom.


CLS 526/277
TXT Subject matter under subclass 274 wherein a phosphorus atom has a valence
    of five.


CLS 526/278
TXT Subject matter under subclass 277 wherein a pentavalent phosphorus atom is
    directly bound to a carbon atom.


CLS 526/279
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the unsaturated monomer contains
    at least one silicon atom.


CLS 526/280
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein a single carbocyclic ring is
    attached at two different carbon atoms of its nuclear skeleton to a
    methylene carbon atom, or substituted methylene group, or chain of
    methylene carbon atoms, or substituted methylene carbon atoms, which carbon
    atom or chain of carbon atoms when taken together with the attached nuclear
    carbon atoms of the carbocyclic ring forms an additional ring structure,
    e.g., polycyclic terpenes, etc.

    (1)     Note.  A bridged monomer for purposes of this subclass requires
    that two separate and discrete methylene groups, or substituted methylene
    groups, or chain of methylene carbon atoms, or substituted methylene carbon
    atoms be present in a molecule, one of said methylene groups or chain
    thereof being those nuclear carbon atoms between the two different attached
    carbon atoms of the original nuclear carbon atoms of the carbocyclic ring,
    and the second methylene group or chain thereof being those carbon atoms
    that are joined to the original nuclear carbon atoms of the carbocyclic
    ring so as to form the additional ring structure.

    (2)     Note.  A fused ring monomer for purposes of this subclass requires
    a carbocyclic nucleus which is attached at two of its adjacent nuclear
    carbon atoms to a methylene group, or substituted methylene group, or to a
    chain of methylene carbon atoms, or a chain of substituted methylene carbon
    atoms, so that the adjoined carbon atoms form a carbocyclic ring which is
    in addition to the original carbocyclic ring.


CLS 526/281
TXT Subject matter under subclass 280 wherein the unsaturated monomer contains
    at least one bridged ring system.


CLS 526/282
TXT Subject matter under subclass 281 wherein the bridged ring system contains
    at least one ethylenic group which is directly or indirectly bonded to a
    single carbon atom of the bridged ring nucleus.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass "directly or indirectly bonded
    " is meant to include all ethylenic unsaturation which is external to the
    bridged nucleus and which is bonded to the bridged nucleus by a single
    nuclear carbon atom , e.g.,



    (2)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass a methylene group which is
    bonded to a nuclear carbon atom will suffice as being an external ethylenic
    group, and is proper for this subclass, e.g.,



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    281+,   for an ethylenic unsaturated group which is bonded to the bridged
    ring system through a ring which is fused to the bridged ring system, e.g.,



CLS 526/283
TXT Subject matter under subclass 281 wherein the bridged ring monomer is a
    dicyclopentadiene containing moiety.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes dicyclopentadiene, per se, as well as
    derivatives of dicyclopentadiene having at least the basic structure of
    dicyclopentadiene

            which derivative must include the two available ethylenic bonds but
    wherein the hydrogen atoms of dicyclopentadiene may have been substituted
    by other atoms.


CLS 526/284
TXT Subject matter under subclass 280 wherein the fused ring system contains at
    least one ethylenic group to which is directly bonded to a single carbon
    atom of the fused ring nucleus.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass "directly or indirectly
    bonded" includes all ethylenic unsaturation which is external to the fused
    ring nucleus and which is bonded to the fused ring by a single nuclear
    carbon atom.

    (2)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass a methylene group which is
    bonded to a nuclear carbon atom will suffice as being an external ethylenic
    group.


CLS 526/285
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the unsaturated monomer contains
    at least one triple bond, i.e., -CbC-.


CLS 526/286
TXT From S-containing monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the unsaturated monomer contains
    at least one sulfur atom.


CLS 526/287
TXT From monomer containing three or more oxygen atoms bonded to a single
    sulfur atom, e.g., sulfonate, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 286 wherein the sulfur monomer contains at
    least one sulfur atom bonded to at least three oxygen atoms.


CLS 526/288
TXT From sulfur monomer containing nitrogen atom:

    Subject matter under subclass 286 wherein the sulfur monomer contains at
    least one nitrogen atom.


CLS 526/289
TXT From sulfide-containing monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 286 wherein the sulfur monomer contains at
    least one sulfur atom as part of a sulfide group.

    (1)     Note.  A sulfide for purposes of this subclass denotes a class of
    compounds having a (S)n group, wherein n is 1 or more and wherein the
    carbon atoms bonded to the (S)n atoms are not double-bonded to oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium, or triple-bonded to nitrogen.


CLS 526/290
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the unsaturated monomer is a
    mixture of hydrocarbons derived from a petroleum hydrocarbon fraction; or
    the unsaturated monomer is an unsaturated coal, bituminous material,
    extract or derivative thereof; or the unsaturated monomer is an unsaturated
    fatty still residue; or mixtures of said unsaturated monomers.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes polymers wherein added material is
    interpolymerized with a petroleum hydrocarbon fraction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76,     for the combination of preparing a monomer by a chemical reaction
    involving a petroleum fraction and subsequent polymerization of said
    monomer.

    267,    for an interpolymer containing coumarone and indene.

    280+,   for a polymer prepared from a fused or bridged ring ethylenic
    unsaturated monomer.


CLS 526/291
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the unsaturated monomer contains
    at least one halogen atom and at least three carbon atoms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    296,    for an iodine or bromine-containing monomer, 1, 2-dichloroethylene,
    trichloroethylene, or tetrachloroethylene monomer.

    343,    for a polymer derived from vinylidene chloride.

    344+,   for a polymer derived from vinyl chloride.


CLS 526/292.1
TXT Halogen monomer is carboxylic acid ester:

    Subject matter under subclass 291 wherein the halogen-containing monomer
    also contains a carboxylic acid ester group.

    (1)     Note.  See Glossary in Class 521 for a definition of "carboxylic
    acid ester".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291,    293, 294, and 295, for a halogen- containing monomer also contains
    a carbonate group.


CLS 526/292.2
TXT Contains nitrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 292.1 wherein said halogen-containing monomer
    also contains a nitrogen atom.


CLS 526/292.3
TXT Contains oxygen other than as part of a carboxylic acid ester group:Subject
    matter under subclass 292.1 wherein said halogen-containing monomer also
    contains an oxygen atom other than as part of a carboxylic acid ester group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass excludes halogenated carbonate monomers, per
    se; however, a halogen-containing monomer which contains a carboxylic acid
    ester moiety and a carbonate moiety would be included herein; as would a
    halogen-containing monomer which contains a carboxylic acid ester moiety
    and a free carboxylic acid moiety.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291,    293, 294, and 295, for a halogen-containing monomer which contains
    a carbonate group.


CLS 526/292.4
TXT Contains two or more carboxylic acid ester groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 292.1 wherein said halogen-containing monomer
    contains at least two carboxylic acid ester group.


CLS 526/292.5
TXT Contains carbocyclic ring, e.g., aryl, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 292.1 wherein said halogen-containing monomer
    contains a ring consisting solely of carbon atoms.


CLS 526/292.6
TXT Interpolymerized with a monomer containing atom other than carbon,
    hydrogen, or halogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 292.1 wherein said halogen-containing monomer
    is interpolymerized with an ethylenic monomer containing an atom other than
    carbon, hydrogen, or halogen.


CLS 526/292.7
TXT Interpolymerized:

    Subject matter under subclass 292.1 wherein said halogen-containing monomer
    is interpolymerized with another ethylenic monomer.


CLS 526/292.8
TXT Halogen monomer is nitrile:

    Subject matter under subclass 291 wherein the halogen-containing monomer
    contains a nitrile group.

    (1)     Note.  See Glossary in Class 521 for a definition of the term
    "nitrile".


CLS 526/292.9
TXT Halogen monomer contains an ether group:

    Subject matter under subclass 291 wherein the halogen-containing monomer
    contains an ether group, -C-O-C.


CLS 526/292.95
TXT Halogen monomer contains a carboxylic acid, salt, or carboxylic acid
    amide:Subject matter under subclass 291 wherein said halogen-containing
    monomer contains a free carboxylic acid, salt, or carboxylic acid amide
    group.

    (1)     Note.  See Glossary in Class 521 for definitions of "carboxylic
    acid", "carboxylic acid salt", and "carboxylic acid amide group".


CLS 526/293
TXT Subject matter under subclass 291 wherein the halogen-containing monomer
    contains at least one aromatic group therein.


CLS 526/294
TXT Subject matter under subclass 291 wherein the halogen-containing monomer
    contains at least two halogen atoms therein.

    (1)     Note.  The halogen atoms herein may be identical or different.


CLS 526/295
TXT Subject matter under subclass 291 wherein the unsaturated monomer contains
    at least two separate ethylenic groups, e.g., halogenated butadiene, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249,    for a polymer derived from a plural halogenated monomer containing
    at least one fluorine atom and at least one halogen atom which is other
    than fluorine.


CLS 526/296
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the unsaturated monomer contains
    at least one atom of bromine or iodine or is 1, 2-dichloroethylene,
    trichloroethylene, or tetrachloroethylene.


CLS 526/297
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the unsaturated monomer contains a
    nitrile group (i.e., R - C b N)and wherein said nitrile compound is other
    than acrylonitrile, per se, or methacrylonitrile, per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248,    for a polymer derived from a monomer containing a fluorine atom and
    a nitrogen atom.

    292.8,  for a polymer derived from a monomer containing a nitrile group and
    a chlorine, iodine, or bromine atom.

    341+,   for a polymer derived from acrylonitrile or methacrylonitrile.


CLS 526/298
TXT Subject matter under subclass 297 wherein (1) the monomer contains at least
    two nitrogen atoms, one of said nitrogen atoms being part of a nitrile
    group, and the other nitrogen atom being in a nonnitrile form; or (2) the
    nitrile-containing monomer contains an oxygen atom chemically combined
    therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300,    for a polymer derived from a monomer containing plural nitrile
    groups and no other nonnitrile nitrogen atom or no oxygen atom.


CLS 526/299
TXT Subject matter under subclass 297 wherein the nitrile group-containing
    monomer has at least one aromatic group.


CLS 526/300
TXT Subject matter under subclass 297 wherein the monomer contains at least two
    nitrile groups, e.g., vinylidene cyanide, etc.


CLS 526/301
TXT From monomer containing a  NO- group, e.g., carbamic acid, etc.:Subject
    matter under subclass 72 wherein the unsaturated monomer contains a NO-
    group, e.g., carbamates, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    528,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 367+ for a polymer
    derived from a reactant which contains a  N group.


CLS 526/302
TXT From monomer containing a  NN  or NN group, e.g., urea, isourea, etc.:
    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the unsaturated monomer contains a
     NN group or N group, e.g., unsaturated ureas, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    528,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 367+ for a polymer
    derived from a reactant which contains a - group.


CLS 526/303.1
TXT From carboxylic acid amide-containing monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the unsaturated monomer contains
    at least one carboxylic acid amide group, i.e.,-CN or HN.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    524,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 29.1+ for a resin
    of the type found in this subclass but described as a composition, e.g.,
    solution, dispersion, gel, emulsion, latex, etc.


CLS 526/304
TXT Subject matter under subclass 303.1 wherein the amide monomer contains at
    least one carbon atom bonded to at least one oxygen atom and wherein said
    carbon to oxygen bond is not part of an amide group.

    (1)     Note.  Patents included within this subclass include those wherein
    two or more carbonyl groups are bonded to a nitrogen atom so as to form an
    imide group, e.g.,


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    306,    for a polymer formed from a monomer containing plural amide groups
    and having no carbon-to-oxygen bond other than as an amide.


CLS 526/305
TXT Subject matter under subclass 303.1 wherein the amide monomer contains a
    cycloaliphatic or aromatic group.


CLS 526/306
TXT Subject matter under subclass 303.1 wherein the amide monomer contains  at
    least two separate amide groups,  e.g.,


CLS 526/307
TXT Subject matter under subclass 303.1 wherein the amide monomer contains at
    least one additional nonamide group nitrogen atom.


CLS 526/307.1
TXT N-substituted unsaturated hydrocarbon group:

    Subject matter under subclass 303.1 wherein the carboxylic acid amide
    contains a N-substituted unsaturated hydrocarbon group, e.g., N-vinyl
    acetamide, N-allyl propionamide, etc.


CLS 526/307.2
TXT With monomer containing carboxylic acid amide group:

    Subject matter under subclass 303.1 wherein the copolymer contains at least
    two carboxylic acid amide monomers, e.g., polymer from acrylamide and N,
    N-dimethylacryiamide, etc.


CLS 526/307.3
TXT With monomer containing nitrogen other than (meth)-acrylonitrile:Subject
    matter under subclass 303.1 wherein the copolymer is derived from a
    nitrogen-containing monomer other than (meth)acrylonitrile or a carboxylic
    acid amide, e.g., polymer from acrylamide and diethylaminoethy
    methacrylate, etc.


CLS 526/307.4
TXT With monomer containing oxygen:
    Subject matter under subclass 303.1 wherein the copolymer is derived from a
    comonomer containing oxygen, e.g., polymer from acrylamide and vinyl
    acetate, etc.


CLS 526/307.5
TXT Oxygen atom is part of ether or hydroxyl group:

    Subject matter under subclass 307.4 wherein the copolymer is derived from a
    comonomer containing an ether or hydroxyl group, e.g., polymer from N,
    N-dimethylacrylamide and methyl vinyl ether; acrylamide and allyl alcohol,
    etc.


CLS 526/307.6
TXT Oxygen atom is part of carboxylic acid group:

    Subject matter under subclass 307.4 wherein the copolymer is derived from a
    comonomer containing a caroxylic acid group, e.g., polymer from acrylamide
    and acrylic acid, etc.


CLS 526/307.7
TXT Oxygen atom is part of ester group derived from unsaturated carboxylic acid:

    Subject matter under subclass 307.4 wherein the copolymer is derived from a
    monomer containing an ester group derived from a comonomer containing an
    ester group derived from an unsaturated carboxylic acid, e.g., a polymer
    from N-N-ditertiary butylacrylamide and methyl acrylate, etc.


CLS 526/307.8
TXT With hydrocarbon monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 303.1 wherein the copolymer is derived from a
    hydrocarbon comonomer, e.g., polymer from acrylamide and ethylene, etc.


CLS 526/308
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the unsaturated monomer contains a
    ring solely composed of carbon atoms, said ring of carbon atoms being
    nonaromatic.

    (1)     Note.  The ethylenic unsaturation may be part of the ring system or
    may be external to the ring system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280+,   for a fused or bridged ring containing monomer.


CLS 526/309
TXT Subject matter under subclass 308 wherein the ring-containing monomer
    contains at least one atom which is other than carbon and hydrogen.


CLS 526/310
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the unsaturated monomer contains
    at least one nitrogen atom and is other than acrylonitrile or
    methacrylonitrile, per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    341+,   for a polymer derived from acrylonitrile or methacrylonitrile.


CLS 526/311
TXT Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein the nitrogen monomer contains at
    least one bond between a nitrogen and an oxygen atom.


CLS 526/312
TXT Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein the nitrogen monomer contains at
    least one bond between a carbon and an oxygen atom.


CLS 526/313
TXT From phenol, phenol ether, or inorganic phenolate monomer:
    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the unsaturated monomer is a
    phenol, phenol ether, or inorganic salt of a phenol.

    (1)     Note.  See the (1) Note under Class 528, subclass 86 for a
    definition of the terms "phenol", phenol ether", or "an inorganic salt of a
    phenol (phenolate)".


CLS 526/314
TXT From monomer containing a carbonate group,  i.e., -OO-:
    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the unsaturated monomer contains a

    -OO- group, i.e., carbonates.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    528,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 370+ for a polymer
    derived from a -OO- containing reactant.


CLS 526/315
TXT From aldehyde monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the unsaturated monomer contains
    an aldehyde group.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the term "aldehyde".


CLS 526/316
TXT From ketone or ketone monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the unsaturated monomer contains a
    ketone or ketone group.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the term "ketone".

    (2)     Note.  A ketene requires a compound having the structure =C=O, with
    the proviso that the carbon atom bonded to the =C=O group meets the
    parameters set forth in the (1) Note above.


CLS 526/317.1
TXT Form carboxylic acid monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the unsaturated monomer contains
    at least one free carboxyl group, i.e., OH.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240+,   for a polymer derived from an unsaturated carboxylic acid metal
    salt.

    292.1,  for a halogen-containing carboxylic acid, salt or ester thereof.

    310+,   for a nitrogen-containing salt of an unsaturated carboxylic acid.

    319+,   for a polymer having carboxylic ester groups but devoid of a free
    carboxylic acid group.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    525,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 329.1 for polyacrylic
    acid produced by oxidation of acrylonitrille and in appropriate subclasses
    337-388 for the process oxidation of acryionitrile; methacrylic acid
    produced by hydrolysis of polyalphahydroxy  methacrylic acid ester.


CLS 526/318
TXT Block copolymer derived from vinyl(idene) chloride:

    Subject matter under subclass 317.1 wherein the polymer is a block
    copolymer derived from vinyl chloride or vinylidene chloride.

    (1)     Note.  To be proper for this subclass, the initial block copolymer
    must be derived from vinyl or vinylidene chloride.


CLS 526/318.1
TXT Carboxylic acid contains aryl group, or two or more ethylenic groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 317.1 wherein the carboxylic acid monomer
    contains an aryl group or two or more ethylenic groups, e.g., cinnamic acid
    or sorbic acid, etc.


CLS 526/318.2
TXT Carboxylic acid contains two or more carboxyl groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 317.1 wherein the carboxylic acid monomer
    contains two or more free carboxyl groups, e.g., maleic acid, fumaric acid,
    etc.


CLS 526/318.25
TXT With hydrocarbon, vinyl chloride or vinylindene chloride monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 318.2 wherein the monomer having two or more
    carboxyl groups is interpolyerized with an unsaturated hydrocarbon, vinyl
    chloride or vinylidene chloride or mixtures thereof.


CLS 526/318.3
TXT Carboxlyic acid other than acrylic or methacrylic acid:

    Subject matter under subclass 317.1 wherein the carboxylic acid monomer is
    other than acrylic or methacrylic acid.


CLS 526/318.4
TXT With hydrocarbon, vinyl chloride or vinylidene chloride monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 318.2 wherein the monomer having two or more
    carboxyl groups is interpolymerized with an unsaturated monomer which
    contains at least one carboxylic acid ester group.


CLS 526/318.41
TXT Monomer contains chalcogen other than as C(=O)-O- (chalocogen in any
    monomer):

    Subject matter under subclass 318.4 wherein at least one monomer contains
    chalcogen other than C(=O)-O-.

    (1)     Note.  The chalcogen can be with either the ester monomer or
    another monomer.


CLS 526/318.42
TXT Hydroxyl group:

    Subject matter under subclass 318.4 wherein the chalcogen is a hydroxyl
    group.


CLS 526/318.43
TXT Monomer contains two or more ester groups:

    Subject matter under subclass 318.4 wherein the carboxylic acid monomer
    contains two more ester groups.


CLS 526/318.44
TXT Two or more ester monomers:

    Subject matter under subclass 318.4 wherein the carboxylic acid monomer is
    interpolymerized with two or more carboxylic acid ester monomers.


CLS 526/318.45
TXT With hydrocarbon monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass  318.4 wherein the carboxylic acid monomer is
    interpolymerized with an unsaturated carboxylic acid ester monomer and an
    unsaturated hydrocarbon monomer.


CLS 526/318.5
TXT With chalocogen containing monomer, e.g., additional carboxyl monomer, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 317.1 wherein the carboxylic acid monomer is
    interpolymerized with an additional carboxylic acid monomer, etc.


CLS 526/318.6
TXT With hydrocarbon monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 317.1 wherein the carboxylic acid monomer is
    interpolymerized with an unsaturated hydrocarbon monomer.


CLS 526/319
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein an unsaturated monomer contains at
    least one carboxylic acid ester group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not require that an ester be prepared
    from the reaction of an acid and an alcohol.  It is sufficient if the ester
    compound be identical in structure to a compound prepared by the
    replacement of a hydroxyl group by a carboxylic acid radical.  Each
    carboxylic acid ester, no matter how prepared, is to be regarded as being
    the reaction product of a carboxylic acid and a replaceable hydroxyl group.

    (2)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the term "carboxylic acid
    ester".


CLS 526/320
TXT Subject matter under subclass 319 wherein in addition to the carboxylic
    acid ester group there is also present in the molecule at least one ether
    or alcohol group.


CLS 526/321
TXT Subject matter under subclass 319 wherein the ester is derived from at
    least one carboxylic acid which contains plural carboxylic acid groups.


CLS 526/322
TXT Subject matter under subclass 321 wherein at least one of the alcohol
    moieties of the ester compound is ethylenically unsaturated, e.g., diallyl
    phthalate, etc.


CLS 526/323
TXT Subject matter under subclass 322 wherein the plural carboxylic acid group
    compound contains ethylenic unsaturation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327,    for an ester of a monocarboxylic acid wherein both the carboxylic
    acid and the esterifying alcohol are ethylenically unsaturated.


CLS 526/323.1
TXT Diester derived from an ethylenically unsaturated monocarboxylic acid and
    polyol:

    Subject matter under subclass 321 wherein a diester derived from an
    ethylenically unsaturated monocarboxylic acid and a polyol is polymerized.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327,    for an ester derived from an ethylenically unsaturated carboxylic
    and an ethylenically unsaturated alcohol.

    328,    for an ester derived from an ethylenically unsaturated carboxylic
    acid.


CLS 526/323.2
TXT With additional monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 323.1 wherein the diester is interpolymerized
    with at least one monomer which is ethylenically unsaturated.


CLS 526/324
TXT Subject matter under subclass 321 wherein a polycarboxylic acid ester is
    interpolymerized with at least one monomer which is a diverse ethylenically
    unsaturated hydrocarbon.


CLS 526/325
TXT Subject matter under subclass 321 wherein a polycarboxylic acid ester is
    interpolymerized with at least one monomer which is a diverse ethylenically
    unsaturated carboxylic acid ester.


CLS 526/326
TXT Subject matter under subclass 319 wherein the unsaturated ester contains at
    least one aromatic ring.


CLS 526/327
TXT Subject matter under subclass 319 wherein the ester contains ethylenic
    unsaturation in the carboxylic acid group as well as in the alcohol group.


CLS 526/328
TXT Subject matter under subclass 319 wherein the ester is derived from a
    saturated alcohol and an unsaturated carboxylic acid.


CLS 526/328.5
TXT With additional monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 328 wherein the unsaturated carboxylic acid
    ester monomer is interpolymerized with at least one monomer which is
    ethylenically unsaturated.


CLS 526/329
TXT Subject matter under subclass 328.5 wherein the unsaturated carboxylic acid
    ester monomer is interpolymerized with at least one monomer which is an
    ethylenically unsaturated hydrocarbon.


CLS 526/329.1
TXT Hydrocarbon monomer containing at least two ethylenic groups, e.g.,
    butadiene, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 329 wherein the hydrocarbon monomer contains
    at least two ethylenic groups.


CLS 526/329.2
TXT Aromatic, e.g., styrene, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 329 wherein the hydrocarbon monomer contains
    an aryl ring.


CLS 526/329.3
TXT With acrylonitrile or methacrylonitrile:

    Subject matter under subclass 328.5 wherein acrylonitrile or
    methacrylonitrile is interpolymerized with an ester derived from an
    ethylenically unsaturated carboxylic acid.


CLS 526/329.4
TXT With halogen-containing monomer:
    Subject matter under subclass 328.5 wherein an ethylenically unsaturated
    halogen-containing monomer is interpolymerized with an ester derived from
    an ethylenically unsaturated carboxylic acid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    291+,   for an unsaturated monomer containing at least one halogen atom and
    at least three carbon atoms.


CLS 526/329.5
TXT With ester derived from saturated carboxylic acid:

    Subject matter under subclass 328.5 wherein an ethylenically unsaturated
    ester derived from a saturated carboxylic acid is interpolymerized with an
    ester derived from an ethylenically unsaturated carboxylic acid.


CLS 526/329.6
TXT With monomer-containing ether group:
    Subject matter under subclass 328.5 wherein an ethylenically unsaturated
    ether is interpolymerized with an ester derived from an ethylenically
    unsaturated carboxylic acid.


CLS 526/329.7
TXT Polymer derived from methyl acrylate or methyl methacrylate:

    Subject matter under subclass 328 wherein methyl acrylate or methyl
    methacrylate is polymerized.


CLS 526/330
TXT Subject matter under subclass 319 drawn to interpolymers derived from at
    least one ester having unsaturation in the alcohol portion and which is
    devoid of unsaturation in the carboxylic acid portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    319,    for a homopolymer of an ester derived from an unsaturated alcohol
    and a saturated carboxylic acid.


CLS 526/331
TXT Subject matter under subclass 330 wherein the unsaturated ester is
    interpolymerized with at least one monomer which is an ethylenically
    unsaturated hydrocarbon.


CLS 526/332
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein an unsaturated monomer contains at
    least one ether function.


CLS 526/333
TXT Subject matter under subclass 332 wherein the unsaturated monomer contains
    at least two ether groups.


CLS 526/334
TXT Subject matter under subclass 332 wherein the unsaturated monomer contains
    (1) at least one aromatic group; or (2) at least two ethylenically
    unsaturated groups.


CLS 526/335
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the unsaturated monomer is a
    hydrocarbon compound which contains at least two ethylenically unsaturated
    groups.


CLS 526/336
TXT Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein two or more ethylenically
    unsaturated groups are (1) separated from each other either by an aromatic
    ring, e.g., divinyl benzene, or (2) separated by at least one carbon atom
    of an acyclic carbon chain which carbon atom is not part of a methine
    group, e.g., -C=C-C-C=C-, etc., or (3) wherein two ethylenically
    unsaturated groups share a single carbon atom, e.g.,C=C=C , etc.


CLS 526/337
TXT Subject matter under subclass 335 which involves the interpolymerization of
    at least two hydrocarbon monomers each of which contains two or more
    conjugated ethylenic bonds.


CLS 526/338
TXT Subject matter under subclass 335 which involves the interpolymerization of
    a hydrocarbon monomer containing two or more conjugated ethylenic bonds
    with at least one ethylenic monomer which is not a hydrocarbon.


CLS 526/339
TXT Subject matter under subclass 335 which involves the interpolymerization of
    a hydrocarbon monomer containing two or more conjugated ethylenic bonds
    with at least one nonaromatic ethylenic monomer.


CLS 526/340
TXT Subject matter under subclass 335 which involves the interpolymerization of
    a hydrocarbon monomer containing two or more conjugated ethylenic bonds
    with at least one aromatic ethylenic monomer.


CLS 526/340.1
TXT Polymerized in the presence of a water medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein a hydrocarbon monomer containing
    two or more ethylenic groups is polymerized under conditions wherein an
    aqueous medium (water)is employed in the process or products which are the
    result of such a polymerization process.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is intended to take those processes or
    products thereof, wherein a significant amount of water is employed
    (emulsion, suspension, etc.) rather than where mere trace amounts of water
    are utilized, e.g., ppm H2O, etc.


CLS 526/340.2
TXT From hydrocarbon having only five carbon atoms:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein the hydrocarbon monomer contains
    only five carbon atoms, e.g., 1, 3-pentadiene, etc.


CLS 526/340.3
TXT From hydrocarbon having at least six carbon atoms:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein the hydrocarbon monomer contains
    six or more carbon atoms, e.g., 2-methyl-1, 3-pentadiene, etc.


CLS 526/340.4
TXT Butadiene homopolymer contains at least 75 percent cis-1, 4-configuration:

    Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein polybutadiene formed contains at
    least 75 percent cis-configuration.

    (1)     Note.  Polymers produced with Group VIII transition metal catalysts
    are presumed to have 75 percent cis-1, 4-configuration in the absence of
    any disclosure to the contrary.


CLS 526/341
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the unsaturated monomer is
    acrylonitrile or methacrylonitrile.


CLS 526/342
TXT Subject matter under subclass 341 which involves the interpolymerization of
    acrylonitrile or methacrylonitrile with each other or with other
    ethylenically unsaturated monomers.


CLS 526/343
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the unsaturated monomer is
    vinylidene chloride.


CLS 526/344
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the unsaturated monomer is vinyl
    chloride.


CLS 526/344.1
TXT Bulk or mass polymerization of vinyl chloride only:

    Subject matter under subclass 344 wherein vinyl chloride only is
    polymerized under so-called mass or bulk, also known as block or cast
    polymerization conditions, and wherein the process does not involve the use
    of a solvent or dispersing medium, and products which are the result of
    such a polymerization process.

    (1)     Note.  Appropriate for this subclass are processes wherein the
    monomer or polymer produced act as solvents.


CLS 526/344.2
TXT Polymerization of vinyl chloride only in an aqueous medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 344 wherein vinyl chloride only is
    polymerized under conditions wherein an aqueous medium (water)is employed
    in the process and products which are the result of such polymerization
    process.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is intended to take those processes and
    products wherein a significant amount of water is employed (emulsion,
    suspension, etc.) rather than where mere trace amounts of water are
    utilized, e.g. ppm H2O, etc.


CLS 526/344.3
TXT Polyvinyl chloride characterized by physical shape, e.g., fiber, sheet,
    etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 344 wherein polyvinyl chloride homopolymer is
    characterized by mere physical structure such as fiber, sheet, granular, or
    the like.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 428 for polyvinyl chloride material characterized
    by physical structure wherein at least one physical dimension is recited.


CLS 526/345
TXT Subject matter under subclass 344 which involves the interpolymerization of
    vinyl chloride with at least one ethylenically unsaturated monomer.


CLS 526/346
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the unsaturated monomer is a
    compound having at least one aromatic group and only carobn and hydrogen
    atoms.


CLS 526/347
TXT Subject matter under subclass 346 wherein an ethylenically unsaturated
    hydrocarbon monomer having at least one aromatic group is interpolymerized
    with at least one ethylenically unsaturated monomer.


CLS 526/347.1
TXT Monomer other than styrene:

    Subject matter under subclass 346 wherein the aromatic hydrocarbon contains
    more than eight carbon atoms.


CLS 526/347.2
TXT Crystalline polystyrene:

    Subject matter under subclass 346 drawn to crystalline polystyrene:

    (1)     Note.  All polymers prepared in the presence of a transition-metal
    atom and in the substantial absence of water are included herein unless the
    disclosure indicates to the contrary that a noncrystalline polymer is
    formed.

    (2)     Note.  All polymers prepared in the presence of a free-radical
    catalyst or redox catalyst are excluded herein unless the disclosure
    indicates that a crystalline polymer is formed.

    (3)     Note.  Any degree of crystalline or isotactic content is sufficient
    for this subclass.


CLS 526/348
TXT Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the unsaturated monomer is a
    compound having only carbon and hydrogen atoms.


CLS 526/348.1
TXT Stretched product:

    Subject matter under subclass 348 wherein the polymeric product has been
    physically stretched so as to alter physical properties, e.g., biaxially
    stretched polyethylene, etc.


CLS 526/348.2
TXT At least six carbon atoms:

    Subject matter under subclass 348 wherein the hydrocarbon monomer contains
    at least six carbon atoms.


CLS 526/348.3
TXT Ten or more carbon atoms:

    Subject matter under subclass 348.2 wherein the hydrocarbon monomer
    contains ten or more carbon atoms.


CLS 526/348.4
TXT Six carbon atoms only:

    Subject matter under subclass 348.2 wherein the hydrocarbon monomer
    contains only six carbon atoms.


CLS 526/348.5
TXT N-hexene:

    Subject matter under subclass 348.4 wherein the hydrocarbon-monomer is
    n-hexene, i.e., straight-chain hexene.


CLS 526/348.6
TXT At least four carbon atoms:

    Subject matter under subclass 348 wherein the hydrocarbon monomer contains
    at least four carbon atoms.


CLS 526/348.7
TXT Isobutylene:

    Subject matter under subclass 348.6 wherein the hydrocarbon monomer is
    isobutylene.


CLS 526/348.8
TXT With nonhydrocarbon monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 348 wherein the hydrocarbon monomer, is
    interpolymerized with a nonhydrocarbon monomer e.g., ethylene-allyl alcohol
    copolymer, etc.


CLS 526/351
TXT Subject matter under subclass 348 wherein the unsaturated monomer is only
    propylene.


CLS 526/352
TXT Subject matter under subclass 348 wherein the unsaturated monomer is only
    ethylene.


CLS 526/352.2
TXT Low density:

    Subject matter under subclass 352 wherein the density of the formed polymer
    is less than or equal to 0.935.

    (1)     Note.  The term density refers to density as measured by ASTMD 1505
    or specific gravity and is not to be confused with terms such as "apparent
    density" or "bulk density".

    (2)     Note.  In the absence of a specific disclosure of density, all
    polymers produced by a free radical-yielding catalyst, e.g., peroxy, azo,
    or redox, etc., are presumed to be low density and proper herein.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS

    The following subclasses are collections of published disclosure pertaining
    to various aspects of art relating to resins which are derived from
    ethylenic monomers, and which aspects do not form an appropriate base for
    subclass classification in the classification schedule.

    (1)     Note.  Disclosures are placed for value as a search aid and in no
    instance do they represent the entire extent of the prior art.


CLS 526/901
TXT Processes of polymerizing a vaporized ethylenically unsaturated monomer
    utilizing a catalyst having at least one transition metal atom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    913,    for processes of polymerizing a vaporized monomer absent a
    transition metal catalyst.


CLS 526/902
TXT Processes of polymerizing an ethylenically unsaturated monomer in bulk form
    utilizing a catalyst having at least one transition metal atom.


CLS 526/903
TXT Processes of polymerizing an ethylenically unsaturated monomer in the
    presence of a catalyst containing a transition metal atom, and in the
    presence of a hydrocarbon additive, which additive affects the final
    properties of the produced polymer or which affects the activity of the
    catalyst.


CLS 526/904
TXT Processes of polymerizing an ethylenically unsaturated monomer in the
    presence of a catalyst contains a transition metal, which transition metal
    is carried on a polymer support.


CLS 526/905
TXT Processes of polymerizing an ethylenically unsaturated monomer in the
    presence of elemental hydrogen and a catalyst containing a transition metal.


CLS 526/906
TXT Processes of polymerizing an ethylenically unsaturated monomer in the
    presence of a catalyst containing a transition metal, which transition
    metal catalyst has been comminuted.


CLS 526/907
TXT Processes of polymerizing an ethylenically unsaturated monomer utilizing a
    catalyst system containing a transition metal wherein the catalyst system
    has been prepared by the reacting of individual components thereof in a
    specified manner.


CLS 526/908
TXT Processes of polymerizing ethylenically unsaturated monomers wherein the
    catalyst utilized  has a particular particle size.


CLS 526/909
TXT Processes of polymerizing an ethylenically unsaturated monomer wherein the
    polymerized product is distinguished by a particular particle size.


CLS 526/910
TXT Processes of polymerizing an ethylenically unsaturated monomer wherein a
    particular suspending agent is utilized in the polymerization process.


CLS 526/911
TXT Processes of polymerizing an ethylenically unsaturated monomer wherein a
    particular emulsifying agent is utilized in the polymerization process.


CLS 526/912
TXT Processes of polymerizing an ethylenically unsaturated monomer wherein the
    reaction medium is purified prior to its utilization.


CLS 526/913
TXT Processes of polymerizing an ethylenically unsaturated monomer in the vapor
    state.


CLS 526/914
TXT Processes involving the degradation of a polymer derived from at least one
    ethylenic unsaturated monomer.


CLS 526/915
TXT Processes of polymerizing an ethylenically unsaturated monomer utilizing a
    redox-type catalyst system.


CLS 526/916
TXT Subject matter involving an interpolymer derived from at least three
    ethylenically unsaturated mono-olefinic hydrocarbon monomers.


CLS 526/917
TXT MANIPULATIVE PROCESSES INVOLVING A SULFUR-CONTAINING TREATING AGENT:

    Manipulative processof treating a polymer derived from only ethylenic
    monomers with a sulfur-containing treating agent.


CLS 526/918
TXT POLYMERIZATION REACTORS FOR ADDITION POLYMER PREPARATION:

    Subject matter involving polymerization reactor apparatus specialized for
    ethylenic monomers.


CLS 526/919
TXT CATALYST INJECTION TECHNIQUE IN ADDITION POLYMERIZATION PROCESSES:

    Subject matter involving ethylenic polymerization processes wherein a
    particular technique or injecting catalyst into the reactor is involved,
    e.g., into a carrier gas, sparged into monomer stream, use of a particular
    pump, etc.


CLS 526/920
TXT APPARATUS FOR USE IN ADDITION POLYMERIZATION PROCESSES:

    Subject matter involving apparatus other than reactors specialized for use
    in polymerization processes, e.g., monomer mixing apparatus, catalyst,
    pre-treaters, etc.


CLS 526/921
TXT TIME CYCLE USED IN ADDITION POLYMERIZATION PROCESS CONTROL:

    Processes of polymerizing an ethylenically unsaturated monomer wherein the
    polymerization process is controlled as a function of time.


CLS 526/922
TXT POLYMERIZATION PROCESS OF ETHYLENIC MONOMERS USING MANIPULATIVE
    TECHNIQUE:Processes of polymerizing an ethylenically unsaturated monomer
    involving manipulative procedures.


CLS 526/923
TXT ETHYLENIC MONOMERS CONTAINING AT LEAST ONE SALT GROUP:

    Subject matter involving polymers derived from salt-containing monomers.

            SPECIAL CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS:

    The following subclasses (930-940) relate only to the subject matter of
    subclasses 317.1+ (excluding 318).


CLS 526/930
TXT WATER SWELLABLE OR HYDROPHILIC:

    Subject matter relating to water swellable or hydrophilic polymers derived
    from ethylenically unstaturated carboxylic acids.


CLS 526/931
TXT PRESSURE SENSITIVE ADHESIVE:

    Subject matter relating to polymers derived from ethylenically unsaturated
    carboxylic acids and having utility in pressure sensitive adhesive
    formulation.


CLS 526/932
TXT THICKENER OR DISPERSANT FOR AQUEOUS SYSTEM:

    Subject matter relating to polymers derived from ethylenically  unsaturated
    carboxylic acid and having utility as a thickener or dispersant for aqueous
    systems.


CLS 526/933
TXT DETERGENT PROPERTY OR LUBRICANT ADDITIVE:

    Subject matter relating to polymers derived from ethylenically unsaturated
    carboxylic acid and having detergent properties or utility as a lubricant
    additive.


CLS 526/934
TXT ELECTRODEPOSIT, E.G., ELECTOPHORETIC, XEROGRAGHIC, ETC.:

    Subject matter relating to polylmers derived from ethylenically unsaturated
    carboxlic acid and having utility in a deposition process of using
    electrical energy.


CLS 526/935
TXT HOT MELT ADHESIVE:

    Subject matter relating to polymers derived from ethylenically unsaturated
    carboxylic acid and having utility in a hot melt adhesive formulation.


CLS 526/936
TXT PHYSIOLOGICAL USE, E.G., PHARAMACEUTICAL, VETERINARY, DENTAL, ETC.:

    Subject matter involving polymers from ethylenically unsaturated carboxylic
    acid and disclosed as suitable for a physiological use.


CLS 526/937
TXT OPTICAL CLARITY:

    Subject matter involving polymers from ethylenically unsaturated carboxlic
    acid having property of optical clarity.


CLS 526/938
TXT RUBBERY PROPERTY:

    Subject matter involving polymers from ethylenically unsaturated carboxylic
    acid and having rubbery or elastomeric property.


CLS 526/939
TXT MOISTURE PROOF OR HYDROHOBIC:

    Subject matter involving polymers from ethylenically unsaturated carboxylic
    acid and having moisture proof or hydrophobic property.


CLS 526/940
TXT HIGH SOFTENING TEMPERATURE, E.G., EXPOSURE TO BOILING WATER, BOILABLE, ETC.:

    Subject matter invovling polymers from ethylenically unsaturated carboxylic
    acid and having the property of high softening temperature.


CLS 526/941
TXT HAVING THE TRANSITION METAL BONDED DIRECTLY TO CARBON:

    Subject matter involving specified materials wherein carbon is bonded
    directly to the


CLS 526/942
TXT POLYMERIZATION IN THE PRESENCE OF A LIQUID CO2 DILUENT:

    Process of using liquid phase carbon dioxide as diluent in a polymerization
    reaction.


CLS 526/943
TXT POLYMERIZATION WITH METALLOCENE CATALYST:

    Process of polymerization in the presence of metallocene catalyst.

    (1)     Note. Metallocene is defined as an organometallic coordination
    compound which is a cyclopentadienyl derivative of a transition metal or
    metal halide.  Included are substituted cyclopentadienyl moeties.


CLS 527/
TTL SYNTHETIC RESINS OR NATURAL RUBBERS --  PART OF THE  CLASS 520  SERIES

CLS 527/100
TXT FROM REACTANT WHICH IS A CELLULAR MATERIAL DERIVED FROM PLANT OR ANIMAL
    SOURCE AND IS OTHER THAN DIATOMACEOUS EARTH, BLOOD, COTTON, OR FARINACEOUS
    FLOUR, E.G., CITRUS PULP, WALNUT SHELL FLOUR, ETC.:

    Subject matter under Class 520, subclass 1 wherein a solid polymer is
    derived from a reactant which is a plant or animal material which retains
    at least some of the original cell structure, e.g., citrus pulp, wood,
    flour, etc., and excluding diatomaceous earth or fossilized matter (e.g.,
    chalk, etc.), blood, cotton, or farinaceous flour or meal and a reactant
    which an ethylenic monomer, SICP or SPFI; or process of preparing said
    polymer.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 524, subclass 9 for the definition of the term
    "cellular material derived from plant or animal source".

    (2)     Note.  Soybean flour or meal is included herein, also peanut and
    cottonseed meal.

    (3)     Note.  Included herein are fibrous materials such as bark obtained
    from woody plants, e.g., mimosa bark, cork, etc.  However, mimosa wood as a
    reactant is placed in Class 527, subclasses 103+, etc.


CLS 527/101
TXT Animal derived, e.g., hair, leather, horn, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the reactant is a cellular
    material derived from an animal source, e.g., hair, leather, fur, horn, etc.


CLS 527/102
TXT With ethylenic reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein there is at least one ethylenic
    reactant in addition to the animal derived cellular material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    526,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 238.1 for homo- and
    co-polymers of ethylenic monomers having protein or biologically active
    polypeptide chemically bonded thereto.


CLS 527/103
TXT Wood or wood cellulose fiber or flour:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the cellular material derived
    from a plant is wood or wood cellulose (fiber or flour).

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is raw lignocellulose which is deemed to be
    wood for the purpose of this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein as reactants are, e.g., wood fibers,
    quebracho wood, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    526,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 238.21 for homo- and
    co-polymers or ethylenic monomers having cellulose or a derivative
    chemically bonded thereto.


CLS 527/105
TXT With aldehyde or derivative:
    Subject matter under subclass 103 wherein there is at least one reactant
    which is an aldehyde or derivative in addition to the wood or wood
    cellulose (fiber or flour) reactant.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "aldehyde or
    derivative".


CLS 527/200
TXT FROM PROTEIN OR BIOLOGICALLY ACTIVE POLYPEPTIDE REACTANT:

    Subject matter under Class 520, subclass 1 wherein a solid polymer is
    derived from a protein or biologically active polypeptide reactant and an
    ethylenic reactant, SICP or SPFI; or process of preparing said polymer.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition of "protein" or
    "biologically active polypeptide".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, appropriate
    subclasses for making and using enzymes.


CLS 527/201
TXT With ethylenically unsaturated reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein an ethylenically unsaturated
    reactant is additionally present.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    526,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 238.1 for homo- and
    co-polymers of ethylenic monomers having protein or biologically active
    polypeptide chemically bonded thereto.


CLS 527/202
TXT Polymerization in the presence of a specified material:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the reaction system contains a
    specified material at the time of polymerization.

    (1)     Note. See the Glossary for a definition of the term "specified
    material".


CLS 527/203
TXT With nonethylenically unsaturated reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein a third reactant not having
    ethylenic unsaturation is present.

    (1)     Note.  The reactant not having ethylenic unsaturation can be added
    or present at any time prior to solid polymer formation, e.g., protein and
    halogen reacted to yield halogenated protein followed by reaction with
    unsaturated monomer to yield  solid polymer.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    525,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 54.1 for a solid
    polymer chemically treated with a protein or biologically active
    polypeptide.


CLS 527/204
TXT With N=C=X reactant wherein X is chalcogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein a N=C=C reactant is additionally
    present.

    (1)     Note.  X is a chalcogen atom (O, S, Se, or Te).


CLS 527/205
TXT With aldehyde or derivative or ketone reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein an aldehyde or derivative is
    additionally present.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "aldehyde or
    derivative".


CLS 527/206
TXT With phenolic reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 205 wherein a phenolic reactant is
    additionally present.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a defintiion of the term "phenolic
    reactant".


CLS 527/207
TXT With carboxylic acid or derivative reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein a carboxylic acid or derivative
    is additionally present.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "carboxylic
    acid or derivative".


CLS 527/300
TXT FROM CARBOHYDRATE OR DERIVATIVE AS A REACTANT:

    Subject matter under Class 520, subclass 1 wherein a solid polymer is
    derived from a carbohydrate or derivative reactant and an ethylenic
    reactant, a SICP, or a SPFI; or process of preparing said polymer.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition of "carbohydrate or
    derivative.


CLS 527/301
TXT With N=C=X reactant wherein X is chalcogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein a N=C=X reactant is present in
    addition to the carbohydrate or derivative.

    (1)     Note.  X is a chalcogen atom (O, S, Se, or Te).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    525,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 54.22 for N=C=X
    derived solid polymer chemically treated with carbohydrate or derivative.


CLS 527/302
TXT Oxyalkylated carbohydrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 301 wherein the carbohydrate or derivative is
    oxyalkylated, e.g., treated with ethylene oxide, etc.


CLS 527/303
TXT With phenolic reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein a phenolic reactant is present in
    addition to the carbohydrate or derivative.

    (1)     Note. See the Glossary for the definition of the term "phenolic
    reactant".


CLS 527/304
TXT With ketone reactant other than as a ketose:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein a ketone reactant (excluding a
    ketose) is present in addition to the carbohydrate or derivative.

    (1)     Note.  The ketose sugars are treated as carbohydrates and are
    encompassed by subclasses 300+; however, for purposes of the instant
    subclass, a ketose carbohydrate, e.g., ketohexoses such as sorbose,
    fructose, etc., and ketopentoses such as arabinulose, ribulose and
    xylulose, etc., must be accompanied by an additional noncarbohydrate
    ketone, e.g., acetone, etc., to be proper for this subclass.


CLS 527/305
TXT With aldehyde or derivative as a reactant other than as an aldose:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein an aldehyde or derivative (other
    than an aldose) is present in addition to the carbohydrate or derivative.

    (1)     Note.  The aldose sugars are carbohydrates encompased by subclasses
    300+; however, their presence alone is not sufficient for subclass 305
    since another aldehyde must be present.

    (2)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "aldehyde or
    derivative".


CLS 527/306
TXT Ethylenically unsaturated reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 305 wherein there is at least one
    ethylenically unsaturated reactant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    526,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 238.2 for solid
    polymer produced from ethylenic monomer only wherein at least one monomer
    has carbohydrate or derivative chemically bonded thereto.


CLS 527/309
TXT Nitrogen-containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 305 wherein there is at least one
    nitrogen-containing reactant.


CLS 527/310
TXT With phosphorus-containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein a phosporus-containing reactant
    is present in addition to the carbohydrate or derivative.


CLS 527/311
TXT With di- or higher ester of polycarboxylic acid; or with polycarboxylic
    acid or derivative and a compound containing two or more hydroxyl groups or
    salts thereof as reactants:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein in addition to the carbohydrate
    or derivative there is a reactant system comprising a di- or higher ester
    of polycarboxylic acid or a carboxylic acid or derivative admixed with a
    polyhydroxyl compound.

    (1)     Note.  When the additional reactant is a polyol-polycarboxylic acid
    system, the polyol, polycarboxylic acid, and carbohydrate can be admixed
    and reacted in any sequence or simultaneously.


CLS 527/312
TXT With nitrogen-containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein a nitrogen-containing reactant is
    present in addition to the carbohydrate or derivative.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are, e.g., graft copolymers of starch and
    acrylonitrile, etc.


CLS 527/313
TXT Ethylenically unsaturated reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein an ethylenically unsaturated
    reactant is present.

    (1)     Note.  The ethylenic unsaturated reactant can be either a
    carbohydrate derivative (e.g., cellulose acrylate) or another unsaturated
    reactant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    526,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 238.2+ for solid
    polymers produced from ethylenic monomers only wherein there is a monomer
    having carbohydrate or derivative chemically bonded thereto.


CLS 527/314
TXT Unsaturated carboxylic acid or derivative reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 313 wherein the ethylenically unsaturated
    reactant is a carboxylic acid or derivative.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "carboxylic
    acid or derivative".


CLS 527/315
TXT With heterocyclic reactant other than carbohydrate:

    Subject matter under subclass 313 wherein there is a heterocyclic reactant
    in addition to the ethylenically unsaturated reactant and wherein the
    heterocyclic reactant is a noncarbohydrate containing material.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of the term "heterocyclic".


CLS 527/400
TXT FROM LIGNIN, TANNIN, OR DERIVATIVE REACTANT:

    Subject matter under Class 520, subclass 1 wherein a solid polymer is
    derived from lignin, tannin, or a derivative as a reactant and an ethylenic
    monomer, SPFI, or SICP; or process of preparing said polymer.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of "lignin".

    (2)     Note.  See Class 560, subclass 68 for a definition of "tannin and
    derivative thereof".


CLS 527/401
TXT With N=C=X reactant wherein X is chalcogen; or with polyepoxide reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein a N=C=X reactant or polyepoxide
    reactant is present in addition to the lignin, tannin, or derivative.

    (1)     Note.  X is chalcogen, i.e., O, S, Se, Te.

    (2)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of "polyepoxide".


CLS 527/403
TXT With phenolic reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein a phenolic reactant is present in
    addition to lignin, tannin, or derivative.

    (1)     Note.  Phenolic reactant is defined in the Glossary.


CLS 527/500
TXT FROM COAL OR BITUMINOUS MATERIAL, EXTRACT OR DERIVATIVE THEREOF, OR FATTY
    STILL RESIDUE REACTANT:

    Subject matter under Class 520, subclass 1 wherein a solid polymer is
    derived from coal or bituminous material, extract or derivative thereof or
    fatty still residue by means of chemical reaction with an ethylenic
    reactant, or SICP or SPFI; or process of preparing said polymer.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 525, subclass 54.5 for the definition of the terms
    coal, bituminous material, extract or derivative thereof and fatty still
    residue.

    (2)     Note.  In the absence of specific disclosure to the contrary, the
    coal, bituminous material, etc., will be treated as a nonethylenically
    unsaturated material.


CLS 527/501
TXT With polyepoxide reactant; or with N=C=X reactant wherein X is chalcogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein a polyepoxide reactant or N=C=X
    reactant is additionally present.

    (1)     Note.  X is chalcogen (O, S, Se, Te).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    525,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 54.5 for the chemical
    combination of a solid polyepoxide resin with coal, bituminous material,
    extract, or derivative thereof or fatty still residue.


CLS 527/503
TXT With phenolic or aldehyde or derivative reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein a phenolic reactant or aldehyde
    or derivative reactant is additionally present.

    (1)     Note. "Phenolic reactant" is defined in the Glossary.

    (2)     Note.  "Aldehyde" or "derivative" is defined in the Glossary.


CLS 527/600
TXT FROM NATURAL RESIN OR DERIVATIVE REACTANT EXCLUDING TALL OIL OR DERIVATIVE:

    Subject matter under Class 520, subclass 1 wherein a solid polymer is
    derived from a reactant, which is a natural resin or derivative excluding
    tall oil or derivatives, by means of chemical reaction with an ethylenic
    reactant, a SICP or SPFI; or process of preparing said polymer.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for the definition of "natural resin" or
    "derivative".

    (2)     Note.  Since natural resins are presumed to possess ethylenic
    unsaturation, a reaction with a preformed SICP (liquid or solid) is
    provided for in Class 525, subclasses 54.4+.

    (3)     Note.  See the Glossary under "fatty acid" for a definition of
    "tall oil or derivative".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    526,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 238.3 for polymers
    derived solely from ethylenic reactants at least one of which is a natural
    resin.


CLS 527/601
TXT With polyepoxide reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 600 wherein a polyepoxide reactant is present
    in addition to said natural resin or derivative.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of "polyepoxide".


CLS 527/602
TXT With phenolic reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 600 wherein a phenolic reactant is present in
    addition to said natural resin or derivative.

    (1)     Note.  "Phenolic reactant" is defined in the Glossary.


CLS 527/603
TXT With ethylenically unsaturated reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 602 wherein an ethylenically unsaturated
    reactant is present in addition to said phenolic reactant and said natural
    resin or derivative.


CLS 527/604
TXT With polycarboxylic acid or derivative and a compound having two or more
    hydroxyl groups as reactants:

    Subject matter under subclass 600 wherein a polycarboxylic acid or
    derivative and a polyhydroxyl compound or salt thereof are present in
    addition to said natural resin or derivative.

    (1)     Note.  Said polycarboxylic acid and polyhydroxyl compound can be
    prereacted prior to admixture with the natural resin or derivative.
    However, a solid polyester reacted with a natural resin or derivative is
    classified in Class 525, subclasses 10+.

    (2)     Note.  "Carboxylic acid or derivative" is defined in the Glossary.


CLS 528/
TTL SYNTHETIC RESINS OR NATURAL RUBBERS -- PART OF THE CLASS 520 SERIES

CLS 528/
TXT CLASS SCOPE


    This class (528) provides for all process of preparing polymers from
    reactants wherein at least one reactant is devoid of ethylenic
    unsaturation.  In addition, Class 528 (subclasses 480-503) provides for
    processes of removing contaminates or undesirable materials from a polymer.
     In addition, this subject area (480-503) provides for processes of
    physically treating  polymer-material, or for processes of chemically
    modifying a polymer without the addition of any extraneous material.

    Listed below are rules to be followed in placing patents into and in
    determining the appropriate subclasses to be searched in Class 528.

    (1)     Note.  Classification in Class 528, subclasses 1-425 is on the
    basis of the reactants utilized.  Some general rules to be followed in
    determining such reactants are:

    (a)     Process claim recites preparing an intermediate which is then
    reacted in a further step in preparing an additional intermediate

            A + BC (Intermediate)
    C (Intermediate) + D solid final product.  In this case, the reactants are
    A, B, and D.  If reactant D is first appearing in the schedule array, there
    is no necessary cross-referencing to A, B, or to the intermediate C;
    however, if A or B is first appearing then a cross-reference should be
    placed in the subclass providing for C.

    (b)     Process claim starts with intermediate C, i.e., no positive
    preparation step claimed for intermediate C.  Reaction calls for C + D
    solid final product.  In this case, reactants are C and D and
    classification is on the basis of the first reactant appearing in the
    schedule array.  See (m) for classification of an intermediate condensation
    product.

    (c)     Patentee claims polymer C. Examiner or searcher must look to the
    disclosure to see reactants utilized.

    (d)     A liquid polymer which is exposed to an after treatment step is
    classified as a reactant.

    (e)     When the claims and disclosures are silent as to whether the
    polymer treated is a liquid or solid, the polymeric material is to be
    regarded as a liquid and therefore as a reactant.

    (f)     When the claims are silent as to whether the polymer prepared is a
    solid or liquid and the disclosure is alternative, disclosing both solid
    and liquid materials, original classification is on the basis of general
    rules of schedule hierarchy and the alternative species is mandatorily
    cross-referenced.

    (g)     When the claims are drawn to alternative claimed subject matter
    involving solid and liquid polymers, original classification is appropriate
    on the basis of general rules of schedule hierarchy and the alternative
    species is mandatorily cross-referenced.

    (h)     Where there are generic claims presented (i.e., alternative)as well
    as species claims such species claims will generally control for
    classification purposes over the generic presented claims.

    (i)     Markush claims of A or B are regarded as individual species and
    classification is appropriate on the basis of general rules of schedule
    hierarchy.

    (j)     Claims which are drawn to an intermediate condensation product as a
    reactant wherein applicant alleges indefinite structure for the
    condensation product, are classified on the basis of the reactants utilized
    in preparing the intermediate condensation product.

            Urea-formaldehyde, phenol-formaldehyde, and methylol melamine are
    considered as being indefinite materials and are classified as urea +
    formaldehyde, phenol + formaldehyde, and melamine + formaldehyde.

            The reaction of a urea-formaldehyde condensation material +
    melamine product to yield product is C is classified on the basis of either
    urea, formaldehyde, or melamine, depending upon which is the
    first-appearing reactant provided in the schedule array.

            If, however, the intermediate condensation product is of such
    definiteness as to be definable by applicant as a chemical compound, e.g.,
    ester, polyester, polyether, polyamide, etc., such intermediate will be
    viewed as a compound and classified accordingly.  An example of the
    aforementioned concept is as follows:  Applicant starts with a (C)
    polyester prepared by reacting A + B.  (C)polyester + isocyanate (D)---
    polymer (E).  Reactants are C and D and claim is cross-referenced to A and
    B if desired. If applicant identifies the final reactant product only in
    terms of the reactants necessary to produce such reactant product, e.g.,
    urea-formaldehyde, etc., classification is to be made on the basis of the
    reactants recited.

    (k)     In all cases where doubt exists as to whether a material that is
    present during a reaction is a reactant or a nonreactant, i.e., specified
    material, such doubt has been resolved by looking at the material as if it
    were a reactant.

    (l)     Applicants' statements as to functions of materials, e.g.,
    catalyst, reactant, solvent, etc., are to be taken literally and to be
    followed.  An exception to the preceding rule is in those subclasses where
    specified rules are enumerated.  If the Examiner has any doubts as to
    statements of functions, such doubts can be resolved by adequate cross-
    referencing.  A specific exception to the rule enumerated above regarding
    applicants' statements is the question as to whether a material is a solid
    resin for the particular chemical modification subclasses which are
    provided in the schedule.  In those cases where the claims are silent, the
    Examiner may resolve the question by looking at the total disclosure of the
    patent.

    (m)     Classification into subclasses 1-425 is primarily on the basis of
    reactant utilized.  It is possible, however, that polymeric products which
    may be identical in structure may be prepared from different reactants, and
    that these reactant may not be claimed or disclosed in the patent being
    classified.  In those instances where a product is claimed which the
    Examiner believes may be formed from reactants which are not disclosed in
    the patent at hand, an optional cross-reference into the nonclaimed or
    disclosed reactant area may be highly desirable and appropriate.

    (2)     Note.  The following rules apply in classifying a claim into Class
    528 in those subclasses of the schedule which provide for processes, i.e.,
    in specified material areas:

    (a)     Patents that claim a product and process, wherein both the product
    and the process are specifically provided for in the schedule, are
    classified in the process area and cross-referenced to the product area.

    (b)     Patents that claim both a provided for product and a process of
    polymerizing, and wherein the product is claimed in process terms, are
    classified on the basis of the process and cross-referenced to the
    first-appearing reactant in the schedule utilized in preparing the polymer.

    (c)     Patents that claim a product solely in process terms are classified
    on the basis of the process, when said process is provided in the schedule
    and cross-referenced to the first-appearing reactant in the schedule
    utilized in preparing the polymer.

    (d)     Patents that claim a product in process terms, and wherein the
    process is not provided, are classified on the basis of the first-appearing
    reactant in the schedule utilized in preparing the polymer.

    (e)     Patents that claim a polymerizable composition or the preparation
    of a polymerizable composition are classified on the basis of the
    first-appearing reactant in the schedule that is part of the polymerizable
    composition.

    (f)     Patents that claim a polymer only are classified on the basis of
    the first-appearing reactant in the schedule that has been used in
    preparing the polymer.

    (g)     Patents that claim merely vulcanizing, curing, or cross-linking or
    a polymer proper for this area, without the presence of a specified
    vulcanizing, curing, or cross-linking agent, or the amount of the chemical
    agent or the vulcanized, cured, or cross-linked product of such a reaction
    are classified on the basis of the first-appearing reactant in the schedule
    that has been polymerized in the preparing the polymer.

    (h)     Patents that claim a polymer which is the result of a degradation
    of a polymer proper for this area, and wherein the degradation has been
    effected in the absence of any chemical agent, are classified on the basis
    of the initial first-appearing reactant in the schedule that has been
    polymerized in preparing the previously formed polymer that is degraded.

    (i)     This class provides for a composition of a polymer proper for this
    class admixed with a broadly claimed nonreactant not identifiable by a
    chemical atom or amount; or for a process of preparing a composition
    wherein the nonreactant material is not identified by a chemical atom or
    amount and wherein the process of forming the composition recites no
    process condition other than mere polymerizing.  (See subclass 1 of Class
    523 for the distinction between that class and this area, and see in
    particular, Note 6, B.).

    (3)     Note.  A reactant for purposes of this subclass is a material which
    occurs in a polymer as a repeating unit and is present in at least three
    units and as used herein, reactant is meant to exclude catalyst residues,
    chain transfer agents, etc.

    (4)     Note.  For purposes of this class, the term "with" under a specific
    reactant subclass requires the presence of the specific reactant with a
    different reactant which meets the parameters set forth by the "with"
    definition.

    (5)     Note.  For purposes of this class, the term "contains" under a
    specific reactant subclass includes the term "with" and merely requires the
    presence of the "contains material".  The required moiety, element, etc.,
    may be in the specific reactant or in an additional reactant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    525,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 242+ for products
    resulting from, or involving a polymer proper for this class reacted with
    an ethylenically unsaturated reactant.




CLS 528/1
TXT Subject matter under Class 520, subclass 1 involving polymers derived from
    a plant-containing material of unknown constitution or processes of
    polymerizing; polymerizable compositions containing a plant material of
    unknown composition or processes of preparing.

    (1)     Note.  The types of plant materials which are proper for this
    subclass are those whose composition and constitution are not sufficiently
    determined to enable their classification in the later subclasses on the
    basis of a particular reactant(s).

    (2)     Note.  Types of materials included herein are nut shell liquors and
    essential oils.  This subclass includes cashew nut shell liquor containing
    unseparated anacardic acid or Cardanol.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass includes derivatives of plant materials which
    are undefinable as to chemical identity.

    (4)     Note.  Materials which are substantially known as to chemical
    composition are excluded from this subclass or indents hereunder and are
    classified below in the schedule on the basis of the first specific
    reactant which is part of the chemical composition.  If in any claim, any
    doubt exists as to whether a composition is of sufficient chemical identity
    so as to be classified as a specific reactant, then such doubt is to be
    resolved by classifying the claim as an original in this area and
    cross-referenced to the appropriate reactant subclass.

    (5)     Note.  A chemical agent for purposes of this subclass is material
    which is added to solid polymer and causes or is present during a process
    wherein a chemical change of the solid polymer is effected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86+,    for Cardanol, anacardic acid or a derivative, tannins or tannic
    acid, cresylic acid, or coal tar extracts as reactants.


CLS 528/2
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein material derived from a cashew
    plant and a sulfur-containing material are reactants.


CLS 528/3
TXT Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein material derived from a cashew
    plant and an aldehyde or derivative are reactants.

    (1)     Note.  See this class (528), subclass 230 for a definition of the
    term "aldehyde derivative", and see the GLOSSARY for a definition of the
    term "aldehyde".


CLS 528/4
TXT Subject matter under Class 520, subclass 1 involving polymer products
    derived from a boron-containing reactant wherein at least one atom of boron
    is bonded directly to a hydrogen or carbon atom or processes of
    polymerizing; polymerizable compositions containing as a reactant a
    compound of boron wherein boron is directly bonded to an atom of hydrogen
    or carbon or processes of preparing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    480+,   for processes of preparing a polymer not involving a chemical
    modification of the polymer, by the addition of a material thereto, and for
    chemically modifying material other than the polymer.  Subclasses 480+ also
    provide for processes of admixing with a broadly claimed nonreactant
    material. (See subclass 1 of Class 523 for the distinction between that
    class and this area, and see in particular, Note 6, B.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    526,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubber, subclass 239 for a polymer
    derived from a boron-containing ethylenic reactant as sole monomer, or for
    a boron-containing interpolymer wherein all of the reactants used in
    preparing the polymer are ethylenically unsaturated.


CLS 528/5
TXT Subject matter under subclass 4 wherein the boron-containing   reactant
    having   a  or   bond also contains a silicon atom.


CLS 528/6
TXT Subject matter under subclass 4 wherein the boron-containing reactant
    having a  or  bond also contains a phosphorus atom.


CLS 528/7
TXT Subject matter under subclass 4 wherein the boron-containing reactant
    having a   or  bond also contains a nitrogen atom.


CLS 528/8
TXT Subject matter under subclass 4 wherein the boron-containing reactant
    having a or

             bond also contains at least one atom of oxygen directly bonded to
    the boron atom of the or  containing moiety.


CLS 528/9
TXT Subject matter under Class 520, subclass 1, involving polymer products
    derived from a heavy metal or aluminum-containing reactant wherein at least
    one atom of a heavy metal or aluminum is bonded directly to an atom of
    hydrogen or carbon or processes of polymerizing; polymerizable compositions
    containing as a reactant a compound of a heavy metal or aluminum wherein
    the heavy metal or aluminum atom is directly bonded to a hydrogen or carbon
    atom or processes of preparing.

    (1)     Note.  Heavy metal denotes a metal atom having a specific gravity
    greater than four.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    395,    for a polymer derived from a heavy metal-or aluminum-containing
    reactant.

    480+,   for processes of preparing a polymer not involving a chemical
    modification of the polymer, by the addition of a material thereto, and for
    chemically modifying material other than the polymer.  Subclasses 480+ also
    provide for processes of admixing with a broadly claimed nonreactant
    material. (See subclass 1 of Class 523 for the distinction between that
    class and this area, and see in particular, Note 6, B.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    526,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 240+ for a polymer
    derived from a metal-containing ethylenic reactant as sole monomer or for a
    metal-containing interpolymer wherein all of the reactants used in
    preparing the polymer are ethylenically unsaturated.


CLS 528/10
TXT Subject matter under Class 520, subclass 1, involving polymer products
    derived from a silicon-containing reactant wherein at least one atom of
    silicon is bonded directly to an atom of hydrogen or carbon or processes of
    polymerizing; polymerizable compositions containing as a reactant a
    compound of silicon wherein a silicon atom is directly bonded to a hydrogen
    or carbon atom or processes of preparing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    480+,   for processes of preparing a polymer not involving a chemical
    modification of the polymer, by the addition of a material thereto, and for
    chemically modifying material other than the polymer.  Subclasses 480+ also
    provide for processes of admixing with a broadly claimed nonreactant
    material. (See subclass 1 of Class 523 for the distinction between that
    class and this area, and see in particular, Note 6, B.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    526,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubber, subclass 279 for a polymer
    derived from a silicon-containing ethylenic reactant as sole monomer or for
    a silicon-containing inter-polymer wherein all of the reactants used in
    preparing the polymer are ethylenically unsaturated.


CLS 528/12
TXT Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein a R3SiH or R3Si-CR3 reactant is
    polymerized in the presence of a specified material.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for an explanation of the term "specified
    material".

    (2)     Note.  Silicones or polysiloxanes defined by the formula RnSiO

            wherein R is C or H are considered to be polymers and are proper
    for this area.

    (3)     Note.  An organopolysiloxane as a reactant is considered as having
    sufficient structure to be classified as a silicon reactant containing two
    or more silicon atoms (note subclasses 33+).


CLS 528/13
TXT Subject matter under subclass 12 wherein the specified material is
    elemental boron or a boron-containing compound.


CLS 528/14
TXT Subject matter under subclass 12 wherein the specified material is an
    elemental metal or metal-containing compound.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the term "metal".


CLS 528/15
TXT Subject matter under subclass 14 wherein the metal atom is a Group VIII
    metal atom, i.e., Fe, Co, Ni, Ru, Pd, Os, Ir, Pt, Rh.


CLS 528/16
TXT Subject matter under subclass 14 wherein the specified material contains a
    Group IIIA metal atom in elemental or compound form, i.e., Al, Ga, In, Ti.


CLS 528/17
TXT Subject matter under subclass 14 wherein the specified material contains a
    Group IVB metal atom in elemental or compound form, i.e., Ti, Zr, Hf.


CLS 528/18
TXT Subject matter under subclass 14 wherein the specified material contains a
    Group IVA metal atom in elemental or compound form, i.e., Ge, Sn, Pb.


CLS 528/19
TXT Subject matter under subclass 14 wherein the specified material contains a
    heavy metal atom in elemental or compound form.

    (1)     Note.  Heavy metal denotes a metal atom having a specific gravity
    greater than four.


CLS 528/20
TXT Subject matter under subclass 12 wherein the specified material contains an
    ether, alcohol, or salt thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the term "ether" or
    "alcohol".


CLS 528/21
TXT Subject matter under subclass 12 wherein the specified material is a
    nitrogen-containing compound.


CLS 528/22
TXT Subject matter under subclass 21 wherein silicon and nitrogen are part of
    the same compound.


CLS 528/23
TXT Subject matter under subclass 12 wherein the specified material contains at
    least one atom of phosphorus or sulfur.


CLS 528/24
TXT Subject matter under subclass 12 wherein the specified material contains a
    compound having at least one -O-O (peroxy) group.


CLS 528/25
TXT Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein a polymer has been derived from at
    least one or containing material and at least one reactant which is an
    organic compound and which organic compound is devoid of any silicon atom.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass, for example, would include the reaction
    between two or containing reactants and at least one organic silicon-free
    reactant.


CLS 528/26
TXT Subject matter under subclass 25 wherein at least one silicon-free organic
    reactant contains a carboxylic acid group or is a derivative thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for the definition of the term "carboxylic acid
    or derivative thereof".

    (2)     Note.  See this class (528), subclass 271 for the definition of the
    term "carboxylic acid derivative.


CLS 528/26.5
TXT Reactant which is a fatty acid glycerol ester, a fatty acid or salt derived
    from a naturally occurring glyceride, tall oil, or a fatty acid derived
    from tall oil:Subject matter under subclass 26 wherein said silicon-free
    reactant is a fatty acid glycerol ester, a fatty acid or salt derived from
    a naturally occurring glyceride, tall oil, or a fatty acid derived from
    tall oil.

    (1)     Note.  See the GLOSSARY under "fatty acid" for a definition of the
    terms used herein.


CLS 528/27
TXT Subject matter under subclass 25 wherein at least one silicon-free organic
    reactant contains a heterocyclic ring.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for the definition of the term "heterocyclic
    ring".


CLS 528/28
TXT Subject matter under subclass 25 wherein at least one silicon-free organic
    reactant is a nitrogen-containing compound.


CLS 528/29
TXT Subject matter under subclass 25 wherein at least one silicon-free organic
    reactant is an alcohol or alcoholate thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for the definition of the term "alcohol".


CLS 528/30
TXT Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein at least one or containing
    reactant having a polyvalent atom which is other than carbon, oxygen, or
    nitrogen, e.g., sulfur, phosphorus, etc.


CLS 528/31
TXT Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein the silicon-containing reactant
    possesses at least one bond.


CLS 528/32
TXT Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein the  containing reactant possesses
    at least one ethylenically unsaturated group.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for the definition of the term "ethylenically
    unsaturated".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    526,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 279 for a polymer
    derived from an ethylenically unsaturated silicon-containing reactant as
    sole monomer or for a silicon-containing interpolymer wherein all of the
    reactants used in preparing the polymer are ethylenically unsaturated.


CLS 528/33
TXT Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein a  containing reactant possesses
    at least two silicon atoms.


CLS 528/34
TXT Subject matter under subclass 33 wherein a  containing compound possessing
    at least two silicon atoms is reacted with a silicon compound containing a
    single silicon atom.


CLS 528/35
TXT Subject matter under subclass 33 wherein at least two silicon atoms of a
    containing compound are joined by a single carbon atom, by a carbon chain,
    or by a chain composed only of carbon and oxygen atoms.


CLS 528/36
TXT Subject matter under subclass 33 wherein a   containing compound with at
    least two silicon atoms contains a carbon-to-halogen bond and which carbon
    atom is not double bonded to an oxygen atom.


CLS 528/37
TXT Subject matter under subclass 33 wherein a   containing compound possesses
    at least two silicon atoms with at least one silicon atom as ring member of
    a nonhetero-cyclic ring, e.g., cyclic trisiloxane, etc.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for the definition of the term "heterocyclic
    ring".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     for a cyclic silicon reactant wherein two or more silicon atoms in
    the ring are joined by carbon atoms.


CLS 528/38
TXT Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein the  containing reactant possesses
    at least one amino-nitrogen atom.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for the definition of the term "amine".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for a nitrogen-containing and -Si-C- containing reactant wherein
    the nitrogen atom exists solely therein either as a carboxylic acid amide
    or as a carboxylic acid nitrile, (-C=N).


CLS 528/39
TXT Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein a  containing material is reacted
    with at least one silicon compound which is devoid  of any bond, e.g.,
    SiCl4, Si(OR)4, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for the interaction of a Si-H-containing compound and a silicon
    compound which is devoid of any   bond.


CLS 528/40
TXT Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein a  containing compound contains at
    least one fused- or bridged-ring system or contains at least one ring
    composed solely of carbon atoms which is nonaromatic.

    (1)     Note.  A bridged- or fused-ring system for purposes of this
    subclass requires that a given ring system be attached at two different
    nuclear atoms of its system to an atom or chain of atoms which, taken
    together with the two nuclear atoms, forms an additional ring structure.


CLS 528/41
TXT Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein the  containing reactant contains
    at least one carboxylic acid group or is a derivative thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for the definition of the term "carboxylic
    acid".

    (2)     Note.  See this class (528), subclass 271 for definition of the
    term "carboxylic acid derivative".


CLS 528/42
TXT Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein the  containing compound possesses
    a carbon-to-halogen bond and which carbon atom bonded to the halogen atom
    is other than as a  carbonyl carbon atom, e.g., halo.


CLS 528/43
TXT Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein the    containing reactant
    possesses at least one aromatic group therein.


CLS 528/44
TXT Subject matter under Class 520 subclass 1 involving polymers derived from a
    reactant containing a -N=C=X group wherein X is a chalcogen atom (i.e., O,
    S, Se, or Te) or processes of polymerizing; polymerizable compositions
    containing as a reactant a compound having the general formula R-N=C=X
    wherein X is a chalcogen or processes of preparing a polymerizable
    composition.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also provides for those functional derivatives
    of isocyanates which are generally known as blocked, masked, or hidden
    isocyanates.  These materials are those which revert on heating to the
    -N=C=X group (e.g., urethanes or ureides of phenols, alkanols, lactams,
    oximes, etc.)

    (2)     Note.  Where a -N=C=X group is produced by an in situ reaction or a
    decomposition reaction (other than blocked, masked, or hidden isocyanates),
    those patents have been placed as originals in subclass which provides for
    the compound prior to its decomposition or on the basis of the reactants
    undergoing the in situ reaction, e.g., adiponitrile, carbonates, or
    oxalates, and see, in particular, this class (528) subclasses 370+.

    (3)     Note.  Polonium is excluded from this subclass as being a chalcogen.

    (4)     Note.  As used throughout this subclass any reference to X, e.g.,
    -XH-C-XH, etc., connotes oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    480+,   for processes of preparing a polymer not involving a chemical
    modification of the polymer, by the addition of a material thereto, and for
    chemically modifying material other than the polymer.  Subclasses 480+ also
    provide for processes of admixing with a broadly claimed nonreactant
    material. (See subclass 1 of Class 523 for the distinction between that
    class and this area, and see in particular, Note 6, B.)


CLS 528/45
TXT Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein at least one material having a
    -N=C=X group which has been rendered inert by conversion to an inactive
    group (e.g., blocked, masked, or hidden) is utilized as a reactant.

    (1)     Note.  The reaction process usually involves heating the reactant
    which thereby reverts to a -N=C=X-containing reactant.

    (2)     Note.  The -N=C=X group which has been rendered inert is usually in
    the form of a urethan group


CLS 528/48
TXT Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein a -N=C=X-containing reactant,
    wherein X is a chalcogen atom, i.e., O, S, Se, or Te, is polymerized in the
    presence of a specified material.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for an explanation of the term "specified
    material".

    (2)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass, a compound having a single
    -C-XH, -C-NH2

            -C-NHR, or  (X is chalcogen) is always considered to be a
    nonreactant.

                    Similarly, a compound having a single  group is considered
    as a nonreactant except where the compound is a fatty acid or salt derived
    from a naturally occurring glyceride, tall oil, or a fatty acid derived
    from tall oil, in which case, if the compound is a reactant it is
    considered proper for Class 528, subclass 74.5.

    (3)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass a compound having two or more
    or  (X is chalcogen) or combination of functional groups is always
    considered to be a reactant.


CLS 528/49
TXT Subject matter under subclass 48 wherein the specified material contains a
    compound having a single   C-XH,   C-NH2,   C-NH-, or   group (X is
    chalcogen).


CLS 528/50
TXT Subject matter under subclass 48 wherein the specified material contains a
    compound having at least one -O-O- group, i.e., peroxide, etc.


CLS 528/51
TXT Subject matter under subclass 48 wherein the specified material contains at
    least one atom of phosphorus.


CLS 528/52
TXT Subject matter under subclass 48 wherein the specified material contains at
    least one nitrogen-containing organic compound.


CLS 528/53
TXT Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein the organic nitrogen-containing
    compound possesses at least one trivalent nitrogen atom which is bonded to
    three atoms of carbon i.e.,(  C )3N


CLS 528/54
TXT Subject matter under subclass 53 wherein the nitrogen compound whose
    nitrogen atom is bonded to three atoms of carbon, contains a fused- or
    bridged-ring system, e.g., triethylene diamine, etc.

    (1)     Note.  A bridged- or fused-ring system for purposes of this
    subclass requires that a ring system be attached at two different atoms of
    its nuclear skeleton to an atom or chain of atoms which, when taken
    together with the nuclear atoms, forms an additional ring structure.


CLS 528/55
TXT Subject matter under subclass 48 wherein the specified material contains at
    least one metal atom.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for the definition of the term "metal".


CLS 528/56
TXT Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein the specified material contains a
    transition metal atom.

    (1)     Note.  Transition metal is limited to elements of atomic numbers
    21-29, 39-47, 57-79, and 89 and higher, but does not include Zn, Cd, or Hg.


CLS 528/57
TXT Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein the specified material contains at
    least one atom of Group IA or Group IIA metal atom.

    (1)     Note.  Group IA metal atoms are limited to Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs, Fr.
    Group IIA metal atoms are limited to Be, Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba, Ra.


CLS 528/58
TXT Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein the specified material contains
    tin (At. No. 50).


CLS 528/59
TXT Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein the -N=C=X (X is chalcogen)
    reactant contains at least two  groups.

    (1)     Note.  Patents for the most part herein are drawn to the after
    treatment of a liquid prepolymer having terminal -N=C=X groups.

    (2)     Note.  The addition of materials to a prepolymer intermediate
    characterized by terms such as chain extenders, chain-lengthening material,
    cross-linking or curing agents, is not sufficient absent an amount of a
    material of chemical identity of added material (chemical identity is
    identical to what is required of a specified material).

    (3)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass a carboxylic acid anhydride is
    considered as having two free carboxylic acid groups.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67      through 85,  for products and processes where a prepolymer is
    inherently prepared in an ongoing polymerization reaction and is
    subsequently modified, but where no intent has been made to recognize or
    identify the prepolymer intermediate.


CLS 528/60
TXT Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein a material containing at least one
    -N=C=X (X  is chalcogen) group and two or more  groups is reacted with a
    material which contains a compound having three or  more -XH, NH, -NH2,
    C=NH or  groups or contains a compound having a combination of three or
    more of these groups.

    (1)     Note.  In all cases each of the functional derivatives  -XH,
    NH,-NH2, C=NH,must be directly bonded to a carbon atom.  It is permissible,
    however, for these functional derivatives to be bonded to different carbon
    atoms or to the same carbon atom.  A compound having three functional
    derivatives bonded to a single carbon atom meets the requirement of this
    subclass.  An anhydride formed from two carboxylic acids is considered for
    purposes of this subclass as having two  groups.


CLS 528/61
TXT Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein a material containing at least one
    -N=C=X (X  is chalcogen) group and two or more groups is reacted with a
    compound which contains two nitrogen atoms as -NH, -NH2, or =NH groups or a
    combination thereof.

    (1)     Note.  In all cases each of the functional derivatives, i.e., -NH,
    =NH, or -NH2, must be directly bonded to different carbon atoms or to the
    same carbon atom.  A single compound having two functional groups bonded to
    a single carbon atom meets the requirements of this subclass.


CLS 528/62
TXT Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein the reactant which contains two
    -NH, =NH, or -NH2 groups also contains a heterocyclic ring.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for the definition of the term "heterocyclic
    ring".


CLS 528/63
TXT Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein the -NH, NH2, or =NH reactant
    contains at least one halogen atom.


CLS 528/64
TXT Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein the -NH, NH2, or =NH reactant
    contains a cyclic ring is composed solely of carbon atoms.


CLS 528/65
TXT Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein a material containing at least one
    -N=C=X (X is chalcogen) group and two or more groups is reacted with a
    compound which has two -XH groups.

    (1)     Note.  In all cases the -XH functional group must be directly
    bonded to a carbon atom.  A single carbon atom may be bonded to more than
    one -XH group and such a compound would meet the requirements of this
    subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The carbon atom bonded to the -XH group cannot be double to
    a chalcogen atom.


CLS 528/66
TXT Subject matter under subclass 65 wherein the reactant containing two -XH
    groups also contains at least two C-X-C or at least two carboxylic acid
    ester groups.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes hydroxyl terminated polyesters or
    polyethers as reactants.


CLS 528/67
TXT Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein at least two reactants containing
    a -N=C=X (X is chalcogen) group are polymerized.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are those conventional
    commercial compositions which are mixtures of toluene discoyanate (e.g., 2,
    4 and 2, 6 TDi, 20/80 percent and 35/65 percent, etc.).  However, mixtures
    of stereo and position isomers are included herein if proportions are
    recited.


CLS 528/68
TXT Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein a compound having at least one
    -N=C=X (X is chalcogen) group is reacted with at least one compound which
    contains two or more NH, -NH2, or  C=NH groups or a combination of two or
    more of these groups and wherein the  NH, -NH2, or  C=NH group-containing
    reactant plus any other  reactant is devoid of any group.

    (1)     Note.  In all cases each of the functional derivatives, i.e.,  NH,
    C=NH, -NH2, must be directly bonded to the same or different carbon atom. A
    compound having a single carbon atom which is bonded to more would than one
    -NH2, >NH, or >C=NH group would meet the requirements of this subclass.


CLS 528/69
TXT Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein at least one reactant contains
    only one -N=C=X group (X is chalcogen).


CLS 528/70
TXT Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein at least one reactant contains
    flourine.


CLS 528/71
TXT Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein at least one reactant contains a
    salt group.


CLS 528/72
TXT Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein at least one contains phosphorus.


CLS 528/73
TXT Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein at least one reactant contains a
    heterocyclic ring.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for the definition of the term "heterocyclic
    ring".

    (2)     Note.  Reactants are classified herein only if a positive
    recitation is noted that a reactant contains a heterocyclic group (e.g.,
    reactants prepared from a heterocyclic material wherein the heterocyclic
    group has been destroyed would be classified elsewhere it is unambiguous
    from the specification of the patent that some heterocyclic group still
    exists in the reactant.

    (3)     Note.  Included herein but not limited to the following examples
    are oxirane, aziridine, triazine, cyclic anhydrides, etc.


CLS 528/74
TXT Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein at least one reactant contains a
    fused or bridged ring system.

    (1)     Note.  A bridged- or fused-ring system for purposes of this
    subclass requires that a ring system be attached at two different atoms of
    its nuclear skeleton to an atom or chain of atoms which when taken together
    with the nuclear atoms forms an additional ring structure.


CLS 528/74.5
TXT Reactant which is a fatty acid glycerol ester, a fatty acid or salt derived
    from a naturally occurring glyceride tall oil, or a fatty acid derived from
    tall oil:

    Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein there is at least one reactant
    which is a fatty acid glycerol ester; a fatty acid or salt derived form a
    naturally occurring glyceride; or tall oil, or a fatty acid derived from
    tall oil.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY under "fatty acid" for definition of the term
    used herein.


CLS 528/75
TXT Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein at least one reactant contains an
    ethylenically unsaturated group.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for the definition of the term "ethylenically
    unsaturated".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    526,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 288 and 310+,
    respectively, for a polymer derived from an ethylenically unsaturated
    -N=C=S or -N=C=O-containing reactant as sole monomer or for an interpolymer
    derived from only ethylenically unsaturated reactants wherein at least one
    of said reactants contains a -N=C=S or -N=C=O group.


CLS 528/76
TXT Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein a material containing two or more
    -N=C=X (X is chalcogen) groups is reacted with a compound having two or
    more  or  groups and wherein the carbon atoms bonded to oxygen or sulfur
    atom are not double bonded to any oxygen, selenium, or tellurium atom.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass a compound having the
    structure  is considered as having two  groups.


CLS 528/77
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 wherein the   or    reactant contains at
    least three -XH groups.

    (1)     Note.  In all cases the -XH functional group must be directly
    bonded to a carbon atom.  A compound having a single carbon atom which is
    bonded to three -XH groups would meet requirements of this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The carbon atom bonded to the -XH group cannot be double
    bonded to a chalcogen atom.


CLS 528/78
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 wherein the   or    reactant contains at
    least one nitrogen atom which is other than C-NH,  C-NH2, or  C=NH group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes tertiary amines.


CLS 528/79
TXT Subject matter under subclass 76 wherein the    or    reactant contains a
    cyclic ring which is composed soley of carbon atoms.


CLS 528/80
TXT Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein a material containing two or more
    -N=C=X (X is chalcogen) groups is reacted with a    compound having two or
    more  groups and which compound is devoid of any C-NH-,  C=NH, or  C-NH2
    groups.

    (1)     Note.  In all cases the  functional group must be bonded directly
    to a carbon atom.  A compound having a single carbon atom which is bonded
    to two or more  groups would meet the requirements of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     for (a) polymers derived from a reactant having two or more -N=C=X
    groups which reactant contains two or more groups and which contains at
    least one  C-NH-, C-NH2, or  C=NH group, or (b) a polymer derived from a
    reactant having two or more -N=C=X groups and a reactant having a  group.


CLS 528/81
TXT Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the  reactant contains at least
    three -XH groups.

    (1)     Note.  In all cases the -XH groups must be bonded to a carbon atom.
     A compound having a carbon atom which is bonded to three or more -XH
    groups would meet the requirements of this subclass.  The carbon atom
    bonded to the -XH group cannot be double bonded to a chalcogen atom.


CLS 528/82
TXT Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the reactant contains at least one
    trivalent nitrogen atom which is bonded to three atoms of carbon.


CLS 528/83
TXT Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the    reactant has been derived
    from only a dicarboxylic acid or derivative and only a glycol or alcoholate
    derivative.

    (1)     Note.  See this class (528), subclass 271 for the definition of the
    term "dicarboxylic acid or derivative", and see GLOSSARY for the definition
    of the term "alcohol".

    (2)     Note.  Included herein are mixtures of dicarboxylic acids and
    mixtures of glycols.


CLS 528/84
TXT Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein a material containing two or more
    -N=C=X (X is chalcogen) groups is reacted with a compound having two or
    moregroups.

    (1)     Note.  In all cases the  functional group must be bonded directly
    to a carbon atom.  A compound having a single carbon atom which is bonded
    to two or more groups would meet the requirements of this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass a compound having a   group is
    considered as having  twogroups and is considered proper for this subclass.


CLS 528/85
TXT Subject matter under subclass 44 wherein a material containing two or more
    -N=C=X (X is chalcogen) groups is reacted with a compound having two or
    more -XH groups.

    (1)     Note.  In all cases the -XH functional group must be bonded
    directly to a carbon atom.  A compound having a single carbon atom bonded
    to two or more -XH groups would meet the requirements of this subclass.
    The carbon atom bonded to the -XH group cannot be double bonded to a
    chalcogen atom.


CLS 528/86
TXT Subject matter under Class 520, subclass 1 involving polymers derived from
    a phenol, phenol ether, inorganic phenolate and processes of polymerizing;
    polymerizable compositions containing a phenol, phenol ether, inorganic
    phenolate reactant and processes of preparing a polymerizable composition.

    (1)     Note.



    (A)     A phenol for purposes of this subclass requires one or more -OH
    groups directly bonded to a nuclear carbon atom of a substituted or
    unsubstituted benzene ring, which benzene ring can be an individual benzene
    ring or can be part of a polycyclic ring system.



    (B)     A phenol ether for purposes of this subclass requires one or more
    -O-C- groups wherein the oxygen atom of the -O-C- group is directly bonded
    to a nuclear carbon atom of a substituted or unsubstituted benzene ring and
    wherein the carbon atom of the -O-C- group is not double bonded to oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium or triple bonded to nitrogen.  The benzene
    ring may be an individual benzene ring or may be part of a polycyclic ring
    system.  The following examples of phenol ethers are within the definition
    set out above:

      (1)   The -O-C- group may itself be part of a cyclic ring system, e.g.,

     , etc.

      (2)   The carbon of the -O-C- group may be a ring atom of a cyclic or

                               ,etc.
    aromatic ring, e.g.,

      (3)   The carbon of the -O-C- group may be a terminal carbon atom, e.g.,


    or may be the carbon atom of a chain, e.g.,

    (C)     An inorganic phenolate is an inorganic salt of a phenol (see phenol
    (1) above) wherein the hydrogen atom of a -OH group is replaced by a metal
    or an inorganic group.

    (2)     Note.  The term phenolic reactant as used throughout this subclass
    is intended to include the subject matter enumerated in the (1) Note above.

    (3)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass tannin or tannic is considered
    to be a poly-hydroxy polycyclic carboxy-containing phenol.

    (4)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass cresylic acid is considered to
    be cresol.

    (5)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass coal tar extracts are
    considered to be an indefinable mixture of ingredients some of which are
    phenolic in nature and are classified in this area on the basis of the
    co-reactant, if any.

    (6)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass Cardanol and anacardic acids
    are considered to be phenols.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for a cashew nut shell liquor containing anacardic acid or Cardanol.

    480+,   for processes of preparing a polymer not involving a chemical
    modification of the polymer, by the addition of a material thereto, and for
    chemically modifying material other than the polymer.  Subclasses 480+ also
    provide for processes of admixing with a broadly claimed nonreactant
    material. (See subclass 1 of Class 523 for the distinction between that
    class and this area, and see in particular, Note 6, 8.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    526,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 313 for a polymer
    derived from an ethylenically unsaturated phenol, phenol ether, or
    inorganic phenolate as sole monomer or as interpolymer derived from only
    ethylenically unsaturated reactants wherein at least one of the
    ethylenically unsaturated reactants contains a phenol, phenol ether, or
    inorganic phenolate group.


CLS 528/87
TXT Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein a polymer contains both a phenol,
    phenol ether, or inorganic phenolate group and at least one 1, 2-epoxy
    group, or wherein a phenol, phenol ether, or inorganic phenolate-containing
    material is reacted with a 1, 2-epoxy-containing material.

    (1)     Note.  A 1, 2-epoxy-containing material is a compound having a
    three-membered heterocyclic ring composed only of one oxygen and two carbon
    atoms.


CLS 528/88
TXT Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein a phenol, phenol ether, or
    inorganic phenolate which contains at least one 1, 2-epoxy is polymerized
    in the presence of a specified material, or wherein a phenol, phenol ether,
    or inorganic phenolate is polymerized with a 1, 2-epoxy-containing reactant
    in the presence of a specified material.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for an explanation of the term "specified
    material".


CLS 528/89
TXT Subject matter under subclass 88 wherein the specified material contains
    phosphorus atom(s).


CLS 528/90
TXT Subject matter under subclass 88 wherein the specified material contains
    sulfur atom(s).


CLS 528/91
TXT Subject matter under subclass 88 wherein the specified material contains
    boron atom(s).


CLS 528/92
TXT Subject matter under subclass 88 wherein the specified material contains a
    polyvalent metal atom.

    (1)     Note.  Polyvalent material is limited to elements of atomic numbers
    4, 12, 13, 20-33, 38-51, 56-84, 88, and higher.


CLS 528/93
TXT Subject matter under subclass 88 wherein the specified material contains a
    nitrogen compound.


CLS 528/94
TXT Subject matter under subclass 93 wherein the specified material contains a
    nitrogen atom as part of a heterocyclic ring.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for the definition of the term "heterocyclic
    ring".


CLS 528/95
TXT Subject matter under subclass 88 wherein the specified material contains a
    Group IA metal atom, i.e., Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs, Fr.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are those substances classified as caustics.


CLS 528/96
TXT Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein the phenol, phenol ether, or
    inorganic phenolate reactant contains at least one heterocyclic group which
    is not a 1, 2-epoxy-containing ring.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the term "heterocyclic
    ring".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    101,    for a phenol, phenol ether, or inorganic phenolate containing as
    the sole heterocyclic ring a 1, 2-epoxy group fused to a carbocyclic ring.

    105,    for a phenol, phenol ether, or inorganic phenolate reactant
    containing only a single 1, 2-epoxy group.


CLS 528/97
TXT Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein the phenol, phenol ether, or
    inorganic phenolate reactant contains a fused or bridged structure, which
    fused structure is other than a 1, 2-epoxy ring which is fused to a ring
    system containing only carbon atoms as ring members.

    (1)     Note.  Fused or bridged ring for purposes of this subclass requires
    that a ring system be attached at two different atoms of its nuclear
    skeleton to an atom or chain of atoms which, when taken together with the
    nuclear atoms, forms an additional ring system.


CLS 528/98
TXT Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein the phenol, phenol ether, or
    inorganic phenolate contains at least three rings and wherein each of said
    rings is composed solely of carbon atoms.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass a ring containing only carbon
    atoms


            wherein a 1, 2-epoxy group is fused directly thereto is considered
    as being a single ring, e.g.,
                  , etc.


CLS 528/99
TXT Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein the phenolic reactant contains at
    least one nitrogen, sulfur, or phosphorus atom.


CLS 528/100
TXT Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein the phenol, phenol ether, or
    inorganic phenolate reactant contains a carboxylic acid group or is a
    derivative thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for the definition of the term "carboxylic
    acid".

    (2)     Note.  See this class (528) subclass 271 for an explanation of the
    term "carboxylic acid derivative".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    96,     for a cyclic anhydride, lactone, lactam, or imide-containing
    phenol, phenol ether or inorganic phenolate reactant.


CLS 528/101
TXT Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein the phenol, phenol ether, or
    inorganic phenolate reactant contains (1) ethylenic unsaturation, or (2)
    contains at least one 1, 2-epoxy group fused to a ring composed solely of
    carbon atoms.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for the definition of the term "ethylenically
    unsaturated".

    (2)     Note.  A fused ring monomer for purposes of this subclass requires
    that a ring composed solely of carbon atoms be attached at two of its
    adjacent nuclear carbon atoms to a single oxygen atom so that the adjoined
    carbons and the oxygen atom form an additional ring structure.


CLS 528/102
TXT Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein at least one halogen atom is
    bonded directly to a nuclear carbon atom of a benzene ring and wherein at
    least one of the nuclear carbon atoms of the same benzene ring is directly
    bonded to an oxygen atom so as to form a phenol, phenol ether, or inorganic
    phenolate.


CLS 528/103
TXT Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein two or more 1, 2-epoxy-containing
    compounds are reactants.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes:



    (a)     Two or more epoxy-containing phenols, phenol ethers, or inorganic
    phenolates or mixtures thereof.



    (b)     A 1, 2-epoxy-containing phenol, phenol ether, or inorganic
    phenolate reacted with a nonphenolic-containing 1, 2-epoxy reactant.



    (c)     A nonepoxy-containing phenolic material reacted with two or more
    non-phenolic 1, 2-epoxy-containing reactants.


CLS 528/103.5
TXT 1, 2-epoxy reactant having at least one carboxylic ester group,
    e.g., eposidized linseed oil, etc.: Subject matter under subclass 103
    wherein at least one 1, 2-epoxy reactant contains one or more carboxylic
    acid ester groups.


CLS 528/104
TXT Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein two or more phenols, phenol
    ethers, or inorganic phenolates or mixtures thereof are reactants.


CLS 528/105
TXT Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein a phenol, phenol ether, or
    inorganic phenolate reactant contains only a single 1, 2-epoxy group
    therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for the interaction of two or more phenolic reactants each
    containing a single 1, 2-epoxy group.


CLS 528/106
TXT Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein a phenol, phenol ether, or
    inorganic phenolate containing two or more 1, 2-epoxy groups is reacted
    with a non-1, 2-epoxy-containing reactant (reactant is devoid of 1, 2-epoxy
    group), or wherein a non-1, 2-epoxy-containing phenol, phenol ether, or
    inorganic phenolate (phenolic material is devoid of a 1, 2-epoxy group) is
    reacted with a single compound having a 1, 2-epoxy group and with at least
    one non-1, 2-epoxy-containing reactant (reactant is devoid of a 1, 2-epoxy
    group).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for two or more 1, 2-epoxy reactants.

    104,    for two or more phenolic reactants.


CLS 528/107
TXT Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein the non-1, 2-epoxy or nonphenolic
    reactant is an aldehyde or derivative.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the term "aldehyde".

    (2)     Note.  See this class (528), subclass 230 for a clarification of
    the term "aldehyde derivative".


CLS 528/108
TXT Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein the non-1, 2-epoxy or nonphenolic
    reactant contains phosphorus.


CLS 528/109
TXT Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein the non-1, 2-epoxy or nonphenolic
    reactant contains sulfur.


CLS 528/110
TXT Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein the non-1, 2-epoxy or nonphenolic
    reactant is an alcohol, oxygen ether, or inorganic alcoholate.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the terms "alcohol" or
    "ether".


CLS 528/111
TXT Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein the non-1, 2-epoxy or nonphenolic
    reactant is a nitrogen-containing alcohol, inorganic alcoholate of a
    nitrogen-containing alcohol, or a nitrogen-containing oxygen ether.


CLS 528/111.3
TXT Non-1, 2-epoxy or nonphenolic reactant which is a dimer or trimer of an
    ethylenically unsaturated aliphatic monocarboxylic acid having at least ten
    atoms; or adduct of said unsaturated monocarboxylic acid with an alpha,
    beta ethylenically unsaturated carboxylic acid or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein said nonepoxy or nonphenolic
    reactant is polycarboxylic acid reactant which is a dimer or trimer of an
    ethylenically unsaturated aliphatic noncarboxylic acid having at least ten
    carbon atoms; or an adduct of said unsaturated monocarboxylic unsaturated
    carboxylic acid or derivative.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of "dimer or trimer of
    aliphatic monocarboxylic acid".


CLS 528/111.5
TXT Non 1, 2-epoxy or nonphenolic reactant which is a fatty acid glycerol
    ester, a fatty acid or salt derived from a naturally occurring glyceride,
    tall oil, or a fatty acid derived from tall oil:

    Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein said non 1, 2-epoxy or
    nonphenolic reactant is a fatty acid glycerol ester, a fatty acid or salt
    derived from a naturally occurring glyceride, tall oil, or fatty acid
    drived from tall oil.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary under "fatty acid" for a definition of the
    terms used herein.


CLS 528/112
TXT Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein the non-1, 2-epoxy or nonphenolic
    reactant is a carboxylic acid, salt thereof, or anhydride thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the term "carboxylic acid".

    (2)     Note.  See this class (528) subclass 271 for a definition of the
    term "carboxylic acid salt or anhydride".


CLS 528/113
TXT Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein in addition to the carboxylic
    acid, salt thereof, or anhydride thereof, there is at least one additional
    non-1, 2-epoxy or nonphenolic reactant which is a nitrogen-containing
    compound.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass may include a mixture of two nonepoxy or
    nonphenolic reactants wherein one is a nitrogen-containing carboxylic acid
    and wherein the other is a non-nitrogen-containing carboxylic acid.


CLS 528/114
TXT Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein the non-1, 2-epoxy or nonphenolic
    reactant is a nitrogen-containing carboxylic acid, a salt of a
    nitrogen-containing carboxylic acid, a nitrogen-containing carboxylic acid
    anhydride, or a nitrogen-containing salt of a non-nitrogen-containing
    carboxylic acid.


CLS 528/115
TXT Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein the non-1, 2-epoxy or nonphenolic
    reactant is at least a mixture of two or more carboxylic acids, salts
    thereof, anhydrides thereof, or is a mixture of at least any two of the
    types of materials enumerated above.


CLS 528/116
TXT Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein the non-1, 2-epoxy or nonphenolic
    reactant is a heterocyclic ring-containing compound.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the term "heterocyclic".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    for a non-1, 2-epoxy or nonphenolic reactant containing a cyclic
    carboxylic acid anhydride group.


CLS 528/117
TXT Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein the non-1, 2-epoxy or nonpenolic
    reactant contains a five-membered heterocyclic ring having at least one
    nitrogen atom as a ring member.


CLS 528/118
TXT Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein the non-1, 2-epoxy or nonphenolic
    reactant contains a six-membered heterocyclic ring having at least one
    nitrogen atom as a ring member.


CLS 528/119
TXT Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein the non-1, 2-epoxy or nonphenolic
    reactant contains at least one atom of nitrogen.


CLS 528/120
TXT Subject matter under subclass 119 wherein the non-1, 2-epoxy or nonphenolic
    material contains at least two nitrogen-containing reactants.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99,     for a nitrogen-containing phenolic reactant.


CLS 528/121
TXT Subject matter under subclass 119 wherein the nitrogen-containing non-1,
    2-epoxy or nonphenolic reactant contains an amino-nitrogen atom.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the term "amine".


CLS 528/122
TXT Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the non-1, 2-epoxy or nonphenlic
    reactant which has an amino-nitrogen atom contains a non-aromatic ring
    composed solely of carbon atoms.


CLS 528/123
TXT Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the non-1, 2-epoxy or nonphenolic
    reactant which has an amino-nitrogen atom contains at least three nitrogen
    atoms.

    (1)     Note.  In counting the number of nitrogen atoms, the nonamino
    groups are counted toward the number of nitrogen atoms required to meet the
    requisite number of three or more nitrogen atoms.


CLS 528/124
TXT Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the non-1, 2-epoxy or nonphenolic
    reactant which contains an amino-nitrogen atom contains at least one
    aromatic ring.


CLS 528/125
TXT Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein a polymer is derived from a
    phenol, phenol ether, or inorganic phenolate which contains a ketone group
    or wherein a phenol, phenol ether, or inorganic phenolate-containing
    material is reacted with a ketone-containing material.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the term "ketone".

    (2)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass a reactant having a  C=C=O
    group is considered as being a ketone (ketene).


CLS 528/126
TXT Subject matter under subclass 125 wherein a phenol, phenol ether, or
    inorganic phenolate which contains at least one ketone group is polymerized
    in the presence of a specified material, or wherein a phenol, phenol ether,
    or inorganic phenolate is polymerized with at least one ketone-containing
    reactant in the presence of a specified material.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for an explanation of the term "specified
    material".


CLS 528/127
TXT Subject matter under subclass 125 wherein at least one phenol, phenol
    ether, or inorganic phenolate containing a ketone group is reacted with an
    aldehyde or derivative which is free of any ketone or phenolic group, or
    wherein a phenol, phenol ether, or inorganic phenolate is reacted with a
    ketone-containing reactant and with an aldehyde or derivative which is
    devoid of any phenolic or ketone groups.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for definition of the term "aldehyde".

    (2)     Note.  See this class (528), subclass 230 for a definition of the
    term "aldehyde derivative", and see the (2) Note thereunder.


CLS 528/128
TXT Subject matter under subclass 125 wherein a phenol, phenol ether, or
    inorganic phenolate is reacted with at least one ketone reactant which is
    devoid of any phenolic group.


CLS 528/129
TXT Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein a polymer is derived from at least
    one phenol, phenol ether, or inorganic phenolate and at least one aldehyde
    or derivative.

    (1)     Note.



    (a)     See GLOSSARY for a definition of the term " aldehyde".



    (b)     Definition for an aldehyde derivative:

     (1)    Compounds having a X-CH2-OH group wherein X is other than a carbon
    or hydrogen (e.g., paraformaldehyde, methyol derivatives of urea, etc.).

     (2)    Heterocyclic compound having only carbon and oxygen as ring members
    in an alternating manner and in equal amount, i.e.,

                   , e.g., trioxane.

     (3)    Hexamethylenetramine (CH2)6N4, known also as methenamine, hexamine,
    formine,

    hexamethyleneamine, and urotropin and its derivatives. A derivative for
    purposes of this subclass requires the basic ring structure of
    hexamethylenetetramine but wherein the hydrogen atoms may have been
    replaced by other atoms.

     (2)    Note.  Compounds having a -CH2OH group bonded to elements other
    then C, H, or oxygen are regarded as being two compounds; for instance, a
    methylol derivative of melamine is regarded as a mixture of melamine and
    formaldehyde, and methylol urea is regarded as being a mixture of urea and
    formaldehyde.

     (3)    Note.  An unspecified novolak or resole is proper for this area in
    that it is a mixture of a phenol and an aldehyde. If a novolak or resole of
    specified structure is claimed as a reactant, then classification is proper
    based on the structure of the specific reactant.

     (4)    Note. For purposes of this subclass a reactant composed of only
    halogen and carbon atoms is considered as being a halogenated carbon and is
    therefore proper for subclass 160.

     (5)    Note.  In subclasses 129-165 it is preferable whenever a liquid
    novolak or resole is utilized as a reactant, to place a cross-reference
    copy into the provided for after-treatment Class 525, Synthetic Resins or
    Natural Rubbers, subclasses 480+ and to regard, for purposes of
    cross-referencing, such liquid reactants as being solids.


CLS 528/137
TXT Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein a phenol, phenol ether, or
    inorganic phenolate is reacted with at least one aldehyde or derivative in
    the presence of a specified material.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for an explanation of the term "specified
    material".


CLS 528/138
TXT Subject matter under subclass 137 wherein the specified material contains
    at least one atom of boron.


CLS 528/139
TXT Subject matter under subclass 137 wherein the specified material contains
    at least one atom of aluminum or of a heavy metal.

    (1)     Note.  Heavy metal denotes a metal atom having a specific gravity
    greater than four.


CLS 528/140
TXT Subject matter under subclass 137 wherein the specified material contains
    at least one atom of a Group IIA metal (i.e., Be, Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139,    for a radium-containing specified material.


CLS 528/141
TXT Subject matter under subclass 137 wherein the specified material contains
    at least one atom of phosphorus.


CLS 528/142
TXT Subject matter under subclass 137 wherein the specified material is an
    alcohol, inorganic alcoholate thereof, or ether.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the term "alcohol" or
    "ether".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139,    for an inorganic alcoholate containing aluminum or a heavy metal
    atom.


CLS 528/143
TXT Subject matter under subclass 137 wherein the specified material contains
    at least one atom of sulfur.


CLS 528/144
TXT Subject matter under subclass 137 wherein the specified material is a
    carboxylic acid, ester thereof, salt thereof, or anhydride thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the term "carboxylic acid".

    (2)     Note.  See this class (528), subclass 271 for a definition of the
    term " carboxylic acid salt or anhydride".


CLS 528/145
TXT Subject matter under subclass 137 wherein the specified material is a
    nitrogen-containing compound.


CLS 528/146
TXT Subject matter under subclass 145 wherein the nitrogen-containing specified
    material contains at least one atom of nitrogen directly bonded to at least
    one atom of carbon.


CLS 528/147
TXT Subject matter under subclass 137 wherein the specified material contains
    at least one atom of a Group IA metal (i.e., Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs, Fr).

    (1)     Note.  The term "caustic or alkali" in a claim is sufficient for a
    material to be considered as a specified material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139,    for a specified material containing radium.


CLS 528/148
TXT Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein a phenol, phenol ether, or
    inorganic phenolate containing a carboxylic acid group or a salt of a
    carboxylic acid group is reacted with an aldehyde or derivative.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the term "carboxylkic acid".

    (2)     Note.  See this class (528), subclass 271 for a definition of the
    term "carboxylic acid salt"


CLS 528/149
TXT Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein a phenol, inorganic phenolate, or
    phenol ether containing at least one nitrogen atom is reacted with an
    aldehyde or derivative.


CLS 528/150
TXT Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein a phenol, inorganic phenolate, or
    phenol ether containing at least one sulfur atom is reacted with an
    aldehyde or derivative.


CLS 528/151
TXT Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein a phenol, inorganic phenolate, or
    phenol ether containing at least one halogen atom which is bonded to a
    nuclear carbon atom of a benzene ring and wherein at least one of the other
    nuclear carbon atoms of the same benzene ring is directly bonded to an
    oxygen atom so as to form a phenol, inorganic phenolate, or phenol ether
    therewith, is reacted with an aldehyde or derivative.


CLS 528/152
TXT Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein a phenol, inorganic phenolate, or
    phenol ether containing at least one ethylenically unsaturated group is
    reacted with at least one aldehyde or derivative.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for the definition of the term "ethylenically
    unsaturated".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    526,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 313, wherein an
    ethylenically unsaturated phenol, inorganic phenolate, or phenol ether is
    the sole reactant, or wherein all of the reactants are ethylenically
    unsaturated.


CLS 528/153
TXT Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein a phenol, inorganic phenolate, or
    phenol ether containing a fused or bridged ring or containing two or more
    individual rings is reacted with an aldehyde or derivative.

    (1)     Note.  Included within the term "two or more individual rings" may
    be a phenolic reactant containing a heterocyclic ring or cycloaliphatic
    ring in addition to the phenolic structure, or a phenolic reactant
    containing two phenolic rings, e.g., diphenyl ether, etc., or a phenolic
    reactant containing an aryl ring in addition to the phenolic ring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154,    for a phenol ether reactant wherein the ether group is not bonded
    to two distinct benzene rings.


CLS 528/154
TXT Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein a phenol ether is reacted with an
    aldehyde or derivative.


CLS 528/155
TXT Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein an aldehyde (1) is reacted with a
    phenol containing two distinct (-OH) groups or two distinct (-O-Salt)
    groups or mixtures of these groups and wherein the two (-OH) groups or two
    (-O-Salt) groups are bonded to two distinct carbon atoms of the same
    benzene ring, or (2) is reacted with two or more phenolic compounds to
    their phenolate salts or mixtures thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153,    for a phenolic reactant containing two distinct benzene rings and
    containing at least one (-OH) or (-O-Salt) group bonded to a nuclear carbon
    atom of a benzene ring.


CLS 528/156
TXT Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein a phenol or inorganic phenolate
    is reacted with at least two distinct aldehydes or derivatives or mixtures
    thereof.


CLS 528/157
TXT Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein a phenol or inorganic phenolate
    is reacted with an ethylenically unsaturated aldehyde or derivative.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the term "ethylenically
    unsaturated".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    526,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 315 for polymers
    wherein an etiologically unsaturated aldehyde is the sole reactant.


CLS 528/158
TXT Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein a phenol or inorganic phenolate
    is reacted with at least one aldehyde or derivative and at least one
    additional phosphorus or sulfur-containing reactant which sulfur or
    phosphorus reactant is not a phenol, inorganic phenolate, or aldehyde or
    derivative thereof.


CLS 528/158.5
TXT With a reactant which is a fatty acid glycerol ester, a fatty acid or salt
    derived from a naturally occurring glyceride, tall oil, or a fatty acid
    derived from a tall oil: Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein there is
    additionally present a fatty acid glycerol ester, a fatty acid or salt
    derived from a naturally occurring glyceride, tall oil, or a fatty acid
    derived from tall oil.

    (1)     Note.  See the GLOSSARY under "fatty acid" for a definition of the
    terms used herein.


CLS 528/159
TXT Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein a phenol or phenolate is reacted
    with an aldehyde or derivative thereof and with an additional ethylenically
    unsaturated reactant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152,    for the reaction of an ethylenically unsaturated phenolic reactant
    and an aldehyde or derivative.

    157,    for the reaction of a phenolic reactant and an ethylenically
    unsaturated aldehyde or derivative.


CLS 528/160
TXT Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein a phenol or inorganic phenolate
    is reacted with an aldehyde or derivative and with an additional reactant
    which is solely composed of carbon and hydrogen atoms, or solely composed
    of only carbon, hydrogen, and halogen atoms.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass a reactant containing only
    carbon and halogen atoms, i.e., perhalo, will be considered as being proper
    for classification herein.


CLS 528/161
TXT Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein a phenol or inorganic phenolate
    is reacted with at least one aldehyde or derivative and with an additional
    reactant which is a carboxylic acid, salt, or a carboxylic acid anhydride
    and which reactant is not a phenol, inorganic phenolate, or an aldehyde or
    a derivative thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the term "carboxylic acid".

    (2)     Note.  See this class (528), subclass 271 for a definition of the
    term "carboxylic acid salt or anhydride".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148,    for a phenolic reactant containing a carboxylic acid or carboxylic
    acid salt group.


CLS 528/162
TXT Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein a phenol or inorganic phenolate
    is reacted with an aldehyde or derivative and with at least one additional
    reactant which contains at least one nitrogen atom which is not a phenol,
    inorganic phenolate, or an aldehyde or derivative.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    149,    for a nitrogen-containing phenolic reactant.


CLS 528/163
TXT Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein the nonphenolic or nonaldehyde or
    derivative nitrogen reactant (1) contains at least one atom of nitrogen as
    a ring atom of a heterocyclic ring, or (2) is a compound having at least
    one nitrogen atom and at least one aromatic ring.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the term "heterocyclic
    ring".


CLS 528/164
TXT Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein the nonphenolic or nonaldehyde or
    derivative nitrogen reactant contains the group.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158,    for a nonphenolic or nonaldehyde reactant containing the   N-C-N
    group.


CLS 528/165
TXT Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein the sole reactants are a phenol
    or inorganic phenolate and an aldehyde or derivative.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    155,    for a polymer from two or more phenolic reactants and at least one
    aldehyde or derivative.

    156,    for a polymer from a single phenolic reactant and two or more
    aldehydes or derivatives.


CLS 528/166
TXT Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein a polymer is derived (1) from
    phenol, phenol ether, or inorganic phenolate reactant containing an
    aluminum or heavy metal atom, or (2) from a phenol, inorganic phenolate, or
    phenol ether and an aluminum or heavy metal-containing reactant.

    (1)     Note.  Heavy metal denotes a metal atom having a specific gravity
    greater than four.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for a heavy metal or aluminum reactant having at least one hydrogen
    to heavy metal or aluminum bond or at least one carbon to heavy metal or
    aluminum bond.


CLS 528/167
TXT Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein a polymer is derived (1) from a
    phenol, phenol ether, or inorganic phenolate reactant containing at least
    one atom of phosphorus, or (2) from a phenol, phenol ether, or inorganic
    phenolate and a phosphorus-containing reactant.


CLS 528/168
TXT Subject matter under subclass 167 wherein a nitrogen-containing compound is
    a reactant.

    (1)     Note.  The nitrogen atom may be in any of the reactants and the
    phosphorus atom may be in any of the other reactants, or they may be in the
    same nonphenolic reactant, or in the same phenolic reactant.


CLS 528/169
TXT Subject matter under subclass 167 wherein a halogen-containing compound is
    a reactant.

    (1)     Note.  The halogen atom may be in any of the reactants and the
    phosphorus atom may be in any of the other reactants, or they may be in the
    same nonphenolic reactant, or in the same phenolic reactant.


CLS 528/170
TXT Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein a polymer is derived (1) from a
    phenol, phenol ether, or inorganic phenolate containing at least one imide
    group, or (2) from a phenol, phenol ether, or inorganic phenolate and an
    imide-containing reactant.

    (1)     Note.  An imide for purposes of this subclass is a compound having
    the general formula:


    wherein X is one or more.


CLS 528/171
TXT Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein a polymer is derived (1) from a
    phenol, phenol ether, or inorganic phenolate containing a sulfur-to-oxygen
    bond, or (2) from a phenol, phenol ether, or an inorganic phenolate and a
    reactant which contains a sulfur-to-oxygen bond.


CLS 528/172
TXT Subject matter under subclass 171 wherein a nitrogen-containing compound is
    a reactant and wherein the nitrogen atom is other than solely as the
    nitrogen atom of a carboxylic acid derivative, i.e., amide, nitrile, or
    lactam.

    (1)     Note.  The nitrogen atom may be in any of the reactants (other than
    solely as carboxylic acid derivatives) and the sulfur-to-oxygen group may
    be in any of the other reactants, or they may be in the same nonphenolic
    reactant, or in the same phenolic reactant.

    (2)     Note.  See this class (528), subclass 271 for the definition of a
    carboxylic acid derivative.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170,    for a phenolic reactant containing an imide group, or for the
    reaction of a phenolic reactant and an amide-containing reactant.

    173,    for a reactant wherein nitrogen is solely part of a carboxylic acid
    amide, nitrile, or lactam.


CLS 528/173
TXT Subject matter under subclass 171 wherein a carboxylic acid or derivative
    is a reactant.

    (1)     Note.  A derivative of a carboxylic acid for purposes of this class
    is limited to esters, amides, imides, lactams, salts, anhydrides, nitriles,
    lactones, and acyl halides.  However, imides have been provided in this
    class (528), subclass 170.  See this class (528), subclass 271 for a
    definition of the term "carboxylic acid or derivative thereof".

    (2)     Note.  The carboxylic acid or derivative may be in any one of the
    reactants and the sulfur-to-oxygen bond may be in any of the other
    reactants, or they may be in the same phenolic or nonphenolic reactant.


CLS 528/174
TXT Subject matter under subclass 171 wherein a reactant contains a
    halogen-containing material (F, Cl, Br, I, At) as a reactant.

    (1)     Note.  The halogen atom may be in any of the reactants and the
    sulfur-to-oxygen group may be in any of the other reactants, or they may be
    in the same nonphenolic reactant, or in the same phenolic reactant.


CLS 528/175
TXT Subject matter under subclass 174 wherein a reactant contains the halo
    group.


CLS 528/176
TXT Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein a phenol, phenol ether, or
    inorganic phenolate is reacted with a polycarboxylic acid or derivative
    thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for the definition of the term "carboxylic
    acid".

    (2)     Note.  See this class (528), subclass 271 for the specific
    definition of the term "carboxylic acid derivative". Note, however, that a
    derivative is limited to a nitrile, ester, anhydride, salt, amide, imide,
    lactam, lactone, and acyl halide.  Certain compounds, however, may have
    more than one function, e.g., a lactone is a species of ester, a lactam is
    a species of an amide.  Compounds which are multifaceted (i.e., more than
    one function) are classified on the basis of the first-appearing term
    provided in the subclass hierarchy.

    (3)     Note.  A polycarboxylic acid reactant for purposes of this subclass
    requires the presence of at least two carboxylic acid groups.  A
    polycarboxylic acid derivative requires at least one carboxylic acid group
    and at least one carboxylic acid derivative, or at least two identical
    carboxyblic acid derivatives, or at least two different carboxylic acid
    derivatives.  See (2) Note above for an explanation of the term
    "derivative".

    (4)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass an anhydride having the
    general formula,  which may be linear or cyclic, is considered as being a
    polycarboxylic acid.  Compounds having both a anhydride and a free
    carboxylic acid group are considered as being a tricarboxylic acid, e.g.,


                  etc., and compounds containing two anhydride groups are
    considered as being a tetracarboxylic acid, e.g.,

                   etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170,    for the reaction of an imide-containing phenolic reactant or for
    the reaction of a phenolic reactant with an imide-containing reactant.


CLS 528/179
TXT Subject matter under subclass 176 wherein a phenol, phenol ether, or
    inorganic phenolate is reacted with at least one reactant which is a
    polycarboxylic acid or polycarboxylic acid derivative in the presence of a
    specified material.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for an explanation of the term "specified
    material".

    (2)     Note.



    (A)     For purposes of this subclass non-reactant materials (specified
    materials) which are present during a polymerization reaction and wherein
    the only metal atoms therein are Group IA (Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs, Fr) or Group
    IIA metal atoms (Be, Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba, Ra) or a mixture thereof, are not
    considered as being specified materials.



     (B)    Compounds which contain at least one Group IA or Group IIA and at
    least one other non-Group IA or non-Group IIA metal atom are proper herein
    and are classified on the basis of the non-Group IA or non-Group IIA metal
    atom.



    (C)     A mixture of a metal-containing compound specifically excluded
    herefrom and another material which can be considered as being a specified
    material, per se, is classified herein on the basis of specified material,
    per se.


CLS 528/180
TXT Subject matter under subclass 179 wherein the specified material contains
    at least one metal atom.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for those elements regarded as being "metals".


CLS 528/181
TXT Subject matter under subclass 180 wherein the specified material contains
    at least one atom of a transition metal.

    (1)     Note.  Transition metal is limited to elements of atomic numbers
    21-29, 39-47, 57-79, 88, and higher.


CLS 528/182
TXT Subject matter under subclass 179 wherein the specified material is a
    nitrogen-containing compound.


CLS 528/183
TXT Subject matter under subclass 176 wherein a nitrogen-containing compound is
    a reactant and wherein at least one nitrogen atom thereof is an
    amino-nitrogen atom.

    (1)     Note.  The amino-nitrogen atom may be in any of the reactants, for
    instance, it may be in the phenolic reactant or in the polycarboxylic acid
    or derivative reactant, or in a nonphenolic or nonpolycarboxylic reactant.

    (2)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the term "amine".


CLS 528/184
TXT Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein a reactant contains both a
    carboxylic acid group or derivative thereof and at least one amino-nitrogen
    atom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188,    for a nonamine-containing tricarboxylic acid or nonamino-containing
    derivative of a tricarboxylic acid, e.g., amide, nitrile, etc.


CLS 528/185
TXT Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein a phenolic reactant contains two
    or more oxygen atoms directly bonded to two distinct aryl nuclear carbon
    atoms of two distinct aryl rings and wherein the bonded oxygen atoms form
    two distinct phenols, phenol ethers, or inorganic phenolates or mixtures
    thereof with the aryl rings to which they are bonded, e.g.,



                    , etc.


CLS 528/186
TXT Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein at least one reactant contains
    three or more amino-nitrogen atoms.

    (1)     Note.  An amine proper for this subclass requires (a) at least
    three distinct nitrogen atoms bonded to at least two distinct carbon atoms,
    or (b) the presence of at least three nitrogen atoms bonded to the same
    carbon atom. Each nitrogen atom single or double bonded in the manner set
    forth above and


            consistent with the (1) Note above is an amine.  The following are
    examples of triamines:


CLS 528/187
TXT Subject matter under subclass 186 wherein a reactant contains three or more
    carboxylic acid groups or three or more carboxylic acid derivatives or any
    combination thereof.


CLS 528/188
TXT Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein a reactant contains three or more
    carboxylic acid groups, three or more carboxylic acid derivatives, or
    contains a combination thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184,    for an amino-nitrogen containing carboxylic acid or
    amino-containing derivative of a carboxylic acid.


CLS 528/189
TXT Subject matter under subclass 188 wherein two or more reactants, each
    containing two or more carboxylic acid groups, or two or more derivatives
    of acids, each containing two or more carboxylic acid groups or a
    combination thereof, are utilized.


CLS 528/190
TXT Subject matter under subclass 176 wherein at least one reactant contains a
    fused- or bridged- ring structure with the proviso that a cyclic anhydride
    is not the only ring fused or bridged to another ring.

    (1)     Note.  A bridged- or fused-ring system for purposes of this
    subclass requires that a given ring system be attached at two different
    nuclear atoms of its ring to an atom or chain of atoms which, when taken
    together with the two nuclear atoms, forms an additional ring structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176,    for the reaction of a phenolic reactant with a reactant containing
    a carboxylic anhydride group.


CLS 528/191
TXT Subject matter under subclass 176 wherein a reactant contains a halogen
    atom with the proviso that the halogen atom is other than as a halogen atom
    bonded directly to a carbonyl group,i.e., halo.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176,    for the interaction of


CLS 528/192
TXT Subject matter under subclass 176 wherein at least one reactant contains an
    ethylenically unsaturated group.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the term "ethylenically
    unsaturated".


CLS 528/193
TXT Subject matter under subclass 176 wherein a polymer is derived from at
    least two or more phenols, phenol ethers, or inorganic phenolates or
    mixtures of two or more phenolic reactants.


CLS 528/194
TXT Subject matter under subclass 176 wherein a polymer is derived from two or
    more polycarboxylic acids or polycarboxylic acid derivatives.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    183+,   for a polymer derived from an amino-containing polycarboxylic acid
    or amino-containing derivative of a polycarboxylic acid, or for a polymer
    derived from a nonamino-containing polycarboxylic acid or
    nonamino-derivative and an amino-containing reactant.


CLS 528/195
TXT Subject matter under subclass 176 wherein at least one nonphenolic reactant
    contains at least two hydroxyl groups or salts thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY under alcohol for a definition of the term
    "hydroxyl group".


CLS 528/196
TXT Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein a polymer is derived from a
    phenol, phenol ether, or inorganic phenolate and at least one reactant
    containing a halo halo, halo, or  group.

    (1)     Note.  Within the purview of this area is the interreaction of a
    phenolic compound containing a halo or group with a different phenolic
    reactant.


CLS 528/198
TXT Subject matter under subclass 196 wherein a phenol, phenol ether, or
    inorganic phenolate is reacted with a reactant containing a halo   halo,
    halo, or group in the presence of a specified material.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for an explanation of the term "specified
    material".

    (2)     Note.



    (A)     For purposes of this subclass non-reactant materials (specified
    materials) which are present during a polymerization reaction and wherein
    the only metal atoms therein are Group IA (Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs, Fr) or Group
    IIA (Be, Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba, Ra) metal atoms or a mixture thereof, are not
    considered as being specified materials.



    (B)     Compounds which contain at least one Group IA or Group IIA and at
    least one other non-Group IA or non-Group IIA metal atom are proper herein
    and are classified on the basis of the non-Group IA or non-Group IIA metal
    atom.



    (C)     A mixture of a metal compound specifically excluded herefrom and
    another material which can be considered as being a specified material, per
    se, is classified herein on the basis of the specified material, per se.


CLS 528/199
TXT Subject matter under subclass 198 wherein the specified material is a
    nitrogen-containing compound.


CLS 528/200
TXT Subject matter under subclass 198 wherein the specified material contains
    at least one metal atom.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for those elements regarded as being "metals".


CLS 528/201
TXT Subject matter under subclass 196 wherein at least one reactant contains a
    fused or bridged ring with the proviso that a cyclic anhydride group is not
    the sole group fused or bridged to another ring.

    (1)     Note.  A bridged- or fused-ring system of this subclass requires
    that a given ring system be attached at two different nuclear atoms of its
    ring to an atom or group of atoms which, when taken together with the two
    nuclear atoms, forms an additional ring system.


CLS 528/202
TXT Subject matter under subclass 196 wherein a reactant contains a halogen
    atom with the proviso that the halogen atom is other than as a halogen atom
    bonded directly to a carbonyl group i.e., halo.


CLS 528/203
TXT Subject matter under subclass 196 wherein at least one reactant contains a
    nitrogen atom.


CLS 528/204
TXT Subject matter under subclass 196 wherein a polymer is derived from at
    least two or more phenols, phenol ethers, or inorganic phenolates, or
    mixtures of two or more phenolic reactants.


CLS 528/205
TXT Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein an ethylenically unsaturated
    phenol, phenol ether, or inorganic phenolate is a reactant, or wherein a
    phenol, phenol ether, or inorganic phenolate is reacted with an
    ethylenically unsaturated reactant.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the term "ethylenically
    unsaturated".


CLS 528/206
TXT Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein a phenol, phenol ether, or
    inorganic phenolate containing at least one carboxylic acid group, or a
    carboxylic acid derivative thereof is a reactant.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the term "carboxylic acid".

    (2)     Note.  See this class (528), subclass 176 for a definition of what
    is considered as being a carboxylic acid derivative.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170,    for a polymer derived from an imide-containing phenol, phenol
    ether, or inorganic phenolate.

    176,    for a polymer derived from a phenolic reactant and at least one
    reactant which is a polycarboxylic acid or a polycarboxylic acid derivative.


CLS 528/207
TXT Subject matter under subclass 206 wherein a phenol, phenol ether, or
    inorganic phenolic reactant containing at least one carboxylic acid group,
    or carboxylic acid derivative group is reacted in the presence of a
    specified material.

    (1)     Note. See GLOSSARY for an explanation of the term "specified
    material".

    (2)     Note.



    (A)     For purposes of this subclass nonreactant materials (specified
    materials) which are present during a polymerization reaction and wherein
    the only metal atoms therein are Group IA (Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs, Fr) or Group
    IIA(Be, Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba, Ra) metal atoms or a mixture thereof, are not
    considered as being specified materials.



    (B)     Compounds which contain at least one Group IA or Group IIA and at
    least one other non-Group IA or non-Group IIA metal atom are proper herein
    and are classified on the basis of the non-Group IA or non-Group IIA metal
    atom.



    (C)     A mixture of a metal compound specifically excluded herefrom and
    another material which can be considered as being a specified material, per
    se, is classified herein on the basis of the specified material, per se.


CLS 528/208
TXT Subject matter under subclass 206 wherein the reactant is a
    nitrogen-containing material.


CLS 528/209
TXT Subject matter under subclass 206 wherein at least one nonphenolic reactant
    contains at least two hydroxyl groups or salts thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY under alcohol for a definition of the term
    "hydroxyl group".


CLS 528/210
TXT Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein a reactant is a phenol, phenol
    ether, or inorganic phenolate containing at least one nitrogen atom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99,     for a polymer derived from a phenolic nitrogen-containing 1,
    2-epoxy reactant or from a phenolic nitrogen containing material and a 1,
    2-epoxy reactant.

    183,    for a polymer derived from at least a polycarboxylic acid or
    derivative and at least one phenolic reactant wherein the phenolic reactant
    may contain a nitrogen atom.


CLS 528/211
TXT Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein a polymer is derived from a phenol
    ether or inorganic phenolate and a nitrogen-containing reactant.


CLS 528/212
TXT Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein a phenol, phenol ether, or
    inorganic phenolate reactant contains only one phenolic hydroxyl or one
    inorganic phenolate group.

    (1)     Note.  A compound having a single phenolic hydroxyl or inorganic
    phenolate group may, for purposes of this subclass, contain one or more
    phenolic ether groups, e.g.,

                                          , etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219,    for a sole phenolic reactant having two or more phenolic hydroxyl
    or inorganic phenolate groups.


CLS 528/214
TXT Subject matter under subclass 212 wherein the phenolic reactant is
    polymerized in the presence of a specified material.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for an explanation of the term "specified
    material".

    (2)     Note.



    (A)     For purposes of this subclass nonreactant materials (specified
    materials) which are present during a polymerization reaction and wherein
    the only metal atoms therein are Group IA (Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs, Fr) or Group
    IIA (Be, Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba, Ra) metal atoms or a mixture thereof, are not
    considered as being specified materials.



    (B)     Compounds which contain at least one group IA or Group IIA and at
    least one other non-Group IA or non-Group IIA metal atom are proper herein
    and are classified on the basis of the non-group IA or the non-Group IIA
    metal atom.



    (C)     A mixture of a metal compound specifically excluded herefrom and
    another material which can be considered as being a specified material, per
    se, is classified herein on the basis of the specified material, per se.


CLS 528/215
TXT Subject matter under subclass 214 wherein the specified material is a
    nitrogen-containing compound.


CLS 528/216
TXT Subject matter under subclass 215 wherein the specified nitrogen-containing
    material contains at least one nitrogen atom as a ring member of a
    heterocyclic compound.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the term "heterocyclic
    ring".


CLS 528/217
TXT Subject matter under subclass 214 wherein the specified material contains
    at least one metal atom.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for those elements considered to be "metals".


CLS 528/218
TXT Subject matter under subclass 212 wherein a polymer is derived from (1) at
    least two phenolic reactants each of which contains only a single phenolic
    hydroxyl group, or a mixture of inorganic phenolates thereof, or a mixture
    of a phenolic reactant containing a single hydroxyl group and another
    phenolic reactant which is an inorganic phenolate of a phenolic reactant
    containing only a single hydroxyl group, or (2) wherein a phenolic reactant
    containing a single phenolic hydroxyl group or a phenolate thereof is
    reacted with a compound containing an ether oxygen atom bonded to two
    discrete aryl rings.


CLS 528/219
TXT Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein a phenol, phenol ether, or
    inorganic phenolate contains two or more phenolic hydroxyl groups, or is an
    inorganic phenolate thereof, or contains at least one phenolic hydroxyl
    group and at least one inorganic phenolate group.


CLS 528/220
TXT Subject matter under Class 520, subclass 1 involving polymers derived from
    a ketone reactant or processes of polymerizing; polymerizable compositions
    containing as a reactant a ketone or process of preparing .

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the term "ketone".

    (2)     Note. For purposes of this subclass a reactant having a ketone (
    C=C=O) group is considered as being a ketone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    480+,   for processes of preparing a polymer not involving a chemical
    modification of the polymer, by the addition of a material thereto, and for
    chemically modifying material other than the polymer.  Subclasses 480+ also
    provide for processes of admixing with a broadly claimed nonreactant
    material. (See subclass 1 of Class 523 for the distinction between that
    class and this area, and see in particular, Note 6, 8.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    526,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 316 for a polymer
    derived from an ethylenically unsaturated ketone as sole monomer or for an
    interpolymer derived from only ethylenically unsaturated reactants wherein
    at least one of the reactants is an ethylenically unsaturated ketone.


CLS 528/222
TXT Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein a ketone reactant is polymerized
    in the presence of a specified material.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for an explanation of the term "specified
    material".


CLS 528/223
TXT Subject matter under subclass 222 wherein the specified material contains
    at least one atom of phosphorus or sulfur.


CLS 528/224
TXT Subject matter under subclass 222 wherein the specified material is a
    nitrogen-containing compound.


CLS 528/225
TXT Subject matter under subclass 222 wherein the specified material contains
    at least one atom of boron or at least one atom of a polyvalent metal atom.

    (1)     Note.  Polyvalent metal is limited to elements of atomic numbers 4,
    12, 13, 20-33, 38-51, 56-84, 88, and higher.


CLS 528/226
TXT Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein the material is a ketone which is
    reacted with at least one sulfur-containing reactant.


CLS 528/227
TXT Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein a ketone-containing material is
    reacted with at least one aldehyde or derivative.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY and this class (528), subclass 230 for the
    definition of an aldehyde or derivative.


CLS 528/228
TXT Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein a ketone is reacted with at least
    one nitrogen-containing reactant.


CLS 528/229
TXT Subject matter under subclass 228 wherein a nitrogen reactant contains at
    least on nitrogen atom as an amino-nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for the definition of an amino-nitrogen atom.


CLS 528/230
TXT Subject matter under Class 520, subclass 1 involving polymers derived from
    at least one aldehyde or derivative as a reactant or processes of
    polymerizing; polymerizable compositions containing as a reactant an
    aldehyde or derivative or process of preparing.

    (1)     Note.



    (A)     See GLOSSARY for a definition of the term "aldehyde".

    (B)     An aldehyde derivative for purposes of this subclass includes:

     (1)    Compounds having a X-CH2OH group wherein X is other than carbon or
    hydrogen.  Included herein are paraformaldehyde, methylol derivatives of
    urea, etc.

     (2)    Heterocyclic compounds having only carbon and oxygen as ring atoms
    in an alternating manner and in equal amount, i.e.,Included herein is
    trioxane.

     (3)    Hexamethylenetetramine or derivative, e.g.,

    A derivative of this type requires the basic ring structure of
    hexamethylenetetramine but wherein the hydrogen atoms may have been
    replaced by other atoms.

    (2)     Note.  Compounds having a methylol group (-CH2OH) bonded to atoms
    other than carbon, oxygen, or hydrogen are regarded for this subclass as
    being two compounds, one of which is formaldehyde.  For instance, a
    methylol derivative of melamine is regarded as being a mixture of melamine
    and formaldehyde.  Methylol urea is regarded as being a mixture of
    formaldehyde and urea.

    (3)     Note.  Solid paraformaldehyde polymers will be regarded as
    reactants.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403,    for heterocyclic oxygen-containing reactants such as dioxolane,
    dioxepan, etc.

    480+,   for processes of preparing a polymer not involving a chemical
    modification of the polymer, by the addition of a material thereto, and for
    chemically modifying material other than the polymer.  Subclasses 480+ also
    provide for processes of admixing with a broadly claimed nonreactant
    material. (See subclass 1 of Class 523 for the distinction between that
    class and this area, and see in particular, Note 6, 8.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    526,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 315 for a polymer
    derived from an ethylenically unsaturated aldehyde as sole reactant or for
    an interpolymer derived from only ethylenically unsaturated reactants
    wherein at least one of the ethylenically unsaturated reactants contains an
    aldehyde group.


CLS 528/232
TXT Subject matter under subclass 230 wherein an aldehyde or derivative is
    polymerized in the presence of a special material.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for an explanation of the term "specified
    material".


CLS 528/233
TXT Subject matter under subclass 232 wherein the specified material contains
    at least one metal atom.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for those elements regarded as being "metals".


CLS 528/234
TXT Subject matter under subclass 233 wherein the specified material contains
    at least one transition metal atom.

    (1)     Note.  Transition metal is limited to elements of atomic numbers
    21-29, 39-47, 57-79, 89, and higher.


CLS 528/235
TXT Subject matter under subclass 234 wherein the transition metal is a Group
    VIII metal atom, i.e., Fe, Co, Ni, Ru, Rh, Pd, Os, Ir, Pt.


CLS 528/236
TXT Subject matter under subclass 233 wherein the specified material contains
    at least one heavy metal atom.

    (1)     Note.  Since transition metals are classified in subclasses 234+
    above, the term "heavy metal" herein is limited to elements of atomic
    numbers 30-33, 48-51, 80-84, and 88.


CLS 528/237
TXT Subject matter under subclass 236 wherein the specified material is a Group
    IVA metal atom, i.e., Ge, Sn, Pb.


CLS 528/238
TXT Subject matter under subclass 233 wherein the specified material contains
    at least one atom of aluminum.


CLS 528/239
TXT Subject matter under subclass 233 wherein the specified material contains
    at least one atom of a Group IA metal, i.e., Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs, Fr.


CLS 528/240
TXT Subject matter under subclass 232 wherein the specified material contains
    at least one atom of boron.


CLS 528/241
TXT Subject matter under subclass 240 wherein the specified material contains
    one boron atom which is bonded to three halogen atoms or is an organic
    complex wherein at least one boron atom therein is bonded to three halogen
    atoms.


CLS 528/242
TXT Subject matter under subclass 232 wherein the specified material contains
    at least one atom of phosphorus or sulfur.


CLS 528/243
TXT Subject matter under subclass 232 wherein the specified material is a
    nitrogen-containing compound.


CLS 528/244
TXT Subject matter under subclass 230 wherein at least one reactant contains a
    fluorine or phosphorus atom.

    (1)     Note.  The fluorine or phosphorus atom may be part of the aldehyde
    or derivative or may be a material which is reacted with the aldehyde or
    derivative.


CLS 528/245
TXT Subject matter under subclass 230 wherein at least one aldehyde is glyoxal
    or a compound containing two or more aldehyde  groups.


CLS 528/245.3
TXT With a polycarboxylic acid reactant which is a dimer or trimer of an
    ethylenically unsaturated aliphatic monocarboxylic acid having at least ten
    carbon atoms; or adduct of said unsaturated monocarboxylic acid with an
    alpha, beta ethylenically unsaturated carboxylic acid or derivative:
    Subject matter under subclass 230 wherein a polycarboxylic acid reactant
    which is a dimer or trimer of ethylenically unsaturated aliphatic
    monocarbozylic acid having at least ten carbon atoms, or an adduct of said
    unsaturated monocarboxylic acid with an alpha, beta ethylenically
    unsaturated acid carboxylic acid or derivatives is present in addition to
    said aldehyde or derivative.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of "dimer or trimer of
    aliphatic monocarboxylic acid".


CLS 528/245.5
TXT With a reactrant which is a fatty acid glycerol ester, a fatty acid or salt
    derived from a naturally occurring glyceride, tall oil, or a fatty acid
    derived from tall oil: Subject matter under subclass 230 wherein a reactant
    which is a fatty acid glycerol ester, a fatty acid or salt derived from a
    naturally occurring glyceride, tall oil, or fatty acid derived from tall
    oil is present in addition to said aldehyde or derivative.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary under "fatty acid" for a definition of the
    term used herein.


CLS 528/246
TXT Subject matter under subclass 230 wherein at least one reactant contains an
    ethylenically unsaturated group with the proviso that a heterocyclic
    compound containing only oxygen and carbon atoms as ring members must
    possess at least one ethylenically unsaturated moiety exterior to the ring.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded herein is furfural, furfuryl alcohol, etc.

    (2)     Note.  A methylene group which is bonded to a heterocyclic carbon
    is considered as being exterior to the heterocyclic ring.

    (3)     Note.  The unsaturation required for this subclass may be in the
    aldehyde or derivative thereof, or may be in a material which is reacted
    with an aldehyde or derivative.

    (4)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for an explanation of the term "ethylenically
    unsaturated".


CLS 528/247
TXT Subject matter under subclass 230 wherein the aldehyde or derivative is
    reacted with a hydrocarbon or halogenated hydrocarbon.

    (1)     Note.  Halogenated hydrocarbon for purposes of this subclass also
    includes those compounds wherein all of the hydrogen atoms have been
    substituted by halogen atoms.


CLS 528/248
TXT Subject matter under subclass 230 wherein an aldehyde or derivative is
    reacted with at least one heterocyclic reactant, which reactant is a
    nonaldehyde or nonaldehyde derivative.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the term "heterocyclic
    ring".


CLS 528/249
TXT Subject matter under subclass 248 wherein the heterocyclic reactant which
    is not an aldehyde or derivative of an aldehyde contains at least one
    oxygen atom as a ring member of a heterocyclic ring.


CLS 528/250
TXT Subject matter under subclass 249 wherein the heterocyclic oxygen atom is
    part of a three-membered ring containing one oxygen atom and two carbon
    atoms, i.e., 1, 2-epoxy compound.


CLS 528/251
TXT Subject matter under subclass 248 wherein the heterocyclic reactant which
    is not an aldehyde or a derivative of an aldehyde contains at least one
    sulfur atom as a ring member of a heterocyclic ring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255,    for a polymer derived from a sulfur-containing triazine reactant
    and an aldehyde or aldehyde derivative.


CLS 528/252
TXT Subject matter under subclass 248 wherein the reactant which is not an
    aldehyde or derivative contains only two nitrogen atoms as ring members of
    a heterocyclic ring.


CLS 528/253
TXT Subject matter under subclass 248 wherein the reactant which is not an
    aldehyde or derivative contains two or more heterocyclic rings.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are those reactant compounds having two
    distinct heterocyclic ring moieties as well as those reactant compounds
    wherein a heterocyclic atom is shared between two ring moieties (i.e.,
    fused or bridged rings).


CLS 528/254
TXT Subject matter under subclass 248 wherein the reactant which is not an
    aldehyde or derivative contains a six-membered ring having three nitrogen
    atoms and three carbon atoms as ring members.


CLS 528/255
TXT Subject matter under subclass 254 wherein the heterocyclic reactant having
    three nitrogen atoms and three carbon atoms as ring members contains at
    least one atom of sulfur.


CLS 528/256
TXT Subject matter under subclass 254 wherein a  reactant containing a  or
    group is utilized in preparing a polymer and wherein the  or  reactant is
    not an aldehyde or aldehyde derivative, or a compound having a six-membered
    heterocyclic ring containing three nitrogen and three carbon atoms as ring
    members.


CLS 528/257
TXT Subject matter under subclass 254 wherein a reactant containing an
    extracyclic carbon atom bonded to at least three nitrogen atoms is utilized
    in preparing a polymer and wherein the  -containing reactant is not (1) an
    aldehyde or aldehyde derivative, or (2) a compound having a six-membered
    heterocyclic ring containing three nitrogen and three carbon atoms as ring
    members.

    (1)     Note.  Extracyclic carbon as used in this subclass denotes a carbon
    atom which is not a ring atom of a ring-containing compound.


CLS 528/258
TXT Subject matter under subclass 254 wherein the heterocyclic reactant
    containing three nitrogen atoms and three carbon atoms is other than
    melamine, per se, or a methylol (-CH2OH) derivative thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The materials herein excluded are melamine, i.e.,    or its
    derivatives wherein one or more of the available hydrogen atoms of melamine
    have been substituted by -CH2OH groups.


CLS 528/259
TXT Subject matter under subclass 230 wherein an aldehyde or its derivatives is
    reacted with at least one reactant which contains a   group and wherein X
    is a chalcogen atom (O, S, Se, or Te).


CLS 528/260
TXT Subject matter under subclass 259 wherein two or more reactants containing
     groups are utilized, and wherein X is O, S, Se, or Te.


CLS 528/261
TXT Subject matter under subclass 259 wherein at least one reactant is a
    nonaldehyde or  derivative or  non     group- (X is O, S, Se, or Te)
    containing material.


CLS 528/262
TXT Subject matter under subclass 261 wherein the nonaldehyde or derivative or
    non     -containing reactant NX is O, S, Se, or Te) is a
    nitrogen-containing material.


CLS 528/263
TXT Subject matter under subclass 262 wherein the non-    reactant (X is O, S,
    Se, or Te or nonaldehyde or derivative reactant is an organic compound
    containing two or more amino groups.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for the definition of the term "amine".

    (2)     Note.  An amine proper for this subclass requires (a) at least two
    distinct nitrogen atoms bonded to at least two distinct carbon atoms, or
    (b) the presence of at least two nitrogen atoms bonded to the same carbon
    atom. Each nitrogen atom, single or double bonded, set forth above and
    consistent with the (1) Note above is an amine.


CLS 528/264
TXT Subject matter under subclass 259 wherein X  the  - containing reactant is
    other than urea or thiourea, per se.

    (1)     Note.  The materials excluded herein are urea, per se, i.e.,, or
    thiourea, per se, i.e.,


CLS 528/265
TXT Subject matter under subclass 230 wherein a sulfur-containing aldehyde or
    aldehyde derivative is utilized as a reactant, or wherein an aldehyde or
    aldehyde derivative is reacted with a sulfur-containing material.


CLS 528/266
TXT Subject matter under subclass 230 wherein an aldehyde or aldehyde
    derivative is reacted with at least one nitrogen-containing reactant and
    which nitrogen-containing reactant is not an aldehyde or aledhyde
    derivative.


CLS 528/267
TXT Subject matter under subclass 266 wherein the nitrogen-containing reactant
    which is not an aldehyde or aldehyde derivative is a nitrile
    group-containing material.

    (1)     Note.  A nitrile for purposes of this subclass requires:



    (A)     The structure  wherein n is an integer and wherein the C atom is
    not double bonded to oxygen, selenium, or tellurium.



    (B)     The structure  wherein n is an integer.



    (C)     The structure
    wherein n is an integer and X is
    , or a derivative, i.e., salt, ester, amide, imide, lactam, lactone,
    anhydride, or nitrile.


CLS 528/268
TXT Subject matter under subclass 266 wherein the nitrogen-containing reactant
    which is not an aldehyde or aldehyde derivative contains at least one
    carbon atom bonded to at least three nitrogen atoms.


CLS 528/269
TXT Subject matter under subclass 266 wherein the nitrogen-containing reactant
    which is not an aldehyde or aldehyde derivative contains only a single
    amino-nitrogen atom.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for the definition of the term "amine".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266,    for a polyamine reactant.


CLS 528/270
TXT Subject matter under subclass 230 wherein a polymer is derived solely from
    reactants which are aldehydes or aldehyde derivatives or mixtures thereof.


CLS 528/271
TXT Subject matter under Class 520, subclass 1 involving polymers derived from
    at least one carboxylic acid or carboxylic acid derivative or processes of
    polymerizing; polymerizable composition containing as a reactant a
    carboxylic acid or derivative or process of preparing.

    (1)     Note.  A derivative of a carboxylic acid is limited to a nitrile,
    ester, anhydride, salt, amide, imide, lactam, lactone, and acyl halide.

    (2)     Note.  A carboxylic acid denotes:



    (A1)    The  structure wherein n is one or greater and the  C- atom is not
    double bonded to oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium, or is not triple
    bonded to nitrogen.



    (A2)    The  structure wherein n is one or greater, e.g., formic acid when
    n=1.



    (A3)    The      structure wherein n is an integer, e.g., oxalic acid when
    n=1.



    (B1)    The      structure wherein n is one or more and the carbon atom


            bonded to thegroup and the carbon atom single bonded to the oxygen


            atom of the  group is not double bonded to oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium, or triple bonded to nitrogen.

    (B2)    The structure    wherein the atom single bonded to the group     is
    not double bonded to oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium, or is not
    triple bonded to nitrogen.



    (B3)    The structure   wherein n is an integer and X is or a derivative as
    defined in the (1) Note of this subclass.



            A carboxylic acid amide denotes:



    (C1)    The structure   wherein n is one or greater and the atom bonded to
    the group is not double bonded to oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium,
    or triple bonded to nitrogen.



    (C2)    The structure  wherein n is one or greater.



    (C3)    The structure
    wherein n is an integer and X   isor a derivative as defined in the (1)
    Note of this subclass.



            A nitrile for purposes of this subclass denotes:

    (D1)    The structure     wherein n is an integer and wherein the  atom is
    not double bonded to oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium.



    (D2)    The structure  wherein n is an integer.



    (D3)    The structure      wherein n is an integer and x is
    or a derivative, i.e., salt, ester, amide, imide, lactam, lactone,
    anhydride, or nitrile.



            A carboxylic acid anhydride denotes:



    (E1)    The structure
      wherein n is one or more and wherein the carbon atom bonded to the  group
    is not double bonded to oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium.



    (E2)    The structure
     wherein n is an integer, X is or a carboxylic acid derivcative as defined
    in the (1) Note of this subclass.

    (E3)    The structure  In E1, E2, and E3 the     group may be joined
    together in a ring.



            An acyl halide of a carboxylic acid denotes:

    (F1)    The structure  wherein n is one or more and wherein the carbon atom
    bonded to   group is not double bonded to oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium.



    (F2)    The structure  halo wherein n is one or more.



    (F3)    The structure   halo wherein n is an integer and X is  or a
    carboxylic acid derivative as defined in the (1) Note of this subclass.



    (G)     A carboxylic acid imide denotes the structure.


    wherein n and x are one or more.

    (H)     The lactam of a carboxylic acid denotes the structure:


    wherein n and x are one or more.



    (I)     The lactone of a carboxylic acid denotes the structure:    wherein
    x and n are one or more and the carbon atom bonded to thegroup and the
    carbon atom single bonded to the oxygen atom of  the     group are not
    double bonded to oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium, or triple bonded
    to nitrogen.



    (J1)    The salt of a carboxylic acid denotes the structure:


            one or more and the     group and the X component are held together
    primarily by ionic forces: the carbon atom bonded to thegroup is not double
    bonded to oxygen, sulfur, or tellurium, or triple bonded to nitrogen.

    (J2)    The  structure
    wherein n  is one or more and the group and the X component are held
    together primarily by ionic forces.

    (J3)    The structure  wherein n is an integer. Z is

      or a derivative as defined in the (1) Note of this subclass and wherein
    the X component and thecomponent are held together primarily by ionic
    forces.

    (3)     Note.  In the above definitions of carboxylic acid and their
    derivatives, certain compounds may have more than one function, e.g., a
    lactone is a species of ester, a lactam is a species of an amide.
    Compounds which are multifunctional are classified on the basis of the
    first-appearing function provided in the subclass hierarchy.

    (4)     Note.  A polycarboxylic acid reactant for purposes of this subclass
    requires the presence of at least two carboxylic acid groups.  A
    polycarboxylic acid derivative requires at least one carboxylic acid group
    and at least one carboxylic acid derivative, or at least two identical
    carboxylic acid derivatives, or at least two different carboxylic acid
    derivatives.  See (1) Note above for an explanation of the term
    "derivative".

    (5)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass an anhydride having the
    general formula, which may be linear or cyclic is considered as being a
    polycarboxylic acid.  A compound having both an anhydride and a free
    carboxylic acid is considered as being a tricarboxylic acid, e.g.,

                     ,etc.



            and a compound containing two anhydride groups is considered as
    being a tetracarboxylic acid, e.g.,

             etc.,

    (6)     Note.  An imide is considered as being a dicarboxylic acid
    derivative.

    (7)     Note.  An organic amine salt of a carboxylic acid has been
    classified as if it were a mixture of an amine and a carboxylic acid.  An
    organic diamine salt of a dicarboxylic acid where the amine salt-forming
    groups are identical is considered as being a single amine compound;
    whereas if the amine groups are different then they are regarded as two
    amine compounds.  Where the compound contains two or more nitrogen atoms
    bonded to the same or different noncarbonyl carbon atom then they are to be
    regarded as polyamines.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the term "amine",
    and see this class (528), subclass 263, (2) Note for an explanation of the
    term "polyamine".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170,    for the reaction of an imide-containing phenolic reactant or for
    the reaction of a phenolic reactant with an imide-containing reactant.

    480+,   for processes of preparing a polymer not involving a chemical
    modification of the polymer, by the addition of a material thereto, and for
    chemically modifying material other than the polymer.  Subclasses 480+ also
    provide for processes of admixing with a broadly claimed nonreactant
    material. (See subclass 1 of Class 523 for the distinction between that
    class and this area, and see in particular, Note 6, 8.)


CLS 528/272
TXT Subject matter under subclass 271 involving a polymer derived (1) from one
    or more di- or higher esters of a polycarboxylic acid as the sole reactant
    or reactants, or (2) from at least a polycarboxylic acid or derivative
    thereof and at least a compound containing two or more hydroxyl groups or
    salts thereof.

    (1)     Note.  A hydroxyl group denotes the bonding of an -OH group to a
    carbon atom and wherein the carbon atom is not double bonded to oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium, or triple bonded to nitrogen.

    (2)     Note.  A compound containing two or more hydroxyl groups or salts
    thereof requires (a) at least two distinct -OH or salt groups bonded to
    different carbon atoms, e.g., HO-CH2-CH2-OH, etc., or (b) two or more -OH
    or salt groups bonded to the same carbon atom, e.g.,
    ,etc.

    (3)     Note.  A compound which contains a single     C-OH      group and a
    single C-O salt group is proper for this subclass.

    (4)     Note.  A claim which recites the aftertreatment of a solid polymer
    wherein no preparation of said polymer is claimed, classification here is
    not proper but elsewhere dealing with solid polymers.  Consider, e.g., the
    heating of particles of polyethylene terephthalate at 250 deg.  Cent. in an
    effluent gaseous stream of nitrogen to increase its molecular weight.
    Classification of this process is proper in 528/481.  Consider also the
    process of condensing a polyester precondensate having a relative viscosity
    of from 1.05 to 1.15 at from 220 deg.  Cent. to 280 deg.  Cent. under
    reduced pressure, which process is likewise classified in 528/481 as an
    original and crossed into 528/503.  Finally, the heating of solid
    polyethylene terephthalate in the presence of the dehydrating agent, P205,
    classification is proper for 525/437.

    (5)     Note.  Please refer to Class 520, subclass 1, (8) Note for the
    definition of what constitutes a solid polymer.  Also, terms such as
    relative viscosity, intrinsic viscosity polymer melt also connote a solid
    polymer.


CLS 528/274
TXT Subject matter under subclass 272 wherein (1) one or more di- or higher
    esters of a carboxylic as sole reactant, or (2) a polycarboxylic acid or
    derivative thereof and a reactant containing two or more hydroxyl groups or
    salts thereof are polymerized in the presence of a specified material.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for an explanation of the term "specified
    material".


CLS 528/275
TXT Subject matter under subclass 274 wherein the specified material contains
    at least one metal atom.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for those elements regarded as being "metals".


CLS 528/276
TXT Subject matter under subclass 275 wherein the metal atom is in the
    elemental state.

    (1)     Note.  An alloy is considered as being a mixture of elemental
    metals and is proper for this subclass.


CLS 528/277
TXT Subject matter under subclass 275 wherein the specified material contains
    at least one atom of a transition metal.

    (1)     Note.  Transition metal atom is limited to elements of atomic
    numbers 21-29, 39-47, 57-79, 89, and higher.


CLS 528/278
TXT Subject matter under subclass 277 wherein the specified material contains
    at least one transition metal of atomic numbers 57-71, or 89 and higher.


CLS 528/279
TXT Subject matter under subclass 277 wherein the specified material contains
    at least one Group IVB transition metal atom, i.e., Ti, Zn, Hf.


CLS 528/280
TXT Subject matter under subclass 277 wherein the specified material contains
    at least one Group VIII metal atom, i.e., Fe, Co, Ni, Ru, Rh, Pd, Os, Ir,
    Pt.


CLS 528/281
TXT Subject matter under subclass 275 wherein the specified material contains a
    Group IIB metal atom, i.e., Zn, Cd, Hg.


CLS 528/282
TXT Subject matter under subclass 275 wherein the specified material contains a
    Group IIIA metal atom, i.e., Al, Ga, In, Tl.


CLS 528/283
TXT Subject matter under subclass 275 wherein the specified material contains a
    Group IVA metal atom, i.e., Ge, Sn, Pb.


CLS 528/284
TXT Subject matter under subclass 283 wherein the specified material contains
    at least one atom of lead.


CLS 528/285
TXT Subject matter under subclass 275 wherein the specified material contains a
    Group VA metal atom, i.e., As, Sb, Bi.


CLS 528/286
TXT Subject matter under subclass 274 wherein the specified material contains
    at least one phosphorus atom.


CLS 528/287
TXT Subject matter under subclass 272 wherein at least one reactant contains a
    phosphorus atom.

    (1)     Note.  The phosphorus atom may be in a polycarboxylic acid or in a
    derivative thereof, or it may be in a polyhydroxyl compound or in a salt
    thereof, or it may be in an additional reactant.


CLS 528/288
TXT Subject matter under subclass 272 wherein at least one reactant contains a
    nitrogen atom.

    (1)     Note.  The nitrogen atom may be in a carboxylic acid or derivative
    thereof, or it may be in a polyhydroxyl compound or salt thereof, or it may
    be in an additional reactant.


CLS 528/289
TXT Subject matter under subclass 288 wherein a final polymeric product
    contains a heterocyclic ring having a nitrogen atom as a ring member.

    (1)     Note.  The final product may be formed from a heterocyclic reactant
    having a nitrogen atom as a ring member or may be formed from a
    nonheterocyclic nitrogen-containing compound.  The sole requirement for
    placement in this subclass is that the final product contain a nitrogen
    atom as a ring member of a heterocyclic ring.

    (2)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the term "heterocyclic
    ring".


CLS 528/290
TXT Subject matter under subclass 288 wherein a reactant contains at least one
    sulfur atom.

    (1)     Note.  The sulfur and nitrogen atoms required for this subclass may
    be in the same reactant or may be in different reactants.


CLS 528/291
TXT Subject matter under subclass 288 wherein a nitrogen atom is part of a
    compound containing two or more hydroxyl groups or is a salt thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    288+,   for a salt of a non-nitrogen-containing polyhydroxyl compound
    wherein nitrogen is solely present in the cation moiety.


CLS 528/292
TXT Subject matter under subclass 288 wherein a nitrogen atom is part of
    polycarboxylic acid, or is part of a derivative thereof, or is a
    nitrogen-containing derivative of a nonnitrogen-containing polycarboxylic
    acid.


CLS 528/293
TXT Subject matter under subclass 272 wherein at least one reactant contains a
    sulfur atom.

    (1)     Note.  The sulfur atom may be in polycarboxylic acid or in a
    derivative thereof, or it may be in a polyhydroxyl compound or in a salt
    thereof, or it may be in an additional reactant.


CLS 528/294
TXT Subject matter under subclass 293 wherein a sulfur atom is part of a
    compound containing two or more hydroxyl groups or is a salt thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    293+,   for salt of a nonsulfur-containing polyhydroxyl compound wherein
    sulfur is solely present in the cation moiety.


CLS 528/295
TXT Subject matter under subclass 293 wherein at least one reactant contains at
    least one atom of sulfur and at least one aromatic ring.


CLS 528/295.3
TXT Polycarboxylic acid reactant which is a dimer or trimer of an ethylenically
    unsaturated aliphatic monocarboxylic acid having at least ten carbon atoms;
    or adduct of said unsaturated monocarboxylic acid with an alpha, beta
    ethylenically unsaturated carboxylic acid or derivative: Subject matter
    under subclass 272 wherein there is at least one polycarboxylic reactant
    which is a dimer or trimer of ethylenically unsaturated aliphatic
    monocarboxylic acid having at least ten carbon atoms, or an adduct of said
    unsaturated monocarboxylic acid with an alpha, beta ethylenically
    carboxylic acid or derivative.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary for a definition of "dimer or trimer of an
    aliphatic monocarboxylic acid".


CLS 528/295.5
TXT Reactant which is a fatty acid glycerol ester, fatty acid or salt derived
    from a naturally occurring glyceride, tall oil, or a fatty acid derived
    from tall oil: Subject matter under subclass 272 wherein there is at least
    one reactant which is a fatty acid glycerol ester; a fatty acid or salt
    derived from a naturally occurring glyceride, tall oil, or a fatty acid
    derived from tall oil.

    (1)     Note.  See the Glossary under "fatty acid" for a definition of the
    terms used herein.


CLS 528/296
TXT Subject matter under subclass 272 wherein at least one reactant is present
    which contains three or more carboxylic acid groups, or wherein a reactant
    is present which contains three or more carboxylic acid derivative groups,
    or mixtures thereof, e.g., trimellitic acid, pyromellitic tetracarboxylic
    acid dianhydride, etc.

    (1)     Note.  See the (5) Note in this class (528), subclass 271.


CLS 528/297
TXT Subject matter under subclass 272 wherein at least one reactant contains a
    heterocyclic ring solely composed of two carbon atoms and one oxygen atom
    as ring members.

    (1)     Note.  The 1, 2-epoxy ring may be part of the carboxylic acid or
    derivative or may be part of an additional reactant.


CLS 528/298
TXT Subject matter under subclass 272 wherein at least one reactant contains a
    fused or bridged ring with the proviso that the cyclic anhydride group is
    not the sole group fused or bridged to another ring.

    (1)     Note.  A bridged- or fused-ring system for purposes of this
    subclass requires that a given ring system be attached at two different
    nuclear atoms of its ring system to an atom or chain of atoms which, when
    taken together with the two nuclear atoms, forms an additional ring
    structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    308+,   for phthalic acid anhydride as a reactant.


CLS 528/299
TXT Subject matter under subclass 272 wherein a reactant contains a halogen
    atom with the proviso that the halogen atom is other than as a halogen atom
    bonded directly to a carbonyl group (i.e.,  halo).


CLS 528/300
TXT Subject matter under subclass 272 wherein a reactant containing two or more
    hydroxyl groups or a salt thereof contains at least one ether oxygen atom.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for the definition of an "ether".


CLS 528/301
TXT Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein the ether reactant is devoid of
    any cycloaliphatic, aromatic, or heterocyclic ring.


CLS 528/302
TXT Subject matter under subclass 272 wherein a reactant mixture contains two
    or more carboxylic acids, or at least two carboxylic acid derivatives, or a
    mixture of at least one carboxylic acid and a carboxylic acid derivative.


CLS 528/303
TXT Subject matter under subclass 302 wherein at least one carboxylic acid
    reactant contains ethylenic unsaturation, or wherein at least a derivative
    of a carboxylic acid contains ethylenic unsaturation.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the term "ethylenically
    unsaturated".


CLS 528/304
TXT Subject matter under subclass 303 wherein (1) at least one reactant is an
    ethylenically unsaturated aromatic carboxylic acid or is a derivative
    thereof, or (2) the mixture contains as a reactant at least one
    ethylenically unsaturated carboxylic acid or derivative thereof, and at
    least one aryl-containing carboxylic acid or derivative thereof.


CLS 528/305
TXT Subject matter under subclass 302 wherein each of the carboxylic acids or
    derivatives contains at least one aryl group.


CLS 528/306
TXT Subject matter under subclass 272 wherein a reactant is an ethylenically
    unsaturated carboxylic acid or a derivative of an ethylenically unsaturated
    carboxylic acid, e.g., maleic anhydride, etc.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the term "ethylenically
    unsaturated".


CLS 528/307
TXT Subject matter under subclass 272 wherein at least one reactant contains a
    ring solely composed of carbon atoms and is nonaromatic.


CLS 528/308
TXT Subject matter under subclass 272 wherein at least one reactant is an
    aryl-containing dicarboxylic acid or a derivative of an aryl-containing
    dicarboxylic acid.


CLS 528/308.1
TXT Polyethylene terephthalate, per se:
    Subject matter under subclass 308 wherein the process involves either
    ethylene glycol and terephthalic acid, per se; ethylene glycol and
    dimethyyl terephthalate; or bis(hydroxyethyl)terephthalate as sole
    reactant(s) or the preparation of a solid polymer having the sole repeating
    units of the structure                          "or products thereof".

    (1)     Note.  A polymer described as polyethylene terephthalate is
    presumed to be derived from the starting monomers of this subclass or to
    have the structure above, unless the patent otherwise specifies.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    308.6+, for processes of preparing other polyesters derived from
    terephthalic acid or substituted forms thereof.


CLS 528/308.2
TXT Physically after-treated solid polymer:

    Subject matter under subclass 308.1 wherein the polymer claimed has been
    treated by physical means, such as stretching, heating, cutting, spinning,
    etc., in order to change the physical properties of the polymer.

    (1)     Note.  The specification may be read in conjunction with the claims
    to determine whether the polymer has been physically treated within the
    meaning of this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    480+,   for processes of treating a polymer by chemical means in order to
    change physical, but not chemical properties of the polymer and for
    processes of chemically modifying polymers solely by physical processes in
    the absence of a chemical treating agent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    appropriate subclasses, for processes for preparation of a polymer wherein
    a significant molding step, such as spinning into a specifically named
    bath, is recited and note especially subclasses 340+ for processes in which
    preformed, shaped or solid articles are subjected to treatment, including
    all procedures in which the chemical or physical properties or
    characteristics of a work piece are modified or controlled by other than
    mechanically shaping by contacting the work with a solid shaping member.

    525,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 50+, for processes
    of chemically modifying solid polymers in the presence of a chemical
    treating agent or reactant or products thereof.


CLS 528/308.3
TXT Processes of preparing:

    Subject matter under subclass 308.1 wherein the process of polymerization
    involving the stated reactants is claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    308.1,  for products of the above processes.


CLS 528/308.4
TXT In presence of hydrocarbon, steam or water:

    Subject matter under subclass 308.3 wherein at least one step of the
    process utilizes either a compound derived solely from carbon and hydrogen,
    water or steam.

    (1)     Note.  An aqueous acid or base solution is classified herein
    provided the acid or base is not specified; for example, claims drawn to
    "an aqueous base" would be classified herein but claims drawn to "aqueous
    ammonia" would be classified in Class 528, subclass 274.


CLS 528/308.5
TXT At least two claimed distinct temperature or pressure gradients:

    Subject matter under subclass 308.3 wherein the process involves at least
    two distinct gradients, either temperature and/or pressure.

    (1)     Note.  A temperature range, such as 273oC - 283oC or "a temperature
    less than 300oC, "is considered to be one distinct gradient for this
    subclass.  A temperature described as commencing at 273oC and gradually
    being increased to 283oC is considered to be "at least two distinct
    gradients" for purposes of this subclass.


CLS 528/308.6
TXT Contains terephthalic acid or substituted forms thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 308 wherein the process involves terephthalic
    acid or substituted forms thereof or products thereof.


CLS 528/308.7
TXT Derived from at least two reactants simultaneously containing a C - OH
    group:

    Subject matter under subclass 308.6 wherein the process involves
    simultaneously at least two reactants having at least one C - OH group or
    products thereof.

    (1)     Note.  the two alcohol reactants are not considered to react
    simultaneously for purposes of this subclass when one reactant has
    completely reacted with another material before the addition of the second
    alcohol reactant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    308.6   or 308.8+, for processes involving two reactants containing an
    alcohol group wherein the two reactants are not involved simultaneously.


CLS 528/308.8
TXT Processes of preparing:

    Subject matter under subclass 308.6 wherein a polymerization process
    involving the stated reactants is claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    308.6   or 308.7, for products prepared by a process involving this
    subclass.


CLS 528/309.1
TXT At least two claimed distinct temperature or pressure gradients:

    Subject matter under subclass 308.8 wherein the process involves at least
    two distinct gradients, either temperature and/or pressure.

    (1)     Note.  A temperature range, such as 273oC - 283oC or a "temperature
    less than 300oC," is considered to be one distinct gradient for this
    subclass.  A temperature described as commencing at 273oC and gradually
    being increased to 283oC is considered to be "at least two distinct
    gradients" for purposes of this subclass.


CLS 528/310
TXT Subject matter under subclass 271 involves a polymer derived from an imide,
    lactam, or from an amino-nitrogen-containing carboxylic acid or from a
    derivative of an amino-nitrogen-containing carboxylic acid.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the term "amine".


CLS 528/312
TXT Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein an imide, lactam, or an
    amino-nitrogen-containing carboxylic acid or a derivative thereof is
    polymerized in the presence of a specified material.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for an explanation of the term "specified
    material".


CLS 528/313
TXT Subject matter under subclass 312 wherein the specified material contains a
    phosphorus or sulfur atom.


CLS 528/314
TXT Subject matter under subclass 312 wherein the specified material contains
    at least one nitrogen atom as a ring member of a heterocyclic ring with the
    proviso that the sole heterocyclic ring is not a lactam.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the term "heterocyclic
    ring".


CLS 528/315
TXT Subject matter under subclass 312 wherein the specified material contains
    at least one nitrogen-containing compound.

    (1)     Note.  A lactam utilized as a specified material is excluded
    herefrom and is classified below as a specified material on some other
    basis.  A compound, however, which contains a nitrogen atom in addition to
    the nitrogen atom of a lactam ring is proper for this subclass.


CLS 528/316
TXT Subject matter under subclass 312 wherein the specified material is a
    ketone or aldehyde.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the terms "ketone" and
    "aldehyde".  The term "aldehyde" herein does not include aldehyde
    derivatives, such as acetals or hemiacetals.


CLS 528/317
TXT Subject matter under subclass 312 wherein the specified material is an
    alcohol, ether, or inorganic alcoholate.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the term "alcohol" or
    "ether".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    319,    for a polyvalent metal-containing specified material when a metal
    atom is not part of an inorganic alcholate.


CLS 528/318
TXT Subject matter under subclass 312 wherein the specified material is a
    carboxylic acid, acyl halide thereof, ester thereof, or lactone thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See this class (528), subclass 271 for a definition of the
    terms used.


CLS 528/319
TXT Subject matter under subclass 312 wherein the specified material contains a
    polyvalent metal atom.

    (1)     Note.  Polyvalent metal is limited to elements of atomic numbers 4,
    12, 13, 20-33, 38-51, 56-84, 88, and higher.


CLS 528/320
TXT Subject matter under subclass 312 wherein the specified material contains
    an atom of silicon.


CLS 528/321
TXT Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein a reactant contains a phosphorus
    or sulfur atom.

    (1)     Note.  The phosphorus or sulfur atom may be part of an imide,
    lactam, or amino-containing carboxylic acid or derivative, or may be part
    of a coreactant.


CLS 528/322
TXT Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein a reactant contains an imide
    group.


CLS 528/323
TXT Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein a reactant contains a lactam
    group.


CLS 528/324
TXT Subject matter under subclass 323 wherein a polymer has been derived from
    at least three reactants with the proviso that one reactant is a
    lactam-containing material, a second reactant is a carboxylic acid or
    derivative, and a third derivative is a compound containing two or more
    amino-nitrogen atoms.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for the reaction of two lactam
    reactants and a single polyamine reactant.

    (2)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the term "amine", and see
    this class (528), subclass 263, (2) Note, for an explanation of the term
    "polyamine".


CLS 528/325
TXT Subject matter under subclass 323 wherein a polymer has been derived from
    (1) at least two lactam-containing reactants, or (2) at least one lactam
    reactant and (a) at least one amino-containing carboxylic acid, or (b) at
    least a derivative of an amino-containing carboxylic acid.


CLS 528/326
TXT Subject matter under subclass 323 wherein a lactam reactant contains three
    to five carbon atoms in a lactam ring, or 12 or more carbon atoms in a
    lactam ring.


CLS 528/327
TXT Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein at least one reactant contains a
    heterocyclic ring atom, or wherein one reactant contains at least one
    nitrogen atom bonded directly to another nitrogen atom.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are n-carboanhydrides.

    (2)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the term "heterocyclic
    ring".


CLS 528/328
TXT Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein the amino-carboxylic acid
    reactant contains a  group (n is one or more) or  is a carboxylic acid
    derivative thereof, and wherein the nitrogen atom bonded to the single
    carbon atom which is bonded to the  group may be bonded to any other atom
    other than to a carbon atom which is double bonded to oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium or triple bonded to a nitrogen atom.


CLS 528/329.1
TXT Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein a polymer has been derived from
    at least three reactants with the proviso that (1) at least one reactant is
    an amino-containing carboxylic acid or carboxylic acid derivative of an
    amino-containing carboxylic acid; (2) a second reactant is a carboxylic
    acid or derivative which is devoid of any amino groups, and (3) a third
    reactant is polyamine which is devoid of any carboxylic acid groups or
    carboxylic acid derivative groups.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the term "amine" and see
    this class (528), subclass 263, (2) Note, for an explanation of the term
    "polyamine".


CLS 528/330
TXT Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein at least one reactant contains a
    saturated carbocyclic ring.

    (1)     Note.  The term as utilized herein includes a fused- or
    bridged-ring system.


CLS 528/331
TXT Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein at least one reactant contains an
    aromatic ring.


CLS 528/332
TXT Subject matter under subclass 271 wherein a polymer is derived from at
    least one reactant which is an organic amine salt of a carboxylic acid, or
    wherein a carboxylic acid or carboxylic acid derivative is reacted with an
    organic amine.

    (1)     Note.  See the (7) Note under this class (528), subclass 271.

    (2)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for definition of the term "amine".


CLS 528/335
TXT Subject matter under subclass 332 wherein a polymer is derived from a
    dicarboxylic acid or from a dicarboxylic acid derivative thereof and an
    organic amine, or wherein a reactant is an organic amine salt of a
    dicarboxylic acid or derivative.

    (1)     Note.  The reactant may be the monoamine salt of a dicarboxylic
    acid, the diamine salt thereof, or it may be the diamine or monoamine salt
    of a dicarboxylic acid derivative.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    350+,   for polymers derived from a tri-or higher carboxylic acid or
    derivative and a polyamine.


CLS 528/336
TXT Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein an organic amine salt of a
    dicarboxylic acid or derivative is polymerized, or wherein a dicarboxylic
    acid or derivative thereof and an organic amine are polymerized in the
    presence of a specified material.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for an explanation of the term "specified
    material".


CLS 528/337
TXT Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein at least one reactant contains a
    phosphorus or sulfur atom.


CLS 528/338
TXT Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein a polymer is derived from at
    least four reactants, two of which are dicarboxylic acids or carboxylic
    acid derivatives and two of which are organic polyamines.

    (1)     Note.  Two compounds which are organoamine salts of two different
    dicarboxylic acids, wherein each of the two amine salts are different and
    wherein each in its own right is a polyamine, would meet the requirements
    of this subclass.  In addition, a carboxylic acid in admixture with a
    diamine salt of a different dicarboxylic acid, wherein each of the diamine
    salts are different and wherein each is a polyamine, would be properly
    classified herein.


CLS 528/339
TXT Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein a polymer is derived from at
    least two dicarboxylic acids or at least two dicarboxylic acid derivatives.


CLS 528/339.3
TXT Polycarboxylic acid reactant which is a dimer or trimer of an ethylenically
    unsaturated aliphatic monocarboxylic acid having at least ten carbon atoms;
    or adduct of said unsaturated monocarboxylic acid with an alpha, beta
    ethylenically unsaturated carboxylic acid or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 339 wherein there is at least one reactant
    which is a dimer or trimer or ethylenically unsaturated aliphatic
    monocarboxylic acid having at least ten carbon atoms, or adducts of said
    unsaturated monocarboxylic acids with an alpha, beta ethylenically
    unsaturated carboxylic acid or derivative.

    (1)     Note.  See the GLOSSARY for a definition of "dimer or trimer of an
    aliphatic monocarboxylic acid".


CLS 528/339.5
TXT Reactant which is a fatty acid glycerol ester, a fatty acid or salt derived
    from a naturally occuring glyceride, tall oil, or a fatty acid derived from
    tall oil: Subject matter under subclass 339 wherein there is at least one
    reactant which is a fatty acid glycerol ester, a fatty acid or salt derived
    from a naturally occurring glyceride, tall oil, or a fatty acid derived
    from tall oil.

    (1)     Note.  See the GLOSSARY under "fatty acid" for a definition of
    terms used herein.


CLS 528/340
TXT Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein a polymer is derived from at
    least two organic polyamines.

    (1)     Note.  An organodiamine salt of a dicarboxylic acid, wherein each
    of the diamine salt groups are different and wherein each is a polyamine,
    would be properly classified herein.


CLS 528/341
TXT Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein at least one reactant contains a
    heterocyclic ring with the proviso that the sole heterocyclic group is not
    a dicarboxylic acid anhydride.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the term "heterocyclic
    ring".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310,    for an imide or lactam-containing reactant.


CLS 528/342
TXT Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein at least one reactant contains
    three or more amino-nitrogen atoms, three or more carboxylic acid groups,
    or is a derivative of an acid containing three or more carboxylic acid
    groups.


CLS 528/343
TXT Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein at least one reactant is derived
    from a (n is an integer) containing dicarboxylic acid or is a carboxylic
    acid derivative thereof.


CLS 528/344
TXT Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein at least one reactant contains a
    bridged- or fused- ring structure.

    (1)     Note.  A bridged- or fused-ring system for purposes of this
    subclass requires that a given ring system be attached at two different
    nuclear atoms of its ring system to an atom or chain of atoms which, taken
    together with the two nuclear atoms, forms an additional ring.

    (2)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass as being a fused- or
    bridged-ring system is an anhydride group fused or bridged to a ring, which
    ring by itself is not part of a fused or bridged ring system.


CLS 528/345
TXT Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein at least one reactant contains an
    ethylenically unsaturated group.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the term, "ethylenically
    unsaturated".


CLS 528/346
TXT Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein at least one reactant contains a
    saturated carbocylic ring.


CLS 528/347
TXT Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein at least one reactant contains an
    aromatic ring.


CLS 528/348
TXT Subject matter under subclass 347 wherein all of the reactants contain at
    least one aromatic ring.


CLS 528/349
TXT Subject matter under subclass 335 wherein at least one reactant contains a
    tertiary carbon atom, i.e., bonded to at least three distinct carbon atoms,
    e.g.,                   , etc.


CLS 528/350
TXT Subject matter under subclass 332 wherein a polymer is derived from a tri-
    or higher carboxylic acid or from a tri-carboxylic acid derivative thereof
    and an organic amine, or wherein a reactant is an organic amine salt of a
    tri- or higher carboxylic acid or derivative.

    (1)     Note.  The reactant may be the monoamine, diamine, or triamine salt
    of a tri-carboxylic acid, or it may be a higher amine of a higher
    polycarboxylic acid, or it may be an organic amine salt of a tri-or higher
    carboxylic acid derivative.


CLS 528/351
TXT Subject matter under subclass 350 wherein an organic amine salt of a tri-
    or higher carboxylic acid or acid derivative is polymerized in the presence
    of a specified material, or wherein a tri- or higher carboxylic acid or
    acid derivative thereof and an organic amine are polymerized in the
    presence of a specified material.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for an explanation of the term "specified
    material".


CLS 528/352
TXT Subject matter under subclass 350 wherein at least one reactant contains a
    phosphorus or sulfur atom.


CLS 528/353
TXT Subject matter under subclass 350 wherein at least one reactant is a tetra-
    or higher carboxylic acid or is an acid derivative thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See the (5) Note under this class (528), subclass 271.


CLS 528/354
TXT Subject matter under subclass 271 wherein at least one reactant is a cyclic
    ester of a carboxylic acid as ring atoms, e.g.,


    wherein n is an integer and wherein X is an atom necessary to complete the
    ring structure and yet maintain the material as an ester.  See (2) Note
    under this class (528), subclass 271.


CLS 528/355
TXT Subject matter under subclass 354 wherein the cyclic ester is polymerized
    in the presence of a specified material.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for an explanation of the term "specified
    material".


CLS 528/356
TXT Subject matter under subclass 355 wherein the specified material contains a
    phosphorus or sulfur atom.


CLS 528/357
TXT Subject matter under subclass 355 wherein the specified material contains a
    metal atom.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for those elements regarded as being "metals".


CLS 528/358
TXT Subject matter under subclass 357 wherein the specified material contains a
    Group IA (Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs, Fr) or Group IIA (Be, Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba, Ra)
    metal atom.


CLS 528/359
TXT Subject matter under subclass 354 wherein the heterocyclic ester is a
    four-membered ring containing three carbon atoms and one oxygen atom, i.e.,



CLS 528/360
TXT Subject matter under subclass 271 wherein a carboxylic acid or a derivative
    thereof contains a sulfur atom.

    (1)     Note.  The sulfur atom may be in the carboxylic acid portion, in
    the derivative portion, or in both the acid and derivative thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    364,    for the interpolymerization of a nonsulfur-containing carboxylic
    acid or derivative and a sulfur reactant.


CLS 528/361
TXT Subject matter under subclass 271 wherein (1) a carboxylic acid contains an
    ether, alcohol, or metal alcoholate group, or (2) a carboxylic acid
    derivative contains an ether, alcohol, or metal alcoholate group.

    (1)     Note.  Both the acid and its derivative may contain an ether,
    alcohol, or metal alcoholate group.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    365,    for the interpolymerization of a noncyclic ether-containing
    carboxylic acid or derivative and a cyclic ether reactant.


CLS 528/362
TXT Subject matter under subclass 271 wherein at least one organic reactant
    contains a nitrile of a carboxylic acid.

    (1)     Note.  See (2) Note, section D, under this class (528), subclass
    271 for a definition of the term "nitrile".


CLS 528/363
TXT Subject matter under subclass 271 for a polymer derived from at least one
    carboxylic acid reactant or derivative and at least one nitrogen containing
    reactant.


CLS 528/364
TXT Subject matter under subclass 271 for a polymer derived from at least one
    carboxylic acid or derivative and at least one sulfur-containing reactant.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    360,    for a polymer derived from a sulfur-containing carboxylic acid or
    sulfur-containing derivative thereof.


CLS 528/365
TXT Subject matter under subclass 271 for a polymer derived from at least one
    carboxylic acid or derivative and at least one cyclic ether reactant.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the term "ether".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    361,    for a polymer derived from an ether-containing carboxylic acid or
    ether-containing derivative thereof.


CLS 528/366
TXT Subject matter under subclass 365 wherein the cyclic ether contains only a
    single three-membered heterocyclic ring having two carbon atoms and one
    oxygen atom as ring members.


CLS 528/367
TXT Subject matter under Class 520, subclass 1 involving polymers derived from
    at least one reactant containing a group or processes of polymerizing;
    polymerizable compositions containing as a reactant a material having a
    group or processes of preparing.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are carbamic acid derivatives and
    urea.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    480+,   for processes of preparing a polymer not involving a chemical
    modification of the polymer, by the addition of a material thereto, and for
    chemically modifying material other than the polymer.  Subclasses 480+ also
    provide for processes of admixing with a broadly claimed nonreactant
    material. (See subclass 1 of Class 523 for the distinction between that
    class and this area, and see in particular, Note 6, 8.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    526,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 301 for a polymer
    derived from an ethylenically unsaturated carbamic acid as sole monomer or
    for a carbamic acid interpolymer wherein all of the reactants used in
    preparing the polymer are ethylenically unsaturated, and subclass 302 for a
    polymer derived from an ethylenically unsaturated urea as sole monomer or
    for a urea interpolymer wherein all of the reactants used in preparing the
    polymer are ethylenically unsaturated.


CLS 528/368
TXT Subject matter under subclass 367 wherein a reactant containing a group is
    polymerized in the presence of a specified material.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for an explanation of the term "specified
    material".


CLS 528/369
TXT Subject matter under subclass 367 wherein a   reactant is a containing
    material or a derivative thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Derivative is limited to esters, acyl halides, anhydrides,
    or salts, and see this class (528), subclass 271 for derivatives of
    carboxylic acids.


CLS 528/370
TXT Subject matter under Class 520, subclass 1 involving polymers derived from
    at least one reactant containing a halo or  group or processes of
    polymerizing; polymerizable compositions containing as a reactant a
    material having  a haloor  group or processes of preparing.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are phosgene, carbonic acid, and
    carbonic acid esters.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    480+,   for processes of preparing a polymer not involving a chemical
    modification of the polymer, by the addition of a material thereto, and for
    chemically modifying material other than the polymer.  Subclasses 480+ also
    provide for processes of admixing with a broadly claimed nonreactant
    material. (See subclass 1 of Class 523 for the distinction between that
    class and this area, and see in particular, Note 6, 8.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    526,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 291+ for a polymer
    derived from an ethylenically unsaturated halogen containing compound
    having three or more carbon atoms as sole monomer, or for an interpolymer
    wherein all of the reactants are ethylenically unsaturated and at least one
    reactant contains three or more carbon atoms and at least one halogen atom,
    and subclass 314 for a polymer derived from an ethylenically unsaturated
    reactant containing a group as sole monomer, or for an interpolymer wherein
    all of the reactants are ethylenically unsaturated and at least one
    reactant contains agroup.


CLS 528/371
TXT Subject matter under subclass 370 wherein a     halo or  containing
    reactant is polymerized in the presence of a specified material.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for an explanation of the term "specified
    material".


CLS 528/372
TXT Subject matter under subclass 370 wherein a reactant contains a halo group.


CLS 528/373
TXT Subject matter under Class 520, subclass 1 involving polymers derived from
    at least one sulfur-containing reactant or processes of polymerizing;
    polymerizable compositions containing as a reactant a sulfur-containing
    material or processes of preparing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS,  SUBCLASS:

    480+,   for processes of preparing a polymer not involving a chemical
    modification of the polymer, by the addition of a material thereto, and for
    chemically modifying material other than the polymer.  Subclasses 480+ also
    provide for processes of admixing with a broadly claimed nonreactant
    material. (See subclass 1 of Class 523 for the distinction between that
    class and this area, and see in particular, Note 6, 8.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    525,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 343+, for a process
    of chemically modifying a solid polymer derived from ethylenic monomers
    only in the presence of a sulfur-containing material; subclasses 256+ for a
    homopolymer derived from an ethylenically unsaturated sulfur heterocyclic
    compound or for a sulfur-containing interpolymer wherein all of the
    reactants are ethylenically unsaturated and at least one of said reactants
    contains a sulfur atom as part of a heterocyclic ring, and subclasses 286+
    for a polymer derived from an ethylenically unsaturated sulfur-containing
    reactant as sole monomer or for a sulfur-containing interpolymer wherein
    all of the reactants are ethylenically unsaturated and at least one of said
    reactants contains a sulfur atom.


CLS 528/374
TXT Subject matter under subclass 373 wherein a polymer is derived from at
    least one mercaptan (thiol) or inorganic mercaptide-containing material.

    (1)     Note.  A mercaptan denotes an organic compound having the general
    structure wherein the carbon atom bound to the sulfur atom of the thiol
    group is not double bonded to oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium, or
    triple bonded to nitrogen.

    (2)     Note.  A mercaptide denotes a salt of a mercaptan.


CLS 528/375
TXT Subject matter under subclass 374 wherein (1) a polymer is derived from at
    least two or more mercaptan reactants, or from at least two or more
    mercaptide reactants, or from at least a mixture of a mercaptan and a
    mercaptide, or (2) a polymer is derived from a mercaptan or mercaptide and
    at least one other sulfur-containing reactant.


CLS 528/376
TXT Subject matter under subclass 374 wherein a mercaptan or mercaptide is
    reacted with at least one reactant which contains an ethylenically
    unsaturated group.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the term "ethylenically
    unsaturated".


CLS 528/377
TXT Subject matter under subclass 373 wherein at least one reactant contains a
    sulfur atom as a ring atom of a heterocyclic ring.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the term "heterocyclic
    ring".


CLS 528/378
TXT Subject matter under subclass 377 wherein at least one reactant containing
    a heterocyclic ring having at least one sulfur atom as a ring atom is
    polymerized in the presence of a specified material.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for an explanation of the term "specified
    material".


CLS 528/379
TXT Subject matter under subclass 378 wherein the specified material contains a
    Group IA (Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs, Fr) or Group IIA (Be, Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba, Ra)
    metal atom.


CLS 528/380
TXT Subject matter under subclass 377 wherein a sulfur heterocyclic reactant
    contains at least one heterocyclic ring composed of a single sulfur atom
    and two or more carbon atoms and there are no other atoms in the
    heterocyclic ring.


CLS 528/381
TXT Subject matter under subclass 373 wherein a sulfur reactant is elemental
    sulfur or a sulfur-containing inorganic compound.

    (1)     Note.  An inorganic compound for purposes of this subclass is a
    compound which does not fit the parameters set forth for "organic
    compounds" in the GLOSSARY.


CLS 528/382
TXT Subject matter under subclass 381 wherein the inorganic reactant containing
    sulfur is sulfur diozide (SO2).


CLS 528/383
TXT Subject matter under subclass 382 wherein sulfur dioxide is polymerized in
    the presence of a specified material.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for an explanation of the term "specified
    material".


CLS 528/384
TXT Subject matter under subclass 383 wherein the specified material contains a
    metal atom.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for those elements regarded as being "metals".


CLS 528/385
TXT Subject matter under subclass 383 wherein the specified material contains a
    peroxide, free oxygen, air or ozone.

    (1)     Note.  A peroxide denotes a compound containing an -O-O- group.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not include the use of air as a blanket
    or carrier gas.


CLS 528/386
TXT Subject matter under subclass 382 wherein sulfur dioxide is reacted with at
    least one material which contains only atoms of hydrogen and carbon.


CLS 528/387
TXT Subject matter under subclass 381 wherein the inorganic reactant containing
    sulfur is carbon disulfide (CS2) or hydrogen sulfide (H2S).


CLS 528/388
TXT Subject matter under subclass 381 wherein the inorganic sulfur reactant
    contains at least one metal atom or at least one ammonium ion.


CLS 528/389
TXT Subject matter under subclass 381 wherein at least one reactant is
    elemental sulfur.


CLS 528/390
TXT Subject matter under subclass 373 wherein a polymer is prepared from an
    organic reactant containing a    group.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    387,    for a polymer prepared from carbon disulfide.


CLS 528/391
TXT Subject matter under subclass 373 wherein a polymer is prepared from an
    organic reactant containing a sulfur atom bonded to one or more oxygen
    atoms, e.g., sulfonates, sulfones, etc.


CLS 528/392
TXT Subject matter under Class 520, subclass 1 involving polymers derived from
    at least one ethylenically unsaturated reactant and at least one
    non-ethylenically unsaturated reactant or processes of polymerization;
    polymerizable compositions containing at least one ethylenically
    unsaturated reactant and at least one nonethylenically unsaturated reactant
    or processes of preparing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    480+,   for processes of preparing a polymer not involving a chemical
    modification of the polymer, by the addition of a material thereto, and for
    chemically modifying material other than the polymer.  Subclasses 480+ also
    provide for processes of admixing with a broadly claimed nonreactant
    material. (See subclass 1 of Class 523 for the distinction between that
    class and this area, and see in particular, Note 6, 8.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    525,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses for
    processes of chemically reacting a solid polymer.

    526,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 72+ for processes
    of polymerizing an ethylenic monomer in the presence of an ethylenic
    material, which ethylenic material concurrently enters into the polymer by
    reaction with a functional group of the ethylenic monomer and for processes
    of polymerizing ethylenically unsaturated monomers only.


CLS 528/393
TXT Subject matter under subclass 392 wherein at least one of the reactants
    contains a three-membered heterocyclic ring which contains as ring atoms an
    oxygen atom and two carbon atoms.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the term "heterocyclic
    ring".


CLS 528/394
TXT Subject matter under Class 520, subclass 1 involving polymers derived from
    a boron- containing reactant or process of polymerizing; polymerizable
    compositions containing a boron-containing reactant or processes of
    preparing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for a boron-containing reactant wherein a boron atom is bonded to
    at least one atom of hydrogen or carbon.

    480+,   for processes of preparing a polymer not involving a chemical
    modification of the polymer, by the addition of a material thereto, and for
    chemically modifying material other than the polymer.  Subclasses 480+ also
    provide for processes of admixing with a broadly claimed nonreactant
    material. (See subclass 1 of Class 523 for the distinction between that
    class and this area, and see in particular, Note 6, 8.).


CLS 528/395
TXT Subject matter under Class 520, subclass 1 involving polymers derived from
    a heavy metal- or aluminum-containing reactant wherein a heavy metal or
    aluminum atom is devoid of any bonding to hydrogen or to carbon or
    processes of polymerizing; polymerizable compositions containing as a
    reactant a heavy metal- or aluminum-containing reactant, wherein a heavy
    metal or aluminum atom is devoid of any bonding to hydrogen or to carbon or
    processes of preparing.

    (1)     Note.  A heavy metal denotes a metal atom having a specific gravity
    greater than four.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for a heavy metal- or aluminum- containing reactant wherein a heavy
    metal or aluminum atom is bonded to at least one atom of carbon or hydrogen.

    480+,   for processes of preparing a polymer not involving a chemical
    modification of the polymer, by the addition of a material thereto, and for
    chemically modifying material other than the polymer.  Subclasses 480+ also
    provide for processes of admixing with a broadly claimed nonreactant
    material. (See subclass 1 of Class 523 for the distinction between that
    class and this area, and see in particular, Note 6, 8.).


CLS 528/396
TXT Subject matter under Class 520, subclass 1 involving polymers derived from
    a hydrocarbon reactant or process of polymerizing; polymerizable
    compositions containing as a reactant a hydrocarbon material or processes
    of preparing.

    (1)     Note.  A hydrocarbon contains only atoms of carbon and hydrogen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    480+,   for processes of preparing a polymer not involving a chemical
    modification of the polymer, by the addition of a material thereto, and for
    chemically modifying material other than the polymer.  Subclasses 480+ also
    provide for processes of admixing with a broadly claimed nonreactant
    material. (See subclass 1 of Class 523 for the distinction between that
    class and this area, and see in particular, Note 6, 8.).


CLS 528/397
TXT Subject matter under Class 520, subclass 1 involving polymers derived from
    a halogenated hydro-carbon reactant or process of polymerizing;
    polymerizable compositions containing as a reactant a halogenated
    hydrocarbon reactant or processes of preparing.

    (1)     Note.  Included as halogenated hydro- carbons for purposes of this
    subclass are those reactants wherein all of the hydro-carbon atoms have
    been replaced by halogen atoms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    480+,   for processes of preparing a polymer not involving a chemical
    modification of the polymer, by the addition of a material thereto, and for
    chemically modifying material other than the polymer.  Subclasses 480+ also
    provide for processes of admixing with a broadly claimed nonreactant
    material. (See subclass 1 of Class 523 for the distinction between that
    class and this area, and see in particular, Note 6, 8.).


CLS 528/398
TXT Subject matter under Class 520, subclass 1 involving polymers derived from
    a phosphorus-containing reactant or process of polymerizing; polymerizable
    compositions containing as a reactant a phosphorus-containing material or
    processes of preparing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    480+,   for processes of preparing a polymer not involving a chemical
    modification of the polymer, by the addition of a material thereto, and for
    chemically modifying material other than the polymer.  Subclasses 480+ also
    provide for processes of admixing with a broadly claimed nonreactant
    material. (See subclass 1 of Class 523 for the distinction between that
    class and this area, and see in particular, Note 6, 8).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    526,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 274+ for a polymer
    derived from a phosphorus-containing ethylenic reactant as sole monomer or
    for a phosphorus-containing interpolymer wherein all of the reactants used
    in preparing the polymer are ethylenically unsaturated.


CLS 528/399
TXT Subject matter under subclass 398 wherein at least one reactant contains at
    least one phosphorus atom and at least one nitrogen atom.


CLS 528/400
TXT Subject matter under subclass 398 wherein a phosphorus-containing material
    is reacted with an alcohol or alcoholate.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the term "alcohol".


CLS 528/401
TXT Subject matter under Class 520, subclass 1 involving polymers derived from
    a fluorine- containing reactant or process of polymerizing; polymerizable
    compositions containing as a reactant a fluorine-containing material or
    processes of preparing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    480+,   for processes of preparing a polymer not involving a chemical
    modification of the polymer, by the addition of a material thereto, and for
    chemically modifying material other than the polymer.  Subclasses 480+ also
    provide for processes of admixing with a broadly claimed nonreactant
    material. (See subclass 1 of Class 523 for the distinction between that
    class and this area, and see in particular, Note 6, 8).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    526,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 242+ for a polymer
    derived from a fluorine-containing ethylenic reactant as sole monomer of
    fluorine.


CLS 528/402
TXT Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein the fluorine atom is part of a
    compound which contains a heterocyclic ring and wherein part of the
    heterocyclic ring atoms can be represented as an oxygen ether group, e.g.,
    1, 2-epoxy compounds, etc.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the terms "heterocyclic
    ring" and "ether".


CLS 528/403
TXT Subject matter under Class 520, subclass 1 involving polymers derived from
    a heterocyclic reactant having at least one oxygen, selenium, or tellurium
    atom as a ring member or process of polymerizing; polymerizable
    compositions containing as a reactant a heterocyclic compound having as a
    ring member at least one atom of oxygen, selenium, or tellurium and
    processes of preparing.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the term "heterocyclic".

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes those compounds which may contain at
    least one atom of oxygen, selenium, or tellurium together in a heterocyclic
    ring with nitrogen, e.g., oxazolines, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    230+,   for a polymer derived from trioxane, tetraoxane, or
    hexamethylenetetramine.

    377+,   for a polymer derived from a heterocyclic reactant containing at
    least one sulfur atom as a ring member.

    422,    for a polymer derived from a heterocyclic reactant containing only
    nitrogen and carbon as ring atoms.

    480+,   for processes of preparing a polymer not involving a chemical
    modification of the polymer, by the addition of a material thereto, and for
    chemically modifying material other than the polymer.  Subclasses 480+ also
    provide for processes of admixing with a broadly claimed nonreactant
    material. (See subclass 1 of Class 523 for the distinction between that
    class and this area, and see in particular, Note 6, 8).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    526,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 260 for polymers
    derived from only ethylenic monomers and wherein at least one ethylenic
    monomer contains a five-membered heterocyclic ring and at least one of the
    ring members is nitrogen and at least one is a oxygen, and subclasses 266+
    for polymers derived from only ethylenic monomers and wherein at least one
    ethylenic monomer has a heterocyclic ring containing at least one oxygen
    atom as a ring member.


CLS 528/405
TXT Subject matter under subclass 403 wherein at least one heterocyclic
    reactant containing at least one oxygen, selenium, or tellurium atom as
    ring members is reacted with at least one reactant which is devoid of a
    heterocyclic ring containing oxygen, selenium, or tellurium as ring members.


CLS 528/406
TXT Subject matter under subclass 405 wherein the heterocyclic reactant
    contains at least two separate heterocyclic rings each, and wherein each
    ring contains at least one atom of oxygen, selenium, or tellurium as a ring
    member.


CLS 528/407
TXT Subject matter under subclass 406 wherein the reactant which is devoid of a
    heterocyclic ring containing oxygen, selenium, or tellurium as ring members
    contains at least one nitrogen atom.


CLS 528/408
TXT Subject matter under subclass 403 wherein a heterocyclic reactant
    containing oxygen, selenium, or tellurium as ring atoms is polymerized in
    the presence of a specified material.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for an explanation of the term "specified
    material".


CLS 528/409
TXT Subject matter under subclass 408 wherein the specified material contains a
    metal atom.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for those elements regarded as being "metals".


CLS 528/410
TXT Subject matter under subclass 409 wherein the specified material contains
    at least one atom of a transition metal.

    (1)     Note.  Transition metal is limited to elements of atomic numbers
    21-29, 39-47, 57-79, or 89 and higher.


CLS 528/411
TXT Subject matter under subclass 410 wherein the transition metal is a Group
    IVB metal atom (Ti, Zr, Hf).


CLS 528/412
TXT Subject matter under subclass 410 wherein the transition metal is a Group
    VIII metal atom (Fe, Co, Ni, Ru, Rh, Pd, Os, Ir, Pt).


CLS 528/413
TXT Subject matter under subclass 409 wherein the metal is a Group IIA metal
    atom (Be, Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba, Ra).


CLS 528/414
TXT Subject matter under subclass 409 wherein the metal is a Group IIB metal
    atom (Zn, Cd, Hg).


CLS 528/415
TXT Subject matter under subclass 414 wherein the Group IIB metal material
    contains a diverse metal atom in the same compound, or wherein a Group IIB
    material is in admixture with a material which contains a diverse metal
    atom.


CLS 528/416
TXT Subject matter under subclass 409 wherein the specified material contains
    at least one Group IIIA metal atom (Al, Ga, In, Tl).


CLS 528/417
TXT Subject matter under subclass 403 wherein the heterocyclic reactant
    contains only a single hetero atom (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, or selenium) in a
    ring containing three or more carbon atoms and there are no other atoms in
    the ring, e.g., oxetane, etc.


CLS 528/418
TXT Subject matter under subclass 403 wherein the heterocyclic reactant
    contains at least two three-membered heterocyclic rings, and each of said
    heterocyclic rings is composed of two carbon atoms and a single oxygen atom
    as ring members.


CLS 528/419
TXT Subject matter under subclass 403 wherein a polymer is derived from two or
    more reactants with the proviso that at least two separate reactants each
    contain a single three-membered heterocyclic ring having two carbon atoms
    and a single oxygen atom as ring members.


CLS 528/420
TXT Subject matter under subclass 403 wherein a heterocyclic reactant contains
    at least one nitrogen atom and a single three-membered heterocyclic ring
    which contains two carbon atoms and one oxygen atom as ring members.


CLS 528/421
TXT Subject matter under subclass 403 wherein the heterocyclic reactant
    contains a single three-membered heterocyclic ring which is composed of two
    carbon atoms and one oxygen atom.


CLS 528/422
TXT Subject matter under Class 520, subclass 1 involving polymers derived from
    a nitrogen- containing reactant or process of polymerizing; polymerizable
    compositions containing as a reactant a nitrogen-containing material or
    processes of preparing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    480+,   for processes of preparing a polymer not involving a chemical
    modification of the polymer, by the addition of a material thereto, and for
    chemically modifying material other than the polymer.  Subclasses 480+ also
    provide for processes of admixing with a broadly claimed nonreactant
    material. (See subclass 1 of Class 523 for the distinction between that
    class and this area, and see in particular, Note 6, 8).


CLS 528/423
TXT Subject matter under subclass 422 wherein at least one reactant contains a
    heterocyclic ring which has only nitrogen and carbon atoms as ring members.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the term "heterocyclic
    ring".


CLS 528/424
TXT Subject matter under subclass 423 wherein at least one nitrogen
    heterocyclic reactant contains a three-membered heterocyclic ring which has
    two carbon atoms and one nitrogen atom as ring members.


CLS 528/425
TXT Subject matter under Class 520, subclass 1 involving polymers derived from
    an organic oxygen-containing reactant or processes of polymerizing;
    polymerizable compositions containing as a reactant an organic
    oxygen-containing material or processes of preparing.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the term "organic compound".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    480+,   for processes of preparing a polymer not involving a chemical
    modification of the polymer, by the addition of a material thereto, and for
    chemically modifying material other than the polymer.  Subclasses 480+ also
    provide for processes of admixing with a broadly claimed nonreactant
    material. (See subclass 1 of Class 523 for the distinction between that
    class and this area, and see in particular, Note 6, 8).


CLS 528/480
TXT Processes under Class 520, subclass 1 wherein a solid polymer which has
    been derived from at least one ethylenic monomer, or a material which is in
    contact with the polymer, is treated.

    (1)     Note.  Materials with which the polymer is in contact includes the
    reactants forming the polymer, their nonpolymeric reaction products, the
    solvents used for polymerization, etc.

    (2)     Note.  The specific treatments provided herein need not occur in
    the presence of the polymer.  For instance, separating the polymer by
    filtration from a liquid diluent and contacting the liquid diluent which is
    now devoid of polymer with an organic compound would be proper in 491+.

    (3)     Note.  Contacting of the polymer or material in presence therewith,
    with a solid material which is inert and which merely functions as a
    physical barrier, e.g., container, storage, facility, filter paper; or
    which contacts the material so as to cool or heat, or which transports,
    e.g., pipe, tube; or which manipulates, e.g., stirrer, centrifuge, are
    normally not considered as a basis for classification herein.

    (4)     Note.  Contacting with material (subclasses 482-499) requires the
    combination of at least two materials that differ in composition, for
    example, adding more of a given material to a solution containing that
    material would be considered an addition since the solution differs in
    composition from the added material. However, mere division of a stream
    into two portions, followed by a heating or cooling of one of the portions,
    with a subsequent recombining operation of the two portions would not be
    considered "contacting" since the two portions are compositionally
    equivalent.

    (5)     Note.  This subclass provides for those processes wherein the
    desired polymer is not chemically modified.  Processes, however, which
    involve a chemical reaction of material other than the polymer are proper
    herein.

    (6)     Note.  This subclass provides for processes of treating a polymer
    not involving a chemical modification of the polymer, by the addition of a
    material thereto, and for chemically modifying material other than the
    polymer.  Subclasses 480+ also provide for processes of admixing with a
    broadly claimed nonreactant material. (See subclass 1 of Class 523 for the
    distinction between that class and this area, and see in particular, Note
    6, B.)

    SEARCH CLASS:

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 1+ for a
    composition of a previously formed solid polymer and a nonreactive
    material, and appropriate subclasses for processes of chemically modifying
    a solid polymer by the addition of a chemical treating agent thereto.


CLS 528/481
TXT Processes under subclass 480 wherein a polymer or a polymer-containing
    material is cooled to 0oC (32oF) or less, or is heated to a temperature of
    200oC (392oF) or higher.


CLS 528/482
TXT Processes under subclass 480 wherein a solid sorbent mass is used to retain
    on its surface a constituent of a mixture, or wherein an ion-exchange
    material is used to contact the polymer or polymer-containing material.

    (1)     Note.  A solid sorbent is a material which separates a constituent
    from a fluid mixture containing such constitutents in a "quasi chemical"
    manner.  The action in most instances is that of selective retention, e.g.,
    the sorbent removes only the part of the fluid mixture for which it has the
    greatest affinity.  The retained portion cannot be removed by mechanical
    action but generally requires heating or use of a stripping or denuding
    fluid.

            A filter is not proper herein since a filter has no particular
    "chemical" affinity for a constituent of the fluid mixture.  The separation
    in the case of a filter depends upon a mechanical entrapment of the solid
    particles because of their relatively large size compared to the
    interstices or spaces between individual elements of the filter.  In the
    case of a filter, mechanical brushing, wiping, shaping, etc., will remove
    the retained particles.

    (2)     Note.  Solid sorbent includes but is not limited to diatomaceous
    earth, kieselguhr, perlite, activated carbon, asbestor, colloidal clays,
    molecular sieves, etc.

    (3)     Note.  Ion exchange is a process in which ions are chemically
    transferred from a material to a liquid or solid separatory substance or
    exchanger which, because of its chemical structure of loosely bound ions,
    has an affinity for certain ions and gives up some of its own ions to the
    material. The exchange occurs between ions of like charge; the exchanger
    substance can usually be regenerated by passing another material through it
    to elute the previously sorbed ions and replace them with the original kind
    of loosely bounds ions.  These ions exchanger substances are usually solid
    resins.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 90+ for processes of gas
    separation using solid sorbents.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclass 41, for a separatory
    distillation process including the step of passing the produced vapor
    through a solid sorbent.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 660+, for liquid
    purification by ion exchange or sorption.


CLS 528/483
TXT Processes under subclass 480 which involve contacting the
    polymer-containing material with a gaseous material which material is other
    than a carrier, blanket, or drying gas.

    (1)     Note.  "Gas" for purposes herein includes vapor, mist, or smoke.

    (2)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass is the production of a gas by an
    "in situ" reaction wherein the production of the gas is effected by
    treatment in the presence of the polymer.

    (3)     Note.  Air, carbon dioxide, steam, N2, and the inert gases are
    generally the type of gases to be excluded from this subclass by the use of
    the terms "carrier, blanket, or drying gas." Absent any disclosure to the
    contrary "gas" will be taken to mean one of these gaseous materials
    utilized as enumerated above and will be excluded herefrom.

    (4)     Note.  Materials which are bifunctional and which have both a
    carrier, blanket or drying effect and also exhibit another effect such as a
    reactant, or as an extracting medium, are proper for this subclass.


CLS 528/484
TXT Processes under subclass 480 wherein the accumulation of material on the
    reactor wall or on parts of the processing equipment is prevented or
    removed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    526,    Synthetic Resins or natural Rubbers, subclass 74 for a
    polymerization process utilizing a nondiluent-type material so as to
    prevent clogging or fouling of the reactor or processing equipment.


CLS 528/485
TXT Processes under subclass 480 wherein a material containing at least one
    atom of aluminum or of a heavy metal contacts the polymer or the material
    which is in contact with the polymer.


CLS 528/486
TXT Processes under subclass 480 wherein a polymer-containing material is
    contacted with a carboxylic acid, a carboxylic acid salt, or a carboxylic
    acid anhydride.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the term carboxylic acid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    491+,   for contacting in the the presence of a carboxylic acid ester or
    acyl halide.


CLS 528/487
TXT Processes under subclass 480 wherein the polymer or polymer-containing
    material is contacted with a material containing a phosphorus or sulfur
    atom.


CLS 528/488
TXT Processes under subclass 480 wherein the polymer or polymer-containing
    material is contacted with a treating material which contains at least one
    atom of an alkali metal or alkaline earth element.

    (1)     Note.  Alkali metal is limited to elements, Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs, Fr,
    Alkaline earth metal is limited to elements Be, Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba, Ra.


CLS 528/489
TXT Processes under subclass 488 wherein the alkali metal or alkaline earth
    metal is in the form of an oxide or hydroxide.


CLS 528/490
TXT Processes under subclass 480 wherein a polymer or polymer-containing
    material is contacted with a material which is a free element or an
    inorganic compound, which materials are other than air, water, N, and the
    inert gases (Group VIIIA) or mixtures composed solely of these materials.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    491+,   appropriate subclasses for the use of an aqueous organic material
    as a contacting agent.

    499+,   for processes involving the use of water as a contacting agent.


CLS 528/491
TXT Processes under subclass 480 wherein the polymer or polymer-containing
    material is contacted with an organic compound.


CLS 528/492
TXT Processes under subclass 491 wherein the organic compound is a
    nitrogen-containing compound.


CLS 528/493
TXT Processes under subclass 491 wherein the organic compound is an aldehyde or
    ketone.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the term "aldehyde" or
    "ketone".


CLS 528/494
TXT Processes under subclass 491 wherein the organic compound is an
    oxygen-containing ether.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the term "ether".


CLS 528/495
TXT Processes under subclass 491 wherein the organic compound is an alcohol.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY for a definition of the term alcohol.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes phenols as being an alcohol.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    488,    for a contacting agent wherein the hydrogen of a hydoxyl group has
    been replaced by an alkali metal or by an alkaline earth metal atom.


CLS 528/496
TXT Processes under subclass 495 wherein the hydroxy compound contains from one
    to four carbon atoms.


CLS 528/497
TXT Processes under subclass 491 wherein the organic compound consists of atoms
    of hydrogen and carbon only.


CLS 528/498
TXT Processes under subclass 497 wherein the organic compound is devoid of any
    aromatic or cycloaliphatic group.


CLS 528/499
TXT Processes under subclass 480 wherein the polymer or polymer-containing
    material is brought into contact with material.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is contact with water in any of its physical
    forms.


CLS 528/500
TXT Process under subclass 499 wherein the polymer or the polymer-containing
    material is separated by vaporizing and condensing at least a portion of
    the material, so as to isolate in the condensed liquid or in the
    unvaporized portion a comparatively pure compound, which compound was
    present in the original mixture and wherein the separation is effect by
    contacting the material to be separated with steam so as to reduce the
    partial vapor pressure of the component of the material desired to be
    recovered.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes the addition of water which is
    converted to steam in the distillation device as well as the addition of
    steam to the distillation process.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclasses 81+, for distillation
    apparatus utilized in steam stripping or distillation.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclasses 95+, for
    separatory distillation processes including the addition of water or steam
    which are of general utility.


CLS 528/501
TXT Processes under subclass 480 wherein a polymer or polymer-containing
    material is exposed to a pressure decrease so as to effect a separation
    therein, or wherein a polymer or polymer-containing material is subjected
    to a distillation operation so as to effect a separation therein.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are processes of effecting a separation by
    cooling under a reduced pressure, or by partial vaporization by a sudden
    pressure reduction, such as by the introduction of a feed stream under
    pressure high enough to prevent ebullition into a zone of lesser pressure,
    which introduction results in the volatizing of at least a portion of the
    distilland.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    503,    for a process of vaporizing material under heat without any attempt
    to condense the volatized component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 9+ for processes of liquefaction wherein
    autorefrigeration by pressure reduction is utilized to effect separation.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, for processes of general utility for
    concentrating solids in solution or suspension by volatizing the liquid and
    note especially subclass 2.1 for flash evaporators of general utility.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, for apparatus for carrying out
    distillation processes.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, for processes of general
    utility for separation of the components of a feed mixture by distillation.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, for distillation processes
    wherein the comparatively pure component recovered is a mineral oil.


CLS 528/502
TXT Processes under subclass 480 wherein the polymer or polymer-containing
    material is treated by the application of a physical force.

    (1)     Note.  Generally the physical force which acts upon the material
    causes a deformation, flow, or breakdown of the material, e.g., cutting,
    comminuting, shearing, etc.


CLS 528/503
TXT Processes under subclass 480 wherein the polymer or polymer-containing
    material is held at a constant temperature other than ambient or heat is
    applied, or cooling is utilized.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes processes which consist in holding
    the effluent from a polymerization zone at a constant temperature, as well
    as holding the recovered polymer at some constant temperature to effect
    some alteration in its properties.

            CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


    The following subclasses are collections of published disclosure pertaining
    to various aspects of art relating to solid polymers, and which aspects do
    not form an appropriate base for subclass classification in the
    classification schedule.

    (1)     Note.  Disclosures are placed for value as a search aid and in no
    instance do they represent the entire extent of the prior art.


CLS 528/901
TXT Subject matter involving  Si-H or -Si-C -containing materials which
    normally cure by reaction at ambient temperature with atmospheric moisture.


CLS 528/902
TXT Subject matter involving particulate polymers formed from at least one
    -N=C=C- containing reactant (X is a chalcogen atom).


CLS 528/903
TXT Subject matter involving the treating of a polymer derived from at least
    one -N=C=X- containing reactant (X is a chalcogen atom) or the polymerizing
    of at least one -N=C=X- containing reactant in the substantial absence of
    water, e.g., under anhydrous conditions.


CLS 528/904
TXT Subject matter involving a polymer derived from at least one -N=C=X-
    containing reactant (X is a chalcogen atom) which has a specific affinity
    for or aversion to water, i.e., possessing hydrophilic or hydrophobic
    properties.


CLS 528/905
TXT Subject matter involving a polymer derived from at least one -N=C=X-
    containing reactant (X is a chalcogen atom) which has adhesive properties.


CLS 528/906
TXT Subject matter involving a polymer derived from at least one -N=C=X-
    containing reactant (X is a chalcogen atom) which is utilizable as a fiber
    or has elastomeric properties.


CLS 528/930
TXT GUAYULE RUBBER:

    Subject matter involving guayule rubber.


CLS 528/931
TXT PHYSICAL TREATMENT OF NATURAL RUBBER OR NATURAL RUBBER CONTAINING MATERIAL
    OR CHEMICAL TREATMENT OF NONRUBBER PORTION THEREOF, E.G., EXTRACTION OR
    RUBBER FROM MILK WEED, ETC.:

    Subject matter relating to the recovery and physical processing of natural
    rubber.


CLS 528/932
TXT Protein removal or conversion:

    Subject matter under subclass 931 relating to treatments which remove or
    convert the protein portion of natural rubber as obtained from the plant
    source.


CLS 528/933
TXT Resin removal or conversion:

    Subject matter under subclass 931 relating to treatments to remove or
    convert the resin portion of natural rubber as obtained from the plant
    source.


CLS 528/934
TXT Latex:

    Subject matter under subclass 931 relating to natural rubber latex.


CLS 528/935
TXT Preserving or stabilizing:

    Subject matter under subclass 934 relating to preserving or stabilizing
    natural rubber latex.


CLS 528/936
TXT Coagulating:

    Subject matter under subclass 934 relating to coagulation of natural rubber
    latex.


CLS 528/937
TXT Concentrating, e.g., creaming etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 934 relating to concentration of natural
    rubber latex.


CLS 528/950
TXT Polymers useful for replacing hard animal tissues, e.g., dentures bones,
    etc.:

    Subject matter pertaining to synthetic resins for use in replacing or
    restoring partially or wholly hard tissue as normally found in animals.

    (1)     Note.  The type of polymers found here would be those found
    anywhere in the Class 520 Series, with the exception of those found as part
    of a composition. This subclass, therefor, would include both polymers
    derived from ethylenic monomers only or polymers from condensed monomers
    only.

    (2)     Note.  Specifically excluded from this subclass are synthetic hair
    or skin and contact lenses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, for the methods of treating living body and apparatus used
    in inspection and treatment of diseases, wounds, and other abnormal
    conditions of animals.

    433,    Dentistry, for methods, apparatus, implements and devices relating
    to the treatment of teeth or gums, or replacement of teeth.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses
    particularly Class 523, subclasses 105+ for nonmedicated compositions
    containing a synthetic resin having utility specifically intended to be for
    contact with animal living tissue, especially subclasses 109 and 113-120
    for dental compositions or to processes of preparing said compositions.

    604,    Surgery, for medicators and applicators.

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, appropriate subclasses for artificial parts for
    human bodies peculiarly adapted and structured to replace missing members
    or to repair a defect in a human body.


CLS 530/
TTL CHEMISTRY:  NATURAL RESINS OR DERIVATIVES; PEPTIDES OR PROTEINS; LIGNINS OR
    REACTION PRODUCTS THEREOF

CLS 530/200
TXT Natural resin derivatives which are not pure compounds, and processes of
    treating natural resins or derivatives.

    (1)     Note.  Natural resins are water-insoluble mixtures of compounds
    derived from trees, especially conifers.  Many of the compounds present in
    natural resins have a hydroaromatic structure.  These compounds are often
    recovered as mixtures of isomeric carboxylic acids, such as abietic and
    pimaric acids, which occur in rosin.  The resins occur in nature in
    solvent-free form, such as fossil coal or copal resins, wood rosin in old
    pine tree stumps, etc., or in the form of tree sap, such as pine oleoresin,
    where they are dissolved in terpenic hydrocarbons, such as spirits of
    turpentine.  Another major source of natural resin is papermaking waste
    from which a solution of rosin in mixed fatty acids, known as tall oil, is
    recovered.

    (2)     Note.  See (1) Note under subclass 210 for a description of the
    constituents of and types of rosin.

    (3)     Note.  Tall oil, which is a liquid, is provided for here, along
    with its constituents and derivatives, because of significant resin acid
    content (34 - 40%).  See (1) Note under subclass 205 for description of
    tall oil and (3) Note for tall oil fatty acids.

    (4)     Note.  Some of the natural resins encompassed by this and indented
    subclasses include, but are not limited to:  wood, gum and tall oil rosin;
    wood or pine tar or pitch; shellac; copals from various sources, both
    recent and fossil, such as Congo, Manila, etc.; amber; dammar; kauri; coal
    resin; gum accroides; sandarac; cativo resin; etc.

    (5)     Note.  This and indented subclasses (200+) provide for the
    production of mixtures of compounds from natural resins, whether or not the
    individual compounds have a known chemical structure.

    (6)     Note.  The production of a pure resin acid or its derivative of
    known chemical structure from natural resins is classified in the class and
    subclass providing for the compound produced.

    (7)     Note.  Compositions comprising natural resin or its derivative,
    together with another component, and having a known utility, are classified
    in the appropriate composition class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, for compositions wherein a
    natural resin or tall oil is utilized.

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes for growing therein-defined
    single-crystal of all types of materials, including inorganic or organic.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, for processes of liberating
    cellulosic fibers which include the recovery of an organic by-product.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, including the classes which
    are part of the 520 series, for synthetic resin compositions wherein a
    natural resin or tall oil is utilized.

    536,    Organic Compounds, for gums which are water-soluble highly branched
    polysaccharides found in exudations of plants.


CLS 530/201
TXT Processes under subclass 200 wherein the starting material is shellac, or a
    shellac-containing substance, or products of such processes.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are starting materials wherein the shellac
    has been previously modified, e.g., by bleaching, formation of a
    derivative, etc.


CLS 530/202
TXT Processes under subclass 200 wherein the starting material is cut wood, or
    products of such processes.

    (1)     Note.  A major product of the processes under this subclass is wood
    rosin.

    (2)     Note.  See (1)  Note under subclass 210 for description of the
    constituents of and types of rosin.


CLS 530/203
TXT Processes under subclass 200 wherein the starting material is plant sap or
    a fossilized substance, or products of such processes.

    (1)     Note.  The starting materials include, but are not limited to:
    copals from various sources, e.g., Congo, Manila, Pontianac, etc.; coal
    which contains admixtures of resin, such as Utah; amber; dammar; kauri; gum
    accroides; etc.


CLS 530/204
TXT Processing under subclass 203 wherein the starting material is pine
    oleoresin, or products of such processes.

    (1)     Note.  Pine oleoresin is the fresh sap of living pine trees and is
    variously referred to in the trade as gum turpentine, pine gum, pine resin,
    etc.

    (2)     Note.  A major product of the processes under this subclass is gum
    rosin.

    (3)     Note.  See (1) Note under subclass 210 for description of the
    constituents of and types of rosin.


CLS 530/205
TXT Processes under subclass 200 wherein:  (1) tall oil or a derivative thereof
    is recovered from papermaking waste; (2) one or more components are
    separated from tall oil; (3) tall oil is purified; or products of such
    processes.

    (1)     Note.  Tall oil is a by-product of the wood pulp industry and is
    usually recovered from pine wood "black liquor" of the sulfate or kraft
    paper processes.  A typical composition of tall oil includes 50-60% fatty
    acids (e.g., oleic, linoleic, etc.), 34-40% rosin acids, and 5-10%
    unsaponifiable matter, such as long chain alcohols and sterols.

    (2)     Note.  Some of the products isolated from tall oil include, but are
    not limited to, tall oil rosin, tall oil fatty acids, tall oil pitch,
    mixtures of oleic and linoleic acid, etc.

    (3)     Note.  Although "tall oil fatty acids" contain at least 90% of free
    fatty acids, they are included among natural resins because of a measurable
    content of rosin acids (up to 10%).

    (4)     Note.  Compositions containing tall oil or its reaction product as
    an ingredient thereof and having a known utility are classified in the
    appropriate composition class providing therefor.


CLS 530/206
TXT Processes under subclass 205 wherein there is utilized an organic material
    containing sulfur or nitrogen, or products of such processes.


CLS 530/207
TXT Processes under subclass 205 which include an esterification step, or
    products of such processes.


CLS 530/208
TXT Process under subclass 205 wherein there is utilized an inorganic material,
    or products of such processes.


CLS 530/209
TXT Processes under subclass 208 wherein there is utilized a material
    containing phosphorus, heavy metal, elemental hydrogen, sulfur dioxide, or
    carbon dioxide; or products of such processes.


CLS 530/210
TXT Processes under subclass 200 wherein rosin or a derivative thereof is used
    as starting material, or products of such processes.

    (1)     Note.  Rosin, also known as colophony, is usually designated
    according to its source, e.g., gum rosin (from exudate of incisions on
    living trees); wood rosin (from Southern pine stumps); and tall oil rosin
    (from by-products of the wood pulp industry).  The principal constituents
    isolated from rosin are carboxylic acids with a hydrophenanthrene nucleus,
    comprising abietic acid and its isomers, such as pimaric acid.  The acids
    may exist in rosin as acid anhydrides.  The mixed acids are known in the
    trade as rosin acids or resin acids, the two terms being used
    interchangeably.

    (2)     Note.  Abietic acid has the following structure:

    (3)     Note.  This and indented subclasses (210+) provide for the
    production of mixtures of compounds from rosin or its derivatives, whether
    or not the individual compounds have a known chemical structure.

    (4)     Note.  The production of a pure resin (rosin) acid or its
    derivative of known chemical structure from rosin or its derivative is
    classified in a class and subclass providing for the compound produced.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, for compositions wherein a resin
    is utilized.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, including the classes which
    are part of the 520 series, for synthetic resin compositions wherein a
    natural resin is utilized.


CLS 530/211
TXT Processes under subclass 210 wherein rosin or a derivative thereof is
    polymerized, or products of such processes.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass, and the indented subclass 212, are limited to
    polymers of rosin, per se, of a single derivative of rosin, e.g., an ester,
    hydrogenated rosin, etc., or of a mixture of two or more types of rosin,
    derivatives, etc.  The most common product is dimer rosin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    525,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 54.4+, for reaction
    products of natural resins with a preformed solid polymer or specified
    intermediate condensation product (SICP).

    526,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 238.3, for polymers
    derived solely from ethylenic reactants at least one of which is a natural
    resin.

    527,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 600+, for solid
    polymers derived from natural resin or derivative by means of chemical
    reaction with a nonresin reactant.


CLS 530/212
TXT Processes under subclass 211 wherein polymerized rosin or a derivative
    thereof undergoes further chemical treatment or color modification, or
    products of such processes.


CLS 530/213
TXT Processes under subclass 210 wherein there is utilized a material
    containing boron or phosphorus, or products of such processes.


CLS 530/214
TXT Products under subclass 210 which include a six-membered ring formed by the
    addition of an alkene or alkyne to the 1,4 - positions of a conjugated
    diene.

    (1)     Note.  An example of such a reaction may be represented as follows:


    (2)     Note.  All adducts included in this class are mixtures formed from
    the mixed hydrophenanthrene acids or derivatives thereof present in rosin.
    An example of an adduct of an individual rosin acid with fumaric acid is:



CLS 530/215
TXT Processes under subclass 210 wherein the carboxyl group of rosin or of a
    derivative thereof is esterified, or products of such processes.

    (1)     Note.  Search this class, appropriate subclasses, for the
    esterification of rosin via an alcoholic hydroxy group which has been
    introduced into rosin by a chemical reaction, e.g., with formaldehyde.


CLS 530/216
TXT Processes under subclass 215 wherein esterified rosin or a derivative
    thereof undergoes further chemical treatment or color modification, or
    products of such processes.


CLS 530/217
TXT Processes under subclass 215 wherein the esterification utilizes an oxygen
    ring containing compound or a halogen containing material, or products of
    such processes.


CLS 530/218
TXT Processes under subclass 215 wherein the esterification utilizes a
    polyhydroxy containing material, or products of such processes.


CLS 530/219
TXT Processes under subclass 210 wherein there is utilized a material
    containing sulfur, selenium or tellurium, or products of such processes.

    (1)     Note.  Many patents in this subclass are directed to the
    disproportionation reaction involving an intra and inter-molecular
    rearrangement of the hydrogen atoms in the rosin acids to convert them into
    acids which lack nonbenzenoid double bond conjugation and are therefore
    more stable to oxidation than abietic acid.  Dehydroabietic acid, one of
    the principal products of disproportionation, contains one aromatic ring in
    the hydrophenanthrene nucleus.


CLS 530/220
TXT Processes under subclass 219 wherein the material containing sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium is inorganic.


CLS 530/221
TXT Processes under subclass 210 wherein there is utilized a nitrogen
    containing material, or products of such processes.


CLS 530/222
TXT Processes under subclass 221 wherein the material containing nitrogen is
    inorganic.


CLS 530/223
TXT Processes under subclass 210 wherein rosin or a derivative thereof is
    reacted with hydrogen, or products of such processes.


CLS 530/224
TXT Processes under subclass 210 wherein salts of rosin acids are formed using
    a metal containing material, or products of such processes.

    (1)     Note.  Metal salts of mixed naturally occurring resin (rosin)
    acids, also referred to as rosin soaps or metal resinates, are included in
    this and the indented subclass 225.

    (2)     Note.  The production of a pure rosin acid derivative of known
    chemical structure from rosin or its derivative is classified in the class
    and subclass providing for the compound produced.

    (3)     Note.  Compositions comprising a metal resinate and another
    component, such as water, excess alkali, etc., and having a known utility
    are classified in the appropriate composition class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 218+, for sizing
    compositions containing metal resinates.


CLS 530/225
TXT Processes under subclass 224 wherein the metal is an alkali metal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 367.1 for soap compositions containing
    alkali-metal salts of rosin acids.

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses, particularly subclasses 129, 141+, 343, 353+, 389, 437, 454,
    and 481+, for cleaning compositions which may comprise alkali-metal salts
    of rosin acids.


CLS 530/226
TXT Processes under subclass 210 wherein rosin or a derivative thereof is
    subjected to heat treatment in the absence of any additional nonrosin
    organic reactant, or products of such processes.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides, among other things, for certain
    disproportionation reactions.  See (2) Note under subclass 219 for a
    description of the disproportionation reaction.


CLS 530/227
TXT Processes under subclass 226 wherein a metal, halogen or silicon containing
    material is utilized, or products of such processes.


CLS 530/228
TXT Processes under subclass 210 for purification of rosin or its derivatives,
    or products of such processes.


CLS 530/229
TXT Processes under subclass 228 which utilize immiscible solvents, or products
    of such processes.


CLS 530/230
TXT Processes under subclass 200 wherein the starting material used is tall oil
    or a derivative thereof, or products of such processes.

    (1)     Note.  Tall oil is a by-product of the wood pulp industry and is
    usually recovered from pine wood "black liquor" of the sulfate or kraft
    paper processes.  A typical composition of tall oil includes 50-60% fatty
    acids (e.g., oleic, linoleic, etc.), 34-40% rosin acids, and 5-10%
    unsaponifiable matter, such as long chain alcohols and sterols.

    (2)     Note.  Although "tall oil fatty acids" contain at least 90% of free
    fatty acids, they are included among natural resins because of a measurable
    content of rosin acids (up to 10%).

    (3)     Note.  Compositions containing tall oil or its reaction product as
    an ingredient thereof and having a known utility are classified in the
    appropriate composition class providing therefor.


CLS 530/231
TXT Processes under subclass 230 which utilize a nitrogen containing material,
    or products of such processes.


CLS 530/232
TXT Processes under subclass 230 wherein the acids present in tall oil are
    esterified, or products of such processes.


CLS 530/233
TXT Processes under subclass 230 wherein a material containing sulfur, boron
    phosphorus, or iodine is utilized, or products of such processes.


CLS 530/300
TXT PEPTIDES OF 3 TO 100 AMINO ACID RESIDUES:

    Compounds under the class definition consisting of three or more amino
    acids joined covalently by peptide bonds.

    (1)     Note.  A peptide bond is an amino bond between the carboxyl group
    of one amino acid and the amino group of another.

    (2)     Note.  The border line, for purposes of subclasses 300 to 427,
    between peptides and proteins has been drawn at 100 amino acid residues or
    a molecular weight of about 10,000 where the number of residues is unknown.

    (3)     Note.  Related peptides.  A peptide is classifiable in a given
    subclass if its structure corresponds to at least half the amino acid
    residues of the named peptide.  The product of side chain substitution, C
    or N terminal chain will be classified with the named peptide as related
    peptides.  The product of a replacement reaction will be classified as a
    related peptide so long as less than half the amino acid residues of the
    named peptide have been replaced.  The product of a removal reaction or a
    partial sequence (i.e., fragments) will be classifed as a related peptide
    if half the amino acid residues of the named peptide are present.
    Polypeptides which are formed by joining the named peptide of identical
    sequence to the named peptide should be originally classified on the basis
    of the named peptide and cross-referenced to the appropriate subclasses.

    (4)     Note.  Functional Analogues.  Peptides claimed or disclosed as a
    functional analogue should be classified on the basis of structure, i.e.,
    is the structure of the analogue a related peptide, and cross-referenced to
    the subclass providing for the named peptide that the patented peptide is
    claimed or disclosed as functioning like. If there is no structural
    information present in the patent or otherwise obtainable on the structural
    analogue, the patent should be originally classified in the generic peptide
    subclass and cross-referenced to the subclass providing for the named
    peptides.

    (5)     Note.  Joined peptide subunits.  In the case where peptide chains
    are joined by covalent bonding as by S-S bonds through cysteine the number
    of amino acids in the peptide is the sum of the individual chains.

    (6)     Note.  IUPAC-IUB Nonmenclature.  Published in Archives of
    Biochemistry and Biophysics.

    Title

    Abbreviations and Symbols for Chemical Names of Special Interest in
    Biological Chemistry; Revised Tentative Rules (1965); Section 5, Nucleic
    Acids and Nucleotides, year (1966), Volume 115, pages 1-12.



    Abbreviated Designation of Amino Acid Derivatives and Peptides, year
    (1967), Volume 123, pages 1-5.



    Rules for Naming Synthetic Modifications of Natural Peptides, year (1966),
    Volume 121, pages 6-8.

    Abbreviated Nonmenclature of Synthetic Polypeptides (polymerized Amino
    Acid), year (1968), Volume 123, pages 633-637.



    A One-Letter Notation for Amino Acids, year (1968), Volume 125, pages 1-5.



    Abbreviations and Symbols for the Description of the Conformation of
    Polypeptides Chains; Tentative Rules (1969), year (1971), Volume 145, pages
    405-421.

    (7)     Note.  CAS REGISTRY NUMBERS Chemical Abstract Service (CAS)
    Registry Numbers are unique identifiers assigned to chemical substances
    recorded in the CAS Chemical Registry System.

    The CAS Registry Number itself has no chemical significance; it is simply a
    machine-checkable number assigned to each substance as it enters the
    Registry System.

    CAS Registry Numbers appear in CA issues and in many computer-readable
    files.  They also may be found in several primary journals, various
    handbooks, and in the National Library handbooks, and in the National
    Library of Medicine's TOXLINE and CHEMLINE computer-based
    information-retrieval services.  For more about the CAS Chemical Registry
    System or Registry System or Registry Numbers consult the introduction to
    the CAS REGISTRY HANDBOOK-Number Section.

    Medical Subject Headings:

    Mesh Tree Numbers:
    Mesh numbers are identifiers applied to the National Library of Medicine's
    indexers to articles in the medical and related literature.  The subject
    headings are Index Medicus headings and are arranged in a hierarchical
    matter.  The abstracts and indexing are available on line through several
    data base suppliers.

    Deleted Registry Numbers:

    The CA registry numbers found in the definitions of subclass 300 to 427 are
    the current registry numbers.  However, due to the long history and
    incomplete structural knowledge of peptide and protein chemistry, there are
    usually several deleted registry numbers for each current registry number.
    The current registry number should be used to find the deleted numbers in
    the registry file and should always be included in the online search
    statement.  For further information on search technique related to deleted
    registry numbers see, CAS ONLINE NEWS May/June 1984, page 5.

    (8)     Note.  Structure.  The primary structure of the shorter peptide has
    been included in the definitions. For the larger peptides the Merck
    Monograph will often provide citations to articles disclosing the
    structure.  The structure of the larger peptides and proteins may be found
    on the on-line services by using the compound name, Chemical Abstracts
    Registry Number, or National Library of Medicine's MESH tree number in
    combination with the terms "sequence" or "structure".

    (9)     Note.  Compositions.  In general a peptide or protein containing
    composition will be provided for in a class providing for the function or
    utility of the composition, e.g., medicine, food, Class 252, utilities, etc.

    A peptide mixed with a preserving agent whose sole function is to prevent
    chemical or physical change is provided for with the peptide or protein.

    A peptide derived from a single source material such as a plant or animal
    extract, so long as it is identified as a protein or peptide, is classified
    in this class (530) even if a Class 424 utility is disclosed or claimed.  A
    plant or animal extract will be provided in Class 424 if it is (a) a single
    source material and (b) is of undetermined chemical constitution, i.e., is
    claimed in terms of isolation technique or physical properties.  A
    recitation as broad as "peptide" is enough to defeat placement in Class 424
    on the basis of utility.

    Class 424 will provide for an additive mixture containing a peptide and
    other ingredients if the mixture has a Class 424 utility.

    (10)    Note.  Classification of the more common amino acids:

    Amino Acids     Classification

    Amino Acids commonly found in peptides and proteins:

    Alanine 562/575

    Arginine        562/560

    Asparagine      562/561

    Aspartic acid   562/571

    Cysteine        562/557

    Glutamine       562/563

    Glutamic acid   562/573

    Glycine 562/575

    Histidine       548/344

    Isoleucine      562/575

    Leucine 562/575

    Lysine  562/562

    Methionine      562/559

    Phenylalanine   562/445

    Proline 548/535

    Serine  562/567

    Threonine       562/570

    Tryptophan      548/496

    Tyrosine        562/444

    Rare amino acids from protein

    Desmosine       546/335

    5 Hydroxyl-
    sine    562/564

    5 Hydroxypro-
    line    548/532

    Isodesmosine    546/335

    3-Methylthist-
    idine   548/335

    E-N-Methylly-
    sine    562/561

    Nonprotein Amino Acids

    B-Alanine       562/567

    V-Aminobu-
    tyric Acid      562/553

    Canavanine      562/560

    Citrulline      562/560

    B-Cyanva-
    lanine  260/465

    Djenkolic
    acid    562/557

    Homocysteine    562/556

    Homoserine      562/567

    Ornithine       562/561

    Valine  526/575

    (11)    Note.  Synthetic Resins vs.  Polypeptides.  The conceptual
    difference between the subject matter of synthetic resins provided for in
    the 520 series and polypeptides (including proteins) provided for in Class
    530 is that the compounds of the 520 series have statistically distributed
    amino acids or blocks of amino acids in their molecules in a random
    sequence whereas 530 provides for molecules composed of a specific sequence
    of amino acids defined identity and order (i.e., primary structure) having
    identity or closed relation to a humorial or cellular polypeptide or having
    some humorial or cellular effect due to its ordered structure.

    (12)    Note.  Peptide and Protein Structure.  The nature, i.e., identity,
    of the constituent amino acids and their sequence is referred to as the
    primary structure.  A primary structure will have a definite three
    dimensional structure which is called the secondary structure (usually
    helical coiling).  The secondary structure of a large peptide or protein is
    wrapped about and interwoven to develop the overall three dimensional
    structure of the molecule.  This arrangement of the secondary structure is
    referred to as the tertiary structure and determines the alosteric
    properties of many proteins.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes for growing therein-defined
    single-crystal of all types of materials, including inorganic or organic.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, has the
    following subclasses for proteins or proteinaceous material 1.11+, for
    radionuclide or intended radionuclide containing; 418, 456, 460, 477+,
    491+, 499, 520+; for a protein or peptide containing composition which
    functions as an antiperspirant or deodorant; 85.1+ for a composition
    containing a lymphokine; 130.1+ for a composition containing an
    immunoglobulin, an antiserum, an antibody, or an antibody fragment; 184.1+
    for a composition containing an antigen, an epitope, or another
    immunospecific immunoeffector that may be proteinaceous; 278.1+ for a
    composition containing a nonspecific immunoeffector that may be
    proteinaceous; 94.1+, for compositions containing proteins identified as
    enzymes; 520+, for compositions many of which are considered to be
    proteinaceous; an animal extract of undetermined constitution; 115+ for
    compositions which may be proteins or peptides identified by elemental
    analysis.

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 59, 537, 539, 629, 640, 642, and 643 for compositions
    containing proteins used in forming an image.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 68.1+
    for microbial or enzymatic synthesis of proteins and peptides; subclasses
    183+ for the production of enzymes; and subclasses 74+ for the formation of
    immobilized enzymes and subclasses 269 and 272+ for the liberation or
    purification of proteins by means of a microorganism or enzyme,
    particularly subclass 273 for the purification of collagen or gelatin.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclass 15 for a
    protein containing composition used as a standard or control; 16, for a
    blood standard; 66, for tests for hemoglobin or myoglobin, 66 for test for
    blood clotting factor tests, 86+ for tests for proteins or peptides
    including sequencing methods and subclass 501 for a complement binding
    assay and protein binding assays and subclasses 506-548 for tests using
    antigen antibody interactions in a chemical test, particularly subclasses
    543-548 which collect methods of modifying antigens and antibodies as part
    of a testing procedure.

    514,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 1-21
    and cross-reference art collections 800-809 which provide for compositions
    having a 424 utility containing a peptide or protein as an organic active
    ingredient.

    524,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 9+ for plant or
    derived cellular material, subclasses 17+ for proteins or biologically
    active polypeptides for a process in which the protein or polypeptide is
    physically mixed with a preformed resin and subclasses 70+ for a process of
    adding a protein or biologically active polypeptide to resin forming
    ingredients during reaction of the resin formers and the protein or
    polypeptide is nonreactive.

    525,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 54.1 for the chemical
    reaction of a peptide or protein with a preformed resin and subclass 54.11
    for processes of stepwise assembly of a polypeptide on a preformed polymer,
    i.e., solid phase synthesis when there is no claimed cleavage of the
    synthesized polypeptide.

    526,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 238.1 for the
    formation of a synthetic resin from a protein or biologically active
    polypeptide where the protein or polypeptide as well as all other reactants
    are ethylenically unsaturated.

    528,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, particularly subclass 328 for
    a polymer of amino acids and methods of making such a polyamino acid.

    930,    Peptide or Protein Sequence, subclasses 10+ for peptide or protein
    sequences of four or more amino acids.

    935,    Genetic Engineering: Recombinant DNA Technology, Hybrid or Fused
    Cell Technology, and Related Manipulation of Nucleic Acids, appropriate
    subclasses for processes of producing peptides and proteins by the methods
    of recombinant DNA technology or the use of hybrid or fused cell technology.


CLS 530/301
TXT Thymopoietins or lipotropins; related peptides:

    Peptides under subclass 300 containing at least half the amino acid
    residues in sequence of the polypeptide with the structure of Thymopoietin.

    I.      -GLY-GLN-PHE-LEU-GLU-
    ASP-PRO-SER-VAL-LEU-
    THR-LYS-GLU-LYS-LEU-
    LYS-SER-GLU-LEU-VAL-
    ALA-ASN-ASN-VAL-THR-
    LEU-PRO-ALA-GLY-GLU-
    GLN-ARG-LYS-ASP-VAL-
    TYR-VAL-GLN-LEU-TYR-
    ARG

    II.     -SER-GLN-PHE-LEU-GLU-
    ASP-PRO-SER-VAL-LEU-
    THR-LYS-GLU-LYS-LEU-
    LYS-SER-GLU-LEU-VAL-
    ALA-ASN-ASN-VAL-THR-
    LEU-PRO-ALA-GLY-GLU-
    GLN-ARG-LYS-ASP-VAL-
    TYR-VAL-GLN-LEU-TYR-
    LEU-GLN-THR-LEU-THR-
    ALA-VAL-LYS-ARG-
    Or has half structure of lipotropin.

    (1)     Note.  Thymopoietins; Physical Properties:

    I      II

    Number of Residues:       49     49

    Molecular Weight:        5,583  5,574

    (2)     Note.  Lipotropins; Physical Properties.

    Beta     Gamma

    Number of Residues:     91       58

    Molecular Weight:     9894

    (3)     Note.  Thymopoietins; Physiological properties.

    Thymopoietin II induces T lymphocyte differentiation.

    (4)     Note.  Lipotropins; Physiological properties.  Stimulates release
    of fatty acids from adipose tissue.  Belongs to the ATCH family of peptide
    hormones.

    (5)     Note.  Thymopoietins; Synonyms.  Thymin

    (6)     Note.  Lipotropins; Synonyms:  Adiposin, Lipidmobilizing hormone,
    Lipolytic hormone, Pituitary lipotropic hormone, Adipozin, Pituitary
    lipotropin LPH, adikopinetic hormone.

    (7)     Note.  CA Registry Numbers of unmodified forms:

    Thymopoietins    Lipotropins

    60529-76-2      9035-55-6

    Mesh tree number:

    D6.472.910.80               D6.472.734.525.480

    Merk Index Monograph:

    10:9252  9:5351

            10:5340

            10:3534

    SEARCH CLASS:

    930,    Peptide or Protein Sequence, subclass 180 for thymus derived
    hormone or factor peptide or protein sequences.


CLS 530/302
TXT Endorphins and enkephalins; related peptides:

    Peptides under subclass 300 containing at least half the amino acid
    residues in sequence of the polypeptide with the structure:



    Methionine enkephalin

    H-Tyr-Gly-Gly-Phe-Met-OH



    Leucine enkephalin or of Endorphin: H-Try-Gly-Gly-Phe-Leu-OH

    Tyr-Gly-Gly-Phe-Met-Thr-Ser-Gin-Thr-Pro-Leu-Val-Thr-Leu-Phe-Lys-Asn-Ala-Ile-
    Ile-Lys-Asn-Ala-Tyr-Lys-Lys-Gly-Glu-.



    Human Beta-Endorphin

    (1)     Note.  Physical Properties:  Number of Residues

      ENDORPHIN                   ENKEPHAL IN

    31      5

    MW  3,465       MW 575

    (2)     Note.  Physiological Properties:

      Endorphins, Morphine like action.  Found in brain, cerebrospinal fluid,
    pituitary and other organs.  Function as neuromodulators or transmitters.
    Enkephalins.  Pentapeptides which mimic the action of morphine.
    Synthesized in the brain and pituitary possibly by degradation of
    endorphins.

    (3)     Note.  Synonyms.
      Endorphins:  Endogenous opiates, opiod peptides.

    Enkephalins:  Morphine line factor, pituitary opiate peptide.

    (4)     Note.  CA Registry Numbers of unmodified form:

      ENDORPHIN
    60118-07-2

    Mesh Tree number:

      ENDORPHIN                   ENKEPHALIN

    D12.644.150                   D12.644.150.250

    D12.776.641.640      D12.776.641.240.250

    D16.538.321                  D16.538.321.345

    Merck Index Monograph

    10:3534 10:3534

    SEARCH CLASS:

    930,    Peptide or Protein Sequence, subclass 80 for endorphin or
    enkephaline peptide or protein sequences.


CLS 530/303
TXT Insulin; related peptides:

    Peptides under subclass 300 containing at least half the amino acid
    residues in sequence of the polypeptide with the structure of insulin.

    (1)     Note.  Physiological properties.  Regulates carbohydrate
    metabolism, influences protein and RNA synthesis and the storage of neutral
    lipids.

    (2)     Note.  Synonyms.  Iletin, Endopancrine, Insular, Insulyl, Iszilin,
    Decuruon, Actrapid.

    (3)     Note.  CA Registry Numbers of unmodified form:  9004-10-8

    Mesh tree number:
    D6.472.610.575
    D9.482.500

    Merck Index Monograph:
    9: 4859
    10:4866


CLS 530/304
TXT Metal complexes, e.g., zn-insulin, etc:

    Peptides under subclass 303 in which the peptide is a complex of insulin
    and a metal.

    (1)     Note.  Typically the complex is formed by the addition of zinc
    chloride or a mixture of zinc chloride and protamine sulfate to insulin.

    (2)     Note.  Examples:  Neutral Protamine Hagedorn Insulin, Lente
    Insulin, Insulin Novo Lente, Depo-Insulin, Deposulin; Insulyl-Retard.

    (3)     Note.  CA Registry Numbers of unmodified form:  9004-10-8

    Mesh Index  Monograph:
    Protamine Zinc Insulin
    D6.472.610.575.574
    D9.482.500.642

    Merk Index Monograph:
    9:4862
    10:4869
    10:7786


CLS 530/305
TXT Isolation or purification:

    Subject matter under subclass 303, in which preexisting insulin is isolated
    or separated.

    (1)     Note.  Typically the processes of this subclass include solvent
    extraction of pancreatic tissue.

    (2)     Note.  See subclass 344 for a guide to generic separation
    techniques.


CLS 530/306
TXT Corticotropins (ATCH); related peptides:

    Peptides under subclass 303 containing at least half the amino acid
    residues in sequence of the polypeptide with the structure:

    (1)     Note.  Physical Properties.
    Number of Residues:  39
    Molecular Weight:  4541

    (2)     Note.  Physiological properties.  Pituitary hormone which
    stimulates release of adrenal cortical steroids and induces growth of
    adrenal cortex.  Sequence 1-13 is equivalent to alpha melanotropin.

    (3)     Note.  Synonyms.  Adrenocorticotropic hormone Cosyntropin, 1-39
    ATCH, ATCH, Acethropan, Acortan, Acorto, Acthar, Acton, Actonar, Adrenome,
    Alfatrofin, Cibacthen, Corstiline, Cortiphyson, Isactid, Reacthin,
    Solacthyl, Tubex.

    (4)     Note.  CA Registry Numbers of underivitized form:  9002-60-2

    Mesh tree number: D.6.472.734.525.183

    Merck Index Monograph:  9:130
            10:130

    SEARCH CLASS:

    930,    Peptide or Protein Sequence, subclass 70 for corticotropin peptide
    or protein sequences.


CLS 530/307
TXT Calcitonin; related peptides:

    Peptides under subclass 300 containing at least half the amino acid
    residues in sequence of the polypeptide with the structure:

    H-Cys-Gly-Asn-Leu-Ser-Thr-Cys-Met-Leu-Gly-Thr-Tyr-



    Thr-Gin-Asp-Phe-Asn-Lys-His-Thr-Phe-Pro-Gin-Thr-Ala-Ile-Gly-Ala-Pro-NH

    (1)     Note.  Physical Properties:
    Numbers of Residues:  32
    Molecular Weight:  3,421

    (2)     Note.  Physiological properties.  Calcium regulation hormone from
    thyroid gland in mammals and ultimobranchial gland in nonmammals.

    (3)     Note.  Synonyms.  Thyrocalcitonin, Elcatonin, Ultimobranchial Body,
    TCA, TCT, Calcimar

    (4)     Note.  CA Registry Numbers of unmodified form:  9007-12-9

    Mesh tree number:  D.6.472.150

    Merck Index Monograph:  9:1633
            10:1611

    SEARCH CLASS:

    930,    Peptide or Protein Sequence, subclass 60 for corticotropin peptide
    or protein sequences.


CLS 530/308
TXT Glucagon; related peptides:

    Peptides under subclass 300 containing at least half the amino acid
    residues in sequence of the polypeptide with the structure.



    Glucagon:
    His-Ser-Gin-Gly-Thr-Phe-Thr-Ser-Asp-Tyr-Ser-Lys-Tyr-Leu-Asp-Ser-Arg-Ala-Gin-
    Asp-Phe-Val-Gin-Trp-Leu-Met-Asn-Thr-

    (1)     Note.  Physical Properties.
    Number Residues:     29
    Molecular Weight:    3,483
    All mammalian glucagons appear to be identical.

    (2)     Note.  Physiological properties:  Blood glucose regulatory hormone
    from the alpha cells of the pancreas.

    (3)     Note.  Synonyms.
    Proglucagon (69) residues MW8, 137) has been called glicentin.  Glucagon,
    Hyperglycemic-glycosenolytic factor, HG-Factor, HGF Enteroglycagon is a
    glucagon like glycogenolytic peptide of intestinal tract and is called gut
    glucagon or oxyntomodulin.

    (4)     Note.  CA Registry Numbers of unmodified form:  9007-92-5

            Glucagon
    Mesh tree number:           D.6.472.610.364
                                            D19.316.629.45D

                                             Enterglucagon
                                              D.6.472.317.335
               D12.644.168

    Merck Index Monograph:
            9:4277
            10:4307


CLS 530/309
TXT Secretin or gastrin; related peptides:

    Peptides under subclass 300 containing at least half the amino acid
    residues in sequence of the polypeptide with the structure:

    Secretin:
    His-Ser-Ap-Gly-
    Thr-Phe-Thr-Ser-Glu-Leu-Ser-Arg-Leu-Arg-Asp-Ser-Ala-Arg-Leu-Gin-Arg-Leu-Gin-
    Gly-Leu-Val-NH



    Gastrin:

    (1)     Note.  Physical Properties:

                                            Secretin   Gastrin

    Number of Residues:     27                 17

    Molecular Weight:       3050        2116

    (2)     Note.  Secretin; Physiological properties.

    Intestinal hormone which stimulates secretion of water and bicarbonate from
    the pancreas.

    (3)     Note.  Gastrin; Physiological properties.

    Stimulates gastric secretion isolated from the mucusal lining of the
    gastric antrum.

    (4)     Note.  Secretin; Synonyms.  Vitram

    (5)     Note.  CA Registry Numbers of unmodified forms:

    Secretin        Gastrin

    1393-25-5                    9002-76-0

    Mesh tree number:

    D12.644.820                 D12.644.224

    D16.472.317.800          D6.472.317.413

    D19.316.629.787          D19.316.629.441

    Merck Index Monograph:

    9:8173                          9:4209

    10:8269                      10:4235


CLS 530/310
TXT Gramicidin or tyrocidin; related peptides:

    Peptides under subclass 300 containing at least half the amino residues in
    sequence of the polypeptide with the structure:



    GRAMICIDIN S cyclo (-D-Phe-L-Pro-Val-L-Orn-L-Lev-) or GRAMICIDIN A
    (HCO-L-Val-Gly-L-Ala-D-Leu-L-Ala-D-Val-L-Val-(L-Trp-D-Leu)3-L-Trp-NHCH2
    CH2OH



    TYROCIDIN A cyclo (-Val-Orn-Lev-D-Phe-Pro-Phe-D-Asn-Gin-Try-)



    B Phe 6 replaced by Trp



    C Phe 6 by Trp, D-Phe 7 by Trp



    E Asn 8 by Asp & Trp 10 by Phe

    (1)     Note.  Synonyms.  Gramodern, Pyrrolo (1, 2A) (1, 4, 7, 10, 13, 16,
    19, 22, 25, 28) decaazacyclotriacontine.  D is a complex of four components
    A, B, C, and D.  A second series (the isoleucine Gramacidins) has an
    isoleucine instead of valine in position 1.  Gramicidin B has a Phe in
    position II, while Gramacidin has tyrosine at this position.

    (2)     Note.  CA Registry Numbers of Unmodified form:

    Gamicidin       Tyrocidin

    1405-97-6       A
            1481-70-5
            B
            8-65-28-1
            C
            325-29-7

    Gramicidin      Tyrocidin

    Mesh tree number:
    D 20.85.905.452                 D 20.85.905.920
    D 2085 187 925              D 20.187.925

    Merck Index Monogragh:
    9:4379  9:9490
    10:4405 10:9635
    10:4406


CLS 530/311
TXT Somatostatin (SRIF); related peptides:

    Peptides under subclass 300 containing at least half the amino acid
    residues in sequence of the polypeptide with the structure:



    Ala-Gly-Cys-Lys-Asn-Phe-Phe-Trp-Lys-Thr-Phe-Thr-Ser-Cys

    (1)     Note.  Physical Properties.
    Number of residues:    14
    Molecular  Weight:     1638

    (2)     Note.  Physiological properties.  Inhibits secretion of pituitary
    growth hormone.

    (3)     Synonyms.  Growth hormone release-inhibiting factor, GH-RIF,
    somatotropin release inhibiting hormone.

    (4)     Note.  CA Registry Number of unmodified form:  38916-34-6

    Mesh tree number            D6.347.560.810

    Merck Index Monogragh: 9:8490
            10:8561

    SEARCH CLASS:

    930,    Peptide or Protein Sequence, subclass 160 for somatostatin peptide
    or protein sequences.


CLS 530/312
TXT Melanotropin (MSH) or eledoisin; related peptides:

    Peptides under subclass 300 containing at least half the amino acid
    residues in sequence of the polypeptide with the structure:

    (1)     Beta Melanotropin:

                   Ala-Glu-Lys-Lys-Asp-Glu-Gly-Pro-Tyr-     1
    Arg-
    10

    -Met-Glu-His-Phe-Arg-Trp-Gly-
            15

    -Ser-Pro-Pro-Lys-Asp-
                    20

    Or is otherwise identified as alpha or beta MSH.

    (2)     Eledoisin:  Pyr-Pro-Pro-Ser-Lys-Asp-Ala-Phe-Ile-Gly-Leu-Met.

    (1)     Note: Physical Properties.

    Melanotropins   Eledoisins
    Alpha   Beta

    Number of Residues:
    13      18-22   11

    (2)     Note.  Eledoisins Physiological properties.  Stimulates
    extravascular smooth muscle, acts as a vasodilator and hypotensive agent.

    (3)     Note.  Melanotropins; Synonyms.  Melanophore-affecting hormone;
    melanocyte-stimulating hormone; MSH; melanophore hormone; melanophore
    dilating hormone; melanophore expanding hormone; melanophore-stimulating
    hormone; melanatropic hormone; chromatophorotropic hormone;
    B-hormone;melanosome-dispersing hormone; pigmentation hormone.

    (4)     Note.  Eledoisins; Synonyms L-Methioinamide

    (5)     Note.  CA Registry Numbers of unmodified form:

    Melanotropins   Eledoisins
    9002-79-3       69-25-0

    Mesh tree number:
    D.6.472.734.525       D12.644.320.354
                                       D24.185.798.354.554
                                   D24.185.926.580.590.325
                                       D24.185.965.590.325

    Merck Index Monograph:
    9:5633   9:3491
    10:5632 10:3506


CLS 530/313
TXT Lutenizing hormone-releasing factor (LRF); related peptides:

    Peptides under subclass 300 containing at least half the amino acid
    residues in sequence of the polypeptide with the structure:

    Glu-His-Trp-Ser-Tyr-Gly-Leu-Arg-Pro-Gly

    (1)     Note.  Physical Properties.
    Number of Residues:     10
    Molecular Weight:       1182.33

    (2)     Note.  Physiological properties.  Stimulates secretion of pituitary
    hormones LH and FSH.

    (3)     Note.  Lutenizing hormone-releasing hormone, LRF, LH-RH,
    Gonadotropin-releasing hormone, Gonadotropin-releasing factor,
    Luteostimulin, Lulibering Gn-RH, Gonadoliberin, LRH, LH-FSH Releasing
    hormone, Nialutin, Hypothalamic Releasing factor, LHFSHRH, Kryptocin,
    Lutamin.

    (4)     Note.  CA Registry Numbers of unmodified form:  9034-40-6

    Mesh tree number        D6.472.709.429

    Merck Index Monograph:   9:5318
            10:5306

    SEARCH CLASS:

    930,    Peptide or Protein Sequence, subclass 130 for luteinizing hormone
    releasing hormone  peptide or protein sequences.


CLS 530/314
TXT Bradykinin; kallidin; related peptides:

    Peptides under subclass 300 containing at least half the amino acid
    residues in sequence of the polypeptide with the structure:

    Arg-Pro-Pro-Gly-Phe-Ser-Pro-Phe-Arg

    (1)     Note.  Physical Properties.
    Number of Residues:    9
    Molecular Weight:      1060.25

    (2)     Note.  Physiological properties.  Acts on smooth muscle, dilates
    peripheral vessels, increases capillary permeability.  A tissue belonging
    to a group of hypotensive peptides known as plasma kinins.

    (3)     Note.  Synonyms.  Kallidin I, Kallidin 9, Callidin I, L-Bradykinin,
    BRS640.

    (4)     Note.  CA Registry Number of unmodified form:  58-82-2

    Kalladins       Bradykinins

         Mesh Tree Number:
         D12.644.320.551    D12.644.320.169
    D12.644.456.541 D12.644.456.193
    D24.185.798.354.551      D24.185.798.354.169


CLS 530/315
TXT Oxytocin; vasopressin; related peptides:

    Peptides under subclass 300 containing at least half the amino acid
    residues in sequence of the polypeptide with the structure:

    Oxytocin:
    H-CYS-TYR-ILE-GLN-ASN-CYS-PRO-LEU-

    GYL-NH

    Vasopressin:
    H-CYS-TYR-PHE-GLN-ASN-CYS-PRO-ARG-
    GLY-NH

    (1)     Note.  Physical Properties:

    Oxytocin        Vasopressin

    Number of Residues:

    9        9

    Molecular Weight:

    1,007.23

    All species oxytocin sequences appear to be identical.

    (2)     Note.  Physiological properties:  Oxytocin.  9aa residue hormone
    posterior pituitary hormone.  Causes uterine contractions. Stimulates
    lactation.

    Vasopressin.  9aa residue hormone from neurohypophysis of vertebrates.
    Controls water metabolism.  Contracts smooth muscle.

    (3)     Note.  Synonyms
    Oxytocin.  Di-sipidin, alpha-Hypophamine, Pitocin, Piton S, Syntocin,
    Syntocinon, Uteracon, Nobitocin S, Syntocinone, Endopituitrina, Orasthin,
    Oxystin, 3-Isoleucine, 9 Leucine, Vasopressin, Atonin O, (1-Hemicystine)
    -Oxytocin, Presoxin, Hyphotocin, 1,2-Dithia-5, 8, 11, 14,
    17-pentaazacycloeicosane, 8-Leucyl Vasotocin Vasopressin Tonephin,
    beta-Hypophamine, ADH, Antidiuretic hormone, Pitressin, ADH, (Hormone) 1
    Pituitrin P, 1,2-Dithia-5-8-11-14-17 Pentaazacycloeicosane.

    (4)     Note.  CA Registry Numbers of unmodifed form:

    Oxytocin        Vasopressin
    50-56-6 1100-17-2

    Mesh tree numbers:
    D6.472.583.666          D6.472.734.692.781

    D6.472.734.692.433 D12.644.456.925

    D12.644.925.730    D19.770.896

    Merck Index Monograph:
    9:6793   9:9596
    10:6849 10:9739
            10:5447
            10:3885

    SEARCH CLASS:

    930,    Peptide or Protein Sequence, subclass 150 for oxytocin or
    vasopressin peptide or protein sequences.


CLS 530/316
TXT Angiotensin; related peptides:

    Peptides under subclass 300 containing at least half the amino acid
    residues in sequence of the polypeptide with the structure:

    Angiotensin I

    Angiotensin   II

    (1)     Note.  Physical Properties.

    Angiotensin I          II
    Number of Residues:
    10                      8

    (2)     Note.  Physiological properties:  Angiotensins range in size from
    precursors with 14 aa's to the 8aa Angiotensin II which is a
    vasoconstrictor.  Changes in the aa content produce antagonistic or
    inactive compounds.

    (3)     Note.  Synonyms.  Angiotonin, Hypertensin, angiotonin.  Angiotensin
    1 is the 1-10 residue of Angiotensinongen (25 residues).

    (4)     Note.  CA Registry Number of unmodified form:  1407-47-2

    Mesh tree number:        D12.644.456.73
                                          D24.185.98.32

    Merck Index Monograph:  9:683
            10:673
            10:674

    SEARCH CLASS:

    930,    Peptide or Protein Sequence, subclass 40 for angiotensin peptide or
    protein sequences.


CLS 530/317
TXT Cyclic peptides:

    Peptides under subclass 300 containing at least one ring fused only through
    peptide bonds.

    (1)     Note.  The peptide bond may be other than that formed by the alpha
    amino nitrogen, e.g., through the 4 amino groups of 2,4 diamino butanoic
    acid (2,4 DAB).

    (2)     Note.  Cyclic compounds in which one or more links in the ring are
    nonpeptide bonds are called heterodectic cyclic peptides.

    (3)     Note.  Examples, alamethicin, amanitins, antamanide, cyclosporins,
    ennlatins, ferrichrome, mycovbacillin, phalloidine

    (4)     Note.  Mesh tree number:  D12.644.641

    SEARCH CLASS:

    930,    Peptide or Protein Sequence, subclass 270 for cyclic peptides
    excluding those cyclic due to intrachain disulfide bonds.


CLS 530/318
TXT The cyclisation occurring through 4-amino radical of 2,4-diamino-butanoic
    acid:

    Peptides under subclass 317 containing at least one diaminobutanoic acid
    residue in the peptide cycle.

    (1)     Note.  2,4 diamino-butanoic acid is abbreviated Dab or DAB.


CLS 530/319
TXT Polymyxin; related peptides:

    Peptides under subclass 318 containing at least half the amino acid
    residues of the polypeptide produced by Bacillus polymyxa and possessing
    antibiotic activity against Gram-negative bacteria.

    (1)     Note.  Polymyxins are heteromeric, homodetic cyclic peptides.

    Polymyxins designated A, B, C, D, E and M are known.

    (2)     Note.  Synonyms.  Syno-colistin.

    (3)     Note.  CA Registry Number of unmodified form:  1406-11-7

    Mesh tree number:   D20.85.676

    Polymerin B                D20.85.676.768

    Merck Index Monograph:
            9:7354
            9:7355
            9:2441
            10:7441
            10:2442
            10:7446


CLS 530/320
TXT Bacitracin; related peptides:

    Peptides under subclass 317 containing at least half the amino acid
    sequence of Bacitracin.

    (1)     Note.  Bacitracins are produced by various strains of Bacillus
    Licheniformis and Bacillus stubilis.

    (2)     Note.  Bacitracin.  Synonyms.  Ayfivin, Baciguent, Baci-Jel,
    Bacitek Ointment, Paretracin, Penitracin, Topitracin, Zotraacin,
    Baciliguin, Bacillichin.

    CA Registry Number of unmodified form:  1405-87-4

    Mesh tree number:       D20.85.119

    Merck Index Monograph:
            9:942
            943
            9784
            10:937
            10:938

    (4)     Note.  The most important of the group is bacitracin A, which
    contains an unusual thiazoline structure synthesized from the N-terminal
    isoleucine and the neighboring cysteine.  Bacitracin F is a rearrangment
    product of bacitracin A in which the amino group of the heteroproduct is
    oxidatively removed and the thiazoline ring system is dehydrated.


CLS 530/321
TXT Containing only normal peptide links in the ring, i.e., homodetic cyclic
    peptides:

    Cyclic peptides under subclass 317 containing at least one ring formed by
    peptide bonds through only the alpha amino group of an amino acid.


CLS 530/322
TXT Peptides containing saccharide radicals, e.g., bieomycins, etc.:

    Peptides under subclass 300 containing at least one saccharide radical.

    (1)     Note.  Synonyms.  Peptidoglycans.

    (2)     Note.  Mesh tree number:  D12.644.233


CLS 530/323
TXT Peptides with at least one nonpeptide bond other than a disulfide bond
    joining two or more sequences of amino acid residues, e.g., homomeric
    heterodectic peptide of other than cyclic disulfide, depsipeptides, etc.:

    Peptides under subclass 300 in which a peptide chain contains an interchain
    nonpeptide moiety.

    (1)     Note.

    Homeric Heterodetic peptides

    H-Ala-Val-Ser-IIe-Phe-Leu-OH
             O-Leu-Val-H
    Linear branched peptide


    H-Ala-Cys-IIe-Phe-Leu-OH
                   !
                  S-Leu-Val-H
    Linear Branched S-peptide

    H-Ala-Asp-Ser-IIe
                 !
                Val-CO-O-Thr-OH
    Heterodetic cyclic branched peptide (peptide lactone)

    (2)     Note.  Depsipeptide:  polypeptides which contains ester bonds as
    well as peptide bonds.  The naturally occurring Depsipeptides are usually
    cyclic peptides, also called peptolides, which generally have alpha or beta
    B-hydroxyacids as heterocomponents.  This class also includes O-peptides
    and peptide lactones.  The most important peptide lactones are the
    Actinomycins, Estamycin and Echionomycin; the peptolides include the
    Enninatins, Valinomycin, Sporidesmolides, Serratamolide, Esperin, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    930,    Peptide or Protein Sequence, subclass 30 for  peptide or protein
    sequences with nonpeptide or abnormal peptide links.


CLS 530/324
TXT 25 or more amino acid residues in defined sequence:

    Compounds under subclass 300 comprising from 25 or more amino acid residues
    of defined primary structure.

    (1)     Note.  Amino acid residues and primary structures are discussed in
    the generic subclass for peptides.

    (2)     Note.  Peptides identified only by molecular weight compositions or
    partial sequence are provided for in the generic peptide subclass.


CLS 530/325
TXT 24 amino acid residues in defined sequence: Compounds under
    subclass 300 comprising 24 amino acid residues of defined primary
    structures.

    (1)     Note.  Amino acid residue and primary structure are discussed in
    the generic subclass for peptides.

    (2)     Note.  Peptides identified only by molecular weight composition or
    partial sequence are provided for in the generic peptide subclass.


CLS 530/326
TXT 15 to 23 amino acid residues in defined sequence:

    Compounds under subclass 300 comprising from 15 to 23 amino acid residues
    of defined primary structure.

    (1)     Note.  Amino acid residue and primary structure are discussed in
    the generic subclass for peptides.

    (2)     Note.  Peptides identified only by molecular weight composition or
    partial sequence are provided for in the generic peptide subclass.


CLS 530/327
TXT 11 to 14 amino acid residues in defined sequence:

    Compounds under subclass 300 comprising from 11 to 14 amino acid residues
    of defined primary structure.

    (1)     Note.  Amino acid residue and primary structure are discussed in
    the generic subclass for peptides.

    (2)     Note.  Peptides identified only by molecular weight composition or
    partial sequence are provided for the generic peptide subclass.


CLS 530/328
TXT 8 to 10 amino acid residues in defined sequence:

    Compounds under subclass 300 comprising from 8 to 10 amino acid residues of
    defined primary structure.

    (1)     Note.  Amino acid residue and primary structure are discussed in
    the generic subclass for peptides.

    (2)     Note.  Peptides identified only by molecular weight composition or
    partial sequence are provided for in the generic peptide subclass.


CLS 530/329
TXT 6 to 7 amino acid residues in defined sequence:

    Compounds under subclass 300 comprising from 6 to 7 amino acid residues of
    defined primary structure.

    (1)     Note.  Amino acid residue and primary structure are discussed in
    the generic subclass for peptides.

    (2)     Note.  Peptides identified only by molecular weight composition or
    partial sequence are provided for in the generic peptide subclass.


CLS 530/330
TXT 4 to 5 amino acid residues in defined sequence:

    Compounds under subclass 300 comprising from 4 or 5 amino acid residues of
    defined primary structure.

    (1)     Note.  Amino acid residue and primary structure are discussed in
    the generic subclass for peptides.

    (2)     Note.  Peptides identified only by molecular weight composition or
    partial sequence are provided for in the generic peptide subclass.


CLS 530/331
TXT Tripeptides, e.g., tripeptide thyroliberin (TRH) melanostatin (MIF), etc.:

    Compounds under subclass 300 comprising 3 amino acid residues of defined
    primary structure.

    (1)     Note.  Amino acid residues and primary structure are discussed in
    the generic subclass for peptides.

    (2)     Note.  Peptides identified only by molecular weight composition or
    partial sequence are provided for in subclass 300.


CLS 530/332
TXT Containing at least one abnormal peptide link, e.g., gamma peptide bonded,
    etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 330, in which the amino acid residues are
    joined by a peptide bond formed by other than an alpha amino acid.

    (1)     Note. Gluthathione would be provided for in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    317,    for cyclic peptides containing at least one nonalpha amino acid
    peptide bond.


CLS 530/333
TXT Synthesis of peptides:

    Processes under subclass 300 which a polypeptide is synthesized (1) From
    amino acids or protected amino acids or (2) by joining polypeptides or
    protected polypeptides to amino acids or protected amino acids or
    polypeptides or protected polypeptides.

    (1)     Note.  Methods of protecting or removing protective groups from
    peptides are included here even if the synthesis steps are nominal.

    (2)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses provide for patents which
    claim synthesis techniques not directed to producing one of the named
    peptides provided for in subclasses 301-316 above.  The synthesis of a
    peptide is usually unique to that peptide and the search of the subclasses
    providing for the disclosed products of a broad synthesis process is
    strongly recommended.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    526,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 238.1 for the
    formation of a synthetic resin from a protein or biologically active
    polypeptide where the protein or polypeptide as well as all other reactants
    are ethylenically unsaturated.


CLS 530/334
TXT Polymer supported synthesis, e.g., solid phase synthesis, merrifield
    synthesis, etc.:

    Processes under subclass 333 in which synthesis includes the use of a
    soluble or insoluble polymer or resin covalently attached to an amino acid
    residue of the polypeptide chain being synthesized.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes:  (a) processes of attachment of the
    initial amino acid or peptide to the polymer and processes of cleavage of
    the polypeptide product from the polymer support; (b) processes of stepwise
    assembly of a polypeptide in which amino acid residues are added one at a
    time to the polymer supported amino acid residues or peptide; (c) processes
    in which a polypeptide segment is added to a polymer supported polypeptide.

    (2)     Note.  Caution.  Many patents directed to polymer supported
    synthesis absent a step of cleavage of the final product are originally
    classified in Class 525 as an after treated polymer.  A complete search for
    polymer supported synthesis must include this class.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    525,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 54.1 for the chemical
    reaction of a peptide or protein with a preformed resin and subclass 54.11
    for processes of stepwise assembly of a polypeptide on a preformed polymer,
    i.e., solid phase synthesis when there is no claimed cleavage of the
    synthesized polypeptide.


CLS 530/335
TXT Protecting or removing protective groups, e.g., carboxyl group protection,
    etc.:

    Processes under subclass 333 in which a protecting group is attached or
    removed from a peptide.

    (1)     Note.  The protection or removal of a protection group of
    polypeptide in a solid phase synthesis is provided for in subclass 334.

    (2)     Note.  Carboxyl group protecting agents in general use:

    CLEAVAGE

                                  REACTIONS

    Alkyl esters    (-OMe)  NaOH/acetone
            (-OEt)

    Benzyl ester    (-OBzI)  H2/Pd;
            Na/liquid
            NH3; NaOH

    tert-Butyl ester        (-OBU)   trifluor
            -acetic
            acid


CLS 530/336
TXT Of side chain or sulfur containing group:

    Processes under subclass 335 in which the addition or removal of the
    protection groups is to a side chain or a sulfur containing group.

    (1)     Note.  Side chain protecting groups in general use:

    CLEAVAGE

                                  REACTIONS

    S-Benzyl        (BzI-)  NA/liquid NH
    S-Acetamidome   (Acm-)  Hg
    O-tert-Butyl            (Bu)    trifluoracetic
                    acid;
    O-Benzyl        (BzINH)


CLS 530/337
TXT Of amino group:

    Processes under subclass 335 in which the addition or removal of a
    protecting group is to an amino group of the peptide.

    (1)     Note.  Amino group protecting agents in general use:

    CLEAVAGE

                                 REACTIONS

    Benzyloxycarbonyl (Z)           HBr/glacial acetic
                    Acid; H/Pd; Na/
    tert-Butyloxycarbo  (Boc)       HCI/glacial acetic
                    acid;
                    trifluoroacetic
                    acid
    Trifluoroacetyl   (Tfa)         piperidine:
    2-(p-Biphenyl)- (Bpoc)  5% trofluoracetic
    iso-propyloxycarbonyl           Acid/Ch Cl


CLS 530/338
TXT Solution phase synthesis:

    Processes under subclass 333 in which the synthesis takes place in solution.


CLS 530/339
TXT Segment condensation, e.g., ugi condensation, etc.:

    Processes under subclass 338 in which peptides of two or more amino acid
    residues are joined with other peptide of two or more amino acid residues
    to form a single large peptide.

    (1)     Note.  These processes are also called fragment condensation.


CLS 530/340
TXT With phosphorus containing material:

    Processes under subclass 338 in which phosphorus or a phosphorus containing
    compound is present during synthesis.

    (1)     Note.  The phosphorus containing material is typically a reactant
    or a catalyst.


CLS 530/341
TXT With use of carbonimide or imidazole:

    Processes under subclass 338 in which an imidazole or a carbonimide is
    present during synthesis.

    (1)     Note.  The use of diacyclohexylcarbodimide as an activating agent
    would be included here.


CLS 530/342
TXT Mixed anhydride synthesis:

    Processes under subclass 338 in which the synthesis includes (1) forming a
    mixed anhydride by reacting an alpha-acylamino acid or an alpha-acylamino
    peptide with a lower alkyl chloroformate in the presence of a tertiary
    amino base, and then (2) reacting the resulting free amino group or a
    peptide derivative having a free amino group, to form a peptide.


CLS 530/343
TXT By hydrolysis:

    Processes under the subclass 333 in which the synthesis includes a step of
    hydrolysis.

    (1)     Note.  The hydrolysis may be autolysis or chemical hydrolysis.  The
    use of an enzyme or microorganism to hydrolyze a material is provided for
    in Class 435, subclasses 68.1+.


CLS 530/344
TXT Separation or purification:

    Processes under subclass 300 in which a pre-existing peptide is isolated
    from a composition.

    (1)     Note.  The isolation procedure may involve the chemical change or
    destruction of materials in the composition other than the peptide.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, provides for processes
    of separating liquids from solids or slurries, i.e., drying as well as the
    contact of solids with either, or both, gases or vapors.  If the starting
    material is in the form of a liquid suspension or solution even if the
    process is continued to the point of complete dryness, Class 159,
    Concentrating Evaporators, will take the process.

    62,     Refrigeration, includes processes which include removing heat by
    refrigeration from a substance whether solid, liquid, or vapor.  In
    particular, Class 62, subclasses 600+ will take processes of making a
    solidified or liquified gaseous product provided the gas has a normal
    boiling point below 32 (methane, ethane, propane) and Class 62, subclasses
    500+ will take processes wherein a solution or mixture is cooled to
    solidify a constituent which is then removed from the mixture.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, provides for processes peculiar to the
    concentration of solids held in solution or suspension by evaporation of
    the liquid containing them and the recovery of the concentrate.  If the
    starting material is a solid or slurry placement in Class 34, Drying and
    Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, would be indicated.  Class 159 will take
    concentration to the point of crystallization or to dryness; however,
    removal of water of crystallization is considered to be a chemical reaction
    and placement would not be proper in Class 159.  Evaporating with
    subsequent vapor condensation is excluded from Class 159 and in such case,
    placement in Class 203, Distillation: Processes, Separatory, would be
    proper.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, provides for processes of
    thermolytic distillation wherein a solid carbonaceous material is heated to
    vaporize a volatile portion and to cause chemical decomposition of the
    heated material to form different chemical substances at least some of
    which are volatile and leave behind a solid carbonaceous material.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, provides for processes for
    separating a liquid mixture by vaporizing and condensing a portion thereof
    to isolate in the condensed liquid or the unvaporized portion a relatively
    pure compound which was present in the original mixture.  The original
    mixture may be in a solid form so long as it melts to form a liquid before
    it vaporizes.  A solid original mixture which undergoes chemical
    decomposition leaving a carbonaceous residue would be classifiable in Class
    201, Distillation:  Process, Thermolytic, which is superior to Class 203.
    Processes including a chemical reaction and separatory distillation
    operation are classified in Class 203 only when the chemical reaction
    merely facilitates the isolation by the separatory distillation operation
    of a preexisting substance in the distilland.  See Class 260, Chemistry of
    Carbon Compounds, or Class 423, Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, for a
    process of preparing a compound and isolating it by a separatory
    distillation process.

    204,    Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 456+ for gel
    electrophoresis.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, includes processes for the
    separation or purification of a constituent from a flowable liquid mixture
    by dialysis, sorption,, ion exchange liquid extraction, gravitational
    separation, or filtration as well as purification of a liquid mixture by
    destruction or conversion of a constituent.  Processes directed to the
    purification of a particular compound or composition (including solution of
    either the compound or composition in water), are classified with the
    particular compound or composition.  Insofar as the treatment of liquids
    with ion exchange or sorption materials are concerned, the following lines
    will be maintained.

    (1)     Where water is the only disclosed liquid purified, the patent will
    be classified in this class (210).



    (2)     Where disclosure includes water, hydrocarbons and/or other liquids
    the patent will be classified:

    (a)     In Class 210 if all claims are broad as to the liquid.

    (b)     In Class 210 if several species of liquid are claimed and one
    species includes water.

    (c)     In the appropriate art class if some liquid other than water is the
    only liquid claimed (e.g., mineral oils in Class 208, organic compounds in
    Class 260).



    (3)     Purification or separation of liquids by flocculation only are
    classified in Class 210.



    (4)     Processes wherein all claims are limited to the deposition of
    specific materials on ion-exchangers or sorbents with subsequent recovery
    of the specific materials are classified with material so operated upon.

    Class 210 is superior to Class 95 and takes separating processes, per se,
    generally disclosed or claimed as fluid separation, or if the disclosure or
    a claim is restricted to liquid separation.



    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, provides for the liberation and
    purification by chemical or physical means of compounds and extracts
    falling within the class definition of Class 260.  Generally the physical
    processes included are of two types (a) a purification process prior or
    subsequent to a chemical reaction producing a Class 260 product, (b) a
    purification process directed to the purification of a Class 260 compound
    by a combination of physical separation techniques the classes for which do
    not provide for or exclude the combination claimed.  Chemical purification
    processes are generally provided for with each product produced.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 101 for apparatus for carrying out the
    process of this subclass.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology subclasses 68.1+ for
    methods of using microrganism or enzyme to liberate or purify a preexisting
    substance.


CLS 530/345
TXT Chemical aftertreatment, e.g., acylation, methylation, etc.:

    Processes under subclass 300 in which a preexisting peptide is chemically
    modified.

    (1)     Note.  Since the synthesis of peptide has been provided for in a
    superior subclass, this subclass will contain only patents directed to
    addition or removal of nonamino acid moieties to an existing peptide
    structure.


CLS 530/350
TXT PROTEINS, I.E., MORE THAN 100 AMINO ACID RESIDUES:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which a polypeptide is
    composed of more than 100 amino acid residues or has a molecular weight of
    greater than 10,000.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass will provide for proteins described only in
    terms of physical properties such as molecular weight, electrophoretic
    mobility, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Structures.  The primary structure of the shorter peptides
    has been included in the definitions.  For the proteins the Merck Monograph
    will often provide citation to articles disclosing the structure.  The
    structure of the larger peptides and proteins may be found on the on-line
    services by using the compound name, Chemical Abstracts Registry Number, or
    National Library of Medicine's MESH tree number in combination with the
    terms "sequence" or "structure".

    (3)     Note.  Compositions.  In general a protein containing composition
    will be provided for in a class providing for the function or utility of
    the composition, e.g., medicine, food, Class 252 utilities, etc.

    A protein mixed with a preserving agent whose sole function is to prevent
    chemical or physical change is provided for with the peptide or protein.

    A protein derived from a single source material such as a plant or animal
    extract, so long as it is identified as a protein is classified in this
    class (530) even if a Class 424 utility is disclosed or claimed.  A plant
    or animal extract will be provided for in Class 424 if it is (1) a single
    source material and (2) is of undetermined chemical constitution i.e., is
    claimed in terms of isolation technique or physical properties.  A
    recitation as broad as "protein" is enough to defeat placement in Class 424
    on the basis of utility.

    Class 424 will provide for an additive mixture containing a protein and
    other ingredients if the mixture has a Class  424 utility.

    (4)     Note.  CAS REGISTRY NUMBERS:

    Chemical Abstracts Service (CAS) Registry Numbers are unique identifiers
    assigned to chemical substances recorded in the CAS Chemical Registry
    System.

    The CAS Registry Number itself has no chemical significance; it is simply a
    machine-checkable number assigned to each substance as it enters the
    Registry System.

    CAS Registry Numbers appear in CA issues and in many computer-readable
    files.  They also may be found in several primary journals, various
    handbooks, and in the National Library of   Medicine's TOXLINE and CHEMLINE
    computer-based information-retrieval services.  For more about the CAS
    Chemical Registry System or Registry Numbers consult the introduction to
    the CAS REGISTRY HANDBOOK-Number Section.

    Medical Subject Headings:

    Mesh Tree Numbers:
    Mesh numbers are identifiers applied the National Library of Medicine's
    indexers to articles in the medical and related literature.  The subject
    headings are Index Medicus headings and are arranged in a hierarchical
    matter.  The abstracts and indexing are available on-line through several
    data base suppliers.

    Deleted Registry Numbers:
    The CAS Registry numbers found in the definitions of subclass 300 to 427
    are the current registry numbers.  However due to the long history and
    incomplete structural knowledge of peptide and protein chemistry there are
    usually several deleted registry numbers for each current registry number.
    The current registry number should be used to find the deleted numbers in
    the registry file and should always be included in the on-line search
    statement.  For further information on search technique related to deleted
    registry numbers, see CAS ON-LINE NEWS, May/June 1984 page 5.

    (5)     Note.  Synthetic Resin vs. Polypeptide.  The conceptual difference
    between the subject matter of synthetic resins provided for in the 520
    series and polypeptides (including proteins) provided for in Class 530 is
    that the compounds of the 520 series have statistically distributed amino
    acid or blocks of amino acids in their molecules in a random sequence
    whereas 530 provides for molecules composed of a specific sequence of amino
    acids of defined identity and order (i.e., primary structure) having
    identity or close relation to a humerial or cellular polypeptide or having
    some humerial or cellular effect due to its ordered structure.

    (7)     Note.  Classification of the more common amino acids:

    Amino Acids     Classification

    Amino Acids commonly found in peptides and proteins:

    Alanine 562/575

    Arginine        562/560

    Asparagine      562/561

    Aspartic acid   562/571

    Cysteine        562/557

    Glutaminic acid 562/573

    Glycine 562/575

    Histidine       548/344

    Isoleucine      562/575

    Leucine 562/575

    Lysine  562/562

    Methionine      562/559

    Phenylalanine   562/445

    Proline 548/535

    Serine  562/567

    Theronine       562/570

    Tryptophan      548/496

    Tyrosine        562/444

    Rare amino acids from proteins

    Desmosine       546/335

    5 Hydroxylsine  562/564

    5-Hydroxyproline        548/532

    Isodesmosine    546/335

    3-Methythistidine       548/335

    E-N-Methyllysine        562/561

    Nonprotein Amino Acids

    B-Alanine       562/576

    V-Aminobutyric acid     562/553

    Canavanine      562/560

    Citrulline      562/560

    B-Cyanvalanine  260/465

    Djenkolic acid  562/557

    Homocysteine    562/556

    Homoserine      562/567

    Ornithine       562/561

    Valine  526/575

    (8)     Note.  Peptide and Protein Structure.  The nature, i.e., identity,
    of the constituent amino acids and their sequence is referred to as the
    primary structure.  A given primary structure will have a definite three
    dimensional structure which is called the secondary structure (usually
    helical coiling).  The secondary structure of a large peptide or protein is
    wrapped about and interwoven to develop the overall three dimensional
    structure of the molecule.  This arrangement of the secondary structure is
    referred to as the tertiary structure and determines the alosteric
    properties of many proteins.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, for protein containing coating
    or plastic compositions, particularly subclasses 4, 24, 124+, 645+, and
    indented subclasses.

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes for growing therein-defined
    single-crystal of all types of materials, including inorganic or organic.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions has the
    following subclasses for proteins or proteinaceous material 1.11+, for
    radionuclide or intended radionuclide containing; 65+, 418, 456, 460, 477+,
    491+, 499,  for a protein or peptide containing compositions which
    functions as an antiperspirant or deodorant; for a composition containing a
    lymphokine; 130.1+ for a composition containing an immunoglobulin, an
    antiserum, an antibody, or an antibody fragment; 184.1+ for a composition
    containing an antigen, an epitope, or another immunospecific immunoeffector
    that may be proteinaceous; 278.1+ for a composition containing a
    nonspecific immunoeffector that may be proteinaceous; 94.1+, for
    composition containing proteins identified as enzymes; 520+, for
    compositions many of which are  considered to be proteinaceous; an animal
    extract of undetermined constitution; 115+ for compositions which may be
    proteins or peptides identified by elemental analysis.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 63, 92, 105 for edible
    protein compositions or products and related process involving the same.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, for a nonstructural stock
    material product in the form of a composite web or sheet including a layer
    comprising protein, and other appropriately titled subclasses (i.e.,
    subclass 435 and 458).

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 59, 537, 539, 629, 640, 642, and 643 for compositions
    containing proteins used in forming an image.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 68.1+
    for the microbial or enzymatic synthesis of proteins and peptides;
    subclasses 183+ for the production of enzymes; and subclasses 174+ for the
    formation of immobilized enzymes and subclasses 269 and 272+ for the
    liberation or purification of proteins by means of microorganism or enzyme,
    particularly subclass 273 for the purification of collagen or gelatin.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclass 15, for
    a protein containing composition used as a  standard or control; 16, for a
    blood standard; 66, for test for blood clotting factor tests; 86+, for
    tests for protein or peptides including sequencing methods and subclass 501
    for a complement binding assays and protein binding assays and subclasses
    506-548 for tests using antigen antibody interactions in a chemical test
    particularly subclasses 543-548 which collect methods of modifying antigens
    and antibodies as part of a testing procedure.

    514,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 1-21
    and Cross-Reference Art Collections 800-809 which provide for compositions
    having a 424 utility containing a peptide or protein as an organic active
    ingredient.

    524,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 9+ for plant or
    plant derived cellular material; subclasses 17+ for proteins or
    biologically active polypeptide or for a process in which the protein or
    polypeptide is physically mixed with a preformed resin and subclasses 70+
    for a process of adding a protein or biologically active polypeptide to
    resin forming ingredients during reaction of the resin formers and the
    protein or polypeptide is nonreactive; and subclasses 21+ for animal
    derived proteins such as blood, particularly subclasses 22+ for Gelatin and
    subclasses 25+ for Casein, for a process in which the protein is physically
    mixed with a preformed resin.

    525,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 54.1 for the chemical
    reaction of a peptide or protein with a preformed resin and subclass 54.11
    for processes of stepwise assembly of a polypeptide on a preformed polymer,
    i.e., solid phase synthesis when there is no claimed cleavage of the
    synthesized polypeptide and subclass 54.24 for the chemical reaction of a
    flour or meal with a preformed resin.

    526,    Synthetic Resin or Natural Rubbers, subclass 238.1 for the
    formation of a synthetic resin from a protein or biologically active
    polypeptide where the protein or polypeptide as well as all other reactants
    are ethylenically unsaturated.

    527,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 100+ and 200+ for
    the formation of a synthetic resin by simultaneous chemical reaction of a
    protein cellular material (e.g., hair, horn, leather) or a protein or
    biologically active polypeptide and resin forming ingredient.

    528,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, particularly subclass 328 for
    a polymer of amino acids and methods of making such a polyamino acid.

    930,    Peptide or Protein Sequence, subclasses 10+ for peptide or protein
    sequences of four  or more amino acids.

    935,    Genetic Engineering:  Recombinant DNA Technology, Hybrid or Fused
    Cell Technology, and Related Manipulations of Nucleic Acids, appropriate
    subclass for processes of producing peptides and proteins by the methods of
    recombinant DNA technology or the use of hybrid or fused cell technology.


CLS 530/351
TXT Lymphokines, e.g., interferons, interleukins, etc.:

    Proteins under subclass 350 which are soluable immune mediators produced by
    the cells of immune system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples.  Interferon, interleukins, T Cell Growth Factor
    (TCGF), migration inhibitory factor (MIF), lymphotoxin (LT), macrophage
    factors (monokines, Mk; macrophage activation or inhibition factor, MAF).

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is intended to collect both lymphocyte factors
    (lymphokines, LK) and macrophage factor (monokines, MK).

    (3)     Note.  Mesh tree number: D24.611.632.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    930,    Peptide or Protein Sequence, subclasses 140-145 for lymphokine
    peptide or protein sequences.


CLS 530/352
TXT Phosphoproteins, e.g., phosvitin, vitellogenin, etc.:

    Proteins under subclass 350 which are conjugated proteins containing
    phosphate esterified with the hydroxyl group of serine or threonine
    residues.

    (1)     Note.  Casein and ovalbumin are excluded from this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Mesh tree number:  D12.776.744.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    358,    for nuclein

    360,    for casein

    367,    for ovalbumin


CLS 530/353
TXT Scleroproteins, e.g., fibroin, elastin, silk, etc.:

    Proteins under subclass 350 having the structure of scleroproteins and
    compounds derived from these by addition to or deletion of parts of the
    polypeptide structure.

    (1)     Note.  Physical Properties.  Scleroproteins are subdivided on the
    basis of chain conformation into:  A.  alpha-helicial structure, e.g.,
    alpha-keratins; B.  Beta-pleated sheet structure, e.g., Beta-keratins,
    silk-fibroin; C.  triple helical structure, e.g., collagen.  Conformation
    is related to amino acid composition.  The amino acid composition of
    Scleroproteins with Beta-pleated sheet structure shows 90 percent of the
    simple amino acids glycine, alanine and serine.  Beta-keratin also contains
    a large number of cystine residues.  Collagen characteristically contains
    high concentration of the nonhelix forming amino acid, proline and
    hydroxyproline.


CLS 530/354
TXT Gelatin:

    Proteins under subclass 350 having the structure of gelatin and compounds
    derived from these by addition to or deletion of parts of the polypeptide
    structure.

    (1)     Note.  Gelatin is not found in nature but is derived by hydrolysis
    of collagen.

    (2)     Note.  Composition.  Approximate amino acid content:  glycine 25.5
    percent, alanine 8.7 percent, valine 2.5 percent, leucine 3.2 percent,
    isoleucine 1.4 percent, cystine and cysteine 0.1 percent, methionine 1.0
    percent, phenylalanine 2.2 percent, proline 18 percent, hydroxyproline 14
    percent, serine 0.4 percent, threonine 1.9 percent, tyrosine 0.5 percent,
    aspartic acid 6.6 percent, glutamic acid 11.4 percent, arginine 8.1
    percent, lysine 4.1 percent, histidine 0.8 percent.  The total is over 100
    percent because water is incorporated into the molecules of the individual
    amino acids.

    (3)     Note.  Synonyms.  Pharmagel A or B, Spongiofort, Gelatine Gelfoam,
    Puragen.  Older Patents use the word glue to refer to impure gelatin; these
    patents have been placed here arbitrarily.

    (4)     Note.  CA Registry Number of unmodified form:  900-70-8

    Mesh tree number:  D12.776.8960.476

    Merck Index Monograph:  9:4217
            10:4242

    SEARCH CLASS:

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Products
    Thereof, subclasses 537-539, 628, 640, and 642 for compositions containing
    gelatin used in forming an image.

    524,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 21+ for animal
    derived proteins such as blood, particularly subclasses 22+ for Gelatin and
    25+ for Casein, for a process in which the protein is physically mixed with
    a preformed resin.


CLS 530/355
TXT Separation, purification or synthesis:

    Processes under subclass 354 in which gelatin is (a) isolated from a
    preexisting material or composition of (b) is chemically synthesized.

    (1)     Note.  Processes of chemical after treatment of preexisting gelatin
    are provided for in 354 above.

    (2)     Note.  See subclass 344 for a detailed description of classes
    providing for separation, per se.


CLS 530/356
TXT Collagen:

    Proteins under subclass 353 having the structure of collagen and compounds
    derived from these by addition to or deletion of parts of the polypeptide
    structure.

    (1)     Note.  Physical Properties.

    Number of Residues:  approximately 1000

    Molecular Weight:  about 130,000

    The collagen molecule contains three peptides chains, each having about
    1000 amino acids residues.  Nearly one third of all the residues are
    glycine, with typical repeating sequences being Gly-Pro-Hyp and
    Gly-Pro-Ala.  The chains are arranged in a triple helix and contain
    intramolecular cross-links.  Denaturation of collagen is the conversion of
    the rigidly coiled helix to a random coil called gelatin.

    (2)     Note.  Type of Collagen

    Type    Distribution

    I       Skin, tendon,
            bone, cornea

    II      Cartilage, in
            tervertebral
            disc, vitreous
            body

    III     Fetal skin,car
            diovascular
            system

    IV      Basement
            membrane

    (3)     Note.  Synonyms.  Ossein, Avitene, Avicon.

    (4)     Note.  Sources.  Hides, skin, leather hair, connective tissue.

    (5)     Note.  CA Registry Number of unmodified form:  9007-34-5

    Mesh tree numbers:  D12.776.860.177

    Merck Index Monograph:  9:2442
            10:2443

    SEARCH CLASS:

    527,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 100+ and 200+ for
    the formation of a synthetic resin by simultaneous chemical reaction of a
    protein cellular material (e.g., hair, horn, leather) or a protein or
    biologically active polypeptide and resin forming ingredient.


CLS 530/357
TXT Keratin:

    Proteins under subclass 350 having the structure of Keratin and compounds
    derived from these by addition to or deletion of parts of the polypeptide
    structure.

    (1)     Note.  Physical Properties.  Characteristic properties of keratins:
     (a)  insolubility in water, including aqueous solutions of salts,
    hydrotropic, substances, and dilute acids and bases at tempertures not much
    above room temperature; (b) resistance to proteolytic enzymes:  (c)
    resistances hydrolysis; (d) Lysis by mixtures of substances which break the
    -S-S- bonds and the hydrogen bonds.

    (2)     Note.  Keratins contain all the common amino acids and have a high
    cystine content.

    (3)     Note.  Sources.  Horns, wool, feathers, shells, fingernail, claws,
    beaks, scales, whalebone (i.e., pseudokeratin).

    (4)     Note.  CA Registry Number of unmodified form:

    Mesh tree numbers:  D12.776.860.607

    Merck Index Monograph:  9:5143
            10:5128

    SEARCH CLASS:

    536,    Organic Compounds, subclass 20 for the polysaccharide chitin.


CLS 530/358
TXT Nucleoproteins, i.e., chromatin, chromosomal proteins, histones,
    protamines, salmine, etc.:

    Proteins under subclass 350 conjugated with nucleic acids.

    (1)     Note.  Upon hydrolysis nucleoproteins yield proteins and nucleic
    acids.  Further hydrolysis of the nucleic acid fraction will yield a
    mixture of purine and pyrimidine bases (Adenine, Guanine, Cytosine Thymine,
    Uracil), sugars (ribose or deoxyribose) and phosphoric acid.

    (2)     Note.  Casein for purposes of this class is excluded from
    nucleoproteins.

    (3)     Note.  Examples.  Chromatin, Heterochromatin, nucleosomes, histone
    and nonhistone chromosomal proteins, clupeine, salmine, ribonucleoproteins

    (4)     Note.  Mesh tree number:  D12.776.664

    Merck Index Monograph:  9:6537
            10:6570


CLS 530/359
TXT Lipoproteins, e.g., egg yolk proteins, cylomicrons, etc.:

    Proteins under subclass 350 which are conjugated with a lipid.

    (1)     Note.  Lipids include complex lipids which contain fatty acids as
    components (e.g., acylglycerols, phosphoglycerides, sphingolipids, etc.)
    and the simple lipids (terpenes and steroids).

    (2)     Note.  This subclass provides for lipoprotein systems, i.e.,
    transport lipoproteins and membrane systems, in which the lipid and protein
    are held together by hydrophobic interactions between the nonpolar portions
    of the lipid and protein components.

    (3)     Note.  Synonyms.  Apolipoprotein-serine, Lipoprotein Cl,
    Vitellogenin, Proteolipids, Apolipoproteins.

    (4)     Note. CA Registry Number: 53570-63-1

    Mesh tree Number: D10:516.532
            D12.776.521


CLS 530/360
TXT Casein or caseinate:

    Proteins under subclass 350 having the structure of casein and compounds
    derived from these by addition to or deletion of parts of the polypeptide
    structure.

    (1)     Note.  Physical Properties.  (Bovine)

    Number of Residues:
    Alpha-S1 Alpha-S2  Beta    Kappa
      199             207           209      169

    Molecular Weight:
     22,974        24,331   23,582     18,943

    (2)     Note.  Source.  Produced in mammary tissue from amino acids
    supplied by the blood.  Obtained from milk by removing the cream and
    acidifying the skimmed milk which causes casein to precipitate.  In cheese
    manufacture, casein is precipitated by the lactic acid formed from the same
    milk by rennet is favored for casein intended for plastics manufacture.

    (3)     Note.  Synonyms.  Protoflex, Protaflex, FN4, FN5

    (4)     Note.  CA Registry Number of unmodified form:  9000-71-9*

    Mesh tree number: D12.776.256.626.207

    Merck Index Monograph:  9:1879
            10:1866

    (5)     Note.  Milk proteins includes albumins, caseins and lactoglobulins.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    430,    Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or Product
    Thereof, subclasses 59, 537, 539, 628, 640, 642, and 643 for compositions
    containing casein used in forming an image.

    524,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 21+ for animal
    derived proteins such as blood, particularly subclasses 22+ for Gelatin and
    25+ for Casein, for a process in which the protein is physically mixed with
    a proformed resin.


CLS 530/361
TXT Separation, purification or synthesis:

    Processes under subclass 360 in which casein (1) is isolated from a
    preexisting material or composition or (2) is chemically synthesized.

    (1)     Note.  Processes of chemical after treatment of preexisting casein
    is provided for in 360 above.

    (2)     Note.  See subclass 345 for a detailed description of classes
    providing for separation, per se.


CLS 530/362
TXT Albumin:

    Proteins under subclass 350 having the structure of albumin and compounds
    derived from these by addition to or deletion of parts of the polypeptide
    structure.

    (1)     Note.  Physical Properties:  A group of proteins characterized by
    heat coagulability and solubility in dilute salt solution.

    (2)     Note.  Grain and soybean albumins, as well as all plant albumins
    are excluded from this subclass and provided for in subclasses 370+.

    (3)     Note.  Albumin refers to egg white or dried egg white.  Albumin
    contains 75 percent ovalbumin, ovoconalbumin, ovomucoid, ovomucin,
    ovoglobulin, lysozyme and avidin.

    (4)     Note.  Mesh tree number:  D12. 776.34

    Merck Index Monograph: 9:203
            10:203


CLS 530/363
TXT Serum albumin, e.g., BSA, HSA etc.:

    Proteins under subclass 363 having the structure of serum albumin and
    compounds derived from these by addition to or deletion of parts of the
    polypeptide structure.

    (1)     Note.  Physical Properties:  Molecular Weight:  about 69.000
    structure consists of carbohydrate-free polypeptide chain connecting four
    globular segments of unequal size stabilized by seventeen S-S bridges.

    (2)     Note.  Physiological properties. Involved in osmotic regulation and
    the transport of sparingly soluble metabolic products from one tissue to
    another, especially in the transport of free fatty acids.

    (3)     Note.  Synonyms.  Albumin, from blood; Albuminate; Albuminar;
    Albumisol; Albuspan; Buminate; Pro-Bumin; Proserum.

    (4)     Note.  CA Registry Number: 9048-46-8*

    Mesh tree number:       D12.776.34.841
            D12.776.124
            D12.776.124.727

    Merck Index Monograph:  7z9:8212
            10:8307


CLS 530/364
TXT Separation, purification or synthesis:

    Processes under subclass 363 in which serum albumins (a) is isolated from a
    preexisting material or composition or (b) is chemically synthesized.

    (1)     Note.  Processes of chemical after treatment of preexisting serum
    albumin are provided for in subclass 363 above.

    (2)     Note.  See subclass 344 for a detailed description of classes
    providing for separation, per se.


CLS 530/365
TXT Lactalbumin, e.g., milk source, etc.:

    Proteins under subclass 362 having the structure of lactalbumin and
    compounds derived from these by addition to or deletion of parts of the
    polypeptide structure.

    (1)     Note.  Physical Properties:

    Alpha lactalbumin (Bovine)
    Number of Residues:   123
    Molecular Weight:   14,183

    (2)     Note.  Physiological properties.

    Alpha-lactalbumin is related to animal lysozymes.

    (3)     Note.  Synonyms.

    (4)     Note.  CA Registry Number of unmodifed form:  12585-12-5

    Mesh tree number:                               D12.776.34.398
            D12.776.256.626.506

    SEARCH CLASS:

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes Compositions, and Products,
    appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 63, 92, 105, for edible
    protein compositions or products and related process involving the same.


CLS 530/366
TXT Separation, purification or synthesis:

    Processes under subclass 365 in which lactal albumin (a) is isolated from a
    preexisting material or composition or (b) is chemically synthesized.

    (1)     Note.  Processes of chemical after treatment of preexisting lactal
    albumins are provided for in 365 above.

    (2)     Note.  See subclass 344 for a detailed description of classes
    providing for separation, per se.


CLS 530/367
TXT Ovalbumin, e.g., avidin, conalbumins, etc.:

    Proteins under subclass 362 having the structure of ovalbumin and compounds
    derived from these by addition to or deletion of parts of the polypeptiede
    structure.

    (1)     Note.  Physical Properties.

    Numbers of residue:   400
    Molecular Weight:  45,000

    Structure is a complex protein consisting of a single polypeptide chain of
    about 400 residues, a minimum of two phosphate residues per mole, and an
    oligo-saccharide side chain composed of only mannose and glucosamine
    residues.

    (2)     Note.  Source.  Ovalbumin, comprises 75 percent of the protein of
    egg white from hen's eggs where it occurs with avidin, lysozyme, conalbumin
    and ovomacoid.

    (3)     Note.  Synonyms:  egg albumin, ovalbumin

    (4)     Note.  CA Registry Number of unmodifed form:

    Mesh tree number:
    Ovalbumin       Conalbumin
    D12.776.34.614  D12.776.34.180
    D12.776.256.317.663     D12.776.256.317.180

    Merck Index Monograph:
            9:6736
            10:6775

    (5)     Note.  Physical Properties.  Chicken Avidin.

    Number of Residues:  128

    Molecular Weght:  14,332 structure is a glycoprotein containing four
    essentially identical subunits:  With a combined molecular weight of about
    66,000.  Each subunit is a single polypeptide chain containing 128 amino
    acid residues with alanine at the N-terminal, glutamic acid at the
    C-terminal, and a carbohydrate moieity attached at the asparaginly residue
    position 17.

    (6)     Note.  Avidin.  Source.  Isolated from raw egg white protein of
    eggs of birds and amphibia.

    (7)     Note.  Avidin CA Registry Number of form:

    Mesh tree number:       D12.776.34.614.300
            D12.776.256.317.663.300
            D12.776.395.175

    Merck Index Monograph:   9: 906
                    10: 893

    SEARCH CLASS:

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 63, 92, 105 for edible
    protein compositions or products and related process involving the same.


CLS 530/368
TXT Separation, purification or synthesis:

    Processes under subclass 367 in which ovalbumins (a) is isolated from a
    preexisting material or composition or (b) is chemically synthesized.

    (1)     Note.  Processes of chemical after treatment of preexisting of
    ovalbumins are provided for in 367 above.

    (2)     Note.  See subclass 344 for a detailed description of classes
    providing for separation, per se.


CLS 530/369
TXT Separation, purification or synthesis:

    Processes under subclass 362 in which albumin (a) is isolated from a
    preexisting material or composition or (b) is chemically synthesized.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 344 for a detailed description of classes
    providing for separation, per se.


CLS 530/370
TXT Plant proteins, e.g., derived from legumes, algae or lichens, etc.:

    Proteins under subclass 350 derived from green or nongreen plants.

    (1)     Note.  Examples.  abrin, chloroplast coupling factor, concanavalin
    A, ferredoxins, ricin, plastocyanin phytochrome.

    (2)     Note.  Mesh tree number:D12.776.691
            D12.776.765

    SEARCH CLASS:

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 63, 92, 105 for edible
    protein compositions or products and related process involving the same.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 257.1+
    for subject matter involving algae including processes and compositions for
    their propagation, etc.

    930,    Peptide or Protein Sequence, subclasses 230 for multicelluar plant
    derived peptide or protein sequences.


CLS 530/371
TXT Derived from fungi, e.g., yeasts, mushroom, etc.:

    Plant proteins under subclass 370 which are isolated or extracted from
    fungi or from a fraction or isolate of fungi.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 254.1+
    for subject matter involving fungi and yeast including processes and
    compositions for their propagation, etc.


CLS 530/372
TXT Derived from grain, e.g., prolamines, etc.:

    Plant proteins under subclass 370 which are isolated or extracted from
    grain or from a fraction or isolate of grain.

    (1)     Note.  Grain  includes:  Wheat, rye, oats, barley, treticale, corn,
    rice, maize and products made from grains such as flours, peeled grains,
    germ, etc..

    SEARCH CLASS:

    524,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 47 for the use of a
    farinaceous material such as wheat as a physical additive to a preformed
    resin.

    525,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 54.24 for the
    chemical reaction of a flour or meal with a preformed resin.


CLS 530/373
TXT Zein.

    Proteins under subclass 372 having the structure of zein and compounds
    derived from these by addition to or deletion of parts of the polypeptide
    structure.

    (1)     Note.  Physical Properties.

    Molecular Weight:  greater than 38,000

    (2)     Note.  Zein is the product of extracting gluten meal with dilute
    isopropanol.

    (3)     Note.  CA Registry Number: 9010-66-6*

    Mesh tree number: D12.776.765.919

    Merck Index Monograph:  9:9779
                   10:9921


CLS 530/374
TXT Gluten or gliadin:

    Proteins under subclass 372 having the structure of Gluten or Gliadin and
    compounds derived from these by addition or deletion of parts of the
    polypeptide structure.

    (1)     Note.  Physical Properties.  For the structure of Gluten see Pance
    et al, Cereal Chemistry, Vol. 27, page 335 (1950).

    (2)     Note.  Gluten is a protein isolate from wheat intermixed with the
    starchy endosperm of the grain. Gliadin is a prolamine derived from grain
    containing up to 43 percent glutamine.

    (3)     Note.

    Gluten  Gliadin

    Mesh tree number:
    D12.776.765.412  D12.776.765.412.400

    Merck Index Monograph:
    9: 4308 9: 4249
    10:4337 10:4298


CLS 530/375
TXT Derived from wheat:

    Plant proteins under subclass 372 which are isolated or extracted from
    wheat or from a fraction or isolate of wheat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    524,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 47 for the use of a
    farinaceous material such as wheat as a physical additive to a preformed
    resin.


CLS 530/376
TXT Derived from corn:

    Plant proteins under subclass 372 which are isolated or extracted from corn
    or from a fraction or isolate of corn.


CLS 530/377
TXT Derived from oil seed, e.g., cotton seed, rapeseed, sunflower, etc.:

    Plant proteins under subclass 370 which are isolated or extracted from oil
    seed or from a fraction or isolate of oil seed.

    (1)     Note.  Included as oil seeds are:

    castor bean

    cotton seed

    flax seed

    hemp seed

    linseed

    navy bean

    peanut

    pinto bean

    rape seed

    sesame seed

    soybeans

    sunflower seed


CLS 530/378
TXT Derived from soybean:

    Plant proteins under subclass 377 which are isolated or extracted from
    soybean or from a fraction or isolate of soybean.


CLS 530/379
TXT Derived from leafy green plants, e.g., alfalfa pollen, etc.:

    Plant proteins under subclass 370 which are isolated or extracted from
    leafy green plants or from a fraction or isolate of leafy green plants.

    (1)     Note.  Included as leafy green plants are:

    alfalfa

    beet foliage

    celery

    cabbage

    kale

    lettuce

    silage

    spinach

    also included is the juice from crushed green plants, and pollens extracted
    from grass.

    (2)     Note.  Pollen is arbitrarily included here regardless of source.


CLS 530/380
TXT Blood proteins or globulins, e.g., proteoglycans, platelet factor 4,
    thyroglobulin, thyroxine, etc.:

    Proteins under subclass 350 identified as Blood Proteins or Globulins and
    compounds derived from these by addition to or deletion of parts of the
    polypeptide structure.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes transcobalamins, thrombosthenin,
    macroglobulin, microglobulin, lactoglobulin, thromboglobulin as well as
    serum or plasma proteins.

    (2)     Note.  Protein found in human plasma include:

    Prealbumin

    Albumin

    Alpha1-Lipoprotein

    Alpha1-Acid glycoprotein

    Alpha1-Antitrypsin

    Alpha1 Glycoprotein

    Transcortin

    4.6S-Postalbumin

    Alpha1-glycoprotein

    Thyroxin-binding globulin

    Inter-alpha-trypsin-inhibitor

    GC-globulin

    Haptoglobin

    Ceruloplasmin

    Cholinesterase

    Alpha2-Lipoproteins(s)

    Alpha2-Macroglobulin

    Alpha2-HS-glycoprotein

    Zn-Alpha2-glycoprotein

    Alpha2-Neuramino-glycoprotein

    Erythropoietin

    Beta-lipoprotein

    Transferrin

    Hemopexin

    Fibrinogen

    Plasminogen

    Beta2 -glycoprotein I

    Beta2 -glycoprotein II

    Immunoglobulin G

    (IgG) or Gamma G-globulin

    Immunoglobulin A (IgA) or Gamma A-globulin

    Immunoglobulin M

    (Iga) or Gamma M-globulin

    Immunoglobulin D (IgD) or Gamma D-Globulin

    Immunoglobulin E (IgD) or Gamma E Globulin

    Free K and Gamma light chains

    Complement factors

    (3)     Note.

    Blood Protein   Globulins

    Mesh tree number:
    D12.776.124     D12.776.377

    SEARCH CLASS:

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    appropriate subclasses, especially subclasses 63, 92, 105 for edible
    protein compositions or products and related process involving the same.

    524,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 21+ for animal
    derived proteins such as blood, particularly subclasses 22+ for Gelatin and
    25+ for casein, for a process in which the protein is physically mixed with
    a preformed resin.


CLS 530/381
TXT Blood coagulation factors and fibrin, e.g., thromboplastin, etc.:

    Proteins under subclass 350 identified as Blood Coagulation Factors or
    fibrin and compounds derived from these by addition to or deletion of parts
    of polypeptide structure.

    (1)     Note.  Important blood clotting factors include:

    International

    designation     Name

    I       Fibrinogen

    II      Prothrombin

    IIa     Thrombia

    III     Tissue thromboplastin

    V and VI        Proaccelerin, acc                       elerat
            or globulin

    VII     Proconvertin

    VIII    Antihemophilic globu
            lin  (AHG)

    IX      Christmas Factor,
            plasma thromboplas-                     tin
            component (PTC)

    X       Stuart-Prower factor,
            autoprothrombin III

    IX      Plasma thromboplas
            tin
            antecedent (PTA)

    XII     Hagemann Factor

    XIII    Fibrin-stabilizing fac
            tor

    (2)     Note.  Examples, Blood Coagulation Factor XIII, Laki-Lorand Factor,
    Fibrin-stabilizing Factor, Fibrinase.

    (3)     Note.  CA Registry Number of unmodified form:

    Factor XIII     XIIIa
    9013-563        9067-75-8

    Coagulation factors Fibrin

    Mesh tree Number:
    D12.776.124.125      D12.776.124.270
    D19.461.270.229      D19.461.270.463.400

    Merck Index Monograph:
    9:3862 through 3869
    10:3862 through 3869


CLS 530/382
TXT Fibrin or fibrin intermediates, e.g., fibrinogen etc.:

    Proteins under subclass 381 having the structure of fibrin and compounds
    derived for these by addition to or deletion of parts of the polypeptide
    structure.

    (1)     Note.  Physical Properties:

            Alpha      Beta   Gamma
    Fibrinogen      chain       chain  chain

    2564    610     461  411
    340,000 66,115    52,314   46,468

    (2)     Note.  Fibrinogen is a hexamer of two sets of three nonidentical
    chains linked by disulphide bonds.

    (3)     Note.  Example.  Fibrinogen, Fibrinopeptide A (19 residues MW
    1,892), antihemophilic globulin 1X, Blood Clotting Factor I, Parenogen.

    (4)     Note.  CA Registry Number: Fibrin
            9001-31-4*

    Mesh tree number:  D12.776.124.270
                                   D19.461.270.463.400

    Merck Index Monograph: 9:3990 through 3992
                      10:3999 through 4000


CLS 530/383
TXT Blood coagulation factor VIII, AHF:

    Proteins under subclass 381 having the structure of and compounds derived
    from these by addition to or deletion of parts of the polypeptide structure.

    (1)     Note.  Physical Properties:

    Molecular Weight: over 1,000,000

    (2)     Note. Physiological properties:  Involved in the formation of
    thromboplastin by the activation of factor X.

    (3)     Note.  Synonyms:  Antihemophilic  factor A, Thromboplastinogen,
    AHF-A Factor VIII, Antihemophilic A Factor, Factorate, Ristocetin cofactor,
    Blood platelet aggregating factor, Ristocetin, von Willebrand factor,
    antihemophioicglobulin (AHG).

    (4)     Note.  CA Registry Number:

    VIII    VIIIa
    9001-27-8       72175-66-7

    Mesh tree number: D12.776.124.125.350
                                  D19.461.270.229.369

    Merck Index Monograph:                          9:3864
            10:3864

    SEARCH CLASS:

    930,    Peptide or Protein Sequence, subclasses 100 for Factor VIII peptide
    or protein sequences.


CLS 530/384
TXT Blood coagulation FACTOR II, or factor II + VII + IX +, i.e., PROTHROMBIN
    OR prothrombin complex or factor:

    Proteins under subclass 381 having the structure of factor II and or
    prothrombin complex and compounds derived from these by addition to or
    deletion of parts of the polypeptide structure.

    (1)     Note.  Factor II Physical Properties.

    Number of Residues:  582
    Molecular Weight:  68,900

    (2)     Note.  Factor II Physiological Properties.  An inactive plasma
    zymogen which is converted to thiombin (factor lla) by thromboplastin in
    the presence of calcium ions.

    (3)     Note.  Factor II.  Synonyms.  Prothrombin fragment 2, factor II
    prothrombase, serozyme, thrombogen.

    (4)     Note.  Factor II CA Registry
    Number:  9070-19-3

    Mesh tree number: D8.444.709
                              D19.776.124.125.800
                             D19.461.270.229.740
                             D19.461.270.792

    Merck Index Monograph:
             9:3864
            10:7790

    (5)     Note.  Synonyms. Prothrombin complex components.

    Factor
    VII.    Proconvertin
    VII.a   E.C.3,4,21,.21

    IX.     Antihemophilic fac-
            tor B, Christmas
            factor, plasma
            throm boplastin
            compo
            nent,
            PTC, AHF-B
    X.      Stuart factor,
            Stuart-
            Power factor,
            Prethrombokinese
    Xa.     Autoprothrombin C,
            Thrombokinese,
            Thromboplastin

    (6)     Note.  Prothrombin complex components.

    CA Registry Number:
    VII     9001-25-6VIIa   65312-43-8I
    X       900-28-9
    X       9070-18-2
    Xa      9002-05-5


CLS 530/385
TXT Hemoglobins or globins:

    Proteins under subclass 380 having the structure of hemoglobins or globins
    and compounds derived from these by addition to or deletion of parts of the
    polypeptide structure.

    (1)     Note.  Physical Properties.

    HEMOGLOBIN

    Human   Beta    Delta   Epsilon
    alpha chain     chain   chain   chain

    141     146     146     146
            15,867   15,924 16,072

    Globin

    Number of Residues:  574
    Molecular Weight: about 62,000

    Globin from normal adult human hemoglobin consists of four polypeptide
    chains:  two alpha-chains and two beta-chains.  The alpha-chain contains
    141, the beta-chain 146 amino acids.  Abnormal globins may contain gamma
    and delta-chains.

    (2)     Note.  Physiological properties.  At pH values near neutrality,
    combines with ferroprotoporphyrin to yield hemoglobin, or with
    ferriprotoporphyrin yield methemoglobin.

    (3)     Note.  Examples. Leshemoglobins, Uteroglobins.  Hemoglobin
    Synonyms: Blood pigments, Ferrohemoglobins Hbs, Hb, Deoxyhemoglobins,
    Eryhem, Erythrocruorins carboxyhemoglobin.

    (4)     Note.  CA Registry Number of Hemoglobins:  9008-02-0*

    Mesh tree number:  D12:776.124.400
                                    D12.776.422.512

    Merck Index Monograph:
    Globin:    9: 4276    10:  4306
    Hemoglobin 9: 4505    10:  4538
    Methemoglobin 9: 5824 10:  5827

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400,    for myoglobins.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology or Microbiology, appropriate subclass
    for lysozyme which is sometimes denominated globulin G1.

    540,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 145+ for heme, the oxygen carrying
    prosthetic group of hemogoblin and myoglobin which is a substituted
    porphyrin.


CLS 530/386
TXT Globulins:

    Proteins under subclass 380 identified as globulins and compounds derived
    from these by addition to or deletion of parts of the polypeptide structure.

    (1)     Note.  Physical Properties:  Proteins which are insoluble in water
    at their isoelectric point are classified as globulins.  The term
    "isoelectric point" is the pH at which a globulin will not migrate to
    either the cathode or anode when a direct current is passed through an
    aqueous suspension or dilute salt solution of the globulin.

    (2)     Note.  Physiological properties. This group includes many enzymes
    and most glycoproteins.  Enzymes are provided for in Class 435, Chemistry:
    Molecular Biology and Microbiology.

    (3)     Note.  Examples, Euglobulins, Psendoglobulins.

    (4)     Note.

    Mesh tree number:

    Serum Globulins    Thryoglobulin    Globuins
    D12.776.124.790  D12.776.377.856 D12.776.377
    D12.776.377.715  D2.776.395.768
                                  D12.776.468.706


CLS 530/387.1
TXT Immunoglobulin, antibody, or fragment thereof, other than immunoglobulin,
    antibody, or fragment thereof that is conjugated or adsorbed:Subject matter
    under subclass 386 in which the protein has the structure of an
    immunoglobulin, antibody, or fragment thereof that is not conjugated or
    adsorbed to another substance.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes immunoglobulins or gamma globulins
    (except monoclonal antibodies) whose binding specificities are not
    disclosed, and methods of purifying immunoglobulins, except those methods
    provided for in subclasses 390.1 and 390.5.  Patents pertaining generically
    to monoclonal antibodies whose binding specificities are not disclosed are
    classified in subclasses 388.1 or 388.15.

    (2)     Note.  Immunoglobulins may be monoclonal or polyclonal.  Monoclonal
    antibodies are identical antibody molecules produced by a clone of cells or
    cell line that is derived from a single antibody-producing cell, or are
    antibody molecules that have otherwise been made identical. Polyclonal
    antibodies or immunoglobulins are mixtures of antibodies produced by
    multiple cells or clones of cells that produce antibody molecules that are
    not identical to each other, but which may bind different antigenic
    determinants or epitopes on the same molecule.

    (3)     Note.  Antibodies are assumed to be polyclonal unless they are
    specifically characterized as being monoclonal, or if they are secreted by
    a single cell line or cell clone.

    (4)     Note.  The major classes of immunoglobulins are IgG, IgM, IgA, IgD,
    and IgE.  Subclasses of immunoglobulins also exist, notably the IgG1,
    IgG2a, IgG2b, IgG3, and IgG4 subclasses comprising the IgG class.  IgY is
    similar to IgG and is found only in birds.

    (5)     Note.  Synonyms are immune globulin, gamma globulin, Ig, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    391.1+, for antibodies or antisera or fragments thereof that are conjugated
    or adsorbed to other substances.

    407,    for methods of hydrolysis of proteins.

    828,    for cancer-associated proteins.

    829,    for blood proteins, including immunoglobulins.

    830,    for plasma or serum proteins, including immunoglobulins.

    831,    for immunoglobulins and other proteins isolated via the Cohn
    fractionation method.

    832,    for immunoglobulins isolated from milk or colostrum.

    833,    for immunoglobulins isolated from whey.

    851,    for immunoglobulins isolated from placental extracts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, for
    compositions intended for class defined uses such as in vivo diagnosing
    (e.g., imaging), methods of making such compositions, and nominal methods
    of using such compositions, see subclasses 1.49+ for compositions
    comprising radiolabelled antibody, or antibody fragment, or immunoglobulin,
    subclasses 9.3+ and 9.4+ for testing compositions, and subclasses 130.1+
    for body-treating compositions containing an immunoglobulin, an antiserum,
    an antibody, or an antibody fragment.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 4+,
    particularly subclasses 7.1+ for antibodies used in immunological testing
    involving a microorganism or an enzyme; subclass 188 for antibodies
    conjugated to enzymes; and subclass 188.5 for catalytic antibodies.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclass 15 for
    protein-containing compositions used as standards or controls; subclass 16
    for blood standards; subclass 66 for tests for hemoglobin or myoglobin;
    subclass 69 for tests for blood clotting factors; subclasses 86+ for tests
    for proteins or peptides, including sequencing methods; subclass 501 for
    complement binding assays or protein binding assays; and subclasses 506-548
    for  tests using antigen-antibody interactions in a chemical test,
    particularly subclasses 543-548, which collect methods of modifying
    antigens and antibodies as part of a testing procedure.

    514,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 1-21
    and Cross-Reference Art Collections 800-809 which provide for compositions
    having a Class 424 utility containing a peptide or protein as an organic
    active ingredient.

    525,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 54.1 for antibodies
    chemically bound to synthetic resins.


CLS 530/387.2
TXT Anti-idiotypic:
    Subject matter under subclass 387.1 involving an antibody or antibody
    fragment that binds another antibody at one of its idiotopes.

    (1)     Note.  An idiotope is an antigenic determinant in the variable
    region of the antibody.

    (2)     Note.  An idiotype is that set of idiotopes characteristic of a
    particular antibody.

    (3)     Note.  "Internal image" antibodies are a subset of anti-idiotypic
    antibodies that mimic the antigen in their ability to elicit antibodies
    that bind said antigen.

    (4)     Note.  It is suggested that the patents in this subclass be
    cross-referenced to the appropriate subclass(es) that provide for the
    binding specificity of the antibodies bound by the anti-idiotypic
    antibodies, if disclosed.


CLS 530/387.3
TXT Chimeric, mutated, or recombined hybrid (e.g., bifunctional, bispecific,
    rodent-human chimeric, single chain, rFv,  immunoglobulin fusion protein,
    etc.):Subject matter under subclass 387.1 involving an antibody or antibody
    fragment altered with respect to its amino acid sequence; with respect to
    its composition of heavy and light chains or immunoglobulin domains; or
    with respect to its glycosylation, as compared with that found in nature;
    or involving an antibody or antibody fragment fused to a nonimmunoglobulin
    amino acid sequence.

    (1)     Note.  Chimeric and recombined hybrid antibodies comprise amino
    acid sequences derived from two or more nonidentical immunoglobulin
    mole-cules--e.g., interspecies combinations, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Chimeric, mutated, and recombined hybrid antibodies may be
    made either by chemical alteration of existing antibodies or by the
    expression of cloned genes for altered or recombined antibodies.
    Glycosylation of the antibody molecules may be altered when expressed in
    host cells of  species other than their own.

    (3)     Note.  It is suggested that the patents of this subclass be
    cross-referenced to the appropriate subclass(es) that provide for the
    binding specificity of these antibodies, if disclosed.


CLS 530/387.5
TXT Binds oligosaccharide structure:
    Subject matter under subclass 387.1 involving an antibody or
    antigen-binding fragment thereof whose antigen-binding site(s) will combine
    with an oligosaccharide structure that is either free, a component of a
    glycoprotein, or a component of a glycolipid.

    (1)     Note.  The oligosaccharide structure can be one that is
    schematically illustrated in the disclosure or one that is known in the
    art, such as the carbohydrate component of ganglioside GD3.

    (2)     Note.  Some of the oligosaccharide structures disclosed by the
    patents of this subclass are expressed on the surfaces of cancer cells as
    components of glycoproteins or glycolipids and are related to the A, B, Le,
    or H blood-group antigens.

    (3)     Note.  It is suggested that the patents in this subclass be
    cross-referenced to the appropriate subclass(es) that provide for
    antibodies that bind the microorganism(s) upon which the oligosaccharide
    structure is expressed, if such disclosure is present.


CLS 530/387.7
TXT Binds expression product of cancer-related gene or fragment thereof (e.g.,
    oncogene, proto-oncogene, etc.):Subject matter under subclass 387.1
    involving an antibody or antigen-binding fragment thereof whose
    antigen-binding site(s) will combine with an expression product or fragment
    thereof of a cancer-related gene, such as an oncogene or proto-oncogene.

    (1)     Note.  An oncogene is a genetic sequence whose expression
    transforms a normal cell into a cancerous cell.  A proto-oncogene is a
    genetic sequence found in a noncancerous cell which, when mutated in a
    characteristic way, can become an oncogene.


CLS 530/387.9
TXT Binds specifically-identified amino acid sequence:
    Subject matter under subclass 387.1 involving an antibody or
    antigen-binding fragment thereof whose antigen-binding site(s) will combine
    with a protein or peptide antigen or antigenic determinant whose amino acid
    sequence is disclosed.

    (1)     Note.  It is suggested that the patents in this subclass be
    cross-referenced to the subclass(es) that provide for antibodies that bind
    the antigen or antigenic determinant that the disclosed sequence comprises.


CLS 530/388.1
TXT Monoclonal:
    Subject matter under subclass 387.1 involving an antibody or fragment
    thereof produced by a clone of cells or cell line that is derived from a
    single antibody-producing cell, wherein said antibody is identical to all
    other antibodies produced by that clone of cells or cell line.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for antibodies and fragments thereof
    that are produced by any cloning technology that yields identical
    molecules, e.g., hybridoma technology, recombinant DNA technology, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Monoclonal antibodies are sometimes termed monoclonal
    receptors.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass includes monoclonal antibodies whose binding
    specificities are not disclosed and includes methods of purifying
    monoclonal antibodies, per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    808+,   for cell lines producing monoclonal antibodies.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 326+ for
    an animal cell, per se, which expresses immunoglobulin, antibody, or
    fragment thereof.


CLS 530/388.15
TXT Human:
    Subject matter under subclass 388.1 involving a monoclonal antibody or
    fragment thereof derived from a human source, or whose amino acid sequence
    is identical to that found in humans.


CLS 530/388.2
TXT Binds microorganism or normal or mutant component or product thereof (e.g.,
    animal cell, cell-surface antigen, secretory product, etc.):Subject matter
    under subclass 388.1 involving a monoclonal antibody or antigen-binding
    fragment thereof whose antigen-binding site(s) will combine with an
    integral or isolated part of a micro-organism, or with a substance shed or
    secreted     by    a    micro-organism,   or  with a  chemically-altered
    component of a microorganism, or with a chemically-altered substance shed
    or secreted by a micro-organism.

    (1)     Note.  A micro-organism, for the purpose of this and indented
    subclasses, is a cell of a multicellular organism, a single-celled
    organism, a virus, or other intracellular organism.

    (2)     Note.  A mutant or chemically-altered component or product of a
    micro-organism may be made by chemical synthesis or chemical modification
    or by expression of a cloned altered gene.

    (3)     Note.  Monoclonal antibodies or fragments thereof that bind a
    mutant or chemically-altered component or product of a micro-organism are
    proper for the subclass that provides for monoclonal antibodies that bind
    the corresponding normal component or product.


CLS 530/388.21
TXT Binds nucleic acid or derivative or component thereof (e.g., DNA, RNA,
    DNA-RNA hybrid, nucleotide, nucleoside, carcinogen-DNA adduct,
    etc.):Subject matter under subclass 388.2 involving a monoclonal antibody
    or antigen-binding fragment thereof whose antigen-binding site(s) will
    combine with a nucleic acid; a component of a nucleic acid, such as a
    nucleotide or nucleoside; or a modified nucleic acid, such as
    carcinogen-DNA adduct resulting from exposure to a carcinogen.

    (1)     Note.  An adduct is an addition group or compound.


CLS 530/388.22
TXT Binds receptor (e.g., transferrin receptor, Fc receptor, dihydropyridine
    receptor, IL-2 receptor, etc.):Subject matter under subclass 388.2
    involving a monoclonal antibody or antigen-binding fragment thereof whose
    antigen-binding site(s) will combine  with  a  free    or
    micro-organism-associated receptor.

    (1)     Note.  A receptor is a structure integral to a micro-organism or
    released into the surrounding milieu that has binding specificity for a
    particular three-dimensional structural configuration of a molecule or
    portion thereof.

    (2)     Note.  For the purpose of this subclass, an antibody is not
    considered a receptor. Patents  disclosing   non-anti-idiotypic monoclonal
    antibodies or fragments thereof that bind other immunoglobulins are proper
    for subclass 388.25, unless the monoclonal antibodies specifically bind
    lymphocyte-bound immunoglobulins, in which case the patents are proper for
    subclass 388.73.


CLS 530/388.23
TXT Binds lymphokine, cytokine, or other secreted growth regulatory factor,
    differentiation factor, or intercellular mediator specific for a
    hematopoietic cell (e.g., interleukin, interferon, erythropoietin,
    etc.):Subject matter under subclass 388.2 involving a monoclonal antibody
    or antigen-binding fragment thereof whose antigen-binding site(s) will
    combine with a lymphokine, cytokine, or any other secreted growth
    stimulatory factor, growth inhibitory factor, differentiation factor, or
    intercellular mediator that targets any type(s) of hematopoietic cells.

    (1)     Note.  The term "growth regulatory factor" is meant to encompass
    any secretory     factor     that      is     growth-stimulatory or
    growth-inhibitory; i.e., that will stimulate or inhibit clonal expansion of
    cells.

    (2)     Note.  The term "differentiation factor" is meant to encompass any
    secretory factor that causes cells to progress from a relatively
    undifferentiated state to a more differentiated state, wherein said
    progression may include clonal expansion.

    (3)     Note.  The term "intercellular mediator" is meant to encompass any
    secretory factor that affects cellular functions such as chemotaxis, etc.

    (4)     Note.  See Patent Classification Definitions for Class 424,
    subclass 85.1, for examples of lymphokines and cytokines.

    (5)     Note.  Hematopoietic cells are considered to be bone marrow stem
    cells and cells derived from bone marrow stem cells, including cells at any
    stage of differentiation from progenitor cells to mature erythrocytes,
    granulocytes, lymphocytes, etc., both normal and neoplastic.


CLS 530/388.24
TXT Binds hormone or other secreted growth regulatory factor, differentiation
    factor, intercellular mediator, or neurotransmitter (e.g., insulin, human
    chorionic gonadotropin, intragonadal regulatory protein, mullerian
    inhibiting substance, inhibin, epidermal growth factor, nerve growth
    factor, dopamine, norepinephrine, etc.):Subject matter under subclass 388.2
    involving a monoclonal antibody or antigen-binding fragment thereof whose
    antigen-binding site(s) will combine with a neurotransmitter, with a
    hormone, or with any other secreted growth regulatory factor,
    differentiation factor, or intercellular mediator that targets cells other
    than hematopoietic cells.

    (1)     Note.  The term "growth regulatory factor" is meant to encompass
    any secretory     factor    that    is    growth-stimulatory or
    growth-inhibitory; e.g., that will stimulate or inhibit clonal expansion of
    cells.

    (2)     Note.  The term "differentiation factor" is meant to encompass any
    secretory factor that causes cells to progress from a relatively
    undifferentiated state to a more differentiated state, wherein said
    progression may include clonal expansion.

    (3)     Note.  The term "intercellular mediator"   is    meant    to
    encompass     any    secretory factor that affects cellular functions such
    as chemotaxis, etc.


CLS 530/388.25
TXT Binds plasma protein, serum protein, or fibrin (e.g., clotting factor,
    fibrinolytic factor, complement factor, immunoglobulin, apolipoprotein,
    etc.):Subject matter under subclass 388.2 involving a monoclonal antibody
    or antigen-binding fragment thereof whose antigen-binding site(s) will
    combine with a plasma protein, serum protein, or with fibrin.

    (1)     Note.  Patents with disclosures to monoclonal antibodies or
    fragments thereof that bind proteins, including enzymes, that are members
    of plasma "activation systems"--including the clotting system, the
    fibrinolytic system, the bradykinin system, and the complement system--are
    proper for this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Patents with disclosures to non-anti-idiotypic monoclonal
    antibodies or fragments thereof that bind immunoglobulins are proper for
    this subclass, unless the monoclonal antibodies specifically bind
    lymphocyte-bound immunoglobulins, in which case, they are proper for
    subclass 388.73.

    (3)     Note.  See Patent Classification Definitions for Class 530,
    subclasses 380+, for examples of plasma and serum proteins.


CLS 530/388.26
TXT Binds enzyme:
    Subject matter under subclass 388.2 involving a monoclonal antibody or
    antigen-binding fragment thereof whose antigen-binding site(s) will combine
    with an enzyme.


CLS 530/388.3
TXT Binds virus or component or product thereof (e.g., virus-associated
    antigen, etc.):Subject matter under subclass 388.2 involving a monoclonal
    antibody or antigen-binding fragment thereof whose antigen-binding site(s)
    will combine with an integral or isolated part of a virus, or with a
    substance shed by a virus, such as a viral antigen.


CLS 530/388.35
TXT Binds retrovirus or component or product thereof (e.g., HIV, LAV, HTLV,
    etc.):Subject matter under subclass 388.3 involving a monoclonal antibody
    or antigen-binding fragment thereof whose antigen-binding site(s) will
    combine with an integral or isolated part of a retrovirus, or with a
    substance shed by a retrovirus, such as a viral antigen.

    (1)     Note.  Retroviruses are RNA viruses that encode the enzyme reverse
    transcriptase and  that are associated with acquired immune deficiency
    syndrome (AIDS) and related disorders, as well as with some forms of
    cancer, such as those  caused   by   HTLV    (human T-lymphotrophic virus)
    I and II, Rous sarcoma virus, MMTV (murine mammary tumor virus), feline
    leukemia virus, etc.


CLS 530/388.4
TXT Binds bacterium or similar microorganism or component or  product   thereof
        (e.g., Streptococcus,   Legionella,    Mycoplasma,
    bacterium-associated antigen, exotoxin, etc.):Subject matter under subclass
    388.2 involving a monoclonal antibody or antigen-binding fragment thereof
    whose antigen-binding site(s) will combine with an integral or isolated
    part of a bacterium or similar micro-organism, or with a substance shed or
    secreted by a bacterium or similar micro-organism.

    (1)     Note.  For the purpose of this subclass, micro-organisms "similar"
    to bacteria are those that have properties in common with typical bacteria,
    but which differ from them in characteristic ways.  Examples of such
    micro-organisms are rickettsiae, chlamydiae, and mycoplasmas.


CLS 530/388.5
TXT Binds fungus or plant cell or component or product thereof (e.g.,
    fungus-associated antigen, etc.):Subject matter under subclass 388.2
    involving a monoclonal antibody or antigen-binding fragment thereof whose
    antigen-binding site(s) will combine with an integral or isolated part of a
    fungus or plant cell, or with a substance shed or secreted by a fungus or
    plant cell.

    (1)     Note.  Fungi include yeast and mold.


CLS 530/388.6
TXT Binds parasitic protozoan or metazoan cell or component or product thereof
    (e.g., Dirofilaria, Eimeria, Coccidia, Trichinella, parasite cell-surface
    antigen, etc.):Subject matter under subclass 388.2 involving a monoclonal
    antibody or antigen-binding fragment thereof whose antigen-binding site(s)
    will combine with an integral or isolated part of a parasitic protozoan or
    metazoan cell, or with a substance shed or secreted by a parasitic
    protozoan or metazoan cell.

    (1)     Note.  Metazoan parasites include such multicellular organisms as
    the parasitic flatworms and roundworms.


CLS 530/388.7
TXT Binds hematopoietic cell or component or product thereof (e.g.,
    erythrocyte, granulocyte, macrophage, monocyte, platelet, myelogenous
    leukemia cell, bone marrow stem cell, granulocytic cell-surface antigen,
    hemoglobin, thrombospondin, glycophorin, etc.):Subject matter under
    subclass 388.2 involving a monoclonal antibody or antigen-binding fragment
    thereof whose antigen-binding site(s) will combine with an integral or
    isolated part of a hematopoietic cell, or with a substance shed or secreted
    by a hematopoietic cell.

    (1)     Note.  Hematopoietic cells are considered to be bone marrow stem
    cells and cells derived from bone marrow stem cells, including cells at any
    stage of differentiation from progenitor cells to mature erythrocytes,
    granulocytes, lymphocytes, etc., both normal and neoplastic.


CLS 530/388.73
TXT Binds lymphocytic or lymphocytic-like cell or component or product thereof
    (e.g., B cell, B-lineage bone marrow cell, null cell, natural killer cell,
    B-lymphoblastoid cell, B-lineage acute     lymphoblastic      leukemia
    cell, B-lymphocytic cell-surface antigen, etc.):Subject matter under
    subclass 388.7 involving a monoclonal antibody or antigen-binding fragment
    thereof whose antigen-binding site(s) will combine with an integral or
    isolated part of a lymphocytic or lymphocytic-like cell, or with a
    substance shed or secreted by a lymphocytic cell or lymphocytic-like cell.

    (1)     Note.  Lymphocytes are considered to be either B- or T-lineage
    cells.  Null cells, K cells, and natural killer cells are considered
    "lymphocytic-like" cells, since they have the morphology of lymphocytes but
    not the antigenic markers of either B- or T-lineage cells.


CLS 530/388.75
TXT Binds T-lymphocytic cell or component or product     thereof    (e.g.,   T
    cell,   thymocyte, T-lineage bone marrow cell, T-lymphoblastoid cell,
    T-lineage acute lymphoblastic leukemia cell, T-lymphocytic cell-surface
    antigen, etc.):Subject matter under subclass 388.73 involving a monoclonal
    antibody or antigen-binding fragment thereof whose antigen-binding site(s)
    will combine with an integral or isolated part of a T-lymphocytic cell, or
    with a substance shed or secreted by a T-lymphocytic cell.


CLS 530/388.8
TXT Binds cancer cell or component or product thereof (e.g., cell-surface
    antigen, etc.):Subject matter under subclass 388.2 involving a monoclonal
    antibody or antigen-binding fragment thereof whose antigen-binding site(s)
    will combine with an integral or isolated part of a cancer cell, or with a
    substance shed or secreted by a cancer cell.


CLS 530/388.85
TXT Binds antigen characterized by name or molecular weight (e.g., CEA, NCA, CC
    glycoprotein, melanoma gp 150 antigen, etc.):Subject matter under subclass
    388.8 involving a monoclonal antibody or antigen-binding fragment thereof
    whose antigen-binding site(s) will combine with an antigen that is an
    integral or isolated part of a cancer cell, or that is shed or secreted by
    a cancer cell, and that is disclosed by name or molecular weight.


CLS 530/388.9
TXT Binds drug, hapten, hapten-carrier complex, or specifically-identified
    chemical structure (e.g., theophylline, digoxin, etc.):Subject matter under
    subclass 388.1 involving a monoclonal antibody or antigen-binding fragment
    thereof whose antigen-binding site(s) will combine with a drug, hapten,
    hapten-carrier complex, or with a specifically-identified chemical
    structure that is disclosed.

    (1)     Note.  A hapten is a molecule or portion thereof that has little or
    no antigenicity unless coupled to a carrier molecule that is antigenic.
    Haptens are usually, but not always, of low molecular weight.  Common
    carriers are proteins such as bovine serum albumin (BSA) and keyhole limpet
    hemocyanin (KLH).


CLS 530/389.1
TXT Polyclonal antibody or immunoglobulin of identified binding
    specificity:Subject matter under subclass 387.1 involving a polyclonal
    antibody   or   immunoglobulin   orantigen-binding fragment thereof whose
    binding specificity is disclosed.

    (1)     Note.  "Binding specificity" refers to the antigen or antigenic
    determinant that will combine with the antigen-binding site(s) of a
    polyclonal antibody or antigen-binding  fragment(s)  thereof; i.e., a
    polyclonal antibody or antigen-binding fragment thereof may have binding
    specificity for an animal cell, etc.


CLS 530/389.2
TXT Binds hormone, lymphokine, cytokine, or other secreted growth regulatory
    factor, differentiation factor, intercellular mediator, or neurotransmitter
    (e.g., insulin, human chorionic gonadotropin, glucagon, cardiodilatin,
    interleukin, interferon, norepinephrine, epinephrine, acetylcholine,
    etc.):Subject matter under subclass 389.1 involving a polyclonal antibody
    or immunoglobulin or  antigen-binding     fragment     thereof
    whoseantigen-binding site(s) will combine with a hormone, lymphokine,
    cytokine, or other secreted growth regulatory factor, differentiation
    factor, intercellular mediator, or neurotransmitter.

    (1)     Note.  The term "growth regulatory factor" is meant to encompass
    any secretory     factor     that     is    growth-stimulatory or
    growth-inhibitory; i.e., that will stimulate or inhibit clonal expansion of
    cells.

    (2)     Note.  The term "differentiation factor" is meant to encompass any
    secretory factor that causes cells to progress from a relatively
    undifferentiated state to a more differentiated state, wherein said
    progression may include clonal expansion.

    (3)     Note.  The term "intercellular mediator" is meant to encompass any
    secretory factor that affects cellular functions such as chemotaxis, etc.

    (4)     Note.  See Patent Classification Definitions for Class 424,
    subclass 85.1 for examples of lymphokines and cytokines.

    (5)     Note.  This subclass includes polyclonal antibodies,
    immunoglobulins, or fragments thereof that bind any growth regulatory
    factor, differentiation factor, or intercellular mediator that targets any
    type(s) of cells, including hematopoietic cells.

    (6)     Note.  Hematopoietic cells are considered to be bone marrow stem
    cells and cells derived from bone marrow stem cells, including cells at any
    stage of differentiation from progenitor cells to mature erythrocytes,
    granulocytes, lymphocytes, etc., both normal and neoplastic.


CLS 530/389.3
TXT Binds plasma protein, serum protein, or fibrin (e.g., clotting factor,
    fibrinolytic factor, complement factor, immunoglobulin, apolipoprotein,
    etc.):Subject matter under subclass 389.1 involving a polyclonal   antibody
    or  immunoglobulin  or antigen-binding      fragment    thereof
    whoseantigen-binding site(s) will combine with a plasma protein, serum
    protein, or with fibrin.

    (1)     Note.  Patents with disclosures to polyclonal antibodies or
    immunoglobulins or fragments thereof that bind proteins, including enzymes,
    that are members of plasma "activation systems"--including the clotting
    system, the fibrinolytic system, the bradykinin system, and the complement
    system--are proper for this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Patents with disclosures to nonanti-idiotypic polyclonal
    antibodies or fragments thereof that bind immunoglobulins are proper for
    this subclass, unless the antibodies specifically bind lymphocyte-bound
    immunoglobulins, in which case the patents are proper for subclass 389.6.

    (3)     Note.  See Patent Classification Definitions for Class 530,
    subclasses 380+ for examples of plasma and serum proteins.


CLS 530/389.4
TXT Binds virus or component or product thereof (e.g., virus-associated
    antigen, etc.):Subject matter under subclass 389.1 involving a polyclonal
    antibody or  immunoglobulin or antigen-binding fragment thereof whose
    antigen-binding site(s) will combine with an integral or isolated part of a
    virus, or with a substance shed by a virus, such as a viral antigen.


CLS 530/389.5
TXT Binds bacterium or similar microorganism or component or product thereof
    (e.g.,   pseudomonas, chlamydia, clostridium, bacterium-associated antigen,
    etc.):Subject matter under subclass 389.1 involving a polyclonal
    antibody     or    immunoglobulin    orantigen-binding fragment thereof
    whose antigen-binding site(s) will combine with an integral or isolated
    part of a bacterium or similar micro-organism, or with a substance shed or
    secreted by a bacterium or similar micro-organism.

    (1)     Note.  Micro-organisms "similar" to bacteria are those that have
    properties in common with bacteria, but which differ from typical bacteria
    in characteristic ways.  Examples of such microorganisms are rickettsiae,
    chlamydiae, and mycoplasmas.


CLS 530/389.6
TXT Binds hematopoietic cell or component or product thereof (e.g.,
    erythrocyte, granulocyte, bone marrow cell, lymphocyte, leukemic cell,
    hematopoietic cell-surface antigen, hemoglobin, etc.): Subject matter under
    subclass 389.1 involving a polyclonal antibody or immunoglobulin or
    antigen-binding fragment  thereof whose antigen-binding site(s) will
    combine with an integral or isolated part of a hematopoietic cell, or with
    a substance shed or secreted by a hematopoietic cell.

    (1)     Note.  Hematopoietic cells are considered to be bone marrow stem
    cells and cells derived from bone marrow stem cells, including cells at any
    stage of differentiation, from progenitor cells to mature erythrocytes,
    granulocytes, lymphocytes, etc., both normal and neoplastic.


CLS 530/389.7
TXT Binds cancer cell or component or product thereof (e.g., cell-surface
    antigen, etc.):Subject matter under subclass 389.1 involving a polyclonal
    antibody or immunoglobulin or antigen-binding fragment thereof whose
    antigen-binding site(s) will combine with an integral or isolated part of a
    cancer cell, or with a substance shed or secreted by a cancer cell.


CLS 530/389.8
TXT Binds drug, hapten, hapten-carrier complex, or specifically-identified
    chemical structure (e.g., theophylline, digoxin, etc.):Subject matter under
    subclass 389.1 involving a polyclonal antibody or immunoglobulin or
    antigen-binding fragment thereof whose antigen-binding site(s) will combine
    with a drug, hapten, hapten-carrier complex, or with a
    specifically-identified chemical structure that is disclosed.

    (1)     Note.  A hapten is a molecule or portion thereof that has little or
    no antigenicity unless coupled to a carrier molecule that is antigenic.
    Haptens are usually, but not always, of low molecular weight.  Common
    carriers are proteins such as bovine serum albumin (BSA) and keyhole limpet
    hemocyanin (KLH).


CLS 530/390.1
TXT Removing or inactivating virus or bacterium or component or product thereof
    (e.g., endotoxin, etc.):Subject matter under subclass 387.1 involving a
    process of removing or inactivating a virus, a bacterium, or a component or
    product thereof that contaminates an immunoglobulin preparation; or an
    immunoglobulin preparation prepared thereby.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    831,    for immunoglobulins isolated via the Cohn fractionation method.


CLS 530/390.5
TXT Removing, dissociating or preventing the formation of aggregated,
    denatured, fragmented, or polymerized immunoglobulin or antibody; or
    preventing or reducing complement fixation or binding; or reducing
    antigenicity; or removing, inactivating, or inhibiting contaminating plasma
    proteins (e.g., proteolytic enzymes, etc.):Subject matter under subclass
    387.1 involving a process of removing, dissociating, or preventing the
    formation of aggregated, denatured, fragmented, polymerized immunoglobulins
    or antibodies; or a process of preventing or reducing complement fixation
    or complement binding by an immunoglobulin preparation; or a process of
    reducing the antigenicity of an immunoglobulin preparation; or a process of
    removing, inactivating, or inhibiting plasma proteins, such as proteolytic
    enzymes, that contaminate an immunoglobulin preparation; or involving an
    immunoglobulin preparation prepared thereby.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for methods of removing plasma
    proteins that co-purify with immunoglobulins and for methods of removing
    immunoglobulin fragments or aggregates that create adverse effects, such as
    complement activation--i.e., "anticomplementary activity"--when an
    immunoglobulin preparation is administered intravenously.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    831,    for immunoglobulins isolated via the Cohn fractionation method.


CLS 530/391.1
TXT Monoclonal or polyclonal antibody or immunoglobulin or fragment thereof
    that is conjugated or adsorbed (e.g., adsorbed to a solid support,
    etc.):Subject matter under subclass 386 involving a monoclonal or
    polyclonal antibody or immunoglobulin or fragment thereof that is bound to
    another molecule via a covalent bond or chemical group, or that is adsorbed
    to another substance.

    (1)     Note.  An immunoglobulin chemically bound to a synthetic resin is
    proper for Class 525, subclass 54.1.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses
    178.1+, for bio-affecting and body-treating compositions of conjugates or
    complexes of monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies, immunoglobulins, or
    fragments thereof with nonimmunoglobulin materials, and for bioaffecting
    and body-treating methods of using conjugates or complexes of monoclonal or
    polyclonal antibodies, immunoglobulins, or fragments thereof with
    nonimmunoglobulin materials or compositions thereof.


CLS 530/391.3
TXT Conjugated to a detectable label or radioisotope or radionuclide or heavy
    metal-containing compound:Subject matter under subclass 391.1 involving a
    monoclonal or polyclonal antibody or immunoglobulin or fragment thereof
    that is conjugated to a detectable label, radioisotope or radionuclide, or
    heavy metal-containing compound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 188 for
    antibodies conjugated to enzymatic labels.


CLS 530/391.5
TXT Conjugated via a specifically-identified linking group, chelating group,
    coordination complex, coupling agent, or conjugation agent:Subject matter
    under subclass 391.3 involving a monoclonal or polyclonal antibody or
    immunoglobulin or fragment thereof that is conjugated via a linking group,
    chelating group, coordination complex, coupling agent, or conjugation agent
    that is specifically identified in the claims by name or chemical structure.

    (1)     Note.  Claim language such as "an antibody covalently bonded to a
    detectable label" or "an antibody bound covalently to a detectable label"
    is not intended for this subclass, but is proper for subclass 391.3.  Claim
    language such as "an antibody bound by a disulphide bond to a detectable
    label" or "an antibody bound by an amide bond to a detectable label" is
    proper for this subclass because it describes the type of linkage between
    the antibody and the substance to which it is linked.


CLS 530/391.7
TXT Conjugated to a cytotoxic agent or drug or other biologically-active
    substance:Subject matter under subclass 391.1 involving a monoclonal or
    polyclonal antibody or immunoglobulin or fragment thereof that is
    conjugated to a cytotoxic agent, drug, or other biologically-active
    substance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 188 for
    antibodies conjugated to enzymes.


CLS 530/391.9
TXT Conjugated via a specifically-identified linking group, coupling agent, or
    conjugation agent:Subject matter under subclass 391.7 involving a
    monoclonal or polyclonal antibody or immunoglobulin or fragment thereof
    that is conjugated via a linking group, coupling agent, or conjugation
    agent that is specifically identified in the claims by name or chemical
    structure.

    (1)     Note.  Claim language such as "an antibody covalently bonded to a
    toxin" or "an antibody bound covalently to a toxin" is not intended for
    this subclass, but is proper for subclass 391.7.  Claim language such as
    "an antibody bound by a disulphide bond to a toxin" or "an antibody bound
    by an amide bond to a toxin" is proper for this subclass because it
    describes the type of linkage between the antibody and the substance to
    which it is linked.


CLS 530/392
TXT Alpha globlins, e.g., ceruloplastin, haptoglobins, etc.:

    Proteins under subclass 380 identified as alpha globulins and compounds
    derived from these by addition to or deletion of parts of the polypeptide
    structure.

    (1)     Note.  Physical Properties.

    alpha 1 globulins   alpha 2 globulins

    Molecular Weight
    40,000-55,000      63,000-800,000

    OTHER COMPONENT

    saccharide                saccharide

    (2)     Note.  The alpha 2 globulin includes alpha 2 glycoproteins,
    ceruloplasmin and prothrombin.

    (3)     Note.  Examples:  Alpha-2-macroglobulin, Alpha 1 microglobulin
    Alpha-2u-globulin precursor, Progesterone binding globulin.

    (4)     Note.
    Mesh tree
    number:               D12.776.124.790.106
                                  D12.776.377.715.85

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359,    for alpha 1 lipoproteins.

    384,    for the alpha globulin prothrombin.


CLS 530/393
TXT Antithrombin III:

    Proteins under subclass 392 having the structure of antithrombin III and
    compounds derived from these by addition to or deletion of parts of the
    polypeptide structure.

    (1)     Note.  Physiological properties.  A plasma glycoprotein having
    antithrombin activity and serving to inhibit other enzymes.

    (2)     Note.  Synonyms.  Heparin cofactor, Antithrombin II.

    (3)     Note.
    Mesh tree   D8.373.745.109.100
    Number:    D12.776.124.790.106.125
                      D12.776.377.715.85.125


CLS 530/394
TXT Beta globulins, e.g., transferrin, etc.:

    Proteins under subclass 386 having the structure of a beta globulin and
    compounds derived from these by addition to or deletion of parts of the
    polypeptide structure.

    (1)     Note.  Physical Properties.

    Beta 1 Lipoproteins Transferrin Plasminogen

    Molecular Weight:
    3-20 million    85,00090,000

    Other Components:
    lipid   saccharide

    (2)     Note.  Examples.  Beta-2-microglobulin, Beta-Thromboglobulin, Beta
    trace protein.

    (3)     Note.  CA Registry Number:

    Mesh tree number:       D12.776.124.790.223
            D12.776.377.715.182

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359,    for beta 1 lipoproteins.


CLS 530/395
TXT Glycoproteins, e.g., mucins, proteoglycans, etc.:

    Proteins under subclass 350 comprising a protein bonded to saccharide and
    compounds derived from these by addition to or deletion of parts of the
    structure.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are:

    amyloid proteins

    colyony-stimulating factor

    fibronectins

    hemopexin

    lactoferrin

    mucoproteins, mucopolysaccharides

    intrinsic factor

    mucins

    orosomucoid

    proteoglycans

    sialoglycoproteins

    thromboprotein

    thryroglobulin

    thyroxine binding protein

    transcortin

    tubulin

    (2)     Note.

    GLYCOPROTEINS   PROTEOGLYCANS

    Mesh tree number:
    D12.776.395     D9.203.698.735
            D12.776.395.650


CLS 530/396
TXT LECTINS, E.G., CONCANAVALIN, HEMAGGLUTININ, ETC.:

    Proteins under subclass 395 having the structure of lectins and compounds
    derived from these by addition to or deletion of parts of the polypeptide
    structure.

    (1)     Note.

    Physical Properties:

            Lentil
            Alpha chain  Beta                       chain

    Number of Residues:
    207     52      159

    Molecular Weight:
    24,216  5,709              17,585

    (2)     Note.  Physiological properties.
    Binder sugar moieties in cell walls or membranes to cause agglutination,
    mitosis, or other changes in the cell.

    (3)     Note.  Synonyms.  Phytohemagglutinins, Agglutinins,
    Phytagglutinins, Hemagglutinins, Plant agglutinins.

    (4)     Note. CA Registry Number: 9008-97-3*

    Mesh tree number: D24.185.526.545
            D24.310.545
            D24.611.125.44.545

    Merck Index Monograph:  10:  5272


CLS 530/397
TXT Glycoprotein hormones:

    Proteins under subclass 395 having the structure of or functioning as
    hormones and derived from these by addition to or deletion of parts of the
    polypeptide structure.

    (1)     Note.

    Mesh tree number: D12.776.395
            D6.472


CLS 530/398
TXT Gonadatropins:

    Proteins under subclass 397 having the structure of gonadatropins and
    compounds derived from these by addition to or deletion of parts of the
    polypeptide structure.

    (1)     Note.  Physiological properties.  Stimulate the gonads to growth
    and production of sex-specific hormones, i.e., estrogens and gestagens in
    the female and androgens in the male.

    (2)     Note.  Examples:  Choriogonin, Bigonadil, Choriogonadotropin,
    Chorulom, HGC, Follitropin, or Follicle-stimulating hormone (FSH),
    Lutropin, or  Luteinizing hormone (LH), Human menopausal gonadotropin
    (Urongonadotropin, hMG, Chorionic gonadotropin (Choriogonadotropin, (hCG).

    (3)     Note.

    Mesh tree number: D6.472.351.326
            D6.472.759.367
            D6.472.785.400
            D12.776.780.400

    Merck Index Monograph:  9:  4376
            10:  4506

    SEARCH CLASS:

    930,    Peptide or Protein Sequence, subclass 110 for gonadotropin  peptide
    or protein sequences.


CLS 530/399
TXT Hormones, e.g., prolactin, thymosin, growth factors, etc.:

    Proteins under subclass 350 functioning as hormones and compounds derived
    from these by addition to or deletion of parts of the polypeptide structure.

    (1)     Note.

    Mesh tree number:  D6.472

    SEARCH CLASS:

    930,    Peptide or Protein Sequence, subclass 120 for growth factor peptide
    or protein sequences.


CLS 530/400
TXT Metal containing, e.g., chromoproteins, ferritin, ferredoxins, etc.:

    Proteins under subclass 350 containing a metal and compounds derived from
    these by addition to or deletion of parts of the polypeptide structure.

    (1)     Note.  Examples, Myoglobin, Metallothronenin, Hemerythrin, Iron
    sulfur proteins.

    (2)     Note.  CA Registry Number of Ferritin form:  9007-73-2*

    Mesh tree number:  D12.776.556

    SEARCH CLASS:

    930,    Peptide or Protein Sequence, subclass 25 for peptide or protein
    sequences containing an amino acid modified with a heavy metal.


CLS 530/401
TXT Cytochromes, e.g., orgotein, etc.:

    Proteins under subclass 400 having the structure of cytochrome and
    compounds derived from these by addition to or deletion of parts of the
    polypeptide structure.

    (1)     Note.  Physical Properties.

    Cylochrome C2   Cytochrome C1

    Number of Residues:
    85      129
    Molecular Weight:
    8,899   13,283

    Source:
    Rhodopseudomonas gelatinosa

    (2)     Note.  Synonyms.  of orgotein:  heapatocuprein, cerebrocuprein,
    erythrocuprein, cytocuprein.

    Of Cytochrome c:  Myohematin, Hematin-Protein, Cromoci, Cytorest, Landrax

    (3)     Note.  CA Registry Number of underivatized form:

    Cytochrome C:  9007-43-6

    Mesh tree number:  D8.262
            D12.776.422.220

    Merck Index Monograph:  9:2788
            10:2784


CLS 530/402
TXT Chemical modification or the reaction product thereof, e.g., covalent
    attachment or coupling, etc.:

    Subject matter under 350 including a step of chemically modifying a protein
    or the product of such modification.

    (1)     Note.  Chemical modification includes conjugation of a protein with
    a nonpeptide compound or addition of simple chemical elements or compounds
    to the protein as well as sundering parts of a large protein molecule.

    (2)     Note.  Treatment to deliberately change the secondary, tertiary or
    quaternary structure of a polypeptide is considered chemical modification.

    (3)     Note.  Other subclasses provide for protein conjugates that occur
    in nature.  Nucleoproteins are in subclass 358.  Lipoproteins are in
    subclass 359.  Metalloproteins in subclasses 400 and 401.

    (4)     Note.  Immobilized Proteins.  Cross-reference art collections 810+
    provide for carrier bound or immobilized proteins where the protein is
    combined chemically or physically with a carrier that insolubilized it or
    otherwise aids in the recovery of the protein from solution.

    (5)     Note.  This subclass provides for melanoidin resulting from Mallard
    type reactions between amino acids and sugars.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    524,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 9+ for plant or
    derived cellular material, subclasses 17+ for proteins or biologically
    active polypeptides for a process in which the protein or polypeptide is
    physically mixed with a preformed resin and subclasses 70+ for a process of
    adding a protein or biologically active polypeptide to resin forming
    ingredients during reaction of the resin formers and the protein of
    polypeptide is nonreactive.

    525,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 54.1 for the chemical
    reaction of a peptide or protein with a preformed resin and subclass 54.11
    for processes of stepwise assembly of a polypeptide on a preformed polymer
    i.e., solid phase synthesis when there is no claimed cleavage of
    synthesized polypeptide.


CLS 530/403
TXT Protein is identified as a antigen, e.g., immunogenic carriers, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 402 in which the protein is reacted with
    another material and the protein is claimed or disclosed as an antigen.

    (1)     Note.  The compound reacting with the antigenic protein may itself
    be a protein  or polypeptide.  All such compounds are conclusively presumed
    to belong in subclass 405, even though they may contain sulfur.

    (2)     Note.  The typical patent in this and the indented subclasses is
    directed to the use of an antigenic protein as an immunogenic carrier for a
    hapten.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    514,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Composition, subclasses 1-21
    and Cross-Reference Art Collections 800-809 which provide for compositions
    having a 424 utility containing a peptide or protein as an organic active
    ingredient.


CLS 530/404
TXT Sulfur containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 in which the material reacting with the
    protein contains sulfur.


CLS 530/405
TXT Nitrogen containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 in which the material reacting with the
    protein contains nitrogen.


CLS 530/406
TXT Oxygen containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 in which the material reacting with the
    protein contains oxygen.


CLS 530/407
TXT Hydrolysis of protein:

    Subject matter under subclass 402 in which the protein is subject to
    autolysis or chemical hydrolysis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 68.1+
    for a process of hydrolysis by micro-organism or enzyme wherein a protein
    is produced and subclass 272 for recovering a preexisting protein by means
    of a micro-organism or enzyme.


CLS 530/408
TXT Sulfur containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 402 in which the material reacting with the
    protein contains sulfur.


CLS 530/409
TXT Nitrogen containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 402 in which the material reacting with the
    protein contains nitrogen.


CLS 530/410
TXT Oxygen containing reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 402 in which the material reacting with the
    protein contains oxygen.


CLS 530/411
TXT Oxygen containing is a saccharide:

    Subject matter under subclass 410 in which the material reacting with the
    protein is or contains saccharide.


CLS 530/412
TXT Separation or purification:

    Processes under subclass 350 in which a protein is separated from another
    material.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses provide for original
    patents directed to the production of proteins claimed generically and for
    cross-references of named proteins provided for above.

    (2)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses provide for a process which
    includes a chemical reaction so long as the chemical reaction is part of a
    separation or purification procedure and provided that the reactants do not
    include the protein to be recovered.

    (3)     Note.  See subclass 344 for a comprehensive listing of classes
    which provide for separation process where the material purified is not
    specifically claimed as being a protein.


CLS 530/413
TXT Immunological separation or affinity chromatography:

    Processes under subclass 412 in which an antigen antibody or binding
    protein reaction is used to effect separation of a component of a mixture.

    (1)     Note.  Mesh tree member:
    H1.181.278.186.400.170
    and E5.196.181.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    387.1+, for immunogloblulins, per se.

    417,    for separation by chromatography.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclass 824 for
    a digest collection of immunological separation techniques.


CLS 530/414
TXT Ultra filtration or osmosis:

    Processes under subclass 412 in which separation is effected (a) by means
    of a permeable  membrane through which a solvent is forced under pressure
    carrying low molecular weight compounds through the membrane or (b) by
    means of a permeable membrane through which compounds are forced by osmatic
    pressure.

    (1)     Note.  Ultra filtration membranes typically separate compounds with
    molecular weight from 1,000 to 1,000,000 dalton (1 to 100 nm) in size.

    (2)     Note.  Particle dimensions of compounds commonly separated by ultra
    filtration.

    Species Dimensions(nm)
    Proteins/Polysac-
    charides
    (104-105 dalton)         2-10

    Enzymes (104-105
    dalton)  2-5

    Mono-and Di-Saccharides
    (200-400 dalton)        0.8-1.0

    Water (18 dalton)        0.2

    (3)     Note.  Mesh tree number ultrafiltration.

    E5.196.454.807

    H1.181.278.469.849

    H1.181.529.365.807

    H1.671.100.534.807

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification, subclass 650 for processes of separation by
    filtration and subclass 652 for processes of separation by osmosis.


CLS 530/415
TXT Selective absorption, e.g., the use ca phosphate sorbents, etc.:

    Processes under subclass 412 in which separation of a protein from a liquid
    mixture is effected by contact with a solid material which preferentially
    attracts and holds one of the components of the liquid mixture.

    (1)     Note.  See the extensive search class notes in Class 210, subclass
    660 for related and allied arts and particularly note (4) for the
    disposition of ion exchange resins.


CLS 530/416
TXT Ion  exchange:

    Process under subclass 415 in which separation of a protein from a liquid
    is effected by a solid insoluble material which captures from the liquid a
    dissociated charged chemical moiety and releases to the liquid a different
    charged moiety of the same polarity.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 210, subclass 660 for comprehensive treatment of
    the disposition of ion exchange processes in that and other related classes.

    (2)     Note.

    Mesh tree       E5.196.181.400.383
    number: H1.181.278.186.400.383


CLS 530/417
TXT Chromatography or by septum selective as to material, e.g., gel filtration,
    molecular sieve dialysis, etc.:

    Processes under subclass 415 in which a protein is separated from a liquid
    mixture by a solid sorbent which competes in affinity with a moving carrier
    liquid or solvent such that a separation is effected by differing speeds of
    travel through the solid sorbent.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 210, subclass 658 and the notes thereunder for
    disposition of chromatography in that and related classes, and Class 210,
    subclass 635 which provides for gel chromatography.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass provides for high performance liquid
    chromatography.

    (3)     Note.  Mesh tree number:

    Chromatography   High Pressure Liquid

    E5.196.181      E5.196.181.400.300
    H1.181.278.186   H1.181.278.186.400.300


CLS 530/418
TXT Precipitation:

    Processes under subclass 412 in which a protein is separated from a liquid
    by physical or chemical means to cause the protein or undesired  material
    to agglomerate, coagulate, coalesce or flocculate.

    (1)     Note.  Precipitation may be either by chemical reaction, including
    salting out, or by physical means such as agitation or heat.

    (2)     Note.  See Class 210, subclass 702 for the disposition of
    precipitation processes Class 210 and other related classes.


CLS 530/419
TXT With added material:

    Processes under subclass 418 in which precipitation is brought about by
    adding a material thereto.


CLS 530/420
TXT Inorganic:

    Processes under subclass 419 in which the added material is inorganic.


CLS 530/421
TXT Polymeric, e.g., polyethylene glycol, etc.:

    Process under subclass 419 in which the added material is a natural or
    synthetic polymer.


CLS 530/422
TXT Solvent extraction:

    Process under subclass 412 in which a protein is separated from a solid or
    liquid mixture by preferential dissolution in an added solvent.

    (1)     Note.  See Class 210, subclass 634 and the extensive notes therein
    for the disposition of solvent extraction in that class.


CLS 530/423
TXT Oxygenated material:

    Processes under subclass 422 in which the solvent contains oxygen.


CLS 530/424
TXT Alcohol:

    Processes under subclass 423 in which the oxgenated solvent is an alcohol.


CLS 530/425
TXT Carboxyl containing:

    Processes under subclass 423 in which the oxygenated material contains a
    carboxyl group.


CLS 530/426
TXT Hydrocarbon or halogenated hydrocarbon:

    Processes under subclass 422 in which the solvent is a hydrocarbon or a
    halogenated hydrocarbon.


CLS 530/427
TXT Physical treatment:

    Processes under subclass 412 in which a protein is separated or purified by
    a physical treatment.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass would provide for separation by ultrasonic
    treatment of flotation techniques.


CLS 530/500
TXT Lignins, i.e., the Major Noncarbohydrate Constituents of Wood and Woody
    Plants, or Reaction Products Thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The chemical treatment of source materials such as, for
    example, waste sulfite liquor or black liquor, to derive therefrom a
    lignin-containing substance is included herein, unless said treatment
    produces a definite carbon compound which is specifically provided for
    elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, for tanning agents derived from waste cellulose
    liberation liquors.

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes for growing therein-defined
    single-crystal of all types of materials, including inorganic or organic.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, for processes of liberating
    cellulosic fibers which include the recovery of an organic by-product.

    562,    Organic Compounds, subclass 513 for the production of oxalic acid
    from waste sulfite liquor.


CLS 530/501
TXT Processes under subclass 500 wherein a lignin or a lignin-containing
    substance is reacted with an aldehyde, with a ketone, or with ozone, or the
    reaction products thereof.

    (1)     Note.  See this Class, subclass 507 for processes wherein acetone,
    for example, is used as a solvent rather than as a reactant.


CLS 530/502
TXT Processes under subclass 500 wherein a lignin or a lignin-containing
    substance is reacted with a compound having hydroxy bonded directly to a
    benzene ring or with a compound having an oxygen-containing hereto ring, or
    the reaction products thereof.


CLS 530/503
TXT Processes under subclass 500 wherein a lignin or a lignin-containing
    substance is reacted with hydrogen, or the reaction products thereof.


CLS 530/504
TXT Processes under subclass 500 wherein a lignin or a lignin-containing
    substance is reacted with a carboxylic acid anhydride or with a compound
    having halogen (i.e., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, or iodine) bonded
    directly or indirectly to an acyclic carbon by nonionic bonding, or the
    reaction products thereof.


CLS 530/505
TXT Processes under subclass 500 wherein a lignin or a lignin-containing
    substance is reacted with a compound having nitrogen attached directly or
    indirectly to carbon by nonionic bonding, or the reaction products thereof.


CLS 530/506
TXT Compounds under subclass 500 which contain heavy metal (i.e., metals with a
    density greater than 4.0), aluminum, silicon, or phosphorus.


CLS 530/507
TXT Processes under subclass 500 wherein there is utilized a compound having
    alcoholic hydroxy bonded directly to an acyclic carbon or an organic
    solvent, or the reaction products thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The compound having alcoholic hydroxy bonded directly to an
    acyclic carbon may be used as a solvent or as a reactant.

    (2)     Note.  An alcoholic hydroxy group is one that is bonded to a carbon
    that is not doubly bonded to chalcogen or to nitrogen, i.e., compounds such
    as acetic acid, etc., are not considered to have an alcoholic hydroxy group.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 530/800
TXT ANTIHYPERTENSIVE PEPTIDES:

    Cross-reference art collection containing patents in which the peptide is
    claimed or disclosed as lowering blood pressure.


CLS 530/801
TXT PEPTIDE SWEETNERS:

    Cross-reference art collection containing patents in which the peptide is
    claimed or disclosed as possessing a sweet taste.


CLS 530/802
TXT CHROMOGENIC OR LUMINESCENT PEPTIDES:

    Cross-reference art collection containing patents in which the peptide is
    claimed or disclosed as luminescent or chromogenic.


CLS 530/806
TXT ANTIGENIC PEPTIDES OR PROTEINS:

    Cross-reference art collection containing patents in which the peptides or
    proteins are claimed or disclosed an antigens.

    (1)     Note.  This collection does not include immunogenic carriers
    conjugated to haptens.  Such patents are in subclasses 403+.


CLS 530/807
TXT HAPTEN CONJUGATED WITH A PEPTIDE OR PROTEIN:

    Cross-reference art collection for peptides or proteins bonded to a
    compound that is identified as or functions as a hapten.


CLS 530/808
TXT MATERIALS OR PRODUCTS RELATED TO GENETIC ENGINEERING OR HYBRID OR FUSED
    CELL TECHNOLOGY, E.G., HYBRIDOMA, MONOCLONAL PRODUCTS, ETC.:

    Cross-reference art collection containing patents in which the peptide or
    protein is the product of a process involving recombinant DNA technology or
    hybrid or fused cell technology.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    935,    Genetic Engineering:  Recombinant DNA Technology, Hybrid or Fused
    Cell Technology, and Related Manipulations of Nucleic Acids, appropriate
    subclass for processes of producing peptides and proteins by the methods of
    recombinant DNA technology or the use of hybrid fused technology.


CLS 530/809
TXT Fused cell products, e.g., hybridoma products, etc.:

    Cross-reference art collection under subclass 808 for peptide or protein
    products produced by a fused cell.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    935,    Genetic Engineering:  Recombinant DNA Technology, Hybrid or Fused
    Cell Technology, and Related Manipulations of Nucleic Acids, appropriate
    subclass for processes of producing peptides and proteins by the methods of
    recombinant DNA technology or the use of hybrid fused technology.


CLS 530/810
TXT CARRIER BOUND OR IMMOBILIZED PEPTIDE OR PROTEIN, PREPARATION THEREOF, E.G.,
    USE OF BIOLOGICAL CELL FRAGMENTS AS CARRIER, ETC.:

    Cross-reference art collection which is an artificially produced
    composition or complex or compound under the class definition containing
    the property of physical confinement or localization during a continuous
    chemical process or the property of enhanced recoverability in a batch
    process for repeated future use and processes for preparing the same.

    (1)     Note.  Immobilization results from covalent bonding between the
    peptide or protein and the carrier or an ionic bonding between the peptide
    or protein and a carrier or sorption of a peptide or protein with a
    carrier, or entrapment of a peptide or protein within a carrier.

    (2)     Note.  A carrier material may be either water soluble or water
    insoluble.

    (3)     Note.  Peptides chemically or physically bonded to a
    water-insoluble.

    (3)     Note.  Peptides chemically or physically bonded to a water-soluble
    matrix, contained within a polymer or gel, absorbed on a resin are examples
    of immobilized peptides.

    (4)     Note.  When a carrier is composed of more than one material, the
    patent is placed in the subclass which corresponds to the material to which
    the peptide is bound, e.g., a carrier which is a synthetic polymer coated
    metal is placed in subclass 421.

    (5)     Note.  The carrier material or the carrier material and a covalent
    bond forming agent impart to the peptide or protein the property of
    physical confinement for localization during continuous process or the
    property of enhanced recoverability in a batch process which it did not
    possess prior  to treatment with the carrier material or carrier material
    and a covalent bonding agent.

    (6)     Note.  Synthetic Resins vs. Polypeptides.  The conceptual
    difference between the subject matter of synthetic resins provided for in
    the 520 series and polypeptides (including proteins) provided for in Class
    530 is that the compounds of the 520 series have statistically distributed
    amino acids or blocks of amino acids in their molecules in a random
    sequence whereas 530 provides for molecules composed of a specific sequence
    of amino acids of defined identity and order (i.e., primary structure)
    having identity or close relation to a humerial or cellular polypeptide or
    having some humerial or cellular effect due to its order structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, for processes of making glass articles,
    particularly subclass 339 for making optical fibers or waveguides by
    incorporating dopant into porous glass body; subclass 413 for making
    optical fibers or waveguides by deposition of vapor onto porous glass body;
    subclass 432 for making glass optical fibers or waveguides by coating
    porous glass fibers or waveguides with synthetic or natural resin
    containing material; subclasses 447+ for making glass fibers or filaments
    by coating porous glass body with synthetic or natural resin or asphalt
    containing material; subclass 22 for making a porous glass article which
    may find utility as an immobilization agent.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating, or Plastic, for protein containing coating
    or plastic compositions, particularly subclasses 4, 24, 124+, and 645+
    indented subclasses.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture, subclasses
    77+ for pore forming in combination with a laminating step.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 263+ and 689  for
    processes and apparatus for ion exchange or sorption of components from a
    liquid; and subclass 615 for a process of use of an immobilized enzyme or
    micro-organism to purify sewage.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, various subclasses for coenzymes or
    immobilized coenzymes; subclasses 998.2+ utilities intended for use as
    dyestuffs or pharmaceuticals or otherwise excluded from Class 520,
    subclasses 1+ by Note (1) of subclasses 1+.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 41+ for significant molding processes which include the step of
    pore forming in situ.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, especially
    subclasses  417, 457, 459, and 468 for coated products which may contain a
    protein; subclasses 94.1+ for a composition containing an enzyme or
    coenzyme including immobilized forms and subclasses 2+ for a composition
    containing a protein.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 474.4+ for a
    nonstructural stock material product in the form of a composite web or
    sheet including a layer comprising protein, and other appropriately titled
    subclasses, e.g., subclasses 435 and 458; and subclasses 304.4+ for stock
    material in the form of a composite web or sheet embodying a component
    which is porous or cellular.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 174+ for
    carrier bond or immobilized enzymes or microbial cells and the preparation
    thereof and subclass 188 for enzyme conjugates, ligands and adducts.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Chemistry, subclasses
    501-548 particularly subclass 518 of use of immobilized antigens,
    antibodies, or other immunochemicals in a test or analysis.

    521,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 25+ for an ion
    exchange resin and the processes of making or regenerating them; and
    subclasses 50+ for cellular or porous resinous bodies and the process of
    preparing them.

    525,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 54.1+ for a product
    or process of chemically reacting a protein or polypeptide with a synthetic
    resin.

    527,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 200+ for resinous
    products and the processes of preparing them  wherein protein is
    incorporated into the resinous structure.


CLS 530/811
TXT Peptide or proteins immobilized on or in an inorganic carrier:

    Cross-reference art collection under subclass 810 wherein the carrier is an
    inorganic compound or metal or alloy.


CLS 530/812
TXT Peptides or proteins are immobilized on or in an organic carrier:

    Cross-reference art collection under subclass 810 wherein the support
    material is an organic compound.


CLS 530/813
TXT Carrier is saccharide:

    Cross-reference art collection under subclass 812 wherein the support
    material is a saccharide.

    (1)     Note.  Derivatized starch, derivatized cellulose, and
    polysaccharides are carbohydrates within the meaning of this subclass.


CLS 530/814
TXT Cellulose or derivative thereof:

    Cross-reference art collection under subclass 813 wherein the carrier is
    cellulose or a substituted cellulose.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of substituted cellulose are DEAE cellulose, etc.


CLS 530/815
TXT Carrier is synthetic polymer:

    Cross-reference art collection under subclass 812 wherein the support
    material is a linear or cross-linked polymer which is not naturally
    occurring.


CLS 530/816
TXT Attached to the carrier via a bridging agent:

    Cross-reference art collection under subclass 815 wherein the peptide or
    protein is bonded to the polymeric carrier through an intermediate compound
    which attaches to both the peptide or protein and the carrier.

    (1)     Note.  The formation of the immobilized peptide or protein may be
    in a stagewise manner with a reaction between the carrier and bridging
    agent being complete before the peptide or protein is added or in a process
    in which the carrier, bridging agent, and peptide or protein are present
    simultaneously in which case some care should be exercised in
    distinguishing the process of this subclass from mere entrapment.  In
    general, if three separate entities, i.e., enzyme and two different
    chemical species are present simultaneously, bonding through a bridging
    agent should be presumed.

    (2)     Note.  A product or process classifiable in this subclass combines
    a polymeric carrier with a bridging agent to provide functional groups for
    attachment.  It should be noted that similar functional groups can be
    provided by formation of a polymeric carrier by copolymerization of
    monomers one or more of which contain the desired functional group for
    attachment and that such would be provided for in subclass 421.


CLS 530/817
TXT Entrapped within the carrier, e.g., gel, hollow fibre; etc.:

    Cross-reference art collection under subclass 815 wherein the peptide or
    protein is physically trapped in a reticulated polymer structure.


CLS 530/820
TXT PROTEINS FROM MICRO-ORGANISMS:

    Cross-reference art collection for peptides or proteins derived from
    micro-organisms.

    (1)     Note.  The indented collections are left without detailed
    definition in favor of the many standard reference works in microbiology.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 68.1+
    for the microbial or enzymatic synthesis of proteins and peptides;
    subclasses 183+ for the production of enzymes; and subclasses 174+ for the
    formation of immobilized enzymes and subclasses 269 and 272+ for the
    liberation or purification of proteins by means of a micro-organism or
    enzyme, particularly subclass 273 for the purification of collagen or
    gelatin.


CLS 530/821
TXT Separation of nucleic acid:

    Cross-reference art collection for peptides or proteins which are separated
    from nucleic acids.


CLS 530/822
TXT Protozoa:

    Cross-reference art collection under subclass 820 for peptides or proteins
    which are separated from Protozoa.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 258.1+
    for subject matter involving protozoa, including processes and compositions
    for their propagation, etc.


CLS 530/823
TXT Lower fungi, e.g., mold etc.:

    Cross-reference art collection under subclass 820 for peptides or proteins
    which are separated from fungi.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 254.1+
    for subject matter involving fungi including processes and compositions for
    their propagation, etc.


CLS 530/824
TXT Yeasts:

    Cross-reference art collection under subclass 823 for peptides or proteins
    which are separated from yeast.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 254.2+
    and 255.1+ for subject matter involving yeast including processes and
    compositions for their propagation, etc.


CLS 530/825
TXT Bacteria:

    Cross-reference art collection under subclass 820 for peptides or proteins
    which are separated from bacteria.


CLS 530/826
TXT Viruses:

    Cross-reference art collection under subclass 820 for peptides or proteins
    which are separated from virus.


CLS 530/827
TXT PROTEINS FROM MAMMALS OR BIRDS:

    Cross-reference art collection for peptides or proteins which are separated
    from mammals or birds.

    (1)     Note.  For a detailed list of the parts see the National Library of
    Medicine's Medical Subject Headings Category A listings.  This listing is
    available online.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 520
    for compositions with a Class 424 utility wherein the active ingredient is
    an animal extract or tissue of undetermined chemical constitution, i.e.,
    the chemical structure is not sufficiently established to classify the
    extract elsewhere.


CLS 530/828
TXT Cancer:

    Cross-reference art collection under subclass 827 for peptides or proteins
    which are separated from cancer tissue.


CLS 530/829
TXT Blood:

    Cross-reference art collection under subclass 827 for peptides or proteins
    which are separated from blood.


CLS 530/830
TXT Plasma; serum:

    Cross-reference collection under subclass 829 for peptides or proteins
    which are separated from blood plasma or serum.


CLS 530/831
TXT Cohn fraction:

    Cross-reference art collection under subclass 830 for peptides or proteins
    which are separated from Cohn Fractions.


CLS 530/832
TXT Milk; colostrum:

    Cross-reference art collection under subclass 827 for peptides or proteins
    which are separated from milk or colostrum.


CLS 530/833
TXT Whey; cheese:

    Cross-reference art collection under subclass 827 for peptides or proteins
    which are separated from whey or cheese.


CLS 530/834
TXT Urine; urinary system:

    Cross-reference art collection under subclass 827 for peptides or proteins
    which are separated from urine or from tissue of the urinary system.


CLS 530/835
TXT Kidney:

    Cross-reference art collection under subclass 834 for peptides or proteins
    which are separated from the kidney.


CLS 530/836
TXT Mucus; mucus glands; bursa; arthral fluid; spinal fluid:

    Cross-reference art collection under subclass 827 for peptides or proteins
    which are separated from mucus, mucus producing glands, bursa, arthral
    fluid or spinal fluid.


CLS 530/837
TXT Lymph; lymph-glands; thymus:

    Cross-reference art collection under subclass 827 for peptides or proteins
    which are separated from lymph, lymph glands or the thymus.


CLS 530/838
TXT Marrow; spleen:

    Cross-reference art collection under subclass 827 for peptides or proteins
    which are separated from the marrow or spleen.


CLS 530/839
TXT Nerves; or brain:

    Cross-reference art collection under subclass 827 for peptides or proteins
    which are separated from the nerves or brain.


CLS 530/840
TXT Bones; tendons, teeth; cartilage:

    Cross-reference art collection under subclass 827 for peptides or proteins
    which are separated from bones, tendons, teeth or cartilage.


CLS 530/841
TXT Muscles; heart:

    Cross-reference art collection under subclass 827 for peptides or proteins
    which are separated from muscles or the heart.


CLS 530/842
TXT Skin; hair; nails; sebaceous glands; cerumen:

    Cross-reference art collection under subclass 827 for peptides or proteins
    which are separated from skin, hair, nails, sebaceous glands or cerumen.


CLS 530/843
TXT Digestive system:

    Cross-reference art collection under subclass 827 for peptides or proteins
    which are separated from the digestive system.

    (1)     Note.  For a detailed list of the parts of the various anatomical
    systems see the National Library of Medicine's Medical Subject Headings
    Category A listings.  This listing is available on line.


CLS 530/844
TXT Stomach;  intestine:

    Cross-reference art collection under subclass 843 for peptides or proteins
    which are separated from the stomach or the intestines.


CLS 530/845
TXT Pancreas:

    Cross-reference art collection under subclass 843 for peptides or proteins
    which are separated from the pancreas.


CLS 530/846
TXT Liver:

    Cross-reference art collection under subclass 843 for peptides or proteins
    which are separated from the liver.


CLS 530/847
TXT Bile:

    Cross-reference art collection under subclass 843 for peptides or proteins
    which are separated from the liver bile.


CLS 530/848
TXT Lungs:

    Cross-reference art collection under 827 for peptides or proteins which are
    separated from the lungs.


CLS 530/849
TXT Eyes; vessels; umbilical cord:

    Cross-reference art collection under 827 for peptides which are separated
    from the eye, blood vessels or umbilical cord.


CLS 530/850
TXT Reproductive organs or embryos:

    Cross-reference art collection under subclass 827 for peptides or proteins
    which are separated from the reproductive organs or from embryos.


CLS 530/851
TXT Placenta;  amniotic fluid:

    Cross-reference art collection under subclass 850 for peptides or proteins
    which are separated from the placenta or amniotic fluid.


CLS 530/852
TXT Sperm:

    Cross-reference art collection under subclass 850 for peptides or proteins
    which are separated from sperm.


CLS 530/853
TXT Ovary; eggs; embryos:

    Cross-reference art collection under subclass 827 for peptides or proteins
    which are separated from the ovary, eggs or embryo.


CLS 530/854
TXT Glands:

    Cross-reference art collection under subclass 827 for peptides or proteins
    which are separated from glands not otherwise provided for.


CLS 530/855
TXT PROTEINS FROM ANIMALS OTHER THAN MAMMALS OR BIRDS:

    Cross-reference art collection peptides or proteins from animals other than
    mammals or birds.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclass 520
    for compositions with a Class 424 utility wherein the active ingredient is
    an animal extract or tissue of undetermined chemical constitution, i.e.,
    the chemical structure is not sufficiently established to classify the
    extract elsewhere.


CLS 530/856
TXT Snakes; venom:

    Cross-reference art collection under subclass 855 for peptides or proteins
    from snakes or snake venom.


CLS 530/857
TXT Fish, fish eggs; shell fish; crustacea:

    Cross-reference art collection under subclass 855 for peptides or proteins
    from fish, fish roe, shell fish or crustacea.


CLS 530/858
TXT Insects; venom:

    Cross-reference art collection under subclass 855 for peptides or proteins
    from insects or insect venom.


CLS 530/859
TXT WASTE, WASTE MATERIAL, REFUSE OR SLUDGE, E.G., EFFLUENTS, FECAL MATTER,
    ETC.:

    Cross-reference art collection for peptides or proteins from waste, waste
    material, refuse or sludge.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS RELATED TO SUBCLASSES 387.1 THROUGH 391.9


CLS 530/860
TXT RENIN INHIBITORS:
    Subject matter involving substances that inhibit the
    angiotensinogen-cleaving action of renin.


CLS 530/861
TXT INVOLVING IgG3,  IgG4,  IgA, OR IgY:
    Subject matter involving immunoglobulin IgG3, IgG4, IgA, or IgY.

    (1)     Note.  IgY is similar to IgG and is found only in birds.


CLS 530/862
TXT INVOLVING IgE OR IgD:
    Subject matter involving immunoglobulin IgE or IgD.


CLS 530/863
TXT INVOLVING IgM:
    Subject matter involving immunoglobulin IgM.


CLS 530/864
TXT Monoclonal:
    Subject matter under subclass 863 involving a monoclonal antibody that is
    IgM.


CLS 530/865
TXT Human:
    Subject matter under subclass 864 involving a human monoclonal antibody
    that is IgM.


CLS 530/866
TXT INVOLVING IMMUNOGLOBULIN OR ANTIBODY FRAGMENT (E.G., F(ab)'2, Fab', Fab,
    Fv, Fc, HEAVY CHAIN, LIGHT CHAIN, ETC.):Subject matter involving an
    immunoglobulin or antibody fragment.


CLS 530/867
TXT INVOLVING IMMUNOGLOBULIN OR ANTIBODY PRODUCED VIA RECOMBINANT DNA
    TECHNOLOGY:Subject matter involving an immunoglobulin or antibody produced
    via recombinant DNA technology.


CLS 530/868
TXT INVOLVING AUTOIMMUNITY, ALLERGY, IMMEDIATE HYPERSENSITIVITY, DE-LAYED
    HYPERSENSITIVITY, IMMUNOSUPPRESSION, OR IMMUNOTOLERANCE:Subject matter
    involving an immunoglobulin or antibody asssociated with autoimmunity,
    allergy, immediate hypersensitivity, delayed hypersensitivity,
    immunosuppression, or immunotolerance.


CLS 532/
TTL ORGANIC COMPOUNDS -- PART OF THE CLASS 532 - 570 SERIES

CLS 532/
TXT GLOSSARY

    ACYCLIC
    This term denotes a compound which does not contain a ring.

    ACYCLIC ATOM
    This term denotes an atom which is not a ring member.  The



    structure contains acyclic nitrogen while the



    structure does not contain acyclic nitrogen.

    ACYCLIC BONDING
    As used in regard to bonding or attachment of specified moieties, this term
    denotes that the moieties are connected to each other exclusively by atoms
    and bonds which are not part of a ring.  The following examples show oxygen
    attached to a hetero ring by acyclic bonding:



    In the third example above, nitrogen and sulfur are also attached to the
    hetero ring by acyclic bonding.  The following structures would be excluded
    from a subclass requiring oxygen attached to a hetero ring by acyclic
    bonding since a carbocyclic ring is between the oxygen and the hetero ring
    in each structure.







    ALICYCLIC RING OR RING SYSTEM
    This term denotes a carbocyclic ring which is not a benzene ring or a
    polycyclo carbocyclic ring system which does not have a benzene ring as one
    of the cyclos.

    ALKENYL
    This term denotes an acyclic carbon chain which contains a carbon-to-carbon
    double bond and is represented by the formula -CnH2n-1, wherein hydrogen
    may be replaced by an additional carbon-to-carbon double bond.

    ALKENYLENE
    This term denotes an acyclic carbon chain which contains a carbon-to-carbon
    double bond and is represented by the formula -CnH2n-2-, wherein hydrogen
    may be replaced by an additional carbon-to-carbon double bond or a
    monovalent substituent.

    ALKYL
    This term denotes an acyclic carbon or a saturated acyclic carbon chain
    represented by the formula -CnH2n+1, wherein no hydrogen may be replaced.

    ALKYLENE
    This term denotes an acyclic carbon or a saturated acyclic carbon chain
    represented by the formula -CnH2n-, wherein hydrogen may only be replaced
    by a monovalent substituent.

    ALKYNYL
    This term denotes an acyclic carbon chain which contains a carbon-to-carbon
    triple bond and is represented by the formula -CnH2n-3, wherein hydrogen
    may only be replaced by an additional carbon-to-carbon multiple bond.

    ALKYNLENE
    This term denotes an acyclic carbon chain which contains a carbon-to-carbon
    triple bond and is represented by the formula -CnH2n-4-, wherein hydrogen
    may be replaced by an additional carbon-to-carbon multiple bond or a
    monovalent substituent.

    AMINO NITROGEN
    Denotes any nitrogen in an organic compound other than a nitrogen in an
    inorganic ion of an addition salt, a nitro (-NO2) or nitroso (-NO).
    Component parts of an "adduct" will be considered to be attached to each
    other ionically except if it is clear that the mode of attachment is
    nonionic.

    ARYL RING OR RING SYSTEM
    This term denotes a benzene ring or a polycyclo carbocyclic ring system
    having a benzene ring as one of the cyclos.

    ATTACHED DIRECTLY OR BONDED DIRECTLY These terms are used to show that
    specified moieties are connected by bonds only.

    ATTACHED INDIRECTLY
    This term denotes that at least one atom, as well as bonds, connects
    specified moieties.

    BENZENE RING
    This term includes, in all cases except where there are explicit
    limitations to the contrary, substituted benzene rings, including
    substitution in the form of an additional fused or bridged ring or ring
    system.

    Thus, for example, in Class 548, subclass 577, which reads:  "Benzene ring
    bonded directly to the five-membered hetero ring", the moiety bonded
    directly to the hetero ring may be phenyl, chlorophenyl, dinitrophenyl,
    naphthyl, etc.  All that is necessary to satisfy the terminology of the
    subclass is that a substituted or unsubstituted benzene ring be bonded
    directly to the hetero ring.

    CARBOCYCLIC
    This term denotes a ring or ring system where all ring members are carbons.

    CHAIN
    This term denotes a plurality of atoms which connect specified groups or
    atoms.  The atoms of the chain must be nonionically attached to each other
    and to the specified groups or atoms.  If the chain may not include any
    ring members it will be designated as acyclic.  When the chain may include
    ring members the title will state that the chain may include a ring.  The
    chain ends where it attaches to the specified groups or atoms and does not
    include any part of them.  The chain may have substituents but the
    substituents are not part of the chain.

    CONTAINING
    This term is to be interpreted broadly.  In a subclass which specifies
    halogen containing, for example, the halogen may be attached to other parts
    of the compound by ionic bonding or nonionic bonding.

    Further, the element contained in a material may be in any form.  In a
    subclass such as-- Heavy metal containing catalyst (or material)
    utilized--, the metal may be in elemental or compound form.

    CYCLO
    This term refers to a ring of a polycyclo ring system.

    HEAVY METAL
    This term denotes any metal having a specific gravity greater than four and
    includes arsenic.

    HETERO RING
    This term denotes a ring having carbon and at least one atom from the group
    consisting of nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, selenium and tellurium as ring
    members; and contains no other element as a ring member.

    INCLUDING HYDROGENATED
    This term, as a parenthetical expression, is used following the name of a
    heterocyclic ring or ring system which is unsaturated, e.g., oxazoles, etc.
     For example, Class 548, subclass 215 reads:

    1,3-Oxazoles (including hydrogenated) The parenthetical expression
    "(including hydrogenated)" means that the subclass is generic to fully
    unsaturated 1,3-oxazoles and to 1,3-oxazales wherein one or two of the ring
    double bonds have been replaced by a single bond; i.e., the subclass is
    generic to oxazoles, oxazolines and oxazolidines.

    When the name of such a heterocyclic ring is used in indents where no
    degree of ring saturation or unsaturation is specified, the name of the
    heterocyclic ring will again be construed as generic to all possible
    degrees of ring saturation and unsaturation.

    For example, Class 548, subclass 233 reads:
    Nitrogen bonded directly to ring carbon of the oxazole ring and is indented
    under subclass 215 of Class 548.  Accordingly, subclass 233 shall be
    construed as embracing nitrogen bonded directly to the ring carbon of an
    oxazole, of an oxazoline, or of an oxazolidine.

    When used following the name of a heterocyclic ring system, such as
    quinoline, the parenthetical expression indicates that the subclass is
    generic to compounds having the fully unsaturated form of the ring system,
    as well as to compounds wherein any number of ring double bonds of the ring
    system have been replaced by single bonds. The statement made above, re
    indents, is also applicable to heterocyclic ring systems.

    LIGHT METAL
    This term denotes any metal having a specific gravity less than four.

    METALS AND NONMETALS
    Hydrogen, boron, carbon, silicon, nitrogen, phosphorous, oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, tellurium, the noble gases and the halogens, including astatine,
    are considered to be nonmetals.  All other elements, including arsenic, are
    considered metals.

    MONOCYCLIC RING
    This term denotes a ring which is not part of a polycyclo ring system.

    NITROCYCLIC
    This term denotes a ring or ring system where all ring members are
    nitrogens.

    NONIONIC BONDING
    As used in regard to bonding or attachment of specified moieties denotes
    the absence of ionic bonding between the moieties.  If the moieties are
    attached directly, the bonds between them must be covalent or coordinate.
    If the moities are attached indirectly, each atom of the connecting chain
    must be attached by covalent or coordinate bonding to another atom of the
    connecting chain or to one of the moieties. However, the connecting chain
    may have substituents thereon which include ionic bonding.  Some examples
    will be given of compounds which could be classified in a subclass having
    the following title:  "Oxygen attached indirectly to the six-membered
    hetero ring by nonionic bonding".  Two typical compounds which would be
    classified in such a subclass are:







    The following three compounds would also be classified is such a subclass
    but they are not typical.

    The three atypical examples are considered to meet the title since there is
    a chain of atoms between the hetero ring and the oxygen in which each atom
    is connected to the hetero ring, the oxygen, or another atom of the chain
    by nonionic bonding.  The ionic bonding between the ring nitrogen and the
    oxygen in the two betaine inner salts is additional and does not keep the
    betaines out of such a subclass.  However, a structure as


    is excluded since no oxygen is attached to the six-membered hetero ring by
    nonionic bonding.  The oxygen of an N-oxide, for example,



    is considered attached to the ring by nonionic bonding (coordinate bonding).

    POLYCYCLO RING SYSTEM T
    his term denotes a compound which contains fused or bridged rings.  The
    polycyclo ring system must contain at least two rings and each ring of the
    system must share two or more of its atoms with another ring of the system.
     All ring members must be attached to each other by nonionic bonding.  The
    polycyclo ring system is usually only a moiety within a compound.  Indents
    such as bicyclo and tricyclo limit the number of rings or cyclos in the
    polycyclo ring system to exactly two rings and three rings, respectively.
    For polycyclo systems having bridges, the system is regarded as composed
    only of the smallest number of smallest rings that will account for all
    atoms and valences.  This is in accord with the nomenclature employed by
    The Ring Index, Second Edition, (1960).  An example of the use of this
    system of nomenclature follows. The compound



    can also be written as



    Said compound should be considered as a (C4N-C4N-C2O) tricyclo system as in
    (1a), rather than as a (C4N-C4NO-C2O) tricyclo system as possibly seen in
    (1b).  The former interpretation is the one with the smallest number of
    smallest rings that accounts for all atoms and valences.  Some additional
    illustrative examples of the principle set forth above are:


    Compound II is considered as a bicyclo system composed of a C2N2O ring and
    a C4O ring; it is not considered a diazine ring for classification.
    Further, 3- azabicyclo [3.1.0] hexane



    is classified with pyrrolidines considering the structure a five-membered
    ring and a three-membered ring rather than with piperidines which would
    require considering it a six-membered ring.  However, see page xi of The
    Ring Index for an explanation of "valence bridges".  Similarly, the


    structure is considered to be a pentacyclo ring system having three
    six-membered carbocyclic rings, one five-membered hetero ring consisting of
    one ring oxygen and four ring carbons, and one six-membered ring consisting
    of one ring nitrogen and five ring carbons.

    Betaine inner salts are sometimes shown as ring structures, e.g.,


    However, this is not a polycyclo ring system because nonionic bonding does
    not exist between the N and O atoms.  The bonding between them is ionic and
    such a compound is classified as:


    Additionally, a structure of the type:


    is considered to be a polycyclo ring system composed of five rings:

    C4N-C4O-C4N-C4O-C12N2O2.

    RING HETERO ATOM
    This term denotes nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium as a ring
    member, i.e., as one of the members which forms a hetero ring.

    RING NITROGEN
    This term denotes that nitrogen is one of the members which form a ring.
    Nitrogen bonded directly to a ring is not a ring nitrogen.  Terms such as
    ring sulfur and ring oxygen are used similarly.

    SPIRO and SPIRO RING SYSTEM
    These terms denote the sharing of one common ring member only by exactly
    two rings. The following two structures are illustrative:


    A structure such as:


    is excluded because the `C' shared by the two rings is also shared by a
    third ring.

    The common ring member must be attached to two ring members of each of the
    rings by nonionic bonding.  Therefore, structures such as:


    are also excluded from consideration as "spiro ring systems" because ionic
    bonding exists between the hetero ring atom and an acyclic atom (an oxygen
    atom in both of

    these cases) in the formation of these betaine inner salts.  These
    structures will be considered and classified as:



    MULTI-STEP SYNTHESIS CLAIMS
    Many of the schedules in the 532-570 Series of Classes provide process
    subclasses. These are indented under compound subclasses and embrace
    processes for the production of the compounds provided for in said compound
    subclasses.

    The process subclasses are usually based on a type of reaction (such as "by
    hydrogenation") or on a type of starting material (such as "from nitro
    containing compound") or on a combination of the above (such as "by
    hydrogenation of nitro containing compound").

    Many patents claim multistep processes. The problem of which step of a
    multistep process claim determines classification is resolved as follows:
    The word "directly" will be appropriately employed in the subclass title
    when the last step of forming the compound is to control.  If "directly"
    does not appear in the title the step which determines classification may
    be prior to the final preparation step.  Consider the following two claims.

    I.      A method of making X by alkylating A to make B, isomerizing B to
    make C, and reducing C to make X.

    II.     A method of making X by reducing A to make B, alkylating B to make
    C, and isomerizing C to make X.

    which are to be placed in the following schedule:

                   1 .  Compounds X
                 2 . . Prepared directly by reduction
                  3 . . Prepared by alkylation

    Claim I is placed in subclass 2, because use of "directly" in a process
    claim means that the step involved results in directly obtaining the
    desired compound.

    Claim II is placed in subclass 3.  It is not placed in subclass 2 because,
    in claim II, the reduction step does not result in direct production of
    compound X, i.e., reduction is not the last step in making the compound.
    Subclass 3, which does not specify "directly", will take claim II because
    of the alkylating step.

    This point is further illustrated by placement of claims I and II, supra,
    in the following schedule:

                   4 .    Compounds X
                  5 . . Prepared by alkylation
                 6 . . Prepared directly by reduction

    Claim I and Claim II must both be placed in subclass 5 since that subclass
    provides for alkylation irrespective of whether compound X is produced
    directly by the alkylation step or not.  It would not be appropriate to
    classify the claims in subclass 6 because any process of making compound X
    which includes alkylation is provided for in subclass 5.

    Purification or recovery steps would not effect classification in the above
    illustrations.  Classification is determined by the controlling synthesis
    step.

    SPECIAL RULES FOR CLASSIFYING SALTS The rule to be utilized in classifying
    and cross referencing generic claims to salts in Classes 532-570 is
    clarified here.  This rule applies only to salts and is not to be
    considered analogous to nor does it apply to other types of claimed
    disclosure.

    A patent wherein the controlling claim is to a "compound" (e.g., acid or
    base) and wherein the claim includes a generic reference to salts, such as:
     "and the pharmacologically acceptable salt thereof", "or therapeutically
    useful acid addition salts thereof", "and nontoxic heterocyclic amine salts
    thereof", etc., will have its original classification determined by the
    "compound" without regard to the generic reference to the salts thereof.  A
    patent in which the generic reference to salts is in a separate claim which
    is dependent on a claim to the "compound" is considered equivalent and will
    also have its original classification determined by the "compound" without
    regard to the generic reference to the salts thereof.

    Cross-referencing of such a patent for a salt is mandatory only when it is
    clear that the specific salt was actually made as evidenced by:  (a) a
    "working example" of a specific salt, (b) a property of a specific salt,
    such as its melting point, infrared scan, nuclear magnetic resonance, etc.,
    or (c) an example of using a specific salt, such as in the treatment of
    animal life.  Other cross referencing of salts, such as those which are
    part of a list in the disclosure, is optional and should be made ony when
    clearly useful.

    When a specific salt is set forth in a claim, the entire compound will be
    considered in determining the original classification, i.e., the original
    will be placed on the basis of the first appearing subclass providing for
    the acid, base, or salt.  A specific salt is considered to be set forth in
    a claim when the structure of the salt forming moiety is clear from the
    claim or when the claim specifies that a heavy metal or a specific hetero
    ring (e.g., "and substituted morpholine containing salts thereof", etc.) is
    present in the salt forming moiety.

    Other claims are treated the same as the controlling claim when considering
    where to cross reference, i.e., any generic reference to salts is
    disregarded as explained above.

    CLASSIFYING COMPOUNDS OF UNKNOWN STRUCTURE WITHIN THE 532-570 SERIES OF
    CLASSES Classifying compounds of unknown structure in the 532-570 Series of
    Classes is accomplished by considering two possible methods for classifying
    them and employing the one which results in the highest classification in
    the Series.  The two methods are:  1.  Classify according to an element or
    group of elements known to be part of the compound.  2.  Classify based on
    an organic reactant utilized to make the compound.

    When considering the first method, compounds are classified based on any
    partial structure of the compound which is known or which can be found by
    looking up a named compound in published sources.  For example, if a
    specific alkaloid is named in a patent and if the structure or partial
    structure for that alkaloid can be found, the patent is classified
    according to that structure or partial structure.  Patents claiming unnamed
    alkaloids in general have been classified in Class 546, subclass 1 on the
    assumption that alkaloids usually include a ring consisting of one nitrogen
    and five carbons.

    Another situation involving unknown structures involves "oxidized
    hydrocarbon" in which there is no disclosure as to the structure of the
    products.  These are placed in Class 568 in an indent under "oxygen
    containing".  All that is known about them are the elements they contain.
    The 532-570 Series of Classes is superior to Class 585 which provides for
    hydrocarbons.  However, sulfurized carbohydrates of unknown structure are
    placed with carbohydrates based on the organic starting material.  The
    "sulfur containing" subclasses are lower in the Series than carbohydrates.
    On the other hand, sulfurized nitro containing organic compounds are
    classified with "sulfur containing" because that is higher in the 532-570
    Series of Classes than "nitro containing".

    Compounds which are disclosed as carbohydrates, proteins, lignins, starch,
    etc., and which are provided for according to titles of the Series are
    considered known structures, even though the exact structure isn't set
    forth in the patent.  They will be classified as known compounds and will
    not be treated as compounds of unknown structure or undetermined
    constitution.

    LINE BETWEEN COMPOSITION CLASSES AND THE 532-570 SERIES OF CLASSES In
    general, the 532-570 Series of Classes takes mixtures of organic compounds
    only if the mixtures:

    (A)     result from a chemical process or synthesis wherein a plurality of
    carbon compounds are simultaneously formed,

    (B)     result from a separation process wherein a plurality of carbon
    compounds are isolated simultaneously from a natural source, or

    (C)     result from the admixture of organic compounds with preserving or
    stabilizing agents whose sole function is to prevent chemical or physical
    change in the carbon compounds.

    In contrast, the Composition Classes, in general, take mixtures which
    include organic carbon compounds if the mixtures are formed by simple
    physical admixing of preformed compounds (except those preserved or
    stabilized mixtures in (C) above).

    The following rules are intended to provide guidance in placing patents in
    accord with the principles stated above, but are superseded by any specific
    class lines to the contrary:

    (1)     Where a mixture normally classifiable in the 532-570 Series is
    chemically treated as a whole, (where the entire mixture behaves in the
    reaction as a compound) the resulting product will still be classifiable in
    the 532-570 Series.  (See 5 and 9, infra.).

    (2)     Where a mixture is treated so as to separate its components,
    followed by a reblending thereof, the mixture will be considered
    classifiable in an appropriate composition class based on the disclosed
    utility.

    (3)     Where a mixture is altered in composition by adding an ingredient
    not originally present, the resulting product will be considered
    classifiable in an appropriate composition class based on disclosed utility.

    (4)     Where a mixture is treated to remove a component, the claimed
    product, if still a mixture, will be considered classifiable in an
    appropriate composition class based on disclosed utility.

    (5)     Where a mixture is chemically treated so that only some of the
    components react (by disclosure), the resulting mixture of reacted and
    unreacted components will be considered classifiable in an appropriate
    composition class based on disclosed utility.  (See 1, supra.).

    (6)     Where a mixture is claimed which by disclosure can be obtained
    either (1) as a reaction mixture or (2) by physically admixing the
    ingredients, and there are no reaction limitations in the product claims
    and no reaction process claims, or if there are claims to both methods of
    making the product, the mixture will be classified in the appropriate
    composition class based on disclosed utility.

    (7)     Where a reaction between two or more compounds is carried out in
    the presence of an additional compound which remains intentionally as a
    significant part of the final mixture, the mixture will be classified in
    the appropriate composition class based on disclosed utility.  (e.g. A + B
    + D = C + D).

    (8)     Where two or more compounds are reacted under conditions where an
    excess of one of the reactants is used so that it will remain as a
    significant part of the composition, the resulting mixture will be
    classified in the appropriate composition class based on disclosed utility.
     (e.g., A + B in excess = C + B).

    (9)     Where a mixture of compounds is reacted with another compound and
    results in a mixture, it will be classified in the appropriate composition
    class based on disclosed utility, except where the original mixture is one,
    per se, classifiable in the 532-570 Series  (e.g., (A + B + C) + D = AD +
    BD + CD)  (See 1, supra.).

    (10)    Where two or more compounds are reacted under controlled conditions
    to give a desired resultant mixture, it will be classified in the
    appropriate composition class based on disclosed utility.  The intention
    must be to get a mixture having utility as that specific mixture.  Reaction
    mixtures, in general, are classified as compounds according to the desired
    compound produced.  Many reaction mixtures have utility because of a
    desired compound formed by the reaction while the other components of the
    mixture serve no purpose; these reaction mixtures are classified as
    compounds.  At least two components of a reaction mixture must be necessary
    for a disclosed utility for the reaction mixture to be classified as a
    composition.


    The 532-570 Series of Classes also includes carbon compounds, provided for
    by the Series, when admixed with or dissolved in a solvent which served as
    the reaction medium for the synthesis of the organic compound, unless the
    mixture or solution thus formed is claimed, or is solely disclosed, as
    having a function or utility provided for in a composition class.

    A water solution of a compound provided for in the 532-570 Series of
    Classes, whether preserved or not, is classified in the Series unless its
    use is claimed or a single use for it is disclosed, in which case
    classification is in the class indicated.  If plural uses are disclosed,
    the hierarchical rules prevail and control classification. However, a gel
    of a compound provided for in the Series is classified in Class 252,
    subclasses 315.01+, even though no use is claimed or disclosed.

    Patents containing claims to a novel carbon compound dye and claims to a
    fiber or material dyed therewith are classified in the 532-570 Series of
    Classes, except where the dying process is also claimed.

    The 532-570 Series of Classes also includes carbon compounds, provided for
    by the Series, when admixed with a preserving agent whose sole function is
    to prevent physical or chemical change in the carbon compound unless the
    mixture thus formed is claimed as having a function or utility provided for
    in a composition class. "Preserving agent" is intended to include an agent
    which inhibits chemical decomposition of, corrosion by, or caking of the
    carbon compound to which it is added.  Preserved compounds classifiable in
    the 532-570 Series of Classes are classified on the basis of the carbon
    compound preserved even though the preserving agent is itself a carbon
    compound provided for in a preceding subclass.

    SPECIFIC CLASS LINES
    Class 117, Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes for growing therein-defined
    single-crystal of all types of materials, including inorganic or organic,
    and by all techniques, including those including chemical reactions (e.g.,
    synthesis, modifying).  See the Class 117 definitions for guidance in the
    placement of single-crystal related art.

    Class 252, Compositions, subclasses 315.01+ for a gel of a compound
    otherwise provided for in the 532 - 570 Series of Classes, even though no
    use is claimed or disclosed.

    Class 424   Plant extracts of unknown constitution which are disclosed as
    having a medicinal use, with or without other disclosed uses, are
    classified in Class 424, subclasses 195.1+.

    Class 426   Extracts or essential oils of unknown constitution which have
    traditionally been employed as flavorings, flavor enhancers, seasoning
    agents, food acidulants or condiments are considered compositions and are
    classified in Class 426.  A specific example is citrus oil which has been
    used for centuries as a flavoring agent.  Processes of extracting such
    mixtures are classified with mixtures, unless provided for elsewhere, and
    are not provided for in the 532-570 Series of Classes.

    Class 512 Plant extracts or essential oils of unknown constitution which
    are disclosed as essences, aromatic oils, perfume essence, or odoriferous
    essential oils are considered to be compositions for perfumes and are
    classified in Class 512, subclasses 1+.  Processes for extracting these
    mixtures, such as processes of enfleurange,are also classified in Class
    512, subclasses 1+, unless provided for elsewhere.

    Class 588, Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the destruction of hazardous or toxic waste.  Processes for
    destroying a hazardous or toxic waste, Class 532-570 series compound
    without an intent to obtain a desired product (other than to be safely
    discarded), are classified in Class 588.

    Class 987, Organic Compound Containing a Bi, Sb, As, or P Atom or
    Containing a Metal Atom of the 6th to 8th Group of the Periodic System, for
    U.S. patents relating to the above subject matter classified according to
    the European Patent Classification System (EPCS) and for the most part
    classified by personnel in the European Patent Office (EPO).

    This class presently has no patents.  It does have a glossary of terms for
    the 532 - 570 Series of Classes.  It is intended to contain the main
    definition for that series when Class 260 is abolished.  At the present
    time the Class 260 Main definitions apply to the series.


CLS 534/
TTL ORGANIC COMPOUNDS -- PART OF THE CLASS 532-570 SERIES

CLS 534/7
TXT Compounds under Class 532, subclass 1 which contain a noble metal (i.e.,
    helium, neon, argon, krypton, xenon or radon).


CLS 534/10
TXT Compound under Class 532, subclass 1, which contains a metal which exhibits
    spontaneous nuclear disintergation with emission of radioacitive particles,
    either as (1) the naturally unstable metal which has as atomic number of
    (43, 61 or at least 84), or (2) a metal which has been treated to render an
    isotope thereof radioactive.


CLS 534/11
TXT Compound under subclass 10 which contain metals having an atomic number of
    89 or higher.

    (1)     Note.  Compounds of the transactinide elements, i.e., those having
    atomic numbers greater than 103 will be found in this group of subclasses.


CLS 534/12
TXT Compounds under subclass 11 which contain a -C(=X)- group, wherein X is
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium).


CLS 534/13
TXT Compounds under subclass 12 in which the  -C(=X)- is part of a -C(=X)X-
    group, wherein the X's are the same or diverse chalcogens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for hereis is:


CLS 534/14
TXT Compounds under subclass 10 which contain technetium.


CLS 534/15
TXT Compounds under Class 532, subclass 1, which contain a metal having an
    atomic number of (21, 39, 57 - 60 or 62 - 71).


CLS 534/16
TXT Compounds under subclass 15 which contain a -C(=X)X- group, wherein the X's
    are the same or diverse chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 534/550
TXT Compounds under Class 532, subclass 1 in which nitrogen is attached
    directly to an acyclic -N=N= group by nonionic bonding, i.e.,   N-N=N-.

    (1)     Note.  Structures in which the entire diazoamino configuration is
    contained in a ring are classified in the appropriate heterocyclic class.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    551,    for those compounds in which the amino nitrogen is part of a ring.


CLS 534/551
TXT Compounds under subclass 550 which contain a hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  The amino nitrogen of the diazoamino group may be a cyclic
    or an acyclic atom.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:




CLS 534/552
TXT Compounds under subclass 550 in which chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) or additional nitrogen are bonded directly to the
    diazoamino group.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:




CLS 534/553
TXT Compounds under subclass 550 in which the diazoamino group is bonded
    directly to an acyclic carbon to which a noncarbon atom is attached
    directly by a double or triple bond.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:



CLS 534/554
TXT Compounds under subclass 550 in which at least two benzene rings are bonded
    directly to the diazoamino group.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:



CLS 534/555
TXT Processes under subclass 550 for producing, purifying or recovering a
    compound containing a diazoamino group.


CLS 534/556
TXT Compounds under Class 532, subclass 1 in which oxygen is bonded directly to
    an

    acyclic -N=N- or  group, which group is attached directly to carbon by
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Among the radicals included herein are:

    (2)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 534/557
TXT Compounds under subclass 556 in which sulfur is attached directly to a ring
    by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 534/558
TXT Compounds under Class 532, subclass 1 in which only one nitrogen of a diazo
    group is bonded directly to carbon; wherein if the remaining nitrogen is
    bonded to an additional atom or radical, that atom or radical is an anion.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 534/559
TXT Products under subclass 558 which contain a diazo or diazonium compound in
    admixture with a preserving or stabilizing agent whose sole function is to
    prevent physical or chemical change.


CLS 534/560
TXT Compounds under subclass 558 which contain a hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 534/561
TXT Compounds under subclass 558 which contain at least two of the diazo or
    diazonium groups.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/562
TXT Compounds under subclass 558 which include aluminum or metal with a
    specific gravity greater than four.

    (1)     Note.  Arsenic is considered a metal for the purpose of this
    subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:



CLS 534/563
TXT Compounds under subclass 558 which contain a polycyclo ring system having
    three or more cyclos.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 534/564
TXT Compounds under subclass 558 which contain an aldehyde or ketone group;
    i.e., wherein R is hydrogen or carbon.


CLS 534/565
TXT Processes under subclass 558 of forming the diazonium group.


CLS 534/566
TXT Compounds under Class 532, subclass 1 in which an azoxy group; i.e., - or

    -NN-, is bonded directly to carbons of two

    discrete organic radicals.

    (1)     Note.  Compounds which contain an azoxy group bonded directly to
    the same carbon or to two carbons of the same radical thereby forming a
    heterocyclic ring are classified in the appropriate heterocyclic class.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 534/567
TXT Compounds under subclass 566 which contain a hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/568
TXT Compounds under subclass 566 which contain an azodioxy group, i.e.,


    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/569
TXT Compounds under subclass 566 which include aluminum or a metal with a
    specific gravity greater than four.

    (1)     Note.  Arsenic is considered a metal for the purpose of this
    subclass.


CLS 534/570
TXT Componds under subclass 566 which

    contain a --OH group bonded directly to

    carbon, wherein -H of the -OH may be replaced by a substituted or
    unsubstituted ammonium ion or a Group IA or IIA light metal.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/571
TXT Compounds under subclass 570 which contain a stilbene group, i.e.,

    wherein any hydrogen may be replaced.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/572
TXT Processes under subclass 566 of forming the azoxy group.


CLS 534/573
TXT Compounds under Class 532, subclass 1 in which an acyclic -N=N- group is
    bonded directly to carbons of two discrete organic radicals.

    (1)     Note.  Compounds which contain a -N=N- group bonded directly to the
    same carbon or to two carbons of the same radical thereby forming a
    heterocyclic ring are classified in the appropriate heterocyclic class.


CLS 534/574
TXT Compounds under subclass 573 wherein a nitrogen of the azo group is
    pentavalent (i.e., -NN-), with a bond to an additional

    carbon and a bond to an anion.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/575
TXT Compounds under subclass 573 which are azo compounds having a specifically
    disclosed crystalline structure, form or modification.


CLS 534/576
TXT Products under subclass 573 which contain an azo compouond in admixture
    with a preserving or stabilizing agent whose sole function is to prevent
    physical or chemical change.


CLS 534/577
TXT Compounds under subclass 573 which are azo dyes existing either in a
    semi-crystalline form or in a transition state between crystalline solid
    and normal liquid, i.e., having the appearance of being crystals while
    having the viscosities to behave mechanically as liquids, and which usually
    show different colors.

    (1)     Note.  These dyes are utilized in display type devices.


CLS 534/578
TXT Processes under subclass 573 wherein the azo group is formed by oxidative
    coupling.


CLS 534/579
TXT Processes under subclass 573 wherein the azo group if formed by
    simultaneous diazotization and coupling.


CLS 534/580
TXT Processes under subclass 573 whereby the azo group is formed from a
    diazoamino group.


CLS 534/581
TXT Processes under subclass 573 wherein the azo group is formed by the
    coupling of a diazonium compound with a coupling component in the presence
    of an additional organic compound.


CLS 534/582
TXT Processes under subclass 573 wherein the azo group is formed by the
    coupling of a diazonium compound with a coupling component at a specified
    pH range.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are only those processes in which a pH range
    is specifically disclosed or claimed.


CLS 534/583
TXT Processes under subclass 573 wherein the azo group is formed by the
    coupling of a diazonium compound with a coupling component in the presence
    of ammonia, a Group IIA light metal hydroxide, or a Group IA or IIA light
    metal phosphate.


CLS 534/584
TXT Processes under subclass 573 wherein the azo group is formed by the
    coupling of a diazonium compound with a coupling component in proportions
    other than stoichiometric.


CLS 534/585
TXT Processes under subclass 573 wherein the azo group is formed by the
    reduction of a nitro group (i.e., -NO2).


CLS 534/586
TXT Processes under subclass 573 whereby the azo group is formed from a group
    having nitrogen singly bonded to nitrogen, e.g., hydrazine group, hydrazone
    group, etc.


CLS 534/587
TXT Processes under subclass 573 wherein the azo group is formed from a
    nitrogen containing compound by some process other than diazotization and
    coupling.


CLS 534/588
TXT Processes under subclass 573 whereby an azo compound is utilized as a
    reactanct in the preparation of a different azo compound.


CLS 534/589
TXT Processes under subclass 588 for the preparation of quaternary ammonium or
    quaternary hydrazinium compounds.


CLS 534/590
TXT Processes under subclass 588 whereby a ring is formed.


CLS 534/591
TXT Processes under subclass 588 whereby a

    group is formed, wherein X is chal

    cogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium).


CLS 534/592
TXT Processes under subclass 588 whereby a sulphonamide group is formed (i.e.,


CLS 534/593
TXT Processes unders ubclass 588 which utilize a reactant which contains sulfur
    or phosphorus; said reactant is other than the azo reactant.


CLS 534/594
TXT Processes under subclass 593 whereby a -SO3H group is formed or added to
    the azo reactant producing a sulfonated azo compound (H of the

            -SO3H group may be replaced by a substituted or unsubstituted
    ammonium ion or a metal).


CLS 534/595
TXT Processes under subclass 588 whereby a

    --X- ester group is formed, wherein the X's may be the same or diverse
    chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium).


CLS 534/596
TXT Processes under subclass 588 for etherifying hydroxy groups.


CLS 534/597
TXT Processes under subclass 588 wherein halogen is replaced by a cyano group.


CLS 534/598
TXT Processes under subclass 588 whereby halogen is replaced by an amino
    nitrogen.


CLS 534/599
TXT Processes under subclass 588 wherein azo compounds are reactants in
    hydrolysis reactions; i.e., decomposition reactions.


CLS 534/600
TXT Processes under subclass 588 whereby a nitro group or a nitrogen oxide
    group is reduced.


CLS 534/601
TXT Processes under subclass 588 for the nitration of azo compounds.


CLS 534/602
TXT Processes under subclass 588 for the preparation of a metallized azo
    compound by the reaction of an azo compound with a metal or a metallized
    compound in the presence of an additional organic compound.


CLS 534/603
TXT Compounds under subclass 573 wherein a pentavalent nitrogen having four
    bonds to carbons or three bonds to carbons and one to an additional
    nitrogen is attached indirectly to an azo group by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 534/604
TXT Compounds under subclass 603 which contain a hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 534/605
TXT Compounds under subclass 604 in which the pentavalent nitrogen is a ring
    member.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 534/606
TXT Compounds under subclass 605 wherein an azo group is bonded directly to a
    hetero ring or to a polycyclo ring system which contains a hetero ring as
    one of the cyclos.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 534/607
TXT Compounds under subclass 606 wherein the pentavalent nitrogen is a member
    of the hetero ring or the polycyclo ring system to which the azo group is
    directly bonded.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 534/608
TXT Compounds under subclass 607 wherein at least two azo groups within the
    same azo moiety are attached indirectly to each other by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  The term "azo moiety" as used herein is intended to include
    singulary each of the azo compounds which complex with a heavy metal in the
    formation of a sandwich-type compound.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/609
TXT Compounds under subclass 607 in which an acyclic carbon atom is bonded
    directly to the azo group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/610
TXT Compounds under subclass 607 in which an additional hetero ring or a
    polycyclo ring system having a hetero ring as one of the cyclos is bonded
    directly to the azo group.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 534/611
TXT Compounds under subclass 607 wherein the hetero ring which contains the
    pentavalent nitrogen is one of the cyclos in a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/612
TXT Compounds under subclass 605 wherein

    an acyclic -- group, in which X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) is attached directly or indirectly to the hetero
    ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 534/613
TXT Compounds under subclass 603 which include aluminum or a metal with a
    specific gravity greater than four.

    (1)     Note.  Arsenic is considered a metal for the purpose of this
    subclass.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/614
TXT Compounds under subclass 603 in which at least two azo groups are attached
    indirectly to each other by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/615
TXT Compounds under subclass 603 in which at least two nitrogens are bonded
    directly to the same alkylene chain.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/616
TXT Compounds under subclass 573 wherein acyclic oxygen is bonded directly to a
    nitrogen atom which has three bonds to carbons.

    (1)     Note. This subclass includes, e.g.,

     and , but excludes nitro,

    i.e.,   O, and nitroso, i.e.,



    (2)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 534/617
TXT Compounds under subclass 573 which are azo compounds having a group capable
    of reacting with a group of a fiber or a substrate to form a nonionic bond,
    e.g., reacting with a hydroxy group of cellulose or an amino group of a
    polyamide, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are only those patents which distinctly
    disclose that an azo compound is "fiber - or substrate-reactive" or that a
    reaction occurs between a fiber or substrate and an azo dye.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/618
TXT Compounds under subclass 617 which contain the formazan group, i.e.,
    N-N=-N=N-.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/619
TXT Compounds under subclass 617 which include aluminum or a metal with a
    specific gravity greater than four.

    (1)     Note.  Arsenic is considered a metal for the purpose of this
    subclass.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/620
TXT Compounds under subclass 619 in which halogen is attached directly to a
    hetero ring or to an alicyclic ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/621
TXT Compounds under subclass 620 which contain the     group, wherein only
    hydrogen may be replaced.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/622
TXT Compounds under subclass 620 in which the hetero ring to which halogen is
    attached is six-membered and contains at least two ring nitrogens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/623
TXT Compounds under subclass 622 wherein azo moieties from different and
    distinct azo compounds are bonded to the same metal.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/624
TXT Compounds under subclass 622 wherein at least two of the six-membered
    hetero rings having halogen bonded directly thereto are attached indirectly
    to each other by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/625
TXT Compounds under subclass 622 wherein at least two azo groups within the
    same azo moiety are attached indirectly to each other by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  The term "azo moiety" as used herein is intended to include
    singularly each of the azo compounds which complex with a heavy metal in
    the formation of a sandwich-type compound.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/626
TXT Compounds under subclass 622 in which carbon or chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium or tellurium) is bonded directly to the six-membered
    hetero ring, which chalcogen or carbon is between the hetero ring and the
    azo group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/627
TXT Compounds under subclass 622 in which at least two halogens are attached
    directly to the six-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/628
TXT Compounds under subclass 622 which contain an additional hetero ring, which
    ring is other than six-membered having at least two ring nitrogens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/629
TXT Compounds under subclass 619 wherein an alkylene, alkenyl or alkenylene
    chain is bonded directly to a sulfonyl group, i.e.,

     or to a sulfonamide group, i.e.,

    S-N,which sulfonyl or sulfonamide

    is between the chain and a ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/630
TXT Compounds under subclass 617 in which halogen is attached directly to a
    hetero ring or to an alicyclic ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 534/631
TXT Compounds under subclass 630 which contain the  group, wherein only

    hydrogen may be replaced.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 534/632
TXT Compounds under subclass 630 in which the hetero ring to which halogen is
    attached is six-membered and contains at least two ring nitrogens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/633
TXT Compounds under subclass 632 wherein the hetero ring is one of the cyclos
    in a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/634
TXT Compounds under subclass 632 which contain at least two of the six-membered
    hetero rings having halogen bonded directly thereto attached indirectly to
    each other by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/635
TXT Compounds under subclass 632 which contain an additional hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/636
TXT Compounds under subclass 635 wherein the additional hetero ring has the
    following basic structure, which may contain double bonds between ring
    members:

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/637
TXT Compounds under subclass 632 in which at least two azo groups are attached
    indirectly to each other by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:




CLS 534/638
TXT Compounds under subclass 632 wherein the hetero ring and a benzene ring are
    both bonded directly to the same nitrogen, said benzene ring is
    additionally bonded directly to the azo group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/639
TXT Compounds under subclass 617 which contain a hetero ring having the
    following basic structure, which may contain a double bond between ring
    members:

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/640
TXT Compounds under subclass 617 wherein an alkylene, alkenyl, alkenylene,
    alkynyl or alkynylene chain is attached directly or indirectly to a ring by
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/641
TXT Compounds under subclass 640 wherein an alkylene, alkenyl or alkenylene
    chain is bonded directly to a sulfonyl group, i.e.,

    --, or a sulfonamide group, i.e., --N,

    which sulfonyl or sulfonamide is between the chain and a ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/642
TXT Compounds under subclass 641 wherein the alkylene, alkenyl or alkenylene
    chain and the ring are both bonded directly to the same sulfonyl group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/643
TXT Compounds under subclass 640 wherein an alkylene, alkenyl or alkenylene
    chain is

    bonded directly to a -- group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium

    or tellurium), to a -C , group or to a

    N--N   group, which group is between the chain and a ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 534/644
TXT Compounds under subclass 640 in which an alkylene, alkenyl or alkenylene
    chain and a ring are both bonded directly to the same chalcogen atom (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium) or to plural chalcogens which are
    bonded directly to each other.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 534/645
TXT Compounds under subclass 573 in which at least two sulfonyl groups are
    bonded directly to the same amino nitrogen, e.g.,

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provide for herein is:


CLS 534/646
TXT Compounds under subclass 573 in which sulfonyl and carbonyl are both bonded
    directly to the same amino nitrogen,

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/647
TXT Compounds under subclass 573 in which at least two amino nitrogens are
    bonded directly to the same sulfonyl group; e.g.,N--N, etc.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/648
TXT Compounds under subclass 573 wherein an alkyl chain, which has at least
    eight carbons specified, or plural alkyl chains, each of which has at least
    five carbons specified, is bonded directly to a ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 534/649
TXT Compounds under subclass 573 wherein an alkyl chain which has at least
    eight carbons specified is bonded directly to a ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 534/650
TXT Compounds under subclass 573 which contain

    a  group or a -- group, wherein X is

    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium), between a ring and
    an alkyl chain which has at least eight carbons specified.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/651
TXT Compounds under subclass 650 in which the

    sulfonyl group or the -- group is bonded
    directly the ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 534/652
TXT Compounds under subclass 573 which contain the formazan group, i.e.,
    -N=-N=N-.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 534/653
TXT Compounds under subclass 573 which contain a polycyclo carbocyclic ring
    system having at least three cyclos.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 534/654
TXT Compounds under subclass 653 in which the polycyclo carbocyclic ring system
    consists of three six-membered cyclos and has plural oxygens bonded
    directly to it.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 534/655
TXT Compounds under subclass 654 which contain a hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/656
TXT Compounds under subclass 654 which contain at least two polycyclo
    carbocyclic ring systems consisting of three six-membered cyclos, each
    having plural oxygens bonded directly to it.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/657
TXT Compounds under subclass 653 wherein the polycyclo ring system has no
    direct bond to any azo group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/658
TXT Compounds under subclass 653 in which chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) is double bonded directly to the polycyclo ring
    system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/659
TXT Compounds under subclass 573 which contain a bicyclo carbocyclic ring
    system consisting of a six-membered ring and a five-membered ring, i.e.,

    which may contain double bonds between itsmembers.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/660
TXT Compounds under subclass 573 in which -OH

    and the carbon of a --O-  group are both bonded directly to the same
    monocyclic benzene ring, wherein -H of the -OH may be replaced by a
    substituted or unsubstituted ammonium ion or a metal.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 534/661
TXT Compounds under subclass 660 which include aluminum or a metal with a
    specific gravity greater than four.

    (1)     Note.  Arsenic is considered a metal for the purpose of this
    subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 534/662
TXT Compounds under subclass 661 which contain a hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/663
TXT Compounds under subclass 661 wherein at least two azo groups within the
    same azo moiety are attached indirectly to each other by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  The term "azo moiety" as used herein is intended to include
    singularly each of the azo compounds which complex with a heavy metal in
    the formation of a sandwich-type compound.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/664
TXT Compounds under subclass 660 which contain a hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/665
TXT Compounds under subclass 664 wherein an azo group is bonded directly to a
    hetero ring or to a polycyclo ring system which contains a hetero ring as
    one of the cyclos.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/666
TXT Compounds under subclass 660 in which at least three azo groups are
    attached indirectly to each other by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/667
TXT Compounds under subclass 666 which contain at least two monocyclic benzene
    rings, each of which has an -OH group and a -COO- group bonded directly to
    it.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/668
TXT Compounds under subclass 666 which contain an additional monocyclic benzene
    ring which has either plural hydroxy groups, hydroxy and nitrogen, or
    plural nitrogens bonded directly to it; wherein the nitrogen is other than
    as nitro, nitroso or azo.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 534/669
TXT Compounds under subclass 666 which contain

    an additional --  group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/670
TXT Compounds under subclass 660 in which two azo groups are attached
    indirectly to each other by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/671
TXT Compounds under subclass 670 which contain

    a --OH  group bonded directly to carbon,

    wherein H of the -OH may be replaced by a substituted or unsubstituted
    ammonium ion or a metal.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/672
TXT Compounds under subclass 671 which contain at least two monocyclic benzene
    rings, each of which has an -OH group and a -COO- group bonded directly to
    it.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/673
TXT Compounds under subclass 671 which contain

    an additional -- group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/674
TXT Compounds under subclass 660 which contain

    a --OH group bonded directly to carbon,

            wherein -H of the -OH may be replaced by a substituted or
    unsubstituted ammonium ion or a metal.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/675
TXT Compounds under subclass 674 in which the azo group is attached indirectly
    to the monocyclic benzene ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/676
TXT Compounds under subclass 573 wherein at least two -NH2 groups or a -NH2
    group and an -OH group are bonded directly to a monocyclic benzene ring;
    wherein -H of the -OH may be replaced by a substituted or unsubstituted
    ammonium ion or a metal.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 534/677
TXT Compounds under subclass 676 in which at least two azo groups within the
    same azo moiety are attached indirectly to each other by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  The term "azo moiety" as used herein is intended to include
    singularly each of the azo compounds which complex with a heavy metal in
    the formation of a sandwich-type compound.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 534/678
TXT Compounds under subclass 677 which contain

    a --OH group bonded directly to carbon,

    wherein -H of the -OH may be replaced by a substituted or unsubstituted
    ammonium ion or a metal.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 534/679
TXT Compounds under subclass 678 which contain at least two of the monocyclic
    rings, each of which has plural -NH2 groups or a -NH2 group and an -OH
    group bonded directly to it.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/680
TXT Compounds under subclass 678 in which exactly three azo groups are attached
    indirectly to each other by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/681
TXT Compounds under subclass 676 which contain

    a --OH group bonded directly to carbon

    wherein H of the -OH may be replaced by a substituted or unsubstituted
    ammonium ion or a metal.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 534/682
TXT Compounds under subclass 573 wherein at least two -OH groups or esters
    thereof are bonded directly to a monocyclic benzene ring; wherein the -H of
    the -OH may be replaced by a substituted or unsubstituted ammonium ion, a
    metal or an ester radical.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compound provided for herein are:


CLS 534/683
TXT Compounds under subclass 682 wherein the benzene ring is bonded directly to
    an azo group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 534/684
TXT Compounds under subclass 683 which contain aluminum or a metal with a
    specific gravity greater than four.

    (1)     Note.  Arsenic is considered a metal for the purpose of this
    subclass.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/685
TXT Compounds under subclass 683 in which at least two azo groups are attached
    indirectly to each other by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/686
TXT Compounds under subclass 685 which contain a hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/687
TXT Compounds undersubclass 685 which contain at least two of the monocyclic
    benzene rings, each of which has plural -OH groups or esters thereof,
    bonded directly to it.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/688
TXT Compounds under subclass 683 wherein exactly two azo groups are attached
    indirectly to each other by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/689
TXT Compounds under subclass 573 which contain the    group, wherein only

    hydrogen may be replaced.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/690
TXT Compounds under subclass 689 which contain aluminum or a metal with a
    specific gravity greater than four.

    (1)     Note.  Arsenic is considered a metal for the purpose of this
    subclass.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/691
TXT Compounds under subclass 689 which contain a hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/692
TXT Compounds under subclass 573 which contain aluminum or a metal with a
    specific gravity greater than four.

    (1)     Note.  Arsenic is considered a metal for the purpose of this
    subclass.


CLS 534/693
TXT Compounds under subclass 692 which are amine added salts of the metal
    containing azo compound.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein is:


CLS 534/694
TXT Compounds under subclass 692 which contain arsenic.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/695
TXT Compouonds under subclass 692 wherein a moiety having an azo group and a
    moiety having an acyclic chain which contains an azomethine group, i.e.,
    -CH=N, are bonded directly to the same metal.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/696
TXT Compounds under subclass 692 wherein azo moieties from different and
    distinct azo compounds are bonded to the same metal.

    (1)     Note.  The term "azo moiety" as used herein is intended to include
    singularly each of the azo compounds which complex with a heavy metal in
    the formation of a sandwich-type compound.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/697
TXT Compounds under subclass 696 which contain a hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 534/698
TXT Compounds under subclass 697 wherein each of the azo moieties contains a
    hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 534/699
TXT Compounds under subclass 696 in which at least two azo groups within the
    same azo moiety are attached indirectly to each other by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  The term "azo moiety" as used herein is intended to include
    singularly each of the azo compounds which complex with a heavy metal in
    the formation of a sandwich-type compound.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/700
TXT Compounds under subclass 692 in which an azo group is bonded directly to an
    acyclic carbon, which carbon is additionally bonded directly to two acyclic
    carbons, each of which is double or triple bonded to an atom.

    (1)     Note.  The term "reactive methylene" is used to describe the
    acyclic carbon to which the azo group and other two carbons are bonded.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/701
TXT Compounds under subclass 692 which contain a hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Arsenic is considered a metal for the purpose of this
    subclass.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/702
TXT Compounds under subclass 701 wherein the hetero ring is one of the cyclos
    in a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/703
TXT Compounds under subclass 702 in which an azo group is bonded directly to
    the polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/704
TXT Compounds under subclass 703 wherein the azo group is attached indirectly
    within the same azo moiety by nonionic bonding to either an additional azo
    group or an acyclic chain which contains a azomethine group; i.e., -CH=N-.

    (1)     Note.  The term "azo moiety" as used herein is intended to include
    singularly each of the azo compounds which complex with a heavy metal in
    the formation of a sandwich-type compound.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/705
TXT Compounds under subclass 703 wherein the polycyclo ring system contains at
    least two ring nitrogens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/706
TXT Compounds under subclass 703 which contain a bicyclo ring system having
    either of the following structures, which may contain double bonds between
    ring members:

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/707
TXT Compounds under subclass 701 in which the hetero ring is bonded directly to
    an azo group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/708
TXT Compounds under subclass 707 in which at least three azo groups within the
    same azo moiety are attached indirectly to each other by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  The term "azo moiety" as used herein is intended to include
    singularly each of the azo compounds which complex with a heavy metal in
    the formation of a sandwich-type compound.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/709
TXT Compounds under subclass 707 in which two azo groups in the same azo moiety
    are attached indirectly to each other by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  The term "azo moiety" as used herein is intended to include
    singularly each of the azo compounds which complex with a heavy metal in
    the formation of a sandwich-type compound.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/710
TXT Compounds under subclass 707 which contain a hetero ring having the
    following structure, which may contain double bonds between ring members:

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/711
TXT Compounds under subclass 710 wherein a

    sulfonyl group, i.e., --, is bonded

    directly to a ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/712
TXT Compounds under subclass 711 wherein an additional chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium or tellurium) is bonded directly to the sulfonyl group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/713
TXT Compounds under subclass 692 which contain a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/714
TXT Compounds under subclass 713 in which at least three azo groups within the
    same azo moiety are attached indirectly to each other by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  The term "azo moiety" as used herein is intended to include
    singularly each of the azo compounds which complex with a heavy metal in
    the formation of a sandwich-type compound.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/715
TXT Compounds under subclass 714 wherein between two azo groups are at least
    two monocyclic benzene rings which are attached directly to each other by
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/716
TXT Compounds under subclass 713 in which two azo groups within the same azo
    moiety are attached indirectly to each other by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  The term "azo moiety" as used herein is intended to include
    singularly each of the azo compounds which


            complex with a heavy metal in the formation of a sandwich-type
    compound.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 534/717
TXT Compounds under subclass 716 which contain a -C- group, wherein X is
    chalcogen (i.e.,oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 534/718
TXT Compounds under subclass 717 where in between the azo groups are at least
    two monocylcic benzene rings which are attached directly or indirectly to
    each other by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:



CLS 534/719
TXT Compounds under subclass 716 wherein between the azo groups are at least
    two monocyclic benzene rings which are attached directly or indirectly to
    each other by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/720
TXT Compounds under subclass 713 which contain

    a -- group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a comound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/721
TXT Compounds under subclass 720 wherein

    nitrogen is bonded directly to the --

    group; i.e., --N.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/722
TXT Compounds under subclass 713 wherein plural bicyclo carbocyclic ring
    systems are bonded directly to the azo group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/723
TXT Compounds under subclass 713 in which amino nitrogen is bonded directly to
    a sulfonyl

    group; i.e.,   N .

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/724
TXT Compounds under subclass 713 which contain

    a --OH group bonded directly to carbon,

    wherein H of the -OH may be replaced by theammonium ion or a metal.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/725
TXT Compounds under subclass 724 which contain an amino nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/726
TXT Compounds under subclass 573 which contain boron or silicon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/727
TXT Compounds under subclass 573 wherein phosphorus is attached indirectly to
    an azo group by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 534/728
TXT Compounds under subclass 573 which are amine addition salts of an azo
    compound.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/729
TXT Compounds under subclass 573 which contain a chain composed of a least
    fifteen alkylene oxide groups.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/730
TXT Compounds under subclass 573 which contain a sulfonic acid ester radical;
    i.e.,

    ---O-- .

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/731
TXT Compounds under subclass 730 which contain a hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/732
TXT Compounds under subclass 573 wherein nitrogen, other than as azo, and
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium) or nitrogen, other
    than as azo,

    and --X, wherein the X's may be the same or diverse chalcogens, are bonded
    directly

    to the same -- group; e.g., -N--O-,

    -N---O-, etc.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/733
TXT Compounds under subclass 732 which contain a hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/734
TXT Compounds under subclass 573 wherein halogen is bonded directly to sulfur
    or to

    a -- group, wherein X is chalcogen, (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium);

    e.g., -S-halo, --halo, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 534/735
TXT Compounds under subclass 573 which contain an acyclic -XCN or -NCX group,
    wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 534/736
TXT Compounds under subclass 573 which contain

    a -S--OH group bonded directly to carbon, wherein H of the -OH may be
    replaced by the ammonium ion or a Group IA or IIA light metal.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/737
TXT Compounds under subclass 573 in which carbon and a cyano group are both
    bonded directly to the same acyclic nitrogen atom,

    i.e., ---C=N.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 534/738
TXT Compounds under subclass 573 in which an acyclic chain contains a -CH=N
    group, wherein substitution may be made for hydrogen only.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 534/739
TXT Compounds under subclass 573 in which an azo group is bonded directly to an
    acyclic carbon, which carbon is additionally bonded directly to two acyclic
    carbons, each of which is double or triple bonded to an atom.

    (1)     Note.  The term "reactive methylene" is used in reference to the
    acyclic carbon to which azo group and other two carbons are bonded.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/740
TXT Compounds under subclass 739 in which a hetero ring or a polycyclo ring
    system which contains a hetero ring as one of the cyclos is bonded directly
    to an azo group.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 534/741
TXT Compounds under subclass 739 in which a hetero ring is attached indirectly
    to an azo group by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/742
TXT Compounds under subclass 741 wherein the acyclic carbon, to which the other
    two cyclic carbons are bonded, is between the hetero ring and the azo group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/743
TXT Compounds under subclass 739 in which at least three azo groups are
    attached indirectly to each other by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/744
TXT Compounds under subclass 739 in which exactly two azo groups are attached
    indirectly to each other by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/745
TXT Compounds under subclass 744 in which each of the two azo groups is bonded
    directly to an acyclic carbon, which carbon is additionally bonded directly
    to two acyclic carbons, each of which is double or triple bonded to an atom.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/746
TXT Compounds under subclass 745 wherein between the azo groups are at least
    two benzene rings which are bonded directly to each other.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/747
TXT Compounds under subclass 746 wherein each of the benzene rings is bonded
    directly to an azo group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/748
TXT Compounds under subclass 745 wherein between the azo groups is a benzene
    ring to which at least two amino nitrogens are bonded directly.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/749
TXT Compounds under subclass 739 in which sulfonyl is bonded directly to
    nitrogen,

    i.e., --N   .

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/750
TXT Compounds under subclass 739 wherein a -C- group, in which X is chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium), is attached indirectly by
    nonionic bonding to the acyclic carbon to which the other two acyclic
    carbons are bonded.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/751
TXT Compounds under subclass 573 which contain a hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/752
TXT Compounds under subclass 751 which contain a polycyclo ring system having
    at least two hetero atoms which are not members of the same ring or having
    a hetero atom which is shared by at least two rings of the polycyclo ring
    system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 534/753
TXT Compounds under subclass 751 in which an azo group is bonded direclty to
    the hetero ring or to a polycyclo ring system which contains the hetero
    ring as one of the cyclos.


CLS 534/754
TXT Compounds under subclass 753 wherein at least three azo groups are attached
    indirectly to each other by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 534/755
TXT Compounds under subclass 754 in which an additional hetero ring or an
    additional polycyclo ring system having a hetero ring as one of the cyclos
    is bonded directly to an azo group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/756
TXT Compounds under subclass 753 in which two azo groups are attached
    indirectly to each other by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/757
TXT Compounds under the subclass 756 in which an additional hetero ring or an
    additional polycyclo ring system having a hetero ring as one of the cyclos
    is bonded directly to an azo group.

    (1)     Noted.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/758
TXT Compounds under subclass 757 wherein between the azo groups are both hetero
    rings or both polycyclo ring systems.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/759
TXT Compounds under subclass 757 wherein between the azo groups are plural
    monocyclic benzene rings, each of which is bonded directly to an azo group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/760
TXT Compounds under subclass 759 in which the benzene rings are bonded directly
    to each other.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/761
TXT Compounds under subclass 756 in which both azo groups are bonded directly
    to the same hetero ring or to the same polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/762
TXT Compounds under subclass 756 which contain a polycyclo ring system having
    at least three cyclos, at least one of which is a hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/763
TXT Compounds under subclass 756 which contain a bicyclo carbocyclic ring
    system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for here is:


CLS 534/764
TXT Compounds under subclass 756 in which an additional ring is bonded directly
    to the hetero ring or to the polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/765
TXT Compounds under subclass 753 in which an additional hetero ring or
    polycyclo ring system having a hetero ring as one of the cyclos is bonded
    directly to the azo group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/766
TXT Compounds under subclass 765 wherein the hetero ring is six-membered and
    contains nitrogen, e.g., pyridine, morpholine, etc.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/767
TXT Compounds under subclass 766 wherein the hetero ring contains at least two
    nitrogens, e.g., pyrimidine, triazine, etc.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/768
TXT Compounds under subclass 766 wherein the hetero ring is one of the cyclos
    in a bicyclo ring system, e.g., quinoline, benzomorpholine, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 534/769
TXT Compounds under subclass 765 which contain a hetero ring having the
    following structure, which may contain double bonds between ring members:

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/770
TXT Compounds under subclass 753 wherein the hetero ring is six-membered and
    consists of one nitrogen and five carbons, e.g., pyridine, etc.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 534/771
TXT Compounds under subclass 770 in which acyclic oxygen is bonded directly to
    the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 534/772
TXT Compounds under subclass 771 wherein at least two acyclic chalcogens,
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium) are bonded directly to the
    hetero ring at the two positions which are adjacent to the ring in nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/773
TXT Compounds under subclass 770 wherein at least two acyclic nitrogens are
    bonded directly to the hetero ring at the two positions which are adjacent
    to the ring nitrogen; the nitrogens are other than as nitro, nitroso or azo.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 534/774
TXT Compounds under subclass 753 in which an additional hetro ring is attached
    indirectly to the azo group by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Example of compounds provided for herein are:



CLS 534/775
TXT Compounds under subclass 774 wherein the additional hetero ring or a
    polycyclo ring system which contains the additional hetero ring as one


            of the cyclos is bonded directly to a ring, which ring is between
    the azo group and the additional hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:



CLS 534/776
TXT Compounds under subclass 774 wherein a ring and the additional hetero ring
    or a polycyclo ring system which contains the additional hetero ring as one
    of the cyclos are both bonded directly to the same nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 534/777
TXT Compounds under subclass 774 wherein the additional hetero ring or a
    polycyclo ring system which contains the hetero ring as one the cyclos is
    bonded directly to an alkylene chain, which chain is between the azo group
    and the additional hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:





CLS 534/778
TXT Compounds under subclass 753 in which a bicyclo carbocyclic ring system is
    bonded directly to the azo group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 534/779
TXT Compounds under subclass 778 wherein the bicyclo ring system is between the
    azo group and an additional carbocyclic ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 534/780
TXT Compounds under subclass 778 which contain

    a --OH group bonded directly to carbon,

    wherein H of the -OH may be replaced by the ammonium ion or a Group IA or
    IIA light metal.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 534/781
TXT Compounds under subclass 753 which

    contain a --OH group bonded directly to

    carbon wherein H of the -OH may be replaced by the ammonium ion or a Group
    IA or IIA light metal.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/782
TXT Compounds under subclass 781 wherein the hetero ring is one of the cyclos
    of a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/783
TXT Compounds under subclass 781 which contain

    an additional -- group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/784
TXT Compounds under subclass 783 which contain

    at least two --OH groups bonded directly

    to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided herein is:


CLS 534/785
TXT Compounds under subclass 781 which contain

    an acyclic -- group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium
    or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/786
TXT Compounds under subclass 785 in which the

    -- group is bonded directly to nitrogen,

    i.e., --N .


CLS 534/787
TXT Compounds under subclass 753 wherein the hetero ring is one of the cyclos
    of a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/788
TXT Compounds under subclass 787 wherein the hetero ring consists of sulfur,
    nitrogen and carbon, e.g., benzothlazole, etc.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/789
TXT Compounds under subclass 787 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) is double bonded directly to the hetero ring.


CLS 534/790
TXT Compounds under subclass 787 wherein heter ring is five-membered and
    consists of one nitrogen and four carbons; e.g., indole, etc.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/791
TXT Compounds under subclass 753 in which a carbocyclic ring is bonded directly
    to the hetero ring or to the polycyclo ring system which contains the
    hetero ring.


CLS 534/792
TXT Compounds under subclass 791 which contain a hetero ring having the
    following structure, which may contain double bonds between ring members:

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/793
TXT Compounds under subclass 792 which contain

    a -- group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/794
TXT Compounds under subclass 753 wherein a carbocyclic ring is attached
    indirectly to the azo group by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/795
TXT Compounds under subclass 753 in which the hetero ring is five-membered and
    contains at least one atom each of each of sulfur, nitrogen, and carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/796
TXT Compounds under subclass 751 in which at least three azo groups are
    attached indirectly to each other by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/797
TXT Compounds under subclass 751 in which two azo groups are attached
    indirectly to each other by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/798
TXT Compounds under subclass 751 in which plural carbocyclic rings are attached
    directly to the azo group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/799
TXT Compounds under subclass 798 wherein the hetero ring or a polycyclo ring
    system which contains the hetero ring as one of the cyclos is bonded
    directly to one of the carbocyclic rings or to a bicyclo ring system which
    contains the carbocyclic ring as one of the cyclos.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/800
TXT Compounds under subclass 799 in which the hetero ring is one of the cyclos
    in a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/801
TXT Compounds under subclass 798 wherein the carbocyclic ring or a bicyclo ring
    system which contains the carbocyclic ring as one of the cyclos and the
    hetero ring or a polycyclo ring system which contains the hetero ring as
    one of the cyclos are both bonded directly to the same carboxamide group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 534/802
TXT Compounds under subclass 798 wherein the carbocyclic ring or a bicyclo ring
    system which contains the carbocyclic ring as one of the cyclos and the
    hetero ring or a polycyclo ring system which contains the hetero ring as
    one of the cyclos are bonded directly to the same nitrogen atom.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/803
TXT Compounds under subclass 802 in which the hetero ring is six-membered and
    contains at least two nitrogens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/804
TXT Compounds under subclass 798 wherein the hetero ring or a polycyclo ring
    system which contains the hetero ring as one of the cyclos is bonded
    directly to an alkylene chain, which chain is between the hetero ring and
    the carbocyclic ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/805
TXT Compounds under subclass 573 wherein exactly five or exactly six azo groups
    are attached indirectly to each other by nonionic bonding.


CLS 534/806
TXT Compounds under subclass 573 in which exactly four azo groups are attached
    indirectly to each other by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/807
TXT Compounds under subclass 806 wherein plural nitrogens are bonded directly
    to the same

    N-- Ngroup, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium),

    e.g.,  N-- N.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/808
TXT Compounds under subclass 806 which contain the     group, wherein the
    benzene rings may be further substituted.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/809
TXT Compounds under subclass 573 in which exactly three azo groups are attached
    indirectly to each other by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/810
TXT Compounds under subclass 809 which contain

    a -- group, wherein X is nitrogen or chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/811
TXT Compounds under subclass 810 wherein the

    -- is part of a    N-- group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 534/812
TXT Compounds under subclass 811 which contain

    at least two of the -- groups.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 534/813
TXT Compounds under subclass 809 which contain thegroup, wherein the benzene
    rings may be further substituted.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/814
TXT Compounds under subclass 813 in which both hydroxy and nitrogen are bonded
    directly to the same bicyclo ring system; wherein the nitrogen is other
    than as a nitro, nitroso or azo group and the H or hydroxy may be replaced
    by the ammonium ion or a Group IA or IIA light metal.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/815
TXT Compounds under subclass 809 wherein -OH is bonded directly to a bicyclo
    ring system, wherein H of the -OH may be replaced by the ammonium ion or a
    Group IA or IIA light metal.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/816
TXT Compounds under subclass 573 in which exactly two azo groups are attached
    indirectly to each other by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/817
TXT Compounds under subclass 816 wherein between the azo groups are at least
    two benzene rings which are bonded directly to the same urea or thiourea
    group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/818
TXT Compounds under subclass 817 which contain a bicyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/819
TXT Compounds under subclass 816 wherein between the azo groups are at least
    two benzene rings which are bonded directly to the same carboxamide or
    sulfonamide group.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 534/820
TXT Compounds under subclass 819 wherein at least two carboxamide groups are
    between the azo groups.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/821
TXT Compounds under subclass 816 wherein between the azo groups are at least
    two benzene rings which are bonded directly to the same chalcogen (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur,

    selenium or tellurium) or -- group, wherein X is chalcogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/822
TXT Compounds under subclass 816 wherein between the azo groups are at least
    two benzene rings which are bonded directly to each other.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 534/823
TXT Compounds under subclass 822 which contain

    a -- group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e, oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/824
TXT Compounds under subclass 822 wherein nitrogen, other than as a nitro,
    nitroso or azo group, is attached indirectly to azo by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/825
TXT Compounds under subclass 824 wherein at least two nitrogens, other than as
    nitro, nitroso or azo groups, are attached indirectly to azo by nonionic
    bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/826
TXT Compounds under subclass 825 in which at

    least two --OH groups are bonded directly

    to the same bicyclo ring system, wherein H of the -OH may be replaced by
    the ammonium ion or a Group IA or IIA lighty metal.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/827
TXT Compounds under subclass 816 wherein between the azo groups is a bicyclo
    ring system having -OH bonded directly thereto, wherein H of the -OH may be
    replaced by a substituted or unsubstituted ammonium ion or a Group IA or
    IIA light metal.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/828
TXT Compounds under subclass 827 which contain at least two bicyclo ring
    systems, each of which has an -OH group bonded directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/829
TXT Compounds under subclass 816 which contain

    a -- group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provide for herein is:


CLS 534/830
TXT Compounds under subclass 829 wherein -OH

    and the -- group are bonded directly to the same bicyclo ring system;
    wherein H of the -OH may be replaced by a substituted or unsubstituted
    ammonium ion or a Group IA or IIA light metal.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/831
TXT Compounds under subclass 816 in which plural benzene rings are bonded
    directly to each azo group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/832
TXT Compounds under subclass 831 wherein at least one of the benzene rings is
    part of a bicyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/833
TXT Compounds under subclass 832 wherein each of the benzene rings is part of a
    bicyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/834
TXT Compounds under subclass 832 in which -OH is bonded directly to the bicyclo
    ring system; wherein H of the -OH may be replaced by the ammonium ion or a
    Group IA or IIA light metal.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/835
TXT Compounds under subclass 834 which contain at least two bicyclo ring
    systems, each of which has an -OH group bonded directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/836
TXT Compounds under subclass 834 wherein an additional -OH group or nitrogen is
    bonded directly to the bicyclo ring system, wherein the nitrogen is other
    than as a nitro, nitroso or azo group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/837
TXT Compounds under subclass 834 wherein a

    --OH group is bonded directly to the

    bicyclo ring system, wherein H of the -OH may be replaced by the ammonium
    ion or a Group IA or IIA light metal.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/838
TXT Compounds under subclass 573 which contain exactly one azo group or more
    than one azo group if their attachment to each other is by ionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 534/839
TXT Compounds under subclass 838 wherein plural benzene rings are bonded
    directly to the azo group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/840
TXT Compounds under subclass 839 wherein each of the benzene rings is part of a
    bicyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/841
TXT Compounds under subclass 840 which contain

    a -- group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/842
TXT Compounds under subclass 840 wherein -OH is bonded directly at the
    2-position of the bicyclo ring system; wherein H of the -OH may be replaced
    by the ammonium ion or a Group IA or IIA light metal.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/843
TXT Compounds under subclass 839 in which each of the benzene rings is
    monocyclic, i.e., neither bridged nor fused.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/844
TXT Compounds under subclass 843 which contain

    a -- group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compoundprovided for herein is:


CLS 534/845
TXT Compounds under subclass 844 which contain

    a --O- group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/846
TXT Compounds under subclass 845 which contain

    a -O--O- group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/847
TXT Compounds under subclass 844 wherein the

    sulfonyl is part of a --N   group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/848
TXT Compounds under subclass 844 which contain

    a -- group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/849
TXT Compounds under subclass 848 wherein the X

    -- group and a ring are both bonded directly to the same nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/850
TXT Compounds under subclass 843 which contain

    a -- group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium
    ortellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/851
TXT Compounds under subclass 843 in which the

    -- group is bonded directly to one of the benzene rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/852
TXT Compounds under subclass 850 in which the

    -- is in a --X- group, wherein the X's may be the same or diverse
    chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 534/853
TXT Compounds under subclass 852 wherein the

    --X- is in a --OH group, wherein H of the -OH may be replaced by the
    ammonium ion or a Group IA or IIA light metal.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for here is:


CLS 534/854
TXT Compounds under subclass 852 which contain

    an additional -C- group, which group and a ring are bonded directly to the
    same nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein in is:


CLS 534/855
TXT Compounds under subclass 850 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium), which has no direct bond to any ring, is attached
    by a single bond to acyclic carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 534/856
TXT Compounds under subclass 843 wherein nitrogen, other than as nitro or
    nitroso, is attached indirectly to the azo group by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/857
TXT Compounds under subclass 856 wherein -OH is bonded directly to an acyclic
    carbon or carbon chain, wherein H of the -OH may be replaced by the
    ammonium ion or a Group IA or IIA light metal.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/858
TXT Compounds under subclass 857 wherein an additional chalcogen, (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium) is bonded directly to the acyclic
    carbon or carbon chain.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 534/859
TXT Compounds under subclass 856 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) is bonded directly to a ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/860
TXT Compounds under subclass 839 which contain

    an acyclic -- group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium
    or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/861
TXT Compounds under subclass 860 in which an -OH group is bonded directly to a
    bicyclo ring system, wherein H of the -OH may be replaced by a substituted
    or unsubstituted ammonium ion or a Group IA or IIA light metal.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/862
TXT Compounds under subclass 861 in which nitrogen is bonded directly to the



    -- group, e.g., carboxamide, etc.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/863
TXT Compounds under subclass 862 in which the



    -- group is bonded directly to the bicyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/864
TXT Compounds under subclass 863 which contain

    a -- group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/865
TXT Compounds under subclass 863 which contain

    an additional acyclic -- group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/866
TXT Compounds under subclass 865 having at least two groups which contain
    nitrogen

    bonded directly to --; e.g.,

    N--.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/867
TXT Compounds under subclass 866 which contain

    at least three   N-- groups, wherein the X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/868
TXT Compounds under subclass 863 which contain an additional amino nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/869
TXT Compounds under subclass 863 in which at least two oxygens are bonded
    directly to the same monocyclic benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/870
TXT Compounds under subclass 863 wherein bonded directly to the same benzene
    ring are the azo group, a halogen, an acyclic carbon and either an
    additional halogen or an additional acyclic carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 534/871
TXT Compounds under subclass 863 wherein bonded directly to the same benzene
    ring are an acyclic carbon, a carboxamide group and either chalcogen (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium) or an additional acyclic carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 534/872
TXT Compounds under subclass 862 in which the nitrogen is bonded additionally
    directly to the bicyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/873
TXT Compounds under subclass 872 which contain

    an additional -- group.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of a compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 534/874
TXT Compounds under subclass 861 in which the 878

    -- group is bonded directly to the bicyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/875
TXT Compounds under subclass 839 wherein nitrogen, other than as nitro or
    nitroso, is attached indirectly to the azo group by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/876
TXT Compounds under subclass 875 in which oxygen is bonded directly to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/877
TXT Compounds under subclass 876 in which the nitrogen and the oxygen are both
    bonded directly to the same bicyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/878
TXT Compounds under subclass 877 wherein a

    -- group is bonded directly to the bicyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/879
TXT Compounds under subclass 878 in which at

    least two nitrogens or at least two --

    groups are bonded directly to the bicyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/880
TXT Compounds under subclass 878 which contain

    an additional -- group, which group is

    attached indirectly to the bicyclo ring system by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/881
TXT Compounds under subclass 875 wherein the

    nitrogen and a -- group are both

    bonded directly to the same bicyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/882
TXT Compounds under subclass 839 in which oxygen is double bonded directly to
    sulfur,

    e.g., --, etc..

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/883
TXT Compounds under subclass 882 in which a

    -- group is bonded directly to a bicyclo

    ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/884
TXT Compounds under subclass 883 wherein at

    least two -- groups are bonded directly to

    the same bicyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/885
TXT Compounds under subclass 838 in which a benzene ring is bonded directly to
    the azo group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/886
TXT Compounds under subclass 838 which contain

    a -- group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 534/887
TXT Processes under subclass 573 wherein the azo compound is separated from
    impurities or from the reaction mixture.


CLS 536/
TTL ORGANIC COMPOUNDS -- PART OF THE CLASS 532-570 SERIES

CLS 536/1.11
TXT Carbohydrates or derivatives:
    Compounds under the class definition which are saccharides whose monomeric
    units are polyhydroxy mono-aldehydes or polyhydroxy mono-ketones having the
    formula Cn(H2O)n (wherein n is five or six) or the corresponding cyclic
    hemiacetals thereof; or the reaction derivatives thereof in which the
    carbon skeleton and the carbonyl function or hemi-acetal function of the
    saccharide unit are not destroyed.

    (1)     Note.  Carbohydrate degradation products which contain fewer than
    five carbon atoms are not provided for in this or indented subclasses, but
    are in appropriate subclasses in classes in the 532-570 series.

    (2)     Note.  Alcohol, acid, and amine derivatives of carbohydrates which
    are formed by the alcohol, acid, or amine function replacing the oxygen of
    the carbonyl group of the carbohydrate are classified in the appropriate
    alcohol, acid, and amine subclasses in Classes 568, 562, and 564,
    respectively.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, subclasses 36+ for hydrolysis of
    carbohydrates wherein the process stops with such hydrolysis or is followed
    by purification, concentration, or crystallization, only.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, appropriate subclasses for
    extracting cellulose from natural sources.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 532+ for a
    nonstructural laminate including a layer comprising carbohydrate.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, appropriate
    subclasses for biochemical or fermentation processes of degrading,
    liberating or treating carbohydrates.

    527,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses for the
    solid reaction product of the reaction between a carbohydrate and a polymer
    or a polymer forming substance.

    549,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 315 for ascorbic acid.

    562,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 512+ for acids which have the same
    basic structure as carbohydrates or which are degradation products thereof,
    especially subclass 597 for oxalic acid.

    568,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 852+ for alcohols, such as sorbitol,
    having the same basic structure as carbohydrates.


CLS 536/2
TXT Compounds under subclass 1.11 which are pectins and reaction products
    thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclass 577, for food compositions containing pectin.


CLS 536/3
TXT Compounds under subclass 1.11 which are algins or reaction products thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclass 656, for food compositions containing algin.


CLS 536/4.1
TXT O- or S-Glycosides:

    Compounds under subclass 1.11 which an acetal or thiocetal derivatives of
    the cyclic forms of sugars in which the hydrogen atom of the hemiacetal
    hydroxyl or hemithioacetal sulfhydryl group has been replaced by an alkyl,
    aralkyl, or aryl group.

    (1)     Note.  An O- or S- glycoside is basically a compound having a sugar
    moeity connected to an aglycone moiety via oxygen or sulfur.

    (2)     Note.  On complete hydrolysis these compounds yield one or more
    monosaccharides, and mono or polyhydric alcohol or phenol, or sulfur
    analogs thereof.

    (3)     Note.  The cyclic sugars referred to in the definitions are
    normally pyranoses or furanoses.

    (4)     Note.  Glycosides derived from aldoses are referred to as
    aldosides, and those from ketoses are ketosides.

    (5)     Note.  This subclass includes arbutin, amygdalin, and salicin, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for pectins.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    560,    Organic Componds, subclass 68 for tannins some of which are
    probably glycosides.


CLS 536/4.4
TXT Aescin or derivative:

    Products under subclass 4.1 which consist of a mixture of sapogenin
    glycosides (saponins) obtained from the seed of the horse chestnut tree
    (Aesculus hippocastanum).


CLS 536/5
TXT Compounds under subclass 4.1 in which the aglycone moiety of the glycoside
    contains a cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene nucleus.


CLS 536/6
TXT Compounds under subclass 5 wherein a six- membered hetero-O-cyclic
    substituent is connected directly to a carbon atom of the
    cyclopentanohydrophenathrene nucleus.


CLS 536/6.1
TXT Oxygen containing five-membered hetero ring:

    Compounds under subclass 5 wherein a five-membered hetero-O-cyclic
    substitutent is connected directly to a carbon atom of the
    cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene nucleus.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, neutral saponins and
    glycosides having an aglycone moeity described as cardenolide.  Acid
    saponins (i.e., triterpenoid saponins) are not subject matter for this
    subclass.  For purposes of classification, saponins which are not
    designated as acid or neutral are considered neutral and are classified
    herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4.1,    for acid saponins (i.e., triterpenoid saponins) which are known not
    to contain the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene nucleus.

    4.4,    for aescin or derivatives.


CLS 536/6.2
TXT Nitrogen, phosphorus or halogen containing:

    Compounds under subclass 6.1 which contain nitrogen, phosphourus, or
    halogen.


CLS 536/6.3
TXT Processes of extracting from plant materials:

    Processes under subclass 6.1 which include extracting the compound from
    plant materials.


CLS 536/6.4
TXT Daunomycin or derivative:

    Compounds under subclass 4.1 which have the following structural formula:



    and derivatives thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16.8,   for glycoside antibiotics structurally similar to daunomycin
    wherein the anthracycline structure is destroyed or wherein the amino group
    is removed from daunosamine.

    18.7,   for daunosamine, per se.


CLS 536/6.5
TXT Oxygen containg hetero ring of at least twenty ring members (e.g.,
    amphotercin, nystatin, pimaricin, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 4.1 which contain a hetero-O-cyclic substitutent
    of twenty or more ring members.

    (1)     Note.  The compounds provided for herein are commonly referred to
    as "macrolide antibiotics" or "polyene macrolide antibiotics".  They
    include a macrocyclic lactone ring with various ketonic an hydroxyl
    functions glycosidically bound to deoxysugars.  As representative of this
    class of compounds there may be mentioned amphotericin A, amphotericin B,
    candicidin, nystation, perimycin, and pimaricin.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:



CLS 536/7.1
TXT Oxygen containing hetero ring having 12-19 members (e.g., methymycin,
    carbomycin, spiramycin, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 4.1 which contain a hetero-O-cyclic substitutent
    of twelve or more ring members.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:



CLS 536/7.2
TXT Erythromycin or derivative (e.g., oleandomycin, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 7.1 which have the following structure:



    and derivatives thereof wherein the three-part structure shown is not
    destroyed, and wherein the dimethylamine group of desosamine is not
    removed, but may be substituted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    7.1,    for desdimethylamine erythromycins.

    18.7,   for desosamine, per se.


CLS 536/7.3
TXT Boron, phosphorus or sulfur containing:

    Compounds under subclass 7.2 which contain boron, phosphorus, or sulfur.


CLS 536/7.4
TXT Additional nitrogen containing:

    Compounds under subclass 7.2 which contain at least one nitrogen other than
    the desosamine nitrogen.


CLS 536/7.5
TXT Purification or recovery:

    Processes under subclass 7.2 which include separating the compound from
    impurities or from the reaction mixture.


CLS 536/8
TXT Compounds under subclass 4.1 which upon hydrolysis yield a sugar, or
    mixture of sugars, and the anthoxanthins.

    (1)     Note.  The anthoxanthins include the flavones, the flavonols, the
    flavonones, the isoflavones and the xanthones.

    (2)     Note.  The compounds are usually plant pigments.

    (3)     Note.  The subclass provides for rutin, quercitrin, hesperidin,
    citronin and eriodictin, etc.

    (4)     Note.  The flavone moiety is the aglycone portion of the compound.


CLS 536/8.8
TXT Coumermycin or derivative:

    Compounds under subclass 4.1 which have the following structural formula:



    and derivatives thereof.


CLS 536/13
TXT Compounds under subclass 4.1 which have the following structural formula:



            and derivatives thereof.


CLS 536/13.1
TXT Antibiotic BM 123 or derivative:

    Compounds under subclass 4.1 which have the following isomeric structural
    formulae:





    and derivatives thereof.


CLS 536/13.2
TXT Neomycin B or neomycin C or derivative:

    Compounds under subclass 4.1 which have the following structural formulae:



    and derivatives, complexes, or mixtures thereof.


CLS 536/13.3
TXT Paromomycin or derivative (e.g., neomycin E, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 4.1 which have the following structural formula:



    and derivatives thereof.


CLS 536/13.4
TXT Antibiotic XK or derivative:

    Compounds under subclass 4.1 which may have any of the following structural
    formulae:



    and derivatives thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are antibiotics of the XK-88 series, such as
    XK-88-5, also named seldomycin factor 5, and those of the XK-62 series,
    such as XK-62-2.


CLS 536/13.5
TXT Butirosin or derivative (e.g., ambutyrosin, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 4.1 which have the following structural formula:



    and derivatives thereof.


CLS 536/13.6
TXT Gentamicin or derivative:

    Compounds under subclass 4.1 which have the folllowing structural formula:



    and derivatives thereof.


CLS 536/13.7
TXT Kanamycin or derivative:

    Compounds under subclass 4.1 which have the following structural formula:



    and derivatives thereof.


CLS 536/13.8
TXT Carbonyl bonded directly to kanamycin nitrogen:

    Compounds under subclass 13.7 which include at least one carbonyl group
    directly bonded to a nitrogen of kanamycin.


CLS 536/13.9
TXT Sisomicin or derivative:

    Compoounds under subclass 4.1 which have the following structural formula:




    and derivatives thereof.


CLS 536/14
TXT Compounds under subclass 4.1 which have the following structural formula:




    or which have the structure of any of the three main components shown in
    the formula; and derivatives thereof.


CLS 536/15
TXT Compounds under subclass 14 which are reduction products of streptomycin
    and have the following formula:



    and derivatives thereof.


CLS 536/16
TXT Compounds under subclass 14 which result from an addition-type reaction of
    streptomycin, or a derivative thereof, with another compound.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for the addition salts formed by
    reacting streptomycin with metal halides, organic amines, organic or
    inorganic acids, etc.


CLS 536/16.1
TXT Fortimicin or derivative:

    Compounds under subclass 4.1 which have the following structural formula:




    and derivatives thereof.


CLS 536/16.2
TXT Lincomycin or derivative:

    Compounds under subclass 4.1 which have the following structural formula:



    and derivatives thereof.


CLS 536/16.3
TXT Cyano or -COO- containing:

    Compounds under subclass 16.2 which contain a -CN or -COO group.


CLS 536/16.4
TXT Additional sulfur containing:

    Compounds under subclass 16.2 which contain at least two sulfurs.


CLS 536/16.5
TXT Phosphorus or halogen containing:

    Compounds under subclass 16.2 which contain phosphorus or halogen.


CLS 536/16.6
TXT Neamine or derivative (e.g., neomycin A, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 4.1 which have the following structural formula:



    and derivatives thereof.


CLS 536/16.7
TXT Kasugamycin or derivative:

    Compounds under subclass 4.1 which have the following structural formula:



    and derviatives thereof.


CLS 536/16.8
TXT Antibiotics:

    Compounds under subclass 4.1 which have the capacity to inhibit the growth
    of or destroy micro-organisms and are generally emplyed to kill disease in
    aperson or animal.

    (1)     Note.  Anibiotics are generally produced by a bacterium or fungus,
    however, such  processes are not provided for herein.

    (2)     Note. The compound may be antibacterial or antifungal.

    (3)     Note. This subclass provides for antibiotics which are not provided
    for in specific antibiotic subclasses above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology And Microbiology, for processes of
    making antibiotics by cultivating micro-oganisms.


CLS 536/16.9
TXT Purification or recovery:

    Processes under subclass 16.8 which include separating the antibiotic(s)
    from inpurities or from the reaction mixture.


CLS 536/17.1
TXT Boron, phosphorus, heavey metal or aluminum containing:

    Compounds under subclass 4.1 which contain boron, phosphorus, a metal
    having a specific gravity greater than four, or aluminum.


CLS 536/17.2
TXT Nitrogen containing:

    Compound under subclass 4.1 which contain nitrogen.


CLS 536/17.3
TXT Nitrogen containing hetero ring:

    Compounds under subclass 17.2 which contain nitrogen containing
    heterocyclic ring.


CLS 536/17.4
TXT Nitrogen in aglycone moiety:

    Compound under subclass 17.3 which contain nitrogen in the aglycone
    (nonsugar) moiety of the glycoside.


CLS 536/17.5
TXT Sulfur containing (e.g., methylthiolincosaminide, etc.).:

    Compounds under subclass 17.2 which contain sulfur.


CLS 536/17.6
TXT Nitrogen or sulfur in aglycone moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 17.5 which contain nitrogen or sulfur in the
    aglycone (nonsugar) moiety of the glycoside.


CLS 536/17.7
TXT Nitro or nitroso containing:

    Compounds under subclass 17.2 which contain nitro or nitroso.


CLS 536/17.8
TXT Nitrogen in aglycone moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 17.7 which contain nitrogen in the aglycone
    (nonsugar) moiety of the glycoside.


CLS 536/17.9
TXT Nitrogen in aglycone moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 17.2 which contain nitrogen in the aglycone
    (nonsugar) moiety of the glycoside.


CLS 536/18.1
TXT Polycyclo ring system (e.g., hellebrin, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 4.1 which contain a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 536/18.2
TXT Containing -C(=X)X- wherein the X's are the same or diverse chalcogens:

    Compounds under subclass 4.1 which contain a -C(=X)X- group wherein the X's
    are the same of diffierent and are O, S, Se, or Te.


CLS 536/18.3
TXT Plural oxyalkylene groups bonded directly to each other.

    Compounds under subclass 4.1 which contain two or more successive
    oxyalkylene groups.


CLS 536/18.4
TXT Halogen containing:

    Compounds under subclass 4.1 which contain halogen.


CLS 536/18.5
TXT Processses:

    Processes under subclass 4.1 which are directed to the preparation,
    purification, recovery, stabilization of treatment of an O- or S- glycoside.


CLS 536/18.6
TXT Reacting a carbohydrate with an organic -O- containing compound (e.g.,
    reacting glucose with methanol, etc.)

    Processes under subclass 18.5 which include perparing the glycoside by
    reacting a carbohydrate with an organic compound containing -O-.


CLS 536/18.7
TXT Nitrogen containing:

    Compounds under subclass 1.1 which are nitrogen containing derivatives of
    carbohydrates.


CLS 536/20
TXT Compounds under subclass 18.7 which upon acid hydrolysis yield
    acetylglucosamine and


            which are polysaccharides having the following repeating unit:



    and derivatives thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Chitin is a horny substance that forms part of the hard
    outer shell of insects and crustaceans and is structurally similar to
    cellulose.


CLS 536/21
TXT Compounds under subclass 18.7 which are polysaccharides containing the
    following repeating unit wherein the degree of sulfation of the



    individual components in the polysaccharide is apparently not uniform and
    may vary at different areas of the carbohydrate chain, and derivatives
    thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Heparin is a natural substance which can be found in various
    tissues of mammals, especially the lung, spleen, liver and muscle, and has
    been used medicinally for coagulation of blood and metabolism of lipids.


CLS 536/22.1
TXT N-glycosides, polymers thereof, metal derivatives (e.g., nucleic acids,
    oligonucleotides, etc.):Compounds under subclass 18.7 which are glycosidic
    derivatives of the cyclic forms of sugars in which the aglycone portion is
    attached thru nitrogen to the sugar moiety by substituting it for the
    hemiacetal hydroxyl of the sugar.

    (1)     Note.  The compounds included herein are N-glycosides, nucleic
    acids, oligonucleotides, metal derivatives of   nucleic acids, etc.

    (2)     Note.  A nucleoside is an N-glycoside wherein the aglycone portion
    is a pyrimidine ring or a purine ring system attached thru ring nitrogen to
    a pentose sugar (either a ribose or a deoxyribose).

    (3)     Note.  A nucleotide is a phosphorylated nucleoside.

    (4)     Note.  Polynucleotides, also called nucleic acids, are covalently
    linked series of nucleotides in which the 3i  position of the pentose of
    one nucleotide is joined by a phosphodiester group to the 5i position of
    the next.

    (5)     Note.  DNA (deoxyribonucleic acid) and RNA (ribonucleic acid) are
    biologically occurring polynucleotides in which the nucleotide residues are
    linked in a specific sequence by phosphodiester linkages.

    (6)     Note.  The numbering of the members of the purine ring system in
    these subclasses does not follow the Ring Index numbering system.  The
    numbering system followed is:

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4+,     for glycosides wherein the aglycone moiety is attached to the sugar
    portion through an oxygen or sulfur atom.

    25.5,   for homopolymers wherein the monomeric unit is a nucleotide or a
    nucleoside.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    544,    Organic Compounds, subclass 243 for nucleotide analogs which are
    not glycosides.


CLS 536/23.1
TXT DNA or RNA fragments or modified forms thereof (e.g., genes,
    etc.):Compounds under subclass 22.1 which are fragments of nucleic acid
    having a specific sequence of deoxyribonucleotide units, or ribonucleotide
    units, linked by successive 3i-5i phosphodiester linkages, or modified
    derivatives thereof.

    (1)     Note.  A gene is a fragment of DNA that encodes a specific
    polypeptide in a recombinant process.

    (2)     Note.  "Encodes" means that the fragment of DNA    specifies the
    amino acid sequence of the polypeptide expressed by a microorganism that
    has been transformed with such fragment of DNA.

    (3)     Note.  For purposes of this class the term microorganism includes
    bacteria, actinomycetales, cyanobacteria (unicellular algae), fungi,
    protozoa, animal cells, plant cells, and virus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24.1,   for non-coding sequences which control transcription or translation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 69.1+
    and 172.3 for recombinant processes that utilize DNA fragments and subclass
    320.1 for plasmids (circular extrachromosomal self replicating fragments of
    DNA).

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, appropriate
    subclasses for monenzymatic analytical processes which test for, or
    utilize, N-glycosides, polynucleotides, or polynucleosides.

    514,    Drug, Bio-Affecting, and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses for therapeutic composition and methods of using DNA fragments,
    RNA fragments, nucleotides, or nucleosides.

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives; Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, appropriate subclasses for
    polypeptides or proteins that are products obtained from recombinant
    processes that utilize fragments of DNA.


CLS 536/23.2
TXT Encodes an enzyme:
    Compounds under subclass 23.1 which are DNA fragments which encode specific
    enzymes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 172.3 for
    recombinant processes which utilize fragments of DNA.


CLS 536/23.4
TXT Encodes a fusion protein:
    Compounds under subclass 23.1 which are DNA fragments which encode specific
    fusion proteins.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 172.3 for
    recombinant processes which utilize fragments of DNA.


CLS 536/23.5
TXT Encodes an animal polypeptide:
    Compounds under subclass 23.1 which are DNA fragments which encode specific
    animal polypeptides.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 172.3 for
    recombinant processes which utilize fragments of DNA.


CLS 536/23.51
TXT Hormone:
    Compounds under subclass 23.5 which are DNA fragments which encode specific
    hormones.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 172.3 for
    recombinant processes which utilize fragments of DNA.


CLS 536/23.52
TXT Interferon:
    Compounds under subclass 23.5 which are DNA fragments which encode specific
    interferons.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 172.3 for
    recombinant processes which utilize fragments of DNA.


CLS 536/23.53
TXT Immunoglobulin:
    Compounds under subclass 23.5 which are DNA fragments which encode specific
    immunoglobulins.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 172.3 for
    recombinant processes which utilize fragments of DNA.


CLS 536/23.6
TXT Encodes a plant polypeptide:
    Compounds under subclass 23.1 which are DNA fragments which encode specific
    plant polypeptides.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 172.3 for
    recombinant processes which utilize fragments of DNA.


CLS 536/23.7
TXT Encodes a microbial polypeptide:
    Compounds under subclass 23.1 which are DNA fragments which encode specific
    microbial polypeptides.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 172.3 for
    recombinant processes which utilize fragments of DNA.


CLS 536/23.71
TXT Bacillus thuringiensis insect toxin:
    Compounds under subclass 23.7 which are DNA fragments which encode Bacillus
    thuringiensis insect toxins.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 172.3 for
    recombinant processes which utilize fragments of DNA.


CLS 536/23.72
TXT Viral protein:
    Compounds under subclass 23.7 which are DNA fragments which encode specific
    viral proteins.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 172.3 for
    recombinant processes which utilize fragments of DNA.


CLS 536/23.74
TXT Fungal protein:
    Compounds under subclass 23.7 which are DNA fragments encode specific
    fungal proteins.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 172.3 for
    recombinant processes which utilize fragments of DNA.


CLS 536/24.1
TXT Non-coding sequences which control transcription or translation processes
    (e.g., promoters, operators, enhancers, ribosome binding sites,
    etc.):Fragments of DNA under subclass 23.1 which are sequences of
    nucleotides which do not encode polypeptides in recombinant processes, but
    which regulate the expression of such chemical compounds in such processes.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are such compounds as promoters, operators,
    ribosome binding sites, enhancers, etc.


CLS 536/24.2
TXT Non-coding sequences having no known regulatory function and which are
    adaptors or linkers for vector or gene construction:Compounds under
    subclass 23.1 which are fragments of DNA, which have utility in
    constructing a desired gene or in the insertion of genetic material into a
    vector.

    (1)     Note.  A vector is a vehicle employed to introduce a nucleic acid
    sequence, or gene, into a cell.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 320.1 for
    vectors.


CLS 536/24.3
TXT Probes for detection of specific nucleotide sequences or primers for the
    synthesis of DNA or RNA: Fragments of nucleic acids under subclass 23.1
    which have utility as probes for the detection of specific nucleotide
    sequences, or as primers for the synthesis of DNA or RNA.

    (1)     Note.  A probe is a single strand of DNA or RNA which could be
    labelled, and which hybridizes by complementary base pairing with another
    single strand of DNA or RNA.

    (2)     Note.  A primer is a sequence of nucleotides which is used in the
    synthesis of DNA or RNA.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 6 for
    analytical processes that utilize probes for detecting the presence, or
    absence, of a particular nucleotide sequence.


CLS 536/24.31
TXT Probes for detection of animal nucleotide sequences:
    Fragments of nucleic acid under subclass 24.3 which are single strands of
    DNA or RNA with utility in analytical processes for the detection of
    complementary nucleotide sequences of animal origin.


CLS 536/24.32
TXT Probes for detection of microbial nucleotide sequences:
    Fragments of nucleic acid under subclass 24.3 which are single strands of
    DNA or RNA with utility in analytical processes for the detection of
    complementary nucleotide sequences of microbial origin.


CLS 536/24.33
TXT Primers:
    Fragments of nucleic acids under subclass 24.3 which have utility as
    primers.

    (1)     Note.  A primer is a sequence of nucleotides which is used in the
    synthesis of DNA or RNA.


CLS 536/24.5
TXT Nucleic acid expression inhibitors:
    Fragments of DNA or RNA under subclass 23.1 which are effective inhibitors
    of transcription or translation.

    (1)     Note.  Transcription is the process by which the genetic
    information contained in a fragment of DNA specifies the complementary
    sequence of bases in an RNA chain.

    (2)     Note.  Translation is the process by which the genetic information
    contained in a fragment of RNA directs or specifies the sequence of amino
    acids in polypeptide synthesis.


CLS 536/25.1
TXT 3i-5i linked RNA:
    Compounds under subclass 22.1 which are polyribonucleotides of a specific
    sequence wherein the ribonucleotide units are linked by 3i-5i
    phosphodiester linkages.


CLS 536/25.2
TXT 2i-5i linked RNA:
    Compounds under subclass 22.1 which are polyribonucleotides of a specific
    sequence wherein theribonucleotide units are linked by 2i-5i phosphodiester
    linkages.


CLS 536/25.3
TXT Synthesis of polynucleotides or oligonucleotides:
    Process under subclass 22.1 for the synthesis of polynucleotides or
    oligonucleotides, which process may be, or include, a crosslinking step.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, appropriate
    subclasses for processes for the synthesis of polynucleotides or
    oligonucleotides that utilize a microorganism or an enzyme.


CLS 536/25.31
TXT Deprotection step:
    Processes under subclass 25.3 for the synthesis of polynucleotides or
    oligonucleotides which include a deprotection step.


CLS 536/25.32
TXT Labels or markers utilized (e.g., radiotracer, affinity, fluorescent,
    phosphorescent markers, etc.):Processes under subclass 25.3 for the
    synthesis of polynucleotides or oligonucleotides in which a label or marker
    is used to indicate the presence of a particular product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 91.1+
    for processes of synthesizing polynucleotides or oligonucleotides which
    include an enzyme utilized as a label or in any other category.


CLS 536/25.33
TXT Pentavalent phosphorus compound utilized:
    Processes under subclass 25.3 for the synthesis of polynucleotides and
    oligonucleotides which utilize pentavalent phosphorus compounds.


CLS 536/25.34
TXT Trivalent phosphorus compound utilized:
    Processes under subclass 25.3 for the synthesis of polynucleotides and
    oligonucleotides which utilize trivalent phosphorus compounds.


CLS 536/25.4
TXT Separation or purification of polynucleotides or oligonucleotides:Processes
    under subclass 22.1 for the purification or separation of polynucleotides
    or oligonucleotides.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, appropriate
    subclasses for processes for the purification or separation of
    polynucleotides or olygonucleotides that utilize a microorganism or an
    enzyme.


CLS 536/25.41
TXT Extraction processes (e.g., solvent extraction process, etc.):Processes
    under subclass 25.4 for the purification or separation of polynucleotides
    or oligonucleotides which include extraction steps, e.g., solvent
    extraction processes, etc.


CLS 536/25.42
TXT Denaturant utilized:
    Processes under subclass 25.41 for the separation or purification of
    polynucleotides or oligonucleotides which include extraction steps, which
    processes utilize a denaturant.


CLS 536/25.5
TXT Homopolymers having repeating sequences of four or more identical
    nucleotide units:Polynucleotides under subclass 22.1 consisting of four or
    more identical  nucleotide units linked by phosphodiester linkages.


CLS 536/25.6
TXT Nucleic acids which include two or three nucleotide units:
    Compounds under subclass 22.1 which include two or three nucleotide units
    linked by phosphodiester linkages.

    (1)     Note.  Each unit has to be a nucleotide unit, i.e., a
    phosphoesterified nucleoside.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26.5,   for plural N-glycosides bonded to the same phosphorus ester group
    wherein the N is part of a nitrogen containing hetero ring.


CLS 536/26.1
TXT Phosphorus containing N-glycoside wherein the N  is part of an N-hetero
    ring:Compounds under subclass 22.1 which are N-glycosides which contain
    phosphorus and wherein the N of the N-glycoside moiety is part of a
    nitrogen containing hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Nucleotides are provided for in this and indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 536/26.11
TXT The phosphorus is part of a ring:
    Compounds under subclass 26.1 wherein the phosphorus is part of a ring
    structure.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 536/26.12
TXT The N-hetero ring is part of a purine ring system:
    Compounds under subclass 26.11 in which the nitrogen containing hetero ring
    is part of a purine ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 536/26.13
TXT Adenine or substituted adenine:
    Compounds under subclass 26.12 in which the purine ring system is adenine,
    i.e., 6-aminopurine, which may be substituted.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 536/26.14
TXT The N-hetero ring is a diazine or a diazole ring, including
    hydrogenated:Compounds under subclass 26.11 in which the nitrogen
    containing hetero ring is a diazine ring, i.e., a six-membered hetero ring
    with two nitrogens and four carbons, or a diazole ring, i.e., a
    five-membered hetero ring with two nitrogens and three carbons, which
    nitrogen containing hetero ring could be hydrogenated.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 536/26.2
TXT Plural phosphorus atoms in N-glycoside:
    Compounds under subclass 26.1 which contain more than one phosphorus atom.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 536/26.21
TXT Plural phosphorus atoms bonded directly to the same chalcogen in a chain
    (e.g., pyrophosphates, polyanhydrides of phosphorus acids, etc.):Compounds
    under subclass 26.2 which contain two  phosphorus bonded directly to the
    same chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur selenium or tellurium) in a chain.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 536/26.22
TXT Both terminal phosphorus atoms are esterified by organic groups wherein one
    of these organic groups is the sugar moiety:Compounds under subclass 26.21
    wherein both terminal phosphorus atoms are esterified by organic groups
    wherein one of the organic groups is the sugar moiety.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 536/26.23
TXT Exactly two phosphorus atoms in the chain (e.g., coenzyme  A,
    etc.):Compounds under subclass 26.22 in which the chain consists of two
    phosphorus groups bonded directly to the same chalcogen in the chain.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 536/26.24
TXT NAD (nicotinamide adenine dinucleotide) and derivatives thereof:The
    compound under subclass 26.23 which is nicotinamide adenine dinucleotide
    and derivatives thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The structure for nicotinamide adenine dinucleotide is:


CLS 536/26.25
TXT FAD (flavin adenine dinucleotide) and derivatives thereof:
    The compound under subclass 26.23 which is flavin adenine dinucleotide and
    derivatives thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The structure for flavin adenine dinucleotide is:


CLS 536/26.26
TXT Triphosphates (in same chain):
    Compounds under subclass 26.21 which contain a chain of three phosphorus
    joined by chalcogen atoms.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is adenosine
    triphosphate:


CLS 536/26.3
TXT Plural monophosphate groups (e.g., adenosine -3i,5i- biscarboxymethyl
    phosphonate, cytidine nucleoside diphosphate, etc.):Compounds under
    subclass 26.2 which include two or more monophosphate groups attached
    indirectly to each other.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 536/26.4
TXT Cobalamin nucleotides (e.g., vitamin B-12, etc.):
    Compounds under subclass 26.1 which are cobalt containing nucleotides.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is  vitamin
    B-12.


CLS 536/26.41
TXT Processes of preparing or labelling:
    Processes under subclass 26.4 for the preparation of cobalamin nucleotide
    compounds or for the labelling of these compounds.


CLS 536/26.42
TXT Processes of concentration, separation, recovery, or extraction (e.g.,
    recovery from organ extracts, from fermentation broth, from sewage sludge,
    etc.):Processes under subclass 26.4 for the separation, extraction,
    recovery, or concentration of cobalamin nucleotide compounds.


CLS 536/26.43
TXT Adsorbent used (e.g., activated alumina, ion exchange resins,
    etc.):Processes under subclass 26.42 for the separation, extraction,
    recovery or concentration wherein an adsorbent is used.


CLS 536/26.44
TXT Cobalamin analogs (i.e., compounds wherein the benzimidazole ring system
    has been replaced by another organic ring structure, or compounds wherein
    cobalt has been removed or replaced by another metal, or is substituted by
    a group other than -OH or -CN):Compounds under subclass 26.1 which are
    cobalamin analogs, e.g., compounds wherein the benzimidazole ring system
    has been replaced by another ring structure, or wherein the cobalt metal
    has been removed or replaced by another metal or the cobalt is substituted
    by a group other than -OH or -CN, etc.


CLS 536/26.5
TXT Plural N-glycosidic moieties bonded to the same phosphorus ester
    group:Compounds under subclass 26.1 wherein plural N-glycosidic groups are
    bonded directly to the same phosphorus ester group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25.6,   for nucleic acids which include two or three nucleotide units
    linked by phosphodiester linkages.


CLS 536/26.6
TXT Labelled (e.g., tagged with radioactive tracer, fluorescent marker,
    intercalator, etc.):Compounds under subclass 26.1 to which a marker
    (chemical, radioactive, fluorescent, etc.) has been added to indicate its
    presence.


CLS 536/26.7
TXT The N-hetero ring is part of a bicyclic ring system:
    Compounds under subclass 26.1 wherein the N-hetero ring is part of a
    bicyclic hetero ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 536/26.71
TXT Preparing purine nucleotides:
    Processes under subclass 26.7 for the preparation of purine nucleotides.


CLS 536/26.72
TXT Guanosine nucleotide preparation:
    Processes under subclass 26.71 for the preparation of guanosine nucleotide.


CLS 536/26.73
TXT Separation or purification of purine nucleotides:
    Processes under subclass 26.7 for the separation or purification of purine
    nucleotides.


CLS 536/26.74
TXT Inosine nucleotide:
    The compound under subclass 26.7 which is inosine nucleotide.

    (1)     Note.  The compound provided for herein is:


CLS 536/26.8
TXT The N-hetero ring is six-membered and monocyclic (e.g.,
    uridine-5i-monophosphate, etc.):Compounds under subclass 26.1 wherein the
    N-hetero ring is six-membered and is not part of a polycyclic ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 536/26.9
TXT The N-hetero ring is five-membered (e.g.,
    l-b-D-ribofuranosyl-1,2,3-triazole-4-carboxamide-5i-phosphate,
    etc.):Compounds under subclass 26.1 wherein the N-hetero ring is
    five-membered.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 536/27.1
TXT N-glycosides wherein the N is part of an N-hetero ring which hetero ring is
    part of a polycyclo ring system containing an N-hetero ring and an
    additional hetero ring (e.g.,  rebeccamycin, etc.):Compounds under subclass
    22.1 which are N-glycosylamines wherein the N of the N-glycoside moiety is
    part of a nitrogen containing hetero ring which hetero ring is part of a
    polycyclo ring system that contains the N-hetero ring and an additional
    hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses do not provide for compounds
    that contain a phosphorus ester group attached to the sugar moiety.

    (2)     Note.  Nucleosides are provided for in this and indented subclasses.

    (3)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is rebeccamycin:

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26.1+,  for nucleotides, i.e., phosphorus containing nucleosides.


CLS 536/27.11
TXT Preparing by cleaving nucleic acids or by attaching an N-heterocyclic base
    to a sugar ring:Processes under subclass 27.1 for the preparation of
    N-hetero glycosides which include cleaving (degradation) of nucleic acids
    or bonding an N-heterocyclic base to a sugar ring.

    (1)     Note.  Chemical cleaving (degradation) of nucleic acids is provided
    for in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 85+ for
    processes of cleaving nucleic acids which utilize a micro-organism or an
    enzyme.


CLS 536/27.12
TXT Separation or purification (e.g., resolving isomeric mixtures,
    etc.):Processes under subclass 27.1 for the separation, isolation, or
    purification of the N-hetero glycosides.

    (1)     Note.  Chemical processes for resolving isomeric mixtures are
    included in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, appropriate
    subclasses for processes for the separation, isolation or purification of
    N-glycosides or nucleic acids which utilize a micro-organism or an enzyme.


CLS 536/27.13
TXT Bicyclic ring system consisting of the N-hetero ring fused to another
    hetero ring (e.g., 2-azaadenines, 6-azaadenines, etc.):Compounds under
    subclass 27.1 wherein the N-hetero ring is part of a bicyclic ring system
    which consists of an N-hetero ring fused to another hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 536/27.14
TXT Multideoxy or didehydro:
    Compounds under subclass 27.13 wherein two or more -OH groups, which would
    normally be attached to the sugar ring, have been replaced by hydrogen or
    another chemical group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 536/27.2
TXT The bicyclic ring system consists of a 1,3 diazine ring, which may be
    hydrogenated, fused to a five-membered N-hetero ring (e.g., purine
    isoesters like tubercidin, toyocamycin, sangivamycin, sparsomycin A,
    etc.):Compounds under subclass 27.13 wherein a 1,3-diazine hetero ring,
    which may be hydrogenated, is fused to a five-membered N-hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided    for  herein  are:


CLS 536/27.21
TXT The five-membered N-hetero ring is 1,3-diazole, which may be hydrogenated
    (e.g., 6-chloropurine nucleoside, nebularin, etc.):Compounds under subclass
    27.2 wherein the fused five-membered N-hetero ring is 1,3-diazole, which
    may be hydrogenated.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 536/27.22
TXT Carbonyl, thiocarbonyl, or nitrogen, other than as nitro or nitroso, bonded
    directly to the sugar ring:Compounds under subclass 27.21 wherein the sugar
    ring of the nucleoside is bonded directly to carbonyl, thiocarbonyl, or
    nitrogen, other than as nitro or nitroso.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 536/27.23
TXT Carbonyl, thiocarbonyl, additional hetero ring or nitrogen, other than as
    nitro or nitroso attached indirectly to the sugar ring by acyclic nonionic
    bonding:Compounds under subclass 27.21 wherein thiocarbonyl, carbonyl,
    nitrogen, other than as nitro or nitroso, or an additional hetero ring is
    attached indirectly to the sugar ring of the nucleoside by acyclic nonionic
    bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 536/27.3
TXT Adenosyl:
    Compounds under subclass 27.23 wherein the bicyclic ring system is adenine
    (6-aminopurine).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 536/27.31
TXT S-Adenosyl-L-methionine, S-Adenosyl-L-homocysteine, salts, or esters
    thereof:A compound under subclass 27.3 which is S-Adenosyl-L-methionine,
    S-Adenosyl-L-homocysteine, a salt thereof or an ester thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:






CLS 536/27.4
TXT Arabinose is sugar moiety:
    Compounds under subclass 27.21 wherein the sugar ring is arabinose.

    (1)     Note.  Arabinose is a pentose sugar.  Arabinose and ribose are
    epimers (isomers) which differ in the configuration around carbon number 2.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 536/27.5
TXT Ketose is sugar moiety (e.g., decoyinine, psicofuranosyl purines,
    etc.):Compounds under subclass 27.21 wherein the sugar moiety is a ketose.

    (1)     Note.  A ketose is a sugar containing a ketone group when
    represented in straight chain form, and which forms a hemiketal in
    furanoside form.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 536/27.6
TXT Nitrogen, other than nitro or nitroso, bonded directly to the  6-position
    of a purine ring system (e.g., adenosine, etc.):Compounds under subclass
    27.21 wherein a nitrogen, other than as nitro or nitroso, is bonded
    directly to the 6-position of a purine ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 536/27.61
TXT Additional nitrogen bonded directly to the 2-position of the purine ring
    system:Compounds under subclass 27.6 wherein the 2-position of the purine
    ring system has an additional nitrogen substituent bonded directly thereto.


    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 536/27.62
TXT Nitrogen, chalcogen, or additional carbon bonded directly to the 6-position
    nitrogen (e.g., 6-position nitrogen is substituted, etc.):Compounds under
    subclass 27.6 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium), nitrogen, or additional carbon is bonded directly to the
    6-position nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 536/27.63
TXT Halogen, chalcogen, or cyano bonded directly to the 2-position of the
    purine ring system:Compounds under subclass 27.62 wherein chalcogen (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), cyano, or halogen is bonded
    directly to the 2-position of the purine ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 536/27.7
TXT Chalcogen, halogen, or benzene bonded directly to carbon of the purine ring
    system (e.g., isoguanosine, 2-fluoroadenosine, etc.):Compounds under
    subclass 27.6 wherein benzene, chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium,
    or tellurium), or halogen is bonded to a carbon of the purine ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein  is:


CLS 536/27.8
TXT Chalcogen bonded directly to the 6- or 2-position of a purine ring system
    (e.g., inosine, etc.):Compounds under subclass 27.21 wherein chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to the
    2-position or the 6-position of the purine ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 536/27.81
TXT Nitrogen, other than nitro or nitroso, bonded directly to the 2-position of
    the purine ring system (e.g., guanosine, etc.):Compounds under subclass
    27.8 wherein nitrogen, other than nitro or nitroso, is bonded directly to
    the 2-position carbon of the diazine ring in the purine ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:



CLS 536/28.1
TXT N-glycosides wherein the N is part of a six-membered hetero ring (e.g.,
    diazines, etc.):Compounds under subclass 22.1 which are N-glycosides
    wherein the N of the N-glycoside moiety is part of a six-membered nitrogen
    containing hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 536/28.2
TXT Multideoxy or didehydro:
    Compounds under subclass 28.1 wherein two or more -OH groups which would
    normally be attached to the sugar ring  have been replaced by hydrogen or
    by another chemical group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 536/28.3
TXT The N-hetero ring is a triazine ring, including hydrogenated (e.g.,
    6-azauridine, etc.):Compounds under subclass 28.1 wherein the N-hetero ring
    has exactly three nitrogens and three carbons.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 536/28.4
TXT The N-hetero ring is a 1,3-diazine ring, including hydrogenated (e.g.,
    pyrimidines, etc.):Compounds under subclass 28.1 wherein the N-hetero ring
    is a 1,3-diazine ring which may be hydrogenated.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 536/28.5
TXT Nitrogen, other than nitro or nitroso, bonded directly to the 4-position,
    and chalcogen bonded directly to the 2-position of the diazine ring (e.g.,
    cytidines, etc.):Compounds under subclass 28.4 wherein nitrogen, other than
    nitro or nitroso, is bonded directly to the 4-position and chalcogen (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium) is bonded directly to the 2-position
    of the diazine ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 536/28.51
TXT Having chalcogen, carbonyl, or thiocarbonyl bonded directly to the
    4-position substituent nitrogen:Compounds under subclass 28.5 wherein
    carbonyl, thiocarbonyl, or chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium) is bonded directly to the 4-position substituent nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 536/28.52
TXT Halogen or alkyl group of 1-5 carbon atoms bonded directly to the
    5-position of the diazine ring:Compounds under subclass 28.5 wherein an
    alkyl group of 1-5 carbon atoms or halogen is bonded directly to the
    5-position carbon of the diazine ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 536/28.53
TXT Chalcogen bonded directly to the 2- and 4-positions of the diazine ring
    (e.g., uridine, etc.):Compounds under subclass 28.4 wherein chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to the 2-
    and 4-positions of the diazine ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 536/28.54
TXT Alkyl, or substituted alkyl, bonded directly to the 5-position of the
    diazine ring (e.g., thymidine, 5-methyl uridine, etc.):Compounds under
    subclass 28.53 wherein an alkyl group, or a substituted alkyl group, is
    bonded directly to the 5-position of the diazine ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 536/28.55
TXT Halogen bonded directly to the 5-position of the diazine ring (e.g.,
    5-fluorouridine, etc.):Compounds under subclass 28.53 wherein halogen is
    bonded directly to the 5-position of the diazine ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 536/28.6
TXT N-glycosides wherein the N is part of a five-membered hetero ring (e.g.,
    selenazole nucleosides, pyrrole nucleosides, etc.):Compounds under subclass
    22.1 which are N-glycosides wherein the N of the N-glycoside moiety is part
    of a five-membered nitrogen containing hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:





CLS 536/28.7
TXT Plural nitrogens in the N-hetero ring (e.g., triazoles, etc.):Compounds
    under subclass 28.6 wherein the N-hetero ring contains plural nitrogens.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 536/28.8
TXT The N-hetero ring is a 1,3-diazole ring, including hydrogenated (e.g.,
    imidazoles, etc.):Compounds under subclass 28.7 wherein the N-hetero ring
    is a 1,3-diazole ring which may be hydrogenated.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 536/28.9
TXT Benzimidazoles:
    Compounds under subclass 28.8 wherein the N-hetero ring is part of a
    benzimidazole ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 536/29.1
TXT Nitrogen of N-glycoside is acyclic nitrogen:
    Compounds under subclass 22.1 wherein the nitrogen of the N-glycoside is
    acyclic nitrogen (is not part of cyclic structure).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 536/29.11
TXT N-hetero ring bonded directly or indirectly to the acyclic
    nitrogen:Compounds under subclass 29.1 wherein a nitrogen containing hetero
    ring is bonded directly or indirectly to the acyclic nitrogen of the
    N-glycoside.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:








CLS 536/29.12
TXT The acyclic nitrogen is part of a urea or thiourea group:
    Compounds under subclass 29.1 wherein the acyclic nitrogen of the
    N-glycoside is part of a urea or a thiourea group.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 536/29.13
TXT Sulfur containing (e.g., sulfides, sulfones, sulfates, sulfonamides,
    etc.):Compounds under subclass 29.1 which contain sulfur.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 536/29.2
TXT C-glycosides wherein the sugar ring is bonded directly to carbon of an
    N-hetero ring (e.g., 9-deazaadenosines, etc.):Compounds under subclass 18.7
    which are glycosidic derivatives of the cyclic forms of sugars in which the
    aglycone portion includes an N-hetero ring, which hetero ring is attached
    through ring carbon to the sugar moiety by substituting it for the
    hemiacetal hydroxyl of the sugar.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 536/30
TXT Compounds under subclass 18.7 which are nitrogen containing derivatives of
    repeating glucose units, which units have the following structure:



CLS 536/31
TXT Compounds under subclass 30 which include a heterocyclic ring having
    nitrogen as a ring member.


CLS 536/32
TXT Compounds under subclass 30 which result from the reaction of a hydroxyl
    group of cellulose with an acid.

    (1)     Note.  The esterifying acid may include nitrogen and may be organic
    or inorganic.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for compounds formed when the
    sole acid entering into the formation is a halogen.


CLS 536/33
TXT Compounds under subclass 32 in which the acid moiety contains sulfur.


CLS 536/34
TXT Compounds under subclass 32 in which the acid moiety contains phosphorus.


CLS 536/35
TXT Compounds under subclass 32 in which the acid is nitric acid, and the
    resulting compound contains the -NO3 radical.


CLS 536/36
TXT Compounds under subclass 35 which contain, in addition to the -NO3 radical,
    adiverse esterifying acid radical.


CLS 536/37
TXT Processes under subclass 35 in which cellulose undergoes a physical or
    chemical treatment prior to the nitration step.


CLS 536/38
TXT Processes under subclass 35 in which cellulose nitrate is purified,
    recovered, separated, altered physically; or treated chemically wherein the
    primary intent is merely to modify a property of cellulose nitrate.

    (1)     Note.  The processes herein may combine producing the nitrated
    cellulose with a subsequent treatment or may merely treat already formed
    cellulose nitrate.


CLS 536/39
TXT Processes under subclass 38 which include physically subdividing units of
    cellulose nitrate to form smaller particles.

    (1)     Note.  The processes of this subclass include formation or
    treatment in addition to the comminuting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, for comminuting, per
    se.


CLS 536/40
TXT Processes under subclass 38 in which nitrated cellulose is recovered from
    photographic film.


CLS 536/41
TXT Processes under subclass 38 wherein the flow resistance or amount of
    polymerization of nitrated cellulose is altered.


CLS 536/42
TXT Processes under subclass 38 for increasing the physical or chemical
    stability of cellulose nitrate.


CLS 536/43
TXT Compounds under subclass 30 which have the general formula ROR', wherein RO
    is the cellulose residue moiety and R' is an organic radical.

    (1)     Note.  Nitrogen containing cellulose ethers are made by
    substituting and organic radical for the hydrogen atom of a portion of the
    hydroxyl groups of cellulose.

    (2)     Note.  The attached organic radical R' is referred to as the
    etherifying radical.


CLS 536/44
TXT Compounds under subclass 43 which contain at least two diverse organic
    radicals attached via ether linkages to the cellulose residue moiety.


CLS 536/45
TXT Compounds under subclass 18.7 which have amylose and amylopectin as their
    two main components.

    (1)     Note.  Starches are heterogeneous in that the amylose and
    amylopectin occur in different rations to each other.

    (2)     Note.  Starches yield dextrins upon extensive thermal or acid
    degradation and yield glucose upon complete hydrolysis.


CLS 536/46
TXT Compounds under subclass 45 which are any nitrogen containing derivatives
    of various gummy polysaccharides produced by thermal or acid degradation of
    starch.

    (1)     Note.  Dextrins are carbohydrates, intermediate between starch and
    sugars. Degradation of dextrins yields maltose and glucose.

    (2)     Note.  For classification here the nitrogen containing derivatives
    of dextrin have to be gummy polysaccharides; sugars are not provided for
    herein.


CLS 536/47
TXT Compounds under subclass 45 which result from reacting starch with a
    reagent having at least two functional groups which link together starch
    molecules, usually via ether or ester linkages between hydroxyls of said
    molecule.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48+,    for nitrogen containing starch esters that are not cross-linked.

    50,     for nitrogen containing starch ethers that are not cross-linked.


CLS 536/48
TXT Compounds under subclass 45 which result from the reaction of a hydroxyl
    group of a nitrogen containing starch derivative with an acid.

    (1)     Note.  The esterifying acid may be organic or inorganic.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for compounds formed when the
    sole acid moiety entering into the formation is a halogen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for nitrogen containing starch esters that are cross-linked.


CLS 536/49
TXT Compounds under subclass 48 which (1) additionally contain an ether moiety
    or (2) contain a plurality of diverse ester radicals.

    (1)     Note.  The ether moiety may exist (1) independently of the ester
    moiety, as in nitrogen containing ethyl starch acetate, (2) by connection
    to the starch via an intervening ester linkage as in a nitrogen containing
    starch ethoxyacetate, or (3) by direct connection to the starch with the
    ester moiety connected to the ether moiety as in a a nitrogen containing
    acetoxyethyl starch.


CLS 536/50
TXT Compounds under subclass 45 which have the general formula ROR', wherein RO
    is the starch residue moiety and R' is an organic radical.

    (1)     Note.  Nitrogen containing starch ethers can be made by
    substituting an organic radical for the hydrogen atom of a portion of the
    hydroxyl groups of a starch.

    (2)     Note.  The attached organic radical R' is referred to as the
    etherifying radical.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for nitrogen containing starch ethers that are cross-linked.


CLS 536/51
TXT Compounds under subclass 18.7 which are high molecular weight
    polysaccharides containingD-glucose units linked predominately -D (16).

    (1)     Note.  Dextrans yield only glucose on hydrolysis but differ
    otherwise from starch and glycogen as in molecular structure, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Dextrans are usually a group of compounds differing
    according to the bacteria used to ferment the sugar.

    (3)     Note.  Controlled hydrolysis of native dextran yields clinical
    dextran of lower molecular weight which is useful as a blood plasma
    substitute.


CLS 536/52
TXT Compounds under subclass 18.7 which are exudations of plants produced to
    cover wounds and prevent attack by micro-organisms and are highly branched
    polysaccharides composed of two or more monosaccharides.


CLS 536/53
TXT Compounds under subclass 18.7 which contain a carbon atom to which nitrogen
    is directly bonded and to which oxygen is directly attached by a double
    bond.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for compounds having, for example,
    the group:



CLS 536/54
TXT Compounds under subclass 18.7 which contain sulfur in addition to nitrogen.


CLS 536/55
TXT Compounds under subclass 18.7 which contain two or more atoms of nitrogen.


CLS 536/55.1
TXT Polysaccharides:

    Products under subclass 55 wherein the nitrogen containing carbohydrate
    consists of two or more sugar moieties.


CLS 536/55.2
TXT Glucosamine containing:

    Compounds under subclass 18.7 which include an amine of glucose of the
    formula:




    and derivatives thereof.


CLS 536/55.3
TXT Processes:

    Processes under subclass 18.7 which are directed to the preparation,
    purification, recovery, stabilization or treatment in any way of nitrogen
    containing derivatives of carbohydrates.


CLS 536/56
TXT Compounds under subclass 1.1 which consist of repeating glucose units
    having the following structure:

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for nitrogen containing cellulose derivatives.


CLS 536/57
TXT Compounds under subclass 56 which are formed by changing a cellulose
    derivative back to cellulose.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60+,    for cellulose xanthate or viscose which is utilized to make
    regenerated cellulose.


CLS 536/58
TXT Compounds under subclass 56 which result from the reaction of a hydroxyl
    group of cellulose with an acid.

    (1)     Note.  The esterifying acid may be organic or inorganic.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for compounds formed when the
    sole acid function entering into the formation is a halogen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for nitrogen containing cellulose esters.


CLS 536/59
TXT Compounds under subclass 58 in which the acid moiety contains sulfur.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for nitrogen containing cellulose esters in which the acid moiety
    contains sulfur.


CLS 536/60
TXT Compounds under subclass 59 which are cellulose derivatives that include
    the group:



    (1)     Note.  The viscose process is based on the reaction of carbon
    disulfide with the sodium salt of cellulose to yield a xanthate, which
    forms a viscous colloidal solution in dilute aqueous alkali.



    This subclass provides for the colloidal solution as well as the cellulose
    xanthate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for regenerated cellulose.


CLS 536/61
TXT Compounds under subclass 60 in which cellulose xanthate or viscose is
    purified, recovered, separated, altered physically; or treated chemically
    wherein the primary intent is merely to modify a property of the product.

    (1)     Note.  Merely forming viscose from the xanthate is not considered a
    subsequent treatment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    57,     for regenerated cellulose.


CLS 536/62
TXT Compounds under subclass 58 in which the acid moiety contains phosphorus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for nitrogen containing cellulose esters in which the acid moiety
    contains a phosphorus.


CLS 536/63
TXT Compounds under subclass 58 in which the acid moiety is a carboxylic acid.


CLS 536/64
TXT Compounds under subclass 63 which contain at least two diverse carboxylic
    acid moieties.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for stearyl cellulose acetate, for
    example.


CLS 536/65
TXT Compounds under subclass 64 in which at least one of the carboxylic acid
    moieties is a propionate, butyrate or isobutyrate radical.


CLS 536/66
TXT Compounds under subclass 63 which additionally contain an ether moiety.

    (1)     Note.  The ether moiety may exist (1) independently of the ester
    moiety as in ethyl cellulose acetate, (2) by connection to the cellulose
    via an intervening ester linkage, as in cellulose ethoxy acetate, or (3) by
    direct connection to the cellulose with the ester radical connected to the
    ether radical as in acetoxyethyl cellulose.


CLS 536/67
TXT Compounds under subclass 63 in which the carboxylic acid moiety is the
    formate radical.


CLS 536/68
TXT Compounds under subclass 63 in which the carboxylic acid moiety is either
    the propionate, butyrate or isobutyrate radical.


CLS 536/69
TXT Compounds under subclass 63 in which the carboxylic acid moiety is the
    acetate radical.


CLS 536/70
TXT Processes under subclass 69 in which cellulose undergoes a physical or
    chemical treatment prior to the formation of the acetate ester.


CLS 536/71
TXT Processes under subclass 70 in which acetic acid is used in the
    pretreatment.

    (1)     Note.  In these processes acetic acid is employed in the
    pretreatment in addition to the acetic acid or acetic anhydride used to
    form the acetate.


CLS 536/72
TXT Processes under subclass 71 in which a halogen containing compound is
    employed in the pretreatment of the cellulose or in the formation of the
    cellulose acetate.


CLS 536/73
TXT Processes under subclass 71 wherein a sulfur containing compound is also
    used in the pretreatment.


CLS 536/74
TXT Processes under subclass 70 in which a sulfur containing compound is used
    in the pretreatment.


CLS 536/75
TXT Processes under subclass 70 in which a compound containing a halogen is
    employed in the pretreatment of the cellulose or in the formation of the
    cellulose acetate.


CLS 536/76
TXT Processes under subclass 69 in which cellulose acetates are purified,
    recovered, separated, altered physically; or treated chemically wherein the
    primary intent is merely to modify a property of the cellulose acetate.


CLS 536/77
TXT Processes under subclass 76 which include physically subdividing units of
    the compound to form smaller particles or subjecting the compound to
    centrifugal force.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, for comminuting, per
    se.


CLS 536/78
TXT Processes under subclass 76 in which cellulose acetate is recovered from
    photographic film.


CLS 536/79
TXT Processes under subclass 76 which result in the inhibition or reduction of
    the corrosive properties of cellulose acetates.


CLS 536/80
TXT Processes under subclass 76 wherein the flow resistance or amount of
    polymerization is altered.


CLS 536/81
TXT Processes under subclass 76 whereby the physical or chemical stability of
    cellulose acetate is increased.


CLS 536/82
TXT Processes under subclass 76 in which a halogen containing compound is
    utilized in the subsequent treatment or in the formation of cellulose
    acetate.


CLS 536/83
TXT Processes under subclass 69 in which a halogen containing compound is
    utilized in the formation of cellulose acetate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72      and 75, for a process of making cellulose acetate which includes a
    pretreatment wherein a halogen containing compound is utilized in
    pretreating the cellulose or in forming the cellulose acetate.

    82,     for a process which includes subsequent treatment of cellulose
    acetate and the use of a halogen containing compound in the subsequent
    treatment or in the formation of the cellulose acetate.


CLS 536/84
TXT Compounds under subclass 56 having the general formula ROR', wherein RO- is
    the cellulose residue moiety and R' is an organic radical.

    (1)     Note.  Cellulose ethers are made by substituting an organic radical
    for the hydrogen atom of a portion of the hydroxyl groups of cellulose.

    (2)     Note.  The attached organic radical R' is referred to as the
    etherifying radical.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for nitrogen containing cellulose ethers.


CLS 536/85
TXT Processes under subclass 84 in which a cellulose ether is purified,
    recovered, separated, altered physically; or treated chemically wherein the
    primary intent is merely to modify a property of the cellulose ether.

    (1)     Note.  The processes herein may combine producing the cellulose
    ether with a subsequent treatment or may merely treat an already formed
    cellulose ether.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not generally provide for processes
    wherein the intent is to make a derivative of the cellulose ether.
    However, cross-linking processes are included here as well as processes
    wherein the purpose is merely to modify a property of the cellulose ether,
    even when some derivatizing occurs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for subsequent treatment of nitrogen containing cellulose ether
    derivatives.


CLS 536/86
TXT Processes under subclass 85 which include physically subdividing units of
    the compound to form smaller particles.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for grinding, pulverizing, shearing,
    etc.

    (2)     Note.  The processes of this subclass include formation or
    treatment in addition to the comminuting.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, for comminuting, per
    se.


CLS 536/87
TXT Processes under subclass 85 which include altering the interworking
    characteristics of the compound with liquids.


CLS 536/88
TXT Processes under subclass 85 wherein the flow resistance, amount of
    polymerization, or high temperature stability is altered.


CLS 536/89
TXT Processes under subclass 85 wherein an organic acid or an inorganic acid is
    employed in the subsequent treatment.


CLS 536/90
TXT Compounds under subclass 84 which contain at least two diverse organic
    radicals attached via ether linkages to the cellulose residue moiety.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for methyl benzyl cellulose, for
    example.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for nitrogen containing mixed ethers of cellulose.


CLS 536/91
TXT Compounds under subclass 90 wherein at least one of the radicals attached
    via the ether linkage is a hydroxyalkyl radical.


CLS 536/92
TXT Compounds under subclass 84 wherein the etherifying radical contains sulfur.


CLS 536/93
TXT Compounds under subclass 84 wherein the etherifying radical contains a
    double or triple bond.


CLS 536/94
TXT Compounds under subclass 93 wherein an etherifying radical contains a
    benzene ring.


CLS 536/95
TXT Compounds under subclass 84 wherein the etherifying radical is a
    hydoxyalkyl radical.


CLS 536/96
TXT Compounds under subclass 95 wherein the hydroxyalkyl is hydroxyethyl.


CLS 536/97
TXT Compounds under subclass 84 wherein the etherifying radical is the
    carboxyalkyl radical or a salt thereof.


CLS 536/98
TXT Compounds under subclass 97 wherein the etherifying radical is the
    carboxymethyl radical or a salt thereof.


CLS 536/99
TXT Compounds under subclass 84 wherein the etherifying radical is an alkyl or
    cycloalkyl radical.


CLS 536/100
TXT Compounds under subclass 99 wherein the ehterifying radical is the ethyl
    radical.


CLS 536/101
TXT Compounds under subclass 56 which include metal.


CLS 536/102
TXT Compounds under subclass 1.1 which have amylose and amylopectin as their
    two main components, and derivatives of such compounds.

    (1)     Note.  Starches are heterogeneous in that the amylose and
    amylopectin occur in different ratios to each other.

    (2)     Note.  Starches yield dextrins upon extensive degradation and yield
    glucose upon complete hydrolysis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45,     for nitrogen containing derivatives of starch.


CLS 536/103
TXT Compounds under subclass 102 which are any of various gummy polysaccharides
    produced by thermal or acid degradation of starch, and derivatives of such
    compounds.

    (1)     Note.  Dextrins are carbohydrates, intermediate between starch and
    sugars. Degradation of dextrins yields maltose and glucose.

    (2)     Note.  Derivatives of dextrins which remain gummy polysaccharides
    are classified herein; however, sugars are not provided for here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46,     for nitrogen containing dextrin derivatives.


CLS 536/104
TXT Compounds under subclass 102 which result from a chemical reaction between
    starch, or a derivative thereof, and a reactant containing the functional
    group and derivatives of such compounds.



CLS 536/105
TXT Compounds under subclass 102 which result from reacting starch or a
    derivative thereof, with an oxidizing reagent, and derivatives of such
    compounds.


CLS 536/106
TXT Compounds under subclass 102 which result from reacting starch with a
    reagent having at least two functional groups which link together starch
    molecules, usually via ether or ester linkage between hydroxyls of said
    molecules.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for nitrogen containing cross-linked starch derivativess.

    107,    for starch esters that are not cross-linked.

    111,    forstarch ethers that are not cross- linked.


CLS 536/107
TXT Compounds under subclass 102 which result from the reaction of a hydroxyl
    group of a starch with an acid.

    (1)     Note.  The esterifying acid may be organic or inorganic.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for compounds formed when the
    sole acid function entering into the formation is a halogen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for nitrogen containing starch molecules connected via ester
    linkage.

    48,     for nitrogen containing starch esters.

    106,    for starch esters that are cross-linked.


CLS 536/108
TXT Compounds under subclass 107 which (1) additionally contain an ether
    moiety, or (2) contain at least two diverse ester moieties.

    (1)     Note.  The ether moiety may exist (1) independently of the ester
    moiety as in ehtyl starch acetate, (2) connection to the starch via an
    intervening ester linkage as in starch ethoxyacetate, or (3) by direct
    connection to the starch with the ester moiety connected to the ether
    moiety as in acetoxyethyl starch.


CLS 536/109
TXT Compounds under subclass 107 which include phosphorus or sulfer.


CLS 536/110
TXT Compounds under subclass 107 wherein the acid reactant contains a
    carboxylic acid group



CLS 536/111
TXT Compounds under subclass 102 having the general formula ROR', wherein RO-
    is the starch residue moiety and R' is an organic radical.

    (1)     Note.  Starch ethers are made by substituting an organic radical
    for the hydrogen atom of a portion of the hydroxyl groups of starch.

    (2)     Note.  The attached organic radical R' is referred to as the
    etherifying radical.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    47,     for nitrogen containing starch molecules connected via ether
    linkage.

    50,     for nitrogen containing starch ethers.

    106,    for starch ethers that are cross-linked.


CLS 536/112
TXT Compounds under subclass 1.1 which are high molecular weight
    polysaccharides containingD-glucose units linked predominately -D (16).

    (1)     Note.  Dextrans yield only glucose on hydrolysis but differ
    otherwise from starch and glycogen as in molecular structure, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Dextrans are actually a group of compounds differing
    according to the bacteria used to ferment the sugar.

    (3)     Note.  Controlled hydrolysis of native detran yields clinical
    dextran of lower molecular weight which is useful as a blood plasma
    substitute.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    51,     for nitrogen containing dextran derivatives.


CLS 536/113
TXT Compounds under subclass 112 which include iron.


CLS 536/114
TXT Compounds under subclass 1.1 which are exudations of plants produced to
    cover wounds and prevent attack by micro-organisms and are highly branched
    polysaccharides composed of two or more monosaccharides.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     for nitrogen containing gums.


CLS 536/115
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which result from the reaction of a hydroxyl
    group of a carbohydrate with an acid.

    (1)     Note.  The esterifying acid may be organic or inoraganic.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for compounds formed when the
    sole acid function entering into the formation is a halogen.


CLS 536/116
TXT Compounds under subclass 115 which additionally contain an ether moiety.

    (1)     Note.  Carbohydrate ethers are explained in the definition and
    notes for subclass 120.

    (2)     Note.  The ether moiety may exist (1) independently of the ester
    moiety as in ethyl sucrose acetate, (2) by connection to the carbohydrate
    via an intervening ester linkage as in sucrose ethoxyacetate, or (3) by
    direct connection to the carbohydrate with the ester moiety connected to
    the ether moiety as in acetoxyethyl sucrose.


CLS 536/117
TXT Compounds under subclass 115 which include phosphorus.


CLS 536/118
TXT Compounds under subclass 115 which include sulfur.


CLS 536/119
TXT Compounds under subclass 115 wherein the esterifying acid is carboxylic
    acid.


CLS 536/120
TXT Compounds under subclass 1.1 having the general formula ROR', wherein RO-
    is the carbohydrate residue moiety and R' is an organic radical.

    (1)     Note.  Carbohydrate ethers can be made by subsituting an organic
    radical for the hydrogen atom of a portion of the hydroxyl groups of a
    carbohydrate.

    (2)     Note.  The organic radical R' may also be a carbohydrate moiety.


CLS 536/121
TXT Compounds under subclass 1.1 which include metal.

    (1)     Note.  For the purpose of this subclass arsenic is considered to be
    a metal while silicon, selenium, and tellurium are not metals.


CLS 536/122
TXT Compounds under subclass 1.1 which include sulfur, fluorine, chlorine,
    bromine, iodine or astatine.


CLS 536/123
TXT Plural diverse saccharides containing (e.g., heteropolysaccarides, etc.):

    Products under subclass 1.1 which contain three or more sugar moieties, at
    least two of which are different.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are products referred to as
    conplex polysaccharides.


CLS 536/123.1
TXT Polysaccharides:
    Compounds under subclass 1.11 which are polymers containing a sugar ring as
    the monomeric unit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for polysaccharides that are gums (e.g., plant  exudates, etc.).

    123,    for heteropolysaccharides and complex saccharides.


CLS 536/123.12
TXT Glucans (e.g., pullulan, etc.):
    Compounds under subclass 123.1 which are polymers of D-glucopyranose.


CLS 536/123.13
TXT Disaccharides (e.g., maltose, sucrose, lactose, formaldehyde lactose,
    etc.):Compounds under subclass 123.1 which contain exactly two
    monosaccharides units covalently bonded to each other.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is sucrose:


CLS 536/124
TXT Processes:

    Processes under subclass 1.1 which are directed to the preparation,
    purification, recovery, stabilization, or treatment in any way of
    carbohydrates or derivatives of carbohydrates.


CLS 536/125
TXT Isomerization:

    Processes under subclass 124 wherein a carbohydrate is prepared by
    transformation or rearrangement of the elements of a starting compound
    without adding or taking away any element.


CLS 536/126
TXT Polymerization:

    Processes under subclass 124 wherein a carbohydrate is prepared by a
    reaction wherein two or more molecules of the same sugar combine.


CLS 536/127
TXT Purification or recovery:

    Process under subclass 124 which include separating a carbohydrate from
    impurities or from the reaction mixture.


CLS 536/128
TXT From plant material:

    Processes under subclass 127 wherein a carbohydrate is separated or
    recovered from plant material.




CLS 540/
TTL ORGANIC COMPOUNDS -- PART OF THE CLASS 532-570 SERIES

CLS 540/1
TXT Compounds under Class 532, subclass 1 which are heterocyclic carbon
    compounds containing a hetero ring having chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) or nitrogen as the only ring hetero atoms.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the destruction of hazardous or toxic waste.


CLS 540/2
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which additionally contain the
    cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system, which may contain double bonds
    between its ring members; i.e.,

    (1)     Note.  The phenanthrene portion of this tetracyclic ring system
    cannot be completely aromatic; it must be hydrogenated to some degree.

    (2)     Note.  In the indents hereunder which refer to positions, the
    numbers shown in the definition are employed.

    (3)     Note.  Although the following  structure types are properly
    classified elsewhere as pentacyclo ring systems and not here as
    cyclopentanohydrophenanthrenes, they have been crossed into appropriate
    cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene subclass(es) to make them available to the
    steroid examiners:



    (4)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    514,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 172+
    for a medical composition including a steroid compound with a hetero ring.

    552,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 502+ for nonheterocyclic
    cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene compounds.


CLS 540/3
TXT Compounds under subclass 2 which include aluminum or a metal having a
    specific gravity greater than four.

    (1)     Note.  Arsenic is considered a heavy metal.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/4
TXT Compounds under subclass 2 which contain boron or silicon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/5
TXT Compounds under subclass 2 wherein phosphorus is attached directly or
    indirectly to the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system by nonionic
    bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/6
TXT Compounds under subclass 2 which contain a spiro ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/7
TXT Compounds under subclass 6 which contain at least two discrete spiro atoms.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/8
TXT Compounds under subclass 7 wherein the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring
    system is part of a polycyclo ring system having at least five cyclos.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/9
TXT Compounds under subclass 8 which a nitrogen containing hetero ring is one
    of the cyclos of the polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/10
TXT Compounds under subclass 7 in which the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring
    system shares spiro atoms with two hetero rings, each of which contains two
    oxygens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/11
TXT Compounds under subclass 7 in which the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring
    system shares a spiro atom with a lactone ring;

    i.e., - - O -, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium), and is part of the ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provide for herein is:


CLS 540/12
TXT Compounds under subclass 7 wherein both rings which share a spiro atom
    contain at least two oxygens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provide for herein is:


CLS 540/13
TXT Compounds under subclass 12 in which nitrogen, sulfur, cyano or -C(=X)-,
    wherein X is chalcogen (i.e, oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium), is
    bonded directly to the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 540/14
TXT Compounds under subclass 12 in which halogen is attached directly or
    indirectly to the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system by acyclic
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 540/15
TXT Compounds under subclass 6 wherein the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring
    system is part of a polycyclo ring system having at least five cyclos.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/16
TXT Compounds under subclass 15 in which a hetero ring is one of the cyclos of
    the polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/17
TXT Compounds under subclass 16 wherein the hetero ring is five-membered,
    consisting of one oxygen and four carbons, and shares the spiro atom with a
    six-membered hetero ring which contains oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/18
TXT Processes under subclass 17 wherein the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene
    containing compound is separated from impurities or from the reaction
    medium.


CLS 540/19
TXT Compounds under subclass 17 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenim or tellurium) is bonded directly at the 12-position of the
    cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provide for herein is:


CLS 540/20
TXT Compounds under subclass 17 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) is bonded directly at the 11-position of the
    cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/21
TXT Compounds under subclass 20 wherein chalcogen (i.e, oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) is bonded directly at the 7-position of the
    cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/22
TXT Compounds under subclass 17 wherein halogen, cyano,nitrogen or sulfur is
    bonded directly to the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 540/23
TXT Compounds under subclass 16 in which the 17-position carbon of the
    cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system is the spiro atom.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/24
TXT Compounds under subclass 16 in which the hetero ring shares the 11, 12,
    13-positions of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system (i.e., C-ring
    bridge).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/25
TXT Compounds under subclass 16 in which the hetero ring is three-membered
    consisting of one oxygen and two carbons.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/26
TXT Compounds under subclass 25 wherein the three-membered hetero ring shares
    the 5, 6-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system (i.e,
    ortho-fused to the B-ring).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/27
TXT Compounds under subclass 16 wherein the hetero ring contains two chalcogens
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium) which are bonded directly at
    the 16- and 17-positions of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system
    (i.e., orth-fused to the D-ring).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/28
TXT Compounds under subclass 6 in which the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring
    system shares a spiro atom with a hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  an example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/29
TXT Compounds under subclass 28 in which the spiro hetero ring contains
    nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/30
TXT Compounds under subclass 28 in which the spiro hetero ring contains sulfur.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/31
TXT Compounds under subclass 28 in which the spiro hetero ring contains at
    least two oxygens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/32
TXT Compounds under subclass 31 in which the A ring of the
    cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system contains three alternating double
    bonds (i.e., is a benzene ring).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/33
TXT Compounds under subclass 31 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) is bonded directly to the spiro hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/34
TXT Compounds under subclass 31 in which the spiro atom is the 3-position of
    the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/35
TXT Compounds under subclass 34 in which halogen is bonded directly to the
    cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/36
TXT Compounds under subclass 34 in which nitrogen is attached directly or
    indirectly to the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system by nonionic
    bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/37
TXT Compounds under subclass 34 which contain at least two cyclic ketal rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/38
TXT Compounds under subclass 34 in which chalogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) is bonded directly at the 11-position of the
    cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/39
TXT Compounds under subclass 34 wherein there are no double bonds between any
    ring members of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.



    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/40
TXT Compounds under subclass 34 in which a carbon chain having carbon-to-carbon
    unsaturation is bonded directly at the 17-position of the
    cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/41
TXT Compounds under subclass 28 in which
    -C-O-, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium), is part of the spiro hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/42
TXT Compounds under subclass 41 in which sulfur is bonded directly to the
    cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/43
TXT Compounds under subclass 41 in which chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur
    selenium or tellurium) is bonded directly at the 11-position of the
    cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/44
TXT Compounds under subclass 41 in which chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium), halogen or nitrogen is attached indirectly to the
    cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 540/45
TXT Compounds under subclass 28 in which the spiro hetero ring is four-membered
    consisting of one oxygen and three carbons.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/46
TXT Compounds under subclass 28 wherein the spiro hetero ring is three-membered
    consisting of one oxygen and two carbons.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/47
TXT Compounds under subclass 2 in which the cylopentanohydrophenanthrene ring
    system is part of a polycyclo ring system having at least five cyclos.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/48
TXT Compounds under subclass 47 wherein a hetero ring is one of the cyclos of
    the polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/49
TXT Compounds under subclass 48 in which the hetero ring contains nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/50
TXT Compounds under subclass 49 in which the hetero ring contains at least two
    nitrogens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/51
TXT Compounds under subclass 50 in which the hetero ring is five-membered.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/52
TXT Compounds under subclass 51 wherein the hetero ring consists of two
    nitrogens and three carbons and is ortho-fused to the A ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 540/53
TXT Compounds under subclass 52 in which -C- wherein X is chalcogen (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium) is bonded directly at the
    17-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/54
TXT Compounds under subclass 51 wherein the hetero ring consists of two
    nitrogens and three carbons and is ortho-fused to the D ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/55
TXT Compounds under subclass 49 in which the hetero ring contains chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium) in addition to the nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/56
TXT Compounds under subclass 55 in which the hetero ring is five-membered.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/57
TXT Compounds under subclass 56 in which the hetero ring is ortho-fused to the
    A ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/58
TXT Compounds under subclass 49 wherein the hetero ring is five-membered.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/59
TXT Compounds under subclass 48 wherein the hetero ring contains sulfur.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/60
TXT Compounds under subclass 48 in which

    -  - O -  -, wherein X and Y may be the same or diverse chalogens (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium), is part of the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/61
TXT Compounds under subclass 48 wherein the hetero ring contains at least two
    oxygens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/62
TXT Compounds under subclass 61 wherein (a) at least three ring members of one
    cyclo are ring members of an additional cyclo or (b) a ring carbon is a
    member of three of the cyclos in the polycyclo ring system (e.g., bridged
    or peri-fused, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 540/63
TXT Compounds under subclass 61 wherein the hetero ring is ortho-fused to the D
    ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/64
TXT Compounds under subclass 63 wherein the polycyclo ring system contains at
    least six cyclos.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/65
TXT Compounds under subclass 63 wherein nitrogen or acyclic chalcogen (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium) is bonded directly to the hetero
    ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/66
TXT Compounds under subclass 63 in which the A ring of the
    cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system contains three alternating double
    bonds (i.e., is a benzene ring).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/67
TXT Compounds under subclass 63 in which sulfur or nitrogen is attached
    directly or indirectly to the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system by
    acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 540/68
TXT Compounds under subclass 63 in which halogen is attached indirectly to
    cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/69
TXT Compounds under subclass 63 in which halogen is bonded directly to the
    cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/70
TXT Compounds under subclass 69 in which oxygen is bonded directly at the
    11-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/71
TXT Compounds under subclass 63 in which oxygen is either (a) attached directly
    to the B ring or (b) attached indirectly to the A or B ring by acyclic
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:



CLS 540/72
TXT Compounds under subclass 48 in which

    -  - O -, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium), is part of the hetero ring (i.e., a lactone ring).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/73
TXT Compounds under subclass 72 wherein the lactone ring shares at least three
    ring members with an additional cyclo of the polycyclo ring system (i.e.,
    bridged).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/74
TXT Compounds under subclass 73 wherein the lactone ring shares the 11, 12,
    13-positions of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system (i.e., C ring
    bridge).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/75
TXT Compounds under subclass 72 wherein the lactone ring shares a ring carbon
    with two other cyclos of the polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/76
TXT Compounds under subclass 48 in which the hetero ring is three-membered
    consisting of one oxygen and two carbons.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/77
TXT Compounds under subclass 76 in which at least two oxirane rings are cyclos
    of the polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided is:


CLS 540/78
TXT Compounds under subclass 76 in which the hetero ring is ortho-fused to the
    A ring of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system at the
    1,2-positions.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/79
TXT Compounds under subclass 76 in which the hetero ring is ortho-fused to the
    A ring of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system at the
    4,5-positions.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/80
TXT Compounds under subclass 76 in which the hetero ring is ortho-fused to the
    B ring of the cylopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system at the r6-positions.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is.


CLS 540/81
TXT Compounds under subclass 76 in which the hetero ring is ortho-fused to the
    B ring of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system at the
    6,7-positions.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 540/82
TXT Compounds under subclass 76 in which the hetero ring is ortho-fused to the
    C ring of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system at the 11,
    12-positions.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/83
TXT Compounds under subclass 76 in which the hetero ring is ortho-fused to the
    D ring of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system at the 14,
    15-positions.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/84
TXT Compounds under subclass 76 in which the hetero ring is ortho-fused to the
    D ring of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system at the 16,
    17-positions.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/85
TXT Compounds under subclass in 84 which halogen is bonded directly to the
    cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided herein is:


CLS 540/86
TXT Compounds under subclass 84 wherein the A ring is completely saturated;
    i.e.,  contains nor shares any double bonds between its ring members.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/87
TXT Compounds under subclass 76 in which the hetero ring is ortho-fused to the
    C ring of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system at the
    9,11-positions.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/88
TXT Compounds under subclass in 87 which halgoen is bonded directly to the
    cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/89
TXT Compounds under subclass 87 in which - C -, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium), is bonded directly to the
    cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/90
TXT Compounds under subclass 48 wherein the hetero ring shares at least three
    ring members with one other cyclo of the polycyclo ring system (i.e.,
    bridged).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/91
TXT Compounds under subclass 90 wherein the bridge consists of oxygen and
    carbon and links the 6 - and 10-positions of the
    cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/92
TXT Compounds under subclass 90 wherein the bridge consists of oxygen and
    carbon links the 11- and 13-positions of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene
    ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/93
TXT Compounds under subclass 48 wherein the hetero ring shares a ring carbon
    with two other cyclos of the polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/94
TXT Compounds under subclass 2 in which a hetero ring is attached directly to
    the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/95
TXT Compounds under subclass 94 wherein the hetero ring contains nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/96
TXT Compounds under subclass 95 wherein at least two nitrogens containing
    hetero rings are bonded directly to the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring
    system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/97
TXT Compounds under subclass 95 in which the hetero ring is bonded directly at
    the 3-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/98
TXT Compounds under subclass 97 in which the A ring of the
    cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system contains three alternating double
    bonds (i.e., is a benzene ring).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/99
TXT Compounds under subclass 97 in which halogen is bonded directly to the
    cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/100
TXT Compounds under subclass 94 in which the hetero ring contains at least two
    chalogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/101
TXT Compounds under subclass 100 wherein both the hetero ring and acyclic
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium) are bonded directly
    at the 17-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/102
TXT Compounds under subclass 94 in which

    -  - O -, wherein is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium), is part of the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/103
TXT Compounds under subclass 102 in which

    - CN, -  -, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium), or additional chalcogen is bonded directly to the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 540/104
TXT Compounds under subclass 102 in which nitrogen or sulfur is attached
    directly or indirectly  to the  cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system
    by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/105
TXT Compounds under subclass 102 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) is bonded  directly at the 14-position of the
    cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system or the D ring of the
    cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system contains a double bond.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 540/106
TXT Compounds under subclass 2 wherein nitrogen is attached directly to the
    cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/107
TXT Compounds under subclass 2 in which a nitrogen containing hetero ring is
    attached indirectly to the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system by
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/108
TXT Compounds under subclass 107 wherein the hetero ring is five-membered and
    contains at least two hetero atoms.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/109
TXT Compounds under subclass 107 wherein the substituent at the 17-position of
    the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system contains the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/110
TXT Compounds under subclass 108 in which the

    hetero ring is bonded directly to a - C - group, wherein X is chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/111
TXT Compounds under subclass 109 in which - C -, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium), is bonded directly at the
    17-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/112
TXT Compounds under subclass 109 wherein nitrogen or chalcogen (i.e, oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium or tellurium) is in the chain between the hetero ring and
    cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 540/113
TXT Compounds under subclass 107 in which chalogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) is in the chain between the hetero ring and the
    cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/114
TXT Compounds under subclass 2 in which an oxygen containing hetero ring is
    attached indirectly to the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system by
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/115
TXT Compounds under subclass 114 wherein

    -  - O -, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium), is part of the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/116
TXT Compounds under subclass 114 wherein the oxygen containing hetero ring
    contains an additional hetero atom.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/117
TXT Compounds under subclass 114 in which the A ring of the
    cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system contains three alternating double
    bonds (i.e., is a benzene ring).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/118
TXT Compounds under subclass 114 wherein the hetero ring is bonded directly to
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium), which chalcogen is
    also bonded directly to the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/119
TXT Compounds under subclass 118 in which the chalcogen is bonded directly at
    the 17-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/120
TXT Compounds under subclass 2 in which chalcogen (i.e., oxygen. sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the
    cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/121
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 characterized by the following basic structure

    which may contain double bonds between ring members and wherein X is
    nitrogen or carbon, at least one X is nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/122
TXT Compounds under subclass 121 which have the following basic structure
    (phthalocyanine ring system) wherein substitution may be  made for hydrogen
       only:

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121,    for hydrogenated phthalocyanines.


CLS 540/123
TXT Compounds under subclass 122 wherein an additional hetero ring is attached
    directly or indirectly to the phthalocyanine ring system by nonionic
    bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:

    poly (copper phthalocyanine)

    wherein CuPc is a copper phthalocyanine radical.


CLS 540/124
TXT Compounds under subclass 123 in which the hetero ring is six-membered and
    contains nitrogen as a ring member.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:

    wherein CuPc is a copper phthalocyanine radical.


CLS 540/125
TXT Compounds under subclass 124 wherein the hetero ring contains at least two
    hetero atoms.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:

    wherein CuPc is a copper phthalocyanine radical.


CLS 540/126
TXT Compounds under subclass 125 in which the hetero ring consists of three
    nitrogens and three carbons.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:

    wherein CuPc is a copper phthalocyanine radical.


CLS 540/127
TXT Compounds under subclass 123 in which the hetero ring is five-membered and
    has plural hetero atoms, at least one of which is nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:

    wherein NiPc is a nickel phthalocyanine radical.


CLS 540/128
TXT Compounds under subclass 122 which contain boron, germanium, phosphorus or
    silicon.


CLS 540/129
TXT Compounds under subclass 122 wherein a
    -  - group, in which X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium), is bonded directly to a ring carbon of the phthalocyanine ring
    system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:

    wherein CuPc is a copper phthalocyanine radical.


CLS 540/130
TXT Compounds under subclass 122 wherein a
    -  - group, in which X is a chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium), is attached indirectly to a ring carbon of the phthalocyanine
    ring system by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:

    wherein CuPc is a copper phthalocyanine radical.


CLS 540/131
TXT Compounds under subclass 122 wherein
    - -

            is attached directly to a ring carbon of the phthalocyanine ring
    system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided herein is:

    wherein CoPc is a cobalt phthalocyanine radical.


CLS 540/132
TXT Compounds under subclass 131 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to the - - group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:

    wherein CuPc is a copper phthalocyanine radical.


CLS 540/133
TXT Compounds under subclass 131 where nitrogen is bonded directly to the - -
    group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:

    wherein CuPc is a copper phthalocyanine radical.


CLS 540/134
TXT Compounds under subclass 133 wherein the sulfonyl containing substituent
    contains an additional nitrogen atom.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:

    wherein NiPc is a nickel phthalocyanine radical.


CLS 540/135
TXT Compounds under subclass 122 wherein nitrogen is attached indirectly to
    ring carbon of the phthalocyanine ring system by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:

    wherein CuPc is a copper phthalocyanine radical.


CLS 540/136
TXT Compounds under subclass 122 wherein halogen (i.e., fluorine, chlorine,
    bromine, iodine, or astatine) is bonded directly ring carbon of the
    phthalocyanine ring system.


CLS 540/137
TXT Compounds under subclass 136 wherein at least eight halogen (i.e.,
    fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine, or astatine) atoms are bonded directly
    to ring carbons of the phthalocyanine ring system.


CLS 540/138
TXT Processes under subclass 136 for halogenating a ring carbon of the
    phthalocyanine ring system.


CLS 540/139
TXT Compounds under subclass 122 wherein the phthalocyanine ring system is
    bonded to a metal.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:

    Magnesium phthalocyanine



CLS 540/140
TXT Compounds under subclass 139 wherein the metal is aluminum or a metal
    having a specific gravity greater than 4.


CLS 540/141
TXT Compounds under subclass 140 which are in a specified crystalline form, or
    processes for milling heavy metal or aluminum containing phthalocyanines.

    (1)     Note.  The milling processes usually are for the purpose of
    obtaining certain crystalline forms.


CLS 540/142
TXT Processes under subclass 140 which include the formation of the
    phthalocyanine ring system.


CLS 540/143
TXT Processes under subclass 142 wherein the phthalocyanine ring system is
    prepared from a reactant which contains plural cyano groups.


CLS 540/144
TXT Processes under subclass 142 wherein the phthalocyanine ring system is
    prepared from a reactant which contains plural carbonyl groups.


CLS 540/145
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which have the following basic structure, which
    may contain double bonds between ring members:

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:





CLS 540/200
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 in which the hetero ring is four-membered,
    contains nitrogen and has chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium) double bonded directly to a ring carbon which is adjacent to the
    ring nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/201
TXT Compounds under subclass 200 which include a metal having a specific
    gravity greater than four.

    (1)     Note.  Arsenic is considered a heavy metal.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/202
TXT Compounds under subclass 200 wherein the hetero ring contains at least two
    hetero atoms.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/203
TXT Compounds under subclass 200 wherein the hetero ring is one of the cyclos
    of a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/204
TXT Compounds under subclass 203 in which the ring nitrogen is shared by a ring
    containing at least seven members.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/205
TXT Compounds under subclass 203 wherein the ring nitrogen is shared by a
    six-membered ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/214
TXT Compounds under subclass 205 wherein the six-membered ring contains sulfur.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/215
TXT Compounds under subclass 214 in which the polycyclo ring system has the
    following basic structure; which may contain double bonds between ring
    members:

    (1)     Note.  The Ring Index uses a different system for numbering the
    ring members.  However, in the indents hereunder which refer to positions,
    the numbers shown in the definition are employed.


CLS 540/216
TXT Compounds under subclass 215 having a polycyclo ring system which contains
    at least three cyclos, two of which are the cepham or cephem ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/217
TXT Compounds under subclass 215 in which there is a double bond between the
    carbon atoms in the 2 - and 3 - positions of the ring system; i.e.,


CLS 540/218
TXT Processes under subclass 215 in which a cepham or cephem ring system is
    produced by the enlargement of the corresponding thiazole containing ring
    system: i.e.,

    in which the rings may contain double bonds.


CLS 540/219
TXT Compounds under subclass 215 which have the following structure:

    or salts thereof.


CLS 540/220
TXT Processes under subclass 215 wherein the cepham or cephem containing
    compound is separated from impurities or from the reaction medium.


CLS 540/221
TXT Compounds under subclass 215 wherein both hydrogen atoms bonded to the
    carbon atom in the 7-position of the cepham or cephem ring system have been
    replaced by substituents.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/222
TXT Compounds under subclass 215 which contain an additional hetero ring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216,    for compounds in which a heterocyclic ring is fused or bridged to
    the cepham or cephem ring system.


CLS 540/223
TXT Compounds under subclass 222 in which a substituent on either the 2 - or 4
    - carbon atom of the cepham or cephem ring system contains or consists of a
    hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/224
TXT Compounds under subclass 222 in which a substituent on the 3-position
    substituent contains a pyridine ring (e.g., quinoline, thienopyridine,
    lutidines, etc.).


CLS 540/225
TXT Compounds under subclass 224 in which a substituent on the 7-position of
    the cepham or cephem ring system contains or consists of a hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:

    wherein X is an anion.


CLS 540/226
TXT Compounds under subclass 22 which have sulfur or a sulfur containing group
    attached to the 3-position of the cepham or cephem ring system.


CLS 540/227
TXT Compounds under subclass 226 in which a sustituent on the 7-position of the
    cepham or cephem ring system contains or consists of a hetero ring.


CLS 540/228
TXT Compounds under subclass 22 in which have -alkyl, -alkyl-OH,
    -alkyl-O-alkyl, or

    -alkyl-O--alkyl bonded directly at the 3-position of the cepham or cephem
    ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of the type of compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/229
TXT Compounds under subclass 215 in which include sulfur bonded directly or
    indirectly to the cepham or cephem ring system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for salts containing sulfur, such as
    that formed by reacting Cephalosporin C with sodium thiosulfate, in
    addition to compounds in which sulfur is attached by nonionic bonding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226,    for compounds which contain a cepham or cephem ring system having a
    sulfur containing substituent and a hetero ring containing substituent.


CLS 540/230
TXT Compounds under subclass 215 which have -alkyl, -alkyl-OH, -alkyl-O-alkyl,
    or

    -alkyl-O--alkyl bonded directly to the 3-position of the cepham or cephem
    ring system.


CLS 540/300
TXT Compounds under subclass 205 wherein the six-membered ring contains oxygen.


CLS 540/301
TXT Compounds under subclass 300 in which the polycyclo ring system has the
    following basic structure, which may contain double bonds between ring
    members:

    (1)     Note.  The above ring system may be referred to as
    1-oxa-5-aza-bicyclo [4.2.0] octane, 5-oxa-1-aza-bicyclo [4.20] octane, etc.
     However, compounds having ring systems with this configuration are
    classified in this subclass regardless how they are named.


CLS 540/302
TXT Compounds under subclass 203 wherein the ring nitrogen is shared by a
    five-membered ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for  herein is:


CLS 540/303
TXT Compounds under subclass 302 wherein the five-membered ring contains an
    additional hetero atom.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/304
TXT Compounds under subclass 303 in which the polycylo ring system has the
    following basic structure, which may contain double bonds between ring
    members:

    (1)     Note.  The Ring Index uses a different system for numbering the
    ring members.  However, in this and indented subclasses which refer to
    positions, the numbers shown in the definition are employed.

    (2)     Note.  This ring system is referred to as penam or penem (when
    unsaturated).

    (3)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 114
    and 405+ for a medical composition including a penicillin.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 43+ for
    processes of producing penicillin by use of micro-organisms, tissue cell
    culture or enzymes.

    514,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 192+
    for a medical composition including a penicillin.


CLS 540/305
TXT Compounds under subclass 304 in which the bicyclo ring system is part of a
    polycyclo ring system containing at least three cyclos.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/306
TXT Compound under subclass 304 in which at least two of the bicyclo ring
    systems are attached directly or indirectly to each other by nonionic
    bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/307
TXT Compounds under subclass 304 which contain a spiro ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/308
TXT Compounds under subclass 304 wherein the substituent at the 6-position of
    the bicyclo ring system contains phosphorus which is attached directly or
    indirectly to the ring system by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/309
TXT Compounds under subclass 304 in which nitrogen containing hetero ring is
    attached directly at the 3-position of the bicyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein  is:


CLS 540/310
TXT Compounds under subclass 304 in which - C -, wherein X is chalogen (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium), is bonded directly at the
    3-position of the bicyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/311
TXT Compounds under subclass 310 in which nitrogen or hydrogen is bonded
    directly to

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/312
TXT Compounds under subclass 310 in which nitrogen is bonded directly at the
    6-position of the bicyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  6-APA and esters thereof are provided for in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/313
TXT Compounds under subclass 312 wherein the substituent at the 2-position of
    the bicyclo ring system contains chalcogen, nitrogen or halogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/314
TXT Compounds under subclass 312 in which
    -  -, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e, oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium),
    is single bonded directly to the nitrogen at the 6-position; i.e.,- - N

    (1)     Note.  Penicillin K, F, dihydro, F, S, and O are provided for in
    this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/315
TXT Processes under subclass 314 which utilize penam containing compounds.


CLS 540/316
TXT Processes under subclass 315 for the

    formation of - - N, group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium).


CLS 540/317
TXT Processes under subclass 316 utilizing a boron, silicon or phosphorus
    containing reactant.


CLS 540/318
TXT Processes under subclass 315 whereby the

    3-position -  - X - group, wherein the X's may be the same or diverse
    chalcogens, is esterified.


CLS 540/319
TXT Processes under subclass 315 whereby the penam compound undergoes oxidation
    of sulfur, epimerization, de-esterification, reduction or alkoxyation at
    the 6-position.


CLS 540/320
TXT Processes under subclass 315 for the formation of solvate or anhydrous
    forms, or the formation of special crystalline forms.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are those processes which effect (a) the
    formation of hydrate adducts and (b) the modification from the usual
    crystalline form of a penam compound to another crystalline form.


CLS 540/321
TXT Processes under subclass 315 whereby amine salts or penam compounds are
    converted into metal salts.


CLS 540/322
TXT Process under subclass 315 whereby the penam compound is separated from
    impurities or from the reaction mixture in an atmosphere which utilizes a
    solid adsorbant.


CLS 540/323
TXT Process under subclass 315 whereby a base salt of penam compound is formed.

    (1)     Note.  The penam compound represents the acidic moiety in the salt
    formation; therefore, included herein are those processes directed to the
    preparation of penicillin salts, such as, the triethyl amine salt of
    penicllin G, the sodium salt of penicillin X, etc.


CLS 540/324
TXT Processes under subclass 315 wherein a solids extracted from solution.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are those processes wherein penicillin as
    recovered from aqueous liquors.


CLS 540/325
TXT Compounds under subclass 314 in which the nitrogen at the 6-position is
    part of a hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Hetacillin and Hetaamoxicillin are provided for in this
    subclass.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/326
TXT Compounds under subclass 314 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium

    or tellurium), -  - , wherein X is chalcogen, or additional nitrogen is
    bonded directly to the

    -  - group which is bonded directly to the 6-position  nitrogen; i.e.,

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein  is:


CLS 540/327
TXT Compounds under subclass 314 wherein a hetero ring or a polycylo ring
    system which contains a hetero ring as one of the cyclos is bonded directly
    to the

    -  - group.

    (1)     Note.  Oxacillin, Floxacillin, Dicloxacillin, Cloxacillin and
    Flucloxacillin are provided for in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 540/328
TXT Compounds under subclass 314 wherein a nitrogen containing hetero ring or a
    polycyclo ring system having a nitrogen containing ring as one of the
    cyclos is attached by carbon or an acyclic carbon chain to the -  - group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/329
TXT Compounds under subclass 314 in which a polycyclo heterocyclic ring system
    is in the 6-position substituent.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 540/330
TXT Compounds under subclass 329 wherein the polycyclo ring system is attached
    directly

    to a -  - NH - group, which group is between the polycyclo ring system and
    the penam ring system; X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium) and substitution may be made for hydrogen only.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    333,    for compounds which contain monocyclic hetero rings in the
    6-position substituent.


CLS 540/331
TXT Compounds under subclass 314 in which acyclic nitrogen or azide is in the
    6-position substituent attached indirectly the the -  - group by acyclic
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Metampicillin, Azidorillin  and Amoxicillin are provided for
    in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:



CLS 540/332
TXT Compounds under subclass 331 in which
    - C - wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium),
    is in the 6-position substituent bonded directly to the nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/333
TXT Compounds under subclass 332 in which a hetero ring is in the 6-position
    substituent bonded directly to the -  - group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    330,    for compounds which contain polycyclo heterocyclic rings in the
    6-position substituent.


CLS 540/334
TXT Compounds under subclass 332 in which chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium), additional nitrogen or an

    additional -  - , wherein X is chalcogen, is in the 6-position substituent
    bonded

    (i.e., - X -  -  - , -  -  -  or


    -  -  -  - indirect the to
    -  -  - which is bonded directly at the

    6- position.)

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 540/335
TXT Compounds under subclass 331 wherein an  additional acyclic nitrogen or
    acyclic chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium) is in the
    6-position substituent attached indirectly to the -  - group by nonionic
    bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/336
TXT Compounds under subclass 331 wherein the

    - C - group, an unsubstituted benzene ring and the acyclic nitrogen, as a -
    NH2 group, are all bonded directly to the same carbon atom.

    (1)     Note.  Ampicillin and Pivampicillin are provided for in this
    subclass.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for here is:



CLS 540/337
TXT Compounds under subclass 314 which contain a cycloaliphatic ring in the
    6-position substituent.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/338
TXT Compounds under subclass 314 which contain a benzene ring or a hetero ring
    in the 6-position substituent.

    (1)     Note.  Carbenicillin is provided for in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/339
TXT Compounds under subclass 338 wherein the

    ring is bonded directly to the -   - group.

    (1)     Note.  Nafcillin and Methicillin are provided for in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/340
TXT Compounds under subclass 338 wherein the

    chain between the ring and the -  - group

    is a - - X - group, wherein the X's may be the same or diverse chalcogens,
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/341
TXT Compounds under subclass 338 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) is in the chain between the ring and the -  - group.

    (1)     Note.  Penicillin V, Phenethicillin and Propicillin are provided
    for in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/342
TXT Compounds under subclass 338 wherein the ring is bonded directly to a
    hydrocarbyl chain which chain is bonded directly to the -- group.

    (1)     Note.  Penicillin G, Penicillin X, and Penamecillin are provided
    for in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/343
TXT Compounds under subclass 342 which are amine addition salts of the
    3-position

    -COOH group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/344
TXT Compounds under subclass 343 wherein a nitrogen containing hetero ring is
    in the cation; i.e., the penam compound is in the acid moiety, and the
    nitrogen containing hetero ring is in the amine moiety.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/345
TXT Compounds under subclass 343 wherein at least two nitrogens are in the
    cation; the penam compound is in the anion.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/346
TXT Processes under subclass 312 for producing, purifying or recovering a
    compound which contains the 1-thia-4aza-bicyclo[3.2.0]-

    heptane ring system (penam) having -  - bonded directly at the 3-position
    and nitrogen bonded directly at the 6-position.


CLS 540/347
TXT Compounds under subclass 303 containing a bicyclo ring system having the
    following basic structure, which may contain double bonds between ring
    members:

    (1)     Note. The above ring system may be referred to as
    1-oxa-4aza-bicyclo [3.2.0]heptane, 4-oxa-1-aza-bicyclo [3.2.0]heptane, etc.
     However, compounds having ring systems with this configuration are
    classified in this and indented subclasses regardless how they are named.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 540/348
TXT Compounds under subclass 347 in which acyclic carbon is double bonded
    directly at the 2-position of the bicyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 540/349
TXT Compounds under subclass 348 in which chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) is attached directly by a single bond to the carbon
    or to an acyclic carbon chain which contains the carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/350
TXT Compounds under subclass 302 in which the ring system has the following
    basic structure, which may contain double bonds between ring members, and
    has sulfur bonded directly at the 2-position:

    (1)     Note.  The above ring system may be referred to as
    4-aza-bicyclo[3.2.0]- heptane, 1-aza-bicyclo[3.2.0]-heptane, etc.  However,
    compounds having ring systems with this configuration are classified in
    this and indented subclasses regardless how they are named.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/351
TXT Compounds under subclass 350 which have the following structure, or salts
    thereof:


CLS 540/352
TXT Compounds under subclass 203 wherein one of the cyclos of the polycyclo
    ring system is a five-membered hetero ring consisting of one nitrogen, one
    sulfur and three carbons.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/353
TXT Compounds under subclass 352 which contain a double bond between ring
    members of the five-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/354
TXT Compounds under subclass 200 wherein additional chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium or tellurium) is bonded directly to the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided herein is:


CLS 540/355
TXT Compounds under subclass 354 wherein the additional chalcogen is bonded
    directly to the ring nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/356
TXT Compounds under subclass 354 wherein the additional chalcogen is double
    bonded directly to the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/357
TXT Compounds under subclass 354 in which
    -  - wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium)
    is bonded directly to the additional chalcogem; i.e.,

    -X-- bonded directly to the four-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/358
TXT Compounds under subclass 354 wherein the additional chalcogen is sulfur
    which also is bonded directly to chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium
    or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/359
TXT Compounds under subclass 358 in which the sulfur is double bonded directly
    to the additional chalcogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/360
TXT Compounds under subclass 354 wherein an additional carbon is bonded
    directly to the addition chalcogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/361
TXT Compounds under subclass 200 wherein halogen is attached directly at the
    4-position of the hetero ring by nonionic boinding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/362
TXT Compounds under subclass 200 in which the 4-position of the hetero ring is
    either unsubstituted or substituted by alkyl only.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/363
TXT Compounds under subclass 362 in which nitrogen is bonded directly at the
    3-position of the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/364
TXT Compounds under subclass 200 in which nitrogen is bonded directly at the
    3-position of the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/450
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 wherein the hetero ring contains at least eight
    members and has nitrogen and carbon as ring members.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/451
TXT Compounds under subclass 450 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) is double bonded directly to a carbon of the hetero
    ring which is adjacent to the nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/452
TXT Compounds under subclass 451 which include a metal having a specific
    gravity greater than four, aluminum, boron or silicon.

    (1)     Note.  Arsenic is considered a metal for purposes of this subclass.


CLS 540/453
TXT Compounds under subclass 451 which include a spiro ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/454
TXT Compounds under subclass 451 wherein the hetero ring contains chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/455
TXT Compounds under subclass 454 in which the hetero ring is one of the cyclos
    of a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/456
TXT Compounds under subclass 455 wherein (a) at least three members of one
    cyclo are members of an additional cyclo in the polycyclo ring system, or
    (b) one ring member is a member of three of the cyclos in the polycyclo
    ring system (e.g., bridged, peri-fused, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/457
TXT Compounds under subclass 456 wherein the polycyclo ring system contains a
    five-membered cyclo which consists of four carbons and one oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/458
TXT Compounds under subclass 457 in which the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly four rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/459
TXT Compounds under subclass 458 in which nitrogen, sulfur or halogen is
    attached directly to the tetracyclo ring system by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/460
TXT Compounds under subclass 451 in which the hetero ring contains at least two
    nitrogens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/461
TXT Compounds under subclass 451 wherein the hetero ring is one of the cyclos
    of a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 540/462
TXT Compounds under subclass 461 wherein one of the cyclos of the polycyclo
    ring system is three-membered consisting of one oxygen and two carbons.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/463
TXT Compounds under subclass 451 wherein nitrogen or additional chalcogen is
    attached directly to the hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/464
TXT Processes under subclass 451 which utilize oximes (=NOH), oxime salts
    (=NO-cation), hedroxylamines (-N-OH), hydroxylamine salts (-N-O-cation) or
    nitrosating agents to form the lactam ring.


CLS 540/465
TXT Compounds under subclass 450 which include aluminum or a metal having a
    specific gravity greater that four.

    (1)     Note.  Arsenic is considered a metal for purposes of this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/466
TXT Compounds under subclass 450 which include a spiro ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/467
TXT Compounds under subclass 450 in which the hetero ring contains chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/468
TXT Compounds under subclass 467 in which the hetero ring is one of the cyclos
    of a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/469
TXT Compounds under subclass 468 in which the hetero ring contains at least two
    nitrogens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/470
TXT Compounds under subclass 450 in which the hetero ring contains at least two
    nitrogens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/471
TXT Compounds under subclass 470 in which the hetero ring is one of the cyclos
    of a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/472
TXT Compounds under subclass 471 wherein (a) at least three members of one
    cycol in the polycyclo ring system, or (b) one ring member is a member of
    three of the cyclos in the polycyclo ring system (e.g., bridged,
    perl-fused, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/473
TXT Compounds under subclass 471 in which the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly two rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/474
TXT Compounds under subclass 470 in which the hetero ring contains at least
    three nitrogens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/475
TXT Compounds under subclass 474 in which nitro (i.e., -NO2) is bonded directly
    to a ring nitrogen of the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes HMX (1,3,5,7-tetranitro-1,3,5,7,-
    tetraazacycloctane:


CLS 540/476
TXT Compounds under subclass 450 in which the hetero ring is one of the cyclos
    of a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/477
TXT Compounds under subclass 476 wherein (a) at least three members of one
    cyclo are members of an additional cyclo in the polycyclo ring system, or
    (b) one ring member is a member of three of the cyclos in the polycycol
    ring system (e.g., bridged, peri-fused, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 540/478
TXT Compounds under subclass 477 which contain an additional polycyclo ring
    system having at least two nitrogens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/479
TXT Compounds under subclass 476 in which the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly three rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/480
TXT Compounds under subclass 450 wherein an additional hetero ring is attached
    directly or indirectly to the hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/481
TXT Compounds under subclass 480 in which the additional hetero ring is
    six-membered and contains nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/482
TXT Compounds under subclass 450 in which nitrogen or chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium or tellurium) is attached directly to the hetero ring by
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 540/483
TXT Compounds under subclass 450 in which at least two nitrogens are attached
    indirectly to the hetero ring by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/484
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 wherein the hetero ring contains seven members
    and has nitrogen and carbon as ring members.


CLS 540/485
TXT Compounds under subclass 484 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) is double bonded directly to one of the ring carbons
    of the hetero ring which is adjacent to the ring nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/486
TXT Compounds under subclass 485 which contain aluminum or a metal having a
    specific gravity greater than four.

    (1)     Note.  Arsenic is considered a metal for the purposes of this
    subclass.


CLS 540/487
TXT Compounds under subclass 485 in which phosphorus or silicon is attached
    directly or indirectly to the hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 540/488
TXT Compounds under subclass 485 in which the hetero ring contains chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or telluriun).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/489
TXT Compounds under subclass 488 in which the hetero ring contains at least two
    nitrogens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/490
TXT Compounds under subclass 488 wherein the hetero ring is in a polycyclo ring
    system which contains exactly two cyclos.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/491
TXT Compounds under subclass 490 wherein the chalcogen and the nitrogen are in
    the 1,5-positions of the bicyclo ring system; i.e.,

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 540/492
TXT Compounds under subclass 485 in which the hetero ring contains at least two
    nitrogens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 540/493
TXT Compounds under subclass 492 wherein the hetero ring is in a polycyclo ring
    system which contains exactly four cyclos.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/494
TXT Compounds under subclass 493 wherein a nitrogen of the hetero ring is a
    member of two of the cyclos in the tetracyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/495
TXT Compounds under subclass 492 wherein the hetero ring is in a polycyco ring
    system which contains exactly three cyclos.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/496
TXT Compounds under subclass 495 wherein a nitrogen of the hetero ring is a
    member of an additional cyclo the the tricyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/497
TXT Compounds under subclass 496 in which the additional cyclo of the tricyclo
    ring system contains an additional hetero atom.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/498
TXT Compounds under subclass 497 in which the additional cyclo is five-membered
    and consists of nitrogen and carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/499
TXT Compounds under subclass 498 wherein the additional hetero ring consists of
    three nitrogens and two carbons.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/500
TXT Compounds under subclass 492 wherein the hetero ring is in a polycylo ring
    system which contains exactly two cyclos.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/501
TXT Compounds under subclass 500 in which the hetero ring contains at least
    three nitrogen atoms.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/502
TXT Compounds under subclass 500 wherein the other cyclo of the bicyclo ring
    system contains a hetero atom.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/503
TXT Compounds under subclass 502 wherein the other cyclo of the bicyclo ring
    system contains chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/504
TXT Compounds under subclass 500 wherein the bicyclo ring system has the
    following structure, which may contain double bonds between its members:

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/505
TXT Compounds under subclass 504 wherein the chalcogen double bonded directly
    to the hetero ring is sulfur.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/506
TXT Compounds under subclass 504 wherein an additional chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium or tellurium) is bonded directly to a ring carbon of the
    hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/507
TXT Compounds under subclass 506 wherein the additional chalcogen is bonded
    directly at the 3-position of the bicyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/508
TXT Compounds under subclass 507 in which

    nitrogen or -  -, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur selenium or
    tellurium), is in the 3-position substituent and attached indirectly to the
    hetero ring by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/509
TXT Compounds under subclass 504 in which acyclic nitrogen is bonded directly
    to the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/510
TXT Compounds under subclass 504 in which
    - C - wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium),
    is bonded directly to the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/511
TXT Compounds under subclass 504 in which halogen is bonded directly to the
    hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/512
TXT Compounds under subclass 504 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) is attached indirectly to a nitrogen of the hetero
    ring by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of  compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/513
TXT Compounds under subclass 504 in which

    sulfur, -  - , wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium), or nitrogen, other than as nitro or nitroso (-NO2 or -NO) is
    bonded directly to the carbocyclic ring of the bicyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided here herein are:


CLS 540/514
TXT Compounds under subclass 504 wherein the 1-position substituent of the
    bicyclo ring system contains nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.   An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/515
TXT Processes under subclass 504 whereby benzophenones or imine derivative
    thereof are cyclized to form the bicyclo ring system.


CLS 540/516
TXT Processes under subclass 504 whereby the compound containing the bicyclo
    ring system is prepared from a compound containing a different hetero ring.


CLS 540/517
TXT Compounds under subclass 500 wherein the bicyclo ring system has the
    following structure, which may contain double bonds between its members:

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/518
TXT Compounds under subclass 517 wherein an additional chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium or tellurium) is double donded directly to a ring carbon
    of the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/519
TXT Compounds under subclass 485 wherein the hetero ring is one of the cyclos
    of a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/520
TXT Compounds under subclass 519 wherein (a) at least three members of one
    cyclone are members of an additional cyclone in the polycyclo ring system
    or (b) one ring member is a member of three of the cyclos in the polycyclo
    ring system (e.g., bridged, peri-fused, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 540/521
TXT Compounds under subclass 519 wherein the polycyclo ring system contains at
    least two hetero atoms.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/522
TXT Compounds under subclass 519 in which the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly three rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/523
TXT Compounds under subclass 519 in which the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly two rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/524
TXT Compounds under subclass 485 which contain at least two hetero rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/525
TXT Compounds under subclass 524 which contains at least two seven-membered
    hetero rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/526
TXT Compounds under subclass 485 wherein additional chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium or tellurium) is bonded directly to the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/527
TXT Compounds under subclass 485 in which nitrogen is bonded directly to the
    hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/528
TXT Compounds under subclass 527 wherein the nitrogen is bonded additionally
    only to hydrogen, i.e., -NH2.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/529
TXT Compounds under subclass 485 in which
    - C - where X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium),
    is bonded directly to the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:



CLS 540/530
TXT Compounds under subclass 485 wherein halogen is bonded directly to the
    hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/531
TXT Compounds under subclass 485 in which nitrogen or chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the hetero ring by
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/532
TXT Processes under subclass 485 whereby the compound containing the
    seven-membered hetero ring is prepared from a heterocyclic compounds.


CLS 540/533
TXT Processes under subclass 532 wherein the hetero ring in the heterocyclic
    reactant is

    a lactam; i.e., contains -  - NH - as part of the ring, wherein X is
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, selenium or telluriun) and substitution may be
    made for the hydrogen only.


CLS 540/534
TXT Processes under subclass 485 whereby the compound containing the
    seven-membered hetero ring is prepared from a compound containing a
    cycloaliphatic ring.


CLS 540/535
TXT Processes under subclass 534 wherein the reactant is a cyclic oxime.


CLS 540/536
TXT Processes under subclass 535 wherein the reaction involves a rearrangement
    which occurs in a gaseous phase.


CLS 540/537
TXT Processes under 534 wherein acyclic

    -  - X - , wherein the X's are the same or diverse chalcogens (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium), is attached directly to the
    cycloaliphatic ring of the reactant by nonionic bonding.


CLS 540/538
TXT Processes under subclass 485 whereby the hetero ring is formed by
    cyclization.


CLS 540/539
TXT Processes under subclass 538 wherein a reactant contains a cyano group
    (i.e., -CN).


CLS 540/540
TXT Processes under subclass 485 wherein the lactam is separated from
    impurities or from the reaction medium.


CLS 540/541
TXT Compounds under subclass 484 which contain boron or a metal having a
    specific gravity greater than four.

    (1)     Note.  Arsenic is considered a metal for purposes of this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for  herein is:



CLS 540/542
TXT Compounds under subclass 484 wherein phosphorus is attached directly or
    indirectly to the hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/543
TXT Compounds under subclass 484 which contain a spiro ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 540/544
TXT Compounds under subclass 484 in which the hetero ring contains chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/545
TXT Compounds under subclass 544 wherein the hetero ring contains at least two
    nitrogens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/546
TXT Compounds under subclass 544 wherein the hetero ring is one of the cyclos
    of a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/547
TXT Compounds under subclass 546 in which the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly three rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/548
TXT Compounds under subclass 547 wherein the tricyclo ring system contains at
    least three hetero atoms.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 540/549
TXT Compounds under subclass 547 wherin sulfur and nitrogen are bonded directly
    to each other in the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/550
TXT Compounds under subclass 547 wherein the nitrogen of the hetero ring is
    bonded directly to both carbocyclic rings of the tricyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/551
TXT Compounds under subclass 547 in which nitrogen is bonded directly to a ring
    carbon of the seven-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for  herein are:


CLS 540/552
TXT Compounds under subclass 546 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly two rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 540/553
TXT Compounds under subclass 484 in which the hetero ring contains at least two
    nitrogens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/554
TXT Compounds under subclass 553 in which the hetero ring contains three or
    more nitrogens.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 540/555
TXT Compounds under subclass 553 wherein the hetero ring is one of the cyclos
    of a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/556
TXT Compounds under subclass 555 wherein (a) at least three members of one
    cyclo are members of an additional cyclo in the polycyclo ring system, or
    (b) one ring member is a member of three of the cyclos in the polycyclo
    ring system (e.g., bridged, peri-fused, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 540/557
TXT Compounds under subclass 555 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly three rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/558
TXT Compounds under subclass 557 wherein a nitrogen of the hetero ring is a
    member of an additional cyclo in the tricyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/559
TXT Compounds under subclass 558 in which the additional cyclo has at least six
    ring members.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/560
TXT Compounds under subclass 558 wherein one of the remaining cyclos of the
    tricyclo ring system contains chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/561
TXT Compounds under subclass 558 wherein the additional cyclo is five-membered
    consisting of one nitrogen and four carbons.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/562
TXT Compounds under subclass 558 wherein the additional cyclo is five-membered
    consisting of two nitrogens and three carbons.

    (1)     Note.  An example and compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/563
TXT Compounds under subclass 558 wherein the tricyclo ring system has the
    following structure, which may contain double bonds between its members:


    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/564
TXT Compounds under subclass 563 wherein nitrogen, halogen, cyano (i.e., -CN)
    or chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium) is bonded
    directly to a ring carbon of the triazolo ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 540/565
TXT Compounds under subclass 563 wherein nitrogen is attached indirectly to
    ring carbon of the triazolo ring by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/566
TXT Compounds under subclass 563 in which the unshared ring carbon of the
    triazolo ring is unsubstituted or substituted by alkyl only.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/567
TXT Compounds under subclass 555 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly two rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/568
TXT Compounds under subclass 567 wherein the other cyclo of the bicyclo ring
    system contains a hetero atom.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/569
TXT Compounds under subclass 567 wherein the bicyclo ring system has the
    following structure, which may contain double bonds between its members:

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/570
TXT Compounds under subclass 569 in which chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) is bonded directly to ring carbon of the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/571
TXT Compounds under subclass 569 wherein nitrogen is bonded directly to ring
    carbon of the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/572
TXT Compounds under subclass 571 wherein nitrogen or chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium or tellurium) is attached indirectly to ring carbon of the
    hetero ring by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/573
TXT Compounds under subclass 569 wherein nitrogen or chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium or tellurium) is attached indirectly to ring carbon of the
    hetero ring by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 540/574
TXT Processes under subclass 569 for the formation of the 1,4-benzodiazepine
    ring system, or hydrogenated forms thereof.


CLS 540/575
TXT Compounds under subclass 553 wherein the hetero ring has the following
    structure, which may contain double bonds between its members:

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/576
TXT Compounds under subclass 484 wherein the hetero ring is one of the cyclos
    of a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/577
TXT Compounds under subclass 576 wherein an additional cyclo of the polycyclo
    ring system contains nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/578
TXT Compounds under subclass 577 wherein the polycyclo ring system contains at
    least three hetero atoms.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/579
TXT Compounds under subclass 578 wherein the nitrogen of the hetero ring is a
    member of an additional cyclo of the polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/580
TXT Compounds under subclass 577 wherein the seven-membered hetero ring shares
    ring members with one other cyclo only.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 540/581
TXT Compounds under subclass 576 wherein (a) at least three members of one
    cyclo are members of an additional cyclo in the polycyclo ring system, or
    (b) one ring carbon is a member of three of the cyclos in the polycyclo
    ring system (e.g., bridged, peri-fused, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 540/582
TXT Compounds under subclass 581 wherein the polycylo ring system consists of
    exactly two rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/583
TXT Compounds under subclass 582 in which
    -  - wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium),
    is bonded directly to the ring nitrogen of the bicyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/584
TXT Compounds under subclass 582 wherein nitrogen of chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium or tellurium) is attached directly to the ring nitrogen of
    the bicyclo ring system by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/585
TXT Compounds under subclass 582 wherein nitrogen or chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the ring nitrogen
    of the bicyclo ring system by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 540/586
TXT Compounds under subclass 576 wherein the polycylo ring system consists of
    exactly three rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compounds provided for herein is:


CLS 540/587
TXT Compounds under subclass 586 wherein the hetero ring shares ring members
    with each of two benzene rings in the tricyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/588
TXT Compounds under subclass 587 wherein the nitrogen of the hetero ring is
    bonded directly to each of the two benzene rings.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 540/589
TXT Compounds under subclass 588 in which
    - C - wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium),
    is bonded directly to the ring nitrogen of the tricyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/590
TXT Compounds under subclass 588 wherein nitrogen is attached directly or
    indirectly to carbon of the hetero ring by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Example of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 540/591
TXT Compounds under subclass 588 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) is attached directly or indirectly to the hetero
    ring by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 540/592
TXT Compounds under subclass 588 wherein nitrogen is attached indirectly to the
    nitrogen of the hetero ring by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 540/593
TXT Compounds under subclass 576 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly two rings.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 540/594
TXT Compounds under subclass 593 wherein the cicyclo ring system has the
    following structure, which may contain double bonds between its members:

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/595
TXT Compounds under subclass 594 in which a benzene ring is bonded directly to
    a ring carbon of the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/596
TXT Compounds under subclass 484 wherein an additional hetero ring is attached
    directly or indirectly to the hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 540/597
TXT Compounds under subclass 596 wherein the additional hetero ring is
    six-membered and contains nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/598
TXT Compounds under subclass 597 wherein the additional hetero rings contains
    at least two hetero atoms.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/599
TXT Compounds under subclass 598 wherein the additional hetero ring is one of
    the cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 540/600
TXT Compounds under subclass 599 wherein the additional hetero ring has the
    following structure, which may contain double bonds between its members:


    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/601
TXT Compounds under subclass 598 wherein the additional hetero ring has the
    following structure, which may contain double bonds between its members:


    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/602
TXT Compounds under subclass 596 wherein the additional hetero ring is
    five-membered and contains nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/603
TXT Compounds under subclass 602 wherein the additional hetero atoms.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/604
TXT Compounds under subclass 484 in which chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) is attached directly to the hetero ring by nonionic
    bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/605
TXT Compounds under subclass 484 in which nitrogen is attached directly to the
    hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note. An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/606
TXT Compounds under subclass 605 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium

    or tellurium), -  - , wherein X is chalcogen, or additional nitrogen is
    attached directly to the nitrogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 540/607
TXT Compounds under subclass 484 in which
    -  - wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium)
    is bonded directly to the hetero ring nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/608
TXT Compounds under subclass 607 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) is bonded directly to the

    -  - group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 540/609
TXT Compounds under subclass 484 wherein nitrogen or chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur,selenium or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the hetero ring by
    acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note. Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 540/610
TXT Compounds under subclass 609 in which the chalcogen or nitrogen is attached
    directly to carbon by a multiple bond (i.e., double or triple bond).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:



CLS 540/611
TXT Compounds under subclass 484 in which a benzene ring is bonded directly to
    the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:



CLS 540/612
TXT Compounds under subclass 484 wherein the hetero ring is either
    unsubstituted or alkyl substituted only.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 544/
TTL ORGANIC COMPOUNDS -- PART OF THE CLASS 532-570 SERIES

CLS 544/1
TXT Compounds under Class 540, subclass 1 which contain a six-membered hetero
    ring having two or more ring hetero atoms of which at least one is nitrogen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the destruction of hazardous or toxic waste.


CLS 544/2
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 wherein the six- membered hetero ring includes
    at least one atom each of oxygen, sulfur, nitrogen and carbon and contains
    no other elements as ring members.


CLS 544/3
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 wherein the six- membered hetero ring includes
    at least one atom each of sulfur, nitrogen and carbon and contains no other
    elements as ring members.


CLS 544/4
TXT Compounds under subclass 3 which include aluminum or a metal having a
    specific gravity greater than four.

    (1)     Note.  Arsenic is considered a metal.


CLS 544/5
TXT Compounds under subclass 3 wherein the six-membered hetero ring contains at
    least two ring sulfurs in addition to the nitrogen and carbon.


CLS 544/6
TXT Compounds under subclass 3 which contain a spiro ring system.


CLS 544/7
TXT Compounds under subclass 3 wherein the six-membered hetero ring contains at
    least two atoms of nitrogen in addition to the sulfur and carbon.


CLS 544/8
TXT Compounds under subclass 7 wherein the six-membered hetero ring consists of
    two nitrogen atoms, one sulfur atom and three carbon atoms.


CLS 544/9
TXT Compounds under subclass 8 wherein the thiadiazine ring is one of the
    cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 544/10
TXT Compounds under subclass 9 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    two rings, one of which is the thiadiazine ring.


CLS 544/11
TXT Compounds under subclass 10 wherein the bicyclo ring system consists of the
    thiadiazine ring and a benzene ring.


CLS 544/12
TXT Compounds under subclass 11 wherein the sulfur atom is in the 1-position
    and the nitrogen atoms are in the 2- and 4-positions of the six-membered
    hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a structure provided for herein is:


CLS 544/13
TXT Compounds under subclass 12 which contain a sulfamyl or substituted
    sulfamyl group; viz., -SO2N   or  -SO2N=.

    (1)     Note.  The diuretic 1, 2, 4-benzothiadiazines with benzosulfamyl
    substituents are provided for herein.


CLS 544/14
TXT Compounds under subclass 3 wherein the six-membered hetero ring is one of
    the cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 544/31
TXT Compounds under subclass 14 wherein the polycyclo ring system contains four
    or more rings of which three form the phenothiazine structure.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for compound s  s uch   a s:


CLS 544/32
TXT Compounds under subclass 14 in which the polycyclo ring system consists of
    three rings, one of which is the six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for compound s   such    as:


CLS 544/33
TXT Compounds under subclass 32 in which the ring sulfur and ring nitrogen of
    the six-membered hetero ring are in adjacent positions.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for compounds    su  ch      as:


CLS 544/34
TXT Compounds under subclass 32 wherein the tricyclo ring system contains at
    least two ring nitrogens.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for compounds  such       as:


CLS 544/35
TXT Compounds under subclass 32 wherein the tricyclo ring system has the
    following basic structure:

    in which the bonds between ring members may be double or single bonds.


CLS 544/36
TXT Processes under subclass 35 wherein the phenothiazine containing compound
    is separated from impurities or from the reaction mixture.


CLS 544/37
TXT Compounds under subclass 35 which include nitrogen bonded directly to the
    phenothiazine ring system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides largely for phenothiazine dyes which
    have one or more substituted amino groups on the benzo moiety, such as
    leuco methylene blue,

    (2)     Note.  This subclass also provides for any nitrogen containing
    substituent wherein the nitrogen atom is bonded directly to the benzo
    rings; e.g.,


CLS 544/38
TXT Compounds under subclass 35 which contain carbon bonded directly to the
    ring nitrogen of the phenothiazine ring system.


CLS 544/39
TXT Compounds under subclass 38 wherein divalent chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium or tellurium) is double bonded directly to the carbon
    which is bonded directly to the ring nitrogen of the phenothiazine ring
    system.


CLS 544/40
TXT Compounds under subclass 39 which include

    bonded directly to the ring nitrogen of the phenothiazine ring system, or
    an analog of another chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium).


CLS 544/41
TXT Compounds under subclass 38 wherein a nitrogen containing substituent is
    bonded directly to the ring nitrogen of the phenothiazine ring system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for phenothiazines of the following
    type:


CLS 544/42
TXT Compounds under subclass 41 in which the nitrogen containing substituent
    includes a hetero ring, which hetero ring has at least nitrogen as a ring
    hetero atom.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein   are:

    (2)     Note.  The substituent may contain a phenothiazine ring as its
    nitrogen containing hetero ring.


CLS 544/43
TXT Compounds under subclass 42 in which the nitrogen containing substituent
    includes at least two hetero rings.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are structures  suc h    as:


CLS 544/44
TXT Compounds under subclass 42 in which the hetero ring in the nitrogen
    containing substituent is a fully hydrogenated six-membered ring having
    nitrogen in the 1- and 4-positions and carbon in the other four positions.


CLS 544/45
TXT Compounds under subclass 44 which include chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) in the nitrogen containing substituent.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for    herein   are:


CLS 544/46
TXT Compounds under subclass 42 which include chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) in the nitrogen containing substituent.


CLS 544/47
TXT Compounds under subclass 14 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly two rings, one of which is the six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compo und provided for herein is:


CLS 544/48
TXT Compounds under subclass 47 wherein the bicyclo ring system contains at
    least one ring hetero atom in addition to the ring sulfur and ring nitrogen
    of the thiazine ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a structure provided for herein is:


CLS 544/49
TXT Compounds under subclass 47 wherein the bicyclo ring system consists of a
    benzene ring sharing two adjacent carbons of the six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  The following shows the position numbering used for
    benzothiazines:

    It is pointed out that the two carbons common to both rings are not
    numbered.  The nitrogen and sulfur may be in any of positions 1, 2, 3, and
    4.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 544/50
TXT Compounds under subclass 49 wherein the ring hetero atoms of the
    benzothiazine ring system are in the 1-and 3-positions.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 544/51
TXT Compounds under subclass 49 wherein the sulfur and nitrogen atoms of the
    benzothiazine ring system are in para-position to each other.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 544/52
TXT Compounds under subclass 51 which include a double bonded divalent
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is intended to include compounds such   a s:


CLS 544/53
TXT Compounds under subclass 3 wherein the six-membered hetero ring has sulfur
    in the 1-position, nitrogen in the 3-position and carbon in the other four
    positions.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for compounds containing the
    following ring which may have double bonds.


CLS 544/54
TXT Compounds under subclass 53 which include a double bonded divalent
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium).


CLS 544/55
TXT Compounds under subclass 53 which include an additional hetero ring.


CLS 544/56
TXT Compounds under subclass 3 wherein the six-membered hetero ring has sulfur
    in the 1-position, nitrogen in the 4-position and carbon in the other four
    positions.


CLS 544/57
TXT Compounds under subclass 56 which include phosphorus in a salt or attached
    by nonionic bonding.


CLS 544/58.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 56 which include double bonded divalent chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).


CLS 544/58.2
TXT Compounds under subclass 58.1 wherein divalent chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is double bonded directly to the thiazine
    ring.


CLS 544/58.4
TXT Compounds under subclass 58.1 wherein a   group, in which X is chalcogen
    (i.e. oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), is bonded directly to the
    thiazine ring.


CLS 544/58.5
TXT Compounds under subclass 58.1 which include an additional hetero ring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58.6,   for compounds in which the additional hetero ring is also a
    thiazine ring.


CLS 544/58.6
TXT Compounds under subclass 58.5 having, in addition to the thiazine ring, a
    six-membered hetero ring which has at least one ring nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  The additional six-membered hetero ring may be another
    thiazine ring.


CLS 544/58.7
TXT Compounds under subclass 58.5 having, in addition to the thiazine ring, a
    hetero ring which includes a ring chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 544/59
TXT Compounds under subclass 56 in which the six-membered hetero ring contains
    no double bonds.


CLS 544/60
TXT Compounds under subclass 59 which include an additional hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for salts of heterocyclic compounds
    with thiomorpholine ,   e.g.,


CLS 544/61
TXT Compounds under subclass 60 wherein the additional hetero ring is a cyclo
    in a bicyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 544/62
TXT Compounds under subclass 61 wherein a benzene ring is the other cyclo of
    the bicyclo ring system.


CLS 544/63
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 in which the six-membered hetero ring consists
    of oxygen, nitrogen and carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An oxazine ring in a polycyclo ring system is numbered as if
    it were a single ring and not part of a ring system:  therefore, in each of
    the following:

            the oxazine ring is considered to be 1, 3-oxazine and classified
    accordingly.


CLS 544/64
TXT Compounds under subclass 63 which contain aluminum or a metal with a
    specific gravity greater than 4.

    (1)     Note.  Arsenic is considered a metal for the purposes of this
    subclass.


CLS 544/65
TXT Compounds under subclass 63 wherein the six-membered ring contains at least
    two ring oxygens.


CLS 544/66
TXT Compounds under subclass 63 wherein the six-membered ring contains at least
    two ring nitrogens.


CLS 544/67
TXT Compounds under subclass 66 wherein oxygen is in the 1-position, nitrogen
    is in the 3- and 5-positions and carbon is in the remaining three positions
    of the six-membered hetero ring.


CLS 544/68
TXT Compounds under subclass 66 in which oxygen is bonded directly to the
    six-membered ring.


CLS 544/69
TXT Compounds under subclass 63 which contain boron or silicon.


CLS 544/70
TXT Compounds under subclass 63 which contain a spiro ring system.


CLS 544/71
TXT Compounds under subclass 70 wherein at least one of the rings in the spiro
    ring system is a six-membered hetero ring consisting of oxygen, nitrogen
    and carbon.


CLS 544/72
TXT Compounds under subclass 63 having at least two six-membered hetero rings
    each consisting of one ring oxygen, one ring nitrogen and four ring carbons.


CLS 544/73
TXT Compounds under subclass 72 in which at least one of the six-membered
    hetero rings is a cyclo of a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 544/74
TXT Compounds under subclass 73 wherein the polycyclo ring system contains at
    least two of the six-membered hetero rings, each having its oxygen in the
    1-position and its nitrogen in the 4-position.


CLS 544/75
TXT Compounds under subclass 74 in which the polycyclo ring system is composed
    of exactly five rings.


CLS 544/76
TXT Compounds under subclass 75 in which two or more nitrogen atoms are
    directly bonded to the pentacyclo ring system.


CLS 544/77
TXT Compounds under subclass 76 which contain nitrogen bonded directly to a
    group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e. oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).


CLS 544/78
TXT Compounds under subclass 72 which contain at least two of the six-membered
    hetero rings, each having its oxygen in the 1-position, its nitrogen in the
    4-position, and having no double bonds between ring members, i.e.,
    morpholine rings.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    69,     for compounds having plural morpholine rings and silicon or boron.


CLS 544/79
TXT Compounds under subclass 78 which contain a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 544/80
TXT Compounds under subclass 79 in which a nitrogen containing hetero ring is
    part of the polycyclo ring system.


CLS 544/81
TXT Compounds under subclass 80 in which the polycyclo ring system contains at
    least four ring nitrogens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 544/82
TXT Compounds under subclass 78 which have, in addition to the morpholine
    rings, another hetero ring which has a ring nitrogen.


CLS 544/83
TXT Compounds under subclass 82 in which the additional hetero ring is
    six-membered having three ring nitrogens and three ring carbons.


CLS 544/84
TXT Compounds under subclass 78 wherein phosphorus is attached directly or
    indirectly to a morpholine ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 544/85
TXT Compounds under subclass 78 wherein sulfur is attached directly or
    indirectly to a morpholine ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 544/86
TXT Compounds under subclass 78 wherein nitrogen is attached directly or
    indirectly to a morpholine ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 544/87
TXT Compounds under subclass 78 wherein oxygen is attached directly or
    indirectly to a morpholine ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 544/88
TXT Compounds under subclass 63 wherein the six-membered hetero ring has oxygen
    in the 1-position, nitrogen in the 3-position and carbons in the remaining
    four positions.


CLS 544/89
TXT Compounds under subclass 88 wherein the six-membered hetero ring is a cyclo
    in a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An oxazine ring in a polycyclo ring system is numbered as if
    it were a single ring and not part of a ring system; therefore, in each of
    the following:

            the oxazine ring is considered to be 1, 3-oxazine and classified
    accordingly.


CLS 544/90
TXT Compounds under subclass 89 in which the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly two rings.


CLS 544/91
TXT Compounds under subclass 90 wherein the bicyclo ring system includes at
    least one ring hetero atom in addition to the ring oxygen and ring nitrogen
    of the six-membered hetero ring.


CLS 544/92
TXT Compounds under subclass 90 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) is bonded directly to the six-membered hetero ring.


CLS 544/93
TXT Compounds under subclass 92 wherein at least two oxygen atoms are bonded
    directly to the six-membered hetero ring.


CLS 544/94
TXT Compounds under subclass 93 which contain the isatoic anhydride
    configuration,

    wherein there may be double or single bonds between ring members.


CLS 544/95
TXT Compounds under subclass 89 wherein the polycyclo ring system includes at
    least one ring hetero atom in addition to the ring oxygen and ring nitrogen
    of the six-membered hetero ring.


CLS 544/96
TXT Compounds under subclass 88 which contain a hetero ring in addition to the
    six-membered hetero ring.


CLS 544/97
TXT Compounds under subclass 88 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) is bonded directly to the six-membered hetero ring.


CLS 544/98
TXT Compounds under subclass 63 wherein the six-membered hetero ring has oxygen
    in the 1-position, nitrogen in the 4-position and carbons in the remaining
    four positions.


CLS 544/99
TXT Compounds under subclass 98 wherein the six-membered hetero ring is one of
    the cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  The positions of the six-membered hetero ring when it is
    part of a polycyclo ring system are numbered as if it were a single ring.


CLS 544/100
TXT Compounds under subclass 99 which contain anthrone or anthraquinone as
    three cyclos of the polycyclo ring system.


CLS 544/101
TXT Compounds under subclass 99 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    three rings.


CLS 544/102
TXT Compounds under subclass 101 wherein the tricyclo ring system has the
    following basic structure:

    in which the bonds between ring members may be single or double bonds.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for any compound which contains the
    phenoxazine skeleton, regardless of the degree of saturation or the
    shifting of double bonds, for example,

    (2)     Note.  The gallocyanine dyes are found in this and indented
    subclasses.


CLS 544/103
TXT Compounds under subclass 102 wherein two or more nitrogen atoms are bonded
    directly to the phenoxazine ring system.


CLS 544/104
TXT Compounds under subclass 102 which include sulfur.


CLS 544/105
TXT Compounds under subclass 99 in which the polycyclo ring system consists of
    two rings.


CLS 544/106
TXT Compounds under subclass 98 wherein the six-membered hetero ring, having
    oxygen in the 1-position and nitrogen in the 4-position, has no double
    bonds between ring members.


CLS 544/107
TXT Compounds under subclass 106 which are acid addition salts of (a)
    unsubstituted morpholine, or (b) morpholine substituted by hydrocarbon
    radicals only.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:

    (2)     Note.  The substituents attached to the morpholine ring by nonionic
    bonding must contain only hydrogen and carbon.


CLS 544/108
TXT Compounds under subclass 107 in which the nitrogen atom of the morpholine
    ring is disubstituted with hydrocarbon moieties.

    (1)     Note.  An example of an N, N-disubstituted compound provided for
    herein is:


CLS 544/109
TXT Compounds under subclass 107 which contain a hetero ring in the portion of
    the compound which is ionically bonded to the morpholine ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 544/110
TXT Compounds under subclass 107 which include phosphorus or sulfur in the
    portion of the compound which is ionically bonded to the morpholine ring.


CLS 544/111
TXT Compounds under subclass 106 having, in addition to the morpholine ring, a
    hetero ring which includes a ring nitrogen.


CLS 544/112
TXT Compounds under subclass 111 in which the additional hetero ring is
    six-membered consisting of three ring nitrogens and three ring carbons.


CLS 544/113
TXT Compounds under subclass 112 in which the three ring nitrogens of the
    additional six-membered hetero ring occupy the 1, 3, 5-positions.


CLS 544/114
TXT Compounds under subclass 111 in which the additional hetero ring is
    six-membered consisting of two ring nitrogens and four ring carbons.


CLS 544/115
TXT Compounds under subclass 114 in which the additional six-membered hetero
    ring is one of the cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 544/116
TXT Compounds under subclass 115 in which the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly two rings.


CLS 544/117
TXT Compounds under subclass 116 wherein the bicyclo ring system contains at
    least one ring hetero atom in addition to the two ring nitrogens of the
    additional six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 544/118
TXT Compounds under subclass 117 wherein the bicyclo ring system cont


CLS 544/119
TXT Compounds under subclass 116 which include acyclic nitrogen.


CLS 544/120
TXT Compounds under subclass 114 in which the nitrogen atoms of the additional
    six-membered hetero ring are in the 1, 4-positions.


CLS 544/121
TXT Compounds under subclass 120 in which the additional six-membered hetero
    ring is completely hydrogenated.


CLS 544/122
TXT Compounds under subclass 114 in which the nitrogen atoms of the additional
    six-membered hetero ring are in the 1, 3-positions.


CLS 544/123
TXT Compounds under subclass 122 in which oxygen is bonded directly to the
    additional six-membered hetero ring.


CLS 544/124
TXT Compounds under subclass 111 in which the additional hetero ring is a
    six-membered ring consisting of one ring nitrogen and five ring carbons.


CLS 544/125
TXT Compounds under subclass 124 in which the additional six-membered hetero
    ring is a cyclo of a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 544/126
TXT Compounds under subclass 125 in which the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly three rings.


CLS 544/127
TXT Compounds under subclass 125 in which the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly two rings.


CLS 544/128
TXT Compounds under subclass 127 wherein the bicyclo ring system is
    characterized by having a six-membered carbocyclic ring ortho-fused to two
    carbons of the additional six-membered hetero ring.


CLS 544/129
TXT Compounds under subclass 124 in which the additional six-membered hetero
    ring has no double bonds between ring members.


CLS 544/130
TXT Compounds under subclass 129 which include double bonded divalent chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium).


CLS 544/131
TXT Compounds under subclass 124 which include double bonded divalent chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium).


CLS 544/132
TXT Compounds under subclass 111 in which the additional hetero ring is
    five-membered having two or more ring hetero atoms, at least one of which
    is nitrogen.


CLS 544/133
TXT Compounds under subclass 132 in which the five-membered hetero ring
    contains a ring sulfur, in addition to the ring nitrogen, as a ring hetero
    atom.


CLS 544/134
TXT Compounds under subclass 133 in which the five-membered hetero ring
    contains at least two ring nitrogens or at least two ring sulfurs.


CLS 544/135
TXT Compounds under subclass 133 wherein a six-membered carbocyclic ring is
    ortho-fused to two carbons of the five-membered hetero ring forming a
    bicyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 544/136
TXT Compounds under subclass 135 which contain a polysulfide linkage between
    the bicyclo ring system and the morpholine ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for in this subclass is:


CLS 544/137
TXT Compounds under subclass 132 in which the five-membered hetero ring
    contains a ring oxygen, in addition to the ring nitrogen, as a ring hetero
    atom.


CLS 544/138
TXT Compounds under subclass 137 in which the five-membered hetero ring
    consists of one ring oxygen, two ring nitrogens and two ring carbons.


CLS 544/139
TXT Compounds under subclass 132 in which the five-membered hetero ring has
    ring nitrogens in the 1- and 3-positions and ring carbons in the remaining
    three positions.


CLS 544/140
TXT Compounds under subclass 132 in which the five-membered hetero ring has
    ringnitrogens in the 1- 2- positions and ring carbons in the remaining
    three positions.


CLS 544/141
TXT Compounds under subclass 111 in which the five-membered hetero ring
    consists of one ring nitrogen and four ring carbons.


CLS 544/142
TXT Compounds under subclass 141 in which the five-membered hetero ring is one
    of the cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 544/143
TXT Compounds under subclass 142 in which the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly two rings.


CLS 544/144
TXT Compounds under subclass 143 in which chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) is bonded directly to the bicyclo ring system.


CLS 544/145
TXT Compounds under subclass 106 having, in addition to the morpholine ring, a
    hetero ring which includes a ring sulfur.


CLS 544/146
TXT Compounds under subclass 145 wherein the additional hetero ring consists of
    one ring sulfur and four ring carbons.


CLS 544/147
TXT Compounds under subclass 106 having, in addition to the morpholine ring, a
    hetero ring which includes a ring oxygen.


CLS 544/148
TXT Compounds under subclass 147 wherein the additional hetero ring contains at
    least two ring hetero atoms.


CLS 544/149
TXT Compounds under subclass 147 wherein the additional hetero ring is
    six-membered.


CLS 544/150
TXT Compounds under subclass 149 in which the additional hetero ring is a cyclo
    in a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 544/151
TXT Compounds under subclass 150 in which the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly two rings.


CLS 544/152
TXT Compounds under subclass 147 wherein the additional hetero ring is
    five-membered.


CLS 544/153
TXT Compounds under subclass 152 in which the additional hetero ring is a cyclo
    in a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 544/154
TXT Compounds under subclass 106 having a polycyclo ring system which contains
    at least three carbocyclic rings.


CLS 544/155
TXT Compounds under subclass 154 in which the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly three six-membered carbocyclic rings.


CLS 544/156
TXT Compounds under subclass 155 wherein the tricyclo ring system is part of an
    anthrone or anthraquinone nucleus, or a hydrogenated form thereof.


CLS 544/157
TXT Compounds under subclass 100 wherein phosphorus is attached directly or
    indirectly to the morpholine ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 544/158
TXT Compounds under subclass 106 wherein sulfur is attached directly or
    indirectly to the morpholine ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 544/159
TXT Compounds under subclass 158 wherein nitrogen is attached directly or
    indirectly to the morpholine ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 544/160
TXT Compounds under subclass 159 wherein the sulfur is a double bonded divalent
    atom (=S).


CLS 544/161
TXT Compounds under subclass 158 wherein the sulfur is a double bonded divalent
    atom (=S).


CLS 544/162
TXT Compounds under subclass 106 wherein nitrogen is attached directly or
    indirectly to the morpholine ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 544/163
TXT Compounds under subclass 162 which contain the -C=N group.


CLS 544/164
TXT Compounds under subclass 162 wherein nitrogen is attached directly to the
    morpholine ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 544/165
TXT Compounds under subclass 162 wherein nitrogen is attached directly to a
    carbocyclic ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 544/166
TXT Compounds under subclass 165 wherein the morpholine ring is bonded directly
    to the carbocyclic ring.


CLS 544/167
TXT Compounds under subclass 165 wherein the -NO2 group is bonded directly to
    the carbocyclic ring.


CLS 544/168
TXT Compounds under subclass 162 which contain a carbon atom to which acyclic
    nitrogen is bonded directly and to which oxygen is attached directly by a
    double bond.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for, interalia, carboxylic acid
    amides such as:


CLS 544/169
TXT Compounds under subclass 168 in which the carbon atom is bonded directly to
    a ring in addition to being bonded to acyclic nitrogen and double bonded to
    oxygen.


CLS 544/170
TXT Compounds under subclass 106 wherein oxygen is attached directly or
    indirectly to the morpholine ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 544/171
TXT Compounds under subclass 170 in which the oxygen is part of a  O - group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 544/172
TXT Compounds under subclass 171 wherein the carbon of the  O - group is bonded
    directly to a ring.


CLS 544/173
TXT Compounds under subclass 170 wherein oxygen is bonded directly to a ring.


CLS 544/174
TXT Compounds under subclass 173 having the formula ROR', wherein R and R' are
    organic radicals, at least one of which is a ring.


CLS 544/175
TXT Compounds under subclass 170 wherein the oxygen is double bonded directly
    to acyclic carbon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173+,   for oxygen bonded directly to a ring carbon.


CLS 544/176
TXT Compounds under subclass 175 wherein the acyclic carbon of the carbonyl
    group is bonded directly to the nitrogen of the morpholine ring.


CLS 544/177
TXT Compounds under subclass 170 having the formula ROR', wherein R and R' are
    organic radicals, one which contains the morpholine ring.


CLS 544/178
TXT Compounds under subclass 106 in which a hydrocarbon substituent is bonded
    directly to the nitrogen of the morpholine ring.

    (1)     Note.  Example of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 544/179
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 in which the six-membered hetero ring consists
    of four ring nitrogens and two ring carbons.


CLS 544/180
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 wherein the six-membered hetero ring consists of
    three ring nitrogens and three ring carbons.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:



CLS 544/181
TXT Compounds under subclass 180 which contain aluminum or a metal having a
    specific gravity greater than 4.

    (1)     Note.  Arsenic is considered a metal for the purposes of this
    subclass.


CLS 544/182
TXT Compounds under subclass 180 in which two of the ring nitrogens of the
    six-membered hetero ring are bonded directly to each other.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are 1, 2,
    3-triazine, often designated as vicinal triazine, and 1, 2, 4-triazine.


CLS 544/183
TXT Compounds under subclass 182 wherein the asymmetrical six-membered hetero
    ring is a cyclo in a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 544/184
TXT Compounds under subclass 183 wherein the polycyclo ring system contains a
    ring hetero atom in addition to the three ring nitrogens in the
    six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for in this subclass are:


CLS 544/185
TXT Compounds under subclass 180 having the following basic structure:

    and derivatives thereof wherein the hexamethylene tetramine ring system is
    not destroyed.


CLS 544/186
TXT Processes under subclass 185 in which hexamethylene tetramine or
    derivatives thereof are produced, separated from impurities or separated
    from the reaction mixture.


CLS 544/187
TXT Compounds under subclass 180 which contain anthrone or anthraquinone.

    (1)     Note.  The anthrone or anthraquinone ring system may be three
    cyclos of a polycyclo ring system having more than three cyclos.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 544/188
TXT Compounds under subclass 187 wherein anthrone or anthraquinone is part of a
    polycyclo ring system which contains at least one hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein  is:


CLS 544/189
TXT Compounds under subclass 187 which contain sulfur.


CLS 544/190
TXT Compounds under subclass 180 which are chlorinated derivatives of cyanuric
    or isocyanuric acid, and salts thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:




CLS 544/191
TXT Processes under subclass 190 for the production of cyanuric chloride or a
    dichloro-iso-cyanuric acid salt which utilize cyanogen chloride as a

    (N = C- C1)



    reactant.


CLS 544/192
TXT Compounds under subclass 180 termed cyanuric acid, which exists in two
    forms as shown by the equilibrium.

    `normal' cyanuric acid isocyanuric acid

    and salts thereof.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a salt provided for herein is:


CLS 544/193
TXT Processes under subclass 180 wherein the six-membered hetero ring is formed
    by a trimerization reaction of a monomer.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for homotrimerization processes only.
    Compounds produced by reactions other than homopolymerizations are
    classified with the product.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of monomers employed in the trimerization reaction
    are isocyanates and nitriles.


CLS 544/193.1
TXT Stilbene containing:

    Compounds under subclass 180 which contains

    the group, wherein only hydrogen may be replaced.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 544/193.2
TXT Plural triazine rings containing:

    Compounds under subclss 193.1 which contain at least two triazine rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 544/194
TXT Compounds under subclass 180 wherein nitrogen, in addition to the three
    ring nitrogens, is bonded directly to a ring carbon of the six-membered
    hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for compounds such as:

    (2)     Note.  Ammelide is provided for here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    182+,   for all asmmetrical triazine rings, regardless of substitution.


CLS 544/195
TXT Compounds under subclass 194 which contain phosphorus.


CLS 544/196
TXT Compounds under subclass 194 wherein nitrogen, other than the three ring
    nitrogens, is bonded directly to each of the three ring carbons of the
    six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example, substituted melamines.



CLS 544/197
TXT Compounds under subclass 196 in which there is a ring addition to the
    six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for  in this subclass are:

            The azide ring

            is frequently illustrated as -N3.  It should be considered a
    nitrocyclic ring but not a hetero-cyclic ring.


CLS 544/198
TXT Compounds under subclass 197 in which the additional ring is a hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  The additional hetero ring may be another triazine ring.

    (2)     Note.  There must be at least four ring hetero atoms in the
    molecule to be classified here.

    (3)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:

    (4)     Note.  Melem, melam and melon are provided for herein.


CLS 544/199
TXT Compounds under subclass 196 which contain a halogen or sulfur.


CLS 544/200
TXT Compounds under subclass 196 having the structure

    or salts thereof.


CLS 544/201
TXT Processes under subclass 200 wherein melamine is produced from urea or
    biuret.


CLS 544/202
TXT Processes under subclass 200 wherein melamine is produced from cyanamide or
    dicyanamide.


CLS 544/203
TXT Processes under subclass 200 wherein melamine is separated from impurities
    or from the reaction mixture.


CLS 544/204
TXT Compounds under subclass 194 wherein nitrogen, other than the three ring
    nitrogens, is bonded directly to two of the three ring carbons of the
    six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 544/205
TXT Compounds under subclass 204 wherein hydrogen or carbon is bonded directly
    to the remaining ring carbon of the six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for in this subclass are:

            formo-guanamine acceto-guanamine


CLS 544/206
TXT Compounds under subclass 205 which contain a ring in addition to the
    six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for benzo-guanamine, for example:


CLS 544/207
TXT Compounds under subclass 206 wherein the additional ring is a hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example, diguanamines.

    (2)     Note.  There must be at least four ring hetero atoms in the
    molecule to be classified here.


CLS 544/208
TXT Compounds under subclass 204 which contain a ring in addition to the
    six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 544/209
TXT Compounds under subclass 208 wherein the additional ring is a hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  The additional hetero ring may be another triazine ring.

    (2)     Note.  There must be at least four ring hetero atoms in the
    molecule to be classified here.


CLS 544/210
TXT Compounds under subclass 204 which contain sulfur.


CLS 544/211
TXT Compounds under subclass 194 which contain a ring in addition to the
    six-membered hetero ring.


CLS 544/212
TXT Compounds under subclass 211 in which the additional ring is a hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  There must be at least four ring hetero atoms in the
    molecule to be classified here.


CLS 544/213
TXT Compounds under subclass 194 which contain sulfur.


CLS 544/214
TXT Compounds under subclass 180 which contain phosphorus.


CLS 544/215
TXT Compounds under subclass 180 having a substituent containing chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium) or halogen bonded directly or
    indirectly to the six-membered hetero ring.


CLS 544/216
TXT Compounds under subclass 215 wherein the chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) or halogen containing substituent is bonded to a
    ring carbon of the six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for compounds such as:


CLS 544/217
TXT Compounds under subclass 216 wherein a halogen is bonded directly to a ring
    carbon of the six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for compounds such as:


CLS 544/218
TXT Compounds under subclass 217 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) is bonded directly to a ring carbon of the
    six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound included herein is :


CLS 544/219
TXT Compounds under subclass 216 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, tellurium) is bonded directly to a ring carbon of the
    six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for compounds such as:


CLS 544/220
TXT Compounds under subclass 219 wherein divalent chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium or tellurium) is double bonded directly to a ring carbon
    of the six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 544/221
TXT Compounds under subclass 220 wherein divalent chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium or tellurium) is double bonded directly to each of the
    ring carbons of the six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 544/222
TXT Compounds under subclass 221 which contain nitrogen in a substituent.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for compounds  such  as :


CLS 544/223
TXT Compounds under subclass 200 wherein divalent chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium or tellurium) is double bonded directly to two of the ring
    carbons of the six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for compounds such  as:


CLS 544/224
TXT The six-membered hetero ring consists of two nitrogens and four carbons
    (e.g., 1,2-diazines, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 1 in which the six-membered hetero ring consists
    of two ring nitrogens and four ring carbons.


CLS 544/225
TXT Heavy metal or aluminum containing:

    Compounds under subclass 224 which contain aluminum or a metal with a
    specific gravity greater than 4.


CLS 544/226
TXT Arsenic or zinc containing:

    Compounds under subclass 225 which contain arsenic or zinc.


CLS 544/227
TXT Mercury containing:

    Compounds under subclass 225 which contain mercury.


CLS 544/228
TXT Purine containing (including hydrogenated): Compounds under subclass 227
    which contain a purine nucleus of the following basic structure.

    in which the bonds between ring members may be single or double bonds.


CLS 544/229
TXT Boron or silicon containing:

    Compounds under subclass 224 which contain boron or silicon.


CLS 544/230
TXT Spiro:

    Compounds under subclass 224 which contain a spiro ring system.


CLS 544/231
TXT Spiro diazine:

    Compounds under subclass 230 wherein at least one of the rings in the spiro
    ring system is a six-membered hetero ring consisting of two nitrogens and
    four carbons.


CLS 544/232
TXT Phosphorus attached directly or indirectly to a 1,2-diazine ring by
    nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 224 wherein phosphorus is attached directly or
    indirectly by nonionic bonding to the six-membered hetero ring which has
    the two ring nitrogens in the 1- and 2-positions.


CLS 544/233
TXT Polycyclo ring system having a 1,2-diazine ring as one of the cyclos:

    Compounds under subclass 224 wherein the six-membered hetero ring has the
    two ring nitrogens in the 1- and 2-positions and is a cyclo in a polycyclo
    ring system.

    (1)     Note.  A diazine ring in a polycyclo ring system is numbered as if
    it were a single ring and not part of a ring system.


            Therefore, the diazine ring is considered 1,2-diazine in each of
    the following:


CLS 544/234
TXT Tricyclo ring system having the 1,2-diazine ring as one of the cyclos:

    Compounds under subclass 233 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    three rings.


CLS 544/235
TXT Bicyclo ring system having the 1,2-diazine ring as one of the cyclos:

    Compounds under subclass 233 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    two rings.


CLS 544/236
TXT At least three ring nitrogens in the bicyclo ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 235 wherein the bicyclo ring system includes at
    least one ring nitrogen in addition to the two ring nitrogens of the
    six-membered hetero ring.


CLS 544/237
TXT Phthalazines (including hydrogenated):

    Compounds under subclass 235 wherein the bicyclo ring system has the
    following basic structure:

    in which the bonds between ring members may be single or double bonds.


CLS 544/238
TXT 1,2-diazines which contain an additional hetero ring:

    Compounds under subclass 224 wherein the six-membered hetero ring has the
    two ring nitrogens in the 1-and 2-positions and which contain an additional
    hetero ring.


CLS 544/239
TXT Chalcogen bonded directly to ring carbon of a 1,2-diazine ring:

    Compounds under subclass 224 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to a ring carbon of the
    six-membered hetero ring which has the two ring nitrogens in the 1- and
    2-positions.


CLS 544/240
TXT Plural chalcogens bonded directly:

    Compounds under subclass 239 wherein at least two chalcogen atoms are
    bonded directly to the six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 544/241
TXT Halogen attached directly to the 1,2-diazine ring by nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 239 wherein halogen is attached directly to the
    six-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 544/242
TXT 1,3-diazines:

    Compounds under subclass 224 wherein the six-membered hetero ring has
    nitrogens in the 1- and 3-positions, and carbons in the remaining four
    positions.

    (1)     Note.  The following shows the position numbering used for
    1,3-diazines:


CLS 544/243
TXT Phosphorus attached directly or indirectly to the diazine ring by nonionic
    bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 242 wherein phosphorus is attached directly or
    indirectly to the six-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 544/244
TXT Polycyclo ring system having the diazine ring as one of the cyclos:

    Compounds under subclass 243 wherein the six-membered hetero ring is one of
    the cyclos in a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 544/245
TXT Polycyclo ring system having the diazine ring as one of the cyclos:

    Compounds under subclass 242 wherein the six-membered hetero ring is one of
    the cyclos in a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  The positions of the six-membered hetero ring are numbered
    as if it were monocyclic when it is part of a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 544/246
TXT Tetracyclo ring system having the diazine ring as one of the cyclos:

    Compounds under subclass 245 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    four rings.


CLS 544/247
TXT Three or more ring hetero atoms in the tetracyclo ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 246 wherein the tetracyclo ring system includes at
    least one ring hetero atom in addition to the two ring nitrogens of the
    six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 544/248
TXT Ring carbon is shared by three of the cyclos (e.g., anthrapyrimidine, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 246 wherein three of the cyclos of the tetracyclo
    ring system have a ring carbon which is common to each of them.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 544/249
TXT Tricyclo ring system having the diazine ring as one of the cyclos:

    Compounds under subclass 245 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    three rings.


CLS 544/250
TXT Three or more ring hetero atoms in the tricyclo ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 249 wherein the tricyclo ring system includes at
    least one ring hetero atom in addition to the two ring nitrogens of the
    six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 544/251
TXT Four or more ring nitrogens in the tricyclo ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 250 wherein the tricyclo ring system includes at
    least two ring nitrogens in addition to the two ring nitrogens of the
    six-membered hetero ring.


CLS 544/252
TXT Ring nitrogen is shared by two of the cyclos:

    Compounds under subclass 249 in which a ring nitrogen is a member of two of
    the rings in the tricyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 544/253
TXT Bicyclo ring system having the diazine ring as one of the cyclos:

    Compounds under subclass 245 in which the polycyclo ring system consists of
    two rings.


CLS 544/254
TXT At least five ring hetero atoms in the bicyclo ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 253 wherein the bicyclo ring system includes at
    least three ring hetero atoms in addition to the two ring nitrogens of the
    six-membered hetero ring.


CLS 544/255
TXT Four ring hetero atoms in the bicyclo ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 253 wherein the bicyclo ring system includes two
    ring hetero atoms in addition to the two ring nitrogens of the six-membered
    hetero ring.


CLS 544/256
TXT Four ring nitrogens in the bicyclo ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 255 wherein the bicyclo ring system contains four
    ring nitrogens.


CLS 544/257
TXT Pterdines (including hydrogenated):
    Compounds under subclass 256 wherein the bicyclo ring system has the
    following basic structure:

    in which the bonds between ring members may be single or double bonds.

    (1)     Note.  The following shows the position numbering used for
    pteridines:


CLS 544/258
TXT Nitrogen bonded directly to the pteridine ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 257 wherein nitrogen is bonded directly to the
    pteridine ring system.


CLS 544/259
TXT Plural nitrogens bonded directly to the pteridine ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 258 wherein two or more nitrogen atoms are bonded
    directly to the pteridine ring system.


CLS 544/260
TXT At 2- and 4-positions:

    Compounds under subclass 259 wherein nitrogen atoms are bonded directly to
    the 2- and 4-position carbons of the pteridine ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for  herein are:


CLS 544/261
TXT Pteroyl per se or having -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen, bonded directly
    to acyclic nitrogen of otherwise unsubstituted pteroyl:

    Compounds under subclass 258 which contain the structure,

    per se, wherein R is a radical; and derivatives thereof wherein one or more
    of the hydrogens attached to the acyclic nitrogens shown in the structure
    is replaced by  , in which X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium,
    or tellurium), and no other substitution is made in the structure shown.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided   for  herein   are:

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258,    for hydropteroyl derivatives.


CLS 544/262
TXT The other cyclo in the bicyclo ring system is five-membered:

    Compounds under subclass 256 wherein a five-membered ring is the other
    cyclo of the bicyclo ring system.


CLS 544/263
TXT Ring nitrogen is shared by the two cyclos:

    Compounds under subclass 262 in which a ring nitrogen is a member of both
    of the rings in the bicyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 544/264
TXT Purines (including hydrogenated):

    Compounds under subclass 262 wherein the bicyclo ring system has the
    following basic structure,  in which the bonds between ring members may be
    single or double bonds:


CLS 544/265
TXT Chalcogen bonded directly to ring carbon of the purine ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 264 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to a ring carbon of the purine
    ring system.


CLS 544/266
TXT At 2-, 6-, and 8-positions:

    Compounds under subclass 265 wherein chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) are bonded directly to the 2-, 6-, and 8-positions
    of the purine ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 544/267
TXT At 2- and 6- positions (e.g., theophyllines etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 265 wherein chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) are bonded directly to the 2- and 6- positions of
    the purine ring system.


CLS 544/268
TXT Additional polycyclo ring system, which is not another purine, having a
    hetero ring as one of the cyclos:

    Compounds under subclass 267 which contain a nonpurine polycyclo ring
    system, having a hetero ring as one of the cyclos, in addition to the
    purine ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 544/269
TXT Additional hetero ring which is unsaturated and is not one of the cyclos of
    a purine ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 267 having, in addition to the purine ring system,
    a hetero ring which has at least one double bond between ring members.

    (1)     Note.  The additional hetero ring may not be a cyclo in any
    additional purine ring system.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein are:


CLS 544/270
TXT Plural ring nitrogens in the additional hetero ring:

    Compounds under subclass 269 wherein the additional hetero ring contains at
    least two ring nitrogens.


CLS 544/271
TXT Having -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen, attached directly or indirectly to
    the purine ring system by nonionic bonding or halogen bonded directly at
    8-position (e.g., theophylline acetate, 8-chlorotheophylline, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 267 wherein either a  group, in which X is
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), is attached
    directly or indirectly to the purine ring system by nonionic bonding, or a
    halogen is bonded directly to the 8-position of the purine ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for   herein  are:


CLS 544/272
TXT Nitrogen attached directly or indirectly to the purine ring system by
    nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 267 wherein nitrogen is attached directly or
    indirectly to the purine ring system by nonionic bonding.


CLS 544/273
TXT Positions other than 2- and 6- are unsubstituted or hydrocarbyl substituted
    only (e.g., theophylline, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 267 wherein the purine ring system, at positions
    other than 2- and 6-, is unsubstituted or substituted by hydrocarbon
    radicals only.


CLS 544/274
TXT Caffeine per se, theobromine per se, or salt thereof:

    Compounds under subclass 273 which have one of the following structures:

    or salts thereof.


CLS 544/275
TXT Recovery from natural or waste materials:

    Compounds under subclass 274 wherein caffeine, theobromine, or a salt
    thereof, is separated from impurities or from a reaction mixture.


CLS 544/276
TXT Nitrogen attached directly or indirectly to the purine ring system by
    nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 265 wherein nitrogen is attached directly or
    indirectly to the purine ring system by nonionic bonding.


CLS 544/277
TXT Nitrogen attached directly or indirectly to the purine ring system by
    nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 264 wherein nitrogen is attached directly or
    indirectly to the purine ring system by nonionic bonding.


CLS 544/278
TXT Three ring hetero atoms in the bicyclo ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 253 wherein the bicyclo ring system includes a
    ring hetero atom in addition to the two ring nitrogens of the six-membered
    hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 544/279
TXT Three ring nitrogens in the bicyclo ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 278 wherein the bicyclo ring system contains three
    ring nitrogens.


CLS 544/280
TXT The other cyclo in the bicyclo ring system is five-membered:

    Compounds under subclass 279 wherein a five-membered ring is the other
    cyclo of the bicyclo ring system.


CLS 544/281
TXT Ring nitrogen is shared by the two cyclos:

    Compounds under subclass 280 in which a ring nitrogen is a member of both
    of the rings in the bicyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 544/282
TXT Ring nitrogen is shared by the two cyclos:

    Compounds under subclass 253 in which a ring nitrogen is a member of both
    of the rings in the bicyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 544/283
TXT The other cyclo in the bicyclo ring system is a benzene ring (e.g.,
    quinazoline, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 253 wherein the bicyclo ring system consists of a
    benzene ring and the six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  The following structure shows the numbering system for the
    ring members.  The bonding between ring members of the hetero ring may be
    double or single but the other ring must be benzene.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    253,    for "benzopyrimidine" derivatives in which one or more of the
    double bonds in the "benzo portion" is or are hydrogenated.


CLS 544/284
TXT Additional unsaturated hetero ring having at least nitrogen as a ring
    hetero atom:

    Compounds under subclass 283 having, in addition to the bicyclo ring
    system, a hetero ring which has at least one double bond between ring
    members and at least one ring nitrogen.


CLS 544/285
TXT Chalcogen bonded directly at 2- and 4- positions:

    Compounds under subclass 283 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly at the 2- and 4- positions of
    the bicyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 544/286
TXT Chalcogen bonded directly at 2-position:

    Compounds under subclass 283 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly at the 2-position of the bicyclo
    ring system.


CLS 544/287
TXT Chalcogen bonded directly at 4-position:

    Compounds under subclass 283 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly at the 4-position of the bicyclo
    ring system.


CLS 544/288
TXT Sulfur bonded directly at 6- position:

    Compounds under subclass 287 wherein sulfur is bonded directly at the
    6-position of the bicyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 544/289
TXT Carbocyclic ring bonded directly at 2-position:

    Compounds under subclass 287 wherein a carbocyclic ring is bonded directly
    at the 2-position of the bicyclo ring system.


CLS 544/290
TXT Carbocyclic ring bonded directly at 3-position:

    Compounds under subclass 287 wherein a carbocyclic ring is bonded directly
    at the 3-position of the bicyclo ring system.


CLS 544/291
TXT Nitrogen bonded directly at 2- and 4- positions:

    Compounds under subclass 283 wherein nitrogens are bonded directly at the
    2- and 4-positions of the bicyclo ring system.


CLS 544/292
TXT Nitrogen bonded directly at 2-position:

    Compounds under subclass 283 wherein nitrogen is bonded directly at the
    2-position of the bicyclo ring system.


CLS 544/293
TXT Nitrogen bonded directly at 4-position:

    Compounds under subclass 283 wherein nitrogen is bonded directly at the
    4-position of the bicyclo ring system.


CLS 544/294
TXT Polycyclo-carbocyclic ring system having at least three cyclos:

    Compounds under subclass 242 having a polycyclo ring system which contains
    at least three carbocyclic rings.


CLS 544/295
TXT Plural diazine rings:

    Compounds under subclass 242 which contain at least two of the six-membered
    hetero rings, each having ring nitrogens in the 1- and 4-positions, and
    carbons in the remaining four positions.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 544/296
TXT Plural 1, 3-diazine rings:

    Compounds under subclass 295 which contain at least two of the six-membered
    hetero rings, each having its nitrogens in the 1- and 3- positions, and
    carbons in the remaining four positions.


CLS 544/297
TXT Nitrogen attached directly at 2-position by nonionic bonding and sulfur
    bonded directly to the nitrogen:

    Compounds under subclass 242 which include nitrogen attached directly at
    the 2-position of the six-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding and
    sulfur bonded directly to the nitrogen which is at the 2-position.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 544/298
TXT Chalcogen bonded directly to diazine ring carbon:

    Compounds under subclass 242 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to a ring carbon of the
    six-membered hetero ring.


CLS 544/299
TXT At 2-, 4-, and 6-positions (e.g., barbituric acid, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 298 wherein chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) are bonded directly at the 2-, 4-, and 6-positions
    of the six-membered hetero ring.


CLS 544/300
TXT Additional hetero ring which is unsaturated:

    Compounds under subclass 299 having, in addition to the six-membered hetero
    ring, a hetero ring which has at least one double bond between ring members.


CLS 544/301
TXT Nitrogen attached directly or indirectly to the diazine ring by nonionic
    bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 299 wherein nitrogen is attached directly or
    indirectly to the six-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 544/302
TXT Additional chalcogen attached directly or indirectly to the diazine ring by
    nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 299 wherein an additional chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is attached directly or indirectly to the
    six-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 544/303
TXT Halogen attached directly or indirectly to the diazine ring by nonionic
    bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 299 wherein halogen is attached directly or
    indirectly to the six-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 544/304
TXT Alicyclic ring attached directly or indirectly to the diaziane ring by
    nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 299 wherein an alicyclic ring is attached directly
    or indirectly to the six-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 544/305
TXT Phenyl bonded directly at 5-position:

    Compounds under subclass 299 wherein a univalent radical derived from
    benzene by removal of one hydrogen is bonded directly at the 5-position of
    the six-membered hetero ring.


CLS 544/306
TXT Acyclic ethylenic or acetylenic unsaturation containing:

    Compounds under subclass 299 which contain ethylenic or acetylenic
    unsaturation which is not between ring members of a ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 544/307
TXT Plural alkyl groups bonded directly at 5-position:

    Compounds under subclass 299 wherein at least two alkyl groups are bonded
    directly to the 5-position of the six-membered hetero ring.


CLS 544/308
TXT Plural diverse alkly groups bonded directly at 5-position:

    Compounds under subclass 307 wherein at least two different alkyl groups
    are bonded directly to the 5-position of the six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 544/309
TXT At 2-position and a 4- or 6-position:

    Compounds under subclass 298 wherein chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) are bonded directly to the 2-position and to the 4-
    or 6-position of the six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 544/310
TXT Additional hetero ring which is unsaturated:

    Compounds under subclass 309 having, in addition to the six-membered hetero
    ring, a hetero ring which has at least one double bond between ring members.


CLS 544/311
TXT Nitrogen attached directly or indirectly to the diazine ring by nonionic
    bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 309 wherein nitrogen is attached directly or
    indirectly to the six-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 544/312
TXT 5-position is unsubstituted or alkyl substituted only:

    Compounds under subclass 311 wherein the 5-position of the six-membered
    hetero ring is unsubstituted or substituted by alkyl radicals only.


CLS 544/313
TXT Halogen attached directly to the diazine ring by nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 309 wherein halogen is attached directly to the
    six-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 544/314
TXT Additional chalcogen attached directly or indirectly to the diazine ring by
    nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 309 wherein an additional chalcogen, (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is attached directly or indirectly
    to the six-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 544/315
TXT At 2-position:

    Compounds under subclass 298 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly at the 2-position of the
    six-membered hetero ring.


CLS 544/316
TXT Nitrogen attached directly or indirectly to the diazine ring by nonionic
    bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 315 wherein nitrogen is attached directly or
    indirectly to the six-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 544/317
TXT The nitrogen is bonded directly at 4- or 6- position:

    Compounds under subclass 316 wherein the nitrogen is bonded directly to the
    4- or 6- position of the six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 544/318
TXT Additional chalcogen attached directly or indirectly to the diazine ring by
    nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 315 wherein an additional chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is attached directly or indirectly to the
    six-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 544/319
TXT At 4- or 6-position:

    Compounds under subclass 298 wherein the chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly at the 4- or 6-position of the
    six-membered hetero ring.


CLS 544/320
TXT Nitrogen attached directly at 2-position by nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 319 wherein nitrogen is attached directly to the
    2-position of the six-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 544/321
TXT Carbocyclic ring containing:

    Compounds under subclass 320 which contain a carbocyclic ring.


CLS 544/322
TXT Nitrogen attached directly to the diazine ring by nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 242 wherein nitrogen is attached directly to the
    six-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 544/323
TXT At 2-position and at 4- or 6-position:

    Compounds under subclass 322 wherein the nitrogen is attached directly to
    the 2- and 4-position carbons of the six-membered hetero ring by nonionic
    bonding.


CLS 544/324
TXT Additional hetero ring which is unsaturated:

    Compounds under subclass 323 having, in addition to the six-membered hetero
    ring, a hetero ring which has at least one double bond between ring members.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for  herein are:


CLS 544/325
TXT Substituent on 5-position contains carbocyclic ring:

    Compounds under subclass 323 wherein a substituent which contains a
    carbocyclic ring is attached to the 5-position carbon of the six-membered
    hetero ring.


CLS 544/326
TXT At 4- or 6-position:

    Compounds under subclass 322 wherein the nitrogen is attached directly to
    the 4- or 6-position carbon of the six-membered hetero ring.


CLS 544/327
TXT Sulfur attached indirectly to the diazine ring by nonionic bonding (e.g.,
    thiamines, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 326 wherein sulfur is attached indirectly to the
    diazine ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    243,    for thiamine derivatives having phosphorus substituents.

    296,    for thiamine derivatives having two or more pyrimidine rings.


CLS 544/328
TXT Additional hetero ring which is unsaturated:

    Compounds under subclass 326 having, in addition to the six-membered hetero
    ring, a hetero ring which has at least one double bond between ring members.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 544/329
TXT Carbonyl attached directly or indirectly to the diazine ring by nonionic
    bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 326 wherein a  group is attached directly or
    indirectly to the diazine ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 544/330
TXT At 2-position:

    Compounds under subclass 322 wherein the nitrogen is attached directly to
    the 2-position carbon of the six-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 544/331
TXT Additional hetero ring which is unsaturated:

    Compounds under subclass 330 having, in addition to the six-membered hetero
    ring, a hetero ring which has at least one double bond between ring members.


CLS 544/332
TXT Chalcogen attached indirectly to the diazine ring by nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 330 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the six-membered hetero
    ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 544/333
TXT Additional hetero ring which is unsaturated:

    Compounds under subclass 242 having, in addition to the six-membered hetero
    ring, a


    hetero ring which has at least one double bond between ring members.


CLS 544/334
TXT Halogen attached directly to the diazine ring by nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 242 wherein halogen is attached directly to the
    six-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 544/335
TXT Chalcogen attached indirectly to the diazine ring by nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 242 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the six-membered hetero
    ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 544/336
TXT 1,4-diazines:

    Compounds under subclass 224 wherein the six-membered hetero ring has
    nitrogens in the 1-and 4-positions, and carbons in the remaining four
    positions.


CLS 544/337
TXT Phosphorus attached directly or indirectly to the diazine ring by nonionic
    bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 336 wherein phosphorus is attached directly or
    indirectly to the six-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 544/338
TXT Polycyclo ring system having the diazine ring as one of the cyclos:

    Compounds under subclass 336 wherein the six-membered hetero ring is one of
    the cyclos in a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  The positions of the six-membered hetero ring, even when it
    is part of a polycyclo ring system, are numbered as if it were a single
    ring.


CLS 544/339
TXT Heptacyclo ring system having the diazine ring as one of the cyclos (e.g.,
    indanthrones, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 338 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    seven rings.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for   herein are:


CLS 544/340
TXT Chalcogen attached indirectly to the heptacyclo ring system by nonionic
    bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 339 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the heptacyclo ring
    system by nonionic bonding.


CLS 544/341
TXT Halogen, nitrogen, or carbon attached directly to the heptacyclo ring
    system by nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 339 wherein halogen, nitrogen, or carbon is
    attached directly to the heptacyclo ring system by nonionic bonding.


CLS 544/342
TXT Pentacyclo ring system having the diazine ring as one of the cyclos:

    Compounds under subclass 338 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    five rings.


CLS 544/343
TXT Tetracyclo ring system having the diazine ring as one of the cyclos (e.g.,
    benzophenazines, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 338 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    four rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 544/344
TXT Tricyclo ring system having the diazine  ring as one of the cyclos:

    Compounds under subclass 33 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    three rings.


CLS 544/345
TXT Three or more ring hetero atoms in the tricyclo ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 344 wherein the tricyclo ring system includes at
    least one ring hetero atom in addition to the two ring nitrogens of the
    six-membered hetero ring.


CLS 544/346
TXT Ring nitrogen is shared by two of the cyclos (e.g., ergot, alkaloids, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 345 in which a ring nitrogen is a member of two of
    the rings in the tricyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 544/347
TXT Phenazines (including hydrogenated):

    Compounds under subclass 344 wherein the tricyclo ring system has the
    following basic structure.

    in which the bonds between ring members may be single or double bonds.


CLS 544/348
TXT Nitrogen attached directly to the phenazine ring system by nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 347 wherein nitrogen is attached directly to the
    phenazine ring system by nonionic bonding.


CLS 544/349
TXT Bicyclo ring system having the diazine ring as one of the cyclos:

    Compounds under subclass 338 in which the polycyclo ring system consists of
    two rings.


CLS 544/350
TXT Three or more ring hetero atoms in the bicyclo ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 349 wherein the bicyclo ring system includes at
    least one ring hetero atom in addition to the two ring nitrogens of the
    six-membered hetero ring.


CLS 544/351
TXT Triethylene diamines:

    Compounds under subclass 349 wherein the bicyclo ring system has the
    following basic structure:

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for  herein  is:


CLS 544/352
TXT Process of forming, purifying, or recovering triethylene diamine per se, or
    salt thereof:

    Compounds under subclass 351 wherein triethylene diamine per se is formed
    by a chemical reaction or is separated from impurities or a reaction
    mixture.


CLS 544/353
TXT Quinoxalines (including hydrogenated):

    Compounds under subclass 349 wherein the bicyclo ring system has the
    following basic structure:

    in which the bonds between ring members may be single or double bonds.


CLS 544/354
TXT Chalcogen bonded directly to diazine ring carbon:

    Compounds under subclass 353 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to a ring carbon of the
    six-membered hetero ring.


CLS 544/355
TXT Having -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen, bonded directly to diazine ring
    carbon:

    Compounds under subclass 353 wherein a  group, in which X is chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), is bonded directly to a
    ring carbon of the six-membered hetero ring.


CLS 544/356
TXT Halogen or nitrogen attached directly to diazine ring carbon by nonionic
    bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 353 wherein halogen or nitrogen is attached
    directly to a ring carbon of the six-membered hetero ring by nonionic
    bonding.


CLS 544/357
TXT Plural diazine rings:

    Compounds under subclass 336 which contain at least two of the six-membered
    hetero rings, each having ring nitrogens in the 1- and 4-positions, and
    carbons in the remaining four positions.


CLS 544/358
TXT Piperazines (i.e., fully hydrogenated 1,4-diazines):

    Compounds under subclass 336 wherein the six-membered hetero ring, having
    nitrogens in the 1- and 4-positions, has single bonds only between ring
    members, i.e., piperazines.


CLS 544/359
TXT Additional hetero ring containing:

    Compounds under subclass 358 which contain a hetero ring in addition to the
    piperazine ring.


CLS 544/360
TXT Six-membered ring consisting of one nitrogen and five carbons (e.g.,
    pyridine, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 359 wherein the additional hetero ring is a
    six-membered ring consisting of one ring nitrogen and five ring carbons.


CLS 544/361
TXT The additional six-membered hetero ring is one of the cyclos in a polycyclo
    ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 360 wherein the additional six-membered hetero
    ring is a cyclo of a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 544/362
TXT The additional six-membered hetero ring is one of the cyclos in a bicyclo
    ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 361 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly two rings.


CLS 544/363
TXT Quinoline or isoquinoline (including hydrogenated):

    Compounds under subclass 362 wherein the bicyclo ring system is
    characterized by having a six-membered carbocyclic ring ortho-fused to two
    carbons of the additional six-membered hetero ring.


CLS 544/364
TXT At least three hetero rings containing:

    Compounds under subclass 360 which contain a hetero ring in addition to the
    piperazine ring and the six-membered hetero ring consisting of one ring
    nitrogen and five ring carbons.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 544/365
TXT Having -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen, bonded directly to ring carbon of
    the additional six-membered hetero ring (e.g., nicotinic acid, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 360 wherein a  group, in which X is chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), as bonded directly to a
    ring carbon of the additional six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass would also contain nicotinic acid addition
    salts of piperazines.


CLS 544/366
TXT Five-membered hetero ring having two or more ring hetero atoms of which at
    least one is nitrogen:

    Compounds under subclass 359 wherein the additional hetero ring is
    five-membered having two or more ring hetero atoms, at least one of which
    is nitrogen.


CLS 544/367
TXT Ring chalcogen in the five-membered hetero ring:

    Compounds under subclass 366 in which the five-membered hetero ring
    contains a ring chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) in
    addition to the ring nitrogen.


CLS 544/368
TXT The five-membered hetero ring is one of the cyclos in a polycyclo ring
    system:

    Compounds under subclass 367 wherein the five-membered hetero ring is one
    of the cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 544/369
TXT 1,3-oxazole ring or 1,3-thiazole ring (including hydrogenated):

    Compounds under subclass 367 wherein the five-membered hetero ring has a
    ring oxygen or ring sulfur in the 1-position, a ring nitrogen in the
    3-position, and ring carbons in the remaining three positions.


CLS 544/370
TXT 1,3-diazole ring (including hydrogenated):

    Compounds under subclass 366 wherein the five-membered hetero ring has ring
    nitrogens in the 1- and 3-positions, and ring carbons in the remaining
    three positions.


CLS 544/371
TXT 1,2-diazole ring (including hydrogenated):

    Compounds under subclass 366 wherein the five-membered hetero ring has ring
    nitrogens in the 1- and 2-positions, and ring carbons in the remaining
    three positions.


CLS 544/372
TXT Five-membered hetero ring consisting of one nitrogen and four carbons:

    Compounds under subclass 359 wherein the additional hetero ring is
    five-membered consisting of one ring nitrogen and four ring carbons.


CLS 544/373
TXT The five-membered hetero ring is one of the cyclos in a bicyclo ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 372 wherein the five-membered hetero ring is one
    of the cyclos of a bicyclo ring system.


CLS 544/374
TXT Ring chalcogen in the additional hetero ring:

    Compounds under subclass 359 having in addition to the piperazine ring, a
    hetero ring which includes a ring chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium).


CLS 544/375
TXT Polycyclo ring system having the additional hetero ring as one of the
    cyclos:

    Compounds under subclass 374 wherein the additional hetero ring is one of
    the cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 544/376
TXT Bicyclo ring system having the additional hetero ring as one of the cyclos:

    Compounds under subclass 375 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly two rings.


CLS 544/377
TXT Plural ring chalcogens in the bicyclo ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 376 wherein the bicyclo ring system contains at
    least two ring chalcogens.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 544/378
TXT Plural ring chalcogens in the polycyclo ring system or the piperazine ring
    bonded directly to the polycyclo ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 375 wherein the polycyclo ring system contains at
    least two ring chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium),
    or the polycyclo ring system is bonded directly to the piperazine ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 544/379
TXT The additional hetero ring is five-membered and unsaturated (e.g., thienyl
    piperazines, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 374 wherein the additional hetero ring is
    five-membered and has at least one double bond between ring members.


CLS 544/380
TXT Polycyclo-carbocyclic ring system having at least three cyclos:

    Compounds under subclass 358 having a polycylco ring system which contains
    at least three carbocyclic rings.


CLS 544/381
TXT Piperazine ring bonded directly to the polycyclo-carbocyclic ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 380 wherein the polycyclo-carbocyclic ring system
    is bonded directly to the piperazine ring.


CLS 544/382
TXT Nitrogen attached directly to the piperazine ring by nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 358 wherein nitrogen is attached directly to the
    piperazine ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 544/383
TXT Chalcogen attached directly to piperazine ring nitrogen by nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 358 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached directly to a ring nitrogen of the
    piperazine ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 544/384
TXT Chalcogen bonded directly to piperazine ring carbon:

    Compounds under subclass 358 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to a ring carbon of the
    piperazine ring.


CLS 544/385
TXT Plural chalcogens bonded directly to piperazine ring carbons:

    Compounds under subclass 384 wherein at least two chalcogen atoms (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) are bonded directly to the
    six-membered hetero ring.


CLS 544/386
TXT Having -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen, bonded directly to the piperazine
    ring:

    Compounds under subclass 358 wherein a  group, in which X is chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium. or tellurium), is bonded directly to the
    piperazine ring.


CLS 544/387
TXT Plural -C(=X)- groups bonded directly to the piperazine ring:

    Compounds under subclass 386 wherein at least two  groups are bonded
    directly to the piperazine ring.


CLS 544/388
TXT Chalcogen or acyclic nitrogen bonded directly to at least one of the
    -C(=X)- groups:

    Compounds under subclass 387 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium), or acyclic nitrogen is bonded directly to at least
    one of the  groups.


CLS 544/389
TXT The -C(=X)- is part of a -C(=X)X-group, wherein the X's are the same or
    diverse chalcogens:

    Compounds under subclass 386 wherein the  is part of a  X - group, in which
    the X's are the same or diverse chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium,
    or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 544/390
TXT Halogen or acyclic nitrogen bonded directly to the -C(=X)- group:

    Compounds under subclass 386 wherein halogen or acyclic nitrogen is bonded
    directly to the  group.


CLS 544/391
TXT Carbocyclic ring containing:

    Compounds under subclass 386 which contain a carbocyclic ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 544/392
TXT Phenyl or napthyl bonded directly to ring nitrogen of the piperazine ring:

    Compounds under subclass 358 wherein a phenyl or napthyl group is bonded
    directly to a ring nitrogen of the piperazine ring.


CLS 544/393
TXT Acyclic nitrogen bonded directly to a -C(=X)- group, wherein X is chalcogen:

    Compounds under subclass 392 which contain acyclic nitrogen bonded directly
    to a  group, in which X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium).


CLS 544/394
TXT The other ring nitrogen has a substituent which includes chalcogen single
    bonded to acyclic carbon:

    Compounds under subclass 392 wherein the other ring nitrogen of the
    piperazine ring has a substituent which includes chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium or tellurium) singly bonded to an acyclic carbon, e.g., an
    alcohol or ether, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 544/395
TXT The other ring nitrogen is unsubstituted or alkyl substituted only, or salt
    thereof:

    Compounds under subclass 392 wherein the other ring nitrogen of the
    piperazine ring is unsubstituted or alkyl substituted only, or salts
    thereof.


CLS 544/396
TXT Plural carbocyclic rings bonded directly to the same acyclic carbon:

    Compounds under subclass 358 which contain at least two carbocyclic rings
    bonded directly to the same acyclic carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 544/397
TXT Chalcogen bonded directly to the carbon:
    Compounds under subclass 396 which contain chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) bonded directly to the acyclic carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 544/398
TXT Chalcogen attached indirectly to the piperazine ring by nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 358 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the piperazine ring by
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 544/399
TXT The chalcogen, X is in a -C(=X)- group:

    Compounds under subclass 398 wherein the chalcogen, X (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), is in an acyclic  group.


CLS 544/400
TXT Acyclic nitrogen bonded directly to the
    -C(=X)- group:

    Compounds under subclass 399 wherein acyclic nitrogen is bonded directly to
    the  group.


CLS 544/401
TXT The chalcogen is single bonded to both acyclic carbon and hydrogen:

    Compounds under subclass 398 wherein the chalcogen is in a hydroxy group
    which is bonded directly to carbon.


CLS 544/402
TXT Nitrogen attached indirectly to the piperazine ring by nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 358 wherein nitrogen is attached indirectly to the
    piperazine ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 544/403
TXT Carbocyclic ring containing:

    Compounds under subclass 358 which contain a carbocyclic ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 544/404
TXT N-hydrocarbyl piperazines:

    Compounds under subclass 358 in which a hydrocarbon substituent is bonded
    directly to a ring nitrogen of the six-membered hetero ring.


CLS 544/405
TXT Additional hetero ring which is unsaturated:

    Compounds under subclass 336 having, in addition to the six-membered hetero
    ring, a hetero ring which has at least one double bond between ring members.


CLS 544/406
TXT Having -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen, bonded directly to the diazine ring:

    Compounds under subclass 336 wherein a  group, in which X is chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), is bonded directly to the
    diazine ring.


CLS 544/407
TXT Nitrogen attached directly to the diazine ring by nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 406 wherein nitrogen is attached directly to the
    six-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 544/408
TXT Chalcogen bonded directly to diazine ring carbon:

    Compounds under subclass 336 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to a ring carbon of the
    six-membered hetero ring.


CLS 544/409
TXT Halogen attached directly to the diazine ring by nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 336 wherein halogen is attached directly to the
    six-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 544/410
TXT Unsubstituted or hydrocarbyl substituted only, or salt thereof:

    Compounds under subclass 336 wherein the six-membered hetero ring is
    unsubstituted or is substituted only by radicals which consist of hydrogen
    and carbon, or salts thereof.


CLS 546/
TTL ORGANIC COMPOUNDS -- PART OF THE CLASS 532-570 SERIES

CLS 546/
TXT IN THIS SERIES OF CLASS, CLASS 546 IS TO BE CONSIDERED AS AN INTEGRAL PART
    OF CLASS 260 (AFTER SUBCLASS 544) AND FOLLOWS THE SCHEDULE HIERARCHY
    RETAINING ALL PERTINENT DEFINITIONS AND CLASS LINES OF CLASS 260.


CLS 546/1
TXT Hetero ring is six-membered consisting of one nitrogen and five carbons:

    Compounds under Class 540, subclass 1 which contain a six-membered hetero
    ring consisting of one nitrogen and five carbon atoms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the destruction of hazardous or toxic waste.


CLS 546/2
TXT Heavy metal or aluminum containing:

    Compounds under subclass 1 which include aluminum or a metal having a
    specific gravity greater than four.

    (1)     Note.  Arsenic is considered a metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for compounds containing boron.

    14,     for compounds containing silicon.


CLS 546/3
TXT Arsenic containing:

    Compounds under subclass 2 which contain arsenic.


CLS 546/4
TXT The metal bonded directly to carbon, which carbon is a ring carbon of the
    six-membered hetero ring or which carbon is attached directly or indirectly
    to the six-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 2 wherein the metal is bonded directly (a) to a
    ring carbon of the six-membered hetero ring, or (b) to a carbon atom which
    additionally is attached directly or indirectly to the six-membered hetero
    ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:

    (2)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are compounds such as:


            which require "doubling back" through the metal to satisfy the
    conditions necessary for inclusion here.


CLS 546/5
TXT The metal is bonded directly to chalcogen of a -C(=X)X- group, wherein the
    X's are the same or diverse chalcogens, which group is attached directly or
    indirectly to the six-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 2 wherein the metal is bonded directly to the
    singly bonded chalcogen of a  group, in which the X's are the same or
    diverse chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), which
    group is additionally attached directly or indirectly to the six-membered
    hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  These compounds are usually referred to as "salts".

    (2)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 546/6
TXT The metal is bonded directly to chalcogen which chalcogen is attached
    directly or indirectly to the six-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 2 wherein the metal is bonded directly to a
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) which is attached
    directly or indirectly to the six-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 546/7
TXT The chalcogen is bonded directly to ring carbon of a quinoline ring system
    (including hydrogenated):

    Compounds under subclass 6 wherein the chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached directly to a ring carbon of a
    quinoline ring system; said ring system, having the following basic
    structure, may contain double bonds between ring members:

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/8
TXT The metal is in an anion and the six-membered hetero ring is in a cation:


    Compounds under subclass 2 wherein the metal is in an anion, i.e., a group
    with a negative charge, and the six-membered hetero ring is in a cation,
    i.e., a group with a positive charge.

    (1)     Note.  These compounds are usually pyridinium salts of metallates,
    e.g.,

    (2)     Note.  An additional example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/9
TXT The metal is bonded directly to halogen in the anion:

    Compounds under subclass 8 in which the metal in the anion is bonded
    directly to halogen; i.e., a metal-halogen bond.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/10
TXT Polycyclo ring system having the six-membered hetero ring as one of the
    cyclos:

    Compounds under subclass 2 wherein the six-membered hetero ring is a cyclo
    in a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note. An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/11
TXT Piperidine containing:

    Compounds under subclass 2 which contain a piperidine ring, i.e., a
    six-membered hetero ring consisting of one ring nitrogen and five ring
    carbons with no double bonds between ring members.


CLS 546/12
TXT Azide or acyclic nitrogen containing:

    Compounds under subclass 2 which contain an acyclic nitrogen atom or an
    azide group.

    (1)     Note. The azide has been considered to be cyclic,    , as well as
    acyclic,

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/13
TXT Boron containing:

    Compounds under subclass 1 which contain boron.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/14
TXT Silicon containing:

    Compounds under subclass 1 which contain silicon.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 546/15
TXT Spiro:

    Compounds under subclass 1 which contain a spiro ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/16
TXT The spiro includes the six-membered hetero ring:

    Compounds under subclass 15 wherein at least one of the rings in the spiro
    ring system is the six-membered hetero ring which consists of one ring
    nitrogen and five ring carbons.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/17
TXT Polycyclo ring system having one of the two rings which form the spiro as
    one of the cyclos:

    Compounds under subclass 16 wherein one of the two rings which form the
    spiro ring system is additionally one of the cyclos of a polycyclo ring
    system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/18
TXT Polycyclo ring system having the six-membered hetero ring as one of the
    cyclos:

    Compounds under subclass 17 wherein the six-membered hetero ring is one of
    the cyclos of the polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/19
TXT At Least three ring hetero atoms in the two rings which form the spiro:

    Compounds under subclass 16 wherein the spiro ring system contains at least
    two ring hetero atoms in addition to the ring nitrogen of the six-membered
    hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 546/20
TXT At least three ring nitrogens in the two rings which form the spiro:

    Compounds under subclass 19 wherein the spiro ring system includes at least
    two ring nitrogen atoms in addition to the one ring nitrogen of the
    six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 546/21
TXT Phosphorus attached directly to the six-membered hetero ring by nonionic
    bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 1 wherein phosphorus is attached directly to the
    six-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/22
TXT Phosphorus attached indirectly to the six-membered hetero ring by nonionic
    bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 1 wherein phosphorus is attached indirectly to the
    six-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 546/23
TXT Polycyclo ring system having the six-membered hetero ring as one of the
    cyclos:

    Compounds under subclass 22 wherein the six-membered hetero ring is one of
    the cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Compounds in which phosphorus is attached directly by
    nonionic bonding to any ring of the polycyclo ring system other than the
    six-membered hetero ring are provided for herein as the attachment of the
    phosphorus to the six-membered hetero ring is considered to be indirect.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/24
TXT Chalcogen bonded directly to ring carbon fo the six-membered hetero ring:

    Compounds under subclass 22 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to a ring carbon of the
    six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 546/25
TXT The phosphorus is bonded directly to the chalcogen:

    Compounds under subclass 24 in which the phosphorus is bonded directly to
    the chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 546/26
TXT Polycyclo ring system having the six-membered hetero ring as one of the
    cyclos:

    Compounds under subclass 1 wherein the six-membered hetero ring is one of
    the cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/27
TXT The polycyclo ring system has at least ten cyclos and at least four ring
    nitrogens: Compounds under subclass 26 wherein the polycyclo ring system
    contains at least ten cyclos and at least four ring nitrogens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/28
TXT Nonacyclo ring system having the six-membered hetero ring as one of the
    cyclos:

    Compounds under subclass 26 in which the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly nine rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/29
TXT The six-membered hetero ring shares ring nitrogen with a five-membered
    cyclo which contains additional ring nitrogen:

    Compounds under subclass 28 wherein the nitrogen atom of the six-membered
    hetero ring is also a member of a five-membered cyclo which contains
    additional ring nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/30
TXT Octacyclo ring system having the six-membered hetero ring as one of the
    cyclos:

    Compounds under subclass 26 in which the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly eight rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/31
TXT Plural ring hetero atoms in the octacyclo ring system (e.g., flavanthrone,
    cepharanthrine, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 30 wherein the octacyclo ring system includes at
    least one ring hetero atom in addition to the ring nitrogen of the
    six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/32
TXT At least four ring nitrogens in the octacyclo ring system (e.g.,
    naphthoylene dibenzimidazole, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 31 wherein the octacyclo ring system contains at
    least four ring nitrogens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/33
TXT Heptacyclo ring system having the six-membered hetero ring as one of the
    cyclos:

    Compounds under subclass 26 in which the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly seven rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/34
TXT Two of the cyclos share at least three ring members (e.g., protoveratrine,
    etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 33 wherein at least three ring members of one
    cyclo are ring members of an additional cyclo in the heptacyclo ring system
    (i.e., bridged).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound included herein is:


CLS 546/35
TXT At least three ring hetero atoms in the heptacyclo ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 34 wherein the heptacyclo ring system includes at
    least two ring hetero atoms in addition to the ring nitrogen of the
    six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/36
TXT Plural ring hetero atoms in the heptacyclo ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 33 wherein the heptacyclo ring system includes at
    least one ring hetero atom in addition to the ring nitrogen of the
    six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:





CLS 546/37
TXT Ring carbon is shared by three of the cyclos (e.g., perylene
    tetracarboxylic acid diimide, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 36 wherein one ring carbon is a member of three of
    the cyclos in the heptacyclo ring system (i.e., peri-fusion).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/38
TXT Hexacyclo ring system having the six-membered hetero ring as one of the
    cyclos:

    Compounds under subclass 26 in which the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly six rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/39
TXT Two of the cyclos share at least three ring members (e.g., etheno
    morphides, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 38 wherein at least three ring members of one
    cyclo are ring members of an additional cyclo in the hexacyclo ring system
    (i.e., bridged).



    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/40
TXT Plural ring nitrogens in the hexacyclo ring system (e.g., reserpic acid
    lactone, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 39 wherein the hexacyclo ring system includes at
    least two ring nitrogens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/41
TXT Plural ring hetero atoms in the hexacyclo ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 38 wherein the hexacyclo ring system contains at
    least one ring hetero atom in addition to the ring nitrogen in the
    six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/42
TXT Pentacyclo ring system having the six-membered hetero ring as one of the
    cyclos:

    Compounds under subclass 26 in which the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly five rings.


CLS 546/43
TXT Two of the cyclos share at least three ring members (i.e., bridged):

    Compounds under subclass 42 wherein at least three ring members of one
    cyclo are ring members of an additional cyclo in the pentacyclo ring system
    (i.e., bridged).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/44
TXT One of the five cyclos is five-membered and includes ring chalcogen (e.g.,
    codeine, morphine, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 43 wherein one of the cyclos of the pentacyclo
    ring system is a five-membered hetero ring which contains ring chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/45
TXT Nitrogen or divalent chalcogen double bonded directly to carbocyclic ring
    of the pentacyclo ring system (e.g., morphinones, etc):

    Compounds under subclass 44 wherein a nitrogen atom or a divalent chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is attached directly by a
    double bond to a carbocyclic ring of the pentacyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for  herein are:


CLS 546/46
TXT A Single chalcogen is bonded directly to ring carbon of the pentacyclo ring
    system (e.g., desoxy morphine, etc):

    Compounds under subclass 44 wherein exactly one chalcogen atom (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to a ring carbon
    of the pentacyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for those compounds which contain
    only one chalcogen bonded directly to a ring carbon of the pentacyclo ring
    system, e.g., the desoxy morphines, etc.

    (2)     Note.  An example of such a compound is:


CLS 546/47
TXT Plural ring hetero atoms in the pentacyclo ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 42 wherein the pentacyclo ring system contains at
    least one ring hetero atom in addition to the ring nitrogen of the
    six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/48
TXT Three or more ring hetero atoms in the pentacyclo ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 47 wherein the pentacyclo ring system contains at
    least two ring hetero atoms in addition to the ring nitrogen of the
    six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/49
TXT Two ring nitrogens in the pentacyclo ring system (e.g., quinacridones,
    etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 47 wherein the pentacyclo ring system contains
    exactly two ring nitrogens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/50
TXT Ring nitrogen is shared by two of the cyclos (e.g., yohimbanes, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 49 wherein a ring nitrogen is a member of two of
    the cyclos in the pentacyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/51
TXT Ring nitrogen is shared by five-membered cyclo and six-membered cyclo
    (e.g., vincamine, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 50 wherein the ring nitrogen of the six membered
    hetero ring is additionally a member of a five-membered cyclo in the
    pentacyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/52
TXT Additional ring nitrogen in the five-membered cyclo:

    Compounds under subclass 51 in which the five-membered ring contains
    additional ring nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein  are:


CLS 546/53
TXT Having -C(=X)-; wherein x is chalcogen, bonded directly to ring carbon of
    the pentacyclo ring system and also bonded directly to chalcogen or
    nitrogen:

    Compounds under subclass 50 in which a  group, wherein X is chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly both to a
    ring carbon of the pentacyclo ring system and to a chalcogen or nitrogen
    atom.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/54
TXT Plural chalcogens bonded directly to the same cyclo as is the -C(=X)-
    group:

    Compounds under subclass 53 wherein at least two chalcogens (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) are bonded directly to the same cyclo as is
    the  group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/55
TXT Trialkoxybenzoyl bonded directly to at least one of the chalcogens (e.g.,
    reserpine, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 54 in which bonded directly to at least one of the
    chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is a
    trialkoxybenzoyl group, i.e.,

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for herein is:


CLS 546/56
TXT Three or more ring carbons of the pentacyclo ring system are substituted
    (e.g., substituted quinacridones, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 49 which contain substituents (other than
    hydrogen) on at least three of the ring carbons of the pentacyclo ring
    system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for   herein  are:


CLS 546/57
TXT Three or more chalcogens containing:

    Compounds under subclass 56 which contain at least three chalcogens (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 546/58
TXT The pentacyclo ring system consists of five six-membered cyclos (e.g.,
    anthraquinone-benzacridones, etc):

    Compounds under subclass 42 wherein the pentacyclo ring system consists of
    five six-membered cyclos.


CLS 546/59
TXT Nitrogen attached directly to the pentacyclo ring system by nonionic
    bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 58 wherein nitrogen is attached directly to the
    pentacyclo ring system by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/60
TXT An additional ring is bonded directly to the nitrogen:

    Compounds under subclass 59 in which an additional ring is bonded directly
    to the nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/61
TXT Tetracyclo ring system having the six-membered hetero ring as one of the
    cyclos:

    Compounds under subclass 26 in which the poly-cyclo ring system consists of
    exactly four rings.


CLS 546/62
TXT Plural ring hetero atoms in the tetracyclo ring system (e.g., acronycines,
    etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 61 wherein the tetracyclo ring system contains at
    least one ring hetero atom in addition to the ring nitrogen of the
    six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/63
TXT Two of the cyclos share at least three ring members (i.e., bridged):

    Compounds under subclass 62 wherein at least three ring members of one
    cyclo are ring members of an additional cyclo in the tetracyclo ring system
    (i.e., bridged).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 546/64
TXT Three or more ring hetero atoms in the tetracyclo ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 62 wherein the tetracyclo ring system contains at
    least two ring hetero atoms in addition to the ring nitrogen of the
    six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/65
TXT Plural ring chalcogens in the tetracyclo ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 64 wherein the tetracyclo ring system contains at
    least two ring chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/66
TXT Ring carbon is shared by three of the cyclos:

    Compounds under subclass 62 wherein one ring carbon is a member of three of
    the cyclos in the tetracyclo ring system (i.e., peri-fusion).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/67
TXT The three cyclos consist of two carbocyclic rings and a five-membered
    hetero ring which includes a ring nitrogen (e.g., ergolines, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 66 wherein the three cyclos which share the ring
    carbon consist of two carbocyclic rings and one five-membered hetero ring
    which contains a ring nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/68
TXT Chalcogen or nitrogen bonded directly to ring carbon of the six-membered
    hetero ring:

    Compounds under subclass 67 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) or nitrogen is bonded directly to a ring carbon of
    the six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 546/69
TXT Having -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen, bonded directly to the six-membered
    hetero ring (e.g., lysergic acid, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 67 wherein a      group, in which X is chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), is bonded directly to the
    six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/70
TXT Two ring nitrogens in the tetracyclo ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 62 in which the tetracyclo ring system contains
    exactly two ring nitrogens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/71
TXT Ring nitrogen is shared by two of the cyclos:

    Compounds under subclass 61 wherein the ring nitrogen of the six-membered
    hetero ring is a member of an additional cyclo in the tetracyclo ring
    system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/72
TXT Two of the cyclos share at least three ring members or a ring carbon is
    shared by three of the cyclos (i.e., bridged or peri-fused):

    Compounds under subclass 71 wherein at least three ring members of one
    cyclo are ring members of an additional cyclo or a ring carbon is a member
    of three of the cyclos in the tetracyclo ring system (i.e., bridged or
    peri-fused).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 546/73
TXT The six-membered hetero ring shares ring members with one other cyclo only
    (e.g., pyrrocolines, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 71 wherein ring members of the six-membered hetero
    ring are ring members of one additional cyclo only in the tetracyclo ring
    system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/74
TXT Two of the cyclos share at least three ring members (e.g., morphinans,
    etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 61 wherein at least three ring members of one
    cyclo are ring members of an additional cyclo in the tetracyclo ring system
    (i.e., bridged).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/75
TXT Ring carbon is shared by three of the cyclos:

    Compounds under subclass 61 wherein one ring carbon is a member of three of
    the cyclos in the tetracyclo ring system (i.e., peri-fusion).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/76
TXT Chalcogen bonded directly to ring carbon of the six-membered hetero ring
    (e.g., anthrapyridones, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 75 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to a ring carbon of the
    six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/77
TXT The six-membered hetero ring shares ring members with one other cyclo only:

    Compounds under subclass 61 wherein ring members of the six-membered hetero
    ring are ring members of one additional cyclo only in the tetracyclo ring
    system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/78
TXT Plural chalcogens bonded directly to carbocyclic rings of the tetracyclo
    ring system (e.g., pyridoanthraquinones, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 77 wherein at least two chalcogens (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) are bonded directly to carbocyclic rings of
    the tetracyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/79
TXT Tricyclo ring system having the six-membered hetero ring as one of the
    cyclos:

    Compounds under subclass 26 in which the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly three rings.


CLS 546/80
TXT Plural ring hetero atoms in the tricyclo ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 79 wherein the tricyclo ring system contains at
    least one ring hetero atom in addition to the ring nitrogen of the
    six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/81
TXT Plural ring nitrogens in the tricyclo ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 80 wherein the tricyclo ring system contains at
    least two ring nitrogens.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 546/82
TXT Three or more ring hetero atoms in the tricyclo ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 81 wherein the tricyclo ring system contains at
    least one additional ring hetero atom.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 546/83
TXT At least one of the ring hetero atoms is chalcogen:

    Compounds under subclass 92 wherein at least one of the additional ring
    hetero atoms is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 546/84
TXT One of the cyclos is five-membered:

    Compounds under subclass 81 wherein one of the cyclos of the tricyclo ring
    system to five-membered.

    (1)     Note. An example of a compound provided for herein  is:


CLS 546/85
TXT The six-membered hetero ring shares ring members with the five-membered
    cyclo only (e.g., pyrido-indoles, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 84 in which the six-membered hetero ring has ring
    members in common with the five-membered ring only in the tricyclo ring
    system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/86
TXT Chalcogen bonded directly to ring carbon of the tricyclo ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 85 in which chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to ring carbon of the tricyclo
    ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provied for herein is:


CLS 546/87
TXT Nitrogen attached directly or indirectly to the tricyclo ring system by
    nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 85 in which nitrogen is attached directly or
    indirectly to the tricyclo ring system by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 546/88
TXT Phenanthrolines (including hydrogenated): Compounds under subclass 81
    wherein the tricyclo ring system consists of three six-membered rings
    forming the phenanthrene configuration in which two ring carbons have been
    replaced by ring nitrogens; said ring system may contain double bonds
    between ring members.

    (1)     Note.  The phenanthroline ring system can be represented by any one
    of the following basic structures:

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/89
TXT Ring oxygen in the tricyclo ring system: Compounds under subclass 80 in
    which the tricyclo ring system contains ring oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/90
TXT Plural ring oxygens in the tricyclo ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 89 in which the tricyclo ring system contains at
    least two ring oxygens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for here is:


CLS 546/91
TXT Tropane and oxirane in the tricyclo ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 89 wherein the tricyclo ring system consists of
    the tropane and oxirane nuclei

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/92
TXT Plural chalcogens bonded directly to ring carbons of the tricyclo ring
    system:

    Compounds under subclass 89 wherein at least two chalcogens (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) are bonded directly to ring carbons of the
    tricyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/93
TXT One of the cyclos has at least seven members:

    Compounds under subclass 79 wherein one of the cyclos of the tricyclo ring
    system has at least seven members.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/94
TXT Ring nitrogen is shared by two of the cyclos:

    Compounds under subclass 79 wherein the ring nitrogen is a member of two of
    the cyclos in the tricyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/95
TXT Benzo (a) quinolizines (including hydrogenated):

    Compounds under subclass 94 wherein the tricyclo ring system has the
    following basic structure, which may contain double bonds between ring
    members:


CLS 546/96
TXT Additional polycyclo ring system having ring nitrogen (e.g., emetine,
    etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 95 which contain an additional polycyclo ring
    system having ring nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/97
TXT Two of the cyclos share at least three ring carbons (e.g., benzomorphans,
    etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 79 wherein at least three ring carbons of one
    cyclo are ring carbons of an additional cyclo in the tricyclo ring system
    (i.e., bridged).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/98
TXT Ring carbon is shared by each of the three cyclos (e.g.,
    1,8-naphthalimides, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 79 wherein a ring carbon is a member of each of
    the cyclos of the tricyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 546/99
TXT Nitrogen, other than as nitro or nitroso, attached directly or indirectly
    to the tricyclo ring system by nonionic bonding:

    Compojnds under subclass 98 wherein nitrogen, except as a member of the
    nitro (-NO2) or nitro-so (-NO) group, is attached directly or indirectly to
    the tricyclo ring system by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 546/100
TXT The Nitrogen is bonded directly to a carbocyclic ring of the tricyclo ring
    system:

    Compounds under subclass 99 in which the nitrogen is bonded directly to a
    carbocyclic ring of the tricyclo ring system.


CLS 546/101
TXT Each of the three cyclos is six-membered (e.g., benzoquinolines, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 79 wherein the


    tricyclo ring system consists of three six-membered rings.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:



CLS 546/102
TXT Acridines (including hydrogenated):

    Compounds under subclass 101 wherein the tricyclo ring system has the
    following basic structure, which may contain double bonds between ring
    members:


CLS 546/103
TXT Chalcogen bonded directly to ring carbon of the six-membered hetero ring:

    Compounds under subclass 102 in which chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to ring carbon of the
    six-membered hetero ring.


CLS 546/104
TXT Nitrogen, other than as nitro or nitroso, attached directly or indirectly
    to the acridine ring system by nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 102 in which nitrogen, except as a member of the
    nitro (-NO2) or nitroso (-NO) group, is attached directly or indirectly to
    the acridine ring system by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein  are:


CLS 546/105
TXT The nitrogent is bonded directly to ring carbon of the six-membered hetero
    ring:

    Compounds under subclass 104 in which the nitrogen is bonded directly to
    ring carbon of the six-membered hetero ring.


CLS 546/106
TXT The nitrogen is part of a substituent which contains additional
    nonionically bonded nitrogen:

    Compounds under subclass 105 wherein the nitrogen is a member of a group
    containing additional nitrogen which is attached by nonionic bonding to the
    acridine ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 546/107
TXT Plural nitrogens, other than as nitro or nitroso, attached directly to the
    carbocyclic rings of the acridine ring system (e.g., 3, 6-diaminoacridines,
    etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 104 wherein at least two nitrogens, except as
    members of the nitro (-NO) or nitroso (-NO) group, are attached directly to
    the carbocyclic rings of the acridine ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/108
TXT Phenanthridines (including hydrogenated): Compounds under subclass 101
    wherein the tricyclo ring system has the following basic structure, which
    may contain double bonds between  ring  members:


CLS 546/109
TXT Unsaturated ring bonded directly to ring carbon of the six-membered hetero
    ring: Compounds under subclass 108 in which an unsaturated ring, i.e., a
    ring which contains at least one double bond between ring members, is
    bonded directly to ring carbon of the six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 546/110
TXT Chalcogen or -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen, attached directly to the
    six-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 101 in which chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur,selenium or tellurium), or a -C- group, in which X is chalcogen, is
    bonded directly to the six-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein  are:


CLS 546/111
TXT The tricyclo ring system consists of a five-membered carbocyclic ring ortho
    fused to both a six-membered carboxyclic ring and the six-membered hetero
    ring (e.g., indenopyridines, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 79 in which the tricyclo ring system consists of a
    five-membered carbocyclic ring ortho fused to both a six-membered
    carbocyclic ring and the six-membered hetero  ring; e .g.,

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/112
TXT Bicyclo ring system having the six-membered hetero ring as one of the
    cyclos:

    Compounds under subclass 26 in which the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly two rings.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 546/113
TXT Plural ring hetero atoms in the bicyclo ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 112 wherein the bicyclo ring system includes at
    least one ring hetero atom in addition to the ring nitrogen of the
    six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/114
TXT Ring sulfur in the bicyclo ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 113 in which the bicyclo ring system contains ring
    sulfur.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/115
TXT Ring oxygen in the bicyclo ring system:
    Compounds under subclass 113 in which the bicyclo ring system contains ring
    oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 546/116
TXT Acyclic chalcogen bonded directly to ring carbon of the bicyclo ring
    system:

    Compounds under subclass 115 in which acyclic chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to ring carbon of the
    bicyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Lactones of pyridine carboxylic acids are provided for in
    this subclass, e.g.:


CLS 546/117
TXT At least four ring nitrogens in the bicyclo ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 113 wherein the bicyclo ring system contains at
    least four ring nitrogens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/118
TXT Three ring nitrogens in the bicyclo ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 113 wherein the bicyclo ring system contains
    exactly three ring nitrogens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/119
TXT Two of the ring nitrogens are bonded directly to each other:

    Compounds under subclass 118 wherein two of the ring nitrogens are bonded
    directly to each other.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/120
TXT Having -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen, bonded directly to the bicyclo ring
    system: Compounds under subclass 119 wherein a  group, in which X is
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), is bonded
    directly to the bicyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/121
TXT Ring nitrogen is shared by the two cyclos: Compounds under subclass 113
    wherein the ring nitrogen is a member of both cyclos of the bicyclo ring
    system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/122
TXT The other cyclo in the bicyclo ring system is also six-membered (e.g.,
    naphthyridines, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 113 wherein the bicyclo ring system consists of
    two six-membered cyclos.


CLS 546/123
TXT Chalcogen and -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen bonded directly to ring
    carbons of the bicyclo ring system (e.g., 4-oxo-naphthyridine-3-carboxylic
    acid, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 122 in which both chalocogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium,  or tellurium) and a group, wherein X is chalcogen, are
    bonded directly to ring carbons of the bicyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/124
TXT Tropanes (including nor and dehydro forms): Compounds under subclass 112 in
    which the bicyclo ring system has the following basic structure:

    (1)     Note.  Included here also are the nor- (absence of methyl group on
    ring nitrogen) and dehydro- (presence of double bonds between ring members)
    forms of tropane.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/125
TXT Additional hetero ring containing:

    Compounds under subclass 124 which contain an additional hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/126
TXT Additional polycyclo ring system having the additional hetero ring as one
    of the cyclos:

    Compounds under subclass 125 wherein the additional hetero ring is one of
    the cyclos in a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/127
TXT Chalcogen bonded directly to ring carbon of the tropane ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 124 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to a ring carbon of the tropane
    ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/128
TXT Polycyclo-carbocyclic ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 127 having a carbocyclic ring system which
    contains at least two rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/129
TXT Additional chalcogen attached directly or indirectly to the tropane ring
    system by nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 127 wherein additional chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is attached directly or indirectly to the
    tropane ring system by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 546/130
TXT Three or more oxygens attached directly or indirectly to the tropane ring
    system by nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 129 in which at least three oxygens are attached
    directly or indirectly to the tropane ring system by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/131
TXT Hydroxy containing or containing oxy bonded directly to a group IA or group
    IIA light metal (i.e., -OH or -OM containing):

    Compounds under subclass 130 which contain either an -OH or an -OM group,
    wherein M is a Group IA or Group IIA metal having specific gravity less
    than four.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/132
TXT Having -C(=X), wherein X is chalcogen, bonded directly to the tropane ring
    system:

    Compounds under subclass 124 wherein a  group, in which X is chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), is bonded directly to the
    tropane ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/133
TXT Quinuclidines (including unsaturated):

    Compounds under subclass 112 wherein the bicyclo ring system has the
    following basic structure, which may contain double bonds between ring
    members:

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/134
TXT Quinoline containing (including hydrogenated):

    Compounds under subclass 133 containing the quinoline ring system, which
    may contain double bonds between ring members, i.e.,

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/135
TXT Additional hetero ring containing:

    Compounds under subclass 134 which contain an additional hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of  compounds provided  for  herein  are:



CLS 546/136
TXT Three or more chalcogens attached indirectly to the quinuclidine ring
    system by nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 134 in which at least three chalcogens (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) are attached indirectly to the
    quinuclidine ring system by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note. An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 546/137
TXT Chalcogen bonded directly to ring carbon of the quinuclidine ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 133 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to a ring carbon of the
    quinuclidine ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/138
TXT Quinolizines (including hydrogenated):

    Compounds under subclass 112 wherein the bicyclo ring system has the
    following basic structure, which may contain double bonds between ring
    members:

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/139
TXT Isoquinolines (including hydrogenated):

    Compounds under subclass 112 wherein the bicyclo ring system has the
    following structure, which may contain double bonds between ring members:


CLS 546/140
TXT Plural isoquinoline ring systems attached directly or indirectly to each
    other by nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 139 which contain at least two isoquinoline ring
    systems that are attached directly or indirectly to each other by nonionic
    bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Example of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 546/141
TXT Chalcogen attached directly to the six-membered hetero ring by nonionic
    bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 139 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached directly to the six-membered hetero
    ring of the isoquinoline ring system by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/142
TXT Plural chalcogens attached directly to the six-membered hetero ring by
    nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 141 wherein at least two chalcogens (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) are attached directly to the six-membered
    hetero ring of the isoquinoline ring system by nonionic bonding.


CLS 546/143
TXT Nitrogen, other than as nitro or nitroso, attached directly to the
    isoquinoline ring system by nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 139 wherein nitrogen, except as a member of the
    nitro (-NO2) or nitroso (-NO) group, is attached directly to the
    isoquinoline ring system by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/144
TXT Unsaturated ring attached directly to the six-membered hetero ring by
    nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 139 wherein an unsaturated ring, i.e., a ring
    having at least one double bond between ring members, is attached directly
    to the six-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  The term "unsaturated ring" as used herein does not refer to
    the six-membered carbocyclic ring of the isoquinoline ring system but
    rather to an additional unsaturated ring which is attached directly to the
    six-membered ring.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein  mare:


CLS 546/145
TXT Acyclic nitrogen double or triple bonded to carbon which is attached
    directly or indirectly to the isoquinoline ring system by nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 139 wherein acyclic nitrogen is attached by a
    double or triple bond to carbon which in turn is attached directly or
    indirectly to the isoquinoline ring system by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for  herein are:


CLS 546/146
TXT Having -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen, attached directly or indirectly to
    the isoquinoline ring system by nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 139 wherein a  group, in which X is chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), is bonded directly or
    indirectly to the isoquinoline ring system by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for  herein are:


CLS 546/147
TXT The -C(=X)- is Part of a -C(=X)X- group, wherein the X's are the same or
    diverse chalcogens:

    Compounds under subclass 146 in which the -C(=X)- is part of a  group,
    wherein the X's are the same, or diverse, chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium.)

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/148
TXT Unsaturated hetero ring attached indirectly to the isoquinoline ring system
    by nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 139 wherein an unsaturated hetero ring, i.e., a
    hetero ring having at least one double bond between ring members, is
    attached indirectly to the isoquinoline ring system by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/149
TXT Unsaturated carbocyclic ring attached indirectly to the six-membered hetero
    ring through an acyclic hydrocarbon chain:

    Compounds under subclass 139 wherein an unsaturated carbocyclic ring, i.e.,
    a ring consisting of carbon atoms and having at least one double bond
    between ring members, is attached indirectly to the six-membered hetero
    ring of the isoquinoline ring system through an acyclic hydrocarbon chain,
    i.e., a chain consisting of carbon and hydrogen atoms.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/150
TXT Single bond between 3,4-positions:

    Compounds under subclass 139 wherein there is a single bond between the
    3,4-positions of the isoquinoline ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/151
TXT N-alkyl or n-alkenyl isoquinoliniums which are otherwise unsubstituted or
    alkyl or alkenyl substituted only:

    Compounds under subclass 139 wherein the carbon atoms of the isoquinoline
    ring system are unsubstituted or contain an alkyl or alkenyl substituent
    only and in which the nitrogen atom is pentavalent having bonded directly
    thereto an alkyl or alkenyl group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein   is:


CLS 546/152
TXT Quinolines (including hydrogenated):

    Compounds under subclass 112 in which the bicyclo ring system has the
    following basic


    structure, which may contain double bonds between ring members:


CLS 546/153
TXT Chalcogen attached directly to the six-membered hetero ring by nonionic
    bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 152 in which chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached directly to the six-membered hetero
    ring of the quinoline ring system by nonionic bonding.


CLS 546/154
TXT Polycyclo-carbocyclic ring system bonded directly to the six-membered
    hetero ring (e.g., quinophthalones, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 153 in which a polycyclo-carbocyclic ring system
    is bonded directly to the six-membered hetero ring of the quinoline ring
    system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/155
TXT Plural chalcogens attached directly to the six-membered hetero ring by
    nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 153 in which at least two chalcogens (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) are attached directly to the
    six-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein are:


CLS 546/156
TXT Having -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen, bonded directly to the six-membered
    hetero ring:

    Compounds under subclass 153 wherein a  group, in which X is chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), is bonded directly to the
    six-membered hetero ring.


CLS 546/157
TXT Chalcogen attached directly at 2-position by nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 153 in which chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached directly at the 2-position of the
    quinoline ring system by nonionic bonding.


CLS 546/158
TXT Single bond between 3,4-positions:

    Compounds under subclass 157 in which there is a single bond between
    positions 3 and 4 of the quinoline ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/159
TXT Nitrogen, other than as nitro or nitroso, attached directly to the
    six-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 152 in which nitrogen, except as a member of the
    nitro (-NO2) or nitroso (-NO) group, is attached directly to the
    six-membered hetero ring of the quinoline ring system by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for  herein  are:




CLS 546/160
TXT Unsaturated carbocyclic ring bonded directly to the nitrogen:

    Compounds under subclass 159 in which an unsaturated carbocyclic ring,
    i.e., a ring consisting of carbon and having at least one double bond
    between ring members, is bonded directly to the nitrogen.


CLS 546/161
TXT Having -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen, bonded directly to the carbocyclic
    ring:

    Compounds under subclass 160 wherein a  group, in which X is chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), is bonded directly to the
    carbocyclic ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein are:


CLS 546/162
TXT Nitrogen attached indirectly to the six-membered hetero ring through the
    directly attached nitrogen by nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 159 wherein nitrogen is attached indirectly to the
    six-membered hetero ring through the nitrogen which is directly attached by
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  a re:


CLS 546/163
TXT Both nitrogens bonded directly to the same acyclic hydrocarbon group:

    Compounds under subclass 162 in which both nitrogen atoms are bonded
    directly to the same acyclic hydrocarbon group.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 546/164
TXT Fully saturated quinolines:

    Compounds under subclass 152 wherein the quinoline ring system is fully
    saturated, i.e., no double bonds between ring members.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/165
TXT Single bond between 1,2-positions and single bond between 3,4-positions:


    Compounds under subclass 152 in which there are single bonds between
    positions 1 and 2 and positions 3 and 4 of the quinoline ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 546/166
TXT The six-membered hetero ring is unsubstituted or alkyl substituted only:
    Compounds under subclass 165 in which the six-membered hetero ring is
    unsubstituted or substituted by alkyl groups only.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 546/167
TXT Unsaturated hetero ring attached directly to the quinoline ring system by
    nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 152 in which an unsaturated hetero ring is
    attached directly to the quinoline ring system by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein are:


CLS 546/168
TXT Having -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen, bonded directly to the quinoline
    ring system: Compounds under subclas 152 wherein a  group, in which X is
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), is bonded
    directly to the quinoline ring system.


CLS 546/169
TXT Acyclic nitrogen bonded directly to the
    -C(-X)- group:

    Compound under subclass 168 in which acyclic nitrogen is bonded directly to
    the  group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/170
TXT The -C(=X)- is part of -C(=X)X- group, wherein the X's are the same or
    diverse chalcogens:

    Compounds under subclass 168 wherein the  is part of a  group, in which the
    X's are the same or diverse chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein are:


CLS 546/171
TXT Nitrogen, other than as nitro or nitroso, attached directly to the
    carbocyclic ring of the quinoline ring system by nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 152 wherein nitrogen, except as a member of the
    nitro (-NO2) or nitroso (-NO) group, is attached directly to the
    carbocyclic ring of the quinoline ring system by nonionic bonding.


CLS 546/172
TXT Acyclic sulfur bonded directly to oxygen and directly or indirectly to the
    quinoline ring system by nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 152 in which acyclic sulfur is bonded both
    directly to oxygen and directly or indirectly to the quinoline ring system
    by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 546/173
TXT Unsaturated carbocyclic ring attached directly to the quinoline ring system
    by nonionic bonding (e.g., quinophthalones, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 152 in which an unsaturated carbocyclic ring is
    attached directly to the quinoline ring system by nonionic bonding.


CLS 546/174
TXT Having -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen, attached indirectly to the
    quinoline ring system by nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 152 in which a  group, wherein X is chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), is attached indirectly to
    the quinoline ring system by nonionic bonding.


CLS 546/175
TXT Nitrogen bonded directly to the -C(=X)- group:

    Compounds under subclass 174 in which nitrogen is bonded directly to the
    group.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for   herein  are:


CLS 546/176
TXT Nitrogen, other than as nitro or nitroso, attached indirectly to the
    quinoline ring system by nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 152 wherein nitrogen, except as a member of the
    nitro (-NO2) or nitroso (-NO) group, is attached indirectly to the
    quinoline ring system by nonionic bonding.


CLS 546/177
TXT Chalcogen attached directly to the carbocyclic ring of the quinoline ring
    system by nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 176 in which chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached directly to the carbocyclic ring of the
    quinoline ring system by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 546/178
TXT Chalcogen attached directly to the carbocyclic ring of the quinoline ring
    system by nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 152 in which chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached directly to the carbocyclic ring of the
    quinoline ring system by nonionic bonding.


CLS 546/179
TXT The chalcogen is in an -OH, -SH, -OM or -SM group (M is group IA or group
    IIA light metal):

    Compounds under subclass 178 in which the chalcogen is part of an -OH, -SH,
    -OM or -SM group; wherein M is a Group IA or Group IIA metal having a
    specific gravity less than four.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein  is:


CLS 546/180
TXT Halogen of nitro attached directly or indirectly to the quinoline ring
    system by nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 152 in which halogen or a nitro group (-NO2) is
    attached directly or indirectly to the quinoline ring system by nonionic
    bonding.


CLS 546/181
TXT Quinolines which are unsubstituted or which are alkyl or alkenyl
    substituted only, or salt thereof:

    Compounds under subclass 152 wherein the quinoline ring system is either
    unsubstituted or substituted by alkyl or alkenyl groups only, or salts
    thereof.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein  is:


CLS 546/182
TXT Addition salts:

    Compounds under subclass 181 which are addition salts of (a) unsubstituted
    quinoline or (b) quinoline substituted by alkyl or alkenyl radicals only.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 546/183
TXT Chalcogen bonded directly to ring carbon of the bicyclo ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 112 in which chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to ring carbon of the bicyclo
    ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 546/184
TXT Piperdines:

    Compounds under subclass 1 in which the six-membered hetero ring,
    consisting of one nitrogen and five carbons, contains no double bonds
    between ring members, i.e., the piperidine ring.


CLS 546/185
TXT Process of forming a piperidine ring from a pyridine ring or from a
    partially hydrogenated pyridine ring:

    Processes under subclass 184 wherein the piperidine ring is prepared by the
    hydrogenation of pyridine or partially hydrogenated pyridine.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes all hydrogenation processes for the
    formation of piperidine from pyridine or partially hydrogenated pyridine,
    whether the hydrogenation reaction is a single step process or merely one
    step in a multistage reaction process.


CLS 546/186
TXT Plural piperidine rings:

    Compounds under subclass 184 which contain at least two piperidine rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein  is:


CLS 546/187
TXT Additional hetero ring containing:

    Compounds under subclass 186 which contain an additional hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 546/188
TXT Chalcogen attached directly to a ring carbon of a piperidine ring by
    nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 186 in which chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached directly to a piperidine ring by
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein  is:

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    261,    for tautomers of chalcogen double bonded directly to piperidine
    (i.e., chalcogen attached directly to pyridine or partially hydrogenated
    pyridine), e.g.,


CLS 546/189
TXT Having -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen, bonded directly to a piperidine
    ring:

    Compounds under subclass 186 wherein a  group, in which X is chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), is bonded directly to a
    piperidine ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein  is:


CLS 546/190
TXT Having -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen, attached indirectly to a piperidine
    ring by nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 186 wherein a  group, in which X is chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), is attached indirectly to a
    piperidine ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein  is:


CLS 546/191
TXT Carbocyclic ring containing:

    Compounds under subclass 186 which contain a carbocyclic ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/192
TXT Additional ring containing:

    Compounds under subclass 184 which contain an additional ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein  is:


CLS 546/193
TXT Pyridine ring or partially hydrogenated pyridine ring:

    Compounds under subclass 192 in which the additional ring is a pyridine
    ring or partially hydrogenated pyridine ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein  are:


CLS 546/194
TXT Carbocyclic ring containing:

    Compounds under subclass 193 which additionally contain a carbocyclic ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein  is:


CLS 546/195
TXT The additional ring is one of the cyclos in a polycyclo ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 192 in which the additional ring is one of the
    cyclos in a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for here  in  is:


CLS 546/196
TXT Hetero ring in the polycyclo ring system:
    Compounds under subclass 195 wherein the polycyclo ring system contains a
    hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein  is:


CLS 546/197
TXT Plural ring hetero atoms in the polycyclo ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 196 in which the polycyclo ring system contains at
    least two ring hetero atoms.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein   are:


CLS 546/198
TXT Ring nitrogen in the polycyclo ring system: Compounds under subclass 197 in
    which the polycyclo ring system contains a ring nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein   are:


CLS 546/199
TXT Plural ring nitrogens in the polycyclo ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 198 in which the polycyclo ring system contains at
    least two ring nitrogen atoms.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein are:


CLS 546/200
TXT Ring nitrogen in the polycyclo ring system: Compounds under subclass 196 in
    which the polycyclo ring system contains a ring nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein  is:


CLS 546/201
TXT Bicyclo ring system which is indole (including hydrogenated):

    Compounds under subclass 200 wherein the polycyclo ring system is bicyclo
    and consists of the following basic structure in which the bonds between
    the ring members may be single or double  bonds:

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein  is:


CLS 546/202
TXT Ring sulfur in the polycyclo ring system:
    Compounds under subclass 196 in which the polycyclo ring system contains a
    ring sulfur.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provied for herein is:


CLS 546/203
TXT The polycyclo ring system is tricyclo-carbocyclic:

    Compounds under subclass 195 in which the polycyclo ring system consists of
    three carbocyclic rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/204
TXT Chalcogen bonded directly to the tricyclo-carbocyclic ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 203 in which chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to the tricyclo-carbocyclic ring
    system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/205
TXT The polycyclo ring system is bicyclo-carbocyclic:

    Compounds under subclass 195 in which the polycyclo ring system consists of
    two carbocyclic rings.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 546/206
TXT Chalcogen bonded directly to the bicyclo-carbocyclic ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 205 in which chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to the bicyclo-carbocyclic ring
    system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 546/207
TXT The additional ring is a hetero ring:

    Compounds under subclass 192 in which the additional ring is a hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 546/208
TXT The additional hetero ring has at least nitrogen as a ring hetero atom:

    Compounds under subclass 207 in which the additional hetero ring contains
    ring nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/209
TXT Ring sulfur or ring oxygen in the additional hetero ring:

    Compounds under subclass 208 in which the additional heteror ring
    additionally contains ring sulfur or ring oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 546/210
TXT Plural ring nitrogens in the additional hetero ring:

    Compounds under subclass 208 in which the additional hetero ring contains
    at least two ring nitrogens.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 546/211
TXT 1,2-diazole (including hydrogenated):

    Compounds under subclass 210 wherein the additional hetero ring consists of
    two ring nitrogens in adjacent positions and three ring carbons; i.e.,

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein  is:


CLS 546/212
TXT The additional hetero ring consists of one sulfur and four carbons:

    Compounds under subclass 207 in which the additional hetero ring consists
    of one ring sulfur and four ring carbons.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein is:


CLS 546/213
TXT Carbocyclic ring containing:

    Compounds under subclass 212 which contain a carbocyclic ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein   are:


CLS 546/214
TXT The additional hetero ring consists of one oxygen and four carbons:

    Compounds under subclass 207 in which the additional hetero ring consists
    of one oxygen and four carbons.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein  is:


CLS 546/215
TXT Cyano bonded directly to the piperidine ring:

    Compounds under subclass 192 in which a -CbN groups is bonded directly to
    the piperidine ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 546/216
TXT Chalcogen bonded directly to ring carbon of the piperidine ring:

    Compounds under subclass 192 in which chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to a ring carbon of the
    piperidine ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290,    for tautomers of chalcogen double bonded directly to piperidine
    (i.e., chalcogen attached directly to pyridine or partially hydrogenated
    pyridine), e.g.,


CLS 546/217
TXT Chalcogen and a carbocyclic ring bonded directly at 4-position:

    Compounds under subclass 216 in which chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) and a carbocyclic ring are bonded directly to the
    piperidine ring at the 4-position.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/218
TXT The chalcogen, X, is part of a -C(=X)X-group, wherein the X's are the same
    or diverse chalcogens:

    Compounds under subclass 217 in which the chalcogen, X, is part of a
    group, wherein the X's are the same or diverse chalcogens (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein are:


CLS 546/219
TXT Plural chalcogens bonded directly to ring carbons of the piperidine ring:

    Compounds under subclass 216 in which at least two chalcogens (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) are bonded directly to ring carbons
    of the piperidine ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein are:

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    296,    for tautomers of chalcogen double bonded directly to piperidine
    (i.e., chalcogen attached directly to pyridine or partially hydrogenated
    pyridine), e.g.,


CLS 546/220
TXT Having -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen, attached directly or indirectly to
    the piperidine ring by nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 219 wherein a  group, in which X is chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), is attached directly, or
    indirectly to the piperidine ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for here is:


CLS 546/221
TXT Having -C(=X), wherein X is chalcogen, attached directly or indirectly to
    the piperidine ring by nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 216 wherein a  group, in which X is chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), is attached directly or
    indirectly to the piperidine ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 546/222
TXT The -C(=X)- group and the piperidine ring are bonded directly to the same
    chalcogen: Compounds under subclass 221 wherein the  group and the
    piperidine ring are each bonded directly to the same chalcogen (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) atom.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/223
TXT Nitrogen attached directly to the piperidine ring by nonionic bonding:


    Compounds under subclass 192 in which nitrogen is attached directly to the
    piperidine ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304+,   for tautomers of nitrogen double bonded directly to piperidine
    (i.e.,


            nitrogen attached directly to pyridine or partially hydrogenated
    pyridine), e.g.,


CLS 546/224
TXT Acyclic nitrogen bonded directly to a -C(=X)- group, wherein X is
    chalcogen:

    Compounds under subclass 223 wherein acyclic nitrogen is bonded directly to
    a  group, in which X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 546/225
TXT Having -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen, bonded directly to the piperidine
    ring:

    Compounds under subclass 192 in which a  group, wherein X is chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), is bonded directly to the
    piperdine ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 546/226
TXT At 1-position:

    Compounds under subclass 225 wherein the  group is bonded directly to the
    piperidine ring at the 1-position, i.e., to the nitrogen atom of the ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 546/227
TXT The -C(=X)- is part of a -C(=X)X- group, wherein the X's are the same or
    diverse chalcogens:

    Compounds under subclass 225 wherein the  is part of a  group, in which the
    X's are the same, or diverse chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 546/228
TXT Carbocyclic ring bonded directly at 4-position:

    Compounds under subclass 227 in which a carbocyclic ring is bonded directly
    to the piperidine ring at the 4-position.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 546/229
TXT Nitrogen attached indirectly to the piperidine ring by nonionic bonding:


    Compounds under subclass 192 in which nitrogen is attached indirectly to
    the piperidine ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein are:


CLS 546/230
TXT Cyano attached indirectly to the piperidine ring by nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 229 in which the -C N group is attached indirectly
    to the piperidine ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for  herein  are:


CLS 546/231
TXT Plural acyclic nitrogens bonded directly to the same carbon or single
    bonded directly to each other:

    Compounds under subclass 229 containing at least two acyclic nitrogen atoms
    which are bonded directly to the same carbon or single bonded directly to
    each other.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein are:


CLS 546/232
TXT Chalcogen attached indirectly to the piperidine ring by nonionic bonding:


    Compounds under subclass 229 in which chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the piperidine ring by
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 546/233
TXT Acyclic nitrogen bonded directly to A-C(=X)- group, wherein X is chalcogen:


    Compounds under subclass 232 containing an acyclic nitrogen which is bonded
    directly to a  group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein are:


CLS 546/234
TXT Plural carbocyclic rings containing:

    Compounds under subclass 233 which contain at least two carbocyclic rings.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein are:


CLS 546/235
TXT The chalcogen, X, is in a -C(=X)- group: Compounds under subclass 232 in
    which the chalcogen, X (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), is
    in a  group.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 546/236
TXT Chalcogen attached indirectly to the piperidine ring by nonionic bonding:


    Compounds under subclass 192 in which chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the piperidine ring by
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 546/237
TXT The chalcogen, X, is in a -C(=X)- group: Compounds under subclass 236 in
    which the chalcogen, X (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), is
    in a  group.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 546/238
TXT The -C(=X)- is part of a -C(=X)X- group, wherein the X's are the same or
    diverse chalcogens:

    Compounds under subclass 237 wherein the  is part of a  group, in which the
    X's are the same, or diverse chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 546/239
TXT Plural carbocyclic rings containing:

    Compounds under subclass 238 which contain at least two carbocyclic rings.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 546/240
TXT The chalcogen is in an -OH or -OM group (M is group IA or group IIA light
    metal):

    Compounds under subclass 236 in which the chalcogen is in an -OH or -OM
    group, wherein M is a Group IA or Group IIA metal having a specific gravity
    less than four.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 546/241
TXT The -OH or -OM is bonded to an acyclic carbon, which carbon is bonded
    directly to two rings:

    Compounds under subclass 240 where in the -OH or -OM group is bonded to an
    acyclic carbon atom which is bonded directly to two rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/242
TXT Chalcogen bonded directly to ring carbon of the piperidine ring:

    Compounds under subclass 184 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to a ring carbon of the
    piperidine ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290,    for tautomers of chalcogen double bonded directly to piperidine
    (i.e., chalcogen attached directly to pyridine or partially hydrogenated
    pyridine), e.g.,


CLS 546/243
TXT At 2-position:

    Compounds under subclass 242 in which the chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded to the 2-position of the piperidine ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290,    for tautomers of chalcogen double bonded directly to piperidine
    (i.e., chalcogen attached directly to pyridine or partially hydrogenated
    pyridine), e.g.,




CLS 546/244
TXT Nitrogen attached directly to the piperidine ring by nonionic bonding:


    Compounds under subclass 184 wherein nitrogen is attached directly to the
    piperidine ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    304+,   for tautomers of nitrogen double bonded directly to piperidine
    (i.e.,


            nitrogen attached directly to pyridine or partially hydrogenated
    pyridine), e.g.,




CLS 546/245
TXT Having -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen: Compounds under subclass 184 which
    contain  a group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium,
    or tellurium, bonded directly to the piperidine ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 546/246
TXT Nitrogen attached indirectly to the piperidine ring by nonionic bonding:


    Compounds under subclass 184 in which nitrogen is attached indirectly to
    the piperidine ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 546/247
TXT Acyclic nitrogen bonded directly to A-C(=X)- group, wherein X is chalcogen:

    Compounds under subclass 246 containing an


    acyclic nitrogen which is bonded directly to a

     group, in which X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for  herein  are:


CLS 546/248
TXT Chalcogen attached indirectly to the piperidine ring by nonionic bonding:


    Compounds under subclass 184 in which chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the piperidine ring by
    nonionic   bonding.

    (1)     Note.  A compound of the type would be provided for herein rather
    than above in subclasses 242+ as the chalcogen which is bonded directly to
    the six-membered hetero ring is attached to the ring nitrogen rather than a
    ring carbon.  Placement is based on the oxygen which is attached
    indirectly, i.e., through a sulfur atom, to the six-membered hetero ring.

    (2)     Note.  Additional examples of compounds  provided  for  herein are:


CLS 546/249
TXT Process of forming partially hydrogenated pyridine ring:

    Compounds under subclass 1 whereby a partially hydrogenated pyridine ring
    is formed, i.e., a six-membered hetero ring consisting of one nitrogen and
    five carbons having one or two double bonds between the ring members.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are processes of forming the partially
    hydrogenated pyridine ring by any means, e.g., ring closure, ring
    expansion, dehydrogenation, hydrogenation, etc.


CLS 546/250
TXT Process of forming pyridine ring:

    Processes under subclass 1 of forming the pyridine ring, i.e., six-membered
    hetero ring consisting of one nitrogen and five carbons having three double
    bonds between the ring members.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are processes of forming the pyridine ring by
    any means, e.g., ring closure, ring expansion, dehydrogenation, etc.


CLS 546/251
TXT The pyridine ring is unsubstituted or hydrocarbyl substituted only:

    Processes under subclass 250 wherein the pyridine ring which is formed is
    either unsubstituted or substituted by hydrocarbon groups only.

    (1)     Note.  Hydrocarbon groups consist of carbon and hydrogen only.  A
    substituent containing any other atom would not be provided for herein.


CLS 546/252
TXT Starting materials include a hetero ring having at least nitrogen as a ring
    hetero atom (e.g., starting materials include a piperidine ring, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 251 wherein the starting materials include a
    compound having a hetero ring which contains a ring nitrogen.


CLS 546/253
TXT Starting materials include a hydrocarbon:
    Processes under subclass 251 which utilize hydrocarbons as starting
    materials.


CLS 546/254
TXT Starting Materials Include an Acyclic Hydrocarbyl Ether or an Acyclic
    Hydrocarbyl Alcohol:

    Processes under subclass 251 which utilize an acyclic hydrocarbyl ether or
    an acyclic hydrocarbyl alcohol as a starting material.


CLS 546/255
TXT Plural pyridine or partially hydrogenated pyridine rings:

    Compounds under subclass 1 which contain at least two of the six-membered
    hetero rings, each consisting of one nitrogen and five carbons and having
    at least one double bond between ring members, i.e., pyridine or partially
    hydrogenated pyridine rings.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 546/256
TXT Additional hetero ring containing:

    Compounds under subclass 255 which contain an additional hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for  herein  are:


CLS 546/257
TXT Pyridine or partially hydrogenated pyridine rings are bonded directly to
    each other: Compounds under subclass 255 wherein the pyridine or partially
    hydrogenated pyridine rings are bonded directly to each other.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 546/258
TXT Halogen containing or process utilizing halogen or halogen containing
    compound:

    Under subclass 257 compounds which contain halogen or processes which
    utilize halogen or a halogen containing compound in the formation,
    purification, or recovery of a compound wherein the plural pyridine or
    partially hydrogenated pyridine rings are bonded directly to each other.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 546/259
TXT Metal containing catalyst utilized:

    Processes under subclass 258 utilizing a metal or metal containing compound
    as catalyst.


CLS 546/260
TXT Metal containing catalyst utilized:

    Processes under subclass 257 utilizing a metal or metal containing compound
    as catalyst.


CLS 546/261
TXT Chalcogen bonded directly to ring carbon of pyridine or partially
    hydrogenated pyridine ring:

    Compounds under subclass 255 containing chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) which is bonded directly to a ring carbon of a
    pyridine or partially hydrogenated pyridine ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188,    for tautomers of chalcogen attached directly to pyridine or
    partially hydrogenated pyridine (i.e., chalcogen double bonded directly to
    piperidine), e.g.,


CLS 546/262
TXT Having -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen, bonded directly to pyridine or
    partially hydrogenated pyridine ring:

    Compounds under subclass 255 in which a  group, wherein X is chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), bonded directly to pyridine
    or partially hydrogenated pyridine ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein are:


CLS 546/263
TXT The -C(=X)- is part of a -C(=X)X- group, wherein the X's are the same or
    diverse chalcogens:

    Compounds under subclass 262 wherein the  is part of a  group, in which the
    X's are the same or diverse chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 546/264
TXT Acyclic nitrogen attached directly or indirectly to pyridine or partially
    hydrogenated pyridine ring by nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 255 in which acyclic nitrogen is attached directly
    or indirectly to the six-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 546/265
TXT Having -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen, bonded directly to the acyclic
    nitrogen:

    Compounds under subclass 264 in which the acyclic nitrogen is bonded
    directly to a  group, wherei X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 546/266
TXT Chalcogen attached indirectly to pyridine or partially hydrogenated
    pyridine ring by nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 255 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to a pyridine or partially
    hydrogenated pyridine ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 546/267
TXT The chalcogen, X, is in a -C(=X)-group: Compounds under subclass 266
    wherein the chalcogen, X (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), is
    in a  group.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 546/268.1
TXT Additional hetero ring containing:

    Compounds under subclass 1 which contain an additional hetero ring.


CLS 546/268.4
TXT The additional hetero ring is five-membered having two or more ring hetero
    atoms of which at least one is nitrogen:

    Compounds under subclass 268.1 wherein the additional hetero ring is
    five-membered and has two or more ring hetero atoms of which at least one
    is nitrogen.

    (1)     Note. Examples of compounds provided for herein are:





CLS 546/268.7
TXT Thiadiazoles (including hydrogenated):

    Compounds under subclass 268.4 in which the five-membered hetero ring
    consists of two ring nitrogens, one ring sulfur, and two ring carbons.

    (1)     Note. An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 546/269.1
TXT Oxadiazoles (including hydrogenated):

    Compounds under subclass 268.4 in which the five-membered hetero ring
    consists of two ring nitrogens, one ring oxygen, and two ring carbons.

    (1)     Note. An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 546/269.4
TXT Oxadiazole ring bonded directly to the six-membered hetero ring:

    Compounds under subclass 269.1 wherein the six-membered hetero ring is
    bonded directly to the oxadiazole ring.

    (1)     Note. An example of a compound provided for herein is:




CLS 546/269.7
TXT 1,3-thiazoles (including hydrogenated):

    Compounds under subclass 268.4 in which the five-membered hetero ring has
    sulfur in the 1-position, nitrogen in the 3-position, and carbons in the
    remaining three positions.

    (1)     Note. This subclass provides for compounds containing the following
    ring which may have double bonds between its members:



CLS 546/270.1
TXT Polycyclo ring system having the 1,3-thiazole ring as one of the cyclos:

    Compounds under subclass 269.7 wherein the 1,3-thiazole ring is one of the
    cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note An example of a compound provided for herein is:




CLS 546/270.4
TXT 1,3-thiazole ring bonded directly to the six-membered hetero ring:

    Compounds under subclass 269.7 wherein the six-membered hetero ring is
    bonded directly to the 1,3-thiazole ring.


CLS 546/270.7
TXT Nitrogen attached directly to the 1,3-thiazole ring by nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 269.7 wherein the 1,3-thiazole ring is attached
    directly to nitrogen by nonionic bonding.


CLS 546/271.1
TXT 1,2-thiazoles (including hydrogenated):

    Compounds under subclass 268.4 in which the five-membered hetero ring has
    sulfur in the 1-position, nitrogen in the 2-position, and carbons in the
    remaining three positions.

    (1)     Note. This subclass provides for compounds containing the following
    ring which may have double bonds between its members:




CLS 546/271.4
TXT 1,3-oxazoles (including hydrogenated):

    Compounds under subclass 268.4 in which the five-membered hetero ring has
    oxygen in the 1-position, nitrogen in the 3-position, and carbons in the
    remaining three positions.

    (1)     Note. This subclass provides for compounds containing the following
    ring which may have double bonds between its members:



CLS 546/271.7
TXT Polycyclo ring system having the 1,3-oxazole ring as one of the cyclos:

    Compounds under subclass 271.4 wherein the 1,3-oxazole ring is one of the
    cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note. An example of a compound provided for herein is:




CLS 546/272.1
TXT 1,2-oxazoles (including hydrogenated):

    Compounds under subclass 268.4 in which the five-membered hetero ring has
    oxygen in the 1-position, nitrogen in the 2-position, and carbons in the
    remaining three positions.

    (1)     Note. This subclass provides for compounds containing the following
    ring which may have double bonds between its members:




CLS 546/272.4
TXT 1,2,4-triazoles (including hydrogenated):

    Compounds under subclass 268.4 in which the five-membered hetero ring has
    nitrogens in the 1,2 and 4-positions and carbons in the remaining two
    positions.

    (1)     Note. This subclass provides for compounds containing the following
    ring which may have double bonds between its members:




CLS 546/272.7
TXT 1,3-diazoles (including hydrogenated):

    Compounds under subclass 268.4 in which the five-membered hetero ring has
    nitrogens in the 1- and 3-positions and carbons in the remaining three
    positions.

    (1)     Note. This subclass provides for compounds containing the following
    ring which may have double bonds between its members:



CLS 546/273.1
TXT Polycyclo ring system having the 1,3-diazole ring as one of the cyclos:

    Compounds under subclass 272.7 wherein the 1,3-diazole ring is one of the
    cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note. An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 546/273.4
TXT Bicyclo ring system which is benzimidazole (including hydrogenated):

    Compounds under subclass 273.1 wherein the polycyclo ring system is bicyclo
    and consists of the following basic structure in which the bonds between
    the ring members may be single or double bonds:



CLS 546/273.7
TXT Chalcogen bonded directly to a ring carbon of the 1,3-diazole ring:

    Compounds under subclass 273.4 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to a ring carbon of the
    1,3-diazole ring.


CLS 546/274.1
TXT The 1,3-diazole ring is bonded directly to the six-membered hetero ring:

    Compounds under subclass 272.7 wherein the six-membered hetero ring is
    bonded directly to the 1,3-diazole ring.

    (1)     Note. An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 546/274.4
TXT Chalcogen attached directly to the 1,3-diazole ring by nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 272.7 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached directly to the 1,3-diazole ring by
    nonionic bonding.


CLS 546/274.7
TXT Nitrogen or -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen, attached directly to the
    1,3-diazole ring by nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 272.7 in which nitrogen or -C(=X)-, wherein X is
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium), is attached
    directly to the 1,3-diazole ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 546/275.1
TXT Chalcogen attached indirectly to the 1,3-diazole ring by acyclic nonionic
    bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 272.7 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the 1,3-diazole ring by
    acyclic nonionic bonding.


CLS 546/275.4
TXT 1,2-diazoles (including hydrogenated):

    Compounds under subclass 268.4 in which the five-membered hetero ring has
    nitrogens in the 1- and 2-positions and carbons in the remaining three
    positions.

    (1)     Note. This subclass provides for compounds containing the following
    ring which may have double bonds between its members:



CLS 546/275.7
TXT Polycyclo ring system having the 1,2-diazole ring as one of the cyclos:

    Compounds under subclass 275.4 wherein the 1,2-diazole ring is one of the
    cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 546/276.1
TXT Chalcogen attached directly to the 1,2-diazole ring by nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 275.4 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) is attached directly to the 1,2-diazole ring by
    nonionic bonding.


CLS 546/276.4
TXT The additional hetero ring is five-membered  consisting of one nitrogen and
    four carbons:

    Compounds under subclass 268.1 wherein the additional hetero ring is
    five-membered and consists of one ring nitrogen and four ring carbons.

    (1)     Note. Examples of compounds provided for herein are:





CLS 546/276.7
TXT Polycyclo ring system having the five-membered hetero ring as one of the
    cyclos:

    Compounds under subclass 276.4 wherein the five-membered hetero ring is one
    of the cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 546/277.1
TXT Bicyclo ring system which is isoindole (including hydrogenated):

    Compounds under subclass 276.7 wherein the polycyclo ring system is bicyclo
    and consists of the following basic structure in which the bonds between
    the ring members may be single or double bonds:



    (1)     Note. An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 546/277.4
TXT Bicyclo ring system which is indole (including hydrogenated):

    Compounds under subclass 276.7 wherein the polycyclo ring system is bicyclo
    and consists of


    the following basic structure in which the bonds between the ring members
    may be single or double bonds:



CLS 546/277.7
TXT Chalcogen attached directly to the five-membered hetero ring by nonionic
    bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 277.4 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached directly to the five-membered hetero
    ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 546/278.1
TXT Having -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen, bonded directly to the
    five-membered hetero ring:

    Compounds under subclass 277.4 in which -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to the
    five-membered hetero ring.


CLS 546/278.4
TXT Chalcogen attached directly to the five-membered hetero ring by nonionic
    bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 276.4 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached directly to the five-membered hetero
    ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 546/278.7
TXT Plural chalcogens attached directly to the five-membered hetero ring by
    nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 278.4 wherein at least two chalcogens (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) are attached directly to the
    five-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 546/279.1
TXT Nitrogen or -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen, attached directly to the
    five-membered ring by nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 276.4 in which nitrogen or -C(=X)-, wherein X is
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is attached
    directly to the five-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 546/279.4
TXT Nicotine, per se, or its salts:

    Compounds under subclass 276.4 which have the following structure, or salts
    thereof:



    (1)     Note.  In addition to nicotine, included herein are salts thereof,
    such as, nicotine sulfate.



CLS 546/279.7
TXT Ring sulfur in the additional hetero ring:

    Compounds under subclass 268.1 wherein the additional hetero ring contains
    ring sulfur.

    (1)     Note. An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 546/280.1
TXT The additional hetero ring is six-membered:

    Compounds under subclass 279.7 wherein six ring atoms are present in the
    additional hetero ring.

    (1)     Note. An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 546/280.4
TXT The additional hetero ring is five-membered:

    Compounds under subclass 279.7 wherein five ring atoms are present in the
    additional hetero ring.


CLS 546/280.7
TXT Plural ring sulfurs in the additional hetero ring:

    Compounds under subclass 280.4 in which the additional hetero ring
    contains at least two ring sulfurs.


CLS 546/281.1
TXT Polycyclo ring system having the additional hetero ring as one of the
    cyclos:

    Compounds under subclass 280.4 wherein the additional hetero ring  is one
    of the cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 546/281.4
TXT Nitrogen attached directly to the six-membered hetero ring or to the
    additional hetero ring by nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 280.4 wherein the six-membered hetero ring or the
    additional hetero ring is attached directly to nitrogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note. An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 546/281.7
TXT Ring oxygen in the additional hetero ring:

    Compounds under subclass 268.1 wherein the additional hetero ring contains
    ring oxygen.

    (1)     Note. An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 546/282.1
TXT The additional hetero ring is six-membered:

    Compounds under subclass 281.7 wherein six ring atoms are present in the
    additional hetero ring.


CLS 546/282.4
TXT Plural ring oxygens in the additional hetero ring:

    Compounds under subclass 282.1 in which the additional hetero ring contains
    at least two ring oxygens.


CLS 546/282.7
TXT Polycyclo ring system having the additional hetero ring as one of the
    cyclos:

    Compounds under subclass 282.1 wherein the additional hetero ring is one of
    the cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 546/283.1
TXT Chalcogen attached directly to the additional hetero ring by nonionic
    bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 282.7 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached directly to the additional hetero ring
    by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 546/283.4
TXT The additional hetero ring is five-membered:

    Compounds under subclass 281.7 wherein five ring atoms are present in the
    additional hetero ring.


CLS 546/283.7
TXT Plural ring oxygens in the additional hetero ring:

    Compounds under subclass 283.4 in which the additional hetero ring contains
    at least two ring oxygens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 546/284.1
TXT Polycyclo ring system having the additional hetero ring as one of the
    cyclos:

    Compounds under subclass 283.4 wherein the additional hetero ring is one of
    the cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 546/284.4
TXT Chalcogen attached directly to the additional hetero ring by nonionic
    bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 283.4 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached directly to the additional hetero ring
    by nonionic bonding.


CLS 546/284.7
TXT Nitrogen or -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen, attached directly to the
    additional hetero ring by nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 283.4 in which nitrogen or -C(=X)-, wherein X is
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), is attached
    directly to the additional hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 546/285
TXT Polycyclo-carbocyclic ring system having at least three cyclos:

    Compounds under subclass 1 which contain a polycyclco-carbocyclic ring
    system having at least three cyclos.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for   herein are:


CLS 546/286
TXT Cyano bonded directly to the six-membered hetero ring:

    Compounds under subclass 1 which contain the C N group bonded directly to
    the six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein are:


CLS 546/287
TXT Additional cyano containing:

    Compounds under subclass 286 which  contain at least two -CbN groups.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/288
TXT Chalcogen bonded directly to ring carbon of the six-membered hetero ring:

    Compounds under subclass 286 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to a ring carbon of the
    six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for   herein  are:


CLS 546/289
TXT Nitrogen attached directly to the six-membered hetero ring by nonionic
    bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 286 wherein nitrogen is attached directly to the
    six-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for  herein  are:


CLS 546/290
TXT Chalcogen bonded directly to ring carbon of the six-membered hetero ring:

    Compounds under subclass 1 which contain chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) bonded directly to ring carbon of the six-membered
    hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein are:

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216     and 242+, for tautomers of chalcogen attached directly to pyridine
    or partially hydrogenated pyridine (i.e., chalcogen double bonded directly
    to piperidine), e.g.,


CLS 546/291
TXT Chalcogen and acyclic nitrogen bonded directly to the same carbon:

    Compounds under subclass 290 in which chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) and acyclic nitrogen are bonded directly to the
    same carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for   herein are:


CLS 546/292
TXT The chalcogen or the acyclic nitrogen is bonded directly to the
    six-membered hetero ring:

    Compounds under subclass 291 in which the chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) or the acyclic nitrogen is bonded directly to the
    six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 546/293
TXT Sulfur bonded directly to acyclic nitrogen: Compounds under subclass 290
    which contain sulfur bonded directly to acyclic nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for   herein  are:


CLS 546/294
TXT Chalcogen bonded directly to chalcogen:

    Compounds under subclass 290 which contain chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) bonded directly to chalcogen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for   herein are:


CLS 546/295
TXT Halogen bonded directly to the six-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 294 which contain halogen bonded directly to the
    six-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/296
TXT Plural chalcogens bonded directly to ring carbons of the six-membered
    hetero ring: Compounds under subclass 290 containing at least two
    chalcogens (i.e., oxygens, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) which are bonded
    directly to ring carbons of the six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for  herein are:

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    219,    for tautomers of chalcogen attached directly to pyridine or
    partially hydrogenated pyridine (i.e., chalcogen double bonded directly to
    piperidine), e.g.,


CLS 546/297
TXT Nitrogen attached directly to the six-membered hetero ring by nonionic
    bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 290 which contain nitrogen attached directly to
    the six-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for   herein are:


CLS 546/298
TXT Having -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen, bonded directly to the six-membered
    hetero ring:

    Compounds under subclass 290 wherein a  group, in which X is chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), is bonded directly to the
    six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein are:


CLS 546/299
TXT Plural -C(=X)- groups, wherein X Is chalcogen, bonded directly to the
    six-membered hetero ring:

    Compounds under subclass 298 which contain at least two  groups bonded
    directly to the six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 546/300
TXT Nitrogen attached indirectly to the six-membered hetero ring by nonionic
    bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 290 in which nitrogen is attached indirectly to
    the six-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided   for  herein  are:


CLS 546/301
TXT Chalcogen attached indirectly to the six-membered hetero ring by nonionic
    bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 290 in which chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the six-membered hetero
    ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for   herein  are:


CLS 546/302
TXT Halogen attached directly or indirectly to the six-membered hetero ring by
    nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 301 in which halogen is attached directly or
    indirectly to the six-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compound provided for   herein are:


CLS 546/303
TXT Halogen attached directly or indirectly to the six-membered hetero ring by
    nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 290 in which halogen is attached directly or
    indirectly to the six-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 546/304
TXT Nitrogen attached directly to the six-membered hetero ring by nonionic
    bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 1 wherein nitrogen is attached directly to the
    six-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein are:

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223     and 244, for tautomers of nitrogen attached directly to pyridine or
    partially hydrogenated pyridine (i.e., nitrogen double bonded directly to
    piperidine), e.g.,


CLS 546/305
TXT Sulfur and acyclic nitrogen bonded directly to the same carbon:

    Compounds under subclass 304 which contain sulfur and acyclic nitrogen
    bonded directly to the same carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 546/306
TXT Plural acyclic nitrogens bonded directly to the same carbon or single
    bonded directly to each other:

    Compounds under subclass 304 wherein at least two acyclic nitrogens are
    bonded directly to the same carbon or single bonded directly to each other.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 546/307
TXT Plural nitrogens attached directly to the six-membered hetero ring by
    nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 304 in which at least two nitrogens are attached
    directly to the six-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 546/308
TXT Acyclic nitrogen bonded directly to A -C(=X)- group, wherein X Is
    chalcogen:

    Compounds under subclass 307 in which acyclic nitrogen is bonded directly
    to a   group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 546/309
TXT Acyclic nitrogen bonded directly to A -C(=X)- group, wherein X Is
    chalcogen:

    Compounds under subclass 304 in which acyclic nitrogen is bonded directly
    to a  group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for   herein are:


CLS 546/310
TXT Having -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen, bonded directly to the six-membered
    hetero ring:

    Compounds under subclass 304 wherein a  group, in which X is chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), is bonded directly to the
    six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided   for  herein are:


CLS 546/311
TXT The nitrogen bonded additionally only to hydrogen:

    Compounds under subclass 304 in which the remaining valences of the
    nitrogen are bonded only to hydrogen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for   herein are:

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223     and 244, for tautomers of nitrogen attached directly to pyridine or
    partially hydrogenated pyridine (i.e., nitrogen double bonded directly to
    piperidine), e.g.,


CLS 546/312
TXT Chalcogen attached indirectly to the six-membered hetero ring by nonionic
    bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 304 which contain chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) attached indirectly to the six-membered hetero ring
    by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for   herein are:


CLS 546/313
TXT Thiocarbonyl bonded directly to the six-membered hetero ring:

    Compounds under subclass 1 wherein a  group is bonded directly to the
    six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 546/314
TXT Carbonyl bonded directly to the six-membered hetero ring:

    Compounds under subclass 1 wherein a  group is bonded directly to the
    six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided   for  herein are:


CLS 546/315
TXT At 3-position:

    Compounds under subclass 314 in which the carbonyl group is attached
    directly to the 3-posiiton of the six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided   for  herein are:



CLS 546/316
TXT Acyclic nitrogen bonded directly to the carbonyl:

    Compounds under subclass 315 in which acyclic nitrogen is bonded directly
    to the carbonyl group.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided   for  herein are:


CLS 546/317
TXT Processes of obtaining nicotinamide, per se: Processes under subclass 316
    whereby nicotinamide, i.e., pyridine-3-carboxylic acid amide, is prepared.

    (1)     Note.  Nicotinamide is represented by the   structure:


CLS 546/318
TXT The carbonyl is in a -COO- group:

    Compounds under subclass 315 in which the carbonyl is part of a -COO- group.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for   herein  are:


CLS 546/319
TXT Processes of obtaining nicotinic acid, per se, or a derivative of nicotinic
    acid wherein the only substituents are -COO- Groups, or salt thereof:

    Processes under subclass 318 for the preparation of nicotinic acid, per se,
    or of a derivative thereof wherein the only substituents are additional
    -COO- groups, or of salts thereof.


CLS 546/320
TXT By oxidation:

    Processes under subclass 319 wherein the nicotinic acid or carboxy
    derivative thereof is obtained by an oxidation reaction.


CLS 546/321
TXT Additional -COO- group bonded directly to the six-membered hetero ring:

    Compounds under subclass 318 which contain an additional -COO- group bonded
    directly to the six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 546/322
TXT Carbocyclic ring containing:

    Compounds under subclass 318 which contain a carbocyclic ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein are:


CLS 546/323
TXT Acyclic nitrogen bonded directly to the carbonyl:

    Compounds under subclass 314 in which acyclic nitrogen is bonded directly
    to the carbonyl group.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided   for  herein are:


CLS 546/324
TXT Acyclic nitrogen single bonded directly to acyclic nitrogen:

    Compounds under subclass 323 in which acyclic nitrogen is single bonded
    directly to acyclic nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided   for   herein are:


CLS 546/325
TXT Carbon double bonded directly to one of the acyclic nitrogens:

    Compounds under subclass 324 in which carbon is double bonded directly to
    one of the acyclic nitrogens.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided   for   herein are:


CLS 546/326
TXT The carbonyl is in a -COO- group:

    Compounds under subclass 314 in which the carbonyl group is part of a -COO-
    group.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided   for  herein are:


CLS 546/327
TXT Processes:

    Processes under subclass 326 of preparing, purifying, or recovering the
    carboxy containing pyridine compound.


CLS 546/328
TXT Acyclic nitrogen attached indirectly to the six-membered hetero ring by
    nonionic bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 314 wherein acyclic nitrogen is attached
    indirectly to the six-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided   for  herein are:


CLS 546/329
TXT Nitrogen attached indirectly to the six-membered hetero ring by nonionic
    bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 1 wherein nitrogen is attached indirectly to the
    six-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of compounds provided   for  herein  is:


CLS 546/330
TXT Cyano attached indirectly to the six-membered hetero ring by nonionic
    bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 329 in which a -CbN group is attached indirectly
    to the six-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided   for  herein  are:


CLS 546/331
TXT Sulfur and acyclic nitrogen bonded directly to the same carbon:

    Compounds under subclass 329 which contain a carbon atom to which is bonded
    directly sulfur and acyclic nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided   for   herein are:


CLS 546/332
TXT Plural acyclic nitrogens bonded directly to the same carbon or single
    bonded directly to each other:

    Compounds under subclass 329 wherein at least two acyclic nitrogens are
    bonded directly to the same carbon or single bonded directly to each other.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein are:


CLS 546/333
TXT The six-membered hetero ring and another ring bonded directly to the same
    carbon: Compounds under subclass 329 wherein the six-membered hetero ring
    and another ring are bonded directly to the same carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/334
TXT Chalcogen attached indirectly to the six-membered hetero ring by nonionic
    bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 329 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded indirectly to the six-membered hetero
    ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/335
TXT The chalcogen, X, is part of a -C(=X)X- group, wherein the X's are the same
    or diverse chalcogens:

    Compounds under subclass 334 in which the chalcogen, X, is part of a
    group, wherein the X's are the same or diverse chalcogens (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided   for  herein are:


CLS 546/336
TXT Acyclic nitrogen bonded directly to A -C(=X)- group wherein X is chalcogen:

    Compounds under subclass 334 wherein acyclic nitrogen is bonded directly to
    a  group, in which X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided   for  herein are:


CLS 546/337
TXT Additional ring containing:

    Compounds under subclass 336 which include an additional ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided   for  herein are:


CLS 546/338
TXT Acyclic nitrogen bonded directly to chalcogen:

    Compounds under subclass 334 wherein acyclic nitrogen is bonded directly to
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided   for  herein are:


CLS 546/339
TXT Chalcogen attached indirectly to the six-membered hetero ring by nonionic
    bonding (e.g., sulfato betaines, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 1 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the six-membered hetero
    ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein are:


CLS 546/340
TXT The chalcogen, X, is in a -C(=X)- group: Compounds under subclass 339 in
    which the chalcogen, X (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), is
    in a  group.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for   herein are:


CLS 546/341
TXT The -C(=X)- is part of a -C(=X)X- group, wherein the X's are the same or
    diverse chalcogen:

    Compounds under subclass 340 in which the  is part of a  group, wherein the
    X's are the same or diverse chalcogens (i.e. oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 546/342
TXT Additional ring containing:

    Compounds under subclass 341 which contain an additional ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for   herein are:


CLS 546/343
TXT The six-membered hetero ring and another ring bonded directly to the same
    carbon:

    Compounds under subclass 339 wherein the six-membered hetero ring and
    another ring are bonded directly to the same carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein are:


CLS 546/344
TXT The chalcogen is in an -OH or -OM group (M is group IA or group IIA light
    metal):

    Compounds under subclass 339 in which the chalcogen is part of an -OH or
    -OM group; wherein M is a Group IA or Group IIA metal having a specific
    gravity less than four.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided   for  herein are:


CLS 546/345
TXT Halogen attached directly to the six-membered hetero ring by nonionic
    bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 1 wherein halogen is attached directly to the
    six-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 546/346
TXT Halogen attached indirectly to the six-membered hetero ring by nonionic
    bonding:

    Compounds under subclass 1 wherein halogen is attached indirectly to the
    six-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided   for  herein are:


CLS 546/347
TXT The ring nitrogen of the six-membered hetero ring is pentavalent (e.g.,
    quaternary pyridinium salts, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 1 in which the ring nitrogen of the six-membered
    ring is pentavalent.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 546/348
TXT Unsubstituted or hydrocarbyl substituted only or salts thereof:

    Compounds under subclass 1 in which the six-membered hetero ring is
    unsubstituted or substituted by hydrocarbon radicals only, or salts thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Hydrocarbon radicals consist of carbon and hydrogen only.  A
    substituent containing any other atom would not be provided for herein.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for   herein  are:


CLS 546/349
TXT Alkylation or dealkylation process:

    Processes under subclass 348 in which an alkyl group is formed or removed.


CLS 546/350
TXT Unsaturated hydrocarbyl side chain:

    Compounds under subclass 348 which contain an unsaturated hydrocarbon side
    chain.

    (1)     Note.  An unsaturated hydrocarbon side chain is a chain consisting
    of carbon and hydrogen which contains at least one double or triple bond.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein are:


CLS 546/351
TXT Stabilized alkenyl pyridines:

    Compounds under subclass 350 which are alkenyl substituted pyridines that
    have been stabilized against polymerization.

    (1)     Note.  This stabilization is normally accomplished by adding to the
    alkenyl pyridine a polymerization inhibiting amount of certain compounds,
    such as an alkali-metal polysulfide, an iron halide, an indigo, etc.


CLS 546/352
TXT Process of forming the unsaturated hydrocarbyl side chain:

    Processes under subclass 350 whereby the unsaturated hydrocarbon side chain
    on the six-membered hetero ring is formed.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of processes provided for herein are:



CLS 546/353
TXT Purification or recovery:

    Processes under subclass 348 wherein the unsubstituted or hydrocarbyl
    substituted pyridine is separated from impurities or from the reaction
    medium.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for such processes as the vapor phase
    separation or 2,6-lutidine from beta- and gamma-picolines, the separation
    of aromatic pyridines using alkylene carbonates, the recovery of pyridine
    bases, the purification of 3-picoline, etc.


CLS 548/
TTL ORGANIC COMPOUNDS -- PART OF THE CLASS 532-570 SERIES

CLS 548/100
TXT Compounds under Class 540, subclass 1 which contain a five-membered hetero
    ring having two or more ring hetero atoms of which at least one is nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/101
TXT Compounds under subclass 100 which include aluminum or a metal having a
    specific gravity greater than 4.

    (1)     Note.  Arsenic is considered a metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for compounds containing boron or silicon.


CLS 548/102
TXT Compounds under subclass 101 which contain arsenic.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/103
TXT Compounds under subclass 101 wherein the metal is bonded directly (a) to a
    ring carbon of the five-membered hetero ring or (b) to a carbon atom which
    additionally is attached directly or indirectly to the five-membered hetero
    ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:

    (2)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are compounds such as:     which
    require "doubling back" through the metal to satisfy the conditions
    necessary for inclusion here.


CLS 548/104
TXT Compounds under subclass 101 wherein the metal is bonded directly to the
    singlybonded chalcogen of a X group, wherein the X's are the same or
    diverse chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), which
    group is attached directly or indirectly to the five-membered hetero ring
    by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  These compounds are usually referred to as "salts".

    (2)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/105
TXT Compounds under subclass 101 wherein the metal is bonded directly to a
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) which is attached
    directly to a ring carbon of the five-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/106
TXT Compounds under subclass 101 wherein the metal is bonded directly to
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) which is attached
    additionally indirectly to the five-membered hetero ring by nonionic
    bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/107
TXT Compounds under subclass 101 wherein the metal is in an anion, i.e., a
    group having a negative charge, and the five-membered hetero ring is in a
    cation, i.e., a group having a positive charge.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/108
TXT Compounds under subclass 101 wherein the five-membered hetero ring is a
    cyclo in a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:



CLS 548/109
TXT Compounds under subclass 101 which contain an acyclic nitrogen atom or the
    azide group.

    (1)     Note.  The azide group has been
    considered to be cyclic,  as well as acyclic,

    (2)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/110
TXT Compounds under subclass 100 which contain boron or silicon.


CLS 548/111
TXT Compounds under subclass 100 wherein phosphorus is attached directly to the
    five-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/112
TXT Compounds under subclass 100 wherein phosphorus is attached indirectly to
    the five-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/113
TXT Compounds under subclass 112 wherein the five-membered hetero ring is one
    of the cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Compounds in which phosphorus is attached directly by
    nonionic bonding to any ring of the polycyclo ring system other than the
    five-membered hetero ring are provided for herein as the attachment of the
    phosphorus to the five-membered hetero ring is considered to be indirect.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/114
TXT Compounds under subclass 113 wherein the polycyclo ring system and
    phosphorus are both bonded directly to the same chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) atom.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/115
TXT Compounds under subclass 112 in which the five-membered hetero ring and
    phosphorus are both bonded directly to the same nitrogen atom.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/116
TXT Compounds under subclass 112 in which the five-membered hetero ring and
    phosphorus are both bonded directly to the same chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) atom.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/117
TXT Compounds under subclass 116 wherein the five-membered hetero ring contains
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) as a ring hetero
    atom.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/118
TXT Compounds under subclass 116 wherein the five-membered hetero ring contains
    three or more ring nitrogens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/119
TXT Compounds under subclass 112 wherein the phosphorus is contained in a
    substituent which is attached directly to ring carbon of the five-membered
    hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/120
TXT Compounds under subclass 100 wherein the five-membered hetero ring contains
    ring selenium as an additional hetero atom and is one of the cylcos in a
    polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/121
TXT Compounds under subclass 120 in which the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly two rings, one of which is the five-membered hetero ring containing
    nitrogen and selenium as hetero atoms.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/122
TXT Compounds under subclass 100 wherein the five-membered hetero ring includes
    at least one atom each of sulfur, oxygen, nitrogen, and carbon and contains
    no other elements as ring members.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/123
TXT Compounds under subclass 100 wherein the five-membered hetero ring contains
    at least two ring sulfurs in addition to the ring nitrogen and ring carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/124
TXT Compounds under subclass 100 wherein the five-membered hetero ring contains
    at least two ring oxygens in addition to the ring nitrogen and ring carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/125
TXT Compounds under subclass 100 wherein the five-membered hetero ring includes
    at least one atom each of chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium) and carbon and at least two ring nitrogens, and contains no
    other elements as ring members.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/126
TXT Compounds under subclass 125 wherein the five-membered hetero ring is one
    of the cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/127
TXT Compounds under subclass 125 in which the five-membered hetero ring has
    sulfur in the 1-position, nitrogens in the 2- and 3-positions, and carbons
    in the remaining two positions.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for compounds containing the
    following ring which may have double bonds between its members:

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/128
TXT Compounds under subclass 125 in which the five-membered hetero ring has
    sulfur in the 1-position, nitrogens in the 2- and 4-positions, and carbons
    in the remaining two positions.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for compounds containing the
    following ring which may have double bonds between its members.


CLS 548/129
TXT Compounds under subclass 128 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to the ring carbon of the
    thiadiazole ring.


CLS 548/130
TXT Compounds under subclass 129 which contain nitrogen or additional chalcogen
    bonded directly to ring carbon of the thiadiazole ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/131
TXT Compounds under subclass 125 in which the five-membered hetero ring has
    oxygen in the 1-position, nitrogens in the 2- and 4-positions, and carbons
    in the remaining two positions.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for compounds containing the
    following ring which may have double bonds between its members.


CLS 548/132
TXT Compounds under subclass 131 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to ring carbon of the oxadiazole
    ring.


CLS 548/133
TXT Compounds under subclass 131 wherein nitrogen is attached directly to the
    oxadiazole ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 548/134
TXT Compounds under subclass 125 in which the five-membered hetero ring has
    sulfur in the 1-position, nitrogens in the 2- and 5-positions, and carbons
    in the remaining two positions.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for compounds containing the
    following ring which may have double bonds between its members:


CLS 548/135
TXT Compounds under subclass 134 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) or nitrogen is attached directly to ring carbon of
    the thiadiazole ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 548/136
TXT Compounds under subclass 125 in which the five-membered hetero ring has
    sulfur in the 1-position, nitrogens in the 3- and 4-positions, and carbons
    in the remaining two positions.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for compounds containing the
    following ring which may have double bonds between its members:


CLS 548/137
TXT Compounds under subclass 136 wherein a five-membered hetero ring consisting
    of two nitrogens and three carbons is attached directly to the thiadiazole
    ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/138
TXT Compounds under subclass 136 wherein nitrogen is attached directly to the
    thiadiazole ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/139
TXT Compounds under subclass 138 in which a     group, wherein X is chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), is attached directly to the
    nitrogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/140
TXT Compounds under subclass 139 in which an additional nitrogen is attached
    directly to the  group by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/141
TXT Compounds under subclass 138 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) or additional nitrogen is attached directly to ring
    carbon of the thiadiazole ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/142
TXT Compounds under subclass 136 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to each of the ring carbons of
    the thiadiazole ring, i.e., the 2- and 5-positions.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/143
TXT Compounds under subclass 125 in which the five-membered hetero ring has
    oxygen in the 1-position, nitrogens in the 3- and 4-positions, and carbons
    in the remaining two positions.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for compounds containing the
    following ring which may have double bonds between its members:


CLS 548/144
TXT Compounds under subclass 143 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to ring carbon of the oxadiazole
    ring.


CLS 548/145
TXT Compounds under subclass 143 wherein at least two carbocyclic rings are
    bonded directly to the oxadiazole ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 548/146
TXT Compounds under subclass 100 in which the five-membered hetero ring has
    sulfur in the 1-position, nitrogen in the 3-position, and carbons in the
    remaining three positions.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for compounds containing the
    following ring which may have a double bond between its members:


CLS 548/147
TXT Compounds under subclass 146 which contain a spiro ring system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for compounds containing a
    1,3-thiazole ring and a spiro ring system whether or not the thiazole ring
    is one of the cyclos in the spiro system.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:



CLS 548/148
TXT Compounds under subclass 146 wherein the thiazole ring is a cyclo in a
    polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/149
TXT Compounds under subclass 148 in which the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly four rings.


CLS 548/150
TXT Compounds under subclass 148 in which the polycylco ring system consists of
    exactly three rings.


CLS 548/151
TXT Compounds under subclass 150 wherein the tricyclo ring system contains at
    least one ring hetero atom in addition to the ring sulfur and ring nitrogen
    of the thiazole ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/152
TXT Compounds under subclass 148 in which the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly two rings.


CLS 548/153
TXT Compounds under subclass 152 wherein the bicyclo ring system contains at
    least one ring hetero atom in addition to the ring sulfur and ring nitrogen
    of the thiazole ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/154
TXT Compounds under subclass 153 wherein the ring nitrogen is a member of both
    of the cyclos in the bicyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/155
TXT Compounds under subclass 154 which have the following structure, or salts
    thereof, in which the bonds between the ring members may be single or
    double bonds:


CLS 548/156
TXT Compounds under subclass 152 containing at least two of the bicyclo ring
    systems having the following structure, which may contain double bonds
    between ring members:


CLS 548/157
TXT Compounds under subclass 156 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to ring carbon of the thiazole
    ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/158
TXT Compounds under subclass 157 which contain a polysulfide linkage between at
    least two benzothiazole ring systems.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/159
TXT Compounds under subclass 152 containing an additional hetero ring which is
    one of the cyclos in a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/160
TXT Compounds under subclass 152 which contain a polycyclo-carbocyclic ring
    system having at least three cyclos.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/161
TXT Compounds under subclass 152 wherein the nitrogen is attached directly to
    the thiazole ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 548/162
TXT Compounds under subclass 161 wherein the nitrogen is a ring member of a
    hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/163
TXT Compounds under subclass 161 wherein the nitrogen is bonded additionally
    directly to a  group, in which X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/164
TXT Compounds under subclass 161 wherein the nitrogen is bonded additionally
    only to hydrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/165
TXT Compounds under subclass 152 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to a ring carbon of the thiazole
    ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein are:


CLS 548/166
TXT Compounds under subclass 165 wherein an additional chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to the chalcogen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/167
TXT Compounds under subclass 165 wherein nitrogen is attached directly to the
    chalcogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/168
TXT Compounds under subclass 167 wherein the nitrogen is bonded additionally
    directly to two carbons.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/169
TXT Compounds under subclass 165 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the thiazole ring by
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:



CLS 548/170
TXT Compounds under subclass 169 wherein the chalcogen, X (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur,selenium, or tellurium), is in a group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/171
TXT Compounds under subclass 170 in which
    nitrogen is bonded directly to the group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/172
TXT Compounds under subclass 169 in which nitrogen is attached directly to
    chalcogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/173
TXT Compounds under subclass 165 wherein halogen is attached directly or
    indirectly to the bicyclo ring system by nonionic bonding.


CLS 548/174
TXT Compounds under subclass 165 in which sulfur attached directly to a ring
    carbon of the thiazole ring is either (a) attached by a double bond or (b)
    in a -SH or -SM group, wherein M is a Group IA or Group IIA light metal,
    i.e., a metal having a specific gravity less than 4.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/175
TXT Processes under subclass 174 in which the bicyclo ring system is formed.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are processes of forming the bicyclo ring
    system by any means e.g., ring enclosure, ring expansion, etc.


CLS 548/176
TXT Processes under subclass 175 which utilize aniline or an alkylated
    derivative thereof as a starting material.


CLS 548/177
TXT Processes under subclass 174 wherein the sulfur derivative of the bicyclo
    ring system is separated from impurities or from the reaction mixture.


CLS 548/178
TXT Compounds under subclass 152 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) or nitrogen is attached directly to the other cyclo
    of the bicyclo ring system by nonionic bonding, i.e., the cyclo other than
    the thiazole ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/179
TXT Compounds under subclass 152 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the bicyclo ring system
    by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/180
TXT Compounds under subclass 179 wherein the chalcogen, X (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur,selenium, or tellurium), is in a group.


CLS 548/181
TXT Compounds under subclass 146 containing a polycyclo heterocyclic ring
    system which has nitrogen as a ring hetero atom.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/182
TXT Compounds under subclass 146 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to ring carbon of the thiazole
    ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided herein are:


CLS 548/183
TXT Compounds under subclass 182 wherein at least two chalcogens (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) are bonded directly to ring carbons of the
    thiazole ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/184
TXT Compounds under subclass 182 wherein nitrogen is attached directly to the
    thiazole ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 548/185
TXT Compounds under subclass 184 in which
    nitrogen is bonded directly to a  group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/186
TXT Compounds under subclass 182 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the thiazole ring by
    nonionic bonding.


CLS 548/187
TXT Compounds under subclass 186 wherein the chalcogen, X (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur,selenium, or tellurium), is in a  group.


CLS 548/188
TXT Compounds under subclass 187 in which the
    group is bonded directly to the thiazole ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:



CLS 548/189
TXT Compounds under subclass 182 wherein nitrogen is attached indirectly to the
    thiazole ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/190
TXT Compounds under subclass 146 in which nitrogen is attached directly to the
    thiazole ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 548/191
TXT Compounds under subclass 190 wherein at least two nitrogens are attached
    directly to the thiazole ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/192
TXT Compounds under subclass 191 in which X
    nitrogen is bonded directly to a -C- group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/193
TXT Compounds under subclass 190 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the thiazole ring by
    nonionic bonding.


CLS 548/194
TXT Compounds under subclass 193 in which the chalcogen, X (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur,selenium, or tellurium), is in a   group.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/195
TXT Compounds under subclass 194 in which the
    nitrogen is bonded directly to the  group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/196
TXT Compounds under subclass 195 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) or an additional nitrogen isbonded directly to the
    group.


CLS 548/197
TXT Compounds under subclass 193 wherein nitrogen is bonded directly to
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/198
TXT Compounds under subclass 190 wherein nitrogen is attached indirectly to the
    thiazole ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 548/199
TXT Compounds under subclass 190 wherein the nitrogen is bonded additionally to
    hydrogen.


CLS 548/200
TXT Compounds under subclass 146 wherein a
     group, in which X is chalcogen, (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium), is bonded directly to the thiazole ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/201
TXT Compounds under subclass 200 in which the
     is part of a   X group, wherein the X's are the same or diverse chalcogens
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/202
TXT Compounds under subclass 146 in which there are two double bonds between
    the ring members of the thiazole ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/203
TXT Compounds under subclass 202 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to  the thiazole ring by
    nonionic bonding.


CLS 548/204
TXT Compounds under subclass 203 wherein the chalcogen, X (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur,selenium, or tellurium), is in a  group.


CLS 548/205
TXT Compounds under subclass 203 in which nitrogen is attached indirectly to
    the thiazole ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/206
TXT Compounds under subclass 100 in which the five-membered hetero ring has
    sulfur in the 1-position, nitrogen in the 2-position, and carbons in the
    remaining three positions.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for compounds containing the
    following ring which may have double bonds between its members:


CLS 548/207
TXT Compounds under subclass 206 wherein the thiazole ring is a cyclo in a
    polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  A thiazole ring in a polycyclo ring system is numbered as if
    it were a single ring and not part of a ring system; accordingly, the
    thiazole ring in each of the following poly-cyclo ring systems is
    considered to be 1, 2-thiazole:

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/208
TXT Compounds under subclass 207 wherein one ring carbon is a member of three
    of the cyclos in the polycyclo ring system (i.e., peri-fusion).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/209
TXT Compounds under subclass 207 wherein acyclic chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to a ring carbon of the
    thiazole ring.


CLS 548/210
TXT Compounds under subclass 209 in which at least three chalcogens (i.e,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) are bonded directly to the thiazole
    ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/211
TXT Compounds under subclass 210 which have the following structure, or salts
    thereof:


CLS 548/212
TXT Compounds under subclass 207 wherein nitrogen is attached directly to the
    thiazole ring of the polycyclo ring system by nonionic bonding.


CLS 548/213
TXT Compounds under subclass 206 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to ring carbon of the thiazole
    ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/214
TXT Compounds under subclass 206 wherein nitrogen or chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the thiazole ring
    by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/215
TXT Compounds under subclass 100 in which the five-membered hetero ring has
    oxygen in the 1-position, nitrogen in the 3-position, and carbons in the
    remaining three positions.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for compounds containing the
    following ring:


CLS 548/216
TXT Compounds under subclass 215 which contain a spiro ring system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for compounds containing a 1,
    3-oxazole ring and a spiro ring system whether or not the oxazole ring is
    one of the cyclos in the spiro system.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/217
TXT Compounds under subclass 215 wherein the oxazole ring is cyclo in a
    polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/218
TXT Compounds under subclass 217 wherein the polycyclo ring system contains at
    least one ring hetero atom in addition to the ring oxygen and ring nitrogen
    of the oxazole ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/219
TXT Compounds under subclass 217 which contain at least two of the
    oxazole-containing polycyclo ring systems.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/220
TXT Compounds under subclass 219 wherein the plural oxazole-containing
    polycyclo ring systems are each bonded directly either (a) to the same
    polycyclo ring system or (b) to the same hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/221
TXT Compounds under subclass 217 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium)

            is bonded directly to the carbon in the 2-position of the oxazole
    ring, i.e., the ring carbon between the ring oxygen and the ring nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/222
TXT Compounds under subclass 217 wherein nitrogen is bonded directly to the
    carbon in the 2-position of the oxazole ring, i.e., the ring carbon between
    the ring oxygen and the ring nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/223
TXT Compounds under subclass 217 wherein the polycyclo ring system contains at
    least four rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/224
TXT Compounds under subclass 217 wherein a carbocyclic ring is bonded directly
    to the carbon atom in the 2-position of the oxazole ring, i.e., the ring
    carbon between the ring oxygen and the ring nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/225
TXT Compounds under subclass 215 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to ring carbon of the oxazole
    ring.


CLS 548/226
TXT Compounds under subclass 225 wherein at least two chalcogens (i.e, oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) are bonded directly to ring carbons of the
    oxazole ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/227
TXT Compounds under subclass 226 wherein chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) are bonded directly to the carbons in the 2- and
    5-positions of the oxazole ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/228
TXT Compounds under subclass 225 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to the carbon atom in the
    5-position of the oxazole ring.


CLS 548/229
TXT Compounds under subclass 225 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to the carbon atom in the
    2-position of the oxazole ring, i.e., the ring carbon between the ring
    oxygen and the ring nitrogen.


CLS 548/230
TXT Compounds under subclass 229 wherein
    nitrogen, halogen, or, in which X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium), is attached directly to the oxazole ring by
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/231
TXT Compounds under subclass 229 wherein the substituent on the ring nitrogen
    contains nitrogen or ethylenic or acetylenic unsaturation, i.e., double or
    triple bond between two adjacent carbons.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/232
TXT Compounds under subclass 229 wherein the substituent on the 4- or
    5-position of the oxazole ring contains chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/233
TXT Compounds under subclass 215 wherein nitro- is bonded directly to ring
    carbon of the oxazole ring.


CLS 548/234
TXT Compounds under subclass 233 in which an additional ring is attached
    directly to the nitrogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/235
TXT Compounds under subclass 215 in which there are two double bonds between
    the ring members of the oxazole ring.


CLS 548/236
TXT Compounds under subclass 235 wherein -CN or
    , in which X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium),
    is attached directly or indirectly to the oxazole ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/237
TXT Compounds under subclass 215 in which there is only one double bond between
    ring members of the oxazole ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/238
TXT Compounds under subclass 237 wherein the substituent attached to the ring
    carbon in the 2-position, i.e., the ring carbon between the ring oxygen and
    the ring nitrogen, contains nitrogen, except as a member of the nitro
    (-NO2) or nitroso (-NO) group.


CLS 548/239
TXT Compounds under subclass 237 wherein attached to the ring carbon in the
    2-position of the oxazole ring, i.e., the ring carbon between the ring
    oxygen and the ring nitrogen, is either hydrogen or a hydrocarbon radical
    only.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided herein are:


CLS 548/240
TXT Compounds under subclass 100 in which the five-membered hetero ring has
    oxygen in the 1 position, nitrogen in the 2-position, and carbons in the
    remaining three positions.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provided for compounds containing the
    following ring which may have a double bond between its members:


CLS 548/241
TXT Compounds under subclass 240 wherein the oxazole ring is a cyclo in a
    polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided herein are:


CLS 548/242
TXT Compounds under subclass 241 wherein the polycyclo ring system contains at
    least one ring hetero atom in addition to the ring oxygen and ring nitrogen
    of the oxazole ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/243
TXT Compounds under subclass 240 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to ring carbon of the oxazole
    ring.


CLS 548/244
TXT Compounds under subclass 243 in which nitrogen is bonded directly to ring
    carbon of the oxazole ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/245
TXT Compounds under subclass 240 in which nitrogen is bonded directly to ring
    carbon of the oxazole ring.


CLS 548/246
TXT Compounds under subclass 245 wherein nitrogen is bonded directly to the
    carbon atom in the 3-position of the oxazole ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/247
TXT Compounds under subclass 240 in which there are two double bonds between
    the ring members of the oxazole ring.


CLS 548/248
TXT Compounds under subclass 247 wherein a
      group, in which X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium), is bonded directly to a ring carbon of the oxazole ring and
    additionally directly to a chalcogen or nitrogen atom.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/249
TXT Compounds under subclass 247 wherein the substituent attached to the
    4-position of the oxazole ring contains at least two chalcogens (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), each of which is attached
    indirectly to the oxazole ring by nonionic bonding and not one of which is
    bonded directly to a phenyl ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/250
TXT Compounds under subclass 100 in which the five-membered hetero ring
    consists of four ring nitrogens and one ring carbon.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for compounds containing the
    following ring which may have double bonds between its members:


CLS 548/251
TXT Compounds under subclass 250 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) or nitrogen is attached directly to the tetrazole
    ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/252
TXT Compounds under subclass 250 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the tetrazole ring by
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/253
TXT Compounds under subclass 252 wherein the chalcogen, X (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is in a  group.


CLS 548/254
TXT Compounds under subclass 250 wherein nitrogen is attached indirectly to the
    tetrazole ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/255
TXT Compounds under subclass 100 in which the five-membered hetero ring has
    nitrogens in the 1-, 2-, and 3-positions and carbons in the remaining two
    positions.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provided for compounds containing the
    following ring which may have double bonds between its members.


CLS 548/256
TXT Compounds under subclass 255 containing a polycyclo heterocyclic ring
    system which has oxygen as a ring hetero atom.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/257
TXT Compounds under subclass 255 wherein the triazole ring is a cyclo in a
    polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:



CLS 548/258
TXT Compounds under subclass 257 wherein a ring nitrogen is a member of two of
    the cyclos of the polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/259
TXT Compounds under subclass 257 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached directly to the polycyclo ring system
    by nonionic bonding.


CLS 548/260
TXT Compounds under subclass 257 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the polycyclo ring system
    by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/261
TXT Compounds under subclass 260 wherein the chalcogen, X (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), is in a   group.


CLS 548/262.2
TXT Compounds under subclass 100 in which the five-membered hetero ring has
    nitrogens in the 1-, 2-, and 4- positions and carbons in the remaining two
    positions.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for compounds containing the
    following ring which may have double bonds between its members:


CLS 548/262.4
TXT Compounds under subclass 262.2 wherein the triazole ring is a cyclo in a
    polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/262.6
TXT Compounds under subclass 262.2 wherein the triazole ring is bonded directly
    to a -NH-(C=X)-NHH group, wherein X is =NH or chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) and substitution may be made for hydrogen
    only.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/262.8
TXT Compounds under subclass 262.2 wherein the triazole ring is attached
    indirectly by acyclic nonionic bonding to plural nitrogens, two of which
    are bonded directly to the same acyclic carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/263.2
TXT Compounds under subclass 262.2 wherein ring carbon of the triazole ring is
    bonded directly to chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).


CLS 548/263.4
TXT Compounds under subclass 263.2 wherein at least two chalcogens are bonded
    directly to ring carbons of the triazole ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/263.6
TXT Compounds under subclass 263.4 wherein the ring nitrogens in the 1- and 2-
    positions of the triazole ring are unsubstituted, or may be substituted by
    alkyl or cycloalkyl only.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/263.8
TXT Compounds under subclass 263.2 wherein the triazole ring is attached
    directly to nitrogen or to halogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/264.2
TXT Compounds under subclass 263.2 wherein the chalcogen is bonded directly to
    an additional carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/264.4
TXT Compounds under subclass 264.2 wherein the chalcogen is attached indirectly
    to nitrogen or additional chalcogen by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/264.6
TXT Compounds under subclass 263.2 wherein the 4-position nitrogen of the
    triazole ring is bonded directly to a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/264.8
TXT Compounds under subclass 262.2 wherein the triazole ring is attached
    directly to nitrogen by nonionic bonding.


CLS 548/265.2
TXT Compounds under subclass 264.8 wherein at least two nitrogens are attached
    directly to the triazole ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/265.4
TXT Compounds under subclass 264.8 wherein the nitrogen is bonded directly to a
    -C(=X) group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium).0z

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/265.6
TXT Compounds under subclass 264.8 wherein the nitrogen is bonded additionally
    only to hydrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/265.8
TXT Compounds under subclass 262.2 wherein ring nitrogen of the triazole ring
    is bonded directly to a benzene ring, which benzene ring is further bonded
    directly to the acyclic carbon of a substituted or unsubstituted benzoyl or
    benzyl group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/266.2
TXT Compounds under subclass 262.2 wherein the triazole ring is attached
    directly or indirectly to an additional unsaturated hetero ring by nonionic
    bonding.

    (1)     Note.  The additional unsaturated hetero ring may itself be a
    1,2,4- triazole ring.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/266.4
TXT Compounds under subclass 266.2 wherein a polycyclo ring system has the
    additional unsaturated hetero ring as one of its cyclos, except
    alkylenedioxyphenyl.

    (1)     Note.  Compounds wherein the sole additional hetero ring present is
    alkylenedioxyphenyl are excluded from subclasses 266.2 and 266.4.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/266.6
TXT Compounds under subclass 266.2 wherein the triazole ring and the additional
    unsaturated hetero ring are attached to the same acyclic atom or to the
    same acyclic chain.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/266.8
TXT Compounds under subclass 262.2 wherein the triazole ring is bonded directly
    to cyano or to-C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/267.2
TXT Compounds under subclass 262.2 wherein the triazole ring is attached
    indirectly to nitrogen by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/267.4
TXT Compounds under subclass 267.2 wherein carbon is double or triple bonded to
    the nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/267.6
TXT Compounds under subclass 267.2 wherein the nitrogen is bonded directly to
    -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/267.8
TXT Compounds under subclass 262.2 wherein the triazole ring is attached
    indirectly to chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) by
    acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/268.2
TXT Compounds under subclass 267.8 wherein the chalcogen and the triazole ring
    are bonded directly to the same acyclic carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/268.4
TXT Compounds under subclass 267.8 wherein the triazole ring is bonded directly
    to an acyclic carbon which is multiple bonded to an additional carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/268.6
TXT Compounds under subclass 267.8 wherein the triazole ring is attached
    indirectly to plural chalcogens by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/268.8
TXT Compounds under subclass 262.2 wherein the same acyclic carbon is bonded
    directly to the triazole ring and to a hetero ring whose ring members are
    carbon and chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, and tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/269.2
TXT Process under subclass 262.2 which involve the synthesis of the
    1,2,4-triazole ring.


CLS 548/269.4
TXT Compounds under subclass 262.2 wherein the triazole ring is bonded directly
    to a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 548/300.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 100 wherein nitrogen atoms occupy the 1 and 3
    positions and carbon atoms occupy the remaining three positions of the
    five-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for compounds containing the
    following ring which may have double bonds between its members:

    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/300.4
TXT Compounds under subclass 300.1 having a  polycyclo ring system which is or
    contains the anthracene ring configuration with at least one double bond
    between ring members and having oxygen single bonded or any atom double
    bonded directly to the ring system at the 9- and 10- positions (e.g.,
    anthraquinones, etc.) or at the 9- or 10- positions (e.g., anthrones, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  The anthracene configured ring system is numbered as follows:



    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/300.7
TXT Compounds under subclass 300.1 which contain a spiro ring system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for compounds containing a
    1,3-diazole ring


            and a spiro ring system whether or not the diazole ring is one of
    the cyclos in the spiro system.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:



CLS 548/301.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 300.7 wherein one of the two rings that form the
    spiro is a cyclo in a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/301.4
TXT Compounds under subclass 300.7 wherein the 1,3-diazole ring contains
    acyclic chalcogen bonded  directly at the 2- and at the  4- or 5- positions
    thereof (e.g., 5- spirohydantoin, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/301.7
TXT Compounds under subclass 300.1 wherein the 1,3-diazole ring is a cyclo in a
    polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/302.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 301.7 in which the        polycyclo ring system
    consists of exactly three          rings.


CLS 548/302.4
TXT Compounds under subclass 302.1 in which the tricyclo ring system contains a
    five-membered ring having one nitrogen and four carbons which nitrogen is
    shared with the 1,3-diazole ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:



CLS 548/302.7
TXT Compounds under subclass 301.7 in which the polycyclo ring system consists
    of exactly two rings.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:



CLS 548/303.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 302.7 wherein the bicyclo ring system contains at
    least one ring hetero atom in addition to the two ring nitrogens of the
    diazole ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:



CLS 548/303.4
TXT Compounds under subclass 303.1 in which the bicyclo ring system contains
    two ring nitrogens in addition to the two ring nitrogens of the diazole
    ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:



CLS 548/303.7
TXT Compounds under subclass 303.1 in which the bicyclo ring system consists of
    a five-membered ring having one sulfur and four carbons in addition to the
    diazole ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/304.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 303.7 wherein carboxamide (i.e.,--) is attached
    directly or indirectly to the bicyclo ring system by acyclic nonionic
    bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/304.4
TXT Compounds under subclass 302.7 in which the bicyclo ring system contains a
    benzene ring in addition to the diazole ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302.7,  for compounds wherein the benzene ring is partially or completely
    hydrogenated.


CLS 548/304.7
TXT Compounds under subclass 304.4 wherein an additional hetero ring is
    attached directly or indirectly to the 1,3-diazole ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/305.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 304.7 wherein the additional hetero ring is one of
    the cyclos in a         polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/305.4
TXT Compounds under subclass 305.1 wherein the additional polycyclo ring system
    contains a 1,3- diazole ring as one of the cyclos.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/305.7
TXT Compounds under subclass 305.4 containing an acyclic carbon atom or an
    acyclic carbon chain linkage between the polycyclo ring systems.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/306.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 304.7 wherein nitrogen is the only ring hetero
    atom in the additional hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/306.4
TXT Compounds under subclass 304.4 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to ring carbon of the diazole
    ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/306.7
TXT Compounds under subclass 306.4 wherein at least two chalcogens (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) are attached directly to carbon
    only or to carbon and nitrogen of the diazole ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/307.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 306.4 wherein sulfur is the chalcogen which is
    bonded directly to ring carbon of the diazole ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/307.4
TXT Compounds under subclass 304.4 wherein nitrogen is attached directly to the
    diazole ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/307.7
TXT Compounds under subclass 307.4 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached directly to ring nitrogen of the
    diazole ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/308.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 307.4 having a  - group, in which X is chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), bonded directly to the
    diazole ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/308.4
TXT Compounds under subclass 308.1 wherein an acyclic nitrogen is bonded
    directly to the - group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/308.7
TXT Compounds under subclass 307.4 containing a -X group attached indirectly to
    the diazole ring by acyclic nonionic bonding, wherein X's are the same or
    diverse chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/309.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 308.7 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium), is bonded directly to the benzene ring of the
    bicyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/309.4
TXT Compounds under subclass 304.4 wherein a - group, in which X is chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), is bonded directly to the
    diazole ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/309.7
TXT Compounds under subclass 304.4 wherein nitrogen is attached indirectly to
    the diazole ring by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/310.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 304.4 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the diazole ring by
    acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/310.4
TXT Compounds under subclass 304.4 wherein halogen (i.e., F, Cl, Br, I, or At)
    is attached directly or  indirectly to the diazole ring by acyclic nonionic
    bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/310.7
TXT Compounds under subclass 304.4 wherein a benzene ring is bonded directly to
    ring carbon at the 2-position of the diazole ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/311.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 300.1 wherein an additional hetero ring is
    attached directly or indirectly to the diazole ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/311.4
TXT Compounds under subclass 311.1 wherein the additional hetero ring is one of
    the cyclos in a    polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/311.7
TXT Compounds under subclass 311.4 wherein the polycyclo ring system contains
    at least two ring hetero atoms.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/312.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 311.4 wherein the  additional polycyclo ring
    system contains nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom and consists of
    exactly two cyclos.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/312.4
TXT Compounds under subclass 311.1 wherein the additional hetero ring is also a
    five-membered    hetero ring having two ring nitrogens and the
    remaining three positions are ring carbons.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/312.7
TXT Compounds under subclass 312.4 wherein the additional hetero ring is a
    diazole ring with nitrogen atoms occupying the 1 and 3 positions (i.e.,
    plural 1,3-diazoles, and hydrogenated forms thereof).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:




CLS 548/313.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 312.7 containing an additional hetero ring other
    than a diazole ring which is attached directly or indirectly to a 1,3-
    diazole ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:



CLS 548/313.4
TXT Compounds under subclass 312.7 wherein the 1,3-diazole rings are bonded
    directly to each other.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:



CLS 548/313.7
TXT Compounds under subclass 312.7 wherein a ring   nitrogen of each of the two
    1,3-diazole rings is attached directly to the same atom or chain, which
    chain may include a ring, by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:



CLS 548/314.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 313.7 wherein acyclic chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly at the 2- and at the 4-
    or 5- positions of each of the two diazole rings.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/314.4
TXT Compounds under subclass 312.7 wherein two 1,3-diazole rings are bonded
    directly to the same  carbon atom or to a carbon chain, which chain may
    include a ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/314.7
TXT Compounds under subclass 311.1 wherein nitrogen is the only ring hetero
    atom in the additional hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/315.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 311.1 wherein sulfur is the only ring hetero atom
    in the additional hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/315.4
TXT Compounds under subclass 311.1 wherein a five-  membered ring having one
    oxygen and four carbons is the additional hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/315.7
TXT Compounds under subclass 315.4 wherein acyclic chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to ring carbon of the
    diazole ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/316.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 315.7 wherein plural  acyclic chalcogens (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) are bonded directly at the 2- and
    at  the 4- or 5- positions of the diazole ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/316.4
TXT Compounds under subclass 300.1 wherein chalcogen, (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to ring carbon of the diazole
    ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/316.7
TXT Compounds under subclass 316.4 containing an additional chalcogen (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) which is attached directly to ring
    nitrogen of the diazole ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/317.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 316.4 wherein at least two chalcogens (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) are bonded directly to ring carbons
    of the diazole ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass are compounds which have been
    commonly called hydantoins (i.e., 2,4-imidazolidinedione).


CLS 548/317.5
TXT Compounds under subclass 317.1 wherein three   chalcogens (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) are bonded directly to ring carbons of
    the diazole ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass are compounds which have been
    commonly called parabanic acids.


CLS 548/318.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 317.1 wherein nitrogen is attached directly to the
    diazole ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/318.5
TXT Compounds under subclass 317.1 wherein a  group, in which X is chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), is bonded directly to the
    diazole ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/319.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 317.1 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the diazole ring by
    acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for  example:


CLS 548/319.5
TXT Compounds under subclass 319.1 wherein the chalcogen, X (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), is in a  group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/320.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 317.1 wherein nitrogen is attached indirectly to
    the diazole ring by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/320.5
TXT Compounds under subclass 317.1 wherein halogen is attached directly or
    indirectly to the diazole ring by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:



CLS 548/321.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 317.1 wherein the diazole ring is bonded directly
    to a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:




CLS 548/321.5
TXT Compounds under subclass 316.4 wherein nitrogen is attached directly to the
    diazole ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/322.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 321.5 wherein the nitrogen is attached directly to
    one of the nitrogens of the diazole ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/322.5
TXT Compounds under subclass 316.4 wherein a  group, in which X is chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), is bonded directly to the
    diazole ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/323.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 322.5 wherein the  group which is bonded directly
    to the diazole ring is additionally bonded directly to acyclic nitrogen.


    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/323.5
TXT Compounds under subclass 316.4 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium), is attached indirectly to the diazole ring by
    acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/324.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 323.5 wherein the chalcogen, X (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), is in a  group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:



CLS 548/324.5
TXT Compounds under subclass 316.4 wherein nitrogen is attached indirectly to
    the diazole ring by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/325.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 316.4 wherein the chalcogen which is bonded
    directly to diazole ring carbon is sulfur or selenium.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/325.5
TXT Compounds under subclass 316.4 wherein the diazole ring is bonded directly
    to a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/326.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 316.4 wherein the diazole ring is not substituted
    except for the chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    316.4,  for compounds containing alkyl substituted cyclic ethylene urea.


CLS 548/326.5
TXT Compounds under subclass 300.1 wherein nitrogen is attached directly to the
    diazole ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/327.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 326.5 wherein the nitrogen is part of a nitro
    group (i.e., -NO2).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/327.5
TXT Compounds under subclass 327.1 wherein the nitro group (i.e., -NO2) is
    bonded directly to the ring carbon in the 2- position of the diazole ring,
    i.e., the ring carbon between the two ring nitrogens.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:





CLS 548/328.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 327.1 which contain a  group, wherein X is
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), bonded directly
    to the diazole ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/328.5
TXT Compounds under subclass 327.1 which contain nitrogen attached indirectly
    to the diazole ring by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/329.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 328.5 wherein the nitrogen is multiply bonded to
    carbon.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/329.5
TXT Compounds under subclass 327.1 wherein a benzene ring is bonded directly to
    the ring carbon in the 2- position of the diazole ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/330.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 327.1 wherein an additional chalcogen (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), which is not part of the nitro
    group, is attached indirectly to the diazole ring by acyclic nonionic
    bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/330.5
TXT Compounds under subclass 330.1 wherein sulfur is the chalcogen that is
    attached indirectly to the diazole ring by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/331.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 326.5 wherein the nitrogen or chalcogen (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is attached directly to a diazole
    ring nitrogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/331.5
TXT Compounds under subclass 326.5 wherein the nitrogen is bonded directly to
    the ring carbon in the 2-  position of the diazole ring, i.e., the ring
    carbon between the two ring nitrogens.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/332.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 331.5 which contain a  group, wherein X is
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), bonded directly
    to the diazole ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/332.5
TXT Compounds under subclass 331.5 wherein the nitrogen is attached directly to
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), an additional
    nitrogen or a  group, in which  X  is chalcogen or nitrogen, by nonionic
    bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/333.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 331.5 wherein the nitrogen is bonded directly to a
    benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/333.5
TXT Compounds under 300.1 wherein a  group, in which X is chalcogen (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), is bonded directly to the diazole
    ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/334.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 333.5 in which the  group is bonded directly to a
    diazole ring nitrogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/334.5
TXT Compounds under subclass 333.5 in which the     group is part of a
    X-group, wherein the X's are the same or diverse chalcogens (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:




CLS 548/335.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 300.1 wherein the 1,3-diazole ring contains two
    double bonds between its ring members.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


    (2)     Note.  Compounds within this subclass are referred to as
    imidazoles, glyoxalines, imineazoles, imideazoles, iminazoles,
    pyrro[b]monazoles, or 1,3-diaza-2,4- cyclopentadienes.


CLS 548/335.5
TXT Compounds under subclass 335.1 wherein nitrogen is attached indirectly to
    the diazole ring by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/336.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 335.5 wherein carbon is multiply bonded to the
    nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:



CLS 548/336.5
TXT Compounds under subclass 336.1 wherein the nitrogen is bonded directly to a
    -CN group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/337.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 336.1 containing a -CN group bonded directly to
    the diazole ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/338.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 335.5 wherein the nitrogen is bonded directly to a
     group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/338.5
TXT Compounds under subclass 338.1 in which sulfur is attached indirectly to
    the  group by acyclic nonionic bonding or the chalcogen of the   group  is
    sulfur.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/339.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 335.5 wherein a   X- group, in which the X's are
    the same or diverse chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium), and the nitrogen are bonded directly to the same acyclic carbon
    atom.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/339.5
TXT Compounds under subclass 339.1 in which halogen (i.e., F, Cl, Br, I, or At)
    is attached indirectly to the diazole ring by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/340.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 335.5 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the nitrogen by acyclic
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/341.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 335.1 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the  diazole ring by
    acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/341.5
TXT Compounds under subclass 341.1 wherein the chalcogen, X (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), is in a  group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/342.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 341.1 wherein sulfur is the chalcogen.

     (1)    Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/342.5
TXT Compounds under subclass 341.1 wherein halogen (i.e., F, Cl, Br, I, or At)
    or benzene ring is  attached directly to the diazole ring by nonionic
    bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/343.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 335.1 wherein halogen (i.e., F, Cl, Br, I, or At)
    is attached directly or indirectly to the diazole ring by acyclic nonionic
    bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/343.5
TXT Compounds under subclass 335.1 wherein the diazole ring is bonded directly
    to a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/344.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 335.1 wherein two benzene rings and the diazole
    ring are bonded directly to the same acyclic carbon.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/345.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 335.1 wherein the diazole ring is bonded directly
    to a cycloaliphatic ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/346.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 335.1 wherein a benzene ring is attached
    indirectly to the diazole ring by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/347.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 300.1 wherein the 1,3-diazole contains one double
    bond between its ring members.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:

    (2)     Note.  The 1,3-diazoles provided for in this subclass are generally
    referred to as 2- imidazolines, 4,5-dihydroimidazoles, or
    dihydroglyoxalines.


CLS 548/348.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 347.1 wherein nitrogen is attached indirectly to
    the diazole ring by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/349.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 348.1 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the diazole ring by
    acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:



CLS 548/350.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 347.1 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the diazole ring by
    acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/351.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 350.1 wherein sulfur is the chalcogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/352.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 350.1 in which the chalcogen, X, is in a X- group,
    wherein X's are the same or diverse chalcogens.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/353.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 350.1 in which the chalcogen is bonded directly to
    a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/354.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 347.1 wherein the diazole  ring is bonded directly
    to a benzene ring.

      (1)   Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/355.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 347.1 wherein the diazole ring and a benzene ring
    are bonded to the same acyclic carbon atom or carbon chain.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/356.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 100 wherein nitrogen atoms occupy the 1 and 2
    positions and carbon atoms occupy the remaining three positions of the
    five-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for compounds containing the
    following ring which may have double bonds between its    members.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:

    (3)     Note.  Compounds within this subclass are generally referred to as
    tetrahydropyrazoles or pyrazolidines.


CLS 548/356.5
TXT Compounds under subclass 356.1 having a polycyclo ring system which is or
    contains the anthracene ring configuration with at least one double bond
    between ring members and having oxygen single bonded or any atom double
    bonded directly to the ring system at the 9- and 10- positions (e.g.,
    anthraquinones, etc.) or at the 9- or 10- positions (e.g., anthrones, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  The anthracene configured ring system is numbered as follows:


    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/357.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 356.5 wherein the anthrone or the anthraquinone is
    attached


            directly or indirectly to an additional polycyclo ring system
    having at least three cyclos by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:






CLS 548/357.5
TXT Compounds under subclass 356.1 which are or contain a spiro ring system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for compounds containing a
    1,2-diazole ring and a spiro ring system whether or not the diazole ring is
    one of the cyclos in the spiro system.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/358.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 356.1 wherein the 1,2-diazole ring is a cyclo in a
    polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/358.5
TXT Compounds under subclass 358.1 in which the polycyclo ring system consists
    of exactly four rings.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/359.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 358.1 in which the polycyclo ring system consists
    of exactly three rings.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/359.5
TXT Compounds under subclass 359.1 wherein the tricyclo ring system contains at
    least one ring hetero atom in addition to the two ring nitrogens of the
    diazole ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/360.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 358.1 in which the polycyclo ring system consists
    of exactly two rings.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/360.5
TXT Compounds under subclass 360.1 wherein the bicyclo ring system contains at
    least one ring hetero atom in addition to the two ring nitrogens of the
    diazole ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/361.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 360.1 in which the bicyclo ring system consists of
    a benzene ring and the diazole ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    360.1+, for compounds wherein the benzene ring is partially or completely
    hydrogenated.


CLS 548/361.5
TXT Compounds under subclass 361.1 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to ring carbon of the diazole
    ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/362.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 361.1 wherein nitrogen is attached directly to the
    diazole ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/362.5
TXT Compounds under subclass 361.1 wherein nitrogen or chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the diazole ring
    by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/363.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 360.1 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to ring carbon of the diazole
    ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/364.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 356.1 containing an additional hetero ring which
    is attached directly or indirectly to the five-membered hetero ring by
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/364.4
TXT Compounds under subclass 364.1 wherein the additional hetero ring is one of
    the cyclos in a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/364.7
TXT Compounds under subclass 364.4 containing nitrogen as the only ring hetero
    atom in the polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/365.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 364.1 wherein the additional hetero ring is a five
    membered hetero  ring having two ring nitrogens occupying the 1 and 2
    positions (i.e., plural 1,2-diazoles and hydrogenated forms thereof).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/365.4
TXT Compounds under subclass 365.1 wherein two diazole rings are bonded
    directly to the same acyclic carbon atom, to the same acyclic carbon chain
    or are bonded directly to each other.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/365.7
TXT Compounds under subclass 364.1 containing chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) as the only ring hetero atom in the additional
    hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/366.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 356.1 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to ring carbon of the diazole
    ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/366.4
TXT Compounds under subclass 366.1 wherein at least two chalcogens (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) are bonded directly to ring carbons
    of the diazole ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/366.7
TXT Compounds under subclass 366.4 wherein nitrogen is attached indirectly to
    the diazole ring by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/367.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 366.4 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the diazole ring by
    acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/367.4
TXT Compounds under subclass 366.1 wherein nitrogen is attached directly to the
    diazole ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/367.7
TXT Compounds under subclass 367.4 wherein the nitrogen is bonded directly to
    diazole ring nitrogen or acyclic carbon is multiply bonded to the nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/368.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 367.4 wherein the nitrogen is attached directly to
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) by nonionic
    bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:



CLS 548/368.4
TXT Compounds under subclass 367.4 wherein the nitrogen is bonded directly to a
     group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:



CLS 548/368.7
TXT Compounds under subclass 367.4 wherein the chalcogen and the nitrogen are
    bonded directly to diazole ring carbons which are nonadjacent to each
    other.


    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/369.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 367.4 wherein the nitrogen is attached indirectly
    to chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) by acyclic
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/369.4
TXT Compounds under subclass 366.1 in which a  group, wherein X is chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), is bonded directly to the
    diazole ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/369.7
TXT Compounds under subclass 369.4 wherein the -C(=X)- group is bonded directly
    to chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) or acyclic
    nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:



CLS 548/370.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 366.1 wherein nitr ogen is attached indirectly to
    the diazole ring by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/370.4
TXT Compounds under subclass 366.1 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the diazole ring by
    acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/370.7
TXT Compounds under subclass 366.1 wherein the chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to ring carbon at the 4-
    position of the diazole ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/371.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 366.1 wherein benzene ring is bonded directly to
    ring nitrogen of the diazole ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/371.4
TXT Compounds under subclass 356.1 wherein nitrogen is attached directly to the
    ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/371.7
TXT Compounds under subclass 371.4 wherein nitrogen is attached indirectly to
    the diazole ring by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/372.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 371.4 wherein the nitrogen is attached directly to
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) by nonionic
    bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/372.5
TXT Compounds under subclass 371.4 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the diazole ring by
    acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/373.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 356.1 wherein the 1,2-diazole ring contains two
    double bonds between ring members.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/374.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 373.1 wherein  , wherein X is chalcogen (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), is bonded directly to the  diazole
    ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/375.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 373.1 wherein nitrogen is attached indirectly to
    the diazole ring by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/376.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 373.1 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the diazole ring by
    acyclic  nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/377.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 373.1 wherein the diazole ring is bonded directly
    to a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/379.1
TXT Compounds under subclass 356.1 wherein the 1,2-diazole ring contains one
    double bond between ring members.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/379.4
TXT Compounds under subclass 379.1 wherein nitrogen or chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the diazole ring
    by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 548/379.7
TXT Compounds under subclass 379.1 containing at least two benzene rings bonded
    directly to the diazole ring.

    (1)     Note. This subclass ring contains, for example:


CLS 548/400
TXT Compounds under Class 540, subclass 1 which contain a five-membered hetero
    ring consisting of one nitrogen atom and four carbon atoms.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/401
TXT Products under subclass 400 which contain a compound having a hetero ring
    consisting of one nitrogen and four carbon atoms in admixture with a
    preserving or stabilizing agent whose sole function is to prevent physical
    or chemical change.


CLS 548/402
TXT Compounds under subclass 400 which include aluminum or a metal having a
    specific gravity greater than four.

    (1)     Note.  Arsenic is considered a metal.

    (2)     Note. An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/403
TXT Compounds under subclass 402 wherein the metal /is bonded directly to
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) which is attached
    directly or indirectly to the five-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/404
TXT Compounds under subclass 402 wherein at least two chalcogens (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) are bonded to ring carbons of the
    five-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/405
TXT Compounds under subclass 400 which contain boron.


CLS 548/406
TXT Compounds under subclass 400 which contain silicon.


CLS 548/407
TXT Compounds under subclass 400 which contain a spiro ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/408
TXT Compounds under subclass 407 wherein the five-membered hetero ring is one
    of the rings in the spiro ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An Example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/409
TXT Compounds under subclass 408 wherein both rings in the spiro ring system
    are hetero rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/410
TXT Compounds under subclass 409 wherein acyclic chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is attached directly to the five-membered
    nitrogen containing spiro hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/411
TXT Compounds under subclass 408 wherein one of the two rings which form the
    spiro ring system is additionally one of the cyclos of a polycyclo ring
    system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/412
TXT Compounds under subclass 400 wherein phosphorus is attached directly to the
    five-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 548/413
TXT Compounds under subclass 400 wherein phosphorus is attached indirectly to
    the five-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/414
TXT Compounds under subclass 413 wherein the five-membered hetero ring is a
    cyclo in a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/415
TXT Compounds under subclass 414 wherein at least two chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) atoms are bonded directly to ring carbons
    of the five-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/416
TXT Compounds under subclass 400 wherein the five-membered hetero ring is one
    of the cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 548/417
TXT Compounds under subclass 416 wherein the polycyclo ring system contains at
    least six cyclos and has either a ring carbon that is shared by three of
    the cyclos of the polycyclo ring system, or has a ring chalcogen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/418
TXT Compounds under subclass 416 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly five cyclos.


CLS 548/419
TXT Compounds under subclass 418 wherein at least three ring members of one
    cyclo are ring members of an additional cyclo in the pentacyclo ring
    system, or wherein one ring carbon is a member of three of the cyclos in
    the pentacyclo system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/420
TXT Compounds under subclass 416 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly four cyclos.


CLS 548/421
TXT Compounds under subclass 420 wherein the tetracyclo ring system contains at
    least one ring hetero atom in addition to the ring nitrogen of the
    five-membered hetero ring.


CLS 548/422
TXT Compounds under subclass 421 wherein one of the cyclos of the tetracyclo
    ring system is a three-membered hetero ring which contains ring nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/423
TXT Compounds under subclass 421 wherein at least two chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) atoms are bonded directly to ring carbons
    of the five-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/424
TXT Compounds under subclass 420 wherein at least three ring members of one
    cyclo are ring members of an additional cyclo in the tetracyclo ring
    system, or wherein one ring carbon is a member of three of the cyclos in
    the tetracyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/425
TXT Compounds under subclass 424 wherein one of the cyclos of the tetracyclo
    ring system is a benzene ring.


CLS 548/426
TXT Compounds under subclass 420 wherein ring members of the five-membered
    hetero ring are ring members of one additional cyclo only in the tetracyclo
    ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/427
TXT Compounds under subclass 416 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly three cyclos.


CLS 548/428
TXT Compounds under subclass 427 wherein two of the cyclos in the tricyclo ring
    system share a ring nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/429
TXT Compounds under subclass 427 wherein the tricyclo ring system contains at
    least one ring hetero atom in addition to the ring nitrogen of the
    five-membered hetero ring.


CLS 548/430
TXT Compounds under subclass 429 wherein the tricyclo ring system contains ring
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).


CLS 548/431
TXT Compounds under subclass 430 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to ring carbon of the
    five-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/432
TXT Compounds under subclass 430 wherein the tricyclo ring system has the
    following basic structure, which may contain double bonds between ring
    members and wherein X is oxygen or sulfur:


CLS 548/433
TXT Compounds under subclass 429 wherein the tricyclo ring system consists of a
    benzene ring which shares ring carbons with two nitrogen containing hetero
    rings.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/434
TXT Compounds under subclass 427 wherein at least three ring members of one
    cyclo are ring members of an additional cyclo in the tricyclo ring system.


CLS 548/435
TXT Compounds under subclass 434 wherein at least two chalcogen atoms (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) are bonded directly to ring carbons
    of the five-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/436
TXT Compounds under subclass 427 wherein the same ring carbon is a member of
    each of the three cyclos of the tricyclo ring system.


CLS 548/437
TXT Compounds under subclass 436 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to ring carbon of the
    five-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/438
TXT Compounds under subclass 436 wherein a benzene ring, which is not a cyclo
    in the tricyclo ring system, is bonded directly to ring carbon of the
    five-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/439
TXT Compounds under subclass 427 wherein each of the two carbocyclic rings in
    the tricyclo ring system share ring carbons with the five-membered hetero
    ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/440
TXT Compounds under subclass 439 wherein each of two benzene rings in the
    tricyclo ring system shares ring carbons with the five-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/441
TXT Compounds under subclass 440 wherein a
    group, in which X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium), is bonded directly to the tricyclo ring system.


CLS 548/442
TXT Compounds under subclass 440 wherein an additional carbocyclic ring and one
    of the benzene rings of the tricyclo ring system are bonded directly to the
    same acyclic nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/443
TXT Compounds under subclass 440 wherein -N3, or  is attached directly to the
    tricyclo ring system by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/444
TXT Compounds under subclass 440 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) or nitrogen is attached indirectly to the tricyclo
    ring system by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/445
TXT Compounds under subclass 440 wherein the tricyclo ring system is either
    unsubstituted or substituted by hydrocarbyl groups only.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/446
TXT Compounds under subclass 445 which have the following structure, and which
    may contain alkyl substitution only:


CLS 548/447
TXT Processes under subclass 446 of preparing unsubstituted carbazole or alkyl
    substituted carbazoles only, by cyclization or by alkylation.

    (1)     Note.  The unsubstituted carbazole is prepared by cyclization
    (e.g., of o-aminobiphenyl).  The alkyl carbazoles are prepared either by
    cyclization (e.g., of an alkyl substituted o-aminobiphenyl), or by
    alkylation of carbazole.


CLS 548/448
TXT Compounds under subclass 439 wherein a     group, in which X is chalcogen
    (i.e. oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), is bonded directly to ring
    carbon of the tricyclo ring system.


CLS 548/449
TXT Compounds under subclass 439 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) or nitrogen is attached indirectly to ring nitrogen
    of the five-membered hetero ring by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/450
TXT Compounds under subclass 427 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to ring carbon of the
    five-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/451
TXT Compounds under subclass 450 wherein at least two chalcogens (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) are bonded directly to ring carbons of the
    five-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/452
TXT Compounds under subclass 416 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly two cyclos.


CLS 548/453
TXT Compounds under subclass 452 wherein the bicyclo ring system contains at
    least one ring hetero atom in addition to the ring nitrogen of the
    five-membered hetero ring, or wherein the ring nitrogen is additionally a
    member of the other cyclo of the bicyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/454
TXT Compounds under subclass 452 wherein an additional polycyclo heterocyclic
    ring system is attached directly or indirectly to the bicyclo ring system
    by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/455
TXT Compounds under subclass 454 wherein a five-membered nitrogen containing
    hetero ring is a cyclo in the additional polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/456
TXT Compounds under subclass 455 which contain a lactone ring, (i.e., a cyclic
    inner ester wherein-C(=X)O- is part of the ring and X represents chalcogen,
    i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/457
TXT Compounds under subclass 455 wherein a ring carbon of one of the
    five-membered hetero rings is bonded directly to a ring carbon of the other
    five-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/458
TXT Compounds under subclass 457 wherein the ring carbons are bonded to each
    other by a single bond.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/459
TXT Compounds under subclass 457 wherein halogen is attached directly or
    indirectly to the bicyclo ring system ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/460
TXT Compounds under subclass 455 wherein a ring carbon of each of the two
    five-membered hetero rings is bonded directly to chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), or nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/461
TXT Compounds under subclass 460 wherein at least two chalcogens (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) are bonded directly to ring carbons of each
    of the two five-membered hetero rings.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/462
TXT Compounds under subclass 461 wherein the ring nitrogen of each of the two
    five-membered hetero rings is bonded directly to the same atom or chain,
    which chain may include a ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/463
TXT Compounds under subclass 454 wherein one of the cyclos of the additional
    polycyclo heterocyclic ring system is a lactone ring, (i.e., a cyclic inner
    ester wherein -C(+X)O- is part of the ring and X represents chalcogen,
    i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/464
TXT Compounds under subclass 454 wherein a ring carbon of the hetero ring which
    is a cyclo in the additional polycyclo heterocyclic ring system is bonded
    directly to a ring carbon of the five-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/465
TXT Compounds under subclass 452 wherein an additional hetero ring is attached
    directly or indirectly to the bicyclo ring system by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/466
TXT Compounds under subclass 465 wherein the additional hetero ring is bonded
    directly to a ring carbon of the bicyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/467
TXT Compounds under subclass 465 wherein the additional hetero ring is in a
    substituent on a ring carbon of the bicyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/468
TXT Compounds under subclass 467 wherein the bicyclo ring system and the
    additional hetero ring are attached directly to the same acyclic carbon or
    acyclic carbon chain.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/469
TXT Compounds under subclass 452 wherein the five-membered hetero ring and a
    benzene ring are the cyclos of the bicyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/470
TXT Compounds under subclass 469 wherein the ring nitrogen is bonded directly
    to two ring carbons of the same cyclo, which carbons are members of one
    cyclo only.

    (1)     Note.  There exists a tautomeric equivalence between isoindoles and
    insoindolenines, as is shown below. This subclass provided for both
    isoindoles and isoindolenines.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/471
TXT Compounds under subclass 470 wherein nitrogen is bonded directly to ring
    carbon of the five-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/472
TXT Compounds under subclass 470 wherein chalcogen (oxygen, sulfur, selenium,
    or tellurium) is bonded directly to ring carbon of the five-membered hetero
    ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/473
TXT Compounds under subclass 472 wherein at least two chalcogens (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) are bonded directly to ring carbons of the
    five-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/474
TXT Compounds under subclass 473 which contain a polycyclo carbocyclic ring
    system having at least three cyclos.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/475
TXT Compounds under subclass 473 wherein the ring nitrogen of the five-membered
    hetero ring is bonded directly to chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) or nitrogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/476
TXT Compounds under subclass 473 wherein the ring nitrogen of the five-membered
    hetero ring is bonded directly to a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/477
TXT Compounds under subclass 473 wherein nitrogen is attached indirectly to the
    ring nitrogen of the five-membered hetero ring by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/478
TXT Compounds under subclass 473 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the ring nitrogen of the
    five-membered hetero ring by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/479
TXT Compounds under subclass 478 wherein the chalcogen, X (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur,selenium, or tellurium), is in a   group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/480
TXT Compounds under subclass 473 wherein the substituent on the ring nitrogen
    of the five-membered hetero ring is hydrogen or hydrocarbyl only.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/481
TXT Compounds under subclass 480 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) or nitrogen is attached indirectly to ring carbon
    of the bicyclo ring system by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/482
TXT Compounds under subclass 470 wherein there is only one double bond between
    ring members of the five-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/483
TXT Compounds under subclass 469 wherein nitrogen is attached directly to the
    five-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/484
TXT Compounds under subclass 469 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to ring carbon of the
    five-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/485
TXT Compounds under subclass 484 wherein at least two chalcogens (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) are bonded directly to ring carbons of the
    five-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/486
TXT Compounds under subclass 484 wherein the chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to ring carbon of the
    five-membered hetero ring which is adjacent to the ring nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/487
TXT Compounds under subclass 486 wherein a ring carbon of the five-membered
    hetero ring is bonded directly to two benzene rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/488
TXT Compounds under subclass 484 wherein a ring carbon of the five-membered
    hetero ring is bonded directly to a polycyclo carbocyclic ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/489
TXT Processes under subclass 484 wherein the bicyclo ring system is formed
    directly from a reactant which contains a benzene ring bonded directly to
    an acyclic nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for such processes as:  the reaction
    of N-methyl anthranilic acid with sodium amide to form indoxyl, the
    reaction of phenylglycine with alkali to form indoxyl, and the reaction of
    phenyl glycocol with sodium amide to form indoxyl, etc.


CLS 548/490
TXT Compounds under subclass 469 wherein there is only one double bond between
    ring members of the five-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/491
TXT Compounds under subclass 490 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) or nitrogen is attached indirectly to the
    five-membered hetero ring by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/492
TXT Compounds under subclass 469 wherein a ring carbon of the five-membered
    hetero ring is bonded directly to a  group, in which X is chalcogen (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/493
TXT Compounds under subclass 492 wherein the
     group is bonded directly to hydrogen, or to an additional carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/494
TXT Compounds under subclass 469 wherein a     group, in which X is chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), is attached indirectly to a
    ring carbon of the five-membered hetero ring by an acyclic carbon or an
    acyclic carbon chain.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/495
TXT Compounds under subclass 494 wherein an acyclic nitrogen is bonded directly
    to the acyclic carbon or acyclic carbon chain.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/496
TXT Compounds under subclass 495 wherein the acyclic carbon or acyclic carbon
    chain is further unsubstituted or alkyl substituted only.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/497
TXT Processes under subclass 496 for preparing the compound, or for separating
    the compound from impurities or from the reaction mixture.


CLS 548/498
TXT Processes under subclass 497 for (a) the formation of a racemic mixture
    from an enantiomer (optical isomer), or (b) for the resolution (separation)
    of optical isomers, which may be diastereomers or enantiomers.


CLS 548/499
TXT Processes under subclass 497 wherein hydantoins or proteins are utilized as
    reactants in processes of preparation.


CLS 548/500
TXT Compounds under subclass 494 wherein a
     group, in which X is chalcogen (i.e. oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium), is bonded directly to ring nitrogen of the five-membered hetero
    ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/501
TXT Processes under subclass 500 for preparing the compound, or for separating
    the compound from impurities or from the reaction mixture.


CLS 548/502
TXT Processes under subclass 494 for preparing the compound, or for separating
    the compound from impurities, or from the reaction mixture.


CLS 548/503
TXT Compounds under subclass 469 wherein nitrogen is attached indirectly to
    ring carbon of the bicyclo ring system by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/504
TXT Compounds under subclass 503 wherein nitrogen is attached indirectly to a
    ring carbon of the five-membered hetero ring by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/505
TXT Compounds under subclass 504 wherein the nitrogen is double or triple
    bonded directly to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/506
TXT Compounds under subclass 504 wherein a benzene ring is bonded directly to a
    ring carbon of the five-membered hetero ring, or a benzene ring is attached
    indirectly to a ring carbon of the five-membered hetero ring by an acyclic
    carbon atom or acyclic carbon chain.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/507
TXT Compounds under subclass 504 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) or an additional nitrogen is attached indirectly to
    ring carbon of the five-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/508
TXT Processes under subclass 469 wherein the bicyclo ring system is formed by
    ring closure.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of processes provided for herein are: cyclization
    of o-ethyl aniline to form indole, and cyclization of 3-butyl pyrrole to
    form indole.


CLS 548/509
TXT Compounds under subclass 469 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the bicyclo ring system
    by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/510
TXT Compounds under subclass 509 wherein the chalcogen, X (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), is in a   group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/511
TXT Compounds under subclass 469 wherein a benzene ring is bonded directly to a
    ring carbon of the five-membered hetero ring, or a benzene ring is attached
    indirectly to a ring carbon of the five-membered hetero ring by an acylic
    carbon atom or acyclic carbon chain.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/512
TXT Compounds under subclass 452 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to ring carbon of the
    five-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/513
TXT Compounds under subclass 512 wherein at least two chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) atoms are bonded directly to ring carbons
    of the five-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/514
TXT Compounds under subclass 513 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) or nitrogen is attached directly to ring nitrogen
    of the five-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/515
TXT Compounds under subclass 452 wherein the ring nitrogen is bonded to two
    ring carbons of the same cyclo, which carbons are members of one cyclo only.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/516
TXT Compounds under subclass 452 wherein there are two double bonds between
    ring members of the five-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/517
TXT Compounds under subclass 400 wherein an additional hetero ring is attached
    directly or indirectly to the five-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/518
TXT Compounds under subclass 517 wherein nitrogen is a ring member of the
    additional hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/519
TXT Compounds under subclass 518 wherein a ring carbon of each of the two
    nitrogen containing hetero rings is bonded directly to chalcogen (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/520
TXT Compounds under subclass 519 wherein at least two chalcogens (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) are bonded directly to ring carbons of each
    of the two nitrogen containing hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/521
TXT Compounds under subclass 520 wherein there is a double bond between ring
    carbons in each of the two nitrogen containing hetero rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/522
TXT Processes under subclass 521 for preparing the compound, or for separating
    the compound from impurities or from the reaction mixture.


CLS 548/523
TXT Compounds under subclass 518 wherein the ring nitrogen of each of the two
    nitrogen containing hetero rings is bonded to the same atom or chain, which
    chain may include a ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/524
TXT Compounds under subclass 523 wherein the atom is carbon, or the chain
    consists of carbon atoms.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/525
TXT Compounds under subclass 517 which contain a polycyclo ring system which
    has a ring chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/526
TXT Compounds under subclass 525 wherein at least two ring chalcogens (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) are in the polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/527
TXT Compounds under subclass 517 which contain a hetero ring having ring sulfur.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/528
TXT Compounds under subclass 400 which contain a polycyclo carbocyclic ring
    system having at least three cyclos.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/529
TXT Compounds under subclass 528 wherein the polycyclo carbocyclic ring system
    is attached directly to the five-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/530
TXT Compounds under subclass 400 wherein a  group, in which X is chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), is bonded directly to the
    five-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/531
TXT Compounds under subclass 530 wherein the
     is part of a X group, in which the X's are the same or diverse chalcogens
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/532
TXT Compounds under subclass 531 wherein the
    X group is bonded directly to a ring carbon of the five-membered hetero
    ring which is adjacent to the ring nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/533
TXT Compounds under subclass 532 wherein an
    additional  group is bonded directly to the five-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/534
TXT Compounds under subclass 532 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to the other ring carbon of the
    five-membered hetero ring which is adjacent to the ring nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/535
TXT Compounds under subclass 532 wherein the five-membered hetero ring is
    further unsubstituted, or alkyl substituted only.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/536
TXT Compounds under subclass 531 wherein an additional  group is bonded
    directly to the five-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/537
TXT Compounds under subclass 530 wherein the
     group is bonded directly to acyclic nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/538
TXT Compounds under subclass 537 wherein the
     group is bonded directly to the ring nitrogen of the five-membered hetero
    ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/539
TXT Compounds under subclass 530 wherein the
     group is bonded directly to a carbocyclic ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/540
TXT Compounds under subclass 530 wherein the
     group is bonded directly to an acyclic carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/541
TXT Compounds under subclass 400 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached directly to the five-membered hetero
    ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/542
TXT Compounds under subclass 541 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached directly to ring nitrogen of the
    five-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:

    (2)     Note.  The oxide oxygen of an hetero N-oxide compound is considered
    to be attached to the ring nitrogen by nonionic bonding.


CLS 548/543
TXT Compounds under subclass 541 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to a ring carbon of the
    five-membered hetero ring which is adjacent to the ring nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/544
TXT Compounds under subclass 543 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is also bonded to a ring carbon of the
    five-membered hetero ring which is not adjacent to the ring nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/545
TXT Compounds under subclass 543 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurum) is also bonded to the other ring carbon of the
    five-membered hetero ring which is adjacent to the ring nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/546
TXT Compounds under subclass 545 wherein nitrogen is attached to the
    five-membered hetero ring directly or indirectly by acyclic nonionic
    bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/547
TXT Compounds under subclass 545 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the five-membered hetero
    ring by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/548
TXT Compounds under subclass 545 wherein there is a double bond between ring
    carbons of the five-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/549
TXT Compounds under subclass 548 wherein a benzene ring is bonded directly to
    ring nitrogen of the five-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/550
TXT Compounds under subclass 543 wherein nitrogen is attached to the
    five-membered hetero ring directly, or indirectly by acyclic nonionic
    bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/551
TXT Compounds under subclass 543 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the five-membered hetero
    ring by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/552
TXT Processes under subclass 543 for forming 2-pyrrolidone, which has the
    following formula, or its alkyl or alkenyl substitution products:


CLS 548/553
TXT Processes under subclass 552 wherein the 2-pyrrolidone compound is prepared
    directly from a compound which contains the cyano group,  -C-N.


CLS 548/554
TXT Processes under subclass 552 wherein the 2-pyrrolidone compound is prepared
    directly from a compound which contains the -COO- group.


CLS 548/555
TXT Processes under subclass 543 wherein 2-pyrrolidone, which is unsubstituted
    or alkyl substituted only, is separated from impurities, or from the
    reaction medium.


CLS 548/556
TXT Compounds under subclass 541 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the five-membered hetero
    ring by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/557
TXT Compounds under subclass 400 wherein nitrogen is attached directly to the
    five-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/558
TXT Compounds under subclass 557 wherein the nitrogen is bonded directly to a
    ring carbon of the five-membered hetero ring which is adjacent to the ring
    nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/559
TXT Compounds under subclass 558 wherein a carbocyclic ring is bonded directly
    to the nitrogen which is bonded directly to the ring carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is.


CLS 548/560
TXT Compounds under subclass 400 wherein there are two double bonds between
    ring members of the five-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/561
TXT Compounds under subclass 560 wherein nitrogen is attached indirectly to the
    five-membered hetero ring by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/562
TXT Compounds under subclass 560 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the five-membered hetero
    ring by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/563
TXT Compounds under subclass 560 wherein a benzene ring is bonded directly to
    the ring nitrogen of the five-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/564
TXT Compounds under subclass 560 wherein the five-membered hetero ring is
    unsubstituted, or alkyl substituted only.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/565
TXT Compounds under subclass 400 wherein there is one double bond only between
    ring members of the five-membered hetero ring.


CLS 548/566
TXT Compounds under subclass 400 wherein nitrogen is attached indirectly to the
    five-membered hetero ring by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 548/567
TXT Compounds under subclass 566 wherein a      group, in which X is chalcogen
    (i.e. oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), is bonded directly to the
    nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/568
TXT Compounds under subclass 567 wherein the
     group is additionally bonded to hydrogen, or to acyclic carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/569
TXT Compounds under subclass 566 wherein the nitrogen is part of a substituent
    that is attached to the ring nitrogen of the five-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/570
TXT Compounds under subclass 400 wherein chalcogen (i.e. oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the five-membered hetero
    ring by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/571
TXT Compounds under subclass 570 wherein the chalcogen, X (i.e. oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium), is in a  group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/572
TXT Compounds under subclass 571 wherein is
    part of a X group, in which the X's are the same, or diverse chalcogens
    (i.e. oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/573
TXT Compounds under subclass 572 wherein the
    X group is part of a substituent attached to the ring nitrogen of the
    five-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/574
TXT Compounds under subclass 570 wherein the chalcogen (i.e. oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is part of a substituent which is attached to the
    ring nitrogen of the five-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/575
TXT Compounds under subclass 574 wherein the chalcogen (i.e. oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to a carbocyclic ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/576
TXT Compounds under subclass 575 wherein a bicyclo carbocyclic ring system is
    parto of the substituent on the ring nitrogen of the five-membered hetero
    ring.


CLS 548/577
TXT Compounds under subclass 400 wherein a benzene ring is bonded directly to
    the five-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/578
TXT Compounds under subclass 400 wherein a benzene ring is part of a
    substituent attached to the ring nitrogen of the five-membered hetero ring
    by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/579
TXT Compounds under subclass 400 wherein the five-membered hetero ring is
    unsubstituted, or is alkyl substituted only.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/950
TXT Compounds under Class 540, subclass 1 wherein the hetero ring contains four
    members and has nitrogen and carbon as ring members.


CLS 548/951
TXT Compounds under subclass 950 in which the hetero ring contains at least two
    hetero atoms

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 548/952
TXT Compounds under subclass 950 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) is bonded directly to ring carbon of the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/953
TXT Compounds under subclass 950 in which
    nitrogen or  , wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium) is bonded directly to the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/954
TXT Compounds under Class 540, subclass 1 wherein the hetero ring contains
    three members and has nitrogen and carbon as ring members.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compoundprovided for herein:


CLS 548/955
TXT Compounds under subclass 954 which contain boron, silicon or a metal having
    a specific gravity greater then four.

    (1)     Note.  Arsenic is considered a metal for purposes of this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/956
TXT Compounds under subclass 954 in which phosphorus is attached directly or
    indirectly to the hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Example of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/957
TXT Compounds under subclass 956 which contain at least two phosphorus atoms.

    (1)     Note. An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/958
TXT Compounds under subclass 954 wheich contain a spiro ring system.


CLS 548/959
TXT Compounds under subclass 954 wherein the hereto ring contains two hetero
    atoms.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/960
TXT Compounds under subclsss 959 wherein the hetero ring consists of two
    nitrogens and one carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound proived for herein is:


CLS 548/961
TXT Compounds under subclass 954 wherein the hetero ring is one of the cyclos
    of a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/962
TXT Compounds under subclass 954 which contain an additional hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/963
TXT Compounds under subclass 962 wherein at least two three-membered nitrogen
    containing hetero rings are bonded directly to the same ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/964
TXT Compounds under subclass 962 in which a
     group, wherein X is chalocogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium) is in a chain between the hetero rings.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/965
TXT Compounds under subclass 954 wherein nitrogen, halogen or chalcogen (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium odr tellurium) is attached directly to the hetero
    ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 548/966
TXT Compounds under subclass 954 in which
    , wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium) is
    bonded directly to the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/967
TXT Compounds under subclass 954 wherein nitrogen, other than as nitro (-NO2)
    for nitroso (-NO), is attached indierectly to the hetero ring by nonionic
    bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/968
TXT Compounds under subclass 954 in which chalocogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the hetero ring by
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 548/969
TXT Compounds under subclass 954 wherein the hetero ring is either
    unsubstituted or alkyl subsituted only.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/
TTL ORGANIC COMPOUNDS -- PART OF THE CLASS 532-570 SERIES

CLS 549/1
TXT Compounds under Class 540, subclass 1 which contain a hetero ring having
    sulfur as a ring hetero atom.

    (1)     Note.  Inner sulfonium salts, even when represented in cyclic form,
    are classified under Class 568, subclasses 18+.


CLS 549/2
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which occur in admixture with agents which
    function to prevent physical or chemical change.


CLS 549/3
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which include aluminum or a metal with a
    specific gravity greater than 4.

    (1)     Note.  Arsenic is considered a metal for the purpose of this
    subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:

                             and


CLS 549/4
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which include boron or silicon.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:

                                and


CLS 549/5
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 wherein phosphorus is attached directly or
    indirectly to the hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:



                                and


CLS 549/6
TXT Compounds under subclass 5 wherein the hetero ring is five-membered.


CLS 549/7
TXT Compounds under subclass 6 wherein the five-membered hetero ring contains
    at least one ring hetero atom in addition to the ring sulfur.


CLS 549/8
TXT Compounds under subclass 6 having exactly four chalcogens (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) bonded directly to the same phosphorus atom.


CLS 549/9
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 wherein the hetero ring has seven or more
    members.


CLS 549/10
TXT Compounds under subclass 9 wherein the hetero ring contains at least one
    hetero atom in addition to the ring sulfur.


CLS 549/11
TXT Compounds under subclass 10 wherein the hetero ring contains at least two
    ring sulfurs.


CLS 549/12
TXT Compounds under subclass 9 wherein the hetero ring having at least seven
    members is a cyclo in a polycyclo ring system containing at least three
    cyclos.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:

                                and


CLS 549/13
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 wherein the hetero ring is six-membered.


CLS 549/14
TXT Compounds under subclass 13 wherein the hetero ring contains at least one
    ring hetero atom in addition to the ring sulfur.


CLS 549/15
TXT Compounds under subclass 14 wherein the hetero ring is one of the cyclos of
    a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 549/16
TXT Compounds under subclass 15 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly three rings.


CLS 549/17
TXT Compounds under subclass 16 wherein the hetero ring contains at least two
    ring sulfurs.


CLS 549/18
TXT Compounds under subclass 14 wherein the six-membered hetero ring contains
    at least two ring hetero atoms in addition to the ring sulfur.


CLS 549/19
TXT Compounds under subclass 18 wherein the hetero ring contains at least two
    ring sulfurs.


CLS 549/20
TXT Compounds under subclass 14 wherein the hetero ring contains exactly two
    ring sulfurs.


CLS 549/21
TXT Compounds under subclass 20 wherein nitrogen or chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is attached directly to the hetero ring by
    nonionic bonding.


CLS 549/22
TXT Compounds under subclass 20 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) or nitrogen is attached indirectly to the hetero
    ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 549/23
TXT Compounds under subclass 13 wherein the six-membered hetero ring is one of
    the cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 549/24
TXT Compounds under subclass 23 wherein the polycyclo ring system has at least
    four cyclos.


CLS 549/25
TXT Compounds under subclass 24 in which chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached directly to the hetero ring by nonionic
    bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:

                            and


CLS 549/26
TXT Compounds under subclass 23 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly three rings.


CLS 549/27
TXT Compounds under subclass 26 in which chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached directly to the hetero ring by nonionic
    bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/28
TXT Compounds under subclass 13 in which chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) or nitrogen is attached directly to the hetero ring
    by nonionic bonding.


CLS 549/29
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 wherein the hetero ring is five-membered.


CLS 549/30
TXT Compounds under subclass 29 wherein the hetero ring contains at least one
    ring hetero atom in addition to the ring sulfur.


CLS 549/31
TXT Compounds under subclass 30 wherein the hetero ring is one of the cyclos of
    a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:

                               and


CLS 549/32
TXT Compounds under subclass 31 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly two rings.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:

                                and


CLS 549/33
TXT Compounds under subclass 22 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached directly to the hetero ring by nonionic
    bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:

                               and


CLS 549/34
TXT Compounds under subclass 30 wherein the hetero ring contains at least two
    ring hetero atoms in addition to the ring sulfur.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:

                               and


CLS 549/35
TXT Compounds under subclass 30 wherein the hetero ring contains exactly two
    ring sulfurs.


CLS 549/36
TXT Compounds under subclass 35 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to ring carbon of the hetero
    ring.


CLS 549/37
TXT Compounds under subclass 36 wherein nitrogen or chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the hetero ring
    by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/38
TXT Compounds under subclass 35 wherein nitrogen is attached directly to the
    hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/39
TXT Compounds under subclass 35 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached directly to the hetero ring by nonionic
    bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/40
TXT Compounds under subclass 30 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached directly to ring sulfur of the hetero
    ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 549/41
TXT Compounds under subclass 29 wherein the five-membered hetero ring is one of
    the cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 549/42
TXT Compounds under subclass 41 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly four rings.


CLS 549/43
TXT Compounds under subclass 41 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly three rings.


CLS 549/44
TXT Compounds under subclass 43 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached directly to the tricyclo ring system by
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:

                                  and


CLS 549/45
TXT Compounds under subclass 44 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached directly to the hetero ring by nonionic
    bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/46
TXT Compounds under subclass 45 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached directly to ring sulfur of the hetero
    ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 549/47
TXT Compounds under subclass 45 wherein halogen is attached directly to the
    tricyclo ring system by nonionic bonding.


CLS 549/48
TXT Compounds under subclass 44 wherein nitrogen is attached directly or
    indirectly to the tricyclo ring system by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/49
TXT Compounds under subclass 41 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly two rings.


CLS 549/50
TXT Compounds under subclass 49 wherein the bicyclo ring system contains at
    least one ring hetero atom in addition to the ring sulfur of the
    five-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:

                               and


CLS 549/51
TXT Compounds under subclass 49 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached directly to the bicyclo ring system by
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/52
TXT Compounds under subclass 51 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached directly to the hetero ring by nonionic
    bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:

                             and


CLS 549/53
TXT Compounds under subclass 52 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached directly to the ring sulfur of the
    five-membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 549/54
TXT Compounds under subclass 52 wherein at least two chalcogens (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) are bonded directly to the bicyclo ring
    system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/55
TXT Compounds under subclass 52 wherein nitrogen is attached directly or
    indirectly to the bicyclo ring system by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


                               and


CLS 549/56
TXT Compounds under subclass 52 wherein halogen is attached directly or
    indirectly to the bicyclo ring system by nonionic bonding.


CLS 549/57
TXT Compounds under subclass 49 wherein X

    nitrogen or --, in which X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium), is attached directly to the bicyclo ring system by nonionic
    bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:

                                   and


CLS 549/58
TXT Compounds under subclass 49 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the bicyclo ring system
    by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:



                                  and


CLS 549/59
TXT Compounds under subclass 29 which contain an additional hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:

                                  and


CLS 549/60
TXT Compounds under subclass 59 wherein the additional hetero ring contains
    oxygen as a ring hetero atom.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/61
TXT Compounds under subclass 29 wherein the -CN group is bonded directly to
    ring carbon of the hetero ring.


CLS 549/62
TXT Compounds under subclass 29 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to ring carbon of the hetero
    ring.


CLS 549/63
TXT Compounds under subclass 62 wherein nitrogen is attached directly to the
    hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:

                             and


CLS 549/64
TXT Compounds under subclass 62 wherein --, in which X is chalcogen (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), is bonded directly to the hetero
    ring.


CLS 549/65
TXT Compounds under subclass 62 wherein nitrogen is attached indirectly to the
    hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/66
TXT Compounds under subclass 62 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the hetero ring by
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:

                              and


CLS 549/67
TXT Compounds under subclass 62 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached directly to ring sulfur of the hetero
    ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 549/68
TXT Compounds under subclass 29 wherein nitrogen is attached directly to the
    hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/69
TXT Compounds under subclass 68 wherein --, in which X is chalcogen (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to the nitrogen
    atom.


CLS 549/70
TXT Compounds under subclass 29 wherein --, in which X is chalcogen, (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), is bonded directly to the hetero
    ring.


CLS 549/71
TXT Compounds under subclass 70 wherein the -C-

    is part of a --X- group, in which the X's are the same or diverse
    chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is


CLS 549/72
TXT Compounds under subclass 70 wherein nitrogen or chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the hetero ring
    by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:



                             and


CLS 549/73
TXT Compounds under subclass 70 wherein halogen is attached directly or
    indirectly to the hetero ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 549/74
TXT Compounds under subclass 29 wherein nitrogen is attached indirectly to the
    hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/75
TXT Compounds under subclass 74 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the hetero ring by
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/76
TXT Compounds under subclass 75 wherein the chalcogen, X (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,

    selenium, or tellurium), is in a -- group.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:

                            and


CLS 549/77
TXT Compounds under subclass 76 which contain an unsaturated carbocyclic ring
    or acyclic carbon to carbon unsaturation.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:



                            and


CLS 549/78
TXT Compounds under subclass 29 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the hetero ring by
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/79
TXT Compounds under subclass 78 in which the

    chalcogen, X, is part of a --X- group, wherein the X's are the same or
    diverse chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).


CLS 549/80
TXT Compounds under subclass 29 which contain an unsaturated carbocyclic ring
    or acyclic carbon to carbon unsaturation.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:



                                  and


CLS 549/81
TXT Compounds under subclass 29 wherein halogen is attached directly to the
    hetero ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 549/82
TXT Compounds under subclass 81 wherein at least three halogen atoms are
    attached directly to the hetero ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 549/83
TXT Compounds under subclass 29 in which the five-membered hetero ring is
    unsubstituted or substituted by hydrocarbon radicals only.


CLS 549/84
TXT Processes under subclass 83 of forming the five-membered hetero ring
    utilizing acyclic reactants only.


CLS 549/85
TXT Processes under subclass 84 which utilize a metal containing catalyst.


CLS 549/86
TXT Processes under subclass 83 in which the five-membered hetero ring is
    alkylated.


CLS 549/87
TXT Compounds under subclass 29 wherein at least two chalcogens (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) are double bonded directly to ring sulfur
    of the hetero ring.


CLS 549/88
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 wherein the hetero ring is four-membered.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/89
TXT Compounds under subclass 88 wherein the hetero ring contains at least one
    ring hetero atom in addition to ring sulfur.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:



                               and


CLS 549/90
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 wherein the hetero ring is three-membered and
    contains chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) or
    nitrogen attached directly or indirectly thereto by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/200
TXT Compounds under Class 540, subclass 1 which contain a hetero ring having
    oxygen as a ring hetero atom.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/201
TXT Products under subclass 200 which contain a compound having an oxygen
    containing hetero ring in admixture with a preserving or stabilizing agent
    whose sole function is to prevent physical or chemical change.


CLS 549/202
TXT Products under subclass 201 wherein the hetero ring is oxirane, i.e., a
    three-member hetero ring consisting of two ring carbons and one ring oxygen.


CLS 549/203
TXT Products under subclass 201 wherein the hetero ring is a cyclic anhydride,
    i.e., -C(=X)OC(=X)- is part of the ring, wherein the X's are the same or
    diverse chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium).


CLS 549/204
TXT Products under subclass 201 wherein the hetero ring is a lactone, i.e.,
    -C(=X)0- is part of the ring, wherein X represents chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).


CLS 549/205
TXT Products under subclass 201 wherein the hetero ring is five-membered.


CLS 549/206
TXT Compounds under subclass 200 which include aluminum or a metal having a
    specific gravity greater than four.

    (1)     Note.  Arsenic is considered a metal.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/207
TXT Compounds under subclass 206 which contain arsenic.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/208
TXT Compounds under subclass 206 wherein the hetero ring contains either (1)
    three members, or (2) seven or more members.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/209
TXT Compounds under subclass 206 wherein the metal is bonded directly to (1) a
    ring carbon of the oxygen-containing hetero ring, or (2) a carbon atom
    which additionally is attached directly or indirectly to the
    oxygen-containing hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are compounds such as:

            which require "doubling back" through the metal to satisfy the
    conditions necessary for inclusion here.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/210
TXT Compounds under subclass 206 wherein the metal is bonded directly to
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), which chalcogen
    is attached directly or indirectly to the hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/211
TXT Compounds under subclass 210 in which the chalcogen, X, is part of a

    --X- group, wherein the X's are the same or diverse chalcogens.

    (1)     Note.  These compounds are usually referred to as "salts".

    (2)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/212
TXT Compounds under subclass 206 wherein the hetero ring is a cyclo in a
    polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/213
TXT Compounds under subclass 200 which contain boron.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/214
TXT Compounds under subclass 200 which contain silicon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/215
TXT Compounds under subclass 214 which contain a three-membered ring consisting
    of one oxygen and two carbons:

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/216
TXT Compounds under subclass 200 in which phosphorus is bonded directly to the
    hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/217
TXT Compounds under subclass 216 which contain a three-membered ring consisting
    of one oxygen and two carbons, i.e., oxirane.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/218
TXT Compounds under subclass 200 in which phosphorus is attached indirectly to
    the hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/219
TXT Compounds under subclass 218 which contain a three-membered ring consisting
    of one oxygen and two carbons, i.e., oxirane.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/220
TXT Compounds under subclass 218 wherein the hetero ring is a cyclo in a
    polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/221
TXT Compounds under subclass 218 in which the hetero ring contains at least two
    ring oxygens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/222
TXT Compounds under subclass 218 in which chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/223
TXT Compounds under subclass 200 having one of the following basic structures
    which may contain double bonds between ring members of the tricyclo ring
    system:

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/224
TXT Compounds under subclass 223 which contain the xanthene ring system as
    three cyclos of a polycyclo ring system containing four or more rings.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/225
TXT Compounds under subclass 223 in which nitrogen is bonded directly to the
    xanthene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/226
TXT Compounds under subclass 225 in which at least two nitrogens are bonded
    directly to the xanthene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/227
TXT Compounds under subclass 226 in which nitrogens are bonded directly to the
    xanthene ring system at the 2- and 7- positions according to the following
    structure:

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/228
TXT Compounds under subclass 200 in which the hetero ring contains as part of
    its structure -O-C(=X)-O-, wherein X represents chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes cyclic carbonates.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/229
TXT Compounds under subclass 228 wherein the hetero ring has five ring members.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/230
TXT Compounds under subclass 229 in which the five-membered hetero ring, except
    for the single =X to the ring, has only hydrogen or hydrocarbyl group(s)
    bonded to it.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/231
TXT Compounds under subclass 200 wherein the hetero ring is a cyclic anhydride;
    i.e.,

    --O- is part of the ring, X's are the same or different chalcogens (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/232
TXT Compounds under subclass 231 wherein the cyclic anhydride has at least six
    ring members and is one of the cyclos in a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/233
TXT Compounds under subclass 231 wherein the cyclic anhydride has five ring
    members.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/234
TXT Compounds under subclass 233 wherein the five-membered cyclic anhydride is
    one of the cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/235
TXT Compounds under subclass 234 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly four rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/236
TXT Compounds under subclass 234 wherin the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly three rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/237
TXT Compounds under subclass 236 wherein at least three ring members of one
    cyclo are ring members of an additional cyclo in the tricyclo ring system
    (i.e., bridged).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/238
TXT Compounds under subclass 237 wherein halogen is bonded directly to the
    bridged tricyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/239
TXT Compounds under subclass 236 wherein the tricyclo ring system includes at
    least two ring oxygens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/240
TXT Compounds under subclass 234 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly two rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/241
TXT Compounds under subclass 240 wherein at least two bicyclo ring systems,
    each having a cyclic anhydride as one of the cyclos, are present.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/242
TXT Compounds under subclass 241 wherein a

    -- group, in which X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium), is bonded directly to at least one of the bicyclo ring systems
    that has a cyclic anhydride as one of the cyclos.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/243
TXT Compounds under subclass 240 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) or nitrogen is bonded directly to the bicyclo ring
    system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/244
TXT Compounds under subclass 240 wherein a

    -- group, in which X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium), is bonded directly to the bicyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/245
TXT Compounds under subclass 244 in which the

    -- is part of a --XH group, wherein the X's are the same or diverse
    chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium); and wherein H of
    -XH may be replaced by a substituted or unsubstituted ammonium ion or a
    Group IA or IIA light metal.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/246
TXT Compounds under subclass 240 wherein halogen is bonded directly to the
    bicyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/247
TXT The compound under subclass 240 which has the following structural formula:



CLS 549/248
TXT Processes under subclass 247 for the preparation of phthalic anhydride, per
    se, by an oxidation reaction.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of processes provided for herein are the oxidation
    of naphthalene or of orthoxylene to phthalic anhydride.


CLS 549/249
TXT Processes under subclass 248 wherein a catalyst, which is fluidized by
    passing gaseous reactants through it, is employed.


CLS 549/250
TXT Processes under subclass 247 wherein the phthalic anhydride is separated
    from impurities or from the reaction medium.


CLS 549/251
TXT Processes under subclass 250 which include the step of subjecting
    impurities contaminating phathalic anhydride to chemical reaction.


CLS 549/252
TXT Compounds under subclass 233 which contain the cyclic anhydride and at
    least one additional hetero ring which may also be a cyclic anhydride ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/253
TXT Compounds under subclass 233 wherein nitrogen or additional chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium) is attached directly or
    indirectly to the cyclic anhydride by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/254
TXT Compounds under subclass 233 wherein halogen is attached directly or
    indirectly to the cyclic anhydride by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/255
TXT Compounds under subclass 233 wherein an acyclic carbon chain that contains
    an olefinic or acetylenic linkage is bonded directly to the cyclic
    anhydride ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/256
TXT Processes under subclass 233 wherein a five-membered cyclic anhydride is
    prepared by an oxidation reaction.

    (1)     Note.  Among the processes provided for herein are:  oxidation of
    crotonaldehyde to meleic anhydride, oxidation of furfural to maleic
    anhydride, and oxidation of mesityl oxide to citraconic anhydride.


CLS 549/257
TXT Processes under subclass 256 wherein the oxidation reaction is performed on
    benzene or on a hydrocarbon that contains the benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of processes provided for herein are:  oxidation of
    benzene to maleic anhydride and oxidation of biphenyl to phenyl maleic
    anhydride.


CLS 549/258
TXT Processes under subclass 256 wherein the oxidation reaction is performed on
    an acyclic or alicyclic hydrocarbon.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of processes provided for herein are:  oxidation of
    butane to maleic anhydride, oxidation of butene to maleic anhydride, and
    oxidation of isoprene to citraconic acid anhydride.


CLS 549/259
TXT Processes under subclass 258 wherein vanadium and phosphorus, in compound
    or elemental form, are utilized.

    (1)     Note.  The vanadium and phosphorus may both be part of a single
    compound; they may each be components of individual compounds; one or both
    may be in elemental form; in sum, vanadium and phosphorus may be utilized
    in any possible manner.


CLS 549/260
TXT Processes under subclass 259 wherein, in addition to vanadium and
    phosphorous, a further heavy metal, other than titanium, is utilized.

    (1)     Note.  Titanium, if utilized alone, does not satisfy the
    requirement of this subclass for an additional heavy metal, whereas the
    combination of titanium with an additional heavy metal does satisfy the
    requirement.


CLS 549/261
TXT Compounds under subclass 233 wherein the five-membered cyclic anhydride has
    a double bond between two of its ring members.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/262
TXT The compound under subclass 261 which has the following structural formula:

    (1)     Note.  Examples of concepts provided for herein are: synthesis of
    maleic anhydride from maleic acid, and purification and separation of
    maleic anhydride.


CLS 549/263
TXT Compounds under subclass 200 wherein the hetero ring is a lactone, i.e., a
    cyclic inner ester, wherein

    --O- is part of the ring, X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium).

    (1)     Note. Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/264
TXT Compounds under subclass 263 which contain a spiro ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:



CLS 549/265
TXT Compounds under subclass 264 wherein at least one of the rings included in
    the spiro ring system is a lactone ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:



CLS 549/266
TXT Compounds under subclass 263 in which the lactone ring has seven or more
    ring members.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/267
TXT Compounds under subclass 266 in which the lactone ring contains two or more
    ring oxygens.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/268
TXT Compounds under subclass 266 wherein the lactone ring having at least seven
    members is a cyclo in a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/269
TXT Compounds under subclass 268 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly two rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/270
TXT Compounds under subclass 269 wherein an additional acyclic chalcogen (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to the lactone
    ring.

    (1)     Note.  Compounds classified herein have at least two acyclic
    chalcogens bonded directly to the lactone ring, one of which is the
    chalcogen of the lactone group which is double bonded directly to the ring.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/271
TXT Compounds under subclass 266 wherein an additional chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is attached directly or indirectly to the
    lactone ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Compounds classified herein have at least two chalcogens
    bonded directly or indirectly to the lactone ring, one of which is the
    chalcogen of the lactone group which is double bonded directly to the ring.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/272
TXT Processes under subclass 266 wherein the compound containing the lactone
    ring of seven or more members is prepared from a cyclic ketone, i.e., a
    ketone wherein the carbonyl is part of a ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a process provided for herein is:


CLS 549/273
TXT Compounds under subclass 263 in which the lactone has six ring members,
    having the following basic structure, which may contain double bonds
    between ring members.


CLS 549/274
TXT Compounds under subclass 273 in which the lactone ring contains two or more
    ring oxygens.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/275
TXT Compounds under subclass 273 wherein the six-membered lactone ring is one
    of the cyclos in a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 549/276
TXT Compounds under subclass 275 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly four rings.


CLS 549/277
TXT Compounds under subclass 276 wherein the tetracyclo ring system consists of
    four six-membered rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/278
TXT Compounds under subclass 277 in which two or more additional chalcogens
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) are bonded directly to the
    tetracyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/279
TXT Compounds under subclass 276 wherein the tetracyclo ring system contains a
    ring oxygen bonded directly to a ring carbon, which carbon is a member of
    two of the cyclos in the tetracyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/280
TXT Compounds under subclass 275 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly three rings.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/281
TXT Compounds under subclass 280 wherein (1) at least three ring members of one
    cyclo are ring members of an additional cyclo in the tricyclo ring system,
    or (2) a ring carbon is a member of each of the cyclos of the tricyclo ring
    system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for bridged and peri-fused ring
    systems.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/282
TXT Compounds under subclass 280 wherein the tricyclo ring system contains at
    least one ring oxygen in addition to the ring oxygen of the six-membered
    hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/283
TXT Compounds under subclass 275 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly two rings.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/284
TXT Compounds under subclass 283 which contain at least two bicyclo ring
    systems each of which contains a six-membered lactone as one of its cyclos.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/285
TXT Compounds under subclass 283 wherein an additional acyclic chalcogen is
    bonded directly to the six-membered lactone ring.

    (1)     Note.  Compounds classified herein have at least two acyclic
    chalcogens bonded directly to the lactone ring, one of which is the
    chalcogen of the lactone group which is double bonded directly to the ring.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/286
TXT Compounds under subclass 285 wherein a benzene ring and the six-membered
    lactone ring are both bonded directly to the same acyclic carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/287
TXT Compounds under subclass 283 in which an

    acyclic -- group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium), is bonded directly to the lactone ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/288
TXT Compounds under subclass 283 in which nitrogen is bonded directly to the
    bicyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/289
TXT Compounds under subclass 283 wherein the other cyclo of the bicyclo ring
    system is a six-membered carbocyclic ring which has chalcogen (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) bonded directly to it.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/290
TXT Compounds under subclass 283 in which the bicyclo ring system consists of
    the six-membered lactone and an additional six-membered ring; said bycyclic
    lactone is either unsubstituted or substituted by hydrocarbon groups only.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/291
TXT Compounds under subclass 273 in which an

    acyclic -- group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium), is bonded directly to the lactone ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/292
TXT Compounds under subclass 273 wherein an additional chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to the lactone ring.

    (1)     Note.  Compounds classified herein have at least two acyclic
    chalcogens bonded directly to the oxygen-containing hetero ring, one of
    which is the chalcogen of the lactone group which is double bonded directly
    to the ring.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/293
TXT Compounds under subclass 273 in which nitrogen is attached directly or
    indirectly to lactone ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/294
TXT Compounds under subclass 273 in which there is at least one double bond
    between ring members of the lactone ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/295
TXT Compounds under subclass 263 wherein the lactone has five-members.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/296
TXT Compounds under subclass 295 wherein the five-membered lactone ring
    contains at least two ring oxygens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/297
TXT Compounds under subclass 295 wherein the five-membered lactone is one of
    the cyclos of a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/298
TXT Compounds under subclass 297 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly four rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/299
TXT Compounds under subclass 297 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly three cyclos.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/300
TXT Compounds under subclass 299 wherein (1) at least three ring members of one
    cyclo are ring members of an additional cyclo in the tricyclo ring system,
    or (2) one ring carbon is a member of each of the cyclos of the tricyclo
    ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/301
TXT Compounds under subclass 299 wherein the tricyclo ring system consists of
    the five-membered lactone ring, a five-membered carbocyclic ring and a
    three-membered carbocyclic ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/302
TXT Compounds under subclass 297 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly two rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/303
TXT Compounds under subclass 302 wherein nitrogen is bonded directly to the
    lactone ring of the bicyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/304
TXT Compounds under subclass 302 wherein nitrogen is attached indirectly to the
    lactone ring of the bicyclo ring system by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/305
TXT Compounds under subclass 302 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the lactone ring of the
    bicyclo ring system by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/306
TXT Compounds under subclass 302 wherein the bicyclo ring system contains at
    least two ring oxygens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/307
TXT Compounds under subclass 302 wherein the bicyclo ring system consists of
    the five-membered lactone ring and a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/308
TXT Compounds under subclass 307 wherein two carbocyclic rings are bonded
    directly to the same ring atom of the lactone ring of the bicyclo ring
    system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/309
TXT Compounds under subclass 308 wherein nitrogen is bonded directly to each of
    the carbocyclic rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided herein is:


CLS 549/310
TXT Compounds under subclass 307 wherein an additional chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to the bicyclo ring
    system.

    (1)     Note.  The chalcogen required by this subclass is in addition to
    the double bonded oxygen of the -C-O- grouping of the lactone ring.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/311
TXT Compounds under subclass 302 wherein the bicyclo ring system consists of
    the five-membered lactone ring and another five-membered ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/312
TXT Compounds under subclass 311 wherein an acyclic carbon chain containing
    carbon to carbon unsaturation is attached directly or indirectly to the
    lactone ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/313
TXT Compounds under subclass 295 wherein an additional chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to the lactone ring.

    (1)     Note.  The chalcogen required by this subclass is in addition to
    the double

            bonded oxygen of the --O- grouping of the lactone ring.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/314
TXT Compounds under subclass 313 wherein two or more additional chalcogens
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) are bonded directly to the
    lactone ring.

    (1)     Note.  Compounds classified herein have at least three acyclic
    chalcogens bonded directly to the oxygen- containing hetero ring, one of
    which is the chalcogen of the lactone group which is double bonded directly
    to the ring.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/315
TXT Compounds under subclass 314 wherein there is a double bond between ring
    members of the lactone ring, or chalcogen (i,e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium,
    or tellurium) is double bonded directly at the 3- or 4- position of the
    lactone ring.

    (1)     Note.  Example of compounds provided for herein are:

    (2)     Note.  The two compounds of (1) Note, supra, are related by
    keto-enol tautomerism.


CLS 549/316
TXT Compounds under subclass 315 which are amine addition salts.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/317
TXT Compounds under subclass 315 in which sulfur

    or a -- group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium), is bonded directly to a cyclic chalcogen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/318
TXT Compounds under subclass 313 wherein an

    acyclic -- group, in which X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium,
    or tellurium), is attached directly or indirectly to the lactone ring by
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/319
TXT Compounds under subclass 313 wherein plural alkyl groups are bonded
    directly to the same ring carbon of the lactone ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/320
TXT Compounds under subclass 295 which contain the five-membered lactone ring
    and at least one additional hetero ring, which may also be a five-membered
    lactone ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/321
TXT Compounds under subclass 295 wherein nitrogen is attached directly or
    indirectly to the lactone ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds pro
    vided for herein are:


CLS 549/322
TXT Compounds under subclass 295 wherein a

    -- group, in which X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium), is bonded directly to the lactone ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/323
TXT Compounds under subclass 295 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the lactone ring by
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/324
TXT Compounds under subclass 295 wherein halogen is attached directly or
    indirectly to the lactone ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/325
TXT Processes under subclass 295 wherein the lactone ring is prepared by
    hydrogenation of a cyclic anhydride.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a process provided for herein is:


CLS 549/326
TXT Processes under subclass 295 wherein the lactone ring is prepared from a
    compound containing the --O- group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a process provided for herein is:

    (2)     Note.The reactant containing the

            --O- group may be a lactone itself, which is converted into a
    five-membered lactone ring; for example:


CLS 549/327
TXT Compounds under subclass 263 in which acyclic carbon is double bonded
    directly to a ring carbon of a four-membered lactone ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/328
TXT Processes under subclass 263 whereby a four-membered lactone ring is formed.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a process provided for herein is:


CLS 549/329
TXT Processes under subclass 328 whereby the four-membered lactone ring is
    formed from a ketene.

    (1)     Note.  Ketene is represented by the structure HCH=C=O, wherein -H
    may be substituted.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a process provided for herein is:


CLS 549/330
TXT Compounds under subclass 200 which contain a spiro ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/331
TXT Compounds under subclass 330 wherein at least one of the rings in the spiro
    ring system is an oxygen containing hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/332
TXT Compounds under subclass 331 wherein at least one of the rings in the spiro
    ring system is a three- or four-membered oxygen containing hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/333
TXT Compounds under subclass 331 wherein at least one of the rings in the spiro
    ring system contains two or more ring oxygens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/334
TXT Compounds under subclass 333 wherein both of the rings in the spiro ring
    system are oxygen containing hetero rings.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/335
TXT Compounds under subclass 334 wherein both of the hetero rings in the spiro
    ring system are six-membered rings, each containing at least two ring
    oxygens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/336
TXT Compounds under subclass 333 wherein one of the two rings which form the
    spiro ring system is additionally one of the cyclos of a polycyclo ring
    system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/337
TXT Compounds under subclass 336 which contain an additional oxygen containing
    hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/338
TXT Compounds under subclass 337 which contain at least two five-membered
    oxygen containing hetero rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/339
TXT Compounds under subclass 336 wherein one of the two rings which form the
    spiro ring system is additionally one of the cyclos of a
    tricyclo-carbocyclic ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/340
TXT Compounds under subclass 339 which contain

    an acyclic -- group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium
    or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/341
TXT Compounds under subclass 333 in which the spiro hetero ring is a
    five-membered ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/342
TXT Compounds under subclass 341 which contain

    an acyclic -- group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium
    or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/343
TXT Compounds under subclass 331 wherein both rings in the spiro ring system
    are oxygen containing hetero rings.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/344
TXT Compounds under subclass 343 wherein one of the two oxygen containing
    hetero rings in the spiro ring system is additionally one of the cyclos of
    a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/345
TXT Compounds under subclass 331 in which the spiro hetero ring is one of the
    cyclos in a bicyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for, inter alia, griseofulvin and its
    derivatives, e.g.,


CLS 549/346
TXT Compounds under subclass 200 in which the oxygen containing hetero ring has
    seven or more ring members.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/347
TXT Compounds under subclass 346 in which the hetero ring contains at least two
    ring oxygens.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/348
TXT Compounds under subclass 347 in which the hetero ring is one of the cyclos
    in a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 549/349
TXT Compounds under subclass 348 in which the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly three cyclos.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/350
TXT Compounds under subclass 348 in which the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly two cyclos.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/351
TXT Compounds under subclass 350 wherein the bicyclo ring system contains at
    least three ring oxygens.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/352
TXT Compounds under subclass 347 in which the hetero ring contains at least
    three ring oxygens.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/353
TXT Compounds under subclass 352 in which the hetero ring contains exactly four
    oxygens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/354
TXT Compounds under subclass 346 in which the hetero ring is one of the cyclos
    of a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/355
TXT Compounds under subclass 354 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly two rings.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/356
TXT Compounds under subclass 200 in which the oxygen containing hetero ring has
    six ring members.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/357
TXT Compounds under subclass 356 in which the hetero ring contains at least two
    ring oxygens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/358
TXT Compounds under subclass 357 wherein the hetero ring is one of the cyclos
    in a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/359
TXT Compounds under subclass 358 in which the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly three rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/360
TXT Compounds under subclass 359 wherein at least three ring members of one
    cyclo are ring members of an additional cyclo in the tricyclo ring system
    (i.e., bridged).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/361
TXT Compounds under subclass 359 wherein the tricyclo ring system contains at
    least three ring oxygens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/362
TXT Compounds under subclass 358 in which the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly two rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/363
TXT Compounds under subclass 362 wherein at least three ring members of one
    cyclo are ring members of the other cyclo in the bicyclo ring system (i.e.,
    bridged).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/364
TXT Compounds under subclass 362 wherein the bicyclo ring system contains at
    least three ring oxygens.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/365
TXT Compounds under subclass 362 in which the hetero ring consists of two ring
    oxygens and four ring carbons wherein the ring oxygens are in the
    1,2-positions or 1,3-positions of the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/366
TXT Compounds under subclass 362 in which nitrogen is attached indirectly to
    the hetero ring by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/367
TXT Compounds under subclass 357 in which the hetero ring contains at least
    three ring oxygens.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/368
TXT The compound under subclass 367 which has the following structure:

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for trioxane, per se, and processes
    for the production, purification, separation, etc., of trioxane.


CLS 549/369
TXT Compounds under subclass 357 in which the hetero ring consists of two ring
    oxygens and four ring carbons wherein the ring oxygens are in the
    1,3-positions of the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/370
TXT Compounds under subclass 369 which contain an additional oxygen containing
    hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/371
TXT Compounds under subclass 369 in which nitrogen is bonded directly to the
    hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/372
TXT Compounds under subclass 369 in which chalcogen (i.e., sulfur selenium, or
    tellurium) or a

    -- group, wherein X is chalcogen, is bonded directly to the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/373
TXT Compounds under subclass 369 in which nitrogen is attached indirectly to
    the hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/374
TXT Compounds under subclass 369 in which chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the hetero ring by
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/375
TXT Compounds under subclass 374 wherein the

    chalcogen, X, is in a -C- group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/376
TXT Processes under subclass 369 in which an aldehyde is reacted with a
    compound containing acyclic carbon to carbon unsaturation to prepare a
    1,3-dioxane compound.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for processes such as the preparation
    of 4,4-dimethyl-1,3-dioxane from isobutylene and formaldehyde, etc.


CLS 549/377
TXT Compounds under subclass 357 in which the hetero ring consists of two ring
    oxygens and four ring carbons wherein the ring oxygens are in the
    1,4-positions of the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/378
TXT Compounds under subclass 377 in which chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached directly or indirectly to the hetero
    ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/379
TXT Compounds under subclass 378 in which at least two chalcogens (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) are bonded directly to the hetero
    ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/380
TXT Compounds under subclass 377 in which halogen is attached directly or
    indirectly to the hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/381
TXT Compounds under subclass 356 in which the hetero ring is one of the cyclos
    in a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/382
TXT Compounds under subclass 381 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly five rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/383
TXT Compounds under subclass 381 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly four rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/384
TXT Compounds under subclass 383 wherein the four rings of the tetracyclo ring
    system are each six-membered.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/385
TXT Compounds under subclass 381 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly three rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/386
TXT Compounds under subclass 385 wherein (1) at least three ring members of one
    cyclo are ring members of an additional cyclo in the tricyclo ring system,
    or (2) a ring carbon is a member of each of the cyclos of the tricyclo ring
    system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/387
TXT Compounds under subclass 385 wherein the tricyclo ring system includes at
    least one ring oxygen in addition to the ring oxygen of the six-membered
    hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/388
TXT Compounds under subclass 385 wherein the three rings of the tricyclo ring
    system are each six-membered.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/389
TXT Compounds under subclass 388 wherein the tricyclo ring system consists of a
    naphthalene ring system, which may be hydrogenated, sharing two adjacent
    carbons with the six-membered hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/390
TXT Compounds under subclass 388 wherein the tricyclo ring system has the
    following basic structure which may contain double bonds between ring
    members.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/391
TXT Compounds under subclass 390 in which at least two chalcogens are bonded
    directly to the tricyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/392
TXT Compounds under subclass 388 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to the hetero ring of the
    tricyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/393
TXT Compounds under subclass 392 in which a

    -- group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium), is bonded directly to the tricyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/394
TXT Compounds under subclass 388 in which nitrogen is bonded directly to the
    tricyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/395
TXT Compounds under subclass 385 in which acyclic chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to the hetero ring of
    the tricyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 549/396
TXT Compounds under subclass 381 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly two rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/397
TXT Compounds under subclass 396 wherein at least three ring members of one
    cyclo are ring members of the other cyclo in the bicyclo ring system (i.e.,
    bridged).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/398
TXT Compound under subclass 396 in which the bicyclo ring system consists of
    the six-membered hetero ring and a six-member carbocyclic ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/399
TXT Compounds under subclass 398 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to the hetero ring of the
    bicyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/400
TXT Compounds under subclass 399 wherein at least two chalcogens are bonded
    directly to the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/401
TXT Compounds under subclass 399 in which chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to the ring carbon in the
    position which is para to the ring oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/402
TXT Compounds under subclass 401 in which a

    -- group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium), is bonded directly to the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/403
TXT Compounds under subclass 401 in which a benzene ring is bonded directly to
    the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/404
TXT Compounds under subclass 398 in which nitrogen is bonded directly to the
    bicyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/405
TXT Compounds under subclass 398 in which a

    -- group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium), is bonded directly to the bicyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/406
TXT Compounds under subclass 398 in which a carbocyclic ring is bonded directly
    to the hetero ring of the bicyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/407
TXT Compounds under subclass 398 in which chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) or nitrogen is attached indirectly to the hetero
    ring by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/408
TXT Compounds under subclass 398 in which chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to the carbocyclic ring of the
    bicyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/409
TXT Compounds under subclass 408 in which chalcogen is double bonded or at
    least two chalcogens are bonded directly to the carbocyclic ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/410
TXT Compound under subclass 408 wherein the

    singly bonded chalogen of a --X-group, in which the X's are the same or
    diverse chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium), is bonded
    directly to the carbocyclic ring of the bicyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/411
TXT Processes under subclass 408 wherein a 1,4-di-oxygen substituted
    carbocyclic ring is utilized as a reactant.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for processes utilizing
    l,4-benzoquinones and 1,4-dihydroxy benzene compounds, inter alia, as
    reactants.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a process provided for herein is:


CLS 549/412
TXT Processes under subclass 408 whereby substituents on the carbocyclic ring
    of the bicyclo ring system are modified chemically.


CLS 549/413
TXT Processes under subclass 408 whereby the product is separated from
    impurities or from the reaction medium.


CLS 549/414
TXT Compounds under subclass 356 which contain an additional oxygen containing
    hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/415
TXT Compounds under subclass 414 wherein the additional oxygen containing
    hetero ring is six-membered.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/416
TXT Compounds under subclass 356 in which chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/417
TXT Compounds under subclass 416 wherein at least two chalcogens are bonded
    directly to the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/418
TXT Compounds under subclass 417 in which hydroxy is bonded directly at the
    3-position and oxygen is double bonded directly at the 4-position of the
    hetero ring, wherein the -H of the hydroxy may be replaced by a substituted
    or unsubstituted ammonium ion or a Group IA or IIA light metal.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/419
TXT Compounds under subclass 416 in which nitrogen is attached directly or
    indirectly to the hetero ring by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein are:


CLS 549/420
TXT Compounds under subclass 416 in which a

    -- group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium), is attached directly or indirectly to the hetero ring by
    acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/421
TXT Compounds under subclass 416 in which an alicyclic ring is bonded directly
    to the chalcogen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/422
TXT Compounds under subclass 416 containing a carbocyclic ring which has at
    least two substituents, one of which contains the hetero ring and another
    one of which contains a -COO- group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/423
TXT Compounds under subclass 416 in which hydroxy or halogen is attached
    directly or indirectly to the hetero ring by acyclic nonionic bonding,
    wherein the -H of the hydroxy may be replaced by a substituted or
    unsubstituted ammonium ion or a Group IA OR IIA light metal.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/424
TXT Compounds under subclass 356 in which nitrogen is bonded directly to the
    hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/425
TXT Compounds under subclass 356 wherein a

    -- group, in which X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium), is bonded directly to the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/426
TXT Compounds under subclass 356 wherein nitrogen is attached indirectly to the
    hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/427
TXT Compounds under subclass 356 in which chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the hetero ring by
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/428
TXT Compounds under subclass 356 in which halogen is attached directly or
    indirectly to the hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/429
TXT Compounds under subclass 200 wherein the oxygen containing hetero ring has
    five ring members.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/430
TXT Compounds under subclass 429 wherein the hetero ring contains at least two
    ring oxygens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/431
TXT Compounds under subclass 430 wherein the hetero ring contains at least
    three ring oxygens.

    (1)     Note.  Ozonides are included herein. These products are usually
    formed by combining ozone with compounds containing a carbon-to-carbon
    multiple bond.


CLS 549/432
TXT Compounds under subclass 430 wherein the hetero ring is one of the cyclos
    of a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/433
TXT Compounds under subclass 432 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly three rings.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/434
TXT Compounds under subclass 432 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly two rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/435
TXT Compounds under subclass 434 wherein at least two hetero rings are present.

    (1)     Note.  The compounds provided for herein include those wherein both
    rings of the bicyclo ring system are hetero, as well as those wherein one
    hetero ring is part of the bicyclo ring system and the other hetero ring
    may be monocyclic or part of a different bicyclo ring system.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/436
TXT Compounds under subclass 434 wherein a

    -- group, in which X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium), is bonded directly to the bicyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/437
TXT Compounds under subclass 434 wherein the acyclic chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to the bicyclo ring
    system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/438
TXT Compounds under subclass 437 wherein a

    -- group, in which X is chalcogen (i.e. oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium), is attached indirectly to the bicyclo ring system by nonionic
    bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/439
TXT Compounds under subclass 434 wherein nitrogen is bonded directly to the
    bicyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/440
TXT Compounds under subclass 434 wherein nitrogen is attached indirectly to the
    bicyclo system by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/441
TXT Compounds under subclass 440 wherein the nitrogen is bonded directly to a X

    -- group, in which X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/442
TXT Compounds under subclass 440 wherein the nitrogen is attached directly to
    carbon by a double or triple bond.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/443
TXT Compounds under subclass 440 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the bicyclo ring system
    by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/444
TXT Compounds under subclass 443 in which the

    chalogen, X, is in a -- group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/445
TXT Compounds under subclass 434 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the bicyclo ring system
    by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/446
TXT Compounds under subclass 445 in which

    the chalcogen, X, is in a -- group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/447
TXT Compounds under subclass 446 in which the

    -- is part of a --X- group, wherein the X's are the same or diverse
    chalcogens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/448
TXT Compounds under subclass 430 which contain at least two hetero rings, which
    may be the same or different.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/449
TXT Compounds under subclass 430 wherein nitrogen or chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note. Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/450
TXT Compounds under subclass 430 wherein a

    -- group, in which X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium), is bonded directly to the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/451
TXT Compounds under subclass 430 wherein nitrogen is attached indirectly to the
    hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/452
TXT Compounds under subclass 451 in which the nitrogen is bonded directly to a

    -- group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/453
TXT Compounds under subclass 430 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the hetero ring by
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/454
TXT Compounds under subclass 453 wherein

    the chalcogen, X, is in a -- group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/455
TXT Compounds under subclass 430 wherein halogen is attached directly or
    indirectly to the hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/456
TXT Compounds under subclass 429 wherein the hetero ring is one of the cyclos
    of a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/457
TXT Compounds under subclass 456 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly four rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 549/458
TXT Compounds under subclass 456 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly three rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/459
TXT Compounds under subclass 458 wherein at least three ring members of one
    cyclo are ring members of an additional cyclo in the tricyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/460
TXT Compounds under subclass 458 wherein the hetero ring shares ring members
    with two six-membered carbocyclic rings, which may contain double bonds
    between ring members.

    (1)     Note. Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/461
TXT Compounds under subclass 460 wherein a

    -- group, in which X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium), is attached directly or indirectly to the ring system by
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/462
TXT Compounds under subclass 456 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly two rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/463
TXT Compounds under subclass 462 wherein three ring members of one cyclo are
    ring members of the other cyclo in the bicyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/464
TXT Compounds under subclass 462 wherein at least two ring oxygens are present
    in the bicyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/465
TXT Compounds under subclass 462 wherein the bicyclo ring system consists of
    two five-membered cyclos.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/466
TXT Compounds under subclass 462 wherein acyclic chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/467
TXT Compounds under subclass 462 wherein nitrogen is attached directly to the
    hetero ring or is attached indirectly to the hetero ring by acyclic
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/468
TXT Compounds under subclass 462 wherein a

    -- group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium), is bonded directly to the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/469
TXT Compounds under subclass 462 wherein a benzene ring is bonded directly to
    the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/470
TXT Compounds under subclass 462 wherein the

    singly bonded chalcogen of a --X- group, in which the X's are the same or
    diverse chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium), is bonded
    directly to the carbocyclic ring of the bicyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/471
TXT Compounds under subclass 462 wherein there are plural double bonds between
    ring members of the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/472
TXT Compounds under subclass 429 wherein at least two hetero rings, which may
    be the same or different, are present.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/473
TXT Compounds under subclass 472 in which an

    acyclic -- group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium), is attached directly or indirectly to the hetero ring by
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/474
TXT Compounds under subclass 429 wherein a cyano group (-C=N) is bonded
    directly to the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/475
TXT Compounds under subclass 429 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/476
TXT Compounds under subclass 475 wherein at least two chalcogens are bonded
    directly to the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/477
TXT Compounds under subclass 476 wherein at least one chalcogen is doubled
    bonded directly to the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/478
TXT Compounds under subclass 476 in which a

    -- group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium), is attached directly or indirectly to the hetero ring by
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/479
TXT Compounds under subclass 475 wherein there is a double bond between ring
    members of the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/480
TXT Compounds under subclass 429 wherein nitrogen is bonded directly to the
    hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/481
TXT Compounds under subclass 480 wherein a nitro group (-NO2) is bonded
    directly to

    the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/482
TXT Compounds under subclass 481 wherein the hetero ring and an additional
    nitrogen are bonded directly to the same carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/483
TXT Compounds under subclass 429 in which a

    -- group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium), is bonded directly to the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/484
TXT Compounds under subclass 483 in which the

    -- is part of a --X- group, wherein the X's are the same or diverse
    chalcogens.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/485
TXT Compounds under subclass 484 wherein at

    least two --X- groups are bonded directly to the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/486
TXT Compounds under subclass 484 in which the

    carbon of the --X- group is bonded directly at the 3-position of the hetero
    ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/487
TXT Compounds under subclass 483 wherein nitrogen is bonded directly to the

    -C- group.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/488
TXT Compounds under subclass 483 wherein an additional chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the hetero ring
    by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/489
TXT Processes under subclass 483 for the preparation of furfural, per se.

    (1)     Note.  Furfural is:


CLS 549/490
TXT Processes under subclass 483 wherein furfural is separated from impurities
    or from the reaction medium.


CLS 549/491
TXT Compounds under subclass 429 wherein nitrogen is attached indirectly to the
    hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/492
TXT Compounds under subclass 491 wherein nitrogen and the hetero ring are
    single bonded directly to the same acyclic saturated hydrocarbon group.

    (1)     Note.  The expression "acyclic saturated hydrocarbon group" refers
    to alkylene.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/493
TXT Compounds under subclass 492 wherein the nitrogen is bonded directly to a
    -- group, in which X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/494
TXT Compounds under subclass 492 in which a

    -- group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium), is attached indirectly to the hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/495
TXT Compounds under subclass 492 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the hetero ring by acyclic
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/496
TXT Compounds under subclass 491 wherein a

    -- group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium), is attached indirectly to the hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/497
TXT Compounds under subclass 429 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the hetero ring by
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/498
TXT Compounds under subclass 497 wherein the

    chalcogen, X, is in a -- group.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/499
TXT Compounds under subclass 498 in which the -- is part of a --X- group,
    wherein the X's are the same or diverse chalcogens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/500
TXT Compounds under subclass 499 wherein at

    least two --X- groups are attached indirectly to the hetero ring by
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/501
TXT Compounds under subclass 499 wherein an additional chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the hetero ring
    by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/502
TXT Compounds under subclass 497 wherein at least two chalcogens (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) are attached indirectly to the hetero ring
    by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/503
TXT Processes under subclass 497 wherein furfural is hydrogenated to yield a
    compound wherein oxygen is attached indirectly to the hetero ring by
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a process provided for herein is:


CLS 549/504
TXT Compounds under subclass 429 wherein halogen is attached directly or
    indirectly to the hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/505
TXT Compounds under subclass 429 which contain plural double bonds between ring
    members of the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for furan, per se, and for processes
    relating to the production, purification, separation, etc., of furan.

    (2)     Note.  The structural formula of furan is:


CLS 549/506
TXT Compounds under subclass 505 wherein the hetero ring is hydrocarbyl
    substituted.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/507
TXT Compounds under subclass 429 wherein exactly one double bond is present
    between ring members of the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/508
TXT Processes under subclass 429 wherein the five-membered hetero ring is
    prepared from

    a compound that contains a -C-O- group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a process provided for herein is:


CLS 549/509
TXT Processes under subclass 429 wherein the five-membered hetero ring is
    prepared from a compound that contains a hydroxy group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a process provided for herein is:


CLS 549/510
TXT Compounds under subclass 200 in which the oxygen containing hetero ring has
    four ring members.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/511
TXT Compounds under subclass 510 wherein sulfur or halogen is attached directly
    or indirectly to the hetero ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/512
TXT Compounds under subclass 200 which contain a three-membered ring consisting
    of one ring oxygen and two ring carbons:

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for polymerized oxirane
    compounds, e.g., polyethylene oxide, polypropylene oxide, etc.

    (2)     Note.  The three-membered ring provided for herein is frequently
    referred to as an epoxide, even though the term "epoxide" includes oxygen
    containing rings having more than three members.


CLS 549/513
TXT Processes under subclass 512 for producing, purifying, or recovering an
    oxirane containing compound.


CLS 549/514
TXT Processes under subclass 513 which include obtaining a glycidyl moiety by a
    condensation reaction of an

    epihalohydrin, (X=halogen)

    or a glycerol mono- or di-halohydrin,

    (1)     Note.  The glycidyl moiety is represented by the following basic
    structure.


CLS 549/515
TXT Processes under subclass 514 which include bonding oxy of a -C(=O)O- group
    to the acyclic carbon of the glycidyl moiety to form an ester:


CLS 549/516
TXT Processes under subclass 514 which include bonding oxygen to the acyclic
    carbon of the glycidyl moiety to form an ether:


CLS 549/517
TXT Processes under subclass 516 wherein the glycidyl ether oxygen is bonded to
    a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound prepared by the process herein is:


CLS 549/518
TXT Processes under subclass 513 which include the formation of an oxirane ring.


CLS 549/519
TXT Processes under subclass 518 wherein the

    functional group -- in an aldehyde or ketone undergoes a reaction to form
    an oxirane ring.


CLS 549/520
TXT Processes under subclass 518 wherein (1) a

    halchydrin (X=halogen) is

    dehydrohalogenated to form an oxirane ring

     or (2) a hypohalite or hypohalous acid

    reacts with an ethylenically unsaturated compound at the site of ethylenic
    unsaturation.

    (1)     Note.  The hypohalite or hypohalous acid may be formed in situ,
    e.g., from X2 and H2O.


CLS 549/521
TXT Processes under subclass 520 of forming a glycidyl containing compound
    wherein bonded directly to the acyclic carbon of the glycidyl moiety is
    chalcogen (e.g., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), cyano (i.e.,
    -C=N), nitrogen, or halogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes the formation of glycidyl ethers,
    esters, amides, etc.  The compounds formed have the following basic
    structure:

            where X=chalcogen, -CN, -N, halogen.


CLS 549/522
TXT Processes under subclass 520 wherein the substituents on the oxirane ring
    of the compound formed are limited to hydrogen or hydrocarbon groups.


CLS 549/523
TXT Processes under subclass 518 for reacting an ethylenically unsaturated
    compound with an oxidizing agent so that oxygen supplied by the oxidizing
    agent forms an oxirane ring at the site of ethylenic unsaturation.


CLS 549/524
TXT Processes under subclass 523 wherein a reactant is in liquid form or
    wherein the reaction takes place in a substance which is liquid during the
    reaction.


CLS 549/525
TXT Processes under subclass 524 wherein the oxidizing agent includes an
    organic peracid.


CLS 549/526
TXT Processes under subclass 525 wherein the organic peracid is formed from a
    carboxylic acid and hydrogen peroxide in the epoxidation reaction medium
    rather than having been preformed and added to said reaction medium.


CLS 549/527
TXT Processes under subclass 526 wherein a naturally occurring unsaturated
    higher fatty acid having seven or more carbon atoms bonded to a carboxyl
    group, or an unsaturated derivative thereof, is epoxidized.

    (1)     Note.  The term "derivative", as used herein, includes those
    chemical modifications which involve the conversion of the carboxyl group
    into a carbonylic derivative thereof which on hydrolysis reverts to the
    carboxyl group, e.g., salts, amides, esters, acid halides, and acid
    anhydrides, etc.


CLS 549/528
TXT Processes under subclass 525 wherein a naturally occurring unsaturated
    fatty acid having seven or more carbon atoms bonded to a carboxyl group, or
    unsaturated derivative thereof, is epoxidized.

    (1)     Note.  The term "derivative", as used herein, includes those
    chemical modifications which involve the conversion of the carboxyl group
    into a carbonylic derivative thereof which on hydrolysis reverts to the
    carboxyl group; e.g., salts, amides, esters, acid halides, and acid
    anhydrides, etc.


CLS 549/529
TXT Processes under subclass 524 in which the oxidizing agent includes R-OOH,
    wherein R is a organic radical.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    525,    for a process of forming an oxirane ring wherein an organic peracid
    is utilized.


CLS 549/530
TXT Processes under subclass 529 wherein a boron containing catalyst is
    utilized.


CLS 549/531
TXT Processes under subclass 524 wherein the epoxidizing agent includes H2O2.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    526,    for processes wherein a peracid is also present.


CLS 549/532
TXT Processes under subclass 524 wherein the epoxidizing agent includes a gas
    containing molecular oxygen.


CLS 549/533
TXT Processes under subclass 532 wherein a catalyst which contains a metal
    having a specific gravity greater than 4 is present.


CLS 549/534
TXT Processes under subclass 523 wherein a silver containing catalyst is
    employed.


CLS 549/535
TXT Processes under subclass 534 wherein the catalyst particles are fluidized
    by passing gaseous reactants upward through them.


CLS 549/536
TXT Processes under subclass 534 wherein a material containing a metal having a
    specific gravity greater than 4, in addition to the silver, is utilized.


CLS 549/537
TXT Processes under subclass 534 wherein a material which contains a Group IIA
    light metal is utilized.


CLS 549/538
TXT Processes under subclass 534 which include separating an oxirane containing
    compound from an impurity or by-product.


CLS 549/539
TXT Processes under subclass 513 wherein an ether group or -COO- group is
    formed.


CLS 549/540
TXT Processes under subclass 513 wherein the oxirane containing compound is
    formed by isomerization, halogenation, hydrogenation, or
    dehydrohalogenation.


CLS 549/541
TXT Processes under subclass 513 which include separating an oxirane containing
    compound from an impurity or by-product.


CLS 549/542
TXT Processes under subclass 541 whereby the purification or recovery is
    effected by adsorption or by chemical reaction with an impurity.


CLS 549/543
TXT Compounds under subclass 512 wherein the oxirane ring is a cyclo in a
    polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/544
TXT Compounds under subclass 543 in which the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly four cyclos.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/545
TXT Compounds under subclass 543 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly three cyclos.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/546
TXT Compounds under subclass 543 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    exactly two cyclos.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/547
TXT Compounds under subclass 546 which contain at least two bicyclo ring
    systems, each having a hetero ring as one of the cyclos.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/548
TXT Compounds under subclass 512 in which a

    -- group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium), is bonded directly to the oxirane ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/549
TXT Compounds under subclass 548 in which the

    -- is part of a --X-group, wherein the X's are the same or different
    chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/550
TXT Compounds under subclass 512 in which cyano (i.e., -C=N), nitrogen, or
    halogen is bonded directly to the oxirane ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/551
TXT Compounds under subclass 512 in which nitrogen is attached indirectly to
    the oxirane ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/552
TXT Compounds under subclass 551 wherein cyano (i.e., -C=N) or nitrogen and the
    oxirane ring are bonded directly to the same carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/553
TXT Compounds under subclass 551 wherein the nitrogen is additionally bonded
    directly to

    a -- group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/554
TXT Compounds under subclass 512 in which chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the oxirane ring by
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/555
TXT Compounds under subclass 554 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) and the oxirane ring are both bonded directly to
    the same carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/556
TXT Compounds under subclass 555 in which

    sulfur or a -- group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium), is attached indirectly to the oxirane ring by
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/557
TXT Compounds under subclass 556 in which the

    chalcogen, X, is in a --X- group or in a -X-X- group, wherein the X's are
    the same or diverse chalcogens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/558
TXT Compound under subclass 555 in which halogen is attached indirectly to the
    oxirane ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/559
TXT Compounds under subclass 558 which contain a carbocyclic ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 549/560
TXT Compounds under subclass 555 which contain a carbocyclic ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/561
TXT Compounds under subclass 554 in which the

    chalcogen, X, is part of a --X- group, wherein the X's are the same or
    diverse chalcogens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/562
TXT Compounds under subclass 561 in which an additional -C(=X)- group or
    sulfur, other than as part of the -C(=X)X- group, is attached indirectly to
    the oxirane ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 549/563
TXT Compounds under subclass 512 wherein halogen is attached indirectly to the
    oxirane ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/
TTL ORGANIC COMPOUNDS -- PART OF THE CLASS 532-570 SERIES

CLS 552/1
TXT Compounds under Class 532, subclass 1, which contain the azide group.

    (1)     Note.  The azide group has no single definite structure; it can be
    represented by different resonance forms, such as:



    (2)     Note.  For simplicity, the azide group shall be structurally
    depicted in the following definitions as:




    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclass 220
    for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    nitrogen.


CLS 552/2
TXT Products under subclass 1 wherein the azide is mixed with a stabilizing or
    preserving agent, whose sole function is to prevent physical or chemical
    change.


CLS 552/3
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 wherein the azide group is attached directly or
    indirectly to phosphorus by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 552/4
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which contain silicon, boron, aluminum or heavy
    metal.

    (1)     Note.  Heavy metals are those whose specific gravity is greater
    than 4.00.

    (2)     Note.  Arsenic is considered as a metal.


CLS 552/5
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 wherein the azide group is bonded directly to
    nitrogen or to chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:







CLS 552/6
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 wherein the azide group is bonded directly to
    -C(=X)-, in which X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/7
TXT Compounds under subclass 6 wherein the
    -C(=X)- group is also bonded directly to chalcogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/8
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 wherein the azide group is bonded directly to a
    benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/9
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which contain the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene
    ring system.

    (1)     Note.  The cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system is depicted by
    the


            following structure, in which at least one of the rings A, B and C
    is not a benzene ring:


CLS 552/10
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 wherein the azide group is bonded directly to
    acyclic carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/11
TXT Compounds under subclass 10 wherein the azide group is attached indirectly
    to nitrogen by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/12
TXT Compounds under subclass 11 in which the azide group is attached indirectly
    to -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium), by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/100
TXT Compounds under Class 532, subclass 1 wherein three benzene rings and a
    cyano group are bonded to the same acyclic carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/101
TXT Compounds under Class 532, subclass 1, wherein either (a) three benzene
    rings or (b) two benzene rings and a cyclohexadienyl ring are bonded
    directly to the same acyclic carbon, which acyclic carbon may not be bonded
    to a fourth carbon.

    (1)     Note.  The triarylmethane dyestuffs are included within this
    subclass and its indents.

    (2)     Note.  To be classified in this subclass, a compound must contain
    carbon, hydrogen, and at least one additional element; hydrocarbon
    triarylmethanes are classified in Class 585.

    (3)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 552/102
TXT Products under subclass 101, wherein the compound is mixed with a
    stabilizing or preserving agent, whose sole function is to prevent physical
    or chemical change.


CLS 552/103
TXT Compounds under subclass 101 which contain aluminum or heavy metal.

    (1)     Note.  Heavy metals are those whose specific gravity is greater
    than 4.00.

    (2)     Note.  Arsenic is considered as a metal.


CLS 552/104
TXT Compounds under subclass 101 wherein the acyclic carbon is attached
    directly to nitrogen, sulfur, phosphorus or peroxy by nonionic bonding.


CLS 552/105
TXT Compounds under subclass 101 wherein the same oxygen is bonded both to the
    acyclic carbon and to an additional carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 552/106
TXT Compounds under subclass 101 wherein
    -N=C=O or -C(=O)OH, in which H may be replaced by Group IA or IIA light
    metal or by substituted or unsubstituted ammonium, is bonded directly to
    one of the rings or to a polycyclo ring system containing one of the rings.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 552/107
TXT Compounds under subclass 106 in which the ring, or the polycyclo ring
    system containing the ring, is further bonded directly to chalcogen (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:





CLS 552/108
TXT Compounds under subclass 101 wherein a polycyclo ring system is bonded
    directly to the acyclic carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/109
TXT Compounds under subclass 101 wherein (a) nitrogen and (b) cyano, carbonyl,
    additional nitrogen, or chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium) are bonded to the same acyclic alkylene group.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 552/110
TXT Compounds under subclass 101, wherein the same nitrogen is bonded to one of
    the rings and to a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/111
TXT Compounds under subclass 101 wherein a ring is attached to nitrogen, except
    as cyano, by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  The compound may contain a cynao group, provided that an
    additional nitrogen is present which will satisfy the requirement of this
    subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 552/112
TXT Compounds under subclass 101 wherein
    -S(=O)(=O)OH, in which H may be replaced by a Group IA or IIA light metal
    or by substituted or unsubstituted ammonium, is bonded directly to carbon.


CLS 552/113
TXT Compounds under subclass 101 wherein one of the rings is bonded directly to
    nitrogen.


CLS 552/114
TXT Compounds under subclass 113 wherein each of the rings is bonded directly
    to nitrogen.


CLS 552/115
TXT Compounds under subclass 101 wherein one of the rings is bonded directly to
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium).


CLS 552/200
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 having the tetracyclo naphthacene
    ring configuration with at least one double bond between ring members and
    having oxygen bonded directly to a carbon of an interior ring, of the ring
    system, which carbon is a member of one ring only.

    (1)     Note.  The tetracyclo naphthacene configured ring is numbered as
    follows, for this subclass and its indents:


    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/201
TXT Compounds under subclass 200 wherein the interior ring, of the tetracyclo
    naphthacene configured ring system, has two oxygens double bonded directly
    thereto in para positions.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/202
TXT Compounds under subclass 200 wherein the tetracyclo naphthacene configured
    ring system has at least six oxygens bonded directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/203
TXT Compounds under subclass 202 wherein the tetracyclo ring system has
    nitrogen and either the cyano or carboxyl group bonded directly to the same
    ring, e.g., tetracycline, etc.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/204
TXT Compounds under subclass 203 which additionally have carbon double bonded
    directly to the tetracyclo ring system, e.g., 6-methylene tetracycline, etc.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/205
TXT Compounds under subclass 203 wherein the tetracyclo ring system has plural
    nitrogens bonded directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/206
TXT Processes under subclass 203 of preparing, purifying or recovering the
    tetracyclo ring system compounds which have nitrogen and cyano or carbonyl
    bonded directly to them.


CLS 552/207
TXT Processes under subclass 206 in which an aluminum or heavy metal containing
    material is utilized.


CLS 552/208
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350, having a polycyclo ring system
    which is or contains the anthracene ring configuration with at least one
    double bond between ring members and having oxygen single bonded or any
    atom double bonded directly to the ring system at the 9- and 10- positions.

    (1)     Note.  For this and indented subclasses, the anthracene-configured
    ring is numbered as follows:


    (2)     Note.  For this and indented subclasses, the anthraquinone, other
    than those provided for in this class (552), subclasses 268 through 270.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass contains processes of purification and
    separation of anthraquinone, per se.

    (4)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/209
TXT Compounds under subclass 208 which contain phosphorus, selenium, silicon,
    heavy metal or aluminum.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:



CLS 552/210
TXT Compounds under subclass 208 wherein nitrogen or carbon is double bonded
    directly at the 9- or 10- position of the ring system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/211
TXT Compounds under subclass 208 wherein sulfur is bonded directly to the
    oxygen which is single bonded directly to the 9- or 10- position of the
    ring system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/212
TXT Compounds under subclass 208 wherein the polycyclo ring system is bonded
    directly to an additional polycyclo ring system which has at least three
    cyclos.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/213
TXT Compounds under subclass 208 wherein the polycyclo ring system and an
    additional polycyclo ring system which has at least three cyclos are bonded
    directly to the same atom.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/214
TXT Compounds under subclass 213 wherein nitrogen is the atom.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/215
TXT Compounds under subclass 214 wherein the polycyclo ring system has at least
    five cyclos.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/216
TXT Compounds under subclass 214 wherein the polycyclo ring system is
    tetracyclic, i.e., is composed of four rings.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/217
TXT Compounds under subclass 214 wherein the anthracene configured ring system
    has halogen, sulfur, oxygen, nitrogen or additional carbon bonded directly
    to a beta position.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/218
TXT Compounds under subclass 208 wherein a polycyclo ring system having at
    least three cyclos is attached indirectly to the anthracene configured ring
    system by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/219
TXT Compounds under subclass 218 wherein the anthracene configured ring system
    has halogen, sulfur, oxygen, nitrogen or additional carbon bonded directly
    at the beta position (i.e., 2-, 3-, 6- or 7- position).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/220
TXT Compounds under subclass 208 wherein the anthracene configured ring system
    is a part of a polycyclo ring system which has at least four cyclos.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/221
TXT Compounds under subclass 208 wherein a beta position (i.e., 2-, 3-, 6-, or
    7- position) of the anthracene ring system has at least one sulfur bonded
    directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/222
TXT Compounds under subclass 221 wherein the sulfur has nitrogen or additional
    sulfur bonded directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/223
TXT Compounds under subclass 221 wherein the sulfur has additional carbon
    bonded directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/224
TXT Compounds under subclass 221 wherein a beta position (i.e., 2-, 3-, 6- or
    7- position) of the anthracene configured ring system has halogen, oxygen,
    nitrogen or carbonyl bonded directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/225
TXT Compounds under subclass 221 wherein an alpha position (i.e., 1-, 4-, 5-,
    or 8- position) of the anthracene configured ring system has nitrogen
    bonded thereto.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/226
TXT Compounds under subclass 225 wherein an alpha position (i.e., 1-, 4-, 5-,
    or 8- position) of the anthracene configured ring system has halogen,
    sulfur or oxygen bonded directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/227
TXT Compounds under subclass 226 wherein at least two alpha positions (i.e.,
    1-, 4-, 5-, or 8- position) of the anthracene configured ring system have
    the same atom bonded directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/228
TXT Compounds under subclass 225 which contain at least one additional ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/229
TXT Compounds under subclass 228 which contain cyano or contain nitrogen bonded
    directly to sulfur.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/230
TXT Compounds under subclass 228 which contain acyclic carbonyl or thiocarbonyl.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/231
TXT Compounds under subclass 230 wherein the additional ring has halogen,
    sulfur or oxygen bonded directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/232
TXT Compounds under subclass 228 wherein the additional ring has halogen,
    nitro, sulfur or oxygen bonded directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/233
TXT Compounds under subclass 232 which contain plural additional rings.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/234
TXT Compounds under subclass 208 wherein an alpha position (i.e., 1-, 4-, 5-,
    or 8- position) of the anthracene configured ring system has sulfur bonded
    directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/235
TXT Compounds under subclass 234 wherein the anthracene configured ring system
    has halogen or nitrogen bonded directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/236
TXT Compounds under subclass 208 wherein a beta position (i.e., 2-, 3-, 6-, or
    7- position) of the anthracene configured ring system has nitrogen bonded
    directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/237
TXT Compounds under subclass 236 wherein the nitrogen has an additional carbon,
    an additional nitrogen or oxygen bonded directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/238
TXT Compounds under subclass 208 wherein an alpha position (i.e., 1-, 4-, 5-,
    or 8- position) of the anthracene configured ring system has nitrogen
    bonded directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/239
TXT Compounds under subclass 238 wherein the anthracene configured ring system
    has cyano bonded directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/240
TXT Compounds under subclass 238 wherein a beta position (i.e., 2-, 3-, 6-, or
    7- position) of the anthracene ring system has oxygen bonded directly
    thereto.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/241
TXT Compounds under subclass 240 wherein the oxygen has an additional carbon
    bonded directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/242
TXT Compounds under subclass 241 wherein the additional carbon is part of a
    ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/243
TXT Compounds under subclass 238 wherein oxygen is bonded directly to a
    remaining alpha position (i.e., 1-, 4-, 5- or 8- position) of the
    anthracene configured ring system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/244
TXT Compounds under subclass 243 wherein the anthracene configured ring system
    has halogen bonded directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/245
TXT Compounds under subclass 243 wherein the anthracene configured ring system
    has carbon bonded directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/246
TXT Compounds under subclass 243 wherein the nitrogen has oxygen bonded
    directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/247
TXT Compounds under subclass 243 wherein the nitrogen has additional carbon
    bonded directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:



CLS 552/248
TXT Compounds under subclass 247 which contain halogen, sulfonamide,
    carboxamide or cyano.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:




CLS 552/249
TXT Compounds under subclass 238 wherein the anthracene configured ring system
    has halogen bonded directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/250
TXT Compounds under subclass 249 wherein the nitrogen has sulfur, oxygen or
    carbonyl bonded directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/251
TXT Compounds under subclass 238 wherein the anthracene configured ring system
    has carbon bonded directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/252
TXT Compounds under subclass 251 wherein the carbon has halogen or nitrogen
    bonded directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/253
TXT Compounds under subclass 238 wherein the nitrogen has sulfur or oxygen
    bonded directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/254
TXT Compounds under subclass 253 wherein an additional nitrogen is bonded
    directly to a remaining alpha position (i.e., 1-, 4-, 5-, or 8- position)
    of the anthracene configured ring system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/255
TXT Compounds under subclass 238 wherein the nitrogen has an additional carbon
    bonded directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/256
TXT Compounds under subclass 255 wherein the additional carbon is part of a
    carbonyl group (i.e., -N - C-).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/257
TXT Compounds under subclass 256 wherein halogen, sulfur, oxygen or nitrogen is
    bonded directly to an additional ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/258
TXT Compounds under subclass 255 wherein the additional carbon is part of a
    ring or a fused ring system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/259
TXT Compounds under subclass 258 wherein the ring or fused ring system has
    halogen, sulfur or oxygen bonded directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/260
TXT Compounds under subclass 255 which contain halogen, sulfur or acyclic
    carbonyl.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/261
TXT Compounds under subclass 208 wherein at least one beta position (i.e., 2-,
    3-, 6-, or 7- position) of the anthracene configured ring system has oxygen
    bonded directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/262
TXT Compounds under subclass 208 wherein at least one alpha position (i.e., 1-,
    4-, 5-, or 8- position) of the anthracene configured ring system has oxygen
    bonded directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/263
TXT Compounds under subclass 208 wherein at least one beta position (i.e., 2-,
    3-, 6-, or 7- position) of the anthracene configured ring system has
    halogen bonded directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/264
TXT Compounds under subclass 208 wherein at least one alpha position (i.e., 1-,
    4-, 5-, or 8- position) of the anthracene configured ring system has
    halogen bonded directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/265
TXT Compounds under subclass 208 wherein at least one beta position (i.e., 2-,
    3-, 6-, or 7- position) of the anthracene configured ring system has carbon
    bonded directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/266
TXT Compounds under subclass 265 which contain halogen, nitrogen or additional
    oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/267
TXT Compounds under subclass 208 wherein at least one alpha position (i.e., 1-,
    4-, 5-, or 8- position) of the anthracene configured ring system has carbon
    bonded directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/268
TXT Processes under subclass 208 of forming anthraquinone, per se, or an enolic
    form thereof by utilizing an organic acid, an aldehyde, an anhydride or an
    indane as one of the reactants.


CLS 552/269
TXT Processes under subclass 208 wherein a heavy metal containing material is
    utilized to form anthraquinone, per se, or an enolic form thereof.


CLS 552/270
TXT Processes under subclass 269 wherein either a nitrogen containing material
    or a light metal containing material is utilized.


CLS 552/271
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350, having a polycyclo ring system
    which is or contains the anthracene configured ring system has at least one
    double bond between ring members and has oxygen single bonded or any atom
    double bonded directly at the 9- or 10- position of the ring system.

    (1)     Note.  For this and indented subclasses, the anthracene configured
    ring system is numbered as follows:

    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/272
TXT Compounds under subclass 271 which contain heavy metal, tellurium,
    selenium, or phosphorus.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/273
TXT Compounds under subclass 271 wherein the polycyclo ring system is bonded
    directly to an additional polycyclo ring system having at least three
    cyclos.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/274
TXT Compounds under subclass 271 wherein the polycyclo ring system is attached
    by nonionic bonding indirectly to an additional polycyclo ring system which
    has at least three cyclos.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:




CLS 552/275
TXT Compounds under subclass 271 wherein the anthracene configured ring system
    is part of a polycyclo ring system which has at least ten cyclos.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/276
TXT Compounds under subclass 271 wherein the anthracene configured ring system
    is part of a nonacyclo ring system, i.e., a ring system composed of exactly
    nine cycles.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/277
TXT Compounds under subclass 276 wherein the nonacyclo ring system has sulfur,
    nitrogen or cyano bonded directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/278
TXT Compounds under subclass 277 which contain halogen or processes under
    subclass 277 wherein a halogen containing material is utilized.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/279
TXT Compounds under subclass 276 wherein the nonacyclo ring system has oxygen
    single bonded directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/280
TXT Compounds under subclass 279 which contain halogen or light metal or
    processes under subclass 279 wherein a halogen or light metal material is
    utilized.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/281
TXT Compounds under subclass 276 which contain halogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/282
TXT Compounds under subclass 271 wherein the anthracene configured ring system
    is part of a ring system composed of seven or eight cycles.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/283
TXT Compounds under subclass 282 which contain halogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/284
TXT Compounds under subclass 271 wherein the anthracene configured ring system
    is part of a ring system composed of five or six cycles.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:




CLS 552/285
TXT Compounds under subclass 284 which contain halogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/286
TXT Compounds under subclass 271 wherein the anthracene configured ring system
    is part of a ring system composed of four cyclos.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/287
TXT Compounds under subclass 286 wherein the tetracyclo ring system has sulfur,
    nitrogen, carbonyl or cyano bonded directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/288
TXT Compounds under subclass 286 wherein the tetracyclo ring system has carbon
    or halogen bonded directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:



CLS 552/289
TXT Compounds under subclass 271 wherein the anthracene configured ring system
    has sulfur or nitrogen bonded directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:






CLS 552/290
TXT Compounds under subclass 271 wherein the anthracene configured ring system
    has halogen, carbon or plural oxygens bonded directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/291
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350, wherein atoms are double bonded
    directly to the 1- and 2- positions of a cyclohexadiene ring.

    (1)     Note.  For this and indented subclasses, the cyclohexadiene ring is
    numbered as follows:

    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/292
TXT Compounds under subclass 291 wherein the cyclohexadiene is one of the
    cyclos in a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:



CLS 552/293
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350, wherein atoms are double bonded
    directly at the 1- and 4- positions of a cyclohexadiene ring.

    (1)     Note.  For this and indented subclasses, the cyclohexadiene ring is
    numbered as follows:

    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/294
TXT Compounds under subclass 293 which contain aluminum, heavy metal or
    phosphorus.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/295
TXT Compounds under subclass 293 wherein the cyclohexadiene is part of a
    polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/296
TXT Compounds under subclass 295 wherein oxygen is double bonded directly at
    the 1- and 4- positions.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/297
TXT Compounds under subclass 296 wherein the polycyclo ring system has halogen
    or nitrogen bonded directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/298
TXT Compounds under subclass 296 wherein the polycyclo ring system has
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium) single bonded
    directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/299
TXT Compounds under subclass 296 wherein the polycyclo ring system has carbon
    bonded directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/300
TXT Compounds under subclass 295 wherein the polycyclo ring system has at least
    two oxygens and at least two nitrogens bonded directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/301
TXT Compounds under subclass 293 wherein the 1- and 4- positions of the
    cyclohexadiene have nitrogen double bonded directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/302
TXT Compounds under subclass 293 wherein the 1- or 4- position of the
    cyclohexadiene has nitrogen double bonded directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/303
TXT Compounds under subclass 293 wherein the 1- and 4- positions of the
    cyclohexadiene have carbon double bonded directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/304
TXT Compounds under subclass 293 wherein the 1- or 4- position of the
    cyclohexadiene has carbon double bonded directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/305
TXT Compounds under subclass 293 wherein sulfur is bonded directly to any of
    the remaining positions of the cyclohexadiene ring (i.e., 2-, 3-, 5-, or 6-
    position).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/306
TXT Compounds under subclass 293 wherein nitrogen is bonded directly to any of
    the remaining positions of the cyclohexadiene ring (i.e., 2-, 3-, 5-, or 6-
    position).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/307
TXT Compounds under subclass 293 wherein oxygen is bonded directly to any of
    the remaining positions of the cyclohexadiene ring (i.e., 2-, 3-, 5-, or 6-
    position).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/308
TXT Compounds under subclass 293 wherein halogen is bonded directly to any of
    the remaining positions of the cyclohexadiene ring (i.e., 2-, 3-, 5-, or 6-
    position).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/309
TXT Compounds under subclass 293 wherein carbon is bonded directly to any of
    the remaining positions of the cyclohexadiene ring (i.e., 2-, 3-, 5-, or 6-
    position).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/310
TXT Compounds under subclass 309 wherein at least three carbons are bonded
    directly to the cyclohexadiene ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 552/500
TXT Compounds under class 260, subclass 350, containing a
    cyclopentano-hydrophenanthrene ring system configuration wherein two
    nonadjacent carbons of the ring system are bonded directly to each other
    and which may contain double bonds between ring members.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/501
TXT Compounds under subclass 500 wherein oxygen is bonded directly at the
    6-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/502
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350, which have the following basic
    structure:

    Which may contain double bonds between its ring members.

    (1)     Note.  The phenanthrene portion of this tetracyclic ring system
    cannot be completely aromatic; it must be hydrogenated to some degree.

    (2)     Note.  In the indents hereunder which refer to positions, the
    numbers shown in this definition are employed.

    (3)     Note.  Included herein are compounds which contain an additional
    ring fused to one or more of the rings of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene
    ring system.  See subclasses 510-514.

    (4)     Note.  The following structure shows the numbering system for
    substituents at the 17-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring
    system:

    (5)     Note.  A substituent at the 17-position of the
    cyclopentano-hydrophenanthrene ring system is designated as alpha or beta
    depending upon the stereochemical configuration thereof.  A 17
    beta-substituent is normally written or drawn directly above the 17-carbon
    atom and attached thereto by a solid line; a 17-alpha substituent is
    normally written or drawn to the right of the 17-carbon atom and attached
    thereto by dotted lines.  The drawings below illustrate a cyano substituent
    as both a 17-beta and 17-alpha substituent.

    17B-cyano-3, 16a-diacetoxyestr -1,3,5(10)-trien-17a-ol

    17a-cyano-3, 16a-diacetoxyestra-1,3,5,(10)-trien-17B-ol

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    653,    for Vitamin D compounds, calciferols, cholecalciferols,
    ergocalciferols, activated ergosterols, activated 7-dehydrocholesterols,
    irradiated ergosterol, irradiated 7-dehydrocholesterol, antirachitic
    vitamins, dihydrotachysterols, and 3,5-cyclovitamin D compounds.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    514,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 169+
    for a medicinal composition including a cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene
    compound.

    536,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 5+ for steroid glucosides, e.g.,
    digitalis glucosides.

    540,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 2+ for cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene
    compounds containing a heterocyclic nucleus.


CLS 552/503
TXT Products under subclass 502 which contain a compound having a
    cyclopenthanohydrophenanthrene ring system in admixture with a preserving
    or stabilizing agent whose sole function is to prevent physical or chemical
    change.


CLS 552/504
TXT Compounds under subclass 502 which include aluminum or a metal having a
    specific gravity greater than four.

    (1)     Note.  Arsenic is considered a heavy metal.




    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/505
TXT Compounds under subclass 502 which contain boron, silicon, selenium or
    tellurium.


CLS 552/506
TXT Compounds under subclass 502 wherein phosphorus is attached directly or
    indirectly to the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system by nonionic
    bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/507
TXT Compounds under subclass 506 wherein the phosphorus is bonded directly to
    the carbon at the 21-position of the acyclic carbon chain that is bonded
    directly at the 17-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring
    system or is bonded directly to a chalcogen which is bonded directly at the
    21-position of the acyclic carbon chain that is bonded directly at the
    17-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/508
TXT Compounds under subclass 502 which contain a spiro ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/509
TXT Compounds under subclass 502 which contain at least two
    cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring systems.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/510
TXT Compounds under subclass 502 in which the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene
    ring system and at least one additional ring are parts of a polycyclo ring
    system having at least five cyclos.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:




    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500+,   for cyclogonanes, e.g., 3,5-cyclocholesterols,
    3,5-cycloandrostanes, 5,9-cyclopregnanes, etc.


CLS 552/511
TXT Compounds under subclass 510 in which additional ring is ortho-fused to the
    A ring of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system at the
    1,2-positions.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 552/512
TXT Compounds under subclass 510 in which the additional ring shares the 5,10-
    or 5,19-positions of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/513
TXT Compounds under subclass 510 in which the additional ring is otho-fused to
    the B ring of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system at the
    6,7-positions.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/514
TXT Compounds under subclass 510 in which the additional ring is ortho-fused to
    the D ring of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system at the
    16,17-positions.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/515
TXT Compounds under subclass 502 in which nitrogen is bonded directly to the
    cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 552/516
TXT Compounds under subclass 515 in which the nitrogen is double bonded to the
    cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 552/517
TXT Compounds under subclass 516 wherein the nitrogen is part of a
    semicarbazone or thiosemicarbazone group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/518
TXT Compounds under subclass 516 wherein an additional nitrogen is bonded
    directly to the nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/519
TXT Compounds under subclass 516 wherein oxygen is bonded directly to the
    nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/520
TXT Compounds under subclass 519 wherein the nitrogen is bonded directly at the
    3-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.


CLS 552/521
TXT Compounds under subclass 515 wherein the nitrogen is bonded directly at the
    3-position of the cyclopenthanohydrophenanthrene ring system.


CLS 552/522
TXT Compounds under subclass 515 wherein the nitrogen is bonded directly at the
    17-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.


CLS 552/523
TXT Compounds under subclass 502 in which sulfur is bonded directly to the
    cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.


CLS 552/524
TXT Compounds under subclass 523 wherein the sulfur is bonded directly at the
    1- or 3-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:




CLS 552/525
TXT Compounds under subclass 523 wherein the sulfur is bonded directly at the
    16- or 17-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.


CLS 552/526
TXT Compounds under subclass 502 in which carbon is double bonded directly to
    the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provide for herein is:


CLS 552/527
TXT Compounds under subclass 526 wherein the carbon is double bonded directly
    at the 2-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/528
TXT Compounds under subclass 526 wherein the carbon is double bonded directly
    at the 16-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.


CLS 552/529
TXT Compounds under subclass 528 wherein carbon bonded directly at the 17
    beta-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system is a member
    of an acyclic chain of two or more uninterrupted carbons.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/530
TXT Compounds under subclass 526 wherein the carbon is double bonded directly
    at the 17-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 552/531
TXT Compounds under subclass 530 which contain nitrogen or sulfur.


CLS 552/532
TXT Compounds under subclass 530 wherein the carbon bonded directly at the
    17-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system is a member of
    an acyclic chain of exactly two carbons.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/533
TXT Compounds under subclass 532 wherein plural oxygens are bonded directly to
    the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.


CLS 552/534
TXT Compounds under subclass 533 wherein oxygen is bonded directly to the
    carbon at the 21-position of the acyclic carbon chain that is bonded
    directly at the 17-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring
    system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein:


CLS 552/535
TXT Compounds under subclass 502 wherein halogen is bonded directly at the
    12-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.


CLS 552/536
TXT Compounds under subclass 502 wherein halogen is bonded directly at the
    16-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.


CLS 552/537
TXT Compounds under subclass 536 wherein plural halogens are bonded directly at
    the 16-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.


CLS 552/538
TXT Compounds under subclass 536 wherein carbon bonded directly at the 17
    beta-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system is a member
    of an acyclic chain of two or more uninterrupted carbons.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for here in is:



CLS 552/539
TXT Compounds under subclass 502 wherein halomethyl is bonded directly to the
    cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 552/540
TXT Compounds under subclass 502 wherein carbon bonded directly at the 17
    beta-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system is a member
    of an acyclic chain of six or more uninterrupted carbons.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS

    653,    for Vitamin D compounds, calciferols, cholecalciferols,
    ergocalciferols, activated ergosterols, activated 7-dehydrocholesterols,
    irradiated ergosterol, irradiated 7-dehydrocholesterol, antirachitic
    vitamins, dihydrotachysterols and 3,5-cyclovitamin D compounds.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    514,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 169+
    for a medicinal composition including a sterol compound.


CLS 552/541
TXT Compounds under subclass 540 wherein oxygen is bonded directly at the 1-,
    2-, or 4-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/542
TXT Compounds under subclass 540 wherein oxygen is bonded directly at the 6- or
    7-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 552/543
TXT Compounds under subclass 540 wherein carbon or halogen is bonded directly
    at the 6- or 7-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 552/544
TXT Compounds under subclass 540 in which exactly one oxygen is bonded directly
    to the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Lanolin is provided for in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein  is:


CLS 552/545
TXT Processes under subclass 544 which include isolating, purifying or
    recovering the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene containing compound from
    animal, vegetable or fungal sources.


CLS 552/546
TXT Compounds under subclass 544 in which halogen or oxygen is bonded directly
    to the acyclic carbon chain at the 17 beta-position of the
    cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 552/547
TXT Compounds under subclass 544 which contain a double bond between the 7- and
    8-positions of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    653,    for Vitamin D compounds, calciferols, cholecalciferols,
    ergocalciferols, activated ergosterols, activated 7-dehydrocholesterols,
    irradiated ergosterol, irradiated 7-dehydrocholesterol, antirachitic
    vitamins, dihydrotachysterols and 3,5-cyclovitamin D compounds.


CLS 552/548
TXT Compounds under subclass 502 wherein carbon bonded directly at the 17
    beta-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system is a member
    of an acyclic chain of five uninterrupted carbons.

    (1)     Note.  Bile acids are provided for in this subclass and the
    subclasses indented hereunder, i.e., 549-552.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 552/549
TXT Compounds under subclass 548 wherein oxygen is bonded directly at the
    12-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 552/550
TXT Compounds under subclass 549 which contain halogen, nitrogen or sulfur.


CLS 552/551
TXT Compounds under subclass 548 wherein oxygen is bonded directly at the 6- or
    7-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/552
TXT Compounds under subclass 548 in which exactly one oxygen is bonded directly
    to the cyclopentanopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/553
TXT Compounds under subclass 502 wherein carbon bonded directly at the 17
    beta-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system is a member
    of an acyclic chain of three or four uninterrupted carbons.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 552/554
TXT Compounds under subclass 553 which contain halogen or nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/555
TXT Compounds under subclass 553 in which exactly one oxygen is bonded directly
    to the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/556
TXT Compounds under subclass 555 wherein oxygen is bonded directly to the
    carbon at the 20-position of the acyclic carbon chain that is bonded
    directly at the 17-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring
    system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/557
TXT Compounds under subclass 502 wherein carbon bonded directly at the 17
    beta-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system is a member
    of an acyclic chain of two uninterrupted carbons.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/558
TXT Compounds under subclass 557 in which the A ring of the
    cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system contains three alternating double
    bonds (i.e., is a benzene ring).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/559
TXT Compounds under subclass 557 wherein three or more oxygens are bonded
    directly to the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/560
TXT Compounds under subclass 559 wherein oxygen is bonded directly at the 1-,
    2-, or 4-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.


CLS 552/561
TXT Compounds under subclass 559 wherein oxygen is bonded directly at the
    6-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.


CLS 552/562
TXT Compounds under subclass 559 wherein oxygen is bonded directly at the 7-,
    8-, or 9-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.


CLS 552/563
TXT Compounds under subclass 559 wherein oxygen is bonded directly at the 14-
    or 15-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.


CLS 552/564
TXT Compounds under subclass 559 wherein oxygen is bonded directly at the
    16-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/565
TXT Compounds under subclass 564 wherein carbon or halogen is bonded directly
    at the 6- or 7-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.


CLS 552/566
TXT Compounds under subclass 564 in which oxygen is bonded directly to the
    carbon at the 21-position of the acyclic carbon chain that is bonded
    directly at the 17-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring
    system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/567
TXT Compounds under subclass 559 wherein halogen is bonded directly at the 2-
    or 4- position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.


CLS 552/568
TXT Compounds under subclass 567 wherein there are no double bonds between any
    ring members of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/569
TXT Compounds under subclass 559 wherein oxygen is bonded directly at the 3-,
    11-, and 17-positions of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/570
TXT Compounds under subclass 569 in which oxygen is bonded directly to the
    carbon at the 21-position of the acyclic carbon chain that is bonded
    directly at the 17-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring
    system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/571
TXT Compounds under subclass 570 wherein carbon is bonded directly at the 1-,
    2-, or 4-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.


CLS 552/572
TXT Compounds under subclass 570 wherein carbon or halogen is bonded directly
    at the 6- or 7-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/573
TXT Compounds under subclass 572 wherein carbon is bonded directly at the
    16-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/574
TXT Compounds under subclass 570 wherein carbon is bonded directly at the
    16-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/575
TXT Compounds under subclass 570 which contain nitrogen or sulfur.


CLS 552/576
TXT Compounds under subclass 570 which contain double bonds between the
    1,2-positions and the 4,5-positions of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene
    ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/577
TXT Compounds under subclass 570 which contain a double bond between the 4- and
    5-positions of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/578
TXT Compounds under subclass 577 which contain an additional double bond
    between ring members of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/579
TXT Compounds under subclass 570 wherein there are no double bonds between any
    ring members of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/580
TXT Compounds under subclass 569 wherein carbon or halogen is bonded directly
    at the 6- or 7-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.


CLS 552/581
TXT Compounds under subclass 569 which contain a double bond between the 4-and
    5-positions of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 552/582
TXT Compounds under subclass 557 wherein two oxygens are bonded directly to the
    cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/583
TXT Compounds under subclass 582 wherein oxygen is bonded directly at the 5-,
    6-, or 7-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.


CLS 552/584
TXT Compounds under subclass 582 wherein oxygen is bonded directly at the
    12-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.


CLS 552/585
TXT Compounds under subclass 582 wherein oxygen is bonded directly at the 15-
    or 16-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.


CLS 552/586
TXT Compounds under subclass 582 wherein oxygen is bonded directly at the 3-
    and 11-positions of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.


CLS 552/587
TXT Compounds under subclass 586 wherein oxygen is bonded directly to the
    carbon at the 21-position of the acyclic carbon chain that is bonded
    directly at the 17-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring
    system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/588
TXT Compounds under subclass 587 which contain a double between 4- and 5-
    positions of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/589
TXT Compounds under subclass 586 wherein carbon is bonded directly at the
    16-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.


CLS 552/590
TXT Compounds under subclass 586 which contain a double bond between the 4- and
    5-positions of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.


CLS 552/591
TXT Compounds under subclass 586 wherein there are no double bonds between any
    ring members of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.


CLS 552/592
TXT Compounds under subclass 582 wherein oxygen is bonded directly at the 3-
    and 17-positions of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.


CLS 552/593
TXT Compounds under subclass 592 wherein oxygen is bonded directly to the
    carbon at the 21-position of the acyclic carbon chain that is bonded
    directly at the 17-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring
    system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/594
TXT Compounds under subclass 593 wherein carbon or halogen is bonded directly
    at the 6- or 7-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.


CLS 552/595
TXT Compounds under subclass 593 which contain a double bond between the 4- and
    5-positions of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/596
TXT Compounds under subclass 592 wherein carbon is bonded directly at the
    16-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.


CLS 552/597
TXT Compounds under subclass 592 wherein carbon or halogen is bonded directly
    at the 6- or 7-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.


CLS 552/598
TXT Compounds under subclass 592 which contain a double bond between the 4- and
    5- positions of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.


CLS 552/599
TXT Compounds under subclass 557 wherein exactly one oxygen is bonded directly
    to the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/600
TXT Compounds under subclass 599 wherein oxygen is bonded directly to the
    carbon at the 21-position of the acyclic carbon chain that is bonded
    directly at the 17-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring
    system.


CLS 552/601
TXT Compounds under subclass 600 which contain a double bond between the 4- and
    5-positions of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/602
TXT Compounds under subclass 601 which contain an additional double bond
    between ring members of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.


CLS 552/603
TXT Compounds under subclass 599 wherein carbon or halogen is bonded directly
    at the 1-,2-,3-,4-, or 5-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring
    system.


CLS 552/604
TXT Compounds under subclass 599 wherein carbon is bonded directly at the
    16-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/605
TXT Compounds under subclass 599 wherein carbon or halogen is bonded directly
    at the 6- or 7-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.


CLS 552/606
TXT Compounds under subclass 599 which contain a double bond between the 5- and
    6-positions of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/607
TXT Compounds under subclass 599 which contain a double bond between the 4- and
    5-positions of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/608
TXT Compounds under subclass 607 which contain an additional double bond
    between ring members of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.


CLS 552/609
TXT Compounds under subclass 599 wherein there are no double bonds between any
    ring members of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/610
TXT Compounds under subclass 502 wherein an acyclic carbon is bonded directly
    at the 17 beta-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 552/611
TXT Compounds under subclass 610 wherein exactly one oxygen is bonded directly
    to the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/612
TXT Compounds under subclass 502 wherein three or more oxygens are bonded
    directly to the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 552/613
TXT Compounds under subclass 612 wherein oxygen is bonded directly at the
    1-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.


CLS 552/614
TXT Compounds under subclass 612 wherein oxygen is bonded directly at the 2- or
    4-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.


CLS 552/615
TXT Compounds under subclass 612 wherein oxygen is bonded directly at the 5-,6-
    or 7-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.


CLS 552/616
TXT Compounds under subclass 612 wherein oxygen is bonded directly at the
    16-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.


CLS 552/617
TXT Compounds under subclass 616 in which the A ring of the
    cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system contains three alternating double
    bonds (i.e., is a benzene ring).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/618
TXT Compounds under subclass 612 in which the A ring of the
    cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system contains three alternating double
    bonds (i.e., is a benzene ring).


CLS 552/619
TXT Compounds under subclass 612 wherein oxygen is bonded directly at the 3-,
    11- and 17-positions of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.


    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/620
TXT Compounds under subclass 619 wherein carbon or halogen is bonded directly
    at the 1-,2-, or 4-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring
    system.


CLS 552/621
TXT Compounds under subclass 619 which contain a double bond between the 4- and
    5-positions of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 552/622
TXT Compounds under subclass 621 in which a substituent is bonded directly at
    the 17 alpha-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 552/623
TXT Compounds under subclass 502 wherein two oxygens are bonded directly to the
    cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/624
TXT Compounds under subclass 623 wherein oxygen is bonded directly at the
    16-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.


CLS 552/625
TXT Compounds under subclass 623 in which the A ring of the
    cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system contains three alternating double
    bonds (i.e., is a benzene ring).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/626
TXT Compounds under subclass 625 which contain nitrogen or sulfur.


CLS 552/627
TXT Compounds under subclass 625 wherein carbon or halogen is bonded directly
    at the 1-, 2-, or 4-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring
    system.


CLS 552/628
TXT Compounds under subclass 625 wherein carbon or halogen is bonded directly
    at the 6- or 7-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.


CLS 552/629
TXT Compounds under subclass 625 wherein carbon is bonded directly at the 11-,
    15-, or 16-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.


CLS 552/630
TXT Compounds under subclass 625 in which a substituent is bonded directly at
    the 17 alpha-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/631
TXT Compounds under subclass 630 in which the substituent bonded directly at
    the 17 alpha-position contains acyclic carbon-to-carbon unsaturation.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 552/632
TXT Compounds under subclass 623 in which a substituent is bonded directly at
    the 19-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:

    (2)     Note.  The 19-position is present in the
    cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system when a carbon is bonded directly
    at the 10-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system, said
    carbon being designated the 19-position.


CLS 552/633
TXT Compounds under subclass 623 wherein carbon is bonded directly at the 10-
    and 13-positions of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 552/634
TXT Compounds under subclass 633 wherein carbon or halogen is bonded directly
    at the 1- or 3-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.


CLS 552/635
TXT Compounds under subclass 633 wherein carbon or halogen is bonded directly
    at the 2- or 4-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.


CLS 552/636
TXT Compounds under subclass 633 which contain a double bond between the 5- and
    6-positions of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 552/637
TXT Compounds under subclass 636 in which a substituent is bonded directly at
    the 17 alpha-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/638
TXT Compounds under subclass 633 which contain a double bond between the 4- and
    5-positions of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/639
TXT Compounds under subclass 638 in which a substituent is bonded directly at
    the 17 alpha-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:




CLS 552/640
TXT Compounds under subclass 638 which contain an additional double bond
    between ring members of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.


CLS 552/641
TXT Compounds under subclass 633 wherein there are no double bonds between any
    ring members of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/642
TXT Compounds under subclass 623 wherein carbon is bonded directly at the
    13-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 552/643
TXT Compounds under subclass 642 wherein carbon or halogen is bonded directly
    at the 1-, 2-, 4-, or 5-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring
    system.


CLS 552/644
TXT Compounds under subclass 642 which contain a double bond between the 5- and
    10-positions of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.


CLS 552/645
TXT Compounds under subclass 644 in which a substituent is bonded directly at
    the 17 alpha-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/646
TXT Compounds under subclass 642 which contain a double bond between the 4- and
    5-positions of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 552/647
TXT Compounds under subclass 646 wherein carbon or halogen is bonded directly
    at the 6- or 7-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.


CLS 552/648
TXT Compounds under subclass 646 in which a substituent is bonded directly at
    the 17 alpha-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/649
TXT Compounds under subclass 642 wherein there are no double bonds between any
    ring members of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/650
TXT Compounds under subclass 502 wherein oxygen is bonded directly at the 16-
    or 17-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 552/651
TXT Compounds under subclass 650 wherein carbon or halogen is bonded directly
    at the 1- or 3-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring system.


CLS 552/652
TXT Compounds under subclass 650 wherein carbon or halogen is bonded directly
    at the 2-, 4-, or 5-position of the cyclopentanohydrophenanthrene ring
    system.


CLS 552/653
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350, which have the following basic
    structures:

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 554/
TTL ORGANIC COMPOUNDS -- PART OF THE CLASS 532-570 SERIES

CLS 554/1
TXT Compounds under Class 532, subclass 1, which are long-chain aliphatic
    monocarboxylic acid derivatives, herein referred to as "fatty compounds",
    characterized by having the carbonyl of (1) a carboxylic acid, (2) a
    carboxylic acid salt, (3) a carboxylic acid ester, or (4) a carboxylic acid
    amide bonded directly to one end of an acyclic chain of at least seven
    uninterrupted carbons, i.e., the acid moiety; wherein any additional
    carbonyl group in the acid moiety is (1) part of an aldehyde or ketone
    group, (2) bonded directly to a noncarbon atom which is between the
    additional carbonyl and the chain, or (3) attached indirectly to the chain
    by ionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  The term "fatty compounds" referred to throughout the
    definitions is inclusive of fats, fatty oils, ester-type waxes, higher
    fatty acids, salts, esters, amides, and fatty still residues, the latter
    being the bottoms, tars, or pitches resulting from distillation of fats,
    oils, and waxes, e.g., stearine pitch.  Fats and fatty oils are glycerides
    of higher fatty acids, including naturally occurring mixtures  thereof
    present in a single oil or fat.  Ester-type waxes are essentially esters in
    chemical structure, e.g., beeswax, montan wax, carnauba wax, and spermaceti.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein are processes directed to the preparation,
    treatment, modification, purification, or recovery of fatty compounds by
    chemical or physical means which do not involve the destruction of the acid
    moiety as  defined above, when such processes are not provided for
    elsewhere.

    (3)     Note.  The treatment of a mixture of fats, oils, or waxes from
    different sources or a single oil, fat, or wax with a mixture of reactants,
    to produce a particular composition of matter having an art use for which
    there is a class provided, is classified in the class providing for said
    art use and cross-referenced hereinto when desirable.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 157.6+ for
    methods of preparing and treating fatty compounds by electrical or wave
    energy.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclass 1 for mineral oil
    products which have the properties of natural drying oils in that they dry
    or harden in contact with air and processes of preparing the same.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclass 417 for patents claiming or solely disclosing processes involving
    (1) the preparation or treatment of edible triglyceridic fats or oils; or
    (2) rendering processes to separate an edible triglyceridic fat or oil from
    a starting material; and subclass 530 for processes of treating butter or a
    butter substitute.

    556,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 437- 442 for compounds wherein the
    carbonyls of a silicon containing polycarboxylic acid, salt, or ester are
    bonded directly to an acyclic carbon chain of at least seven uninterrupted
    carbons.

    558,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 230+ for compounds wherein the
    thiocarbonyl of a thiocarbonic or thiocarboxylicester is bonded directly to
    one end of an acyclic carbon chain of at least seven uninterrupted carbons.

    560,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 44, 54, 66, 76-99, 127, 146, 151,
    171, 176, 180-182, and 190-204 for compounds wherein the carbonyls of a
    polycarboxylic acid ester are bonded directly to an acyclic carbon chain of
    at least seven uninterrupted carbons.

    562,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 26+ for compounds wherein the
    thiocarbonyl of a thiocarbonic or thiocarboxylic acid is bonded directly to
    one end of an acyclic carbon chain of at  least seven carbons; subclasses
    480-489, 509, 568, 571-573, 578, 582-585, and 590-596 for compounds wherein
    the carbonyls of a   polycarboxylic acid or salt are bonded directly to an
    acyclic carbon chain of at least seven uninterrupted carbons;  subclass 838
    for compounds wherein the thiocarbonyl of a thioacid halide is bonded
    directly to one end of an acyclic carbon chain of at least seven
    uninterrupted carbons; subclasses 840+ for compounds wherein the carbonyl
    of a carboxylic acid halide is bonded directly to one end  of an acyclic
    carbon chain of at least seven uninterrupted carbons; subclass 886 for
    compounds wherein the thiocarbonyl of a thioanhydride is bonded directly to
    one end of an acyclic carbon chain of at least seven uninterrupted carbons;
    subclasses 887+ for compounds wherein the carbonyl of a carboxylic acid
    anhydride is bonded directly to one end of an acyclic carbon chain of at
    least seven uninterrupted carbons.

    564,    Organic Compounds, subclass 78 for compounds wherein the
    thiocarbonyl of a thiocarboxamide is bonded directly to one end of an
    acyclic chain of at least seven uninterrupted carbons; subclasses 152-160
    for compounds wherein the carbonyls of a polycarboxamide are bonded to an
    acyclic carbon of at least seven uninterrupted carbons; subclass 254 for
    compounds which are O-esters of oximes, wherein the ester forming group
    contains an acyclic chain of at least seven uninterrupted carbons.

    568,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 303+ and 700+ for compounds wherein
    the carboxyl group of a fatty acid is converted into an oxo or carbinol
    group.


CLS 554/2
TXT Products under subclass 1 wherein the compound is mixed with a preserving
    or stabilizing agent which functions to prevent physical or chemical change.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    appropriate subclasses, for preserved edible oils not from a single  source.

    508,    Solid Antifriction Devices, Materials Therefor, Lubricant and
    Separant Compositions for Moving Solid Surfaces, and Miscellaneous Mineral
    Oil Compositions, particularly subclasses 110+, for preserved lubricants or
    cutting oils.


CLS 554/3
TXT Products under subclass 2 wherein the preservative or stabilizer contains
    an oxygen containing hetero ring.


CLS 554/4
TXT Products under subclass 2 wherein the preservative or stabilizer contains
    phosphorus.


CLS 554/5
TXT Products under subclass 2 wherein the preservative or stabilizer contains
    nitrogen.


CLS 554/6
TXT Products under subclass 2 wherein the preservative or stabilizer contains
    sulfur.


CLS 554/7
TXT Products under subclass 2 wherein the preservative or stabilizer contains
    at least one benzene ring having at least one -OH group bonded directly
    thereto, wherein H of the -OH may be replaced by metal or substituted or
    unsubstituted ammonium.


CLS 554/8
TXT Processes under subclass 1 which include the extraction of the fatty
    compound(s) directly from animal or plant source material.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are processes such as the recovery of fatty
    acid compounds from garbage, fish offal, slaughter house waste, whole fish,
    olive fruit,etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175+,   for processes directed to the purification of extracted fatty
    compounds.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    100,    Presses, for processes wherein a broadly claimed extraction step is
    followed by a significant expressing operation.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 600+ for a  process
    of purifying or separating water or a generically claimed liquid and for
    significant filtration or decantation treatments.


CLS 554/9
TXT Processes under subclass 8 wherein the fatty compound is extracted from
    legumes, nuts, or seeds, such as soya beans, peanuts, flax seed, cotton
    seed, or portions thereof, e.g., shells, kernels, germs, oil cake, etc.


CLS 554/10
TXT Processes under subclass 9 wherein sugar or fatty material is utilized to
    facilitate extraction.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are processes utilizing (1) miscella,
    molasses, lecithin, cocoa butter, etc, to extract the fatty  compound; (2)
    heated cashew oil to extract more oil from cashew nuts; (3) soap as an
    emulsifier, etc.


CLS 554/11
TXT Processes under subclass 9 wherein carbon dioxide or a peroxy-, sulfur-,
    nitrogen-, or metal-containing material is utilized facilitate extraction.


CLS 554/12
TXT Processes under subclass 9 wherein the legume, nut, or seed source material
    is subjected to the action of an organic solvent to dissolve out the fatty
    compound(s).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15      or 17, for processes wherein water is utilized in a solvent
    extraction.

    (1)     Note.  Oil is not miscible with water so in the subclasses wherein
    water or steam is added, the water or steam is utilized as a heating medium
    or to dissolve out nonoleaginous principles such as impurities.


CLS 554/13
TXT Processes under subclass 12 wherein the solvent contains halogen or oxygen.


CLS 554/14
TXT Processes under subclass 13 wherein two or more different solvents are
    utilized simultaneously or in succession.


CLS 554/15
TXT Processes under subclass 12 wherein water or water vapor is utilized to
    facilitate extraction.


CLS 554/16
TXT Processes under subclass 12 wherein the extraction is carried out under a
    pressure greater or less than atmospheric.

    (1)     Note.  The pressure referred to in this subclass is fluid pressure
    and not mechanical.


CLS 554/17
TXT Processes under subclass 9 wherein water vapor, water, or a pressure less
    than atmospheric is utilized.


CLS 554/18
TXT Processes under subclass 8 wherein fish liver is employed as the source
    material.


CLS 554/19
TXT Processes under subclass 8 wherein a material containing sulfur, silicon,
    nitrogen, or a metal is utilized to facilitate extraction.


CLS 554/20
TXT Processes under subclass 8 wherein the source material is subjected to the
    action of an organic solvent to dissolve out the fatty compound.


CLS 554/21
TXT Processes under subclass 20 wherein the solvent contains halogen or oxygen.


CLS 554/22
TXT Processes under subclass 8 wherein a pressure less than atmospheric is
    utilized.


CLS 554/23
TXT Processes under subclass 8 wherein water vapor or water is added to the
    source material to facilitate extraction.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes processes which are directed to  the
    melting out of the fatty compound from animal or  vegetable matter by heat
    using steam or water.


CLS 554/24
TXT Processes under subclass 1 which are directed to chemically treating fatty
    oils to impart drying or film-forming properties thereto, and the products
    produced by said treatment.

    (1)     Note.  Drying oils are characterized by becoming hard and resinous
    in contact with the air (absorbing oxygen) and are especially useful in the
    manufacture of varnishes and coating compositions.  Drying oils contain a
    great proportion of polyethylenically unsaturated acids, usually
    conjugated.  This subclass includes processes of treating the commonly
    known drying or semi-drying oils, such as linseed oil (which may contain
    inhibitors for satisfactory drying), to improve their drying properties,
    and processes of treating nondrying oils, such as castor oil, to impart
    drying properties thereto.

    (2)     Note.  Fatty compounds produced from drying oils, which  compounds
    no longer retain drying properties, are classified  where appropriate
    elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    208,    Mineral Oils: Processes and Products, subclass 1 for mineral oil
    products which have the properties of natural drying oils and processes of
    preparing the same.


CLS 554/25
TXT Processes under subclass 24 which are directed to polymerizing an oil, such
    as by heating or oxidizing, and the polymerized products resulting
    therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are synthetic drying products resulting
    from, for example, the interaction of unsaturated  fatty acid oils and
    polyhydric alcohol polyesters of aromatic polycarboxylic acids.

    (2)     Note.  The process of thermally polymerizing oils is commonly
    termed "bodying" of oils and the resulting products, "bodied oils", which
    describes oils whose mean molecular weight, specific gravity, and viscosity
    have been increased by the application of heat.


CLS 554/26
TXT Processes under subclass 25 which include, in addition to the oil reactant,
    at least one other organic compound in the polymerization reaction, such as
    a catalyst, promoter, or reactant.


CLS 554/27
TXT Processes under subclass 26 wherein the additional organic compound is an
    ethylenically unsaturated monomer containing hydrogen and carbon only.


CLS 554/28
TXT Processes under subclass 25 wherein an inorganic material is utilized in
    the polymerization reaction.


CLS 554/29
TXT Processes under subclass 25 which include separating the polymerized
    product from impurities or from the reaction mixture.


CLS 554/30
TXT Processes under subclass 24 which include esterification or wherein a
    starting material is treated, such as by heat or with catalysts, to cause a
    rearrangement of elements.


CLS 554/31
TXT Processes under subclass 24 which are directed to dehydrating a starting
    material or forming carbon to carbon unsaturation in a starting material to
    impart drying properties thereto.

    (1)     Note.  Provided for herein are processes directed to (1) the
    removal of water from compounds such as hydroxylated fatty  acids or oils,
    or (2) the formation of conjugated  unsaturation by dehydrogenation or
    dehalohydrogenation, etc.


CLS 554/32
TXT Processes under subclass 31 wherein a compound containing a metal having a
    specific gravity greater than four is utilized, e.g., as reactant,
    catalyst, promoter, etc.


CLS 554/33
TXT Processes under subclass 31 wherein a compound containing sulfur is
    utilized.


CLS 554/34
TXT Processes under subclass 31 wherein a compound containing a Group IA or
    Group IIA light metal is utilized.

    (1)     Note.  The Group IA light metals are lithium (Li), sodium (Na),
    potassium (K), rubidium (Rb), and cesium (Cs).  The Group IIA light metals
    are beryllium (Be), magnesium (Mg), calcium (Ca), strontium (Sr), and
    barium (Ba).


CLS 554/35
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which are fatty acid amides, i.e., compounds
    having an acyclic chain of at least seven uninterrupted carbons bonded
    directly to the carbonyl of a -C(=O)- NH(H) group, wherein the hydrogens
    may be substituted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    564,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 152+ for compounds having plural
    carboxamide groups bonded through their carbonyls to each end of an acyclic
    carbon chain of any length.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 554/36
TXT Compounds under subclass 35 wherein an additional carbonyl is in the acid
    moiety.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 554/37
TXT Compounds under subclass 36 wherein an atom other carbon is bonded directly
    to the additional carbonyl.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 554/38
TXT Compounds under subclass 35 which contain aluminum or a metal having a
    specific gravity greater than four.


CLS 554/39
TXT Compounds under subclass 35 which contain boron, silicon, selenium, or
    tellurium.


CLS 554/40
TXT Compounds under subclass 35 which contain phosphorus.


CLS 554/41
TXT Compounds under subclass 40 which contain nitrogen in addition to the
    carboxamide nitrogen.


CLS 554/42
TXT Compounds under subclass 35 which contain sulfur.


CLS 554/43
TXT Compounds under subclass 42 wherein sulfur is bonded directly to the
    carboxamide nitrogen or to an additional nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 554/44
TXT Compounds under subclass 42 which contain oxygen bonded directly to sulfur.


CLS 554/45
TXT Compounds under subclass 44 wherein the sulfoxy group is bonded directly to
    a ring.


CLS 554/46
TXT Compounds under subclass 44 which contain nitrogen in addition to the
    carboxamide nitrogen.


CLS 554/47
TXT Compounds under subclass 46 which contain a -O- group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 554/48
TXT Compounds under subclass 46 which contain two or more carboxamide groups.


CLS 554/49
TXT Compounds under subclass 44 wherein the carboxamide nitrogen and a
    -S(=O)(=O)-O-X group are attached to each other through an acyclic carbon
    chain, where X is hydrogen or a metal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 554/50
TXT Compounds under subclass 44 which contain sulfur bonded directly to oxygen
    in the acid moiety of the carboxamide.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 554/51
TXT Compounds under subclass 35 which contain plural nitrogens, i.e., nitrogen
    in addition to the carboxamide nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 554/52
TXT Compounds under subclass 51 wherein the additional nitrogen is in a
    quaternary ammonium group; i.e., a pentavalent nitrogen is bonded by four
    valences to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 554/53
TXT Compounds under subclass 51 which contain the
    -NH2 or -NH-NH2 group, wherein substitution may be made for hydrogen only.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 554/54
TXT Compounds under subclass 51 which contain a -CN group or a -NH-NH2 group,
    wherein substitution may be made for hydrogen only.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 554/55
TXT Compounds under subclass 51 which contain halogen or plural oxygens, i.e.,
    oxygen in addition to the carboxamide oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 554/56
TXT Compounds under subclass 55 which contain at least two carboxamide groups.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 554/57
TXT Compounds under subclass 56 which contain three or more carboxamide group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 554/58
TXT Compounds under subclass 56 which contain a -O- group or nitrogen in
    addition to those in the two carboxamide groups.


CLS 554/59
TXT Compounds under subclass 55 wherein the additional oxygen is in a O- group.


CLS 554/60
TXT Compounds under subclass 55 wherein the additional oxygen is in a nitro
    group or  in a group composed of two or more oxyalkylene groups bonded
    directly to each other.


CLS 554/61
TXT Compounds under subclass 35 which contain plural oxygens, i.e., oxygen in
    addition to the carboxamide oxygen.


CLS 554/62
TXT Compounds under subclass 61 which contain halogen.


CLS 554/63
TXT Compounds under subclass 61 which contain a -O- group.


CLS 554/64
TXT Compounds under subclass 61 which contain two or more oxyalkylene groups;
    i.e., -O-Alkyl-, bonded directly to each other.


CLS 554/65
TXT Compounds under subclass 61 wherein the oxygen is bonded directly to a ring.


CLS 554/66
TXT Compounds under subclass 61 which contain an hydroxyalkyl group bonded
    directly to the carboxamide nitrogen through a carbon of the group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 554/67
TXT Compounds under subclass 35 which contain halogen.


CLS 554/68
TXT Processes under subclass 35 which are directed to the preparation,
    recovery, or treatment of a fatty acid amide.


CLS 554/69
TXT Processes under subclass 68 which are directed to the formation of the
    carboxamide group; e.g., by reacting a fatty acid, salt, ester, acid
    halide, or anhydride with ammonia or an amino nitrogen containing compound.


CLS 554/70
TXT Processes under subclass 68 which are directed to separating the fatty acid
    amide from impurities or from the reaction mixture.


CLS 554/71
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which contain a metal having a specific gravity
    greater than four.


CLS 554/72
TXT Compound under subclass 71 wherein the heavy metal is titanium, zirconium,
    or cerium.


CLS 554/73
TXT Compounds under subclass 71 wherein the heavy metal is lead or tin.


CLS 554/74
TXT Compounds under subclass 71 wherein the heavy metal is iron, cobalt,
    nickel, copper, silver, or gold.


CLS 554/75
TXT Compounds under subclass 71 wherein the heavy metal is zinc, cadmium, or
    mercury.


CLS 554/76
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which contain aluminum.


CLS 554/77
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which contain boron, selenium, or silicon.


CLS 554/78
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which contain phosphorus.


CLS 554/79
TXT Compounds under subclass 78 which are phosphoric acid glycerol esters
    containing a fatty acid moiety.

    (1)     Note.  Glycerophosphates are complex lipids which on hydrolysis
    yield glycerol, fatty acid, and phosphoric acid or an inorganic phosphate.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 554/80
TXT Compounds under subclass 79 which contain nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 554/81
TXT Compounds under subclass 80 which contain halogen or sulfur.


CLS 554/82
TXT Processes under subclass 80 which are directed to the preparation of
    nitrogen containing glycerophosphates.


CLS 554/83
TXT Processes under subclass 80 which include separating the compound from
    impurities or the reaction mixture.


CLS 554/84
TXT Compounds under subclass 78 which contain nitrogen.


CLS 554/85
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which contain sulfur.


CLS 554/86
TXT Processes under subclass 85 wherein the sulfur containing compound is
    treated with or prepared in a reaction utilizing sulfur chloride.


CLS 554/87
TXT Processes under subclass 85 wherein the sulfur containing compound is
    treated with or prepared in a reaction utilizing elemental sulfur.


CLS 554/88
TXT Compounds under subclass 85 which contain oxygen bonded directly to sulfur.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are sulfonated or sulfated oils.


CLS 554/89
TXT Compounds under subclass 88 which are sulfo-aromatic fatty acids prepared
    by the action of sulfuric acid on an aromatic hydrocarbon such as
    naphthalene, and a fatty compound, such as castor oil or oleic acid.

    (1)     Note.  Twitchell reagent and Pfeilring reagent are fat hydrolysis
    catalysts.


CLS 554/90
TXT Compounds under subclass 88 wherein the sulfoxy is in the alcohol moiety.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 554/91
TXT Compounds under subclass 90 which contain nitrogen bonded directly to
    carbon in the alcohol moiety.


CLS 554/92
TXT Compounds under subclass 90 wherein
    -S(=O)(=O)-O-X is attached indirectly through a single carbon or carbon
    chain to the single bonded oxygen of the -O- group, wherein X is hydrogen
    or a cation.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 554/93
TXT Processes under subclass 90 which include separating the compound from
    impurities or from the reaction mixture.


CLS 554/94
TXT Compounds under subclass 88 which contain nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 554/95
TXT Compounds under subclass 88 which contain a carbocyclic ring in the acid
    moiety.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 554/96
TXT Compounds under subclass 88 which contain a sulfonic acid or a sulfate
    monoester substituent, or a salt or ester of the substituent.


CLS 554/97
TXT Compounds under subclass 96 which are metal salts.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 554/98
TXT Processes under subclass 96 which are directed to preparing the compound by
    reacting anhydrous sulfur trioxide.


CLS 554/99
TXT Processes under subclass 96 wherein the compound is prepared by a
    sulfonation reaction which is carried out in the presence of (1) a lower
    carboxylic acid (i.e., the uninterrupted carbon chain in the acid moiety
    contains fewer than seven carbons), (2) an anhydride thereof, (3) an acid
    halide thereof, or (4) a phosphorus containing material.


CLS 554/100
TXT Processes under subclass 96 which are directed to separating the compound
    from impurities or from the reaction mixture.


CLS 554/101
TXT Compounds under subclass 85 which contain -S- Carbon, -SH or -SM where M is
    a metal.


CLS 554/102
TXT Compounds under subclass 101 which contain two or more sulfur atoms.


CLS 554/103
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which contain nitrogen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184+,   for the purification of fatty compounds wherein a nitrogen
    containing compound is utilized.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    558,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 303+ for higher fatty acid nitriles.


CLS 554/104
TXT Compounds under subclass 103 which contain two or more nitrogen atoms.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 554/105
TXT Compounds under subclass 104 which contain oxygen in addition to the
    oxygens of the -C(=O)O- group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 554/106
TXT Compounds under subclass 105 wherein the additional oxygen is in a
    carboxamide group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 554/107
TXT Compounds under subclass 105 wherein the additional oxygen is in a C(=O)O-
    group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 554/108
TXT Compounds under subclass 103 which contain oxygen in addition to the
    oxygens of the -C(=O)O- group.


CLS 554/109
TXT Compounds under subclass 108 which contain two or more oxygens in addition
    to the oxygens of the -C(=O)O- group.


CLS 554/110
TXT Compounds under subclass 109 wherein the additional oxygens are in a
    -C(=O)O- group.


CLS 554/111
TXT Compounds under subclass 109 which contain a -N(=O)(=O) or -C(=O)-- group.


CLS 554/112
TXT Compounds under subclass 108 which contain a -C(=O)--, -CN or -N=C=O group.


CLS 554/113
TXT Compounds under subclass 103 which contain a -CN group.


CLS 554/114
TXT Processes under subclass 103 which are directed to the preparation,
    recovery or treatment of a nitrogen containing fatty compound.


CLS 554/115
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which contain, in addition to the carbonyl of
    the -C(=O)O- group, a carbonyl group, i.e., -C(=O)-, in the acid moiety.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 554/116
TXT Compounds under subclass 115 which contain a benzene ring in the acid
    moiety.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 554/117
TXT Compounds under subclass 115 which contain an alicyclic ring in the acid
    moiety.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 554/118
TXT Compounds under subclass 117 wherein the carbon of the additional carbonyl
    is a ring carbon.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 554/119
TXT Compounds under subclass 118 which contain an additional oxygen bonded
    directly to the ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 554/120
TXT Compounds under subclass 115 wherein hydrogen is bonded directly to the
    additional carbonyl, i.e., aldehyde containing.


CLS 554/121
TXT Compounds under subclass 115 wherein the additional carbonyl is in a
    -C(=O)O- group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 554/122
TXT Compounds under subclass 121 which contain, in addition to the carbonyl of
    the -C(=O)O- group, two or more carbonyls in the acid moiety, at least one
    of which is in a -C(=O)O- group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 554/123
TXT Compounds under subclass 115 which contain halogen or at least two
    additional carbonyls in the acid moiety.


CLS 554/124
TXT Processes under subclass 1 which are directed to the chemical preparation
    of a fatty compound.


CLS 554/125
TXT Processes under subclass 124 wherein an optically inactive fatty compound
    with a double bond is treated to effect a spatial rearrangement of the
    atoms therein, such as converting elaidic acid (trans -9- octadecenoic
    acid) to oleic acid (cis -9- octadecenoic acid).


CLS 554/126
TXT Processes under subclass 124 wherein a fatty compound containing ethylenic
    unsaturation is treated to cause a double bond to shift to another position.


CLS 554/127
TXT Processes under subclass 124 which are directed to forming a double or
    triple bond in a compound, such as by dehydration.


CLS 554/128
TXT Processes under subclass 124 wherein the fatty compound is prepared by
    reacting an organic compound (usually an unsaturated hydrocarbon) with (1)
    carbon monoxide, (2) carbon dioxide, or (3) a carbon oxide and hydrogen or
    water.


CLS 554/129
TXT Processes under subclass 128 utilizing a phosphorus or sulfur containing
    material, e.g., as a catalyst or promoter.


CLS 554/130
TXT Processes under subclass 128 utilizing a halogen containing material.


CLS 554/131
TXT Processes under subclass 128 utilizing a Group VIII metal containing
    material.


CLS 554/132
TXT Processes under subclass 124 wherein the fatty compound is prepared by
    oxidation.


CLS 554/133
TXT Process under subclass 132 utilizing ozone.


CLS 554/134
TXT Processes under subclass 132 wherein molecular oxygen is utilized as the
    oxidizing agent.


CLS 554/135
TXT Processes under subclass 134 wherein a catalyst containing a metal having a
    specific gravity greater than four (4) is utilized.


CLS 554/136
TXT Processes under subclass 135 wherein the heavy metal is cobalt.


CLS 554/137
TXT Processes under subclass 135 wherein the heavy metal is manganese.


CLS 554/138
TXT Processes under subclass 132 utilizing a peroxy containing material as the
    oxidizing agent.


CLS 554/139
TXT Processes under subclass 132 utilizing nitric acid as the oxidizing agent.


CLS 554/140
TXT Processes under subclass 132 utilizing a chromium  containing compound as
    the oxidizing agent.


CLS 554/141
TXT Processes under subclass 124 wherein the fatty compound is prepared by the
    addition of hydrogen in the presence of a catalyst.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are processes utilizing sodium borohydride,
    nascent hydrogen, etc., as a reducing agent.


CLS 554/142
TXT Processes under subclass 141 which include esterification or molecular
    rearrangement before, during or after hydrogenation.


CLS 554/143
TXT Processes under subclass 141 wherein conversion of a functional group
    occurs during the course of hydrogenation (addition of hydrogen).

    (1)     Note.  Some examples of hydrogenolysis are conversion of an  oxo
    carbonyl group to hydroxy; of a hydroxy group to   hydrogen, etc.


CLS 554/144
TXT Processes under subclass 141 which include two or more hydrogenation steps
    or a continuous hydrogenation process.


CLS 554/145
TXT Processes under subclass 141 wherein reaction conditions are selected and
    controlled to produce a high percentage of desired products.


CLS 554/146
TXT Processes under subclass 141 wherein two or more materials containing a
    metal having a specific gravity greater than four (4) are utilized.


CLS 554/147
TXT Processes under subclass 141 utilizing an additional treating agent.


CLS 554/148
TXT Processes under subclass 124 directed to preparing the fatty compound from
    a reactant which contains an oxygen containing heterocyclic ring.


CLS 554/149
TXT Processes under subclass 148 wherein the oxygen containing heterocyclic
    ring  is oxirane, i.e., ethylene oxide.


CLS 554/150
TXT Processes under subclass 124 wherein the fatty compound is prepared by
    reacting an organic halogen containing compound.


CLS 554/151
TXT Processes under subclass 150 wherein the organic halogen containing
    reactant has a -C(=O)- group bonded directly to the halogen ( i.e.,
    carboxylic acid halide).


CLS 554/152
TXT Processes under subclass 150 which include utilizing a carboxylic acid salt
    reactant, in addition to the organic halogen containing compound.


CLS 554/153
TXT Processes under subclass 150 wherein a metal containing material is
    utilized; this metal may be a part of or in addition to the organic halogen
    containing reactant.


CLS 554/154
TXT Processes under subclass 124 wherein the fatty compound is prepared by
    reacting a nitrogen, phosphorus or sulfur containing material.


CLS 554/155
TXT Processes under subclass 154 wherein an inorganic sulfur containing
    material is utilized.


CLS 554/156
TXT Processes under subclass 124 wherein the fatty compound is prepared by
    reacting a Group IA or Group IIA light metal containing material.

    (1)     Note.  The Group IA and IIA light metals are Li, Na, K, Rb,  Cs,
    Be, Mg, Ca, Sr, and Ba.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195+,   for the purification of a fatty compound by treating with a Group
    IA or Group IIA light metal containing compound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 367.1 for processes of making soap  from
    mixtures of fats from different sources.


CLS 554/157
TXT Processes under subclass 156 wherein at least two different fatty materials
    are utilized or a fatty material and an additional organic material are
    utilized.


CLS 554/158
TXT Processes under subclass 156 which include utilizing (1) elemental metal,
    (2) an inorganic boron, halogen, phosphorus, silicon, or sulfur containing
    compound, or (3) an additional metal containing compound.


CLS 554/159
TXT Processes under subclass 124 wherein the fatty compound is prepared by
    reacting an inorganic halogen containing compound.


CLS 554/160
TXT Processes under subclass 124 wherein a fatty acid compound is produced by
    the reaction of water with a fatty material (fat splitting).


CLS 554/161
TXT Processes under subclass 124 wherein the fatty compound is prepared from a
    reactant which contains a -C(=O)O- group.


CLS 554/162
TXT Processes under subclass 161 wherein a moiety containing carbon and
    hydrogen only is bonded to the -C(=O)O- containing reactant.


CLS 554/163
TXT Processes under subclass 161 wherein the single bonded oxygen of the
    -C(=O)O- group is bonded directly to an additional carbon, which carbon may
    be single bonded to any atom but may be multiple bonded only to carbon
    (i.e., a carboxylic acid ester).


CLS 554/164
TXT Processes under subclass 163 which include a carboxylic acid anhydride as
    an additional reactant, i.e., reactant containing a -C(=O)-O-C(=O)- group.


CLS 554/165
TXT Processes under subclass 163 which include as an additional reactant a
    carboxylic acid; i.e., reactant containing a -C(=O)-OH group.


CLS 554/166
TXT Processes under subclass 165 wherein the carboxylic acid reactant contains
    plural-C(=O)OH groups or has an -OH group in the acid moiety.


CLS 554/167
TXT Processes under subclass 163 which include a reactant containing an -OH
    group bonded directly to carbon, which carbon may be single bonded to any
    atom but may be multiple bonded only to carbon (e.g., an alcohol, phenol,
    etc.).


CLS 554/168
TXT Processes under subclass 167 wherein the reactant contains two or more of
    the hydroxy groups.


CLS 554/169
TXT Processes under subclass 163 wherein glycerol esters, i.e., glycerides, are
    treated, (e.g., by heat, with catalyst, etc.) to cause the rearrangement of
    the -C(=O)O-  groups, resulting in a different ester or mixture of esters.

    (1)     Note.  Glycerides, or glycerol esters, are depicted thusly:

            wherein R= the same or different fatty acid radical.


CLS 554/170
TXT Processes under subclass 161 which include an additional reactant, which
    reactant contains an -OH group bonded directly to carbon, which carbon may
    be single bonded to any atom but may be multiple bonded only to carbon
    (e.g., an alcohol, phenol, etc.).


CLS 554/171
TXT Processes under subclass 170 wherein the alcohol reactant contains a ring.


CLS 554/172
TXT Processes under subclass 170 wherein the alcohol reactant is a polyhydric
    alcohol, i.e., contains plural -OH groups.


CLS 554/173
TXT Processes under subclass 172 wherein the polyhydric alcohol is glycerol;
    i.e.,




CLS 554/174
TXT Processes under subclass 1 wherein the hydrogen of a -C(=O)OH group of a
    free fatty acid is replaced by a carbon atom, which carbon may be single
    bonded to any atom but multiple bonded only to carbon, to reduce the free
    fatty acid content of the fatty compound source material or to facilitate
    separation of the constituents of the mixture.


CLS 554/175
TXT Processes under subclass 1 which are directed to the purification,
    recovery, deodorization, decolorization, or color stabilization of fatty
    compounds.


CLS 554/176
TXT Processes under subclass 175 wherein a fatty compound is treated to remove
    a metal or metal compound therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains patents wherein the claims specify
    the removal of a metal or a metal compound, as well as patents with broad
    claims wherein the disclosure is limited to the removal of a metal or a
    metal compound.


CLS 554/177
TXT Processes under subclass 175 wherein waste materials, such as foots,
    textile treating liquors, spent absorbents, filter cake, sewage, sludge,
    soapstock, or other industrial wastes are utilized as the source material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for the extraction of fatty compounds from garbage, fish offal, or
    slaughter-houses wastes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    502,    Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or Support Therefor:  Product or Process
    of Making, subclasses 20+ for processes directed to the recovery of spent
    sorbents.


CLS 554/178
TXT Processes under subclass 177 wherein a metal oxide, hydroxide, carbonate,
    or bicarbonate is utilized as a treating agent.


CLS 554/179
TXT Processes under subclass 177 which include utilizing an organic or
    inorganic acid or anhydride as a treating agent.


CLS 554/180
TXT Processes under subclass 177 wherein a hydrocarbon or a halohydrocarbon is
    utilized as a treating agent.

    (1)     Note.  A hydrocarbon is composed solely of carbon and hydrogen, and
    a halohydrocarbon of carbon, hydrogen and halogen.


CLS 554/181
TXT Processes under subclass 175 wherein impurities are oxidized from a mixture
    containing fatty compounds.


CLS 554/182
TXT Processes under subclass 181 wherein a peroxy containing treating agent is
    utilized.


CLS 554/183
TXT Processes under subclass 181 wherein air, gaseous oxygen or a halogen
    containing compound is utilized as a treating agent.


CLS 554/184
TXT Processes under subclass 175 wherein a nitrogen containing compound is
    utilized as a treating agent.


CLS 554/185
TXT Processes under subclass 184 wherein an organic nitrogen containing
    treating agent is utilized.


CLS 554/186
TXT Processes under subclass 185 wherein the organic nitrogen containing
    treating agent contains a urea (i.e., --) or nitro (i.e., -NO2) group.


CLS 554/187
TXT Processes under subclass 175 wherein a sulfur containing treating agent is
    utilized.


CLS 554/188
TXT Processes under subclass 187 wherein the sulfur containing treating agent
    is sulfuric acid (i.e., H2SO4) or sulfurous acid (i.e., H2SO3).


CLS 554/189
TXT Processes under subclass 187 wherein an inorganic sulfur containing
    treating agent is utilized.


CLS 554/190
TXT Processes under subclass 175 wherein a boron or phosphorus containing
    treating agent is utilized.


CLS 554/191
TXT Processes under subclass 175 wherein a sorbent material, such as activated
    carbon, clay, or synthetic resin, is utilized.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are processes wherein a mixture containing
    fatty compound(s) is treated with the sorbent to absorb fatty compound(s)
    or to absorb certain other fractions therefrom.


CLS 554/192
TXT Processes under subclass 191 wherein, in addition to the sorbent material,
    a Group IA or IIA metal oxide, hydroxide or carbonate is utilized as a
    treating agent.


CLS 554/193
TXT Processes under subclass 191 in which a solvent is utilized or whereby a
    fatty compound is separated from the sorbent material.


CLS 554/194
TXT Processes under subclass 175 utilizing a treating agent containing a metal
    having a specific gravity greater than four or aluminum.


CLS 554/195
TXT Processes under subclass 175 wherein the treating agent contains a Group IA
    or Group IIA light metal.

    (1)     Note.  The Group IA light metals are Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs and  the
    Group IIA light metals are Be, Mg, Ca, Sr, and Ba.


CLS 554/196
TXT Processes under subclass 195 which include utilizing a silicon containing
    treating agent.

    (1)     Note.  The silicon containing agent may be in addition to the
    Group IA or IIA metal containing agent or the silicon and Group IA or IIA
    metal may be in the same agent.


CLS 554/197
TXT Processes under subclass 195 which include an inorganic halogen containing
    treating agent; the halogen may be in the same compound as the Group IA or
    IIA metal or the halogen containing compound may be an additional treating
    agent.


CLS 554/198
TXT Processes under subclass 195 wherein the fatty compound source material is
    a mixture including another specified organic treating agent, or wherein an
    organic treating agent is added to the source material.


CLS 554/199
TXT Processes under subclass 198 wherein the specified or added organic
    treating agent contains oxygen.


CLS 554/200
TXT Processes under subclass 199 wherein the organic oxygen containing treating
    agent is a carboxylic acid, carboxylic acid anhydride or carboxylic acid
    salt.


CLS 554/201
TXT Processes under subclass 195 wherein added water or steam (water vapor) is
    utilized.


CLS 554/202
TXT Processes under subclass 195 wherein a metal oxide or hydroxide is utilized.


CLS 554/203
TXT Processes under subclass 202 which include separation by centrifugation,
    i.e., fast rotation.


CLS 554/204
TXT Processes under subclass 175 wherein a carboxylic acid, carboxylic acid
    anhydride, or carboxylic acid halide is utilized as a treating agent.


CLS 554/205
TXT Processes under subclass 175 which include utilizing a gaseous or vaporous
    material to purify, recover, deodorize, decolor, or to stabilize the color
    of, the fatty compound.


CLS 554/206
TXT Processes under subclass 175 wherein an organic compound is utilized as
    solvent.


CLS 554/207
TXT Processes under subclass 206 wherein water is utilized.


CLS 554/208
TXT Processes under subclass 206 which involve (1) the change in solution from
    a dissolved, molten, liquid or gaseous state to a solid state of definite,
    ordered and characteristic shape (crystallization) or (2) the formation of
    solid particles in a solution with settling out (precipitation).


CLS 554/209
TXT Processes under subclass 208 wherein a halogen containing compound or
    material or a hydrocarbon is utilized as a solvent.


CLS 554/210
TXT Processes under subclass 206 wherein a halogen containing compound or
    material or a hydrocarbon is utilized as a solvent.


CLS 554/211
TXT Processes under subclass 175 which involve (1) the change in solution from
    a dissolved, molten, liquid or gaseous state to a solid state of definite,
    ordered and characteristic shape (crystallization) or (2) the formation of
    solid particles in a solution with settling out (precipitation).


CLS 554/212
TXT Processes under subclass 175 wherein an organic material is utilized.


CLS 554/213
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 wherein the acid moiety contains oxygen in
    addition to those of the carboxylic acid, salt or ester group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 554/214
TXT Compounds under subclass 213 which contain an alicyclic ring in the acid
    moiety.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 554/215
TXT Compounds under subclass 214 which contain a benzene ring in the acid
    moiety.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 554/216
TXT Compounds under subclass 215 wherein two or more oxygens are bonded
    directly to the alicyclic ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 554/217
TXT Compounds under subclass 214 wherein two or more oxygens are bonded
    directly to the alicyclic ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 554/218
TXT Compounds under subclass 213 which contain a benzene ring in the acid
    moiety.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 554/219
TXT Compounds under subclass 213 wherein the acid moiety contains an acyclic
    ethylenic double bond, or an acetylenic triple bond.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 554/220
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 wherein the acid moiety contains a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 554/221
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 wherein the acid radical contains an alicyclic
    ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 554/222
TXT Compounds under subclass 221 wherein the alicyclic ring is a five-membered
    ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 554/223
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 wherein the acid moiety contains an acyclic
    ethylenic double bond or an acetylenic triple bond.

    (1)     Note.  Products referred to as being unsaturated with no
    specificity regarding the degree of unsaturation are included in this
    subclass, as well as "named" products commonly known  to possess
    unsaturation.  Also included herein are products which consist of mixtures
    of saturated and unsaturated fatty acids and/or esters, unless a
    constituent of the mixture is  provided for in a higher subclass, or a
    claim is directed to a specific constituent provided for elsewhere.


CLS 554/224
TXT Compounds under subclass 223 which contain two or more unsaturated
    linkages, which may be ethylenic double bonds, acetylenic triple bonds or a
    combination of double and triple bonds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24+,    for products referred to as modified or synthetic drying oils or
    bodied oils which products may contain acyclic polyunsaturation in an acid
    moiety.


CLS 554/225
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which contain halogen in the acid moiety.


CLS 554/226
TXT Compounds under subclass 225 which contain two or more halogens in the acid
    moiety.


CLS 554/227
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 wherein, in a fatty acid ester, the alcohol
    moiety contains, in addition to the esterified hydroxy group, another
    hydroxy group, wherein the hydrogen of the additional hydroxy group may be
    substituted by acyl, an alcoholate-forming group or a hydrocarbon radical.


CLS 554/228
TXT Compounds under subclass 227 wherein the polyoxy alcohol moiety also
    contains a carbocyclic ring.


CLS 554/229
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 wherein the alcohol moiety contains a
    carbocyclic ring.


CLS 554/230
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 wherein the alcohol moiety is acyclic and
    contains an ethylenic double bond or an acetylenic triple bond.


CLS 554/231
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which contain halogen in the alcohol moiety.


CLS 556/
TTL ORGANIC COMPOUNDS -- PART OF THE CLASS 532 - 570 SERIES

CLS 556/1
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350, which contain a heavy metal, i.e.,
    a metal having a specific gravity greater than four.

    (1)     Note. Many subclasses in the 532-570 Series of Classes provide for
    the combination of a heavy metal with an organic nucleus in a compound.
    Some examples are Class 534, subclass 692; Class 546, subclass 2; Class
    548, subclass 101; and, Class 549, subclass 206.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses 223
    through 225 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste
    containing metal.


CLS 556/2
TXT Products under subclass 1 wherein the heavy metal containing compound is
    mixed with a preserving or stabilizing agent whose sole function is to
    prevent physical or chemical change.


CLS 556/3
TXT Products under subclass 2 wherein the compound that is preserved or
    stabilized contains lead bonded directly to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Stabilization of the common antiknock compound, tetraethy
    lead, is provided for herein.


CLS 556/4
TXT Products under subclass 3 wherein the preserving or stabilizing agent
    contains halogen.


CLS 556/5
TXT Products under subclass 3 wherein the preserving or stabilizing agent
    contains chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium).


CLS 556/6
TXT Products under subclass 2 wherein the preserving or stabilizing agent
    contains nitrogen.


CLS 556/7
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which contain boron.


CLS 556/8
TXT Compounds under subclass 7 wherein the boron is bonded directly to hydrogen.


CLS 556/9
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which contain silicon.


CLS 556/10
TXT Compounds under subclass 9 wherein silicon and the heavy metal are bonded
    directly to the same chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/11
TXT Compounds under subclass 10 wherein an unsaturated five-membered
    carbocyclic ring is bonded directly to the heavy metal.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/12
TXT Compounds under subclass 9 where at least three carbons are bonded directly
    to the silicon.


CLS 556/13
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which contain phosphorus.


CLS 556/14
TXT Compounds under subclass 13 which contain an additional diverse heavy metal
    or aluminum.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/15
TXT Compounds under subclass 13 in which the heavy metal is bonded directly to
    the carbon of a -C(=X)- group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/16
TXT Compounds under subclass 15 in which the heavy metal is iron, cobalt,
    nickel, ruthenium, rhodium, palladium, osmium, iridium, or platinum.


CLS 556/17
TXT Compounds under subclass 13 wherein at least two phosphori are bonded
    directly to the same nitrogen or chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium,
    or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 556/18
TXT Compounds under subclass 13 wherein at least two phosphori are bonded
    directly to the same carbon or attached to each other by an acyclic chain
    which consists of carbons or of carbons and chalcogens (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 556/19
TXT Compounds under subclass 13 wherein carbon is bonded directly to the
    phosphorus.


CLS 556/20
TXT Compounds under subclass 19 wherein at least two carbons are bonded
    directly to the phosphorus.


CLS 556/21
TXT Compounds under subclass 20 wherein exactly three carbons are bonded
    directly to the phosphorus.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/22
TXT Compounds under subclass 21 wherein carbon is bonded directly to the heavy
    metal.


CLS 556/23
TXT Compounds under subclass 21 wherein hydrogen or halogen is bonded directly
    to the heavy metal.


CLS 556/24
TXT Compounds under subclass 13 wherein exactly four chalcogens (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium or tellurium) are bonded directly to the phosphorus.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 556/25
TXT Compounds under subclass 24 wherein at least two of the chalcogens are
    sulfur.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/26
TXT Compounds under subclass 24 which contain nitrogen or a -C(=X)- group,
    wherein X is chalcogen.


CLS 556/27
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which contain aluminum.


CLS 556/28
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which contain at least two diverse heavy metals.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/29
TXT Compounds under subclass 28 wherein the heavy metal is double bonded
    directly to heavy metal.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 556/30
TXT Compounds under subclass 28 which contain arsenic, antimony or bismuth.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 556/31
TXT Compounds under subclass 28 which contain a -C(=X)- group, wherein X is
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium).


CLS 556/32
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which contain carbon double bonded directly to
    nitrogen.


CLS 556/33
TXT Compounds under subclass 32 wherein a carbocyclic ring is bonded directly
    to the nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 556/34
TXT Compounds under subclass 33 which contain plural groups having carbon
    double bonded directly to nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:



CLS 556/35
TXT Compounds under subclass 32 wherein an additional nitrogen is bonded
    directly to the carbon or nitrogen is single bonded directly to the
    nitrogen.


CLS 556/36
TXT Compounds under subclass 35 which contain a carbon having one nitrogen
    double bonded and two nitrogens single bonded directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/37
TXT Compounds under subclass 32 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to the carbon or nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:



CLS 556/38
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which contain nitrogen and at least two sulfurs
    bonded directly to the same carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/39
TXT Compounds under subclass 38 wherein at least two nitrogens are bonded
    directly to the same carbon or are attached to each other by a chain
    consisting of carbons, which carbons may be part of a ring.

    (1)     Note.  Example of compounds provided for herein are:



CLS 556/40
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which contain at least two -C(=X)- groups,
    wherein X chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium) bonded
    directly to the same nonbenzenoid carbon, or the enolate thereof.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:

    (2)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are metal salicylates,
    ortho-hydroxy-benzoplenones, and hydroxy indanones: such as:



CLS 556/41
TXT Compounds under subclass 40 wherein carbon or halogen is bonded directly to
    the metal.


CLS 556/42
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which contain vanadium, niobium or tantalum.

    (1)     Note. Niobium has also been known as columbium.


CLS 556/43
TXT Compounds under subclass 42 wherein carbon is bonded directly to the metal.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:



CLS 556/44
TXT Compounds under subclass 42 wherein the metal is bonded directly to X of a
    -C(=X) X-group, wherein the X's are the same or diverse chalcogens (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/45
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which contain manganese or rhenium.


CLS 556/46
TXT Compounds under subclass 45 wherein carbon is bonded directly  to the metal.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/47
TXT Compounds under subclass 46 wherein the metal is bonded directly to an
    unsaturated 5-membered carbocyclic ring and to at least three
    -C(=X)-groups, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Example of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 556/48
TXT Compounds under subclass 47 wherein chalcogen or -C(=X)-, wherein X is
    chalcogen, are bonded directly to the unsaturated 5-membered carbocyclic
    ring.


CLS 556/49
TXT Compounds under subclass 45 wherein the metal is bonded directly to X of a
    -C(=X)X-group, wherein the X's are the same or diverse chalcogens (i.e.,
    oxygen sulfur, selenium or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 556/50
TXT Compounds under subclass 49 which contain nitrogen.


CLS 556/51
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which contain titanium, zirconium or hafnium.


CLS 556/52
TXT Compounds under subclass 51 wherein carbon is bonded directly to the metal.


CLS 556/53
TXT Compounds under subclass 52 wherein at least two unsaturated 5-membered
    carbocyclic rings are bonded directly to the metal.


CLS 556/54
TXT Compounds under subclass 51 wherein at least two chalcogens (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium or tellurium) are bonded directly to the metal.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 556/55
TXT Compounds under subclass 54 which contain a -C(=X)X- group, wherein the X's
    are the same or diverse chalcogens.


CLS 556/56
TXT Compounds under subclass 54 which contain nitrogen or halogen.


CLS 556/57
TXT Compounds under subclass 51 which contain chromium, molybdenum or tungsten.


CLS 556/58
TXT Compounds under subclass 57 wherein carbon is bonded directly to the metal.


CLS 556/59
TXT Compounds under subclass 58 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium is double bonded directly to the carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/60
TXT Compounds under subclass 59 wherein a carbocyclic ring is bonded directly
    to the metal.


CLS 556/61
TXT Compounds under subclass 57 which contain a -C(=X)X- group, wherein the X's
    are the same or diverse chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium).


CLS 556/62
TXT Compounds under subclass 61 wherein the carbons of at least two -C(=X)X-
    groups are bonded directly to each other, to the same acyclic carbon chain.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 556/63
TXT Compounds under subclass 61 which contain nitrogen or halogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/64
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which contain arsenic, antimony or bismuth.


CLS 556/65
TXT Compounds under subclass 64 wherein arsenic is double bonded directly to
    arsenic.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/66
TXT Compounds under subclass 65 which contain two benzene rings each having
    nitrogen, chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium) and one
    of the arsenics bonded directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/67
TXT Compounds under subclass 66 which contain sulfur double bonded directly to
    chalcogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/68
TXT Compounds under subclass 64 which contain a tricyclo ring system having a
    six-membered ring, which includes the heavy metal and nitrogen or chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium), as one of the cyclos.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:



CLS 556/69
TXT Compounds under subclass 64 which contain sulfur double bonded directly to
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 556/70
TXT Compounds under subclass 64 wherein carbon is bonded directly to the metal.


CLS 556/71
TXT Compounds under subclass 70 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) is bonded directly to the metal.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 556/72
TXT Compounds under subclass 71 wherein at least two chalcogens are bonded
    directly to the metal.


CLS 556/73
TXT Compounds under subclass 72 wherein exactly three chalcogens are bonded
    directly to the metal.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:



CLS 556/74
TXT Compounds under subclass 73 wherein nitrogen and the metal are bonded
    directly to the same benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 556/75
TXT Compounds under subclass 74 in which a -C(=X)- group, where X is chalcogen,
    is attached directly or indirectly to the nitrogen by acyclic nonionic
    bonding.


CLS 556/76
TXT Compounds under subclass 64 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to the metal.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 556/77
TXT Compounds under subclass 76 which contain a -C(=X)X- group, wherein the X's
    are the same or diverse chalcogens.


CLS 556/78
TXT Compounds under subclass 77 wherein a carbocyclic ring is bonded directly
    to the carbon of the -C(=X)X- group.


CLS 556/79
TXT Compounds under subclass 77 wherein the carbons of at least two -C(=X)X-
    groups are bonded directly to each other, to the same carbon, or to a chain
    consisting of carbons which carbons may be part of a ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:



CLS 556/80
TXT Compounds under subclass 76 wherein a carbocyclic ring is bonded directly
    to the chalcogen.


CLS 556/81
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which contain germanium, tin or lead.


CLS 556/82
TXT Compounds under subclass 81 wherein tin is bonded directly to tin or lead
    is bonded directly to lead.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/83
TXT Compounds under subclass 81 wherein at least two heavy metals are bonded
    directly to the same chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:



CLS 556/84
TXT Compounds under subclass 83 wherein exactly three carbons are bonded
    directly to each of the metals.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/85
TXT Compounds under subclass 81 which contain sulfur double bonded directly to
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:



CLS 556/86
TXT Compounds under subclass 85 wherein exactly three carbons are bonded
    directly to the metal.


CLS 556/87
TXT Compounds under subclass 81 wherein carbon is bonded directly to the metal.


CLS 556/88
TXT Compounds under subclass 87 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) is bonded directly to the metal.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83,     for polymeric dialkylmetal oxides.

    84,     for trialkyltin oxides also called bis (trialkyltin) oxides.


CLS 556/89
TXT Compounds under subclass 88 wherein at least two chalcogens are bonded
    directly to the metal.


CLS 556/90
TXT Compounds under subclass 89 in which at least one of the chalcogens is part
    of a -C(=X)X- group, wherein the X's are the same or diverse chalcogens.


CLS 556/91
TXT Compounds under subclass 90 which contain sulfur.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:



CLS 556/92
TXT Compounds under subclass 90 which contain acyclic carbon to carbon
    unsaturation.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90,     for dibutyltin maleates, e.g.,


CLS 556/93
TXT Compounds under subclass 89 in which a -C(=X)X- group, wherein the X's are
    the same or diverse chalcogens, is attached indirectly to the metal by
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/94
TXT Compounds under subclass 88 in which the chalcogen is part of a -C(=X)X-
    group, wherein the X's are the same or diverse chalcogens.


CLS 556/95
TXT Compounds under subclass 87 which consist of the metal, carbon and hydrogen
    or the metal, carbon, hydrogen and halogen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     for hexaorganodistannanes, e.g., hexabutylidtin and
    hexaorganodiplumbanes, e.g., hexaethyldilead.


CLS 556/96
TXT Processes under subclass 95 wherein the compound is prepared by utilizing a
    magnesium containing material in any way, e.g., as a catalyst, reactant,
    etc.


CLS 556/97
TXT Processes under subclass 95 wherein the compound is prepared by an
    interchange of radicals between the heavy metal atoms, i.e., a shift of a
    radical, unchanged, from one heavy metal atom to another heavy metal atom.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are the processes of
    redistribution, disproportionation, etc., e.g.,

    (2)     Note.  This interchange may occur when plural molecules of the same
    heavy metal compound are acted upon in such a manner as to produce two
    different heavy metal compounds via molecular redistribution.


CLS 556/98
TXT Processes under subclass 95 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting a
    free heavy metal or a heavy metal containing alloy with a hydrocarbyl
    halide.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of processes provides for herein are:



CLS 556/99
TXT Processes under subclass 98 wherein a material containing an additional
    heavy metal or aluminum is utilized in any way, e.g., as a catalyst,
    reactant, etc.


CLS 556/100
TXT Processes under 98 wherein a phosphorus containing material or an organic
    nitrogen containing compound is utilized in any way, e.g., as a catalyst,
    accelerator, solvent, etc.


CLS 556/101
TXT Processes under subclass 98 wherein an organic chalcogen containing
    compound or an additional halogen containing compound is utilized in any
    way, e.g., as a catalyst, accelerator, solvent, etc.


CLS 556/102
TXT Processes under subclass 95 wherein the compound is prepared by utilizing a
    boron, aluminum, gallium, indium, or thallium containing material any way,
    e.g., as a catalyst, reactant, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    97,     for processes which include the interchange of radicals between
    heavy metal atoms (e.g., redistribution, disproportionation, etc.).


CLS 556/103
TXT Processes under subclass 95 which include separating the compound from
    impurities or from the reaction mixture.


CLS 556/104
TXT Compounds under subclass 95 wherein halogen is bonded directly to the metal.


CLS 556/105
TXT Compounds under subclass 81 which contain a -C(=X)X- group, wherein the X's
    are the same or diverse chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,, selenium or
    tellurium).


CLS 556/106
TXT Compounds under subclass 105 wherein a carbocyclic ring is bonded directly
    to the carbon of the -C(=X)X- group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein  is:



CLS 556/107
TXT Compounds under subclass 10 which contain nitrogen.


CLS 556/108
TXT Compounds under subclass 81 wherein a carbocyclic ring and the metal are
    bonded directly to the same chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/109
TXT Compounds under subclass 108 wherein at least two chalcogens and at least
    two nitro groups are bonded directly to the same benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:



CLS 556/110
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which contain copper, silver or gold.


CLS 556/111
TXT Compounds under subclass 110 which contain sulfur double bonded directly to
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein:



CLS 556/112
TXT Compounds under subclass 110 wherein carbon is bonded directly to the metal.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 556/113
TXT Compounds under subclass 110 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) is bonded directly to the metal.


CLS 556/114
TXT Compounds under subclass 113 in which the chalcogen is part of a -C(=X)X-
    group, wherein the X's are the same or diverse chalcogens.


CLS 556/115
TXT Compounds under subclass 114 wherein a carbocyclic ring is bonded directly
    to the carbon of the -C(X)X- group.


CLS 556/116
TXT Compounds under subclass 114 which contain nitrogen.


CLS 556/117
TXT Compounds under subclass 113 which contain a -C(X)X- group, wherein X is
    chalcogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/118
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which contain zinc, cadmium, or mercury.


CLS 556/119
TXT Compounds under subclass 118 which contain sulfur double bonded directly to
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/120
TXT Compounds under subclass 119 which contain a -C(=X)X- group, wherein X is
    chalcogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/121
TXT Compounds under subclass 118 wherein carbon is bonded directly to the metal.


CLS 556/122
TXT Compounds under subclass 121 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) is bonded directly to the metal.


CLS 556/123
TXT Compounds under subclass 122 wherein the carbon is part of a carbocyclic
    ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:





CLS 556/124
TXT Compounds under subclass 123 which hydrogen or -C(=X)X-, wherein X is
    chalcogen, is bonded directly to the chalcogen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided   for  herein  are:


CLS 556/125
TXT Compounds under subclass 124 wherein the carbon of the -C(=X)X- group is
    bonded directly to the carbocyclic ring or to a different carbocyclic ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided   for   herein are:


CLS 556/126
TXT Compounds under subclass 124 wherein an additional chalcogen is bonded
    directly to the carbocyclic ring.


CLS 556/127
TXT Compounds under subclass 122 which hydrogen or -C(=X), wherein X is
    chalcogen is bonded directly to the chalcogen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided    for  herein  are:


CLS 556/128
TXT Compounds under subclass 121 wherein cyano, nitrogen or halogen are bonded
    directly to the metal.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/129
TXT Compounds under subclass 121 which consist of the metal, carbon and
    hydrogen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein is:


CLS 556/130
TXT Compounds under subclass 118 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to the metal.


CLS 556/131
TXT Compounds under subclass 130 in which the chalcogen is part of a -C(=X)X-
    group, wherein the X's are the same or diverse chalcogens.


CLS 556/132
TXT Compounds under subclass 131 wherein a carbocyclic ring is bonded directly
    to the carbon of the -C(=X)X- group.


CLS 556/133
TXT Compounds under subclass 131 wherein the carbons of at least two -C(=X)X-
    groups are bonded directly to each other, to the same  carbon, or to a
    chain consisting of carbons, which carbons may be part of a ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/134
TXT Compounds under subclass 131 which contain nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/135
TXT Compounds under subclass 130 wherein a carbocyclic ring is bonded directly
    to the chalcogen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for   herein  are:


CLS 556/136
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which contain ruthen, rhodium, palladium,
    osmium, iridium, or platinum.


CLS 556/137
TXT Compounds under subclass 136 wherein nitrogen is bonded directly to the
    metal.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/138
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which contain iron, cobalt or nickel.


CLS 556/139
TXT Compounds under subclass 138 wherein carbon is bonded directly to the metal.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 556/140
TXT Compounds under subclass 138 wherein carbon is bonded directly to the metal.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided   for  herein  are:


CLS 556/141
TXT Compounds under subclass 140 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is double bonded directly to the carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/142
TXT Compound sunder subclass 141 wherein a carbocyclic ring is bonded directly
    to the metal.


CLS 556/143
TXT Compounds under subclass 140 wherein at least two unsaturated five-membered
    carbocyclic rings are bonded directly to the metal.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for   herein are:



CLS 556/144
TXT Compounds under subclass 143 which contain chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium), nitrogen or halogen.


CLS 556/145
TXT Compounds under subclass 144 in which a chalcogen, nitrogen, halogen or
    -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen, is bonded directly to at least one of the
    carbocyclic rings.

    (1)     Note.  Example of compounds provided for   herein  are:


CLS 556/146
TXT Compounds under subclass 138 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to the metal.


CLS 556/147
TXT Compounds under subclass 146 in which the chalcogen is part of a -C(=X)X-
    group, wherein the X's are the same or diverse chalcogens.


CLS 556/148
TXT Compounds under subclass 147 which contain nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/149
TXT Compounds under subclass 147 which are salts of acyclic monocarboxylic
    acids.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided   for   herein  are:

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146,    for iron, nickel, or cobalt gluconates, e.g.,


CLS 556/150
TXT Compounds under subclass 146 wherein a carbocyclic ring is bonded directly
    to the chalcogen.


CLS 556/170
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350, which contain aluminum.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses 223
    through 225 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste
    containing aluminum.


CLS 556/171
TXT Products under subclass 170 wherein the aluminum containing compound is
    mixed with a preserving or stabilizing agent whose sole function is to
    prevent physical or chemical change.


CLS 556/172
TXT Compounds under subclass 170 which contain boron.


CLS 556/173
TXT Compounds under subclass 170 which contain silicon.


CLS 556/174
TXT Compounds under subclass 170 which contain phosphorus.


CLS 556/175
TXT Compounds under subclass 170 wherein the aluminum is a member of a ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided    for  herein are:



CLS 556/176
TXT Compounds under subclass 170 wherein nitrogen is bonded directly to the
    aluminum.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided   for   herein are:

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175,    for aluminum salts of polyaminopolycarboxylic acids, e.g., the
    aluminum chelate of ethylenediaminetetracetic acid.


CLS 556/177
TXT Compounds under subclass 170 which contain oxygen double bonded directly to
    sulfur.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/178
TXT Compounds under subclass 170 which contain at least two aluminums.


CLS 556/179
TXT Compounds under subclass 178 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to at least one of the aluminums.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided   for   herein  are:


CLS 556/180
TXT Compounds under subclass 178 wherein halogen is bonded directly to at least
    one of the aluminums.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/181
TXT Compounds under subclass 170 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to the aluminum.


CLS 556/182
TXT Compounds under subclass 181 wherein at least two chalcogens are bonded
    directly to the same aluminum.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided   for   herein are:

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175,    for aluminum catracholates, aluminum acetylacetonates, and aluminum
    glycerates.


CLS 556/183
TXT Compounds under subclass 182 in which at least one of the chalcogens is
    part of a -C(=X)X- group, wherein the X's are the same or diverse
    chalcogens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175,    for aluminum salts of alfa-hydroxy carboxylic acids, e.g., aluminum
    lactate:


            since a consideration of the patents involved does not make
    unequivocally clear whether the aluminum involved is cyclic or acyclic;
    and, for aluminum salts of polyaminopolycarboxylic acids, e.g., the
    aluminum chelate of ethylenediaminetetracetic acid.


CLS 556/184
TXT Compounds under subclass 183 wherein a ring is bonded directly to the
    carbon of the-C (=X) X-  group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175,    for aluminum salts of salicyclic acids such as:
    since it is not clear whether the aluminum involved is cyclic or acyclic.


CLS 556/185
TXT Processes under subclass 182 wherein the compound is prepared by an
    oxidation reaction.


CLS 556/186
TXT Compounds under subclass 170 wherein halogen is bonded directly to the
    aluminum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    180,    for aluminum sesquihalides.


CLS 556/187
TXT Processes under subclass 170 which are directed tot he preparation,
    purification, recovery, or treatment of a compound having at least two
    carbons bonded directly to the same aluminum.


CLS 556/188
TXT Processes under subclass 187 wherein an aluminum containing alloy or
    elemental aluminum is utilized.


CLS 556/189
TXT Processes under subclass 188 wherein a material which contains a metal
    other than aluminum is utilized.


CLS 556/190
TXT Processes under subclass 187 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting
    an unsaturated hydrocarbon with a compound having carbon bonded directly to
    the aluminum.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of processes provided for   herein  are:




CLS 556/400
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350, which contain silicon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    205+ for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing at
    least Si.


CLS 556/401
TXT Products under subclass 400 wherein the silicon-containing compound is
    mixed with a preserving or stabilizing agent whose sole function is to
    prevent physical or chemical change.


CLS 556/402
TXT Compounds under subclass 400 which contain boron.


CLS 556/403
TXT Compounds under subclass 402 in which the boron is a member of a ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided    for  herein are:



CLS 556/404
TXT Compounds under subclass 400 in which phosphorous is attached directly or
    indirectly to silicon by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided    for   herein  are:


CLS 556/405
TXT Compounds under subclass 404 in which chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to silicon.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided    for  herein  are:


CLS 556/406
TXT Compounds under subclass 400 containing a ring which includes at least one
    atom each of carbon and silicon, and contains no other elements as ring
    members.  Note examples   below:


CLS 556/407
TXT Compounds under subclass 400 which contain a ring having nitrogen as a ring
    member.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 556/408
TXT Compounds under subclass 407 in which the ring additionally contains
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) as a ring member.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided    for  herein are:


CLS 556/409
TXT Compounds under subclass 407 in which the ring additionally contains at
    least two silicons as ring members.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/410
TXT Compounds under subclass 400 in which nitrogen is attached directly to
    silicon by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 556/411
TXT Compounds under subclass 410 wherein the

    nitrogen is bonded directly to a  group, in which X is chalcogen (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 556/412
TXT Compounds under subclass 410 in which at least two silicons are bonded
    directly to the nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/413
TXT Compounds under subclass 400 in which nitrogen is attached indirectly to
    silicon by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/414
TXT Compounds under subclass 413 wherein the nitrogen is a part of an
    isocyanato or isothiocyanato group (i.e., -NCO or -NCS, respectively).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein       are:


CLS 556/415
TXT Compounds under subclass 413 in which the nitrogen is part of a -C=N group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided herein is:


CLS 556/416
TXT Compounds under subclass 415 in which chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to plural carbons or is
    double-bonded directly to a single carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided   for  herein are:


CLS 556/417
TXT Compounds under subclass 415 in which chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to silicon.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided    for  herein are:


CLS 556/418
TXT Compounds under subclass 413 in which a

     group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium), is attached indirectly to silicon by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/419
TXT Compounds under subclass 418 in which the

     group is bonded directly to the nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/420
TXT Compounds under subclass 419 in which the

     is part of aX-  group, wherein the X's are the same or diverse chalcogens
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/421
TXT Compounds under subclass 419 in which the

      group is bonded directly to an additional nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/422
TXT Compounds under subclass 413 in which the nitrogen is attached directly to
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) by nonionic
    bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided    for   herein  are:


CLS 556/423
TXT Compounds under subclass 413 wherein plural carbons are bonded directly to
    the same chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided   for   herein are:


CLS 556/424
TXT Compounds under subclass 413 in which at least two nitrogens are bonded
    directly to the same carbon or are attached to each other by a chain
    consisting of carbons, which carbons may be part of a ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided    for  herein are:


CLS 556/425
TXT Compounds under subclass 413 in which two silicons are bonded directly to
    the same oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/426
TXT Compound under subclass 400 in which sulfur is bonded directly to silicon.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided    for  herein are:


CLS 556/427
TXT Compounds under subclass 400 in which sulfur is attached indirectly to
    silicon by nonionic bonding.


CLS 556/428
TXT Compounds under subclass 427 in which chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to sulfur.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/429
TXT Compounds under subclass 427 in which the

    sulfur is part of a -Sgroup, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium), and wherein H of the -SH may be replaced by a
    substituted, or unsubstituted ammonium ion, or by a Group IA or IIA light
    metal.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:



CLS 556/430
TXT Compounds under subclass 400 in which at least two silicons are bonded
    directly to each other.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 556/431
TXT Compounds under subclass 400 in which at least two silicons are bonded
    directly to the same carbon or are attached by a chain consisting of
    carbons, which carbons may be part of a ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 556/432
TXT Compounds under subclass 431 wherein the silicons are bonded directly to
    the same benzene ring or to different benzene rings, which rings form all
    or part of the chain.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:



CLS 556/433
TXT Compounds under subclass 432 in which two silicons are bonded directly to
    the same oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:



CLS 556/434
TXT Compounds under subclass 431 in which two silicons are bonded directly to
    the same oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:



CLS 556/435
TXT Compounds under subclass 431 in which two silicons are bonded directly to
    the same acyclic saturated hydrocarbon.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:



CLS 556/436
TXT Compounds under subclass 400 in

     is attached directly or indirectly to silicon by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 556/437
TXT Compounds under subclass 436 in which the carbonyl is in a -COO- group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/438
TXT Compounds under subclass 437 in which silicon and the carbon of the -COO-
    group are bonded directly to the same hydrocarbon group.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:



CLS 556/439
TXT Compounds under subclass 438 in which two silicons are bonded directly to
    the same oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/440
TXT Compounds under subclass 437 in which silicon and the oxy of the -COO-
    group are bonded directly to the same hydrocarbon group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/441
TXT Compounds under subclass 437 containing a carbocyclic ring which has at
    least two substituents, one of which contains silicon and another one of
    which contains the -COO- group.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:



CLS 556/442
TXT Compounds under subclass 437 in which silicon is bonded directly to the oxy
    of the -COO- group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/443
TXT Compounds under subclass 400 in which at least two silicons are attached to
    each other by a chain consisting of oxygen and carbon, which chain may be
    part of a ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:



    SEARCH CLASS:

    552,    Organic Compounds, subclass 653 for silicon derivatives of Vitamin
    D compounds, cholecalciferols, activated 7-dehydrocholesterols,
    dihydrotachysterols, 3-5 cyclovitamin D compounds, etc.


CLS 556/444
TXT Compounds under subclass 443 in which two carbons are bonded directly to
    the same oxygen, i.e., compounds containing an ether linkage.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:



CLS 556/445
TXT Compounds under subclass 400 in which two carbons are bonded directly to
    the same oxygen, i.e., compounds containing an ether  linkage.


CLS 556/446
TXT Compounds under subclass 445 wherein an additional oxygen is bonded
    directly both to the silicon and to the group which contains the oxygen and
    two carbons.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/447
TXT Compounds under subclass 445 in which the two carbons are ring members in
    carbocyclic rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/448
TXT Compounds under subclass 445 in which one of the carbons is part of a
    substituent which contains halogen but does not contain either silicon or a
    benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 556/449
TXT Compounds under subclass 400 in which an -OH group is bonded directly to
    carbon or an -O-O group is bonded directly either to two carbons or to
    hydrogen and carbon; wherein the H of the hydroxy or the H bonded to the
    peroxy may be replaced by a substituted or unsubstituted ammonium ion or a
    Group IA or IIA light metal.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:



CLS 556/450
TXT Compounds under subclass 400 in which two silicons are bonded directly to
    the same oxygen.


CLS 556/451
TXT Compounds under subclass 450 in which hydrogen is bonded directly to
    silicon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/452
TXT Compounds under subclass 450 in which halogen is bonded directly to silicon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/453
TXT Compounds under subclass 450 in which three carbons are bonded directly to
    the same silicon.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided    for   herein  are:


CLS 556/454
TXT Compounds under subclass 453 in which halogen is attached indirectly to
    silicon by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/455
TXT Compounds under subclass 453 in which three oxygens are bonded directly to
    the same silicon.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided    for  herein are:


CLS 556/456
TXT Compounds under subclass 453 in which the three carbons are members of
    identical hydro-carbon groups.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided    for  herein are:


CLS 556/457
TXT Compounds under subclass 450 in which silicon and carbon are bonded
    directly to the same oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/458
TXT Compounds under subclass 457 in which three oxygens are each bonded
    directly to the same silicon and to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/459
TXT Compounds under subclass 450 in which -OH is bonded directly to silicon;
    wherein the -H of the hydroxy may be replaced by a substituted or
    unsubstituted ammonium ion or a Group IA or IIA light metal.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are those compounds which are specifically
    disclosed as having hydroxy bonded directly to at least one of the silicon
    atoms in the siloxane compound.  A search of subclass 450 is necessary to
    find those compounds which may be end-blocked with hydroxy groups but are
    not explicitly disclosed as being so terminated.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided    for  herein  are:


CLS 556/460
TXT Compounds under subclass 450 containing a ring which includes at least one
    atom each of oxygen and silicon, and contains no other elements as ring
    members.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided    for  herein are:


CLS 556/461
TXT Compounds under subclass 460 which contain a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/462
TXT Processes under subclass 450 of preparing a siloxance compound utilizing a
    siloxance reactant.


CLS 556/463
TXT Compounds under subclass 400 in which -OH or -O-O- is bonded directly to
    the silicon; wherein the -H of the hydroxy may be replaced by a substituted
    or unsubstituted ammonium ion or a Group IA or IIA light metal.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided    for  herein  are:


CLS 556/464
TXT Compounds under subclass 400 containing a ring which includes at least one
    atom each of silicon, oxygen, and carbon, and contains no other elements as
    ring members.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/465
TXT Compounds under subclass 400 in which carbon is attached directly or
    indirectly to the silicon by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/466
TXT Processes under subclass 465 for the preparation of the silicon-containing
    compounds or for the treatment of such compounds.


CLS 556/467
TXT Processes under subclass 466 in which a compound containing at least two
    silicons is utilized as a reactant.


CLS 556/468
TXT Processes under subclass 467 in which plural silicons are bonded directly
    to each other.


CLS 556/469
TXT Processes under subclass 466 in which there is an interchange of radicals
    between silicon atom, i.e., a shift of a radical, unchanged, from one
    silicon atom to another silicon atom.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are the processes of
    redistribution, disproportionation, transesterification, etc., e.g.,

    (2)     Note.  This interchange may occur when plural molecules of the same
    silicon compound are acted upon in such a manner as to produce two
    different silicon compounds via molecular redistribution, e.g.,


CLS 556/470
TXT Processes under subclass 466 by which a group containing silicon and carbon
    bonded directly to the same oxygen is formed.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are those replacement reactions whereby one
    silicon-to-oxygen-to-carbon linkage is replaced by another such linkage.


CLS 556/471
TXT Processes under subclass 470 in which a silicon halide is reacted with a
    hydroxy or oxirane-containing compound; wherein the -H of the hydroxy may
    be replaced by a substituted or unsubstituted ammonium ion or a Group IA or
    IIA light metal.


CLS 556/472
TXT Processes under subclass 466 in which elemental silicon, a
    silicon-containing alloy or a metal silicide reactant is utilized.


CLS 556/473
TXT Processes under subclass 472 which additionally utilize halogen, hydrogen
    halide, or a silicon halide.


CLS 556/474
TXT Processes under subclass 466 whereby a silicon to hydrogen bond is formed.


CLS 556/475
TXT Processes under subclass 466 in which carbon to carbon unsaturation is
    produced by dehydrohalogenation; i.e., the creation of a double or triple
    bond between adjacent carbon atoms by the removal of hydrogen and halogen.


CLS 556/476
TXT Processes under subclass 466 wherein a silicon-containing compound is
    halogenated.


CLS 556/477
TXT Processes under subclass 476 whereby a silicon to halogen bond is formed.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are those processes wherein the silicon to
    halogen bond which is formed is by the replacement of a halogen bonded to
    silicon by a diverse halogen.


CLS 556/478
TXT Processes under subclass 466 whereby a silicon to carbon bond is formed.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are those processes wherein the silicon to
    carbon bond which is formed is by the replacement of a carbon-containing
    radical bonded directly to silicon by a diverse carbon-containing radical.


CLS 556/479
TXT Processes under subclass 478 in which carbon to carbon unsaturation is
    reduced by the addition of a silicon hydride to the adjacent carbon atoms
    with the subsequent formation of a silicon to carbon bond.


CLS 556/480
TXT Progress under subclass 478 wherein a magnesium-containing reactant is
    utilized.


CLS 556/481
TXT Processes under subclass 478 whereby the silicon to carbon bond which is
    formed takes the place of a silicon to hydrogen bond.


CLS 556/482
TXT Compounds under subclass 465 in which both silicon and carbon are bonded
    directly to the same oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


    SEARCH CLASS:

    552,    Organic Compounds, subclass 653 for silicon derivatives of Vitamin
    D compounds, cholecalciferols, activated 7-dehydrocholesterols,
    dihydrotachysterols, 3-5 cyclovitamin D compounds, etc.


CLS 556/483
TXT Compounds under subclass 482 in which four oxygens are bonded directly to
    the silicon.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:




CLS 556/484
TXT Compounds under subclass 482 in which halogen is bonded directly to the
    silicon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/485
TXT Compounds under subclass 482 in which halogen is bonded directly to an
    acyclic carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/486
TXT Compounds under subclass 482 in which oxygen is bonded directly to benzene
    and silicon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/487
TXT Compounds under subclass 465 in which hydrogen is bonded directly to the
    silicon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/488
TXT Compounds under subclass 465 in which halogen is bonded directly to an
    acyclic carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 556/489
TXT Compounds under subclass 465 which contain an unsaturated carbocyclic ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/
TTL ORGANIC COMPOUNDS -- PART OF THE CLASS 532-570 SERIES

CLS 558/
TXT
    Class 558, Organic Compounds.  In this series of classes, Class 558 is to
    be considered as an integral part of Class 260 (after class 556) and
    follows the schedule hierarchy, retaining all pertinent definitions and
    class lines of Class 260.


CLS 558/1
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 wherein the thiomidate group,
    HN=CH-S-, in which substitution may be made for hydrogen only, is bonded
    direcctly to carbon, which carbon may be single bonded to any atom but may
    be multiple bonded only to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    215-222 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    chalcogens or nitrogen.


CLS 558/2
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 wherin the carbon of the thioimidate group is
    bonded directly to chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenlum, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:




CLS 558/3
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 wherein the nitrogen of the thioimidate group is
    attached directly to oxygen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/4
TXT Compounds under subclass wherein the carbon of the thiomidate group is
    bonded directly to nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 558/5
TXT Compounds under subclass 4 wherein the thioimidate group is attached
    indirectly to chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) by
    acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 558/6
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 wherein the imidate group, HN=CH-O,
    in which substitution may be made for hydrogen only, is bonded directly to
    carbon, which carbon may be single bonded to any atom but may be multiple
    bonded only to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    206-222 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    halogen, chalcogen, or nitrogen.


CLS 558/7
TXT Compounds under subcclass 6 wherein the nitrogen of the imidate group is
    attached directly to oxygen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/8
TXT Compounds under subclass 6 wherein the carbon of the imidate group is
    bonded directly to nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 558/9
TXT Compounds under subclass 6 wherein the nitrogen of the imidate group is
    bonded directly to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 558/10
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 wherein the thiocyano group,
    -S-C=N, is bonded directly to carbon, which carbon may be single bonded to
    any atom but may be multiple bonded only to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    206-222 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    halogen, chalcogen, or nitrogen.


CLS 558/11
TXT Compounds under 10 in which plural thiocyano groups are attached indirectly
    to each other by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/12
TXT Compounds under subclass 10 wherein the carbonyl carbon of a -C(=0)0- group
    and the thiocyano group are attached to the same carbon or to a chain
    consisting off carbons, which chain may include ring members.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 558/13
TXT Compounds under subclass 10 wherein a benzene ring is bonded directly to
    the thiocyano group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/14
TXT Compounds under subclass 10 wherein the thiocyano group is attached
    indirectly to nitrogen or carbony1, -C(=0)-, by acyclic nonlonic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Example of compounds provided for herein are:



CLS 558/15
TXT Compounds under subclass 10 wherein the thiocyano group is attached
    indirectly to sulfur or halogen by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 558/16
TXT Compounds under subclass 10 wherein the thiocyano group is attached
    indirectly to oxygen by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/17
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 wherein the isothiocyanate group,
    -N=C=S, is bonded directly to carbon, which carbon may be single bonded to
    any atom but may be multiple bonded only to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/18
TXT Processes under subclass 17 wherein the isothioicyanate group is formed.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/19
TXT Processes underr subclass 18 in which there is utilized a thiocyano
    (-S-C=N) compound, an isocyanate (-N=C=O) compound, or an isocyanide
    dihalide (-N=CXX, wherein X is halogen) compound.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of processes provided for herein are:



CLS 558/20
TXT Compound under Class 260, subclass 350 which contain the sulfate group,
    -0-S(=0)(=0)0- wherein at least one of the single bonded oxygens is bonded
    directly to carbon, which carbon may be single bonded to any atom, but may
    be multiple bonded only to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    206-225 for thedestruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    halogen, chalcogen, nitrogen, or metals.


CLS 558/21
TXT Products under subclass 20 wherein the sulfate ester is mixed with a
    stabiliizing or preserving agent, whose sole function is to prevent
    physical or chemical change.


CLS 558/22
TXT Compounds under subclass 20 in which the sulfate group is attached directly
    or indirectly to phosphorus by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 558/23
TXT Compounds under subclass 20 in which the sulfate group is bonded directly
    to chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/24
TXT Compounds under subclass 20 in which plural sulfate groups are indirectly
    attached to each other by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/25
TXT Compounds under subclass 24 wherein a sulfate group is attached indirectly
    to nitrogen by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/26
TXT Compounds under subclass 24 wherein one of the sulfate groups is attached
    indirectly to an additional chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium) by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/27
TXT Compounds under subclass 20 which contain a quaternary nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  Quaternary nitrogen is pentavalent nitrogen bonded by four
    valences to carbon, and ionically to an anion for the remaining valence.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/28
TXT Compounds under subclass 27 wherein the quaternary nitrogen is attached
    indirectly to -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/29
TXT Compounds under subclass 20 wherein the sulfate group is attached
    indirectly to nitrogen by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Example of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 558/30
TXT Compounds under subclass 29 wherein the nitrogen is bonded directly to
    -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium).


CLS 558/31
TXT Compounds under subclass 20 wherein the sulfate group is attached
    indirectly to chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium) by
    acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/32
TXT Compounds under subclass 31 wherein the chalcogen X is in the following
    group: -C(=X)-.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/33
TXT Compounds under subclass 31 wherein a ring is bonded directly to the
    chalcogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/34
TXT Compounds under subclass 31 wherein the sulfate group is attached
    indirectly to plural chalcogens by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 558/35
TXT Compounds under subclass 20 wherein the sulfate group is attached
    indirectly to halogen by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/36
TXT Compounds under subclass 20 wherein the sulfate group is attached directly
    to an acyclic carbon chain containing carbon to carbon unsaturation.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/37
TXT Compounds under subclass 20 wherein the sulfate group is attached directly
    or indirectly to a benzene ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:




CLS 558/38
TXT Compounds under subclass 20 wherein the sulfate group is bonded directly to
    plural alkyl groups, or to hydrogen and an alkyl group, wherein the
    hydrogen may be replaced by a group 1A or 11A light metal or by substituted
    or unsubstituted  ammonium.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 558/39
TXT Processes under subclass 38 of preparing, purifying, recovering, or any
    treating of the compound.


CLS 558/40
TXT Processes under subclass 39 wherein heavy metal containing material is
    utilized.

    (1)     Note.  The material may be utilized as a catalyst, as a promoter,
    or in any other way.


CLS 558/41
TXT Processes under subclass 39 wherein there is employed as a reactant a
    compound having an alcoholic -OH group (wherein H of the -OH may be
    replaced by substituted or unsubstituted ammonium, or by a Group 1A or 11A
    light metal).


CLS 558/42
TXT Processes under subclass 39 wherein a reactant which contains an acyclic or
    alicyclic carbon to carbon double bond is employed.


CLS 558/43
TXT Processes under subclass 39 which include separating the sulfate group
    containing compound from impurities or from the reaction mixture.


CLS 558/44
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 which contain the sulfonate group,
    -O-S (=O) (=O)-, wherein carbon is directly bonded to the single bonded
    oxygen, which carbon may be single bonded to any atom but may be multiple
    bonded only to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/45
TXT Compounds under subclass 44 wherein the sulfonate group is attached
    directly or indirectly to phosphorus by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/46
TXT Compounds under subclasses 44 wherein plural sulfonate groups are attached
    indirectly to each other by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/47
TXT Compounds under subclass 46 which a sulfonate group is attached directly or
    indirectly to nitrogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:





CLS 558/48
TXT Compounds under subclass 44 wherein the sulfonate group is attached
    directly or indirectly to nitrogen by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:





CLS 558/49
TXT Compounds under subclass 40 in which the nitrogen is bonded directly to
    -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 558/50
TXT Compounds under subclass 49 wherein the -C(=X)- group is attached directly
    or indirectly to aditional nitrogen by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 558/51
TXT Compounds under subclass 44 wherein the sulfonate group is attached
    indirectly to chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) by
    acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 558/52
TXT Compounds under subclass 51 wherein the chalcogen, X is in the following
    group:

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/53
TXT Compounds under subclass 44 wherein the sulfonate group is attached
    directly or indirectly to halogen by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 558/54
TXT Compounds under subclass 53 wherein the sulfonate group is attached
    indirectly to plural halogens by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 558/55
TXT Compounds under subclass 44 where the sulfonate group is attached directly
    to an acyclic carbon chain containing carbon to carbon unsaturation.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/56
TXT Compounds under subclass 44 wherein the sulfonate group is bonded directly
    to a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/57
TXT Compounds under subclass 56 wherein the sulfonate group is attached
    directly or indirectly to an alicylic ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 558/58
TXT Compounds under subclass 56 which contain an additional benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 558/59
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 which contain the sulfite group,
    -O-S(=O)O-, wherein at least one of the single bonded oxygens is bonded
    directly to carbon, which carbon may be single bonded to any atom, but may
    be multiple bonded only to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/60
TXT Compounds under subclass 59 in which the sulfite group is attached
    indirectly to chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) by
    acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/61
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 which contain the sulfinate group,
    -O-S(=O)-, wherein carbon is bonded directly to the single bonded oxygen,
    which carbon may be single bonded to any atom, but may be multiple bonded
    only to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 558/62
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 which contain the sulfenate group,
    -S-O-, wherein the oxygen is bonded directly to carbon, which carbonmay be
    single bonded to any atom, but may be multiple bonded only to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/70
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 which contain a phosphorus ester
    group, wherein trivalent or pentavalent phosphorus and carbon are bonded
    directly to the same divalent chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium), and wherein the carbon may be single bonded to any element but
    may be multiple bonded only to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Among the different phosphorus ester groups classifiable in
    this and indented subclasses are:

    wherein the X's may be the same or diverse chalcogens (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    206-225 for the destruction  of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    halogen, chalcogen, nitrogen, phosphorus, or metals.


CLS 558/71
TXT Products under subclass 70 which contain a phosphorus ester in admixture
    with a preservative or stabilizing agent whose sole function is to prevent
    physical or chemical change.


CLS 558/72
TXT Compounds under subclass 70 which contain boron.


CLS 558/73
TXT Compounds under subclass 70 wherein the phosphorus is part of a ring.


CLS 558/74
TXT Compounds under subclass 73 wherein the ring phosphorus is shared by two
    rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/75
TXT Compounds under subclass 74 in which one of the rings contains phosphorus
    and nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/76
TXT Compounds under subclass 73 which contain more than one phosphorus
    containing ring.


CLS 558/77
TXT Compounds under subclass 76 which contain a phosphorus atom with two
    chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) bonded directly
    thereto in the same ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/78
TXT Compounds under subclass 77 wherein an acyclic divalent chalcogen (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is bonded directly to the ring
    phosphorus.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/79
TXT Compounds under subclass 78 wherein a divalent chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is double bonded directly to the ring
    phosphorus.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/80
TXT Compounds under subclass 73 wherein the phosphorus containing ring also
    contains nitrogen as a ring member.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/81
TXT Compounds under subclass 80 wherein the phosphorus containing ring also
    contains carbon or chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium)
    as a ring member.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 558/82
TXT Compounds under subclass 73 wherein the phosphorus containing ring also
    contains carbon and chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium) as ring members.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/83
TXT Compounds under subclass 82 wherein the phosphorus containing ring contains
    at least two ring chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/84
TXT Compounds under subclass 83 wherein the ring phosphorus is attached
    directly to an acyclic nitrogen or to halogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 558/85
TXT Compounds under subclass 83 in which an acyclic divalent chalcogen (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is single bonded directly to the
    ring phosphorus.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/86
TXT Compounds under subclass 85 in which a divalent chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is double bonded directly to the ring
    phosphorus.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/87
TXT Processes under subclass 70 for the preparation of phosphorus ester
    compounds or for the treatment of these compounds.

    SEARCH THS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146,    for processes of purification or recovery of phosphorus esters.


CLS 558/88
TXT Processes under subclass 87 wherein there occurs transformation or
    rearrangement of the elements of a starting compound without the addition
    or removal of any elements.


CLS 558/89
TXT Processes under subclass 87 in which a phosphorus ester group is formed.

    (1)     Note.  See this class, subclass 70 for the definition of a
    phosphorus ester group and for the structure of the different phosphorus
    ester groups.


CLS 558/90
TXT Processes under subclass 89 wherein a reactant contains halogen attached
    directly to phosphorus by nonionic bonding.


CLS 558/91
TXT Processes under subclass 90 wherein an additional reactant contains a
    chalcogen containing hetero ring, wherein chalcogen is oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium.


CLS 558/92
TXT Processes under subclass 90 wherein an additional reactant contains a
    chalcogen containing hetero ring, wherein chalcogen is oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium.


CLS 558/93
TXT Processes under subclass 92 in which the phosphorus in the phosphorus
    containing reactant is attached directly to four or five halagens by
    nonionic bonding.


CLS 558/94
TXT Processes under subclass 92 in which the phosphorus in the phosphorus
    containing reactant is trivalent.


CLS 558/95
TXT Processes under subclass 92 in which the phosphorus in the phosphorus
    containing reactant is trivalent.


CLS 558/96
TXT Processes under subclass 95 in which a nitrogen containing compound is
    utilized.

    (1)     Note.  The nitrogen containing compound con be present as a
    catalyst, a proton acceptor, etc.


CLS 558/97
TXT Processes under subclass 95 wherein the trivalent phosphorus in converted
    into a pentavalent phosphorus.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for processes wherein the
    phosphorusis oxidized from a trivalent state to a pentavalent state and a
    phosphorus ester group is formed.


CLS 558/98
TXT Processes under subclass 92 in which the phosphorus in the posphorus
    containing reactant contains carbon bonded to phosphorus.


CLS 558/99
TXT Processes under subclass 92 in which the phosphorus in the phosphorus
    containing reactant containing divalent chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or telurium) single bonded directly to phosphorus.


CLS 558/100
TXT Processes under subclass 99 wherein a nitrogen containing compound is
    utilized.

    (1)     Note.  The nitrogen containing compound can be present as a
    catalyst, proton acceptor, etc.


CLS 558/101
TXT Processes under subclass 92 in which a nitrogen containing compound is
    utilized.

    (1)     Note.  The nitrogen containing compound can be present as a
    catalyst, promoter, proton acceptor, etc.


CLS 558/102
TXT Processes under subclass 92 in which a metal containing material is
    utilized.


CLS 558/103
TXT Processes under subclass 90 wherein an additional reactant contains a
    -C(=X)- group. wherein X is chalcocgen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium).


CLS 558/104
TXT Processes under subclass 89 in which phos- phorus in a phosphorus
    containing reactant is bonded directly to an -XH group, wherein X is
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or  tellurium) and wherein H of
    the -XH group may be replaced by substituted or unsubstituted ammonium, or
    by a Group IA or Group IIA light metal.


CLS 558/105
TXT Processes under subclass 104 wherein an additional reactant includes a
    three-membered hetero ring.


CLS 558/106
TXT Processes under subclass 104 wherein an additional reactant contains
    halogen bonded directly to carbon, which carbon may be single bonded to any
    element, but may be multiple bonded only to carbon.


CLS 558/107
TXT Processes under subclass 106 in which cyano or -C(=X)-, wherein X is
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), is attached
    indurectly to the halogen by acyclic nonionic bonding.


CLS 558/108
TXT Processes under subclass 104 wherein an additional reactant contains
    -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium).


CLS 558/109
TXT Processes under subclass 104 in which an additional reactant is an
    unsatruated hydrocarbon.


CLS 558/110
TXT Processes under subclass 104 wherein an additional reactant includes an
    alcoholic or phenolic -XH group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) and wherein H of the -XH group may be
    replaced by substituted or unsubstituted ammonium, or by a Group 1A or
    Group 11A light metal.


CLS 558/111
TXT Processes under subclass 104 in which an additional reactant is a diverse
    phosphorus containing compound.


CLS 558/112
TXT Processes under subclass 89 in which a reactant contains only phosphorus
    and sulfur.


CLS 558/113
TXT Processes under subclass 89 in which a reactant contains only phosphorus
    and oxygen.


CLS 558/114
TXT Processes under subclass 113 in which an additional reactant includes an
    alcoholic or phenolic -XH group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellrium) and wherein H of the -XH group may be
    replaced by substituted or unsubstituted ammonium, or by a Group 1A or 11A
    light metal.


CLS 558/115
TXT Processes under subclass 89 in which a trivalent phosphorus is converted
    into a pentavalent phosphorus.


CLS 558/116
TXT Processes under subclass 115 in which a reactant contains halogen and
    -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium), bonded directly to the same carbon.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for processes which include
    Perkow-type reactions wherein an alpha - halo coabonyl compound is utilized
    as reactant.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a process provided for herein is:


CLS 558/117
TXT Processes under subclass 89 in which a phosphorus ester is a reactant.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for transesterification processes
    wherein one, or more, of the ester groups in a phosphorus ester compound is
    replaced by another ester group.


CLS 558/118
TXT Processes under subclass 117 in which an additional reactant contains an
    alcoholic or a phenolic -XH group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) and wherein the H of the -XH group may be
    replaced by substituted or unsubstituted ammonium, or by a Group IA or
    Group IIA light metal.


CLS 558/119
TXT Processes under subclass 118 in which an alkyl group is bonded directly to
    the -XH group.


CLS 558/120
TXT Processes under subclass 117 in which hydrogen or metal is bonded directely
    to phosphorus in the phosphorus ester reactant.


CLS 558/121
TXT Processes under subclass 89 in which elemental phosphorus is a reactant.


CLS 558/122
TXT Processes under subclass 87 in which a trivalent phosphorus is converted
    into a pentavalent phosphorus.


CLS 558/123
TXT Processes under subclass 122 in which the reactant is molecular oxygen or
    elemental sulfur.

    (1)     Note.  Air is included herein.


CLS 558/124
TXT Processes under subclass 122 in which a reactant has halogen bonded
    directly to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for processes which include Arbuzov
    rearrangement reactions.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:



CLS 558/125
TXT Processes under subclass 124 in which the reactant contains carbon multiple
    bonded to another carbon.


CLS 558/126
TXT Processes under subclass 122 in which a reactant contains a -C(=X)-, group,
    wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).


CLS 558/127
TXT Processes under subclass 87 which include joining a direct linkage between
    a divalent chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) and
    each of two phosphori.


CLS 558/128
TXT Processes under subclass 127 in which a reactant contains halogen attached
    directly to phosphorus by nonionic bonding.


CLS 558/129
TXT Processes under subclass 87 in which the -0-0- group or the -S-S- group is
    formed, or processes in which compounds which contain the -O-O- group or
    the -S-S- group are utilized.


CLS 558/130
TXT Processes under subclass 87 which include forming the P-X-C(=X)- group,
    wherein the X's are the same or diverse chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium), and the phosphorus may be trivalent or pentavalent.


CLS 558/131
TXT Processes under subclass 87 wherein a P-XH group is formed from a
    phosphorus ester group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium), P is trivalent or pentavalent, and H of -XH may be
    replaced by substituted or unsubstituted ammonium or by a Group IA or IIA
    light metal.


CLS 558/132
TXT Processes under subclass 87 wherein a bond is formed between phosphorus and
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are processes wherein a phosphorus
    to sulfur bond is replaced by a phosphorus to oxygen bond, etc.


CLS 558/133
TXT Processes under subclass 87 wherein ammounium, substituted ammonium, or a
    Group IA or IIA light metal replaces the H of a P-XH group, wherein X is
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) and P is trivalent
    or pentavalent.


CLS 558/134
TXT Processes under subclass 87 in which an aldehyde or a ketone is a reactant.


CLS 558/135
TXT Processes under subclass 134 wherein a ketone or aldehyde (i.e., RCOR or
    RCHO) is employed as a reactant.


CLS 558/136
TXT Processes under subclass 134 in which a reactant utilized contains halogen
    bonded directly to carbon.


CLS 558/137
TXT Processes under  subclass 134 in which a reactant contains acyclic or
    alicyclic carbon to carbon unsaturation.


CLS 558/138
TXT Processes under subclass 87 which include forming a phosphorus to nitrogen
    bond.


CLS 558/139
TXT Processes under subclass 87 which include forming the -C(=X)NHH or -N=C=O
    group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium) and substitution may be made for hydrogen only.


CLS 558/140
TXT Processes under subclass 87 which include forming a nonionic phosphorus to
    halogen bond.


CLS 558/141
TXT Processes under subclass 87 which include halogenation of carbon.


CLS 558/142
TXT Processes under subclass 87 which include forming a carbon to carbon
    multiple bond.


CLS 558/143
TXT Processes under subclass 87 in which an oxirane ring containing compound is
    utilized.


CLS 558/144
TXT Processes under subclass 87 in which a reactant contains halogen or
    nitrogen attached directly to phosphorus by nonionic bonding.


CLS 558/145
TXT Processes under subclass 87 in which a reactant contains nitrogen attached
    indirectly to phosphorus by nonionic bonding.


CLS 558/146
TXT Processes under subclass 87 which include separating phosphorus esters from
    a reaction mixture or from impurities.


CLS 558/147
TXT Process under subclass 146 in which there are two or more phosphori in the
    compounds purified or recovered.


CLS 558/148
TXT Processes under subclass 146 in which products having halogen attached
    directly to the phosphorus by nonionic bonding are purified or recovered.


CLS 558/149
TXT Processes under subclass 146 which include an oxidation step as part of the
    purification or recovery process.


CLS 558/150
TXT Preocesses under subclass 146 in which a metal containing material is
    utilized or separated.


CLS 558/151
TXT Compounds under subclass 70 which contain oxygen single bonded to oxygen or
    sulfur single bonded to sulfur.


CLS 558/152
TXT Compounds under subclass 70 wherein the same chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is bonded to more than one phosphorus.


CLS 558/153
TXT Compounds unde subclass 70 which include the P-X-C(=X)- group wherein the
    X's are the same or diverse chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    telluriurium), and the phosphorus is trivalent or pentavalent.


CLS 558/154
TXT Compounds under subclass 70 wherein a hydrazine, or a substituted
    hydrazine, group is attached directly or indirectly to the phosphorus by
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein  is:

    (2)     Note.  The hydrazine group is HHNNH-. Replacement of one or more
    hygrogens affords a substituted hydrazine group.


CLS 558/155
TXT Compounds under subclass 70 which contain two or more phosphori attached
    indirectly to each other by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein  is:


CLS 558/156
TXT Compounds under subclass 155 which contain at least two phosphorus atoms
    that are part of hosphorus ester groups.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/157
TXT Compounds under subclass 156 wherein nitrogen is bonded directly to
    phosphorus.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/158
TXT Compounds under subclass 156 wherein phosphorus is attached indirectly to
    nitrogen by acyclic nonionic bonding.


CLS 558/159
TXT Compounds under subclass 158 which contain the -C(=X)- group, wherein X is
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), bonded directly
    to the nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/160
TXT Compounds under subclass 156 wherein a -C(=X)- group, wherein X is
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), is attached
    indirectly to phosphorus by acyclic nonionic bonding.


CLS 558/161
TXT Compounds under subclass 156 wherein a divalent chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is double bonded directly to a pentavalent
    phosphorus.

    (1)     Note. An example of a compound provided  for  herein  is:


CLS 558/162
TXT Compound under subclass 161 in which plural phosphori are attached
    indirectly to each other by a benzene ring or by a chain which includes a
    benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein  is:


CLS 558/163
TXT Compounds under subclass 161 in which plural phosphori are attached
    indirectly to each other by an acyclic chain, which chain contains
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) as a chain member.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein  is:


CLS 558/164
TXT Compounds under subclass 163 in which there are two or more chalcogens
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) in the acyclic chain.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein  is:


CLS 558/165
TXT Compounds under subclass 164 wherein a divalent chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), which is bonded directly to two carbons or
    to carbon and hydrogen, is attached indirectly to phosphorus by acyclic
    nonionic bonding, wherein the hydrogen may be replaced by substituted or
    unsubstituted ammounium, or by a Group IA or IIA light metal.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 558/166
TXT Compounds under subclass 70 wherein the phosphorus is attached indirectly
    to nitrogen by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein  is:


CLS 558/167
TXT Compounds under subclass 166 in which the nitrogen is part of a cyano or an
    isocyano group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound              provided  for  herein
    is:


CLS 558/168
TXT Compounds under subclass 167 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the phosphorus by acyclic
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein:


CLS 558/169
TXT Compounds under subclass 166 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the phosphorus by acyclic
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note. An example of a compound provided  for  herein  is:


CLS 558/170
TXT Compounds under subclass 169 in which a -C(=X)- group, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium), is bonded directly to the nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound porvided  for  herein  is:


CLS 558/171
TXT Compounds under subclass 170 wherein the phosphorus is bonded directly to
    nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein  is:


CLS 558/172
TXT Compounds under subclass 170 in which the -C(=X)- is part of a -C(=X)X-
    group, wherein the X's may be the same or diverse chalcogens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein  is:


CLS 558/173
TXT Compounds under subclass 170 in which nitrogen is bonded directly to
    chalcogen or to an additional -C(=X)- group.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 558/174
TXT Compounds under subclass 170 wherein the same chalcogen is bonded directly
    to two carbons.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 558/175
TXT Compounds under subclass 169 in which the nitrogen is bonded directly to
    chalcogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein  is:


CLS 558/176
TXT Compounds under subclass 166 which contain nitrogen double bonded to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein  is:



CLS 558/177
TXT Compounds under subclass 70 in which chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the phosphorus by acyclic
    nonionic bonding.


CLS 558/178
TXT Compounds under subclass 177 wherein the chalcogen, X, is in a -C(=X)-
    group.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 558/179
TXT Compounds under subclass 178 in which the

    -C-(=X)- is part of a -C(=X)X- group, wherein the X's are the same or
    diverse chalcogens.


CLS 558/180
TXT Compounds under subclass 179 in which the phosphorus is attached indirectly
    to two or more -C(=X)X- groups by acyclic nonionic bonding, wherein the X's
    are the same or diverse chalcogens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is malathion,
    i.e.,


CLS 558/181
TXT Compounds under subclass 179 in which the carbon of the -C(=X) (X)- group
    is bonded directly to the phosphorus or to nitrogen, which nitrogen is
    bonded directly to the phosphorus.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 558/182
TXT Compounds under subclass 179 wherein the phosphorus is attached directly or
    indirectly by acyclic nonionic bonding to an acyclic carbon chain
    containing carbon to carbon unsaturation.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 558/183
TXT Compounds under subclass 177 wherein plural carbons are bonded directly to
    the chalcogen, which chalcogen is attached indirectly to the phosphorus by
    acyclic nonionic bonding.


CLS 558/184
TXT Compounds under subclass 183 wherein the chalcogen is sulfur and is part or
    a -S(O)- or of a -S(=O) (=O)- group.


CLS 558/185
TXT Compounds under subclass 183 wherein the phosphorus is bonded directly to
    nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein  is:



CLS 558/186
TXT Compounds under subclass 183 wherein the phosphorus is attached indirectly
    by acyclic nonionic bonding to plural ether oxygens or plural thioether
    sulfurs.


CLS 558/187
TXT Compounds under subclass 183 wherein an acyclic carbon and a benzene ring
    are bonded directly to the chalcogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein  is:


CLS 558/188
TXT Compounds under subclass 183 wherein the phosphorus is attached directly or
    indirectly to halogen by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 558/189
TXT Compounds under subclass 183 wherein the phosphorus is bonded directly to
    carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/190
TXT Compounds under subclass 70 wherein the phosphorus is attached indirectly
    to nitrogen by nonionic    bounding.


CLS 558/191
TXT Compounds under subclass 190 wherein the phosphorus is attached directly to
    nitrogen or halogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 558/192
TXT Compounds under subclass 190 wherein the nitrogen is part of a cyano group
    or of an isocyano group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



    (2)     Note.  The isocyano group is usually represented structurally as
    -N=C.  It is also sometimes shown by the structure -N=C.


CLS 558/193
TXT Compounds under subclass 190 in which a benzene ring is bonded directly to
    a nitro group.


CLS 558/194
TXT Compounds under subclass 70 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the phosphorus by
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/195
TXT Compounds under subclass 194 in which the phosphorus is attached directly
    to nitrogen or halogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 558/196
TXT Compounds under subclass 194 in which the chalcogen is part of a -S(=O)- or
    of a

    -S(=OO)- or of a -S(=O) (O=) group.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:





CLS 558/197
TXT Compounds under subclass 194 wherein a benzene ring is bonded directly to
    ether oxygen or thioether sulfur.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 558/198
TXT Compounds under subclass 194 wherein the chalcogen, X, is in a -C(=X)-
    group.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 558/199
TXT Compounds under subclass 70 wherein the phosphorus is bonded directly to
    nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein  is:


CLS 558/200
TXT Compounds under subclass 199 in which the phosphorus and a benzene ring are
    bonded directly to the same chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein  is:


CLS 558/201
TXT Compounds under subclass 199 wherein the phosphorus is attached indirectly
    by acyclic nonionic bonding to an acyclic carbon chain containing carbon to
    carbon unsaturation.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein  is:


CLS 558/202
TXT Compounds under subclass 70 in which the phosphorus is attached directly to
    halogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein  is:


CLS 558/203
TXT Compounds under subclass 70 wherein the phosphorus is attached indirectly
    to halogen by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 558/204
TXT Compounds under subclass 203 in which plural fluorines are bonded to an
    acyclic carbon or to an acyclic carbon chain.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 558/205
TXT Compounds under subclass 203 which contain carbon multiple bonded to
    another carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 558/206
TXT Compounds under subclass 205 wherein the carbon to carbon unsaturation is
    in a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein  is:


CLS 558/207
TXT Compounds under subclass 70 in which a divalent chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is double bonded directly to the phosphorus.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein  is:


CLS 558/208
TXT Compounds under subclass 207 wherein the phosphorus is single bonded
    directly to each of three divalent chalcogens, which may be the same or
    diverse.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 558/209
TXT Compounds under subclass 208 in which one of the single bonded chalcogens
    is bonded directly to an allcyclic ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein  is:


CLS 558/210
TXT Compounds under subclass 208 wherein one of the single bonded chalcogens is
    bonded directly to a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein  is:


CLS 558/211
TXT Compounds under subclass 210 wherein each of the three single bonded
    chalcogens is bonded directly to a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein  is:


CLS 558/212
TXT Compounds under subclass 210 in which the benzene ring is bonded directly
    the three of more halogens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein  is:


CLS 558/213
TXT Compounds under subclass 208 which contain acyclic carbon multiple bonded
    directly to acyclic carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein  is:


CLS 558/214
TXT Compounds under subclass 207 wherein the phosphorus is single bonded to
    each of two divalent chalcogens, which may be the same or diverse.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein  is:


CLS 558/215
TXT Compounds under subclass 214 wherein one of the single bonded chalcogens is
    bonded directly to a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein  is:


CLS 558/216
TXT Compounds under subclass 214 wherein the phosphorus is bonded directly to a
    benzene ring.


CLS 558/217
TXT Compounds under subclass 214 which contain acyclic carbon multiple bonded
    directly to acyclic carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein  is:


CLS 558/218
TXT Compounds under subclass 70 in which three divalent chalcogens (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfor, selenium, or tellurium), which may be the same or diverse,
    are single bonded directly to trivalent phosphorus.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 558/230
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 which contain the thiocarboxylate
    group, -C(=X)X-, wherein the X's are the same or diverse chalcogens (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) with at least one X being sulfur
    and wherein the single bonded X is bonded directly to an additional carbon,
    which

            carbon may be single bonded to any atom, but may be multiple bonded
    only to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein  is:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    206-225 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    halogen, chalcogen, nitrogen, phosphorus, or metals.


CLS 558/231
TXT Compounds under subclass 230 in which the thiocarboxylate group is attached
    directly or indirectly to phosphorus by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 558/232
TXT Compounds under subclass 230 in which the carbon of the thiocarboxylate
    group is bonded directly to nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 558/233
TXT Compounds under subclass 232 in which the nitrogen is further attached
    directly to chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium),
    nitrogen or additional -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen, by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:



CLS 558/234
TXT Compounds under subclass 232 in which the thiocarboxylate group is a
    -C(=S)O- group.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 558/235
TXT Compounds under subclass 232 in which the thiocarboxylate group is a
    -C(=S)S group.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 558/236
TXT Compounds under subclass 235 in which there is nitrogen or additional
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) attached
    indirectly to the nitrogen by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 558/237
TXT Compounds under subclass 236 in which there is more than one HHN-C(=S)S-
    group, wherein substitution may be made for hydrogen only.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein  is:


CLS 558/238
TXT Compounds under subclass 236 in which cyano or -C(=X)-, wherein X is
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), is attached
    indirectly to the nitrogen by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 558/239
TXT Compounds under subclass 232 in which nitrogen or additional chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to
    the nitrogen by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for   herein  are:


CLS 558/240
TXT Compounds under subclass 239 wherein the chalcogen is in a -C(-X)- group, X
    being the chalcogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein  is:


CLS 558/241
TXT Compounds under subclass 232 wherein the nitrogen or the sulfur of a
    -C(=O)S- group is bonded directly to a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein  is:


CLS 558/242
TXT Compounds under subclass 232 wherein the nitrogen is attached indirectly to
    a benzene ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 558/243
TXT Compounds under subclass 230 which have the thiocarboxylate   group  as
    part   of   an -X-

    C(=X)X- group, wherein the X's are the same or diverse chalcogens, (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), at least one of the X's is sulfur,
    and one of the single bonded X's is bonded directly to carbon, which carbon
    may be single bonded to any atom but may be multiple bonded only to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 558/244
TXT Compounds under subclass 243 in which two -C(=X)- groups, wherein X is
    chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) are bonded
    directly to the same chalcogen or to a chain of chalcogens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein  is:


CLS 558/245
TXT Compounds under subclass 243 wherein the

    -X-C(=X)X- group is a -S-C(=S)O- group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein  is:


CLS 558/246
TXT Compounds under subclass 245 in which the

    -S-C(=S)O- group is indirectly attached to nitrogen or chalcogen (e.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurlum) by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 558/247
TXT Compounds under subclass 245 wherein the

    -S-C(=S)O- group is bonded directly to one alkyl group and to hydrogen,
    which hydrogen may be replaced by substituted or unsubstituted ammonium or
    by a Group IA or IIA light metal.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 558/248
TXT Compounds under subclass 243 wherein the -X-C(=X)X- group is an -S-C(=O)O-
    group.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 558/249
TXT Compounds under subclass 230 in which halogen is bonded to the carbon of
    the thiocarboxylate group.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 558/250
TXT Compounds under subclass 230 wherein the

    -C(=X)X- grounp is -C(=O)S-.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 558/251
TXT Compounds under subclass 250 which contain more than one -C(=O)S- group.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 558/252
TXT Compounds under subclass 250 wherein a chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) is indirectly attached to the-C(=OS- group by
    acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein  is:


CLS 558/253
TXT Compounds under subclass 252 wherein the chalcogen is in a -C(=X)- group, X
    being chalcogen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 558/254
TXT Compounds under subclass 253 wherein the -C(=X)- group is bonded directly
    to nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein  is:


CLS 558/255
TXT Compounds under subclass 253 wherein the

    -C(=X)- is part of a -C(=O)O- group.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 558/256
TXT Compounds under subclass 250 wherein the

    -C(=O)S- group is attached indirectly to nitrogen by acyclic nonionic
    bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Example of a compound provided  for  herein  is:


CLS 558/257
TXT Compounds under subclass 250 wherein the

    -C(=O)S- group is atached directly or indirectly to a benzene ring by
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 558/260
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 which contain the -O-C(=O)O- group
    bonded directly to at least one carbon, which carbon may be single bonded
    to any atom but may be multiple bonded only to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 558/261
TXT Products under subclass 260 wherein the carbonate ester is mixed with a
    preserving or stabilizing agent whose sole function is to prevent physical
    or chemical change.


CLS 558/262
TXT Compounds under subclass 260 wherein the -O-C(=O)O- group is attached
    directly to nitrogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 558/263
TXT Compounds under subclass 260 wherein the -O-C(=O)-O- group is attached
    directly to an additional oxygen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein  is:


CLS 558/264
TXT Compounds under subclass 263 wherein carbonyl, -C(=O), is bonded directly
    to the oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein  is:


CLS 558/265
TXT Compounds under subclass 260 which contain more than one -O-C(=O)O- group,
    which -O- C(=)O- groups are indirectly attached to each other by nonionic
    bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein  is:


CLS 558/266
TXT Compounds under subclass 265 wherein an additional chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium) is attached indirectly to one of the
    -O-C(=O)O- groups by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 558/267
TXT Compounds under subclass 266 wherein the chalcogen is in a -C(=X)- group, X
    bening the chalcogen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 558/268
TXT Compounds under subclass 265 wherein one of the -O-C(=O)O- groups is
    attached directly or indirectly to a benzene ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 558/269
TXT Compounds under subclass 268 in which the benzene ring is attached directly
    or indirectly to nitrogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 558/270
TXT Compounds under subclass 260 wherein the

    -O-C(=O)O- group is bonded directly to a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 558/271
TXT Compounds under subclass 270 wherein the benzene ring is bonded directly to
    an additional chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 558/272
TXT Compounds under subclass 270 wherein the benzene ring is bonded directly to
    nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 558/273
TXT Compounds under subclass 270 wherein the benzene ring is attached
    indirectly to nitrogen or to an additional chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 558/274
TXT Compounds under subclass 270 wherein the

    -O-C(=O)O- group is bonded directly to two benzene rings.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 558/275
TXT Compounds under subclass 260 wherein the

    -O-C(=O)O group is attached indirectly to a benzene ring by nonionic
    bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 558/276
TXT Compounds under subclass 260 wherein the -O-C(=O)O- group is attached
    indirectly to nitrogen or to chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium) by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 558/277
TXT Compound under subclass 260 which contain two alkyl groups, identical or
    diverse, bonded directly to the -O-C(=O)O- group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein  is:


CLS 558/280
TXT Compounds un Class 260, subclass 350 wherein a halocarbonate group (i.e.,
    halo- C(=O)O-) is bonded directly to carbon, which carbon may be single
    bonded to any atom, but may be multiple bonded only to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses 206
    and 213-225 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste
    containing halogen, chalcogen, nitrogen, or metals.


CLS 558/281
TXT Compounds under subclass 280 which contain more than one halo-C(=O)O- group
    attached indirectly to each other by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 558/282
TXT Compounds under subclass 280 wherein the halo-C(=O)O- group is attached
    directly or indirectly to a benzene ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 558/283
TXT Compounds under subclass 280 wherein the halo-C(=O)O- group is attached
    indirectly to halogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 558/285
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 wherein boron and carbon are single
    bonded to the same divalent sulfur, which carbon may be single bonded to
    any atom, but may be multiple bonded only to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 558/286
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 wherein boron and carbon are single
    bonded directly to the same oxygen, which carbon may be single bonded to
    any atom, but may be multiple bonded only to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:



CLS 558/287
TXT Compounds under subclass 286 which contain a ring having boron and oxygen
    as ring members.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 558/288
TXT Compounds under subclass 287 which contain a ring having carbon, boron and
    oxygen as ring members.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 558/289
TXT Compounds under subclass 288 which contain a ring having nitrogen, carbon,
    boron and oxygen as ring members.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 558/290
TXT Compounds under subclass 288 which contain plural rings, each having boron,
    carbon and oxygen as ring members.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 558/291
TXT Compounds under subclass 288 wherein a boron is attached directly to three
    oxygens by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 558/292
TXT Compounds under subclass 286 wherein plural acyclic borons are attached
    directly or indirectly to each other by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 558/293
TXT Compounds under subclass 286 wherein a boron is attached directly to three
    oxygens by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 558/294
TXT Compounds under subclass 293 wherein boron is attached indirectly to a
    benzene ring by nonionic bonding

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein  is:


CLS 558/295
TXT Compounds under subclass 293 wherein boron is attached indirectly to
    nitrogen or chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, suldur, selenium, or tellirium) by
    acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 558/296
TXT Compounds under subclass 293 wherein a boron is bonded directly to three
    oxygens, each oxygen additionally bonded to an alkyl group.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 558/297
TXT Processes under subclass 286 which utilize boric oxide or an inorganic
    boric acid for preparing trialkyl borates.

    (1)     Note.  Boric oxide is synonymous with boric anhydride.


CLS 558/298
TXT Compounds under subclass 286 wherein boron is bonded directly to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 558/299
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 which are nitrile oxides or nitrile
    imines, i.e., compounds wherein cyano, -C=N, is bonded directly to carbon,
    which carbon may be single bonded to any element but maybe multiple bonded
    only to carbon, and wherein the nitrogen of the cyano group is bonded
    directly to oxygen or to nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    215-222 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    chalcogen or nitrogen.


CLS 558/300
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 wherein nitrogen or phosphorus is
    double bonded and cyano, -C=N, is single bonded to the same carbon atom.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    215-222 for the destruction or containment of organic hazardous or toxic
    waste containing oxygen or nitrogen.


CLS 558/301
TXT Compounds under subclass 300 wherin the double bonded nitrogen is bonded
    directly to oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/302
TXT Compounds under Class 360, subclass 350 wherein an isonitrile group,
    usually represented as -N=C, is bonded directly to carbon, which carbon may
    be single bonded to any atom but may be multiple bonded only to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Compounds containing the isonitrile group can also be named
    as isocyanides or as carbylamines.

    (2)     Note.  The isonitrile group can be written differently from -N=C;
    it can, for example, be written as -N=C.

    (3)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    220-222 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    nitrogen.


CLS 558/303
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 which are nitriles, i.e., compounds
    wherein cyan, -C=N, is bonded directly to carbon, which carbon may be
    single bonded to any atom but may be multiple bonded only to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for  herein  are:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    206-225 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing,
    halogen, chalcogen, nitrogen, phosphorus, or metals.


CLS 558/304
TXT Products under subclass 303 which contain a nitrile in admixture with a
    preservative or stabilizing ageent whose sole function is to prevent
    physical or chemical change.


CLS 558/305
TXT Products under subclass 304 wherein the preserved or stabilized nitrile
    contains acyclic or alicyclic carbon to carbon unsaturation.


CLS 558/306
TXT Products under subclass 305 wherein the preservative or stabilizing agent
    is an organic compound which contains nitrogen.


CLS 558/307
TXT Products under subclass 305 wherein the preservative or stabilizing agent
    contains sulfur or phosphorus.


CLS 558/308
TXT Processes under subclass 303 which involve formation of the cyano (-C=N)
    group.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of processes provided for herein are:  (a)
    conversion of methylaine to acetonitrile by heating with a transition metal
    catalyst in the presence of hydrogen, and  (b) preparation of acetonitrile
    by contacting nitropropane with platinum under vapor phase conditions.

    (2)     Note.  For processes wherein nitriles are formed by introducing a
    cyano group into an organic compound via reaction with, inter alia,
    inorganic cyanides, search this class, subclasses 332+.


CLS 558/309
TXT Processes under subclass 308 wherein there is utilized a hetero ring
    containing reactant.

    (1)     Note. Examples of precesses provided for herein are:  (a) the
    preparation of 1-cyano-1, 3-butadiene by the dehydration of
    tetrahydrofuramide, and (b) the preparation of isobutyronitrile and
    methacyrlonitrile by the high temperature, chromia gel catalyzed reaction
    of ammonia and isobutylene oxide.


CLS 558/310
TXT Processes under subclass 309 wherein oxygen, or nitrogen, and carbonyl
    carbon are adjacent ring members of  the hetero ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of processes provided for herein are:  (a) the
    production of hydroxy capronitrile by the reastion of epsilon caprolactone
    with ammonia in vapor phase using zinc oxide catalyst, and (b) the
    production of phthalonitrile by catalytic reaction of ammonia and
    phthalimide.


CLS 558/311
TXT Processes under subclass 308 wherein a carboxylic acid, or an amide,
    anhydride, ester, halide, or salt thereof is utilized as a reactant.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a process provided for herein is: The
    production of adiponitrile by vapor phase reaction of adipic acid and
    ammonia in the presence of a dehydration agent.


CLS 558/312
TXT Processes under subclass 311 wherein there is utilized a formamide, a heavy
    metal salt, an alumunum halide, an organophosphorus compound, an
    organosilicon compound, or a compound containing nitrogen and sulfur.


CLS 558/313
TXT Processes under subclass 311 wherein the  reaction is conducted in liquid
    phase.

    (1)     Note.  An example of process provided for herein is:  the
    preparation of malononitrile by reacting cyanoacetamide with phosphorus
    oxychloride and an alkaline earth metal salt in the presence of ethylene
    dichloride solvent.


CLS 558/314
TXT Processes under subclass 308 wherein there is utilized nitryl halide,
    nitrosyl halide, or compounds containing one of the groups HCH=NO- or HHNO-
    (wherein substitution may be made for hydrogen only.)

    (1)     Note.  Nitryl halide is NO2X, where X is halogen.

    (2)     Note.  Nitrosyl halide is NOX, wherein X is halogen.

    (3)     Note.  Examples of compounds containing the group HCH=NO- are
    oximes, oxime ethers and oxime esters.

    (4)     Note.  Examples of compounds containing the group HHNO- are
    hydroxylamine, hydroxylamine salts, hydroxyylamine ethers and hydroxylamine
    esters.


CLS 558/315
TXT Processes under subclass 308 wherein there is employed as a reactant an
    aldehyde, a ketone, or a compound having nitrogen double bonded to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of processes provided for herein are:  (a) the
    production of acetonitrile and acrylonitrile by reacting acrolein with
    ammonia and oxygen in the presence of an ammoxidation catalyst, and (b) the
    production of a saturated aliphatic nitrile from an unsaturated aliphatic
    primary imine by reacting the imine with excess ammonia in the presence of
    a dehydrogenation-hydrogenation catalyst.


CLS 558/316
TXT Processes under subclass 308 wherein there is employed as a reactant a
    compound having acyclic or clicyclic carbon bonded directly to -OH (wherein
    H of -OH may be replaced by substituted or unsubstituted ammonium, or by a
    Group IA or IIA light metal).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a process provided for herein is the
    production of benzonitrile by reacting benzyl alcohol and ammonia in the
    presence of a catalyst at high temperature.


CLS 558/317
TXT Processes under subclass 308 wherein there is utilized and azide or a
    nitrogen oxide.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of processes provided for herein are:  (a) the
    production of acrylonitrile by the catalytic reaction of nitric oxide with
    propylene, and (b) the production of benzonitrile by the reaction of benzal
    chloride with sodium azine in the presence of mineral acid.


CLS 558/318
TXT Processes under subclass 317 wherein there is utilitzed ammonia.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of processes provided for herein are:  (a) the
    production of acetonitrile by the reaction of carbon monoxide, ammonia and
    hydrogen, and (b) the production of acetonitrile by the vapor phase
    reaction of propane and ammonia in the presence of cobalt molybdate.


CLS 558/319
TXT Processes under subclass 318 wherein there is also utilized molecular
    oxygen of a molecular containing gas.

    (1)     Note.  Air is included within the scope of molecular oxygen
    containing gas.

    (2)     Note.  Ammoxidation is the art term for the type reaction
    encompassed by this subclass and its indents.

    (3)     Note.  Examples of processes provided for herein are:  (a) the
    production of acrylonitrile by reaction of propane, ammonia and oxygen in
    the presence of a catalyst, and (b) the production of adiponitrile by
    reaction of cyclohexane, ammonia and oxygen in the presence of a catalyst.


CLS 558/320
TXT Processes under subclass 319 wherein a reactant contains acyclic or
    alicyclic carbon to carbon unsaturation.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a process provided for herein is the
    production of acrylonitrile by the reaction of propylene, oxygen and
    ammonia in the presence of a catalyst.


CLS 558/321
TXT Processes under 320 wherein there is utilized a material that contains
    niobium, tantalum, silver, sulfur, ruthenium, rhodium, palladium, osmium,
    iridium or platinum.

    (1)     Note.  The elements listed above are generally present as
    components of catalysts.


CLS 558/322
TXT Processes undersubclass 320 wherein there is utilized a material that
    contains tellurium.


CLS 558/323
TXT Processes under subclass 320 wherein there is utilized a material that
    contans molybdenum.


CLS 558/324
TXT Processes under subclass 323 wherein there is utilized a material that
    contains bismuth.


CLS 558/325
TXT Processes under subclass 320 wherein there is utilized a material that
    contains antimony.


CLS 558/326
TXT Processes under subclass 319 wherein there is utilized a reactant that
    contains a benzene ring.


CLS 558/327
TXT Processes under subclass 319 wherein there is utilized a reactant that
    contains a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a process provided for herein is the
    production of muconitrile by the reaction of benzene, ammonia and oxygen in
    the presence of a catalyst.


CLS 558/328
TXT Processes under subclass 327 wherein there is utilized a material that
    contains an alkali metal.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a process provided for herein is the
    production of dicyanonaphthalene by the reaction of di-lower alkyl
    naphthalene, ammonia and oxygen is the presence of a supported akali-metal
    vanadium bronze catalyst.


CLS 558/329
TXT Processes under subclass 318 wherein the product of the process contains a
    denzene ring bonded directly to cyano.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a process provided for herein is:  the
    production of o-aminobenzonitrile by the reaction of oa-nitrotoluene and
    ammonia in the presence of silica gel.


CLS 558/330
TXT Processes under subclass 318 wherein an acyclic or alicyclic carbon to
    carbon double bond is present in a reactant.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a process provided for herein is:  the
    production of acetonitrile by the high temperature reaction of ethylene and
    ammonia in the presence of iron nitride.


CLS 558/331
TXT Processes under subclss 303 wherein the reaction that occurs is the
    condensation of plural molecules of HCN to produce diaminomaleonitrile.


CLS 558/332
TXT Processes under subclass 303 wherein cyano is bonded to carbon by the
    reaction of an organic compound with an inorganic cyanide, such as HCN,
    cyanogen, cyanogen chioride, metal cyanide, ammonium cyanide, etc.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a process provided for herein is:  the
    production of acetonitrile by reaction of acetone and cyanogen in the
    presence of activated alumina.

    (2)     Note.  The inorganic cyanides listed above are considered inorganic
    by reason of their classification in Class 423.


CLS 558/333
TXT Processes under subclass 332 wherein a carbon to carbon triple bond is
    present in the organic compound.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a process provided for herein is:  the
    production of acrylonitrile by the vapor phase reaction of acetylene and
    HCN in the presence of zinc oxide.


CLS 558/334
TXT Processes unde subclass 333 conducted in liquid phase.


CLS 558/335
TXT Processes under subclass 332 wherein an acyclic or clicyclic carbon to
    carbon double bond is present in the organic compound.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a process provided for herein is:  the
    production of propionitrile by the reaction of ethylene and HCN in the
    presence of nickel cyanide.


CLS 558/336
TXT Processes under subclass 335 wherein there is utilized cyanogen halide or
    cyanogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a process provided for herein is:  the
    production of betachloropropionitrile by the reaction of ethylene with
    cyanogen chloride.


CLS 558/337
TXT Processes under subclass 335 wherein the organic campound contains carbon
    bonded directly to halogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a process provided for herein is:  the
    production of 1,4-dicyano-2-butene by the reaction of 1,4-dihalo-2-butene
    with hydrogen cyanide in the presence of a catalyst.


CLS 558/338
TXT Processes under subclass 335 wherein there is utilized an organic material
    that contains (1) nickel, and (2) phosphorus, arsenic, or antimony.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a process provided for herein is:  the
    production of adiponitrile by the reaction of 3-pentenenitrile and HCH in
    the presence of


CLS 558/339
TXT Processes under subclass 335 wherein there is employed a material that
    contains cobalt, copper, silver, or gold.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a process provided for herein is:  the
    production of 3-pentene-nitrile by the reaction of butadiene and HCN in the
    presence of cuprous halide catalyst.


CLS 558/340
TXT Processes under subclass 335 wherein there is employed a material that
    contains ruthenium, rhodium, palladium, osmium, iridium or platinum.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a process provided for herein is:  the
    production of propionitrile by the reaction of ethylene and hydrogen
    cyanide in the presence of rhodium.


CLS 558/341
TXT Processes under subclass 335 wherein a carbonyl, -C(=O)-, is present in the
    organic compound.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a process provided for herein is:  the
    production of 3-cyano-propionamide by the reaction of acrylamide and
    hydrocyanic acid in the presence of alkali metal cyanide.


CLS 558/342
TXT Processes under subclass 332 wherein cyano replaces halogen bonded directly
    to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a process provided for herein is:  the
    production of acrylonitrile by the reaction of 1,2-dichhloroethane with
    sodium cyanide.


CLS 558/343
TXT Processes under subcvlass 342 wherein cyano replaces halogen bonded
    directly to a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a process provided for herein is:  the
    production of terephthaloitrile by the reaction of p-dibromobenzene with
    HCN in the presence of nickel cyanide on alumina.


CLS 558/344
TXT Processes under subclass 342 wherein there is utiltized, other than as a
    reactant, an organic compound of nitrogen, phosphorus, arsenic, antimony or
    bismuth.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a process provided for herein is:  the
    production of 4-chlorobutyronitrile by the reaction of
    1-chloro-3-bromopropane with ammonium cyanide in the presence of
    cetyltrimethyl ammonium bromide phase transfer catalyst.


CLS 558/345
TXT Processes under subclass 332 wherein the inorganic cyanide is reacted with
    (1) an aldehyde, and (2) a carboxylic acid halide or a carboxylic acid
    anhydride.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a process provided for herein is:


CLS 558/346
TXT Precesses under subclass 332 wherein the inorganic cyanide is reacted with
    (1) an aldehyde or a ketone, and (2) ammonia or a substituted ammonia.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a process provided for herein is:


CLS 558/347
TXT Processes under subclass 332 wherein the inorganic cyanide is reacted with
    a hetero ring containing compound.

    (1)     Note.An example of a process provided for herein is:


CLS 558/348
TXT Processes under subclass 332 wherein cyano replaces hydrogen bonded
    directly to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a process provided for herein is:  the
    production of acetonitrile by the reaction of methane and cyanogen chloride.


CLS 558/349
TXT Processes under subclass 348 wherein cyano replaces hydrogen bonded
    directly to a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of prosess provided for herein is:  the
    production of phthalonitrile by the reaction of benxonitrile and HCN in the
    presence of a tungsten catalyst.


CLS 558/350
TXT Processes under subclass 332 wherein cyano replace (1) oxygen single bonded
    to carbon, or (2) nitrogen single bonded to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of processes provided for  herein are:


CLS 558/351
TXT Processes under subclass 332 wherein cyano is attached directly to the
    carbonyl carbon of an aldehyde or ketone.

    (1)     Note.  The carbonyl group, -C(=O)-, does not remain as such in the
    reaction product.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of processes provided for  herein  are:


CLS 558/352
TXT Processes under subclass 332 wherein th inorganic cyanide is reacted with a
    carboxylic acid, a carboxylic acid halide, a carboxylic acid anhydride, or
    a compound containing nitrogen double bonded to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of processes provided for  herein  are:


CLS 558/353
TXT Processes under subclass 303 wherein carbon monoxide is untiltized as a
    reactant.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a process provided for herein is:  the
    production of betaformylpropionitrile by the reaction of acrylonitrile with
    a mixed gas consisting of hydrogen and carbon monoxide in the prosence of
    cobalt carbonyl.


CLS 558/354
TXT Processes under subclass 303 wherein compounds having an asymmetric carbon
    are racemized or opticaly resolved, or wherein such compounds are made to
    undergo inversion of optical configuration.


CLS 558/355
TXT Processes under subclass wherein there occurs transformation or
    rearrangement of the elements of a starting compound without the addition
    or removal of any elements.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of processes provided for herein are:  (1) the
    catalytic isomerization of 2-methyl-3- butenenitrile to 3-pentenenitrile,
    (2) isomerizing 3-pentenenitrile to 4- pentenenitrile, and (3) isomerizing
    trans-2-penteneitrile to cis-2- pentenenitrile.


CLS 558/356
TXT Processes under subclass 355 wherein the starting compound that is
    isomerized contains plural cyano groups.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a process provided for herein is:  the
    production of 1, 4-dicyano-1-butene by catalytic isomerization of 1,
    4-dicyano-2-botene.


CLS 558/357
TXT Processes under subclass 303 wherein two organic reactants combine in such
    a way that a carbon of one reactant bonds directly to a carbon of the other
    reactant.

    (1)     Note.  For processes where the two organic reactants are plural
    molecules of identical nitrile reactants, see this class, subclasses 360+.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a process provided for herein is:


CLS 558/358
TXT Processes under subclass 357 wherein a free radical reaction occurs, or an
    epoxy compound is utilized.

    (1)     Note.  A reaction shall be considered free radical, for purposes of
    this subclass, if it is stated to be free radical in nature, or if it is
    catalyzed by a material known or stated to promote free radical reaction.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of processes provided for herein are:  (1) the
    production of allyl cyanide by the reaction of ethylene oxide with
    acetonitrile, and (2)


CLS 558/359
TXT Processes under subclass 357 wherein halogen is lost, during the reaction,
    from each of the carbons that form the carbons that form the carbon to
    carbon bond.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a process provided for herein is:


CLS 558/360
TXT Processes under subclass 357 wherein the carbon to carbon bond forms
    between carebons of plural molecules of identical nitrile reactants.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a process provided for herein is: the
    production of succinonitrile by dehydrodimerizing acetonitrile in the
    presence of lead oxide.


CLS 558/361
TXT Processes under subclass 360 wherein the nitrile reactant contains carbon
    to carbon unsaturation and is acyclic.

    (1)     Note.  An amalgam is an alloy of mercury.

    (2)     Note.  The art terms often used for the type reactions provided for
    herein are "reductive dimerization" or "hydrodimerization."


CLS 558/362
TXT Processes under subclasses 361, which employ an amalgam.

    (1)     Note.  An amalgam is an alloy of mercury with another metal or
    other metals.


CLS 558/363
TXT Processes under subclass 361 wherein there is utilized an organic
    phosphorus compound.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a process provided for herein is:  the
    production of 2- methyleneglutaronitrile by the dimerization of
    acrylonitrile in the presence of tricyclohexylphosphine.


CLS 558/364
TXT Processes under subclass 361 wherein there is utilized a material that
    contains aluminum or a metal having a specitic gravity greater than four.

    (1)     Note.  Arsenic is considered a metal.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a process provided for herein is the
    dimerization of acrylonitrile to 2- methyleneglutaronitrile in the presence
    of titanium tetrachloride and triethylamine.


CLS 558/365
TXT Processes under subclass 357 wherein a carbocyclic ring is formed.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a process provided for herein is:


CLS 558/366
TXT Processes under subclass 365 wherein the carbocyclic formed is monocyclic
    and is three-membered or four-membered.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a process provided for herein is:


CLS 558/367
TXT Processes under subclass 357 wherein an acyclic or alicyclic carbon, which
    is adjacent to a benzene ring or to an atom double or triple bonded to a
    noncarbon atom, is cyanalkylated by means of reaction with acrylonitrile or
    hydrocarbyl-substituted acrylonitrile.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of prosesses provided for  herein  are:

    (2)     Note.  The acyclic or aliycylic carbon of this subclass is
    generally considered to by the carbon of a reactive methylene group.


CLS 558/368
TXT Processes under subclass 367 wherein the acyclic or alicyclic carbon to be
    cyanoalkylated is adjacent to a carbonyl, -C(=O), group.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of processes provided for herein are:


CLS 558/369
TXT Processes under subclass 357 wherein an acyclic or alicyclic carbon, which
    is adjacent to a benzene ring or to an atom double or triple bonded to a
    noncarbon atom, is alkylated by means of an alkyl halide, alkyl sulfate,
    substituted alkyl halide or substituted alkyl sulfate.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of processes provided for herein are:

    (2)     Note.  The acyclic or alicyclic carbon of this subclass is
    generally considered to be the carbon of a reactive methylene group.


CLS 558/370
TXT Processes under subclass 357 wherein a reactant is employed having an
    unsaturated carbon bonded directly to two cyano groups.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a process provided for herein is:


CLS 558/371
TXT Processes under subclass 357 wherein there is employed a reactant that is
    an aldehyde or a ketone.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of processes provided for herein are:


CLS 558/372
TXT Processes under subclass 371 wherein formaldehyde is employed as a reactant.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a process provided for  herein  is:


CLS 558/373
TXT Processes under subclass 371 wherein the carbonyl carbon of the ketone or
    aldehyde reacts to form a carbon to carb on double bond with carbon of a
    second reactant.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of processes provided for herein are:


CLS 558/374
TXT Processes under subclass 373 wherein the carbon of the second reactant is
    bonded directly to two atoms, each of which is double or triple bonded to
    noncarbon atoms.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a process provided for herein is:


CLS 558/375
TXT Processes unnder subclass 357 wherein reaction between a nitrile reactant
    having no cyclic or alicyclic carbon to carbon double bond and a second
    reactant results in formation of a carbon to carbon double bond between
    carbons of the two reactants.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a process provided for herein is:


CLS 558/376
TXT Processes under subclass 357 wherein carbon replaces hydrogen bonded to a
    benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a process provided for herein is:


CLS 558/377
TXT Processes under subclass 357 wherein an acyclic or alicyclic carbon to
    carbon double bond is part of a nitrile reactant and is part of a second
    reactant.

    (1)     Note.  The type reaction known in the art as "olefin
    disproportionation" is generally callified herein.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of processes provided for herein are:  (1) the
    reactions of the three component system (A) olefin, (B) olefinically
    undaturated nitrile and (C) a monoadduct reaction product of an olefin and
    an olefinically unsaturated nitrile, and (2)


CLS 558/378
TXT Processes under subclass 357 wherein a nitrile reactant contains no acyclic
    or alicyclic carbon to carbon unsaturation.

    (1)     Note.  If different nitriles are reactants, one nitrile reactant
    may contain acyclic or alicyclic carbon to carbon unsaturation.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of processes provided for herein are:


CLS 558/379
TXT Processes under subclass 303 wherein an exsting acyclic or alicyclic carbon
    to carbon single bond is converted to an acyclic or alicyclic carbon to
    carbon double bond.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a process provided for herein is:


CLS 558/380
TXT Processes under subclass 379 wherein formation of the carbon to carbon
    double bond is accomplished by removal of one hydrogen and one halogen from
    adjacent single bonded acyclic or alicyclic carbons.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a process provided for herein is:


CLS 558/381
TXT Processes under subclass 379 wherein formation of the carbon to carbon
    double bond is accomplished by dehalogenation, dehydrocyanation, ring
    cleavage or depolymerization.

    (1)     Note. An example of a dehalogenation process provided for herein is:



    (2)     Note.  An example of a dehydrocyanation process provided for herein
    is:

    (3)     Note.  An example of a ring cleavage process provided for herein is:

    (4)     Note.  An example of a depolymerization process provided for herein
    is:


CLS 558/382
TXT Processes under subclass 379 wherein formation of the carbon to carbon
    double bond is accomplished by dehydration.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a process provided for herein is:


CLS 558/383
TXT Processes under subclass 379 wherein formation of the carbon to carbon
    double bond is accomplished by removal of hydrogen from adjacent single
    bonded acyclic or alicyclic carbons.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a process provided for herein is:


CLS 558/384
TXT Compounds under subclass 303 which contain boron or a spiro ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a spiro compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/385
TXT Compounds under subclass 303 wherein phosphorus is attached indirectly to
    the cyano group by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/386
TXT Compounds under subclass 385 wherein the phosphorus is attached directly to
    nitrogen, halogen, or chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
    tellurium) by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/387
TXT Compounds under subclass 303 wherein sulfur is single bonded to sulur, or
    oxygen is single bonded to oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 558/388
TXT Compounds under subclass 303 wherein the cyano group is attached indirectly
    to a benzene ring by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An exampleof a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/389
TXT Compounds under subclass 388 wherein the acyclic chain between the benzene
    ring and the cyano group has a noncarbon atom as a chain member.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/390
TXT Compounds under subclass 389 wherein the acyclic chain has nitrogen as a
    chain member.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/391
TXT Compounds under subclass 390 wherein the nitrogen is double bonded to
    carbon, which is also a member of the chain.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/392
TXT Compounds under subclass 390 wherein the nitrogen is bonded directly to
    -C(=X-, which is also in the chain, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, seleium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/393
TXT Compounds under subclass 392 wherein the chain also has carbon to carbon
    unsaturation, an additional nitrogen, or chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 558/394
TXT Compounds under subclass 390 wherein the benzene ring is bonded directly to
    the chain nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/395
TXT Compounds under subclass 394 wherein an acyclic carbon which is double
    bonded to another carbon is also bonded directly to cyano or to carbonyl.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for herein are:


CLS 558/396
TXT Compounds under subclass 389 wherein the acyclic chain has sulfur as a
    chain member.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/397
TXT Compounds under subclass 396 wherein the sulfur is double bonded to oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/398
TXT Compounds under subclass 389 wherein
    -C(=O)- is part of the acyclic chain.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/399
TXT Compounds under subclass 398 wherein the benzene ring is bonded dircftly to
    the carbon of the -C(=O)- group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/400
TXT Compounds under subclass 398 wherein an acyclic carbon which is double
    bonded to another carbon is also bonded directly to cyano or to carbonyl.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 558/401
TXT Compounds under subclass 388 wherein a chain consisting of two carbons
    multiple bonded to each other connects the cyano group and the benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/402
TXT Compounds under subclass 401 wherein one of the carbons of the chain is
    bonded directly to an additional benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/403
TXT Compounds under subclass 401 wherein the benzene ring is bonded directly to
    nitrogen, except as nitro or nitrosos.

    (1)     Note.  A nitro or nitroso group may be bonded directly to the
    benzene ring, provided that a nitrogen which is not part of a nitro or
    nitrosos group is also bonded directly thereto.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/404
TXT Compounds under subclass 388 wherein the cyano group is attached ndirectly
    to -C(=X)- by nonionic bonding, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein  is:


CLS 558/405
TXT Compounds under subclass 404 wherein the carbon of the -C(=X)- group is
    bonded directly to two carbons.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for herein is:


CLS 558/406
TXT Compounds under subclass 404 wherein a carbonyl group, -C(=O)-, is bonded
    directly to oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein  is:


CLS 558/407
TXT Compounds under subclass 406 which contain a three-membered carbocyclic
    ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/408
TXT Compounds under subclass 388 wherein the cyano group is attached indirectly
    to nitrogen, except as nitro or nitroso, by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  A nitro or nitroso group may be attached indirectly to the
    cyano group by nonionic bonding, provided that a nitrogen which is not part
    of a nitro or nitroso group is also so attached.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein is:


CLS 558/409
TXT Compounds under subclass 408 wherein plural cyano groups are present.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein  is:


CLS 558/410
TXT Compounds under subclass 388 wherein the cyano group is attached indirectly
    to oxygen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/411
TXT Compounds under subclass 303 wherein the cycano group is bonded directly to
    a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/412
TXT Compounds under subclass 411 wherein sulfur and hydroxy are bonded to the
    same benzene ring, or which contain a monocyclic unsaturated alicyclic ring
    or a thiocarbonyl group, -C(S)-.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 558/413
TXT Compounds under subclass 411 wherein the cyano group is attached
    indirectly, by nonionic bonding, to sulfur which is double bonded to oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/414
TXT Compounds under subclass 411 wherein the cyano group is attached indirectly
    to carbonyl, -C(=O)-, by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/415
TXT Compounds under subclass 414 wherein the carbonyl is bonded directly to a
    benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/416
TXT Compounds under subclass 415 wherein the carbonyl is bonded directly to
    both a benzene ring and to oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/417
TXT Compounds under subclass 414 wherein two noncarbon atoms, or a noncarbon
    atom and an additional carbonyl, are bonded directly to the carbonyl group.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 558/418
TXT Compounds under subclass 411 wherein the cyano group is attached indirectly
    to nitrogen, except as notro on nitroso, by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  A nitro or nitroso group may be attached indirectly to the
    cyano group by nonionic bonding, provided that a nitrogen which is not part
    of a nitro or nitroso group is also so attached.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/419
TXT Compounds under subclass 418 wherein plural cyano groups are present.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/420
TXT Compounds under subclass 419 wherein cyano groups are bonded directly to
    more that one benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 558/421
TXT Compounds under subclass 419 wherein plural cyano groups are bonded
    directly to a benzene ring, which is further unsubstituted or hydrocarbyl
    substituted only.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 558/422
TXT Compounds under subclass 418 wherein a benzene ring is attached indirectly
    to the nitrogen by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 558/423
TXT Compounds under subclass 411 wherein the cyano group is attached indirectly
    to oxygen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/424
TXT Compounds under subclas 423 wherein the oxygen is bonded directly to
    nitrogen, or two benzene rings are bonded directly to the same oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 558/425
TXT Compounds under subclass 411 wherein the cyano group is attached indirectly
    to halogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/426
TXT Compounds under subclass 303 wherein the cyano group is attached indirectly
    to a benzene ring by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 558/427
TXT Compounds under subclass 426 which contain a polycyclo ring system having
    at least three cyclos, and at least one of the cyclos of the system is a
    benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 558/428
TXT Compounds under subclass 303 which contain a polycyclo alicyclic ring
    system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/429
TXT Compounds under subclass 428 wherein at least three cyclos are in the
    polycyclo alicyclic ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/430
TXT Compounds under subclass 303 which contain a six-membered alicyclic ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/431
TXT Compounds under subclass 430 wherein the six-membered alicyclic ring is
    bonded directly to the cyano group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/432
TXT Compounds under subclass 303 which contain a five-membered alicyclic ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/433
TXT Compounds under subclass 303 which contain a four-membered alicyclic ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/434
TXT Compounds under subclass 303 which contain a three-membered alicyclic ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/435
TXT Compounds under subclass 303 which are acyclic.


CLS 558/436
TXT Compounds under subclass 435 wherein the cyano group is attached in
    directly to sulfur by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided   for  herein  are:


CLS 558/437
TXT Compounds under subclass 436 wherein oxygen is double bonded to the sulfur.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/438
TXT Compounds under subclass 436 wherein two carbons are bonded directly to the
    same divalent sulfur.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/439
TXT Compounds under subclass 438 wherein plural cyano groups are present.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound  provided for herein is:


CLS 558/440
TXT Compounds under subclass 435 wherein the cyano group is attached indirectly
    to carbonyl, -C(=O)-, by nonionic bonding

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/441
TXT Compounds under subclass 440 wherein the carbonyl group is bonded directly
    to oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/442
TXT Compounds under subclass 441 wherein plural carbonyl, -C(=O), groups are
    attached indirectly to the cyano group by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/443
TXT Compounds under subclass 441 wherein the carbon adjacent to the carbonyl
    carbon is bonded directly to the cyano group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/444
TXT Compounds under subclass 441 wherein the oxygen is between the cyano group
    and the carbonyl.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided   for   herein  are:


CLS 558/445
TXT Compounds under subclass 440 wherein the carbonyl is bonded directly to
    nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/446
TXT Compounds under subclass 435 wherein the cyano group is attached
    indirectly, by nonionic bonding, to nitrogen, which is double bonded to
    carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/447
TXT Compounds under subclass 435 wherein the same oxygen is bonded directly to
    plural carbons.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/448
TXT Compounds under subclass 447 wherein the same carbon is bonded directly to
    plural oxygens.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 558/449
TXT Compounds under subclass 447 wherein carbon, which is multiple bonded to
    another carbon, is attached directly or indirectly to the cyano group by
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note. An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/450
TXT Processes under subclass 447 wherein an ether group is formed.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of reactions provided for herein are:


CLS 558/451
TXT Compounds under subclass 435 wherein carbon is bonded directly to -OH
    (wherein H of -OH may be replaced by substituted or unsubstituted ammonium,
    or by a Group IA or IIA light metal).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/452
TXT Compounds under subclass 435 wherein the cyano group is attached indirectly
    to nitrogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/453
TXT Compounds under subclass 452 wherein plural cyano groups are bonded
    directly to the same carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/454
TXT Compounds under subclass 452 wherein plural cyano groups are bonded
    directtly to the same chain.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/455
TXT Compounds under subclass 454 wherein nitrogen is a member of the chain.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 558/456
TXT Processes under subclass 454 wherein saturated hydrocarbon dinitriles are
    separated from impurities, or from a reaction medium.


CLS 558/457
TXT Compounds under subclass 454 wherein carbon is multiple bonded to a carbon
    in the chain.

    (1)     Note.  Example of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 558/458
TXT Compounds under subclass 452 wherein the nitrogen is part of a nitro,
    nitroso nitrate, or N-oxide group, or is attached directly to halogen by
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 558/459
TXT Processes under sublcass 452 wherein halo, hydroxy or alkoxy is displace by
    ammonia or substituted ammonia, or wherein a dinitrile is hydrogenated.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of processes provided for   herein are:


CLS 558/460
TXT Compounds under subclass 435 wherein the cyano group is attached indirectly
    to halogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/461
TXT Compounds under subclass 460 wherein the cyano group is attached indirectly
    to plural halogens by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/462
TXT Compounds under subclass 435 which contain carbon to carbon unsaturation.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided    for  herein are:


CLS 558/463
TXT Processes under subclass 462 wherein a nitrile containing carbon to carbon
    unsaturation is separated from impurities or from a reaction medium.


CLS 558/464
TXT Processes under subclass 463 which utiltze a material that contains
    silicon, aluminum, or a metal having specific gravity greater than four, or
    which utilize an ion exchange resin.

    (1)     Note.  Arsenic is considered a metal.


CLS 558/465
TXT Processes unde subclass 463 wherein the nitrile to be separated from
    impurities or from a reaction medium is prepared by hydrocyanation.


CLS 558/466
TXT Processes under subclass 463 wherein the nitrile to be separated from
    impurities of from a reaction medium is prepared by reaction of an organic
    compounds ammonia, and molecular oxygen or a molecular oxygen-containing
    gas.


CLS 558/467
TXT Processes under subclass 435 wherein saturated nitriles are prepared.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of processes provided for herein are:


CLS 558/480
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 which contain  the

    group, wherein the X's are the same or diverse chalcogens (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium,  or tellurium), bonded directly to carbon, which carbon
    may be single bonded to any atom but may be multiple bonded only to an
    additional carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    206-222 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing,
    halogen, chalcogen, or nitrogen.


CLS 558/481
TXT Compounds under subclass 480 in admixture with a preserving or stabilizing
    agent whose sole function is to prevent physical or chemical change.


CLS 558/482
TXT Compounds under subclass 480 which contain a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compounds provided for herein is:


CLS 558/483
TXT Compounds under subclass 480 which contain additional nitrogen or
    additional chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium).

    (1)     Note. Examples of compounds provided  for  herein are:


CLS 558/484
TXT Compounds under subclass 483 which contain more   than one group:

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/485
TXT Compounds under subclass 484 which contain at least   four  groups.

    (1)     Note.   An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 558/486
TXT The compound, trinitroglycerine, under subclass 484 which has the following
    structure:

    (1)     Note.  This compound is also referred to as glyceryl trinitrate.


CLS 558/487
TXT Compounds under subclass 484 in which carbon is bonded directly to nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided   for  herein are:


CLS 558/488
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 which contain the X=N-X- group,
    wherein the X's are the same or diverse chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium), bonded directly to carbon, which carbon may be
    single bonded to any atom but may be multiple bonded only to an additional
    carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided    for  herein are:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    568,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 924+ for compounds wherein the nitro
    group is bonded directly to carbon.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    215-222 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    chalcogen or nitrogen.


CLS 560/
TTL ORGANIC COMPOUNDS -- PART OF THE CLASS 532-570 SERIES

CLS 560/1
TXT Carboxylic acid esters:
    Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 wherein the acid function entering
    into the formation of the esters is a carboxyl group.

    (1)     Note.  The traditional manner of naming esters has been to define
    the acid and alcohol moieties that are interracted. The basis for
    classifying esters in this class has been the acid moiety.

    In this reclassification, the use of the acid moiety as the primary basis
    for classification has been retained. However, whenever it was determined
    that no further subdivision of a body of patents could be established based
    upon variants of the acid moiety and consistent with good classification
    practice, further subdivision has been made on the characteristics of the
    alcohol moiety.  To avoid any confusion, the schedule of subclass titles
    specifically points out that a particular characteristic pertains to the
    acid moiety or the alcohol moiety.

    This factor, combined with the complexity of the compounds which involve
    pluralities of acid and alcohol moieties, has made it essential to
    establish a set of rules to determine which acid moiety and which alcohol
    moiety is to control the classification.

    RULES FOR CLASSIFYING CARBOXYLIC ESTERS

    A.      Compounds



    I.      General

    1.      The first step in determining the classification of a compound is to
    resolve it into the several acidic and alcoholic moieties.

    2.      If there is more than one acid moiety, the general rule of
    superiority is
    applied to determine the acid moiety which will control classification.

    3.      Thereafter, the rule applied is that only those alcohol moieties
    which
    esterify the selected acid moiety are considered for classification.

    4.      Where there is more than one alcohol moiety esterifying a
    controlling acid
    moiety and it is necessary to determine which alcohol moiety will control
    classification, the general rules of superiority are applied.

    The following examples illustrate these rules:



    (a)     Polyoxy alcohol B and two carboxylic acids, A and D
              AC(=O) OBO(O=)CD
    Determine which of acids A or D has priority to decide the classification.

    (b)     Polycarboxylic acid A and two alcohols B and D
              BO(O )CAC(=O)OD
    If necessary, determine which of alcohols B and D has priority to decide
    the classification.

    (c)     Oxy acid B, acylating acid A and alcohol D
              AC(=O)OBC(=O)OD
    Determine which of acids A and B has priority.  If acid A has priority,
    then oxy acid B serves as the alcohol moiety and D is ignored for
    classification. If oxy acid B has priority, then alcohol D is considered
    for classification and acid A is ignored.

    (d)     Polycarboxylic acid A, monocarboxylic acid E, polyoxy alcohol D and
    monooxy alcohol B   BO(O=)CAC(=O)ODO(O=)CEDetermine which of acids A and E
    takes priority.  If acid A has priority, then alcohols B and D are
    considered and acid E is ignored.  If necessary, determine priority as
    between alcohols B and D to establish classification. If acid E has
    priority, consider only alcohol D for classification and ignore acid A and
    alcohol B.

    (e)     Polycarboxylic acid A, oxy acid B, monocarboxylic acid E, monooxy
    alcohol F and polyoxy alcohol DFO(O=)CAC(=O)OBC(=O)ODO(O=)CEDetermine
    priority among acid moieties A, B and E.  If polycarboxylic acid A has
    priority, then consider only F and B as the alcohol moieties and ignore D
    and E.  If necessary, determine priority between F and B as alcohol
    moieties for classification.  If oxy acid B has priority, then only alcohol
    D is considered for classification, ignoring F, A and E.  If acid E has
    priority, consider only alcohol D for classification, ignoring F, A and B.

    II.     Polycarboxylic Acid Esters

    The treatment of polycarboxylic acid esters has not changed in this
    reclassification. However, since it presents potential pitfalls for
    classification and search, the problems are summarized here.

    Esters of polycarboxylic acids where one or more of the carboxyl groups are
    unesterified are classified with the polycarboxylic acid esters where all
    carboxyl groups may be in the free acid form or may be present as salts or
    as acid halides.

    When the unesterified carboxyl is reacted with an amine to form an amide,
    the compound is classified in the appropriate subclass of the group of
    esters containing nitrogen.

    Since an acid halide group on an acid moiety which contains an esterified
    carboxyl is the function which makes it a polycarboxylic acid ester, such
    compound is not considered to be halogenated, for classification purposes.
    However, when the acid halide group is on an acid moiety which serves as
    the alcohol portion of an ester of an acid with higher priority, this
    restriction no longer applies and it may be considered as a halogenated
    alcohol.

    An anhydride of a half ester of a dicarboxylic acid with a monocarboxylic
    acid is regarded for classification purposes, as a monocarboxylic acid
    ester, e.g., BO(O=C)AC(=O)O(O=)CD and the final classification will be
    determined by the functional groups present on both A and D which form the
    entire acid moiety.

    An anhydride of a half ester of a dicarboxylic acid with another
    dicarboxylic acid or half ester will be considered as a polycarboxylic
    acid, e.g., BO(O=)CAC(=O)O(O=)CDC(=O)OH.

    Here too, the final classification will be determined by the functional
    groups present on both A and D which form the entire acid moiety.

    III.    Phenolic Esters

    The only exception to the rules set forth in I. above, is that of phenolic
    esters of acyclic carboxylic acids.  Here, the primary basis of
    classification is the phenolic moitety, with the acids providing a
    secondary basis when all classifiable characteristics of the phenolic
    moiety have been exhausted.  As a further exception to this case, carbamic
    acid esters of phenols have been made special and appear before all other
    categories.

    IV.     Salts

    As a general rule, a salt forming moiety will not be considered as
    significant for classifying a carboxylic acid ester, unless it is, per se,
    an ester classifiable in this area, in which case its acid group will
    compete for priority with the acid group of the ester to which it is
    ionically bound. In this case, classification will be based solely on that
    ionic moiety which is superior.

    B.      Processes

    The rules of classification with respect to processes follow the general
    rules as set forth in the class definition.  Since processes may appear in
    three different positions within the schedule, this rule is amplified to
    cover the three situations.

    (a)     When a process subclass appears as a first line indent to a
    residual subclass and is ahead of and coordinate with a series of product
    subclasses, it is considered as referring to the subject matter of the
    residual subclass as well as the coordinate product subclasses.

    (1)     If the claims are drawn to a product classifiable in the residual
    subclass and a process classifiable in a process subclass, the original
    patent is placed in the residual subclass and cross referenced to the
    appropriate process subclass.

    (2)     If the claims are drawn to products classifiable in a coordinate
    product subclass as well as process claims classifiable in a process
    subclass, the original patent is placed in the appropriate process subclass
    and cross referenced to the product subclass.

    (3)     If all the claims are drawn to a process classifiable in a process
    subclass, the original is placed in the appropriate process subclass.

    (b)     When a process subclass appears as an indent to a product subclass
    it refers only to the subject of that product subclass.

    (1)     When the patent contains claims classifiable both in the product
    and the process subclass, the patent is placed as an original in the
    product subclass and cross referenced to the process subclass.

    (2)     If all the claims are drawn to a process classifiable in the
    process subclass, the original patent is placed in the process subclass.

    (c)     When process subclasses appear as a first line indent, but below a
    series of coordinate product subclasses, then they refer only to subject
    matter classifiable in the residual subclass.

    (1)     If the patent contains claims to a product classifiable in the
    residual subclass and claims classifiable in a process subclass, the
    original patent is placed in the residual subclass and cross referenced to
    the process subclass.

    (2)     If the claims are all drawn to a process classifiable in a process
    subclass, the original patent is placed in the process subclass.

    (d)     Where a patent has claims drawn only to a process for which no
    subclass is provided, in all cases the patent is placed in the subclass
    appropriate to the product being produced.

    (2)     Note.  This is the residual subclass for esters of alicyclic
    carboxylic acids not specifically provided for in subclasses (114-128)
    inclusive.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:  esters of naphthenic
    acids and


CLS 560/2
TXT With preservative:
    Products under subclass 1 wherein the ester is mixed with a preserving
    agent whose sole function is to prevent physical or chemical change.


CLS 560/3
TXT Aromatic polycarboxylic acid esters:
    Products under subclass 2 wherein the ester is an aromatic polycarboxylic
    acid ester.


CLS 560/4
TXT Acyclic unsaturated monocarboxylic acid esters:
    Products under subclass 2 wherein the ester is an acyclic unsaturated
    monocarboxylic acid ester.


CLS 560/5
TXT Hydrophenanthrene in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 1 wherein the acid radical contains a
    hydrophenanthrene nucleus not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  Patents are placed here when directed to compounds, wherein
    the acid radical is that of a free natural resin acid of known chemical
    structure which contains the hydrophenanthrene nucleus.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives; Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclasses 200+, for esters of
    natural resin acids obtained by treatment of the natural resin and wherein
    the esters are not separated as single compounds of known chemical
    structure.  See particularly subclasses 215, 216, 217, and 218.


CLS 560/6
TXT Polycyclo ring system having the hydrophenanthrene and at least one
    additional ring as cyclos:Compounds under subclass 5 wherein the
    hydrophenanthrene nucleus contains additional rings formed by ortho fusion
    or by a bridge.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/7
TXT 1, 4a-dimethylhydrophenanthrene - 1 carboxylic acid:

    Compounds under subclass 5 which contain the nucleus 1,
    4a-dimethlhydrophenanthrene -1 carboxylic acid.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/8
TXT Aromatic acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 1 wherein the acid radical contains a benzene or
    other carbocyclic aromatic group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5+,     for esters of carboxylic acids containing a hydrophenanthrene
    nucleus and having a known chemical structure, not provided for above, for
    example, the esters of abietic acid, dehydroabietic acid and pimaric acid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    206-225 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    halogen, chalcogen, nitrogen, phosphorus, or metals.


CLS 560/9
TXT Sulfur in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 8 wherein the acid radical contains sulfur
    covalently bonded.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/10
TXT Ortho fused rings in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 9 wherein the acid radical contains two or more
    carbocyclic nuclei joined throught two ortho positioned nuclear carbon
    atoms.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/11
TXT Sulfoxy in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 9 wherein the acid radical contains sulfur bonded
    to oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/12
TXT Nitrogen in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 11 wherein the acid radical contains nitrogen
    covalently bonded.

    (1)     Note.  Amine salts of sulfonic acid containing carboxylic acid
    esters are not considered as nitrogen containing for this subclass.  See
    section A. IV or (1) Note in subclass 1.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/13
TXT Plural nitrogens in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 12 wherein the acid radical contains more than one
    nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/14
TXT Sulfonic acids, salts or acid halides:
    Compounds under subclass 11 wherein the acid radical contains the group

    or its salts or acid halides.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/15
TXT Sulfur, not bonded directly to a ring, in same side chain as ester function:

    Compounds under subclass 9 wherein the esterified carboxylic acid function
    is on a side chain containing sulfur in or attached to the chain, but not
    directly bonded to a carbon of a carbocyclic nucleus.

    (1)     Note.  In this and subsequent subclasses where the term "side
    chain" is used, it is intended to mean an acyclic chain uninterrupted by a
    cyclic formation.

    (2)     Note.  When the same sulfur atom is directly attached to one
    carbocyclic nucleus and indirectly attached to a second carbocyclic
    nucleus, it will always be considered as directly attached for
    classification, e.g.,

    (3)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/16
TXT Nitrogen in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 15 wherein the acid radical also contains nitrogen
    covalently bonded.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/17
TXT Sulfur, bonded directly to a ring, in same side chain as ester function:

    Compounds under subclass 9 wherein the esterified carboxylic acid function
    is on a side chain which contains sulfur directly bonded to a carbon of a
    carbocyclic nucleus.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/18
TXT Ester function attached directly to a ring:
    Compounds under subclass 9 wherein the esterified carboxylic acid function
    is directly bonded to a carbon of a carbocyclic nucleus.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/19
TXT Nitrogen in acid moiety other than as nitroso or isocyanate (e.g., amino
    acid esters, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 8 wherein the acid radical contains covalently
    bonded nitrogen other than in the form of an isocyanate or nitroso group.

    (1)     Note.  Compounds containing an isocyanate or a nitroso group are
    not per se excluded from this subclass, provided that the compounds also
    contain nitrogen in another form.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/20
TXT Nitro bonded to carbon in acid moiety:
    Compounds under subclass 19 wherein the acid radical contains the group
    -N(=O)2 bonded to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/21
TXT Plural rings in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 20 wherein the acid radical contains more than one
    carbocyclic group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/22
TXT Additional nitrogen in acid moiety:
    Compounds under subclass 20 wherein the acid radical contains an additional
    nitrogen covalently bonded.

    (1)     Note.  The additonal nitrogen may be in the form of a nitro,
    isocyanate or nitroso group.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/23
TXT Oxy, aldehyde or ketone group in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 20 wherein the acid radical contains a carbonyl
    group bonded to C and X where X is carbon or hydrogen; or an -OX group
    bonded to a noncarbonylic C where X is C, H, an alcoholate forming group
    not provided for above, or an acyl group not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/24
TXT Carbamic acid:

    Compounds under subclass 19 wherein the acid radical contains nitrogen
    directly bonded to the carbon of the esterified carboxyl group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/25
TXT Polycarbamic:

    Compounds under subclass 24 wherein the acid radical contains more than one
    carbamic acid group, at least one of which is esterfied.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also contains compounds where an unesterified
    carbamic acid has been converted into a salt or an acid halide.  Where an
    unesterified carbamic acid group has been converted into an amide and only
    one esterified carbamic acid group is present, the compound is classified
    in the appropriate subclass dealing with monocarbamic acid esters.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/26
TXT Polyoxy alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 25 wherein the alcohol moiety contains in addition
    to an esterified hydroxyl, another -OX group attached to a noncarbonylic C
    where X is H, C, an alcoholate forming group not provided for above, or an
    acyl group not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/27
TXT Plural rings in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 24 wherein the acid radical contains more than one
    carbocyclic group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/28
TXT Ortho fused:

    Compounds under subclass 27 wherein at least two carbocyclic groups are
    joined through two ortho positioned carbon atoms.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/29
TXT Oxy in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 24 wherein the acid radical contains the -OX group
    attached to a noncarbonylic C where X is C, H, an alcoholate forming group
    not provided for above, or an acyl group not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/30
TXT Halogen in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 24 wherein the acid radical contains a covalently
    bonded halogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/31
TXT Ring in alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 30 wherein the alcohol moiety of the ester
    contains a carbocyclic nucleus.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/32
TXT Ring in alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 24 wherein the alcohol moiety of the ester
    contains a carbocyclic nucleus.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/33
TXT Sulfur, nitrogen, halogen or additional oxy in alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 24 wherein the alcohol moiety contains sulfur,
    nitrogen or halogen covalently bonded or in addition to the esterified
    hydroxyl, an -OX group attached to a noncarbonylic C where X is C, H, an
    alcoholate forming group not provided for above, or an acyl group not
    provided for above.



    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/34
TXT Ureido, guanido or hydrazino in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 19 wherein the acid radical contains a ureido
    group >NC(=O)N< or a guanido group >NC(=N-)N< or a hydrazo group>NN<.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/35
TXT Amidine, azomethine, ketimine or oxime in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 19 containing the grouping -C=N-, including
    amidines not provided for above or compounds equivalent in structure to
    those formed by reacting an alde-hyde or a ketone with ammonia or an amine.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/36
TXT Plural rings bonded directly to the same carbon in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 19 wherein the acid radical contains two
    carbocyclic nuclei attached to a methylene or carbonyl group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/37
TXT The nitrogen is not bonded directly to a ring:

    Compounds under subclass 19 wherein the acid radical contains nitrogen
    which is not directly attached to a carbocyclic nucleus.

    (1)     Note.  When the same N atom is directly attached to one carbocylic
    nucleus and indirectly attached to a second carbocyclic nucleus, it will
    always be considered as directly attached for classification, e.g.,

    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/38
TXT The nitrogen is in same side chain as ester function:

    Compounds under subclass 37 wherein the acid radical contains nitrogen in
    or attached to the same side chain which contains the carboxylic acid ester
    function.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/39
TXT Oxy in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 38 wherein the acid radical also contains the
    group -OX attached to a noncarbonylic C where X is C, H, an alcoholate
    forming group not provided for above, or an acyl group not provided for
    above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/40
TXT Phenylalanines:

    Compounds under subclass 39 wherein the acid radical contains a
    phenylalanine group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/41
TXT Amide in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 38 wherein the acid radical contains an acyl
    group, not provided for above, attached to the nitrogen to form an amide.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/42
TXT Oxy in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 37 wherein the acid radical also contains the
    group -OX attached to a noncarbonylic C where X is C, H, an alcoholate
    forming group not provided for above, or an acyl group not provided for
    above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/43
TXT The nitrogen is bonded directly to a ring and is in same side chain as
    ester function:

    Compounds under subclass 19 wherein the acid radical has the ester function
    on a side chain attached to nitrogen, which is directly attached to a
    carbocyclic nucleus.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/44
TXT Polycarboxylic acid:

    Compounds under subclass 43 wherein the acid radical has more than one
    carboxyl group, at least one of which is esterified.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also contains compounds wherein an
    unesterified carboxyl has been converted into a salt or an acid halide, or
    may be in the free acid form.  Where the unesterified carboxyl is converted
    into an amide, the compound is classified in subclass 43.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/45
TXT Oxy in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 19 wherein the acid radical contains an -OX group
    attached to a noncarbonylic C where X is C, H, an alcoholate forming group
    not provided for above, or an acyl group not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/46
TXT Benzoic acid substituted on ring with oxy and nitrogen:

    Compounds under subclass 45 wherein the acid radical has an esterified
    carboxyl group, nitrogen an an -OX group all directly attached to the
    benzene ring, wherein X is C, H, and alcoholate forming group not provided
    for above, or an acyl group not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/47
TXT Halogen in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 19 wherein the acid radical contains a covalently
    bonded halogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/48
TXT Plural rings in acid moiety with nitrogen bonded directly to at least one
    of the rings:

    Compounds under subclass 19 wherein the acid radical contains more than one
    carbocyclic group with nitrogen directly attached to at least one
    carbocyclic group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/49
TXT Nitrogen in alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 19 wherein the alcohol moiety contains nitrogen
    covalently bonded.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/50
TXT Polyoxy alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 19 wherein the alcohol moiety contains in addition
    to the esterified hydroxyl group, an -OX group attached to a noncarbonylic
    C where X is C, H, an alcoholate forming group not provided for above, or
    an acyl group not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/51
TXT Aldehyde or ketone group in acid moiety:
    Compounds under subclass 8 wherein the acid radical contains the group
    -C(=O)X bonded to carbon and X is C or H, i.e., aldehyde or ketone group
    containing esters.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/52
TXT Plural rings bonded directly to the same carbonyl in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 51 wherein the acid radical contains two
    carbocyclic nuclei directly attached to a carbonyl group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/53
TXT Oxy in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 51 wherein the acid radical also contains the
    group -OX attached to a noncarbonylic C and X is C, H, an alcoholate
    forming group not provided for above, or an acyl group not provided for
    above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/54
TXT Polycarboxylic acid:

    Compounds under subclass 51 wherein the acid radical contains more than one
    carboxyl group, at least one of which is esterified.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains compounds wherein an unesterified
    carboxyl may be present in free acid form or in the form of a salt or an
    acid halide.  When the unesterified carboxyl is converted into an amide,
    the compound is classifiable in the appropriate subclass under (19).

    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/55
TXT Oxy in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 8 wherein the acid radical contains the -OX group
    attached to a noncarbonylic C where X may be C, H, an alcoholate forming
    group not provided for above, or an acyl group not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/56
TXT Ortho fused rings in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 55 wherein the acid radical contains two or more
    carbocyclic nuclei joined through a pair of ortho positioned carbon atoms.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/57
TXT Plural rings bonded directly to the same carbon in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 55 wherein the acid radical contains two
    carbocyclic nuclei attached to a methylene group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/58
TXT Nitrogen in alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 57 wherein the alcohol moiety contains nitrogen
    covalently bonded.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/59
TXT Rings bonded directly to each other in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 55 wherein the acid radical contains two
    carbocyclic groups joined through a covalent bond.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/60
TXT Oxy, not bonded directly to a ring, in same side chain as ester function:

    Compounds under subclass 55 wherein the esterified acid function is on a
    side chain containing an oxy group attached to or in the chain, but not
    attached to a carbocyclic nucleus.

    (1)     Note.  When the same oxygen atom is directly attached to one
    carbocyclic nucleus and indirectly attached to a second carbocyclic
    nucleus, it will always be considered as directly attached for
    classification, e.g.,

    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/61
TXT Oxy, bonded directly to a ring, in same side chain as ester function:

    Compounds under subclass 55 wherein the esterified acid function is on side
    chain containing an oxy group which is directly attached to a carbocyclic
    nucleus.

    (1)     Note.  This subclas contains, for example:


CLS 560/62
TXT Halogen in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 61 wherein the acid radical also contains
    covalently bonded halogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/63
TXT Polyoxy alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 62 wherein the alcohol moiety contains in addition
    to the esterified hydroxyl, an -OX group attached to a noncarbonylic C
    where X may be C, H, an alcoholate forming group not provided for above, or
    an acyl group not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/64
TXT Ester function attached directly to a ring:
    Compounds under subclass 55 wherein the esterified acid function is
    directly attached to a carbocyclic nucleus.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/65
TXT Halogen in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 64 wherein the acid function contains a covalently
    bonded halogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/66
TXT Acylated:

    Compounds under subclass 64 wherein a hydroxy group of the esterified acid
    radical has been esterified by an acyl group not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/67
TXT Phenolic hydroxy or metallate:

    Compounds under subclass 64 wherein the acid function contains an -OX
    group, where X is H or an alcoholate forming group not provided for above,
    directly attached to the carbon of a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/68
TXT Tannins and reaction products thereof:
    Products and their processes under subclass 67 which are known as tannins
    or tannic acids.  Chemically they appear to be esters of gallic acid in
    which the carboxyl group thereof is esterified by the hydroxyl group of a
    second molecule of gallic acid, or glucosides thereof.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, tannin extracts
    together with their preparation, treatment and purification.  Many of these
    extracts are useful as tanning or mordanting agents.  Where the tannin
    extract is admixed with other ingredients to form a composition having an
    art use provided for elsewhere, the patent is placed in the other class and
    cross referenced to this class when desirable.  For example, tanning
    compositions and mordanting compositions are in Class 8, Bleaching and
    Dyeing: Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of Textiles and Fibers.


CLS 560/69
TXT Extraction from bark or vegetable material:
    Processes under subclass 68 which are directed to or include the treatment
    of bark, shell galls, or other vegetable material to remove tannins
    therefrom.


CLS 560/70
TXT Polyphenolic hydroxy or metallate:
    Compounds under subclass 67 wherein the acid function contains more than
    one -OX group attached to a carbon of a benzene ring, where X is H or an
    alcoholate forming group not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/71
TXT Salicyclic acid:

    Compounds under subclass 67 wherein the acid radical is derived from the
    compound known as salicyclic acid, e.g., salol, oil of wintergreen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is limited to esters of salicyclic acid, per
    se. Esters of acylated salicyclic acid are found in subclass 64 and
    salicyclic acid acylated with acyclic carboxylic acids are in subclass 143.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/72
TXT Ring in alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 67 wherein the alcohol moiety contains a
    carbocyclic nucleus.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/73
TXT Ring in alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 64 wherein the alcohol moiety contains a
    carbocyclic nucleus.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/74
TXT Nitrogen in alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 64 wherein the alcohol moiety contains nitrogen
    covalently bonded.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/75
TXT Phenolic hydroxy or metallate:

    Compounds under subclass 55 wherein the acid function contains an -OX
    group, where X is H or an alcoholate forming group not provided for above,
    directly attached to a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/76
TXT Polycarboxylic acid:
    Compounds under subclass 8 wherein the acid radical contains more than one
    carboxyl group, at least one of which is esterified.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also contains compounds wherein an
    unesterified carboxyl may be present in free acid form or in the form of a
    salt or an acid halide.  Where an unesterified carboxyl has been converted
    into an amide, the compound is classifiable in the appropriate subclass
    under (19).

    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/77
TXT Producing carboxyl group by oxidation:
    Processes under subclass 76 wherein at least one of the carboxyl groups of
    the acid is formed by oxidizing an aromatic material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, the oxidation of xylene
    or toluic acid either in the presence of an alcohol or with a subsequent
    esterification to form the dicarboxylic acid esters.


CLS 560/78
TXT Purification or recovery:

    Processes under subclass 76 which are directed to the purification,
    separation or recovery of aromatic polycarboxylic acid esters.


CLS 560/79
TXT Of esters of polyoxy alcohols:

    Processes under subclass 78 wherein the compounds treated are polyoxy
    alcohol esters.


CLS 560/80
TXT Ortho fused rings in acid moiety:
    Compounds under subclass 76 wherein the acid radical contains two or more
    carbocyclic nuclei joined through ortho positioned nuclear carbons.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/81
TXT Esterified carboxy not bonded directly to a ring:

    Compounds under subclass 76 wherein an esterified carboxyl group of the
    acid radical is not directly bonded to a nuclear carbon of a carbocyclic
    group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/82
TXT Malonates:

    Compounds under subclass 81 in which the methylene group of a malonic acid
    ester contains an aromatic substituent.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/83
TXT Halogen in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 76 wherein the acid radical contains covalently
    bonded halogen.

    (1)     Note.  Compounds wherein the only halogen is present in the form of
    a carboxylic acid halide are not considered halogenated acids for this
    subclass.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/84
TXT Ring in alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 76 wherein the alcohol moiety contains a
    carbocyclic nucleus.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/85
TXT Aromatic alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 84 wherein the carbocyclic nucleus is aromatic.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/86
TXT Esterified phenolic hydroxy:

    Compounds under subclass 85 wherein the ester is formed with a phenolic
    hydroxyl group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/87
TXT Sulfur or halogen in alcohol moiety:
    Compounds under subclass 76 wherein the alcohol moiety contains sulfur or a
    halogen covalently bonded.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/88
TXT Nitrogen in alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 76 wherein the alcohol moiety contains nitrogen
    covalently bonded.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:



CLS 560/89
TXT Polyoxy alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 76 wherein the alcohol moiety contains in addition
    to the esterified hydroxyl group, an -OX group attached to a noncarbonylic
    C where X may be H, C, an acyl radical not provided for above, or an
    alcoholate forming group not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/90
TXT Additional esterifying acid:

    Compounds under subclass 89 wherein the polyoxy alcohol is additionally
    esterified by a different carboxylic acid not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/91
TXT Polyoxyalkylene alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 89 wherein the polyoxy alcohol moiety has the
    structure-O-(CnH2 n )m, where n and m are positive integers and m>1.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/92
TXT Preparing esters by ester interchange:
     Processes under subclass 89 wherein the ester is prepared by reacting an
    ester with another ester, acid or alcohol, to produce a different ester.


CLS 560/93
TXT Preparing esters from alkylene oxides:
    Processes under subclass 89 wherein the esters are prepared from alkylene
    oxides.


CLS 560/94
TXT Preparing esters from acid or from nitrile and diol:

    Processes under subclass 89 wherein the esters are prepared by reaction of
    a carboxylic acid or a nitrile with a diol.


CLS 560/95
TXT Unsaturation in alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 76 wherein the alcohol moiety is acyclic and
    contains an ethylenic double bond or a triple bond.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/96
TXT Processes:

    Processes under subclass 76 for preparing compounds classifiable in that
    subclass.

    (1)     Note.  When a patent contains claims to both a product classifiable
    in subclass 76 and a process, the patent is placed as an original in
    subclass 76 and cross referenced to this subclass.  When the claims are
    directed solely to a process of preparing a compound classifiable in
    subclass 76, it is placed as an original in this subclass.


CLS 560/97
TXT Carbonylation:

    Processes under subclass 96 wherein the ester is prepared through formation
    of a carboxyl group on a starting material by reacting with a carbonylating
    agent such as carbon monoxide in the presence of an alcohol or by
    subsequent esterification.


CLS 560/98
TXT Esterification of acid, salt, acid halide or anhydride with alcohol:

    Processes under subclass 96 in which the compounds are prepared by reacting
    an alcohol with a carboxylic acid or its salt, acid halide or anhydride.


CLS 560/99
TXT Metal containing catalyst utilized:
    Processes under subclass 98 wherein the esterification reaction is carried
    out in the presence of a metal containing catalyst.


CLS 560/100
TXT Naphthyl in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 8 wherein the acid radical contains the naphthyl
    group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/101
TXT Plural rings bonded directly to the same carbon in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 8 wherein the acid radical contains two
    carbocyclic nuclei attached to a noncarbonylic methylene group.

    (1)     Note.  Compounds wherein two carbocyclic nuclei are attached to a
    carbonyl group are classified in subclass 52.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/102
TXT Rings bonded directly to each other in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 8 wherein the acid radical contains a carbocyclic
    nucleus directly linked to another carbocyclic nucleus through a covalent
    bond.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/103
TXT Monocyclic acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 8 wherein the acid radical contains only one
    carbocyclic group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/104
TXT Additional unsaturation in acid moiety:
    Compounds under subclass 103 wherein the acid radical contains an ethylenic
    double bond or a triple bond.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/105
TXT Carboxyl, not bonded directly to a ring, in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 103 wherein the carboxyl group of the acid radical
    is not directly attached to the carbocyclic group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/106
TXT Ring in alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 103 wherein the alcohol moiety contains a
    carbocyclic group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/107
TXT Plural rings in alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 106 wherein the alcohol moiety contains more than
    one carbocyclic group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    552,    Organic Compounds, subclass 653 for esters of Vitamin D compounds,
    cholecalciferols, activated 7-dehydrocholesterols, dihydrotachysterols, 3-5
    cyclovitamin D compounds, etc.


CLS 560/108
TXT Esterified phenolic hydroxy:

    Compounds under subclass 107 wherein the ester function is formed with a
    phenolic OH group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/109
TXT Esterified phenolic hydroxy:

    Compounds under subclass 106 in which the ester function is formed with a
    phenolic OH group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/110
TXT Nitrogen in alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 103 wherein the alcohol moiety contains nitrogen
    covalently bonded.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/111
TXT Halogen in alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 103 wherein the alcohol moiety contains a
    covalently bonded halogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/112
TXT Polyoxy alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 103 wherein the alcohol moiety is an acyclic
    polyoxy alcohol, which in addition to the esterified PH, contains at least
    one other oxy group, -OX wherein X may be C, H, an alcoholate forming group
    not provided for above, or an acyl group not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/113
TXT Unsaturation in alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 103 wherein the alcohol moiety contains an
    ethylenic double bond or a triple bond.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/114
TXT Preparing alicyclic acid esters by carbonylation:

    Processes under subclass 1 wherein an alicyclic acid ester is prepared
    through formation of a carboxyl group on a starting material by reaction
    with a carbonylating agent such as carbon monoxide in the presence of an
    alcohol or through subsequent esterification.


CLS 560/115
TXT Alicyclic carbamates:

    Compounds under subclass 1 in which the acid radical contains an alicyclic
    nucleus and a nitrogen directly attached to the carbon of an esterified
    carboxyl group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/116
TXT Plural alicyclic rings in acid moiety:
    Compounds under subclass 1 in which the acid radical contains more than one
    alicyclic group.

    (1)     Note.  Compounds containing the hydrophenanthrene nucleus are
    placed in subclasses 5+.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/117
TXT Tricyclo ring system in acid moiety:
    Compounds under subclass 116 in which the acid radical contains three
    alicyclic groups which are joined to each other either through ortho fusion
    or by a bridge.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/118
TXT Two rings only in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 116 in which the acid radical contains two
    alicyclic groups.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/119
TXT Ortho fused:

    Compounds under subclass 118 in which the acid radical contains two
    alicyclic groups joined through two ortho positioned carbon atoms.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/120
TXT 2,2,1-bicyclo:

    Compounds under subclass 118 in which the acid radical contains a
    2,2,1-bicyclo nucleus.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/121
TXT Cyclopentyl in acid moiety (e.g., prostaglandins, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 1 in which the acid radical contains a cyclopentyl
    group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains the class of compounds known as
    prostaglandins.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/122
TXT Cyclopentyl - (C)x - COOR; x=0-2:

    Compounds under subclass 121 wherein the carboxylic acid ester function is
    directly attached to the cyclopentyl nucleus or is attached thereto by a
    chain of no more than two carbon atoms.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/123
TXT Cyclobutyl in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 1 wherein the acid radical contains a cyclobutyl
    group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/124
TXT Cyclopropyl in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 1 wherein the acid radical contains a cyclopropyl
    group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/125
TXT Alicyclic acid moiety containing N, S, P, B or halogen:

    Compounds under subclass 1 wherein the acid radical contains an alicyclic
    nucleus not provided for above and contains nitrogen, sulfur, phosphorus,
    boron or halogen covalently bonded.

    (1)     Note.  This subclss contains, for example:


CLS 560/126
TXT Alicyclic acid moiety containing oxy, aldehyde or ketone group:

    Compounds under subclass 1 wherein the acid radical contains an alicyclic
    nucleus not provided for above and contains the group-C(=O)X bonded to
    carbon, where X is C or H; or the group -OX attached to a noncarbonylic
    carbon where X is C, H, an alcoholate forming group not provided for above,
    or an acyl group not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/127
TXT Alicyclic polycarboxylic acid moiety:
    Compounds under subclass 1 which contain an alicyclic nucleus not provided
    for above and contain more than one carboxyl group, at least one of which
    is esterified.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also includes compounds wherein any
    unesterified carboxyl group may be present as a free acid or has been
    converted into a salt or acid halide.  However, those compounds wherein a
    carboxyl group has been converted into an amide group are found in subclass
    125.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/128
TXT Alicyclic acid moiety containing unsaturation:

    Compounds under subclass 1 wherein the acid radical contains an alicyclic
    nucleus not provided for above and contains an ethylenic double bond or a
    triple bond.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/129
TXT Acyclic acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 1 wherein the acid radical contains no carbocyclic
    nucleus.

    (1)     Note.  For esters of higher fatty acids, see Class 260, subclasses
    398+, particularly subclasses 410+.

    (2)     Note.  For synthetic resins which are esters, see appropriate
    subclasses in Class 526, particularly subclass 309.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/130
TXT Esterified phenolic hydroxy:

    Compounds under subclass 129 wherein the carboxyl group is esterified by a
    phenolic hydroxyl group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/131
TXT Preparing esters by oxidation:

    Processes under subclass 130 whereby phenolic esters are produced by the
    reaction of a starting material with oxygen or an oxygen producing material.


CLS 560/132
TXT Carbamic acid:

    Compounds under subclass 130 wherein the acid radical contains nitrogen
    directly attached to the carbon of an esterified carboxyl group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/133
TXT Plural rings in phenolic moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 132 wherein the phenolic moiety contains more than
    one carbocyclic group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/134
TXT Ortho fused:

    Compounds under subclass 133 wherein the carbocyclic groups are joined
    through two ortho positioned carbon atoms.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/135
TXT Sulfur in phenolic moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 132 wherein the phenolic moiety contains sulfur
    covalently bonded.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/136
TXT Nitrogen in phenolic moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 132 wherein the phenolic moiety contains nitrogen
    covalently bonded.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/137
TXT Sulfur, halogen or additional nitrogen or oxygen in carbamic acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 132 wherein the acid radical contains sulfur,
    halogen or nitrogen or oxygen in addition to that present in the carbamic
    acid group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/138
TXT Plural rings in phenolic moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 130 wherein the phenolic moiety contains more than
    one carbocyclic group.

    (1)     Note.  See subclasses 133+ for polycyclic phenolic esters of
    carbamic acids.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/139
TXT Ortho fused:

    Compounds under subclass 138 wherein the carbocyclic groups of the phenolic
    moiety are joined through two ortho positioned carbon atoms.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/140
TXT Plural rings bonded directly to the same carbon in phenolic moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 138 wherein the phenolic moiety contains two
    carbocyclic groups attached to a methylene or carbonyl group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/141
TXT Rings bonded directly to each other in phenolic moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 138 wherein the phenolic moiety contains two
    carbocyclic groups joined to each other through a covalent bond.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/142
TXT Nitrogen or sulfur in phenolic moiety:
    Compounds under subclass 130 wherein the phenolic moiety contains sulfur or
    nitrogen covalently bonded.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/143
TXT Salicylic acid or functional derivative:
    Compounds under subclass 130 wherein the phenolic moiety is salicyclic
    acid, its salts, acid halides or anhydrides not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 142 for acylated salicyclic acid amides.

    (2)     Note.  See subclass 71 for esters for salicyclic acid.

    (3)     Note.  See subclass 138 for esters of salicylic acid anhydride per
    se and substituted derivatives thereof.

    (4)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/144
TXT Polyoxy phenolic moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 130 wherein the phenolic moiety contains, in
    addition to the esterified hydroxyl group, an -OX group attached to a
    noncarbonylic carbon, where X is C, H, an alcoholate forming group not
    provided for above, or an acyl group not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example:


CLS 560/145
TXT Sulfur, nitrogen, halogen, oxy, or aldehyde or ketone group in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 130 wherein the acid radical contains sulfur,
    nitrogen or halogen covalently bonded; or an -OX group attached to
    noncarbonylic carbon, where X is C, H, an alcoholate forming group not
    provided for above, or an acyl group not provided for above; or a -C(=O)X
    group bonded to carbon, where X is C or H.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/146
TXT Polycarboxylic acid:

    Compounds under subclass 130 wherein the acid radical contains more than
    one carboxyl group, at least one of which is esterified.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also contains compounds wherein an
    unesterified carboxyl may be present in free acid form or it has been
    converted into a salt or an acid halide.  Where an unesterified carboxyl
    has been converted into an amide, see subclass 145.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/147
TXT Sulfur in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 129 wherein the acid radical contains sulfur
    covalently bonded.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/148
TXT Carbamic acid:

    Compounds under subclass 147 wherein the acid radical contains nitrogen
    directly attached to the carbon of an esterified carboxyl group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/149
TXT Sulfoxy in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 147 wherein the acid radical contains sulfur
    bonded to oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains compounds which have a sulfonic acid
    moiety or its salt or acid halide.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/150
TXT Sulfonyl or sulfinyl in acid moiety:
    Compounds under subclass 149 wherein the acid radical contains the sulfinyl
    group, R-S(=O)-R or the sulfonyl group,

    R-S(=O)2R.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/151
TXT Polycarboxylic acid:

    Compounds under subclass 149 wherein the acid radical contains more than
    one carboxyl group, at least one of which is esterified.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also contains compounds wherein an
    unesterified carboxyl group may appear in free acid form or has been
    converted into a salt or an acid halide.  Where an unesterified carboxyl
    has been converted into an amide, see subclass 149 or subclass 150 above.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/152
TXT Thio ether in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 147 wherein the acid radical contains the group,
    R-S-R.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/153
TXT Nitrogen or halogen in acid moiety:
    Compounds under subclass 152 wherein the acid radical contains nitrogen or
    halogen covalently bonded.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/154
TXT Polycarboxylic acid:

    Compounds under subclass 152 wherein the acid radical contains more than
    one carboxyl group, at least one of which is esterified.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also contains compounds wherein an
    unesterified carboxyl may appear in the form of a free acid or has been
    converted into a salt or an acid halide.  Where an unesterified carboxyl
    has been converted into an amide, see subclass 153 above.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/155
TXT Nitrogen in acid moiety other than as nitroso or isocyanate (e.g., amino
    acid esters, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 129 wherein the acid radical contains covalently
    bonded nitrogen other than in the form of isocyanate or nitroso groups.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/156
TXT Nitro bonded to carbon in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 155 wherein the acid radical contains the group
    -N(=O)2 bonded to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/157
TXT Carbamic acid:

    Compounds under subclass 155 wherein the acid radical contains a nitrogen
    directly attached to the carbon of an esterified carboxyl group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/158
TXT Polycarbamic:

    Compounds under subclass 157 wherein the acid radical contains more than
    one carbamic acid group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also contains compounds, where an unesterified
    carbamic acid group may appear in the form of a free acid or may be
    converted into a salt or acid halide.  Where an unesterified carbamic acid
    group has been converted into an amide and only one esterified carbamic
    acid group is present, the compound is placed in the appropriate subclass
    dealing with monocarbamic acid esters.


CLS 560/159
TXT Addition nitrogen in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 157 wherein the acid radical contains covalently
    bonded nitrogen in addition to that present in the carbamic acid group.

    (1)     Note.  The additional nitrogen may be present in the form of an
    isocyanate or nitroso group.

    (2)     Note.  See subclass 156 for nitro containing carbamic acid esters.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/160
TXT Oxy in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 157 wherein the acid radical contains an -OX group
    attached to a noncarbonylic carbon, where X=C, H, an alcoholate forming
    group not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/161
TXT Halogen in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 157 wherein the acid radical contains covalently
    bonded halogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/162
TXT Cyclic alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 157 wherein the alcohol moiety contains a
    carbocyclic group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/163
TXT Aromatic alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 162 wherein the alcohol moiety of the ester
    contains an aromatic group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/164
TXT Polyoxy alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 163 wherein the alcohol moiety of the ester
    contains in addition to the esterified OH group, at least one other -OX
    group attached to a noncarbonylic carbon, where X may be C, H, an
    alcoholate forming group not provided for above, or an acyl group not
    provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/165
TXT Sulfur or nitrogen in alcohol moiety:
    Compounds under subclass 157 wherein the alcohol moiety of the ester
    contains covalently bonded nitrogen or sulfur.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/166
TXT Polyoxy alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 157 wherein the alcohol moiety is acyclic and in
    addition to the esterified OH group contains another -OX attached to a
    noncarbonylic carbon and X may be C, H, an alcoholate forming group not
    provided for above, or an acyl group not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/167
TXT Halogen in alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 157 wherein the alcohol moiety of the ester
    contains covalently bonded halogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/168
TXT Amidine, azomethine, ketimine or oxime in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 155 in which the acid radical contains the group
    =N-C=N- or the C=N-, identical with the structure obtained by reacting an
    aldehyde or ketone with ammonia or an amine.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/169
TXT Additional nitrogen in acid moiety:
    Compounds under subclass 155 in which the acid radical contains more than
    one covalently bonded nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  The additional nitrogen may be in the form of an isocyanate
    or a nitroso group.

    (2)     Note.  See subclass 156 for nitro containing carboxylic acid esters.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/170
TXT Oxy, aldehyde or ketone group in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 155 wherein the acid radical contains the group
    -C(=O)X bonded to carbon, where X is C or H; or the group -OX attached to a
    noncarbonylic carbon, where X is C, H, and alcoholate forming group not
    provided for above, or an acyl group not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/171
TXT Polycarboxylic acid:

    Compounds under subclass 155 wherein the acid radical contains more than
    one carboxyl group, at least one of which is esterified.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also includes compounds wherein any
    unesterified carboxyl group may appear in free acid form or has been
    converted into a salt or acid halide.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/172
TXT Halogen or unsaturation in acid moiety:
    Compounds under subclass 155 wherein the acid radical contains covalently
    bonded halogen or contains an ethylenic double bond or a triple bond.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/173
TXT Cyclic alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 155 wherein the alcohol moiety of the ester
    contains a carbocyclic group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/174
TXT Aldehyde or ketone group in acid moiety:
    Compounds under subclass 129 wherein the acid radical contains the group
    -C(=O)X attached to carbon, where X is C or H.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/175
TXT Preparing esters by carbonylation:
    Processes under subclass 174 wherein the ester is prepared through
    formation of a carboxyl group of a starting material by reaction with a
    carbonylating agent such as carbon monoxide either in the presence of an
    alcohol or by subsequent esterification of the formed acid.


CLS 560/176
TXT Polycarboxylic acid:

    Compounds under subclass 174 wherein the acid radical contains more than
    one carboxyl group, at least one of which is esterified.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also includes compounds wherein any
    unesterified carboxyl group may be present in free acid form or has been
    converted into a salt or acid halide.  Where the carboxyl group has been
    converted into an amide, the compound is classified in subclasses 155+.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/177
TXT Aldehyde group in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 174 wherein the acid radical contains the aldehyde
    group-C(=O)H.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/178
TXT Acetoacetic acid:

    Compounds under subclass 174 which are esters of acetoacetic acid, per se.

    (1)     Note.  For substituted derivatives of acetoacetic acid esters, see
    the appropriate subclasses above.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/179
TXT Oxy in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 129 wherein the acid radical contains the -OX
    group attached to a noncarbonylic carbon, where X may be C, H, an
    alcoholate forming group not provided for above, or an acyl group not
    provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/180
TXT Polycarboxylic acid:

    Compounds under subclass 179 wherein the acid radical contains more than
    one carboxyl group, at least one of which is esterified.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also contains compounds wherein an
    unesterified carboxyl may appear in free acid form or has been converted
    into a salt or acid halide.  Where the carboxyl group has been converted
    into an amide, the compound is classified in subclasses 155+.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/181
TXT Unsaturation in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 180 wherein the acid radical contains an ethylenic
    double bond or a triple bond.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/182
TXT Polyoxy alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 180 wherein the alcohol moiety of the ester
    contains in addition to the esterified OH group, an -OX group attached to a
    noncarbonylic carbon, wherein X may be C, H, an alcoholate forming group
    not provided for above, or an acyl group not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/183
TXT Unsaturation in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 179 wherein the acid radical contains an ethylenic
    double bond or a triple bond.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/184
TXT Halogen in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 179 wherein the acid radical contains covalently
    bonded halogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/185
TXT Acylated oxy in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 179 wherein a hydroxy group of the esterified acid
    radical has been esterified by an acyl group not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  Lactyl lactate is classified in subclass 179, but lactyl
    acetoxy lactate is placed here.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/186
TXT Polyoxy acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 179 wherein the acid radical contains more than
    one oxy group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/187
TXT Alkoxy in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 179 wherein the X of the -OX group in the acid
    radical is C which is part of an alkyl group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/188
TXT Cyclic alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 179 wherein the alcohol moiety of the ester
    contains a carbocyclic group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/189
TXT Polyoxy alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 179 wherein the alcohol moiety of the ester
    contains, in addition to the esterified OH, another -OX group attached to a
    noncarbonylic C, where X may be C, H, an alcoholate forming group not
    provided for above, or an acyl group not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/190
TXT Polycarboxylic acid:

    Compounds under subclass 129 which contain more than one carboxyl group, at
    least one of which is esterified.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also contains compounds wherein an
    unesterified carboxyl may be present in free acid form or has been
    converted into a salt or an acid halide.  Where an unesterified carboxyl
    has been converted into an amide, see subclasses 155+.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/191
TXT Purification or recovery:

    Processes under subclass 190 which are directed to the purification,
    separation or recovery of acyclic polycarboxylic acid esters.


CLS 560/192
TXT Halogen in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 190 wherein the acid radical contains halogen
    covalently bonded.

    (1)     Note.  For the purpose of this subclass, compounds wherein an
    unesterified carboxyl has been converted into an acyl halide are not
    considered halogenated acids.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/193
TXT Cyclic alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 190 wherein the alcohol moiety of the ester
    contains a carbocyclic group not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/194
TXT Plural rings in alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 193 wherein the alcohol moiety of the ester
    contains more than one carbocyclic group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/195
TXT Phosphorus or sulfur in alcohol moiety:
    Compounds under subclass 190  wherein the alcohol moiety of the ester
    contains sulfur or phosphorus covalently bonded.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/196
TXT Nitrogen in alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 190 wherein the alcohol moiety of the ester
    contains nitrogen covalently bonded.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/197
TXT Halogen in alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 190 wherein the alcohol moiety of the ester
    contains halogen covalently bonded.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/198
TXT Polyoxy alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 190 wherein the alcohol moiety of the ester
    contains, in addition to the esterified OH, an -OX attached to a
    noncarbonylic C, where X may be C, H, and alcoholate forming group not
    provided for above, or an acyl group not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/199
TXT Additional monooxy alcohol or monocarboxylic acid (e.g., complex esters,
    etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 198 in which an additional monohydric alcohol or
    monocarboxylic acid or both have been reacted.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes the so-called "complex esters" which
    fall into the following three categories:

    I.      Monocarboxylic acid - polyhydric alcohol - (polycarboxylic acid -
    polyhydric alcohol)x - Monocarboxylic acid.

    II.     Monohydric alcohol - polycarboxylic acid - (polyhydric alcohol -
    polycarboxylic acid)x - Monohydric alcohol.

    III.    Monohydric alcohol - (polycarboxylic acid - polydydric alcohol)x -
    Monocarboxylic acid.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example:


CLS 560/200
TXT Preparing esters from alkylene oxides:
    Processes under subclass 198 in which an acyclic polycarboxylic acid ester
    is produced by reaction with an alkylene oxide.


CLS 560/201
TXT Unsaturation in alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 190 wherein the alcoholic moiety of the ester
    contains an ethylenic double bond or a triple bond.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/202
TXT Preparing esters by oligomerization:
    Processes under subclass 190 in which a polycarboxylic acid ester is
    prepared by interacting two to four monomeric units.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also includes, for example, processes known as
    reductive coupling.


CLS 560/203
TXT Preparing esters by alkylation or isomerization:

    Processes under subclass 190 in which a polycarboxylic acid ester is
    produced (a) by introducing an alkyl or alkylidene radical on the acid
    moiety, or (b) by forming an isomer of the starting material.


CLS 560/204
TXT Preparing esters by esterification or carbonylation:

    Processes under subclass 190 in which a polycarboxylic acid ester is
    produced (a) by a reaction which forms an ester linkage, or (b) by
    formation of a carboxyl group on a starting material by reaction with a
    carbonylating agent such as carbon monoxide with simulatenous or subsequent
    esterification of the acid with an alcohol.


CLS 560/205
TXT Unsaturation in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 129 wherein the acid radical contains an ethylenic
    double bond or a triple bond.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/206
TXT Preparing esters by carbonylation:
    Processes under subclass 205 wherein an unsaturated acid ester is prepared
    through formation of a carboxyl group on a starting material by reaction
    with a carbonylating agent such as carbon monoxide in the presence of an
    alcohol or by subsequent esterification of the formed acid.


CLS 560/207
TXT Group VIII noble metal catalyst utilized:
    Processes under subclass 206 wherein the carbonylating is carried out in
    the presence of a catalyst which contains a noble metal from Group VIII,
    i.e., iridium, osmium, palladium, platinum, rhodium or rubidium.


CLS 560/208
TXT Formation of carboxyl group by oxidation:
    Processes under subclass 205 wherein the ester is produced by treatment of
    a starting material, such as an olefin or an aldehyde with oxygen or an
    oxygen producing material and esterifying the resulting acid.


CLS 560/209
TXT Preparing esters from alkylene oxides:
    Processes under subclass 205 wherein the ester is produced by a reaction,
    where one of the reactants is an alkylene oxide.


CLS 560/210
TXT Preparing esters from aldehydes:

    Processes under subclass 205 wherein the ester is prepared from an aldehyde.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example, processes of condensing
    an unsaturated aldehyde with a metal alcoholate or a saturated
    monocarboxylic acid ester.

    (2)     Note.  For processes involving the oxidation of an aldehyde, see
    subclass 208.


CLS 560/211
TXT Formation of ethylenic unsaturation:
    Processes under subclass 205 wherein the ester is produced by treating a
    monocarboxylic acid or ester to introduce unsaturation and may include
    subsequent esterification.


CLS 560/212
TXT By dehydration or dealcoholization:
    Processes under subclass 211 wherein unsaturation is introduced by removal
    of an -OX group, where X is H or C.


CLS 560/213
TXT By dehalogenation or dehydrohalogenation:
    Processes under subclass 211 wherein unsaturation is introduced by removal
    of a halogen or a hydrohalide.


CLS 560/214
TXT By dehydrogenation:

    Processes under subclass 211 wherein unsaturation is introduced by removal
    of hydrogen.


CLS 560/215
TXT Preparing esters from nitriles or amides:
    Processes under subclass 205 wherein the ester is produced by reaction of a
    nitrile or an amide.


CLS 560/216
TXT Preparing esters by depolymerization:
    Processes under subclass 205 wherein the ester is produced by changing the
    state of a polymeric material to that of a lower polymeric form or to a
    monomer.


CLS 560/217
TXT Preparing esters by ester interchange:
    Processes under subclass 205 wherein the ester is produced by reaction of
    an ester with an alcohol, an acid or an ester to produce a different ester.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes processes where a sulfonic acid ester
    is used as the source of a replacing alcohol moiety, but does not include
    those processes wherein the sulfate is produced as a transitory
    intermediate in sulfuric acid catalyzed reactions.


CLS 560/218
TXT Purification or recovery:

    Processes under subclass 205 which are directed to the purification,
    recovery or separation of acyclic, unsaturated monoacrboxylic acid esters.


CLS 560/219
TXT Halogen in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 205 wherein the acid radical contains covalently
    bonded halogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/220
TXT Cyclic alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 205 wherein the alcohol moiety of the ester
    contains a carbocyclic group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/221
TXT Aromatic alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 220 wherein the carbocyclic group of the alcohol
    moiety is aromatic.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/222
TXT Phosphorus, sulfur or nitrogen in alcohol moiety:

    Compound under subclass 205 wherein the alcohol moiety contains phosphorus
    or sulfur or nitrogen covalently bonded.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/223
TXT Halogen in alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 205 wherein the alcohol moiety contains covalently
    bonded halogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/224
TXT Polyoxy alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 205 wherein the alcohol moiety contains in
    addition to the esterified hydroxyl group, an -OX group attached to a
    noncarbonylic carbon, where X may be C, H, an alcoholate forming group not
    provided for above, or an acyl group not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/225
TXT Unsaturation in alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 205 wherein the alcohol moiety contains an
    ethylenic double bond or a triple bond.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/226
TXT Halogen in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 129 wherein the acid radical contains covalently
    bonded halogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/227
TXT Flourine in acid moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 226 wherein the halogen is flourine.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/228
TXT Cyclic alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 226 wherein the alcohol moiety contains a
    carbocyclic group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/229
TXT Halogen in alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 226 wherein the alcohol moiety contains covalently
    bonded halogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/230
TXT Polyoxyl alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 226 wherein the alcohol moiety contains, in
    addition to the esterified hydroxyl, an -OX group attached to a
    noncarbonylic carbon, where X is C, H, an alcoholate forming group not
    provided for above, or an acyl group not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/231
TXT Unsubstituted acids of the acetic series:
    Compounds under subclass 129 wherein the acid radical is saturated,
    unsubstituted, contains less than seven carbon atoms in an unbroken chain
    attached to a carboxyl group, and has the formula CnH2n+1COOR.

    (1)     Note.  For esters of higher fatty acids, see Class 554, subclasses
    1+.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/232
TXT Preparing esters by carbonylation:
    Processes under subclass 231 wherein the ester is prepared through
    formation of a carboxyl group on a starting material by reaction with a
    carbonylating agent such as carbon monoxide in the presence of an alcohol
    or by subsequent esterfication.


CLS 560/233
TXT Of olefins:

    Processes under subclass 232 wherein the starting material is an olefin.


CLS 560/234
TXT Preparing esters by ester interchange:
    Processes under subclass 231 wherein the ester is produced by reacting an
    ester with an alcohol, an acid or another ester to produce a different
    ester.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example:


CLS 560/235
TXT From alkyl sulfates:

    Processes under subclass 234 wherein an alkyl sulfate is used as the source
    of another alcohol.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/236
TXT Preparing esters from halogenated hydrocarbons:

    Processes under subclass 231 wherein the ester is prepared from a
    halogenated hydrocarbon.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/237
TXT From alkenyl halides:

    Processes under subclass 236 wherein the halogenated hydrocarbon is an
    alkenyl halide, e.g., vinyl chloride.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example:


CLS 560/238
TXT Preparing esters from aldehydes:

    Processes under subclass 231 wherein the ester is prepared from an aldehyde.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/239
TXT Preparing esters by dehydrogenation of alcohols:

    Processes under subclass 231 wherein the ester is prepared by
    dehydrogenation of an alcohol.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/240
TXT Preparing esters from ethers:

    Processes under subclass 231 wherein the ester is prepared from an ether,
    including cyclic ethers.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for examples:


CLS 560/241
TXT Preparing esters from hydrocarbons:
    Processes under subclass 231 wherein the ester is prepared from a
    hydrocarbon.


CLS 560/241.1
TXT By oxidation of hydrocarbon mixtures:
    Processes under subclass 241 wherein the ester is prepared by oxidizing a
    mixture of hydrocarbons.


CLS 560/242
TXT From acetylenic hydrocarbons:

    Processes under subclass 241 wherein the hydrocarbon contains a triple bond.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/243
TXT From olefins utilizing group viii noble metal catalyst:

    Processes under subclass 241 wherein the hydrocarbon is an olefin and the
    reaction is carried out in the presence of a catalyst containing a Group
    VIII noble metal.

    (1)     Note.  Group VIII noble metals are iridium, osmium, palladium,
    platinum, rhodium and rubidium.


CLS 560/244
TXT From polyolefins:

    Processes under subclass 243 wherein the olefin contains more than one
    double bond, e.g., butadiene.


CLS 560/245
TXT Gas phase:

    Processes under subclass 243 wherein the reaction is carried out in a gas
    or vapor phase.


CLS 560/246
TXT Preparing polyoxy alcohol esters from olefins:

    Processes under subclass 241 wherein the ester is prepared from an olefin
    and is equivalent in structure to an ester prepared from a polyoxy alcohol.


CLS 560/247
TXT Preparing alkyl esters from olefins:
    Processes under subclass 241 wherein the ester is prepared from an olefin
    and is equivalent in structure to an ester prepared from an acyclic
    saturated monooxy alcohol.


CLS 560/248
TXT Purification or recovery:

    Processes under subclass 231 which are directed to the purification,
    separation or recovery of esters of unsubstituted acids of the acetic acid
    series.


CLS 560/249
TXT Terpene alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 231 in which the alcohol moiety of the ester is a
    terpene.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/250
TXT Nitrogen in alcohol moiety other than as nitro, nitroso, or isocyanate:

    Compounds under subclass 231 in which the alcohol moiety contains nitrogen
    other than in the form of an isocyanate, nitroso or nitro group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:



CLS 560/251
TXT Plural nitrogens in alcohol moiety:
    Compounds under subclass 250 wherein the alcohol moiety contains more than
    one nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  The additional nitrogen may be in the form of an isocyanate,
    nitroso or nitro group.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/252
TXT Polyoxy alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 250 wherein the alcohol moiety contains, in
    addition to the esterified OH group, another -OX group attached to a
    noncarbonylic C, whre X may be C, H, an alcoholate forming group not
    provided for above, or an acyl group not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/253
TXT Acyclic alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 250 wherein the alcohol moiety is acyclic.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/254
TXT Aromatic alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 231 wherein the alcohol moiety contains a benzene
    ring and is not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  For esters of unsubstituted acids of the acetic acid series
    with phenols, see subclasses 130+.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/255
TXT Plural rings in alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 254 wherein the alcohol moiety contains at least
    one additional carbocyclic group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/256
TXT Polycyclo - alicyclic ring system in alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 231 wherein the alcohol moiety contains a
    polyalicyclic nucleus in which the rings are joined either through two
    ortho positioned carbons or through a carbon bridge or both.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    552,    Organic Compounds, subclass 653 for esters of Vitamin D compounds,
    cholecalciferols, activated 7-dehydrocholesterols, dihydrotachysterols, 3-5
    cyclovitamin D compounds, etc.


CLS 560/257
TXT Nor- or homo-cyclopentanohydrophenan-threnes:

    Compounds under subclass 256 wherein the alcohol moiety contains the
    structure:



    wherein  is 0-2, but all n's may not be equal to 1 at the same time.

    (1)     Note.  For compounds where all n's are equal to 1, see Class 552,
    subclasses 502+.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/258
TXT Nor-a ring:

    Compounds under subclass 257 wherein n=0 in the A ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/259
TXT 2, 6, 6-trialkyl cyclohexenyl in alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 231 wherein the alcohol moiety is charcterized by
    the presence of a 2, 6, 6-trialkyl cyclohexenyl group, e.g., carotenes.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/260
TXT Vitamin a alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 259 wherein the alcohol moiety is Vitamin A.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/261
TXT Acyclic alcohol moiety having unsaturation: Compounds under subclass 231
    wherein the alcohol moiety is acyclic and contains an ethylenic doule bond
    or a triple bond.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/262
TXT Substituted:

    Compounds under subclass 261 wherein the alcohol moiety contains a
    substituent other than a hydrocarbon and is not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/263
TXT Acyclic polyoxy alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 231 wherein the alcohol moiety is acyclic and
    contains in addition to the esterified OH group, another -OX group attached
    to a noncarbonylic C, where X may be C, H, an alcoholate forming group not
    provided for above, or an acyl group not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/264
TXT Substituted:

    Compounds under subclass 263 wherein the alcohol moiety contains a
    substituent other than a hydrocarbon and is not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/265
TXT Acyclic monohydric alcohol moiety:

    Compounds under subclass 231 wherein the alcohol moiety is acyclic,
    saturated and has no oxy group other than the one which is esterified.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/266
TXT Substituted:

    Compounds under subclass 265 wherein the alcohol moiety contains a
    substituent other than a hydrocarbon and is not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 560/300
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 wherein the hypoholite group,
    -O-halo, or the perhypohalite group, -O-O-halo, is bonded directly to
    carbon, which carbon may be single bonded to any atom but may be multiple
    bonded only to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for herein are:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    206, 213, and 214 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste
    containing halogen.


CLS 560/301
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 wherein the cyanate group, -O-C N
    is bonded directly to carbon, which carbon may be single bonded to any atom
    but may be multiple bonded only to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    215-222 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    oxygen and nitrogen.


CLS 560/302
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 having the group -C(=X)-X-nX-,
    wherein the X's may be the same or diverse chalcogens (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium or tellurium), nX is a divalent chalcogen or a chain of
    divalent chalcogens, and a single bonded X is bonded directly to carbon,
    which carbon may be single bonded to any atom but may be multiple bonded
    only to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided   for herein are:


    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    215-222 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    chalcogens or nitrogen.


CLS 560/303
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 having the sulfohydroxamate group
    or a chalcogen analogue thereof, -S(=O)(=O-NH-X-wherein X is chalcogen
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium) and substitution may be made
    for hydrogen only, and wherein the X is bonded directly to carbon, which
    carbon may be single bonded to any atom but may be multiple bonded only to
    carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses 213
    and 222 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    halogen, chalcogen, or nitrogen.


CLS 560/304
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 wherein the peroxynitrate group,
    -O-O-N(=O)(=O), is bonded directly to carbon, which carbon may be single
    bonded to any atom but may be multiple bonded only to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    215-222 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    oxygen or nitrogen.


CLS 560/305
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 having the -X-X- group, wherein the
    X's are the same or diverse chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium), bonded directly to boron and to carbon, which carbon may be
    single bonded to any atom but may be multiple bonded only to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    215-219 for the destruction  of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    chalcogens.


CLS 560/306
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 wherein the perhalate group,
    -O-halo(=O)(=O)(=O), is bonded directly to carbon which carbon may be
    single bonded to any atom but may be multiple bonded only to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    215-219 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    oxygen.


CLS 560/307
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 having the -S(=O)(=O)-S- group
    wherein the divalent sulfur is bonded directly to carbon, which carbon may
    be single bonded to any atom but may be multiple bonded only to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses 206
    and 213-219 for  the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste
    containing halogens or chalcogens.


CLS 560/308
TXT Compounds under subclass 307 wherein the hexavalent sulfur of the
    -S(=O)(=O)-S- group is bonded directly to oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 560/309
TXT Compound under subclass 308 wherein the -S(=O)(=O)-S- group is attached
    indirectly to nitrogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 560/310
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 having the -S-(=O)-S- group wherein
    the divalent sulfur is bonnded directly to carbon, which carbon may be
    single bonded to any atom but may be multiple bonded only to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    215-219 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    chalcogens.


CLS 560/311
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 having the perhydroxamate group or
    a chalcogen analogue thereof, -C(=X)-NH-X-X-, wherein the X's may be the
    same or diverse chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium)
    and substitution may be made for hydrogen only, and wherein the single
    bonded X is bonded directly to carbon, which carbon may be single bonded to
    any atom but may be multiple bonded only to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    215-222 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    chalcogens or nitrogen.


CLS 560/312
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 having the hydroxmate group or a
    chalcogen analogue thereof, -C(=X)-NH-X-, wherein the X's may be the same
    or diverse chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium) and
    substitution may be made for hydrogen only, and wherein the single bonded X
    is bonded directly to carbon, which carbon may be single bonded to any atom
    but may be multiple bonded only to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein  are:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    215-222 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    chalcogen and nitrogen.


CLS 560/313
TXT Compounds under subclass 312 wherein the carbon of the -C(=X)-NH-X- group
    is bonded directly to nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 560/314
TXT Compounds under subclass 313 wherein the substituent nitrogen is bonded
    directly to acyclic or alicyclic carbon, or wherein the single bonded X is
    sulfur.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for  herein are:


CLS 560/315
TXT Compounds under subclass 312 wherein the carbon of the -C(=X)-NH-X- group
    is bonded directly to a carbocyclic ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein are:


CLS 560/316
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 wherein the hyponitrite group,
    -O-N=N-O-, is bonded directly to carbon, which carbon may be single bonded
    to any atom but may be multiple bonded only to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    215-222 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    oxygen or nitrogen.


CLS 560/317
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 wherein the -N=S=O group is bonded
    directly to carbon, which carbon may be single bonded to any atom but may
    be multiple bonded only to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    206-222 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    halogen, sulfur, oxygen, or nitrogen.


CLS 560/318
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 wherein the terminal oxygen of a
    -S(=O)(=O)-O-O- group is bonded directly to carbon, which carbon may be
    single bonded to any atom but may be multiple bonded only to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein  is:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    215-219 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    sulfur and oxygen.


CLS 560/319
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 wherein the perthioimidate
    group,       HN=CH-S-S-, may be single bonded directly to any atom but may
    be multiple bonded only to carbon, and substitution may be made for
    hydrogen only.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste  Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    206-222 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    halogen, sulfur, or nitrogen.


CLS 560/330
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 wherein the isocyanate group,
    -N=C=O, is bonded directly to carbon, which carbon may be single bonded to
    any atom but may be multiple bonded only to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    206-222 for the destruction  of organic hazardous or toxic waste
    containing, halogen, oxygen, sulfur, phosphorus, or nitrogen.


CLS 560/331
TXT Products under subclass 330 which contain an isocyanate ester in admixture
    with a preserving or stabilizing agent whose sole function is to prevent
    physical or chemical change.


CLS 560/332
TXT Products under subclass 331 wherein the preserving or stabilizing agent
    contains nitrogen.


CLS 560/333
TXT Products under subclass 331 wherein the preserving or stabilizing agent
    contains phosphorus, silicon or a phenolic hydroxy group.


CLS 560/334
TXT Compounds under subclass 330 which contain the carbodiimide group, -N=C=N-.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 560/335
TXT Compounds under subclass 330 which contain the biuret group,
    -NH-C(=0)-NH-C(=O) -NH-, wherein substitution may be made for hydrogen only.

    (1)     Note. An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 560/336
TXT Processes under subclass 330 which are directed to the preparation,
    purification, recovery, or treatment in any way of an isocyanate ester.


CLS 560/337
TXT Processes under subclass 336 wherein isocyanic acid, H-N=C=O, or a salt
    thereof, is employed as a reactant.


CLS 560/338
TXT Processes under subclass 336 which involve the formation of the isocyanate
    group, -N=C=O.


CLS 560/339
TXT Process under subclass 338 wherein there is utilized a reactant which
    contains the cyanate group, -O-C=N.


CLS 560/340
TXT Process under subclass 338 wherein there is utilized a reactant which
    contains a hetero ring.


CLS 560/341
TXT Processes under subclass 338 wherein carbon monoxide is utilized in any way.


CLS 560/342
TXT Processes under subclass 341 wherein there is utilized a reactant which
    contains a nitro group bonded directly to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a process provided for herein is:


CLS 560/343
TXT Processes under subclass 338 wherein there is utilized a reactant that
    contains the azide group, -N3.


CLS 560/344
TXT Processes under subclass 338 wherein there is utilized a reactant that
    contains the -NH-C (=O)-NH- group, wherein substitution may be made for
    hydrogen only.


CLS 560/345
TXT Processes under subclass 338 wherein there is utilized a reactant that
    contains the carbamate group, -O-C(=O)-NH, wherein substitution may be made
    for hydrogen only.


CLS 560/346
TXT Processes under subclass 338 wherein there is utilized a reactant that
    contains carbon double or triple bonded to nitrogen.


CLS 560/347
TXT Processes under subclass 338 wherein there is utilized a carbonyl dihalide
    reactant, X-C(=O)-X, wherein X represents halogen.

    (1)     Note.  The classical isocyanate synthesis phosgenation of an amine,
    is provided for herein.


CLS 560/348
TXT Processes under subclass 338 wherein there is utilized a carbamyl halide
    reactant, halo-C(=O)-NH-, wherein substitution may be made for hydrogen
    only.


CLS 560/349
TXT Processes under subclass 336 wherein an isocyanate ester is halogenated.


CLS 560/350
TXT Processes under subclass 336 wherein an isocyanate group on one reactant
    and a different functional group on a second reactant undergo an exchange
    reaction.

    (1)     Note. An example of a process provided for herein  is:


CLS 560/351
TXT Processes under subclass 336 wherein an iscoyanate ester of known structure
    is reacted to yield products of indeterminate structure.


CLS 560/352
TXT Processes under subclass 336 wherein an isocyanate ester is separated from
    impurities, or from the reaction medium.


CLS 560/353
TXT Processes under subclass 352 wherein a metal or an epoxy compound is
    utilized.


CLS 560/354
TXT Compounds under subclass 330 which contain a polycyclo ring system having
    an alicyclic ring as onne of the cyclos.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 560/355
TXT Compounds under subclass 330 wherein the isocyanate group is bonded
    directly to an acyclic carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Example of compounds provided for  herein   are:


CLS 560/356
TXT Compounds under subclass 355 wherein the isocyanate group is attached
    indirectly to halogen by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 560/357
TXT Compounds under subclass 355 wherein the isocyanate group is attached
    indirectly by acyclic nonionic bonding to chalcogen, which is single bonded
    directly to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 560/358
TXT Compounds under subclass 330 wherein the isocyanate group is bonded
    directly to a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 560/359
TXT Compounds under subclass 358 wherein isocyanate groups are bonded directly
    to more than one benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 560/360
TXT Compounds under subclass 358 wherein plural isocyanate groups are bonded
    directly to the same benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/
TTL ORGANIC COMPOUNDS -- PART OF THE CLASS 532-570 SERIES

CLS 562/1
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 which contain the following group,
    wherein H of -OH may be replaced by a Group IA or IIA light metal, or by
    substituted or unsubstituted ammonium:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    215-225 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    oxygen, sulfur nitrogen and group IA or IIA light metals.


CLS 562/2
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 which contain the following group,
    wherein H of -OH may be replaced by a Group IA or IIA light metal, or by
    substituted or unsubstituted ammonium:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    215-225 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    oxygen, nitrogen, and group IA or IIA light metals.


CLS 562/3
TXT Products under subclass 2 wherein the percarboxylic acid is mixed with a
    stabilizing or preserving agent, whose sole function is to prevent physical
    or chemical change.


CLS 562/4
TXT Processes under subclass 2 which involve the formation of the -C(=O)-O-O-H
    group, or the formation of a salt of this group.

    (1)     Note.  The formation of the salt is classified here regardless of
    whether the salt is made from the-C(=O)-O-O-H group, or if it is made by
    other means.


CLS 562/5
TXT Processes under subclass 4 wherein an aldehyde or a percarboxylic acid
    ester is used as a reactant.


CLS 562/6
TXT Processes under subclass 4 wherein a carboxylic acid or a carboxylic acid
    salt is used as a reactant.


CLS 562/7
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 in which boron is attached directly
    to -XH by nonionic bonding, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) and H of -XH may be replaced by a Group IA or IIA
    light metal, or by substituted or unsubstituted ammonium.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for  herein is:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    215-225 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing,
    chalcogens, nitrogen, and group IA or IIA light metals.


CLS 562/8
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 wherein -XH is bonded directly to
    phosphorus by nonionic bonding; the X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) and -H of -XH may be replaced by a Group IA or IIA
    light metal or by substituted or unsubstituted ammonium (i.e., phosphorus
    acid or salt thereof).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses 206
    and 213-225 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste
    containing halogen, chalcogen, phosphorus, nitrogen, and group IA or IIA
    light metals.


CLS 562/9
TXT Compounds under subclass 8 in which sulfur is attached directly to the
    phosphorus by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/10
TXT Compounds under subclass 8 wherein nitrogen is attached directly to the
    phosphorus by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:




CLS 562/11
TXT Compounds under subclass 8 wherein nitrogen is attached indirectly to the
    phosphorus by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for  herein are:


CLS 562/12
TXT Compounds under subclass 11 in which at least two atoms of phosphorus are
    attached indirectly to each other by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein  is:


CLS 562/13
TXT Compounds under subclass 12 in which at least two phosphorus atoms are
    bonded directly to the same carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein is:


CLS 562/14
TXT Compounds under subclass 12 wherein additional nitrogen is attached
    indirectly to the phosphorus by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein  is:


CLS 562/15
TXT Compounds under subclass 11 in which the nitrogen is bonded directly to a
    -C(=X)-group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for  herein is:


CLS 562/16
TXT Compounds under subclass 11 wherein the nitrogen and the phosphorus are
    bonded directly to the same carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for  herein is:


CLS 562/17
TXT Compounds under subclass 16 wherein the nitrogen is bonded directly to an
    additional acyclic carbon or acyclic carbon chain to which a -C(=X)X- group
    is also bonded directly, wherein the X's may be the same or diverse
    chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for herein is:


CLS 562/18
TXT Processes under subclass 17 whereby a compound which contains a
    nitrogen-heterocyclo is utilized in the preparation.


CLS 562/19
TXT Compounds under subclass 8 in which the phosphorus is a ring member.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for  herein  is:


CLS 562/20
TXT Compounds under subclass 8 in which at least two phosphorus atoms are
    attached indirectly to each other by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 562/21
TXT Compounds under subclass 20 wherein the plural phosphorus atoms are bonded
    directly to the same carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 562/22
TXT Processes under subclass 21 for the preparation of compounds having plural
    phosphorus atoms bonded directly to the same carbon or for the treatment of
    such compounds.


CLS 562/23
TXT Compounds under subclass 8 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) is attached indirectly to the phosphorus atom by
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided    for  herein  are:


CLS 562/24
TXT Compounds under subclass 23 in which the chalcogen is in a -C(=X)- group.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:




CLS 562/25
TXT Compounds under subclass 8 in which halogen is attached indirectly to the
    phosphorus atom by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/26
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 which contain the following group,
    wherein the X's may be the same or diverse chalcogens (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium or tellurium), at least one X is sulfur, and H of -XH may
    be replaced by a Group IA or IIA light metal or by substituted or
    unsubstituted  ammonium:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    215-225 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    chalcogen, nitrogen, and group IA or IIA light metals.


CLS 562/27
TXT Compounds under subclass 26 wherein the carbon of the -C(=X)XH group, or of
    its salt, is bonded directly to nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/28
TXT Processes under subclass 27 wherein carbon disulfide is used.

    (1)     Note.  Carbon disulfide is:


CLS 562/29
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 which contain the following group,
    wherein H of -SH may be replaced by a Group IA or IIA light metal, or by
    substituted or unsubstituted ammonium:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    215-225 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    sulfur, nitrogen, and group IA or IIA light metals.


CLS 562/30
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 which contain the following group,
    sulfonate, wherein the single bonded oxygen is bonded directly to hydrogen,
    or to a Group IA or IIA light metal, or to substituted or unsubstituted
    ammonium:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    206-225 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    halogen, chalcogen, nitrogen, phosphorus, and group IA or IIA light metals.


CLS 562/31
TXT Compounds under subclass 30 which contain the hydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  The hydrophenanthrene ring system is depicted by the
    following structure, in which at least one of the rings is not a benzene
    ring:


CLS 562/32
TXT Processes under subclass 30 wherein lignites, leonardites, coal, humic
    acids, bark or pitch is sulfonated to form a sulfonic acid or salt thereof,
    or the reaction products of such processes.


CLS 562/33
TXT Compounds under subclass 30 wherein the sulfur of the sulfonate group is
    bonded directly to carbon of petroleum.

    (1)     Note.  Petroleum is considered as a naturally occurring mixture of
    gaseous, liquid and/or solid hydrocarbons.

    (2)     Note.  In the case of distillable petroleum, a fraction taken over
    a certain boiling point range is regarded as within the scope of this
    subclass, if sulfonated.

    (3)     Note.  Specific sulfonated compounds, even if identified as having
    been derived from petroleum or petroleum fractions, are classified with the
    appropriate compound as provided for.

    (4)     Note.  Some specific types of petroleum products which, if
    sulfonated, are classified herein are:  rhigolene, petroleum ether,
    gasoline, naphtha, ligroine, benzine, kerosene, lubricating oils, paraffin
    oil and icthyol.


CLS 562/34
TXT Products under subclass 33 wherein the single bonded oxygen of a petroleum
    sulfonate group is bonded directly to organic nitrogen by ionic bonding.


CLS 562/35
TXT Compounds under subclass 30 wherein the sulfonate group is attached
    indirectly to boron or phosphorus by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided   for   herein  are:


CLS 562/36
TXT Compounds under subclass 30 wherein the sulfur of the sulfonate group is
    attached directly to chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium) or to -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen, by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 562/37
TXT Compounds under subclass 30 wherein the sulfur of the sulfonate group is
    attached directly to nitrogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein  is:


CLS 562/38
TXT Processes under subclass 37 wherein an inorganic sulfamic acid, or a salt
    of an inorganic sulfamic acid, is used.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a process provided  for  herein  is:


CLS 562/39
TXT Processes under subclass 37 which involve the formation of the following
    group, wherein substitution may be made for hydrogen only:


CLS 562/40
TXT Compounds under subclass 37 wherein the single bonded oxygen of the
    sulfonate group is bonded directly to organic nitrogen by ionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein is:


CLS 562/41
TXT Compounds under subclass 30 wherein the sulfonate group is attached
    indirectly to a benzene ring by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein is:


CLS 562/42
TXT Compounds under subclass 41 wherein the acyclic chain between the benzene
    ring and the sulfonate sulfur has a noncarbon atom as a chain member.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein  is:


CLS 562/43
TXT Compounds under subclass 42 wherein the acyclic chain has nitrogen as a
    chain member.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein is:


CLS 562/44
TXT Compounds under subclass 43 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) or -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen, is also a member
    of the acyclic chain.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for  herein  are:


CLS 562/45
TXT Compounds under subclass 30 wherein the sulfonate sulfur is bonded directly
    to a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for  herein  is:


CLS 562/46
TXT Compounds under subclass 45 wherein the sulfonate group is attached
    indirectly by nonionic bonding to -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of compounds provided  for  herein is:


CLS 562/47
TXT Compounds under subclass 46 wherein the -C(=X)- group is bonded directly to
    nitrogen or to chalcogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for  herein  is:


CLS 562/48
TXT Compounds under subclass 47 wherein each nitrogen of a -NH-C(=X)-NH- group,
    wherein X is chalcogen and substitution may be made for hydrogen only, is
    bonded directly to a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein  is:


CLS 562/49
TXT Compounds under subclass 48 wherein the -NH-C(=X)-NH- group is bonded
    directly to at least one benzene ring that is part of a naphthalene ring
    system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/50
TXT Compounds under subclass 48 wherein the -NH-C(=X)-NH- is attached
    indirectly to plural naphthalene ring systems by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/51
TXT Compounds under subclass 47 which contain the following group, wherein
    substitution may be made for  hydrogen only:




CLS 562/52
TXT Compounds under subclass 47 wherein the sulfonate group is attached
    indirectly to plural -C(=X)- groups by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/53
TXT Compounds under subclass 52 wherein a -C(=X)- group is bonded directly to
    two carbon atoms.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/54
TXT Compounds under subclass 52 wherein a benzene ring is bonded directly to
    more than one -C(=X)- group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/55
TXT Compounds under subclass 47 wherein the -C(=X)- group is bonded directly to
    an acyclic carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/56
TXT Compounds under subclass 47 wherein the -C(=X)- group is bonded directly to
    chalcogen in a -C(=X)X- group, in which the X's may be the same or diverse
    chalcogens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/57
TXT Compounds under subclass 56 wherein the sulfonate group is attached
    indirectly to nitrogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/58
TXT Compounds under subclass 45 wherein the sulfonate group is attached
    indirectly to nitrogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/59
TXT Compounds under subclass 58 wherein plural benzene rings are bonded to each
    other or to the same acyclic carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for  herein  are:


CLS 562/60
TXT Compounds under subclass 58 which contain the following group, wherein
    substitution may be made for  hydrogen only:


CLS 562/61
TXT Compounds under subclass 58 wherein a nitrogen atom is bonded to more than
    one benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/62
TXT Compounds under subclass 61 wherein each of two benzene rings is bonded
    directly to two nitrogen atoms.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/63
TXT Compounds under subclass 61 wherein the nitrogen is bonded directly to a
    benzene ring that is part of a naphthalene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/64
TXT Compounds under subclass 61 wherein a benzene ring is bonded directly to
    oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/65
TXT Compounds under subclass 58 wherein the nitrogen is bonded directly to
    sulfonyl:

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/66
TXT Compounds under subclass 58 wherein a benzene ring is attached indirectly
    to the nitrogen by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/67
TXT Compounds under subclass 66 wherein the sulfonate group is further attached
    indirectly to an additional nitrogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/68
TXT Compounds under subclass 58 wherein the sulfur of the sulfonate group is
    bonded directly to a polycyclo ring system consisting of benzene rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/69
TXT Compounds under subclass 68 wherein the polycyclo ring system is bonded
    directly to a nitro or nitroso group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/70
TXT Compounds under subclass 68 wherein the polycyclo ring system is bonded
    directly to oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/71
TXT Compounds under subclass 70 wherein the polycyclo ring system is bonded
    directly to plural sulfonate groups.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/72
TXT Compounds under subclass 68 wherein the polycyclo ring system is bonded
    directly to halogen, to plural nitrogens, or to plural sulfonate groups.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compound provided for  herein  are:


CLS 562/73
TXT Compounds under subclass 58 wherein a benzene ring is bonded directly to
    nitro or to halogen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compound provided for    herein  are:


CLS 562/74
TXT Compounds under subclass 45 wherein the sulfonate group is attached
    indirectly by nonionic bonding to a chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium) that is not part of a sulfonate group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:

    (2)     Note.  Compounds within the scope of this subclass and its indents
    may contain plural sulfonate groups, provided the required nonsulfonate
    chalcogen is present.


CLS 562/75
TXT Compounds under subclass 74 wherein the nonsulfonate chalcogen is bonded
    directly to two benzene rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/76
TXT Compounds under subclass 74 wherein the nonsulfonate chalcogen is bonded
    directly to plural carbons.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compound provided for   herein  are:


CLS 562/77
TXT Compounds under subclass 76 wherein a benzene ring is attached indirectly
    to a hydroxy group or to a nonsulfonate sulfur by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 562/78
TXT Compounds under subclass 74 wherein the sulfonate group is attached
    indirectly to halogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/79
TXT Compounds under subclass 74 wherein oxygen and the sulfonate group are
    bonded directly to the same polycyclo ring system consisting of benzene
    rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/80
TXT Compounds under subclass 79 wherein the polycyclo ring system consisting of
    benzene rings is bonded directly to an additional sulfonate group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/81
TXT Compounds under subclass 74 wherein a benzene ring is bonded directly to
    more than one oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein  is:


CLS 562/82
TXT Compounds under subclass 74 wherein a benzene ring is bonded directly to
    each of the sulfonate group, oxygen, and alkyl of at least four carbons.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/83
TXT Compounds under subclass 45 wherein the sulfonate group is attached
    indirectly to halogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:




CLS 562/84
TXT Compounds under subclass 45 wherein the single bonded oxygen of the
    sulfonate group is bonded directly to organic nitrogen by ionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for  herein is:


CLS 562/85
TXT Compounds under subclass 84 wherein the organic nitrogen is attached
    indirectly by nonionic bonding to -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e.,
    oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for  herein is:


CLS 562/86
TXT Compounds under subclass 84 wherein the organic nitrogen is part of a
    cation containing carbon double bonded to nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein  is:


CLS 562/87
TXT Compounds under subclass 45 which contain unsaturation between acyclic
    carbon atoms.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein  is:


CLS 562/88
TXT Compounds under subclass 45 wherein an acyclic carbon or an acyclic carbon
    chain is bonded directly to plural benzene rings, or two benzene rings are
    bonded directly to each other.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 562/89
TXT Compounds under subclass 45 wherein the sulfonate group is bonded directly
    to a polycyclo ring system consisting of benzene rings.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for  herein  is:


CLS 562/90
TXT Processes under subclass 89 wherein naphthalene, per se, or an alkyl
    substituted naphthalene, is sulfonated.


CLS 562/91
TXT Compounds under subclass 45 wherein a benzene ring is bonded to both the
    sulfonate group, and to alkyl of at least four carbons.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:




CLS 562/92
TXT Products under subclass 91 wherein the sulfonic acid or salt thereof is
    mixed with stabilizing or preserving agent, whose sole function is to
    prevent physical or chemical change, or with a color or odor affecting
    additive, whose sole function is to improve color or odor qualities.


CLS 562/93
TXT Processes under subclass 91 which include the step of alkylating a benzene
    ring, and the products of such processes.


CLS 562/94
TXT Processes under subclass 93 wherein an olefin is used as the alkylating
    agent.


CLS 562/95
TXT Processes under subclass 91 which include the step of sulfonating a benzene
    ring.

    (1)     Note.  Sulfonating agents which can be used include sulfur
    trioxide, sulfuric acid, and oleum.


CLS 562/96
TXT Processes under subclass 91 wherein the sulfonic acid, or salt thereof, is
    separated from impurities or from the reaction mixture.


CLS 562/97
TXT Processes under subclass 91 wherein a sulfonic acid is converted to a salt
    thereof, or a salt of a sulfonic acid is converted to the free acid.


CLS 562/98
TXT Processes under subclass 45 wherein sulfur trioxide or oleum is used to
    sulfonate a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  Oleum is a mixture of sulfur trioxide and sulfuric acid.


CLS 562/99
TXT Processes under subclass 45 wherein sulfuric acid is used to sulfonate a
    benzene ring.


CLS 562/100
TXT Compounds under subclass 30 wherein the sulfonate group is attached
    directly or indirectly to a polycyclo alicyclic ring system by nonionic
    bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/101
TXT Compounds under subclass 30 wherein the sulfonate group is attached
    indirectly to an additional sulfonate group by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for  herein  is:


CLS 562/102
TXT Compounds under subclass 101 wherein the sulfonate groups are attached
    indirectly to nitrogen or to -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium or tellurium), by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein  are:


CLS 562/103
TXT Compounds under subclass 101 wherein the sulfonate groups are attached
    indirectly to plural nonsulfonate chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/104
TXT Compounds under subclass 30 wherein the sulfonate group is attached
    indirectly to nitrogen by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein  is:


CLS 562/105
TXT Compounds under subclass 104 wherein the sulfonate group is attached
    indirectly to -C(=X)-, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium), by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/106
TXT Compounds under subclass 105 wherein the sulfonate group is attached
    indirectly to plural nitrogens or to plural -C(=X)-groups by acyclic
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided  for  herein is:


CLS 562/107
TXT Compounds under subclass 104 wherein the sulfonate group is attached
    indirectly to chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium) by
    acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/108
TXT Compounds under subclass 30 wherein the sulfonate group is attached
    indirectly to chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium) by
    acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for  herein is:


CLS 562/109
TXT Compounds under subclass 108 wherein the chalcogen, X, is double bonded to
    carbon in a -C(=X)- group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/110
TXT Compounds under subclass 108 wherein the sulfonate group is attached
    indirectly to plural chalcogens by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/111
TXT Compounds under subclass 108 wherein the chalcogen is bonded directly to
    plural carbons.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/112
TXT Compounds under subclass 108 wherein the single bonded oxygen of the
    sulfonate group is bonded directly to organic nitrogen by ionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/113
TXT Compounds under subclass 30 wherein the sulfonate group is attached
    indirectly to halogen by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/114
TXT Compounds under subclass 30 wherein the single bonded oxygen of the
    sulfonate group is bonded directly to organic nitrogen by ionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/115
TXT Processes under subclass 30 which are directed to the preparation,
    purification, recovery, or treatment in any way of a sulfonic acid or of a
    sulfonic acid salt.


CLS 562/116
TXT Processes under subclass 115 which involve formation of carbon-to-carbon
    unsaturation, hydrogenation or decarboxylation.


CLS 562/117
TXT Processes under subclass 115 wherein sulfonic acids are formed by
    conversion of sulfur containing hetero ring compounds.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a process provided for herein is the
    conversion of an alkyl sultone to an alkene sulfonic acid by hydrolysis.


CLS 562/118
TXT Processes under subclass 115 wherein sulfonic acids are formed by oxidation
    of organic sulfur compounds.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a process provided for herein is the nitric
    acid oxidation of a disulphide compound.


CLS 562/119
TXT Processes under subclass 114 which involve the hydrolysis of sulfonyl
    halides.


CLS 562/120
TXT Processes under subclass 114 wherein sulfonic acids, or salts of sulfonic
    acids, are formed by using inorganic sulfonating agents.


CLS 562/121
TXT Processes under subclass 120 wherein oxygen and sulfur dioxide are utilized.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a process provided for herein is the reaction
    of an alkane with oxygen and sulfur dioxide to form alkane sulfonic acid.


CLS 562/122
TXT Processes under subclass 120 wherein an unsaturated hydrocarbon is reacted
    with sulfurous acid or with a salt thereof.


CLS 562/123
TXT Processes under subclass 120 wherein halosulfonic acid, sulfuric acid,
    oleum or sulfur trioxide is used.


CLS 562/124
TXT Processes under subclass 115 wherein a sulfonic acid or a salt thereof is
    separated from impurities or from the reaction mixture.


CLS 562/125
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 which contain either of the two
    following groups:  sulfinate or sulfenate, wherein, in either case, the
    single bonded oxygen is bonded directly to hydrogen, to a Group IA or IIA
    light metal, or  to substituted or unsubstituted ammonium:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    206-225 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    halogen, chalcogen, nitrogen, phosphorus, and group IA or IIA light metals.


CLS 562/126
TXT Compounds under subclass 125 wherein a sulfinate group is attached
    indirectly to nitrogen by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 562/400
TXT Carboxylic acids and salts thereof:

    Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 wherein the acid function is a
    carboxyl group or a salt thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Classification of salt formation from an acid or acid
    formation from the salt.



    As a general rule a multistep synthesis is classified on the basis of the
    product produced by the last step of the synthesis.  The formation of a
    salt from the corresponding acid or the "springing" of the acid from the
    corresponding salt is a synthesis step. However, these steps are so
    commonly used in final recovery procedures of a synthesis, that
    classification of a process on the basis of the general rule would result
    in distortion of the placement of patents where special process subclasses
    have been provided.



    (a)     In this classification, where special process subclasses have been
    provided and the last step of a claimed process appropriate thereto recites
    a salt formation or a hydrolysis of the salt to the acid, the patent has
    been placed in the appropriate process subclass.

    (b)     As a general rule, a claimed process which combines synthesis steps
    with purification or recovery is classified with the synthesis. In those
    cases where a subclass has been provided for purification or recovery, per
    se, and the claimed process appropriate thereto recites a broadly defined
    salt formation of the correspondidng acid or a broadly defined hydrolysis
    of a salt to the corresponding acid, the patent has been placed in the
    appropriate purification or recovery subclass.  Where the claimed
    purification or recovery recites a significant salt formation step or a
    significant hydrolysis of a salt to the corresponding acid, the patent has
    been placed in the appropriate product subclass and cross-referenced to the
    purification or recovery subclass.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is residual for alicyclic carboxylic acids not
    provided for in subclasses 497-511.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/401
TXT Racemization or separation of optical isomers:

    Processes under subclass 400 directed to the racemization or separation of
    optical isomers and includes the separation of diastereomers as well as the
    resolution of racemic mixtures of enantiomers.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains patents wherein the separation is
    carried out by a chemical reaction, such as with a resolving agent,
    followed by physical separation and regeneration of the desired isomeric
    component.


CLS 562/402
TXT Physical resolution:

    Processes under subclass 401 wherein the separation is performed solely by
    physical means such as fractional crystallization.


CLS 562/403
TXT Hydrophenanthrene nucleus:

    Compounds under subclass 400 which contain a hydrophenanthrene nucleus, not
    elsewhere provided.

    (1)     Note.  Many of the patents found here are directed to compounds
    wherein the acid is obtained from a natural resin and has a known chemical
    structure as well as chemical modifications not provided for elsewhere.

    (2)     Note.  The chemical treatment of a natural resin, followed by
    separation of a modified free natural resin acid of known chemical
    structure as a single chemical compound, is classified herein as is the
    product of such process.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


    SEARCH CLASS:

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives; Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Natural Reaction Products Thereof, subclasses 200+ for
    separation of free natural resin acid mixtures, or of free natural resin
    acid of indeterminate struction from the natural resin.

    540     through 549,Organic Compounds, appropriate subclasses, for a free
    natural resin acid of known chemical structure which contains a
    heterocyclic group.

    556,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 1+, for heavy metal salts of free
    natural resin acids of known chemical structure.


CLS 562/404
TXT 1,4a-dimethyl hydrophenanthrene-1 carboxylic acids or salts
    thereof:


    Compounds under subclass 403 which contain the 1,4a-dimethyl
    hydrophenanthrene-1 carboxylic acid nucleus.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/405
TXT Aromatic:

    Compounds under subclass 400 wherein the acid contains a benzene nucleus.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403+,   for carboxylic acids and salts thereof wherein the acids contain a
    hydrophenanthrene nucleus and have a known chemical structure not elsewhere
    provided for, as for example, dihydroabietic acid or dehydroabietic acid.


CLS 562/406
TXT Preparation by carbonylation:

    Processes under subclass 405 wherein an aromatic carboxylic acid is
    prepared through formation of a carboxyl group on an aromatic compound by
    reaction with carbon monoxide.


CLS 562/407
TXT Formation of carboxyl group by oxidation: Processes under subclass 405
    wherein a carboxyl group of an aromatic acid is formed by oxidation.

    (1)     Note.  The term "oxidation" as utilized here includes processes
    where an oxidizing agent is utilized, as well as processes such as the
    dehydrogenation of alcohols and the hydrolysis of aromatic halo alkyl
    compounds. However, the formation of a carboxyl group by hydrolysis of
    functional derivatives of a carboxyl group are found in the product and
    process subclasses provided for the appropriate acid.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains patents directed to the formation of
    aromatic carboxylic acids by oxidation of carbonaceous materials such as
    coal or coke.


CLS 562/408
TXT Of aromatic compound:

    Process under subclass 407 wherein a carboxyl group is formed by oxidizing
    an aromatic compound.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains processes of preparing aromatic
    carboxylic acids by oxidation of compounds, such as phenanthrene or
    trichlorobenzylamine.


CLS 562/409
TXT Alkyl side chain oxidized:

    Processes under subclass 408 wherein the carboxyl group is formed by
    oxidation of an alkyl side chain of an aromatic nucleus.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains processes wherein the oxidizing agent
    is, for example, potassium permanganate, chromic acid or its salts or
    manganese dioxide.


CLS 562/410
TXT Nitrogen containing oxidant:

    Processes under subclass 409 wherein the oxidizing agent utilized contains
    nitrogen, as for example, nitric acid or oxides of nitrogen.


CLS 562/411
TXT Sulfur containing oxidant:

    Processes under subclass 409 wherein the oxidizing agent utilized is sulfur
    or a sulfur containing compound.


CLS 562/412
TXT Air, O2, or O3 Oxidant:

    Processes under subclass 409 wherein the oxidizing agent utilized is air,
    oxygen, or ozone.


CLS 562/413
TXT Multistage:

    Processes under subclass 412 wherein the oxidation is carried out in plural
    sequential stages.

    (1)     Note.  These processes include the use of multiple reactors where
    the product of oxidation in a first reactor is passed to a second reactor
    and further oxidized or may be carried out in a single reactor where the
    conditions for a second stage of oxidation are changed.


CLS 562/414
TXT With recycle or recovery of reaction component:

    Processes under subclass 412 wherein components of the product of oxidation
    may be separated, further treated, and either recycled to the reaction
    chamber or recovered.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes processes which claim a significant
    recovery step to produce the desired carboxylic acid or are directed to
    recovery and recycling of solvents, catalysts, or unoxidized or
    incompletely oxidized starting materials.


CLS 562/415
TXT Gas phase:

    Processes under subclass 412 wherein the oxidation is conducted in a gas or
    vapor phase.


CLS 562/416
TXT Halogen containing catalyst, initiator, or promoter utilized:

    Processes under subclass 412 wherein the oxidation process is carried out
    in the presence of a catalyst, or initiator or promoter which contains a
    halogen.


CLS 562/417
TXT Initiator or promoter used with catalyst:

    Processes under subclass 412 wherein the oxidation is carried out with a
    catalyst and an additional material which may reduce the induction period
    or promote or regulate the oxidation rate to improve the yield or shorten
    the reaction time.


CLS 562/418
TXT Of oxy or carbonyl containing compound:

    Processes under subclass 408 wherein the aromatic compounds which are
    oxidized contain an oxy group or a carbonyl group, such as, for example,
    aralkyl alcohols or aldehydes.


CLS 562/419
TXT Hypohalite as oxidant:

    Processes under subclass 418 wherein the oxidizing agent is a hypohalite,
    such as, for example, sodium hypochlorite.


CLS 562/420
TXT Nitrogen containing oxidant:

    Processes under subclass 418 wherein the oxidizing agent contains nitrogen,
    as for example, nitric acid or oxides of nitrogen.


CLS 562/421
TXT Air, O2, or O3 Oxidant:

    Processes under subclass 418 wherein the oxidizing agent is air, oxygen, or
    ozone.


CLS 562/422
TXT Of halo alkyl containing compounds:

    Processes under subclass 408 wherein the carboxyl group is formed by
    oxidizing a halo alkyl side chain of an aromatic compound.


CLS 562/423
TXT Preparation by carbonation:

    Processes under subclass 405 wherein an aromatic carboxylic acid is
    produced by reacting an aromatic compound with carbon dioxide or a material
    which will produce carbon dioxide under the reaction conditions, such as a
    carbonate.


CLS 562/424
TXT Of alkali metal phenolates:

    Processes under subclass 423 wherein an alkali metal phenolate is reacted
    with carbon dioxide to produce an aromatic hydroxy acid, as for example,
    the Kolbe-Schmitt reaction.


CLS 562/425
TXT Having plural rings:

    Processes under subclass 424 wherein the alkali metal phenolate contains
    plural rings, as for example, a naphtholate which will produce a hydroxy
    naphthoic acid under the conditions of reaction.


CLS 562/426
TXT Sulfur:

    Compounds under subclass 405 wherein the aromatic carboxylic acid contains
    sulfur, covalently bonded.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/427
TXT Polycyclo ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 426 wherein the acid contains at least two
    carbocyclic groups which are joined through two orthopositioned carbon
    atoms or through a bridge.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/428
TXT Indenyl or hydrindenyl:

    Processes under subclass 427 which contain the indenyl or hydrindenyl
    nucleus.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/429
TXT Sulfoxy:

    Compounds under subclass 426 which contain sulfur bonded to oxygen and
    includes the groups -SO, -SO2 and -SO2X, where X is halogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30+,    for aliphatic compounds containing a sulfonic acid group.


CLS 562/430
TXT Nitrogen:

    Compounds under subclass 429 wherein the acid also contains nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/431
TXT Carboxyl, or salt thereof, in side chain having sulfur bonded directly to a
    ring:

    Compounds under subclass 426 wherein the carboxyl group is attached to a
    side chain which contains sulfur bonded directly to a ring.

    (1)     Note.  In this and subsequent subclasses, where the term "side
    chain" is used, it is intended to mean an acyclic chain uninterrupted by a
    cylic formation.

    (2)     Note.  When the same sulfur atom is directly attached to one
    carbocyclic nucleus and indirectly attached to a second carbocyclic
    nucleus, it will always be considered as directly attached for
    classification, e.g.,

    (3)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example:


CLS 562/432
TXT Carboxyl, or salt thereof, bonded directly to a ring:

    Compounds under subclass 426 wherein a carboxyl group is attached directly
    to a ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/433
TXT Nitrogen bonded directly to carbon of organic radical (e.g., amino acids,
    etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 405 wherein the acid contains nitrogen bonded
    directly to a carbon of an organic radical not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/434
TXT Nitro or nitroso:

    Compounds under subclass 433 wherein the acid contains the nitro group
    (-NO2) or the nitroso group (-NO) bonded to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/435
TXT Plural rings:

    Compounds under subclass 434 wherein the acid contains more than one
    carbocyclic group, at least one of which is aromatic.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/436
TXT Plural rings bonded directly to the same carbonyl:

    Compounds under subclass 435 wherein the acid contains two carbocyclic
    nuclei directly attached to the same carbonyl group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/437
TXT Plural nitrogens:

    Compounds under subclass 434 wherein the acid contains an additional
    nitrogen covalently bonded.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/438
TXT Halogen:

    Compounds under subclass 434 wherein the acid contains a halogen covalently
    bonded.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/439
TXT Ureido, guanido, or hydrazine:

    Compounds under subclass 433 wherein the acid contains the ureido group
    (N-C(=O) -N), the guanido group (N-C(=N)-N) or the hydrazine group (N-N).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example.


CLS 562/440
TXT Nitrogen double bonded directly to carbon (e.g. amidine, ketimine, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 433 wherein the acid contains an amidine group
    (-C(=N)-N) or the group -C=N- equivalent in structure to those formed by
    reacting an aldehyde or a ketone with ammonia or an amine.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/441
TXT Plural rings bonded directly to the same carbon:

    Compounds under subclass 433 wherein the acid contains two carbocyclic
    nuclei directly attached to the same carbon, which may be the carbon of a
    methylene or a carbonyl group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/442
TXT Nitrogen not bonded directly to a ring:

    Compounds under subclass 433 wherein the acid contains nitrogen which is
    not directly bonded to a carbocyclic nucleus.

    (1)     Note.  When the same nitrogen is directly attached to one
    carbocyclic nucleus and indirectly attached to a second carbocyclic
    nucleus, it will always be considered as directly attached for
    classification,  e.g.,

    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/443
TXT In same chain as carboxyl, or salt thereof:

    Compounds under subclass 442 wherein the acid contains a nitrogen which is
    in or attached to the same side chain that contains a carboxyl group, but
    is not attached directly to a carbocyclic nucleus.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/444
TXT Oxy:

    Compounds under subclass 443 wherein the acid contains the group -OX
    attached to a noncarbonylic carbon, where X is a non-carbonyclic C, H, or
    an alcoholate forming group not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/445
TXT Phenyl alanines:

    Compounds under subclass 444 wherein the acid contains a phenyl alanine
    group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/446
TXT Di-oxy phenyl alanines:

    Compounds under subclass 445 wherein the acid contains two -OX groups, each
    of which is attached directly to the phenyl of the phenyl alanine group,
    where X is a noncarbonylic C, H, or an alcoholate forming group not
    provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/447
TXT Phenoxyphenyl alanines:

    Compounds under subclass 445 wherein the acid contains a phenoxy group
    attached to the phenyl of the phenyl alanine.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/448
TXT Plural nitrogens:

    Compounds under subclass 44 wherein the acid contains more than one
    covalently bonded nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/449
TXT Halogen:

    Compounds under subclass 433 wherein the acid contains halogen covalently
    bonded.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/450
TXT Amide:

    Compounds under subclass 443 wherein the acid contains the carbonyl residue
    of a carboxylic acid attached to a nitrogen to form an amide (-C(O)N).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/451
TXT Oxy:

    Compounds under subclass 442 wherein the acid contains an -OX group bonded
    to a noncarbonylic carbon, where X is a noncarbonylic carbon, H, or an
    alcoholate forming group not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/452
TXT Oxy:

    Compounds under subclass 433 wherein the acid contains an -OX group bonded
    to a noncarbonylic carbon, where X is a noncarbonylic C, H, or an
    alcoholate forming group not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example.


CLS 562/453
TXT Carboxyl, or salt thereof, nitrogen and oxygen all bonded directly to the
    same benzene ring:

    Compounds under subclass 452 wherein the acid contains nitrogen, an oxy
    group, and a carboxyl group, all attached directly to the same benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/454
TXT Aryl-N-Aryl:

    Compounds under subclass 452 wherein the acid contains two aromatic nuclei
    attached to the same nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/455
TXT Amide:

    Compounds under subclass 452 wherein the acid contains the carbonylic
    residue of a carboxylic acid directly attached to a nitrogen, forming an
    amide.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/456
TXT Halogen:

    Compounds under subclass 433 wherein the acid contains covalently bonded
    halogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/457
TXT Plural rings with nitrogen bonded directly to at least one ring:

    Compounds under subclass 433 wherein the acid contains more than one
    carbocyclic group and nitrogen is bonded directly to at least one of them.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/458
TXT Carboxyl, or salt thereof, bonded directly to a ring:

    Compounds under subclass 433 wherein the acid contains a carboxyl group
    bonded directly to a carbocyclic nucleus.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/459
TXT Aldehyde or ketone:

    Compounds under subclass 405 wherein the acid contains the group -C( O) X
    bonded to carbon, where X is C or H, i.e., aldehyde or ketone group
    containing acids.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/460
TXT Two rings bonded directly to the same carbonyl:

    Compounds under subclass 459 wherein the acid contains two carbocyclic
    nuclei bonded directly to one carbonyl group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/461
TXT Polycyclo ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 459 wherein the acid contains two or more
    carbocyclic nuclei joined to each other through two orthopositioned carbons
    or through a bridge.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/462
TXT Bicyclo ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 461 wherein the acid contains two carbocyclic
    nuclei joined to each other through two orthopositioned carbons or through
    a bridge.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/463
TXT Oxy:

    Compounds under subclass 459 wherein the acid contains an -OX group
    attached to a noncarbonylic carbon, where X is noncarbonylic C, H, or an
    alcoholate forming group not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/464
TXT Phenoxy alkanoic acids:

    Compounds under subclass 463 wherein the acid contains a carboxyl group on
    a side chain containing an oxy group directly bonded to a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/465
TXT Oxy:

    Compounds under subclass 405 wherein the acid contains an -OX group
    attached to a noncarbonylic carbon, where X is a noncarbonylic C, H, or an
    alcoholate forming group not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/466
TXT Polycyclo ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 465 wherein the acid contains two or more
    carbocyclic nuclei which are joined to each other through two
    orthopositioned carbons or through a bridge.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/467
TXT Carboxyl bonded directly to naphthylene ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 466 wherein the acid contains a naphthylene
    nucleus having a carboxyl group directly bonded to it.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/468
TXT Plural rings bonded directly to the same carbon:

    Compounds under subclass 465 wherein the acid contains two carbocyclic
    nuclei bonded to one methylene group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/469
TXT Rings bonded directly to each other:

    Compounds under subclass 465 wherein the acid contains two carbocyclic
    nuclei joined to each other by one covalent bond.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/470
TXT Oxy, not bonded directly to a ring, in same side chain as carboxyl, or salt
    thereof:

    Compounds under subclass 465 wherein the acid contains an oxy group, which
    is not bonded directly to a carbocyclic group and which is in or bonded to
    a side chain which contains a carboxyl group.

    (1)     Note.  When the same oxygen is directly bonded to one carbocyclic
    nucleus and indirectly bonded to a second carbocyclic nucleus, it will
    always be considered as directly bonded for classification,  e.g.,

    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/471
TXT Oxy, bonded directly to a ring, in same side chain as carboxyl, or salt
    thereof:

    Compounds under subclass 465 wherein the acid contains an oxy group which
    is directly bonded to a carbocyclic nucleus and is in a side chain which
    contains a carboxyl group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/472
TXT Halogen:

    Compounds under subclass 471 wherein the acid contains covalently bonded
    halogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/473
TXT Carboxyl, or salt thereof, bonded directly to a ring:

    Compounds under subclass 465 wherein the acid contains a carboxyl group
    bonded directly to a carbocyclic nucleus.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/474
TXT Halogen:

    Compounds under subclass 473 wherein the acid contains covalently bonded
    halogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/475
TXT Phenolic hydroxy or metallate:

    Compounds under subclass 473 wherein the acid contains an -OX group
    directly bonded to a benzene ring, where X is H or a metal not provided for
    above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/476
TXT Poly phenolic hydroxy or metallate:

    Compounds under subclass 475 wherein the acid contains more than one -OX
    group bonded directly to a benzene ring, where X is H or a metal not
    provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/477
TXT Salicylic acid, per se, or salt thereof:

    The compound under subclass 475, which is salicylic acid

    or its salts and processes for its preparation not provided for above.


CLS 562/478
TXT Phenolic hydroxy or metallate:

    Compounds under subclass 465 wherein the acid contains an -OX group bonded
    directly to a benzene ring, where X is an H or a metal not provided for
    above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/479
TXT Decarboxylation of polycarboxylic acid or salt:

    Processes under subclass 405 wherein a carboxyl group of a polycarboxylic
    acid or an anhydride thereof is destroyed to produce an aromatic carboxylic
    acid, as for example, the production of benzoic acid from phthalic acid.


CLS 562/480
TXT Polycarboxylic acids or salts thereof:

    Compounds under subclass 405 wherein the acid contains more than one
    carboxyl group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/481
TXT Prepared by disproportionation:

    Processes under subclass 480 wherein the alkali metal salt of an aromatic
    carboxylic acid is reacted under conditions wherein one molecule is
    decarboxylated and another molecule carboxylated.  For example, in the
    Henkel Reaction sodium benzoate will produce benzene and phthalic acid.


CLS 562/482
TXT Preparation by isomerization:

    Processes under subclass 480 wherein the acid is produced by isomerization,
    as for example, in the Henkel Rearrangement Reaction wherein phthalic acid
    is isomerized to terephthalic acid.


CLS 562/483
TXT Preparation by hydrolysis of amide, anhydride, or ester:

    Processes under subclass 480 wherein the acid is produced by hydrolysis of
    an amide, an anhydride, or an ester.

    (1)     Note.  The production of a polycarboxylic acid by hydrolysis of its
    corresponding salt is placed in the appropriate product subclass.


CLS 562/484
TXT Preparation by hydrolysis of nitrile:

    Processes under subclass 480 wherein the acid is produced by hydrolysis of
    a nitrile.


CLS 562/485
TXT Purification or recovery, per se:

    Processes under subclass 480 which are directed to the purification,
    separation, or recovery of aromatic polycarboxylic acids.

    (1)     Note.  See subclasses 408+, and particularly subclass 414 for
    patents which claim the combination of formation of a carboxyl group by
    oxidation followed by a significant purification or recovery step.

    (2)     Note.  See (1) Note (b) under subclass 400 for the placement of
    patents claiming the purification or recovery of an acid combined with a
    salt forming or salt hydrolysis step.


CLS 562/486
TXT By crystallization:

    Processes under subclass 485 wherein the purification or recovery involves
    a significant crystallization step.


CLS 562/487
TXT By reaction of undesired component:

    Processes under subclass 485 wherein the purification or recovery of the
    acid includes the reaction of an undesired component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclasses 28+ for processes
    involving reaction of an impurity following by distillation to recover a
    desired product.


CLS 562/488
TXT Plural rings:

    Compounds under subclass 480 wherein the acid cotains more than one
    carbocyclic nucleus.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/489
TXT Carboxyl not directly attached to a ring:

    Compounds under subclass 480 wherein the acid contains a carbocyclic group
    which is not directly bonded to a carbocyclic nucleus.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/490
TXT Naphthyl group:

    Compounds under subclass 405 wherein the acid contains the naphthyl nucleus
    or its partially hydrogenated form and only one carboxyl group.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 488 for compounds containing the naphthyl group
    and more than one carboxyl group.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/491
TXT Plural rings bonded directly to the same carbon:

    Compounds under subclass 405 wherein the acid contains two carbocyclic
    nuclei bonded to one methylene group and has only one carboxyl group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/492
TXT Rings bonded directly to each other:

    Compounds under subclass 405 wherein the acid contains two carbocyclic
    nuclei joined to each other by one covalent bond and only one carboxyl
    group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/493
TXT Monocyclic:

    Compounds under subclass 405 wherein the acid contains only one carbocyclic
    nucleus, which is a benzene ring and only one carboxyl group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/494
TXT Purification or recovery, per se:

    Processes under subclass 493 directed to the purification, separation, or
    recovery of aromatic monocyclic monocarboxylic acids.


CLS 562/495
TXT Additional unsaturation:

    Compounds under subclass 493 wherein the acid coantains ethylenic or
    acetylenic unsaturation.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/496
TXT Carboxyl, or salt thereof, not bonded directly to the ring:

    Compounds under subclass 493 wherein the acid contains a carboxyl group not
    directly bonded to the benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains for example:


CLS 562/497
TXT Preparing alicyclic acids by carbonylation:

    Processes under subclass 400 wherein an alicyclic carboxylic acid is
    prepared through formation of a carboxyl group on an alicyclic compound by
    reaction with carbon monoxide.


CLS 562/498
TXT Plural alicyclic rings:

    Compounds under subclass 400 wherein the acid contains more than one
    alicyclic nucleus.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    552,    Organic Compounds, subclass 653 for acids of Vitamin D and 3-5
    cyclovitamin D compounds, etc.


CLS 562/499
TXT Tricyclo ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 498 wherein the acid contains three alicyclic
    nuclei joined to each other through two orthopositioned carbons or by a
    bridge.

    (1)     Note.  See subclasses 403+ for carboxylic acids where the tricyclo
    ring system is hydrophenanthrene.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/500
TXT Two rings only:

    Compounds under subclass 498 wherein the acid contains only two alicyclic
    nuclei.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/501
TXT Orthofused:

    Compounds under subclass 500 wherein the acid contains two alicyclic nuclei
    joined to each other through two orthopositioned carbons.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/502
TXT 2,2,1-Bicyclo:

    Compounds under subclass 500 wherein the acid contains a 2,2,1-bicyclo ring
    system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/503
TXT Cyclopentyl (e.g., prostoglandins, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 400 wherein the acid contains a cyclopentyl
    nucleus, as for example, prostoglandins.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:



CLS 562/504
TXT Cyclopentyl-(C)x - COOH; x=0-2:

    Compounds under subclass 503 wherein the acid contains a carboxyl group
    which is directly bonded to a cyclopentyl nucleus or is attached thereto
    through a chain of no more than two carbons.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/505
TXT Cyclobutyl:

    Compounds under subclass 400 wherein the acid contains a cyclobutyl nucleus.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/506
TXT Cyclopropyl:

    Compounds under subclass 400 wherein the acid contains a cyclopropyl
    nucleus.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/507
TXT Alicyclic acids having an element other than oxygen, carbon, or hydrogen:

    Compounds under subclass 400 wherein the acid contains an alicyclic nucleus
    not provided for above and contains a covalently bonded element other than
    oxygen, carbon, or hydrogen, as for example, N, S, P, B or halogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/508
TXT Alicyclic acids having an oxy, aldehyde, or ketone group:

    Compounds under subclass 400 wherein the acid contains an alicyclic nucleus
    not provided for above and contains the -OX group attached to a
    noncarbonylic carbon, where X is a non-carbonylic C, H, or an alcoholate
    forming group not provided for above; or a -C (=O) X group bonded to
    carbon, where X is C or H.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/509
TXT Alicyclic polycarboxylic acids:

    Compounds under subclass 400 wherein the acid contains an alicyclic nucleus
    not provided for above and contains more than one carboxyl group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/510
TXT Alicyclic acids having unsaturation:

    Compounds under subclass 400 wherein the acid contains an alicyclic nucleus
    not provided for above and contains a double or triple bond.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/511
TXT Naphthenic acids or salts thereof:

    Compounds under subclass 400 known as naphthenic acids derived from crude
    naphthene containing mineral oils and their salts.


CLS 562/512
TXT Acyclic:

    Compounds under subclass 400 wherein the acid contains no carbocyclic
    nucleus.

    (1)     Note.  Cyclic polyvalent metal salts of acyclic polycarboxylic
    acids are considered acyclic for this classification.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    562,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 512.2+ for the production of acyclic
    carboxylic acids by partial oxidation of hydrocarbon mixtures.


CLS 562/512.2
TXT Preparing by oxidation of hydrocarbon mixtures:

    Processes under subclass 512 for producing acyclic carboxylic acids by
    oxidizing a mixture of hydrocarbons.


CLS 562/512.4
TXT Plural -COO- Groups in Compound Formed:

    Processes under subclass 512.2 wherein a compound having two or more
    -C(=O)O- groups is formed.


CLS 562/513
TXT Preparation from source of undetermined composition (e.g., industrial
    waste, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 512 for producing acyclic carboxylic acids from
    sources of undetermined compositions, e.g., industrial wastes such as
    distillery slops, fermentation residues, and waste sulphite liquor.
    Examples of acids produced from these sources are acetic, oxalic, and
    glutamic acids and their salts.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also includes the production of betaine
    hydrochloride form residual liquors of the beet industry.


CLS 562/514
TXT Nitrogen containing acid produced:

    Processes under subclass 513 wherein the acids produced contain nitrogen.


CLS 562/515
TXT Preparation by degradation of carbohydrates:

    Processes under subclass 512 wherein the acids are produced by degradation
    of carbohydrates, e.g., paperpulp, sawdust, and sugars.  Some of the acids
    produced are acetic, tartaric, lactic, and oxalic.

    (1)     Note.  For the recovery of acetic acid from pyroligneous liquor
    (wood distillate), see subclasses 607+.

    (2)     Note.  Reactions involving carbohydrates, other than degradation,
    are found in the appropriate subclasses provided therefor.  For example,
    the production of acyclic carboxylic acids by oxidation of a monosaccharide
    are in subclasses 523+, especially in subclasses 527 and 531+.  The
    reaction of glucose with HCN followed by hydrolysis to produce a polyoxy
    carboxylic acid is in subclass 587.

    (3)     Note.  The oxidation of a polysaccharide to produce a carboxylate
    without degradation is in Class 536, Organic Compounds, in the appropriate
    subclasses.


CLS 562/516
TXT Preparation by hydrolysis of proteins:

    Processes under subclass 512 wherein the acids are produced by the
    degradation of proteins such as gluten, casein, keratin, and zein.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also includes patents which claim the recovery
    of acids from protein hydrolysates without reciting the actual step of
    hydrolysis.

    (2)     Note.  See subclass 554 for the purification or recovery of amino
    acids from sources other than protein hydrolysates.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclasses 656+ for foods containing amino acids and processes for
    producing the same.


CLS 562/517
TXT Preparation by carbonylation:

    Processes under subclass 512 wherein the acyclic carboxylic acid is
    produced through formation of a carboxyl group on an acyclic organic
    compound by reaction with carbon monoxide.

    (1)     Note.  See subclasses 597 and 609 for carbonylation of inorganic
    compounds to produce oxalic and formic acids, respectively.


CLS 562/518
TXT Of aldehyde or ketone:

    Processes under subclass 517 wherein the acid is produced by reacting an
    aldehyde or ketone with carbon monoxide.


CLS 562/519
TXT Of alcohol or alcoholate:

    Processes under subclass 517 wherein the acid is produced by reacting an
    alcohol or alcoholate with carbon monoxide.


CLS 562/520
TXT Of halogenated hydrocarbon:

    Processes under subclass 517 wherein the acid is produced by reacting a
    halogenated hydrocarbon with carbon monoxide.


CLS 562/521
TXT Of hydrocarbon:

    Processes under subclass 517 wherein the acid is produced by reacting a
    hydrocarbon with carbon monoxide.


CLS 562/522
TXT Group VIII Metal Containing Catalyst Utilized:

    Processes under subclass 521 wherein the carbonylation is carried out with
    a Group VIII metal catalyst.

    (1)     Note.  The Group VIII metals includes Fe, Co, and Ni and the noble
    metals Ru, Rh, Pd, Os, Ir, and Pt.


CLS 562/523
TXT Formation of carboxyl group by oxidation:

    Processes under subclass 512 wherein the carboxyl group of an acyclic acid
    is formed by oxidation.

    (1)     Note.  The term "oxidation" as used here is identical with that set
    forth in subclass 407.


CLS 562/524
TXT Of carboxylic acid or ester:

    Processes under subclass 523 wherein the acid is produced by oxidizing a
    carboxylic acid or ester.


CLS 562/525
TXT Of oxy acid or ester:

    Processes under subclass 524 wherein the acid is produced by oxidizing an
    oxy acid or ester.


CLS 562/526
TXT Of nitrogen containing compound:

    Processes under subclass 523 wherein the acid is produced by oxidizing a
    nitrogen containing compound.


CLS 562/527
TXT Of ketone:

    Processes under subclass 523 wherein the acid is produced by oxidizing a
    ketone.


CLS 562/528
TXT Cyclic ketone or mixture thereof with cyclic alcohol:

    Processes under subclass 527 wherein the acid is produced by oxidizing a
    cyclic ketone or a mixture of a cyclic ketone with a cyclic alcohol.


CLS 562/529
TXT Two stage oxidation from hydrocarbon:

    Processes under subclass 528 wherein the acid is produced by oxidizing a
    hydrocarbon in a first state to produce a cyclic ketone or a mixture
    thereof with a cyclic alcohol, followed by a second stage oxidation of the
    first stage product to produce acyclic carboxylic acids.


CLS 562/530
TXT With recycle or recovery of reaction component:

    Processes under subclass 528 wherein components of the reaction product are
    separated, further treated, or recycled to the reactor or recovered.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes processes which claim a significant
    recovery step to produce the desired acyclic carboxylic acid or are
    directed to recovery or recycle of solvents, catalysts, or unoxidized
    starting materials.


CLS 562/531
TXT Of aldehyde:

    Processes under subclass 523 wherein the acid is produced by oxidizing an
    aldehyde.


CLS 562/532
TXT Producing unsaturated acid:

    Processes under subclass 531 wherein the acid produced is an unsaturated
    acyclic carboxylic acid.


CLS 562/533
TXT Liquid phase oxidation:

    Processes under subclass 532 wherein the unsaturated acyclic carboxylic
    acid is produced by oxidation of an aldehyde in the liquid phase.


CLS 562/534
TXT Group VIII Metal Containing Catalyst Utilized:

    Processes under subclass 532 wherein the unsaturated acid is produced by
    oxidizing an aldheyde utilizing a Group VIII metal containing catalyst.


CLS 562/535
TXT Group V Metal Containing Catalyst Utilized:

    Processes under subclass 532 wherein the unsaturated acid is produced by
    oxidizing an aldehyde utilizing a Group V metal containing catalyst.

    (1)     Note.  The Group V metals are V, Nb, Ta, Pa, As, Sb, and Bi.


CLS 562/536
TXT Producing acetic acid:

    Processes under subclass 531 wherein the acid produced by oxidizing an
    aldehyde is acetic acid.


CLS 562/537
TXT Of ether:

    Processes under subclass 523 wherein the acid is produced by oxidizing an
    ether including cyclic ethers.


CLS 562/538
TXT Of alcohol:

    Processes under subclass 523 wherein the acid is produced by oxidizing an
    alcohol.

    (1)     Note.  The production of an acyclic carboxylic acid by the
    oxidation of a phenol is in subclass 523.


CLS 562/539
TXT Caustic oxidant:

    Processes under subclass 538 wherein the acid is produced by oxidizing an
    alcohol with caustic, such as sodium or potassium hydroxide.


CLS 562/540
TXT Nitrogen containing oxidant:

    Processes under subclass 538 wherein the acid is produced by oxidizing the
    alcohol with a nitrogen containing oxidant such as nitric acid or the
    oxides of nitrogen.


CLS 562/541
TXT Of halogenated hydrocarbon:

    Processes under subclass 523 wherein the acid is produced by oxidizing a
    halogenated hydrocarbon.


CLS 562/542
TXT Of hydrocarbon:

    Processes under subclass 523 wherein the acid is produced by oxidation of a
    hydrocarbon.


CLS 562/543
TXT Alicyclic:

    Processes under subclass 542 wherein the acid is produced by oxidizing an
    alicyclic hydrocarbon.


CLS 562/544
TXT Olefin:

    Processes under subclass 542 wherein the acid is produced by oxidizing an
    olefin.


CLS 562/545
TXT Producing unsaturated acid:

    Processes under subclass 544 wherein the acid produced by oxidizing an
    olefin is an unsaturated acyclic carboxylic acid.


CLS 562/546
TXT Group VIII Metal Containing Catalyst Utilized:

    Processes under subclass 545 wherein the unsaturated acid is produced by
    oxidizing an olefin utilizing a Group VIII metal containing catalyst.


CLS 562/547
TXT Group V Metal Containing Catalyst Utilized:

    Processes under subclass 545 wherein the unsaturated acid is produced by
    oxidizing an olefin utilizing a Group V metal containing catalyst.


CLS 562/548
TXT Producing acetic acid:

    Processes under subclass 544 wherein the acid produced by oxidizing an
    olefin is acetic acid.


CLS 562/549
TXT Alkane:

    Processes under subclass 542 wherein the acid is produced by oxidizing a
    saturated acyclic hydrocarbon.


CLS 562/550
TXT Formation of carboxyl group by carbonation:

    Processes under subclass 512 wherein an acyclic carboxylic acid is produced
    by reacting an acyclic compound with carbon dioxide or a material which
    will produce carbon dioxide under the reaction conditions, such as a
    carbonate.


CLS 562/551
TXT Of C-Metallated Compound:

    Processes under subclass 550 wherein the acid is produced by reacting a
    compound having a C-Metal bond with carbon dioxide.


CLS 562/552
TXT Of alkali metal salt of carboxylic acid:

    Processes under subclass 550 wherein the acide is produced by reacting an
    alkali metal salt of a carboxylic acid with carbon dioxide.


CLS 562/553
TXT Nitrogen bonded to carbon of organic radical (e.g., amino acids, etc.):


    Compounds under subclass 512 wherein the acid contains nitrogen bonded to a
    carbon of an organic radical.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    564,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 67+ for processes of producing urea
    from carbon dioxide and ammonia wherein ammonium carbomate is also formed.


CLS 562/554
TXT Purification or recovery, per se:

    Processes under subclass 553 directed to the purification, separation, or
    recovery of nitrogen containing acyclic carboxylic acids.

    (1)     Note.  See subclasses 516 for purification or recovery of amino
    acids from protein hydrolysates.

    (2)     Note.  See subclasses 401+ for the separation of optical isomers of
    nitrogen containing acyclic carboxylic acids.


CLS 562/555
TXT Carbamic acids or salts thereof:

    Compounds under subclass 553 wherein the acid contains nitrogen bonded
    directly to the carbon of a carboxyl group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/556
TXT Sulfur or selenium:

    Compounds under subclass 553 wherein the acid contains covalently bonded
    sulfur or selenium:

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/557
TXT Alpha N, Beta S - Acids or Salts Thereof:

    Compounds under subclass 556 wherein the acid contains nitrogen attached to
    the alpha carbon and sulfur attached to the beta carbon relative to the
    carboxyl group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/558
TXT Penicillamine, per se, or salt thereof:

    The compound under subclass 557 which is penicillamine

    or its salts and processes for its preparation not provided for above.


CLS 562/559
TXT Methionine, per se, or salt thereof:

    The compound under subclass 556 which is methionine

    or its salts and processes for its preparation not provided for above.


CLS 562/560
TXT Ureido, hydrazino, or nitrogen double bonded directly to carbon:

    Compounds under subclass 553 wherein the acid contains the ureido group
    (N-C (=O)- N), the hydrazino group (N - N), or the -C=N- group, such as the
    guanido or amidino groups or structures equivalent to those formed by
    reacting an aldehyde or a ketone with ammonia or an amine.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/561
TXT Plural nitrogens:

    Compounds under subclass 553 wherein the acid contains more than one
    nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/562
TXT Lysine, per se, or salt thereof:

    The compound under subclass 561 which is lysine

    or its salts and processes for its preparation not provided for above.


CLS 562/563
TXT Glutamine, per se, or salt thereof:

    The compound under subclass 561 which is glutamine

    or its salts and processes for its preparation not provided for above.


CLS 562/564
TXT Oxy containing:

    Compounds under subclass 561 wherein the acid contains an -OX group bonded
    to a noncarbonylic carbon, where X is a noncarbonylic carbon, H, or an
    alcoholate forming group not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/565
TXT Polycarboxylic:

    Compounds under subclass 561 wherein the acid contains more than one
    carboxyl group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/566
TXT Ethylene diamine tetraacetic acid, per se, or salt thereof:

    The compound under subclass 565 which is ethylene diamine tetraacetic acid:


    or its salts and processes for its preparation not provided for above.


CLS 562/567
TXT Oxy, aldehyde, or ketone:

    Compounds under subclass 553 wherein the acid contains an -OX group bonded
    to a noncarbonylic carbon not provided for above; or a -C (=O) X group
    bonded to carbon where X is C or H.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/568
TXT Polycarboxylic:

    Compounds under subclass 567 wherein the acid contains more than one
    carboxyl group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/569
TXT Panthothenic acid, per se, or salt thereof:

    The compound under subclass 567 which is panthothenic   a cid:

    or its salts and processes for its preparation not provided for above.


CLS 562/570
TXT Threonine ,per se, or salt thereof:

    The compound under subclass 567 which is threonine

    or its salts and processes for its preparation not provided for above.


CLS 562/571
TXT Polycarboxylic:

    Compounds under subclass 553 wherein the acid contains more than one
    carboxyl group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/572
TXT Nitrilotriacetic acid, per se, or salt thereof:

    The compound under subclass 571 which is nitrilotriacetic acid

    or its salts and processes for its preparation not provided for above.


CLS 562/573
TXT Glutamic acid, per se, or salt thereof:

    The compound under subclass 571 which is glutamic acid

    or its salts and processes for its preparation not provided for above.


CLS 562/574
TXT Halogen or unsaturation:

    Compounds under subclass 553 wherein the acid contains covalently bonded
    halogen, or contains a double or triple bond.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/575
TXT Alpha nitrogen:

    Compounds under subclass 553 wherein the acid contains nitrogen bonded to
    the carbon which is in the position alpha to the carboxyl group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/576
TXT Beta alanine, per se, or salts thereof:

    The compound under subclass 553 which is beta alanine

    or its salts and processes for its preparation not provided for above.


CLS 562/577
TXT Aldehyde or ketone:

    Compounds under subclass 512 wherein the acid contains the group -C (=O) X
    bonded to carbon, where X is C or H.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/578
TXT Polycarboxylic:

    Compounds under subclass 577 wherein the acid contains more than one
    carboxyl group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/579
TXT Oxy:

    Compounds under subclass 512 wherein the acid contains an -OX group
    attached to a noncarbonylic carbon and X is a noncarbonylic C, H, or an
    alcoholate forming group not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/580
TXT Purification or recovery, per se:

    Processes under subclass 579 directed to the purification, separation, or
    recovery of an acyclic oxy carboxylic acid.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 515 for recovery of acyclic oxy carboxylic
    acids resulting from the degradation of carbohydrates.

    (2)     Note.  See subclasses 401+ for the separation of optical isomers of
    acyclic oxy carboxylic acids.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclass 25.35 and the classes referred to in the
    search notes of that subclass for processes of and apparatus for the
    manufacture of piezoelectric crystals of Rochelle salt by procedures which
    include crystallizing and additional manufacturing operations.


CLS 562/581
TXT Sulfur:

    Compounds under subclass 579 wherein the acid contains covalently bonded
    sulfur.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/582
TXT Polycarboxylic:

    Compounds under subclass 579 wherein the acid contains more than one
    carboxyl group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/583
TXT Ether:

    Compounds under subclass 582 wherein the acid contains the -OX group bonded
    to a noncarbonylic carbon, where X is a noncarbonylic carbon.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/584
TXT Citric acid, per se, or salt thereof:

    The compound under subclass 582 which is citric acid

    or its salts and processes for its preparation not provided for above.


CLS 562/585
TXT Tartaric acid, per se, of salt thereof:

    The compound under subclass 582 which is tartaric acid

    or its salts and processes for its preparation not provided for above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 311+ for
    piezoelectric crystals of Rochelle salt where the shape is significant; and
    subclass 360 where the specific configuration or crystal axis is
    significant with respect to piezoelectric properties.


CLS 562/586
TXT Halogen:

    Compounds under subclass 579 wherein the acid contains covalently bonded
    halogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/587
TXT Polyoxy:

    Compounds under subclass 579 wherein the acid contains more than one oxy
    group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/588
TXT Alkoxy:

    Compounds under subclass 579 wherein the -OX group of the acids is bonded
    to the carbon of an alkyl group and X is a noncarbonylic carbon.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/589
TXT Lactic acid, per se, or salt thereof:

    The compound under subclass 579 which is lactic acid

    or its salts and processes for its preparation not provided for above.


CLS 562/590
TXT Polycarboxylic:

    Compounds under subclass 512 wherein the acid contains more than one
    carboxyl group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    554,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 1+, particularly subclass 166 for
    polycarboxylic acids derived by introducing additional carboxyl groups into
    higher fatty acids without cleavage.


CLS 562/591
TXT Preparation by isomerization:

    Processes under subclass 590 wherein the acid is prepared by isomerization,
    as for example, the preparation of fumaric acid by isomerizing maleic acid.


CLS 562/592
TXT Preparation by hydrogenation:

    Processes under subclass 590 wherein the acid is produced by introduction
    of hydrogen.


CLS 562/593
TXT Purification or recovery, per se:

    Processes under subclass 590 directed to the purification, separation, or
    recovery of acyclic polycarboxylic acids.

    (1)     Note.  See subclasses 513 and 515 for purification or recovery of
    acyclic polycarboxylic acids from sources of undetermined compositions or
    from the degradation of carbohydrates, respectively.


CLS 562/594
TXT Element Other Than C, H, O, N, or Halogen:

    Compounds under subclass 590 wherein the acid contains an element
    covalently bonded other than C, H, O, N, and halogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/595
TXT Unsaturated:

    Compounds under subclass 590 wherein the acid contains a double or triple
    bond.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:

    HOOC.CH2.C(COOH) = CH.COOH


CLS 562/596
TXT Halogen:

    Compounds under subclass 590 wherein the acid contains covalently bonded
    halogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/597
TXT Oxalic acid, per se, or salt thereof:

    The compound under subclass 590 which is oxalic acid

    or its salts and processes for its preparation not provided for above.


CLS 562/598
TXT Unsaturated:

    Compounds under subclass 512 wherein the acid contains a double or triple
    bond.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/599
TXT Formation of ethylenic unsaturation:

    Processes under subclass 598 wherein the acid is prepared by the
    introduction of a double bond.


CLS 562/600
TXT Purification or recovery, per se:

    Processes under subclass 598 directed to the purification, separation, or
    recovery of acyclic unsaturated carboxylic acids.


CLS 562/601
TXT Sorbic acid, per se, or salt thereof:

    The compound under subclass 598 which is sorbic acid

    or its salts and processes for its preparation not provided for above.


CLS 562/602
TXT Halogen:

    Compounds under subclass 512 wherein the acid contains covalently bonded
    halogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:

    CH2Br - CHBr - COOH

    SEARCH CLASS:

    554,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 225+ for halogenated higher fatty
    acids.


CLS 562/603
TXT Preparation by halogenating acid or anhydride:

    Processes under subclass 602 wherein the acid is prepared by introducing
    halogen into an acyclic carboxylic acid or its anhydride.


CLS 562/604
TXT Preparation by dehalogenation:

    Processes under subclass 602 wherein the acid is prepared by reducing the
    halogen content.


CLS 562/605
TXT Fluorine containing:

    Compounds under subclass 602 wherein the acid contains covalently bonded
    fluorine.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 562/606
TXT Saturated lower fatty acids:

    Compounds under subclass 512 wherein the acid contains a saturated,
    unsubstituted unbroken chain of not more than 6 carbon atoms attached to a
    carboxyl group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


    SEARCH CLASS:

    554,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 1+ for higher fatty acids.


CLS 562/607
TXT Acetic acid, per se, salt thereof:

    The compound under subclass 606 which is acetic acid or its salts and
    processes for its preparation not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 536 for production of acetic acid by the
    oxidation of aldehydes; and subclass 548 for the oxidation of olefins.


CLS 562/608
TXT Purification or recovery, per se:

    Processes under subclass 607 directed to the purification, separation, or
    recovery of acetic acid.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 513 for the recovery of acetic acid from
    sources of undetermined composition; and subclass 515 for the recovery of
    acetic acid resulting from degradation of carbohydrates.

    (2)     Note.  See (1) Note (b) under subclass 400 for the placement of
    patents claiming the purification or recovery of an acid combined with a
    salt forming or salt hydrolysis step.


CLS 562/609
TXT Formic acid, per se, or salt thereof:

    The compound under subclass 606 which is formic acid or its salts and
    processes for its preparation not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, processes for preparing
    formic acid from carbon monoxide and water.


CLS 562/620
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 which contain the following group,
    wherein the hydrogen may be replaced by a Group IA or IIA light metal, or
    by substituted or unsubstituted ammonium:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    215-225 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    oxygen, nitrogen, and group IA or IIA light metals.


CLS 562/621
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 which contain either of the
    following acid groups, in each of which the X's may be the same or diverse
    chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium), the R's may be
    hydrogen or substitution for hydrogen, and H of -XH may be replaced by a
    Group IA or IIA light metal or by substituted or unsubstituted ammonium:


    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    215-225 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    chalcogen, nitrogen, and group IA or IIA light metals.


CLS 562/622
TXT Compounds under subclass 621 wherein the carbon of the acid group is bonded
    directly to a carbocyclic ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 562/623
TXT Compounds under subclass 621 wherein the acid group is attached to nitrogen
    directly or indirectly by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 562/624
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 which contain the following group,
    wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium) and H
    of -XH may be replaced by a Group IA or IIA light metal or by substituted
    or unsubstituted ammonium:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    215-225 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    chalcogen, nitrogen, the groups IA or IIA light metals.


CLS 562/625
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 which contain the following group,
    wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium), R is
    hydrogen or substitution for hydrogen, and H of -XH may be replaced by a
    Group IA or IIA light metal, or by substituted or unsubstituted ammonium:


    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    215-225 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    chalcogen, nitrogen, and group IA or IIA light metals.


CLS 562/800
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 which contain the -C(=X)-NH-halo
    group, wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium), and substitution may be made for hydrogen only, i.e.,
    hydroxamic acid halides or chalcogen analogs thereof.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    207-211 and 215-222 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste
    containing halogen, chalcogen, or nitrogen.


CLS 562/801
TXT Compounds under subclass 800 wherein the -C(=X)- group is further bonded
    directly to an additional nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 562/802
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 which contain the -N=CH-halo group,
    wherein substitution may be made for hydrogen only, i.e., imidic acid
    halides.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    213-222 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    halogen, chalcogen, or nitrogen.


CLS 562/803
TXT Compounds under subclass 802 wherein an additional halogen is bonded
    directly to the carbon of the imidic acid halide group, i.e., -N=C-(halo)2.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for the isocyanide dihalides.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for  herein  is:


CLS 562/804
TXT Compounds under subclass 802 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) is attached directly to the nitrogen of the imidic
    acid halide group by nonionic bonding (i.e., -X-N=CH-halo wherein
    substitution may be made for hydrogen only).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/805
TXT Compounds under subclass 802 having the following formula, wherein
    substitution may be made for hydrogen only:


CLS 562/806
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 wherein halogen is bonded directly
    to boron by nonionic bonding; i.e., boron halides.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    220-222 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    nitrogen or phosphorus.


CLS 562/807
TXT Compounds under subclass 806 in which phosphorus is attached directly or
    indirectly to the boron by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 562/808
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 wherein halogen is bonded directly
    to phosphorus by nonionic bonding, i.e., phosphorus halides.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses 206
    and 213-222 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste
    containing halogen, nitrogen, or phosphorus.


CLS 562/809
TXT Compounds under subclass 808 in which nitrogen is bonded directly to the
    phosphorus.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/810
TXT Compounds under subclass 809 wherein both the phosphorus and the nitrogen
    are members of the same ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/811
TXT Compounds under subclass 808 containing plural phosphorus atoms attached
    directly or indirectly to each other by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/812
TXT Compounds under subclass 808 wherein the phosphorus is a member of a ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/813
TXT Compounds under subclass 808 in which sulfur is bonded directly to the
    phosphorus.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/814
TXT Processes under subclass 813 which utilize an inorganic compound which
    contains phosphorus and sulfur in the preparation.


CLS 562/815
TXT Processes under subclass 813 whereby a phosphorus to carbon bond is formed.


CLS 562/816
TXT Compounds under subclass 808 in which oxygen is bonded directly to the
    phosphorus.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/817
TXT Compounds under subclass 816 wherein halogen is attached indirectly to the
    phosphorus by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/818
TXT Processes under subclass 816 whereby the phosphorus to halogen bond is
    formed.


CLS 562/819
TXT Processes under subclass 816 whereby a phosphorus to carbon bond is formed.


CLS 562/820
TXT Processes under subclass 808 whereby a phosphorus to carbon bond is formed.


CLS 562/821
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 wherein halogen is bonded directly
    to sulfur by nonionic bonding:  i.e., sulfur halides.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for  herein  are:


    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    206-222 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    halogen, chalcogen, or phosphorus.


CLS 562/822
TXT Compounds under subclass 821 in which nitrogen is bonded directly to the
    sulfur.

    (1)     Note.  Example of compounds provided for  herein  are:


CLS 562/823
TXT Compounds under subclass 822 in which phosphorus, a -C(=X)- group, wherein
    X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium) or an
    additional chalcogen is attached directly to the nitrogen by nonionic
    bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided   for   herein  are:


CLS 562/824
TXT Compounds under subclass 821 wherein the halogen is fluorine; i.e., sulfur
    fluorides.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 562/825
TXT Compounds under subclass 824 wherein chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) is double bonded directly to the sulfur.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/826
TXT Compounds under subclass 825 in which a benzene ring is attached directly
    or indirectly to the sulfur by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 562/827
TXT Compounds under subclass 821 in which chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) is double bonded directly to the sulfur (e.g.,
    sulfinyl halides, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/828
TXT Compounds under subclass 827 wherein plural chalcogens are double bonded
    directly to the sulfur (e.g., sulfonyl halides, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/829
TXT Processes under subclass 828 in which elemental halogen is utilized.


CLS 562/830
TXT Processes under subclass 828 in which thionyl halide; i.e., halo-S(=O)-halo
    or a carbonyl dihalide; i.e., halo-C(=O)-halo is utilized.


CLS 562/831
TXT Compounds under subclass 828 wherein at least two -S(=O)(=O)-halo groups
    are attached indirectly to each other by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/832
TXT Compounds under subclass 828 in which nitrogen, other than in a nitro or
    nitroso group, is attached indirectly to the sulfur by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 562/833
TXT Compounds under subclass 828 in which chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) or nitrogen is attached indirectly to the sulfur by
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/834
TXT Compounds under subclass 828 in which halogen is attached indirectly to the
    sulfur by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 562/835
TXT Compounds under subclass 821 in which chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) or nitrogen is attached indirectly to the sulfur by
    nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for    herein   are:


CLS 562/836
TXT The compound under subclass 821 which has the following structure:


CLS 562/837
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 which contain the following group,
    in which substitution may be made for hydrogen only:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    215-222 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    sulfur, oxygen, or nitrogen.


CLS 562/838
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 which contain the -C(=S)-halo
    group, i.e., thiocarboxylic acid halides.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    206-222 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    halogen, sulfur, oxygen, or nitrogen.


CLS 562/839
TXT Compounds under subclass 838 wherein plural halogens are bonded directly to
    the thiocarbonyl group (e.g., thiophosgene, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/840
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 which contain the -C(=O)-halo
    group; i.e., carboxylic acid halide.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    206-222 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    halogen, oxygen, and nitrogen.


CLS 562/841
TXT Products under subclass 840 wherein the carboxylic acid halide containing
    compound is mixed with a preserving or stabilizing agent whose sole
    function is to prevent physical or chemical change.


CLS 562/842
TXT Compounds under subclass 840 wherein boron or phosphorus is attached
    directly or indirectly to the carbonyl group by nonionic bonding.


CLS 562/843
TXT Compounds under subclass 840 wherein an additional carbonyl group is bonded
    directly to the carbonyl of the carboxylic acid halide; i.e.,

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/844
TXT Compounds under subclass 840 in which nitrogen is bonded directly to the
    carbonyl of the carboxylic acid halide; i.e., carbamyl halides of the
    following formula, wherein substitution may be made for hydrogen only:


    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/845
TXT Compounds under subclass 844 wherein chalcogen, X, (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) or an additional carbonyl group is bonded directly
    to the nitrogen of the carbamyl halide; i.e., groups of the following
    formulas, wherein substitution may be made for hydrogen only:

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 562/846
TXT Processes under subclass 844 wherein phosgene, i.e., the compound of the
    following formula, is used as a reactant:


CLS 562/847
TXT The compound under subclass 840 which has the following structure:


CLS 562/848
TXT Processes under subclass 840 whereby carbon monoxide is utilized as a
    reactant, i.e., carbonylation reactions.


CLS 562/849
TXT Compounds under subclass 840 in which the halogen is fluorine; i.e.,
    -C(=O)-F.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/850
TXT Compounds under subclass 849 wherein plural -C(=O)-F groups are attached
    indirectly to each other by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 562/851
TXT Processes under subclass 849 whereby the carbonyl group, -C(=O)-, is formed.


CLS 562/852
TXT Processes under subclass 849 whereby the bond between the carbonyl group
    and the fluorine is formed.


CLS 562/853
TXT Compounds under subclass 840 wherein at least two -C(=O)-halo groups are
    attached indirectly to each other by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/854
TXT Processes under subclass 853 which utilize phosgene in the preparation.


CLS 562/855
TXT Compounds under subclass 853 wherein at least two carbonyl groups are
    bonded directly to the same benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/856
TXT Processes under subclass 840 for the preparation of the carboxylic halide
    containing compounds or for the treatment of such compounds.


CLS 562/857
TXT Processes under subclass 856 wherein phosgene is utilized as a reactant.


CLS 562/858
TXT Processes under subclass 856 wherein a ketene reactant is utilized.

    (1)     Note.  The structure of  ketene  is:


CLS 562/859
TXT Processes under subclass 856 whereby the -C(=O)- group is formed.


CLS 562/860
TXT Processes under subclass 859 wherein the carbonyl group is formed by the
    oxidation of a halogenated olefin.


CLS 562/861
TXT Processes under subclass 856 whereby the carbonyl to halogen bond is formed.


CLS 562/862
TXT Processes under subclass 861 wherein a reactant is utilized which has
    halogen bonded directly to sulfur by nonionic bonding.


CLS 562/863
TXT Processes under subclass 861 in which elemental halogen or hydrogen halide
    is utilized as a reactant.


CLS 562/864
TXT Processes under subclass 856 whereby halogen is added to a compound.


CLS 562/865
TXT Processes under subclass 856 whereby halogen, or hydrogen and halogen, are
    removed from a compound.


CLS 562/866
TXT Processes under subclass 856 wherein the carboxylic acid halide is
    separated from impurities or from the reaction medium.


CLS 562/867
TXT Compounds under subclass 840 which contain an alicyclic ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:


CLS 562/868
TXT Compounds under subclass 840 wherein nitrogen is attached indirectly to the
    carbonyl group by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:


CLS 562/869
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 which contain the following group,
    wherein X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium):


    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    215-222 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    chalcogen or nitrogen.


CLS 562/870
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 which contain the following group,
    wherein X is oxygen or sulfur:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    215-222 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    oxygen, sulfur, or nitrogen.


CLS 562/871
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 which contain either of the
    following two groups, wherein the X's are the same or diverse chalcogens
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium):

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    215-222 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    chalcogen or nitrogen.


CLS 562/872
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 which contain the following group:


    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    215-222 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    oxygen or sulfur.


CLS 562/873
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 which contain either of the
    following  two groups:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    215-222 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    oxygen, sulfur, or nitrogen.


CLS 562/874
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 which contain either of the two
    following groups, wherein substitution may be made for hydrogen only, and
    the X's may be the same or diverse chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium):

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    215-222 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    chalcogen or nitrogen.


CLS 562/875
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 which contain the following group,
    wherein substitution may be made for hydrogen only, and the X's may be the
    same or diverse chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium):


    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    215-219 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    chalcogen or nitrogen.


CLS 562/876
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 in which the single bonded X of a
    -C(=X)X- group is bonded directly to phosphorus and the X's may be the same
    or diverse chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    215-222 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    chalcogen or phosphorus.


CLS 562/877
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 in which cyano or an -N=C=X group
    is bonded directly to phosphorus, and X is chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    215-222 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    chalcogen, nitrogen, or phosphorus.


CLS 562/878
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 wherein a divalent chalcogen atom
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium) is bonded directly to two
    phosphorus atoms.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses 206
    and 215-222 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste
    containing halogen chalcogen or phosphorus.


CLS 562/879
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 which contain either of the two
    following groups, in each of which the X's may be the


            same or diverse chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or
    tellurium):

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    215-222 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    chalcogen or nitrogen.


CLS 562/880
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 which contain either of the two
    following groups, in each of which substitution may be made only for
    hydrogen and the X's may be the same or diverse chalcogens (i.e., oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium or tellurium):

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment note subclasses
    215-222 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    chalcogen or nitrogen.


CLS 562/881
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 which contain the following group,
    in which substitution may be made for hydrogen only, the X's may be the
    same or diverse chalcogens

            (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium), and halo is halogen:


    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    215-222 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    chalcogen or nitrogen.


CLS 562/882
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 wherein the single bonded X of a
    -C(=X)X- group is bonded directly to boron, and the X's may be the same or
    diverse chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium).

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses 206
    and 213-219 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste
    containing chalcogen.


CLS 562/883
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 wherein a divalent chalcogen atom
    (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium) is bonded directly to two
    borons.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses 206
    and 213-220 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste
    containing halogen or chalcogen.


CLS 562/884
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 wherein the single bonded oxygen of
    a  -S(=O)(=O)-O- group is bonded directly to boron.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    215-219 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    oxygen or sulfur.


CLS 562/885
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 wherein carbon, which may be
    multiple bonded only to another carbon, is bonded directly to a -S-SCN
    group.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    215-222 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    sulfur or nitrogen.


CLS 562/886
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 which contain the following group,
    in which the X's are the same or diverse chalcogens (i.e., oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium or tellurium) and at least one X is sulfur:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    215-219 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    chalcogen.


CLS 562/887
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 which contain the carboxylic acid
    anhydride group:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    215-219 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    oxygen.


CLS 562/888
TXT Processes under subclass 887 wherein the carboxylic acid anhydride group is
    formed.


CLS 562/889
TXT Processes under subclass 888 wherein an aldehyde reactant is used.


CLS 562/890
TXT Processes under subclass 888 wherein carbon monoxide or a metal carbonyl is
    used as a reactant.


CLS 562/891
TXT Processes under subclass 890 wherein an ether or a carboxylic acid ester is
    used as a reactant.


CLS 562/892
TXT Processes under subclass 888 wherein a ketene or a ketone is used as a
    reactant.

    (1)     Note.  The structure of  ketene is:


CLS 562/893
TXT Processes under subclass 888 wherein an ether or a carboxylic acid ester is
    used as a reactant.


CLS 562/894
TXT Processes under subclass 888 wherein a salt of a carboxylic acid is used as
    a reactant.


CLS 562/895
TXT Processes under subclass 888 which involve the dehydration of two like or
    different molecules of carboxylic acid.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of processes provided for   herein  are:


CLS 562/896
TXT Processes under subclass 895 wherein the dehydration is conducted in vapor
    phase.


CLS 562/897
TXT Processes under subclass 888 wherein a carboxylic acid halide is used as a
    reactant.


CLS 562/898
TXT Processes under subclass 887 wherein the carboxylic acid anhydride is
    separated from impurities or from the reaction mixture.


CLS 562/899
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 which contain selenium or tellurium.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided  for  herein  are:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses 206
    and 213-222 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste
    containing halogen, selenium, tellurium, or phosphorus.


CLS 564/
TTL ORGANIC COMPOUNDS -- PART OF THE CLASS 532-570 SERIES

CLS 564/1
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 which contain nitrogen in a form
    other than as nitrogen in an inorganic ion of an addition salt, nitro, or
    nitroso.

    (1)     Note.  This group of compounds includes for example, ureas,
    thioureas, amides, amidines, azines, hydrazones, carbodiimides, oximes,
    hydroxylamines, and amines, inter alia, as well as their inorganic acid
    salts.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is residual for alicyclic amines not
    specifically provided for below.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:

    (4)     Note.  If amino nitrogen is present, the compound may additionally
    contain nitro, nitroso, or nitrogen in an inorganic ion of an addition salt.

    (5)     Note.  Component parts of an "adduct" will be considered to be
    attached to each other ionically, except if it is clear that the mode of
    attachment is nonionic.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    206-225 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste containing
    halogen, sulfur, oxygen, nitrogen, phosphorus, or metals.


CLS 564/1.5
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 wherein urea, per se, of thiourea, per se, forms
    an adduct or inclusion compound with an organic compound.

    (1)     Note.  by adduct or inclusion compound is meant a type of complex
    in which the urea or thiourea is bound with another suitable chemical
    without changing the chemical character of either the urea-thiourea or of
    the other chemical; the respective molecules will be unaltered in their
    chemical nature and the individual compounds may readily be constituted and
    isolated.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is the adduct
    of urea and an alkane.


CLS 564/2
TXT Products under subclass 1 wherein the amino nitrogen containing compound is
    mixed with a preserving agent whose sole function is to prevent physical or
    chemical change.


CLS 564/3
TXT Products under subclass 2 wherein the compound stabilized or preserved
    contains the grouping

                    NN

    wherein X is O or S.


CLS 564/4
TXT Products under subclass 2 wherein the compound stabilized or preserved is a
    carboxamide containing the grouping

                    RN


CLS 564/5
TXT Products under subclass 2 wherein the compound being preserved contains a
    benzene ring.


CLS 564/6
TXT Products under subclass 5 wherein the preserving or stabilizing agent is
    inorganic.


CLS 564/7
TXT Products under subclass 5 wherein the preserving or stabilizing agent
    contains sulfur or a phenolic group.


CLS 564/8
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which contain boron.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains boron containing complexes, adducts,
    and salts.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/9
TXT Compounds under subclass 8 wherein the boron is directly attached to an
    amino nitrogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/10
TXT Compounds under subclass 9 wherein the nonionically bonded boron and amino
    nitrogen are both members of the same ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/11
TXT Compounds under subclass 10 wherein the boron and nitrogen containing ring
    is part of a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/12
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which contain phosphorus directly attached to an
    amino nitrogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/13
TXT Compounds under subclass 12 wherein the phosphorus and amino nitrogen are
    both members of the same ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/14
TXT Compounds under subclass 12 wherein at least two amino nitrogens and oxygen
    or sulfur are bonded to the same phosphorus.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/15
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which contain phosphorus indirectly attached to
    amino nitrogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/16
TXT Compounds under subclass 15 wherein the phosphorus is a member of a ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/17
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which contain the grouping
                                 NN

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    558,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 4 and 5 for isothioureas or
    pseudothioureas.


CLS 564/18
TXT Compounds under subclass 17 which contain the thiocarbazide radical wherein
    an amino nitrogen is bonded directly to each of the thiorea nitrogens



    or the thiosemicarbazide radical wherein an amino nitrogen is bonded to one
    thiourea nitrogen.                                  -N-

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/19
TXT Compounds under subclass 18 which contain the thiocarbazone radical


    or the thiosemicarbazone radical

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/20
TXT Compounds under subclass 19 which contain a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/21
TXT Compounds under subclass 20 which contain nitrogen in addition to that of
    the thiocarbazone or thiosemicarbazone.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/22
TXT Compounds under subclass 17 which contain the grouping
                           --

    wherein X may be oxygen or sulfur, i.e., mono- or dithiobiurets.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/23
TXT Compounds under subclass 17 wherein a thiourea nitrogen has carbonyl,
    sulfur, or cyano group directly attached by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/24
TXT Processes under subclass 17 wherein carbon disulfide is utilized in
    preparing a thiourea.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example, the reaction of aniline
    and carbon disulfide to produce thiocarbanilide.


CLS 564/25
TXT Processes under subclass 17 wherein a cyano compound is utilized in
    preparing a thiourea.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example, the production of
    thiourea by reaction of cyanamide with hydrogen sulfide.


CLS 564/26
TXT Compounds under subclass 17 which contain a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/27
TXT Compounds under subclass 26 which contain nitrogen in addition to the
    thiourea nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/28
TXT Compounds under subclass 26 which contain a hydroxyl group bonded directly
    to a carbon, or an ether, wherein H of the -OH may be replaced by a
    substituted or unsubstituted ammonium ion or a group IA or IIA light metal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/29
TXT Compounds under subclass 26 which contain halogen nonionically bonded.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/30
TXT Compounds under subclass 17 which do not contain any ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/31
TXT The compound under subclass 30 which is thiourea, or its salts and
    processes of preparation not provided for above.


CLS 564/32
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which have the grouping
                                - -

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example, adducts of urea with
    inorganic compounds such as hydrogen peroxide or calcium nitrate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, subclass 96.5 for adducts of urea
    with organic compounds.

    558,    Organic Compounds, subclass 8 for isoureas or pseudoureas.

    564,    Organic Compounds, subclass 1.5 for adducts of urea with organic
    compounds.


CLS 564/33
TXT Compounds under subclass 32 which contain a nitro or nitroso group bonded
    directly to an amino nitrogen (i.e., nitramine or nitrosamine containing).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/34
TXT Compounds under subclass 32 which are carbazides or semicarbazides
    containing the grouping

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:




CLS 564/35
TXT Compounds under subclass 34 wherein a carbonyl group or sulfur is attached
    directly to a carbazide or semicarbazide nitrogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/36
TXT Compounds under subclass 34 which contain the carbazone radical

    or the semicarbazone radical


    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/37
TXT Compounds under subclass 34 which do not contain any ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/38
TXT Compounds under subclass 32 which are biurets and contain the grouping
                         --

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/39
TXT Compounds under subclass 32 which contain sulfur attached directly to urea
    nitrogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/40
TXT Compounds under subclass 39 wherein the sulfur is part of a group which
    contains additional nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/41
TXT Compounds under subclass 40 wherein the additional nitrogen is the nitrogen
    of a benzamido group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/42
TXT Compounds under subclass 39 wherein the sulfur is part of a substituent
    which is monocyclic and aromatic.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/43
TXT Compounds under subclass 42 wherein an alicyclic ring is bonded directly to
    a urea nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/44
TXT Compounds under subclass 32 in which a urea nitrogen has been amidated by a
    carboxylic acid.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/45
TXT Compounds under subclass 44 wherein the carboxylic acid contains no ring.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    554,    Organic Compounds, subclass 56 for compounds where the carboxylic
    acid is a higher fatty acid.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/46
TXT Compounds under subclass 45 wherein the carboxylic acid contains a double
    or triple bond.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/47
TXT Compounds under subclass 32 which contain a benzene ring (i.e., aromatic).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/48
TXT Compounds under subclass 47 which are anilides, wherein a benzene ring is
    directly bonded to a urea nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/49
TXT Compounds under subclass 48 wherein the benzene ring is part of a
    substituent which contains sulfur

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/50
TXT Compounds under subclass 48 wherein the benzene ring is part of a
    substituent which contains additional nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/51
TXT Compounds under subclass 50 wherein the additional nitrogen is indirectly
    bonded to the benzene ring by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/52
TXT Compounds under subclass 48 wherein the benzene ring is part of a
    substituent which contains oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/53
TXT Compounds under subclass 48 wherein the benzene ring is part of a
    substituent which contains halogen bonded directly to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/54
TXT Compounds under subclass 53 wherein the halogen is fluorine.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/55
TXT Compounds under subclass 48 wherein more than one benzene ring is bonded
    directly to the same urea nitrogen or to different urea nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/56
TXT Compounds under subclass 47 wherein an aralkyl group is bonded directly to
    a urea nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/57
TXT Compounds under subclass 32 which contain an alicyclic group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/58
TXT Compounds under subclass 32 which contain an alkyl or substituted alkyl
    group bonded directly to a urea nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/59
TXT Compounds under subclass 58 wherein the alkyl group contains an additional
    nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/60
TXT Compounds under subclass 58 wherein the alkyl group contains oxygen as a
    substituent.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/61
TXT Processes under subclass 58 for the preparation, purification, separation,
    or recovery of compounds classified therein.


CLS 564/62
TXT Processes under subclass 61 wherein one of the starting materials contain a
    double or triple bond between two carbons.


CLS 564/63
TXT The compound under subclass 32 which is urea or salts thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for complexes of urea with inorganic compounds.


CLS 564/64
TXT Processes under subclass 63 which utilize a cyano containing compound, for
    example, calcium cyanamide in the preparation of urea.


CLS 564/65
TXT Processes under subclass 63 in which urea is prepared by reacting ammonia
    with carbon monoxide or carbon oxysulfide.


CLS 564/66
TXT Processes under subclass 63 in which urea is prepared directly from
    ammonium carbamate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    70,     for the preparation of urea from ammonia and carbon dioxide which
    includes the decomposition of by-product ammonium carbamate.


CLS 564/67
TXT Processes under subclass 63 wherein urea is prepared by the reaction of
    ammonia with carbon dioxide.


CLS 564/68
TXT Processes under subclass 67 which include the prevention of corrosion of
    the reactor.


CLS 564/69
TXT Processes under subclass 67 which include the step of synthesizing ammonia.


CLS 564/70
TXT Processes under subclass 67 wherein by-product ammonium carbamate is
    decomposed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66,     for the preparation of urea directly from ammonium carbamate.


CLS 564/71
TXT Processes under subclass 70 which utilize indirect heat exchange.


CLS 564/72
TXT Processes under subclass 70 wherein the decomposition of ammonium carbamate
    is performed in plural stages.


CLS 564/73
TXT Processes under subclass 63 directed to the purification, separation, or
    recovery of urea.


CLS 564/74
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which are thiocarboxamides containing the
    grouping   N

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/75
TXT Compounds under subclass 74 which contain the grouping
            -S-

    not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/76
TXT Compounds under subclass 75 which are thiuram sulfides containing the
    grouping

    wherein X is a positive integer.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/77
TXT Compounds under subclass 74 which are thioxamides containing the grouping
       --

    wherein X may be oxygen or sulfur.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/78
TXT Compounds under subclass 74 which do not contain a ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/79
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which are diamides of sulfuric acid (i.e.,
    sulfamides) and contain the grouping

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/80
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which are sulfonamides and contain the grouping


    wherein R-SO2 - is the residue of a sulfonic acid and N is the residue of
    an amino nitrogen containing compound.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/81
TXT Compounds under subclass 80 which contain a hydrazine group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/82
TXT Compounds under subclass 80 which contain more than one sulfonamide group
    or contain plural sulfonyls bonded directly to the same nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/83
TXT Compounds under subclass 82 wherein the sulfonyls of two sulfonamide groups
    contain no sulfonamide nitrogen between them.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/84
TXT Compounds under subclass 80 wherein the sulfonic acid residue is aromatic
    (i.e., benzene ring containing).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/85
TXT Compounds under subclass 84 wherein the aromatic sulfonic acid residue
    contains sulfur.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/86
TXT Compounds under subclass 84 wherein the residue of the aromatic sulfonic
    acid contains nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/87
TXT Compounds under subclass 86 wherein the residue of the aromatic sulfonic
    acid contains a nitro or nitroso group bonded directly to a carbon atom.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/88
TXT Compounds under subclass 84 wherein the residue of the aromatic sulfonic
    acid contains a carbonyl group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/89
TXT Compounds under subclass 84 wherein the residue of the aromatic sulfonic
    acid contains a hydroxyl group bonded directly to carbon or an ether
    wherein the H of the OH may be replaced by a substituted or unsubstituted
    ammonium ion or a Group IA or IIA light metal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/90
TXT Compounds under subclass 84 wherein the residue of the aromatic sulfonic
    acid is monocyclic.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/91
TXT Compounds under subclass 90 wherein the amino nitrogen compound residue
    contains a carbonyl, cyano, nitro, nitroso, halogen, or sulfur attached
    directly to the sulfonamido nitrogen or to an amino nitrogen by nonionic
    bonding.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this classification compounds having the
    structure RSO2-N-halogen are considered to be acid halides of analogs of
    hydroxamic acids and are classified in Class 562, subclass 837.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/92
TXT Compounds under subclass 90 wherein the amino nitrogen compound residue
    contains a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/93
TXT Compounds under subclass 90 wherein the amino nitrogen compound residue
    contains a hydroxyl bonded directly to carbon, or an ether, wherein the H
    of the -OH may be replaced by a substituted or unsubstituted ammonium ion
    or by a Group IA or IIA light metal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/94
TXT Compounds under subclass 90 wherein the amino nitrogen compound residue
    contains an additional nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/95
TXT Compounds under subclass 80 wherein the sulfonic acid residue contains no
    ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/96
TXT Compounds under subclass 95 wherein the sulfonic acid residue contains
    halogen nonionically bonded.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:

    F3C - (CF2)7 - SO2NH - C2H4 - N- (C2H5)2

    H17C8 - SO2NH - (CH2)3 - (OCH2CH2)3 - O - CH3


CLS 564/97
TXT Compounds under subclass 96 wherein the amino nitrogen compound residue
    contains a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/98
TXT Compounds under subclass 95 wherein the sulfonic acid residue consists of
    unsubstituted alkyl.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:

    H3C - CH2 - CH2 - CH2 - SO2 - NH - CH3


CLS 564/99
TXT Compounds under subclass 98 wherein the amine nitrogen compound residue
    contains a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/100
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which are thiosulfenamides containing the
    grouping

                                  -- S - S -

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/101
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which contain two amino nitrogens nonionically
    bonded directly to the same sulfur or which contain sulfur doubly bonded to
    oxygen and directly attached to an amino nitrogen by nonionic bonding, as
    for example, sulfinamides.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/102
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which contain sulfur bonded directly to an amino
    nitrogen by nonionic bonding, as for example, sulfenamides.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/103
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which are cyanamides wherein a cyano group is
    bonded directly to an amino nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/104
TXT Compounds under subclass 103 wherein the cyano group is bonded directly to
    a nitrogen of a guanidine group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:



CLS 564/105
TXT Compounds under subclass 103 which contain a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/106
TXT Compounds under subclass 103 which contains no ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:



            NC - NH - ( CH2 CH2 - O )3 - CH2 CH2 - OH


CLS 564/107
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which are nitramines wherein a nitro group is
    attached directly to an amino nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:





CLS 564/108
TXT Compounds under subclass 107 which contain an amino nitrogen doubly bonded
    to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/109
TXT Compounds under subclass 107 which do not contain a ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/110
TXT Compounds under subclass 109 which contain a nitro group bonded directly to
    carbon.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/111
TXT Compounds under subclass 110 which contain hydroxy bonded directly to
    carbon, or an ether, wherein the H of the -OH may be replaced by a
    substituted or unsubstituted ammonium ion or by a Group IA or IIA light
    metal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/112
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which are nitrosamines, wherein a nitroso group
    is attached directly to an amino nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/113
TXT Compounds under subclass 112 which do not contain a ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/114
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which are haloamines, wherein halogen is
    attached directly to an amino nitrogen by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    562,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 800+ for compounds wherein halogen is
    nonionically bonded to the nitrogen of a carboxamide.


CLS 564/115
TXT Compounds under subclass 114 which contain nitrogen doubly bonded to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/116
TXT Compounds under subclass 115 which contain the amidine group

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/117
TXT Compounds under subclass 114 which contain an alicyclic group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/118
TXT Compounds under subclass 114 which do not contain a ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/119
TXT Compounds under subclass 118 which contain a hydroxyl bonded directly to
    carbon, or an ether, wherein the H of the -OH may be replaced by a
    substituted or unsubstituted ammonium ion or by a Group IA or IIA light
    metal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/120
TXT Compounds under subclass 118 which contain a carbon to carbon double or
    triple bond.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/121
TXT Compounds under subclass 118 which contain plural difluoramino groups.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/122
TXT Compounds under subclass 121 wherein the plural difluoramino groups are
    bonded directly to the same carbon.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/123
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which are carboxamides and contain one of the
    groupings

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, subclasses 401, 402.5, 404 and 404.5
    for amides of higher fatty acids.

    530,    Chemistry: Natural Resins or Derivatives; Peptides or Reaction
    Products Thereof, subclasses 200+ for amides of natural resin acids wherein
    the acids are the mixture of acids naturally occurring in natural resins or
    for a natural resin acid amide wherein the amide does not have a known
    chemical structure.

    554,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 35+ for amides of higher fatty acids.


CLS 564/124
TXT Processes under subclass 123 wherein a carboxamide is prepared directly
    from a cyano containing compound.

    (1)     Note.  Processes which involve catalytic hydration or hydrolysis of
    nitriles combined with other chemical reactions, such as for example,
    reduction of a nitro group to an amine are placed in this subclass.  Where
    the only reaction is catalytic hydration, see subclasses 126+; and where
    the only reaction is acid hydrolysis, see subclass 129, even if
    purification or recovery steps are included.


CLS 564/125
TXT Processes under subclass 124 which utilize HCN or cyanogen in the
    preparation of a carboxamide.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example:


CLS 564/126
TXT Processes under subclass 124 wherein the sole chemical reaction for amide
    formation is the hydrolysis of a nitrile in water in the presence of a
    catalyst.

    (1)     Note.  For processes including simultaneous hydrolysis and other
    reactions, such as for example, amination, alkylation, or reduction, see
    subclass 124.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes the combination of hydrolysis
    followed by purification or recovery.


CLS 564/127
TXT Processes under subclass 126 which utilize a copper containing catalyst.


CLS 564/128
TXT Processes under subclass 126 wherein acrylonitriles are catalytically
    hydrated.


CLS 564/129
TXT Processes under subclass 124 wherein the sole chemicl reaction for amide
    formation is the acid hydrolysis of a nitrile.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes the combination of hydrolysis
    followed by purification or recovery.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    124,    for processes including simultaneous acid hydrolysis combined with
    other reactions.


CLS 564/130
TXT Processes under subclass 124 wherein a carboxamide is prepared from a
    nitrile which contains no ring.


CLS 564/131
TXT Processes under subclass 130 wherein the nitrile contains a double or
    triple bond between two carbons.


CLS 564/132
TXT Processes under subclass 123 wherein a carboxamide is prepared by a
    reaction utilizing carbon monoxide or carbon dioxide.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains for example, the reaction of an
    aliphatic alcohol with ammonia and carbon monoxide to prepare a formamide,
    or the reaction of an amine with carbon dioxide and hydrogen to prepare a
    formamide.


CLS 564/133
TXT Processes under subclass 123 wherein a carboxamide is formed by reaction of
    a carboxylic acid, salt, ester, acid halide, or anhydride with ammonia or
    an amino nitrogen containing compound.


CLS 564/134
TXT Processes under subclass 133 wherein a carboxylic acid ester is utilized.


CLS 564/135
TXT Processes under subclass 134 wherein the carboxylic acid of the ester does
    not contain a ring.


CLS 564/136
TXT Processes under subclass 135 wherein the carboxylic acid of the ester
    contains additional oxygen.


CLS 564/137
TXT Processes under subclass 135 wherein the carboxylic acid of the ester is a
    lower fatty acid.


CLS 564/138
TXT Processes under subclass 133 wherein a carboxylic acid is utilized.


CLS 564/139
TXT Processes under subclass 138 wherein the carboxylic acid contains a benzene
    ring.


CLS 564/140
TXT Processes under subclass 139 wherein hydroxy naphthoic acid is utilized.


CLS 564/141
TXT Processes under subclass 138 wherein a lower fatty acid is utilized.


CLS 564/142
TXT Processes under subclass 133 wherein a carboxylic acid halide is utilized.


CLS 564/143
TXT Processes under subclass 142 wherein the carboxylic acid halide does not
    contain a ring.


CLS 564/144
TXT Processes under subclass 133 wherein a carboxylic acid anhydride which does
    not have a ring is utilized.


CLS 564/145
TXT Processes under subclass 123 wherein a carboxamide is prepared by utilizing
    a mixture of sulfur or a sulfur containing compound with ammonia or by
    utilizing an ammonium polysulfide, as for example, by the Willgerodt
    reaction.


CLS 564/146
TXT Processes under subclass 123 wherein a nitro group is introduced into a
    carboxamide.


CLS 564/147
TXT Compounds under subclass 123 which are aminimines and contain the grouping

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/148
TXT Compounds under subclass 123 which contain a hydrazine group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/149
TXT Compounds under subclass 148 wherein the carboxylic acid residue contains a
    benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/150
TXT Compounds under subclass 149 wherein the carboxylic acid residue contains
    hydroxy bonded directly to carbon, or an ether, wherein the H of the -OH
    may be replaced by a substituted or unsubstituted ammonium ion or a Group
    IA or IIA light metal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/151
TXT Compounds under subclass 148 wherein the carboxylic acid residue does not
    contain a ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/152
TXT Compounds under subclass 123 which contain more than one carboxamide group
    or contain plural carbonyls bonded directly to the same nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/153
TXT Compounds under subclass 152 which contain three or more carboxamides.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/154
TXT Compounds under subclass 152 which contain nonionically bonded sulfur.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/155
TXT Compounds under subclass 152 which contain a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/156
TXT Compounds under subclass 155 wherein the carbonyls of two carboxamides have
    a benzene ring between them and no carboxamide nitrogen between them.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/157
TXT Compounds under subclass 155 which contain a noncarboxamide amino nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/158
TXT Compounds under subclass 155 which contain a hydroxyl bonded directly to
    carbon, or ether, wherein the H of -OH may be replaced by a substituted or
    unsubstitued ammonium ion or by a Group IA or IIA light metal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/159
TXT Compounds under subclass 152 which contain no ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/160
TXT Compounds under subclass 159 wherein the carbonyls of two carboxamides have
    no carboxamide nitrogen between them.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/161
TXT Compounds under subclass 123 wherein the residue of the carboxylic acid
    contains a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/162
TXT Compounds under subclass 161 wherein the residue of the carboxylic acid
    contains sulfur.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80+,    100, 101, and 102, for carboxamides which also contain sulfur
    bonded directly to amino nitrogen.


CLS 564/163
TXT Compounds under subclass 161 wherein the carboxylic acid residue contains
    nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/164
TXT Compounds under subclass 163 wherein the carboxylic acid residue contains
    an amine nitrogen indirectly attached to a ring through a carbon or through
    an acyclic chain.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/165
TXT Compounds under subclass 164 wherein the carboxylic acid residue contains a
    hydroxyl bonded directly to carbon or an ether, wherein the H of the -OH
    may be replaced by a substituted or unsubstituted ammonium ion or by a
    Group IA or IIA light metal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/166
TXT Compounds under subclass 163 wherein the residue of the carboxylic acid
    contains a nitro group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/167
TXT Compounds under subclass 163 wherein the carboxylic acid residue contains a
    hydroxyl bonded directly to carbon or an ether, wherein the H of the -OH
    may be replaced by a substituted or unsubstituted ammonium ion or by a
    Group IA or IIA light metal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/168
TXT Compounds under subclass 163 wherein the amino nitrogen containing residue
    contains a ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/169
TXT Compounds under subclass 161 wherein the carboxylic acid residue contains
    an aldehyde or ketone group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/170
TXT Compounds under subclass 161 wherein the carboxylic acid residue contains a
    hydroxyl bonded directly to carbon or an ether, wherein the H of the -OH
    may be replaced by a substituted or unsubstituted ammonium ion or by a
    Group IA or IIA light metal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/171
TXT Compounds under subclass 170 wherein the carboxylic acid residue contains
    more than one ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/172
TXT Compounds under subclass 171 wherein the carboxylic acid residue contains a
    polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/173
TXT Compounds under subclass 172 wherein the carboxylic acid residue is an
    ortho-hydroxy naphthoic acid or a partially hydrogenated form thereof.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/174
TXT Compounds under subclass 171 wherein the amino nitrogen residue contains a
    ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/175
TXT Compounds under subclass 170 wherein the carboxylic acid residue contains
    oxygen which is directly bonded to a benzene ring and is part of an acyclic
    chain which also contains the acid carbonyl group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/176
TXT Compounds under subclass 170 wherein the carboxylic acid residue contains a
    benzene ring bonded directly to the acid carbonyl group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/177
TXT Compounds under subclass 176 wherein the carboxylic acid residue contains a
    hydroxy group or its Group IA or IIA light metal or ammonium derivative
    bonded directly to a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/178
TXT Processes under subclass 177 wherein the compounds are prepared directly by
    halogenation.


CLS 564/179
TXT Compounds under subclass 177 wherein the amino nitrogen containing residue
    has a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/180
TXT Compounds under subclass 161 wherein the carboxylic acid residue contains a
    polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/181
TXT Compounds under subclass 161 wherein the carboxylic acid residue contains
    two rings bonded directly to the same carbon.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/182
TXT Compounds under subclass 161 wherein the carboxylic acid residue contains
    only one ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/183
TXT Compounds under subclass 182 wherein the carboxylic acid residue contains a
    benzene ring bonded directly to the acid carbonyl.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/184
TXT Compounds under subclass 183 wherein the amino nitrogen containing residue
    contains a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/185
TXT Compounds under subclass 184 wherein the amino nitrogen containing residue
    contains a ring or a polycyclo ring system which is attached indirectly to
    the carboxamido nitrogen or to an additional amino nitrogen in the amino
    nitrogen containing residue by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:



CLS 564/186
TXT Compounds under subclass 183 wherein the amino nitrogen containing residue
    contains oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/187
TXT Compounds under subclass 183 wherein the amino nitrogen containing residue
    contains a double or triple bond between two carbons.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/188
TXT Compounds under subclass 123 wherein the carboxylic acid residue contains
    more than one alicyclic ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/189
TXT Compounds under subclass 123 wherein the carboxylic acid residue contains a
    five-membered ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/190
TXT Compounds under subclass 123 wherein the carboxylic acid residue contains a
    three-membered ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/191
TXT Compounds under subclass 123 wherein the carboxylic acid residue contains
    an alicyclic ring and an atom other than carbon, hydrogen, or oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/192
TXT Compounds under subclass 123 wherein the carboxylic acid residue does not
    contain a ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/193
TXT Compounds under subclass 192 wherein the carboxylic acid residue contains
    nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/194
TXT Compounds under subclass 193 wherein the amino nitrogen containing residue
    contains a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/195
TXT Compounds under subclass 194 wherein the amino nitrogen containing residue
    contains two rings bonded directly to the same carbon.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/196
TXT Compounds under subclass 194 wherein the amino nitrogen containing residue
    contains a ring or a polycyclo ring system which is attached indirectly to
    the carboxamido nitrogen or to an additional amino nitrogen in the amino
    nitrogen containing residue by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/197
TXT Compounds under subclass 193 wherein the amino nitrogen containing residue
    does not contain a ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/198
TXT Compounds under subclass 197 wherein the amino nitrogen containing residue
    is unsubstituted.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/199
TXT Compounds under subclass 192 wherein the carboxylic acid residue contains
    an aldehyde or keto group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/200
TXT Compounds under subclass 199 wherein the amino nitrogen containing residue
    contains a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/201
TXT Compounds under subclass 192 wherein the carboxylic acid residue contains a
    hydroxyl bonded directly to carbon, or an ether, wherein the H of the -OH
    may be replaced by a substituted or unsubstituted ammonium ion or by a
    Group IA or IIA light metal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/202
TXT Compounds under subclass 201 wherein the amino nitrogen containing residue
    contains a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/203
TXT Compounds under subclass 201 wherein the amino nitrogen containing residue
    does not have a ring and contains a hydroxyl bonded directly to carbon, or
    an ether, wherein the H of the -OH may be replaced by a substituted or
    unsubstituted ammonium ion or by a Group IA or IIA light metal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/204
TXT Compounds under subclass 192 wherein the carboxylic acid residue contains a
    double or triple bond between two carbons.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:




CLS 564/205
TXT Processes under subclass 204 wherein unsaturation is introduced into the
    carboxylic acid residue of a carboxamide, as for example, by pyrolyzing an
    alkoxy or acetoxy alkanoic acid amide to split off the alkoxy or acetoxy
    groups, respectively.


CLS 564/206
TXT Processes under subclass 204 directed to the purification, separation, or
    recovery of unsaturated carboxylic acid amides.


CLS 564/207
TXT Compounds under subclass 204 wherein the amino nitrogen containing residue
    contains a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/208
TXT Compounds under subclass 204 wherein the amino nitrogen containing residue
    does not have a ring and contains a hydroxyl bonded directly to carbon, or
    an ether, wherein the H of the -OH may be replaced by a substituted or
    unsubstituted ammonium ion or by a Group IA or IIA light metal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/209
TXT Compounds under subclass 192 wherein the carboxylic acid residue contains
    halogen bonded directly to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/210
TXT Compounds under subclass 209 wherein the amino nitrogen containing residue
    contains a ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/211
TXT Compounds under subclass 210 wherein the amino nitrogen containing residue
    contains a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:



CLS 564/212
TXT Compounds under subclass 211 wherein the amino nitrogen containing residue
    contains a ring or a polycyclo ring system which is attached indirectly to
    the carboxamido nitrogen or to an additional amino nitrogen in the amino
    nitrogen containing residue by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/213
TXT Compounds under subclass 212 wherein the amino nitrogen containing residue
    contains a nitro group and an ether, or contains a nitro group an a
    hydroxyl, which hydroxyl is bonded directly to carbon and wherein the H of
    the -OH may be replaced by a substituted or unsubstituted ammonium or a
    Group IA or IIA light metal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/214
TXT Compounds under subclass 211 wherein the amino nitrogen containing residue
    contains only one ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/215
TXT Compounds under subclass 192 wherein the carboxylic acid residue is from a
    lower fatty acid.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/216
TXT Processes under subclass 215 directed to the purification, separation, or
    recovery of lower fatty acid amides.


CLS 564/217
TXT Compounds under subclass 215 wherein the amino nitrogen containing residue
    contains a ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/218
TXT Compounds under subclass 217 wherein the amino nitrogen containing residue
    contains a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/219
TXT Compounds under subclass 218 wherein the amino nitrogen containing residue
    contains a ring or a polycyclo ring system which is attached indirectly to
    the carboxamido nitrogen or to an additional amino nitrogen in the amino
    nitrogen containing residue by acyclic nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/220
TXT Compounds under subclass 219 wherein the amino nitrogen containing residue
    contains an additional amino nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/221
TXT Compounds under subclass 218 wherein the amino nitrogen containing residue
    contains more than one ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/222
TXT Compounds under subclass 221 wherein the amino nitrogen containing residue
    contains a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/223
TXT Compounds under subclass 218 wherein the amino nitrogen containing residue
    contains a hydroxyl bonded directly to carbon, or an ether, where H of the
    -OH may be replaced by a substituted or unsubstituted ammonium ion or by a
    Group IA or IIA light metal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/224
TXT Compounds under subclass 215 wherein the amino nitrogen residue contains a
    hydroxyl bonded directly to carbon, or an ether or an additional nitrogen,
    wherein the H of the -OH may be replaced by a substituted or unsubstituted
    ammonium ion or a Group IA and IIA light metal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/225
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which are amidines and contains the grouping


    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/226
TXT Compounds under the subclass 225 which are amidino hydrazine containing the
    grouping

    or amidino hydrazones containing the grouping

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/227
TXT Compounds under subclass 226 which are guanylhydrazines containing the
    grouping

    or guanylhydrazones containing the grouping

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/228
TXT Compounds under subclass 227 which contain a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/229
TXT Compounds under subclass 225 which are amidoximes containing the grouping


    wherein R may be H, an ester forming group or an ether forming group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/230
TXT Compounds under subclass 225 which are guanidines, containing the grouping


    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/231
TXT Processes under subclass 230 wherein a guanidine is prepared from a
    thiourea, as for example, by reaction with ammonia or an amino nitrogen
    containing compound in the presence of a desulfurizing agent.


CLS 564/232
TXT Processes under subclass 230 wherein a guanidine is prepared by reaction of
    a cyanogen halide and an amino nitrogen containing compound, as for
    example:


CLS 564/233
TXT Compounds under subclass 230 which are biguanides, containing the grouping


    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/234
TXT Compounds under subclass 233 wherein a biguanide contains a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/235
TXT Compounds under subclass 234 wherein a biguanide contains more than one
    ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/236
TXT Compounds under subclass 230 wherein there are at least two guanidine
    groups.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/237
TXT Compounds under subclass 230 wherein a guanidine contains a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/238
TXT Compounds under subclass 237 wherein a guanidine contains a benzene ring
    bonded directly to a guanidine nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/239
TXT Compounds under subclass 238 wherein a guanidine contains a hydroxyl bonded
    directly to carbon, or an ether, wherein the H of the -OH may be replaced
    by a substituted or unsubstituted ammonium ion or by a Group IA or IIA
    light metal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/240
TXT Compounds under subclass 230 wherein a guanidine does not contain a ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/241
TXT The compound under subclass 240 which is guanidine or its salts and
    processes of preparation not provided for above.


CLS 564/242
TXT The compound under subclass 241 which is guanidine nitrate and processes of
    preparation not provided for above.


CLS 564/243
TXT Compounds under subclass 225 wherein there is more than one amidine group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/244
TXT Compounds under subclass 225 wherein an amidine contains a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/245
TXT Compounds under subclass 244 which are N (prime)-aryl formamidines
    containing the grouping

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/246
TXT Compounds under subclass 244 wherein an amidine contains an additional
    nitrogen which is nonionically bonded.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/247
TXT Compounds under subclass 244 wherein an amidine contains a hydroxyl bonded
    directly to carbon, or an ether, wherein the H of the -OH may be replaced
    by a substituted or unsubstituted ammonium ion or by a Group IA or IIA
    light metal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/248
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which are characterized by the presence of the
    grouping

    and correspond in constitution to those formed by reacting an aldehyde or
    ketone with ammonia or an amino nitrogen containing compound.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/249
TXT Compounds under subclass 248 which are azines and contain the grouping


    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/250
TXT Compounds under subclass 248 which are hydrazones containing the grouping


    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/251
TXT Compounds under subclass 250 wherein the hydrazone contains a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/252
TXT Compounds under subclass 248 which are carbodiimides containing the
    grouping

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/253
TXT Compounds under subclass 248 which are oximes containing the grouping

    wherein X may be hydrogen, the carbon of an ether forming group or the
    residue of an ester forming compound not provided for above.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/254
TXT Compounds under subclass 253 which are O-esters of oximes wherein X is the
    residue of an ester forming compound.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for phosphorus containing acid O-esters of oximes.


CLS 564/255
TXT Compounds under subclass 254 wherein the residue of the ester forming group
    is that of a carbamic acid.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/256
TXT Compounds under subclass 253 which are O-ethers of oximes wherein X is the
    carbon of an ether forming group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/257
TXT Compounds under subclass 256 wherein the O-ether oxime contains a polycyclo
    ring system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/258
TXT Compounds under subclass 253 wherein a carbon atom in a position alpha to
    the oxime group is substituted by a double-bonded oxygen or an -OX, wherein
    X may be H, C, or a substituted or unsubstituted ammonium ion or a Group IA
    or IIA light metal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/259
TXT Processes under subclass 253 wherein an oxime is produced directly by
    reaction of an aldehyde or ketone with hydroxyl amine or a salt thereof.


CLS 564/260
TXT Processes under subclass 253 wherein an oxime is produced directly by
    reduction of a nitronic acid salt, as for example, an alkali metal salt of
    a nitroparaffin.


CLS 564/261
TXT Processes under subclass 253 wherein an oxime is produced directly by
    reduction of a nitro group, as for example, with hydrogen or carbon
    monoxide.


CLS 564/262
TXT Processes under subclass 253 wherein an oxime is produced directly by
    oxidation of a hydroxyl amine group.


CLS 564/263
TXT Processes under subclass 253 wherein an oxime is produced directly by
    reaction of an olefinic compound with a nitrosating agent such as, for
    example, nitrous acid or nitrosyl chloride.


CLS 564/264
TXT Processes under subclass 253 which are directed to the purification,
    separation, or recovery of oximes.


CLS 564/265
TXT Compounds under subclass 253 wherein an oxime contains a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/266
TXT Compounds under subclass 265 wherein two rings are bonded directly to the
    carbon of an oxime group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/267
TXT Compounds under subclass 253 wherein a carbon of a cyclohexyl group is
    bonded directly to the oxime nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/268
TXT Compounds under subclass 253 wherein an oxime does not contain a ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/269
TXT Compounds under subclass 248 wherein two rings are directly bonded to the
    same carbon which, in turn, is double bonded to an amino nitrogen, e.g.,
    auramines.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/270
TXT Compounds under subclass 248 wherein an aldimine or ketimine containing
    compound contains a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/271
TXT Compounds under subclass 248 which are aldimines or ketimines and contain a
    benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/272
TXT Compounds under subclass 271 which are benzylideneimines containing the
    grouping

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/273
TXT Compounds under subclass 272 wherein a substituent attached to the ring of
    the benzylidene group contains a nitrogen which is directly bonded to
    carbon.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/274
TXT Compounds under subclass 272 wherein a substituent attached to the ring of
    the benzylidene group contains an OH bonded directly to carbon, or an
    ether, wherein the H of the -OH may be replaced by a substituted or
    unsubstituted ammonium ion or by a Group IA or IIA light metal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/275
TXT Compounds under subclass 272 wherein the benzene of the benzylidene group
    is unsubstituted.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:






CLS 564/276
TXT Compounds under subclass 271 wherein the aldimine or ketimine contains
    hydroxyl bonded directly to carbon, or an ether, wherein the H of the -OH
    may be replaced by a substituted or unsubstituted ammonium ion or by a
    Group IA or IIA light metal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/277
TXT Compounds under subclass 271 wherein an unsubstituted benzene is directly
    attached to the imino nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/278
TXT Compounds under subclass 248 wherein an aldimine or ketimine does not
    contain a ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/279
TXT Compounds under subclass 278 wherein the aldimine or ketimine contains a
    double or triple bond between two carbons.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/280
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which are formed by addition of a phenol or
    thiophenol to an amino nitrogen containing compound, as for example:



    RNH2 . HOC6H5 .


CLS 564/281
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which are quaternary ammonium compounds wherein
    a pentavalent nitrogen is bonded by four valences to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/282
TXT Compounds under subclass 281 wherein the quaternary ammonium compound
    contains a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/283
TXT Compounds under subclass 282 wherein the quaternary ammonium contains two
    rings bonded directly to the same carbon.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/284
TXT Compounds under subclass 282 wherein the quaternary ammonium contains a
    nitro or nitroso group directly bonded to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/285
TXT Compounds under subclass 282 wherein the quaternary ammonium contains an OH
    bonded directly to carbon, or an ether group, wherein the H of the -OH may
    be replaced by a substituted or unsubstituted ammonium ion or by a Group IA
    or IIA light metal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/286
TXT Compounds under subclass 285 which contain more than one quaternary
    ammonium group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/287
TXT Compounds under subclass 285 wherein the quaternary ammonium contains an
    -OX group bonded directly to a ring carbon, where X may be H, C, a
    substituted or unsubstituted ammonium ion or a Group IA or IIA light metal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/288
TXT Compounds under subclass 282 wherein the quaternary ammonium contains a
    double or triple bond between two acyclic carbons.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/289
TXT Compounds under subclass 282 wherein the quaternary ammonium contains
    nonionically- bonded halogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/290
TXT Compounds under subclass 282 which contain more than one quaternary
    ammonium group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/291
TXT Compounds under subclass 281 wherein a quaternary ammonium compound does
    not contain a ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/292
TXT Compounds under subclass 291 which contain an OH bonded directly to carbon,
    or an ether group, wherein the H of the -OH may be replaced by a
    substituted or unsubstituted ammonium ion or by a Group IA or IIA light
    metal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/293
TXT Compounds under subclass 292 which are choline, beta-alkyl cholines, or
    ethers thereof and their salts having the structure

    wherein X and Y are H or C.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/294
TXT Compounds under subclass 292 wherein a quaternary ammonium contains the
    grouping

    where n and m are positive integers and m is greater than one.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/295
TXT Compounds under subclass 291 which contain more than one quaternary
    ammounium group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/296
TXT Processes under subclass 291 for the preparation, purification, separation,
    or recovery of quaternary ammonium compounds classifiable only in that
    subclass.


CLS 564/297
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which are amine oxides characterized by the
    structure

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/298
TXT Processes under subclass 297 for the preparation, purification, separation,
    or recovery of amine oxides.


CLS 564/299
TXT Compounds under subclass 297 wherein the amine oxide contains a benzene
    ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/300
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which are nitroxides, free radicals, containing
    the structure



    or hydroxyl amines or their O-ethers or O- esters containing the structure


    wherein X is H, C, or the residue of an esterifying acid group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also contains compounds which are O-ethers
    wherein the amino nitrogen is unsubstituted.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/301
TXT Compounds under subclass 300 which are nitroxides, hydroxylamines, or their
    O-ethers or O-esters which do not contain a ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/302
TXT Processes under subclass 1 for the formation of a racemic mixture from an
    amino nitrogen containing enantiomer (optical isomer), per se, or together
    with the separation of the enantiomers of the racemic mixture.


CLS 564/303
TXT Processes under subclass 1 which are directed to the resolution
    (separation) of optical isomers, which may be diastereomers or enantiomers.


CLS 564/304
TXT Processes under subclass 303 wherein the optical isomers being separated
    contain a benzene ring.


CLS 564/305
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 not provided for above, which contain a benzene
    ring.

    (1)     Note.  This is the residual subclass for aromatic amino nitrogen
    compounds not specifically provided for below.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/306
TXT Compounds under subclass 305 wherein a benzene ring or benzene containing
    polycyclo is bonded to an alicyclic ring or ring system through a single
    atom or an acyclic chain and the alicyclic group contains more than one
    amino nitrogen attached to it either directly or through a single atom or
    acyclic chain.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/307
TXT Compounds under subclass 305 wherein a benzene ring is bonded directly to
    another ring and one or more amino nitrogens are bonded directly only to
    either ring or both rings.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/308
TXT Compounds under subclass 307 which contain a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/309
TXT Compounds under subclass 307 which are benzidines containing the grouping

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/310
TXT Compounds under subclass 305 which are hydrazines containing the radical
    -NHNH- or its hydrogen substitution products.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/311
TXT Compounds under subclass 310 wherein each nitrogen of the hydrazine radical
    is bonded directly to a benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/312
TXT Processes under subclass 311 wherein the compound is formed by reducing a
    nitrogen containing group with metal and metallic hydroxide.


CLS 564/313
TXT Compounds under subclass 310 wherein an aralkyl group is bonded directly to
    the nitrogen of a hydrazine radical.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/314
TXT Processes under subclass 310 for the preparation, purification, separation
    or recovery of a hydrazine group containing compound.


CLS 564/315
TXT Compounds under subclass 305 wherein two benzene rings or benzene
    containing polycyclos are bonded to the same carbon.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:

    SEARCH CLASS:

    552,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 101+ for triarylmethyl compounds.


CLS 564/316
TXT Compounds under subclass 315 wherein an amino nitrogen is indirectly bonded
    to the inter aryl carbon through a single atom or an acyclic chain.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/317
TXT Compounds under subclass 316 wherein oxygen or sulfur is directly bonded to
    the inter aryl carbon and is part of the acyclic chain which contains the
    amino nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/318
TXT Processes under subclass 317 for the preparation, purification, separation
    or recovery of compounds classified in that subclass.


CLS 564/319
TXT Compounds under subclass 361 which contain oxygen, carbonyl, a double bond
    or a triple bond in the chain; or wherein ether, carbonyl, a double bond, a
    triple bond or a hydroxyl, which hydroxyl is bonded directly to carbon, is
    part of a substituent, which substituent is bonded directly to theacyclic
    carbon or chain, wherein the H of the - OH may be replaced by a substituted
    or unsubstituted ammoniom ion or a Group IA or IIA light metal.


CLS 564/320
TXT Compounds under subclass 316 wherein an -OX is bonded directly to the inter
    aryl carbon where X may be H, C, a substituted or unsubstituted ammonium
    ion or a Group IA or IIA light metal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/321
TXT Compounds under subclass 315 wherein an amino nitrogen is bonded directly
    to the inter aryl carbon.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:



CLS 564/322
TXT Compounds under subclass 315 wherein the inter aryl carbon is a ring member
    of an alicyclic ring or ring system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/323
TXT Compounds under subclass 315 wherein an amino nitrogen is indirectly
    attached to the benzene ring or benzene containing polycyclo through a
    single atom or an acyclic chain.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:



CLS 564/324
TXT Compounds under subclass 323 wherein oxygen or sulfur bonded directly to
    the benzene  ring or ring system is part of the acyclic chain which
    contains the amino nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/325
TXT Compounds under subclass 324 which contain more than one of the chains
    described therein.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/326
TXT Compounds under subclass 323 wherein an amino nitrogen bonded directly to
    the benzene ring or ring system is part of the acyclic chain which includes
    the indirectly attached amino nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/327
TXT Compounds under subclass 315 which are benzhydrols or benzthiols wherein an
    -OH or -SH group is bonded directly to the inter aryl carbon.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/328
TXT Compounds under subclass 315 which are benzophenones or benzothiophenones
    wherein the inter aryl carbon is part of a carbonyl or thiocarbonyl group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:



CLS 564/329
TXT Processes under subclass 328 for the preparation, purification, separation,
    recovery of benzophenones or benzothiophenones.


CLS 564/330
TXT Compounds under subclass 315 wherein two phenyl groups, each having an
    amino nitrogen directly attached, are directly bonded to the same carbon
    (i.e., diamino diphenyl methanes).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:



CLS 564/331
TXT Processes under subclass 330 wherein an amino nitrogen containing compound
    is condensed with an aldehyde or ketone, as for example, the condensation
    of formaldehyde or acetone with aniline.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:



CLS 564/332
TXT Processes under subclass 331 wherein the reaction is carried out in the
    presence of a solid catalyst.


CLS 564/333
TXT Processes under subclass 331 wherein the reaction is carried out in the
    presence of hydrochloric acid.


CLS 564/334
TXT Processes under subclass 330 directed to the purification, separation, or
    recovery of diamino diphenyl methanes.


CLS 564/335
TXT Compounds under subclass 330 which contain halogen or sulfur nonionically
    bonded to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/336
TXT Compounds under subclass 305 wherein an   amino nitrogen is indirectly
    bonded to an aryl ring or ring system through a single acyclic carbon or
    through an acyclic chain.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/337
TXT Compounds under subclass 336 wherein the aryl ring or ring system is bonded
    directly to another ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    307,    for compounds which contain two rings or ring systems bonded
    directly to each other and all amino nitrogens are bonded directly to a
    ring or ring system.


CLS 564/338
TXT Compounds under subclass 337 wherein the other ring is alicyclic.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/339
TXT Compounds under subclass 338 wherein the alicyclic ring contains an -OH
    bonded to carbon wherein the H of the -OH may be replaced by a substituted
    or unsubstituted ammonium ion or by a Group IA or IIA light metal or an
    ether or carbonyl group.


CLS 564/340
TXT Compounds under subclass 336 wherein the chain contains sulfur or has an
    acyclic sulfur substituent and there is no amino nitrogen between the
    sulfur and the ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/341
TXT Compounds under subclass 340 wherein the sulfur is part of the chain and is
    bonded directly to the aryl ring or ring system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/342
TXT Compounds under subclass 336 wherein the chain contains a carbonyl or has
    an acyclic carbonyl substituent and there is no amino nitrogen between the
    carbonyl and the ring or ring system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/343
TXT Processes under subclass 342 for the preparation, purification, separation,
    or recovery of compounds defined therein and in its dependent subclasses.


CLS 564/344
TXT Compounds under subclass 342 wherein the aryl ring or ring system contains
    an -OX group bonded directly to a ring carbon and X may be H or C or a
    substituted or unsubstituted ammonium ion or a Group IA or IIA light metal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/345
TXT Compounds under subclass 342 wherein the aryl ring or ring system contains
    halogen bonded directly to a ring carbon.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/346
TXT Compounds under subclass 336 wherein oxygen is part of the chain.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/347
TXT Compounds under subclass 346 wherein oxygen which is part of the chain is
    bonded directly to the aryl ring or ring system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/348
TXT Compounds under subclass 347 wherein the chain contains an - OH bonded to
    carbon wherein the H of the - OH may be replaced by a substituted or
    unsubstituted ammonium ion by a Group IA or IIA light metal or an ether
    group as substituted and there in no amino nitrogen between this group and
    the ring or ring system.

    (1)     Note.   This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/349
TXT Compounds under subclass 348 which are phenoxy alkanol amines wherein the
    additional substituent is a hydroxyl group bonded directly to a chain
    carbon between the amino nitrogen and the aryl ring or ring system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/350
TXT Compounds under subclass 349 wherein the nitrogen is bonded directly to a
    ring carbon of the aryl ring or ring system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/351
TXT Compounds under subclass 349 wherein halogen is bonded directly to a ring
    carbon of the aryl ring or ring system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/352
TXT Compounds under subclass 347 wherein the ring system is polycyclo.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/353
TXT Compounds under subclass 347 wherein the part of the chain between the
    amino nitrogen and oxygen is unsubstituted or substituted by acyclic
    hydrocarbon groups.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/354
TXT Compounds under subclass 353 which are aryloxyethlamines, wherein the part
    of the chain between the amino nitrogen and the oxygen contains two carbons
    and is unsubstituted.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/355
TXT Compounds under subclass 336 which contain hydroxyl, which is bonded
    directly to carbon, or an ether oxygen attached directly or indirectly to
    the acyclic carbon or chain by acyclic nonionic bonding, with no amino
    nitrogen between the hydroxyl or ether oxygen and the aryl ring or ring
    system, wherein the H of the -OH may be replaced by a substituted or
    unsubstituted ammonium ion or a Group IA or IIA light metal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/356
TXT Processes under subclass 355 wherein the compounds are prepared directly by
    reduction.

    (1)     Note.  For processes of reductive amination, see the appropriate
    compound subclass.


CLS 564/357
TXT Processes under subclass 356 wherein the reduction is by direct
    hydrogenation.


CLS 564/358
TXT Processes under subclass 357 wherein a Group VIII noble metal containing
    catalyst is utilized in the hydrogenation.


CLS 564/359
TXT Processes under subclass 355 wherein the compounds are prepared directly by
    hydrolysis, as for examples of an amide.


CLS 564/360
TXT Compounds under subclass 355 wherein an additional hydroxyl or an ether
    wherein the H of the - OH may be replaced by a substituted or unsubstituted
    ammonium ion or by a Group IA or IIA light metal is bonded to the carbon or
    the chain between the amino nitrogen and the aryl ring or ring system.

    (1)     Note. This subclass contains, for example  :


CLS 564/361
TXT Compounds under subclass 355 wherein the aryl ring or ring system has more
    than one hydroxy group wherein the H of the -OH may be replaced by a
    substituted or unsubstituted ammonium ion or by a Group IA or IIA light
    metal bonded directly to a ring carbon.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/362
TXT Compounds under subclass 361 wherein the aryl ring or ring system contains
    at least four substituents bonded directly to ring carbons.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/363
TXT Compounds under subclass 355 which are beta - OX phenethylamines wherein
    the chain contains two carbon atoms and a benzene ring and - OX group are
    bonded directly to the carbon beta to the amino nitrogen, wherein the X may
    be H, a substituted or unsubstituted ammonium ion or a Group IA or IIA
    light metal.

    (1)     Note. This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/364
TXT Compounds under subclass 363 wherein there is an acyclic hydrocarbyl
    substituent bonded directly to the chain carbon which is in a position
    alpha to the amino nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/365
TXT Compounds under subclass 363 wherein the aryl ring or ring system contains
    an -OX group bonded directly to a ring carbon where X is H, C, a
    substituted or unsubstituted ammonium ion or a Group IA or IIA light metal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/366
TXT Compounds under subclass 336 wherein a halogen is attached directly or
    indirectly to the acyclic carbon or chain by acyclic nonionic bonding, and
    there is no amino nitrogen between the halogen and the aryl ring or ring
    system.


CLS 564/367
TXT Compounds under subclass 336 wherein an additional amino nitrogen is part
    of the chain between the amino nitrogen and the aryl ring or ring system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:



CLS 564/368
TXT Compounds under subclass 367 wherein the chain contains an ethylene diamine
    group wherein the ethylene carbons may be substituted by alkyl substituents
    only.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/369
TXT Compounds under subclass 368 wherein there is only one ethylene diamine
    group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/370
TXT Compounds under subclass 369 wherein there are plural discrete benzene ring
    or ring systems.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/371
TXT Compounds under subclass 367 wherein the chain contains a methylene diamine
    group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/372
TXT Compounds under subclass 336 wherein an additional nonionic amino nitrogen
    is bonded to the carbon or the chain either directly or as part of an
    acyclic substituent.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/373
TXT Compounds under subclass 336 wherein an aralkyl group is bonded directly to
    the alpha carbon of a benzyl amine.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/374
TXT Compounds under subclass 336 wherein the chain consists of two or more
    carbons which are unsubstituted or substituted by acyclic hydrocarbon
    groups.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/375
TXT Processes under subclass 374 wherein the amine group is formed directly by
    reduction.

    (1)     Note.  For processes of reductive amination, see the appropriate
    product subclass.


CLS 564/376
TXT Processes under subclass 374 wherein the compounds are formed by amination
    by replacing a halogen by an amino nitrogen or ammonia.


CLS 564/377
TXT Processes under subclass 374 wherein the compounds are prepared directly by
    hydrolysis.


CLS 564/378
TXT Compounds under subclass 374 wherein the aryl ring system is a polycyclo
    ring system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/379
TXT Compounds under subclass 378 wherein the polycyclo ring system is tricyclo.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/380
TXT Compounds under subclass 379 wherein the chain contains a double or triple
    bond between two carbons.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/381
TXT Compounds under subclass 374 which are phenethylamines, having two carbons
    in the chain between the amino nitrogen and a benzene ring and an alkyl
    substituent on the carbon alpha to the amino nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/382
TXT Compounds under subclass 374 which are phenethylamines, having two carbons
    in the chain between the amine nitrogen and a benzene ring and an alkyl
    substituent on the carbon beta to the amino nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/383
TXT Compounds under subclass 374 wherein the chain contains a double or triple
    bond between two carbons.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/384
TXT Compounds under subclass 336 wherein an aryl ring or ring system and an
    amino nitrogen are both directly bonded to the same acyclic carbon, which
    carbon additionally has only hydrogen or acyclic hydrocarbyl substituents
    bonded directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example :


CLS 564/385
TXT Processes under subclass 384 wherein the amine group is formed directly by
    reduction.

    (1)     Note.  For processes of reductive amination, see the appropriate
    product subclass.


CLS 564/386
TXT Processes under subclass 384 wherein the compounds are formed directly by
    an amination process by replacing a halogen by an amino nitrogen or ammonia
    or wherein the compounds are formed directly by hydrolysis.


CLS 564/387
TXT Compounds under subclass 384 wherein the aryl ring system is a polycyclo
    ring system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/388
TXT Compounds under subclass 384 wherein each of at least two amino nethylene
    groups are bonded directly to a benzene ring carbon.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/389
TXT Compounds under subclass 384 wherein the aryl ring has an -OX bonded
    directly to a ring carbon and X is H or C, or a substituted or
    unsubstituted ammonium ion or a Group IA or IIA light metal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/390
TXT Compounds under subclass 389 which are ortho hydroxy benzylamines.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/391
TXT Compounds under subclass 384 which are benzylamines where the benzene ring
    has no other substituent.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/392
TXT Compounds under subclass 391 wherein an acyclic hydrocarbyl group is bonded
    directly to the methylene carbon.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/393
TXT Processes under subclass 305 wherein a benzene containing amino nitrogen
    compound is prepared directly from an ester.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    415,    for preparation of an aromatic amine by reduction of a nitrile.


CLS 564/394
TXT Processes under subclass 305 wherein abenzene containing amino nitrogen
    compound is prepared directly from an organic acid, acid halide, or salt.


CLS 564/395
TXT Processes under subclass 305 wherein a benzene containing amine nitrogen
    compound is prepared directly by reacting an organic compound with ammonia
    or an amino nitrogen containing compound replacing a hydrogen thereof or
    another organic radical bonded to nitrogen to form a carbon to nitrogen
    bond.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    429     and 435, for the formation of a secondary amine by condensation of
    two primary amines with elimination of ammonia.


CLS 564/396
TXT Processes under subclass 395 wherein an aldehyde or ketone compound is
    aminated.


CLS 564/397
TXT Processes under subclass 396 wherein an aldehyde or ketone is aminated to
    form an aldimine or ketimine which is then reduced to an amino nitrogen
    form.

    (1)     Note.  For the purposes of this classification, this subclass has
    combined patents which claim the reductive amination in two distinct steps
    as well as those where the aldimine or ketimine formation and reduction are
    performed in a single step.

    (2)     Note.  For processes which recite only the reduction of an aldimine
    or ketimine, see subclass 415.


CLS 564/398
TXT Processes under subclass 397 which utilize a Group VIII noble metal
    containing catalyst in a reductive amination process.


CLS 564/399
TXT Processes under subclass 395 wherein the compound aminated is an ether or
    an alkylene oxide.


CLS 564/400
TXT Processes under subclass 395 wherein the compound aminated is a halohydrin.


CLS 564/401
TXT Processes under subclass 395 wherein the compound aminated is an acyclic
    alcohol.


CLS 564/402
TXT Processes under subclass 395 wherein a hydroxyl is replaced in the
    amination reaction.


CLS 564/403
TXT Processes under subclass 402 wherein the compound aminated contains two or
    more hydroxyl groups bonded directly to a benzene ring.


CLS 564/404
TXT Processes under subclass 395 wherein the compound which is aminated
    contains halogen bonded direclty to carbon.


CLS 564/405
TXT Processes under subclass 404 wherein the halogen containing compound
    contains a benzene ring.


CLS 564/406
TXT Processes under subclass 405 wherein the compound aminated also contais a
    nitro group bonded directly to carbon.


CLS 564/407
TXT Processes under subclass 405 wherein a primary amine is formed.


CLS 564/408
TXT Processes under subclass 395 wherein the compound aminated is a hydrocarbon.


CLS 564/409
TXT Processes under subclass 305 wherein an alkyl side chain is directly
    introduced to a ring or directly removed from a ring.


CLS 564/410
TXT Processes under subclass 305 of directly introducing a nitroso group bonded
    to a carbon.


CLS 564/411
TXT Processes under subclass 305 of directly introducing a nitro group bonded
    to carbon.


CLS 564/412
TXT Processes under subclass 305 wherein a halogenated benzene containing amino
    nitrogen compound is prepared directly by halogenating or dehalogenating.


CLS 564/413
TXT Processes under subclass 305 wherein the compounds are prepared directly
    from a heterocyclic compound.


CLS 564/414
TXT Processes under subclass 305 wherein the compounds are prepared directly
    from an amide.


CLS 564/415
TXT Processes under subclass 305 wherein an amine group is formed directly by
    reducing a nitrogen containing group.


CLS 564/416
TXT Processes under subclass 415 wherein the group which is reduced is a nitro
    or nitroso.


CLS 564/417
TXT Processes under subclass 416 wherein the compound produced by reduction of
    the nitro or nitroso group contains halogen directly bonded to carbon.


CLS 564/418
TXT Processes under subclass 416 wherein the compound produced by reduction of
    a nitro or nitroso group contains a hydroxyl bonded to carbon or an ether
    group.


CLS 564/419
TXT Processes under subclass 416 wherein the compounds are produced by first
    nitrating and then reducing the nitro group.


CLS 564/420
TXT Processes under subclass 416 wherein the nitro or nitroso group is reduced
    by addition of hydrogen.


CLS 564/421
TXT Processes under subclass 420 wherein a Group VI metal containing catalyst
    is utilized in the hydrogenation.


CLS 564/422
TXT Processes under subclass 420 wherein a Group VIII metal containing catalyst
    is utilized in the hydrogenation.


CLS 564/423
TXT Processes under subclass 422 wherein a Group VIII noble metal containing
    catalyst is utilized in the hydrogenation.


CLS 564/424
TXT Processes under subclass 305 which are directed to the separation of
    isomers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302     and 304, for the separation of optical benzene containing isomers.


CLS 564/425
TXT Processes under subclass 424 wherein the separation of the isomers is
    effected by salt formation.


CLS 564/426
TXT Compounds under subclass 305 which contains a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/427
TXT Compounds under subclass 426 wherein the polycyclo ring system is a
    tricyclo.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/428
TXT Compounds under subclass 426 wherein the polycyclo ring system is bicyclo.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/429
TXT Compounds under subclass 428 wherein a naphthyl group and a benzene are
    both bonded directly to the same nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/430
TXT Compounds under subclass 305 which are diphenyl ethers or diphenyl sulfides
    wherein both benzene rings are bonded directly to oxygen, sulfur, or a
    polysulfide group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/431
TXT Compounds under subclass 305 wherein two rings at least one of which is
    benzene are bonded directly to the same nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/432
TXT Compounds and processes for preparing them under subclass 431 wherein an
    acyclic ketone is condensed with a diarylamine.


CLS 564/433
TXT Compounds under subclass 431 which are diphenylamines wherein two benzene
    rings are bonded directly to the same nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/434
TXT Compounds under subclass 433 which contain an additional amino nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/435
TXT Processes under subclass 433 wherein the compounds classified therein are
    produced by the condensation of a primary amine.


CLS 564/437
TXT Processes under subclass 305 directed to the purification, separation, or
    recovery of moncyclic amine nitrogen containing compounds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    424+,   for the separation of isomers.


CLS 564/438
TXT Processes under subclass 437 which utilize a salt formation prior to
    purifying, separating, or recovering.


CLS 564/439
TXT Processes under subclass 437 for the purification, separation or recovery
    of compounds having an amino group and a hydroxyl bonded directly to the
    benzene ring, wherein the H of the -OH may be replaced by a substituted or
    unsubstituted ammonium ion or a Group IA or IIA light metal (i.e.,
    aminophenols).


CLS 564/440
TXT Compounds under subclass 305 which contain sulfur nonionically bonded.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/441
TXT Compounds under subclass 305 which contain a nitro or nitorso group bonded
    directly to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/442
TXT Compounds under subclass 305 which contain halogen bonded directly to
    carbon.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/443
TXT Compounds under subclass 305 which contain a hydroxyl bonded directly to
    carbon or an ether group, wherein the H or the -OH may be replaced by a
    substituted or unsubstituted ammonium ion or by a Group IA or IIA light
    metal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/444
TXT Processes under subclass 1 wherein an amino nitrogen containing alicyclic
    compound is prepared directly by isomerization.


CLS 564/445
TXT Processes under subclass 1 wherein amino nitrogen containing alicyclic
    compounds are produced by reacting an organic compound with ammonia or an
    amine to replace an unreacted hydrogen or another organic radical bonded to
    nitrogen to form a carbon to nitrogen bond.


CLS 564/446
TXT Processes under subclass 445 wherein the compound reacted is an aldehyde or
    ketone.


CLS 564/447
TXT Processes under subclass 445 wherein the compound reacted is one containing
    a hydroxyl bonded to a noncarbonylic carbon.


CLS 564/448
TXT Processes under subclass 1 wherein an amino nitrogen containing alicyclic
    compound is formed directly by reduction of a nitrogen containing group.


CLS 564/449
TXT Processes under subclass 448 which include the hydrogenation of a benzene
    ring.


CLS 564/450
TXT Processes under subclass 1 wherein an amine nitrogen containing alicyclic
    compound is prepared directly by hydrogenation of a benzene ring.


CLS 564/451
TXT Processes under subclass 450 wherein the compound prepared contains more
    than one amine nitrogen.


CLS 564/452
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 wherein two discrete alicyclic rings or ring
    systems are bonded directly to the same carbon.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/453
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 wherein an amino nitrogen is indirectly bonded
    to an alicyclic ring or ring system through a single acyclic carbon or
    through an acyclic chain.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/454
TXT Compounds under subclass 453 wherein the chain contains at least two
    carbons and is either unsubstituted or substituted only by acyclic
    hydrocarbon groups.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/455
TXT Compounds under subclass 453 wherein the amino nitrogen is indirectly
    bonded to the alicyclic ring or ring system through a single acyclic carbon
    which is unsubstituted or may be substituted by acyclic hydrocarbon groups.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/456
TXT Compounds under subclass 455 wherein the alicyclic ring system is a
    polycyclo.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/457
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 wherein there is more than one alicyclic ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/458
TXT Compounds under subclass 457 wherein the plural rings are in the form of a
    polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/459
TXT Compounds under subclass 458 wherein the polycyclo ring system is a
    tricyclo.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/460
TXT Compounds under subclass 458 wherein the polycyclo ring system is bicyclo.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/461
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which contain an alicyclic ring an more than one
    amino nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/462
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which contain a cyclohexyl ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/463
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which contain no ring.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/464
TXT Compounds under subclass 463 which contain a hydrazine group -NHNH- or its
    hydrogen substitution products; or aminimines containing the grouping


    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/465
TXT Processes under subclass 464 wherein the compounds are prepared directly by
    reducing a nitrosamine.


CLS 564/466
TXT Processes under subclass 464 wherein the compounds are produced by the
    condensation of a haloamine.


CLS 564/467
TXT Processes under subclass 463 wherein the compounds are prepared by the
    direct utilization of carbon monoxide.


CLS 564/468
TXT Processes under subclass 463 wherein the compounds are prepared directly
    from an ester or an organic acid or salt.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    490+,   for the reduction of a nitrile to form an amino nitrogen compound.


CLS 564/469
TXT Processes under subclass 463 wherein an acyclic amino nitrogen compound is
    prepared directly by reacting an organic compound with ammonia or an amino
    nitrogen containing compound replacing an hydrogen thereof or another
    organic radical bonded to nitrogen to form a carbon to nitrogen bond.


CLS 564/470
TXT Processes under subclass 469 wherein a radical bonded to amino nitrogen by
    a carbon to nitrogen bond is replaced by a different radical similarly
    bonded to another amino nitrogen or another radical to form a carbon to
    nitrogen bond.


CLS 564/471
TXT Processes under subclass 469 wherein the organic compound reacted is an
    aldehyde or ketone.


CLS 564/472
TXT Processes under subclass 471 wherein the aldehyde or ketone is aminated to
    form an aldimine or ketimine which is then reduced to an amino nitrogen
    form.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains patents which claim the reductive
    amination in two distinct steps as well as those wherein the aldimine or
    ketimine formation and reduction are performed in a single step.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    489,    for processes which recite only the reduction of an aldimine or
    ketimine.


CLS 564/473
TXT Processes under subclass 472 wherein an aldehyde is subjected to reductive
    amination.


CLS 564/474
TXT Processes under subclass 469 wherein the organic compound contains an ether
    group.


CLS 564/475
TXT Processes under subclass 474 wherein the organic compound is an alkylene
    oxide.


CLS 564/476
TXT Processes under subclass 475 wherein the organic compound is an
    epihalohydrin.


CLS 564/477
TXT Processes under subclass 475 wherein the compounds produced are monohydroxy
    alkyl amines (i.e., HO-alkyl)x-N-(H)3-x).


CLS 564/478
TXT Processes under subclass 469 wherein the organic compound contains a
    hydroxyl bonded to carbon.


CLS 564/479
TXT Processes under subclass 478 wherein a catalyst is utilized.


CLS 564/480
TXT Processes under subclass 479 wherein the catalyst is a Group VI or Group
    VIII metal containing compound.


CLS 564/481
TXT Processes under subclass 469 wherein the organic compound contains halogen
    bonded directly to carbon.


CLS 564/482
TXT Processes under subclass 481 wherein the organic compound is an alkylene
    dihalide.


CLS 564/483
TXT Processes under subclass 481 wherein the organic compound contains a
    nonionically bonded element other than carbon, hydrogen, or halogen and not
    provided for above.


CLS 564/484
TXT Processes under subclass 481 wherein the organic compound also contains a
    double or triple bond between two carbons.


CLS 564/485
TXT Processes under subclass 469 wherein the organic compound contains a double
    or triple bond between two carbons.


CLS 564/486
TXT Processes under subclass 463 wherein an organic radical bonded directly to
    an amino nitrogen through carbon is replaced directly by hydrogen.


CLS 564/487
TXT Processes under subclass 463 wherein the compounds are produced directly
    from a heterocyclic compound.


CLS 564/488
TXT Processes under subclass 463 wherein the compounds are produced directly
    from an amide such as, for example, a carboxamide or a sulfonamide.


CLS 564/489
TXT Processes under subclass 463 wherein the amine group is formed directly by
    reduction of a nitrogen containing group.


CLS 564/490
TXT Processes under subclass 489 wherein the group reduced is a cyano group.

    (1)     Note.  The formation of secondary or tertiary amines by reduction
    of a nitrile is placed in this subclass.


CLS 564/491
TXT Processes under subclass 490 wherein more than one cyano group is reduced.


CLS 564/492
TXT Processes under subclass 491 wherein hexamethylene diamine is produced.


CLS 564/493
TXT Processes under subclass 490 wherein a primary mono amine is produced.


CLS 564/494
TXT Processes under subclass 489 wherein the nitrogen containing group which is
    reduced is a nitro or nitroso group.


CLS 564/495
TXT Processes under subclass 494 wherein a compound containing a nitro or
    nitroso group which is reduced also contains a hydroxyl group bonded
    directly to carbon or an ether group.


CLS 564/496
TXT Processes under subclass 463 wherein the acyclic amino nitrogen compounds
    are produced by introducing halogen to form a direct bond to carbon.


CLS 564/497
TXT Processes under subclass 463 directed to the purification, separation, or
    recovery of acyclic amino nitrogen containing compounds.


CLS 564/498
TXT Processes under subclass 497 wherein the compounds prepared are alkylene
    polyamines.


CLS 564/499
TXT Processes under subclass 497 wherein mixtures of primary, secondary, or
    tertiary amines are separated from each other.


CLS 564/500
TXT Compounds under subclass 463 which contain nonionically bonded sulfur.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/501
TXT Compounds under subclass 500 wherein the sulfur is present in the form of a
    thioether.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/502
TXT Compounds under subclass 463 which contain an aldehyde or ketone group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/503
TXT Compounds under subclass 463 which contain a hydroxyl group bonded directly
    to carbon, or an ether, wherein the H of the -OH Group may be replaced by a
    substituted or unsubstituted ammonium ion or by a Group IA or IIA light
    metal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/504
TXT Compounds under subclass 503 which contain more than one ether group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 564/505
TXT Compounds under subclass 504 which contain the grouping -O- (CnH2nO)m where
    m and n are positive integers and m is greater than one.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:

    H37 C18 - O - ( CH2 CH2 O )19 - CH2 CH2CH3


CLS 564/506
TXT Compounds under subclass 503 which contain more than one hydroxyl bonded to
    carbon.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:

    H37C18- OH

    HO - CH2 CH2 -NH - CH2 CH2 CH2 -NH - CH2 CH2 - OH


CLS 564/507
TXT Compounds under subclass 506 which contain more than one hydroxyl bonded to
    carbon on the same amino nitrogen substituent.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:
    HO - CH2 - (CHOH)
    3 OH

    HO - CH2CH2 - OH


CLS 564/508
TXT Compounds under subclass 503 which contain only one ether group.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:

    CH3 - CH2 - O - CH2 - CH2 - CH3


CLS 564/509
TXT Compounds under subclass 463 which contain a double or triple bond between
    two carbons.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:

    H2C = CHCH2CH3


CLS 564/510
TXT Compounds under subclass 463 which contain halogen bonded directly to
    carbon.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:

    Br(CH2)3 -NHCH3

    H2N -  CH2 - (CF2)3 - CH2 - NH2


CLS 564/511
TXT Compounds under subclass 463 which contain more than one amino nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example.

    H31C15CH2CH2CH3


CLS 564/512
TXT Compounds under subclass 511 which contain three or more amino nitrogens.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:


CLS 568/
TTL ORGANIC COMPOUNDS -- PART OF THE CLASS 532 - 570 SERIES

CLS 568/
TXT IN THIS SERIES OF CLASSES, CLASS 568 IS TO BE CONSIDERED AS AN INTEGRAL
    PART OF CLASS 260 (AFTER SUBCLASS 585) AND FOLLOWS THE SCHEDULE HIERARCHY
    RETAINING ALL PERTINENT DEFINITIONS AND CLASS LINES OF CLASS 260.


CLS 568/1
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 which contain boron.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses 206
    and 213-225 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste
    containing halogen, sulfur, oxygen, phosphorus, or metals.


CLS 568/2
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which contain phosphorus.


CLS 568/3
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which contain two or more boron atoms.

    (1)     Note.   Included herein are, for example, the reaction products of
    diborane and an unsaturated organic compound.


CLS 568/4
TXT Compounds under subclass 3 which contain at least ten boron atoms.


CLS 568/5
TXT Compounds under subclass 4 which contain sulfur, oxygen, halogen, or a
    metal selected from Group IA or IIA of the Periodic Table having a specific
    gravity less than four.


CLS 568/6
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which contain sulfur, oxygen, halogen, or a
    metal selected from Group IA or IIA of the Periodic Table having a specific
    gravity less than four.


CLS 568/7
TXT Compounds under subclass 1 which contain boron having three acyclic
    substituents consisting of hydrogen and carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 568/8
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 which contain phosphorus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses 206
    and 213-222 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste
    containing halogen, sulfur, oxygen, or phosphorus.


CLS 568/9
TXT Compounds under subclass 8 wherein at least one hydrogen of the phosphonium
    radical

    PH4 is substituted by an organic radical.


CLS 568/10
TXT Compounds under subclass 9 which contain at least two phosphorus atoms.


CLS 568/11
TXT Compounds under subclass 9 which contain sulfur or oxygen.


CLS 568/12
TXT Compounds under subclass 8 in which phosphorus is a ring member.


CLS 568/13
TXT Compounds under subclass 8 which contain sulfur or oxygen.


CLS 568/14
TXT Compounds under subclass 13 wherein sulfur or oxygen is bonded directly to
    phosphorus.


CLS 568/15
TXT Compounds under subclass 14 which contain sulfur or oxygen bonded
    indirectly to phosphorus.





    (1)     Note.    Some examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 568/16
TXT Compounds under subclass 8 which contain halogen.


CLS 568/17
TXT Compounds under subclass 8 which contain a benzene ring.


CLS 568/18
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 which contain sulfur.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses 206
    and 213-225 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste
    containing halogen, sulfur, oxygen, nitrogen, phosphorus, or metals.


CLS 568/19
TXT Products under subclass 18 wherein the sulfur containing compound is mixed
    with a preserving or stabilizing agent which functions to prevent physical
    or chemical change.


CLS 568/20
TXT Compounds under subclass 18 which contain a




CLS 568/21
TXT Compounds under subclass 18 which contain sulfur directly bonded to sulfur.


CLS 568/22
TXT Compounds under subclass 21 which contain oxygen.


CLS 568/23
TXT Compounds under subclass 22 wherein sulfur or oxygen is bonded directly to
    a ring.


CLS 568/24
TXT Compounds under subclass 21 which contain halogen.


CLS 568/25
TXT Compounds under subclass 21 which contain a benzene ring.


CLS 568/26
TXT Processes under subclass 21 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting a
    compound containing a -SH or -SM group where M is a Group IA or IIA metal
    having a specific gravity less than four.


CLS 568/27
TXT Compounds under subclass 18 which contain oxygen directly bonded to sulfur.

    (1)     Note. Examples of compounds provided for herein are:





CLS 568/28
TXT Compounds under subclass 27 wherein at least two oxygens are directly
    bonded to the same sulfur atom.


CLS 568/29
TXT Compounds under subclass 28 which contain




CLS 568/30
TXT Compounds under subclass 28 which contain nitrogen.


CLS 568/31
TXT Compounds under subclass 28 which contain a



CLS 568/32
TXT Compounds under subclass 28 which contain oxy.


CLS 568/33
TXT Compounds under subclass 32 wherein oxy is bonded directly to a ring.


CLS 568/34
TXT Compounds under subclass 28 which contain at least two rings.


CLS 568/35
TXT Compounds under subclass 28 which contain at least two halogen atoms.


CLS 568/36
TXT Compounds under subclass 27 which contain nitrogen or at least two sulfur
    atoms.


CLS 568/37
TXT Compounds under subclass 27 which contain a



CLS 568/38
TXT Compounds under subclass 18 having the R-S-R structure wherein the R's are
    diverse or identical organic radicals.


CLS 568/39
TXT Compounds under subclass 38 which contain oxygen.


CLS 568/40
TXT Compounds under subclass 39 which contain a Group IA or IIA metal having a
    specific gravity less than four.

    (1)     Note.    An example of a compound pro-
    vided for herein is:



CLS 568/41
TXT Compounds under subclass 39 which contain a



CLS 568/42
TXT Compounds under subclass 41 which contain two organic radicals bonded
    directly to the carbonyl.


CLS 568/43
TXT Compounds under subclass 42 which contain oxy or halogen.


CLS 568/44
TXT Compounds under subclass 39 which contain nitrogen.


CLS 568/45
TXT Compounds under subclass 39 which contain two or more oxygen atoms.


CLS 568/46
TXT Compounds under subclass 45 which contain two or more -OH groups.


CLS 568/47
TXT Compounds under subclass 46 which contain at least two rings.


CLS 568/48
TXT Compounds under subclass 47 wherein at least two rings are bonded directly
    to the same sulfur atom.


CLS 568/49
TXT Compounds under subclass 45 which contain at least two rings.


CLS 568/50
TXT Compounds under subclass 45 which contain at least one -SH group or two or
    more





CLS 568/51
TXT Compounds under subclass 39 wherein oxygen is directly bonded to a ring.


CLS 568/52
TXT Compounds under subclass 51 which contain two or more rings.


CLS 568/53
TXT Compounds under subclass 52 wherein at least two rings are bonded directly
    to the same sulfur atoms.


CLS 568/54
TXT Compounds under subclass 51 wherein sulfur is directly bonded to a ring.


CLS 568/55
TXT Compounds under subclass 39 which contain an -OH group.


CLS 568/56
TXT Compounds under subclass 38 which contain halogen.


CLS 568/57
TXT Compounds under subclass 38 which contain at least one -SH group or two or
    more R-S-R groups.


CLS 568/58
TXT Compounds under subclass 38 which contain two or more rings.


CLS 568/59
TXT Compounds under subclass 38 which do not include a ring.


CLS 568/60
TXT Compounds under subclass 59 wherein the R groups in R-S-R are identical
    acyclic groups.


CLS 568/61
TXT Compounds under subclass 18 which contain a -SH or -SM group where M is a
    Group IA or IIA metal having a specific gravity less than four.


CLS 568/62
TXT Compounds under subclass 61 which contain oxygen.


CLS 568/63
TXT Compounds under subclass 62 which contain the following  g roup:


CLS 568/64
TXT Compounds under subclass 62 wherein oxygen is directly bonded to a ring.


CLS 568/65
TXT Compounds under subclass 61 which contain halogen.


CLS 568/66
TXT Compounds under subclass 61 which contain two or more -SH groups.


CLS 568/67
TXT Compounds under subclass 61 which contain a benzene ring.


CLS 568/68
TXT Processes under subclass 67 wherein the compound is prepared by utilizing a
    halogen containing, heavy metal containing, or aluminum containing material
    in any way, e.g., as a catalyst, reactant, etc.


CLS 568/69
TXT Compounds under subclass 61 which do not include a ring.


CLS 568/70
TXT Processes under subclass 69 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting
    hydrogen sulfide or a hydrosulfide or a metal, e.g., reacting H2S or NaSH.


CLS 568/71
TXT Processes under subclass 70 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting
    hydrogen sulfide or a metal hydrosulfide and an organic hydroxy-containing
    compound.


CLS 568/72
TXT Processes under subclass 70 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting
    hydrogen sulfide or a metal hydrosulfide and a compound containing carbon
    to carbon unsaturation.


CLS 568/73
TXT Processes under subclass 72 wherein a material containing boron,
    phosphorus, or silicon is utilized in any way, e.g., as a catalyst,
    reactant, etc.


CLS 568/74
TXT Compounds under subclass 18 which contain halogen.


CLS 568/75
TXT Compounds under subclass 18 which contain oxygen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for compounds in which it is known that oxygen is bonded directly
    to sulfur.


CLS 568/76
TXT Compounds under subclass 75 which contain a nitro (-NO ) or nitrosos (-NO)
    group.


CLS 568/77
TXT Compounds under subclass 18 which contain a carbocyclic ring.


CLS 568/300
TXT Compounds under Class 260, subclass 350 which contain oxygen.

    (1)     Note.    An example of a compound pro-
    vided for herein is:



    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    206-225 and 255 for the destruction of organic hazardous or toxic waste
    containing halogen, sulfur, oxygen, nitrogen, phosphorus, or metals.


CLS 568/301
TXT Compounds under subclass 300 which contain the following structure:



    SEARCH CLASS:

    549,    Organic Compounds, subclass 327 for diketenes.  According to
    ozonolysis and X-ray analysis, diketenes have the following structure:



CLS 568/302
TXT Compounds under subclass 301 which contain the following structure:



CLS 568/303
TXT Compounds under subclass 300 having the following structure wherein the R's
    are diverse or identical organic radicals:



CLS 568/304
TXT Products under subclass 303 wherein the ketone is mixed with a preserving
    or stabilizing agent which functions to prevent physical or chemical change.


CLS 568/305
TXT Compounds under subclass 303 which contain nitrogen.


CLS 568/306
TXT Compounds under subclass 305 which contain a benzene ring.


CLS 568/307
TXT Compounds under subclass 305 which do not include a ring.


CLS 568/308
TXT Compounds under subclass 303 which contain a benzene ring.


CLS 568/309
TXT Processes under subclass 308 which are directed to the preparation,
    purification, recovery, or treatment in any way of a benzene ring
    containing ketone.


CLS 568/310
TXT Processes under subclass 309 wherein the compound is prepared by
    transformation or rearrangement of the elements of a starting compound
    without adding or taking away any elements.


CLS 568/311
TXT Processes under subclass 309 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting
    CO or by reacting a compound which contains a -O-O- group.


CLS 568/312
TXT Processes under subclass 309 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting
    an aldehyde or ketone.


CLS 568/313
TXT Processes under subclass 312 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting
    an aldehyde with a ketone.


CLS 568/314
TXT Processes under subclass 312 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting
    an aldehyde or ketone and a compound containing a -COO- group, or by
    reacting an aldehyde or ketone which contains a -COO- group.


CLS 568/315
TXT Processes under subclass 312 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting
    an aldehyde or ketone and an oxy containing compound, or by reacting an oxy
    containing aldehyde or ketone.


CLS 568/316
TXT Processes under subclass 312 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting
    an aldehyde or ketone and a halogen containing compound, or by reacting a
    halogen containing aldehyde or ketone.


CLS 568/317
TXT Processes under subclass 312 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting
    an aldehyde or ketone and an unsaturated alicyclic hydrocarbon or an
    unsaturated acyclic hydrocarbon.


CLS 568/318
TXT Processes under subclass 312 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting
    an aldehyde or ketone and gaseous hydrogen or wherein the compound is
    prepared from an aldehyde or ketone utilizing a material containing a Group
    IA or IIA metal having a specific gravity less than four in any way, e.g.,
    as a reactant, catalyst, solvent, etc.

    (1)     Note.    The Group IA or IIA light metal can also be a part of the
    aldehyde or ketone reactant.


CLS 568/319
TXT Processes under subclass 309 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting a
    compound containing a -COO- group, e.g., a carboxylic acid, ester, or
    anhydride.


CLS 568/320
TXT Processes under subclass 309 wherein the compound is prepared by oxidizing
    an organic compound utilizing gaseous oxygen.


CLS 568/321
TXT Processes under subclass 320 which include preparing a compound containing
    two or more rings.


CLS 568/322
TXT Processes under subclass 309 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting
    an oxy containing compound.


CLS 568/323
TXT Processes under subclass 309 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting a
    halogen containing compound.


CLS 568/324
TXT Processes under subclass 309 which include separating the compound from
    impurities or from the reaction mixture.


CLS 568/325
TXT Compounds under subclass 308 which contain at least two rings.


CLS 568/326
TXT Compounds under subclass 325 which contain a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 568/327
TXT Compounds under subclass 326 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    two rings.


CLS 568/328
TXT Compounds under subclass 327 wherein the bicyclo ring system is the
    naphthyl ring system.


CLS 568/329
TXT Compounds under subclass 325 which contain at least one alicyclic ring.


CLS 568/330
TXT Compounds under subclass 329 which contain a five-membered alicyclic ring.


CLS 568/331
TXT Compounds under subclass 325 which contain a



CLS 568/332
TXT Compounds under subclass 331 wherein two benzene rings are directly bonded
    to the same



CLS 568/333
TXT Compounds under subclass 332 which contain oxy.


CLS 568/334
TXT Compounds under subclass 331 which contain
    the 1,3-dipheny1-2-propen-1 one nucleus,






CLS 568/335
TXT Compounds under subclass 308 wherein is bonded directly to the benzene ring.


CLS 568/336
TXT Compounds under subclass 335 which contain oxy.


CLS 568/337
TXT Compounds under subclass 336 wherein the oxy is directly bonded to the
    benzene ring.


CLS 568/338
TXT Processes under subclass 303 which are directly to the preparation,
    purification, recovery, or treatment of an alicyclic ring containing ketone.


CLS 568/339
TXT Processes under subclass 338 which are directly to the preparation,
    purification, recovery, or treatment  of camphor,

    or a salt thereof.


CLS 568/340
TXT Processes under subclass 339 which include separating the compound from
    impurites or from the reaction mixture.


CLS 568/341
TXT Processes under subclass 338 wherein the compound is produced by
    transformation or rearrangement of the elements of a starting compound
    without adding or taking away any elements.


CLS 568/342
TXT Processes under subclass 338 wherein the compound is produced by reacting
    CO or by reacting a compound which contains a -O-O- group.


CLS 568/343
TXT Processes under subclass 338 wherein the compound is produced by reacting
    an aldehyde or ketone.


CLS 568/344
TXT Processes under subclass 343 wherein the compound is produced by oxidizing
    an aldehyde or ketone utilizing gaseous oxygen.

    (1)     Note. Included in this subclass are processes of preparing a
    cycloalkanedione by oxidizing a cycloalkanone with gaseous oxygen.


CLS 568/345
TXT Processes under subclass 343 wherein the compound is produced by reacting
    an aldehyde with a ketone.


CLS 568/346
TXT Processes under subclass 343 wherein the compound is produced by reacting
    an aldehyde of ketone with a compound containing a -COO- group, or by
    reacting an aldehyde or ketone which contains such a group.


CLS 568/347
TXT Processes under subclass 343 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting
    an aldehyde or ketone and an oxy containing compound, or by reacting an oxy
    containing aldehyde or ketone.


CLS 568/348
TXT Processes under subclass 343 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting
    an aldehyde or ketone and a halogen containing compound, or by reacting a
    halogen containing aldehyde or ketone.


CLS 568/349
TXT Processes under subclass 343 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting
    an aldehyde or ketone and an acyclic unsaturated hydrocarbon.


CLS 568/350
TXT Processes under subclass 343 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting
    an aldehyde or ketone and gaseous hydrogen or wherein the compound is
    prepared from an aldehyde or ketone utilizing a material containing a Group
    IA or IIA metal having a specific gravity less than four in any way, e.g.,
    as a reactant, catalyst, solvent, etc.

    (1)     Note.    The Group IA or IIA light metal can also be a part of the
    aldehyde or ketone reactant.


CLS 568/351
TXT Processes under subclass 343 wherein the compound is prepared from an
    aldehyde or ketone utilizing a material containing nitrogen in any way,
    e.g., as a reactant, catalyst, solvent, etc.


CLS 568/352
TXT Processes under subclass 343 wherein the compound is prepared from an
    aldehyde or ketone utilizing a material containing boron, phosphorus, or
    sulfur in any way, e.g., as a reactant, catalyst, solvent, etc.


CLS 568/353
TXT Processes under subclass 343 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting
    two or more ketones together.


CLS 568/354
TXT Processes under subclass 338 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting a
    compound containing a -COO- group, e.g., a carboxylic acid, ester or
    anhydride.


CLS 568/355
TXT Processes under subclass 354 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting a
    compound containing at least two -COO- groups.


CLS 568/356
TXT Processes under subclass 354 wherein the -COO- containing reactant contains
    an unsaturated carbon to carbon linkage.


CLS 568/357
TXT Processes under subclass 338 wherein the compound is prepared by oxidizing
    an organic compound utilizing gaseous oxygen.


CLS 568/358
TXT Processes under sublass 357 which include preparing the compound in two or
    more stages or zones, each including oxidation with gaseous oxygen.


CLS 568/359
TXT Processes under subclass 357 which include oxidizing an organic compound
    with gaseous oxygen utilizing a boron containing material in any way, e.g.,
    as a catalyst, reactant, solvent, etc.


CLS 568/360
TXT Processes under subclass 357 which include oxidizing an organic compound
    with gaseous oxygen utilizing a material which contains a metal having a
    specific gravity greater than four in any way, e.g., as a catalyst,
    reactant, etc.


CLS 568/361
TXT Processes under subclass 338 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting
    an oxy containing compound.


CLS 568/362
TXT Processes under subclass 361 wherein the oxy containing compound is a
    phenol.


CLS 568/363
TXT Processes under subclass 361 which include preparing the compound by
    reacting an oxy containing compound and an inorganic oxygen containing
    compound.


CLS 568/364
TXT Processes under subclass 338 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting a
    halogen containing compound.


CLS 568/365
TXT Processes under subclass 338 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting
    an ethylenically or acetylenically unsaturated hydrocarbon.


CLS 568/366
TXT Processes under subclass 338 which include separating the compound from
    impurities or from the reaction mixture.


CLS 568/367
TXT Compounds under subclass 303 which contain at least two alicyclic rings.


CLS 568/368
TXT Compounds under subclass 367 which contain a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 568/369
TXT Compounds under subclass 368 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    four rings.


CLS 568/370
TXT Compounds under subclass 369 wherein the tetracyclo ring system consists of
    two five-membered cyclos and two six-membered cyclos.

    (1)     Note. Examples of compounds provided for herein are:





CLS 568/371
TXT Compounds under subclass 370 wherein the two six-membered rings of the
    tetracyclo ring system are fused to each other.

    (1)     Note. An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 568/372
TXT Compounds under subclass 369 wherein the tetracyclo ring system consists of
    four six-membered rings.

    (1)     Note.    An example of a compound pro-
    vided for herein is:



CLS 568/373
TXT Compounds under subclass 368 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    three rings.


CLS 568/374
TXT Compounds under subclass 368 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    two rings.


CLS 568/375
TXT Compounds under subclass 303 which contain an alicyclic ring having seven
    or more ring carbons.


CLS 568/376
TXT Compounds under subclass 303 which include a six-membered alicyclic ring.


CLS 568/377
TXT Compounds under subclass 376 wherein the ring is partially unsaturated.


CLS 568/378
TXT Compounds under subclass 377 which contain a 2,6,6-trialkylcyclohexenyl
    nucleus.


CLS 568/379
TXT Compounds under subclass 303 which include a five-membered alicyclic ring.


CLS 568/380
TXT Compounds under subclass 379 which contain halogen.


CLS 568/381
TXT Compounds under subclass 303 which include a four-membered alicyclic ring.


CLS 568/382
TXT Compounds under subclass 303 which do not include a ring.


CLS 568/383
TXT Processes under subclass 382 which are directed to the preparation,
    purification, recovery, or treatment in any way of an acyclic ketone.


CLS 568/384
TXT Processes under subclass 383 wherein the compound is prepared by
    transformation or rearrangement of the elements of a starting compound
    without adding or taking away any elements.


CLS 568/385
TXT Processes under subclass 383 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting a
    compound which contains a -O-O- group.


CLS 568/386
TXT Processes under subclass 383 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting a
    compound which contains a ring.


CLS 568/387
TXT Processes under subclass 383 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting
    CO.


CLS 568/388
TXT Processes under subclass 383 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting
    an aldehyde or ketone.


CLS 568/389
TXT Processes under subclass 388 wherein the compound is prepared by oxidizing
    an aldehyde or ketone, or another organic compound in conjunction with an
    aldehyde or ketone, utilizing gaseous oxygen as the oxidizing agent.


CLS 568/390
TXT Processes under subclass 388 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting
    an aldehyde with a ketone.


CLS 568/391
TXT Processes under subclass 388 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting
    an aldehyde or ketone and an oxy containing compound, or by reacting an oxy
    containing aldehyde or ketone.


CLS 568/392
TXT Processes under subclass 391 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting
    an oxy containing aldehyde or ketone.


CLS 568/393
TXT Processes under subclass 388 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting
    an aldehyde or ketone and a halogen containing compound, or by reacting a
    halogen containing aldehyde or ketone.


CLS 568/394
TXT Processes under subclass 393 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting a
    halogen containing aldehyde or ketone.


CLS 568/395
TXT Processes under subclass 388 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting
    an aldehyde or ketone and an unsaturated acyclic hydrocarbon.


CLS 568/396
TXT Processes under subclass 388 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting
    an aldehyde or ketone and gaseous hydrogen, or wherein the compound is
    prepared from an aldehyde or ketone utilizing a material containing a Group
    IA or IIA metal having a specific gravity less than four in any way, e.g.,
    as a reactant, catalyst, solvent, etc.

    (1)     Note.    The Group IA or IIA metal can also be a part of the
    aldehyde or ketone reactant.


CLS 568/397
TXT Processes under subclass 383 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting a
    compound containing a -COO- group, e.g., a carboxylic acid, ester, or
    anhydride.


CLS 568/398
TXT Processes under subclass 397 wherein the
    -COO- containing reactant contains an unsaturated carbon to carbon linkage.


CLS 568/398.8
TXT Oxidation of hydrocarbon mixtures:

    Processes under subclass 383 wherein the compound is prepared by oxidizing
    a mixture of hydrocarbons.


CLS 568/399
TXT Processes under subclass 383 wherein the compound is prepared by oxidizing
    an organic compound utilizing gaseous oxygen.


CLS 568/400
TXT Processes under subclass 399 which include an acyclic unsaturated
    hydrocarbon as a reactant.


CLS 568/401
TXT Processes under subclass 400 which include utilizing a material containing
    silver, gold, palladim, platinum, rhodium, iridium, ruthenium, or osmium as
    a catalyst.


CLS 568/402
TXT Processes under subclass 399 wherein the compound is prepared by oxidizing
    a hydroxy containing reactant with gaseous oxygen.


CLS 568/403
TXT Processes under subclass 383 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting
    an oxy containing compound.


CLS 568/404
TXT Processes under subclass 403 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting
    an oxy containing compound utilizing a material containing phosphorus,
    sulfur, or halogen in any way, e.g., as a reactant, catalyst, solvent, etc.


CLS 568/405
TXT Processes under subclass 403 wherein the compound is prepared by utilizing
    an ether or a polyhydroxy containing compound in any way, e.g., as a
    reactant, solvent, etc.


CLS 568/406
TXT Processes under subclass 403 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting
    an oxy containing compound utilizing an aluminum or silicon containing a
    material in any way, e.g., as reactant, catalyst, solvent, etc.


CLS 568/407
TXT Processes under subclass 383 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting a
    halogen containing compound.


CLS 568/408
TXT Processes under subclass 383 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting a
    compound containing an unsaturated carbon to carbon linkage.


CLS 568/409
TXT Processes under subclass 408 wherein the carbon to carbon unsaturation is
    acetylenic.


CLS 568/410
TXT Processes under subclass 383 which include separating the compound from
    impurities or from the reaction mixture.


CLS 568/411
TXT Processes under subclass 410 wherein the compound purified or recovered has
    the following structure in which one or more hydrogens may be replaced by
    halogens:


CLS 568/412
TXT Compounds under subclass 382 which contain at least two  groups.


CLS 568/413
TXT Compounds under subclass 412 which contain an oxy group.


CLS 568/414
TXT Compounds under subclass 382 which contain an oxy or a peroxy group, i.e.,
    -0- or -0-0- containing.


CLS 568/415
TXT Compounds under subclass 414 which contain an unsaturated carbon to carbon
    linkage.


CLS 568/416
TXT Compounds under subclass 414 which contain halogen.


CLS 568/417
TXT Compounds under subclass 382 which contain an unsaturated carbon to carbon
    linkage.


CLS 568/418
TXT Compounds under subclass 417 which contain halogen.


CLS 568/419
TXT Compounds under subclass 382 which contain halogen.


CLS 568/420
TXT Compounds under subclass 300 having the following structure wherein R is H
    or an organic radcal:


CLS 568/421
TXT Products under subclass 420 wherein the aldehyde is mixed with a preserving
    or stabilizing agent which functions to prevent physical or chemical change.


CLS 568/422
TXT Products under subclass 421 which contain


    (formaldehyde) in admixture with a preserving or stabilizing agent.


CLS 568/423
TXT Compounds under subclass 420 which contain nitrogen.


CLS 568/424
TXT Compounds under subclass 423 which contain a benzene ring.


CLS 568/425
TXT Compounds under subclass 420 which contain a benzene ring.


CLS 568/426
TXT Processes under subclass 425 which are directed to the preparation,
    recovery, or treatment in any way of a benzene ring containing aldehyde.


CLS 568/427
TXT Processes under subclass 426 wherein the compound is prepared by
    transformation or rearrangement of the elements of a starting compound
    without adding or taking away any elements.


CLS 568/428
TXT Processes under subclass 426 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting
    CO.


CLS 568/429
TXT Processes under subclass 428 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting
    an ethylenically unsaturated compound, carbon monoxide, and gaseous
    hydrogen, only.


CLS 568/430
TXT Processes under subclass 426 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting
    ozone, O3, or by reacting a compound which contains a -0-0- group.


CLS 568/431
TXT Processes under subclass 426 wherein the compound is prepared by oxidizing
    an organic compound utilizing gaseous oxygen as the oxidizing agent.


CLS 568/432
TXT Processes under subclass 431 wherein an aldehyde which contains oxy is
    prepared.


CLS 568/433
TXT Processes under subclass 426 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting
    an aldehyde.


CLS 568/434
TXT Processes under subclass 433 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting
    an aldehyde and gaseous hydrogen.


CLS 568/435
TXT Processes under subclass 426 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting a
    compound containing -COO- group, e.g., a carboxylic acid, ester, or
    anhydride.


CLS 568/436
TXT Processes under subclass 426 wherein the compound is prepared by utilizing
    a material containing nitrogen in any way, e.g., as reactant, catalyst,
    solvent, etc.


CLS 568/437
TXT Processes under subclass 426 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting a
    compound containing halogen.


CLS 568/438
TXT Processes under subclass 426 which include separating the compound from
    impurities or from the reaction mixture.


CLS 568/439
TXT Compounds under subclass 425 which contain a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 568/440
TXT Compounds under subclass 439 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    two rings.


CLS 568/441
TXT Compounds under subclass 440 which contain oxy.


CLS 568/442
TXT Compounds under subclass 425 which contain oxy.


CLS 568/443
TXT Processes under subclass 420 wherein an aldehyde containing an alicyclic
    ring is prepared by transformation or rearrangement of the elements of a
    starting compound without adding or taking away any elements.


CLS 568/444
TXT Processes under subclass 420 wherein an aldehyde containing an alicyclic
    ring is prepared by utilizing only the following three reactants:  an
    ethylenically unsaturated compound, carbon monoxide, and gaseous hydrogen.


CLS 568/445
TXT Compounds under subclass 420 which contain an alicyclic polycyclo ring
    system.


CLS 568/446
TXT Compounds under subclass 420 which contain an unsaturated alicyclic ring.


CLS 568/447
TXT Compounds under subclass 446 which contain a 2,6,6-trialkylcyclohexenyl
    nucleus.


CLS 568/448
TXT Compounds under subclass 420 which do not include a ring.


CLS 568/449
TXT Processes under subclass 448 which are directed to the preparation,
    purification, recovery, or treatment in any way of an acyclic aldehyde.


CLS 568/450
TXT Processes under subclass 449 wherein the compound is prepared by
    transformation or rearrangement of the elements of a starting compound
    without adding or taking away any elements.


CLS 568/451
TXT Processes under subclass 449 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting
    an ethylenically unsaturated compound, carbon monoxide, and gaseous
    hydrogen, only.


CLS 568/452
TXT Processes under subclass 451 wherein an aldehyde is produced which has at
    least twice as many carbon atoms as the ethylenically unsaturated compound
    reactant.


CLS 568/453
TXT Processes under subclass 451 wherein the compound is produced in two or
    more stages or zones, each consisting of reacting an ethylenically
    unsaturated compound, carbon monoxide, and gaseous hydrogen.


CLS 568/454
TXT Processes under subclass 451 wherein a material containing nitrogen,
    phosphorus, arsenic, antimony, or bismuth is utilized in the
    hydroformylation reaction in any way, e.g., as a catalyst, solvent, etc.


CLS 568/455
TXT Processes under subclass 454 wherein a nitrogen containing material is
    utilized in any way, e.g., as a catalyst, solvent, etc.


CLS 568/456
TXT Processes under subclass 451 wherein a metal containing compound is
    filtered, precipitated, or deposited in the hydroformylation process.


CLS 568/457
TXT Processes under subclass 449 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting a
    polymer of formaldehyde, e.g., decomposing paraformaldehyde to monomeric
    formaldehyde by heat.


CLS 568/458
TXT Processes under subclass 449 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting
    an aldehyde.


CLS 568/459
TXT Processes under subclass 458 wherein an aldehyde containing an unsaturated
    carbon to carbon linkage is prepared, e.g., acetylenic or ethylenic
    unsaturation containing.


CLS 568/460
TXT Processes under subclass 459 wherein an aldehyde containing carbon to
    carbon unsaturation is prepared by reacting an aldehyde and a compound
    containing an oxy or -COO- group, or by reacting an oxy or -COO- containing
    aldehyde.


CLS 568/461
TXT Processes under subclass 459 wherein an aldehyde containing carbon to
    carbon unsaturation is prepared by reacting two or more aldehydes.


CLS 568/462
TXT Processes under subclass 458 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting
    an aldehyde and gaseous hydrogen.


CLS 568/463
TXT Processes under subclass 458 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting
    two or more aldehydes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    461,    for processes of preparing an acetylenically or ethylenically
    unsaturated aldehyde by reacting two or more aldehydes.


CLS 568/464
TXT Processes under subclass 463 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting
    two or more different aldehydes.


CLS 568/465
TXT Processes under subclass 458 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting a
    compound containing oxy or a -COO- group, or by reacting an oxy or -COO-
    containing aldehyde.


CLS 568/466
TXT Processes under subclass 458 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting
    an aldehyde with hydrogen halide or elemental halogen.


CLS 568/467
TXT Processes under subclass 449 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting
    acetylene,

    HC  =  CH


CLS 568/468
TXT Processes under subclass 467 wherein a catalyst containing mercury is
    utilized.


CLS 568/469
TXT Processes under subclass 449 which include ozone, 03, as a reactant.


CLS 568/469.9
TXT Oxidation of hydrocarbon mixtures:

    Processes under subclass 449 wherein the compound is prepared by oxidizing
    a mixture of hydrocarbons.


CLS 568/470
TXT Processes under subclass 449 wherein the compound is prepared by oxidizing
    an organic compound utilizing gaseous oxygen as an oxidizing agent.


CLS 568/471
TXT Processes under subclass 470 which include reacting an organic -OH
    containing compound.


CLS 568/472
TXT Processes under subclass 471 wherein the organic -OH containing compound is
    methanol.


CLS 568/473
TXT Processes under subclass 472 wherein a catalyst containing silver is
    utilized.


CLS 568/474
TXT Processes under subclass 472 wherein a catalyst containing molybdenum is
    utilized.


CLS 568/475
TXT Processes under subclass 470 which include reacting an acyclic hydrocarbon.


CLS 568/476
TXT Processes under subclass 475 wherein an aldehyde containing carbon to
    carbon unsaturation is prepared in an oxidation reaction utilizing a
    reactant containing carbon to carbon unsaturation.


CLS 568/477
TXT Processes under subclass 476 wherein a catalyst containing antimony or tin
    is utilized.


CLS 568/478
TXT Processes under subclass 476 wherein a catalyst containing silver, gold,
    palladium, platinum, rhodium, iridium, ruthenium, or osmium is utilized.


CLS 568/479
TXT Processes under subclass 476 wherein a catalyst containing molybdenum is
    utilized.


CLS 568/480
TXT Processes under subclass 479 wherein a catalyst containing molybdenum and
    phosphorus is utilized.


CLS 568/481
TXT Processes under subclass 476 wherein the compound is prepared by utilizing
    a material containing selenium or tellurium in any way, e.g., as a
    reactant, catalyst, solvent, etc.


CLS 568/482
TXT Processes under subclass 475 wherein the acyclic hydrocarbon reactant is
    methane.


CLS 568/483
TXT Processes under subclass 449 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting a
    heterocyclic compound.


CLS 568/484
TXT Processes under subclass 449 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting a
    compound containing a -COO- group, e.g., a carboxylic acid, ester, or
    anhydride.


CLS 568/485
TXT Processes under subclass 449 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting
    an oxy-containing compound or by reacting a compound which contains a -O-O-
    group.


CLS 568/486
TXT Processes under subclass 485 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting a
    compound containing two or more oxys.


CLS 568/487
TXT Processes under subclass 485 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting
    methanol or ethanol.


CLS 568/488
TXT Processes under subclass 485 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting
    an oxy or peroxy containing compound with a halogen containing compound, or
    by reacting a compound which contains halogen and oxy or peroxy.


CLS 568/489
TXT Processes under subclass 485 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting
    an oxy or peroxy containing compound utilizing a material containing
    silver, gold, palladiun, platinum, rhodium, iridium, ruthenium, or osmium
    in any way, e.g., as a reactant, catalyst, solvent, etc.


CLS 568/490
TXT Processes under subclass 449 wherein the compound is prepared by reacting a
    halogen containing compound.


CLS 568/491
TXT Processes under subclass 449 wherein water is utilized as a reactant in
    preparing the compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    467,    for processes of preparing an acyclic aldehyde by reacting
    acetylene and water.


CLS 568/492
TXT Processes under subclass 449 wherein the compound is separated from
    impurities or from the reaction mixture.


CLS 568/493
TXT Processes under subclass 492 of purifying or



CLS 568/494
TXT Compounds under subclass 448 which contain




CLS 568/495
TXT Compounds under subclass 448 which contain halogen.


CLS 568/496
TXT Compounds under subclass 448 which contain oxy.


CLS 568/497
TXT Compounds under subclass 496 which contain at least two oxys.


CLS 568/557
TXT Oxonium (e.g., beryllium hydride etherate, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 300 which are addition or double compounds of an
    organic oxide, i.e., an ether, and an inorganic acid or salt thereof.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example, the HCL addition
    compound of dimethyl ether.


CLS 568/558
TXT Peroxy bonded directly to carbon:

    Compounds under subclass 300 which contain an -O-O- group bonded directly
    to carbon.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example, the HCL addition
    compound of dimethyl ether.


CLS 568/559
TXT With preservative or stabilizer:

    Products under subclass 558 which contain the peroxy containing compound in
    admixture with an agent which functions to prevent physical or chemical
    change.


CLS 568/560
TXT Halogen containing:

    Compounds under subclass 558 which contain halogen.


CLS 568/561
TXT Plural peroxy groups:

    Compounds under subclass 558 which contain more than one peroxy group.


CLS 568/562
TXT Purification or recovery:

    Processes under subclass 561 which include separating the compound from
    impurities or from the reaction mixture.


CLS 568/563
TXT Additional oxygen containing:

    Compounds under subclass 561 which contain nonperoxy oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example:



CLS 568/564
TXT Hydroperoxy containing:

    Compounds under subclass 561 which contain at least one H-O-O- group.


CLS 568/565
TXT Preparing by oxidation utilizing gaseous oxygen:

    Processes under subclass 564 which include preparing the compound by
    oxidation utilizing molecular oxygen or an oxygen containing gas as an
    oxidizing agent.


CLS 568/566
TXT Plural carbonyl groups bonded directly to the peroxy group (e.g., acetyl
    peroxide, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 558 which contain the





    SEARCH CLASS:

    560,    Organic Compounds, subclass 302 for peroxy esters



            where R is not carbonyl.

            and subclass 545 for acid anhydrides.

    562,    Organic Compounds, subclass 887 for acid anhydrides



CLS 568/567
TXT Oxy containing:

    Compounds under subclass 558 which contain an oxy group.


CLS 568/568
TXT Hydroperoxy containing:

    Compounds under subclass 558 which contain a H-O-O- group.


CLS 568/569
TXT Preparing by oxidation utilizing gaseous oxygen:

    Processes under subclass 568 which include preparing the compound by
    oxidation utilizing molecular oxygen or an oxygen containing gas as an
    oxidizing agent.


CLS 568/570
TXT Alicyclic hydroperoxide produced:

    Processes under subclass 569 wherein a compound containing at least one
    alicyclic ring is produced.


CLS 568/571
TXT Acyclic hydroperoxide produced:

    Processes under subclass 569 wherein a compound having no rings in its
    structure is produced.


CLS 568/572
TXT Pretreatment of material oxidized:

    Processes under subclass 569 wherein, prior to oxidation, the material to
    be oxidized is subjected to a physical or chemical treatment to condition
    it for oxidation.


CLS 568/573
TXT Initiator, accelerator, or catalyst utilized:

    Processes under subclass 569 wherein the oxidation is carried out in the
    presence of an initiator, accelerator, or catalyst which acts to regulate
    the reaction by reducing the induction period or by increasing or by
    decreasing the rate of the reaction.


CLS 568/574
TXT Metal containing:

    Processes under subclass 573 wherein the initiator, accelerator, or
    catalyst contains a metal.


CLS 568/575
TXT Heavy metal:

    Processes under subclass 574 wherein the metal utilized has a specific
    gravity greater than four.


CLS 568/576
TXT Purification or recovery:

    Processes under subclass 568 which include separating the compound from
    impurities or from the reaction mixture.


CLS 568/577
TXT Preparing by oxidation utilizing gaseous oxygen:

    Processes under subclass 558 which include preparing the compound by
    oxidation utilizing molecular oxygen or an oxygen containing gas as an
    oxidizing agent.


CLS 568/578
TXT Preparing by reaching an organic hydroperoxide and an organic hydroxy
    containing compound (H of -OH may be substituted by M):

    Processes under subclass 558 which include preparing the compound by
    reacting an organic hydroperoxide and an organic hydroxy containing
    compound.


CLS 568/579
TXT Ether containing:

    Compounds under subclass 300 which contain an oxygen bonded to two carbons
    of discrete organic radicals and having the type formula R-O-R.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    38,     for thioethers.


CLS 568/580
TXT With preservative or stabilizer:

    Products under subclass 579 which contain the ether containing compound in
    admixture with an agent which functions to prevent physical or chemical
    change.


CLS 568/581
TXT Acyclic ether preserved:

    Products under subclass 580 wherein the compound preserved does not include
    a ring.


CLS 568/582
TXT Nitrogen containing preservative:

    Products under subclass 581 wherein the preserving or stabilizing agent
    contains nitrogen.


CLS 568/583
TXT Nitrogen containing:

    Compounds under subclass 579 which contain nitrogen.


CLS 568/584
TXT Aromatic having ether oxygen bonded directly to a benzene ring:

    Compounds under subclass 583 which contain at least one benzene ring having
    an ether oxygen bonded directly thereto.


CLS 568/585
TXT Plural rings containing:

    Compounds under subclass 584 which contain at least two rings.


CLS 568/586
TXT Polyoxy:

    Compounds under subclass 585 which contain two or more oxy groups.


CLS 568/587
TXT Polyoxy:

    Compounds subclass 584 which contain two or more oxy groups.


CLS 568/588
TXT Halogen containing:

    Compounds under subclass 584 which contain halogen.


CLS 568/589
TXT Acyclic:

    Compounds under subclass 583 which do not include a ring.


CLS 568/590
TXT Plural oxygens bonded directly to the same carbon (e.g., acetals, ketals,
    orthoesters, orthocarbonates, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 589 wherein two or more oxygens are bonded to a
    single carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 568/591
TXT Plural oxygens bonded directly to the same carbon (e.g., acetals, ketals,
    orthoesters, orthocarbonates, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 579 wherein two or more oxygens are bonded to a
    single carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



    SEARCH THIS CLASS, CLASS:

    420+,   for aldehyde hydrates.


CLS 568/592
TXT Aromatic:

    Compounds under subclass 591 which contain a benzene ring.


CLS 568/593
TXT Plural oxyalkylene groups bonded directly to each other:

    Compounds under subclass 592 which contain two or more successive
    oxyalkylene groups.(1)  Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein
    is:



CLS 568/594
TXT Acyclic:

    Compounds under subclass 591 which do not include a ring.


CLS 568/595
TXT At Least three oxygens bonded directly to the same carbon (e.g.,
    orthoesters, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 594 wherein three or more oxygens are bonded to a
    single carbon.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 568/596
TXT Unsaturated:

    Compounds under subclass 594 which are acetylenically or ethylenically
    unsaturated.


CLS 568/597
TXT Acetylenic unsaturation:

    Compounds under subclass 596 which are acetylenically unsaturated.


CLS 568/598
TXT At Least three oxygens containing:

    Compounds under subclass 596 which contain three or more oxygens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 568/599
TXT One of the plural oxygens is in a hydroxy group (i.e., hemiacetals and
    hemiketals):

    Compounds under subclass 594 wherein one of the oxygens bonded to the same
    carbon is the oxygen of a hydroxy group.


CLS 568/600
TXT At Least three oxygens containing:

    Compounds under subclass 594 which contain three or more oxygens.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein in:



CLS 568/601
TXT Plural oxyalkylene groups bonded directly to each other:

    Compounds under subclass 600 which contain two or more successive
    oxyalkylene groups.


CLS 568/602
TXT Hydroxy bonded directly to each end of a chain which is polyoxymethylene
    only (e.g., paraformaldehyde, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 601 which contain two or more successive
    oxymethylene groups having hydroxy groups bonded directly to each end.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are the polymers of formaldehyde
    known as paraformaldehyde.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    528,    Synthetic Resins, subclasses 230+ for synthetic resins made by
    polymerizing aldehydes.

    549,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 353 and 367+ for polyhetero-oxygen
    heterocyclic carbon compounds resulting from the polymerization of
    aldehydes only.


CLS 568/603
TXT Plural acetal or ketal groups (e.g., tetraacetals, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 600 which contain two or more carbons having two
    or more oxygens bonded directly thereto.


CLS 568/604
TXT Halogen containing:

    Compounds under subclass 594 which contain halogen.


CLS 568/605
TXT Ion Exchange resin or sulfuric acid utilized:

    Processes under subclass 594 wherein an ion exchange resin or sulfuric acid
    is utilized in preparing the compound.


CLS 568/606
TXT Plural oxyalkylene groups bonded directly to each other:

    Compounds under subclass 579 which contain two or more successive
    oxyalkylene groups.


CLS 568/607
TXT Aromatic:

    Compounds under subclass 606 which contain a benzene ring.


CLS 568/608
TXT Ether oxygen bonded directly to a benzene ring:

    Compounds under subclass 607 wherein an ether oxygen is bonded directly to
    a carbon of at least one benzene ring.


CLS 568/609
TXT Plural rings containing:

    Compounds under subclass 608 which contain at least two rings.


CLS 568/610
TXT Halogen containing:

    Compounds under subclass 608 which contain halogen.


CLS 568/611
TXT Plural rings containing:

    Compounds under subclass 607 which contain at least two rings.


CLS 568/612
TXT Polycyclo alicyclic ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 606 which contain a polycyclo alicyclic ring
    system.


CLS 568/613
TXT Acyclic:

    Compounds under subclass 606 which do not include a ring.


CLS 568/614
TXT Halogen containing:

    Compounds under subclass 613 which contain halogen.


CLS 568/615
TXT Fluorine:

    Compounds under subclass 614 which contain fluorine.


CLS 568/616
TXT Unsaturated:

    Compounds under subclass 613 which are acetylenically or ethylenically
    unsaturated.


CLS 568/617
TXT Polytetramethylene glycols:

    Compounds under subclass 613 which contain two or more oxytetramethylene
    moieties terminated by hydroxy groups.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



            wherein is two or more.


CLS 568/618
TXT Preparing from organic hydroxy containing compound (H of -OH may be
    substituted by M):

    Processes under subclass 613 which include peparing the compound by
    reacting an organic hydroxy containing compound.


CLS 568/619
TXT From polyhydroxy containing compound:

    Processes under subclass 618 wherein the organic hydroxy containing
    compound contains two or more hydroxy groups.


CLS 568/620
TXT And cyclic ether:

    Processes under subclass 619 which include preparing the compound by
    reacting an organic polyhydroxy containing compound and a cyclic ether.


CLS 568/621
TXT Purification or recovery:

    Processes under subclass 613 which include separating the compound from
    impurities or from the reaction mixture.


CLS 568/622
TXT Hydroxy containing (H of -OH may be substituted by M):

    Compounds under subclass 613 which include a hydroxy group.


CLS 568/623
TXT Polyhydroxy containing:

    Compounds under subclass 622 which include two or more hydroxy groups.


CLS 568/624
TXT Plural diverse oxyalkylene groups containing:

    Compounds under subclass 623 which include two or more different
    oxyalkylene groups.


CLS 568/625
TXT Plural diverse oxyalkylene groups containing:

    Compounds under subclass 622 which include two or more different
    oxyalkylene groups.


CLS 568/626
TXT Aromatic:

    Compounds under subclass 579 which contain a benzene ring.


CLS 568/627
TXT Preparing by isomerization:

    Processes under subclass 626 wherein the compound is produced by
    transformation or rearrangement of the elements of a starting compound
    without adding or taking away any elements.


CLS 568/628
TXT Preparing by alkylation of benzene ring:

    Processes under subclass 626 wherein the compound is formed in a reation
    which adds an alkyl group to a benzene ring.


CLS 568/629
TXT Preparing by hydroxylation of benzene ring:

    Processes under subclass 626 which include preparing the compound by
    oxidizing an aromatic starting material in the presence of water whereby
    one or more hydroxy groups are added to a benzene ring.


CLS 568/630
TXT Ether oxygen bonded directly to a benzene ring:

    Compounds under subclass 626 wherein an ether oxygen is bonded directly to
    a carbon of at least one benzene ring.


CLS 568/631
TXT Plural rings containing:

    Compounds under subclass 630 which contain at least two rings.


CLS 568/632
TXT Polycyclo ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 631 which contain a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 568/633
TXT Polyoxy:

    Compounds under subclass 632 which contain two or more oxy groups.


CLS 568/634
TXT Halogen containing:

    Compounds under subclass 632 which contain halogen.


CLS 568/635
TXT Plural benzene rings bonded directly to the same oxygen:

    Compounds under subclass 631 which contain at least two benzene rings
    bonded directly to the same oxygen.


CLS 568/636
TXT Polyoxy:

    Compounds under subclass 635 which contain two or more oxy groups.


CLS 568/637
TXT Halogen containing:

    Compounds under subclass 636 which contain halogen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:





CLS 568/638
TXT Hydroxy containing (H of -OH May be substituted by M):

    Compounds under subclass 636 which contain a hydroxy group.


CLS 568/639
TXT Halogen containing:

    Compounds under subclass 635 which contain halogen.


CLS 568/640
TXT Plural benzene rings bonded directly to the same carbon:

    Compounds under subclass 631 wherein two or more benzene rings are bonded
    directly to the same carbon.


CLS 568/641
TXT Polyoxy and halogen containing:

    Compounds under subclass 640 which contain two or more oxy groups and
    halogen.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:



CLS 568/642
TXT Plural benzene rings bonded directly to each other:

    Compounds under subclass 631 which contain at least two benzene rings
    bonded directly to each other.


CLS 568/643
TXT Polyoxy:

    Compounds under subclass 642 which contain two or more oxy groups.


CLS 568/644
TXT Polyoxy:

    Compounds under subclass 631 which contain two or more oxy groups.


CLS 568/645
TXT Halogen containing:

    Compounds under subclass 644 which contain halogen.


CLS 568/646
TXT Acyclic unsaturation containing:

    Compounds under subclass 644 which contain acetylenic or ethylenic
    unsaturation in a side or connecting chain.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:



CLS 568/647
TXT Halogen containing:

    Compounds under subclass 631 which contain halogen.


CLS 568/648
TXT Polyoxy:

    Compounds under subclass 630 which contain two or more oxy groups.


CLS 568/649
TXT Halogen containing:

    Compounds under subclass 648 which contain halogen.


CLS 568/650
TXT Hydroxy bonded directly to the benzene ring (H of -OH may be substituted by
    M):

    Compounds under subclass 648 which contain a hydroxy group bonded directly
    to the benzene ring.


CLS 568/651
TXT Plural ether oxygens bonded directly to the benzene ring:

    Compounds under subclass 650 wherein two or more ether oxygens are bonded
    directly to the benzene ring.


CLS 568/652
TXT Ether oxygen is ortho to the hydroxy:

    Compounds under subclass 650 wherein an ether oxygen is ortho to a hydroxy
    group on the benzene ring.


CLS 568/653
TXT Guaiacol per se or salt thereof:

    The definite compound under subclass 652 of the structure:

    wherein the H of the -OH may be replaced by a substituted or unsubstituted
    ammonium ion or a Group IA or IIA light metal.


CLS 568/654
TXT Acyclic unsaturation containing:

    Compounds under subclass 648 which contain an acetylenically or
    ethylenically unsaturated side chain.

    (1)     Note.  Examples provided for herein are:



CLS 568/655
TXT Halogen containing:

    Compounds under subclass 630 which contain halogen.


CLS 568/656
TXT Halogen bonded directly to the benzene ring:

    Compounds under subclass 655 wherein the halogen is bonded directly to the
    benzene ring.


CLS 568/657
TXT Aryl-oxy-alkenyl or aryl-oxy-alkynyl:

    Compounds under subclass 630 wherein the etherifying group is ethylenically
    or acetylenically unsaturated.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 568/658
TXT Acyclic hydrocarbyl group bonded directly to the benzene ring:

    Compounds under subclass 630 which contain an acyclic substituent of
    hydrogen and carbon.


CLS 568/659
TXT Plural rings containing:

    Compounds under subclass 626 which contain at least two rings.


CLS 568/660
TXT Polyoxy:

    Compounds under subclass 659 which contain two or more oxy groups.


CLS 568/661
TXT Halogen containing:

    Compounds under subclass 659 which contain halogen.


CLS 568/662
TXT Polyoxy:

    Compounds under subclass 626 which contain two or more oxy groups.


CLS 568/663
TXT Halogen containing:

    Compounds under subclass 626 which contain halogen.


CLS 568/664
TXT Plural alicyclic rings containing:

    Compounds under subclass 579 which contain at least two alicyclic rings.


CLS 568/665
TXT Polycyclo ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 664 which contain a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 568/666
TXT Alicyclic terpenic wherein the number of carbons is a multiple of five:

    Compounds under subclass 579 having an alicyclic ring derived from terpenes
    wherein the number of carbon atoms is a multiple of five.


CLS 568/667
TXT Unsaturated alicyclic ring containing:

    Compounds under subclass 579 containing an unsaturated alicyclic ring.


CLS 568/668
TXT 2,6,6-trialkylcyclohexenyl (e.g., vitamin a derivatives, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 667 which contain a 2,6,6-trialkylcyclohexenyl
    nucleus.


CLS 568/669
TXT Alicyclic ring and halogen containing:

    Compounds under subclass 579 which contain an alicyclic ring and halogen.


CLS 568/670
TXT Alicyclic ring and polyoxy containing:

    Compounds under subclass 579 which contain an alicyclic ring and two or
    more oxy groups.


CLS 568/671
TXT Acyclic:

    Compounds under subclass 579 which do not include a ring.


CLS 568/672
TXT Polyoxy:

    Compounds under subclass 671 which contain two or more oxy groups.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass
    are metal complexed ethers, e.g.,
    Mg(OCH3)2.3CH3OH.


CLS 568/673
TXT Unsaturated:

    Compounds under subclass 672 which are acetylenically or ethylenically
    unsaturated.


CLS 568/674
TXT Halogen containing:

    Compounds under subclass 673 which contain halogen.


CLS 568/675
TXT Hydroxy containing (H of -OH may be substituted by M):

    Compounds under subsclass 673 which contain a hydroxy group.


CLS 568/676
TXT Halogen containing:

    Compounds under subclass 672 which contain halogen.


CLS 568/677
TXT Fluorine:

    Compounds under subclass 676 which contain fluorine.


CLS 568/678
TXT Hydroxy containing (H of -OH may be substituted by M):

    Compounds under subclass 672 which contain a hydroxy group.


CLS 568/679
TXT Polyether:

    Compounds under subclass 678 which contain two or more ether groups.


CLS 568/680
TXT Polyhydroxy:

    Compounds under subclass 678 which contain two or more hydroxy groups.


CLS 568/681
TXT Halogen containing:

    Compounds under subclass 671 which contain halogen.


CLS 568/682
TXT Purification or recovery:

    Processes under subclass 681 which include separating the compound from
    impurities or from the reaction mixture.


CLS 568/683
TXT Fluorine:

    Compounds under subclass 681 which contain fluorine.


CLS 568/684
TXT Additional diverse halogen containing:

    Compounds under subclass 683 which contain an additional different halogen.


CLS 568/685
TXT Unsaturated:

    Compounds under subclass 683 which are acetylenically or ethylenically
    unsaturated.


CLS 568/686
TXT Unsaturated:

    Compounds under subclass 681 which are acetylenically or ethylenically
    unsaturated.


CLS 568/687
TXT Unsaturated:

    Compounds under subclass 671 which are acetylenically or ethylenically
    unsaturated.


CLS 568/688
TXT Preparing by reacting an acyclic acetylenically unsaturated compound and an
    organic hydroxy containing compound (H of -OH may be substituted by M):

    Processes under subclass 687 which include preparing the compound by
    reacting an acyclic acetylenically unsaturated compound and an organic
    hydroxy containing compound.


CLS 568/689
TXT Preparing by reacting an acyclic ethylenically unsaturated compound and an
    organic hydroxy containing compound (H of -OH may be substituted by M):

    Processes under subclass 687 which include preparing the compound by
    reacting an acyclic ethylenically unsaturated compound and an organic
    hydroxy containing compound.


CLS 568/690
TXT Noble metal containing catalyst utilized:

    Processes under subclass 689 wherein a noble metal containing catalyst in
    any form is utilized.


CLS 568/691
TXT Preparing from an acetal or ketal:

    Processes under subclass 687 which include preparing the compound by
    reacting an acetal or ketal.


CLS 568/692
TXT Preparing by dehydrohalogenation:

    Processes under subclass 687 which include preparing the compound by
    removing hydrogen and halogen from a starting material.


CLS 568/693
TXT Purification or recovery:

    Processes under subclass 687 which include separating the compound from
    impurities or from the reaction mixture.


CLS 568/694
TXT Preparing by hydration of an olefin:

    Processes under subclass 671 wherein an olefin is hydrated to produce the
    compound.


CLS 568/695
TXT Metal containing catalyst utilized:

    Processes under subclass 694 wherein a catalyst containing a metal in any
    form is utilized.


CLS 568/696
TXT Sulfuric acid utilized:

    Processes under subclass 694 wherein sulfuric acid is utilized in the
    reaction.


CLS 568/697
TXT Preparing by reacting an olefin and an organic hydroxy containing compound
    (H of -OH may be substituted by M):

    Processes under subclass 671 which include preparing the compound by
    reacting an olefin and an organic hydroxy containing compound.


CLS 568/698
TXT Preparing by dehydration of an organic hydroxy containing compound (H of
    -OH may be substituted by M):

    Processes under subclass 671 which include preparing the compound by
    removing water from an organic hydroxy containing compound.


CLS 568/699
TXT Purification or recovery:

    Processes under subclass 671 which include separating the compound from
    impurities or from the reaction mixture.


CLS 568/700
TXT Hydroxy containing (H of- OH may be replaced by a group IA or IIA light
    metal):

    Compounds under subclass 300 which contain an -OH group or an -OM group,
    wherein M is a metal selected from Group I or II of the Periodic Table
    having a specific gravity less than 4 (i.e., Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs or Be, Mg,
    Ca, Sr, and Ba).

    (1)     Note.  -OM containing compounds are classified with the
    corresponding hydroxy containing compounds in the absence of a specific
    subclass providing for them. Subclass 851 is a specific subclass which
    provides for -OM containing compounds and, consequently, there are not any
    -OM containing compounds in subclasses 852 through 923.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    556,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 1+ for compounds containing an
    O-heavy metal, i.e., a metal having a specific gravity greater than 4
    (e.g., radium, etc.), or 170+ for an O-aluminum group.


CLS 568/701
TXT With preservative or stabilizer:

    Products under sublcass 700 wherein the -OH or -OM containing compound is
    mixed with a preserving agent which functions to prevent physical or
    chemical change.


CLS 568/702
TXT Benzene ring containing compound preserved:

    Products under subclass 701 wherein the compound preserved contains a
    benzene ring.


CLS 568/703
TXT Acyclic polycarbon hydrocarbyl group bonded directly to the benzene ring:

    Compounds under subclass 702 wherein an acyclic group which consists of
    hydrogen and carbon, with at least two carbons, is bonded directly to the
    benzene ring.


CLS 568/704
TXT Nitrogen containing:

    Compounds under subclass 700 which contain nitrogen.


CLS 568/705
TXT Benzene ring containing:

    Compounds under subclass 704 which contain a benzene ring.


CLS 568/706
TXT Phenols (H of -OH may be replaced by a group IA or IIA light metal):

    Compounds under subclass 705 wherein the benzene ring has an -OH or an -OM
    group bonded directly to the ring.


CLS 568/707
TXT Plural rings containing:

    Compounds under subclass 706 which contain at least two rings.

    (1)     Note.  Some examples of compounds provided for by this subclass are:



CLS 568/708
TXT Purification or recovery:

    Processes under subclass 706 which include separating the compound from
    impurities or from the reaction mixture.


CLS 568/709
TXT Halogen containing:

    Compounds under subclass 706 which contain halogen.


CLS 568/710
TXT Polynitro:

    Compounds under subclass 706 which contain

    at least two -NO2 groups.


CLS 568/711
TXT Dinitro:

    Compounds under subclass 710 which contain

    exactly two -NO2 groups.


CLS 568/712
TXT Polyhydroxy nitro containing:

    Compounds under subclass 704 which contain more than one -OH or -OM group
    and at least

    one -NO2 group.


CLS 568/713
TXT Halogen containing:

    Compounds under subclass 704 which contain halogen.


CLS 568/714
TXT Hydrophenanthrene containing:

    Compounds under subclass 700 which contain a hydrophenanthrene ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are the abietyl alcohols of known
    chemical structure.

    (2)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is:



CLS 568/715
TXT Benzene ring containing:

    Compounds under subclass 700 which contain a benzene ring.


CLS 568/716
TXT Phenols (H of -OH may be replaced by a group IA or IIA light metal:

    Compounds under subclass 715 wherein the -OH or -OM group is bonded
    directly to the benzene ring, forming a phenolic nucleus.


CLS 568/717
TXT Polyphenols:

    Compounds under subclass 716 which contain at least two benzene rings each
    having -OH or -OM bonded directly thereto (i.e., at least two phenolic
    nuclei).

    (1)     Note.  An example of the compounds provided for herein is:


CLS 568/718
TXT Three or more rings containing:

    Compounds under subclass 717 which contain at least three rings.

    (1)     Note.  Some examples of compounds provided for herein are:

    (2)     Note.  The third ring may be another phenol but is not required to
    be.


CLS 568/719
TXT Polycyclo ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 718 which contain a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  Some examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 568/720
TXT Three or more phenols containing:

    Compounds under subclass 718 containing at least three benzene rings each
    having -OH or -OM bonded directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  Exemplary of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 568/721
TXT Alicyclic ring containing:

    Compounds under subclass 718 wherein one of the rings is alicyclic.

    (1)     Note.  Some examples of compounds provided for herein are:





CLS 568/722
TXT Two phenols bonded directly to the same carbon:

    Compounds under subclass 717 which include two phenolic nuclei bonded
    directly to the same carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Exemplary of compounds provided for herein is:


CLS 568/723
TXT Identical phenols:

    Compounds under subclass 722 wherein the two phenolic nuclei are identical
    (i.e., gem bivalent phenols).


CLS 568/724
TXT Purification or recovery:

    Processes under subclass 723 which include separating the compound from
    impurities or from the reaction mixture.


CLS 568/725
TXT Halogen containing:

    Processes under subclass 724 wherein the compound separated contains
    halogen.


CLS 568/726
TXT Halogen containing:

    Compounds under subclass 723 which contain halogen.


CLS 568/727
TXT Preparing from a phenol and an aldehyde or ketone:

    Processes under subclass 723 wherein the compound is produced by reacting a
    phenol with an aldehyde or ketone.


CLS 568/728
TXT Isopropylidene diphenol produced:

    Processes under subclass 727 wherein the compound produced is:


CLS 568/729
TXT Two phenols bonded directly to two different carbons of an acyclic chain:

    Compounds under subclass 717 wherein two phenolic nuclei are bonded to
    different carbons of an acyclic chain.


CLS 568/730
TXT Two phenols bonded directly to each other:

    Compounds under subclass 717 wherein two phenolic nuclei are bonded
    directly to each other.

    (1)     Note.  Exemplary of compounds provided for in this subclass is:


CLS 568/731
TXT Additional ring containing:

    Compounds under subclass 716 which contain an additional carbocyclic ring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    717,    for compounds which contain plural phenolic nuclei.


CLS 568/732
TXT Polycyclo ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 731 which contain a polycyclo ring system.

    (1)     Note.  The phenolic nucleus may or may not be one of the cyclos in
    the polycyclo ring system.

    (2)     Note.  An example of compounds provided for herein is:



CLS 568/733
TXT Tricyclo ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 732 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    three rings.

    (1)     Note.  Some examples of compounds provided for by this subclass are:



CLS 568/734
TXT Bicyclo ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 732 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    two rings.

    (1)     Note.  Some examples of compounds provided for herein are:



CLS 568/735
TXT Naphthols:

    Compounds under subclass 734 wherein the bicyclo ring system consists of
    the phenolic nucleus and another benzene ring.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    719,    for a polycyclo ring system having plural phenolic nuclei as cyclos.


CLS 568/736
TXT Acyclic hydrocarbyl group bonded directly to the bicyclo ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 735 wherein an acyclic group which consists of
    hydrogen and carbon is bonded directly to the naphthol ring system.


CLS 568/737
TXT Halogen or polyhydroxy containing:

    Compounds under subclass 735 which include halogen or at least two -OH
    groups.


CLS 568/738
TXT Preparing from aryl sulfonate:

    Processes under subclass 735 wherein the compound is formed by reacting an
    aryl sulfonate.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are processes which include the replacement
    of a sulfo or sulfonate group by an -OH or OM group, e.g., the fusion of a
    sulfonic acid of naphthalene with caustic soda.


CLS 568/739
TXT Preparing from compound which includes halogen bonded directly to a benzene
    ring:

    Processes under subclass 735 wherein the compound is formed by reacting an
    aromatic halide.


CLS 568/740
TXT Preparing by dehydrogenation:

    Processes under subclass 735 which include forming the compound by
    dehydrogenation.


CLS 568/741
TXT Preparing from peroxide or preparing by oxidation:

    Processes under subclass 735 which include preparing the compound from a
    peroxide or by oxidation.


CLS 568/742
TXT Purification or recovery:

    Processes under subclass 735 which include separating the naphthol from
    impurities or from the reaction mixture.


CLS 568/743
TXT The additional ring is six-membered:

    Compounds under 731 wherein the additional ring is six-membered.


CLS 568/744
TXT The additional ring is benzene:

    Compounds under subclass 743 wherein the additional six-membered ring is
    benzene.


CLS 568/745
TXT Halogen containing:

    Compounds under subclass 744 which contain halogen.


CLS 568/746
TXT Rings bonded directly to each other:

    Compounds under subclass 745 wherein two rings are bonded directly to each
    other.


CLS 568/747
TXT Rings bonded directly to each other:

    Compounds under subclass 744 wherein two rings are bonded directly to each
    other.


CLS 568/748
TXT Purification or recovery:

    Processes under 747 which include separating the compound from impurities
    or from the reaction mixture.


CLS 568/749
TXT Purification or recovery:

    Processes under subclass 716 which include separating the phenol from
    impurities or from the reaction mixture.


CLS 568/750
TXT From mixture of phenols:

    Processes under subclass 749 wherein the phenols are separated from a
    mixture of two or more phenols.


CLS 568/751
TXT Plural phenols recovered separately:

    Processes under subclass 750 wherein at least two phenols are separately
    recovered from the mixture.


CLS 568/752
TXT Three or more phenols recovered:

    Processes under subclass 751 wherein at least three phenols are recovered
    from the mixture.


CLS 568/753
TXT Of polyhydroxy phenol:

    Processes under subclass 749 wherein the compound separated contains plural
    -OH groups.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for processes directed to separating
    such compounds as resorcinol, pyrogallol, hydroquinone, catechol, etc.


CLS 568/754
TXT Of Phenol prepared by cleavage of hydroperoxide or other peroxide:

    Processes under subclass 749 wherein the compound separated is one from the
    reaction mixture obtains by the catalytic decomposition of a hydroperoxide
    or some other peroxide.


CLS 568/755
TXT Of halogen containing phenol:

    Processes under subclass 749 wherein the compound separated contains
    halogen.


CLS 568/756
TXT Of phenol having acyclic polycarbon hydrocarbyl group bonded directly to
    the benzene ring:

    Processes under subclass 749 wherein the compound separated has an acyclic
    group which consists of hydrogen and carbon, with at least two carbons,
    bonded directly to the benzene ring.


CLS 568/757
TXT Nitrogen or phosphorus containing compound utilized:

    Processes under subclass 749 wherein a nitrogen or phosphorus containing
    compound is utilized in the separation.


CLS 568/758
TXT Sorbent material utilized:

    Processes under subclass 749 wherein the separation is made by adsorption
    or absorption.


CLS 568/759
TXT From substance which includes sulfur or a sulfur containing compound:

    Processes under subclass 749 wherein the compound is separated from a
    substance which includes sulfur in elemental or compound form.


CLS 568/760
TXT From ammoniacal liquor:

    Processes under subclass 749 wherein the compound is separated from a
    substance which includes ammonia.


CLS 568/761
TXT From oil or tar derived from fossil fuel or wood:

    Processes under subclass 749 wherein the compound is separated from oil or
    tar derived from fossil fuel or wood.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are processes of separating phenols from
    petroleum and tars from coke ovens or from the destructive distillation of
    wood, lignite, or coal.


CLS 568/762
TXT Alkali metal hydroxide utilized:

    Processes under subclass 761 wherein a hydroxide of a Group IA metal is
    employed in the separation.


CLS 568/763
TXT Polyhydroxy (h of -oh may be replaced by a group IA or IIA light metal):

    Compounds under subclass 716 which include an additional -OH or -OM group.


CLS 568/764
TXT Hydroxymethyl group containing:

    Compounds under subclass 763 which contain a -CH2-OH group.

    (1)     Note.  Exemplary of the compounds provided for herein is:



CLS 568/765
TXT Halogen containing:

    Compounds under subclass 763 which contain halogen.


CLS 568/766
TXT Acyclic polycarbon hydrocarbyl group bonded directly to the benzene ring:

    Compounds under subclass 763 wherein an acyclic group which consists of
    hydrogen and carbon, with at least two carbons, is bonded directly to the
    benzene ring.


CLS 568/767
TXT Preparing from nitrogen containing compound:

    Processes under subclass 763 which include reacting a nitrogen containing
    compound to produce the compound.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for processes, for example, of
    preparing hydroquinone by the hydrogenation of a nitroenzene to an amino
    product and the hydrolysis of the amino product to hydroquinone.


CLS 568/768
TXT Preparing by cleavage of hydroperoxide or other peroxide:

    Processes under subclass 763 which include preparing the compound by the
    catalytic decomposition of a hydroperoxide or some other peroxide.


CLS 568/769
TXT Preparing from aryl sulfonate:

    Processes under subclass 763 wherein the compound is formed by reacting an
    aryl sulfonate.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are processes which include the replacement
    of sulfo or sulfonate groups, e.g., the alkali fusion of sodium
    meta-benzene disulfonate to prepare resorcinol.


CLS 568/770
TXT Preparing from compound which includes halogen bonded directly to a benzene
    ring:

    Processes under subclass 763 which include reacting a compound which
    includes a halogen bonded directly to a benzene ring to produce the
    compound.


CLS 568/771
TXT Preparing by oxidation:

    Processes under subclass 763 which include preparing the compound by
    oxidation.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for processes wherein monohydric
    phenols are oxidized by hydrogen peroxide, organic peracids, or other
    oxidizing agents, in the presence of a catalyst.


CLS 568/772
TXT Preparing by reduction or dehydrogenation (e.g., by hydrogenation, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 763 which include preparing the compound by
    reduction or by dehydrogenation.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are processes wherein functional groups,
    such as keto groups, in aromatic compounds are subjected to reduction by
    reducing agents such as zinc dust, caustic soda solution, or hydrogen in
    the presence of a hydrogenation catalyst; or wherein hydrogenated
    polyhydroxy carbocyclic compounds are dehydrogenated to polyhydroxy phenols.


CLS 568/773
TXT Preparing hydroquinones from an acetylene and carbon monoxide:

    Processes under subclass 763 which include


    reacting an acetylene with carbon monoxide to form a compound which
    includes:



CLS 568/774
TXT Halogen containing:

    Compounds under subclass 716 which contain halogen.


CLS 568/775
TXT Fluorine or iodine:

    Compounds under subclass 774 wherein the halogen is fluorine or iodine.


CLS 568/776
TXT Three or more halogens bonded directly to the ring:

    Compounds under subclass 774 which contain at least three halogens bonded
    directly to the ring.


CLS 568/777
TXT Preparing by hydrolysis:

    Processes under subclass 776 which include preparing the compound by
    hydrolysis.


CLS 568/778
TXT Preparing by hydrolysis:

    Processes under subclass 774 which include preparing the compound by
    hydrolysis.


CLS 568/779
TXT Preparing by halogenation:

    Processes under subclass 774 which include preparing the compound by
    treating a phenol with a halogenating agent.


CLS 568/780
TXT Acyclic polycarbon hydrocarbyl group bonded directly to the benzene ring:

    Compounds under subclass 716 wherein an acyclic group which consists of
    hydrogen and carbon, with at least two carbons, is bonded directly to the
    benzene ring.


CLS 568/781
TXT Isopropyl or isopropenyl group:

    Compounds under subclass 780 which contain an isopropyl or isopropenyl
    group.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are, for example, thymol, carvacrol, and
    4-methyl-6-isopropenyl phenol.


CLS 568/782
TXT Preparing by reduction (e.g., by hydrogenation, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 781 which include preparing the compound by
    reduction.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein, for example, are processes of reacting a
    compound with hydrogen or a hydrogen yielding substance in the presence of
    a catalyst.


CLS 568/783
TXT Preparing by isomerization:

    Processes under subclass 780 wherein the compound is produced by
    transformation or rearrangement of the elements of a starting compound
    without adding or taking away any elements.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are processes of isomerizing, for example, a
    para-alkyl phenol into an ortho-alkyl phenol.


CLS 568/784
TXT Tertiary butyl group:

    Compounds under subclass 780 which contain a tertiary butyl group.


CLS 568/785
TXT Preparing by catalytic alkylation:

    Processes under subclass 784 wherein the compound is formed in a reaction
    which adds an alkyl group to the starting material in the presence of a
    catalyst.


CLS 568/786
TXT Silicon containing catalyst:

    Processes under subclass 785 wherein the catalyst contains silicon in any
    form.


CLS 568/787
TXT Boron containing catalyst:

    Processes under subclass 785 wherein the catalyst contains boron in any
    form.


CLS 568/788
TXT Sulfur containing catalyst:

    Processes under subclass 785 wherein the catalyst contains sulfur in any
    form.


CLS 568/789
TXT Heavy Metal or aluminum containing catalyst:

    Processes under subclass 785 wherein the catalyst contains aluminum or a
    metal having a specific gravity greater than 4 in any form.


CLS 568/790
TXT Preparing by catalytic alkylation:

    Processes under subclass 780 wherein the compound is formed in a reaction
    which adds an alkyl group to the starting material in the presence of a
    catalyst.


CLS 568/791
TXT Silicon containing catalyst:

    Processes under subclass 790 wherein the catalyst contains silicon in any
    form.


CLS 568/792
TXT Boron containing catalyst:

    Processes under subclass 790 wherein the catalyst contains boron in any
    form.


CLS 568/793
TXT Sulfur containing catalyst:

    Processes under subclass 790 wherein the catalyst contains sulfur in any
    form.


CLS 568/794
TXT Heavy metal or aluminum containing catalyst:

    Processes under subclass 790 wherein the catalyst contains aluminum or a
    metal having a specific gravity greater than 4 in any form.


CLS 568/795
TXT Preparing from aryl sulfonate:

    Processes under subclass 716 wherein the phenol is formed by reacting an
    aryl sulfonate.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are processes which include the replacement
    of a sulfo or sufonate group on a benzene ring by an -OH or -OM group,
    e.g., the fusion of a sulfonic acid of benzene with caustic alkali.


CLS 568/796
TXT Preparing from an compound which includes halogen bonded directly to a
    benzene ring:

    Processes under subclass 716 which include reacting a compound which
    includes a halogen bonded directly to a benzene ring to produce the
    compound.


CLS 568/797
TXT Catalyst utilized:

    Processes under subclass 796 wherein a catalyst is utilized.


CLS 568/798
TXT Preparing by cleavage of hydroperoxide or other peroxide:

    Processes under subclass 716 which include the decomposition of a
    hydroperoxide or some other peroxide to form the compound.


CLS 568/799
TXT Preparing by reduction or dehydrogenation (e.g., by hydrogenation, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 716 which include forming the compound by
    reduction or dehydrogenation.


CLS 568/800
TXT Preparing by oxidation:

    Processes under subclass 716 which include preparing the compound by
    oxidation.


CLS 568/801
TXT Of compound which contains a benzene ring and a -COO- group:

    Processes under subclass 800 wherein the benzene ring containing starting
    compound also contains a


CLS 568/802
TXT Molecular oxygen utilized:

    Processes under subclass 800 wherein molecular oxygen is used.


CLS 568/803
TXT Peroxide or peracid utilized:

    Processes under subclass 800 wherein a peroxide or a peracid is used.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are oxidation processes using, for example,
    hydrogen peroxide or an organic carboxylic peracid oxidizing agent.


CLS 568/804
TXT Preparing by methylation:

    Processes under subclass 716 wherein the compound is formed in a reaction
    which adds a methyl group to the starting material.


CLS 568/805
TXT Preparing by dealkylation:

    Processes under subclass 716 which include preparing the compound by the
    removal of an alkyl group.


CLS 568/806
TXT Preparing by pyrolsis, (e.g., by cracking, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 716 which include preparing the compound by
    decomposing an aromatic compound by heat.


CLS 568/807
TXT Additional ring containing:

    Compounds under subclass 715 which contain at least one other carbocyclic
    ring.


CLS 568/808
TXT Polycyclo ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 807 which contain a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 568/809
TXT Plural benzene rings bonded directly to the same carbon:

    Compounds under subclass 807 wherein plural benzene rings are bonded
    directly to the same carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Some examples of compounds provided for by this subclass are:





CLS 568/810
TXT Purification or recovery:

    Processes under subclass 715 which include separating the compound from
    impurities or from the reaction mixture.


CLS 568/811
TXT Polyhydroxy (H of -OH may be replaced by a group IA or IIA light metal):

    Compounds under subclass 715 which contain at least two -OH or -OM groups.


CLS 568/812
TXT Halogen containing:

    Compounds under 715 which contain halogen.


CLS 568/813
TXT Acyclic carbon to carbon unsaturation containing:

    Compounds under subclass 715 which contain an acetylenically or
    ethylenically unsaturated side-chain.


CLS 568/814
TXT Preparing by reduction (e.g., by hydrogenation, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 715 which include preparing the compound by
    reduction.

    (1)     Note.    Included herein are processes, for example, of reacting an
    aromatic compound containing a reducible functional group such as an
    aldehyde, ketone, ester, or acid chloride.


CLS 568/815
TXT Preparing from a peroxide or preparing by oxidation:

    Processes under subclass 715 which include preparing the compound from a
    peroxide or by oxidation.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are processes directed to the catalytic
    decomposition of organic hydroperoxides.


CLS 568/816
TXT Plural alicylic rings containing:

    Compounds under subclass 700 which contain at least two alicyclic rings.


CLS 568/817
TXT Polycyclo ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 816 which contain a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 568/818
TXT Adamantane ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 817 which contain a ring system of the structure:



CLS 568/819
TXT Bicyclo ring system:

    Compounds under subclass 817 wherein the polycyclo ring system consists of
    two rings.


CLS 568/820
TXT The two cyclos share at least three ring carbons (i.e., bridged ring):

    Compounds under subclass 819 wherein the two rings share at least three
    carbons.

    (1)     Note.  Some examples of compounds provided for herein are:





CLS 568/821
TXT Containing alicyclic ring having at least seven members:

    Compounds under subclass 700 which contain an alicyclic ring having seven
    or more ring carbons.


CLS 568/822
TXT Six-membered alicyclic ring containing:

    Compounds under subclass 700 which include a six-membered alicyclic ring.


CLS 568/823
TXT Unsaturation in the ring:

    Compounds under subclass 822 wherein the ring is partially unsaturated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    715+,   for hydroxy compounds which contain a completely unsaturated
    six-membered ring.


CLS 568/824
TXT 2,6,6-trialkylcyclohexenyls (e.g., vitamin a, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 823 which contain a 2,6,6-trialkylcyclohexenyl
    nucleus.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound provided for herein is vitamin A:



CLS 568/825
TXT Single hydroxy containing (H of -OH may be replaced by a group IA or IIA
    light metal):

    Compounds under subclass 823 which have only one -OH or -OM group.


CLS 568/826
TXT The hydroxy is attached indirectly to the ring:

    Compounds under subclass 825 wherein the -OH group is attached indirectly
    to the ring.


CLS 568/827
TXT Terpineol:

    Compounds under subclass 826 having the structure:

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are processes for the preparation of
    unsubstituted terpineol.


CLS 568/828
TXT Carbon to carbon unsaturation in substituent:

    Compounds under subclass 822 having an acetylenically or ethylenically
    unsaturated substituent attached to the ring.


CLS 568/829
TXT Menthols (H of -OH may be replaced by a group IA or IIA light metal):

    Compounds under subclass 822 wherein a methyl group and an isopropyl group
    are bonded directly to the ring.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are the isomers and addition compounds of
    menthol.

    (2)     Note.  An example of compounds provided for herein is:


CLS 568/830
TXT Preparing by reduction (e.g., hydrogenation, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 829 which include preparing the compound by
    reduction.

    (1)     Note.  Exemplary of processes provided for herein is the
    hydrogenation of thymol to menthol.


CLS 568/831
TXT Methylol cyclohexane (H of -OH may be replaced by a group IA or IIA light
    metal):

    Compounds under subclass 822 which include hydroxymethyl (HO.CH2-) bonded
    directly to cyclohexane.


CLS 568/832
TXT Hydroxy bonded directly to the ring (e.g., terpin hydrate, etc.)(H of -OH
    may be replaced by a group IA or IIA light metal):

    Compounds under subclass 822 wherein the -OH or -OM group is bonded
    directly to the ring.


CLS 568/833
TXT Cyclohexane polyol (e.g., inositol, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 832 wherein at least two -OH groups are bonded
    directly to the ring.


CLS 568/834
TXT Polycarbon alkyl group containing:

    Compounds under subclass 832 which include an alkyl group having more than
    two carbons.


CLS 568/835
TXT Cyclohexanol per se:

    Compounds under subclass 832 which contain the structure:

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are processes for the preparation of
    unsubstituted cyclohexanol.


CLS 568/836
TXT Preparing by oxidation:

    Processes under subclass 835 which include preparing the compound by
    oxidation.


CLS 568/837
TXT Boron containing material utilized:

    Processes under subclass 836 wherein a compound containing boron is
    utilized in the process.


CLS 568/838
TXT Five-membered alicyclic ring containing:

    Compounds under subclass 700 which include a five-membered alicyclic ring.


CLS 568/839
TXT Four-membered alicyclic ring containing:

    Compounds under subclass 700 which include a four-membered alicyclic ring.


CLS 568/840
TXT Acyclic:

    Compounds under subclass 700 which do not include a ring.


CLS 568/841
TXT Halogen Containing:

    Compounds under subclass 840 which include halogen.


CLS 568/842
TXT Flourine containing:

    Compounds under subclass 841 wherein the halogen is fluorine.


CLS 568/843
TXT Carbon to carbon unsaturation containing:

    Compounds under subclass 842 which include acetylenic or ethylenic
    unsaturation.


CLS 568/844
TXT Polyhydroxy or polyhalogen (H of -OH may be replaced by a group IA of IIA
    light metal):

    Compounds under subclass 841 which include at least two -OH or -OM groups
    or at least two halogens.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    841,    for compounds containing only one -OH group and one halogen.


CLS 568/845
TXT Carbon to carbon unsaturation containing:

    Compounds under subclass 844 which include acetylenic or ethylenic
    unsaturation.


CLS 568/846
TXT Preparing from aldehyde or ketone:

    Processes under subclass 844 which include reacting an aldehyde or ketone
    to prepare the compound.


CLS 568/847
TXT Preparing from alkenyl halide:

    Processes under subclass 844 which include reacting a compound containing a
    halogen and ethylenic unsaturation to form the compound.


CLS 568/848
TXT Preparing from alkenol:

    Processes under subclass 844 which include reacting a compound containing
    an -OH group and ethylenic unsaturation to form the compound.


CLS 568/849
TXT Carbon to carbon unsaturation containing:

    Compounds under subclass 841 which include acetylenic or ethylenic
    unsaturation.


CLS 568/850
TXT Preparing from ethylenically unsaturated compound:

    Processes under subclass 841 which include reacting a compound containing
    ethylenic unsaturation to form the compound.


CLS 568/851
TXT Oxy bonded directly to a group IA or IIA light metal:

    Compounds under subclass 840 which include an -OM group bonded to carbon
    wherein M is a metal selected from Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs, Be, Mg, Ca, Sr, or Ba.


CLS 568/852
TXT Polyhydroxy:

    Compounds under subclass 840 which contain at least two -OH groups.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for such compounds as glycerine, the
    glycols, the pinacones, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    554,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 156+ and 160 for processes which
    state that they are for the production of glycerine but are for no more
    than the hydrolysis or saponification of fats or fatty oils.


CLS 568/853
TXT Polyalkylol substituted alkane (e.g., pentaerythritol, trimethylolethane,
    etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 852 wherein two or more alkylol groups (-R-OH,
    where R is alkyl) are bonded directly to carbon, which carbon has no
    hydrogen bonded directly thereto.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:


CLS 568/854
TXT Purification or recovery:

    Processes under subclass 853 which include separating the compounds from
    impurities or from the reaction mixture.


CLS 568/855
TXT Acetylenically unsaturated:

    Compounds under subclass 852 which include acetylenic unsaturation.


CLS 568/856
TXT Purification or recovery:

    Processes under subclass 855 which include separating the compound from
    impurities or from the reaction mixture.


CLS 568/857
TXT Ethylenically unsaturated:

    Compounds under subclass 852 which include ethylenic unsaturation.


CLS 568/858
TXT Preparing by alcoholysis, hydrolysis, or saponification of an ester:

    Processes under subclass 852 which include treating an ester with a
    compound which contains -OH (e.g., alcohol, water, NaOH, etc.)to form the
    compound.


CLS 568/859
TXT Preparing by hydrolysis or saponification of alkyl polyhalide or halohydrin:

    Processes under subclass 852 which include treating an alkyl polyhalide or
    a halohydrin with a compound which contains -OH (e.g., water, NaOH, etc.)
    to prepare the compound.


CLS 568/860
TXT Preparing by hydroxylation at point of ethylenic unsaturation:

    Processes under subclass 852 which include oxidizing an ethylenically
    unsaturated compound in the presence of water whereby hydroxy groups are
    added at a point of unsaturation.


CLS 568/861
TXT Preparating by reduction (e.g., by hydrogenation, etc):

    Processes under subclass 852 which include preparing the compound by
    reduction.


CLS 568/862
TXT Of aldehyde or ketone:

    Processes under subclass 861 wherein an aldehyde or a ketone is reduced.


CLS 568/863
TXT Of polyhydroxy aldehyde or polyhydroxy ketone (e.g., of carbohydrate,
    glyceraldehyde, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 862 wherein the aldehyde or ketone reduced
    contains at least two -OH groups.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for processes of reducing such
    substances as glucose, sucrose, maltose, etc.


CLS 568/864
TXT Of compound containing a -COO- group:

    Processes under subclass 861 wherein an


    compound containing a O- group is reduced.


CLS 568/865
TXT Of ether:

    Processes under subclass 861 wherein an ether is reduced.


CLS 568/866
TXT Preparing from ether:

    Processes under subclass 852 which include reacting an ether to prepare the
    compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    865,    for processes wherein an ether is reduced to form a polyhydroxy
    compound.


CLS 568/867
TXT From alkylene oxide:

    Processes under subclass 866 wherein the ether is cyclic having a ring
    which consists of a single oxygen and two or more carbons.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    866,    for processes wherein a substituted alkylene oxide, e.g.,
    epichlorohydrin, is reacted to prepare the compound.


CLS 568/868
TXT Purification or recovery:

    Processes under subclass 852 which include separating the compound from
    impurities or from the reaction mixture.


CLS 568/869
TXT Of glycerol:

    Processes under subclass 868 wherein glycerol is separated.


CLS 568/870
TXT Ion exchange or sorbent material utilized:

    Processes under subclass 869 which include utilizing an ion exchange
    material or a material capable of absorbing or adsorbing impurities or
    undesired components from glycerol.


CLS 568/871
TXT Of spent ethylene glycol from polyester production:

    Processes under subclass 868 wherein the compound is separated from the
    excess or spent ethylene glycol used in the preparation of polyester.


CLS 568/872
TXT Ion exchange or sorbent material utilized:

    Processes under subclass 868 which include utilizing an ion exchange
    material or a material capable of absorbing or adsorbing impurities or
    undesired components from the compound.


CLS 568/873
TXT Acetylenically unsaturated:

    Compounds under subclass 840 which include acetylenic unsaturation.


CLS 568/874
TXT Preparing from carbonyl containing compound:

    Processes under subclass 873 which include
    reacting a compound which contains a




CLS 568/875
TXT Terpenic, wherein the number of carbons is a multiple of five (e.g.,
    linalool, farnesol, etc.):

    Compounds under subclass 840 which are derived from terpenes wherein the
    number of carbon atoms is a multiple of five.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for by this subclass are
    citronellol and geraniol.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    816+,   821, 822+, and 838, for alicyclic OH containing compounds derived
    from terpenes.


CLS 568/876
TXT Preparing from carbonyl containing compound:

    Processes under subclass 840 which include
    reacting a compound which contains a




CLS 568/877
TXT By alcoholysis, hydrolysis, or saponification of an ester:

    Processes under subclass 876 which include treating an ester with a
    compound which contains -OH (e.g., alcohol, water, NaOH, etc.) to form the
    compound.


CLS 568/878
TXT From aldehyde or ketone:

    Processes under subclass 876 wherein the carbonyl containing compound is an
    aldehyde or ketone.


CLS 568/879
TXT By reaction of aldehyde with olefin (i.e., by prins reaction):

    Processes under subclass 878 which include reacting an aldehyde with an
    olefin.


CLS 568/880
TXT By reduction (e.g., by hydrogenation, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 878 wherein the aldehyde or ketone is reduced.


CLS 568/881
TXT Catalyst utilized:

    Processes under subclass 880 wherein a catalyst is utilized.


CLS 568/882
TXT Including hydroformylation:

    Processes under subclass 881 which include the synthesis of the aldehyde or
    ketone by the addition of carbon monoxide and hydrogen to compounds
    containing ethylenic unsaturation.


CLS 568/883
TXT Supported hydrogenation catalyst utilized:

    Processes under subclass 882 wherein a catalyst deposited or supported on a
    carrier material is used in a hydrogenation step.


CLS 568/884
TXT By reduction (e.g., by hydrogenation, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 876 wherein the


     containing compound is reduced.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, the reduction of
    carboxylic acid esters with alkali metals.


CLS 568/885
TXT Catalyst utilized:

    Processes under subclass 884 wherein a catalyst is utilized.


CLS 568/886
TXT Preparing by alcoholysis, hydrolysis, or saponification of ester of
    polybasic inorganic acid:

    Processes under subclass 840 which include treating an ester of a polybasic
    inorganic acid with a compound which contains -OH (e.g., alcohol, water,
    NaOH, etc.)to form the compound.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for processes wherein an olefin is
    first converted into an alkyl ester and subsequently subjected to
    hydrolysis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    895+,   for processes wherein olefins are hydrated with water, for example,
    steam, in the presence of a polybasic inorganic acid.


CLS 568/887
TXT Boric acid:

    Processes under subclass 886 wherein boric acid or a boric acid ester is
    utilized.


CLS 568/888
TXT Hydroxy compound produced has from one to six carbons:

    Processes under subclass 886 wherein the -OH containing compound produced
    has from one to six carbon atoms.


CLS 568/889
TXT Isopropanol:

    Processes under subclass 888 wherein the -OH containing compound produced
    is isopropanol.


CLS 568/890
TXT Ethanol:

    Processes under subclass 888 wherein the -OH containing compound produced
    is ethanol.


CLS 568/891
TXT Preparing by hydrolysis of organic halide:

    Processes under subclass 840 wherein an organic halide is hydrolized to
    yield the compound.


CLS 568/892
TXT Ethylenically unsaturated hydroxy compound produced:

    Processes under subclass 891 wherein an ethylenically unsaturated -OH
    containing compound is produced.


CLS 568/893
TXT Including producing the organic halide reactant:

    Processes under subclass 891 which include the synthesis of the organic
    halide.

    (1)     Note.  Subjecting an olefin to the action of a hydrogen halide and
    reacting the resulting halide with water is an example of processes
    provided for herein.


CLS 568/894
TXT Additional organic compound in reaction mixture:

    Processes under subclass 891 wherein the reaction mixture contains an
    organic compound in addition to the reactants.

    (1)     Note.  The additional organic compound in the reaction mixture may
    control the hydrolysis reaction or undesirable side reactions.


CLS 568/895
TXT Preparing by hydration of olefin:

    Processes under subclass 840 wherein an olefin is hydrated to produce an
    -OH containing compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    886,    for processes wherein an olefin is first converted into an ester of
    a polybasic inorganic acid which ester is subsequently hydrolyzed.


CLS 568/896
TXT Supported catalyst utilized:

    Processes under subclass 895 wherein a catalyst deposited or supported on a
    carrier is utilized.


CLS 568/897
TXT Aluminum containing catalyst utilized:

    Processes under subclass 895 wherein a catalyst containing aluminum, in any
    form, is utilized.


CLS 568/898
TXT Phosphorus containing catalyst utilized:

    Processes under subclass 895 wherein a catalyst containing phosphorus, in
    any form, is utilized.


CLS 568/899
TXT Sulfur containing catalyst utilized:

    Processes under subclass 895 wherein a catalyst containing sulfur, in any
    form, is utilized.


CLS 568/900
TXT Heavy metal containing catalyst:

    Processes under subclass 895 wherein a catalyst containing a metal having a
    specific gravity greater than 4 is utilized.


CLS 568/901
TXT Chromium, molybdenum, or tungsten:

    Processes under subclass 900 wherein the heavy metal is chromium,
    molybdenum, or wolfram.


CLS 568/902
TXT Preparing from organic hydroxy containing reactant:

    Processes under subclass 840 which include forming the compound from an
    organic -OH containing reactant.


CLS 568/902.2
TXT Processes under subclass 902 of forming the acyclic hydroxy containing
    compound having fewer carbons in the chain.  An example is, forming ethanol
    by reacting carbon monoxide and hydrogen with methanol.


CLS 568/903
TXT By reduction, dehydration, or cleavage:

    Processes under subclass 902 wherein the organic -OH containing reactant is
    subjected to reduction, dehydration, or cleavage.


CLS 568/904
TXT Olefin reacted with the hydroxy containing reactant (e.g., preparing by
    telomerization, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 902 wherein the organic -OH containing reactant is
    reacted with an olefin.


CLS 568/905
TXT By condensation (e.g., guerbet reaction, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 902 which include combining two or more -OH
    containing reactants to form a single -OH containing compound.


CLS 568/906
TXT By isomerization:

    Processes under subclass 902 wherein the compound is produced by
    transformation or rearrangement of an -OH containing reactant into an
    isomeric form.

    (1)     Note.  The transformation of 3-methyl-3-buten-1-ol into
    2-methyl-3-buten-2-ol is an example of processes provided for herein.


CLS 568/907
TXT Preparing from ether:

    Processes under subclass 840 which include reacting an ether to produce the
    compound.


CLS 568/908
TXT Ethylenically unsaturated hydroxy compound produced:

    Processes under subclass 907 wherein an ethylenically unsaturated -OH
    containing compound is produced.


CLS 568/909
TXT Preparing by carbonylation (e.g., by hydroformylation, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 840 which include reacting an olefin with carbon
    monoxide to produce the compound.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are processes wherein an olefin is reacted
    with carbon monoxide and hydrogen in the presence of a catalyst.


CLS 568/909.5
TXT Compounds under subclass 840 which include carbon to carbon double bond.


CLS 568/909.8
TXT Processes under subclass 840 which include reacting an organic peroxide or
    a organic ozonide comound to produce the compound.


CLS 568/910
TXT Preparing by oxidation:

    Processes under subclass 840 wherein the compound is produced by oxidation.


CLS 568/910.5
TXT Of hydrocarbon mixtures:

    Processes under subclass 910 wherein a mixture of hydrocarbons is oxidized.


CLS 568/911
TXT Of metal containing compound:

    Processes under subclass 910 wherein a metal containing reactant is
    oxidized.


CLS 568/912
TXT Boron containing catalyst utilized:

    Processes under subclass 910 wherein a catalyst containing boron, in any
    form, is utilized.


CLS 568/913
TXT Purification or recovery:

    Processes under subclass 840 which include separating the compound from
    impurities or from the reaction mixture.


CLS 568/914
TXT By reduction (e.g., by hydrogenation, etc.):

    Processes under subclass 913 which include reduction to effect the
    separation.


CLS 568/915
TXT By oxidation:

    Processes under subclass 913 which include oxidation to effect the
    separation.


CLS 568/916
TXT By dehydration:

    Processes under subclass 913 which include dehydration to effect the
    separation.


CLS 568/917
TXT By sorption:

    Processes under subclass 913 wherein the separation is made by adsorption
    or absorption.


CLS 568/918
TXT By plural liquid phase separation:

    Processes under subclass 913 wherein the -OH containing compound is
    recovered from a plural phase liquid mixture in which one phase has a high
    concentration of the -OH containing compound and another phase has a low
    concentration of the -OH containing compound.


CLS 568/919
TXT Alkali metal containing compound in one phase:

    Processes under subclass 918 wherein one phase contains or is treated with
    a Group IA metal containing compound.


CLS 568/920
TXT Alkali or alkaline earth metal containing compound utilized:

    Processes under subclass 913 wherein a compound containing a Group IA or
    IIA metal is used.


CLS 568/921
TXT Alkali metal hydroxide:

    Processes under subclass 920 wherein the compound is a Group IA metal
    hydroxide.


CLS 568/922
TXT Heavy metal or aluminum containing compound utilized:

    Processes under subclass 913 wherein a compound containing aluminum or a
    metal having a specific gravity greater than 4 is employed.


CLS 568/923
TXT By crystallization or hydroxy compound or by forming hydroxy containing
    addition compound:

    Processes under subclass 913 which include crystallizing the hydroxy
    compound or combining the hydroxy compound with a material to form an
    addition compound from which the desired -OH containing compound is
    recovered.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein, for example, are processes of purifying on
    -OH containing compound by first reacting it with an aldehyde to form an
    acetal, isolating and saponifying the acetal into a pure -OH containing
    compound.


CLS 568/924
TXT Compounds under subclass 300 which contain a -NO2 group or an aci form
    thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    926,    for aci forms of nitro compounds.


CLS 568/925
TXT Products under subclass 924 wherein the compound is mixed with a preserving
    or stabilizing agent which functions to prevent physical or chemical change.


CLS 568/926
TXT Compounds under subclass 924 which contain the group,

    OR

    where R is hydrogen, an organic radical or a Group IA or IIA light metal;
    or nitro compounds which contain a Group IA or IIA light metal.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are compounds wherein a nitro
    group has been converted into an acid form, the so-called aci form which is
    not a stable form, and is usually further converted into the salt form as
    in the following equation.



            An example of other compounds provided for herein is:



CLS 568/927
TXT Compounds under subclass 924 which contain a benzene ring.


CLS 568/928
TXT Compounds under subclass 927 which contain at least two rings.


CLS 568/929
TXT Compounds under subclass 928 which contain a polycyclo ring system.


CLS 568/930
TXT Compounds under subclass 929 which contain at least two -NO2 groups.


CLS 568/931
TXT Compounds under subclass 928 which contain at least two -NO2 groups.


CLS 568/932
TXT Compounds under subclass 927 which contain at least two -NO2 groups.


CLS 568/933
TXT Compounds under subclass 932 which contain halogen.


CLS 568/934
TXT Compounds under subclass 932 which contain only one methyl group and at
    least two nitros directly bonded to the benzene ring, with no other
    substituents on the ring.


CLS 568/935
TXT Compounds under subclass 934 which contain methyl group in the one position
    and nitro groups in positions two, four and six of the benzene ring.


CLS 568/936
TXT Compounds under subclass 927 which contain halogen.


CLS 568/937
TXT Compounds under subclass 936 wherein the halogen is directly bonded to the
    benzene ring.


CLS 568/938
TXT Compounds under subclass 937 wherein at least two halogens are directly
    bonded to the benzene ring.


CLS 568/939
TXT Compounds under subclass 927 wherein the -NO2 group is directly bonded to
    the

    benzene ring.


CLS 568/940
TXT Compounds under subclass 939 which contain a methyl group bonded directly
    to the benzene ring.


CLS 568/941
TXT Compounds under subclass 924 which contain an alicyclic polycyclo ring
    system.


CLS 568/942
TXT Compounds under subclass 924 which contain a six-membered alicyclic ring.


CLS 568/943
TXT Compounds under subclass 924 which do not include a ring.


CLS 568/944
TXT Compounds under subclass 943 which contain at least two -NO2 groups.


CLS 568/945
TXT Compounds under subclass 944 which contain halogen.


CLS 568/946
TXT Compounds under subclass 943 which contain halogen.


CLS 568/947
TXT Compounds under subclass 943 which consist of an alkane substituted by one
    -NO2  group only.


CLS 568/948
TXT The compounds under subclass 947 of the formula:

    CH3 NO2.


CLS 568/949
TXT Compounds under subclass 300 which contain a -NO group.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of compounds provided for herein are:



CLS 568/950
TXT Processes of oxidizing nonaromatic hydrocarbons; or purification or
    recovery of the products of such processes:

    Processes under subclass 300 which are directed to the oxidation on
    nonaromatic hydrocarbons or processes which include separating the products
    of the oxidation from impurities or from the reaction mixture.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are processes of oxidizing hydrocarbon
    mixtures, e.g., petroleum, fractional distillates of petroleum, paraffin,
    pine oil, turpentine, etc., to produce a mixture of oxygen-containing
    products, such as a mixture of esters, acids, aldehydes, ketones, and
    alcohols.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass provides for producing oxygenated hydrocarbon
    mixtures broadly or mixtures of oxygen-containing compounds, such as a
    mixture of aldehydes, ketones, and alcohols, by oxidizing nonaromatic
    hydrocarbons.  Oxidation of hydrocarbons to produce a specific compound is
    classified with the compound.  In the situation where a "limited class of
    compounds" is produced, the patent is classified with that class of
    compounds and is assumed to be an acyclic compound. Some examples of such
    "limited class of compounds" are aldehydes, ketones, alcohols, and
    carboxylic acids. If "acids" are made by oxidizing nonaromatic hydrocarbon
    mixtures it is assumed an acyclic carboxylic acid results. Thus, if a
    process sets forth production of acids by oxidizing nonaromatic
    hydrocarbons, it is classified as an acyclic carboxylic acid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    398.8,  for production of acyclic ketones by oxidation of hydrocarbon
    mixtures.

    469.9,  for production of acyclic aldehydes by oxidation of hydrocarbon
    mixtures.

    910.5,  for production of acyclic alcohols by oxidation of hydrocarbon
    mixtures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 3+ for oxidation
    treatment of a mineral oil substance, such as asphalt, where the object is
    to modify its general properties by oxidizing a portion thereof so that a
    heterogeneous mixture of hydrocarbons and oxidized hydrocarbons result.

    554,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 132+ for producing fats, fatty oils,
    ester-type waxes or higher fatty acids by oxidation of hydrocarbon mixtures.

    560,    Organic Compounds, subclass 241.1 for producing carboxylic acid
    esters by oxidation of hydrocarbon mixtures.

    562,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 512.2 and 512.4 for producing acyclic
    carboxylic acids by oxidation of hydrocarbon mixtures.


CLS 568/951
TXT Peroxy containing material utilized:

    Processes under subclass 950 wherein a compound containing a -O-O- group is
    utilized in any way, e.g., as a reactant, catalyst, initiator, etc.


CLS 568/952
TXT Nitrogen or silicon containing compound utilized:

    Processes under subclass 950 wherein a compound containing nitrogen or
    silicon is utilized in any way, e.g., as a reactant, catalyst, solvent, etc.


CLS 568/953
TXT Plural stages each having oxidation:

    Processes under subclass 950 which include two or more oxidation steps.


CLS 568/954
TXT Liquid phase oxidation:

    Processes under subclass 950 wherein the oxidation is carried out in the
    liquid state.


CLS 568/955
TXT Catalyst utilized:

    Processes under subclass 950 which include employment of a catalyst.


CLS 568/956
TXT Heavy metal containing catalyst:

    Processes under subclass 955 wherein a catalyst containing a metal having a
    specific gravity greater than four is utilized.


CLS 568/957
TXT Manganese containing catalyst:

    Processes under subclass 956 wherein the catalyst contains manganese.


CLS 568/958
TXT Purification or recovery:

    Processes under subclass 950 which include separating the compound(s) from
    impurities or from the reaction mixture.


CLS 568/959
TXT Oxidized hydrocarbons of undetermined structure:

    Products under subclass 300 which include a mixture of oxygen containing
    hydrocarbons, such as esters, acids, aldehydes, ketones and alcohols.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for product mixtures which are
    usually produced by the processes classified in subclasses 950+ of this
    class.  See (1) Note and (2) Note of subclass 950 for what is to be
    considered a mixture and what is to be thought of as a compound for
    classification purposes in this subclass (959) as well as subclasses
    950-958.


CLS 570/
TTL ORGANIC COMPOUNDS -- PART  OF THE CLASS 532-570 SERIES

CLS 570/101
TXT HALOGEN CONTAINING:

    Compound under Class 532, subclass 1 which contain an atom of halogen.

    (1)     Note.  Due to hierarchical position of this subclass, compounds
    hereunder contain only carbon and halogen, or carbon hydrogen and halogen.

    (2)     Note.  The patents found in this particular subclass relate
    primarily to processes of preparing saturated halogen containing compounds
    not specifically provided for below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 157.15+ for
    chemical preparation of a compound which contains carbon and halogen or
    carbon, hydrogen, and halogen by utilizing wave energy; and subclass 169
    for chemical preparation of a compound which contains carbon and halogen or
    carbon, hydrogen, and halogen by utilizing an electrostatic field or
    electrical discharge.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, subclasses
    206-225 and 255 for the destruction or containment of organic hazardous or
    toxic waste containing halogen, sulfur, oxygen, nitrogen, or metals.


CLS 570/102
TXT With preservative or stabilizer:

    Halogen containing compound under subclass 101 containing an additional
    ingredient intended to prevent or decrease chemical or physical change of
    the compound.

    (1)     Note.  A preserved compound claimed  as having a utility provided
    for in the composition classes is classified with the composition.However,
    a mere recital of the destabilizing effect or medium guarded against, e.g.,
    "in contact with aluminum", etc., will not prevent placement of a patent in
    this or indented subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177+,   211, 238+, or 262+, for a process of increasing the stability of
    the appropriate compound by purification.

    264,    for a process of treating a compound of this class to increase
    stability which does not involve purification or the use of an added agent
    which remains as part of the composition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    134,    Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Solids, for a process of cleaning
    using a halogenated solvent, particularly subclass 31 for vapor degreasing.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 364 for solvents generally which contain
    halogen containing compounds; subclasses 397+ for compositions which
    inhibit physical or chemical change, per se; and subclass 68 for
    refrigerants which contain halogen containing compounds.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 41+ for manipulative ongoing methods
    of storage or protections of a liquid, particularly subclass 42 for
    preventing evaporation.

    510,    Cleaning Compositions for Solid Surfaces, Auxiliary Compositions
    Therefor, or Processes of Preparing the Compositions, subclasses 201+,
    245+, and 405 for solvent-type cleaning compositions which may include
    halogen-containing compounds, particularly subclasses 204+, 254+, 273, and
    412, as well as other appropriate subclasses.


CLS 570/103
TXT To prevent or reduce polymerization:

    Compositions under subclass 102 wherein the stabilizer or preservative
    prevents the halogen containing compound from reacting with itself to
    produce a high molecular weight, usually solid product.

    (1)     Note.  There must be a positive disclosure or claim that
    polymerization is being prevented or reduced.  In cases of doubt, the
    patent will be placed below and cross-referenced to this or indented
    subclasses if desired.


CLS 570/104
TXT Nitrogen bonded directly to oxygen in preservative or stabilizer:

    Composition under subclass 103 wherein the preservative or stabilizer
    contains an atom of nitrogen bonded directly to oxygen, e.g., nitro,
    nitros, amine oxide, or oxime, etc.


CLS 570/105
TXT Oxygen single bonded directly to benzene ring in preservative or stabilizer:

    Composition under subclass 103 wherein the preservative or stabilizer
    contains an atom of oxygen bonded directly to a benzene ring, e.g.,
    phenols, phenol ether, etc.


CLS 570/106
TXT Sulfur containing preservative or stabilizer:

    Composition under subclass 103 wherein the preservative or stabilizer
    contains sulfur.


CLS 570/107
TXT Acetylenic unsaturation containing preservative or stabilizer:

    Composition under subclass 102 wherein the preservative or stabilizer
    contains a carbon to carbon triple bond.


CLS 570/108
TXT Hydroxy, bonded directly to carbon, or ether containing:

    Composition under subclass 107 wherein the preservative or stabilizer also
    contains a hydroxy group bonded directly to carbon or an ether group in
    addition to a carbon to carbon triple bond, e.g., acetylenic alcohol, etc.


CLS 570/109
TXT Nitrogen containing hetero ring in preservative or stabilizer:

    Composition under subclass 102 wherein the preservative or stabilizer
    contains a ring having three or more members and containing at least one
    atom of each of carbon and nitrogen and optionally oxygen, sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium as the only other ring members.


CLS 570/110
TXT Acyclic nitro containing preservative or stabilizer:

    Composition under subclass 102 wherein the preservative or stabilizer
    contains a nitro group bonded directly to a carbon atom which is not part
    of a ring.


CLS 570/111
TXT Nitrogen, other than as ammonia or the ammonium ion in preservative or
    stabilizer:

    Composition under subclass 102 wherein the preservative or stabilizer
    contains nitrogen in a form other than ammonia, per se, or ammonium ion,
    e.g., amines.


CLS 570/112
TXT Nitrile:

    Composition under subclass 111 wherein the preservative or stabilizer
    contains nitrogen triply bonded to carbon.


CLS 570/113
TXT Imine (e.g., hydrazone, oxime, etc.):

    Composition under subclass 111 wherein the preservative or stabilizer
    contains nitrogen doubly bonded to carbon.


CLS 570/114
TXT Oxygen containing hetero ring in preservative or stabilizer:

    Composition under subclass 102 wherein the preservative or stabilizer
    contains a ring having three or more members and containing at least one
    atom each of carbon and oxygen and optionally sulfur, selenuim, or
    tellurium as the only other ring members.


CLS 570/115
TXT Hetero ring containing plural ring oxygens:

    Composition under subclass 114 wherein the ring contained in the
    preservative or stabilizer contains two or more atoms of oxygen.


CLS 570/116
TXT Oxirane ring:

    Composition under subclass 114 wherein the ring contained in the
    preservative or stabilizer contains only three atoms, two of which are
    carbon and one of which is oxygen.


CLS 570/117
TXT Carbonyl containing preservative or stabilizer:

    Composition under subclass 102 wherein the preservative or stabilizer
    contains carbon doubly bonded to oxygen.


CLS 570/118
TXT Hydroxy, bonded to carbon, or ether containing preservative or stabilizer:

    Composition under subclass 102 wherein the preservative or stabilizer
    contains hydroxy bonded directly to carbon or an oxygen atom bonded
    directly to two carbon atoms by single bonds.


CLS 570/119
TXT Phenolic:

    Composition under subclass 118 wherein a carbon atom bonded to the hydroxy
    or ether oxygen is part of a benzene ring.


CLS 570/120
TXT Sulfur containing preservative or stabilizer:

    Composition under subclass 102 wherein the preservative or stabilizer
    contains sulfur.

    (1)     Note.  The sulfur may be in any form including organic and
    inorganic compounds, e.g., mercaptan, sodium sulfite, etc.


CLS 570/121
TXT Hydrocarbon, halocarbon or halohydrocarbon preservative or stabilizer:

    Composition under subclass 102 wherein the stabilizer contains carbon and
    hydrogen only, carbon and halogen only, or carbon hydrogen, and halogen
    only.


CLS 570/122
TXT Acyclic carbon to carbon unsaturation containing:

    Composition under subclass 121 wherein the hydrocarbon, halocarbon, or
    halohydrocarbon preservative or stabilizer contains carbon to carbon
    unsaturation which is not part of a ring.


CLS 570/123
TXT Fluorine containing:

    Compound under subclass 101 containing at least one atom of fluorine, and a
    process for the manufacture or treatment of such compound not classified
    elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass primarily contains patents drawn to the
    production of saturated fluorine containing compounds by methods not
    provided for below.


CLS 570/124
TXT Product:

    Compound under subclass 123.

    (1)     Note.  In order to be classified in this or indented subclasses, a
    patent must contain a claim to a compound classified hereunder.


CLS 570/125
TXT Polymer or unsaturated monomer:

    Compound under subclass 125 wherein two or more unsaturated molecules are
    added together through the unsaturation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    526,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 249 for polymers of
    this type which are synthetic resins.


CLS 570/126
TXT Fluorine is sole halogen:

    Compound under subclass 125 wherein the only halogen present is fluorine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    526,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 250+ for polymers
    of this type which are synthetic resins.


CLS 570/127
TXT Benzene ring containing:

    Compound under subclass 124 which contains at least one benzene ring.


CLS 570/128
TXT Acyclic unsaturation containing:

    Compound under subclass 127 which contain carbon to carbon unsaturation
    which is not part of a ring.


CLS 570/129
TXT Plural carbocyclic rings containing:

    Compound under subclass 127 which contains at least two carbocyclic rings,
    at least one of which is a benzene ring.


CLS 570/130
TXT Plural carbocyclic rings containing:

    Compound under subclass 124 which contains two or more carbocyclic rings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    552,    Organic Compounds, subclass 653 for fluorinated derivatives of
    Vitamin D compounds, cholecalciferols, activated 7-dehyrocholesterols,
    dihydrotachysterols, 3-5 cyclovitamin D compounds, etc.


CLS 570/131
TXT Carbocyclic ring contains six carbon atoms:

    Compound under subclass 124 which contains a ring consisting of six and
    only six carbon atoms.


CLS 570/132
TXT Carbocyclic ring contains four carbon atoms:

    Compound under subclass 124 which contains a ring consisting of four and
    only four carbon atoms.


CLS 570/133
TXT Carbocyclic ring contains three carbon atoms:

    Compound under subclass 124 which contains a ring consisting of three and
    only three carbon atoms.


CLS 570/134
TXT Acyclic:

    Compound under subclass 124 which does not contain a ring.


CLS 570/135
TXT Unsaturated:

    Compound under subclass 134 containing carbon to carbon unsaturation.


CLS 570/136
TXT Fluorine is sole halogen:

    Compound under subclass 135 wherein the only halogen present is fluorine.


CLS 570/137
TXT Bromine or iodine containing:

    Compound under subclass 134 which contain bromine or iodine.


CLS 570/138
TXT Polymerization of unsaturated compound:

    Process under subclass 123 where two or more molecules of an unsaturated
    compound are added together to produce a larger molecule.

    (1)     Note.  The unsaturated molecules added together may be the same
    (homopolymer) of different (copolymer).


CLS 570/139
TXT With chain terminating agent (e.g., telogen, etc.):

    Process under subclass 138 wherein the polymerization is conducted in the
    presence of an agent which terminates the growing polymer chain.These
    agents are often called chain stoppers, chain transfer agents, or telogens,
    etc.


CLS 570/140
TXT From organic compound containing an element other than carbon, hydrogen, or
    halogen:

    Process under subclass 123 wherein a fluorine containing compound is
    prepared in such a way that the source of at least an atom of carbon in the
    compound is an organic compound containing an element other than carbon,
    hydrogen, or halogen.


CLS 570/141
TXT Nitrogen containing:

    Process under subclass 140 wherein the organic compound contains nitrogen.


CLS 570/142
TXT Oxygen containing:

    Process under subclass 140 wherein the organic compound contains oxygen.


CLS 570/143
TXT Preparing benzene ring containing compound:

    Process under subclass 123 wherein a compound containing a benzene ring is
    prepared.


CLS 570/144
TXT Haloalkyl containing compound:

    Process under subclass 143 of preparing a compound containing a benzene
    ring having a substituent containing carbon and halogen which substituent
    is not part of a benzene ring.


CLS 570/145
TXT By substituting halogen for a different halogen in haloalkyl group:

    Process under subclass 144 wherein a halogen in the haloalkyl group is
    exchanged for a different halogen.


CLS 570/146
TXT Forming the benzene ring:

    Process under subclass 143 wherein a benzene ring containing compound is
    prepared from starting material, none of which contains a benzene ring.


CLS 570/147
TXT Substituting halogen for different halogen or hydrogen:

    Process under subclass 143 wherein halogen is exchanged for a different
    halogen or hydrogen.


CLS 570/148
TXT Forming alicyclic ring from benzene ring:

    Process under subclass 123 wherein a benzene ring is converted to an
    alicyclic ring.


CLS 570/149
TXT Forming alicyclic ring from acyclic compound:

    Process under subclass 123 wherein an alicyclic ring is made from starting
    material, none of which contains a ring.


CLS 570/150
TXT Preparing from elemental carbon, carbon oxide, or carbon disulfide:

    Process under subclass 123 wherein the source of at least one atom of
    carbon in the fluorine containing compound is elemental carbon, a carbon
    oxide, or carbon disulfide.


CLS 570/151
TXT Isomerization:

    Process under subclass 123 wherein a fluorine containing compound is
    converted into another containing compound of differing structure but of
    the same empirical formula as the starting compound.


CLS 570/152
TXT Decreasing molecular weight of polymer of indeterminate structure:

    Process under subclass 123 of decreasing the molecular weight of a polymer
    of indeterminate structure, e.g., cracking, etc.

    (1)     Note.  A polymer of indeterminate structure is a substance made by
    adding together two or more smaller molecules and does not consist of a
    single, identifiable molecular species, but rather contains a variety of
    molecules of varying molecular weight which are only identifiable by their
    average properties, e.g., synthetic resins, etc.


CLS 570/153
TXT Preparing unsaturated compound:

    Process under subclass 123 wherein a compound containing carbon to carbon
    unsaturated is prepared.


CLS 570/154
TXT From acetylenically unsaturated compound:

    Process under subclass 153 wherein a reactant contains a carbon to carbon
    triple bond.


CLS 570/155
TXT By dehalogenation or dehydrohalogenation of adjacent carbon atoms in a
    compound:

    Process under subclass 153 wherein carbon to carbon unsaturation is
    obtained in a compound by the removal of hydrogen and halogen from adjacent
    carbon atoms.


CLS 570/156
TXT Catalyst utilized:

    Process under subclass 155 which employs a catalyst.


CLS 570/157
TXT Alkali or alkaline earth metal containing catalyst:

    Process under subclass 156 wherein the catalyst contains an atom of an
    alkali or an alkaline earth metal.


CLS 570/158
TXT Zinc containing catalyst:

    Process under subclass 156 wherein the catalyst contains an atom of zinc.


CLS 570/159
TXT From methane or halomethane:

    Process under subclass 153 wherein a source of carbon in the product is
    methane or a halomethane.


CLS 570/160
TXT Substituting fluorine for a different halogen:

    Process under subclass 153 wherein an atom of fluorine replaces a different
    halogen in the compound.


CLS 570/161
TXT Utilizing halogen fluoride or a mixture of elemental fluorine and another
    elemental halogen:

    Process under subclass 123 wherein a compound of fluorine and another
    halogen or a physical mixture of elemental fluorine with another elemental
    halogen is employed.


CLS 570/162
TXT Utilizing a compound containing silicon and fluorine:

    Process under subclass 123 wherein a compound containing silicon and
    fluorine is employed.


CLS 570/163
TXT Transhalogenation or disproportionation:

    Process under subclass 123 wherein halogen is transferred from one molecule
    of a carbon compound to another.

    (1)     Note.  The transfer may be between unlike molecules or two
    molecules of the same compound.


CLS 570/164
TXT By reacting with hydrogen fluoride:

    Process under subclass 123 wherein the source of fluorine introduced into a
    carbon compound is hydrogen fluoride.


CLS 570/165
TXT Catalyst utilized:

    Process under subclass 164 employing a catalyst.


CLS 570/166
TXT Metal halide containing catalyst:

    Process under subclass 165 wherein the catalyst contains a compound
    containing a metal and halogen.


CLS 570/167
TXT Antimony halide containing catalyst:

    Process under subclass 166 wherein the metal is antimony.


CLS 570/168
TXT Transition metal halide containing catalyst:

    Process under subclass 166 wherein the metal is a transition metal.

    (1)     Note.  The transition metals are elements in which an inner
    electron shell rather than an outer shell is partially filled.In the
    periodic chart they include elements 21 through 30 (scandium through zinc),
    39 through 48 (yttrium through cadinum), 57 through 80 (lathanum through
    mercury), and 89 through 103 (actinium through lawrencium).


CLS 570/169
TXT Metal oxide containing catalyst:

    Process under subclass 165 wherein the catalyst contains a compound which
    contains a metal and oxygen.


CLS 570/170
TXT Substituting halogen for a different halogen:

    Process under subclass 123 wherein a halogen is replaced by a different
    halogen.


CLS 570/171
TXT Increasing the number of carbons in the compound:

    Process under subclass 123 wherein the product compound contains more
    carbon atoms than any reactant.


CLS 570/172
TXT Utilizing unsaturated compound:

    Process under subclass 171 wherein one of the reactants contains carbon to
    carbon unsaturation.


CLS 570/173
TXT Decreasing the number of carbons in the compound (e.g., cracking, etc.):

    Process under subclass 123 wherein all products have less carbon atoms than
    any reactant.


CLS 570/174
TXT Introducing bromine or iodine:

    Process under subclass 123 wherein bromine or iodine is introduced into a
    fluorine containing compound.


CLS 570/175
TXT Utilizing unsaturated compound:

    Process under subclass 123 wherein a compound contains carbon to carbon
    unsaturation.


CLS 570/176
TXT Replacing halogen with hydrogen:

    Process under subclass 123 wherein an atom of halogen is removed and
    replaced by hydrogen.


CLS 570/177
TXT Purification or recovery:

    Process under subclass 123 of purifying or recovering a fluorine containing
    compound.


CLS 570/178
TXT Including distillation:

    Process under subclass 177 wherein the purification or recovery includes
    distillation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, for a process of
    distillation, per se;  see the definition to that class, particularly
    section III, B for the lines between Class 203 and this class (570) where
    combined subject matter is involved.


CLS 570/179
TXT Solid sorbent utilized:

    Process under subclass 177 wherein a solid sorbent is utilized in the
    process.


CLS 570/180
TXT Including extraction with organic liquid:

    Process under subclass 177 which includes extraction with an organic liquid.


CLS 570/181
TXT Product:

    Compound under subclass 101.

    (1)     Note.  In order to be classified in this or indented subclasses, a
    patent must contain a claim to a compound classified hereunder.


CLS 570/182
TXT Benzene ring containing:

    Compound under subclass 181 which contains a benzene ring.


CLS 570/183
TXT Polycyclo ring system:

    Compound under subclass 182 which contains two rings having two or more
    carbon atoms in common.

    (1)     Note.  These systems are often referred to in the art as bridged
    (three or more atoms in common) or fused (two atoms in common).


CLS 570/184
TXT Plural benzene rings bonded directly to the same acyclic carbon or attached
    by an acyclic carbon chain:

    Compound under subclass 182 which contains two or more benzene rings bonded
    directly to the same carbon which is not part of a ring or bonded through
    two or more carbons, none of which is part of a ring.


CLS 570/185
TXT Benzene ring and halogen bonded directly to the same acyclic carbon chain:

    Compound under subclass 182 which contains a benzene ring and a halogen
    bonded directly to a carbon atom which is not part of a ring or a benzene
    ring attached to a halogen atom through a chain of two or more carbon
    atoms, none of which is part of a ring.


CLS 570/186
TXT Alicyclic ring containing:

    Compound under subclass 181 which contain a ring of three or more carbon
    atoms, which ring is not a benzene ring.


CLS 570/187
TXT Polycyclo ring system:

    Compound under subclass 186 which contains a ring system of at least two
    rings which have tow or more carbon atoms in common.

    (1)     Note.  These compounds are usually referred to in the art as fused
    (only two atoms in common) or bridged (three or more atoms in common).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    552,    Organic Compounds, subclass 653 for halogenated derivatives of
    Vitamin D compounds, cholecalciferols, activated 7-dehyrocholesterols,
    dihydrotachysterols, 3-5 cyclovitamin D compounds, etc.


CLS 570/188
TXT Plural rings containing:

    Compound under subclass 186 which contains two or more alicyclic rings.


CLS 570/189
TXT Alicyclic carbon to carbon unsaturation containing:

    Compound under subclass 181 which contains carbon to carbon unsaturation
    which is not part of any ring.


CLS 570/190
TXT Processes of preparing, purifying, or recovering benzene ring containing
    compound:

    Process under subclass 101 wherein a benzene ring containing compound is
    prepared, purified, or recovered.


CLS 570/191
TXT Preparing acyclic haloalkyl group containing compound:

    Process under subclass 190 of preparing a benzene ring containing compound
    which contains a halogen atom bonded indirectly to a benzene ring through
    one or more carbon atoms, none of which is part of a ring.


CLS 570/192
TXT Halo, 1,1-diphenylethane or ring substituted Derivative thereof prepared
    DDT, etc.):

    Process under subclass 191 wherein the compound prepared has the
    1,1-diphenylethane structure, i.e.,



    wherein at least one hydrogen atom is replaced with halogen and in addition
    may have other substituents on the ring carbon atoms.


CLS 570/193
TXT Having acyclic carbon to carbon unsaturation:

    Process under subclass 191 wherein the compound prepared contains carbon to
    carbon unsaturation which is not part of a ring.


CLS 570/194
TXT Bonding haloalkyl group directly to benzene ring:

    Process under subclass 191 wherein an aliphatic carbon atom bonded directly
    or indirectly to halogen is bonded directly to a benzene ring, or wherein
    an aliphatic carbon atom is bonded directly to a benzene ring, a halogen is
    bonded directly or indirectly thereto.


CLS 570/195
TXT Oxygen containing organic compound reactant:

    Process under subclass 194 wherein an oxygen containing compound acts as a
    source of carbon or halogen in the product.


CLS 570/196
TXT Halogenation of acyclic carbon:

    Process under subclass 191 wherein halogen is bonded directly to an acyclic
    carbon atom.


CLS 570/197
TXT Catalyst utilized:

    Process under subclass 196 which employs a catalyst.


CLS 570/198
TXT Halogen containing catalyst:

    Process under subclass 197 wherein the catalyst contains an atom of halogen.


CLS 570/199
TXT Bonding benzene rings to the same acyclic carbon or to an acyclic carbon
    chain:

    Process under subclass 190 wherein plural benzene rings are bonded to the
    same carbon atom which is not part of any ring or are bonded to each other
    through a chain of two or more carbon atoms, none of which is a part of any
    ring.


CLS 570/200
TXT Preparing acyclic carbon to carbon unsaturation containing compound:

    Process under subclass 190 wherein the compound prepared contains carbon to
    carbon unsaturation which is not part of a ring.


CLS 570/201
TXT Oxygen containing organic compound reactant:

    Process under subclass 190 wherein an organic oxygen containing compound is
    a source of carbon or halogen in the product.


CLS 570/202
TXT Isomerization:

    Process under subclass 190 wherein a compound is converted into another
    compound of differing structure but of the same empirical formula as the
    starting compound.


CLS 570/203
TXT Oxyhalogenation:

    Process under subclass 190 wherein an elemental oxygen and hydrogen halide
    are reacted to produce halogen in situ and introduce halogen into a benzene
    ring containing compound.

    (1)     Note.  The hydrogen halide may be introduced, as such, or may be
    produced in situ, for instance, as a by-product.


CLS 570/204
TXT Dehalogenation or dehydrohalogenation:

    Process under subclass 190 wherein a halogen atom or a molecule of hydrogen
    halide is removed from a compound to prepare a compound classified
    thereunder.


CLS 570/205
TXT Of alicyclic ring to prepare benzene ring:

    Process under subclass 204 wherein halogen or hydrogen halide is removed
    from an alicyclic ring to produce a benzene ring.


CLS 570/206
TXT Bonding halogen directly to benzene ring:

    Process under subclass 190 wherein halogen is bonded directly to a carbon
    atom of a benzene ring.


CLS 570/207
TXT Chlorination:

    Process under subclass 206 wherein chlorine is the halogen bonded to a
    benzene ring.


CLS 570/208
TXT Catalyst utilized:

    Process under subclass 207 employing a catalyst.


CLS 570/209
TXT Sulfur containing catalyst:

    Process under subclass 208 wherein the catalyst contains sulfur.


CLS 570/210
TXT Metal halide containing catalyst:

    Process under subclass 208 wherein the catalyst contains an atom of metal
    and an atom of halogen.


CLS 570/211
TXT Purification or recovery:

    Process under subclass 190 wherein a benzene ring containing compound is
    purified or recovered.


CLS 570/212
TXT Forming alicyclic ring from benzene ring:

    Process under subclass 101 wherein a benzene ring is converted to an
    alicyclic ring, e.g., addition chlorination of benzene to produce
    1,2,3,4,5,6-hexachlorocyclohexane.


CLS 570/213
TXT Purification or recovery of 1,2,3,4,5,6-hexachlorocyclohexane (i.e.,
    benzene hexachloride):

    Process under subclass 101 wherein a 1,2,3,4,5,6-hexachlorocyclohexane is
    separated from a mixture or in which impurities are separated from said
    compound.

    (1)     Note.  Many patents in this subclass relate to the separation of
    the various isomers of this compound.


CLS 570/214
TXT Ring formation, ring expansion or contraction or bonding one alicyclic ring
    directly or indirectly to another alicyclic ring:

    Process under subclass 101 wherein a new alicyclic ring is created which
    did not exist in any of the reactants, wherein the number of carbon atoms
    in a ring is increased or decreased, or wherein an alicyclic ring is bonded
    directly or indirectly to another alicyclic ring.


CLS 570/215
TXT Diels-alder reaction:

    Process under subclass 214 wherein a conjugated diene is reacted with
    carbon to carbon unsaturation to produce a new six member carbocyclic ring,
    e.g.,



    (1)     Note.  Either the conjugated diene or the unsaturated compound may
    already be part of a carbocyclic ring, in which case, a polycyclo compound
    results. Also, a triple bond may be employed instead of a double bond, in
    which case, an additional double bond will be found in the product.


CLS 570/216
TXT Processes of preparing, purifying, or recovering unsaturated compound:

    Process under subclass 101 wherein a compound containing carbon to carbon
    unsaturation is prepared, purified, or recovered.


CLS 570/217
TXT From carbon source other than hydrocarbon, halocarbon, or halohydrocarbon:

    Process under subclass 216 wherein at least one atom of carbon in the
    product is derived from a substance other than a compound of carbon and
    hydrogen, carbon and halogen, or a compound of carbon, hydrogen, and
    halogen.


CLS 570/218
TXT Decreasing the number of carbon atoms in the compound:

    Process under subclass 216 wherein the compound formed has fewer carbon
    atoms than a compound which is a source of carbon.


CLS 570/219
TXT Plural diverse reactions in separate zones:

    Process under subclass 216 wherein different reactions are carried out in
    different zones.This subclass requires that at least one different reactant
    is added in a latter zone.

    (1)     Note.  Mere plural addition of more of the same ingredient in a
    subsequent zone, e.g., multistage halogen addition, etc., will not place a
    patent in this or indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  While at least one reaction must produce compound as
    required by subclass 216, the other diverse reaction may be of any type,
    e.g., preparation of halogenating agent by chemical reaction.


CLS 570/220
TXT Dehalogenation or dehydrohalogenation with halogenation in separate zones:

    Process under subclass 219 wherein one step removes an atom of halogen or
    hydrogen and halogen, and another step introduces an atom of halogen.

    (1)     Note.  These steps may take place in any order.


CLS 570/221
TXT Acetylene reactant:

    Process under subclass 220 wherein acetylene is employed in a step in such
    a way that is becomes a source of carbon in the final product.


CLS 570/222
TXT Including oxyhalogenation or oxidation with elemental oxygen:

    Process under subclass 220 wherein one step includes reaction with a
    mixture of elemental oxygen and hydrogen halide whereby halogen is
    generated in situ or in which a step includes oxidation with elemental
    oxygen, e.g., of copper halide melt, etc.


CLS 570/223
TXT Including oxyhalogenation or oxidation with elemental oxygen:

    Process under subclass 219 wherein one step includes reaction with a
    mixture of elemental oxygen and hydrogen halide whereby halogen is
    generated in situ or in which a step includes oxidation with elemental
    oxygen, e.g., of copper halide melt, etc.


CLS 570/224
TXT Oxyhalogenation:

    Process under subclass 216 which includes reaction with a mixture of
    elemental oxygen and hydrogen halide whereby halogen is generated in situ.


CLS 570/225
TXT Liquid medium or inorganic melt utilized:

    Process under subclass 224 wherein the reaction takes place in a liquid
    medium or inorganic melt.


CLS 570/226
TXT Dehydrohalogenation:

    Process under subclass 216 wherein a molecule of hydrogen halide is removed
    from a compound.


CLS 570/227
TXT Catalyst utilized:

    Process under subclass 226 employing a catalyst.


CLS 570/228
TXT Catalyst in liquid phase:

    Process under subclass 227 wherein the catalyst is employed in a liquid
    phase.


CLS 570/229
TXT Including chemical reaction with by-product hydrogen halide:

    Process under subclass 226 wherein a substance is present to react with the
    hydrogen halide removed from the compound.

    (1)     Note.  This substance may be a base which react to form a salt,
    e.g., NaOH or an amine, etc., or an alcohol which reacts to form an alkyl
    halide, etc.


CLS 570/230
TXT Dehalogenation or dehydrogenation:

    Process under subclass 216 wherein an atom of halogen or an atom of
    hydrogen is removed from a compound which is a source of carbon in the
    product.


CLS 570/231
TXT Addition reaction of free halogen or hydrogen halide to carbon to carbon
    unsaturation:

    Process under subclass 216 wherein two atoms of elemental halogen or a
    molecule of hydrogen halide is added to carbon to carbon unsaturation, thus
    decreasing the degree of unsaturation in a compound.

    (1)     Note.  The final product must still contain carbon to carbon
    unsaturation.


CLS 570/232
TXT To triple bond:

    Process under subclass 231 wherein elemental halogen or hydrogen halide is
    added to a triple bond.


CLS 570/233
TXT To acetylene:

    Process under subclass 232 wherein the triple bond containing compound is
    acetylene, per se.


CLS 570/234
TXT Elemental halogen reactant:

    Process under subclass 216 wherein elemental halogen is employed as a
    source of halogen in the product.


CLS 570/235
TXT Metal halide reactant:

    Process under subclass 216 wherein a compound containing metal and halogen
    is employed as a source of halogen in the product.


CLS 570/236
TXT Isomerization:

    Process under subclass 216 wherein a compound is converted into another
    compound of differing structure but of the same empirical formula as the
    starting compound.


CLS 570/237
TXT Increasing the number of carbon atoms in the compound:

    Process under subclass 216 wherein the final product contains more carbon
    atoms in a molecule than any of the reactants.


CLS 570/238
TXT Purification or recovery:

    Process under subclass 216 wherein a compound containing carbon to carbon
    unsaturated is separated from a mixture or in which impurities are
    separated from said compound.


CLS 570/239
TXT Including contact with solid agent:

    Process under subclass 238 wherein the purification or recovery includes a
    step of contacting with a substance which remains solid throughout the
    process and which substance effects purification or recovery, e.g.,
    sorption, etc.


CLS 570/240
TXT Preparing from elemental carbon, inorganic carbide, carbon disulfide, or
    carbon oxide:

    Process under subclass 101 wherein elemental carbon, an inorganic carbide,
    carbon disulfide, or a carbon oxide is employed as a source of carbon in
    the product.


CLS 570/241
TXT Preparing utilizing plural diverse reactions in separate zones:

    Process under subclass 101 wherein different reactions are carried out in
    different zones.This subclass requires that at least one different reactant
    is added in a latter zone.

    (1)     Note.  Mere plural addition of more of the same ingredient in a
    subsequent zone, e.g., multistage halogen addition, etc., will not place a
    patent in this or the indented subclass.

    (2)     Note.  While at least one reaction must produce a compound under
    subclass 101, the other diverse reaction may be any type, e.g., preparation
    of halogenating agent by chemical reaction, etc.


CLS 570/242
TXT Addition reaction of hydrogen chloride to carbon to carbon unsaturation
    with chlorination in separate zone:

    Process under subclass 241 wherein in one zone hydrogen chloride is added
    to carbon to carbon unsaturation and in another zone chlorine replaces
    hydrogen in the same compound.

    (1)     Note.  These reactions may occur in any order.


CLS 570/243
TXT Preparing by oxyhalogenation:

    Process under subclass 101 which includes reaction with a mixture of
    hydrogen halide and elemental oxygen whereby halogen is generated in situ.


CLS 570/244
TXT Liquid medium or inorganic melt utilized:

    Process under subclass 243 wherein the reaction takes place in a liquid
    medium or an inorganic melt.


CLS 570/245
TXT Fixed bed catalyst utilized:

    Process under subclass 243 wherein the catalyst is solid and remains in a
    fixed position relative to the apparatus during the reaction.


CLS 570/246
TXT Preparing by addition of elemental halogen, interhalogen compound, or
    hydrogen halide to carbon to carbon unsaturation:

    Process under subclass 101 wherein elemental halogen, an interhalogen
    compound, or hydrogen halide is added to carbon to carbon unsaturation,
    thus reducing the degree of unsaturation.


CLS 570/247
TXT Catalyst or reaction directing agent utilized:

    Process under subclass 246 including a catalyst which promotes the reaction
    or an agent which causes the addition to take place in a particular way to
    favor the production of one possible product over another.


CLS 570/248
TXT Hydrogen halide reactant:

    Process under subclass 247 wherein hydrogen halide is added to carbon to
    carbon unsaturation.


CLS 570/249
TXT Nonmetallic catalyst or reaction directing agent utilized:

    Process under subclass 248 wherein the catalyst or reaction directing agent
    does not contain any atoms of a metal.


CLS 570/250
TXT Catalyst or reaction directing agent:
    Containing a Group VIII Metal Utilized: Process under subclass 248 wherein
    the catalyst or reaction directing agent contains an atom of a Group VIII
    metal.


CLS 570/251
TXT All reactants in vapor phase:

    Process under subclass 246 wherein all reactants are in the vapor phase in
    the reaction zone.


CLS 570/252
TXT Elemental halogen reactant:

    Process under subclass 101 wherein elemental halogen is employed as a
    source of halogen in the product.


CLS 570/253
TXT Catalyst or reaction directing agent utilized:

    Process under subclass 252 including a catalyst which promotes the reaction
    or an agent which causes the reaction to take place in a particular way to
    favor one possible product over another.


CLS 570/254
TXT Inorganic metal containing catalyst or reaction directing agent utilized:

    Process under subclass 253 wherein the catalyst or reaction directing agent
    contains a metal atom and no organic material.


CLS 570/255
TXT All reactants in vapor phase:

    Process under subclass 252 wherein all reactants are in the vapor phase in
    the reaction zone.


CLS 570/256
TXT Isomerization:

    Process under subclass 101 wherein a compound is converted to another
    compound of differing structure but of the same empirical formula as the
    starting compound.


CLS 570/257
TXT Preparing by increasing the number of carbons in the compound:

    Process under subclass 101 wherein the final product contains more than
    carbon atoms in a molecule than any of the reactants.


CLS 570/258
TXT Preparing by reacting hydrogen halide with a compound which contains
    hydroxy bonded directly to carbon:

    Process under subclass 101 wherein a hydroxy group bonded directly to
    carbon is reacted with hydrogen halide to replace the hydroxy group with
    halogen.


CLS 570/259
TXT Preparing by reacting ether with hydrogen halide:

    Process under subclass 101 wherein an ether is reacted with hydrogen halide
    to replace the oxygen atom with halogen.


CLS 570/260
TXT Preparing by halogen exchange:

    Process under subclass 101 wherein a halogen atom in a compound is replaced
    with a different halogen.


CLS 570/261
TXT Halogen source is a compound other than hydrogen halide:

    Process under subclass 101 wherein a source of halogen in there product is
    a compound other than hydrogen halide, e.g., NH4Cl,etc.

    (1)     Note.  Include hereunder is the transfer of halogen from one
    organic compound to another to produce a product for this class, e.g.,
    transhalogenation, etc.


CLS 570/262
TXT Purification or recovery:

    Process under subclass 101 wherein a halogen containing compound is
    separated from a mixture or in which impurities are separated from said
    compound.


CLS 570/263
TXT Liquid-liquid extraction:

    Process under subclass 262 wherein a substance is transferred from one
    liquid phase to another liquid phase essentially insoluble in the first
    liquid phase.


CLS 570/264
TXT Preservation or stabilization treatment:
    Process of treating a compound under subclass 101 to increase its stability
    or prevent or reduce deterioration.

    (1)     Note.  This process may include contacting with a chemical agent or
    a physical treatment, e.g., heating, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102+,   for a process of adding an agent as a preservative or stabilizer
    which remains with the compound.

    211,    238+ and 262+, for processes of increasing the stability of a
    compound by purification.


CLS 585/
TTL CHEMISTRY OF HYDROCARBON COMPOUNDS

CLS 585/
TXT

    I.      SUBJECT MATTER AND ORGANIZATION OF THIS CLASS

    This class provides for a hydrocarbon compound in a pure or relatively pure
    state and for certain compositions containing hydrocarbons.  Methods for
    making such compounds and compositions by synthesis, blending, etc., and
    certain methods for treating are also included herein.  The scope of this
    class can be readily determined from a review of the "main line" subclasses
    of its schedule. These are arranged, in general, following the principles
    usually applied in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office for hierarchically
    ordering statutory subject matter, that is, more complex subject matter or
    that which exists later in time is generally placed ahead of simpler or
    earlier subject matter.  As applied to chemistry and chemical engineering
    this ordering is generally as follows:

    A.      Materials defined by structure.

    B.      Compositions or mixtures

    C.      Compounds or elements

    D.      Manufacturing processes, e.g., synthesis, etc.

    E.      Nonmanufacturing processes, e.g., purification, etc.

    F.      Manufacturing apparatus

    G.      Nonmanufacturing apparatus

    This class is confined to categories B, C, D, and E of the above list.

    At the heart of this class is the pure compound which consists of carbon
    and hydrogen and no other element and which has a definite empirical
    formula and an unambiguous structural formula.

    The major portion of patents in this class is drawn to processes for
    synthesizing such compound from other materials which are not this exact
    compound, with the intent of recovering the hydrocarbon compound.

    Also included in this class, with some exceptions, is a mixture of
    hydrocarbon compounds, usually closely related in empirical and structural
    formulae, which mixture results from a single synthesis step, or a series
    of steps, which mixture is of utility as a mixture, e.g., a "detergent
    alkylate", a "polymer gasoline", etc.  The exceptions are discussed below.

    This class also includes, again with some exceptions, a composition which
    is a deliberate mixture of various hydrocarbons only, such as a fuel or
    lubricant composition, or a mixture of a hydrocarbon with a nonhydrocarbon
    material, which nonhydrocarbon material is designed to improve the general
    utility of the hydrocarbon.  Thus, the nonhydrocarbon additive may be a
    solvent, a preservative, etc.

    This class also provides, again with certain exceptions, for methods of
    manufacturing compounds and compositions classifiable herein and for
    certain methods of purifying the same or otherwise treating the same.

    II.     LINES WITH MOST OTHER CHEMISTRY CLASSES

    This class is the residual class of all Patent Office classes concerned
    with categories B, C, D, and E listed above. See Class 588, Hazardous or
    Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate subclasses for the
    destruction of hydrocarbon hazardous or toxic waste. The particular subject
    matter of each such class which is provided for in that class, rather than
    in Class 585, is dealt with below and in search notes in individual
    subclasses listed in section IV of this class definition.

    When a patent has a claim to subject matter for one of the categories B to
    E above and another claim to subject matter for another of these
    categories, the patent is assigned as an original to the class which
    provides for the "lowest" lettered category and is cross-referenced to such
    other classes as required by the claims and disclosure.

    When a patent has a claim to subject matter in categories B or C of the
    above list, which subject matter is provided for in this class, and other
    claim to subject matter in this same category which is provided for in
    another class, the patent is placed as an original in the other class and
    cross-referenced to this class.  For example, when one claim is to a solid
    resinous hydrocarbon polymer and another is to a liquid hydrocarbon
    polymer, the patent is classified as an original in the class which
    provides for the solid resinous polymer.

    For a compilation of Patent Office classes dealing with categories B and C
    above, see the definition of subclass 1 below.  For a compilation of Patent
    Office classes dealing with category E above, see the definition of
    subclass 800 below.

    As for category D, a process for manufacturing a composition or a chemical
    compound generally is provided for in the class which would provide for the
    composition or compound, per se, were it to be claimed.  An exception to
    this rule is where another class provides for a particular synthesis
    procedure.  The main classes of this type are the following, in order of
    priority:

    Class 117, Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes for growing therein-defined
    single-crystal of all types of materials, including hydrocarbon.

    Class 201, Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, provides for the
    synthesis of chemical compounds or elements, including hydrocarbons, by
    elevated-temperature processes which leave a solid carbonaceous char, e.g.,
    coke.

    Class 204, Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, for synthesis of
    chemical compounds or elements, including hydrocarbons, by electrical or
    wave energy, as provided for under the Class 204 definition.

    Class 205, Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods
    of Preparing the Compositions, for electrolytic processes, including
    synthesis of chemical compounds or elements.

    Class 435, Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, provides for the
    synthesis of chemical compounds or elements, including hydrocarbons, by
    enzymatic action.

    Class 518, Chemistry:  Fischer-Tropsch Processes; or Purification, or
    Recovery of Products Thereof, provides for the synthesis of chemical
    compounds, including hydrocarbons, by the hydrogenation of carbon oxides.

    If a synthesis process leads to two products, a hydrocarbon and a
    nonhydrocarbon, both of which are intended to be recovered from the
    process, the patent is classified as an original in the class providing for
    the nonhydrocarbon synthesis and cross-referenced to Class 585 when the
    hydrocarbon synthesis is proper for this class.  For example, a process
    which treats an alkyl sulfate to recover both an olefin and sulfuric acid
    is placed in the class providing for sulfuric acid recovery.

    Where a patent contains a claim to a multistep synthesis process for
    producing a nonhydrocarbon intermediate which is converted to a hydrocarbon
    and has another claim for synthesis only of the nonhydrocarbon
    intermediate, the patent is classified as an original in the class
    providing for synthesis of the intermediate, despite the fact that the
    claim for Class 585 is more "comprehensive".

    When a patent has claims only to a multistep process which produces a
    hydrocarbon compound or mixture which would be classified in this class,
    and the final synthesis step is provided for in Classes 195, 201, or 204,
    the patent is classified in that class; where the step provided for in
    those classes is earlier than the final synthesis step, the patent is
    classified in Class 585.

    Where a Class 201 synthesis step is not positively recited, that is,
    synthesis is performed upon mere hydrocarbon products of such step,
    classification is proper in Class 208 when a hydrocarbon mixture is
    obtained and in Class 585 when a relatively pure hydrocarbon compound is
    obtained.

    Where a patent has only category E claims, the above rules do not
    necessarily apply. The complex classification lines which prevail among the
    purification classes are spelled out in the definition of subclass 800.

    III.    LINE WITH CLASS 208

    The subject matter of Class 208, Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, is
    closely related to the subject matter of this class and constitutes a
    subset restricted as to product, feedstocks to the processes, and materials
    recovered from the process.

    Class 208 provides for the treatment of generally liquid (oil) feedstocks
    which have come out of the ground (mineral) or liquid feedstocks of
    nonmineral origin which cannot be readily distinguished from mineral
    feedstocks.  The treatment given such feedstocks must result in a mixture
    of compounds if it is to be classified in Class 208 as a product or a
    process.  Reaction of a Class 208 material with small amounts of nonmineral
    oil hydrocarbons will not take a process out of Class 208, but a claim to a
    product mixture of mineral oil and nonmineral oil material usually will
    serve to assign such product to Class 585.  Conversion of a Class 208
    feedstock to a nonhydrocarbon intermediate and subsequent conversion back
    to a hydrocarbon mixture is provided for in Class 585.  Conversion of a
    mineral oil feedstock to normally gaseous hydrocarbons (C4 or less) and
    reconversion of such gases back to a liquid hydrocarbon compound or mixture
    is provided for in Class 585.

    Besides those hydrocarbon mixtures which have been recovered from the earth
    as a liquid, i.e., petroleum, other feedstocks which qualify a process for
    placement in Class 208 are those mainly hydrocarbon feedstocks derived from
    solid natural products, e.g., coal, wood, asphalt, etc., and
    "Fischer-Tropsch" crudes, that is, those derived from the Fischer-Tropsch
    synthesis which is the subject matter of Class 518, subclass 700.

    The scope of the purification and separation treatments included in Class
    208 differs from those included in Class 583, mainly in that Class 208
    takes its own distillation processes.

    IV.     REFERENCES IN THIS CLASS TO OTHER CLASSES

                                    REFERRED TO
                            IN CLASS 585
                            CLASS DEFINITION

    CLASS   SUBCLASSES      AND SUBCLASSES


    8       438, 439, 646   833

    23      general         812

    23      230+            401, 501, 701, 956

    23      230.6           941

    34      general         800, 812

    44      general         1.14

    48      general         1, 6, 534, 847

    48      214                     487

    48      216+            539

    51      general         1

    62      general         800, 802, 911

    62      8.45+           899

    62      11+                     519, 800

    62      56+                     899, 903

    62      532+            479, 800, 812

    71      general,        1

    73      general         401, 501, 701, 956

    73      23, 863+                825

    75      general, 95,    1

            122+, 228+,

            251+, 257

    95      general         800, 802

    95      43+                     818

    95      90+                     820

    95      149+            833

    95      238                     847

    95      241+            800

    106     general, 11,    1

            239, 285

    110     general         911

    117     general class definition,
                            800,812

    122     general         911

    126     general         911

    127     54                      818

    136     200+            913

    137     general         922

    137     13                      899

    148     240+, 22+, 25   1

    149     general         1, 14

    149     87                      1

    159     general         800, 812

    165     general         911

    201     general         class definition,

                                    240, 800, 801

    203     general         800, 802, 807

    203     30                      832

    203     41                      820

    203     50+                     833

    204     general         class definition,

                                    800

    204     157.15+, 168+   500, 700

    204     513+, 559+      818

    205,    general         class definition,
                            section II.

    208     general         class definition,

                                    1, 800

    208     1                       507, 945

    208     8+                      833, 943

    208     11                      833

    208     14+                     1

    208     20                      9, 502

    208     24+                     502

    208     31+, 33+, 45    833

    208     46                      502

    208     47, 48+         950

    208     133+            350, 400, 709

    208     177+            800

    208     298                     833

    208     308+            800

    208     310                     820

    208     311+            833

    210     general         800, 802

    210     634+            833

    210     634+, 702+      818

    210     634+, 702+,

            348+            718

    210     656+, 660+      820

    210     656+            825

    219     general         911

    236     general         911

    237     general         911

    252     general,                1

                                    class definition,

                                    (5) Note

    252     9+                      1, 7

    252     67+, 70+, 71+   7

    252     182.11          6

    252     259.5, 299.01+          1

            302

    252     319                     718, 818, 833

    252     360                     718, 818

    252     363.5, 367+     1

    252     372+            6

    252     373                     487

    252     378+            1

    252     380+, 397+      2

    252     410+            721

    252     411+            906

    260     general         1, 700

                                    864, 930

    260     96.5                    800, 862

    260     389+            700

    260     448                     328

    260     449+            class definition,

                                    700, 943

    260     449.6           700

    260     707                     800

    260     709+            1, 947

    373     general         911

    406     46 and 197      899

    422     general         1, 921

    423     general         1, 2, 800

    423     210+            800

    423     245.1+          847

    423     265+            1

    423     652+            487

    423     658.5           833

    424     general         1

    424     520+            833

    424     195.1+          833

    426     general         1

    426     425+            833

    430     1                       1

    431     general         911

    432     general         911

    435     general         class definition

    504     101+, 116+      1

    520+    general         1, 17, 500,

                                    502, 510

    526     general         502

    526     77                      518

    526     346                     428

    530-

    570     general         1

    588     general         240, 241


CLS 585/1
TXT PRODUCT BLEND, E.G., COMPOSITION, ETC., OR BLENDING PROCESS, PER SE:

    Subject matter under the class definition which comprises an intentional
    mixture of a hydrocarbon with another material which may be a hydrocarbon
    or a nonhydrocarbon, and process for making such a mixture which does not
    involve any claimed chemical reaction or purification step.

    (1)     Note.  By "intentional" it is meant that at least one of the
    different components of the mixture is present because of a desired effect,
    not merely because the mixture is the normal result of a synthesis process,
    as in polymerization, or is found as such in nature.  Reaction product
    mixtures, per se, are classified in subclasses 16+.

    (2)     Note.  Compositions and mixtures, except for those in this class
    and in Classes 75, 208, 260, (and its daughter classes), 423, and portions
    of Class 252, are generally assigned to a class on the basis of disclosed
    or claimed use.  Where classification is called for in different main
    classes, based upon the components of the composition or claims pertaining
    to a plurality of use, properties, or functions, a patent is assigned as an
    original to that class or portion of a class coming first in the list given
    in the class definition, (5) Note of Class 252. This superiority list is
    not intended as a complete list and will be expanded or added to as the
    relationship between other classes containing compositions is determined.

            The enumeration of classes below, in general, follows the priority
    list of Class 252 and covers some additional classes.  Thus, this
    enumeration is not authoritative insofar as priority of classes is
    concerned.  The definitions of these classes should be studied to determine
    the proper placement of patents therein.

            Class 504, Plant Protecting and Regulating Compositions, subclasses
    116+ provide for plant growth regulating compositions; and subclasses 101+
    provide for a fertilizer containing an insecticide, fungicide, or deodorant.

            Class 424 provides for drug, bio-affecting and body treating
    compositions.  A material, composition, or compound containing a Class 424
    composition to preserve the material, composition, or compound itself from
    biological attack generally is classified with the material, composition,
    or compound.  Residual methods for preserving, disinfecting, or sterilizing
    are in Class 422.

            Class 426 provides for foods, beverages, and other edible
    compositions and certain edible articles and stock materials.

            Class 71, provides for fertilizers.

            Class 208, subclasses 14+ provide for composition made up
    exclusively of components derived from mineral oil (petroleum) and certain
    other feedstocks, as explained in the class definition of Class 208.  Each
    such component may be an entire "crude oil", a complex distillate or
    fraction thereof, a fraction formed by some chemical conversion (e.g.,
    cracking, reforming), solven extraction, or other treatment provided for in
    Class 208. Where, in addition to one or more mineral oil-derived
    components, the composition contains a single definite hydrocarbon or a
    mixture of hydrocarbons not of mineral origin, the composition is
    classified in this class (585).  Exemplary of such compositions for this
    class are gasoline admixed with benzol, hydrocarbons formed by reduction of
    the alcohol and aldehyde fraction produced by the hydrogenation of carbon
    monoxide, naphthalene, isopentane, alkylated benzene, disobutylene,
    anthracene, etc.  A process of separating the mineral oil into fractions,
    one of which may be definite hydrocarbon, followed by treating the various
    fractions to convert them chemically and then blending two or more
    fractions to form the final fuel is classified in Class 208, Mineral Oils:
    Processes and Products, unless there is present a claim to the composition,
    per se, which recites the blend of a mineral oil and a definite hydrocarbon.

            Class 149 provides for explosive and thermic compositions and
    charges.  Subclass 87 provides for such compositions containing free metal
    or metal hydride with a hydrocarbon.

            Class 508, particularly subclasses 110+, provides for lubricants
    which contain nonhydrocarbons. Lubricants which are mixtures of
    hydrocarbons (except for solid synthetic hydrocarbon polymers) are in this
    Class 585 or in Class 208. Lubricants which contain solid synthetic
    hydrocarbon polymers are classified in Class 508.

            Classes 44 and 48 provide for fuels which contain nonhydrocarbon
    components.  Fuels which are all hydrocarbon are in this class (585) or in
    Class 208.

            Class 148 provides in subclasses 240+ and 22+ for certain
    compositions for treating solid metal.  Subclass 25 provides for oleaginous
    fluxing compositions.

            Class 75, Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use
    Therein, Consolidated Metal Powder Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose
    Metal Particulate Mixtures, subclasses 228+ for sintered metal powder
    compositions and subclasses 95 and 257 for certain additives for molten
    metal.

            Class 430, Radiation Imagery Chemistry:  Process, Composition, or
    Product, Thereof for compositions and articles defined in terms of their
    chemical composition which are useful in forming images by the impingement
    of radiation thereon, e.g., photography, etc.

            Class 252 provides in subclasses other than those listed above or
    below for special utility compositions.

            Class 106 provides for a composition which is in fluent or solid
    noncoherent form and which is adapted for coating or impregnating and for
    change to a less fluent or a solid coherent form by setting (e.g.,
    concrete, plaster, etc.), chemical reaction, removal of solvent,
    solidification from molten state, etc., and fillers and pigments for its
    own and some other compositions.  Subclass 11 provides for a
    hydrocarbon-containing polish; subclass 239 provides for a coating or
    plastic composition containing a fatty oil and a hydrocarbon; and subclass
    285 for such composition containing a hydrocarbon.

            Class 51 provides for abrading compositions.

            Classes 520+ provide for a synthetic resin (spinnable, film
    forming, etc.) and Class 260, subclasses 709+ provide for a vulcanizable
    natural hydrocarbon gum (e.g., rubber).

            Class 252, subclasses 259.5, 299.01, 302, 363.5, 367.1, and 378+
    provide for compositions on a nonfunctional basis.

            Class 423 provides for inorganic compounds; and subclasses 265+
    provide for compositions having an inorganic compound and an agent which
    improves the general utility of the compound.

            Class 260 and its daughter Classes 530-570 provide for an organic
    compound containing more than carbon and hydrogen and such compound blended
    with an agent which improves the general utility of the compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    302+,   for a process in which different hydrocarbon components of a
    composition are separately synthesized and then blended.


CLS 585/2
TXT With nonhydrocarbon additive:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 containing a hydrocarbon and a
    nonhydrocarbon.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes, for example, polymerizable
    hydrocarbons, e.g., styrene, butadiene, etc., admixed with a stabilizing or
    preserving agent.

    (2)     Note.  In the compositions of this and indented subclasses, the
    nonhydrocarbon is added to improve the general utility of the hydrocarbon,
    e.g., by preserving it, etc.  Where the nonhydrocarbon additive improves a
    utility of the hydrocarbon which is provided for elsewhere, the patent is
    classified elsewhere; for example, where the additive improves the
    dielectric properties, it is in Class 252, subclasses 570+, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 380+, particularly subclasses 397+, for
    preserving agents, per se.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, for a compound of that class
    mixed with a preserving agent, etc.


CLS 585/3
TXT O containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein a nonhydrocarbon additive contains
    oxygen.


CLS 585/4
TXT And N containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 3 wherein a nonhydrocarbon additive contains
    nitrogen.

    (1)     Note.  The oxygen and nitrogen may be present in the same additive
    molecule or in different additive molecules.


CLS 585/5
TXT Additive(s) aromatic:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 wherein the nitrogen and/or oxygen are
    present in a compound containing an aromatic moiety.


CLS 585/6
TXT Gaseous blend:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the mixture is a gas at standard
    temperature and pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas: Heating and Illuminating, appropriate subclasses for such
    compositions containing other than merely hydrocarbons.

    252,    Compositions, for gaseous compositions containing other than merely
    hydrocarbons, especially subclass 182.11 for chemically reactive gas
    compositions; subclasses 372+ for gas compositions in general; and subclass
    571 for gaseous dielectric compositions.


CLS 585/6.3
TXT Fluent dielectric:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 claimed as a nonconductor of electricity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 570+ for a fluent dielectric composition
    containing other than hydrocarbons, and the definitions thereto, for the
    location of other electric insulating compositions.


CLS 585/6.6
TXT Mineral oil-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 6.3 wherein the dielectric composition
    includes a mineral oil (petroleum) fraction.


CLS 585/7
TXT Component of indefinite molecular weight greater than 150:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 containing a component which (a) is not
    describable by an empirical formula free of numeric ranges and (b) has a
    molecular weight greater than 150.

    (1)     Note.  Where the component is normally solid or is a heavy, oily
    material, it is assumed to have a molecular weight greater than 150.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 67+, 70+, and 71+ for "functional fluids",
    that is, hydraulic transmission fluids, low freezing point fluids, etc.,
    containing other than merely hydrocarbons.

    508,    Solid Antifriction Devices, Materials Therefor, Lubricant and
    Separant Compositions for Moving Solid Surfaces, and Miscellaneous Mineral
    oil Compositions, particularly subclasses 110+, for lubricant compositions
    which contain a nonhydrocarbon component or a solid synthetic hydrocarbon
    polymer component.


CLS 585/8
TXT Reaction product of halogenated hydrocarbons:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 in which the component of indefinite high
    molecular weight is one produced from a compound containing only carbon,
    hydrogen, and halogen by a reaction wherein halogen is removed or presumed
    to be removed.


CLS 585/9
TXT Wax:
    Subject matter under subclass 7 in which the component is described as wax.

    (1)     Note.  See the definition of Class 208, subclass 20 for a
    description of "wax".

    (2)     Note.  The component may be a synthetically produced polymer which
    is described as "waxy".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    946,    for a collection of patents concerned with the production of waxy
    or grease-like polymers.


CLS 585/10
TXT Polymer:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 in which the component is a product made by
    the condensation of an indefinite number of the same or different
    hydrocarbon molecules to form a single molecule.


CLS 585/11
TXT Containing aromatic ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 in which the polymer has an aromatic ring
    as a substituent or as part of the polymer chain.


CLS 585/12
TXT Plural polymers or copolymer of specified olefins:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein the composition contains two or
    more different polymers or contains a polymer made by joint polymerization
    of two or more different, identified olefins.

    (1)     Note.  A patent is not placed in this subclass on the mere basis
    that the polymer is one made from olefins within a defined range of
    molecular weight, e.g., "a polymer of C3-5 olefins", etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for a blend containing a copolymer derived from an acyclic olefin
    and an olefin having an aromatic substituent, e.g., ethylene and stilbene,
    etc.


CLS 585/13
TXT Mineral oil (petroleum) fraction:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein the component is a mineral oil
    fraction.


CLS 585/14
TXT For fuel use only:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 designed for use exclusively as a fuel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for a hydrocarbon fuel mixture which is a gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, appropriate subclasses for a liquid
    or solid fuel composition containing more than merely hydrocarbons.

    149,    Explosive or Thermic Compositions or Charges, appropriate
    subclasses for such materials containing hydrocarbon and an oxidant.


CLS 585/15
TXT HYDRATE OR PRODUCTION THEREOF:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which a product molecule
    contains hydrocarbon and water in a definite molecular weight ratio
    representable by a chemical formula, or in which a process makes such a
    compound.

    (1)     Note.  The process may have as its ultimate utility the
    purification of a hydrocarbon, and the hydrate produced may be decomposed
    to hydrocarbon and water.


CLS 585/16
TXT COMPOUND OR REACTION PRODUCT MIXTURE:

    A product under the class definition which may be a single identifiable
    compound in a relatively pure state or may be a mixture of closely related
    compounds which results from a synthesis process.

    (1)     Note.  Only patents which claim a hydrocarbon product are placed in
    this and its indented subclasses.  Where a process for synthesis and/or
    purification of the product is also claimed, the patent is cross-referenced
    to the appropriate subclass(es) below.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass (16) is the locus for acyclic nonpolymer
    hydrocarbon products.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the destruction of hydrocarbon hazardous or toxic waste.


CLS 585/17
TXT Polymer of indefinite molecular weight:
    Subject matter under subclass 16 wherein the product is a molecule or
    mixture of molecules which cannot be defined by an empirical formula in
    which all numerical values are invariable, and which has been formed by the
    union of smaller entire hydrocarbon molecules (addition polymerization) or
    the hydrocarbyl moieties of nonhydrocarbon molecules (condensation
    polymerization).

    (1)     Note.  The smaller (monomer) molecules may be all alike or two or
    more varieties may make up portions of the final product molecule.

    (2)     Note.  Polymers included herein generally are waxy or liquids or
    can have a molecular weight less than is required for placement in Classes
    520+. While "solid polymer" implies that a product is a resin for Classes
    520+, the designation of the product as a "wax" makes it suitable for this
    class (585).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    945     and 946, for collections of patents drawn to processes of making
    drying oil polymers and waxy or grease-like polymers, respectively.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, for hydrocarbon polymers
    claimed or disclosed as a synthetic resin solid.


CLS 585/18
TXT Acyclic:

    Subject matter under subclass 17 in which the polymer has no ring in its
    structure.


CLS 585/19
TXT Containing aromatic ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 17 in which the polymer contains an aromatic
    ring.


CLS 585/20
TXT Alicyclic:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 containing a carbocyclic ring but free of
    any resonating bond system characteristic of benzene or azulene.


CLS 585/21
TXT Polycyclo, i.e., fused:

    Subject matter under subclass 20 which contains at least two rings which
    share two carbon atoms.


CLS 585/22
TXT Of differing carbon content, more than three or with bridge:

    Subject matter under subclass 21 containing at least four rings, each of
    which shares two adjacent carbon atoms with another ring, or two rings
    fused where at least one ring contains a different number of carbons from
    the others, or the ring system contains a bridge, that is, a carbocyclic
    ring which shares with another ring two carbons not adjacent to each other.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    552,    Organic Compounds, subclass 653 for Vitamin D compounds,
    cholecalciferols, dihydrotachysterols, 3-5 cyclovitamin D compounds, etc.
    which contain only carbon and hydrogen.


CLS 585/23
TXT Unsaturated ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 20 containing a ring which has olefinic
    unsaturation.


CLS 585/24
TXT Aromatic:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 having at least one carbocyclic ring,
    usually six-membered, which is resonating or is characterized by three
    conjugated double bonds.

    (1)     Note.  Azulene,

            is considered to be aromatic.

    (2)     Note.   Naphthalene

            dihydronaphthalene

            and tetrahydronaphthalene (Tetralin)

            are aromatic, but decahydronaphthalene (Decalin) is alicyclic

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    319+,   for a synthesis process involving serial diverse conversions
    leading to production of a recoverable aromatic compound.

    400+,   for synthesis of an aromatic compound.

    804+,   for a process for purifying an aromatic compound by plural diverse
    serial separations.

    827+    and 831, for a purification process in which an aromatic compound
    is sorbed by a solid sorbent.


CLS 585/25
TXT Plural rings:

    Subject matter under subclass 24 containing at least two rings, where at
    least one ring is an aromatic moiety.


CLS 585/26
TXT Polycyclo, i.e., fused:

    Subject matter under subclass 25 where at least two of the rings share two
    adjacent carbon atoms.


CLS 585/27
TXT Of differing carbon content or with bridge: Subject matter under subclass
    26 having a bond or an atom or an acyclic carbon atom chain connecting two
    nonadjacent ring atoms, or where at least one ring is not a six-membered
    ring, e.g., fluorene.


CLS 585/240
TXT PRODUCTION OF HYDROCARBON MIXTURE FROM REFUSE OR VEGETATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which the starting (feed)
    material of the process is plant material in a chemically unaltered form or
    is a material which ordinarily would be discarded as of no value, e.g.,
    municipal waste, refinery sludge, etc., is treated to recover therefrom a
    mixture of hydrocarbons, e.g., a fuel "oil" fraction, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    201,    Distillation:  Processes Thermolytic, appropriate subclasses for a
    similar process which produces also a carbon char product.

    588,    Hazardous or Toxic Waste Destruction or Containment, appropriate
    subclasses for the destruction of hydrocarbon hazardous or toxic waste.


CLS 585/241
TXT From synthetic resin or rubber:

    Subject matter under subclass 240 where the starting waste material is a
    synthetic resin or rubber.


CLS 585/242
TXT From wood:

    Subject matter under subclass 240 in which a claimed feedstock to the
    process is the stem of a tree sawdust or a similar vegetation material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    428,    Stock Material and Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 2 for a
    compacted trash or refuse bundle.


CLS 585/250
TXT ADDING HYDROGEN TO UNSATURATED BOND OF HYDROCARBON, I.E., HYDROGENATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition where elemental hydrogen is
    included or produced in a reaction and the hydrogen causes an unsaturated
    bond of a hydrocarbon to become less unsaturated.

    (1)     Note.  The starting unsaturated bond may be olefinic, acetylenic,
    or aromatic.

    (2)     Note.  Hydrogen exchange disproportionation is included herein
    where the more saturated hydrocarbon product is a desired product of the
    process.  See subclass 257.

    (3)     Note.  Since a process classified herein requires the unsaturated
    bond of a feedstock to become more saturated, the synthesis of a one carbon
    atom product, e.g., methane or a methylene free radical, is not proper for
    classification herein.


CLS 585/251
TXT With subsequent diverse conversion:

    Subject matter under subclass 250 in which a synthesis operation, different
    from hydrogenation of an unsaturated bond is performed upon the
    hydrogenated feedstock.

    (1)     Note.  The subsequent conversion must be more than the mere
    treatment of an unwanted by-product to make such by-product equivalent to
    the feedstock to the original hydrogenation.


CLS 585/252
TXT Dehydrogenation:

    Subject matter under subclass 251 wherein the reaction after the
    hydrogenation is the removal of hydrogen, i.e., dehydrogenation.


CLS 585/253
TXT Isomerization:

    Subject matter under subclass 251 wherein the hydrogenated feedstock is
    treated to change its molecular configuration without a change in its
    molecular weight.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    371+,   for isomerization by ring expansion or contraction to produce an
    alicyclic hydrocarbon.


CLS 585/254
TXT With preliminary diverse conversion:
    Subject matter under subclass 250 in which the feedstock to hydrogenation
    is the product of a synthesis operation, different from hydrogenation of
    unsaturation bonds.


CLS 585/255
TXT Polymerization of olefins only:

    Subject matter under subclass 254 wherein the only other synthesis step is
    the polymerization of an olefinic feedstock before hydrogenation reaction.


CLS 585/256
TXT Molecular weight reduction:

    Subject matter under subclass 254 wherein, prior to hydrogenation, the
    feedstock is treated to remove hydrogen and/or carbon from some or all of
    its molecules.


CLS 585/257
TXT By hydrogen transfer from other hydrocarbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 250 wherein the hydrogen which goes toward
    saturation of the unsaturated bonds is introduced to the process as a
    hydrocarbon compound, the latter hydrocarbon compound becoming less
    saturated.

    (1)     Note.  Where the less saturated hydrocarbon is the only desired
    product of the process, the process is classified below as a
    dehydrogenation reaction.

    (2)     Note.  Processes according to this subclass are sometimes called
    disproportionation", "hydrogen-exchange disproportionation", or "hydrogen
    transfer".


CLS 585/258
TXT Hydrocarbon is contaminant in desired hydrocarbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 250 where the unsaturated hydrocarbon which
    is hydrogenated is an impurity or contaminant in a desired hydrocarbon, a
    substantial amount of which desired hydrocarbon is present in the feedstock
    to the process.

    (1)     Note.  The hydrogenation may result in the production of further
    amounts of the desired product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    800+,   and the notes to the main line subclass for an explanation of
    "contaminant" and the line between this class (585) and the purification
    classes.


CLS 585/259
TXT Hydrogenation of diolefin or triple bond:
    Subject matter under subclass 258 wherein the contaminant has a triple bond
    which is hydrogenated or has two double bonds, one or both of which is
    hydrogenated.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of subject matter contained herein are the
    conversion of acetylene impurity contained in ethylene to more ethylene,
    conversion of butadiene impurity to butene or butane, etc.


CLS 585/260
TXT Using catalyst or support of defined structure, surface areas, or pore
    size: Subject matter under subclass 259 where the hydrogenation of a bond
    in a contaminant takes place in the presence of a catalyst or support of
    specific structure, e.g., gamma-alumina, or of a specific surface area or
    pore size, e.g., 3 meters per cubic meter, 5-7 angstroms, etc.

    (1)     Note.  The description of a hydrogenation catalyst as a "molecular
    sieve" is sufficient for placement in this subclass.


CLS 585/261
TXT Using catalyst and additional nonmetal material:

    Subject matter under subclass 259 where the contaminant is hydrogenated in
    the presence of a catalyst and at least one additional nonmetal material,
    e.g., Decalin, etc.


CLS 585/262
TXT Using S or Group I or II transition metal-containing catalyst:

    Subject matter under subclass 259 employing a catalyst which contains
    sulfur, copper, silver, gold, zinc, cadmium, or mercury.


CLS 585/263
TXT With temperature or concentration gradient in reactor or specified
    provision for heating, cooling, or reactor control: Subject matter under
    subclass 250 wherein the temperature or concentration of reactants or
    composition of a catalyst changes gradually from one point to another in a
    hydrogenation reactor, wherein procedures for heating or cooling the
    reactor, reactants, catalyst, etc., are specified, wherein a test or
    measurement is made, or wherein a synthesis condition is varied in response
    to a change in a diverse condition.


CLS 585/264
TXT With preliminary treatment of feed or plural separation procedures:

    Subject matter under subclass 250 wherein a reactant to the process is
    treated, e.g., by heating, purification, etc., before the hydrogenation
    reaction or wherein more than one separation procedure is applied to the
    hydrogenerator effluent.


CLS 585/265
TXT Plural hydrogenation stages:

    Subject matter under subclass 250 wherein an effluent material from a
    hydrogenation reaction is hydrogenated, e.g., passage of the feed through a
    stage having a certain catalyst activity, and a subsequent state having a
    different activity, etc.


CLS 585/266
TXT Hydrocarbon is aromatic:

    Subject matter under subclass 250 which is directed to the hydrogenation of
    aromatic compounds, e.g., the hydrogenation of benzene to cyclohexane or
    cyclohexene, or of naphthalene to form 1,2,3,4-tetrahydronaphthalene and/or
    dechydro-naphthalene.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    940,    for a hydrogenation or other process which results in the opening
    of a hydrocarbon ring.


CLS 585/267
TXT Using alkaline metal material:

    Subject matter under subclass 266 wherein the hydrogenation takes place in
    the presence of lithium, sodium, potassium, rubidium, cesium, beryllium,
    magnesium, calcium, strontium or barium in free or combined form.


CLS 585/268
TXT To produce polycyclic:

    Subject matter under subclass 266 wherein the product material has more
    than one ring in its molecule.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    360+,   for a process in general for synthesizing polycyclic material
    having no aromatic ring.

    400+,   especially subclasses 406, 410+, 422+, and 431 for synthesis of
    polycyclic materials in which at least one ring is aromatic.


CLS 585/269
TXT Using Group VIII metal-containing catalyst with additional nonhydrocarbon
    agent: Subject matter under subclass 266 wherein the reaction mixture
    contains a nonhydrocarbon agent and cobalt, iridium, iron, nickel, osmium,
    palladium, platinum, rhodium, or ruthenium in free or combined form.


CLS 585/270
TXT Co, Fe, or Ni:

    Subject matter under subclass 269 wherein the Group VIII metal is cobalt,
    nickel, or iron.


CLS 585/271
TXT Partial:

    Subject matter under subclass 250 wherein only part of the unsaturation in
    a hydrocarbon feed molecule is hydrogenated resulting in an unsaturated
    product, such as the conversion of butadiene to butene or acetylene to
    ethylene.


CLS 585/272
TXT Hydrogen supplied by water or alcohol:
    Subject matter under subclass 271 wherein the hydrogen for the
    hydrogenation is supplied by the removal of hydrogen from water or organic
    hydroxy molecules.


CLS 585/273
TXT Using Group VIII metal-containing catalyst: Subject matter under subclass
    271 wherein the reaction is catalyzed by iron, cobalt, nickel, ruthenium,
    rhodium, palladium, osmium, iridium or platinum in free or combined form.


CLS 585/274
TXT Co, Fe, or Ni:

    Subject matter under subclass 273 wherein the catalyst contains iron,
    cobalt, or nickel.


CLS 585/275
TXT Using transition metal-containing catalyst: Subject matter under subclass
    250 wherein the reaction takes place in the presence of a catalyst
    containing a transition metal in free or combined form.

    (1)     Note.  The transition metals are elements in which an inner
    electron shell, rather than an outer shell, is partially filled.  In the
    periodic table they include elements 21 through 30 (scandium through zinc),
    39 through 48 (yttrium through cadmium), 57 through 80 (lanthanum through
    mercury), and 89 through 103 (actinium through lawrencium).


CLS 585/276
TXT Elemental Co, Fe, or Ni:

    Subject matter under subclass 275 wherein the hydrogenation catalyst is
    iron, cobalt, or nickel in the free or uncombined (zero-valence) state.


CLS 585/277
TXT Group VIII metal with additional nonhydrocarbon agent or complexed with
    hydrocarbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 275 wherein the hydrogenation catalyst
    contains cobalt, iridium, iron, nickel, osmium, palladium, platinum,
    rhodium, or ruthenium in free or combined form, and contains an additional
    nonhydrocarbon agent, e.g., a support etc., or the catalyst is complexed
    with a hydrocarbon.


CLS 585/300
TXT PLURAL PARALLEL SYNTHESES:

    Subject matter under the class definition involving more than one reaction,
    in which the feedstock to and effluent from one reaction is independent of
    the feedstock to and effluent from the other reaction.

    (1)     Note.  The feedstocks may have a common source and the effluents
    may be subsequently blended, but the feedstock to one reaction is not all
    or part of the effluent from the other reaction.

    (2)     Note.  Excluded from the terms "feedstock" and "effluent" as used
    in the definition are extraneous materials such as catalyst, solvents,
    diluents, etc., which do not make a net contribution of carbon or hydrogen
    to the final product(s).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    265,    for plural parallel synthesis each of which involves adding
    hydrogen to an unsaturated bond of a hydrocarbon.

    310+,   for a process where the effluent of a synthesis is used as
    feedstock to a diverse synthesis.


CLS 585/301
TXT Using same catalyst, solvent, inert heat carrier, or component thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein a catalyst, solvent, diluent or
    inert heat carrier, or a material which makes up a part of such substance
    is used in one of the parallel syntheses, its use in such synthesis is
    discontinued, and the catalyst etc., or component thereof is used in the
    other parallel synthesis.

    (1)     Note.  Use of identical extraneous materials in both parallel
    syntheses is not sufficient for placement of a patent in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Where both parallel syntheses use an extraneous agent drawn
    from and returned to a common pool or reservoir, the patent is placed here.


CLS 585/302
TXT With blending of products from two parallel reactions:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 in which a reaction product from one of
    the parallel syntheses is blended with a reaction product from another of
    the parallel syntheses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for a process of blending which does not include a claimed
    synthesis.

    955,    for a defined mixing procedure, usually in conjunction with a
    hydrocarbon synthesis.


CLS 585/303
TXT And passage to further reaction:

    Subject matter under subclass 302 wherein the blended product stream is
    passed to another reaction.

    (1)     Note.  Where the subsequent synthesis is of a type diverse from at
    least one of the prior parallel syntheses, the patent should be crossed to
    the appropriate subclass of subclasses 310+.  See the definition of
    subclass 310 for the meaning of "diverse".

    (2)     Note.  Mere recycle of a portion of the blend is not sufficient for
    placement in this subclass.

    (3)     Note.  The blending may take place in the zone of subsequent
    reaction.


CLS 585/304
TXT Diverse parallel syntheses:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein the syntheses conducted in
    parallel produce different types of product or are different types of
    reaction.

    (1)     Note.  For a fuller explanation of "diverse" see the definition of
    subclass 310, (1) Note below.


CLS 585/310
TXT PLURAL SERIAL DIVERSE SYNTHESES:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which a feedstock is subjected
    to chemical conversion to form an intermediate and in a separate subsequent
    step the intermediate is converted to a desired hydrocarbon product or to
    another intermediate, etc., each conversion involving a diverse synthesis
    type.

    (1)     Note.  A series of syntheses is considered to be diverse when
    either (a) each synthesis produces a different type of product or (b) each
    synthesis is a different type of reaction.

            The following are considered to be different types of product:

    a.      A nonhydrocarbon.

    b.      An alicyclic hydrocarbon (naphthene, terpene)

    c.      An aromatic hydrocarbon (including aralkyl compounds)

    d.      An unsaturated hydrocarbon (olefin, diolefin, alkyne)

    e.      A saturated hydrocarbon (paraffin, isoparaffin)

            The following are considered to be different types of reactions;
    the number next to each type refers to subclasses of this class concerned
    with such type reaction, per se.


    f.      Condensation of entire hydrocarbon molecules (polymerization,
    alkylation) (361+, 364, 375+, 406, 415+, 422+, 438, 446+, 502+, 709+)

    g.      Alkyl transfer (375+, 470+, 643+, 708)

    h.      Skeletal isomerization (353+, 358, 365+, 371+, 404+, 476, 477+,
    671, 734+)

    j.      Shift of double bond (363, 377+, 664+)

    k.      Removal of nonhydrocarbon element (357+, 436+, 469+, 603+, 637,
    638+, 711, 733)

    l.      Carbon content reduction (353+, 439, 476, 483+, 539, 613+, 648+,
    752)

    m.      Dehydrogenation (379+, 430+, 440+, 540+ 616+, 654+)

    (2)     Note.  Except for patents claiming process steps specifically
    provided for in subclasses 311-316, patents are placed in this and its
    indented subclasses on the basis of the ultimate product of an entire
    claimed plural serial diverse synthesis process; the patent placed as an
    original in the first appearing subclass which provides for such ultimate
    product and is cross-referenced to:

    a.      Other of these subclasses appropriate for other ultimate or
    intermediate products produced by two or more diverse synthesis steps and

    b.      to every subclass which provides for a synthesis step which is more
    than nominally included in any claim.  A nominal recitation is a mere
    mention of a step, e.g, "dehydrogenation".

    (3)     Note.  A process in which a single synthesis step is followed by a
    reaction which merely converts a by-product of the synthesis to material
    identical with the feedstock is not considered to be plural syntheses.  See
    subclasses 905.

    (4)     Note.  The occurrence of several phenomena simultaneously in a
    single step, e.g., alkylation and isomerization, etc., does not call for
    classification here (subclasses 310+). Rather, a patent claiming such a
    process step is classified in the first appearing subclass concerned with
    either phenomenon and crossed to the subclass dealing with the other.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    251+    and 254+, for a plural serial diverse synthesis process in which
    one step is hydrogenation.

    930+,   for a collection of patents drawn to processes which involve
    synthesis of a nonhydrocarbon intermediate.


CLS 585/311
TXT One synthesis rehabilitates catalyst for other, e.g., by alkylation with
    ester, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 in which a catalyst which has
    deteriorated in its effectiveness in a synthesis process is treated to
    restore its effectiveness by using it in another hydrocarbon synthesis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301     and 702+, for a process in which a catalyst is used in plural
    distinct treatments, its use in one treatment sometimes serving,
    incidentally, to improve its effectiveness in the other treatment.

    328,    for a process in which a nonhydrocarbon material, e.g., aluminum
    trialkyl, reacts in a "growth" reaction with an olefin to form a higher
    alkyl nonhydrocarbon, and the alkyl is replaced by a lower carbon-content
    hydrocarbon leaving the original nonhydrocarbon reactant.


CLS 585/312
TXT Same catalyst, solvent, or component thereof used in both syntheses:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein a catalyst, solvent, diluent, or
    a material which makes up part of such substance is used in both of the
    syntheses.

    (1)     Note.  Use of different portions of an extraneous material in both
    syntheses is not sufficient for placement of a patent in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Where both syntheses use an extraneous agent drawn from and
    returned to a common pool or reservoir, the patent is placed here.

    (3)     Note.  Use of a material as a catalyst in one reaction and as a
    reactant in a second reaction, e.g., use of HF catalyst from one reaction
    to form alkyl fluoride in another, does not provide a basis for
    classification in this subclass.


CLS 585/313
TXT Entire catalyst composition:

    Subject matter under subclass 312 wherein the extraneous material employed
    in both syntheses includes all of the catalytic material used in each
    synthesis in the same proportions relative to each other.


CLS 585/314
TXT With hydrocarbon effluent stream splitting for recycle to different
    syntheses:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein the effluent from a single
    reaction is split and portions of the effluent are sent to different ones
    of the serial syntheses.


CLS 585/315
TXT With hydrocarbon recycle from later to earlier synthesis:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 in which hydrocarbon material effluent
    from one synthesis is passed to a diverse synthesis through which diverse
    synthesis zone the hydrocarbon or its precursor has passed before.


CLS 585/316
TXT Earlier synthesis is condensation or alkyl transfer:

    Subject matter under subclass 315 wherein the earlier synthesis is a
    condensation reaction, that is, polymerization, alkylation, etc., or an
    alkyl transfer (disproportionation) reaction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    361+,   364, 406, 415+, 422+, 438, 446+, 502+, and 709+, for condensation
    reactions, per se.

    375+,   470+, 643+, and 708, for alkyl transfer reactions, per se.


CLS 585/317
TXT To produce alicyclic:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein the ultimate product or an
    intermediate product, produced by at least two diverse conversions, is a
    nonaromatic cyclic material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    350+,   for the production of alicyclic compounds by a single synthesis
    step or a process performing similar syntheses in plural serial stages.


CLS 585/318
TXT Having unsaturated ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 317 wherein the product has olefinic
    unsaturation in a ring.


CLS 585/319
TXT To produce aromatic:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 in which the ultimate product or an
    intermediate product, produced by at least two diverse conversions, is an
    aromatic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    400+,   for the production of an aromatic compound by a single synthesis
    step or by a process performing similar syntheses in plural serial stages.


CLS 585/320
TXT Polycyclic:

    Subject matter under subclass 319 which the product has more than one ring.

    (1)     Note.  One or more of the rings may be alicyclic, but if the
    product contains one or more aromatic rings, the patent is proper for this
    subclass.


CLS 585/321
TXT Having plural side-chains:

    Subject matter under subclass 319 wherein the product is an aromatic
    hydrocarbon having two or more hydrocarbyl substituents on the aromatic
    ring.

    (1)     Note.  Any or all of the side-chains may be saturated (alkyl),
    unsaturated (alkenyl, alkylidene), etc.


CLS 585/322
TXT Including an aromatization step:

    Subject matter under subclass 319 wherein a step converts a nonaromatic
    moiety to an aromatic moiety, e.g., by dehydrogenation of an alicyclic
    moiety, ring formation from an open-chain moiety, etc.


CLS 585/323
TXT Including an alkylation step:

    Subject matter under subclass 319 wherein the series of conversions
    includes an alkylation step wherein an acyclic material is condensed with
    an aromatic material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    446+,   for alkylation of aromatics, per se.


CLS 585/324
TXT To produce unsaturate:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 in which the ultimate product or an
    intermediate product, produced by at least two diverse conversions, is
    noncyclic and contains olefinic unsaturation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500+,   for the production of unsaturated noncyclic compounds by single
    synthesis step or a process performing similar syntheses in plural serial
    stages.


CLS 585/325
TXT Having triple bond:

    Subject matter under subclass 324 wherein the ultimate product or an
    intermediate product, produced by at least two diverse conversions,
    contains acetylenic unsaturation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    534+,   for the production of triple-bond material by a single synthesis
    step or a process performing similar syntheses in plural serial stages.


CLS 585/326
TXT Polyolefin:

    Subject matter under subclass 324 wherein the olefinic unsaturation
    comprises two or more olefinically unsaturated bonds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    506+,   600 and 601+, for the production of polyolefins by a single
    synthesis step or a process performing similar syntheses in plural serial
    stages.


CLS 585/327
TXT From O compound feed or intermediate:
    Subject matter under subclass 326 wherein some or all of the carbon atoms
    appearing in the final product are introduced to the process as a compound
    which contains oxygen or during the course of the process appear in such a
    compound.

    (1)     Note.  Patents classified herein are not cross-referenced to
    subclass 934.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    604+    and 606+, for, per se, synthesis of diolefin from an oxygen
    compound.


CLS 585/328
TXT Including displacement from nonhydrocarbon by entire hydrocarbon molecule,
    e.g., growth reaction, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 324 wherein one step uses as reactants (1) a
    hydrocarbon, usually a low molecular weight olefin and (2) a nonhydrocarbon
    containing (a) one or more hydrocarbyl moieties and (b) a nonhydrocarbon
    atom or radical, the reaction serving to unite reactant (1) with atom or
    radical (2b) and to release a free olefin derived from (2a).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    637,    for a displacement reaction, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, subclass 448 for synthesis of an
    aluminum alkyl by a chain-growth reaction.


CLS 585/329
TXT Including polymerization of olefin:

    Subject matter under subclass 324 which includes a step of condensing two
    or more entire olefin molecules.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    502+,   for olefin polymerization, per se.


CLS 585/330
TXT And a preliminary unsaturation step, e.g., cracking, dehydrogenation, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 329 wherein the polymerization step is
    subsequent to a step wherein the hydrogen content of a hydrocarbon molecule
    is reduced.

    (1)     Note.  The polymerization step can immediately follow the cracking
    or dehydrogenation, or the unsaturation and polymerization can be separated
    by one or more other steps.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    613+    and 648+, for a cracking reaction, per se, to produce a diolefin or
    a monoolefin, respectively.

    616+    and 654+, for a dehydrogenation reaction, per se, to produce a
    diolefin or monoolefin, respectively.


CLS 585/331
TXT Including alkylation to produce branched-chain paraffin:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein a non-normal saturated noncyclic
    hydrocarbon is produced, including a step of condensing an olefin-acting
    material with a nonolefinically unsaturated material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    446+    and 709+, for an alkylation reaction per se to produce an aromatic
    or a saturated noncyclic compound, respectively.


CLS 585/332
TXT And preliminary isomerization or polymerization:

    Subject matter under subclass 331 wherein a material undergoing the
    alkylation synthesis has undergone a reaction wherein a feedstock is
    converted to another material having the same empirical formula but a
    different structural configuration, or in which an olefin has been
    condensed with one or more other olefin molecules.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    502+,   for olefin polymerization, per se.

    664+,   for olefin synthesis by double bond shift isomerization.

    734+,   for skeletal isomerization of paraffins.


CLS 585/350
TXT ALICYCLIC COMPOUND SYNTHESIS:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a chemical change
    produces a hydrocarbon which is cyclic or has a cyclic moiety, the
    hydrocarbon having no aromatic rings.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is the locus for patents drawn to certain
    skeletal isomerization phenomena which yield a monocyclic compound.  Such
    phenomena include:

    (a)     a change in the relative position of the alkyl group on a ring,
    such as a shift of an alkyl group from the ortho to the meta or para
    position thereon, (b) a change of the side-chain size in which a portion of
    the alkyl group is transferred to another position on the ring, but the
    total number of carbon atoms on the ring remains the same, (c) a
    rearrangement of the side-chain on a ring, for example, a normal propyl
    group on the ring changed into an isopropyl, (d) a change from a
    cisconfiguration to a trans-configuration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266+,   for hydrogenation of an aromatic to produce an alicyclic.

    317+,   for production of an alicyclic by serial diverse syntheses.

    353     and 360, for skeletal isomerization processes which produce a
    polycyclic nonaromatic.

    365+,   for production of an alicyclic ring from a nonring hydrocarbon by a
    cyclization isomerization.

    371+,   for isomerizaton of a larger-ring compound to a smaller-ring
    compound and vice versa.

    377+,   for double bond shift isomerization to produce a monocyclic
    nonaromatic.

    476+    and 477+, for skeletal isomerization processes which produce a
    compound having an aromatic ring.

    600,    601 and 671, for skeletal isomerization processes which produce an
    olefin.

    734+,   for skeletal isomerization processes which produce a paraffin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 133+ for
    reforming mineral oils which may include isomerization.


CLS 585/351
TXT Carotene or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 350 directed to the production of carotene

    and compounds in which a hydrogen of the carotene nucleus is replaced by a
    hydrocarbyl moiety.


CLS 585/352
TXT Adamantane or derivative:

    Subject matter under 350 directed to the
    production of the adamantane nucleus, C10H16,

    and compounds in which a hydrogen of the adamantane nucleus is replaced by
    a hydrocarbyl moiety.


CLS 585/353
TXT By shift, opening, or removal of shared-carbon ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 350 in which a shared-carbon ring, e.g., a
    bridge, is shifted from attachment to one carbon of a ring to another
    carbon, as in terpene isomerization, or a shared-carbon ring is opened or
    removed to give a product containing fewer rings than the feed material.

    (1)     Note.  The polycyclic feed may have ortho-fused rings or one ring
    may bridge another, or the rings may be spiro.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    476,    for the synthesis of an aromatic compound by ring opening, removal,
    degradation, or shift.

    940,    for a collection of patents in which a hydrocarbon ring is opened.


CLS 585/354
TXT Cyclopentadiene from its polymer:

    Subject matter under subclass 353 in which a polymer of cyclopentadiene,
    e.g., dicyclopentadiene,

    is converted to cyclopentadiene.


CLS 585/355
TXT Camphene or ten-C monocyclic from polycyclic, e.g., terpene isomerization,
    etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 353 wherein the


    feedstock to the reaction is a material having more than one ring and the
    product is camphene

    or a hydrocarbon having one alicyclic ring and ten carbon atoms.

    (1)     Note.  Because most dictionaries do not carry a list of C10
    terpenes, the following list, although incomplete, is pre-sented as a guide
    to such materials:

                      Bornane   2-Bornene    Carane

            Carvestrene:  racemic mixture of sylvestrene optical isomers.

            Dipentene:  racemic mixture of limonene optical isomers.


            Limonene (Dipentene)

            m-Menthane   p-Menthane

            1-p-Menthene  1,4(8)-p-Menthadiene (Terpinolene)

            Pinane    alpha-Pinene     beta-Pinene

                            Sylvestrene

            gamma-Terpinene  Thujane


CLS 585/356
TXT Camphene from pinene or derivative:

    Subject matter under subclass 355 represented by the equation


CLS 585/357
TXT From nonhydrocarbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 350 in which the feedstock to the process
    contains an element other than carbon and hydrogen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    408+,   454, 469, 603+, 638+, 711, and 733, for synthesis of other
    hydrocarbons from nonhydrocarbon feedstocks.


CLS 585/358
TXT Nonring moiety becomes ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 357 wherein the product contains at least one
    more ring than the feedstock.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    365     and 407, for other cyclization processes.


CLS 585/359
TXT Halogen containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 357 wherein the nonhydrocarbon contains
    fluorine, chlorine, bromine, or iodine.


CLS 585/360
TXT Polycyclic product:

    Subject matter under subclass 350 wherein a hydrocarbon is synthesized
    having more than one alicyclic moiety.

    (1)     Note.  The rings may be directly connected to each other or may be
    substituents on an acyclic chain.

    (2)     Note.  Here is found the production of bicyclo or "bridge"
    compounds, e.g., bicyclo [2,2,1] heptane.


CLS 585/361
TXT By condensation, e.g., diels-alder reaction, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 360 wherein two or more molecules are joined
    together in their entirety to synthesize the desired product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    427+,   for a process wherein two or more aromatic molecules are condensed.

    446+,   for alkylation of an aromatic compound.


CLS 585/362
TXT Dimerizing a cycloolefin:

    Subject matter under subclass 361 wherein an alicyclic compound having
    olefinic unsaturation in the ring or in a side-chain is condensed with
    itself to form a compound having more than one ring.

    (1)     Note.  Many processes herein are designed to remove cyclopentadiene
    impurities from a hydrocarbon stream by dimerizing the impurities.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    832,    for a process where a hydrocarbon stream is purified by
    polymerizing a component and resolving the polymer to the monomer.


CLS 585/363
TXT By double-bond shift in side-chain:

    Subject matter under subclass 360 wherein the product is synthesized by
    isomerization of a double bond from one position to another position in the
    side-chain of the molecule, e.g., from vinyl to ethylidene, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    377+,   for a double-bond shift in a monocyclic nonaromatic compound.

    435+,   for a similar shift in an aromatic compound.

    664+,   for a similar shift in a noncyclic olefin.


CLS 585/364
TXT By condensive ring expansion, e.g., "olefin dismutation", etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 350 wherein the alicyclic compound is
    synthesized from a feedstock molecule, usually a cycloolefin, having fewer
    carbons in its ring than the product molecule, the carbons added to the
    ring being contributed by another molecule.

    (1)     Note.  The final product may incorporate all of the carbon atoms of
    the feedstock molecules (polymerization) or only part of the carbon atoms
    of one feedstock (disproportionation).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    362,    for cycloolefin dimerization in which the product has plural rings.

    643+,   for olefin disproportionation reactions aimed at the production of
    acyclic monoolefins.  Many of the catalysts used in such reactions are
    disclosed as being useful in the reactions of this subclass (364).


CLS 585/365
TXT From nonring hydrocarbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 350 directed to the conversion of an acyclic
    hydrocarbon to an alcyclic hydrocarbon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    358,    for a cyclization process in which the feed is a nonhydrocarbon.

    407+,   for a cyclization process which produces an aromatic.


CLS 585/366
TXT Alkadiene:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 wherein the feedstock includes a
    noncyclic hydrocarbon chain having two olefinically unsaturated bonds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    361,    for a process in which an acyclic olefin, e.g., an alkadiene, etc.,
    is condensed with a cyclic olefin to produce a polycyclic nonaromatic
    hydrocarbon.


CLS 585/367
TXT Using refractory-group metal-containing catalyst:

    Subject matter under subclass 366 employing a catalyst which contains in
    free or combined form a transition metal of Group IV, V, or VI, that is,
    titanium, zirconium, hafnium, vanadium, niobium (columbium), tantalum,
    chromium, molybdenum, or tungsten.


CLS 585/368
TXT With nonmetal element or compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 367 employing, in addition to the refractory
    metal component, an element or compound which does not contain a metal atom.

    (1)     Note.  The nonmetal element or compound must be clearly an entity
    separate from the metal-containing material, that is, it is not part of a
    "complex" with a metal-containing "compound".

    (2)     Note.  The nonmetal element or compound need not have a clearly
    catalytic function, but may be described as a solvent, diluent, etc.


CLS 585/369
TXT Using Co-, Fe-, or Ni-containing catalyst: Subject matter under subclass
    366 employing a catalyst which contains iron or cobalt or nickel in free or
    combined form.


CLS 585/370
TXT With nonmetal organic compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 369 employing, in addition to the iron group
    metal material, an organic compound which does not contain a metal atom.


CLS 585/371
TXT By ring expansion or contraction:

    Subject matter under subclass 350 wherein a ring is made smaller or larger.

    (1)     Note.  The distinction in subject matter between this subclass and
    subclasses 365+ is as follows:

    In this subclass a ring which is present in a molecule at the start of the
    process contains more carbon atoms or less carbon atoms at the end of the
    process.  The phenomena involved are both ring opening and ring closing.
    In subclasses 365+ a molecule or moiety which is not a ring at the start of
    the process is a ring or part of a ring at the end of the process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    322,    for a process wherein methylcyclopentane is converted to
    cyclohexane and the later compound is dehydrogenated to benzene.


CLS 585/372
TXT Using Al group metal halide catalyst:
    Subject matter under subclass 371 using a catalyst comprising a fluoride,
    chloride, bromide, or iodide of aluminum, gallium, indium, or thallium.


CLS 585/373
TXT With added hydrocarbon complex or nonhydrocarbon organic agent:

    Subject matter under subclass 372 using also a hydrocarbon complex (usually
    sludge type) or an organic material containing an element other than carbon
    and hydrogen.


CLS 585/374
TXT Using metal-containing catalyst:

    Subject matter under subclass 371 using a catalyst which contains a metal
    or a compound of a metal.


CLS 585/375
TXT By alkylation or alkyl transfer:

    Subject matter under subclass 350 wherein the alicyclic compound is
    synthesized by (a) condensation of an alicyclic with an acyclic moiety
    which may be all or part of another hydrocarbon molecule or by (b)
    dealkylation of the alicyclic molecule wherein the removed alkyl is
    condensed with another hydrocarbon molecule.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    446     and 709, for other alkylation reactions.

    470     and 643, for other alkyl transfer reactions.


CLS 585/376
TXT Feed has side-chain:

    Subject matter under subclass 375 in which the feed to the process has an
    alicyclic ring with an acyclic side-chain.

    (1)     Note.  The alkylation may involve the side-chain or the ring.


CLS 585/377
TXT By double-bond shift:

    Subject matter under subclass 350 wherein the product is synthesized by
    isomerization of a double bond from one position to another position in the
    molecule.

    (1)     Note.  The shift may be within a ring, within a side-chain, from a
    ring to a side-chain, etc.


CLS 585/378
TXT Using organometallic compound, P- or S- containing catalyst:

    Subject matter under subclass 377 using a catalyst which is an
    organometallic compound or contains phosphorus or sulfur.


CLS 585/379
TXT By dehydrogenation:

    Subject matter under subclass 350 wherein the synthesis involves removal of
    hydrogen from an alicyclic molecule.


CLS 585/380
TXT Using H acceptor:

    Subject matter under subclass 379 wherein hydrogen is removed from a
    desired hydrocarbon by use of another substance which chemically reacts
    with and combines with the hydrogen.

    (1)     Note.  The other substance may be an element, e.g., oxygen, etc.,
    or a compound e.g., an unsaturated hydrocarbon, etc.


CLS 585/400
TXT AROMATIC COMPOUND SYNTHESIS:

    Subject matter under the class definition drawn to a process which includes
    a chemical change and results in a recoverable hydrocarbon compound having
    at least one carbocyclic ring, usually six-membered, which is resonating or
    is characterized by three conjugated double bonds.

    (1)     Note.  Azulene,  , is


            considered to be aromatic.

    (2)     Note.    Naphthalene,

            dihydronaphthalene,

            and tetrahydronaphthalene (Tetralin),

            are aromatic, but decahydronaphthalene (Decalin),

            is alicyclic.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass (400) is the locus for processes wherein
    carbon atoms already contained in rings are joined to form an additional
    ring or wherein a nonaromatic ring moiety of a polycyclic aromatic
    hydrocarbon is dehydrogenated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24+,    for patents which claim an aromatic hydrocarbon compound.

    319+,   for a synthesis process involving diverse conversions leading to
    production of a recoverable aromatic compound.

    804+,   for a process for purifying an aromatic compound by plural diverse
    serial separations.

    827+    and 831, for a purification process in which an aromatic compound
    is sorbed by a solid sorbent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, appropriate subclasses,
    especially subclasses 133+, for a process for synthesizing a mixture of
    aromatic compounds from a mineral oil mixture when there is no recovery of
    a particular aromatic compound.


CLS 585/401
TXT With measuring, sensing, testing, or synthesis operation control responsive
    to diverse condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein the process involves a definitely
    recited step of measuring, analyzing, etc., a condition or parameter of the
    process or in which a condition of the synthesis operation, e.g.,
    temperature, etc., is adjusted in accordance with a different aspect of the
    synthesis, e.g., strength of catalyst, etc.

    (1)     Note.  A process in which the same operating condition is
    controlled, e.g., adding heat to a reaction in response to a temperature
    drop in the reaction zone, is not included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    501     and 701, for similar procedures employed in the synthesis of
    unsaturated and saturated hydrocarbon compounds, respectively,

    956,    for a collection of patents disclosing such procedures in other
    aspects of hydrocarbon processing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, for processes and apparatus for making a
    measurement or test of any kind not claimed in combination with synthesis
    of an organic compound and not elsewhere classifiable, and the class
    definition thereof for the identification of other classes concerned with
    testing.

    436,    Chemisty:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 1H for
    chemical reaction not elsewhere classifiable, or analysis by chemical
    methods of organic material.


CLS 585/402
TXT Exploiting or conserving heat of quenching, reaction, or regeneration:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 in which heat generated by a reaction or
    by catalyst regeneration or absorbed by quenching reactants is put to use
    in the process.

    (1)     Note.  Patents placed wherein are not  cross-referenced to subclass
    910.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    503,    535, 602, and 634, for olefin condensation, alkyne synthesis,
    diolefin synthesis, and saturated compound synthesis, respectively, using
    similar techniques.

    910,    for a collection of patents where similar techniques are employed
    in other syntheses.


CLS 585/403
TXT Using apparatus of recited composition:
    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein the process uses apparatus made
    of a particular material, e.g., a ceramic, stainless steel, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402,    for a process in which the apparatus of recited composition is a
    heat carrier.

    503,    537 and 636, for olefin condensation, alkyne synthesis, and
    monoolefin synthesis, respectively, using apparatus of recited composition.

    920,    for a collection of patents using such apparatus in other processes.

    950,    for a collection of patents disclosing prevention of solid deposits
    on apparatus by forming a permanent or temporary protective coating of
    named composition on the surfaces of same.


CLS 585/404
TXT By ring expansion or contraction:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein a change in ring size and usually
    also dehydrogenation (removal of hydrogen from the ring) takes place.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    371+,   for ring expansion or contraction phenomena in the synthesis of an
    alicyclic.


CLS 585/405
TXT Using transition metal-containing catalyst: Subject matter under subclass
    404 wherein the reaction takes place in the presence of a catalyst
    containing a transition metal in free or combined form.

    (1)     Note.  The transition metals are elements in which an inner
    electron shell, rather than an outer shell, is partially filled.  In the
    periodic table they include elements 21 through 30 (scandium through zinc),
    39 through 48 (yttrium through cadmium), 57 through 80 (lanthanum through
    mercury), and 89 through 103 (actinium through lawrencium).


CLS 585/406
TXT By dimerization of vinyl aromatic:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 which comprises the condensation of two
    molecules of a vinyl aromatic compound, e.g., styrene, etc.

    (1)     Note.  The dimer may be one of several types of products or a
    mixture of the several types, such as diplenyl alkenes, phenylindanes, etc.


CLS 585/407
TXT By ring formation from nonring moiety, e.g., aromatization, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein carbon atoms which make up a ring
    or part of a ring in the desired aromatic product enter the reaction as
    part of an acyclic moiety.

    (1)     Note.  Where a ring is formed by the joining together of carbon
    atoms already contained in one or more rings of a molecule, e.g.,
    conversion of dinaphthyl to perylene, etc., classification in subclass 400
    is proper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    358     and 365, for a similar phenomenon in the manufacture of an
    alicyclic hydrocarbon.

    406,    for a similar phenomenon where the moiety is the side-chain of a
    vinyl aromatic.


CLS 585/408
TXT Nonhydrocarbon feed:

    Subject matter under subclass 407 where the starting material contains at
    least one element other than carbon and hydrogen, e.g., chlorine, oxygen,
    etc.


CLS 585/409
TXT Aromatic or carbonyl-containing reactant:
    Subject matter under subclass 408 in which material sent into the process,
    which supplies carbon atoms for the desired product, has a keto or aldehyde
    moiety and/or an aromatic ring or ring structure.


CLS 585/410
TXT Aromatic feed:

    Subject matter under subclass 407 in which material sent into the process,
    which supplies carbon atoms for the desired product, contains an aromatic
    ring or ring structure.

    (1)     Note.  The desired product usually is polycyclic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    409,    for a similar process in which the aromatic feedstock or an
    accompanying feedstock contains an atom other than carbon or hydrogen.


CLS 585/411
TXT Using metal-containing catalyst:

    Subject matter under subclass 410 catalyzed by a material containing metal
    in free or combined form, e.g., clay, etc.


CLS 585/412
TXT Plural stage, with moving catalyst or with specified flow rate or procedure:

    Subject matter under subclass 407 wherein the synthesis is accomplished in
    two or more steps, wherein the catalyst employed is claimed as moving,
    e.g., from reactor to regenerator, fluidized, etc., wherein a flow
    procedure in the reactor, e.g., countercurrent, etc., is claimed, or
    wherein a flow rate, e.g., space velocity of reactant, etc., is claimed.

    (1)     Note.  A mere time span during which the desired reaction takes
    place is not sufficient for classification in this subclass.


CLS 585/413
TXT With preliminary treatment of feed or plural separation procedures:

    Subject matter under subclass 407 wherein the effluent from the
    aromatization reaction or a component thereof passes through at least two
    separation steps or wherein a feedstock is treated prior to the
    aromatization reaction, e.g., by separation into fractions, by preheating,
    etc.


CLS 585/414
TXT Using metal-free H acceptor:

    Subject matter under subclass 407 wherein the synthesis process employs a
    nonmetal element or a compound not containing a metal, which chemically
    reacts with hydrogen removed from a feedstock, the element or compound
    thereby being changed to a more hydrogenated material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257,    for a process wherein a hydrocarbon is the acceptor and the more
    hydrogenated hydrocarbon is a desired product.


CLS 585/415
TXT Product compound has more C atoms than feed compound, e.g., cyclic
    polmerization, etc.: Subject matter under subclass 407 in which the
    aromatic product of the synthesis contains more carbon atoms than a
    feedstock compound which supplies carbon atoms to the said product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    502,    for polymerization processes which produce a nonsolid olefin
    hydrocarbon.

    700,    for apolymerization process which produces a saturated hydrocarbon
    product.


CLS 585/416
TXT Triple bond-containing feed:

    Subject matter under subclass 415 in which the ring is formed from
    acetylene or a substituted acetylene.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    410,    for ring formation from the side-chains or aryl-substituted
    acetylenes.


CLS 585/417
TXT Using transition metal-containing catalyst: Subject matter under subclass
    415 wherein the reaction takes place in the presence of a catalyst
    containing a transition metal in free or combined form.

    (1)     Note.  The transition metals are elements in which an inner
    electron shell, rather than an outer shell, is partially filled.  In the
    periodic table they include elements 21 through 30 (scandium through zinc),
    39 through 48 (yttrium through cadmium), 57 through 80 (lanthanum through
    mercury), and 89 through 103 (actinium through lawrencium).


CLS 585/418
TXT Using transition metal-containing catalyst: Subject matter under subclass
    407 wherein the reaction takes place in the presence of a catalyst
    containing a transition metal in free or combined form.

    (1)     Note.  The transition metals are elements in which an inner
    electron shell, rather than an outer shell, is partially filled.  In the
    periodic table they include elements 21 through 30 (scandium through zinc),
    39 through 48 (yttrium through cadmium, 57 through 80 (lanthanum through
    mercury), and 89 through 103 (actinium through lawrencium).


CLS 585/419
TXT Group VIII noble metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 418 wherein the catalyst contains platinum,
    palladium, rhodium, ruthenium, iridium, or osmium.


CLS 585/420
TXT Group VI metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 418 wherein the catalyst contains chromium,
    molybdenum, or tungsten.


CLS 585/421
TXT With alkaline metal compound:

    Subject matter under subclass 420 where one component of the catalyst is a
    compound of an alkali metal or alkaline earth metal, e.g., lithium, sodium,
    potassium, rubidium, cesium, beryllium, magnesium, calcium, strontium,
    barium, or radium.


CLS 585/422
TXT By condensation of entire cyclic molecules or entire hydrocarbyl moieties
    thereof, e.g., polymerization, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 in which a polycyclic aromatic is
    produced by joining two or more entire cyclic molecules of a feedstock or
    the entire hydrocarbyl moieties of such molecule.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass (422) is the locus for a process where a
    side-chain carbon of one molecule is joined to the ring carbon of another
    molecule, e.g., the manufacture of phenyl tolyl methane from toluene.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    361+,   for analogous processes where none of the feedstock molecules is
    aromatic.

    438     and 446+, for a process wherein an aromatic ring moiety is
    condensed with a nonring moiety.

    470,    for a process wherein an aromatic compound is manufactured by
    condensation of a molecule with a fragment of another molecule.

    502+    and 709+, for a condensation process wherein nonring moieties are
    condensed.


CLS 585/423
TXT With plural separation procedures:

    Subject matter under subclass 422 wherein a material, usually the effluent
    from the condensation reaction or a component thereof, passes through at
    least two separation steps.

    (1)     Note.  A mere nominal "recovery" or "separating" step is not
    sufficient to warrant placement of a patent herein.

    (2)     Note.  Many patents contained herein recycled a separated component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    424,    for a process wherein the condensation effluent is subjected to
    another condensation reaction.

    702+,   705 and 706, for paraffin syntheses in general which may or do
    involve specifically directed separation or purification procedures.

    710     and 712, for alkylation procedures which produce a paraffin,
    involving specifically directed purification or separation procedures.


CLS 585/424
TXT Plural stage or with preliminary treatment of feed:

    Subject matter under subclass 422 wherein the effluent from an aromatic
    condensation reaction or wherein a feed stock is treated prior to the
    condensation reaction, e.g., by separating nonhydrocarbons therefrom, by
    separating the feed into several different fractions, by heating, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300+,   for a process wherein two or more reactions are conducted in
    parallel.

    320,    for a process wherein an intermediate is formed in an aromatic
    synthesis process which results in a polycyclic product.


CLS 585/425
TXT Ring carbon of one molecule joined to ring carbon of other:

    Subject matter under subclass 422 in which the condensation exploits ring
    carbon atoms of two feed molecules, for example, by fusing rings, forming
    biphenyl from benzene, etc.


CLS 585/426
TXT Through residue of nonring molecule, e.g., acetylene, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 425 in which a moiety, present as an acyclic
    molecule in the feedstock, is present between the joined rings of the
    product.


CLS 585/427
TXT Arylene bond formed using metal-containing agent:

    Subject mattter under subclass 425 in which a biphenyl, polyphenyl,
    substituted biphenyl or polyphenyl, or partially hydrogenated biphenyl or
    polyphenyl is the product and the process employs an agent, e.g., a
    catalyst, a solvent, etc., which is or contains a metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    268,    for a process in which hydrogenation of an aromatic ring takes
    place simultaneously with formation of the arylene bond, e.g.,
    hydrodimerization of benzene, etc.


CLS 585/428
TXT Nonring moiety of one molecule bonded to nonring moiety of other, e.g.,
    polystyrene, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 422 in which ring-containing molecules having
    side-chain or other acyclic components are joined by means of the acyclic
    components, the ring moieties becoming mere substituents on the resulting
    condensed acyclic moiety.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    406,    for a process where only two molecules of a vinyl aromatic are
    condensed with each other.

    502+,   for polymerization of olefins which do not have an aromatic
    substituent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    526,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 346 for solid
    polystyrene resins and methods of manufacture.


CLS 585/429
TXT Through residue of nonring molecule, e.g., butadiene, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 428 wherein a moiety, present as an acyclic
    molecule in the feedstock, is present between the joined acyclic components
    of the ring-containing feedstock material.


CLS 585/430
TXT From alicyclic:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 in which an aromatic hydrocarbon is
    formed from a cyclic material having the same number of carbon atoms in its
    ring system, which cyclic material in nonaromatic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266+,   for the opposite reaction.

    400,    for conversion of a polycyclic material having an aromatic ring to
    one having more aromatic rings, e.g., conversion of tetralin to
    naphthalene, etc.


CLS 585/431
TXT Polycyclic product of with olefinic unsaturation in feed:

    Subject matter under subclass 430 wherein the aromatic hydrocarbon is made
    from a feed compound having an olefinic double bond or in which the
    aromatic hydrocarbon formed is polycyclic, e.g.,

    decahydronaphthalene              naphthalene

    bycyclo (6,4,0) dodecadiene   benzosuberane

    1,1-dimethydecalin   1,2,dimethylnapthalene


CLS 585/432
TXT Cymene product:

    Subject matter under subclass 431 wherein cymene is the aromatic
    hydrocarbon formed, e.g., p-cymene.

    (1)     Note.  Often the feed is a terpene.


CLS 585/433
TXT Using H acceptor or Cr-, Mo-, or W- containing catalyst:

    Subject matter under subclass 430 wherein a material is employed which
    forms a compound with the hydrogen removed from the feedstock or which
    contains, chromium, molybdenum, or tungsten in free or combined form.

    (1)     Note.  The hydrogen acceptor may be an element of a compound, the
    compound being a hydrocarbon or a nonhydrocarbon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257,    for a hydrogen-exchange disproportionation process in which the
    hydrocarbon which becomes more saturated is a desired product of the
    process.

    380,    442, 442, 617+, and 654+, for other dehydrogenation processes which
    use a hydrogen acceptor.

    403,    for aromatic manufacture where the hydrogen acceptor is embodied in
    the apparatus used.

    900,    for aromatic manufacture where a nonhydrocarbon acceptor is
    recycled, e.g., after rehabilitation.


CLS 585/434
TXT Using noble metal catalyst:

    Subject matter under subclass 430 catalyzed by a noble metal, that is,
    gold, silver, platinum, palladium, rhodium, iridium, osmium, or ruthenium
    in free or combined form.


CLS 585/435
TXT Having alkenyl moiety, e.g., styrene, etc.:
    Subject matter under subclass 400 in which the aromatic product of the
    synthesis process has olefinic or acetylenic unsaturation in a sidechain or
    other acyclic moiety.

    (1)     Note.  Synthesis of an alkenyl aryl by disproportionation, i.e.,
    transalkylation, is properly classified in this subclass.


CLS 585/436
TXT Polycyclic product or from nonhydrocarbon feed:

    Subject matter under subclass 435 wherein the product has more than one
    ring or contains carbon or hydrogen atoms introduced to the process as part
    of a compound containing atoms other than carbon and hydrogen.

    (1)     Note.  Only one of the rings needs to be aromatic for placement in
    this subclass.


CLS 585/437
TXT O-containing feed:

    Subject matter under subclass 436 wherein a nonhydrocarbon feedstock
    compound contains an oxygen atom.


CLS 585/438
TXT By condensation using metal-containing catalyst:

    Subject matter under subclass 435 wherein the product is formed by joining
    plural entire hydrocarbon molecules, e.g., "alkenylation", "olefin
    arylation", etc., and wherein a catalyst is employed which contains a metal
    in free or combined form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    422+,   for a similar process where two of the joined molecules contain
    rings.

    436     and 446+, for other condensation processes which produce aromatics.


CLS 585/439
TXT By C removal, e.g., cracking, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 435 in which carbon atoms are removed from a
    feedstock compound.

    (1)     Note.  The removed carbon atoms are not thereupon joined to a
    second hydrocarbyl moiety to increase the carbon content of the second
    moiety.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241,    for depolymerization of aromatic-containing synthetic resin waste.

    435,    for production of an alkenyl aromatic by disproportionation, i.e.,
    transalkylation.

    476     and 483+, for similar processes wherein the aromatic product does
    not have an unsaturated nonring moiety.


CLS 585/440
TXT By dehydrogenation:

    Subject matter under subclass 435 in which hydrogen atoms are removed from
    a feedstock compound to produce the product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257,    for a hydrogen-exchange disproportionation process in which the
    hydrocarbon which becomes more saturated is a desired product of the
    process.


CLS 585/441
TXT Plural stage or with plural separation procedures:

    Subject matter under subclass 440 wherein the effluent from a
    dehydrogenation reaction is sent to another dehydrogenation reaction or in
    which two or more separation steps are performed.

    (1)     Note.  One or more of the separation steps may be preliminary to
    the reaction.

    (2)     Note.  Frequently a compound separated from the effluent is
    recycled.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    800+,   and the notes thereto for separation procedures, per se, applied to
    hydrocarbon materials.


CLS 585/442
TXT Using halogen or S:

    Subject matter under subclass 440 in which elemental or combined halogen or
    sulfur is added to the reaction mixture.

    (1)     Note.  Often hydrogen from the compound which become the desired
    product chemically combines with a component of the halogen or sulfur
    compound.


CLS 585/443
TXT Using elemental O:

    Subject matter under subclass 440 in which elemental oxygen, e.g., air, is
    added to the reaction mixture.

    (1)     Note.  Usually hydrogen from the compound which becomes the desired
    product chemcially combines with the elemental oxygen.

    (2)     Note.  Processes described as "partial combustion" are placed here.


CLS 585/444
TXT Using metal oxide, sulfide, or salt:
    Subject matter under subclass 440 wherein part or all of the synthesis
    takes palce in the presence of an oxide, sulfide, or salt of a metal.


CLS 585/445
TXT Cr-, Mo-, or W-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 444 wherein the process uses chromium,
    tungsten, or molybdenum in free or combined form.


CLS 585/446
TXT By condensation of entire molecules or entire hydrocarbyl moieties thereof,
    e.g., alkylation, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein there is added to an aromatic
    hydrocarbon, or that moiety of an aromatic nonhydrocarbon which remains
    after atoms other than carbon and hydrogen have been removed, an acyclic
    straight or branched hydrocarbon molecule or that moiety of an acyclic
    nonhydrocarbon which remains after atoms other than carbon and hydrogen
    have been removed.

    (1)     Note.  The ring compound onto which the chain is introduced may
    already include one or more side-chains, e.g., toluene, xylene, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    470+,   for a process in which a hydrocarbyl moiety which is only a part of
    a hydrocarbon molecule is added to an aromatic molecule.

    709+,   for alkylation of an olefin to produce a noncyclic hydrocarbon.


CLS 585/447
TXT With specified flow rate through reactor or flow procedure within or at
    entrance to reactor:

    Subject matter under subclass 446 wherein a procedure for achieving contact
    and/or confluence of materials in the reactor or at the entrance to the
    reactor is specified, or in which the time which a reactant takes to flow
    through the reactor is specified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    922+,   for a collection of patents drawn to other hydrocarbon conversion
    processes wherein a reactor fluid manipulating device is specified.

    955+,   for a collection of patents drawn to other hydrocarbon synthesis
    processes in which a mixing procedure is specified.


CLS 585/448
TXT With preliminary treatment of feed:

    Subject matter under subclass 446 wherein the hydrocarbon feed is treated
    prior to the alkylation reaction, e.g., by separating nonhydrocarbons
    therefrom, by separating the feed into several different fractions, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323,    for a process wherein an intermediate is formed in an aromatic
    synthesis process which includes an alkylation step.


CLS 585/449
TXT Plural alkylation stages:

    Subject matter under subclass 446 in which the effluent from an aromatic
    alkylation reaction is sent to another aromatic alkylation reaction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300+,   for a process wherein two or more alkylation reastions are
    conducted in parallel.

    323,    for a process in which an aromatic alkylation reaction is preceded
    or followed by a conversion other than aromatic alkylation.


CLS 585/450
TXT With plural separation procedures:

    Subject matter under subclass 446 wherein a material usually the effluent
    from the alkylation reaction or a component thereof, passes through at
    least two separation steps.

    (1)     Note.  A mere nominal "recovery" or "separating" step is not
    sufficient to warrant placement of a patent herein.

    (2)     Note.  Many patents contained herein recycle a separated component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    449,    for a process wherein the alkylation effluent is subjected to
    another alkylation reaction.

    702+,   705 and 706, for paraffin syntheses in general which may or do
    involve specifically directed separation or purification procedures.

    710     and 712+, for alkylation procedures which produce a paraffin,
    involving specifically directed purification or separation procedures.


CLS 585/451
TXT Including dissolving or solids formation or separation:

    Subject matter under subclass 450 in which the separation procedure
    involves filtration, crystallization, use of solid sorbent, formation of a
    solid precipitate, washing, scrubbing, or other dissolving, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    800+,   for such separation procedures applied to hydrocarbons without a
    claimed synthesis procedure.


CLS 585/452
TXT Attachment to side-chain, e.g., telomerization, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 446 wherein the process results in the
    addition of carbon atoms to the side-chain of a feed aromatic compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    438,    for a similar process which produces an aromatic compound having an
    unsaturated side-chain, e.g., by condensation of toluene and butadiene, etc.

    471+,   in which this same result is accomplished by alkyl transfer.


CLS 585/453
TXT Resulting side-chain has less than four C atoms:

    Subject matter under subclass 452 wherein a methyl substituent of an
    aromatic ring becomes an ethyl or propyl substituent or in which an ethyl
    substituent becomes a propyl substituent.


CLS 585/454
TXT Feed other than hydrocarbon, hydroxy, monohalide, or ether:

    Subject matter under subclass 446 in which a nonhydrocarbon molecule
    supplies a hydrocarbyl moiety which appears in the final product, the
    nonhydrocarbon not  being a monohalide, a hydroxy compound, or an ether.


CLS 585/455
TXT Resulting side-chain restricted to more than five c atoms, e.g., "detergent
    alkylate", etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 446 wherein the product is an aromatic having
    a side-chain claimed in any claim as necessarily containing six or more
    carbon atoms.

    (1)     Note.  A "detergent alkylate" is presumed to be a product having a
    side-chain of six or more carbon atoms.


CLS 585/456
TXT Using halogen-containing catalyst:

    Subject matter under subclass 455 wherein the reaction is catalyzed by a
    material containing fluorine, chlorine, bromine, or iodine in free or
    combined form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    462,    for halogen-catalyzed alkylation to produce an aromatic where the
    side-chain is not restricted to six or more carbon atoms.

    723+,   for HF-catalyzed alkylation to produce a paraffin.


CLS 585/457
TXT Using organometallic compound catalyst:
    Subject matter under subclass 46 wherein the reaction is catalyzed by a
    compound which contains both a metal and an organic moiety.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    459+,   462+ and 467+, for aromatic alkylation processes using inorganic
    metal compounds with or without the presence of organic metal-free
    compounds.

    722,    for organometallic-catalyzed alkylation to produce a paraffin.


CLS 585/458
TXT Using S-containing catalyst:

    Subject matter under subclass 446 wherein the reaction is catalyzed by
    sulfur in free or combined form.


CLS 585/459
TXT Using Al halide catalyst:

    Subject matter under subclass 446 wherein the reaction is catalyzed by a
    fluoride, chloride, bromide, or iodide of aluminum, alone or in combination
    with other materials.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    456,    for Al halide catalyzed alkylation to produce an aromatic where the
    side-chain is restricted to six or more carbon atoms.

    727+,   for Al halide catalyzed alkylation to produce a paraffin.


CLS 585/460
TXT And additional metal-containing or nonhalide inorganic agent:

    Subject matter under subclass 459 wherein the reaction takes place in the
    presence of an additional agent which contains metal or which is an
    inorganic compound not containing halogen.

    (1)     Note.  The additional agent may be water.


CLS 585/461
TXT Complexed, e.g., sludge, etc., or with additional extraneous organic
    agent:Subject matter under subclass 459 wherein the aluminum halide
    catalyst is described as being in a chemical complex with another material
    or wherein the reaction takes place in the presence of an organic agent,
    which may be a solvent, mass-action agent, promoter, etc., which does not
    contribute atoms to the final product.

    (1)     Note.  The aluminum halide complex may be formed in the reaction of
    aluminum halide with the hydrocarbon or hydrocarbons present in the
    process, or the complex may be preformed initially.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    312,    for plural diverse serial syntheses in which a catalyst complex
    formed in one reaction is used in another diverse reaction.


CLS 585/462
TXT Using halogen-containing catalyst:

    Subject matter under subclass 446 catalyzed by a material containing
    fluorine, chlorine, bromine, or iodine in free or combined form.


CLS 585/463
TXT Alumina containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 462 wherein the catalyst also contains
    aluminum oxide.

    (1)     Note.  The halogen may be added to alumina during the catalyst
    preparation before calcination, that is, before the alumina is formed; the
    halogen may also be added to alumina after calcination, or to an
    alumina-containing catalyst, e.g., a zeolite, during its fabrication; to a
    final catalyst composite, or in a subsequent activation treatment to
    enhance the properties of the catalyst in the process.


CLS 585/464
TXT HF:

    Subject matter under subclass 462 wherein the catalyst is hydrogen fluoride
    alone or in a composition with other materials.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    456,    for a process of introducing a side-chain of more than five carbon
    atoms to the ring wherein hydrogen fluoride is used as the catalyst.

    723+,   for a process wherein two nonring molecules are joined together,
    e.g., alkylation, etc., which also utilizes a hydrogen fluoride catalyst.


CLS 585/465
TXT B trifluoride in a complex or with additional nonhydrocarbon agent:

    Subject matter under subclass 462 in which the catalyst is a complex of
    boron trifluoride or a mixture of boron trifluoride with a material
    containing atoms other than only carbon and hydrogen.

    (1)     Note.  The complex may be inorganic, e.g., BF3.H2O, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    464,    for an aromatic alkylation process utilizing HF with an additional
    effective agent which may contain,    boron, e.g., HF+BF3, etc.


CLS 585/466
TXT Using P-containing catalyst:

    Subject matter under subclass 446 wherein the reaction is catalyzed by
    phosphorus in free or combined form.


CLS 585/467
TXT Using metal, metal oxide, or hydroxide catalyst:

    Subject matter under subclass 466 catalyzed by a material containing free
    metal, an oxide of a metal, or a hydroxide of a metal.


CLS 585/468
TXT Noncrystalline, and containing Al and Si:
    Subject matter under subclass 467 wherein the catalyst is amorphous and
    contains both aluminum and silicon.


CLS 585/469
TXT From nonhydrocarbon feed:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein a reactant which contributes
    atoms to the final product contains elements other than carbon and hydrogen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    408,    for an aromatic synthesis process involving a nonhydrocarbon feed
    and ring formation from a nonring moiety, e.g., cyclic polymerization of
    benzophenone to produce 1,3,5-triphenyl benzene, etc.


CLS 585/470
TXT By alkyl or aryl transfer between molecules, e.g., disproportionation,
    etc.: Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein an alkyl or aryl moiety of
    a molecule is transferred to another molecule.

    (1)     Note.  Patents are classified herein on the basis of the net result
    of the process, regardless of the mechanism involved, that is, the process
    may proceed by dimerization and cracking, as well as by free-radical
    transfer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257,    433, 440, 616, and 656, for disproportionation reactions involving
    the transfer of hydrogen between hydrocarbon molecules or hydrocarbyl
    moieties.

    446+    and 709+, for condensation of two entire molecules or hydrocarbyl
    moieties to give an alkylated product.

    477,    671 and 734, for a process wherein an alkyl attached to one carbon
    of a molecule is shifted to another carbon of the same molecule.

    643+    and 708, for alkyl or alkenyl transfer processes resulting in
    unsaturated and saturated products, respectively.


CLS 585/471
TXT Product is polycyclic, of increased side-chain length, or a specific
    position polyalkyl benzene isomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 470 wherein the product has more than one
    ring or in which the alkyl group removed from one hydrocarbon molecule is
    attached to a side-chain already on a ring of another molecule to give an
    aromatic product with a side-chain containing more carbon atoms than a
    feedstock side-chain, or in which the process is directed to maximize the
    production of a claimed isomer having alkyl groups in specific positions on
    a benzene ring, e.g., mesitylene, metaxylene, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Only one ring of a polycyclic compound needs to be aromatic
    for placement in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Where the process includes a step of removing or recovering
    a specific material substantially free from its isomers, it can be assumed
    that the process is directed to maximizing the production of the isomer
    removed or recovered.

    (3)     Note.  Where the desired product has no aromatic position isomer,
    e.g., benzene, toluene, ethylbenzene, etc., the patent is not classified
    here.


CLS 585/472
TXT Using Al or B halide catalyst:

    Subject matter under subclass 471 wherein the synthesis takes place in the
    presence of an aluminum halide or a boron halide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    473     and 474, for averaging and other transalkylation processes,
    respectively, using a halogen-containing catalyst.


CLS 585/473
TXT Meta- or 1,3,5-alkyl benzene:

    Subject matter under subclass 472 in which the product is a meta-alkyl
    benzene, e.g., 1,3-diethyl benzene, etc., or a 1,3,5-trialkyl benzene,
    e.g., mesitylene, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Tetraalkylbenzenes, etc., are not subject matter for this
    subclass.


CLS 585/474
TXT Plural compounds of different weight become midweight compound, i.e.,
    averaging: Subject matter under 470 wherein two or more compounds fed to
    the reaction, each compound differing from the other in carbon content, are
    converted to a hydrocarbon compound of carbon content less than one
    compound and greater than the other, for example, conversion of a mixture
    of xylene and benzene to toluene.


CLS 585/475
TXT Using crystalline aluminosilicate catalyst:
    Subject matter under subclass 470 wherein the catalyst is a solid compound
    containing aluminum, silicon, and oxygen atoms in an ordered spatial
    pattern or arrangement, e.g., a zeolite, etc., and which may be of natural
    or synthetic origin.


CLS 585/476
TXT By ring opening, removal, degradation, or shift on chain or other ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein the product has fewer rings than
    the feedstock or a ring attached to a multicarbon alkyl moiety or another
    ring becomes attached to a carbon of the moiety or ring different from the
    carbon to which attached in the feedstock.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    439,    for a similar process in which the resulting product has an
    unsaturated chain moiety.


CLS 585/477
TXT By isomerization:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein the synthesis involves changing
    the molecular structure of the feed material without a change in its carbon
    or hydrogen content.

    (1)     Note.  The isomerization may result in movement of a component,
    e.g., an alkyl side-chain, etc., to a different position on a ring of an
    aromatic, the rearrangement of carbon atoms within a side-chain, or the
    removal of a carbon atom from a side-chain to the ring, e.g., conversion of
    ethylbenzene to xylene, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404,    for an isomerization process which involves ring expansion or
    contraction.

    407,    for an isomerization process which involves forming a ring from a
    nonring moiety.

    471+,   for a process wherein aromatic isomerization takes place
    simultaneously with alkyl transfer.

    476,    for an isomerization process which involves opening a ring of a
    polycyclic feedstock or moving a ring from one carbon to another of a
    "side" chain or second ring.


CLS 585/478
TXT With plural separation steps:

    Subject matter under subclass 477 in which more than one separation step is
    performed.

    (1)     Note.  A separation step before isomerization combined with a
    separation step after isomerization is considered plural steps.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    804+,   for an aromatic recovery process employing plural diverse serial
    separations.

    815,    for a hydrocarbon recovery process employing serial crystallization
    procedures.

    822,    for a hydrocarbon recovery process employing plural serial sorption
    steps.


CLS 585/479
TXT Including a crystallization step:

    Subject matter under subclass 478 wherein one or more of the plural
    separation steps involves chilling a mixture to solidify a component of the
    mixture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    812+,   for solidification processes, per se, specific to the separation or
    purification of hydrocarbons.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 532+ for fractional crystallization
    processes of general applicability.


CLS 585/480
TXT Using metal oxide-or sulfide-containing catalyst:

    Subject matter under subclass 477 catalyzed by an inorganic compound which
    contains a metal and oxygen or sulfur.


CLS 585/481
TXT Crystalline aluminosilicate:

    Subject matter under subclass 480 wherein the compound contains aluminum,
    silicon, and oxygen atoms in an ordered spatial pattern or arrangement,
    e.g., a zeolite, etc., and which may be of natural or synthetic origin.


CLS 585/482
TXT Pt-group metal containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 480 catalyzed by ruthenium, rhodium,
    palladium, osmium, iridium, or platinum in free or combined form.


CLS 585/483
TXT By dealkylation:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein a side-chain is wholly or
    partially removed from the ring of an aromatic, e.g., the demethylation of
    ethylbenzene or xylene to form toluene and/or benzene, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    404+,   for a process wherein a ring component at the end of the process
    has more carbons in the ring or less carbons in the ring than at the start
    of the process.

    470,    for a process wherein an alkyl group removed from one hydrocarbon
    molecule is attached to another molecule, i.e., dealkylation using a
    hydrocarbon acceptor for the removed alkyl moiety.

    476+,   for a process wherein a ring of a polycyclic aromatic is opened
    with or without partial or complete removal of carbon atoms from the
    resulting side-chain.

    800+,   for a process wherein an aromatic compound feedstock is purified by
    cracking the nonaromatic impurities.


CLS 585/484
TXT Polycyclic:

    Subject matter under subclass 483 in which the feedstock is an alkylated
    aromatic hydrocarbon having more than one ring, e.g., naphthalene,
    tetralin, indane, fluorene, diphenyl, phenycyclohexane, phenylcyclopentene,
    diphenylmethane, etc.

    (1)     Note.  A process which employs a hydrogen donor compound, rather
    than elemental hydrogen, is classified in this subclass, rather than in
    subclass 485.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257,    for a process wherein a hydrocarbon compound supplies hydrogen for
    saturating an unsaturated bond of another hydrocarbon molecule, the latter
    being recovered as a product.


CLS 585/485
TXT Using catalyst and H:

    Subject matter under subclass 484 wherein the process takes place in the
    presence of added elemental hydrogen and a catalyst.

    (1)     Note.  The catalyst need not be a solid; therefore, classification
    is appropriate in this subclass for many processes which are termed
    "thermal" or "noncatalytic" but which in actuality use an agent other than
    the reactants to further the reaction by more than merely supplying heat.


CLS 585/486
TXT Using extraneous agent in reaction zone, e.g., catalyst, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 483 wherein part or all of the synthesis
    takes place in the presence of an added material, whether called a
    catalyst, a diluent, a heat carrier, etc., or not, which speeds a desired
    reaction or retards in undesired reaction and which does not supply a
    significant number of atoms of material to the final product.

    (1)     Note.  Water and hydrogen are considered reactants in the processes
    of this subclass and not extraneous agents.


CLS 585/487
TXT And steam:

    Subject matter under subclass 486 wherein the reaction takes place in the
    presence of steam, water vapor, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclass 214 for a similar process
    in which a hydrogen-containing gas mixture, suitable for burning, is the
    desired product.

    252,    Compositions, subclass 373 for a similar process in which a
    synthesis gas containing hydrogen and carbon oxide is the desired product.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 652+ for a similar
    process in which hydrogen is the desired product.


CLS 585/488
TXT And hydrogen:

    Subject matter under subclass 486 wherein the reaction takes place in the
    presence of elemental hydrogen.


CLS 585/489
TXT Transition metal-containing catalyst:
    Subject matter under subclass 488 catalyzed by a material containing, in
    free or combined form, a metal in which an inner electron shell, rather
    than an outer shell, is partially filled.

    (1)     Note.  In the periodic table transition metals include elements 21
    through 30 (scandium through zinc), 39 through 48 (yttrium through
    cadmium), 57 through 80 (lanthanum through mercury), and 89 through 103
    (actinium through lawrencium).


CLS 585/500
TXT UNSATURATED COMPOUND SYNTHESIS:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which a hydrocarbon molecule
    is produced which has no ring configuration and is less than saturated with
    hydrogen, that is, is having less hydrogen than the formula CnH2n+2, which
    molecule was not present as the same structurally or empirically identical
    molecule at the beginning of the process.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 157.15+ for
    chemical synthesis of a hydrocarbon compound by utilizing wave energy and
    subclasses 168+ for chemical synthesis of a hydrocarbon compound by
    utilizing an electrostatic field or electrical discharge.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, for processes of manufacturing
    synthetic resins which may be hydrocarbons.


CLS 585/501
TXT With measuring, sensing, testing, or synthesis operation control responsive
    to diverse condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein the process involves a definitely
    recited step of measuring, analyzing, etc., a condition or parameter of the
    process or in which a condition of the synthesis operation, e.g.,
    temperature etc., is adjusted in accordance with a different aspect of the
    synthesis, e.g., strength of catalyst, etc.

    (1)     Note.  A process in which the same operating condition is
    controlled, e.g., adding heat to a reaction in response to a temperature
    drop in the reaction zone, is not included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401     and 701, for similar procedures employed in the synthesis of
    aromatic and saturated hydrocarbon compounds, respectively.

    956,    for a collection of patents disclosing such procedures in other
    aspects of hydrocarbon processing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, for processes and apparatus for making a
    measurement or test of any kind not claimed in combination with synthesis
    of an organic compound and not elsewhere classifiable; and the main class
    definition thereof for the identification of other classes concerned with
    testing.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 1+ for
    a test or measurement associated with a chemical reaction not elsewhere
    classifiable, or analysis, by chemical methods, of organic material.


CLS 585/502
TXT By addition of entire unsaturated molecules, e.g., polymerization, etc.:
    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein at least two hydrocarbon
    molecules, each having a double or triple bond, join to form an unsaturated
    compound having a molecular weight which equals the total of the molecular
    weight of the additive (monomer) molecules.

    (1)     Note.  Where a reaction is stated to be "polymerization",
    "dimerization", etc., and all the reactants are unsaturated, it is assumed
    that the product is unsaturated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    361+,   for addition of entire cyclic molecules to form a polycyclic
    nonaromatic product.

    366,    for cyclic polymerization of an alkadiene to produce an alicyclic
    compound.

    406,    dimerization of a vinyl aromatic compound.

    415+,   for cyclic polymerization of an acyclic material to produce an
    aromatic compound.

    422+,   for condensation of entire cyclic molecules, including reactions
    similar to those herein (subclasses 502+) where an aromatic ring is a
    "passive" substituent on an unsaturated chain, e.g., polymerization of
    styrene, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclass 46 for processes of
    polymerizing or condensing mineral oils; subclass 20 for petroleum wax
    products; and subclasses 24+ for treatment of mineral paraffin wax.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, for a polymerization process
    which results in a solid polymer, especially Class 526 for the
    polymerization of ethylenically unsaturated monomers.  Where a patent has
    claims to production of both solid and nonsolid polymers or has claims only
    to a polymerization process which, according to the disclosure, may produce
    a solid polymer as a desired product, the patent is classified in the Class
    520 series and cross-referenced here (subclasses 502+) when appropriate.


CLS 585/503
TXT With heat conservation or using apparatus of recited composition:

    Subject matter under subclass 502 wherein heat generated in the process,
    e.g., by reaction, catalyst regeneration, adsorbed by quenching reactants,
    etc., is put to use in the process or in which the chemical composition of
    apparatus used in the process is specified.

    (1)     Note.  Patents placed herein are not  cross-referenced to
    subclasses 910+ and 920 unless the processes therein are disclosed as
    applicable to other than polymerization processes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402,    535, 602, and 634, for aromatic synthesis, alkyne synthesis,
    diolefin synthesis, and saturated compound synthesis, respectively, using
    similar techniques.

    910+    and 920, for collections of patents wherein similar techniques are
    employed in other syntheses.

    950,    for a collection of patents disclosing prevention of solid deposits
    on apparatus by forming a permanent or temporary protective coating of
    named composition of surfaces of the apparatus.


CLS 585/504
TXT With specified procedure for recycle of nonhydrocarbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 502 wherein a procedure is recited for
    getting catalyst or other nonhydrocarbon material which has been removed
    from a reaction back into the reaction, which procedure goes beyond mere
    nominal "recycling", "regenerating", etc.


CLS 585/505
TXT Triple-bond product:

    Subject matter under subclass 502 wherein the product contains acetylenic
    unsaturation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    534+,   for synthesis of triple-bond materials by phenomena other than
    polymerization.


CLS 585/506
TXT Poly-double-bond product:

    Subject matter under subclass 502 wherein the product contains more than
    one olefinically unsaturated bond.

    (1)     Note.  Where a diene is codimerized with a monoene, it is assumed
    that the product has two double bonds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    600     and 601+, for synthesis of polyolefins by phenomena other than
    polymerization.


CLS 585/507
TXT More than two double bonds, e.g., diene polymerization, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 506 wherein the product has three or more
    ethylenically unsaturated sites in its molecule.

    (1)     Note.  An addition product is presumed to have three or more double
    bonds when all the monomer molecules have two or more double bonds.

    (2)     Note.  The products of processes of this subclass are often of
    utility as synthetic drying oils.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    945,    for a collection of patents disclosing drying-oil products.
    Patents classified herein are not cross-referenced to subclass 945.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclass 1 for a synthetic
    drying oil derived from a mineral oil.


CLS 585/508
TXT Of definite molecular weight, e.g., dimer, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 507 wherein the product can be described by
    an empirical formula having only invariable subscripts.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    366+,   for a diene dimerization process which results in the production of
    a desired alicyclic product.


CLS 585/509
TXT Using P-containing catalyst:

    Subject matter under subclass 506 catalyzed by a material containing
    phosphorus in free or combined form.

    (1)     Note.  The product has two double bonds as, for example, a codimer
    of butene and butadiene, etc.


CLS 585/510
TXT Definite molecular weight product, e.g., dimer, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 502 wherein a monoolefin product can be
    described by an empirical formula having only invariable subscripts.

    (1)     Note.  The desired product may be a mixture of isomers or a
    restricted mixture of related compounds, e.g., a dimertrimer mixture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    520+,   for a catalytic polymerization process where there is no intent to
    maximize the production of a material having a definite molecular weight.


CLS 585/511
TXT Using catalyst containing metal bonded to or complexed with C, C-containing
    compound, or H:

    Subject matter under subclass 510 wherein the catalyst contains a metal
    bonded to or complexed with carbon, a carbon compound, or hydrogen, e.g.,
    alkali metal-carbon complexes, metal hydrides, metal alkyls, metal
    carbonyls, etc.


CLS 585/512
TXT Al- and transition metal-containing:
    Subject matter under subclass 511 wherein the catalyst contains aluminum
    and a transition metal, either metal or both metals appearing in a hydride,
    carbon compound, or complex.

    (1)     Note.  A transition metal is one in which an inner electron shell,
    rather than an outer shell, is partially filled.  In the periodic table
    transition metals include elements 21 through 30 (scandium through zinc),
    39 through 48 (yttrium through cadmium), 57 through 80 (lanthanum through
    mercury), and 89 through 103 (actinium through lawrencium).


CLS 585/513
TXT And N-, P-, or S-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 512 wherein the catalyst additionally
    contains a compound of nitrogen, phosphorus, or sulfur.


CLS 585/514
TXT Using P-containing catalyst:

    Subject matter under subclass 510 catalyzed by a material which contains
    phosphorus in free or combined form.


CLS 585/515
TXT Using S-containing catalyst:

    Subject matter under subclass 510 catalyzed by a material which contains
    sulfur in free or combined form.


CLS 585/516
TXT Using alkali metal-containing catalyst:
    Subject matter under subclass 510 catalyzed by a material which contains
    lithium, sodium, potassium, rubidium, cesium, or francium in free or
    combined form.

    (1)     Note.  A crystalline aluminosilicate catalyst, whether natural or
    synthetically prepared, will usually contain alkali metal unless such metal
    component is specifically removed.


CLS 585/517
TXT Plural serial polymerization stages:
    Subject matter under subclass 502 wherein the effluent of a polymerization
    is sent to a further polymerization stage.

    (1)     Note.  A mere recycle of unpolymerized portions of an effluent to
    the same polymerization zone does not indicate classification in this
    subclass.


CLS 585/518
TXT With preliminary treatment of feed:

    Subject matter under subclass 502 wherein the feed to polymerization is the
    effluent from a nonsynthesis treatment, usually a purification treatment,
    heating treatment, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    503,    for an olefin polymerization process in which the feed pretreatment
    is heating and the heat is that abstracted from reaction products of the
    process.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    526,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 77 for a process in
    which an olefin monomer is purified preliminary to its polymerization into
    a solid polymer.


CLS 585/519
TXT Removal of hydrocarbon fraction:

    Subject matter under subclass 518 wherein the preliminary treatment is such
    as to remove from the feedstock a type of hydrocarbon undesired in the
    polymerization reaction, e.g., a hydrocarbon of too low or too high
    molecular weight, of undesired molecular structure, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    517,    for such a process in which the removal mechanism is olefin
    polymerization.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 606+ and 617+ for extracting, per se, of
    a component from a mixture of gases by liquefaction and separation.


CLS 585/520
TXT Using extraneous nonhydrocarbon agent, e.g., catalyst, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 502 wherein part or all of the synthesis
    takes place in the presence of a material which chemically effects the
    synthesis by promoting, retarding, etc., but which does not form a part of
    the desired product and is, at least in theory, separable from the desired
    reaction products.  The agent may be a catalyst, solvent, etc., and is
    inorganic or is an organic material containing other elements than carbon
    and hydrogen.

    (1)     Note.  Where the claims recite merely a "polymerization" process
    but there appears to be a clear intent to maximize the production of a
    particular compound, e.g., a dimer, etc., the patent is placed in
    subclasses 510+ and cross-referenced here (subclasses 520+) when
    appropriate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403,    503, 537, 636, and 920, for hydrocarbon syntheses which employ
    apparatus of recited composition, in some cases the composition (e.g., a
    reactor lining) being or containing a catalyst agent.

    507,    for a process wherein polyolefins are reacted in the presence of a
    catalyst.

    510+,   for a process wherein olefins are reacted in the presence of a
    catalyst to produce definite molecular weight products.


CLS 585/521
TXT Hydride or organic compound or complex containing alkaline-, B-, or
    Zn-group material:

    Subject matter under subclass 520 catalyzed by a material containing
    lithium, sodium, potassium, rubidium, beryllium, magnesium, calcium,
    strontium, barium, boron, aluminum, gallium, indium, thallium, zinc,
    cadmium, or mercury in the form of a hydride, an organic compound, or an
    inorganic compound complexed with an organic material.


CLS 585/522
TXT Al trialkyl:

    Subject matter under subclass 521 wherein the catalyst includes an alkyl
    aluminum compound having three alkyl moieties for each atom of aluminum
    therein, e.g., triethylaluminum, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    328,    for a process for producing an olefin in which a step of removing
    an olefin product from an aluminum alkyl "growth" product compound, by
    displacement with a different olefin after the "growth" step, is positively
    recited.


CLS 585/523
TXT Transition metal-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 521 wherein the catalyst contains one or more
    transition metals in free or combined form.

    (1)     Note.  A transition metal is one in which an inner electron shell,
    rather than an outer shell, is partially filled.  In the periodic table
    transition metals include elements 21 through 30 (scandium through zinc),
    39 through 48 (yttrium through cadmium), 57 through 80 (lanthanum through
    mercury), and 89 through 103 (actinium through lawrencium).


CLS 585/524
TXT Ti:

    Subject matter under subclass 523 wherein the catalyst contains titanium in
    free or combined form.


CLS 585/525
TXT B-containing catalyst:

    Subject matter under subclass 520 catalyzed by a material containing boron
    in free or combined form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    521+,   for a similar process catalyzed by a material having a boron
    component complexed with an organic material.


CLS 585/526
TXT S-containing catalyst:

    Subject matter under subclass 520 catalyzed by a material containing sulfur
    in free or combined form.


CLS 585/527
TXT N- or P-containing catalyst:

    Subject matter under subclass 520 catalyzed by a material containing
    nitrogen or phosphorus in free or combined form.


CLS 585/528
TXT Metal phosphate:

    Subject matter under subclass 527 wherein the phosphorus compound is a
    metal phosphate.


CLS 585/529
TXT P compound on solid carrier, e.g., "solid phosphoric acid", etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 527 wherein a phosphorus compound is
    supported on a solid carrier.

    (1)     Note.  The designation of the catalyst as "solid phosphoric acid"
    is sufficient for placement in this subclass.


CLS 585/530
TXT Catalyst containing inorganic metal:
    Subject matter under subclass 520 catalyzed by a material containing
    elemental metal or a metal compound devoid of organic moieties.


CLS 585/531
TXT Group VIII metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 530 wherein the catalyst contains iron,
    cobalt, nickel, ruthenium, rhodium, palladium, osmium, iridium, or platinum
    in free or combined form.


CLS 585/532
TXT Al:

    Subject matter under subclass 530 wherein the catalyst contains aluminum.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    521+,   for an olefin-yielding polymerization process which uses as a
    catalyst a complex of an aluminum halide with an organic compound, e.g.,
    alkylation sludge.


CLS 585/533
TXT Al oxide, e.g., aluminosilicate, etc.:
    Subject matter under subclass 532 catalyzed by a material containing an
    inorganic compound of aluminum and oxygen.

    (1)     Note.  The compound may contain only aluminum and oxygen, or other
    materials as well, e.g., an aluminosilicate, etc.


CLS 585/534
TXT Triple-bond product:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein the unsaturated hydrocarbon
    product is one having acetylenic unsaturation.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass (534) is the locus for patents wherein an
    acetylenic product is made from an inorganic material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    505,    for production of an acetylenically unsaturated material by
    polymerization.

    943,    for a collection of patents disclosing the manufacture of
    hydrocarbons from inorganic materials.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, appropriate subclasses for methods
    and apparatus for manufacture of a fuel gas mixture containing acetylene
    and other components.


CLS 585/535
TXT With heat conservation or using solid inert heat carrier, e.g.,
    regenerative furnace, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 534 wherein heat generated in the process,
    e.g., by reaction, catalyst regeneration, adsorded by quenching reactants,
    etc., is put to use in the process or wherein an inert solid material is
    employed to supply heat to the synthesis reaction or to absorb heat from
    the synthesis reaction.

    (1)     Note.  Patents placed herein are not  cross-referenced to
    subclasses 910+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402,    503, 602, and 634, for aromatic synthesis, olefin condensation,
    diolefin synthesis, and saturated compound synthesis, respectively, using
    similar techniques.

    910+,   for a collection of patents where similar techniques are employed
    in other syntheses.


CLS 585/536
TXT With carrier movement through reaction zone:

    Subject matter under subclass 535 wherein the heat carrier, usually in
    particulate form, e.g., pebbles, etc., passes into and out of the reaction
    zone during the reaction.


CLS 585/537
TXT Using apparatus of recited composition:
    Subject matter under subclass 534 wherein the process recites the
    composition of apparatus employed in the process, e.g., a stainless steel
    reactor wall, a refractory ceramic baffle, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Materials which move through or are readily removable from
    the apparatus, e.g., catalyst beds, are not considered part of the
    apparatus for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403,    503 and 537, for aromatic synthesis, olefin polymerization, and
    monoolefin synthesis, respectively, using apparatus of recited composition.

    920,    for a collection of patents using such apparatus in other processes.

    921+,   for a collection of patents in which the effectiveness of a process
    depends upon the use of apparatus having a defined structure configuration,
    independent of the composition of the structure.


CLS 585/538
TXT From organic nontriple-bond feed:

    Subject matter under subclass 534 wherein the carbon content of the product
    is derived from a starting material which comprises an organic compound
    which is without acetylenic unsaturation.

    (1)     Note.  Where a feedstock is described merely as a "hydrocarbon", it
    is assumed that the feedstock is nontriple-bond.


CLS 585/539
TXT By thermal conversion of hydrocarbon, i.e., thermolysis:

    Subject matter under subclass 538 wherein the conversion is effected
    without a catalyst or hydrogen acceptor by application of heat.  The feed
    may have higher, lower, or the same number of carbon atoms as the product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    648+,   for a pyrolysis process similar to those included herein, where
    triple-bond materials may be produced but are not the desired product.

    943,    for a collection of patents wherein methane or an inorganic
    material is a starting material for synthesis of hydrocarbons.  Patents
    classified herein are not cross-referenced to subclass 943.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclasses 216+ for methods of
    generating acetylene in admixture with other gases.


CLS 585/540
TXT By partial combustion of hydrocarbons:
    Subject matter under subclass 538 wherein a hydrocarbon is converted by
    reaction with oxygen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    621+    and 656+, for dehydrogenation processes which employ an elemental
    oxygen hydrogen acceptor to produce diolefins and monoolefins, respectively.


CLS 585/541
TXT Using extraneous nonreactant, e.g., diluent, catalyst, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 540 wherein a material in addition to oxygen
    and the hydrocarbon which supplies the atoms recovered in the product is
    introduced into the reaction zone to influence the reaction.  The
    additional material may be a fuel, diluent, inhibitor, catalyst, etc.


CLS 585/600
TXT Product having more than two double bonds: Subject matter under subclass
    500 wherein the synthesis operation produces a compound having more than
    two olefinically unsaturated bonds in the molecule.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    507+,   for a polymerization process having such a product.


CLS 585/601
TXT Diolefin product:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein the synthesis operation produces
    a compound having two olefinically unsaturated bonds in the molecule.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass (601) is the locus for conversion of a triple
    bond to two double bonds, e.g., methyl acetylene to allene, etc., and for
    double bond shift isomerization to form a diolefin.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    377+    and 664+, for the synthesis, by double bond shift, of cycloolefins
    and monoolefins, respectively.


CLS 585/602
TXT With heat conservation or using solid inert heat carrier, e.g.,
    regenerative furnace, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 601 wherein heat generated in the process,
    e.g., by reaction, catalyst regeneration, adsorbed by quenching reactants,
    etc., is put to use in the process or wherein an inert solid material is
    employed to supply heat to the synthesis reaction or to absorb heat from
    the synthesis reaction.

    (1)     Note.  Patents placed herein are not cross referenced to subclass
    910.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402,    503, 535, and 634, for aromatic synthesis, olefin condensation,
    alkyne synthesis, and saturated compound syntheses, respectively, using
    similar techniques.

    910,    for a collection of patents where similar techniques are employed
    in other syntheses.


CLS 585/603
TXT From nonhydrocarbon feed:

    Subject matter under subclass 601 wherein a feedstock compound, which
    furnished carbon atoms appearing in the final product, contains atoms other
    than carbon and hydrogen.


CLS 585/604
TXT Heterocyclic:

    Subject matter under subclass 603 wherein the nonhydrocarbon feedstock is a
    cyclic material containing an atom other than carbon in the ring, e.g.,
    dioxane.


CLS 585/605
TXT Using P-containing catalyst:

    Subject matter under subclass 604 catalyzed by a material containing
    phosphorus in free or combined form.


CLS 585/606
TXT O-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 603 wherein the nonhydrocarbon contains
    oxygen.


CLS 585/607
TXT Plural O-containing organic compounds:
    Subject matter under subclass 606 wherein at least two organic compounds of
    the feedstock, each compound containing oxygen, contribute carbon atoms to
    the final product.


CLS 585/608
TXT With unsaturated hydrocarbon in feed:
    Subject matter under subclass 606 wherein the feedstock to the synthesis
    also contains a hydrocarbon having olefinic or acetylenic unsaturation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257,    433, 440+, 616, and 656+, for hydrogen-exchange disproportionation
    processes.


CLS 585/609
TXT Alcohol:

    Subject matter under subclass 606 wherein the oxygen-containing compound
    has a hydroxyl (-OH) group.


CLS 585/610
TXT Diol:

    Subject matter under subclass 609 having two -C-O-H groups or a H-O-C-O-H
    group.


CLS 585/611
TXT Using P-containing catalyst:

    Subject matter under subclass 610 catalyzed by a material containing
    phosphorus in free or combined form.


CLS 585/612
TXT Halogen-containing feed using extraneous nonhydrocarbon agent:

    Subject matter under subclass 603 wherein a feedstock compound contains
    fluorine, chlorine, bromine, or iodine and part or all of the synthesis
    takes place in the presence of a material which chemically affects the
    synthesis by promoting, retarding, etc., but which does not form a part of
    the desired product and is, at least in theory, separable from the desired
    reaction products.  The agent may be a catalyst, solvent, etc., and is
    inorganic or is an organic material containing other elements than carbon
    and hydrogen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403,    503, 537, 636, and 920, for processes which employ apparatus of
    recited compositions, in some cases the composition (e.g., a reactor
    lining) being or containing a catalytic agent.


CLS 585/613
TXT By C content reduction, e.g., cracking, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 601 wherein the product diolefin molecule
    contains fewer carbon atoms than a feedstock hydrocarbon molecule.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    476+,   539, 648+, and 752, for cracking processes which yield aromatic,
    acetylenic, monoolefinic and paraffinic hydrocarbons, respectively.


CLS 585/614
TXT Isoprene product, per se:

    Subject matter under subclass 613 wherein the product recovered is
    isoprene, i.e.,



    (1)     Note this subclass is the locus for the production of isoprene by
    depolymerization of terpenes.


CLS 585/615
TXT Butadiene product, per se:

    Subject matter under subclass 613 wherein the product recovered is
    butadiene, i.e.,

    H2  C=CH-CH=CH2.


CLS 585/616
TXT By dehydrogenation:
    Subject matter under subclass 601 wherein hydrogen is removed from a
    feedstock to synthesize the diolefin product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257,    for a process where a hydrocarbon is dehydrogenated by transfer of
    hydrogen to another hydrocarbon, the acceptor compound being a material
    desired for recovery.

    430,    440+ and 654+, for dehydrogenation processes for the production of
    other types of hydrocarbon.

    613,    for a diolefin synthesis process which includes carbon removal as
    well as hydrogen removal.


CLS 585/617
TXT Using nonhydrocarbon acceptor:

    Subject matter under subclass 616 wherein the process employs a material
    which reacts with the hydrogen removed from a feed molecule thereby
    synthesizing a compound containing the removed hydrogen and different from
    the added material.

    (1)     Note.  These processes sometimes use a solid acceptor material
    which, after it is no longer of satisfactory activity, may be regenerated.
    While this acceptor material may sometimes be called a catalyst it is
    distinguishable from a true catalyst by the stoichiometric proportions used
    and by the fact the hydrogen is removed from the process as a compound
    containing some or all of the atoms brought into the process by the
    acceptor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    900,    for a collection of patents which disclose processing of a used
    hydrogen acceptor to put it into condition for further use in
    dehydrogenation of a hydrocarbon.


CLS 585/618
TXT Halogen-containing acceptor with elemental O:

    Subject matter under subclass 617 wherein the acceptor is halogen or a
    halogen-containing compound and elemental oxygen is included in the
    dehydrogenation reaction mixture.


CLS 585/619
TXT Halogen is I only:

    Subject matter under subclass 618 wherein the halogen material used is
    restricted to iodine.


CLS 585/620
TXT Halogen is C1 only:

    Subject matter under subclass 618 in which the halogen material used is
    restricted to chlorine.


CLS 585/621
TXT Elemental O acceptor:

    Subject matter under subclass 617 wherein the acceptor is oxygen which
    enters the process in free or uncombined form.

    (1)     Note.  A process which described as "oxidative dehydrogenation" is
    presumed to use an elemental oxygen acceptor.


CLS 585/622
TXT With P containing extraneous agent:

    Subject matter under subclass 621 wherein the process employs an extraneous
    agent, that is, a material which does not supply atoms to the final product
    or by-product, which contains phosphorus in free or combined form.


CLS 585/623
TXT Sn-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 622 in which the agent(s) include(s) tin.


CLS 585/624
TXT With metal oxide or hydroxide extraneous agent:

    Subject matter under subclass 621 wherein the process employs an extraneous
    agent, that is, a material which does not supply atoms to the final product
    or by-product, which contains metal in the form of an oxide or hydroxide.


CLS 585/625
TXT Ferrite:

    Subject matter under subclass 624 in which the agent is a compound of
    trivalent iron oxide with a basic oxide.

    (1)     Note.  Ferrites are insoluble substances of spinel type which are
    prepared synthetically by fusion without water or occur in nature.  The
    term "ferrite" is also applied to certain salts which contain tetra- and
    quinque-position iron, e.g., BaFeO3, which is a black powder formed when
    barium and ferric hydroxides are heated together in oxygen.  See Miall et
    al., A New Dictionary Of Chemistry, 4th Edition, p. 239, Longman Group
    Limited, 1968.


CLS 585/626
TXT Oxide of As, Bi, or  Sb:

    Subject matter under subclass 624 wherein a metal oxide is arsenic oxide,
    antimony oxide, or bismuth oxide.


CLS 585/627
TXT Using extraneous nonhydrocarbon agent, e.g., catalyst, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 616 wherein part or all of the synthesis
    takes place in the presence to a material which chemically affects the
    synthesis by promoting, retarding, etc., but which does not form a part of
    the desired product and is, at least in theory, separable from the desired
    reaction products.  The agent may be a catalyst, solvent, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403,    503, 537, 636, and 920, for processes which employ apparatus of
    recited composition, in some cases the composition (e.g., a reactor lining)
    being or containing a catalytic agent.


CLS 585/628
TXT Moving catalyst or plural stage:

    Subject matter under subclass 627 wherein the effluent from one
    dehydrogenation procedure is sent to another, different dehydrogenation
    procedure or in which a solid material (including fluent solids) is
    specified as moving during the process, that is, moving within, or into, or
    out of the reactor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    330,    for a process in which the effluent from a dehydrogenation step is
    sent to a polymerization step.


CLS 585/629
TXT Transition metal oxide or sulfide agent:
    Subject matter under subclass 627 wherein a compound of one or more
    transition metals with oxygen only or sulfur only is an extraneous agent.

    (1)     Note.  A transition metal is one in which an inner electron shell,
    rather than an outer shell, is partially filled.  In the periodic table
    transition metals include elements 21 through 30 (sandium through zinc), 39
    through 48 (yttrium through cadmium), 57 through 80 (lanthanum through
    mercury), and 89 through 103 (actinium through lawrencium).


CLS 585/630
TXT Cr, Mo, or W:

    Subject matter under subclass 629 wherein a transition metal is chromium,
    molybdenum, or tungsten.


CLS 585/631
TXT With other transition metal:

    Subject atter under subclass 630 wherein the chromium, molybdenum, and/or
    tungsten compound is associated with a compound of a transition metal from
    a group other than Group VI.


CLS 585/632
TXT Metal salt agent:

    Subject matter under subclass 627 in which an agent is an ionizable
    compound having a metal cation and an anion other than hydroxyl.


CLS 585/633
TXT Plural stage or with specified quench or separation procedure:

    Subject matter under subclass 616 wherein a dehydrogenation reactor
    effluent material is passed to another dehydrogenation reaction or stage to
    a temperature reduction stage or to a separation procedure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    330,    for a process in which the effluent from a dehydrogenation step is
    sent to a polymerization step.

    654+,   for a process of monoolefin synthesis by dehydrogenation, which
    process may often be equivalent to the first stage of processes contained
    herein (subclass 633).


CLS 585/634
TXT With heat conservation or using solid or molten inert heat carrier, e.g.,
    regenerative furnace, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein a synthesis process includes the
    withdrawal of heat from an exothermic part of the process, e.g., catalyst
    regeneration, quenching of reaction products, etc., and transfer of this
    heat to an endothermic part of the process, e.g., feed-stream preheating,
    dehydrogenation, etc., or in which heat is conveyed to an endothermic part
    of the process by preheating a solid or melted solid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402,    602, 616, and 910, for heat conservation in other hydrocarbon
    syntheses.


CLS 585/635
TXT With carrier movement through reaction zone or use in quenching:

    Subject matter under subclass 634 in which the solid or molten heat carrier
    enters and exits from the reaction zone during the synthesis reaction or in
    which the carrier is contacted with a reaction effluent to cool the
    effluent stream.


CLS 585/636
TXT Using apparatus of recited composition:
    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein the process recites the
    composition of apparatus employed in the process, e.g., a stainless steel
    reactor wall, a refractory ceramic baffle, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Materials which move through or are readily removable from
    the apparatus, e.g., catalyst beds, are not considered part of the
    apparatus for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403,    503 and 537, for aromatic synthesis, olefin polymerization, and
    alkyne syntheses, respectively, using apparatus of recited composition.

    920,    for a collection of patents using such apparatus in other processes.

    921+,   for a collection of patents in which the effectiveness of a process
    depends upon the use of apparatus having a defined structural
    configuration, independent of the composition of the structure.

    950,    for a collection of patents disclosing prevention of solid deposits
    on apparatus by forming a permanent or temporary protective coating of
    named composition on surfaces of same.


CLS 585/637
TXT By displacement of hydrocarbon radical by hydrocarbon molecule:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 in which the carbon content of the
    unsaturated material, which is a product of the process, enters the process
    as a

    substituent of a larger molecule from which the substituent is displaced by
    an entire hydrocarbon molecule which becomes a radical, e.g.,

    diagram

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    328,    for a process which includes the synthesis of the substituent,
    e.g., a "growth" reaction, before displacement.


CLS 585/638
TXT From nonhydrocarbon feed:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein an olefin is produced from a
    feedstock molecule which contains another element in addition to carbon and
    hydrogen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    357,    469, 603+, and 733, for the production in general, from
    nonhydrocarbon feedstocks, of alicyclic, aromatic, diolefin, and paraffin
    products, respectively.

    930+,   for collections of patents which include the production of a
    nonhydrocarbon intermediate.


CLS 585/639
TXT Alcohol, ester, or ether:

    Subject matter under subclass 638 wherein a nonhydrocarbon feedstock
    molecule is an alcohol, an ether, or an ester.

    (1)     Note.  An acid extract of an olefin which requires "decomposition"
    for recovery of the olefin usually is an ester.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    311     and 710, for synthesis processes, one step of which may be
    liberation of an olefin from an ester of a catalytic acid.

    858+,   for a purification process which may involve liberation of an
    olefin from its sulfate ester.


CLS 585/640
TXT Using metal oxide catalyst:

    Subject matter under subclass 639 wherein a catalyst containing a metal
    oxide is employed.


CLS 585/641
TXT Halogen-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 638 wherein a nonhydrocarbon feedstock
    molecule contains fluorine, chlorine, bromine, or iodine.


CLS 585/642
TXT Using acid, metal oxide, or salt catalyst:
    Subject matter under subclass 641 wherein a catalyst is used which contains
    acid, metal oxide, or a metal salt.


CLS 585/643
TXT By alkyl transfer, e.g., disproportionation, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 in which an alkyl or alkenyl moiety of a
    molecule is transferred to another molecule.

    (1)     Note.  Patents are classified herein on the basis of the net result
    of the process, regardless of the mechanism involved, that is, the process
    may proceed by dimerization and cracking, as well as by free-radical
    transfer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    368,    433, 440, 616, and 656, for disproportionation reactions involving
    the transfer of hydrogen between hydrocarbon molecules or hydrocarbyl
    moieties.

    446+    and 709+, for the condensation of two entire molecules or
    hydrocarbyl moieties to give an alkylated product.

    477,    671 and 734, for a process wherein an alkyl attached to one carbon
    of a molecule is shifted to another carbon of the same molecule.

    470+    and 708, for alkyl or alkenyl transfer processes resulting in
    aromatic and saturated products, respectively.


CLS 585/644
TXT Plural stage or averaging:

    Subject matter under subclass 643 in which the effluent from an alkyl
    transfer reaction or stage is sent to another alkyl transfer reaction or
    stage or in which olefins of at least two different carbon contents are
    reacted to produce olefin material having a carbon content numbering
    between the carbon content numbers of the starting olefins.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    474,    for averaging processes applied to aromatic hydrocarbons.


CLS 585/645
TXT Using organic extraneous agent:

    Subject matter under subclass 643 wherein a part or all of the synthesis
    takes place in the presence of an organic material which chemically affects
    the synthesis by promoting, retarding, etc., but which does not form a part
    of the desired product and is, at least in theory, separable from the
    desired reaction products.  The agent may be a catalyst, solvent, etc.


CLS 585/646
TXT Using catalyst containing Mo, W, or Re and another transition metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 643 wherein the reaction employs as a
    catalyst a material containing molybdenum, tungsten, or rhenium and in
    addition a transition metal other than these three.

    (1)     Note.  A transition metal is one in which an inner electron shell,
    rather than an outer shell, is partially filled.  In the periodic table
    transition metals include elements 21 through 30 (scandium through zinc),
    39 through 48 (yttrium through cadmium), 57 through 80 (lanthanum through
    mercury), and 89 through 103 (actinium through lawrencium).


CLS 585/647
TXT Using Re-containing catalyst:

    Subject matter under subclass 643 wherein the reaction employs a catalyst
    containing rhenium and free from other transition metals.


CLS 585/648
TXT By C content reduction, e.g., cracking, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein the feed to the reaction contains
    more carbon atoms in its molecule than the product contains.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    439     and 476, for cracking processes which produce an aromatic product.

    500,    for cracking processes which produce a triple-bond product.

    752,    for cracking processes which produce a paraffin product.


CLS 585/649
TXT Isobutylene product, per se:

    Subject matter under subclass 648 wherein isobutylene (H3C-CH3) is produced
    for example, by depolymerization of poly-butylene.

    (1)     Note.  The expression, "per se", is meant to include product
    mixtures which contain isobutylene as a desired product and to exclude
    derivatives of isobutylene.


CLS 585/650
TXT Ethylene product, per se:

    Subject matter under subclass 648 wherein ethylene is produced.

    (1)     Note.  The expression, "per se", is meant to include product
    mixtures which contain ethylene as a desired product and to exclude
    derivatives of ethylene.


CLS 585/651
TXT Using catalyst:

    Subject matter under subclass 650 wherein the process employs a catalyst.


CLS 585/652
TXT Using O (partial combustion) or steam:
    Subject matter under subclass 650 wherein steam (usually superheated steam)
    is mixed with the feed or with the reaction effluent for heating or other
    purposes or wherein elemental oxygen is employed in the reaction.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include indirect heating or cooling
    where the medium passing through the coil is steam.

    (2)     Note.  The oxygen must react with molecules which supply the atoms
    of the final product; the mere use of oxygen-containing gas to burn a fuel,
    which combustion merely supplies heat to the reaction, is not sufficient
    for placement of a patent herein.


CLS 585/653
TXT Using catalyst:

    Subject matter under subclass 648 wherein a catalyst is employed in the
    reaction.


CLS 585/654
TXT By dehydrogenation:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein a monoolefin is produced by
    removing hydrogen from a molecule.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    330,    for a process wherein a material is dehydrogenated before
    polymerization.

    430,    440 and 603, for dehydrogenation processes yielding aromatics and
    diolefins.


CLS 585/655
TXT With plural separation procedures applied to effluent or effluent component:

    Subject matter under subclass 654 wherein the effluent from the
    dehydrogenation reaction or a component thereof passes through at least two
    separation steps.

    (1)     Note.  A mere nominal "recovery" or "separating" step is not
    sufficient to warrant placement of a patent herein.

    (2)     Note.  Many patents contained herein seek to recover a separate
    hydrocarbon in addition to the main dehydrogenation product.


CLS 585/656
TXT Using acceptor, e.g., hydrogen-exchange disproportionation, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 654 wherein the dehydrogenation employs an
    element or compound which chemically reacts with the removed hydrogen,
    being itself thereby changed to a more hydrogenated material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257,    for a process wherein a hydrocarbon is the acceptor and the more
    hydrogenated hydrocarbon is a desired product.

    433     and 617+, for similar processes yielding aromatics and diolefins,
    respectively.


CLS 585/657
TXT Halogen-containing acceptor:

    Subject matter under subclass 656 in which the removed hydrogen combines
    with free halogen or a halogen-containing compound.

    (1)     Note.  The reaction mixture may contain an agent for synthesizing
    elemental halogen in stoichiometric amounts in situ from a halogen
    compound, e.g., oxygen + HC1, etc.


CLS 585/658
TXT Elemental O or S acceptor with extraneous nonhydrocarbon agent, e.g.,
    catalyst, etc.: Subject matter under subclass 656 wherein the removed
    hydrogen combines with free oxygen and part or all of the synthesis takes
    place in the presence of a material which chemically affects the synthesis
    by promoting, retarding, etc., but which does not form a part of the
    desired product and is, at least in theory, separable from the desired
    reaction products.  The agent may be a catalyst, solvent, etc.


CLS 585/659
TXT Plural stages or with catalyst movement:
    Subject matter under subclass 654 wherein the effluent from a
    dehydrogenation reaction stage is passed to another dehydrogenation
    reaction stage or in which movement of solid extraneous agent is described.


CLS 585/660
TXT Using extraneous agent containing Pt-group metal and non-Pt-group metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 654 wherein the synthesis takes place in the
    presence of an agent which comprises at least two metals, one of which is
    iridium, osmium, platinum, palladium, rhodium, or ruthenium and the other
    of which is a metal different from those listed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403,    503, 537, 636, and 920, for processes which employ apparatus of
    recited composition, in some cases the composition (e.g., a reactor lining)
    being or containing a catalytic agent.


CLS 585/661
TXT Using transition metal oxide, sulfide, or salt:

    Subject matter under subclass 654 in which the synthesis takes place in the
    presence of an oxide, sulfide, or a salt containing a metal in which an
    inner electron shell, rather than an outer shell, is partially filled.  In
    the periodic table transition metals include elements 21 through 30
    (scandium through zinc), 39 through 48 (yttrium through cadmium), 57
    through 80 (lanthanum through mercury), and 89 through 103 (actinium
    through lawrencium).

    (1)     Note.  The transition metal may appear in the anion of a metal salt
    catalyst.


CLS 585/662
TXT Cr, Mo, or W:

    Subject matter under subclass 661 in which the transition metal of the
    oxide, sulfide, or salt is chromium, molybdenum, or tungsten.


CLS 585/663
TXT With other transition metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 662 in which the chromium molybdenum or
    tungsten metal, oxide, or sulfide is employed in combination with another
    transition metal oxide or sulfide.


CLS 585/664
TXT By double-bond-shift isomerization:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein the olefinic unsaturation (double
    bond) of a feed monoolefin molecule shifts to another position in the
    hydrocarbon molecule.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    377+    and 601+, for the synthesis by a double-bond-shift, of cycloolefins
    and diolefins, respectively.


CLS 585/665
TXT Using organometallic catalyst:

    Subject matter under subclass 664 wherein the process employs a catalyst
    which comprises a compound containing both a metal and an organic moiety.

    (1)     Note.  A metal is any element of the periodic table other than
    hydrogen, a noble gas, a halogen, a chalcogen, nitrogen, phosphorus,
    carbon, silicon, or boron.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    669,    for a process in which the catalyst comprises aluminum halide
    complexed with a hydrocarbon.


CLS 585/666
TXT Using aluminosilicate catalyst:

    Subject matter under subclass 664 in which an aluminosilicate composition
    such as a zeolite, clay, etc., is employed.

    (1)     Note.  The aluminosilicate may be naturally occurring or
    synthetically formed, and often has a crystalline structure which may be
    modified in some way to remove or add a constituent, for example, by ion
    exchange or by impregnation techniques.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    377,    for double-bond isomerization of an alicyclic in which an
    aluminosilicate catalyst is employed.

    518,    for isomerization of aromatic hydrocarbons in which an
    aluminosilicate catalyst is employed.

    671,    for olefin skeletal isomerization reactions in which
    aluminosilicate is used.

    739,    for paraffin skeletal isomerization reactions in which
    aluminosilicate is used.


CLS 585/667
TXT Using P-containing catalyst:

    Subject matter under subclass 664 wherein the catalyst contains phosphorus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    740,    for a process in which a phosphorus-containing catalyst is utilized
    to effect a change in the skeletal structure of a paraffin molecule.


CLS 585/668
TXT Using S-containing catalyst:

    Subject matter under subclass 664 wherein sulfur is present in the catalyst.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    734+,   in which a sulfur-containing catalyst may be utilized to effect a
    change in the molecular skeletal structure of a paraffin molecule.


CLS 585/669
TXT Using halogen-containing catalyst:

    Subject matter under subclass 664 wherein the reaction employs a catalyst
    containing fluorine, chlorine, bromine, or iodine in elemental or combined
    form.


CLS 585/670
TXT Using transition metal-containing catalyst: Subject matter under subclass
    664 wherein a catalyst is employed which contains a transition metal in
    free or combined form.

    (1)     Note.  The transition metals are elements in which an inner
    electron shell, rather than an outer shell, is partially filled.  In the
    periodic table they include elements 21 through 30 (scandium through zinc),
    39 through 48 (yttrium through cadmium), 57 through 80 (lanthanum through
    mercury), and 89 through 103 (actinium through lawrencium).


CLS 585/671
TXT By skeletal isomerization:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein a monoolefin hydrocarbon
    undergoes a skeletal rearrangement of its carbon atoms.

    (1)     Note.  The hydrocarbon may go from a straight chain configuration
    to a branched configuration, from a less branched to a more branched
    configuration, or it may go in the reverse order from a more branched to a
    less branched or to a straight configuration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    350,    477, 601, and 734+, for skeletal isomerization reactions which
    produce alicyclic, aromatic, diolefin, and paraffin products, respectively.

    371+,   for skeletal isomerization which results in enlarging or
    contracting an alicyclic ring.

    375+,   470+, 643+, and 708, for processes in which a hydrocarbyl moiety
    from one molecule is transferred to another molecule to produce an
    alicyclic, aromatic, olefinic, or paraffin compound, respectively.


CLS 585/700
TXT SATURATED COMPOUND SYNTHESIS:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which a hydrocarbon molecule
    is produced which has no ring configuration and is saturated with hydrogen,
    that is, of the formula CnH2n+2 which molecule was not present as the same
    structurally or empirically identical molecule at the beginning of the
    process.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass (700) is the locus for paraffin synthesis
    processes not provided for below, e.g., by condensation of saturated
    hydrocarbons, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16,     for saturated hydrocarbon products.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 157.15+ for
    chemical synthesis of a hydrocarbon compound by utilizing wave energy and
    subclasses 168+ for chemical synthesis of a hydrocarbon compound by
    utilizing an electrostatic field or electrical discharge.

    518,    Chemistry:  Fischer-Tropsch Processes: or Purification or Recovery
    of Products Thereof, for hydrogenation of carbon oxides.


CLS 585/701
TXT With measuring, sensing, testing, or synthesis operation control responsive
    to diverse condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein the process involves a definitely
    recited step of measuring, analyzing, etc., a condition of parameter of the
    process or in which a condition of the synthesis operation, e.g.,
    temperature, etc., is adjusted in accordance with a different aspect of the
    synthesis, e.g., strength of catalyst, etc.

    (1)     Note.  A process in which the same operating condition is
    controlled e.g., adding heat to a reaction in response to a temperature
    drop in the reaction zone, is not included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    401     and 501, for similar procedures employed in the synthesis of
    aromatic and unsaturated hydrocarbon compounds, respectively.

    956,    for a collection of patents disclosing such procedures in other
    aspects of hydrocarbon processing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, for processes and apparatus for making a
    measurement or test of any kind not claimed in combination with synthesis
    of an organic compound and not elsewhere classifiable; and the Class
    Definition thereof for the identification of other classes concerned with
    testing.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 1+ for
    a test or measurement associated with a chemical reaction not elsewhere
    classifiable, or analysis, by chemical methods, of organic material.


CLS 585/702
TXT Synthesis catalyst, solvent, or component thereof used as agent in
    hydrocarbon purification or separation:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 in which a material which is a catalyst
    or solvent or component thereof already used, or to be used, in a synthesis
    operation is used as an agent for treating a hydrocarbon to improve the
    hydrocarbon by removing or making innocuous undesired materials contained
    in the hydrocarbon.

    (1)     Note.  Where a catalyst or solvent used in a first hydrocarbon
    synthesis is further used in a second hydrocarbon synthesis, which second
    synthesis may result in separating out the catalyst from an additional
    hydrocarbon product, the second synthesis is not considered to be a
    separation treatment for this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The material used in the two treatments must be the same
    material, not merely two different batches of material having the same
    composition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    301,    for a process in which the same catalyst, solvent, or component
    thereof is used in plural parallel syntheses.

    311     and 312, for plural diverse serial syntheses which use the same
    catalyst or in which one synthesis rehabilitates the catalyst for the other
    synthesis, respectively.


CLS 585/703
TXT By interaction with nonhydrocarbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 702 in which the used or to-be-used catalyst
    interacts with a nonhydrocarbon to separate the nonhydrocarbon from the
    hydrocarbon.

    (1)     Note.  The separating action may be "physical", that is, adsorption
    or dissolving the nonhydrocarbon, or may be "chemical", that is, a reaction
    with the nonhydrocarbon, catalyzing a reaction of the nonhydrocarbon, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Where the interaction of the catalyst is with both a
    hydrocarbon component and a nonhydrocarbon component, the patent is placed
    in subclass 702 and cross-referenced here.


CLS 585/704
TXT With control of water content of recycled catalyst:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 in which catalytic material from a
    paraffin synthesis is recycled to the synthesis and during the recycle the
    water content of the catalyst is adjusted, e.g., by water removal, etc.


CLS 585/705
TXT With removal of catalyst component from metal-hydrocarbon complex:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein a metal-hydrocarbon sludge
    resulting from a paraffin synthesis is treated to remove catalyst component
    therefrom, usually for recycle of the component.

    (1)     Note.  The removed component need not be metal containing.

    (2)     Note.  The removed component need not be part of the complex but
    may be merely entrained or dissolved therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    240,    for the treatment of waste sludge to recover a hydrocarbon mixture
    therefrom, usually for use as a fuel, etc.


CLS 585/706
TXT With addition of reactor effluent component to catalyst as agent for
    rehabilitation or recycle:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein a catalyst or catalyst component
    is rehabilitated (reactivated) and/or recycled to the paraffin synthesis
    reaction by adding to the catalytic material a portion of the reactor
    effluent, e.g., an unreacted feed fraction, etc., usually for use in
    transporting the catalyst.

    (1)     Note.  The process generally will involve treatment of a reactor
    effluent to separate the components of the effluent and a recombination of
    a component rich in catalyst with another component poor in catalyst or
    free of catalyst.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    718,    719 and 738, for paraffin synthesis processes involving effluent
    separation procedures.


CLS 585/707
TXT With specified procedure for adding fresh makeup catalyst component to
    complex (sludge), support, or inert contact material:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 in which the catalytic activity of a
    liquid or solid, usually inactive or less active, component of a paraffin
    synthesis catalyst is boosted by compositing fresh makeup catalyst
    therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    702,    for a paraffin synthesis process in which a support material is
    used to separate active catalyst component from a product mixture,
    resulting, incidentally, in a reconstituted catalyst composition.

    705,    for a paraffin synthesis process in which a catalyst component is
    removed from a metal-hydrocarbon complex.


CLS 585/708
TXT By alkyl transfer, e.g., disproportionation, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 in which an alkyl moiety of a molecule is
    transferred to another molecule.

    (1)     Note.  Patents are classified herein on the basis of the net result
    of the process, regardless of the mechanism involved, that is, the process
    may proceed by dimerization and cracking, as well as by free-radical
    transfer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    257,    433, 440, 616, and 656, for disproportionation reactions involving
    the transfer of hydrogen between hydrocarbon molecules or hydrocarbyl
    moieties.

    470+    and 643+, for alkyl or alkenyl transfer processes resulting in
    aromatic and insaturated products, respectively.


CLS 585/709
TXT By condensation of a paraffin molecule with an olefin-acting molecule,
    e.g., alkylation, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 in which a paraffin molecule and an
    olefin molecule or the entire hydrocarbyl moiety of a nonhydrocarbon
    molecule are joined into a single molecule.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    422+,   for a process wherein two aromatic molecules are joined.

    446+,   for a process wherein an alkyl moiety is joined to an aromatic
    molecule.

    502+,   for a process wherein two or more unsaturated hydrocarbon molecules
    are joined.

    708,    for a process wherein a hydrocarbon molecule and part of the
    hydrocarbon moiety of another molecule are joined (alkyl transfer).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 133+ for
    processes of reforming mineral oils which may include alkylation reactions.


CLS 585/710
TXT With catalyst rehabilitation by reversion from different compound or HF
    complex:Subject matter under subclass 709 wherein the alkylation effluent
    or a component thereof is treated to cause a chemical reaction, this
    reaction serving to form a chemical compound, suitable for use as a
    catalytic agent or catalyst component in subsequent alkylation reactions,
    the compound containing atoms which entered the original alkylation as part
    of the catalyst.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    311,    for a similar process in which the chemical reaction serves also
    for hydrocarbon synthesis.

    705,    for a paraffin synthesis which involves removal of a catalyst
    component from a metal-hydrocarbon complex.

    904,    for a collection of patents drawn to catalyst rehabilitation, by
    the same method, in synthesis reactions other than alkylation to produce
    paraffins.


CLS 585/711
TXT Including nonhydrocarbon reactant:

    Subject matter under subclass 709 wherein a hydrocarbyl moiety which is
    condensed is part of a molecule which contains other than carbon and
    hydrogen atoms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310+    and 930+, for processes which claim or disclose, respectively, the
    synthesis of the nonhydrocarbon intermediate.


CLS 585/712
TXT With removal of organic halogen contaminant:

    Subject matter under subclass 709 in which an organic compound containing
    halogen is removed from the alkylation product or from a hydrocarbon stream
    in said process.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310+,   for a process wherein an alkyl fluoride by-product forms the
    intermediate in a hydrocarbon synthesis, especially subclass 311 where the
    synthesis is stated to produce HF for reuse as a catalyst in the procedure.

    710,    for a process where an organic halogen by-product is decomposed to
    produce a halide catalyst material.

    711,    for a process where an organic halide is used as an alkylating
    agent.

    723+    and 729, for a alkylation processes which use hydrogen halide
    catalysts, promoters, etc.


CLS 585/713
TXT Using solid catalyst or sorbent:

    Subject matter under subclass 712 in which a solid catalyst or sorbent is
    used to remove the organic halogen compound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    718,    for an alkylation process in which the effluent is treated with a
    solid sorbent for removal of materials other than organic fluorides.

    820+,   for a sorption process, per se, for purification of a hydrocarbon.


CLS 585/714
TXT With introduction of same material at more than two serialy spaced points
    of reaction zone system:

    Subject matter under subclass 709 wherein a feedstream of material, e.g., a
    catalyst, feedstock, recycle material, etc., which can be considered as
    coming directly from the same source, that is, having the same composition,
    is introduced to an alkylation reaction zone system at more than two points
    spaced along the flow path of the reactant material.


CLS 585/715
TXT With autorefrigeration:

    Subject matter under subclass 709 in which the synthesis reaction zone is
    cooled by evaporation of the more volatile materials which are, or have
    been, present in the reaction zone.

    (1)     Note.  The low boiling materials are vaporized by lowering the
    pressure with concomitant cooling of the remaining liquid hydrocarbons.

    (2)     Note.  The chilled liquid hydrocarbon may be used to refrigerate
    the reaction zone directly or indirectly through heat exchanger walls.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    911+,   for collections of patents concerned with introducing, maintaining,
    or removing heat by an atypical procedure other than autorefrigeration in a
    paraffin alkylation process.


CLS 585/716
TXT Plural alkylation stages:

    Subject matter under subclass 709 in which the effluent from a paraffin
    alkylation reaction is sent to another paraffin alkylation reaction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300+,   for a process wherein two or more alkylation reactions are
    conducted in parallel.

    311+,   for a process in which a paraffin alkylation reaction is preceded
    or followed by a conversion other than paraffin alkylation.


CLS 585/717
TXT With preliminary treatment of feed:

    Subject matter under subclass 709 wherein the hydrocarbon feed is treated
    prior to the alkylation reaction, e.g., by separating nonhydrocarbon
    therefrom, by separating the feed into several different fractions, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    310+,   for a process wherein an intermediate is formed by a chemical
    reaction before use in an alkylation process, especially subclass 332 for
    those processes wherein preliminary polymerization is carried out to obtain
    an olefin polymer and at least a portion of the olefin polymer is
    subsequently alkylated, or where the feedstock is isomerized before
    alkylation.


CLS 585/718
TXT With coalescing or sorption of, or addition of specific agent to, effluent
    or effluent component:

    Subject matter under subclass 709 wherein the effluent from the alkylation
    reaction or a component thereof is treated, employing a chemical or
    physical phenomenon, to purify or separate the effluent or effluent
    component, the phenomenon being coalescence or sorption of with a solid
    sorbent, or requiring the addition of a material from outside the reaction
    mixture, e.g., a solvent, a reactant, a reaction inhibitor, etc.

    (1)     Note.  See the notes to subclass 719 for a summary of other
    subclasses dealing with after treatments of alkylation effluent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid, Purification or Separation, subclasses 348+ and 634 and 702
    for processes and apparatus, respectively, for coalescing where the purpose
    is to purify water or an unspecified liquid.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 319+ for processes, for breaking emulsions.


CLS 585/719
TXT With plural separation procedures applied to effluent or effluent component:

    Subject matter under subclass 709 wherein the effluent from the alkylation
    reaction or a component thereof passes through at least two separation
    steps.

    (1)     Note.  A mere nominal "recovery" or "separating" step is not
    sufficient to warrant placement of a patent herein.

    (2)     Note.  Many patents contained herein seek to recover a separate
    hydrocarbon in addition to the alkylate product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331,    for a process where an alkylation reaction is followed by a diverse
    conversion to produce a paraffin.

    702+,   705 and 706, for paraffin syntheses in general which may or do
    involve specifically directed separation or purification procedures.

    710     and 712, for alkylation procedures involving specifically directed
    purification or separation procedures.

    716,    for a process wherein the alkylation effluent is subjected to
    another alkylation reaction.


CLS 585/720
TXT With specified flow procedure within or at entrance to reactor, e.g., by
    use of named mixing device, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 709 wherein a procedure for achieving contact
    and/or confluence of materials in the reactor or at the entrance to the
    reactor is specified.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    922+,   for a collection of patents drawn to other hydrocarbon conversion
    processes wherein a reactor fluid manipulating device is specified.

    955,    for a collection of patents drawn to other hydrocarbon synthesis
    processes in which a mixing procedure is specified.


CLS 585/721
TXT Using extraneous nonhydrocarbon agent:
    Subject matter under subclass 709 wherein part or all of the synthesis
    takes place in the presence of material containing an atom other than
    carbon and hydrogen, which chemically affects the synthesis by promoting,
    retarding, etc., which does not form a part of the desired product and is,
    at least in theory, separable from the desired reaction products.  The
    agent may be a catalyst, solvent, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403,    503, 537, 636, and 920, for processes which employ apparatus of
    recited composition, in some cases the composition (e.g., a reactor lining)
    being or containing a catalytic agent.

    520+,   for a polymerization reaction utilizing an ethylenically
    unsaturated feed in the presence of a chemically effective agent, e.g.,
    catalyst.

    704,    706, 707, 710, and 712, for certain procedures in paraffin
    synthesis in general or alkylation in particular dealing with catalysts and
    catalyst components.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 410+ for catalyst compositions, per se.


CLS 585/722
TXT Aluminosilicate or organometallic:

    Subject matter under subclass 721 wherein the agent comprises an
    aluminosilicate or organometallic compound.

    (1)     Note.  Aluminosilicate includes zeolites or molecular sieves, both
    natural occurring and synthetically produced.

    (2)     Note.  An aluminum halide complex with a hydrocarbon or
    nonhydrocarbon organic material is not considered to be an organometallic
    compound for this subclass.


CLS 585/723
TXT HF:

    Subject matter under subclass 721 wherein an agent is hydrogen fluoride.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    702,    for a paraffin synthesis procedure in which HF catalyst is also
    used as an agent for hydrocarbon separation or purification.

    710,    for an alkylation process which includes the recycle of HF removed
    from a compound or a complex contained in the alkylation effluent.

    716,    for a process wherein fluoride is present in at least one stage of
    a plural-stage alkylation process.


CLS 585/724
TXT With additional nonhydrocarbon agent:
    Subject matter under subclass 723 wherein there is present during the
    reaction a promoter, catalyst, etc., in addition to the hydrogen fluoride.


CLS 585/725
TXT B-, N-, or P-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 724 wherein the additional agent comprises
    boron, nitrogen, or phosphorus in elemental or combined form.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains, for example, alkylation processes
    wherein the catalyst comprises HF + BF3.


CLS 585/726
TXT B-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 721 wherein the agent comprises boron in
    elemental or combined form.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains a boron compound, alone or in
    admixture or combination with other substance, except in admixture with
    hydrogen fluoride.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    725,    for an alkylation process in which hydrogen fluoride is used with a
    boron, nitrogen, or phosphorus compound or element, e.g., HF + BF3, etc.


CLS 585/727
TXT Al halide:

    Subject matter under subclass 721 wherein the agent comprises an aluminum
    halide.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass (727) is the locus for a process using, as a
    catalyst, an aluminum halide complexed with a hydrocarbon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    728,    for a process wherein the aluminum halide is used as a complex with
    an ether, etc.


CLS 585/728
TXT With additional nonhydrocarbon agent:
    Subject matter under subclass 727 wherein an additional chemically
    effective agent is used with the aluminum halide catalyst, the agent
    containing elements other than carbon and hydrogen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    727,    wherein the aluminum halide is utilized as a complex with a
    hydrocarbon, without an additional nonhydrocarbon agent, e.g.,
    nonhydrocarbon promoter, etc.


CLS 585/729
TXT H halide:

    Subject matter under subclass 728 wherein hydrogen chloride, bromide, or
    iodide is an additional agent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    721,    for an alkylation process wherein a hydrogen chloride, bromide, or
    iodide is used alone or in admixture with another catalyst not specified in
    any of the preceding subclasses.

    723+,   for an alkylation process employing HF as an extraneous agent.


CLS 585/730
TXT S-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 721 wherein an extraneous agent is elemental
    sulfur or a sulfur compound.


CLS 585/731
TXT Sulfuric acid with additional nonhydrocarbon agent:

    Subject matter under subclass 730 wherein there is present during the
    process a sulfuric acid catalyst and an additional chemically effective
    agent which is a nonhydrocarbon.


CLS 585/732
TXT O-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 721 in which the extraneous agent is
    elemental oxygen or an oxygen compound, e.g., water, alumina, phosphoric
    acid, etc.


CLS 585/733
TXT From nonhydrocarbon feed:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 in which a paraffin product is produced
    from a feedstock containing an element other than merely carbon and
    hydrogen.


CLS 585/734
TXT By isomerization:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein a paraffin hydrocarbon undergoes
    a skeletal rearrangement of its carbon atoms.

    (1)     Note.  The hydrocarbon may go from a straight chain configuration
    to a branched configuration, for a less branched to a more branched
    configuration, or it may go in the reverse order from a more branched to a
    less branched or to a straight configuration.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass (734) is the locus for skeletal-type
    isomerization utilizing a catalyst that is not provided for in any of the
    indented subclasses below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    350,    477, 601, and 671, for skeletal isomerization reactions which
    produce alicyclic, aromatic, diolefin, and olefin products, respectively.

    371+,   for skeletal isomerization which results in enlarging or
    contracting an alicyclic ring.

    375+,   470+, 643+, and 708, for processes in which a hydrocarbyl moiety
    from one molecule is transferred to another molecule to produce an
    alicyclic, aromatic, olefinic, or paraffin compound, respectively.


CLS 585/735
TXT Using temperature gradient or material concentration gradient or
    introduction of same material at more than two serially spaced points of
    reaction zone system:

    Subject matter under subclass 734 wherein feedstreams of a material, e.g.,
    a catalyst, feedstock, recycle material, etc., which can be considered as
    coming directly from the same source, that is, having the same composition,
    are introduced to an isomerization reaction zone system at more than two
    points spaced along the flow path of the reactant materials, or in which
    temperature conditions or the concentration of materials in the reactor is
    stated as changing gradually in space, that is, in the flow path of
    materials through a reaction zone from inlet to outlet, or in time, that
    is, from the moment that the reactor is put on stream until it is taken off
    stream.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    736,    for an isomerization reaction which takes place in a series of
    distinct stages, without a stated gradual change of conditions from one
    stage to another.


CLS 585/736
TXT Plural isomerization stages:

    Subject matter under subclass 734 in which the effluent from an
    isomerization reaction is sent to another isomerization reaction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300+,   for a process wherein two or more isomerization reactions are
    conducted in parallel.

    332,    for a process wherein an isomerization reaction is followed by an
    alkylation or alkyl transfer reaction to produce a branched-chain paraffin.


CLS 585/737
TXT With preliminary treatment of paraffin feed:

    Subject matter under subclass 734 wherein the hydrocarbon feed is treated
    prior to the isomerization reaction by chemically modifying the feed or by
    separating nonhydrocarbons therefrom, or by separating the feed into
    several different fractions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331,    for those processes wherein an alkylation reaction is carried out
    initially and a portion of the alkylate product is subsequently isomerized.


CLS 585/738
TXT With specified isomerizate purification or separation procedure:

    Subject matter under subclass 734 wherein the effluent from the
    isomerization reaction is treated, usually by a series of steps, to improve
    its quality or purity in some way.

    (1)     Note.  A mere nominal "recovery", or "separating" step is not
    sufficient to warrant placement of a patent herein.

    (2)     Note.  The procedure may involve a chemical reaction but does not
    result in the net synthesis of a desired, recoverable hydrocarbon or other
    product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    331,    for a process wherein isomerization is followed by alkylation or
    alkyl transfer to produce a branched-chain paraffin product.

    705,    for a process which includes the removal of a catalyst component,
    e.g., aluminum halide, etc., from sludge.


CLS 585/739
TXT Using aluminosilicate catalyst:

    Subject matter under subclass 734 wherein the catalyst consists of or
    includes an aluminosilicate, such as a zeolite or molecular sieve.

    (1)     Note.  The aluminosilicate may be a naturally occurring or
    synthetic composition, which may be modified in some way to remove or to
    add a constituent, for example, by ion exchange or by impregnation
    techniques.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    666,    for reactions in which aluminosilicate is utilized to effect a
    double-bond shift in a hydrocarbon.

    750,    for an isomerization process using another metal oxide catalyst.


CLS 585/740
TXT Using B- or P-containing catalyst:

    Subject matter under subclass 734 wherein the catalyst includes boron or
    phosphorus in free or combined form.


CLS 585/741
TXT Using Al halide catalyst:

    Subject matter under subclass 734 employing a catalyst which comprises an
    aluminum halide, alone or including additional agents or materials.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    705     and 707, for certain specialized procedures for treating the
    catalyst, which often is an aluminum halide catalyst, in an isomerization
    or alkylation procedure.


CLS 585/742
TXT With additional metal halide:

    Subject matter under subclass 741 wherein the reaction mass includes two
    different halides of aluminum or the halide of a metal other than aluminum,
    e.g., antimony chloride, besides the aluminum halide.


CLS 585/743
TXT With S-containing or free or organic halogen agent:

    Subject matter under subclass 741 wherein the reaction mass includes
    elemental halogen or sulfur, a sulfur compound or an organic halogen
    compound.

    (1)     Note.  An aluminum halide-hydrocarbon complex is not considered an
    organic halogen compound for this subclass.


CLS 585/744
TXT With metal oxide or elemental carbon, e.g., supported, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 741 wherein a metal oxide or elemental carbon
    is included in the reaction mass, usually to support the aluminum halide.

    (1)     Note.  A material described merely as an "inert refractory
    material" is assumed to be a metal oxide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    739,    for an isomerization process in which a crystalline aluminosilicate
    is employed.

    742,    if an additional metal halide is used with aluminum halide on a
    metal oxide or elemental carbon support.


CLS 585/745
TXT With added organic agent or in complex with organic material:

    Subject matter under subclass 741 wherein the reaction mass contains (a) a
    complex of aluminum halide with an organic compound, e.g., sludge, red oil,
    etc., (b) an organic material other than the reactants, deliberately added
    to the reaction mass, or (c) a hydrocarbon material other than the
    reactants is recycled to the reaction mass to form a definite proportion of
    the reaction mass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    901     and 954, for collections of patents concerned with mass-action
    phenomena.


CLS 585/746
TXT With inorganic material other than halogen-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 741 wherein an inorganic additive or agent
    which does not contain halogen is included along with the aluminum halide
    catalyst.


CLS 585/747
TXT Using halogen-containing catalyst:

    Subject matter under subclass 734 wherein the catalyst utilized in the
    isomerization includes halogen in its composition.


CLS 585/748
TXT With alumina:

    Subject matter under subclass 747 wherein aluminum oxide is included in the
    reaction mass.

    (1)     Note.  The catalyst of the instant subclass is not recognized as an
    aluminum halide and the reaction is not carried out in the presence of any
    aluminum halide or any modified catalyst resulting from an aluminum halide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    741+,   for an isomerization process containing aluminum halide in the
    reaction step.


CLS 585/749
TXT F:

    Subject matter under subclass 748 wherein fluorine or a fluorine compound
    is included in the reaction mass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    744,    for an isomerization process using a catalyst containing both
    aluminum halide and a fluorine-containing alumina or a fluoride compound on
    an alumina-containing support.


CLS 585/750
TXT Using metal oxide or hydroxide catalyst:
    Subject matter under subclass 734 wherein the catalyst comprises a metal
    oxide or metal hydroxide, either alone or on a refractory inorganic
    support, such as silica, etc.


CLS 585/751
TXT Including free metal:

    Subject matter under subclass 750 wherein a metal in the elemental state is
    included along with a metal oxide or metal hydroxide in the catalyst.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    671,    for skeletal isomerization of an olefin using a metal catalyst.


CLS 585/752
TXT By C content reduction, e.g., hydrocracking, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 700 wherein the saturated hydrocarbon is
    produced from a feedstock having a greater number of carbon atoms than the
    product.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    708,    for a process wherein a hydrocarbon moiety removed from one
    molecule is added to another molecule.

    733,    for a process in which removing a foreign atom may result in a
    paraffin product having fewer carbon atoms.

    734+,   for a process wherein a hydrocarbon moiety removed from one carbon
    of a molecule is joined to a different carbon of the same molecule.


CLS 585/800
TXT PURIFICATION, SEPARATION, OR RECOVERY:

    Processes under the class definition in which a mixture of a hydrocarbon
    compound with another substance is treated to recover that same compound in
    a more usable condition, that is, a purer or less undesirable condition, by
    a treatment which comprises separating the hydrocarbon from the other
    substance or making the other substance less obnoxious.

    (1)     Note.  The other substance may be other hydrocarbons of this class
    (585) whether desired or not, nonhydrocarbon materials, or hydrocarbon
    materials classified elsewhere, the recovery of which is not desired.

    (2)     Note.  To be classified in these subclasses (800+) the recovered
    hydrocarbon must enter the process and leave the process as the same
    compound, even though it may be converted to an intermediate and reverted
    to the original compound during the course of the process.

    (3)     Note.  In general, the subject matter provided for herein includes
    chemical, physical and chemical, and physical processes directed to the
    purification or separation of those hydrocarbon compounds covered by the
    definition of this class, unless such treatment is provided for elsewhere
    as pointed out in the notes below.

    (4)     Note.  These subclasses (800+) are residual, and receive only those
    original patents not acceptable elsewhere.  These "elsewheres" are dealt
    with in the notes below, and can be summarized hierarchically as follows:

    Procedure               Note    Class

    Separation or pur-      5       204, Chemistry:
    ification by elec-              Electrical
    trical and or wave              Wave Energy
    energy phenomena

    To produce mineral      6`      208, Mineral
    oil mixture                     Oils:  Processes
                            and Products

    Involving the for-      7       260, Chemistry
    mation of an            of Carbon Com-
    adduct of urea          pounds, sub-
    or thiorea                      class 96.5

    Involving the for-      8       585, Chemistry
    mation of a hydro-              of Hydrocarbon
    carbon hydrate,         Compounds,
                                         subclass 15

    Involving hydro-        9       585, Chemistry
    genation of an un-              of Hydrocarbon
    saturated bond of               Compounds,
    a hydrocarbon           subclasses 250+

    Of gaseous feed 13      95, Gas
                            Separation:
                            Processes

    . Involving a           11      423, Chemistry
    chemical reac-          of Inorganic
    tion                    Compounds

    . Involving lique-      12      62, Refrigeration
    faction or solidi-
    fication

    Of liquid feed  18, 19  210, Liquid Puri-
                            fication or
                            Separation

    . By distillation       14      203, Distillation:
                            Processes,
                            Separatory

    .By removal of  15      95, Gas
    gas or vapor                    Separation:
                            Processes

    . . To leave            16      159, Concentrat-
    solids concen-          ing Evapora-
    trate                   tors

    . By chilling to        17      62, Refrigeration
     solidify

    By drying a solid       20      34, Drying and
                            Gas or Vapor
                            Contact With
                            Solids

    (5)     Note.  Where the purification process involves a chemical reaction
    due to electrical or wave energy (other than merely thermal) effects, or
    movement of ions or particles due to electrical "pressure" (electrophoresis
    or electroosmosis) classification in Class 204 is usually proper.

    (6)     Note.  Where the desired product is a mixture of hydrocarbons which
    can be considered a mineral oil fraction, classification is proper in Class
    208, subclasses 177+ and 308+.

    (7)     Note.  Where the process involves the formation of an adduct of
    urea or thiourea classification in Class 260, subclass 96.5 is proper.

    (8)     Note.  Where the process involves the formation of a hydrocarbon
    hydrate (complex of hydrocarbon with water) classification is proper in
    this class (585), subclass 15.

    (9)     Note.  Where the process involves conversion of impurity in a
    desired hydrocarbon to more of the desired hydrocarbon, classification is
    proper in a synthesis subclass of this class (585).  See, in particular,
    subclasses 258+.

    (10)    Note.  Where the feedstock is specified as being in gaseous form
    and the recovery process involves a chemical reaction, classification in
    Class 423, subclasses 210+ is usually proper.

    (11)    Note.  Where the feedstock is specified as being in gaseous form
    and the recovery process involves a chemical reaction, classification in
    Class 423, subclasses 210+ is usually proper.

    (12)    Note.  Where the feedstock is a normally gaseous material (e.g., a
    C1-C4 hydrocarbon) and separation is accomplished by removing heat, thereby
    liquefying or solidifying a component of the feed mixture, classification
    is proper in Class 62, subclasses 606+ and 617+.

    (13)    Note.  Where the feedstock is specified as being in gaseous form
    and the recovery process does not meet the limitations of (11) Note or (12)
    Note above, classification in Class 95 is usually proper.

    (14)    Note.  Where the feedstock is a liquid mixture and separation is
    accomplished by vaporizing and condensing a component of the mixture,
    classification in Class 203 is usually proper.  Such classification is also
    proper when a chemical reaction which facilitates distillation takes place
    before the distillation and/or a disparate separation procedure, not
    involving a chemical reaction, follows the distillation.  Classification in
    Class 203 also is usually proper when an additional agent is added to
    dissolve a desired or undesired component, adjust the boiling point of the
    mixture, etc., (extractive distillation).  See also the note in the class
    definition of this class (585) to Class 201, Distillation:  Processes,
    Thermolytic.

    (15)    Note.  Where the feedstock is a liquid mixture and a component is
    removed as a gas without subsequent condensation, classification is usually
    proper in Class 95, subclasses 241+.

    (16)    Note.  Where the feedstock is a liquid solution or a suspension of
    solids in a liquid and the separatory process is the evaporation of a
    component, without subsequent condensation of vapor, to leave a fluent
    concentration of solids or a dry solid, classification in Class 159 is
    usually proper.

    (17)    Note.  Where the feedstock is a liquid mixture and separation is
    accomplished by chilling to solidify (crystallize) a component of the
    mixture, classification is as follows:



    a.      Where no non-hydrocarbon organic compounds are disclosed and a
    hydrocarbon compound is separated or purified or a hydrocarbon hydrate is
    formed, placement is proper in Class 585, especially subclasses 812+.



    b.      Placement is to Class 260, including the related classes, for
    processes of treating or modifying claimed or disclosed non-hydrocarbon
    organic compounds:  by crystallization wherein the crystallization is not
    brought about by refrigeration; or wherein crystallization, by any means
    including refrigeration, is combined with synthesis or modification of
    carbon compounds by chemical means; or wherein separation of carbon
    compounds is by physical means other than refrigeration.  Otherwise
    placement is proper in Class 62 when refrigeration is claimed.



    c.      Placement is to Class 62 where no specific (i.e., classifiable)
    compound is disclosed.



    d.      Placement is proper for Class 117 for processes forming
    single-crystals of all types of materials, including inorganic or organic,
    and by all techniques.  See the Class 117 definitions for guidance in
    placement of single-crystal art.

    (18)    Note.  Where the separation of a liquid feed is by flocculation,
    filtration, gravity settling, or magnetic attraction of solids already
    present in the feed, classification in Class 210 is usually proper.

    (19)    Note.  Where separation of liquid feed is by phenomenon other than
    those recited in notes 14-18, classification in Class 210 is usually proper
    when (a) water is claimed as the product or a species of product to be
    recovered or (b) no species of product is claimed and water is disclosed as
    a recoverable species.

    (20)    Note.  Where the feed is a solid or slurry of solid and liquid is
    evaporated from the feed, classification in Class 34 is usually proper.  If
    the starting material is in the form of a liquid suspension or solution,
    even if the process is contiuned to the point of complete dryness, Class
    159 will take the process.  The removal of water of crystallization is
    considered a chemical synthesis for this class (585).


CLS 585/801
TXT By conversion of solid to gas, e.g., sublimation, etc., or by melting or
    squeezing out liquid from solid natural source:

    Subject matter under subclass 800 wherein hydrocarbon contained in a solid
    material (including a fluent solid) is converted to a gas without existing
    in the liquid state for any significant amount of time, or wherein the
    hydrocarbon is recovered as a liquid by application of heat or pressure to
    a solid source of the hydrocarbon found in nature, e.g., recovery of
    turpentine from wood, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, for a process wherein a
    hydrocarbon material is removed from a solid source as a gas and
    subsequently condensed, some of the original material being converted to
    char.


CLS 585/802
TXT By plural serial diverse separations:
    Subject matter under subclass 800 wherein a feedstock containing the
    hydrocarbon material is subjected to a series of separation procedures
    which differ from each other in their mechanism, usually to separate the
    starting mixture into more than two components, to nullify the effect of
    more than one component, to free the recoverable material from a byproduct
    of the separation process, etc.

    (1)     Note.  A mere nominal "separating", "settling", or "filtering" step
    following the addition of a material to the hydrocarbon mixture is not
    sufficient for classification herein.

    (2)     Note.  A mere reversal of the procedure employed in a first step,
    e.g., desorption after sorption, removal of a solvent from the extract
    phase, etc., is not considered to be a plural diverse separation procedure
    even when the reversal is practiced fractionally.  See subclasses 825, 835,
    and 839 below.

    (3)     Note.  Addition of a material to the feed, e.g., a complexing
    agent, solvent, etc., to facilitate subsequent crystal formation by
    chilling, is not sufficient for classification herein. See subclass 816
    below.

    (4)     Note.  Diversity exists when the separation mechanisms are provided
    for in different classes of the Patent and Trademark Office classification,
    including some different main line subclassifications in Classes 95, Gas
    Separation:  Processes; 62, Refrigeration; 210, Liquid Purification or
    Separation or in different "one indent" subclasses subsumed by subclass 800.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, for a distillation process
    preceded by a chemical reaction which facilitates the distillation or
    followed by a diverse separation procedure which does not involve a
    chemical reaction.


CLS 585/803
TXT To recover alicyclic:

    Subject matter under subclass 802 wherein a recovered material is an
    alicyclic hydrocarbon, e.g., a terpene, carotene, etc.


CLS 585/804
TXT To recover aromatic:

    Subject matter under subclass 802 in which an aromatic hydrocarbon is
    purified or separated out from a mixture.


CLS 585/805
TXT Xylene or ethylbenzene:

    Subject matter under subclass 804 wherein the hydrocarbon is one or more
    xylene isomer(s).


CLS 585/806
TXT Having unsaturated or one-C side-chain:
    Subject matter under subclass 804 wherein the aromatic hydrocarbon has a
    methyl or an unsaturated side-chain, e.g., styrene, etc.


CLS 585/807
TXT Including steps of distillation and agent addition:

    Subject matter under subclass 804 in which the plural separations include
    distillation and the addition of an extraneous agent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, for a process which includes
    distillation and previous addition of an agent which causes or assists in a
    chemical reaction designed to make the distillation effective or more
    effective, or a process which includes distillation and a subsequent
    "physical" separatory step, e.g., solvent extraction.


CLS 585/808
TXT Agent contains N, carbonyl, or dihydroxy moiety:

    Subject matter under subclass 807 in which the agent added in a
    purification step contains nitrogen or the keto -C--C moiety or the
    aldehyde -C=O moiety or has two hydroxyl groups.


CLS 585/809
TXT To Recover Unsaturate:

    Subject matter under subclass 802 wherein an unsaturated hydrocarbon, e.g.,
    an olefin, an alkyene, etc., is purified or separated out from a mixture.


CLS 585/810
TXT Diolefin:

    Subject matter under subclass 809 wherein a recovered product has two
    double bonds.


CLS 585/811
TXT Including treatment with S-containing agent:

    Subject matter under subclass 809 wherein one of the steps of the process
    includes treatment of a material with an agent which contains sulfur in
    free or combined form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    856+,   for hydrocarbon purification treatments in general which involve
    use of a sulfur containing agent.


CLS 585/812
TXT By cooling of liquid to obtain solid, e.g., crystallization, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 800 wherein the purification, separation, or
    recovery process includes lowering the temperature of a liquid mixture,
    containing a hydrocarbon to be recovered, to cause one or more components
    of the mixture to solidify.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, for a process of
    separating liquids from solids or slurries which may result in the
    formation or recovery of a crystal-line substance.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 532+ for a crystallization process
    accomplished by chilling which is claimed as being applicable to more than
    only hydrocarbon separation or purification.

    117,    Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth Processes;
    Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes for growing therein-defined
    single-crystal of all types of materials, including inorganic or organic.
    See the Class 117 definition for guidance in placement of single-crystal
    related art.

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, for a process which may include
    formation of crystals from a liquid suspension or solution by removal of a
    solvent liquid.


CLS 585/813
TXT Using specified holding time or specified cooling rate:

    Subject matter under subclass 812 wherein an amount of cooling is claimed
    as taking place during a claimed period of time or the amount of time
    during which the mixture or a component thereof is held at a certain
    temperature or within a certain temperature range is claimed.

    (1)     Note.  The cooling rate may be specified as a constant such as 105/
     hr or by a time dependent formula.


CLS 585/814
TXT With treatment of mother liquor after crystal separation:

    Subject matter under subclass 812 wherein solids are removed from a
    remaining liquid and the liquid is given a further treatment, usually to
    remove further components from the liquid by another crystallization.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    479,    for synthesis of aromatic compounds by isomerization following by a
    plurality of separation steps, one of which is crystallization.

    802+,   for a hydrocarbon separation process which includes crystallization
    and a diverse separation procedure, e.g., a subsequent distillation.


CLS 585/815
TXT With dissolving or plural serial crystallizations:

    Subject matter under subclass 812 wherein the starting mixture or a solid
    produced in the process is dissolved in a liquid or in which a component of
    a liquid mixture is chilled to form a solid, the solid is liquefied and the
    resulting liquid is again chilled to form a solid component.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    814,    for a process in which the second crystallization is applied to the
    mother liquor obtained from the first crystallization.


CLS 585/816
TXT With addition of extraneous material:
    Subject matter under subclass 812 in which a material from an outside
    source is added to the hydrocarbon to be recovered to perfect the
    solidification procedure, e.g., by washing the resulting solids, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    802+,   for a process where crystallization and agent addition are
    performed serially upon a starting mixture, the agent being added for a
    purpose other than perfection of the crystallization procedure.

    815,    for a process where the added material is a solvent.


CLS 585/817
TXT Before crystal formation:

    Subject matter under subclass 816 in which the material is added before the
    chilling step is completed.

    (1)     Note.  The added material often is one which forms a complex with a
    component of the mixture.


CLS 585/818
TXT By membrane, selective septum, or coalescer:

    Subject matter under subclass 800 wherein a liquid hydrocarbon is recovered
    from a liquid mixture containing the hydrocarbon by the use of a solid
    appratus member having one of the following features:

    a.      is a thin member which permits the passage of molecules or ions
    having a certain size or shape while excluding molecules or ions having a
    larger size or bulkier shape;

    b.      is a porous member which because of its composition permits the
    passage of a certain type of molecule, e.g., a polar molecule, while
    preventing the passage of molecules of incompatible type, or

    c.      is a member which because of its composition causes finely divided
    liquid material dispersed in another liquid to form larger drops.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    718,    for an alkylation synthesis process which is followed by coalescing
    a component, usually water, contained in the effluent.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 43+ for processes of gas
    separation by selective diffusion of gases through a substantially solid
    barrier.

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, subclass 54 for a dialyzing
    process peculiar to treatment of sugar solutions.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 513+ for
    electrophoretic or electro-osmotic separation or purification of a
    hydrocarbon oil and subclasses 559+ for electrical separation or
    purification, in general, of a liquid hydrocarbon.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 634 for dialysis
    processes; and subclass 702 for coalescing processes.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 319+ for emulsion-breaking processes.


CLS 585/819
TXT Aromatic permeate:

    Subject matter under subclass 818 wherein an aromatic component of the
    hydrocarbon mixture passes through the membrane or septum.


CLS 585/820
TXT By contact with solid sorbent:

    Subject matter under subclass 800 wherein a solid mass is used to retain on
    its surface or inside its pores a constituent of a mixture from which
    hydrocarbon is to be recovered.

    (1)     Note.  "Solid sorbent" includes but is not limited to diatomaceous
    earth, kieselguhr, perlite, activated carbon, asbestos, colloidal clays,
    molecular sieves, silica gel, ion-exchange zeolites, and resins, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Sorption processes depend for their effectiveness upon the
    shape or chemical composition of the molecules retained by the solid
    sorbent.  They thus are distinguishable from filtration processses which
    depend upon a mechanical entrapment of solid particles because of their
    relatively large size compared to the interstices or spaces between
    individual elements of a filter.  In the case of a filter mechanical
    brushing, wiping, shaking, etc., will remove the retained particles.
    Sorption processes which depend for their effectiveness upon molecular
    shape generally employ a "molecular sieve" which usually is a natural or
    synthetic metal aluminum silicate or similar material whose atoms are
    arranged in a crystal lattice in such a way that there are a large number
    of small pores interconnected by smaller openings or pores of precisely
    uniform size.  The most common molecular sieves are zeolites, a class or
    natural or manufactured hydrated silicates of aluminum and either sodium or
    calcium or both, of the type Na2O.A12O3.nSiO2.xH2O.  They will accept and
    retain molecules that are small and/or slender enough to pass through the
    pores, thus separating them from a mixture with larger or bulkier molecules.

            Other sorption processes separate a comstituent from a fluid
    mixture containing such constituents in a "quasi-chemical" manner.  The
    action in most instances is that of selective retention, e.g., the sorbent
    interacts with and thereby retains only the part of the fluid mixture for
    which it has the greatest affinity.  The retained portion cannot be removed
    by mechanical action but generally requires heating or use of a stripping
    or desorbing fluid.

    (3)     Note.  Ion exchange is a chemical metathesis process in which ions
    are chemically transferred from a usually liquid material to a usually
    solid separatory substance or exchanger which has a chemical structure of
    loosely bound ions.  The exchanger substance can usually be regenerated by
    passing another material through it to elute the exchanged ions and replace
    them with the original kind of loosely bound ions.  When a patent calls a
    process involving an ion exchanger "sorption", the process is placed in
    these subclasses (820+), but when the true mechanism of the separatory
    procedure appears to be ion exchange, it is cross-referenced to subclasses
    833+ below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 90+ for processes of gas
    separation using solid sorbents.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclass 41 for separatory
    distillation process including the step of passing the distillate material
    through a solid sorbent.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclass 310 for mineral oil
    fractionation processes which include adsorption.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 656+ and 660 for
    liquid purification by ion exchange or sorption,  wherein the process is
    directed to the purification of water or a number of compounds, one of
    which is water, or if the claims are broad, as to the liquid purified.
    Where claims or disclosure specific to hydrocarbon purification indicates
    classification in this class, subclasses (820+) and that patent contains
    claims to the separation of any other liquid or fluid mixture, the patent
    is cross-referenced to Class 210.


CLS 585/821
TXT With measuring, sensing, testing, or recycle of sorbate to same sorption
    zone:Subject matter under subclass 820 wherein a positive step of
    measuring, sensing, or testing a component or parameter of the feedstock,
    product or sorption zone is recited or in which material sorbed in the
    process and later desorbed from the sorbent is recycled to the sorption
    zone, generally to act as a reflux.


CLS 585/822
TXT Plural serial sorptions:

    Subject matter under subclass 820 in which an effluent from a sorption step
    or zone is passed through another sorption zone.

    (1)     Note.  The effluent may comprise the unsorbed portion of the feed
    (the raffinate) or the sorbed and desorbed portion of the feed (the extract
    or sorbate).

    (2)     Note.  A process wherein a "guard bed" of sorbent is employed along
    with a main sorbent zone is classified herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    802+,   for a process wherein sorption is preceded or followed by a diverse
    separation procedure.


CLS 585/823
TXT Sorbate is nonhydrocarbon or chemically undetermined component, e.g.,
    "color-former", etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 820 wherein the constituent removed from the
    mixture contains an element other than carbon and hydrogen or is elemental
    carbon or in which the disclosure fails to indicate exactly what elements
    go to make up the removed constituent.

    (1)     Note.  Where the removed constituent is indicated as being a
    hydrocarbon, the patent is not classified here, although when such
    constituent is described as a sensible material (e.g., colored or having an
    odor) or a precursor of such a material, the patent may be cross-referenced
    here (subclasses 823+).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, which are not
    applies to the living body which function by chemicall combination with the
    odor-causing organism or by desensitizing the olfactory mechanism.


CLS 585/824
TXT O-containing sorbate:

    Subject matter under subclass 823 wherein the removed constituent contains
    oxygen e.g., water, etc.


CLS 585/825
TXT With fractional or linear desorption, e.g., chromatography, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 820 in which a desorption step removes only
    part of the sorbate from the sorbent or in which during at least the
    desorption step the sorbent material is held in a relatively fixed
    arrangement and the desorption creates a more or less distinct boundary or
    "front" between that part of the sorbent mass which still contains sorbate
    and that part of the sorbent mass from which sorbate has been wholly or
    partially removed.

    (1)     Note.  The process may be one in which a plurality of different
    materials are adsorbed and the desorption serves to remove only one or a
    selected group of the materials or serves to remove different materials at
    different times, usually due to a change in desorption conditions, e.g.,
    the desorbing agent employed, etc.

    (2)     Note.  A purge of unsorbed material from the interstices between
    sorbent particles is not considered to be desorption.

    (3)     Note.  A chromatographic process, wherein a solution of the
    hydrocarbon which is to be separated or purified is allowed to flow slowly
    through a mass of adsorbent and different substances in the feed solution
    pass with different rates through the mass and separate into zones, is not
    included in this subclass unless the desorption is such as to permit
    separate recovery of the different substances.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 23.35 for gas analysis by
    chromatography; and subclass 863 for gas samplers.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclass 656 for chromatographic
    separation processes of general utility or directed to water purification.


CLS 585/826
TXT With specified sorbent rehabilitation procedure or agent, e.g., desorbent,
    etc.: Subject matter under subclass 820 in which a procedure for
    rehabilitation of the sorbent is described as more than mere "desorption",
    "recovery of sorbed material", or "purging", etc., or in which an agent for
    removing desorbed material is described in more specific terms than merely
    a "desorbent", etc.


CLS 585/827
TXT Cyclic sorbate:

    Subject matter under subclass 826 in which an aromatic or alicyclic
    hydrocarbon is a material retained by the sorbent during the sorption cycle.


CLS 585/828
TXT Aromatic separated from other aromatic:
    Subject matter under subclass 827 in which a material retained by the
    sorbent in the sorption cycle is an aromatic compound and in which a
    material not retained by the sorbent in this cycle is also an aromatic
    compound.


CLS 585/829
TXT Unsaturated sorbate:

    Subject matter under subclass 826 in which an acyclic hydrocarbon having
    olefinic or acetylenic unsaturation is the material retained by the sorbent
    during the sorption cycle.


CLS 585/830
TXT Sorbent is or contains organic:

    Subject matter under subclass 820 in which the sorbent is an organic solid
    or contains an organic material, e.g., an inorganic sorbent coated with an
    organic material, etc., which is not part of the recoverable product of the
    process.


CLS 585/831
TXT Cyclic sorbate:

    Subject matter under subclass 820 in which an aromatic or alicyclic
    hydrocarbon is a material retained by the sorbent.


CLS 585/832
TXT Polymerization and depolymerization:
    Subject matter under subclass 800 which includes a step of chemically
    condensing olefinic molecules in the hydrocarbon mixture followed, usually
    after filtration or gravitational separation, by depolymerization of the
    condensed material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclass 30 for a separation
    process which includes polymerization of an unsaturated component followed
    by distillation.


CLS 585/833
TXT By addition of extraneous agent, e.g., solvent, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 800 in which a material which does not form
    part of the desired product is added to the mixture to be purified or
    separated as an aid to such purification or separation.

    (1)     Note.  The mechanism by which the material aids the process may be
    any mechanism not provided for above, e.g., the material may be a catalyst,
    solvent, a complexing agent, etc.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass (833) provides for a process wherein an acid
    such as HC1 is added for purification purposes; however, when the claims
    require an aqueous solution of such acid to be added, classification is
    proper in subclass 868.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    816,    for a separation process which involves agent addition and chilling
    to solidify a complex formed by the agent and a component of the feed
    mixture.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclasses 438, 439, and 646 for extracts which have
    been specifically prepared or treated to fit them for use as organic
    coloring material.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclasses 149+ for processes of gas
    separation using liquid contacting.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclasses 50+ for an
    extractive distillation process, per se, that is, a distillation process
    carried out in the presence of a solvent for one or more components of the
    distilland.

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 31 and 33+ for
    processes wherein waxes are dissolved form mineral oil containing
    subclasses; subclass 45 for the solvent extraction of asphalts, tars,
    pitches, or resins from mineral oils; subclasses 311+, 390, and 400 for
    processes wherein mineral oils are dissolved from mineral oil containing
    substances; and subclass 298 for processes of refining mineral oils by
    treating with liquid treating agents (washing, etc.).

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 634+ for a process of
    liquid-liquid extraction wherein one of the compounds purified is water or
    if the claims are broad as to the liquid being purified.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 319+ for a process of resolving colloids
    by a solute composition.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, particular subclass 658.5 and
    subclasses noted thereunder for a process of leaching, extracting, or
    dissolving when a process for purifying an inorganic or nonmetallic
    compound provided for in Class 423 is claimed, or when the claims are not
    limited and disclosure of purification of a compound for Class 423 and a
    compound or composition for that class is present, or a coclaimed
    extraction process produces products provided for in each of a plurality of
    other classes.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses for an extract of undetermined constitution even though from a
    single source, which has a utility provided for in that class; and see
    expecially subclasses 520+ for an animal extract; and subclasses 195.1+ for
    a plant extract.

    426,    Food or Edible Material: Processes, Composition, and Products,
    particularly subclass 425 and the noted subclasses thereunder for processes
    of making an extract having a Class 426 utility and not provided for
    elsewhere even though a hydrocarbon is mixed with other substances to form
    a product with Class 426 utility.  See the Class 426 class definition,
    section II B (1) for an elaboration of the line between this class and
    Class 426.


CLS 585/834
TXT With contact procedure involving particular apparatus or more than two
    moving streams: Subject matter under subclass 833 wherein contact of the
    feedstock with the agent is specified as taking place in an apparatus of
    defined structure or involves specified movement of three or more streams
    of material.

    (1)     Note.  Generally more than mere nominal "counter-current contact"
    is required for placement in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  The streams generally are liquid and will involve more than
    merely feed, solvent, extract and raffinate streams, for example, a reflux
    and/or wash stream will generally need to be flowing simultaneously to make
    up the three or more discrete moving streams.


CLS 585/835
TXT With fractional disengagement from agent by use of other agent:

    Subject matter under subclass 833 wherein a hydrocarbon-containing
    feedstock or a portion thereof, engaged with an extransous agent, e.g.,
    dissolved in a solvent, complexed with a complexing agent, etc., is treated
    with a second agent to remove a part only of the engaged nonagent material.

    (1)     Note.  The partial disengagement may be followed by treatment for
    disengagement of more of the same or different nonagent material by the
    same or different second agent.

    (2)     Note.  The partial disengagement may be for the removal of
    undesirably engaged material, e.g., washing out of recoverable material
    which adheres to the complex, etc.


CLS 585/836
TXT Different, sequentially used agents:
    Subject matter under subclass 933 wherein a plurality of different agents
    are added one after the other to all or part of the feedstock.

    (1)     Note.  "Different" is intended to mean chemically different
    materials and not a single material in different stages of contamination or
    dilution with hydrocarbon as would be formed during concurrent extraction.


CLS 585/837
TXT One agent is a diluent, i.e., nonselective solvent or heat exchange
    material:

    Subject matter under subclass 836 in which one of the agents serves to heat
    or cool a material involved in the process or in which the agent dissolves
    an entire hydrocarbon feedstream.


CLS 585/838
TXT Resolution of feed into more than two different components:

    Subject matter under subclass 836 wherein three or more different
    materials, contained in the feedstock to the process, are separated from
    each other.

    (1)     Note.  Each of the three components may be hydrocarbon, as in the
    separation of an aromatic, an olefin, and a paraffin contained in the feed,
    or one or more may be a nonhydrocarbon, such as in removing
    sulfur-containing and color-forming impurities, separately, from a
    paraffin, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    802+,   for a process wherein a feedstock is separated and one of the
    components is removed by a phenomenon other than addition of an extraneous
    agent.


CLS 585/839
TXT Later agent disengages earlier, e.g., decomplexing agent, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 836 in which a later agent is contacted with
    the product of contacting an earlier agent with the feedstock or feedstock
    component, e.g., a complex, an extract phase, etc., to reverse the original
    interaction and release hydrocarbon and the earlier agent.

    (1)     Note.  Where merely the subcombination step or steps of
    disengagement of a hydrocarbon from a compound or complex is claimed, e.g.,
    decomplexing a Werner complex, the process is considered to be a synthesis
    processs not a purification process for subclasses 800+.


CLS 585/840
TXT Later agent is hydrocarbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 839 in which a later agent which disengages
    an earlier agent is a hydrocarbon.

    (1)     Note.  Patents appearing in this subclass are not cross-referenced
    to subclass 867.


CLS 585/841
TXT Hi:

    Subject matter under subclass 833 wherein the added agent is hydrogen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250+,   for processes of adding hydrogen to an unsaturated bond, especially
    subclasses 258+ for hydrogenation of an unsaturated bond of a contaminant.

    (1)     Note.  "Hydrodesulfurization" processes are proper for placement in
    this subclass.


CLS 585/842
TXT HF and another fluoride:

    Subject matter under subclass 833 in which the agent contains hydrogen
    fluoride and another compound containing fluorine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    702+,   for a process of paraffin synthesis in which an HF catalyst is used
    also as a purifying or separating agent.


CLS 585/843
TXT Ag:

    Subject matter under subclass 833 wherein an extraneous agent contains
    silver or a compound thereof.


CLS 585/844
TXT By interaction with monoolefin:

    Subject matter under subclass 843 wherein the process involves silver or a
    silver compound interengaging a monoolefin from the feed, e.g., by
    dissolving monoolefin, forming a complex with monoolefin, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    820+,   for a separation process wherein silver or a silver compound in
    solid form, e.g., firmly held on a support, etc., is described as adsorbing
    or absorbing an unsaturated hydrocarbon.


CLS 585/845
TXT Cu:

    Subject matter under subclass 833 wherein an extraneous agent contains
    copper or a compound thereof.


CLS 585/846
TXT Ammoniacal, e.g., Cu ammonium acetate (CAA), etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 845 wherein ammonia is present in the agent
    with copper, for example, in the form of a copper and ammonium salt, an
    organic amine mixed with a copper compound, etc.


CLS 585/847
TXT Triple-bond compound separated:

    Subject matter under subclass 846 wherein the agent, e.g., CAA, etc., is
    added for separation or purification of acetylene or a substituted
    acetylene.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    830,    for a separation process in which copper ammonium acetate in solid
    form, e.g., firmly held on a support, etc., is described as absorbing or
    adsorbing an unsaturated hydrocarbon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, for the preparation of an
    acetylene-containing mixture from carbides by decomposition with water.

    95,     Gas Separation:  Processes, subclass 238 for processes of gas
    separation in which an alkyne (e.g., acetylene, etc.) is sorbed in a liquid.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, particularly subclasses 245.1+
    for a process wherein an initially gaseous or vaporous mixture is treated
    to remove or change one of the components by a chemical reaction.


CLS 585/848
TXT Plural metal or nonhalide Cu compound-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 845 wherein the extraneous material is a
    compound containing copper and another metal or is a copper compound
    containing no halogen.


CLS 585/849
TXT Cu halide with added material other than water:

    Subject matter under subclass 845 in which the extraneous agent contains
    copper halide and another material, the material being other than merely
    water.


CLS 585/850
TXT Group VII or VIII transition metal-containing e.g., werner complex
    formulation, etc:

    Subject matter under subclass 833 wherein an extraneous agent contains
    manganese, iron, cobalt, nickel, technetium, ruthenium, rhodium, palladium,
    rhenium, osmium, iridium, or platinum, or a compound thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    817,    for a process wherein Werner complex-forming material in liquid
    state is added to a liquid mixture to be separated and the mixture is
    cooled to form a separatable solid.

    820+,   especially 830, for a process wherein a mixture is separated by use
    of a solid Werner complex material which sorbs a component of the mixture
    and is regenerable by desorption.


CLS 585/851
TXT Group III nontransition element-containing: Subject matter under subclass
    833 wherein an extraneous agent contains boron, aluminum, gallium, indium,
    or thallium or a compound thereof.


CLS 585/852
TXT Al:

    Subject matter under subclass 851 in which the agent contains aluminum in
    free or combined form.

    (1)     Note.  Often the agent is a catalyst containing alumina or aluminum
    halide.


CLS 585/853
TXT Alkaline metal-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 833 wherein an extraneous agent contains
    lithium, sodium, potassium, rubidium, cesium, beryllium, magnesium,
    calcium, strontium, or barium or a compound thereof.


CLS 585/854
TXT Elemental metal, oxide, or hydroxide:
    Subject matter under subclass 853 in which the agent is in the form of free
    or uncombined metal, an oxide, or a hydroxide of the metal.


CLS 585/855
TXT Metal-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 833 wherein an agent contains metal in free
    or combined form.

    (1)     Note.  Metals appropriate for placing patents in this subclass
    include transition metals of periodic table groups IIB, IIIB, IVB, VB, and
    VIB, germanium, gold, tin, lead, arsenic, antimony, and bismuth.


CLS 585/856
TXT S-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 833 wherein an agent contains sulfur in free
    or combined form.


CLS 585/857
TXT S dioxide, sulfolane, or sulfolene:

    Subject matter under subclass 856 wherein an agent is one of the
    sulfur-oxygen compounds, sulfur dioxide (SO2), sulfolane
    (tetrahydrothiophene-1, 1-dioxide),

            or sulfolene (dihydrothiophene-1,
            1-dioxide).


CLS 585/858
TXT Sulfuric acid:

    Subject matter under subclass 856 wherein

    an agent is H2SO4.


CLS 585/859
TXT Interaction with tertiary olefin:

    Subject matter under subclass 858 wherein the purification or separation is
    accomplished by interengagement of the sulfuric cide with an olefin which
    has a double bond attached to a tertiary carbon atom, that is, a carbon
    atom which bears no hydrogen, the interengagement being a reaction between
    the two materials, a dissolving of one in the other, etc.


CLS 585/860
TXT N-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 833 wherein an agent contains nitrogen.


CLS 585/861
TXT Ammonia:

    Subject matter under subclass 860 wherein an agent is NH3 or NH4OH.


CLS 585/862
TXT Carbonyl moiety-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 860 wherein an agent contains the =C=O
    functional grouping, e.g., and acid, an aldehyde, a ketone, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, subclass 96.5 for the formation of a
    urea adduct, even when the formation of such adduct is merely for the
    purpose of purifying a hydrocarbon.


CLS 585/863
TXT Interaction with aromatic:

    Subject matter under subclass 960 wherein the purification or separation is
    accomplished by interengagement of an agent with an aromatic compound,
    e.g., by reaching therewith dissolving it, etc.


CLS 585/864
TXT Organic agent:

    Subject matter under subclass 833 wherein the agent is a carbon compound
    characterized by the presence in a molecule thereof of two carbon atoms
    bonded together or one atom of carbon bonded to at least one atom of
    hydrogen or halogen or one atom of nitrogen by a single or double bond.

    (1)     Note.  An organic compound under this definition is as defined in
    the class definition of Class 260, Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, as
    qualified by (34) Note therein.

    (2)     Note.  The organic part may be present as the organic radical part
    of a compound or as the organic portion of a mixture of organic and
    inorganic materials.


CLS 585/865
TXT Heterocyclic or polymeric:

    Subject matter under subclass 864 wherein the agent has a molecular
    structure which includes a ring or cyclic configuration, which ring
    contains other than carbon atoms, or wherein the agent is of indefinite
    molecular weight, greater than 150, and made by reating with each other
    smaller molecules having definite identities.

    (1)     Note.  The anhydride of a dicarboxylic acid often is a heterocyclic
    compound, e.g., maleic anhydride, o-phthalic anhydride, etc.


CLS 585/866
TXT Acid, anhydride, ester or ether:

    Subject matter under subclass 864 wherein an agent contains the grouping
    -C--C- or -C-O-.


CLS 585/867
TXT Hydrocarbon:

    Subject matter under subclass 864 wherein an agent contains only carbon and
    hydrogen in its molecule.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    840,    for a purification or separation process wherein a hydrocarbon is
    used to disengage a previously added agent from a hydrocarbon.


CLS 585/868
TXT Inorganic O-containing agent:

    Subject matter under subclass 833 in which an extraneous agent added to
    purify, separate, or recover the hydrocarbon is inorganic and contains
    oxygen, e.g., water, phosphoric acid, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for a hydrocarbon separation process involving the formation of a
    hydrocarbon hydrate.


CLS 585/899
TXT MISCELLANEOUS PROCESS, E.G., INDETERMINATE MODIFICATION OF A PROPERTY,
    STORAGE, TRANSPORTAION, ETC.:

    Subject matter under the class definition not otherwise provided for.

    (1)     Note.  A hydrocarbon synthesis or purification process is placed in
    this subclass (899) only when the type of hydrocarbon synthesized or the
    purification mechanism employed cannot be determined from the claims,
    specification, or state of the art.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for a "preserving" or "storing" process which involves no more than
    merely blending a preservative with a hydrocarbon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 600+ for manufacture of a solidified or
    liquefied gas product from a gas; subclasses 45.1+ for handling of such
    product; and subclasses 56+ for a cooling process, e.g., quenching, per se.

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 13 for a process in which the flow of a
    fluid is affected by the addition of material or energy.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, subclasses 46 and 197 for a process of
    transporting a fluid.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 585/900
TXT Rehabilitation of H acceptor:

    Collection of patents (under unnumbered subclass CATALYST AND RECYCLE
    CONSIDERATIONS) concerned with dehydrogenation to produce a hydrocarbon
    compound, in which a hydrogen acceptor compound is employed and is
    rehabilitated for reuse in the process, the rehabilitation usually
    comprising oxidation of the reduced acceptor compound.


CLS 585/901
TXT With recycle, rehabilitation, or preservation of solvent, diluent, or
    mass-action agent:

    Collection of documents (under unnumbered subclass CATALYST AND RECYCLE
    CONSIDERATIONS) (a) to prevent loss of, (b) to restore effectiveness, or
    (c) to return to a stage of a process, either directly to indirectly, from
    which it has been withdrawn from use in that stage, a material which is a
    solvent or diluent or an agent, usually a normally undesired by-product of
    the process, which regulates the equilibrium of the process to favor
    production of desired product.

    (1)     Note.  Recycled effluent from a process which is added to a
    feedstock in an amount designed to control reaction time is considered to
    be a solvent or diluent.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    702,    for a saturated compound synthesis process in which a material used
    as a solvent in one stage of a process is used as a catalyst in another
    part of the process before return to the original stage.

    954,    for other processes which exploit mass-action phenomena.


CLS 585/902
TXT Recycle of solvent and catalyst:

    Collection of documents under subclass 901 which disclose recycle of both a
    solvent and a catalyst.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    706,    for a saturated compound synthesis process wherein a reactor
    effluent component is added to a catalyst as an agent for rehabilitation or
    recycle.


CLS 585/903
TXT With hydrocarbon recycle to control synthesis reaction, e.g., by cooling,
    quenching, etc.:

    Collection of documents (under unnumbered subclass CATALYST AND RECYCLE
    CONSIDERATIONS) which disclose control of a synthesis reaction by recycle
    of a hydrocarbon effluent of the reaction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclasses 56+ for a quenching process, per se.


CLS 585/904
TXT Catalyst rehabilitation by reversion from different compound:

    Collection of documents (under unnumbered subclass CATALYST AND RECYCLE
    CONSIDERATIONS) which disclose rehabilitation of a catalyst, including
    synthesis of or decomposition of a nonhydrocarbon compound containing an
    essential component of the catalyst.

    (1)     Note.  The catalyst may be returned to reaction in a different form
    from that originally employed in the reaction, e.g., as an alkyl chloride
    rather than the HCI originally used.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    311,    for plural serial diverse syntheses in which one synthesis
    rehabilitates the catalyst which catalyzes the other synthesis.

    710,    for a similar process which relates only to an alkylation reaction
    which synthesizes saturated compounds.


CLS 585/905
TXT By-product conversion to feed:

    Collection of documents (under unnumbered subclass CATALYST AND RECYCLE
    CONSIDERATIONS) which disclose the conversion of a synthesis effluent
    component which is undesired in the product to a material similar to a
    component of the original feedstock.


CLS 585/906
TXT Catalyst preservation or manufacture (e.g., activation, etc.) before use:

    Collection of documents (under unnumbered subclass CATALYST AND RECYCLE
    CONSIDERATIONS) which disclose an optimum method of preparing a catalyst
    for use in a particular reaction or a method of preventing catalyst loss in
    a process.


CLS 585/910
TXT Exploiting or conserving heat of quenching, reaction, or regeneration:

    Collection of documents (under unnumbered subclass HEAT CONSIDERATIONS)
    which disclose the return of heat generated by a reaction or by catalyst
    regeneration or absorbed by the quenching of reactants to the process,
    e.g., to warm feedstock, to provide energy for subsequent distillation, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402,    503, 535, 602, and 634, for aromatic synthesis, olefin addition,
    alkyne synthesis, diolefin synthesis, and unsaturated compound synthesis,
    respectively, using similar techniques.


CLS 585/911
TXT Introducing, maintaining, or removing heat by atypical procedure:

    Collection of documents (under unnumbered subclass HEAT CONSIDERATIONS)
    disclosing the heating of a material, the cooling of a material, or the
    prevention of either, using a fuel, refrigerant, heat-exchange material,
    procedural step, etc., which is not standard industrial practice.

    (1)     Note.  The following is a summary of Patent and Trademark Office
    classes concerned with changing temperature or preventing temperature
    change.

    Class 62,       Refrigeration

    Class 110, Furnaces

    Class 122,      Liquid Heaters and
            Vaporiers

    Class 126, Stoves and Furnaces

    Class 165, Heat Exchange

    Class 219, Electric Heating

    Class 236,      Automatic Temperature
                    and Humidity Regulation

    Class 237, Heating Systems

    Class 373,      Industrial Electric Heating
            Furnaces

    Class 431, Combustion

    Class 432, Heating


CLS 585/912
TXT Molten material:

    Subject matter under subclass 911 which discloses the use of a normally
    solid material which has been liquefied by heat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    634+,   for use of a molten heat carrier in the synthesis of a monoolefin.


CLS 585/913
TXT Electric:

    Subject matter under subclass 911 which discloses the use of electricity
    for heating or cooling.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    136,    Batteries:  Thermoelectric and Photoelectric, subclasses 200+ for
    methods and devices which convert heat directly to electricity thereby
    creating a cooling effect.


CLS 585/914
TXT Phase change, e.g., evaporation, etc.:
    Subject matter under subclass 911 which discloses temperature regulation
    due to the heat released or consumed by change of a material from the
    gaseous, liquid, or solid state to another of these states.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    715,    for autorefrigeration in an alkylation process to produce a
    saturated compound.


CLS 585/920
TXT Using apparatus of recited composition:
    Collection of documents (under unnumbered subclass APPARATUS
    CONSIDERATIONS) wherein a process recites the composition of apparatus
    employed in the process,e.g., a stainless steel reactor wall, a refractory
    ceramic baffle, etc.

    (1)     Note.  Materials which move through or are readily removable from
    the apparatus, e.g., catalyst beds, are not considered part of the
    apparatus for this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403,    503, 537, and 636, for processes for synthesizing aromatics, olefin
    polymers, acetylenes, and monoolefins, respectively, wherein the
    composition of the apparatus used is specified.

    921+,   for a collection of patents in which the effectiveness of a process
    depends upon the use of apparatus having a defined structure configuration,
    independent of the composition of the structure.


CLS 585/921
TXT Using recited apparatus structure:
    Collection of documents (under unnumbered subclass APPARATUS
    CONSIDERATIONS) which discloses the effectiveness of a process as being
    dependent upon the use of a particular configuration of apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  The following expressions generally are not considered
    sufficient to warrant placement of a document in this or indented
    subclasses unless a dimension is recited.

    annular zone

    acetylene converter

    converter

    elongated

    multistage reactor

    pyrolysis reactor

    reactor regenerative furnace

    vessel

    zone

    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, appropriate subclasses for apparatus employed
    in synthesis processes of this class.


CLS 585/922
TXT Reactor fluid manipulating device:

    Subject matter under subclass 921 wherein the apparatus is a device, part
    of a synthesis reactor, which serves to change the condition of a fluid in
    an active way, such as an impeller, or in a passive way, such as a
    perforated plate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    720,    for this subject matter used in connection with alkylation to
    synthesize a saturated compound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, appropriate subclasses for methods and apparatus in
    general for mixing and other manipulation of fluids.


CLS 585/923
TXT At reactor inlet:

    Subject matter under subclass 922 wherein the device is at that point where
    feed or an extraneous agent enters a reactor.


CLS 585/924
TXT Reactor shape or disposition:

    Subject matter under subclass 921 wherein the configuration is that of the
    reactor or the relationship of the reactor to its surroundings, e.g., other
    elements of apparatus, the earth, etc.


CLS 585/925
TXT Dimension or proportion:

    Subject matter under subclass 924 wherein a numerical dimension or the
    relationship between two dimensions of the reactor is disclosed as
    contributing to the effectiveness of the process.


CLS 585/926
TXT Plurality or verticality:

    Subject matter under subclass 924 wherein the effectiveness of the process
    is disclosed as depending upon having a vertical reactor or having more
    than one reactor.

    (1)     Note.  Where the reactor is described as having a plurality of
    vertically spaced components, e.g., catalyst beds, the verticality of the
    reactor is assumed.


CLS 585/930
TXT Process including synthesis of nonhydrocarbon intermediate:

    Collection of documents (under unnumbered subclass SPECIAL CHEMICAL
    CONSIDERATION) disclosing plural-step processes for the synthesis of a
    hydrocarbon in which a step synthesizes a compound containing more than
    carbon and hydrogen atoms from which the hydrocarbon product is synthesized.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, appropriate subclasses for the
    synthesis of nonhydrocarbon organic compounds, per se.


CLS 585/931
TXT Metal-, Si-, B-, or P-containing, e.g., grignard, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 930 wherein the intermediate contains a
    metal, silicon, boron, or phosphorus.


CLS 585/932
TXT Carboxyl-containing, e.g., acid, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 930 wherein the intermediate contain the
    group -C--.


CLS 585/933
TXT N-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 930 wherein the intermediate contains
    nitrogen.


CLS 585/934
TXT Chalcogen-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 930 wherein the intermediate contains oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium.


CLS 585/935
TXT Halogen-containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 930 wherein the intermediate contains
    chlorine, bromine, fluorind, or iodine.


CLS 585/940
TXT Opening of hydrocarbon ring:

    Collection of documents (under unnumbered subclass SPECIAL CHEMICAL
    CONSIDERATIONS) which disclose a hydrocarbon synthesis in which a
    hydrocarbon moiety is converted from a cyclic moiety to an acyclic moiety.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    353+,   601 and 671, for manufacture of alicyclic, diolefin and monoolefin
    compounds, respectively, by opening a hydrocarbon ring.


CLS 585/941
TXT Isotope exchange process:

    Collection of documents (under unnumbered subclass SPECIAL CHEMICAL
    CONSIDERATIONS) which disclose the replacement of a carbon atom or a
    hydrogen atom of a hydrocarbon compound by a specified or unusual isotope
    of carbon or hydrogen, e.g., carbon-14, deuterium, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    23,     Chemistry:  Physical Processes, subclass 230.6 for test methods
    involving isotope exchange.


CLS 585/942
TXT Production of carbonium ion or hydrocarbon free radical:

    Collection of documents (under unnumbered subclass SPECIAL CHEMICAL
    CONSIDERATIONS) which disclose the inducement of a transitory, highly
    reactive high-energy state in a hydrocarbon, in which state the hydrocarbon
    has at least one unpaired electron or has a net electric charge.


CLS 585/943
TXT Synthesis from methane or inorganic carbon source, e.g., coal, etc.:

    Collection of documents (under unnumbered subclass SPECIAL CHEMICAL
    CONSIDERATIONS) which disclose synthesis of hydrocarbons from CH4,
    elemental carbon, or an inorganic carbon compound.

    (1)     Note.  Inorganic compounds are those which do not fall under the
    definition of carbon compounds given in the class definition of Class 260
    and also the following compounds which are considered inorganic:
    hydrocyanic acid, cyanogen, isocyanic acid, cyanamide, cyanogen halides,
    isothiocyanic acid, fulminic acid, and metal carbides.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    538+,   for acetylene manufacture from methane.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Products and Processes, subclass 400 for a process
    in which coal or other solid mineral material is converted to a liquid
    mixture of materials similar to petroleum or a petroleum fraction.

    518,    Chemistry:  Fischer-Tropsch Processes; or Purification or Recovery
    of Products Thereof, for the manufacture of hydrocarbons from hydrogen and
    carbon oxides.


CLS 585/944
TXT Radiation-resistant composition:

    Collection of documents (under unnumberes subclass SPECIAL CHEMICAL
    CONSIDERATIONS) disclosing hydrocarbon compounds or mixtures of such
    compounds which are susceptible to fewer changes in physical or chemical
    properties under the influence of radiant energy, whether visible or
    invisible, including that radiant energy produced by atomic disintegration,
    fission, or fusion.


CLS 585/945
TXT Product is drying oil:

    Collection of documents (under unnumbered subclass SPECIAL CHEMICAL
    CONSIDERATIONS) disclosing a hydrocarbon product which upon aging in a
    particular environment, e.g., air, etc., becomes a solid material of
    indefinite molecular weight.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    507,    for a process of making a polyunsaturated olefin hydrocarbon by
    polymerization.  The products of such processes frequently are disclosed as
    having utility as a drying oil. Patents classified in subclass 507 are not
    cross-referenced here.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclass 1 for a synthetic
    drying oil derived from a mineral oil.


CLS 585/946
TXT Product is waxy polymer:

    Collection of documents (under unnumbered subclass SPECIAL CHEMICAL
    CONSIDERATIONS) disclosing a hydrocarbon product polymer which is described
    as "waxy", this term apparently meaning a solid material without the
    tensile properties usually associated with a synthetic resin.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    446+    and 502+, for processes which yield waxy products.


CLS 585/947
TXT Terpene manufacture or recovery:

    Collection of documents (under unnumbered subclass SPECIAL CHEMICAL
    CONSIDERATIONS) disclosing the synthesis or purification of terpentine or
    other terpene materials.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    355,    for terpene synthesis by isomerization and the defintions and notes
    thereto for a listing of various C10 terpenes.


CLS 585/950
TXT Prevention or removal of corrosion or solid deposits:

    Collection of documents (under unnumbered subclass MISCELLANEOUS
    CONSIDERATIONS) disclosing procedures for preventing the deterioration of
    apparatus contacted by a hydrocarbon or an agent used in hydrocarbon
    processing or for preventing solid products from forming or accumulating on
    such apparatus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Process and Products, subclasses 47 and 48+ for
    similar procedures used in chemical conversion of petroleum hydrocarbons.


CLS 585/951
TXT Reaction start-up procedure:

    Collection of documents (under unnumbered subclass MISCELLANEOUS
    CONSIDERATIONS) disclosing preparations for getting a synthesis reaction
    on-stream or the preliminary steps used before a reaction becomes
    continuous.


CLS 585/952
TXT Reaction stopping or retarding:

    Collection of documents (under unnumbered subclass MISCELLANEOUS
    CONSIDERATIONS) disclosing procedures for preventing or discontinuing an
    unwanted reaction in hydrocarbon processing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for a reaction stopping or retarding procedure which comprises no
    more than blending a stabilizer or preservative with the hydrocarbon.


CLS 585/953
TXT Pulsed, sonic, or plasma process:
    Collection of documents (under unnumbered subclass MISCELLANEOUS
    CONSIDERATIONS) disclosing the application to material of a regular
    rhythmic vibration, a sudden burst of motive energy, or containment or
    transportation of material by use of a high energy field.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    539     and 540, for an acetylene synthesis process which involves
    containment of reactant within a high energy gaseous envelope.


CLS 585/954
TXT Exploiting mass-action phenomenon:
    Collection of documents (under unnumbered subclass MISCELLANEOUS
    CONSIDERATIONS) disclosing a modification of a reaction system including
    the addition to or removal from a reaction zone of a material other than a
    catalyst or solvent to shift the equilibrium state of the reaction in a
    desired direction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    901,    for a collection of documents disclosing the recycle of a
    mass-action agent.


CLS 585/955
TXT Specified mixing procedure:

    Collection of documents (under unnumbered subclass MISCELLANEOUS
    CONSIDERATIONS) disclosing procedures for achieving desired contact among
    fluent materials.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    720,    for a saturated compound alkylation synthesis procedure involving
    specified fluid flow.

    922+,   for a reactor fluid manipulating device.


CLS 585/956
TXT Condition-responsive control and related procedures in alicyclic synthesis
    and purification:

    Cross-reference collection of purification and alicyclic synthesis
    processes (under unnumbered subclass MISCELLANEOUS CONSIDERATIONS)
    involving a step of taking a measurement, sensing a condition, or making a
    test, or controlling an operating condition of the process in response to a
    condition different from that controlled, e.g., flow rate of feed in
    response to temperature of effluent, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    263,    401, 501, and 701, for similar procedures employed in hydrogenation
    and the synthesis of aromatic, unsaturated, and saturated hydrocarbon
    compounds, respectively.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, for processes and apparatus for making a
    measurement or test of any kind not claimed in combination with synthesis
    of an organic compound and not elsewhere classifiable, and the class
    definition thereof for the identification of other classes concerned with
    testing.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 1+ for
    a test or measurement associated with a chemical reaction not elsewhere
    classifiable, or analysis by chemical methods of organic material or the
    combination of measuring and testing with methods of regulating a reaction.


CLS 588/
TTL HAZARDOUS OR TOXIC WASTE  DESTRUCTION OR CONTAINMENT

CLS 588/
TXT
    I.      This is the generic class for (1) hazardous or toxic waste
    destruction by any means to include, heating, chemical action, or the
    interaction with any form of radiation; (2) permanent containment of
    hazardous or toxic waste by methods to include storage in a simple
    container, solidification, vitrification, cementation, and more elaborate
    methods of storage such as marine, tetonic, or extraterrestrial storage;
    (3) hazardous or toxic waste conversion by any means (e.g., chemical,
    physical, etc.) to an environmentally safe substance; and (4) preparation
    for destruction or containment as well as the actual destruction or
    containment.

    (1)     Note.  Chemical substances that move through commerce and are used
    or treated in some useful application are not considered to be hazardous or
    toxic waste.  These substances may be considered hazardous or toxic waste
    in the event they are introduced into the environment in a manner not
    consistent with their intended utility.

    (2)     Note.  Waste proper for classification in Class 588 is considered
    to be too hazardous or toxic for placement in an ordinary municipal
    landfill.

    GLOSSARY

    Terms used throughout the schedule and definitions are to have the meaning
    ascribed below.

    Generally accepted or commonly used "art" terms retain their meaning found
    in their everyday usage and are not found in this glossary.  Certain
    specialized terms are employed in these subclasses and they have been given
    definitions altered to meet the needs of this class.  Some or all of the
    terms may be broader or more restricted as well as different in meaning
    compared to normal usage.

    ALKALI METALS
    The metal elements in group I of the periodic system consisting of Li, Na,
    K, Rb, and Cs.

    ALKALINE EARTH METALS
    The metal elements in group II of the periodic system consisting of Mg, Ca,
    Sr, and Ba.

    CATALYST
    A substance which either increases or decreases the speed of a chemical
    reaction.

    CHALCOGEN
    Also known as chalcogenides, specifically O, S, Se, or Te.

    COMPOSITION
    A mixture of material(s) such as elements, compounds, etc. which materials
    are not present in a ratio of small whole numbers based on molar ratios,
    i.e., mixtures.

    COMPOUND
    A substance whose molecules consist of unlike atoms, whose constituents
    cannot be separated by physical means, whose properties are entirely
    different from those of its constituent elements, and which contains
    definite proportions of its constituent elements, depending on their atomic
    weights.

    CONTAINMENT
    To hold or enclose totally to prevent any leaching or leaking of the
    hazardous or toxic material into the environment, and any use of a
    container that is destroyed with the waste.

    CONTAMINATE
    To make a first substance impure (hazardous                   or toxic) by
    contact with or by the addition of a second or more substances.

    DESTROYING
    To convert the hazardous or toxic waste to an environmentally safe
    substance to include the steps used to prepare the waste for destruction as
    well as the actual destruction.

    ENCAPSULATING
    To immobilize hazardous or toxic waste materials by any means to include
    vitrification, combining with organoclay and mixing, adding a cement
    material, or enclosing in a container the hazardous or toxic waste
    material.  The hazardous or toxic waste material is held in place and is
    not permitted to be leached or leaked out into the environment.

    ENVIRONMENTALLY SAFE SUBSTANCE
    Is any material that in any of its chemical or physical interactions with
    the environment results in no measurable adverse effects or degradations on
    the environment.

    HALOGENS
    The elements (F, Cl,Br, I, or At).

    HAZARDOUS WASTE
    Materials that when present in the environment produce for man and other
    living organisms an acute and/or cumulative effect that is a dangerous,
    risky, or perilous environmental situation in so far as the physiological
    well being of the organism is concerned (e.g., caustic chemicals,
    irritants, cancer causing agents, and other tumor producing materials).

    HEAVY METAL
    A metal other than the following (light) metals, lithium (Li), sodium (Na),
    Potassium (K), Rubidium (Rb), Cesium (Cs), Francium (Fr), Calcium (Ca),
    Strontium (Sr), Barium (Ba), Beryllium (Be), Magnesium (Mg), and Aluminum
    (Al).

    IMMOBILIZE
    To contain the hazardous or toxic waste by any means that keeps the
    hazardous or toxic waste in a matrix or container such as cement,
    organoclay, glass, or in an actual physical container.

    NOBLE GASES
    The elements of the periodic table that consist of He, Ar, Kr, Xe, and Rn
    which  have no valency and combine only with great difficulty, if at all,
    with other elements.

    INCINERATE
    To burn to highly oxidized ashes.  The oxidation is chemically near
    completion.

    LEACHING
    The processes of extracting or dissolving a soluble component from a
    mixture by contacting the mixture with a solvent, resulting in dissolution
    or solution of the solubles and leaving an insoluble          material.

    Note.   Solution of a substance in a normally
                              solid, molten material is not considered
                                 to be leaching as defined above.

    ORGANIC COMPOUND
    A compound as defined in the definition of Class 260, Chemistry of Carbon
    Compounds as qualified by (34) Note.

    ORGANIC METAL CONTAINING COMPOUND
    Any carbon containing  compound as defined by the definition of Class 260,
    in which the carbon compound contains a metal.

    RADIOACTIVE
    Any element capable of giving off rays or subatomic particles by
    spontaneous disintegration.  The radioactive elements are usually those
    having an atomic number of 84 or greater and the phenomenon of
    radioactivity is not affected by chemical or physical influences or matter
    adulterated by radioactivity.

    RARE EARTHS
    The compounds of the elements found on the  periodic chart at atomic
    numbers 21, 39, or 57-71 inclusive.

    SORPTION
    The ability of a substance to undergo a surface reaction that causes that
    substance to be able to retain other substances, these other substances are
    generally gases, liquids, or dissolved materials.

    SLUDGE
    Residue (usually viscous) from an industrial, home, or agricultural process
    commonly containing heavy metals, sulfur compounds, phosphorus compounds,
    nitrogen compounds, and halogenated compounds any of which may be organic,
    however these specific compounds are not required.

    TOXIC WASTE
    Materials that are direct physiological poisons to living organisms (e.g.,
    pesticides, heavy metal ion solutions, and other organic and inorganic
    materials) that are poisonous to life.

    VOLATILIZING
    Converting a normally solid or liquid material into a gas or vapor state;
    mere evaporation of water or other solvents is included under this
    definition.

    II.     Line With Classes Producing Desired Useful Product

    A process which produces a desired product for an end use, e.g., by
    manufacturing, chemical reaction, or purification etc., is classified with
    the product produced and controls over Class 588 regardless of whether or
    not a toxic or hazardous waste is destroyed or contained as part of the
    process.  Class 588 provides for a process which destroys or contains
    hazardous or toxic waste and whose products are intended only to be safely
    discarded or whose production is only incidental to the destruction or
    containment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, appropriate subclass for a process
    directed to the production of a combustible gas from hazardous or toxic
    waste.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, for processes of preparing or treating elemental metal employing
    hazardous or toxic waste as a raw material or agent.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 600+ for the
    production of cement using hazardous or toxic waste.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclasses for
    the interaction of electrical and wave energy with hazardous or toxic waste.

    208,    Mineral Oils: Processes and Products, subclasses 262.1+ for
    processes of removing halogen contaminants, e.g., PCB's from mineral oils.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, provides for the purification of
    water (liquids) as useful product even though hazardous or toxic waste may
    be removed from or destroyed in the water (liquids).

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 625+ for compositions that contain
    radioactive hazardous or toxic waste.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses for
    recovering inorganic elements or compounds from hazardous or toxic waste.

    532,    Organic Compounds, appropriate subclasses for the production of
    useful products from hazardous or toxic waste.

    935,    Genetic Engineering: Recombinant DNA Technology, Hybrid or Fused
    Cell Technology and Related  Manipulations of Nucleic Acids, for the method
    of use of genetically engineered cells in the destruction of hazardous or
    toxic waste, e.g., oil spill cleanup, etc., note subclass 59.  For the use
    of cells containing a vector and or exogenous gene, per se, propagation
    thereof; other membrane encapsulated DNA, e.g., protoplast, etc., see
    subclasses 66+.

    976,    Nuclear Technology, for the production of nuclear fuel and the
    assemblies of the fuel into reactors.


    III.    Line With Method Classes

    Class 588 controls over general method classes for storing or containing
    waste which is too hazardous or toxic to be placed in an ordinary municipal
    landfill.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    34,     Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, for separation of
    liquid hazardous or toxic waste from solids and the process of using gases
    or vapors to contact solids for the removal of hazardous or toxic waste,
    see subclasses 1-42.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 507+ for the methods of adding hazardous or toxic
    waste to melting or molten iron and subclasses 585+ for methods of adding
    hazardous or toxic waste to nonferrous metals at above 300oC.

    86,     Ammunition and Explosive-Charge Making, subclass 50 for process of
    bomb disposal.

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 235+ for apparatus used in the incineration of
    refuse other than hazardous or toxic waste and subclasses 341+ for methods
    used in the incinerating of hazardous or toxic waste.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, appropriate subclasses for the mere process of
    using solar heat in the nondestructive heating of hazardous or toxic waste.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, appropriate subclasses for
    separating a liquid mixture with one or more component being hazardous or
    toxic waste and subclasses 95+ for the additional use of water or steam in
    the separation.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclass for
    processes using electrical and wave energy not involving hazardous or toxic
    waste.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, provides for the methods used to
    purify water (liquids) even though hazardous or toxic waste may be removed
    from or destroyed in the water (liquids).   For the destruction, per se, of
    hazardous or toxic waste, refer to Class 588, even when liquids (water) are
    involved, and when no liquid product (water) is recovered.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering,  subclasses 128+ for the process
    of disposing hazardous or toxic waste in the soil.

    935,    Genetic Engineering:  Recombinant DNA Technology, Hybrid or Fused
    Cell Technology and Related Manipulations of Nucleic Acids, appropriate
    subclasses for the methods used in producing altered organisms which can be
    used in the treatment of hazardous or toxic waste.

    976,    Nuclear Technology, for the methods used in the production of
    nuclear fuel, manufacturing of nuclear reactors, and nuclear technology in
    general.

    IV.     Line With Apparatus Classes

    This class does not provide for apparatus.  Apparatus is classified based
    on its function without regard to whether or not hazardous or toxic waste
    is the substance acted on.  Significant disclosure to processes of treating
    hazardous or toxic waste in apparatus patents may be cross-referenced to
    Class 588 as appropriate.  Some exemplary classes providing for apparatus
    employed in the processes of this class are as follows.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    86,     Ammunition and Explosive-Charge Making, subclass 50 for apparatus
    used in bomb disposal.

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 235+ for apparatus used in the incineration of
    hazardous or toxic waste.

    196,    Mineral Oils:  Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for the apparatus
    used in the treating of hazardous or toxic waste.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for apparatus used
    in the treating of hazardous or toxic waste.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 193+ for
    apparatus used in the treatment of hazardous or toxic waste.

    261,    Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus used in the treatment of gas or liquid hazardous or toxic waste.

    266,    Metallurgical Apparatus, subclasses 200+ for apparatus useful in
    treating molten or melting metal with hazardous or toxic waste.

    373,    Industrial Electrical Heating Furnaces, appropriate subclasses for
    electric heating furnaces used in the treatment of hazardous or toxic waste.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 128+ for the apparatus
    used in the storing of hazardous or toxic waste in the earth.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 129+ for chemical apparatus used in
    treating hazardous or toxic waste.

    935,    Genetic Engineering:  Recombinant DNA Technology, Hybrid or Fused
    Cell Technology and Related Manipulations of Nucleic Acids, subclasses 85+
    for apparatus used in the genetic engineering of cells for use in treating
    hazardous or toxic waste.

    976,    Nuclear Technology, for the production of nuclear reactors,
    associated apparatus, and arrangements thereof.


    V.      Line With Other Classes That Provide for Destroying Hazardous or
    Toxic Waste

    Class 588 controls over general classes that are only incidental to the
    destruction or containment of hazardous or toxic waste.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 625+ for products (compositions) that
    contain radioactive hazardous or toxic waste.  Class 252 also provides for
    containment of radioactive waste.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 210+ for the modifying
    or removing of a component of normally gaseous mixture containing hazardous
    or toxic waste.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 262.5 for
    the methods of making micro-organisms, per se, and the methods of using the
    micro-organisms in the treatment of hazardous or toxic waste.


CLS 588/1
TXT DESTRUCTION OR CONTAINMENT OF RADIOACTIVE WASTE:

    Product and process under the class definition wherein radioactive material
    that is intended to be disposed of is transformed to a condition
    facilitating its destruction or disposal or contained so as to hold or
    enclose totally to prevent any leaching or leaking of radioactivity into
    the environment.


CLS 588/2
TXT By fixation in stable solid media:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the radioactive material is
    immobilized in a solid medium.

    (1)     Note.  Immobilization is on either a molecular or particulate
    level, the radioactive material permeating or being part of the whole mass.


CLS 588/3
TXT Cement, concrete, or hydraulic setting:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the solid media is concrete, cement
    containing, or hydraulic setting composition.


CLS 588/4
TXT With additional solid material to enhance fixation of radioactivity:

    Subject matter under subclass 3 wherein the concrete, cement containing, or
    hydraulically settable composition contains an additional solid material
    that enhances retention of the radioactive material to leaking or leaching.

    (1)     Note.  The additional solid does not participate or influence the
    hydraulically settable nature of the solid media.


CLS 588/5
TXT Bituminous:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the solid media is butimen,
    asphalt, or tarlike.


CLS 588/6
TXT Resin  or polymer; e. g., cellulose, polyethylene:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the solid media is a natural or
    synthetic resin or a polymer.


CLS 588/7
TXT Ion exchange resin:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the solid media is a solid resin
    material with chemically bound ionic groups capable of exchanging ion with
    radioactive contaminant ionic groups.


CLS 588/8
TXT Polymer derived from ethylenically unsaturated monomer:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein the polymer is derived only from
    ethylenically unsaturated monomer(s); i.e., wherein the monomer contains a
    c=c which undergoes addition polymerization to form long c-c chains.


CLS 588/9
TXT Clay or clay-like:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the solid media is a fine grained
    naturally occurring earthy material or artificial composition having
    generally, equivalent chemical and physical properties.


CLS 588/10
TXT Ceramic or ceramic-like:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the solid media is an inorganic
    composition that is to be hardened by heat treatment or which has been so
    hardened.


CLS 588/11
TXT Glass, glass-like, or vitreous:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 wherein the ceramic is a glassy or
    vitrified media.


CLS 588/12
TXT Boron containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 11 wherein the glassy or vitreous media
    contains boron.


CLS 588/13
TXT Ion exchange material:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the solid media is a nonresinous
    material having the ability or property, of adsorbing or exchanging cations
    and/or anions with the radioactive material.


CLS 588/14
TXT Silicon containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the solid media contains silicon.


CLS 588/15
TXT Metal containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the solid media contains free metal
    or combined metal and includes alleys and metal compounds.

    (1)     Note.  Rock and synthetic rock are included in this subclass
    because of their mixed metal oxide composition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for similar compositions hardened by heat.


CLS 588/16
TXT Surrounding with specified material or structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the containment surrounding the
    radioactive material is defined by its structure or by the material forming
    the containment or container means.


CLS 588/17
TXT Geological:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the radioactive material
    containment is accomplished by placing it in the ground, bore hole,
    underwater, or space or orbit.


CLS 588/18
TXT Chemical conversion to a table solid:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the radioactive material as it
    occurs in the waste is chemically converted to a solid that is more readily
    disposable; e.g., precipitation as an insoluble solid.


CLS 588/19
TXT Incineration, calcination, pyrolyzing to obtain solid residue:

    Subject matter under subclass 18 wherein the radioactive material is
    burned, calcined, or pyrolyzed to a solid residue to facilitate disposal.


CLS 588/20
TXT Treating radioactive liquid:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein liquid, flowable radioactive waste
    material is placed in better condition for disposal.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes treatment or slurries or solids
    suspended in a liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    159,    Concentrating Evaporators, for processes of concentrating solids
    held in solution or suspension by evaporation of the liquid containing the
    solids and isolation of the concentrate obtained.


CLS 588/200
TXT CHEMICAL OR GERM WARFARE AGENTS DESTROYED:
    Process under the class definition wherein a material intended to be
    employed as a chemical warfare agent is the hazardous or toxic substance
    destroyed or converted.

    (1)     Note.  Included hereunder are the destruction, containment, and
    conversion of nerve gases and mustard agents.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes the destruction, containment, and
    conversion of micro-organisms intended to be used in warfare, e.g., germ
    warfare agents.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    258,    for processes of storage or containment of pathogenic organisms not
    intended for use as warfare agents, e.g., virus, bacteria, and medical
    waste.

    SEARCH CLASS:

     422,   Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, appropriate subclasses for the methods and
    apparatus used in destroying micro-organisms.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, appropriate
    subclasses for processes whereby a micro-organism is used in degradation of
    hazardous or toxic waste, e.g., degrading PCB'S.


CLS 588/201
TXT MOLTEN MEDIA USED (E.G., METAL):
    Process under the class definition wherein a material which is normally
    solid at room temperature is used in a molten state to destroy or convert a
    hazardous or toxic waste to an environmentally safe substance.

    (1)     Note.  The molten medium employed is most commonly molten metal or
    molten salts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, appropriate subclasses for a process which produces elemental
    metal as a desired product and which may also destroy hazardous or toxic
    waste.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclass 11 for the use of
    liquid metal in a thermolytic distillation for purposes other than the
    destruction of hazardous or toxic waste.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, digest 12 for the use of molten
    media in chemical reactions.


CLS 588/202
TXT EXPLOSIVES, PROPELLANTS, OR PYROTECHNICS DESTROYED:
    Process under the class definition wherein the hazardous or toxic waste
    acted upon is an explosive,  propellant (e.g., for rocket or gun), or a
    pyrotechnic material (e.g., fireworks).

    (1)     Note.  Propellants that are compressed gases or vaporized liquids
    that are used to force materials from containers or that are used to aid in
    the formation of a foam are not included in this subclass.  The destruction
    or containment of these propellants is placed below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    86,     Ammunition and Explosive-Charge Making, subclass 50 for process of
    bomb disposal.

    110,    Furnaces, subclass 237 for incinerators intended for use with
    explosive material.

    149,    Explosive and Thermic Compositions or Charges, subclass 124 for an
    art collection of methods reclaiming or disposing of explosive or thermic
    charges or component materials thereof.


CLS 588/203
TXT Using added reactive materials (e.g., acids, bases, hydrogen,
    etc.):Processes under subclass 202 wherein the explosive propellant or
    pyrotechnic is destroyed or converted into an environmentally safe
    substance by reacting with an added material.

    (1)     Note.  The added material may be, for example, acids, bases, or
    hydrogen.


CLS 588/204
TXT ELECTRODIALYSIS OR ELECTROLYTIC DEGRADATION OR CONVERSION:
    Process under the class definition wherein electrodialysis or electrolytic
    degradation or conversion is used to destroy or convert hazardous or toxic
    waste into an environmentally safe substance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, appropriate subclasses for
    processes of electrodialysis or electrolysis.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses for
    processes in general for liquid purification or separation of liquid
    phases.  The line between Class 210 and Class 588 is that, if there is a
    specific statement in the claim that hazardous or toxic waste is destroyed,
    separated, or converted into an environmentally safe substance, the process
    is placed in Class 588; however, if purified liquid, e.g., water, is
    obtained as a desired product, place the process in Class 210.


CLS 588/205
TXT ORGANIC SUBSTANCE DESTROYED:
    Process under the class definition for destroying or converting hazardous
    or toxic waste which contains either two atoms of carbon bonded to each
    other, one atom of carbon bonded to an atom of hydrogen or halogen, or one
    atom of carbon bonded to at least one atom of nitrogen by a single or
    double bond into a substance or substances which is environmentally safe.

    (1)     Note.  Certain substances falling under the above definition are
    excluded from this and indented subclasses.  Their destruction and
    conversion are classified in the subclasses below, to wit; hydrocyanic
    acid, cyanogen, isocyanic acid, cyanamide, cyanogen halides, isothiocyanic
    acid, fulmenic acid, and metal carbides.

    (2)     Note.  The substance(s) that is destroyed maybe a mixture of
    hazardous or toxic waste with nonhazardous or nontoxic waste.  Either
    component of the mixture being destroyed is sufficient for classification
    in subclass 205.  Mandatory XR (cross-reference) into subclass(es) for the
    actual hazardous or toxic substance (component) destroyed in noted.

    (3)     Note.  If the hazardous or toxic material is destroyed and a
    purified compound or composition is recovered search the appropriate
    compound or composition class.


CLS 588/206
TXT Halogen attached directly to carbon by nonionic bonding:
    Process under subclass 205 wherein the organic substance destroyed or
    converted includes a compound which contains an atom of halogen attached
    directly to an atom of carbon by nonionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  The substances falling in this subclass are materials that
    are generally aliphatic and have the halogen directly attached to
    nonaromatic carbon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    568,    Organic Compounds, appropriate subclasses for the production of
    halogen containing organic compounds.

    570,    Organic Compounds, appropriate subclasses for the production of
    halogen containing organic compounds.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, for process employing halogen
    containing compounds in the manufacture of hydrocarbons.


CLS 588/207
TXT Halogen attached directly to benzene ring by nonionic bonding (e.g.,
    PCB's):Processes under subclass 206 wherein the halogenated organic
    substance destroyed or converted includes a compound which contains an atom
    of halogen attached directly to a benzene ring by nonionic bonding.


CLS 588/208
TXT Hydropyrolysis or destructive steam gasification:
    Process under subclass 207 wherein water or steam is used in a thermal
    process for converting the halogen containing compound into an
    environmentally safe substance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, subclasses 197+ for processes of
    gasification to produce a heating or illuminating gas.

    201,    Distillation:  Processes, Thermolytic, subclasses 32+ for the
    addition of disparate gaseous material to a carbonizing zone.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, subclasses 96+ for thermolytic type
    apparatus.

    203,    Distillation:  Processes, Separatory, subclasses 28+ for the
    processes with a chemical reaction and subclasses 95+ for the addition of
    water or steam.

    431,    Combustion, subclass 4 for feeding a flame modifying additive and
    subclass 5 for burning waste gas.


CLS 588/209
TXT Heating or vacuum used to drive off or produce a volatile substance:

    Process under subclass 207 wherein the aromatic halogenated substance is
    destroyed by heating or vacuum to drive off or produce a volatile
    environmentally safe substance from hazardous or toxic waste.


CLS 588/210
TXT Using ionizing radiation, electrical energy, magnetic force, radiation or
    sonic energy (e.g., laser, plasma, microwave, or ultrasonic):

    Process under subclass 207 wherein an aromatic halogenated substance is
    destroyed with ionizing radiation, electrical energy, magnetic force,
    radiation or sonic energy for destruction or conversion into an
    environmentally safe substance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204,    for the use of electrodialysis or electrolytic degradation.


CLS 588/211
TXT Using a gaseous heat carrier:

    Process under subclass 210 wherein a gaseous heat carrier is used in the
    hazardous or toxic waste treating process to either capture, recycle, or
    add external heat to the process.


CLS 588/212
TXT Using ionizing radiation; electrical energy, magnetic force, radiation, or
    sonic energy (e.g., laser, plasma, microwave, or ultrasonic):

    Process under subclass 206 wherein ionizing radiation electrical energy,
    magnetic force, radiation, or sonic energy is used for converting hazardous
    or toxic waste into an environmentally safe substance.


CLS 588/213
TXT Heating or vacuum used to drive off or produce a volatile substance (e.g.,
    hydropyrolysis or destructive steam gasification):Process under subclass
    206 wherein the halogenated substance is treated by heating or vacuum for
    destruction or conversion into an environmentally safe substance.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes hydropyrolysis and destructive stream
    gasification.


CLS 588/214
TXT Using a gaseous heat carrier:
    Process under subclass 213 wherein a gaseous heat carrier used in the
    hazardous toxic waste treating process to either capture, recycle or add
    heat to the process.


CLS 588/215
TXT Chalcogen containing (O, S, Se, or Te):
    Process under subclass 205 wherein a chalcogen (O, S, Se, or Te) substance
    containing hazardous or toxic waste is destroyed or converted into an
    environmentally safe substance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    239,    for the destruction of inorganic substances containing chalcogen
    (O, S, Se, or Te) in hazardous or toxic waste.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    208,    Mineral Oils:  Processes and Products, subclasses 208+ for sulfur
    removal from mineral oils.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses for the
    production of the desired inorganic substance or product, subclasses 508+
    for substances or products containing selenium or tellurium, subclasses
    511+ for substances or products containing sulfur, and subclasses 579+ for
    substances or products containing oxygen.

    532,    Organic Compounds, appropriate subclasses for the chalcogen (O, S,
    Se, or Te) containing compounds.

    585,    Chemistry of Hydrocarbon Compounds, for processes employing
    chalcogen (O, S, Se, or Te) containing compounds in the manufacture of
    hydrocarbons containing the chalcogen.  Subclasses 240+ for the production
    of a hydrocarbon mixture from refuse or vegetation.


CLS 588/216
TXT Heating or vacuum used to drive off or produce a volatile substance:Process
    under subclass 215 wherein heating or vacuum is used to drive off or
    produce a volatile environmentally safe substance.


CLS 588/217
TXT Using a gaseous heat carrier:
    Process under subclass 216 wherein a gaseous heat carrier is used in the
    hazardous or toxic waste treating process to either capture, recycle, or
    add external heat to the process.


CLS 588/218
TXT Reacting with chemical agents:
    Process under subclass 215 employing an additional chemical material to
    react with hazardous or toxic waste.


CLS 588/219
TXT Using ionizing radiation, electric energy, magnetic force, radiation or
    sonic energy (e.g., laser, plasma, microwave, or ultrasonic):Process under
    subclass 218 wherein ionizing radiation, electric energy, magnetic force,
    radiation, or sonic energy is employed to aid in the reaction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204,    for the use of electrodialysis or electrolytic degradation.


CLS 588/220
TXT Heating or vacuum used to drive off or produce a volatile substance from
    waste containing N, P, As, Sb, or Bi:Process under subclass 205 wherein the
    organic hazardous or toxic waste contains N, P, As, Sb, or Bi and is
    destroyed by the use of heat or vacuum to drive off or produce a volatile
    environmentally safe substance from the hazardous or toxic waste.


CLS 588/221
TXT Reacting waste containing N, P, As, Sb, or Bi with chemical agents:Process
    under subclass 205 wherein the organic hazardous or toxic waste contains N,
    P, As, Sb, or Bi and is destroyed by the addition of a chemical material to
    react with the hazardous or toxic waste.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses for
    separation of liquids from any contaminant; subclass 749 for the use of
    chemical treatment; and subclasses 911+, an art collection, for the removal
    of cumulative poison from a liquid.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 87+ for the production
    of Sb, Bi, or As or compounds thereof; subclasses 299+ for the production
    of phosphorus and its compounds; and subclasses 351+ for the production of
    nitrogen and its compounds.


CLS 588/222
TXT Using ionizing radiation, electrical energy, magnetic force, radiation, or
    sonic energy (e.g., laser, plasma, microwave, or ultrasonic):Process under
    subclass 221 wherein the hazardous or toxic waste is also treated by the
    use of ionizing radiation, electrical energy, magnetic force, radiation, or
    sonic energy for converting waste into an environmentally safe substance.


CLS 588/223
TXT Metal containing:
    Process under subclass 205 wherein the organic hazardous or toxic waste
    contains a metal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231,    for the destruction of an inorganic heavy metal containing
    hazardous or toxic waste.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 1-209 for treating to
    obtain a desired metal containing compound.

     532,   Organic Compounds, appropriate classes for the production of a
    desired metal containing organic compound.


CLS 588/224
TXT Reacting with chemical agent:
    Process under subclass 223 employing an additional chemical material to
    react with the hazardous or toxic waste.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses for the
    separation of liquid from any contaminant; subclasses 749+ for the use of
    chemical treatment; and subclasses 911+, an art collection, for the removal
    of cumulative poison from a liquid.


CLS 588/225
TXT Using ionizing radiation, electrical energy, magnetic force, radiation, or
    sonic energy (e.g., laser, plasma, microwave, or ultrasonic):Process under
    subclass 224 wherein ionizing radiation, electrical energy, magnetic force,
    radiation, or sonic energy is used for converting hazardous or toxic waste
    into an environmentally safe substance.


CLS 588/226
TXT Hydropyrolysis or destructive steam gasification:
    Processes under subclass 205 wherein water or steam is used in a thermal
    process for destroying or converting hazardous or toxic waste into an
    environmentally safe substance.


CLS 588/227
TXT Using ionizing radiation, electrical energy, magnetic force, radiation or
    sonic energy (e.g., laser, plasma microwave, or ultrasonic):Processes under
    subclass 205 wherein the substance destroyed is also treated with ionizing
    radiation, electrical energy, magnetic force, radiation, or sonic energy
    for destruction or conversion into an environmentally safe substance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204,    for the use of electrodialysis or electrolytic degradation.


CLS 588/228
TXT Heating or vacuum used to drive off or produce a volatile
    substance:Processes under subclass 205 wherein the hazardous or toxic waste
    is destroyed by heating or vacuum to drive off or produce a volatile
    environmentally safe substance.


CLS 588/229
TXT Using a solid heat carrier:
    Processes under subclass 228 wherein a solid heat carrier is heated by the
    hazardous or toxic waste destroying process and the heat is recycled or
    heated solids are added to the hazardous or toxic waste destroying process
    to add heat to the process.


CLS 588/230
TXT Using a gaseous heat carrier:
    Process under subclass 228 wherein a gaseous heat carrier is used in the
    hazardous or toxic waste treating process to either capture, recycle, or
    add external heat to the process.


CLS 588/231
TXT HEAVY METAL CONTAINING SUBSTANCE DESTROYED:
    Process under the class definition wherein the hazardous or toxic waste
    destroyed or converted into an environmentally safe substance contains a
    heavy metal.

    (1)     Note.  The substance(s) that is destroyed maybe a mixture of
    hazardous or toxic waste with nonhazardous or nontoxic waste.  Either
    component of the mixture being destroyed is sufficient for classification
    in subclass 231.  Mandatory XR (cross-reference) into subclass(es) for the
    actual hazardous or toxic substance (component) destroyed is noted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 414-709 for the production of free metal using a
    process which takes place at above 300o C and  subclasses 710-745 for the
    production of free metal employing temperatures below 300o C.

     423,   Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 1-154 for treating a
    mixture to obtain a desired metal containing compound.


CLS 588/232
TXT Magnetic separation:
    Process under subclass 231 which includes a step for magnetic separation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclasses 12+ for
    combined operations including the use of magnetic operations; subclasses
    509+ for sorting special items, and certain methods and apparatus some of
    which use magnetic properties and note subclasses 212 through 232 for
    magnetic separation, per se (Class 588 provides for the magnetic separation
    of any hazardous or toxic waste  in combination with the destruction of the
    waste).


CLS 588/233
TXT Hydropyrolysis or destructive steam gasification:
    Process under subclass 231 wherein water or steam is used in a thermal
    process for destroying hazardous or toxic waste or converting hazardous or
    toxic waste into an environmentally safe substance.


CLS 588/234
TXT Heating or vacuum used to drive off or produce a volatile substance:Process
    under subclass 231 wherein the hazardous or toxic waste is destroyed by
    heating or vacuum to drive off or produce a volatile environmentally safe
    substance.


CLS 588/235
TXT Using a gaseous heat carrier:
    Process under subclass 234 wherein a gaseous heat carrier is used in the
    hazardous or toxic waste treating process to either capture, recycle, or
    add external heat to the process.


CLS 588/236
TXT Reacting with chemical agent:
    Process under subclass 231 wherein an additional chemical material is
    employed to react with the hazardous or toxic waste.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 749+ for a chemical
    treatment process.


CLS 588/237
TXT Using ionizing radiation electrical energy, magnetic force, radiation, or
    sonic energy (e.g., laser, plasma, microwave, or ultrasonic):Process under
    subclass 236 wherein ionizing radiation electrical energy, magnetic force,
    radiation, or sonic energy is used for converting hazardous or toxic waste
    into an environmentally safe substance.


CLS 588/238
TXT CHALCOGEN CONTAINING SUBSTANCE DESTROYED (O, S, Se, or Te):
    Process under the class definition wherein the hazardous or toxic waste
    destroyed or converted into an environmentally safe substance contains a
    chalcogen (O, S, Se, or Te).

    (1)     Note.  The substance(s) that is destroyed maybe a mixture of
    hazardous or toxic waste with nonhazardous or nontoxic waste.  Either
    component of the mixture being destroyed is sufficient for classification
    in subclass 238.  Mandatory XR (cross-reference) into subclass(es) for the
    actual hazardous or toxic substance (component) destroyed is noted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    215,    for the treatment of organic substances containing chalcogen (O, S,
    Se, or Te) in the hazardous or toxic waste destroyed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses for
    processes in general for liquid purification or separation of liquid
    phases.  The line between Class 210 and Class 588 is that, if there is a
    specific statement in the claim that hazardous or toxic waste is destroyed,
    separated, or converted into an environmentally safe substance, the process
    is placed in Class 588; however, if purified liquid, e.g., water, is
    obtained as a desired product, place the process in Class 210.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, appropriate subclasses for the
    production of the desired inorganic substance or product, subclasses 508+
    for substance or products containing selenium or tellurium, subclasses 511+
    for substances or products containing sulfur, and subclasses 579+ for
    substances or products containing oxygen.


CLS 588/239
TXT Hydropyrolysis or destructive steam gasification:
    Process under subclass 238 wherein water or steam is used in a thermal
    process for converting waste into an environmentally safe substance.


CLS 588/240
TXT Heating or vacuum used to drive off or produce a volatile substance:Process
    under subclass 238 wherein the chalcogen (O, S, Se, or Te) containing
    substance is treated by heating or vacuum for destruction or conversion
    into an environmentally safe substance.


CLS 588/241
TXT Using a gaseous heat carrier:
    Process under subclass 240 wherein a gaseous heat carrier is used, in the
    hazardous or toxic waste treating process, to either capture, recycle, or
    add external heat to the process.


CLS 588/242
TXT Reacting with chemical agent:
    Process under subclass 238 wherein an additional chemical material is
    employed to react with the hazardous or toxic waste.


CLS 588/243
TXT Using ionizing radiation, electrical energy, magnetic force, radiation or
    sonic energy (e.g., laser, plasma, microwave, or ultrasonic):Process under
    subclass 242 wherein ionizing radiation, electrical energy, magnetic force,
    radiation, or sonic energy is used for converting hazardous or toxic waste
    into an environmentally safe substance.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    204,    for the use of electrodialysis or electrolytic degradation.


CLS 588/244
TXT N or P Containing Substance Destroyed:
    Process under class definition wherein hazardous or toxic waste substances
    containing nitrogen or phosphorus are destroyed or converted into an
    environmentally safe substance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses for
    processes in general for liquid purification or separation of liquid
    phases.  The line between Class 210 and Class 588 is that, if there is a
    specific statement in the claim that hazardous or toxic waste is destroyed,
    separated, or converted into an environmentally safe substance, the process
    is placed in Class 588; however, if purified liquid, e.g., water, is
    obtained as a desired product, place the process in Class 210.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 299+ for the
    production of phosphorus or phosphorus compounds and subclasses 351+ for
    the production of nitrogen or nitrogen compounds.


CLS 588/245
TXT Heating or vacuum used to drive off or produce a volatile substance:Process
    under subclass 244 wherein hazardous or toxic substances containing N or P
    are destroyed or converted into an environmentally safe substance.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes hydropyrolysis and destructive steam
    gasification.


CLS 588/246
TXT Reacting with chemical agents:
    Process under subclass 244 employing an additional chemical material to
    react with the hazardous or toxic waste.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 351+ for the
    production of nitrogen or compound thereof and subclasses 299+ for the
    production of phosphorus or compound thereof.


CLS 588/247
TXT Using ionizing radiation electrical energy, magnetic force, radiation, or
    sonic energy, e.g., laser, plasma, microwave, and ultrasonic:Process under
    subclass 246 wherein ionizing radiation electrical energy, magnetic force,
    radiation, or sonic energy is used for converting hazardous or toxic waste
    into an environmentally safe substance.


CLS 588/248
TXT HALIDE CONTAINING SUBSTANCE DESTROYED:
    Process under class definition wherein hazardous or toxic waste which
    contains a halide is destroyed or converted into an environmentally safe
    substance.

    (1)     Note.  The substance(s) that is destroyed maybe a mixture of
    hazardous or toxic waste with nonhazardous or nontoxic waste.  Either
    component of the mixture being destroyed is sufficient for classification
    in subclass 231.  Mandatory XR (cross-reference) into subclass(es) for the
    actual hazardous or toxic substance (component) destroyed is noted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, appropriate subclasses for
    processes in general for liquid purification or separation of liquid
    phases.  The line between Class 210 and Class 588 is that, if there is a
    specific statement in the claim that hazardous or toxic waste is destroyed,
    separated, or converted into an environmentally safe substance, the process
    is placed in Class 588; however, if purified liquid, e.g., water, is
    obtained as a desired product, place the process in Class 210.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 462+ for the
    production of halogen or compounds containing halogen.


CLS 588/249
TXT CONTAINMENT:
    Processes under the class definition wherein the  hazardous or toxic waste
    is confined in a permanent facility by means such that the waste is not
    permitted to move or migrate from the permanent facility.  Additionally,
    the hazardous or toxic waste can be contained in a monolithic type
    structure.

    (1)     Note.  The containment also includes the processes of producing
    monoliths which when stored in (moved to) a facility are themselves
    nonleaching and in no way enter or contaminate the facility environment or
    the outside environment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, appropriate subclasses for methods or apparatus
    used in package making to contain hazardous or toxic waste.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 528+ for ampule, capsule,
    pellet, or granule containing hazardous or toxic waste.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 415+ for multilayer barrier structure
    intended to contain hazardous or toxic waste.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles,  subclass 2 for compacted
    trash or refuse bundle which may include hazardous or toxic waste and
    subclasses 443+ for asbestos containing articles.


CLS 588/250
TXT Geologic marine or extraterrestrial storage and containment (e.g., tetonic,
    volcanic, deep natural, manmade earth cavity, submarine placement sites,
    lunar, earth orbital, and solar placement):Process under subclass 249
    wherein the storage or containment of the hazardous or toxic waste is
    accomplished by the following methods, e.g., descending tetonic plates,
    active volcanoes, caves, salt caverns, bore holes, abandoned mines,
    submarine dumping, earth orbital storage, lunar  storage, and the use of
    decaying solar orbits to require the waste to fall into the sun.


CLS 588/251
TXT Treating a solid (e.g., clay, slag, spent sorbent, active carbon, etc.) to
    prevent gas emissions:Processes under subclass 249 wherein solids are
    treated to prevent the emissions of hazardous or toxic gas.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is the treatment of slag heaps to prevent
    the emissions of hazardous or toxic gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, subclasses 19+ for the utilization of slag.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 624+, 714+, and 789+
    for utilization of slag in plastic compositions.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, subclasses 28 and 36 for ceramic
    compositions using slag.


CLS 588/252
TXT Solidification, vitrification, or cementation:
    Processes under subclass 249 wherein containment is accomplished by the use
    of solidification, vitrification, or cementation as a means of immobilizing
    hazardous or toxic waste.

    (1)     Note.  Solidification included herein is any process that will
    produce a solid phase nonleachable product.

    (2)     Note.  Vitrification included herein is any process that will
    produce a solid phase nonleachable glass like noncrystalline product.

    (3)     Note.  Cementation included herein is any process that will produce
    a solid phase nonleachable hydraulic setting product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    65,     Glass Manufacturing, appropriate subclasses for the methods of
    producing glass.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 600+ for alkali metal
    silicate containing compositions and subclasses 638+ for inorganic settable
    ingredient   containing compositions.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 749+ for a chemical
    treatment process.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, subclasses 2+ for devitrified glass -
    ceramics, subclasses 11+ for glass compositions, and subclass 124 for
    refractory hydraulic cement containing compositions.


CLS 588/253
TXT In situ vitrification:
    Processes under subclass 252 whereby the melting or sintering to form a
    glass or glass like substance is done underground.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein is any process that produces the necessary
    conditions for the melting or sintering of a substance to form a glassy
    mass under the surface of the earth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 258+ for earth
    treatment or control.


CLS 588/254
TXT Contains asbestos:
    Processes under subclass 252 wherein asbestos is present in the hazardous
    or toxic material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 600+ for compositions
    containing asbestos.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 153+ for making a
    paper like product containing asbestos.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclass 167 for treating
    asbestos.


CLS 588/255
TXT Polymer or resin containing (e.g., foam, etc.):
    Processes under subclass 252 wherein a polymer or resin is used in the
    solidification, vitrification, or cementation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:  Processes,
    subclasses 4+ for encapsulating normally liquid materials.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 212+ for particles, flakes, or
    granules coated or encapsulated.


CLS 588/256
TXT Waste contains heavy metals (e.g., fly ash, flue dust, and incinerator
    ash):Processes under subclass 252 wherein hazardous or toxic waste contains
    heavy metals.

    (1)     Note.  It is assumed that fly ash, flue dust, and incinerator ash
    obtained from various sources will contain at least traces of some heavy
    metal in the absence of disclosure to the contrary.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 286.1+ for inorganic
    materials only containing at least one metal atom and subclass 287.18 for
    coating or plastic compositions containing heavy metals.

    501,    Compositions:  Ceramic, subclass 155 for ceramic compositions
    composed of waste material.


CLS 588/257
TXT And confined in a cement type material (e.g., cencrete):
    Processes under subclass 256 wherein waste is used in the production or
    formulation of a cement type product.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, subclasses 600+ for alkali metal
    silicate containing subclasses 638+ for inorganic settable ingredient
    containing, and subclasses 286.1+ for compositions, coating or plastic
    which contain only inorganic materials with at least one metal atom.  Class
    588 contains any formulation of the above materials with hazardous or toxic
    waste.

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 266+ for cementitious
    grouting.


CLS 588/258
TXT Storage to contain pathogenic organisms (e.g., virus, bacteria, and medical
    waste):Processes under subclass 249 wherein the hazardous or toxic waste
    contains pathogenic organisms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 749+ for a chemical
    treatment process.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing,  subclasses 1+ for disinfecting or sterilizing.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 235.1+
    for virus, bacteriophage, composition thereof, preparation or purification
    thereof producing viral units.


CLS 588/259
TXT Secondary containment:
    Processes under subclass 249 wherein more than one form of containment is
    used (i.e., one form of containment around another form of containment).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    405,    Hydraulic and Earth Engineering, subclasses 128+ for waste
    containment in soil and subclasses 266+ for cementing.


CLS 588/260
TXT With sensing, detecting, or monitoring:
    Processes under subclass 249 wherein the integrity of the containment is
    observed by chemical, physical, electrical, or optical methods to sense,
    detect, or monitor movement of waste.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 40+ and 52 for leakage testing
    and subclasses 290+ for barrel liquid level indicator.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.06+ for monitoring.


CLS 588/261
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:
    Process under the class definition not provided for above.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 588/900
TXT APPARATUS:
    Apparatus used in the destruction, containment, or conversion of hazardous
    or toxic waste.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 556+ for the apparatus used in a process
    for a contraction of a cover by stretching or shrinking and subclasses 580+
    for the apparatus for forming or partially forming receptacle and
    subsequently filling.

    100,    Presses, appropriate subclasses for presses used in contacting
    hazardous and toxic waste.

    110,    Furnaces, subclasses 235+ for incinerators for refuse.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 452 for the process of general
    heating using solar heat.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 73+ for apparatus used
    in boring or penetrating the earth.

    202,    Distillation:  Apparatus, for the apparatus used in the processes
    of distillation.

    220,    Receptacles, subclasses 415+ for multilayer barrier structure.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 129+ for chemical apparatus, per se,
    and subclasses 243+ for physical type apparatus.

    425,    Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping  or Treating:  Apparatus,
    subclass 5 for means of encapsulating normally liquid material, subclasses
    6+ for means of making particulate material directly from liquid or molten
    material, and subclasses 130+ for means of feeding fluent stock from plural
    sources to common shaping means to form composite product and the rest of
    the class for shaping of articles.


CLS 588/901
TXT COMPOSITIONS:
    Compositions used in the destruction or containment of hazardous or toxic
    waste.


CLS 600/
TTL SURGERY

CLS 600/1
TXT RADIOACTIVE SUBSTANCE APPLIED TO BODY FOR THERAPY:

    Subject matter under the class definition for the application of radiation
    emitted by radioactivity, including alpha particles, gamma rays, nucleus
    and electrons, from a radioactive substance to or within the body for
    therapeutic purposes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 493.1 for radioactive source generally.

    252,    Compositions, subclasses 625+ for radioactive compositions in
    general.

    423,    Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, subclasses 2+ and 249+ for
    processes of preparing radioactive compounds by a chemical reaction.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, particularly
    subclasses 1.11+ for radionuclide containing subject matter, for:
    compositions (A) for preventing, alleviating, treating, or curing abnormal
    and pathological conditions of the living body, for maintaining,
    increasing, decreasing, limiting, or destroying a physiologic body
    function, for diagnosing a physiological condition or state by an in vivo
    test, for controlling or protecting an environment or living body by
    attracting, disabling, inhibiting, killing, modifying, repelling, or
    retarding an animal or micro-organism, (B) for deodorizing, protecting,
    adorning, or grooming a body, (C) for fermentates and extracts for use in A
    or B and not elsewhere provided for, and (D) such compositions defined in
    terms of specific structure; methods of making the above compositions;
    nominal methods of using the class defined compositions for purposes in A
    and B; and methods of using compounds, per se, for purposes in A and B.
    Class 600 provides for manipulative methods of using the Class 424 defined
    compositions for purposes in A and B.  See the Class Definitions in Class
    424 for the line between Class 128 (and its subsidiary classes) and Class
    424.


CLS 600/2
TXT Combined with other radiant or wave energy source (e.g., electromagnetic,
    thermal, microwave etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the radioactive substance is
    associated with another radiant energy source such as electromagnetic,
    thermal, microwave or other wave energy source to  provide dual or
    synergistic treatment to or within the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9+,     for magnetic fluid applied to body.


CLS 600/3
TXT Radioactive substance placed within body (e.g., inhaled, implanted,
    injected, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the radioactive substance is
    introduced directly within the body or in a natural body orifice.

    (1)     Note.  The radioactive substance can be introduced into the body by
    various techniques and devices.  These can include inhaling the radioactive
    substance in a gaseous form, surgically implanting the radioactive
    substance at a specific location, injecting the substance either in solid
    or fluid form through a needle, or by inserting the substance into a
    natural body orifice.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 203.12+ for breathing devices for breathing
    gases carrying medicinal substances.


CLS 600/4
TXT By fluid injection of radioactive or enhancing agent through body piercing
    conduit:

    Subject matter under subclass 3 wherein a fluid radioactive or enhancing
    agent is introduced into the body either intravascularly or intramuscularly
    through an injector having a body piercing hollow needle or conduit
    attached thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 51-53 and 93+ for medicinal procedures and
    infectors in general.


CLS 600/5
TXT Fluid reservoir shielding (e.g., syringe):

    Subject matter under subclass 4 wherein the injector is provided with a
    protective sheathing to safeguard against leakage or degradation of the
    radioactive contents thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 187+ for manual injector structure in general.


CLS 600/6
TXT Utero-vaginal or pelvic application:

    Subject matter under subclass 3 wherein the radioactive substance is placed
    within the pelvic cavity, particularly within the Utero-Vaginal tract
    contained therein, for treatment thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    604,    Surgery, subclass 55 for methods of introducing other therapeutic
    materials into the female reproductory tract.


CLS 600/7
TXT Injectors/holders for seeds or implants (e.g., capsules):

    Subject matter under subclass 3 wherein a solid or a capsuled mass of
    radioactive material is inserted into the body, usually into a natural body
    orifice or subcutaneously by piercing the skin, by means of a utensil
    adapted to receive the solid or a hollow tubular conduit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 57+ and 93 for devices for inserting or
    injecting solid medicinal materials into the body.


CLS 600/8
TXT Seeds:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 wherein the solid radioactive material
    inserted is in the form of a small capsule or a hollow radium containing
    device shaped like a needle.

    (1)     Note.  Radioactive material in the form of small capsules or having
    a needle like shape are usually referred to as radium seeds in the art.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 57+ and 93 for solid implants and capsules
    other than radioactive containing.


CLS 600/9
TXT MAGNETIC FIELD APPLIED TO BODY FOR THERAPY:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein an force field generated
    by a magnet is applied to the body for therapeutic purposes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 600+ for inductive heating, subclasses
    678+ for microwave heating, and subclasses 764+ for capacitive dielectric
    heating.

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 209+ for magnet and electromagnet structure.


CLS 600/10
TXT Radio frequency wave induced magnetic field for subcutaneous hyperthermia:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein electromagnetic waves having a
    determined radio wave frequency are utilized to generate the magnetic force
    field within body tissue which force field elevates the body temperature in
    the area being subjected to the magnetic field.

    (1)     Note.  The degree of hyperthermia is controlled such that normal
    tissue is not affected by the rise in temperature but abnormal tissue such
    as tumors or malignancies are caused to necrose or deteriorate.


CLS 600/11
TXT Probes:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein the magnetic force field device is
    an elongated element specifically structured for removing embedded
    particles of magnetically attracted material from the body, usually from
    the eye.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    606,    Surgery, subclass 100, for devices adapted to remove objects from
    the pharynx or esophagus.


CLS 600/12
TXT Magnetic element placed within body (e.g., injected, inserted, implanted,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein the magnet for therapeutic
    treatment is placed within the body either (a) by insertion into a natural
    body orifice, (b) by injection into the body by a hollow piercing conduit,
    or (c) by surgical implantation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    606,    Surgery, subclass 106 for devices adapted to remove objects from
    the throat or connected passageways.


CLS 600/13
TXT Electromagnetic coil:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein a device consisting of an iron or
    steel core is surrounded by a wound wire spiral of an indefinite number of
    turns through which electricity passes to generate the magnetic field in
    said iron or steel core.


CLS 600/14
TXT Pulsating field:

    Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein the electric current generating
    the magnetic field is given a transient amplification or intensification
    followed by a return to a state of equilibrium upon the electric current is
    again given a transient amplification.


CLS 600/15
TXT Externally supported or worn (e.g., garment, belt, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein the magnetic force field is applied
    to the body by a means attached to the outer surface of the body.

    (1)     Note.  These implements are usually belt-like or garment-like in
    form.


CLS 600/16
TXT CARDIAC AUGMENTATION (PULSATORS, ETC.):

    Subject matter under the class definition, having permanent or temporary
    mechanical means attached to the body for assisting the action of an ailing
    or weakened heart which cannot perform adequately to circulate blood
    through the body's vascular systems.

    (1)     Note.  These devices do not replace the heart, per se, rather they
    only augment the heart's pumping action.  The assistance can be continuous
    or intermittent and can be synchronized with the regular heartbeat.


CLS 600/17
TXT With condition responsive means:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 wherein the means for varying the rate or
    amount of assist to the heart has a detector means which senses a change in
    some variable in a person and in response to said change controls the rate
    or amount of assisting action to the heart.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 50 and 65-67 which are conditional responsive
    to vary treatment flow into and out of the body.


CLS 600/18
TXT Aortic balloon pumping:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 wherein the augmentation means is a
    tubular means having a bore or lumen extending therethrough, which bore or
    lumen contains an inflatable means, said tubular means being inserted
    intra-arterially to a position near the heart and thereafter inflated and
    deflated rhymically to augment the heart's pumping action.


CLS 600/19
TXT ANTIGRAVITATIONAL SYSTEMS:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means adapted to
    protect air craft occupants (e.g., pilots, astronauts etc.) from excessive
    accelerational and centrifugal forces generated by force of gravity during
    flight maneuvers which could cause loss of consciousness, e.g., "blackout",
    due to sudden change in the blood supply to the occupants' brain.


CLS 600/20
TXT Body suits:

    Subject matter under subclass 19 wherein the means adapted to protect the
    occupants includes a pressurized garment which substantially encloses all
    or a portion or the body of the occupant.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclass 202.12 for chambers having a supply of
    pressurized oxygen.


CLS 600/21
TXT INSOLATION TREATMENT CHAMBERS:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein an enclosure means to
    contain a human or animal body, or a portion thereof, for the purpose of
    (a) quarantining a patient, (b) maintaining sterile conditions around a
    patient during operative surgery or (c) preventing spread of contamination
    into or out of the enclosure container.

    (1)     Note. these structures can take the form of large static room-like
    building structures or small flexible walled tent-like enclosures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclass 202.12 for hypobaric chambers.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclass 1 for glove-box chambers.


CLS 600/22
TXT Incubators:

    Subject matter under subclass 21 wherein the enclosures is specifically
    designed to maintain a premature infant in an environment of controlled
    temperature, oxygen and humidity.


CLS 600/23
TXT SPEECH CORRECTION/THERAPY (E.G., ANTISTAMMERING):

    Subject matter under the class definition having devices and systems for
    treating verbal communication deficiencies such as stuttering, nasal
    emission and other impediments to one's speech.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also includes methods for monitoring and
    techniques for treating the speech defects.


CLS 600/24
TXT Oral cavity devices:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein the device is designed to fit
    within the mouth of a user for preventing speech defects, such as
    stammering.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 848 and 859+ for devices placed in the mouth
    for preventing snoring and for protecting the mouth.


CLS 600/25
TXT SURGICALLY IMPLANTED VIBRATORY HEARING AID:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein a small ambient sound
    reproducing system having a vibratory output is placed inside the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 585 for ear or hearing testing, and
    subclasses 645+ for measuring acoustic parameters.

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 126+ for mechanical hearing aids.

    330,    Amplifiers, appropriate subclasses, particularly subclasses 65+ for
    amplifiers involving structural details or elements, and transistor
    amplifiers.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclasses
    23.1 and 68+ for hearing aids in general, and subclass 60 for testing
    hearing aids.

    623,    Prosthesis, (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, subclass 24 for an artificial ear having an
    electrical hearing aid as a subcombination.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses
    46+ for surgically implanted hearing aids which apply electrical energy to
    the body.


CLS 600/26
TXT SLEEP OR RELAXATION INDUCING (E.G., DIRECT NERVE STIMULATION, HYPNOSIS,
    ANALGESIA):

    Subject matter under the class definition including devices, systems and
    techniques for influencing or causing a natural state of rest (e.g.,
    sleep), characterized by relative physical and nervous inactivity,
    unconsciousness, and lessened response to physical stimuli upon a subject
    body or to put the body at ease or in a state of tranquility.

    (1)     Note.  Included also herein are sensory devices for producing
    hypnosis or a feeling of well being; e.g., tranquility, in a patient.
    These devices can be applied directly to the nervous system as by
    electrical stimulation, or can be designed to stimulate the body's own
    sensory system of visual, audio, taste, smell and tactile senses to
    accomplish a conscious relaxing or hypnotic effect in a patient.  The sense
    of well being or reduced awareness produced by the devices and techniques
    herein can be utilized as an analgesic during a surgical procedure.

    (2)     Note.  Drug induced sleep or relaxation therapy is not included in
    this subclass or its indented subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses 2+
    and 55+ for direct electrical application to the body for treatment of pain.


CLS 600/27
TXT Sensory (e.g., visual, audio, tactile, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 26 wherein the state of tranquility is
    produced upon the body by devices and techniques applied to or stimulating
    the body's senses of hearing, sight, smell, taste or touch.

    (1)     Note.  These systems can include blinking or colored lights,
    rotating spirals, background noise, and percussive touch devices.


CLS 600/28
TXT Audio (e.g., heartbeat, "white noise", etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 27 wherein the sensory stimulation produces
    effects only on the sense of hearing.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass can include heartbeat sounds to provide
    security and well being for infants or so called "white noise" used for
    analgesic purposes as in dental drilling.


CLS 600/29
TXT BODY INSERTED URINARY OR COLONIC INCONTINENT DEVICE OR TREATMENT (E.G.,
    ARTIFICIAL SPHINCTERS, ETC.):

    Subject matter under class definition including devices entirely inserted
    or surgically implanted within the body for controlling the lack of urinary
    or bowel restraint.

    (1)     Note.  Methods of placing these devices within the body are
    included herein.  These devices are commonly referred to as "artificial
    sphincters", which are installed within the body to aid or replace the
    body's natural sphincter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 885+, for incontinent restrainers that are
    external of the body.


CLS 600/30
TXT Implanted:

    Subject matter under subclass 29 wherein the incontinent device is
    surgically placed within the body to aid or replace a natural ringlike
    muscle, e.g., sphincter, normally maintains constriction of a body passage
    or orifice.


CLS 600/31
TXT With fluid actuated occluding means (e.g., inflatable cuff):

    Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein the implanted device is provided
    with a means which is inflated by air or a liquid for closing off or
    occluding a body waste duct.

    (1)     Note.  This generally consists of an inflatable cuff which
    surrounds or presses against the body duct when inflated to occlude the
    duct thereby preventing undesirable leakage or drip therefrom.  The system
    for inflating and deflating the cuff also included.


CLS 600/32
TXT Stoma closures (e.g., colostomy plugs):

    Subject matter under subclass 29 wherein the body inserted device is a
    closure member usually a sealing plug or expandable member that is sized to
    fit within a natural or surgically constructed body waste orifice to
    prevent leakage of body waste therefrom or infection therein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclass 887, for nonabsorbent body opening occludes for
    different purposes.

    604,    Surgery, subclass 337, for means for covering stoma or body
    openings of colostomy apparatus.


CLS 600/33
TXT REPRODUCTION AND FERTILIZATION TECHNIQUES:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein means are employed to aid
    in the impregnating, conceiving and biological propagation of humans and
    animals.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter herein is concerned with both increasing
    the fecundity of human and animals with normal reproductory capability as
    well as aiding conception and full term pregnancies in those individuals
    whose reproductive organs are incapable of conceiving or reproducing.  This
    subclass also includes devices and techniques that perform an auxiliary
    function or intermediate step in the overall process of reproduction and
    fertilization.


CLS 600/34
TXT Embryo transplantation:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 wherein a fertilized egg or oocyte from
    one female's reproductory tract is transferred to a different female's
    uterus for the purpose of fertilization or embryonation thereof.

    (1)     Note.  This includes apparatus and methods for accomplishing the
    transfer.


CLS 600/35
TXT Artificial insemination:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 wherein fertilization is accomplished
    either (1) in vivo by injecting donor semen by mechanical means into a
    recipient female's reproductory tract or, (2) in vitro by mixing donor
    semen and a recipient ova in a small container outside the body and
    subsequently inserting the fertilized ova into a recipient female's
    reproductory tract.


CLS 600/36
TXT BLOOD VESSEL OR GRAFT PREPARATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein vascular replacements;
    e.g., grafts, composed of either natural animal tissue or synthetic
    materials are made.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also includes the devices and methods used in
    preparing the graft or blood vessel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, appropriate subclasses for artificial blood
    vessels.


CLS 600/37
TXT INTERNAL ORGAN SUPPORT OR SLING:

    Subject matter under the class definition including means to isolate,
    suspend, hold, position or restrain an internal body organ during operative
    surgery or to correct a physical defect therein.


CLS 600/38
TXT SEXUAL APPLIANCE:

    Subject matter under the class definition which comprises means to
    substitute for or enhance the act of human copulation.

    (1)     Note. The term copulation, as used in this subclass and those
    subordinate hereto, is considered to be inclusive of any permutation of
    gender among participants.

    (2)     Note. The terminology copulation enhancement is considered to be
    inclusive of any device, appliance, or parapher-nalia which provides a
    sexual aid or a substitute genitalia means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, for waterproof or inflatable garments.

    70,     Locks, for handcuffs and similar restraint devices.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, appropriate subclasses for sexual means for
    enhancing reproduction in animals.

    231,    Whips and Whip Apparatus, for whips, lashes, and electric prods.

    482,    Exercise Devices, subclasses 140, 141, and 148 for means to
    exercise various muscles of the body.

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, for devices which actually replace a body part.


CLS 600/39
TXT Male splint:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 comprising a brace means which will
    position the male member of a user so as to resemble the size or usefulness
    of a natural erection.

    (1)     Note. This subclass contains various externally applied splints
    which permit a sexually impotent user to engage in sex.


CLS 600/40
TXT Implanted:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 comprising brace means surgically placed
    within the user's male member to enhance the size or usefulness of an
    impotent member so as to resemble a natural erection.

    (1)     Note. This subclass contains various internally applied splints
    which permit a sexually impotent user to engage in sex.

    (2)     Note.  An actuation means, either alone or in combination with an
    implantable splint, which is specially adapted for influencing the
    configuration or shape of an implanted implantable splint is proper for
    classification in this subclass.


CLS 600/41
TXT Retention means:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 comprising a pressure applicator means
    placed in partial or complete encirclement at the base of a user's male
    member and sized or adjusted in such fashion that venous blood flow from
    the member is restricted while still permitting arterial blood flow to
    contribute to turgidity in the member.

    (1)     Note. This subclass contains devices which enable a user to
    maintain an erection for a greater period of time or to achieve a turgid
    state when otherwise unable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for a retention device in combination with a male member support.


CLS 600/101
TXT ENDOSCOPE:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a generally tube-like
    structure having a proximal operating end and a distal inserting end, means
    to transmit a view or image from the distal end to the proximal end, and a
    light source to transmit light from the proximal end to the distal end,
    wherein the distal end is inserted into a natural or surgically constructed
    body orifice for viewing or treating functional disorders of the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 544+ for measuring gauges for
    measuring a cavity or tube.

    43,     Fishing, Trapping, and Vermin Destroying, subclass 53.5 for fish
    gags

    348,    Television, subclass 45 for endoscopes having stereoscopic picture
    transmission devices used for medical inspection of the animal body and
    subclass 68 for optical systems which direct and control the intensity of a
    light source projected on an animal body.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 241 for similar endoscopic
    devices used to inspect bores on restricted openings in mechanical devices.

    359,    Optics: Systems (including communication) and Elements, various
    subclasses for similar endoscopic optical systems.

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 257+ for light sources and modifiers, and
    subclass 32 for light fibers, rods or pipes.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, subclasses 115+ for optical fiber bundles.

    433,    Dentistry, subclass 29 for means to facilitate viewing of work and
    radiation emission devices.  Subclasses 30+ for mirrors combined with other
    devices.  Subclass 93 for tongue guards, depressors, and cheek spreaders.
    Subclass 140 for cheek, jaw, lip, or tongue positioners.

    601,    Surgery: Kinestherapy, subclasses 2+ for ultrasonic devices applied
    to the body for therapeutic effect there on.


CLS 600/102
TXT With chair, table, holder, or other support:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein the endoscope is provided with a
    surface for supporting the body in a sitting position or an article of
    furniture having a flat horizontal surface supported by legs or a retainer
    or other sustaining surface specifically adapted to retain the endoscope in
    an area in which it is being utilized or to hold the endoscope in a
    convenient location or orientation.


CLS 600/103
TXT With monitoring of component or view field:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein the endoscope is provided with
    means to signal or communicate to an operator specific functions or
    properties of the endoscope.


CLS 600/104
TXT With tool carried on endoscope or auxiliary channel therefore:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein the endoscope is provided
    integrally with an instrument utilized in a surgical procedure within the
    body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153+,   for endoscope having auxiliary channels with diverse functions.


CLS 600/105
TXT Urogenital resectoscope:

    Subject matter under subclass 104 wherein the endoscope is particularly
    adapted to permit surgical removal of part of the body urological system in
    both male and female patients.

    (1)     Note.  Surgical removal includes cutting, electrical heating, and
    laser means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104,    for tools in particular.

    108     for laser tools.

    135,    for urological endoscopes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    606,    Surgery, subclass 46 for similar devices.


CLS 600/106
TXT Having tool moving or stopping means:

    Subject matter under subclass 104 wherein active means are provided to move
    or retard the movement of the tool through the endoscope or a auxiliary
    channel carried thereon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153,    for endoscopes having auxiliary channels for various functions and
    subclass 205 for specula having auxiliary channel structure.


CLS 600/107
TXT Having tool raising platform:

    Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein the  tool moving or stopping
    means is provided, at its distal end of the tube-like structure, with a
    member which changes the direction of movement of the tool to orient the
    tool at the precise location requiring treatment.


CLS 600/108
TXT Laser:

    Subject matter under subclass 104 wherein the tool is a device which
    converts incident electromagnetic radiation of mixed frequencies to one or
    more discrete frequencies of highly amplified and coherent visible
    radiation.


CLS 600/109
TXT With camera or solid state imager:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein the endoscope is provided with
    photographic or videographic means such that whatever is seen through the
    viewing means of the endoscope is captured on film or transmitted to a
    video screen as an image.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    for camera handle protective sheath and subclass 181 for light
    intensity control mechanisms for imaging view.


CLS 600/110
TXT Having signal wires:

    Subject matter under subclass 109 wherein significance is attributed to the
    placement or mechanical structure of cable means connecting the solid state
    imaging means at the distal end of the endoscope which coupled with a video
    signal processing means transmits the image produced by the imaging means
    to a display monitor.


CLS 600/111
TXT Sterioscopic:

    Subject matter under subclass 109 wherein the camera or solid state imaging
    device transmits images or allows for the processing of images in three
    dimensions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166,    for stereoscopic viewing means.


CLS 600/112
TXT Means for coupling camera or imager:

    Subject matter under subclass 109 wherein engaging means are provided to
    optically and mechanically connect an ocular of an endoscope to a
    photographic or videographic means.


CLS 600/113
TXT With additional view means:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein an endoscope (a  parent  scope)
    is provided with an additional, usually smaller, viewing means for enabling
    two separate views through an insertion port of the endoscope.


CLS 600/114
TXT With guide means for body insertion:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein the endoscope is provided with a
    device surrounding a portion of the exterior of the tube-like structure of
    the endoscope to act as an aid in easing the introduction of the endoscope
    into the body or body cavity.


CLS 600/115
TXT Inflatable cuff or balloons:

    Subject matter under subclass 114 wherein the guide means is provided with
    expandable portions alternatingly distended to engage and disengage with
    the interior of the body or body cavity to facilitate the movement of the
    endoscope into the body or body cavity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207,    for inflatable, flexible or expandable retractors.


CLS 600/116
TXT With inflatable balloon:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein the insertion tube of the
    endoscope is provided with an inflatable section which, when inflated,
    enhances observation through the viewing means of the endoscope or retains
    the endoscope in a desired location.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207,    for retractors having inflation means.


CLS 600/117
TXT With means for indicating position, depth or condition of endoscope:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein means are provided on or within
    an endoscope to quantify or assess the location, deepness usage or state of
    the endoscope relative to the body portion under investigation.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass are directed to measuring pressure,
    distance from object, size of affected objected, depth or angle of
    insertion, temperature, and degree of color change.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118,    for control or monitoring for disfunction and subclass 202 for
    retractors having sensing or measuring means.


CLS 600/118
TXT With control or monitoring of endoscopic functions:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein functions of the endoscope are
    remotely operated or supervised to ensure proper operation thereof.


CLS 600/119
TXT With shield to protect operator (e.g., splatter protection):

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein the proximal portion of the
    endoscope is provided with a plate-like barrier to protect the hands or
    face of the operator from body fluids emanating from a patient.


CLS 600/120
TXT Having endotrachael intubation means on endoscope:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein an endoscope is utilized in
    introducing a tube into the trachea of a patient.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS

    194,    for laryngoscopes designed to insert endotracheal tubes into a
    patient.


CLS 600/121
TXT With protective sheath:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein the endoscope is provided with a
    fixed or removable covering to shield the endoscope from damage or from
    exposure to bodily fluids or contamination.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203,    for retractors having a protective sheath.


CLS 600/122
TXT For camera or handle:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the protective sheath encloses an
    image capturing device or a gripping portion of the endoscope.


CLS 600/123
TXT For auxiliary channels:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the protective sheath is provided
    with at least one passage, in addition to the channel enclosing the
    endoscope, which admits the introduction of other means into the body or
    body cavity to view or treat the body or body cavity.


CLS 600/124
TXT With means to assist covering or uncovering of sheath:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the protective sheath comprises
    means to assist an operator to envelop the endoscope with the protective
    sheath or remove the protective sheath therefrom.


CLS 600/125
TXT With locking or retaining means for sheath:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the protective sheath is provided
    with means to engage with the endoscope to prevent accidental removal or
    movement of the protective sheath therefrom.


CLS 600/126
TXT With foot pedal control for endoscope operation:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein at least one function of the
    endoscope may be remotely regulated by means operated by the lower
    extremity of the body which is in direct contact with ground when a person
    is in a standing or sitting position.


CLS 600/127
TXT With non-optical distal tip attachment:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein the endoscope is provided with a
    means which may be engaged with the inserting end of the endoscope for
    purpose other than one involving the viewing or illuminating functions of
    the endoscope.


CLS 600/128
TXT With particular shaft cross-section:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein a plane perpendicularly
    intersecting the longitudinal axis of the endoscope has a non-circular
    perimeter.


CLS 600/129
TXT With particular distal tip configuration:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein significance is attributed to the
    structure of the end of the endoscope inserted in the body  cavity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    188,    for specula having means to transmit a view from the distal end.


CLS 600/130
TXT With particular arrangement of internal elements (e.g., shaft reducing):

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein the placement of imaging,
    illuminating, and working members within the tube-like structure of the
    endoscope is chosen so as to provide a desired reduced outer perimeter or
    diameter of the tube-like structure.


CLS 600/131
TXT With particular operating handle design (e.g., for comfort):

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein the proximal portion of the
    endoscope held by a holder or an operator is fashioned in a manner
    conducive to permit simpler operation in the performance of surgical or
    other tedious procedures.


CLS 600/132
TXT Universal cord connector for endoscope functions:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein the endoscope is provided with a
    functional plug-like member coupled to the endoscope body     by an
    elongated flexible tube to link various devices provided exteriorly of the
    endoscope body.

    (1)     Note.  Among the various devices provided on the exterior of the
    endoscope are controls for light sources as well as air and water supplies.


CLS 600/133
TXT Sterilizable:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein at least one portion of the
    endoscope may be disinfected without being deleteriously affected by the
    cleaning process so as to be free from microorganisms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    198,    for sterilizable specula handles.


CLS 600/134
TXT Having means to protect user or patient or endoscope from electrical
    discharge:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein a portion of the endoscope is
    provided with means to prevent current or charges from electrical
    components located within the endoscope from harmfully affecting a patient,
    operator, or the endoscope itself.


CLS 600/135
TXT Urological:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein the endoscope is utilized for
    investigation or treatment of the structure, functions, and disorders of a
    urinary tract including examination and treatment of kidneys, ureters, and
    bladders of both males and females, and testes, epididymis, prostate gland,
    seminal vesicles and penis in males.


CLS 600/136
TXT Having separable shaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein the endoscope is provided with
    means to permit removal of the tube-like portion of the endoscope from the
    proximal portion of the endoscope.


CLS 600/137
TXT Having rotatable shaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein the tube-like distal portion of
    the endoscope may be radially turned with respect to the proximal portion
    of the endoscope.


CLS 600/138
TXT Having rigid tube structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein the tube-like structure is
    inflexible.


CLS 600/139
TXT Having flexible tube structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein the tube-like structure is
    capable of being bent or flexed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206,    for retractors having flexible or malleable structure.


CLS 600/140
TXT Plural layers:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein the flexible tube-like structure
    is composed of more than a single thickness of material throughout its
    extent.


CLS 600/141
TXT Articulated segments:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein the flexible tube-like structure
    is composed of individual, adjacent, interconnected pieces of material to
    enable the tube-like structure to be flexed.


CLS 600/142
TXT Pivotally connected:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein adjacent members of the
    articulated segments are secured to each other by means about which they
    rotate or turn.


CLS 600/143
TXT Having shape memory retaining material component:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein the outer layer of the flexible
    tube structure is capable of being conformed into a particular form which
    it will maintain until changed.


CLS 600/144
TXT With adjustable rigidity:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 in which the flexible tube structure
    contains movable means which permits a degree of flexibility of the tube
    structure.


CLS 600/145
TXT With bend detecting means (e.g., endoscope tracking):

    Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein means are provided to discern
    changes in an angle or deflection of the distal portion of the endoscope.


CLS 600/146
TXT With bending control means:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein the flexible endoscope has a
    bendable insertion section which is provided with means to manipulate the
    distal end of the insertion section to steer the endoscope to its desired
    destination within the body or body cavity and to ensure a return of the
    bendable section to its original horizontal position to facilitate removal
    without damage to a body orifice in which it has been inserted.


CLS 600/147
TXT With removable control knob:

    Subject matter under subclass 146 wherein the manipulating portion of the
    bending control mechanism may be separated from the proximal operating
    portion of the endoscope for replacement.


CLS 600/148
TXT With braking means:

    Subject matter under subclass 146 wherein the bending control is provided
    with means which when applied cause a slowing or stopping of the bending
    control means resulting in a freezing of the angular orientation of the
    bendable insertion section.


CLS 600/149
TXT With control wire tension control (e.g., slack absorbing):

    Subject matter under subclass 146 wherein the bending mechanism is operated
    by plural, differentially displaced cables which are alternatingly
    retracted to bend or unbend the endoscope and which are provided with
    strain regulating means which either reduces strain on the cables to
    prevent over-stretching the cables or places strain on the cables to
    eliminate slack caused by excess cable.


CLS 600/150
TXT With deflection recovery:

    Subject matter under subclass 146 wherein the bending portion of the
    endoscope is provided with means which permits the unbending of that
    portion engaging the body orifice or body cavity when the bending control
    mechanism is not operating.


CLS 600/151
TXT Having temperature sensitive shape memory retaining material:

    Subject matter under subclass 146 wherein the tube-like structure of the
    endoscope comprises a composition alloy which has been heat treated to
    memorize a predetermined shape which can be bent upon the application of a
    transformation temperature while in a body orifice or body cavity and upon
    application of a restoration temperature returns to its original shape.


CLS 600/152
TXT Fluid or electrical control means:

    Subject matter under subclass 146 wherein the bending control mechanism is
    connected to a liquid, gaseous pressure or an electrically controlled power
    source which adjusts the rigidity of selected portions of the tube-like
    structure of the endoscope to selectively change the angular orientation of
    the endoscope within the body or body cavity.

    (1)     Note.  Electrical driven serometers are classifiable in this
    subclass.


CLS 600/153
TXT Having auxiliary channel:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein the endoscope is provided with a
    passage in addition to the viewing means which admits the introduction of
    other operating means into the endoscope to view or treat the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    for an auxiliary channel endoscope having a tool and means to move
    or stop movement of the tool through the auxiliary channel.


CLS 600/154
TXT Channel seal (e.g., forceps stopcock):

    Subject matter under subclass 153 wherein the auxiliary channel has means
    for substantially closing the end of the channel which closing means is
    provided with a portion which admits the passage of instruments
    therethrough.


CLS 600/155
TXT With interior cleaning means:

    Subject matter under subclass 153 wherein the auxiliary channel is provided
    with additional means which when employed removes debris and impurities
    therefrom.


CLS 600/156
TXT Fluid channel (e.g., suction, irrigation, aspiration):

    Subject matter under subclass 153 wherein a gas or a liquid is supplied or
    removed through the auxiliary channel to introduce the gas or liquid into
    the body organ or body cavity to which the endoscope has been introduced or
    to apply suction to remove materials therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    187,    for specula with fluid channels.

    205,    for retractors having fluid channels.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    433,    Dentistry, subclass 93 for suction devices provided with mouth
    props and subclass 180 for mouth props, per se.


CLS 600/157
TXT With window cleaning:

    Subject matter under subclass 156 wherein the fluid channel is utilized to
    apply washing fluids to the distal most portion of the viewing means of the
    endoscope to increase vision therethrough.


CLS 600/158
TXT With air or water supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 156 wherein the fluid channel is connected to
    a storage area holding a fluid or gas for use in introducing a fluid into
    the body or applying fluid to the distal portion of the endoscope.


CLS 600/159
TXT Valve construction or valve control means:

    Subject matter under subclass 156 wherein the passage of fluids through the
    fluid channel is regulated by a finger-operable movable control element
    disposed on the proximal portion of the endoscope used to open and close
    the entrance to the fluid channel.


CLS 600/160
TXT Having imaging and illumination:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein significance is attributed to the
    structure or placement of the optical components of the endoscope including
    viewing means and the lighting means therefore.

    (1)     Note. This subclass includes ultrasonic, infrared, and X-ray
    fluoresents imaging.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    178+,   for light means used in endoscopes, subclass 182 for light
    transmitting fibers.

    199,    for light means used with laryngoscopes.

    245,    for retractors having illuminating means.

    248,    for  reflectors having lighting means.


CLS 600/161
TXT Strain relief means on optical elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein the image or light transmitting
    material of the endoscope is provided with breakage preventing means to
    retain the optical integrity of the endoscope.


CLS 600/162
TXT Ocular (e.g., eyepiece):

    Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein the proximal end of the endoscope
    is provided with a lens, optically aligned with the viewing means to enable
    the view transmitted from the distal end of the endoscope to be seen at the
    proximal end of the endoscope.


CLS 600/163
TXT With focusing:

    Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein the clarity or distinctness of a
    view through the endoscope may be adjusted by changing the distance between
    lenses located within the ocular.


CLS 600/164
TXT Angled or offset on endoscope shaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein the ocular does not lie along the
    longitudinal axis of the tube-like structure of the endoscope.


CLS 600/165
TXT Plural:

    Subject matter under subclass 162 wherein the endoscope is provided with at
    least two oculars, the viewing paths of which being joined at some point
    within the proximal portion of the endoscope to share the remaining viewing
    path of the endoscope to the distal viewing window.


CLS 600/166
TXT Stereoscopic:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein the endoscope is provided with a
    three dimensional optical viewing system.


CLS 600/167
TXT Focusing:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein the clarity or distinctness of a
    view through the endoscope may be adjusted by means other than changing the
    distance between lenses in the ocular.


CLS 600/168
TXT Magnifying:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein the endoscope is provided with
    optics enabling the enlargement of an image.


CLS 600/169
TXT Fog prevention:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein an endoscope is provided with
    means to prevent the viewing window from becoming clouded with condensation
    during use.


CLS 600/170
TXT Side viewing distal end:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein the distal end of an endoscope is
    provided with means to deflect the viewing path at a right angle from the
    longitudinal axis of the endoscope so that images located around the
    perimeter of the insertion tube may be seen.


CLS 600/171
TXT Oblique viewing distal end:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein the distal end of the endoscope
    is provided with an imaging path which is at an angle less than 90_ to the
    longitudinal axis of the endoscope.


CLS 600/172
TXT Interchangeable optical system:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein the imaging means of an endoscope
    is removable for the purpose of replacing or fixing a damaged imaging
    system or for replacing with a new system to impart new imaging
    characteristics to the endoscope.


CLS 600/173
TXT View field altering means:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein a plurality of separate images
    located at different angles from the distal end of the endoscope can be
    viewed from the same endoscope without moving the exterior of the elongated
    insertion part.


CLS 600/174
TXT Articulated optical coupler:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein the endoscope is provided with a
    series of lenses mechanically and optically connected to view an image
    which may be moved relative to one another at special joints containing
    optically coupled prisms.


CLS 600/175
TXT Distal optical attachment:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein the distal end of the endoscope
    is provided with an optional accessory to alter the imagining or
    illuminating characteristics thereof.


CLS 600/176
TXT Having particular distal lens or window:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein significance is attributed to the
    structure or placement of the optical transmitting means at the distal end
    imaging or illuminating means of the endoscope.


CLS 600/177
TXT For improved illumination:

    Subject matter under subclass 176 wherein light exiting from an endoscope
    passes through a light manipulating member for illuminating an object with
    a desired light distribution.


CLS 600/178
TXT Light source:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein significance is attributed to the
    placement or structure of the lighting means in the endoscope structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99,     for specula having a light sources.

    223,    for body orifice specula having illuminating means.

    246+,   for retractors having illuminating means.

    248,    for reflectors having illumination.

    249,    for lamps and illuminators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illuminating, subclass 32 for light fibers, rods or probes and
    subclasses 257+ for light sources and modifiers.


CLS 600/179
TXT Lamp in shaft:

    Subject matter under subclass 178 wherein the light source of an endoscope
    is provided in the form of an illuminating bulb located within the distal
    end of the tube-like structure of the endoscope.


CLS 600/180
TXT With light intensity control:

    Subject matter under subclass 178 wherein the light source is provided with
    means to adjust the strength of light exiting the light source as
    determined by an image received through the optical system of the endoscope.


CLS 600/181
TXT With filter masking, diaphragm, aperture plate:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein means are provided in the path of
    the observation system to alter the transmittance of light passing through
    the optical system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclass 32 for light fibers, rods or pipes.


CLS 600/182
TXT Fibers and fiber arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein the image transmitting means or
    the illumination transmitting means in the endoscope comprises a plurality
    of glass or plastic optical fibers organized for effective image or
    illumination transmission through the elongated tube-like structure of the
    endoscope.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination subclass 32 for light transmitting fibers, rods or
    pipes.


CLS 600/183
TXT Tissue division viewing (e.g., carpal tunnel, plantar fasciotomy):

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein an endoscope is utilized to view
    the removal of a piece of ligamentous tissue.


CLS 600/184
TXT Specula:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a device to facilitate
    the exploration of the interior of the body by holding open the natural or
    other surgically created orifices of the body.


CLS 600/185
TXT Laryngoscope:

    Subject matter under subclass 184 wherein the specula comprises a blade and
    a handle grasping portion, the blade having a proximal end attached to the
    handle and a distal end adapted for insertion into the mouth to allow
    imaging of a portion of the mouth, pharynx, and larynx.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    190+    for blade structure and subclasses 237+ for retractors adapted for
    oral use.


CLS 600/186
TXT With protective sheath:

    Subject matter under subclass 185 wherein the laryngoscope is provided with
    a cover to shield the laryngoscope from damage or from exposure to bodily
    fluids and contamination during use and handling to negate the need for
    sterilization.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121+,   for endoscopes having protective sheaths covering various elements
    of endoscopes.


CLS 600/187
TXT With auxiliary channel for fluid traversing:

    Subject matter under subclass 185 wherein a passage is provided in the
    laryngoscope which admits the introduction of gas, liquid, or treating
    means into the throat or for the application of suction means to remove
    materials therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156     and 205, for devices having an auxiliary channel for fluid
    transmission.


CLS 600/188
TXT With means to transmit view from distal end:

    Subject matter under subclass 185 wherein the blade of the laryngoscope is
    provided with an image relaying means to provide an operator with an image
    of the mouth, larynx, or pharynx which does not lie in a direct line of
    sight.


CLS 600/189
TXT By mirror or prism:

    Subject matter under subclass 188 wherein the means to transmit a view from
    the distal end of the blade of the laryngoscope comprises an image
    reflecting or deflecting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 30+ for dental mirrors provided with other
    devices of the class.


CLS 600/190
TXT Having particular blade structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 185 wherein significance is attributed to the
    structure of the portion of the laryngoscope inserted into the mouth.


CLS 600/191
TXT Made from light transmitting material:

    Subject matter under subclass 190 wherein the blade is transparent or
    translucent to facilitate viewing all parts of the mouth through the blade
    or to evenly distribute illumination received at the proximal end of the
    blade.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    178+    and 182, for similar light transmission devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 257+ for light sources and light modifiers
    and subclass 32 for light fibers, rods or pipes.


CLS 600/192
TXT With rough grained surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 190 wherein an outer surface of the blade of
    the laryngoscope is not smooth so as to facilitate retention of the
    laryngoscope within the mouth.


CLS 600/193
TXT Detachable:

    Subject matter under subclass 190 wherein the proximal end of the blade may
    be removed from or folded along the handle of the laryngoscope for
    replacement or for sterilization.


CLS 600/194
TXT Specific design for intubation:

    Subject matter under subclass 190 wherein the shape of the blade
    facilitates the entry of an endotracheal tube into a patient:

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for endoscopes designed to have guide means for body insertion.


CLS 600/195
TXT With cushion or pad (e.g., teeth guard):

    Subject matter under subclass 190 wherein the blade is provided with a
    soft, compressible material to prevent injuring a patient during insertion
    or use of the blade of the laryngoscope in the patient's mouth.


CLS 600/196
TXT Adjustable (e.g., linearly, angularly):

    Subject matter under subclass 190 wherein the blade of the laryngoscope may
    be positioned at an angle with respect to the handle, or may be elongated
    or shortened to accommodate differently sized oral cavities.


CLS 600/197
TXT Having particular handle structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 185 wherein significance is attributed to the
    grasping portion attached to the proximal end of the blade.


CLS 600/198
TXT Sterilizable:

    Subject matter under subclass 197 wherein the handle of the laryngoscope
    may be disinfected to remove all contaminants without deleteriously
    affecting the interior components.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    for portions of an endoscope which are sterilizable.


CLS 600/199
TXT Illuminating:

    Subject matter under subclass 185 wherein the laryngoscope comprises a
    light source or means to transmit light along or past the blade of the
    laryngoscope to allow adequate imaging of portions of the mouth, pharynx,
    and larynx.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    178+,   182, 223, 245+, 248, and 249, for instrument illuminating means.


CLS 600/200
TXT Otoscope (e.g., funnel shaped specula):

    Subject matter under subclass 199 wherein the specula comprises an
    illuminated funnel shaped portion adapted to be inserted in an ear and
    designed for inspection of the external portions thereof.


CLS 600/201
TXT Retractor:

    Subject matter under subclass 184 having one or more surfaces for holding
    tissues or organs out of the field of view of the observer during the
    diagnosis and/or treatment of interior bodily orifices that are either
    surgically formed in, or occur naturally within, the body.


CLS 600/202
TXT With sensor or measuring means:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 comprising means to detect or calculate
    various changes in parameters affecting either the patients physiologic
    condition, or the function of the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for endoscopes having depth or condition detection.

    118,    for control or monitoring of disfunctions.


CLS 600/203
TXT With protective sheath:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 comprising sleeve means to cover the
    tissue retracting surface or surfaces of the retractor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    121+,           for endoscopes having a protective sheath.


CLS 600/204
TXT Laproscopic:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 comprising a generally elongated
    tube-like member having a distal end capable of being inserted within a
    miniscule bodily orifice and a proximal end extending out of the bodily
    orifice, wherein the distal end includes tissue-retracting means which may
    expand larger than the tube-like member, and the proximal end includes
    means to manipulate the tissue-retracting means.


CLS 600/205
TXT With auxiliary channel (e.g., fluid transversing):

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the retractor is provided with a
    passage which admits the introduction of fluid or gas for the application
    of suction means to remove material therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    187,    for laryngoscopes having a fluid admitting auxiliary channel.


CLS 600/206
TXT Having flexible, malleable, or shape memory material:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein a substantial portion of the
    retractor is capable of being bent or shaped into a particular form.


CLS 600/207
TXT Inflatable:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 wherein the flexible or malleable portion
    of the retractor has fluid pressure means to shape it into the desired
    configuration or form.


CLS 600/208
TXT Circular or elliptically shaped retracting surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 wherein the flexible or malleable member
    is in the form of a generally circular closed member.


CLS 600/209
TXT Unitary wire construction:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 wherein the flexible or malleable
    retractor is composed substantially from a single pliable strand of
    metallic material twisted into a desired shape.


CLS 600/210
TXT With special blade or retracting surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein significance is attributed to
    that portion of the retractor which holds body tissue or organs out of the
    field of view of an observer.


CLS 600/211
TXT Skeleton blade:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein the retracting surface has a
    particular, substantially closed peripheral portion which defines a void in
    which rib-like structures transverse said void from one portion of the
    peripheral to another portion of said periphery.

    (1)     Note. The patents in this subclass are retractors which are termed
    "skeleton'' in the art.


CLS 600/212
TXT Containing light transmitting material:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein the blade or retracting surface
    of the retractor is transparent or translucent to facilitate viewing all
    parts of the tissue or organs through the blade or retracting surface or to
    evenly distribute illumination received at a proximal end of the blade or
    retracting surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    191,    for laryngoscopes having a light transmitting component, and
    subclass 245 for retractors having illuminating means.


CLS 600/213
TXT Detachable from handle:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein the retractor comprises a manual
    grasping portion attached to a proximal end of the blade or retracting
    surface which may be removed for replacement or for other purposes.


CLS 600/214
TXT Plural blades on single handle:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein the retractor has a manual
    gripping portion attached to a proximal end of more than one blade or
    separate retracting surfaces.


CLS 600/215
TXT Adjustable (e.g., extendable):

    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein the blade or retracting surface
    of the retractor may be moved at an angle or rotated with respect to a
    handle portion, or may be elongated or shortened to accommodate differently
    sized pieces of tissue or organs to be moved.


CLS 600/216
TXT Multiple pivotable joints on retracting surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 215 wherein the means to hold tissue or
    organs out of the field of view of the observer comprises a plurality of
    portions rotatable or swingable about a fixed portion to provide
    adjustability.


CLS 600/217
TXT With retracting hook, claw, teeth, or barb:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 wherein the blade or retracting surface
    of the retractor is provided with a curved element, a sharp pointed
    projection or a projection similar to toothed elements which engage or
    grasp the organ or tissue to be moved.


CLS 600/218
TXT With compressing jaws:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the retractor comprises a pair of
    pivotal connected elements adapted to cooperatively secure the tissue or
    organ between the elements to move the tissue or organ while held there
    between.


CLS 600/219
TXT With cooperating retracting members:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the retractor comprises at least
    two pivotally connected elements which are adapted to separate from each
    other to hold open a natural body orifice or a surgical incision or to push
    aside tissue in opposing directions.


CLS 600/220
TXT Duck-Billed specula (e.g., vagina):

    Subject matter under subclass 219 wherein the cooperating retracting
    members comprises a pair of blade-like jaws opening at a proximal portion
    and having a distal portion shaped to conform to the interior passage
    leading from external genital orifice of a female mammal to a uterus.


CLS 600/221
TXT With auxiliary instrument:

    Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein the vaginal-type specula is
    provided with a tool for utilizing in a surgical or diagnostic procedure
    within the vagina.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    104+,   for endoscopes provided with tools for various functions.


CLS 600/222
TXT With means to change parallel distance between blades:

    Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein the vaginal-type specula
    comprises means to separate and enlarge the distance between the proximal
    portion of the jaws.


CLS 600/223
TXT With illuminating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 220 wherein the vaginal-type specula
    comprises means to provide light to the interior of the vagina.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160,    178+, 182, 199, 245+, 248, and 249, for instruments having
    illuminating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 32 and 257+, for light sources, modifier,
    fibers, fibers, rods, and pipes.


CLS 600/224
TXT Three or more members (e.g., trivalve specula):

    Subject matter under subclass 219 wherein the retractor comprises more than
    two connected elements adapted to separate from each other to hold open a
    natural body orifice or a surgically created opening to push aside tissue
    in opposing directions.


CLS 600/225
TXT Pivots along longitudinal axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 wherein the cooperating retracting
    members rotate along a line parallel to the long axis of the length of the
    retracting member.


CLS 600/226
TXT With special handle:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein significance is attributed to a
    manual grasping portion attached to a proximal portion of the tissue
    holding surface.


CLS 600/227
TXT With holder:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the tissue holding surface of the
    retractor is provided with a device specifically adapted to retain the
    tissue holding surface in an area in which it is being utilized to free the
    hands of the observer for performing other surgical or diagnostic functions
    while the tissue or organs to be moved are maintained in a retracted state.


CLS 600/228
TXT Having supporting arm:

    Subject matter under subclass 227 wherein the holder comprises an elongate,
    substantially vertically extending support for retaining the tissue holding
    surface, or a holder for the tissue holding surface in the desired location.


CLS 600/229
TXT Flexible or articulable:

    Subject matter under subclass 228 wherein the supporting arm is pliable or
    capable of being bent or flexed.


CLS 600/230
TXT Special table clamp:

    Subject matter under subclass 228 wherein significance is attributed to
    means for retaining the supporting arm on a patient supporting surface.


CLS 600/231
TXT Supporting frame:

    Subject matter under subclass 227 wherein the holder comprises a structure
    at least partially surrounding the area of a patient's anatomy under
    retraction such that the structure retains the tissue holding surface in
    the area of retraction.


CLS 600/232
TXT Three sided rectangular frame:

    Subject matter under subclass 231 wherein the supporting frame surrounds
    the area of the patient to be retracted on three sides.


CLS 600/233
TXT Closed frame (e.g., circle, square):

    Subject matter under subclass 231 wherein the supporting structure
    completely surrounds the area of the patient to be retracted.


CLS 600/234
TXT Handle-holder cooperating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 227 wherein a proximal most portion of the
    tissue holding surface is provided with a grasping means or an interlocking
    connection means to restrain or retain the tissue holder surface in a
    desired position on the holder.


CLS 600/235
TXT Specific use retractor:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the structure or design of the
    retractor enables it to be employed for a particular function or purpose.


CLS 600/236
TXT Eyeball:

    Subject matter under subclass 235 wherein the retractor is specifically
    designed for retracting portions surrounding a ball-shaped portion of an
    eye enclosed within a socket and eyelids.


CLS 600/237
TXT Mouth:

    Subject matter under subclass 235 wherein the retractor is specifically
    designed for use in retracting portions surrounding and inside the bodies
    oral cavity.


CLS 600/238
TXT Brace or prop:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 having means which when placed between a
    patient's teeth retain the patient's jaws in an open position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    433,    Dentistry, subclass 93 for mouth props provided with suction and
    subclass 140 for dental mouth props, per se.


CLS 600/239
TXT Jaw spreader with tongue depressor:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 wherein the retractor for the mouth
    comprises a device to hold open the mouth and a blade-like member to press
    the organ of taste towards the bottom of the mouth.


CLS 600/240
TXT Tongue depressor:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 wherein the retractor is designed to
    press the organ of taste towards the bottom of the mouth.


CLS 600/241
TXT Illuminated:

    Subject matter under subclass 240 wherein the tongue depressor has  means
    to provide light around and beyond a distal portion of the tongue depressor.


CLS 600/242
TXT Lip or cheek:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 wherein the retractor is designed to hold
    the tissue and skin surrounding the exterior of the patients oral cavity in
    a desired position.


CLS 600/243
TXT Veterinary jaw spreader:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 designed for opening or holding open the
    mouth of animals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    433,    Dentistry subclass 140 for dental mouth props, per se.


CLS 600/244
TXT Pivoted:

    Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein the veterinary jaw spreader is
    hinged about a fixed point.


CLS 600/245
TXT Having illuminating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the retractor is provided with
    means to provide light to the body area being held open for viewing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241,    for tongue depressors having illuminating means and subclass 249
    for light lamps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, subclasses 251+ for light sources and modifiers, and
    subclass 32 for light fibers, rods and pipes.


CLS 600/246
TXT With lens or mirror:

    Subject matter under subclass 245 wherein the illuminating retractor
    comprises a reflecting means or a prism to enhance the field of view of the
    observer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189,    for laryngoscope having mirror or prisms to reflect light.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 30+ for mirrors combined with dental devices.


CLS 600/247
TXT REFLECTOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising mirrors designed for
    redirecting light into cavities or upon the surface of the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    189,    for laryngoscope provided with mirrors, subclass 246 for retractors
    having mirrors or prisms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 30 and 31 for mirrors.


CLS 600/248
TXT With illuminating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 247 wherein the reflector is provided  with
    means to provide light to the area of the body under examination.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    241,    for tongue depressors having a light source and subclass 245 for
    retractors having lighting means.


CLS 600/249
TXT LAMPS FOR ILLUMINATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a light generating
    device designed to provide light to the body and cavities therein in order
    to aid in the inspection thereof.


CLS 600/300
TXT DIAGNOSTIC TESTING:

    Subject matter under the class definition usable in medical evaluation of a
    condition of a living body.

    (1)     Note.  As indicated in search notes appended to definitions of this
    subclass and subclasses indented thereunder, other classes specifically
    provide for certain devices usable in diagnosing a body condition.  As also
    indicated in notes herein, a diagnostic device may be classified in one of
    the subclasses of Class 600 if a claim for the device includes some
    limitation showing that the device is specifically designed for use in
    evaluating a body condition but will be classified elsewhere if the device
    has disclosed utility for another purpose and is not claimed as aforesaid
    (e.g., an ultrasonic testing apparatus where no structure particularly
    adapted for placement on or in the body is claimed may be classified in
    Class 73, Measuring and Testing, subclasses 585+; or in Class 367,
    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices, subclass 87
    where the apparatus is disclosed as having another utility in addition to
    medical testing utility).

    (2)     Note.  This subclass includes methods and apparatus for diagnosis
    where the information obtained is for use by the diagnostician, whereas
    methods and apparatus including diagnosis incident to the operation or
    control of a surgical treatment apparatus are classified in the appropriate
    treatment subclass within Class 128 (e.g., a demand-type pacemaker which
    monitors the heart electric signal to trigger the pacemaker only when a
    heart arrhythmia occurs is classified in Class 607, subclasses 2+, and an
    intravenous infusion apparatus is classified in Class 604, subclasses 131+).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 573+ for alarms
    automatically responsive to the condition of a human being or animal (e.g.,
    sleep inhibiting alarms).

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 2+
    for a composition useful in medical diagnosis.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclass 258 for a coordination
    testing device for testing a person's physical aptitude to perform a task,
    where no diagnosis of an abnormal physical condition is involved.


CLS 600/301
TXT Diagnosis of a plurality of physiologic functions:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein several activities of an animal
    body are evaluated for medical purposes.


CLS 600/302
TXT Endoradiosonde:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 for transmitting from a point inside the
    body a radio signal indicating a body condition (e.g., an ingestible
    capsule containing a radio transmitter and a sensor which controls the
    latter in response to a particular condition such as the pH of liquid in
    the stomach).


CLS 600/303
TXT Olfactometer:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein a device is placed near a pair of
    nasal openings on a subject's nose to supply an olfactory stimulus to
    determine said subject's threshold to the stimulus and measures the
    entirety of odors supplied to the subject's nose.


CLS 600/304
TXT Readiness to give birth:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein a warning device is applied to an
    animal, which device generates a signal indicating that the animal is
    approaching parturition.

    (1)     Note.  These devices are usually placed upon a mare or cow about
    the time of parturition to warn the animal's breeder that the animal is
    about to give birth.


CLS 600/305
TXT Hazardous current flow conditions:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein an electromedical
    patient-monitoring system is provided with sensor means attached to a
    patient's body, which sensors detect harmful electrical potentials and
    prevent them from being transmitted to the  patient.


CLS 600/306
TXT Measurement of skin parameters:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein means are provided to detect a
    particular condition of an integument utilizing reflective measurements for
    evaluating, for example, erythema.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass measure the amount of moisture
    content of human skin.


CLS 600/307
TXT Determining rate of fluid loss from body surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein means are provided to determine
    sweating or the amount of change in sweating immediately at the general
    body surface of an animal or at some specific portion of said body.


CLS 600/308
TXT Physical characteristics of electrolytes:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein means are provided to measure the
    flow rate of electrolytic fluids including a flow cell having a channel
    containing electrodes to which a pulse is applied at varying intensity to
    determine the flow rate in the particular portion of the body.


CLS 600/309
TXT Measuring or detecting nonradioactive constituent of body liquid by means
    placed against or in body throughout test:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 using means placed against or in the body
    throughout a test for (a) detecting the presence of a nonradioactive
    constituent in a body liquid or (b) measuring the amount of such
    constituent.

    (1)     Note.  The term "body liquid" includes liquid in body tissue as
    well as blood and liquid in a body cavity such as the stomach or bladder.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein are methods and apparatus for measuring pH
    of a body liquid (hydrogen being a detectable constituent of a liquid).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    407,    for methods and apparatus for detecting radiation emanating from a
    radioactive material in the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics: Measuring and Testing, subclasses 39+ for blood analyzing
    means not positioned on the body during its use.

    435,    Chemistry: Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 4+ for
    measuring or detecting constituents by fermentation.

    935,    Genetic Engineering:  Recombinant DNA Technology, Hybrid or Fused
    Cell Technology, and Related Manipulations of Nucleic Acids, for a search
    collection for processes of altering the genetic structure of
    micro-organisms; genes and methods of modifying genes and their expression;
    vectors and methods of modifying vectors; methods of introducing DNA into a
    cell; micro-organisms, per se, which have had their genetic sequence
    altered by recombinant DNA techniques or by cell fusion or by uptake of
    DNA; testing; separation techniques; apparatus; methods of use of vectors
    or of the genetically engineered micro-organisms; and methods of gene
    therapy or genetic modification of living organisms.


CLS 600/310
TXT Infrared, visible light, or ultraviolet radiation directed on or through
    body or constituent released therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 309 wherein detection or measurement of a
    component is effected by directing infrared, visible light, or ultraviolet
    radiation against or through (a) a portion of the body or (b) a component
    released from the body liquid (e.g., oxygen released from blood).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    473+,   for infrared radiation.

    476+,   for visible light radiation.


CLS 600/311
TXT Partial pressure of constituent:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein the light means directed on or
    through the body measures the partial pressure contribution of each of two
    or more components, each of which by itself is exerting pressure
    independent of the other components.


CLS 600/312
TXT Using fluorescent material:

    Subject matter under subclass 311 wherein a photoluminescent material
    placed in the body is detected to measure partial pressure of components
    therein.


CLS 600/313
TXT Fetal tissue:

    Subject matter under subclass 311 wherein the partial pressure of a
    component of a fetus is measured by the application of a probe to a scalp
    either temporarily or implanted until parturition.


CLS 600/314
TXT Foreign substance:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein the light is passed through a
    portion of a body to blood carried through that portion to detect the
    alcohol, acetone, narcotic, or various other products carried in the blood.


CLS 600/315
TXT Bilirubin:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein the light is directed upon the
    skin of a person to detect jaundice caused by the normal and pathological
    destruction of the blood's erythrocytes.


CLS 600/316
TXT Glucose:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein the light is utilized to monitor
    a particular sugar carried in body blood.


CLS 600/317
TXT By fluorescent emission:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein a photoluminescent material is
    placed in or on the body to monitor or measure the concentration of
    constituents or compositions contained in the body or its systems.


CLS 600/318
TXT Determining constituents in eye:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein light is directed to the organ of
    sight, or a particular anatomical portion thereof, to determine the
    existence of a pathological or physiological condition thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Pathological or physiological conditions include diabetes,
    conjunctivitis, cholesterol, contaminant in the aqueous humor, etc.


CLS 600/319
TXT Glucose:

    Subject matter under subclass 318 wherein the physiological condition
    detected in the eye is the presence or level of a sugar.


CLS 600/320
TXT Hemoglobin:

    Subject matter under subclass 318 wherein means are provided to measure the
    oxygen-bearing, iron-containing conjugated protein in animal red blood
    cells.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    328,    for similar devices for measuring hemoglobin in ocular tissue.


CLS 600/321
TXT Using fluorescent emission determination:

    Subject matter under subclass 318 wherein photoluminescent material is
    placed in the body to monitor or measure several physical parameters or
    several types of particles in the eye.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    317,    for the application of photoluminescent materials to measure
    various parameters in other bodily portions.


CLS 600/322
TXT Determining blood constituent:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein light means are provided to
    measure or detect the individual components of a fluid circulated by heart
    action upon an animal's vascular system carrying oxygen and nutrients
    throughout the body and waste products to excretory organs.


CLS 600/323
TXT Oxygen saturation:

    Subject matter under subclass 322 wherein the light means is utilized to
    measure the degree of saturation of oxyhemoglobin and the degree of
    hemoglobin in blood.

    (1)     Note.  Oxymeters are properly classified in this subclass.


CLS 600/324
TXT And other cardiovascular parameters:

    Subject matter under subclass 323 wherein, in addition to measuring the
    oxygen saturation of the blood, means are provided to measure or detect
    other physical or physiological functions of the body.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass disclose measuring or detecting
    body temperature, blood volume, blood pressure, pulse rate, body
    metabolism, etc.


CLS 600/325
TXT Inserted in body:

    Subject matter under subclass 324 wherein the means to measure or detect
    other body parameters are introduced into the body to determine said
    parameters.


CLS 600/326
TXT And other blood constituents:

    Subject matter under subclass 323 wherein, in addition to oxygen
    saturation, means are provided to measure or determine carbon dioxide,
    hydrogen saturation, or other components of arterial blood.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    311,    for devices for measuring partial pressure constituents of the body.


CLS 600/327
TXT Inserted in body:

    Subject matter under subclass 326 wherein the means to measure the various
    gases of arterial blood is introduced into the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    325,    for devices inserted into the body to measure oxygen and other
    cardiovascular parameters.


CLS 600/328
TXT Hemoglobin:

    Subject matter under subclass 326 wherein means are provided to measure the
    level of oxygen saturation carried in arterial blood to ocular tissue by
    the oxygen-bearing, iron-containing conjugated protein in animal red blood
    cells.


CLS 600/329
TXT Using a fluorescing material:

    Subject matter under subclass 323 wherein photoluminescent material is
    placed in the body to measure the oxygen saturation of blood cells.


CLS 600/330
TXT Separation of ac/dc components in signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 323 wherein the oxygen saturation of blood is
    accomplished by the introduction of light, which produces a signal which is
    filtered to obtain its alternating and direct current components to
    determine the root-mean square (RMS) or quotient of said current.


CLS 600/331
TXT Calibrated:

    Subject matter under subclass 323 wherein means are provided to determine
    whether the arterial blood oxygen's saturation device is operating properly.


CLS 600/332
TXT Inserted in body:

    Subject matter under subclass 331 wherein the oxygen saturation calibration
    device is introduced into the body.


CLS 600/333
TXT Used in conjunction with associated apparatus (e.g., pacemaker):

    Subject matter under subclass 323 wherein the oxygen saturation means is
    combined with a heart electronic pulse means which regulates cardiac rate
    in response to the increase or decrease of the oxygen content of the blood.


CLS 600/334
TXT With tissue perfusion:

    Subject matter under subclass 323 wherein the device which measures the
    oxygen saturation of the blood has a heating element which increases blood
    flow in the tissue resulting in a more accurate measurement of blood oxygen
    saturation.


CLS 600/335
TXT Pressurization of body portion performed:

    Subject matter under subclass 323 wherein oxygen saturation of the blood is
    obtained by the addition of means which increases atmospheric pressure upon
    the body part to which it is applied.


CLS 600/336
TXT Detects constituents while excluding components (e.g., noise):

    Subject matter under subclass 323 wherein signals due to movement by a
    patient are filtered in favor of signals needed to measure the oxygen
    saturation of the blood.


CLS 600/337
TXT Structure preventing contact of body inserted fiber with internal body
    portions:

    Subject matter under subclass 323 wherein a band of flexible
    light-conducting fibers inserted in the body to measure oxygen saturation
    are provided with means which prevent the light-contacting fibers from
    touching those portions of the body in which they are inserted.


CLS 600/338
TXT Fetal tissue:

    Subject matter under subclass 323 wherein the oxygen saturation of a
    prenatal child's blood is measured which is in the womb of a mother.


CLS 600/339
TXT Inserted in body:

    Subject matter under subclass 323 wherein the oxygen saturation measuring
    means is placed in the body.


CLS 600/340
TXT Measured at specified areas of body portions:

    Subject matter under subclass 323 wherein the oxygen saturation of the
    blood is measured in a particular body part or parts.

    (1)     Note.  Patent disclosing means for measuring oxygen saturation in
    teeth or a tooth, brain or brain portions, skull, the eye, etc.


CLS 600/341
TXT Inserted in body:

    Subject matter under subclass 322 wherein the means for determining
    constituents of the block is placed within the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    325,    332, and 339, for similar measuring devices inserted in the body.


CLS 600/342
TXT Light conducting fiber inserted in body:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein light transmitting fiber means
    are placed within the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    385,    Optical Waveguides, subclasses 117+ for a fiber scope in general.


CLS 600/343
TXT Digestive tract:

    Subject matter under subclass 342 wherein the light conducting fibers are
    inserted into that portion of the body which converts food in an alimentary
    canal for assimilation by the body.


CLS 600/344
TXT Mounting structure (e.g., belt, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein the light source is provided with
    means adapted to hold the light source in contact with a particular body
    portion under examination.


CLS 600/345
TXT Electroanalysis:

    Subject matter under subclass 309 wherein detection or measurement of the
    constituent is effected by means of anodic and cathodic electrodes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 400+ for
    electrolytic analysis and testing apparatus, per se.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, especially subclasses 775+ for electrolytic
    analysis or testing processes, per se.


CLS 600/346
TXT Sweat analysis:

    Subject matter under subclass 345 wherein a watery fluid excreted through
    skin pores is subjected to electroanalysis to determine the presence or
    amount of specific chemicals to diagnose an abnormal condition of a patient.


CLS 600/347
TXT Blood glucose:

    Subject matter under subclass 345 wherein the level of sugars in the body
    are monitored or the level of oxygen concentrations in a fluid to determine
    the difference in oxygen concentration caused by oxidation of said sugars
    is sensed.


CLS 600/348
TXT Determining ion concentration/partial pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 345 wherein electroanalysis measures either
    (a) the chemical parameters of a body fluid or (b) a force exerted by each
    of several components, each component exerting a pressure independent of
    other components.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    311,    for light utilized to measure partial pressure exerted by
    distinctive gases.


CLS 600/349
TXT Oral fluids:

    Subject matter under subclass 348 wherein the ion concentration or partial
    gas pressure of fluids contained within the oral cavity are measured.


CLS 600/350
TXT Esophageal or gastrointestinal fluids:

    Subject matter under subclass 348 wherein the ion concentration of various
    fluids of the digestive tract or the proximal portion of the
    gastroesophaged function are measured.


CLS 600/351
TXT Fetal:

    Subject matter under subclass 348 wherein the ionic concentration of
    prenatal fluids are measured or monitored prior to parturition.


CLS 600/352
TXT Using a flowthrough cell:

    Subject matter under subclass 348 wherein a tube-like housing or chamber
    having a sensor or detector is utilized to determine ionic concentration of
    fluids passing therethrough.


CLS 600/353
TXT Carbon dioxide or other gases:

    Subject matter under subclass 348 wherein the ionic concentration or
    partial pressures of various gases are measured or detected.


CLS 600/354
TXT Transcutaneous:

    Subject matter under subclass 353 wherein the ionic concentration of
    partial pressures of the gases are measured or detected by a means which
    come into contact with the integument of a patient.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    357,    for the transcutaneous detection of oxygen through the skin.


CLS 600/355
TXT Oxygen tension:

    Subject matter under subclass 348 wherein the ionic concentration or
    partial pressure of oxygen availability in body tissue or bone are measured.


CLS 600/356
TXT Eye:

    Subject matter under subclass 355 wherein the oxygen tension in the organ
    of sight is measured or detected.


CLS 600/357
TXT Transcutaneous:

    Subject matter under subclass 355 wherein the oxygen tension in tissue or
    bone is measured or detected by a means in contact with the integument of a
    patient which senses the oxygen passing through the integument.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    354,    for similar devices for measuring or detecting various other gases
    through the skin.


CLS 600/358
TXT Including tissue perfusion:

    Subject matter under subclass 357 wherein oxygen tension is measured or
    detected during the application of a heating element placed against a
    patient's integument noting the increase of blood flow in the area
    contacted by the heating element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    353,    for carbon dioxide or other gases through the skin.


CLS 600/359
TXT Temperature compensated:

    Subject matter under subclass 357 wherein the oxygen partial pressure
    sensing the value produced from the oxygen pressure sensor is compared to a
    body temperature sensor placed on or in the body, which sensor emits a
    signal which is processed to compare the partial pressure to a
    preprogrammed normal value and subsequently corrects the partial pressure
    value to that which is normal for the corrected body temperature to ensure
    a true oxygen partial pressure value.


CLS 600/360
TXT Internal:

    Subject matter under subclass 355 wherein the oxygen pressure sensor is
    placed within the body.


CLS 600/361
TXT pH:

    Subject matter under subclass 348 wherein the ionic concentration of
    hydrogen is measured or detected in the blood.


CLS 600/362
TXT Absorbent patch for fluid analysis:

    Subject matter under subclass 309 wherein a watery fluid excreted through
    skin pores is taken in through the interstices of a material capable of
    holding a volume of fluid to measure or determine chemical substances taken
    into the body.


CLS 600/363
TXT Perfusion detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 309 wherein means are provided to measure or
    detect the presence of a gas or of an administered gas or liquid containing
    an inert gas in a patient's tissue or vascular system to determine the
    sufficiency of the amount of gas or liquid in the body in order to make
    adjustments to the necessary normal needs of the body.


CLS 600/364
TXT Blood gas:

    Subject matter under subclass 309 wherein a gas analyzer is attached to or
    inserted into the body to measure or determine the amount and type of
    dissolved gas carried in a blood stream.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327     and 341, for similar devices inserted in the body to determine or
    measure constituents carried in the blood.


CLS 600/365
TXT Glucose measurement:

    Subject matter under subclass 309 wherein means are employed to measure or
    detect the amount of blood sugar levels in the vascular system of the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    319,    for devices utilizing various light devices to determine glucose
    levels in the body.  See also subclass 347 for blood glucose detection
    utilizing electroanalysis.


CLS 600/366
TXT Equilibration and analysis of fluid:

    Subject matter under subclass 309 wherein a sample of various fluids in a
    patient's body are determined by a transcutaneous means or a means inserted
    in the body having a tubular permeable membrane which contains or admits a
    dialysis fluid, which fluid  is equilibrated with the body fluid of the
    patient and subject to further analyses of component material in the body
    fluid.


CLS 600/367
TXT Holder for color indicator (e.g., fertility tester):

    Subject matter under subclass 309 wherein a means designed to carry a
    strip-like material is inserted into a body orifice to detect the presence
    of certain compounds within the body.


CLS 600/368
TXT Physical characteristics of blood:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein means are provided for the
    quantitative measurement of red and white blood cell indices.


CLS 600/369
TXT Coagulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 368 wherein means are provided to measure the
    time in which liquid blood is transformed into a soft, semisolid, or solid
    mass.


CLS 600/370
TXT Erythrocyte sedimentation rate/viscosity:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein a quantity of yellowish,
    nonnucleated, disk-shaped cells of blood which contains hemoglobin is
    measured by (a) mixing the quantity with an anticoagulate, placing it in a
    cylindrical or columnar storage means, then timing it as it settles out or
    falls; or (b) calculating the resistance of the quantity to flow.


CLS 600/371
TXT Bleeding detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 for detecting the flow or loss of blood.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclass 66 for a
    chemical test for occult blood not performed in contact with the body.


CLS 600/372
TXT Structure of body-contacting electrode or electrode inserted in body:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 where the construction of a conductor
    including the means necessary for attaching a conductor to the body through
    which a current of electricity enters or leaves the body, or a particular
    body part, for diagnostic purposes.

    (1)     Note.  An electrode is classifiable here only if it claims
    structural details of a diagnostic electrode or the means required to
    attach or restrain said electrode on an animal body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses
    115+ for electrodes of similar structure wherein said electrodes are not
    used for a diagnostic purpose.


CLS 600/373
TXT Electrode placed in body:

    Subject matter under subclass 372 wherein the electrode is in contact with
    a particular portion of an animal body.

    (1)     Note.  Patents proper for this subclass include an electrode placed
    in any natural or surgically made body orifice.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclass 118
    for nondiagnostic electrodes and subclasses 133 through 138 for electrodes
    placed in the mouth, ear, gastrointestinal tract, nose, rectum, or vagina.


CLS 600/374
TXT Electrode placed in or on heart:

    Subject matter under subclass 373 wherein the electrode is placed
    endocardially or epicardially.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses 5+
     for  cardioverting/defibrillating devices, subclasses 9+ for heart rate
    regulating devices, and subclass 122 for endocardial energy applicators.


CLS 600/375
TXT Anchored:

    Subject matter under subclass 374 wherein the heart electrode is attached
    to the external or internal surfaces of the heart by means to hold it in
    place.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclass 149
    for various means for holding an electrical energy applicator against the
    body.


CLS 600/376
TXT Fetal monitoring:

    Subject matter under subclass 373 wherein the electrode is placed in a
    vagina and attached to a maturing fetus while in a female's womb.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    453,    for fetal HR monitoring and subclass 511 for fetal heartbeat
    monitors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application,
    cross-reference art collection 902 for fetal monitoring devices for
    monitoring conditions other than the heart rate.


CLS 600/377
TXT Electrode implanted in body:

    Subject matter under subclass 373 wherein the electrode is surgically
    placed within an animal body.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass disclose those electrodes implanted
    in the body in general and those electrodes implanted near nerves.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

     25,    for surgically implanted hearing aids and subclasses 30+ for
    surgically implanted urinary or incontinent devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    604,    Surgery, subclass 891.1 for surgically implanted drug release
    devices.


CLS 600/378
TXT Electrode in brain:

    Subject matter under subclass 373 wherein the electrode is placed in
    contact with that part of an animal's central nervous system enclosed in a
    cranium consisting of a soft, convoluted mass of grey and white matter
    which serves to control and coordinate mental and physical actions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    377,    for devices implanted on nerves, subclass 378 for electrodes
    implanted in the brain, and subclass 544 for detecting brain electrical
    signals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses
    117 and 118 for electrical applicators placed in contrast with the spinal
    cord or a nerve.


CLS 600/379
TXT Electrode in ear:

    Subject matter under subclass 373 wherein the electrode is placed in
    contact with the body's organ of hearing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclass 136
    for electrodes placed in the external auditory canal and subclass 137 for
    an electrode in contact with the cochlea.


CLS 600/380
TXT Electrode in esophagus or pharynx:

    Subject matter under subclass 373 wherein the electrode is placed in that
    part of the animal body connecting a mouth with a stomach, gullet, or that
    part of the animal body consisting of a cavity and its surrounding membrane
    and muscles connecting a mouth with the esophagus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    374,    for cardiac electrode placed in contact with the external portion
    of the heart through the esophagus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    607,    Surgery, Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclass 124
    for electrical energy applicators placed in the esophagus and subclass 133
    for similar devices placed in the gastrointestinal tract.


CLS 600/381
TXT Electrode in artery or blood vessel:

    Subject matter under subclass 373 wherein the electrode is placed in a
    component of the circulatory system which carries blood to or from the
    heart.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    462,    for devices placed in blood vessels or a body orifice.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 51+ for methods of introducing material into or
    removing material from blood vessels.

    607,    Surgery: Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclass 118
    for electrodes placed in the body and subclass 122 for electrodes placed in
    the heart.


CLS 600/382
TXT Electrode attached to or positioned relative to a specific external body
    portion:

    Subject matter under subclass 372 wherein the electrode is affixed or
    located on exterior parts of the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 174+ for means for attaching conduits to the
    body.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclass 149
    for means to hold an electrical applicator on the body.


CLS 600/383
TXT Head:

    Subject matter under subclass 382 wherein the electrode is attached to an
    upper body portion joined to a body trunk by a neck containing a brain, an
    eye, mouth, ears, and nose.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    378,    for an electrode placed in the brain and subclass 379 for an
    electrode placed in the ear.

    (1)     Note.  Patents disclosing the positioning relative to the eye are
    properly classifiable in this subclass.


CLS 600/384
TXT Attached to one of the body's extremities:

    Subject matter under subclass 382 wherein the electrode is attached to
    either of the body's extremities or any of the terminal parts of a hand.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclass 144
    for electrical energy applicators attached to the foot.


CLS 600/385
TXT Radiolucent:

    Subject matter under subclass 382 wherein the electrode is composed of
    material which permits the passage of X-rays without obstructing a clear
    view of the body part to which the electrode is attached.


CLS 600/386
TXT Means for attaching electrode to body:

    Subject matter under subclass 372 wherein the electrode is provided with
    attaching means which affix said electrode on the body or a part thereof.


CLS 600/387
TXT Suction:

    Subject matter under subclass 386 wherein the electrode is attached to the
    body, or a part thereof, by means applying negative atmospheric pressure to
    said body or body part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    601,    Surgery:  Kinesitherapy, subclasses 6+ for vacuum means attached to
    various body parts.

    604,    Surgery, subclass 176 for vacuum means for securing a conduit to a
    body.


CLS 600/388
TXT Garment:

    Subject matter under subclass 386 wherein the electrode is attached to the
    body or body part by means of an article of clothing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 889+ for body restraint devices, body restraint
    garments, vests, belts, or straps.

    604,    Surgery, subclass 396 for panty-type garment for supporting a
    catamenial pad.


CLS 600/389
TXT Vest:

    Subject matter under subclass 388 wherein the garment is in the form of a
    close-fitting, waist-length, sleeveless garment carrying electrodes.


CLS 600/390
TXT Belt or strap:

    Subject matter under subclass 386 wherein the electrode is attached to the
    body by means of a band of material encircling a waist or a narrow strip of
    flexible material for fastening or holding an electrode on the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclass 876 for belt or strap means for body restrainers.

    601,    Surgery:  Kinesitherapy, subclasses 143+ for a belt supported
    frictioning device.

    604,    Surgery, subclass 179 for a belt or strap supporting a conduit on
    the body; subclass 353 for a belt, strap, or harness for urine receptacles;
    and subclass 392 for a belt, strap, or band for securing a catamenial pad
    on the body.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclass 149
    for means to hold an electrical applicator on the body.


CLS 600/391
TXT Adhesive:

    Subject matter under subclass 386 wherein the electrode is attached upon
    the body by flexible material means coated with a substance which permits
    the strip to adhere to the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    604,    Surgery, subclass 180 for adhesive means for securing a conduit to
    the body and subclass 389 for adhesive means for securing a catamenial pad
    to the body.


CLS 600/392
TXT Having release sheet:

    Subject matter under subclass 391 wherein the electrode adhesive attaching
    means carries a removable strip of material in contact with the adhesive
    surface to protect said adhesive contact surface from drying out prior to
    use in attaching the electrode to the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    604,    Surgery, subclass 389 for similar release sheet structure
    associated with an adhesive attachment means to attach a catamenial pad to
    the body.


CLS 600/393
TXT Plural electrodes carried on single support:

    Subject matter under subclass 372 wherein more than one electrode is
    secured on the same holding or attaching means.

    (1)     Note.  A support or carrier includes a cable having plural
    electrodes thereon or a cluster of cables secured together carrying plural
    electrodes.


CLS 600/394
TXT Head and socket connector for attaching lead to electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 372 wherein the electrode cable carrying an
    electrical current to or from the body is attached to the electrode by
    means of cap, post, snap, or cup-type matching piece which cooperates and
    fits with a hollow or upstanding receptacle portion to hold the two
    portions together to facilitate passage of an electrical current.


CLS 600/395
TXT Electrode composition:

    Subject matter under subclass 372 wherein significance is attributed to the
    component materials of the electrode.


CLS 600/396
TXT Silver/silver chloride containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 395 wherein at least a portion of the
    composition includes a ductile, white, conductive silver salt compound or
    the metal, per se.


CLS 600/397
TXT Electrolyte containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 395 wherein the electrode composition
    includes a conductive medium in which electrical current is enhanced and
    conducted to or from the body.


CLS 600/398
TXT Testing aqueous humor pressure or related condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 in which the amount of force exerted by a
    clear, lymph-like fluid located in the chamber in an eye between a cornea
    and a lens therein for evaluating a condition which causes an abnormal
    force to be exerted in said chamber is assayed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 78+ for methods and apparatus for
    measuring hardness.


CLS 600/399
TXT Measuring impedance to flow of aqueous humor (tonometry):

    Subject matter under subclass 398 for measuring resistance to flow of
    aqueous humor through ducts of an eyeball.


CLS 600/400
TXT Measuring acoustic impedance of eye:

    Subject matter under subclass 398 whereby acoustic impedance of the organ
    of sight is determined.


CLS 600/401
TXT Fluid jet directed against eye:

    Subject matter under subclass 398 wherein a stream of fluid (e.g., air) is
    impinged upon the eye.


CLS 600/402
TXT Eye vibrated:

    Subject matter under subclass 398 wherein the eye is moved to and fro or up
    and down repeatedly and rapidly.


CLS 600/403
TXT Pressure indicator includes liquid column:

    Subject matter under subclass 398 wherein pressure is indicated by means
    including a column of fluid.


CLS 600/404
TXT Pressure indicator includes pointer swingable over scale and mechanically
    driven by eye contacting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 398 wherein the eye contacting means (e.g., a
    rod) is mechanically linked to a pointer swingable over a pressure
    indicating scale.


CLS 600/405
TXT Measuring force required to produce standard or measured eye flattening
    (applanation):

    Subject matter under subclass 398 including means for measuring the force
    required to press a flat area on the normally curved surface of the eye,
    the area being of a standard size (e.g., an area of known size marked on
    the end of a transparent pressure-applying rod) or being measured so that
    pressure within the eye can be derived by means of the equation: Force =
    (Pressure)(Area)).


CLS 600/406
TXT Disposable or sterilizable eye contacting structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 405 wherein the means provided to the flat
    area of the eye is discarded after a single use or treated to destroy
    micro-organisms on the eye portion to which it has been applied.


CLS 600/407
TXT Detecting nuclear, electromagnetic, or ultrasonic radiation:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 including means for detecting (a)
    radiation in the form of energy or mass released from the nuclei of an
    atom, (b) radiation included in the entire electromagnetic spectrum, or (c)
    radiation which consists of a vibratory disturbance in the pressure and
    density of a fluid, or in the elastic strain in a solid, and which has a
    frequency higher than that detectable by the human ear.

    (1)     Note.  Included hereunder is apparatus for detecting radiation of
    the designated types emanating from the body (e.g., radiation from
    radioactive material in the body, etc.) and radiation of the designated
    types directed against and either reflected from or passed through the
    body.  This subclass also includes means for detecting changes produced in
    fields of radiation of the designated types which result from placement of
    the body therein.

    (2)     Note.  Included hereunder is a device usable in conjunction with
    testing apparatus involving nuclear, electromagnetic, or ultrasonic
    radiation.  For example, subclasses 656+ relate to flexible catheters used
    to inject into the body  (a) a radio-opaque material so that an X-ray will
    reveal the contour of a passage or (b) a radioactive material so that a
    suitable means for detecting the material can be used to trace its course.

    (3)     Note.  Included in this subclass are devices utilizing X-rays which
    are photons, extranuclear in their origin, arising from changes in orbital
    (or other) electron energy levels.  See subclass 436, indented hereunder,
    for devices utilizing intranuclear rays, such as gamma rays, which are
    photons intranuclear in their origin, arising from nuclear decay processes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for application of radioactive substances to the body for
    therapeutic purposes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 363.01+ for body scan apparatus, per se,
    where no structure particularly adapted for placement on or in the body is
    claimed.

    606,    Surgery, particularly subclasses 2+, 20+, 27+, and 32+ for
    application of light, cold, heat, and electrical radiation, respectively,
    to the body for therapeutic purposes.


CLS 600/408
TXT Using neural network or trainable (adaptive) system:

    Radiation detection under subclass 407 wherein the detected signals are
    analyzed using a learning system which comprises multiple layers of
    interconnected neurons or that compares unknown input patterns to reference
    patterns, the reference patterns being generated through a series of
    training steps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    382,    Image Analysis, subclasses 156+ for neural networks and subclasses
    159+ for trainable classifiers or pattern recognizers (e.g., Adeline,
    Perceptrons).

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 21 for neural
    networks.


CLS 600/409
TXT Magnetic field sensor (e.g., magnetometer, SQUID):

    Subject matter under subclass 407 including a device detecting the strength
    and orientation of an induced or natural attraction or repulsion (dipolar)
    force field associated with living tissue.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is detection of a magnetic field
    surrounding an arm, leg, organ, etc.


CLS 600/410
TXT Magnetic resonance imaging or spectroscopy:

    Subject matter for detecting radiation under subclass 407 wherein the means
    for detecting is a system which applies electromagnetic radiation matching
    the natural precessional frequency of the nucleus of an atom in a living
    body to create a likeness (i.e., an image) or to otherwise analyze the
    condition of the body being medically evaluated.

    (1)     Note.  The image creating or analyzing system (e.g., spectrometer,
    etc.) may be used for generating a tomographic image or in any other way
    aiding in diagnostic analysis.

    (2)     Note.  A system of this type was originally termed a nuclear
    magnetic resonance (NMR) system.  Nuclear magnetic resonance is considered
    to encompass both magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) and magnetic resonance
    spectroscopy (MRS).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    436,    for diagnostic testing involving nuclear radiation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, particularly subclasses 307+
    for a magnetic resonance imaging or spectroscopy device where no structure
    particularly adapted for placement on or in the body is claimed.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, particularly
    subclass 173 for in vitro analytical or immunological testing using nuclear
    magnetic resonance, electron spin resonance, or other spin effects or mass
    spectrometry.


CLS 600/411
TXT Combined with therapeutic or diverse diagnostic device:

    Subject matter under subclass 410 in which the system also has a treatment
    or medical determination apparatus (e.g., hyperthermia, lithotripsy).


CLS 600/412
TXT Temperature detection:

    MRI under subclass 410 including a device to measure the amount or change
    of heat in the tissue of interest.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is a meter to measure the exact
    temperature or the change in temperature of a tissue sample.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    549,    diagnostic testing with temperature detection.


CLS 600/413
TXT With triggering or gating device:

    Subject matter under subclass 410 including an apparatus for initiating MRI
    data acquisition using a physiological signal.


CLS 600/414
TXT Using fiducial marker:

    Subject matter under subclass 410 including a reference or indicator on or
    in a body (e.g., target).


CLS 600/415
TXT With means for positioning patient or body part:

    Subject matter under subclass 410 including a device for precisely placing
    or posing a body or a joint, appendage, organ, etc. within the MRI system.


CLS 600/416
TXT Simulation of modeling:

    Subject matter under subclass 410 in which the detection is imitated to
    study the effects.


CLS 600/417
TXT With stereotactic device:

    Subject matter under subclass 410 wherein a means is provided for use in
    the application of magnetic resonance image for directing the tip of a
    medical instrument (e.g., a needle or an electrode) in three planes with
    the ability to reach or return to a predetermined point or region through a
    relatively small access opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    429,    for stereotactic devices for guiding radiation detectors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    606,    Surgery, subclass 130 for stereotactic devices for guiding surgical
    instruments.


CLS 600/418
TXT With means for communicating with patient:

    Subject matter under subclass 410 provided with means to permit
    conversation or another form of contact with a person in the device.


CLS 600/419
TXT Of fluid flow:

    MRI under subclass 410 wherein the image creating or analyzing system is
    used to aid in medically evaluating or quantifying a body liquid or gas
    traveling through the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, particularly subclass 306 for
    magnetic resonance imaging or spectroscopy of fluid flow rate where the
    fluid may not be limited to a body fluid and no structure particularly
    adapted for placement on or in the body is claimed.


CLS 600/420
TXT Using detectable material placed in body:

    Subject matter under subclass 410 wherein an externally observable
    substance is put into the living body to enhance image creation or analysis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    431+,   for a detectable material placed in the body for aiding in the
    medical evaluation of a living body while using other types of radiation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, particularly subclasses 302+ for a radiation tracer
    method.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, particularly
    subclasses 9.3+ for a magnetic resonance imaging contrast composition.


CLS 600/421
TXT Including any system component contacting (internal or external) or
    conforming to body or body part:

    Subject matter under subclass 410 consisting of a particular element or
    part of the image creating or analyzing system which is placed on, placed
    in, or configured to fit a portion of a patient's anatomy.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes both the combination and the
    subcombination of, for example, a magnet, coil, and catheter.

    (2)     Note.  Excluded from this subclass are fiducial markers.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    414,    for fiducial marker for MRI.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, particularly subclasses 318+
    for a magnetic resonance imaging or spectroscopy system component where no
    structure particularly adapted for contacting or conforming to a body part
    of a patient is claimed.

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, particularly subclasses 209+ for a magnet which can be used
    to provide an appropriate magnetic field in a magnetic resonance imaging or
    spectroscopy system.


CLS 600/422
TXT Coil:

    Subject matter under subclass 421 which is a device for receiving or
    transmitting an RF signal (i.e., gradient coil, RF coil).


CLS 600/423
TXT With means for inserting into a body:

    Subject matter under subclass 422 including a device for placement into a
    patient.


CLS 600/424
TXT With means for determining position of a device placed within a body:

    Subject matter under subclass 407 including an apparatus for locating the
    position of a device or foreign object that is inside a patient's body.


CLS 600/425
TXT With tomographic imaging obtained from electromagnetic wave:

    Subject matter for detecting radiation under subclass 407 including a
    special technique used to show in detail images of structures lying in a
    predetermined plane of tissue while eliminating or blurring detail in
    images of structures in other planes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    378,    X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclasses 21+ for
    tomography.


CLS 600/426
TXT Using fiducial marker:

    Subject matter under subclass 425 including a reference or indicator on or
    in a body.


CLS 600/427
TXT Combined with therapeutic or diagnostic device:

    Subject matter under subclass 425 in which the system also has a treatment
    apparatus.


CLS 600/428
TXT With triggering or gating device:

    Subject matter for detecting radiation under subclass 425 including an
    apparatus for initiating data acquisition using a physiological signal,
    EKG, heartbeat, etc.


CLS 600/429
TXT With stereotactic device:

    Subject matter under subclass 425 wherein the tomographic image is utilized
    in the application of magnetic resonance image for directing the tip of a
    medical instrument (e.g., a needle or an electrode) in three planes with
    the ability to reach or return to a predetermined point or region through a
    relatively small access opening.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    417,    for stereotactic devices for guiding electromagnetic radiation
    devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    606,    Surgery, subclass 130 for stereotactic devices for guiding a
    surgical instrument in three planes.


CLS 600/430
TXT With microwave carrier signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 407 wherein an electromagnetic wave of
    extremely high frequency (3 gigahertz, .1 to 10 cm) is transmitted into the
    body of a patient and detected to determine performance of a particular
    function of the body.


CLS 600/431
TXT Detectable material placed in body:

    Subject matter under subclass 407 wherein an externally detectable
    material, such as a radio-opaque or radioactive fluid, is placed in the
    body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 302+ for radiation tracer methods.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclass 1 for
    radioactive fluids, per se, usable for treating or diagnosing the body; and
    subclasses 4+ for X-ray contrast compositions.


CLS 600/432
TXT Piston-type ram forces material into body:

    Subject matter under subclass 431 including a piston-type ram (e.g., a
    syringe plunger) which injects the detectable material into the body.


CLS 600/433
TXT Using flexible catheter:

    Subject matter under subclass 431 wherein the detectable fluid is placed in
    the body through a flexible catheter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 280+ for catheters.


CLS 600/434
TXT Catheter guide means:

    Subject matter under subclass 433 including means for either (a) guiding
    the catheter while it is being inserted into the body or (b) guiding the
    catheter after it has been inserted within the body (e.g., means for
    bending the tip of the catheter after its insertion in the body so that the
    catheter will enter a selected portion of a branched passageway).


CLS 600/435
TXT Catheter structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 433 including structure of the catheter.


CLS 600/436
TXT Nuclear radiation (e.g., radioactive emission, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 407 wherein the radiation is energy or mass
    released from the nuclei of atoms.


CLS 600/437
TXT Ultrasonic:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 407 wherein the radiation applied to
    the body consists of a vibratory acoustic frequency or sound wave produced
    by a transducer which causes a disturbance in the pressure and density of a
    fluid, or in the elastic strain in a solid, and has a frequency higher than
    that detectable by the human ear.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    528,    for heart sound detection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 584 through 648 for mechanical
    wave testing apparatus and methods where no structure particularly adapted
    for placement on or in the body is claimed and where a patent discloses
    general utility in addition to surgical utility.


CLS 600/438
TXT Used as an indicator of another parameter (e.g., temperature, pressure,
    viscosity):

    Subject matter under subclass 437 wherein the ultrasonic means serves as an
    intermediate in detecting a physical variable which is nonanatomic in
    nature.


CLS 600/439
TXT With therapeutic device:

    Subject matter under subclass 437 wherein the ultrasonic radiation is used
    in conjunction with another device which treats the body therapeutically.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of therapeutic devices used in conjunction with the
    ultrasonic diagnostic radiating means in this subclass are tissue diathermy
    or fractionation, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    601,    Surgery:  Kinesitherapy, subclass 1 for ultrasonic devices used in
    kinesitherapy and subclass 328 for devices used to fractionate kidney
    stones in the body.


CLS 600/440
TXT Plural display mode systems:

    Subject matter under subclass 437 wherein the ultrasonic system produces
    signal outputs, which outputs are presented in plural display modes and at
    least one of said modes being an ultrasonic display.


CLS 600/441
TXT Having B-scan and Doppler:

    Subject matter under subclass 440 wherein the display mode includes an
    imaging display which receives ultrasonic echo information in the course of
    transducer scanning operation and the echo signals are utilized to modulate
    brightness of the display at each point scanned and processed to produce
    successive scan lines on the display; and a second separate transducer
    means usually oriented at an angle with respect to the perpendicular to the
    skin of the body, such that a beam emitted from said transducer has a
    component in the direction of flowing blood in blood vessels flowing
    beneath said skin, which blood flow representation is processed for
    display.


CLS 600/442
TXT Tissue attenuation or impedance measurement or compensation:

    Subject matter subclass 437 wherein the ultrasonic means measures tissue
    attenuation or the resistance of the body to the flow of the ultrasonic
    radiation and produces either a measurement of a body region or the said
    ultrasonic means is adjusted or compensated for attenuation effects.


CLS 600/443
TXT Anatomic image produced by reflective scanning:

    Subject matter under subclass 437 wherein the ultrasonic means scans across
    at least one dimension relative to the body examined and reflected energy
    from said scan means is used to produce a cross-sectional or contour image
    of the body anatomy.


CLS 600/444
TXT With mechanical and electronic scanning:

    Subject matter under subclass 443 wherein mechanical means move the
    ultrasonic scan means and additional electronic means are provided to shift
    the axes of the scan means.


CLS 600/445
TXT Mechanical scanning:

    Subject matter under subclass 443 wherein the ultrasonic scan means is
    moved by mechanical means to effect either simple or complex movement
    thereof relative to that portion of the body being scanned.


CLS 600/446
TXT Hand-held unit:

    Subject matter under subclass 445 wherein the ultrasonic scan means and its
    driving means are housed in a portable, manually held unit.


CLS 600/447
TXT Electronic array scanning:

    Subject matter under subclass 443 wherein the ultrasonic scan is affected
    by multielement ultrasonic scan or probe means capable of receiving
    multiple echoes from the ultrasonic wave transmitted to that portion of the
    body under diagnosis.


CLS 600/448
TXT Through-transmission (e.g., time-of-flight) imaging:

    Subject matter under subclass 437 wherein the ultrasonic scanning
    transducer means generates ultrasonic waves to insonify through a portion
    of the body under observation and an ultrasonic receiving transducer
    converts at least a portion of an acoustical image field into electrical
    signals, which signals are processed into an image.


CLS 600/449
TXT One-dimensional anatomic display or measurement:

    Subject matter under subclass 437 wherein the ultrasonic radiating means
    produces a display or a measurement of the portion of the body in a single
    dimension (e.g., thickness, etc.).


CLS 600/450
TXT Cardiographic:

    Subject matter under subclass 449 wherein the single dimension display or
    measurement is of the heart.


CLS 600/451
TXT Echoencephalography:

    Subject matter under subclass 449 wherein the single dimension display or
    measurement is of the interior portion of a skull, or a portion thereof, of
    the subject body.


CLS 600/452
TXT Ophthalmic:

    Subject matter under subclass 449 wherein the single dimension display or
    measurement is of the interior portion of the eye of the subject body.


CLS 600/453
TXT Doppler effect (e.g., fetal HR monitoring):

    Subject matter under subclass 437 wherein the ultrasonic wave is varied in
    frequency or shifted as a result of relative motion between the wave source
    and moving internal organs or structures in the body to which the wave is
    applied.


CLS 600/454
TXT Blood flow studies:

    Subject matter under subclass 453 wherein the Doppler shift is utilized to
    analyze blood flow rate or volume.


CLS 600/455
TXT Pulse Doppler:

    Subject matter under subclass 454 wherein the ultrasonic wave emitted from
    the scanning means is characterized by a momentary fluctuation in an
    electrical quantity, as in voltage or current, applied to the scanning
    means.


CLS 600/456
TXT With volumetric measurement:

    Subject matter under subclass 455 wherein a quantitative determination of
    blood flow volume is detected.


CLS 600/457
TXT CW Doppler:

    Subject matter under subclass 454 wherein the ultrasonic wave is emitted
    from the scanning means in a continuous mode.


CLS 600/458
TXT Contrast enhancement:

    Subject matter under subclass 437 wherein means are provided to intensify
    reflectivity of the ultrasonic wave within that portion of the body under
    diagnosis by the use of marking devices, implantable means, or by
    structural adaptations on instruments used therewith.


CLS 600/459
TXT Structure of transducer or probe assembly:

    Subject matter under subclass 437 wherein particular significance is
    attributed to the structural features of the ultrasonic sound wave
    generating means.


CLS 600/461
TXT Associated with puncturing instrument:

    Subject matter under subclass 459 wherein the ultrasonic sound wave
    generating means has a medical needle associated therewith which is guided
    by said wave generating means to pierce that portion of the body under
    diagnosis.


CLS 600/462
TXT Probe placed in vascular system or body orifice:

    Subject matter under subclass 461 wherein the ultrasonic wave generating
    means is mounted upon or inserted into a blunt tipped instrument which is
    adapted for insertion into a circulatory system or a natural body opening.


CLS 600/463
TXT With acoustical or display imaging:

    Subject matter under subclass 461 wherein the ultrasonic system in the
    probe or associated means produces an output signal, which signals are
    presented in a sound made or a visual made as an image.


CLS 600/464
TXT Having puncturing means thereon:

    Subject matter under subclass 461 wherein the probe has additional means
    thereon to pierce or perforate a particular body structure in the
    circulatory system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    471,    for cutters on a catheter.


CLS 600/465
TXT Blood flow measurement:

    Subject matter under subclass 461 wherein means are provided to quantify or
    ascertain blood in the circulatory system.


CLS 600/466
TXT Catheter:

    Subject matter under subclass 461 wherein the probe inserted into the body
    is a hollow, usually flexible, tube.


CLS 600/467
TXT Intravascular:

    Subject matter under subclass 466 wherein the catheter is inserted into the
    circulatory system of the body.


CLS 600/468
TXT With blood flow measurement or detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 467 wherein the catheter is used to quantify
    or ascertain blood in the circulatory system.


CLS 600/469
TXT Detecting emboli:

    Subject matter under subclass 468 wherein the catheter is used to determine
    the presence of an occlusion in a portion of the circulatory system.


CLS 600/470
TXT By inflatable balloon:

    Subject matter under subclass 467 wherein the intravascular catheter is a
    flexible material held on the catheter which is capable of expansion by the
    admission of a gas thereto.


CLS 600/471
TXT Tool (e.g., ablation, abrasion, cutting):

    Subject matter under subclass 466 wherein the catheter carries or admits to
    the passage a means which removes an obstruction by either grinding,
    shearing, or other surgical removal from the circulatory system.


CLS 600/472
TXT With beam directing or shaping means in the wave path (e.g., lens,
    reflector):

    Subject matter under subclass 459 wherein the transducer or probe assembly
    has additional means carried thereon which functions to direct or shape a
    beam generated by the wave generating means.


CLS 600/473
TXT Infrared radiation:

    Subject matter under subclass 407 wherein the radiation is electromagnetic
    energy having wave lengths longer than those of visible light.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 330+ for infrared to visible imaging.


CLS 600/474
TXT Temperature detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 473 including a device to measure the amount
    of heat of the tissue or a body part.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is a meter to measure the exact
    temperature or the change in temperature of a tissue sample.


CLS 600/475
TXT With comparison means (e.g., ratio of or comparison to a standard):

    Subject matter under subclass 473 including a device to contrast a measured
    parameter to a known parameter.


CLS 600/476
TXT Visible light radiation:

    Subject matter for detecting radiation under subclass 407 wherein the
    electromagnetic energy is in the range detectable by the human eye.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    162,    for body exploring devices provided with illuminating means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 317.1+ for copying with infrared or
    thermal pattern recording, subclass 337 for invisible radiant energy
    responsive electric signalling with heating of luminophors, and subclasses
    345+ for plural beam/ detector pairs.


CLS 600/477
TXT With comparison means (e.g., ratio of or comparison to a standard):

    Visible light radiation under subclass 476 including a device to examine
    part of the electromagnetic spectrum.


CLS 600/478
TXT Light conducting fiber inserted into a body:

    Visible light radiation under subclass 476 in which a clear glass or
    plastic filament guides electromagnetic radiation having a wavelength of
    about 3900 to 7500 angstrom units in vivo.


CLS 600/479
TXT Cardiovascular testing:

    Subject matter under subclass 476 for evaluating the condition of a heart
    or blood vessels.


CLS 600/480
TXT Pressure in blood vessel:

    Subject matter under subclass 479 for testing pressure in an artery, via a
    capillary.


CLS 600/481
TXT Cardiovascular:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 for evaluating a condition of an artery,
    vein, or capillary.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 388+ for pressure gauges, per se.

    346,    Recorders, subclass 33 for recorders, per se.


CLS 600/482
TXT Measuring resistance of capillary blood vessels to hemorrhage:

    Subject matter under subclass 481 for applying force against the body to
    determine the resistance of capillary blood vessels to hemorrhage.


CLS 600/483
TXT Simultaneously detecting cardiovascular condition and diverse body
    condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 481 for simultaneously testing a
    cardiovascular condition and a different type of body condition.


CLS 600/484
TXT Detecting respiratory condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 483 including means for evaluating a
    condition pertaining to or affecting respiration.


CLS 600/485
TXT Measuring pressure in heart or blood vessel:

    Subject matter under subclass 481 for measuring pressure in an artery
    (usually an artery in the upper arm) or in the organ responsible for
    circulation of blood in a body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 388+ for pressure gauges, per se.

    346,    Recorders, subclass 33 for recorders.


CLS 600/486
TXT Testing means inserted in body:

    Subject matter under subclass 485 wherein a testing means is placed in the
    body, usually in a blood vessel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 118+ for indicating or regulating pressure in
    an injecting device.


CLS 600/487
TXT Pressure indicator includes liquid column:

    Subject matter under subclass 486 wherein a pressure indicator including a
    column of fluid is connected to the testing means (e.g., a tube) placed in
    a blood vessel.


CLS 600/488
TXT Pressure transducer structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 486 including structure of a
    pressure-responsive device which receives energy from one source and
    retransmits it on a different form when placed on the body.

    (1)     Note.  A patent is classified as an original in this subclass only
    if it includes the recital of structural details of a pressure-responsive
    transducer as part of the claimed subject matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 388+ for fluid pressure gauges,
    per se.


CLS 600/489
TXT Ophthalmodynamometer:

    Subject matter under subclass 485 including means for applying pressure
    against the eye to close the retinal artery.

    (1)     Note. As is well known, pressure applied to the surface of the eye
    affects pulsation of the retinal artery and can be correlated to pressure
    within the artery.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclasses
    6+ for ophthalmoscopes and retinoscopes.


CLS 600/490
TXT Force applied against skin to close blood vessel:

    Subject matter under subclass 485 wherein pressure is applied against skin
    overlying a blood vessel to close the latter.

    (1)     Note. As is well known, the pressure which must be applied to skin
    overlying an artery to stop blood flow (and the occurrence of Korotkoff
    sounds associated therewith) is recorded as the systolic pressure within
    the artery.


CLS 600/491
TXT Hand-supported occluder:

    Subject matter under subclass 490 having manually supported means to apply
    pressure.


CLS 600/492
TXT Tester having plural occluders, or single occluder and separate pressurized
    pulse sensing cuff or cushion:

    Subject matter under subclass 490 wherein (a) two separate means are used
    to apply force against skin overlying a blood vessel to close the latter or
    (b) a single means for applying such force is combined with a separate
    inflatable limb-encircling cuff or body-contacting cushion, the latter
    sensing pulsating flow within a blood vessel.


CLS 600/493
TXT Electric signal generated by sensing means responsive to pulse or Korotkoff
    sounds:

    Subject matter under subclass 490 wherein a detecting means generates an
    electric signal in response to (a) pulsating flow of blood in the blood
    vessel or (b) Korotkoff sounds associated with such flow.

    (1)     Note.  An electric signal of the type included in this subclass is
    usable for various purposes (e.g., to control an indicator, a recorder, or
    a means for pressurizing an occluding cuff).


CLS 600/494
TXT Pulse-induced pressure fluctuation in occluder generates electric signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 493 wherein the electric signal is generated
    in response to pulse-induced pressure variation within a force applying
    means for closing a blood vessel.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus included in this subclass generally comprises a
    transducer capable of sensing the pressure increase which occurs within an
    inflatable arm band when flow of blood through an arm battery causes
    movement of skin overlying the artery and underlying the arm band.


CLS 600/495
TXT Pressure in inflatable occluder automatically raised above systolic
    pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 493 wherein pressure applied to an expandable
    means closes a blood vessel (e.g., an elastic, arm-encircling cuff),
    raising the systolic pressure in the blood-vessel without control by an
    operator.

    (1)     Note.  In contrast with apparatus included in this subclass, a
    conventional sphygmomanometer has a bulb-type pump actuated by an operator
    to increase pressure in an inflatable arm band until Korotkoff sounds
    cannot be heard by means of a stethoscope.  Apparatus included in this
    subclass generally includes Korotkoff sounds which cannot be heard by means
    of a stethoscope.  Apparatus included in this subclass generally includes a
    Korotkoff sound or pulse detector which controls a means for pressurizing
    an inflatable arm band.


CLS 600/496
TXT Repeating pressurization cycle:

    Subject matter under subclass 495 wherein pressure in the inflatable means
    is successively raised above and reduced below systolic pressure.

    (1)     Note.  Apparatus included in this subclass is generally used to
    monitor a patient's blood pressure at regular intervals.


CLS 600/497
TXT Pressure indicator includes liquid column:

    Subject matter under subclass 490 wherein a pressure indicator including a
    column of liquid is connected to a means for applying force against skin
    overlying a blood vessel (e.g., a liquid column manometer connected to a
    pneumatic arm-constricting cuff to measure pressure therein).


CLS 600/498
TXT Valve structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 490 including structure of a device for
    controlling the force of a fluid used in the apparatus.

    (1)     Note.  A patent is classified as an original in this subclass only
    if it includes the recital of structural details of a valve as part of the
    claimed subject matter.


CLS 600/499
TXT Occluder structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 490 including structure of the
    pressure-applying means for closing a blood vessel.

    (1)     Note.  A patent is classified as an original in this subclass only
    if it includes the recital of structural details of a blood vessel occluder
    as part of the claimed subject matter.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    606,    Surgery, subclass 203 for tourniquet structure, per se.


CLS 600/500
TXT Detecting blood vessel pulsation:

    Subject matter under subclass 481 for detecting pulsation of a blood vessel
    induced by heartbeat.


CLS 600/501
TXT Waveform graph-type pulse recorder:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 including means for recording blood
    vessel pulsation as a waveform graph.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, subclasses 111+ for writing-type recorders.


CLS 600/502
TXT Pulse indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 including means for indicating the
    throbbing of the blood vessel (e.g., an alarm which operates when pulse
    rate reaches a certain level, a digital readout, or a dial and pointer
    indicator).


CLS 600/503
TXT Entire testing assembly supported on wrist:

    Subject matter under subclass 502 wherein the entire assembly for testing
    blood vessel pulsation (i.e., the pulsation sensing means and the indicator
    operated thereby) is supported on that part of the lower part of a forearm
    joining a hand to the body.


CLS 600/504
TXT Measuring blood flow in body portion other than heart:

    Subject matter under subclass 481 for measuring the flow of blood in any
    part of the body except the primary organ of blood circulation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 861+ for volume and flow rate
    meters.


CLS 600/505
TXT Sensing means inserted in blood vessel:

    Subject matter under subclass 504 wherein a flow sensing means is placed in
    an artery, vein, or capillary.


CLS 600/506
TXT By detecting electrical impedance of body portion:

    Subject matter under subclass 504 including means for detecting the
    resistance of a body part to flow of electric current therethrough, this
    resistance being correlated to the amount of blood flowing through said
    part.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclasses 600+ for impedance
    measuring not specifically for medical diagnosis.


CLS 600/507
TXT By detecting volume of body portion:

    Subject matter under subclass 504 including means for detecting the
    capacity or amount of a body part, this capacity or amount being correlated
    to the amount of blood flowing through said part.


CLS 600/508
TXT Heart:

    Subject matter under subclass 481 for evaluating a heart condition.


CLS 600/509
TXT Detecting heartbeat electric signal:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 508 for detecting changes in
    electrical potential of the heart during its beat.


CLS 600/510
TXT Testing artificially regulated or assisted heart:

    Subject matter under subclass 509 wherein the heart is assisted or
    regulated by artificial means (e.g., a heart pacer) and a diagnostic test
    is included which obtains information for use by the diagnostician.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses 1+
    for methods and apparatus for pacing the heart which may include diagnosis
    of the heart incident to the operation or control of the pacer.


CLS 600/511
TXT Fetal heartbeat:

    Subject matter under subclass 509 for detecting the pulsation of a fetal
    heart.


CLS 600/512
TXT Orthogonal heartbeat electric signals combined to form vector signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 509 wherein electric signals detected in
    orthogonal directions relative to the body are combined to form a signal
    having both magnitude and direction.


CLS 600/513
TXT Detecting heartbeat electric signal and diverse cardiovascular
    characteristic:

    Subject matter under subclass 509 for detecting the heartbeat electric
    signal and a different characteristic of the cardiovascular system (e.g.,
    heart sound).


CLS 600/514
TXT Sound generated by successive heartbeat electric signals to represent heart
    action:

    Subject matter under subclass 509 including means for generating sound in
    response to successive heartbeat electric signals, a characteristic of the
    sound (e.g., volume, tone, repetition rate) representing the nature of the
    heartbeat (e.g., strong, weak, fast).


CLS 600/515
TXT Detecting arrhythmia:

    Subject matter under subclass 509 for detecting a disturbance in the rhythm
    of the heart electric signal.

    (1)     Note.  The shape of a normal heartbeat electric signal is
    illustrated below, segments of the waveform being designated by the letters
    which are used by cardiologists for their identification.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity:  Measuring and Testing, subclasses 76.12+ for complex
    wave analyzing apparatus, per se.


CLS 600/516
TXT Variation in duration of segment of PQRST signal waveform (e.g., QRS
    complex, etc.) detected:

    Subject matter under subclass 515 including means for detecting a variation
    in the time which lapses during the generation of a particular portion of
    the PQRST waveform representing the heartbeat electric signal.


CLS 600/517
TXT Vertical variation of PQRST signal waveform (e.g., amplitude of QRS
    complex, etc.) detected:

    Subject matter under subclass 515 including means for detecting a variation
    in the height of a particular portion of the PQRST waveform which
    represents the heartbeat electric signal, height being measured from the
    base line between positive and negative portions of the waveform.


CLS 600/518
TXT Tachycardia or fibrillation detected:

    Subject matter under subclass 515 including means for detecting (a) an
    abnormal increase in repetition rate of the heartbeat electric signal which
    is not a result of increased exertion of the body (tachycardia) or (b) a
    fast and erratic heartbeat electric signal which results in cessation of
    the pumping action of the heart (fibrillation).


CLS 600/519
TXT Detecting signal repetition rate:

    Subject matter under subclass 509 for detecting the repeat rate of the
    heartbeat electric signal.


CLS 600/520
TXT Detecting means associated with exercise machine:

    Subject matter under subclass 519 wherein the signal detecting means is
    associated with a device for exercising the body.


CLS 600/521
TXT Detecting R portion of signal waveform:

    Subject matter under subclass 509 including means for detecting the R
    portion of the heartbeat electric signal waveform.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    515,    for R-wave detection circuitry in combination with circuitry for
    analyzing the heartbeat signal for an arrhythmia.


CLS 600/522
TXT Switching means for activating different monitoring systems, signal
    displays, or signal recorders:

    Subject matter under subclass 509 including means for activating, by either
    manually operated or automatic switches, different patient monitoring
    systems, signal displays, or signal recorders.


CLS 600/523
TXT Signal display or recording:

    Subject matter under subclass 509 for indicating or registering the
    heartbeat electric signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, subclass 33 for recorders.


CLS 600/524
TXT Magnetic recording:

    Subject matter under subclass 523 wherein a record representative of a
    heartbeat electric signal is stored in a magnetic storage device (e.g., a
    magnetic tape or drum).


CLS 600/525
TXT Cathode-ray tube used for display or included in recording means:

    Subject matter under subclass 523 including a cathode-ray tube which is
    used for either displaying the heartbeat electric signal or recording it
    (e.g., a cathode-ray tube combined with a camera).


CLS 600/526
TXT Blood output per beat or time interval:

    Subject matter under subclass 508 for measuring the amount of blood flowing
    through the heart during a single heartbeat or a particular time interval.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 861+ for volume and flow rate
    meters.


CLS 600/527
TXT Detecting heartbeat by sensing movement of oscillatable body-supporting
    means:

    Subject matter under subclass 508 wherein heartbeat is detected by sensing
    the motion which it imparts to a freely oscillatable means supporting the
    body.


CLS 600/528
TXT Detecting heart sound:

    Subject matter under subclass 508 for detecting vibrations emanating from
    the heart.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    181,    Acoustics, subclass 131 for stethoscopes.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclass 67
    for electric stethoscopes.


CLS 600/529
TXT Respiratory:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 for evaluating a condition.


CLS 600/530
TXT Halitosis detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 529 for detecting fetid breath.


CLS 600/531
TXT Measuring metabolic rate by breath test:

    Subject matter under subclass 529 for measuring rate of metabolism by means
    of a breath test.

    (1)     Note.  Included here as a "breath" type test of a metabolic rate is
    any procedure or apparatus which measures the rate of oxygen consumption of
    a living body (e.g., the body of an insect).


CLS 600/532
TXT Qualitative or quantitative analysis of breath component:

    Subject matter under subclass 529 wherein the identity or amount of a
    particular component of the breath is determined.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 23.2+ for gas analysis processes
    and apparatus not involving a chemical reaction.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 99 for means responsive to incapacity
    (e.g., inebriation) of a vehicle operator.

    436,    Chemistry: Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclass 132 for
    ethanol tests.


CLS 600/533
TXT Measuring respiratory flow impedance or lung elasticity:

    Subject matter under subclass 529 for measuring (a) the impedance of the
    respiratory system to gas flow or (b) lung elasticity.


CLS 600/534
TXT Detecting body movement attending breathing:

    Subject matter under subclass 529 for detecting movement of the body which
    occurs during respiration.


CLS 600/535
TXT Capacitor-type transducer:

    Subject matter under subclass 534 using a transducer of the capacitor type
    to detect body movement.

    (1)     Note.  Included here are the following: (a) apparatus in which the
    body of a test subject rests on and, as a result of motion attending
    breathing, moves a sheet constituting one plate of a capacitor; (b)
    apparatus in which the body surface of a test subject forms one plate of a
    capacitor; and (c) apparatus in which movement of a test subject varies
    fluid pressure applied to one plate of a capacitor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    361,    Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 271+ for
    capacitors, per se.


CLS 600/536
TXT Detector responsive to movement induced variation in impedance of body to
    electric current:

    Subject matter under subclass 534 using a detector responsive to the
    variation in impedance of the body to flow of an electrical current which
    results from movement of the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclasses 600+ for impedance
    measuring not specifically for medical diagnosis.


CLS 600/537
TXT Thermistor-type transducer generating electric signal in response to breath
    flow:

    Subject matter under subclass 529 wherein an electric signal is generated
    by breath flow past a transducer consisting of a resistor made of a
    material which has a resistance which varies sharply with a change in
    temperature.


CLS 600/538
TXT Measuring breath flow or lung capacity:

    Subject matter under subclass 529 for measuring the amount of gas which (a)
    flows along the respiratory tract during breathing or (b) is held by the
    lungs.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, particularly subclasses 512+ for devices
    for measuring chest circumference and incidentally determining chest
    expansion.


    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 861+ for volume or flow rate
    meters.


    482,    Exercise Devices, particularly subclass 13 for an exercise device
    for improving the respiratory function of a user but which does not include
    a quantitative indicator of breath flow or lung capacity and which is not
    disclosed as a Class 128 diagnostic device.


CLS 600/539
TXT Element rotated by breath flow:

    Subject matter under subclass 538 wherein breath flow is measured by means
    of a rotatable element against which breath is impinged.


CLS 600/540
TXT Breath exhaled into or inhaled from expansible chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 538 wherein breath flow or lung capacity is
    measured by breathing gas into or from an expansible chamber.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 34+ for a bellows-type
    expansible chamber.


CLS 600/541
TXT Bellows or expansible bag:

    Subject matter under subclass 540 wherein the expansible chamber is a
    bellows or expansible bag.


CLS 600/542
TXT Liquid surface forms portion of chamber boundary:

    Subject matter under subclass 540 wherein a portion of the boundary of the
    expansible chamber is defined by a liquid surface, as in an expansible
    chamber formed by an inverted cup having its side wall immersed in a
    liquid.


CLS 600/543
TXT Breath collection:

    Subject matter under subclass 529 for collecting exhaled gas.


CLS 600/544
TXT Detecting brain electric signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 for detecting changes in electrical
    potential (electric signal) of the brain.


CLS 600/545
TXT With feedback of signal to patient:

    Subject matter under subclass 544 wherein the detected signal, or an output
    responsive thereto, is presented to the patient.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are means, referred to in the art
    as "biofeedback" apparatus, for enabling a patient to perceive, for
    example, his or her level or state of brain activity.


CLS 600/546
TXT Detecting muscle electric signal:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 for detecting changes in electrical
    potential (electric signal) of a muscle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    509+,   for detecting electric signals of the heart muscle.


CLS 600/547
TXT Measuring electrical impedance or conductance of body portion:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 for measuring (a) the impedance of any
    part of the body to flow of electric current therethrough or (b) the
    readiness with which any part of the body transmits an electric current.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    506,    for methods and apparatus for measuring blood flow by measuring
    body electrical impedance.

    536,    for methods and apparatus for detecting breathing by measuring body
    electrical impedance.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    324,    Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclasses 600+ for impedance
    measuring not specifically for medical diagnosis.


CLS 600/548
TXT Locating acupuncture points:

    Subject matter under subclass 547 for locating the points on the body where
    acupuncture procedures are performed.


CLS 600/549
TXT Temperature detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 for evaluating a body condition by
    detecting the temperature of either an exterior or interior portion of the
    body.

    (1)     Note.  A patent is classified as an original in this subclass only
    if it discloses a temperature detecting means or method specifically
    adapted for use on or in the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    473,    for methods and apparatus for detecting infrared radiation
    emanating from the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 330+ for infrared-to-visible imaging.

    374,    Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclasses 100+ for temperature
    measuring means or methods having general utility, including conventional
    clinical thermometers which because of their structure can also be used for
    temperature measurement in general.


CLS 600/550
TXT Detecting foreign object or calculus by probing:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 including means insertable in the body
    for locating a foreign object such as a bullet or gallstone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    420,    for electronic apparatus for detecting material in the body.


CLS 600/551
TXT Monitoring fertility cycle:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 for monitoring the recurring female
    fertility cycle of a placental mammal.


CLS 600/552
TXT Sensitivity to vibration:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 for detecting response of the body to a
    vibratory force applied thereto.


CLS 600/553
TXT Sensitivity to impact:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 for detecting response of the body when
    struck by an object.


CLS 600/554
TXT Sensitivity to electric stimulus:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein the body is contacted by a source
    of electrical potential to test its sensitivity thereto.


CLS 600/555
TXT Sensitivity to thermal stimulus:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein the body is subjected to heat or
    cold to test its sensitivity thereto.


CLS 600/556
TXT Sensitivity of skin to allergens or radiation:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 for evaluating the sensitivity of the
    skin to a substance or radiation which can produce a different reaction in
    different subjects.


CLS 600/557
TXT Touch or pain response of skin:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 for evaluating (a) the neurological sense
    of touch by contacting an object with the body or (b) the sensitivity of
    the skin to pain, such as is induced by pressing a needle against the skin.


CLS 600/558
TXT Eye or testing by visual stimulus:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 for evaluating a physical characteristic
    of the visual system or testing a reaction to visual stimulus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    398,    for apparatus for determining pressure in an eyeball.

    544+,   for apparatus which detects an electric signal of the brain
    resulting from visual stimulus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    351,    Optics: Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclasses 6+
    for ophthalmoscopes and retinoscopes.


CLS 600/559
TXT Ear or testing by auditory stimulus:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 for evaluating a physical characteristic
    of the auditory or equilibrium control system or testing a reaction to
    sound stimulus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    544+,   for apparatus which detects an electric signal of the brain
    resulting from sound stimulus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 585 for audiometers for testing
    hearing.


CLS 600/560
TXT Injecting gas into body canal or cavity:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 for forcing gas into a canal or cavity of
    the body (e.g., injecting air into the lower intestinal tract to determine
    whether it has a constriction in the wall thereof).


CLS 600/561
TXT Measuring fluid pressure in body:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 for measuring fluid pressure in a part of
    the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    485+,   for methods and apparatus for measuring pressure in the heart or a
    blood vessel.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 700+ for pressure gauges, per se.


    346,    Recorders, subclass 33 for recorders.


CLS 600/562
TXT Sampling nonliquid body material (e.g., bone, muscle tissue, epithelial
    cells, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 300 for removing material other than a liquid
    from the body for examination.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry: Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 4+ for
    sampling with fermentation means (e.g., culture medium).

    935,    Genetic Engineering: Recombinant DNA Technology, Hybrid or Fused
    Cell Technology, and Related Manipulations of Nucleic Acids, for a search
    collection for processes of altering the genetic structure of
    micro-organisms; genes and methods of modifying genes and their expression;
    vectors and methods of modifying vectors; methods of introducing DNA into a
    cell; micro-organisms, per se, which have had their genetic sequence
    altered by recombinant DNA techniques or by cell fusion or by uptake of
    DNA; testing; separation techniques; apparatus; methods of use of vectors
    or of the genetically engineered micro-organisms; and methods of gene
    therapy or genetic modification of living organisms.


CLS 600/563
TXT Irrigation:

    Subject matter under subclass 562 wherein a liquid is applied to the body
    to wash material therefrom.


CLS 600/564
TXT Cutting:

    Subject matter under subclass 562 wherein a cutting edge is forced into
    body structure to remove material therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  Scrapers which are moved across a surface of the body and
    are not intended to cut into body tissue are not classified in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    570,    for scrapers which are moved across a surface of the body to remove
    material therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 165+ for cutting implements.

    83,     Cutting, subclasses 13+ for cutting methods and subclasses 861+ for
    apparatus.

    606,    Surgery, subclasses 167+ for various cutting instruments.


CLS 600/565
TXT Applying suction to sample:

    Subject matter under subclass 564 wherein suction is applied to a portion
    of the body to (a) draw it into a convenient position for cutting or (b)
    remove it from the cutting site for retrieval.


CLS 600/566
TXT Body pierced by tubular cutter or rod-type punch:

    Subject matter under subclass 565 wherein the body is pierced either by a
    tubular cutting means or by a separate means such as a pointed rod.


CLS 600/567
TXT Body pierced by tubular cutter or rod-type punch:

    Subject matter under subclass 564 wherein the body is pierced either by a
    tubular cutting means or by a separate means such as a pointed rod.


CLS 600/568
TXT Motorized:

    Subject matter under subclass 564 wherein the cutting edge is moved by a
    motor.


CLS 600/569
TXT Brushing:

    Subject matter under subclass 562 wherein bristles of a brush are used to
    remove the material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 1+ for swabs used on the body.


CLS 600/570
TXT Scraping with edged instrument:

    Subject matter under subclass 562 wherein an edged instrument is moved
    across a surface of the body to remove material therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 169+ for scrapers having general utility.


CLS 600/571
TXT Applying suction to sample:

    Subject matter under subclass 570 wherein suction is applied to the
    material, usually to draw it to a retrieval site.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    565,    for methods and apparatus wherein suction is applied to a sample
    cut from the body.


CLS 600/572
TXT Wiping or dabbing:

    Subject matter under subclass 562 wherein a wiping implement (e.g., a
    smooth paddle, cloth, sponge, or cotton-tipped swab) is moved across, or
    touched to, a surface to remove material therefrom.


CLS 600/573
TXT Liquid collection:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 for collecting a liquid from the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 144.1+ for a
    urinal which is not disclosed for use in collecting a specimen for a
    diagnostic purpose.


    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 364+ for receptacles for
    holding syringes for drawing liquid from the body.

    435,    Chemistry: Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 4+ for
    liquid collection with fermentation.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 317+ for collecting waste fluid from the body
    for nonsampling purposes.

    935,    Genetic Engineering: Recombinant DNA Technology, Hybrid or Fused
    Cell Technology, and Related Manipulations of Nucleic Acids, for a search
    collection for processes of altering the genetic structure of
    micro-organisms; genes and methods of modifying genes and their expression;
    vectors and methods of modifying vectors; methods of introducing DNA into a
    cell; micro-organisms, per se, which have had their genetic sequence
    altered by recombinant DNA techniques or by cell fusion or by uptake of
    DNA; testing; separation techniques; apparatus; methods of use of vectors
    or of the genetically engineered micro-organisms; and methods of gene
    therapy or genetic modification of living organisms.


CLS 600/574
TXT Means specifically structured for collecting urine of human female:


    Subject matter under subclass 573 including means specifically formed for
    collecting urine of a human female.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, particularly subclasses
    144.1+ for a urinal which is intended for the convenience of the user and
    not disclosed for collecting a specimen for a diagnostic purpose nor
    attached to or worn on the body. A urinal which contacts, conforms to, or
    penetrates the body (e.g., a device permitting a female to urinate while
    standing up) is included, provided it is for the convenience of the user.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 327+ for a device for collecting a bodily
    discharge and which is (a) attached to or worn on the body for any reason,
    including for the convenience of the user; or (b) used to receive the
    urinary discharge from a patient suffering from a urinary control ailment
    (e.g., incontinence). An unclaimed article of clothing (e.g., underpants)
    may be used to attach the device to the body of the user. See subclass 329,
    in particular, for a device structured for collecting urine from a human
    female.


CLS 600/575
TXT Plural collection means (e.g., plural reservoirs or plural absorbent pads,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 573 including plural means for collecting
    liquid.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 358+ for absorbent pads.


CLS 600/576
TXT Manually supported collector with rigid intake tube (e.g., a hollow needle,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 573 using a collector supported by hand and
    provided with a rigid intake tube.


CLS 600/577
TXT Penetrable seal in liquid flow path to collection reservoir:

    Subject matter under subclass 576 wherein a penetrable seal is disposed in
    the flow path of liquid to a collection reservoir.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 201+ for penetrable seal in liquid flow path.


CLS 600/578
TXT Mechanical means for drawing liquid into collection reservoir:

    Subject matter under subclass 576 including a mechanical means (e.g., a
    plunger or bulb-type pump) for drawing liquid into a collection reservoir.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 187+ for piston and squeeze bulb-type syringe.


CLS 600/579
TXT Means for controlling liquid flow:

    Subject matter under subclass 576 including a valve between the intake tube
    and a collection reservoir.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 236+ for syringe bulb valve structure.


CLS 600/580
TXT Wall of collection reservoir formed of flexible material:

    Subject matter under subclass 573 including a collection reservoir having a
    wall formed of flexible material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 327+ for flexible wall or bag-type syringes.


CLS 600/581
TXT Flexible collection tube inserted in body:

    Subject matter under subclass 573 wherein a flexible tube is inserted in
    the body to collect liquid.


CLS 600/582
TXT Collection receptacle placed within body:

    Subject matter under subclass 573 wherein a receptacle is inserted or
    ingested within the body to collect liquid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 328+ for fluid collectors placed in the body.


CLS 600/583
TXT Collector combined with lancet:

    Subject matter under subclass 573 wherein a collector is combined with a
    sharp edge or point for piercing the skin to draw blood.


CLS 600/584
TXT Indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 573 including means for providing information
    about the collected liquid or collection means therefor (e.g., a volume
    indicator).


    SEARCH CLASS:

    604,    Surgery, subclass 318 for container with condition indicator.


CLS 600/585
TXT Flexible catheter guide:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 300 using a flexible means for guiding
    a catheter during its insertion into a body passage (e.g., a tube which can
    be made to assume different shapes after it has been inserted into the body
    and which receives a catheter tube).


CLS 600/586
TXT Detecting sound generated within body:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 for detecting a sound generated within
    the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    528,    for methods and apparatus for detecting heart sound.


CLS 600/587
TXT Measuring anatomical characteristic or force applied to or exerted by body:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 for measuring an anatomical
    characteristic (e.g., the size, shape, or motility of a body part) or the
    amount of force applied to or exerted by a portion of the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 511+ for anatomical gauges.


CLS 600/588
TXT Associated with parturition:

    Subject matter under subclass 587 for making a measurement relating to
    birth (e.g., means for measuring the magnitude of muscular contractions in
    the abdominal wall during labor).


CLS 600/589
TXT Gum:

    Subject matter under subclass 587 for making a measurement relating to
    support tissue for teeth.


CLS 600/590
TXT Mouth, tongue, or jaw:

    Subject matter under subclass 587 for making a measurement relating to the
    mouth, tongue, or jaw.


CLS 600/591
TXT Vagina or uterus:

    Subject matter under subclass 587 for making a measurement relating to the
    natural body orifice leading to the organ of gestation in a female or the
    organ of gestation.


CLS 600/592
TXT Foot:

    Subject matter under subclass 587 for making a measurement relating to a
    foot characteristic.


CLS 600/593
TXT Esophagus, stomach, or lower alimentary canal:

    Subject matter under subclass 587 for making a measurement of a portion of
    the body for the passage of food from a pharynx to an organ of digestion or
    the lower portion of the organ of digestion or absorption of the body.


CLS 600/594
TXT Spine:

    Subject matter under subclass 587 for making a measurement relating to the
    spine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    549,    for methods and apparatus for detecting an abnormality in the spine
    by use of temperature measuring means.


CLS 600/595
TXT Body movement (e.g., head or hand tremor, motility of limb, etc.):


    Subject matter under subclass 587 for measuring movement of either the
    entire body or a portion thereof.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 600/920
TXT METHOD OF MAKING ENDOSCOPES:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a collection of cross
    reference patents for the process of manufacturing or assembling the
    components of an endoscope.


CLS 600/921
TXT MANIPULATING IMAGE CHARACTERISTICS:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising a collection of cross
    reference patents for the manipulating of endoscope images characteristics.


CLS 601/
TTL SURGERY:  KINESITHERAPY

CLS 601/1
TXT KINESITHERAPY:

    Subject matter under the class definition designed to act upon the body by
    moving, vibrating, or massaging a portion of the body to produce a
    therapeutic effect and in which the movement of the patient is passive.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 105+ for
    combined cleaning and massage tools.

    84,     Music, subclasses 465+ for exercising devices for
    musical-instrument players.

    482,    Exercise Devices, for an exercise device requiring device
    participation of the user.

    606,    Surgery, subclass 2.5 for subject matter relating to removal of
    calculus wherein the calculus is fractured by use of light energy,
    subclasses 127+ for concretion removal means inserted into the body of a
    patient, and particularly subclass 128 for fragmenting means which may
    involve shock wave lithotripsy.


CLS 601/2
TXT Ultrasonic:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 for coupling acoustic vibrations at a very
    high frequency, which are above the range audible to the human ear, into
    living tissue for therapeutic purposes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 407+ for means used in detecting magnetic,
    nuclear, or ultrasonic radiation and subclass 437 for ultrasonic applied to
    the body.  See also 439 for ultrasonic devices having therapeutic means.


CLS 601/3
TXT Hyperthermia:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the ultrasonic device generates
    heat which is directed to a specific portion of the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    602,    Surgery:  Splint, Brace, or Bandage, subclasses 2+ for light,
    thermal, or electrical applicators.

    606,    Surgery, subclasses 27+ for heat applying instruments.


CLS 601/4
TXT Contact-free comminution of concretion:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 utilizing an extracorporal instrument for
    destroying concretions in bodies of living tissue using shock waves
    generated by arc discharge.

    (1)     Note.  Only patents directed to the application of an external
    force are classifiable in this subclass.  For instruments which actually
    invade the body see the search class note which follows to Class 606.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    606,    Surgery, subclasses 127+ for instruments inserted into the body to
    remove concretions.


CLS 601/5
TXT Means for passive movement of disabled extremity to return natural range of
    motion:

    Device under subclass 1 having means for simulating an extremity's normal
    range of movement for the purpose of restoration of its natural function.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is limited to devices intended to restore the
    natural motion of extremity including digits.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84+,    for devices for placing the body in motion for a purpose other than
    restoration of a natural body function.


CLS 601/6
TXT Vacuum:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 having means for temporarily creating
    negative pressure upon a specific portion of the living body.


CLS 601/7
TXT With means for attaching diverse devices to vacuum:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 having structure for connecting auxilliary
    devices to the vacuum to perform other functions in addition to vacuuming.

    (1)     Note. This subclass accepts patents which perform a function in
    addition to the vacuum function to treat the body, such as hair combs,
    scalp treating means, etc.


CLS 601/8
TXT With spring-actuating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein a piston, which produces the
    vacuum, is biased in either its forward or return motion.


CLS 601/9
TXT Alternating positive and negative pressures:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 in which successive positive and negative
    pressures are applied directly to the body of the user.


CLS 601/10
TXT Negative pressure interrupted:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 provided with means which can cause a break
    in the continuity of the vacuum being applied to the body.


CLS 601/11
TXT Body member enclosing:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 having means to surround and encompass a
    portion of the body to which pressure will be applied.


CLS 601/12
TXT Blood circulation stimulation of the head:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 wherein a vacuum or partial vacuum is
    created around the scalp, thereby relieving it of atmospheric pressure
    which allows blood to circulate more freely in the veins of the scalp.


CLS 601/13
TXT Applied to eye:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 comprising a cup applied to the organs of
    sight which cause a reduction in the atmospheric pressure to exercise or
    massage eyeballs and adjacent parts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    606,    Surgery, subclass 204.25 for external pressure applicator applied
    to the eye.


CLS 601/14
TXT Applied to bust:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 including a cup applied to female breasts
    which causes a reduction in atmospheric pressure to massage the breast.


CLS 601/15
TXT With light, thermal, magnetic, or electrical application:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 having an applicator means combined
    therewith for applying luminous energy or analogous rays to the body, or
    modifying the temperature of the body, or a magnatized field, or applying
    electrical current to the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery:  subclasses 9+ for magnetic fields applied to the body.

    602,    Surgery:  Splint, Brace, or Bandage, subclasses 1+ for analogous
    light, thermal, or electrical applicators.

    606,    Surgery, subclasses 1+ for light applicating instruments and 27+
    for heat applicating instruments.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses 1+
    for analogous devices for applying light, heat, and electricity to the body.


CLS 601/16
TXT Thermal medium is a continuous stream of heated air:

    Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein the applicator draws in air, heats
    the air, and discharges said heated air upon the surface of the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 515+ for fireplaces having an air
    pump and for heating outside air and subclass 523 for heat exchanges for
    heating internal room air.


CLS 601/17
TXT Comprising means for applying fluid, medicament, cosmetic, or cream to the
    skin:

    Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein the applicator applies a liquid, a
    medicine, a beauty preparation, or an ointment to the surface of the body
    being treated.


CLS 601/18
TXT Applicator having specific movement:

    Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein the light, heat, or electrical
    applicator means contacting the body has drive means which produces or
    imparts a particular motion thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     for applicators having specific movement which are not light, heat,
    or electrical applicators.


CLS 601/19
TXT Rollers applied to the body:

    Subject matter under subclass 18 wherein the applicator constitutes
    elements having a generally circular cross section adapted to be rolled
    over the users body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115+,   for rolling device structure.


CLS 601/20
TXT Electrical application:

    Subject matter under subclass 19 wherein the roller elements apply an
    electric current to the body.


CLS 601/21
TXT Electrical application:

    Subject matter under subclass 18 wherein the applicator applies an
    electrical current to the body.


CLS 601/22
TXT Foot:

    Subject matter under subclass 18 wherein the applicator is particularly
    adapted to treat a terminal portion of a leg.


CLS 601/23
TXT Exercising appliance:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 particularly adapted to support a body
    member or the whole body to perform a natural body function.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    482,    Exercise Devices, for exercising devices for particular body
    portions.


CLS 601/24
TXT Chair, couch, bed, or table:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 including a substantially horizontal
    surface for supporting the body in a sitting, reclined, or prostate
    position during exercise.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49,     for similar support devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 600+ for beds specially adapted to support an
    invalid; subclasses 101+ for cradles and 915+ for beds having vibrating
    means.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, appropriate subclasses for internal and external
    support structure and frames.


CLS 601/25
TXT Including means to rotate head about the longitudinal axis of body:

    Subject matter under subclass 24 having associated means to revolve the
    body's head about the lengthwise axis of the body.


CLS 601/26
TXT With drive means:

    Subject matter under subclass 24 wherein energy transducing or storing
    means provides power to move a portion of the chair, couch, bed, or table.


CLS 601/27
TXT Foot:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein the exercising device supports a
    terminal portion of a leg while it performs a natural motion.


CLS 601/28
TXT Foot support having protuberances:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 having a plurality of fingerlike
    projections disposed on the support means for supporting the foot.


CLS 601/29
TXT Reciprocating foot support:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 wherein the foot supporting plates are
    caused to move back and forth alternately.


CLS 601/30
TXT Vibrant foot support:

    Subject matter under subclass 29 wherein the moving foot plate is moved by
    rapid motion.


CLS 601/31
TXT Oscillating foot support:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 wherein the foot support plate is moved
    back and forth between the two alternate extreme positions.


CLS 601/32
TXT Rotating foot support:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 wherein the foot support plate revolves
    about an axis.


CLS 601/33
TXT Joint or limb (e.g., wrist, arm, leg, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 23 including means for moving a body
    extremity or the point of articulation between movable parts of portions of
    a body extremity.


CLS 601/34
TXT Leg:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 comprising means for moving a lower
    extremity.


CLS 601/35
TXT Pair of legs:

    Subject matter under subclass 34 provided with means for moving both lower
    extremities.


CLS 601/36
TXT Bicycle:

    Subject matter under subclass 35 for simulating bicycle riding.


CLS 601/37
TXT Eye:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 adapted to exercise an organ of sight.


CLS 601/38
TXT Jaw:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 which causes a human mandible to move
    between an open and closed position.


CLS 601/39
TXT Neck:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 for exercising that portion of the body
    which connects a head and trunk portions thereof.


CLS 601/40
TXT Hand and finger:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 for exercising a terminal part of an upper
    limb and its digits.


CLS 601/41
TXT Artificial respiration:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 having externally applied means acting
    upon the thorax portion of the body to induce normal breathing.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass include "iron lung" respirators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 204.18+ for devices for supplying breathing gas
    under pressure.


CLS 601/42
TXT Seesaw:

    Subject matter under subclass 41 including a patient carrier pivoted on a
    support intermediate its ends to form a supporting structure whereby a
    patient may be rocked back and forth to stimulate or enhance normal
    breathing.


CLS 601/43
TXT Produced by vacuum and compression:

    Subject matter under subclass 41 comprising means which subject the outside
    of the body to alternate air compression and decompression.


CLS 601/44
TXT Conforms to shape of torso portion:

    Subject matter under subclass 43 wherein the artificial respiration means
    is shaped, or during operation takes the shape of, a trunk portion of the
    body or a portion thereof.


CLS 601/45
TXT Obstetric:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein the exercise device is adapted to
    be used by a parturient woman herself in parturition.


CLS 601/46
TXT Vibrator:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the massaging means, contacting the
    body for a therapeutic purpose, has a nondefined or nonspecific motion
    relative to the body to which it is contacting.


CLS 601/47
TXT Audio:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 which imparts treatment by the application
    of sound vibrational waves to the user.


CLS 601/48
TXT Pulse generator:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 which imparts treatment by use of
    generated rythmic or random beats applied to the user.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     for devices which apply treatment to the body using a specific
    defined motion on the body and subclasses 2+ for ultrasonic sound applied
    to the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclass 552 for diagnostic apparatus which senses the
    response of the body to applied vibration.

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 15+ for
    vibrating motor structure.

    318,    Electricity: Motive Power Systems, subclasses 114 and 119+ for
    electric motor systems used in vibration causing devices.


CLS 601/49
TXT Couch, chair, or body support:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 comprising a surface for supporting the
    body in a sitting, reclining, or prostate position during massaging.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 600+ for beds specially adapted to support an
    invalid; subclasses 101+ for cradles and 915+ for beds having vibrating
    means.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, appropriate subclasses for internal and external
    support structure and frames.


CLS 601/50
TXT Gyratory motion:

    Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein the body support undergoes a
    circular or spiral motion which causes a nondefined or nonspecific movement
    to be applied to the body contacting surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    85,     for applicators having a nonvibrating body contacting surface.


CLS 601/51
TXT Reciprocatory motion:

    Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein the support undergoes an
    alternating back-and-forth motion which causes a nondefined or nonspecific
    movement to be applied to the body contacting surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98,     for devices having specific motion without a vibrating surface.


CLS 601/52
TXT Roller:

    Subject matter under subclass 51 including means having a substantially
    circular cross section which reciprocates relative to the user.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118,    for therapeutic devices having rollers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 933+ for massaging beds.


CLS 601/53
TXT Oscillatory motion:

    Subject matter under 49 wherein the support undergoes a swinging
    back-and-forth with a steady uninterrupted motion which causes a nondefined
    or nonspecific movement to be applied to the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90,     for applicators having a specific oscillatory motion without a
    vibrating body contacting surface.


CLS 601/54
TXT Specific component:

    Subject matter under subclass 53 wherein a particular part of the couch,
    chair, or body support is oscillated.


CLS 601/55
TXT Fluid:

    Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein the couch, chair, or body support
    contains a liquid which is placed in motion by a vibrator means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, appropriate subclasses for valves and flow
    regulating means which emit fluids.

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, for valves, per se.


CLS 601/56
TXT Vibrant cushion:

    Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein a pad or pillow used to support a
    person is caused to vibrate.


CLS 601/57
TXT Having vibrator contained therein:

    Subject matter under subclass 56 in which the pad or pillow encloses the
    vibratory system.


CLS 601/58
TXT Drive means directly attached or extending into cushion:

    Subject matter under subclass 56 in which the means which causes the
    vibratory motion is connected to a pillow or pad and extends into the said
    pillow or pad.

    (1)     Note.  The patents in this subclass disclose vibrating rods
    extending into or through the cushion.


CLS 601/59
TXT Vibrator support for cushion structure (e.g., spring):

    Subject matter under subclass 56 wherein the vibrating means is attached to
    at least one element of the support structure of the pillow or pad.


CLS 601/60
TXT Unbalanced weight having drive means:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 in which the vibration is caused by a mass
    which is placed eccentrically on a driven rotating shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     for vibrators driven by unbalanced weights having specific drive
    means.


CLS 601/61
TXT Movable membrane:

    Subject matter under subclass 49 provided with a pellicle which contacts
    the body and vibrates.


CLS 601/62
TXT Spring activated:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein resiliently flexible members are
    utilized to impart vibratory motion or to increase the effects of the
    vibrating motion to the membrane.


CLS 601/63
TXT Roller applied to the body:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein its vibration is produced by a
    cylindrical element acting upon the body.


CLS 601/64
TXT With heating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein the pellicle is heated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for devices for light, thermal, or electrical applicators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 389+ for diagnostic devices utilizing infared
    radiation.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclass 96
    for thermal applicators applied to the body.


CLS 601/65
TXT Unbalanced weight having drive means:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 in which the vibration is caused by a mass
    which is placed eccentrically on a driven rotating shaft.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    67,     for vibrators driven by unbalanced weights having specific drive
    means.


CLS 601/66
TXT Support with vibrant armature:

    Subject matter under subclass 49 comprising a table, foot rest, or other
    support wherein vibration of the support is caused by an electromagnetic
    coil acting upon metallic wire wrapped about a metallic core.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    78,     for vibrators having vibrant armatures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity:  Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclass 80+ for armature structure and subclasses 87+ for
    vibrating elements.


CLS 601/67
TXT Unbalanced weight:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 in which the vibration is caused by a
    weight which is placed eccentrically on a rotating shaft.

    (1)     Note.  These subclasses are for vibrators having unbalanced weights
    which do not answer to the other structural limitations of this class.
    Search subclasses which have specifics of the device before searching here
    for the motor structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60,     for an unbalanced weight driven by a drive means associated with a
    moving membrane.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, subclass 81 for rotary
    electric motors which have an unbalanced weight to generate vibrations.


CLS 601/68
TXT Manually operated:

    Subject matter under subclass 67 wherein the unbalanced weight is operated
    by hand.


CLS 601/69
TXT With drive means:

    Subject matter under subclass 67 wherein the unbalanced weight is operated
    by a means which imparts motion thereto.


CLS 601/70
TXT Electric drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 69 wherein the motion imparting means is
    driven by an electrical actuation means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    310,    Electric Generator or Motor Structure, subclasses 81+ for rotary
    electric motors having an unbalanced weight for producing the vibrations.


CLS 601/71
TXT Belt retained on body trunk:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 in which the massager and its drive are
    mounted upon a strap member for wear by the user's body, excluding the head
    and limbs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 311+ and 338+ for specific belt structure.


CLS 601/72
TXT Hand supported:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 wherein the vibrator and its drive means
    are supported manually.


CLS 601/73
TXT Transverse handle:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 provided with a gripping means which is
    oriented crosswise to the vibrating head.


CLS 601/74
TXT Belt retained on hand:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 in which the massager is secured to the
    hand or carried on the hand by a strap member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 311+ and 338+ for specific belt structure.


CLS 601/75
TXT Fluid drive means:

    Subject matter under subclass 69 in which the unbalanced weight is driven
    by a liquid-actuated drive means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, particular subclasses for
    features of fluid motors.


CLS 601/76
TXT Fluid pressure causes aural vibration:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 wherein the hearing canals are vibrated
    through the use of liquid under pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclass 559 for diagnostic devices for the testing of the
    ear or testing by auditory stimulation.


CLS 601/77
TXT Diaphragm actuated:

    Subject matter under subclass 76 wherein the fluid pressure is applied by
    the fluctuation of a membrane.


CLS 601/78
TXT Vibrant armature (e.g., electromagnetic):

    Subject matter under subclass 46 in which the vibration is caused by an
    electromagnetic coil acting upon metallic wire wrapped about a metallic
    core to impart motion thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    335,    Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
    Electromagnets, subclasses 80+ for armature structure and subclasses 87+
    for vibrating elements.


CLS 601/79
TXT Secured to user's body:

    Subject matter under subclass 78 in which the vibrator is held upon the
    body by a belt or other securing arrangements.


CLS 601/80
TXT Handheld:

    Subject matter under subclass 78 wherein the vibrating means is supported
    manually.


CLS 601/81
TXT Extended or attached body-contacting member:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the vibrating element is provided
    with a body-contacting member which is attached thereto and extends in the
    direction of the user away from the body of the device.


CLS 601/82
TXT Reciprocating weight:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 in which vibration is caused by
    alternating back-and-forth movement of a mass.


CLS 601/83
TXT Vibrant slide:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 in which vibration is caused by the
    relative motion between two elements of the device which imparts a
    vibration to the body-contacting surface.

    (1)     Note.  Devices in this subclass include a weighted sleeve moving
    relative a fixed rodlike support or elements moving relative to one another
    about an axis which causes the vibration.


CLS 601/84
TXT Device with applicator having specific movement:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein means contacting the body has a
    drive mechanism which produces or imparts a particular motion to the
    body-contacting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for applicators having light, heat, or electrical applications.


CLS 601/85
TXT Gyratory:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 wherein the applicator has a circular or
    spiral motion.


CLS 601/86
TXT Couch, chair, or other body support:

    Subject matter under subclass 85 wherein the gyrator motion is imparted to
    a support for sitting, reclining, or otherwise supporting the user.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49+,    for couches, chairs, or other therapeutic support having a defined
    motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 610+ for a bed having means to support the user
    and means to impart movement to the support.


CLS 601/87
TXT Electric drive means:

    Subject matter under subclass 85 wherein the gyrating means is operated by
    an electric power source.


CLS 601/88
TXT Fluid drive means:

    Subject matter under subclass 85 wherein the gyrator means is operated by a
    motor driven by a liquid-actuated drive means.


CLS 601/89
TXT Oscillatory:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 in which the applicator moves back and
    forth in an arcuate path with a steady uninterrupted rhythm.


CLS 601/90
TXT Couch, chair, or other body support:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 in which the body contacting support for a
    sitting, reclining, or other functional support surface, as a whole,
    undergoes an oscillatory motion.


CLS 601/91
TXT Seat:

    Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein a chairlike body support surface
    is divided into separate sections and these sections, after being
    positioned, undergo an oscillatory motion as a whole.


CLS 601/92
TXT Specific component:

    Subject matter under 90 wherein the support has numerous section, some of
    which undergo an oscillatory movement relative to the user and the
    remaining support sections.


CLS 601/93
TXT Electric drive means:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 in which the oscillating applicator is
    operated by a motor activated by electricity.


CLS 601/94
TXT Including a plurality of massaging balls, rollers, or wheels:

    Subject matter under subclass 93 in which the driven applicator includes a
    plurality of massaging means in the form of spherical, cylindrical, or
    circular elements.


CLS 601/95
TXT Including a plurality of massaging teeth, projections, or filaments:

    Subject matter under subclass 93 in which the driven applicator includes a
    plurality of massaging fingerlike projections or threadlike elements.


CLS 601/96
TXT Fluid drive means:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the oscillating means is driven by
    a liquid-actuated drive means.


CLS 601/97
TXT Reciprocating:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 wherein the applicator is moved by
    alternating back-and-forth motion.


CLS 601/98
TXT Couch, chair, or other body support:

    Subject matter under subclass 97 wherein the relative motion is applied to
    a seat, reclining surface, or other body supporting means to reciprocate
    said support in either a vertical or horizontal plane.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass disclose an intervening surface
    which have a reciprocating motion relative to a users body.  See search
    note to subclass 116 below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    49+,    for couches, chairs, or other therapeutic supports which have a
    defined path of motion.

    116,    for patents directed having rollers which reciprocate and contact
    the body without an intervening surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 610+ for beds having means to support the user and
    means for imparting movement to the support.


CLS 601/99
TXT Roller contacting Intermediate surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 98 wherein a cylindrical element is
    reciprocated to impart a reciprocating motion to an intervening surface
    supporting the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    for therapeutic devices having rollers.


CLS 601/100
TXT Vertically reciprocating platform:

    Subject matter under subclass 98 wherein a planar surface reciprocates at a
    right angle to a horizontal plane.


CLS 601/101
TXT Electric drive means:

    Subject matter under subclass 97 wherein the reciprocation motion is
    accomplished by electrically motion imparting means.


CLS 601/102
TXT Roller:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 in which the electrically driven
    applicator is in the form of a cylindrical element which is applied
    directly or indirectly to the body of the user.

    (1)     Note. Patents in subclass are roller elements which are
    reciprocated by a power source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    118,    for roller elements which are manually reciprocated over the body
    of the user.


CLS 601/103
TXT Multiple applicators:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 provided with plural applicators.


CLS 601/104
TXT Foot:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 in which the massaging action of the
    applicator is applied to the terminal portion of the leg.


CLS 601/105
TXT Fluid drive means:

    Subject matter under subclass 97 wherein the applicator is reciprocated by
    a liquid motor.


CLS 601/106
TXT To restore heart beat:

    Subject matter under subclass 105 in which the motion of the applicator
    initiates restoration of heart pulsation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    153,    for massaging devices which are internal of the body cavity and
    encases the heart or a portion of the heart for massaging the heart.


CLS 601/107
TXT Percussing:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 in which the applicator impacts upon or
    beats the body either directly or through a pleximeterlike member.


CLS 601/108
TXT Having drive means:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein the body impacting or beating
    means is operated by power driven actuation means.


CLS 601/109
TXT Brush:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein the applicator consists of
    bristles fastened to a base or support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    114,    for a rotary device having brush structure

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 21.1+ for ma-
    chine-operated brushing devices and subclasses 159.1+ for brushes.


CLS 601/110
TXT Ball:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 in which the applicator is a uniformally
    spherical element.


CLS 601/111
TXT Multiple applicators:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 comprising plural applicators.


CLS 601/112
TXT Rotary:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 in which the applicator rotates about a
    fixed axis relative to the body portion to which it is applied.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass disclose an applicator for the body
    surface rotating in a plane perpendicular to the axis of its rotation.


CLS 601/113
TXT Ball:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 in which the applicator is a spherical
    element.


CLS 601/114
TXT Brush:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 in which the applicator consists of
    bristles fastened to a base or support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    109,    for percussing massages having brush structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 159.1 for
    brushes.


CLS 601/115
TXT Rolling utilizing couch, chair, or other support:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 wherein a massage is accomplished through
    use of rollers carried upon a seat, reclining surface, or other body
    support.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99,     for devices wherein rolling motions are imparted to an intermediate
    member which contacts the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclasses 933+ for beds having massaging means.


CLS 601/116
TXT Reciprocating:

    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein the rolling members have a linear
    motion to-and-fro while maintaining contact with the users body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102,    for other devices of the class which reciprocate and include a
    roller.


CLS 601/117
TXT Including bodies disposed above user:

    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein the rolling members are disposed
    at a position superior in relation to the user.


CLS 601/118
TXT Rolling with body or bodies disposed on single axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 wherein the massage is accomplished
    through use of a device having one or more elements adapted to roll about a
    unitary axis.


CLS 601/119
TXT Rolling with elongated handle means carrying tubular or disklike bodies:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein a massage is accomplished through
    use of a device provided with a lengthened manually held gripping means
    carrying hollow cylinders or thin flat circular plates.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    123,    for an elongated handle carrying tubes or disks on plural axes.


CLS 601/120
TXT With handle at ends of axis (e.g., rolling pin type):

    Subject matter under subclass 118 in which the handle is disposed at the
    opposite ends of a single axle upon which the roller or disklike elements
    are carried.


CLS 601/121
TXT Consisting solely of a tubular body:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 in which the whole massaging device
    consists solely of a hollow elongated cylinder.


CLS 601/122
TXT Rolling with tubular or disklike bodies disposed on multiple axes:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 wherein a rolling-type massage is
    accomplished through use of a device provided with cylindrical or disklike
    bodies disposed upon plural axes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    119,    for tubular or disklike elements moved by a handle thereon.


CLS 601/123
TXT With elongated handle means:

    Subject matter under subclass 122 wherein the tubular or disclike bodies
    are mounted upon a lengthened handheld gripping means.


CLS 601/124
TXT Belt-supported elements:

    Subject matter under 122 wherein the tubular or disklike bodies are carried
    on a flexible continuous band.


CLS 601/125
TXT Hand manipulated:

    Subject matter under subclass 122 wherein the tubular or disklike elements
    are manually held and maneuvered relative to the user.


CLS 601/126
TXT With drive means:

    Subject matter under subclass 122 wherein the roller or disklike elements
    are power driven.


CLS 601/127
TXT Including bodies mounted on rotated cylindrical structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 126 wherein the driven tubular and disklike
    elements are carried on an individual axis mounted in a frame, which frame
    is disposed upon an axis which rotates thereby causing rotary movement of
    each independent element on its axis.


CLS 601/128
TXT Rolling with spherical bodies disposed on multiple axes:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 wherein circular elments are disposed upon
    a plurality of elongated support means.


CLS 601/129
TXT Rolling with elongated handle carrying spherical bodies:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 wherein a massage is accomplished through
    use of a device provided with a lengthened manually held gripping means
    upon which ball-like bodies are carried.


CLS 601/130
TXT With drive means:

    Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein the spherical bodies are driven
    by a power source.


CLS 601/131
TXT Rolling comprising freely rotating spherical bodies:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 wherein a rolling type massage is
    accomplished by means consisting of ball-like bodies which are unrestrained
    by an axis passing through their bodies.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    154     and 155, for free spherical bodies which apply lotion to the body
    while simultaneously applying a rolling massage.


CLS 601/132
TXT Belt support carrying spherical bodies:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 wherein the spherical bodies are carried
    by a straplike element.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    143,    144, and 145, for other massagers having belts.


CLS 601/133
TXT Pinching:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 having means to contact body tissue at two
    bipolar transverse positions such that tissue between the two contact
    points is squeezed.


CLS 601/134
TXT Kneading or deep pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 which presses into and works the body and
    compresses that portion upon which it acts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    606,    Surgery, subclasses 201+ for external pressure applicator devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for percussing devices which contact the body with slight pressure


CLS 601/135
TXT With hand-manipulating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 wherein the kneading is accomplished by
    manually held means.

    (1)     Note. Patents directed to devices for massaging the prostate gland
    are classifiable in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for percussing devices which contact the body with slight pressure.


CLS 601/136
TXT Frictioning:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 wherein the body-contacting means rubs the
    body or acts upon the body by surface resistance to relative motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 110 for
    combined brushing and massaging tools.


CLS 601/137
TXT Hand manipulated:

    Subject matter under subclass 136 which has structural means for being
    manually maneuvered about a user.


CLS 601/138
TXT Frictioning surface configured as padlike member:

    Subject matter under subclass 137 in which the frictioning surface in
    contact with user's body is substantially planar or adapted to fit the
    shape of the user's body.


CLS 601/139
TXT Gum massager:

    Subject matter under subclass 136 wherein the frictioning means contacts
    fleshy portions of a jaw which fleshy portions supports teeth which are
    cleaned or massaged by the frictioning means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 141+ for dental tools carried and actuated
    manually.


CLS 601/140
TXT With dual arms hinged at base:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 in which two extensions are jointed by
    means which are attached at a base and massage elements are located at the
    free ends of the extensions for impinging on both sides of the gums
    simultaneously.


CLS 601/141
TXT With elongate handle means (e.g., toothbrush):

    Subject matter under subclass 139 having an extended gripping means
    supporting the gum massaging element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 167.1 for tooth
    or nail brushes.

    132,    Toilet, subclass 308 for toilet kit which includes a toothbrush.


CLS 601/142
TXT With drive means:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the gum massaging means is moved
    by a power source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    81,     for motor-operated, elongate, handheld vibratory devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 114 and 131 for dental tools having a motor
    drive.


CLS 601/143
TXT Belt supported:

    Subject matter under subclass 136 in which frictioning elements are mounted
    on a flexible member which aligns the frictioning members while permitting
    them to adapt to the bodies configuration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    132,    for belt devices carrying rollers


CLS 601/144
TXT With drive means:

    Subject matter under subclass 143 in which the belt is vibrated or
    reciprocated by a power source.


CLS 601/145
TXT With means for mounting upon floor:

    Subject matter under subclass 144 wherein the drive means is mounted upon a
    planar support surface upon which one stands.


CLS 601/146
TXT Couch, chair, or other support:

    Subject matter under subclass 143 wherein the belt is attached to a seat,
    reclining surface, or other support means for the users body.


CLS 601/147
TXT Multiple belts:

    Subject matter under subclass 143 which utilizes plural supporting belts.


CLS 601/148
TXT Flexible membrane caused to move by fluid pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 provided with a thin, pliable sheet which
    is caused to move by means of fluid pressure differentials on either side
    of the sheet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for body member enclosing devices utilizing a vacuum source.


CLS 601/149
TXT For applying pulsating or sequential pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 148 including body portion engaging means for
    applying a selected force thereto and releasing the force therefrom.


CLS 601/150
TXT Control means for causing pulsation:

    Subject matter under subclass 148 wherein the flexible membrane is provided
    with valve means regulated in a specific manner to distribute fluid flow to
    the membrane in a selected manner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, particular subclasses for valve structures.


CLS 601/151
TXT Body member enclosing or encircling:

    Subject matter under subclass 148 that surrounds or encases a user's body
    part.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for body enclosing apparatus utilizing vacuum means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, digest 20 for inflatable base.

    602,    Surgery: Splint, Brace, or Bandage, subclass 13 for inflatable
    splints.


CLS 601/152
TXT Pulsating pressure or sequentially inflatable:

    Subject matter under subclass 151 in which a membrane or a series of
    membranes are pressurized upon a body component or along the longitudinal
    axis of a limb to cause different blood circulation patterns by
    intermittent or variable pressure upon the membrane.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for body member enclosing devices utilizing a vacuum source.


CLS 601/153
TXT Means for enclosing internal body organ (e.g., heart):

    Subject matter under subclass 152 wherein the means for enclosing a body
    organ comprises a cup-shaped article or receptacle adapted to encase a body
    organ.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    for noninvasive means to restore heart beat.


CLS 601/154
TXT Lavative:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 which applies a fluid to the body or a
    part thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160,    for devices which actively and motively dispense fluids toward a
    body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 200+ for a toothbrush having
    dentifrice supplying means.

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 11+ for combs which massage the scalp and apply
    medicaments to the scalp.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, subclasses 268+ for brush
    devices having means for coating an object it contacts.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 19+ for devices which apply a medicating fluid
    to the body and subclasses 77+ for intraoral medicators.


CLS 601/155
TXT With means for connection to outside source:

    Subject matter under subclass 154 provided with means for joining to an
    external fluid supplying source.


CLS 601/156
TXT Couch, chair, or bath with air spray means:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 comprising a reclining, sitting, bathing,
    or other support wherein the flowing liquid travels through air and
    impinges on the body of the user.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 596+ for shower
    devices for a nontherapeutic purpose or nontreatment of the body.


CLS 601/157
TXT Couch, chair, or bath with means to create a whirlpool:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 comprising a reclining, sitting, bathing,
    or other support wherein the user is immersed in a liquid and flowing
    liquid is dispensed into the existing liquid in order to cause a whirling
    current to produce a massaging effect upon the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spitoons, subclasses 541.1+ for
    hydromassage devices which the body of the user.


CLS 601/158
TXT Couch, chair, bath, or other support:

    Subject matter under subclass 154 wherein the water device is attached to a
    body reclining, sitting, or bathing support means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 596+ for water
    showering devices which are applied to the body for nontherapeutic body
    treating purposes.


CLS 601/159
TXT With control of fluid dispension (e.g., shampoo device):

    Subject matter under subclass 154 with means to regulate flow of the fluid
    upon the user.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 515+ for hair
    washing and shampooing devices.

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, pertinent subclasses for
    fluids dispensed from an applicator which is contained therein.


CLS 601/160
TXT Fluid current propelled onto user:

    Subject matter under subclass 154 wherein a flowing fluid is dispensed
    through the air by an outlet orifice upon the body of the user.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes devices that actively and motively
    release fluid toward a body.  It is not intended to accept patent documents
    where a fluid is merely deposited upon a user's body (a cosmetic or cream
    applicator).  Devices such as these are found in subclasses 154+.


CLS 601/161
TXT Gun type:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein the fluid dispenser is shaped
    like a pistol.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 19+ for devices used to introduce medicating
    fluid into a body.


CLS 601/162
TXT Dental (e.g., Waterpick#):

    Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein the fluid current is applied to
    the teeth.

    (1)     Note. Patent documents in this subclass are used by an individual
    to apply fluid to their own teeth and gums and are not the type of device
    used by a dentist.  See search class note below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    433,    Dentistry, subclass 80 for devices having intraoral dispensing
    means.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 77+ for intraoral medicators.


CLS 601/163
TXT With multiple jets:

    Subject matter under subclass 162 having plural fluid current outleting
    onto the teeth of the user.


CLS 601/164
TXT With arcuate band to conform to teeth (e.g., mouthguard):

    Subject matter under subclass 163 in which the fluid outlet is shaped to
    surround the contour of the teeth of the user.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclass 859 for specific shape of nonlavative oral cavity
    protecting device.


CLS 601/165
TXT With means for connection to fluid source:

    Subject matter under subclass 162 provided with means for attachment to a
    faucet, bathtub outlet, nozzle, or other external fluid source.


CLS 601/166
TXT Enclosing part of body:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 for surrounding or encircling a portion
    of the user's body.


CLS 601/167
TXT Portable or detachable device to create whirlpool in bath:

    Subject matter under subclass 160 wherein the bath is adapted to receive a
    portative device which causes a whirlpool action to massage the body.


CLS 601/168
TXT Mat or ring-type aerator:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 comprising a pad or a circular shaped
    device which is placed in a bath to cause the liquid to be agitated by air
    to massage the body.


CLS 601/169
TXT Nozzle head:

    Subject matter under subclass 154 wherein significance is attributed to the
    structure of a water outlet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 596+ for shower
    heads.

    239,    Fluid Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclasses 99+ for
    interruption spray valves and subclasses 548+ for shower heads.


CLS 602/
TTL SURGERY:  SPLINT, BRACE, OR  BANDAGE

CLS 602/1
TXT ORTHOPEDIC BANDAGE:

    Subject matter under the class definition which provides protection,
    support, or splinting of a strained, sprained, dislocated, deformed, or
    fractured body portion.


CLS 602/2
TXT With light, thermal, or electrical application:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising an appliance which either:

    (a)     exposes some portion of the bandaged part of the body to a photo
    therapeutic dosage of the electromagnetic spectrum having a wavelength
    greater than about 100 nanometers (1000 Angstroms) and less than about 400
    nanometers (4000 Angstroms);

    (b)     treats a body part by removing or applying heat; or,

    (c)     provides a supply of electrons that are permitted to flow through
    the bandaged body portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for splints or braces having a ventilation system which may also
    provide a thermal treatment.


CLS 602/3
TXT Protective covering means for a bandage or cast:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising an appliance which encircles or
    encases a wound dressing or "plaster" cast to shroud same from moisture due
    to inclement weather or ablutions.


CLS 602/4
TXT Sling:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising an appliance which supports the
    body part by suspension.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds, subclass 89 for slings for carrying invalids.

    224,    Package and Article Carriers, subclasses 157 and 158+ for body
    supported slings for carrying children and patients.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 140 for a hand
    supported carrier harness for a person; and subclasses 152 and 156 for
    hand-held slings for carrying articles.


CLS 602/5
TXT Splint or brace:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising an immobilization appliance
    which tends to urge a bandaged body portion into a natural or normal
    orientation.

    (1)     Note.  As used in this subclass and those subordinate hereto, the
    term splint is considered to be generic to such terms as brace, cast,
    immobilizer, etc., and is to be considered an inclusive term.

    (2)     Note.  The disorder being treated is not at issue; strained,
    sprained, or pulled muscles, fractured bones, and other disorders which
    require support or immobilization are included.


CLS 602/6
TXT Shaped or shapeable:

    Subject matter under subclass 5 comprising an appliance which is specially
    adapted to have its configuration readily changeable or moldable to
    accommodate the particular requirements of treating a physical disorder.


CLS 602/7
TXT By heat application:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 comprising a device which is specially
    adapted to be configured or reconfigured by warming the device to a
    temperature at which it becomes pliable.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for appliances that apply heat or cold to a body portion.


CLS 602/8
TXT By chemically reactive material (e.g., plaster cast):

    Subject matter under subclass 6 comprising an appliance which is pliable at
    the time of  application so that it can be readily conformed to the
    contours of the body portion, but soon becomes rigid due to an interaction
    between substances which form or are encased within the appliance, and thus
    provides an encircling immobilization splint for the body portion which
    will retain the contours for a substantial segment of the treatment period.


CLS 602/9
TXT Embedded removal element:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 in which a means for disengaging a splint
    from a body portion is buried in the body of the splint which will enable
    one to easily sever the splint wall.


CLS 602/10
TXT Embedded walking iron means:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 in which a portion of a ground contact
    means includes a cast-attachment member which is at least partially encased
    by the material that forms the cast, per se.


CLS 602/11
TXT With toe protector or use enabling means:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 comprising an appliance which provides
    either:

    (a)     for the safety of the phalanges of the encased limb,

    (b)     a leg lifting means, or

    (c)     means to make wearing a cast easier or more tolerable.


CLS 602/12
TXT Separable splint elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 5 comprising means to easily remove a cast by
    making the cast a plural element assemblage that includes means for holding
    the plural elements contiguous to the body portion.

    (1)     Note.  Separable casts are typically used when a disorder of the
    splinted body portion requires frequent dressing changes, e.g., patients
    with burns or compound fractures.

    (2)     Note.  The above use of the term cast is not to be construed as
    being limited to splints which are comprised of chemically reactive
    materials.


CLS 602/13
TXT Inflatable:

    Subject matter under subclass 5 in which the appliance comprises an
    encircling conformable restraint for the body portion in the form of a
    flexible or elastic, hollow member that may be filled to a positive gage
    pressure with a fluid so as to conform the member to the body portion and
    simultaneously rigidify the member.


CLS 602/14
TXT With ventilation, heating, or cooling means:

    Subject matter under subclass 5 comprising means which provides either:

    (a)     a means for circulating a fluid of a desired temperature between
    the body portion and a splint, or

    (b)     a means to alter the temperature of the splint which in turn
    provides a treatment or feeling of hot or cold to the body portion.

    (1)     Note.  The splints in this subclass provide comfort means for the
    wearer in the form of circulated conditioned air or they provide a means to
    apply a thermal treatment to the encased body portion while also
    maintaining the relative position of the portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for orthopedic bandages in general which apply heat or cold therapy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclass 3 for all modifications of a
    boot and its parts to ventilate it.


CLS 602/15
TXT Box:

    Subject matter under subclass 5 comprising an appliance which is specially
    adapted to apply treatment because of its box-like configuration.

    (1)     Note. The appliances in this subclass are typically of the readily
    collapsible or "knockdown" type and may also apply an extension force.


CLS 602/16
TXT With hinge or pivot:

    Subject matter under subclass 5 comprising an appliance which is specially
    adapted to have a point of flexure intermediate a plurality of
    substantially rigid splint elements to accommodate either:

    (a)     applying a bending force to the body portion being treated, or

    (b)     flexure of a natural or surgically reconstructed joint.


CLS 602/17
TXT Head:

    Subject matter under subclass 5 comprising an appliance which is specially
    adapted to be applied to the head to treat physical cranial disorders.


CLS 602/18
TXT Neck:

    Subject matter under subclass 5 comprising an appliance which is specially
    adapted to be applied to the neck to treat the cervical vertebrae or the
    muscles associated therewith.


CLS 602/19
TXT Body  (e.g., scoliosis brace):

    Subject matter under subclass 5 comprising an appliance which is specially
    adapted to be applied to a person's thorax to treat the vertebrae and the
    muscles associated therewith so that a more normal orientation of the body
    components is achieved.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6+,     for body braces which are shapeable.


CLS 602/20
TXT Upper extremity:

    Subject matter under subclass 5 comprising an appliance which is specially
    adapted to be applied to a person's arm to treat a bone disorder or the
    muscles associated therewith so that a more normal orientation of the body
    components is achieved.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for appliances which will protect a bandaged limb from getting wet
    while bathing.


CLS 602/21
TXT Hand or wrist:

    Subject matter under subclass 20 comprising an appliance which is specially
    adapted to be applied to a distal portion of a person's arm to treat a bone
    disorder or the muscles associated therewith so that a more normal
    orientation of the body components is achieved.


CLS 602/22
TXT Finger:

    Subject matter under subclass 21 comprising an appliance which is specially
    adapted to be applied to a person's arm to treat a bone disorder of the
    phalanges or the muscles associated therewith so that a more normal
    orientation of the body components is achieved.


CLS 602/23
TXT Lower extremity:

    Subject matter under subclass 5 comprising an appliance which is specially
    adapted to be applied to a person's leg to treat a bone disorder or the
    muscles associated therewith so that a more normal orientation of the body
    components is achieved.


CLS 602/24
TXT Abduction:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 comprising an appliance which is specially
    adapted to be applied to the legs and hips so as to spread and rotate the
    legs outward from the median plane.


CLS 602/25
TXT Bowed limb:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 comprising an appliance which is specially
    adapted to be applied to a lower extremity to treat an abnormal curvature
    thereof.


CLS 602/26
TXT Knee:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 comprising an appliance which is specially
    adapted to be applied to the joint between the upper and lower leg portions.


CLS 602/27
TXT Ankle:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 comprising an appliance which is specially
    adapted to be applied to the joint between the lower leg and the  foot.


CLS 602/28
TXT Drop-foot brace:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 comprising an appliance which is specially
    adapted to be applied to the foot or between the associated leg and foot to
    provide support to the affected foot.


CLS 602/29
TXT Club-foot brace:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 comprising an appliance which is specially
    adapted to straighten a foot to treat the nontraumatic foot deviation.


CLS 602/30
TXT Toe:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 comprising means which is specially
    adapted to be applied to the phalanges of a lower extremity to correct
    disorders or deformities associated therewith.


CLS 602/31
TXT Toenail appliance:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 which is specially adapted to treat
    physical disorders of the unguis growth emanating from the dorsal surface
    of the terminal phalanges.


CLS 602/32
TXT Skeletal traction applicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising means which exerts a tensile
    force on the body or a portion thereof to place or retain bones or portions
    thereof in the proper relative position for healing to occur or in the
    proper position for further treatment to be administered.


CLS 602/33
TXT Bedstead associated traction apparatus:

    Subject matter under subclass 32 in which the traction applicator is a
    device which is engaged with, attached to, or supported by a bed or
    bedframe or is freestanding, but so closely positioned to a bed that
    traction may be applied to a person lying on the bed.


CLS 602/34
TXT Overhead frame:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 in which the support for the traction
    apparatus is positioned above the person lying on a bed.


CLS 602/35
TXT Supported device:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 in which the traction apparatus merely
    rests upon the top surface of a bed while applying traction to the person
    lying on the bed.

    (1)     Note.  The devices in this subclass are typically relatively small,
    light weight, and at least semi-portable self-contained traction
    applicators.


CLS 602/36
TXT Body attachment means:

    Subject matter under subclass 32 comprising a body-contacting appliance
    which transfers the tensile force of the applicator to the treated person's
    skeletal system.


CLS 602/37
TXT With skin piercing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 36 in which the body-contacting appliance
    makes a direct engagement with at least one bone to transfer the tensile
    force of the applicator to the skeletal system of the person being treated.


CLS 602/38
TXT Counter-traction or reciprocal stress means:

    Subject matter under subclass 32 wherein a sound limb is used as the means
    to fixedly support the applicator in traction producing relation to the
    infirm limb; a counter-traction or compression stress being thusly produced
    in the sound limb.

    (1)     Note.  The devices in this subclass typically attach to the legs
    and are used to treat a broken femur or a broken pelvis by placing the
    uninjured leg in compression so as to produce a tensile force in the
    injured leg or hip.


CLS 602/39
TXT Fracture reducing frame or table:

    Subject matter under subclass 32 which comprises an adjustable support for
    a person having one or more broken bones and which further comprises means
    to set the bones in proper orientation so that a retention device (e.g., a
    cast or an external fixator) can be installed to hold the bones in proper
    orientation during the healing process.

    (1)     Note. This subclass also includes stands or supports that are
    specifically adapted for steadying a limb while a cast is applied thereto
    even though the stand is not equipped with means for orienting the bones.

    (2)     Note. In some instances the bone setting means also serves as the
    retention means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    248,    Supports, subclasses 127+ and 200+ for stands and brackets of
    general utility.


CLS 602/40
TXT With compression ring, yoke, or post:

    Subject matter under subclass 32 which provides either a generally
    circular, generally U-shaped, or erect padded member to transfer the
    traction force to the surface of the patient's body.


CLS 602/41
TXT Bandage structure:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein means are provided which
    prevents injury to a body portion, protects or covers a wound upon or under
    body skin, or promotes healing of an injured body portion.

    (1)     Note.  The injury could be to the skin or to the tissue layers
    under the skin.

    (2)     Note.  Class 424 provides for bandages, bandage applicators or body
    dressing which contain bio-affecting, body treating, or drug compositions
    with at most a randomly impregnated base material. For example, Class 128
    takes a base material or substrate wherein particular portions thereof are
    impregnated with a Class 424 compositions.

    (3)     Note.  Class 424 provides a process of using a bandaging device
    wherein the process is at most single or plural steps of merely applying
    one or more Class 424 compositions to a wound site.

    (4)     Note.  A composition containing a solid synthetic polymer used to
    form a barrier or film layer on a wound site in order to promote healing
    thereof is properly classifiable in Class 424.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    60+,    for injury support means coverings.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclass 82.1 for light, thermal, or electrical applying
    devices.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 43
    to 47 for effervescent of pressurized fluid containing bandaging material
    intended for application to the body; subclasses 78 to 83 for a solid
    synthetic organic polymer bandaging material applicable to the body (e.g.,
    a liquid material which cures or drys in situ; subclasses 443 to 449 for a
    web or sheet coated or impregnated with a medicinal composition in the form
    of a bandage.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 175+, 190,
    193, and 196+ for a stock material composite in the form of a single or
    plural layer web or sheet and for such a product embodying a component of
    mechanically intertwined strands (e.g., woven, knit, or nonwoven).

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 181+ and 304+ for a woven or knit fabric.

    523,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 105 to 118 for
    unmedicated compositions used in the treatment of wounds or animal tissue.
    A surgical adhesive composition to be coated on a fabric, gauze, tape, etc.
    is classifiable in Class 523 subclass 111.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 304+ for a bandage, pad or shield placed upon
    the body for sustained treatment thereof; subclasses 358 to 402 for
    generically absorbent subcomponents of bandages (e.g., pads, fibers,
    substances used to make an absorbent pad, etc.) or of body fluids in
    general (e.g., tampons, diapers, sanitary napkins, catamenial devices,
    etc.).

    606,    Surgery, subclasses 213 to 221 for devices used in operative
    surgery to join a wound or incision's edges or lips together.


CLS 602/42
TXT Skin laceration or wound cover:

    Subject matter under subclass 41 having means for shielding or protecting a
    rip, cut, tear, or wound on the surface of the skin (e.g., a burn, scrape,
    incision, or supinating wound).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclass 82.1 for light, thermal, or electrical applying
    devices; subclasses 893+ for devices which protect or prevent injury of a
    wound by providing a cavity or void over the entire wound site (i.e., where
    there is no direct contact between the wound and the cover).

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 443
    to 449 for a web or sheet coated or impregnated with a medicinal
    composition in the form of a bandage.

    523,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 105 to 118 for
    unmedicated compositions used in the treatment of wounds or animal tissue.
    A surgical adhesive composition to be coated on a fabric, gauze, tape, etc.
    is classifiable in subclass 111.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 304 to 308 for a bandage, pad or shield
    containing a medicament and placed on the body for sustained treatment
    thereof (e.g., medicament containing bandage, wrap, attachable pad, wound
    dressing, or wound shield); see subclasses 358 to 402 for generically
    absorbent subcomponents of bandages (e.g., pads, fibers, substances used to
    make an absorbent pad, etc.) or of body fluids in general (e.g., tampons,
    diapers, sanitary napkins, catamenial devices, etc.).

    606,    Surgery, subclasses 213 to 221 for devices used in operative
    surgery to join a wound or incision's edges or lips together.


CLS 602/43
TXT Wound contact surface:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 wherein the wound covering device has
    particular physical surface features designed to improve the wound taction
    properties (e.g., healing rate, wound adherence, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains skin laceration or wound covers which
    specify physical structural features or surface textural features which
    directly contact the wound (e.g., nonstick properties). Subclass 48
    contains skin laceration or wound covers which have treatment material or
    composition in the wound contacting layer designed to promote healing of a
    wound. A patent which discloses a treatment material or composition only
    and has no mention of surface textural features is properly classifiable in
    subclass 48. If both surface textural features and a treatment material are
    present, then the patent is properly originally classifiable in subclass 43
    and a cross reference should be made in subclass 48.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for wound contact layer treatment materials.

    54,     for skin or wound facing adhesive layers.


CLS 602/44
TXT Woven or knit fiber pattern:

    Subject matter under subclass 43 having a particular weave or knit fiber
    engagement structure which is designed specifically for wound contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76,     for fiber engagement patterns for compressive elongate wraps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    66,     Textiles:  Knitting, see appropriate subclasses for the particular
    knit textile structure.

    139,    Textiles:  Weaving, see appropriate subclasses for the particular
    woven textile structure.


CLS 602/45
TXT Nonwoven fiber pattern:

    Subject matter under subclass 43 having a surface consisting of a nonwoven
    fiber engagement pattern which is specifically designed for wound contact.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76,     for fiber engagement patterns for compressive wraps.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, for nonwoven fabrics.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 221+ for a web
    or sheet containing structurally defined element or component.


CLS 602/46
TXT Polymeric foam:

    Subject matter under subclass 43 having a wound contact surface composed of
    a synthetic material with voids or channels throughout the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for polymeric foams which apply controlled pressure to the wound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 304 to 308 for polymeric foams which apply
    medicament to the wound; and subclasses 370 and 371 for thermoplastic
    absorbent pads or tampons.


CLS 602/47
TXT Perforated:

    Subject matter under subclass 43 wherein the wound contacting surface is
    apertured or pierced.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 358 to 402 for a perforated cover sheet on body
    fluid collecting devices.


CLS 602/48
TXT Wound contact layer containing treatment material:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 having a composition in the wound
    contacting layer of the wound cover which is designed to promote healing.

    (1)     Note.  Subclass 43 contains skin laceration or wound covers which
    specify physical structural features or surface textural features which
    directly contact the wound (e.g., nonstick properties). Subclass 48
    contains skin laceration or wound covers which have treatment material or
    composition in the wound contacting layer which is designed to promote
    healing of a wound.  A patent which discloses a treatment material or
    composition only and has no mention of surface textural features is
    properly classifiable in subclass 48. If both surface textural features and
    a treatment material are present then the patent is properly originally
    classifiable in subclass 43 and a cross reference should be made in
    subclass 48.

    (2)     Note.  Class 424 provides for bandages, bandage applicators, or
    body dressing which contain bio-affecting, body treating, or drug
    compositions with at most a randomly impregnated base material.  For
    example, Class 128 takes a base material or substrate wherein particular
    portions thereof are impregnated with a Class 424 compositions.

    (3)     Note.  Class 424 provides for a process of using a bandaging device
    wherein the process is at most single or plural steps of merely applying
    one or more Class 424 compositions to a wound site.

    (4)     Note.  A composition containing a solid synthetic polymer used to
    form a barrier or film layer on a wound site in order to promote healing
    thereof is properly classifiable in Class 424.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    54,     for wound facing adhesive layer materials.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 444
    to 449 for bandage compositions with incorporated medicaments.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 304 to 308 for medicament containing wound
    contact layers.


CLS 602/49
TXT Polysaccharide:

    Subject matter under subclass 48 wherein the wound contacting layer
    contains carbohydrates composed of more than one monosaccharide unit per
    molecule and capable of hydrolysis by acids or enzymes to monosacchrides.


CLS 602/50
TXT Amino acid, polypeptide, or protein:

    Subject matter under subclass 48 wherein the wound contacting layer
    contains either (a) an acid compound composed of an amino group and a
    carboxyl group, or (b) a group of amides formed from amino acids, or (c) a
    nitrogenous organic compound of high molecular weight produced by plants or
    animals which upon hydrolysis yield amino acids.


CLS 602/51
TXT Lipid (e.g., oil, fat, or wax):

    Subject matter under subclass 48 wherein the wound contacting layer
    contains a compound which is greasy to the touch, substantially insoluble
    in water, and is soluble in an alcohol, ether or other fat solvent.


CLS 602/52
TXT Thin polymeric film or adhesive:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 wherein the wound cover has a relatively
    small thickness and consists of either a single layer of a continuous
    polymeric film or a skin-facing sticky layer.

    (1)     Note.  The term thin is meant to denote a continuous film thickness
    of less than about 1mm.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    888,    for wound shields (e.g., vaccination shields).


CLS 602/53
TXT Compressive element over wound site:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 wherein the wound contact surface includes
    an element which generates pressure on the wound by direct or indirect
    contact with the wound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    606,    Surgery, subclasses 201+ for external pressure applicators.


CLS 602/54
TXT Skin or wound facing adhesive layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 wherein significance is attributed to a
    skin or wound contacting sticky layer which has some specific physical
    feature or material composition suited for skin or wound contact (e.g.,
    tackiness, porosity, hypoallegenicity, wound nonstick properties, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    52,     for a single layer of adhesive which covers a wound.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    523,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 105 to 118 for
    unmedicated compositions specifically intended for contact with a wound or
    animal tissue. A surgical adhesive compositions to be coated on a fabric,
    gauze, tape, etc. is classifiable in subclass 111.

    604,    Surgery, subclass 389 for absorbent pads having an adhesive layer.


CLS 602/55
TXT Patterned:

    Subject matter under subclass 54 wherein the skin or wound facing adhesive
    layer has a particular configuration or design.


CLS 602/56
TXT Absorbent:

    Subject matter under subclass 54 wherein the adhesive layer contacting the
    skin or wound is capable of assimilating liquid.


CLS 602/57
TXT System for adhesive layer release (e.g., release sheet):

    Subject matter under subclass 42 wherein the laceration or wound cover
    adhesive layer is provided with a specialized protective covering for a
    sticky portion thereof wherein the specialized covering has a particular
    feature (e.g., shape, pull tab set up, etc.) which affects the manner in
    which a specialized covering is removed from the sticky portion.

    (1)     Note. Release covers or coatings may be either tear-off strips or
    tabs which are peeled from the adhesive surface of the bandage to permit
    attachment of the bandage to a person or animal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 304 for adhesive fasteners.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclasses 440 and 441 for packaged
    bandages or wound covers.

    604,    Surgery, subclass 390 for pads having a release sheet associated
    with a tab fastener element.


CLS 602/58
TXT Backing layer having particular structural feature (e.g., permeability,
    shape, or  elasticity, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 42 wherein significance is attributed to a
    particular structural feature of a top or exposed layer specifically
    designed to improve the skin laceration or wound cover characteristics.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 386+ for pads having means for securing an
    absorbent pad during use.


CLS 602/59
TXT Perforated:

    Subject matter under subclass 58 wherein holes are provided in the backing
    layer, at least over the wound site, primarily for the purpose of
    ventilation.


CLS 602/60
TXT Support covering:

    Subject matter under subclass 41 wherein the bandage structure is designed
    to protect an injured portion of the body from further injury, prevent an
    injury to the body or promote the healing of an injured portion of the body.

    (1)     Note. The injury can be to a bone, ligament, tendon, muscle, etc.,
    below the surface of the skin.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for orthopedic devices.

    5+,     for appliances designed to treat bone fractures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 455+ for guards and protectors.

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 845+ for similar body supports and protectors.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 289+ for support coverings which apply or
    remove a treatment material from the external surface of the body.


CLS 602/61
TXT For a particular body portion:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 wherein the support covering is adapted or
    designed to fit a specific part of the body (e.g., abdomen, neck).


CLS 602/62
TXT Arm or leg:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 adapted or designed to fit an upper or
    lower body extremity and optionally including the digits thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 16 to 24 for similar structures used to protect
    or guard the arms or legs.

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 892+ for chafing shields designed for arms and
    legs.

    606,    Surgery, subclass 212 for hoof crack repair devices.


CLS 602/63
TXT Tubular:

    Subject matter under subclass 62 wherein the arm or leg support covering is
    a hollow cylindrical sleeve member with a permanent cylindrical form.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    901,    for a tubular bandage applicator.


CLS 602/64
TXT Wrist:

    Subject matter under subclass 62 designed to fit around and support the
    carpus or lower part of the forearm where it joins the hand.


CLS 602/65
TXT Ankle:

    Subject matter under subclass 62 designed to fit around and support the
    joint, consisting of the bones and related structure, which connects a leg
    and foot.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    62,     for leg appliances which support more than the ankle.


CLS 602/66
TXT Arch:

    Subject matter under subclass 62 designed specifically to support the
    curved portion of a foot lying between heel and toe portions thereof.


CLS 602/67
TXT Perineal support:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 having a supporting element attached to or
    part of a garment covering the pelvic region of the body designed to
    support or protect  the urogenital tract or the rectum.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 400+ for undergarments which are nonsupportive.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 358+ for similar structures used to absorb
    bodily discharges from the urogenital tract or rectum.


CLS 602/68
TXT With separable sack:

    Subject matter under subclass 67 wherein the perineal support has a
    perineal support element which is detachably secured to the garment.


CLS 602/69
TXT With drawstring:

    Subject matter under subclass 67 having a cord or ribbon running through a
    hem of a portion supporting the perineum and used to tighten or loosen the
    support portion.


CLS 602/70
TXT Suspensory:

    Subject matter under subclass 67 comprising a nether garment that is
    specially adapted to support or protect the external genitalia of a male
    without the need for a separate garment to affix the device to the body.


CLS 602/71
TXT With drawstring:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 having a cord or ribbon running through a
    hem of the element supporting the external genitalia and used to tighten or
    loosen the support element.


CLS 602/72
TXT With rigid cup:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 wherein the suspensory has a rigid concave
    member or element adapted to fit over and protect the external genitalia of
    a wearer.


CLS 602/73
TXT With separable sack:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 wherein the suspensory has a means which
    can be removed completely from any strap or support means used to hold it
    in place.


CLS 602/74
TXT Head (e.g., headache relief, eye bandage, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 60 adapted to fit on the uppermost body
    portion which is separated from the torso by the neck including the face,
    ears, eyes, etc. wherein the device has a therapeutic function or affect
    such as keeping eyelids closed, preventing the spread of pink-eye or
    relieving headaches.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    902,    for antisnoring or mouth closure devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclass 848 for antisnoring devices.

    606,    Surgery, subclass 204.35 for wrinkle eradicators.


CLS 602/75
TXT Compressive elongate wrap (e.g., generic wrapping materials):

    Subject matter under subclass 60 comprising an elastic elongated sheet or
    strip which applies a constricting  pressure to the body part around which
    it is wrapped.


CLS 602/76
TXT Woven, knit, or nonwoven fiber pattern:

    Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein significance is attributed to a
    particular knit, woven, or nonwoven structural feature.


CLS 602/77
TXT Rubber or latex coated fabric:

    Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein the elongated wrap is a fabric
    coated or impregnated with a component which is a natural or synthetic
    elastomer.


CLS 602/78
TXT Separable fasteners for support coverings:

    Subject matter under subclass 41 having means to fasten (i.e., fasteners
    only) a support covering on the body wherein the fastening means is
    entirely detachable or removable from the support covering.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 572+ for separable
    fastener elements.


CLS 602/79
TXT Retainers for wound dressings:

    Subject matter under subclass 41 having means which is specifically
    designed to hold a skin laceration or wound cover against the injured part
    of the body.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 602/900
TXT METHOD OF MAKING BANDAGE STRUCTURE:

    A collection of documents disclosing methods of making a device which
    protects or covers a wound in or below the skin of a patient.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 898+ for methods of making surgical articles
    and methods of treatment not classifiable in appropriate method classes.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Manufacture, subclasses
    appropriate for laminating methods.

    264,    Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
    appropriate subclasses molding processes used to make bandage structures.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 2.1+ for processes of coating or
    impregnating bandage and other products having medical or dental purpose.


CLS 602/901
TXT TUBULAR BANDAGE APPLICATORS:

    A collection of documents disclosing methods or apparatus for applying a
    tubular bandage to the body.


CLS 602/902
TXT ANTISNORING OR MOUTH CLOSING DEVICES:

    A collection of documents disclosing methods or apparatus for preventing
    snoring or keeping the mouth closed during sleep.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclass 848 for antisnoring devices.


CLS 602/903
TXT SURGICAL TAPE:

    A collection of documents disclosing methods or apparatus having an
    adhesive coated substrate for attaching surgical devices to the body.

    (1)     Note.  A surgical adhesive compositions to be coated on a fabric,
    gauze, tape, etc. is classifiable in Class 523, subclass 111.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    523,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 111 for tape
    adhesive, binder, or impregnate for body fluid absorbent devices.


CLS 602/904
TXT FILM-FORMING BANDAGE MATERIAL:

    A collection of documents disclosing methods or apparatus for covering a
    wound with a liquid synthetic polymer composition which then dries or cures
    in situ into a solid continuous flexible coating.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 78+
    for solid synthetic organic polymer containing materials.


CLS 604/
TTL SURGERY

CLS 604/1
TXT SWAB INCLUDING HANDLE (E.G., STICK, ETC.) WITH ABSORBENT MATERIAL AT END
    THEREOF:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to a means for mopping a
    surface of the body, which means includes a hand gripped element on one end
    of which is mounted a wad of cotton, a sponge, or like absorbent material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclass 572 for means for wiping a body surface to
    collect material for diagnostic testing.


CLS 604/2
TXT Body treating material fed to absorbent material:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein body treating material is supplied
    to the absorbent material from a source.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    305,    for means supplying a body treating material to the external
    surface of the body from a separate feed source.


CLS 604/3
TXT Means broken, cut, pierced, or torn to permit flow of material:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 including means on the swab which is
    fractured, separated by an edged instrument, punctured, or separated by
    having portions thereof rended apart by pulling in opposite directions for
    the purpose of allowing flow of body affecting treating material to the
    swab.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87,     148, 200, and 306, for all other medicators or aspirators having
    rupturable, frangible, tearable, or pierceable means to permit material
    flow.


CLS 604/4
TXT BLOOD DRAWN AND REPLACED OR TREATED AND RETURNED TO BODY:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to a means for removing
    blood from a person's body and either returning the same blood, or a
    constituent thereof, to the body after it has been handled for some
    purpose, or replacing the drawn blood with new blood or constituent.

    (1)     Note.  For a patent to be classified herein, specific detailed
    means for attaching the treating means to the patient must be specifically
    claimed, or the means must include a body sensing or monitoring means which
    controls the treating means.  Likewise for a method to be classified
    herein, the procedure must include more than nominal connection of the
    treating means to the patient, such as by reciting specific arteries or
    veins to be connected or by a specific surgical connection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 321.6+ for dialysis
    of blood.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 44+ for blood treating or
    transfusible devices, (e.g., oxygenators, etc.).

    494,    Imperforate Bowl:  Centrifugal Separators, subclasses 16+, for a
    separator of that class which includes a plurality of miniature bowls
    (e.g., test tubes) distributed about a rotatable carrier and readily
    removable therefrom; prominent in the art of that area (16+) are blood
    centrifuges.


CLS 604/5
TXT Constituent removed from blood and remainder returned to body:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 wherein a portion of the blood, such as an
    impurity or component, is removed therefrom before the residue is returned
    to the body.


CLS 604/6
TXT Component of blood removed (e.g., pheresis):

    Subject matter under subclass 5 wherein the constituent removed from the
    blood is a blood element, per se, such as plasma, leukocytes, erythrocytes
    or platelets whereafter the remainder is returned to the body.


CLS 604/7
TXT BLOOD TRANSFERRED BETWEEN DIFFERENT BODIES ALONG CONTINUOUS FLOW PATH
    (E.G., TRANSFUSION, ETC.):

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to a means for drawing
    blood from one person's body and introducing it into another's body by flow
    along an uninterrupted flow path, such as through a conduit the ends of
    which are respectively inserted in blood vessels of a donor and donee.


CLS 604/8
TXT DEVICES TRANSFERRING FLUIDS FROM WITHIN ONE AREA OF BODY TO ANOTHER (E.G.,
    SHUNTS, ETC.):

    Devices under the class definition relating to a means, usually a conduit,
    for moving or diverting fluid materials from within one area of the body to
    a separate area within the same body usually when the natural body
    apparatus for accomplishing this purpose has failed or become damaged.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    175,    for devices securing implanted conduits in or on the body.

    264+,   for other body inserted conduits.


CLS 604/9
TXT With flow control means (e.g., check valves, hydrocephalus pumps, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 8 including means to regulate the rate,
    direction, and pressure of flow within the transferring conduit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    247,    for fluid responsive means mounted in other devices for controlling
    flow into or out of the body.


CLS 604/10
TXT With antisiphon means:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein vacuum breaking means is provided
    in the conduit to prevent surges in the conduit caused by sudden changes in
    a person's body position, such as by suddenly rising to a standing position
    from a supine position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    129,    for siphon devices having vacuum breaking means (e.g., vent, etc.)
    used to introduce or remove fluids into or out of the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 215 for details of antisiphoning devices
    of general utility.


CLS 604/11
TXT MEANS FOR INSERTING FIBROUS OR FORAMINOUS RESIDENT PACKING, RECEPTOR, OR
    MEDICAMENT CARRIER INTO BODY ORIFICE:

    Subject matter under the class definition relating to a device used to
    place into a body opening a material which is formed of filaments or which
    includes numerous holes, pores, or interstices, the material serving to
    conform to the shape of the opening, absorb fluid therein, or bring a body
    treating material into contact with the wall thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    358+,   for absorbent internal pads.

    904,    for tampons.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    401,    Coating Implements With Material Supply, appropriate subclasses for
    applicators of general utility.


CLS 604/12
TXT With lubricating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 11 wherein the insert means carrying the
    packing, receptors, or medicament is provided with means to ease or
    facilitate insertion into the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    172     and 265, for surgical conduits with lubricating means.

    363,    for lubricated tampons.


CLS 604/13
TXT With means for ejecting continuous length insert (e.g., gauze packing):

    Subject matter under subclass 11 wherein the inserting means includes means
    for supplying a continuous length of packing material into the insertion
    means.


CLS 604/14
TXT Distal portion of inserting means deformed, expanded, or ruptured to permit
    passage of insert thereform:

    Subject matter under subclass 11 wherein the portion of the material
    inserting device inserted into the body opening is bent out of shape,
    unfolded, or burst to release the material into the opening.


CLS 604/15
TXT With slidable ejector (e.g., plunger or ram, etc.) inside tubular inserting
    means:

    Subject matter under subclass 11 wherein the means for ejecting the insert
    includes a plunger or piston slidably mounted inside a tubular holder.


CLS 604/16
TXT Ejector moved into operating position from stored location within or
    alongside inserting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein the plunger or ram which is
    initially stored in a position inside or alongside the tubular inserting
    means, is moved into alignment with the inserting means for ejection of the
    contents.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass and the subclass indented
    thereunder are intended to reduce the overall length of the ejector and
    insert means such that the two elements together have a combined length no
    greater than that of a single element alone.


CLS 604/17
TXT Ejector pivoted or swung into operating position:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 wherein the plunger or ram is turned or
    swiveled about an axis into alignment with the inserting means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    233,    for piston actuator pivoted for injection syringe.


CLS 604/18
TXT Tubular inserting means releasably interlocked with ejector:

    Subject matter under subclass 15 wherein the plunger or ram is maintained
    in a secured but disengageable relationship with the tubular inserting
    means prior to ejection of contents so that the plunger or ram will not be
    inadvertantly moved until ejection is desired.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    220,    for means preventing accidental displacement of piston or handheld
    syringe.


CLS 604/19
TXT MEANS FOR INTRODUCING OR REMOVING MATERIAL FROM BODY FOR THERAPEUTIC
    PURPOSES (E.G., MEDICATING, IRRIGATING, ASPIRATING, ETC.):

    Subject matter under the class definition including means for conducting
    body treating material into or out of a body or to or from the external
    membrane tissue surface of a body to treat said body.

    (1)     Note.  It is to be noted that many devices will include conduits
    for conducting the material into or out of the body, however, some devices
    may be merely placed over a body opening to place material in or receive
    material from the body.  An example of the latter form would be nose
    douches, wherein no tube extends into the nasal passages, but where
    material may be flushed into the nares and the discharge therefrom received
    in the device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27+,    for devices and methods for material introduction into and removal
    from the body through passages in the device.

    48+,    for devices and methods for material introduction into or removal
    from within the body.

    93+,    for devices for material introduction into or removal from within
    the body by means of a conduit, holder, or implanted reservoir inserted
    into the body.

    289+,   for devices and methods for material application and/or removal
    from external surface of body.

    890.1+, which provides for a device or system comprising a reservoir and
    control, pump, or controllable valve means for dispensing a drug to a
    living body which device is implanted in the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    606,    Surgery, subclasses 127+ for subject matter relating to removal of
    a calculus (e.g., stone) from the body.


CLS 604/20
TXT Infrared, visible light, ultraviolet, X-ray, or electrical energy applied
    to body (e.g., lontophoresis, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 19 combined with means for applying infrared,
    visible light, ultraviolet, X-ray, or electrical energy to body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, appropriate subclasses for analogous medical devices.

    606,    Surgery, subclass 2.5 for subject matter relating to removal of a
    calculus (e.g., stone) from the body wherein the calculus is fractured or
    disintegrated by use of light energy.


CLS 604/21
TXT With tubular injection means inserted into body:

    Subject matter under subclass 20 including a tubular means which is placed
    in the body for injecting material thereinto.

    (1)     Note.  The tubular means placed in the body includes needles,
    catheters, nozzles, and similar devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    93+     and 264+, for specific body inserted conduit structure.


CLS 604/22
TXT With means for cutting, scarifying, or vibrating (e.g., ultrasonic, etc.)
    tissue:

    Subject matter under subclass 19 wherein the means for introducing or
    removing material is provided with means to penetrate body tissue to cut
    said tissue, scratch said tissue, or to move said tissue up and down
    quickly and repeatedly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    46+,    for cutters and scarifiers wherein a medicament (e.g., vaccine,
    etc.) is coated thereon for introduction into the body by scratching the
    skin.


CLS 604/23
TXT Gas application:

    Subject matter under subclass 19 for injecting a body treating material in
    the form of gas into the body or for the application of said gas against
    the body.

    (1)     Note.  The gas application here is for other than breathing.


CLS 604/24
TXT Gas mixed with other material:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein the treating gas is mixed with
    another material before injection in or application onto the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for methods of mixing of liquids and solids.

    82+,    for devices for mixing liquids and solids.


CLS 604/25
TXT Ozone:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein the gas applied to body is ozone.


CLS 604/26
TXT Gas injection into body canal or cavity:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 for injecting the treating gas into a body
    canal or cavity.

    (1)     Note.  Canal or cavity includes blood vessels as well as other body
    cavities such as the pleural cavity.


CLS 604/27
TXT Material introduced into and removed from body through passage in body
    inserted means:

    Subject matter under subclass 19 including a body entering means having a
    channel or channels formed therein for conducting a body treating material
    into and out of a body.

    (1)     Note.  Obviously many devices for forcing fluid into the body
    (e.g., a piston type hypodermic syringe) can be used to both inject
    material into and draw material from the body.  To be classifiable in this
    subclass, a patent must claim separate passages for both injecting and
    withdrawing material, or must claim injection and withdrawal through a
    single passage.


CLS 604/28
TXT Method:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 including processes wherein the body
    treating material enters and leaves the body through a channel or channels
    in a device inserted in a body.

    (1)     Note.  To be classifiable in this subclass, a patent must claim the
    process of both injection and withdrawal of fluent material.


CLS 604/29
TXT Peritoneal dialysis:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 relating to means for conducting the body
    treating material into and out of the visceral containing cavity defined by
    the peritoneal membrane for the purpose of osmotically removing body waste
    materials.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 321.6+ for
    hemodialysis apparatus.


CLS 604/30
TXT Flow control:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 including means for varying the amount or
    rate of body treating material entering and leaving a body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65+,    for condition responsive flow control means.

    236,    for material flow control means associated with hand or body
    supported injectors.

    246+,   for means for metering or regulating flow of material to or from
    the body.

    254,    for a float type flow control device associated with a drip meter.


CLS 604/31
TXT By self-acting means or condition responsive sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein the flow of the body treating
    material into and out of the body is arrested by a means not requiring any
    action by a person or by a detector means responsive to some variable in
    the body or the flow control means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    65+,    for similar devices controlling flow of a body effecting agent into
    or out of the body by condition responsive sensor.

    245+,   for devices terminating flow into or out of the body by self-acting
    means.


CLS 604/32
TXT Rotary valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 including a rotatable type valve for
    controlling the flow of the body treating material into and out of a body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    248,    for flow control device for injecting material into or out of the
    body as by a rotatable valve.


CLS 604/33
TXT Slide or reciprocating valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 including a longitudinally movable element
    whose linear movement controls flow of a body treating material into and
    out of a body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    249,    for slide or reciprocating valves on metering devices for
    controlling flow into or out of the body.


CLS 604/34
TXT Deformable occluding tube valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 including pinch type tube valves which
    when squeezed deformably occlude resilient passage walls to control flow of
    a body treating material into and out of a body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    250,    for occluder type pinch valves for controlling flow into or out of
    the body.


CLS 604/35
TXT With aspirating or vacuum removing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 including means to initiate the evacuation
    of body treating material from the body by means of suction producing mean
    located in the outlet channel or passage in the body inserted means.

    (1)     Note.  For a patent to be classified in this subclass, the suction
    causing means must be claimed as being within the discharge passage, per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128+,   for siphon devices used to remove material from a reservoir or the
    body.


CLS 604/36
TXT Means moved by person to introduce and remove material:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 including means manually actuated by an
    operator to force the body treating material into, and draw it out of, the
    body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181+,   for structure of devices moved by person to force material into or
    out of body.


CLS 604/37
TXT Hand-supported squeeze bulb:

    Subject matter under subclass 36 wherein the means is a resilient
    deformable handheld bulb pump which is actuable to force the body treating
    material into and out of the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185,    212+ and 217, for other handheld squeeze bulb devices for injecting
    or removing material from the body.


CLS 604/38
TXT Piston:

    Subject matter under subclass 36 wherein the means is a ram or plunger
    which is reciprocated back and forth to alternately force in and withdraw
    the body treating material to and from the body.

    (1)     Note.  Blood "telltale" syringes are not classifiable herein since
    the withdrawal of material (blood) in that instance is merely for testing
    for the presence of said material and not for the purpose of removing it,
    per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218+    and 900, for piston structure of hand held injectors, including
    those having blood "telltale" aspirating means.


CLS 604/39
TXT Structure of douche nozzle having separate ingress and egress passages
    therein:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 wherein significance is attributed to
    conduit means which is formed with separate channels for leading the body
    treating material into and conducting it from the body, the means having
    specific configuration or component for use in irrigating a body orifice
    such as the rectum or vagina.

    (1)     Note.  A patent is classified as a original in this subclass only
    if it includes the recitation of structural details of a douche nozzle as
    part of the claimed subject matter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    275,    for nozzles used for insertion into a body orifice wherein material
    is either introduced into the body or removed therefrom.


CLS 604/40
TXT With telescoping movement between ingress and egress passages:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 including slidable ingress and egress
    channel members which are axially movable within one another.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158+    and 164+, for body inserted conduits having members slidably
    mounted with respect to one another.


CLS 604/41
TXT With body orifice occluding means:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 wherein the body inserted conduit includes
    an enlarged member carried on the external surface of said conduit which
    closes off or occludes the body orifice into which the conduit is inserted
    to prevent the escape of the body treating material from the orifice except
    by the provided egress passage.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    278,    for occluder structure on nozzles for injecting or removing
    material into or out of the body.


CLS 604/42
TXT Axially adjustable:

    Subject matter under subclass 41 wherein the enlarged member is axially
    movable along the length of the nozzle surface so that the position of the
    occluding means can be varied to seal the body opening at different depths
    of insertion of the nozzle.


CLS 604/43
TXT Body inserted conduit with separate ingress and egress passages:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 wherein the body inserted conduit comprise
    separate and distinct channels or lumens, one of which is the introducing
    passage and the other is the discharge passage.


CLS 604/44
TXT Having body piercing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 43 wherein one of the lumened conduits is
    provided with a sharpened needle tip or point enabling the device to pierce
    directly into the tissue.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    272+,   for single passage conduits with tissue piercing points.


CLS 604/45
TXT Having air or gas venting passage:

    Subject matter under subclass 43 wherein one of the channels or lumens is a
    passage for introducing gas or air into the body.

    (1)     Note.  Devices for introducing air or gas only into the conduit,
    usually for cleaning, are classified in this class, subclasses 266+.  To be
    classifiable in this subclass, a patent must claim that one of the passages
    is for gas or air venting into or from body, usually for preventing
    collapse of body member about the conduit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    266+,   for conduits having means for admitting air or suction into the
    tube interior only.


CLS 604/46
TXT Treating material introduced into body by contact with wound formed therein
    by solid scarifier, cutter, or the like (e.g., scratching skin with vaccine
    coated needle, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 19 relating to a solid element for
    scratching, puncturing, or otherwise opening body tissue so that a body
    treating material can be placed in a wound formed thereby.

    (1)     Note.  Hollow needles or puncturing elements are not included in
    this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for devices for introducing and/or removing material into or from
    the body by use of a scarifier or cutter without treating material thereon.


CLS 604/47
TXT With separate applicator for material or separate holder for material
    placed on applicator or in wound:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 including:  a separate means for holding a
    body treating material that is placed on the body tissue opening device; a
    separate means for applying a body treating material to the skin opening
    device; or a separate means for applying a body treating material to a
    wound made by the body tissue opening device.

    (1)     Note.  The separate means disclosed in the patents in this subclass
    include a reservoir holding a liquid vaccine in which a needle is dipped
    before insertion of said needle into the skin; a wick arranged to drip a
    liquid vaccine onto the blade used to penetrate and cut the skin; and a
    brush used to apply liquid vaccine to that portion of the skin scratched by
    a needle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for swabs applying medicament to skin.


CLS 604/48
TXT Treating material introduced into or removed from body orifice, or inserted
    or removed subcutaneously other than by diffusing through skin:

    Subject matter under subclass 19 wherein a body treating material is placed
    into or removed from a body opening, or is placed under the external
    membraneous tissue covering the body or removed therefrom other than by
    being applied to the skin and permeating therethrough.

    (1)     Note.  Insertion of material under an eyelid is not considered as
    insertion into body.

    (2)     Note.  Conduits which are provided with plural outlet apertures are
    not considered to be sprayers when placed in a body orifice since the wall
    of the conduit contacts the wall of the orifice which prevents the spraying
    function.  However, if such a conduit is provided with a guard spaced
    outwardly from the wall of the conduit so that fluid issues form a
    plurality of apertures formed in the conduit, then the arrangement permits
    spraying even when the conduit is inserted in a body orifice because the
    guard keeps the conduit spaced from the wall of the body orifice, and such
    sprayers are classified in Class 128 in appropriate subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for swabs used to apply a medicament on or in the body.

    299+,   for devices used to apply or remove material to or from an external
    surface of the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclass 572 for means used to wipe or dab a surface of
    the body to collect material for diagnostic purposes.


CLS 604/49
TXT Methods:

    Subject matter under subclass 48 relating to a process for placing material
    into the body, or removing it therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    290,    for methods for applying or removing material to or from an
    external surface of the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 203.12+ for means for mixing a treating agent
    with air or oxygen breathed by a person.


CLS 604/50
TXT Material introduction or removal responsive to sensed body condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein injection or withdrawal of
    material into or out of the body is responsive to specific detected
    condition of the body.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass disclose methods wherein the body
    condition governs the injection or withdrawal of material to or from body.
    For example, an irregular heartbeat can be sensed by an EKG machine which
    in turn actuates an infusion syringe to supply a drug (e.g., adrenaline,
    etc.) to correct the irregularity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66,     for apparatus responsive to sensed body condition.


CLS 604/51
TXT Material introduced into body or removed therefrom through piercing conduit
    (e.g., needle, etc.) inserted into body:

    Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein the material is injected into or
    removed from the body through a needle or trocar which has been inserted
    into the body tissue by puncturing said body tissue.


CLS 604/52
TXT Material introduced into or removed from blood vessel:

    Subject matter under subclass 51 wherein the material is injected into or
    removed from a vein or an artery.


CLS 604/53
TXT By catheter:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 wherein a flexible tube is either inserted
    through the piercing element or the flexible tube surrounds the piercing
    element to conduct the material into or out of the vein or artery.

    (1)     Note.  In both instances the piercing element is withdrawn from the
    vein or artery and the flexible tube remains in the vein or artery to admit
    or remove the body affecting material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158+    and 164+, for devices used for inserting tubes into blood vessels.

    280+,   for a catheter used to inject material into the body, or remove
    same.


CLS 604/54
TXT Material introduced into or removed from body orifice:

    Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein the body treating material is
    injected into or removed from a body opening.

    (1)     Note.  Body opening here means a natural or artificially
    constructed body opening.


CLS 604/55
TXT Female reproductory tract:

    Subject matter under subclass 54 wherein the material is introduced into or
    removed from the female vagina, uterus, or fallopian tubes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    935,    Genetic Engineering:  Recombinant DNA Technology, Hybrid or Fused
    Cell Technology, and Related Manipulations of Nucleic Acids, which provides
    a search collection for processes of altering the genetic structure of
    microorganisms; genes and methods of modifying genes and their expression;
    vectors and methods of modifying vectors; methods of introducing DNA into a
    cell; microorganisms, per se, which have had their genetic sequence altered
    by recombinant DNA techniques or by cell fusion or by uptake of DNA;
    testing; separation techniques; apparatus; and methods of use of vectors or
    of the genetically engineered microorganisms; methods of gene therapy or
    genetic modification of living organisms.


CLS 604/56
TXT Liquid mixed with solid or different liquid:

    Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein a liquid is blended with a solid
    material or another liquid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82+,    for means for mixing a liquid with a solid material or another
    liquid.


CLS 604/57
TXT Means for placing solid treating material in body:

    Subject matter under subclass 48 relating to a device having means for
    placing a body treating material in solid form in the body.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are suppositories comprising a
    solid mass of body treating material and a means connected thereto for use
    in inserting the mass into a body orifice, e.g., a handle having one end
    fixed to a plug of treating material that is inserted by means of the
    handle into a body orifice.  However, a mere holder for solid treating
    material which is inserted in the body, such as a perforated casing holding
    a solid treating material meltable or dissolvable when placed in a body
    orifice, is classifiable in other appropriate subclasses in this class,
    e.g., subclasses 285+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    285+,   for a suppository consisting of solid meltable or dissolvable
    material.

    309,    for solid body treating material applied to an external surface of
    the body.


CLS 604/58
TXT Powder dispenser:

    Subject matter under subclass 57 wherein the solid body treating material
    placed in the body is particulate in form.


CLS 604/59
TXT Means for ejecting solid from holder:

    Subject matter under subclass 57 wherein additional means are provided to
    expel the body treating material from the device in which it is retained.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11+,    for devices for inserting solid fibrous members into a body orifice.


CLS 604/60
TXT Solid ejected from body inserted conduit:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 wherein the solid body treating material
    is expelled from a tube type element that is inserted into the body.


CLS 604/61
TXT Eject means moved by force applied to trigger associated with pistol grip:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 wherein the material expelling means is
    driven by force exerted on an actuator element associated with a pistol
    type hand grip.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    223,    for other injectors having pistol grip structure.


CLS 604/62
TXT Solid units successively fed to conduit from supply means (e.g., magazine,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 60 wherein units of the solid treating
    material are consecutively introduced into the tube type element from a
    source connected therewith.


CLS 604/63
TXT Eject means driven by spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 wherein the material expelling means is
    driven by force exerted by an elastic body which recovers its original
    shape when released after having been distorted.


CLS 604/64
TXT Solid loaded into injector through opening in side wall of plunger housing:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 wherein a solid body treating material is
    placed in an inserting device through a wall opening intermediate the ends
    of a casing through which the injector means moves to expel the agent
    therefrom.


CLS 604/65
TXT Material flow varying means controlled by condition responsive sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 48 including an apparatus for changing the
    amount or rate of body treating material entering or leaving the body, and
    a detector means which senses a change in some variable and in response to
    said change controls the operation of the apparatus and thereby the amount
    or rate of material entering or leaving the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for apparatus sensing flow into and out of body in response to body
    condition.

    50,     for methods of controlling amounts or rate of flow into or out of
    the body in response to sensed condition.

    245,    for devices self-terminating flow to or from body.


CLS 604/66
TXT Sensor responsive to body condition:

    Subject matter under subclass 65 wherein the detector senses a change in
    condition of the body and changes the rate of flow into or out of the body
    in response thereto.

    (1)     Note.  Changes in body condition include an increase in the pulse
    rate or the temperature of the body.


CLS 604/67
TXT Sensor controls pump, motor, or pressure driven means:

    Subject matter under subclass 65 wherein the flow varying means is a pump,
    motor, or pressure driven means responsive to the condition detected.


CLS 604/68
TXT Needleless hypodermic injector:

    Subject matter under subclass 48 wherein a body treating material is forced
    through the skin without the use of a piercing conduit or needle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131+,   for devices for automatically forcing material into the body
    through piercing conduits.


CLS 604/69
TXT Material expelled from injector by explosive charge:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein the body treating material is
    ejected from the injector by an explosive charge.


CLS 604/70
TXT Material expelled from injector by pressurized fluid:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein the body treating material is
    propelled by a fluid under pressure, either by direct application of the
    pressure against the material or by application of the pressure against a
    means which forces the material from the injector or reservoir.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140+,   149 and 150, for injectors driven by fluid pressure, both direct
    and indirect.


CLS 604/71
TXT Multidose type:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein plural doses of the body treating
    material are either sequentially or simultaneously fed into the injector
    for injection of measured doses into the body.


CLS 604/72
TXT Structure of material reservoir replaceably held in injector:

    Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein significance is attributed to the
    details of structure of a treating material container or cartridge which is
    replaceably mounted in the needleless injecting means.

    (1)     Note.  A patent is classified as an original only if it includes
    the recitation of structural details of a medicament reservoir as a part of
    the claimed subject matter.


CLS 604/73
TXT Means forceably introducing or removing material from body orifice or
    wound:

    Subject matter under subclass 48 including means for either manually or
    automatically thrusting the body treating material into or out of a body
    orifice or wound.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131+,   for devices forcing material into or out of the body through a
    tubular conduit by means of fluid pressure, motor-driven, or mechanical
    energy storing means.

    181+,   for devices manually operated to force material into or out of the
    body through a conduit.


CLS 604/74
TXT Lacteal extractors (e.g., breast pump, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 73 wherein the means for removing material
    from the body is a breast engaging means, usually in the form of a cup,
    which includes suction producing means for aspirating lacteal material from
    within the body by suction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    313+,   for devices removing material from the external body surface by
    suction.


CLS 604/75
TXT With collapsable bulb means:

    Subject matter under subclass 74 wherein the suction producing means is a
    squeeze bulb.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212+    and 316, for other squeeze bulb devices used to introduce or remove
    material to or from the body.


CLS 604/76
TXT With suction generated orally by person or user:

    Subject matter under subclass 74 wherein the suction producing means is a
    tube extending from the breast engaging cup which tube is engaged by the
    mouth a person or user to generate the suction.


CLS 604/77
TXT Structure of means contacting portion of head (e.g., tongue, etc.) during
    placement of treating material in mouth or throat:

    Subject matter under subclass 48 where significance is attributed to
    configuration, structure, or components for engaging part of the head of
    the user for introducing a body treating material into the oral cavity or
    esophagus of the user.

    (1)     Note.  A patent is classified as an original in this subclass only
    if it includes the recitation of structural details of a head contacting
    means as a part of the claimed subject matter. Patents claiming only body
    nourishment are not classifiable herein, as for example, nursing bottles
    for infants.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    215,    Bottles and Jars, subclass 11.1 for nursing bottles and nipples.


CLS 604/78
TXT Drinking cup:

    Subject matter under subclass 77 wherein the configuration, structure, or
    arrangement of components are in the form of a container having an open end
    for holding a body treating material to be introduced into the oral cavity
    of the user.

    (1)     Note.  The body affecting agent may be a liquid or a liquid
    combined with a solid such as a pill or tablet.


CLS 604/79
TXT Means for engaging head to hold feed device in mouth:

    Subject matter under subclass 77 wherein a harness, framework, or other
    means is provided which contacts a person's head to position a body
    treating material supply means in the oral cavity of the user.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174+,   for devices for securing body inserted tubes onto patient.


CLS 604/80
TXT Gravity feed to body from plural material reservoirs:

    Subject matter under subclass 48 wherein the body treating material flows
    under the influence of gravity from multiple storage sources to one or more
    persons.

    (1)     Note.  The plural material reservoirs may supply one or more
    persons with body affecting material from one or more conduits placed in
    one or more places.


CLS 604/81
TXT With self-acting sequential flow from reservoirs:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the body treating material enters
    the body after flowing first from one storage source and thereafter
    continuously from a second or third source without pause after flow from
    said first storage source has terminated, said separate serial flow sources
    controlled by means not requiring any intervention by a person.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 109+ for self-controlled branched flow
    systems of general utility.


CLS 604/82
TXT Means for intermixing liquid with solid or different liquid:

    Subject matter under subclass 48 including an apparatus for blending
    together a liquid with a solid material, or a liquid with another liquid of
    a different kind.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for a method of mixing liquid with a solid material or a different
    liquid.

    416,    for materials mixed within a medical container.


CLS 604/83
TXT Treating material introduced directly into liquid stream path:

    Subject matter under subclass 82 wherein a body treating material is
    injected directly into a flowing liquid, usually a confined stream, which
    blends and carries the mixture to the person.


CLS 604/84
TXT Solid treating material:

    Subject matter under subclass 83 wherein the body treating material is in
    the form of a dissolvable or suspended solid.


CLS 604/85
TXT Liquid stream passes through reservoir containing treating material:

    Subject matter under subclass 83 wherein the liquid stream receives the
    body treating material to be mixed therewith by passing through a reservoir
    containing the body treating material.


CLS 604/86
TXT Septum pierced by conduit:

    Subject matter under subclass 83 wherein the body treating material is
    introduced into the liquid stream through a wall which is pierced by a wall
    piercing conductor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     148, 201+, 244, and 415, for piercable septum structure on other
    medical devices.


CLS 604/87
TXT Means broken, cut, pierced, or torn to permit mixing:

    Subject matter under subclass 82 including an element which is fractured,
    separated by an edged instrument, punctured by some means, or separated by
    having portions thereof rended apart by pulling for the purpose of bringing
    the liquids and a solid material, together for blending.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      200, and 306, for means, broken, cut, pierced, or torn to permit
    flow of treating material to the body.


CLS 604/88
TXT Septum:

    Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein a separating wall is punctured by
    a pointed element such as a hollow needle to permit mixing of the separated
    liquids.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201,    for a septum pierced by a conduit to permit flow of treating
    material to the body.


CLS 604/89
TXT Closure or barrier between compartments moved to permit mixing:

    Subject matter under subclass 82 including a sealing element which is
    displaced from its sealing position between separate storage spaces to
    permit flow of a material therebetween for the purpose of blending or, in
    the case of a solid in a liquid.


CLS 604/90
TXT Closure moved, expanded, or flexed by force transmitted by liquid:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the sealing means is displaced,
    expanded, or flexed to permit mixing by pressure exerted by a liquid which
    itself has been subjected to a force to permit mixing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    150,    for devices expelling material therefrom by means of a liquid.


CLS 604/91
TXT Closure moved by relative movement between closure and separate protruding
    member:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 wherein the sealing means is displaced by
    a protruding rod or member which is moved into contact with the sealing
    means by relative movement therebetween to permit mixing between
    compartments.


CLS 604/92
TXT Solid dissolved in liquid:

    Subject matter under subclass 82 wherein a solid material blends with a
    liquid by passing into solution or suspension therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     for a device in which a solid material is injected into a stream of
    liquid to dissolve therein.


CLS 604/93
TXT Material introduced or removed through conduit, holder, or implantable
    reservoir inserted in body:

    Subject matter under subclass 48 wherein the body treating material is
    placed in or removed from the body by (a) a tubular means having a bore or
    lumen hole extending therethrough, (b) transfer to or from a retaining
    means located on an implement placed in the body, or (c) by release or
    collection from a storage container surgically implanted in the body.

    (1)     Note.  The body affecting or treating material usually is placed in
    or removed from the body by means of a catheter, needle, a rod having a
    medicament carried thereon (a holder), or from a tube having one closed end
    located outside the body and an open end located within the body.


CLS 604/94
TXT Dual nozzles for insertion into paired body orifices (e.g., nasal passages,
    etc):

    Subject matter under subclass 93 having two tubular conduits insertible in
    two complementary body openings.


CLS 604/95
TXT Conduit with self-propelled or remote control means:

    Subject matter under subclass 93 wherein the body inserted tubular conduit
    has means providing self advancement of the conduit into tortuous areas of
    the body, or means manipulated external to the body for guiding the conduit
    through a body cavity or passage.


CLS 604/96
TXT Having means inflated in body (e.g., inflatable nozzle, dilator, balloon
    catheter, occluder, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 93 including an element carried by the
    conduit or holder which is expanded by a fluid such as air while disposed
    within the body for the purpose of retaining the conduit, dilating the body
    opening, or sealing the body opening.


CLS 604/97
TXT Including means forcing inflation fluid into inflatable means:

    Subject matter under subclass 96 wherein means are actuated to pressurize
    the inflatable means within the body cavity or orifice.


CLS 604/98
TXT Pressurized inflation means:

    Subject matter under subclass 97 wherein the means for pressurizing a
    balloon is a fluid source under pressure which, upon release, inflates the
    balloon.


CLS 604/99
TXT With inflation or deflation control means:

    Subject matter under subclass 96 wherein the inflated means is provided
    with a means for limiting the inflation of or controlling the amount of
    deflation of the inflated means.


CLS 604/100
TXT With indicator means:

    Subject matter under subclass 96 including means indicating the degree of
    inflation or deflation within the inflated means while inserted in the body.

    (1)     Note.  Some patents disclose visual calibrations to indicate the
    degree of inflation and others disclose the use of a colored fluid to
    indicate leakage of the inflating fluid within the body.


CLS 604/101
TXT With plural balloons on conduit:

    Subject matter under subclass 96 wherein multiple inflatable means are
    mounted on the body inserted conduit.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass disclose the use of multiple
    inflating means which inflate inside the body to hold that portion affected
    in an inflated mode and additional inflating means outside the opening in
    the body to occlude and seal the opening.  Other patents disclose inflating
    means axially spaced upon the conduit which serve to hold the conduit
    within the body while inflated.


CLS 604/102
TXT With aperture in conduit proximal of inflated means:

    Subject matter under subclass 96 wherein a drainage or material supplying
    orifice is located downstream or proximal of the balloon means on the body
    inserted conduit.


CLS 604/103
TXT With means bonding or mechanically securing balloon sleeve or connector
    member (e.g., coupling funnel, etc.) to conduit:

    Subject matter under subclass 96 wherein specific connecting structure is
    provided for holding the inflatable means or a coupling funnel on the
    conduit by bonding or mechanically securing said elements to the body
    inserted conduit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    283,    for body inserted conduits (e.g., catheters) with coupling or
    connector structure.


CLS 604/104
TXT Having means expanding body orifice or canal (e.g., dilator, retaining
    means, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 93 wherein specific structure is provided for
    distending or stretching a body opening or vessel.

    (1)     Note.  Many devices inserted in a body orifice will enlarge it.
    However, a patent is classified as an original in this subclass only if it
    includes a recitation in the claimed subject matter of specific structure
    for dilating a body orifice, such as "ridges projecting outwardly from the
    surface of the nozzle for enlarging a body orifice".  Conversely, use of
    terminology such as "a dilating nozzle" in claimed subject matter is not a
    recitation of structure which will include a patent herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    606,    Surgery, subclasses 191+ for dilators from the body.


CLS 604/105
TXT Expanding bow:

    Subject matter under subclass 104 wherein the means for expanding the body
    opening is one or more bowlike members carried upon the conduit which are
    secured at their ends and in which expansion is produced by causing the
    ends of said bowlike members to approach each other to dilate said body
    opening.


CLS 604/106
TXT Expanding arm or finger:

    Subject matter under subclass 104 wherein the means for expanding the body
    opening are elongated elements which are inserted into a body opening with
    their longitudinal axis substantially parallel to the wall thereof and then
    pivoted about one end so that the other end expands radially and enlarges
    the opening.


CLS 604/107
TXT Expansion actuated by axially movable member:

    Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein arm or finger expansion is
    effected by means of a longitudinally movable member which spreads open the
    arms or fingers from a closed initial position.


CLS 604/108
TXT Rotatable means actuates axially movable member:

    Subject matter under subclass 107 wherein the axially movable member is
    moved longitudinally by means of a rotatable member such as a threaded nut,
    etc.


CLS 604/109
TXT Expansion actuated by rotatable means (e.g., threaded or cammed member,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 106 wherein arm or finger expansion is caused
    by rotating a threaded or cammed member to spread open the arms or fingers
    from an initial closed position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for patents disclosing rotating means moving an axially movable
    member to expand an arm or finger orifice expanding means.


CLS 604/110
TXT Having means for preventing reuse of device:

    Subject matter under subclass 93 provided with means which disables a
    device such that the device cannot be utilized for placing the body
    treating material in the body more than one time.


CLS 604/111
TXT Having means for indicating device is defective, used, or tampered with:

    Subject matter under subclass 93 provided with means to alert a person that
    an apparatus for placing a body treating material in the body is faulty,
    previously used, or handled in some way such that it has become defective.


CLS 604/112
TXT Having means for desensitizing skin:

    Subject matter under subclass 93 including means for making the skin
    insensitive to pain before insertion of a hypodermic needle into body
    tissue.


CLS 604/113
TXT Having means for cooling or heating body, treating or collected material or
    device:

    Subject matter under subclass 93 providing means for increasing or
    decreasing the temperature of the material, the apparatus for placing or
    removing the material in the body, or the body itself.


CLS 604/114
TXT Electric means:

    Subject matter under subclass 113 wherein the means for heating or cooling
    consists of electric powered source.


CLS 604/115
TXT Having means for protruding skin to facilitate piercing it:

    Subject matter under subclass 93 provided with means for raising a portion
    of the skin of the area where a hypodermic needle is to be inserted,
    thereby facilitating such insertion.


CLS 604/116
TXT Having means for locating or identifying point where body is to be pierced
    (e.g., apertured body fitting template, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 93 including a body marking means, a guide,
    or other means for indicating the location of a site where needle will be
    inserted.


CLS 604/117
TXT Having structure for controlling depth of insertion of body piercer:

    Subject matter under subclass 93 including specific structure for
    regulating the extent of penetration of a needle, or a body piercing
    element into the body.

    (1)     Note.  Obviously the needle holding hub of a hypodermic syringe
    limits the depth of penetration of the needle into the body.  However, to
    be classified as an original in this subclass, a patent must include in its
    claimed subject matter a recitation of structure specifically designed to
    control the depth of insertion of a piercing member into the body and not
    intended primarily for some other purpose, such as, for example, holding a
    needle.


CLS 604/118
TXT Having means for varying, regulating, indicating, or limiting injection
    pressure or aspirating suction:

    Subject matter under subclass 93 including apparatus for changing,
    controlling, signifying, or restricting the magnitude of the pressure or
    vacuum under which a body treating material is injected into or removed
    from the body.


CLS 604/119
TXT Means varying or regulating suction:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 including means for changing, altering,
    or controlling the degree of suction within a body inserted conduit.


CLS 604/120
TXT With cyclic or timed regulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 119 wherein the change or regulation of
    suction is accomplished in a recurring periodic sequence generally
    intermittant in nature.


CLS 604/121
TXT On piston type injector or aspirator:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein the pressure or vacuum varying,
    regulating, indicating, or limiting means is in communication with a piston
    or ram type injector.


CLS 604/122
TXT Having means for eliminating and/or preventing injection of air into body:

    Subject matter under subclass 93 including means for removing air from a
    body treating material or from the means for placing the material in the
    body for the purpose of preventing injection of the air into the body.


CLS 604/123
TXT From pump injection device:

    Subject matter under subclass 122 wherein the means from which air is
    eliminated is a pump type device.


CLS 604/124
TXT From injection means moved by person to impel material into body:

    Subject matter under subclass 122 wherein the air prevention or elimination
    means is provided in a manually operated injection means such as a syringe.


CLS 604/125
TXT From hand supported injection means:

    Subject matter under subclass 124 wherein the manually operated injection
    means is handheld.


CLS 604/126
TXT By hydrophilic or hydrophobic filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 122 wherein the air prevention or elimination
    means consists of either a water attracting or water repelling filter
    mounted in an injection device.


CLS 604/127
TXT By low level float cutoff:

    Subject matter under subclass 122 wherein the air elimination or prevention
    means is a float valve which cuts off liquid flow from the injector
    reservoir when the liquid level reaches a predetermined level.


CLS 604/128
TXT Having siphon means for removing material from external source or body:

    Subject matter under subclass 93 including a U-shape tube means for
    transferring a material from a storage means or the body by means of
    atmospheric pressure acting on the material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 123+ for siphon structure of general
    utility.


CLS 604/129
TXT With vacuum breaking means (e.g., vent, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 128 including suction breaking means on the
    siphon to prevent the formation of tissue necrosis on body inserted
    conduits caused by an excess of liquid column suction in the conduit during
    siphoning of material from the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for antisiphon devices in body inserted shunts.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclasses 215+ for antisiphoning devices of
    general utility.


CLS 604/130
TXT Having projectile injector operated upon impact with body:

    Subject matter under subclass 93 wherein a body treating material reservoir
    is projected by an external force across an open space into contact with
    said body and which upon impact with said body injects the material
    thereinto by inertial motion.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    124,    Mechanical Guns and Projectors, appropriate subclasses for
    projectiles of general utility.


CLS 604/131
TXT Treating material forced into or out of body by self-acting fluid pressure,
    motor-driven, or mechanical energy storing means (e.g., pressure infusion
    or aspiration, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 93 wherein body treating material is thrust
    into or expelled from the body by (a) fluid pressure which does not require
    the application of force by a person during the injection, (b) an apparatus
    powered by a device which converts any form of energy into mechanical
    energy, or (c) a mechanical device capable of storing energy.


CLS 604/132
TXT Material impelled into body by contraction of expanded elastic material
    reservoir:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein a filled resilient reservoir
    chamber maintained in an overstressed condition returns to its original
    unstressed condition thereby forcing material out of the chamber during
    contraction of the chamber.


CLS 604/133
TXT Material exhausted from body by expansion of contracted elastic receptacle
    or resilient means therein:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 including a resilient chamber which under
    compression is allowed to expand, either from its own natural resiliency or
    from resilient means within the chamber, to draw or suck material into the
    chamber.


CLS 604/134
TXT Material impelled by spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the material is moved into or out
    of the body of force exerted by a elastic body which recovers its original
    shape when released after being distorted.


CLS 604/135
TXT Spring drives piston:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 wherein material is forced into or out of
    the body by means of a spring driven piston.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218+,   for manually operated piston injectors.


CLS 604/136
TXT Material conduit forced into body by spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 134 wherein a conduit for introducing or
    withdrawing material into or from the body is driven into the body by a
    spring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157,    for spring driven conduits wherein the material is withdrawn or
    introduced manually.


CLS 604/137
TXT Spring triggered by skin contacting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 136 wherein a spring releasing mechanism is
    actuated by a means pressing against the skin around the injection site.


CLS 604/138
TXT Portion of conduit stored in material supply means:

    Subject matter under subclass 136 wherein at least a part of the conduit is
    stored within the material supply reservoir before ejection therefrom by
    the spring driving means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    195+,   for conduits partly stored within the reservoir and manually
    ejectable therefrom.


CLS 604/139
TXT Material supply means pierced by conduit:

    Subject matter under subclass 136 wherein the material reservoir is
    punctured by the spring driven conduit to deliver the body treating
    material to the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201+,   for feed conduits piercing the reservoir on manually operated
    injectors.


CLS 604/140
TXT Material impelled by pressurized charge of gas or vacuum:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein body treating material is forced
    into the body by means of a super atmospheric pressurized charge of gas or
    removed from the body by a releasable trapped charge of negative pressure.


CLS 604/141
TXT Material impelled by means (e.g., diaphragm, piston) moved by gas or vacuum
    pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 140 wherein the pressurized charge of gas or
    vacuum moves an intermediate means which in turn forces the material into
    or out of the body.


CLS 604/142
TXT Reservoir prepressurized or exhausted by squeeze bulb:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein a manually operated resilient
    bulb is utilized to initially charge or remove air from the reservoir
    thereby pressurizing or vacuumizing the intermediate means to impel the
    material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217,    for continuous pressurization or exhaustion of handheld reservoirs
    by squeeze bulbs during injections.


CLS 604/143
TXT Piston impelled by gas or vacuum pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein the intermediate means moved by
    gas or vacuum pressure is a piston or ram.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    218+,   for manually operated piston structure.


CLS 604/144
TXT And impelling material conduit into body:

    Subject matter under subclass 143 wherein the material conduit is forced
    into the patient via the gas or vacuum pressurized piston.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156,    for impelled conduits having manually operated material impelling
    means.


CLS 604/145
TXT Pressurizing gas generated by chemical reaction:

    Subject matter under subclass 140 wherein the gas pressure is caused by a
    chemical interaction between gas generating components which when released
    within a reservoir pressurizes the contents to expel said contents.


CLS 604/146
TXT Pressurizing gas or vacuum charge produced by mechanical actuator (e.g.,
    air pump, etc.) associated with injector:

    Subject matter under subclass 140 wherein the material containing reservoir
    is pressurized by a manually operated means, such as a piston air pump,
    attached to or directly located on the injector reservoir.

    (1)     Note.  For a patent to be classified herein, the reservoir must be
    pressurized each time it is used by the actuator prior to the injection.


CLS 604/147
TXT Pressurizing gas or vacuum charge supplied by external storage source:

    Subject matter under subclass 140 wherein the material reservoir is
    pressurized by gas or vacuum delivered from a supply remote from the
    injector or aspirator, such as a tank or motor-driven pump, which is
    connected to the reservoir by a conduit.


CLS 604/148
TXT Means broken, cut, pierced, or torn to permit material flow:

    Subject matter under subclass 140 wherein the pressurized source is
    provided with frangible, rupturable, or pierceable means which upon
    fracturing, cutting, puncturing, or tearing thereof enables material to be
    impelled into or out of the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      87, 200, 244, and 306, for other medical devices having means
    broken, cut, pierced, or torn to permit flow of a treating material to the
    body.


CLS 604/149
TXT Material impelled by negative pressure created by a current of fluid (e.g.,
    air entrainment, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the material is entrained or
    carried into or out of the body by means of a vacuum created by a current
    of fluid produced in a separate location.

    (1)     Note.  The current of fluid passes through a venturi type device
    which sets up a suction or pressure into which the material is drawn.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    35,     for devices having air entrainment suction produced in the
    discharge side of body inserted means.


CLS 604/150
TXT Material impelled by hydraulic or water hydrant pressure:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the material is either thrust
    into or removed from the body by force exerted by hydraulic pressure or
    consists of water flowing from a pressurized water source, such as a faucet.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is  distinguished from subclass 149 in that
    the material is forced directly into the body by the hydrant pressure
    itself.


CLS 604/151
TXT Material impelled by pump:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the material is forced into or
    out of the body by means of a device which transfers the material from one
    place to another through tubes or similar conduits.


CLS 604/152
TXT Reciprocating piston type:

    Subject matter under subclass 151 wherein the pump is a piston or ram
    slidable in a chamber having inlet and outlet ports in the chamber.


CLS 604/153
TXT Deformable resilient chamber type:

    Subject matter under subclass 151 wherein the pump consists of an elastic
    chamber which when repetively deformed by actuator means forces material
    into or out of the patient.


CLS 604/154
TXT Material impelled by nonreciprocating piston driven by motor:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the material is thrust into or
    out of the body by a ram slidably mounted in a cylinder and moved linearly
    in one direction only therein by a device which converts any form of energy
    into mechanical energy.


CLS 604/155
TXT With threaded drive means:

    Subject matter under subclass 154 wherein the piston is connected to the
    motor by threaded drive means.


CLS 604/156
TXT Conduit forced into body by self-acting fluid pressure, motor-driven, or
    mechanical energy storing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 93 wherein a material conductor or piercing
    conduit is thrust into the body by (a) fluid pressure which does not
    require the application of force by a person, (b) an apparatus powered by a
    device which converts any form of energy into mechanical energy, or (c) a
    mechanical device capable of storing energy.


CLS 604/157
TXT Conduit impelled by spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 156 wherein the conductor is thrust into the
    body by a force exerted by an elastic body which recovers its original
    shape when released after having been distorted.


CLS 604/158
TXT Body entering conduit axially movable within body piercing conduit while
    the former is disposed in the body:

    Subject matter under subclass 93 wherein a body inserted tube is placed
    below the skin surface by means of a hollow piercing cannula through which
    the tube moves, after which the piercing cannula is removed, leaving the
    tube in place in the tissue.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    280+,   for body inserted catheters, per se.


CLS 604/159
TXT Having mechanical means for feeding conduit through piercing conduit:

    Subject matter under subclass 158 wherein the tube is impelled through the
    piercing conduit by a mechanical means such as a piston, pump, or reel.


CLS 604/160
TXT Having longitudinal groove or slot in piercing conduit to permit removal
    from body entering conduit:

    Subject matter under subclass 158 wherein the hollow piercing conduit is
    slotted throughout its entire length so that the body entering conduit can
    be laterally removed from the piercing conduit when the piercing conduit is
    removed from the body.


CLS 604/161
TXT Piercing conduit longitudinally separable for removal from body entering
    conduit:

    Subject matter under subclass 158 wherein the piercing conduit is
    longitudinally divisible by means of weakened wall portions or other means
    such that the piercing conduit can be easily removed and separated from
    around the body entering conduit.


CLS 604/162
TXT Having guard on piercing conduit for protecting body entering conduit:

    Subject matter under subclass 158 provided with means shielding or
    otherwise protecting the piercing conduit from damaging the body entering
    conduit or patient during use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    192+    and 263, for needle covers or protectors, per se.


CLS 604/163
TXT Having bag or sheath enclosing body entering conduit:

    Subject matter under subclass 158 wherein a flexible enclosure, usually
    transparent, surrounds at least the major portion of the body entering
    conduit to protect the body entering conduit from contamination prior to
    insertion.


CLS 604/164
TXT Body piercer, obturator rod, or stylet axially movable within body entering
    conduit while latter is disposed in body:

    Subject matter under subclass 93 wherein the body entering conduit is
    mounted around a stiffening support element which is slidable removable
    from the conduit.

    (1)     Note.  The stiffening element may or may not be provided with a
    sharpened tip for piercing the body, e.g., the element may be employed as a
    plug to prevent flow through the conduit and may have blunt ends.  See
    subclass 170 indented hereunder for devices with blunt ends.


CLS 604/165
TXT Having means preventing relative movement between elements during their
    insertion into body:

    Subject matter under subclass 164 wherein a retaining or lock means
    prevents either longitudinal or rotational movement between the conduit and
    the stiffening support element during their insertion into the body.


CLS 604/166
TXT Having groove or reduced portion on piercer, rod or stylet for receiving
    distal end of feed conduit:

    Subject matter under subclass 164 wherein the stiffening element has a
    groove or recess, usually circumferential, for receiving the inserted end
    of the conduit to thereby facilitate the entry of the conduit into the body.


CLS 604/167
TXT Having resealable closure means for conduit:

    Subject matter under subclass 164 wherein a reclosable plug or septum is
    provided on the conduit to prevent flow of material therethrough when the
    stiffening support element is removed from the conduit through the septum.


CLS 604/168
TXT Having telltale for showing entry of blood into conduit:

    Subject matter under subclass 164 including means for indicating the
    correct positioning of the conduit within a blood vessel by visual
    observation of blood therein, (e.g., a transparent portion on conduit
    external to body after piercing of blood vessel, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    900,    for other devices having blood telltale indicators.


CLS 604/169
TXT Flow control means in conduit operable after removal of piercer, obturator,
    or stylet therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 164 wherein a mechanical flow control means
    prevents flow or leakage from the conduit after removal of the stiffening
    support element therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    246+,   for flow controllers on body inserted conduits, per se.


CLS 604/170
TXT Having blunt tip on obturator rod or stylet:

    Subject matter under subclass 164 wherein the insertion end of the
    stiffener or elongated rod support is unsharpened or dull.


CLS 604/171
TXT Body entering conduit axially movable within flexible protective sheath
    facilitating sterile insertion into body duct:

    Subject matter under subclass 93 wherein a body insertible tube (e.g.,
    catheter, etc.) is slidably mounted within a collapsible cylinder or
    envelope which are hand manipulated to feed the tube into a body cavity by
    repetitive axial movements thereof without contaminating the tube.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    163,    for other body inserted conduits within a protective axially
    collapsible sheath.


CLS 604/172
TXT Having lubricating means:

    Subject matter under subclass 171 including means on or within the
    protective sheath for facilitating insertion of the conduit into the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    265,    for lubricating means on the conduit, per se.


CLS 604/173
TXT Injection or aspiration device having plural body entering conduits:

    Subject matter under subclass 93 including multiple conduits placed in a
    body or bodies to operate individually or simultaneously to supply or
    remove material to or from the body.


CLS 604/174
TXT Means for securing conduit to body:

    Subject matter under subclass 93 including means for holding a conduit on
    the body or in the body in order to introduce or remove material from the
    body.


CLS 604/175
TXT Implanted connecting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 174 wherein the attaching component is
    surgically inserted within body tissue.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8+,     for shunts which have been surgically implanted.


CLS 604/176
TXT Vacuum:

    Subject matter under subclass 174 wherein the conduit is held on or in the
    body by a negative pressure applied to some means contacting the body.


CLS 604/177
TXT And used as conduit manipulator (e.g., foldable gripper wings, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 174 including element means carried by the
    conduit which permits manual manipulation of the conduit by the operator
    and which element means is utilized as the conduit securing means after
    having been manipulated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158+    and 164+, for winged intravenous feeding conduits.


CLS 604/178
TXT Axially movable clamp means:

    Subject matter under subclass 174 wherein the conduit securing means
    includes a longitudinally movable member mounted on the conduit which is
    axially moved into clamping engagement with the body after insertion of the
    conduit into the body.


CLS 604/179
TXT Belt, strap, or band securing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 174 wherein the conduit securing means
    consists either of an elongated strip of material with or without end
    securing means or in the form of a closed loop.


CLS 604/180
TXT Adhesive securing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 174 wherein the conduit securing means
    includes a cementlike substance.


CLS 604/181
TXT Means moved by person to inject or remove fluent material to or from body
    inserted conduit, holder, or reservoir:

    Subject matter under subclass 93 wherein a component is moved by an
    operator to eject flowable material to or from a conduit, holder, or
    container placed in the body.


CLS 604/182
TXT Means moved by weight of body placed thereon:

    Subject matter under subclass 181 wherein the weight of a body is applied
    to a device to eject material therefrom.


CLS 604/183
TXT Material expelled from reservoir having separate external feed means and
    discharge outlet:

    Subject matter under subclass 181 wherein the material is introduced from a
    source into an external reservoir and is thereafter ejected from the
    reservoir through a separate outlet.


CLS 604/184
TXT Material fed to reservoir through hollow piston:

    Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein the material is introduced into
    the reservoir through a passageway in a piston connected to the external
    material source.


CLS 604/185
TXT Reservoir squeezed to expel material therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 183 wherein a resilient reservoir holding
    material is compressed to eject the material therefrom.


CLS 604/186
TXT Means for metering material flow to or from body:

    Subject matter under subclass 183 including a means for supplying or
    removing a predetermined amount of material to or from the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207,    for a body supported injector (e.g., handheld hypodermic syringe)
    having means for metering the amount of material injected or removed from
    the body.


CLS 604/187
TXT Injector or aspirator syringe supported only by person during use (e.g.,
    handheld hypodermic syringe, douche tube with forced injector, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 181 wherein an injecting or aspirating
    syringe means for inserting or removing a body treating material into or
    from the body is entirely supported by a person or persons during the
    injection or removal of said material from the body.

    (1)     Note.  To be included here, an injector or aspirator syringe must
    be entirely supported by a person or persons during the injection or
    removal of material into or from the body.  A syringe means which is
    partially supported by a person and partialy supported by other means, such
    as a handheld nozzle attached to a supply hose leading to a reservoir of
    body treating material which is not supported by a person (e.g., a gravity
    feed reservoir mounted on a stanchion), is not classifiable in this
    subclass or its indents.  However, a hypodermic syringe having its needle
    inserted in the body of a patient (which thereby provides some support for
    the needle) and it barrel and other appurtenances supported by an
    attendant, is classifiable in this subclass or its indents, because the
    injector is entirely supported by persons.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    216,    Etching a Substrate:  Processes,  subclass 11 for the use of
    etching in the forming or treating of an article whose final configuration
    has a projection.


CLS 604/188
TXT Having body piercing conduit mounted on syringe for rotation about its
    longitudinal axis:

    Subject matter under subclass 187 wherein a conduit having a pointed end
    for puncturing the body (e.g., a hollow needle), said conduit being
    attached to a holding portion of the injecting or aspirating apparatus in
    such a manner that it can turn about its longitudinal axis to facilitate
    insertion.


CLS 604/189
TXT Having medical information (e.g., name of patient or medicament, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 187 including a means for recording or
    indicating medical information, such as an etched surface on the barrel of
    a hypodermic syringe for receiving a pencilled notation.


CLS 604/190
TXT Having fluid filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 187 including a porous article or mass
    through which material passes to separate some constituent therefrom.


CLS 604/191
TXT Having plural material reservoirs:

    Subject matter under subclass 187 including multiple reservoirs for a body
    affecting agent or agents.

    (1)     Note.  Plural containers for mixing separate components are not
    classifiable herein in which case, see this class, subclasses 82+, for
    mixing containers.


CLS 604/192
TXT Having cover or protector for body entering conduit:

    Subject matter under subclass 187 including detachable means for shielding
    or otherwise protecting a conductor to be placed in the body.


CLS 604/193
TXT Used as a piston actuator after removal from conduit covering or protecting
    position on syringe:

    Subject matter under subclass 192 wherein the shielding or protecting means
    is used to move a piston in the material inserting or removing device,
    after being removed from the position in which it shields or otherwise
    protects the conductor.


CLS 604/194
TXT Entire body entering conduit stored in cavity in piston or piston actuator
    inside syringe prior to use:

    Subject matter under subclass 192 wherein a complete body insertible
    conductor is stowed within the syringe prior to use for injection in a
    space within a piston or the actuator means for moving a piston.


CLS 604/195
TXT Portion of entering conduit stored in material receiving syringe reservoir:


    Subject matter under subclass 192 wherein at least part of the body
    insertible conduit is stowed in the syringe reservoir in which the body
    treating material is held before inserting the material into the body.


CLS 604/196
TXT And extended therefrom by piston when syringe is used:

    Subject matter under subclass 195 wherein a portion of the body insertible
    conduit is projected from the material holding reservoir by a ram or
    plunger when the conduit is to be placed in the body.


CLS 604/197
TXT Common cover or protector for body entering conduit and material syringe
    reservoir:

    Subject matter under subclass 192 wherein the shield or other means for
    protecting the body inserted conductor also shields or otherwise protects
    the reservoir holding the material.


CLS 604/198
TXT Cover or protector for body entering conduit movable axially relative to
    one another:

    Subject matter under subclass 192 wherein the conductor, shield, or
    protecting means is moved axially relative to the conduit or the conduit is
    moved axially relative to the shield or protecting means such that the
    conduit is exposed for use or repositioned in the shield or protector after
    use.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass disclose the movement of the
    conduit, cover or protector against the action of a spring, or by movement
    of the conduit cover or protector against inertia or by movement of the
    conduit to pierce the end of the cover or protector.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171+,   for a conductor axially movable within a flexible protective sheath.


CLS 604/199
TXT Having structure for facilitating sterilization of syringe or preventing
    contamination of material therein:

    Subject matter under subclass 187 including specific structure for making
    it convenient for the material inserting means to be maintained in a
    sterile condition, or preventing spoilage of the material by contact with
    undesirable substances.

    (1)     Note.  A patent is classified as an original in this subclass only
    if it includes a recitation of structural details of a means which
    facilitates sterilizing a syringe or which prevents contamination of the
    treating material held therein.


CLS 604/200
TXT Means broken, cut, pierced, or torn to permit material flow to or from body:

    Subject matter under subclass 187 including an element which is fractured,
    separated by an edged instrument, punctured by some means, or separated by
    having portions thereof rended by pulling apart for the purpose of allowing
    flow of material to or from the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87      and 148, for means broken, cut, pierced, or torn to permit mixing
    of materials.


CLS 604/201
TXT Septum pierced by conduit to permit flow:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein a dividing wall is punctured by a
    conduit such as a hollow needle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    88,     for a septum pierced by a conduit to permit mixing of materials.


CLS 604/202
TXT Septum flexed toward conduit to force conduit therethrough:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the dividing wall is deflected
    toward the conduit so that the wall is punctured.


CLS 604/203
TXT Septum pierced is piston head:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein a piston in a housing for the
    body treating material is punctured to permit flow of the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    231,    for structure of a piston having a discharge passage therethrough.


CLS 604/204
TXT Septum within collapsible material reservoir:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the material holder comprises a
    resilient squeeze bulb or like collapsible holder having a dividing wall.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    212+,   for squeeze bulb devices for injecting or withdrawing material into
    or from body.


CLS 604/205
TXT Septum piercing conduit separate from body entering conduit:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the material enters or leaves the
    body through one conduit and the dividing wall is punctured by another
    conduit.


CLS 604/206
TXT Septum piercing conduit attached to injector by turning one component
    relative to another (e.g., thread, bayonet type connectors, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the conduit which punctures the
    dividing wall is secured to the syringe means by elements which are
    rotatable relative to each other.


CLS 604/207
TXT Having means for metering material flow to or from body:

    Subject matter under subclass 187 including a means for supplying or
    removing a predetermined amount of material to or from the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186,    for an injector/aspirator having a material supply reservoir with
    an inlet and an outlet, and a means for metering the amount of material
    injected into or removed from the body.


CLS 604/208
TXT Including means for controlling piston stroke length:

    Subject matter under subclass 207 comprising a piston for forcing material
    into or out of the body and a means for regulating the distance of travel
    of the piston.


CLS 604/209
TXT By ratchet and pawl:

    Subject matter under subclass 208 wherein the piston moving means comprises
    a bar or wheel having teeth engaged by a propelling pawl.


CLS 604/210
TXT By detent:

    Subject matter under subclass 208 in which a device, for temporarily
    keeping one part in a fixed position relative to another part, is released
    by the application of force to one of the parts to regulate the travel of
    the piston.


CLS 604/211
TXT By rotatable means (e.g., micrometer, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 208 comprising a means which rotates to
    regulate the length of piston stroke.


CLS 604/212
TXT Having collapsible material reservoir (e.g., squeeze bulb, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 187 wherein the material is impelled to or
    from a resilient squeeze bulb or like collapsible material holder through a
    body inserted conduit.


CLS 604/213
TXT Having means to prevent fluid return to reservoir:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 including means, such as a one way valve,
    for preventing reentry of the material to the collapsible holder.


CLS 604/214
TXT Mechanical means (e.g., piston, clamp, etc.) moved to collapse reservoir:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 including a mechanism operated by a
    person to collapse the material reservoir.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass is a squeeze bulb which forces air
    in a chamber to compress a resilient material container disposed in the
    chamber, or a pliers-type clamp for squeezing a resilient material
    container.


CLS 604/215
TXT Having orifice occluding means:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 wherein the body inserted conduit has a
    sealing member carried thereon to close the orifice in order to retain the
    body treating material in said orifice until the occluding means is removed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    256,    for flow closing means on conduits, per se.


CLS 604/216
TXT Bellows-type reservoir:

    Subject matter under subclass 212 wherein the treating material holder has
    a corrugated or pleated wall.


CLS 604/217
TXT Reservoir pressurized or exhausted by squeeze bulb:

    Subject matter under subclass 187 having a resilient bulb member which is
    compressed to continuously pressurize or exhaust a self-supporting
    container for the purpose of forcing material from the treating material
    reservoir to the body, or from the body into the reservoir.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146,    for similar devices wherein the container has a stored positive or
    negative pressure.


CLS 604/218
TXT With piston or plunger for expelling material from body or injector
    reservoir:

    Subject matter under subclass 187 having a piston or ram which is actuated
    by a person to force a body treating material from a material container
    into the body or to draw material from the body into the container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    152     and 154, for piston devices employing power means to move piston.

    208,    for metering devices employing piston drive means.


CLS 604/219
TXT Diameter or piston selectively adjustable:

    Subject matter under subclass 218 including means for selectively varying
    the diameter of the piston.


CLS 604/220
TXT Means for preventing accidental displacement of piston:

    Subject matter under subclass 218 including means located on either the
    piston or the syringe which acts to limit or prevent accidental movement of
    the piston relative to its housing.


CLS 604/221
TXT Piston or piston actuator slidable in or against seal ring mounted on
    reservoir:

    Subject matter under subclass 218 wherein the agent material container is
    provided with a sealing means through which the piston or its actuating
    means slides or contact.

    (1)     Note.  The seal ring may be a packing (e.g., stuffing box type,
    etc.) or an O-ring type to prevent leakage of material around the piston.


CLS 604/222
TXT Seal ring mounted on piston:

    Subject matter under subclass 218 wherein the piston has a sealing means,
    usually deformable, circumferentially mounted thereon for engagement with
    the inside surface of the material container to prevent material leakage
    when the piston is moved therethrough.


CLS 604/223
TXT Injector components pivoted relative to each other to move piston:

    Subject matter under subclass 218 wherein movement of the piston is caused
    by movement of trigger or triggerlike elements or components relative to
    one another.


CLS 604/224
TXT Piston moved by screw or rack:

    Subject matter under subclass 218 wherein movement of the piston is
    effected by means of a threaded mechanism or a rack and pinion type
    mechanism.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    209,    for metering syringes employing ratchet and pawl means.

    211,    for metering syringes using rotatable (e.g., screw threaded, etc.)
    means.


CLS 604/225
TXT Means for preventing destructive piston impact on end of material
    reservoir:

    Subject matter under subclass 218 including a means to prevent damage to an
    end of the material container or holder caused by the piston striking
    thereon.


CLS 604/226
TXT Closable storage cavity included in piston or piston actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 218 wherein a resealable chamber within the
    piston or piston actuator is provided for the purpose of storing various
    medical accessories such as tablets, medicine, thermometers, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    194,    for pistons or actuators therefor having needles stored therein to
    protect the needles.


CLS 604/227
TXT Specific structure of finger grip for moving piston:

    Subject matter under subclass 218 wherein significance is attributed to
    specific finger grip structure for gripping by the operator to facilitate
    manipulation of the piston.

    (1)     Note.  It is well known that most all handheld injectors or
    aspirators have finger engaging means of some sort; however, for a patent
    to be classified in this subclass, the specific finger grip structure must
    be claimed.


CLS 604/228
TXT Specific structure of means coupling piston to piston actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 218 wherein significance is attributed to the
    means for connecting an initially separated piston and piston actuator,
    whereafter the actuator can be operated to impel material to or from the
    reservoir.

    (1)     Note.  For patents to be classified herein, the specific structure
    of the connecting or coupling structure must be claimed.


CLS 604/229
TXT Piston actuator contacting resilient retractable portion on piston:

    Subject matter under subclass 218 wherein the piston includes an elastic
    portion with shape retaining memory which when depressed by the piston
    actuator will deform and thereafter regain its initial shape when the
    actuator is removed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    160     and 900, for other blood "telltale" devices.


CLS 604/230
TXT Means for reducing piston sliding friction (e.g., oil applicator, use of
    low friction material, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 218 including means for decreasing friction
    between piston and its barrel reservoir.

    (1)     Note.  The means for decreasing friction may include lubrication of
    feed chambers and nonfriction materials, etc.


CLS 604/231
TXT Material passed to or from body through aperture in piston:

    Subject matter under subclass 218 wherein the material is forced into or
    out of the body by passing through a passageway in the piston or ram.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203,    for devices wherein the material is forced through a passageway in
    the piston or plunger formed by a piercing element.


CLS 604/232
TXT Material reservoir (e.g., cartridge, etc.) removably mounted in syringe:

    Subject matter under subclass 218 wherein the syringe means has a material
    holding cartridge detachably located therein so that the cartridge can be
    removed and replaced after the material has been dispensed from or filled
    into the cartridge.


CLS 604/233
TXT Piston actuator mounted in means (e.g., yoke, etc.) pivoted to syringe:

    Subject matter under subclass 232 wherein the piston actuator is pivotally
    attached to a portion of the syringe means so that the cartridge can be
    loaded by pivoting the actuator out of alignment with an adjacent component.


CLS 604/234
TXT Material reservoir centered or clamped in syringe by slidable component:

    Subject matter under subclass 232 wherein the reservoir or cartridge is
    centrally located or locked in the syringe means by a slidable element,
    usually sleevelike, so that misalignment of the piston with the replaceable
    cartridge is avoided.


CLS 604/235
TXT Means for ejecting or facilitating ejection of material reservoir from
    syringe:

    Subject matter under subclass 232 including means for (a) removing the
    cartridge from the syringe means, or (b) making it convenient for a person
    to remove the cartridge from the syringe.


CLS 604/236
TXT Material flow controlled by valve or movable closure (e.g., plug in
    orifice, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 218 including a valve or movable closure
    which is positioned in the syringe and which either controls the rate of
    flow of material to or from the body or prevents any flow until desired.


CLS 604/237
TXT Diaphragm valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 236 including a resilient deformable member
    which under pressure deforms to permit flow of material but whose elastic
    memory prevents flow when the pressure is removed.

    (1)     Note.  Rubber valve members having slitted openings which reseal
    after force is removed therefrom are classified herein.


CLS 604/238
TXT Removable plug:

    Subject matter under subclass 236 including a detachably mounted blocking
    bead or plug which prevents any flow until detached or removed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    89+,    for closure means between mixing compartments which is moved to
    permit flow therebetween.


CLS 604/239
TXT Specific structure of body entering or piercing conduit:

    Subject matter under subclass 187 wherein significance is attributed to
    structure of a material conduit which is capable of piercing the body to
    introduce or remove material.

    (1)     Note.  A patent is classified as an original in this subclass only
    if it includes a recitation of structural details of a body piercing
    conduit as part of the claimed subject matter, e.g., the shape of the point
    of a hollow needle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    264+,   for body entering conduit structures, per se.


CLS 604/240
TXT Specific structure of means connecting body entering conduit to syringe:

    Subject matter under subclass 187 wherein significance is attributed to a
    means which couples the body piercing conduit or a holder for the piercing
    conduit to the remainder of the syringe device.

    (1)     Note.  A patent is classified as an original in this subclass only
    if it includes a recitation of structural details of a means for coupling a
    body piercing conduit, e.g., a hollow needle, to the syringe assembly
    associated therewith.


CLS 604/241
TXT Conduit holder attached to another syringe component by thread means:

    Subject matter under subclass 240 wherein the coupling means comprises a
    screw type connection between the piercing holder and the syringe.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206,    for a hollow needle which pierces both the body and a treating
    material reservoir, and which is attached to a syringe by means of a
    threaded holder.


CLS 604/242
TXT Conduit holder attached to another injector component by cam:

    Subject matter under subclass 240 wherein the coupling between the piercing
    holder and the syringe is a camming surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    206+,   for a hollow needle which pierces both the body and a treating
    material reservoir, and which is attached to a syringe by means of a holder
    having a cam-type connection means such as a bayonet connector.


CLS 604/243
TXT Conduit holder therefor removably attached to another injector component by
    friction:

    Subject matter under subclass 240 wherein the body piercing conduit itself,
    or a holder therefor, is detachably mounted on the syringe by means of a
    friction fit.


CLS 604/244
TXT Means broken, cut, pierced, or torn to permit material flow to body:

    Subject matter under subclass 93 including an element that is fractured,
    separated by an edged instrument, punctured by some means, or separated by
    having portions thereof rended apart by pulling for the purpose of allowing
    flow of the body treating material to the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87,     for means broken, cut, pierced, or torn to permit mixing of
    materials.

    148,    for means associated with self-acting devices for injecting or
    removing material into or out of the body and handled as aforesaid.

    200,    for means associated with hand or body supported devices and
    handled as aforesaid.


CLS 604/245
TXT Material flow to or from body terminated by self-acting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 93 wherein the flow of material to or from
    the body is stopped by a means without requiring intervention by a person.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for self-acting devices wherein flow both into and out of body is
    claimed.


CLS 604/246
TXT Means for controlling material flow to or from body, or metering a
    predetermined dose or amount:

    Subject matter under subclass 93 having means for regulating flow of
    material to or from body, or supplying or removing a predetermined amount
    of material to or from body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    207+,   for handheld devices for metering flow to or from body.


CLS 604/247
TXT Having fluid responsive means (e.g., check valve, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 246 including means responsive to fluid
    pressure to control flow or meter amounts of material to or from body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9       and 30, for other fluid responsive control means on body inserted
    means.


CLS 604/248
TXT Rotatable-type valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 246 including a rotating valve for
    controlling flow into and out of the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for rotatable valves on devices having ingress and egress passages.


CLS 604/249
TXT Slide or reciprocating valve:

    Subject matter under subclass 246 including either a longitudinally movable
    element or an element which moves back and forth alternately whose linear
    movement controls flow of material to or from the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for slide or reciprocating valves on refluent devices.


CLS 604/250
TXT Conduit deforming clamp:

    Subject matter under subclass 246 including pinch-type tube valves which
    deformably occlude resilient passage walls to control flow of a material to
    or from the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for occluder-type pinch valves for controlling flow into and out of
    the body.


CLS 604/251
TXT Drip meter:

    Subject matter under subclass 246 including a light permeable chamber
    having an inlet tube which extends below its top wall and delivers a
    drop-by-drop of material into the chamber so that the rate of flow to or
    from the body can be measured by observing the drop rate.


CLS 604/252
TXT Having fluid filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 251 wherein the light permeable chamber
    includes a porous article or mass through which the material passes to
    separate some constituent therefrom.


CLS 604/253
TXT Having drip sensor:

    Subject matter under subclass 251 wherein a sensing mean detects a
    condition or state of the flow material within the light permeable chamber.


CLS 604/254
TXT Having float controlling or indicating material flow from chamber:

    Subject matter under subclass 251 wherein a float in the light permeable
    chamber either controls flow from the chamber or indicates the material
    flow rate.

    (1)     Note.  The float can act as a flow cutoff once the material level
    has passed below the outlet seat.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for devices preventing air injection into the body by means of a
    low level cutoff float.


CLS 604/255
TXT Mounted in material reservoir:

    Subject matter under subclass 251 wherein the chamber is located within a
    container holding the body affecting agent.


CLS 604/256
TXT Having flow closing or opening means (e.g., plug, cap, seal, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 246 including closure or seal means on the
    conduit which prevents flow to or from the body until the closure or seal
    is opened, or conversely, which stops flow when the closure or seal is
    closed.

    (1)     Note.  The closure or seal usually is a plug, cap, or a resealable
    closure member.


CLS 604/257
TXT Liquid reservoir with body inserted nozzle or feed conduit connected
    therewith:

    Subject matter under subclass 93 including a container for holding a liquid
    body treating material and a projecting spout having a terminal shaped
    outlet or a conduit connected to the container for feeding the material to
    the body.


CLS 604/258
TXT Having plural feed conduits:

    Subject matter under subclass 257 wherein multiple feed supply conduits are
    connected to the container for feeding material to a body or bodies.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    173,    for multiple feed conduits insertable into body.


CLS 604/259
TXT With storage means (e.g., cabinet, etc.) for reservoir and material feed
    conduit:

    Subject matter under subclass 257 wherein a housing or casing is provided
    for storing the material holding container and a conduit for the material
    when the apparatus is not in use.


CLS 604/260
TXT Having liquid level indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 257 wherein the material holding container is
    provided with means for indicating the level of agent therein.


CLS 604/261
TXT Having means for supporting body inserted nozzle tip or free end of feed
    conduit after use:

    Subject matter under subclass 257 wherein the material holding container
    includes a means such as a clip or bracket for supporting a body inserted
    nozzle, or the end of the feed conduit not connected to the material
    container, when the apparatus is not is use.


CLS 604/262
TXT Bag type:

    Subject matter under subclass 257 wherein the material holding container is
    constructed of flexible material in the form of a sack or pouch.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    339+,   for colostomy bags.

    408+,   for bag containers for blood or other body treating material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, Digest 24 for medical bags.

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, appropriate subclasses for
    bags of general utility.

    222,    Dispensing, subclasses 92+ and 206+ for flexible walled bag
    dispensers.


CLS 604/263
TXT Removable cover or protector for body inserted conduit:

    Subject matter under subclass 93 including detachable means for shielding
    or otherwise protecting a conductor placed in the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    192+,   for conduit covers on handheld syringes.


CLS 604/264
TXT Body inserted tubular conduit structure (e.g., needles cannulas nozzles,
    trocars, catheters, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 93 wherein significance is attributed to the
    structure of an elongated, hollow tube, per se, which is inserted within
    the body and is utilized solely to introduce body treating material into or
    remove material from the body during surgical procedures.

    (1)     Note.  Combinations of body inserted tubes with containers or
    receptacles not classifiable higher in the schedule will be classified
    herein.  Patents claiming a nonbody inserted conduit in combination with a
    container/receptacle will be classified in the appropriate
    container/receptacle subclass.  To be classified herein otherwise, the tube
    structure must be claimed as inserted into the body.


CLS 604/265
TXT With body soluble, antibactericidal or lubricating materials on conduit:

    Subject matter under subclass 264 including treating materials which treat
    the area of body to which it is inserted by dissolving or melting in said
    area to medicate, disinfect, or lubricate said area.


CLS 604/266
TXT With anticlogging means on conduit (e.g., anticlotting, decalcification,
    tissue occulusion, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 264 including means for preventing the
    accumulation of debris in conduit lumens by thrombosis, calcification, or
    mechanical blockage of tissue, etc.


CLS 604/267
TXT Mechanical cleaning means:

    Subject matter under subclass 266 wherein the anticlogging means is a
    mechanical structure operable to scrape or ream out the conduit lumen to
    prevent blockage.


CLS 604/268
TXT With barrier shield, or suction relief means adjacent tissue contacting
    orifice:

    Subject matter under subclass 266 wherein the insertion end of the conduit
    is provided with a guard, cover, or vacuum vent means adjacent the lumen to
    prevent clogging of the opening by tissue drawn thereagainst during
    withdrawal of material from the body.

    (1)     Note. Patents classified herein must claim that the venting is
    within the conduit only.  Patents claiming gas being drawn into the body
    cavity through a vent means are classified in this class, subclass 45.


CLS 604/269
TXT With anticoagulant supply means:

    Subject matter under subclass 266 including a source of blood thinning
    material which is fed to the conduit to prevent blockage therein by
    clotting of the blood.


CLS 604/270
TXT Having weighted tip means on conduit promoting advance thereof through
    alimentary tract:

    Subject matter under subclass 264 including a relatively heavy mass mounted
    on the insertion end of a body inserted conduit for aiding the conduit by
    the use of increased gravitational attraction in advancing the conduit
    downward into the stomach or small intestine.


CLS 604/271
TXT Having evaginating or invaginating capability:

    Subject matter under subclass 264 wherein the body inserted conduit, or a
    portion thereof, has the potential to be everted or inverted during
    insertion into the body.


CLS 604/272
TXT Body piercing conduit (e.g., needle, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 264 relating to a hollow needle used to
    puncture the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for piercing conduits with penetration limit means.


CLS 604/273
TXT Specific structure for preventing or minimizing inconvenience caused by
    breakage during insertion of conduit into body:

    Subject matter under subclass 272 wherein significance is attributed to the
    structure of the conduit, or a component associated with the conduit,
    prevents breakage of the conduit or reduces the inconvenience resulting
    from such breakage.

    (1)     Note.  A patent is classified as an original in this subclass only
    if it includes as part of its claimed subject matter a recitation of
    structural details of a body piercing conduit, or details relating to a
    component associated with the conduit, which prevent breakage of the
    conduit or minimize inconvenience resulting from such breakage.


CLS 604/274
TXT Specific structure for preventing coring of body tissue:

    Subject matter under subclass 272 wherein significance is attributed to the
    structure of the conduit such that the conduit enters body tissue without
    cutting a plug of tissue that enters the bore of the conduit.

    (1)     Note.  A patent is classified as an original in this subclass only
    if it includes as part of its claimed subject matter a recitation of
    structural details of a conduit which prevents coring during insertion of
    the conduit into body tissue, usually a recitation of the shape of the
    point of the conduit.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    403,    for hollow needles designed to pierce a closure element of a
    container without cutting a core plug therefrom.


CLS 604/275
TXT Nozzle insertable into body orifice:

    Subject matter under subclass 264 including a tubular tip or spout member
    designed to enter an opening in the body to inject or remove a body
    treating material.

    (1)     Note.  Tubular nozzles on syringes, etc., that are not recited as
    being inserted into the body are not classifiable herein.  See appropriate
    subclasses under treating external surface of body for such devices.


CLS 604/276
TXT Having external means for receiving material discharged from body orifice:

    Subject matter under subclass 275 including means outside the body for
    catching effluent from an opening in the body, usually the opening into
    which a body treating material is injected.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    327+,   for receptors into which body effluents are discharged.


CLS 604/277
TXT Colostomy apparatus:

    Subject matter under subclass 276 including means inserted into a
    surgically constructed artificial opening in the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    334,    for colostomy receptacles having port means for permitting
    irrigating nozzle or tube insertion.


CLS 604/278
TXT Having orifice sealing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 275 including an arrangement of the nozzle,
    or a separate element associated with the nozzle which seals or otherwise
    prevents flow of effluent from the body around the nozzle.


CLS 604/279
TXT Vaginal or douche type:

    Subject matter under subclass 275 wherein the nozzle structure is
    specifically designed for insertion into the vaginal or rectal cavities.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39+,    for douche type nozzle having both ingress and egress passages
    claimed therein.

    212+,   for douche type structure associated with a collapsible reservoir.


CLS 604/280
TXT Flexible catheter/cannula or means (e.g., coupling, etc.) used therewith:

    Subject matter under subclass 264 relating to (a) a pliant conduit to be
    inserted within a body passage, vessel, or cavity to feed a body treating
    material thereto, or remove the material thereform, or (b) a device used
    with such conduit.

    (1)     Note.  For a patent to be classified herein, means for the
    introduction or removal of body affecting material must be claimed.
    Patents claiming only tubular structure for other purposes are classified
    elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 207.14+ for cannulas or body inserted tubes for
    breathing purposes.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 309+ for body inserted tubes for diagnostoc
    purposes.

    606,    Surgery, subclasses 108+ for tubular instrumentsdilators.


CLS 604/281
TXT Having shape retaining memory:

    Subject matter under subclass 280 wherein the shape of the conduit returns
    to its original shape after being deformed.


CLS 604/282
TXT Having rigidifying or anticollapsing means (e.g., reinforcing coils, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 280 including wall reinforcing means for
    preventing collapse of the conduit during the period of insertion in the
    body.


CLS 604/283
TXT With coupling or connector structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 280 including specific structure of the
    adaptor or connector means located at the proximal end of the conduit for
    attachment to other fluid sources or collection devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    103,    for other coupling connectors on inflatable conduits.


CLS 604/284
TXT Having branched shapes (e.g., T or Y drains, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 280 wherein the tube shape is one of
    diverging conduits extending from a common center or joint such as T or Y
    tubes.


CLS 604/285
TXT Treating material insert retained in body orifice:

    Subject matter under subclass 93 relating to an insertable means held in a
    body cavity for a period of time for the application of body treating
    material to said body cavity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    890.1+, for controlled release therapeutic devices and see the search notes
    thereunder for additional fields of search.


CLS 604/286
TXT Including foraminous material (e.g., sponge, etc.) or fibrous element other
    than withdrawal cord:

    Subject matter under subclass 285 including either a material containing
    fissures, holes, pores, or a component formed of fibers, other than a cord
    used to pull a medicating means from the body opening in which it is
    inserted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    369,    for absorbent pads having foam or cellular materials.


CLS 604/287
TXT With soluble cover means:

    Subject matter under subclass 286 wherein the insert is provided with a
    body soluble or biodegradable coating or shield which dissolves under body
    heat after insertion into the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    288,    for body inserts which are soluble en toto within the body.

    364,    for heat soluble material contained on an absorbent pad.


CLS 604/288
TXT Soluble in body (e.g., suppository, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 285 wherein the insert, per se, is melted in
    the body by exposure to body heat.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 428+
    for biodegradable medicating means contained in a controlled release means.


CLS 604/289
TXT Treating material applied to or removed from external surface of body, or
    cutaneous layer of skin (e.g., eye treatment, removal of skin impurities,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 19 relating to the application of or removal
    of a body treating material to or from an outer surface of the body.


CLS 604/290
TXT Method of applying or removing material to or from body:

    Subject matter under subclass 289 relating to a process for applying body
    treating material or removing material from the body surface.


CLS 604/291
TXT Means for cooling or heating material:

    Subject matter under subclass 289 including apparatus for increasing or
    decreasing the temperature of the material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113+,   for means heating or cooling material that is to be inserted into
    or removed from the body.


CLS 604/292
TXT Glove for applying or removing material to or from wearer's hand:

    Subject matter under subclass 289 including a glove worn by a person to
    apply or remove material from his own hand.


CLS 604/293
TXT Specific structure for applying or removing material to or from foot or leg:

    Subject matter under subclass 289 wherein significance is attributed to
    structure for applying or removing the material to a person's foot or leg.

    (1)     Note.  A patent is classified as an original in this subclass only
    if it includes the recitation of structural details of a means for applying
    and/or removing a treating material to a patient's foot or leg, e.g., the
    shape of a pad which conforms with a person's foot or leg.


CLS 604/294
TXT Means for treating eye or surface of ocular cavity:

    Subject matter under subclass 289 wherein the body treating material is
    applied to an organ of sight or a semiclosed orifice outlined by the eye
    socket and the eyelids.

    (1)     Note.  The ocular cavity is not a natural orifice since it supplies
    no entrance to the internal body cavity such as the nose, ear, mouth, etc.


CLS 604/295
TXT Dropper, douche, or eyecup for applying liquid to eye:

    Subject matter under subclass 294 whereby the body treating material is a
    liquid applied to the other surface of the organ of sight by mean of (a) a
    device specifically shaped or designed to drip the body treating material
    on the said outer surface, (b) a device specifically shaped or designed to
    apply comparatively large quantities of the body treating material on the
    said outer surface, or (c) a device specifically shaped to fit the contour
    of the organ of sight to apply comparatively large quantities of the body
    treating material to the organ of sight.


CLS 604/296
TXT Having means for aerating liquid:

    Subject matter under subclass 295 whereby the body treating material is
    exposed to, treated, supplied, or charged with air or other gas.


CLS 604/297
TXT Having means for scavenging liquid after contact with eye:

    Subject matter under subclass 295 provided with means to remove or to
    permit the removal of the body treating material from the organ of sight to
    the supply source or to another location independent of the supply source.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass admits to the return of
    a liquid to the supply source for treating the eye; the return of a liquid
    to a compartment within the supply source but independent and separate of
    the supply source; or the return of a liquid to a means external of the
    supply source.


CLS 604/298
TXT Having means for metering liquid flow to eye:

    Subject matter under subclass 295 provided with means to permit a measured
    or predetermined quantity of the body treating material to be presented to
    the organ of sight.


CLS 604/299
TXT Having means for preventing contact of liquid with syringe bulb:

    Subject matter under subclass 295 provided with specific structure which
    ensures against the return of the treating material to a resilient
    collapsible bulb in order to avoid contamination or deterioration of said
    bulb by said material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199,    for devices preventing contamination of body treating material.


CLS 604/300
TXT Having means for positioning liquid dispenser relative to eye:

    Subject matter under subclass 295 wherein significance is attributed to the
    structure to locate or place a liquid body treating material containing
    means relative to the organ of sight to ensure proper contact therewith.


CLS 604/301
TXT Eye cup:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein the means to locate or place the
    body affecting agent comprises a generally closed elliptical or ovoid
    shaped device having an organ of sight receiving opening at one side for
    the purpose of facilitating the application of the body treating material
    to said organ of sight.


CLS 604/302
TXT Guard or guide:

    Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein the body treating material
    containing means is provided with additional structure for the purpose of
    preventing damage to the organ of sight or to constrain or limit the path
    of movement of the said containing means relative to the organ of sight.


CLS 604/303
TXT Mask for applying or removing material to or from wearer's face:

    Subject matter under subclass 289 drawn to a cover placed on a person's
    face to apply or remove material therefrom.


CLS 604/304
TXT Bandage, pad, or shield placed on body for sustained treatment thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 289 relating to a static appliance which
    protects the body and applies a body treating material thereto for
    continuous treatment over a period of time.

    (1)     Note.  A static appliance includes any material in the form of a
    bandage, pad, or shield placed upon the body for treatment of said body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 447+
    for bandages which are control release type for applying treating material
    to the body.


CLS 604/305
TXT Treating material supplied to bandage, pad, or shield through conduit
    connected to remote supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 304 wherein the body treating material is
    supplied to the static appliance through a tube connected to a source,
    spaced from the appliance, which supplies the body treating material.


CLS 604/306
TXT Treating material reservoir broken, cut pierced, or torn to apply treating
    material to body:

    Subject matter under subclass 304 including a container for the body
    treating material which is fractured, separated by an edged instrument,
    punctured by some means, or separated by having portions thereof rended
    apart by pulling for the purpose of releasing the material so that it can
    contact the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      87, 148, 200, and 244, for other devices permitting flow of body
    affecting agent by breaking, cutting, piercing, or tearing of the agent
    reservoir.


CLS 604/307
TXT Adhesively attachable to body:

    Subject matter under subclass 304 including a cement-like substance which
    secures the appliance to the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    386,    389 and 390, for adhesive used to attach an absorbent pad during
    use.


CLS 604/308
TXT Bandage, pad, shield, or attaching means extendable around body portion:

    Subject matter under subclass 304 wherein the static appliance, or a means
    separate from the appliance extends around a part of the body to secure the
    appliance thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    392,    for strap or belt means to support an absorbent pad on the body
    during use.


CLS 604/309
TXT Solid treating material (e.g., styptic pencil, etc.) application:

    Subject matter under subclass 289 wherein a solid body treating material is
    designed to be applied to the body through direct contact therewith.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for powder dispensers used in placing material into the body
    through a body orifice.


CLS 604/310
TXT Fluent treating material held in reservoir in hand-supported applicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 289 wherein a flowable body treating material
    to be applied to the body is stored in a container associated with a device
    which is supported by a person's hand when the body treating material is
    being applied to.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    187+,   for details of handheld syringes for injecting or withdrawing
    material to or from body.


CLS 604/311
TXT With piston or plunger for expelling material therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 310 wherein a ram or a ram actuator ejects
    the body treating material from the container or reservoir during
    application.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    208+    and 218+, for details of piston operated syringes for injecting or
    withdrawing material to or from body.


CLS 604/312
TXT Sudatory devices (e.g., removing sweat, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 289 including means to be worn on the body
    which causes a continuous sweating of the body surface covered thereby and
    either serves to clean the skin pores of material therein or absorb the
    sweat from the skin surface.


CLS 604/313
TXT Means for removing material from surface by suction:

    Subject matter under subclass 289 wherein material is removed from the skin
    by the drawing action of a suction producing device which creates a
    negative pressure thereupon.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73+,    for devices introducing and removing (by suction) fluids into and
    from within the body.


CLS 604/314
TXT Venom extractor:

    Subject matter under subclass 313 wherein the material removed from the
    skin or cutaneous layer, by the suction means, is a poisonous or toxic
    material which has been injected by a reptile or insect into the skin or
    cutaneous layer.


CLS 604/315
TXT Suction generated by self-acting fluid pressure, motor-driven or mechanical
    energy storing means (e.g., spring, etc.);

    Subject matter under subclass 313 wherein the negative pressure is produced
    by either fluid pressure means which does not require the application of
    force, or by a device which converts any form of energy into mechanical
    energy, or by a mechanical device capable of storing energy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131+,   for devices placing material into or out of the body by similar
    structures.


CLS 604/316
TXT Means moved by person to produce suction (e.g., squeeze bulb, piston, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 313 wherein the negative pressure is
    generated by manually operated means to remove material from the external
    body surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    181+,   for devices moved by persons to expel material from within
    reservoirs or body.


CLS 604/317
TXT MEANS AND METHODS FOR COLLECTING BODY FLUIDS OR WASTE MATERIAL (E.G.,
    RECEPTACLES, ETC.):

    Methods and apparatus under the class definition comprising portable
    receptor or material collecting means not elsewhere classifiable used to
    receive material discharge from the body and treatment of the body by
    employing material collectors or receptors of this type.

    (1)     Note.  For patents to be classifiable herein, either exclusive
    claiming of the function of receiving discharge from the body during
    surgical procedures or attachment means connecting the appliance to the
    body in some manner must be claimed.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    358+,   for absorbent pads which receive body discharge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoon, appropriate subclasses for
    urinals and bedpans not connected to body.


CLS 604/318
TXT Material collector with condition indicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 317 including an indicator means associated
    with the material receptor to produce a visual manifestation of a condition
    or status within the receptor to alert an attendant or patient to an
    existing condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    361,    for indicators which signal that the absorbent pad has become wet.

    404,    for containers with contents indicator.


CLS 604/319
TXT Aspiration collection container or trap (e.g., canister, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 317 wherein the receptor or appliance is
    provided with both an operating material receiving port and a suction inlet
    port which suction inlet port causes the aspirated material to enter
    collection receptacle or cannister.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    137,    Fluid Handling, subclass 205 for filling container by evacuating
    same.

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 91+ for removal of dental debris or saliva
    into receiver by suction.


CLS 604/320
TXT Having vacuum shutoff means (e.g., float valve, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 319 including means to prevent overflow of
    fluid material into a negative pressure system from the container or
    cannister comprising a self-acting vacuum port blocking means such as a
    float valve which when actuated shuts off the vacuum.


CLS 604/321
TXT Having liquid seal means:

    Subject matter under subclass 319 wherein the vacuum container is provided
    with a liquid seal means about the suction inlet port to prevent a backflow
    return to the body of effluent and air from the collecting means.


CLS 604/322
TXT Material collector or receptacle having attaching means to static support
    independent of body:

    Subject matter under subclass 317 wherein a portable receptor or collecting
    means is designed specifically to receive discharge from the body by means
    of a tube and which receptor is supported by a remote static means
    unattached to the patients body.


CLS 604/323
TXT With flow control means (e.g., antiback flow valve, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 322 wherein the receptor is provided with
    means regulating or restricting flow into and out of the receptor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    335     and 350, for other receptors attachable to body having flow control
    means thereon.


CLS 604/324
TXT With vent or overflow opening:

    Subject matter under subclass 322 wherein the receptor is provided with
    pressure or equalizing means to prevent a return flow of the collected
    material to the patient.


CLS 604/325
TXT With drip meter:

    Subject matter under subclass 322 including a light permeable chamber for
    visually determining the flow rate of the discharge from the body into the
    receptor or container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    255,    for drip meters mounted in reservoirs for dispensing material into
    the body.


CLS 604/326
TXT Conduit or connector for material collector/receptor:

    Subject matter under subclass 322 including a nonbody inserted tube or
    coupling attached to the receptor or collecting means for conducting
    material into said receptor or collecting means.


CLS 604/327
TXT Receptacle attached to or inserted within body to receive discharge
    therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 317 wherein the portable receptor or
    appliance is constructed of nonfibrous material and is capable of being
    connected to, worn on, or inserted bodily within the body to receive
    discharge therefrom.

    (1)     Note.  Patents claiming only solid walled, nonabsorbent material
    construction are classified herein. Receptors claiming fibrous absorbent
    material construction are classified in this class, subclasses 358+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, particularly subclasses
    144.1+ for a urinal which is intended for the convenience of the user and
    is not disclosed for collecting a specimen for a diagnostic purpose nor
    attached to or worn on the body.  A urinal which contacts, conforms to or
    penetrates the body, e.g., a device permitting a female to urinate while
    standing up, is included, provided it is for the convenience of the user.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 867+ for a manure pouch receptacle for
    a domestic animal.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 573+ for a liquid collecting device disclosed
    for use in collecting a specimen for a diagnostic pupose and subclass 582,
    in particular, for diagnostic containers placed within body to receive
    fluid samples.


CLS 604/328
TXT Receptacle or portion thereof inserted within body cavity:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein the receptor, or a significant
    part thereof, is placed within the body to receive material therein.


CLS 604/329
TXT Receptacle structured for collecting urine from human female:

    Subject matter under subclass 328 including means adapted or specifically
    designed to receive the liquid and dissolved material secreted by a kidney
    of a human female.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclass 574 for diagnostic urine sample containers
    structured for use on females.


CLS 604/330
TXT Intravaginal:

    Subject matter under subclass 328 wherein the receptor means is inserted
    intravaginally to receive discharge therefrom, usually menstrual fluid from
    the uterus.


CLS 604/331
TXT With external collector or support means:

    Subject matter under subclass 330 including means to be located outside a
    vagina for either collecting or transporting fluid from the receptor, or
    for supporting the receptor in place.


CLS 604/332
TXT Receptacle engaging around permanent surgically constructed body opening
    (e.g., colostomy, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein the receptor is secured onto the
    body around a surgically created stoma for the purpose of receiving
    involuntary discharge of effluent therefrom.


CLS 604/333
TXT Having deodorant means (e.g., filter, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 332 wherein a substance situated in the
    receptacle minimizes or eliminates the  odor of the involuntary discharge
    emanating from the receptacle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    359,    for absorbent receptors containing deoderants.


CLS 604/334
TXT Having additional irrigation port or means:

    Subject matter under subclass 332 wherein the receptacle is provided with a
    port or opening for entry of an irrigation conduit into the stoma, or is
    provided with irrigating means for flushing out the receptacle, per se.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    277,    for colostomy devices wherein the flushing conduit is included in
    the combination.


CLS 604/335
TXT With flow control means (e.g., valve, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 332 including means for regulating or
    restricting material flow into and out of the receptor.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323     and 350, for other receptors having flow control means.


CLS 604/336
TXT With hydrocolloid type seal (e.g., gel, starch, karaya gum, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 332 wherein a seal means for engaging around
    the stoma comprises a gelatinous, gummy, or starchlike material from the
    hydrocolloid family.

    (1)     Note.  Hydrocolloids are employed as sealing elements because they
    are nonirritating to the sensitive tissue around the stoma.


CLS 604/337
TXT Means for covering stoma or body opening:

    Subject matter under subclass 332 wherein the receptor structure is in the
    form of a cup, guard, or cover generally of semirigid construction to seal
    the stoma.


CLS 604/338
TXT Mounting ring or annulus around body opening:

    Subject matter under subclass 332 including a receptacle mounting circular
    element, ferrule, or hollow flange which engages the body around the stoma
    and upon which the receptor is adapted to be secured.


CLS 604/339
TXT Bag attached to seal ring:

    Subject matter under subclass 338 including a flexible sack or pouch
    secured to the mounting ring.


CLS 604/340
TXT With bag anticollapse feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 339 including structure on the mounting ring
    or seal to prevent the bag from collapsing.


CLS 604/341
TXT Body engaging surface of seal ring covered by bag wall or portion thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 339 wherein the bag is folded around the
    mounting ring so that the folded area engages the body around the stoma and
    forms part of the seal.


CLS 604/342
TXT Means attaching bag to seal ring:

    Subject Matter under subclass 339 including means for connecting the bag
    onto the mounting ring.


CLS 604/343
TXT Including body support means:

    Subject matter under subclass 339 including means for holding or securing
    the mounting ring to the body.

    (1)     Note.  The securing means may include, among other, straps,
    snap-type fastener elements, belts, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    345,    for other body support means on colostomy devices.


CLS 604/344
TXT Adhesive:

    Subject matter under subclass 343 wherein the support means for the
    mounting ring or seal is a sticky, cementlike material.


CLS 604/345
TXT With body support means (e.g., belt, garment, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 332 including means to secure the receptor to
    the body.


CLS 604/346
TXT Receptacles receiving protruding body member (e.g., ears, genitals,
    breasts, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein the receptor is specifically
    designed and structured to receive a body part or organ, other than limbs.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73+,    for receptors including means for forcibly introducing or removing
    fluids to or from the body.


CLS 604/347
TXT Genital receptacle:

    Subject matter under subclass 346 wherein the receptor is designed to
    receive the genitals of either sexes.


CLS 604/348
TXT With separate fecal receiving compartment:

    Subject matter under subclass 347 including a second chamber for receiving
    solid excrement from the body.


CLS 604/349
TXT Receptacle structured for collecting urine or discharge from male member
    (e.g., external catheter, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 347 wherein the receptor is shaped and
    designed so as to fit around the male organ to receive the liquid and
    dissolved material secreted by a kidney or an emission or discharge
    therefrom.


CLS 604/350
TXT With antibackflow means:

    Subject matter under subclass 349 including means to prevent the collected
    discharge from returning back to the body member to avoid contamination.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    323     and 335, for other receptacles having flow control means thereon.


CLS 604/351
TXT With separate body securing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 349 including means for anchoring the
    receptacle to the body or male organ.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    343     and 345, for body securing means on other receptacles.


CLS 604/352
TXT Adherent or inflatable type:

    Subject matter under subclass 351 wherein the securing means comprises an
    adhesive, textile fabric strip device comprising cooperating means carried
    by opposed foundation fabric members, one of said foundation members
    composed of a cluster of loops which engage with hooked shaped members of
    the opposing foundation and which members, upon being touched together,
    engage to effect a connection between the opposed foundation members, said
    connection being capable of separation upon pulling apart of the fabric
    strips, or a sleeve which is capable of being expanded.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    391,    for "VelcroR" type fastener elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buttons, Buckles, Clasps, etc., subclass 306 for "VelcroR" type
    fasteners.

    128,    Surgery, Digest 15 for medical devices employing "VelcroR".


CLS 604/353
TXT Body or body member encircling belt, strap, or harness:

    Subject matter under subclass 351 including either an elongated strip of
    material with or without securing means or a rigging means for holding a
    receptor on the body or the body member.


CLS 604/354
TXT Catamenial receptacle:

    Subject matter under subclass 347 wherein the receptor is designated and
    structured to receive female genitalia for the purpose of receiving
    menstrual fluids.


CLS 604/355
TXT Receptacle externally sealing around body opening to receive natural or
    surgical discharge:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 wherein a receptacle or bag is sealed
    flushed against a body opening to receive natural or surgical discharge
    therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    332+,   for colostomy receptacles which engage around a surgically
    constructed body opening.


CLS 604/356
TXT Receptacle placed under or against body to collect discharge during
    surgical or obstetrical operations:

    Subject matter under subclass 327 including a receptor specifically
    designed and structured to be placed under or in contact with a patient
    during surgical or parturition procedures to collect the drainage therefrom
    and to prevent soilage of the operating area by the discharge.


CLS 604/357
TXT Flexible apron type:

    Subject matter under subclass 356 wherein the receptor or portion thereof
    is constructed in the form of a bib or apron of flexible material.


CLS 604/358
TXT Absorbent pad for external or internal application and supports therefor
    (e.g., catamenial devices, diapers, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 317 wherein the collecting means comprises a
    fibrous layer of material capable of absorbing body fluids or waste which
    is designed to be applied to the outer surface of the body or placed into a
    natural body orifice and means to support said material.

    (1)     Note.  Patents classified in this subclass and its indented
    subclasses contain absorbent bandages, catamenial pads, diapers, as well as
    tampons which are considered to be absorbent pads.

    (2)     Note.  Patents specific to the material composition of bandages,
    catamenial pads, diapers, and tampons are classified in this subclass and
    its indented subclasses for the purpose of collecting body fluids or
    excreta.

    (3)     Note.  "Body fluids" include any body fluid in body tissue as well
    as blood or liquid in the body cavity or any body fluid resulting from a
    wound or incision.  Devices for collecting external body moisture (e.g.,
    sweat) are classified elsewhere in this class.

    (4)     Note.  Patents specific to the means for supporting or attaching
    bandages, catamenial devices, diapers, and tampons to the body are
    classified in this subclass and the indented subclasses thereunder if
    disclosed in combination with one of the aforementioned devices or
    nominally recited in combination with means in the form of clothing,
    supports, or holders to hold or support the pad during use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11+,    for inserting fibrous packing means into a body orifice.

    15+,    for means for ejecting a fibrous mass from a conduit into a body
    orifice.

    304+,   for bandages, and their attaching means, for sustained body
    treatment.

    312,    for sudatory devices removing sweat from the external body surface.

    327+,   for non-absorbent receptacles attached to or inserted into a body
    orifice to collect discharge therefrom.

    347+,   for receptacles for receiving the genitals and collecting fluids
    therefrom.

    354,    for nonabsorbent catamenial pouches or receptacles.

    393+,   for nominally recited pads carried, held, or supported by clothing,
    holders, or supports.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    28,     Textiles:  Manufacturing, subclasses 118+ for methods of an
    apparatus for making tampons.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, for single or plural
    layers of stock material, and particularly subclasses 175+, 190, 193, and
    196+ for single or plural layered material products comprising mechanical
    interengaged strands.

    442,    Fabric (Woven, Knitted, or Nonwoven Textile or Cloth, etc.),
    subclasses 181+ and 304+ for a woven or knit fabric.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses for
    adhesives, particularly class 523, subclasses 105+ for synthetic resin or
    natural rubber compositions intended for contact with living tissue.

    602,    Surgery:  Splint, Brace, or Bandage, subclasses 41+ for
    nonabsorbent or shield type bandages, materials therefor, and subclass 900
    for bandage making not classified elsewhere.


CLS 604/359
TXT Deodorant containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 358 wherein a substance has been applied to
    the absorbent material to minimize the odor of body fluids or excrete
    absorbed by the material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclass 5 for processes of deodorizing.


CLS 604/360
TXT Containing inhibitor to ammonia or bacteria formation:

    Subject matter under subclass 358 wherein a substance has been applied to
    the absorbent material to impede or eliminate the formation of ammonia
    compounds or bacterial growth in the absorbent material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclasses for compounds affecting ammonia and bacterial formation.


CLS 604/361
TXT With wetness indicator or alarm:

    Subject matter under subclass 358 including means to produce a perceptible
    visual or audible manifestation of a dampness condition of the absorbent
    material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    116,    Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclasses for nonelectrical
    indicators.

    128,    Surgery, subclass 886 for bedwetting detection devices on body
    attached shields.


CLS 604/362
TXT With radio-opaque material or signaling means for residual material:

    Subject matter under subclass 358 wherein the absorbent material contains a
    substance which is impenetratable to X-rays or means which generates an
    audible signal for externally detecting unwanted absorbent material
    accidentally left in a surgical wound or incision made in the body during a
    surgical operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclass 431 for the placement of radio-opaque material in
    the body; and subclasses 433+ for the injection and detection of
    radio-opaque material placed in the body.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 9.4+
    for X-ray contrast compositions.


CLS 604/363
TXT With lubricating means to facilitate insertion:

    Subject matter under subclass 358 wherein the absorbent material has been
    treated with a lubricant to permit easy entry of said absorbent material
    into a body orifice.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     172 and 265, for surgical inserters or conduits having lubricating
    means thereon.


CLS 604/364
TXT Containing hydrosoluble, hydrodegradable, or body heat soluble material:

    Subject matter under subclass 358 wherein either (a) an absorbent material
    layer is soluble or disintegratable in water or (b) an absorbent layer has
    been treated with a composition designed to melt when placed in a body
    orifice or cavity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    265,    287 and 288, for other medical devices insertable into the body
    containing body degradable or soluble composition.


CLS 604/365
TXT Containing fiber or material bonding substance:

    Subject matter under subclass 358 wherein a fibrous, or a nonwoven or an
    extruded component of the collecting means is bound to itself or another
    component by (a) the application of heat or pressure or the combination of
    both which because of the intrinsic nature of the material component causes
    a bonding of the said material to itself or another component; or (b) by
    the application of a resin compound under heat or pressure or the
    combination of both to effect a bonding of the material component to itself
    or another component; or (c) the application of a cementlike compound with
    or without the use of heat or pressure or the combination of both the
    effect a bonding of the material to itself or another component to provide
    mechanical strength or to insure uniform consistency, solidification or
    adhesion of the material component or components.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass disclose the use of inorganic and
    organic compounds to bind fibers or materials together and include the use
    of adhesives, such as natural starch, cellulose materials and thermosetting
    resins as binders or glues. Thermosetting resins require the use of heat
    and pressure and which can not be remelted without destroying its original
    characteristics.  Examples, which are nonexhaustive, include melamines,
    phenolics, and ureas.

    (2)     Note.  Patents in this subclass usually disclose (a) the
    application of adhesives to adhere several layers of woven or nonwoven
    fibers together; (b) the application of adhesive to bind the edges of a
    cover wrapper of woven material in overlapping relationship in order to
    enclose the absorbent layers; or (c) the mechanical bonding of one or more
    layers of the absorbent pad either by the application of heat or pressure,
    or the combination of both, to the fibers which because of their chemical
    composition are bonded together by fusion of at least one layer to itself
    or another layer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370,    for thermoplastic resin materials, per se.

    371,    for nylon materials, per se.

    372,    for synthetic resins.

    373,    for natural or synthetic rubber used as an adhesive or binder.

    389+,   for adhesive fastener elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, for compositions used to bond
    fibers or layers.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate digests for adhesive bonding.

    424,    Drugs, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, appropriate
    subclass for adhesive compositions.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses for
    adhesives, particularly Class 523, subclasses 105+ for synthetic resin or
    natural rubber compositions intended for contact with living tissue.


CLS 604/366
TXT Thermoplastic:

    Subject matter under subclass 365 in which the resin compound is a linear
    macromolecular structural compound in the form of fibers, sheets, or
    cementlike material which will repeatedly soften when heated and harden
    when cooled.

    (1)     Note.  Examples, though not exhaustive, of thermoplastic bonding
    compounds or extended sheet material includes, acrylics, cellulosics,
    fluorocarbons, nylons, polyethylenes, styrene, and vinyl compounds.

    (2)     Note.  Patents in this subclass disclose the use of thermoplastic
    binders for the purpose of making the absorbent pad conform to the shape of
    the body portion to which it is applied.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    370,    for thermoplastic resin materials, per se.

    371,    for nylon materials, per se.

    372,    for synthetic resins.

    373,    for natural or synthetic rubber used as an adhesive or binder.

    389+,   for adhesive fastener elements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for natural resins.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses for
    adhesives, particularly Class 523, subclasses 105+ for synthetic resin or
    natural rubber compositions intended for contact with living tissue.


CLS 604/367
TXT Containing particular materials, fibers, or particles:

    Subject matter under subclass 358 wherein significance is attributed to a
    component material of the collecting means which is a woven material, or
    natural or synthetic threads, or smaller subdivisions of said natural or
    synthetic threads adapted for the purpose of forming particular component
    layers either solely or in combination with one another.

    (1)     Note.  Patent in this subclass and the subclasses indented
    thereunder disclose catamenial pads made of either one or more layers of
    woven material; or one layer or woven material acting as an envelope to
    enclose a layer of natural or synthetic fibers or particles; or one or more
    layers of natural or synthetic fibers or particles held together by inter
    fiber bonding to form an absorbent pad.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    384,    for features of a woven material having particular warp and woof
    orientation or other particular weave characteristics.


CLS 604/368
TXT Collagen or gelling material:

    Subject matter under subclass 367 wherein the collecting means contains a
    component derived from fibrous protein found in animal connective tissue or
    a chemical composition which is a natural or synthetic hydrocolloid, both
    of which are capable of absorbing and retaining water or body fluids in
    chemical combination and which swells to form a gel-like mass.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass disclose collagen or hydrocolloids
    in powder or granulated form disposed either in an envelopelike container
    with a liquid pervious cover sheet which is a layer of the absorbent pad or
    as a powder mixer in with a fiber layer or secured to the fiber layer by an
    adhesive.

    (2)     Note. Hydrocolloid compounds do not release the absorbent water but
    maintain it in chemical balance in the gel which is formed.  Examples,
    though not exhaustive, of natural hydrocolloids are:

            agar agar gum karaya algin gum tragacanth casein  polysaccaharides
    dextran proteins (albumen) gelatin starches guar gums

            Illustrative polymers which can be employed as hydrogels include,
    amoung others:

            Ammonium polyacrylates Anionic polyacrylamide Carboxymethyl
    cellulose Ethylene-maleic anhydride copolymers Hydroxyalkoxalkyl acrylates
    Hy-droxyalkoxalkyl methacrylates Hy-droxyalkyl acrylates Hydroxyalkyl
    methacrylates Hydroxyethyl-carboxy-methyl cellulose Hydroxyethyl cellulose
    Hydroxy propyl cellulose Maleic anyhydride-vinylether copolymers Methyl
    cellulose Polyacrylamide Polyacrylic acid Polyethylene glycol
    Polyethyleneimine Poly(ethylene oxide) Polymethacrylic acid Polystyrene
    sulfonic acid Polyvinylalcohol Polyvinylamine Polyvinylethers Polyvinyl
    pyrrolidone Polyvinylsulfonic acid Propyleneglycol alginate Sodium alginate

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    376,    for sodium carboxymethyl cellulose which has gel-like properties.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    252,    Compositions, subclass 302 and its indented subclasses for
    colloids; and subclasses 315.01+ in particular for gels.

    536,    Organic Compounds, subclass 102 for starch compositions.


CLS 604/369
TXT Foam or cellular structure material:

    Subject matter under subclass 367 wherein the collecting means contains a
    component which is in the form of a cellular or foamed product which
    contains pores, cavities, voids, intersticies, or fissures therein.

    (1)     Note.  Patents for natural or synthetic sponges as well as products
    made from synthetic chemical foams (e.g., polyurethane, etc.) are
    classifiable in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    521,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclasses 50+ for synthetic
    resin or natural rubber cellular material and the process of making said
    cellular material.


CLS 604/370
TXT Thermoplastic:

    Subject matter under subclass 367 wherein the collecting means contains a
    component which is a linear macromolecular resinous material in the form of
    fibers, particles, or sheets which will repeatedly soften when heated and
    harden when cooled.

    (1)     Note.  Examples, though not exhaustive, of thermoplastic bonding
    compounds or extended sheet material includes, acrylics, cellulosics,
    fluorocarbons, nylons, polyethylenes, styrene, and vinyl compounds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    366,    for thermoplastic materials used to bond one or more components of
    an absorbent pad to one another.

    369,    for polyurethane foam which is a thermoplastic material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, for natural resins.

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Class 523, subclasses 105+ for synthetic resin or natural
    rubber compositions intented for contact with living tissue.


CLS 604/371
TXT Nylon:

    Subject matter under subclass 370 in which the linear macromolecular resin
    fiber or sheet is a long chain polymeric amide molecule.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    528,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 310 and 332 for nylon.


CLS 604/372
TXT Synthetic resin:

    Subject matter under subclass 367 wherein a component of the collecting
    means is any of a class of solid or semisolid high molecular weight organic
    products of synthetic resin.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for resin material not classified in
    the subclasses above based upon particular use or function.

    (2)     Note.  Most resins are polymers with no particular melting point.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    365,    for resin compounds used as adhesive or binders.

    366,    for resins in fibrous, sheetlike or cementlike state use as
    adhesives, fiber, or layer binders.

    370,    for thermoplastic resin compounds.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Class 523, subclasses 105+ for synthetic resin or natural
    rubber compositions intended for contact with living tissue.


CLS 604/373
TXT Natural or synthetic rubber:

    Subject matter under subclass 367 wherein the collecting means contains a
    component which is a natural or synthetic elastomer derived by the
    polymerization or copolymerization of petroleum-derived olefinic or other
    unsaturated compounds.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    367,    for natural or synthetic rubber adhesives used to bind layers of an
    absorbent pad.

    389+,   for natural or synthetic rubber used as adhesives to hold absorbent
    pads on the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    520,    Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, appropriate subclasses,
    particularly Class 523, subclasses 105+ for synthetic resin or natural
    rubber compositions intended for contact with living tissue.


CLS 604/374
TXT Cellulose or cellulosic material:

    Subject matter under subclass 367 wherein significance is attributed to a
    layer of collecting means which is composed of material derived from living
    plants in the form of polysaccharides.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass disclose wood pulp fibers or
    sheets. For the purpose of this subclass wood pulp is considered to be
    mechanically prepared wood pulp unless specifically claimed or disclosed as
    having additional chemical processing such as sulfite treatment, etc., in
    which case the patent would be classified in subclasses 375+.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 1+ for processes of
    liberating natural cellulosic fibers.

    241,    Solid Material Communition or Disintegration, subclass 21 for
    processes of making wood pulp.


CLS 604/375
TXT With additional chemical modification (e.g., paper, chemical pulp, rayon,
    etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 374 in which the polysaccharide material has
    undergone chemical treatment to produce a chemical compound of cellulose
    having characteristics different than natural cellulose.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastics, subclasses 163.01+ for
    compositions containing cellulose or derivative thereof.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, subclasses 1+ for processes for
    the liberation of natural cellulose.

    536,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 30+ for cellulose derivatives.


CLS 604/376
TXT Carboxy radical containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 375 wherein the chemically modified cellulose
    or cellullose material contains a carboxyl radical.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass disclose the modified chemical
    cellulose as carboxymethyl or carboxyethyl cellulose or a sodium salt of
    either or other carboxy derivations of cellulose material (e.g., cellulose
    gum, sodium cellulose glycolate).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    368,    for gel-like materials containing carboxy radical cellulose
    compounds.


CLS 604/377
TXT Cotton or derivative thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 374 in which a layer of the collecting means
    contains threads, fibers, or woven material derived from or manufactured
    from the soft white fibers attached to the seeds of a cotton plant.


CLS 604/378
TXT Containing layers having differing absorption characteristics (e.g., flow
    control, wicking, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 358 wherein significance is attributed to a
    layer or the collecting means which is characterized by specific structure
    or composition which, by the nature of the material provides capillary
    action and allows the movement of the absorbed body liquids from one
    component of the collecting means or the movement of the absorbed body
    liquids from one portion of the component to another portion thereof in
    order to maintain that portion of the collecting means next to the body or
    body orifice as dry as possible.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes any patent which contains at least two
    components of a different fiber or woven material wherein the very nature
    of the different materials some capillary action (wicking) takes place
    between the layers.

    (2)     Note.  Patents are included in this subclass which disclose the
    movement of body liquids by capillary action (wicking) from one component
    layer to another component layer, as for example, the movement of menstrual
    fluid from the cover of a sanitary napkin by capillary action (wicking) by
    a underlying absorbent layer wherein the fluid is retained.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    368,    wherein collogen or gel forming materials are used for flow control
    or wicking.

    369,    wherein foam or cellular materials are used for flow control or
    wicking.


CLS 604/379
TXT Compressed layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 wherein a layer of the collecting means
    has been subjected to a reduction in volume or thickness due to the
    application of pressure to said layer.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass disclose layers of material of the
    absorbent pad which have been compressed in order to reduce the thickness
    or over all volume of the absorbent pad particularly when such pads are
    composed of multiple layers of materials or composed of one or more layers
    of bulky materials.


CLS 604/380
TXT Having discontinuous areas of compression:

    Subject matter under subclass 379 wherein the pressure applied to the
    surface of the layer has been applied either to only separate portions of
    the surface of the layer in a continuous manner or the pressure has been
    applied in an intermittent manner to the surface of the layer such that
    breaks or gaps are formed on its surface alternating between compressed and
    uncompressed portions.


CLS 604/381
TXT Layer coated or treated to decrease absorbency:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 wherein a surface of the layer of the
    collecting means has been treated with a composition or has been subjected
    to some process or action such that the surface area of the collecting
    means so affected will diminish in its ability to absorb body fluids.


CLS 604/382
TXT Discontinuous coating or treatment of layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 381 wherein the composition applied to the
    surface or the process or action applied to the surface has been applied
    such that only portions of the surface so effected will diminish in its
    ability to absorb body fluids and other portions will continue to readily
    absorb said body fluids.


CLS 604/383
TXT Needled or punched layer:

    Subject matter under subclass 378 wherein a layer of the collecting means
    has been subject to the piercing action of a plurality of slender pointed
    rods, which do not remove material, or to the action of a pointed or hollow
    circular cutting tool, which removes material, for the purpose of either
    forming a channel or openings in said layer for the purpose of permitting
    speedier flow of body fluids between the various component layers.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass disclose needling to facilitate
    interfiber connections between layers to permit wicking between the layers
    or the punching of holes on the component layer surface to ensure the
    speedy removal of body fluids from the punched surface to permit rapid
    absorbency in a more absorbent layer.


CLS 604/384
TXT Having specific fiber orientation or weave:

    Subject matter under subclass 358 wherein significance is attributed to
    either the alignment or direction of the fibers in a layer or to entwining
    of the warp and woof threads of a woven fibrous material.


CLS 604/385.1
TXT Having specific design, shape, or structural feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 358 wherein significance is attributed to the
    overall style, appearance, form, or configuration of the collecting means.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass claim the significance of the form,
    design, shape or structural features of pads or diapers.  Examples of such
    are "hourglass" diapers, shape of the edges of diapers, shapes and designs
    of aborbent pads, and form and disposition of layers of diapers to form
    square or triangular shapes.


CLS 604/385.2
TXT Elastic type edge:

    Subject matter under subclass 385.1 wherein a border of the fibrous layer
    of material of the collecting means is formed by or uses a resilient
    material or approximates a resilient material in its function to help
    affect the style, appearance, form or configuration of the collecting means.

    (1)     Note.  Gathered leg openings or waistbands would be classifiable in
    this subclass.


CLS 604/386
TXT Pad having means for securing pad during use:

    Subject matter under subclass 358 wherein means are provided on the
    collecting means to attach the collecting means either to itself to hold it
    in contact with the body of the user or the collecting means is attached to
    some means other than itself to hold it in contact with the body during use.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    393+,   for support means, per se, for absorbent pads.

    401+,   for pad supporting means having body attaching means.

    402,    for means to hold or suspend a pad.


CLS 604/387
TXT By securing to garment or person:

    Subject matter under subclass 386 wherein the collecting means is attached
    either to another garment or directly on the person.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass usually disclose an absorbent pad
    having an adhesive strip with a peelable cover which is removed to permit
    the adhesive surface to be applied to an undergarment (e.g., panties) or to
    the skin of the user.

    (2)     Note.  Diapers which are secured by and adhesive tab fastner
    element are not considered to be attached to "another garment" or to a
    "person".  Adhesive tab fastener elements attach one portion of the diaper
    to another portion of the same diaper.


CLS 604/388
TXT Shoulder-supported garment:

    Subject matter under subclass 387 wherein the collecting means is attached
    to a garment which encloses the torso of the body.

    (1)     Note.  Patent in this subclass disclose the attachment of diapers
    to an infants undershirt or pajama top.


CLS 604/389
TXT Adhesive tab fastener element:

    Subject matter under subclass 386 wherein the attaching means is a short
    strip of material or a flap coated with tacky cement-like material formed
    as an integral portion of the collecting means to facilitate attachment of
    said collecting means about the body of the user during use.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 304 for adhesive fastener
    elements.


CLS 604/390
TXT With release means associated with tab fastener:

    Subject matter under subclass 389 wherein the attaching means is provided
    with a protective coating or covering for the cement-like portion thereof
    to prevent premature contact of said cementlike portion with the collecting
    means, said covering or coating being removable from contact with said
    cementlike portion before said collecting means is attached about the body
    of the user.

    (1)     Note.  Release cover or coating may be either tear off strips which
    are peeled from the adhesive surface of the fastener and discarded, peeled
    from the adhesive surface and remain attached to a portion of the adhesive
    tape or peeled from a portion of the pad itself (the backing sheet) which
    has been treated with a release coating on its outer surface, in which case
    the release coating is maintained in place upon the outer surface of the
    absorbent pad.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclass 304 for adhesive fastener
    elements.


CLS 604/391
TXT By fabric strip fastener element (e.g.,
    "velcroR", etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 386 wherein the collecting means is attached
    by a textile fabric strip device comprising cooperating means carried by
    opposed foundation fabric members, one of said foundation members composed
    of a cluster of loops which engages with the hook shaped members of the
    opposing foundation fabric and which members (e.g., "VelcroR", etc.) upon
    being touched together engage to effect a connection between the opposed
    foundation members, said connection being capable of separation upon apart
    of the fabric strips.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 442+ for "VelcroR"
    fasteners, per se.

    128,    Surgery, Digest 15, for "VelcroR" fastener devices used on medical
    equipment.


CLS 604/392
TXT By strap, belt, tying, or endless band means:

    Subject matter under subclass 386 wherein the collecting means is secured
    by a means which consists either of an elongated strip of material with or
    without end securing means or means which can be gathered at its end and
    knotted or a band, usually elastic in nature, in the form of a closed loop
    which secures the collecting means to the user by being mounted about the
    waist of the user.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    394,    for panties having endless waist bands.

    401,    for means for attaching a pad support to the body or waist of the
    user.


CLS 604/393
TXT Specific garment, holder, or support for absorbent pad:

    Subject matter under subclass 358 wherein significance is attributed to
    structure of the securing means, per se, provided to hold or support the
    collecting means on the body of the user, said means being in the form of
    clothing, suspending means for the collecting means or means underlying the
    collecting means to support the said collecting means.

    (1)     Note.  Patents classified in this subclass and the subclasses
    indented thereunder provide for the nominal recitation of an absorbent pad
    combined with means to support such pad during use.  If structure of the
    pad or its component layers is claimed, the pad is classified in subclasses
    358+ above and its indented subclasses with a cross-reference into this
    subclass and its indented subclasses for the holder or support structure.

    (2)     Note.  For the purpose of this subclass and its indented
    subclasses, the term "holder" is defined as any means which suspends the
    absorbent pad from its opposite ends without any intermediate underlying
    support for the body of the absorbent pad.  Holders are usually referred to
    as "sanitary belts" in the art.

    (3)     Note.  For the purpose of this subclass and the indented
    subclasses, the term "support" is defined as any means which engages an
    absorbent pad along the underside of the body of the absorbent pad to
    sustain or uphold the absorbent pad.  Supports may be suspended from
    holders or attached to garments (panties) during use.

    (4)     Note.  For the purpose of this subclass and those indented
    thereunder, a plastic or rubber appliance holding a detachable diaper is
    considered to be a garment, holder, or support for the diaper.  If the
    plastic or rubber is integral with the diaper (woven or nonwoven textile
    material), it is considered as an multilayered absorbent pad and as such is
    classified in subclasses 358+.


CLS 604/394
TXT Abdominal enclosing type:

    Subject matter under subclass 393 wherein the clothing encloses the lower
    portion of the body by either surrounding the waist and hips or in
    additional enclose the crotch portion of the body.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter in this subclass and its indent disclose
    includes skirts, panties, and other garments for holding an absorbent pad.


CLS 604/395
TXT With openable or removable crotch portion:

    Subject matter under subclass 394 wherein that portion of clothing covering
    the genital area is capable of being unfastened or detached completely to
    permit access to the genital area.


CLS 604/396
TXT With endless waist encircling band (e.g., panty type):

    Subject matter under subclass 394 wherein the clothing is supported about
    the waist of the wearer by an elastic element which is in the form of a
    closed loop.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    392,    for endless band means for securing an absorbent pad on the body of
    the user.


CLS 604/397
TXT Pad support having means to restrain absorbent pad:

    Subject matter under subclass 393 wherein the underlying support which
    engages the collecting means has securing means carried thereon or
    associated therewith to hold said collecting means thereon during use.


CLS 604/398
TXT Pad restrained by means transverse to width of pad or fastener element
    (e.g., strap, end flap, or tuck):

    Subject matter udner subclass 397 wherein the securing means carried by or
    associated with the means to support the collecting means includes (a) one
    or more elements on the support crosswise of the length of the collecting
    means under which the body of the collecting means is inserted; or (b)
    means at the opposite ends of the support under which the ends of the
    collecting means are secured; or (c) joining means to restrain the pad on
    the pad support.

    (1)     Note.  The securing means here usually consists of elastic straps
    running crosswise to the length of the pad support under which the pad body
    is slipped and held or folded flap or tuck areas at opposite ends of the
    pad holder into which the pad ends are placed and held to secure the pad on
    the pad holder.  The flaps or folds are closed at their ends and the end
    portions of the aborbent pad does not pass through the flap or fold whereas
    the transverse strap crosses over the body portion of the pad underneath
    the strap and extend beyond the strap. Pads secured to the pad support by
    safety pins are classified here.


CLS 604/399
TXT Button or snap fastener element:

    Subject matter under subclass 398 in which the collecting means is attached
    by a disklike fastener element used to join the support and the collecting
    means by fitting through and engaging a slit or loop in the collecting
    means or a fastening device in two pieces having a projecting element in
    one piece which snap fits into a concave portion or hole on the other piece
    for the purpose of securing collecting means on the support.

    (1)     Note.  Illustrative of some of the snap fasteners found in this
    subclass are (a) one type engages a premade hole in the absorbent pad
    through which the projection portion of the fastener passes to secure the
    pad when snapped into the other portion of the fastener element, and (b)
    devices in which one element of the fastener device carried by the pad and
    the other by the pad support which are snapped into engagement to restrain
    the pad on the pad support.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., appropriate subclasses for snap
    fasteners, per se.


CLS 604/400
TXT Pad support or holder adjustable relative to body crotch area:

    Support matter under subclass 393 wherein means are provided either on the
    support or holder or on a means attaching the support or holder to the body
    to permit movement of the support pad holder into or out of engagement with
    the genital portion of the body of the user.


CLS 604/401
TXT With body attaching means for pad support:

    Subject matter under subclass 393 wherein the support is provided with
    means to secure it to the body of the user.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass disclose various means such as
    waist belts or straps having dependent straps attached to the pad support
    or a pad support having loops through which a belt or strap passes to
    support the pad support about the users waist.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    386+,   for means for securing an absorbent pad on the body of the user.

    402,    where the pad, per se, is held on straps or other means connected
    to a belt or strap about the users waist during use.


CLS 604/402
TXT Pad holding or suspending devices:

    Subject matter udner subclass 393 wherein suspender elements in the form of
    belts or straps provide the only means to maintain the collecting means in
    place upon the body of the user.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass are usually referred to as
    "sanitary beltsand provide means by which the absorbent pad is held in the
    crotch area of the user.  These devices sole function is hold the pad, per
    se, against the body.

    (2)     Note.  Absorbent pads are usually held on the holders by the woven
    material at the opposite ends of the pad which are hooked, looped, tied, or
    secured by other means on the holder.


CLS 604/403
TXT CONTAINER FOR BLOOD OR BODY TREATING MATERIAL, OR MEANS USED THEREWITH
    (E.G., NEEDLE FOR PIERCING CONTAINER CLOSURE, ETC.):

    Subject matter under the class definition including a receptacle adapted
    for dispensing, holding or storing blood or a body treating material, or
    devices used therewith.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, for containers or receptacles of
    special utility.

    215,    Bottles and Jars, for baby bottles and nipples therefor.

    220,    Receptacles, for containers or receptacles, or general utility.


CLS 604/404
TXT Means for indicating condition of container content:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 wherein means are provided for recording
    volume or use or an undesirable condition affecting the contents of the
    container.


CLS 604/405
TXT Filter for purifying or washing air entering container:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 including a solid filter or liquid trap
    for removing impurities in air entering a receptacle by entrapment in
    either a filter or a liquid.


CLS 604/406
TXT Filter or series thereof for liquid entering or leaving container:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 including a filter or a series of filters
    for separating impurities for liquid coming into or dispensed from the
    receptacle.


CLS 604/407
TXT Means for metering amount of content drawn from container:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 including means for measuring the rate of
    flow from the receptacle during dispensing of the contents therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    186,    207+, and 246+, for metering from other medicating devices.


CLS 604/408
TXT Bag type:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 wherein the receptacle is a flexible,
    collapsible pouch or sack.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    262,    for bags having dispensing nozzles or conduits attached thereto.


CLS 604/409
TXT With means for holding sample of content:

    Subject matter under subclass 408 which includes additional means for
    holding or supporting a pilot sample of the material held in the container
    for the purpose of verifying the contents of the sack or pouch.


CLS 604/410
TXT Plural compartments or bags:

    Subject matter under subclas 408 wherein plural receptacles are provided,
    or wherein a single receptacle has plural separated chambers.


CLS 604/411
TXT Having hollow needle or spike for piercing container or container closure:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 including a hollow member having a
    pointed end or an elongated cylinder having a piercing end for puncturing
    receptacles or closures therefor, whereby fluent material can be passed to
    or from the receptacle.

    (1)     Note.  Fluent material includes air.


CLS 604/412
TXT Conduit with hollow needle or spike at each end thereof:

    Subject matter under subclass 411 comprising a tube having a hollow member
    with a pointed end mounted at each of a its ends, one of the pointed
    members generally being inserted into a blood vessel and the other pointed
    member being inserted into a container, or closure associated with a
    container, in which blood is collected.


CLS 604/413
TXT Pointed at both ends:

    Subject matter under subclass 411 wherein the hollow member is pointed at
    opposite ends thereof.


CLS 604/414
TXT Mounted on one container and used to pierce another container or closure:

    Subject matter under subclass 411 wherein the hollow member is mounted on
    and extends outwardly from a receptacle, the pointed end of the hollow
    member being thrust into the wall of a second receptacle, or into a closure
    for a second receptacle, to transfer the fluent material between the
    receptacles.


CLS 604/415
TXT Container with pierceable closure:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 wherein the receptacle is provided with a
    closure capable of being pierced by a pointed member.


CLS 604/416
TXT Materials mixed within container:

    Subject matter under subclass 403 provided with means to permit mixing
    between separate compartments or receptacles within a container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82+,    for injectors having mixing means.


CLS 604/890.1
TXT CONTROLLED RELEASE THERAPEUTIC DEVICE OR SYSTEM:

    Subject matter under the class definition in which the body is treated by a
    therapeutic delivery device or system which has dynamic structural means
    therein to controllably dispense a body treating material to the body over
    a prolonged period of time by the slow release of the said body treating
    material.

    (1)     Note.  The delivery device may act to dispense the therapeutic
    means either continuously or discontinuously.

    (2)     Note.  This and the indented subclass 890.1 provides for a device
    or system comprising a reservoir and control, pump or controllable valve
    means for dispensing a drug to a living body, in other words, a device
    which is more than a passive reservoir that is implanted or attached to the
    living body.

    (3)     Note.  The devices of this and the indented subclasses contain
    moving mechanical parts which effect the release of drugs in a controlled
    manner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Composition, subclasses 422+
    for preparations characterized by special physical form which release
    medication at a controlled rate where the inserted or implanted article is
    no more than (a) a single or multilayered assembly impregnated with or (b)
    a reservoir from which medicament is released by diffusion or osmosis;
    sublcass 448 for a bandage or transdermal or medicator held in place by a
    claimed pressure sensitive adhesive; subclass 449 for a transdemal or
    percutaneons device for the controlled release or medicament through the
    unbroken skin.  Subclass 473 for a tablet with a porous perforated
    apertured or sieved layer for the controlled release of medicament;
    subclass 484 for an elutable or dissolvable matrix.


CLS 604/891.1
TXT Implanted dynamic device or system:

    Subject matter under subclass 890.1 in which the therapeutic delivery
    device or system is surgically placed into the living body and the device
    has a plurality or relatively moving mechanical parts.

    (1)     Note. These devices are typically implanted reservoir with
    mechanical or electromechanical control means actuated by sensing same body
    condition or by patient actuation.


CLS 604/892.1
TXT Osmotic or diffusion pumped device or system:

    Subject matter under subclass 890.1 in which the therapeutic delivery
    device forcably dispenses the body treating material by pressure created by
    osmosis or diffusion of fluid into a material or bladder which expands and
    compresses the body treating material to be dispensed.

    (1)     Note.  In most of the devices osmosis occurs at least into a single
    physically isolated part of the device which serves as an osmotic pump.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Composition, subclasses 422+
    for preparations characterized by special physical form including a
    membrane across which osmosis or diffusion may occur in which the osmosis
    or diffusion bring fluid into direct contact with the medicinal composition.


    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 604/900
TXT TELLTALE SHOWING ENTRY OF BLOOD INTO BODY INSERTED CONDUIT:

    Device for observing the flow of blood into a conduit placed in the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    168,    for a catheter having body piercing needle, closure rod, or stylet
    axially movable therein and also having a telltale for showing entry of
    blood into the catheter.


CLS 604/901
TXT INJECTION DEVICE WITH THERMOMETER:

    A means for inserting a treating material into the body which is also
    provided with a temperature indicating means.


CLS 604/902
TXT SUCTION WANDS:

    Handheld nozzles, usually provided with suction control means, for removing
    blood, debris, or other fluids from the body.


CLS 604/903
TXT MEDICAL CONTAINER WITH MATERIAL AGITATION MEANS:

    Medical containers having means therein to stir, mix, or otherwise agitate
    the contents thereof.


CLS 604/904
TXT TAMPONS:

    Devices for catamenial use or the application of medicating material for
    use intravaginally.


CLS 604/905
TXT ASEPTIC CONNECTORS OR COUPLINGS (E.G., FRANGIBLE, PIERCABLE, ETC.):

    Medical connectors or couplings adapted to connect medical containers
    and/or conduits for the purpose of sterile transfer of fluids to or from
    said containers and/or conduits.


CLS 604/906
TXT ARTIFICIAL INSEMINATION:

    Subject matter related to the collection of semen from a male and its
    introduction into a female reproductive tract in a noncoital manner.


CLS 606/
TTL SURGERY

CLS 606/1
TXT INSTRUMENTS:

    Subject matter under the class definition of Class 128, including devices
    or appliance for use in operative surgery upon the body or in preparation
    for operative surgery, together with devices designed to assist in
    operative surgery.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for light application to the body.

    20+,    for cryogenic application to the body.

    27+,    for heat application to the body.

    32+,    for electrical application to the body.

    53+,    for orthopedic instruments.

    119+,   for obstetrical instruments.

    127+,   for concretion removal.

    135+,   for mammalian sterilization instruments.

    139+,   for suture ligature, elastic band or clip appliers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 830+ and 842+ for female and male birth control
    devices.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 33+ for reproduction and fertilization
    techniques, subclass 36 for blood vessel or graft preparation and subclass
    37 for internal organ support or slings.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 11+ for means to insert fibrous or resident
    packing receptor or medicament into a body orifice.


CLS 606/2
TXT Light application:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the instrument has combined
    therewith means for applying light or analogous rays to the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses
    88+ for other light applying devices which are limited to therapeutic use.


CLS 606/2.5
TXT Lithotripsy:
    Subject matter under subclass 2 for fragmenting a calculus or stone (e.g.,
    kidney stone, bladder stone, etc.) by use of light energy applied thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128,    for subject matter relating to fragmenting a calculus or stone by
    use of mechanical energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 600+ for inductive heating, subclasses
    678+ for microwave heating, and subclasses 764+ for capacitive dielectric
    heating.

    241,    Solid Material Comminution or Disintegration, subclass 1 for a
    process of disintegrating solid material by means other than mechanical
    energy.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 492.1+ for irradiation of objects.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 578+ for
    incandescent filament lamp structure.

    359,    Optics:  Systems  (Including Communication) and Elements,
    appropriate subclasses for an optical combination or subcombination, per se
    (e.g., lens, mirror, ocular, etc.).

    362,    Illumination, appropriate subclasses for lighting means, or
    supports.

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, appropriate subclasses for a laser, per
    se.

    385,    Optical Waveguides, appropriate subclasses for a device for
    conducting light energy, per se.

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 101+ and, in particular, subclasses 160+, 179+,
    191, 200, 224, and 249 for an illuminated endoscope used to view body stones

    601,    Surgery:  Kinesitherapy, subclass 4 for massaging means to crush
    body stones by the application of external force.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 20+ for medicating, irrigating, or aspirating
    material other than a calculus from the body combined with light
    application.


CLS 606/3
TXT With particular wavelength:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the light or analogous rays are of
    a wavelength particularly adapted to effect a surgical procedure.


CLS 606/4
TXT Ophthalmic:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 designed to be used upon the eye.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for means for inserting or removing eye lens material.

    166,    for corneal cutter or guide therefor.


CLS 606/5
TXT Recurving or reshaping of the eye:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 designed to remove portions of the eye to
    effect an alteration of the curvature or shape thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for means for inserting or removing eye lens material.

    166,    for corneal cutter or guide therefor.


CLS 606/6
TXT Cataracts or glaucoma:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 designed to be used in the treatment of
    opacity of the eye lens or capsule or to heat intravocular pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    107,    for means to manipulate the natural eye lens.


CLS 606/7
TXT Angioplasty:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 designed to be used in the removal of blood
    vessel obstructions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159,    for blood vessel, duct, test cutters, scraper or abrader.

    200,    for mechanical embolic traps or filters in general.


CLS 606/8
TXT Anastomosis:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 having means used in the joining together
    of various tissues of the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151+,   for various devices used to join body tissue together.


CLS 606/9
TXT Dermatological:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 designed to be used in treatment of the
    skin by removing hair, lesions or other extraneous matter from the skin.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131+,   for removal of skin or material therefrom, in particular subclasses
    133 for the physical removal of hair by tweezers and other devices and
    subclass 134 for the removal of hair by the application of wax or adhesives.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 289+ for treating material applied to or
    removed from external body surface or certaneous layer of skin.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses
    88+ for chambers and cabinets used to irradiate some portion of the body
    with light rays.


CLS 606/10
TXT Systems:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 for supplying light or analogous rays to
    light applicators by means in combination with conventional applicators or
    by means limited to a  surgical purpose.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for methods and systems combined with particular light applicator
    structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 121.6+ for methods and systems
    employing lasers.

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, appropriate subclasses, for systems
    directed to lasers.


CLS 606/11
TXT Beam energy control or monitoring:

    Subject matter under subclass 10 including means for controlling or
    monitoring the output power of the light or analogous rays.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 121.6+ for beam energy control systems
    for lasers; 121.6+, for laser monitoring.

    372,    Coherent Light Generators, subclasses 9+ for particular beam
    control devices.


CLS 606/12
TXT Condition responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 11 wherein a sensed condition of the output
    power or treatment area is used to control the output power of the light or
    analogous rays.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 121.6+ for condition responsive laser
    control systems.


CLS 606/13
TXT Applicators:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 including particular applicator structure
    or light application means in combination with such structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    10,     for methods and systems including the light applicator without any
    particular applicator structure.


CLS 606/14
TXT Placed in body:

    Subject matter under subclass 13 wherein the applicator is devised for
    placement within the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170,    for cutting devices used in microsurgery.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 101+ for endoscopes, per se.


CLS 606/15
TXT With optical fiber:

    Subject matter under subclass 14 wherein the applicator includes flexible,
    optically transparent fiber material for directing a light or analogous
    rays along a restricted path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17,     for other light applicators utilizing optical fibers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    385,    Optical Waveguides, appropriate subclasses for particular
    structural features relating to optical fibers.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses
    88+ for other light applicators utilizing optical fibers.


CLS 606/16
TXT With optical fiber:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 13 wherein the applicator includes
    flexible, optically transparent fiber material for directing a light or
    analogous rays along a restricted path.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    15,     for other light applicators utilizing optical fibers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    385,    Optical Waveguides, appropriate subclasses for particular
    structural features relating to optical fibers.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclass 92
    for other light applicators utilizing optical fibers.


CLS 606/17
TXT With beam shaping or redirecting (e.g., lens):

    Subject matter under subclass 13 including devices for shaping, such as
    focusing, or altering the path of the light or analogous rays.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 121.12+, for particular beam shaping
    devices.


CLS 606/18
TXT Mirror:

    Subject matter under subclass 17 including a surface which will reflect
    light or analogous rays.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 121.12+ for beam shaping with a mirror.

    359,    Optics:  Systems (Including Communication) and Elements, subclasses
    838+ for particular mirror structure and means for supporting and moving
    mirrors.


CLS 606/19
TXT Articulated arm:

    Subject matter under subclass 18 including a plurality of light
    transmitting conduits, rotatably connected, having reflective surfaces at
    the intersection of the conduits.


CLS 606/20
TXT Cryogenic  application:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the instrument has combined
    therewith means for cooling contacted body tissue to extremely low
    temperatures.

    (1)     Note.  Cryogenics is the study, production, and utilization of
    extremely low temperatures.  To precisely define the cryogenic range is
    difficult since the literature ambiguously defines the upper limit to be
    from 220 degrees to 400 R (-240 to -60 F).  For the purposes of this class,
    the cryogenic temperature range will be construed to vary between absolute
    zero and about 400 R.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclasses, for cooling means,
    particularly subclass 293 for hand manipulable tools.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses
    96+ for noncryogenic instruments for cooling the body which are limited to
    therapeutic use.


CLS 606/21
TXT Internal  application:

    Subject matter under subclass 20 designed for application within the
    natural orifices of the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclass 113
    for noncryogenic internal cooling applicators.


CLS 606/22
TXT With coolant supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 20 including means for providing a cooling
    fluid to the tissue contacting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses
    104+ for other noncryogenic instruments having means for supplying a
    cooling fluid.


CLS 606/23
TXT Tip or other cooling concentration means:

    Methods and apparatus under subclass 22 wherein a projecting extremity or
    other concentrated area of the instrument is cooled.


CLS 606/24
TXT With heating means (e.g., defroster):

    Subject matter under subclass 23 wherein the instrument includes means for
    warming a previously cooled tip or other concentrated area to effect
    removal of the instrument from the body.


CLS 606/25
TXT Self-contained coolant supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 23, wherein the instrument has combined
    therewith means to provide a fluid supply to the cooling concentration
    means.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is limited to the application of energy
    internally to a body.  Lithotripsy fragmentation by the application of
    energy from an external source is found in Class 601, Surgery:
    Kinesitherapy, subclass 4.


CLS 606/26
TXT With hand manipulable coolant control:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 which includes manually moved input means
    on the instrument to regulate the supply of cooling fluid to the cooling
    concentration means.


CLS 606/27
TXT Heat application:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the instrument has means for
    converting energy which provides means for warming localized body tissue
    with a hot object or warmed material.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not include instruments which cause a
    heating of the body by direct passage of electricity or electrical energy
    through the body.  Such instruments are located in subclasses 32+.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    192+,   for dilators in which the dilation is produced by an inflatable
    member which may be inflated by a hot or cold fluid.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclass 140, for cutting instruments of general utility
    combined with a heater.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 221+, for heating tools or instruments
    of general utility.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses
    96+ for other instruments for heating the body which are limited to
    therapeutic use; and subclass 113 for internal thermal applicators.


CLS 606/28
TXT Tip or other heat concentration means:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 wherein only the extremity or other
    localized area of the instrument is heated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 229+, for hand-manipulative tools or
    instruments with a heated tip or other heat concentration area.


CLS 606/29
TXT Tip in electrical circuit:

    Subject matter under subclass 28 wherein the localized area is contained
    within an electrical circuit and is either fashioned from a highly
    resistive material or is a protruding portion of an element which is
    fashioned from a highly resistive material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 233+, for hand-manipulative tools or
    instruments having a heated tip in an electrical circuit.


CLS 606/30
TXT Self-contained power supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 29 wherein the instrument contains its own
    power supply for the electrical heater.


CLS 606/31
TXT With thermal control means:

    Subject matter under subclass 29 including means for regulating the
    temperature of the heated tip.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclasses for various temperature
    regulating means, particularly subclass 241 for such means combined with a
    heated tool or instrument.


CLS 606/32
TXT Electrical application:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the instrument has means thereon
    for applying electricity or electrical energy from the instrument to the
    body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    231,    Whips and Whip Apparatus, subclasses 2+, for electrical shocking
    devices such as cattle prods.

    463,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclass 47.3 for a striking type of
    weapon for use on a human being which includes an electric shock feature
    (e.g., an electric prod used by police, etc.).


CLS 606/33
TXT Electromagnetic wave irradiation:

    Subject matter under subclass 32 wherein the instrument has means for
    applying electrical energy to the body in the form of a field of
    electromagnetic wave radiation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for focused energy used to fragment concretions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 600+ for inductive heating, subclasses
    678+ for microwave heating, and subclasses 764+ for capacitive dielectric
    heating.


    600,    Surgery, subclasses 9+, for magnetic field applied to the body for
    therapeutic purposes.

    601,    Surgery:  Kinesitherapy, subclasses 15+ for kinesitherapy devices
    utilizing electric wave energy.

    607,    Surgery:  Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application, subclasses
    154+ for similar high frequency radiation devices.


CLS 606/34
TXT Systems:

    Subject matter under subclass 32 for supplying electricity to electrical
    applicators by means in combination with conventional applicators or by
    means limited to a surgical purpose.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41,     for methods and systems including particular applicator structure.


CLS 606/35
TXT Ground electrode monitoring:

    Subject matter under subclass 34 including means for monitoring the return
    circuit path from the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for ground electrodes, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclass 908, for other patient protection devices.

    361,    Electricity:  Electrical Systems and Devices, appropriate
    subclasses, for other safety and protection systems.


CLS 606/36
TXT Depilation:

    Subject matter under subclass 34 designed to remove hair from the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43,     for depilatory methods and systems including particular applicator
    structure.

    133,    for tweezers used to remove hair from the body.

    134,    for hair removal involving waxes or adhesives.


CLS 606/37
TXT Combined cutting-coagulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 34 designed to effect both cutting and
    coagulation of localized portions of body tissue.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    45+     and 49, for methods and systems for cutting and coagulation
    including particular applicator structure.

    110+,   for the removal of tonsils, adenoids or polyps including cutting
    and hemostasis.


CLS 606/38
TXT With feedback control:

    Subject matter under subclass 37 including feedback circuitry to regulate
    the output of a cutting or coagulation system based upon a sensed condition
    of the circuit's output or a sensed treatment area condition.


CLS 606/39
TXT Cutting:

    Subject matter under subclass 34 designed to effect only cutting of
    localized portions of the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for other methods and systems for cutting.

    45,     for methods and systems for cutting including particular applicator
    structure.

    167+,   for cutting, punching and piercing devices.


CLS 606/40
TXT Coagulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 34 designed to effect only coagulation of
    localized portions of body tissue.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37,     for other methods and systems for coagulation.

    49,     for methods and systems for coagulation including particular
    applicator structure.

    111,    for hemostasis devices used to remove tonsils, adenoids or polyps.


CLS 606/41
TXT Applicators:

    Subject matter under subclass 32 including particular applicator structure
    or electrical application means in combination with such structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    34,     for methods and systems including an electrical applicator without
    any particular applicator structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 234, for heating tools or instruments
    having the work in an electrical circuit.


CLS 606/42
TXT With switching or power control:

    Subject matter under subclass 41 wherein the applicator includes means for
    switching between cut and coagulation outputs and means for controlling the
    output power of the instrument.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for applicators with thermal control means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    200,    Electricity:  Circuit Makers and Breakers, appropriate subclasses,
    for switching devices.


CLS 606/43
TXT Depilation:

    Subject matter under subclass 41 designed to remove hair from the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    36,     for methods and systems of depilation including an electrical
    applicator without any particular applicator structure.

    133+,   for mechanical means for removing hair from the skin.


CLS 606/44
TXT By needle:

    Subject matter under subclass 43 wherein the depilation means is an
    elongated needle-like structure pointed at one and which is inserted into a
    hair follicle to remove the hair therefrom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    222+,   for suturing needles.


CLS 606/45
TXT Cutting:

    Subject matter under subclass 41 designed to operate by cutting localized
    portions of the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37+     and 39+, for cutting methods and systems including an electrical
    applicator without any particular applicator structure.

    167+,   for surgical cutting instruments.


CLS 606/46
TXT Endoscopic:

    Subject matter under subclass 45 wherein the cutting device is enclosed in
    a tubular speculum designed to be inserted into a natural body orifice.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170+,   for microsurgical cutting devices.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 101+ for endoscopes for diagnostic purposes.


CLS 606/47
TXT With formable electrode:

    Subject matter under subclass 46 wherein the electrode of the cutting
    device is formed into its working shape outside of the tubular speculum
    through which it is inserted into the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    108,    for means to manipulate or use a conduit which is inserted in the
    body.


CLS 606/48
TXT Bipolar electrodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 45 wherein the cutting device includes plural
    electrodes adapted to be connected to opposite poles of a power supply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    50,     for other bipolar electrode applicators.


CLS 606/49
TXT Coagulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 41 designed to coagulate tissue in localized
    portions of the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    37+     and 40, for coagulation methods and systems including an electrical
    applicator without any particular applicator structure.

    111,    for hemostasis involving tonsil, adenoid or polyp removal.


CLS 606/50
TXT Bipolar electrodes:

    Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein the coagulation devices includes
    plural electrodes adapted to be connected to opposite poles of a power
    supply.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    48,     for other bipolar electrode applicators.


CLS 606/51
TXT With forceps or tweezers:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 provided with pivoted arms or pincer-like,
    nonpivoted members for carrying contact elements for grasping parts of the
    body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43      and 52, for other electrical forceps or tweezers.

    210+,   for mechanical structure of forceps or tweezers.


CLS 606/52
TXT With forceps or tweezers:

    Subject matter under subclass 49 provided with pivoted arms of pincer-like,
    nonpivoted members for carrying contact elements for grasping parts of the
    body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    43      and 51, electrical forceps or tweezers.

    210+,   for mechanical structure of forceps or tweezers.


CLS 606/53
TXT Orthopedic instrumentation:

    Subject matter under the class definition where significance is attributed
    to means designed for particular use in, or in the preparation for, a
    surgical procedure on bone structure including means for permanent or
    temporary attachment to a bone, or portion thereof, to correct a deformity,
    fracture, unwanted or diseased condition.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this class, the term "fracture" will include
    both accidental and purposeful disassociation of bone tissue, e.g., bone
    tissue surgically separated by osteotomy.

    (2)     Note.  Patents claiming opening of a skull for the purpose of
    gaining entry into the skull are not considered for placement here since
    there is no preparation for a surgical procedure on bone structure (the
    skull) but is merely cutting into a bone structure to perform a surgical
    procedure on structure beneath the skull.  Patents of this type are
    properly classified in this class subclasses 167+, particularly subclasses
    172+ for cutting devices having dura guards.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, subclasses 16+, for bone or joint prosthesis.


CLS 606/54
TXT External fixation means:

    Subject matter under subclass 53 wherein a positioning means which remains
    external to the body, is applied or connected to at least one bone fragment
    to maintain that bone fragment in a desired position during healing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72+,    for transcutaneous pins and screws used to connect an external
    fixator with a bone.


CLS 606/55
TXT Movable by patient:

    Subject matter under subclass 54 wherein the external bone fixation means
    is capable of limited movement, by the wearer thereof, to exercise a bone
    joint about which the fixation means is attached.


CLS 606/56
TXT Ring frame:

    Subject matter under subclass 54 wherein the external fixation means is a
    brace which surrounds in whole or in part that portion of the body to which
    it is applied.

    (1)     Note.  The frame members are typically, generally circular or
    U-shaped and designed for application about a person's limb or pelvis.


CLS 606/57
TXT Compression or distraction mechanism:

    Subject matter under subclass 54 wherein the external fixation means causes
    a pressing together or a separation of the bone fragments to which the
    means is applied so as to adjust and maintain the bone fragments in a
    desired positional relationship during a substantial portion of the healing
    process, i.e., the compression or distraction mechanism remains as part of
    the external fixator during the whole period of treatment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    for compression or distractions devices which do not remain as part
    of the fixator during the period of treatment.


CLS 606/58
TXT Cyclable or incrementable:

    Subject matter under subclass 57 having additional means to permit
    reorientation of the positional relationship between the bone fragments
    during the healing process e.g., as in a bone-lengthening treatment regimen.


CLS 606/59
TXT Pin connector:

    Subject matter under subclass 54 which provides the joining means between
    the external fixator structure and an elongated transcutaneous fastener
    element which is secured in a bone fragment to be fixated.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72+,    for transcutaneous fasteners.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    403,    Joints and Connections, appropriate subclasses, for rod joints in
    general.


CLS 606/60
TXT Internal fixation means:

    Subject matter under subclass 53 wherein a means is adapted to be implanted
    within the body in direct contact with a bone or bone fragment for the
    purpose of reinforcement of said bone or bone fragment during the healing
    process or for positioning a plurality of bones or bone fragments relative
    to one another.


CLS 606/61
TXT Spinal positioner or stabilizer:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 wherein the internal fixation means is
    particularly adapted for positioning vertebrae.


CLS 606/62
TXT Intramedullary fixator:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 wherein the internal fixation means is
    adapted for placement within a medullary canal of a long bone.


CLS 606/63
TXT Expanding in diameter or length:

    Subject matter under subclass 62 wherein the internal fixation means can be
    enlarged in width or along the greatest dimension.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    68,     for expanding femoral nail means.


CLS 606/64
TXT Cross fastened:

    Subject matter under subclass 62 wherein the internal fixation means is
    fixed relative to the medullary canal by means of a cross member which
    extends generally transverse to the longitudinal axis of the canal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98,     for cross-pinning drill guides.


CLS 606/65
TXT Femoral screw:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 wherein the internal fixation means is a
    cylindrical rod incised with one or more helical or advancing spiral
    threads adapted to be screwed into and thereby reinforce the neck portion
    of a femur.


CLS 606/66
TXT Anti-rotation or keeper means:

    Subject matter under subclass 65 wherein the femoral screw is prevented
    from turning or spinning along its longitudinal axis while in place.


CLS 606/67
TXT Femoral nail:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 wherein the internal fixation means is a
    slim, pointed piece of metal adapted to be driven into and thereby
    reinforce the neck portion of a femur.


CLS 606/68
TXT Expanding:

    Subject matter under subclass 67 wherein the nail can be enlarged in width
    or along its greatest dimension.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    63,     expanding screw fixation means.


CLS 606/69
TXT Cortical plate:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 wherein the internal fixation means is an
    elongated element which is applied to a fractured bone on its exterior
    surface and fastened thereto so as to hold the disassociated portions in
    alignment during healing.

    (1)     Note.  The plate may be implanted on a permanent bases or removed
    upon healing of the break in the bone.


CLS 606/70
TXT Multi-element or coated plate:

    Subject matter under subclass 69 wherein the cortical plate is composed of
    a plurality of elements or a plate to which significance is attributed to
    the coating composition applied thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    76+,    for specialized coatings and materials for internal fixation
    devices.


CLS 606/71
TXT Having separable and distinct plate elements:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 wherein the plural elements are separate
    individual pieces prior to assembly to a bone.


CLS 606/72
TXT Orthopedic fastener:

    Subject matter under subclass 60 comprising fastener elements which are
    applied internally or transcutaneously to hold bone fragments in alignment
    or to connect an external fixation means with bone fragments to be aligned.

    (1)     Note.  The fastener elements in this subclass are nonthreaded
    elements such as pins and wires which are placed through the bone elements
    to pin them together.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass also contains elongated pin elements which
    have their own drilling head contained on the fastener.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73,     for fastener elements having their own drill head which also cuts
    screw threads into the bone to self anchor itself in the bone.


CLS 606/73
TXT Threaded fastener element:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the fastener is either a single
    elongated means having helical threads thereon or a fastener consisting of
    externally threaded elongated element formed from a pin, rod or wire having
    a head at one end and designed to be inserted through bone portions and
    secured by a mating element having a threaded opening which is tightened by
    the application of torque.

    (1)     Note.  The fasteners in this subclass include single screw elements
    which are applied into bones and paired elements, such as nuts and bolts,
    which are fastened to bones to hold them in place.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    59,     for fixation elements used in conjunction with a pin or screw.

    65+,    femoral screws.


CLS 606/74
TXT Bone cerclage device:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the fastener element is an element
    which encircles one or more bone portions and applies a force to said bone
    portions to hold those encircled portions together.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139+,   for elastic band appliers.


CLS 606/75
TXT Staple or similar driven fastener:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the fastener element is a
    generally U-shaped loop of material with pointed ends, a clip-like fastener
    element, or a generally elongated element, adapted to be driven into, or
    about, one or more bone portions to hold such portions together or to
    attach soft tissue to a bone portion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    139+,   for clip appliers

    151+,   for surgical clip, clamp or bands.

    157+,   for occluding clip, clamp or bands.

    219+,   for staples used as suture elements.

    221+,   for approximating clips or serrefines.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    staplers in general.


CLS 606/76
TXT Specialized coating or material:

    Subject matter under subclass 53 wherein the bone attaching element has
    been impregnated or treated with material which reduces trauma, infection
    or corrosion during a process of healing.

    (1)     Note.  The bone attaching element can be implanted or placed
    between broken bone elements or have a fixator specially coated to join the
    elements of the broken bone.


CLS 606/77
TXT Absorbable:

    Subject matter under subclass 76 wherein the particular coating, implanted
    material or portion thereof is assimilated by the body.


CLS 606/78
TXT Shape memory material:

    Subject matter under subclass 76 wherein the bone attaching element is
    composed of material which has been plastically deformed to a desired shape
    prior to being implanted into the body and upon heat application, either
    from the body or from external sources, the fixation element is caused to
    assume its original shape prior to being plastically deformed.


CLS 606/79
TXT Orthopedic cutting instruments:

    Subject matter under subclass 53 wherein significance is attributed to a
    cutting means particularly adapted to cut into bone or associated softer
    bone like tissues of the body.

    (1)     Note.  Associated softer bone includes cartilage tissue.

    (2)     Note.  See (2) note under subclass 53 which excludes skull cutting
    devices from placement here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110+,   for means to remove tonsils, cartilage, adenoids or polyp by
    cutting.

    119+,   for obstetrical instruments having cutting means.

    131+,   for cutting device for removing skin.

    135,    for cutters used in animal sterilization.

    163+,   for cutting devices used to debeak or dehorn animals.

    172+,   for skull cutting devices.

    174+,   for cutting devices which disclose use in the cutting of bone.

    176+,   for saw type cutting means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    433,    Dentistry, for similar cutting devices for cutting or drilling
    teeth.


CLS 606/80
TXT Reamer or drill:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 wherein the cutting is accomplished by
    means which either has at least one cutting edge arranged on the periphery
    along the length of a thin, elongated member or a means which has at least
    one cutting edge at its end(s) for enlarging or originating a hole in bone
    tissue.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, appropriate
    subclasses for reamers or drills of general utility.


CLS 606/81
TXT Acetabular:

    Subject matter under subclass 80 wherein the cutting tool has a concave or
    convex substantially hemispherical configuration adapted to shape a bone
    socket in a bone head, e.g., hip or jaw articulation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, appropriate subclasses, for artificial or
    replacement joints.


CLS 606/82
TXT Saw type tool:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 wherein the cutting means is a series of
    narrow sharp tooth like elements arranged substantially in single file
    along at least one edge of a thin generally planar member of circular or
    elongated shape.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176+,   for saws of general utility used to cut the body.


CLS 606/83
TXT Rongeur, resector or nipper:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 wherein the bone or associated soft tissue
    is cut by a crushing, gnawing, chipping or cutting action.

    (1)     Note.  The devices in this subclass are termed bone forceps, bone
    nippers and rongeurs (crushing devices) for use in cutting through thin
    boney structure (ribs) or cartilage material for either complete removal
    thereof or for separation for further surgery.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    176+,   for shear or scissors like cutters.

    205+,   for forceps structure, particularly subclass 211 for forceps jaw
    structure.


CLS 606/84
TXT Osteotome or scraper:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 wherein a portion of a bone or associated
    cartilage is removed by a sharpened blade, chisel or a means having
    tooth-like projections which wear the bone or cartilage dawn by friction.

    (1)     Note.  The devices of this subclass include cutting blades on a
    handle, chisels or osteotomes and abraders which are either manually moved
    in a push-pull fashion, or by a motor drive means, or by having the head of
    the handle impacted by a hammer-like device.


CLS 606/85
TXT Rasp or file:

    Subject matter under subclass 84 wherein tissue is operatively removed by
    cutting means having formed prominences which are distinct raised points or
    ridges; such cutting means being typically used to smooth or slightly
    modify the shape of a bone or cartilage surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 76.1+ for files.


CLS 606/86
TXT Means for use in bone reparation:

    Subject matter under subclass 53 wherein means is provided to assist in the
    removal, repair or replacement of bone tissue.

    (1)     Note.  Devices used in the manipulation, removal, or placement of
    an internal fixation means or bone prosthesis are classified in this and
    indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  Devices for use in bone grafting are classified in this and
    indented subclasses.


CLS 606/87
TXT Osteotomy jig or fixture:

    Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein the means to assist in bone
    reparation is a guide or gauge for aligning a cutting means of a desired
    orientation for severing or partially severing a bone at one or more
    desired location so that the severed portions may be reoriented or a
    prosthetic member fitted thereto to effect the repair of the bone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     82 and 96+, for guide or gauge members for use with a reamer or
    drill, saws or nail guides.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    408,    Cutting by Use of Rotating Axially Moving Tool, subclasses 72+ for
    drill jigs.


CLS 606/88
TXT Knee or knee joint:

    Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein the jig or fixture member is used
    primarily on a joint between two long bones for purposes of altering or
    replacing the joint surfaces.


CLS 606/89
TXT Femoral head:

    Subject matter under subclass 87 wherein the jig or fixture member is
    designed to be used on the proximal portion of a femur for purposes of
    altering or replacing the femoral portion of the hip joint.


CLS 606/90
TXT Joint distractor:

    Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein the reparation means includes a
    spreading means which functions to separate or separate and hold adjacent,
    jointed bones in a desired special relationship to permit access thereto or
    for purposes of adjusting the tension in the ligaments which connect the
    joint.


CLS 606/91
TXT Acetabular cup positioner:

    Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein the reparation means is used to
    assist in aligning a prosthetic hip socket relative to a pelvis for proper
    receipt of the associated femoral head which may be natural or prosthetic.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     for reamers or drills for shaping a socket or bone head.


CLS 606/92
TXT Device for the application of bone cement:

    Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein the assisting means aids in the
    application or distribution of a glue-like material or luting agent to a
    bone surface or into a cavity in a bone.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass disclose tube or disk shaped
    materials which actually become part of a prosthesis when filled with
    cement and are used to distribute the cement to a uniform thickness on a
    bone surface.

    (2)     Note.  Bone cement, per se, is not classifiable here.

    (3)     Note.  The term "cement" is considered to include any hardenable
    material which is used as a luting or grouting agent, but the material is
    not required to form an adhesive bond with bone tissue.


CLS 606/93
TXT Applicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 92 wherein the assisting means is one which
    is used to apply or to mix and apply cement to a bone.


CLS 606/94
TXT Pressurized cement placement:

    Subject matter under subclass 93 wherein the applicator means exerts a
    force upon the cement as it is applied to the bone.

    (1)     Note.  Typically a seal is formed between the bone and the
    applicator so that the pressurized cement is forced into the relatively
    porous cancellous bone tissue which either underlies or surrounds a
    prosthetic member.


CLS 606/95
TXT Intramedullary plug or centering means:

    Subject matter under subclass 92 wherein the assisting means is a medullary
    canal occluding means which controls the placement of bone cement in the
    canal of wherein the assisting means is insertable within a medullary canal
    and positions an implantable means in the canal such that the bone cement
    is distributed in a desired or predetermined pattern within said canal
    about the implantable means.

    (1)     Note.  The plugs are typically placed in the femur during hip
    replacement to prevent bone cement within the medullary canal from
    migrating toward the knee.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    623,    Prosthesis, (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, appropriate subclasses, for prosthetic devices
    having self-centering means, e.g., finger joints.


CLS 606/96
TXT Drill or pin guide:

    Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein the assisting means directs the
    path of an elongated, end cutting, rotary cutting means or directs the path
    of a thin elongated pin or wire into the bone.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     for drills or reamers for cutting into bone or for drills and
    reamers having means thereon to guide them during their operation.


CLS 606/97
TXT X-ray positioned:

    Subject matter under subclass 96 which include an image producing system to
    position the drill, pin or wire directing means.

    (1)     Note.  The system typically includes a video display in real time
    of pin, wire or drill movement, however, still images are also included.


CLS 606/98
TXT Cross-pinning drill guide:

    Subject matter under subclass 96 in which the drill, pin or wire is guided
    generally in a transverse direction with respect to an opposing member with
    which it is to cooperatively engage.


CLS 606/99
TXT Prosthesis insertor or extractor:

    Subject matter under subclass 86 comprising force transferal means
    specifically adapted to place or remove a bone repairing means through
    forceful contact or collision in which momentum is transferred from the
    force transferral means to the reparation means.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass includes devices for removing or
    inserting, nails, pins, intramedullary and femoral head prosthesis means.


CLS 606/100
TXT Restrained movable mass (e.g., slide hammer):

    Subject matter under subclass 99 wherein the insertion or removing means
    comprises a rod which has a means extending therefrom for attaching to said
    rod the reparation means and a sliding weight which is moved along said rod
    to impact upon a corporating anvil-like member to provide a force for
    inserting or removing the reparation means.


CLS 606/101
TXT Nail or plate bender:

    Subject matter under subclass 86 comprising deflection or plastic
    deformation means particularly adapted for changing the configuration of a
    nail or plate to a prescribed configuration or to a configuration which
    substantially conforms to some particular bone structure.

    (1)     Note.  The benders in this subclass are used to alter the shape of
    bone plates, intramedullary nails, screws, or cortical plates to adapt a
    device of generally correct shape to fit a specific application site.


CLS 606/102
TXT Gauging or measuring devices:

    Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein a physical characteristic of the
    bone repair means or a characteristic of the bone itself is subjected to
    assessment to determine how the reparation process should be altered to
    effect a proper repair.


CLS 606/103
TXT Wiring aid:

    Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein the bone repair means is
    particularly adapted for the application of or tensioning of a slender,
    flexible, string-like piece of material about bone.

    (1)     Note.  "Wiring" is an art term that includes, but is not limited,
    materially, to the use of metallic wire.


CLS 606/104
TXT Screw or pin placement or removal means:

    Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein means is provided for inserting or
    extracting an elongated element having helical threads or a thin elongated
    element having a nail like shape.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass accepts `screwdrivers' and similar or
    analogous devices which are particularly adapted for use in an orthopedic
    environment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    73,     for threaded fastener elements, per se.

    96+,    for pin or drill guide means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 436+ for screwdrivers.


CLS 606/105
TXT Bone compression or distraction:

    Subject matter under subclass 86 wherein removable means is provided to
    pull together or move apart bone portions during the application of a
    cortical plate.

    (1)     Note.  The bone compression or distraction means is removed after
    the application of the bone plate is complete.


CLS 606/105.5
TXT Cast removal implement:

    Subject matter under subclass 105 which provides a means for disengaging a
    plaster of Paris or the like immobilization splint from a body portion.

    (1)     Note. Casts typically have one or more layers of padding between
    the rigid cast shell and the body portion being treated which become
    adhered to the shell and make cast removal difficult without some form of
    prying device; vibratory cast "saws" are not proper for this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, appropriate subclasses for circular saws and cast cutters,
    per se.

    602,    Surgery, subclass 9 for cast removal devices which are embedded
    within the wall of the splint.


CLS 606/106
TXT Means for removing foreign objects from the throat or connected passageways
    (e.g., probang):

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein an instrument means is used to
    remove foreign materials from those tubes or cavities which connect a mouth
    with a stomach or a mouth with nasal passages.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127+,   for devices used to remove kidney stones.


CLS 606/107
TXT Means for removing, inserting or aiding in the removal or insertion of eye
    lens material:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein means is provided to take out of,
    put into, or put onto an eye, a natural or an artificial material intended
    to replace or augment that portion of an eye which focuses light to create
    an image, or means to assist in such action.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains devices for use in assisting in
    placing artificial or natural lens material into or on the eye as well as
    means for removing lens material from the eye.  Means for installing
    contact lenses would also be found in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is intended for means used to manipulate a
    whole or substantially whole natural lens or a substitute therefor and does
    not include a device which comminutes a natural lens prior to removal
    thereof.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166,    for corneal cutters and guides for corneal cutters.

    170+,   for devices which comminute a tissue structure prior to the removal
    thereof from the body.


CLS 606/108
TXT Means for inserting or removing conduit within body:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein means are provided for placing or
    extracting a generally tubular like structure, having a bore or hole
    therethrough, into a body.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this and the indented subclass disclose means for
    inserting or removing endotracheal tubes, ear drum vents, bladder drains,
    vascular grafts, alimentary canal tubes, and other generally tubular
    members into the body.

    (2)     Note. Patents in which material is removed from or introduced into
    the body for the purpose of treating the body are found in Class 604,
    Surgery.  Patents in this subclass are limited to means for placing or
    removing conduits from the body without means to introduce or remove
    material from the body.  In other words, the use or purpose of the conduit
    is not at issue; merely the means for inserting or removing the conduit
    prior to or subsequent to use are being entertained.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    130,    for stereotaxic devices.

    159,    for means for removing an obstruction from a blood vessel, teat or
    a duct.

    191,    for dilators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 93+ for conduits having means for introducing
    or removing material from the body including body fluids.


CLS 606/109
TXT Ear vent or drain:

    Subject matter under subclass 108 wherein the conduit is placed such that
    it penetrates the tympanic membrane in an organ of hearing.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass are limited to devices which place
    conduits into the ear and do not claim the passage of material into or out
    of the conduit.  Conduits placed in the body for the purpose of introducing
    or removing material are properly classifiable in Class 604, Surgery.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    185+,   for devices for puncturing having similar structure to the devices
    in this subclass which puncture the middle ear structure for insertion of a
    vent or drain.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    604,    Surgery, subclass 244 for body inserted tubular conduit structure.


CLS 606/110
TXT Means for removing tonsils, adenoids or polyps:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein means is provided for extracting
    nonosseous tissue from the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79+,    for cutting devices for cutting soft tissues associated with bones.


CLS 606/111
TXT With hemostasis:

    Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein means is provided to
    substantially stop the flow of blood, from the site where the soft tissue
    was removed from the body.


CLS 606/112
TXT By pressure application:

    Subject matter under subclass 111 wherein the blood flow is substantially
    stopped by compressing the tissue to such a degree that the tissue
    separates and the walls of the blood vessels in the tissue of the region
    adjacent the site of separation become self-adherently closed so that there
    is little or no bleeding from the site after removal is effected.


CLS 606/113
TXT By wire loop or snare:

    Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein a filament or chain encircles the
    nonosseous tissue and removes said tissue by severing or cutting.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79,     for similar loop or snare devices for removing cartilage.


CLS 606/114
TXT With collecting means for removed material:

    Subject matter under subclass 110 having additional means which receives,
    contains or holds the nonosseous tissue when cut from the body.


CLS 606/115
TXT By vacuum application:

    Subject matter under subclass 114 wherein the collecting means or the
    excised nonosseous tissue is subjected to negative pressure to effect
    containment of the excised tissue.


CLS 606/116
TXT Means for marking animals:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein cutting, punching, piercing,
    tattooing or other means are applied to an animal's flesh to permanently
    identify or distinguish said animal from animals belonging to another or
    other animals in a herd, flock, etc.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains patents which notch, cut, tattoo or
    pierce an animals flesh, usually the ear, to permanently mark the animal so
    that it can be distinguished from other animals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for devices for applying tags to animals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    40,     Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclasses 300+ for animal
    markers.


CLS 606/117
TXT Means for applying animal identification device:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein means is provided to place or
    insert upon or within an animal a tag or tag-like element to identify or
    distinguish said animal.

    (1)     Note.  The applicators in this subclass apply identification tags
    to animals and do not permanently mark the skin of an animal or make any
    imprint upon the skin of an animal other than the point(s) of attachment
    for the identification device.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    for animal marking devices which place markings upon the animal's
    skin.

    188,    for earlobe piercing devices which insert a "trainer" earring at
    the time of piercing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 400.1+ for a method of applying a tag.

    63,     Jewelry, subclasses 12+ for earrings.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclass 858, for a collar having or adapted to
    support an ID tag, subclasses 834+ for a hog ring and subclass 866 for a
    nose ring, per se.

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    apparatus for applying a tag to work by a member, e.g., staple.


CLS 606/118
TXT Means for circumcision:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein means are provided to remove or
    assist in the removal of the prepuce from a male.

    (1)     Note.  Although some texts include operative procedures to be
    performed on a female in the definition of the term "circumcision", such
    procedures and means therefor are not included in the subject matter of
    this subclass; patents directed to clitoridectomy or preputium
    clitoridectomy and similar procedures, excluded above, are properly
    classifiable in subclass 119.


CLS 606/119
TXT Obstetric or gynecological instruments:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein the instruments are specifically
    adapted for use in childbirth or for treatment of a female's reproductive
    organs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 185+, 201, and 211+ for specula used to examine
    the interior of maturally occurring orifices of the body.


CLS 606/120
TXT Umbilical clamp:

    Subject matter under subclass 119 comprising pressure means to close off
    the umbilical artery during or shortly after childbirth.

    (1)     Note.  Surgical clamp which disclose or claim cutting of umbilical
    cord in addition to clamping said cord are properly classified in this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    146+,   for devices which apply occluding clips.

    157+,   for other occluding clips, clamps, and bands which are applied to
    analogous body conduits.


CLS 606/121
TXT Parturition assistance device:

    Subject matter under subclass 119 wherein the instrument is used to aid in
    delivering or removing a fetus from a viviparous animal.


CLS 606/122
TXT Fetus extractor:

    Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein the delivery aiding means is
    placed in contact with the fetus, or a portion thereof, so that a tractive
    force may be applied to the fetus to effect an easier extraction from the
    birth canal.


CLS 606/123
TXT With vacuum or suction application:

    Subject matter under subclass 122 wherein the fetus extractor includes a
    negative pressure means applied to the fetus or a pressure differential
    means applied to the perineal area of a female to assist in the removal of
    the fetus from the birth canal.


CLS 606/124
TXT With mechanical means for applying tension (e.g., gearing reels, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 122 wherein the fetus extraction means has
    mechanical force multiplying means for increasing the tractive force that
    the extraction means exerts on the fetus to effect its removal from the
    birth canal.


CLS 606/125
TXT Means for rupturing the amniotic membrane:

    Subject matter under subclass 119 wherein means is provided for surgically
    severing, scratching, or cutting the thin inner membranous layer of the
    placental sac which contains the fetus and amniotic fluid.


CLS 606/126
TXT Embryotome:

    Subject matter under subclass 119 wherein means is provided with which to
    cut or sever parts from a fetus so as to dismember or dissect same and thus
    facilitate its withdrawal through the birth canal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    604,    Surgery, appropriate subclasses, for devices which aspirate the
    severed fetal tissue through a suction tube.


CLS 606/127
TXT Means for concretion removal:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein means is provided for extracting or
    easing the natural passage of a calculus or "stone" (any solid mass formed
    by coalescence or cohesion) from a body organ or associated excretory duct.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    601,    Surgery:  Kinesitherapy, subclasses 4+ for massaging devices used
    to crush body stones by the application of a force external to the body.


CLS 606/128
TXT With fragmenting means:

    Subject matter under subclass 127 wherein the concretion removal means has
    associated therewith an additional means which divides, breaks or
    disintegrates the solid mass or stone while inside the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    601,    Surgery:  Kinesitherapy, subclasses 4+ for a shock wave
    lithotripter wherein the shock waves are applied from a location outside
    the body.


CLS 606/129
TXT Electrode guide means:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein an instrument is provided to direct
    in the application or removal of an electrical conductor connection with a
    specified segment of internal body tissue.


CLS 606/130
TXT Stereotaxic device:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a means is provided for use in
    surgery for directing the tip of a delicate instrument (e.g., a needle or
    an electrode) in three planes with the ability to reach or return to a
    predetermined point or region of a body through a relatively small access
    opening.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclasses are means for treating internal
    tumors, neural disorders, etc., which have been located by other means
    e.g., CT Scanners, tomography, and other devices used to "target" a
    particular portion of e.g., the brain.


CLS 606/131
TXT Means for removal of skin or material therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein extraction means is provided for
    treating the external covering or integument of the body to excise a
    portion of the covering or integument or, alternately, to extricate
    unwanted hair, external tissue (e.g., polyps, moles, warts, etc.), foreign
    substances, or parasites imbedded in or upon said external covering or
    integument.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass takes tweezers claiming parasite or splinter
    removal from the skin as well as skin abrasion devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for means using light to remove hair, lesions, or other extraneous
    matter from the skin.

    36      and 43, for electrical hair removal means.

    133+,   for mechanical or chemical hair removal means.

    210,    for similar tweezer structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 73+ for toilet devices for manicuring the nails
    and for removing corns and other callosities by abrasion.


CLS 606/132
TXT By means for skin graft preparation (e.g., dermatome):

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the skin removal means is a
    cutter which is used to flay a portion of the skin to cut skin segments
    therefrom, or a further means which is used to cut, alter or process
    previously removed skin segments prior to the use in transplantation to
    another portion of the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174+,   for cutting devices of general utility.


CLS 606/133
TXT Physical removal of hair or hair plugs from skin:

    Subject matter under subclass 131 wherein the material extracted or removed
    from the skin is a naturally occurring fine, generally cylindrical filament
    growing from the skin or a piece of flesh, generally cylindrical,
    containing said naturally occurring filament.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains depilatory devices, eyebrow pluckers,
    as well as tweezers specifically claiming hair removal functions and
    cutters designed to remove hair plugs for transplantation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for means using light to remove hair, lesions, or other extraneous
    matter from the skin.

    36      and 43, for hair removal by electrolysis.

    210,    for similar tweezer structure.


CLS 606/134
TXT By application of wax or adhesive:

    Subject matter under subclass 133 wherein the hair is removed from the skin
    by applying a material composed of warmed lipids which substantially
    solidify at body temperature and entrap the hair, or a material to which
    the hair adheres.


CLS 606/135
TXT Means for or to assist in mammalian sterilization:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein means are provided to aid in
    rendering or to render an animal incapable of producing offspring.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    140+,   for elastic band appliers.

    151,    for bands, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 842+, for male reproductive tract shields a
    birth control device.


CLS 606/136
TXT By crushing:

    Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein the means to render an animal
    incapable of producing offspring is a means which applies pressure with
    sufficient force to destroy or deform that part of the body which is
    applied.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 300+ for tool-jaws positioned by relatively
    movable plural handles (e.g., pliers).


CLS 606/137
TXT By  severing:

    Subject matter under subclass 135 wherein the means applied to an animal to
    render said animal incapable of producing offspring is a cutter which
    severs that part of the body to which it is applied.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174+,   for cutting devices of general utility.


CLS 606/138
TXT Means for removing suture, clip, staple or ligature:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein means is provided to extract a
    wound closure means which had been placed to join the wound, made either by
    an accidental occurrence or by a surgical procedure, when the closure means
    device is no longer deemed desirable for continued treatment.


CLS 606/139
TXT Suture, ligature, elastic band or clip applier:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising means for (1) engaging a
    thread-like material in opposed edges of a wound or incision for the
    purpose of joining said edges; (2) forming an isolated tissue mass by
    compressively encircling and knotting a thread-like material between the
    tissue mass and the body or a body organ; (3) engaging a ring-like thin,
    elongated, generally flat, strip of material, which material has the
    capability of returning to its original shape upon being deformed or
    stretched, about some portion of the body or a body organ; or (4) engaging
    a deformable fastener device which grips and holds tightly or positions the
    engaged tissue.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151+,   for clips, clamps or bands, per se.

    157+,   for occluding clips, clamps or bands, per se.

    228+,   for sutures or ligatures, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 323+ for thread holding and guiding of dental
    floss holders.

    227,    Elongate-Member-Driving Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    surgical staplers.

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, subclass 1 for arterial prosthesis.


CLS 606/140
TXT Elastic band applier:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 comprising means for the application of a
    ring-like strip of resilient material around a portion of body tissue.

    (1)     Note.  The term band is extended to include any generally circular,
    loop or ring-like member which is unitarily formed without interruption.  A
    joined or knotted ring-like member is considered to be a ligature whether
    it is resilient or not.


CLS 606/141
TXT Band applied to reproductive organ:

    Subject matter under subclass 140 wherein the elastic band is applied to a
    male or female reproductive organ or a portion thereof.

    (1)     Note.  The patents in this subclass do not claim birth control by
    the application of the elastic band to a reproductive organ.  For patents
    claiming birth control functions see search note below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 830+ for female reproductive tract birth
    control devices and subclasses 842+ for male reproductive tract birth
    control devices.


CLS 606/142
TXT Clip applier:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein the applicator engages a
    deformable fastener means which when deformed grips and holds tightly about
    or positions the engaged tissue.

    (1)     Note.  The deformable clips applied by an instrument classifiable
    in this subclass are limited to those clips which do not intentionally
    pierce the tissue (work) to which they are applied.  Instruments which
    apply deformable fastener elements which are intended to pierce the tissue
    (work) to which they are applied are not classifiable in this subclass
    since the fastener is considered to be a staple; see search note below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    surgical staplers.


CLS 606/143
TXT Clip fed from supply:

    Subject matter under subclass 142 wherein the clip applier carries its own
    source of fastener means which are sequentially deliverable, one at a time,
    from the source of supply to the instruments application zone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for
    similar staple feed means in surgical staplers.


CLS 606/144
TXT Mechanical suture or ligature applier:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 comprising means based on the use of
    levers or inclined planes which is contrived and devised to manipulate or
    contort a thread-like filament around or through body tissue so as to form
    a compressive constraint to isolate a tissue mass or to form unlocked
    stitches or interlacings between tissue masses which are being joined,
    approximated, or otherwise connected.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 300+ for pliers of general utility.

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 169+ for similar devices which form a locked
    stitch.


    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclass 104 for awls carrying a thread supply
    in the handle.


CLS 606/145
TXT Shuttle action by suture passing device:

    Subject matter under subclass 144 wherein the filament manipulating means
    includes a filament-attached or filament-engaged transport means which
    carries the filament through the tissue masses being joined as the
    transport means is moved from a first position to a second position and is
    then returned to the first position to complete the movement required to
    form a lace or stitch and also ready the applier for further lace or stitch
    placement.


CLS 606/146
TXT Spool feeds suture to needle:

    Subject matter under subclass 144 wherein the filament manipulating means
    includes an elongated, pointed, slender, either straight or curved tissue
    piercing member which has operatively associated therewith a supply of
    filament that is disposed on a reel in such fashion as to be dispensable
    from said piercing member to form stitches or lacings between the pierced
    tissue masses being connected.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    112,    Sewing, subclasses 169+ for similar devices which form a locked
    stitch.


CLS 606/147
TXT Means for clamping needle to handle:

    Subject matter under subclass 144 wherein the applier includes at least one
    manually graspable lever having a member mounting means for disconnectably
    attaching in either substantially parallel or generally perpendicular
    orientation thereto an elongated, pointed, either straight or curved,
    slender tissue piercing member which is used to manipulate the filament
    when placing the stitches or laces used to connect the tissue masses.


CLS 606/148
TXT Suturing or ligating aid or guide:

    Subject matter under subclass 139 comprising means for assisting in the
    placement or directing the path of a suture or ligature during its
    application.

    (1)     Note.  Forceps or tweezers especially adapted to tie or guide a
    suturing or ligating device are classifiable in this subclass.


CLS 606/149
TXT Eversion device:

    Subject matter under subclass 148 wherein the suturing or ligating aid or
    guide is particularly adapted to be applied to opposed ends of hollow body
    organs for the purpose of invaginating the end portions thereof and abuting
    same in order to allow them to be joined by suturing or ligation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151+,   for clips, clamp, connectors or bands, per se.


CLS 606/150
TXT Alignment device (e.g., approximators):

    Subject matter under subclass 148 wherein the suturing aid or ligating
    guide is a holding or clamping means for registering the tubular end
    portions of hollow body organs in close approximation relative to one
    another during anastomotic surgery.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    151+,   for surgical clips, clamps, connectors or bands, per se.


CLS 606/151
TXT Surgical mesh, connector, clip, clamp or band:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising elements or devices which are
    adapted to be applied during a surgical procedure of joining portions of
    body tissue either by:  (1) the application of a fenestrated surgical mat
    or net-like support means; (2) use of a cooperatively interengaging holding
    means; (3) an element which binds or interdigitates and fastens together or
    (4) an element which encircles and grips a portion of tissue.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for wound or incision closing
    elements, such would be properly classifiable in the subclasses noted in
    the search this class note below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclass 831 for fallopian occludes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    213+,   for sutureless closures.

    222+,   for surgical needles.

    228+,   for sutures or ligators.


CLS 606/152
TXT Connector for nerve endings:

    Subject matter under subclass 151 wherein a surgical support means is
    adapted to encircle or align distinct end portions of a severed fiber
    bundle tissue which forms a part of system for conveying electrical
    impulses between a brain or spinal cord and other parts of the body so that
    a fiber bundle or portions of different fiber bundles are held in close
    approximation to augment the healing thereof.


CLS 606/153
TXT Connector for hollow body organs:

    Subject matter under subclass 151 wherein the connector consists of at
    least one element which is applied to an interrupted tubular organ or
    between two organs of the body to permit fluid communication therebetween.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass contains patents which claim anastomosis
    devices being applied to body organs or blood vessels to connect them and
    to allow for their normal function.


CLS 606/154
TXT Bioabsorbable:

    Subject matter under subclass 153 wherein the connector element is composed
    of disintegratable material which the body is capable of absorbing.


CLS 606/155
TXT Connector is single element:

    Subject matter under subclass 153 wherein the connector element is of a
    unitary structure.


CLS 606/156
TXT Removable:

    Subject matter under subclass 155 wherein the single element connector can
    be moved out from within the hollow body organ in which it had been placed.


CLS 606/157
TXT Occluding clip, clamp or band:

    Subject matter under subclass 151 wherein a hollow body organ is closed or
    sealed off by the application of a clip, clamp or band thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for a clamp applied to an umbilical cord and including clamps which
    hold the umbilical cord during and cutting thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    251,    Valves and Valve Actuation, subclasses 4+ for stopping the flow of
    liquid through flexible tubular conduits.


CLS 606/158
TXT Artery or vein:

    Subject matter under subclass 157 wherein the occluded hollow body organ is
    part of a blood vascular system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    122,    for an umbilical cord clamp.


CLS 606/159
TXT Blood vessel, duct or teat cutter, scraper or abrader:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising means for removing an
    obstruction in, or for enlarging the orifice of a vascular conduit,
    connective duct or milk duct passageway by cutting, by rubbing with a sharp
    surface or by eroding a surface by the application of friction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84+,    for bone scrappers.

    108+,   for means to insert or remove a conduit from within the body.

    160,    for curettes.

    161,    for optic, otic or oral scrappers.

    162,    for means used to clean the eye, ear or nose.

    170,    for cutting means carried within a elongated probe-like member.


CLS 606/160
TXT Curette:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising means for removing tissue from a
    female reproductive organ by scrapping or abrading said tissue.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass are restricted to use in the female
    reproductive system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     for bone scrapper or abrading.

    131+,   for removal of skin by scrapping or abrading.

    159,    for removal of material from blood vessels, or ducts of a teat by
    cutting, scrapping, or abrading.

    161,    for eye, ear or mouth scrapper.

    162,    for eye, ear or nose cleaning devices.


CLS 606/161
TXT Optic, otic or oral scrapper or abrader:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising means for removing extraneous
    material from the surface of an organ of vision, an organ by hearing or
    from various portions of an animal's mouth by rubbing a surface of any one
    of those organs with a sharpened element.


CLS 606/162
TXT Means for cleaning eye, ear or nose:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising means for removing foreign
    material from an organ of sight, hearing or smell.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass disclose hair, wire, swab,
    vegetable fiber, celluloid, rubber in the form of a brush, spoon or loop
    for removing material from the eye, ear or nose.


CLS 606/163
TXT Means for debeaking or dehorning animals:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising a device for removing a bird's
    bill or a boney, often curved and pointed, hollow, paired growth on the
    upper head portion of mammals.


CLS 606/164
TXT By electrical or thermal application:

    Subject matter under subclass 163 wherein the beak or horn is removed by
    the application of electricity or heat thereto.


CLS 606/165
TXT Means for removal of animal tail:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising a device for cutting off the
    hindmost part of an animal which forms a distinct, trailing, flexible
    caudal extension of the animals spinal column.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    174+,   for similar cutlery devices having a sharing action during cutting.


CLS 606/166
TXT Corneal cutter or guide for corneal cutter:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising cutting means or a means to
    direct the path of a cutting means used in a surgical procedure upon the
    anterior, external transparent layer of an eye.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    170+,   for cutting means covered by an elongated probe-like member.

    172+,   for means to limit cutter depth of penetration.

    180,    for rotating cutters.


CLS 606/167
TXT Cutting, puncturing or piercing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising means for use in severing,
    perforating or penetrating the body or a specific portion thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Patents claiming the cutting of bone, bone-like material or
    cartilage are classified in subclasses 79+.

    (2)     Note.  Patents claiming cutting of body joints are also
    classifiable in subclasses 79+, orthopedic cutting instruments.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79+,    for cutting means specific to orthopedic use.

    116+,   for punching, cutting or piercing means to mark animals.

    117,    for means to apply identification tags of punching or piercing.

    118,    for circumcision devices.

    125,    for cutting devices for rupturing amniotic membranes.

    131,    for skin removal means including cutting.

    135,    for cutting means used to sterilize animals.

    138,    for cutting of sutures, ligatures, slaps and clips.

    159,    for cutting devices inserted into a vessel or duct to enlarge it.

    163,    for debeaking or dehorning an animal by cutting.

    165,    for cutting of animal tails.

    166,    for cutting of the cornea.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    27,     Undertaking, subclasses 24.1+ for trocars for treating a corpse.

    30,     Cutlery, appropriate subclasses for cutting implements adapted to
    dehorn animals but having general utility, for cutting structures
    associated with surgery; such as plastic casts and external stitches but
    not a part of the body, and mere knives although referred to as surgical
    knives.

    175,    Boring or Penetrating the Earth, subclasses 327+ for earth boring
    bit or bit element.


CLS 606/168
TXT Cutter drive reversed to clean material therefrom:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 comprising means to change the direction
    of cutter movement to remove material cut from cutter surface.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass include probe-like cutters having
    the cutter located on their distal end with a drive means which can be
    reversed to unclog the cutter of the material removed from the body member
    being cut.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79+,    for bone or cartilage cutter having material removal means.

    114+,   for collecting means for removed tonsil, adenoid or polyp masses.

    170+,   for other probe-like cutters having suction means to remove cut
    material from the cutlery area.


CLS 606/169
TXT Cutter having vibratory drive means:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 having a cutter moving means which moves
    to and fro quickly and repeatedly to impart motion thereto.

    (1)     Note.  Vibratory drive means includes both subsonic an ultrasonic
    means to drive the cutter.

    (2)     Note.  Many of the patents in this subclass disclose the use of
    vibrating drive means for microsurgery of the eye.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166,    for cutting devices used to cut a guide or cutter in removal or
    cutting of the cornea.


CLS 606/170
TXT Cutter carried on elongated probe-like member:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 comprising a cutting means which is
    supported by an elongated tube-like member which member permits surgical
    procedures to be undertaken in relatively confined areas.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass are designed to be used in areas of
    the body having difficult access such as the eye, nasal passages, urinary
    tract, and in various microsurgical procedures.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    79+,    for patents claiming microsurgical procedures and instrumentation
    for operation in the cutting of bone or cartilage.

    169,    for microsurgical instruments having vibrating drive means.


CLS 606/171
TXT Reciprocating or oscillating cutter:

    Subject matter under subclass 170 wherein the cutting means is rotatably
    reciprocated about a fixed point or is moved alternatively backward and
    forward in a linear direction along its longitudinal axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177,    for reciprocating saws.


CLS 606/172
TXT Means to limit cutter penetration depth (e.g., dura guard):

    Subject matter under subclass 167 comprising a stop or guard which limits
    the advance or movement of a cutting device to prevent cutting too deeply
    into the body portion being cut.


CLS 606/173
TXT By disconnecting cutter drive:

    Subject matter under subclass 172 wherein the advance or movement of the
    cutting means is stopped by a means which interrupts or disables the drive
    train between the cutting means and a driving force therefor.


CLS 606/174
TXT Shear type (e.g., scissors, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 167 wherein the cutting is accomplished by
    the action of two cutting blades which when moved toward each other about a
    fixed pivot point cooperate to effect a cut.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass are limited to scissors-type
    cutters which typically begin their cut at the edge of a surface and
    continue their cutting action into the interior of the surface as desired.

    (2)     Note.  Punching devices which disclose a (1) punch and a
    cooperating die or a (2) punch and a cooperating anvil surface are not
    considered shears since their cut is made for the purpose of making a
    generally circular type of incision in a surface, usually at some distance
    from a peripheral edge of that surface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    184,    for punching devices of the type referred to in note (2), above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 194+, for shears.


CLS 606/175
TXT Snout cutter:

    Subject matter under subclass 174 wherein the shears cut a portion of a
    projecting nose, jaws or anterior part of an animals' muzzle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    116,    for shears used in cutting marks on animals.

    163,    for shear type cutters for removing of animal beaks or horns.

    165,    for shears used in removing tails from an animal.


CLS 606/176
TXT Saw type:

    Subject matter under subclass 166 wherein the cutter is a thin blade or
    disc with a sharpened, toothed edge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82,     for bone cutting saws.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    30,     Cutlery, subclasses 166.3+ for a saw, generally.


CLS 606/177
TXT Reciprocating:

    Subject matter under subclass 176 wherein the saw is alternately moved
    backward and forward in a linear motion which is generally parallel to the
    toothed edge.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171,    for elongated probe-like members having a reciprocating cutter.


CLS 606/178
TXT Oscillating:

    Subject matter under subclass 176 wherein the cutter is rotatably
    reciprocated about a fixed point along its longitudinal axis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    171,    for oscillated cutters carried by an elongated probe-like
    instrument used in microsurgery.


CLS 606/179
TXT Cylindrical:

    Subject matter under subclass 176 wherein the saw is circular or disc-like
    in shape.


CLS 606/180
TXT Rotary cutter:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 wherein the periphery of the cutter
    exhibits at least one cutting edge which moves such that the path of every
    point in its motion, about a fixed axis, is a circle or a circular arc.


CLS 606/181
TXT Lancet:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 comprising an instrument having 1) a
    short, wide, double-edged pointed blade which cuts laterally as the
    instrument is advanced longitudinally or 2) a blade which can repeatedly
    produce an incision of specific length or an incision of specific length
    and specific depth in body tissue.


CLS 606/182
TXT Spring driven or biased into cutting position:

    Subject matter under subclass 181 wherein the lancet blade is actuated from
    a checked or inoperative position when released to an operative position by
    an energy storing resilient means.


CLS 606/183
TXT Plural cutting blades:

    Subject matter under subclass 182 wherein the lancet carries at least two
    blades which act in unison upon release.


CLS 606/184
TXT Punch:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 wherein the cutter has a continuous,
    closed, usually circular, cutting edge which cooperates with (1) a die
    element which receives the closed circular cutting edge, (2) a solid
    anvil-like surface element to effect a cut, or (3) no other element to
    effect or cut.

    (1)     Note.  A punch removes material from the surface it is passed
    through.  Patents in this subclass disclose the punching of arteries for
    the purpose of making a by-pass connection as well as nose punches which
    punch out a hole for placing a ring in an animal's nose.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    for a punch used to remove a hair plug for transplantation to
    another part of the scalp.


CLS 606/185
TXT Puncturing or piercing:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 wherein the cutter is a sharp, pointed
    instrument which penetrates a portion of the body to make a hole therein
    without removing any of the tissue through which the cutter passes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for devices which remove tissue or pierce without the removal of
    tissue while applying an identification tag to an animal.

    184,    for punching devices which remove tissue by cutting or punching out
    a circular shape from the tissue it is used upon.


CLS 606/186
TXT Multiple puncturing elements (e.g., tattoo, scarifier, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 185 comprising two or more puncturing or
    piercing elements which act in unison.


CLS 606/187
TXT Hair or artificial hair injector or anchor:

    Subject matter under subclass 185 wherein the puncturing or piercing means
    inserts a hair follicle transplant or a synthetic fibrous material which
    simulates a hair into the skin or inserts the means required to hold a
    toupee or a wig-like contrivance onto the body, typically the skull.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131+,   for devices for removing hair from the skin.


CLS 606/188
TXT Earlobe piercing means:

    Subject matter under subclass 185 wherein the puncturing or piercing device
    is used to pierce the soft, fleshy, tissue at lowermost portion of an
    external ear.

    (1)     Note.  The patents in this subclass typically disclose concomitant
    piercing and placement of an ornamented earing in the perforation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117,    for identification tags inserted in an animal's ear.


CLS 606/189
TXT Acupuncture means:

    Subject matter under subclass 185 wherein the puncturing or piercing device
    consists of one or more needle-like instruments which are pushed into the
    body at one or more predetermined locations to provide a body treatment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    41+,    for electrical applicators.

    129,    for electrode placement means.

    204,    for accupressure devices.


CLS 606/190
TXT Blunt dissectors:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising means to separate layers of
    tissue or tissue from other material without cutting either tissue or
    material during the separation process.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass disclose an obturator-like device
    which is passed through layers of tissue to separate them without cutting
    also disclosed are blunt ended rods that are passed through blood vessels
    to separate arteriosclerotic material from a vessel wall.

    (2)     Note.  Separation of tissue layers or arteriosclerotic material may
    also be accomplished by the introduction of a fluid through the blunt
    dissector.


CLS 606/191
TXT Internal pressure applicator (e.g., dilator):

    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising means which are inserted in a
    natural body orifice or organ to expand said orifice or organ.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 48+, for means inserted into natural body
    orifices to permit the introduction or removal material for therapeutic
    purposes; subclasses 93+, for means for introducing or removing material
    from the body of a conduit, hollow or implantable reservoir and subclasses
    104+, for means for expanding a body orifice or canal.


CLS 606/192
TXT Inflatable or expandable by fluid:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the body inserted means is
    distended to expanded by the application or absorption of a fluid therein
    while disposed in the natural body orifice for the purpose of retaining the
    dilator therein, dilating the body orifice, or sealing the body orifice.

    (1)     Note.  Dilators may be inflated by the introduction of a fluid such
    as air, water, etc., or expanded by the absorption of body fluids to dilate
    the body part in which it is inserted.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    193,    for dilators inflatable within the female reproductive system.

    194,    for dilators inflatable within the vascular system.

    198,    for mechanically (nonfluid) expanded dilators.


CLS 606/193
TXT Inserted in female reproductive system:

    Subject matter under subclass 192 wherein the dilator is inflated upon
    being placed in a female's vagina, uterus or fallopian tubes.

    (1)     Note.  See (1) Note to subclass 192, above.

    (2)     Note.  See search this class notes to subclass 192 above.


CLS 606/194
TXT Inserted in vascular system:

    Subject matter under subclass 192 wherein the dilator is inflated upon
    being introduced into the blood circulatory system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 52+, for means whereby material is introduced
    or removed from the body by means placed within a blood vessel, subclass
    96, for inflatable catheters; and subclasses 104+, for body orifice
    dilators.



            An alternative electronic search for U.S. patents, based upon a
    modification of the European Patent Office Classification, for portions of
    the subject  matter of this subclass may also be found in Class 604,
    Cross-Reference Art Collections 907 - 921. (There are no definitions
    associated with these Cross-Reference Art Collections. The most available
    disclosure as to the types of documents contained herein in is given in any
    notes associated with the titles.)


CLS 606/195
TXT Detachable from inflation means:

    Subject matter under subclass 194 wherein the dilator is separable, upon
    inflation, from the fluid supply means which causes its expansion.

    (1)     Note.  The patents in this subclass generally disclose blood vessel
    occlusion means which are to remain in the vessel which they occlude.


CLS 606/196
TXT Nose or throat:

    Subject matter under subclass 192 wherein the dilator is placed in the body
    in either that portion of a digestive system between a mouth and esophagus
    or in the nostril region.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199,    for noninflative nasal dilators.


CLS 606/197
TXT Rectal or anal:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the dilator expands either (1) a
    large intestine portion of the body extending from a segmoid flexure to an
    anal canal or (2) expands an external opening of a alimentary canal.


CLS 606/198
TXT Expanding dilator (e.g., expanding arm, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the dilator is enlarged, usually
    radially, either by the application of a mechanical force, or by the
    expansion of the material of which it is composed which expands upon
    introduction into the natural body orifice.

    (1)     Note.  Self-expanding dilators which usually are compressed spring
    devices which expand upon placement in a body cavity are not considered to
    be expanded by the application of a mechanical force since no external
    mechanical force is applied to expand the device.  Similarly, devices
    composed of material which expands by means of its chemical composition or
    body temperature are not classifiable in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    192+,   for expandable dilators which are expanded by the application of
    fluid pressure.

    202,    for nasal dilators which are inserted in a compressed state and
    expand upon placement in the nostrils without the application of a
    mechanical force being applied thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 104+ for devices to expand body orifices for
    the purpose of introducing or removing material therefrom.


CLS 606/199
TXT Nasal dilator:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the dilation device is placed in
    a nostril to expand said nostril or a connecting passageway.


CLS 606/200
TXT With emboli trap or filter:

    Subject matter under subclass 191 wherein the dilator is introduced into
    the vascular system for the purpose of removing occlusive or floating
    thrombotic material.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    159,    for blood vessel scraping devices.

    192+,   for inflated balloon type devices which function to trap thrombotic
    material.


CLS 606/201
TXT External pressure applicator:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein structural means is applied to an
    external portion of the body to provide a compressive force to restrict or
    to stop the flow of blood from or through said body portion or to provide
    treatment for pain or disease by means of force application to one or more
    predetermined portions of the body.


CLS 606/202
TXT Pneumatic cuff:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the pressure applicator comprises
    a flexible or elastic, fluid or tight, inflatable chamber which is intended
    to be positioned in a deflated state, to encircle a body portion and is
    then inflated to apply the compressive force to the body position.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass disclose pneumatic tourniquets used
    to stop blood flow through a body portion to prevent bleeding therefrom as
    well as pneumatic tourniquets with at least one associated gage used to
    stop or restrict blood flow through a body portion for purposes of
    measuring blood pressure therein.


CLS 606/203
TXT Tourniquet:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the pressure applying member is a
    releasably constrictable band or strap-like means which totally encircles
    the body portion and which is applied by effectively shortening the band or
    stretching the band to produce the force to temporarily arrest the flow of
    blood in that portion of the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202,    for inflatable cuffs which may stop blood flow or are used for the
    taking of blood pressure.


CLS 606/204
TXT Accupressure device:

    Structure under subclass 201 for applying the compressive force to
    predetermined points on the body to provide a body treatment without
    puncturing the skin at those points to which the compressive forces have
    been applied.


CLS 606/204.15
TXT Head:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 which provides a means for exerting a
    force on the uppermost or cranial portion of the body to correct a
    deformity, disorder, or abnormality thereof.


CLS 606/204.25
TXT Eye:

    Subject matter under subclass 204.15 which provides a means for producing a
    strain upon the muscles which focus the lens or which direct the eye's line
    of sight so as to treat visual disorder or abnormality of the eye.

    (1)     Note. This subclass includes devices such as moving targets which
    the patient follows with one or both eyes to exercise or strengthen
    defective muscles.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for devices wherein the eye is forcibly exercised.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclass 203
    for eye examining and testing instruments combined with eye exercising or
    training.


CLS 606/204.35
TXT Wrinkle remover:

    Subject matter under subclass 204.15 comprising means for eradicating
    facial age lines at least on a temporary basis.


CLS 606/204.45
TXT Nose shaper:

    Subject matter under subclass 204.15 comprising means for changing the
    appearance or proportions of the nostrils or a facial portion adjacent
    thereto.

    (1)     Note. The nose shapers may also, as a secondary function, enhance
    or relieve breathing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    199,    for nasal dilators.


CLS 606/204.55
TXT Horn bender:

    Subject matter under subclass 204.15 comprising a means for changing the
    natural path of growth or "training" the shape of an animal's horn or
    antler.


CLS 606/205
TXT Forceps:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 provided with pivoted arms carrying
    cooperating, contacting members for grasping parts of the body, articles
    within the body, or devices associated with body treatment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    120,    for forcep-like devices used to clamp the umbilical cord.

    148,    for forceps which are specific for tying sutures or ligatures, or
    for assisting in guiding suturing means.

    157+,   for occluding, clip, clamp or bands.

    203,    for clamp tourniquets.

    210+,   for hinged tweezers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    81,     Tools, subclasses 300+ for pliers and subclasses 318+, for pliers
    having locking means.

    433,    Dentistry, subclass 159 for pliers.


CLS 606/206
TXT Jaws biased to open or closed position:

    Subject matter under subclass 205 wherein the pivoted cooperating members
    are urged by resilient means either into a closed or open position from
    which position the forceps may be manually shifted to the alternate
    position.


CLS 606/207
TXT Jaw structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 205 wherein significance is attributed to the
    structure of the cooperating contacting members which provide means for
    grasping the body or diverse structure.


CLS 606/208
TXT Hinge or latch structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 205 wherein significance is attributed to
    either the structure about which the jaws pivot or to the closure means
    which locks the jaws in a closed or contacting position for the continued
    application of a grasping force by the jaws.


CLS 606/209
TXT Tubular member stripper:

    Subject matter under subclass 205 wherein the cooperating members are moved
    along a tube-like device or generally tubular portion of the body to remove
    material contained therein.

    (1)     Note.  Devices in this subclass disclose forceps having roller
    elements for jaws which are passed along a cows' teat to remove material
    therefor or passed along a tube to remove material therefrom.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 151+ for peristaltic pumps in dosing devices.


CLS 606/210
TXT Tweezers:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising a small pincer-like instrument
    having resiliently hinged, cooperating jaw members particularly adapted or
    suited to be used for plucking or handling small objects.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131,    for tweezer-like devices which are specifically designed to remove
    embedded materials, such as slivers, from human skin.

    133,    for tweezers which are designed to remove hair from human skin.


CLS 606/211
TXT Combined with another device:

    Subject matter under subclass 210 in combination with a diverse feature or
    a device that is not provided for in the preceding subclasses.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass disclose tweezers combined with
    mirrors, magnifying lenses, pins, etc.


CLS 606/212
TXT Hoof crack repair:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein means are provided for coaptating
    cracks in that portion of an animals' foot covered by a horny protective
    covering.


CLS 606/213
TXT Sutureless closure:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein means are provided for joining a
    wound or incision's edges or lips without stitching said lips or edges
    together.

    (1)     Note.  Patents claiming means to apply sutureless closures are
    provided for in this and indented subclasses.

    (2)     Note.  Patents for applying surgical staples to class wounds are
    properly classifiable in Class 227, subclasses 175.1+.


CLS 606/214
TXT Chemical bonding material applied to wound edges:

    Subject matter under subclass 213 wherein the lips or edges of a wound or
    incision are joined by the application of a substance produced by a
    chemical process thereto or thereover.


CLS 606/215
TXT Material placed on opposed sides of incision or wound:

    Subject matter under subclass 213 wherein structural means are placed on
    opposite sides of the edges of a wound or incision for bringing the edges
    into coaptation.


CLS 606/216
TXT Means to draw opposed sides of incision into apposition:

    Subject matter under subclass 215 wherein the material placed upon opposed
    sides of the wound or incision is manually moved or drawn together by a
    means which forces the edges of said wound or incision into coaptation.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass have at least one manually actuated
    means to bring wound edges in opposition; adhesive strip, placed upon
    opposite sides of a wound, which are joined by elastic bands, which bands
    pull the adhesive strip together to close the edges of the wound are
    considered to be selfmoving means which do so because of their own
    composition since they are not means physically moved by a person to chew
    the wound together, such devices are not properly classifiable in this
    subclass but in subclass 215 above.


CLS 606/217
TXT Sliding fastener:

    Subject matter under subclass 216 wherein the means for coaptation is an
    actuator member which can at least engage an interlock as it slides along
    the material placed upon opposite sides of the wound to fasten together
    said material and thereby bring the wound into apposition, or to
    alternatively, to separate said material upon sliding said actuator member
    in the opposite direction to deactuate the interlock.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass provide structure which resembles a
    zipper, in action, if not by structure also.


CLS 606/218
TXT Screw, rack and pinion or pawl and racket:

    Subject matter under subclass 216 wherein the means to manually move or
    draw the edges of the wound into coaptation is a screw, rack and pinion, or
    a pawl and racket which moves the material on either side of the wound at
    least partially together; thus, moving the edges of the wound into
    apposition.


CLS 606/219
TXT Staple fastener:

    Subject matter under subclass 215 wherein the edges of the wound are joined
    in juxtaposition by the application of a deformable, tissue-piercing device
    that is formed from metal or another material which has legs with pointed
    ends which pierce the tissue adjacent the wound and are deformed to draw
    and fasten the wound edges together in juxtaposition or apposition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    75,     staple or similar driven fastener, for staples which are
    particularly adapted for use in orthopedic surgery.

    157+,   occluding clip, clamp, or band.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    227,    Elongated-Member-Driving Apparatus, subclasses 175+ for surgical
    staplers and subclass 902 for staplers, per se.

    411,    Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
    Locked-Threaded Fastener, various subclasses, for nonsurgical staples and
    staple-like structure.


CLS 606/220
TXT With retaining means:

    Subject matter under subclass 219 wherein the legs of the staple pass
    through a mating member, after having passed through the tissue, which
    locks the staple in place upon its application to the wound.


CLS 606/221
TXT Approximating clip or serrefine:

    Subject matter under subclass 215 wherein the means to hold the edges of
    the wound in apposition is either (1) a flat, planar member having pointed
    pin-like hooks on opposite sides thereof or (2) a loop-like member provided
    with pointed pin-like hooks on each end thereof which project therefrom or
    (3) a substantially U-shaped wound spanning member having pointed pin-like
    barbs projecting from near the end of each leg of the U-shaped member so as
    to engage the tissue on opposed portions of the wound and to draw the edges
    thereof into coaptation.


CLS 606/222
TXT Suturing needle:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising a thin pointed means designed to
    be engageable with and to carry a sewing filament through soft body tissue
    without prior preparation of the penetration points.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148,    suturing aid or guide for devices used in combination with a needle
    to help place the sewing filament as desired.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 234 for pocket container
    for diverse tools; subclasses 365+, for hypodermic needles; and subclass
    380 for needles.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 264+ for body inserted tubular conduits.


CLS 606/223
TXT Needle tip or body structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 222 wherein significance is attributed to the
    shape or composition of the pointed end of the needle or its body.


CLS 606/224
TXT Filament attachment:

    Subject matter under subclass 222 provided with means for adfixing a suture
    to the needle.


CLS 606/225
TXT Tied, hooked, wedged or grasped:

    Subject matter under subclass 224 wherein the means for adfixing the suture
    is either a means which permits the suture to be (1) passed through a loop
    or eye in the needle and knotted thereon; or (2) attached through a loop or
    bight which is held by a curved, bent means which engages said loop or; (3)
    to be pushed, crowded or forced into a limited space; or (4) to be held or
    seized firmly in the unpointed end of the needle by a resilient means.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

     226,   for sutures which are affixed to a needle by metal deformation such
    as swaging.


CLS 606/226
TXT Deformed:

    Subject matter under subclass 224 wherein the suture is adfixed to the
    needle by the application of force or pressure to the end of the needle
    into which the suture is inserted such that the end becomes altered in
    shape so as to hold the suture tightly within the altered shape of the
    needle end.

    (1)     Note.  Patents in this subclass disclose form plastic deformation
    by swaging or by the application of force to that portion of the needle
    which holds the end of the suture.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    224+,   for suture attachment to a needle by nondeformation of the end in
    which the suture is inserted.


CLS 606/227
TXT Pull out or frangible:

    Subject matter under subclass 224 wherein the suture is affixed to, but is
    readily separable from the needle upon application of a prescribed tensile
    force whereby:  (1) the tension upon the suture causes the suture to be
    dislodged from the holding portion of the needle; or (2) the tension upon
    the suture causes a weakened or reduced cross-sectional area of the suture,
    adjacent to the holding portion of the needle, to break so that the
    majority of the suture filament becomes disassociated from the needle.


CLS 606/228
TXT Suture or ligature:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising prepared threads, cords or
    filaments used to close a wound or to tie bind or constrict a portion of a
    body organ.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and its indented subclasses include suture
    making processes not provided for elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, subclass 94.11 for the treatment or preparation of
    these elements.

    57,     Textiles:  Spinning, Twisting, and Twining, subclasses 210+ for
    twisted strands of general application.

    206,    Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 63.3 for packaged ligatures.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, subclasses 1+ for processes of sterilizing
    sutures and ligatures.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclass 140 for animal derived edible casing.


CLS 606/229
TXT Collagen containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 228 wherein the sutures contains at least one
    component derived from natural or chemically processed material found in
    animal connective tissue, skin, bone or intestine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    604,    Surgery, subclass 368 for absorbent pads containing collagen.


CLS 606/230
TXT Absorbable in body:

    Subject matter under subclass 228 wherein the suture is composed of
    material which the body can assimilate naturally.


CLS 606/231
TXT Organic material containing:

    Subject matter under subclass 228 wherein the suture has at least one
    component which is, or contains, or is related to products derived through
    chemical interaction of carbon containing compounds.


CLS 606/232
TXT Suture retaining means (e.g., buttons):

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein means is provided to restrain, hold
    or otherwise maintain a suture in place upon the body.


CLS 606/233
TXT Suture supported from engagement with incision (e.g., suture bridge):

    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising a lifting means which lifts a
    suture above a wound thus changing the angle and the forces applied by said
    suture to the tissue to help to prevent cutting and scarring.


CLS 606/234
TXT Oral pacifier:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising a device designed for use by
    humans for biting upon to relieve gum irritation or inflammation or to
    serve to calm or to relieve stress or tension.

    (1)     Note.  Tension or stress relief devices to protect the teeth from
    grinding or clenching are classifiable in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Devices used orally to satisfy a craving for cigarettes or
    other tobacco products are classifiable in this subclass.


CLS 606/235
TXT Teething devices:

    Subject matter under subclass 234 wherein the pacifier is structured as a
    means upon which a baby can bite to aid in the development of teeth as they
    grow through the gums.


CLS 606/236
TXT Nipple attachment or structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 234 wherein significance is attributed to the
    structure of a teat-like protuberance or to the means for attaching said
    protuberance to a base upon which it is carried.


CLS 606/237
TXT Chiropractic or osteopathic implement:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 comprising means for restoring or tending
    to restore a portion of the body to its normal position or to a more proper
    position.


CLS 606/238
TXT Percussive prod:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 comprising means for applying pressure at
    a desirable angle to particular bony structure so as to rearrange the
    orientation of the structure with respect to the remainder of the skeletal
    system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    201,    for external press applicators.


CLS 606/239
TXT Motorized pummelling device:

    Subject matter under subclass 238 which includes a prime mover to operate
    the prodding device.


CLS 606/240
TXT Positioner for recumbent user:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 comprising a formed element for
    straightening the spine by either having a patient lay supine upon the
    element or by impressing the element upon a prone patient's back.


CLS 606/241
TXT Extension appliance:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 comprising means for elongating the
    skeletal system or a portion thereof by means of a tractive force so that
    the affected bones or bone fragments are moved to a substantially natural
    orientation.


CLS 606/242
TXT Couch:

    Subject matter under subclass 241 in which the reorientation is
    accomplished on a table, bed, or similar supportive structure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    5,      Beds,  subclasses 600+ for beds for invalids, subclasses 630+ for a
    table designed to serve as a support for an animal during surgical
    operations, especially subclass 652 for a device attached to or combined
    with a table comprising a mere body support for surgical operations.

    108,    Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, subclasses 1+ for a
    tiltable horizontally supported surface.

    297,    Chairs and Seats, appropriate subclasses for a chair or couch whose
    component parts may be manipulated to change the relative position of the
    parts of the body of an occupant.


CLS 606/243
TXT With intermediate gap:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 in which the supportive structure is
    divided by an intermediate space into which the patient's body is allowed
    to sag.


CLS 606/244
TXT With pivot to pedestal:

    Subject matter under subclass 242 in which the structure is hinged to a
    prominence in such fashion that the structure may be rotated from
    horizontal to vertical or vice versa to provide body-weight traction to a
    patient secured to the structure.


CLS 606/245
TXT With intermediate pivot:

    Subject matter under subclass 237 in which two support structures are
    hinged together in such fashion as to act upon a patient's body by bending
    it.


CLS 607/
TTL SURGERY:  LIGHT, THERMAL,  AND ELECTRICAL APPLICATION

CLS 607/1
TXT LIGHT, THERMAL, AND ELECTRICAL APPLICATION:
    Subject matter under the class definition for applying light or analogous
    rays to the body or modifying the temperature of the body or applying
    electricity to the body.

    (1)     Note.  Devices in this subclass are limited by claimed structure to
    therapeutic use. Where heating is used for cutting, coagulation, or other
    surgical use, see Class 606, Surgery, appropriate subclasses. Included
    herein are apparatus and methods for shrinking or killing tumors by
    heating, for example, at less than an amount needed to be considered as
    cutting or coagulation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 600+ for subject matter for heating by
    means of electrostatic and/or electro magnetic fields.

    601,    Surgery:  Kinesitherapy, subclasses 15+ for light, thermal, and
    electrical application to the body.

    602,    Surgery: Splint, Brace, or Bandage, subclasses 1+ for light,
    thermal or electrical application utilizing bandages or splints.

    604,    Surgery, subclass 20 for light applied to the body for therapeutic
    purposes.

    606,    Surgery, for surgical instruments utilizing light, heat or
    electrical instruments in body treatment, see subclasses 2+ for light
    application, 27+ for heat application and subclasses 32+ for electrical
    applications.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for electrical systems.

    88+,    for light applicators.

    96+,    for thermal applicators.

    115+,   for electrical applicators.


CLS 607/2
TXT Electrical therapeutic systems:
    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein an electrical signal is generated
    for application to electrodes or other applicators to stimulate body tissue
    for effecting a cure or alleviation of the effects of an abnormal condition
    or injury, or to restore normal or quasi-normal operation to a body part or
    the monitoring or controlling of such generation.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4+,     for subject matter relating to stimulators for a specific purpose
    or for use on a specific portion of the body.

    45+,    for electrical signals applied to the body to produce heating
    effects.

    59+,    for subject matter relating to special circuits useful for
    generating a stimulus.

    66+,    for subject matter relating to stimulation signals not otherwise
    classified.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 300+ for diagnostic systems, particularly
    subclass 554 wherein the subject's body response to an electrical stimulus
    is measured.


CLS 607/3
TXT Combined with nonelectrical therapy:
    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the electrical treatment is
    accompanied, simultaneously or alternatively, with a nonelectrical therapy.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    98+,    for electrical application to produce thermal  effects in the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 2+ for combined electrical and radioactive
    therapy and subclass 11 for combined electrical and magnetic therapy.

    601,    Surgery:  Kinesitherapy, subclasses 15+ for electrical treatment
    combined with a kinesitherapy device.

    602,    Surgery:  Splint, Brace, or Bandage, subclass 2 for bandages
    applying electricity to the body.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 20+ for devices applying electricity and a
    medicament to the body, i.e., iontophoresis.

    606,    Surgery, subclasses 32+ for electrosurgical use, i.e., cutting,
    coagulating etc., of body tissue.


CLS 607/4
TXT Combined cardioverting/defibrillating and pacing:
    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein electrical energy may be applied to
    the body in, on, or near the heart at a relatively high level to stop an
    abnormally rapid heartbeat (tachycardia) or a rapid fluttering
    (fibrillation) of the heart and at a relatively low level to regulate
    (pace) the heart at or near a desired rate.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5+,     for subject matter relating only to defibrillation/cardioversion.

    9+,     for subject matter relating only to pacing.


CLS 607/5
TXT Cardioverting/defibrillating:
    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein energy at a relatively high level
    is applied in, on, or near the heart to stop an abnormally high heart rate
    (tachycardia) or a rapid fluttering of the heart (fibrillation).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4,      for combined cardioversion/defibrillation and pacing.

    14,     for pacers correcting or preventing an abnormally high heart rate.


CLS 607/6
TXT Sensing body condition or signal other than            electrocardiographic
    signal:Subject matter under subclass 5 for controlling output or setting
    parameters in response to a body condition or signal other than the
    electrographic signal.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    17+,    for pacing subject matter controlled by a sensed body condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 300+ for body condition sensing devices for
    diagnostic purposes.


CLS 607/7
TXT Controlling or indicating stimulation level:
    Subject matter under subclass 5 for signalling when a preset stimulation
    level has been reached or for setting the stimulation level in response to
    the sensing of a body condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

     6,     for subject matter setting the stimulation level in response to a
    sensed body condition.


CLS 607/8
TXT Computing energy required or contact impedance:
    Subject matter under 5 for computing desired or actual energy supplied or
    the impedance between the body and applicators.


CLS 607/9
TXT Heart rate regulating, (e.g., pacing):
    Subject matter under subclass 2 for applying a relatively low energy level
    in, on, or near the heart to regulate the rate at which the heart beats to
    or near a desired rate or for monitoring and testing of such subject matter.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    115,    for applicators used for pacing purposes.


CLS 607/10
TXT With nonimplanted generator:
    Subject matter under subclass 9 for generators positioned outside the
    patient's body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for an externally-located energy source.


CLS 607/11
TXT Regulating or compensating stimulus level:
    Subject matter under subclass 9 for regulating the level of the excitation
    applied to the patient or for compensating the stimulus for energy source
    variations or impedance changes in applicator-tissue interface.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

     64,    for similar subject matter in noncardiac   stimulators.


CLS 607/12
TXT Stimulation raised above energy source level:
    Subject matter under subclass 9 for raising the stimulus amplitude above
    the energy source amplitude, e.g., by voltage multiplying, addition to the
    energy source amplitude, etc. to produce an effective pacing amplitude.


CLS 607/13
TXT Reducing output recovery time:
    Subject matter under subclass 9 for reducing the time required for
    electrochemical chemical effects in the tissue caused by the stimulus to
    stabilize, to permit the sensing of the cardiac response to the stimulus.


CLS 607/14
TXT Treating or preventing abnormally high heart rate:
    Subject matter under 9 for preventing the delivery of the pacing stimulus
    at a time in the cardiac cycle when the heart would respond by beating at
    an undesirable high rate or by stimulating the heart in a manner to
    counteract an abnormally high rate.


CLS 607/15
TXT Selecting plural stimulation patterns:
    Subject matter under subclass 14 wherein multiple stored patterns of
    stimuli are applied in sequence to prevent or treat an abnormally high rate.


CLS 607/16
TXT Intermittent operation for energy conservation:
    Subject matter under 9 wherein at least a part of   the stimulus-producing
    circuitry is temporarily deactivated until the occurrence of a
    predetermined event ("wakeup" signal) to reduce the consumption of energy
    to prolong energy source life.


CLS 607/17
TXT Parameter control in response to sensed physiological load on heart:Subject
    matter under 9 for controlling the pacing parameter, usually pulse rate, by
    sensing changes in the physiological load on the heart as evidenced by
    changes in a body condition, due to the changes in the person's activity,
    state of health.

    (1)     Note.  Conditions such as blood pressure, body temperature, and
    blood chemistry are detected conditions monitored.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 300+ for similar monitoring  techniques for
    diagnostic purposes.


CLS 607/18
TXT Plural sensed conditions:
    Subject matter under subclass 17 for controlling or pacer parameter in
    response to signals from plural sensors of the same or different body
    conditions.

    (1)     Note.  Two temperature sensors located at different areas of the
    body or a temperature sensor and a blood pressure sensor.


CLS 607/19
TXT Physical activity:
    Subject matter under subclass 17 for controlling the pacer parameter as a
    function of the movement of a portion of the patient's body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclass 595 for subject matter monitoring body movement.


CLS 607/20
TXT Respiratory movement:
    Subject matter under subclass 19 wherein the moving body part is the chest
    wall or lungs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 534+ for subject matter sensing body movement
    for diagnostic purposes.


CLS 607/21
TXT Body or blood temperature:
    Subject matter under 17 for controlling the pacer parameter as a function
    of the sensed temperature of the body or blood.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclass 549 for subject matter sensing temperature for
    diagnostic purposes.


CLS 607/22
TXT Chemical substance in blood:
    Subject matter under subclass 17 for controlling the pacer parameter as a
    function of the concentration, e.g., pH, of a chemical substance in the
    patient's blood.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 309, 310, and 345 for subject matter sensing
    chemicals in the blood for diagnostic purposes.


CLS 607/23
TXT Blood pressure:
    Subject matter under subclass 17 for controlling the pacer parameter as a
    function of blood pressure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 465+ for blood pressure sensors for diagnostic
    purposes.


CLS 607/24
TXT Stroke volume:
    Subject matter under 17 for controlling the pacer parameter as a function
    of the change in size of the heart ventricles from the fully contracted to
    the fully distended state.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclass 526 for stroke volume determining devices for
    diagnostic purposes.


CLS 607/25
TXT Ventricular electrocardiographic intervals, (e.g., q-t  interval):Subject
    matter under subclass 17 wherein the pacer is controlled as a function of
    the electrocardiographic interval measured from the occurrence of a pacer
    pulse, or the heart's response, thereto to the time when the heart recovers
    from the effects of the stimulus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, particularly subclasses 515+ for subject matter  detecting
    various waves of the electrocardiographic signal for diagnostic purposes.


CLS 607/26
TXT Gradient or slope of electrocardiographic waves:
    Subject matter under subclass 17 wherein the pacer is controlled as a
    function of the change of amplitude or the rate of change.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, particularly subclasses 515+ for subject matter  detecting
    various waves of the electrocardiographic signal for diagnostic purposes.


CLS 607/27
TXT Testing or monitoring pacer function:
    Subject matter under subclass 9 for determining whether or not a pacer is
    functioning in the desired manner.


CLS 607/28
TXT Measuring pacing threshold, capture margin, or contact impedance:Subject
    matter under subclass 27 for determining the minimum, pulse amplitude
    necessary to sustain pacing of the heart, how much reserve or margin of
    amplitude exists above a threshold, or a load or contact impedance at the
    applicator interface with the body tissue as a measure of pacing efficiency.


CLS 607/29
TXT Testing condition of energy source:
    Subject matter under subclass 27 for determining the condition or remaining
    useful life of available power source powering the pacer.


CLS 607/30
TXT Remotely changing (e.g., programming, pacer),  parameters, or
    functions:Subject matter under subclass 9 for remotely changing, the
    parameters of the generated pulse or the mode of operation, to adapt the
    pacer to a particular patient or to changing conditions in the patient.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27+,    for subject matter changing parameters for test purposes only.

    145,    for similar subject matter in nonpacer stimulators.


CLS 607/31
TXT Assurance of security, accuracy, or completion of programming
    procedure:Subject matter under subclass 30 permitting programming only if
    signals in the proper format are received, or indicating the implementation
    of, or the exactness of the effect of such programming signals.


CLS 607/32
TXT Communicating with pacer (e.g., telemetry):
    Subject matter under subclass 9 with specific arrangements for
    communication between the pacer and a remote device such as a programmer or
    monitor.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is intended to receive devices having more
    specific structure than a diagram block labeled "telemetry", "coil", or the
    like.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 903-904 for radio and telephone telemetry
    devices for medical purposes.


CLS 607/33
TXT Energy source external to generator or body:
    Subject matter under subclass 9 having at least one energy source outside a
    container for the signal generator structure or the user's body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    61,     for similar subject matter in noncardiac stimulators


CLS 607/34
TXT Alterable energy source configuration:
    Subject matter under subclass 9 for altering the manner in which the
    individual portions of an energy source supply energy to a pulse generator,
    thus preventing the failure of one portion of the source from causing
    failure of the pacer or to reconfigure the remaining operative portions to
    prolong the useful life of the pacer.


CLS 607/35
TXT Biological substance or activity-powered energy source:
    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein energy for operating the pacer is
    derived from body substances, or a movement of a portion of the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclass 2 for subject matter using living
    matter in the battery and subclasses 9+ for fuel cell-type batteries.


CLS 607/36
TXT Feature of stimulator housing or encapsulation:
    Subject matter under subclass 9 wherein significance is attributed to the
    material, construction, shape, etc. of either a container for the generator
    or a material encapsulating or filling the container.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    9,      for subject matter relating to the construction of the circuit, per
    se; e.g., chip architecture, component mounting, etc.


CLS 607/37
TXT Feature of generator-applicator connection:
    Subject matter under subclass 9 pertaining to an electrical and mechanical
    connection between a signal generator and a lead for the applicator.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    439,    Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses  for similar subject
    matter in general utility electrical devices.


CLS 607/38
TXT Multiple position connector:
    Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein the connection is capable of more
    than one operative position to permit alternative electrical connection to
    be made between the generator and the applicator.


CLS 607/39
TXT Stimulating reproductive organ:
    Subject matter under subclass 2 for stimulating reproductive tissue to
    promote erectile tissue in the body or to stimulate testes for production
    of semen.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    for applicators for vaginal or uterine use.

    143,    for applicators for male genital organs.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclass 788 for electrical applicators for male genital
    organs and subclass 794 for electrical applicators for vaginal or uterine
    use.


CLS 607/40
TXT Stimulating bladder or gastro-intestinal tract:
    Subject matter under subclass 2 for stimulation of the membranous sac in
    which urine is stored or stomach and intestines of the body to restore or
    maintain at least quasi-normal operation thereof.


CLS 607/41
TXT Incontinence control:
    Subject matter under subclass 40 providing stimulation to avoid the
    involuntary discharge of body wastes.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    138,    for applicators for vaginal or uterine use.


CLS 607/42
TXT Stimulating respiration function:
    Subject matter under subclass 2 providing stimulation for maintaining a
    regular breathing cycle.


CLS 607/43
TXT Correcting spinal deformities:
    Subject matter under subclass 2 providing stimulation to muscles attached
    to a backbone support structure for eliminating or diminishing spinal
    curvature and other such deformities of the spinal column.


CLS 607/44
TXT Treating hypertension:
    Subject matter under subclass 2 providing stimulation to a portion of the
    body, to cause a reduction of blood pressure as a treatment for high blood
    pressure.


CLS 607/45
TXT Treating mental or emotional disorders:
    Subject matter under subclass 2 providing stimulation, primarily to the
    head, for causing a convulsive shock or other altering of brainwaves to
    ease or eliminate the symptoms of mental and emotional disorders.


CLS 607/46
TXT Electrical treatment of pain:
    Subject matter under subclass 2 providing stimulation to reduce the
    patient's awareness of bodily suffering or distress.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    134,    for electrical applicators used in, on, or near the mouth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclass 26 for electrical stimulation to  induce sleep or
    to produce a general anesthetic effect.


CLS 607/47
TXT Dental analgesia:
    Subject matter under subclass 46 wherein the stimulation is applied in, on,
    or near the patient's mouth to reduce pain of toothache or dental
    procedures.


CLS 607/48
TXT Directly or indirectly stimulating motor muscles:
    Subject matter under subclass 2 providing stimulation to those organs which
    produce movement or their controlling nerves to induce at least a
    quasi-normal movement of the associated body part.


CLS 607/49
TXT For walking assistance:
    Subject matter under subclass 48 wherein the stimulation is applied to leg
    muscles or nerves to assist the patient during locomotion.


CLS 607/50
TXT Promoting tissue growth or healing:
    Subject matter under subclass 2 providing electrical stimulation for
    accelerating tissue growth or healing of surface and subcutaneous wounds.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 9+ for subject matter providing  similar
    treatment by magnetic field.


CLS 607/51
TXT Hard tissue (e.g., bone):
    Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein the tissue treated is a solid,
    rigid, compact mass.


CLS 607/52
TXT With monitoring or testing feature:
    Subject matter under subclass 51 providing for checking or controlling of
    the progress of tissue growth.


CLS 607/53
TXT Promoting optical function:
    Subject matter under subclass 2 providing electrical stimulation to improve
    the condition or the natural operation of the patient's sense of sight.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    141,    for electrical applicators for the eye.


CLS 607/54
TXT Producing visual effects by stimulation:
    Subject matter under subclass 2 providing electrical stimulation which
    produces a resulting effect interpreted by a patient's brain as light;
    e.g., phosphene.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136,    for electrical applicators for the external ear canal.


CLS 607/55
TXT Promoting auditory function:
    Subject matter under subclass 2 providing means for stimulation to improve
    the condition or operation of a patient's sense of hearing.


CLS 607/56
TXT Producing aural effects by stimulation:
    Subject matter under subclass 55 wherein the stimulus is derived from an
    audio information signal device and is applied to the patient's auditory
    nerves, as a hearing aid or to other neural pathways, as a prosthesis.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    136,    for electrical applicators for the external ear canal.

    137,    for electrical applicators for the inner ear.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclass 25 for implanted, vibratory-type  hearing aid
    devices.


CLS 607/57
TXT By partially or wholly implanted device:
    Subject matter under subclass 56 wherein at least a portion of the device
    is surgically placed or inserted in the body.


CLS 607/58
TXT Stimulating for aversion and substance abuse therapy:
    Subject matter under subclass 2 having means for providing stimulation to a
    person attempting to break habituation to actions or substances by
    substituting an electrical shock for the action or substance or for
    providing a warning or protection against the action of another.

    (1)     Note.  Protection against the actions of another includes repelling
    a shark attack on a swimmer or by using a "stun gun".


CLS 607/59
TXT Control signal storage (e.g., programming):
    Subject matter under subclass 2 providing for the  storage of information
    in the stimulator containing at least one signal parameter or mode of
    operation whereby the operation of the generator can be controlled for
    immediate or subsequent delivery of a desired stimulation signal.


CLS 607/60
TXT Telemetry or communications circuits:
    Subject matter under subclass 2 providing for communication between the
    stimulator and a control or a monitoring unit.

    (1)     Note.  The mere presence of a diagram box labeled "coil",
    "telemetry," or the like is not sufficient subject matter to warrent
    classification in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33      and 52, for cardiac pacers with programming circuitry.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 903-904 for radio and telephone telemetry means
    used on the body.


CLS 607/61
TXT Energy source outside generator housing:
    Subject matter under subclass 2 where the energy source for the generator
    is an independent means which as a separate unit is operatively connected
    to the generator.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    33,     for cardiac pacers with similar energy source application.


CLS 607/62
TXT Output controlled by sensor responsive to body or interface
    condition:Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein a body condition or a
    contact or interface condition between the applicator and body surface is
    monitored and used as a control input, (i.e., feedback) to adjust a
    parameter or operating condition.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for cardiac pacers which regulate the output signal according to an
    interface condition.

    17+,    for body condition-responsive cardiac pacers.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 300+ for diagnostic devices sensing various
    body conditions.


CLS 607/63
TXT Promoting patient safety or comfort:
    Subject matter under subclass 2 providing for the well-being or protection
    of a patient by limiting amplitude levels in the signal, disconnecting the
    patient from the generator, shutting off the generator in the event of
    circuit failure or unsafe operating condition.


CLS 607/64
TXT Constant level output:
    Subject matter under subclass 63 maintaining a substantially constant
    output amplitude regardless of changing interface conditions.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for cardiac pacers which regulate the output signal according to an
    interface condition.


CLS 607/65
TXT Signal generated by induction coil circuit:
    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the stimulus generator includes a
    primary coil connected to a circuit interrupter or an energy source which
    induces a current in a secondary coil.


CLS 607/66
TXT Generating more than one signal:
    Subject matter under subclass 2 having a generator means for separate
    stimuli to be alternately or simultaneously applied to the patient.

    (1)     Note.  Merely providing the same signal to plural sets of
    applicators does not qualify as "separate stimuli".

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    148,    for applicators defining plural electrical pathways  through the
    body.


CLS 607/67
TXT Applied for interferential effect in body:
    Subject matter under subclass 66 wherein separate signals are applied to
    the body with the signals intersecting below the surface of tissue to
    produce a combined effect, therein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS,SUBCLASS:

    115+,   for electrical applicators.

    148,    for applicators defining plural electrical pathways through the
    body.


CLS 607/68
TXT Generating complex signals:
    Subject matter under subclass 2 for generating a stimulus having at least
    two signal components.

    (1)     Note.  If more than two signal components are  present, regardless
    of the type, the patent is classified in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  Such signals may be galvanic or constant direct current,
    oscillatory with positive and negative portions substantially congruent and
    pulse; e.g., discontinuous or nonoscillatory continuous waves, combined by
    mixing, adding, modulating, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    72+,    for pulse-type signals.

    75,     for galvanic signals.

    76,     for oscillatory signals.


CLS 607/69
TXT With two oscillating signal components:
    Subject matter under subclass 68 for generating a composite stimulus formed
    from two signal components, each of which having continuous signals having
    positive and negative portions of approximately the same amplitude and
    shape.


CLS 607/70
TXT With two pulse signal components:
    Subject matter under subclass 68 for generating a composite stimulus formed
    from two signal components, both of which are discontinuous or continuous,
    nonoscillatory-types.


CLS 607/71
TXT With one pulse and one oscillating signal component:
    Subject matter under subclass 68 for generating a composite stimulus formed
    from two signal components, one of the pulse-type and the other of
    oscillatory-type.


CLS 607/72
TXT Pulse signal:
    Subject matter under subclass 2 for generating a stimulus having a single
    component which is a discontinuous or continuous, nonoscillatory stimuli.


CLS 607/73
TXT Random or pseudo-random pulse pattern:
    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein pulses are generated with at least
    one parameter which varies without pattern or in a false patternless manner.


CLS 607/74
TXT Bipolar pulses:
    Subject matter under subclass 72 wherein the generated pulses have both
    positive and negative components.


CLS 607/75
TXT Galvanic (e.g., battery-like, direct current signals):
    Subject matter under subclass 2 for generating a stimulus having a single
    component of the galvanic or battery like type wherein the amplitude is
    relatively unchanging direct current.


CLS 607/76
TXT Oscillating signals:
    Subject matter under subclass 2 for generating a single component which is
    a continuous signal having positive and negative portions of substantially
    the same amplitude and shape.


CLS 607/77
TXT Exercising:
    Subject matter under subclass 1 associated with means designed for physical
    exertion to develop the muscles of the body which is operated by the user.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    482,    Exercise Devices, particularly subclasses 1+ for an exercise device
    which applies electricity to a user while exercising for a nontherapeutic
    purpose.


CLS 607/78
TXT Push or pull:
    Subject matter under subclass 77 in which the exercise is  obtained by a to
    and fro motion against a resisting force and   operated by an attached part
    of the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    482,    Exercise Devices, particularly subclasses 92+ for a push or pull
    exercise device.


CLS 607/79
TXT Brush or comb:
    Subject matter under subclass 1 combined with an implement consisting of
    bristles, hair, or the like, attached to a handle or an implement
    consisting of a toothed strip of material for arranging hair or holding it
    in place.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    15,     Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclasses 159+ for
    brushes, particularly subclass 160 for heated brushes.

    132,    Toilet, subclass 219 for combs, particularly subclasses 117 and 118
    for heated combs.

    601,    Surgery:  Kinesitherapy, subclasses 15+ for body massagers combined
    with light, thermal, and electrical applicators.


CLS 607/80
TXT Light and fluid treatment:
    Subject matter under subclass 1 which is used to apply light rays and
    liquids to the body concurrently.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 487+ for bathing
    apparatus having no means other than the bathing medium to modify the
    temperature of the body.


CLS 607/81
TXT Baths or cabinets:
    Subject matter under subclass 1 designed to surround or enclose the body or
    a body member for the purpose of applying thermal or fluid treatment
    thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 535+ for subject
    matter used in general bathing (i.e. showers, tubs etc.) and for applying
    hot air baths having no means to apply heat to the body except through the
    heat conveyed to the body of air.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, for general cabinet structure.


CLS 607/82
TXT Shower or spray:
    Subject matter under subclass 81 wherein a jet of fine liquid is discharged
    over the body or a body member.

    SEARCH CLASS:

     4,     Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 59+ for shower
    baths.


CLS 607/83
TXT Vapor:
    Subject matter under subclass 81 wherein a gas at a temperature below its
    critical temperature is applied to the bath or cabinet enclosure.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 524+ for vapor and
    hot-air baths.


CLS 607/84
TXT For body member:
    Subject matter under subclass 83 wherein the enclosure is adapted to
    accommodate only a part of the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclass 537 for vapor baths
    for the head or face.


CLS 607/85
TXT Liquid receiving tub:
    Subject matter under subclass 81 comprising tanks or  receptacles for
    bathing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 488+ and 538+ for
    liquid holding body receiving receptacles.


CLS 607/86
TXT For body member:
    Subject matter under subclass 85 wherein the receptacle is adapted to
    accommodate only a part of the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 573.1 and 621+ for
    liquid receptacles for the feet.


CLS 607/87
TXT With fluid circulation:
    Subject matter under subclass 81 wherein a treatment medium comprises a
    thermally controlled fluid which is circulated to the bath or cabinet.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    4,      Baths, Closets, Sinks, and Spittoons, subclasses 541+ for baths
    with liquid circulating means.

    128,    Surgery, subclass 66 for baths which comprise a circulated liquid
    medium


CLS 607/88
TXT Light application:
    Subject matter under subclass 1 having means for the application or
    analogous rays of light to the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    602,    Surgery:  Spint, Brace, or Bandage, subclasses 2+ for surgical
    instruments confined with light applicators.


CLS 607/89
TXT Laser application:
    Subject matter under subclass 88 wherein a maser which amplifies radiation
    of frequencies of light within or near the range of visible light is used
    to treat the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    606,    Surgery, subclasses 2+, for instruments which direct focused
    paralleled light rays at the body.


CLS 607/90
TXT Lamp and casing:
    Subject matter under subclass 88 wherein the light applicator comprises a
    covering for the case or an associated support structure for the light.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    362,    Illumination, for lamps in combination with casing and/or support
    structure.


CLS 607/91
TXT Surrounding body or body member:
    Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein the casing or its support is
    designed to enclose the body or a body member.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     for body enclosures which comprise light ray and fluid treatments.

    81,     for body enclosures with lamps which heat the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 455.1 for enclosures combined with sources
    of radiant energy.


CLS 607/92
TXT Internal application:
    Subject matter under subclass 90 which is used to apply light rays directly
    to the internal body tissue, organs, or fluids.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes subject matter which applies  light
    rays to body fluids which are pumped outside of the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 185+, 191, 200, 221+, and 246 for illuminated
    specular designed to enter natural body orifices


CLS 607/93
TXT Light pipe applicator:
    Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein the casing or support structure
    comprises a rod or cable of light transparent material for directing the
    light ray along a restricted, usually curved path.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 101+, particularly, subclasses 160+, 179+,
    183+, 191, 200, 213, 224, 246+, and 248+ for light conductors which are
    inserted into the body.


CLS 607/94
TXT Ultraviolet:
    Subject matter under subclass 90 which utilizes light rays beyond the
    violet segment of the spectrum to treat the body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    90,     for ultraviolet lights combined with body surrounding structures.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 504 for ultraviolet light generation and
    sources.


CLS 607/95
TXT Solar (Natural) light applicator:
    Subject matter under subclass 88 having means which are designed to expose
    the body to sun rays in a particular manner through the use of some
    structural feature.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    80,     for pools or tubs filled with fluid for the purpose of cooling the
    body while sunbathing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    D24,    Medical and Laboratory Equipment, subclass 38 for the design of
    similar devices.


CLS 607/96
TXT Thermal applicators:
    Subject matter under subclass 1 which is worn on or applied directly upon
    the body in order to modify its temperature.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, appropriate subclasses, for refrigeration means,
    particularly subclass 530 for an envelope type container, containing
    material to be refrozen for reuse.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 204+ for nonelectrical body warmers.

    150,    Purses, Wallets, and Protective Covers, subclass 2.1 for heat
    exchange bags.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 46 for a flexible envelope or cover type of
    heat exchanger not limited by structure to therapeutic use.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 211 for body warmers combined with
    electric heating means particularly subclasses 354 and 553 for infra red
    lamps and subclass 528 for flexible heaters.

    220,    Receptacles, subclass 3.1 for heat exchanging metallic receptacles.

    601,    Surgery:  Kinesitherapy, subclass 3 for ultrasonic thermal
    applicators.

    604,    Surgery, subclass 291 for thermal medicators.


CLS 607/98
TXT Electric current:
    Subject matter under subclass 96 wherein heating is accomplished by passing
    electric current through tissue.

    (1)     Note.  In general, the electric current is passed between two
    electrodes mounted in contact with the tissue to be heated, as
    distinguished from electromagnetic waves radiated into the tissue.  The
    electrodes can be either conductively coupled to the tissue or capacitively
    coupled to the tissue (e.g., electrode insulated from tissue).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, appropriate subclasses for electric heating in
    general.


CLS 607/99
TXT Localized application:
    Subject matter under subclass 98 for directing the electric current to a
    defined limited area of the tissue to be heated.


CLS 607/100
TXT Electromagnetic radiation (e.g., infrared):
    Subject matter under subclass 96 wherein therapeutic heating is
    accomplished by the absorption of electromagnetic waves radiated into the
    area to be heated.

    (1)     Note.  The electromagnetic waves may be any frequency capable of
    heating the tissue when coupled thereto with sufficient power, and includes
    without being so limited wavelengths in the infrared, radio, and microwave
    wavelengths.

    (2)     Note.  The mere specifying of, for example, of high or
    radio-frequencies, etc., is not sufficient for classification herein absent
    the feature of radiated electromagnetic waves.  For example, where a radio
    frequency generator is coupled to a pair of electrodes attached to the body
    to direct a current between them, classification is proper in subclass 98,
    above.


CLS 607/101
TXT Microwave or RF (high frequency):
    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the electromagnetic radiation is
    of extremely high frequency.


CLS 607/102
TXT With temperature sensing:
    Subject matter under subclass 101 including subject matter for detecting
    the temperature of the heated object or applicator.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass will also take patents which in addition to
    sensory may further include control circuitry responsive to the sensed
    temperature for controlling the application of microwave radiation.


CLS 607/103
TXT Electromagnetic induction:
    Subject matter under subclass 96 wherein heating is accomplished by means
    having electric or magnetic properties which produces magnetism, an
    electrical charge, or electromotive force in a body without contact
    therewith.


CLS 607/104
TXT With fluid supply:
    Subject matter under subclass 96 wherein a heating or cooling liquid is
    supplied to a thermal applicator from an outside source.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 46 for a subject matter regarding heat
    exchangers.


CLS 607/105
TXT Internally applied:
    Subject matter under subclass 104 comprising means to  modify the
    temperature of interior body tissues, organs or fluids by direct
    application.


CLS 607/106
TXT Blood:
    Subject matter under subclass 105 wherein means are applied to the body to
    directly modify the temperature of blood.

    (1)     Note.  This subject matter includes devices wherein the blood is
    heated or cooled when it is circulated externally of the body.


CLS 607/107
TXT Dry gas:
    Subject matter under subclass 104 wherein the heating  or cooling fluid is
    nonmoistened air.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    83,     for subject matter which applies a vapor to the body.

    87,     for cabinets which are thermally controlled by an air circulation
    means.


CLS 607/108
TXT For specific external body area:
    Subject matter under subclass 96 which is designed such that it may be worn
    on or applied to a particular area of the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, for wearing apparel, per se.

    126,    Stoves and Furnaces, subclasses 204+ for wearing apparel in
    combination with nonelectrical heating means.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 211 for wearing apparel containing an
    electric heating element for heating the body.


CLS 607/109
TXT Head, face, or neck:
    Subject matter under subclass 108 which is shaped so as to be applied to
    the head, face, or neck portions of the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclass 171.2 for head coverings combined with means to
    treat (a) the head, (b) air coming in contact with the head, or (c) body
    fluids extruded from the head.


CLS 607/110
TXT Top of head:
    Subject matter under subclass 109 which is worn on the upper portion of the
    head in the manner of a hat.


CLS 607/111
TXT Hand or foot:
    Subject matter under subclass 108 which is shaped so as to be applied to
    the terminal, prehensile part of an upper or lower limb in an animal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclass 2.6 for heated shoes and
    subclass 3 for ventilated shoes.


CLS 607/112
TXT With support or fastening means:
    Subject matter under subclass 96 having means for sustaining or attaching a
    thermal pack during its application upon the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 530 for envelope-type thermal packs which
    are applied to the body.

    602,    Surgery:  Splint, Brace, or Bandage, appropriate subclasses, for
    bandages with thermal applicators.


CLS 607/113
TXT Internal application:
    Subject matter under subclass 96 having means which modify the temperature
    of interior body tissues, organs, or fluids by direct application.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    105,    for internal thermal applicators with a fluid supply means.


CLS 607/114
TXT Thermal material receptacle:
    Subject matter under subclass 96 designed to hold hot or cold substances.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    for thermal material receptacles combined with body support or
    fastening means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    44,     Fuel and Related Compositions, subclasses 3+ for chemically fired
    heaters.

    62,     Refrigeration, subclass 530 for envelopes which retain a cold
    material.

    383,    Flexible Bags, subclass 901 for hot water or ice bags.


CLS 607/115
TXT Electrical energy applicator:
    Subject matter under subclass 1 for applying electrical energy to the
    external surface or inside portions of the body to effect a cure or
    alleviation of symptoms of a disease or defect of the body tissue.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     for electrical generating systems for use with applicators
    producing electrical therapy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 10+ for magnetic field therapy devices
    including an electrical applicator, subclasses 372+ for body signal sensing
    devices resembling electrical applicators, and subclass 554 for electrical
    applicators for diagnostic purposes.

    602,    Surgery:  Spint, Brace, or Bandage, subclass 2 for an electrical
    applicator contained in a bandage.

    604,    Surgery, subclasses 20+ for medicament dispensers with electrical
    application.

    606,    Surgery, subclasses 32+ for electrosurgical devices and applicators
    and subclass 129 for electrode guide devices.


CLS 607/116
TXT Placed in body:
    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein the electrical energy is applied
    to tissue inside the body by an applicator inserted through a natural or
    surgically created opening in the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 373+ for body signal receiving devices used
    inside the body.


CLS 607/117
TXT Spinal cord:
    Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein the electrical energy is applied
    directly to the spinal cord by an electrode inserted between vertebrae or
    through a surgically created opening in a vertebra.


CLS 607/118
TXT Applicator placed around the stimulated nerve:
    Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein the applicator has an elongated
    strip wrapped around a nerve or a slot or clamp formation substantially
    surrounding a nerve to hold the electrode in position.


CLS 607/119
TXT Heart:
    Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein the applicator is placed directly
    on or in the heart tissue or within at least one chamber of the heart.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 373+ for heart signal sensing devices inserted
    in the body.


CLS 607/120
TXT With drug or medicament-dispensing:
    Subject matter under subclass 119 wherein the applicator includes means for
    dispensing a drug or medicament either by self-regulating or manual means.


CLS 607/121
TXT With nonpolarizing, impedance matching or antithrombogenic electrode
    material:Subject matter under subclass 119 wherein the electrode or other
    element includes material which does not cause a buildup of electrical
    charge, which promotes a good energy transfer or prevents blood clotting in
    order that the applicator is not disabled by the attack of body substances.


CLS 607/122
TXT Catheter or endocardial (inside heart) type:
    Subject matter under subclass 119 wherein the applicator is an elongated
    member with electrodes at the end or along the length thereof for insertion
    through a surgical incision in a blood vessel into the heart chambers.


CLS 607/123
TXT Stimulating plural chambers (e.g., atrium and ventricle):
    Subject matter under subclass 122 wherein the applicator has electrodes in
    or near at least two heart chambers to achieve a stimulation pattern nearer
    natural operation.


CLS 607/124
TXT Esophageal-type:
    Subject matter under subclass 122 wherein the applicator is inserted
    through the mouth and extends the electrodes near or at the level of the
    heart.


CLS 607/125
TXT With nonlinear locating portion:
    Subject matter under subclass 122 wherein a portion of the catheter is
    distorted from the longitudinal axis of the catheter to provide a
    positioning element with respect to the tissue of the heart.

    (1)     Note.  Conical or other flow-directing devices are not considered
    to be "locators" for purposes of this subclass.


CLS 607/126
TXT With anchor means:
    Subject matter under subclass 122 wherein structure is provided at or near
    the electrodes for physically attaching the catheter to the heart to
    maintain proper electrode contact with the heart tissue during heart motion.


CLS 607/127
TXT Axially-mounted helical type:
    Subject matter under subclass 126 wherein the anchor  is in the shape of a
    helix or spiral mounted on the end of the catheter to be rotated into heart
    tissue.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131,    for other electrical applicators for use upon the heart and having
    spiral anchors.


CLS 607/128
TXT Retractable tines or hooks:
    Subject matter under subclass 126 wherein the anchor means comprises tines
    or hooks emerging from the catheter to engage heart tissue and retain the
    catheter in position in the heart but which are capable of being drawn back
    to a position where the catheter may be moved or removed.


CLS 607/129
TXT Patch or epicardial (on heart surface) type:
    Subject matter under subclass 119 wherein a patch of nonconductive material
    is provided with a conductive portion which is in electrical contact with
    the external surface of or is inserted into the heart tissue.


CLS 607/130
TXT With anchor other than a suture:
    Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein structure such as a hook, tine,
    etc. is employed in addition to or in lieu of a suture for retaining the
    electrode in operative position on the heart surface.


CLS 607/131
TXT Helical:
    Subject matter under subclass 130 wherein the anchor means is in the shape
    of a spiral for insertion into the heart tissue.

    (1)     Note.  Unless a spiral electrode is also used as an anchoring
    device, the subject matter would not be appropriate here.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for catheter-type electrodes with spiral anchor means.


CLS 607/132
TXT Suture-type:
    Subject matter under subclass 119 wherein the applicator has at least a
    portion thereof with a surgical suture needle attached to permit the
    electrode to be inserted in the heart tissue.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    606,    Surgery, subclasses 222+ for suture needles and 228+ for suture
    material and construction.


CLS 607/133
TXT Gastro-intestinal tract:
    Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein the applicator is inserted into
    the stomach or intestines for localized treatment.


CLS 607/134
TXT Mouth:
    Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein the applicator is inserted into
    the mouth for treatment of the interior structures of the mouth.


CLS 607/135
TXT Nose:
    Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein the applicator is inserted in and
    treats the inner surfaces of the organ of smell.


CLS 607/136
TXT External auditory canal:
    Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein the applicator is inserted in the
    canal of the outer ear leading from the auricle to the ear drum.


CLS 607/137
TXT Inner ear (e.g., cochlea):
    Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein the electrodes are implanted in
    the structures of the inner ear such as the cochlea for stimulating nerve
    fibers of the auditory system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    56,     for electrical stimulating devices for this purpose.


CLS 607/138
TXT Rectum, vagina, or uterus:
    Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein the applicator is inserted into
    an anal opening, a vaginal opening or a uterus to stimulate the surrounding
    tissue.


CLS 607/139
TXT Head-supported:
    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein the applicator is provided with
    means to support the electrode on a desired portion of the head.


CLS 607/140
TXT Mounted on, or consisting of, a mask covering nose and chin:Subject matter
    under subclass 139 wherein the support means is a covering for the user's
    face, particularly for location over the nose and chin of the subject.


CLS 607/141
TXT Overlying eye:
    Subject matter under subclass 139 wherein the electrode is positioned over
    at least one organ of sight.


CLS 607/142
TXT Applying electrical energy to the heart through intact skin (e.g.,
    defibrillator paddle type):Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein the
    applicator is intended to apply high energy electricity to the body of a
    subject for the purpose of restoring a regular heartbeat.


CLS 607/143
TXT Male genital organ:
    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein the applicator is positioned on
    the male genitals.


CLS 607/144
TXT Foot:
    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein the applicator is structured as a
    plate, bucket, tray, etc., for receiving at least a portion of a subject's
    terminal portion of a lower extremity.


CLS 607/145
TXT Hand held:
    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein the applicator is shaped as a
    handle or rod to fit inside the subject's closed hand or placed on or
    entirely about the hand.


CLS 607/146
TXT Writing instrument:
    Subject matter under subclass 145 wherein the applicator is in the shape of
    or includes a pen or pencil.


CLS 607/147
TXT Rotated by contact with body:
    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein the applicator surface is
    swivelably or rotatably mounted so as to produce a rolling contact with the
    body tissue when in use.


CLS 607/148
TXT Electrical energy applied through parallel paths:
    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein an electrode is made up of plural
    contacts connected in common either directly or through a switch, for
    example, to stimulate more than a single area of tissue.


CLS 607/149
TXT Means for holding applicator against the body tissue:
    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein the applicator includes means to
    maintain contact of the applicator with body tissue.

    (1)     Note. Holding means includes adhesive, belts, bands and clamps, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    112,    for support devices for other applicators.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 718 for body
    attached or connected antennas or structure which enables the body to
    operate as an antenna.


CLS 607/150
TXT Hand held:
    Subject matter under subclass 149 wherein the device for supporting the
    electrode is handle-shaped to fit into the prehensile portion of an upper
    extremity of the user.


CLS 607/151
TXT Battery-holding grip:
    Subject matter under subclass 150 wherein the handle includes a battery
    source for the device and may form one of the applicator contacts to the
    body tissue.


CLS 607/152
TXT Flexible sheet or resilient pad:
    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein the applicator is of a flat
    shaped single or multi-layer sheet material or is of yieldable material of
    similar shape.


CLS 607/153
TXT Means for wetting applicator-body interface:
    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein a means, is provided to reduce
    the electrical resistance of the interface between the body tissue and the
    electrical contact of the applicator by the application of a liquid thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 372+ for other applicators having awetted
    surface.


CLS 607/154
TXT High frequency radiation type:
    Subject matter under subclass 115 wherein the applicator is intended to be
    used in the application of inherently high frequency to the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 600+ for subject matter related to
    heating by means of electromagnetic fields.


CLS 607/155
TXT Substantially flat radiating coil:
    Subject matter under subclass 154 wherein the applicator includes or
    consists of a coil supported in substantially planer configuration on the
    user's body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    600,    Surgery, subclasses 13+ for similar applicators of electromagnetic
    fields for magneto-therapy use.


CLS 607/156
TXT Antenna or transmission line:
    Subject matter under subclass 154 wherein the applicator is in the shape of
    an aerial, or a transmission line modified to provide an outlet for the
    electrical energy.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 718 for body
    attached or connected antennas or structure which enables the body to
    operate as an antenna.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 607/900
TXT Substance abuse therapy:
    A cross-reference art collection directed to patents for the treatment of
    dependency of addictive substances.


CLS 607/901
TXT Cancer detection:
    A cross-reference art collection directed to means used to discover the
    presence of a malignant invasive tumor.


CLS 607/902
TXT Fetal monitoring other than heart rate:
    A collection of cross-reference art collection directed to the monitoring
    of fetal activities while in the womb exclusive of the heartbeat rate.


CLS 623/
TTL PROSTHESIS (I.E., ARTIFICIAL  BODY MEMBERS), PARTS THEREOF, OR AIDS AND
    ACCESSORIES THEREFOR

CLS 623/
TXT This class provides for artificial substitutes or parts for a human body
    particulary manufactured or adapted to replace or assist a missing or
    defective natural body member or part thereof for functional or cosmetic
    reasons. This class also provides for elements or accessories for
    substitutes or parts of this class unless such elements or accessories are
    of such general utility as to be provided for in some other class. This
    class also provides for devices and mechanisms designed to operate or
    control artificial substitutes or parts for a human body. Finally, this
    class provides for methods of operating an artificial heart.

    (1)     Note. For the purposes of this class, the expression "Prosthesis"
    and "Artificial body member" may include a natural other than human animal
    body part which has been treated or modified to produce a different type of
    replacement body part. For example, a graft usable for arteries, organs or
    skin which is made from animal intestines or umbilical cords will be found
    in this class. Such prothesis involving the use of natural body parts
    proper for this class are to be distinguished from transplants proper for
    Class 128. That class provides for organ or tissues taken from a human body
    for grafting into another area of the same body or into another human body.

    (2)     Note.  With regard to Class 128, Surgery, the subject matter found
    in Class 623 is intended to physically replace (completely or partially) a
    missing or defective natural body member or part thereof while Class 128
    provides for subject matter which may control or assist a body part or
    function but which is not used as a physical replacement or partial
    replacement for any normally existing body part.  Class 623, for example,
    provides for sphincter type apparatus which is completely or partially
    substituted for an existing sphincter type muscle while Class 128 provides
    for sphincter type apparatus which is used in addition to an existing
    sphincter type muscle or in a location where no such muscle normally exists.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, appropriate subclasses for pads to be worn under the
    clothing.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 712+ for a harness for controlling or
    handling an animal, subclasses 850+ for a protective shield or apparel, and
    subclasses 856+ for a body- or appendage-encircling collar or band.

    128,    Surgery, appropriate subclasses, for apparatus which controls or
    assists a body part or function but which does not physically replace or
    partially replace any normally existing body part.  See (2) Note. above.

    132,    Toilet, subclasses 53 and 54 for wigs and other hair structures not
    anchored in the scalp.

    135,    Tent, Canopy, Umbrella, or Cane, subclasses 65+ for staffs,
    crutches, stilts, etc. used as aids to walking but not adapted to be
    secured to the limbs.

    181,    Acoustics, subclasses 129+ for an artificial ear drum or aid to
    hearing.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, appropriate subclasses, especially 60, 66+ and
    120 for artificial body members used for display or in operations on
    apparel.

    351,    Optics:  Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting, subclasses
    41+ for spectacles and eyeglasses as aids to vision.

    427,    Coating Processes, subclasses 2.1+ for significant coating or
    impregnating processes which involve medical or dental purpose products,
    parts, intermediates, or subcombinations thereof, especially subclasses
    2.24+ coating (or impregnating) processes for implantable permanent
    prosthesis.

    428,    Stock Material and Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for a web, sheet or block of stock material product of either single or
    plural layers, and especially subclass 543 for miscellaneous articles or
    blanks not elsewhere provided.

    433,    Dentistry, subclasses 167+ for dental prostheses: and subclasses
    215+ for tooth repair (crowns, fillings, inlays, etc.).

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 373+, 376+, 390, and 391+ for
    artificial body members intended for use with dummies or dolls.


CLS 623/1
TXT ARTERIAL PROSTHESIS (E.G., BLOOD VESSELS,ETC.):

    Subject matter under the class definition manufactured or adapted to
    replace or assist a missing or defective anatomical duct, canal or tubular
    structure which functions to contain and circulate blood within a human
    body.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    12,     for similar prosthetic devices for circulating body fluids other
    than blood.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    606,    Surgery, subclasses 151+ for surgical mesh, clip, clamp or band
    including connector elements for hollow body organs and nerve endings,
    subclasses 213+ for sutureless closures and subclasses 228+, for sutures
    and ligatures.


CLS 623/2
TXT HEART VALVE:

    Subject matter under the class definition manufactured or adapted to
    replace or assist a defective structure retarding or preventing the flow of
    blood through a heart.

    (1)     Note. Accessories such as stents for holding or keeping the heart
    valve in place, are included.


CLS 623/3
TXT CORPOREAL ARTIFICIAL HEART, HEART ASSIST (E.G., IMPLANTABLE BLOOD PUMP,
    ETC.), CONTROL REGULATOR, POWER SUPPLY THEREFOR, OR METHOD OF OPERATION
    THEREOF:

    Subject matter under the class definition manufactured or adapted either:
    (a) to replace or assist a defective muscular blood pumping organ of a
    human body, i.e., an artificial heart; or (b) to aid in the functioning of
    an artificial heart; or (c) to direct the operation of an artificial heart;
    or (d) to provide energy to an artificial heart; or (e) for a process of
    directing the operation of an artificial heart.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, appropriate subclass for an extracorporeal artificial
    heart, per se.


CLS 623/4
TXT EYE PROSTHESIS (E.G., LENS OR CORNEAL IMPLANT OR ARTIFICIAL EYE, ETC.):

    Subject matter under the class definition manufactured or adapted to
    replace or assist to replace or assist a missing or defective part of a
    human organ capable of vision or light sensitivity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 389 and 392+ for doll eyes.


CLS 623/5
TXT Corneal implant:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 manufactured or adapted to replace or
    assist to replace or assist a transparent anterior portion of the tunic of
    an human eye, i.e., the cornea.


CLS 623/6
TXT Intraocular lens:

    Subject matter under subclass 4 manufactured or adapted to replace or
    assist a substitute for a natural crystalline lens intended to be implanted
    or surgically attached to a natural eye as a permanent replacement thereof.

    (1)     Note. An optical lens structure which is disclosed as being
    designed for direct contact with the eye, usually the cornea, but is
    removable and not intended to be permanently fixed to the eye is classified
    as a contact-type lens found in Class 351, subclasses 160+ (Optics:  Eye
    Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting).


CLS 623/7
TXT BREAST PROTHESIS:

    Subject matter under the class definition manufactured or adapted to
    replace or assist a missing human mammary gland.

    (1)     Note. These devices may include means to mount or support the
    artificial breast on the body, and may include a breast-receiving cup to
    support or mold a natural breast.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    450,    Foundation Garments, subclass 38 for brassieres having inflatable
    or liquid-containing chambers designed to modify the appearance of an
    existing breast, subclasses 39+ for brassieres wherein a preshaped breast
    cup is made from a moldable material such as thermoplastic, and subclasses
    54 and 55+ for padded brassieres and brassiere pads, per se, designed to
    modify the appearance or enhance the support of an existing breast.


CLS 623/8
TXT Implantable:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 manufactured or adapted to be inserted into
    or grafted to the mammary gland.


CLS 623/9
TXT LARYNX, TRACEA, TRACEOBRONCHIAL PROSTHESIS OR COMBINATION THEREOF:

    Subject matter under the class definition manufactured or adapted to
    replace or assist either: (a) the portion of a human body respiratory tract
    containing the vocal cords, i.e., a larynx; or (b) the portion of a human
    body respiratory tract descending from the larynx to the bronchi, i.e., a
    trachea; or (c) the portion of a human body respiratory tract leading from
    the lower end of the trachea to the lung, i.e., a bronchi; or (d) any
    combination of a larynx, trachea or bronchi.

    (1)     Note. An artificial larynx is usually an electromechanical device
    which when activated, e.g., by motions of the neck in speech, simulates
    laryngeal activity thus enabling a laryngectomized person to converse.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, subclass 375 for imitation trumpets, jews' harps, and
    reed-horns of variable pitch.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclasses 137+ for horns, whistles and
    compressional wave generators.

    181,    Acoustics, pertinent subclasses for sound amplifying and
    transmitting means and methods.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclass 70
    for an electrical artificial larynx.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 188+ for a toy having means to
    emit sound simulating a voice.

    472,    Amusement Devices, particularly subclass 64 for an illusion caused
    by sound imitation or effect.


CLS 623/10
TXT EAR OR NOSE PROSTHESIS:

    Subject matter under the class definition manufactured or adapted to
    replace or assist either all or part of: (a) a hearing organ; or (b) a
    defective nostril or smell sensing organ.

    (1)     Note. A typical prosthesis for this subclass would be a stapedial
    prosthesis for an ear or a nasal septum plug for a nose.


CLS 623/11
TXT IMPLANTABLE PROSTHESIS:

    Prosthesis under the class definition manufactured or adapted to be
    inserted into or grafted to a human body.


CLS 623/12
TXT Hollow or tubular part or organ (e.g., bladder, urether bronchi, bile duct,
    etc.)

    Subject matter under subclass 11 manufactured or adapted to replace or
    assist either: (a) a natural body organ or part having an unfilled space
    cavity, or (b) having the form of an elongated cylinder, e.g., tube-like
    duct for handling body fluids.

    (1)     Note. A typical prosthesis for this subclass would be a tube or
    duct designed to convey fluids in a human body.


CLS 623/13
TXT Ligament or tendon:

    Subject matter under subclass 11 manufactured or adapted to replace or
    assist either; (a) a defective sheet or band of tissue connecting two or
    more bones, cartilage or supporting an organ, fascia or muscle, i.e., a
    ligament; or (b) a defective band of tissue connecting a muscle to a bone,
    i.e., a tendon.


CLS 623/14
TXT Muscle (e.g., sphincter, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 11 manufactured or adapted to replace or
    assist a defective tissue composed of fibers capable of contracting and
    relaxing to thereby effect bodily movement.


CLS 623/15
TXT Hair or skin:

    Subject matter under subclass 11 manufactured or adapted to replace or
    assist either: (a) a cylindrical filament which grows from the epidermis of
    a human body, i.e., a hair, or (b) a portion of the membranous tissue
    forming the external covering of a human body, i.e., skin.


CLS 623/16
TXT Bone prosthesis:

    Subject matter under subclass 11 manufactured or adapted to replace or
    assist a component of the skeleton of a human body, i.e., a bone or a
    portion thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    606,    Surgery, subclasses 86+, for means used in bone reputation,
    particularly subclass 89 for femoral head repair means.


CLS 623/17
TXT Spinal column (e.g., vertebra, spinal disc, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 16 manufactured or adapted to replace or
    assist a part of the backbone of a human body.


CLS 623/18
TXT Joint:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 wherein a bone portion to be replaced or
    assisted includes a junction between two or more bones which permits
    relative movement of the bones.


CLS 623/19
TXT Shoulder:

    Subject matter under subclass 18 manufactured or adapted to replace or
    assist a defective junction of the arm and trunk of a human body.


CLS 623/20
TXT Elbow or knee:

    Subject matter under subclass 18 manufactured or adapted to replace or
    assist either: (a) the common junction of a radius, ulna and humerus; or
    (b) the common junction of a tibia, fibia and patella.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for devices related to the leg in combination with the knee.


CLS 623/21
TXT Wrist, hand (e.g., finger, etc.), ankle or foot (e.g., toe, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 18 manufactured or adapted to replace or
    assist a defective joint in either: (a) the system of bones forming the
    junction between a hand and a forearm, i.e, a wrist; or (b) in the bones of
    the terminal part of the human arm, i.e., a hand; or (c) in the system of
    bones forming the junction between a foot and a lower leg, i.e., an ankle,
    or (d) the bones of the terminal part of a human leg.


CLS 623/22
TXT Hip:

    Subject matter under subclass 18 manufactured or adapted to replace or
    assist the junction between a pelvis and femur bone, i.e., a hip joint.


CLS 623/23
TXT Femoral head:

    Subject matter under subclass 22 manufactured or adapted to replace or
    assist the femoral portion of a hip joint, i.e.,the prosthesis being
    connectable to the femur or thigh bone.

    (1)     Note.  The combination of femoral head prosthesis and an acetabular
    cup prosthesis as well as an acetabular cup prosthesis, per se, are
    provided for in subclass 22.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    606,    Surgery, subclass 89 for femoral head repair means.


CLS 623/24
TXT HAVING ELECTRICAL ACTUATOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition provided with means which uses
    electrical energy to initiate or produce an intended effect or function of
    a prosthetic member.

    (1)     Note. This subclass provides for artificial body members having
    electrical actuators while those having fluid actuators are provided for in
    subclass 26. In addition, other types of artificial body members having
    solely mechanical actuators are provided for in lower subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for prosthesis devices having fluid actuators.

    30,     for leg prosthetic devices having mechanical actuators initiated by
    torso movement.

    40+,    for combined knee and foot prosthetic devices having mechanical
    actuators.

    50+,    for ankle prosthetic devices having mechanical actuators.

    57+,    for arm or component prosthetic devices having mechanical actuators.


CLS 623/25
TXT Bioelectrical (e.g., myoelectric, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 24 which uses electrical or electromotive
    properties of living tissue to produce electrical energy used in operating
    or regulating a prosthetic member.

    (1)     Note. Typically, a myoelectrical muscle or nerve tissue is used to
    produce an intended effect or function.


CLS 623/26
TXT HAVING FLUID ACTUATOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition provided with means which uses
    fluid energy to initiate or produce an intended effect or function of a
    prosthetic member.

    (1)     Note. This subclass provides for artificial body members having
    fluid actuators. In addition, other types of artificial body members having
    solely mechanical actuators are provided for in lower subclasses.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    30,     for leg prosthetic devices having mechanical actuators initiated by
    torso movement.

    40+,    for combined knee and foot prosthetic devices having mechanical
    actuators.

    50+,    for ankle prosthetic devices having mechanical actuators.

    57+,    for arm or component prosthetic devices having mechanical actuators.


CLS 623/27
TXT LEG:

    Subject matter under the class definition manufactured or adapted to
    replace or assist a missing or defective lower limb of a human body.


CLS 623/28
TXT Extension:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 attached to some part of a leg and
    supporting a natural foot, thereby increasing the length of a leg.

    (1)     Note. This subclass includes stilts attached to the body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    482,    Exercise Devices, particularly subclasses 75+ for other types of
    stilts not attached to a user.


CLS 623/29
TXT Foot covering or support:

    Subject matter under subclass 28  which is (a) attached only to a covering
    of the terminal part of a human leg, i.e., a foot; or (b) comprised of a
    covering modified to conform to a deformed foot; or (c) able to raise a
    foot supporting surface by addition of a foot tread.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass also includes foot prosthesis modified to
    conform to a deformed foot and inserted within the foot covering.

    (2)     Note.  The prosthesis classified here are so related to the foot
    that upon removal of the foot from the shoe the prosthesis is removed from
    the shoe with the foot.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    36,     Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclass 140 for devices accommodating
    shoes to foot deformities and remaining in the shoe upon removal of the
    shoe from the foot.


CLS 623/30
TXT Torso actuated or controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 in which a trunk of a human body is used
    to actuate or control a leg.


CLS 623/31
TXT Torso attachment:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 comprising means for attaching or
    suspending an artificial leg to or from a torso.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 300 to 342 for garment suspenders.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, subclasses 712+ for a harness for controlling or
    handling an animal, subclasses 850+ for a protective shield or apparel, and
    subclasses 856+ for a body- or appendage-encircling collar or band.


CLS 623/32
TXT Suspender or attachment from natural leg:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 manufactured or adapted for engaging a
    leg, or for attaching or suspending an artificial limb from a leg.


CLS 623/33
TXT Socket holder:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 having a holder provided with a hollow
    opening for receiving a stump of a natural leg.


CLS 623/34
TXT Suction type:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 in which the holder uses a suction force
    for holding or retaining the stump.


CLS 623/35
TXT Yieldable mounted:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 in which a socket holder has an artificial
    limb connection which is yieldably responsive to the weight of a person
    wearing the artificial limb.


CLS 623/36
TXT Cushioning means (e.g., pad or liner, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 33 for padding the stump engaging portion of
    the holder.


CLS 623/37
TXT Fluid:

    Subject matter under subclass 36 which uses a fluid as the padding medium.


CLS 623/38
TXT Adjustable shank or thigh:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 in which leg elements are expandibly or
    longitudinally adjustable, or may be secured in an adjusted position.


CLS 623/39
TXT Knee:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 manufactured or adapted to replace or
    assists the joint between an upper and a lower leg bone of a human body.


CLS 623/40
TXT Combined knee and foot actuator:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 having means to actuate both a knee
    prosthesis and a prosthesis for the terminal portion of a human leg, i.e.,
    a foot.


CLS 623/41
TXT Latch:

    Subject matter under subclass 40 provided with a locking mechanism.


CLS 623/42
TXT Spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 40 provided with an elastic device which
    regains its original shape after being compressed or expanded.


CLS 623/43
TXT Brake or latch:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 provided with either: (a) a device for
    stopping or slowing motion by frictional contact, i.e., a brake; or (b) a
    locking mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, pertinent subclasses for details of brakes of general
    utility.


CLS 623/44
TXT Weight or Position Responsive:

    Subject matter under subclass 43 which is actuated in response to either
    the weight of a wearer or a position of an artificial limb.


CLS 623/45
TXT Adjustable friction joint:

    Subject matter under subclass 43 wherein the joint is provided with
    variable friction means for controlling the action of a prosthesis.


CLS 623/46
TXT Spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 having an elastic device which regains its
    original shape after being compressed or expanded.


CLS 623/47
TXT Ankle:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 designed or adapted to replace or assist
    the system of bones forming the junction between a lower leg and a foot.


CLS 623/48
TXT Universal joint:

    Subject matter under subclass 47 having a joint or coupling allowing an
    ankle prosthesis to rotate through 360 degrees.


CLS 623/49
TXT Resilient:

    Subject matter under subclass 48 in which the joint or coupling includes
    means capable of regaining its original shape after distortion.


CLS 623/50
TXT Resiliently actuated or controlled:

    Subject matter under subclass 47 having resilient means causing or
    modifying the movement of an ankle prosthesis.


CLS 623/51
TXT Elastic cord:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 having a

    string of relatively thin rope composed of material which regains its
    original shape when stretched or pulled.


CLS 623/52
TXT Spring:

    Subject matter under subclass 50 having an elastic device which regains its
    original shape after being compressed or expanded.


CLS 623/53
TXT Foot:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 manufactured or adapted to replace or
    assist a terminal part of a lower limb of a human body.


CLS 623/54
TXT Toe:

    Subject matter under subclass 53 adapted to replace or assist a digit of a
    foot of a human body.


CLS 623/55
TXT Resilient:

    Subject matter under subclass 53 containing means which can regain its
    original shape after distortion.

    (1)     Note.  Generally, the resilient means of this subclass comprises
    felt or rubber used in or during the construction of an artificial foot.


CLS 623/56
TXT Fluid cushion:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 in which a resilient means comprises a pad
    filled with a gas or liquid.


CLS 623/57
TXT ARM OR COMPONENT (E.G., ELBOW, WRIST, HAND, FINGER, ETC.), AND ACTUATOR OR
    CONNECTOR THEREFOR:

    Subject matter under the class definition manufactured or adapted to
    replace or assist an upper limb, or part thereof, of a human body, i.e., an
    arm, a elbow, hand or finger or the connecting joints, and actuating means
    or attaching devices for any of the same.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    2,      Apparel, subclasses 158 and 159+, for mittens and gloves.

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 698.1+ for a hook shaped
    projection member of a separable-fastener having general utility.

    223,    Apparel Apparatus, subclasses 78+ for forms in the shape of a hand
    or part of a hand, such form being a device over which a garment may be
    fitted and which serves to impart a shape to the garment preventing
    wrinkling and simulating its appearance when worn, and for purposes of
    storage or display.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 86.4+ for
    miscellaneous hand and hoist line implements adapted to grasp an article.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 330+ for a figure toy having a
    mechanism to move an arm or hand: subclasses 376+ for joint features; and
    subclass 390 for other limb, hand or foot features.


CLS 623/58
TXT Torso supported and actuated:

    Subject matter under subclass 57 in which an artificial arm member is
    provided with a device attaching the member to the trunk of a human body
    and is provided with means able to actuate the member by the trunk of the
    human body.


CLS 623/59
TXT Elbow:

    Subject matter under subclass 57 manufactured or adapted to replace or
    assist a joint between an upper and forearm of a human body.


CLS 623/60
TXT With forearm actuation:

    Subject matter under subclass 59 in which an elbow prosthesis is provided
    with means to actuate movement of a forearm.


CLS 623/61
TXT Wrist:

    Subject matter under subclass 57 manufactured or adapted to replace or
    assist the system of bones between a forearm and hand of a human body.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, appropriate subclasses for holding means of the
    chuck type.


CLS 623/62
TXT With wrist actuation:

    Subject matter under subclass 61 in which a wrist prosthesis is provided
    with means to actuate movement of the wrist prosthesis.


CLS 623/63
TXT Arm or torso initiated finger actuation:

    Subject matter under subclass 57 in which an artificial digit of a human
    hand is provided with means able to actuate the digit wherein such means is
    supported by an upper limb of a human body, i.e., an arm or the trunk of a
    human body, i.e., a torso.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for members which are supported by, as well as actuated by, the
    wearer's torso.


CLS 623/64
TXT Finger actuator embodied in simulated hand:

    Subject matter under subclass 57 in which a prosthesis comprises a
    replacement or assistant for a terminal part of an upper limb of a human
    body, i.e., a hand, and further in which the hand is provided with means to
    actuate a digit of the hand.


CLS 623/65
TXT With article or article holder:

    Subject matter under subject 57 in combination with either an article or
    with means capable of holding an article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    24,     Buckles, Buttons, Clasps, etc., subclasses 455+ for clasps of more
    general utility.

    279,    Chucks or Sockets, appropriate subclasses for article gripping
    means of the chuck type.


CLS 623/66
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition not classified in the above
    subclasses.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS

    THE DOCUMENTS IN THE FOLLOWING COLLECTIONS CONTAIN ONLY CROSS-REFERENCES
    WHICH HAVE BEEN PLACED WITHOUT REGARD TO THEIR ORIGINAL CLASSIFICATION OR
    TO THEIR CLAIMED SUBJECT MATTER AND ARE THEREFORE NOT EXHAUSTIVE OF THE ART
    OR SUBJECT MATTER BUT ARE ONLY EXAMPLES THEREOF. CONSEQUENTLY, A COMPLETE
    SEARCH FOR ART OR SUBJECT MATTER PROVIDED FOR HERE WOULD REQUIRE A REVIEW
    OF THE HIGHER PORTIONS OF THE CLASSIFICATION SCHEDULE.


CLS 623/900
TXT STENT FOR HEART VALVE:

    Cross-reference art collection of documents relating to a stent or support
    for a heart valve.


CLS 623/901
TXT METHOD OF MANUFACTURING PROSTHET DEVICE:

    Cross-reference collection of documents relating to a process for making an
    artifical body member.


CLS 701/
TTL DATA PROCESSING: VEHICLES, NAVIGATION, AND RELATIVE LOCATION

CLS 701/
TXT I.      GLOSSARY:

    The terms below have been defined for purposes of classification in this
    class and are shown in underlined type when used in the class and subclass
    definitions. When these terms are not underlined in the definitions, the
    meaning is not restricted to the glossary definitions below.

    ANTILOCK OR ANTISKID

    A process of controlling a vehicle to enhance the braking performance
    during deceleration of the vehicle by manipulating the brake pressure.

    ANTISPIN

    A process of controlling a vehicle to enhance the driveability of the
    vehicle during starting or acceleration of the vehicle by manipulating at
    least one of (1) brake pressure, (2) engine torque, and (3) transmission
    torque.

    ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE (AI)

    Computer emulation of aspects of human intelligence such as speech
    recognition, deduction, inference, creative response, the ability to learn
    from past experience, and the ability to make reasonable inferences from
    incomplete information.  Examples of AI include expert systems, neural
    networks, and fuzzy logic.

    ATTITUDE

    Orientation of a vehicle with respect to a reference plane.  An example in
    an automobile would be orientation of the vehicle body relative to the road
    surface whereas in aeronautics it may define the orientation of the
    aircraft relative to the earth.

    BRAKE-SLIP

    The slippage of a wheel caused by the braking operation during deceleration
    of the vehicle.

    CALCULATING OPERATIONS

    Arithmetic and/or some limited logic operations performed upon or with
    signals representing numbers or values.

    DATA PROCESSING

    For the purpose of this class, data processing is defined as a systematic
    operation on data in accordance with a set of rules which results in a
    significant change in the data.

    DRIVE SLIP

    The slippage of a wheel caused by the driving condition during acceleration
    of the vehicle.

    FUZZY LOGIC

    A form of AI in which variables can have degrees of truthfulness or
    falsehood represented by a range of values between 1 (true) and 0 (false).
    The outcome of an operation using fuzzy logic can be expressed as a
    probability rather than as a certainty (e.g., inexact reasoning).

    NAVIGATION

    The determination of a course, position, or distance traveled.

    SLIP

    Loss of adhesion or friction between an object and a surface.  An example
    in a vehicle would be the reduction of friction between a wheel and a road
    surface (e.g., wheel slippage).

    VEHICLE

    Any means in or by which someone or something is carried or conveyed.  This
    term includes, but is not limited to, automobiles, aircraft, spacecraft,
    blimps, trains, motorcycles, bicycles, watercraft, and submarines.

    II.     GENERAL STATEMENT OF THE CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    This class provides for electrical computers, digital data processing
    systems, and data processing processes for transferring data between a
    plurality of computers or processes wherein the computers or processes
    employ the data before or after transferring and the employing affects the
    transfer of data therebetween.   More specifically, this class provides for
    the following subject matter:

    A.      This class is for electrical apparatus and corresponding methods
    for performing data processing operations in which there is a significant
    change in the data or for performing calculation operations wherein the
    electrical data processing system or calculating computer functions to
    indicate a condition of a vehicle, to regulate the movement of a vehicle,
    to monitor the operation of a vehicle, or to solve a diagnostic problem
    with the vehicle.

    B.      This class also provides electrical apparatus and corresponding
    methods wherein the electrical data processing system or calculating
    computer function to determine the course, position, or distance traveled.

    C.      This class further provides electrical apparatus and corresponding
    methods wherein the electrical data processing system or calculating
    computer functions to determine the relative location of an object (e.g.,
    person or vehicle) and may include communication of the determined relative
    location to a remote location.

    III.    THIS CLASS IS STRUCTURED INTO THREE DIVISIONS:

    A.      Vehicle control, guidance, operation or indication; subclasses 1
    through 124.

    B.      Navigation; subclasses 200 through 226.

    C.      Relative location; subclasses 300 through 302.

    IV.     SCOPE OF THE CLASS:

    A.      Vehicle Control, Guidance, Operation, or Indication

    1.      This class includes subject matter directed to significant data
    processing or calculation in determining the control, monitoring, guidance,
    and condition for one or more of the components or subsystems associated
    with a vehicle.

    2.      This class does not include subject matter wherein significant
    details of the mechanical construction of the component or subsystem within
    a vehicle are disclosed and claimed.  Examples of subject matter not
    included are detailed mechanical structure of a transmission, internal
    combustion engine, power steering, suspension, and braking systems, each in
    conjunction with a nominally recited computer implemented function.  See
    Search Class notes below for appropriate class.

    3.      This class also does not include subject matter wherein the data
    processing or calculation is employed solely for the purpose of
    manipulating or controlling robotic arm movement.  See Search Class notes
    below for Class 395.

    B.      Navigation

    1.      This class is limited to significant data processing or calculating
    operation to provide navigation information to either a vehicle or an
    operator.

    2.      This class does not include subject matter wherein significant
    details of the display device and/or technique in displaying the determined
    navigation information are disclosed and claimed.  See Search Class notes
    below for Class 340.

    C.      Relative Location

    1.      This class includes subject matter directed to significant data
    processing or calculation for determining the relative location of an
    object and may include communicating the determined relative location to a
    remote location for further processing and/or use.

    2.      This class does not include subject matter wherein significant
    details of the communication device and/or the technique of communicating
    are disclosed and claimed.  See Search Class notes below for Classes 340
    and 375.

    V.      SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, appropriate subclasses, especially
    subclasses 232 for aircraft or marine ground speed indicator, 268+ for
    celestial navigational instruments, 316+ for a magnetic field sensitive
    device (compass, flux valve) utilized to monitor a directional gyroscope by
    orienting the gyroscope in the direction of the magnetic meridian, and 318+
    for a gyroscope utilized to (a) indicate direction or (b) maintain the
    equilibrium of a directional indicator or datum structure with respect to a
    reference plane (plurality of coordinates).

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclass for a process or
    apparatus for making a measurement of any kind or for making a test of any
    kind especially subclasses 11.04+ for the testing of a shock absorber
    device, 116+ for motor or engine testing, 121+ for brake testing excluding
    data processing techniques, and 178+ for navigational instruments.

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 473+ for a system to
    manually control a transmission.

    91,     Motors: Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 473 for condition
    responsive control of a drive transmission.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 12.1+ for displacement
    control of plural cylinders arranged in parallel, radial, or conical
    relationship with a rotary transmission axis.

    104,    Railways, appropriate subclass for railway rolling stock and track
    especially subclass 284 for sensing or controlling railway position or
    attitude with respect to a guide way.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, appropriate subclass for wheeled
    transportation equipment for a railway especially subclasses 4.4 for train
    having a wheel steering provision and 453 for body suspension and springs.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 31 for a vehicle steering wheel
    position indicator.

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engine, subclasses 319+ for engine speed
    regulators responsive to vehicle acceleration or deceleration, 350+ for
    electrical sensing or regulating of engine speed, 395+ for an engine speed
    regulator responsive to (a) an engine parameter, or (b) an environmental
    condition to alter the present engine speed without regard to the resulting
    engine speed, 415+ for electronic spark ignition timing control, 418+ for
    speed responsive engine control, 422, 423, 492, and 493 for
    acceleration/deceleration condition responsive means, 424 and 491 for the
    starting or cold running condition of an engine, 429 for a combustion
    chamber means combined with air-fuel mixture forming means, 438+ for a
    charge forming device which includes an electronic control system for
    carburetor fuel metering, 478+ for a fuel injection system having an
    actuator circuit (e.g., engine condition responsive electronic circuit
    actuates injector valve), 479 for backup and fail-safe systems,  480 for
    fuel injection which includes a microprocessor, 486 for digital memory
    addressed by an engine parameter, 531+ for a charge forming device using
    auxiliary air or gas to inject fuel, 571 for the electrical control of an
    e.g.r. valve for a charge forming device, 575+ for a means of forming a
    mixture of a diverse supply of fuel and an oxidant, 585+ for a charge
    forming device having auxiliary air or oxygen added to combustible mixture,
    672+ for exhaust gas sensing, and 690 for a charge forming device with
    fail-safe, backup, or malfunction means including an exhaust gas condition
    responsive means.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, appropriate subclasses for control devices in
    combination with vehicle structure especially subclasses 6.2+ for steering
    by driving systems, 65.1+ for electric vehicles, per se, 167+ for a motor
    vehicle with a means for controlling an operation responsive to
    electromagnetic radiation, magnetic force, or sound waves received from a
    source, or reflected from an object or surface, located apart from vehicle,
    170+ for speed responsive means combined with vehicular structure, 197 for
    antispin, traction control, and antiskid/antilock systems combined with
    vehicular structure, 234+ for steering of four wheel drive vehicles, 271+
    for a vehicle with means for promoting safety of vehicle, its occupant, or
    load, or an external object, steering;315 for manually controlling the
    motor or driving mechanism with transmission control, 337+ for a vehicle
    drive train or transmission, 408 for a vehicle having each wheel steerable,
    421+ for condition modulated, and 443 for electric power assist steering.

    187,    Elevators, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for vehicle,
    subclasses 231 for industrial lift truck steering by a walking attendant
    and 343+ for cushioning contact of load support.

    188,    Brakes, appropriate subclasses for brake control which includes
    specific structure to the brakes especially subclass 350 for brakes in
    combination with a steering gear control.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 3.51+ for transmission
    control and clutch control, 4+ for control of transmission and brake, and
    137 for a safety device in which the power-transmitting connections are
    disabled in response to the transmission guard striking an extraneous
    object.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 3.1+ for missile control, 3.18 for
    celestial navigation, 17.17, 50, and 51 for aircraft steering, 75+ for
    aircraft control, and 158+ for spacecraft control.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclasses 182+ for the automatic
    actuation of signals and changeable exhibitors upon the cab or train or for
    stopping it or controlling its speed, usually by cooperation with means not
    on the train, but not disclosing a complete block system having
    speed-control means which is inoperative below but operative above
    predetermined speeds when predetermined points are reached.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 203.1+ for a means for illuminating a
    photocell in accordance with the relative position of the photoelectric
    cell and an object, and having means for causing the photoelectric cell to
    follow the object under the control of said illumination.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 2+ for vehicle spring suspension devices.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 47.22 for a hand-propelled tiltable
    vehicle stabilized by the occupant and having a spring suspension, 402 for
    a single end suspension of a transported vehicle, 660+ for an occupant
    steered vehicle with a suspension means, 678 and 683 for a land vehicle
    having a fluid-type suspension, 679 and 684 for a land vehicle having a
    torsion-type suspension, 680 and 686 for a land vehicle having a leaf-type
    suspension, 681 and 687 for a land vehicle having a rubber-type suspension,
    685 for a land vehicle having a coil-type suspension, 688+ for a land
    vehicle provided with a spring or spring system between the wheels and load
    carrier or vehicle frame, 734+ for an inflatable passenger restraint or
    confinement (e.g., air bag) or attachment responsive to a vehicle
    condition, 757+ for an attachment relating to antiskid or antislide, 787
    for a land vehicle frame having a spring suspension means, and 788 for a
    land vehicle frame having a resilient means for suspension.

    303,    Fluid-pressure Brake and Analogous Systems, subclasses 22.6+ for
    railway vehicle load control, 122+ for speed-controlled vehicle with
    failure responsive means, 139+ for traction control which includes
    structure related to fluid-pressure brakes, 141 for speed and traction
    control by regulating the engine torque, 146+ for yaw control which
    includes structure related to fluid-pressure brakes, 149 for speed control
    with a split coefficient of friction, 163 for speed control using a slip
    ratio as related to fluid-pressure brakes, and 167 for vehicle speed
    control by regulating brake pressure not having a positive recitation of
    data processing steps.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnecting Systems, subclasses 9.1+
    for vehicle mounted systems (e.g., safety devices).

    318,    Electricity: Motive Power Systems, subclasses 580+ for vehicular
    guidance systems with single axis control using a positional servo system,
    582 for vehicular guidance systems with celestial navigation, 588+ for
    marine vehicular guidance systems with single axis control.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 436+ for a system designed
    to indicate contact between the vehicle and an external object subclasses,
    438+ for monitoring or solving diagnostic problems associated with vehicle
    operation, 451+ for means responsive to vehicular brake conditions and
    indication thereof which exclude data processing techniques, 465 for
    indicator of steering or turning, 507 for a fail-safe responsive indicating
    system, 903 for a vehicle collision alert system, 907+ for electrical
    signaling in a vehicle or traffic environment, 933+ for vehicles which are
    controlled by traffic conditions, 945+ for a flight condition indicating
    system excluding data processing technique, 984+ for nautical vehicles, 951
    for airport landing guidance systems which do not include data processing
    techniques, 988+ for vehicle position indication, and 990 and 995 for
    vehicle position indication with a map display.

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclasses 1+ for radar navigation systems, 42+ for radar transmitter and
    receiver system, 71 for return control signal for braking or steering, 72
    for safety device, 357 for sending or receiving radio wave energy which is
    characterized by some quality that varies according to the relative
    direction or position of a satellite used to locate the position of an
    object, 385+ for radio wave energy for direction finding receivers, and
    450+ for an apparatus for determining the position in space of an object,
    vehicle or atmospheric condition by the reception of signals not having
    distinctive bearing or position determinative characteristics.

    348,    Television, subclasses 113+ for a picture signal generator or
    reproducer is used with a steerable vehicle to permit control of the
    vehicle from a remote location or to provide an indication in the vehicle
    of its position as an aid in the guidance of the vehicle.

    353,    Optics: Image Projectors, subclasses 11+ for a projector especially
    adapted to project an image of a map or navigation chart, an image of a
    target onto a map or chart, or a target which represents a vehicle such as
    an aircraft onto a screen.

    356,    Optics: Measuring and Testing, subclasses 3+ for optical range
    finders and 27+ for velocity or height measuring.

    361,    Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 238 for
    electrical speed signal circuitry used for antispin and antilock/antiskid
    detection and which does not include significant data processing.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclass for
    particular memory device.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclasses
    48+ for general testing of programming digital data systems.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 219+ for transceivers,
    237+ for modulation techniques, 295+ for transmitters, and 316+ for
    receivers.

    382,    Image Analysis, appropriate subclass for an apparatus or
    corresponding method for the automated analysis of an image or recognition
    of a pattern, especially subclass 104 for vehicle or traffic control.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 1+ for a
    system or method capable of performing one or more of the functions of
    recognition, speech signal processing, knowledge processing (e.g.,
    propositional logic, reasoning, learning, self-improvement), complex
    operations of a manipulator (e.g., robot control), or inexact reasoning
    (e.g., fuzzy logic) and artificial intelligence with details of the
    artificial intelligence system, 3 for fuzzy logic hardware, 10+ for a
    knowledge processing system, 50+ for an expert system, 80+ for robotic arm
    control, cross reference art collections 900 relating to fuzzy logic, 902+
    for applications of artificial intelligence with details of the artificial
    intelligence system, 905 and 913 wherein artificial intelligence is used in
    applications related to vehicle control and diagnostics respectively.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses  1 for training in the use
    of radar or sonar detecting or range finding, 30+ for aircraft training per
    se, and 111, 186, and 239+ relating to training or instructions in the area
    of navigation.

    440,    Marine Propulsion, subclasses 53 for a means effecting or
    facilitating movement of propulsion unit or a segment of the propulsion
    unit (e.g., tilting or steering) and 84+ for engine, motor, or transmission
    control means.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices, appropriate subclass for
    structure or an attachment peculiar to a mooring buoy, marker buoy,
    container buoy, or other buoy; structure or an attachment peculiar to a
    raft, to rafting, and guiding of floating logs; water rescue apparatus or
    other aquatic devices.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclass 43 for
    a transmission with speed or torque responsive clutch.

    477,    Interrelated Power Delivery Controls Including Engine Control,
    subclasses 5 and 6 for plural engines having clutch control, 8 for an
    electric engine with clutch control, 15+ for an electric engine with
    transmission control, 31 for continuously variable transmission with a gas
    turbine engine, 34+ wherein the operation of an engine regulates or is
    regulated by the operation of a transmission, 39 for a continuously
    variable friction transmission with clutch control, 57, 62, and 70+ for
    transmission control and clutch control, 166+ for clutch control, per se,
    and 182+ for engine brake control responsive to engine speed.


CLS 701/1
TXT VEHICLE CONTROL, GUIDANCE, OPERATION, OR INDICATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the electrical data
    processing system or calculating computer functions to indicate a condition
    or position of a vehicle, to regulate the movement of a vehicle, to monitor
    the operation of a vehicle, or to solve a diagnostic problem with the
    vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   for navigational systems, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, for control devices in combination with vehicle
    structure.

    318,    Electricity: Motive Power Systems, subclasses 580+, for vehicular
    guidance systems with single axis control.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 22+ for electrical signaling
    in a vehicle or traffic environment, 438+ for monitoring or solving
    diagnostic problems associated with vehicle operation.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 805 for
    an analog computer designed to simulate vehicle or traffic conditions.


CLS 701/2
TXT Remote control system:

    Vehicle control, guidance, operation, or indication under subclass 1
    wherein regulation of the vehicle is based on a signal transmitted from a
    location not physically connected to, but received by, the system or
    computer.


CLS 701/3
TXT Aeronautical vehicle:

    Vehicle control, guidance, operation, or indication under subclass 1
    wherein the electrical data processing system or calculating computer is
    designed to control, guide, or operate an airborne or space vehicle (e.g.,
    helicopter, airplane, spacecraft, blimp, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 3.1+ for missile control, subclasses 158+
    for spacecraft control, and subclasses 75+ for aircraft control.


CLS 701/4
TXT Altitude or attitude control or indication:

    Aeronautical vehicle control or indication under subclass 3 wherein the
    data processing system or calculating computer functions to control or
    maintain the orientation of an airborne or space vehicle with respect to a
    reference plane.


CLS 701/5
TXT Rate of change (e.g., ascent, descent):

    Altitude or attitude control or indication under subclass 4 wherein the
    data processing system or calculating computer is designed to control or
    indicate change in the orientation of an aeronautical vehicle as a function
    of time.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    16+,    for the control or indication of a vehicle or its function as it
    performs the act of landing (e.g., engaging the ground).


CLS 701/6
TXT Angle of attack:

    Rate of change control or indication under subclass 5 wherein the data
    processing system or calculating computer is designed to control or
    indicate a specified angular relationship defined as the acute angle
    between the chord of an airfoil and the line of relative air flow or
    horizontal.


CLS 701/7
TXT Air speed or velocity measurement:

    Altitude or attitude control or indication under subclass 4 further
    comprising a means to determine vehicle airspeed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclass for a process or
    apparatus for making a measurement of any kind or for making a test of any
    kind.


CLS 701/8
TXT Threshold or reference value:

    Altitude or attitude control or indication under subclass 4 further
    comprising a predetermined or operator determined altitude or attitude
    setting.


CLS 701/9
TXT Warning signal or alarm:

    Altitude or attitude control or indication under subclass 8 further
    comprising a means to alert the aeronautical vehicle operator of a
    condition relative to the predetermined or operator determined altitude or
    attitude setting.


CLS 701/10
TXT Compensation for environmental conditions:

    Altitude or attitude control or indication under subclass 4 further
    comprising meteorological correction means.


CLS 701/11
TXT Auto pilot:

    Altitude or attitude control or indication under subclass 4 further
    comprising an automatic flight control system.


CLS 701/12
TXT Inner/outer loop:

    Automatic flight control system under subclass 11 further comprising a
    stability control loop (i.e., inner loop) which controls the attitude, or
    altitude of the aeronautical vehicle, with respect to attitude or altitude
    reference signals provided by a full pilot authority control loop (i.e.,
    outer loop).


CLS 701/13
TXT Spacecraft or satellite:

    Altitude or attitude control or indication under subclass 4 specific to an
    aeronautical vehicle adapted to be placed in an orbit or which
    substantially operates outside the earth's atmosphere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    226,    for the navigation of a vehicle within a space orbit or path,


CLS 701/14
TXT Flight condition indicating system:

    Aeronautical vehicle under subclass 3 wherein a condition significantly
    affecting aircraft flight is indicated.

    (1)     Note. Included here are such conditions as wind shear, air speed,
    etc.


    (2)     Note. Excluded here is altitude indication.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    4+,     for altitude indication of an aircraft.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communication: Electrical, subclasses 945+ for a flight condition
    indicating system excluding data processing technique.


CLS 701/15
TXT With indication or control of take-off:

    Vehicle control, guidance, operation, or indication under subclass 3
    wherein the data processing system or calculating computer controls,
    indicates, or monitors the vehicle or its functions as it performs the
    intended act of disengaging from the ground.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 178 for takeoff and landing
    monitors.


CLS 701/16
TXT With indication or control of landing:

    Vehicle control, guidance, operation, or indication under subclass 3
    wherein the data processing system or calculating computer controls,
    indicates, or monitors the vehicle or its functions as it performs the
    intended act of engaging the ground.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for the indication or control of the altitude or attitude rate of
    change for an aeronautical vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 178 for takeoff and landing
    monitors

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 933+ for vehicles which are
    controlled by traffic conditions.


CLS 701/17
TXT I.L.S. or radar guidance:

    Indication or control of landing under subclass 16 wherein an instrument
    landing system or radio detecting and ranging equipment are employed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    343,    Communications: Radio Wave Antennas, subclasses 5+ for radar
    transmitter and receiver.


CLS 701/18
TXT Profile of descent:

    Indication or control of landing under subclass 16 wherein the
    characteristic of the vehicle's ground approach, such as a glide slope, is
    employed.


CLS 701/19
TXT Railway vehicle:

    Vehicle control, guidance, operation, or indication under subclass 1
    wherein the electrical data processing system or calculating computer is
    designed to control, guide, or operate a vehicle, or its components,
    confined to a predetermined path defined by a track or rail.

    (1)     Note. This subclass does not include art wherein the railway speed
    or velocity is controlled.  See search note below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 287, 338, 532.1, and 651 for
    indication means.

    104,    Railways, appropriate subclass for railway rolling stock and track.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, appropriate subclass for wheeled
    transportation equipment for a railway.

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, subclasses 182+ for railway vehicle
    speed control systems.

    295,    Fluid-pressure Brake and Analogous Systems, subclasses 22.6+ for
    railway vehicle load control.


CLS 701/20
TXT Railway vehicle speed control:

    Railway vehicle under subclass 19 wherein the electrical data processing
    system or calculating computer functions to regulate the velocity of a
    vehicle confined to a track or rail.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    246,    Railway Switches and Signals, especially subclass 182 for train
    speed control means which are actuated by agencies not on the train or by
    wheel derailment or defects in train structure and mechanism.


CLS 701/21
TXT Marine vehicle:

    Vehicle control, guidance, operation, or indication under subclass 1
    wherein the electrical data processing system or calculating computer is
    designed to control, guide, or operate a vehicle designed for water traffic.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 232 for a marine speed
    indicator.

    318,    Electricity: Motive Power Systems, subclass 588, for marine
    vehicular guidance systems with single axis control.

    440,    Marine Propulsion, especially subclass 84 for engine, motor, or
    transmission control means.

    441,    Buoys, Rafts, and Aquatic Devices appropriate subclass for
    structure or an attachment peculiar to a mooring buoy, marker buoy,
    container buoy, or other buoy; structure or an attachment peculiar to a
    raft, to rafting, and guiding of floating logs; water rescue apparatus or
    other aquatic devices.


CLS 701/22
TXT Electric vehicle:

    Vehicle control, guidance, operation, or indication under subclass 1
    wherein the electrical data processing system or calculating computer is
    designed to control, guide, or operate a vehicle wherein the prime mover is
    powered by an electrical current.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 65.1+ for electric vehicles, per se.

    318,    Electricity: Motive Power Systems, subclasses 139+ for a motor
    generator used in an electric vehicle.


CLS 701/23
TXT Automatic route guidance vehicle:

    Vehicle control, guidance, operation, or indication under subclass 1
    wherein the electrical data processing system or calculating computer is
    designed to control, guide, or operate an autonomous or unmanned vehicle
    (e.g., AGV).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   for a navigational system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 167+ for a motor vehicle with a means
    for controlling an operation responsive to electromagnetic radiation,
    magnetic force, or sound waves received from a source, or reflected from an
    object or surface, located apart from vehicle.

    318,    Electricity: Motive Power Systems, subclasses 580+ for a vehicular
    guidance systems with single axis control using a positional servo system.

    348,    Television, subclasses 113+ for a picture signal generator or
    reproducer used with a steerable vehicle to permit control of the vehicle
    from a remote location or to provide an indication in the vehicle of its
    position as an aid in the guidance of the vehicle.


CLS 701/24
TXT On-board computer interact with a host computer:

    Automatic route guidance vehicle under subclass 23 having two processing
    units, one of which is the primary controller communicating with a second
    controller physically mounted to the vehicle.


CLS 701/25
TXT Storage or planning of route information:

    Automatic route guidance vehicle under subclass 23 wherein the electrical
    data processing system or calculating computer is also capable of retaining
    in a memory device a path of travel or developing a path of travel.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202,    for a static means to determine a travel course prior to the
    departure of the vehicle.


CLS 701/26
TXT Modification or correction of route information:

    Planned or stored route information under subclass 25 wherein the
    electrical data processing system or calculating computer is further
    capable of manipulating data associated with a traveled path to alter the
    vehicle's route.


CLS 701/27
TXT Artificial intelligence (e.g., fuzzy logic):

    Automatic route guidance vehicle under subclass 23 wherein the electrical
    data processing system or calculating computer is designed to control,
    guide, or operate the vehicle by the logical manipulation of a value of a
    predetermined function of antecedent and consequent operations
    corresponding to the coordinate location of the vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, Cross Reference Art
    Collections 902+, for applications of artificial intelligence, and in
    particular cross reference art collection 905 wherein artificial
    intelligence is used in applications related to vehicles.


CLS 701/28
TXT Having image processing:

    Automatic route guidance vehicle under subclass 23 wherein the electrical
    data processing system or calculating computer is designed to control,
    guide, or operate the vehicle by information received as an optical signal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 113+ for a picture signal generator or
    reproducer used with a steerable vehicle to permit control of the vehicle
    from a remote location or to provide an indication in the vehicle of its
    position as an aid in the guidance of the vehicle.

    382,    Image Analysis, appropriate subclass for an apparatus or
    corresponding method for the automated analysis of an image or recognition
    of a pattern.


CLS 701/29
TXT Vehicle diagnosis or maintenance indication:

    Vehicle control, guidance, operation, or indication under subclass 1
    wherein the electrical data processing system or calculating computer is
    designed to evaluate, monitor, or indicate the performance, operating
    condition, or servicing need of a vehicle.


CLS 701/30
TXT Indication of maintenance interval:

    Vehicle diagnosis or maintenance indication under subclass 29 wherein the
    electrical data processing system or calculating computer determines and
    communicates to an interested party, a need for vehicle servicing based on
    a constraint parameter (e.g., time, operating condition or vehicle millage).


CLS 701/31
TXT Self-test:

    Vehicle diagnosis or maintenance indication under subclass 29 wherein the
    electrical data processing system or calculating computer functions to
    check the diagnostic equipment or elements within said system, absent any
    external device.


CLS 701/32
TXT Vehicle or device ID:

    Vehicle diagnosis or maintenance indication under subclass 29 wherein the
    electrical data processing system or calculating computer generates a
    signal identifying the vehicle (i.e., make, model, year of manufacture,
    etc.) or vehicular component to be diagnosed.


CLS 701/33
TXT Plural processors or external processor:

    Vehicle diagnosis or maintenance indication under subclass 29 wherein the
    diagnosis or indication process is facilitated by multiple processors or a
    remote processor.


CLS 701/34
TXT Detection of faulty sensor:

    Vehicle diagnosis or maintenance indication under subclass 29 wherein the
    electrical data processing system or calculating computer functions to
    identify a malfunction of a vehicle sensor.


CLS 701/35
TXT With data recording device:

    Subject matter under subclass 29 in which the sensed vehicular condition
    parameter or diagnostic result is stored in a recording medium.


CLS 701/36
TXT Vehicle subsystem or accessory control:

    Vehicle control, guidance, operation, or indication under subclass 1
    wherein the electrical data processing system or calculating computer is
    designed to control, guide, or operate a secondary vehicle structure.

    (1)     Note. This subclass is inclusive of such systems as air
    conditioning, power steering, seat adjustment, and suspension.


CLS 701/37
TXT Suspension control:

    Vehicle subsystem or accessory control under subclass 36 wherein the
    electrical data processing system or calculating computer is designed to
    control the resilient mechanism, used primarily for ride stability, located
    between the ground engaging means and the vehicle frame.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 11.04+ for testing of shock
    absorber device.

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 453 for body suspension and springs.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, appropriate subclass, especially subclasses 337+
    for a vehicle suspension system in combination with a drive train or
    transmission.

    187,    Elevators, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for Vehicle,
    subclasses 187+ for cushioning contact of load support.

    267,    Spring Devices, subclasses 2+ for vehicle spring suspension devices.

    280,    Land Vehicles, appropriate subclass, in particular subclasses 47.22
    for a hand-propelled tiltable vehicle stabilized by the occupant and having
    a spring suspension, 402 for a single end suspension of a transported
    vehicle, 660+ for an occupant steered vehicle with a suspension means, 678
    and 683 for a land vehicle having a fluid-type suspension, 679 and 684 for
    a land vehicle having a torsion-type suspension, 680 and 686 for a land
    vehicle having a leaf-type suspension, 681 and 687 for a land vehicle
    having a rubber-type suspension, 685 for a land vehicle having a coil-type
    suspension, 688 for a land vehicle having a suspension means, 707 for
    electric control means, 787 for a land vehicle frame having a spring
    suspension means, and 788 for a land vehicle frame having a resilient means
    for suspension.


CLS 701/38
TXT Attitude change suppressive control (e.g., antiroll or antipitch):

    Suspension control under subclass 37 the electrical data processing system
    or calculating computer is designed to control a vehicle with respect to
    movement about a lateral axis or movement with respect to a lateral axis.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    104,    Railways, subclass 284 for sensing or controlling of railway
    position or attitude with respect to a guide way.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 688+ for a vehicle provided with a spring
    or spring system between the wheels and load carrier or vehicle frame.


CLS 701/39
TXT Fail-safe system:

    Suspension control under subclass 37 wherein the electrical data processing
    system or calculating computer is designed to detect an abnormality in
    operating conditions and carry out the appropriate sequence of instructions
    to stabilize the system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 737, for
    an electric digital calculating computer having the specialized function of
    error detection or correction.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclass
    14 for apparatus fault recovery and fail-safe shutdown.


CLS 701/40
TXT Artificial intelligence (e.g., fuzzy logic):

    Suspension control under subclass 37 wherein the electrical data processing
    system or calculating computer is designed to control, guide, or operate
    the vehicle by the manipulation of a value of a predetermined function of
    antecedent and consequent operations corresponding to the state of the
    suspension system.


CLS 701/41
TXT Steering control:

    Vehicle subsystem or accessory control under subclass 36 wherein the
    electrical data processing system or calculating computer is designed to
    control or monitor either (a) a direction of travel, b) the yaw of a
    vehicle, or (c) a force applied to or exerted by a vehicle navigational
    system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    105,    Railway Rolling Stock, subclass 4.4 for train having a wheel
    steering provision.

    114,    Ships, subclasses 144+ for ship steering mechanisms.

    116,    Signals and Indicators, subclass 31 for a vehicle steering wheel
    position indicator.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, appropriate subclass, especially subclasses 6.2+
    for steering by driving systems and 234+ for steering of four wheel drive
    vehicles, 408+ for a vehicle having each wheel steerable, 410 for condition
    modulated steering, and 443+ for electric power assist steering.

    187,    Elevators, Industrial Lift Truck, or Stationary Lift for vehicle,
    subclass 231 for industrial lift truck steering by a walking attendant.

    188,    Brakes, subclass 350 for brakes in combination with a steering gear
    control.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 17.17, 50, and 51 for aircraft steering.

    280,    Land Vehicles, appropriate subclass for steering a vehicle.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 465 for indicator of steering
    or turning.

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    radar, radio navigator), appropriate subclass especially subclass 71 for
    return control signal for steering.

    440,    Marine Propulsion, subclass 53 for a means effecting or
    facilitating movement of propulsion unit or a segment of the propulsion
    unit (e.g., tilting or steering).


CLS 701/42
TXT Feedback, transfer function or proportional and derivative (P&D) control:

    Steering control under subclass 41 wherein the electrical data processing
    system or calculating computer utilizes a response signal corresponding to
    the status of the steering system, to regulate or monitor the steering
    operation or where the system shifts from proportional control to a
    combination of proportional and derivative control.


CLS 701/43
TXT Fail-safe system:

    Steering control under subclass 41 wherein the electrical data processing
    system or calculating computer is designed to detect an abnormality in
    operating conditions and carry out the appropriate sequence of instructions
    to stabilize the steering system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communication: Electrical, subclass 507 for a fail-safe responsive
    indicating system.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 737 for
    an electric digital calculating computer having the specialized function of
    error detection or correction.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclass
    14 for a fail-safe fault recovery apparatus.


CLS 701/44
TXT Artificial intelligence (e.g., fuzzy logic):

    Steering control under subclass 41 wherein the electrical data processing
    system or calculating computer is designed to control, guide, or operate
    the vehicle by the manipulation of a value of a predetermined function of
    antecedent and consequent operations corresponding to the state of the
    steering system or by inexact reasoning implemented using set membership
    functions.


CLS 701/45
TXT Control of vehicle safety devices (e.g., airbag, seat-belt, etc.):

    Vehicle subsystem or accessory under subclass 36 wherein the electrical
    data processing system or calculating computer is designed to control or
    monitor a system dedicated for the protection or security of a vehicle, its
    passengers, or cargo.

    (1)     Note. This subclass includes art related to the control of air
    bags, seat belts, restraint systems, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 271+ for a with means for promoting
    safety of vehicle, its occupant, or load, or an external object.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 734+ for an inflatable passenger
    restraint or confinement (e.g., air bag) or attachment responsive to a
    vehicle condition.

    340,    Communication: Electrical, subclasses 436+ for a system designed to
    indicate contact between the vehicle and an external object and 903 for a
    vehicle collision alert system.


CLS 701/46
TXT By integrating the amplitude of the input signal:

    Vehicle safety device control under subclass 45 further comprising
    activation of the safety device responsive to an input integrated signal
    exceeding a predetermined system condition threshold value.


CLS 701/47
TXT By frequency or waveform analysis:

    Vehicle safety device control under subclass 45 further comprising
    activation of the safety device responsive to a vibratory electric signal,
    having various frequency components, indicating an unsafe vehicle condition.


CLS 701/48
TXT Cooperative or multiple control (e.g., suspension and braking):

    Vehicle subsystem or accessory under subclass 36 wherein the electrical
    data processing system or calculating computer is designed to control or
    monitor more than one subsystem or accessory, each being in direct or
    indirect communication with the other.


CLS 701/49
TXT Vehicle equipment position control (e.g., seat, mirror, door, window,
    headrest or headlamp):

    Vehicle subsystem or accessory under subclass 36 wherein the electrical
    data processing system or calculating computer is designed to control or
    monitor the location, orientation, or movement of an apparatus.


CLS 701/50
TXT Construction or agricultural vehicle type (e.g., crane, forklift):


    Subject matter under subclass 1 providing control of a vehicle used in
    construction or farming and particularly the control of a special purpose
    implement associated with such a vehicle.

    (1)     Note. This subclass includes control of the boom of a crane, the
    fork of a forklift, etc.


CLS 701/51
TXT Transmission control:

    Vehicle control, guidance, operation, or indication under subclass 1
    wherein the electrical data processing system or calculating computer
    functions to regulate or monitor the operation of the transmission.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87,     for control of transmission torque to regulate the antispin
    behavior of a vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 473+ for a system to
    manually control a transmission.

    91,     Motors: Expansible Chamber Type, subclass 473 for condition
    responsive control of drive transmission.

    92,     Expansible Chamber Devices, subclasses 12.1+ for displacement
    control of plural cylinders arranged in parallel, radial, or conical
    relationship with rotary transmission axis.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 336 for manually controlling the motor
    or driving mechanism with transmission control and 337+ for a transmission
    mechanism.

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 3.51+ for transmission
    control and clutch control and 4+ for control of transmission and brake.

    440,    Marine Propulsion, subclasses 84+ for an engine, motor, or
    transmission control means.

    477,    Interrelated Power Delivery Controls Including Engine Control,
    subclasses 15+ for an electric engine with transmission control, 31 for a
    continuously variable transmission with a gas turbine engine, and 34+
    wherein the operation of an engine regulates or is regulated by the
    operation of a transmission.


CLS 701/52
TXT Semiautomatic control (e.g., switchable between automatic and manual):

    Transmission control under subclass 51 wherein the electrical data
    processing system or calculating computer functions in concert with a
    selectable mode transmission (e.g., gear ratio selected manually by the
    vehicle operator or automatically according to operating conditions of the
    transmission system).


CLS 701/53
TXT And other vehicle control:

    Transmission control under subclass 51 wherein the electrical data
    processing system or calculating computer is designed to integrally control
    the transmission in conjunction with another vehicle control system.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    87,     for antispin control by regulating the torque of a transmission.

    95,     for regulating vehicle speed by transmission shift control.


CLS 701/54
TXT Engine output control:

    Integrated control system under subclass 53 wherein the electrical data
    processing system or calculating computer further comprises a means to
    regulate the output torque, power, or speed of the vehicle power plant.


CLS 701/55
TXT By changing shift map, schedule, or pattern:

    Transmission control under subclass 51 wherein the electrical data
    processing system or calculating computer regulates the gear selection of
    the transmission by selecting or modifying a stored set of schemes used for
    proper gear selection.


CLS 701/56
TXT Having a plurality of preset maps, schedules, or patterns:

    Transmission control under subclass 55 having multiple stored gear
    selection schemes.


CLS 701/57
TXT Fuzzy logic:

    Transmission control under subclass 51 wherein the electrical data
    processing system or calculating computer is designed to control or
    regulate the transmission by inexact reasoning implemented using set
    membership functions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 3 for fuzzy
    logic hardware, 10+ for a knowledge processing system, and 50+ for an
    expert system, and Cross Reference Art Collection 900 relating to fuzzy
    logic.


CLS 701/58
TXT Adaptive control:

    Transmission control under subclass 51 wherein the electrical data
    processing system or calculating computer is designed to compensate, in the
    course of its operation, for variations in operating characteristics of the
    vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 148+
    for a control which seeks to optimize a system's performance criterion
    (e.g., efficiency, consumption, or profit).


CLS 701/59
TXT Model or learning means (e.g., neural network):

    Adaptive control under subclass 58 wherein stored historical data, or data
    relating to present operating conditions, is used to modify the operating
    parameters of the transmission.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 149 for
    a data processing control system having a mathematical model.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, Cross Reference Art
    Collection 905 for applications using artificial intelligence with details
    of the artificial intelligence system for vehicle control.


CLS 701/60
TXT Feedback control (e.g., closed loop):

    Adaptive control under subclass 58 wherein input for the compensation means
    is a response signal corresponding to the status of the transmission system.


CLS 701/61
TXT Using a transmission ratio as feedback control:

    Feedback control under subclass 60 wherein the response signal is determine
    to be the ratio between the transmission input and output shaft speeds.


CLS 701/62
TXT Fail-safe control (e.g., preventing a gear shift):

    Transmission control under subclass 51 wherein the electrical data
    processing system or calculating computer is designed to detect an
    abnormality in operating conditions and carry out or modify the appropriate
    sequence of instructions to stabilize operation of the transmission.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 737 for
    an electric digital calculating computer having the specialized function of
    error detection or correction.


CLS 701/63
TXT Responsive to faulty sensor:

    Fail safe control under subclass 62 wherein the abnormal condition exist in
    a device for detecting an operating characteristic of the vehicle.


CLS 701/64
TXT Indicating a completion of a shift or a shift to be completed:

    Transmission control under subclass 51 further comprising a means to
    exhibit the completion of a particular shift or to alert the operator of
    the proper timing to optimize shift execution.


CLS 701/65
TXT Responsive to road, external, or ambient condition:

    Transmission control under subclass 51 wherein the electrical data
    processing system or calculating computer is designed to compensate, in the
    course of its operation, for variations in conditions external to the
    vehicle.


CLS 701/66
TXT Time regulated operations:

    Transmission control under subclass 51 wherein the electrical data
    processing system or calculating computer is designed to either receive or
    deliver instructional signals at a particular point in time, or within a
    set time period, for synchronizing the operation of a transmission with the
    operation of a secondary mechanism.


CLS 701/67
TXT Clutch control:

    Vehicle control, guidance, operation, or indication under subclass 1
    wherein the electrical data processing system or calculating computer
    functions to control or monitor the operation of the device which enables
    the coupling of two working parts in such a way as to permit connection or
    disconnection at will, without the necessity of bringing both parts to rest.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclasses 3.51+ for clutches and
    power-stop control.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, subclass 43 for
    a transmission with speed or torque responsive clutch.

    477,    Interrelated Power Delivery Controls Including Engine Control,
    subclasses 5 and 6 for plural engines have clutch control, 8 for an
    electric engine with clutch control, 39 for a  continuously variable
    friction transmission with clutch control, 57, 62, and 70+ for transmission
    control and clutch control, and 166+ for clutch control, per se.


CLS 701/68
TXT Adaptive control:

    Clutch control under subclass 67 wherein the electrical data processing
    system or calculating computer is designed to compensate in the course of
    its operation for variations in operating characteristics.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    58,     for adaptive transmission control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 148+,
    for a control which seeks to optimize a system's performance criterion
    (e.g., efficiency, consumption, or profit).


CLS 701/69
TXT Control of power distribution between vehicle axis or wheels (e.g., four
    wheel drive vehicle):

    Vehicle control, guidance, operation, or indication under subclass 1
    wherein the electrical data processing system or calculating computer
    functions to regulate vehicle movement by the connection, disconnection, or
    transfer of power from a vehicle propelling means to a mechanism having
    separate outputs driven simultaneously by a member of a planetary gear
    transmission.


CLS 701/70
TXT Indication or control of braking, acceleration, or deceleration:

    Vehicle control, guidance, operation, or indication under subclass 1
    wherein the electrical data processing system or calculating computer
    functions to regulate the increase or decrease in speed of a vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 121+ for brake testing excluding
    data processing techniques.

    188,    Brakes, for brake control which includes specific structure to the
    brakes; in particular, subclasses 137+ for an electrically controlled
    braking system and 182 for fluid-pressure and electric-operated brakes.

    303,    Fluid-Pressure and Analogous Brake System, subclasses 121+ for
    speed control which includes specific structure to fluid-pressure brakes.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 52 for means responsive to
    vehicular brake conditions and indication void data processing techniques.


CLS 701/71
TXT Antiskid, antilock, or brake-slip control:

    Braking, acceleration, or deceleration control under subclass 70 wherein
    the electrical data processing system or calculating computer utilizes
    information received concerning vehicle speed, wheel speed, or any
    derivatives thereof in determining activation of the appropriate speed
    altering action to control an undesired sliding, binding, or engagement of
    a vehicle, or its wheel, due to wheel deceleration.

    (1)     Note. Skid control is a process of controlling the vehicle to
    enhance the braking performance during the deceleration of the vehicle by
    manipulating the brake pressure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    82+,    for undesired vehicle wheel spinning control wherein such spinning
    is caused by excessive wheel acceleration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 197 for traction control systems combined
    with vehicular structure.

    280,    Land Vehicles, subclasses 757+ for an attachment relating to
    antiskid or antislide.

    303,    Fluid-Pressure Brake and Analogous Systems, subclasses 139+ for
    traction control which includes specific structure to fluid-pressure brakes.

    361,    Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 238 for
    electrical speed signal circuitry used for antiskid/antilock detection void
    of significant data processing techniques.


CLS 701/72
TXT During cornering or turning of vehicle:

    Antiskid or antilock control under 71 wherein the electrical data
    processing system or calculating computer regulates the speed of a vehicle
    when a lateral acceleration or yaw condition is detected or sensed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    303,    Fluid-Pressure Brake and Analogous Systems, subclasses 146+ for
    specific structure to fluid-pressure brakes including yaw control.


CLS 701/73
TXT On split coefficient surface (m):

    Antiskid or antilock control under 71 wherein the electrical data
    processing system or calculating computer regulates the brake pressure of a
    vehicle when it is sensed to experience a varying degree of adhesion along
    the traveled surface.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    303,    Fluid-Pressure Brake and Analogous Systems, subclass 149 for speed
    control with a split coefficient of friction.


CLS 701/74
TXT Having particular means to determine a reference value for wheel slippage
    or pseudo-vehicle speed:

    Antiskid or antilock control under 71 wherein the electrical data
    processing system or calculating computer employs a technique to calculate
    a value associated with a velocity or velocity variation gradient for use
    in determining a skidding or locking condition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    303,    Fluid-Pressure Brake and Analogous Systems, subclass 163 for speed
    control using a slip ratio as related to fluid-pressure brakes.


CLS 701/75
TXT Correction or modification:

    Determining means under subclass 74 further comprising a substitution means
    or compensation means for changing the reference value or pseudo vehicle
    speed.


CLS 701/76
TXT Fail-safe system:

    Antiskid or antilock control under subclass 71 wherein the electrical data
    processing system or calculating computer is designed to detect an
    abnormality in operating conditions and carry out the appropriate sequence
    of instructions to stabilize vehicle braking, acceleration, or deceleration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    303,    Fluid-Pressure Brake and Analogous Systems, subclasses 122.02+ for
    antilock brake failure with warning.

    340,    Communication: Electrical, subclass 507 for a fail-safe responsive
    indicating system.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 737, for
    an electric digital calculating computer having the specialized function of
    error detection or correction.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclass
    14 for a fail-safe fault recovery apparatus.


CLS 701/77
TXT Artificial intelligence (e.g., fuzzy logic):

    Antiskid or antilock control under subclass 71 wherein the electrical data
    processing system or calculating computer is designed to indicate
    information or control the vehicle by the manipulation of a value of a
    predetermined function of antecedent and consequent operations
    corresponding to the state of the braking, acceleration, or deceleration of
    the vehicle.


CLS 701/78
TXT Control of brake pressure:

    Antiskid or antilock control under subclass 71 wherein the electrical data
    processing system or calculating computer is designed to control the
    braking, acceleration, or deceleration of a vehicle by regulation of a
    fluid pressure exerted by the braking system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, appropriate subclasses for a means of retarding the motion
    of or stopping machines, including vehicles.

    303,    Fluid-Pressure Brake and Analogous Systems, subclass 167 for
    vehicle speed control by regulating brake pressure not having a positive
    recitation of data processing steps.


CLS 701/79
TXT Having speed variation responsive means (e.g., acceleration, deceleration):

    Brake pressure control under subclass 78 wherein the control of the brake
    pressure is regulated by the change in velocity or a change in the sensed
    velocity of the vehicle.


CLS 701/80
TXT Having coefficient of friction or road condition determining means:

    Brake pressure control under subclass 78 wherein the control of the brake
    pressure is regulated by variations in the gradient or  texture of the
    traveling surface.


CLS 701/81
TXT Four wheel drive, electric, or heavy vehicles:

    Brake pressure control under subclass 78 wherein the control of the brake
    pressure is specifically designed for vehicles characterized as one of
    either (a) having driving means in direct connection with four wheels of
    the vehicle, (b) having an electrical prime mover, or (c) vehicles
    catagorize as large machinery (i.e. heavy duty).


CLS 701/82
TXT Antispin, traction control, or drive slip control:

    Braking, acceleration or deceleration control under subclass 70 wherein the
    electrical data processing system or calculating computer utilizes
    information received concerning vehicle speed, wheel speed, or any
    derivative thereof in determining activation of the appropriate speed
    altering action to control an undesired rotation of a vehicle's wheel due
    to wheel acceleration.

    (1)     Note. Spin control is the process of controlling the vehicle to
    enhance the driveability of the vehicle during starting or acceleration of
    the vehicle by manipulating at least one of (a)brake pressure, (b) engine
    torque, or (c) transmission torque.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    71,     for undesired vehicle wheel skidding or locking control wherein
    such skidding or locking is caused by excessive wheel deceleration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclass 197 for antispin systems combined with
    vehicular structure.

    303,    Fluid-Pressure Brake and Analogous Systems, subclasses 91+ for
    antispin control which includes specific structure to fluid-pressure
    brakes.

    361,    Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices, subclass 238 for
    electrical speed signal circuitry used for antispin detection and which
    does not include significant data processing techniques.


CLS 701/83
TXT Control of brake pressure:

    antispin, traction control or drive slip control under subclass 82 wherein
    the electrical data processing system or calculating computer is designed
    to control the braking, acceleration, or deceleration of a vehicle by
    regulation of a fluid pressure exerted by the braking system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    188,    Brakes, appropriate subclasses for a means of retarding the motion
    of or stopping machines, including vehicles.

    303,    Fluid-Pressure Brake and Analogous Systems, subclass 167 for
    vehicle speed control by regulating brake pressure not having a positive
    recitation of data processing steps.


CLS 701/84
TXT Control of engine torque:

    antispin, traction control, or drive slip control under subclass 82 wherein
    the electrical data processing system or calculating computer is designed
    to control the braking, acceleration, or deceleration of a vehicle by
    regulation of the engine output power.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for internal-combustion engine control or indication wherein a
    digital or programmed data processing system is designed to include the
    regulation of the vehicle speed, acceleration or deceleration.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 320+ for engine speed
    regulators responsive to vehicle acceleration or deceleration.

    303,    Fluid-Pressure Brake and Analogous Systems, subclass 141 for speed
    and traction control by regulating the engine torque.

     477,   Interrelated Power Delivery Controls, Including Engine Control,
    subclasses 182+ for engine brake control responsive to engine speed.


CLS 701/85
TXT Having throttle valve positioning:

    Engine torque control under subclass 84 wherein the engine torque control
    is implemented by varying the cross-sectional area of fuel flow by
    partially closing or opening a damper, gate, or other flow regulator.


CLS 701/86
TXT Having fuel cutting or ignition timing retarding:

    Engine torque control under subclass 84 wherein the engine torque control
    is implemented by the regulation of fuel supply to the engine or by the
    adjustment of the ignition timing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for internal-combustion engine control or indication wherein a
    digital or programmed data processing system is designed to restrict fuel
    flow in response to a sense a stop condition or an emergency condition of
    the engine.


CLS 701/87
TXT Control of transmission torque:

    Antispin, traction control, or drive slip control under subclass 82 wherein
    the electrical data processing system or calculating computer is designed
    to control the braking, acceleration, or deceleration of a vehicle by
    regulation of power transfer to a driving mechanism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    192,    Clutches and Power-Stop Control, subclass 137 for a safety device
    in which the power-transmitting connections are disabled in response to the
    transmission guard striking an extraneous object.


CLS 701/88
TXT Restricting differential operation:

    Antispin, traction control, or drive slip control under subclass 82 wherein
    the electrical data processing system or calculating computer is designed
    to control the braking, acceleration, or deceleration of a vehicle by
    independently regulating the output torque to the wheels of the vehicle.


CLS 701/89
TXT Four wheel drive vehicle:

    Antispin, traction control, or drive slip control under subclass 82 wherein
    the electrical data processing system or calculating computer is designed
    to control the braking, acceleration, or deceleration of a four wheel drive
    vehicle.


CLS 701/90
TXT Having particular slip threshold, target slip ratio, or target engine
    torque determining means:

    Antispin, traction control, or drive slip control under subclass 82 wherein
    the electrical data processing system or calculating computer further is
    capable of determining a reference parameter and utilizing said parameter
    to determine the undesired condition of excessive wheel spinning due to
    vehicle acceleration.


CLS 701/91
TXT Integrated with antiskid or other vehicle control system (e.g., cruise
    control, suspension):

    Antispin, traction control, or drive slip control under subclass 82 wherein
    the electrical data processing system or calculating computer  operates in
    conjunction with another vehicle control system to effectively control the
    undesired condition of excessive wheel spinning due to vehicle
    acceleration.


CLS 701/92
TXT Fail-safe system:

    Antispin, traction control, or drive slip control under subclass 82 wherein
    the electrical data processing system or calculating computer is designed
    to detect an abnormality in operating conditions and carry out the
    appropriate sequence of instructions to stabilize traction control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    303,    Fluid-Pressure Brake and Analogous Systems, subclasses 122+ for
    speed controlled vehicle with failure responsive means.

    340,    Communication: Electrical, subclass 507 for a fail-safe responsive
    indicating system.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 737, for
    an electric digital calculating computer having the specialized function of
    error detection or correction.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclass
    14 for a fail-safe fault recovery apparatus.


CLS 701/93
TXT Vehicle speed control (e.g., cruise control):

    Braking, acceleration, or deceleration control under subclass 70 wherein
    the electrical data processing system or calculating computer is designed
    to maintain vehicle velocity at a specified value.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    110,    for internal-combustion engine speed control by digital processing
    techniques.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 350+ for electrical sensing
    or regulating of engine speed.

    180,    Motor Vehicles, subclasses 170+ for a vehicle with speed responsive
    means.


CLS 701/94
TXT Having gradient responsive control to suppress hunting, overshooting, or
    undershooting:

    Vehicle speed control under subclass 93 further comprising a means to
    regulate the shift in response to an impulsive momentary change in vehicle
    speed caused by the slope, or change in the slope, of a traveling surface.


CLS 701/95
TXT By transmission shifting control:

    Gradient response under subclass 94 wherein the means to regulate the
    impulsive momentary change in vehicle speed is executed by varying the gear
    ratio as a means to transfer power to a driving mechanism.


CLS 701/96
TXT Having inter-vehicle distance or speed control:

    Vehicle speed control under subclass 93 wherein vehicle velocity is
    regulated in response to a detected velocity or a measured separation of a
    second vehicle relative to a first vehicle.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300+,   for determining a spacial relationship between two vehicles.


CLS 701/97
TXT Fail-safe system:

    Vehicle speed control under subclass 93 wherein the electrical data
    processing system or calculating computer is designed to detect an
    abnormality in operating conditions and carry out the appropriate sequence
    of instructions to stabilize vehicle speed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    303,    Fluid-Pressure Brake and Analogous Systems, subclasses 122+ for
    speed controlled vehicle with failure responsive means.

    340,    Communication: Electrical, subclass 507 for a fail-safe responsive
    indicating system.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 737 for
    an electric digital calculating computer having the specialized function of
    error detection or correction.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclass
    14 for a fail-safe fault recovery apparatus.


CLS 701/98
TXT Artificial intelligence (e.g., fuzzy logic):

    Vehicle speed control under subclass 93 wherein the electrical data
    processing system or calculating computer is designed to indicate
    information or control the vehicle by the manipulation of a value of a
    predetermined function of antecedent and consequent operations
    corresponding to vehicle speed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 1+ for a
    system or method capable of performing one or more of the functions of
    recognition, speech signal processing, knowledge processing (i.e.,
    propositional logic, reasoning, learning, self-improvement), complex
    operations of a manipulator (e.g., robot control), or inexact reasoning
    (e.g., fuzzy logic) and Cross Reference Art Collections 902+ for
    applications using artificial intelligence with details of the artificial
    intelligence system.


CLS 701/99
TXT With indication or control of power plant (e.g., performance):

    Vehicle control, guidance, operation, or indication under subclass 1
    wherein the data processing system or calculating computer controls,
    indicates, or monitors the prime mover of the vehicle.

    (1)     Note. This subclass includes the performance of a power plant.


CLS 701/100
TXT Gas turbine, compressor:

    Indication or control of power plant under subclass 99 wherein the power
    plant is a gas turbine which may include a compressor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    415,    Rotary Kinetic Fluid Motors or Pumps, subclasses 13+ for control
    means responsive to condition sensing.


CLS 701/101
TXT Internal-combustion engine:

    Indication or control of power plant under subclass 99 wherein the power
    plant is an internal-combustion engine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, wherein significant structure of an
    internal-combustion engine is claimed, in particular, subclasses 415+ for
    electronic timing control; and subclasses 438+ for a charge forming device
    which includes an electronic control system.


CLS 701/102
TXT Digital or programmed data processor:

    Internal-combustion engine under subclass 101 controlled digitally or by a
    programmed data processor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 416+ for digital ignition
    timing.


CLS 701/103
TXT Control of air/fuel ratio or fuel injection:

    Control system under subclass 102 wherein the digital or programmed data
    processing system is designed to control the air/fuel ratio or the
    injection of fuel based on engine operating conditions or environmental
    conditions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 416 for digital electronic
    control of spark ignition timing, 480 for fuel injection which includes a
    microprocessor, and subclass 486 for digital memory addressed by an engine
    parameter.


CLS 701/104
TXT Controlling fuel quantity:

    Control system under subclass 103 wherein the air/fuel ratio or fuel
    injection is controlled by modifying the supply of fuel to the combustion
    engine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 429 for a combustion
    chamber means combined with air-fuel mixture forming means, 478+ for a fuel
    injection system having an actuator circuit (e.g., engine condition
    responsive electronic circuit actuates injector valve), and 575+ for a
    means of forming a mixture of a diverse supply of fuel and an oxidant.


CLS 701/105
TXT Controlling timing:

    Control system under subclass 103 wherein the air/fuel ratio or fuel
    injection is controlled in response to the synchronization operation
    associated with the combustion or the ignition.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 406+ for spark ignition
    timing control.


CLS 701/106
TXT Artificial intelligence (e.g., fuzzy logic):

    Control system under subclass 103 wherein the digital or programmed data
    processing system is designed to indicate information or control the
    air/fuel ratio or fuel injection by the manipulation of a value of a
    predetermined function of antecedent and consequent operations
    corresponding to the operating conditions of the combustion engine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 1+ for a
    system or method capable of performing one or more of the functions of
    recognition, speech signal processing, knowledge processing (i.e.,
    propositional logic, reasoning, learning, self-improvement), complex
    operations of a manipulator (e.g., robot control), or inexact reasoning
    (e.g., fuzzy logic), and  Cross Reference Art Collections 902+ for
    applications using artificial intelligence with details of the artificial
    intelligence system.


CLS 701/107
TXT Fail-safe system:

    Control system under subclass 103 wherein the digital or programmed data
    processing system is designed to detect an abnormality in operating
    conditions and carry out the appropriate sequence of instructions to
    stabilize the air/fuel ratio or fuel injection operation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 395+ for an engine speed
    regulator responsive to (a) an engine parameter or (b) an environmental
    condition to alter the present engine speed without regard to the resulting
    engine speed, 479 for a fail safe fuel injector system, and 690 for a
    charge forming device with fail-safe, backup, or malfunction means
    including an exhaust gas condition responsive means.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 737, for
    an electric digital calculating computer having the specialized function of
    error detection or correction.


CLS 701/108
TXT Exhaust gas circulation (EGC):

    Control system under subclass 103 wherein the air/fuel ratio or fuel
    injection is controlled in response to a change in the exhaust gas system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 571 for the electrical
    control of an e.g.r. valve for a charge forming device and 672+ for a
    charge forming device including an exhaust gas sensing means.


CLS 701/109
TXT Detection of O2 concentration:

    Control system under subclass 103 wherein the exhaust gas circulation is
    controlled or modified in response to a sensed oxygen content in the
    exhaust gas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 531+ for a charge forming
    device using auxiliary air or gas to inject fuel and 585+ for a charge
    forming device having auxiliary air or oxygen added to combustible mixture.


CLS 701/110
TXT Speed, acceleration, deceleration:

    Internal-combustion engine control or indication under subclass 102 wherein
    the digital or programmed data processing system is designed to include the
    regulation of the vehicle speed, acceleration, or deceleration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    84,     for the control of engine torque for the purpose of controlling the
    antilock/antiskid of a vehicle.

    93,     for vehicle speed control.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 418+ for speed responsive
    engine control; and subclasses 422, 423, 492, and 493 for
    acceleration/deceleration responsive means.


CLS 701/111
TXT Vibration, roughness, knock:

    Internal-combustion engine control or indication under subclass 102 wherein
    the digital or programmed data processing system is designed to control or
    sense vibration, roughness, or knocking condition of the engine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 116+ for motor or engine testing.


CLS 701/112
TXT Engine stop, fuel shutoff:

    Internal-combustion engine control or indication under subclass 102 wherein
    the digital or programmed data processing system is designed to restrict
    fuel flow in response to a sense a stop condition or an emergency condition
    of the engine.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    86,     for control of an antiskid or antilock condition by cutting the
    fuel supply thus controlling the engine torque.


CLS 701/113
TXT Starting, warmup:

    Internal-combustion engine control or indication under subclass 102 wherein
    the digital or programmed data processing system is designed to sense or
    control the starting condition or warmup condition of the engine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclasses 424 and 491 for the
    starting or cold running condition of an engine.


CLS 701/114
TXT Backup, interrupt, reset, or test:

    Internal-combustion engine control or indication under subclass 102 wherein
    the digital or programmed data processing system includes specific
    structure to function as either a backup, interruption, reset, or test
    circuit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    123,    Internal-Combustion Engines, subclass 479 for backup systems.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclasses
    22.1+ for general digital logic testing.


CLS 701/115
TXT Specific memory or interfacing device:

    Internal-combustion engine control or indication under subclass 102 wherein
    the digital or programmed data processing system includes specific
    structure to function either as data storage or as an information
    interconnecting device.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclasses
    for memory devices.


CLS 701/116
TXT With indication or control to maintain fixed position:

    Vehicle control, guidance, operation, or indication under subclass 1
    wherein the data processing system or calculating computer controls or
    indicates a particular fixed position of a vehicle with respect to a
    particular reference.


CLS 701/117
TXT Traffic analysis or control of surface vehicle:

    Vehicle control, guidance, operation, or indication under subclass 1
    wherein the data processing system or calculating computer controls or
    indicates the organized movement of surface vehicles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 933+ for vehicles which are
    controlled by traffic conditions.


CLS 701/118
TXT With determination of traffic density:

    Traffic analysis or control of surface vehicle under subclass 117 which
    includes a determination of the number of vehicles per unit of time that
    pass a particular point.


CLS 701/119
TXT With determination of traffic speed:

    Traffic analysis or control of surface vehicle under subclass 117 which
    includes a determination of a distance traveled per unit time for the
    traffic.


CLS 701/120
TXT Traffic analysis or control of aircraft:

    Vehicle control, guidance, operation, or indication under subclass 1
    wherein the data processing system or calculating computer controls or
    indicates the organized movement of aircraft along particular routes.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclass 951 for airport control
    systems which do not include data processing techniques.


CLS 701/121
TXT With speed control or order:

    Traffic analysis or control of aircraft under subclass 120 wherein the data
    processing system or calculating computer controls or indicates the
    velocity of the aircraft.


CLS 701/122
TXT With course diversion:

    Traffic analysis or control of aircraft under subclass 120 wherein the data
    processing system or calculating computer controls or indicates departure
    from prior course of flight.


CLS 701/123
TXT With indication of fuel consumption rate or economy of usage:

    Vehicle control, guidance, operation, or indication under subclass 1
    wherein the data processing system or calculating computer controls or
    indicates the amount of fuel consumed per unit time or most economical fuel
    consumption rate or distance available for a given amount of fuel.


CLS 701/124
TXT Determining balance or center of gravity (e.g., load distribution of
    vehicle):

    Vehicle control, guidance, operation, or indication under subclass 1
    wherein the data processing system or calculating computer functions to
    determine the weight distribution of a vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 65.01+ for measuring and
    determining the center of gravity, per se, subclasses 66+ for determination
    of the amount of unbalance of a rotor, and subclass 172 for weight
    distribution on a human foot.


CLS 701/200
TXT NAVIGATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the electrical data
    processing system or calculating computer functions to determine a course,
    position, or distance traveled.

    (1)     Note. In Class 116, Signals and Indicators, Digest 43, there exists
    an unofficial collection of art relating to navigation devices.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    300,    for an electrical data processing system or a calculating computer
    to determine the relative location between two points.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, appropriate subclasses, especially
    subclasses 300+ for celestial navigational instruments.

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclasses 178+ for navigation.

    244,    Aeronautics, subclass 3.18 for celestial navigation.

    318,    Electricity: Motive Power Systems, subclass 582 for vehicular
    guidance systems with celestial navigation.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 988+ for vehicle position
    indication.


    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), for specific structure to a radar device, in
    particular, subclasses 385+ for radio wave energy for direction finding
    receivers; and subclasses 1 through 205 for radar navigation systems.

    348,    Television, subclasses 113+ for a picture signal generator or
    reproducer which is used with a steerable vehicle to permit control of the
    vehicle from a remote location or to provide an indication in the vehicle
    of its position as an aid in the guidance of the vehicle.

    353,    Optics: Image Projectors, subclasses 11+ for a projector especially
    adapted to project an image of a map or navigation chart, an image of a
    target onto a map or chart, or a target which represents a vehicle such as
    an aircraft onto a screen.

    356,    Optics: Measuring and Testing, subclass 3 for optical range finders
    and subclasses 27+ for velocity or height measuring.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 111, 186, and 239+ relating
    to training or instructions in the area of navigation; subclass 1 for
    training in the use of radar or sonar detecting or range finding and
    subclasses 30+ for aircraft training, per se.


CLS 701/201
TXT Determination of travel data based on the start point and destination point:

    Navigation system under subclass 200 wherein the electrical data processing
    system or calculating computer functions to compute, establish, or indicate
    travel information associated with the distance measured from a present
    position to a terminating position.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for and automatic route guidance system including the storage or
    planning of route information.


CLS 701/202
TXT Route pre-planning:

    Determination of travel data under subclass 201 further comprising a static
    means to determine a travel course prior to the departure of the vehicle.


CLS 701/203
TXT Great circle route:

    Determination of travel data under subclass 201 wherein the course lies
    along the shortest line between two points on the surface of a sphere.


CLS 701/204
TXT Determination of E.T.A.:

    Navigation system under subclass 200 wherein the data processing system or
    calculating computer functions to determine the time of arrival at a
    destination.


CLS 701/205
TXT Determination of along-track or cross-track deviations:

    Navigation system under subclass 200 wherein the data processing system or
    calculating computer functions to determine the deviation of a present
    position from a desired position in a direction parallel to or
    perpendicular to the course.


CLS 701/206
TXT Employing way point navigation:

    Navigation system under subclass 200 wherein the data processing system or
    calculating computer functions to determine the position relative to an
    intermediate point between origin and destination.


CLS 701/207
TXT Employing position determining equipment:

    Navigation system under subclass 200 wherein the electrical data processing
    system or calculating computer functions to compute, establish, or indicate
    the location of a vehicle based on the information provided by the position
    determining device.


CLS 701/208
TXT For use in a map data base system:

    Positioning determining equipment under subclass 207 wherein the vehicle
    position information is utilized in conjunction with a map information
    processing data system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 990 and 995 for vehicle
    position indication with a map display.


CLS 701/209
TXT Including route searching or determining device:

    Map data base system under subclass 208 further capable of processing
    stored electrical data corresponding to locations within a given
    geographical area to determine a path of travel between a point of origin
    and a destination point.


CLS 701/210
TXT Route correction, modification, or verification:

    Route searching system under subclass 209  wherein the electrical data
    processing system or calculating computer is designed to either (a) alter
    the path of travel, (b) determine a supplemental path of travel, (c)
    provide instructions to resume to the original path of travel, or (d)
    validate vehicle position or course.


CLS 701/211
TXT Having audio or visual route guidance:

    Map data base system under subclass 208 further comprising audio or visual
    information providing directional instructions to follow a chosen path.


CLS 701/212
TXT Having variable map scale:

    Map data base system under subclass 208 further capable of being responsive
    to a predetermined condition to adjust either (a) the graphical
    representation of a particular geographic region to an appropriate level of
    detail or (b) the graphical representation of the vehicle to a specified
    orientation.


CLS 701/213
TXT Using Global Positioning System (GPS):

    Position determining equipment under subclass 207 wherein the electrical
    data processing system or calculating computer receives positional data via
    communication with satellites dedicated to a world wide navigational
    tracking system.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 357 for sending or receiving radio
    wave energy which is characterized by some quality that varies according to
    the relative direction or position of a satellite used to locate the
    position of an object and 450+ for an apparatus for determining the
    position in space of an object, vehicle, or atmospheric condition by the
    reception of signals not having distinctive bearing or position
    determinative characteristics.


CLS 701/214
TXT Means to improve accuracy of position or location:

    Global positioning system under subclass 213 wherein the electrical data
    processing system or calculating computer utilizes a secondary or
    supplemental means to more exactly indicate a vehicle's locale.


CLS 701/215
TXT Having multiple GPS antennas or receivers (e.g., differential GPS):

    Method of correcting position data under subclass 214 having a plurality of
    devices to collect information from satellites associated with a world wide
    navigational system.


CLS 701/216
TXT Having a self-contained position computing means (e.g., dead reckoning):

    Method of correcting position data under subclass 214 having a secondary
    system for independently calculating or indicating vehicle location for the
    substitution, modification, or verification of the GPS position data.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217,    for specific secondary system used.


CLS 701/217
TXT Using dead-reckoning apparatus:

    Navigation system under subclass 207 wherein position is determined from
    course and distance made from the last known position and known or
    estimated drift.


CLS 701/218
TXT With R-O (D.M.E. and path) or Tacan equipment:

    Navigation system under subclass 207 having either Tacan or distance and
    bearing measuring equipment.


CLS 701/219
TXT With Loran or Shoran or Decca equipment:

    Navigation system under subclass 207 wherein a position is determined from
    hyperbolic lines of position.


CLS 701/220
TXT With inertial sensor:

    Navigation system under subclass 207 having a means to sense a force caused
    by acceleration.


CLS 701/221
TXT With correction by noninertial sensor:

    Inertial sensor under subclass 220 having a means for correction by sensing
    a noninertial property.


CLS 701/222
TXT With star tracker:

    Navigation system under subclass 207 further comprising a means to
    determine the position of the stars.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclass 203 for a photocell following a star.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 516 for
    object detection and tracking via radiant energy.


CLS 701/223
TXT With radar or optical ground scanner:

    Navigation system under subclass 207 further comprising a means to scan the
    ground by radar or optically.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    342,    Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices (e.g.,
    Radar, Radio Navigation), subclasses 42+ for radar transmitter and receiver
    system.


CLS 701/224
TXT With indicated course correction (compass deviation):

    Navigation system under subclass 200 further comprising a means of
    notification for modified or corrected course.


CLS 701/225
TXT Determining range without range measurement:

    Navigation system under subclass 200 wherein the data processing system or
    calculating computer functions to determine a travel distance indirectly.


CLS 701/226
TXT Space orbits or paths:

    navigation system under subclass 200 wherein the course, path, or position
    is outside the atmosphere of a planet.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for the control of a spacecraft or satellite.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    244,    Aeronautics, subclasses 158+ for spacecraft.


CLS 701/300
TXT RELATIVE LOCATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the data processing
    system or calculating computer functions to determine the location of one
    object with respect to a secondary object or point.


CLS 701/301
TXT Collision avoidance:

    Relative location under subclass 300 wherein the data processing system or
    calculating computer functions to determine the relative movement between
    points for collision avoidance.


CLS 701/302
TXT Course to intercept:

    Relative location under subclass 300 wherein the data processing system or
    calculating computer functions to determine an indication or control action
    to bring the two points together.


CLS 704/
TTL DATA PROCESSING:  SPEECH SIGNAL PROCESSING, LINGUISTICS, LANGUAGE
    TRANSLATION, AND AUDIO COMPRESSION/DECOMPRESSION

CLS 704/
TXT
    I.      GLOSSARY

            The terms below have been defined for purposes
    of classification in this class and are shown in
    underlined type when used in the class and subclass definitions. When these
    terms are not underlined in the definitions, the meaning is not restricted
    to the glossary definitions below.

    CORRELATION
    A statistical measurement of the interdependence or association between two
    variables that are quantitative or qualitative in nature.  A typical
    calculation would be performed by multiplying a signal by either another
    signal (cross-correlation) or by a delayed version of itself
    (autocorrelation).

    DISTANCE
    A statistical measurement for comparing elements defined by variables or
    vectors using scalar or vector subtraction of those elements.  Examples:
    distance=a-b, |a-b|, (a-b).5 or two vectors may be treated as objects such
    that the straight line distance is measured between them.

    EXCITATION
    Stimulation of the vocal tract by vibratory action of the vocal cords or by
    a turbulent air flow.  In a digital system, the vocal tract is typically
    modelled with a filter and excitation of the filter is performed using time
    representations of pitch (voiced excitation) and noise (unvoiced
    excitation).

    LANGUAGE
    A systematic means of communicating ideas or feelings by the use of
    conventionalized sounds, gestures, or marks having understood meanings.

    LINGUISTICS
    The study of human speech including the units, nature, structure, and
    modification of language.

    NOISE
    Any sound which is undesirable and interferes with one's hearing or with a
    system's analysis of desired sound.

    PITCH
    The measurable frequency or period at which the glottis vibrates.

    SIMILARITY
    A statistical measurement which is inversely proportional to distance.  For
    example, if two patterns are compared yielding a small distance, then the
    patterns would exhibit a large (or high degree of) similarity.

    SPEECH
    The communication or expression of thoughts in spoken words.

    UNVOICED
    Speech sounds produced by a turbulent flow of air created at some point of
    stricture in the vocal tract and usually lacking pitch.

    VOICED
    Speech sounds produced by vibratory action of the vocal cords and usually
    having pitch.

    II.     GENERAL STATEMENT OF THE CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    A.      This is the generic class for apparatus and corresponding methods
    for constructing, analyzing and modifying units of human language by data
    processing, in which there is a significant change in the data.

    B.      This class also provides for systems or methods that process speech
    signals for storage, transmission, recognition, or synthesis of speech.

    C.      This class also provides for systems or methods for bandwidth
    compression or expansion of an audio signal, or for time compression or
    expansion of an audio signal.

    III.    THIS CLASS IS STRUCTURED INTO THREE MAIN DIVISIONS:

    1.      Linguistics; subclasses 1+.

    2.      Speech Signal Processing, subclasses 100+.

    3.      Audio Compression; subclasses 500+.

    IV.     SCOPE OF THE CLASS

    A.      Linguistics

    (1)     This class does not include subject matter wherein significant
    details of the modification or construction of documents are claimed.  (See
    Class ?0? in the Search Class notes below regarding Document Processing).

    (2)     This class does not include subject matter directed to significant
    details of teaching languages.  (See Class 434 in the Search Class notes
    below).

    (3)     This class does not include subject matter directed to significant
    details of the construction, analysis or modification of computer
    languages.  (See Class 395 in the Search Class notes below).

    B.      Image Analysis

    (1)     This class does not include subject matter wherein significant
    image analysis is performed and speech signal processing is nominally
    claimed (see Class 382 in the Search Class notes below).

    (2)     This class includes subject matter directed to speech signal
    processing disclosed or claimed in plural diverse arts such as image
    analysis (classified, per se, in Class 382).

    C.      Audio Signal Processing

    (1)     This class does not include subject matter wherein nominal
    bandwidth or time modifications are performed for other audio processing
    defined in Classes 381 or 84 (see Search Class notes below).  Examples of
    subject matter not included are:  Stereo, sound effects, hearing aids,
    input and output transducers, and musical instruments.

    (2)     This class includes audio signal processing wherein significant
    processing is performed to modify the signal's bandwidth or time
    characteristics for compression or expansion of the signal.

    D.      Communications

    (1)     This class does not include subject matter wherein significant
    details of a distinct communications system or telephone link is performed
    and speech signal processing is nominally claimed (see Classes 340, 370,
    375, 379, 455 in the Search Class notes below).

    (2)     This class includes subject matter directed to speech signal
    processing disclosed or claimed in plural diverse arts such as various
    types of communication systems.

    E.      Applications

    (1)     This class does not include subject matter wherein significant
    details of application systems are performed and speech signal processing
    is nominally claimed.

    (2)     This class includes subject matter directed to speech signal
    processing disclosed or claimed in plural diverse arts to include
    electrical and mechanical systems.  Examples would include systems
    controlled by speech recognition, systems which create specific displays of
    speech data, systems for editing speech data and otherwise unrelated
    systems which incorporate speech signal processing details such as placing
    a speech synthesizer into novelty items.

    V.      SEARCH CLASS

    84,     Music, subclasses 1+ for instruments used in producing music to
    include (1) electrical music instruments, (2) automatic instruments, and
    (3) hand-played instruments.  Automatic and hand-played instruments are
    divided into four groups:  stringed, wind, rigid vibrators, and membranes.
    This class also includes some accessory devices generally recognized as
    belonging to the art or industry.

    181,    Acoustics, various subclasses, for mechanically transmitting,
    amplifying and ascertaining the direction of sound and for mechanically
    muffling or filtering sound.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825+ for controlling one or
    more devices to obtain a plurality of results by transmission of a
    designated one of plural distinctive control signals over a smaller number
    of communication lines or channels.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, various subclasses for
    electrical pulse and digit code converters (e.g., systems for originating
    or emitting a coded set of discrete signals or translating one code into
    another code wherein the meaning of the data remains the same but the
    formats may differ).

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, various subclasses for the selective
    control of two or more light generating or light controlling display
    elements in accordance with a received image signal, and subclasses 1+ for
    visual display systems with selective electrical control including display
    memory organization and structure for storing image data and manipulating
    image data between a display memory and display device.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, which is an
    integral part of Class 369 following subclass 18, for record carriers and
    systems wherein information is stored and retrieved by interaction with a
    medium and there is relative motion between a medium and a transducer, for
    example, magnetic disk drive devices, and control thereof, per se.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 130+
    for data processing control systems, subclasses 400+ for applications of
    computers in various environments, subclasses 550+ for applications of
    computers in measuring and testing, subclasses 600+ for hybrid computers,
    subclasses 700+ for calculators, digital signal processing and arithmetical
    processing, per se, subclasses 724+ for digital filters, and subclasses
    800+ for electric analog computers.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, various subclasses for
    addressable static singular storage elements or plural singular storage
    elements of the same type (i.e., the internal elements of memory, per se).

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, various subclasses for
    record carriers and systems wherein information is stored and retrieved by
    interaction with a medium and there is relative motion between a medium and
    a transducer.


    370,    Multiplex Communications, for the simultaneous transmission of two
    or more signals over a common medium, particularly subclasses 58.1+ for
    time division multiplex (TDM) switching, subclasses 85.1+ for time division
    bus transmission, and subclasses 91+ for asynchronous TDM communications
    including addressing.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, various
    subclasses for generic electrical pulse or pulse coded data error detection
    and correction.


    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, various subclasses for generic
    pulse or digital communication systems and synchronization of clocking
    signals from input data.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, and Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, various subclasses for generic circuits for pulse
    counting.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, various subclasses for two-way
    electrical communication of intelligible audio information of arbitrary
    content over a link including an electrical conductor.

    380,    Cryptography, subclasses 3+ for stored information access or copy
    prevention (e.g., software program protection or computer virus detection)
    in combination with data encryption, and subclasses 22 through 25 and 50
    for electric signal modification and other appropriate subclasses.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, various
    subclasses for wired one-way audio systems, per se.

    382,    Image Analysis, various subclasses for operations performed on
    image data with the aim of measuring a characteristic of an image,
    detecting variations, detecting structures, or transforming the image data,
    and for procedures for analyzing and categorizing patterns present in image
    data.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 112+ for communication aids
    for the handicapped, subclasses 156+ for education and demonstration of
    language, subclasses 322+ for question or problem eliciting response.

    455,    Telecommunications, appropriate subclasses for modulated carrier
    wave communication, per se, and subclass 26.1 for subject matter which
    blocks access to a signal source or otherwise limits usage of modulated
    carrier equipment.


    707,    Data Processing:  Database and File Management, Data Structures,
    and Document Processing, subclasses 500+ for document processing including
    layout, editing, and spell-checking.


CLS 704/1
TXT LINGUISTICS

    Subject matter under the class definition including means or steps for
    constructing a word, a phrase, or a sentence in a language.

    SEARCH CLASS

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 156+ for demonstration and
    education in linguistics.


CLS 704/2
TXT Translation machine:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein a language (i.e., source language)
    stored in a memory means is translated into another language (i.e., target
    language).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS

    9,      for translation machines with significant natural language
    processing.


    SEARCH CLASS

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 403 for document filing and retrieval system.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses  500 and
    700, for translation of computer languages.


CLS 704/3
TXT Having particular Input/Output device::

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the translation machine includes a
    means for reading into the memory means a language, for pronouncing the
    translated language or a particular user interface.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of such devices include an optical scanner or voice
    synthesizer.


CLS 704/4
TXT Based on phrase, clause, or idiom:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the translation machine translates
    a series of words that form a syntactical unit.


CLS 704/5
TXT For partial translation:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the translation machine includes a
    means for providing translation for a specified portion of a sentence or a
    clause.


CLS 704/6
TXT Punctuation:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the translation machine translates
    a compound word formed by hyphenation or sentences with quotation marks,
    colons, semicolons, or parentheses.


CLS 704/7
TXT Storage or retrieval of data:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 including a means for assigning storage
    locations or accessing addresses to the memory means.

    SEARCH CLASS

    707,    Data Processing:  Database and File Management, Data Structures,
    and Document Processing, subclasses 1+, for database or file access
    methods.


CLS 704/8
TXT Multilingual or national language support:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including means or steps to adapt to,
    process, or support plural languages in systems or in software (i.e.,
    providing language identifiers on files or providing screen prompts in a
    selected language), or to support the conventions or peculiarities of
    various national languages (i.e., alphabetical ordering, date or currency
    indications).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS

    200+,   for details of translation between multiple languages.

    SEARCH CLASS

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Processing, subclasses 333+ for customization or
    edition of operator interfaces.

    707,    Data Processing:  Database and File Management, Data Structures, or
    Document Processing, subclass 536 for composing or editing multiple
    languages in a document.


CLS 704/9
TXT Natural language:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 includes a means for applying grammatical
    rules or other analyses (e.g., morphemic, syntax, semantic, etc.) to define
    the true meaning of a sentence or phrase.

    (1)     Note.  When words are undefined in the dictionary of a natural
    language, the grammatical rules or other analyses are applied in order to
    determine the true meaning of a sentence or a phrase.

    SEARCH CLASS

    707,    Data Processing:  Database and File Management, Data Structures,
    and Document Processing, subclasses 1+, for nominal natural language
    processing used in database search and retrieval.


CLS 704/10
TXT Dictionary building, modification, or prioritization:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 including a construction, a change, or an
    orderly arrangement of dictionary, thesauri, or the like.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS

    9,      for mere use in natural language processing.

    200+,   for mere use in translation.

    SEARCH CLASS

    707,    Data Processing:  Database and File Management, Data Structures, or
    Document Processing, subclass 102 for database details of dictionaries, and
    subclass 532 for mere use of a dictionary in editing or composition of a
    document.


CLS 704/200
TXT SPEECH SIGNAL PROCESSING:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the system performs
    operations or functions on signals which represent speech.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS

    500+,   for audio (other than speech) signal bandwidth compression or
    expansion.


    SEARCH CLASS

    379,    Telephonic Communications, appropriate subclasses for speech signal
    processing in a telephone system or device.


CLS 704/201
TXT For storage or transmission:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the speech, which may be in coded
    or reduced formats, is stored or transmitted.


CLS 704/202
TXT Neural networks:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein coding is performed using
    parallel distributed processing elements constructed in hardware or
    simulated in software.


    SEARCH CLASS

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 259, for
    neural networks which decode a coded speech signal.


CLS 704/203
TXT Transformations:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the speech is encoded using a
    specific mathematical function (e.g., Fourier, Walsh, cosine/sine
    transform, etc.).


CLS 704/204
TXT Orthogonal functions:

    Subject matter under subclass 203 wherein the function is orthogonal
    (transformations as applied to vector, matrix, linear and polynomial
    functions, for example).


CLS 704/205
TXT Frequency:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the speech is represented by
    frequency.


CLS 704/206
TXT Specialized information:

    Subject matter under subclass 205 wherein the frequency data is analyzed to
    identify specific speech information.


CLS 704/207
TXT Pitch:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 wherein the specific speech information
    represents the predominant frequency of the speech.


CLS 704/208
TXT Voiced or unvoiced:

    Subject matter under subclass 207 wherein the specific speech information
    represents the presence (voiced) or absence (unvoiced) of predominant
    frequency components.


CLS 704/209
TXT Formant:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 wherein the specific speech information
    represents the frequency values of any of several resonance bands which
    determine the phonetic quality of a vowel sound.


CLS 704/210
TXT Silence decision:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 wherein the specific speech information
    represent the presence or absence of speech.


CLS 704/211
TXT Time:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the speech signal is represented
    using time (e.g., time measurements and energy measured over time).


CLS 704/212
TXT Pulse code modulation (PCM):

    Subject matter under subclass 211 wherein the signal is sampled over time,
    and the magnitude of each sample is quantized and converted into a digital
    signal.


CLS 704/213
TXT Zero crossing:

    Subject matter under subclass 211 wherein the zero crossings of the signal
    are used to measure time or frequency.


CLS 704/214
TXT Voiced or unvoiced:

    Subject matter under subclass 211 wherein time measurements are used to
    determine the presence (voiced) or absence (unvoiced) of predominant
    frequency components.


CLS 704/215
TXT Silence decision:

    Subject matter under subclass 211 wherein time measurements are used to
    determine the presence or absence of speech (e.g., pauses between words,
    etc.).


CLS 704/216
TXT Correlation function:

    Subject matter under subclass 211 wherein analysis of speech is performed
    using relationships between time series samples.


CLS 704/217
TXT Autocorrelation:

    Subject matter under subclass 216 wherein the relationships are between
    different speech samples taken from the same time series.


CLS 704/218
TXT Cross-correlation:

    Subject matter under subclass 216 wherein the relationships are between
    speech samples taken from different time series.


CLS 704/219
TXT Linear prediction:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein input samples of speech are
    estimated from past samples of an input sequence.


CLS 704/220
TXT Analysis by synthesis:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the speech signal is coded and
    corrected by the difference of the decoded coded signal from the original
    speech signal.


CLS 704/221
TXT Pattern matching vocoders:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein speech signals are compared and
    matching patterns are encoded.


CLS 704/222
TXT Vector quantization:

    Subject matter under subclass 221 wherein the encoding maps a sequence of
    continuous or discrete vectors into a digital sequence.


CLS 704/223
TXT Excitation patterns:

    Subject matter under subclass 221 wherein the encoding models speech using
    representations including the primary frequency period or periods (e.g.,
    pitch excitation, multipulse excitation, etc.).


CLS 704/224
TXT Normalizing:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein modifications of the speech
    signal emphasize or deemphasize certain features (e.g., spectral slope,
    average power, etc.).


CLS 704/225
TXT Gain control:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the speech is adjusted to
    maintain an average amplitude.


CLS 704/226
TXT Noise:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein the coding reduces the effects of
    undesired signal components.


CLS 704/227
TXT Pre-transmission:

    Subject matter under subclass 226 wherein the coding precedes transmission.


CLS 704/228
TXT Post-transmission:

    Subject matter under subclass 226 wherein decoding after transmission
    minimizes the effects of noise in the transmission path.


CLS 704/229
TXT Adaptive bit allocation:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 wherein limited storage or transmission
    resources are allocated by giving more resources to areas containing more
    data and giving fewer resources to areas containing less data.


CLS 704/230
TXT Quantization:

    Subject matter under 201 wherein coded information is mapped into digital
    words described by binary symbols.


CLS 704/231
TXT Recognition:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein speech is separated into discrete
    components which are distinguished from one another.


CLS 704/232
TXT Neural networks:

    Subject matter under subclass 231 using parallel distributed processing
    elements constructed in hardware or simulated in software.


CLS 704/233
TXT Detect speech in noise:

    Subject matter under subclass 231 wherein the discrete components are
    distinguished from noise.


CLS 704/234
TXT Normalizing:

    Subject matter under subclass 231 wherein the discrete components are
    modified to emphasize or deemphasize certain features (e.g., spectral
    slope, average power, etc.).


CLS 704/235
TXT Speech to image:

    Subject matter under subclass 231 wherein the distinguished discrete
    components are converted into image output (e.g., text).


CLS 704/236
TXT Specialized equations or comparisons:

    Subject matter under subclass 231 wherein the discrete components are
    distinguished using specific mathematical functions.


CLS 704/237
TXT Correlation:

    Subject matter under subclass 236 wherein the specific function measures a
    correlation between discrete components (e.g., absolute magnitude
    difference functions (AMDF), autocorrelation, cross-correlation, etc.).


CLS 704/238
TXT Distance:

    Subject matter under subclass 236 wherein the specific function measures
    the difference between discrete components.


CLS 704/239
TXT Similarity:

    Subject matter under subclass 236 wherein the specific function measures
    the similarity between discrete components.


CLS 704/240
TXT Probability:

    Subject matter under subclass 236 wherein the specific function uses
    probability to determine the occurrence of a discrete component.


CLS 704/241
TXT Dynamic time warping:

    Subject matter under subclass 236 wherein time components of the discrete
    components are aligned with reference components (e.g., using dynamic
    programming).


CLS 704/242
TXT Viterbi Trellis:

    Subject matter under subclass 236 wherein discrete components are
    distinguished by traversing possible paths through a time series.


CLS 704/243
TXT Creating patterns for matching:

    Subject matter under subclass 231 including specific methods for
    registering the discrete components to be used as references.


CLS 704/244
TXT Update patterns:

    Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein the references are modified to
    improve recognition (e.g., learning).


CLS 704/245
TXT Clustering:

    Subject matter under subclass 243 wherein similar references are placed or
    divided into groups (e.g., K-means algorithm, nearest neighbor, etc.).


CLS 704/246
TXT Voice recognition:

    Subject matter under subclass 231 wherein different voices are
    distinguished (e.g., speaker identification or verification).


CLS 704/247
TXT Preliminary matching:

    Subject matter under subclass 246 using an initial comparison followed by a
    more detailed recognition.


CLS 704/248
TXT Endpoint detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 246 including the identification of the
    beginning and ending points of speech sound segments.


CLS 704/249
TXT Subportions:

    Subject matter under subclass 246 including separating speech into sound
    segments (e.g., utterances, words, phonemes, allophones, etc.).


CLS 704/250
TXT Specialized models:

    Subject matter under subclass 246 including models which describe the
    interconnections between speech sound segments.


CLS 704/251
TXT Word recognition:

    Subject matter under subclass 231 wherein different words are distinguished
    (i.e., the meaning of what is spoken).


CLS 704/252
TXT Preliminary matching:

    Subject matter under subclass 251 using an initial comparison followed by a
    more detailed recognition.


CLS 704/253
TXT Endpoint detection:

    Subject matter under subclass 251 identifying the beginning and ending
    points of words.


CLS 704/254
TXT Subportions:

    Subject matter under subclass 251 identifying speech sound segments (e.g.,
    phonemes, allophones, etc.).


CLS 704/255
TXT Specialized models:

    Subject matter under subclass 251 including models which describe the
    interconnections between words or subportions of words.


CLS 704/256
TXT Markov:

    Subject matter under subclass 255 wherein the models include states which
    represent speech sound portions and transitions which represent connections
    between speech sound portions (e.g., hidden Markov models, heuristic Markov
    models, etc.).


CLS 704/257
TXT Natural language:

    Subject matter under subclass 255 wherein the models include grammatical
    constraints (e.g., syntax, etc.).


CLS 704/258
TXT Synthesis:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein component parts of a speech
    signal are combined to produce a synthetic speech output.


CLS 704/259
TXT Neural networks:

    Subject matter under subclass 258 wherein synthetic speech output is formed
    using parallel distributed processing elements constructed in hardware or
    simulated in software.


CLS 704/260
TXT Image to speech:

    Subject matter under subclass 258 wherein the component parts are related
    to image data (e.g., text to speech, etc.).


CLS 704/261
TXT Vocal tract model:

    Subject matter under subclass 258 wherein the component parts model a human
    vocal tract.


CLS 704/262
TXT Linear prediction:

    Subject matter under subclass 258 wherein the component parts are
    represented by coefficients derived from a sequence of past speech samples.


CLS 704/263
TXT Correlation:

    Subject matter under subclass 258 wherein the component parts are
    represented by coefficients derived from relationships between time series
    speech samples.


CLS 704/264
TXT Excitation:

    Subject matter under subclass 258 wherein the component parts are
    represented by the period of the primary frequency of the speech signal
    (e.g., pitch excitation, multi-pulse excitation, etc.).


CLS 704/265
TXT Interpolation:

    Subject matter under subclass 258 wherein the component parts are combined
    using estimates of intermediate values (e.g., waveform smoothing).


CLS 704/266
TXT Specialized model:

    Subject matter under subclass 258 wherein the component parts are combined
    or linked together in a defined manner (e.g., Markov models, trees, tries
    (tables representing trees), graphs, etc.).


CLS 704/267
TXT Time element:

    Subject matter under subclass 258 wherein the component parts comprise time
    based elements (e.g., words, phonemes, allophones, etc.).


CLS 704/268
TXT Frequency element:

    Subject matter under subclass 258 wherein the component parts comprise
    frequency based elements (e.g., pitch variations, inflection, formants,
    etc.).


CLS 704/269
TXT Transformation:

    Subject matter under subclass 258 wherein the component parts are restored
    to speech using specific mathematical functions (e.g., Fourier, Walsh,
    Hilbert, Z-transform, cosine/sine transforms, etc.).


CLS 704/270
TXT Application:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 intended or designed for a specified use
    to which the speech signal processing is being applied.


CLS 704/271
TXT Handicap aid:

    Subject matter under subclass 270 for assisting handicapped people (e.g.,
    blind or speech impaired communication and control).


CLS 704/272
TXT Novelty item:

    Subject matter under subclass 270 for novelty items (e.g., greeting cards,
    toys, etc.).


CLS 704/273
TXT Security system:

    Subject matter under subclass 270 for providing security (e.g., limited
    access).


CLS 704/274
TXT Warning/alarm system:

    Subject matter under subclass 270 for providing an audible warning or alarm
    (e.g., multiple sensors, car gauges, etc.).


CLS 704/275
TXT Speech controlled system:

    Subject matter under subclass 270 for controlling specific devices through
    speech or voice commands.


CLS 704/276
TXT Pattern display:

    Subject matter under subclass 270 for providing visual output representing
    speech (e.g., computer displays of speech data).


CLS 704/277
TXT Translation:

    Subject matter under subclass 270 for translating one language into another
    language.


CLS 704/278
TXT Sound editing:

    Subject matter under subclass 270 wherein speech is edited using waveform
    portions or other representations of the sounds to be modified.


CLS 704/500
TXT AUDIO SIGNAL BANDWIDTH COMPRESSION OR EXPANSION:

    Subject matter under the class definition where there is either an
    expansion or reduction of the bandwidth required for transmission of a
    sound signal.


    (1)     Note.  This subclass and its indents provide for bandwidth
    compression or expansion of audio signals other than speech signals.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS

    200+,   for expansion or reduction of a speech signal's bandwidth.

    503+,   for time compression or expansion of audio signals.

    SEARCH CLASS

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 14 for amplitude
    compression and expansion in a long transmission line.

    348,    Television, subclasses 384+ for bandwidth reduction of a television
    signal.

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 426+ for bandwidth reduction of a facsimile
    signal.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 8+
    for the use of a magnetic recorder to alter the bandwidth of a signal.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 60 for the use
    of a dynamic storage device to change the bandwidth of a signal.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclass 118 for bandwidth compression in
    a multiplex system.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 240+ for bandwidth
    compression or expansion of a pulse or digital signal.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclass
    106 for amplitude compression or expansion.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 72 for message signal compression or
    expansion in an analog signal modulated carrier wave communication system.


CLS 704/501
TXT With content reduction encoding:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 combined with means to discard and
    replace redundant information by a code indicating what has been discarded.

    SEARCH CLASS

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclass 55 for content
    reduction encoding, per se.


CLS 704/502
TXT Delay line:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 having means to cause a time delay of a
    sound signal.

    SEARCH CLASS

    333,    Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclasses 138 through 165
    for delay lines, per se.


CLS 704/503
TXT AUDIO SIGNAL TIME COMPRESSION OR EXPANSION (E.G., RUN LENGTH CODING):

    Subject matter under the class definition where there is either an
    expansion or reduction of the time required for transmission of a nonspeech
    sound signal.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS

    211+,   for expansion or reduction of the time required for transmission of
    a speech signal.

    500+,   for frequency compression or expansion of a nonspeech audio signal.


    SEARCH CLASS

    358,    Facsimile, subclasses 426+ for time compression of a facsimile
    signal.


    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 8+
    for the use of a magnetic recorder to alter the time duration of a recorded
    signal.


    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 60 for the use
    of a dynamic storage device to alter the time duration of a recorded
    signal.


    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclass 109 for time compression or
    expansion in a time division multiplex system.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, subclass
    106 for amplitude compression or expansion.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 72 for message signal compression or
    expansion in an analog signal modulated carrier wave communication system.



CLS 704/504
TXT With content reduction encoding

    Subject matter under subclass 503 combined with means to discard and
    replace redundant information by a code indicating what has been discarded.

    SEARCH CLASS

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclass 55 for content
    reduction encoding, per se.


CLS 705/
TTL DATA PROCESSING: FINANCIAL, BUSINESS PRACTICE, MANAGEMENT, OR COST/PRICE
    DETERMINATION

CLS 705/
TXT I.  GLOSSARY

    ARRANGEMENT
    Either a device or a method of use of a device for performing the indicated
    process.

    CALCULATING OPERATIONS
    Arithmetic or some limited logic operations performed upon or with signals
    representing numbers or values.

    COMPUTER
    A machine that inputs data, processes data, stores data, and outputs data.


    DATA
    Representation of information in a coded manner suitable for communication,
    interpretation, or processing.

    DATA PROCESSING (for the purpose of this class):
    A systematic operation on data in accordance with a set of rules which
    results in a significant change in the data.

    DEVICE
    An assemblage of components at a single location or which may have its
    several components at geographically distinct locations, i.e., a network.

    ENTERPRISE
    A conventional business organization, a governmental organization or a
    nonprofit organization.

    PRACTICE
    A function directly related to the commercial activity of an enterprise
    (e.g. the exchange, buying or selling of commodities).

    II. GENERAL STATEMENT OF THE CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    This is the generic class for apparatus and corresponding methods for
    performing data processing operations, in which there is a significant
    change in the data or for performing calculation operations wherein the
    apparatus or method is uniquely designed for or utilized in the practice,
    administration, or management of an enterprise, or in the processing of
    financial data.

    This class also provides for apparatus and corresponding methods for
    performing data processing or calculating operations in which a charge for
    goods or services is determined.

    III.  SCOPE OF THE CLASS

    (1)     Note.  The arrangements in this class are generally used for
    problems relating to administration of an organization, commodities or
    financial transactions.

    (2)     Note. Mere designation of an arrangement as a "business machine" or
    a document as a "business form" or "business chart" without any particular
    business function will not cause classification in this class or its
    subclasses.

    (3)     Note. For classification herein, there must be significant claim
    recitation of the data processing system or calculating computer and only
    nominal claim recitation of any external art environment.  Significantly
    claimed apparatus external to this class, claimed in combination with
    apparatus under the class definition, which perform data processing or
    calculation operations are classified in the class appropriate to the
    external device unless specifically excluded therefrom.

    (4)     Note. Nominally claimed apparatus external to this class in
    combination with apparatus under the class definition is classified in this
    class unless provided for in the appropriate external class.

    (5)     Note. In view of the nature of the subject matter included herein,
    consideration of the classification schedule for the diverse art or
    environment is necessary for proper search.

    IV.  SEARCH CLASS

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclasses 25.11+ for a computerized scale.

    186,    Merchandising, various subclasses for customer service methods and
    apparatus in a variety of areas including banking, restaurant and stores.

    235,    Registers, various subclasses for basic machines and associated
    indicating mechanisms for ascertaining the number of movements of various
    devices and machines, plus machines made from these basic machines alone
    (e.g., cash registers, voting machines), and in combination with various
    perfecting features, such as printers and recording means. In addition,
    search Class 235 for various data bearing record controlled systems. Search
    subclasses 375 through 386 for a system having a detail of a record-sensing
    device in combination with a system utilized for banking, determining
    credit, maintaining an inventory, access control, vending, voting, time or
    operations analysis and having no more than a nominal recitation of a
    computer or data processing arrangement.  Search subclasses 7+ for cash
    register; and subclass 61 for mechanically computing a cost/price ratio.
    Note that a nominally claimed record or card sensor is considered to be a
    peripheral of the data processing system.

    283,    Printed Matter, various subclasses for business forms and methods
    of using such forms.

    307,    Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems, various
    subclasses for generic residual electrical transmission or interconnection
    systems and miscellaneous circuits.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, various subclasses for residual
    electrical communication systems, subclasses 825.30+ for communication
    details including authorization, vending, credit and access control; and
    see related Classes 342, 343, 370, and 375.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, various subclasses for
    electrical pulse and digital code conversion.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 418 through 475 for data
    presentation/computer graphics processing; subclasses 112 through 144 for
    data presentation processing; and subclasses 1 through 111 for the
    selective control of two or more light generating or light controlling
    display elements in accordance with a received image signal.

    359,    Optics: Systems (including Communications) and Elements, subclasses
    107+ for an optical computing arrangement.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, which is an
    integral part of Class 369 following subclass 18, for record carriers and
    systems wherein information is stored and retrieved by interaction with a
    medium and there is relative motion between a medium and a transducer, for
    example, magnetic disk drive devices and control thereof, per se.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses
    463.01+ for devices or methods for controlling the processing or
    manufacturing of, or being responsive to a physical or mechanical condition
    of, a product or material, and subclasses 700+ for electrical digital
    calculating computer combined with diverse art device such as a checkbook
    or calendar or with inputs or outputs specialized for a particular
    environment including business.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, various subclasses for
    addressable static singular storage elements or plural singular storage
    elements of the same type.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, various subclasses for
    record carriers and systems wherein information is stored and retrieved by
    interaction with a medium and there is relative motion between a medium and
    a transducer.


    370,    Multiplex Communications, various subclasses for generic
    multiplexing and demultiplexing systems.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, various
    subclasses for generic electrical pulse or pulse coded data error detection
    and correction.


    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, various subclasses for generic
    pulse or digital communication systems.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, various subclasses for generic circuits for pulse
    counting.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, various subclasses for two-way
    electrical communication of intelligible audio information of arbitrary
    content over a link including an electrical conductor.  In addition, search
    subclasses 112+ for a computer controlled telephone charge determining
    arrangement; subclass 284 for a processor controlled central switching
    arrangement.

    380,    Cryptography, subclasses 3+ for stored information access or copy
    prevention (e.g., software program protection or computer virus detection)
    in combination with data encryption, and subclasses 22 through 25 for
    electric signal modification with record carrier, computer, electronic
    funds transfer, user or record actuated authentication.

    382,    Image Analysis, appropriate subclasses for operations performed on
    image data with the aim of measuring a characteristic of an image,
    detecting variations, detecting structures, or transforming the image data,
    and for procedures for analyzing and categorizing patterns present in image
    data.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 1, and 3
    through 99 for artificial intelligence including a neural net, and robot
    control; subclasses 180+ for reliability and availability in a digital data
    processing system; subclasses 200.01+ multicomputer data transferring.

    434,    Education and Demonstration, subclasses 107 through 110, 219+ and
    306 for education or demonstration of business or economics, occupations
    and voting, subclasses 322+ for question or problem eliciting response.

    704,    Data Processing: Speech Signal Processing, Linguistics, Language
    Translation, and Audio Compression/Decompression, subclasses 231+ for a
    speech recognition system.

    707,    Data Processing - Database and File Management, Data Structures, or
    Document Processing, subclasses 1+ for database accessing, subclasses 100+
    for data structure, subclasses 200+ for database maintenance, and
    subclasses 500+ for document processing even if the document is claimed to
    be a "business form".

    902,    Electronic Funds Transfer, for art collections including a detail
    of a security measure, am ATM machine, a terminal or an identifier used in
    an electronic funds transfer.


CLS 705/1
TXT AUTOMATED ELECTRICAL FINANCIAL OR BUSINESS PRACTICE OR MANAGEMENT
    ARRANGEMENT:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein an electrical apparatus
    and its corresponding methods perform the data processing operations, in
    which there is a significant change in the data or for performing
    calculation operations wherein the apparatus or method is uniquely designed
    for or utilized in the practice, administration, or management of an
    enterprise, or in the processing of financial data.

    (1)     Note. The term "arrangement" as used in this and its indented
    subclasses refers to either a device or to a method of use of a device for
    performing the indicated process. Further, a device may be an assemblage of
    components at a single location or may have its several components at
    geographically distinct locations, i.e., a network.

    (2)     Note. The term "enterprise" as used in this and its indented
    subclasses is intended to include governmental and nonprofit organizations,
    as well as conventional business organizations.

    (3)     Note. The arrangements in this and its indented subclasses are
    generally used for problems relating to administration of an organization,
    commodities, financial transactions, or recreation.

    (4)     Note. Mere designation of an arrangement as a "business machine" or
    a document as a "business form" or "business chart" without any particular
    business function will not cause classification in this or its indented
    subclasses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 379 through 383 and 385 for a system having a
    detail of a record-sensing device in combination with a system utilized for
    banking, determining  credit or maintaining an inventory, and having no
    more than a nominal recitation of a computer or data processing
    arrangement. Note that a nominally claimed record or card sensor is
    considered to be a peripheral of the data processing system.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 400+
    for a device which either controls the processing of, or is responsive to a
    physical or mechanical condition of a product or material.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 112+ for a computer
    controlled telephone charge determining arrangement; subclass 284 for a
    processor controlled central switching arrangement.


CLS 705/2
TXT Health care management (e.g., record management, ICDA billing):

    Subject matter under subclass 1 drawn to a computer implemented system or
    method particularly adapted for a health care management or delivery
    organization.

    (1)     Note. The terms "medical" and "health care" are intended to cover
    all type of treatment or diagnosis of the human body, such as dentistry,
    podiatry, pharmaceuticals, etc.

    (2)     Note. The term "particularly adapted" refers to having an element
    peculiar to a health care system.  Incidental use of a business arrangement
    of general utility, in a health care environment will not be classified in
    this or its indented subclasses.

    (3)     Note. Billing systems based on entered medical codes, for example,
    ICDA codes (International Classification of Diseases Abstracted), are
    included herein.


CLS 705/3
TXT Patient record management:

    Subject matter under subclass 2 wherein the system processes the records of
    diagnosis or treatment of a patient.

    (1)     Note. Included herein is processing the records of diagnosis or
    treatment as contrasted to processing information to  obtain the diagnosis
    or treatment, which processing is classified elsewhere.


CLS 705/4
TXT Insurance (e.g., computer implemented system or method for writing
    insurance policy, processing insurance claim, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 1 drawn to a computer implemented system or
    method for writing an insurance policy or processing an insurance claim.

    (1)     Note. Included herein is a system for administering an insurance
    backed security, investment or credit card.


CLS 705/5
TXT Reservation, check-in, or booking display for reserved space:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 drawn to a computerized record keeping
    system for recording allocation of space in advance of use (e.g., airplane,
    train or concert reservation).

    (1)     Note. The term "space" is intended to include seating.

    (2)     Note. Such allocation includes airplane, train, or concert seating,
    as well as hotel room assignment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    13,     for a transportation access system not involving advance allocation
    of a specific space (e.g., fare collection).

    15,     for a restaurant system not involving advance allocation of a
    specific space.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 825.28+ for similar subject
    matter with no more than nominal data processing.


CLS 705/6
TXT Coordination of plural reservations (e.g. plural trip segments,
    transportation and accommodation, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 5 wherein the processing system coordinates
    multiple distinct reservations for a single itinerary.

    (1)     Note. The term "multiple distinct reservations" is not intended to
    include a plurality of similar reservations (e.g., reservations for a
    plurality of seats).


CLS 705/7
TXT Operations research:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 drawn to a computerized arrangement for the
    systematic and scientific analysis and evaluation of a the operation of an
    organization or the programmed scheduling of an organization.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for time accounting of employees or customers, i.e., the tabulation
    of attendance or timed presence of employees or patrons.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclass 376 for record-sensing devices in combination
    with systems utilized for operations analysis.


CLS 705/8
TXT Allocating resources or scheduling for an administrative function:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 for the distribution of resources or for
    scheduling in a business or commercial environment.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for prediction of medical facility usage.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses
    468.05+ for this subject matter combined with a step of, or structure for
    product manufacture or parts assembly or allocation; and 705.08 for this
    subject matter with calendaring.

    368,    Horology: Time Measuring Systems or Devices, for a timing
    arrangement of general utility.


CLS 705/9
TXT Staff scheduling or task assignment:

    Subject matter under subclass 8 for scheduling of or assigning a tasks to
    an individual or group.

    (1)     Note. The designation of an individual may be either by name or
    other designation, e.g., position.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 705.08
    for a digital calculating computer with a calendar designation.


CLS 705/10
TXT Market analysis, demand forecasting or surveying:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 including processing of market data in
    order to predict future demand of a product or service.

    (1)     Note. Use of a data processing arrangement in surveying or polling
    in order to obtain data is included in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for prediction of health care facility usage.


CLS 705/11
TXT Job performance analysis:

    Subject matter under subclass 7 which evaluates the efficiency or
    productivity of an employee or other entity employed by an organization.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    32,     for a data processing system limited to determining time or
    attendance.


CLS 705/12
TXT Voting or election arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 determining the result of an election by
    multiple participants.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclass 386 for a system which reads sheets bearing
    hand-coded indicia representative of various categories and provides a
    total for each category.


CLS 705/13
TXT Transportation facility access (e.g., fare, toll, parking):

    Subject matter under subclass 1 controlling access to a vehicle or vehicle
    related facility in response to payment or other precondition for such
    access.

    (1)     Note. The term "vehicle related facility" designates a location for
    which payment for vehicle admission is required.

    (1)     Note. The reference to "other precondition" is intended to include
    passenger or baggage inspection.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for a system processing data for a vehicle seat reservation.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 33+ for a mechanical fare register.


CLS 705/14
TXT Distribution or redemption of coupon, or incentive or promotion program:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 particularly designed for price reduction
    of, or premium credit resulting from, the purchase of a commodity or
    service.

    (1)     Note.  A coupon dispensing or redeeming electronic cash register is
    classified in this subclass.

    (2)     Note.  A display or advertising system is included herein.


CLS 705/15
TXT Restaurant or bar:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 particularly designed for use in an
    establishment serving food or drink to buyers.

    (1)     Note. Classification in this subclass requires some relationship to
    either the preparation or serving of food or drink.  Incidental placement
    of a system in such an environment  (e.g., an electronic cash register in a
    restaurant)  does not of itself cause classification in this subclass.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    186,    Merchandising, subclasses 38+ for a dining room arrangement absent
    any significant data processing.


CLS 705/16
TXT Including point of sale terminal or electronic cash register:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 drawn to a computerized arrangement for
    including a mechanism for effecting a transaction and determining the
    amount of a sale which may also be a terminal in a system.

    (1)     Note. The mechanism for effecting a transaction may include a
    mechanism for handling cash, or debiting an account or prepaid card.

    (2)     Note. The sale may include a plurality of goods at different
    prices.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    14,     for an automated cash register system having an incentive or
    promotional feature (e.g., coupon dispensing).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    186,    Merchandising, for a general checkout arrangement.

    235,    Registers, subclasses 7+ for a mechanical cash register; subclasses
    2+ for a mechanical cash register with a recorder.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 14 for an electrical register for
    registering counts for different monetary amounts.

    902,    Electronic Funds Transfer, subcollection 22 for a  cross-reference
    art collection of disclosures of a point of sale terminal absent
    significant claimed data processing.


CLS 705/17
TXT Having interface for record bearing medium or carrier for  electronic funds
    transfer or payment credit:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 further including an arrangement for
    reading a customer associated payment effecting data bearing record or
    carrier.

    (1)     Note. Such a data bearing record is intended to include a credit
    card, debit card, or a value bearing ticket.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 375+ for a cash register with a detail of
    record sensing control absent significant data processing.


CLS 705/18
TXT Having security or user identification provision (password entry, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 16 having an arrangement to either prevent
    unauthorized use of, or access to, the cash register; or to identify the
    user of the cash register.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    44,     for a funds transfer system requiring authorization or
    authentication.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    380,    Cryptography, subclasses 23+ for an authentication system using
    encrypted transmission.


CLS 705/19
TXT Tax processing:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 in which the sales terminal system
    computes tax on the transaction.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    31,     for a tax calculation or submission system other than a part of a
    cash register or a sales terminal.


CLS 705/20
TXT Price look-up processing (e.g., updating):

    Subject matter under subclass 16 including a feature of a memory or file
    arrangement for looking up the price of an item being purchased where an
    item designator is entered into the terminal.


CLS 705/21
TXT Interconnection or interaction of plural electronic cash registers(ECRs) or
    to host computer (e.g., network detail, transfer of information from host
    to ECR or from ECR to ECR, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 16 wherein two or more spaced apart
    electronic cash registers (ECRs) are connected for cooperation
    therebetween; or a connection to an ECR is connected for cooperation with a
    host computer spaced apart therefrom.

    (1)     Note. The ECR's are most often connected in a network configuration.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    39,     for similar a similar network for electronic funds transfer not
    claiming an electronic cash register or point of sale terminal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information  Processing System Organization,  200.01+ for a plural
    computer network of general utility.


CLS 705/22
TXT Inventory monitoring:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 wherein the cash register includes an
    arrangement for establishing, maintaining, or updating a record of a store
    of goods.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    28,     for an automated inventory management organization not combined
    with a cash register or sales terminal.


CLS 705/23
TXT Input by product or record sensing (weighing, scanner processing):

    Subject matter under subclass 16 the sales information is input by sensing
    a property of the product being purchased or a record attached thereto.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclass 25.15 for a computerized weighing scale
    which also computes price.

    235,    Registers, subclasses  375+ for a feature of data bearing record
    control for an electronic cash register.


CLS 705/24
TXT Specified transaction journal output feature (e.g., printed receipt, voice
    output, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 16 producing a printed or audible indication
    of each component of a transaction.


CLS 705/25
TXT Specified keyboard feature:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 including a feature of a keyboard
    including a plurality of manually operated switches.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 22+ for a keyboard
    controlled code transmitting device.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 709.12
    for a keyboard input for a digital calculator.


CLS 705/26
TXT Electronic shopping (e.g., remote ordering):

    Subject matter under subclass 1 drawn to a computerized arrangement which
    enables a purchaser to inspect or select from a plurality of different
    items, or effect a purchase of one or more items at a location
    geographically separated from the system user.

    (1)     Note. A remote shopping system is included in this subclass.

    (2)     Note. Browsing of a selection without a purchase transaction is
    classified in this or its indented subclass.


CLS 705/27
TXT Presentation of image or description of sales item (e.g., electronic
    catalog browsing):

    Subject matter under subclass 26 which includes a feature enabling a user
    to inspect a listing, or other visual or audible representation of plural
    items available for purchase.


CLS 705/28
TXT Inventory management:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 drawn to a computerized arrangement for
    establishing, maintaining, or updating a record of a store of goods.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    22,     for an automated inventory management organization combined with a
    cash register or sales terminal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    707,    Data Processing - Database and File Management, Data Structures, or
    Document Processing, subclasses 1+ for a database accessing system of
    general utility.


CLS 705/29
TXT Itemization of parts, supplies, or services (e.g., bill of materials):

    Subject matter under subclass 28 drawn to a computerized arrangement for
    generating an itemized listing of the components needed either totally or
    based on specific tasks in an organization.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 468.14
    for a bill of materials system combined with a step of or structure for,
    product manufacture.


CLS 705/30
TXT Accounting:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 drawn to a computerized arrangement for
    recording, analyzing, verifying, or reporting of funds or other
    quantitatively enumerable factors used in a business.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 14 for electrical registers for registering
    counts for different monetary amounts.

    707,    Data Processing - Database and File Management, Data Structures, or
    Document Processing, subclasses 503+ for a system including a spreadsheet
    not limited to accounting.


CLS 705/31
TXT Tax preparation or submission:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 drawn to a computerized arrangement for
    determining or submitting a tax or tax form to a governmental entity.


CLS 705/32
TXT Time accounting (time and attendance, monitoring billable hours):

    Subject matter under subclass 30 for analysis or allocation of hours either
    (1) worked by an individual, or (2) utilized by and billable to an
    individual or other entity.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    11,     for job performance analysis, computing quantities additional to
    attendance (e.g., productivity).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 143 for
    time responsive control in a plural processor controller arrangement.

    368,    Horology, Time Measuring Systems or Devices, appropriate subclasses
    for time responsive control of general utility.


CLS 705/33
TXT Checkbook balancing, updating or printing arrangement:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 including an arrangement for attaching a
    data processing device to a checkbook, which processes transaction data to
    verify, or carry forward, the checkbook balance, or to print a check, upon
    to entry of an account transaction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 705.02
    for a checkbook attached digital calculator, in which the transaction
    information is limited to the date or transaction amount.


CLS 705/34
TXT Bill preparation:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 including an arrangement for generating a
    notice of payment due.


CLS 705/35
TXT Finance (e.g.,banking, investment or credit):

    Subject matter under subclass 1 drawn to a computerized arrangement for
    planning the disposition or use of funds or securities, or extension of
    credit.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    186,    Merchandising, for a banking structural arrangement.

    235,    Registers, subclass 379 for record-sensing devices in combination
    with a system that maintain financial accounts; i.e., a banking system; and
    subclass 380 for a system that includes the ascertaining of credit.

    707,    Data Processing - Database and File Management, Data Structures, or
    Document Processing, subclasses 503+ for a system including a spreadsheet
    not limited to accounting.


CLS 705/36
TXT Portfolio selection, planning or analysis:

    Subject matter under subclass 35 drawn to a computerized arrangement for
    planning the selection or evaluation of securities or other investments for
    a single entity.

    (1)     Note. The term "entity" refers to an individual or other legally
    recognized body.


CLS 705/37
TXT Trading, matching, or bidding:

    Subject matter under subclass 35 including the trading or exchange of
    securities or commodities within an organized system.

    (1)     Note. This subclass includes distribution of services or products
    (e.g., utilities, heating, etc.) in a building by an "auction" or bidding
    system.


CLS 705/38
TXT Credit (risk) processing or loan processing (e.g., mortgage):

    Subject matter under subclass 35 drawn to a computerized arrangement for
    evaluation of the risk factors in a loan determination.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclass 380 for a record-sensing device in combination
    with a system that includes the ascertaining of credit.


CLS 705/39
TXT Including funds transfer or credit transaction:

    Subject matter under subclass 35 drawn to a computerized arrangement for
    transferring funds by debiting one account and crediting another by the
    same amount.

    (1)      Note. The accounts may be of the same or different individuals or
    entities.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    902,    Electronic Funds Transfer, appropriate subcollections for a
    cross-reference art collection of disclosures of  electronic funds transfer
    without significant claimed data processing.


CLS 705/40
TXT Bill distribution or payment:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 drawn to a computerized arrangement for
    generating notices of payment due, or transferring funds in response
    thereto.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2+,     this subject matter particularly adapted for health insurance
    claims or payments.


CLS 705/41
TXT Having programming of a portable memory device (e.g., IC card, "electronic
    purse"):

    Subject matter under subclass 39 having a user operated arrangement for
    programming an object having a value carrying memory (e.g., an ATM card)
    prior to use, with details of the desired transaction.

    (1)     Note. Such cards usually include an integrated circuit (IC)
    element, and are often referred to as "smart cards".

    (2)     Note. Included herein is a transaction specific card preprogramming
    arrangement.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclass 674 for semiconductor smart card structure.

    902,    Electronic Funds Transfer, subcollection 26 for a cross-reference
    art collection of disclosures of an ATM or similar card carrying
    semiconductor or processing circuitry.


CLS 705/42
TXT Remote banking (e.g., home banking):

    Subject matter under subclass 39 for an arrangement for effecting the
    custody, loan, exchange, or issue of money for the extension of credit or
    for facilitating the transmission of funds from a computer at a location
    geographically spaced apart from a banking establishment.

    (1)     Note. Such a computer may be located in a user's residence or place
    of business.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    18,     for a point of sale terminal requiring authorization or
    authentication.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclass 379 for a record-sensing device in combination
    with a system that maintains financial accounts, i.e., banking system.

    902,    Electronic Funds Transfer, subcollection 26 for a cross-reference
    art collection of disclosures of home banking using a general purpose
    terminal.


CLS 705/43
TXT Including Automatic Teller Machine  (i.e., ATM):

    Subject matter under subclass 39 drawn to a computerized arrangement to
    either (a) accept for deposit by a user*, or (b) convey for withdrawal to a
    user*, a financial document or currency; in connection with a computerized
    concurrent transaction.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    902,    Electronic Funds Transfer, subcollections 8+ for a cross-reference
    art collection of disclosures of an ATM terminal.


CLS 705/44
TXT Requiring authorization or authentication:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 in which an approval is required prior to
    effecting a funds transfer between accounts.

    (1)     Note. Such approval may be related to either the permitted amount
    of the transaction or the identity or authorization of the user.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    380,    Cryptography, subclasses 23+ for an authentication system using
    encrypted transmission.


CLS 705/45
TXT With paper check handling:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 which processes a paper document
    authorizing the transaction check as part of the funds transfer operation.

    (1)     Note. The document may be a check, deposit slip or withdrawal slip.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for an electronic cash register which may process (e.g., endorse a
    check by printing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 375+ for a check reading system absent
    significant data processing.

    382,    Image Analysis, subclass 137 for a pattern reading image analysis
    system for reading a bank check.


CLS 705/400
TXT FOR COST/PRICE:

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein the data processing or
    calculating computer is designed for or utilized in determining charges for
    goods or services.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1+,     for a specific application of business practice and management,
    particularly subclasses 5+ for reservation system including means for
    calculating a fare, subclasses 16+ for a cash register for calculating
    cost/price of commodity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 7+ for a cash register, and subclass 61 for
    mechanically computing a cost/price ratio.


CLS 705/401
TXT Postage meter system:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein the data processing  or
    calculating computer comprises means for determining and printing cost
    required for mailing an article.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclasses 25.11+ for generic weight  determining
    devices utilizing mathematical computing.


CLS 705/402
TXT Special service or fee (e.g., discount, surcharge, adjustment, etc.)

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein a basic postage fee is modified
    to accommodate a particular postage service or condition.

    (1)     Note. The particular postage service includes, for example, express
    mail, certified mail, c.o.d, special delivery, insurance, return receipt,
    etc.

    (2)     Note. The condition includes,for example, discount, surcharge,
    adjustment, the least costly fee, etc.

    (3)     Note. A mere recitation of functional inputting means representing
    special service or charge without a step or procedure to carry out the
    modification of the fee is excluded from this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    409,  for postage meter system comprising means for revising a   postage
    rate structure.


CLS 705/403
TXT Recharging:

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein said data processing or
    calculating computer comprises means for resetting a stored value of credit
    representing a postage fund available within a postage meter system.


CLS 705/404
TXT Record keeping:

    Subject matter under subclass 401 comprising means for storing a list of
    cumulative historical information related to a postage activity.


CLS 705/405
TXT Data protection:

    Subject matter under subclass 401 comprising means for preventing postage
    information from being inadvertently modified or destroyed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 186+ for
    information processing system having  a security feature for protection of
    system hardware, software, or data.


CLS 705/406
TXT With specific mail handling means:

    Subject matter under  subclass 401 including details of means for
    performing a mailing process associated with the article.

    (1)     Note. Means for performing a mailing process includes, for example,
    feeder, conveyor, inserter, sorter, sealer, stacker, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclasses 154+ for forming and packing contents
    unit from plural or different supply sources.

    198,    Conveyors: Power-Driven, appropriate subclasses for a particular
    type of conveying system.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 900 for  a
    cross reference art collection involving sorting flat-type mail.


CLS 705/407
TXT Including mailed item weight:

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein postage of the article is
    determined from the weight of the article.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for  a point of sale terminal or an electronic cash register having
    a weighing device.

    414+,   for computing means including a weighing device for computing
    weight and cost of goods.


CLS 705/408
TXT Specific printing:

    Subject matter under subclass 401 including details of a printing mechanism
    or of information to be printed.

    (1)     Note. The details of information to be printed includes, for
    example, messages, graphical data, coded data, encrypted  information, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    410,     for a software printing control module.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, appropriate subclasses for printing  by impression of
    types or die or by applying coating matter through  perforations, as in
    stenciling.

    347,    Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, appropriate
    subclasses for printing information dot by dot using an ink- jet, an
    electric, a thermal or a light or beam recording apparatus.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 101+ for
    static presentation processing in which processed data is  presented for
    viewing on a fixed medium, such as paper.


CLS 705/409
TXT Rate updating:

    Subject matter under subclass  401 comprising means for revising a postage
    rate structure .

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    402,    for postage meter system comprising means for modifying a  basic
    postage fee to accommodate a particular postage  service or condition
    (e.g., discount, surcharge,  adjustment, etc.)


CLS 705/410
TXT Specialized function performed:

    Subject matter under subclass 401 wherein the data processing or
    calculating computer is programmed to carry out a sequence of  instructions
    related to a predetermined task associated with the postage meter system.

    (1)     Note. Tasks includes input and output distribution, interrupt
    processing, job scheduling, message transmitting, etc.


CLS 705/411
TXT Display controlling:

    Subject matter under subclass 410 wherein the sequence of instructions is
    for visually presenting postage related information to an operator.

    (1)     Note. Operation  for controlling devices solely for producing a
    "hard copy"  (e.g., printer, plotter, etc.)  is excluded from this
    subclass.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    408,    for postage meter system including details of printing  mechanism
    or of information to be printed.


CLS 705/412
TXT Utility usage:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 in which the charges reflect a consumed
    quantity of power or energy (e.g., electricity, gas, therm , etc.) or water.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    413,    for a determined cost/price of a fluid.


CLS 705/413
TXT Fluid:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 in which the charges is determined for a
    dispensed volume or a delivered quantity of a flowing substance (e.g.,
    liquid or gas).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    412,    for a determined cost/price of a consumed quantity of power  or
    energy.


CLS 705/414
TXT Weight:

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein the goods are weighted to
    determine the charges.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for a point of sale terminal or an electronic cash register having
    a weighing device.

    407,    for a postage meter system including weighing means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    177,    Weighing Scales, subclasses 3 and 25.11+ for computing weight  with
    specific structure to the weighing means.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems,  subclasses 567+
    for electrical computers and data processing systems including weight
    measuring, testing or monitoring means.


CLS 705/415
TXT Correcting or compensating:

    Subject matter under subclass 414 comprising means for obtaining an
    accurate weight measurement of the goods by means of a zero correction
    factor, tare weight, or weighing scale motion detection.


CLS 705/416
TXT Specific input and output device :

    Subject matter under subclass 414 comprising details of means for entering
    or visually presenting information relating to the goods.

    (1)     Note. The details include, for example, control panel, input unit
    with  functional keys, reader means, interactive display means,  dot matrix
    printer, cathode ray tubes, etc.


CLS 705/417
TXT Distance ( e.g., taximeter):

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein the charge is determined using
    the units of miles or kilometers travelled.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 33+ for fare registers; and subclass 384 for
    record-sensing devices in combination with means that determine the price
    based on distance travelled.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 561+
    for electrical computers and data processing systems having a distance
    measuring, testing, or monitoring means.


CLS 705/418
TXT Time (e.g., parking meter):

    Subject matter under subclass 400 wherein the charges reflect a purchased
    activity period.

    (1)     Note. The charge may include special fee or surcharge due to
    special time of day or year, location, etc.)

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 569 for
    electrical computers and data processing systems having a time or time
    interval measuring, testing, or monitoring means.

    368,    Horology: Time Measuring Systems or Devices, subclasses 89+ for
    time interval measuring means.


CLS 705/500
TXT MISCELLANEOUS (E.G., BY GENERIC OR NONELECTRICAL COMPUTING):

    Subject matter under the class definition not provided for in any of the
    preceding subclasses of this class.

    (1)     Note. This subclass also includes subject matter under the subclass
    in which the data processing is not clearly described as electrical or
    being performed by a computer.

    FOREIGN ART COLLECTIONS

    The definitions for FOR 100-FOR 106 below correspond to the definitions of
    the abolished subclasses under Class 364 from which these collections were
    formed.  See the Foreign Art Collection schedule for specific
    correspondences.  [Note:  The titles and definitions for indented art
    collections include all the details of the one(s) that are hierarchically
    superior.]


CLS 705/FOR100
TXT  For cost/price:

    Foreign art collection wherein the data processing system or calculating
    computer is designed for or utilized in determining charges for goods or
    services, or is utilized for the solution of a problem in this area.


CLS 705/FOR101
TXT  Postage meter system:

    Foreign art collection for determining cost associated with mailing an
    article.



CLS 705/FOR102
TXT  Including mailed item weight:

    Foreign art collection where the weight of the article to be mailed is used
    to determine the cost.


CLS 705/FOR103
TXT  Utility usage:

    Foreign art collection in which the cost reflects utility (e.g.,
    electricity, gas, water) usage.


CLS 705/FOR104
TXT  Fluid:

    Foreign art collection wherein the goods are fluids.


CLS 705/FOR105
TXT  Weight:

    Foreign art collection wherein goods are weighed.


CLS 705/FOR106
TXT  Distance or time (e.g., taximeters):

    Foreign art collection wherein the cost is per unit of distance or unit of
    time.


CLS 707/
TTL DATA PROCESSING: DATABASE AND FILE MANAGEMENT, DATA STRUCTURES, OR DOCUMENT
    PROCESSING

CLS 707/
TXT I.      GLOSSARY

    The terms below have been defined for purposes of classification in this
    class and are shown in underlined type when used in the class and subclass
    definitions. When these terms are not underlined in the definitions, the
    meaning is not restricted to the glossary definitions below.

    DATABASE

    A collection of data arranged for ease of storage, retrieval, updating,
    searching and sorting by computerized means.

    FILE

    A named collection of data.

    COMPUTER

    A machine that inputs data, processes data, stores data, and outputs data.


    DATA

    Representation of information in a coded manner suitable for communication,
    interpretation, or processing.

            Address data - Data that represent or identify a source or
    destination.


            Instruction data - Data that represent an operation and identify
    its operands, if any.

            Status data - Data that represent conditions of data, computers,
    peripherals, memory, etc.

            User data - Data other than address data, instruction data, or
    status data.

    DATA PROCESSING

    See PROCESSING, below.

    DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING SYSTEM

    An arrangement of processor(s) in combination with either memory or
    peripherals, or both, performing data processing.

    INFORMATION

    Meaning that a human being assigns to data by means of the conventions
    applied to that data.

    MEMORY

    A functional unit to which data can be stored and from which data can be
    retrieved.


    PERIPHERAL

    A functional unit that transmits data to or receives data from a computer
    to which it is coupled.

    PROCESSING

    Methods or apparatus performing systematic operations upon data or
    information exemplified by functions such as data or information
    transferring, merging, sorting, and calculating (i.e., arithmetic
    operations or logical operations).

    (1)     Note.  In this class, the glossary term data is used to modify
    processing in the term data processing; whereas the term digital data
    processing system refers to a machine performing data processing.

    (2)     Note. In an effort to avoid redundant constructions, in this class,
    where appropriate, the term address data processing is used in place of
    address data data processing.

    PROCESSOR

    A functional unit that interprets and executes instruction data.

    II.     GENERAL STATEMENT OF THE CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    A.      This is the generic class for data processing apparatus and
    corresponding methods for the retrieval of data stored in a database or as
    computer files.

    B.      This class also provides for data processing means or steps for
    organizing and inter-relating data or files (e.g., relational, network,
    hierarchical, and entity-relationship models).

    C.      This class also provides for data processing means or steps for
    generic data, file and directory upkeeping, file naming, and file and
    database maintenance including integrity consideration, recovery, and
    versioning.

    D.      This class also provides for data processing means or steps wherein
    human perceptible elements of electronic information (i.e. text or
    graphics) are gathered, associated, created, formatted, edited, prepared,
    or otherwise processed in forming a unified collection of such information
    storable as a distinct entity.

    III.    RELATIONSHIP WITH OTHER CLASSES

    A.      DATABASE AND FILE ACCESSING

    (1)     Note.  This class is directed to computerized database and file
    accessing and retrieval, including hierarchical, bit-mapped and flat
    indexing, hashing, stapling, containerizing, and other methods.  Accessing
    and control of a memory, per se, is classified elsewhere.  See the search
    class notes below.

    (2)     Note.  The combination of details of database technology with the
    business data processing is classified in the business art. See search
    class notes below.

    (3)     Note.  The combination of details of database technology with a
    nominal recitation of the subject matter of another class is classified
    herein. Particular fields of use of database technology performing in
    combination with the basic subject matter of another class to effect some
    end other than mere information accessing or retrieval, is classified with
    the subject matter of the other class, unless specifically excluded
    therefrom.  See the search class notes below.

    (4)     Note.  This class is directed to generic methods and apparatus for
    accessing and retrieving data housed in either databases or files.  The
    generic steps to access and retrieve an object from an object-oriented
    database may be properly classified herein; however, objects themselves for
    an application other than database accessing and retrieving data, such as,
    for example an operator interface object, an icon object capable of
    instantiating a process, or a simulation system physical structure object
    are classified elsewhere.  See the search class notes below.

    (5)     Note.  This class is directed to generic methods and apparatus for
    accessing and retrieving data housed in either databases or files.  The
    generic steps of accessing and retrieving data or information in a
    particular computer design "environment" may be properly classified herein.
     Examples of such "environments" include, for example, a computer aided
    design (CAD) and analysis tool "environment", a software development tool
    "environment",  an image processing "environment", a desk-top or other
    operator interface "environment", etc., may rely on accessing and
    retrieving information or routines from libraries while working in the
    "environment".  The "environments" themselves are classified elsewhere in
    the data processing arts.  See the search class notes below.

    (6)     Note.  The combination of a database accessing method with a
    particular operator interface feature may be found in these subclasses.
    Operator interfaces, per se, are classified elsewhere.  See the search
    class notes below.

    B.      DATABASE SCHEMA AND DATA STRUCTURES

    (1)     Note.  Classification herein requires a combination of a data
    structure and the access or retrieval method, or apparatus for employing or
    storing the data structure.

    C.      FILE AND DATABASE MAINTENANCE

    (1)     Note.  This class is directed to means and steps for handling of
    generic files and databases only in computers and digital data processing
    systems.   For the purpose of these definitions a generic file is defined
    as a named collection of data.  File content and database content
    authoring, generating, producing, and editing in information processing
    applications art areas, such as, for example, business data processing
    machine translation, graphics processing, simulation, animation and
    software development, is classified elsewhere.

    (2)     Note.  This class is directed to management and maintenance of
    files and databases in computers and digital data processing systems and
    accepts subject solutions working within single memories and across
    multiple memories.  Memory accessing and control and memory management, per
    se, is classified elsewhere.

    (3)     Note.  This class is directed to management and maintenance of
    files and databases in computers and digital data processing systems and
    accepts only nominal recitations to operator interfaces, icons, and other
    metaphors used in the maintenance of files and databases.  File management
    tools, metaphors, or objects with significant operator interface features
    are classified elsewhere.

    (4)     Note.  Formatting and file allocation in memory systems, such as
    direct access storage systems, is generally found in the art area directed
    to the storage system device.

    IV.     THIS CLASS IS STRUCTURED INTO FIVE MAIN DIVISIONS:

    1.      Database and file accessing, subclasses 1+.

    2.      Database schema and data structure, subclasses 100+.

    3.      File and database maintenance, subclasses 200+.

    4.      Document processing, subclasses 500+.

    5.      Cross-Reference Art Collections, subclasses 900+.

    V.      SEARCH CLASS

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 630+ for diagnostic testing and appropriate
    subclasses for applications of computers in the life sciences including
    patient monitoring and medical imaging.

    235,    Registers, various subclasses for basic machines and associated
    indicating mechanisms for ascertaining the number of movements of various
    devices and machines, plus machines made from these basic machines alone
    (e.g., cash registers, voting machines), and in combination with various
    perfecting features, such as printers and recording means. In addition,
    search Class 235 for various data bearing record controlled systems.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, And
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 326+ for operator interfaces,
    subclasses 418+ for computer graphics processing and particularly subclass
    302 for synchronization of diverse media, subclasses 1-111 for visual
    display systems with selective electrical control including display memory
    organization and structure for storing image data and manipulating image
    data between a display memory and display device.

    358,    Facsimile, appropriate subclasses for transmitting, processing, or
    reproducing a permanent picture.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 130+
    for data processing control systems, 400+ for applications of computers in
    various environments, 550+ for applications of computers in measuring and
    testing, 600+ for hybrid computers, 700+ for calculators, digital signal
    processing and arithmetical processing, per se, and 800+ for electric
    analog computers.


    379,    Telephonic Communications, various subclasses for two-way
    electrical communication of intelligible audio information of arbitrary
    content over a link including an electrical conductor.

    381,    Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices, various
    subclasses for wired one-way audio systems, per se.

    382,    Image Analysis, various subclasses for operations performed on
    image data with the aim of measuring a characteristic of an image,
    detecting variations, detecting structures, or transforming the image data,
    and for procedures for analyzing and categorizing patterns present in image
    data.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 1+ for
    artificial intelligence, subclass 500 for simulation, and subclasses 701+
    for software development tool.

    704,    Data Processing - Speech Signal Processing, Linguistics, Language
    Translation, and Audio Compression/Decompression, subclasses 1+ for
    linguistics.

    705,    Data Processing - Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/Price Determination, appropriate subclasses for business data
    processing.

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems - Memory,
    subclasses 1 through 5 for addressing particular memory configurations and
    systems, subclasses 100+ for memory accessing and control, per se, and in
    particular subclasses 113 for disk caching, subclasses 117+ for
    hierarchical memory, per se, subclasses 118+ for caching, subclasses 147+
    for shared memory accessing and control, subclasses 154-166 for memory
    control, maintenance and management techniques, subclasses 161-162 for
    archiving and backup under memory accessing, subclasses 163+ for memory
    access limiting, subclasses 170+ for memory configuring and allocation,
    subclasses 200+ for address formation processing, and subclass 216 for
    address hashing.


CLS 707/1
TXT DATABASE OR FILE ACCESSING:

    Subject matter under the class definition directed to the  retrieval of
    data stored in a database or as computer files,  where a file is defined as
    a named collection of data.

    (1)     Note.  This class is directed to computerized database and file
    accessing and retrieval, including hierarchical, bit-mapped and flat
    indexing, hashing, stapling, containerizing, and other methods.  Accessing
    and control of a memory, per se, is classified elsewhere.  See the search
    class notes below.

    (2)     Note.  The combination of details of database technology with the
    business data processing is classified in the business art. See search
    class notes below.

    (3)     Note.  The combination of details of database technology with a
    nominal recitation of the subject matter of another class is classified
    herein. Particular fields of use of database technology performing in
    combination with the basic subject matter of another class to effect some
    end other than mere information accessing or retrieval is classified with
    the subject matter of the other class, unless specifically excluded
    therefrom.  See the search class notes below.

    (4)     Note.  This class is directed to generic methods and apparatus for
    accessing and retrieving data housed in either databases or files.  The
    generic steps to access and retrieve an object from an object-oriented
    database may be properly classified herein; however, objects themselves for
    an application other than database accessing and retrieving data, such as,
    for example an operator interface object, an icon object capable of
    instantiating a process, or a simulation system physical structure object
    are classified elsewhere.  See the search class notes below.

    (5)     Note.  This class is directed to generic methods and apparatus for
    accessing and retrieving data housed in either databases or files.  The
    generic steps of accessing and retrieving data or information in a
    particular computer design "environment" may be properly classified herein.
     Examples of such "environments" include, for example, a computer aided
    design (CAD) and analysis tool "environment", a software development tool
    "environment",  an image processing "environment", a desk-top or other
    operator interface "environment", etc., may rely on accessing and
    retrieving information or routines from libraries while working in the
    "environment".  The "environments" themselves are classified elsewhere in
    the data processing arts.  See the search class notes below.

    (6)     Note.  The combination of a database accessing method with a
    particular operator interface feature may be found in these subclasses.
    Operator interfaces, per se, are classified elsewhere.  See the search
    class notes below.

    KEYWORDS:       Directory, hierarchy, hierar-
                    chical, tree, indexing, point-
                    ers, folders, books, bit map,
                    hashing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100+,   for data structures, per se.

    102,    for indexing, per se, in the creation of a database.

    500+,   for document processing, per se.

    501,    for processing a document including hypermedia.

    513,    for processing a structured document (e.g., HTML, SGML, ODA, CDA).

    515+,   for compound documents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 630+ for diagnostic testing and appropriate
    subclasses for applications of computers in the life sciences including
    patient monitoring and medical imaging.

    273,    Amusement Devices: Games, for games and amusements. Classes 463 and
    473 will eventually replace 273.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclass 302 for synchronization of
    documents with multiple different media, subclasses 326+, for operator
    interfaces, per se, in particular subclasses 333+ for interface
    customization, subclasses 339+ for on-screen workspaces or objects,
    subclasses 348+ for icons and subclasses 352+ for menus.

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 403 directed to facsimile document filing and
    retrieval system.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses
    468.01+ for manufacturing applications of computers, subclasses 490+ for
    integrated circuit design systems (e.g., silicon compilers), subclasses
    550+ for measuring and testing, per se, both of which may include
    generation of sets of interrelated data over time, and subclass 578 for
    simulation and simulation environments, per se.

    382,    Image Analysis, for image recognition, transformation and sensing,
    per se, and applications therefor.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 1+ for
    artificial intelligence, subclasses 182.13+ for state recovery, per se, in
    particular, subclass 182.18 for plural recovery sets with set interrelation
    data, subclass 500 for design and analysis environments directed to circuit
    design, and physical system design which may include the use of libraries,
    and subclasses 701+ for a software development environment which may
    include database usage.

    463,    Amusement Devices: Games, for a specific type of amusement,
    recreation, or play activity.

    472,    Amusement Devices, for the amusement or recreation of human beings,
    and includes patents relating to devices of the type.

    473,    Amusement Devices: Games, for devices ancillary or appurtenant to
    games for which there is no provision in other classes.

    704,    Data Processing - Speech Signal Processing, Linguistics, Language
    Translation, and Audio Compression/Decompression, subclass 10 for
    dictionary building in machine translation systems.

    705,    Data Processing - Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/Price Determination, subclasses 1+ for applications of databases in
    business transaction processing.

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems - Memory,
    subclasses 1 through 5 for addressing particular memory configurations and
    systems, subclasses 100+ for memory accessing and control, per se, and in
    particular subclasses 113 for disk caching, subclasses 117+ for
    hierarchical memory, per se, subclasses 118+ for caching, subclasses 147+
    for shared memory accessing and control, subclasses 170+ for memory
    configuring and allocation, subclasses 200+ for address formation
    processing, and subclass 216 for address hashing.


CLS 707/2
TXT Access augmentation or optimizing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 directed to methods of access, including
    query path traversal, mapping, and reuse, joining tables in relational
    databases, view composition, index choice, bit mapping, and query reuse.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    501,    for processing a document including hypermedia.

    513,    for processing a structured document (e.g., HTML, SGML, ODA, CDA).

    515+,   for compound documents.

    532,    for text data document processing with a dictionary.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.01-825.04 for selective
    communications path routing.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 443+
    for navigation within a physical reality, subclasses 715.01+ for
    arithmetical processing of data.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 182.02 for
    masking or reconfiguring of network paths, subclass 200.03 for distributed
    data processing, subclasses 311+ for bus path selecting in a computer or
    digital data processing system, subclass 676 for identifying and dealing
    with run-time dependencies between executing programs, tasks, processes
    (e.g., data dependencies, control flow dependencies, etc.), and subclass
    709 for optimizing compilers.

    704,    Data Processing - Speech Signal Processing, Linguistics, Language
    Translation, and Audio Compression/Decompression, subclass 10 for
    linguistics dictionary building.

    705,    Data Processing - Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/Price Determination, subclasses 7+ for operations research, per se,
    including systems directed to generalized linear programming problem
    solving.


CLS 707/3
TXT Query processing (i.e., searching):

    Subject matter under subclass 1 directed to methods of searching for (i.e.,
    querying) data stored as a database in a computer or digital data
    processing system, including sequential searching, primary and secondary
    index searching, and bit-map searching of inverted lists or topological
    maps.

    (1)     Note. The combination of a database accessing method with a
    particular operator interface feature may be found in these subclasses.
    Operator interfaces, per se, are classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    530+,   for text document processing, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 18+ for writing systems such as, for
    example, digitizing tablets.

    235,    Registers, subclasses 375+ for systems controlled by data bearing
    member.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 156+ for input devices such as
    mice, touch screens, etc., subclasses 326+ for operator interfaces, per se,
    and in particular subclasses 339+ for on-screen workspaces and objects,
    subclasses 340+ for windowing, and subclass 347 for pop-up controls.

    353,    Optics: Image Projectors, subclass 25 for selective optical data
    retrieval.


    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 12 for input
    means in a knowledge based system and subclasses 705+ for program compilers
    and procedural language translators.

    704,    Data Processing - Speech Signal Processing, Linguistics, Language
    Translation, and Audio Compression/Decompression, subclasses 1+ for machine
    translation and linguistic data processing and subclasses 200+ for speech
    translation methods and apparatus.


CLS 707/4
TXT Query formulation, input preparation, or translation:

    Subject matter under subclass 3 directed to methods for translating an
    external access to a database or files into internal access to the database
    or files, and translation of an external query format into an intermediate
    or internal query format.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    503     through 510, for spreadsheets, forms, and tables under document
    processing.


CLS 707/5
TXT Query augmenting or refining (e.g., inexact access):

    Subject matter under subclass 3 directed to methods of expanding or
    limiting access to and retrieval of data or files by techniques including
    fuzzy search, ranking or weighing, relevance, thesaurus, and concept
    retrieval.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    530+,   for text document processing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 3 for fuzzy
    logic, per se, subclasses 10+ for knowledge processing, per se, including
    trainable neural nets and expert systems, subclasses 186+ for processing
    system security, and subclasses 726 and 728+ for limiting access to system
    resources and access arbitrating.

    704,    Data Processing - Speech Signal Processing, Linguistics, Language
    Translation, and Audio Compression/Decompression, subclasses 1+ for
    linguistic data processing and machine translation.

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems - Memory,
    subclasses 163+ for memory access limiting.


CLS 707/6
TXT Pattern matching access:

    Subject matter under subclass 3 directed to methods employing determination
    of equivalence of retrieval keys and stored data by matching characteristic
    patterns of one data set with one or more characteristic patterns of a
    candidate data set.

    (1)     Note. This subclass includes text searching and indexing, per se,
    for database. Text presentation data processing is classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500+,   for document processing, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    364,    Electrical Computer and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 700+
    for arithmetical processing, per se, and subclass 715.11 for detection of a
    particular sequence of bits.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery.

    382,    Image Analysis, appropriate subclasses for image recognition,
    transformation, and sensing, per se, and applications therefor,
    particularly subclasses 181+ for image pattern recognition.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 676 for
    identifying and dealing with run-time dependencies between executing
    programs, tasks, processes (e.g., data dependencies, control flow
    dependencies, etc.).

    704,    Data Processing - Speech Signal Processing, Linguistics, Language
    Translation, and Audio Compression/Decompression, subclasses 2+ for machine
    translation systems.

    705,    Data Processing - Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/Price Determination, subclasses 7+ for operations research, per se,
    including systems directed to generalized linear programming problem
    solving.


CLS 707/7
TXT Sorting:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 directed to data oriented accessing methods
    benefiting from the creation of ordered lists.

    (1)     Note. For clarification, sorting includes elementary sorting
    methods such as selection sort, bubble sort, distribution counting, and
    other methods, such as Quicksort, Radix Sort, Priority Queues including
    heap sort, Selection and Merging, and External sort.

    (2)     Note. This subclass is for sorting database data or files. Generic
    sorting, per se, is classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 50+ for digital
    code to digital code convertors.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 800 for sorter
    processing in computer and digital data processing system architectures,
    and  subclass 898 for generic string-level and byte-word level order
    rearranging, bit-field insertion and extraction, and string length and
    sequence detecting.


CLS 707/8
TXT Concurrency (e.g., lock management in shared database):

    Subject matter under subclass 1 directed to serialization of multiple
    accesses to the same unit of data or file for the purpose of data
    integrity.

    (1)     Note. Concurrency is related to controlling the ability of a
    plurality of users to simultaneously access the same (i.e., a single unit
    or copy of) information or proximately located information stored in a
    database or file (i.e., the ability to control "sharing" of information).
    Such control may involve the prioritizing or serializing of access to the
    "shared" information, or the copying of information into independent
    copies, which must ultimately be "integrated" for data coherency.
    Coherency, on other hand, although a related topic, is related to the
    maintaining of multiple copies of information in a database or file in a
    manner which ensures data integrity amongst the plurality of copies,
    regardless of whether a single user or plurality of simultaneous users are
    accessing the information. When a plurality of users are accessing the
    plurality of copies of information, then both concurrency and coherency
    concepts may be involved, and the subject matter may be properly classified
    herein based on hierarchy. Database or file coherency, per se, is
    classified elsewhere. Source code version management and software version
    management are classified elsewhere.

    (2)     Note. For clarification, the methods of ensuring data concurrency
    include employing time-stamping, semaphores, global and local shared
    locking (i.e., read only), and exclusive locking (i.e., read and write),
    multiple versioning, and temporal versioning, such as snapshots.

    (3)     Note. This subclass is directed to data integrity in database
    accessing and control. A concept search on this subject or the related
    subjects of data coherency and version management should consider the
    related topics as they appear in this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    511,    for document version management under document processing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 327-332 for operator interface
    aspects of workgroup data processing environments for plural users or sites
    and subclass 971 for a cross-reference art collection directed to interface
    aspects of cooperative decision support systems for groups of users.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 676 for
    identifying and dealing with runtime dependencies between executing
    programs, tasks, processes (e.g., data dependencies, control flow
    dependencies, etc.), subclass 703 for source code version management in a
    software programming environment, subclass 712 for software installation
    and version management of operating systems, application programs, and
    other executable programs, and subclass 726 for access locking.

    705,    Data Processing - Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/Price Determination, subclasses 1 through 45 for automated financial
    or business practice or management systems and in particular subclasses 1
    through 6 for file and database maintenance systems including data
    coherency in database systems.

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems - Memory,
    subclasses 141 through 146 for cache memory data coherency, and subclasses
    147 through 153 for sharing memory and prioritized access regulation.


CLS 707/9
TXT Privileged access:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 directed to determination and granting of
    access to data and files by direct means, such as by the file or database
    creator or database manager, or by indirect means, such as by inheritance,
    such as by group/user access profiles.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is directed to access control in database
    systems. Computer system security is classified elsewhere.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is directed to access control in database
    systems. The concept of access control exists throughout the class.
    Therefore, a search to a particular concept of access control should
    consider the related topics in bus access control, memory access control,
    computer system access control, generic access control, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 327-332 for operator interface
    aspects of workgroup data processing environments for plural users or
    sites.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 186+ for
    computer security, per se, and  subclasses 287+ for bus access regulating.

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems - Memory,
    subclasses 147+ for shared memory access and control, and subclasses 163+
    for access limiting and password use in memory accessing and control.


CLS 707/10
TXT Distributed or remote access:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 directed to management of distributed
    database data and file access and retrieval, and retrieval of database data
    and files from a centralized or remote site.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 327-332 for operator interface
    aspects of workgroup data processing environments for plural users or sites
    and subclass 971 for a cross-reference art collection directed to interface
    aspects of cooperative decision support systems for groups of users.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 200.03 for
    multicomputer distributed data processing, subclass 200.05 for
    multicomputer data transfer processing with master/slave arrangement, and
    subclass 800 for processor, coprocessor arrangements.

    705,    Data Processing - Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/Price Determination, subclasses 1+ for automated business systems, per
    se, and in particular subclasses 26-27 for electronic shopping and
    catalogue browsing.


    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems - Memory,
    subclasses 117 through 146 for hierarchical memory and caching, and
    subclasses 147+ for shared memory access and control.


CLS 707/100
TXT DATABASE SCHEMA OR DATA STRUCTURE:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising means or steps for
    organizing and inter-relating data or files, including relational, network,
    hierarchical, and entity-relationship models, among others.

    (1)     Note.  Classification herein requires a combination of a data
    structure and the access or retrieval method, or apparatus for employing or
    storing the data structure.

    KEYWORDS:       entity relational, entity
    attrib-                       ute, relational, hierarchical             and
     network databases, b-                          tree, temporal multi-key,

                    superblock, cross-linked
                    tree, referential constraints,
                    linked list, dual linked, quad
                    linked, inverted file, inverted
                    list, vector relational object,
                    hypertext data dictionary.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 326+ for object-oriented
    operator interface elements, per se.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 701+ for
    object-oriented programming environments, per se.


CLS 707/101
TXT Manipulating data structure (e.g., compression, compaction, compilation):


    Subject matter under subclass 100 including data structure conversion,
    compression, compaction, and compilation, for optimization of database and
    file storing, and for data compatibility between different or multiple
    databases.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for database concurrency management.

    200     through 206, for file and database maintenance systems including
    data coherency in database systems.

    511,    for document version management under document processing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 50-107 for digital
    code to digital code data conversion.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 327-332 for operator interface
    aspects of workgroup data processing environments for plural users or sites
    and subclass 971 for a cross-reference art collection directed to interface
    aspects of cooperative decision support systems for groups of users.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclass 715.02
    for computer data compression and decompression.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 527 for
    aspects of data compatibility related to emulation, subclass 676 for
    identifying and dealing with runtime dependencies between executing
    programs, tasks, processes (e.g., data dependencies, control flow
    dependencies, etc.), subclass 703 for source code version management in a
    software programming environment, subclass 712 for software installation
    and version management of operating systems, application programs, and
    other executable programs, and subclass 898 for generic string-level and
    byte-word level order rearranging, bit-field insertion and extraction, and
    string length and sequence detecting.

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems - Memory,
    subclasses 141-146 for cache memory data coherency, and subclasses 147-153
    for sharing memory and prioritized access regulation.


CLS 707/102
TXT Generating database or data structure (e.g., via user interface):


    Subject matter under subclass 100 including means or steps for generating
    database schema and data structures.

    (1)     Note. This subclass accepts operator interface features for data
    structure development environments. Operator interfaces, per se, are
    classified elsewhere.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    501,    for processing a document including hypermedia.

    513,    for processing a structured document (e.g., HTML, SGML, ODA, CDA).

    515+,   for processing a compound document using hierarchy control.

    517+,   for document layout processing including spacing control, format
    transforming, etc.

    532,    for text data document processing with a dictionary.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 326 for operator interfaces.

    358,    Facsimile, for facsimile producing systems.

    382,    Image Analysis, for image recognition, transformation and sensing,
    per se, and applications therefor, and in particular subclasses 181+ for
    image pattern recognition.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 12 for
    knowledge processing system operator interface.

    704,    Data Processing - Speech Signal Processing, Linguistics, Language
    Translation, and Audio Compression/Decompression, subclass 10 for
    linguistics dictionary building.


CLS 707/103
TXT Object-oriented database structure:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 further comprising an object-oriented
    data structure and its maintenance in memory.

    (1)     Note. This subclass includes object-oriented data organization.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    500+,   for document processing, per se, in particular, subclass 501 for
    hypermedia.

    513,    for structured documents (e.g., HTML, SGML, ODA, CDA).

    515+,   for compound documents.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 339+ for on-screen workspaces
    or objects, subclasses 348+ for icon objects, and subclasses 352+ for
    menus.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 490+
    for integrated circuit design systems (e.g., silicon compilers), and
    subclass 578 for simulation and simulation environments, per se, which may
    employ object-oriented data structures.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 527 for design
    and analysis environments directed to circuit design, and physical system
    design which may include the use of libraries or objects, and subclasses
    701+ for software development tools, per se, including computer aided
    software engineering and object-oriented programming environments.


CLS 707/104
TXT Application of database or data structure (e.g., distributed, multimedia,
    image):

    Subject matter under subclass 100 directed to specific applications of
    database schema and data structures to commercial, scientific, and medical
    fields not provided for elsewhere.

    (1)     Note.  The combination of details of database technology with the
    business data processing is classified in the business art. See search
    class notes below.

    (2)     Note.  The combination of details of database technology with a
    nominal recitation of the subject matter of another class is classified
    herein. Particular fields of use of database technology performing in
    combination with the basic subject matter of another class to effect some
    end other than mere information accessing or retrieval, is classified with
    the subject matter of the other class, unless specifically excluded
    therefrom.  See the search class notes below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    128,    Surgery, subclasses 630+ for diagnostic testing and appropriate
    subclasses for applications of computers in the life sciences including
    patient monitoring and medical imaging.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 400+
    for data structures in various computer based applications and in
    combination with the basic subject matter of another class.

    382,    Image Analysis, various subclasses for operations performed on
    image data with the aim of measuring a characteristic of an image,
    detecting variations, detecting structures, or transforming the image data,
    and for procedures for analyzing and categorizing patterns present in image
    data.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 1+ for
    artificial intelligence, subclass 500 for simulation, subclasses 701+ for
    software development tool.

    704,    Data Processing - Speech Signal Processing, Linguistics, Language
    Translation, and Audio Compression/Decompression, subclasses 1+ for
    linguistics.

    705,    Data Processing - Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/Price Determination, for business data processing.


CLS 707/200
TXT FILE OR DATABASE MAINTENANCE:

    Subject matter under the class definition directed to generic data, file,
    and directory upkeeping, file naming, and file and database maintenance
    including integrity consideration, recovery, and versioning.

    (1)     Note.  These subclasses are directed to means and steps for
    handling of generic files and databases only in computers and digital data
    processing systems.   For the purpose of these definitions, a generic file
    is defined as a named collection of data.  File content and database
    content authoring, generating, producing, and editing in information
    processing applications art areas, such as, for example, business data
    processing machine translation, graphics processing, simulation, animation
    and  software development, is classified elsewhere.  See the search class
    notes below.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass is directed to management and maintenance of
    files and databases in computers and digital data processing systems and
    accepts subject solutions working within single memories and across
    multiple memories.  Memory accessing and control and memory management, per
    se, is classified elsewhere.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass is directed to management and maintenance of
    files and databases in computers and digital data processing systems and
    accepts only nominal recitations to operator interfaces, icons and other
    metaphors used in the maintenance of files and databases.  File management
    tools, metaphors or objects with significant operator interface features
    are classified elsewhere.  See the search class notes below.

    (4)     Note.  Formatting and file allocation in memory systems such as
    direct access storage systems is generally found in the art area directed
    to the storage system device.

    KEYWORDS:       file caching, differential file,
                    incremental file, merge
    up-                             date, (re)naming, name
    stan-                            dardization, file deletion,
               directory maintenance,               file replication.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for database content authoring tools.

    102,    for database data structure generating, per se.

    500+,   for file content authoring, generating, producing, and editing in
    document processing, word processing, and text processing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, And
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 333+ for file content
    authoring, generating, producing, and editing in operator interface
    customization and editioning, and subclasses 467+ for file content
    authoring, generating, producing, and editing in font generation and
    animation.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 490+
    for file content authoring, generating, producing, and editing in
    integrated circuit design and analysis environments, and subclass 578 for
    file content authoring, generating, producing, and editing in simulation
    systems.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 527 for file
    content authoring, generating, producing, and editing in emulation systems,
    per se, and subclasses 701+ for file content authoring, generating,
    producing, and editing in software development environments, per se.

    704,    Data Processing - Speech Signal Processing, Linguistics, Language
    Translation, and Audio Compression/Decompression, subclasses 2+ for file
    content authoring, generating, producing, and editing in machine
    translation, per se.

    705,    Data Processing - Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/Price Determination, subclasses 1+ for file content authoring,
    generating, producing, and editing in business data processing.

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems - Memory,
    subclasses 100+ for memory accessing and control, per se, and subclasses
    154-166 for memory control, maintenance, and management techniques.


CLS 707/201
TXT Coherency (e.g., same view to multiple users):

    Subject matter under subclass 200 further comprising means or steps for
    distributed and temporal database management to ensure presentation of the
    same data or view to one or a plurality of users.

    (1)     Note. Coherency is related to the maintaining of multiple copies of
    information in a database or a file in a manner which ensures data
    integrity amongst the plurality of copies, regardless of whether a single
    user or plurality of simultaneous users are accessing the information. When
    a plurality of users is accessing the multiple copies of information, then
    both concurrency and coherency concepts may be involved, and the subject
    matter is classified in the concurrency subclass above.

    (2)     Note. This subclass is directed to file and database coherency and
    may include file caching. Caching, per se, however, is classified
    elsewhere. In addition, cache memory entry replacement strategies are
    classified elsewhere.


    (3)     Note. This subclass is directed to file and database coherency and
    may include management of transactions against a database by means of
    commit procedures. Transaction management, per se, is classified elsewhere.

    (4)     Note. This subclass is directed to file and database coherency and
    may involve access control. Access control in combination with other data
    processing system methods or apparatus (e.g., memory), computer security,
    per se, and access control, per se, are classified elsewhere.

    (5)     Note. This subclass is directed to file and database coherency and
    may include recitations to shared memory. Managing shared memory, however,
    is classified elsewhere. Further, data transferring between computers or
    digital data processing systems is classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for database concurrency.

    511,    for document version management under document processing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 327-332, for operator
    interface aspects of workgroup data processing environments for plural
    users or sites and subclass 971 for a cross-reference art collection
    directed to interface aspects of cooperative decision support systems for
    groups of users.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 182.13 for
    process and data state recovery, per se, and in particular subclass 182.18
    for use of plural data sets (i.e., logs) containing set interrelation data,
    subclass 185.02, for state error detection, per se, subclasses 186+ for
    security in digital data processing systems, subclass 200.08 for
    multicomputer data transferring with shared memory, subclasses 670+ for
    task management, per se, subclass 676 for identifying and dealing with
    runtime dependencies between executing programs, tasks, processes, (e.g.,
    data dependencies, control flow dependencies, etc.), subclasses 680+ for
    interprocess and interprogram communication, subclass 703 for source code
    version management, subclass 712 for software installation and version
    management of operating systems, application programs, and other executable
    programs, and subclasses 726+ for access control, per se.

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems - Memory,
    subclasses 141-146 for cache coherency, and subclasses 147-153 for shared
    memory accessing and control.


CLS 707/202
TXT Recoverability:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 including means or steps for transaction
    logging, log recovery, and recovery of data in the event of a fault.

    (1)     Note. This subclass is directed to fault recovery in combination
    with file or data maintenance. Fault recovery, per se, is classified
    elsewhere.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 180+ for
    reliability and availability, per se, subclass 182.13 for process and data
    state recovery, per se, and in particular subclass 182.18 for use of plural
    data sets (i.e., logs) containing set interrelation data.


CLS 707/203
TXT Version management:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 further comprising means or steps for
    maintenance and management of multiple copies of database information or
    files on a computer.


    (1)     Note. See the line notes and search class notes for this class,
    subclasses 8, 201, and 511, and Class 395, subclasses 703 and 712 for a
    complete discussion of version management and data management and the
    topics of databases concurrency, file and database coherency, software
    programming tool code managing, application software and operating system
    software installation, and version management and document version
    management, respectively.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    8,      for concurrency in database or file accessing.

    201,    for file or database coherency.

    511,    for document version management.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 703 for
    managing source code in a development tool, and subclass 712 for software
    or executable program version management.


CLS 707/204
TXT Archiving or backup:

    Subject matter under subclass 201 further comprising means or steps for
    backing up database information or files, file migration to and from high
    density nonvolatile storage, and immediate, delayed, and scheduled backup.

    (1)     Note. This subclass is directed to file and database coherency and
    aspects thereof directed to making copies for expressed purposes. Means and
    steps for controlling memory access to data (i.e., addressing, per se)
    during the act of backing up or archiving is classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 182.04 for
    memory or peripheral subsystem fault recovery including access to redundant
    stored data, such as, error correction coded data, subclass 182.13 for
    process and data state recovery, per se, and in particular subclass 182.18
    for use of plural data sets (i.e., logs) containing set interrelation data.

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems - Memory,
    subclass 113 for cache by DASD, subclass 114 for RAID, subclasses 117+ for
    hierarchical memory accessing and controlling, per se, subclasses 133-136
    for cache entry replacement strategies, subclasses 159-160 for memory
    accessing and control entry replacement strategies, per se, subclasses
    161-162 for archiving and backup under memory accessing, and subclass 165
    for internally relocating data.


CLS 707/205
TXT File allocation:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 further comprising means or steps for
    reserving memory space or organizing memory space in order to contain a
    file.

    (1)     Note. This subclass is directed to reserving memory space or
    organizing memory space in order to contain a file. Memory accessing and
    control for data is classified elsewhere. A concept search to allocation
    should consider both areas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems - Memory,
    subclasses 1-5 for addressing specific memory configurations, subclasses
    100+ for disk defragmenting, subclasses 170+ for memory accessing and
    control memory configuring and partitioning, per se, subclasses 200+ for
    address formation,  subclass 209 for addressing plural pages, blocks,
    segments, etc.


CLS 707/206
TXT Garbage collection:

    Subject matter under subclass 205 further comprising means or steps for
    deallocating of obsolete or unreferenced files and database objects, and
    maintenance of associated directories or links.

    (1)     Note. This subclass is directed to reorganizing of memory space, by
    deallocating unused, redundant, obsolete, or unreferenced database and file
    information, in order to increase the efficiency of memory space usage. The
    related concepts of memory reclamation and disk defragmentation do not take
    into account the interrelatedness of the database and file information.
    However, techniques used in memory reclamation and disk defragmentation may
    be relevant to the subject matter in this subclass, and a concept search on
    garbage collection should carefully consider related concepts classified
    under memory accessing and control entry replacement strategies and memory
    configuring.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    711,    Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems - Memory,
    subclasses 133-136 for cache entry replacement strategies, subclasses
    159-160 for memory accessing and control entry replacement strategies, per
    se, and subclasses 170+ for memory accessing and control memory configuring
    and partitioning, per se.


CLS 707/500
TXT DOCUMENT PROCESSING

    Subject matter under the class definition wherein humanly perceptible
    elements of electronic information (i.e., text or graphics) are gathered,
    associated, created, formatted, edited, prepared, or otherwise processed in
    forming a unified collection of such information storable as a distinct
    entity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    358,    Facsimile, subclass 403 for a document filing and retrieval system.


CLS 707/501
TXT Hypermedia:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein the textual information includes
    embedded links or format codes which direct process flow to alternate or
    additional displays.

    (1)     Note. Processing of a document containing embedded links which,
    when selected or processed, changes the display to other portions of the
    same document or to other documents is classified herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for database accessing.

    513,    for structured documents containing a standardized arrangement of
    content.

    516,    for compound documents containing elements having different data
    types.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclass 302 for details of the
    synchronization of multiple different media, and subclass 357 for details
    of navigation within a structure when such interactivity is not within the
    context of document processing.


CLS 707/502
TXT Drawing:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein the textual information may
    include a graphic presentation formatted as a drawing document, such as CAD
    and CAM designs.


CLS 707/503
TXT Spreadsheet:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein the textual information may
    include numerical information and is formatted into a ledgerlike worksheet.

    (1)     Note. The processing of the informational content within cells of a
    ledgerlike sheet is classified herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    509,    for the layout of elements within cells in which the content of the
    cell information is not processed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    705,    Data Processing - Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/Price Determination, subclasses 30+ for this subject matter in an
    accounting data processing system, and subclasses 35+ for this subject
    matter in a financial data processing system.


CLS 707/504
TXT Cell format control:

    Subject matter under subclass 503 wherein the format within each table
    entry is controlled.


CLS 707/505
TXT Form:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein the information is inserted at a
    designated geometric location within a document.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3+,     for database query processing.


CLS 707/506
TXT Form creation:

    Subject matter under subclass 505 wherein the geometric location is
    specified.


CLS 707/507
TXT Form filling:

    Subject matter under subclass 505 wherein placing information in the
    location provided for such information is performed.


CLS 707/508
TXT Fitting data into fields on form:

    Subject matter under subclass 507 wherein the textual information or the
    geometric location is modified to meet the limitations of existing
    geometric constraints of the fields.


CLS 707/509
TXT Table:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein the textual information may
    include numerical information and is formatted into a tabular format.


CLS 707/510
TXT Ruled lines:

    Subject matter under subclass 509 wherein straight linear curves are
    created to indicate rows or columns in the tabular presentation.

    (1)     Note.  The processing of lines for the division of cells within a
    table is classified herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclass 443 for the generation of lines.


CLS 707/511
TXT Version management:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein previous embodiments of documents
    are retained and organized through the use of various display attributes
    for the multiple embodiments.

    (1)     Note.  Processing of multiple versions of one or more documents
    through a plurality of display views or simultaneous presentation is
    classified herein.


    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    200+,   for details of file management pertaining to multiple versions of a
    document.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 329-332, for operator
    interface aspects of groupware and cooperative data processing.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 712 for
    software code version management.


CLS 707/512
TXT Annotation control:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein an optional or selectable limited
    display of textual data related to data unconditionally displayed (e.g.,
    memo field display related to text) is performed.


CLS 707/513
TXT Structured document (e.g., HTML, SGML, ODA, CDA):

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein the document is created and
    processed according to a standardized arrangement of interrelated
    hierarchical flow and page layout (e.g., office document architecture
    (ODA), content document architecture (CDA), standard generalized markup
    language (SGML), hypertext markup language (HTML)).

    (1)     Note.  The processing of a document according to a standard which
    directs a receiving application as to the layout of its content is
    classified herein.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 419+ for the details of
    three-dimensional presentation processing for a document containing virtual
    reality markup language (VRML).


CLS 707/514
TXT Hierarchical control:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein the textual information may vary
    in scope of context and may contain or be contained by information of
    different scope. That is, where textual information is divided into sets,
    at least one of which contains a subset and where each subset may in turn
    contain subsets, and where the data is controlled by each set and subset.


CLS 707/515
TXT Compound document:

    Subject matter under subclass 514 wherein the document includes elements
    having different data types.

    (1)     Note.  The processing of a document containing multiple types of
    elements is classified herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    513,    for the processing of a structured document according to a
    standardized arrangement which may contain multiple data types.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 419+ for the details of
    three-dimensional presentation processing for a document containing virtual
    reality markup language (VRML).


CLS 707/516
TXT Matching application process to displayed data type:

    Subject matter under subclass 515 wherein processes specific to elements of
    different data formats within a common document are accessed and executed.


CLS 707/517
TXT Layout:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein geometric positioning of elements
    within the document is altered or specified.


CLS 707/518
TXT Spacing control:

    Subject matter under subclass 517 wherein a distance between elements
    within documents is altered or specified.


CLS 707/519
TXT Horizontal spacing:

    Subject matter under subclass 518 wherein the distance between elements in
    the left and right orientation (e.g., kerning) within documents is altered
    or specified.


CLS 707/520
TXT Area designation:

    Subject matter under subclass 517 wherein a geometric subset of a
    presentation surface is specified (e.g., frames).


CLS 707/521
TXT Boundary processing:

    Subject matter under subclass 517 wherein perimeters of geometric subsets
    of a presentation surface within documents or document subsets (e.g., flow
    of text, figures, column or page balancing) are specified, modified or
    controlled.


    (1)     Note.  The layout of elements around other elements whose location
    has been prespecified (e.g., a method in which a set of figures flow around
    a geometrically locked figure), methods for flowing text around figures, or
    methods for handling text across boundaries, such as line breaks or column
    breaks, is classified herein.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    525,    for the layout of elements on a particular page and placement of
    page breaks in which the processing depends upon the size of the output
    medium.


CLS 707/522
TXT Format information in separate file:

    Subject matter under subclass 517 wherein layout specifications are stored
    separately from the data to which such specifications are applied.


CLS 707/523
TXT Format transformation:

    Subject matter under subclass 517 wherein layout specifications are
    modified automatically or translated between specifications.


CLS 707/524
TXT Detecting format code changes:

    Subject matter under subclass 517 wherein a modification in a layout
    specification is recognized.


CLS 707/525
TXT Pagination:

    Subject matter under subclass 517 wherein the document is divided into
    units (i.e., pages) which are sized according to a display or print medium.


CLS 707/526
TXT Display processing:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein the document is prepared for
    visual output.

    (1)     Note.  Processing of a document to enhance the visibility of
    particular elements through the addition of various attributes is
    classified herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 112+ for display attribute
    controllers.


CLS 707/527
TXT Print preview:

    Subject matter under subclass 526 wherein an image of data as interpreted
    by an output device is displayed for operator approval prior to output on a
    hard copy output device.


CLS 707/528
TXT Color attribute:

    Subject matter under subclass 526 wherein data specifying a color code is
    defined or modified.


CLS 707/529
TXT Text attribute:

    Subject matter under subclass 526 wherein data specifying a font text
    characteristic (e.g., italics, bold, underline, size, or highlighting) is
    defined or modified.


CLS 707/530
TXT Edit, composition, or storage control:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 including means or steps for developing
    or changing a document wherein one or more elements of a document (i.e.,
    text, graphics, control, or format codes) are added, deleted, or modified,
    or including means or steps for storing the resultant altered document or
    the alterations.


CLS 707/531
TXT Text:

    Subject matter under subclass 530 wherein the editing, composition, or
    storage is peculiar to the textual information (e.g., hyphenation or
    punctuation).


CLS 707/532
TXT Dictionary:

    Subject matter under subclass 531 including a memory means for storing a
    collection of words related to a language.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    100+,   for database schema or data structure generation and modification.


    533,    for spell check.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    704,    Data Processing - Speech Signal Processing, Linguistics, Language
    Translation, and Audio Compression/Decompression, subclass 10 for
    dictionary building, modification, or prioritization.


CLS 707/533
TXT Spell check:

    Subject matter under subclass 531 including a means for checking the
    spelling of a word.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    532,    for dictionary.


CLS 707/534
TXT Input of abbreviated word form:

    Subject matter under subclass 531 wherein a group of preselected characters
    or a symbol (i.e., short form) is replaced by a whole word (i.e., long
    form).


CLS 707/535
TXT Ideographic generator:

    Subject matter under subclass 531 wherein the construction of word, phrase,
    or sentence is in a pictorial character form or a non-Roman phonetic
    symbol.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclass 467 for the generation of the
    font for the ideographic characters, and subclass 471 for display
    peripheral interface input devices having foreign language capability.


CLS 707/536
TXT Multilingual:

    Subject matter under subclass 531 wherein the processing of the textual
    information is performed in more than one language.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    704,    Data Processing - Speech Signal Processing, Linguistics, Language
    Translation, and Audio Compression/Decompression, subclass 8 for national
    language support.


CLS 707/537
TXT Footnoting:

    Subject matter under subclass 531 wherein the elements include primary and
    related data (i.e., an explanation or comments) where related data is
    presented at a position separate from but marked as related to primary
    data.


CLS 707/538
TXT Equation or formula processing:

    Subject matter under subclass 531 wherein the elements or other formal code
    sequences include a mathematical or formulaic expression.


CLS 707/539
TXT Block control:

    Subject matter under subclass 530 wherein a subset of elements in a
    document delineated by a technique of marking such elements is edited.


CLS 707/540
TXT Replacement of element:

    Subject matter under subclass 530 wherein a selected element is replaced
    with another element in the document.


CLS 707/541
TXT Handwritten textual input:

    Subject matter under subclass 530 wherein the textual information includes
    symbolic data entered by manual transcription of such symbols.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclass 179 for stylus-type display
    peripheral interface input devices.

    382,    Image Analysis, subclasses 119+ for image analysis applications
    using a signature, and subclasses 186 and 187 for pattern recognition of
    handwritten characters.


CLS 707/542
TXT Font selection:

    Subject matter under subclass 500 wherein the features of a character set
    for a specified collection of information are determined.

    (1)     Note.  The automatic or user-specified selection of a predefined
    font is classified herein.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclass 467 for the generation of fonts.

    CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS


CLS 707/900
TXT DOCUMENT STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS:

    Subject matter comprising methods or apparatus for processing data
    formatted for presentation in a unified collection of such information
    (document) with special structural elements that are not provided for
    elsewhere.


CLS 707/901
TXT Active document:

    Subject matter under art collection 900 wherein a document contains
    elements or attributes which include scripts or procedural instructions
    which are executed upon the document or its environment.


CLS 707/902
TXT Multilayer document:

    Subject matter under art collection 900 wherein textual information within
    documents contains multiple textual elements in depth layers allowing for
    transparency, opacity, and coloration based on intervening layers.


CLS 707/903
TXT 3-D spreadsheet:

    Subject matter under art collection 900 wherein textual information within
    spreadsheet documents is contained within spreadsheets having the
    dimensions of depth, height, and width.


CLS 707/904
TXT Details of spreadsheet data records:

    Subject matter under art collection 900 wherein textual information within
    spreadsheet documents contain presentation data specified at individual
    data record levels.


CLS 707/905
TXT Spreadsheet cell protection:

    Subject matter under art collection 900 wherein textual information within
    spreadsheet documents is write-protected.


CLS 707/906
TXT Creating one form from another:

    Subject matter under art collection 900 wherein textual information within
    a form specifies a new set of field relationships based on an existing set
    of relationships.


CLS 707/907
TXT Hierarchical document control with varying levels of detail:

    Subject matter under art collection 900 wherein textual information is
    presented in greater or lesser relative amounts of data based on the level
    of precision (e.g., outlining).


CLS 707/908
TXT Document format layout template:

    Subject matter under art collection 900 wherein textual information
    predefines the geometric positioning of text.


CLS 707/909
TXT Document page collating:

    Subject matter under art collection 900 wherein textual information orders
    and numbers document pages.


CLS 707/910
TXT Document presenting plural pages on a single sheet:

    Subject matter under art collection 900 wherein textual information
    presents multiple pages of information on a single substrate which can be
    cut or folded to present each page as a separate physical entity.


CLS 707/911
TXT Document page description processing:

    Subject matter under art collection 900 wherein textual information
    presents the display of textual data based on the interleaved data and
    instructions for display.


CLS 711/
TTL ELECTRICAL COMPUTERS AND DIGITAL PROCESSING SYSTEMS: MEMORY

CLS 711/
TXT I.      GLOSSARY

    The terms below have been defined for purposes of classification in this
    class and are shown in underlined type when used in the class and subclass
    definitions. When these terms are not underlined in the definitions, the
    meaning is not restricted to the glossary definitions below.

    BUS

    A conductor used for transferring data, signals, or power.

    COMPUTER

    A machine that inputs data, processes data, stores data, and outputs data.


    DATA

    Representation of information in a coded manner suitable for communication,
    interpretation, or processing.

    Address data - Data that specify a location in a memory.

    Instruction data - Data that represent an operation and identify its
    operands, if any.

    Status data - Data that represent conditions of data, computers,
    peripherals, memory, etc.

    User data - Data other than address data, instruction data, or status data.


    DATA PROCESSING

    See PROCESSING below.

    DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING SYSTEM

    An arrangement of processor(s) in combination with either memory or
    peripherals, or both, performing data processing.

    INFORMATION

    Meaning that a human being assigns to data by means of the conventions
    applied to that data.

    MEMORY

    A functional unit to which data can be stored and from which data can be
    retrieved.


    PERIPHERAL

    A functional unit that transmits data to or receives data from a computer
    to which it is coupled (e.g., modems, keyboards, monitors, touch tablet,
    printers, joy stick, disk and tape drives, etc.).

    PROCESSING

    Methods or apparatus performing systematic operations upon data or
    information exemplified by functions such as data or information
    transferring, merging, sorting, and calculating (i.e., arithmetic
    operations or logical operations).

    (1)     Note. In an effort to avoid redundant constructions, in this class,
    where appropriate, the term address data processing is used in place of
    address data data processing.

    PROCESSOR

    A functional unit that interprets and executes instruction data.

    II.     GENERAL STATEMENT OF THE CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

            This class provides, within an electrical computer or digital data
    processing system, for the following subject matter:

    A.      Processes and apparatus for addressing memory wherein the processes
    and apparatus involve significant address manipulating (e.g., combining,
    translating, or mapping and other techniques for formatting and modifying
    address data) and are combined with specific memory configurations or
    memory systems;

    B.      Processes and apparatus for accessing and controlling memory (e.g.,
    transferring and modifying address data, selecting storage devices,
    scheduling access); and

    C.      Processes and apparatus for forming memory addresses (e.g., virtual
    memory addressing, address translating, translation-lookaside buffers
    (TLBs), boundary checking, and page mode).

    III.    SCOPE OF THE CLASS

    (1)     Note.  In the instance where a peripheral is a memory,
    classification herein is proper.

    (2)     Note. Classification herein requires more than nominal recitation
    of addressing techniques or of memory accessing or controlling in
    combination with digital data processing systems or data processing. A
    nominal combination refers to a combination wherein one or more of the
    means or steps thereof are recited so broadly, and without details, as to
    constitute a mere identification rather than a description of each means or
    step.

    (3)     Note. Memory devices, per se, are classified in their respective
    device classes. More specifically, registers and data bearing records
    (e.g., smart cards) are classified elsewhere. Static memory devices
    including internal elements of memories are classified elsewhere. Display
    memory organizations and structures (i.e., selective visual display
    systems) such as memories defined by graphics processing systems and
    graphic processing that involves interfacing with memory are classified
    elsewhere. Devices (e.g., printers) that include memory for processing data
    for static presentation (i.e., for viewing on a fixed medium such as paper)
    are classified elsewhere. Dynamic magnetic information storage or retrieval
    devices (e.g., magnetic disks, tapes, drums, etc.) are classified
    elsewhere. Dynamic information storage or retrieval devices (e.g., optical
    disks, CD-ROMs, jukebox mechanics, and other storage devices having
    magnetic and mechanical components) are classified elsewhere.  See the
    SEARCH CLASS notes below.

    (4)     Note. Processes and apparatus for transferring data between
    memories of different computers directly (i.e., with minimum or no
    intervention from main processors of the computers) are classified
    elsewhere.  See the SEARCH CLASS notes below.

    (5)     Note.  Processes and apparatus for direct memory access (DMA)
    (i.e., the transferring of data between peripherals and memories of a
    computer or digital data processing system with minimal or no intervention
    from the main processor of the computer or digital data processing system)
    are classified elsewhere.  See the SEARCH CLASS notes below.

    (6)     Note.  Processes and apparatus for accessing and retrieving
    instruction data of a fixed or variable length from a memory or buffer and
    for shifting such instruction data to align it with a physical memory or
    buffer boundary are classified elsewhere. See the SEARCH CLASS notes below.

    IV.     SEARCH CLASS

    235,    Registers, various subclasses for basic machines and associated
    indicating mechanisms for ascertaining the number of movements of various
    devices and machines; machines made from these basic machines alone (e.g.,
    cash registers, voting machines) and in combination with various perfecting
    features such as printers and recording means; and various systems
    controlled by data bearing records (e.g., smart cards).

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclass 202 for repeating geometric arrangement of individual structural
    elements of solid-state devices, and subclasses 368 and 390 for matrix or
    array of field effect transistors (FETs).

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 37+ for
    multifunctional or programmable logic (e.g., gate arrays) and subclasses
    52+ and 104+ for generic logic functions such as EXOR, AND, OR, NOT and
    decoding in general.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 825+ for controlling one or
    more devices to obtain a plurality of results by transmission of a
    designated one of plural distinctive control signals over a smaller number
    of communication lines or channels, particularly subclass 825.02 for tree
    or cascade selective communication, subclasses 825.03+ for channel
    selection, subclass 825.05 for a plurality of controlled devices connected
    by a communication line in a closed series configuration, subclasses
    825.06+ for communication systems where status of a controlled device is
    communicated, subclasses 825.2+ for synchronizing selective communication
    systems, subclasses 825.5+ for lockout or priority in selective
    communication systems, subclasses 825.52+ for selective communication
    addressing, subclasses 825.57+ for pulse responsive actuation; and
    subclasses 825.79+ for selective matrix which may be used for control or as
    a switching means.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, various subclasses for
    electrical pulse and digit code converters (e.g., systems for originating
    or emitting a coded set of discrete signals or translating one code into
    another code wherein the meaning of the data remains the same but formats
    may differ).

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 1+ for visual display systems
    with selective electrical control including display memory organization and
    structure for storing image data and manipulating image data between a
    display memory and display peripheral, subclasses 507+ for memory
    organization and structure for storing images to be displayed, and subclass
    521 for graphic processing that involves interfacing with memory.

    353,    Optics: Image Projectors, subclasses 25+ for selective data
    retrieval of stored information viewed by a projection means.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval (which is an
    integral part of Class 369 following subclass 18), for record carriers and
    systems wherein data are stored and retrieved by interaction with a medium
    and there is relative motion between a medium and a transducer (e.g.,
    magnetic disk drives, tapes, and drums and control thereof, per se),
    particularly subclasses 72.1+ for locating a specific area in storage.

    361,    Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 684+ for
    computer storage component combined with housing or mounting arrangement
    having no data processing or calculating procedures.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, appropriate
    subclasses and particularly subclasses 130+ for data processing control
    systems; subclasses 400+ for computer and data processing system
    applications; subclasses 550+ for computer measuring, testing, or
    monitoring; subclasses 600+ for electric hybrid computers; subclasses 700+
    for electric digital calculating computers; and subclasses 800+ for
    electric analog computers.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, various subclasses for
    static memory devices including internal elements of the memory,
    particularly subclasses 189.01+ for read/write circuits and subclasses
    230.01+ for addressing of addressable, static single storage elements or
    plural elements; subclass 189.05 for buffering or latching data being read
    from or written to memory; subclass 189.08 for logic devices in combination
    with memory systems; subclasses 200 and 201 for testing of memory systems;
    and subclass 230.08 for buffering and latching address data being employed
    to access memory.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, various subclasses for
    record carriers and systems wherein data are stored and retrieved by
    interaction with a medium and there is relative motion between a medium and
    a transducer (e.g., optical disks, CD-ROMs, jukeboxes), particularly
    subclasses 30+, 69, and 176+ for designating or selecting storage media to
    be used for storage and retrieval.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for multiplex
    switching techniques similar to addressing and the handling of memory
    information signals and for the simultaneous transmission of two or more
    signals over a common medium, particularly subclasses 351+ for time
    division multiplex (TDM) switching,  subclasses 475+ for asynchronous TDM
    communications including addressing, and  subclasses 498+ for time division
    bus transmission.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, various
    subclasses for detecting or correcting errors in generic electrical pulse
    or pulse coded data and for detecting and recovering from faults of
    computers, digital data processing systems, and logic level based systems,
    particularly subclass 2.2 for memory access (e.g., address permutation);
    subclasses 10.2+ for replacement with spare memory components or portion
    thereof; subclasses 21.1+ for memory testing; and subclasses 40.1+ for
    memory access with error correction, error pointer, or error checking.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclasses 64+ for shift registers.

    380,    Cryptography, subclasses 3+ for stored data access or copy
    prevention (e.g., software program protection or computer virus detection)
    in combination with data encryption, and subclasses 49+ for digital signal
    handling with shift register or memory.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, appropriate subclasses
    and particularly subclasses 1, 3 through 77, 900, and 902 through 934 for
    artificial intelligence type computers and digital data processing systems;
    subclasses 115+ for process and apparatus (e.g., printer) that includes
    memory for processing data for static presentation (i.e., for viewing on a
    fixed medium such as paper); subclasses 186 through 188.01 for furthering
    the security of computers, digital data processing systems and peripherals;
    subclasses 200.3+ for transferring data between a plurality of computers,
    particularly subclass 200.42 for computer-to-computer direct memory
    accessing and subclasses 200.43+, wherein the transferring is via a shared
    memory; subclasses 376 through 598 for various instruction processing not
    involving I/O such as executing; subclass 380 for instruction alignment;
    subclasses 381+ for instruction fetching; subclasses 800.01+ for processing
    architectures such as MIMD, vector, or array processors; and subclasses
    821+ for transferring data from one or more peripherals to one or more
    computers for the latter to process, store, or further transfer or for
    transferring data from the computers to the peripherals, particularly
    subclass 842 for direct memory access (DMA) (i.e., the transferring of data
    between peripherals and memories of a computer or digital data processing
    system with minimal or no intervention from the main processor of the
    computer or digital data processing system).

    701,    Data Processing:  Vehicles, Navigation, and Relative Location,
    appropriate subclasses for applications of computers in vehicular and
    navigational environments.

    704,    Data Processing:  Speech Signal Processing, Linguistics, Language
    Translation, and Audio Compression/Decompression, subclasses 1+ for
    applications of computers in linguistics, subclasses 200+ for applications
    of computers in speech signal processing, and subclasses 500 through 504
    for applications of computers in audio compression/decompression.

    705,    Data Processing:  Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/Price Determination, appropriate subclasses for applications of
    computers and calculators in business and management environments.

    707,    Data Processing:  Database and File Management, Data Structures, or
    Document Processing, subclasses 1+, 100+, and 200+ for data retrieval, file
    or database management, garbage collection, file configuration and
    initialization, and allocation.

    901,    Robots, appropriate cross-reference art collections for
    reprogrammable, multifunction manipulators designed to move devices.


CLS 711/1
TXT ADDRESSING COMBINED WITH SPECIFIC MEMORY CONFIGURATION OR SYSTEM:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising means or steps for
    determining one or more values (i.e., address data) that specify one or
    more locations in a storage medium wherein the means or steps are claimed
    in combination with a particular configuration or system for storing data.

    (1)     Note. Classification herein requires significant address
    manipulating (i.e., more than nominal recitation of an addressing
    technique). Significant address manipulating is exemplified by address data
    processing functions such as combining, translating, mapping, and other
    techniques associated with forming or modifying address data.

    (2)     Note.  Means or steps for determining a value that specifies a
    memory location (i.e., address data) must include more than nominal
    recitation of processing functions and memory components for classification
    herein.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass and those indented below provide for
    combinations of data processing, particular memory systems, and significant
    address data manipulating. Generalized addressing in a digital data
    processing system is classified elsewhere in this class.  See the SEARCH
    THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS notes below.

    (4)     Note.  This subclass and those indented below may include means
    (e.g., processor, controller, etc.) or steps for control of a memory of a
    digital data processing system in combination with memory accessing (e.g.,
    reading, writing). Memory accessing and control for specific memory
    compositions, hierarchical memory configurations, and shared memory,
    however, is classified elsewhere. See the SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS notes
    below.

    (5)     Note.  Means or steps for accessing and controlling plural memory
    configurations (e.g., data farms, "library" systems) that include
    significant data processing are classified herein. Control systems for
    delivering storage media (e.g., delivery of robotics or automated tapes or
    cartridges, selection and delivery of platters), however, are properly
    classified elsewhere under automated control or another appropriate
    subclass in the respective device, robotics, and generic control classes.
    In instances involving significant data processing and significant details
    of media delivery systems, classification herein is proper.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for cache memory addressing.

    101     through 116, for storage accessing and control for various memory
    compositions (e.g., ROM, RAM, CAM, dynamic, detachable, bubble, etc.) with
    more than nominal data processing.

    117     through 146, for storage accessing and control for hierarchical
    memory with nominal address forming.

    147     through 154, for storage accessing and control for shared memory
    with nominal address forming.

    200+,   for generalized address forming in data processing systems.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 105+ for digital
    logic decoding circuits in general.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 825.79+ for selective matrix
    which may be used for control or as a switching means.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 507+ for processing indices to
    locations (or addresses) of stored data elements in a computer graphic
    processing system.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 189.01+ for
    read/write circuits, and subclasses 230.01+ for addressing of addressable,
    static single storage elements or plural elements of the same type.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 30+, 69, and
    176+, as appropriate, for subject matter related to designation or
    selection of storage medium to be used for storage and retrieval.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for multiplex
    switching techniques similar to addressing or the handling of memory
    information signals.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 311+ for
    system intraconnecting switching, subclasses 823+ for Input/Output
    addressing, subclasses 829 for address assignment for configuring
    peripherals, and subclasses 842+ for direct memory accessing (DMA).

    704,    Data Processing:  Speech Signal Processing, Linguistics, Language
    Translation and Audio Compression/Decompression, subclasses 2+ for memory
    control scheme combined with linguistics.

    707,    Data Processing:  Database and File Management, Data Structures, or
    Document Processing, subclasses 1+ for database management and file
    management systems including significant addressing, retrieval, or
    manipulation of information contained within a database of a digital data
    processing system or computer including searching, query processing,
    information locating and retrieval techniques from a file or database;
    subclasses 100+ for database schema types; and subclasses 200+ for file
    maintenance operations, allocating or deallocating memory space to files,
    garbage collection, and hierarchical or tree filling systems.

    901,    Robots, appropriate cross-reference art collections for
    reprogrammable, multifunction manipulators designed to move devices.


CLS 711/2
TXT Addressing extended or expanded memory:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein addresses are determined for memory
    not normally accessible by a base operating system, computer, or digital
    data processing system components.

    (1)     Note.  Classification here may include virtual addressing
    techniques; however, virtual memory addressing art which deals with logical
    addressing techniques as opposed to addressing for physical enhancements,
    such as extended and expanded memory, is classified elsewhere in this
    class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203+,   for virtual addressing, per se.


CLS 711/3
TXT Addressing cache memories:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein addresses are generated for memory
    nearest a processor in a hierarchical memory arrangement (i.e., a cache
    memory arrangement).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass accommodates particular addressing techniques
    for cache memory systems. Cache memory accessing and control (i.e., reading
    and writing) are classified elsewhere in this class.  See the SEARCH THIS
    CLASS, SUBCLASS notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117+,   for hierarchical memory arrangement accessing and control,
    including cache memory in subclasses 118 through 146.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 49+ for
    internal aspects of associative memory.


CLS 711/4
TXT Dynamic-type storage device (e.g., disk, tape, drum):

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein address schemes are particular to a
    data storage device requiring relative motion between a data holding medium
    and a recording mechanism such as disk, tape, or drum memory.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, which is an
    integral part of Class 369, following subclass 18, for record carriers and
    systems wherein information is stored and retrieved by interaction with a
    medium and there is relative motion between a medium and a transducer
    (e.g., magnetic disk drive devices and control thereof, per se). See Class
    360, subclass 72.2 for addressing and control of recording mechanism to
    locate the selected area.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, various subclasses for
    record carriers and systems wherein information is stored and retrieved by
    interaction with a medium and there is relative motion between a medium and
    a transducer. Particularly, see subclasses 30 through 34 for selective
    addressing of dynamic storage medium.


CLS 711/5
TXT For multiple memory modules (e.g., banks, interleaved memory):

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein logical addresses are determined
    and mapped (e.g., interleaving) across different physical memory arranged
    in blocks, banks, partitions, etc.

    (1)     Note. This subclass includes subject matter directed to static
    column or static row handling in multiple physical memory module
    addressing.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    127,    for interleaved cache.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 230.03 and
    230.04 for subject matter including plural banks or blocks and alternating
    between them.


CLS 711/6
TXT Virtual machine memory addressing:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 wherein addresses are determined in a
    memory system accommodating addressing requirements for software emulation
    of a target computer or digital data processing system on a base computer
    or digital data processing system.

    (1)     Note. Classification here includes virtual addressing techniques
    (that is, for example, processing logical to physical (real, absolute)
    address translation entries).  Virtual memory addressing deals with logical
    addressing techniques.  Classification here is proper if there is
    significant virtual memory processing for systems accommodating emulation
    of a target computer or digital data processing system on a base computer
    or digital data processing system.  Logical addressing for physical
    enhancements, such as extended and expanded memory, is classified elsewhere
    in this class.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202+,   for address mapping and virtual addressing, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 406 for
    managing processing tasks for virtual machines and subclass 527 for
    compatibility, emulation, and simulation of systems or system components.


CLS 711/100
TXT STORAGE ACCESSING AND CONTROL:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising means (e.g., a
    processor, a controller, etc.) or steps for governing memory in a computer
    or digital data processing system or the passage (e.g., reading, writing)
    of data thereto.


    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass and the subclasses
    thereunder provides for details of how memory is accessed and controlled.
    Classification herein requires more than nominal recitation of accessing or
    controlling memory in the context of digital data processing systems or
    data processing. Examples of significant memory accessing and control data
    processing include transferring and modifying memory address data,
    selecting memory devices or memory locations, and scheduling memory
    accesses.

    (2)     Note.  Storage devices such as static memory devices, holographic
    stores, disk drives (and the mechanical control of disk drives, e.g., head
    positioning, substrate speed, etc.), and optical stores, are classified,
    per se, in their respective device classes.

    (3)     Note.  Subject matter classified herein may include nominal
    recitations of address data generation, manipulation, and modification.
    Combinations of a particular memory construct (e.g., cache) with accessing
    and control and significant addressing as exemplified by data processing
    functions such as combining, translating, mapping, and other techniques
    associated with forming and modifying addresses, however, are classified in
    superior subclasses directed to such combinations.  See the SEARCH THIS
    CLASS, SUBCLASS notes below.

    (4)     Note.  Classification herein requires more than nominal recitation
    of means or steps for controlling memory.

    (5)     Note.  This subclass and the subclasses thereunder also provide for
    subject matter wherein static or dynamic storage forms part of a digital
    data processing system.

    (6)     Note.  Subject matter classified herein may include nominal
    recitations of reliability and availability in combination with memory
    accessing and control. The species of reliability and availability related
    to data archiving, backup, and device access limiting and security combined
    with memory accessing and controlling is classified herein. Other species
    of reliability and availability combined with memory accessing and
    controlling are classified elsewhere. See the SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS
    notes below.

    (7)     Note.  Memories known as display memory, display buffers, frame
    buffers, VRAMs, etc., functioning in combination to store image data for
    image processing are properly classified elsewhere. Subject matter for
    interfacing between a graphics processor and a memory is classified
    elsewhere.  See the SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS notes and SEARCH CLASS
    notes below for the information handling subclasses relevant to memories
    acting on display data.

    (8)     Note.  Means or steps for accessing and controlling plural memory
    configurations (e.g., data farms, "library" systems, etc.) including
    significant data processing are classified here. Details of control systems
    for medium delivery such as robotics or automated tape, cartridge, and
    platter selection and delivery, however, are properly classified elsewhere
    under automated control or another appropriate subclass in the respective
    device, robotics, and generic control classes. In instances where there is
    significant data processing and significant details of medium delivery
    systems, classification should be based on the hierarchy of classes and
    classified here.

    (9)     Note.  This subclass is directed to generic memory accessing and
    control. Database accessing and retrieval is classified elsewhere.  See the
    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161+,   for reliability and availability combined with memory accessing and
    control provided for in this array.  See the (6) Note for subclass 100
    above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 825+ for controlling one or
    more devices to obtain a plurality of results by transmission of a
    designated one of plural distinctive control signals over a smaller number
    of communication lines or channels, particularly subclass 825.02 for tree
    or cascade selective communication, subclasses 825.03+ for channel
    selection, subclass 825.05 for a plurality of controlled devices connected
    by a communication line in a closed series configuration, subclasses
    825.06+ for communication systems where status of a controlled device is
    communicated, subclasses 825.2+ for synchronizing selective communication
    systems, subclasses 825.5+ for lockout or priority in selective
    communication systems, subclasses 825.52+ for addressing, and subclasses
    825.57+ for pulse responsive actuation.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 507+ for memory organization
    and structure for storing images to be displayed, and subclass 521 for
    interfacing between a graphics processor and a memory.

    353,    Optics: Image Projectors, subclasses 25+ for selective data
    retrieval of stored information viewed by a projection means.

    361,    Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices, subclasses 684+ for
    computer storage component combined with housing or mounting arrangement
    having no data processing or calculating procedures.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 30+, 69, and
    176+, as appropriate, for subject matter related to designation or
    selection of storage medium to be used for storage and retrieval.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, for the simultaneous transmission of two
    or more signals over a common medium, particularly subclasses 351+ for time
    division multiplex (TDM) switching, subclasses 475+ for asynchronous TDM
    communications including addressing, and subclasses 498+ for time division
    bus transmission.


    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 115+ for
    static presentation processing combined with memory; subclasses 180+ for
    reliability and availability combined with memory accessing and control not
    provided for herein (see the (6) Note above); subclasses 280+ for
    connections within a single computer or digital data processing system
    arrangement such as interfacing, bus arbitration, bus expansion, etc.;
    subclasses 561+ for processing control and instruction processing, per se,
    which often includes access to registers surrounding functional units of a
    processor; subclass 709 for software/program optimization of memory usage
    or other resource usage (e.g., optimization by removing redundancy,
    eliminating unnecessary memory accesses, etc.); subclasses 821+ for
    combinations of data transfers performed by a peripheral (e.g., I/O
    processors, DMA, I/O controllers, I/O adapters, etc.) between digital data
    processing systems or computers and peripherals; and subclasses 842+ for
    Direct Memory Access (DMA) or direct data transfers to or from memory or to
    or from other peripherals and for data transfers performed by a peripheral
    between external components such as disk drives, peripheral devices, etc.,
    which involves I/O processing.

    704,    Data Processing:  Speech Signal Processing, Linguistics, Language
    Translation, and Audio Compression/Decompression, subclasses 2+ for memory
    control scheme combined with linguistics.

    707,    Data Processing:  Database and File Management, Data Structures, or
    Document Processing, subclasses 1+ for database management and file
    management systems including significant addressing, retrieval, or
    manipulation of information contained within a database of a digital data
    processing system or computer including searching, query processing,
    information locating and retrieval techniques from a file or database;
    subclasses 100+ for database schema types; and subclasses 200+ for file
    maintenance operations, allocating or deallocating memory space to files,
    garbage collection, and hierarchical or tree filling systems.

    901,    Robots, appropriate cross-reference art collections for
    reprogrammable, multifunction manipulators designed to move devices.


CLS 711/101
TXT Specific memory composition:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein control of the memory or the
    accessing thereof is adapted to the type of memory being accessed.

    (1)     Note.  Structures and particulars of the memory device itself are
    classified in the relevant device class.

    (2)     Note.  Subject matter included herein is directed to the specifics
    of accessing technique employed to access and control the memory by
    computers, digital data processing systems, processors, or other users.

    (3)     Note.  The nature of data stored in a memory (i.e., the
    information) does not make the memory "specific" within the context of this
    and its indented subclasses (e.g., video or image data, printer buffer,
    control data memory, etc.).

    (4)     Note.  Accessing and controlling of a multiport memory, per se, are
    classified elsewhere in this class. See the SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS
    notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    131,    for multiport cache.

    149,    for shared multiport memory.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 375+ for systems controlled by data bearing
    records.

    313,    Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclasses 391+ for cathode
    ray tube storage devices.

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 37+ for
    multifunctional or programmable logic (e.g., gate arrays) and subclasses
    52+ and 104+ for generic logic functions such as EXOR, AND, OR, NOT, and
    decoding.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 30+, 69, and
    176+, as appropriate, for subject matter related to designation or
    selection of storage medium to be used for storage and retrieval.

    439,    Electrical Connectors, subclasses 43+ for plug board connections
    and pins, and subclasses 55+ for preformed panel circuit arrangements
    (e.g., ICs, chips, wafers, etc.).

    902,    Electronic Funds Transfer, cross-reference art collections 25+ for
    smart card memories.


CLS 711/102
TXT Solid-state read only memory (ROM):

    Subject matter under subclass 101 including means or steps for accessing
    solid-state randomly accessible nonvolatile memory (e.g., ROM).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclasses
    for storage having a particular internal cell structure (e.g.,  subclass 94
    for read only (i.e., semipermanent) systems), subclasses 189.01+ for memory
     read/write circuits, and subclasses 230.01+ for addressing circuits.


CLS 711/103
TXT Programmable read only memory (PROM, EEPROM, etc.):

    Subject matter under subclass 102 including means or steps for accessing
    and controlling programmable solid-state nonvolatile memory (e.g., PROM,
    EPROM, EEPROM, flash, etc.).


CLS 711/104
TXT Solid-state random access memory (RAM):

    Subject matter under subclass 101 including apparatus or method for
    accessing volatile randomly accessible memory.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 129+ for
    various memory elements used in random access memory construction.


CLS 711/105
TXT Dynamic random access memory:

    Subject matter under subclass 104 including means or steps for accessing
    volatile memory requiring periodic refreshing (e.g., DRAM, Dynamic RAM,
    etc.).


CLS 711/106
TXT Refresh scheduling:

    Subject matter under subclass 105 including specifics of coordinating
    refreshing operations with other system operations.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is proper for subject matter directed to
    coordinating refresh scheduling with other system events, accesses,
    requirements, etc., external to the memory cells. However, coordinating the
    timing requirements within a memory cell or composite thereof is classified
    elsewhere.  See the SEARCH CLASS notes below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, appropriate subclasses
    for timing requirements at the cell level and for storage having a
    particular internal cell structure (e.g., subclass 222 for memory
    refreshing).


CLS 711/107
TXT Ferrite core:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 comprising arrays of magnetizable rings
    as the individual storage elements.

    (1)     Note.  In the 1960's the term "core memory" referred exclusively to
    memory with ferrite cores. Also at that time, the main memory of large
    systems were exclusively of this type. As the art progressed, the term core
    memory became a holdover to refer to the system's main memory, regardless
    of the actual type of memory being used. Therefore, if core memory is
    claimed, the specification should be checked to see if the memory is indeed
    core memory (i.e., ferrite memory) for classification here; otherwise, it
    should be treated as solid-state memory and classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    102+,   for ROM accessing and control.

    104+,   for RAM accessing and control.


CLS 711/108
TXT Content addressable memory (CAM):

    Subject matter under subclass 101 including memory of the type where
    elements are addressed according to the stored contents (e.g., associative
    memory, etc.).


    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 49 and 50 for
    associative memories or content addressable memories (CAM), per se.


CLS 711/109
TXT Shift register memory:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 including memory of the type where
    elements are arranged to serially pass the stored contents from one
    location to an adjacent location, or for use in data format conversion
    within a digital data processing system.

    (1)     Note.  Employing shift registers as part of the system memory for
    transferring data within a digital data processing system is classified
    here; however, the specifics of the interconnections and control of shift
    register memories is classified elsewhere.  See the SEARCH CLASS notes
    below.

    (2)     Note.  Although data format conversion may form part of the overall
    combination in this subclass, data format conversion, per se, is classified
    elsewhere. See the SEARCH CLASS notes below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 441+, 492, and 493 for electrical records and
    record sensors (i.e., IC cards).

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, appropriate subclasses for
    digital to digital code converting.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclasses 64+ for shift registers and subclasses
    107+ and 118+ for counters.


CLS 711/110
TXT Circulating memory:

    Subject matter under subclass 109 wherein the contents of a register may be
    passed in a recirculating fashion among a group of adjacent registers
    (e.g., ring buffers, barrel shifters, etc.).


CLS 711/111
TXT Accessing dynamic storage device:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 including accessing memory of the type
    where a storage medium is moved relative to a transducer (e.g., magnetic or
    paper tape, punched cards, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  This and indented subclasses provide for dynamic storage
    combined with significant digital data processing system elements and
    functions.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 375+ for various systems controlled by data
    bearing records, subclasses 419+ for record controlled calculators, and
    subclasses 435+ for coded record sensors.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclasses 72.1+
    for locating a specific area in storage.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, various subclasses for
    the arrangement of information within dynamic storage alone.


CLS 711/112
TXT Direct access storage device (DASD):

    Subject matter under subclass 111 wherein devices employing a medium
    capable of being accessed directly and by so doing skipping past portions
    of the medium.


    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this definition, memory devices known
    typically as disks, drums, etc., are considered to be of the direct access
    type whereas tapes are not.


CLS 711/113
TXT Caching:

    Subject matter under subclass 112 wherein the DASD is used as a dedicated
    hierarchically intermediate store or with a dedicated hierarchically
    intermediate store.

    (1)     Note.  Caching in this subclass is (a) being performed by a DASD
    device or (b) being supplied by another device in combination with a DASD.
    Caching, per se, is classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    117+,   for hierarchical memory accessing and control and caching, per se.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 49 and 50 for
    associative memories and caches under their class definition.


CLS 711/114
TXT Arrayed (e.g., RAIDs):

    Subject matter under subclass 112 where a plurality of direct access
    devices are arranged in an array and files or portions thereof are stored
    on more than one of the direct access storage devices.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is appropriate for redundant arrays of
    inexpensive disks (RAID).

    (2)     Note.  See the (6) Note to subclass 100 for systems directed to
    reliability and availability of DASDs. See the SEARCH CLASS notes below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 39+ for programmable
    gate arrays.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery,
    appropriate subclasses for error detection and correction of general
    utility.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 182.03+ for
    systems directed to reliability and availability of DASDs and subclasses
    840+ for systems directed to parallel data transfer.


CLS 711/115
TXT Detachable memory:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein the memory is of the solid-state
    type and can be readily physically connected and disconnected manually,
    without the aid of any tools, for temporary or transient purposes (e.g.,
    replaceable memory cartridges, smart cards, etc.).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    2,      for addressing extended/expanded memory.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 441+, 492, and 493 for electrical records and
    record sensors (i.e., IC cards).

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 281+ for bus
    expanding/extending and hot card inserting.

    463,    Amusement Devices: Games, subclass 44 for a cartridge for game
    memory storage.


CLS 711/116
TXT Bubble memory:

    Subject matter under subclass 101 wherein the memory is of the solid-state
    type comprising one or more series of persistent microscopically small
    magnetized bubbles on a thin film substrate.


CLS 711/117
TXT Hierarchical memories:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein the memory being accessed or
    controlled is in an arrangement consisting of more than one ordered level
    of memory.


CLS 711/118
TXT Caching:

    Subject matter under subclass 117 wherein portions of the data stored in
    slower main memory are transferred to faster memory between processor(s)
    and the main memory.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    113,    for systems where a cache memory is created within a DASD or
    dedicated to a DASD device.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 49 and 50 for
    associative memories and caches at the cell level.


CLS 711/119
TXT Multiple caches:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 employing plural cache memories arranged
    between at least one processor and at least one main memory.


CLS 711/120
TXT Parallel caches:

    Subject matter under subclass 119 further comprising means or steps for
    employing plural cache memories arranged at the same ordinal level between
    at least one processor and at least one main memory.


CLS 711/121
TXT Private caches:

    Subject matter under subclass 119 further comprising means or steps for
    employing plural cache memories where at least one of the caches is
    exclusively associated with a respective one of a plurality of processors.


CLS 711/122
TXT Hierarchical caches:

    Subject matter under subclass 119 further comprising means or steps for
    caching at a plurality of different hierarchical levels (e.g., main cache
    coupled to an on-chip cache).


CLS 711/123
TXT User data cache and instruction data cache:

    Subject matter under subclass 119 further comprising means or steps for
    employing separate or partitioned cache(s) for separately storing portions
    of instruction data and user data, respectively.

    (1)     Note.  This physical separation of instruction data and user data
    is often referred to as Harvard architecture in the art and associated
    literature.


CLS 711/124
TXT Cross-interrogating:

    Subject matter under subclass 119 wherein an individual cache system must
    announce to other cache systems or check with other cache systems which may
    possibly contain a copy of a given cached location prior to or upon
    modification or appropriation of data at a given cached location.


CLS 711/125
TXT Instruction data cache:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 further comprising means or steps using a
    single cache dedicated to caching instruction data.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 376 through
    395, 561+, and 898 for instruction data processing, particularly subclasses
    392+ for instruction dependency checking and resolution.


CLS 711/126
TXT User data cache:

    Subject under subclass 118 further comprising means or steps for using a
    single cache dedicated to caching user data.


CLS 711/127
TXT Interleaved:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein consecutive cache memory
    locations are located in different memory components.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for interleaving in combination with multiple memory modules with
    significant addressing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 230.03 and
    230.04 for subject matter including plural banks or blocks and alternating
    between them.


CLS 711/128
TXT Associative:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 further comprising organizing a cache
    system where any block in main memory can be mapped to any block in the
    cache (fully associative) or where the cache is divided into sets of blocks
    and individual blocks of main memory are mapped to any of the blocks of a
    particular corresponding set (that is, for example, set associative).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 49+ for
    associative memories or content addressable memories (CAM), per se.


CLS 711/129
TXT Partitioned cache:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 further comprising means or steps for
    dividing the cache into independent sections or domains.


CLS 711/130
TXT Shared cache:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 further comprising means or steps for
    providing caching functions to a plurality of processors from single cache.


CLS 711/131
TXT Multiport cache:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 further comprising caches composed of
    multiport memory thereby allowing simultaneous reads from the cache by
    plural processors.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 230.05 for
    multiple port access devices.


CLS 711/132
TXT Stack cache:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 further comprising means or steps for
    caching stack data.


CLS 711/133
TXT Entry replacement strategy:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 including provisions for determining when
    the contents of a cache location may be replaced with other data.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203+,   for various generalized virtual addressing teachings.


CLS 711/134
TXT Combined replacement modes:

    Subject matter under subclass 133 using a combination that includes more
    than one entry replacement determination mode.


CLS 711/135
TXT Cache flushing:

    Subject matter under subclass 133 including provisions to clear or reset
    the cache or associated flags.


CLS 711/136
TXT Least recently used:

    Subject matter under subclass 133 where the determination is made based
    upon the time since the last access to the contents of a given location.


CLS 711/137
TXT Look-ahead:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 where selected data from main memory are
    retrieved into the cache prior to any request from the processor for the
    selected data.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 381 for
    instruction fetching, subclass 383 for prefetching of instructions, and
    subclasses 580+ for branch prediction.


CLS 711/138
TXT Cache bypassing:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein selected memory accesses are not
    placed into or retrieved from the cache.


CLS 711/139
TXT No-cache flags:

    Subject matter under subclass 138 including provisions for marking selected
    locations of main memory so that the contents are not cached.


CLS 711/140
TXT Cache pipelining:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 wherein one access sequence to the cache
    memory is started before a prior access sequence is completed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 381+ for
    instruction fetching.


CLS 711/141
TXT Coherency:

    Subject matter under subclass 118 further comprising means or steps not
    specifically covered above for assuring that the data stored in the cache
    memory and those of the main memory are either identical or controlled so
    that stale and current data are not confused with each other.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter in this subclass is also called cache
    consistency or cache currency in the art.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    161+,   for various reliability methods under accessing and control allowed
    by the (6) Note for subclass 100 above, such as archiving and backup.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 180+ for
    reliability and availability in digital data processing systems, per se,
    including subclasses 182.02+ for memory or peripheral subsystem affected
    fault recovery.

    707,    Data Processing:  Database and File Management, Data Structures, or
    Document Processing, subclasses 200+ for file and database maintenance
    systems including data coherency in database or file systems and subclasses
    530+ for developing or changing a document wherein one or more elements of
    document are added, deleted, or modified, or including means or steps for
    storing the resultant altered document or the alterations.


CLS 711/142
TXT Write-through:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 where, as contents of the cache are
    changed, the changes are also posted to main memory substantially
    simultaneously.


CLS 711/143
TXT Write-back:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 where, as contents of the cache are
    changed, the changes are not posted to main memory immediately, but rather
    changes to a block are posted upon the occurrence of a predetermined event.


CLS 711/144
TXT Cache status data bit:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein coherency for each unit or block
    of data includes associated identifier bit(s) to indicate the validity
    status of an associated cached location.

    (1)     Note.  For this subclass, validity status bits can indicate whether
    data are modified, valid, dirty, etc.


CLS 711/145
TXT Access control bit:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 wherein each unit or block of memory or
    cache includes associated identifier bit(s) to indicate ownership of or
    restricted access to the unit or block.

    (1)     Note.  For this subclass, access control bits can indicate whether
    the associated cached location is exclusive, shared, read only, locked,
    etc.


CLS 711/146
TXT Snooping:

    Subject matter under subclass 141 further comprising cache memory
    monitoring an associated address bus to determine if access to a cached
    location occurs by another cache memory or other user (e.g., DMA,
    peripherals, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Oganization, subclasses 280+ for
    system intraconnecting, particularly subclasses 287+ for bus access
    regulating.


CLS 711/147
TXT Shared memory area:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 wherein at least a portion of the memory
    being accessed or controlled is solid-state memory that iscommon to a
    plurality of users (e.g., a CPU and a DMA controller, multiple CPUs, etc.)
    or a plurality of tasks (e.g., in a multitasking system) or both.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 200.43 for a
    plurality of computers transferring data through one or more memories
    accessible by the plurality of computers; subclass 496 for memory access
    pipelining; and subclasses 672+ for process scheduling involving balancing
    the work load or resources, memory use, register use, resource
    availability, time constraints, semaphores, and mutual exclusion mechanisms
    used for programs or process synchronization.

    707,    Data Processing:  Database and File Management, Data Structures, or
    Document Processing, subclasses 1+, 100+, and 200+ for database access,
    schema, and maintenance.


CLS 711/148
TXT Plural shared memories:

    Subject matter under subclass 147 wherein plural independent memories are
    shared.


CLS 711/149
TXT Multiport memory:

    Subject matter under subclass 147 including means or steps for controlling
    shared memory capable of supporting a plurality of simultaneous read
    accesses.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 230.05 for
    multiple port access devices.


CLS 711/150
TXT Simultaneous access regulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 147 including provisions for controlling
    simultaneous memory access requests.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 287+ for
    access regulating and arbitration within a digital data processing system;
    subclasses 726 through 732 for generalized locking, polling, access
    arbitrating; subclasses 733+ for interrupt processing; and subclasses 856+
    for I/O access regulating.


CLS 711/151
TXT Prioritized access regulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 147 including provisions for assigning
    priority for use in handling simultaneous memory access requests.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 287+ for
    access regulating and arbitration within a digital data processing system;
    subclass 673 for priority scheduling of process (e.g., deciding which
    resources to use, deciding which jobs to do first and what order to do
    them; scheduling constraints may include resource characteristics such as
    performance, availability, data coherency, etc.); subclasses 726 through
    732 for generalized locking, polling, access arbitrating, and interrupt
    processing; and subclasses 856 through 865 for I/O access regulating.


CLS 711/152
TXT Memory access blocking:

    Subject matter under subclass 147 including provisions for selectively
    restricting access to memory areas.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 287+ for
    access regulating and arbitration within a digital data processing system;
    subclass 726 for generalized locking, polling, access arbitrating, and
    interrupt processing; and subclasses 856+ for I/O access regulating.


CLS 711/153
TXT Shared memory partitioning:

    Subject matter under subclass 147 further comprising means for dividing or
    segmenting a given logical shared memory area into independent sections or
    domains.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 569 for
    processing control and instruction processing for context preserving;
    subclass 570 for processing control and instruction processing for mode
    switch or change; subclasses 670+ for processing task management, per se,
    in particular subclasses 677 and 678 for multi-tasking and context
    switching; and subclasses 651 through 653, 680+, and 701 through 712 for
    various operating system functions, per se.

    707,    Data Processing:  Database and File Management, Data Structures, or
    Document Processing, subclasses 1+ for database management and file
    management systems including significant addressing, retrieval, or
    manipulation of information contained within a database of a digital data
    processing system or computer including searching, query processing,
    information locating and retrieval techniques from a file or database; and
    subclasses 200+ for file maintenance operations, allocating or deallocating
    memory space to files, garbage collection, and hierarchical or tree filling
    systems.


CLS 711/154
TXT Control technique:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 including particular means or steps for
    controlling memory accesses not specifically provided for above.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclass
    2.2 for memory access, subclasses 10.2+ for replacement with spare memory
    component or portion of memory component, subclasses 21.1+ for memory
    testing, and subclasses 40.1+ for memory access with error correction.


CLS 711/155
TXT Read-modify-write (RMW):

    Subject matter under subclass 154 including provisions for performing an
    access operation where the contents of a given memory location are read and
    then overwritten in a single access operation.


CLS 711/156
TXT Status storage:

    Subject matter under subclass 154 including provisions for storing data
    associated with memory accessing and control.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of status data include control status words,
    program status words, etc.


CLS 711/157
TXT Interleaving:

    Subject matter under subclass 154 wherein consecutive memory addresses are
    in nonadjacent physical locations.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    5,      for interleaving in combination with multiple memory modules with
    significant addressing.

    127,    for cache interleaving where consecutive cache memory locations are
    located in different memory components.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 230.03 and
    230.04 for subject matter including plural banks or blocks and alternating
    between them.


CLS 711/158
TXT Prioritizing:

    Subject matter under subclass 154 including banks or modules which are
    arranged so that a given physical memory element has access priority over
    another.


CLS 711/159
TXT Entry replacement strategy:

    Subject matter under subclass 154 including provisions for determining when
    the data stored in a particular memory location may be replaced.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133+,   for cache entry replacement strategies.


CLS 711/160
TXT Least recently used (LRU):

    Subject matter under subclass 159 wherein the determination is made based
    upon the time since the last access to the contents of a given location.


CLS 711/161
TXT Archiving:

    Subject matter under subclass 154 wherein the control technique prevents
    the corruption, loss, alteration, or disclosure of data by storing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery,
    appropriate subclasses for reliability and availability in memory accessing
    and control such as isolating failed memory and storing redundant data with
    recitation of the recovery, fault, or failure.

    380,    Cryptography, subclasses 3+ for stored information access or copy
    prevention (e.g., software program protection or computer virus detection)
    in combination with data encryption, and subclasses 22 through 25  and  50
    for electric signal modification, and other appropriate subclasses.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 180+ for
    diagnostic testing or monitoring of a digital data processing system for
    reliability purposes comprising power fail-safe functions, fault detection,
    or anticipation of a failure; more specifically, subclasses 182.03+ for
    memory or peripheral subsystem affected recovery, subclass 183.18 for
    memory component fault, and subclass 185.07 for storage content error
    detection or notification; and subclass 712 for local and remote software
    loading, copying, or installing of a software (e.g., operating system,
    application program, and other executable program) onto a target storage
    medium such as a hard disk, tape drive, or other memory devices.


CLS 711/162
TXT Backup:

    Subject matter under subclass 161 wherein a verbatim redundant copy of the
    data is made.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165,    for movement or transfers of data amongst locations within a same
    memory level.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery,
    appropriate subclasses for reliability and availability in memory accessing
    and control such as isolating failed memory and storing redundant data with
    recitation of the recovery, fault, or failure.


CLS 711/163
TXT Access limiting:

    Subject matter under subclass 154 wherein memory entry is restricted.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclasses
    40.1+ for memory access block coding and subclass 51.1 for storage
    accessing error/fault detection techniques.

    380,    Cryptography, subclass 4 for stored digital data access or copy
    prevention in combination with data encryption (e.g., software program
    protection or computer virus detection in combination with data
    encryption), and subclasses 23+ for authentication systems using encrypted
    transmission.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 186+ for
    security in a digital data processing system; subclasses 287+ for
    regulating access of processors or memories to a bus; subclasses 726
    through 732 for generic access locking, access regulating, or access
    arbitration in data processing system; and subclasses 856+ for access
    regulating of peripheral(s) to computer(s) or vice versa.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 26.1 for subject matter which blocks
    access to a signal source or otherwise limits usage of modulated carrier
    equipment.


CLS 711/164
TXT With password or key:

    Subject matter under subclass 163 wherein authorization code information
    (e.g., password, key other than encryption key, etc.) is required for
    memory access.


    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for cryptographic keys.  See
    below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclasses
    40.1+ for memory access block coding and subclass 51.1 for storage
    accessing error/fault detection techniques.

    380,    Cryptography, subclass 4 for stored digital data access or copy
    prevention in combination with data encryption (e.g., software program
    protection or computer virus detection in combination with data
    encryption).

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 186+ for
    security in a digital data processing system requiring password.

    455,    Telecommunications, subclass 26.1 for subject matter which blocks
    access to a signal source or otherwise limits usage of modulated carrier
    equipment.


    705,    Data Processing:  Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/Price Determination, subclass 18 for handling security or user
    identification provision to either prevent unauthorized use or access.


CLS 711/165
TXT Internal relocation:

    Subject matter under subclass 154 including provisions for moving or
    copying data from one location in a given memory to another location in the
    given memory or another memory at the same hierarchical level.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for DMA.   See below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 842+ for
    transferring data via the I/O mechanism of DMA.


CLS 711/166
TXT Resetting:

    Subject matter under subclass 154 including provisions for clearing or
    initializing the contents of a given memory location.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for setting a portion of memory to an
    initial condition (e.g., filling all locations with zeros).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 651 for
    digital data processing system initialization or configuration (e.g.,
    initializing, setup, configuration, or resetting) allocating extended or
    expanded memory, specifying device drivers, paths, files, buffers, disk
    management, etc.; subclass 652 for loading initialization program (e.g.,
    booting, BIOS, IPL, bootstrapping, etc.); and subclass 653 for
    reconfiguring (e.g., changing system settings) of system settings, per se.


CLS 711/167
TXT Access timing:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 including provisions for controlling or
    coordinating the sequence of operations that make up a memory access.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 93 through 98 for
    clocking or synchronizing of logic stages or gates.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, subclass 507 wherein the clock frequency
    adjustment of one station is based upon information about status of clock
    signals originating at other stations of the system.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 354+ for synchronizing
    the operation of pulse or digital receiving or transmitting mechanisms.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 182.1 for
    fault recovery synchronization of redundantly operating processors;
    subclass 200.78 for multi-computer synchronization in a network; subclasses
    551+ for details relating to the timing control or timing regulation of any
    one or combination of digital data processing system components according
    to a periodic sequence of clock/timing pulses (e.g., synchronous time
    control, time delay, cycle control, cycle steal, etc.); subclasses 595
    through 598 for processing sequence control; subclasses 670+ for task and
    process scheduling, per se; and subclasses 881 for synchronous data
    transfer in I/O process timing.


CLS 711/168
TXT Concurrent accessing:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 further including means or steps wherein
    multiple memory accesses are initiated substantially simultaneously.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 677+ for
    multitasking, time sharing/slicing.


CLS 711/169
TXT Memory access pipelining:

    Subject matter under subclass 167 further including means or steps wherein
    a first access to memory is initiated before a second access is completed.

    (1)     Note.  Pipelined instruction data processing is classified
    elsewhere.  See the SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS notes below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 381+ for
    instruction fetching, subclasses 390+ for instruction issuing, subclasses
    580+ for branching instruction processing,   subclass 652 for process
    scheduling, and subclass 670 for task management and control related to
    process or job execution.


CLS 711/170
TXT Memory configuring:

    Subject matter under subclass 100 in which the allocation of memory space
    is specified or the layout is automatically determined.

    (1)     Note.  Configuration at booting via software is classified
    elsewhere in this class.  See the SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS notes below.

    (2)     Note.  Assigning operating characteristics to peripherals is
    classified elsewhere in this class.  See the SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS
    notes below.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 182.01+ for
    reconfiguring in the event of a fault under fault recovery, reliability,
    and availability; subclass 200.5 for network computer configuring; subclass
    284 for utilizing a hardware structure for providing to a digital data
    processing system component the arrangement of the digital data processing
    system including characteristics of the digital data processing system's
    components; subclass 569 for processing control and instruction processing
    for context preserving; subclass 570 for processing control and instruction
    processing for mode switch or change; subclass 651 for digital data
    processing system initialization or configuration (e.g., initializing,
    setup, configuration, or resetting) allocating extended or expanded memory,
    specifying device drivers, paths, files, buffers, disk management, etc.;
    subclass 653 for reconfiguring of system settings, per se; subclasses 670+
    for task management, per se, in particular subclass 674 for resource
    allocation (e.g., deciding how best to use the available resources to get
    the job done) and subclasses 677 and 678 for multi-tasking and context
    switching; and subclasses 828+ for assigning operating characteristics to
    peripherals or peripheral configuring.

    707,    Data Processing:  Database and File Management, Data Structures, or
    Document Processing, subclasses 1+ for database management and file
    management systems including significant addressing, retrieval, or
    manipulation of information contained within a database of a digital data
    processing system or computer including searching, query processing,
    information locating and retrieval techniques from a file or database; and
    subclasses 200+ for file maintenance operations, allocating or deallocating
    memory space to files, garbage collection, and hierarchical or tree filling
    systems.


CLS 711/171
TXT Based on data size:

    Subject matter under subclass 170 comprising means or steps for allocating
    memory space based on the amount of storage space required.


CLS 711/172
TXT Based on component size:

    Subject matter under subclass 170 comprising means or steps for allocating
    memory based on the size of each physical solid-state memory.


CLS 711/173
TXT Memory partitioning:

    Subject matter under subclass 170 further comprising means for dividing or
    segmenting a given logical memory into independent sections or domains.


CLS 711/200
TXT ADDRESS FORMATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition comprising means or steps for
    determining or modifying a value which specifies a location in at least one
    memory.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter of this subclass and the subclasses
    thereunder includes, for example, virtual memory addressing, address
    translation, translation look-aside buffers (TLBs), boundary checking, and
    page-mode addressing.

    (2)     Note.  The subject matter also includes deriving new address data
    from existing address data.

    (3)     Note.  The location in memory may include data for forming further
    an address (e.g., address mapping is classified herein).

    (4)     Note.  Means or steps for addressing or for storing data in one or
    more memory cells of a storage medium having one or more specific, internal
    cell elements is classified elsewhere.  See the SEARCH CLASS notes below.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    1,      for addressing combined with specific memory configurations (e.g.,
    extended/expanded memory, cache memory, dynamic memory, etc.).

    3,      for cache memory addressing.

    101     through 116, for storage accessing and control for various memory
    compositions (e.g., ROM, RAM, CAM, dynamic, detachable, bubble, etc.) with
    more than nominal data processing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    326,    Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, subclasses 104 through 108  for
    digital logic decoding circuits in general.

    340,    Communications: Electrical, subclasses 825.52+ for selective
    communication addressing and subclasses 825.79+ for selective matrix which
    may be used for control or as a switching means.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 507+ for processing indices to
    locations (or addresses) of stored data elements in a computer graphic
    processing system.


    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 72.2
    for addressing and control of recording mechanism to locate the selected
    area.


    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 189.01+ for
    read/write circuits and subclasses 230.01+ for addressing of addressable,
    static single storage elements or plural elements of the same type.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, various subclasses for
    record carriers and systems wherein information is stored and retrieved by
    interaction with a medium and there is relative motion between a medium and
    a transducer. Particularly, see subclasses 30 through 34 for selective
    addressing of dynamic storage medium.

    370,    Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for multiplex
    switching techniques similar to addressing and the handling of memory
    information signals (e.g., subclasses 351+ for packetized multiplexed
    communications).

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 311+ for
    system intraconnecting switching; subclasses 384+ for instruction decoding
    involving start or initial address generation; subclass 571 for generating
    the address of the next micro-instruction; subclasses 823+ for Input/Output
    addressing; subclass 829 for address assignment for configuring
    peripherals; and subclasses 842+ for direct memory accessing including
    addressing techniques.

    704,    Data Processing:  Speech Signal Processing, Linguistics, Language
    Translation, and Audio Compression/Decompression, subclasses 2+ for memory
    control scheme combined with linguistics.

     707,   Data Processing:  Database and File Management, Data Structures, or
    Document Processing, subclasses 1+ for database management and file
    management systems including significant addressing, retrieval, or
    manipulation of information contained within a database of a digital data
    processing system or computer including searching, query processing,
    information locating and retrieval techniques from a file or database;
    subclasses 100+ for database schema types; and subclasses 200+ for file
    maintenance operations, allocating or deallocating memory space to files,
    garbage collection, and hierarchical or tree filling systems.


CLS 711/201
TXT Slip control, misaligning, boundary alignment:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein the value determination takes
    into account a memory size constraint.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass will accept range or limit checking, boundary
    crossing, and related memory boundary issues (e.g., (a) handling a boundary
    fixed length field to accommodate data size or position and boundary
    checking and (b) incrementing addresses within a page).


CLS 711/202
TXT Address mapping (e.g., conversion, translation):

    Subject matter under subclass 200 including translating (i.e., converting)
    processor memory address data to physical memory address data through a
    mechanism which defines a correspondence between the addresses.

    (1)     Note.  The subject matter in this and the indented subclasses is
    aimed at determining a physical address using a mapping technique.

    (2)     Note.  Classification here is proper for direct mapping for a
    segmented memory not being used in a virtual memory system.


CLS 711/203
TXT Virtual addressing:

    Subject matter under subclass 202 wherein the mapping allows an application
    to view available memory resources as a uniform primary memory.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    6,      for address mapping for virtual machines.


CLS 711/204
TXT Predicting, look-ahead:

    Subject matter under subclass 203 wherein means or steps are utilized for
    optimizing address determination by, for example, anticipating a next
    address or prefetching addresses.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 381+ for
    instruction fetching, subclass 383 for prefetching of instructions, and
    subclasses 580+ for branch prediction.


CLS 711/205
TXT Directories and tables (e.g., DLAT, TLB):

    Subject matter under subclass 204 wherein a memory space is employed for
    registering indexes and the like to real or physical address spaces in a
    predicting or look-ahead arrangement.

    (1)     Note.   A directory table is a mechanism for storing virtual (i.e.,
    logical) to physical (i.e., real, absolute) address translation entries
    that are used in combination with methods of predicting or prefetching.

    (2)     Note.  DLAT is a term of art referring to Directory Look-Aside
    Table; TLB is a term of art referring to Translation Look-Aside Buffer.


CLS 711/206
TXT Translation tables (e.g., segment and page table or map):

    Subject matter under subclass 203 wherein directories (e.g., maps) are
    employed for converting address data in a first form (e.g., virtual,
    logical) to address data in a second form (e.g., physical, absolute).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass and its indented subclasses are intended for
    generalized applications of tables not classifiable in the combinations
    above.

    (2)     Note.  This area also provides for mechanisms for storing virtual
    (i.e., logical) to physical (i.e., real, absolute) address translation
    entries that are of general use in virtual memory.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass will accept table walking which generally
    requires accesses to main memory.


CLS 711/207
TXT Directory tables (e.g., DLAT, TLB):

    Subject matter under subclass 206 wherein a memory space is employed for
    registering indexes and the like to real or physical address spaces.

    (1)     Note.  These mechanisms convert address data from a virtual address
    to a physical address without the need for accessing translation tables in
    main memory (e.g., utilizing cache for virtual to physical translation).

    (2)     Note.  DLAT is a term of art referring to Directory Look-Aside
    Table; TLB is a term of art referring to Translation Look-Aside Buffer.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    3,      for cache memory addressing.


CLS 711/208
TXT Segment or page table descriptor:

    Subject matter under subclass 206 wherein an entry, word, or other data is
    maintained and is utilized in the translation.


CLS 711/209
TXT Including plural logical address spaces, pages, segments, blocks:


    Subject matter under subclass 203 wherein portions of memory are organized
    or managed in accordance with a predetermined mapping scheme.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes art directed to addressing
    variable-sized pages, segments, and blocks.


CLS 711/210
TXT Resolving conflict, coherency, or synonym problem:

    Subject matter under subclass 202 including compensating for situations
    when addresses map to the same location (e.g., synonym problems or alias
    addresses).


    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 180 for
    reliability and availability in general in digital data processing systems.


CLS 711/211
TXT Address multiplexing or address bus manipulation:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 including address bus modifying,
    multiplexing addresses, or adapting to various bus widths.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclass 281 for bus
    extending or expanding and subclasses 306+ for bus architectures.


CLS 711/212
TXT Varying address bit-length or size:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein bits are added or subtracted from
    existing address data to generate other address data.


CLS 711/213
TXT Generating prefetch, look-ahead, jump, or predictive address:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein look-ahead, predictive, or jump
    address data are formed.

    (1)     Note.  Prefetching, look-ahead, etc., for virtual memory addressing
    are classified elsewhere.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    203+,   for virtual memory addressing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 381+ for
    instruction fetching, subclass 383 for prefetching of instructions, and
    subclasses 580+ for branch prediction.


CLS 711/214
TXT Operand address generation:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein data relevant to an instruction
    and used by an instruction are used to form the address.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, particularly subclasses
    376 through 395, 561+, and 898 for instruction processing, particularly
    subclasses 580 through 591 for branching instruction processing.


CLS 711/215
TXT In response to microinstruction:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein microcode is stored in memory and
    particular addressing mechanisms at the microinstruction level are
    employed.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, particularly subclasses
    376 through 395, 561+, and 898 for instruction processing,  particularly
    subclasses 595+ for microsequencing processing; and subclasses 800.01+ for
    digital data processing system architectures.


CLS 711/216
TXT Hashing:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein an address value (i.e., key other
    than an encryption key) is manipulated to form an index value.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass does not provide for cryptographic keys.  See
    below.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    380,    Cryptography, subclass 4 for stored digital data access or copy
    prevention in combination with data encryption (e.g., software program
    protection or computer virus detection in combination with data
    encryption).

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 186+ for
    security in a digital data processing system requiring password.

    707,    Data Processing:  Database and File Management, Data Structures, or
    Document Processing, subclasses 1+ for database searching utilizing
    hashing.


CLS 711/217
TXT Generating a particular pattern/sequence of addresses:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein values specifying memory
    locations are determined according to a predetermined algorithm.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 230.03 and
    230.04 for subject matter including plural banks or blocks and alternating
    between them.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, subclasses
    21.1 through 21.3 for testing memories utilizing patterns of addresses and
    data.


CLS 711/218
TXT Sequential addresses generation:

    Subject matter under subclass 217 wherein the pattern created is seriatim.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, appropriate subclasses for generic pulse counting
    circuits and systems.


CLS 711/219
TXT Incrementing, decrementing, or shifting
    circuitry:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 utilizing particular hardware that adds
    by 1, subtracts by 1, and multiplies or divides by 2n (where n is an
    integer).


    SEARCH CLASS:

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, appropriate subclasses for generic pulse counting
    circuits and systems.


CLS 711/220
TXT Combining two or more values to create address:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 wherein results from the interaction of
    two or more other data provide the address (e.g., generalized indirect
    addressing, indexing, prefixing, base + sag/tag + set, bit insertion).


CLS 711/221
TXT Using table:

    Subject matter under subclass 200 having a memory space of general utility
    for registering indexes and like data related to address generation (e.g.,
    fixed offsets, conditions, or status).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    202+,   for tables used in mapping or translating.


CLS 800/
TTL MULTICELLULAR LIVING ORGANISMS AND UNMODIFIED PARTS THEREOF

CLS 800/
TXT This is the class for living multicellular organisms and separated or
    severed parts thereof that have not undergone any modification or treatment
    subsequent to their separation. These organisms or parts thereof may be
    genetically modified.

    This class provides for the following products:

    1.      Living multicellular organisms, e.g., plants, or nonhuman animals,
    etc.

    2.      Living multicellular organisms and living products: (a) derived
    from traditional or conventional breeding techniques; (b) derived from
    grafting processes; (c) derived from tissue culture techniques; and/or (d)
    derived from techniques which change the genetic makeup or affect the
    progeny of multicellular organisms.

    (1)     Note.  Some examples of traditional or conventional breeding
    techniques used in plants are as follows, e.g., self-pollination, inbred
    lines, cross-pollination, hybridization, selection, emasculation,
    cytoplasmic male sterility, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Techniques which change the genetic makeup or affect the
    progeny of multicellular organisms include genetic manipulations such as
    mutagenesis, protoplast cell fusion and recombinant or transgenic processes.

    (3)     Note.  Some examples of tissue culture techniques used in plants
    are, for example, embryogenesis, organogenesis, etc.

    3.      Separated or severed parts of multicellular organisms which have
    not been modified or treated subsequent to their separation.

    (1)     Note.  Seeds from plants are considered as severed parts of a plant
    for purposes of this class (i.e., genetically modified seeds).

    (2)     Note.  Embryos, plantlets, flowers, leaves, differentiated tissue
    (i.e., specific  organs), buds, meristems, shoots, roots, tubers, fruits,
    stems, cuttings, bulbs, corms, rhizomes, pollen, mycelium, spores,
    ascocarps, and sclerotia are considered unmodified plant parts for purposes
    of this class.

    (3)     Note.  This class includes the products obtained by modifications
    of multicellular living organisms and separated or severed parts thereof
    wherein the organism or part thereof is permanently changed (i.e., by
    genetic manipulation, by mutation, by cell fusion, or by tissue culture) so
    that subsequent progeny or offspring are likewise affected. This class also
    includes the products obtained by modifications of multicellular living
    organisms and separated or severed parts thereof wherein the organism is
    permanently changed (i.e., by grafting) so that unique features or
    properties are conferred to the organism but its offspring are not
    affected, i.e., genetic lineage is not altered.

    (4)     Note.  This subclass excludes modifications of multicellular living
    organisms and separated or severed parts thereof wherein the organism or
    product or part thereof is temporarily changed or treated by processes such
    as coating, impregnating, dyeing, bleaching, preserving, adhesive bonding,
    coloring, pitting, adding artificial limbs or grafting arteries, etc.,
    i.e., subsequent genetic makeup and/or progeny will not be affected or
    changed and will still retain its general structure and appearance.

    (5)     Note.  A genetic modification encompasses any process of
    modification or alteration of the genes of an organism which will
    subsequently be passed on to its progeny (e.g., spontaneous and induced
    mutagenesis; normal cross-breeding and hybridization; recombinance; gene
    therapy or replacement; etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, appropriate subclasses for compositions and
    manipulative processes for treating animal or plant derived fibers and
    tissues wherein the animal or plant fiber or tissue may or may not be
    chemically modified. Search particularly subclasses 94.1 through 94.15 for
    compositions and processes for the treatment of hides, skins, feathers and
    other animal tissues with chemicals and the resulting products thereof;
    subclass 115.51 and those indented thereunder for processes for the
    chemical modification of hair, cellulose fibers, natural wool, silk and
    other fibers and products thereof; subclass 101 for processes of bleaching
    animal or plant derived fibers or tissue, subclass 150.5 for the fluid
    treatment of hides, skins, or leather; subclass 402 for processes for
    dyeing wood and subclass 404 and those indented thereunder for processes
    and compositions for dyeing animal derived natural fiber material (e.g.,
    leather, fur, hair, feathers, etc.) and products thereof.

    47,     Plant Husbandry, appropriate subclasses for apparatus and processes
    for cultivating plants, multicellular fungi and multicellular algae. Search
    particularly subclass 1.1 for apparatus and processes for the culture of
    multicellular fungi and other edible mushrooms; subclass 1.4 for apparatus
    and method of fostering the growth or cultivation of multicellular algae;
    subclass 1.41 for pollination methods and apparatus where the natural
    generation, propagation or reproduction of plant life is assisted by a
    discriminate or indiscriminate transfer of pollen to fertilize a plant
    flower; subclass 3 for methods of whitening growing celery; subclass 57.5
    for processes and devices for injecting chemicals into living plants for
    various purposes, e.g., injecting coloring or preserving chemicals into
    trees to produce colored or preserved wood; subclass 57.6 for coated or
    impregnated seeds not provided for elsewhere, and subclasses 59 through 65
    for apparatus and processes for fostering growth beyond germination of
    plants in a nutrient medium and without soil, e.g., in an aquatic medium.

    71,     Chemistry:  Fertilizers, appropriate subclasses for compositions
    and compounds which will alter plant growth as a response to a fertilizer
    action. Search particularly subclass 5 for products of special value in the
    cultivation of fungi (e.g., mushrooms, etc.).

    119,    Animal Husbandry, appropriate subclasses for processes and
    apparatus for the propagation, rearing and care of living animals (e.g.,
    insects, fish, fowl, mammals and other forms of animal life). Search
    subclasses 204+ for a process or apparatus for the care and propagation of
    a lobster, crab, or like aquatic crustacean, subclasses 215+ for a process
    or apparatus for the care and propagation of fish, subclasses 234+ for a
    process or apparatus for the propagation and care of an oyster, clam, or
    other aquatic mollusk, and subclass 270 for a process or apparatus employed
    in the propagation and care of a worm or other form of a moth whose larvae
    produce silk.

    156,    Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
    appropriate subclasses for processes and apparatus, including a step of
    adhesively bonding parts together. Search particularly subclass 57 for
    processes in which a plant or animal or part thereof is bonded to a support
    to maintain the natural appearance thereof.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    appropriate subclasses for products and compositions of plant or animal
    origin in any physical form which are intended to be consumed by a human
    being or lower animal in whole or part via the oral cavity. Search
    particularly subclass 7 and those indented thereunder for fermentation
    processes wherein an enzyme or microorganism is employed biochemically to
    produce or perfect a food product or composition; subclasses 61 through 64
    for edible products which contain a ferment material in a dormant state
    which can be activated, food products which contain microorganisms or food
    products with an ongoing fermentation process and processes of preparing
    such products; subclass 2 for processes of treating a live animal, e.g.,
    processes of feeding an animal or injecting the animal with chemicals to
    modify the meat characteristics of the animal followed by a slaughtering
    operation, etc.; subclass 93 for food products containing seeds which may
    be coated or encapsulated; subclasses 250 and 251 for processes of coloring
    food materials, e.g., citrus fruits, beans, nuts, etc.; subclasses 253
    through 261 for processes of removing color from food material; subclass
    270 for processes of preserving or modifying the original color of a fruit
    or vegetable; subclass 298 for processes of treating an unshelled egg;
    subclass 309 for processes of coating a seed or bean with a liquid
    material; subclasses 331 and 333 for processes of preserving fruits and
    seeds and subclass 484 for processes of removing a seed, pit, stem or a
    core from a plant material.

    427,    Coating Processes, appropriate subclasses for processes of coating
    animals, plants and parts thereof. Search specifically subclass 4 for
    processes of applying a coating to a plant member or an animal specimen
    with intent to preserve the member or specimen near or in its natural state.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses
    for products of nature that have been modified by processes other than
    coating, dyeing or bleaching. Search particularly subclasses 15 through 18
    and 24 for products of nature that have been modified but retain their
    general structure and appearance; subclass 85 for treated animal skin with
    fur; subclasses 101, 191, 511, and 528 for composite products where wood is
    a component; subclass 270 for a product which contains hair of sheep or
    hair from an animal whose hair is similar to that of sheep and subclasses
    540 and 541 for products of nature like leather, wood, etc., that have been
    impregnated with an extraneous material.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, appropriate
    subclasses for processes and apparatus for propagating microorganisms and
    undifferentiated animal or plant cells for cultivation of tissue,
    maintenance of tissue or organs in a viable state for microorganisms, per
    se, and the subcellular parts thereof. Class 435 also provides for
    processes for cultivating or culturing seed plants that include
    microorganisms and for processes and apparatus for making products that
    include seeds and microorganisms. Search particularly subclasses 172.1,
    172.2, 172.3 for mutation and genetic engineering processes where a stable
    change in an animal or plant cell or microorganism is produced by
    artificially inducing a structure change in a gene or by incorporation of
    genetic material from an outside source; subclass 240.1 for compositions,
    processes and media for the maintenance or in vitro propagation of
    undifferentiated animal or plant cells or groups of cells; subclass 243 for
    microorganisms, per se, including unicellular fungi and unicellular algae,
    compositions thereof and processes of propagating, maintaining, isolating
    or preserving and culture media therefore; and subclass 174 for processes
    where a microbial cell (bacterial, fungi, algae, animal or plant cell) is
    bound to a carrier during a continuous biochemical process.

    504,    Plant Protecting and Regulating Compositions, subclasses 116+ for
    compositions and compounds for treating living terrestrial and aquatic
    plants (including multicellular mushrooms) or their habitats for the
    purpose of stimulating, inhibiting or retarding growth, defoliating, or
    killing said plants, and the processes of using such compositions or
    compounds for such purposes which are not more than their mere application
    to the plant or habitat.  The compositions or compounds included in this
    class will alter the plant growth through a chemical modification of the
    plant metabolism.  Search particularly subclasses 150+ for compositions for
    retarding, inhibiting, or killing algae; subclasses 174+ for compositions
    that are employed to suppress or retard the rate of growth or size of a
    plant; subclasses 184+ for compositions which inhibit, retard, destroy, or
    remove a sucker growth from a living plant.  Class 504 also provides for
    seeds coated with agricultural chemicals other than fertilizers.

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members) Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, appropriate subclasses for artificial substitutes
    or parts for a human body, particularly manufactured or adapted to
    substitute or assist a missing or defective natural body member or part
    thereof for functional or cosmetic purposes. For purposes of Class 623, an
    artificial body member may include a natural other than human animal body
    part which has been treated or modified to produce a different type of
    replacement body part, an example is a graft usable for arteries, organs or
    skin which has been made from animal intestines or umbilical cord. Search
    particularly subclass 1 for artificial blood vessels; subclass 3 for an
    artificial heart, regulator, power supply or method of operation thereof;
    subclass 5 for corneal implants; subclass 15 for inventions manufactured or
    adapted to replace skin or hair and subclasses 20, 21, 27, 39, 47, 53, for
    inventions manufactured or adapted to replace a limb or part thereof (e.g.,
    hand, legs, knee, feet, etc.).

    935,    Genetic Engineering:  Recombinant DNA Technology, Hybrid or Fused
    Cell Technology, and Related Manipulations of Nucleic Acids, appropriate
    subclasses for processes and apparatus for the fusion of cells, transfer of
    nuclear material from one cell to another, introduction of exogenous
    genetic material or the nonrandom alteration of the genetic contents of a
    cell. Class 935 also provides for methods of synthesizing, modifying or
    isolating specific nucleic acid sequences. Class 935 is a cross reference
    collection of U.S. and foreign patents claiming or disclosing methods and
    apparatus for producing a change in the genetic contents or structure of a
    cell.


CLS 800/2
TXT NONHUMAN ANIMAL:
    Products under the class definition which are multicellular nonhuman
    animals (e.g., transgenic mouse).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 172.1,
    172.2 and 172.3 for mutation and genetic engineering processes for making
    nonhuman animals.

    935,    Genetic Engineering: Recombinant DNA Technology, Hybrid or Fused
    Cell Technology, and Related Manipulations of Nucleic Acids, appropriate
    subclasses for processes and apparatus for the fusion of cells, transfer of
    nuclear material from one cell to another, introduction of exogenous
    genetic material or the nonrandom alteration of the genetic contents of a
    cell.


CLS 800/200
TXT Plant, seedling or plant part:
    Products under the class definition which are multicellular plants,
    seedlings (i.e., a young plant grown from seed), seeds, or plant parts.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are living multicellular plants or
    seedlings and plant parts derived from traditional or conventional breeding
    techniques, e.g. hybridization, changes in ploidy, backcrossing,
    emasculation, natural airborn pollination, self-pollination, inbred lines,
    cross-pollination, selection, cytoplasmic male sterility, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Plant parts include flowers, stems, roots, fruits, leaves,
    buds, meristems, seeds, tubers, cuttings, bulbs, corms, rhizomes, pollen,
    differentiated tissue (i.e., specific organs), ascocarps, sclerotia,
    mycelium, spores, or immature plants or plant parts formed during plant
    developmental stages, e.g., embryos, plantlets, shoots, etc.

    (3)     Note.  Plants for the purpose of this subclass include polycellular
    algae, multicellular fungi (e.g., mushrooms), corn, sunflowers, trees,
    broad-leafed shrubs, etc.

    (4)     Note.  A group of plants within a species which are substantially
    phenotypically alike but which share certain constant characteristics that
    separate them from others is referred to as a "variety" or a "cultivar".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclasses 1.41, 58 and DIG 1 for traditional and
    conventional breeding and miscellaneous processes for making plants or
    seedlings.


CLS 800/205
TXT Recombinant plant:
    Products under subclass 200 including plants derived from recombinant or
    transgenic processes, e.g., transformation, which are stable inheritable
    alterations to its genome and to subsequent offspring.

    (1)     Note.  Recombinant plants or transgenic plants are obtained by
    introducing a foreign gene from an outside source into a plant's genome in
    ways other than by conventional breeding, e.g., using plasmids, vectors,
    plant viruses, bacteriophages, bacteria (i.e., Agrobacterium),
    electroporation or electricity-mediated gene transfer, ballistic
    particle-mediated gene transfer, microinjection, protoplast incubation, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Regenerated whole plants may be obtained from individual
    plant cells or protoplasts (i.e., a plant cell with the surrounding cell
    wall digested away) transformed by a vector or plasmid and combined with
    tissue culture technology.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 172.3
    involving  recombinant processes for making plants and subclasses 420+
    involving tissue culture techniques for regenerating whole plants from
    individual plant cells or protoplasts.

    935,    Genetic Engineering: Recombinant DNA Technology, Hybrid or Fused
    Cell Technology, and Related Manipulations of Nucleic Acids, appropriate
    subclasses for processes and apparatus for fusion of cells, transfer of
    nuclear material from one cell to another, introduction of exogenous
    genetic material or the nonrandom alteration of the genetic contents of a
    cell.


CLS 800/220
TXT Somatic cell fusion product or somatic cell fusion-derived plant:

    Products under subclass 200 including plants derived from somatic cell
    fusion processes wherein many genes are transferred from donor to recipient
    plant cell (e.g., protoplast).

    (1)     Note.  This subclass excludes plants derived from grafting
    processes (i.e., fusion of multicellular plant parts where no genetic
    change results).

    (2)     Note.  Regenerated whole plants may be obtained from the fused
    product (i.e., plant cell or protoplast) when combined with tissue culture
    technology.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 172.2 for
    cell fusion processes for making plants and subclass 421 for protoplast
    transformation processes combined with tissue culture techniques for
    regenerating whole plants from individual plant cells.

    935,    Genetic Engineering: Recombinant DNA Technology, Hybrid or Fused
    Cell Technology, and Related Manipulations of Nucleic Acids, subclasses 89+
    for processes and apparatus for fusion of cells and transfer of nuclear
    material from one cell to another.


CLS 800/230
TXT Mutant plant or plant derived from mutagenesis:

    Products under subclass 200 including mutant plants or plants derived from
    mutagenesis by artificially and randomly inducing a structural change in
    genes already present in the plant usually without the incorporation of
    exogenous DNA, as well as spontaneous or naturally occurring mutant plants.

    (1)     Note.  Mutations may be induced by physical conditions or mutagens
    in the environment such as, e.g., chemicals or UV radiation or X-rays or
    may be spontaneous caused by errors in DNA replication in the absence of a
    mutagen.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of mutations are, e.g., deletions, translocations,
    chromosomal aberrations, inversions, etc.

    (3)     Note.  Spontaneous mutations are often derived by tissue culture on
    a medium containing a selective agent (i.e., an herbicide) wherein only the
    resistant plant cells will survive. The resultant plants are called
    somaclonal variants.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 172.1 for
    processes for making mutant plants (i.e. mutagenesis) and subclasses 420+
    for processes of tissue culture which result in regeneration or propagation
    of cells into a plant or plant part.

    935,    Genetic Engineering: Recombinant DNA Technology, Hybrid or Fused
    Cell Technology, and Related Manipulations of Nucleic Acids, appropriate
    subclasses, which provides a search collection for processes of altering
    the genetic structure of microorganisms; genes and methods of modifying
    genes and their expression; and other related genetic manipulations.


CLS 800/235
TXT Monocotyledon (e.g., corn, rice, wheat, etc.):

    Products under subclass 230 wherein the mutant plant is one of the two
    major divisions of angiosperms (flowering plants) characterized by having a
    single embryonic seed leaf that appears at germination (i.e.,
    monocotyledon).

    (1)     Note.  Other monocotyledons include the cereal crops, barley, oats,
    rye, millet, sorghum; irises; daffodils; tulips; lilies; orchids; sedges;
    bamboo; palm; onions; cattails; etc.


CLS 800/240
TXT Plant having grafted product (i.e., grafted plant):

    Products under subclass 200 including plants derived from grafting
    processes involving the fusion of multicellular plant parts from different
    plants; i.e., "stock" and "scion".

    (1)     Note.  Plants or plant products derived from grafting may have
    unique features, vastly different from their general structure and
    appearance before grafting, and thus are permanently changed although these
    features can not be transmitted genetically to the next generation.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass excludes plants which have simply been
    inoculated with microorganisms or chemicals.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 6 for apparatus and processes for uniting
    parts of a tree or plant to another.


CLS 800/250
TXT Genetically modified seed:

    Products under subclass 200 which are seeds whose genetic makeup has been
    altered, and which modification subsequently will be passed on to its
    progeny.

    (1)     Note.  Seeds are capable of generating into a whole plant. Some
    examples of seeds are grains, soybeans, sunflower seeds, etc.

    (2)     Note.  Genetically modified seeds may be obtained by any process
    wherein the genes of an organism are altered; i.e, by spontaneous or
    induced mutagenesis; normal cross-breeding and hybridization; recombinance;
    gene therapy or replacement; etc.

    (3)     Note.  This subclass includes the seeds from plants which have not
    been coated, encapsulated, impregnated, etc. and thus have not been
    modified subsequent to their separation from the multicellular organism.

    (4)     Note.  This subclass includes monocotyledon seeds (e.g., corn,
    cereal grains and other grasses such as barley, wheat, rice, oats, rye,
    millet, sorghum, and bamboo; palm; onions; tulips; daffodils; cattails;
    irises, etc.) characterized by a single embryonic seed leaf that appears at
    germination.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    47,     Plant Husbandry, subclass 57.6, for coated or impregnated seeds not
    provided for elsewhere or artificial seeds or seed analogs; subclasses
    14-16 for seed testers; subclass 56 for seed tapes; subclass 58 for
    miscellaneous processes involving seeds; subclass 61 for seed germinators
    and DIG 9 for the physical and chemical treatment of seeds for planting.

    71,     Chemistry:  Fertilizers, subclasses 5+ for compositions of seeds
    and fertilizers.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses
    93.1+ for seeds coated with whole live micro-organisms, cells, or viruses
    which may have utility as drugs or bio-affecting compositions.

    426,    Food or Edible Material: Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    subclass 93 for food products containing seeds which may be coated or
    encapsulated; subclass 309 for processes of coating a seed or bean with a
    liquid material; subclass 331 for processes of preserving seeds; and
    subclass 484 for removing a seed from a plant material.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 15+ for other
    "treated" natural products and subclasses 403+ for coated particulate
    matter.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 185 for
    materials containing germinating seeds or germinating grain (i.e., malt);
    for artificial seeds; for seed analogs and subclass 93 for processes that
    include germinating seeds, i.e., mashed grain or wort.

    504,    Plant Protecting and Regulating Compositions, subclass 100 for
    seeds coated with agricultural chemicals other than fertilizers; and,
    subclasses 116+ for compositions which enhance the germinating of a seed.


CLS 800/255
TXT Dicotyledon:

    Products under subclass 250 wherein the seed is from one of the two major
    divisions of angiosperms (i.e., flowering plants) characterized by a pair
    of seed leaves that appears at germination (i.e., dicotyledon) (e.g.,
    cotton, magnolia, carrots, peas, mints, tobacco, alfalfa, potatoes,
    mustards, squashes, dandelions, sunflowers, spinach, poison ivy, beans,
    Brassica species, most broad-leafed shrubs, trees, etc.).

    (1)     Note.  Angiosperms are a subclass of flowering plants which are
    divided into monocotyledons and dicotyledons.

    (2)     Note.  The bulk of an angiosperm seed is made up of one or two
    leaflike structures (cotyledons) packed with food, especially starch, with
    which the young plant begins its development; monocots have one such organ,
    and dicots have two.


CLS 901/
TTL ROBOTS

CLS 901/
TXT CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS

    CLASS DEFINITION


    This collection provides for a reprogrammable, multifunction manipulator
    designed to move devices through variable programmed motions for the
    performance of changeable tasks on a repetitive basis without human
    intervention and all subcombinations thereof specialized for use with such
    manipulator.

    (1)     Note.  It should be noted that this is a cross-reference collection
    of art only and not a true "Class" within the meaning of that term as used
    in the U.S. Patent Classification System although it is a search tool which
    is a part of that system.  This collection will not, therefore, take for
    original placement any U.S. Patent.

    (2)     Note.  A robot usually has an arm* (elongated appendage) which
    normally has three degrees of freedom*.

    (3)     Note.  A robot must be reprogrammable to perform a variety of
    different tasks.  Thus, a numerically controlled machine tool which may
    have an arm, but is designed to perform only a fixed set of tasks, is not a
    robot.

    (4)     Note.  Subcombinations (e.g., programs, actuators, joints,
    grippers, bearings, gears, etc.) have been included in all instances where
    there was a disclosure basis (e.g., for use in an industrial robot,
    programmable manipulator, etc.). Some subcombinations, of general utility
    (e.g., containing no specific statement of use with a robot in the
    disclosure), are also included, where in the opinion of the Classifiers,
    the subcombination is readily adaptable for use in a robot.  An attempt has
    been made to provide search notes for pertinent subcombinations of more
    general utility.

    (5)     Note.  This cross-reference art collection provides a general locus
    for all information relating to robot machines or subcombinations and
    elements peculiar thereto, regardless of the type of work which is done by
    that machine.  Based upon past development of the system of patent
    classification, such patents are to be found in many classes, their
    disposition being dependent on a number of diverse considerations.  The
    most pertinent classifications for subject matter dealing with robots have
    been screened; however, it should be noted that this cross-reference
    collection represents the initial attempt to collect this subject matter
    and therefore should not be construed as being the exhaustive locus for
    robot machines in its present form.

    (6)     Note.  This drawings associated with the definitions are merely
    used to illustrate the basic concept encompassed by the definition of each
    subclass, and should not be construed as limiting the scope of the subject
    matter covered by any subclass.

                   GLOSSARY OF TERMS

    ARM

    The appendage emanating from the base* of the robot and running to, but not
    including the end effector*.

    BASE

    The supporting structure for the arm*.

    DEGREE OF FREEDOM

    Each linear or rotary movement along or about a given axis.

    END EFFECTOR

    A device connected to the distal end of the robots arm* which carries out
    the robots intended function.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 26 for a drill press, subclasses 33+ and
    563 for a conveying means used in a metal working apparatus which includes
    metal shaping and for assembly, and subclasses 701+ for assembly devices.

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 696-698 for a programmed paint
    spraying or coating device.

    166,    Wells, subclasses 338+ for a tool which acts in an underwater
    environment.

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 18+ for program controlled arms for writing.

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 124.1+ and 125.1+ for automatic
    electric arc welding devices.

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclass 7 for programmed welding devices and
    subclass 45 for processes involving the use of programmed welding devices.

    239,    Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, subclass 69 for programming
    means for a paint spraying device.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 66 for
    underwater handling implements and subclasses 86+ for gripping devices, per
    se.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 162 and 560+ for motor
    systems.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 191+
    for programming systems, subclasses 474.01+ for computer applications to
    machining, subclasses 478.01+ for computer applications to material
    handling.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 80+ for
    robot control.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 1-8 and art collection 909
    for remotely controlled manipulators (e.g., master-slave), subclasses
    22.51+ for well pipe racking, subclass 146 for the charging or discharging
    of material into a radioactive environment, subclass 186 for furnace
    charging or discharging devices having a grab, subclasses 589+, 591, 730+,
    744.1+, 749, and 754+ for article handlers described by their movement
    through space and art collection 917 for material handlers having parallel
    links.

    483,    Tool Changing, generally for a process or apparatus including a
    tool transfer means combined with either a tool support or a storage means.

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, subclasses 60, 61 and 64 for artificial arms
    parts having structure similar to robot arm* parts.






CLS 901/1
TXT MOBILE ROBOT:

    Subject matter under the cross-reference collection definition including a
    base* which is programmable to move without restraint.

    (1)     Note.  A robot with a base* which is guided for movement along a
    track so that the base* must follow the trackway is not considered to be a
    mobile robot.

    SEARCH THIS CROSS-REFERENCE COLLECTION, SUBCOLLECTION:

    14+,    for track guided robots.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclass 3 for automatic motive power control of an
    earth working machine.

    446,    Amusement Devices:  Toys, subclasses 269+ for a wheeled figure toy.
     These devices are ordinarily not reprogrammable.


CLS 901/2
TXT ARM MOTION CONTROLLER:

    Subject matter under the cross-reference collection definition including
    means for sending signals to a drive system for the arm*.

    (1)     Note.  A device in this and in indented cross-reference
    subcollections represents, in human terms, the brain and nervous system of
    the robot.  The controller will perform one or more of the following
    functions:

    a.      storing, sequencing and positioning data in memory.

    b.      initiating and stopping the motions of the arm*.

    c.      interacting with the external environment.

    SEARCH THIS CROSS-REFERENCE COLLECTION, SUBCOLLECTION:

    20,     for significant structure for varying the velocity of an arm*
    component.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclass 7 for an arm motion controller for a
    welding device and subclass 102 for processes involving the arm motion
    controller of a welding device.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses for arm
    motor systems.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses
    474.01+ for computer applications for machining,   subclasess 478.01+ for
    computer applications for material handling.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 80+ for arm
    motion control systems.


CLS 901/3
TXT Teaching system:
    Subject matter under cross-reference subcollection 2 for designing and/or
    inputting a work pattern into the controller so that the robot may perform
    work without human intervention.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 701+ for programming means for an
    assembly device.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclass 568 for program
    recording means and subclass 162 for prerecorded tapes or drums.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 191+
    for the preparation of computer programs, generally.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 80+ for the
    preparation of computer programs for control of a robot arm.


CLS 901/4
TXT Manual lead through:
    Subject matter under cross-reference subcollection 3 in which an operator
    moves the arm* by hand through all positions required to do the task and
    the controller stores the position of the arm* in memory.

    (1)     Note.  Teaching may be done at a speed difference from that needed
    for real time operation, i.e., playback may be set at other speeds,
    allowing for different cycle times.


CLS 901/5
TXT Machine driven lead through:
    Subject matter under cross-reference subcollection 3 in which the arm*,
    during the teaching operation, is controlled by either a teaching pendent
    or a separate computer terminal.

    (1)     Note.  A teach pendent is a device similar to a remote control box
    with the additional capability to record and play back stored commands.


CLS 901/6
TXT Communication with another machine:
    Subject matter under cross-reference subcollection 2, wherein another
    machine exchanges information with the arm* motion controller.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 563 for a conveying device cooperating
    with a metal working machine and subclass 26 for a conveying device
    cooperating specifically with a drill press.

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclasses 405, 420+ and 422 for a conveying
    cooperating with a metal deforming machine.

    409,    Gear Cutting, Milling or Planing, subclass 7 for a gear cutting
    device combined with work transfer utilizing a transfer arm and subclasses
    172+ for a milling machine combined with a work transfer means.

    483,    Tool Changing, subclasses 4+ for apparatus including a tool
    transfer means combined with either a tool support or storage means and
    further including a programmable control means.


CLS 901/7
TXT Conveyor:
    Subject matter under cross-reference subcollection 6 wherein the other
    machine is a conveyor or some part thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 33+ for a manufacturing device
    cooperating with a conveyor in a metal working operation.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power Driven, subclasses 339+ for a means to facilitate
    working, treating or inspecting a conveyed load at a station and subclass
    486 for the transferring of a load from one conveyor to another through the
    use of an oscillating or reciprocating gripper.


CLS 901/8
TXT Robot:

    Subject matter under cross-reference subcollection 6 wherein the other
    machine is another robot.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 701+ for programmable devices used in an
    assembly operation.


CLS 901/9
TXT Closed loop (sensor feedback controls arm* movement):
    Subject matter under cross-reference subcollection 2 wherein a sensor on
    the robot monitors a position of the arm* and transmits a signal indicative
    of that position back to the arm motion controller which compares the
    actual arm* position with the desired position so as to adjust movement of
    the arm* towards that desired position.

    (1)     Note.  The arm* is controlled to move and to stop anywhere within
    its limits of travel, rather than only at the extremes.

    SEARCH THIS CROSS-REFERENCE COLLECTION, SUBCOLLECTION:

    32,     for servo actuated gripping jaws.

    46,     for sensors, per se, usable with robots.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 10.2+ and Digest 15 for a condition
    responsive controlled harvesting arm.

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, subclasses 560+ for positional
    servo systems.


CLS 901/10
TXT Sensor physically contacts and follows work contour:
    Subject matter under cross-reference subcollection 9 wherein the sensor is
    biased into surface contact with the work and is caused to travel thereover
    to thereby cause the arm* to maintain a fixed relative position with
    respect to said work surface.


    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 124.1 for electric arc welding with
    automatic positioning of the arc and subclasses 125.1+ for electric arc
    welding having a predetermined welding operation (programmed controlled).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclasses 124.1 for electric arc welding with
    automatic positioning of the arc and subclasses 125.1+ for electric arc
    welding having a predetermined welding operation (programmed controlled).

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclass 7 for the guiding of a welding
    device and subclass 102 for a process involving the guiding a welding
    device.


CLS 901/11
TXT Mechanically actuated present limit:
    Subject matter under cross-reference subcollection 2 including mechanical
    means for causing termination of movement of an arm* component at its
    programmed end.



    (1)     Note.  There are usually only two positions for each component of
    the arm* to assume:  up/down, left/right, extend/retract, as differentiated
    from a closed loop system (see (1) Note.  in subcollection 9).


CLS 901/12
TXT Cam:
    Subject matter under cross-reference subcollection 11 wherein said means
    includes a cam and a cam follower.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are cam drives wherein the disengagement of
    the cam drive terminates arm* movement.


CLS 901/13
TXT Limit switch:
    Subject matter under cross-reference subcollection 11 wherein said means
    comprises a mechanically actuated electric switch.


CLS 901/14
TXT ARM* MOVEMENT (SPATIAL):
    Subject matter under the cross-reference art collection definition
    characterized by the manner in which the arm* moves through space due to
    its structure thereby giving the robot its various degrees of freedom*.

    (1)     Note.  Robot arms* may have linear movement along or rotary
    movement about a given axis.  The robot arm* movement through space in this
    and indented subcollections is usually determined by the relative number of
    linear vs. rotary joints.

    (2)     Note.  In this and indented subclasses, the motion of the wrist has
    not been considered in determining placement.

    SEARCH THIS CROSS-REFERENCE COLLECTION, SUBCOLLECTION:

    29,     for wrist movements.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    172,    Earth Working, subclasses 3+ for the movement of an earth working
    machine about a stationary base and particularly subclass 26 for a track
    guided earth working machine.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 539 for a load support with
    linear vertical movement and additional movement for aligning and mounting
    a load at a specific location, subclass 591 for a guided hoist with a load
    supporting grab moveable horizontally by means which swings horizontally or
    moves linearly, subclasses 680+ for a vertically swinging load support,
    subclass 744 for a horizontally swinging load support, subclasses 749+ for
    a load supported mounted horizontal linear movement, subclass 776 for a
    reorienting device mounted on an arm which is swingable about its
    transverse axis and rotatable about its longitudinal axis, and
    cross-reference art collection 917 for a handling device having parallel
    links.


CLS 901/15
TXT Jointed:
    Subject matter under cross-reference subcollection 14 wherein the arm* has
    at least three degrees of freedom* which are constituted by rotary joints.



CLS 901/16
TXT Cartesian (X - Y - Z arm):
    Subject matter under cross-reference subcollection 14 wherein the arm* has
    at least three degrees of freedom* which are constituted by orthogonally
    related linear movements.


CLS 901/17
TXT Cylindrical:
    Subject matter under cross-reference subcollection 14 wherein the arm* has
    at least three  degrees of freedom*, one of which is rotary, the other two
    being constituted by orthogonally related linear movements.


CLS 901/18
TXT Spherical:
    Subject matter under cross-reference subcollection 14 wherein the arm* has
    at least three degrees of freedom*, two or which are orthogonally related
    rotary joints and the third is a linear movement.


CLS 901/19
TXT DRIVE SYSTEM FOR ARM:
    Subject matter under the cross-reference collection definition
    characterized by a motor which drives the arm* and/or by the transmission
    of that motion from the motor to the arm*.

    SEARCH THIS CROSS-REFERENCE COLLECTION, SUBCOLLECTION:

    12,     for cam driven drive systems for the arm*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial /body Members), Parts Thereof, or
    Aides and Accessories Therefor, subclass 60 for an elbow joint with forearm
    actuation in a prostheses.


CLS 901/20
TXT Provision for altering speed of driven element: Subject matter under
    cross-reference subcollection 19 wherein particular means associated with
    the motor or transmission is provided for varying the velocity of movement
    of an arm* component during its stroke.


CLS 901/21
TXT Flaccid drive element:
    Subject matter under cross-reference subcollection 19 wherein the
    transmission of motion between the driving motor and the arm* includes a
    belt, chain or cable.



CLS 901/22
TXT Fluid motor:
    Subject matter under cross-reference subcollection 19 wherein the motor
    which drives the arm* converts hydraulic or pneumatic pressure into
    mechanical work.

    SEARCH THIS CROSS-REFERENCE COLLECTION, SUBCOLLECTION:

    37,     for fluid actuated gripping jaws.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aides
    and Accessories Therefor, subclass 26 for fluid actuated prostheses.


CLS 901/23
TXT Electric motor:
    Subject matter under cross-reference subcollection 19 wherein the motor
    which drives the arm* converts electrical energy into mechanical work.

    SEARCH THIS CROSS-REFERENCE COLLECTION, SUBCOLLECTION:
    38,     for electrically actuated gripping jaws.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    318,    Electricity:  Motive Power Systems, appropriate subclasses for
    electric motor control.

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aids
    and Accessories Therefor, subclasses 24+ for electrically actuated
    prostheses.


CLS 901/24
TXT Stepper motor:
    Subject matter under cross-reference subcollection 23 wherein the electric
    motor which drives the arm* produces discrete increments when excited by an
    input pulse.



CLS 901/25
TXT Gearing:
    Subject matter under cross-reference subcollection 19 wherein the
    transmission of motion from the motor to the arm* is accomplished by a
    system which includes first and second relatively rotatable bodies provided
    with teeth or other interengaging drive surfaces and wherein motion is
    imparted from the first to the second body by rolling contact.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 640+ for gearing, per se.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, for planetary
    gear transmissions.


CLS 901/26
TXT Including bevel gear:
    Subject matter under cross-reference subcollection 25 wherein the
    interengaging drive surfaces are at an angle which intersects the
    rotational axis of the bodies.



    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 640+ for bevel gearing,
    per se.

    475,    Planetary Gear Transmission Systems or Components, for planetary
    gear transmissions using bevel gears.


CLS 901/27
TXT ARM PART:
    Subject matter under the cross-reference definition characterized by the
    structure of a mechanical link or the connection between adjacent links
    which form the robot arm*.



    SEARCH CLASS:

    74,     Machine Element or Mechanism, subclasses 469+ for linkages, per se.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, cross-reference art collection 917
    for a handling device having parallel links.


CLS 901/28
TXT Joint:
    Subject matter under cross-reference subcollection 27 wherein significance
    is attributed to the connection between the mechanical links of the  arm*.





CLS 901/29
TXT Wrist:
    Subject matter under cross-reference subcollection 28 wherein significance
    is attributed to the particular joint located at a distal end of the robot
    arm* which connects that arm with an end effector*.



    (1)     Note.  Wrist action usually provide the robot with an even greater
    amount of flexibility.  In addition to the three degrees of freedom*
    provided by the robots arm*, the wrist can provide an extra three degrees
    of motion.  These articulations are commonly referred to as yaw, pitch and
    roll.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclasses 732+ and 738+ for a grab
    moveable relative to its vertically swinging supporting arm and subclass
    776 for a reorienting device which is swingable about its transverse axis
    and rotatable about its longitudinal axis.

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aides
    and Accessories Therefor, subclass 65 for wrist actuation in a prosthesis.


CLS 901/30
TXT END EFFECTOR:
    See the glossary of terms under the cross-reference collection definition.

    (1)     Note.  The end effector* is commonly the only hardware element
    which needs to be changed to adapt the robot to a new task.  The end
    effector* is considered separate from the robot itself, is mounted on its
    own flange, and usually requires an independent means of being actuated and
    powered, although its actions are coordinated by the robots controller.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this subclass are tool changing robots and
    special connecting devices for the attaching of the end effector* to the
    robot arm*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    29,     Metal Working, subclasses 701+ for programmed assembly devices for
    tool changers.

    165,    Heat Exchange, subclass 76 for devices which repair or aid in the
    assembly of heat exchange.

    178,    Telegraphy, for programmed arms with a writing device as the end
    effector.

    483,    Tool Changing, cross-reference art collection 901 for robot end
    effectors.


CLS 901/31
TXT Gripping jaw:
    Subject matter under cross-reference subcollection 30 adapted to transport
    an object wherein opposed grasping elements are moveable relative to each
    other to grip the object therebetween.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    72,     Metal Deforming, subclass 422 for a gripper which handles work in a
    metal deforming apparatus.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclass 486 for reciprocating or
    oscillating gripping devices used to move a load from one conveyor section
    to another.

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclass 86.4 for
    grappling elements of more general utility.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses
    478.01+ for computer applications of material handling devices.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 186 for a furnace charging
    device having a gripper, subclasses 225+ for an article handling which
    selects a load from a source and delivers the load to a working, treating
    or inspecting station, subclasses 730+ for a material handling grab mounted
    for vertical swinging movement, subclasses 744.1+ for a material handler
    mounted for horizontal swinging movement, subclasses 751 and 753 for a
    material handling gripper mounted for horizontal linear movement, subclass
    763 for a gripping device which inverts an article, and subclass 783 for a
    gripper on an article reorienting device in general.

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aides
    and Accessories Therefor, subclass 64 for a finger actuator embedded in a
    simulated hand.


CLS 901/32
TXT Servo-actuated:
    Subject matter under cross-reference subcollection 31 and further including
    a sensor located on the robot which controls movement of a grasping element.

    SEARCH THIS CROSS-REFERENCE COLLECTION, SUBCOLLECTION:

    9,      for a sensor actuated feedback loop which controls arm* movement.

    46,     for sensing devices per se usable with robots.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    56,     Harvesters, subclasses 10.2+ and Digest 15 for a condition
    responsive controlled harvesting device.


CLS 901/33
TXT Tactile sensor:
    Subject matter under cross-reference subcollection 32 wherein the sensor is
    located on a grasping element and senses an object grasped thereby by
    direct contact therewith.

    (1)     Note.  These devices may use simple switches as sensors, or
    pressure sensitive materials, or the sensors may feel surface contours.


CLS 901/34
TXT Force feedback:
    Subject matter under cross-reference subcollection 32 wherein the sensor is
    at a location spaced from a grasped object and includes means to sense
    strain on the grasping element.


CLS 901/35
TXT Proximity:
    Subject matter under cross-reference subcollection 32 wherein the sensor
    includes means to sense the relative position between the grasping element
    and an object to be grasped.

    (1)     Note.  Sensors in this subcollection include optical interrupters
    (LED's), reflective, electromagnetic and ultrasonic.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 7 for radio wave
    proximity detectors.

    367,    Communications, Electrical:  Acoustic Wave, Systems and Devices,
    subclass 96 for acoustic wave proximity detectors.


CLS 901/36
TXT Actuating means:
    Subject matter under cross-reference subcollection 31 wherein significance
    is attributed to the means for moving the grasping element.

    SEARCH THIS CROSS-REFERENCE COLLECTION, SUBCOLLECTION:

    19+,    for motors which drive robotic arms*.


CLS 901/37
TXT Fluid motor:
    Subject matter under cross-reference subcollection 36 wherein said means
    utilizes hydraulic or pneumatic pressure.



    SEARCH THIS CROSS-REFERENCE COLLECTION, SUBCOLLECTION:

    22,     for a fluid motor which drives a   robotic arm*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    623,    Prosthesis (i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or Aides
    and Accessories Therefor, subclass 26 for a fluid actuated prosthesis.


CLS 901/38
TXT Electric motor:
    Subject matter under cross-reference subcollection 36 wherein said means
    utilizes electrical energy.

    SEARCH THIS CROSS-REFERENCE COLLECTION, SUBCOLLECTION:

    23,     for an electric motor which drives a robotic arm*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    623,    Prosthesis ( i.e., Artificial Body Members), Parts Thereof, or
    Aides and Accessories Therefor, subclasses 24+ for electrically actuated
    prosthesis


CLS 901/39
TXT Jaw structure:
    Subject matter under cross-reference subcollection 31 wherein significance
    is attributed to the physical configuration of the grasping element.



CLS 901/40
TXT Vacuum or magnetic:
    Subject matter under cross-reference subcollection 30 which includes a
    vacuum cup, permanent magnet or an electromagnet for the purpose of
    handling material.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    294,    Handling:  Hand and Hoist-Line Implements, subclasses 64+ and 65.5
    for vacuum and magnet means associated with implements for handling
    articles.

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 437 for a suction or
    magnetic device mounted on a vertically swingload support, subclass 744 for
    a suction or magnetic device mounted on a horizontally swinging load
    support, and subclass 752 for a suction device mounted for horizontal
    linear movement.


CLS 901/41
TXT Tool:
    Subject matter under cross-reference subcollection 30 wherein the device is
    a work treating element.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    451,    Abrading, subclasses 2+ for condition responsive sandblasting
    devices.


CLS 901/42
TXT Welding:
    Subject matter under cross-reference subcollection 41 wherein the element
    performs a welding operation.

    (1)     Note.  This provides a collection of the so-called "welding robots".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    219,    Electric Heating, subclass 124.1 for electric arc welding with
    automatic positioning of the arc and subclass 125.1 for electric arc
    welding having a predetermined welding operation (programmed controlled).

    228,    Metal Fusion Bonding, subclass 7 for welding robots and subclass
    102 for processes involving the use of a programmed welding device.


CLS 901/43
TXT Spray painting or coating:
    Subject matter under cross-reference subcollection 41 wherein the element
    performs a painting or coating operation.

    (1)     Note.  This provides a collection of the so-called "spray painting
    robots".

    SEARCH CLASS:

    118,    Coating Apparatus, subclasses 696-698 for program controlled paint
    spraying or coating.

    239,    Sprinkling, Spraying, and Diffusing, appropriate subclasses for a
    painting device and particularly subclasses 69 for programming means for
    controlling fluid flow.


CLS 901/44
TXT Inspection:
    Subject matter under cross-reference subcollection 30 said device being a
    sensor adapted to sense conditions on an object being scanned by the robot.


    SEARCH THIS CROSS-REFERENCE COLLECTION, SUBCOLLECTION:

    46,     for sensing devices, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    165,    Heat Exchange, for remotely controlled inspection means for heat
    exchangers.

    376,    Induced Nuclear Reactions:  Processes, Systems, and Elements,
    subclass 249 for nuclear reactor vessel monitoring or inspecting.


CLS 901/45
TXT Compliance:
    Subject matter under cross-reference subcollection 30 which include a means
    for aiding insertion and mating maneuvers by permitting the device to adapt
    to misalignments.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    33,     Geometrical Instruments, subclasses 169 and 185 for compliance
    devices, per se.


CLS 901/46
TXT SENSING DEVICE:
    Subject matter under the cross-reference collection definition comprising a
    sensor which is usable on a robot.

    SEARCH THIS CROSS-REFERENCE COLLECTION, SUBCOLLECTION:

    9+,     for sensing devices in combination with a robotic arm* motion
    controller.


    32+,    for sensing devices which cause activation of gripping jaws.

    44+,    for sensing devices used as end    effectors* in inspection robots.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    343,    Communications:  Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 7 for radio wave
    proximity detectors.

    367,    Communication, Electrical Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
    subclass 96 for acoustic wave proximity detectors.


CLS 901/47
TXT Optical:
    Subject matter under cross-reference subcollection 46 which includes means
    sensitive to light rays.



    SEARCH CLASS:

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 28 for sensors which
    optically measure velocity, subclasses 139.04 through 139.08, 141.1 through
    141.5 and 152.1 through 152.3 for optical sensors which measure angles or
    misalignment, and subclass 400 for optical sensors which measure alignment
    in a lateral direction.


CLS 901/48
TXT COUNTERBALANCE:
    A device under the cross-reference collection definition including means to
    balance the weight of the robot arm* or a load carried thereby.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    414,    Material or Article Handling, subclass 673 for a counterweight on a
    handling device.


CLS 901/49
TXT PROTECTIVE DEVICE:
    Subject matter under the cross-reference collection definition which either
    (1) prevent human beings from being injured by a robot or (2) prevent the
    robot itself from being damaged.


CLS 901/50
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:
    Subject matter under the cross-reference collection definition not provided
    for elsewhere.


CLS 902/
TTL ELECTRONIC FUNDS TRANSFER

CLS 902/
TXT CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS

    CLASS DEFINITION

    This cross-reference art collection provides for disclosures of systems",
    components" of systems, or peripherals" to systems designed to facilitate
    the exchange of monetary value via electronic means.

    (1)     Note.  An asterisk (*) denotes a term which is defined in the
    glossary for this collection.

    (2)     Note.  It should be noted that this is a collection of only
    corss-references of art.  It is not a true "class" within the meaning of
    that term in the U.S. Patent Classification System.  It is intended,
    however, to serve as a search tool within that system.  This collection
    cannot receive any U.S. patent as an "original"; any document placed in
    this collection is to be treated as a discretionary cross-reference.

    (3)     Note.  This cross-reference art collection provides a general locus
    for information relating to electronic funds transfer systems, as well as
    components of and peripherals to such systems.  Based upon prior
    development of the patent classification system, such information can also
    be found in various classes.  The particular classification of a document
    is dependent on a number of different considerations.  The most pertinent
    classifications for subject matter disclosing EFT systems, components, or
    peripherals have been screened; however, it should be noted that this
    collection represents only an attempt to collect this subject matter.  It
    should not be construed as being an exhaustive locus for EFT information.
    It will become more complete as information continues to be added whenever
    it is discovered.

    (4)     Note.  Apparatus of this type enables a user to complete a
    financial transaction* resulting in funds being transferred either into or
    out of an account, the transaction involving digital telecommunication
    between electronic devices and completed without the direct intervention of
    another human.

    (5)     Note.  Data processing systems*, components* of such systems (e.g.,
    central processing units, communication networks, terminals, etc.), and
    peripherals* (e.g., encryptors, card readers, sheet feeders, data-input or
    data-output devices, bank cards, etc.) have been included when disclosed as
    being for use in electronic funds transfer (EFT).  Some systems and devices
    of general utility (i.e., containing no specific statement of use in (EFT)
    are also included if they are considered to be readily adaptable for use in
    EFT.  An attempt has been made to provide search notes for pertinent
    devices of general utility.

    GLOSSARY



    COMPONENT

    A device within a data processing system* designed to process data (e.g.,
    encrypting, modulating, transmitting, receiving, comparing, performing
    arithmetical calculations, etc.) after it has been entered by a user*
    (i.e., input) in order to formulate a response to the user (i.e., output)
    or to protect the data.  Within the context of this collection, system
    components generally include a central data processor, a communication
    processor and network, and terminals at points distant from the central
    data processor and communicating with it through the communication
    components.

    IDENTIFIER

    A data bearing record intended to identify either an account or the
    record's bearer, whereby authorization for a transaction* can be obtained.

    PERIPHERAL

    A device associated with a terminal*, either as a subcombination adapted to
    enhance input or output of data (e.g., a printer for output, a voice
    recognizer for input, etc.), or in combination with the terminal to add a
    disparate function (e.g., means to identify counterfeit money, a sheet
    feeder, etc.).

    SYSTEM

    A plurality of electronic devices (components*) functionally integrated to
    process data in order to perform a transaction*.

    TERMINAL

    A component* of a system* designed for interaction with a user*, having
    both input means for receiving data from the user and output means for
    transmitting data to the user.  A terminal is often combined with one or
    more peripheral* devices to form a structural unit.

    TRANSACTION

    An act between a user* and a monetary fiduciary party (e.g., a financial
    institution) whereby monetary value is exchanged.

    USER

    A person interacting with the system* to perform a transaction* with a
    monetary fiduciary party.  The user initiates the transaction by operating
    the terminal*.

    SUBCOLLECTIONS


CLS 902/1
TXT WITH ELECTRONIC MEANS PROVIDING SECURITY:

    Subject matter under the cross-reference art collection definition
    including an electronic devices adapted to protect the system* from
    fraudulent use.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subcollection and its indents are devices
    designed to discourage fraudulent use of the apparatus, to guard a
    terminal*'s environment, to protect the confidentiality of transaction*
    date, etc.

    SEARCH THIS COLLECTION, SUBCOLLECTION:

    31,     for means physically barring access to a terminal, which means may
    be electronically actuated.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclasses 2+ for bank
    protection devices; and subclasses 38+ for a safe with an alarm.


CLS 902/2
TXT Protects transmitted data (e.g., encryption or decryption):

    Subject matter under subcollection 1 including means to prevent fraudulent
    use of transaction* information in communication between a terminal and a
    central processor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 825.34 for selective
    electrical authentication of communications.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, appropriate subclass for a device
    contributing to the security of communication over telephone lines,
    particularly subclasses 32+ for circuitry responsive to an abnormal
    condition.

    380,    Cryptography, subclasses 9+ for electric signal modification,
    particularly subclass 24 for such modification wherein a transaction* is
    authenticated by a user*.


CLS 902/3
TXT Evaluates biometrics:

    Subject matter under subcollection 1 including means to analyze a
    physiological characteristic of a user (e.g., a fingerprint, handprint,
    etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    382,    Image Analysis, subclasses 115+ for an image analyzer in a
    personnel identification application.


CLS 902/4
TXT Means to read data stored on identifier*:

    Subject matter under subcollection 1 including means for electronically
    scanning and recognizing data carried by an identifier*.

    SEARCH THIS COLLECTION, SUBCOLLECTION:

    25+,    for an identifier, per se.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    194,    Check-Actuated Control Mechanisms, subclass 210 for a control
    mechanism with means to read a magnetically encoded check.

    235,    Registers, subclasses 375+ for a system controlled by an
    identifier, and subclasses 435+ for a coded record sensor for general use.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 271+, 555+ and 556+ for a photocell
    system wherein a coded record is viewed by the system.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclass for an optical
    system which analyzes a record optically.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 2 for
    means to record data on, or reproduce data from, a card having a uniform
    magnetic coating.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 97+ for a
    magnetic read only system.

    380,    Cryptography, subclasses 23+ for a system which modifies an
    electric signal and includes means for reading data stored on an identifier.


CLS 902/5
TXT And to verify identity of user*:

    Subject matter under subcollection 4 including means to ascertain that the
    identifier is presented by its proper user; e.g., enabling the user to
    enter a "personal identification number" (PIN) and comparing it with the
    PIN assigned to that identifier.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 825.34 for selective
    electrical authentication of communications.

    380,    Cryptography, subclasses 23+ for a system which modifies an
    electric signal and includes means for checking the identity of the user.

    382,    Image Analysis, subclasses 115+ for a personnel identification
    application of a system which analyzes images.


CLS 902/6
TXT Image processor (e.g., video camera):

    Subject matter under subcollection 1 including a facsimile creating device
    adapted to capture an image of a terminal* or its environment.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    348,    Television, subclasses 143+ for a television system used in
    surveillance.

    386,    Television Signal Processing for Dynamic Recording or Reproducing,
    subclasses 38 and 117+ for  television signal processing for dynamic
    recording or reproducing apparatus having camera means for capturing the
    image signal.


CLS 902/7
TXT Means to identify counterfeit money:

    Subject matter under subcollection 1 including a mechanism adapted to
    distinguish between genuine money and an imitation thereof.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    73,     Measuring and Testing, subclass 159 for a device for testing
    sheets; and subclass 163 for a device for testing coins.

    194,    Check-Actuated Control Mechanisms, subclasses 206+ for a mechanism
    actuated by folding currency with means for testing the currency.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 534 for a
    mechanism for sorting paper money.

    356,    Optics:  Measuring and Testing, subclass 71 for a device for
    optically analyzing a document's pattern.

    382,    Image Analysis, subclasses 135+ for a device for reading currency.


CLS 902/8
TXT TERMINAL* WITH MEANS PERMITTING DEPOSIT OR WITHDRAWAL (E.G., ATM):

    Subject matter under the cross-reference art collection definition
    including a terminal* and a peripheral* adapted to either (a) accept
    material deposited by a user*, or (b) convey material to be withdrawn to a
    user.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 375+ for systems of general utility
    controlled by data bearing records.

    705,    Data Processing: Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/price Determination, subclasses 39+ for a data processing electronic
    funds transfer system; particularly subclass 43 for such a system with an
    ATM interface.


CLS 902/9
TXT With secure receptacle (e.g., safe, depository):

    Subject matter under subcollection 8 including a container adapted to
    receive valuables, and means to selectively restrict access to its interior.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclass 24.1 for a
    depository with verification indicia applying means; and subclass 66 for a
    closure for depositories.

    232,    Deposit and Collection Receptacles, subclass 1 for a money holder;
    subclass 4 for a savings box; and subclass 15 for a collection device
    having a secure receptacle.


CLS 902/10
TXT Remote from terminal*:

    Subject matter under subcollection 9 wherein the container is located at a
    substantial distance from the terminal*.

    (1)     Note.  In apparatus found in this subcollection, the receptacle is
    configured separately from the structural unit including the terminal, and
    valuables must travel from the receptacle to the terminal (e.g., via
    robotic handler or pneumatic conveyor).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, appropriate subclass for pneumatic
    conveyors of general utility, particularly subclasses 10+ for such a
    conveyor which is responsive to a sensed condition.

    901,    Robots, appropriate subcollection for a robotic handler, per se.


CLS 902/11
TXT And value discriminator:

    Subject matter under subcollection 9 including means for differentiating
    between items having different values.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    194,    Check-Actuated Control Mechanisms, subclasses 302+ for a mechanism
    including means for evaluating coins.

    209,    Classifying, Separating, and Assorting Solids, subclass 534 for a
    mechanism for sorting paper money.

    382,    Image Analysis, subclasses 135+ for a device for reading currency.

    453,    Coin Handling, subclasses 3+ for coin sorters of general utility.


CLS 902/12
TXT Serving as both depository and source for dispensing (e.g., note recycling):

    Subject matter under subcollection 9 wherein the container is adapted both
    to receive valuables deposited by a user and to release them for subsequent
    dispensing.

    (1)     Note.  The valuables (e.g., coins, currency) are stored within a
    single container, while the inlet and outlet ports and travel paths may or
    may not be shared.


CLS 902/13
TXT Dispensing (e.g., money cassette):

    Subject matter under subcollection 9 including means for selectively
    dispensing its contents from the container.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclasses 58+ for a
    secure container having a closure permitting limited access.

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 197+ for a dispensing mechanism
    having a supply cartridge which is removable from its enclosure.


CLS 902/14
TXT With cash dispenser:

    Subject matter under subcollection 8 including means for dispensing money.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, appropriate subclass for a dispensing mechanism
    of general utility; particularly subclasses 2+ for a dispenser with a
    recorder, register, indicator, signal, or exhibitor, subclasses 9+ for a
    dispenser with an automated control, subclass 15 for a dispenser with a
    timing or delay mechanism, subclass 21 for a dispenser with a malfunction
    responsive device; subclasses 92+ for apparatus dispensing from plural
    sources, and subclasses 208+ for a dispenser with a discharge assistant.

    453,    Coin Handling, appropriate subclass for a mechanism designed to
    handle coins.


CLS 902/15
TXT Including currency feeder:

    Subject matter under subcollection 14 including a device for conveying a
    sheet of flexible money from storage to a position for dispensing.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    221,    Article Dispensing, subclasses 33+ for a dispenser with means for
    separating and distorting a flexible article being dispensed; subclass 67
    for a dispenser having means to dispense articles from a staggered stack;
    and subclass 259 for a dispenser with a discharge assistant having surface
    contacting means.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, appropriate subclass for a mechanism
    designed to handle currency, particularly subclasses 3.01+ for a mechanism
    adapted to both feed and deliver.


CLS 902/16
TXT Sensitive to erroneous passage of plural bills:

    Subject matter under subcollection 15 including means for sensing the
    unintentional, simultaneous conveyance of a plurality of sheets.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclasses 258.01+ for a currency
    handling mechanism having means to interrupt feeding responsive to a sheet
    sensor.


CLS 902/17
TXT With particular feeder or counter feature:

    Subject matter under subcollection 8 including a detail of either (a) a
    device for conveying an article (e.g., a receipt or envelope), or (b) a
    device for enumerating a plurality of articles.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    53,     Package Making, subclass 53 for a mechanism designed to create a
    package having a condition responsive control for separate delivery of
    incomplete or defective packages.

    198,    Conveyors:  Power-Driven, subclasses 418+ for conveyors with means
    for establishing and moving a group of articles; and subclasses 502.1+ for
    a conveyor with an alarm, weight responsive means, or means for counting.

    271,    Sheet Feeding or Delivering, appropriate subclass for sheet-type
    feeders of general utility.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, subclass 8 for an electric bill counter.


CLS 902/18
TXT With printer:

    Subject matter under subcollection 8 including means for transferring a
    marking medium to an object.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    101,    Printing, appropriate subclass for printers of general utility, and
    particularly subclasses 72+ for a selective or progressive number printer;
    and subclasses 288+ for a bed-and-platen machine adapted to print on a web.

    235,    Registers, subclass 432 for a record controlled calculator with a
    printer.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, appropriate subclass for a computer printer
    which forms characters individually.


CLS 902/19
TXT And page turner:

    Subject matter under subcollection 18 including means for flipping to
    different pages in a book.


CLS 902/20
TXT With specific data input means (e.g., keyboard):

    Subject matter under subcollection 8 wherein significance is attributed to
    a peripheral* for receiving data from the user.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, subclasses 79+ for a code transmitter (e.g., a
    keyboard) for messages with unlimited content.

    341,    Coded Data Generation or Conversion, subclasses 173+ for a  code
    transmitter for messages with limited content, particularly subclasses 20+
    for a keyboard, per se.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 156+ for a visual display
    system with selective electrical control having specific input means (e.g.
    a touch-screen).

    382,    Image Analysis, subclasses 187+ for a system adapted to read
    hand-written alpha-numerics.

    704,    Data Processing:  Speech Signal Processing, Linguistics, Language
    Translation, and Audio Compression/Decompression, subclasses 231+ for
    voice-actuated input means of general utility.


CLS 902/21
TXT With specific data output means or indicator:

    Subject matter under subcollection 8 wherein significance is attributed to
    a means for imparting information relative either to data within the
    system*, or a condition of the terminal*, to the user* (e.g., a monitor
    providing visual output, a sound system providing audible output, etc.).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    84,     Music, subclasses 600+ for a device for converting electric
    currents or potentials into sound vibrations for the production of musical
    tones.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, appropriate subclass for electrical
    systems adapted for communication with a user, particularly subclasses
    815.4+ for a visual indicator; and subclasses 384.1+ for an electronic
    audible indicator.

    345,    Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface Processing, and
    Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses 1+ for visual display systems
    with selective electrical control.

    704,    Data Processing:  Speech Signal Processing, Linguistics, Language
    Translation, and Audio Compression/Decompression, subclasses 200+ for
    speech signal processing.


CLS 902/22
TXT TERMINAL* REGISTERS TRANSACTION* (E.G., POINT OF SALE TERMINAL):

    Subject matter under the cross-reference art collection definition
    including means for recording data pertinent to a transaction*.

    (1)     Note.  This subcollection includes disclosures of a terminal
    adapted for use in applications where goods or services are purchased, and
    information about a purchase transaction is recorded.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    141,    Fluent Material Handling, With Receiver or Receiver Coacting Means,
    subclasses 94 and 98 for means to electronically identify a customer,
    record the purchase data, and generate an invoice for gasoline purchased at
    a service station.

    235,    Registers, appropriate subclass for sales registers, and
    particularly subclass 380 for means to approve a transaction based upon a
    comparison of information on an identifier* with information stored in a
    computer.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclass 825.33 for remote credit
    authorization not limited to the use of a telephone line.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 91.01+ for credit
    authorization by nonvoice signals over a telephone line.

    705,    Data Processing:  Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/price Determination , subclasses 16+.


CLS 902/23
TXT FOR ENTERTAINMENT, AMUSEMENT, OR GAMBLING:

    Subject matter under the cross-reference art collection definition designed
    for use in transactions* whose stated purpose is recreation or
    entertainment; e.g., for placing or settling a wager, purchasing television
    viewing time, etc.;

    SEARCH CLASS:

    273,    Amusement Devices:  Games, subclasses 138 and 143 for electronic
    gaming devices of general utility.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 410
    and 412 for digital processing systems used for recreation or entertainment.


CLS 902/24
TXT FOR USE WITH GENERAL PURPOSE TERMINAL* (E.G., HOME BANKING):

    Subject matter under the cross-reference art collection definition
    specifically designed to be used with a nondedicated terminal* (e.g., a
    personal computer) in performing a transaction*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, subclasses 222+ for digital/pulse
    transceivers (modems) of general utility.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, subclasses 93+ for digital signal
    transmission over telephone lines.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 200.3+ for
    data transferring among multiple computer systems, and subclasses 821
    through 894 for transferring data from one or more peripherals to one or
    more computers for the latter to process, store, or further transfer or for
    transferring data from the computers to the peripherals.


CLS 902/25
TXT SPECIFIC IDENTIFIER*  (E.G., BANK CARD):

    Subject matter under the cross-reference collection definition wherein
    significance is attributed to an identifier*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclass 490 for an identifier encoded with material
    which projects from the plane of the identifier.

    250,    Radiant Energy, subclasses 555+ for a photocell controlled circuit
    including a coded identifier; and subclasses 566+ for an optical or
    pre-photocell system including a coded identifier.

    283,    Printed Matter, subclasses 72+ for a printed article including an
    enhancement (e.g., a cryptogram, microfilm, etc.) making it suitable for
    use as an identifier (particularly subclass 75 for a personal identifier,
    and subclasses 107+ for printed matter having a plastic laminate); and art
    collections 901 for printed matter with concealed data and 904 for credit
    cards.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclass for
    laminated articles, per se.


CLS 902/26
TXT Including semiconductor chip (e.g., smart card):

    Subject matter under subcollection 25 wherein the identifier* carries
    microprocessor circuitry.

    (1)     Note.  The microprocessor circuitry may simply comprise a memory
    medium (e.g., a register circuit), or it may perform some or all of the
    processing functions of a terminal*.  Both are considered to be "smart
    cards," and are to be found in this subclass.

    SEARCH THIS COLLECTION, SUBCOLLECTION:

    2,      for electronic means adapted to protect data transmitted over a
    distance (e.g., by cryptography).

    4,      for means to read data stored on a "smart card".

    22,     for a point-of-sale terminal* adapted for use with a "smart card".

    37+,    for a system* adapted for use with a "smart card."

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 492 and 493 for data-bearing records of this
    type.

    257,    Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State Diodes),
    subclass 922 for devices with means to prevent inspection or tampering,
    e.g., smart card devices.

    327,    Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
    Systems, appropriate subclasses for miscellaneous semiconductor circuits.

    377,    Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift Registers:
    Circuits and Systems, appropriate subclass for an electrical register
    circuit.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, for a financial data
    processing system operated by a record carried processor (e.g.,"smart
    card").


CLS 902/27
TXT Magnetically encoded:

    Subject matter under subcollection 25 wherein the identifier* carries a
    magnetic data-storage medium encoded with electronically readable data.

    SEARCH THIS COLLECTION, SUBCOLLECTION:

    4+,     for means to read magnetically encoded data.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    194,    Check-Actuated Control Mechanisms, subclass 210 for a control
    mechanism with means to read a magnetically encoded check.

    283,    Printed Matter, subclass 82 for printed matter carrying encoded
    magnetic material.

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 2 for
    means to record on or reproduce from a card having a uniform magnetic
    coating.

    365,    Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclasses 97+ for a
    magnetic read only system.


CLS 902/28
TXT Designed to resist counterfeiting:

    Subject matter under subcollection 27 adapted to resist change of the data.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    427,    Coating Processes, subclass 7 for a method of applying the magnetic
    material to permit detection of fraud or tampering.

    428,    Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, art collections 911 for a
    penetration resistant layer on a laminated card and 916 for a card
    permitting detection of fraud or tampering.


CLS 902/29
TXT Specific process of manufacture:

    Subject matter under subcollection 25 wherein significance is attributed to
    a method of producing the identifier*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    346,    Recorders, appropriate subclass for means to form coded records.

    400,    Typewriting Machines, subclass 105 for a typewriter adapted both to
    type and to print magnetic code.


CLS 902/30
TXT SUPPORT OR ENCLOSURE (E.G., KIOSK):

    Subject matter under the cross-reference art collection definition
    including a stand or cabinet designed to accommodate a terminal*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    109,    Safes, Bank Protection, or a Related Device, subclasses 50+ for
    supports and mountings for devices of that class.

    186,    Merchandising, subclass 37 for commercial fixtures used in banking.

    232,    Deposit and Collection Receptacles, appropriate subclass for
    details of a receptacle enclosure.

    312,    Supports:  Cabinet Structure, subclasses 204, 215, 223.1+, and 236
    for cabinets adapted for use with computers and peripherals*.

    D14,    Recording, Communication, or Information Retrieval Equipment,
    subclasses 100+ for design features of terminal cabinets and stands.


CLS 902/31
TXT Selectively prevents access to terminal*:

    Subject matter under subcollection 30 including a means for preventing
    unauthorized access to the terminal*, wherein the access-preventing means
    can be disabled by an authorized user*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    49,     Movable or Removable Closures, subclass 31 for a movable closure
    responsive to a predetermined condition; and subclass 35 for a closure
    whose movement is controlled by a check or key.


CLS 902/32
TXT For plurality of terminals*:

    Subject matter under subcollection 30 wherein the stand or cabinet is
    designed to accommodate more than one terminal.


CLS 902/33
TXT For drive-in installation:

    Subject matter under subcollection 30 designed to make the terminal*
    accessible to a user* seated in a motor vehicle.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    186,    Merchandising, subclass 53 for drive-in installations of general
    utility.

    406,    Conveyors:  Fluid Current, appropriate subclass for pneumatic
    conveyors of general utility, particularly subclasses 10+ for such a
    conveyor which is responsive to a sensed condition.


CLS 902/34
TXT Collapsible:

    Subject matter under subcollection 30 wherein the stand or cabinet includes
    relatively movable portions.

    (1)     Note.  A stand or cabinet in this subcollection can be altered in
    shape or size; e.g., between a for-use and a not-for-use configuration.


CLS 902/35
TXT Accommodates user* (i.e., walk-in enclosure):

    Subject matter under subcollection 30 combined with structure designed to
    enclose a user*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    52,     Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), appropriate subclass for
    building structure of general utility, particularly subclasses 64+ for a
    barrier or section mounted so as to be separable from the rest of the
    structure; and subclasses 79.1+ for a preassembled portion of a building.

    D25,    Building Units and Construction Elements, subclass 16 for design
    features of booth-like structures; and subclass 33 for design features of
    structures which fully enclose their occupants.


CLS 902/36
TXT PAPER SUPPLY (E.G., RECEIPT):

    Subject matter under the cross-reference art collection definition
    comprising a form or blank adapted to receive printed information.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    283,    Printed Matter, subclass 57 for printed documents adapted for use
    in banking.


CLS 902/37
TXT SYSTEM*:

    Subject matter under the cross-reference art collection definition wherein
    significance is attributed to a component* behind the terminal*.

    (1)     Note.  "Behind the terminal" refers to a component within the
    system* and inaccessible to a user*; e.g., a communication device or a
    central processor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    235,    Registers, subclasses 379 and 380+ for a banking or credit system
    controlled by data bearing records.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, appropriate
    subclass for means to electrically perform calculations.

    705,    Data Processing: Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/price Determination, subclasses 1+ for a business or financial data
    processing system.


CLS 902/38
TXT Error or fault recovery:

    Subject matter under subcollection 37 including means for detecting or
    correcting either (a) a change in information content of transaction* data
    from that which is correct, or (b) a failure or malfunction of a component*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    194,    Check-Actuated Control Mechanisms, subclasses 200+ for a control
    mechanism with means responsive to an equipment malfunction.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, subclasses 737+
    for detection or correction of mistakes in arithmetical operations.

    371,    Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery,
    appropriate subclass for error or fault recovery means of general utility,
    particularly subclasses 8.1+ for systems which recover from a component
    failure by replacement with a spare.

    395,    Information Processing System Organization, subclasses 180+ for
    reliability and availability in digital data processing, and 186+ for
    security in digital data processing systems. purposes.


CLS 902/39
TXT Particular communication feature:

    Subject matter under subcollection 37 including a detail of a component of
    the communication network.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    178,    Telegraphy, appropriate subclass for communication of encoded
    messages with unlimited content.

    340,    Communications:  Electrical, subclasses 825.3+ for selective
    electrical communications including comparison of data.

    375,    Pulse or Digital Communications, appropriate subclass for systems
    of general utility sending modulated signals.

    379,    Telephonic Communications, appropriate subclass for communication
    of data over telephone lines.

    380,    Cryptography, subclasses 9+ for electric signal modification.


CLS 902/40
TXT Transaction* processing:

    Subject matter under subcollection 37 wherein significance is attributed to
    a component which processes a transaction*.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    360,    Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval, appropriate
    subclass for storage or retrieval devices using magnetic media.

    364,    Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, appropriate
    subclass for means to electrically perform calculations.

    369,    Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, appropriate subclass for
    storage or retrieval devices using nonmagnetic media.

    705,    Data Processing: Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
    Cost/price Determination, subclasses 1+ for a business or financial data
    processing system.


CLS 902/41
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the cross-reference art collection definition not
    already provided for.


CLS 930/
TTL PEPTIDE OR PROTEIN SEQUENCE

CLS 930/
TXT

    I.      STATEMENT OF CLASS SUBJECT MATTER

    (A)     CROSS-REFERENCE ART  COLLECTIONS

    Cross-reference art collections 10-320 are intended to be used as a
    searching area for those patents which disclose an identifiable peptide or
    protein consisting of a sequence of at least four amino acids covalently
    bound through at least one normal peptide link.

    Due to the nature of this class, it is important that it be considered more
    as a term list than as a hierarchical schedule.  The classification rules
    of hierarchy do not apply unless otherwise specified in the art collection
    definitions or unless specified by one art collection being indented under
    another, i.e., art collections 21-25 are indented under 20, art collections
    141-145 are indented under 140.

    Therefore, in this class, a peptide or protein compound is placed in all
    art collections, regardless of order in the schedule, where the concepts of
    the art collection definition include the compound, unless otherwise
    specified.

    (B)     DIGESTS 500-822

    Digests 500-822 are being established as U.S. classifications which are
    equivalent to the European Office's C07K 5/00 - C07K 5/12B; C07K 7/02 -
    C07K 7/10B; C07K 7/50 - C07K 9/00F4; C07K 13/00; and C07K 99/00B - C07K
    99/84.

    The European Patent Office (EPO) uses a classification system which is
    based upon the International Patent Classification (IPC) system.  The EPO
    allows its examiners to add "unofficial" or "alpha" classifications to the
    IPC in a manner similar to our examiners adding "unofficial" or "alpha"
    classifications to the U.S. Patent Classification system.  With the
    addition of the "unofficials", the IPC becomes the European Patent
    Classification (EPC) system.

    As U.S. (and other countries) patents are published, the EPO examiners
    receive them for placement into their search files.  The EPO examiners do
    not depend upon the IPCs printed on the issuing documents for placement;
    they reclassify each document anew.  As a result of trilateral agreements,
    the U.S. regularly receives the new classification data from the EPO. This
    classification data allows us the capability to establish digests 500 - 822
    as U. S. digests which are equivalent to the EPO classifications recited in
    the first paragraph and which contain the same U.S. patents which EPO
    examiners placed into their files.No definitions are associated with these
    digests.  The full extent of the types of documents intended to be
    classified in a digest are the titles and any attached notes.

    Digests 500-822 are the first areas in the U.S. classification system which
    are resident in the Manual of Classification and present a classification
    scheme wherein all of the patents have been classified by another patent
    office into search areas created other than by U.S. personnel.

    The creation of digests 500-822 and their incorporation in the Manual of
    Classification is a trial program to determine the effectiveness of
    additional data bases which contain U.S. patents as search areas.  In
    addition this will be the first time that U.S. examiners will be able to
    search EPC classifications.  It is the intent of Documentation to set up
    other areas of the EPC where it is believed that a search area may be
    useful.

    Digests 500-822 have been presented in a manner generally consistent with
    the traditional presentation of search areas in the U.S. Manual of
    Classification.  In some instances areas in the EPC have been omitted or
    arranged in a format to which U.S. examiners are accustomed.  In other
    instances the EPC classification does not contain any U.S.  patents.  To
    complete a search of a concept in the EPC it would be advisable to search
    both the generic subclass and the more specific indented subclass.

    Patents can be added to these classifications in the traditional manner,
    i.e., blue slips, miscellaneous transfer, or 14B card.  They can be deleted
    by the present method of submitting a copy of the document along with a
    request to classification.

    At the end of each digest presented between parentheses is the
    classification in the EPC which translates to the digest provided for that
    EPC classification.  To distinguish between the IPC and EPC versions it is
    only necessary to note that the IPC does not contain alpha designations.
    An example of this difference is digest 610, which is denoted as
    C07K-99/22.  Since the latter is devoid of an alpha character it is both an
    IPC and EPC classification, whereas C07K-99/22A (digest 611) has an alpha
    designator and can only be found in the EPC.  The use of a slash in the EPC
    designation C07K-99/ is equivalent to the use of a color in the IPC C07K-99
    for this area

    It is the intent of Documentation to maintain these digests in a form that
    reflects the current status of the EPC.  As patents are classified into the
    EPC we will update the present digests to reflect the addition of the newly
    added documents.

    A GLOSSARY has been developed for Class 930 (section D of the main class
    definition).  Terms in the GLOSSARY have been used consistently throughout
    the class.  The following terms are applicable only to digests 500-822.

    1.      LINEAR PEPTIDES (DIGESTS 790-822) may comprise rings formed through
    a hydroxy or a mercapto group of a hydroxy or a mercapto amino acid and the
    carboxyl group of another amino acid, (e.g., peptide lactones, etc.) but do
    not comprise rings which are formed only through peptide links.

    2.      CYCLIC PEPTIDES (DIGESTS 532-549) are peptides comprising at least
    one ring formed only through peptide links; the cyclisation may occur only
    through normal or abnormal peptide links, e.g., through the 4-amino group
    of 2,4-diamino-butanoic acid, etc.  Cyclic compounds in which at least one
    link in the ring is a nonpeptide link are considered as linear peptides.

    (C)     AMINO ACID ABBREVIATIONS

    For the purposes of all of Class 930, cross-reference art collections
    10-320 and digests 500-822, the following amino acid abbreviations are
    applicable:

    Abbreviation and Amino acid name



            Ala-Alanine
    Arg-Arginine
    Asn-Asparagine
    Asp-Aspartic Acid (Aspartate)
    Asx-Aspartic Acid or Asparagine
    Cys-Cysteine
    Glu-Glutamic Acid (Glutamate)
    Gln-Glutamine
    Gix-Glutamine or Glutamic Acid
    Gly-Glycine
    His-Histidine
    Ile-Isoleucine
    Leu-Leucine
    Lys-Lysine
    Met-Methionine
    Phe-Phenylalanine
    Pro-Proline
    Ser-Serine
    Thr-Threonine
    Trp-Tryptophan
    Tyr-Tyrosine
    Val-Valine.

    (D)     GLOSSARY

    For the purposes of all of Class 930, cross-reference art collections
    10-320 and digests 500-822, the following terms are appropriate as defined:

    amino acids are compounds in which at least one amino group and at least
    one carboxyl group are bound to the same carbon skeleton and the nitrogen
    atom of the amino group may form part of a ring;

    normal peptide link is one between an alpha-amino group of an amino acid
    and the carboxyl group - in position 1 - of another alpha amino acid;

    abnormal peptide link is one between a nonalpha-amino group of an amino
    acid and the carboxyl group - in position 1 -of an alpha-amino acid, or
    between an alpha-amino group of one amino acid and the carboxyl group - not
    in position 1 -of another amino acid;

    peptides are compounds containing a sequence of 4 to 100 amino acid units,
    which are bound through at least one normal peptide link.

    proteins are compounds containing an amino acid sequence of more than 100
    amino acids, at least two of which are different, bound mostly through
    normal peptide links.


CLS 930/10
TXT PEPTIDE OR PROTEIN SEQUENCE:
    Cross-reference art collection for a peptide or protein consisting of an
    identifiable sequence of at least four amino acids covalently bound through
    at least one normal peptide link into a backbone structure.

    (1)     Note.  It should be noted that the patents included in this and the
    indented art collections must contain an actual amino acid sequence.  A
    patent containing a reference, in name only, to a peptide or protein
    compound with a known structure is not included.  For example, though the
    amino acid sequence of insulin is well-known, unless a sequence of four or
    more amino acids from the insulin structure are shown in the patent, the
    patent is not included in these art collections.

    (2)     Note.  Rules of placement in Cross-Reference Art Collections
    10-320:  A compound is placed in ALL art collections, regardless of
    hierarchy, where the definition concepts include the compound in question,
    unless an art collection note excludes a compound from one art collection
    after it has been placed in another.  Therefore, Class 930 provides a way
    of narrowing or fine-tuning computer searches by the use of Boolean
    operators.  As an example, art collection 21 (D-amino acid) can be
    connected with art collection 70 (corticotropin) by using "and" in order to
    get a listing of patents which may include corticotropin sequences
    containing D-amino acids.  One may alternatively use "not" and get a list
    of the patents with corticotropin sequences containing no D-amino acids.
    As another example, one may use "and" between art collection 22
    (radioactive atom) and art collection 60 (calcitonin) in order to get a
    list of patents which may include radioactive calcitonin.

    (3)     Note.  Patents are placed in this and the indented art collections
    according to the amino acid sequence or sequences disclosed in the patent.
    In many cases these sequences may not be part of the claimed subject matter
    but are disclosed in other parts of the patent.

    (4)     Note.  In many of the indented art collections the terminology
    "related peptides" is used.  Such a peptide can be one whose structure
    corresponds to at least half the amino acid residues of the named peptide,
    or one which is the product of side chain substitution, C or N terminal
    chain extension and insertion, or a replacement reaction, or a removal
    reaction.  "Related peptides" also encompasses functional analogues of the
    named compound.  Such analogues may also be placed in any of the other
    appropriate art collections.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses
    68.1-71.3 for methods of making a protein using an enzyme or microorganism.

    514,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 2-21
    for body treating compositions containing peptides.

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclasses 300-427 for peptides and
    proteins and methods of making and treating these peptides and proteins.



CLS 930/20
TXT Containing modified or unusual amino-acid:
    Subject matter under cross-reference art collection 10 for peptides or
    proteins containing one or more modified or unusual amino acids.

    (1)     Note.  The sole presence of a nonpeptide or abnormal peptide link
    in a linear peptide is not considered an indication of a modified or
    unusual amino acid.

    (2)     Note.  Examples of amino acids included in this subclass and the
    indented subclasses are:

            glycosylated amino acids
    Pyroglutamic acid
    2-Aminoadipic acid
    3-Aminoadipic acid
    beta-Alanine
    beta-Aminopropionic acid
    2-Aminobutyric acid
    4-Aminobutyric acid
    Piperidinic acid
    6-Aminocaproic acid
    2-Aminoheptanoic acid
    2-Aminoisobutyric acid
    3-Aminoisobutyric acid
    2-Aminopimelic acid
    2,4-Diaminobutyric acid
    Desmosine
    2,2'-Diaminopimelic acid
    2,3-Diaminopropionic acid
    N-Ethylglycine
    N-Ethylasparagine
    Hydroxylysine
    allo-Hydroxylysine
    3-Hydroxyproline
    4-Hydroxyproline
    Isodesmosine
    allo-Isoleucine
    N-Methylglycine
    Sarcosine
    N-Methylisoleucine
    N-Methylvaline
    Norvaline
    Norleucine
    Ornithine
    Statine
    halogenated amino acids
    D-amino acids
    amino acids with a sulfur moiety

    (3)     Note.  Compounds which are provided for in art collections 20+ are
    placed in all other appropriate art collections also.

    SEARCH ART COLLECTION:

    30,     for linear peptide or protein with a nonpeptide or abnormal peptide
    link.


CLS 930/21
TXT Containing D-amino acid:
    Subject matter under cross-reference art collection 20 for peptides or
    proteins containing one or more D-amino acids.


CLS 930/22
TXT Containing radioactive atom:
    Subject matter under cross-reference art collection 20 containing a peptide
    or protein with an attached radioactive atom.

    (1)     Note.  Radioactive halogen atoms, such as iodine, are proper for
    this art collection and are not intended for placement in art collection 23.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, ART COLLECTION:

    23,     for nonradioactive halogen attachments.


CLS 930/23
TXT Containing halogen:
    Subject matter under cross-reference art collection 20 containing a peptide
    or protein with an attached halogen.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    514,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclass 5 for
    a body treating composition with an iodine containing peptide.


CLS 930/24
TXT Containing sulfur:
    Subject matter under cross-reference art collection 20 containing a peptide
    or protein containing a sulfur other than a sulfur which is merely a part
    of one of the natural amino acids, cysteine, cystine, or methionine.


CLS 930/25
TXT Containing heavy metal or salt thereof:
    Subject matter under cross-reference art collection 20 containing a peptide
    or protein containing a heavy metal or salt thereof.

    (1)     Note.  Heavy metal denotes any metal having a specific gravity
    greater than 4.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    514,    Drug, Bio-Affecting  and Body Treating Compositions, subclass 6 for
    a body treating composition with a heavy metal containing peptide.

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives; Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclass 400 for metal containing
    proteins.


CLS 930/30
TXT Linear peptide or protein containing a nonpeptide or abnormal peptide
    link:Subject matter under cross-reference art collection 10 containing
    peptides or proteins which have a nonpeptide or abnormal peptide link or
    bond joining two or more amino acid residues and do not comprise rings
    which are formed through peptide links.

    (1)     Note.  Excluded from this art collection are compounds with
    nonpeptide links due only to disulfide bridges joining two or more
    sequences of amino-acid residues.

    (2)     Note.  This art collection includes peptide chains containing
    non-peptide moieties in the chain and chains in which the amino acid
    residues are joined by a peptide bond formed by other than an alpha amino
    acid.  Examples include a compound like or gamma peptide bonding.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, ART COLLECTION:

    260,    for a compound with an interchain disulfide bridge.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives; Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclass 323 for peptides with at
    least one nonpeptide bond other than a disulfide bond and subclass 332 for
    a peptide containing at least one abnormal peptide link.


CLS 930/31
TXT Retro-inverted:
    Subject matter under cross-reference art collection 30 containing a peptide
    or protein which is retro-inverted.

    (1)     Note.  Retro-inversion is a way of protecting peptide substances
    against proteolysis.  It entails retro-inverting those peptide bonds most
    susceptible to enzymatic hydrolysis by inverting the direction of the
    peptide bonds. The "retro-inverso peptides" are structural isomers of the
    reference peptides and as such preserve their biological activity while
    being more resistant to enzymatic hydrolysis.


CLS 930/40
TXT Angiotensin; related peptides:
    Subject matter under cross-reference art collection 10 containing peptides
    or proteins related to angiotensin and variations thereof, synthetic and
    natural.

    (1)     Note.  Angiotensin is a pressor substance formed by the action of
    renin on a plasma substrate, angiotensinogen.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this art collection are Angiotensin I,
    Angiotensin II, and Angiotensinogen (hypertensinogen, renin substrate).

    (3)     Note.  Synonyms.  Hypertensin, Angiotonin, Ang I, and Ang II.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, DIGEST:

    590,    for patents related to Angiotensin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives; Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclass 316 for angiotensin and
    related peptides.


CLS 930/50
TXT Atrial or brain natriuretic peptide; related peptides:
    Subject matter under cross-reference art collection 10 containing peptides
    or proteins related to atrial or brain natriuretic peptide and variations
    thereof, synthetic and natural.

    (1)     Note.  ANP is a potent natriuretic, diuretic, and vasorelaxant
    polypeptide.

    (2)     Note.  Synonyms.  ANP, cardionatrin, atrial natriuretic factor,
    ANF, atriopeptin, AP, atriopeptigen, auriculin, cardiodilatin, alpha-ANP,
    atrial peptide, atrial natriuretic/vasodilator polypeptide, ANVP, and BNP.

    (3)     Note.  Related peptides include beta and gamma-ANP, ANP receptor
    protein, and pre-pro ANP.


CLS 930/60
TXT Calcitonin; related peptides:
    Subject matter under cross-reference art collection 10 containing peptides
    or proteins related to calcitonin and variations thereof, synthetic and
    natural.

    (1)     Note.  Physiological properties.  Calcium regulation.

    (2)     Note.  Synonyms.  Thyrocalcitonin, TCA, TCT, Calcimar (salmon),
    Calcitar(e) (porcine), Calsyn, Elcatonin, and Ultimobranchial Body.

    (3)     Note.  Sequence (human).
    Cys-Gly-Asn-Leu-Ser-Thr-Cys-Met-Leu-Gly-Thr-Tyr-Thr-Gln-Asp-Phe-Asn-Lys-Phe-
    His-Thr-Phe-Pro-Gln-Thr-Ala-Ile-Gly-Val-Gly-Ala-Pro-.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, DIGEST:

    660     and 670, for patents related to calcitonin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives; Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclass 307 for calcitonin and
    related peptides.


CLS 930/70
TXT Corticotropin; related peptides:
    Subject matter under cross-reference art collection 10 containing peptides
    or proteins related to corticotropins and variations thereof, synthetic and
    natural.

    (1)     Note.  Corticotropin is a pituitary hormone which stimulates
    release of adrenal cortical steroids and induces growth of adrenal cortex.

    (2)     Note.  Synonyms.  Adrenocorticotrop(h)ic hormone, ACTH,
    Adrenocorticotrop(h)in, Acethropan, Acortan, Acorto, Acthar, Acton,
    Actonar, Adrenomone, Alfatrofin, Cibacthen, Corstiline, Cortiphyson,
    Cortrophin, Isactid, Reacthin, Solacthyl, and Inbex.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, DIGEST:

    570,    for patents related to corticotropin (ACTH).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives; Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclass 306 for corticotropin and
    related peptides.


CLS 930/80
TXT Endorphin or enkephalin; related peptides:
    Subject matter under cross-reference art collection 10 containing peptides
    or proteins related to endorphin and enkephalin and variations thereof,
    synthetic and natural.

    (1)     Note.  Endorphin and enkephalin are neuro-peptides which have
    morphine-like activity.

    (2)     Note.  This art collection includes alpha-, beta-, and
    gamma-endorphins and met- and leu-enkephalin.

    (3)     Note.  Synonyms.  Endorphin:  endogenous opiate, opiod peptide, and
     LPH.  Enkephalin:  Morphine-like factor and pituitary opiate peptide.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, DIGEST:

    720,    for patents related to Beta-Endorphin.

    740,    for patents related to Enkephalin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives; Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclass 302 for endorphin and
    enkephalin and related peptides.


CLS 930/90
TXT Erythropoietin; related peptides:
    Subject matter under cross-reference art collection 10 containing peptides
    or proteins related to erythropoietin or variations thereof, synthetic and
    natural.

    (1)     Note.  Erythropoietin is a circulating glycoprotein which
    stimulates red blood cell formation in higher organisms.

    (2)     Note.  Synonyms.  EPO, ESF, erythropoiesis stimulating factor, and
    Ep.


CLS 930/100
TXT Factor VIII, AHF; related peptides:
    Subject matter under cross-reference art collection 10 containing peptides
    or proteins related to the blood coagulation Factor VIII, also called
    antihemophilic factor, and variations thereof, synthetic and natural.

    (1)     Note.  Physiological properties:  Involved in the formation of
    thromboplastin by the activation of factor X.

    (2)     Note.  Synonyms:  Anthihemophilic factor A, Thromboplastinogen,
    AHF-A Factor VIII, Antihemophilic A Factor, Factorate, Ristocetin cofactor,
    Blood platelet aggregating factor, Ristocetin-von Willebrand factor,
    Antihemophilic globulin, AHG, AHF, Hemofil, Humafac, Koate, and Profilate.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives; Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclass 383 for factor VIII, AHF,
    and related peptides.


CLS 930/110
TXT Gonadotropin; related peptides:
    Subject matter under cross-reference art collection 10 containing peptides
    or proteins related to the gonadotropins and variations thereof, synthetic
    and natural.

    (1)     Note.  Gonadotropins stimulate the gonads to growth and production
    of sex-specific hormones, i.e., estrogens and gestagens in the female and
    androgens in the male.

    (2)     Note.  Examples.  Choriogonin, Bigonadil, Choriogonadotropin,
    Chorulom, HCG, Follitropin, Follicle-stimulating hormone, FSH, Lutropin,
    Luteinizing hormone, LH, Human menopausal gonadotropin, HMG,
    Urogonadotropin, Chorionic gonadotropin, pregnancy urine extract, etc.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives; Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclass 398 for gonadotropins.


CLS 930/120
TXT Growth hormone, growth factor other than T-Cell or B-Cell growth factor,
    and growth hormone releasing factor; related peptides:Subject matter under
    cross-reference art collection 10 containing peptides or proteins related
    to growth hormone, growth factor, or growth hormone-releasing factor and
    variations thereof, synthetic and natural.

    (1)     Note.  Since urogastrone is thought to be identical to epidermal
    growth factor, this art collection is appropriate for urogastrone amino
    acid sequences.

    (2)     Note.  Physiological properties:  Growth hormone or factor: promote
    growth of tissues.  GH is also involved in regulation of other phases of
    protein metabolism as well as fat, carbohydrate, and mineral metabolism.
    GH-RF: helps mediate the neuro-regulation of GH secretion.

    (3)     Note.  Synonyms.  Growth hormone:  Somatotropin, Adenohypophyseal
    growth hormone, GH, hypophyseal growth hormone, anterior pituitary growth
    hormone, phyone, pituitary growth hormone, somatotropic hormone, STH,
    Antuitrin-Growth, Phyol, and Somacton.  Growth hormone-releasing factor:
    GH-RF, GH-RH, GRF, and growth hormone-releasing hormone.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives; Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclass 399 for growth factors.


CLS 930/130
TXT Luteinizing hormone-releasing hormone (LH-RH): related peptides:Subject
    matter under cross-reference art collection 10 containing peptides or
    proteins related to luteinizing hormone-releasing hormone and variations
    thereof, synthetic and natural.

    (1)     Note.  LH-RH stimulates secretion of pituitary hormones LH and FSH.

    (2)     Note.  Synonyms:  Luteinizing hormone-releasing factor, LH-RF, LRF,
    LRH, Gonadorelin, Gonadotropin-releasing factor, LH-RH/FSH-RH, Kryptocur,
    Relefact LH-RH, LH-RH, Gonadotropin-releasing hormone, LH-releasing factor,
    Luteostimulin, Lulibering Gn-RH, Gonadoliberin, LH-FSH releasing hormone,
    Nialutin, Hypothalamic releasing factor, LHFSHRH, Kryptocin, and Lutamin.

    (3)     Note.  Sequence:  (human)
    pyroGlu-His-Trp-Ser-Tyr-Gly-Leu-Arg-Pro-Gly

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, DIGEST:

    690,    for patents related to LH-RH.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives; Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclass 313, for LH-RH.


CLS 930/140
TXT Lymphokine; related peptides:
    Subject matter under cross-reference art collection 10 containing peptides
    or proteins related to lymphokines, and variations thereof, synthetic and
    natural.

    (1)     Note.  Lymphokines are immune mediators produced by the cells of
    the immune system.

    (2)     Note.  Included in this and the indented art collections are
    interferon, interleukin and macrophage factors (monokines).

    (3)     Note.  List of lymphokine-related terms:



            Lymphokines
    Monokines
    Migration Inhibitory Factor (MIF)
    Lymphotoxin (LT)
    Leukocyte Migration Inhibitory Factor
    (CIF)
    Interferons (IF)
    Eosinophil Chemotactic Factor-
    Precursor Substance (ECFp)
    Eosinophil Stimulation Promoter
    Eosinophil Chemotactic Factor
    Monocyte Tissue Factor
    Mitogenic Factor (MF)
    Lymphocyte Activity-Factor (LAF)
    Colony Stimulating Factor (CSF)
    Skin Reactive Factor (SRF)
    Macrophage Cytoxicity Factor (MCF)
    Leukocyte Inhibiton Factor
    Vascular Permeability Factor (VPF)
    T-cell Growth Factor (TCGF)
    B-cell Growth Factor (BCGF)
    Erythroid Burst Promoter
    Genetically Related Macrophage
    Factor (GRF)
    Fibroblast Activating Factor (FAF)
    Tumor Necrosis Factor (TNF)
    Macrophage Activating Factor (MAF)
    Chemotactic Factor for
      macrophages (CFM)
    Transfer factor (TF)
    Interleukin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses
    85.1- 85.7 for lymphokines which are body treating compositions.

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives; Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclass 351 for lymphokines.


CLS 930/141
TXT Interleukin:
    Subject matter under cross-reference art collection 140 containing peptides
    or proteins related to interleukin and variations thereof, synthetic and
    natural.

    (1)     Note.  Interleukin is an immune mediatior which is a macrophage
    derived factor that promotes short term proliferation of T-cells (IL-1) or
    a lymphocyte derived factor that promotes long term proliferation of
    T-cells in culture (IL-2).

    (2)     Note.  Synonyms.  IL-1: LAF or leukocyte activating factor.  IL-2:
    TCGF or T-cell growth factor.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclass 85.2
    for a body treating composition of interleukin.


CLS 930/142
TXT Interferon:
    Subject matter under cross-reference art collection 140 containing peptides
    or proteins related to interferon and variations thereof, synthetic and
    natural.

    (1)     Note.  Interferon is a protein elaborated by infected host cells
    that protects noninfected cells from viral infection.

    (2)     Note.  This art collection includes alpha-IFN (leukocyte), beta-IFN
    (fibroblast), and gamma-IFN (immune).

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses
    85.4- 85.7 for a body treating composition of interferon.


CLS 930/143
TXT Lymphotoxin:
    Subject matter under cross-reference art collection 140 containing peptides
    or proteins related to lymphotoxin (LT) and variations thereof, synthetic
    and natural.

    (1)     Note.  Lymphotoxin is a lymphokine that results in direct cytolysis
    following its release from stimulated lymphocytes.  It can destroy
    nonleucocyte target cells.


CLS 930/144
TXT Tumor necrosis factor:
    Subject matter under cross-reference art collection 140 containing peptides
    or proteins related to tumor necrosis factor (TNF) and variations thereof,
    synthetic and natural.

    (1)     Note.  Tumor necrosis factor is a protein which is capable of
    selective cytotoxicity against tumor cells.


CLS 930/145
TXT Colony stimulating factor:
    Subject matter under cross-reference art collection 140 containing peptides
    or proteins related to colony stimulating factor (CSF) and variations
    thereof, synthetic and natural.

    (1)     Note.  Colony stimulating factor is involved in the modulation of
    the function of phagocytes and the regulation of other tissue.


CLS 930/150
TXT Oxytocin or vasopressin; related peptides:
    Subject matter under cross-reference art collection 10 containing peptides
    or proteins related to oxytocin and vasopressin and variations thereof,
    synthetic and natural.

    (1)     Note.  Physiological properties:  Oxytocin causes uterine
    contractions and stimulates lactation. Vasopressin controls water
    metabolism and contracts smooth muscle.

    (2)     Note.  Synonyms.  Oxytocin:  Di-sipidin; alpha-Hypophamine;
    Piton-S; Syntocin; Syntocinon; Uteracon; Nobitocin S; Syntocinone;
    Endopituitrina; Orasthin; Oxystin; Atonin 0; (1-Hemicystine)-Oxytocin;
    Presoxin; Hyphotocin; 1,2-Dithia-5,8,11,14,17 - pentaazacycloelcosane; and
    8-Leucyl Vasotocin.

            Vasopressin: Tonephin, beta-Hypophamine, ADH, Antidiuretic hormone,
    Pitressin, Vasophysin, and Leiormone.

    (3)     Note.  Sequence.
    Oxytocin:  Cys-Tyr-Ile-Gln-Asn-Cys-Pro-Leu-Gly.

            Vasopressin:  Cys-Tyr-Phe-Gln-Asn-Cys-Pro-Arg-Gly.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, DIGEST:

    560,    for patents related to oxytocin or vasopressin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    530,    Chemistry: Natural Resins or Derivatives; Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclass 315 for oxytocin and
    vasopressin.


CLS 930/160
TXT Somatostatin; related peptides:
    Subject matter under cross-reference art collection 10 containing peptides
    or proteins related to somatostatin and variations thereof, synthetic and
    natural.

    (1)     Note.  Physiological properties.  Inhibits secretion of pituitary
    growth hormone.

    (2)     Note.  Synonyms.  Growth hormone releasing-inhibiting factor
    (GH-RIF) and Somatotropin release inhibiting hormone (SRIF).

    (3)     Note.  Sequence.
    Ala-Gly-Cys-Lys-Asn-Phe-Phe-Trp-Lys-Thr-Phe-Thr-Ser-Cys.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, DIGEST:

    700,    for patents related to somatostatin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives; Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclass 311 for somatostatin.


CLS 930/170
TXT Vasoactive intestinal peptide; related peptides:
    Subject matter under cross-reference art collection 10 containing peptides
    or proteins related to vasoactive intestinal peptide and variations
    thereof, synthetic and natural.

    (1)     Note.  Vasoactive Intestinal Peptide is a neuroactive
    gastrointestinal hormone that relaxes systemic and vascular smooth muscle
    and stimulates the exocrine pancreas, the secretion of insulin and of
    cyclic-AMP formation in the small intestine.

    (2)     Note.  Synonyms.  Vasoactive intestinal polypeptide and VIP.


CLS 930/180
TXT Thymus-derived hormone or factor; related peptides:
    Subject matter under cross-reference art collection 10 containing peptides
    or proteins related to thymus derived hormones or factors and variations
    thereof, synthetic and natural.

    (1)     Note.  Examples of thymus derived peptides include thymopoietin
    (Thymin), thymosin, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, DIGEST:

    750,    for patents related to thymopoietin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives; Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclass 301 for thymopoietin.


CLS 930/190
TXT Antibiotic:
    Subject matter under cross-reference art collection 10 containing peptides
    or proteins which are either natural or synthetic antibiotics.


CLS 930/200
TXT Bacterial peptide or bacterial protein:
    Subject matter under cross-reference art collection 10 containing peptides
    or proteins homologous to the bacteria and variations thereof, synthetic
    and natural.

    (1)     Note.  A homologous polypeptide is one found in or produced by the
    wild type (nontransformed) host microorganism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, 190.1 for a
    bacterial antigen-, epitope-, or other immunospecific
    immunoeffector-containing body-treating composition whose amino acid
    sequence is disclosed in whole or in part.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses
    252.1-253.5 for bacteria, per se.


CLS 930/210
TXT Parasitic peptide or parasitic protein:
    Subject matter under cross-reference art collection 10 containing peptides
    or proteins which are homologous to the parasite and variations thereof,
    synthetic and natural.

    (1)     Note.  See Note (1) under art collection 200 for the definition of
    homologous.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclass 191.1
    for a parasitic antigen-, epitope-,  or other immunospecific
    immunoeffecor-containing body-treating composition whose amnio acid
    sequence is disclosed in whole or in part.


CLS 930/220
TXT Viral peptide or viral protein:
    Subject matter under cross-reference art collection 10 containing peptides
    or proteins homologous to the virus and variations thereof, synthetic and
    natural.

    (1)     Note.  See Note (1) under art collection 200 for the definition of
    homologous.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses
    186.1+ for a viral antigen-, epitope-, or other immunospecific
    immunoeffector-containing body-treating composition whose amino acid
    sequence is disclosed in whole or in part.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 235 for
    virus, per se.


CLS 930/221
TXT Retrovirus related, or human immunodeficiency virus related, or simian
    immunodeficiency virus related:Subject matter under cross-reference art
    collection 220 containing peptides or proteins related to the retrovirus,
    or the human immunodeficiency virus (HIV), or the simian immunodificiency
    virus (SIV) and variations thereof, synthetic and natural.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this art collection are viral sequences related
    to human T-cell leukemia virus, human T-lymphotropic virus, HTLV, HTLV-I,
    HTLV-II, HTLV-III, lymphadenopathy-associated virus, LAV, AIDS-related
    virus, ARV, immune deficiency-associated virus, IDAV, STLV-I, STLV-III, and
    viral sequences related to the disease states of acquired immune deficiency
    syndrome, acquired immunodeficiency syndrome, AIDS, adult T-cell
    leukemia-lymphoma, ATLL, Kaposi's sarcoma, AIDS-related complex, ARC,
    simian or mouse acquired immunodeficiency syndrome, SAIDS, and MAIDS.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses
    187.1 and 188.1 for a retrovial (including immunodeficiency viral)
    antigen-, epitope-, or other immunospecific immunoeffector-containing
    body-treating composition whose amino acid sequence is disclosed in whole
    or in part.


CLS 930/222
TXT Foot and mouth disease related:
    Subject matter under cross-reference art collection 220 containing peptides
    or proteins related to the Foot and Mouth Disease Virus which is a small
    animal virus of the picornavirus family and peptide variations thereof,
    synthetic and natural.


CLS 930/223
TXT Hepatitis related:
    Subject matter under cross-reference art collection 220 containing peptides
    or proteins related to the hepatitis virus and variations thereof,
    synthetic and natural.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclass 189.1
    for a hepatitis viral antigen-, epitope-, or other immunospecific
    immunoeffector-containing body-treating composition whose amino acid
    sequence is disclosed in whole or in part.


CLS 930/224
TXT Herpes related:
    Subject matter under cross-reference art collection 220 containing peptides
    or proteins related to the herpes virus and variations thereof, synthetic
    and natural.


CLS 930/230
TXT Multicellular plant peptide or multicellular plant protein:
    Subject matter under cross-reference art collection 10 containing peptides
    or proteins derived from multicellular green or nongreen plants and
    variations thereof, synthetic and natural.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives; Peptide or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclasses 370-379 for plant proteins.


CLS 930/240
TXT Enzyme or isoenzyme:
    Subject matter under cross-reference art collection 10 containing peptides
    or proteins which are enzymes or isoenzymes.

    (1)     Note.  Proenzymes or precursors of enzymes are appropriate for this
    art collection.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses
    94.1- 94.67 for enzymes or coenzymes containing body treating compositions.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 183-234
    for enzymes and compositions thereof.


CLS 930/250
TXT Enzyme inhibitor:
    Subject matter under cross-reference art collection 10 containing peptides
    or proteins which are active as enzyme inhibitors.


CLS 930/260
TXT Containing Cys-Cys disulfide bridge between nonadjacent cysteine
    residues:Subject matter under cross-reference art collection 10 containing
    peptides or proteins containing a cys-cys disulfide bridge between
    nonadjacent cysteine residues such as in the case of at least one
    intrachain disulfide bridge (cyclic) or at least one interchain disulfide
    bridge.

    (1)     Note.  This art collection contains only those compounds containing
    a cys-cys disulfide bridge for which there are no appropriate named
    compound art collections available (art collections 40-170) such as those
    for ANP or vasopressin.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    514,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 9-11
    for cyclopeptides.


CLS 930/270
TXT Cyclic peptide or cyclic protein:
    Subject matter under cross-reference art collection 10 containing peptides
    or proteins which contain at least one ring formed through a peptide or
    nonpeptide bond.

    (1)     Note.  In addition to the cyclic peptides containing at least one
    ring formed only through peptide bonds, included in this subclass are those
    cyclic compounds in which the peptide bond may be other than that formed by
    the alpha amino nitrogen, e.g., through the 4-amino group of 2,4 diamino
    butanoic acid and the cyclic compounds in which one or more links in the
    ring are nonpeptide bonds (heterodectic cyclic peptides).

    (2)     Note.  Excluded from this art collection are those compounds which
    are cyclic because they contain intrachain disulfide bridges and those
    compounds appropriate for art collections 40-170.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, ART COLLECTION:

    260,    for compounds with intrachain cys-cys disulfide bridges.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    514,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 9-11
    for cyclopeptides in body treating compositions.

    530,    Chemistry:  Natural Resins or Derivatives; Peptides or Proteins;
    Lignins or Reaction Products Thereof, subclasses 317-321 for cyclic
    peptides.


CLS 930/280
TXT Bound to a nonpeptide drug, nonpeptide label, nonpeptide carrier, or
    nonpeptide resin:Subject matter under cross-reference art collection 10
    containing peptides or proteins which are bound to a nonpeptide drug,
    nonpeptide label, nonpeptide carrier, or nonpeptide resin.

    (1)     Note.  Subject matter intended for this subclass includes peptides
    coupled to luminol or a chromogenic indicator, peptide coupled to a carrier
    to enhance antibody production, peptide coupled to an acrylamide copolymer,
    peptide coupled to an antibiotic, etc.


CLS 930/290
TXT Polyamino acid or polypeptide with an uninterrupted series of peptide
    repeating units:Subject matter under cross-reference art collection 10
    containing a peptide or protein which is a polymer of the same amino acids
    or is composed of a series of peptide repeating units.

    (1)     Note.  A series of peptide repeating units is intended to mean that
    an amino acid sequence of two or more amino acid residues is sequentially
    repeated two or more times in the peptide or protein in uninterrupted
    sucession.


CLS 930/300
TXT Signal or leader sequence:
    Subject matter under cross-reference art collection 10 containing a peptide
    sequence denoted as a signal or leader.

    (1)     Note.  The terms signal or leader are usually associated with the
    production of proteins by a recombinant microorganism.  The signal or
    leader sequence is an amino acid chain at the N-terminal end of the protein
    which carries the protein out of the microbial cell.


CLS 930/310
TXT Linker sequence:
    Subject matter under cross-reference art collection 10 containing a peptide
    sequence denoted as a linker sequence or peptide segment.

    (1)     Note.  Such linkers or segments are the connections for fused
    polypeptides.  The linker acts either as an enzyme cleavage site or has
    physical and/or chemical characteristics which can be used in isolation
    and/or purification of the expressed protein.


CLS 930/320
TXT Modification to prevent enzymatic degradation:
    Subject matter under cross-reference art collection 10 containing a peptide
    or protein which has been modified to prevent enzymatic degradation.

    (1)     Note.  This art collection is not complete.  Only patents in which
    the modification is a central part of the patent subject matter are placed
    here except for those directed to retro-inversion.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, ART COLLECTION:

    31,     for retro-inverted peptides or proteins.


CLS 935/
TTL GENETIC ENGINEERING: RECOMBINANT DNA TECHNOLOGY, HYBRID OR FUSED CELL
    TECHNOLOGY, AND RELATED MANIPULATIONS OF NUCLEIC ACIDS

CLS 935/
TXT

    I.      Statement of Class Subject Matter

    II.     Classification Lines with Other Classes

    A.      Lines with related classes providing for the use of a genetically
    altered micro-organism and the apparatus therefore and the compositon
    classes providing for the products of a genetically altered micro-organism

    B.      Guide to the products and uses of genetically engineered
    micro-organisms

    C.      Enzymes used in molecular cloning

    D.      Plant Patents

    III.    Search Notes

    IV.     Index to Class Lines and Search Notes in Class Definition Sections
    and Subclasses of this Class

    V.      Glossary

    VI.     Classification Guidelines for this Class

    I.      Statement of Class Subject Matter

    Note.  This class consists solely of Cross-Reference art collections of U.
    S. and Foreign Patents claiming or disclosing the below defined subject
    matter.  For the original placement of the patents of this class see
    section II below.

    This class provides a field of search for the following subject matter:

    A.      Methods of producing a change in the genetic contents or structure
    or gene expression of a cell by:

    (1)     the introduction of exogenous genetic material or the nonrandom
    alteration of the genetic contents of a cell.

    (2)     the fusion of cells or the introduction of nuclear material from
    one cell into another.

    (3)     the introduction of an agent such as a virus into a cell to permit
    proliferation in long term culture.

    B.      Methods of producing the means to carry out the methods of A
    including:

    (1)     methods of synthesizing, modifying, or isolating specific nucleic
    acid sequences.

    (2)     methods of synthesizing, modifying, or isolating vectors or other
    means of introducing nucleic acids into the protoplasm of a cell.

    (3)     methods of culture of cells.

    C.      Methods of use of the cells produced in A, including methods of
    destroying hazardous or toxic waste and enhancing or diminishing gene
    expression.

    D.      Methods of assay involved in any of A to C.

    E.      Apparatus for any of A to D.

    F.      Compounds or compositions produced by or used in any of A to E.

    II.     Classification Lines with Other Classes

    A.      Lines with related classes providing for the use of a genetically
    altered micro-organism and the apparatus therefore and the composition
    classes providing for the products of a genetically altered micro-organism.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, provides for processes of (a) dyeing employing a
    micro-organism or enzyme (b) treating hides or skins by use of a
    micro-organism or enzyme with subsequent tanning of the hides or skins or
    subsequent operations that are prelimary and peculiar to tanning of hides
    or skin or peculiar to making leather.

    48,     Gas:  Heating and Illuminating, for fuel gas compositions when the
    processes of making such compositions involve a micro-organism; processes
    of producing fuel gas compositions that include a micro-organism; articles,
    compositions, or apparatus, for uses in such processes; or processes of
    making such articles or compositions for such uses.

    71,     Chemistry:  Fertilizers, provides for processes of  fertilizing
    plants by use of a micro-organism as well as the composition containing a
    micro-organism and the apparatus used to carry out the process.  Class 71
    also provides for process of treating plants with specific chemicals for
    the purpose of affecting the growth characteristic of the plants other than
    on the genetic level.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, provides for processes and compositions containing a
    micro-organism for use in processes of obtaining free metals from metal
    compounds or ores.  Class 75 in particular provides for processes of
    hydrometalurgy, processes of beneficiating ores, or recovery of elemental
    metal from waste in which a micro-organism is used when the reduction to
    elemental metal is claimed.

    106,    Compositions:  Coating or Plastic, provides for processes in which
    a micro-organism is used to produce a coating or plastic composition.

    119,    Animal Husbandry, provides for inventions applicable to the
    propagation and care of living animals.  Class 119 does not provide for
    propagation of protozoa but provides for propagation of insects, fish,
    birds and mammals and other methods of treating fish eggs to change the
    traits exhibited by mature fish, such as, by heat treating fish eggs to
    produce sterile fish.

    127,    Sugar, Starch, and Carbohydrates, for process wholly peculiar to
    processes of extracting or purifying natural starch, natural sucrose, or
    other natural polysaccharides except cellulose, processes of hydrolyzing
    polysaccharides, carbohydrates or processes of purifying the products of
    such hydrolysis.  The chemical manufacture or synthesis of sugar or of
    polysaccharides by process other than that of hydrolysis is not included in
    Class 127. Molecular rearrangement of one polysaccharide to form another is
    exluded from Class 127.  Such processes are provided for in Class 536.

    128     and 604, Surgery, provide for methods of treatment of the living
    body including the use of a Class 424 composition which is more than a
    single or plural steps of mere applications of one or more 424
    compositions, e.g., removal of a body fluid such as milk, adding medicine
    to the fluid and re-injecting the fluid, surgical implantation, etc.  Class
    128 will provide for a test which involves contact with a body as well as
    apparatus used in the inspection and treatment of disease of the bodies of
    humans and animals which apparatus is provided with means for connection to
    the living body.

    131,    Tobacco, for tobacco-containing articles, or composition when
    tobacco is used in the making thereof, when the processes of making such
    articles or compositions involve the use of a micro-organism or enzyme;
    processes of making such articles or compositions, or treating tobacco,
    that include the use of a micro-organism or enzyme; or articles,
    compositions, or apparatus, for uses in such processes, or processes making
    the latter articles or compositions for use in the above noted processes.

    159,    Concentrating, Evaporators, provides for processes peculiar to the
    concentration of solids held in solution or suspension by evaporation of
    the liquid  containing them and the recovery of the concentrate.  If the
    starting material is a solid or slurrry, placement in Class 34, Drying and
    Gas Vapor Contact With Solids would indicated.  Class 159 will take
    concentration to the point of crystalization or to dryness, however removal
    of water of crystalization is considered to be a chemical reaction and
    placement would not be proper in 159.

    162,    Paper Making and Fiber Liberation, provides for processes and
    apparatus which use a micro-organism when combined with a step peculiar to
    Class 162 as well as the use of a micro-organism as a component of fiber
    pulp.  For an exhaustive listing of fiber treatment classes see the notes
    immediately following the class definition of Class 162.

    166,    Wells, provides for processes and apparatus for treating oil or an
    oil bearing mineral with a micro-organism or enzyme while in the ground.
    See Class 435, subclass 281 for a summary of mineral oil treating classes.

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, for  processes and
    apparatus involving electrical or wave energy, as provided for under the
    Class 204 definition; especially subclasses 400+ for electrolytic analysis
    and testing apparatus, subclasses 450+ for electrophoretic or
    electro-osmotic processes, and subclasses 600+ for electrophoretic or
    electro-osmotic apparatus.

    205,    Electrolysis:  Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and Methods of
    Preparing the Compositions, for electrolytic processes, especially
    subclasses 775+ for electrolytic analysis or testing.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, provides for processes of
    treating impure liquids by processes including a micro-organism, e.g.,
    bacteriological digestion of sewage including the use of an immoblized
    micro-organism and the apparatus for such processes, as well as methods of
    physical separation of micro-organisms and the apparatus of such processes,
    as well as methods of physical separation of micro-organism and viruses
    from liquid media.


            Liquid Purification or Separation, includes processes for the
    separation or purification of a constituent from a flowable liquid mixture
    by dialysis, sorption, ion exchange, chromatography, liquid extraction,
    gravitational separation, or filtration, as well as purification of a
    liquid mixture by destruction or conversion of a constituent by a
    micro-organism. Processes directed to the nonmicrobial or nonenzymatic
    purification of a particular compound or composition (including solutions
    of either the compound or composition in water), are classified with the
    particular compound or composition.  Microbial or enzymatic purification is
    provided for in Class 435, subclasses 262-282.  Insofar as the treatment of
    liquid with ion exchange or sorption material (including chromatography)
    are concerned, the following lines will be maintained:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, provides for
    proesses of altering the genetic material of whole plants by use of
    recombinant DNA technology, cell fusion and nucleic acid manipulation that
    results in the production of a whole plant. Class 435 also provides for
    apparatus used in these processes

    (I)     Where water is the only disclosed liquid purified, the patent will
    be classified in the class (210).

    (II)    Where the disclosure includes water, hydrocarbons and/or other
    liquids, the patent will be classified:

    (a)     in Class 210 if all the claims are broad as to the liquid.

    (b)     in Class 210 if several species of liquid are claimed and one
    species includes water.

    (c)     in the appropriate art class if some liquid other than water is the
    only liquid claimed (e.g., mineral oils in Class 208; organic compounds in
    class 260).

    (III)   Purification or separation of liquids by flocculation only is
    classified in class (210).

    504,    Plant Protecting and Regulating Compositions, for the production of
    substances having a stimulating, inhibiting, or regulating action on plant
    growth and the product of such processes including methods of utilizing
    micro-organisms to produce plant growth simulators, inhibitors, or
    regulators.



    Processes wherein all claims are limited to the deposition of specific
    materials on ion-exchangers or sorbents with subsequent recovery of the
    specific materials are classified with the materials so operated upon.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    260,    Chemistry:  Carbon Compounds, provides for the synthesis and
    liberation and purification by chemical or physical means of compounds and
    extracts falling within the class definition of Class 260 where such
    processes do not include a step of treatment by a micro-organism or enzyme.
    Processes of making chemical compounds that include the use of a
    micro-organism or enzyme are controlling for classification over other
    processes of making chemical compounds.

    422,    Chemical Apparatus and Process Disinfecting, Deodorizing,
    Preserving, or Sterilizing, for apparatus for analysis including means for
    causing or promoting a chemical reaction of regulating or controlling a
    chemical reaction.

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, provides for a
    process of treating the living body with a micro-organism and compositions
    therefore which may contain a live micro-organism. Class 424 provides for
    in vivo antigen-antibody diagnostic tests for antigen antibody
    compositions. Class 424 provides for the products of micro-organisms which
    are drug or bio-affecting compositions under I.A. and C. of the Class 424
    definition and methods of purification of such products.  See especially
    subclasses 85.1+ for a lymphokine composition; subclasses 130.1+ for an
    antibody composition; subclasses 184.1+ for an antigen composition and for
    a method of immunizing to produce protective immunity in vivo (i.e., for
    vaccination purposes); subclasses 93.1+ for a composition including a whole
    live micro-organism, cell or virus; Class 424 also provides for treatment
    of plants by mere application of a 424 composition, Class 424 provides for
    a process of gene therapy of an animal or plant.

    426,    Food or Edible Material:  Processes, Compositions, and Products,
    provides for processes using a micro-organism that are solely disclosed or
    claimed in preparing an edible, and for compositions containing
    micro-organisms solely disclosed or claimed as edible or used in the
    preparation of an edible.  Class 426 provides for compositions and
    processes of preparation relating to compositions which have the capacity
    to ferment and produce an edible, but which are claimed as being in an
    inactive state, and also provides for compositions which are undergoing a
    fermentation to produce an edible product.  See especially subclasses 7+
    and 70+ for alcoholic beverages, or other beverages, milk or other
    alimentary articles, or compositions, when the beverage or other alimentary
    articles contains bacteria and processes of making the same which include
    micro-organisms.  Processes of autolysis or microbial or enzymatic
    destruction of yeasts or other living organisms are in Class 435,
    subclasses 267 or 270, but processes of preparing foods including such
    autolysis are in Class 426.  Processes of making vinegar by methods
    including use of a micro-organism or enzyme are in Class 426.

    429,    Chemistry:  Electrical Current Producing Apparatus, Product, and
    Process, provides for a current producing device having a micro-organism or
    enzyme as an intergral part and the process of operating the device and a
    process involving the device.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, is the generic
    class for all aspects of the production of a genetically engineered
    micro-organism and the means e.g., vectors, restriction enzymes, etc., for
    carrying out such a process as well as providing for all methods of use of
    such a micro-organism not otherwise provided for.



            Class 435 provides for the process of use of the engineered
    micro-organisms, enzymes derived from and used in the process of genetic
    engineering, micro-organisms, and virus and bacteriophages, per se.



            Class 435 provides for a process of cultivating a micro-organism to
    produce a drug or bio-affecting composition.  Class 435 provides for virus
    culture and attenuation, and for in vitro tests involving a micro-organism
    or an enzyme and antigen antibody tests which involve a living
    micro-organism. Plant cells and animal cells are included in the Class 435
    definition of micro-organisms. Tissue culture is also provided for in Class
    435.



            Class 435 is the generic home for subcellular parts of
    micro-organisms such as ribosomes, plasmids, chloroplasts, mitochondria,
    Golgi bodies and other organelles, as well as DNA and RNA organized into
    chromosomes, genes, operons, and ribosomal, messenger and transfer RNAs.



            Class 435 will provide for production of protein from a single
    source by fermentation even if the product is claimed as having a 426
    utility.

            Disposition of patents to yeast claimed or disclosed (1) as an
    edible, (2) as a component in an edible, or (3) as a single source material
    for producing protein useful in making an edible.



    (1)     Yeast with a claimed or solely disclosed utility as a foodstuff in
    the form it is produced by 435 process is classifiable in 426.



    (2)     Yeast claimed or disclosed as a component of an edible is
    classifiable in 426 if the claim or disclosure is that the yeast is a food
    supplement and is not medicative (i.e., used to alleviate a disease) in
    which case placement in 424 is proper.



    (3)     Refined or crude yeast protein is not classifiable in 426 solely on
    the baisi of a 426 utility.  Refined yeast protein is classifiable in Class
    260. The disposition of crude yeast is usually on the basis of utility.



    Note.  A genetically engineered micro-organism, other than yeast, grown as
    a source of protein would be classified in a similar manner.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, provides for
    methods of chemical measuring and testing and the compositions therefor and
    nonenzymatic methods of testing utilizing immunological and protein binding
    interactions and the compositions therefor. Specifically Class 436,
    subclass 94 would provide for chemical tests for nucleic acids, subclass
    501 would provide for binding assays other than antigen antibody assays and
    subclasses 506-508 provide for antigen antibody assays.

    536,    Organic Compounds, appropriate subclasses for saccharides,
    polysaccharides, nucleosides, nucleotides and polynucleotides like RNA and
    DNA compounds as well as chemical methods of synthesizing such compounds.
    Search specifically subclasses 23.1+ for fragments of DNA or RNA which
    could have utility as genes in recombinant processes; subclass  24.1 for
    noncoding sequences, e.g., promoters, operators, etc.; subclass 24.3 for
    probes; and subclass 24.33 for primers.  (Plasmids, which are fragments of
    DNA, usually circular, used as vectors in recombinant processes, are found
    in Class 435/320.1.)



    B.      Products of Genetically Engineered Cells

    Product Example Classification



    Amino Acid      arginine,
                    pheylalanine    see below

    Antibiotic      penicillin,
                    tetracyclines           Compound 260
                            Composition 424

    Biodegrada-
    tion                    210/601,922
                            Digest 32

    Enzyme  amylase, DNA
                    polymerase      435

    Genes           435

    Gene pre-       globin genes,
    parations       clotting
                    factor genes    424

    Inorganics      ammonia,
                    hydrogen        423

    Mineral uranium,

    Leaching        transistion
                    metals  75/1+

    Nucleoside      adenosine       536/27

    Nucleotide      5' IMP, 5'
                    GMP     536/27

    Peptide ATCH, Insu-
    hormones        lin, growth
                    hormone 260/112+

    Pesticides      Becillus
                    thurin-
                    giensis,
                    aromatic        424

    Proteins
    and             Interferons,

    Glycosy-
    lated           antigens

    Proteins                260/112R

    Steroid corticoids
    hormones        androgens,
                    estrogens       Compound 260,
                            Composition 424

    Viral           Foot and
    antigens        mouth disease
                    virus,
                    Epstein Barr
                    virus   Compound 260
                            Composition 424

    Monoclonal      Anti-inter-
    antibodies      feron mono-
                    clonal anti-
                    body    260/112R

    Fused or
    Hybrid an-
    imal cells              435

    Fused or
    Hybrid plant
    cells                   435



    Amino Acids     -       Classification

    Amino Acids commonly found in proteins

    Alanine         562/575

    Arginine                562/560

    Asparagine              562/561

    Aspartic acid           562/571

    Cysteine                562/557

    Glutamine               562/563

    Glutamic acid           562/573

    Glycine         562/575

    Histidine               548/344

    Isoleucine              526/575

    Leucine         562/575

    Lysine          562/562

    Methionine              562/559

    Phenylalanine           562/445

    Proline         548/535

    Serine          562/567

    Theronine               562/570

    Tryptophan              548/496

    Tyrosine                562/444

    Valine          526/575


    Nonprotein Amino Acids   Classification

    Beta Alanine            562/576

    Gamma-Aminobutyric acid     562/553

    Canavanine              562/560

    Citrulline              562/560

    Beta-Cyanoalanine       260/465.4

    Djenkolic acid          562/557

    Homocysteine            562/556

    Homoserine              562/567

    Ornithine               562/561



    Rare amino acids from proteins   Classification

    Desmosine               546/335

    5 Hydroxylysine 562/564

    5-Hydroxyproline        548/532

    Isodesmosine            546/335

    3-Methythistidine       548/335

    Epsilon-N-Methyllysine  562/561

    3-Hydroxyproline        548/535

    4-Hydroxyproline        548/535



    C.      Enzymes used in Molecular Cloning

    ENZYME TYPE (E.C.NUMBER
    CLASSIFICATION)



    (1)     Restriction
            Endo-
            nucleus (3.1.23)        435/199

    (2)     Methylase
            e.g., ECO
            RI Methyl-
            ase     (2.1.1)         435/193

    (3)     DNA Poly-
            merase I
            and the
            Kienow
            Fragment of
            E. coll DNA
            Poly
            merase) (2.7.7.7)       435/194

    (4)     Polynucleo-
            tide
            Kinase  (2.7.1.78)      435/194

    (5)     RNA depen-
            dent DNA
            Polymerase
            (reverse
            transcrip-
            tase)   (2.7.7.-)       435/194

    (6)     Alkaline
            Phospha-
            tase    (3.1.3.1)       435/196

    (7)     Nucelase
            e.g.,
            Ribonucle-
            ase     (3.1.4)         435/199
            Deoxyribo-
            nuclease I
            (DNase I)       (3.1.21.1)      435/199
            Exonuc-
            lease III       (3.1.11.2)      435/199
            Exoncu-
            lease VII       (3.1.11.6)      435/199
            Poly (A)
            Polymerase
            (RNA ter-
            minal ribo-
            adenylate
            trans-
            ferase) (2.7.7.19)      435/194

    (8)     Ligase
            e.g., DNA
            Ligase  (6.5.1.2)       435/183
            RNA
            Ligase  (6.5.1.3)       435/183

    (9)     Terminal
            Deoxyribo-
            nucleotidyl
            Transferase
            (terminal
            trans-
            ferase) (2.7.7.31)      435/194



    D.      Plant Patents

    Asexually propagated plants including cultivated sports, mutants and newly
    found seedlings other than tuber propagated plants are provided for by the
    Plant Patents Act, 35 U.S.C. 161-164.  See MPEP Chapter 1600 and 37CFR
    1.67-1.167.  Ordinarily this section will embrace entire plants, and
    exclude cell lines, callus cultures, i.e., plant tissues lacking complete
    organization.  However, see Yoden Bros. Inc. v California-Florida Plant
    Corp., 537 F2d 1347, 193 U.S.P.Q. 264 (5th Cir. 1976).  Sexually reproduced
    plants other than fungi, bacteria or first generation hybrids are provided
    for by the Plant Variety Protection Act of 1970, 7 U.S.C. 2321-2583 (1976).

    "Plant" has been held for purposes of the Plant Patent Act to have been
    used in its popular sense and not in its scientific sense thus limiting the
    plant patent act to subject matter of benefit to agriculture and
    horticulture.  See in re Arzberger 46 USPQ 32, 35 (1940).  By implication
    plant cells grown as an undifferentated mass with no claim or showing that
    the cell mass is grown as a step in a process leading to a differentrated
    plant would not be within the ambit of the Plant Patent Act's definition of
    plant and would therefore be provided for under the utility patent act in
    the manner of a bacteria or fungi.  See Diamond v. Chabrabarty 44 U.S. 1028
    (1980).  That decision intimates that some plants created by genetic
    engineering methods would fall within 35 U.S.C. 101.

    III.    Search Notes

    This class is intended to provide a field of search for processes which
    produce a change in the genetic material of a cell primarily by use of
    recombinant DNA techniques or by production and selection of hybrid or
    fused cells.  Other techniques of producing or selecting for genetic
    changes are provided for in the following classes:

    435,    provides for mutation and cell fusion techniques of producing whole
    plants as well as the treatment of plants and seeds with radiation amd
    methods of plant breeding including chromosome multiplication.

    119,    provides for methods of treating the eggs of fish to cause
    sterility in the mature fish.

    128     and 604, provides for methods of gene therapy involving removal of
    a body fluid and reintroduction of the fluid into the body e.g., bone
    marrow transplants of normal or genetically engineered marrow cells.

    435,    subclass 172.1, provides for processes relating to micro-organisms
    in which mutation is induced or a natural mutant is selected.

    435,    subclasses 236+, provides for the inactivation or attenuation of a
    virus or for the production of viral subunits.

    435,    subclass 245, provides for a process of adaption or attenuation of
    cells.



    IV.     Index to Line and Search Notes in Class Definitions Sections and
    Subclasses of this Class

    CLASS   SECTION SUBCLASS

    8               II A

    47              II A    64
                    IIB
                    III

    48              II A

    71              II A    64

    75              II A    59, 86

    106             II A

    119             II A
                    III     63 127
                    II A

    128, 604        II A
                    III     62, 63

    131             II A

    162             II A

    159             II A

    166                     59

    204             II A    19, 77

    205             II A    77

    210             II A
                    II B    59

    260             II A
                    II B    11, 19,

                            60, 106

    422             II A

    424             II A
                    II B    32, 57,

                            62, 65,

                            81, 89, 106

    426             II A

    429             II A

    435             II A    1, 22, 32, 52,
                    II B    57, 59, 60, 65,
                    II C    66, 76, 77, 81,
                    III     82, 84, 85, 87,
                            89, 106

    436             II A
                    II B    76, 77, 87, 106

    504             IIA     64

    536             II A
                    II B    1

    546             II B

    548             II B

    562             II B



    V.      GLOSSARY

    Anticodon

    The triplet of nucleotides in a tRNA molecule that associates by
    complementary base pairing with the codon in the mRNA during translation.

    Antiparallel

    Describes molecules that are parallel but point in opposite direction (the
    strands of DNA are antiparallel)

    Antisense

    strand DNA that has the same sequence as mRNA.

    Appoinducer

    Protein that binds to DNA to switch on transcription by RNA polymerase.

    AUG

    See initiation condon

    Bacteriophages

    Viruses that infect bacteria; often abbreviated as phages.

    Base pair (bp)

    A hydrogen bonding of A with T or U or of C with G in polynucleotides.

    cap

    The structure found at the 5' end of many eukaryotic mRNAs; it consists of
    7' methyl-guanosine-ppX; where X is the first nucleotide encoded in the
    DNA; it is not present in prokaryotic mRNAs; it is added
    post-transcriptionally near the TATA (Hogness) box.

    CAP (not to be confused with cap)

    CAP is catabolite gene activator protein (sometines CRP or CGA); it
    participates in the initiation of transcription in prokayrotes.

    Capsid

    The protein coat of a virion or virus particle.

    cDNA (complementary DNA)

    A DNA complementary to an RNA, (e.g., mRNA), synthesized from it by in
    vitro transcription; used for cloning or as a specific probe.

    cDNA clone

    A duplex DNA sequence representing an RNA, carried in cloning vector and
    derived from mRNA.

    Cell-free Extract

    A fluid derived from broken cells which contains most of the soluble
    components of the cell.  Capable of performing certain biological
    functions, such as protein synthesis, when provided with the necessary
    precursors.

    Cell Fusion

    Formation of a cell hybrid accomplished by fusing two or more cells from
    different sources.  Hybridomas result from the fusion of an
    antibody-producing cell with a tumor cell.

    Centromere

    A constricted region of a chromosome that includes the site of attachment
    to the mitotic or meiotic spindle.

    Chromosome (eukaryotic)

    A discrete unit of the genome carrying many genes, consisting of proteins
    and a very long molecule of DNA.

    Clone

    Describes a large number of cells or molecules identical to a single
    ancestral cell or molecule.

    Codon

    A group of three nucleotides that codes for an amino acid.

    Compatibility group

    A group of plasmids that contains members unable to coexist in the same
    bacterial cell.

    Concatemer of DNA

    Consists of a series of unit genomes repeated in tandem.

    Concatenated Circles

    Circles of DNA are interlocked like rings in a chain.

    Consensus sequence is an idealized sequence in which each position
    represents the base most often found when many actual sequences are
    compared.

    Constitutive genes

    Genes expressed as a function of the interaction of RNA polymerase with the
    promotor, without additional regulation; sometimes called household genes
    in the context of describing functions expressed in all cells at a low
    level.

    Corepressor

    A small molecule that triggers repression of transcription by bonding to a
    regulator protein.

    Cosmids

    Plasmids into which phage lambda cos sites have been inserted; as a result,
    the plasmid DNA can be packaged in vitro in the phage coat.

    Crossing-over

    Exchange of genetic material between chromosomes that pair during meiosis
    (homologous chromosomes).

    Cyclic AMP

    A molecule of AMP in which the phosphate group is joined to both 3' and 5'
    positions of the ribose; its binding activates the CAP, a positive
    regulator of procaryotic transcription.

    Depressed state

    The equivalent to induced when describing the normal state of a gene; it
    has the same meaning as constitutive in describing the effect of mutation.

    Endonucleases

    Cleaves bonds within a nucleic acid chain; they may be specific for RNA or
    for single-stranded or double-stranded DNA.

    Episome

    A plasmid able to integrate into bacterial DNA; a circular gene fragment.

    Exon

    Any segment of an interrupted gene that is represented in the mature RNA
    product.

    Exonucleases

    Cleave nucleotides one of a time from the end of a polynucleotide chain;
    they may be specific for either the 5' or 3' end of DNA or RNA.

    Extranuclear genes

    Genes that reside in organelles such as mitochondria or chloroplasts
    outside the nucleus.

    Gene (cistron)

    The segment of DNA that is involved in producing a polypeptide chain; it
    includes regions preceding and following the coding region as well as
    intervening sequences (introns) between individual coding segments (exons).

    Genetic Engineering

    Production of a nonrandom change in a genome by addition, deletion,
    substitution or manipulation of the genetic material.

    Genetically engineered cell Includes cells which are the product of
    recombinant DNA techniques, hybrid and fused cells and cells which have had
    genetic elements altered through use of a virus or phage or other technique
    of introduction of exogenous DNA.

    Genome

    All the genes of an organism or individual.

    Grunstein-Hogness assay

    Colony hybridization procedure for identification of plasmid clones (colony
    DNAs are transferred to a filter and hybridized with a probe).

    Helper virus

    A virus which provides functions absent from a detective virus, enabling
    the latter to complete the infective cycle during a mixed infection.

    Heteroduplex

    DNA molecule, the two strands of which come from different individuals so
    that there may be some base pairs or blocks of base pairs that do not match.

    Hogness box (TATA BOX)

    The hypothesized eukaryotic RNA polymerase II promoter analogous to the
    Pribnow box.

    Housekeeping (constitutive) genes

    Genes theoretically expressed in all cells because they provide basic
    functions needed for sustenance of all cell types.

    Hybridization (Molecular)

    The pairing of complementary RNA and DNA strands to give an RNA-DAN strands
    to give and RNA-DNA hybrid.

    Hybridoma

    The cell line produced by fusing a myeloma cell with alymphocycte; it
    continues indefinitely to express the immunologlobulins of both parents.

    Incompatibility

    The inability of certain bacterial plasmids to coexist in the same cell.

    Inducer

    A small molecule that triggers gene transcription by binding to a regulator
    protein.

    Induction

    Refers to the ability of bactera (or yeast) to synthesize certain enzymes
    only when their substrates are present; applied to gene expression, refers
    to switching on transcription as a result of interaction of the inducer
    with the regulator protein.

    Induction of prophage

    Describes the excision from the host genome and entry into the lytic
    (infective) cycle as a result of destruction of the lysogenic repressor.

    Initiation codon (AUG; sometimes GUG)

    Codes for the first amino acid in protein sequences.

    Insertion sequence (IS)

    A small bacterial transposon carrying only the genetic functions involved
    in transposition.

    Intercistronic region

    The distance between the termination codon of one gene and the initiation
    condon of the next gene in a polycistronic transcription unit.

    Intron or Intervening sequence is a segment of DNA that is transcribed, but
    is removed from within the transcript by splicing together the sequences
    (exons) on either side of it; a portion of a gene that is transcribed but
    does not appear in the final mRNA transcript.

    Inverted repeats

    Two copies of the same sequence of DNA repeated in opposite orientation on
    the same molecule.  Adjacent inverted repeats constitute a palindrome.

    Jumping genes

    Genes associated with transposable elements.

    Kb

    An abbreviation for 1000 base pairs of DNA or 1000 bases of RNA or 1000
    bases of single stranded DNA.

    Klenow Fragment

    A fragment of DNA polymerase which still polymerizes nucleotides into DNA,
    but lacks one of its exonuclease activities.

    Lac operon

    An operon in Escherichia coil that codes for three genes involved in the
    metabolism of lactose.

    Library

    A collection of cloned fragments of DNA, which together represent an entire
    genome.

    Ligase

    DNA ligase catalyzes the formation of a phosphodiester bond at the site of
    a single-strand break in duplex DNA; RNA can also act as a substrate to
    some extent.

    Lysogeny

    Describes the ability of a phage to survive in a bacterium as a stable
    prophage component of the bacterial genome.

    micro-organism

    For purposes of this class includes bacteria, fungi (including yeast),
    actinomycetales, unicellular algae, and protoza.

    Monocistronic mRNA

    Messenger RNA that codes for a single polypeptide.

    Nick

    In duplex DNA is the absence of a phosphodiester bond between two adjacent
    nucleotides on one strand.

    Nick translation

    Describes the ability of E. coil DNA polymerase I to use a nick as a
    starting point from which one strand of a duplex DNA can be degraded and
    replaced by resynthesis of new material; is used to introduce radioactively
    labeled nucleotides into DNA in vitro.

    Nonsense codon

    One of three triplets (UAG, UAA, UGA) that cause termination of protein
    synthesis. (UAG is known as amber; UAA as ochre.)

    Operator

    A region of DNA that interacts with a repressor protein to control the
    expression of an adjacent gene or group of genes.

    Operon

    A gene unit consisting of one or more genes that specify a polypeptide and
    an "operator" that regulates the transcription of the structural gene; the
    regulator and the coding genes are adjacent on the DNA molecule.

    Palindrome

    Describes a sequence of DNA that is the same when one strand is read left
    to right or the other is read right to left; consists of adjacent inverted
    repeats.

    Peiotropic gene

    A gene that affects more than one apparently unrelated characteristic of
    the phenotype.

    Polycistronic

    mRNA that includes coding regions representing more than one gene.

    Plasmid

    An autonomously replicating circular extrachromosomal DNA element.  Carries
    a few genes, among which are resistance to various antibiotics; useful as
    cloning vehicles.

    Polymerase

    Enzyme that catalyzes the assembly of nucleotides into RNA and of
    deoxynucleotides into DNA.

    Pribnow box

    The consensus sequence TATAATG centered about 10 bp before the startpoint
    of bacterial genes.  It is a part of the promoter and is important in
    binding RNA polymerase.

    Primer

    A short sequence (often of RNA) that is paired with one strand of DNA  and
    provides a free 3' -OH end at which a DNA polymerase starts synthesis of a
    deoxyribonucleotide chain.

    Promoter

    DNA sequence at which RNA polymerase binds, and then initiates
    transcription.

    Prophage

    A phage genome covalently integrated as a linear part of the bacterial
    chromosome.

    Recombination

    A specialized merging of DNA which results in inheritable traits not found
    in the parental strain of the host cell.

    Regulatory gene

    A gene whose product is involved in the regulation of another gene, such as
    a repressor gene.

    Replicatable biological units (RBU) Biological materials that are capable
    of producing substantially identical copies in the proper conditions.
    Included are micro-organisms, cell lines (including fused or hybrid cell
    lines), animal virus, bacteriophage and plasmids.

    Repressor

    A protein molecule that binds to an operator to block transcription of a
    gene.

    Reverse transcription

    Synthesis of DNA on an RNA template accomplished by use of the enzyme
    reverse transcriptase.

    Selection

    Describes the use of particular conditions to allow survival only of cells
    with a particular phenotype.

    Shotgun experiment

    The cloning of an entire genome in the form of randomly generated fragments.

    Structural gene

    A gene that codes for an RNA or a protein product other than a regulator.

    Transcription

    Synthesis of RNA on a DNA template.

    Transduction

    The transfer of a bacterial gene from one bacterium to another by a phage;
    the phage, carrying host genes as well as its own genes, is called a
    transducing phage; the transfer of information from one cell to another
    medicated by viruses.

    Transfection of eucaryotic cells

    The acquisition of new genetic markers by incorporation of added DNA.
    Transfection is the transfer of genetic information to a cell using
    isolated DNA or RNA.

    Transformation of bacteria

    The acquisition of new genetic material by incorporation of exogenous DNA.

    Transformation of eucaryotic cells

    The conversion of a cell to state of unrestrained growth in culture,
    resembling or identical with tumorigenic condition.

    Translation

    Synthesis of protein on a messenger RNA template.

    Vector

    DNA or RNA which can direct its own replication within a host cell, and to
    which other DNA molecules can be attached and amplified; it serves as a
    means for introduction of exogenous nucleic acid sequences into a cell.

    Viruses

    Infectious agents which are obligate parasites; they can only replicate and
    multiply within a host cell; they consist of DNA or RNA sometimes contained
    in a protein capsid.


CLS 935/1
TXT OBTAINING THE DESIRED GENE; DNA, RNA, PER SE, AND THE MODIFICATION THEREOF
    OTHER THAN VECTOR MODIFICATION:

    Subject matter under the class definition directed to (1) obtaining a
    desired DNA or RNA sequence by chemical or biochemical and/or physical
    means and (2) to the chemical or biochemical modification of a DNA or RNA
    and (3) to the isolation or purification DNA or RNA.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented   subclasses are intended to provide
    for the synthesis or isolation of gene or gene fragment for insertion into
    a cloning or expression vector or a cell or protoplast.

    (2)     Note.  The subject matter of this area is restricted to the
    chemistry of Adenine, Thymine, Guanine, Uracil, Cytosine, or Inosine
    containing sequences.

    (3)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses provide for double stranded
    DNA (ds DNA) and single stranded DNA (ss DNA) as well as single and double
    stranded RNA and DNA-RNA hybrids.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    23,     for methods of inserting a gene into a vector and subclass 24 for
    virus, cosmid and plasmid vectors.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 91.1+
    for processes of biosynthesis of RNA and DNA and subclass 270 for a process
    of liberating, separating and purifying nucleic acid from an intact or
    disrupted cell by means of a micro-organism or enzyme.  Class 435 will
    provide for organized forms of RNA and DNA such as operons, ribosomal,
    messenger and transfer RNAs; subclass 85 for enzymatic or microbial
    production of an N-Glycoside and particularly subclass 88+ for production
    of nucleotides and subclasses 91.1+ for production of a polynucleotide such
    as RNA or DNA; subclass 172.3 for the methods and materials of recombinant
    DNA technology.

    536,    Organic Compounds, subclasses 22.1+ for RNA and DNA compounds, per
    se, methods of chemcial synthesis of RNA and DNA compounds and methods of
    physical separation or purification of DNA and RNA.  Organized forms of DNA
    and RNA such as operons, ribosomal RNA, messenger RNA, and transfer RNA are
    provided for in Class 435 and a detailed search for this subject matter is
    provided for in Class 935.


CLS 935/2
TXT DNA-RNA hybrid:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 directed to DNA hydrogen-bonded to RNA and
    to covalently bonded molecules containing both DNA and RNA.


CLS 935/3
TXT RNA:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 directed to the synthesis, modification,
    isolation or purification of ribonucleic acid sequences and the product of
    such processes.

    (1)     Note.  The RNA provided for herein includes messenger RNA (mRNA),
    transfer RNA (tRNA), ribosomal RNA (rRNA) and heterogeneous nuclear RNA
    (hnRNA).


CLS 935/4
TXT RNA:

    Subject matter under subclass 3 in which the ribonucleic acid sequence
    functions as messenger RNA or is claimed or disclosed as part of a
    messenger RNA sequence.


CLS 935/5
TXT  2-100 nucleotides in length e.g., t-RNA, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 3 in which the ribonucleic acid sequence is
    from 2 to 100 bases long.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is intended to provide for transfer RNA and
    methods of isolating it or modifying its structure.


CLS 935/6
TXT DNA e.g., regulatory sequences etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 directed to the synthesis, modification or
    purification of deoxyribonucleic acid sequences and the products of such
    processes.


CLS 935/7
TXT Homopolymeric e.g., poly d (A) sequences, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 in which the deoxyribonucleic acid sequence
    is composed of repeating units of the same nucleotide base.


CLS 935/8
TXT  12-75 nucleotides in length, e.g., primer, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 in which the nucleotide of interest is
    composed of 12 to 75 bases.


CLS 935/9
TXT Structural gene sequence:

    Subject matter under subclass 6 in which the DNA sequence codes for the
    production of the amino acid sequence of a polypeptide.


CLS 935/10
TXT Modified structural gene e.g., nonnaturally occuring sequence, etc:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 in which the structural gene is not
    homologous with a gene isolated from a plant, animal or micro-organism.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass would provide for genes such as a hybrid
    polypeptide gene prepared by combining parts of gene sequences coding for
    all or part of other different polypeptides.


CLS 935/11
TXT Polypeptide:

    Subject matter under subclass 9 in which the structural gene codes for
    production of a polypeptide of two or more amino acid residues.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, subclasses 112+ provides for the
    peptide or protein products of a genetically engineered microoganism
    including antibodies, per se, and the purification of such products by
    physical or chemical methods.


CLS 935/12
TXT Antigenic material:

    Subject matter under subclass 11 in which the polypeptide is identified as
    an antigen.


CLS 935/13
TXT Hormone e.g., human growth factor, insulin, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 11 in which the structural gene codes for the
    production of a plant or animal hormone.


CLS 935/14
TXT Enzyme:

    Subject matter under subclass 11 in which the structural gene sequence
    codes for the production of an enzyme.


CLS 935/15
TXT Antibody:

    Subject matter under subclass 11 in which the structural gene codes for the
    production of an antibody.


CLS 935/16
TXT Methods of producing DNA or RNA other than by expression vectors e.g.,
    culture of cells high in RNA, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 directed to methods of producing DNA or RNA
    by the production and use of a cloning vector or by chemical synthesis.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein would be chemical synthesis such as the
    phosophodiester method.


CLS 935/17
TXT Cell free production:

    Subject matter under subclass 16 in which nucleotide sequences are produced
    in the absence of cells.

    (1)     Note.  The use of a cell free transcription system would be
    provided in this subclass.


CLS 935/18
TXT cDNA synthesis:

    Subject matter under subclass 17 in which the nucleotide produced is
    complementary DNA to a template RNA starting material.


CLS 935/19
TXT Isolation or purification of DNA or RNA:

    Subject matter under subclass 1 directed to the isolation or purification
    of preexisting DNA or RNA by chemical or physical means.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    204,    Chemistry:  Electrical and Wave Energy, subclasses 456+ for gel
    electrophoresis.

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, provides for the liberation and
    purification by chemical or physical means of compounds and extracts
    falling within the class definition of Class 260.  Generally, the physical
    processes included are of two types (1) a purification process prior or
    subsequent to a chemical reaction producing a 260 product (2) a
    purification process directed to the purification of a 260 compound by a
    combination of physical separation techniques the classes for which do not
    provide for or exclude the combination claimed.  Chemical purification
    processes are generally provided for with each product produced.


CLS 935/20
TXT RNA:

    Subject matter under subclass 19 directed to the isolation or purification
    or RNA.


CLS 935/21
TXT mRNA:

    Subject matter under subclass 20 in which the RNA is messenger RNA.


CLS 935/22
TXT VECTORS AND METHODS OF MODIFYING VECTORS:

    Subject matter under the class definition directed to (1) microscopic
    agents for the introduction of foreign nucleic acid sequences into cells
    and (2) methods of forming or modifying such agents.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses include plasmids, cosmids
    bacteriophages, and virus per se and methods of modifying the same when
    used to introduce foreign genetic material into a cell.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular and Microbiology, subclasses 91.4+ for
    modification or preparation of a recombinant DNA vector; subclass 172.3 for
    the methods and materials of recombinant DNA technology; subclass 320.1,
    for  vector, per se, e.g., plasmid, hybird plasmid, cosmid, viral vector,
    bacteriophage vector, etc.


CLS 935/23
TXT Inserting and gene into a vector to form a recombinant vector i.e.,
    cleavage and ligation:

    Subject matter under subclass 22 including the covalent attachment of a
    exogenous gene sequence to the nucleic acid sequence of or a vector.

    (1)     Note.  Typically the patents in this subclass use a restriction
    endonuclease, an enzyme that recognizes a specific base sequence in a
    double stranded DNA molecule and cleaves the DNA generating 3'-OH and 5'-P
    termini. The restriction endonuclease provided for herein are usually type
    II which cleaves in or close to the recognition site.


CLS 935/24
TXT Vector utilized, e.g., episomes, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 23 including a vector, per se, i.e., a
    nonchromosomal nuclei acid sequence capable of directing its own
    replication within a host cell and capable of carrying a segment of
    exogenous nucleic acid.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    55,     for methods of introducing the vector into the host cell.


CLS 935/25
TXT Plant virus:

    Subject matter under subclass 24 in which the vector is a plant virus.


CLS 935/26
TXT Cosmid:

    Subject matter under subclass 24 in which the vector is a plasmid carrying
    the ligated cohesive ends (cos) of bateriophage which permit in vitro
    packaging.


CLS 935/27
TXT Plasmid:

    Subject matter under subclass 24 in which the vector is an extrachromosomal
    genetic element consisting of a closed circular DNA molecule.

    (1)     Note.  The plasmids provided for herein will usually carry one or
    more selectable markers to allow identification of transformants and
    possess a recongnition site for one or more restriction enzymes located in
    the genes coding for the selectable markers and be capable of introducing
    exogenous DNA into cells.


CLS 935/28
TXT Yeast:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 in which the plasmid is capable for
    replicating in or tranforming yeast.


CLS 935/29
TXT Procaryotic:

    Subject matter under subclass 27 in which the plasmid is one capable of
    replicating in or transforming a cell having a single chromosome.


CLS 935/30
TXT Plant:

    Subject matter under subclass 30 in which the plasmid is one capable or
    replicating in or transforming a plant cell.

    (1)     Note.  It should be noted that the scientific and legal definitions
    of plant are not coterminous.  See section II, D, supra.  When used in the
    schedule and definitions of this class, plant is to be taken in the
    scientific sense.


CLS 935/31
TXT Bacteriophage:

    Subject matter under subclass 24 in which the vector is a single stranded
    or double stranded DNA bacterial virus or single or double stranded RNA
    bacterial virus.

    (1)     Note.  The primary example of the subject matter provided for
    herein is bacteriophage lambda and vectors derived therefrom.  Bacteriphage
    lambda is a double stranded DNA virus with a genome size of approximately
    50 kb.

    (2)     Note.  A single stranded DNA bacteriphage would be provided for in
    this subclass.  Single-stranded DNA cloning vehicles are currently used
    chiefly as sources of templates for sequencing by the Sanger
    dideoxy-sequencing, chain-termination technique and as sources of
    strand-specific probes for nucleic acid hybridization.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclass 94 for
    the sequencing of DNA and Class 435, subclass 6 for the use of ss DNA in a
    hybrid binding test when a micro-organism or enzyme is involved in the test.


CLS 935/32
TXT Animal virus:

    Subject matter under subclass 24 in which the vector comprises a single or
    double stranded DNA or RNA animal virus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclass 199.1
    for an antigenic composition containing a recombinant virus which encodes
    one or more heterologous proteins or fragments thereof and subclass 93.6
    for a composition containing a live virus.

    435,    Chemistry: Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 235.1+
    for virus or bacteriophage, compositions containing virus or bacteriophage,
    culture or purification thereof, or inactivation or attenuation thereof.


CLS 935/33
TXT METHODS OF ENHANCING OR DIMISHING EXPRESSION:

    Subject matter under the class definition directed to processes of
    achieving the maximum production of the desired translation product of a
    genetically engineered cell or minimizing the production of the undesired
    products of the cell.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 172.3 for
    the methods and materials of recombinant DNA technology; subclasses 88+ for
    the enzymatic or microbial production of peptides or proteins, particularly
    subclass 70 for processes of production of polypeptides of known sequence
    and subclass 106 for the process of production of amino acids.


CLS 935/34
TXT Eucaryotic cell:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 in which the cell expressing the genetic
    information contains a nucleus composed of multiple chromosomes surrounded
    by a membrane.

    (1)     Note.  Eucaryotic cells include the cells of all higher organisms
    in both plant and animal kingdoms as well as fungi, protozoa and most algae.


CLS 935/35
TXT Plant cell:

    Subject matter under subclass 34 in which expression is modified in a plant
    cell.

    (1)     Note.  The expression may be optimized in a plant cell culture or
    as a process in a mature plant.

    (2)     Note.  For a directory of the disposition of subject matter
    relating to claiming to plants, per se, see section II, D, of the headnotes
    of this class.

    (3)     Note.  It should be noted that the scientific and legal definitions
    of plant are not coterminous.  See section II, D, supra.  When used in the
    schedule and definitions of this class plant is to be taken in the
    scientific sense.


CLS 935/36
TXT Transcription:

    Subject matter under subclass 34 in which the transfer of genetic
    information from DNA to messenger RNA by DNA-directed RNA polymerase is
    modified.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass will provide for patents related to eukaryotic
    promoters and ribosome inding site modifications.


CLS 935/37
TXT Yeast cell:

    Subject matter under subclass 34 in which the cell is a fungus that
    reproduces by budding and has either short or nonexistent mycelia.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 254.2+
    for subject matter involving transformed yeast, including processes and
    compositions for their propagation, etc.


CLS 935/38
TXT Procaryotic cell:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 in which the cell expressing the genetic
    information is a simple cell having no nuclear membrane, the cell membrane
    is usually surrounded by a rigid cell wall and contains only a single
    chromosome.

    (1)     Note.  Procaryotes include bacteria and eubacteria, the blue green
    algae.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 252.3+
    for subject matter involving transformed bacteria including processes and
    compositions for their propagation, etc., and 257.1+ for subject matter
    involving transformed prokaryotic algae including processes and
    compositions for their propagation, etc.


CLS 935/39
TXT Transcription:

    Subject matter under 38 in which the transfer of genetic information from
    DNA to messenger RNA by DNA-directed RNA polymerase is modified.


CLS 935/40
TXT Operon selection:

    Subject matter under subclass 39 in which the structural gene, regulator
    gene or genes or control elements of the operon are modified to enhance or
    diminish expression.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass will provide for any process of optimizing the
    cellular feedback system under the control of an operator gene in which a
    structural gene transcribes its message in the form of mRNA.


CLS 935/41
TXT Promoter, e.g., portable promoters, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 40 in which the region of DNA involved in
    binding RNA polymerase to initiate transcription is altered or substituted.


CLS 935/42
TXT Gene dosage modification e.g., copy number amplification, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 in which a process is carried out to
    increase or decrease the number of times a structural gene of interest
    appears in a cell population.

    (1)     Note.  The most common process is the amplification of exogenous
    DNA in a cell population by selection for resistance to gradually
    increasing doses of a toxic reagent resulting in a cell population with an
    increased copy number of the resistance gene.


CLS 935/43
TXT Inducible e.g., temperature inducible, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 42 in which the gene dosage modification is
    brought about by altering the physical or chemical surroundings of the cell
    carrying the desired gene.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass includes for example the control of plasmid
    copy number by change in temperature.


CLS 935/44
TXT Translation:

    Subject matter under subclass 38 in which the synthesis of a protein or
    peptide by a cell on the mRNA template is modified.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass would provide for matching the codon frequency
    of a synthetic gene to the condon frequency of a particular host.


CLS 935/45
TXT Ribosome binding site:

    Subject matter under subclass 44 in which the site of mRNA at which
    ribosomes initiate protein synthesis is modified or the position of the
    binding site on the mRNA is changed to optimize expression.


CLS 935/46
TXT Initiation:

    Subject matter under subclass 44 in which the initiation of peptide or
    protein synthesis is modified.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass will provide for alteration in the physical or
    chemical surroundings of the cell to initiate peptide or protein synthesis
    as well as modification involving initiation factors or the formation of an
    initiation complex by the cell.


CLS 935/47
TXT Fused peptide or protein:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 in which a DNA sequence coding for at
    least portions of two or more different polypeptides directs expression of
    a single polypeptide chain.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is intended to provide for the expression of
    fused genes such as the N terminal portion of the Beta-glactosidase Z gene
    fused to the somatosatin gene.


CLS 935/48
TXT Signal peptide e.g., secretion, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 47 in which the fused peptide or protein is a
    peptide or protein that initiates or permits some cellular activity.


CLS 935/49
TXT Post translational modification:

    Subject matter under subclass 33 which includes addition to, removal of or
    rearrangement of the peptide or protein products in the cell.

    (1)     Note.  The modifications include carboxylation, hydroxylation,
    acetylation, phosphorylation, methylation, glycosylation,
    oxydation-reduction, degradation, lysis, peptide bond formation and changes
    in molecular weight and electrophoretic mobility.


CLS 935/50
TXT Glycosylation:

    Subject matter under subclass 49 in which the post translational
    modification is the addition of saccharide moieties.


CLS 935/51
TXT Peptide bond cleavage:

    Subject matter under subclass 49 in which the post translational
    modification is the cleavage of a peptide bond.


CLS 935/52
TXT METHODS OF INTRODUCING A GENE INTO A CELL E.G., TRANSFORMATION,
    TRANSFECTION, ETC.:

    Subject matter under the class definition for the physical introduction of
    an exogenous gene into the cytoplasm of a cell.

    (1)     Note.  Physical introduction includes such expedients as using a
    calcium chloride or phosphate solution to cause DNA uptake by cells.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 172.3 for
    the methods and materials of recombinant DNA technology.


CLS 935/53
TXT Microinjection:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 in which exogenous DNA is introduced into
    the cytoplasm of a cell by physical piercing of the cell wall and/or
    nuclear membrane.


CLS 935/54
TXT Microencapsulation e.g., liposome, vesicle, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 in which the method of introduction of
    exogenous DNA into a cell includes enveloping the DNA in a substance which
    permits or encourages passage of the DNA through the cell wall and nuclear
    membrane.


CLS 935/55
TXT Using vector e.g., plasmid etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 52 in which exogenous DNA or RNA is
    introduced into a cell as part of a larger nonchromosomal DNA or RNA
    sequence capable of directing its own replication within the cell.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass is intended to provide for the introduction of
    plasmids, phages or virus into a cell for either cloning or expression.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    24,     for methods of construction vectors and for vectors, per se.


CLS 935/56
TXT Plasmid:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 in which the vector is an
    extra-chromosomal genetic element consisting of a covalently closed
    circular DNA molecule (cccDNA).

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    27,     for plasmids, per se, and methods modifying plasmids.


CLS 935/57
TXT Virus:

    Subject matter under subclass 55 in which the vector is a virus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    25,     for a plant virus, per se, or methods of modifying a plant virus.

    32,     for an animal virus, per se, and methods of modifying animal virus.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclass 199.1
    for an antigenic composition containing a recombinant virus which encodes
    one or more heterologous proteins or fragments thereof and subclass 93.6
    for a composition containing a live virus.

    435,    Chemistry: Molecular and Microbiology, subclasses 235.1+ for virus
    or bacteriophage, compositions containing virus or bacteriophage, culture
    or purification thereof, or inactivation or attenuation thereof.


CLS 935/58
TXT Phage e.g., phage lambda etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 58 in which the vector is a single or double
    stranded DNA bacterial virus or single or double stranded RNA bacterial
    virus.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    26,     for a cosmid, per se, or methods of modifying cosmids.

    31,     for claims to a phage, per se, and methods of modifying phages.


CLS 935/59
TXT METHOD OF USE OF GENETICALLY ENGINEERED CELLS OTHER THAN HYBRID OR FUSED
    CELLS E.G., OIL SPILL CLEANUP, ETC.:

    Subject matter under the class definition including a method of use of the
    recombinant gene containing cell.

    (1)     Note.  See section II of the headnotes of this class for a guide to
    the original classification of the patents found in this and the indented
    subclasses.  This and the indented subclasses will provide for the use of a
    recombinant cell even absent claims to the gene insertion technique.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    106,    for methods of use of fused or hybrid cells.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    8,      Bleaching and Dyeing; Fluid Treatment and Chemical Modification of
    Textiles and Fibers, for a dyeing process employing a micro-organism;
    subclasses 94.1+ for processes of tanning hides or skins by use of a
    micro-organism with subsequent tanning of the hides or skins or subsequent
    operations that are preliminary and peculiar to tanning of hides or skins
    or peculiar to making leather.  Class 435, subclass 265 for a fermentation
    process, per se, of treating a hide or skin, e.g., depilating, batting, etc.

    75,     Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use Therein,
    Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate
    Mixtures, subclasses 1+ particularly subclass 5 for a process of
    beneficiating metal using a micro-organism.

    166,    Wells appropriate subclasses for processes and apparatus for
    treating oil or an oil bearing mineral with a micro-organism while in the
    ground.

    210,    Liquid Purification or Separation, subclasses 601+ for processes of
    treatment of liquid by a living organism, subclass 635 for a process of gel
    chromatography, subclasses 656+ for a process of chromatography and cross
    reference art collection 906 providing for separating of phosphorous
    containing materials, 905 providing for protein separation and 922
    providing for an oil spill cleanup and Digest 32 for biological removal of
    fluoride.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 41+ for
    the use of a micro-organism, enzyme, tissue or cell culture to produce a
    chemical product; subclass 262 for processes utilizing a micro-organism or
    enzyme to liberate, separate or purify a preexisting compound or
    composition. Subclasses 262 and the indented subclasses provide a
    comprehensive listing of related separation technologies.


CLS 935/60
TXT To produce an identified chemical product e.g., amino acid, etc.:

    Process under subclass 59 of use of a genetically engineered cell to
    produce a product of known chemical structure.

    (1)     Note.  See section II of the headnotes of this class for a
    directory of the disposition of the products of genetically engineered
    cells.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    260,    Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, subclasses 112+ provides for the
    peptide or protein products of a genetically engineered micro-organism
    including antibodies, per se, and the purification of such products by
    physical or chemical methods.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular  Biology and Microbiology, subclass 85 for
    enzymatic or microbial production of an N-Glycoside and particularly
    subclasses 88+ for production of nucleotides and subclasses 91.1+ for
    production of a polynulceotide such as RNA or DNA, subclasses 68.1+ for the
    enzymatic or microbial production of polypeptides of known sequence and
    subclass 106 for the process of production of amino acids.


CLS 935/61
TXT Yield optimization:

    Processes under subclass 60 including a step which results in increased
    production of a desired chemical product or reduces production of an
    undesired product.

    (1)     Note.  Scale up of processes involving the regulation of
    cultivation conditions and the modification of cultivation conditions are
    provided for in this subclass.


CLS 935/62
TXT Control of genetic disease or defects by use of added gene e.g., gene
    therapy, etc.:

    Processes under subclass 59 in which a condition caused by a genetic defect
    is treated by alteration of the defective gene structure.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    128,    subclass 1 will provide for a process including application of the
    techniques of genetic engineering and significant steps of surgery.  If the
    claim is to apparatus for use in or on the body classification will be on
    the basis of the device claimed.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    604,    Surgery, subclass 55 will provide for a method of embryo
    transplantation.


CLS 935/63
TXT Use in animal husbandry:

    Processes under subclass 59 of the use of genetically engineered cells or
    vectors in the breeding or raising of animals.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for processes of altering the genetic
    structure of an animal or for alteration of the genetic structure of the
    intestinal flora of the animal.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    119,    Animal Husbandry, which provides for processes and apparatus for
    the propagation and care of living multicellular animals.

    604,    Surgery, subclass 55 will provide for a method of embryo
    transplantation.


CLS 935/64
TXT Use in agriculture:

    Processes under subclass 59 of use of genetically engineered cells or
    vectors in plant husbandry.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for alterations to a plant's genetic
    structure a well as alteration of the genetic structure of the symbiotic
    micro-organisms associated with plant growth.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    71,     Chemistry:  Fertilizers, for the production of substances having a
    nutrient  action on plant growth and the product of such processes
    including methods of utilizing micro-organisms to produce a fertilizer,
    e.g., composting as well as the micro-organism containing fertilizer so
    produced.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology for processes of
    genetically altering plants, plant breeding by chromosime multiplcation and
    processes of nucleic acid manipulation that result in a new whole plant or
    part of thereof. Class 435 provides for the apparatus used in such
    processes.

    504,    Plant Protecting and Regulating Compositions, for the production of
    substances having a stimulating, inhibiting, or regulating action on plant
    growth and the products of such processes including methods of utilizing
    micro-organisms to produce plant growth regulators.


CLS 935/65
TXT Vaccine production:

    Processes under subclass 59 of use of genetically engineered cells in the
    production of antigenic compositions for the prevention of disease.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses
    184.1+ for vaccines made using genetically-engineered cells and subclass
    93.6 for a composition containing a live virus.

    435,    Chemistry: Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 235.1+
    for virus or bacteriophage, compositions containing virus or bacteriophage,
    culture or purification thereof, or inactivation or attenuation thereof.


CLS 935/66
TXT CELLS CONTAINING A VECTOR AND/OR EXOGENOUS GENE PER SE; PROPAGATION
    THEREOF; OTHER MEMBRANE ENCAPSULATED DNA E.G., PROTOPLASTS, ETC.:

    Subject matter under the class definition including micro-organisms
    containing a vector or exogenous gene, compositions containing such
    micro-organisms, processes of propagation of such micro-organisms and
    materials for the propagation of such micro-organisms and membrane
    encapsulated DNA.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for DNA encapsulated within
    phospholipid vesicles (liposomes) as well as within protoplasts.

    (2)     Note.  The subject matter of subclass 66 through 75 is left without
    formal definition in favor of the many standard reference works on cell
    structure and function which should be considered dispositive of the
    subject matter.

    (3)     Note.  It should be noted that the scientific and legal definitions
    of plant are not coterminous.  See section II, D, supra.  When used in the
    schedule and definitions of this class plant is to be taken in the
    scientific sense.


CLS 935/67
TXT Plant cells:

    Subject matter under subclass 66 including plant cells containing a vector
    or exogenous gene, compositions containing such cells, processes of
    propagation of such cells and materials for the progagation of such cells.


CLS 935/68
TXT Fungal cells:

    Subject matter under subclass 66 including micro-organisms containing a
    vector or exogenous gene, compositions containing such micro-organisms,
    processes of propagation of such micro-organisms and materials for the
    propagation of such micro-organisms and membrane encapsulated DNA.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 254.11+
    for subject matter involving transformed fungi, including processes and
    compositions for their propagation, etc.


CLS 935/69
TXT Yeast cells:

    Subject matter under subclass 66 including micro-organisms containing a
    vector or exogenous gene, compositions containing such micro-organisms,
    processes of propagation of such micro-organisms and materials for the
    propagation of such micro-organisms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 254.2+
    for subject matter involving transformed yeast, including processes and
    compositions for their propagation, etc.


CLS 935/70
TXT Animal cells:

    Subject matter under subclass 66 including animals cells containing a
    vector or exogenous gene, compositions containing such cells, processes of
    propagation of such cells and materials for the propagation of such cells.


CLS 935/71
TXT Human cells:

    Subject matter under subclass 70 including human cells containing a vector
    or exogenous gene, compositions containing such cells, processes of
    propagation of such cells and materials for the propagation of such cells.


CLS 935/72
TXT Bacteria:

    Subject matter under subclass 66 including micro-organisms containing a
    vector or exogenous gene, compositions containing such micro-organisms,
    processes of propagation of such micro-organisms and materials for the
    propagation of such micro-organisms.


CLS 935/73
TXT Escherichia:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 including micro-organisms containing a
    vector or exogenous gene, compositions containing such micro-organisms,
    processes of propagation of such micro-organisms and materials for the
    propagation of such micro-organisms.


CLS 935/74
TXT Bacillus:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 including micro-organism containing a
    vector or exoenous gene, compositions containing such micro-organisms,
    processes of propagation of such micro-organisms and materials for the
    propagation of such micro-organism.


CLS 935/75
TXT Streptomyces:

    Subject matter under subclass 72 including micro-organisms containing a
    vector or exogenous gene, compositions containing such micro-organisms,
    processes of propagation of such microogganisms and materials for the
    propagation of such micro-organisms.


CLS 935/76
TXT ASSAY RELATED TO GENETIC ENGINEERING:

    Processes and materials under the class definition in which there is a
    direct or indirect qualitative or quantative test or measurement of (1) the
    materials used in a process of genetic engineering (2) the effect of a
    process of genetic engineering or (3) the expression product of the
    genetically engineered micro-organism.

    (1)     Note.  Material used in a process of genetic engineering include
    DNA, RNA, vectors, micro-organisms, enzymes and substrates or media.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 9.1+
    for an in vivo antigen antibody test.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 4+ for
    measuring or testing processes involving a micro-organism or enzyme;
    subclass 6 for a test for or with a nucleic acid involving a micro-organism.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclass 94 for a
    chemical test for nucleic acids; subclass 501 for binding assays other than
    antigen antibody assays; subclass 516 for a test including a step of
    immunoelectrophoresis; and subclasses 506-548 which provide for antigen
    antibody assays.


CLS 935/77
TXT Method of analysis of nucleic acids:

    Process under subclass 76 for a qualitative or quantative analysis of
    nucleic acid by chemical, electrical or physical means.

    (1)     Note.  The typical processes provided for here will include hybrid
    binding and/or electrophoresis.

    (2)     Note.  Disposition of tests for nucleic acids.  Chemical tests for
    nucleic acids are provided for by Class 436, subclass 94; hybrid binding
    tests are provided for by Class 436, subclasses 501+ and antigen antibody
    tests by Class 436, subclasses 506 to 548; tests involving a micro-organism
    or enzyme would be provided for in Class 435, subclass 6; electrolytic
    tests by Class 205, subclasses 775+, and electrophoretic tests by Class
    204, subclasses 450+; physical tests such as chromatography would be
    provided for in Class 75, subclass 53; an in vivo test would be provided
    for in Class 424, subclasses 9.1+.


CLS 935/78
TXT Including hybridization:

    Processes under subclass 77 in which a step in the analysis involves DNA or
    RNA complement binding.


CLS 935/79
TXT Methods of selection of recombinant gene containing vector; materials
    therefor, e.g., replica plating, etc.:

    Processes or materials under subclass 76 for the selection or
    identification of cells which contain the exogenous DNA bearing vector.


CLS 935/80
TXT Gene library manipulation:

    Processes materials under subclass 79 for the production of a gene library
    or the selection of a desired gene from a gene library.


CLS 935/81
TXT Antigen antibody:

    Processes and materials under subclass 79 in which an antigen antibody
    reaction is used to identify the recombinant gene containing vector.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Composition, subclasses 9.1+
    for an in vivo antigen antibody test.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 7.1+ for
    an antigen antibody assay involving a micro-organism or using an enzyme
    e.g., enzyme immunoassay, etc.


CLS 935/82
TXT Enzyme activity:

    Processes and materials under subclass 79 in which the method of selection
    of the recombinant gene containing vector involves detection of enzyme
    activity.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 4+ for
    tests involving detection of enzyme activity.


CLS 935/83
TXT Host suicide:

    Processes or materials under subclass 79 in which particular cells in a
    culture are selected against by their loss of viability.


CLS 935/84
TXT Selection medium:

    Subject matter under subclass 79 directed to media which selects for
    recombinant gene containing cells.

    (1)     Note.  Typically the media provided for here will contain an agent
    which is lethal to cells not containing the desired DNA insert.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 34+
    which provide for the use of selective media in a test involving a
    micro-organism and the media, per se; subclasses 404+,  for animal culture
    media and subclass 431 for plant media; and subclasses 243+ providing for
    microbial culture media.


CLS 935/85
TXT GENETIC ENGINEERING APPARATUS:

    Apparatus under the class definition for use in testing, propagation or use
    of a genetically engineered micro-organism or of the materials used in the
    production and culture of the genetically engineered micro-organisms.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry: Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 283.1+
    for apparatus claimed or solely disclosed as for use with a microorganism
    or enzyme, and particularly subclasses 285.1+ for mutation or genetic
    engineering apparatus.


CLS 935/86
TXT Analytical e.g., autoradiography, etc.:

    Apparatus under subclass 85 for the quantitative or qualitative analysis of
    an intermediate or final product of a process of genetic engineering.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 287.1+
    for measuring and testing apparatus involving a microorganism or enzyme.


CLS 935/87
TXT Automated:

    Apparatus under subclass 85 in which the qualitative or quantitative test
    is performed by a self operated machine.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry: Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclass 287.3 for
    automated analysis apparatus involving a microorganism or enzyme.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclasses 42+
    for automated chemical analyzers; and subclass 808 for automated analyzers
    for antigen antibody or protein binding tests.


CLS 935/88
TXT Synthesis e.g., peptide or gene synthesizers, etc.:

    Apparatus under subclass 85 in which (1) the synthesis of a product of a
    genetically engineered cell is carried out or (2) one of the materials used
    in the process of transforming a host cell is synthesized.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66+,    for cell line or micro-organism with optimized fusing
    characteristics.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses
    185.1+ for antigenic compositions that may include antigens made by peptide
    synthesizers, subclasses 93.4+ for compositions containing whole live
    bacteria, and subclass 93.6 for a composition containing live viruses;
    subclasses 565+ for compositions containing DNA or RNA used to alter the
    genetic structure of the cells of a multicellular organism i.e., gene
    therapy with compositions containing DNA or RNA.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology or Microbiology, subclass 172.2 for
    methods and materials for the production of hybrid or fused calls.


CLS 935/89
TXT HYBRID OR FUSED CELL TECHNOLOGY; METHODS OF IMMORTALIZING CELLS E.G.,
    HYBRIDOMA ETC.:

    Subject matter under the class definition for the production, selection or
    use of cells resulting from (1) the fusion of two cells, (2) the insertion
    of the nucleus or chromosome of one cell into another or (3) the treatment
    of a cell with an immortalizing agent which results in a cell which will
    proliferate in long-term culture.

    (1)     Note.  This and the indented subclasses provide for hybridoma
    technology and methods such as transformation of human B lymphocytes with
    Epstein-Barr virus (EBV), insertion of an isolated oncogene, or chemical
    treatment resulting in a cell line capable of continuous growth in long
    term culture.

    (2)     Note.  Fusing agents, per se, should be placed in 93+ according to
    intended utility.  Original classification of such patents will be in an
    appropriate composition class e.g., 424, etc. or compound class e.g., 423,
    260, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    66+,    for cell lines or micro-organisms with optimized fusing
    characteristics.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating  Compositions, subclasses
    93.4+ for compositions containing whole live bacteria and subclass 93.6 for
    a composition containing live viruses.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology or Microbiology, subclass 172.2 for
    methods and materials for the production of hybrid or fused cells.

    514,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 44
    through 51 for compositions containing DNA or RNA used to alter the genetic
    structure of the cells of a multicellular organism, i.e., gene therapy with
    compositions containing DNA or RNA.


CLS 935/90
TXT Method of selection of the desired cell:

    Processes under subclass 89 directed to the identification of the hybrid or
    fused cells that possess the desired genetic characteristics.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass provides for assaying based on the
    quantitative production of some desired product of the fused or hybrid cell.

    (2)     Note.  This subclass will provide for processes using a negative
    selection technique in which the selection technique involves the
    elimination of cells lacking the desired properties by biocidal or
    biostatic conditions.

    (3)     Note.  The cells may be eliminated by being killed or by failure to
    grow and multiply.


CLS 935/91
TXT Of plant cells e.g., protoplasts, etc.:

    Processes under subclass 89 in which one of the fusing partners is a plant
    cell.


CLS 935/92
TXT Using positive selection technique:

    Processes under subclass 90 in which cells with the desired genotype or
    phenotype are chosen after formation by a treatment which specifically
    identifies the cell with the desired properties.


CLS 935/93
TXT Method of production of hybrid cells e.g., chromosome or genome transfer
    techniques, etc.:

    Processes under subclass 89 directed to techniques of production of a
    single cell containing the genetic material from at least two fusing
    partners.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass would provide for electrofusion and
    immortalizing treatments as well as chemical cell wall treatments to bring
    about fusion or transfer of genetic material.

    (2)     Note.  Immortalizing treatments include morphological
    transformation by virus, oncogene expression, etc.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    53,     for use of microinjection and other surgical methods of introducing
    genetic material into cells.


CLS 935/94
TXT Of plant cells:

    Processes under subclass 93 in which one of the fusing partners is a plant
    cell.

    (1)     Note.  It should be noted that the scientific and legal definitions
    of plant are not coterminous.  See section II, D, supra.  When used in the
    schedule and definitions of this class plant is to be taken in the
    scientific sense.


CLS 935/95
TXT Fused or hybrid cell per se:

    Subject matter under subclass 89 directed to the fused or hybrid cell, per
    se.


CLS 935/96
TXT Inter species hybrids:

    Subject matter under subclass 95 in which at least two partners are cells
    of different species.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass would include hybrid cells from different
    kingdoms e.g., plant cell fused with a human cell, etc., as well as
    mouse-human, mouse-rat cell hybrids.


CLS 935/97
TXT Fungi e.g., yeasts, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 95 in which one of the partners is a fungus
    cell.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 254.11+
    for subject matter involving transformed fungi and yeast.


CLS 935/98
TXT Plant cells:

    Subject matter under subclass 95 in which one of the partners is a plant
    cell.


CLS 935/99
TXT Human cell:

    Subject matter under subclass 95 in which the partners are human cells.

    (1)     Note.  Included in this subclass are cell strains, cell lines and
    primary cultures as well as fresh isolates.


CLS 935/100
TXT B lymphocyte:

    Subject matter under subclass 99 in which one of the fusing partners is a B
    lymphocyte.


CLS 935/101
TXT T lymphocyte:

    Subject matter under subclass 99 in which one of the fusing partners is a T
    lymphocyte.


CLS 935/102
TXT Animal cell:

    Subject matter under subclass 95 in which the fusing partners are obtained
    from an nonhuman animal.


CLS 935/103
TXT Murine cell e.g., mouse cell, etc.:

    Subject matter under subclass 102 in which the partners are rat or mouse
    cells.


CLS 935/104
TXT B lymphocyte:

    Subject matter under subclass 103 in which one of the partners is a B
    lymphocyte.


CLS 935/105
TXT T lymphocyte:

    Subject matter under subclass 103 in which one of the partners is a T
    lymphocyte.


CLS 935/106
TXT Method of use of the fused or hybrid cell or the product thereof:

    Processes under subclass 89 for the use of the fused or hybrid cell, or the
    use of the product produced by the fused or hybrid cell.

    (1)     Note.  The most common product produced by fused cell technology is
    a monocional antibody.

    (2)     Note.  Included herein is the use of a fused or hybrid cell to
    perform a function e.g., the biochemical transformation of compounds.

    SEARCH CLASS:

    424,    Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, subclasses 9.1+
    for an in vivo antigen antibody test.

    435,    Chemistry:  Molecular Biology and Microbiology, subclasses 41+ for
    the use of a micro-organism, enzyme, tissue or cell culture to produce a
    chemical product; subclass 262 for processes utilizing a micro-organism or
    enzyme to liberate, separate or purify a preexisting compound or
    composition. Subclass 262 and the indented subclasses provide a
    comprehensive listing of related separation technologies.

    436,    Chemistry:  Analytical and Immunological Testing, subclass 94 for a
    chemical test for nucleic acids; subclass 501 for binding assays other than
    antibody assays; subclass 516 for a test including a step of
    immunoelectrophoresis; and subclasses 506-548 which provides for antigen
    antibody assays and, subclass 548 for process of using monocional
    antibodies in a test or analysis.


CLS 935/107
TXT In vivo use of product:

    Processes under subclass 106 in which the product of the fused or hybrid
    cell is used in a living organism.


CLS 935/108
TXT In vivo e.g., cell cultivation techniques, affinity chromatography, etc.:

    Processes under subclass 106 in which the fused or hybrid cell is used in
    culture or the product of a fused or hybrid cell is so used.


CLS 935/109
TXT Production of a non-antibody product:

    Processes under subclass 108 in which the product produced is not an
    antibody.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass would provide for the use of fused or hybrid
    cells to produce peptides, proteins, hormones, etc.


CLS 935/110
TXT For use as a testing material:

    Processes under subclass 108 in which the cells or their products are
    claimed or disclosed as used in a qualitative or quantitative test.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass would provide for monocional antibodies used
    in immunoassays.


CLS 935/111
TXT MISCELLANEOUS:

    Subject matter under the class definition not provided for in any of the
    preceding subclasses.


CLS 987/
TTL ORGANIC COMPOUNDS CONTAINING A Bi, Sb, As, OR P ATOM OR CONTAINING A METAL
    ATOM OF THE 6TH TO 8TH GROUP OF THE PERIODIC SYSTEM

CLS 987/
TXT CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS

    CLASS DEFINITION

    Class 987 provides an ANCILLARY and totally OPTIONAL search for subject
    matter relating to certain types of ORGANIC COMPOUNDS found under official
    Class 532.  This class has been developed and relates to the subject matter
    in Class C07F, subgroups 9/00-19/00 of the International Patent
    Classification System (IPC).


    The subject matter of this class encompasses acyclic, carbocyclic, or
    heterocyclic compounds containing elements other than carbon, hydrogen,
    nitrogen, sulfur, selenium, tellurium, halogen, and elements of Groups I-IV
    of the Periodic System.

    THIS CLASS DOES ***NOT*** PROVIDE FOR ORGANIC COMPOUNDS RELATING TO:

    1.      Peptides, proteins, or enzymes

    2.      Sugars or derivatives thereof, nucleosides, nucleotides, nucleic
    acids, saccharides, or polysaccharides or derivatives thereof

    3.      Steroids

    4.      Macromolecular compounds

    5.      Dyes

    THE TECHNICAL SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS CLASS RELATES TO:

    1.      Organic compounds containing a heavy metal of the 6th to 8th Group
    of the Periodic System (subclasses 1-21)

    2.      Organic compounds containing Bismuth, Antimony, or Arsenic
    (subclasses 22-29)

    3.      Organic compounds containing Phosphorus (subclasses 30-368)

    The general hierarchy of the Class 532 series has not been followed and the
    above compounds include heterocyclic rings when present together with the
    required elements of this class.  As can readily be seen, this class
    provides an opportunity for searching certain types of heterocyclic
    compounds as well as certain phosphorus organic compounds in an alternative
    manner from that of Class 532.

    Class 987 is a prototypical searching area developed under the auspices of
    the Office of International Patent Classification.  In the past, search
    areas in the U.S. classification system (Classes 976, 968, 984, and 930)
    have been created utilizing the European Patent Office's (EPO)
    classification of U.S. patents into their search and retrieval system.
    Class 987 is significantly different from those other classification areas
    in that a substantial number of patents have been reviewed, a large number
    of subclasses have been rearranged or merged, and definitions have been
    written to describe the contents of each and every subclass.  In addition,
    the entire schedule has been presented in a format which utilizes the first
    place rule of classification which is the standard practice within the U.S.
    Patent Classification System (USPCS).

    The European Patent Classification System (EPCS) utilizes, for the most
    part, the skeletal outline of the International Patent Classification
    System (IPCS).  To the broad IPCS, the EPO has added additional
    classification areas and thereby has created the EPCS. These are equatable
    to alpha subclasses in the USPC.  Both the IPCS and the EPCS utilize a last
    place classification rule in C07F, which is the area of classification
    equatable to new Class 987.  The last place rule requires locating the last
    subgroup in the classification schedule which provides for the subject
    matter to be classified.  The U.S. classification system requires placement
    in the first subclass for the subject matter to be classified.  As can
    readily be seen, these are substantially different philosophies in the
    placement of documents.  The Class 987 schedule has been presented in a
    format which negates this difference and therefor does not place any undue
    burden upon the user to learn a new and different philosophy of search.

    Class 987 was created with the intention that Group 1200 of  the  United
    States  Patent  and  Office (USPTO) would soon have the capability of
    searching patents utilizing all of the enhanced aspects of the Automated
    Patent System; in particular, the aspect relating to image searching.  It
    is the belief of Classification that the addition of Class 987 to the
    searchable database can be of assistance at various times in the
    examination process.

    Although we believe that Class 987 will be of use to the examination
    process, we are fully aware that the addition of new search areas can
    create problems.  One of the most obvious questions that we have is the
    question of how examiners in the EPO place documents.  In the USPTO, we
    know that certain rules exist between classes, that rules of superiority
    apply between diverse types of subject matter (compound, method of making,
    and method of using), that rules of comprehensiveness apply between
    classes, and that all claims are classified, and unclaimed subject matter
    is cross-referenced to subclasses when it is determined to be useful.

    In Class 987, we are relying on the placement techniques of examiners in
    the EPO to locate U.S. patents.  Although we believe that EPO examiners
    follow our general rules in the compound classes, we will not be completely
    certain until Class 987 is tested and evaluated by the Corps.  We hope to
    conduct tests in concert with the Corps and will evaluate fully the
    effectiveness of Class 987.  If, at the end of the evaluation period, we
    find that Class 987 does not meet the requirements of the Corps, we will
    rethink whether we want to retain the class.

    The IPC and the EPC do not contain the types of definitions associated with
    U.S. classes.  This, in itself, does not in any manner flaw their system.
    The titles and attendant notes in the IPC are the full extent of the
    content of any subgroup.  When those tools are used together with the Guide
    to the IPC (Volume 9), all of the tools to access and retrieval are
    available.  In the creation of this class, definitions and notes have been
    written.  Many of the definitions are no more than the repeating of a
    subclass title, while in other areas the definitions are much more
    meaningful.  The advantage, of course, to any definition is that it
    hopefully conveys information that the creator of the subclass thought
    might be useful to a user of the system and that information is available
    even if the creator is no longer available.  We believe that the use of
    definitions leads to consistency of patent placement.

    Class 987 is available on the Automated Patent System (APS).  It is to be
    treated as any other class, with the proviso that it cannot accept any
    original classifications and that any search in the class is OPTIONAL.
    Patents can be added through the use of the blue slip on allowance or by
    miscellaneous transfer.  Patents can be deleted from the files in the
    manner currently in use.

    SUBJECT MATTER RELATING TO SUBCLASSES 300-304

    The subject matter in subclasses 300-304 relates to EPCS 9/02A-9/02E.  This
    is an ancillary search to subclasses 30-234 which include the subject
    matter of this search area, but where no specific subclass has been
    identified in that array.

    SUBJECT MATTER RELATING TO SUBCLASSES 350-368

    The subject matter in subclasses 350-368 which encompasses phosphorus
    containing a hetero ring containing at least one nitrogen atom and no other
    hetero atom is equivalent in scope to EPCS 9/65-9/65D3B.  The
    aforementioned area in the EPCS does not accept new patents and will be
    abolished in the future.  It has been replaced by subgroups 9/547 and
    9/553-9/6533 which equate to new subclass 49 and subclasses 67-108.
    Although the scope of subject matter is the same, it has been presented in
    a different classification scheme and therefore movement of patents from
    one area to the other is not easily done without reading the documents.
    The EPO is in the process of reclassifying those patents into their new
    reclassification scheme.

    It is apparently the policy of the EPO to maintain two searching areas as
    patents are being reclassified from an abolished to a newly created
    subgroup.  Since the abolished area is not equivalent to the newly
    established areas, it has been determined by the U.S. IPC group to
    concurrently present the two classification systems.  When the EPO has
    reclassified all of the patents in the abolished area, the U.S. IPC group
    will obtain that information and add those patents to subclasses 49 and
    67-108.  At the same time, subclasses 350-368 will be abolished.




CLS 987/1
TXT COMPOUND CONTAINS TWO OR MORE HEAVY METAL ATOMS WHICH ARE IN DIFFERENT
    GROUPS OF THE PERIODIC SYSTEM (19/00; 19/00B):Subject matter under the
    class definition wherein the compound contains at least two different heavy
    metal atoms which are in different groups of the Periodic System.

    (1)     Note.  For purposes of this subclass, the lanthanides (atomic
    numbers 57-71) are to be considered as a whole to be in one group and the
    actinides (atomic numbers 89 and above) are to be considered as a whole to
    be in a separate group.  Examples of appropriate placement in this subclass
    would be a compound that contained both Fe (Group 8) and As (Group 5) or a
    compound containing both Fe (Group 7) and any actinide or lantinide atom.

    (2)     Note.  A heavy metal is defined as a metal having a specific
    gravity greater than four.

    (3)     Note.  Excluded as heavy metals are the Group 1A and Group 2A
    metals, with the exception of Ra.  Also, excluded are Al and Sc.  Arsenic
    is considered to be a heavy metal atom in Group 5.

    (4)     Note.  See the Class 502 schedule (Catalyst, Solid Sorbent, or
    Support Therefor:  Product or Process of Making) for a grouping of metal
    atoms into the appropriate groups of the Periodic System.


CLS 987/2
TXT HEAVY METAL COMPOUNDS WHEREIN THE METAL IS BONDED DIRECTLY TO AT LEAST TWO
    RING SYSTEMS (METALLOCENES) (17/00):Subject matter under the class
    definition drawn to organic compounds wherein at least one heavy metal atom
    is bonded directly to at least two carbocyclic ring systems or at least two
    ring systems containing carbon and at least one atom of nitrogen, oxygen,
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium as the only atoms in the ring or a
    combination of the above ring systems.

    (1)     Note.  A heavy metal atom is defined as a metal having a specific
    gravity greater then four.


CLS 987/3
TXT Group 8 metal atom (Fe, Co, Ni, Pt, Rh, Pd, Ru, Ir, Os) (17/02):Subject
    matter under subclass 2 wherein the heavy metal is a Group 8 metal atom of
    the Periodic System (Fe, Co, Ni, Pt, Rh, Pd, Ru, Ir, or Os).


CLS 987/4
TXT COBALT COMPOUNDS (15/06):
    Subject matter under the class definition drawn to carbon compounds wherein
    cobalt is bonded directly to a carbon atom or is indirectly bonded to a
    carbon atom only through non-ionic bonding.


CLS 987/5
TXT Devoid of any cobalt atom directly bonded to carbon (15/06B):Subject matter
    under subclass 4 wherein the compound is devoid of any carbon atom directly
    bonded to a cobalt atom.


CLS 987/6
TXT NICKEL COMPOUNDS (15/04):
    Subject matter under the class definition drawn to carbon compounds wherein
    nickel is bonded directly to a carbon atom or is indirectly bonded to a
    carbon atom only through non-ionic bonding.


CLS 987/7
TXT Devoid of any nickel atom directly bonded to carbon (15/04B):Subject matter
    under subclass 6 wherein the compound is devoid of any carbon atom directly
    bonded to the nickel atom.


CLS 987/8
TXT IRON COMPOUNDS (15/02; 15/03):
    Subject matter under the class definition drawn to carbon compounds wherein
    iron is bonded directly to a carbon atom or is indirectly bonded to a
    carbon atom only through non-ionic bonding.


CLS 987/9
TXT Devoid of any iron atom directly bonded to carbon (15/02B):
    Subject matter under subclass 8 wherein the compound is devoid of any
    carbon atom directly bonded to the iron atom.


CLS 987/10
TXT PLATINUM COMPOUNDS (15/00N7):
    Subject matter under the class definition drawn to carbon compounds wherein
    platinum is bonded directly to a carbon atom or is indirectly bonded to a
    carbon atom only through non-ionic bonding.


CLS 987/11
TXT Devoid of any platinum atom directly bonded to carbon (15/00N7B):Subject
    matter under subclass 10 wherein the compound is devoid of any carbon atom
    directly bonded to the platinum atom.


CLS 987/12
TXT RHODIUM COMPOUNDS (15/00N6):
    Subject matter under the class definition drawn to carbon compounds wherein
    rhodium is bonded directly to a carbon atom or is indirectly bonded to a
    carbon atom only through non-ionic bonding.


CLS 987/13
TXT Devoid of any rhodium atom directly bonded to carbon (15/00N6B):Subject
    matter under subclass 12 wherein the compound is devoid of any carbon atom
    directly bonded to the rhodium atom.


CLS 987/14
TXT PALLADIUM COMPOUNDS (15/00N5):
    Subject matter under the class definition drawn to carbon compounds wherein
    palladium is bonded directly to a carbon atom or is indirectly bonded to a
    carbon atom only through non-ionic bonding.


CLS 987/15
TXT Devoid of any palladium atom directly bonded to carbon (15/00N5B):Subject
    matter under subclass 14 wherein the compound is devoid of any carbon atom
    directly bonded to the palladium atom.


CLS 987/16
TXT RUTHENIUM COMPOUNDS (15/00N4; 15/00N4B):
    Subject matter under the class definition drawn to carbon compounds wherein
    ruthenium is bonded directly to a carbon atom or is indirectly bonded to a
    carbon atom only through non-ionic bonding.


CLS 987/17
TXT IRIDIUM COMPOUNDS (15/00N3; 15/00N3B):
    Subject matter under the class definition drawn to carbon compounds wherein
    iridium is bonded directly to a carbon atom or is indirectly bonded to a
    carbon atom only through non-ionic bonding.


CLS 987/18
TXT OSMIUM COMPOUNDS (15/00N2; 15/00N2B):
    Subject matter under the class definition drawn to carbon compounds wherein
    osmium is bonded directly to a carbon atom or is indirectly bonded to a
    carbon atom only through non-ionic bonding.


CLS 987/19
TXT COMPOUNDS CONTAINING ELEMENTS OF THE 7TH GROUP OF THE PERIODIC SYSTEM (Mn,
    Tc, Re) (13/00):Subject matter under the class definition drawn to organic
    compounds wherein a Group 7 metal of the Periodic System (Mn, Tc, or Re) is
    bonded directly to a carbon atom or is indirectly bonded to a carbon atom
    only through non-ionic bonding.


CLS 987/20
TXT Devoid of any group 7 atom directly bonded to carbon (13/00B):Subject
    matter under subclass 19 wherein the compound is devoid of any carbon atom
    directly bonded to the group 7 metal atom.


CLS 987/21
TXT COMPOUNDS CONTAINING ELEMENTS OF THE 6TH GROUP OF THE PERIODIC SYSTEM (Cr,
    Mo, W, Po) (11/00):Subject matter under the class definition drawn to
    organic compounds wherein a Group 6 metal of the Periodic System (Cr, Mo,
    W, or Po) is bonded either directly to a carbon atom or is indirectly
    bonded to a carbon atom only through non-ionic bonding.


CLS 987/22
TXT Devoid of any group 6 atom directly bonded to carbon  (11/00B):Subject
    matter under subclass 21 wherein the compound is devoid of any carbon atom
    directly bonded to the group 6 metal atom.


CLS 987/23
TXT BISMUTH COMPOUNDS (9/94):
    Subject matter under the class definition drawn to organic compounds
    wherein bismuth is bonded either directly to a carbon atom or is indirectly
    bonded to a carbon atom only through non-ionic bonding.


CLS 987/24
TXT ANTIMONY COMPOUNDS (9/90; 9/90B; 9/90C; 9/90D; 9/90E):
    Subject matter under the class definition drawn to organic compounds
    wherein antimony is bonded either directly to a carbon atom or is
    indirectly bonded to a carbon atom only through non-ionic bonding.


CLS 987/25
TXT Contains aryl group (9/92):
    Subject matter under subclass 24 wherein the compound contains at least one
    aryl ring.

    (1)     Note.  See GLOSSARY in subclass 30 for a definition of the term
    "aryl".


CLS 987/26
TXT ARSENIC COMPOUNDS (9/70C):
    Subject matter under the class definition drawn to organic compounds
    wherein arsenic is bonded either directly to a carbon atom or is indirectly
    bonded to a carbon atom only through non-ionic bonding.


CLS 987/27
TXT Arsenic compounds devoid of any arsenic as ring atom in a ring system
    (9/66; 9/68; 9/70; 9/70B; 9/72; 9/72B; 9/72C):Subject matter under subclass
    26 wherein a compound contains at least one atom of arsenic and wherein the
    arsenic present is not part of a ring system.


CLS 987/28
TXT Ring system containing at least one atom other than metal or carbon as ring
    atoms (9/80; 9/80B; 9/80C; 9/82; 9/84; 9/86; 9/88):Subject matter under
    subclass 27 wherein the arsenic compound contains a ring system having at
    least one atom other than metal or carbon as ring atoms.


CLS 987/29
TXT Contains aryl group (9/74; 9/74B; 9/74C; 9/76; 9/78):
    Subject matter under subclass 27 wherein the arsenic compound contains an
    aryl group.


CLS 987/30
TXT PHOSPHORUS CONTAINING COMPOUNDS (9/02; 9/06):
    Subject matter under the class definition drawn to organic compounds
    wherein phosphorus is bonded either directly to a carbon or is indirectly
    bonded to carbon only through non-ionic bonding.

    (1)     Note.  In those subclasses which do not recite a valence
    requirement, the P atom can be in any valence state.

    (2)     Note.  Many of the subclasses are presented in a structural formula
    recited format.  The requirement for this and the indented subclasses and
    in the absence to the contrary is that a single moiety must exist in the
    compound having the required structure.  It is permissible that the
    compound contain multiple moieties of the structure, although in most
    instances this does not occur or special provision has been made for those
    concepts by the creation of subclasses requiring that feature.

    (3)     Note.  The following rules apply to the use of structural formulas
    or symbols in the schedule or definitions.

    A structure such as:

    (a)     Hal-P-N or (Hal)-P-(N) indicates a direct bond between the Hal and
    the P atom and a direct bond between the N atom and the P atom.  Other
    atoms may be bonded to the P and N atoms.  Atoms represented as being
    adjacent atoms to each other by a hyphen indicates a direct bond between
    those atoms.  A hyphen may represent a single, double, or triple bond.

    (b)     P=N or P(=N) indicates a direct double bond between the P atom and
    the N atom.  Other atoms may be bonded to the P and N atoms.

    (c)     C=X or (C=X) represents a double bond between a carbon atom and a
    chalcogen atom and where presented in a structure indicates a direct bond
    between the C and the P atom, i.e., P-(C=X) indicates that a direct bond
    exists between the C atom of the (C=X) group and the P atom.

    (d)     A single atom between parentheses (any atom) indicates a direct,
    e.g., single, double, etc., bond between that atom and a phosphorus atom,
    e.g., P-(O) indicates that the bond between the P and the oxygen atom is
    direct and not through another atom, and can be a single or double bond,
    and P-(C) indicates a direct bond between P and C and the C can be of any
    valence, etc.

    (e)     A single atom between parentheses (=any atom) indicates a direct
    double bond between that atom and a phosphorus atom, i.e., P-(=O) indicates
    that the bond between the P atom and the oxygen atom is direct and must be
    a double bond.

    (f)     A moiety between parentheses indicates a direct bond between the
    moiety and the P.  If the moiety is (X-and any other atom) where S is
    chalcogen, the direct bond is always between the chalcogen and the P atom,
    unless there exists a double bond between the X atom and the other required
    atom, i.e., C=X in which case the direct bond is between the C and the P
    atom.

    (g)     Chemical moieties shown without parenthesis with the exception of
    moieties shown between quotation marks "--" (see (h) below) cannot be
    bonded directly to the required P atom.  Furthermore, they may or may not
    be directly bonded to the adjacent indicated atom.

    (h)     Chemical moieties shown between quotation marks  "--" indicates
    that an atom of the group, e.g., "ethylenic group," indicates that a carbon
    of the ethylenic group can be directly or indirectly bonded to a P atom and
    "carbocyclic ring" indicates that a carbon atom of the carbocyclic ring can
    be directly or indirectly bonded to the P atom, etc.

    (i)     The term "Q" indicates a moiety containing an atom other than C or
    H.  The particular atom that is other than C or H may or may not be bonded
    directly to the adjacent atom shown.  The bonding to the adjacent atom
    shown cannot be through a phosphorus atom and requires a bond other than
    ionic.

    (j)     X used throughout the schedule and definitions is limited to
    chalcogen, i.e., Oxygen (O), Sulfur (S), Selenium (Se), and Tellurium (Te).
     For ease of readability, in many instances, the chemical symbols for these
    elements have been used.

    (k)     Phosphorus and its chemical symbol (P), carbon and its chemical
    symbol (C), nitrogen and its chemical symbol (N), and hydrogen and its
    chemical symbol (H) have been used interchangeably throughout the schedule
    and definitions.

    (l)     Halogen or its abbreviated form (Hal) has been used throughout the
    schedule or definitions to indicate the presence of fluorine, chlorine,
    bromine, iodine, or astatine atoms.

    (m)     The term "Z" indicates an atom other than C or H and requires a
    direct non-ionic bond between the particular atom that qualifies as Z and
    the adjacent atom indicated.  The term is meant to exclude classification
    on the inorganic portion of an organic phosphorus containing compound.  See
    (q) below.

    (n)     Chemical moieties shown within parentheses and an asterisk (*).

    1.      (Aryl*) indicates that a carbon of the aryl ring is bonded to the
    adjacent indicated atom shown.

    2.      (Carbocyclic*) indicates a ring atom of the carbocyclic is directly
    bonded to the adjacent indicated atom shown.

    3.      (Ethylenic*) indicates a carbon of the unsaturated group (double or
    triple bond) is directly bonded to the adjacent atom shown.

    4.      (Cyano*) indicates a direct bond between the carbon of the cyano
    group and the adjacent atom shown.

    5.      (Acyl*) indicates a direct bond between the carbon of the acyl
    group and the adjacent group shown.

    (o)     A moiety interposed between quotation marks "--" indicates that it
    is alternative as to whether the named group is directly or indirectly
    bonded to the P atom.

    (p)     Bonded directly or directly bonded indicates a non-ionic bond
    between the two adjacent required atoms or moieties.

    (q)     Indirectly bonded or bonded indirectly indicates a nondirect,
    non-ionic, linkage between nonadjacent atoms or moieties.  The terms are
    used to exclude classification on the inorganic portion of a salt.  When a
    compound is composed of both an organic cation and an organic anion, then
    classification on both of the organic moieties is appropriate.

    (4)     Note.  GLOSSARY - THE FOLLOWING TERMS HAVE BEEN USED THROUGHOUT THE
    SCHEDULE:

    (a)     "Chalcogen" is limited to oxygen (O), sulfur (S), selenium (Se), or
    tellurium (Te).

    (b)     "Halogen" is limited to fluorine (F), chlorine (Cl), bromine (Br),
    iodine (I), and astatine (At).

    (c)     "Aryl" denotes an independent benzene ring or a benzene ring which
    is part of a fused or bridged ring system.

    (d)     "Cycloaliphatic" denotes a ring composed solely of a carbon atom
    and includes aryl.

    (e)     "Ethylenic" denotes a double bond or triple between adjacent
    acyclic carbon atoms.

    (f)     "Cyano" denotes a triple bond between an adjacent carbon and
    nitrogen atom.  As used in this class, cyano is always bonded directly to a
    phosphorus atom through the carbon atom.

    (5)     Note.  Organic acid salts, alcoholates, phenates, chelates, or
    mercaptides are classified on the basis of the organic portion of the
    compound that contains the phosphorus atom.  If both the anion and cation
    are organic, the entire molecule is classified.


CLS 987/31
TXT Compound contains a ring which is devoid of a metal atom as ring member and
    wherein the ring contains at least one atom other than C, N, O, S, P, Se,
    or Te as a ring atom; e.g., boron, etc. (9/6596):Subject matter under
    subclass 30 wherein a ring contains at least one atom other than C, N, O,
    S, P, Se, or Te as ring members.


CLS 987/32
TXT Compound contains at least one atom of silicon or boron (9/02G):Subject
    matter under subclass 30 wherein the phosphorus containing compound
    contains at least one atom of silicon or boron.


CLS 987/33
TXT Compound contains a ring which is devoid of a metal atom and contains at
    least one P atom as ring member (9/6564; 9/6564V; 9/6568; 9/6568B; 9/6568C;
    9/6568D; 9/6568E; 9/6568F):Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein a
    phosphorus atom is part of a ring.

    (1)     Note.  When phosphorus is a ring member, the traditional definition
    of "heterocyclic" atom, as used throughout the Class 532 series, is not
    met.  Furthermore, the definition of "heterocyclic," in the 532 series,
    requires the presence of a carbon atom as a ring member, this is not the
    situation in the EPC.

    (2)     Note.  Whenever a ring atom is used throughout this and its
    indented subclasses, it is meant to include only those additional atoms
    that are in the same ring as is phosphorus.  An example of this is subclass
    46, the oxygen ring atom must be in the same ring with the P atom.

    (3)     Note.  Extracyclic, as used in this and its indented subclasses, is
    meant to include atoms not in the same ring as phosphorus.  A non-ring atom
    would include a heterocyclic ring containing that atom in a ring devoid of
    phosphorus and other ring atoms required by the title of the subclass.


CLS 987/34
TXT Ring contains N and P only, or may include in addition to the required N
    and P, only C, S, or O (9/6581; 9/6584; 9/6584A):Subject matter under
    subclass 33 wherein a ring contains (a) N   and P atoms only or (b) N and P
    and additional atoms only of C, S, or O.

    (1)     Note.  All of the additional possible atoms need not be present.


CLS 987/35
TXT Ring contains at least two P atoms (9/6581D; 9/6587; 9/659; 9/6593):Subject
    matter under subclass 34 wherein the ring contains at least two phosphorus
    atoms.


CLS 987/36
TXT Ring contains S and P only, or may include in addition to the required S
    and P, only C or O (9/6578; 9/6578D):Subject matter under subclass 33
    wherein a ring contains (a) S and P atoms or (b) S and P and additional
    atoms of C or O only.

    (1)     Note.  All of the additional possible atoms need not be present.


CLS 987/37
TXT Ring contains O and P only, or may include in addition to the required O
    and P, only C (9/6571):Subject matter under subclass 33 wherein the ring
    contains only phosphorus and oxygen atoms or phosphorus and oxygen and
    additional atoms only of carbon.


CLS 987/38
TXT P in ring is directly bonded to at least two O atoms which are in separate
    rings (9/6571A8; 9/6574A8):Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein a
    phosphorus atom is bonded directly to at least two oxygen atoms and wherein
    the phosphorus atom is shared by two separate rings and the two oxygen
    atoms are in different ring systems or are shared by two ring systems.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound classified herein is:


CLS 987/39
TXT Ring contains a P(O) group as atoms within the ring and wherein all atoms
    bonded to the P atom within the ring, or extracyclic to the ring, are
    oxygen (9/6574; 9/6574A1):Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein the
    phosphorus in the ring is bonded solely to oxygen atoms in the ring and
    solely to oxygen atoms extracyclic to the ring.


CLS 987/40
TXT Two or more rings contain at least one P(O) group and wherein at least two
    P atoms in the two rings are bonded solely to O, or wherein the compound
    contains two P atoms in a single ring and all bonds of the P atoms are to O
    (includes spiro rings) (9/6574A6):Subject matter under subclass 39 wherein
    (a) the compound contains at least two phosphorus atoms in different rings
    and the two phosphorus atoms are bonded solely to oxygen or (b) wherein a
    single ring contains at least two phosphorus atoms and all bonds to at
    least two of the phosphorus atoms are solely to oxygen.


CLS 987/41
TXT P(O) group containing ring is part of a condensed or bridged carbocyclic
    ring system (9/6574A4):Subject matter under subclass 39 wherein the
    phosphorus containing ring shares at least two carbon atoms of a
    carbocyclic ring or taken together with two or more carbocyclic rings forms
    a ring therewith.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound appropriate for this subclass is:


CLS 987/42
TXT Contains P(O) group as atoms in the ring and wherein the P atom is directly
    bonded to N (9/6571B):Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein the ring
    phosphorus atom is bonded directly to at least one oxygen atom in the ring
    and is also bonded to at least one nitrogen atom which may be in the ring
    or extracyclic to the ring.


CLS 987/43
TXT Contains P and O as ring atoms and wherein the P atom is directly bonded to
    a C atom (9/6571L):Subject matter under subclass 37 wherein the ring
    phosphorus atom is bonded to a carbon which may be part of the ring or
    extracyclic to the ring.


CLS 987/44
TXT P atom bonded to C is also bonded directly to two O atoms which are in the
    same ring as P (9/6571L4):Subject matter under subclass 43 wherein the ring
    phosphorus atom is bonded directly to two ring oxygen atoms.


CLS 987/45
TXT P atom bonded to C is bonded to an O atom which is in the same ring as P
    (9/6571L2; 9/6571L6):Subject matter under subclass 43 wherein the ring
    phosphorus atom is bonded directly to a single ring oxygen atom.


CLS 987/46
TXT Contains P(O) group as ring atoms and wherein the P atom is directly bonded
    to extracyclic S (9/6571A; 9/6571A1):Subject matter under subclass 37
    wherein the ring phosphorus atom is bonded directly to a sulfur atom, the
    sulfur being extracyclic to the phosphorus containing ring.


CLS 987/47
TXT Two or more rings contain at least one P-O bond and wherein at least two P
    atoms in the two rings are bonded to S (includes spiro) (9/6571A6):Subject
    matter under subclass 46 wherein (a) the compound contains at least two
    phosphorus atoms in different rings and the two phosphorus atoms are bonded
    directly to ring oxygen and extracyclic sulfur or (b) wherein a single ring
    contains at least two phosphorus atoms and each of the phosphorus atoms is
    bonded directly to ring oxygen and extracyclic sulfur.


CLS 987/48
TXT P(O) containing ring is part of a condensed or bridged ring carbocyclic
    system (9/6571A4):Subject matter under subclass 46 wherein the phosphorus
    containing ring shares at least two carbon atoms of a carbocyclic ring or
    taken together with two or more carbocyclic rings forms a ring therewith.

    (1)     Note.  An example of a compound appropriate for this subclass is:


CLS 987/49
TXT Ring is devoid of a P or a metal atom and contains at least one hetero atom
    (O, S, N, Se, or Te) and may or may not contain C (9/547; 9/6524):Subject
    matter under subclass 30 wherein the phosphorus compound contains at least
    one hetero atom (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, nitrogen, selenium or tellurium) as
    a ring member, and wherein the ring may or may not contain carbon.

    (1)     Note.  Compounds herein are not required to have carbon atoms as
    ring atoms.  Compounds which are devoid of a carbon atom as a ring member
    are not in fact "heterocyclic compounds" as used throughout the Class 532
    series.  In those instances where the ring does contain at least one atom
    of carbon the term is identical in usage to the Class 532 series.  When the
    term "heterocyclic ring" is used in this class, it does in fact conform to
    the Class 532 definition.

    (2)     Note.  Included specifically in this subclass are rings containing
    four or more nitrogen atoms.

    (3)     Note.  The rule to be followed in those compounds containing
    multiple rings having an atom other than carbon as ring members is that
    classification is made on the ring nearest to the phosphorus atom.  It is
    desirable, however, if classifications are assigned for each of the rings.


CLS 987/50
TXT At least two rings, each ring containing at least one hetero atom, and
    wherein the rings are condensed directly to each other or condensed
    together through a common carbocyclic ring system (9/6561):Subject matter
    under subclass 49 wherein the P compound (a) contains two or more ring
    systems, each of which contains an atom other than C as a ring member, and
    wherein at least two of the rings share two or more of their ring atoms
    together, or (b) where a common carbocyclic ring or ring system shares two
    or more of its carbon atoms with each of the required rings.


CLS 987/51
TXT Six-membered ring containing exactly two N atoms as sole hetero atoms
    shares two of its adjacent c atoms with a five-membered ring containing
    exactly two N atoms as sole hetero shares; e.g., purine and analogs, etc.
    (9/6561E):Subject matter under subclass 50 wherein the P compound contains
    the following ring system.

    (1)     Note.  The degree of saturation between ring atoms is not pertinent
    for this subclass.


CLS 987/52
TXT Six-membered ring shares a N and C atom with a four-membered ring wherein
    the six-membered ring contains a C or hetero atom in position 5 and no
    other hetero atom, the four-membered ring contains the single N as hetero
    atom; e.g., cephalosporins and analogs, etc. (9/6561B):Subject matter under
    subclass 50 wherein the P compound contains the following ring system.

                                       R is C, N, O, S, Se, or Te

    (1)     Note.  The degree of saturation between ring atoms is not pertinent
    for this subclass.


CLS 987/53
TXT Five-membered ring shares a N and C atom with a four-membered ring wherein
    the five-membered ring contains a C or hetero atom in position 4 and no
    other hetero atom, the four-membered ring contains the single N as hetero
    atom; e.g., penicillins and analogs, etc. (9/6561A):Subject matter under
    subclass 50 wherein the P compound contains the following ring system.

                                             R is C, N, O, S, Se, or Te

    (1)     Note.  The degree of saturation between ring atoms is not pertinent
    for this subclass.


CLS 987/54
TXT At least two different rings containing hetero atoms or wherein, if the
    rings are the same, the substituents on at least two of the rings are
    different (9/6558; 9/6558B):Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein the P
    compound (a) contains at least two different ring systems, each of which
    contains at least one atom other than carbon, or (b) where a compound
    contains a plurality of identical rings, each of which contains at least
    one atom other than carbon and wherein the substituents on at least two of
    the identical ring systems are different.


CLS 987/55
TXT At least one of the rings is devoid of N as ring atom (9/6558C):Subject
    matter under subclass 54 wherein the phosphorus compound contains at least
    one heterocyclic ring which is devoid of a nitrogen atom as a ring member.


CLS 987/56
TXT Ring contains S only, or may include in addition to the required S, only C,
    Se, or Te (9/6553):Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein the phosphorus
    compound (a) contains at least one ring having only sulfur, per se, as a
    ring member or (b) contains a ring having at least one atom of sulfur and
    additional ring atoms of only carbon, selenium, or tellurium.


CLS 987/57
TXT Ring is condensed or bridged to a carbocyclic ring system (9/6553V):Subject
    matter under subclass 56 wherein a ring containing both sulfur and carbon
    atoms shares at least two of its carbon atoms with a ring system containing
    only carbon atoms.


CLS 987/58
TXT Ring contains O only, or may include in addition to the required O, only C,
    S, Se, or Te (9/655):Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein the
    phosphorus compound contains at least one ring which contains only oxygen
    and carbon atoms, or oxygen and carbon and additional atoms of only sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium.


CLS 987/59
TXT Three-membered ring containing one O and two C's (9/655J; 9/655J38):Subject
    matter under subclass 58 wherein the ring is three membered and contains a
    single oxygen and two carbon atoms.


CLS 987/60
TXT Ring is condensed or bridged to a carbocyclic ring system (9/655V):Subject
    matter under subclass 58 wherein the ring containing the oxygen atom shares
    at least two of its carbon atoms with a ring system containing only carbon
    atoms.


CLS 987/61
TXT Ring contains N and S only, or may include in addition to the required N
    and S, only C, O, Se, or Te (9/6536):Subject matter under subclass 49
    wherein the ring contains (a) only atoms of sulfur and nitrogen or (b) only
    atoms of sulfur, nitrogen, and carbon or (c) oxygen, selenium, or tellurium
    as the sole additional atoms in a ring of (a) or (b) above.


CLS 987/62
TXT Ring contains exactly six atoms (9/6544; 9/6547):
    Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein the ring containing nitrogen and
    sulfur atoms is composed of exactly six atoms.


CLS 987/63
TXT Ring contains exactly five atoms (9/6539):
    Subject matter under subclass 61 wherein the ring containing nitrogen and
    sulfur atoms is composed of exactly five atoms.


CLS 987/64
TXT Five-membered ring is condensed or bridged to a carbocyclic ring system
    (9/6541):Subject matter under subclass 63 wherein a ring containing the
    nitrogen, sulfur and carbon atoms shares at least two of its carbon atoms
    with a ring system containing only carbon atoms.


CLS 987/65
TXT Ring contains N and O only, or may include in addition to the required N
    and O, only C (9/6527; 9/653; 9/653V):Subject matter under subclass 49
    wherein the ring contains (a) only atoms of nitrogen and oxygen or (b) only
    atoms of nitrogen, oxygen, and carbon.


CLS 987/66
TXT Ring contains exactly six atoms (9/6533; 9/6533V):
    Subject matter under subclass 65 wherein the ring contains exactly six
    atoms.


CLS 987/67
TXT Exactly three N atoms as only hetero atoms in ring (9/6515):Subject matter
    under subclass 49 wherein a ring contains three nitrogen atoms as the only
    ring hetero atoms.


CLS 987/68
TXT Six-membered ring containing three N and three C atoms (9/6521; 9/6521E;
    9/6521G; 9/6521R):Subject matter under subclass 67 wherein the ring is six
    membered and contains three carbons and three nitrogen atoms.


CLS 987/69
TXT Six-membered ring is condensed or bridged to a carbocyclic ring system
    (9/6521V):Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein the six-membered ring
    shares at least two of its ring carbon atoms with a ring system containing
    only carbon atoms.


CLS 987/70
TXT C atom of ring is bonded directly to a P atom, or is bonded directly to a
    hetero atom other than N and the hetero atom is directly bonded to a P atom
    (9/6521K):Subject matter under subclass 68 wherein at least one of the
    carbon atoms of the six-membered ring is (a) bonded directly to an
    extracyclic phosphorus atom or (b) is bonded directly to an extracyclic
    hetero atom other than nitrogen, and which hetero atom is directly bonded
    to an extracyclic phosphorus atom.


CLS 987/71
TXT Five-membered ring containing three N and two C atoms (9/6518; 9/6518G;
    9/6518R):Subject matter under subclass 67 wherein the ring is five membered
    and contains two carbons and three nitrogen atoms.


CLS 987/72
TXT Five-membered ring is condensed or bridged to a carbocyclic ring system
    (9/6518V):Subject matter under subclass 71 wherein the five-membered ring
    shares at least two of its ring carbons with a ring system containing only
    carbon atoms.


CLS 987/73
TXT C atom of ring is bonded directly to a P atom or is bonded directly to a
    hetero atom other than N and which hetero atom is directly bonded to a P
    atom (9/6518K):Subject matter under subclass 71 wherein at least one of the
    carbon atoms of the five-membered ring is (a) bonded directly to an
    extracyclic phosphorus atom or (b) is bonded directly to an extracyclic
    hetero atom, other than nitrogen, and which hetero atom is directly bonded
    to an extracyclic phosphorus atom.


CLS 987/74
TXT N atom of ring is bonded directly to a P atom or is bonded indirectly to a
    P atom other than through a ring atom of the five-membered ring
    (9/6518E):Subject matter under subclass 71 wherein at least one of the
    nitrogen atoms of the five-membered ring is (a) bonded directly to an
    extracyclic phosphorus atom or (b) is bonded indirectly through any atom or
    atoms other than ring atoms of the five-membered ring to a phosphorus atom.


CLS 987/75
TXT Exactly two N's as only hetero atom in ring (9/645):
    Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein a ring contains only carbon and
    exactly two nitrogen atoms.


CLS 987/76
TXT Six-membered ring containing two N and four C atoms (9/6509; 9/6509B2;
    9/6509B2E; 9/6509B2G; 9/6509B2K; 9/6509B2R):Subject matter under subclass
    75 wherein the ring is six membered and contains four carbons and two
    nitrogen atoms.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are rings wherein the nitrogens are in 1 and
    2 ring positions.


CLS 987/77
TXT N in 1 and 3 ring positions (9/6512; 9/6512E; 9/6512G; 9/6512R):Subject
    matter under subclass 76 wherein the two nitrogen atoms in the six-membered
    ring are in 1 and 3 positions.


CLS 987/78
TXT Ring is condensed or bridged to a carbocyclic ring system (9/6512V):Subject
    matter under subclass 77 wherein the six-membered ring shares at least two
    of its ring carbon atoms with a ring system containing only carbon atoms.


CLS 987/79
TXT C atom of ring is directly bonded to a P atom (9/6512K; 9/6512K4):Subject
    matter under subclass 77 wherein at least one of the carbon atoms of the
    six-membered ring is bonded directly to an extracyclic phosphorus atom.


CLS 987/80
TXT C atom of ring is bonded directly to a hetero atom other than N and which
    hetero atom is bonded directly to a P atom (9/6512K2):Subject matter under
    subclass 77 wherein at least one of the carbon atoms of the six-membered
    ring is bonded directly to an extracyclic hetero atom other than nitrogen
    and which hetero atom is directly bonded to an extracyclic phosphorus atom.


CLS 987/81
TXT N in 1 and 4 ring positions (9/6509B4; 9/6509B4G; 9/6509B4K; 9/6509B4R;
    9/6509B4V):Subject matter under subclass 76 wherein the two nitrogen atoms
    in the six-membered ring are in 1 and 4 positions.


CLS 987/82
TXT N atom of ring is bonded directly to a P atom or is indirectly bonded to a
    P atom other than through a ring atom of the six-membered ring
    (9/6509B4E):Subject matter under subclass 81 wherein an extracyclic
    phosphorus atom is directly or indirectly bonded to a nitrogen atom of the
    ring.

    (1)     Note.  Indirectly as used in this subclass is meant to exclude
    compounds wherein a phosphorus atom is first bonded to a ring carbon,
    either directly or indirectly, and which ring carbon is eventually bonded
    to a nitrogen atom of the same ring.


CLS 987/83
TXT N in 1 and 2 ring positions and wherein the ring is condensed or bridged to
    a carbocyclic ring system (9/6509B2V):Subject matter under subclass 76
    wherein the two nitrogen atoms in the six-membered ring are in 1 and 2
    position and wherein the six-membered ring shares at least two of its ring
    carbon atoms with a ring system containing only carbon atoms.


CLS 987/84
TXT Five-membered ring containing two N's (9/6503; 9/6503B2; 9/6503B2G;
    9/6503B2K; 9/6503B2R):Subject matter under subclass 75 wherein the ring is
    five membered and contains three carbons and two nitrogen atoms.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are rings wherein the nitrogens are in 1 and
    2 ring positions.


CLS 987/85
TXT N in 1 and 3 ring positions (9/6506; 9/6506G; 9/6506K; 9/6506R):Subject
    matter under subclass 84 wherein the two nitrogen atoms in the
    five-membered ring are in 1 and 3 ring positions.


CLS 987/86
TXT Five-membered ring is condensed or bridged to a carbocyclic ring system
    (9/6506V):Subject matter under subclass 85 wherein the five-membered ring
    shares at least two of its ring carbon atoms with a ring system containing
    only carbon atoms.


CLS 987/87
TXT N atom of ring is bonded directly to a P atom or is indirectly bonded to a
    P atom other than through a ring atom of the five-membered ring
    (9/6506E):Subject matter under subclass 85 wherein an extracyclic
    phosphorus atom is directly or indirectly bonded to a nitrogen atom of the
    ring.

    (1)     Note.  Indirectly as used in this subclass is meant to exclude
    compounds wherein a phosphorus atom is first bonded to a ring carbon,
    either directly or indirectly, and which ring carbon is eventually bonded
    to a nitrogen atom of the same ring.


CLS 987/88
TXT N in 1 and 2 ring positions and wherein the ring is condensed or bridged to
    a carbocyclic ring system (9/6503B2V):Subject matter under subclass 84
    wherein the two nitrogen atoms in the five-membered ring are in 1 and 2
    positions and wherein the five-membered ring shares at least two of its
    ring carbons with a ring system containing only carbon atoms.


CLS 987/89
TXT At least one N in 1 and 2 ring positions is bonded directly or indirectly
    to a P atom (9/6503B2E):Subject matter under subclass 84 wherein the two
    nitrogen atoms in the five-membered ring are in 1 and 2 positions and
    wherein an extracyclic phosphorus atom is directly or indirectly bonded to
    a nitrogen atom of the ring.

    (1)     Note.  Indirectly as used in this subclass is meant to exclude
    compounds wherein a phosphorus atom is first bonded to a ring carbon,
    either directly or indirectly, and which ring carbon is eventually bonded
    to a nitrogen atom of the same ring.


CLS 987/90
TXT Single N as only hetero atom in ring (9/553; 9/568):
    Subject matter under subclass 49 wherein a ring contains carbon and a
    single nitrogen atom.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are those rings that contain three carbon
    atoms and a single nitrogen atom.


CLS 987/91
TXT Seven or more atoms in ring containing the single N atom (9/553A7):Subject
    matter under subclass 90 wherein a ring contains at least six carbon atoms
    and a single nitrogen atom.


CLS 987/92
TXT Six atoms in ring containing the single N atom (9/576):
    Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein a ring contains five carbon atoms
    and a single nitrogen atom.


CLS 987/93
TXT Acridine or hydrogenated acridine ring (9/64):
    Subject matter under subclass 92 wherein the ring system has the following
    basic structure, which may contain double bonds between ring members:


CLS 987/94
TXT Isoquinoline or hydrogenated isoquinoline ring (9/62):
    Subject matter under subclass 92 wherein the


            ring system has the following basic structure, which may contain
    double bonds between ring members:


CLS 987/95
TXT Quinoline or hydrogenated quinoline ring (9/60):
    Subject matter under subclass 92 wherein the ring system has the following
    basic structure, which may contain double bonds between ring members:


CLS 987/96
TXT Hydrogenated pyridine ring (9/59; 9/59G; 9/59K; 9/59K2; 9/59K4;
    9/59R):Subject matter under subclass 92 wherein the ring system has the
    following basic structure, and must contain less than three double bonds
    between ring members:

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    99,     for ring structures which contain three double bonds between ring
    members.


CLS 987/97
TXT Ring is condensed or bridged to a carbocyclic ring system (9/576V):Subject
    matter under subclass 96 wherein the six-membered ring shares at least two
    of its ring carbons with a ring system containing only carbon atoms.


CLS 987/98
TXT N of ring is bonded directly to a P atom or is indirectly bonded to a P
    atom other than through a ring atom of the hydrogenated pyridine ring
    (9/59E):Subject matter under subclass 96 wherein an extracyclic phosphorus
    atom is directly or indirectly bonded to the nitrogen atom of the ring.

    (1)     Note.  Indirectly as used in this subclass is meant to exclude
    compounds wherein a phosphorus atom is first bonded to a ring carbon,
    either directly or indirectly, and which ring carbon is eventually bonded
    to a nitrogen atom of the same ring.


CLS 987/99
TXT Pyridine ring (9/58; 9/58G; 9/58R):
    Subject matter under subclass 92 wherein the six-membered ring is pyridine.


CLS 987/100
TXT C atom of ring is bonded directly to a P atom (9/58K; 9/58K4):Subject
    matter under subclass 99 wherein the nitrogen atom of the pyridine ring is
    bonded directly to an extracyclic phosphorus atom.


CLS 987/101
TXT C atom of ring is bonded directly to a hetero atom other than N and which
    hetero atom is bonded directly to a P atom (9/58K2):Subject matter under
    subclass 99 wherein the nitrogen atom of the pyridine ring is bonded
    directly to an extracyclic hetero atom other than nitrogen and which hetero
    atom is directly bonded to an extracyclic phosphorus atom.


CLS 987/102
TXT N atom of ring is bonded directly to a P atom or indirectly to a P atom
    other than through a ring atom of the pyridine ring (9/58E):Subject matter
    under subclass 99 wherein an extracyclic phosphorus atom is directly or
    indirectly bonded to the nitrogen atom of the pyridine ring.

    (1)     Note.  Indirectly as used in this subclass is meant to exclude
    compounds wherein a phosphorus atom is first bonded to a carbon of the
    pyridine ring, either directly or indirectly, and which carbon is
    eventually bonded to the pyridine ring nitrogen atom.


CLS 987/103
TXT Five-membered ring containing a single N atom (9/572; 9/572G; 9/572K;
    9/572K2; 9/572K4; 9/572R):Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein a ring
    contains four carbon atoms and a single nitrogen atom.


CLS 987/104
TXT Ring is condensed or bridged to a carbocyclic ring system (9/572V):Subject
    matter under subclass 103 wherein the five-membered ring shares at least
    two of its carbon atoms with a ring system containing only carbon atoms.


CLS 987/105
TXT N atom of ring is bonded directly to a P atom or indirectly to a P atom
    other than through a ring atom of the five-membered ring (9/572E):Subject
    matter under subclass 103 wherein an extracyclic phosphorus atom is
    directly or indirectly bonded to the nitrogen atom of the ring.

    (1)     Note.  Indirectly as used in this subclass is meant to exclude
    compounds wherein a phosphorus atom is first bonded to a ring carbon,
    either directly or indirectly, and which ring carbon is eventually bonded
    to a nitrogen atom of the same ring.


CLS 987/106
TXT Four-membered ring containing a single N atom is condensed or bridged to a
    carbocyclic ring system (9/568V):Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein
    the ring which contains three carbons and a single nitrogen atom shares at
    least two of its ring carbons with a ring system containing only carbon
    atoms.


CLS 987/107
TXT N atom of four-membered ring containing a single N atom is bonded directly
    to a P atom or indirectly to a P atom other than through a ring atom of the
    four-membered ring (9/568E):Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein the
    nitrogen atom of a ring containing a single nitrogen atom and three carbons
    is bonded directly or indirectly to an extracyclic phosphorus atom.

    (1)     Note.  Indirectly as used in this subclass is meant to exclude
    compounds wherein a phosphorus atom is first bonded to a ring carbon,
    either directly or indirectly, and which ring carbon is eventually bonded
    to a nitrogen atom of the same ring.


CLS 987/108
TXT Three-membered ring containing a single N atom (9/564):
    Subject matter under subclass 90 wherein the phosphorus compound contains
    at least one three membered hetero ring containing a single nitrogen and
    two carbon atoms, e.g., ethyleneimine ring system, etc.


CLS 987/109
TXT Quaternary compounds containing the structure (C)a-P-(Z)b where a+b=4,
    a=1-3, b=1-3, and Z is an atom other than C or H (9/54K):Subject matter
    under subclass 30 wherein the P compound contains the structure:

                    (C)a-P-(Z)b

            where a+b=4, a=1-3, b=1-3, and Z is an atom other than C or H.


CLS 987/110
TXT Quaternary phosphonium compounds (C)a-P-(H)b where a+b=4, a=1-4, b=1-3
    (9/54; 9/54A1; 9/54A1+W; 9/54A1+W2):Subject matter under subclass 30
    wherein the P compound contains the structure:

                    (C)a-P-(H)b

            where a+b=4, a=1-3, b=1-3, i.e., phosphonium.


CLS 987/111
TXT Contains the structure aryl-(C)n-P where n is at least one (9/54A7):Subject
    matter under subclass 110 wherein the P compound contains the structure:

                    aryl-(C)n-P

            wherein n is at least one and the aryl group is bonded indirectly
    to the P atom through a chain of only C atoms.


CLS 987/112
TXT Contains two or more phosphonium P atoms (9/54A6):
    Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein the P compound contains two or
    more phosphonium P atoms.


CLS 987/113
TXT Contains the structure (aryl group*)-P where * indicates a direct bond
    between a carbon of the aryl ring and the P atom (9/54A4):Subject matter
    under subclass 110 wherein one of the C atoms of an aryl ring is directly
    bonded to the P atom.


CLS 987/114
TXT Contains the structure "carbocyclic ring"-P where "- -" indicates that a
    ring carbon of the carbocyclic ring may or may not be bonded directly to
    the P atom (9/54A3):Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein at least one
    of the C atoms of a ring composed solely of carbon atoms is bonded directly
    or indirectly to the P atom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS

    113,    for a compound wherein a carbon of an aryl ring is directly bonded
    to the P atom.


CLS 987/115
TXT Contains the structure "ethylenic group"-P where "- -" indicates that a
    carbon of the ethylenic group may or may not be bonded directly to the P
    atom (9/54A2):Subject matter under subclass 110 wherein at least one of the
    C atoms of an ethylenic group or is bonded indirectly or indirectly to a P
    atom.

    (1)     Note.  An ethylenic group is defined as a double or triple bond
    between adjacent acyclic carbon atoms.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass allows for those phosphorus compounds which
    may contain a single atom of phosphorus bonded directly to carbon and to
    another element distinct from carbon.  It also provides for phosphorus
    compounds wherein plural phosphorus atoms are present and one of the
    phosphorus atoms present is bonded directly to carbon while a different
    phosphorus atom is bonded to a non-carbon atom.


CLS 987/116
TXT Contains at least one (C)-P bond (9/28):
    Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein the P compound contains at least
    one carbon atom directly bonded to a phosphorus atom (C)-P.


CLS 987/117
TXT Pentavalent P compound containing a P(=N) bond and wherein the P atom is
    bonded directly to three carbon atoms (9/535D; 9/535D2):Subject matter
    under subclass 116 wherein the P compound contains a pentavalent P atom,
    which atom forms a P=N bond with nitrogen, and wherein the other three
    valences of the P atom are filled by bonds to three separate carbon atoms.


CLS 987/118
TXT Pentavalent P compound containing a P(=C) bond and wherein the P atom is
    not bonded directly to chalcogen (9/535B):Subject matter under subclass 116
    wherein the P compound contains a pentavalent P atom, which atom forms a
    P=C bond with carbon, with the proviso that none of the bonds of the
    pentavalent P can be directly to a chalcogen atom.


CLS 987/119
TXT Pentavalent P compound containing at least one bond to carbon and wherein
    the other four valences are bonded directly to four separate atoms, none of
    which are chalcogen (9/535):Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein the P
    compound contains a pentavalent P atom, which atom is bond to at least one
    carbon and wherein the other four available valences are filled by bonds to
    four separate atoms, all or some of which may be carbon, with the proviso
    that none of the bonds of the pentavalent P can be directly to a chalcogen
    atom.


CLS 987/120
TXT Pentavalent P compound having the structure (X=C*)-P(=X) or (cyano*)-P(=X)
    where X is chalcogen, * indicates a direct bond of the C of the C=X group
    or of the C of the cyano group directly to the P atom, and the other atoms
    bonded directly to the P atom are either carbon or hydrogen (9/53A9; 9/53P;
    9/53Y):Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein the P compound contains
    the structure (B)-P(=X) (C)(C); (B)-P(=X) (C)(H); (B)-P(=X) (H)(H) where B
    is the group X=C or N#C, the carbon atom of the B group is directly bonded
    to the P atom and X is chalcogen and N#C indicates a triple bond between
    the N and C atoms.


CLS 987/121
TXT Pentavalent P compound having the structure (C)-P(=X)(C or H) (C or H)
    where X is chalcogen (9/53):Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein the P
    compound contains the structure (C)-P(=X)(C or H)(C or H), X is chalcogen,
    and the carbon or hydrogen atoms are directly bonded to the P atom.


CLS 987/122
TXT At least one of the carbon atoms bonded to the P atom is not part of an
    aryl ring and is bonded directly to an aryl ring or is bonded to an aryl
    ring through a chain of acyclic carbon atoms (9/53A7):Subject matter under
    subclass 121 wherein at least one of the carbon atoms bonded to the P atom
    is directly bonded to a carbon atom of an aryl ring or is bonded to an aryl
    ring through an acyclic chain containing only carbon atoms.


CLS 987/123
TXT Compound having two or more (C)-P(=X) groups or at least one
    (X=)-P-(C)-P(=X) group (9/53A6):Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein
    the P compound contains two or more (C)-P(=X)( C or H) groups or at least
    one (C or H) (X=)-P-(C)-P-(=X) (C or H) group where X is chalcogen.

    (1)     Note.  The P compound can contain two or more separate required
    groups or two or more P atoms may share a common carbon atom, e.g., (C or
    H)-(X=)P-(=X)(C)(C or H).


CLS 987/124
TXT Compound contains a ring composed solely of carbon atoms or contains an
    ethylenic group (9/53A3; 9/53A4):Subject matter under subclass 121 wherein
    the P compound contains at least one ring containing only carbon atoms or a
    double or triple bond between adjacent carbon atoms.


CLS 987/125
TXT Compound contains a nitrogen or halogen atom or contains a chalcogen atom
    other than bonded to the P atom (9/53A1; 9/53A2):Subject matter under
    subclass 121 wherein the P compound contains at least one nitrogen atom, or
    at least one halogen atom, or at least one chalcogen atom which is other
    than the chalcogen atom bonded to the P atom.


CLS 987/126
TXT Trivalent compounds having the structure (Hal)-P-(C)(C or H), or
    (Hal)2-P(C), or pentavalent compounds having the structure (Hal)-P(=X)(C)(C
    or H) or (Hal)2-P(=X)(C) where X is chalcogen (9/52):Subject matter under
    subclass 116 wherein the P compound is trivalent and contains the structure
    (Hal)-P-(C)(C), (Hal)-P-(Hal)(C), or is pentavalent and contains the
    structure (Hal)-P(=X) (C) or (Hal)-P(=X) (Hal)(C), wherein X is chalcogen
    and Hal is a halogen atom.


CLS 987/127
TXT Trivalent P compound having the structure (C or H)(C)-P-P-(C)(C or H)
    (9/50P):Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein the P compound is
    trivalent and contains the structure (C or H)(C)-P-P(C)(C or H).


CLS 987/128
TXT Trivalent P compound containing a metal atom and having the structure
    (C)-P(C or H or Metal)(C or H or Metal) (9/50Y; 9/50Z; 9/50Z2; 9/50Z4;
    9/50Z6; 9/50Z8):Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein the trivalent the
    P compound contains at least one metal atom or metal compound as part of a
    complex or in chelated form, and wherein the structure of the compound is
    (C or H or Metal)(C)-P-(C or H or Metal).


CLS 987/129
TXT Trivalent P compound having the structure (C)-P-(C or H) (C or H)
    (9/50):Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein the P compound is
    trivalent and contains the structure C-P(C or H)(C or H).


CLS 987/130
TXT Contains the structure (X=C*)-P or (cyano*) where X is chalcogen, and where
    * indicates a direct bond of the C of the C=X group or of the C of the
    cyano group to the P atom (9/50A9):Subject matter under subclass 129
    wherein the P compound contains the structure (X=C)-P(C or H)(C or H) where
    X is a chalcogen atom or (N#C)-P(C or H)(C or H) and N#C indicates a triple
    bond between the N and C atoms.


CLS 987/131
TXT At least one of the carbon atoms bonded to the P is not part  of an aryl
    ring and is bonded directly to an aryl ring, or is bonded to an aryl ring
    through a chain of carbon atoms only (9/50A7):Subject matter under subclass
    129 wherein at least one of the carbon atoms directly bound to the P atom
    is not part of an aryl ring and is directly bonded to a carbon atom of an
    aryl ring, or is bonded to an aryl ring through a non-cyclic chain of
    carbon atoms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    133,    for a compound containing an aryl ring wherein the C atom directly
    bound to the P atom is bound to the aryl ring through a non-aryl
    carbocyclic ring system or wherein the C atom directly bound to the P atom
    is part of an aryl ring system.


CLS 987/132
TXT Compound has two or more (C)-P(C or H) (C or H) groups or at least one (C
    or H)-P-(C)-P-(C or H) group (9/50A6):Subject matter under subclass 129
    wherein the P compound contains two or more C-P(C)(C) groups.

    (1)     Note.  The P compound can contain two or more separate required
    groups or two or more P atoms may share a common carbon atom, e.g.,
    (C)(C)-P-C-P(C)(C), etc.


CLS 987/133
TXT Contains ring solely composed of carbon atoms or at least one ethylenic
    group (9/50A2; 9/50A3; 9/50A4):Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein
    the P compound contains at least one ring containing only carbon atoms or
    an acyclic group containing a double or triple bond between adjacent carbon
    atoms.


CLS 987/134
TXT Contains an atom other than C, P, or H (9/50A1):
    Subject matter under subclass 129 wherein the P compound contains at least
    one nitrogen atom or at least one halogen atom or at least one chalcogen
    atom or at least one metal atom.


CLS 987/135
TXT Trivalent P compound having the structure (C)-P-(N) or (C)-P-(Hal) (9/48F;
    9/48H):Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein the compound contains a
    trivalent P atom containing the structure (C)-P-(N) or (C)-P-(Hal)


CLS 987/136
TXT Trivalent P having the structure (C)2-P(XH or X-Salt) or pentavalent P
    having the structure (C)2-P(=X)(XH or X-Salt where X is chalcogen
    (9/46):Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein the compound contains a
    trivalent P containing the structure (C)2-P-(XH or X-Salt), or pentavalent
    P containing the structure (C)2-P(=X)(XH or X-Salt), wherein at least one X
    is a chalcogen atom single bonded to the P atom.


CLS 987/137
TXT Trivalent P having the structure (C)-P-(XH or X-Salt) (XH or X-Salt or H)
    or pentavalent P having the structure (C)-P(=X)(XH or X-Salt)(XH or X-Salt
    or H) where X is chalcogen (9/48):Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein
    the compound contains a trivalent or pentavalent P atom bonded in the
    following manner:

    (a)     (C)-P(=X)(XH or X-Salt)(C)

    (b)     (C)-P(=X)(XH or X-Salt)(H)

    (c)     (C)-P(=X)(XH or X-Salt)(X-Salt)

    (d)     (C)-P(XH or X-Salt)(C)

    (e)     (C)-P(XH or X-Salt)(H)

    (f)     (C)-P(XH or X-Salt)(X-Salt)


CLS 987/138
TXT Contains ring solely composed of carbon atoms or contains an ethylenic
    group (9/48A2; 9/48A3; 9/48A4):Subject matter under subclass 137 wherein
    the compound contains at least one ring containing only carbon atoms or a
    double or triple bond between adjacent acyclic carbon atoms.


CLS 987/139
TXT Contains two or more P atoms or contains an atom other than C, H, or the
    required chalcogen atom (9/48A1; 9/48A6):Subject matter under subclass 137
    wherein the compound contains (a) at least one nitrogen atom or (b) at
    least one halogen atom or (c) at least one chalcogen atom which is other
    than in a structure as required by this subclass or (d) at least one metal
    atom or (e) two or more P atoms.


CLS 987/140
TXT Pentavalent P having the structure (C)-P(=X) (X)(N) or (C)-P(=X)(N)2 where
    X is chalcogen (9/44; 9/44A; 9/44A1; 9/44A6; 9/44A9; 9/44B; 9/44B1;
    9/44B9):Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein the P atom is pentavalent
    and the compound contains the structure (C)-P(=X)(X)(N) or (C)-P(=X)(N)2
    and wherein X is chalcogen.


CLS 987/141
TXT Contains the structure (C)-P(=X) (X) (N) (N-*acyl), (C)-P(=X) (X)(N-Z) or
    (C)-P(=X) (X)(N-*cyano) where Z is an atom other than C or H and *
    indicates a direct bond to the adjacent N atom (9/44C9; 9/44C9+Q;  9/449+
    U):Subject matter under subclass 140 wherein the P compound contains the
    structure (C)-P(=X)(X)( N-acyl); (C)-P(=X)(X)(N-Z) or
    (C)-P)(=X)(X)(N-cyano) wherein Z is an atom other than C or H and X is
    chalcogen.

    (1)     Note.  The C of the acyl group, the atom other than C or H, and the
    C of the cyano radical are all bonded directly to the nitrogen atom.


CLS 987/142
TXT Contains the structure (C)-P(=X)(X)(N-Q) where Q is a radical containing an
    atom other than C or H, or contains a ring composed solely of carbon atoms
    or contains an ethylenic group (9/44C; 9/44C1; 9/44C2; 9/44C3; 9/44C4;
    9/44C7):Subject matter under subclass 140 wherein the P compound contains
    the structure (C)-P(=X) (X)(N-Q) wherein Q is a radical which contains (a)
    an atom other than C or H or (b) at least one ring containing only C atoms
    or (c) contains a double or triple bond between adjacent acyclic carbon
    atoms.

    (1)     Note.  The required Q group may be directly or indirectly bonded to
    the N atom.  The requirement for this subclass is that the Q group is
    bonded to the nitrogen atom which in turn is directly bonded to the P atom.
     It is not necessary for the atom that is other than C or H to be directly
    bonded to the N atom, although it can be.


CLS 987/143
TXT Compound contains a ring composed solely of carbon atoms or contains an
    ethylenic group (9/44A2; 9/44A3; 9/44A4; 9/44A7; 9/44B2; 9/44B3; 9/44B4;
    9/44B7):Subject matter under subclass 140 wherein the P compound contains
    at least one ring containing only carbon atoms or contains a double or
    triple bond between acyclic adjacent carbon atoms.


CLS 987/144
TXT Pentavalent P having the structure (C)-P(=X)(X)(Hal) or (C)-P(=X)(Hal)2
    wherein X is chalcogen (9/42):Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein the
    P atom is pentavalent and contains the structure (C)-P(=X)(Hal)2 or
    (C)-(C)-P(=X)(X)(Hal) wherein X is chalcogen.


CLS 987/145
TXT Contains the structure (C)-P(=X)(X*Y)(Hal) where Y is carbon or hydrogen
    and * indicates a direct bond to the adjacent X atom (9/42H):Subject matter
    under subclass 144 wherein the compound contains the structure
    (C)-P(=X)(XY)(Hal) wherein X is chalcogen and Y is H or C.


CLS 987/146
TXT Pentavalent P having the structure (C)-P(=X)(X)(X) where X is chalcogen
    (9/38):Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein the P atom is pentavalent
    and the compound contains the structure (C)-P(=X)(X)(X) wherein X is
    chalcogen.


CLS 987/147
TXT Pentavalent P having the structure (C)-P(=X)(X)(X-*C) and * indicates a
    direct bond to the adjacent X atom (9/40):Subject matter under subclass 146
    wherein the P compound contains the structure (C)-P(=X)(X)(X-C) and wherein
    X is a chalcogen atom.


CLS 987/148
TXT Contains the structure (C)-P (=X) (X) (X-*acyl), (C)-P(=X) (X-C) (X-*Z), or
    (C)-P (=X) (X) (X-*cyano) where Z is an atom other than C or H and *
    indicates a direct bond to the adjacent X atom (9/40C9; 9/40C9+Q;  9/40C9 +
    U):Subject matter under subclass 147 wherein the P compound contains the
    structure (C)-P(=X) (X) (X-acyl) (C)-P(=X) (X) (C-Z), or (C)-P(=X) (X)
    (X-cyano) wherein Z is an atom other than C or H.

    (1)     Note.  The C of the acyl group, the atom other than C or H, and the
    C of the cyano group are all directly bonded to the X (chalcogen atom).


CLS 987/149
TXT Contains the structure (C)-P(=X)(X)(X-aryl) (9/40C4):
    Subject matter under subclass 147 wherein the P compound contains the
    structure (C)-P(=X)(X)(X-aryl moiety) and wherein the C of the aryl group
    can be directly bonded to the X atom or can be indirectly bonded to the X
    atom through other atoms.


CLS 987/150
TXT Carbon of aryl ring is bonded directly to the X atom (9/40C7):Subject
    matter under subclass 149 wherein a C of the aryl ring is directly bonded
    to the X atom.


CLS 987/151
TXT Contains the structure (C)-P(=X)(X)(X-carbocyclic ring) (9/40C3):Subject
    matter under subclass 147 wherein the P compound contains the structure
    (C)-P(=X) (X)(X-carbon only in ring) and wherein a C of the ring can be
    directly bonded to the X atom or can be indirectly bonded to the X atom
    through other atoms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157,    wherein the compound contains a carbocyclic ring bonded indirectly
    or directly to the C atom of the C-P moiety.


CLS 987/152
TXT Contains the structure (C)-P(=X)(X)(X-ethylenic group) (9/40C2):Subject
    matter under subclass 147 wherein the P compound contains the structure
    (C)-P(=X) (X)(X-ethylenic moiety) wherein the C of the ethylenic group can
    be directly bonded to the X atom or can be indirectly bonded to the X atom
    through other atoms.

    (1)     Note.  An ethylenic group is defined as a double or triple bond
    between adjacent acyclic carbon atoms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    158,    wherein the compound contains an ethylenic group bonded directly or
    indirectly to the C atom of the C-P moiety.


CLS 987/153
TXT Contains the structure (X=C*)-P(=X)(X)(X-C) or  (cyano*)-P(=X)(X)(X-C)
    where * indicates a direct bond of the C of the C=X group or of the C atom
    of the cyano group directly to the P atom (9/40A9; 9/40A9+Q):Subject matter
    under subclass 147 wherein the P compound contains the structure (X=C)-P
    (=X) (X) (X-C) or (N#C)-P(=X) (X) (X-C) where X is a chalcogen atom and N#C
    indicates a triple bond between the N and C atoms.


CLS 987/154
TXT Contains the structure aryl-(C)n-P(=X)(X)(X-C) where n is at least one
    (9/40A7; 9/40A7+P):Subject matter under subclass 147 wherein the P compound
    contains the structure aryl-(C)n-P(=X)(X)(X-C) wherein n is at least one
    and the aryl group is bonded indirectly to the P group through a chain of
    only C atoms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    156,    wherein a carbon of the aryl ring is bonded directly to the P atom.

    157,    for an aryl group bonded indirectly to the C atom of the (C)-P
    moiety through a chain containing an atom of carbon or any other atom.


CLS 987/155
TXT Contains two or more (C)-P(=X)(X) (X-C) groups or at least one (C-X) (X)
    (X=)-P- (C)-P(=X) (X) (X-C) group (9/40A6;  9/40A6+J;  9/40A6+U):Subject
    matter under subclass 147 wherein the P compound contains two or more
    separate (C)-P(=X)(X)(X-C) groups or at least one
    (C-X)(X)(X=)-P-(C)-P(=X)(X)(X-C) group.


CLS 987/156
TXT Contains the structure (aryl*)-P(=X)(X)(X-C) * indicates a direct bond
    between a carbon of the aryl ring and the P atom (9/40A4):Subject matter
    under subclass 147 wherein the P compound contains the structure aryl-P(=X)
    (X)(X-C) wherein one of the C atoms of the aryl ring is bonded directly to
    the P atom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    157,    for an aryl containing moiety bonded indirectly to the carbon of
    the C-P group and wherein the indirect linkage to the C atom is not through
    the P atom.


CLS 987/157
TXT Contains the structure "carbocyclic ring" -P(=X)(X)(X-C) where "- -"
    indicates that a ring carbon of the carbocyclic ring may or may not be
    directly bonded to the P atom (9/40A3):Subject matter under subclass 147
    wherein the C atom bonded directly to the P atom is part of a ring composed
    solely of carbon atoms or is bonded directly or indirectly to a ring
    containing only carbon atoms, and wherein the indirect linkage to the C
    atom is not through the P atom.


CLS 987/158
TXT Contains the structure "ethylenic group" -P(=X)(X)(X-C) where "- -"
    indicates that a C of the ethylenic group may or may not be bonded directly
    to the P atom (9/40A2):Subject matter under subclass 147 wherein the C atom
    bonded directly to the P atom is part of an ethylenic group or is bonded
    indirectly or directly to an ethylenic group and wherein the indirect
    linkage is not through the P atom.

    (1)     Note.  An ethylenic group is defined as a double or triple bond
    between adjacent acyclic carbon atoms.


CLS 987/159
TXT Contains the structure (C)-P(=X)(X)(X-C-Q) where Q is a moiety containing
    an atom other than C or H (9/40C; 9/40C1):Subject matter under subclass 147
    wherein the P compound contains the structure (C)-P(=X) (X) (X-C-Q) and
    wherein the moiety Q contains an atom other than C or H.

    (1)     Note.  The atom which is other than C or H may or may not be
    directly bonded to the C atom of the P-(X-C) group and the linkage to the C
    atom is not through the P atom.

    (2)     Note.  See subclass 30 for rules pertaining to the classification
    of an inorganic salt.


CLS 987/160
TXT Contains the structure Q-(C)-P(=X)(X)(X-C) where Q is a moiety containing
    an atom other than C or H (9/40A; 9/40A1; 9/40A1+U9; 9/40B):Subject matter
    under subclass 147 wherein the P compound contains the structure
    (Q-C)-P(=X) (X)(X-C) and wherein Q contains an atom other than C or H.

    (1)     Note.  The atom which is other than C or H may or may not be
    directly bonded to the C atom of the (Q-C)-P group and the linkage to the C
    atom is not through the P atom.

    (2)     Note.  See subclass 30 for rules pertaining to the classification
    of an inorganic salt.


CLS 987/161
TXT Contains the structure (X=C*)-P(=X)(X)(X) or (cyano*)-P(=X)(X)(X) where *
    indicates a direct bond of the C of the C=X group or of the C atom of the
    cyano group to the P atom (9/38A9):Subject matter under subclass 146
    wherein the P compound   contains   the   structure   (X=C)-P (=X) (X)(X)
    or (N#C)-P(=X) (X)(X) where X is a chalcogen atom and N#C indicates a
    triple bond between the N and C atoms.


CLS 987/162
TXT Contains the structure aryl-(C)n-P(=X)(X)(X) where n is at least one
    (9/38A7):Subject matter under subclass 146 wherein the P compound contains
    the structure Aryl-(C)n-P(=X)(X)(X) wherein n is at least one and the aryl
    group is bonded indirectly to the P atom through a chain of only C atoms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    165,    wherein an aryl C is bonded directly to the P atom.

    166,    for an aryl group bonded indirectly to the C atom of the C-P moiety
    through a chain containing an atom other than C and wherein the linkage is
    other than through the P atom.


CLS 987/163
TXT Contains two or more P atoms (9/38B):
    Subject matter under subclass 146 wherein the P compound contains two or
    more P atoms.


CLS 987/164
TXT Two or more (C)-P(=)(X) (X)(X) or at least one   (X) (X) (X=)-P-(C)-P-(=X)
    (X) (X) group (9/38A6;  9/30A6+J;  9/38A6+U):Subject matter under subclass
    163 wherein the P compound contains two or more separate(C)-P(=X)(X)(X)
    groups or at least one (X)(X)(X=)P-(C)-P(=X)(X)(X) group.


CLS 987/165
TXT Contains the structure (aryl group*)-P-(=X) (X)(X) where * indicates a
    direct bond of one of the carbon atoms of the aryl group to the P atom
    (9/38A4):Subject matter under subclass 146 wherein the P compound contains
    the structure (Aryl)-P(=X) (X)(X) wherein one of the C atoms of the aryl
    ring is bonded directly to the P atom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    166,    for an aryl containing moiety indirectly bonded to the P atom.


CLS 987/166
TXT Contains the structure "carbocyclic ring" -P-(=X)(X)(X) where "--"
    indicates that a ring carbon of the carbocyclic ring may or may not be
    directly bonded to the P atom (9/38A3):Subject matter under subclass 146
    wherein the C atom bonded directly to the P atom is part of a ring composed
    solely of carbon atoms, or is bonded directly or indirectly to a ring
    containing only C atoms, and wherein the linkage to the C atom is not
    through the P atom.

    (1)     Note.  The ring composed solely of carbon atoms can be aryl, or any
    ring containing only carbon atoms.  In the instance where the ring is aryl
    a carbon of that ring cannot be directly bonded to the P atom.  See
    subclass 162 wherein the linkage of an aryl group to the P is solely
    through carbon.  When the ring is other than aryl a carbon of that ring may
    or may not be bonded directly to the P atom.


CLS 987/167
TXT Contains the structure "ethylenic group" -P(=X) (X) (X) where     "--"
    indicates that a carbon atom of the ethylenic group may or may not be
    directly bonded to the P atom (9/38A2):Subject matter under subclass 146
    wherein the C atom bonded directly to the P atom is part of an ethylenic
    group, or is bonded directly or indirectly to an ethylenic group and
    wherein the linkage is not through the P atom.

    (1)     Note.  An ethylenic group is defined as a double or triple bond
    between adjacent acyclic carbon atoms.


CLS 987/168
TXT Contains the structure Q-(C)-P(=X)(X)(X) where Q is a moiety containing an
    atom other than C or H (9/38A1; 9/38A1+U6; 9/38A1+U9):Subject matter under
    subclass 146 wherein the P compound contains the structure (Q-C)-P(=X) (X)
    (X) and wherein Q contains an atom other than C or H.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 30 for rules pertaining to the classification
    of an inorganic salt.


CLS 987/169
TXT Pentavalent P having the structure (C)2-P (=X)(N) where X is chalcogen
    (9/36):Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein the P atom is pentavalent
    and contains the structure (C)2-P(=X)(N).


CLS 987/170
TXT Pentavalent P having the structure (C)2-P (=X)(Hal) where X is chalcogen
    (9/34):Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein the P atom is pentavalent
    and contains the structure (C)2-P(=X)(Hal), where Hal is halogen.


CLS 987/171
TXT Pentavalent P having the structure (C)2-P (=X)(X-C) where X is chalcogen
    (9/32):Subject matter under subclass 116 wherein the P atom is pentavalent
    and contains the structure (C)-P(=X)(C)(X-C), wherein X is a chalcogen atom.


CLS 987/172
TXT Contains the structure (C)2-P(X)(X-*acyl), (C)2-P(=X)(X-*Z) or
    (C)2-P(=X)(X-*cyano) where Z is an atom other than C or H and * indicates a
    direct bond to the adjacent X atom (9/32C9):Subject matter under subclass
    171 wherein the P compound contains the structure (C) -P(=X)(C)(X-acyl),
    (C) -P(=X)(C)(X-Z) or (C)-P(=X)(C)(X-cyano) wherein Z is an atom other than
    C or H.

    (1)     Note.  The C of the acyl group, the atom other than C or H or the C
    atom of the cyano group are all directly bonded to the X (chalcogen atom).


CLS 987/173
TXT Contains the structure (C)2-P(=X)(X-carbocyclic ring) (9/32C3; 9/32C4;
    9/32C7):Subject matter under subclass 171 wherein the P compound contains
    the structure (C) -P(=X) (C)(X-carbon only in ring) and wherein a C of the
    ring can be directly bonded to the X atom or can be indirectly bonded to
    the X atom through other atoms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    177,    for a ring system attached to the P carbon atom of the atom through
    the carbon atom of the C-P moiety and wherein the indirect linkage to the C
    atom is not through the P atom.


CLS 987/174
TXT Contains the structure (C)2-P(=X)(X-ethylenic group)(9/32C2):Subject matter
    under subclass 171 wherein the P compound contains the structure (C) -P(=X)
    (C)(X-ethylenic moiety) wherein a C of the ethylenic group can be directly
    bonded to the X atom or can be indirectly bonded to the X atom through
    other atoms.

    (1)     Note.  An ethylenic group is defined as a double or triple bond
    between adjacent acyclic carbon atoms.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    178,    wherein the compound contains an ethylenic group bonded directly or
    indirectly to the C atom of the C-P moiety and wherein the indirect linkage
    to the C atom is not through the P atom.


CLS 987/175
TXT Contains the structure (X=C*)-P(=X)(C)(X-C) or (cyano*)-P-(=X)(C)(X-C)
    where * indicates a direct bond of the C of the C=X group or of the C atom
    of the cyano group to the P atom (9/32A9; 9/32A9+Q):Subject matter under
    subclass 171 wherein the P compound contains the structure (X=C) -P(=X)
    (C)(X-C) or (N#C) -P(=X) (C)(X-C) where X is a chalcogen atom and N#C
    indicates a triple bond between the N and C atoms.


CLS 987/176
TXT Contains two or more (C)-P (=X)(C) (X-C) groups or at least one (X-C)(C)
    (X=)P-(C)-P(=X)(C)(X-C) group (9/32A6):Subject matter under subclass 171
    wherein the P compound contains two or more (C)-P(=X) (C)(X-C) groups or at
    least one (X-C) (C) (X=)-P-(C)-P(=X)(C) (X-C) group.


CLS 987/177
TXT Contains the structure "carbocyclic ring" -P(=X) (C) (X-C) where "--"
    indicates that a ring carbon of the carbocyclic ring may or may not be
    directly bonded to the P atom (9/32A3; 9/32A4; 9/32A7):Subject matter under
    subclass 171 wherein a C atom bonded directly to the P atom is part of a
    ring system composed solely of carbon atoms or is bonded directly or
    indirectly to a ring containing only carbon atoms and wherein the indirect
    linkage to the C atom is not through the P atom.

    (1)     Note.  The ring composed solely of carbon atoms can be aryl or any
    ring system containing only carbon atoms.


CLS 987/178
TXT Contains the structure "ethylenic group" -P(=X)(C)(X-C) where "--"
    indicates that a carbon atom of the ethylenic group may or may not be
    bonded directly to the P atom (9/32A2):Subject matter under subclass 171
    wherein one of the C atoms bonded directly to the P atom is part of an
    ethylenic group or is bonded directly or indirectly to an ethylenic group
    and wherein the indirect linkage to the C atom is not through the P atom.

    (1)     Note.  An ethylenic group is defined as a double or triple bond
    between adjacent acyclic carbon atoms.


CLS 987/179
TXT Contains the structure (C)-P(=X)(C)(X-C-Q) where Q is a moiety containing
    an atom other than C or H (9/32C; 9/32C1):Subject matter under subclass 171
    wherein the P compound contains the structure (C) -P(=X) (C)(X-C-Q) wherein
    Q represents a moiety containing an atom other than C or H.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 30 for rules pertaining to the classification
    of an inorganic salt.


CLS 987/180
TXT Contains the structure Q-(C)-P(=X)(C)(X-C) where Q is a moiety containing
    an atom other than C or H (9/32A; 9/32A1):Subject matter under subclass 171
    wherein the P compound contains the structure (Q-C) P(=X)(C)(X-C) wherein Q
    represents a moiety containing an atom other than C or H.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 30 for rules pertaining to the classification
    of an inorganic salt.


CLS 987/181
TXT Pentavalent P having the structure (C)2-P(=X)(X-B) where X is chalcogen and
    B represents an atom other than C (9/30; 9/30B):Subject matter under
    subclass 116 wherein the P compound is pentavalent and contains the
    structure (C)-P(=X)(C)(X-B) wherein X is chalcogen and B represents an atom
    other than carbon and is directly bonded to the X atom.

    (1)     Note.  B as represented in most of the patents in this subclass is
    hydrogen (H).


CLS 987/182
TXT Contains the structure (X=C*)-P(=X)(C)(X-B) or (cyano*)-P(=X)(C)(X-B) where
    * indicates a bond of the C of the C=X group or of the C of the cyano group
    directly to the P atom (9/30A9):Subject matter under subclass 181 wherein
    the P compound contains the structure (X-C)-P(=X)(C)(X-B)
    or(N#C)-P(=X)(C)(X-B) where X is a chalcogen atom and N#C represents a
    triple bond between the N and C atoms.


CLS 987/183
TXT Contains two or more (C)-P(=X)(C)(X-B) groups or at least one (B-X) (C)
    (X=)-P-(C)-P-(=X)(C)(X-B) group (9/30A6):Subject matter under subclass 181
    wherein the P compound contains two or more (C)-P (=X)(C) (X-B) groups or
    at least one (B-X)(C)(X=) -P-(C)-P(=X)(C)(X-B) group.


CLS 987/184
TXT Contains the structure "carbocyclic ring" -P(=X)(C)(X-B) where "--"
    indicates that a ring carbon of the carbocyclic ring may or may not be
    directly bonded to the P atom (9/30A3; 9/30A4; 9/30A7):Subject matter under
    subclass 181 wherein a C atom bonded directly to the P atom is part of a
    ring system composed solely of carbon atoms or is bonded directly or
    indirectly to a ring containing only carbon atoms and wherein the indirect
    linkage to the C atom is not through the P atom.


CLS 987/185
TXT Contains the structure "ethylenic group" -P(=X)(C)(X-B) where "--"
    indicates that a carbon atom of the ethylenic group may or may not be
    directly bonded to the P atom (9/30A2):Subject matter under subclass 181
    wherein a C atom bonded directly to the P atom is part of an ethylenic
    group or is bonded directly or indirectly to an ethylenic group and wherein
    the indirect linkage to the C atom is not through the P atom.

    (1)     Note.  An ethylenic group is defined as a double or triple bond
    between adjacent acyclic carbon atoms.


CLS 987/186
TXT Contains a Q-(C)-P(=X) (C)(X-B) group wherein Q is a moiety containing an
    atom other than C or H (9/30A1;  9/30A1+U6):Subject matter under subclass
    181 wherein the P compound contains the structure Q-(C) -P(=X)(C) (X-B)
    wherein Q represents a moiety containing an atom other than C or H.

    (1)     Note.  See subclass 30 for rules pertaining to the classification
    of an organic salt.


CLS 987/187
TXT Phosphorus directly bonded to N, i.e., P(N) (9/22; 9/22A):
    Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein a phosphorus atom is directly
    bonded to at least one nitrogen atom.


CLS 987/188
TXT P(=N) group containing (9/06B; 9/06B2; 9/06B2D):
    Subject matter under subclass 187 wherein the phosphorus atom is directly
    bonded to at least one nitrogen atom by a double bond, i.e., P=N.


CLS 987/189
TXT (Hal)-P-(N) group containing (9/26):
    Subject matter under subclass 187 wherein the phosphorus atom directly
    bonded to at least one nitrogen atom is also directly bonded to at least
    one halogen atom, i.e., Hal-P=N.


CLS 987/190
TXT P(N)(N)(N) group containing (9/22C):
    Subject matter under subclass 187 wherein the phosphorus atom is directly
    bonded to exactly three nitrogen atoms, i.e., P(N) (N) (N).


CLS 987/191
TXT P-(N=C=X) where X is chalcogen or P(-N-N) (9/22D; 9/22E):
    Subject matter under subclass 187 wherein the compound contains at least
    one P-(N=C=X) group where N is directly bonded to the P atom and X is
    chalcogen or at least one P-(N-N) group where an N of the N-N group is
    directly bonded to the P atom.


CLS 987/192
TXT Contains the structure (N)-P-(X-*acyl), (N)-P-(X-*Z) or (N)-P-(X-*cyano)
    where Z is an atom other than C or H, X is a chalcogen atom, and *
    indicates a direct bond to the adjacent X atom (9/24A9; 9/24A9+M;
    9/24A9+Q; 9/24A9+U; 9/24A9+W):Subject matter under subclass 187 wherein the
    P compound contains the structure:


    (a)     (N)-P-(X-acyl), or

    (b)     (N)-P-(X-Z) where Z is an atom          other than C or H,   or

    (c)     (N)-P-X-(C#N)

            X is a chalcogen atom and is bonded directly to the P atom and
    wherein the C of the acyl group, the atom other than C or H, and the C of
    the cyano group are all directly bonded to the X atom, and N#C represents a
    triple bond between the C and N atoms.


CLS 987/193
TXT Contains the structure P-(N-*acyl), P-(N-*Z) or (N-*cyano) where Z is an
    atom other than C or H and * indicates a direct bond to the adjacent N atom
    (9/24C9; 9/24C9+M; 9/24C9+Q; 9/24C9+U; 9/24C9+W):Subject matter under
    subclass 187 wherein the phosphorus compound contains the structure:

    (a)     P-(N-acyl) where a carbon of the                        acyl group
    is directly bonded to the N     atom, or

    (b)     P-(N-Z) where Z is an atom other                than C or H and is
    directly bonded by              a covalent bond to the N atom, or

    (c)     P-(N-C#N) where the N atom is                   directly bonded to
    the P atom and                  C#N indicates a triple bond between     the
    C and N atoms.


CLS 987/194
TXT Contains the structure (N)-P-(X-C) wherein X is a chalcogen atom, i.e.,
    esteramides (9/24):Subject matter under subclass 187 wherein the phosphorus
    compound contains the structure (N)-P-(X-C) where at least one N atom and
    chalcogen atom are directly bonded to the P atom and a C atom is directly
    bonded to the X atom, X is chalcogen.


CLS 987/195
TXT (C-X)-P-(N-carbocyclic ring) (9/24C3; 9/24C4; 9/24C7):Subject
    matter under subclass 194 wherein the N atom which is directly bonded to
    the P atom is also bonded directly to a ring carbon of a carbocyclic ring
    or is indirectly bonded to a carbocyclic ring through other atoms and
    wherein the bonding is not through the X atom.


CLS 987/196
TXT (C-X)-P-(N-ethylenic group) (9/24C2):
    Subject matter under subclass 194 wherein the N atom which is directly
    bonded to the P atom is also bonded directly to a carbon of an ethylenic
    group or is indirectly bonded to an ethylenic group through other atoms and
    wherein the bonding is not through the X atom.


CLS 987/197
TXT Aryl ring-(X)-P-(N) (9/24A4):
    Subject matter under subclass 194 wherein the C atom which is directly
    bonded to the X atom is either a ring atom of an aryl ring or is indirectly
    bonded to a ring atom of an aryl group and wherein the bonding is not
    through the X atom.


CLS 987/198
TXT Aryl-(C)n-(X)-P-(N) wherein n is at least one (9/24A7):
    Subject matter under subclass 197 wherein the C atom is indirectly bonded
    to the aryl group through a chain consisting solely of one or more carbon
    atoms.


CLS 987/199
TXT Carbocyclic ring -(X)-P-(N) (9/24A3):
    Subject matter under subclass 194 wherein the C atom which is directly
    bonded to the X atom is either a ring atom of a carbocyclic ring or is
    indirectly bonded to a ring atom of a carbocyclic group and wherein the
    bonding is not through the X atom.


CLS 987/200
TXT Ethylenic group -(X)-P-(N) (9/24A2):
    Subject matter under subclass 194 wherein the C atom which is directly
    bonded to the X atom is either a carbon atom of an ethylenic group or is
    indirectly bonded to a carbon atom of an ethylenic group and wherein the
    bonding is not through the X atom.


CLS 987/201
TXT C-(X)-P-(N)-C-Q wherein Q contains an atom other than C or H (9/24C;
    9/24C1):Subject matter under subclass 194 wherein a C atom is directly
    bonded to the N atom and where said carbon is part of an organic moiety
    containing at least one atom other than carbon or hydrogen.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein would be compounds where the organic moiety
    contained a P atom.

    (2)     Note.  See subclass 30 for rules pertaining to the classification
    of an inorganic salt.


CLS 987/202
TXT Q-C-(X)-P-(N) or compound contains two or more P atoms and wherein Q
    contains an atom other than C or H (9/24A; 9/24A1; 9/24A6):Subject matter
    under subclass 194 wherein a C atom is directly bonded to the X atom and
    where said carbon is part of an organic moiety containing at least one atom
    other than oxygen or hydrogen.

    (1)     Note.  Included herein are compounds where the organic moiety
    contains a P atom.

    (2)     Note.  See subclass 30 for rules pertaining to the classification
    of an inorganic salt.


CLS 987/203
TXT Pentavalent P containing the structure (Hal)-P(X-C) wherein X is a
    chalcogen atom (9/14):Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein the P atom
    in the compound is pentavalent and where the compound has the structure
    (Hal)-P(X-C) where at least one halogen atom and at least one X atom (X is
    chalcogen) are directly bonded to the P atom and a carbon atom is directly
    bonded to the X atom.


CLS 987/204
TXT S, Se, or Te is bonded directly to the P atom (9/20; 9/20B2;
    9/20B4):Subject matter under subclass 203 wherein the X atom of the X-C
    group is sulfur, selenium, or tellurium.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    205,    where the X atom of the X-C group is oxygen.


CLS 987/205
TXT Containing the structure (Hal)-P-(O-ethylenic) or (Hal)-P-(O-aryl) (9/14B2;
    9/14B4):Subject matter under subclass 203 wherein the C atom is bonded
    directly to the oxygen atom (the carbon atom is either of an ethylenic
    group or an aryl group) or is indirectly bonded to a carbon atom of an
    ethylenic group or aryl group and wherein the indirect bonding is not
    through the oxygen atom.


CLS 987/206
TXT Trivalent P containing the structure (Hal)-P-(X-C) wherein X is a chalcogen
    atom (9/146; 9/206):Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein the P atom is
    trivalent and the compound has the structure (Hal)-P-(X-C) where at least
    one halogen atom and at least one X atom (X is chalcogen) are directly
    bonded to the P atom and a carbon atom is directly bonded to the X atom.


CLS 987/207
TXT Trivalent P containing the structure P-(X-C) wherein a S, Se, or Te atom is
    directly bonded to the P atom and wherein X is chalcogen (X may qualify as
    the required S, Se, or Te atom) (9/201; 9/201A1; 9/202; 9/203):Subject
    matter under subclass 30 wherein the P atom in the compound is trivalent
    and where the compound has any of the following structures:

            P-(S-C), P-(Se-C), P-(Te-C), S-P-(O-C), Se-P-(O-C), Te-P-(O-C)
    where (a) P is bonded directly to a sulfur, selenium, or tellurium atom and
    a carbon atom is bonded directly to the sulfur, selenium, or tellurium atom
    or (b) where an atom of sulfur, selenium, or tellurium is directly bonded
    to the P atom and a O-C group is also directly bonded to the P atom through
    the O atom and the carbon atom is directly bonded to the O atom.

    (1)     Note.  It is permissible for the S, Se, or Te atom to be double
    bonded to the P atom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    217,    for a compound devoid of a sulfur, selenium, or tellurium atom
    directly bonded to the P atom.


CLS 987/208
TXT Containing the structure P-(X-carbocyclic ring) (9/204; 9/205):Subject
    matter under subclass 207 wherein the C atom which is bonded directly to
    the oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium atom is either a ring atom of a
    carbocyclic ring or is indirectly bonded to a ring atom of a carbocyclic
    group and wherein the bonding is not through the oxygen, sulfur, selenium,
    or tellurium atom.


CLS 987/209
TXT Pentavalent P containing the structure P-(X-C) wherein a S, Se, or Te is
    directly bonded to the P atom and wherein X is chalcogen (X may qualify as
    the required S, Se, or Te atom) (9/16; 9/165; 9/165A1):Subject matter under
    subclass 30 wherein the P atom in the compound is pentavalent and where the
    compound has any of the following structures:  P-(S-C), P-(Se-C), P-(Te-C),
    S-P-(O-C), Se-P-(O-C), Te-P-(O-C) where (a) P is bonded directly to a
    sulfur, selenium, or tellurium atom and a carbon atom is bonded directly to
    the sulfur, selenium, or tellurium atom or (b) where an atom of sulfur,
    selenium, or tellurium atom is bonded directly to the P atom and a O-C
    group is also bonded directly to the P atom through the O atom and the
    carbon atom is directly bonded to the O atom.

    (1)     Note.  It is permissible for the S, Se, or Te atom to be double
    bonded to the P atom.

    SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:

    216,    when all of the carbon atoms are directly bonded to the chalcogen
    atoms which are bonded directly to P, the carbon atoms are substituted by
    only hydrogen or hydrogen and carbon atoms.


CLS 987/210
TXT Two or more P atoms (9/165A6; 9/165B):
    Subject matter under subclass 209 wherein the compound contains at least
    two phosphorus atoms.


CLS 987/211
TXT Containing the structure P-(X-*acyl), P-(X-*Z) or P-(X-*cyano) wherein Z is
    other than C, H, or a salt forming moiety and * indicates a direct bond to
    the adjacent X atom (9/165A9; 9/165A9+M; 9/165A9+Q; 9/165A9+U):Subject
    matter under subclass 209 wherein the P compound contains the structure:


    (a)     P-(X-acyl) or

    (b)     P-X-(C#N) X is a chalcogen atom                 and is bonded
    directly to the P atom          and wherein the C of the acyl group
                and the C of the cyano group are all                directly
    bonded to the X atom and                        C#N indicates a triple bond
    between         the C and N atoms.


CLS 987/212
TXT Containing the structure P-(X-aryl ring) (9/18):
    Subject matter under subclass 209 wherein the C atom which is bonded
    directly to the X atom (X is chalcogen) is either a carbon atom of an aryl
    group or is indirectly bonded to a carbon atom of an aryl group and wherein
    the indirect bonding is not through the X atom.


CLS 987/213
TXT Containing the structure P-(X)-[C]n-Aryl wherein n is at least one and the
    aryl ring is bonded to the X atom by a chain of only acyclic carbon atoms
    (9/165A7):Subject matter under subclass 212 wherein the aryl group is
    bonded to the X atom indirectly and the bonding is through a single acyclic
    carbon atom or through a chain solely composed of acyclic carbon atoms.


CLS 987/214
TXT Containing the structure P-(X-carbocyclic ring) (9/177):
    Subject matter under subclass 209 wherein the carbon atom which is directly
    bonded to the X atom is either a ring atom of a carbocyclic ring or is
    indirectly bonded to a carbocyclic ring through other atoms and wherein the
    indirect bonding is not through the X atom.


CLS 987/215
TXT Containing the structure P-(X-ethylenic group) (9/173):
    Subject matter under subclass 209 wherein the carbon atom which is directly
    bonded to the X atom is either a carbon of an ethylenic group or is
    directly bonded to an ethylenic group through other atoms and wherein the
    indirect bonding is not through the X atom.


CLS 987/216
TXT Containing the structure P-(X-unsubstituted alkyl) wherein all of the X
    atoms in the molecule which are single bonded to the P atom are bound
    directly to carbon radicals containing only carbon and hydrogen atoms
    (9/17):Subject matter under subclass 209 wherein all of the carbon atoms
    which are directly bonded to the X atoms (X is chalcogen) which are
    directly bonded to the P atom are either substituted solely by hydrogen
    atoms or are part of a moiety containing only carbon and hydrogen atoms.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass differs from all other subclasses under
    subclass 209 in that it is proper for those subclasses to have a single one
    of the required entities.  This subclass on the other hand requires that
    ALL of the groups be presented in the required format.


CLS 987/217
TXT P is trivalent and contains the structure P-(O-C) or  P-(O-Z) where Z is an
    atom other than H (9/141; 9/141A1):Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein
    the P is trivalent and contains the structure P-(O-C) or P-(O-Z) where P is
    bonded directly to the oxygen atom and a carbon atom is bonded directly to
    the oxygen atom or an atom other than hydrogen is directly bonded to the
    oxygen atom.


CLS 987/218
TXT Containing the structure P-(O-*acyl), P-(O-*Z) wherein Z is an atom other
    than C, H, or a salt former, or P-(O-*cyano) where * indicates a direct
    bond to the adjacent oxygen atom (9/141A9; 9/09A9+Q; 9/09A9+U):Subject
    matter under subclass 217 wherein the P compound contains the structure:


    (a)     P-(O-acyl), or

    (b)     P-(O-Z) where Z is an atom other                than C or H, or

    (c)     P-O-(C#N) the oxygen atom is                    bonded directly to
    the P atom and                  wherein the C of the acyl group, the
               atom other than C or H, and the C of                 the cyano
    group are all directly                          bonded to the oxygen atom
    and                             C#N indicates a triple bond between     the
    C and N atoms.


CLS 987/219
TXT Containing the structure P-(O-carbocyclic ring) (9/145):
    Subject matter under subclass 217 wherein the C atom which is bonded
    directly to the oxygen atom is either a ring atom of a carbocyclic ring or
    is indirectly bonded to a ring atom of a carbocyclic group and wherein the
    indirect bonding is not through the oxygen atom.


CLS 987/220
TXT Ring is other than aryl (9/144):
    Subject matter under subclass 219 wherein the carbocyclic ring is other
    than aryl.


CLS 987/221
TXT Contains the structure P-(O)-[C]n-aryl wherein n is at least one and the
    aryl ring is bonded to the O atom through a chain of only carbon atoms
    (9/141A7):Subject matter under subclass 219 wherein an aryl group is bonded
    to the oxygen atom indirectly and the indirect bonding is through a single
    acyclic carbon atom or through a chain solely composed of acyclic carbon
    atoms.


CLS 987/222
TXT Containing the structure P-(O-ethylenic group) (9/143):
    Subject matter under subclass 217 wherein the carbon atom which is bonded
    directly to the oxygen atom is a carbon atom of an ethylenic group or is
    indirectly bonded to a carbon atom of an ethylenic group and wherein the
    indirect bonding is not through the oxygen atom.


CLS 987/223
TXT Containing the structure P-(O-unsubstituted alkyl) wherein all of the O
    atoms in the molecule which are single bonded to the P atom are bound
    directly to carbon radicals containing only carbon and hydrogen atoms
    (9/142):Subject matter under subclass 217 wherein all of the carbon atoms
    which are directly bonded to the oxygen atoms which are directly bonded to
    the P atom are either substituted solely by hydrogen atoms or are part of a
    moiety containing only carbon and hydrogen atoms.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass differs from all other subclasses under 217 in
    that it is proper for those subclasses to have a single one of the required
    entities.  This subclass on the other hand requires that ALL of the groups
    be presented in the required format.


CLS 987/224
TXT P is pentavalent and contains the structure P-(O-C) or  P-(O-Z) where Z
    indicates an atom other than H (9/09; 9/09A1):Subject matter under subclass
    30 wherein the P is pentavalent and contains the structure P-(O-C) or
    P-(O-Z) where Z is an atom other than H where P is bonded directly to the
    oxygen atom and a carbon atom is bonded directly to the oxygen atom, or an
    atom other than hydrogen is directly bonded to the oxygen atom.


CLS 987/225
TXT Containing the structure P-(O-*acyl), P-(O-*Z) wherein Z is an atom other
    than C or H, or P-(O-*cyano) where * indicates a direct bond to the
    adjacent oxygen atom (9/09A9; 9/09A9+Q; 9/09A9+U):Subject matter under
    subclass 224 wherein the P compound contains the structure:

    (a)     P-(O-acyl), or

    (b)     P-(O-Z) where Z is an atom other                than C or H, or

    (c)     P-O-(C#N) the oxygen atom is                    bonded directly to
    the P atom and                  wherein the C of the acyl group, the
               atom other than C or H, and the C of                 the cyano
    group are all directly                          bonded to the oxygen atom
    and                             C#N indicates a triple bond between     the
    C and N atoms.


CLS 987/226
TXT Contains two or more P atoms (9/09B):
    Subject matter under subclass 224 wherein the compound contains at least
    two phosphorus atoms.


CLS 987/227
TXT Containing the structure P-(O) -C-[K] -C-(O)-P wherein K is an organic
    residue (9/09A6):Subject matter under subclass 226 wherein the compound
    containing at least two phosphorus atoms has the structure P-(O-C)-organic
    residue -(C-O)-P.


CLS 987/228
TXT Containing the structure P-(O-carbocyclic ring) (9/12):
    Subject matter under subclass 224 wherein the C atom which is bonded
    directly to the oxygen atom is either a ring atom of a carbocyclic ring or
    is indirectly bonded to a ring atom of a carbocyclic group and wherein the
    indirect bonding is not through the oxygen atom.


CLS 987/229
TXT Ring is other than aryl (9/117):
    Subject matter under subclass 228 wherein the carbocyclic ring is other
    than aryl.


CLS 987/230
TXT Contains the structure P-(O)-[C]n-aryl wherein n is at least one and the
    aryl ring is bonded to the O atom through a chain of only carbon atoms
    (9/09A7):Subject matter under subclass 228 wherein an aryl group is bonded
    to the oxygen atom indirectly and the bonding is through a single acyclic
    carbon atom or through a chain solely composed of acyclic carbon atoms.


CLS 987/231
TXT Containing the structure P-(O-ethylenic group) (9/113):
    Subject matter under subclass 224 wherein the carbon atom which is bonded
    to the oxygen atom is a carbon atom of an ethylenic group or is indirectly
    bonded to a carbon atom of an ethylenic group and wherein the indirect
    bonding is not through the oxygen atom.


CLS 987/232
TXT Containing the structure P-(O-unsubstituted alkyl) wherein all of the O
    atoms in the molecule which are single bonded to the P atom are bound
    directly to carbon radicals containing only carbon and hydrogen atoms
    (9/11):Subject matter under subclass 224 wherein all of the carbon atoms
    which are directly bonded to the oxygen atoms which are directly bonded to
    the P atom are either substituted solely by hydrogen atoms or are part of a
    moiety containing only carbon and hydrogen atoms.

    (1)     Note.  This subclass differs from all other subclasses under
    subclass 224 in that it is proper for those subclasses to have a single one
    of the required entities.  This subclass on the other hand requires that
    ALL of the groups be presented in the required format.


CLS 987/233
TXT Alcohol moiety of ester contains at least three hydroxyl functions or
    derivatives thereof and wherein the oxygen atoms of the derivative can be
    attributed to the hydroxyl functions; e.g., phosphatides, lecithin, etc.
    (9/10):Subject matter under subclass 224 wherein the C atom bonded directly
    to the oxygen atom is part of an organic moiety containing three or more
    hydroxyl groups or derivative groups thereof, e.g., phosphatides, lecithin,
    etc.


CLS 987/234
TXT Reaction products of at least one compound containing both P and S atoms
    with a hydrocarbon or the reaction product of a P and a S reactant with a
    hydrocarbon (reactant P and S can be in elemental or compound form)
    (9/04):Subject matter under subclass 30 wherein the product is the result
    of (a) reacting sulfur in elemental form or compound form with phosphorus
    in elemental or compound form and with a hydrocarbon reactant or (b)
    reacting a compound containing both sulfur and phosphorus atoms with a
    hydrocarbon reactant.

    (1)     Note.  In (a) above, it is not necessary that all reactants be
    present at the same time.  It is permissible to first react the hydrocarbon
    with either a phosphorus reactant and then in a subsequent step to react
    the product of that reaction with a sulfur containing reactant.
    Conversely, it is permissible to first react the hydrocarbon with a sulfur
    containing reactant and in a subsequent step react that product with a
    phosphorus containing reactant.

    (2)     Note.  The products of this subclass are generally of unknown
    structure.  If the product structure is known and is of a type provided
    higher in this class, then classification in that higher subclass is proper.


CLS 987/300
TXT COMPOUND CONTAINS BOTH A PHOSPHORUS AND A METAL ATOM (9/02A):Subject matter
    under the class definition wherein a compound contains both phosphorus and
    a metal atom.


CLS 987/301
TXT Compound contains at least one atom of Ti, Zr, Hf, V, Nb, Ta, Cr, Mo, W,
    Mn, Tc, or Re (9/02E):Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein the metal
    compound contains at least one atom of Ti, Zr, Hf, V, Nb, Ta, Cr, Mo, W,
    Mn, Tc, or Re.


CLS 987/302
TXT Compound contains at least one atom of Al, Ga, In, Tl, Ge, Sn, or Pb
    (9/02D):Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein the metal compound
    contains at least one atom of Al, Ga, In, Tl, Ge, Sn, or Pb.


CLS 987/303
TXT Compound contains at least one atom of Cu, Zn, Ag, Cd, Au, or Hg
    (9/02C):Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein the metal compound
    contains at least one atom of Cu, Zn, Ag, Cd, Au, or Hg.


CLS 987/304
TXT Compound contains at least one atom of Fe, Co, Ni, Ru, Rh, Pd, Os, Ir, or
    Pt (9/02B):Subject matter under subclass 300 wherein the metal compound
    contains at least one atom of Fe, Co, Ni, Ru, Rh, Pd, Os, Ir, or Pt.


CLS 987/350
TXT PHOSPHORUS CONTAINING AT LEAST ONE NITROGEN ATOM AS SOLE HETERO ATOM
    (9/65):Subject matter under the class definition wherein a ring contains
    only carbon and nitrogen atoms.


CLS 987/351
TXT Ring contains at least four nitrogen atoms (9/65D; 9/65D1; 9/65D2; 9/65D3;
    9/65D3B):Subject matter under subclass 350 wherein the ring contains at
    least four nitrogen atoms.


CLS 987/352
TXT Ring contains three nitrogen atoms (9/65C):
    Subject matter under subclass 350 wherein the ring contains three nitrogen
    atoms.


CLS 987/353
TXT Six-membered ring contains the three N atoms (9/65C6; 9/65C6E; 9/65C6G;
    9/65C6K; 9/65C6Q; 9/65C6R; 9/65C6V):Subject matter under subclass 352
    wherein the ring is six membered.


CLS 987/354
TXT Five-membered ring contains the three N atoms (9/65C5; 9/65C5E; 9/65C5G;
    9/65C5K; 9/65C5R; 9/65C5V):Subject matter under subclass 352 wherein the
    ring is five membered.


CLS 987/355
TXT Ring contains two nitrogen atoms (9/65B):
    Subject matter under subclass 350 wherein the ring contains two nitrogen
    atoms.


CLS 987/356
TXT Six-membered ring (9/65B6):
    Subject matter under subclass 355 wherein the ring is six membered.


CLS 987/357
TXT N in 1 and 4 positions (9/65B64; 9/65B64E; 9/65B64K; 9/65B4V):Subject
    matter under subclass 356 wherein the nitrogen atoms in the ring are in 1
    and 4 positions.


CLS 987/358
TXT N in 1 and 3 positions (9/65B63; 9/65B63E; 9/65B63G; 9/65B63J; 9/65B63K;
    9/65B63K2; 9/65B63K4; 9/65B63M; 9/65B63R; 9/65B63V):Subject matter under
    subclass 356 wherein the nitrogen atoms in the ring are in 1 and 3
    positions.


CLS 987/359
TXT N in 1 and 2 positions (9/65B62; 9/65B62E; 9/65B62J; 9/65B62K; 9/65B62M;
    9/65B62V):Subject matter under subclass 356 wherein the nitrogen atoms in
    the ring are in 1 and 2 positions.


CLS 987/360
TXT Five-membered ring (9/65B5):
    Subject matter under subclass 355 wherein the ring is five membered.


CLS 987/361
TXT N in 1 and 3 positions (9/65B53; 9/65B53E; 9/65B53G; 9/65B53J; 9/65B53K;
    9/65B53M; 9/65B53R; 9/65B53V):Subject matter under subclass 360 wherein the
    nitrogen atoms in the ring are in 1 and 3 positions.


CLS 987/362
TXT N in 1 and 2 positions (9/65B52; 9/65B52E; 9/65B52J; 9/65B52K;
    9/65B52M):Subject matter under subclass 360 wherein the nitrogen atoms in
    the ring are in 1 and 2 positions.


CLS 987/363
TXT Ring contains a single N atom (9/65A):
    Subject matter under subclass 350 wherein the compound contains a single
    nitrogen atom.


CLS 987/364
TXT (O=)C-N-C(=O) group where C-N-C is part of the ring
    (9/65A9):Subject matter under subclass 363 wherein the compound contains a
    (O=)C-N-C(=O) and wherein the C-N-C group are ring atoms.


CLS 987/365
TXT Ring contains at least seven ring atoms (9/65A7):
    Subject matter under subclass 363 wherein the compound contains a ring
    having at least seven atoms.


CLS 987/366
TXT Six-membered ring (9/65A6; 9/65A6E; 9/65A6G; 9/65A6J; 9/65A6K; 9/65A6K2;
    9/65A6K4; 9/65A6M; 9/65A6R; 9/65A6V):Subject matter under subclass 363
    wherein the compound contains a six-membered ring.


CLS 987/367
TXT Five-membered ring (9/65A5; 9/65A5E; 9/65A5G; 9/65A5J; 9/65A5K; 9/65A5K2;
    9/65A5K4; 9/65A5M; 9/65A5R; 9/65A5V):Subject matter under subclass 363
    wherein the compound contains a five-membered ring.


CLS 987/368
TXT Four-membered ring (9/65A4; 9/65A4E; 9/65A4V):
    Subject matter under subclass 363 wherein the compound contains a
    four-membered ring.


